PTS Pali to English Dictionary

This version of the PTS Dictionary is (ultimately) derived from the digitized on-line version which is based on the 1921 Rhys Davids and Stede edition.

It was extracted from Digital Pali Reader by Ven. Nandiya, and some additional corrections and improvements have been made. Even a cursory glance will reveal that many errors remain. For example, the greek roots, almost unreadable even in the paper edition, are ascii-garbage. Some characters have been incorrectly digitized, but this is not common. If in doubt, check the paper edition.

A

A-1

the prep. ā shortened before double cons., as akkosati (ā + kruś), akkhāti (ā + khyā), abbahati (ā + bṛh) -Best to be classed here is the a- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of ā- (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single consonant instead of double). Thus anantaka (for ā-nantaka = nantaka ) Vv.807; amajjapa (for ā-majjapa = majjapa ) Ja vi.328; amāpaya (for āmāpaya = māpaya ) Ja vi.518; apassato (= passantassa) Ja vi.552.

A-2

(an- before vowels) neg. part. prefixed to (1 nouns and adjectives; (2) verbal forms, used like (1) whether part., ger., grd. or inf.; (3) finite verbal forms In compn. with words having originally two initial cons. the latter reappear in their assimilated form (e.g. appaṭicchavin). In meaning it equals na-, nir- and vi-. Often we find it opp. to sa-. Verbal negatives which occur in specific verb. function will be enumd. separately, while examples of neg. form. of (1) & (2) are given under their positive form unless the neg. involves a distinctly new concept, or if its form is likely to lead to confusion or misunderstanding ■ Concerning the combining & contrasting (orig. neg.); -a-(ā) in redupl. formations like bhavā-bhava see ā4.

Vedic a-, an-; Idg. *n̊, gradation form to *ne (see na2); Gr. ἀ, ἀν-; Lat. *en-, in-; Goth. Ohg. & Ags. un-; Oir. an-, in-

A-3

the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in pret., aor. & cond.; tenses; often omitted in ordinary prose. See forms under each verb; cp. also ajja Identical with this a- is the a- which functions as base of some pron. forms like ato, attha, asu etc. (q.v.).

Vedic a-; Idg. *e (loc. of pron. stem, cp. ayaṃ; orig. a deictic adv. with specific reference to the past, cp Sk sma); Gr. -; also in Gr. ἐκεϊ, Lat. equidem, enim.

A-4

the sound a (a-kāra ) Ja vi.328, Ja vi.552; Vv-a 279, Vv-a 307, Vv-a 311.

Aṃsa1

(a) the shoulder AN v.110; Snp 609. aṃse karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder Ja i.9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. ˚āsa in koṭṭhāsa and expln of aṃsa as koṭṭhāsa at DN-a i.312, also v.l. mettāsa for mettaṃsa at Iti 22) ■ atīt’aṃse in former times, formerly DN ii.224 Thig 314. mettaṃsa sharing friendship (with) AN iv.151 = Iti 22 = Ja iv.71 (in which connection Mil 402 reads ahiṃsā ) ■ Disjunctive ekena aṃsena… ekena aṃsena on the one hand (side)… on the other, partly… partly AN i.61. From this: ekaṃsa (adj.) on the one hand (only) i.e. incomplete (opp. ubhayaṃsa ) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp dvidhā ): see ekaṃsapaccaṃsena according to each one’s share AN iii.38. puṭaṃsena with a knapsack for provisions DN i.117; AN ii.183; cp. DN-a i.288, with v.l. puṭosena at both passages.

-kūṭa “shoulder prominence”, the shoulder Vin iii.127; Dhp-a iii.214; Dhp-a iv.136; Vv-a 121vaṭṭaka a shoulder strap (mostly combd with kāyabandhana; vv.ll. ˚vaddhaka ˚bandhaka) Vin i.204 (T. ˚bandhaka); ii.114 (ddh); iv.170 (ddh); Vv 3340 (T. ˚bandhana, C. v.l. ˚vaṭṭaka); Dhp-a iii.452.

Vedic aṃsa; cp. Gr. ̓ ̈ωμος, Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm. us

Aṃsa2

point, corner, edge; freg. in combn with numerals, e.g. catur˚; four-cornered, chaḷ˚, aṭṭh˚ soḷas˚; etc. (q.v.) all at Dhs 617 (cp. Dhs-a 317). In connection with a Vimāna: āyat˚; with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 8415; as part of a carriage-pole Vv 642 (= kubbara-phale patiṭṭhitā heṭṭhima-aṃsā Vv-a 265).

see next

Aṃsi

(f.) a corner, edge (= aṃsa2 Vv 782 (= aṃsa-bhāga Vv-a 303).

cp. Vedic aśri, aśra, aśani; Gr. α ̓́κρος pointed, α ̓́κρις, also ὀςύς sharp: Lat. ācer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lat. Wtb. under ācer

Aṃsu

a thread Vin iii.224. -mālin, sun Sāsv 1.

cp. Sk. aṃśu (Halāyudha) a ray of light

Akaṭa

(adj.) not made, not artificial, natural; ˚yūsa natural juice Vin i.206.

a + kaṭa

Akampiyatta

(nt.) the condition of not being shaken, stableness Mil 354.

abstr. fr. akampiya, grd. of a + kampati

Akalu

(cp. agalu ) an ointment Ja iv.440 (akaluñ candanañ ca, v.l. BB aggaluṃ; C. expls as kālākaluñ ca rattacandanañ ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment); vi.144 (˚candana-vilitta; v.l. BB aggalu˚; ); Mil 338 (˚tagara-tālīsaka-lohita-candana ).

Akāca

(adj.) pure, flawless, clear DN ii.244; Snp 476; Ja v.203.

a + kāca

Akācin

(adj.) = akāca Vv 601. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkācin (= Sk. arka-arcin shining as the sun), but Vv-a 253 expls by niddosa, and there is no v.l. to warrant a misreading.

Akāsiya

(adj. -n.) “not from the Kāsī-country” (?); official name of certain tax-gatherers in the king’s service Ja vi.212 (akāsiya-saṅkhātā rāja-purisā C.).

a + kāsika?

Akiccakāra

(adj.) 1. not doing one’s duty, doing what ought not to be done AN ii.67; Dhp 292; Mil 66; DN-a i.296.

2. ineffective (of medicine) Mil 151.

a + kicca + kāra

Akiriya

(adj.) not practical, unwise, foolish Ja iii.530 (˚rūpa = akattabba-rūpa C.); Mil 250.

a + kiriya

Akilāsu

(adj.) not lazy, diligent, active, untiring SN i.47; SN v.162; Ja i.109; Mil 382.

a + kilāsu

Akissava

at SN i.149 is probably faulty reading for akiñcana.

Akutobhaya

(adj.) see ku˚.

Akuppa

(adj.) not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast safe Vin i.11 (akuppā me ceto-vimutti) = SN ii.239; Vin ii.69; Vin iv.214; DN iii.273; MN i.205, MN i.298; SN ii.171; AN iii.119, AN iii.198; Mil 361.

a + kuppa, grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya Mvu iii.200

Akuppatā

(f.) “state of not being shaken”, surety, safety; Ep. of Nibbāna Thag 364.

abstr. fr. last

Akka

Name of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow-wort MN i.429 (˚assa jiyā bowstrings made from that plant).

-nāla a kind of dress material Vin i.306 (vv.ll. agga & akkha˚).; -vāṭa a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin ii.154 (cp. akkha-vāṭa).

cp. Sk. arka

Akkanta

stepped upon, mounted on AN i.8; Ja i.71; Mil 152; Dhp-a i.200.

pp. of akkamati

Akkandati

to lament, wail, cry SN iv.206.

ā + kandati, krand

Akkamana

(nt.) going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to Ja i.62.

cp. BSk. ākramaṇa Jtm 3158

Akkamati

to tread upon, to approach, attack Ja i.7, Ja i.279; Thag-a 9 ■ to rise Vin iii.38 ■ ger akkamma Cp iii.72 ■ pp. akkanta (q.v.).

ā + kamati, kram

Akkuṭṭha

(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) being reviled, scolded, railed at Snp 366 (= dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto Snp-a 364); Ja vi.187.

2. (nt.) reviling, scolding, swearing at; in combn akkuṭṭha-vandita Snp 702 (= akkosa-vandana Snp-a 492) Thig 388 (expln Thag-a 256 as above).

pp. of akkosati

Akkula

(adj.) confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened Ud 5 (akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika) See ākula.

= ākula

Akkosa

shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Snp 623; Mil 8 (+ paribhāsa ); Snp-a 492 Thag-a 256; Pv-a 243; Dhp-a ii.61.

-vatthu always as dasa a˚-vatthūni 10 bases of abuse 10 expressions of cursing Ja i.191; Snp-a 364, Snp-a 467; Dhp-a i.212; Dhp-a iv.2.

ā + kruś = kruñc, see kuñca & koñca2; to sound, root kr̥, see note on gala

Akkosaka

(adj.) one who abuses, scolds or reviles, + paribhāsaka AN ii.58; AN iii.252; AN iv.156; AN v.317; Pv-a 251.

from last

Akkosati

to scold, swear at, abuse, revile Ja i.191; Ja ii.416; Ja iii.27; Dhp-a i.211; Dhp-a ii.44. Often combd with paribhāsati, e.g. Vin ii.296; Dhp-a iv.2; Pv-a 10 ■ aor. akkocchi Dhp 3; Ja iii.212 (= akkosi Dhp-a i.43. Der. wrongly fr. krudh by Kacc. vi.417 cp. Franke, Einh. Pāli-gramm. 37, and Geiger, P. Gr. § 164) ■ pp. akkuṭṭha (q.v.).

to krus see akkosa

Akkha1

the axle of a wheel DN ii.96; SN v.6; AN i.112; Ja i.109, Ja i.192; Ja v.155 (akkhassa phalakaṃ yathā; C.: suvaṇṇaphalakaṃ viya, i.e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle); Mil 27 (+ īsā + cakka), 277 (atibhārena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati: the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy); Pv-a 277 -akkhaṃ abbhañjati to lubricate the axle SN iv.177; Mil 367.

-chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle SN i.57; Mil 67. -bhagga with a broken axle Ja v.433 -bhañjana the breaking of the axle Dhp-a i.375; Pv-a 277.

Vedic akṣa; Av. aša; Gr. α ̓́ςων α ̔́μαςα ohariot with one axle); Lat. axis; Ohg. etc. ahsa, E. axle, to root of Lat. ago, Sk. aj

Akkha2

a die DN i.6 (but expld at DN-a i.86 as ball-game: guḷakīḷa ); SN i.149 = AN v.171 = Snp 659 (appamatto ayaṃ kali yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo ); Ja i.379 (kūṭ˚; a false player, sharper, cheat) anakkha one who is not a gambler Ja v.116 (C.: ajūtakara ). Cp. also accha3.

-dassa (cp. Sk. akṣadarśaka) one who looks at (i.e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin iii.47; Mil 114, Mil 327, Mil 343 (dhamma-nagare). -dhutta one who has the vice of gambling DN ii.348; DN iii.183; MN iii.170; Snp 106 (+ itthidhutta & surādhutta).; -vāṭa fence round an arena for wrestling Ja iv.81. (? read akka-).

Vedic akṣa, prob. to akṣi & Lat. oculus, “that which has eyes” i.e. a die; cp. also Lat. ālea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)

Akkha3

(adj.) (-˚) having eyes, with eyes Pv-a 39 (BB. rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on assumukha ). Prob. akkhaṇa is connected with akkha.

to akkhi

Akkhaka

the collar-bone Vin iv.213 (adhakkhakaṃ ); y.216.

akkha1 + ka

Akkhaṇa

wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune. There are 9 enumd at DN iii.263; the usual set consists of 8; thus DN iii.287; Vv-a 193; Sdhp 4 sq. See also khaṇa.

-vedhin (adj. n.) a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i.e. without losing time, expld as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaṇa = vijju). In var. combns; mostly as durepātin a. AN i.284 (+ mahato kāyassa padāletā ) ii.170 sq. (id.), 202; iv.423, 425; Ja ii.91 (expld as either avirādhita-vedhī or akkhaṇaṃ vuccati vijju: one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning) iii.322; iv.494 (C. explns aviraddha-vedhin vijju-ālokena vijjhana-samattha p. 497). In other combn at Ja i.58 (akkhaṇavedhin + vālavedhin); v.129 (the 4 kinds of archers: a., vālavedhin, saddavedhin & saravedhin).

In BSk. we find akṣuṇṇavedha (a Sanskritised Pāli form cp. Mathurā kṣuṇa = Sk. kṣaṇa) at Divy 58, Divy 100, Divy 442 (always with dūrevedha), where MSS. however read akṣuṇa˚; also at Lal 178. See Divy Index, where trsln is given as “an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark” (Schiefner gives “Streifschuss”).

Note. The explanations are not satisfactory. We should expect either an etym. bearing on the meaning “hitting the centre of the target” (i.e. its “eye”) (cp. E. bull’s eye), in which case a direct relation to akkha = akkhi eye would not seem improbable (cp. formation ikkhana or an etym. like “hitting without mishap”, in which case the expression would be derived directly from ak khaṇa (see prec.) with the omission of the neg. an-akkhaṇa in the meaning of “lightning” (Ja-a ii.91) is not supported by literary evidence.

a + khaṇa, BSk. akṣaṇa Avs i.291 = Avs i.332

Akkhata

(adj.) unhurt, without fault Mvu 19, Mvu 56 (C. niddosa ) ■ acc. akkhataṃ (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 8452 (paccāgamuṃ Pāṭaliputtaṃ akkhataṃ ) & Pv iv.111 (nessāmi taṃ Pāṭaliputtaṃ akkhataṃ ); see Vv-a 351; Pv-a 272.;

pp. of a + kṣan, cp. parikkhata1

Akkhaya

(adj.) not decaying, in akkhayapaṭibhāna, of unfailing skill in exposition Mil 3, Mil 21.

a + khaya, kṣi

Akkhara

(adj.) constant, durable, lasting DN iii.86. As tt. for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning (DN i.88) it is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is expld by sikkhā (DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 477) pl. nt. akkharāni sounds, tones, words. citt’akkhara of a discourse (suttanta ) having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) AN i.72 = AN iii.107 = SN ii.267. Akkharāni are the sauce, flavour (vyañjana of poetry SN i.38. To know the context of the a˚ the words of the texts, is characteristic of an Arahant Dhp 352 (C. is ambiguous Dhp-a iv.70). Later: akkharaṃ a syllable or sound Pv-a 280 (called sadda in next line) akkharāni an inscription Ja ii.90; Ja iv.7 (likhitāni written), 489; vi.390, 407. In Grammar: a letter Kacc. 1.

-cintaka a grammarian or versifier Kp-a 17; Snp-a 16 Snp-a 23, Snp-a 321. cp. 466; Pv-a 120. -pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology DN i.88 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca Snp-a 447 = DN-a i.247 = AN iii.223 = Snp p.105. -piṇḍa “word-ball”, i.e. sequence of words or sounds Dhp-a iv.70 (= akkharānaṃ sannipāto Dhp 352).

Vedic akṣara

Akkharikā

(f.) a game (recognising syllables written in the air or on one’s back). DN i.7; Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180. So expld at DN-a i.86. It may be translated “letter game”; but all Indian letters of that date were syllables.

Akkhāta

(adj.) announced, proclaimed, told, shown AN i.34 (dur˚; ); ii.195; iv.285, 322; v.265 283; Snp 172, Snp 276, Snp 595, Snp 718.

pp. of akkhāti

Akkhātar

one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story-teller SN i.11, SN i.191; SN iii.66; Snp 167.

Akkhāti

to declare, announce, tell Snp 87 Snp 172; imper. akkhāhi Snp 988, Snp 1085; aor. akkhāsi Snp 251, Snp 504, Snp 1131 (= ācikkhi etc. Nd ii.465); fut. akkhissati Pv iv.163; cond. akkhissaṃ Snp 997; Ja vi.523 ■ Pass akkhāyati to be proclaimed, in phrase aggaṃ a. to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Mil 118 Mil 182 (also in BSk. agram ākhyāyate Mvu iii.390); ger akkheyya to be pronounced SN i.11; Iti 53 ■ pp. akkhāta (q.v.) ■ Intensive or Frequentative is ācikkhati.

ā + khyā, Idg. *sequ; cp. Sk. ākhyāti, Lat. inquam, Gr. ἐννέπω, Goth. saihvan, Ger. sehen etc. See also akkhi & cakkhu

Akkhāna

(nt.) telling stories, recitation; tale, legend DN i.6 (= DN-a i.84: Bhārata-Rāmāyanādi ); iii.183; MN i.503; MN iii.167; Sdhp. 237 ■ preaching, teaching Nd i.91 (dhamm˚; ). The 5th Veda Ja v.450. (vedam akkhānapañcamaṃ; C: itihāsapañcamaṃ vedacatukkaṃ ) ■ The spelling ākhyāna also occurs (q.v.).

Sk. ākhyāna

Akkhāyika

(adj.) relating, narrating Ja iii.535; lokakkhāyikā kathā talk about nature-lore DN i.8; Mil 316.

Akkhāyin

(adj.) telling, relating, announcing SN ii.35; SN iii.7; Ja iii.105.

Akkhi

(nt.) the eye MN i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhīhi ); Snp 197, Snp 608; Ja i.223, Ja i.279; Ja v.77; Ja vi.336; Pv ii.926 (akkhīni paggharanti: shed tears, cp. Pv-a 123); Vv-a 65 (˚īni bhamanti, my eyes swim) cp. akkhīni me dhūmāyanti Dhp-a i.475; Dhp-a ii.26; Dhp-a iii.196 (˚īni ummīletvā opening the eyes); Sdhp 103, Sdhp 380 ■ In combn with sa- as sacchi & sakkhi; (q.v.). As adj. (-˚) akkha3 (q.v.).

-añjana eye ointment, collyrium Dhp-a iii.354. -kūpa the socket of the eye Ja iv.407. -gaṇḍa eye-protuberance, i.e. eye-brow (?) Ja vi.504 (for pamukha T.). -gūtha secretion from the eye Pv-a 198. -gūthaka id. Snp 197 (= dvīhi akkhicchiddehi apanīta-ttaca-maṃsasadiso a˚-gūthako Snp-a 248). -chidda the eye-hole Snp-a 248. -dala the eye-lid DN-a i.194; Thag-a 259; Dhs-a 378. -pāta “fall of the eye” i.e. a look, in mand˚ of soft looks (adj.) Pv-a 57. -pūra an eye-full, in akkhipūraṃ assuṃ (assu?) an eye full of tears Ja vi.191. -mala dirt from the eye Pv iii.53 (˚gūtha C.). -roga eye disease Dhp-a i.9.

to *oks, an enlarged form of *oqu, cp. Sk. īkṣate, kṣaṇa, pratīka, anīka; Gr. ο ̓́σσε, ω ̓́ψ (*Κύκλωψ), ὀφχαλμός, πρόσωπον; Lat. oculus, Ags. ēowan (= E eye wind-ow); Goth. augō. See also cakkhu & cp. akkha;2 ikkhaṇika

Akkhika1

(-˚) (adj.) having eyes, with eyes Thag 960 (añjan˚; with eyes anointed); Dhp-a iv.98 (aḍḍh˚; with half an eye, i.e. stealthily); Sdhp 286 (tamb˚; red-eyed) -an˚; having no eyes Dhp-a i.11.

Akkhika2

(nt.) the mesh of a net Ja i.208. -hāraka one who takes up a mesh (?) MN i.383 (corresp with aṇḍahāraka ).

cp. Sk. akṣa

Akkhitta1

see khitta.

Akkhitta2

(adj.) hit, struck, thrown Ja iii.255 (= ākaḍḍhita C.).

BSk ākṣipta Divy 363, pp. of ā + kṣip

Akkhin

(adj.) = akkhika Ja iii.190 (mand˚; softeyed); Vv 323 (tamb˚; red-eyed); Dhp-a i.11.

Akkhobbha

(adj.) not to be shaken, imperturbable Mil 21.

a + kṣubh, see khobha

Akkhobhana

(adj) = akkhobbha Ja v.322 (= khobhetun na sakkhā C.).

Akkhohiṇī

(f.) one of the highest numerals (1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers) Ja v.319; Ja vi.395.

= akkhobhiṇī

Akhaṇḍaphulla

see khaṇḍa.

Akhāta

(adj.) not dug: see khāta.

Akhetta

barren-soil: see khetta ■ In cpd. ˚ññu the neg. belongs to the whole: not knowing a good field (for alms) Ja iv.371.

Agati

see gati ■ ˚gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing DN iii.228 (4: chanda˚ dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚; ); AN ii.18 sq., Ja iv.402; Ja v.98, Ja v.510; Pv-a 161.

Agada

medicine, drug, counterpoison Ja i.80 (˚harīṭaka ); Mil 121, Mil 302, Mil 319, Mil 334; DN-a i.67; Dhp-a i.215; Pv-a 198 (= osadhaṃ ).

Vedic agada; a + gada

Agaru

(adj.) (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru “if it does not inconvenience you, if you don’t mind” (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av. SN i.94, SN i.229; SN ii.90) Vin i.25; Vin iv.17, DN i.51; Dhp-a i.39 ■ (b) disrespectful, irreverent (against gen.) DN i.89; Snp p.51.

cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu

Agalu

fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum Vv 537 (aggalu = Vv-a 237 agalugandha ); Vv-a 158 (+ candana ). Cp. also Avs i.24 and akalu.

cp. Sk. aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebr. ahālīm (aloe), also in Gr. ἀλόη & ἀγάλλοξον

Agāra

(nt.).

1. house or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opp. to anagāra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant). See anagāriyā ■ Thus freq. in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder (or layman, cp gihin ), with that of a religious wanderer (pabbajita) viz. (a.) kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati “to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of the home into the homeless state” DN i.60 etc. cp. Nd ii.172ii. See also SN i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaṃ nikkhanta ); MN ii.55 (agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā); Snp 274, Snp 805 (˚ṃ āvasati), and with pabbajita DN i.89, DN i.115, DN i.202, DN i.230; Pv ii.1317 ■ (b.) of a “rājā cakkavattin” compared with a “sambuddha”: sace agāraṃ āvasati vijeyya paṭhaviṃ imaṃ adaṇḍena asatthena… sace ca so pabbajati agārā anagāriyaṃ vivaṭacchado sambuddho arahā bhavissati “he will become the greatest king when he stays at home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life”, the prophesy made for the infant Gotama DN ii.16; Snp 1002, Snp 1003 ■ Further passages for agāra e.g. Vin i.15; DN i.102 (BB. has v.l. agyāgāra, but DN-a i.270 expl. as dānāgāra ); AN i.156, AN i.281; AN ii.52 sq. Dhp 14, Dhp 140; Ja i.51, Ja i.56; Ja iii.392; Dpvs. i.36.

2. anagāra (adj.) houseless, homeless; a mendicant (opp. gahaṭṭha Snp 628 = Dhp 404; Snp 639, Snp 640 (+ paribbaje ); Pv ii.25 (= anāvāsa Pv-a 80) ■ (nt.) the homeless state (= anagāriyā ) Snp 376. See also agga2.

3. ˚āgāra: Owing to freq. occurrence of agāra at the end of cpds. of which the first word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in āgāra. This form has been considered therefore as a proper doublet of agāra. This however is wrong. The long ā is simply a contraction of the short a at the end of the first part of the cpd. with the short a at the beginning of agāra Of the cpds. the most common are:- āgantuk˚; reception hall for strangers or guests SN iv.219; SN v.21itth˚ lady’s bower SN i.58, SN i.89kūṭ˚; a house with a peaked roof, or with gables SN ii.103. 263; iii.156; iv.186; v.43; AN i.230; AN iii.10, AN iii.364; AN iv.231; AN v.21. -koṭṭh˚; storehouse granary DN i.134 (cp. DN-a i.295); SN i.89. -tiṇ˚; a house covered with grass SN iv.185; AN i.101. -bhus˚; threshing shed, barn AN i.241. -santh˚; a council hall DN i.91; DN ii.147; SN iv.182; SN v.453; AN ii.207; AN iv.179 sq. -suññ˚; an uninhabited shed; solitude SN v.89, SN v.157, SN v.310 sq., 329 sq. AN i.241 (v.l. for bhusâgāra); iii.353; iv.139, 392, 437 v.88, 109, 323 sq.

cp. Sk. agāra, probably with the a-of communion; Gr. ἀγεἱρω to collect, ἀγορά market. Cp. in meaning & etym. gaha;1

Agāraka

(nt.) a small house, a cottage MN i.450; Ja vi.81.

fr. agāra

Agārika

(adj.) 1. having a house, in eka˚, dva˚; etc. DN i.166 = AN i.295 = AN ii.206.

2. a householder, layman Vin i.17. f. agārikā a housewife Vin i.272. See also āgārika.

Agārin

(adj.) one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Snp 376, Th i.1009; Ja iii.234 ■ f. agārinī a housewife Vv 527 (= gehassāmmī Vv-a 225) Pv iii.43 (id. Pv-a 194). Agariya = agarika

fr. agāra

Agāriya
Agārika

, a layman MN i.504 (˚bhūta) ■ Usually in neg. anagāriyā (f.) the homeless state (= anagāraṃ as opp. to agāra (q.v.) in formula agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajita (gone out from the house into the homeless state) Vin i.15; MN i.16; MN ii.55, MN ii.75; AN i.49; DN iii.30 sq., 145 sq.; Snp 274, Snp 1003; Pv ii.1316; DN-a i.112.

Agga1

(adj. n.) 1. (adj;) (a.) of time: the first, foremost Dpvs iv.13 (saṅgahaṃ first collection). See cpds ■ (b.) of space: the highest, topmost, Ja i.52 (˚sākhā) ■ (c.) of quality: illustricus, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin iv.232 (agga-m-agga) most excellent, DN ii.4: SN I.29 (a sattassa Sambuddha); AN ii.17 = Pv iv.347 (lokassa Buddho aggo [A: aggaṃ] pavuccati); Iti 88, Iti 89; Snp 875 (suddhi) Pv-a 5. Often combd. with seṭṭha (best), e.g. DN ii.15; SN iii.83, SN iii.264.

2. (nt.) top, point. (a.) lit.: the top or tip (nearly always-˚); as ār˚; point of an awl Snp 625 Snp 631; Dhp 401; kus˚; tip of a blade of grass Dhp 70; Sdhp 349; tiṇ˚; id Pv-a 241; dum˚; top of a tree Ja ii.155 dhaj˚; of a banner SN i.219; pabbat˚; of a mountain Sdhp 352; sākh˚; of a branch Pv-a 157; etc ■ (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of all etc. SN ii.29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain to the highest); Mvu 7, Mvu 26. Usually as-˚; e.g. dum˚; the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 (cp. Vv-a 161) dhan˚; plenty DN iii.164; madhur˚; SN i.41, SN i.161, SN i.237; bhav˚ the best existence SN iii.83; rūp˚; extraordinary beauty Ja i.291; lābh˚; highest gain Ja iii.127; sambodhi-y-agga highest wisdom Snp 693 (= sabbaññuta-ñāṇan Snp-a 489 the best part or quality of anything, in enumn of the five “excellencies” of first-fruits (panca aggāni, after which the N. Pañcaggadāyaka), viz. khettaggan rās˚ koṭṭh˚ kumbhi bhojan˚ Snp-a 270. sukh˚; perfect bliss Sdhp 243. Thus freq. in phrase aggaṃ akkhāyati to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent DN i.124; SN iii.156, SN iii.264; AN ii.17 (Tathāgato); Iti 87 (id.); Nd ii.517 D (appamādo); Mil 183.

3. Cases as adv.: aggena (instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.) by (id.) Vin ii.167. (aggena gaṇhāti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or from, foll. by tad eva “then”; cp agge), 294 (bhikkh˚ from alms); Vb 423 (vass˚ by the number of years). aggato (abl.) in the beginning Snp 217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken by its worth valued, esteemed Thig 386, Thig 394. agge (loc) 1. at the top AN ii.201 (opp. mūle at the root); Ja iv.156 (id.); Snp 233 (phusit˚ with flowers at the top: supupphitaggasākhā Kp-a 192); Ja ii.153 (ukkh˚); iii.126 (kūp˚).

2 (as prep.) from. After, since, usually in phrases yad˚ (foll by tad˚) from what time, since what date DN i.152; DN ii.206 & ajja-t-agge from this day, after; today DN i.85; MN i.528; AN v.300; Snp p.25 (cp. BSk. adyāgrena Avs ii.13) at the end: bhattagge after a meal Vin ii.212.

-aṅgulī the main finger, i.e. index finger Ja vi.404 -āsana main seat DN-a i.267. -upaṭṭhāka chief personal attendant DN ii.6. -kārikā first taste, sample Vin iii.80 -kulika of an esteemed clan Pv iii.55 (= seṭṭh˚ Pv-a 199). -ñña recognized as primitive primeval, DN iii.225 (porāṇa + ), AN ii.27 sq.; AN iv.246, Kv 341. -danta one who is most excellently self-restrained (of the Buddha Th i.354. -dāna a splendid gift Vin iii.39. -dvāra main door Ja i.114. -nakha tip of the nail Vin iv.221. -nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin i.229. -nikkhitta highly praised or famed Mil 343. -nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dpvs iv.5. -pakatimant of the highest character Ja v.351 (= aggasabhāva). -patta having attained perfection DN iii.48 sq. -pasāda the highest grace AN ii.34; Iti 87. -piṇḍa the best oblation or alms DN i.141; MN i.28; MN ii.204. -piṇḍika receiving the best oblations Ja vi.140. -puggala the best of men (of the Buddha Snp 684; Dhp-a ii.39; Sdhp. 92, 558. -purohita chief or prime minister Ja vi.391. -phala the highest or supreme fruit (i.e. Arahantship) Ja i.148; Pv iv.188; Pv-a 230 -bīja having eggs from above (opp. mūla˚), i.e. propagated by slips or cuttings DN i.5; DN-a i.81. -magga (adj. having reached the top of the path, i.e. Arahantship Thag-a 20. -mahesi the king’s chief wife, queen-consort Ja i.262; Ja iii.187, Ja iii.393; Ja v.88; Dhp-a i.199; Pv-a 76. -rājā the chief king Ja vi.391; Mil 27. -vara most meritorious best Dpvs vi.68. -vāda the original doctrine (= theravāda) Dpvs iv.13. -vādin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Thag 1142.

Vedic agra; cp. Av. agrō first; Lith. agrs early

Agga2

(nt.) (only-˚) a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall dān˚; a house of donation, i.e. a public or private house where alms are given Ja iii.470; Ja iv.379, Ja iv.403; Ja vi.487; Pv-a 121; Mil 2. salāk˚; a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office Ja i.123, Vv-a 75.

a contracted form of agāra

Aggatā

(f.) pre-eminence, prominence, superiority Kv 556 (˚ṃ gata); Dpvs iv.1 (guṇaggataṃ gatā) ■ (adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority DN i.80; DN iii.224.

abstr. of agga

Aggatta

(nt.) the state or condition of being the first, pre-eminence Pv-a 9, Pv-a 89.

abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan

Aggavant

(adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence AN i.70, AN i.243.

Aggalu

see agalu. Aggala & Aggala

Aggaḷa & Aggaḷā

(f.) (also occasionally with l.) a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross-bar Vin i.290; DN i.89 (˚ṃ ākoteṭi to knock upon the cross-bar; a. = kavāṭa DN-a i.252); AN iv.359 (id.) SN iv.290; AN i.101 = AN i.137 = AN iv.231. (phusit˚; with fastened bolts, securely shut Thag 385 (id.); Vin iv.47; Ja v.293 (˚ṃ uppīḷeti to lift up the cross-bar.

2. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin i.290 (+ tunna) 392 (Bdhgh on MV viii.21, 1); Ja i.8 (+ tunna) vi.71 (˚ṃ datvā ); Vin iv.121.

-dāna putting in a gusset Ja i.8. -phalaka the post or board, in which the cross-bar is fixed (cp. ˚vaṭṭi) MN iii.95. -vaṭṭi = ˚phalaka Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148. -sūci bolting pin MN i.126.

cp. Sk. argala & argalā to; *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc. as in Ags. reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakṣati to protect Gr. ἀλέςω id., Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr.ἀρκέω = Lat. arceo, Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.

Aggi

fire.

1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration Vin ii.120 (fire in bathroom); MN i.487 (anāhāro nibbuto f. gone out for lack of fuel); SN iv.185, SN iv.399 (sa-upādāno jalati provided with fuel blazes); Snp 62; Dhp 70 (= asaniaggi Dhp-a iii.71); Ja i.216 (sparks), 294 (pyre); ii.102 iii.55; iv.139; Vv-a 20 (aggimhi tāpanaṃ + udake temanaṃ) ■ The var. phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at AN iv.45: aggiṃ ujjāleti (kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbāpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other phrases are e.g. aggiṃ jāleti (kindle) Ja ii.44; gaṇhāti (make or take) Ja i.494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to Ja i.294; nibbāpeti (put out) Iti 93; Sdhp 552. aggi nibbāyati the f. goes out SN ii.85; MN i.487; Ja i.212 (udake through water); Mil 304. aggi nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. ˚nibbāna) Ja i.61; Mil 304. agginā dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to AN i.136, AN i.199; Pv-a 20. udar˚; the fire supposed to regulate digestion Pv-a 33; cp. Dial. ii.208, note 2; kapp˚uṭṭhān˚; the universal conflagration Ja iii.185; dāv˚; a wood or jungle fire Ja i.212; naḷ˚; the burning of a reed Ja vi.100; padīp˚ fire of a lamp Mil 47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire-god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jātaka commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagavā the Lord Agni e.g. at Ja i.285, Ja i.494; Ja ii.44. The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e.g. Ja i.285; Ja ii.43. Aggiṃ paricarati (cp. ˚paricāriyā) to serve the sacred fire Vin i.31 (jaṭilā aggī paricaritukāmā); AN v.263, AN v.266; Thig 143 (= aggihuttaṃ paric˚ Thag-a 136); Dhp 107; Ja i.494; Dhp-a ii.232 aggiṃ juhati (cp. ˚homa, ˚hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire AN ii.207; often combd. with aggihuttaṃ paricarati e.g. SN i.166; Snp p.79. aggiṃ namati & santappeti to worship the fire A; v.235. aggissa (gen.) paricāriko Ja yi.207 (cp. below ˚paricārika); aggissa ādhānaṃ AN iv.41.

3 (ethical, always-˚) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rāg˚, dos˚ moh˚; or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At SN iv.19; AN iv.41 sq. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are āhuneyy˚, gahapat˚, dakkhiṇeyy˚, kaṭṭh˚. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. DN iii.217; Iti 92, Vb 368. In late books are found others: ind˚; the fire of the senses Pv-a 56; dukkh˚ the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh˚; of the misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaṭisār˚; burning remorse Pv-a 60; sok˚; burning grief ib. 41.

Note. The form aggini occurs only at Snp 668 & 670 in the meaning of “pyre”, and in combn. with sama “like”, viz. aggini-samaṃ jalitaṃ 668 (= samantato jali taṃ aggiṃ Snp-a 480); aggini-samāsu 670 (= aggisamāsu Snp-a 481). The form agginī in phrase niccagginī can either be referred to gini (q.v.) or has to be taken as nom. of aggini (in adj. function with ī metri causa otherwise as adj. agginiṃ), meaning looking constantly after the fire, i.e. careful, observant, alert.

-agāra (agyâgāra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin i.24; Vin iv.109; DN i.101, DN i.102 (as v.l. BB for agāra); MN i.501; AN v.234, AN v.250. -khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire-brand SN ii.85; AN iv.128; Thig 351 (˚samākāmā); Ja iv.139; Ja vi.330; Pts i.125; Dpvs vi.37; Mil 304. -gata having become (like) fire Mil 302 ■ ja fire-born Ja v.404 (C; text aggijāta). -ṭṭha fire-place Ja v.155. -ṭṭhāna fire-place Vin ii.120 (jantāghare, in bathroom). -daḍḍha consumed by fire Dhp 136; Pv i.74 -dāha (mahā˚) a holocaust AN i.178. -nikāsin like fire Ja iii.320 (suriya). -nibbāna the extinction of fire Ja i.212 -pajjota fire-light AN ii.140 (one of the 4 lights, viz canda˚, suriya˚, a˚, paññā˚). -paricaraṇa (-ṭṭhāna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to Dhp-a i.199 -paricariyā fire-worship Dhp-a ii.232; Snp-a 291 (pāri˚) 456 -paricārika one who worship the fire aN v.263 (brāhmaṇa) -sālā a heated hall or refectory Vin i.25, Vin i.49 = Vin ii.210 Vin i.139; Vin ii.154. -sikhā the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile ˚ûpama, like a flaming fire Snp 703; Dhp 308; Iti 43, Iti 90 (ayoguḷa). -hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2), Vin i.33, Vin i.36 = Ja i.83; Vin i.246 = Snp 568 (˚mukha-yañña); SN i.166; Dhp 392; Snp 249, p. 79; Ja iv.211; Ja vi.525; Thag-a 136 (= aggi); Dhp-a iv.151 (˚ṃ brāhmaṇo namati). -huttaka (nt.) fire-offering Ja vi.522 (= aggi-jūhana C.). -hotta = ˚hutta Snp-a 456 (v.l. BB ˚hutta). -homa fire-oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni DN i.9 (= aggi-jūhana DN-a i.93).

Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini (q.v.) and aggini (see below)

Aggika

(adj.) one who worships the fire Vin i.71 (jaṭilaka); DN ii.339 sq. (jaṭila); SN i.166 (brāhmaṇa).

aggi + ka

Aggha

1. price, value, worth, Mil 244; Mvu 26, Mvu 22; Mvu 30, Mvu 76; Vv-a 77mahaggha (adj.) of great value Ja iv.138; Ja v.414; Ja vi.209; Pv ii.118. See also mahāraha. appaggha (adj.) of little value J. iv.139; v.414- anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, Ja v.484; cattari anagghāni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisīdanapallanka ādhāraka, pādapīṭhikā Dhp-a iii.120, Dhp-a iii.186. (adj.) priceless invaluable Ja v.414; Mvu 26, Mvu 25; Dhp-a iv.216agghena (instr.) for the price of Vin ii.52, cp. Bdhgh on p. 311 312.

2. an oblation made to a guest DN ii.240; Ja iv.396 = Ja iv.476.

-kāraka a valuator Ja i.124. -pada valuableness Ja v.473 (˚lakkhaṇaṃ nāma mantaṃ).

see agghati

Agghaka

(adj.) = aggha; worth, having the value of (-˚) Mvu 30, Mvu 77. an˚; priceless Mvu 30, Mvu 72.

Agghati

(intr.) to be worth, to have the value of (acc.), to deserve Ja i.112 (satasahassaṃ; aḍḍhamāsakaṃ); vi.174, 367 (padarajaṃ); Dhp-a iii.35 (maṇin nâgghāma); Mvu 32, Mvu 28. Freq. in stock phrase kalaṃ nāgghati (nāgghanti) soḷasiṃ not to be worth the 16th part of (cp. kalā) Vin ii.156; SN i.233; Dhp 70; Vv 207 (nânubhoti Vv-a 104), 437; Ja v.284 ■ Caus. agghāpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on (acc.) Ja i.124; Ja iv.137, Ja iv.278; Mil 192; Mvu 27, Mvu 23. Cp. agghāpanaka & agghāpaniya.;

Sk. arghati, argh = arh (see arhati), cp. Gr. ἀλφή reward, ἀλφάνω to deserve

Agghanaka

(adj.) (-˚) having the value of, equal to, worth Vin iv.226; Ja i.61 (satasahass˚), 112; DN-a i.80 (kahāpaṇ˚); Dhp-a iii.120 (cuddasakoṭi˚); Mvu 26, Mvu 22; Mvu 34, Mvu 87 ■ f. ˚ikā Ja i.178 (satasahass˚).

fr. *agghana, abstr. to agghati

Agghaniya

(adj.) priceless, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Mil 192.;

in function & form grd. of agghati

Agghāpanaka

a valuator, appraiser Ja i.124, Ja i.125; Ja v.276 (˚ika).

fr. agghāpana to agghāpeti, Caus. of agghati

Agghāpaniya

(adj.) that which is to be valued, in ˚kamma the business of a valuator Ja iv.137.

grd. of agghāpeti, see agghati

Agghika

(nt.) (-˚) an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning “string, garland” (cp. Sinhalese ägä “festoon work”) Mvu 19, Mvu 38 (pupph˚; ) 34, 73 (ratan˚; ) 34, 76 (dhaj˚; ); Dāvs i.39 (pupphamay˚; ); v.51 (kusum˚; ).

= agghiya

Agghiya

(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) valuable, precious, worth Ja vi.265 (maṇi); Dhp-a ii.41 (ratan of jewel’s worth); Mvu 30, Mvu 92.

2. (nt.) a respectful oblation Ja v.324 = Ja vi.516; Dpvs vi.65; vii.4.

grd. form from agghati

Agha1

(nt.) evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune SN i.22; MN i.500 (roga gaṇḍa salla agha ); AN ii.128 (id.); Ja v.100; Thig 491; Sdhp 51 ■ adj. painful, bringing pain Ja vi.507 (agha-m-miga = aghakara m. C.). -bhūta a source of pain SN iii.189 (+ agha & salla).;

cp. Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.

Agha2

(m. nt.) the sky, orig. the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space DN ii.12; SN v.45; Vv 161 (aghasi gama, loc. vehāsaṃ gama Vv-a 78); Ja iv.154; Dhs 638 (+ aghagata) Vb 84 (id.).

-gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs 638, Dhs 722; Vb 84. -gāmin moving through the atmosphere or space i.e. a planet SN i.67 = Mil 242 (ādicco seṭṭho aghagāminaṃ).

the etym. suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 200 (with ref. to MN i.500, which belongs under agha1) is untenable (to Sk. kha, as a-kha = agha, cp Jain Prk. khaha). Neither does the pop. etym. of Bdhgh offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaṭṭaniya is not strikeable Dhs-a 326 cp. Dhs. trsl. 194 & Ja iv.154 aghe ṭhitā = appaṭighe ākāse ṭhitā the air which does not offer any resistance) On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarikā aghā asaṃvutā andhakārā DN ii.12; SN v.454, and BSk. aghasaṃvṛta Mvu i.240, adj. dark Mvu i.41; Mvu ii.162; Lal 552

Aghata

at Thag 321 may be read as agha-gata or (preferably) with v.l. as aggha-gataṃ, or (with Neumann) as agghaṃ agghatānaṃ. See also Mrs. Rh. D, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191.

Aghammiga

a sort of wild animal Ja vi.247 (= aghāvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475.

to agha1?

Aghavin

(adj.) suffering pain, being in misery Snp 694 (= dukkhita Snp-a 489).

to agha1

Aṅka1

= anga, sign, mark, brand Mil 79; ˚karana branding Ja iv.366, Ja iv.375. See also anketi.

Aṅka2

(a.) a hook Ja v.322 Ja vi.218 (v.l. BB anga) ■ (b.) the lap (i.e. the bent position) or the hollow above the hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses (aṅkena vahati ) Vin ii.114; DN ii.19 (aṅke pariharati to hold on one’s lap or carry on one’s hips), 20 (nisīdāpeti seat on one’s lap) MN ii.97 (aṅkena vahitvā ); Thag 299; Ja i.262 (aṅke nisinna ); ii.127, 236; vi.513; Dhp-a i.170 (aṅkena vahitvā Pv-a 17 (nisīdāpeti ).

Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Gr.; ἀγκών elbow, α ̓́γκυρα = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul = E. angle

Aṅkita

marked, branded Ja i.231 (cakkankitā Satthu padā); ii.185 (˚kaṇṇaka with perforated ears).

pp. of anketi

Aṅkura

a shoot, a sprout (lit. or fig.) Ja ii.105; Ja vi.331 (Buddh ˚a nascent Buddha), 486; Dhs 617 (˚vaṇṇa); Mil 50, Mil 251 Mil 269; Sdhp 273; Mvu 15, Mvu 43.

cp. Sk. ankura, to anka a bend = a tendril etc.

Aṅkusa

a hook, a pole with a hook, used ■ (1) for plucking fruit off trees, a crook Ja i.9 (˚pacchi hook & basket); v.89 = vi.520 (pacchikhanitti˚), 529 (= phalānaṃ gaṇhanatthaṃ ankusaṃ) ■ (2) to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta Vin ii.196 (+ kasā); Ja vi.489; Thag-a 173 (ovādaṃ ankusaṃ katvā, fig. guide); Sdhp 147 (daṇḍ˚) ■ (3) Name of a certain method of inference in Logic (naya), consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Ne 2, Ne 4, Ne 127; Ne-a 208;- acc˚; beyond the reach of the goad DN ii.266 (nāga). See also ankusaka.

-gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an eleph. driver’s hook MN ii.94 (sippa). -gaha an elephant-driver Dhp 326.

Vedic ankuśa; to anc, see anka2

Aṅkusaka

1. a crook for plucking fruit Ja iii.22.

2. an elephant-driver’s hook Ja iii.431.

-yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic Ja ii.68 (+ pacchi).

see anka2, cp. ankusa

Aṅketi

to mark out, brand Ja i.451 lakkhaṇena); ii.399 ■ pp. aṅkita, q.v.

Denom. fr. anka1

Aṅkola

a species of tree Alaṅgium Hexapetalum Ja vi.535. Cp. next.

dial. for ankura

Aṅkolaka

= ankola Ja iv.440; Ja v.420.

Aṅga

(nt.) (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. ˚sambhāra); uttam˚aṅga the reproductive organ Ja v.197; also as “head” at Thag-a 209. Usually in cpds (see below, esp. ˚paccanga), as sabbaṅga-kalyāṇī perfect in all limbs Pv iii.35 (= sobhaṇa-sabbanga-paccangī Pv-a 189) and in redupln. aṅga-m-aṅgāni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below anga + paccanga) Vin iii.119; Vv 382 (˚ehi naccamāna); Pv ii.1210, 13, 18 (sunakho te khādati) ■ (2) (fig.) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e.g. uposath˚; the vows of the fast Ja i.50; bhavaṅga the constituents or the condition of becoming (see bhava & cp.; Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhaṅga (q.v.). Esp. with numerals: cattāri angāni 4 constituents AN ii.79 (viz. sīla, samādhi, paññā. vimutti and rūpa, vedanā saññā, bhava), aṭṭhangika (q.v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (Kp-a 85: aṭṭh’ angāni assā ti) navanga Buddha-sāsana see nava ■ (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality DN i.113 sq., 117 (iminā p˚ aṅgena by this quality, or in this respect, cp. below 4; DN-a i.281 expls tena kāra ṇena). In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body DN i.9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha-pādādisu yena kenaci evarūpena angena samannāgato dīghāyu… hotī ti… angasatthan = chiromantics DN-a i.92). Thus in combn. with samannāgata & sampanna; always meaning endowed with “good”, superior remarkable “qualities”, e.g. Ja i.3 (sabbanga-sampanna nagaraṃ a city possessing all marks of perfection); ii.207. In enumn. with var. numerals: tīhi angehi s. AN i.115 cattāri sotapannassa DN iii.227 = AN iv.405 sq.; pañcanga-vippahīno (i.e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see nīvaraṇa) and pañcanga-samannāgato (i.e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sīla-kkhandha, see kkhandha ii.A d) SN i.99 = AN i.161; AN v.15, AN v.29. Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin (viz. sujāta of pure birth, ajjhāyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirūpa handsome, sīlava of good conduct, paṇḍita clever) DN i.119, DN i.120. Eight qualities of a king DN i.137. Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) SN iii.83; Kp iv.10 = Kp-a 88; cp. MN i.446 (dasah’ angehi samannāgato rañño assājāniyo) ■ (4) (modally part, share, interest, concern; ajjhattikaṃ angaṃ my own part or interest (opp. bāhiraṃ the interest in the outside world). AN i.16 sq. = SN v.101 sq.; Iti 9. rañño angaṃ an asset or profit for the king MN i.446. Thus adv. tadaṅga (see also ta˚ i.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and tadaṅgena by these means, through this, therefore MN i.492; AN iv.411; Sdhp 455, Sdhp 456; iminā p˚ angena for that reason MN ii.168 ■ In compn. with verbs aṅgi˚; (angī˚) angigata having limbs or ports, divided DN-a i.313; cp samangi (-bhūta).

-jāta “the distinguishing member”, i.e. sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin i.191 (of cows); iii.20, 37, 205; Ja ii.359; Mil 124 -paccaṅga one limb or the other, limbs great and small MN i.81; Ja vi

20, used (a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv ii.1212 (= paripuṇṇa-sabbanga-paccangavatī Pv-a 158) Snp-a 383; Dhp-a i.390; Thag-a 288; Sdhp 83 fig. rathassa angapaccangan MN i.395; sabbanga-paccangāni all limbs Mil 148 ■ (b) distributively (cp. similar redupl. formations like chiddâvachidda, seṭṭhânu-seṭṭhi, khaṇḍākhaṇḍa cuṇṇavicuṇṇa) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like angamangāni above 1), piecemeal MN i.133 (˚e daseyya), 366; Ja i.20; Ja iv.324 (chinditvā). -paccaṅgatā the condition or state of perfect limbs, i.e. a perfect body Vv-a 134 (suvisuddh˚). -paccaṅgin having all limbs (perfect) DN i.34 (sabbanga-peccangī); Pv-a 189. -rāga painting or rouging the body Vin ii.107 (+ mukha˚) -laṭṭhi sprout, offshoot Thag-a 226. -vāta gout Vin i.205 -vijjā the art of prognosticating from marks on the body chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) DN i.9 (see expl at DN-a i.93); Ja i.290 (˚āya cheka clever in fortune-telling); ˚ânubhāva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body Ja ii.200; Ja v.284; ˚pāṭhaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. Ja ii.21, Ja ii.250; Ja v.458. -vekalla bodily deformity Dhp-a ii.26. -sattha the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DN-a i.92. -sambhāra the combination of parts Mil 28 = SN i.135; Mil 41 -hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests Ja vi.538.

Vedic anga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger-ring = Sk. angulīya. See also anka, anguṭṭha & angula

Aṅgaṇa1

(nt.) an open space, a clearing, Vin ii.218; Ja i.109 (= manussānan sañcaraṇa-ṭṭhāne anāvaṭe bhūmibhāge C.); ii.243, 290 357; Dāvs i.27cetiy˚; an open space before a Chaitya Mil 366, DN-a i.191, DN-a i.197; Vv-a 254. rāj˚; the empty space before the king’s palace, the royal square Ja i.124 Ja i.152; Ja ii.2; Dhp-a ii.45.

-ṭṭhāna a clearing (in a wood or park) Ja i.249, Ja i.421 -pariyanta the end or border of a clearing Ja ii.200.

cp. Sk. angaṇa & ˚na; to anga?

Aṅgaṇa2

a speck or freckle (on the face) AN v.92, AN v.94 sq. (+ raja) Usually in neg. anaṅgana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish clear, (of the mind) (opp. sângana Snp 279); DN i.76; MN i.24 sq.; 100 (+ raja); AN ii.211; Snp 517 (+ vigata raja = angaṇānan abhāvā malānañ ca vigamā… Snp-a 427), 622 = Dhp 125 (= nikkilesa Dhp-a iii.34); Dhp 236 Dhp 351; Pp 60; Ne 87.

prob. to anj, thus a variant of añjana, q.v.

Aṅgada

a bracelet Ja v.9, Ja v.410 (citt˚; adj. with manifold bracelets).

cp. Sk. angada; prob. anga + da that which is given to the limbs

Aṅgadin

(adj.) wearing a bracelet Ja v.9.

to angada

Aṅgāra

(m. nt.) charcoal, burning coal, embers AN iii.97, AN iii.380, AN iii.407; Ja i.73; Ja iii.54, Ja iii.55; Ja v.488; Snp 668; Sdhp 32. kul˚; the charcoal of the family, a squanderer SN iv.324 (see under kula).

-kaṭāha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DN-a i.261. -kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes Dhp-a i.260; Dhs A 333; Vv-a 142. -kammakara a charcoal burner Ja vi.209. -kāsu a charcoal pit MN i.74, MN i.365; Thig 491; Ja i.233; Snp 396; Thag-a 288; Dhp-a i.442; Sdhp 208 -pacchi a basket for ashes Dhp-a iv.191. -pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya AN i.141; Mil 303; Pv-a 221 (˚āropaṇa); Sdhp 208 -maṃsa roast meat Mvu 10, Mvu 16. -masi ashes Dhp-a iii.309. -rāsi a heap of burning coal Ja iii.55.

Vedic angāra

Aṅgāraka

(adj.) like charcoal, of red colour, Name of the planet Mars DN-a i.95; cp. Ja i.73.

cp. Sk. angāraka

Aṅgārika

a charcoal-burner Ja vi.206 (= angāra-kammakara p. 209).

Aṅgārin

(adj.) (burning) like coal, of brightred colour, crimson Thag 527 = Ja i.87 (dumā trees in full bloom).

to angāra

Aṅgika

(-˚) (adj.) consisting of parts,-fold; only in compn. with num. like aṭṭh˚, duv˚ (see dve) catur˚, pañc˚ etc., q.v.

fr. anga

Aṅgin

(adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts,-fold, see catur˚ & pacc˚ (under anga-paccangin) ■ f.; aṅginī having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Thig 297 (= Thag-a 226).

Aṅguṭṭha

1. the thumb Vin iii.34; Mil 123; Pv-a 198.

2. the great toe Ja ii.92; Mvu 35, Mvu 43.

-pada thumb-mark AN iv.127 = SN iii.154. -sineha love drawn from the thumb, i.e. extraordinary love Pv iii.52 cp. Pv-a 198.

cp. Sk. anguṣṭha, see etym. under anga

Aṅguṭṭhaka

= anguṭṭha Ja iv.378; Ja v.281; pād˚ the great toe SN v.270.

Aṅgula

1. a finger or toe MN i.395 (vank’ angulaṇ karoti to bend the fingers, v.l. anguliṇ); AN iii.6 (id.); Ja v.70 (goṇ adj. with ox toes, expld. by C. as with toes like an ox’s tail; vv.ll. ˚anguṭṭha and ˚angulī).

2. a finger as measure, i.e. a finger-breadth, an inch Vin ii.294, Vin ii.306 (dvaṅgula 2 inches wide); Mvu 19, Mvu 11 (aṭṭh˚; ); Dhp-a iii.127 (ek˚; ).

-aṭṭhi (? cp. anga-laṭṭhi) fingers (or toes) and bones DN-a i.93. -aṅguli fingers and toes Dhp-a iii.214. -antarikā the interstices between the fingers Vin iii.39; Mil 180; Dhp-a iii.214.

Vedic angula, lit. “limblet” see anga for etym.

Aṅgulika

(nt.) a finger Ja iii.13 (pañc˚); v.204 (vaṭṭ˚ = pavāḷ˚ ankurasadisā vaṭṭangulī p. 207). See also pañcangulika. Anguli & Anguli;

= angulī

Aṅgulī & Aṅguli

(thus always in cpds.) (f.) a finger AN iv.127; Snp 610; Ja iii.416 Ja iv.474; Ja v.215 (vaṭṭ˚ with rounded fingers); Mil 395; Dhp-a ii.59; Dhp-a iv.210; Snp-a 229.

-patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin iii.84 = Vin iv.110; DN i.91 = AN iv.343. -pada finger-mark AN iv.127 = SN iii.154. -poṭha snapping or cracking the fingers Ja v.67 -muddikā a signet ring Vin ii.106; Ja iv.498; Ja v.439, Ja v.467 -saṅghaṭṭana˚; = poṭha DN-a i.256.

Vedic angulī & ˚i; see anga

Aṅguleyyaka

(nt.) an ornament for the finger, a finger-ring Ja ii.444 (= nikkha).

cp. Sk. angulīyaka that which belongs to the finger, Mhg. vingerlîn = ring; E. bracelet, Fr bras; thimble thumb etc.

Acaṅkama

(avj.) not fit for walking, not level or even Thag 1174 (magga).

a + cankama

Acittaka

(adj.) 1. without thought or intention, unconscious, unintentional Dhp-a ii.42.

2 without heart or feeling, instr. acittakena (adv.) heartlessly Ja iv.58 (C. for acetasā).

a + citta2 + ka

Acittikata

(adj.) not well thought of Mil 229.

a + citta2 + kata; cp. cittikāra

Acira

see cira & cp. nacira.;

Acela

(adj.-n.) one who is not clothed, esp. t. t. for an anti-Buddhist naked ascetic DN i.161, DN i.165; DN iii.6 DN iii.12, DN iii.17 sq.; SN i.78; Ja v.75.

a + cela

Acelaka

= acela DN i.166; DN iii.40; AN i.295; AN ii.206; AN iii.384 (˚sāvaka); Ja iii.246; Ja vi.229; Pp 55; Dhp-a iii.489.

Acc-

1. a + c˚, e.g. accuta = a + cuta.

2. Assimilation group of (a) ati + vowel; (b) c + cons. e.g. acci = arci.

Accagā

3rd sg. pret. of ati-gacchati (q.v. for similar forms) he overcame, should or could overcome Snp 1040 (expld. wrongly as pp. = atikkanta at Nd ii.10 and as atīta at Dhp-a iv.494); Dhp 414.

ati + agā

Accaṅkusa

(adj.) beyond the reach of the goad DN ii.266 (nāga).

ati + ankusa

Accatari

see atitarati.

Accati

to praise, honour, celebrate Dāvs v.66 (accayittha, pret.)-pp accita, q.v.

Vedic arcati, ṛc, orig. meaning to be clear & to sing i.e. to sound clear, cp. arci

Accanta

(adj. & adv. ˚-) 1. uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual Ja i.223; Mil 413; Vv-a 71; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 125, Pv-a 266; Sdhp 288. 2. final, absolute, complete; adv. thoroughly SN i.130 (˚ṃ hataputtā’ mhi); iii.13 = AN i.291 sq.; AN v.326 sq. (˚niṭṭha ˚yogakkhemin); Kv 586 (˚niyāmatā final assurance; cp Kvu trsl. 340).

3. (˚-) exceedingly, extremely, very much AN i.145 (˚sukhumāla, extremely delicate), Mil 26 (id.); Snp 794 (˚suddhi = param ttha-accantasuddhi Snp-a 528); Thag 692 (˚ruci); Dhp 162 (˚dussīlya = ekanta Dhp-a iii.153).

ati + anta, lit. “up to the end”

Accaya

(1) (temporal) lapse, passing; passing away end, death. Usually as instr. accayena after the lapse of, at the end or death of, after Vin i.25; DN ii.127 (rattiyā a.), 154 (mam˚ when I shall be dead); MN i.438 (temās˚ after 3 months); SN i.69; Snp. 102 (catunnaṃ māsānaṃ), p. 110 (rattiyā); Ja i.253 (ekāha-dvīh˚), 291 (katipāh˚ after a few days); Pv-a 47 (katipāh˚), 82 (dasamās˚), 145 (vassasatānaṃ) ■ (2) (modal) passing or getting over, overcoming, conquering, only in phrase dur-accaya difficult to overcome, of kāmapanka Snp 945 (= dur-atikkamanīya Snp-a 568), of sanga Snp 948: taṇhā Dhp 336; sota Iti 95 ■ (3) (fig.) going beyond (the norm) transgression, offence Vin i.133 (thull˚ a grave offence) 167 (id.); ii.110, 170; esp. in foll. phrases: accayo maṃ accagamā a fault has overcome me, i.e. has been committed by me (in confession formula) DN i.85 (= abhibhavitvā pavatto has overwhelmed me DN-a i.236); AN i.54; MN i.438 (id.); accayaṃ accayato passati to recognise a breach of the regulation as such Vin i.315; AN i.103 AN ii.146 sq.; ˚ṃ deseti to confess the transgression SN i.239 ˚ṃ accayato paṭigaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) the fault, i.e. to pardon the transgression, in confessionformula at DN i.85 = (Vin ii.192; MN i.438 etc.). In the same sense accaya-paṭiggahaṇa pardon, absolution Ja v.380 accayena desanaṃ paṭigaṇhāti Ja i.379; accayaṃ khamati to forgive Mil 420.

from acceti, ati + i, going on or beyond; cp. Sk. atyaya

Accasara

(adj.) 1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too self-sure, overbearing, arrogant, proud SN i.239 (v.l. accayasara caused by prolepsis of foll. accaya); Ja iv.6 (atisara); Dhp-a iv.230 (= expecting too much).

2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of pañha a question) MN i.304; SN v.218 (v.l. SS for BB reading ajjhapara). Cp. accasārin.

[a form. fr. aor. accasari (ati + sṛ; ), influenced in meaning by analogy of ati + a + sara (smṛ) Not with Morris (J.P.T.S. 1889, 200) a corruption of accaya + sara (smṛ), thus meaning “mindful of a fault”]

Accasarā

(f.) overbearing, pride, selfsurity Vb 358 (+ māyā). Note. In id. p. at Pp 23 we read acchādanā instead of accasarā.

abstr. to accasara

Accasari

aor 3. sg. of atisarati to go beyond the limit, to go astray Ja v.70.

fr. ati + sṛ;

Accasārin

(adj.) = accasara 1., aspiring too high Snp 8 sq. (yo nâccasārī, opp. to na paccasārī; expld. at Snp-a 21 by yo nâtidhāvi, opp. na ohiyyi).

Accahasi

aor 3 sg. of atiharati to bring over, to bring, to take Ja iii.484 (= ativiya āhari C.).

fr. ati + hṛ;

Accābhikkhaṇa

(˚-) too often Ja v.233 (˚saṃsagga; C. expls. ativiya abhiṇha).

ati + abhikkhaṇa

Accāraddha

(adj. adv.) exerting oneself very or too much, with great exertion Vin i.182; Thag 638; Snp-a 21.

ati + āraddha

Accāyata

(adj.) too long AN iii.375.

ati + āyata

Accāyika

(adj.) out of time, viz. 1. irregular, extraordinary Ja vi.549, Ja vi.553.

2. urgent, pressing MN i.149 (karaṇiyan business) ii.112; Ja i.338; Ja v.17 ˚ṃ (nt. hurry Dhp-a i.18. See also acceka.

fr. accaya

Accāvadati

to speak more or better, to surpass in talk or speech; to talk somebody down, to persuade, entice Vin iv.224, Vin iv.263; SN ii.204 sq.; Ja v.433 (v.l. BB ajjhārati), 434 (v.l. BB aghācarati for ajjhācarati = ajjhāvadati?).

ati + āvadati; or is it = ajjhāvadati = adhi + āvadati?

Accāsanna

(adj.) very near, too near Pv-a 42 (na a. n’âtidūra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance).

ati + asanna

Accāhita

(adj.) very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible Ja iv.46 = Ja v.146 (= ati ahita C.) = vi.306 (id.).

ati + ahita

Acci

& (in verse); accī (f.) a ray of light, a beam, flame SN iv.290 (spelt acchi), 399; AN iv.103; AN v.9; Snp 1074 (vuccati jālasikhā Nd ii.11); Ja v.213; Mil 40; Thag-a 154 (dīp’) Sdhp 250.

Vedic arci m. & arcis nt. & f. to; ṛc, cp. accati

Accikā

(f.) a flame MN i.74; SN ii.99.

fr. acci

Accita

honoured, praised, esteemed Ja vi.180.

pp. of accati

Accimant

(adj.) flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Thag 527; Ja v.266; Ja vi.248; Vv 388.

fr. acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arciṣmant

Acci-bandha

(adj.) at Vin i.287 is expld. by Bdhgh as caturassa-kedāra-baddha (“divided into short pieces” Vin Texts ii.207), i.e. with squares of irrigated fields. The vv.ll. are acca˚ and acchi˚, and we should prefer the conjecture acchi-baddha “in the shape of cubes or dice”, i.e. with square fields.

= accibaddha?

Accuggacchati

to rise out (of), ger. accuggamma DN ii.38; AN v.152 (in simile of lotus).

ati + uggacchati

Accuggata

(adj.) 1. very high or lofty Mil 346 (giri); Vv-a 197; Dhp-a ii.65.

2. too high, i.e. too shrill or loud Ja vi.133 (sadda), 516 (fig. = atikuddha very angry C.).

ati + uggata

Accuṇha

(adj.) very hot, too hot Snp 966; Nd i.487; Dhp-a ii.85, Dhp-a ii.87 (v.l. for abbhuṇha). See also ati-uṇha.

ati + uṇha

Accuta

(adj.) immoveable; everlasting, eternal; nt. ˚ṃ Ep. of Nibbāna (see also cuta) AN iv.295, AN iv.327; Snp 204, Snp 1086 (= nicca etc. Nd ii.12); Dhp 225 (= sassata Dhp-a iii.321); Sdhp 47.

a + cuta

Accupaṭṭhapeti

at Ja v.124 is to be read with v.l. as apaccupaṭṭhapeti (does not indulge in or care for).

Accupati

at Ja iv.250 read accuppati, aor. 3rd sg. of accuppatati to fall in between (lit. on to), to interfere (with two people quarelling). C. expls. atigantvā uppati. There is no need for Kern’s corr. acchupati (Toev. s. v.).

Accussanna

(adj.) too full, too thick Vin ii.151.

ati + ussanna

Acceka

= accāyika, special; ˚cīvara a spccial robe Vin iii.261; cp. Vin Texts i.293.

Acceti

1. to pass (of time), to go by, to elapse Thag 145 (accayanti ahorattā).

2. to overcome to get over Mil 36 (dukkhaṃ) ■ Caus. acceti to make go on (loc.), to put on Ja vi.17 (sūlasmiṃ; C. āvuṇeti) but at this passage prob. to be read appeti (q.v.).

ati + eti fr. i

Accogāḷha

(adj.) too abundant, too plentiful (of riches), lit. plunged into AN iv.282, AN iv.287, AN iv.323 sq.

ati + ogāḷha

Accodaka

(nt.) too much water (opp. anodaka no water) Dhp-a i.52.

ati + udaka

Accodara

(nt.) too much eating, greediness, lit. too much of a belly Ja iv.279 (C. ati-udara).

ati + udara

Accha1

(adj.) clear, transparent Vin i.206 (˚kañjika); DN i.76 (maṇi = tanucchavi DN-a i.221) 80 (udakapatta), 84 (udaka-rahada); MN i.100; SN ii.281 (˚patta); iii.105 (id.); AN i.9; Ja ii.100 (udaka); Vv 7910 (vāri); DN-a i.113 (yāgu).

-odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus ponds) Vv 4411; 815; f. ˚odikā Vv 412 = 602.

cp. Sk. accha, dial., to ṛc (see accati), thus “shining”; cp. Sk. ṛkṣa bald, bare and Vedic ṛkvan bright Monier-Williams however takes it as a + cha fr. chad thus “not covered, not shaded”

Accha2

a bear Vin i.200; AN iii.101; Ja v.197, Ja v.406, Ja v.416; Mil 23 Mil 149. At Ja vi.507 accha figures as Name of an animal, but is in expln. taken in the sense of accha4 (acchā nāma aghammigā C.). Note. Another peculiar form of accha is P. ikka (q.v.).

Vedic ṛkṣa = Gr. α ̓́ρκτος, Lat. ursus, Cymr. arth

Accha3

= akkha2 (a die) see acci-bandha.

Accha4

(adj.) hurtful, painful, bad Dhp-a iv.163 (˚ruja).

Ved. ṛkṣa

Acchaka

= accha2, a bear Ja v.71.

Acchati

1. to sit, to sit still Vin i.289; AN ii.15; Iti 120 (in set carati tiṭṭhati a. sayati, where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati) Vv 741 (= nisīdati Vv-a 298); Pv-a 4.

2. to stay remain, to leave alone Thag 936; Ja iv.306.

3. to be behave, live Vin ii.195; DN i.102; SN i.212; Vv 112; Pv iii.31 (= nisīdati vasati Pv-a 188); Mil 88; Dhp-a i.424 In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus aggiṃ karitvā a. (= aggiṃ karoti) DN i.102; aggiṃ paricaranto a (= aggiṃ paricarati) DN-a i.270; tantaṃ pasārento a. (tantaṃ pasāreti) Dhp-a i.424 ■ Pot. acche Iti 110; aor acchi Vin iv.308; Dhp-a i.424.

Vedic āsyati & āste,; ās; cp. Gr. η ̈ ̔σται

Acchanna

(adj.) covered with, clothed in, fig. steeped in (c. loe.) Ja jii.323 (lohite a. = nimugga C.) At DN i.91 nacchanna is for na channa (see channa2) not fair, not suitable or proper (paṭirūpa).

pp. of acchādeti

Acchambhin

(adj.) not frightened, undismayed, fearless Snp 42 (reading achambhin; Nd ii.13 expls. abhīru anutrāsi etc.); Ja vi.322 (= nikkampa C.). See chambhin.

a + chambhin

Accharā1

(f.) the snapping of the fingers the bringing together of the finger-tips: 1. (lit.) accharaṃ paharati to snap the fingers Ja ii.447; Ja iii.191; Ja iv.124, Ja iv.126 Ja v.314; Ja vi.366; Dhp-a i.38, Dhp-a i.424 ■ As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger-tips, a pinch Ja v.385; Dhp-a ii.273 (˚gahaṇamattaṃ); cp. ekacchara-matta Dhp-a ii.274.

2. (fig.) a finger’s snap, i.e. a short moment in ek˚acchara-kkhaṇe in one moment Mil 102, and in def. of acchariya (q.v.) at DN-a i.43; Vv-a 329.

-saṅghāta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short duration of time, a moment, ˚matta momentary only for one moment (cp. BSk. acchaṭāsanghāta Divy 142) AN i.10, AN i.34, AN i.38; AN iv.396; Thag 405; Thag 2, Thag 67 (expld at Thag-a 76 as ghaṭikāmattam pi khaṇaṃ angulipoṭhanamattam pi kālaṃ). -sadda the sound of the snapping of a finger Ja iii.127.

etym. uncertain, but certainly dialectical; Trenckner connects it with ācchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares Sk. akṣara (see akkhara); there may be a connection with akkhaṇa in akkhaṇa-vedhin (cp. BSk. acchaṭā Divy 555), or possibly a relation to ā + tsar, thus meaning “stealthily”, although the primary meaning is “snapping, a quick sound”

Accharā2

(f.) a celestial nymph MN i.253 (pl. accharāyo ii.64; Thig 374 (= devaccharā Thag-a 252); Ja v.152 sq (Alambusā a.) Vv 55 (= devakaññā Vv-a 37); Vv 172; 1811 etc.; Dhp-a iii.8, Dhp-a iii.19; Pv-a 46 (dev˚; ); Mil 169 Sdhp 298.

Vedic apsaras = āpa, water + sarati, orig; water nymph

Accharika

(nt. or f.?) in ˚ṃ vādeti to make heavenly music (lit. the sounds of an accharā or heavenly nymph) AN iv.265.

fr. accharā2

Acchariya

(adj.-n..) wonderful, surprising strange, marvellous DN ii.155; MN i.79; MN iii.118, MN iii.125, MN iii.144 (an˚); SN iv.371; AN i.181; Mil 28, Mil 253; Dhp-a iii.171; Pv-a 121; Vv-a 71 (an˚). As nt. often in exclamations how wonderful! what a marvel! Ja i.223, Ja i.279; Ja iv.138 Ja vi.94 (a. vata bho); Dhp-a iv.51 (aho a.); Vv-a 103 (aho ti acchariyatthena nipāto). Thus freq. combd. with abbhutaṃ = how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension, e.g. DN i.2, DN i.60, DN i.206, DN i.210; DN ii.8; and in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā strange & wonderful things, i.e. wonderful signs, portents marvels, MN iii.118 MN iii.125; AN iv.198; Mil 8; also as adj. in phrase acchariyaabbhuta-(citta-)jātā with their hearts full of wonder and surprise Dhp-a iv.52; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 50 ■ See also acchera accheraka.;

cp. Sk. āścarya since Upanishads of uncertain etym ■ The conventional etym. of Pāli grammarians connects it with accharā1 (which is prob. correct & thus reduces Sk. āścarya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz. Dhammapāla: anabhiṇha-ppavattitāya accharāpaharaṇa-yoggaṃ that which happens without a moment’s notice, at the snap of a finger; i.e. causally unconnected (cp. Goth. silda-leiks in similar meaning) Vv-a 329; and Buddhaghosa: accharā-yoggan ti acchariyaṃ accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttan ti attho DN-a i.43

Acchādana

(nt.) covering, clothing Thag 698; Mil 279 ■ fig. protection, sheltering Ja i.307.

fr. acchādeti

Acchādanā

(f.) covering, hiding, concealment Pp 19, Pp 23Note. In id. p. at Vb 358 we read accasarā for acchādanā. Is the latter merely a gloss?

= prec.

Acchādeti

to cover, to clothe, to put on DN i.63 = Iti 75; Ja i.254; Ja iii.189; Ja iv.318; Pp 57; Pv i.105 (ger. acchādayitvāna); DN-a i.181 (= paridahitvā); Pv-a 49, Pv-a 50 ■ fig to envelop, to fill Ja vi.581 (abbhaṃ rajo acchādesi dust filled the air) ■ pp. acchanna (q.v.).

ā + chādeti1, Caus. of chad, cp. BSk. ācchādayati jīvitena to keep alive Avs, i.300; Divy 136 Divy 137

Acchi

at SN iv.290 is faulty spelling for acci (q.v.).

Acchijja

(v.l. accheja) destroying (?) SN i.127. Is the reading warranted? Cp. acchecchi.

Acchidda

see chidda.

Acchindati

to remove forcibly, to take away, rob, plunder Vin iv.247 (sayaṃ a. to appropriate); Ja ii.422; Ja iii.179; Ja iv.343; Mil 20; Sdhp 122 ■ ger. acchinditvā Ja ii.422; Dhp-a i.349; Pv-a 241 (sayaṃ); & acchetvā MN i.434. Caus. ii. acchindāpeti to induce a person to theft Vin iv.224, Vin iv.247.

ā + chindati, lit. to break for oneself

Acchinna

(adj.) removed, taken away, stolen, robbed Vin iv.278, Vin iv.303; Ja ii.78 Ja iv.45; Ja v.212.

ā + chinna, pp. of acchindati

Acchiva

a certain species of tree (Hypanthera Moringa) Ja vi.535.

*Sk. akṣiba and akṣība

Acchupeti

to procure or provide a hold, to insert, to put on or in Vin i.290 (aggaḷaṃ) ii.112.

ā + chupeti, Caus. of chupati

Acchecchi

3rd sg. aor. of chindati “he has cut out or broken, has destroyed” (see also chindati 3) in combn. with taṇhaṃ MN i.122; SN i.12, SN i.23, SN i.127 (so read for acchejja); iv.105, 207. Iti 47; AN iii.246, AN iii.445; Dhp-a iv.70 (gloss acchindi, for acchidda pret. of Dhp 351). The v.l. at all passages is acchejji, which is to be accounted for on graphological grounds, ch & j being substituted in MSS. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) mistakes the form tries to explain acchejji as adj. = ati-ejin (ejā), acchecchi ati-icchin (icchā). The syntactical construction however clearly points to an aor.;

Sk. acchaitsīt

Acchejja

= a + chejja not to be destroyed, indestructible, see chindati.

Acchedana

(nt.) robbing, plundering Ja vi.544.

abstr. to acchindati

Acchera

(adj.) = acchariya wonderful, marvellous SN i.181; Vv 8413 (comp. accheratara); Pv iii.51 (˚rūpa = acchariyasabhāva Pv-a 197); Sdhp 244, Sdhp 398.

Accheraka

(adj.) = acchera (acchariya) Ja i.279; Bv i.9 (pāṭihīraṃ).

Aja

a hegoat, a ram DN i.6, DN i.127; AN ii.207; Ja i.241; Ja iii.278 sq.v.241; Pp 56; Pv-a 80.

-eḷaka [Sk. ajaiḍaka] goats & sheep DN i.5, DN i.141; AN ii.42 sq., 209; Ja i.166; Ja vi.110; Pp 58. As pl. ˚ā SN i.76; Iti 36; Ja iv.363. -pada goat-footed MN i.134. -pāla goatherd in ˚nigrodharukkha (Npl.) “goatherds’ Nigrodha-tree” Vin i.2 sq. Dpvs i.29 (cp. Mvu iii.302). -pālikā a woman goatherd Vin iii.38. -lakkhaṇa “goat-sign”, i.e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. DN i.9 (expld. DN-a i.94 as “evarūpānaṃ ajānaṃ mansaṃ khāditabbaṃ evarūpānaṃ na khāditabban ti”). -laṇḍikā (pl.) goats’ dung, in phrase nāḷimattā a. a cup full of goats’ dung (which is put down a bad minister’s throat as punishment) Ja i.419; Dhp-a ii.70; Pv-a 282. -vata “goats’ habit”, a practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) Ja iv.318.

aja-pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat’s hoof; so also at Vism 161.

Vedic aja fr. aj (Lat. ago to drive), cp. ajina

Ajaka

a goat, pl. goats Vin ii.154 ■ f. ajikā Ja iii.278 & ajiyā Ja v.241.

Ajagara

a large snake (rock-snake?), Boa Constrictor Ja vi.507; Mil 23, Mil 303, Mil 364, Mil 406; Dhp-a iii.60. Also as ajakara at Ja iii.484 (cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64).

aja + gara = gala fr. *gel to devour, thus “goateater”

Ajacca

(adj.) of low birth Ja iii.19; Ja vi.100.

a + jacca

Ajajjara

see jajjara. Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumara;

Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumāra

see jaddhu.

Ajamoja

cummin-seed Vv-a 186.

Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajājī

Ajā

(f.) a she-goat Ja iii.125; Ja iv.251.

Ajānana

(˚-) (nt.) not knowing, ignorance (of) Ja v.199 (˚bhāva); vi.177 (˚kāla).

a + jānana

Ajina

(nt.) the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics DN i.167; Snp 1027; Ja i.12, Ja i.53; Ja iv.387; Ja v.407. kharājina a rough skin (as garment) MN i.343; SN iv.118; AN ii.207; Snp 249 (= kharāni a˚-cammāni Snp-a 291). dantājina ivory (q.v.).

-khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope’s hide DN i.167; SN i.117; AN i.240, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Vin i.306; Vin iii.34; Ja vi.569. -paveṇi a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin i.192; DN i.7 (= ajina-cammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇi DN-a i.87); AN i.181. -sāṭī a garment of skins (= ajina-camma-sāṭī Dhp-a iv.156) Dhp 394 = Ja i.481 = Ja iii.85.

Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats’ skin

Ajini

aor 3rd sg. jayati, q.v. Ajiya = ajika

Ajiya = ajikā

(see ajaka).

Ajira

(nt.). a court, a yard Mvu 35, Mvu 3.

Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Gr. ἀγρός, Lat. ager, Goth. akrs = Ger. Acker, = E. acre

Ajīraka

(nt.) indigestion Ja i.404; Ja ii.181, Ja ii.291; Ja iii.213, Ja iii.225.

a + jīraka

Ajeyya1 & Ajjeyya;

(adj.) - (a) not to be taken by force Kp viii.8 (cp. Kp-a 223). (b) not to be overpowered, invincible Snp 288; Ja v.509.

a + jeyya, grd. of jayati, q.v.

Ajeyya2

(adj.) not decaying, not growing old, permanent Ja vi.323. Ajja & Ajja

a + jeyya, grd. of jīyati, q.v.

Ajja & Ajjā

(adv.) to-day, now Snp 75 Snp 153, Snp 158, Snp 970, Snp 998; Dhp 326; Ja i.279; Ja iii.425 (read bahutaṃ ajjā; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. as “food”); Pv i.117 (= idāni Pv-a 59); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 23; Mvu 15, Mvu 64. Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja-tagge, see agga3) from this day onward, henceforth Vin i.18; DN i.85; DN-a i.235.

-kālaṃ (adv.) this morning Ja vi.180; -divasa the present day Mvu 32, Mvu 23.

Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, a˚ being base of demonstr. pron. (see a;3) and dyā an old loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus “on this day”

Ajjatana

(adj.) referring to the day, today’s, present, modern (opp. porāṇa ) Thag 552; Dhp 227; Ja ii.409 ■ dat. ajjatanāya for today Vin i.17; Pv-a 171 & passim.;

cp. Sk. adyatana

Ajjatā

(f.) the present time, in ajjatañ ca this very day SN i.83 (v.l. ajjeva).

abstr. fr. ajja

Ajjati

to get, procure, obtain Ja iii.263 (?). pp. ajjita (q.v.).

Vedic arjati, ṛj, a variant of arh, see arahati

Ajjava

(adj.-n.) straight, upright (usually combd. with maddava gentle, soft) DN iii.213; AN i.94; AN ii.113; AN iii.248; Snp 250 (+ maddava) 292 (id.); Ja iii.274; Dhs 1339; Vb 359 (an˚); Snp-a 292 (= ujubhāva), 317 (id.).

cp. Sk. ārjava, to ṛju, see uju

Ajjavatā

(f.) straight forwardness, rectitude, uprightness Dhs 1339. (+ ajimhatā & avankatā).;

fr. prec.

Ajjita

obtained Sdhp 98.

pp. of ajjati

Ajjuka

Name of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin iv.35; DN-a i.81 (all MSS. have ajjaka).

*Sk. arjaka

Ajjukaṇṇa

Name of a tree Pentaptera Tomentosa Ja vi.535 (nn).

*Sk. arjakarṇa

Ajjuṇho

(adv.) this moonlight night Vin i.25; Vin iv.80.

haplology fr. ajja-juṇho; see juṇhā

Ajjuna

the tree Pentaptera Arjuna Ja vi.535; Dhp-a i.105 (˚rukkha).

Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. ἀργός white, α ̓́ργυρος silver, Lat. argentum

Ajjh-

Assimilation group of adhi + vowel.

Ajjhagā

he came to, got to, found, obtained experienced SN i.12 (vimānaṃ); Snp 225 (expld. at Kp-a 180 by vindi paṭilabhi), 956 (ratiṃ; expld. at Nd i.457 by adhigacchi); Iti 69 (jātimaraṇaṃ); Dhp 154 (taṇhānaṃ khayaṃ); Vv 327 (visesaṃ attained distinction; expld. at Vv-a 135 by adhigata); 5021 (amataṃ santiṃ; expld. Vv-a 215 by v.l. SS adhigañchi, T. adhigacchati).

adhi + agā 3rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q.v. for similar forms)

Ajjhatta

(adj.-n.), that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & ˚interior, personal, inwardly (opp.; bahiddhā bāhira etc outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. DN i.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhāna) 70 = AN ii.210; AN v.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkhaṃ niyakajjhattaṃ attano santāne ti attho DN-a i.183 cp. Dhs-a 169, Dhs-a 338, Dhs-a 361); SN i.70, SN i.169; ii..27 (kathaṃ kathī hoti is in inward doubt), 40 (sukhaṃ dukkhaṃ); iii.180 (id.) iv.1 sg. (āyatanāni), 139, 196; v.74 (ṭhitaṃ cittaṃ ajjhattaṃ susaṇṭhitaṃ suvimuttaṃ a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143, 263, 297, 390; AN i.40 (rūpasaññī), 272 (kāmacchanda etc.); ii.158. (sukhadukkhaṃ), 211; iii.86 (cetosamatha), 92 (vūpasantacitta); iv.32 (sankhittaṃ), 57 (itthindriyaṃ), 299 (cittaṃ), 305 (rūpasaññī), 360 (cetosamatha), 437 (vūpasantacitta); v.79 sq. 335 sq. (sati); Iti 39 (cetosamatha inward peace), 80, 82 94; Ja i.045 (chātajjhatta with hungry insides); v.338 (id.) Pts i.76 (cakkhu etc.); Dhs 161 (= attano jātaṃ Dhs-a 169), 204, 1044; Pp 59; Vb 1 sq. (khandhā), 228 (sati), 327 (paññā), 342 (arū’pasaññī) ■ adv. ˚ṃ inwardly personally (in contrast-pair ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā; see also cpd. ˚bahiddhā) AN i.284; AN ii.171; AN iv.305; AN v.61; Snp 917 (= upajjhayassa vā ā ācariyassa vā te guṇā assū ti Nd i.350).

-ārammaṇa a subjective object of thought Dhs 1047 -cintin thought occupied with internal things Snp 174, Snp 388 -bahiddhā inside & outside, personal-external, mutual interacting SN ii.252 sq.; SN iii.47; SN iv.382; Nd ii.15; Dhs 1049 etc. (see also bahiddhā). -rata with inward joy DN ii.107; SN v.263 = Dhp 362 = Ud 64 (+ samāhita); Thag 981; AN iv.312; Dhp-a iv.90 (= gocar’ ajjhatta-sankhātāya kammaṭṭhāna-bhāvanāya rata). -rūpa one’s own or inner form Vin iii.113 (opp. bahiddhā-rūpa & ajjh˚-bah˚ r.).; -saññojana an inner fetter, inward bond AN i.63 sq.; Pp 22 Vb 361. -santi inner peace Snp 837 (= ajjhattānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ santibhāva Snp-a 545; cp. Nd i.185). -samuṭṭhāna originating from within Ja i.207 (of hiri; opp. bahiddhā˚).

cp. Sk. adhyātma, cp. attā

Ajjhattika

(adj.), personal, inward (cp. Dhs trsl. 207 & Nd;1 346: ajjhattikaṃ vuccati cittaṃ) opp. bāhira outward (q.v.). See also āyatana ■ MN i.62; SN i.73 (˚ā rakkhā na bāhirā); iv.7 sq. (āyatanāni); v.101 (anga); AN i.16 (anga); ii.164 (dhātuyo); iii.400 (āyatanāni); v.52 (id.); Iti 114 (id.), 9 (anga); Kp iv. (= Kp-a 82); Ja iv.402 (bāhira-vatthuṃ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṃ gaṇhati); Dhs 673, Dhs 751; Vb 13, Vb 67, Vb 82 sq., 119, 131 392 sq.

ajjhatta + ika

Ajjhapara

S v.218: substitute v.l. accasara (q.v.).

Ajjhappatta

(& Ajjhapatta) 1. having reached, approached, coming near to Ja ii.450 Ja vi.566 (p; C. attano santikaṃ patta).

2. having fallen upon, attacked Ja ii.59; Ja v.198 (p; C. sampatta )

3 attained, found, got Snp 1134 (= adhigacchi Nd2); Ja iii.296 (p. C. sampatta ); v.158 (ajjhāpatta; C. sampatta ).

adhi + ā + *prāpta

Ajjhabhavi

3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati to conquer, overpower, overcome SN i.240 (prohib. mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi); Ja ii.336. Cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati.;

Ajjhabhāsi

3rd sg. aor. of adhibhāseti to address SN iv.117 (gāthāhi); Kp v. = Snp p.46 (gāthāya); Pv-a 56, Pv-a 90.

Ajjhabhu

(3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati (q.v.) to overcome, conquer Iti 76 (dujjayaṃ a. he conquered him who is hard to conquer; v.l. ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi). Cp. ajjhabhavi.

Ajjhayana

(nt.) study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Mil 225. See also ajjhena.

adhi + i

Ajjhavodahi

3rd sg. aor. of ajjhodahati to put down Ja v.365 (= odahi, ṭhapesi C.). Kern, Toev s. v. proposes reading ajjhavādahi (= Sk. avādhāt).

Sk. adhyavadhāti

Ajjhāgāre

(adv.) at home, in one’s own house AN i.132 = Iti 109; AN ii.70.

adhi + agāre, loc. of agāra

Ajjhācarati

1. to conduct oneself according to Vin ii.301; MN i.523; Mil 266.

2. to flirt with (perhaps to embrace) Ja iv.231 (aññam-aññaṃ) pp. ajjhāciṇṇa. See also accāvadati & aticarati.;

adhi (or ati?) + ā + car

Ajjhācāra

1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Pārājika’s or Saṃghādisesa’s) Vin i.63 (see note in Vin. Texts, i.184.

2. flirtation Vin iii.128 (in the Old Cy as expln of avabhāsati).

3. sexual intercourse Ja i.396; Ja v.327 (˚cara v.l. for ajjhāvara); Mil 127 (an˚).

to adhi (ati?) + ā + car

Ajjhāciṇṇa

habitually done Vin ii.80 sq., 301.

pp. of ajjhācarati

Ajjhājīva

too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood MN ii.245 (+ adhipāṭimokkha).

adhi (ati?) + ā + jīv

Ajjhāpajjati

to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (acc.) Vin iv.237. pp. ajjhāpanna (q.v.).

adhi + ā + pad

Ajjhāpatti

(f.) incurring guilt Dhs 299 (an˚).

abstr. to ajjhāpajjati

Ajjhāpana1

(nt.) teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Mil 225.

fr. Caus. ii. of ajjheti

Ajjhāpana2

(nt.) burning, conflagration Ja vi.311.

ā + jhāpana fr. kṣā

Ajjhāpanna

become guilty of offence DN i.245; DN iii.43; SN ii.270; AN iv.277, AN iv.280; AN v.178, AN v.181 an˚; guiltless, innocent Vin i.103; DN iii.46; SN ii.194, SN ii.269; AN v.181; Mil 401. For all passages except AN iv.277 AN iv.280, cp. ajjhopanna.

pp. of adhi + āpajjati

Ajjhāpīḷita

harassed, overpowered, tormented Pv-a 180 (khuppipāsāya by hunger & thirst).;

adhi + ā + pīḷita

Ajjhābhava

excessive power, predominance Ja ii.357.

cp. Sk. adhyābhava

Ajjhābhavati

to predominate Ja ii.357.

adhi + ā + bhū, in meaning of abhi + bhu

Ajjhāyaka

(a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhāyaka Ja vi.209; Snp-a 192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious learned person DN i.88, DN i.120; DN iii.94; AN i.163; AN iii.223; Snp 140 (˚kula: thus for ajjhāyakula Fsb.); Thag 1171; Ja i.3 Ja vi.201, Ja vi.498; DN-a i.247.

cp. Sk. adhyāyaka, cp. ajjhayana

Ajjhāruha

(& ˚rūha ) (adj.) growing up over, overwhelming AN iii.63 sq. = SN v.96; Ja iii.399.

to adhi + ā + ruh

Ajjhārūḷha

(adj.) grown up or high over Ja iii.399.

pp. of adhi + ā + ruh

Ajjhārūhati

to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over SN i.221 = Ne 173 (ajjhottharati SA; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred Sayings i.285).

adhi + ārohati cp. atyārohati

Ajjhāvadati

see accāvadati.

Ajjhāvara

surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue Ja v.322, Ja v.324, Ja v.326, Ja v.327 (expld at all passages by parisā ). Should we read ajjhācara? Cp. ajjhācāra.

fr. adhi + ā + var

Ajjhāvasatar

one who inhabits DN i.63 (agāraṃ).

n. ag. to ajjhāvasati

Ajjhāvasati

to inhabit (agāraṃ a house; i.e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder DN ii.16; MN i.353; Vin iv.224; Ja i.50; Pp 57; Mil 348 ■ pp. ajjhāvuttha (q.v.).

adhi + ā + vas

Ajjhāvuttha

inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin ii.210; Ja i.145; Ja ii.333; Pv-a 24 (˚ghara); fig. (not) occupied by Snp-a 566 (= anosita).

cp. Sk. adhyuṣita; pp. of ajjhāvasati

Ajjhāsaya

intention, desire wish, disposition, bent DN ii.224 (adj.: intent on, practising); Ja i.88, Ja i.90; Ja ii.352; Ja v.382; Dhs-a 314, Dhs-a 334; Pv-a 88, Pv-a 116, Pv-a 133 (adj. dān˚ intent on giving alms), 168 Sdhp 219, Sdhp 518. Freq. in phrase ajjhāsayānurūpa according to his wish, as he wanted Pv-a 61, Pv-a 106, Pv-a 128.

fr. adhi + ā + śri, orig. hanging on, leaning on, BSk. however adhyāśaya Divy 586

Ajjhāsayatā

(f.) desire, longing Pv-a 127 (uḷār˚ great desire for c. loc.).

abstr. to ajjhāsaya

Ajjhāsita

intent on, bent on Mil 361 (jhān˚). Cp. ajjhosita & nissita.;

pp. of adhi + ā + śri

Ajjhiṭṭha

requested, asked, invited Vin i.113 (an˚ unbidden); DN ii.289 (Buddhaghosa and text read ajjhitta); Snp p.218 (= ajjhesita Nd ii.16); Ja vi.292 (= āṇatta C.); Dhp-a iv.100 (v.l. abhijjhiṭṭha). See also an˚.

pp. of ajjhesati

Ajjhupagacchati

to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Thig 474 (= sampaṭicchati Thag-a 285); Ja ii.403; Mil 300; pp. ajjhupagata (q.v.).

adhi + upa + gam

Ajjhupagata

come to, obtained, reached AN v.87, cp. 210; v.187 sq.

pp. of ajjhupagacchati

Ajjhupagamana

(nt.) consent, agreement, justification Vin ii.97, Vin ii.104.

adhi + upa + gam

Ajjhupaharati

to take (food) to oneself Ja ii.293 (aor. ajjhupāhari = ajjhohari C.).

adhi + upa + hṛ; cp. upaharati

Ajjhupekkhati

1. to look on AN i.257; Mil 275.

2. to look on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of AN iv.45 (kaṭṭh’aggi, has to be looked after); Pv-a 149 (sisaṃ colaṃ vā).

3. to look on indifferently to be indifferent to neglect Vin ii.78 = Vin iii.162, cp. Ja i.147; MN i.155 MN ii.223; AN iii.194, AN iii.435; Ja v.229; Dhp-a iv.125.

adhi + upa + ikṣ; cp. BSk. adhyupekṣati

Ajjhupekkhana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) care, diligence, attention Pts i.16; Pts ii.119; Vb 230 sq. Dhp-a iv.3.

abstr. from ajjhupekkhati

Ajjhupekkhitar

one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer caretaker SN v.69 (sādhukaṃ), 324 (id.), 331 sq. Vb 227.

n. ag. to ajjhupekkhati

Ajjhupeti

to go to meet, to receive Ja iv.440.

cp. Sk. abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i

Ajjheti

to be anxious about, to fret, worry Snp 948 (socati + ); expld at Nd i.433 by nijjhāyati, at Snp-a 568 by abhijjhati (gloss BB gijjhati).

Sk. ādhyāyati, Denom. fr. adhyāya

Ajjhena

(nt.) study (esp. of the Vedas) MN iii.1; Ja ii.327 (as v.l. to be preferred to ajjhesanā); iii.114 (= japa); v.10 (pl. = vede) vi.201 = 207; Vb 353; Snp-a 314 (mant’).

-kujja (˚kūta v.l.?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Snp 242 cp. Snp-a 286.

Sk. adhyayana, see also ajjhayana

Ajjhesati

to request, ask, bid Dhp-a iv.18; aor. ajjhesi Vin ii.200; pp ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; (q.v.), with which cp. pariyiṭṭha & ˚esita.

adhi + iṣ; cp. BSk. adhyeṣate Divy 160

Ajjhesanā

(f.) request, entreaty Vin i.6 = DN ii.38 = SN i.138; Ja ii.327 (better v.l. ajjhena).

see ajjhesati

Ajjhesita

requested, asked, bidden Nd ii.16 (= ajjhiṭṭha).

pp. of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiṭṭha

Ajjhokāsa

the open air, only in loc. ajjhokāse in the open Vin i.15; SN i.212; Dhp-a iv.100.

adhi + okāsa

Ajjhogāḷha

plunged into, immersed; having entered MN i.457; SN i.201; Mil 348.

pp. of ajjhogāhati

Ajjhogāhati

(& ˚gāheti) to plunge into, to enter, to go into DN i.101 (vanaṃ), 222 (samuddaṃ); MN i.359, MN i.536; AN iii.75 AN iii.368; AN iv.356; AN v.133; Vin iii.18; Ja i.7; Nd i.152 (ogāhati + ); Mil 87 (samuddaṃ); 300 (vanaṃ) ■ pp. ajjhogāḷha (q.v.). Cp. pariyogāhati.

Sk. *abhyavagāhate; adhi (= abhi) + ava + gāh

Ajjhoṭhapeti

to bring to Pv-a 148 (gāmaṃ), where we should read ˚ṭṭhapeti.

adhi + ava + ṭhapeti, Caus. of sthā

Ajjhotthata

spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered Ja i.363 (ajjhottaṭa) 410; v.91 (= adhipanna); Dhp-a i.278; Pv-a 55; Dāvs v.5.

pp. of ajjhottharati

Ajjhottharati

to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin i.111; Ja i.61, Ja i.72, Ja i.73; Mil 296, Mil 336; Dhp i.264; Pass. ˚tthariyati to be overrun with (instr.), to be smothered, to be flooded AN iii.92 = Pp 67; aor. ajjhotthari Vv-a 48 (gāmapadeso: was flooded). pp. ajjhotthata (q.v.).

adhi + ava + stṛ;

Ajjhopanna

(?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q.v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosāna seems to be clearer and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosāna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old-standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v.l. to MN i.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB (= adhi-opanna). The MSS. of Nd ii.clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS substitution of p for s (see Nd ii.Introd. xix.). Besides this mixture of vv.ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv.ll. ajjhāpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosāna (q.v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhāpanna, from which it took the ā and p. Cp. also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts.

1. ajjhopanna as T. reading: MN i.162, MN i.173, MN i.369; AN i.74; AN ii.28 AN iii.68, AN iii.242; Md 75, 76; DN-a i.59; as v.l.: DN i.245. 2. ajjhosāna as v.l.: AN i.74 (C. expls. ajjhosāya gilitvā ṭhita); Nd ii.under nissita & passim; Ud 75, Ud 76 (ajjhosanna); DN-a i.59 (id.).

3. ajjhāpanna as T. reading DN i.245; DN iii.43, DN iii.46; SN ii.194, SN ii.270: iv.332 (ajjhapaṇṇa) AN v.178, AN v.181; Nd ii.under nissita; Mil 401; as v.l. MN i.162; AN iii.242; Ud 75, Ud 76.

Ajjhobhavati

to overcome, overpower, destroy Ja ii.80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.).

adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi˚

Ajjhomaddati

to crush down AN iv.191, AN iv.193.

adhi + ava + mṛd

Ajjhomucchita

stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) AN iii.57 sq (v.l. ajjhomuñcïta or ˚muccita better: sarīre attached to her body, clinging to her b.).

pp. adhi + ava + mūrch, cp. adhimuccita

Ajjholambati

to hang or hold on to (acc.), to cling to SN iii.137; MN iii.164 = Ne 179 cp. Sdhp 284 & 296.;

adhi + ava + lamb

Ajjhosa

= ajjhosāya, in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to SN iv.73; Thag 98, Thag 794.

Ajjhosati

to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. Fut. ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) MN i.328 (c. acc. paṭhaviṃ, better as ajjhesati). grd. ajjhositabha MN i.109 (+ abhinanditabba, v.l. ˚etabba); Dhs-a 5 (id.); ger. ajjhosāya (q.v.) pp. ajjhosita (q.v.).

adhi + ava + sayati, , to bind, pp. sita: see ajjhosita

Ajjhosāna

(nt.) cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, DN ii.58 sq.; DN iii.289; MN i.498 (+ abhinandana); SN iii.187; AN i.66; AN ii.11 (diṭṭhi˚, kāma˚ + taṇhā). In combn. with (icchā) and mucchā at Nd ii.under chanda & nissita and taṇhā (see also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs 1059 of lābha (the expl;n. at Dhs-a 363, Dhs-a 370, from as to eat, is popular etym.) Ne 23 sq. (of taṇhā).

Ajjhosāya

being tied to, hanging on, attached to only in phrase a. tiṭṭhati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy MN i.266; SN iv.36 sq.; 60, 71 sq.; Mil 69. See also ajjhosa.

ger. of ajjhosati, cp. BSk. adhyavasāya tiṣṭhati Divy 37, Divy 534

Ajjhosita

hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. loc.) SN ii.94 (+ mamāyita); AN ii.25 (diṭṭha suta muta + ); Nd i.75 Nd i.106, Nd i.163 = Nd ii.under nissita; Thig 470 (asāre = taṇhāvasena abhiniviṭṭha Thag-a 284); Pv iv.84 (mayhaṃ ghare taṇhābhinivisena abhiniviṭṭha Pv-a 267; v.l. BB ajjhesita SS ajjhāsita). -an˚; SN iv.213; SN v.319; Nd i.411; Mil 74 (pabbajita).

cp. Sk. adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + ; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sk. śrita, also through likeness of meaning with esita; see ajjhāsita & ajjhesita

Ajjhohata

having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisaṃ maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook).

pp. of ajjhoharati

Ajjhoharaṇa

(nt.) = ajjhohāra 1. AN v.324; Ja vi.213.

Ajjhoharaṇiya

(adj.) something fit to eat, eatable, for eating Ja vi.258; Dhp-a i.284.

grd. of ajjhoharati

Ajjhoharati

to swallow, eat, take as food MN i.245; Ja i.460; Ja ii.293 Ja vi.205, Ja vi.213; Mil 366; Pv-a 283 (aor.)-pp. ajjhohaṭa (q.v.).

Sk. abhyavaharati; adhi (= abhi) + ava + hṛ;

Ajjhohāra

1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin iv.233; Mil 176, Mil 366.

2. N of a fabulous fish (swallower”; cp. timingala) Ja v.462.

Sk. abhyavahāra

Añcati

Ja i.417, read añchati (see next).

Añchati

to pull, drag, pull along to turn on a lathe DN ii.291 (bhamakāro dīghaṃ a., where K has note: añjanto ti pi acchanto ti pi pātho) = MN i.56 (vv.ll. p. 532 acch˚ & añj˚); Thag 750 (añcāmi T., v.l aññāmi). Añchati should also be read at Ja i.417 for udakaṃ añcanti (in expln. of udañcanī pulling the water up from a well, q.v.), where it corresponds to udakaṃ ākkaḍḍhati in the same sentence.

in meaning = ākaḍḍhati, which latter is also the Sk. gloss (ākārṣayati) to the Jain Prk. aṃchāvei = añchati see Morris, J. P. T. S. 1893, 60

Añja

(adv.) [orig. imper. of añjati1; cp. Sk. anjasā (instr.) quickly, Goth. anaks suddenly, lit. with a pull or jerk pull on! go on! gee up! Ja i.192.

Añjati1

. See añja, añjaya, añjali, añjasa.

= Sk. ṛñjati, ṛjyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sk. ṛju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. ὀρέγω Lat. rego, rectus = erect. See also P. uju, añchati, ajjita ānañja-ānejja

Añjati2 & Añjeti;

to smear, anoint, paint SN ii.281; Ja iv.219 (akkhīni añjetvā, v.l. BB añcitvā). Caus. ii. añjāpeti Dhp-a i.21. pp. añjita (q.v.).

= Sk. añjayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. añji ointment, ājya butter; Lat. unguo to anoint, unguentum ointment; Ohg. ancho = Ger. Anke butter

Añjana

(nt.) ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adj. anointed, smeary glossy, black (cp. kaṇha ii. and kāla1 note).

1. Vin i.203 (five kinds viz. kāḷ˚, ras˚, sot˚, geruka, kapalla) DN i.7, DN i.12; DN-a i.98 (khār˚); 284; Dhp-a iii.354 (akkhi eye-salve).

2. glossy, jet-black Ja i.194; Ja ii.369; Ja v.416. The reading añjana at AN iv.468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamattaṃ. See also pacc˚. In meaning collyrium box at Thig 413 (= añjana-nāḷi Thag-a 267); Dhp-a ii.25.

-akkhiha with anointed eyes Thag 960. -upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin i.203; Vin ii.112. -cuṇṇa aromatic powder Dhs-a 13. -nāḷi an ointment tube, collyrium box Thag-a 267. -rukkha Name of a tree (“black tree) Ja i.331. -vaṇṇa of the colour of collyrium, i.e. shiny, glossy, dark, black DN ii.18 (lomāni); Ja i.138 (kesā) 194; ii.369; Pv-a 258 (vana).

from añjati2

Añjanī

(f.) a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin i.203, Vin i.204; Vin ii.135; Vin iv.168; MN ii.65 = Thag 773.

fr. añjana

Añjanisalākā

(f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin i.203; Vin ii.135; Ja iii.419.

Añjaya

(adj.) straight Ja iii.12 (vv.ll. ajjava & and ājjava better?) expl;d by C. as ujuka, akuṭila. See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for añjasa?

from añjati1

Añjali

extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. E. to “tender” one’s respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (Vv-a 7: dasanakha-samodhāna-samujjalaṃ añjaliṃ paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) añjaliṃ paṇāmeti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin ii.188; DN i.118; Snp 352; Snp p.79 (b.) ˚ṃ paggaṇhāti to perform the a. salutation Ja i.54; Dhp-a iv.212; Vv-a 7, Vv-a 312 (sirasmiṃ on one’s head) Pv-a 93. (c.) ˚ṃ karoti id. Pv-a 178; cp. katañjali (adj. with raised hands Snp 1023; Ja i.17; Pv-a 50, and añjalikata id. Pv ii.1220. Cp. pañjali

-kamma respectful salutation, as above AN i.123; AN ii.180 AN iv.130; Vv 788, 8316; Dhp-a i.32. -karaṇīya (adj.) that is worthy of being thus honoured DN iii.5; AN ii.34; AN iii.36 AN iv.13 sq.; Iti 88.

cp. Sk. añjali, fr. añjati1

Añjalikā

(f.) the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (expld at Vv-a 24 as dasanakha-samodhāna samujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇa-visiṭṭhānaṃ apacayānaṃ akāsiṃ).

= añjali

Añjasa

straight, straightforward (of a road) DN i.235; Ja i.5; Thig 99; Vv 5020 (cp. Vv-a 215); Vv-a 84 (akuṭila); Mvu 25, Mvu 5; Mil 217; Sdhp 328, Sdhp 595. Cp pañjasa.

Sk. āñjasa (?). Cp. ārjava = P. ajjava, see añjati1 & añjaya

Añjita

smeared, anointed Ja i.77 (su-añjitāni akkhīni); iv.421 (añjit’akkha).

Sk. ankta & añjayita, pp. of añjeti

Añña

(pron.) another etc ■ A. By itself: 1. other not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp oneself) Vin iii.144 (aññena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route); Snp 459, Snp 789, Snp 904; Dhp 158 (opp attānaṃ), 165; Ja i.151 (opp. attano); ii.333 (aññaṃ vyākaroti give a diff. answer).

2. another one, a second nt. else, further Snp 1052 (= uttariṃ nt. Nd ii.17); else Ja i.294. aññaṃ kiñci (indef.) anything else Ja i.151. yo añño every other, whoever else Ja i.256.

3. aññe (pl. (the) others, the rest Snp 189, Snp 663, Snp 911; Dhp 43, Dhp 252 Dhp 355; Ja i.254 ■ B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. añña. añña the one … the other (… the third etc.); this, that & the other; some … some Vin i.15; Mil 40; etc. 2. reciprocative añño aññaṃ, aññamaññaṃ, aññoññaṃ one another, each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adj. in; sg.; cp Gr. ἀλλήλων, αλλήλους in pl.). (a.) añño aññaṃ Dhp 165 (b.) aññamañña (cp. BSk. añyamañya Mvu ii.436) as pron.: n’ālaṃ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā DN i.56 = SN iii.211. n’aññamaññassa dukkhaṃ iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Snp 148. daṇḍehi aññamaññaṃ upakkamanti (approach each other) MN i.86 = Nd ii.199 ˚ṃ agāravo viharati AN iii.247. dve janā ˚ṃ ghātayiṃsu (slew each other) Ja i.254. aññamaññaṃ hasanti Ja v.111 ˚ṃ musale hantvā Ja v.267. ˚ṃ daṇḍâbhigāṭena Pv-a 58 or adj.: aññamaññaṃ veraṃ bandhiṃsu (established mutual enmity) Ja ii.353; ˚ṃ piyasaṃvāsaṃ vasiṃsu Ja ii.153; aññamaññaṃ accayaṃ desetvā (their mutual mistake) Dhp-a i.57 or adv. dve pi aññamaññaṃ paṭibaddha citta ahesuṃ (in love with each other) Ja iii.188; or ˚- aññamañña-paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Pts ii.49, Pts ii.58. (c.) aññoñña (˚-) Ja v.251 (˚nissita); Dāvs v.45 (˚bhinna)

3. disjunctive añña… añña one… the other, this one… that one, different, different from aññaṃ jīvaṃ. aññaṃ sarīraṃ one is the soul… the other is the body i.e. the soul is different from the body DN i.157; MN i.430; AN v.193; aññā va saññā bhavissati añño attā DN i.187 Thus also in phrase aññena aññaṃ opposite, the contrary differently, contradictory (lit. other from that which is other) Vin ii.85 (paṭicarati make counter-charges); DN i.57 (vyākāsi gave the opposite or contradictory reply) Mil 171 (aññaṃ kayiramānaṃ aññena sambharati). anañña (1) not another, i.e. the same, self-same, identical MN i.256 (= ayaṃ) ■ (2) not anotber, i.e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Snp 65 (˚posin; opp. paraṃ) = Nd 4 cp. Nd ii.36 ■ (3) not another, i.e. no more, only, alone Snp p.106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti anaññā: and no other or no more, only two). See also under cpds.

-ādisa different Ja vi.212, ˚tā difference Pv-a 243 -khantika acquiescing in diff. views, following another faith (see khantika) DN i.187; MN i.487. -titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non-Buddhist.; DN iii.115; MN i.494, MN i.512; P ii.21, 32 sq., 119; iii.116 sq.; iv.51, 228 v.6, 27 sq.; AN i.65, AN i.240; AN ii.176; AN iv.35 sq.; Vin i.60; Ja i.93; Ja ii.415. -diṭṭhika having diff. views (combd. with añña-khantika) DN i.187; MN i.487. -neyya (an˚) not to be guided by somebody else, i.e. independent in one’s views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opp. para˚) Snp 55, Snp 213, Snp 364. -mano (an˚) (adj.) not setting one’s heart upon others Vv 115 (see Vv-a 58) -vāda holding other views, an˚ (adj.) Dpvs iv.24. -vādaka one who gives a diff. account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin iv.36. -vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent-minded Vin iv.269; Dhp-a iii.352, Dhp-a iii.381; ˚tā distraction, absentmindedness Dhp-a i.181. -saraṇa (an˚) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i.e. of independent, sure knowledge SN iii.42 = SN v.154. -sita dependent or relying on others Snp 825.

Vedic anya, with compar. suff. ya; Goth. anpar; Ohg. andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Gr. α ̓́λλος (α ̓́λjος), Lat. alius (cp. alter) Goth. aljis Ags. elles = E. else. From demonstr. base *eno, see na1 and cp. a3

Aññatama

(pron. adj.) one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mvu 38, Mvu 14.

añña + superl. suff. tama; see also aññatara

Aññatara

(pron. adj.) one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka as indef. article “a”. Very frequent, e.g. Snp 35, Snp 210; Iti 103; Dhp 137, Dhp 157; Ja i.221, Ja i.253; Ja ii.132 etc. devaññatara a certain god, i.e. any kind of god SN iv.180 = AN iv.461.

Sk. anyatara, añña + compar. suff. tara, cp. Lat. alter, Goth. anpar etc.

Aññattha

(adv.) somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) Ja i.291; Ja ii.154; Dhs-a 163; Dhp-a i.212; Dhp-a iii.351; Pv-a 45; Mvu 4, Mvu 37; Mvu 22, Mvu 14.

from añña = aññatra, adv. of place, cp. kattha, ettha

Aññatra

(adv.) elsewhere, somewhere else Ja v.252; Pv iv.162. In compn. also añña˚, e.g. aññatra-yoga (adj.) following another discipline DN i.187; MN i.487 ■ As prep. c. abl. (and instr.) but besides, except, e.g. a. iminā tapo-pakkamena DN i.168 kiṃ karaṇīyaṃ a. dhammacariyāya SN i.101; ko nu aññatram-ariyehi who else but the Nobles Snp 886 (= ṭhapetvā saññā-mattena Snp-a 555). -kiṃ aññatra what but, i.e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for DN i.90 (vusitavā-mānī k. a. avusitattā); SN i.29 (k. k. a adassanā except from blindness); Snp 206 (id.).

anya + tra, see also aññattha

Aññathatta

(nt.) 1. change, alteration SN iii.37; SN iv.40; AN i.153; AN iii.66; Kv 227 (= jarā C, cp Kvu trsl. 55 n. 2); Mil 209.

2. difference Ja i.147; Iti 11.

3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin ii.2; SN iii.91; SN iv.329.

4. fickleness, change of mind, doubt wavering, MN i.448, MN i.457 (+ domanassa); Ja i.33 (cittaṃ) Pv-a 195 (cittassa).

aññathā + tta

Aññathā

(adv.) in a different manner, otherwise, differently SN i.24; Snp 588, Snp 757; Dhs-a 163; Pv-a 125, Pv-a 133. anaññathā without mistake Vv 4418; anaññatha (nt.) certainty, truth Pts ii.104 (= tatha).

-bhāva (1) a different existence AN ii.10; Iti 9 = Iti 94; Snp 729, Snp 740, Snp 752; (2) a state of difference; i.e. change alteration, unstableness DN i.36; SN ii.274; SN iii.8, SN iii.16, SN iii.42 Vb 379. -bhāvin based on difference SN iii.225 sq. SN iv.23 sq., 66 sq.; an˚ free from difference Vin i.36.

añña + thā

Aññadatthu

(adv.) part. of affirmation = surely, all-round absolutely (ekaṃsa-vacane nipāto DN-a i.111) only, at any rate DN i.91; DN ii.284; Snp 828 (na h’ aññadatth’ atthi pasaṃsa-lābhā, expld. Snp-a 541 as na hi ettha pasaṃsa-lābhato añño attho atthi, cp. also Nd i.168); Mil 133; Vv-a 58; Pv-a 97, Pv-a 114.

-dasa sure-seeing, seeing everything, all pervading DN i.18; DN iii.135, DN iii.185; AN ii.24; AN iii.202; AN iv.89, AN iv.105; Iti 15.

lit. aññad atthu let there be anything else, i.e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all everything, surely

Aññadā

(adv.) at another time, else, once SN iv.285; Ja v.12; Dhp-a iv.125.

añña + dā, cp. kadā, tadā, yadā

Aññā

(f.) knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 n. 3 and Psalms of Brethren introd. xxxiii.) MN i.445; SN i.4 (sammad˚), 24 (aññāya nibbuta); ii.221; v.69, 129 (diṭṭh’eva dhamme) 133, 237; AN iii.82, AN iii.143, AN iii.192; AN v.108; Iti 39 sq., 53, 104; Dhp 75, Dhp 96; Kp vii.11; Mil 334aññaṃ vyākaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin i.183; SN ii.51 sq., 120; iv.139; v.222; Ja i.140; Ja ii.333. See also arahatta.

-atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv iv.114. -ārādhana the attainment of full insight MN i.479. -indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect DN iii.219; SN v.204; Iti 53; Pp 2; Dhs 362 Dhs 505, Dhs 552; Ne 15, Ne 54, Ne 60. -citta the thought of gnosis the intention of gaining Arahantship SN ii.267; AN iii.437 -paṭivedha comprehension of insight Vin ii.238. -vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Snp 1105, Snp 1107 (Nd ii.19: vuccati arahatta-vimokkho).

Sk. ājñā, = ā + jñā, cp. ājānāti

Aññāṇa

(nt.) ignorance; see ñāṇa 3 e.

a + ñāṇa

Aññāṇaka

(nt.) ignorance Vin iv.144.

DemiName of aññāṇa

Aññāṇin

(adj.) ignorant, not knowing Dhp-a iii.106.

a + ñāṇin

Aññāta1

known, recognised Snp 699. an˚; what is not known, in phrase anaññāta-ññassāmī’ t’ indriya the faculty of him (who believes): “I shall know what is not known (yet)” DN iii.219; SN v.204; Iti 53 Pp 2; Dhs 296 (cp. Dhs trsl.86); Ne 15, Ne 54, Ne 60, Ne 191.

-mānin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge one who imagines to be in possession of right insight AN iii.175 sq.; Thag 953.

pp. of ājānāti, q.v.

Aññāta2

unknown, see ñāta.

a + ñāta

Aññātaka1

he who is not a kinsman Dhp-a i.222.

a + ñātaka, cp. Sk. ajñāti

Aññātaka2

(adj.) unknown, unrecognisable, only in phrase ˚vesena in unknown form, in disguise Ja i.14; Ja iii.116; Ja v.102.

DemiName of aññāta2

Aññātar

one who knows, a knower of DN ii.286; MN i.169; SN i.106 (dhammassa); Kv 561.

n. ag. to ājānāti

Aññātāvin

(adj.-n.) one who has complete insight Dhs-a 291.

-indriya (˚tāv’ indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs trsl. 150) and same loci as under aññindriya (see aññā).

from ājānāti

Aññātukāma

(adj.) desirous of gaining right knowledge AN iii.192. See ājānāti.

ā + jñātuṃ + kāma

Aññāya

reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of SN i.24; AN iii.41; Dhp 275, Dhp 411.

ger. of ājānāti, q.v. for detail

Aññoñña

see añña B 2 c.

Añhamāna

eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Snp 240; all MSS at 239 have asamāna. Snp-a 284 expls. by āhārayamāna.

Sk. aśnāna, ppr. med. of aśnāti, to eat

Aṭaṭa

Name of a certain purgatory or Niraya AN v.173 = Snp p.126.

BSk. aṭaṭa (e.g. Divy 67), prob. to aṭ; roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd i.405 bottom

Aṭaṇaka

(adj.) roaming about, wild Ja v.105 (˚gāvī).

cp. Sk. aṭana, to aṭ;

Aṭanī

(f.) a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin iv.168; Sām. Pās. on Pāc. 14 (quoted Min Pāt. 86 and Vin iv.357); Dhp-a i.234; Ja ii.387, Ja ii.425, Ja ii.484 supports of a seat. Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69 compares Marāthi aḍaṇī a three-legged stand. See also Vin Texts ii.53.

Aṭala

(adj.) solid, firm, strong, only in phrase; aṭaliyo upāhanā strong sandals MN ii.155 (vv.ll. paṭaliye & agaliyo) = SN i.226 (vv.ll. āṭaliyo & āṭaliko). At the latter passage Bdhgh. expl;s. gaṇangaṇ-ûpāhanā, Mrs. Rh. D. (Kindred Sayings i.291) trsls “buskined shoes”.

cp. Sk. aṭṭa & aṭṭālaka stronghold

Aṭavī

(f.) 1. forest, woods Ja i.306; Ja ii.117; Ja iii.220; Dhp-a i.13; Pv-a 277. 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe Ja vi.55 (= aṭavicorā C.).

-rakkhika guardian of the forest Ja ii.335. -saṅkhepa at AN i.178 = AN iii.66 is prob. faulty reading for v.l. ˚sankopa “inroad of savage tribes”.

Sk. aṭavī: Non-Aryan, prob. Dravidian

Aṭṭa1

a platform to be used as a watchtower Vin i.140; DN-a i.209.

cp. see aṭṭaka

Aṭṭa2

lawsuit, case, cause Vin iv.224; Ja ii.2, Ja ii.75; Ja iv.129 (˚ṃ vinicchināti to judge a cause), 150 (˚ṃ tīreti to see a suit through); vi.336.

cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b

Aṭṭa3

distressed, tormented afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Snp 694 (+ vyasanagata Snp-a 489 ātura); Thig 439 (= aṭṭita Thag-a 270), 441 (= pīḷita Thag-a 271); Ja iv.293 (= ātura C.); Vv 809 (attita upadduta Vv-a 311). Often-˚: iṇaṭṭa oppressed by debt MN i.463; Mil 32; chāt˚ tormented by hunger Vv-a 76; vedan˚ afflicted by pain Vin ii.61; Vin iii.100; Ja i.293; sūcik˚ (read for sūcikaṭṭha) pained by stitch Pv iii.23.

-ssara cry of distress Vin iii.105; SN ii.255; Ja i.265 Ja ii.117; Mil 357; Pv-a 285.

Sk. ārta, pp. of ardati, ṛd to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk. ārdra (= P. adda and alla); Gr. α ̓́ρδω to moisten α ̓́ρδα dirt. See also aṭṭīyati & aṭṭita

Aṭṭaka

a platform to be used as a watchhouse on piles, or in a tree Vin i.173; Vin ii.416; Vin iii.322 Vin iii.372; DN-a i.209.

DemiName of aṭṭa1

Aṭṭāna

at Vin ii.106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Bdhgh as aṭṭhāna? (cp. Bdhgh on p. 315).

Aṭṭāla

a watch-tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (koṭṭhaka) Thag 863; Ja iii.160 Ja v.373; Mil 1, Mil 330; Dhp-a iii.488.

from aṭṭa

Aṭṭālaka

= aṭṭāla; Ja ii.94, Ja ii.220, Ja ii.224; Ja vi.390, Ja vi.433; Mil 66, Mil 81.

Sk. aṭṭālaka

Aṭṭita

(& occasionally; addita, e.g. Pv ii.62; Thig 77, Thig 89; Thag 406) pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Thag 157; Ja ii.436; Ja iv.85 (v.l. addhita); v.84; Vv-a 311; Thag-a 270 Mvu 1, Mvu 25; Mvu 6, Mvu 21; Dpvs i.66; ii.23; xiii.9; Sdhp 205. See remarks of Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 104, & 1887. 47.; Attiyati & Attiyati;

Sk. ardita, pp. of ardayati, Caus. of ardati see aṭṭa3

Aṭṭiyati & Aṭṭiyati

to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually combd. with harāyati, e.g. DN i.213 (+ jigucchati); SN i.131; MN i.423; Pv i.102 (= aṭṭā dukkhitā Pv-a 48) freq. in ppr. aṭṭiyamāna harayāmāna (+ jigucchamāna Vin ii.292; Ja i.66, Ja i.292; Iti 43; Nd ii.566; Pts i.159. Spelling sometimes addiyāmi, e.g. Thig 140 ■ pp. aṭṭita & addita.;

Denom. fr. aṭṭa3, q.v.

Aṭṭiyana

(nt.) fright, terror, amazement Dhp-a ii.179.

cp. Sk. ardana, to aṭṭiyati

Aṭṭha1

num. card, eight, decl. like pl. of adj. in-a A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena: see cpds. ˚angula, ˚nakha, ˚pada, ˚pāda B. The number in subjective significance ■ (1) As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in meaning “a couple” aṭṭha matakukkuṭe aṭṭha jīva-k. gahetvā (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) Dhp-a i.213. sanghassa a salākabhattaṃ dāpesi Vv-a 75 = Dhp-a iii.104. a. piṇḍapātāni adadaṃ Vv 348. a. vattha-yugāni (a double pair as offering) Pv-a 232, a therā Pv-a 32 ■ The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is freq. applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (23). Thus a “royal” gift goes under the name of sabb-aṭṭhakaṃ dānaṃ (8 elephants, 8 horses 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars Dhp-a ii.45, Dhp-a ii.46, Dhp-a ii.71. In the same sense aṭṭh’ aṭṭha kahāpaṇā (as gift) Dhp-a ii.41; aṭṭh-aṭṭhakā dibbākaññā Vv 673 (= catusaṭṭhi Vv-a 290); aṭṭhaṭṭhaka Dpvs vi.56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a “couple” in the phrase satt-aṭṭha 7 or 8 = a couple e.g. sattaṭṭha divasā, a weck or so Ja i.86; Ja ii.101; Vv-a 264 (saṃvaccharā years) ■ (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus freq. as aṭṭha kahāpaṇā Ja i.483; Ja iv.138; Vv-a 76; Mil 291 ■ In distances: a karīsā Dhp-a ii.80; Dhp-a iv.217; Pv-a 258; a. usabhā Ja iv.142. (c.) in combn. with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of “a great many”, hundreds, thousands. Thus aṭṭha sataṃ 800, Snp 227. As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a-˚sata-sahassa-vibhava Dhp-a iv.7. But aṭṭhasata at SN iv.232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at Ja v.377aṭṭha sahassaṃ 8000; Ja v.39 (nāgā). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in combn. with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): (α) 80 (asīti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahāpurisa (see anuvyañjana), besides the 32 main signs (see dvattiṃsa) Vv-a 213 etc. Freq. as measure of riches, e.g. 80 waggon loads Pv ii.75; asīti-koṭivibhava Dhp-a iii.129; Pv-a 196; asīti hatth’ ubbedho rāsi (of gold Vv-a 66, etc. See further references under asīti ■ (β) The foll. are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 aṭṭhādasa (only MN iii.239: manopavicārā) & aṭṭhārasa (this the later form) Vv-a 213 (avenika-buddhadhammā: Bhagavant’s qualities); as measure Ja vi.432 (18 hands high of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: aṭṭhārasa koṭiyo or ˚koṭi, 18 koṭis Ja i.92 (of gold), 227; iv.378 (˚dhana riches); Dhp-a ii.43 (of people); Mil 20 (id.); a. akkhohini-sankhāsenā Ja vi.395. a. vatthū Vin ii.20428 aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni Nd i.382; paṭisallāṇaguṇā Mil 14038 aṭṭhatiṃsā Mil 359 (rājaparisā) ■ 48 aṭṭhacattārīsaṃ vassāni Snp 28968 aṭṭhasaṭṭhi Thag 1217 ˚sitā savitakkā, where id. p. at SN i.187 however reads atha saṭṭhi-tasitā vitakkā); Ja i.64 (turiya-satasahassāni) 98 aṭṭhanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. iv.15; Snp 311 (rogā, a higher set than the original 3 diseases cp. navuti) ■ (2) As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aṭṭha denotes, like dasa (q.v.) a comprehensive unity. See esp. the cpds for this application. ˚aṃsa and ˚aṅgika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aṭṭha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp 8 X 8 under 1 a)-Ja v.409 (a. mangalena samannāgata of Indra’s chariot: with the 8 lucky signs); Vv-a 193 (aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaṃ manussabhāvaṃ: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: Ja iv.3 (aṭṭha petiyo, following after 4, then foll. by 8, 16, 32); Pv-a 75 (a. kapparukkhā at each point of the compass, 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language Dhp-a iv.3.

-aṃsa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry (see above B. 2), of a diamond DN i.76 = MN iii.121 (maṇi veḷuriyo a.); Mil 282 (maṇiratanaṃ subhaṃ jātimantaṃ a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimāna) Ja vi.127 = Ja vi.173 = Vv 782 (a. sukatā thambhā); Vv 8415 (āyataṃsa = āyatā hutvā aṭṭha-soḷasadvattiṃsādi-aṃsavanto Vv-a 339). Of a ball of string Pv iv.328 (gulaparimaṇḍala, cp. Pv-a 254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs 617. -aṅga (of) eight parts, eightfold, consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (see also next and above B 2 on significance of aṭṭha in this connection), in compn. with ˚upeta characterised by the eight parts (i.e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows, see sīla & cp. anga 2), of; uposatha the fast-day AN i.215; Snp 402 (Snp-a 378 expls. ekam pi divasaṃ apariccajanto aṭṭhangupetaṃ uposathaṃ upavassa) cp. aṭṭhanguposathin (adj.) Mvu 36, Mvu 84. In BSk. always in phrase aṣṭānga-samanvāgata upavāsa, e.g. Divy 398 Sp. Avs i.338, Avs i.399; also vrata Avs i.170. In the same sense aṭṭhangupeta pāṭihāriyapakkha (q.v.) Snp 402, where Vv 156 has ˚susamāgata (expld. at Vv-a 72 by pānāṭipātā veramaṇī-ādīhi aṭṭhah’ angehi samannāgata). ˚samannāgata endowed with the eight qualities (see anga 3), of rājā, a king DN i.137 sq., of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) DN ii.211; Ja i.95; Vv-a 217. Also in Buddh. Sk. aṣṭāngopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e.g. Sp. Avs i.149. -aṅgika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts embracing eight items (see above B 2); of the uposatha (as in prec. aṭṭhang’ uposatha) Snp 401; of the “Eightfold Noble Path” (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in BSk. as aṣṭāngika mārga, e.g. Lal 540, cp. aṣṭāngamārgadeśika of the Buddha, Divy 124, Divy 265); DN i.156, DN i.157 DN i.165; MN i.118; Iti 18; Snp 1130 (magga uttama); Dhp 191 Dhp 273; Thig 158, Thig 171; Kp iv.; Vin i.10; Nd ii.485; DN-a i.313; Dhp-a iii.402. -aṅgula eight finger-breadths thick eight inches thick, i.e. very thick, of double thickness Ja ii.91 (in contrast to caturangula); Mvu 29, Mvu 11 (with sattangula). -aḍḍha (v.l. aḍḍhaṭṭha) half of eight, i.e. four (˚pāda) Ja vi.354, see also aḍḍha1. -nakha having eight nails or claws Ja vi.354 (: ekekasmiṃ pāde dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ khurānaṃ vasena C.). -nava eight or nine Dhp-a iii.179. -pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., lit. having eight squares, i.e. on each side (DN-a i.85: ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assā ti), cp. dasapada DN i.6.

2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross-plaited (of hair) Thag 772 (aṭṭhāpada-katā kesā); Ja ii.5 (˚ṭṭhapana = cross-plaiting). -padaka a small square (1/8), i.e. a patch Vin i.297; Vin ii.150. -pāda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) Ja v.377 Ja vi.538; cp. Sk. aṣṭapāda = śarabha a fabulous eight-legged animal. -maṅgala having eight anspicious signs Ja v.409 (expld. here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs). -vaṅka with eight facets, lit. eight-crooked i.e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel Ja vi.388. -vidha eightfold Dhs 219.

Vedic aṣṭau, old dual, Idg. *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (see also nava); Av. ašta Gr. ὀκτώ, Lat. octo, Goth. ahtau = Ohg. ahto, Ger. acht E. eight

Aṭṭha2

see attha.

Aṭṭhaka

(adj.)

1. eightfold Vin i.196 = Ud 59 (˚vaggikāni); Vv-a 75 = Dhp-a iii.104 (˚bhatta).

2 ˚ā (f.) the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aṭṭhamī), in phrase rattīsu antar’aṭṭhakāsu in the nights between the eighths, i.e. the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin i.31, Vin i.288 (see Vin Texst i.130n); MN i.79; AN i.136; Mil 396; Ja i.390.

3. ˚ṃ (nt.) an octad Vv 672 (aṭṭh eight octads = 64); Vv-a 289, Vv-a 290. On sabbaṭṭhaka see aṭṭha B 1 a. See also antara.

Sk. aṣṭaka

Aṭṭhama

(num. ord.) the eighth Snp 107, Snp 230 (cp. Kp-a 187), 437 ■ f. ˚ī the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. aṭṭhakā) AN i.144; Snp 402; Vv 166 (in all three pass. as pakkhassa cātuddasī pañcadasī ca aṭṭhamī); AN i.142; Snp 570 (ito atthami scil. divase, loc.).

Sk. aṣṭama, see aṭṭha1

Aṭṭhamaka

= aṭṭhama the eighth.

1. lit. Mil 291 (att˚ self-eighth).

2. as tt. the eighth of eight persons who strive after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotāpanna (q.v. Kv 243

251 (cp. Kvu trsl. 146 sq.); Ne 19, Ne 49, Ne 50; Pts ii.193 (+ sotāpanna).

Aṭṭhāna

(nt.) stand, post; name of the rubbing-post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares was let into the ground of a bathing-place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin ii.105, Vin ii.106 (read aṭṭhāne with BB; cp. Vin ii.315).

ā + ṭṭhāna

Aṭṭhi˚1

, in comb;n. with katvā: to make something one’s attha, i.e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā DN ii.204; MN i.325, MN i.445; SN i.112 sq. = 189, 220; v.76; AN ii.116; AN iii.163; Ja i.189; Ja v.151 (: attano atthikabhāvaṃ katvā atthiko hutvā sakkaccaṃ suṇeyya C.); Ud 80 (: adhikicca ayaṃ no attho adhigantabbo evaṃ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā C.); Sdhp 220 (˚katvāna).

= attha (aṭṭha) in compn. with kar & bhū, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti-kata (for citta˚) angi-bhūta (for anga˚); cp. the freq. combn. (with similar meaning) manasi-kata (besides manasā-k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combn. is restricted to the pp and der. (˚kata & ˚katvā). Other expl;ns. by Morris J. P. T. S 1886, 107; Windisch, M. & B. 100

Aṭṭhi2

(nt.) 1. a bone AN i.50; AN iv.129; Snp 194 (˚nahāru bones tendons); Dhp 149, Dhp 150; Ja i.70; Ja iii.26, Ja iii.184; Ja vi.448 (˚vedhin) Dhp-a iii.109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suśruta iii.5); Kp-a 49; Pv-a 68 (˚camma-nahāru), 215 (gosīs˚); Sdhp 46, Sdhp 103.

2. the stone of a fruit Ja ii.104.

-kaṅkala [Sk. ˚kankāla] a skeleton MN i.364; cp. ˚sankhalika. -kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) Ja v.406. -kalyāṇa beauty of bones Dhp-a i.387 -camma bones and skin Ja ii.339; Dhp-a iii.43; Pv-a 68 -taca id. Ja ii.295. -maya made of bone Vin ii.115 -miñjā marrow AN iv.129; Dhp-a i.181; Dhp-a iii.361; Kp-a 52 -yaka (T. aṭṭhīyaka) bones & liver SN i.206. -saṅkhalikā [B. Sk. ˚śakalā Sp. Avs i.274 sq., see also aṭṭhika˚] a chain of bones, i.e. a skeleton Dhp-a iii.479; Pv-a 152 -saṅghāṭa conjunction of bones, i.e. skeleton Vism 21; Dhp-a ii.28; Pv-a 206. -sañcaya a heap of bones Iti 17 Bdhd 87. -saññā the idea of bones (cp. aṭṭhika˚) Thag 18. -saṇṭhāna a skeleton Sdhp 101.

Sk. asthi = Av. asti, Gr. ο ̓́στεον, ο ̓́στρακον, ἀστράγαλος; Lat. os (*oss); also Gr. ο ̓́ζος branch Goth. asts

Aṭṭhika1

(nt.) 1. = aṭṭhi 1 a bone MN iii.92; Ja i.265, Ja i.428; Ja vi.404; Pv-a 41.

2 = aṭṭhi 2 kernel, stone Dhp-a ii.53 (tāl˚); Mvu 15, Mvu 42.

-saṅkhalikā a chain of bones, a skeleton AN iii.324 see also under kaṭaṭṭhika. -saññā the idea of a skeleton SN v.129 sq.; AN ii.17; Dhs 264.

fr. aṭṭhi

Aṭṭhika2

at Pv-a 180 (sūcik˚) to be read aṭṭita (q.v.) for aṭṭika.

Aṭṭhita1

see ṭhita.

Aṭṭhita2

undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered Ja ii.247 (= adhiṭṭhita C.).

ā + ṭhita

Aṭṭhita3

see atthika.

Aṭṭhilla

at Vin ii.266 is expld. by Bdhgh on p. 327 by gojanghaṭṭika, perhaps more likely = Sk. aṣṭhīlā a round pebble or stone.

Aḍḍha1

(& addha) one half, half; usually in compn. (see below), like diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 (˚sata 150) Pv-a 155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note. aḍḍha is never used by itself, for “half in absolute position upaḍḍha (q.v.) is always used.

-akkhika with furtive glance (“half an eye”) Dhp-a iv.98 -aṭṭha half of eight, i.e. four (cp. aṭṭhaḍḍha) SN ii.222 (˚ratana); Ja vi.354 (˚pāda quadruped; v.l. for aṭṭhaḍḍha) -aḷhaka 1/2 an aḷhaka (measure) Dhp-a iii.367. -uḍḍha [cp Mahārāṣṭrī form cauṭṭha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half Ja i.82; Ja iv.180; Ja v.417, Ja v.420; Dhp-a i.87; Mvu 12, Mvu 53 -ocitaka half plucked off Ja i.120. -karīsa (-matta) half a k. in extent Vv-a 64 (cp. aṭṭha-karīsa). -kahāpaṇa 1/2 kahāpaṇa AN v.83. -kāsika (or ˚ya) worth half a thousand kāsiyas (i.e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin i.281 (kambala, a woollen garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts ii.195); ii.150 (bimbohanāni, pillows; so read for aḍḍhakāyikāni in T.); Ja v.447 (a˚- kāsigaṇikā for a-˚kāsiya˚ a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a˚-k˚-gaṇikā viya na bahunnaṃ piyā manāpā). -kumbha a half (-filled pitcher Snp 721. -kusi (tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross-seam Vin i.287. -kosa half a room, a small room Ja vi.81 (= a˚ kosantara C.). -gāvuta half a league Ja vi.55 -cūḷa (˚vāhā vīhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Mil 102, perhaps misread for aḍḍhāḷha (āḷha = āḷhaka, cp. AN iii.52) a half āḷha of rice. -tiya the third (unit) less half, i.e. two and a half Vv-a 66 (māsā); Ja i.49, Ja i.206, Ja i.255 (˚sata 250). Cp. next. -teyya = ˚tiya 2 1/2; Vin iv.117; Ja ii.129 (˚sata); DN-a i.173 (v.l. BB for ˚tiya); Dhp-a i.95 (˚sata) 279; Pv-a 20 (˚sahassa). -telasa [cp. BSk. ardhatrayodaśa twelve and a half Vin i.243, Vin i.247; DN ii.6 (˚bhikkhusatāni, cp. tayo B 1 b); Dhp-a iii.369. -daṇḍaka a short stick MN i.87 = AN i.47; AN ii.122 = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197 -duka see ˚ruka. -nāḷika (-matta) half a nāḷi-measure full Ja vi.366. -pallaṅka half a divan Vin ii.280. -bhāga half a share, one half Vv 136 (= upaḍḍhabhāga Vv-a 61) Pv i.115. -maṇḍala semi-circle, semi circular sewing Vin i.287. -māna half a māna measure Ja i.468 (m. = aṭṭhannaṃ nāḷinaṃ nāmaṃ C.). -māsa half a month, a half month a fortnight Vin iii.254 (ūnak˚); AN v.85; Ja iii.218; Vv-a 66. Freq. in acc. as adv. for a fortnight, e.g. Vin iv.117; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 55. -māsaka half a bean (as weight or measure of value, see māsaka) Ja i.111. -māsika halfmonthly Pp 55. -muṇḍaka shaven over half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mvu 6, Mvu 42. -yoga a certain kind of house (usually with pāsāda) Vin i.58 = Vin i.96, Vin i.107 Vin i.139, Vin i.239, Vin i.284; Vin ii.146. Acc. to Vin T. i.174 “a gold coloured Bengal house” (Bdhgh), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaṇṇa vankageha “like a Garuḷa bird’s crooked wing”, i.e. where the roof is bent on one side. -yojana half a yojana (in distance) Ja v.410; DN-a i.35 (in expln. of addhāna-magga); Dhp-a i.147 Dhp-a ii.74. -rattā midnight AN iii.407 (˚aṃ adv. at m.); Vv 8116 (˚rattāyaṃ adv. = aḍḍharattiyaṃ Vv-a 315); Ja i.264 (samaye); iv.159 (id.). -ratti = ˚rattā Vv-a 255, Vv-a 315 (majjhimayāma-samaya); Pv-a 155. -ruka (v.l. ˚duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin ii.134; Bdhgh expln. on p. 319: aḍhadukan ti udare lomarāji-ṭhapanaṃ “leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach”. -vivata (dvāra half open Ja v.293.

etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha

Aḍḍha2

(adj.) rich, opulent, wealthy, well-to-do usually in combn. with mahaddhana & mahābhoga; of great wealth & resources (foll. by pahūta-jātarūparajata pahūta vittūpakaraṇa etc.). Thus at DN i.115, DN i.134, DN i.137; DN iii.163 Pp 52; Dhp-a i.3; Vv-a 322; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 78 etc. In other combn. Vv 314 (˚kula); Nd ii.615 (Sakka = aḍḍho mahaddhano dhanavā); DN-a i.281 (= issara); Dhp-a ii.37 (˚kula) Sdhp 270 (satasākh˚), 312 (guṇ˚), 540 sq. (id.), 561.

Sk. āḍhya fr. ṛddha pp. of ṛdh, ṛdhnote & ṛdhyate (see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr.; α ̓́λχομαι thrive, Lat alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power. See also āḷhiya

Aḍḍhaka

(adj.) wealthy, rich, influential Ja iv.495; Pv ii.82 (= mahāvibhava Pv-a 107).

Aḍḍhatā

(f.) riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp 316.

abstr. to aḍḍha

Aṇa

debt, only in neg. anaṇa (adj. free from debt Vin i.6 = SN i.137, SN i.234 = DN ii.39; Thig 364 (i.e. without a new birth); AN ii.69; Ja v.481 Thag-a 245.

Sk. ṛṇa; see etym. under iṇa, of which aṇa is a doublet. See also āṇaṇya

Aṇu

(adj.) small, minute, atomic, subtle (opp. thūla, q.v.) DN i.223; SN i.136; SN v.96 (˚bīja); Snp 299 (anuto aṇuṃ gradually); Ja iii.12 (= appamattaka); iv.203; Dhs 230, Dhs 617 (= kisa); Thag-a 173; Mil 361. Note aṇu is freq. spelt anu, thus usually in cpd. ˚matta.

-thūla (aṇuṃthūla) fine and coarse, small & large Dhp 31 (= mahantañ ca khuddakañ ca Dhp-a i.282), 409 = Snp 633; Ja iv.192; Dhp-a iv.184. -matta of small size, atomic least Snp 431; Vb 244, Vb 247 (cp. MN iii.134; AN ii.22) Dpvs iv.20. The spelling is anumatta at DN i.63 = Iti 118; Dhp 284; DN-a i.181; Sdhp 347. -sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i.e. residuum Kv 81, cp. Kv trsl. 66 n. 3.

Sk. aṇu; as to etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. under ulna. See also āṇi

Aṇuka

(adj.) = aṇu Snp 146, Kp-a 246.

Aṇḍa

(nt.) 1. an egg Vin iii.3; SN ii.258; MN i.104; AN iv.125 sq.

2. (pl.) the testicles Vin iii.106.

3. (in camm˚) a water-bag Ja i.249 (see Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69).

-kosa shell of eggs Vin iii.3 = MN i.104; AN iv.126, AN iv.176. -cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder Ja iv.364 Ja iv.366. -ja 1. born from eggs SN iii.241 (of snakes); MN i.73; Ja ii.53 = Ja v.85; Mil 267.

2. a bird Ja v.189. -bhārin bearing his testicles SN ii.258 = Vin iii.100. -sambhava the product of an egg, i.e. a bird Thag 599. -hāraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles MN i.383.

Etym. unknown. Cp. Sk. aṇḍa

Aṇḍaka1

(nt.) = aṇḍa, egg Dhp-a i.60; Dhp-a iii.137 (sakuṇ˚).

Aṇḍaka2

(adj.) only used of vācā speech: harsh, rough, insolent MN i.286; AN v.265, AN v.283 AN v.293 (gloss kaṇṭakā); Ja iii.260; Dhs 1343, cp. Dhs-a 396.

Sk.? prob. an inorganic form; the diaeresis of caṇḍaka into c˚ aṇḍaka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. Dhs-a 396 and see Dhs trsl. 349, also Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aṭṭa3

Aṇṇa

(food, cereal). See passages under aparaṇṇa & pubbaṇṇa.;

Aṇṇava

(nt.) 1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah˚ cp. BSk. mahārṇava, e.g. Jtm 3175) MN i.134; SN i.214 SN iv.157 (mahā udak˚); Snp 173 (fig. for saṃsāra see Snp-a 214), 183, 184; Ja i.119 (˚kucchi), 227 (id.); v.159 (mah˚) Mvu 5, Mvu 60; Mvu 19, Mvu 16 (mah˚).

2. a stream, river Ja iii.521; Ja v.255.

Sk. arṇa & arṇava to; ; ṛṇoti to move, Idg. *er to be in quick motion, cp. Gr. ο ̓́ρνυμι; Lat. orior Goth. rinnan = E. run; Ohg. runs, river, flow.

Aṇha

day, only as-˚ in apar˚, pubb˚, majjh˚, sāy˚, q.v.

Sk. ahna, day, see ahan

Atakkaka

(adj.) not mixed with buttermilk Ja yi.21.

a + takka2

Ataccha

(nt.) falsehood, untruth DN i.3; Ja vi.207.

a + taccha2

Ati

(indecl.) adv. and prep of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning “on and further”, then “up to and beyond”. I. in abstr position adverbially (only as ttg.): in excess, extremely very (cp. ii.3) Ja vi.133 (ati uggata C. = accuggata T.) 307 (ati ahitaṃ C. = accāhitaṃ T.).

II. as prefix, meaning.

1. on to, up to, towards until); as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, pass on; atipāta “falling on to”; attack slaying atimāpeti to put damage on to, i.e. to destroy.

2. over beyond, past, by, trans-; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to pass beyond, surpass; atimaññati to put one’s “manas over, to despise; atirocati to surpass in splendour. (b. intr. atikkanta passed by; atikkama traversing; aticca transgressing; atīta past, gone beyond ■ Also with verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also sin, transgression (“going over”); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow abundance; atisāra stepping over, sin.

3. exceedingly, in a high or excessive degree either very (much or too (much); in nominal compn. (a), rarely also in verbal compn. see (b) ■ (a) with nouns & adj.: ˚āsanna too near; ˚uttama the very highest; ˚udaka too much water; ˚khippa too soon; ˚dāna excessive alms giving ˚dāruṇa very cruel; ˚dīgha extremely long; ˚dūra too near deva a super-god ˚pago too early; ˚bālha too much; ˚bhāra a too heavy load; ˚manāpa very lovely; ˚manohara very charming; ˚mahant too great; ˚vikāla very inconvenient ˚vela a very long time; ˚sambādha too tight, etc. etc. (b.) with verb: atibhuñjati to eat excessively.

III. A peculiar use of ati is its’ function in reduplication-compounds, expressing “and, adding further, and so on, even more, etc.” like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (ā), anu, ava, paṭi, vi (e.g. khaṇḍâkhaṇḍa seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi, chiddâvacchidda, angapaccanga cuṇṇavicuṇṇa). In this function it is however restricted to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide range of ā (q.v.), the only phrases being the foll. viz cakkāticakkaṃ mañcātimañcaṃ bandhati to heap carts upon carts, couches upon couches (in order to see a procession) Vin iv.360 (Bdhgh); Ja ii.331; Ja iv.81; Dhp-a iv.61 -devātideva god upon god, god and more than a god (see atideva); mānātimāna all kinds of conceit; vaṅkātivaṅka crooked all over Ja i.160 ■ IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pāli, where the corresp. expression in later Sk. shows abhi. See e.g. the foll. cases for comparison: accuṇha ati-jāta, ˚pīḷita ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati, ˚veṭheti.

Note The contracted (assimilation-) form of ati before vowels is acc- (q.v.). See also for adv. use atiriva, ativiya atīva.

sk. ati = Gr. ε ̓́τι moreover, yet, and; Lat. et and, Goth. ip; also connected with Gr. ατάρ but, Lat at but (= over, outside) Goth. appan

Ati-ambila

(adj.) too sour Dhp-a ii.85.

ati + ambila

Ati-arahant

a super-Arahant, one who surpasses even other Arahants Mil 277.

ati + arahant

Ati-issara

(adj.) very powerful(?) Ja v.441 (˚bhesajja, medicin). Ati-unha

Ati-uṇha

(adj.) too hot Pv-a 37 (˚ātapa glow). See also accuṇha (which is the usual form).

Ati-uttama

(adj.) by far the best or highest Vv-a 80.

Ati-udaka

too much water, excess of water Dhp-a i.52.

Ati-ussura

(adj.) only in loc. ˚e (adv.) too soon after sunrise, too early Vv-a 65 (laddhabhattatā eating too early).

Ati-eti

to go past or beyond, see ger. aticca and pp. atīta.

ati + i

Atikata

(pp.) more than done to, i.e. retaliated; paid back in an excessive degree AN i.62.

Atikaddhati

to pull too hard, to labour, trouble, drudge Vin iii.17.

ati + kaḍḍhati

Atikaṇha

(adj.) too black Vin iv.7.

ati + kaṇha

Atikaruṇa

(adj.) very pitiful, extremely miserable Ja i.202; Ja iv.142; Ja vi.53.

ati + karuṇa

Atikassa

(ger.) pulling (right) through Ja v.173 (rajjuṃ, a rope, through the nostrils; v.l. BB. anti˚).

fr. atikassati ati + kṛṣ; Sk. atikṛṣya

Atikāla

in instr. atikālena adv. in very good time very early Vin i.70 (+ atidivā).

ati + kāla

Atikkanta

passed beyond, passed by, gone by, elapsed; passed over, passing beyond, surpassing Ja ii.128 (tīṇi saṃvaccharāni); Dhp-a iii.133 (tayo vaye passed beyond the 3 ages of life); Pv-a 55 (māse ˚e after the lapse of a month), 74 (kati divasā ˚ā how many days have passed).

-mānusaka superhuman Iti 100; Pp 60; cp. BSk atikrānta-mānuṣyaka Mvu iii.321.

pp. of atikamati

Atikkantikā

(f.) transgressing, overstepping the bounds (of good behaviour), lawlessness Mil 122.

Der. abstr. fr. prec.

Atikkama

going over or further, passing beyond, traversing; fig. overcoming of, overstepping, failing against, transgression Dhp 191; Dhs 299; Pv-a 154 (katipayayojan˚), 159 (˚caraṇa sinful mode of life); Mil 158 (dur˚ hard to overcome); Sdhp 64.

Sk. atikrama

Atikkamaṇaka

(adj.) exceeding Ja i.153.

atikkamaṇa + ka

Atikkamati

(1) to go beyond, to pass over, to cross, to pass by. (2) to overcome, to conquer, to surpass to be superior to ■ Ja iv.141; Dhp 221 (Pot. ˚eyya overcome); Pv-a 67 (maggena: passes by). grd. atikkamanīya to be overcome DN ii.13 (an˚); Snp-a 568 (dur˚) ger. atikkamma DN ii.12 (surpassing); Iti 51 (māradheyyaṃ passing over), cp. vv.ll. under adhigayha; and atikkamitva going beyond, overcoming, transcending (J iv.139 (samuddaṃ); Pp 17; Ja i.162 (raṭṭhaṃ having left). Often to be trsl. as adv. “beyond”, e.g. pare beyond others Pv-a 15; Vasabhagāmaṃ beyond the village of V. Pv-a 168 ■ pp. atikkanta (q.v.).

ati + kamati

Atikkameti

to make pass, to cause to pass over Ja i.151.

Caus. of atikkamati

Atikkhippaṃ

(adv.) too soon Vin ii.284.

ati + khippa

Atikhaṇa

(nt.) too much digging Ja ii.296.

ati + khaṇa(na)

Atikhāta

(nt.) = prec. Ja ii.296.

Atikhiṇa

(adj.) in cāpâtikhīṇa broken bow (?) Dhp 156 (expld. at Dhp-a iii.132 as cāpāto atikhīṇā cāpā vinimmuttā).

ati + khīṇa

Atiga

(-˚) (adj.) going over, overcoming, surmounting, getting over Snp 250 (sanga˚); Dhp 370 (id.) Snp 795 (sīma˚, cp. Nd i.99), 1096 (ogha˚); Nd i.100 (atikkanta); Nd ii.180 (id.).

ati + ga

Atigacchati

to go over, i.e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in pret. (aor. 3rd sg. accagā (q.v. and see gacchati 3) Snp 1040; Dhp 414 and accagamā (see gacchati 2) Vin ii.192; DN i.85; SN ii.205; DN-a i.236 (= abhibhavitvā pavatta). Also 3rd pl accaguṃ Iti 93, Iti 95.

ati + gacchati

Atigāḷeti

to destroy, make perish, waste away Ja vi.211 (= atigālayati vināseti C. p. 215). Perhaps reading should be atigāḷheti (see atigāḷhita.

ati + gāḷeti, Caus. of galati, cp. Sk. vi-gālayati

Atigāḷha

(adj.) very tight or close, intensive Ja i.62. Cp. atigāḷhita.

ati + gāḷha 1

Atigāḷhita

oppressed, harmed, overcome, defeated destroyed Ja v.401 (= atipīḷita C.).

pp. of atigāḷheti, Denom. fr. atigāḷha; cp. Sk. atigāhate to overcome

Atighora

(adj.) very terrible or fierce Sdhp 285.

ati + ghora

Aticaraṇa

(nt.) transgression Pv-a 159.

fr. aticarati

Aticarati

1. to go about, to roam about Pv ii.1215; Pv-a 57.

2. to transgress, to commit adultery Ja i.496. Cp. next.

ati + carati

Aticaritar

one who transgresses, esp. a woman who commits adultery AN ii.61 (all MSS. read aticaritvā); iv.66 (T. aticarittā).

n. ag. of. aticarati

Aticariyā

(f.) transgression, sin, adultery DN iii.190.

ati + cariyā

Aticāra

transgression Vv 158 (= aticca cāra Vv-a 72).

from aticarati

Aticārin

(adj. n.) transgressing, sinning, esp. as f. aticārinī an adulteress SN ii.259; SN iv.242; DN iii.190; AN iii.261; Pv ii.1214; Pv-a 151 (v.l. BB), 152; Vv-a 110.

from aticarati

Aticitra

(adj.) very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Mil 28.

ati + citra

Aticca

(grd.) 1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Snp 519, Snp 529, Snp 531 Used adverbially = beyond, in access, more than usual exceedingly Snp 373, Snp 804 (= vassasataṃ atikkamitvā Nd i.120).

2. failing, transgressing, sinning, esp. committing adultery Ja v.424; Vv-a 72,

ger. of ati + eti, ati + i

Aticchati

to go on, only occurring in imper. aticchatha (bhante) “please go on, Sir”, asking a bhikkhu to seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing a gift in a civil way. [The interpretation given by Trenckner, as quoted by Childers, is from ati + iṣ “go and beg further on”. (Tr. Notes 65) but this would entail a meaning like “desire in excess”, since iṣ does not convey the notion of movement] Ja iii.462; Dhp-a iv.98 (T. aticcha, vv.ll. ˚atha); Vv-a 101; Mil 8 ■ Caus aticchāpeti to make go on, to ask to go further Ja iii.462. Cp. icchatā.

*Sk. ati-ṛcchati, ati + ; cp. aṇṇava

Aticchatta

a “super”-sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & colours Dhs-a 2.;

ati + chatta

Atitāta

(adj.) well-born, well behaved, gentlemanly Iti 14 (opp avajāta ).

ati + jāta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijāta

Atitarati

to pass over, cross, go beyond aor. accatari SN iv.157 = Iti 57 (˚āri).

ati + tarati

Atituccha

(adj.) very, or quite empty Sdhp 430.

ati + tuccha

Atituṭṭhi

(f.) extreme joy Ja i.207.

ati + tuṭṭhi

Atitula

(adj.) beyond compare, incomparable Thag 831 = Snp 561 (= tulaṃ atīto nirupamo ti attho Snp-a 455).

ati + tula

Atitta

(adj.) dissatisfied, unsatisfied Ja i.440; Dhp 48.

a + titta

Atittha

(nt.) “that which is not a fordingplace”. i.e. not the right way, manner or time; as ˚wrongly in the wrong way Ja i.343; Ja iv.379; Ja vi.241; Dhp-a iii.347; DN-a i.38.

a + tittha

Atithi

a guest, stranger, newcomer DN i.117 (= āgantuka-navaka pāhuṇaka DN-a i.288); AN ii.68; AN iii.45, AN iii.260; Ja iv.31, Ja iv.274; Ja v.388; Kp viii.7 (n’ atthi assa ṭhiti yamhi vā tamhi vā divase āgacchatī ti atithi Kp-a 222); Vv-a 24 (= āgantuka).

Sk. atithi of at = at, see aṭati; orig. the wanderer, cp. Vedic atithin wandering

Atidāna

(nt.) too generous giving, an excessive gift of alms Mil 277; Pv-a 129, Pv-a 130.

ati + dāna

Atidāruṇa

(adj.) very cruel, extremely fierce Pv iii.73.

Sk. atidāruṇa, ati + dāruṇa

Atiditthi

(f.) higher doctrine, super knowledge (?) Vin i.63 = Vin ii.4 (+ adhisīla; should we read adhi-diṭṭhi?)

ati + diṭṭhi

Atidivā

(adv.) late in the day, in the afternoon Vin i.70 (+ atikālena ); SN i.200; AN iii.117.

ati + divā

Atidisati

to give further explanation, to explain in detail Mil 304.

ati + disati

Atidīgha

(adj.) too long, extremely long Ja iv.165; Pv ii.102; Vv-a 103 (opp. atirassa ).

ati + dīgha

Atidukkha

great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering Pv-a 65; Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavāca Pv-a 15 ati belongs to the whole cpd., i.e. of very hurtful speech.

ati + dukkha

Atidūra

(adj.) very or too far Vin i.46; Ja ii.154; Pv ii.965 = Dhp-a iii.220 (vv.ll. suvidūre); Pv-a 42 (opp. accāsanna ).

ati + dūra

Atideva

a super god, god above gods, usually Ep. of the Buddha SN i.141; Thag 489; Nd ii.307 (cp adhi˚); Mil 277. atidevadeva id. Mil 203, Mil 209. devātideva god over the gods (of the Buddha) Nd ii.307 a.

ati + deva

Atidhamati

to beat a drum too hard Ja i.283; pp. atidhanta ibid.

ati + dhamati

Atidhātatā

oversatiation Ja ii.193.

ati + dhāta + ta

Atidhāvati

to run past, to outstrip or get ahead of SN iii.103; SN iv.230; MN iii.19; Iti 43; Mil 136; Snp-a 21.

ati + dhāvati 1

Atidhonacārin

indulging too much in the use of the “dhonas”, i.e. the four requisites of the bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use or normal application of the requisites (expln. at Dhp-a iii.344, cp dhona) Dhp 240 = Ne 129.

ati + dhonacārin

Atināmeti

to pass time AN i.206; Mil 345.

BSk. atināmayati, e.g. Divy 82, Divy 443; ati + nāmeti

Atiniggaṇhāti

to rebuke too much Ja vi.417.

ati + niggaṇhāti

Atinicaka

(adj.) too low, only in phrase cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ Brahmaloko atinīcako the World is too narrow and Heaven too low (to comprehend the merit of a person, as sign of exceeding merit) Dhp-a i.310; Dhp-a iii.310 = Vv-a 68.

ati + nīcaka

Atineti

to bring up to, to fetch, to provide with Vin ii.180 (udakaṃ).

ati + neti

Atipaṇḍita

(adj. too clever Dhp-a iv.38.

ati + paṇḍita

Atipaṇḍitatā

(f.) too much cleverness Dhp-a ii.29.

abstr. of atipaṇḍita

Atipadāna

(nt.) too much alms-giving Pv ii.943 (= atidāna Pv-a 130).

ati + pa + dāna

Atipapañca

too great a delay, excessive tarrying Ja i.64; Ja ii.93.

ati + p.

Atipariccāga

excess in liberality Dhp-a iii.11.

ati + pariccāga

Atipassati

to look for, catch sight of, discover MN iii.132 (nāgaṃ).

ati + passati; cp. Sk. anupaśyati

Atipāta

attack, only in phrase pāṇātipāta destruction of life, slaying, killing, murder DN i.4 (pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, refraining from killing, the first of the dasasīla or decalogue); DN-a i.69 (= pāṇavadha, pāṇaghāta); Snp 242; Kp ii. cp. Kp-a 26; Pv-a 28, Pv-a 33 etc.

ati + pat

Atipātin

(adj.-n.) one who attacks or destroys Snp 248; Ja vi.449 (in war nāgakkhandh˚ = hatthikkhande khaggena chinditvā C.); Pv-a 27 (pāṇ˚).

Atipāteti

to destroy SN v.453; Dhp 246 (v.l. for atimāpeti, q.v.). Cp. paripāteti.

Denom. fr. atipāta

Atipīṇita

(adj.) too much beloved, too dear, too lovely Dhp-a v.70.

ati + pīṇita

Atipīḷita

pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed Ja v.401 (= atigāḷhita).

ati + pīḷita, cp. Sk. abhipīḍita

Atippago

(adv.) too early, usually elliptical = it is too early (with inf. carituṃ etc.) DN i.178; MN i.84; AN iv.35.

cp. Sk. atiprage

Atibaddha

tied to, coupled Ja i.192 = Vin iv.5.

pp. of atibandhati; cp. Sk. anubaddha

Atibandhati

to tie close to, to harness on, to couple Ja i.191 sq ■ pp atibaddha q.v.

ati + bandhati; cp. Sk. anubandhati

Atibahala

(adj.) very thick Ja vi.365.

ati + bahala

Atibāḷha

(adj.) very great or strong Pv-a 178; nt. adv. ˚ṃ too much DN i.93, DN i.95; MN i.253.

ati + bāḷha

Atibāheti

to drive away, to pull out Ja iv.366 (= abbāheti).

ati + bāheti, Caus. to bṛh1; cp. Sk. ābṛhati

Atibrahmā

a greater Brahma, a super-god Mil 277; Dhp-a ii.60 (Brahmuṇā a. greater than B.).

ati + brahmā

Atibrūheti

to shout out, roar, cry Ja v.361 (= mahāsaddaṃ nicchāreti).

ati + brūheti, bṛh2, but by C. taken incorrectly to brū; cp. Sk. abhi-bṛṇhayati

Atibhagini-putta

a very dear nephew Ja i.223.

ati + bh ■ p.

Atibhāra

too heavy a load Mil 277 (˚ena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati).

ati + bhāra

Atibhārita

(adj.) too heavily weighed, overloaded Vtn iv.47.

ati + bhārita

Atibhāriya

(adj.) too serious Dhp-a i.70.

Atibhuñjati

to eat too much, to overeat Mil 153.

ati + bhuñjati

Atibhutta

(nt.) overeating Mil 135.

ati + bhutta

Atibhoti

to excel, overcome, to get the better of, to deceive Ja i.163 (= ajjhottharati vañceti C.).

ati + bhavati, cp. Sk. atibhavati & abhibhavati

Atimaññati

to despise, slighten, neglect Snp 148 (= Kp-a 247 atikkamitvā maññati); Dhp 365, Dhp 366; Ja ii.347; Pv i.76 (˚issaṃ, v.l. ˚asiṃ = atikkamitvā avamaññiṃ Pv-a 37); Pv-a 36; Sdhp 609.

Sk. atimanyate; ati + man

Atimaññanā

(f.) arrogance, contempt, neglect Mil 122.

abstr. to prec., cp. atimāna

Atimanāpa

(adj.) very lovely Pv-a 77 (+ abhirūpa).

ati + manāpa

Atimanorama

(adj.) very charming Ja i.60.

ati + manorama

Atimanohara

(adj.) very charming Pv-a 46.

ati + manohara

Atimanda(ka)

(adj.) too slow, too weak Sdhp 204, Sdhp 273, Sdhp 488.

ati + manda

Atimamāyati

to favour too much, to spoil or fondle Ja ii.316.

ati + mamāyati, cp. Sk. atīmamāyate in diff. meaning = envy

Atimahant

(adj.) very or too great Ja i.221; Pv-a 75.

ati + mahant

Atimāna

high opinion (of oneself), pride, arrogance, conceit, MN i.363; Snp 853 (see expln. at Nd i.233), 942, 968; Ja vi.235; Nd i.490; Mil 289. Cp. atimaññanā.

Sk. atimāna, ati + māna

Atimānin

(adj.) DN ii.45 (thaddha + ); Snp 143 (an˚) 244; Kp-a 236.

fr. atimāna

Atimāpeti

to injure, destroy, kill; only in the stock phrase pāṇaṃ atimāpeti (with v.l. atipāteti) to destroy life, to kill DN i.52 (v.l. ˚pāteti) = DN-a i.159 (: pāṇaṃ hanati pi parehi hanāpeti either to kill or incite others to murder); MN i.404, MN i.516; SN iv.343; AN iii.205 (correct T. reading atimāteti; v.l. pāteti); Dhp 246 (v.l. ˚pāteti) = Dhp-a iii.356 (: parassa jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati).

ati + māpeti, Caus. of , mināte, orig. meaning “to do damage to”

Atimukhara

(adj.) very talkative, a chatterbox Ja i.418; Dhp-a ii.70. atimukharatā (f. abstr.) ibid.

ati + mukhara

Atimuttaka

Name of a plant, Gaertnera Racemosa Vin ii.256 = MN i.32; Mil 338.

Sk. atimuktaka

Atimuduka

(adj.) very soft, mild or feeble Ja i.262.

ati + muduka

Atiyakkha

(ati + yakkha] a sorcerer, wizard, fortuneteller Ja vi.502 (C.: bhūtavijjā ikkhaṇīka).

Atiyācaka

(adj.) one who asks too much Vin iii.147.

ati + yācaka

Atiyācanā

(f.) asking or begging too much Vin iii.147.

ati + yācanā

Atirattiṃ

(adv.) late in the night, at midnight Ja i.436 (opp. atipabhāte).

ati + ratti; cp. atidivā

Atirassa

(adj.) too short (opp. atidīgha ) Vin iv.7; Ja vi.457; Vv-a 103.

ati + rassa

Atirājā

a higher king, the greatest king, more than a king Dhp-a ii.60; Mil 277.

ati + rājā

Atiriccati

to be left over, to remain Sdhp 23, Sdhp 126.

ati + riccati, see ritta

Atiritta

(adj.) left over, only as neg. an˚; applied to food, i.e. food which is not the leavings of a meal, fresh food Vin i.213 sq, 238; ii.301 iv.82 sq., 85.

pp. of ati + rlc, see ritta

Atiriva

(ati-r-iva) see ativiya.

Atireka

(adj.) surplus, too much; exceeding, excessive, in a high degree extra Vin i.255; Ja i.72 (˚padasata), 109; 441 (in higher positions); Mil 216; Dhs-a 2; Dhp-a ii.98.

-cīvara an extra robe Vin i.289. -pāda exceeding the worth of a pāda, more than a pāda, Vin iii.47.

Sk. atireka, ati + ric, rinakti; see ritta

Atirekatā

(f.) excessiveness, surplus, excess Kv 607.

abstr. to prec.

Atirocati

to shine magnificently (trs.) to outshine, to surpass in splendour DN ii.208; Dhp 59; Pv ii.958 Mil 336 (+ virocati ); Dhp-a i.446 (= atikkamitvā virocati ); iii.219; Pv-a 139 (= ativiya virocati ).

ati + ruc

Ativaṅkin

(adj.) very crooked Ja i.160 (vankâtivankin crooked all over; cp. ati iii.).

ati + vankin

Ativaṇṇati

to surpass, excel DN ii.267.

ati + vaṇṇati

Ativatta

passed beyond, surpassed, overcome (act. & pass.), conquered Snp 1133 (bhava˚); Nd ii.21 (= atikkanta, vītivatta); Ja v.84 (bhaya˚) Mil 146, Mil 154.

pp. of ativattati: Sk. ativṛtta

Ativattati

to pass, pass over, go beyond; to overcome, get over; conquer Vin ii.237 (samuddo velaṃ n’); SN ii.92 (saṃsāraṃ); iv.158 (id.) Iti 9 (saṃsāraṃ) = AN ii.10 = Nd ii.172a; Thag 412; Ja i.58, Ja i.280 Ja iv.134; Ja vi.113, Ja vi.114; Pv-a 276 ■ pp. ativatta (q.v.).

ati + vṛt, Sk. ativartate

Ativattar1

one who insults or offends Ja v.266 (isīnaṃ ativattāro dharusavācāhi atikkamitvā vattāro C.).

Sk. *ativaktṛ, n. ag. to ati-vacati; cp. ativākya

Ativattar2

one who overcomes or is to be overcome Snp 785 (svātivattā = durativattā duttarā duppatarā Nd i.76).

Sk. *ativartṛ, n. ag. to ati-vattati

Ativasa

(adj.) being under somebody’s rule, dependent upon (c. gen.) Dhp 74 (= vase vattati Dhp-a ii.79).

ati + vasa fr. vas

Ativassati

to rain down on, upon or into Thag 447 = Vin ii.240.

ati + vassati, cp. Sk. abhivarṣati

Ativākya

(nt.) abuse, blame, reproach Dhp 320, Dhp 321 (= aṭṭha-anariyavohāra-vasena pavattaṃ vītikkama-vacanaṃ Dhp-a iv.3) Ja vi.508.

ati + vac, cp. Sk. ativāda, fr. ati + vad

Ativāta

too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a gale, storm Mil 277.

ati + vāta

Ativāyati

to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Mil 333 (vāyati; cp. abhivāyati ibid 385).

ati + vāyati

Ativāha

carrying, carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys i.e. a conductor, guide Thag 616 (said of sīla, good character); Ja v.433 ■ Cp. ativāhika.

fr. ati + vah, cp. Sk. ativahati & abhivāha

Ativāhika

one who belongs to a conveyance, one who conveys or guides, a conductor (of a caravan Ja v.471, Ja v.472 (˚purisa).

fr. ativāha

Ativikāla

(adj.) at a very inconvenient time, much too late DN i.108 (= suṭṭhu vikāla DN-a i.277).

ati + vikāla

Ativijjhati

to pierce, to enter into (fig.), to see through, only in phrase paññāya ativijjha (ger.) passati to recognise in all details MN i.480; SN v.226; AN ii.178.

Sk. atividhyati, ati + vyadh

Ativiya

(adv.) = ati + iva, orig. “much-like” like an excess = excessive-ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atīva (q.v.) ■ (2) ati + iva with epenthetic r: atiriva DN ii.264 (v.l. SS. atīva); Snp 679, Snp 680, Snp 683; Snp-a 486; (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva) = ativiya Ja i.61, Ja i.263; Dhp-a ii.71 (a. upakāra of great service); Pv-a 22, Pv-a 56, Pv-a 139.

Sk. atīva

Ativisā

(f.) Name of a plant Vin i.201; Vin iv.35.

Sk. ativiṣā

Ativissaṭṭha

(adj.) too abundant, in ˚vākya one who talks too much, a chatterbox Ja v.204.

ati + vissaṭṭha

Ativissāsika

(adj.) very, or too confidential Ja i.86.

ati + vissāsika

Ativissuta

(adj.) very famous, renowned Sdhp 473.

ati + vissuta

Ativeṭheti

to wrap over, to cover, to enclose; to press, oppress, stifle Vin ii.101; Ja v.452 (-ativiya veṭheti piḷeti C.).

ati + veṣṭ; cp. Sk. abhiveṣṭate

Ativela

(adj.) excessive (of time); nt. adv. ˚ṃ a very long time; excessively DN i.19 (= atikālaṃ aticiran ti attho DN-a i.113); MN i.122; Snp 973 (see expln. at Nd i.504); Ja iii.103 = Nd i.504.

ati + vela

Atilīna

(adj.) too much attached to worldly matters SN v.263.

ati + līna

Atilūkha

(adj.) too wretched, very miserable Sdhp 409.

ati + lūkha

Atiloma

(adj.) too hairy, having too much hair Ja vi.457 (opp. aloma).

ati + loma

Atisañcara

(˚cāra?) wandering about too much Mil 277.

ati + sañcāra

Atisaṇha

(adj.) too subtle Dhp-a iii.326.

ati + saṇha

Atisanta

(adj.) extremely peaceful Sdhp 496.

ati + santa1

Atisambādha

(adj.) too tight, crowded or narrow Dhp-a i.310; Dhp-a iii.310 = Vv-a 68; cp. atinīcaka. f. abstr. atisambādhatā the state of being too narrow Ja i.7.

ati + sambādha

Atisaya

superiority, distinction, excellence, abundance Vv-a 135 (= visesa); Pv-a 86; Dāvs ii.62.

cp. Sk. atiśaya, fr. ati + śī

Atisayati

to surpass, excel; ger. atisayitvā Mil 336 (+ atikkamitvā).

ati + śī

Atisara

(adj.) transgressing, sinning Ja iv.6; cp. atisāra.

fr. atisarati; cp. accasara

Atisarati

to go too far, to go beyond the limit, to overstep, transgress, aor. accasari (q.v.) Snp 8 sq (opp. paccasari; C. atidhāvi); Ja v.70 and atisari Ja iv.6. ger. atisitvā (for *atisaritvā) DN i.222; SN iv.94; AN i.145 AN v.226, AN v.256; Snp 908 (= Nd i.324 atikkamitvā etc.).

ati + sṛ;

Atisāyaṃ

(adv.) very late, late in the evening Ja v.94.

ati + sāyaṃ

Atisāra

going too far, overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin i.55 (sātisāra), 326 (id.); SN i.74; MN iii.237; Snp 889 (atisāraṃ diṭṭhiyo = diṭṭhigatāni Nd i.297; going beyond the proper limits of the right faith) Ja v.221 (dhamm˚), 379; Dhp-a i.182; Dhs-a 28. See also atisara.

fr. ati + sṛ; see atisarati. Cp. Sk. atisāra in diff. meaning but BSk. atisāra (sâtisāra) in the same meaning.

Atisithila

(adj.) very loose, shaky or weak AN iii.375.

ati + sithila

Atisīta

(adj.) too cold Dhp-a ii.85.

ati + sīta

Atisītala

(adj.) very cold Ja iii.55.

ati + sītala

Atihaṭṭha

(adj.) very pleased Sdhp 323.

ati + haṭṭha

Atiharati

to carry over, to bring over, bring, draw over Vin ii.209; Vin iv.264; SN i.89; Ja i.292; Ja v.347. Caus. atiharāpeti to cause to bring over, bring in, reap collect, harvest Vin ii.181; Vin iii.18; Mil 66; Dhp-a iv.77. See also atihita.

ati + hṛ;

Atihita

brought over (from the field into the house), harvested, borne home Thag 381 (vīhi).

ati + hṛ; pp. of atiharati, hita unusual for hata, perhaps through analogy with Sk. abhi + dhā

Atihīna

(adj.) very poor or destitute AN iv.282, AN iv.287; AN iv.323 (opp. accogāḷha ).

ati + hīna

Atihīḷeti

to despise Ja iv.331 (= atimaññati C.).

ati + hīḍ

Atīta

(adj.-n.) 1. (temporal) past, gone by (cp. accaya 1) (a adj.; atītaṃ addhānaṃ in the time which is past SN iii.86; AN iv.219; AN v.32Pv ii.1212 (atītānaṃ, scil. attabhāvāuaṃ pariyanto na dissati); khaṇâtīta with the right moment past Dhp 315 = Snp 333; atītayobbana he who is past youth or whose youth is past Snp 110 ■ (b) nt the past: atīte (loc.) once upon a time Ja i.98 etc. atītaṃ āhari he told (a tale of) the past, i.e. a Jātaka Ja i.213 Ja i.218, Ja i.221 etc ■ SN i.5 (atītaṃ nânusocati); AN iii.400 (a eko anto); Snp 851, Snp 1112. In this sense very frequently combd. with or opposed to anāgata the future & paccuppanna the present, e.g. atītânāgate in past & future SN ii.58; Snp 373; Ja vi.364. Or all three in ster. combn. atīt’-anāgata-paccuppanna (this the usual order) DN iii.100 DN iii.135; SN ii.26, SN ii.110, SN ii.252; SN iii.19, SN iii.47, SN iii.187; SN iv.4 sq.; 151 sq.; AN i.264 sq., 284; ii.171, 202; iii.151; v.33; Iti 53 Nd ii.22; but also occasionally atīta paccuppanna anāgata e.g. Pv-a 100.

2. (modal) passed out of, having overcome or surmounted, gone over, free from (cp. accaya 2; SN i.97 (maraṇaṃ an˚ not free from death), 121 (sabbavera-bhaya˚); AN ii.21; AN iii.346 (sabbasaṃyojana˚); Snp 373 (kappa˚), 598 (khaya˚, of the moon = ūnabhāvaṃ atīta Snp-a 463); Thag 413 (c. abl.)

3. (id.) overstepping having transgressed or neglected (cp. accaya 3) Dhp 176 (dhammaṃ).

-aṃsa the past (= atīta koṭṭhāse, atikkantabhavesū ti attho Thag-a 233) DN ii.222; DN iii.275; Thig 314. -ārammaṇa state of mind arising out of the past Dhs 1041.

Sk. atīta, ati + ita, pp. of i. Cp. accaya & ati eti

Atīradassin

(adj.-n.) not seeing the shore Ja i.46; Ja vi.440; also as atīradassanī (f.) Ja v.75 (nāvā). Cp. DN i.222.

a + tīra + dassin

Atīva

(indecl.) very much, exceedingly Ja ii.413; Mvu 33, Mvu 2 etc.

ati + iva, see also ativiya

Ato

(adv.) hence, now, therefore SN i.15; MN i.498; Mil 87; Ja v.398 (= tato C.).

Sk. ataḥ

Atoṇa

a class of jugglers or acrobats(?) Mil 191.

etym.?

Atta1

that which has been taken up, assumed. atta-daṇḍa, he who has taken a stick in hand, a violent person, SN i.236; SN iv.117; Snp 630, Snp 935; Dhp 406. Attañjaha, rejecting what had been assumed, Snp 790. Attaṃ pahāya Snp 800. The opp is niratta, that which has not been assumed, has been thrown off, rejected. The Arahant has neither atta nor niratta (Snp 787, Snp 858, Snp 919), neither assumption nor rejection he keeps an open mind on all speculative theories See Nd i.82, Nd i.90, Nd i.107, Nd i.352; Nd ii.271; Snp-a 523; Dhp-a iv.180 for the traditional exegesis. As legal t. t. attādānaṃ ādīyati is to take upon oneself the conduct, before the Chapter, of a legal point already raised. Vin ii.247 (quoted v.91).

ā + d + ta; that is, pp. of ādadāti with the base form reduced to d. Idg *d-to; cp. Sk. ātta

Atta2

see attan.

Atta3

see upatta.

Sk. akta, pp. of añjati

Attan

(m.) & atta (the latter is the form used in compn.) ■ I Inflection. (1) of attan- (n. stem); the foll. cases are the most freq.: acc. attānaṃ DN i.13, DN i.185; SN i.24; Snp 132 Snp 451 ■ gen. dat. attano Snp 334, Snp 592 etc., also as abl AN iii.337 (attano ca parato ca as regards himself and others) ■ instr. abl. attanā SN i.24; Snp 132, Snp 451; Dhp-a ii.75; Pv-a 15, Pv-a 214 etc. On use of attanā see below iii.1 C ■ loc. attani SN v.177; AN i.149 (attanī metri causa); ii.52 (anattani); iii.181; MN i.138; Snp 666, Snp 756 Snp 784; Vb 376 (an˚) ■ (2) of atta- (a-stem) we find the foll. cases: acc. attaṃ Dhp 379 ■ instr. attena SN iv.54 ■ abl. attato SN i.188; Pts i.143; Pts ii.48; Vb 336.

Meanings. 1. The soul as postulated in the animistic theories held in N India in the 6th and 7th cent. B. C It is described in the Upanishads as a small creature, in shape like a man, dwelling in ordinary times in the heart It escapes from the body in sleep or trance; when it returns to the body life and motion reappear. It escapes from the body at death, then continues to carry on an everlasting life of its own. For numerous other details see Rh. D. Theory of Soul in the Upanishads JR A S 1899. Bt. India 251–⁠255. Buddhism repudiated all such theories, thus differing from other religions. Sixteen such theories about the soul DN i.31. Seven other theories DN i.34. Three others DN i.186/7. A ʻsoulʼ according to general belief was some thing permanent, unchangeable, not affected by sorrow SN iv.54 = Kv 67; Vin i.14; MN i.138 See also MN i.233; MN iii.265, MN iii.271; SN ii.17, SN ii.109; SN iii.135; AN i.284; AN ii.164, AN ii.171; AN v.188; SN iv.400. Cp. ātuman, tuma puggala, jīva, satta, pāṇa and nāma-rūpa.

2. Oneself, himself, yourself. Nom. attā, very rare. SN i.71, SN i.169; SN iii.120; AN i.57, AN i.149 (you yourself know whether that is true or false. Cp. Manu viii.84. Here attā comes very near to the European idea of conscience. But conscience as a unity or entity is not accepted by Buddhism Snp 284; Dhp 166, Dhp 380; Mil 54 (the image, outward appearance, of oneself). Acc. attānaṃ SN i.44 (would not give for himself, as a slave) AN i.89; Snp 709. Acc. attaṃ Dhp 379. Abl. attato as oneself SN i.188; Pts i.143; Pts ii.48 Vb 336. Loc. attani AN i.149; AN iii.181; Snp 666, Snp 784 Instr. attanā SN i.57 = Dhp 66; SN i.75; SN ii.68; AN i.53 AN iii.211; AN iv.405; Dhp 165. On one’s own account, spontaneously SN iv.307; SN v.354; AN i.297; AN ii.99, AN ii.218; AN iii.81; Ja i.156; Pv-a 15, Pv-a 20. In composition with numerals attadutiya himself and one other DN ii.147; ˚catuttha with himself as fourth MN i.393; AN iii.36; ˚pañcama Dpvs viii.2; ˚sattama Ja i.233; ˚aṭṭhama Vv-a 149 (as atta-naṭṭhama Vv 3413), & ˚aṭṭhamaka Mil 291.;

anattā (n. and predicative adj.) not a soul, without a soul. Most freq. in combn. with dukkha & anicca-(1) as noun: SN iii.141 (˚anupassin); iv.49; v.345 (˚saññin); AN ii.52 = Pts ii.80 (anattani anattā; opp. to anattani attā the opinion of the micchādiṭṭhigatā sattā); Dhp 279; Pts ii.37, Pts ii.45 sq. (˚anupassanā), 106 (yaṃ aniccañ ca dukkhañ ca taṃ anattā); Dhp-a iii.406 (˚lakkhaṇa) ■ (2) as adj (pred.): SN iv.152 sq.; SN iv.166; SN iv.130 sq., 148 sq. Vin i.13 = SN iii.66 = Nd ii.680 Q 1; SN iii.20 sq.; 178 sq., 196 sq.; sabbe dhammā anattā Vin v.86; SN iii.133 SN iv.28, SN iv.401.

-attha one’s own profit or interest Snp 75; Nd ii.23; Ja iv.56, Ja iv.96; otherwise as atta-d-attha, e.g. Snp 284. -atthiya looking after one’s own needs Thag 1097. -ādhipaka master of oneself, self-mastered AN i.150. -adhipateyya selfdependence self-reliance, independence AN i.147. -ādhīna independent DN i.72. -ānudiṭṭhi speculation about souls SN iii.185; SN iv.148; AN iii.447; Snp 1119; Pts i.143; Vb 368; Mil 146. -ānuyogin one who concentrates his attention on himself Dhp 209; Dhp-a iii.275. -ānuvāda blaming oneself AN ii.121; Vb 376. -uññā self-humiliation Vb 353 (+ att-avaññā). -uddesa relation to oneself Vin iii.149 (= attano atthāya), also ˚ika ibid. 144. -kata self-made SN i.134 (opp. para˚). -kāma love of self AN ii.21; adj. a lover of “soul”, one who cares for his own soul SN i.75. -kāra individual self, fixed individuality oneself (cp. ahaṃkāra) DN i.53 (opp. para˚); AN iii.337 (id.) DN-a i.160; as nt. at Ja v.401 in the sense of service (self-doing”, slavery) (attakārāni karonti bhattusu). -kilamatha self-mortification DN iii.113; SN iv.330; SN v.421; MN iii.230. -garahin self-censuring Snp 778. -gutta selfguarded Dhp 379. -gutti watchfulness as regards one’s self, self-care AN ii.72. -ghañña self-destruction Dhp 164 -ja proceeding from oneself Dhp 161 (pāpa). -ñū knowing oneself AN iv.113, cp. DN iii.252. -(n)tapa self-mortifying self-vexing DN iii.232 = AN ii.205 (opp. paran˚); MN i.341 MN i.411; MN ii.159; Pp 55, Pp 56. -daṇḍa see atta1. -danta selfrestrained self-controlled Dhp 104, Dhp 322. -diṭṭhi speculation concerning the nature of the soul Nd i.107; Snp-a 523 Snp-a 527. -dīpa relying on oneself, independent, founded on oneself (+ attasaraṇa, opp. añña˚) DN ii.100 = DN iii.42; SN v.154; Snp 501 (= attano guṇe eva attano dīpaṃ katvā Snp-a 416). -paccakkha only in instr. ˚ena by or with his own presence, i.e. himself Ja v.119. -paccakkhika eye-witness Ja v.119. -paccatthika hostile to oneself Vin ii.94, Vin ii.96. -paṭilābha acquisition of a personality DN i.195 (tayo: oḷārika, manomaya, arūpa). -paritāpana self-chastisement, mortification DN iii.232 = AN ii.205; MN i.341; Pv-a 18, Pv-a 30. -parittā charm (protection) for oneself Vin ii.110. -paribhava disrespect for one’s own person Vb 353. -bhāva one’s own nature (1) person, personality individuality, living creature; form, appearance [cp. Dhs trsl. LXXI and BSk. ātmabhāva body Divy 70, Divy 73 (˚pratilambha), 230; Sp. Avs i.162 (pratilambha), 167 171] Vin ii.238 (living beings, forms); SN v.442 (bodily appearance); AN i.279 (oḷārika a substantial creature) ii.17 (creature); Dhp-a ii.64, Dhp-a ii.69 (appearance); Snp-a 132 (personality) ■ (2) life, rebirth AN i.134 sq.; AN iii.412; Dhp-a ii.68; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 15, Pv-a 166 (atītā ˚ā former lives). ˚ṃ pavatteti to lead a life, to live Pv-a 29, Pv-a 181. Thus in cpd. paṭilābha assumption of an existence, becoming reborn as an individual Vin ii.185; Vin iii.105; DN iii.231; MN iii.46; SN ii.255, SN ii.272, SN ii.283; SN iii.144; AN ii.159, AN ii.188 AN iii.122 sq ■ (3) character, quality of heart Snp 388 (citta Snp-a 374); Ja i.61. -rūpa “of the form of self” self-like only in instr. ˚ena as adv. by oneself, on one’s own account, for the sake of oneself SN iv.97; AN ii.120 -vadha self-destruction SN ii.241; AN ii.73. -vāda theory of (a persistent) soul DN iii.230; MN i.66; DN ii.58; SN ii.3 SN ii.245 sq.; SN iii.103, SN iii.165, SN iii.203; SN iv.1 sq., 43 sq., 153 sq. Pts i.156 sq.; Vb 136, Vb 375. For var. points of an “attavādic” doctrine see Index to Saṃyutta Nikāya. -vyābādha personal harm or distress self-suffering, one’s own disaster (opp. para˚) MN i.369; SN iv.339 = AN i.157; AN ii.179. -vetana supporting oneself, earning one’s own living Snp 24. -sañcetanā self-perception, self-consciousness (opp. para˚) DN iii.231; AN ii.159. -sambhava originating from one’s self SN i.70; AN iv.312; Dhp 161 (pāpa) Thag 260. -sambhūta arisen from oneself Snp 272 -sammāpaṇidhi thorough pursuit or development of one’s personality AN ii.32; Snp 260, cp. Kp-a 132. -saraṇa see ˚dipa. -sukha happiness of oneself, self-success Dpvs i.66, cp. ii.11. -hita personal welfare one’s own good (opp. para˚) DN iii.233; AN ii.95 sq. -hetu for one’s own sake, out of self-consideration Snp 122; Dhp 328.

Vedic ātman, not to Gr. αἀνεμος = Lat. animus, but to Gr. ἀτμός steam, Ohg. ātum breath, Ags. aepm

Attaniya

(adj.) belonging to the soul, having a soul, of the nature of soul, soul-like; usually nt. anything of the nature of soul MN i.138 = Kv 67; MN i.297 MN ii.263; SN iii.78 (yaṃ kho anattaniyaṃ whatever has no soul), 127; iv.54 = Nd ii.680 F; SN iv.82 = SN iii.33 = Nd ii.680 Q 3; SN iv.168; SN v.6; Nd ii.680 D. Cp. Dhs trsl. XXXV ff.

from attā

Attamana

delighted pleased, enraptured DN i.3, DN i.90 (an˚); ii.14; AN iii.337 AN iii.343; AN iv.344; Snp 45 = Dhp 328 (= upaṭṭhita-satt Dhp-a iv.29); Snp 995; Nd ii.24 (= tuṭṭha-mano haṭṭha-mano etc.) Vv 14; Pp 33 (an˚); Mil 18; DN-a i.52; Dhp-a i.89 (an˚-dhātuka displeased); Pv-a 23, Pv-a 132; Vv-a 21 (where Dhpāla gives two explns, either tuṭṭhamano or sakamano).

atta1 + mano, having an up raised mind. Bdhgh’s expln. is saka-mano DN-a i.255 = attā + mano. He applies the same expln. to attamanatā (at Dhs 9, see Dhs trsl 12) = attano manatā mentality of one’s self

Attamanatā

(f.) satisfaction, joy, pleasure, transport of mind MN i.114; AN i.276; AN iv.62; Pp 18 (an˚) Dhs 9, Dhs 86, Dhs 418 (an˚); Pv-a 132; Vv-a 67 (an˚).

abstr. to prec.

Attāṇa

(adj.) without shelter or protection Ja i.229; Mil 148, Mil 325; Thag-a 285.

a + tāṇa

Attha1

(also aṭṭha, esp. in combns mentioned under 3) (m. & nt.) 1. interest, advantage, gain; (moral) good blessing, welfare; profit, prosperity, well-being MN i.111 (atthassa ninnetar, of the Buddha, bringer of good); SN iv.94 (id.); SN i.34 (attano a. one’s own welfare), 55 (id. 86, 102, 126 = AN ii.46 (atthassa patti); SN i.162 (attano ca parassa ca); ii.222 (id.); iv.347 (˚ṃ bhañjati destroy the good or welfare, always with musāvādena by lying cp. attha-bhañjanaka); AN i.61 (˚ṃ anubhoti to fare well to have a (good) result); iii.364 (samparāyika a. profit in the future life); AN v.223 sq. (anattho ca attho ca detriment & profit); Iti 44 (v.l. attā better); Snp 37, Snp 58 (= Nd ii.26, where the six kinds of advantages are enumd. as att˚ par˚ ubhay˚, i.e. advantage, resulting for oneself for others, for both; diṭṭhadhammik˚ samparāyik˚ param gain for this life, for a future life, and highest gain of all, i.e. Arahantship); Snp 331 (ko attho supitena what good is it to sleep = na hi sakkā supantena koci attho papuṇituṃ Snp-a 338; cp. ko attho supinena te Pv ii.61) Pv-a 30 (atthaṃ sādheti does good, results in good, 69 (samparāyikena atthena) ■ dat. atthāya for the good for the benefit of (gen.); to advantage, often eombd. with hitāya sukhāya, e.g. DN iii.211 sq.; Iti 79Kp viii.1 (to my benefit); Pv i.43 (= upakārāya Pv-a 18), ii.129 (to great advantage). See also below 6.

Sometimes in a more concrete meaning = riches, wealth e.g. Ja i.256 (= vaḍḍhiṃ C.); iii.394 (id.); Pv iv.14 (dhanaṃ Pv-a 219) ■ Often as-˚: att˚; one’s own wellfare, usually combd. with par˚; and ubhay˚; (see above SN ii.29; SN v.121; AN i.158, AN i.216; AN iii.63 sq.; AN iv.134; Snp 75 (att-aṭṭha, v.l. attha Nd2), 284 (atta-d-attha); uttam˚; the highest gain, the very best thing Dhp 386 (= arahatta Dhp-a iv.142); Snp 324 (= arahatta Snp-a 332); param˚ id. Nd ii.26; sad˚; one’s own weal DN ii.141; MN i.4; SN ii.29; SN v.145; AN i.144; sāttha (adj.) connected with advantage beneficial, profitable (of the Dhamma; or should we take it as “with the meaning, in spirit”? see sāttha DN i.62; SN v.352; AN ii.147; AN iii.152; Nd ii.316.

2. need want (c. instr.), use (for = instr.) SN i.37 (˚jāta when need has arisen, in need); Ja i.254; Ja iii.126, Ja iii.281; Ja iv.1; Dhp-a i.398 (n’ atthi eteh’ attho I have no use for them) Vv-a 250; Pv-a 24 (yāvadattha, adj. as much as is needed sufficient = anappaka).

3. sense, meaning, import (of a word), denotation, signification. In this application attha is always spelt aṭṭha in cpds. aṭṭh-uppatti and aṭṭha-kathā (see below). On term see also Cpd. 4 ■ SN iii.93 (atthaṃ vibhajati explain the sense); AN i.23 (id.), 60 (nīt˚ primary meaning, literal meaning; neyy˚ secondary or inferred meaning); ii.189 (˚ṃ ācikkhati to interpret); Snp 126 (˚ṃ pucchita asked the (correct) sense, the lit. meaning), 251 (˚ṃ akkhāti); Thag 374; attho paramo the highest sense the ultimate sense or intrinsic meaning Iti 98, cp. Cpd. 6, 81, 223; Mil 28 (paramatthato in the absolute sense) Mil 18 (atthato according to its meaning, opp. vyañjanato by letter, orthographically); Dhp-a ii.82; Dhp-a iii.175 Kp-a 81 (pad˚ meaning of a word); Snp-a 91 (id.); Pv-a 15 (˚ṃ vadati to explain, interpret), 16, 19 (hitatthadhammatā “fitness of the best sense”, i.e. practical application), 71. Very frequent in Commentary style at the conclusion of an explained passage as ti attho “this is the meaning”, thus it is meant, this is the sense, e.g. DN-a i.65; Dhp-a iv.140, Dhp-a iv.141; Pv-a 33, etc ■ 4. Contrasted with dhamma in the combn. attho ca dhammo ca it (attha) refers to the (primary, natural) meaning of the word, while dhamma relates to the (interpreted) meaning of the text, to its bearing on the norm and conduct; or one might say they represent the theoretical and practical side of the text (pāḷi) to be discussed, the “letter” and the “spirit”. Thus at AN i.69; AN v.222, AN v.254; Snp 326 (bhāsitatthañ ca pāḷidhammañ ca Snp-a 333); Iti 84 (duṭṭho atthaṃ na jānāti dhammaṃ na passati: he realises neither the meaning nor the importance); Dhp 363 (= bhāsitatthañ c’ eva desanādhammañ ca); Ja ii.353; Ja vi.368; Nd ii.386 (meaning & proper nature); Pv iii.96 (but expld. by Pv-a 211 as hita = benefit, good, thus referring it to above 1) For the same use see cpds. ˚dhamma, ˚paṭisambhidā, esp in adv. use (see under 6) Snp 430 (yen’ atthena for which purpose), 508 (kena atthena v.l. BB for T attanā), Ja i.411 (atthaṃ vā kāraṇaṃ vā reason and cause); Dhp-a ii.95 (+ kāraṇa(; Pv-a 11 (ayaṃ h’ ettha attho this is the reason why).

5. (in very wide application, covering the same ground as Lat. res & Fr. chose): (a) matter affair, thing, often untranslatable and simply to be given as “this” or “that” SN ii.36 (ekena-padena sabbo attho vutto the whole matter is said with one word); Ja i.151 (taṃ atthaṃ the matter); ii.160 (imaṃ a. this); vi.289 (taṃ atthaṃ pakāsento); Pv-a 6 (taṃ atthaṃ pucchi asked it), 11 (visajjeti explains it), 29 (vuttaṃ atthaṃ what had been said), 82 (id.) ■ (b) affair, cause, case (cp. aṭṭa2 and Lat. causa) Dhp 256, Dhp 331; Mil 47 (kassa atthaṃ dhāresi whose cause do you support, with whom do you agree?). See also alamattha.

6. Adv. use of oblique cases in the sense of a prep.: (a) dat. atthāya for the sake of, in order to, for Ja i.254 dhan’ atthāya for wealth kim˚ what for, why?), 279; ii.133; iii.54; Dhp-a ii.82; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 78 ■ (b) acc. atthaṃ on account of, in order to, often instead of an infinitive or with another inf. substitute Ja i.279 (kim˚); iii.53 (id.); i.253; ii.128 Dpvs vi.79; Dhp-a i.397; Pv-a 32 (dassan˚ in order to see), 78, 167, etc ■ (c) abl. atthā Ja iii.518 (pitu atthā = atthāya C.) ■ (d) loc. atthe instead of, for Vv-a 10; Pv-a 33; etc.

anattha (m. & nt.) 1. unprofitable situation or condition mischief, harm, misery, misfortune SN i.103; SN ii.196 (anatthāya saṃvattati); AN iv.96 (˚ṃ adhipajjati) Iti 84 (˚janano doso ill-will brings discomfort); Ja i.63, Ja i.196 Pp 37; Dhs 1060, Dhs 1231; Sdhp 87; DN-a i.52 (anatthajanano kodho, cp. Iti 83 and Nd ii.420 Q2); Dhp-a ii.73; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 114, Pv-a 199.

2. (= attha 3) incorrect sense false meaning, as adj. senseless (and therefore unprofitable no good, irrelevant) AN v.222, AN v.254 (adhammo ca) Dhp 100 (= aniyyānad˚īpaka Dhp-a ii.208); Snp 126 (expld. at Snp-a 180 as ahitaṃ).

-akkhāyin showing what is profitable DN iii.187. -attha riches Ja vi.290 (= atthabhūtaṃ atthaṃ C.). -antara difference between the (two) meanings Mil 158. At Thag 374, Oldenberg’s reading, but the v.l. (also C. reading atthandhara is much better = he who knows the (correct) meaning, esp. as it corresponds with dhamma-dhara (q.v.). -abhisamaya grasp of the proficient SN i.87 (see abhisamaya). -uddhāra synopsis or abstract of contents (“matter”) of the Vinaya Dpvs v.37. -upaparikkhā investigation of meaning, (+ dhamma-savanna) MN iii.175; AN iii.381 sq.; AN iv.221; AN v.126. -uppatti (aṭṭh˚) sense meaning, explanation, interpretation Ja i.89; DN-a i.242 Kp-a 216; Vv-a 197, Vv-a 203 (cp. pāḷito) Pv-a 2, Pv-a 6, Pv-a 78; etc -kāma (adj.) (a) well-wishing, a well-wisher, friend, one who is interested in the welfare of others (cp. Sk. arthakāma e.g. Bhagavadgīta ii.5: gurūn arthakāman) SN i.140 SN i.197, SN i.201 sq.; AN iii.143; DN iii.164 (bahuno janassa a., hitakāmo); Ja i.241; Pv iv.351; Pv-a 25; Snp-a 287 (an˚). (b) one who is interested in his own gain or good, either in good or bad sense (= greedy) SN i.44; Pv-a 112. -kathā (aṭṭha˚) exposition of the sense, explanation, commentary Ja v.38, Ja v.170; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 71, etc. freq. in Name of Com. -kara beneficial, useful Vin iii.149; Mil 321 -karaṇa the business of trying a case, holding court giving judgment (v.l. aṭṭa˚) DN ii.20; SN i.74 (judgment hall?). -kavi a didactic poet (see kavi) AN ii.230. -kāmin = ˚kāma, well-wishing Snp 986 (devatā atthakāminī) -kāraṇā (abl.) for the sake of gain DN iii.186. -kusala clever in finding out what is good or profitable Snp 143 (= atthacheka Kp-a 236). -cara doing good, busy in the interest of others, obliging SN i.23 (narānaṃ = “working out man’s salvation”). -caraka (adj.) one who devotes himself to being useful to others, doing good, one who renders service to others, e.g. an attendant, messenger agent etc. DN i.107 (= hitakāraka DN-a i.276); Ja ii.87 Ja iii.326; Ja iv.230; Ja vi.369. -cariyā useful conduct or behaviour DN iii.152, DN iii.190, DN iii.232; AN ii.32, AN ii.248; AN iv.219, AN iv.364. -ñu one who knows what is useful or who knows the (plain or correct) meaning of something (+ dhammaññū) DN iii.252; AN iii.148; AN iv.113 sq. -dassin intent upon the (moral good Snp 385 (= hitânupassin Snp-a 373). -dassimant one who examines a cause (cp. Sk. arthadarśika) Ja vi.286 (but expld. by C. as “saṇha-sukhuma-pañña” of deep insight one who has a fine and minute knowledge). -desanā interpretation, exegesis Mil 21 (dhamm˚). -dhamma “reason and morality”, see above n0. 3. ˚anusāsaka one who advises regarding the meaning and application of the Law, a professor of moral philosophy Ja ii.105; Dhp-a ii.71 -pada a profitable saying, a word of good sense, text motto AN ii.189; AN iii.356; Dhp 100. -paṭisambhidā knowledge of the meaning (of words) combd. with dhamma of the text or spirit (see above n0. 3) Pts i.132; Pts ii.150 Vb 293 sq. -paṭisaṃvedin experiencing good DN iii.241 (+ dhamma˚); AN i.151; AN iii.21. -baddha expecting some good from (c. loc.) Snp 382. -bhañjanaka breaking the welfare of, hurting Dhp-a iii.356 (paresaṃ of others, by means of telling lies, musāvādena). -majjha of beautiful waist Ja v.170 (= sumajjhā C.; reading must be faulty there is hardly any connection with attha; v.l. atta) -rasa sweetness (or substance, essence) of meaning (dhamma˚, vimutti˚) Nd ii.466; Pts ii.88, Pts ii.89. -vasa “dependence on the sense”, reasonableness, reason, consequence cause DN ii.285; MN i.464; MN ii.120; MN iii.150; SN ii.202 SN iii.93; SN iv.303; SN v.224; AN i.61, AN i.77, AN i.98; AN ii.240; AN iii.72, AN iii.169 AN iii.237; Dhp 289 (= kāraṇa Dhp-a iii.435); Iti 89; Snp 297; Ud 14. -vasika sensible Iti 89; Mil 406. -vasin bent on (one’s) aim or purpose Thag 539. -vādin one who speaks good, i.e. whose words are doing good or who speaks only useful speech, always in combn. with kāla bhūta˚ dhamma˚ DN i.4; DN iii.175; AN i.204; AN ii.22, AN ii.209 Pp 58; DN-a i.76 (expld. as “one who speaks for the sake of reaping blessings here and hereafter”). -saṃvaṇṇanā explanation, exegesis Pv-a 1. -saṃhita connected with good, bringing good, profitable, useful, salutary DN i.189; SN ii.223; SN iv.330; SN v.417; AN iii.196 sq., 244; Snp 722 (= hitena saṃhitaṃ Snp-a 500); Pp 58. -sandassana determination of meaning, definition Pts i.105. -siddhi profit, advantage, benefit Ja i.402; Pv-a 63.

Vedic artha from; ; arti & ṛṇoti to reach attain or to proceed (to or from), thus originally result (or cause), profit, attainment. Cp. semantically Fr. chose Lat. causa

Attha2

(nt.) home, primarily as place of rest & shelter, but in P. phraseology abstracted from the “going home”, i.e. setting of the sun, as disappearance going out of existence, annihilation, extinction Only in acc. and as ˚-in foll phrases: atthaṅgacchati to disappear, to go out of existence, to vanish Dhp 226 (= vināsaṃ natthibhāvaṃ gacchati Dhp-a iii.324), 384 (parikkhayaṃ gacchati); pp. atthaṅgata gone home, gone to rest, gone, disappeared; of the sun (= set): Ja i.175 (atthangate suriye at sunset); Pv-a 55 (id.) 216 (anatthangate s. before sunset) fig. Snp 472 (atthagata). 475 (id.) 1075 (= niruddha ucchinṇa vinaṭṭha anupādi-sesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā nibbuta); Iti 58; Dhs 1038; Vb 195 -atthagatatta (nt. abstr.) disappearance Snp-a 409. -atthaṅgama (atthagama passim) annihilation, disappearance opposed to samudaya (coming into existence) and synonymous with nirodha (destruction) DN i.34, DN i.37, DN i.183; SN iv.327; AN iii.326; Pts ii.4, Pts ii.6, Pts ii.39; Pp 52; Dhs 165 Dhs 265, Dhs 501, Dhs 579; Vb 105. -atthagamana (nt.) setting (of the sun) Ja i.101 (suriyass’ atthagamanā at sunset DN-a i.95 (= ogamana) ■ attha-gāmin, in phrase uday’ atthagāmin leading to birth and death (of paññā): see udaya. -atthaṃ paleti = atthangacchati (fig.) Snp 1074 (= atthangameti nirujjhati Nd ii.28) ■ Also atthamita (pp. of i ) set (of the sun) in phrase anatthamite suriye before sunset (with anatthangamite as v.l. at both pass. Dhp-a i.86; Dhp-a iii.127 ■ Cp. also abbhattha.

Vedic asta, of uncertain etym.

Attha3

pres. 2nd pl. of atthi (q.v.).

Atthata

spread, covered, spread over with (-˚) Vin i.265; Vin iv.287; Vin v.172 (also ˚an); AN iii.50; Pv-a 141.

pp. of attharati

Atthatta

(nt.) reason, cause; only in abl. atthattā according to the sense, by reason of, on account of Pv-a 189 (-˚).

abstr. fr. attha1

Atthara

a rug (for horses, elephants etc.) DN i.7.

fr. attharati

Attharaka

a covering Ja i.9; DN-a i.87 ■ f. ˚ikā a layer Ja i.9; Ja v.280.

= atthara

Attharaṇa

(nt.) a covering, carpet, cover, rug Vin ii.291; AN ii.56; AN iii.53; Mvu 3, Mvu 20; Mvu 15, Mvu 40 Mvu 25, Mvu 102; Thag-a 22.

fr. attharati

Attharati

to spread, to cover, to spread out; stretch, lay out Vin i.254; Vin v.172; Ja i.199; Ja v.113; Ja vi.428; Dhp i.272 ■ pp. atthata (q.v.) ■ Caus. attharāpeti to caused to be spread Ja v.110; Mvu 3, Mvu 20; Mvu 29, Mvu 7; Mvu 34, Mvu 69.

ā + stṛ;

Atthavant

(adj.) full of benefit SN i.30; Thag 740; Mil 172.

cp. Sk. arthavant

Atthāra

spreading out Vin v.172 (see kaṭhina). atthāraka same ibid.; Vin ii.87 (covering).

cp. Sk. āstāra, fr. attharati

Atthi

to be, to exist. Pres. Ind. 1st sg. asmi Snp 1120, Snp 1143; Ja i.151; Ja iii.55 and amhi MN i.429; Snp 694; Ja ii.153; Pv i.102; ii.82. 2nd sg. asi Snp 420; Ja ii.160 (’si); iii.278; Vv 324 Pv-a 4.

3rd sg. atthi Snp 377, Snp 672, Snp 884; Ja i.278 Often used for 3rd pl. (= santi), e.g. Ja i.280; Ja ii.2 Ja iii.55.

1st pl. asma [Sk. smaḥ] Snp 594, Snp 595; asmase Snp 595, and amha Snp 570; Ja ii.128. 2nd pl. attha Ja ii.128; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 74 (āgat’ attha you have come). 3rd pl. santi Snp 1077; Nd ii.637 (= saṃvijjanti atthi upalabbhanti); Ja ii.353; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 22-Imper. atthu Snp 340; Ja i.59; Ja iii.26 ■ Pot. 1st sg. siyā [Sk. syām] Pv ii.88, and assaṃ [Cond. used as Pot.] Snp 1120; Pv i.125 (= bhaveyyaṃ Pv-a 64).

2nd sg. siyā [Sk. syāḥ] Pv ii.87.

3rd sg. siyā [Sk. syāt] DN ii.154; Snp 325, Snp 1092 Nd ii.105 (= jāneyya, nibbatteyya); Ja i.262; Pv-a 13, and assa DN i.135, DN i.196; DN ii.154; AN v.194; Snp 49, Snp 143; Dhp 124, Dhp 260; Pv ii.324; 924.

1st pl. assu Pv-a 27. 3rd pl. assu [cp. Sk. syuḥ] Snp 532; Dhp 74; Pv iv.136 (= bhaveyyuṃ Pv-a 231) ■ Aor. 1st sg. āsiṃ [Sk. āsaṃ Snp 284; Pv i.21 (= ahosiṃ Pv-a 10); ii.34 (= ahosiṃ Pv-a 83).

3rd sg. āsi [Sk. āsīt] Snp 994.

3rd āsuṃ [cp. Sk. Perf. āsuḥ] Pv ii.321, 133 (ti pi pāṭho for su). Ppr. *sat only in loc. sati (as loc. abs.) Dhp 146; Ja i.150 Ja i.263, santa Snp 105; Nd ii.635; Ja i.150 (loc. evaṃ sante in this case); iii.26, and samāna (q.v.) Ja i.266; Ja iv.138.

-bhāva state of being, existence, being Ja i.222, Ja i.290 Ja ii.415; Dhp-a ii.5; Dhp-a iv.217 (atthibhāva vā natthibhāva vā whether there is or not).

Sk. asti, 1st sg. asmi; Gr. εἰμί ἐστί; Lat. sum-est; Goth. im-ist; Ags. eom-is E. am-is

Atthika

(adj.) 1. (to attha1) profitable, good, proper. In this meaning the MSS show a variance of spelling either atthika or aṭṭhika or aṭṭhita; in all cases atthika should be preferred DN i.55 (˚vāda); MN ii.212 (aṭṭhita); AN iii.219 sq. (idaṃ atthikaṃ this is suitable, of good avail; T aṭṭhitaṃ, vv.ll. as above); Snp 1058 (aṭṭhita Nd ii.20 also aṭṭhita, which at this pass. shows a confusion between aṭṭha and a-ṭhita); Ja v.151 (in def. of aṭṭhikatvā q.v.); Pp 69, Pp 70 (T aṭṭhika, aṭṭhita SS; expld. by Pp AN v.4 by kalyāṇāya).

2. (to attha1 2) desirous of (-˚) wanting, seeking for, in need of (c. instr.) AN ii.199 (uday desirous of increase); Snp 333, Snp 460, Snp 487 (puññ˚), 987 (dhan˚ greedy for wealth); Ja i.263 (rajj˚ coveting a kingdom); v.19; Pv ii.228 (bhojan˚ in need of food); iv.11 (kāraṇ˚), 121 (khiḍḍ˚ for play), 163 (puññ˚); Pv-a 95 (sasena a. wanting a rabbit), 120; DN-a i.70 (atthikā those who like to). -anatthika one who does not care for, or is not satisfied with (c. instr.) Ja v.460; Pv-a 20; of no good Thag 956 (“of little zeal” Mrs. Rh. D.).

-bhāva (a) usefulness, profitableness Pp AN v.4. (b state of need, distress Pv-a 120.

cp. Sk. arthika

Atthikavant

(adj.) one who wants something, one who is on a certain errand DN i.90 (atthikaṃ assa atthī ti DN-a i.255).

atthika + vant

Atthitā

(f.) state of being, existence, being, reality MN i.486; SN ii.17 (˚añ c˚ eva natthitañ ca to be and not to be); iii.135; Ja v.110 (kassaci atthitaṃ vā natthitaṃ vā jānāhi see if there is anybody or not); Dhs-a 394 ■ Often in abl. atthitāya by reason of, on account of, this being so Dhp-a iii.344 (idamatthitāya under this condition) Pv-a 94, Pv-a 97, Pv-a 143.

f. abstr. fr. atthi cp. atthibhāva

Atthin

(adj.) (-˚) desirous, wanting anything; see mant˚, vād˚.

Vedic arthin

Atthiya

(adj.) (-˚) having a purpose or end SN iii.189 (kim˚ for what purpose?); AN v.1 sq. (id.), 311 sq.; Thag 1097 (att˚ having one’s purpose in oneself) 1274; Snp 354 (yad atthiyaṃ on account of what).

= atthika

Atra

(adv.) here; atra atra here & there Ja i.414 = Ja iv.5 (in expln. of atriccha).

Sk. atra

Atraja

(adj.) [Sk. *ātma-ja, corrupted form for attaja (see attā) through analogy with Sk. atra “here”. This form occurs only in Ja and similar sources, i.e. popular lore born from oneself, one’s own, appl. to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd., viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka antevāsika p. Nd ii.448Ja i.135; Ja iii.103 = Nd i.504; Ja iii.181; Ja v.465; Ja vi.20; Mvu 4, Mvu 12; Mvu 13, Mvu 4; Mvu 36, Mvu 57.

Atriccha

(adj.) [the popular etym. suggested at Ja iv.4 is atra atra icchamāna desiring here & there; but see atricchā very covetous, greedy, wanting too much Ja i.414 = Ja iv.4 Ja iii.206.

Atricchā

(f.) great desire, greed, excessive longing, insatiability Ja iv.5, Ja iv.327.

Sk. *atṛptyā, a + tṛpt + yā, influenced by Desid. titṛpsati, so that atricchā phonetically rather corresponds to a form *a ■ tṛpsyā (cch = psy, cp. P. chāta Sk. psāta). For the simple Sk. tṛpti see titti (from tappati2). According to Kern, but phonetically hardly justifiable it is Sk. atīccha = ati + icchā “too much desire” with r in dissolution of geminated tt, like atraja for attaja See also atriccha adj. and cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 69

Atricchatā

(f.) excessive lust J. iii.222.

see atricchā

Atha

(indecl.) copulative & adversative part. 1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning & continuation of a story: and, and also, or and then, now DN ii.2; DN iii.152, DN iii.199 (athāparaṃ etad avoca); MN i.435; Snp 1006, Snp 1007, Snp 1017; Snp p.126 (athâparaṃ etad avoca: and further, something else); Dhp 69 Dhp 119, Dhp 377; Ja ii.158; Pv ii.64; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 8 (atha na and not) 70.

2. after negative clauses: but MN i.430; Snp 990 Snp 1047; Dhp 85, Dhp 136, Dhp 387; Pv-a 68. Often combd. with other part., e.g. atha kho (pos. & neg.) now, and then but, rather, moreover Vin i.1; DN i.141, DN i.167, DN i.174; AN v.195; Pv-a 79, Pv-a 221, Pv-a 251. na-atha kho na neither-nor Pv-a 28. atha kho pana and yet DN i.139. atha ca pana on the other hand Ja i.279. atha vā or (after prec. ca) nor (after prec. na) Snp 134; Dhp 140, Dhp 271; Pv i.41; ii.14 athā vā pi Snp 917, Snp 921.

Sk. atha, cp. atho

Athabbaṇa

(1) the Atharva Veda DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 447 (˚veda) ■ (2) one who is familiar with the (magic formulas of the) Atharvaveda Ja vi.490 (sâthabbaṇa = sahatthivejja, with the elephant-healer or doctor) See also āthabbaṇa.

Vedic atharvan; as regards etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under ater

Atho

(indecl.) copulative and adversative part.: and, also, and further, likewise, nay SN i.106; Snp 43, Snp 155, Snp 647; Dhp 151, Dhp 234, Dhp 423; Ja i.83; Ja ii.185 Ja iv.495; Iti 106; Kp viii.7; Pv iv.315; Pv-a 251 (atho ti nipātamattaṃ avadhāraṇ-atthe vā). Also combd. with other part., like atho pi Snp 222, Snp 537, Snp 985; Pv ii.320; Kp-a 166.

Sk. atho, atha + u

Ada

(adj.) (-˚) eating SN iv.195 (kiṭṭhâda eating corn); Ja ii.439 (vantâda = vantakhādaka C.).

to ad, see adeti, cp. ˚ga, ˚ṭha, ˚da etc.

Adaka

(adj.) = ada Ja v.91 (purisâdaka man-eater).

Adana

(nt.) eating, food Ja v.374 (v.l. modana).

from adeti

Adasaka

(adj.) see dasā.

Adāsa

a kind of bird Ja iv.466.

prob. = adaṃsa, from ḍasati to bite, cp. dāṭhā tooth; lit meaning “toothless” or “not biting”

Adiṭṭhā

not seeing, without seeing Ja iv.192 (T. adaṭṭhā, v.l. BB na diṭṭhā, C. adisvā) v.219.

a + diṭṭhā, ger. of *dassati

Adinna

(pp.) that which is not given, freq. in phrase adinn’ ādāna (BSk. adattādāna Divy 302 seizing or grasping that whieh is not given to one i.e. stealing, is the 2nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sīla (dasa-sīla see sīla ii.). Vin i.83 (˚ā veramaṇī); DN i.4 (= parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ corikā ti vuttaṃ hoti DN-a i.71); iii.68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq.; MN i.361; Iti 63; Kp ii., cp. Kp-a 26adinnādāyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattādāyika Divy 301, Divy 418) Vin i.85; DN i.138 Sdhp 78.

a + dinna

Adu

(or ādu ) (indecl.) part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 622 (= udāhu Vv-a 258 v.l. SS. ādu) = Pv iv.317 (ādu) = Dhp-a i.31 (T. ādu v.l. adu); Vv 631 (v.l. ādu); Ja v.330 (T. ādu, C. adu expld. on p. 331 fantastically as aduñ ca aduñ ca kammaṃ karohī ti). See also ādu.

perhaps identical with aduṃ, nt. of pron. asu

Aduṃ

nt. of pron. asu.

Adūsaka

(adj.) innocent Ja v.143 (= nirapa rādha C.); vi.84, 552. f. adūsikā Snp 312.

a + dūsaka

Adūsiya

= adūsaka Ja v.220 (= anaparādha C.).

Adeti

to eat. Pres. ind. ademi etc. Ja v.31, Ja v.92, Ja v.197, Ja v.496; Ja vi.106 pot. adeyya Ja v.107, Ja v.392, Ja v.493.

Sk. ādayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1st sg. admi = Gr. ε ̓́δω, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat

Adda1

ginger Ja i.244 (˚singivera).

cp. Sk. ārdraka

Adda3

(adj.) wet, moist slippery Ja iv.353; Ja vi.309; Mil 346.

-āvalepana “smeared with moisture”, i.e. shiny, glittering SN iv.187 (kūṭāgāra); MN i.86 = Nd ii.1996 (upakāriyo) See also addha2.

The reading allāvalepana occurs at Nd ii.40 (= SN iv.187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as “newly plastered.”

Sk. ārdra, from ṛdati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr. α ̓́ρδω to moisten, αἀρδα dirt; see also alla

Adda2 & Addā

3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a.

Addakkhi

3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 1 b.

Addasā

3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2 a. Adda & Addayana

Addā & Addāyanā

at Vb 371 in def. of anādariya is either faulty writing, or dial. form or pop. etym. for ādā and ādāyana; see ādariya.

Addāyate

to be or get wet, fig. to be attached to Ja iv.351. See also allīyati.

v. denom. fr. adda

Addi

a mountain Dāvs ii.13.

Sk. ardri

Addita

(pp.) afflicted, smarted, oppressed Ja i.21; Ja ii.407; Ja iii.261; Ja iv.295 Ja v.53, Ja v.268; Thag 406; Mvu 1, Mvu 25; Pv-a 260; Sdhp 37, Sdhp 281.

see aṭṭita which is the more correct spelling

Addha1

(num.) one half, half (˚-) DN i.166 (˚māsika); AN ii.160 (˚māsa ); Ja i.59 (˚yojana ); iii. 189 (˚māsa).

= aḍḍha, q.v.

Addha2

(adj.) soiled, wet; fig. attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) MN ii.223 (na anaddhabhūtaṃ attānaṃ dukkhena addhabhāveti he dirties the impure self with ill); SN iii.1 (addhabhūto kāyo impure body) Ja vi.548 (˚nakha with dirty nails, C. pūtinakha).

= adda3, Sk. ārdra

Addhan

(in cpds. addha˚; ) 1. (of space a path, road, also journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase Ja iv.384 = Ja v.137 (pathaddhuno paṇṇarase va cando, gen. for loc. ˚addhani, on his course in his orbit; expld. at iv.384 by ākāsa-patha-sankhātassa addhuno majjhe ṭhito and at v.137 by pathaddhagato addha-pathe gaganamajjhe ṭhito); Pv iii.31 (pathaddhani paṇṇarase va cando; loc. same meaning as prec., expld. at Pv-a 188 by attano pathabhūte addhani gaganatala-magge) This phrase (pathaddhan) however is expld. by Kern (Toev s. v. pathaddu) as “gone half-way”, i.e. on full-moon-day He rejects the expln. of C.

2. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present & future) in; tayo addhā three divisions of time (atita, anāgata, paccuppanna) DN iii.216; Iti 53, Iti 70. (b) in phrase dīghaṃ addhānaṃ (acc.) a very long time AN ii.1, AN ii.10 (dighaṃ a ddh ānaṃ saṃsāraṃ); Snp 740 (dīghaṃ addhāna saṃsāra); Dhp 207 (dīghaṃ addhāna socati) Ja i.137. gen. dīghassa addhuno Pv-a 148 (gatattā because a long time has elapsed), instr. dīghena addhunā SN i.78; AN ii.118; Pv-a 28.

-āyu duration of life AN ii.66 (dīghaṃ ˚ṃ a long lifetime -gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata Mvu ii.150], always combd. with vayo anuppatto sometimes in ster. formula with jiṇṇa & mahallaka; Vin ii.188; DN i.48 (cp. DN-a i.143); MN i.82; Snp p. 50, Snp p. 92; Pv-a 149. -gū [Vedic adhvaga] a wayfarer, traveller journeyman Thag 255 = SN i.212 (but the latter has panthagu v.l. addhagū); Ja iii.95 (v.l. patthagu = panthagu); Dhp 302.

Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning “stretch, length”, both of space & time ■ Cases:; nom. addhā, gen. dat. addhuno, instr. addhunā, acc. addhānaṃ loc. addhani; pl. addhā. See also addhāna

Addhā

(adv.) part. of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really truly DN i.143; Ja i.19 (a. ahaṃ Buddho bhavissāmi) Ja i.66 (a. tvaṃ Buddho bhavissasi), Ja i.203, Ja i.279; Ja iii.340; Ja v.307, Ja v.410 (C. expln. differs) Snp 47, Snp 1057; Nd ii.30 = Pts ii.21 (ekaṃsa-vacanaṃ nissaṃsaya-vacanaṃ etc.) addhā hi Ja iv.399; Pv iv.15 2.

Vedic addhā, cp. Av. azdā certainty

Addhaneyya

(adj.) = adhaniya 2, lasting Ja v.507 (an˚).

Addhaniya

(adj.) 1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Thag 529. 2. belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period lasting, enduring DN iii.211; Ja i.393 (an˚) Ja vi.71. See also addhaneyya.

fr. addhan

Addhariya

a sacrificing priest, Name of a class of Brahmins DN i.237 (brāhmaṇa).

Vedic adhvaryu fr. adhvara sacrifice

Addhāna

(nt.) same meaning as addhan but as simplex only used with reference to time (i.e. a long time, cp. Vv-a 117 addhānaṃ = ciraṃ). Usually in phrase atītaṃ (anāgataṃ etc.) addhānaṃ in the past (future etc.), e.g. DN i.200; SN i.140; AN v.32; Mil 126 (anāgatamaddhāne for ˚aṃ); Pv-a 75 (v.l. addhāne). dīghaṃ addhānaṃ Pv i.105. Also in phrase addhānaṃ āpādeti to make out the length of time or period, i.e. to live out one’s lifetime SN iv.110; Ja ii.293 (= jīvitaddhānaṃ āpādi āyuṃ vindi C).

-daratha exhaustion from travelling DN-a i.287. -magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road DN i.1, DN i.73, DN i.79; MN i.276 (kantār˚) DN-a i.35 (interpreted as “addhayojanaṃ gacchissāmī ti bhuñjitabban ti ādi vacanato addha-yojanam pi addhāna maggo hoti”, thus taken to addha “half”, from counting by 1/2 miles); Vv-a 40, Vv-a 292. Cp. also antarāmagga. -parissama “fatigue of the road”, i.e. fatigue from travelling Vv-a 305. -vemattatā difference of time or period Mil 285 (+ āyuvemattatā).

orig. the acc. of addhan, taken as nt. from phrase dīghaṃ addhānaṃ. It occurs only in acc. which may always be taken as acc. of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhāna would be superfluous were it not for later forms like addhāne (loc.) Mil 126; Pv-a 75 v.l. BB, and for cpds.

Addhika

a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DN-a i.298 (= pathāvin), 270; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 127 (˚jana people travelling). Often combd. with kapaṇa beggar, tramp, as kapaṇaddhikā (pl.) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as ˚iddhika, q.v.), e.g. Ja i.6 (v.l. ˚iddhika 262; Dhp-a ii.26.

fr. addhan

Addhita

at Pv ii.62 is to be corrected to aṭṭita (sic v.l. BB).

Addhin

(adj.) (-˚) belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one who has performed his journey (= addhagata) Dhp 90.

fr. addhan

Addhuva

see dhuva.

Adrūbhaka

see dubbha.

Advejjhatā

see dvejjhatā.

Adha˚

in cpds. like adhagga see under adho.

Adhamma

see dhamma.

Adhama

(adj.) the lowest (lit. & fig.), the vilest, worst Snp 246; (narādhama), 135 (vasalâdhama); Dhp 78 (purisa˚) Ja iii.151 (miga˚); Ja v.394 (uttamâdhama), Ja v.437 (id.), Ja v.397 Sdhp 387.

Vedic adhama = Lat. infimus, superl. of adho, q.v.

Adhara

(adj.) the lower Ja iii.26 (adharoṭṭha the l. lip).

Vedic adhara, compar. of adho

Adhi

.

A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal up to, over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a) ■ (b) as place where (prep. c. loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over in; in addition to. Often simply deictic “here” (e.g. ajjhatta = adhi + ātman “this self here” (see C 1 b).

B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i.e. in loose compn. with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd, like ajjhā˚ (adhi + ā), adhippa˚ (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i.e. as 2nd part of a pref. cpd., like ā in paccā˚ (prati + ā), paryā˚ (pari + ā) or ava in paryava˚ (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud˚ (abhi ud), samud˚ (sam + ud). As such (i.e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning “over above, in addition quite, par excellence, super”-(adhideva a super-god, cp ati-deva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like E. up in “shut up, fill up, join up etc) esp. in double pref ■ cpds. (ajjhāvasati “to dwell here-in = āvasati “to dwell in, to inhabit”) (see C 2) ■ In the explns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far-fetchedly) interpreted by abhibhū “overpowering” see e.g. C. on adhiṭṭhāti & adhiṭṭhita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi → ati in adhikusala, ˚kodhita, ˚jeguccha, ˚brahmā adhi → abhi in adhippatthita, ˚pātcti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha. Cp. also ati iv.

C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either lit. or fig ■ (a); where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) “gone on to or into” = studied ajjhesita (adhi + esita) “wished for”; ˚kata “put to” i.e. commissioned; ˚kāra commission; ˚gacchati “to go on to & reach it” = obtain; ˚gama attainment; ˚gaṇhāti to overtake = surpass, ˚peta (adhi + pra + ita) “gone in to” = meant, understood; ˚pāya sense meaning, intention ˚bhāsati to speak to = address; ˚mutta intent upon ˚vacana “saying in addition” = attribute, metaphor, cp Fr. sur-nom; ˚vāsāna assent, ˚vāseti to dwell in, give in = consent ■ (b) where: ˚tiṭṭhati (˚ṭṭhāti) to stand by = look after, perform; ˚ṭṭhāna place where; ˚vasati to inhabit; ˚sayana “lying in”, inhabiting.

2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi-jeguccha very detestable; ˚matta “in an extreme measure”, ˚pa supreme lord; ˚pacca lordship ˚paññā higher, additional wisdom; ˚vara the very best ˚sīla thorough character or morality ■ (b) with verbs (in double pref ■ cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogāheti plunge into; ajjhoṭhapeti to bring down to (its destination) ˚otthata covered completely; ˚oharati to swallow right down. adhi + ā: ajjhappatta having reached (the end) ajjhapīḷita quite overwhelmed; ˚āvuttha inhabited; ˚ārūhati grown up over; ˚āsaya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen).; adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach obtain; ˚upeti to receive; ˚upekkhati “to look all along over” = to superintend adhi + pra: adhippattheti to long for, to desire.

Note. The contracted (assimilation-)form of adhi before vowels is ajjh- (q.v.).

Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a˚ + suffix-dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. ε ̓́ν χα “on this” = here, cp ο ̔́χι where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. δέ (toward) = Ohg. zuo, E. to

Adhika

(adj.) exceeding, extraordinary, superior, Pp 35; Vv-a 80 (= anadhivara, visiṭṭha); DN-a i.141, DN-a i.222; Dpvs v.32 (an˚); Dhp-a iii.238 Kp-a 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp 337, Sdhp 447 ■ compar adhikatara Dhp-a ii.7; Dhp-a iii.176; nt. ˚ṃ as adv. extraordinarily Pv-a 86 (= adhimattaṃ). In combn. with numerals adhika has the meaning of “in addition, with an additional, plus” (cp. ādi + ādika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as ādika, i.e. preceding the noun-determination), e.g. catunahutâdhikāni dve yojana-sahassāni 2000 + 94 (= 294 000; Ja i.25; sattamāsâdhikāni sattavassāni 7 years and 7 months Ja v.319; paññāsâdhikāni pañca vassa-satani 500 + 50 (550) Pv-a 152. See also sâdhika.

fr. adhi; cp. Sk. adhika

Adhikata

(adj.) 1. commissioned with, an overseer, Pv ii.927 (dāne adhikata ṭhapita Pv-a 124).

2. caused by Mil 67 (kamma˚). 3. affected by something, i.e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Mil 144 (+ vimātijāta).

adhi + kata; cp. Sk. adhikṛta

Adhikaraṇa

(nt.) 1. attendance, supervision, management of affairs, administration Pv-a 209. 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence DN ii.59 (-˚: in consequence of); SN ii.41; SN v.19. Esp. acc. ˚ṃ as adv. (-˚) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of from MN i.410 (rūpâdhikaraṇaṃ); SN iv.339 (rāga˚); Mil 281 (mudda˚ for the sake of the royal seal, orig. in attendance on the r. s.). Kimâdhikaraṇaṃ why, on account of what Ja iv.4 (= kiṃkāraṇaṃ) yatvâdhikaraṇaṃ (yato adhi˚) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj. DN i.70 = AN i.113 = AN ii.16 = DN iii.225.

3. case, question cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enumd. at var. passages, viz. vivāda˚ anuvāda˚ āpatta kicca˚; “questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct of duties” Vin ii.88; Vin iii.164; Vin iv.126, Vin iv.238; MN ii.247. Often ref.: Vin ii.74; SN iv.63 = SN v.346 (dhamma˚ a question of the Dh.); AN i.53 (case), AN i.79; AN ii.239 (vūpasanta) AN v.71, AN v.72; Pp 20, Pp 55; Dhp-a iv.2 (˚ssa uppamassa vūpasama), adhikaraṇaṃ karoti to raise a dispute MN i.122 ˚ṃ vūpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin ii.261.

-kāraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin iv.230 (f. ˚ikā); AN iii.252. -samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enumd. at DN iii.254; MN ii.247; AN i.99; AN iv.144.

adhi + karaṇa

Adhikaraṇika

one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge AN v.164, AN v.167.

fr. adhikaraṇa

Adhikaraṇī

(f.) a smith’s anvil Ja iii.285; Dāvs iii.16 sq.; Dhs-a 263.

to adhikaraṇa 1, orig. meaning “serving, that which serves, i.e. instrument”

Adhikāra

attendance, service, administration, supervision, management, help Vin i.55; Ja i.56 Ja vi.251; Mil 60, Mil 115, Mil 165; Pv-a 124 (dāna˚; cp. Pv ii.927); Dhp-a ii.41.

cp. Sk. adhikāra

Adhikārika

(adj.) (-˚) serving as, referring to Vin iii.274 (Bdhgh).

to adhikāra

Adhikuṭṭanā

(f.) an executioner’s block Thig 58; cp. Thag-a 65 (v.l. kuḍḍanā, should prob. be read koṭṭana); Thag-a 287.

adhi + koṭṭanā or koṭṭana

Adhikusala

(adj.) in ˚ā dhammā “items of higher righteousness” DN iii.145.

adhi + kusala

Adhikodhita

(adj.) very angry Ja v.117.

adhi + kodhita

Adhigacchati

to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; fig. to understand DN i.229 (vivesaṃ) MN i.140 (anvesaṃ n’ âdhigacchanti do not find); SN i.22 (Nibbānaṃ); ii.278 (id.); AN i.162 (id.) Dhp 187, Dhp 365; Iti 82 (santiṃ); Thig 51; Pp 30, Pp 31; Pv i.74 (nibbutiṃ = labhati Pv-a 37); iii.710 (amataṃ padaṃ). opt. adhigaccheyya DN i.224 (kusalaṃ dhammaṃ) MN i.114 (madhu-piṇḍikaṃ); Dhp 61 and adhigacche Dhp 368. ger. ˚gantvā DN i.224; Ja i.45 (ānisaṃse); and ˚gamma Pv i.119 (= vinditvā paṭilabhitvā Pv-a 60). grd. ˚gantabba Iti 104 (nibbāna). cond. ˚gacchissaṃ Snp 446. 1st aor. 3 sg. ajjhagā Snp 225 (= vindi paṭilabhi Kp-a 180) Dhp 154; Vv 327; 3 pl. ajjhagū Ja i.256 (vyasanaṃ); ajjhāgamuṃ SN i.12. 2nd aor. 3 sg. adhigacchi Nd i.457. pp. adhigata (q.v.).

adhi + gacchati

Adhigaṇhāti

to surpass, excel SN i.87 = DN-a i.32; DN iii.146; SN iv.275; AN iii.33; Iti 19. Ger adhigayha Pv ii.962 = Dhp-a iii.219 (v.l. BB at both pass. atikkamma); & adhiggahetvā Iti 20 ■ pp. adhiggahīta (q.v.).

adhi + gaṇhāti

Adhigata

got into possession of, conquered, attained, found Ja i.374; Vv-a 135.

pp. of adhigacchati

Adhigatavant

(adj.-n.) one who has found or obtained Vv-a 296 (Nibbānaṃ).

fr. adhigata

Adhigama

attainment, acquisition; also fig. knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) DN iii.255; SN ii.139; AN ii.148; AN iv.22, AN iv.332; AN v.194; Ja i.406; Ne 91; Mil 133, Mil 215, Mil 358, Mil 362, Mil 388; Pv-a 207.

fr. adhigacchati

Adhigameti

to make obtain, to procure Pv-a 30.

adhi + gameti, Caus. of gacchati

Adhiggahīta

excelled, surpassed; overpowered, taken by (instr.), possessed Ja iii.427 (= anuggahīta C.); Ja v.102; vi.525 = 574; Iti 103; Mil 188 Mil 189; Sdhp 98.

pp. of adhigaṇhāti

Adhiciṇṇa

only at SN iii.12, where v.l. is aviciṇṇa, which is to be preferred. See viciṇṇa.

Adhicitta

(nt.) “higher thought”, meditation, contemplation, nsually in combn. with adhisīla and adhipaññā Vin i.70; DN iii.219; MN i.451; AN i.254, AN i.256 Nd i.39 = Nd ii.689 (˚sikkhā); Dhp 185 (= aṭṭha-samāpattisankhāta adhika-citta Dhp-a iii.238).

adhi + citta

Adhiceto

(adj.) lofty-minded, entranced Thag 68 = Ud 43 = Vin iv.54 = Dhp-a iii.384.

adhi + ceto

Adhicca1

learning, studying, learning by heart Ja iii.218, Ja iii.327 = Ja iv.301; Ja iv.184 (vede = adhīyitvā C.), 477 (sajjhāyitvā C.); vi.213; Mil 164.

ger. of adhi + eti, see adhīyati

Adhicca2

(˚-) unsupported, uncaused fortuitous, without cause or reason; in foll. phrases ˚āpattika guilty without intention MN i.443; ˚uppatti spontaneous origin Dhs-a 238; ˚laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 8422 = Ja v.171 Ja vi.315 (expld. at Ja v.171 by ahetunā, at vi.316 by akāraṇena ˚samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous unconditioned DN i.28 = Ud 69; DN iii.33, DN iii.138; SN ii.22–⁠23 (sukhadukkhaṃ); AN iii.440 (id.); Pts i.155; DN-a i.118 (= akāraṇa˚).

Sk. *adhṛtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dhṛ; cp. dhāra, dhāraṇa 3, dhāreti 4

Adhicca3

(adj.) without a cause (for assumption) unreasonable, unlikely SN v.457.

= adhicca 2 in adj. function, influenced by, homonym abhabba

Adhijeguccha

(nt.) intense scrupulous regard (for others) DN i.174, DN i.176.

adhi + jeguccha

Adhiṭṭhaka

(adj.) (-˚) bent on, given to, addicted to Ja v.427 (surā˚).

fr. adhiṭṭhāti

Adhiṭṭhāti

(adhiṭṭhahati) 1. to stand on Ja iii.278 (ger. ˚āya); Dhp-a iv.183 (ger ˚hitvā); fig. to insist on Thag 1131 (aor. ˚āhi).

2 to concentrate or fix one’s attention on (c. acc.), to direct one’s thoughts to, to make up one’s mind, to wish Vin i.115 (inf. ˚ṭhātuṃ), 297 (id.), 125 (grd. ˚ṭhātabba) Ja i.80 (aor. ˚ahi); iii.278; iv.134 (v.l. ati˚ C. expls. abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati); Dhp-a i.34; Dhp-a iv.201 (ger. ˚hitvā) Pv-a 23 (aor. ˚ṭhāsi) 171 (id.), 75 (ger. ˚hitvā). On adhiṭṭheyya see Cpd. 209, n. 2; 219, n. 1.

3. to undertake practice, perform, look after, to celebrate SN ii.17; AN i.115 sq.; Ja i.50; Pv-a 209 (ger. ˚ṭhāya) ■ pp. adhiṭṭhita (q.v.).

Sk. adhitiṣṭhati, adhi + sthā

Adhiṭṭhāna

(nt.) 1. decision, resolution, self-determination, will (cp. on this meaning Cpd. 62; DN iii.229 (where 4 are enumd., viz. paññā˚, sacca˚ cāga upasama˚); Ja i.23; Ja v.174; Pts i.108; Pts ii.171 sq., 207; Dhs-a 166 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 44).

2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias MN i.136; MN iii.31, MN iii.240; SN ii.17; SN iii.10, SN iii.135 SN iii.194 ■ As adj. (-˚) applying oneself to, bent on AN iii.363.

3. looking after, management, direction, power Mil 309 (devānaṃ); Pv-a 141 (so read for adhitaṭṭhāna) [ adiṭṭhāna as Pv-a 89, used as explanatory for āvāsa should perhaps be read adhiṭṭhāna in the sense of fixed permanent, abode].

fr. adhi + sthā

Adhiṭṭhāyaka

(adj.) (-˚) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma˚; Mvu 5, Mvu 175; Mvu 30, Mvu 98; kammanta˚ Dhp-a i.393.

Adhiṭṭhita

(adj.) 1. standing on (c. loc.), esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330 (hemarathe a. = sakalaṃ ṭhānaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhita Vv-a 269) ■ (a) looked after, managed, undertaken governed Vin i.57; SN v.278 (sv’âdhiṭṭhita); Pv-a 141 (kammanta) ■ (b) undertaking, bent on (c. acc.) Snp 820 (ekacariyaṃ).

pp. of adhiṭṭhāti

Adhideva

a superior or supreme god, above the gods MN ii.132; AN iv.304; Snp 1148; Nd ii.307b, 422 a Cp. atideva.

adhi + deva

Adhipa

ruler, lord, master Ja ii.369; Ja iii.324; Ja v.393; Pv ii.86 (jan˚ king); Dāvs iii.52; Vv-a 314.

Sk. adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati

Adhipaka

(adj.) (-˚) mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) AN i.150 (atta loka˚ dhamma˚).

fr. prec.

Adhipajjati

to come to, reach, attain AN iv.96 (anatthaṃ); pp. adhipanna.

adhi + pajjati

Adhipaññā

(f.) higher wisdom or knowledge, insight (cp. jhāna & paññā); usually in combn. with adhicitta & adhisīla Vin i.70; DN i.174; DN iii.219 (˚sikkhā); AN i.240; AN ii.92 sq., 239; iii.106 sq., 327 iv.360; Nd i.39 (id.); Pts i.20, Pts i.25 sq., 45 sq., 169; ii.11 244; Pp 61.

adhi + paññā

Adhipatati

to fly past, vanish Ja iv.111 (= ativiya patati sīghaṃ atikkamati C.) ■ Caus. adhipāteti (q.v.) in diff. meaning. Cp. also adhipāta.

adhi + patati

Adhipatana

(nt.) attack, pressing Thag-a 271.

fr. adhipatati

Adhipati

(n ■ adj.) 1. ruler, master Ja iv.223; Vv 811; Mil 388; Dhp-a i.36 (= seṭṭha). 2. ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vb 216 sq. (chandaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā making energy predominant); Dhs-a 125, Dhs-a 126 (atta˚ autonomous, loka heteronomous, influenced by society). See alṣo Dhs. trsl. 20 & Cpd. 60.

adhi + pati, cp. adhipa

Adhipateyya

(nt.) AN i.147; AN iii.33 = SN iv.275 is probably misreading for ādhipateyya.

Adhipatthita

desired, wished, begged for DN i.120.

pp. adhi + pattheti, cp. Sk. abhi + arthayati

Adhipanna

gone into, affected with, seized by (-˚), a victim of (c. loc.) SN i.72 Thig 345 (kāmesu); Snp 1123 (taṇhā˚ = taṇhânugata Nd ii.32); Dhp 288; Ja iii.38, Ja iii.369; Ja iv.396; Ja v.91, Ja v.379 (= dosena ajjhotthaṭa); vi.27.

cp. Sk. abhipanna, adhi + pad

Adhipāṭimokkha

(nt.) the higher, moral, code Vin v.1 (pāṭim˚ + ); MN ii.245 (+ ajjhājīva).

adhi + pāṭimokkha

Adhipāta1

splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddhā˚; head-splitting Snp 988 sq., 1004, 1025 (v.l. Nd ii.˚vipāta).

adhipāteti

Adhipāta2

a moth Snp 964. Expld. at Nd i.484 as “adhipātikā ti tā uppatitvā khādanti taṃkāraṇā a. vuccanti”; Ud 72 (expld. by C. as salabhā).

from adhipatati = Sk. atipatati, to fly past, flit

Adhipatikā

(f.) a moth, a mosquito Nd i.484 (see adhipāta2).

fr. adhipāta2

Adhipāteti

to break, split Ja iv.337 (= chindati). At Ud 8 prob. to be read adhibādheti (v.l. avibādeti. T. adhipāteti).

Caus. fr. adhipatati, cp. Sk. abhipātayati & P. atipāteti

Adhippagharati

to flow, to trickle Thag-a 284.

adhi + ppa + gharati

Adhippāgā

3 sg. aor. of adhippagacchati to go to Ja v.59.

Adhippāya

1. intention, wish desire SN i.124; SN v.108; AN ii.81; AN iii.363 (bhoga˚) v.65; Ja i.79, Ja i.83; Sdhp 62. As adj. (-˚) desiring Pv-a 226 (hass˚ in play = khiḍḍatthika).

2. sense, meaning conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Mil 148; Pv-a 8 Pv-a 16, Pv-a 48, Pv-a 131 (the moral of a story). -adhippāyena (instr. in the way of, like Pv-a 215 (kīḷ for fun).

adhi + ppa + i; Sk. abhiprāya

Adhippāyosa

distinction, difference, peculiarity, special meaning MN i.46; SN iii.66; SN iv.208; AN i.267; AN iv.158; AN v.48 sq.

adhi + pāyosa

Adhippeta

1. desired, approved of, agreeable DN i.120; DN ii.236; Vv-a 312, Vv-a 315.

2. meant, understood intended as Ja iii.263; Pv-a 9, Pv-a 80, Pv-a 120, Pv-a 164.

Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. adhippāya

Adhippetatta

(nt.) the fact of being meant or understood as, in abl. ˚ā with reference to, as is to be understood of Vv-a 13; Pv-a 52.

abstr. fr. adhippeta

Adhibādheti

to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud 8 (T. adhipāteti, v.l. avibādeti).

adhi + bādheti, cp. Sk. abhibādhayati

Adhibrahmā

a superior Brahmā, higher than Brahmā MN ii.132.

adhi + Brahmā, cp. atibrahmā

Adhibhavati

to overcome, overpower, surpass SN iv.185 sq. (cp. adhibhū) AN v.248, AN v.282 (˚bhoti); Ja ii.336; V.30 ■ aor. adhibhavi Ja ii.80. 3. pl. adhibhaṃsu SN iv.185. See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabhū pp.; adhibhūta (q.v.).

adhi + bhavati, cp. Sk. & P. abhibhavati

Adhibhāsati

to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhāsi Vin ii.195; SN i.103; SN iv.117; Snp p.87; Pv-a 56, Pv-a 90.

adhi + bhāsati

Adhibhū

(adj.) (-˚) overpowering, having power over; master conqueror, lord SN iv.186 (anadhibhū not mastering. For adhibhūta the v.l. abhi˚ is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see abhibhū); Snp 684 (miga˚ v.l. abhi˚).

fr. adhi + bhū, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibhū

Adhibhūta

overpowered SN iv.186.

cp. adhibhū & adhibhūta

Adhimatta

(adj.) extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. ˚ṃ extremely MN i.152, MN i.243; SN iv.160; AN ii.150; AN iv.241; Ja i.92; Pp 15; Mil 146, Mil 189 Mil 274, Mil 290; Pv ii.36 (= adhikataraṃ Pv-a 86); Dhp-a ii.85 cp. Pv-a 281.

adhi + matta of

Adhimattata

(nt.) preponderance AN ii.150; Dhs-a 334 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 200).

abstr. fr. prec.

Adhimana

(n ■ adj.) (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Snp 692 (adhimanasā bhavātha). (adj.) directing one’s mind upon, intent (on) Ja iv.433 (= pasannacitta); v.29 (an˚; v.l. ˚māna).

adhi + mano

Adhimāna

undue estimate of oneself MN ii.252; AN v.162 sq.

adhi + māna

Adhimānika

(adj.) having undue confidence in oneself, conceited AN v.162, AN v.169, AN v.317; Dhp-a iii.111.

fr. adhimāna

Adhimuccati

1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. loc. SN iii.225; SN iv.185; AN iv.24, AN iv.145 sq., 460; v.17; Pp 63. 2. to become settled, to make up one’s mind as to (with loc.), to become clear about Vin i.209 (aor. ˚mucci); DN i.106; SN i.116 (pot. ˚mucceyya); Iti 43; DN-a i.275. 3. to take courage, to have faith Snp 559; Mil 234; DN-a i.214, DN-a i.316; Ja iv.272; Ja v.103; Dhp-a i.196; Dhp-a iii.258; Dhp-a iv.170. 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with loc of the body. A late idiom for the older anvāvisati. Ja iv.172; Ja v.103, Ja v.429; Dhp-a i.196; Dhp-a iii.258; Dhp-a iv.170. pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta ■ Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with loc.) SN v.409 (cittaṃ devesu a.).

Pass. of adhi + muc

Adhimuccana

(nt.) making up one’s mind, confidence Dhs-a 133, Dhs-a 190.

fr. adhi + muc

Adhimuccita & Adhimucchita

(pp.) [either adhi + muc or mūrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll ˚mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy-form ˚mucchita, cp. mucchati and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109 drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with loc.) MN ii.223 (an˚); SN i.113; Thag 732 (v.l. ˚muccita) 923 (cch), 1175; Ja ii.437 (cch); iii.242; v.255 (kāmesu ˚mucchita, v.l. ˚muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita.

Adhimuccitar

one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence AN iii.165 (v.l. ˚mucchitā).

n. ag. of adhimuccati

Adhimutta

(adj.) intent upon (-˚ or with loc. or acc.), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin i.183; AN v.34, AN v.38; Dhp 226; Snp 1071 Snp 1149 (˚citta); Nd ii.33; Ja i.370 (dān˚) Pp 26; Pv-a 134 (dān˚).

pp. of adhimuccati, cp. BSk. adhimukta. Avs i.8, Avs i.112; Divy 49, Divy 302 etc.

Adhimutti

(f.) resolve, intention, disposition DN i.174; AN v.36; Pts i.124; Mil 161, Mil 169; Vb 340 Vb 341; DN-a i.44, DN-a i.103; Sdhp 378.

adhi + mutti

Adhimuttika

(adj.) inclined to, attached to, bent on SN ii.154, SN ii.158; Iti 70; Vb 339 sq. + (f. inclination DN i.2.

= adhimutta

Adhimokkha

firm resolve, determination, decision MN iii.25 sq.; Vb 165 sq., 425; Dhs-a 145, Dhs-a 264 See Dhs. trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95.

fr. adhi + muc

Adhiyita

see adhīyati.

Adhiroha

ascent, ascending; in dur˚; hard to ascend Mil 322.

fr. adhi + ruh

Adhivacana

(nt.) designation, term, attrîbute, metaphor, metaphorical expression DN ii.62; MN i.113 MN i.144, MN i.460; AN ii.70, AN ii.124; AN iii.310; AN iv.89, AN iv.285, AN iv.340; Iti 15 Iti 114; Snp p.218; Ja i.117; Nd ii.34 = Dhs 1306 (= nāma sankhā paññatti etc.); Vb 6; Pv-a 63. See on term Dhs. trsl. 340.

-patha “process of synonymous nomenclature” (Mrs Rh. D.) DN ii.68; SN iii.71; Dhs 1306; Dhs-a 51.

adhi + vacana

Adhivattati

to come on, proceed, issue, result SN i.101; AN ii.32.

adhi + vattati

Adhivattha

(adj.) inhabiting, living in (c. loc.) Vin i.28; SN i.197; Ja i.223; Ja ii.385; Ja iii.327; Pv-a 17. The form adhivuttha occurs at Ja vi.370.

pp. of adhivasati

Adhivara

(adj.) superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 163 (an˚; unsurpassed, unrivalled; Vv-a 80 = adhika visiṭṭha).

adhi + vara

Adhivāsa

endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adj. in dur˚; difficult to hold out Thag 111.

fr. adhi + vas

Adhivāsaka

(& ˚ika) (adj.) willing, agreeable, enduring, patient Vin iv.130; MN i.10, MN i.526; AN ii.118 AN iii.163; AN v.132; Ja iii.369 (an˚); iv.11, 77.

fr. adhivāsa

Adhivāsana

(nṭ.) 1 assent AN iii.31; Dhp-a i.33.

2. forbearance, endurance MN i.10; Ja ii.237 Ja iii.263; Ja iv.307; Ja v.174.

fr. adhi + vas

Adhivāsanatā

(f.) patience, endurance, Dhs 1342; Vb 360 (an˚).

abstr. fr. adhivāsana

Adhivāseti

1. to wait for (c. acc.) Ja i.254; Ja ii.352 Ja iii.277.

2. to have patience, bear, endure (c. acc.) DN ii.128, DN ii.157; Ja i.46; Ja iii.281 (pahāre); iv.279, 407; v.51 200; Vv-a 336, Vv-a 337.

3. to consent, agree, give in Vin i.17; DN i.109 (cp. DN-a i.277); SN iv.76; Dhp-a i.33; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 75 and freq. passim ■ Caus. adhivāsāpeti to cause to wait Ja i.254.

Caus. of adhivasati, cp. BSk. adhivāsayati in meaning of 3

Adhivāha

a carrier, bearer, adj. bringing SN iv.70 (dukkha˚); AN i.6; Thag 494.

fr. adhi + vah; cp. Sk. abhivahati

Adhivāhana

(nt ■ adj.) carrying, bringing, bearing Snp 79; f. ˚ī Thag 519.

fr. adhi + vah

Adhivimuttatta

(nt.) = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i.e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to Ja v.254 (T. kāmādhivimuttitā, v.l. ˚muttata).

Adhivimokkhatta

(nt.) = adhimokkha; being inclined to Dhs-a 261.

Adhivutti

(f.) expression, saying, opinion; only in tt. adhivuttipada (v.l. adhimutti-p. at all passages) DN i.13 (expld. by adhivacana-pada DN-a i.103); MN ii.228; AN v.36.

adhi + vutti, fr. adhi + vac, cp. Sk. abhivadati

Adhivuttha

see adhivattha.

Adhisayana

(nt ■ adj.) lying on or in, inhabiting Pv-a 80 (mañcaṃ).

fr. adhiseti

Adhisayita

sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin iii.3; SN iii.153.

pp. of adhiseti

Adhisīla

(nt.) higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta-sikkha, adhipaññā˚ adhisīla˚ Vin i.70; DN i.174; DN iii.219; AN iii.133; AN iv.25; Dhp-a i.334; Pv-a 207. See also adhicitta, sikkhā & sīla.;

adhi + sīla

Adhiseti

to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dhp 41; Snp 671 (= gacchati C.)-pp. adhisayita.

adhi + seti

Adhīna

(adj.) (-˚) subject, dependent DN i.72 (atta˚ & para˚; ); Ja iv.112; DN-a i.217; also written ādhīna Ja v.350. See also under para.

cp. Sk. adhīna

Adhīyati

& adhiyati to study, lit. to approach (cp adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin i.270; SN i.202 (dhammapadāni); Ja iv.184 (adhīyitvā), 496 (adhīyamāna); vi.458; Dhp-a iii.446 (adhīyassu) ■ ger. adhīyitvā Ja iv.75; adhiyānaṃ Ja v.450 (= sajjhāyitvā C.) & adhicca: see adhicca 2; pp. adhiyita DN i.96.

Med. of adhi + ; i, 1st sg. adhīye taken as base in Pāli

Adhunā

(adv.) just now, quite recently DN ii.208; Vin ii.185 (kālakata); Mil 155; Dāvs ii.94.

-āgata a new comer MN i.457; Ja ii.105. -ābhisitta newly or just anointed DN ii.227. -uppanna just arisen DN ii.208, DN ii.221.

Vedic adhunā

Adhura

(nt.) irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations Ja iv.241.

a + dhura, see dhura 2

Adho

(adv.) below, usually combd. or contrasted with uddhaṃ “above” and tiriyaṃ “across”, describing the 3 dimensions ■ uddhaṃ and adho above and below marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddhaṃ and the 4 bearings; (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at SN i.122; SN iii.124; AN iv.167; with uddhaṃ & tiriyaṃ at Snp 150, Snp 537, Snp 1055, Snp 1068. Expl;d. at Kp-a 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd;2 155. For further ref. see uddhaṃ. The compn. form of adho before vowels is adh˚.

-akkhaka beneath the collar-bone Vin iv.213. -agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth Ja v.156 (+ uddh˚ expld. by uparima-danta C.). -kata turned down, or upside down Ja i.20; Ja vi.298. -gata gone by, past. Adv. ˚ṃ since (cp. uddhaṃ adv. later or after Ja vi.187 (ito māsaṃ adhogataṃ since one month ago) -gala (so read for T. udho˚) down the throat Pv-a 104 -mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin ii.78; MN i.132, MN i.234: Vv 161 (= heṭṭhā mukha Vv-a 78). -bhāga the lower part (of the body) MN i.473; Dhp-a i.148. -virecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha˚ of an emetic) DN i.12; DN-a i.98 (= adho dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ) Dhs-a 404. -sākhaṃ (+ uddhamūlaṃ) branches down (roots up, i.e. uprooted) Dhp-a i.75. -sira (adj.) head downward Ja iv.194. -siraṃ (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avaṃsiraṃ) Ja vi.298 (= siraṃ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho C.). -sīsa (adj.) head first, headlong Ja i.233; Ja v.472 (˚ka).

Vedic adhaḥ; compar. adharaḥ = Lat. inferus, Goth. undar, E. under, Ind. *n̊dher-; superl. adhamaḥ Lat. infimus

An-

form of the neg. prefix a-before vowels. For negatives beginning with an˚ see the positive.

Ana-

negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Thag 1089), anamatagga & anabhava;. See Vinaya Texts ii.113.

Anajjhiṭṭha

(adj.) uncalled, unbidden, unasked Vin i.113; Pv i.123 (T. anabbhita, v.l. anijjhiṭṭha Ja iii.165 has anavhāta; Thig 129 ayācita; Pv-a 64 expls. by anavhāta).

an + ajjhiṭṭha

Anaṭi

to breathe Kp-a i.124 (in def. of bāla); DN-a i.244 (read ananti for aṇanti). Cp. pāṇa.

An, Vedic aniti & anati

Anabhāva

the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adj. form anabhāvaṃ kata or gata. This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin iii.3 of bad qualities, at SN ii.63 of certain wrong opinions, at MN i.487; SN iv.62 = SN v.527 of the khandas, at MN i.331 of the Mental Intoxications (Āsavas) at AN iv.73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma AN i.135, of evil passions AN i.137, AN i.184, AN i.218; AN ii.214 of pride AN ii.41 of craving AN ii.249, of the bonds AN iv.8. In the supplement to the Dīgha (DN iii.326) and in the Itivuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhāvaṃ gameti, cause to perish is used of evil thoughts. Bdhgh (quoted Vin iii.267) reports as v.l. anubhāva. Cp. Nd i.90; and Nd ii.under pahīna.

ana + bhāva

Anabbhita

(adj.) not restored, not to be restored Vin iv.242; Pv i.123 (where reading prob. faulty & due to a gloss; the id. p. at Thig 129 has ayācita & at Ja iii.165 anavhāta; Pv-a 64 expls. by anavhāta v.l. anabbhita).

an + abbhita

Anabhuṇṇatatā

(f.) the state of not being erect, i.e. hanging down Ja v.156.

an + abbhuṇṇata + tā

Anabhijjhā

(f.) absence of covetousness or desire DN iii.229, DN iii.269; Dhs 32, Dhs 35, Dhs 277.

an + abhijjhā

Anabhijjhālū

(adj.) not greedy or covetous DN iii.82; Pp 40.

an + abhijjhālū

Anabhijjhita

(adj.) not desired Snp 40 (cp. Nd ii.38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita Vv-a 201).

an + abhijjhita

Anabhinandati

etc. see abhi˚ etc.

Anabhirata

(adj.) not taking delight in Ja i.61 (naccâdisu).

an + abhirata

Anabhirati

(f.) not delighting in, dissatisfaction, discontent DN i.17 (+ paritassanā); iii.289; Ja iii.395; DN-a i.111.

an + abhirati

Anabhiraddha

(adj.) in anger Vin iv.236.

an + abhiraddha

Anabhiraddhi

(f.) anger, wrath DN i.3 (= kopass’etaṃ adhivacanaṃ DN-a i.52).

an + abhiraddhi

Anabhisambhuṇamāna

(adj.) not obtaining, unable to get or keep up DN i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DN-a i.268).

ppr. med. of an + abhisambhuṇāti

Anamatagga

(adj.). Ep. of Saṃsāra “whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable”, i.e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon SN ii.178, SN ii.187 sq. = SN iii.149, SN iii.151 = SN v.226, SN v.441 (quoted Kv 29, called Anamatagga-pariyāya at Dhp-a ii.268) and Thig 495, Thig 6. Later references are Nd ii.664; Pv-a 166; Dhp-a i.11; Dhp-a ii.13, Dhp-a ii.32; Sdhp 505. [Cp. anāmata and amatagga and cp. the English idiom “world without end” The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Saṃyutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary (see e.g. , Woods, Yoga-system of Patañjali, 119) it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yogī, to understand the beginning and end of Saṃsāra].

ana (= a neg.) + mata (fr. man ) + aggā (pl.). So Dhammapāla (avidit-agga Thag-a 289); Nāṇakitti in Ṭīkā on Dhs-a 11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg Vin. Texts ii.114. Childers takes it as an + amata agga, and Jacobi (Erzähl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. § 251) as a + namat (fr. nam ) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavarāgra, doubtless by some mistake Weber, Ind. Str. iii.150 suggests an + āmrta, which does not suit the context at all

Anamha

(adj.) being in consternation or distress, crying Ja iii.223 (˚kāle = ārodana-kāle C.).

according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 70 = ana-mha “unlaughing” with ana = an (cp. anabhāva anamatagga) and mha from; smi, cp. vimhayati = Sk vismayati

Anaya

misfortune, distress Mil 277, usually combd. with vyasana (as also in BSk, e.g. Jtm 215; Vin ii.199; SN iv.159; AN v.156; Mil 292; Vv-a 327 Sdhp 362.

a + naya

Anariya

(adj.) not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin i.10; DN iii.232 (˚vohāra, 3 sets of 4 the same at Vin v.125); Snp 664, Snp 782 (˚dhamma); Pp 13 ■ See ariya.

an + ariya, see also anāriya

Anala

(adj.) 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable MN i.455; Ja ii.326 = Ja iv.471.

2. dissatisfied, insatiate Ja v.63 (= atitta C.). 3. ˚ṃ kata dissatisfied, satiated, SN i.15 (kāmesu).

an + ala

Anavaya

(adj.) not lacking, complete in (loc.), fulfilling DN i.88 (= anūna paripūra-kārin DN-a i.248); AN iii.152 (= samatta paripuṇṇa AA quoted by Tr. on Mil 10).

derivation doubtful. See Trenckner Pali Misc. 65

Anavosita

(adj.) unfulfilled, undone Thag 101.

an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?

Anasana

(nt.) not eating, fasting, hunger DN iii.75 & in same context at Snp 311 (= khudā Snp-a 324).;

an + asana, cp. Sk. an-aśana

Anasitvāna

without eating, fasting Ja iv.371.

ger. of an + aśati

Anasuyyaṃ

not grumbling Ja iii.27 (v.l. for anusuyyaṃ T.).

Sk. anasūyan, ppr. of an + asūyati

Anasuropa

absence of abruptness Dhs 1341.

an + asuropa

Anasūyaka

(adj.) not grumbling, not envious Ja ii.192.

Sk. anasūyaka, cp. usūya

Anassaka

(adj.) either an-assaka or a-nassaka (q.v.).

Anassana

(nt.) imperishableness, freedom from waste Ja iv.168.

a + nassana, naś; cp. Sk. naśana

Anassāvin

(adj.) not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Snp 853 (sātiyesu a. = sātavatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhasanthavavirahita Snp-a 549).

an + assāvin; cp. assāva + āsava

Anassāsika

(adj.) not consoling, discouraging not comforting MN i.514; SN ii.191.

an + assāsa + ika; cp. Sk. āśvāsana & BSk. anāśvāsika Divy 207

Anassuṃ

1st sq, pret. of anusūyati (= Sk. anvaśruvaṃ) I have heard MN i.393.

Anāgata

(adj.) not come yet, i.e. future. On usual combn. with atīta: see this. DN iii.100 sq., 134 sq. 220, 275; MN iii.188 sq.; SN i.5; SN ii.283; AN iii.100 sq., 400; Snp 318, Snp 373, Snp 851; Iti 53; Ja iv.159; Ja vi.364; Dhs 1039, Dhs 1416.

an + āgata

Anāgamana

(nt.) not coming, not returning Ja i.203, Ja i.264.

an + āgamana

Anāgāmitā

(f.) the state or condition of an Anāgāmin SN v.129, SN v.181, SN v.285; AN iii.82; AN v.108, AN v.300 sq. Snp p.140 = AN iii.143; Iti 1 sq., 39, 40.

anāgāmin + tā

Anāgāmin

(adj.-n.) one who does not return, a Never-Returner, as tt. designating one who has attained the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Saṃyojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship. So near is the Anāgāmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship, never returning to rebirth as a man But in the oldest passages referring to these 4 stages the description of the third does not use the word anāgāmin (DN i.156; DN ii.92; DN iii.107; MN ii.146) and anāgāmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (S iii.168, the anatta doctrine; SN v.200–⁠2, the five Indriyas; AN i.64 AN i.120, cultivation of good qualities, AN ii.160; AN v.86, AN v.171, SN 149). We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons being called anāgāmin. Those are at SN v.177 and 178. The word there means one who has broken the lower five of the ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At DN ii.92 nine others, of whom eight are laymen, are declared after their death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life but they are not called anāgāmins. At Iti 96 there are only 3 stages, the worldling, the Anāgāmin, and the Arahant; and the Saṃyojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the Nikāya period the older wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Saṃyojana explanation the commentaries, so far as we know them, ignore any other. See Pts ii.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n; Cp. 69.

-phala fruition of the state of an Anāgāmin; always in combn. sotāpatti˚ sakadāgāmi˚ anāgāmi˚ arahatta˚ Vin i.293; Vin ii.240; Vin iv.29; DN i.229; DN ii.227, DN ii.255; SN iii.168 SN v.411; AN i.23, AN i.44; AN iii.272 sq.; AN iv.204, AN iv.276, AN iv.372 sq -magga the path of one who does not return (in rebirths Nd ii.569b.Anagara & Anagariya

an + āgāmin

Anāgāra & Anāgāriyā

see agāra & agāriyā.

Anāghāta

freedom from anger or ill-will Vin ii.249.

an + āghāta

Anācāra

misconduct, immorality Ja ii.133; iii. 276; adj. anācārin Pp 57.

an + ācāra

Anājāniya

(adj.) of inferior race, not of good blood MN i.367.

an + ājāniya

Anādara

(a) (m) disrespect Pv-a 257 ■ (b.) (adj.) disrespectful Snp 247 (= ādaravirahita Snp-a 290).

an + ādara

Anādaratā

(f.) want of consideration, in expln. of dovacassatā at Dhs 1325 = Vb 359 = Pp 30 (where reading is anādariyatā ).

abstr. fr. anādara

Anādariya

(nt.) disregard, disrespect Vin i.176; Vin iv.113 (where expld. in extenso); Dhs 1325 dug 20 = Vb 359.

fr. anādara

Anādā

without taking up or on to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā C.).

ger. of an + ādiyati

Anādāna

(adj.) free from attachment (opp. sādāna) AN ii.10 = Iti 9 = Iti 109 = Nd ii.172a; Snp 620, Snp 741 Snp 1094; Nd ii.41 (where as nt. = taṇha); Dhp 352 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇa Dhp-a iv.70), 396, 406, 421.

an + ādāna

Anāditvā

not taking up, not heeding Ja iv.352 (v.l. for T. anādiyitvā).

ger. of an + ādiyati

Anādiyitvā

without assuming or taking up, not heeding Vin iv.120; Ja iv.352; Dhp-a i.41. See also ādiyati. Ananu-

ger. of an + ādiyati, Sk. anādāya

Anānu-

represents the metrically lengthened from of ananu(an + anu), as found e.g. in the foll. cpds.: ˚tappaṃ (ppr.) not regretting Ja v.492; ˚puṭṭha questioned Snp 782 (= apucchita Snp-a 521); ˚yāyin not following or not defiled by evil Snp 1071 (expld. at Nd ii.42 by both avedhamāna (?) avigacchamāna & by arajjamāna adussamāna); ˚loma not fit or suitable DN ii.273 (v.l. anu˚).

Anāpāthagata

(adj.) not fallen into the way of (the hunter), escaped him MN i.174.

an + āpātha + gata

Anāpāda

(adj.) unmarried (of a woman) Ja iv.178 (āpāda = apādāna C.; aññehi akata-pariggahā).

an + āpāda

Anāpucchā

see āpucchati.

Anābādha

(adj.) safe and sound Vv-a 351.

an + ābādha

Anāmata

(adj.) not affected by death, immortal Ja ii.56 (asusāna-ṭṭhāna C.); Dhp-a ii.99.

an + amata the ā being due to metrical lengthening

Anāmanta

(˚-) without asking or being asked; in ˚kata unasked, unpermitted, uninvited Ja vi.226 ˚cāra living uninvited Vin v.132; AN iii.259.

an + āmanta

Anāmaya

(adj.) free from illness, not decaying, healthy Vv 1510 (= aroga Vv-a 74), 177.

an + āmaya

Anāmasita

(adj.) not touched, virgin-Vv-a 113 (˚khetta).

an + āmasita, pp. of āmassati

Anāmassa

(adj.) not to be touched Ja ii.360 (C. anāmāsitabba).

grd. of an + āmassati, Sk. āmaśya

Anāyatana

(nt.) nonexertion, not exerting oneself, sluggishness, indolence Ja v.121 (˚sīla = dussīla C.).

an + āyatana

Anāyasa

(adj.) void of means, unlucky, unfortunate Vv 845 (= natthi ettha āyo sukhan ti anāyasaṃ Vv-a 335).

an + āya + sa, or should we read anāyāsa?

Anāyāsa

(adj.) free from trouble or sorrow, peaceful Thag 1008.

an + āyāsa

Anārambha

that which is without moil and toil Snp 745 (= nibbāna Snp-a 507).

an + ārambha

Anārādhaka

(adj.) one who fails, unsuccessful Vin i.70.

an + ārādhaka

Anāriya

(adj.) not Aryan, ignoble, Snp 815 (v.l. SS. anariya).

doublet of anariya

Anālamba

(adj.) without support (from above), unsuspended, not held Snp 173 (+ appatiṭṭha expld. at Snp-a 214 by heṭṭhā patiṭṭhâbhāvena upari ālambhāvena ca gambhīra).

an + ālamba

Anālaya

aversion, doing away with Vin i.10 (taṇhāya). Analhiya & Analhika;

an + ālaya

Anāḷhiya & Anāḷhika

(adj.) not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually combd. with daḷidda MN i.450; MN ii.178 (v.l. BB. anāḷiya) AN iii.352 sq. (vv.ll. BB. anāḷhika), 384; Ja v.96.

an + ālhiya, Sk. āḍhya, see also addha2

Anāvaṭa

(˚-) not shut; in ˚dvāratā (f.) not closing the door againṡt another, accessibility, openhand edness DN iii.191.

an + āvaṭa

Anāvattin

(adj.-n.) one who does not return, almost syn. with anāgāmin in phrase anāvatti-dhamma one who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another, DN i.156 (cp. DN-a i.313); iii.132; Pp 16 sq., 62.

an + āvattin

Anāvasūraṃ

(adv.) as long as the sun does not set, before sun-down Ja v.56 (= anatthangata-suriyaṃ C. cp. Sk. utsūra.

an + ava + sūra = suriya, with ava lengthened to āva in verse

Anāvāsa

(adj.-n.) uninhabited, an uninhabited place Vin ii.22, Vin ii.33; Ja ii.77.

an + āvāsa

Anāvikata

etc. see āvikata.

Anāvila

(adj.) undisturbed, unstained, clean, pure DN i.84 (= nikkaddama DN-a i.226); iii.269, 270; Snp 637 (= nikkilesa Snp-a 469 = Dhp-a iv.192); Thig 369 (āvilacitta + ); Dhp 82, Dhp 413; Thag-a 251; Sdhp 479.

an + āvila

Anāvuttha

(adj.) not dwelt in DN ii.50.

an + āvuttha, pp. of āvasati

Anāsaka

(adj.) fasting, not taking food SN iv.118. f. ˚ā [cp. Sk. anāśaka nt.] fasting, abstaining from food Dhp 141 (= bhatta-paṭikkhepa Dhp-a iii.77).

an + āsaka

Anāsakatta

(nt.) fasting Snp 249 (= abhojana Snp-a 292).

abstr. of anāsaka

Anāsava

(adj.) free from the 4 intoxications (see āsava) Vin ii.148 = Vin ii.164; DN iii.112; Snp 1105, Snp 1133; Dhp 94, Dhp 126, Dhp 386; Nd ii.44; Iti 75; Pp 27, Dhs 1101 Dhs 1451; Vb 426; Thag 100; Pv ii.615; Vv-a 9. See āsava and cp. nirāsava.

an + āsava

Anāsasāna

(adj.) not longing after anything Snp 369 (Snp-a 365 however reads anāsayāna & has anāsasāna as v.l. Cp. also vv.ll. to āsasāna. Expl;d by kañci rūpâdi-dhammaṃ nâsiṃsati Snp-a 365.

an + āsasāna

Anāhāra

(adj.) being without food MN i.487; Snp 985.

an + āhāra

Anikkaḍḍhanā

(f.) not throwing out or expelling Ja iii.22.

a + nikkaḍḍhanā

Anikkasāva

(adj.) not free from impurity, impure, stained Dhp 9 = Thag 969 = Ja ii.198 = Ja v.50; Dhp-a i.82 (= rāgâdīhi kasāvehi sakasāva).

a + nikkasāva, cp. nikasāva

Anikhāta

(adj.) not dug into, not dug down, not deep Ja vi.109 (˚kūla; C. agambhīrā).

a + nikhāta, pp. of nikhanati

Anigha

see nigha1 and īgha.

Anicchā

(f.) dispassion SN v.6; adj. ˚a without desires, not desiring Snp 707.

an + icchā

Aniñjana

(nt.) immobility, steadfastness Pts i.15.

an + iñjana

Aniñjita

(adj.) immoveable, undisturbed, unshaken Thag 386.

an + iñjita

Aniṭṭhaṅgata

see niṭṭhā2.

Aniṭṭhita

see niṭṭhita.

Anitthi

(f.) a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, “nonwoman” Ja ii.126 (compd with anadī a river without water interpreted by ucchiṭṭh-itthi).

an + itthi

Anindi-

in ˚ḷocana (with) faultless eyes Ja vi.265.

the compn. form of nindā

Anindita

(adj.) blameless, faultless Ja iv.106 (˚aṅgin of blameless body or limbs).

a + nindita

Anibbisaṃ

not finding Thag 78 = Dhp 153 (= taṃ ñāṇaṃ avindanto Dhp-a iii.128).

ppr. of nibbisati, q.v.

Animisa

(adj.) not winking, waking, watchful Dāvs v.26 (nayana).

Ved. animeṣa, cp. nimisati

Aniyata

(adj.) not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.112; Vin ii.287; DN iii.217.

a + niyata

Aniyamita

(adj.) indefinite (as tt. g.) Vv-a 231.

pp. of a + niyameti

Anila

wind Ja iv.119 (˚patha air, sky); Mil 181; Vv-a 237; Sdhp 594.

from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. α ̓́νεμος wind; Lat. animus breath, soul, mind

Anirākata

(adj.) see nirankaroti.

a + nirākata

Anissara

(adj.) without a personal ereator Thag 713.

an + issara

Anissukin

(adj.) not hard, not greedy, generous DN iii.47 (+ amaccharin; v.l. anussukin); Snp-a 569 (see under niṭṭhurin).

an + issukin, see also an-ussukin

Anīka

(nt.) army, array, troops (orig. “front”, i.e. of the battle-array) Vin iv.107 (where expld. in detail); Snp 623 (bala˚ strong in arms, with strong array i.e. of khanti which precedes; cp. Snp-a 467).

-agga a splendid army Snp 421 (= balakāya senāmukha Snp-a 384). -ṭṭha a sentinel, royal guard DN iii.64, DN iii.148; Ja v.100; Ja vi.15 (“men on horseback”, horseguard); Mil 234, Mil 264. -dassana troop-inspection DN i.6 (aṇīka˚ at DN-a i.85, q.v. interpretation); Vin iv.107 (senābyūha + ).

Ved. anīka face, front, army to Idg. *ogu̯ (see), cp. Gr. ο ̓́μμα eye, Lat. oculus, see also Sk. pratīka and P. akkhi

Anīgha

see nigha1 and cp. īgha.

Anīti

(f.) safety, soundness, sound condition, health AN iv.238; Mil 323 (abl. ˚ito).

an + īti

Anītika

(adj.) free from injury or harm, healthy, secure Vin ii.79 = Vin ii.124 (+ anupaddava); iii.162; SN iv.371; Snp 1137 (ītī vuccanti kilesā etc. Nd ii.48); Mil 304.

fr. anīti

Anītiha

(adj.) not such and such, not based on hearsay (itiha), not guesswork or (mere) talk AN ii.26; Thag 331 (cp. MN i.520); Snp 1053 (= Nd ii.49, Nd ii.151); Ja i.456; Ne 166 (cp. Iti 28).

an + ītīha, the latter a cpd. der. fr. iti + ha = saying so and so, cp. itihāsa & itihītihaṃ

Anu1

(indecl.) prep. & pref ■ A. As; prep. anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with acc. is superseded by the loc. Traces of use w. acc. may be seen in expressions of time like anu pañcāhaṃ by 5 days, i.e. after (every) 5 days (cp. ved. anu dyūn day by day); a. vassaṃ for one year or yearly; a. saṃvaccharaṃ id ■ (b) More freq. w loc. (= alongside, with, by) a. tīre by the bank SN iv.177 pathe by the way Ja v.302; pariveṇiyaṃ in every cell Vin i.80; magge along the road Ja v.201; vāte with the wind Ja ii.382.

B. As pref.: (a) General character. anu is freq. as modifying (directional) element with well-defined meaning (“along”), as such also as 1st component of pref ■ cpds. e.g. anu + ā (anvā˚), anu + pra (anuppa˚), + pari, vi, + saṃ ■ As base, i.e. 2nd part of a pref ■ cpd. it is rare and only found in combn sam-anu˚. The prefix saṃ is its nearest relation as modifying pref. The opp. of anu is paṭi and both are often found in one cpd. (cp. ˚loma ˚vāta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: “along towards” ■ (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; esp. with verbs denoting to go follow etc. E. g. ˚aya going after, connexion; ˚āgacch follow, ˚kkamati follow, ˚dhāvati run after, ˚patta received ˚parivattati move about after, ˚bandhati run after, ˚bala rear-guard, ˚bhāsati speak after, repeat, ˚vāda speaking after, blame, ˚vicarati roam about ˚viloketi look round after (survey), ˚saṃcarati proceed around etc ■ (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an aim, on to, over to, forward. Esp. in double pref ■ cpds (esp. with ˚ppa˚), e.g. anu-ādisati design for, dedicate ˚kankhin longing for, ˚cintana care for, ˚tiṭṭhati look after ˚padinna given over to, ˚pavecchati hand over, ˚paviṭṭha entered into, ˚pasaṃkamati go up to, ˚rodati cry for, ˚socati mourn for ■ II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling E. be-or Ger. be-, also Lat. ad-and con-Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. E. g. ˚kampā com-passion, ˚kiṇṇa be-set, ˚gaṇhāti take pity on, ˚gāyati be-singen, ˚jagghati laugh at, belaugh, ˚ddaya pity with ˚masati touch at, ˚yuñjati order along, ˚yoga devotion to, ˚rakkhati be-guard, ˚litta be-smeared or an-ointed, ˚vitakheti reflect over, ˚sara con-sequential; etc ■ (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. E. g. ˚kūla being to will ˚chavika befitting, ˚ñāta permitted, al-lowed, ˚mati con- sent, a-greement, ˚madati ap-preciate, ˚rūpa = con-form ˚vattin acting according to, ˚ssavana by hearsay, ˚sāsati ad-vise, com-mand etc ■ III. (a) (fig.) following after second to, secondary, supplementary, inferior, minor, after smaller; e.g. ˚dhamma lesser morality, ˚pabbajā discipleship ˚pavattaka ruling after, ˚bhāga after -share, ˚majjha mediocre, ˚yāgin assisting in sacrifice, ˚vyañjana smaller marks, etc.; cp. paṭi in same sense ■ (b) distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): ˚disā in each direction, ˚pañcāhaṃ every 5 days, ˚pubba one after the other ■ IV. As one of the contrasting (-comparative) prefixes (see remarks on ati & cp. ā;3) anu often occurs in reduplicative cpds. after the style of khuddânukhuddaka “small and still smaller”, i.e. all sorts of small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More freq. combns. are the foll.: (q.v. under each heading padânupadaṃ, pubbânupubbaka, ponkhânuponkhaṃ, buddhânubuddha vādânuvāda, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi ■ V. As regards dialectical differences in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq found in Pāli where the Sk. variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For P. anu = Sk. (Ved.) apa see anuddhasta; = Sk. abhi see anu-gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati; = Sk. ava see anu-kantati, ˚kassati2, ˚kiṇṇa ˚gāhati, ˚bujjhati ˚bodha, ˚lokin, ˚vajja.

Note (a) anu in compn. is always contracted to ˚ānu˚; never elided like adhi = ˚dhi or abhi = ˚bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahānubhāva), like ānupubbikathā (fr. *pubbānupubba˚), ānubhāva etc. We find ānu also in combn. with an-under the influence of metre ■ (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv˚.

Vedic anu, Av. anu; Gr. α ̓́νω to α ̓́να along, up; Av. ana, Goth. ana, Ohg. ana, Ags. on, Ger an, Lat. an (in anhelare etc.)

Anu2

(adj.) subtile; freq. spelling for aṇu, e.g. DN i.223 Sdhp 271, Sdhp 346 (anuṃ thūlaṃ). See aṇu.

Anukaṅkhin

(adj.) striving after, longing for Ja v.499 (piya˚).

fr. anu + kāṅkṣ

Anukantati

to cut Dhp 311 (hatthaṃ = phāleti Dhp-a iii.484).

anu + kantati2

Anukampaka

& ˚ika (adj.) kind of heart, merciful, compassionate, full of pity (-˚ or c. loc.) DN iii.187; SN i.105 (loka˚), 197; v.157; AN iv.265 sq.; Iti 66 (sabba-bhūta˚); Pv i.33 (= kārunika Pv-a 16), 53 (atthakāma, hitesin Pv-a 25), 88; ii.14 (= anuggaṇhataka Pv-a 69), 27; Thag-a 174; Pv-a 196 (satthā sattesu a.).

fr. anukampati

Anukampati

to have pity on, to commiserate, to pity, to sympathise with (c. acc.) SN i.82, SN i.206 SN v.189. Imper. anukampa Pv ii.16 (= anuddayaṃ karohi Pv-a 70) & anukampassu Pv iii.28 (= anuggaṇha Pv-a 181). Med. ppr. anukampamāna Snp 37 (= anupekkhamāna anugayhamāna Nd ii.50); Pv-a 35 (taṃ), 62 (pitaraṃ) 104 ■ pp. anukampita (q.v.).

anu + kampati

Anukampana

(nt.) compassion, pity Pv-a 16, Pv-a 88.

fr. last

Anukampā

(f.) compassion, pity, mercy DN i.204; MN i.161; MN ii.113; SN i.206; SN ii.274 (loka˚) iv.323; v.259 sq.; AN i.64, AN i.92; AN ii.159; AN iii.49; AN iv.139 Pp 35 ■ Often in abl. anukampāya out of pity, for the sake of DN iii.211 (loka˚ out of compassion for all mankind, + atthaya hitāya); Ja iii.280; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 147.

abstr. fr. anukampati

Anukampita

(adj.) compassioned, gratified, remembered, having done a good deed (of mercy Pv iii.230.

pp. of anukampati

Anukampin

(adj.) compassionate, anxious for, commiserating. Only in foll. phrases: hita˚; full of solicitude for the welfare of SN v.86; Snp 693; Pv iii.76 sabbapāṇa-bhūta-hita˚; id. SN iv.314; AN ii.210; AN iii.92 AN iv.249; Pp 57, Pp 68. sabba-bhūta˚; SN i.25, SN i.110; AN ii.9; Iti 102.

cp. anukampaka

Anukaroti

to imitate, “to do after” AN i.212; Ja i.491; Ja ii.162; Dhp-a iv.197 ■ ppr. anukabbaṃ Vin ii.201 (mamâ˚) ■ Med. anukubbati SN i.19 = Ja iv.65. See also anukubba. On anvakāsi see anukassati 2.

anu + kṛ;

Anukassati

1. [Sk. anukaṛṣati] to draw after, to repeat, recite, quote DN ii.255 (silokaṃ).

2 [Sk. ava- kaṛṣati] to draw or take of, to remove, throw down, Thag 869 (aor. anvakāsi = khipi, chaḍḍesi C.).

anu + kassati, kṛṣ

Anukāma

(adj.) responding to love, loving in return Ja ii.157.

anu + kāma

Anukāra

imitation Dpvs v.39.

cp. anukaroti

Anukārin

(adj.) imitating Dāvs v.32.

Anukiṇṇa

strewn with, beset with, dotted all over Pv iv.121 (bhamara-gaṇa˚).

pp. of anu + kirati

Anukubba

(adj.) (-˚) “doing correspondingly” giving back, retaliating Ja ii.205 (kicca˚).

= Sk. anukurvat, ppr. of anukaroti

Anukubbati

see anukaroti.

Anukula

freq. spelling for anukūla.

Anukulaka

(adj.) = anukula Sdhp 242 (iccha˚ according to wish).

Anukūla

(adj.) favourable, agreeable, suitable, pleasant Vv-a 280; spelt anukula at Sdhp 297, Sdhp 312.

-bhava complaisance, willingness Vva.71. -yañña a propitiative sacrifice DN i.144 (expld. at DN-a i.302 as anukula˚ = sacrifice for the propagation of the clan).

anu + kūla, opp. paṭikūla

Anukkaṇṭhati

not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. ˚anto Ja v.10; and pp. ˚ita without regret or in plenty Pv-a 13.

an + ukkaṇṭhati

Anukkaṇṭhana

(nt.) having no lack anything, being contented or happy Ja vi.4.

an + ukkaṇṭhana

Anukkama

1. order, turn, succession, going along; only in instr. anukkamena gradually, in due course or succession Ja i.157, Ja i.262, Ja i.290; Vv-a 157; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 35 etc.

2. that which keeps an animal in (regular step, i.e. a bridle MN i.446; Snp 622 (sandānaṃ saha˚).

to anukkamati

Anukkamati

1. to follow, go along (a path = acc.) AN v.195; Iti 80 (maggaṃ).

2. to advance (not with Morris JP T S. 1886, 111 as “abandon”) SN i.24 Thag 194.

anu + kram

Anukkhipati

to throw out Cp xi.6 (vaṭṭaṃ).

anu + khipati

Anukkhepa

compensation Vin i.285.

anu + khepa, see anukkhipati

Anukhaṇati

to dig after or further Ja v.233.

anu + khaṇati

Anukhuddaka

(adj.) in cpd. khudda˚; whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin ii.287 = DN ii.154 = Mil 142; Mil 144.

anu + khuddaka

Anuga

(-˚) (adj ■ suff.) following or followed by, going after, undergoing, being in or under standing under the influence of Snp 332 (vasa˚; in the power of), 791 (ejā˚; = abhibhūta Snp 527), 1095 (Māra vasa˚; = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd ii.507); Iti 91 (ejā˚; ) Ja iii.224 (vasa˚; = vasavattin C.); Mvu 7, Mvu 3.

fr. anu + gam

Anugacchati

to go after, to follow, to go or fall into (w. acc.) Kp-a 223; Pv-a 141 (˚gacchanto) aor. ˚gamāsi Vin i.16, & anvagā Mvu 7, Mvu 10; Mvu 3rd pl anvagū Snp 586 (vasaṃ = vasaṃ gata Snp-a 461). Pass anugammati, ppr. anugammamāna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned with Ja i.53; Ja v.370. pp. anugata (q.v.).

anu + gacchati

Anugata

(adj.) gone after, accompanied by, come to; following; fig. fallen or gone into, affected with (-˚), being a victim of, suffering MN i.16; DN iii.85 DN iii.173 (parisā); AN ii.185 (sota˚, v.l. anudhata); Ja ii.292 (samudda˚); v.369; Nd ii.32 (taṇhā˚); Pv-a 102 (nāmaṃ mayhaṃ a. has been given to me), 133 (kammaphala˚).

pp. of anugacchati

Anugati

(f.) (-˚) following, being in the train of, falling under, adherence to, dependence on SN i.104 (vas˚ being in the power). Usually in cpd. diṭṭhānugati a sign (lit. belonging to) of speculation Vin ii.108; SN ii.203; Pp 33; Dhp-a iv.39.

fr. anu + gam

Anugama

following after, only as adj. in dur˚ difficult to be followed Ja iv.65.

fr. anu + gam

Anugāmika

(adj.) going along with, following, accompanying; resulting from, consequential on Kp viii.8 (nidhi a treasure acc. a man to the next world); Ja iv.280 (˚nidhi ); Mil 159 (parisā); Pv-a 132, Pv-a 253 (dānaṃ nāma ˚aṃ nidānan ti).

Anugāmin

(adj.) following, attending on; an attendant, follower Snp-a 453 (= anuyutta).

fr. anugacchati

Anugāyati

to sing after or to, recite (a magic formula or hymn) praise, celebrate DN i.104, DN i.238; Snp 1131 (anugāyissaṃ); Mil 120.

anu + gāyati

Anugāhati

to plunge into, to enter (acc.) Sdhp 611.

anu + gāhati

Anugijjhati

to be greedy after, to covet Snp 769 (cp. Nd i.12); Ja iii.207; Ja iv.4 (= giddhā gathitā hutvā allīyanti C.). pp. ˚giddhā (q.v.). Cp. abhigijjhati.

anu + gijjhati

Anugiddha

greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Snp 86 (anânu˚), 144, 952; Thag 580.

pp. of anugijjhati

Anuggaṇha

(adj.) compassionate, ready to help Pv-a 42 ˚sīla.

cp. anuggaha

Anuggaṇhataka

(adj.) compassionate, commiserating, helping Pv-a 69 (= anukampaka).

= anugganha

Anuggaṇhana

(nt.) anuggaha1 Dhs-a 403. Anu(g)ganhati

Anu(g)gaṇhāti

to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection DN i.53 (vācaṃ; cp. DN-a i.160: sārato agaṇhaṇto); Ja ii.74; Nd ii.50 (ppr. med ˚gayhamāna = anukampamāna); Pp 36; Pv-a 181 (imper. anuggaṇha = anukampassu). pp. anuggahīta (q.v.).

anu + gaṇhāti

Anuggaha1

“taking up”, compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit SN ii.11 SN iii.109; SN iv.104; SN v.162; AN i.92, AN i.114; AN ii.145; AN iv.167; AN v.70; Iti 12, Iti 98; Ja i.151; Ja v.150; Pp 25; Pv-a 145; Thag-a 104.

anu + grah

Anuggaha2

(adj.) not taking up Snp 912 (= na gaṇhāti Nd i.330).

an + uggaha

Anuggahīta

(& ˚ita) commiserated, made happy, satisfied MN i.457; SN ii.274; SN iii.91; SN iv.263; AN iii.172; Ja iii.428.

pp. of anuggaṇhāti

Anuggāhaka

(adj.) helping, assisting SN iii.5; SN v.162; Mil 354 (nt. = help).

fr. anuggaha

Anugghāṭeti

not to unfasten or open (a door) Mil 371 (kavāṭaṃ).

an + ugghāṭeti

Anugghāta

not shaking, a steady walk Ja vi.253.

an + ugghāta

Anugghātin

(adj.) not shaking, not jerking, Ja vi.252; Vv 53 (read ˚ī for i); Vv-a 36.

fr. last

Anughāyati

to smell, snuff, sniff up Mil 343 (gandhaṃ).

anu + ghāyati1

Anucaṅkamati

to follow (along) after, to go after DN i.235; MN i.227; Thag 481, Thag 1044; Caus ˚āpeti MN i.253, cp. Lal 147, Lal 3; Mvu i.350.

anu + cankamati

Anucaṅkamana

(nt.) sidewalk Ja i.7.

fr. anucankamati

Anucarati

to move along, to follow; to practice; pp. anuciṇṇa & anucarita; (q.v.)

anu + cariti

Anucarita

(-˚) connected with, accompanied by, pervaded with DN i.16, DN i.21 (vīmaṃsa˚ anuvicarita DN-a i.106); MN i.68 (id.); Mil 226.

pp. of anucarati

Anuciṇṇa

(pp.) 1. pursuing, following out, practising, doing; having attained or practised Vin ii.203 = Iti 86 (pamādaṃ); Ja i.20 (v.126); Thag 236 Thag 2, Thag 206; Dpvs iv.9.

2. adorned with, accompanied by connected with Ja iv.286.

pp. of anucarati

Anucintana

(nt.) thinking, upon, intention, care for Pv-a 164.

fr. anucinteti

Anucinteti

to think upon, to meditate, consider SN i.203 (v.l. for anuvicinteti).

anu + cinteti

Anuccaṅgin

see anujjangin.

Anucchavika

(& ˚ya) (adj.) “according to one’s skin”, befitting, suitable, proper, pleasing, fit for, Ja i.58, Ja i.62, Ja i.126, Ja i.218; Ja ii.5; Ja iv.137, Ja iv.138; Mil 358; Dhp-a i.203, Dhp-a i.390; Dhp-a ii.55, Dhp-a ii.56; Vv-a 68, Vv-a 78; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 26 (= kappiya), 66, 81, 286. anucchaviya at Vin ii.7 (an˚) iii.120 (id. + ananulomika); Mil 13.

anu + chavi + ka

Anucchiṭṭha

(adj.) (food) that is not thrown away or left over; untouched, clean (food) Ja iii.257; Dhp-a ii.3 (vv.ll. anucciṭṭha).

see ucchiṭṭha

Anujagghati

to laugh at, deride, mock DN i.91; DN-a i.258 (cp. sañjagghati ibid 256).

anu + jagghati

Anujavati

to run after, to hasten after, to follow Ja vi.452 (= anubandhati).

anu + javati

Anujāta

(adj.) “born after” i.e. after the image of, resembling, taking after; esp. said of a son (putta), resembling his father, a worthy son Iti 64 (atijāta + opp. avajāta); Thag 827 (fig. following the example of) 1279; Ja vi.380; Dhp-a i.129; Dāvs ii.66.

anu + jāta

Anujānāti

1. to give permission, grant, allow Vin iv.225; AN ii.197; Pv iv.167; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 79 Pv-a 142.

2. to advise, prescribe Vin i.83; Vin ii.301: Snp 982. grd. anuññeyya that which is allowed AN ii.197; pp anuññāta (q.v.) Caus. anujānāpeti Ja i.156.

anu + jānāti

Anujīvati

to live after, i.e. like (acc.), to live for or on, subsist by Ja iv.271 (= upajīvati, tassânubhāvena jīvitaṃ laddhaṃ (C.) ■ pp. anujīvata (q.v.).

anu + jīvati

Anujīvita

(nt.) living (after), living, livelihood, subsistence, life Snp 836 (= jīvitaṃ Snp-a 545).

pp. of anujīvati

Anujīvin

(adj.-n.) living upon, another, dependent; a follower, a dependant AN i.152; AN iii.44; Ja iii.485; Dāvs v.43.

fr. anujīvati

Anujju

(adj.) not straight, crooked, bent, in cpds. ˚aṅgin (anujjangin) with (evenly) bent limbs, i.e. with perfect limbs, graceful f. ˚ī Ep. of a beautiful woman Ja v.40 (= kañcana-sannibha-sarīrā C.); vi.500 (T. anuccangī C. aninditā agarahitangī); ˚gāmin going crooked i.e. snake Ja iv.330; ˚bhūta not upright (fig. of citta Ja v.293.

an + ujju

Anujjuka

= anujju Ja iii.318.

Anujjhāna

(nt.) meditation, reflection, introspection Mil 352 (˚bahula).

anu + jhāna

Anuññāta

(adj.) permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained DN i.88; Ja i.92; Ja ii.353 Ja ii.416; Pv i.123 (na a. = ananuññāta at id. p. Thig 129 expld. at Pv-a 64 by ananumata); Pp 28; DN-a i.247 DN-a i.248, DN-a i.267; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 81.

pp. of anujānāti

Anuññātatta

(nt.) being permitted, permission Ja ii.353.

abstr. to anuññāta

Anuṭṭhaka

(adj.) not rising, not rousing oneself, inactive, lazy Thag 1033.

fr. an + uṭṭhahati

Anuṭṭhahati

to carry out, look after, practise do Ja v.121 ■ pp. anuṭṭhita (q.v.).

anu + ṭhahati = ˚thāti, see ˚tiṭṭhati

Anuṭṭhahāna

(adj.) one who does not rouse himself, not getting up, inactive Dhp 280 (anuṭṭhahanto avāyāmanto Dhp-a iii.409).

ppr. of an + uṭṭhahati

Anuṭṭhātar

one without energy or zeal Snp 96 (niddāsīlin sabhāsīlin + ) Snp-a 169 (viriya-tejavirahita).

n. ag. to an + uṭṭhahati

Anuṭṭhāna

(nt.) “the not getting up”, inactivity, want of energy Dhp 241 (sarīra-paṭijagganaṃ akaronto Dhp-a iii.347).

an + uṭṭhāna

Anuṭṭhita

practising, effecting or effected, come to, experienced, done DN ii.103; SN iv.200; AN iii.290 sq.; AN iv.300; Ja ii.61; Mil 198; Pv-a 132 (cp. anugata).

pp. of anuṭṭhati = anutiṭṭhati

Anuṭṭhubhati

to lick up with one’s saliva DN-a i.138.

formally Sk. anuṣṭobhati, but in meaning = *anuṣṭīvati; anu + ṭṭhubhati, the etym. of which see under niṭṭhubhati

Anuṭṭhurin

v.l. at Snp-a 569, see niṭṭhurin.

Anuḍasati

to bite Ja vi.192.

anu + ḍasati

Anuḍahati

to burn over again, burn thoroughly, fig. to destroy, consume Ja ii.330; Ja vi.423. Pass ˚ḍayhati Ja v.426 ■ Also spelt ˚dahati, e.g. at SN iv.190 = SN v.53; Thig 488.

anu + ḍahati

Anuḍahana

(nt.) conflagration, burning up, consumption Ja v.271; Thag-a 287 (d).

fr. anuḍahati

Anuṇṇata

(adj.) not raised, not elated, not haughty, humble Snp 702 (care = uddhaccaṃ nâpajjeyya Snp-a 492).

uṇṇata

Anutappati

to be sorry for, to regret, repent, feel remorse Ja i.113; Ja iv.358; Ja v.492 (ppr. an-anutappaṃ); Dhp 67, Dhp 314; Pv ii.942; Dhp-a ii.40. grd. anutappa to be regretted AN i.22, AN i.77; AN iii.294, and anutāpiya AN iii.46 (an˚).

anu + tappati1; Sk. anutapyate, Pass. of anutapati

Anutāpa

anguish, remorse, conscience Vv 405 (= vippaṭisāra Vv-a 180); Dhs-a 384.

fr. anu + tāpa

Anutāpin

(adj.) repenting, regretting Thig 57, Thig 190; Vv 21; Vv-a 115.

fr. anutāpa

Anutāpiya

grd. of anutappati, q.v.

Anutāḷeti

to beat Ja ii.280.

anu + taḷeti

Anutiṭṭhati

to look after, to manage, carry on Ja v.113 (= anugacchati) Pv-a 78.

anu + tiṭṭhati see also anuṭṭhahati

Anutīre

(adv.) along side or near the bank (of a river) Snp 18 (= tīra-samīpe Snp-a 28) Cp. anu A b.

anu + tīre, loc. of tīra

Anuttara

(adj.) “nothing higher”, without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed, excellent, preeminent Snp 234 (= adhikassa kassaci abhāvato Kp-a 193), 1003; Dhp 23, Dhp 55 (= asadisa appaṭibhāga Dhp-a i.423); Pv iv.35 2 (dhamma); Dhs 1294; DN-a i.129; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 5, Pv-a 6, Pv-a 18, etc.

an + uttara

Anuttariya

(nt.) preeminence, superiority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutti˚; ) at DN iii.219, or of 6 (viz. dassana˚, savana˚ lābha˚, sikkhā˚, pāricariyā˚, anussata˚; ) at DN iii.250 DN iii.281; AN i.22; AN iii.284, AN iii.325 sq., 452; Pts i.5. Cp. MN i.235; AN v.37. See also ānuttariya.

abstr. fr. anuttara

Anuttāna

(adj.) not (lying) open, not exposed; fig. unexplained, unclear Ja vi.247.

an + uttāna

Anutthunā

(f.) wailing, crying, lamenting Nd i.167 (= vācāpalāpa vippalāpa etc.).

fr. anutthunāti

Anutthunāti

to wail, moan, deplore, lament, bewail DN iii.86; Snp 827 (cp. Nd i.167); Dhp 156; Ja iii.115; Ja v.346, Ja v.479; Dhp-a iii.133; Pv-a 60 (wrongly applied for ghāyati, of the fire of conscience).

anu + thunati (thunāti); anu + stan

Anutrāsin

(adj.) not terrified, at ease Thag 864.

an + utrāsin

Anuthera

an inferior Thera, one who comes next to the elder Vin ii.212 (therānutherā Th. & next in age).;

anu + thera

Anudadāti

to concede, grant, admit, fut. anudassati Mil 276, Mil 375.

anu + dadāti

Anudayati

(to sympathise with) see under anuddā.

Anudassita

manifested Mil 119.

pp. of anudasseti

Anudahati

see anuḍahati.

Anudiṭṭha

pointed out, appointed, dedicated, nt. consecration, dedication Ja v.393 (anudiṭṭha asukassa nāma dassatī ti C.); Pv i.107 (= uddiṭṭha Pv-a 50).

pp. of anudisati

Anudiṭṭhi

(f.) an “after-view”, sceptical view, speculation, heresy DN i.12; MN ii.228; SN iii.45 sq. Thag 754; Mil 325; DN-a i.103. attānudiṭṭhi (q.v.) a soul-speculation.

anu + diṭṭhi

Anudisati

to point out, direct, bid, address Pv-a 99 (aor. anudesi + anvesi) ■ pp. anudiṭṭha (q.v.).

anu + disati

Anudisā

(f.) an intermediate point of the compass, often collectively for the usual 4 intermediate points DN i.222; SN i.122; SN iii.124.

anu + disā

Anudīpeti

to explain Mil 227 (dhammâdhammaṃ).

anu + dīpeti

Anudūta

a person sent with another, a travelling companion Vin ii.19, Vin ii.295; Dhp-a ii.76, Dhp-a ii.78.

anu + dūta

Anudeva

see anvadeva.

Anuddayatā

(f.) sympathy with (-˚) compassion, kindness, favour, usually as par˚; kindness to or sympathy with other people SN ii.218; SN v.169 (T. anudayatā); AN iii.184; Iti 72; Vb 356.

abstr. to anuddayā

Anuddayā

(& anudayā) (f.) compassion, pity, mercy, care Vin ii.196; SN i.204; SN ii.199; SN iv.323; AN ii.176 AN iii.189; Pp 35 (anukampā); Ja i.147, Ja i.186, Ja i.214; Pv-a 70 Pv-a 88, Pv-a 181 (= anukampā). In compn anudaya˚; e.g. ˚sampanna full of mercy Ja i.151, Ja i.262; Pv-a 66.

anu + dayā

Anuddā

(f.) = anuddayā Dhs 1056, where also the other abstr. formations anuddāyanā & anuddāyitattaṃ “care, forbearance & consideration”; Dhs-a 362 (anudayatī ti anuḍdā).

contracted form of anuddayā

Anuddhaṃseti

to spoil, corrupt, degrade Vin iv.148 (expln. here in slightly diff. meaning = codeti vā codāpeti vā to reprove, scold, bring down); Iti 42 Usually in ster. phrase rāgo cittaṃ a. lust degrades the heart Vin iii.111; MN i.26; SN i.186; AN i.266; AN ii.126; iii. 393 sq ■ pp. anuddhasta (q.v.).

anu + dhaṃseti

Anuddhata

(adj.) not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Snp 850 (= uddhacca-virahita Snp-a 549, cp. anuṇṇata); Iti 30; Dhp 363 (= nibbutacitta Dhp-a iv.93); Vv 648; Pp 59.

an + uddhata

Anuddharin

(adj.) not proud Snp 952 (= anussukin Snp-a 569) see niṭṭhurin.

an + uddharin

Anuddhasta

(adj.) spoilt, corrupt, degraded MN i.462 (citta); AN ii.126 (id.).

anu + dhasta, pp. of anuddhaṃseti, cp. Sk. apadhvasta

Anudhamma

1. in compn. with dhamma as dhammānudhamma to be judged as a redupl. cpd after the manner of cpds. mentioned under anu iv. meaning “the Law in all its parts, the dhamma and what belongs to it, the Law in its fullness”. For instances see dhamma C. iv. Freq. in phrase dh˚-ânudh˚ -paṭipanna “one who masters the completeness of the Dh.”, e.g. SN ii.18; SN iii.163; Iti 81; Pts ii.189.

2. conformity or accordance with the Law, lawfulness, relation, essence, consistency truth; in phrase dhammassa (c˚) anudhammaṃ vyākaroti to explain the truth of the Dh. Vin i.234; DN i.161; MN i.368, MN i.482; SN ii.33; SN iii.6; SN iv.51; SN v.7. See further MN iii.30; Snp 963 (cp. Nd i.481 for exegesis) Also in cpd. ˚cārin living according to the Dhamma living in truth SN ii.81, SN ii.108; AN ii.8; Dhp 20 (cp. Dhp-a i.158); Vv 317; Snp 69 (see Nd ii.51).

anu + dhamma

Anudhammatā

(f.) [abstr. to anudhamma) lawfulness, conformity to the Dhamma AN ii.46; Pts i.35, Pts i.36.

Anudhāreti

to hold up DN-a i.61 (chattaṃ), cp. Ja 1.53, dhariyamāna.

anu + dhāreti

Anudhāvati

to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue MN i.474; SN i.9; Dhp 85; Thag 1174; Mil 253, Mil 372.

anu + dhāvati

Anudhāvin

(adj.-n.) one who runs after SN i.9, SN i.117.

fr. anudhāvati

Anunadī

(-tire) along the bank of the river SN iv.177 should be read anu nadītīre (= anu prep. c. loc.; see under anu A).

Anunamati

to incline, bend (intrs.), give way Mil 372 (of a bow).

anu + namati

Anunaya

“leading along”, friendliness, courtesy, falling in with, fawning DN iii.254 (˚saṃyojana); AN iv.7 sq (id.) MN i.191; Dhs 1059; Vb 145; Ne 79; combd. w opp. paṭigha (repugnance) at Mil 44, Mil 122, Mil 322.

fr. anuneti

Anunayana

(nt.) fawning Dhs-a 362.

fr. anuneti

Anunāsika

(adj.) nasal; as tt. g. the sound ṃ; in ˚lopa apocope of the nasal ṃ Vv-a 114 Vv-a 253, Vv-a 275, Vv-a 333.

anu + nāsā + ika

Anunīta

(adj.) led, induced SN iv.71; Snp 781.

pp. of anuneti

Anunetar

one who reconciles or conciliates Pts ii.194 (netā vinetā anunetā).

n. ag. fr. anuneti

Anuneti

to conciliate, appease, win over, flatter SN i.232 (ppr. anunayamāna); pp. anunīta (q.v.).

anu + neti

Anupa

see anūpa.

Anupakampati

to shake, move, to be unsteady Thag 191 = Ud 41.

anu + pakampati

Anupakkama

not attacking, instr. ˚ena not by attack (from external enemies) Vin ii.195.

an + upakkama

Anupakkuṭṭha

(adj.) blameless, irreproachahle DN i.113; Vin iv.160; Snp p.115; DN-a i.281.

an + upak˚

Anupakkhandati

to push oneself forward, to encroach on DN i.122 (= anupavisati DN-a i.290) ger. anupakhajja pushing oneself in, intruding Vin ii.88 (= antopavisati), 213; iv.43 (= anupavisati); MN i.151, MN i.469; SN iii.113; Vism 18.

anu + pa + khandati

Anupakhajjati

to encroach, intrude Vin v.163.

den. fr. anupakhajja, ger. of anupakkhandati

Anupagacchati

to go or return into (c. acc.) DN i.55 (anupeti + ).

anu + pa + gacchati

Anupaghāta

not hurting Dhp 185 (anūpa˚; metri causa; expld. by anupahananañ c’eva anupaghātanañ ca Dhp-a iii.238).

an + upaghāta

Anupacita

(adj.) heaped up, accumulated Thag-a 56.

anu + pa + cita, pp. of anupacināti

Anupacināti

not to observe or notice Ja v.339 (= anoloketi C.; v.l. anapaviṇāti).

an + upacināti

Anupajagghati

to laugh at, to deride, mock over AN i.198 (v.l. anusaṃ˚).

anu + pa + jagghati

Anupajjati

to follow, accompany Ja iv.304. - pp. anupanna (q.v.).

anu + pad

Anupañcāhaṃ

(adv.) every five days Pv-a 139 (+ anudasāhaṃ).

anu + pañcā + ahaṃ

Anupaññatti

(f.) a supplementary regulation or order Vin ii.286; Vin v.2 sq.

anu + paññatti

Anupaṭipāti

(f.) succession; as adv. in order, successively DN-a i.277 (kathā = anupubbikathā) Dhp-a iii.340 (anupaṭipāṭiyā = anupubbena); Vism 244.

anu + paṭipāti

Anupaṭṭhita

(adj.) setting out after, following, attacking Ja v.452.

anu + pa + ṭhita

Anupatati

1. to follow, go after, Ja vi.555 anupatiyāsi Subj.).

2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin iii.106 = MN i.364; SN i.23 (read ˚patanti for ˚patatanti = Dhp 221 (dukkhā); Thag 41 = Thag 1167 (of lightning). pp. anupatita (q.v.). Cp. also anupāta & anupātin;.

anu + patati

Anupatita

“befallen”, affected with, oppressed by (-˚) SN ii.173 (dukkha˚); iii.69 (id.); Snp 334 (pamāda˚).

pp. of anupatati

Anupatitatta

(nt.) the fact of being attacked by, being a victim of (-˚) Snp-a 339.

abstr. of anupatita

Anupatta

(anuppatta) (having) attained, received, got to (c. acc), reached DN i.87–⁠111; ii.2; Iti 38; Snp 027, Snp 635; Dhp 386, Dhp 403; Pv iv.166; Pv-a 59 (dukkhaṃ), 242. In phrase addhagata vayo-anuppatta having reached old age, e.g. Vin ii.188; DN i.48; Snp p.. 50, 92; Pv-a 149.

pp. of anupāpuṇāti; cp. Sk. anuprāpta

Anupatti

(anuppatti) (f.) attainment, accomplishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal SN i.46, SN i.52.

anu + patti

Anupathe

at Ja v.302 should be read as anu pathe by the way at the wayside; anu to be taken as prep. c. loc. (see anu A). C. explns. as janghamagga-mahāmaggānaṃ antare.

Anupada

1. the “afterfoot”, i.e. second foot a verse, also a mode of reciting where the second foot is recited without the first one Vin iv.15 (cp. 355); Mil 340 (anupadena anupadaṃ katheti).

2. (adj.) (following) on foot, at every, step continuous, repeated, in ˚dhamma-vipassanā uninterrupted contemplation MN iii.25; ˚vaṇṇanā word-by-word explanation Dhs-a 168. As nt. adv. ˚ṃ close behind, immediately after (c. gen.) Ja ii.230 (tassânupadaṃ agamāsi) vi.422. Esp. freq. in combn. padānupadaṃ (adv.) foot after foot, i.e. in the footsteps, immediately behind Ja iii.504; Ja vi.555; Dhp-a i.69; Dhp-a ii.38.

cp. Sk. anupadaṃ adv., anu + pada

Anupadātar

(anuppadātar) one who gives, or one who sets forth, effects, designs DN i.4 (cp DN-a i.74); AN ii.209.

n. ag. of anupadeti

Anupadāna

(anuppadāna) (nt.) giving, administering, furnishing, the giving of (-˚) DN i.12 (cp. DN-a i.98; both read anuppādāna); Ja iii.205; Mil 315.

anu + pa + dāna, cp. anupadeti

Anupadinna

(anuppadinna) given, handed over, furnished, dedicated Pv i.512.

pp. of anupadeti

Anupadeti

(anuppadeti) to give out, give as a present, hand over; to design, set forth, undertake SN iii.131 (Pot. anuppadajjuṃ); MN i.416 (Pot. anupadajjeyya see dadāti i.3); Mil 210 (˚deti). fut. ˚dassati (see dadāti i.1); DN iii.92; SN iv.303 (v.l. SS for T. anusarissati); AN iii.43; Snp 983. ger. ˚datvā Snp-a 35. inf ˚dātuṃ AN i.117. pp. ˚dinna (q.v.).

anu + pa + dadāti

Anupaddava

(adj.) free from danger, uninjured, safe Vin ii.79 = Vin ii.124 (+ anītika); iii.162; Dhp 338; Dhp-a iv.48; Pv-a 250 (expln. for siva).

an + upaddava

Anupadhāreti

to disregard, to heed not, to neglect Dhp-a iv.197; Vv-a 260.

an + upadhār˚

Anupadhika

(adj.) free from attachment (see upadhi) Vin i.36 (anupadhīka); DN iii.112 (anupadhika opp. to sa-upadhika); Snp 1057 (anūpadhīka T. but Nd ii.anūpadhika. with ū for u metri causa).

an + upadhi + ka

Anupanna

, gone into, reached, attained Snp 764 (māradheyya˚).

pp. of anupajjati

Anupabandhati

(anuppa˚) to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to continue Mil 132 ■ Caus. ˚āpeti ibid.

anu + pa + bandhati

Anupabandhanatā

(anuppa˚) (f.) nonstopping, not ceasing Mil 132.

abstr. to prec.

Anupabandhanā

(anuppa˚) (f.) continuance, incessance, Pp 18 = Vb 357 (in exegesis of upanāha).

abstr. fr. anupabandhati

Anupabbajjā

(f.) giving up worldly life in imitation of another SN v.67 = Iti 107.

anu + pabbajjā, cp. BSk. anupravrajati Divy 61

Anupaya

(adj.) unattached, “aloof” SN i.181 (akankha apiha + ).

an + upaya

Anuparigacchati

to walk round and round, to go round about (c. acc.) Vin iii.119; SN i.75 (ger. ˚gamma ); Snp 447 (aor. ˚pariyagā = parito parito agamāsi Snp-a 393); Ja iv.267.

anu + pari + gacchati

Anuparidhāvati

to run up & down or to move round & round (cp. anuparivattati) S.; iii.150 (khīlan).

anu + pari + dhāvati

Anupariyāti

to go round about, to go about, to wander or travel all over (c. acc.) Vin ii.111; SN i.102, SN i.124; Thag 1235 (˚pariyeti), 1250 (id. to search) Pv iii.34 (= anuvicarati); Mil 38; Pv-a 92 (˚yāyitvā ger.) 217.

auu + pari + yāti

Anupariyāya

(adj) going round, encircling, in ˚patha the path leading or going round the city DN ii.83 = SN iv.194 = AN v.195; AN iv.107.

adjectivised ger. of anupariyāti

Anuparivattati

to go or move round, viz. 1. to deal with, be engaged in, perform, worship Vin iii.307 (ādiccaṃ); DN i.240; Pv-a 97.

2. to meet Mil 204 (Devadatto ca Bodhisatto ca ekato anuparivattanti).

3. to move round & round, move on and on keep on rolling (c. acc.), evolve S.; iii.150 (anuparidhāvati + ) Mil 253 (anudhāvati + kāyan).

anu + pari + vṛt

Anuparivatti

(f.) (-˚) dealing with, occupation, connection with SN iii.16.

anu + parivatti

Anuparivāreti

to surround, stand by, attend on (c. acc.) Vin i.338; MN i.153; Dhp-a 1.55.

anu + pari + vāreti

Anupariveṇiyaṃ

should be written anu pariveṇiyaṃ (“in every cell, cell by cell”), anu here functioning as prep. c. loc. (see anu A Vin i.80, Vin i.106.

anu + pariveṇiyaṃ = loc. of pariveṇi

Anuparisakkati

to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. acc.) SN iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattati).

anu + pari + sakkati

Anuparisakkana

(nt.) dealing with, interest in SN iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattana).

fr. anuparisakkati

Anupariharati

to surround, enfold, embrace MN i.306.

anu + pari + harati

Anupalitta

(adj.) unsmeared, unstained, free from taint MN i.319, MN i.386 (in verse); as ˚ūpalitta in verse of Sn & Dh: Snp 211 (= lepānaṃ abhāvā Snp-a 261), 392 468, 790, 845; Dhp 353.

an + upalitta

Anupavajja

(adj.) blameless, without fault, Mil 391.

grd. of an + upavadati

Anupavattaka

(anuppa˚) (adj.) to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire (cakkaṃ) Mil 342, Mil 362; Snp-a 454. See also anuvattaka.

Anupavatteti

(anuppa˚) to keep moving on after, to continue rolling, with cakkaṃ to wield supreme power after, i.e. in succession or imitation of a predecessor SN i.191; Mil 362. See also anuvatteti.

anu + pa + vatteti, fr. vṛt

Anupavāda

not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dhp 185 (anūpa˚ in metre; expld at Dhp-a iii.238 as anupavādanañ c’eva anupavādāpanañ ca “not scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling”); adj. ˚vādaka Pp 60, & ˚vādin MN i.360.

an + upavāda

Anupaviṭṭha

(anuppa˚) entered, gone or got into, fallen into (c. acc.) Mil 270, Mil 318 sq., 409 (coming for shelter); Pv-a 97, Pv-a 152 (Gangānadiṃ a. nadī flowing into the G.).

pp. of anupavisati

Anupaviṭṭhatā

(f.) the fact of having entered Mil 257.

abstr. to anupaviṭṭha

Anupavisati

to go into, to enter Dhp i.290; Vv-a 42 (= ogāhati) ■ pp. ˚paviṭṭha (q.v.) Caus. ˚paveseti (q.v.).

anu + pa + visati

Anupavecchati

(anuppa˚) to give, give over to, offer up, present, supply Vin i.221 (˚pavacchati); DN i.74 (= pavesati DN-a i.218); ii.78; MN i.446 MN iii.133; AN ii.64; AN iii.26 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); Ja v.394; Snp 208 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); Snp-a 256 (= anupavesati); Pv-a 28.

see under pavecchati

Anupaveseti

to make enter, to give over, to supply Snp-a 256 (= ˚pavecchati).

anu + pa + vis, cp. BSk. anupraveśayati Divy 238

Anupasaṅkamati1

to go along up to (c. acc.) Pv-a 179.

anu + pa + saṃkamati

Anupasaṅkamati2

not to go to. not to approach Dhp-a ii.30 (+ apayirupāsati).

an + upasank˚

Anupasaṇṭhapanā

(f.) not stopping, incessance, continuance Pp 18 (but id. p. at Vb 357 has anusansandanā instead); cp. anupabandhanā.

an + upasaṇṭhapanā

Anupassaka

(adj.) observing, viewing, contemplating Thag 420.

fr. anupassati

Anupassati

to look at, contemplate, observe Snp 477; Pts i.57, Pts i.187; Snp-a 505.

anu + passati

Anupassanā

(f.) looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation SN v.178 sq., Snp p.140; Pts i.10, Pts i.20, Pts i.96; Pts ii.37, Pts ii.41 sq. 67 sq.; Vb 194. See anicca˚, anatta˚, dukkha˚.

abstr. of anupassati, cf. Sk. anudarśana

Anupassin

(-˚) (adj.) viewing, observing, realising SN ii.84 sq., SN v.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dhp 7, Dhp 253; Snp 255, Snp 728; Pts i.191 sq.; Vb 193 sq., 236; Sdhp 411.

fr. anupassati

Anupahata1

thrown up, blown up Mil 274.

anu + pa + hata, pp. of anu + pa + han

Anupahata2

(adj.) not destroyed, not spoilt Dhp-a ii.33 (˚jivhapasāda).

an + upahata

Anupāta

attack in speech, contest, reproach AN i.161 (vāda˚).

of anupatati

Anupātin

(adj.) 1. following, indulging in Ja iii.523 (khaṇa˚).

2. attacking, hurting Ja v.399.

fr. anupāta

Anupādaṃ

(adv.) at the foot Vism 182 (opp. anusīsaṃ at the head).

anu + pāda

Anupādā

anupādāniya, anupādāya, anupādiyāna, anupādiyiṭvā see upādiyati. Anupadana & Anupadi;

ger. of an + upādiyati = anupādāya

Anupādāna & Anupādi

see upādāna & upādi;.

Anupāpita

having been lead to or made to reach, attained, found Mil 252.

pp. of anupāpeti

Anupāpuṇāti

(anuppā˚) to reach, attain, get to, find SN i.105; ger. anuppatvāna Pv ii.924 (˚pāpuṇitvā Pv-a 123) ■ pp. anupatta (q.v.) ■ Caus anupāpeti (q.v.).

anu + pāpuṇāti

Anupāpeti

to make reach or attain, to lead to, to give or make find Ja vi.88; Cp. xi. 4 (aor anupāpayi ); Mil 276 ■ pp. anupāpita (q.v.).

Caus. of anupāpuṇāti

Anupāya

wrong means Ja i.256; Sdhp 405.

an + upāya

Anupāyāsa

see upāyāsa.

Anupālaka

(adj.) guarding, preserving Sdhp 474.

anu + pālaka

Anupālana

(nt.) maintenance, guarding, keeping Dpvs iii.2.

fr. anupāleti

Anupāleti

to safeguard, warrant, maintain Mil 160 (santatiṃ).

anu + pāleti

Anupāhana

(adj.) without shoes Ja vi.552.

an + upāhana

Anupiya

(anuppiya) (adj) flattering, plessant, nt. pleasantness, flattery, in ˚bhāṇin one who flatters I iii.185; Ja ii.390; Ja v.360; and ˚bhāṇitar id. Vb 352.

anu + piya

Anupīḷaṃ

at Pv-a 161 is to be read anuppīḷan (q.v.).

Anupucchati

to ask or inquire after (c. acc.) Snp 432, Snp 1113 ■ pp. anupuṭṭha (q.v.).

anu + pucchati

Anupuṭṭha

asked Snp 782 (= pucchita Snp-a 521).

pp. of anupucchati

Anupubba

(adj.) following in one’s turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin ii.237 (mahāsamuddo a˚-ninno etc.); DN i.184; Snp 511; Ja v.155 (regularly formed, of ūrū). Cases adverbially: anupubbena (instr.) by and by, in course of time, later, gradually Vin i.83; Dhp 239 (= anupaṭipāṭiyā Dhp-a iii.340); Pp 41, Pp 64; Ja ii.2, Ja ii.105; Ja iii.127; Mil 22; Pv-a 19. anupubbaso (abl. cp. Sk. anupūrvaśaḥ) in regular order Snp 1000. In compn. both anupubba˚ & anupubbi˚ (q.v.).;

-kāraṇa gradual performance, graded practice MN i.446 -nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular succession, i.e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are the same as those mentioned under ˚vihāra & are enum;d. as such at DN iii.266, DN iii.290; AN iv.409, AN iv.456; Pts i.35. -vihāra a state of gradually ascending stages by means of which the highest aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness These are 9 stages, consisting of the 4 jhānas, the 4 āyatanāni & as the crowning phrase “saññā-vedayitanirodha” (see jhāna1). Enumd. as such in var. places, esp at the foll.: DN ii.156; DN iii.265, DN iii.290; AN iv.410; Nd ii.under jhāna; Pts i.5; Mil 176. -sikkhā regular instruction or study (dhammavinaye) MN i.479; MN iii.1 (+ ˚kiriyā ˚paṭipadā).

anu + pubba

Anupubbaka

(adj.) = anupubba, in cpd. pubbānupubbaka all in succession or in turn, one by one (on nature of this kind of cpd. see anu B iv.) Vin i.20 (˚ānaṃ kulānaṃ puttā the sons of each clan, one by one).

Anupubbata

(nt.) acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 (= anukūla kiriyā i.e. as it pleases Vv-a 280) cp. ānupubbatā. Anupubbi-katha

fr. anupubba

Anupubbi-kathā

(f.) a gradual instruction, graduated sermon regulated exposition of the ever higher values of four subjects (dāna-kathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚) i.e. charity righteousness, the heavens, and the Path. Bdhgh. explains the term as anupubbikathā nāma dānânantaraṃ sīlaṃ sīlânantaro saggo saggânantaro maggo ti etesaṃ dīpana-kathā (DN-a i.277). Vin i.15, Vin i.18; Vin ii.156, Vin ii.192; DN i.110; DN ii.41; MN i.379; Ja i.8; Vv-a 66, Vv-a 197, Vv-a 208; DN-a i.308; Dhp-a i.6; Mil 228 ■ The spelling is frequently ānupubbikathā (as to lengthening of anu see anu Note (a)), e.g. at DN i.110; DN ii.41; MN i.379; Ja i.8; Mil 228.

anupubba + kathā, formation like dhammi-kathā

Anupekkhati

1. to concentrate oneself on, to look carefully AN iii.23.

2. to consider, to show consideration for, Nd ii.50 (ppr. ˚amāna = anukampamāna) ■ Caus. anupekkheti to cause some one to consider carefully Vin ii.73.

anu + pekkhati

Anupekkhanatā

(f.) concentration (of thought) Dhs 8, Dhs 85, Dhs 284, Dhs 372.

abstr. fr. anupekkhana, see anupekkhatī

Anupeti

to go into DN i.55 (+ anupagacchati) SN iii.207; DN-a i.165.

anu + pa + i

Anupeseti

to send forth after Mil 36.

anu + pa + iṣ

Anuposathikaṃ

see anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ.

Anuposiya

(adj.) to be nourished or fostered Sdhp 318.

grd. of anu + puṣ

Anuppa˚

in all combns. of anu + ppa see under headings anupa˚.

Anuppadajjuṃ

(S iii.131) see anupadeti.

Anuppanna

(˚uppāda, ˚uppādeti) see uppanna etc.

Anuppīḷa

(adj.) not molested, not oppressed (by robbers etc.) not ruined, free from harm Ja iii.443 Ja v.378; Vv-a 351; Pv-a 161.

an + uppīḷa

Anupharaṇa

(nt.) flashing through, pervading Mil 148.

anu + pharaṇa

Anuphusīyati

to sprinkle, moisten, make wet Ja v.242 (himaṃ C. pateyya).

anu + phusīyati, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati, Caus. of pruṣ

Anubajjhati

at Pv-a 56 is faulty reading for anubandhati (q.v.).

Anubaddha

following, standing behind (piṭṭhito) DN i.1, DN i.226.

pp. of anubandhati

Anubandha

bondage MN iii.170; Iti 91.

anu + bandh

Anubandhati

to follow, run after, pursue Ja i.195; Ja ii.230; Ja vi.452 (= anujavati); Pv-a 56 (substitute for anubajjhanti!), 103, 155. aor. ˚bandhi Ja ii.154, Ja ii.353 Ja iii.504; Pv-a 260 (= anvāgacchi). ger. ˚bandhitvā Ja i.254 grd. ˚bandhitabba MN i.106 ■ pp. anubaddha (q.v.).

anu + bandhati

Anubandhana

(nt.) that which connects or follows, connection, consequence Ja vi.526 (˚dukkha).

fr. anubandhati

Anubala

(nt.) rear-guard, retinue, suite, in ˚ṃ bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Mil 125.

anu + bala

Anubujjhati

to remember, recollect Ja iii.387 (with avabujjhati in prec. verse).

anu + bujjhati, Med. of budh, cp. Sk. avabudhyate

Anubujjhana

(nt.) awakening, recognition Pts i.18 (bujjhana + ).

fr. anubujjhati

Anubuddha

1. awakened (act. & pass.), recognised, conceived, seen, known DN ii.123 (˚ā ime dhammā); SN i.137 (dhammo vimalen’ ânubuddho ii.203; iv.188; AN ii.1; AN iii.14; AN iv.105; Snp-a 431. In phrase buddhānubuddha (as to nature of cpd. see anu B iv. either “fully awakened (enlightened)” or “wakened by the wake” (Mrs. Rh. D.) Thag 679 = Thag 1246.

2 a lesser Buddha, inferior than the Buddha DN-a i.40. Cp buddhānubuddha.

pp. of anu + bodhati

Anubodha

awakening; perception, recognition, understanding SN i.126 (?) = AN v.46 (anubodhiṃ as aor. of anubodhati?); Pp 21; Mil 233. Freq. in compn. ananubodha (adj.) not understanding, not knowing the truth SN ii.92; SN iii.261; SN v.431; AN ii.1; AN iv.105; Dhs 390 Dhs 1061; Vv-a 321 (= anavabodha) and duranubodha (adj. hard to understand, difficult to know DN i.12, DN i.22; SN i.136.

anu + budh

Anubodhati

to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aor. anubodhiṃ AN v.46 (?) = SN i.126 (anubodhaṃ) ■ Caus. ˚bodheti to awaken, fig. to make see to instruct Ja vi.139 (˚ayamāna)-pp. anubuddha (q.v.).

anu + budh

Anubodhana

(nt.) awakening, understanding, recognition Pts i.18 (bodhana + ).

fr. anubodhati

Anubbajati

to go along, wander, follow, tread (a path) Ja iv.399 (maggaṃ = pabbajati C.).

anu + vraj

Anubbata

(adj.) subject to the will of another, obedient, faithful, devoted Ja iii.521 Ja vi.557.

Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata

Anubbillāvitatta

see ubbill˚.

Anubyañjana

see anuvyañjana.

Anubrūhita

strengthened with (-˚), full of Pts i.167.

pp. of anubrūheti

Anubrūheti

to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. acc.), foster SN i.178 (anubrūhaye); MN iii.187 (id., so read for manu˚), Thig 163 (˚ehi); Cp iii.12 (saṃvegaṃ anubrūhayiṃ aor.); Ja iii.191 (suññāgāraṃ). Often in phrase vivekaṃ anubrūheti to devote oneself to detachment or solitude, e.g. Ja i.9 (inf ˚brūhetuṃ); iii.31 (˚brūhessāmi), Dhp 75 (˚brūhaye ˚brūheyya vaḍḍheyya Dhp-a ii.103) ■ pp. anubrūhita (q.v.) Cp. also brūhana.

brūheti

Anubhaṇanā

(f.) talking to, admonition, scolding Vin ii.88 (anuvadanā + ).

anu + bhaṇana

Anubhavati & Anubhoti

to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in experience DN i.129; DN ii.12 (˚bhonti); MN ii.204; AN i.61 (atthaṃ ˚bhoti to have a good result); Ja vi.97 (˚bhoma) Pv i.1011 (˚bhomi vipākaṃ); Pv-a 52 (˚issati = vedissati) Sdhf 290. Esp. freq. with dukkhaṃ to suffer pain, e.g Pv-a i.1110 (˚bhonti); Pv-a 43, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 79 etc. (cp. anubhavana) ■ ppr. med. ˚bhavamāna Ja i.50; aor. ˚bhavi Pv-a 75 (sampattiṃ); ger. ˚bhavitvā Ja iv.1; Pv-a 4 (sampattiṃ), 67 (dukkhaṃ), 73 (sampattiṃ); grd. ˚bhaviyāna (in order to receive) Pv ii.85 (= anubhavitvā Pv-a 109). Pass. anubhūyati & ˚bhavīyati; to be undergone or being experienced; ppr. ˚bhūyamāna Pv-a 8, Pv-a 159 (mayā a. anubhūta), 214 (attanā by him) & ˚bhavīyamāna Pv-a 33 (dukkhaṃ) ■ pp. anubhūta (q.v.).

anu + bhavati

Anubhavana

(nt.) experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cf. Cpd. 229, 2321) Ne 28 (iṭṭhâniṭṭh-ânubhavana-lakkhanā vedanā “feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant”); Mil 60 (vedayita-lakkhaṇā vedanā anubhavana-lakkhaṇā ca); Pv-a 152 (kamma-vipāka˚). Esp. in combn. with dukkha˚; suffering painful sensations, e.g. at Ja iv.3; Mil 181; Dhp-a iv.75; Pv-a 52.

fr. anubhavati

Anubhāga

a secondary or inferior part, (after-)share, what is left over Vin ii.167.

anu + bhāga

Anubhāyati

to be afraid of Ja vi.302 (kissa nv’ ânubhāyissaṃ, so read for kissânu˚).

anu + bhāyati

Anubhāva

orig. meaning “experience, concomitance” and found only in cpds. as-˚, in meaning “experiencing the sensation of or belonging to, experience of, accordance with”, e.g. maha˚ sensation of greatness rājâ˚ s. belonging to a king, what is in accordance with kingship, i.e. majesty. Through preponderance of expressions of distinction there arises the meaning of anubhāva as “power, majesty, greatness, splendour etc.” & as such it was separated from the 1;st component and taken as ānubhāva with ā instead of a, since the compositional character had obliterated the character of the a. As such (ānubhāva abs.) found only in later language ■ (1) anubhāva (-˚): mahānubhāva (of) great majesty, eminence power SN i.146 sq.; SN ii.274; SN iv.323; Snp p.93; Pv ii.112 Pv-a 76. deva˚; of divine power or majesty DN ii.12; devatā˚; id. Ja i.168; dibba˚; id. Pv-a 71, Pv-a 110. rājā˚; kingly splendour, pomp DN i.49; Ja iv.247; Pv-a 279 etc. -anubhāvena (instr ■ ˚) in accordance with, by means of Ja ii.200 (angavijjā˚); Pv-a 53 (iddh˚), 77 (kamma˚), 148 (id.), 162 (rāja˚), 184 (dāna˚), 186 (puñña˚). yathānubhāvaṃ (adv.) in accordance with (me), as much as (1 can); after ability, according to power SN i.31; Vv 15 (yathābalaṃ Vv-a 25) ■ (2) ānubhāva majesty power magnificence, glory, splendour Ja v.10, Ja v.456; Pv ii.811 Vv-a 14; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 122, Pv-a 272. See also ānu˚.

fr. anubhavati

Anubhāvatā

(f.) majesty, power SN i.156 (mahā˚).

= anubhāva + tā

Anubhāsati

to speak after, to repeat DN i.104; Mil 345; DN-a i.273.

anu + bhāsati

Anubhūta

(having or being) experienced, suffered, enjoyed Pv-a ii.1218. nt. suffering, experience Ja i.254; Mil 78, Mil 80.

pp. of anubhavati

Anubhūyamānatta

(nt.) the fact of having to undergo, experiencing Pv-a 103.

abstr. fr. ppr. Pass. of anubhavati

Anuma

(-dassika) see anoma˚.

Anumagge

at Ja v.201 should be read anu magge along the road, by the way; anu here used as prep. c. loc (see anu A b).

Anumajjati

1. to strike along, to stroke, to touch DN-a i.276 (= anumasati).

2. to beat, thresh fig. to thresh ont Ja vi.548; Mil 90 ■ Pass. anumajjīyati Mil 275 (cp. p. 428).

anu + majjati

Anumajjana

(nt.) threshing out, pounding up (Dhs. trsl. 11), always used with ref. to the term vicāra (q.v.) Mil 62; Dhs-a 114; DN-a i.63, DN-a i.122.

abstr. fr. anumajjati

Anumajjha

(adj.) mediocre, without going to extremes Ja iv.192; Ja v.387.

anu + majjha

Anumaññati

to assent, approve, give leave Thag 72 ■ pp. anumata (q.v.).

anu + maññati

Anumata

approved of, given consent to, finding approval, given leave DN i.99 (= anuññāta DN-a i.267); Ja v.399 (= muta); Mil 185, Mil 212, Mil 231, Mil 275; Pv-a 64 (= annuññāta).

pp. of anumaññati

Anumati

(f.) consent, permission, agreement, assent, approval Vin ii.294, Vin ii.301, Vin ii.306; DN i.137 DN i.143; Dpvs iv.47, Cf. v.18; DN-a i.297; Vv-a 17, Pv-a 114.

from anumaññati

Anumatta

see aṇu˚.

Anumasati

to touch DN i.106 (= anumajjati DN-a i.276).

anu + masati

Anumāna

inference Mil 330 (naya + ), 372, 413; Sdhp 74.

fr. anu + man

Anumitta

a secondary friend, a follower. acquaintance Ja v.77.

anu + mitta

Anumināti

to observe draw an inference MN i.97; Pv-a 227 (˚anto + nayaṃ nento ). See also anumīyati.

cf. Sk. anumāti, anu + mināti from mi, Sk. minoti, with confusion of roots mā & mi;

Anumīyati

to observe, conclude or infer from SN iii.36 Cp. anumināti.

Sk. anumīyate, Pass. of anu + , measure, in sense of Med.

Anumodaka

(adj.) one who enjoys, one who is glad of or thankful for (c. acc.) Vin v.172; Pv-a 122; Sdhf 512.

fr. anumodati

Anumodati

to find satisfaction in (acc.), to rejoice in, be thankful for (c. acc.), appreciate, benefit from, to be pleased, to enjoy Vin ii.212 (bhattagge a. to say grace after a meal); SN ii.54; AN iii.50 (˚modanīya ) iv.411; Dhp 177 (ppr. ˚modamāna ); Iti 78; Pv ii.919 (dānaṃ ˚modamāna = enjoying, gladly receiving); 1,54 (anumodare = are pleased; pitisomanassajātā honti Pv-a 27); Ja ii.112; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 81, Pv-a 201) imper. modāhi ) Sdhp. 501 sq ■ pp. anumodita (q.v.).

anu + modati

Anumodana

(nt.) “according to taste”, i.e. satisfaction, thanks, esp. after a meal or after receiving gifts = to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving In latter sense with dadāti (give thanks for = loc.) karoti (= Lat. gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks) ˚ṃ datvā Pv-a 89; ˚ṃ katvā Ja i.91; Dhp-a iii.170, Dhp-a iii.172; Vv-a 118; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 47; ˚ṃ vatvā Vv-a 40 (pānīyadāne for the gift of water), 295, 306 etc. ˚ṃ karoti also “to do a favour” Pv-a 275. Cp. further Dhp-a i.198 (˚gāthā verses expressing thanks, benediction); ii.97 (Satthāraṃ ˚ṃ yāciṃsu asked his blessing); Pv-a 23 (˚atthaṃ in order to thank), 26 (id.), 121, 141 (katabhatta˚), 142; Sdhp 213, Sdhp 218, Sdhp 516.

fr. anumodati

Anumodita

enjoyed, rejoiced in Pv-a 77.

pp. of anumodati

Anummatta

(adj.) not out of mind, sane, of sound mind Mil 122; Sdhp 205.

an + ummatta

Anuyanta

at AN v.22 is doubtful reading (v.l. anuyutta ). The meaning is either “inferior to, dependent on, a subject of, a vassal” or “attending on”. The explanation may compare Sk. anuyātaṃ attendance, in which latter case anu-yantṛ would be “an inferior ruler” and P. yanta would represent the n. a.g. yantā as a-stem. The v.l. is perhaps preferable as long as other passages with anuyanta are not found (see anuyutta 2).

anu + , cp. anuyāyin or Sk. yantṛ ruler [ yam

Anuyāgin

(adj) offering after the example of another DN i.142.

fr. anu + yaj

Anuyāta

gone through or after, followed, pursued SN ii.105 (magga); AN v.236; Iti 29; Mil 217.

pp. of anuyāti

Anuyāti

(& anuyāyati) 1. to go after, to follow Ja vi.49 (fut. ˚yissati), 499 (yāyantaṃ anuyāyati = anugacchati C).

2. to go along by, to go over, to visit Mil 391 (˚yāyati) ■ pp. anuyāta (q.v.). See also anusaṃyāyati

anu +

Anuyāyin

(adj.) going after, following, subject to (gen.) Snp 1017 (anânuyāyin); Ja vi.309; Mil 284.

cp. Sk. anuyāyin, anu +

Anuyuñjanā

(f.) (& ˚yuñjana nt.) application or devotion to (-˚) Mil 178; Vv-a 346 (anuyujjanaṃ wrong spelling?)

abstr. fr. anuyuñjati

Anuyuñjati

1. to practice, give oneself up to (acc.), attend, pursue SN i.25, SN i.122 (˚yuñjan “in loving self-devotion” Mrs. Rh. D.); iii.154; iv.104, 175; Dhp 26 (pamādaṃ = pavatteti Dhp-a i.257), 247 (surāmeraya-pānaṃ = sevati bahulīkaroti Dhp-a iii.356); Pv-a 61 (kammaṭṭhānaṃ).

2. to ask a question, to call to account take to task Vin ii.79; Vv 335; ppr. Pass. ˚yuñjiyamāna Pv-a 192 ■ pp. anuyutta (q.v.) ■ Caus. anuyojeti “to put to”, to address, admonish, exhort Dhp-a iv.20.

anu + yuñjati

Anuyutta

1. applying oneself to, dealing with, practising, given to, intent upon DN i.166, DN i.167; iii. 232 = AN ii.205 (attaparitāpan’ ânuyogaṃ a.); SN iii.153 SN iv.104; Snp 663 (lobhaguṇe), 814 (methunaṃ = samāyutta Snp-a 536), 972 (jhān˚); Pp 55; Pv-a 163 (jāgariya˚) 206.

2. following, attending on; an attendant, inferior vassal, in expression khattiya or rājā anuyutta a prince royal or a smaller king (see khattiya 3 b) AN v.22 (v l for T. anuyanta, q.v.); Snp 553 (= anugāmin, sevaka Snp-a 453).

pp. of anuyuñjati

Anuyoga

1. application, devotion to (-˚), execution, practice of (-˚); often combd. with anuyutta in phrase ˚anuyogaṃ anuyutta = practisiṅg e.g. Vin i.190 (maṇḍan’ ânuyogaṃ anuyutta); DN iii.113 (attakilamath’ ânuyogaṃ a.); AN ii.205 (attaparitāpan’ ânuyogaṃ a.) ■ As adj. (-˚) doing, given to, practising (cp. anuyutta). DN i.5; DN iii.107; MN i.385; SN i.182; SN iii.239 SN iv.330; SN v.320; AN i.14; AN iii.249; AN iv.460 sq.; V. 17 sq. 205; Ja i.90 (padhān’ ânuyogakiccaṃ); Vv 8438 (dhamma˚) Mil 348; DN-a i.78, DN-a i.104.

2. invitation, appeal, question (cp. anuyuñjati 2) Mil 10 (ācariyassa ˚ṃ datvā).

Sk. anuyoga, fr. anu + yuj

Anuyogavant

(adj.) applying oneself to, full of application or zeal, devoted Pv-a 207.

anuyoga + vant

Anuyogin

(adj.) applying oneself to, devoted to (-˚) Dhp 209 (atta˚ given to oneself, self-concentrated).

fr. anuyoga

Anurakkhaka

(adj.) preserving, keeping up Ja iv.192 (vaṃsa˚; ); vi.1 (id.).

fr. anurakkhati, cp. ˚rakkhin

Anurakkhaṇa

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) guarding, protection, preservation DN iii.225 sq.; AN ii.16 sq.; Ja i.133 Pp 12; Dpvs iv.24 (adj.); Vv-a 32 (citta˚); Sdhp 449.

abstr. fr. anurakkhati

Anurakkhati

to guard, watch over (acc.), preserve, protect, shield Snp 149; Dhp 327; Ja i.46; Pp 12-ppr. med.˚ rakkhamāna(ka) as adj. Sdhp 621.

anu + rakkhati

Anurakkhā

(f.) guarding, protection, preservation SN iv.323 (anuddayā a. anukampā).

= anurakkhaṇā

Anurakkhin

(adj.) guarding, preserving, keeping Ja v.24.

fr. anurakkhati

Anurakkhiya

(adj.) in dur˚; difficult to guard Vin iii.149.

f. anurakkhati

Anurañjita

illumined, brighterted, beautified Bv i.45 (byāmapabhā˚ by the shine of the halo); Vv-a 4 (sañjhātapa˚ for sañjhāpabhā˚).

pp. of anu + rañjeti, Caus. of rañj

Anuratta

(adj.) pp. of anu + rañj ] attached or devoted to, fond of, faithful Thig 446 (bhattāraṃ); Ja i.297; Mil 146.

Anuravati

to resound, to sound after, linger (of sound) Mil 63.

anu + ravati

Anuravanā

(f.) lingering of the sound, resounding Mil 63.

abstr. fr. anuravati

Anuraho

(adv.) in secret, face to face, private MN i.27.

anu + raho

Anurujjhati

to conform oneself to, have a regard for, approve, to be pleased AN iv.158; Dhs A 362 ■ pp. anuruddha (q.v.).

Sk. anurudhyate, Pass. of anu + rudh

Anuruddha

enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased SN iv.71, (anānuruddha).

pp. of anurujjhati

Anurūpa

(adj.) suitable, adequate, seeming, fit, worthy; adapted to, corresponding, conform with (-˚ Ja i.91; Ja vi.366 (tad˚); Pv-a 61 (ajjhāsaya˚ according to his wish), 128 (id.) 78, 122, 130, 155; etc. Cp. also paṭirūpa in same meaning.

anu + rūpa

Anurodati

to cry after, cry for Ja iii.166 = Pv i.127 (dārako candaṃ a.).

anu + rodati

Anurodha

compliance, consideration satisfaction (opp. virodha ) SN i.111; SN iv.210; Snp 362; Dhs 1059; Vb 145; Dhs-a 362.

fr. anu + rudh

Anulapanā

(f.) scolding, blame, accusation Vin ii.88 (spelt anullapanā; combd. with anuvadana & anubhaṇanā).;

anu + lapanā, lap

Anulitta

(adj.) anointed, besmeared Ja i.266; Pv-a 211.

cp. Sk. anulipta, pp. of anulimpati

Anulimpati

to anoint, besmear, Mil 394 (˚limpitabba). Caus. ˚limpeti in same meaning Mil 169 and ˚lepeti Milm 169 (grd. ˚lepanīya to be treated with ointment) ■ pp. anulitta (q.v.).

anu + limpati

Anulimpana

(nt.) anointing Mil 353, Mil 394.

fr. anulimpati

Anulepa

anointing Mil 152.

fr. anu + lip

Anulokin

(adj.) looking (up) at, seeing (-˚) MN i.147 (sīsa˚).

fr. anu + loketi, cp. Sk. & P. avalokin & anuviloketi

Anuloma

(adj.) “with the hair or grain”, i.e. in natural order, suitable, fit, adapted to, adaptable straight forward DN ii.273 (anānuloma, q.v.) SN iv.401; Pts ii.67, Pts ii.70; Dhp-a ii.208 ■ nt. direct order, state of fitting in, adaptation Mil 148.

-ñāṇa insight of adaptation (cp. Cpd. 66, 68) Dhp-a ii.208. -paṭiloma in regular order & reversed, forward backward (Ep. of paṭiccasamuppāda, also in BSk.) Vin i.1; AN iv.448.

Sk. anu + loma

Anulomika

(& ˚ya ) (adj.) suitable, fit, agreeable; in proper order, adapted to (-˚) Vin ii.7 (an˚) iii.120 (an˚ = ananucchaviya); iv.239; AN i.106; AN iii.116 sq.; Iti 103 (sāmaññassa˚); Snp 385 (pabbajita˚); Kp-a 243 (ananulomiya); Dhs-a 25; Sdhp 65.

fr. anuloma

Anulometi

to conform to, to be in accordance with Mil 372.

v. denom. fr. anuloma

Anuḷāratta

(nt.) smallness, littleness, insignificance Vv-a 24.

abstr. fr. an + uḷāra

Anuvajja

(adj.) to be blamed, censurable, worthy of reproach Snp p.78 (an˚ = anuvādavimutta Snp-a 396).;

grd. of anu + vadati, cp. anuvāda & Sk. avavadya

Anuvattaka

(adj.) 1. = anupavattaka (q.v.) Thag 1014 (cakka˚).

2. following, siding with (-˚) Vin iv.218 (ukkhittânuvattikā f.).

fr. anuvatteti

Anuvattati

1. to follow, imitate, follow one’s example (c. acc.), to be obedient DN ii.244; Vin ii.309 (Bdhgh.); iv.218; Ja i.125, Ja i.300; DN-a i.288; Pv-a 19.

2. to practice, execute Pv iv.712 ■ Caus. ˚vatteti (q.v.).

Sk. anuvartati, anu + vattati

Anuvattana

(nt.) complying with, conformity with (-˚), compliance, observance, obedience Ja i.367 (dhamma˚); v.78.

abstr. fr. anuvattati

Anuvattin

(adj.) following, acting according to or in conformity with (-˚), obedient Ja ii.348 (f. ˚inī) iii.319 (id.); Dhp 86 (dhamma˚); Vv 155 (vasa˚ = anukūlabhāvena vattana sīla Vv-a 71); Dhp-a ii.161.

fr. anuvattati

Anuvatteti

= anupavatteti (q.v.) Thag 826 (dhammacakkaṃ: “after his example turn the wheel Mrs. Rh. D.).

anu + vatteti

Anuvadati

to blame, censure, reproach Vin ii.80, Vin ii.88 ■ grd. anuvajja (q.v.).

Sk. ava˚; anu + vadati

Anuvadanā

(f.) blaming, blame, censure Vin ii.88 (anuvāda + ).

fr. anuvadati

Anuvasati

to live with somebody, to dwell, inhabit Ja ii.421. Caus. ˚vāseti to pass, spend (time) Ja vi.296 ■ pp. ˚vuttha (q.v.).

anu + vasati

Anuvassaṃ

(adv.) for one rainy season; every rainy season or year, i.e. annually C. on Thag 24.

anu + vassa

Anuvassika

(adj.) one who has (just) passed one rainy season Thag 24 (“scarce have the rains gone by” Mrs. Rh. D.; see trsl. p. 29 n. 2).

fr. anuvassaṃ

Anuvāceti

to say after, to repeat (words), to recite or make recite after or again DN i.104 (= tehi aññesaṃ vācitaṃ anuvācenti DN-a i.273); Mil 345 Cp. anubhāseti.

anu + Caus. of vac

Anuvāta1

a forward wind, the wind that blows from behind, a favourable wind; ˚ṃ adv. with the wind, in the direction of the wind (opp. paṭivātaṃ ) AN i.226 (˚paṭivātaṃ); Sdhp 425 (paṭivāta˚). In anuvāte (anu + vāte) at Ja ii.382 “with the wind, facing the w. in front of the wind” anu is to be taken as prep. c. loc & to be separated from vāte (see anu A b.).;

anu + to blow

Anuvāta2

only in connection with the making of the bhikkhus’ garments (cīvara) “weaving on, supplementary weaving, or along the seam”, i.e. hem, seam, binding Vin i.254, Vin i.297; Vin ii.177; Vin iv.121 (aggala + ); Pv-a 73 (anuvāte appabhonte since the binding was insufficient).

anu + to weave (?) in analogy to vāta from to blow

Anuvāda

1. blaming, censure, admonition Vin ii.5 Vin ii.32; AN ii.121 (atta˚, para˚); Vb 376.

2. in combn. vādānuvāda: talk and lesser or additional talk, i.e. “small talk” (see anu B iv.) DN i.161; MN i.368.

-adhikaraṇa a question or case of censure Vin ii.88 sq.; Vin iii.164 (one of the 4 adhikaraṇāni, q.v.).

fr. anuvadatī, cp. Sk. anuvāda in meaning of “repetition”

Anuvāsana

(nt.) an oily enema, an injection Mil 353.

fr. anuvāseti

Anuvāseti

to treat with fragrant oil, i.e. to make an injection or give an enema of salubrious oil Mil 169; grd. ˚vāsanīya ibid.; pp. ˚vāsita Mil 214.

anu + vāseti, Caus. of vāsa3 odour, perfume

Anuvikkhitta

(adj.) dispersed over SN v.277 sq. (+ anuvisaṭa).

anu + vi + khitta, pp. of anu + vikkhipati

Anuvigaṇeti

to take care of, regard, heed, consider Thag 109.

anu + vi + gaṇeti

Anuvicarati

to wander about, stroll roam through, explore DN i.235; Ja ii.128; Ja iii.188; Pv-a 189 (= anupariyāti) ■ Caus. ˚vicāreti to think over (lit. to make one’s mind wander over), to meditate ponder (cp. anuvicinteti); always combd. with anuvitakketi (q.v.) AN i.264 (cetasā), iii.178 (dhammaṃ cetasā a.) ■ pp. anuvicarita (q.v.).

anu + vi + carati

Anuvicarita

reflected, pondered over, thought out SN iii.203 (manasā); DN-a i.106 (= anucarita ).

pp. of anuvicāreti

Anuvicāra

meditation, reflexion, thought Dhs 85 (= vicāra ).

anu + vicāra, cf. anuvicāreti

Anuvicinaka

one who examines, an examiner Mil 365.

fr. anu + vicināti

Anuvicinteti

to think or ponder over, to meditate DN ii.203; SN i.203 (yoniso ˚cintaya, imper “marshall thy thoughts in ordered governance” Mrs. Rh. DN v.l. anucintaya); Thag 747; Dhp 364; Iti 82 (dhammaṃ ˚ayaṃ); Ja iii.396; Ja iv.227; Ja v.223 (dhammaṃ ˚cintayanto).

anu + vi + cinteti

Anuvicca

having known or found out, knowing well or thoroughly, testing, finding out MN i.301, MN i.361 (v.l. ˚vijja ); AN ii.3, AN ii.84; AN v.88; Dhp 229 (= jānitvā Dhp-a iii.329); Snp 530 (= anuviditvā Snp-a 431) Ja i.459 (= jānitvā C.); iii.426; Pug. 49.

-kāra a thorough investigation, examination, test Vin i.236 (here spelt anuvijja ) = MN i.379 (= ˚viditvā C.) AN iv.185.

ger. of anuvijjati, for the regular from anuvijja prob. through influence of anu + i (anu-v-icca for anvicca) cf. anveti & adhicca; & see anuvijjati

Anuvijjaka

one who finds out, an examiner Vin v.161.

fr. anuvijja, ger. of anuvijjati

Anuvijjati

to know thoroughly, to find out, to trace, to come to know; inf ˚vijjitiṃ Ja iii.506; ger. ˚viditvā Snp-a 431, also ˚vijja vicca; (see both under anuvicca); grd. ananuvejja not to be known, unfathomable, unknowable MN i.140 (Tathāgato ananuvejjo) ■ Caus. anuvijjāpeti to make some one find out Ja v.162 ■ pp. anuvidita (q.v.).

anu + vid, with fusion of Vedic vetti to know, and Pass. of vindati to find (= vidyate)

Anuvijjhati

1. to pierce or be pierced, to be struck or hurt with (instr.) Ja vi.439–⁠2. to be affected with, to fall into, to incur Dhp-a iii.380 (aparādhaṃ) ■ pp. anuviddha (q.v.).

anu + vyadh

Anuvitakketi

to reflect, think, ponder over, usually combd with anuvicāreti DN i.119; DN iii.242; SN v.67 = Iti 107 (anussarati + ); AN iii.383.

anu + vi + takketi

Anuvidita

found out, recognised; one who has found out or knows well Snp 528, Snp 530 (= anubuddha Snp-a 431). Same in B.Sk., e.g. Mvu iii.398.

pp. of anuvijjati

Anuviddha

(adj.) pierced, intertwined or set with (-˚) Vv-a 278.

pp. of anuvijjhati

Anuvidhīyati

to act in conformity with, to follow (instruction) MN ii.105 = Thag 875; SN iv.199; Ja ii.98; Ja iii.357.

cf. Sk. anuvidhīyate & adj. anuvidhāyin; Pass. of anu + vi + dhā, cf. vidahati

Anuvidhīyanā

(f.) acting according to, conformity with MN i.43.

abstr. fr. anuvidhīyati

Anuviloketi

to look round at, look over, survey, muster MN i.339; Snp p.140; Ja i.53; Mil 7 (lakaṃ), 21 (parisaṃ), 230.

anu + vi + loketi; B.Sk. anuvilokayati

Anuvivaṭṭa

an “after-evolution”, devolution; as part of a bhikkhu’s dress: a sub-vivaṭṭa (q.v.) Vin i.287 (vivaṭṭa + ).

anu + vivaṭṭa

Anuvisaṭa

(anu + visaṭa, pp. of anu + vi + sṛ; ] spread over SN v.277 sq.; Ja iv.102.

Anuvuttha

living with, staying, dwelling Ja ii.42 (cira˚); v.445 (id.).

pp. of anuvasati, cf. Sk. anūṣita

Anuvejja

(adj.) in an˚ see anuvijjati. Anuvyanjana & anubyanjana;

Anuvyañjana & anubyañjana

(e.g. Vin iv.15; Ja i.12) (nt.) accompanying (i.e. secondary attribute, minor or inferior characteristic, supplementary or additional sign or mark (cf. mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇa) Vin i.65 (abl. anuvyañjanaso “in detail”); MN iii.126; SN iv.168; AN iv.279 (abl.); v.73 sq.; Pp 24, Pp 58; Mil 339; Vv-a 315; Dhs-a 400.

-gāhin taking up or occupying oneself with details taken up with lesser or inferior marks DN i.70 (cf. Mvu iii.52); iii.225; SN iv.104; AN i.113; AN ii.16, AN ii.152 sq.; Dhs 1345 (cf. Dhs trsl. 351).

anu + vyañjana

Anusaṃyāyati

to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (acc.) MN i.209 (Bhagavantaṃ ˚itvā) Ja iv.214 (v.l. anuyāyitvā). See also anuyāti and anusaññāti.

anu + saṃ + yāyati

Anusaṃvacchara

(adj.) yearly Dhp-a i.388 (nakkhattaṃ). Usually nt. ˚ṃ as adv. yearly, every year Ja i.68; Ja v.99. On use of anu in this combn. see anu A a.

anu + saṃv˚

Anusañcarati

to walk along, to go round about, to visit MN i.279; SN v.53, SN v.301; Ja i.202 Ja iii.502; Pv-a 279 (nagaraṃ) ■ pp. anusañcarita (q.v.).

anu + saṃ + carati

Anusañcarita

frequented, visited, resorted to Mil 387.

pp. of anusañcarati

Anusañceteti

to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pp 12.

anu + saṃ + ceteti

Anusaññāti

to go to, to visit, inspect, control ppr. med. ˚saññāyamāna Vin iii.43 (kammante); inf ˚saññātuṃ AN i.68. (janapade).

either anu + saṃ + jñā (jānāti) or (preferably) = anusaṃyāti as short form of anusaṃyāyati, like anuyāti → anuyāyati of anu + saṃ + , cf. Sk. anusaṃyāti in same meaning

Anusaṭa

sprinkled with (-˚), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma˚ magga = vippakiṇṇa Vv-a 36).

Sk. anusṛta, pp. of anu + sṛ;

Anusatthar

instructor, adviser Ja iv.178 (ācariya + ). Cp anusāsaka.

n. ag. to anu + sās, cf. Sk. anuśāsitṛ & P. satthar

Anusatthi

(f.) admonition, rule, instruction Ja i.241; Mil 98, Mil 172, Mil 186 (dhamma˚), 225, 227, 347.

Sk. anuśāsti, anu + śās, cp. anusāsana

Anusandati

to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at Mil 63 for anusandahati (anuravati + ; of sound) while at AN iv.47 the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati.

Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad

Anusandahati

to direct upon, to apply to AN iv.47 sq. (cittaṃ samāpattiyā; so to be read with v.l. for anusandati) Mil 63 (but here prob. to be read as anusandati, q.v.).

anu + saṃ + dhā, cf. Vedic abhi + saṃ + dhā

Anusandhanatā

(f.) application, adjusting Dhs 8 (cittassa).

= anusandhi

Anusandhi

(f.) connection, (logical) conclusion, application DN-a i.122 (where 3 kinds are enumd., viz. pucchā˚, ajjhāsayā˚, yathā˚; ); Ne 14 (pucchato; Hard., in Index “complete cessation”?!). Esp. freq in (Jātaka) phrase anusandhiṃ ghaṭeti “to form the connection”, to draw the conclusion, to show the application of the story or point out its maxim Ja i.106; Ja i.308; Dhp-a ii.40, Dhp-a ii.47; etc.

fr. anu + saṃ + dhā

Anusampavaṅkatā

(f.) disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin ii.88 (under anuvādâdhikaraṇa).

anu + saṃ + pavankatā; is reading correct?

Anusaya

(see Kvu trsl. 234 n. 2 and Cpd. 172 n. 2). Bent, bias proclivity, the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of the cause or direction of the bias. So Sn 14 = 369, 545; MN iii.31; SN iii.130, SN iv.33, SN v.28 SN v.236; AN i.44; AN ii.157; AN iii.74, AN iii.246, AN iii.443. Or in the triplet obstinacy, prejudice and bias (adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā ) SN ii.17; SN iii.10, SN iii.135, SN iii.161; AN v.iii. Occasionally a source of the bias is mentioned. Thus pride at SN i.188 SN ii.252 ff., 275; iii.80, 103, 169, 253; iv.41, 197; AN i.132 AN iv.70 doubt at MN i.486-ignorance lust and hatred at SN iv.205, MN iii.285. At DN iii.254, DN iii.282; SN v.60; and AN iv.9. we have a list of seven anusaya’s, the above five and delusion and craving for rebirth. Hence-forward these lists govern the connotation of the word; but it would be wrong to put that connotation back into the earlier passages. Later references are Pts i.26, Pts i.70 ff., 123 130, 195; ii.36, 84, 94, 158; Pp 21; Vb 340, Vb 383 Vb 356; Kv 405 ff. Dpvs i.42.

anu + śī, seti Sk. anuśaya has a diff. meaning

Anusayita

dormant, only in combn. dīgharatta˚; latent so long Thag 768; Snp 355 Snp 649. Cp. anusaya & anusayin.;

pp. of anuseti, anu + śī

Anusayin

(adj.) DN ii.283 (me dīgharatta˚), “for me, so long obsessed (with doubts)”. The reading is uncertain.

fr. anusaya

Anusarati

to follow, conform oneself to SN iv.303 (phalaṃ anusarissati BB, but balaṃ anupadassati SS perhaps to be preferred) ■ Caus. anusāreti to bring together with, to send up to or against Mil 36 (aññamaññaṃ a. anupeseti).

anu + sṛ;

Anusavati

at SN ii.54 (āsavā na a.; v.l. anusayanti) & iv. 188 (akusalā dhammā na a.; v.l. anusenti) should preferably be read anusayati: see anuseti 2.

Anusahagata

(adj.) having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of… SN iii.130; Kv 81, see aṇu˚.

Anusāyika

(adj.) attached to one, i.e. inherent, chronic (of disease) MN ii.70 (ābādha, v.l. BB anussāyika) Dhp-a i.431 (roga).

fr. anusaya

Anusāra

“going along with”, following, conformity. Only in obl. eases (-˚) anusārena (instr. in consequence of, in accordance with, according to Ja i.8; Pv-a 187 (tad), 227; and anusārato (abl.) id. Sdhp 91.

fr. anu + sṛ;

Anusārin

(-˚) (adj.) following, striving after, acting in accordance with, living up to or after Freq. in formula dhammānusārin saddhānusārin living in conformity with the Norm & the Faith DN iii.254; MN i.142, MN i.479; SN iii.225; SN v.200 sq.; AN i.74; AN iv.10; Pp 15 ■ Cp. also SN i.15 (bhavasota˚); iv.128 (id.); Ja vi.444 (paṇḍitassa˚ = veyyāvaccakara C.); Sdhp 528 (attha˚).

fr. anu + sarati

Anusāreti

see anusarati.

Anusāsaka

adviser, instructor, counsellor Ja ii.105; Mil 186, Mil 217, Mil 264. Cp. anusatthar.

fr. anusāsati

Anusāsati

1. to advise, admonish, instruct in or give advice upon (c. acc.) to exhort to Vin i.83; DN i.135; DN ii.154; Dhp 77, Dhp 159 (aññaṃ); Ja vi.368; cp. i.103; Pv ii.68; Pv-a 148 ■ grd. anusāsiya Vin i.59; and ˚sāsitabba Dhp-a iii.99 ■ Pass ˚sāsiyati Vin ii.200; Mil 186.

2. to rule, govern (acc.) ādminister to (dat.) SN i.236 = Snp 1002 (paṭhaviṃ dhammenam-anusāsati, of a Cakkavattin); Ja ii.2; Ja vi.517 (rajjassa rajjaṃ C., i.e. take care of) DN-a i.246 (read ˚sāsantena) Pv-a 161 (rajjaṃ) ■ pp. anusiṭṭha (q.v.); cp. anusatthar anusatthi & ovadati.;

Vedic anuśāsati, anu + sās

Anusāsana

(nt.) advice, instruction, admonition DN iii.107; AN i.292 (˚pāṭihāriya cp. anusāsanī); Mil 359.

Vedic anuśāsana, fr. anu + śās

Anusāsanī

(f.) instruction, teaching, commandment, order SN v.108; AN ii.147; AN iii.87 AN v.24 sq., 49, 338; Ja v.113; Thig 172, Thig 180; Pv iii.76 Thag-a 162; Vv-a 19, Vv-a 80, Vv-a 81.

-pāṭihāriya (anusāsani˚) the miracle of teaching, the wonder worked by the commandments (of the Buddha Vin ii.200; DN i.212, DN i.214; DN iii.220; AN i.170; AN v.327; Ja iii.323; Pts ii.227 sq.

fr. anusāsati, cp. anusāsana

Anusikkhati

to learn of somebody (gen.); to follow one’s example, to imitate Vin ii.201 (ppr. med. ˚amāna); SN i.235; AN iv.282, AN iv.286, AN iv.323; Snp 294 (vattaṃ, cp. RV iii.59, 2: vratena śikṣati), 934; Ja i.89; Ja ii.98; Ja iii.315; Ja v.334; Ja vi.62; Thag 963; Mil 61 ■ Caus anusikkhāpeti to teach [ = Sk anuśikṣayati] Mil 352.

Vedic anuśikṣati; anu + Desid. of śak

Anusikkhin

(adj.) studying, learning MN i.100; Dhp 226 (ahoratta˚ = divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna Dhp-a iii.324).

fr. anusikhati

Anusiṭṭha

(Vedic anuśiṣṭa, pp. of anusāsati] instructed, admonished, advised; ordered, commanded MN ii.96; Ja i.226; Pv ii.811; Mil 284, Mil 349.

Anusibbati

to interweave Vin iii.336 (introd. to Sam. Pās.).

anu + sibbati, siv to sew

Anusuṇāti

to hear; pret. anassuṃ [Sk. anvaśruvaṃ] I heard MN i.333.

anu + śru

Anusumbhati

to adorn, embellish, prepare Ja vi.76.

anu + sumbhati (sobhati); śubh or (Vedic) śumbh

Anusuyyaṃ

reading at Ja iii.27, see anasuyyaṃ.

cp. Sk. anasūyaṃ

Anusuyyaka

(adj.) not envious, not jealous Snp 325 (= usuyyāvigamena a. Snp-a 332); Ja ii.192 (v.l. anussuyyaka); v.112.

an + usuyyaka

Anuseṭṭhi

1. an under-seṭṭhi (banker, merchant) Ja v.384 (see anu B iii. a.).

2. in redupl. cpd seṭṭhānuseṭṭhi (see anu B iv) “bankers & lesser bankers” i.e. all kinds of well-to-do families Ja vi.331.

anu + seṭṭhi

Anuseti

to “lie down with”, i.e. (1) trs. to dwell on, harp on (an idea) SN ii.65; SN iii.36; SN iv.208.

2. (of the idea) to obsess, to fill the mind persistently, to lie dormant & be continually cropping up. MN i.40, MN i.108, MN i.433; SN ii.54 (so read with SS for anusavanti ) iv.188; AN i.283; AN iii.246 Pp 32, Pp 48 ■ pp. anusayita (q.v.).

anu + seti. cp. Sk. anuśayate or˚ śete, from śī

Anusocati

to mourn for, to bewail Snp 851 (atītaṃ na a.; cp. Nd i.222); Pv i.127; ii.68; Pv-a 95.

anu + socati

Anusocana

(nt.) bewailing, mourning Pv-a 65.

abstr. fr. anusocati

Anusota˚

in anusotaṃ (adv.) along the stream or current down-stream AN ii.12; Ja i.70 (opp. paṭisotaṃ against the stream); Pv-a 169 (Gangāya a. āgacchanto).

-gāmin “one who follows the stream”, i.e. giving way to ones inclinations, following ones will AN ii.5, AN ii.6 (opp paṭi˚); Sn. 319 (= sotaṃ anugacchanto Snp-a 330); Pp 62.

anu + sota, in ˚ṃ as adv. or acc. to expln. under anu A a.

Anussati

(f.) remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of subjects to be kept in mind comprises six anussati-ṭṭhānāni, viz. Buddha˚, Dhamma˚, Saṅgha˚ sīla˚, cāga˚, devatā˚; i.e. proper attention to the Buddha the Doctrines, the Church, to morality, charity, the gods Thus at DN iii.250, DN iii.280 (cp. AN i.211); AN iii.284, AN iii.312 sq. 452; v.329 sq.; Pts i.28. Expanded to 10 subjects (the above plus ānāpāna-sati, maraṇa-sati, kāyagatā-sati upasamānussati ) at AN i.30, AN i.42 (cp. Lal. Vist 34). For other references see D i.81; SN v.67 = Iti 107 (anussaraṇa at latter pass.); AN iii.284, AN iii.325, AN iii.452. Pts i.48, Pts i.95, Pts i.186 Pp 25, Pp 60; Dhs 14, Dhs 23, Dhs 1350 (anussati here to be corr to asati, see Dhs. trsl. 351); Sdhp. 225, 231, 482. See also anuttariya (anussat-ânuttariya).

Sk. anusmṛti, fr. anu + smṛ; cp. sati

Anussada

(adj.) [an + ussada without haughtiness Snp 624 (vv.ll. anusaddha & anussuda; Snp-a 467 expln. by taṇhā ussadâbhāva) = Dhp 400 (which pass. has anussuta; v.l K.B. anussada; Dhp-a iv.165 expls. with taṇhā-ussāvâbhāva vv.ll. ˚ussada˚); Iti 97 (vv.ll. anussata & anussara).;

Anussaraṇa

(nt.) remembrance, memory, recollection Iti 107 (= anussati at id. p. SN v.67) Pv-a 25, Pv-a 29.

abstr. to anussarati

Anussarati

to remember, recollect, have memory of (acc.), bear in mind; be aware of DN ii.8, DN ii.53, DN ii.54 (jātito etc.); SN iii.86 sq. (pubbenivāsaṃ) v.67 (dhammaṃ a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassaṃ) AN i.25, AN i.164 (pubbenivāsaṃ), 207 (Tathāgataṃ, Dhammaṃ etc.); iii.285 (id.), 323 (nivāsaṃ), 418; v.34, 38, 132 199, 336 (kalyāṇamitte); Iti 82 (dhammaṃ), 98 (pubbenivāsaṃ); Ja i.167; Ja ii.111; Dhp 364; Pv i.59; Pp 60; Sdhp 580, Sdhp 587; DN-a i.257; Kp-a 213; Dhp-a ii.84; Dhp-a iv.95; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 53, Pv-a 69, Pv-a 79, Pv-a 107 ■ pp. anussarita (see anussaritar)-Caus anussarāpeti to remind someone, to call to mind Ja ii.147.

Vedic anusmarati, anu + smṛ;

Anussaritar

one who recollects or remembers SN v.197, SN v.225 (saritar + ) AN v.25, AN v.28.

n. ag. to anussarita, pp. of anussarati

Anussava

hearsay, report, tradition MN i.520; MN ii.211; SN ii.115; SN iv.138; AN i.26; Ja i.158 (with ref. to part. kira = annussav’atthe nipāto; so also at Vv-a 322, cf. anussavana); ii.396, 430 (id.); iv.441; instr. ˚ena from hearsay, by report AN ii.191 (cf. itihītihaṃ).

anu + sava fr. śru, cp. Vedic śravas nt.

Anussavana

(nt.) = anussava Pv-a 103 (kira -saddo anussavane, from hearsay).

anu + savana fr. śru

Anussavika

(adj.) “belonging to hearsay”, traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from hearsay MN i.520; MN ii.211. Cp. anussutika.

fr. anussava

Anussāvaka

one who proclaims or announces, a speaker (of a kammavācā) Vin i.74.

fr. anussāveti

Anussāvana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) a proclamation Vin i.317, Vin i.340; Vin v.170, Vin v.186, Vin v.202 sq.

fr. anussāveti

Anussāvita

proclaimed, announced Vin i.103.

pp. of anussāveti

Anussāveti

to cause to be heard or sound; to proclaim utter, speak out Vin i.103 (˚ssāviyamāna ppr. Pass.) ii.48 (saddaṃ a.) ■ pp. anussāvita.

anu + sāveti, Caus. of śru, cp. B.Sk. anuśrāvayati “to proclaim aloud the guilt of a criminal” Avs i.102; Avs ii.182

Anussuka

(adj.) free from greed Dhp 199; cf. anussukin v.l. DN iii.47, also anissukin and apalāsin.

an + ussuka

Anussukita

Vv-a 74 & anussukin Pp 23 = anussuka.

an + ussuk˚

Anussuta1

(adj.) free from lust Dhp 400 (= ussāvâvena anussuta C.). See also anussada.

an + ussuta, ud + sṛ;

Anussuta2

heard of; only in cpd. ananussuta unheard of SN ii.9; Pp 14.

anu + suta, pp. of śru

Anussutika

(adj.) according to tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from hearsay DN-a i.106, DN-a i.107.

fr. anu + śru, cp. anussavika

Anussuyyaka

see anusuyyaka.

Anuhasati

to laugh at, to ridicule DN-a i.256.

anu + hasati

Anuhīrati

to be held up over, ppr. anuhīramāna DN ii.15 (vv.ll. v.l. anubhiram˚ glosses B. K. anudhāriyam˚, cp. Trenckner, Notes 79).

for ˚hariyati, anu + hṛ;

Anūna

(adj.) not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency Ja vi.273; Dpvs v.52; Mil 226; DN-a i.248 (+ paripūra, expld by anavaya). Anunaka = anuna

Vedic anūna, an + ūna

Anūnaka = anūna

Dpvs iv.34.

Anūnatā

(f.) completeness Cp iii.611.

abstr. fr. anūna

Anūpa

(adj.) watery, moist; watery land, lowland J. iv.358 (anopa T; anupa C. p. 359), 381 (˚khetta); Mil 129 (˚khetta).

Vedic anūpa, anu + ap: see āpa, orig. alongside of water

Anūpaghāta

not killing, not murdering. Dhp 185 (= anupahananañ c’eva anupaghātanañ ca Dhp-a iii.238).

metrically for anupa˚

Anūpadhika

for anu˚ in metre Snp 1057, see upadhi.

Anūpanāhin

(adj.) not bearing ill-will, not angry with Ja iv.463.

an + upanāhin, with ū metri causa

Anūpama

at Iti 122 is metric reading for anupama (see upama).

Anūpalitta

(adj.) free from taint, unstained, unsmeared Snp 211, Snp 392, Snp 468, Snp 790 Snp 845; Dhp 353; cf. Nd i.90 and Dhp-a iv.72.

an + upalitta, with ū in metre

Anūpavāda

not grumbling, not finding fault Dhp 185 (= anupavādanañ c’ eva anupavadāpanañ ca Dhp-a iii.238).

an + upavāda, with metrically lengthened u

Anūhata

(adj.) not rooted out, not removed or destroyed Thag 223 = Nd ii.974; Dhp 338 (= asamucchinna Dhp-a iv.48).

pp. of an + ūhaññati, ud + han

Aneka

(adj.) (usually ˚-) not one, i.e. many, various; countlcss, numberless Iti 99 (saṃvaṭṭakappā countless aeons); Snp 688 (˚sākhā); Dhp 153 (˚jātisāra); Ja iv.2 Ja vi.366.

-pariyāyena (instr.) in many ways Vin i.16; Snp p.15 -rūpa various, manifold Snp 1049, Snp 1079, Snp 1082; Nd ii.54 (= anekavidha). -vidha manifold Nd ii.54; DN-a i.103 -vihita various, manifold DN i.12, DN i.13, DN i.178; Iti 98; Pp 55; DN-a i.103 (= anekavidha).

an + eka

Anekaṃsā

(f.) doubt Nd ii.1.

an + ekaṃsā

Anekaṃsikatā

(f.) uncertainty, doubtfulness Mil 93.

abstr. fr. anekaṃsa + kata

Aneja

(adj.) free from desires or lust DN ii.157; Snp 920, Snp 1043, Snp 1101, Snp 1112; Iti 91 (opp. ejânuga Nd i.353 = Nd ii.55; Dhp 414 (= taṇhāya abhāvena Dhp-a iv.194), 422; Pv iv.135 (nittaṇha Pv-a 230).

an + ejā

Anedha

(adj.) without fuel Ja iv.26 (= anindhana).

an + edha

Aneḷa

(adj.) faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds. ˚gala free from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus expld. at DN-a i.282, viz. elagalana-virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning “having a pure or clear throat or, of vācā speech: “clearly enunciated” (thus Mrs. Rh. D at Kindred Sayings i.241) Vin i.197 = DN i.114 = SN i.189; AN ii.51, AN ii.97; AN iii.114, AN iii.195. Cp. also M Vastu iii. 322 ■ ˚mūga same as prec. “having a clear throat” i.e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled DN iii.265; Snp 70 (alālāmukha Snp-a 124), cp. Nd ii.259.

an + eḷa = ena, see neḷa & cp. BSk. eḍa (mūka); Vedic anena

Aneḷaka

(adj.) = aneḷa, pure, clear MN ii.5; Ja vi.529.

cp. BSk. aneḍaka, e.g. Avs. i.187, 243; Mvu i.339; Mvu iii.322

Anesanā

(f.) impropriety SN ii.194; Ja ii.86; Ja iv.381; Mil 343, Mil 401; DN-a i.169; Dhp-a iv.34; Sdhp 392, Sdhp 427.

an + esanā

Ano-

is a frequent form of compn. an-ava, see ava.

Anoka

(nt.) houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness SN v.24 = AN v.232 = Dhp 87 (okā anokaṃ āgamma). adj. homeless, free from attachment SN i.176; Dhp 87 (anālaya Dhp-a ii.162); Snp 966 (adj.; expld at Nd i.487 by abhisankhāra-sahagatassa viññāṇassa okāsaṃ na karoti & at Snp-a 573 by abhisankhāra-viññān;’ ādīnaṃ anokāsabhūta).

sārin living in a houseless state, fig. being free from worldly attachment SN iii.10 = Nd i.197; Snp 628 (= anālaya-cārin Snp-a 468); Ud 32; Dhp 404 (v.l. anokka˚) Dhp-a iv.174 (= anālaya -cārin); Mil 386.

an + oka

Anogha

in anogha-tiṇṇa see ogha. Anojaka = anoja

Anojaka = anojā

Vv 354 (= Vv-a 161, where classed with yodhikā bandhujīvakā).

Anojagghati

at DN i.91 is v.l. for anujagghati.

Anojā

(f.) a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers Ja vi.536 (korandaka + ); usually in cpd. anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. Ja i.9 (˚dāma a garland of a flowers); vi.227 (id.); Dhp-a ii.116 (˚cangoṭaka).

*Sk. anujā

Anottappa

(nt.) recklessness, hardness DN iii.212; Iti 34 (ahirika + ); Pp 20; Dhs 365. Cp. anottāpin. Anottapin & Anottappin;

an + ottappa

Anottāpin & Anottappin

(adj.) not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless DN iii.252, DN iii.282 (pp; ahirika); Snp 133 (p; ahirika + ); Iti 27, Iti 115 (anatāpin anottappin vv.ll. anottāpin); Pp 20, Pp 24.

fr. anottappa

Anodaka

(adj.) without water, dry Ja i.307; Dhp-a i.52; Sdhp 443.

an + udaka

Anodissaka

(adj.) unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. ˚vasena universally thoroughly (with ref. to mettā) Ja i.81; Ja ii.146; Vv-a 97 (in general; opp. odissaka-vasena ). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 n. 1.

an + odissa + ka

Anonamati

not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping Dhp-a ii.136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending DN ii.17 = iii. 143; anonami-daṇḍa (for anonamiya˚) an inflexible stick Mil 238 (anoṇami˚ T, but anonami˚ vv.ll., see Mil 427).

an + onamati

Anopa

see anūpa.

Anoma

(adj.) (only ˚-) not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds.

-guṇa supreme virtue DN-a i.288. -dassika of superior beauty Vv 207, Vv-a 103 (both as v.l.; T. anuma˚); Vv 437. -dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) Ja i.228. -nāma of perfect name SN i.33 (“by name the Peerless” Mrs. Rh. D.) 235; Snp 153, Snp 177 (cp. Snp-a 200). -nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427 (= paripuṇṇa-viriyatāya a. Vv-a 284) -pañña of lofty or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha Snp 343, Snp 352 (= mahāpañña Snp-a 347); Thig 522 (paripuṇṇa-pañña Thag-a 296), Dhp-a i.31. -vaṇṇa of excellent colour Snp 686; Ja vi.202. -viriya of supreme exertion or energy Snp 353.

an + oma

Anomajjati

to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattāni pāṇinā a. to rub over one’s limbs with the hand MN i.80, MN i.509; SN v.216.

anu + ava + majjati, mṛj

Anorapāra

(adj.) having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Mil 319.

an + ora + pāra

Anoramati

not to stop, to continue Ja iii.487; Dhp-a iii.9 (ger. ˚itvā continually).

an + ava + ram

Anovassa

(nt.) absence of rain, drought Ja v.317 (v.l. BB for anvāvassa T.; q.v.).

an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarṣana

Anovassaka

(adj.) sheltered from the rain, dry Vin ii.211; Vin iv.272; Ja i.172; Ja ii.50; Ja iii.73; Dhp-a ii.263; Thag-a 188.

an + ovassaka

Anosita

(adj.) not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Snp 937 (= anajjhositaṃ Nd i.441 jarādīhi anajjhāvutthaṃ ṭhānaṃ Snp-a 566).

an + ava + sita, pp. of

Anta1

1. end, finish, goal SN iv.368 (of Nibbāna); Snp 467; Ja ii.159. antaṃ karoti to make an end (of) Snp 283, Snp 512; Dhp 275, cp. antakara, ˚kiriyā ■ loc. ante at the end of, immediately after Ja i.203 (vijay˚).

2. limit, border edge Vin i.47; Dhp 305 (van˚); Ja iii.188.

3. side see ekamantaṃ (on one side, aside).

4. opposite side opposite, counterpart; pl. parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as “constituent, principle” (in tayo & cattāro antā; or does it belong to anta2 2. in this meaning Cp. ekantaṃ extremely, under anta2): dve antā (two extremes) Vin i.10; SN ii.17; SN iii.135. ubho antā (both sides) Vin i.10; SN ii.17; Ja i.8; Nd i.109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd i.52. As tayo antā or principles(?) viz. sakkāya, s ■ samudaya, s ■ nirodha DN iii.216, cp. AN iii.401; as cattāro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s ■ nirodhagāmini-paṭipadā at SN iii.157. Interpreted by Morris as “goal” (JP T S. 1894, 70) ■ Often pleonastically, to be expld as a “pars pro toto” figure, like kammanta (q.v.) the end of the work, i.e. the whole work (cp. E sea-side, country-side); vananta the border of the wood the woods Dhp 305; Pv ii.310 (expld by vana Pv-a 86 same use in BSk., vanânta e.g. at Jtm vi.21; cp. also grāmânta Avs. i.210); suttanta (q.v.), etc. Cp. ākāsanta Ja vi.89 & the pleonastic use of patha.; -ananta (n.) no end, infinitude; (adj.) endless, corresponds either to Sk anta or antya, see anta2.

-ānanta end & no end, or finite and endless, DN i.22; DN-a i.115. -ānantika (holding views of, or talking about finiteness and infinitude DN i.22 (see expln. at DN-a i.115) SN iii.214, SN iii.258 sq.; Pts i.155. -kara putting an end to (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhass’a (of the Buddha) MN i.48, MN i.531; AN ii.2; AN iii.400 sq.; Thag 195; Iti 18; Snp 32, Snp 337, Snp 539; Pp 71. In other combn. AN ii.163 (vijjāy’); Snp 1148 (pañhān’) ■ -kiriyā putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with ref. to dukkha SN iv.93; lt 89; Snp 454, Snp 725; Dhp-a iv.45 -gata = antagū Nd ii.436 (+ koṭigata). -gāhikā (f.), viz diṭṭhi, is an attribute of micchādiṭṭhi, i.e. heretical doctrine The meaning of anta in this combn. is not quite clear: either “holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)” viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo antā (thus Morris JP T S. 1884, 70), or “taking extreme sides, i.e. extremist”, or “wrong, opposite (= antya, see anta2) (thus Kern, Toev. s. v.) Vin i.172; DN iii.45, DN iii.48 (an˚) SN i.154; AN i.154; AN ii.240; AN iii.130; Pts i.151 sq. -gū one who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) AN iv.254, AN iv.258, AN iv.262; Snp 401 (= vaṭṭadukkhassa antagata); 539. -ruddhi at Ja vi.8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?). -vaṭṭi rimmed circumference Ja iii.159 -saññin being conscious of an end (of the world) DN i.22 cp. DN-a i.115.

Vedic anta; Goth. andeis = Ohg. anti = E. end; cp. also Lat. antiae forehead (: E. antler), and the prep anti opposite, antika near = Lat. ante; Gr. ἀντί & α ̓́ντα opposite; Goth., Ags. and; Ger. ant-; orig. the opposite (i.e. what stands against or faces the starting-point)

Anta2

(adj.) 1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in neg. ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opp. antavant ); which may be taken as equal to anta1 (corresp. with Sk. anta (adj.) or antya; also in doublet anañca, see ākās’ânañca and viññāṇ’ânañca); DN i.23, DN i.34 = DN iii.224, DN iii.262 sq.; Snp 468 (˚pañña); Dhp 179, Dhp 180 (˚gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp Dhp-a iii.197); Ja i.178.

2. extreme, last, worst Ja ii.440 (C. hīna, lāmaka); see also anta1 4 ■ acc. as adv. in ekantaṃ extremely, very much, “utterly” Dhp 228 etc See eka.

Vedic antya

Anta3

(nt.) the lower intestine, bowels mesentery Iti 89; Ja i.66, Ja i.260 (˚vaddhi-maṃsa etc.); Vism 258; Dhp-a i.80.

-gaṇṭhi twisting of the bowels, lit. “a knot in the intestines” Vin i.275 (˚ābādha). -guṇa [see guṇa2 = gula1 the intestinal tract, the bowels SN ii.270; AN iv.132; Kp iii. = Mil 26; Vism 42; Kp-a 57. -mukha the anus Ja iv.402. -vaṭṭi = ˚guṇa Vism 258.

Vedic āntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus, Gr. ε ̓́ντερα intestines

Antaka

being at the end, or making an end, Ep. of Death or Māra Vin i.21; SN i.72; Thig 59 (expld by Thag-a 65 as lāmaka va Māra, thus taken anta2); Dhp 48 (= maraṇa-sankhāto antako Dhp-a ii.366) 288 (= maraṇa Dhp-a iii.434).

Vedic antaka

Antamaso

(adv.) even Vin iii.260; Vin iv.123; DN i.168; MN iii.127; AN v.195; Ja ii.129; DN-a i.170; Snp-a 35; Vv-a 155.

orig. abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaśah; cp. BSk. antaśah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning (“even”) Avs. i.314; Divy 161

Antara

(adj.). Primary meanings are “inside” and “in between” as adj. “inner”; in prep. use & in cpds. “inside, in between”. Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i.e. having a space between, different from; thus nt. antaraṃ difference.

I. (Adj ■ n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside Iti 83 (tayo antarā malā three inward stains); esp. as-˚ in cpds. āmis˚; with greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin i.303 dos˚; with anger inside, i.e. angry Vin ii.249; DN iii.237; MN i.123; Pv-a 78 (so read for des˚). Abl. antarato from within Iti 83. (b) in between, distant; dvādasa yojan antaraṃ ṭhānaṃ Pv-a 139 Pv-a 139.

2. In noun-function (nt.): (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 361 (pītantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = pītavaṇṇa uttariya Vv-a 116); Dāvs i.10 (dīp’ antara-vāsin living on the island) Dhp-a i.358 (kaṇṇa-chidd˚ the inside of the ear; Vv-a 50 (kacch˚ inner room or apartment). Therefore also “space in between”, break Ja v.352 (= chidda C.), & obstacle, hindrance, i. g. what stands in between: see cpds. and antara-dhāyati (for antaraṃ dhāyati) ■ (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i.e. occasion. As; interval in Buddhantaraṃ the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 191 etc. As time: Iti 121 (etasmiṃ antare in that time or at this occasion) Pv i.1011 (dīghaṃ antaraṃ = dīghaṃ kālaṃ Pv-a 52) Pv-a 5 (etasmiṃ antare at this time, just then). As occasion: Ja v.287; Pp 55 (eḷaka-m-antaraṃ occasion of getting rain). SN i.20, quoted DN-a i.34, (mañ ca tañ ca kiṃ antaraṃ what is there between me and you?) C. expls. kiṃ kāraṇā Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln. p. 256 “of me it is and thee (this talk)-now why is this”; Ja vi.8 (assa antaraṃ na passiṃsu they did not see a diff. in him).

3. Phrases antaraṃ karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intrs.), to hold aloof, lit. “to make a space in between” MN iii.14; J. iv.2 (˚katvā leaving behind); Pp A 231 (ummāraṃ a. katvā staying away from a threshold) also adverbially: dasa yojanāni a. katvā at a distance of 10 y. Pv-a 139 ■ (b.) to remove, destroy Ja vi.56 (v.l. BB. antarāyaṃ karoti).

II. In prep. use (˚-) with acc. (direction) or loc (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp III. use of cases). (a.) w. acc.: antaragharaṃ paviṭṭha gone into the house Mil 11 ■ (b.) w. loc.: antaraghare nisīdanti (inside the house) Vin ii.213; ˚dīpake in the centre of the island Ja i.240; ˚dvāre in the door Ja v.231; ˚magge on the road (cp. antarāmagge) Pv-a 109 ˚bhatte in phrase ekasmiṃ yeva a. during one meal Ja i.19; Dhp-a i.249; ˚bhattasmiṃ id. Dhp-a iv.12; ˚vīthiyan in the middle of the road Pv-a 96. ˚satthīsu between the thighs Vin ii.161 (has antarā satthīnaṃ) = Ja i.218.

III. Adverbial use of cases, instr. antarena in between DN i.56; SN iv.59, SN iv.73; Ja i.393; Pv-a 13 (kāl˚ in a little while, na kālantarena ib. 19). Often in combn. antarantarena (c. gen.) right in between (lit. in between the space of) Dhp-a i.63, Dhp-a i.358 ■ loc. antare in, inside of, in between (-˚ or c. gen. Kp-a 81 (sutt˚ in the Sutta); Dhp-a iii.416 (mama a.); Pv-a 56, Pv-a 63 (rukkh˚). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. gen. Kp-a 57; Dhp-a i.59 (vanasaṇḍassa a.) ■ abl. antarā (see also sep. article of antarā) in combn. antarantarā from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Snp p.107; Dhp-a ii.86; Dhp-a iv.191; Pv-a 272.

IV. anantara (adj.) having or leaving nothing in between i.e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining Ja iv.139; Mil 382 (solid; Dhp-a i.397; Pv-a 63 (tadantaraṃ immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), 97 (next in caste). See also abbhantara.

-atīta gone past in the meantime Ja ii.243. -kappa an intermediary kappa (q.v.) DN i.54. -kāraṇa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pp A 231 -cakka “the intermediate round”, i.e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the compass Mil 178. -cara one who goes in between or inside, i.e. a robber SN iv.173. -bāhira (adj.) inside & outside Ja i.125 -bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara-raṭṭha) Vin iii.47 -raṭṭha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince Ja v.135 -vāsa an interregnum Dpvs v.80. -vāsaka “inner or intermediate garment”, one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga & a.) Vin i.94 Vin i.289; Vin ii.272. Cf. next. -sāṭaka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarīya id.], under garment, i.e. the one between the outer one & the body Vv-a 166 (q.v.).;

Vedic antara, cp. Gr. ε ̓́ντερα = Sk. antra (see anta3), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante anto

Antaraṃsa

“in between the shoulders”, i.e. the chest Ja v.173 = Ja vi.171 (phrase lohitakkho vihat’ antaraṃso ).

B.Sk. antarâṃsa; antara + aṃsa

Antaraṭṭhaka

(adj.) only in phrases rattisu antaraṭṭhakāsu and antaraṭṭhake hima-pātasamaye (in which antara functions as prep. c. loc., according to antara II. b.) i.e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i.e. the eighth day before & after the full moon: see aṭṭhaka;2) First phrase at Vin i.31, Vin i.288; Vin iii.31; second at MN i.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta-raṭṭhaka) AN i.136 (in nom.); Ja i.390; Mil 396.

antara + aṭṭhaka

Antaradhāna

(nt.) disappearance AN i.58 (saddhammassa); ii.147; iii.176 sq.; Mil 133; Dhs 645 Dhs 738, Dhs 871. Cp. ˚dhāyana.

fr. antaradhāyati

Antaradhāyati

to disappear Snp 449 (˚dhāyatha 3rd sg. med.); Vv 8128 (id.); Ja i.119 = Dhp-a i.248; Dhp-a iv.191 (ppr. ˚dhāyamāna & aor. dhāyi) Pv-a 152, Pv-a 217, (˚dhāyi), 245; Vv-a 48 ■ ppr. antarahita (q.v.) ■ Caus. antaradhāpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy Ja i.147; Ja ii.415; Pv-a 123.

antara + dhāyati

Antaradhāyana

(nt.) disappearance Dhp-a iv.191. (v.l. ˚adhāna).

fr. antaradhāyati

Antarayati

to go or step in between, ger. antaritvā (= antarayitvā) Ja i.218.

cp. denom. fr. antara

Antarahita

(adj.) 1. disappeared, gone, left DN i.222. MN i.487. Mil 18. Pv-a 245.

2 in phrase anantarahitāya bhūmiyā (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i.e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin i.47; Vin ii.209; MN ii.57.

pp. of antaradhāyati

Antarā

(adv.) prep. (c. gen. acc. or loc.), pref. (˚-) and adv. “in between” (of space & time), midway, inside; during meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term see DA i.34 sq ■ (1). (prep.) c. acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B.Sk. antarā ca Divy 94 etc.) DN i.1 (antarā ca Rājagahaṃ antarā ca Nāḷandaṃ between R. and N.) ■ c. gen. & loc. Vin ii.161 (satthīnaṃ between the thighs, where id. p. at Ja i.218 has antara-satthīsu); AN ii.245 (satthīnaṃ. but v.l. satthimhi) ■ (2) (adv.) meanwhile Snp 291, Snp 694; Iti 85; Dhp 237 ■ occasionally Mil 251 ■ (3). (pref.) see cpds.

-kathā “in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation DN ii.1, DN ii.8, DN ii.9; SN i.79; SN iv.281; AN iii.167; Snp p.115; DN-a i.49 and freq. passim. -gacchati to come in between, to prevent Ja vi.295. -parinibbāyin an Anāgāmin who passes away in the middle of his term of life in some particular heaven DN iii.237; AN i.233; Pp 16 -magge (loc.) on the road, on the way Ja i.253; Mil 16; Dhp-a ii.21; Dhp-a iii.337; Pv-a 151, Pv-a 258, Pv-a 269, Pv-a 273 (cp. antara˚) -maraṇa premature death Dhp-a i.409; Pv-a 136. -muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167.

abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antarā.

Antarāpaṇa

(nt.) place where the trading goes on, bazaar Ja i.55; Ja vi.52; Mil 1, Mil 330; Dhp-a i.181.

antarā + paṇa “in between the shopping or trading”

Antarāya1

obstacle, hindrance, impediment to (-˚); prevention, bar danger, accident to (-). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enumd. at Vin i.112, Vin i.169 etc., viz. rāja˚, cora˚ aggi˚, udaka˚, manussa˚, amanussa˚, vāḷa˚, siriṃsapa˚ jīvita˚, brahmacariya˚. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz rājā-caura-manuṣy-amanuṣya-vyāḍ-agny-udakaṃ ■ DN i.3 DN i.25, DN i.26; AN iii.243, AN iii.306; AN iv.320; Snp 691, Snp 692; Dhp 286 (= jīvit˚ Dhp-a iii.431); Ja i.62, Ja i.128; Kp-a 181; Dhp-a ii.52; Vv-a 1 = Pv-a 1 (hat˚ removing the obstacles -antarāyaṃ karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back prevent, destroy Vin i.15; Ja vi.171; Vism 120; Pv-a 20.

-kara one who causes impediments or bars the way an obstructor DN i.227; SN i.34; AN i.161; Pv iv.322.

antara + aya from i, lit. “coming in between”

Antarāya2

(adv.) [dat. of antara or formation fr. antara + ger. of i ?) in the meantime Snp 1120 (cp Nd ii.58) antarā Snp-a 603.

Antarāyika

(adj.) causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin i.94 = Vin ii.272; MN i.130; SN ii.226 Thag-a 288.

fr. antarāya

Antarāyikin

(adj.-n.) one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin iv.280 (an˚ = asati antarāye).

cp. antarāyika

Antarāḷa

(nt.) interior, interval Dāvs i.52; Dāvs iii.53 (nabh˚).

Sk antarāla

Antarika

(adj.) “being in between”, i.e. - 1. intermediate, next, following: see an˚.

2. distant lying in between Pv-a 173 (aneka-yojan˚ ṭhāna). See also f. antarikā.

3. inside: see antarikā. -anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin ii.165, Vin ii.212 (ān˚); iv.234.

fr. antara

Antarikā

(f.) “what lies in between or near”, i.e.

1. the inside of Vin iv.272 (bhājan˚). 2. the neighbourhood, region of (-˚), sphere, compass Vin iii.39 (ur˚, angul˚); Ja i.265 (yakkhassa sīm˚ inside the yṡ sphere of influence).

3. interval, interstice Vin ii.116 (sutt˚ in lace); AN i.124 (vijj˚ the interval of lightning).

abstr. fr. antarika

Antalikkha

(nt.) the atmosphere or air DN ii.15; AN iii.239; AN iv.199; Snp 222, Snp 688; Dhp 127; Mil 150 = Pv-a 104; Pv i.31 (= vehāyasa-saññita a Pv-a 14); Kp-a 166.

-ga going through the air AN i.215. -cara walking through the air Vin i.21; DN i.17; SN i.111; Ja v.267; DN-a i.110.

Vedic antarikṣa = antari-kṣa (kṣi ), lit. situated in between sky and earth

Antavant

(ādj.) having an end, finite DN i.22, DN i.31, DN i.187; Pts i.151 sq.; 157; Dhs 1099, Dhs 1117, Dhs 1175; Mil 145. -anantavant endless, infinite AN v.193 (loka) See also loka.

anta1 + ˚vant

Anti

(indecl.) adv. & prep. c. gen.: opposite near Ja v.399 (tav’ antiṃ āgatā, read as tav’ anti-m-āgatā C. santikaṃ), 400, 404; vi.565 (sāmikass’ anti = antike C.)-Cp. antika.

Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. ἀντί, Goth. and; Ags. and-, Ger. ant-, ent-

Antika

(adj.-n.)

1. near Kp-a 217; nt. neighbourhood Kp viii.1. (odak˚); Ja vi.565 (antike loc. anti near).

2. [der fr. anta = Sk. antya] being at the end, final, finished, over SN i.130 (purisā etad-antikā, v.l. SS antiyā: men are (to me) at the end for that, i.e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons.

der fr. anti

Antima

(adj.) last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation thus in combn. with deha & sarīra;, the last body) DN ii.15; Dhp 351; Iti 50 (antimaṃ dehaṃ dhāreti), 53 (id.); Vv 512 Snp 478 (sarīraṃ antimaṃ dhāreti) 502; Mil 122, Mil 148; Vv-a 106 (sarīr’ antima-dhārin); Sdhp 278.

-dehadhara one who wears his last body Iti 101 (dhāra T, ˚dhara v.l.); Vv-a 163. -dhārin = prec. SN i.14, SN i.53 (+ khīṇāsava); ii.278; Iti 32, Iti 40; Snp 471. -vatthu “the last thing”, i.e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin i.121, Vin i.135, Vin i.167, Vin i.320. -sarīra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth SN i.210 (Buddho a˚-sarīro); AN ii.37; Snp 624; Dhp 352, Dhp 400; Dhp-a iv.166 (= koṭiyaṃ ṭhito attabhāvo).

Cp. superl. of anta

Ante˚

(pref.) near, inside, within; only in foll. cpds.: ˚pura (nt. “inner town”, the king’s palace, esp. its inner apartments i.e. harem [Sk. antaḥpura, cp. also P. antopura] Vin i.75, Vin i.269; AN v.81; Ja ii.125; Ja iv.472; Mil 1; Pv-a 23 Pv-a 81, Pv-a 280; ˚purikā harem woman Dhs-a 403; ˚vāsika one who lives in, i.e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin i.60; Vin iii.25; SN i.180; SN iv.136; Ja i.166; Ja ii.278; Ja iii.83, Ja iii.463; Pv-a 12; Vv-a 138; ˚vāsin ˚vāsika Vin iii.66; DN i.1, DN i.45, DN i.74, DN i.78, DN i.88, DN i.108, DN i.157; MN iii.116; DN-a i.36.

Sk. antaḥ, with change of-aḥ to-e, instead of the usual-o, prob. through interpreting it as loc. of anta

Anto

(indecl.) prep. inside, either c. acc. denoting direction = into, or c. loc. denoting place where = in. As prefix (˚-) in, within, inside, inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep c. acc. anto nivesanaṃ gata gone into the house Ja i.158 anto jālaṃ pavisati go into the net Dhp-a iii.175; anto gāmaṃ pavisati to go into the village Dhp-a ii.273; anto nagaraṃ pavisati Dhp-a ii.89; Pv-a 47 ■ (2) c. loc. anto gabbhe Ja ii.182; gāme Dhp-a ii.52; gehe Dhp-a ii.84 nadiyaṃ Ja vi.278; nivesane Ja ii.323; vasse in the rainy season Ja iv.242; vimānasmiṃ Pv i.101; sattāhe inside of a week Pv-a 55.

-koṭisanthāra “house of the Golden Pavement” Ja iv.113 -gadha (˚gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase ˚hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity Pv-a 10; Vv-a 12 -jana “the inside people”, i.e. people belonging to the house, the family (= Lat. familia) DN iii.61 (opp. to servants); AN i.152; Ja vi.301; DN-a i.300. -jāla the inside of the net, the net Dhp-a iv.41. -jālikata “in-netted”, gone into the net DN i.45; DN-a i.127. -nijjhāna inner conflagration Pv-a 18. -nimugga altogether immersed DN i.75; AN iii.26. -parisoka inner grief Pts i.38. -pura = antepura Ja i.262. -mano “turning ones mind inside”, thoughtful melancholy Vin iii.19. -bhavika being inside Mil 95 -rukkhatā being among trees Ja i.7. -vasati to inhabit live within SN iv.136. -vaḷañjanaka (parijana) indoorpeople Ja v.118. -vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval of the r. s.) Vv-a 66. -vihāra the inside of the V. Dhp-a i.50 (˚âbhimukhī turning towards etc.), -samorodha barricading within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta˚, cp. Dhs trsl. 311). -soka inner grief Pts i.38.

Sk. antaḥ; Av antarə Lat. inter, Oir. etar between, Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) inner, inside

Andu

a chain, fetter Vin i.108 = Vin iii.249 (tiṇ˚); DN i.245; Ja i.21 (˚ghara prisonhouse); Dhp-a iv.54 (˚bandhana).

cp. Sk. andu, andū & anduka

Andha

(adj.) 1. (lit.) blind, blinded blindfolded Ja i.216 (dhūm˚); Pv iv.148; Pv-a 3 ■ dark dull, blinding MN iii.151 (˚andhaṃ adv. dulled); Snp 669 (Ep. of timisa, like Vedic andhaṃ tamaḥ); Dhp-a ii.49 (˚vana dark forest).

2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing DN i.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (˚veṇi, reading & meaning uncertain); AN i.128; Thig 394 (= bāla Thag-a 258). See cpds. ˚karaṇa, ˚kāra, ˚bāla ˚bhūta.

-ākula blinded, foolish Vv 849 (= paññācakkhuno abhāvena Vv-a 337). -karaṇa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (fig.), confusing Iti 82 (+ acakkhukaraṇa) Mil 113 (pañha, + gambhīra). -kāra blindness (lit. fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin i.16; DN ii.12; AN i.56; AN ii.54; AN iii.233; Ja iii.188; Thag 1034; Dhp 146; Snp 763; Vv 214 (= avijj˚ Vv-a 106); Pp 30; Dhs 617; DN-a i.228; Vv-a 51, Vv-a 53, Vv-a 116, Vv-a 161; Pv-a 6; Sdhp 14, Sdhp 280 -tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S; v.443; Iti 84 (v.l. T. andhaṃ tamaṃ); Ja vi.247. -bāla blinded by folly, foolish dull of mind, silly Ja i.246, Ja i.262; Ja vi.337; Dhp-a ii.43, Dhp-a ii.89 Dhp-a iii.179; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 264. -bhūta blinded (fig.) mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant SN iv.21; AN ii.72; Ja vi.139 (spelled ˚būta); Dhp 59, Dhp 174 (= paññā-cakkhuno abhāvena Dhp-a iii.175). -vesa “blind form”, disguise Ja iii.418.

Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.), other etym. doubtful

Andhaka

“blind fly”, i.e. dark or yellow fly or gad-fly Snp 20 (= kāṇa-makkhikānaṃ adhivacanaṃ Snp-a 33).

fr. andha

Anna

(nt.) “eating”, food, esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṃsa (rice gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd i.372 = Nd i.495. Anna is spelt aṇṇa in combns apar’ aṇṇa and pubb’ aṇṇa. Under dhañña (Nd ii.314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubb’ aṇṇaṃ: sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu varaka, kudrūsaka) and boiled, prepared food (apar’ aṇṇaṃ sūpeyya curry). Snp-a 378 (on Snp 403) expls. anna by yāgubhattâdi ■ DN i.7; AN i.107, AN i.132; AN ii.70, AN ii.85, AN ii.203; Snp 82, Snp 240, Snp 403, Snp 924; Ja iii.190; Pp 51; Sdhp 106, Sdhp 214.

-āpa food & water Sdhp 100.; -da giving food Snp 297 -pāna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Snp 485, Snp 487; Pv i.52, 82; Kp-a 207, Kp-a 209; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 8 Pv-a 30, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 43.

Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat

Annaya

in dur˚ see anvaya.

Anvakāsi

3rd sg. aor. of anukassati 2: drew out, removed, threw down Thag 869 (= khipi, chaḍḍesi C.).

Anvakkhara

(adj.) “according to the syltable”, syll. after syll., also a mode of reciting by syllables Vin iv.15, cp. 355. Cp. anupadaṃ.

anu + akkhara

Anvagā

3rd sg. aor. of anugacchati Mvu 7, Mvu 10. Also in assim. form annagā Ja v.258.

Anvagū

3rd pl. aor. of anugacchati SN i.39; Snp 586.

Anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ

(adv.) every fortnight, twice a month MN ii.8; Vin iv.315 (= anuposathikaṃ) Dhp-a i.162; Dhp-a ii.25.

anu + aḍḍha + māsa

Anvattha

(adj.) according to the sense, answering to the matter, having scnse Thag-a 6 (˚saññābhāva).

anu + attha

Anvadeva

(adv.) behind, after, later DN i.172; MN iii.172; SN v.1 (spelt anudeva); AN i.11; v. 214; Iti 34.

anva-d-eva with euphonic d.; like sammad-eva corresponding to Sk. anvag-eva

Anvaya

(n ■ adj.) 1. (n.) conformity, accordance DN ii.83 = DN iii.100; MN i.69 (dhamm˚ logical conclusion of) SN ii.58; DN iii.226 (anvaye ñāṇaṃ); Pv ii.113 (tassa kammassa anvāya, v.l. BB anvaya & anvāya; accordingly according to = paccayā Pv-a 147); Pv-a 228 (anvayato adv. in accordance).

2. (adj.) following, having the same course, behaving according to, consequential, in conformity with (-˚) DN i.46 (tad˚); MN i.238 (kāyo citt acting in conformity to the mind, obeying the mind) Snp 254 (an˚ inconsistent); Iti 79 (tass˚) ■ dur˚ spelt durannaya conforming with difficulty, hard to manage or to find out Dhp 92 (gati = na sakkā paññāpetuṃ Dhp-a ii.173); Snp 243, Snp 251 (= duviññāpaya Snp-a 287 dunneyya ibid. 293).

Vedic anvaya in diff. meaning; fr. anu + i, see anveti & anvāya

Anvayatā

(f.) conformity, accordance MN i.500 (kāy˚ giving in to the body).

abstr. to anvaya

Anvahaṃ

(adv.) every day, daily Dāvs iv.8.

anu + aha

Anvāgacchati

1. to go along after, to follow, run after, pursue; aor. anvāgacchi Pv. iv.56 (= anubandhi Pv-a 260).

2. to come back again Ja i.454 (ger. ˚gantvāna) ■ pp. anvāgata (q.v.).

anu + ā + gacchati

Anvāgata

having pursued, attained; endowed with Thag 63; Ja iv.385; Ja v.4.

pp. of anvāgacchati

Anvādisati

to advise, dedicate, assign; imper. ˚disāhi Pv ii.26 (= uddissa dehi Pv-a 80); iii.28 (= ādisa Pv-a 181).

anu + ā + disati

Anvādhika

(adj.) a tailoring term. Only at Vin i.297. Rendered (Vinaya Texts ii.232) by ʻhalf and halfʼ; that is a patchwork, half of new material half of old. Bdhgh’s note (see the text, p. 392) adds that the new material must be cut up.

derivation uncertain

Anvāmaddati

to squeeze, wring Ja iii.481 (galakaṃ anvāmaddi wrung his neck; vv.ll. anvānumaṭṭi & anvāvamaddi; C. gīvaṃ maddi).

anu + ā + maddati

Anvāya

undergoing, experiencing, attaining; as prep. (c. acc.) in consequence of, through after DN i.13 (ātappaṃ by means of self-sacrifice), 97 (saṃvāsaṃ as a result of their cohabitation); Ja i.56 (buddhiṃ) 127 (piyasaṃvāsaṃ), 148 (gabbhaparipākaṃ). Often in phrase vuddhiṃ anvāya growing up, e.g. Ja i.278; iii. 126; Dhp-a ii.87.

ger. of anveti; cp. anvaya

Anvāyika

(adj.-n.) following; one who follows, a companion DN iii.169; Nd ii.59; Ja iii.348.

fr. anvāya

Anvārohati

to go up to, visit, ascend Ja iv.465 (aor. anvāruhi).

anu + ā + rohati

Anvāvassa

at Ja v.317 should be read with v.l. BB as anovassa absence of rain.

Anvāviṭṭha

possessed (by evil spirits) SN i.114.

pp. of anvāvisati

Anvāvisati

to go into, to take possession of, to visit MN i.326; SN i.67; Mil 156 ■ pp. anvāviṭṭha (q.v.). Cp. adhimuccati.

anu + ā + visati

Anvāsatta

clung on to, befallen by (instr.), attached to AN iv.356 (v.l. anvāhata), cp. Ud 35 (anvāsanna q.v.) See also foll.

pp. of anu + ā + sañj, cp. anusatta = Sk. anusakta

Anvāsattatā

(f.) being attacked by, falling a prey to (instr.), attachment to Dhp-a i.287 (in same context as anvāsatta AN iv.356 & anvāsanna Ud 35).;

abstr. fr. anvāsatta

Anvāsanna

endowed with, possessed of, attacked by, Ud 35 (doubtfull; v.l. ajjhāpanna) = AN iv.356 which has anvāsatta.

pp. of anu + ā + sad

Anvāssavati

to stream into, to attack, befall DN i.70; AN iii.99; Pp 20, Pp 58.

anu + ā + savati, sru

Anvāhata

struck, beaten; perplexed Dhp 39 (˚cetasa).

pp. of anu + ā + han

Anvāhiṇḍati

to wander to (acc.) AN iv.374, AN iv.376 [BSk. same, e.g. Divy 68 etc.].

anu + ā + hiṇḍati

Anveti

to follow, approach, go with Snp 1103 (= anugacchati anvāyiko hoti Nd ii.59); Dhp 1 (= kāyikaṃ… dukkhaṃ anugacchati Dhp-a i.24), 2, 71 124; perhaps at Pv ii.620 (with v.l. BB at Pv-a 99) for anvesi (see anvesati; expld. by anudesi = was anxious for, helped, instructed).

cp. anu + eti, from i

Anvesa

seeking, searching, investigation, MN i.140 (˚ṃ n’ âdhigacchanti do not find).

from next

Anvesati

to look, for search, seek SN i.112 (ppr. anvesaṃ = pariyesamāna C.); Cp iii.117 (ppr. anvesanto) ■ aor. anvesi [Sk. anveṣi fr. icchati] Pv ii.620 (? perhaps better with v.l. Pv-a 99 as anventi of anveti).

anu + esati

Anvesin

(adj.) striving after, seeking, wishing for Snp 965 (kusala˚).

anu-esin

Anha

see pubbanha, majjhanha, sāyanha. Cp. aha.

Vedic ahan

Apa˚

Well-defined directional prefix, meaning “away from, off” Usually as base-prefix (except with ā), & very seldom in comp;n. with other modifying prefixes (like sam, abhi etc.). 1. apa = Vedic apa (Idg. *apo): apeti to go away = Gr. α ̓́πειμι, Lat. abeo, Goth. afiddja; apeta gone away rid; ˚kaḍḍhati to draw away, remove; ˚kamati walk away ˚gacchati go away; ˚nidhāti put away (= ἀποτιχημι abdo); ˚nudati push away; ˚neti lead away; ˚vattati turn away (= āverto); ˚sakkati step aside; ˚harati take away. 2. apa = Vedic ava (Idg. *aue; see ava for details) There exists a widespread confusion between the two preps. apa & ava, favoured both by semantic (apa = away, ava = down, cp. E. off) & phonetic affinity (p softened to b, esp. in BB Mss., & then to v, as b → v is frequent, e.g. bya˚ → vya˚ etc.). Thus we find in Pāli apa where Vedic and later literary Sk. have ava in the foll. instances: apakanti, ˚kassati, ˚kirati, ˚gata, ˚cāra ˚jhāyati, ˚thaṭa, ˚dāna, ˚dhāreti, ˚nata, ˚nāmeti, ˚nīta ˚lekhana, ˚loketi, ˚vadati.;

Vedic apa; Idg. *apo = Gr. ἀπό, Av. apa, Lat. ab from *ap (cp. aperio); Goth. af, Ger. ab, Ags. E. of. A compar. form fr. apa is apara “further away”

Apakaḍḍhati

to draw away, take off, remove DN i.180; DN iii.127; Dhp-a ii.86. Caus. apakaḍḍhāpeti Ja i.342; Ja iv.415; Mil 34 ■ Cp apakassati; & see pakattheti.;

apa + kaḍḍhati, cp. Sk. apa-karṣati

Apakata

put off, done away, in ājīvik āpakata being without a living MN i.463 (the usual phrase being ˚apagata); Mil 279 (id.). At Iti 89 the reading of same phrase is ājīvikā pakatā (v.l. ā˚ vakatā).

pp. of apakaroti

Apakataññu

(adj.) ungrateful Vin ii.199.

a + pa + kataññu

Apakantati

to cut off Thig 217 (gale = gīvaṃ chindati Thag-a 178; Kern, Toev. corrects to kabale a.).

apa + kantati, Sk. ava + kṛntati

Apakaroti

to throw away, put off; hurt, offend slight; possibly in reading T. apakiritūna at Thig 447 (q.v.) ■ pp. apakata (q.v.). Cp. apakāra.

apa + karoti, cp. Sk. apakaroti & apakṛta in same meaning

Apakassati

to throw away, remove Snp 281 (v.l. BB & Snp-a ava˚; expld. by niddhamati & nikkaḍḍhati Snp-a 311) ■ ger.; apakassa Sn ii.198 = Mil 389. See also apakāsati. Apakara & ka;

Sk. apa-& ava-kaṛṣati, cp. apakaḍḍhati

Apakāra & ˚ka

injury, mischief; one who injures or offends Dhp-a iii.63; Sdhp 283.

cf. Sk. apakāra & apakaroti

Apakāsati

at Vin ii.204 is to be read as apakassati and interpreted as “draw away, distract, bring about a split or dissension (of the Sangha)”. The v.l. on p. 325 justifies the correction (apakassati) as well as Bdhgh’s expln. “parisaṃ ākaḍḍhanti” ■ Cp. AN iii.145 & see; avapakāsati The reading at the id. p. at AN v.74 is avakassati (combd. w. vavakassati, where Vin ii.204 has avapakāsati) which is much to be preferred (see vavakassati).

Apakiritūna

at Thig 447 T (reading of C. is abhi˚) is explained Thag-a 271 to mean apakiritvā chaḍḍetvā throwing away, slighting, offending. The correct etym = Sk. avakirati (ava + kṛ2 to strew, cast out) in sense “to cast off, reject”, to which also belongs kirāta in meaning “cast off” i.e. man of a so-called low tribe. See also avakirati 2.

Apakkamati

to go away, depart, go to one side Ja iii.27; Sdhp 294 ■ aor apakkami Pv iv.75; ger. apakkamitvā Pv-a 43, Pv-a 124 & apakkamma Pv ii.928.

cp. Sk. apakramati, apa + kram

Apagacchati

to go away, turn aside Dhp-a i.401 (˚gantvā) ■ pp. apagata (q.v.).

apa + gam

Apagata

1. gone, gone away from (c. abl.), removed; deceased, departed Iti 112; Pv-a 39 Pv-a 63 (= peta), 64 (= gata).

2. (˚-) freq. as prefix meaning without, lit. having lost, removed from; free from Vin ii.129 (˚gabbhā having lost her foetus, having a miscarriage); Ja i.61 (˚vattha without clothes); Pv-a 38 (˚soka free from grief), 47 (˚lajja not shy), 219 (˚viññāṇa without feeling) ■ Cp. apakata.

pp. of apagacchati

Apagabbha

(adj.) not entering another womb, i.e. not destined to another rebirth Vin iii.3.

a + pa + gabbha

Apagama

going away, disappearance Sdhp 508.

Sk. apagama

Apaṅga

(apānga) the outer corner of the eye Ja iii.419 (asitâpangin black-eyed); iv.219 (bahi˚). Spelt avaṅga at Vin ii.267, where the phrase avangaṃ karoti i.e. expld. by Bdhgh. ibid p. 327 as “avangadese adhomukhaṃ lekhaṃ karonti”. According to Kern, Toev. 20 Bdhgh’s expln is not quite correct, since avanga stands here in the meaning of “a coloured mark upon the body (cp. PW. apānga).

Sk. apānga

Apacaya

falling off, diminution (opp. ācaya gathering, heaping up), unmaking, esp. loss (of wordliness) decrease (of possibility of rebirth Vin ii.2 = Vin iii.21 = Vin iv.213 cp. Ja iii.342; SN ii.95 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); AN iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. ācaya); Ja iii.342 (sekho ˚ena na tappati); Vb 106, Vb 319, Vb 326, Vb 330.

-gāmin going towards decrease, “making for the undoing of rebirth” (Dhs trsl. 82) AN v.243, AN v.277; Dhs 277 Dhs 339, Dhs 505, Dhs 1014; Vb 12, Vb 16 sq.; Ne 87 (cp. Kv 156).

fr. apa + ci

Apacāyati

to honour respect, pay reverence DN i.91 (pūjeti + ); Ja iii.82. Pot. apace (for apaceyya, may be taken to apacināti 2; AN iv.245; Thag-a 72 (here to apacināti 1) ■ pp. apacita (q.v.).

fr. apa- ci, cp. cināti & cayati, with diff. meaning in Sk.; better expld. perhaps as denom. fr. *apacāya in meaning of apacāyana, cp. apacita

Apacāyana

(nt.) honouring, honour, worship, reverence Ja i.220; Ja v.326; DN-a i.256 (˚kamma); Vv-a 24 (˚ṃ karoti = añjalikaṃ karoti); Pv-a 104 (˚kara, adj.), 128 (+ paricariya).

abstr. fr. apa + cāy, which is itself a der. fr. ci, cināti

Apacāyika

(adj.) honouring, respecting Ja iv.94 (vaddha˚ cp. vaddhâpacāyin); Pv ii.7 8 (jeṭṭha˚); iv.324 (id.). In B.Sk. the corresp. phrase is jyeṣṭhâpacayaka.

fr. *apacāya, cp. B.Sk. apacāyaka Mvu i.198; Divy 293

Apacāyin

(adj.) honouring, paying homage, revering Snp 325 (vaddha˚ = vaddhānaṃ apaciti karaṇena Snp-a 332) = Dhp 109; Ja i.47, Ja i.132, Ja i.201 Ja ii.299; Ja v.325; Mil 206; Sdhp 549.

fr. *apacāya; cp. apacāyika

Apacāra

falling off, fault, wrong doing Ja vi.375.

fr. apa + car, cp. Sk. apa & abhi-carati

Apacita

honoured, worshipped, esteemed Thag 186; Ja ii.169; Ja iv.75; Vv 510 (= pūjita Vv-a 39); 3511 (cp. Vv-a 164); Mil 21.

pp. of apacayati or apacināti

Apaciti

(f.) honour, respect, esteem, reverence Thag 589; Ja i.220 Ja ii.435; Ja iii.82; Ja iv.308; Ja vi.88; Mil 180, Mil 234 (˚ṃ karoti) 377 (pūjana + ); Snp-a 332 (˚karaṇa). Cp. apacāyana.

Vedic apaciti in diff. meaning, viz. expiation

Apacināti

1. [in meaning of Sk. apacīyate cp. P. upaciyyati Pass. of upacināti] to get rid of, do away with, (cp. apacaya), diminish, make less SN iii.89 (opp. ācināti); Thag 807; Ja iv.172 (apacineth’ eva kāmāni = viddhaṃseyyatha C.). Here belong prob. aor 3rd pl. apaciyiṃsu (to be read for upacciṃsu) at Ja vi.187 (akkhīni a. “the eyes gave out”) and Pot. pres. apace Thag-a 72 (on v.40).

2. [ = apacayati] to honour esteem; observe, guard Vin i.264 (apacinayamāna cīvaraṃ (?) v.l. apacitiyamāna; trsl. guarding his claim is, Vin Texts); MN i.324 (see detail under apaviṇāti) Thag 186 (grd. apacineyya to be honoured); Ja v.339 (anapacinanto for T. anupacinanto, v.l. anapavinati) ■ pp. apacita (q.v.).

apa + cināti

Apacca

offspring, child DN i.90 (bandhupāda˚ cp. muṇḍaka), 103 (id.); SN i.69 (an˚) Snp 991; DN-a i.254.

Vedic apatya nt.; der. fr. apa

Apaccakkha

(adj.) unseen; in instr. f. apaccakkhāya as adv. without being seen, not by direct evidence Mil 46 sq.

a + paṭi + akkha

Apacchapurima

(adj.) “neither after nor before”, i.e. at the same time, simultaneous Ja iii.295.

a + paccha + purima

Apajaha

(adj.) not giving up, greedy, miserly AN iii.76 (v.l. apānuta; C. expls. (a)vaḍḍhinissita mānatthaddha).

a + pajaha

Apajita

(nt.) defeat Dh. 105.

pp. of apa + ji

Apajjhāyati

to muse, meditate, ponder, consider MN i.334 (nijjhāyati + ); iii.14 (id.).

apa + jhāyati1; cp. Sk. abhi-dhyāyati

Apaññaka

(adj.) = apañña, ignorant Dpvs vi.29.

Apaṭṭhapeti

to put aside, leave out, neglect Ja iv.308; Ja v.236.

Caus. fr. apa-tiṭṭhati, cp. Sk. apa + sthā to stand aloof

Apaṇṇaka

(adj.) [a + paṇṇaka; see paṇṇaka; Weber Ind. Str. iii.150 & Kuhn, Beitr. p. 53 take it as *a-praśna-ka certain, true, absolute MN i.401, MN i.411; AN v.85, AN v.294, AN v.296; Ja i.104 (where expld as ekaṃsika aviruddha niyyānika ).

Apanṇṇakatā

(f.) certainty, absoluteness SN iv.351 sq.

abstr. of apaṇṇaka

Apatacchika

only in khārāpatācch˚; (q.v.) a kind of torture.

Apattha1

(adj.) thrown away Dhp 149 (= chaḍḍita Dhp-a iii.112).

Sk. apāsta, pp. of apa + as2

Apattha2

2nd pl. pret. of pāpunāti (q.v.).

Apatthaṭa

= avatthaṭa covered Thag 759.

Apatthita & Apatthiya

see pattheti.

Apadāna

(nt.) 1. removing, breaking off, DN iii.88.

2. [ = Sk. avadāna cp. ovāda] advice, admonition instruction, morals Vin ii.4 (an˚ not taking advice) 7 (id.) MN i.96; AN v.337 sq. (saddhā˚) Thag 47.

3 legend, life history. In the title Mahāpadāna suttanta it refers to the 7 Buddhas. In the title Apadānaṃ, that is ʻthe storiesʼ, it refers almost exclusively to Arahants. The other, (older), connotation seems to have afterwards died out. See Dialogues ii.3 ■ Cp. also pariyāpadāna.

= Sk. apadāna

Apadisa

reference, testimony, witness Dhp-a ii.39.

fr apa + diś

Apadisati

to call to witness, to refer to, to quote Vin iii.159; Ja i.215; Ja iii.234; Ja iv.203; Mil 270; Dhp-a ii.39; Ne 93.

apa + disati

Apadesa

1. reason, cause, argument MN i.287 (an˚).

2. statement, designation Pv-a 8.

3. pretext Ja iii.60; Ja iv.13; Pv-a 154. Thus also apadesaka Ja vi.179.

cp. Sk. apadeśa

Apadhāreti

to observe, request ask Thag-a 16.

Caus. of apa + dhṛ; cp. Sk. ava-dhārayati, but also BSk. apadhārayati Divy 231

Apanata

“bent away”, drawn aside, in ster. combn. abhinata + apanata (“strained forth & strained aside” Mrs Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 39) MN i.386; SN i.28.

pp. of apanamati

Apanamati

to go away Snp 1102 (apanamissati, v.l. apalām˚ & apagam˚; expld at Nd ii.60 by vajissati pakkhamissati etc ■ pp. apanata (q.v.) Caus. apanāmeti.

semantically doubtful

Apanāmeti

1. to take away, remove MN i.96 = AN i.198 (kathaṃ bahiddhā a. carry outside) Kp viii.4 (= aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ gameti Kp-a 220).

2 [ = Sk. ava-namati] to bend down, lower, put down Vin ii.208 (chattaṃ); SN i.226 (id.); Ja ii.287 (id., v.l. apanetvā) DN i.126 (hatthaṃ, for salute).

Caus. fr. apanamati

Apanidahati

(& apanidheti) to hide, conceal Vin iv.123 (˚dheti ˚dheyya, ˚dhessati); Pv-a 215 (˚dhāya ger.) ■ pp. apanihita ■ Caus. apanidhāpeti to induce somebody to conceal Vin iv.123.

apa + ni + dhā, cp. Vedic apadhā hiding-place; Sk. apadadhāti = Gr. ἀποτἱχημι = Lat. abdo “do away”

Apanihita

concealed, in abstr. ˚ttaṃ (nt.) hiding, concealing, theft Pv-a 216.

pp. of apanidahati

Apanīta

taken away or off. removed, dispelled Pv-a 39.;

Sk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti & cp. also onīta = apanīta

Apanudati & Apanudeti

to push or drive away, remove dispel; pres. apanudeti Mil 38. aor. apānudi Pv i.86 (= apanesi Pv-a 41); ii.314 (= avahari aggahesi Pv-a 86) Dāvs i.8. ger. apanujja DN ii.223. See also der. apanudana. Apanudana & Apanudana;

apa + nud, cp. Vedic apanudati & Caus. Sk. apanodayati

Apanudana & Apanūdana

(nt.) taking or driving away, removal Vin ii.148; Ja i.94 (dukkha˚; ); Snp 252 (id.); Pv-a 114 (id.).

Sk. apanodana, fr. apanudati

Apanuditar

remover, dispeller DN iii.148.

n. ag. fr. apanudati, Sk. apanoditṛ

Apaneti

to lead away, take or put away, remove Ja i.62, Ja i.138; Ja ii.4, Ja ii.155 (aor. apānayi) iii.26; Mil 188, Mil 259, Mil 413; Pv-a 41, Pv-a 74, Pv-a 198 (= harati) Sdhp 63 Pass. apanīyati SN i.176 ■ pp. apanīta (q.v.).

apa +

Apapibati

to drink from something Ja ii.126 (aor. apāpāsi). Apabbuhati & Apabyuhati;

apa + pibati

Apabbūhati & Apabyūhati

to push off, remove, scrape away AN iii.187 (apaviyūhitvā, vv.ll. ˚bbūhitvā); Ja i.265 (paṃsuṃ ) ■ Caus. ˚byūhāpeti to make remove or brush Ja iv.349 (paṃsuṃ ).

apa + vi + ūh

Apabyāma

see apavyāma.

Apamāra

epilepsy Vin i.93. Cp. apasmāra.

Sk. apasmāra

Apamārika

(adj.) epileptic Vin iv.8, Vin iv.10, Vin iv.11.

cp. Sk. apasmārin

Apayāti

to go away Ja vi.183 (apāyāti metri causa; expld. by C. as apagacchati palāyati) ■ Caus. apayāpeti [Sk. apayāpayati] to make go drive away, dismiss MN iii.176; SN ii.119.

Sk. apayāti, apa +

Apayāna

(nt.) going away, retreat DN i.9 (opp. upa˚); DN-a i.95.

Sk. apayāna, fr. apayāti

Apara

(adj.) another, i.e. additional, following next, second (with pron. inflexion, i.e. nom. pl apare) DN iii.190 (˚pajā another, i.e. future generation) Snp 791, Snp 1089 (n’); Ja i.59 (aparaṃ divasaṃ on some day following); iii.51 (apare tayo sahāyā “other friends three” i.e. three friends, cp. similarly Fr. nous autres Franc˚ais) iv.3 (dīpa); Pv-a 81 (˚divase on another day), 226; with other part. like aparo pi DN iii.128 ■ nt. aparaṃ what follows i.e. future state, consequence; future Vin i.35 (nâparaṃ nothing more); Snp 1092 (much the same as punabbhava, cp. Nd ii.61). Cases adverbially; aparaṃ (acc. further, besides, also Ja i.256; Ja iii.278; often with other part like athāparaṃ & further, moreover Snp 974; and puna c’ aparaṃ Iti 100; Mil 418 (so read for puna ca paraṃ and passim; aparam pi Vism 9aparena in future DN iii.201 ■ Repeated (reduplicative formation) aparāparaṃ (local) to & fro Ja i.265, Ja i.278; Pv-a 198; (temporal) again and again, off & on Ja ii.377; Mil 132; Vv-a 271; Pv-a 176 (= punappunaṃ).

-anta (aparanta) = aparaṃ, with anta in same function as in cpds. vananta (see anta1 5): (a.) further away, westward Ja v.471; Mil 292 (janapada). (b.) future DN i.30 (˚kappika, cp. DN-a i.118); MN ii.228 (˚ânudiṭṭhi-thought of the future); SN iii.46 (id.). -āpariya (fr. aparâpara ever-following, successive, continuous, everlasting; used with ref. to kamma Ja v.106; Mil 108. -bhāga the future lit. a later part of time, only in loc. aparabhāge at a future date, later on Ja i.34, Ja i.262; Ja iv.1; Vv-a 66.

Vedic apara, der. fr. apa with compar. suffix-ra = Idg. *aporos “further away, second”; cp. Gr. ἀπωτέρω farther, Lat. aprilis the second month (after March, i.e. April). Goth. afar = after

Aparajju

(adv.) on the foll. day Vin ii.167; SN i.186; Mil 48.

Sk. apare-dyus

Aparajjhati

to sin or offend against (c. loc.) Vin ii.78 = Vin iii.161; Ja v.68; Ja vi.367; Mil 189; Pv-a 263 ■ pp. aparaddha & aparādhita; (q.v.).

Sk. aparādhyate, apa + rādh

Aparaṇṇa

(nt.) “the other kind of cereal”, prepared or cooked cereals, pulse etc. Opp. to pubbaṇṇa the unprepared or raw corn (= āmakadhañña Vin iv.265; Vin iii.151 (pubb˚ + ); iv.265, 267; AN iv.108, AN iv.112 (tila-mugga-māsā˚; opp. sāli-yavaka etc.); Nd ii.314 (aparaṇṇaṃ nāma sūpeyyaṃ); Ja v.406 (˚jā = hareṇukā pea); Mil 106 (pubbaṇṇa˚). See also dhañña & harita.;

apara + aṇṇa = anna

Aparaddha

missed (c. acc.), gone wrong, failed, sinned (against = loc.) DN i.91, DN i.103, DN i.180; SN i.103 (suddhimaggaṃ); Thag 78; Snp 891 (suddhiṃ viraddha khalita Nd i.300); Pv-a 195.

pp. of aparajjhati

Aparapaccaya

(adj.) not dependent or relying on others Vin i.12 (vesārajja-ppatta + ); DN i.110 (id.); MN ii.41; MN i.491; SN iii.83; DN-a i.278 (nâssa paro paccayo).

a + para + paccaya

Aparājita

(adj.) unconquered Snp 269; Ja i.71, Ja i.165.

Vedic aparājita; a + parājita

Aparādha

sin, fault, offence, guilt Ja i.264 (nir˚); iii.394; iv.495; Vv-a 69; Pv-a 87, Pv-a 116.

fr. apa + rādh

Aparādhika

(adj.) guilty, offending, criminal Ja ii.117 (vāja˚); Mil 149 (issara˚) 189 (aparādhikatā).

fr. aparādha, cp. Sk. aparādhin

Aparādhita

transgressed, sinned, failing Ja v.26 (so read for aparadh’ ito).

pp. of aparādheti, Caus. of apa + rādh; cp. aparaddha

Aparāyin

(adj.) having no support Ja iii.386 (f. ˚ī; C. appatiṭṭhā appaṭisaraṇā).

a + parāyin, cp. parāyana

Apalāpin

see apalāsin.

Sk. apalāpin “denying, concealing” different

Apalāḷeti

to draw over to Vin i.85.

apa + lāḷeti

Apalāyin

(adj.) not running away, steadfast, brave, fearless Nd ii.13 (abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin as expln. of acchambhin and vīra); Ja iv.296; Ja v.4 (where C gives variant “ apalāpinī ti pi pāṭho”, which latter has v.l. apalāsinī & is expl;d. by C. as palāpa-rahite anavajjasarīre p. 5). See also apalāsin.

a + palāyin

Apalāsin

(adj.) either “not neglectful, pure, clean” (= apalāpin fr. palāsa chaff cp. apalāyin at Ja v.4), or “not selfish, not hard, generous (as inferred from combn. with amakkhin & amaccharin) or “brave, fearless, energetic” (= apalāyin) DN iii.47 cp. Pp 22. See palāsin.

apaḷāsin; but spelling altogether uncertain. There seems to exist a confusion between the forms apalāyin apalāpin & apalāsin, owing to freq. miswriting of s, y, p in MSS. (cp. Nd;2 introd. p. xix.). We should be inclined to give apalāsin, as the lectio difficilior, the preference. The expln. at Pp 22 as “yassa puggalassa ayaṃ paḷāso pahīno ayaṃ vuccati puggalo apaḷāsī” does not help us to clear up the etym. nor the vv.ll.

Apalibuddha & Apalibodha

unobstructed, unhindered, free Ja iii.381 (˚bodha); Mil 388; Dhp-a iii.198.

a + palibuddha, pp. of pari + bṛh, see palibujjhati

Apalekhana

(nt.) licking off, in cpd. hatthāpalekhana “hand-licking” (i.e. licking one’s hand after a meal, the practice of certain ascetics) M 177 (with v.l. hatthâvalekhana MN i.535; Trenckner compares BSk. hastapralehaka Lal 312 & hastâvalehaka ibid. 323), 412; Pp 55 (expld. at Pp A 231 as hatthe piṇḍamhe niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaṃ apalekhati).

apa + lekhana from likh in meaning of lih, corresponding to Sk. ava-lehana

Apalekhati

to lick off Pp A 231 (hatthaṃ).

apa + lekhati in meaning of Sk. avalihati

Apalepa

in “so ’palepa patito jarāgharo” at Thig 270 is to be read as “so palepa˚”. Morris’s interpret. J.P.T.S. 1886, 126 therefore superfluous.

Apalokana

(nt.) permission, leave, in ˚kamma proposal of a resolution, obtaining leave (see kamma i.3; Vin ii.89; Vin iv.152.

fr. apaloketi

Apalokita

1. asked permission, consulted SN iii.5.

2. (nt.) permission, consent MN i.337 (Nāgâpalokitaṃ apalokesi).

3. (nt.) an Ep. of Nibbāna SN iv.370.

pp. of apaloketi; Sk. avalokita

Apalokin

(adj.) “looking before oneself”, looking at, cautious Mil 398.

Sk. avalokin

Apaloketi

1. to look ahead, to look before, to be cautious, to look after MN i.557 (v.l. for apaciṇāti, where Ja v.339 C. has avaloketi); Mil 398. 2. to look up to, to obtain permission from (acc.), to get leave, to give notice of Vin iii.10, Vin iii.11; Vin iv.226 (anapaloketvā = anāpucchā), 267 (+ āpucchitvā); MN i.337; SN iii.95 (bhikkhusanghaṃ anapaloketvā without informing the Sangha); Ja vi.298 (vājānaṃ); Dhp-a i.67 ■ pp. apalokita (q.v.). See also apalokana & ˚lokin.;

BSk. ava-lokayati

Apavagga

completion, end, final delivery, Nibbāna; in phrase saggāpavagga Dāvs ii.62; Dāvs iii.75.

Sk. apavarga

Apavattati

to turn away or aside, to go away Ja iv.347 (v.l. apasakkati).

apa + vṛt, cp. Lat. āverto

Apavadati

to reproach, reprove, reject, despise DN i.122 (= paṭikkhipati DN-a i.290); SN v.118 (+ paṭikkosati).

apa + vadati

Apavahati

to carry or drive away; Caus. apavāheti to remove, give up Mil 324 (kaddamaṃ).

apa + vahati

Apaviṭṭha

at Pv iii.82 is to be read apaviddha (q.v.).

Apaviṇāti

is probably misreading for apaciṇāti (see apac˚ 2). As v.l. at Ja v.339 (anapavinanto) for T. anupacinanto (expld. by avaloketi C.). Other vv.ll. are anuvi˚ & apavī˚ meaning “not paying attention”. The positive form we find as apavīṇati “to take care of, to pay attention to (c. acc.) at MN i.324, where Trenckner unwarrantedly assumes a special root veṇ (see Notes p. 781), but the vv.ll. to this passage (see M. i.557) with apavīṇāti and apacinati confirm the reading apaciṇāti, as does the gloss apaloketi.

Apaviddha

thrown away, rejected, discarded, removed SN i.202; SN iii.143; Snp 200 (susānasmiṃ = chaḍḍita Snp-a 250); Thag 635; Dhp 292 (= chaḍḍita Dhp-a iii.452); Pv iii.82 (susānasmiṃ; so read for T. apaviṭṭha); Ja i.255; Ja iii.426; Ja yi.90 (= chaḍḍita C.). Sdhp 366.

pp. of apavijjhati, Vedic apa + vyadh

Apaviyūhati

see appabbūhati.

Apavīṇati

see apaviṇāti (= apaciṇāti).

Apavyāma

disrespect, neglect, in phrase apayvāmato (apaby˚) karoti to treat disrespectfully, to insult, defile SN i.226 (v.l. abyāmato; C. expls. apabyāmato karitvā abyāmato katvā); Kv 472 (vv.ll. asabyākato abyāto, apabyāto; Kvu trsl. 270 n. 1 remarks: “B trsl.: abyāsakato. The Burmese scholar U. Pandi, suggests we should read apabyākato, by which he understands blasphemously”; it is here combd. with niṭṭhubhati, as at Dhp-a ii.36); Dhp-a ii.36 (“want of forbearance” Ed. doubtful reading; vv.ll. appabyāyakamma & apasāma) For further detail see; apasavya.

apa + vyāma

Apasakkati

to go away, to go aside Ja iv.347 (v.l. for apavattati); Vv-a 101; Pv-a 265 (aor ˚sakki = apakkami).

apa + sakkati

Apasavya

(adj.) right (i.e. not left), contrary Ud 50 (T. has niṭṭhubhitvā abyāmato karitvā; vv ll. are apabhyāmāto, abhyāmato & C. apasabyāmato) where C. expl;s. apasabyāmato karitvā by apasabyaṃ katvā “which latter corresponds in form but not in meaning to Sk. apasavyaṃ karoti to go on the right side” (Morris JP T S. 1886, 127) ■ See apavyāma.

apa + savya

Apasāda

putting down, blame, disparagement MN iii.230.

fr. apa + sad

Apasādita

blamed, reproached, disparaged SN ii.219; Snp-a 541.

pp. of apasādeti

Apasādeti

1. to refuse, decline Vin iv.213, Vin iv.263; Ja v.417 (= uyyojeti).

2. to depreciate blame, disparage Vin iii.101; MN iii.230 (opp. ussādeti ) DN-a i.160 ■ pp. apasādita (q.v.).

Caus. of apa + sad

Apasmāra

epilepsy, convulsion, fit Ja iv.84. Cp. apamāra.

Sk. apasmāra, lit. want of memory, apa + smṛ;

Apassanto

etc. see passati.

Apassaya

1. support, rest Thag-a 258.

2. bed, bolster, mattress, in kaṇṭak˚; a mattress of thorns, a bolster filled with thorns (as cushion for asceties) MN i.78; Ja i.493; Ja iii.235. -sāppassaya with a head rest Ja iv.299.

-pīṭhaka a chair with a head-rest Ja iii.235.

cp. Sk. apāśraya, fr. apasseti

Apassayika

(adj.) reclining on, in kaṇṭaka˚; one who lies on a bed of thorns (see kaṇṭaka) MN i.78; Ja iv.299 (v. l, kaṇḍikesayika); Pp 55.

fr. apassaya; cp. Sk. apāśrayin-˚

Apassita

1. leaning against Ja ii.69 (tālamūlaṃ = nissāya ṭhita C.).

2. depending on, trusting in (c. acc. or loc.) Vv 101 (parâgāraṃ = nissita Vv-a 101); Ja iv.25 (balamhi = balanissita). See also avassita.

pp. of apasseti

Apasseti

to lean against, have a support in (acc.), to depend on.

1. (lit.) lean against Vin ii.175 (bhitti apassetabbo the wall to be used as a head-rest).

2. (fig.) mostly in ger. apassāya dependent upon, depending on, trusting in (loc. or acc or-˚) Vin iii.38; Ja i.214; Pv-a 189 ■ pp. apassita (q.v.) ■ See also avasseti.

Sk. apāśrayati, apa + ā + sri

Apassena

(nt.) a rest, support, dependence MN iii.127 (˚ka); DN iii.224 (cattāri apassenāni); as adj caturāpassena one who has the fourfold support viz sankhāy’ ekaṃ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, vinodeti AN v.30.

-phalaka (cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 71) a bolsterslab head-rest Vin i.48; Vin ii.175, Vin ii.209.

fr. apasseti

Apahattar

one who takes away or removes, destroyer MN i.447 = Kv 528.

n. ag. to apaharati

Apahara

taking away, stealing, robbing Ja ii.34.

Sk. apahāra, fr. apaharati

Apaharaṇa

(nt.) = apahara Mil 195.

Apaharati

to take away, remove, captivate, rob Ja iii.315 (aor. apahārayiṃ); Mil 413; DN-a i.38.

apa + hṛ;

Apākaṭatā

(f.) unfitness Mil 232 (v.l. apākatatta perhaps better).

a + pākaṭa + tā

Apākatika

(adj.) not in proper or natural shape, out of order, disturbed Dhp-a ii.7. Cp. appakāra.

a + pākata + ika

Apācīna

(adj.) westerly, backward, below SN iii.84; Iti 120 (apācīnaṃ used as adv. and taking here the place of adho in combn. with uddhaṃ tiriyaṃ; the reading is a conjecture of Windisch’s, the vv.ll. are apācinaṃ; apācini apāci & apāminaṃ, C. expl;s. by heṭṭhā).

Vedic apācīna; cp. apācaḥ & apāka, western; to Lat. opācus, orig. turned away (from the east or the sun) i.e. opposite, dark

Apāṭuka

(adj.) not open, sly, insidious Thag 940 (as v.l. for T. avāṭuka, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as “unscrupulous”, by Neumann as “ohne Redlichkeit”) Context suggests a meaning similar to the preceding nekatika, i.e. fraudulent. See also next.

a + pātu + ka (?), acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 7 der. fr. apaṭu not sharp, blunt, uncouth. This is hardly correct. See pātur

Apāṭubha

(adj.) = apāṭuka, i.e. sly, fraudulent Ja iv.184 (in context with nekatika; C. expls. apāṭubhāva dhanuppāda-virahita, in which latter virahita does not fit in; the pass. seems corrupt).

a + pātu + bha (?), at the only passage changed by Morris J.P. T. S. 1893, 7 to apāṭuka but without reason

Apāda

(?) giving away in marriage Ja iv.179 (in expln. of anāpāda unmarried; reading should prob be āpāda = pariggaha).

apa + ā +

Apādaka

(adj.) not having feet, footless, creeping, Ep. of snakes & fishes Vin ii.110 = Ja ii.146 (where see expln.). Spelt apada(ka) at Iti 87 (v.l. apāda).

a + pāda + ka

Apāna

(nt.) breathing out, respiration (so Ch.; no ref. in P. Cauon?) On Prāṇa & Apāna see G. W. Brown in J. Am. Or. Soc. 39, 1919 pp. 104–⁠112. See ānāpāna.;

Apānakatta

(nt.) “waterless state”, living without drinking water Ja v.243.

a + pānaka + ttaṃ

Apāpaka

(adj.) guiltless, innocent f. ˚ikā Vv 314; 326.

a + pāpaka

Apāpata

(adj.) falling down into (c. acc.) Ja iv.234 (aggiṃ).

apa + ā + pata

Apāpurana

(nt.) a key (to a door) Vin i.80; Vin iii.119; MN iii.127. See also avāpuraṇa. Apapurati & Apapunati;

fr. apāpurati

Apāpurati & Apāpuṇati

to open (a door) Vin i.5 (apāpur’ etaṃ Amatassa dvāraṃ: imper. where id. p. SN i.137 has avāpur˚, T., but v.l. apāpur˚) Vv 6427 (apāpuranto Amatassa dvāraṃ, expld. at Vv-a 284 by vivaranto); Iti 80 (apāvuṇanti A. dv. as T. conj. with v.l. apānuṃanti, apāpurenti & apāpuranti) ■ pp; apāruta (q.v.) ■ Pass. apāpurīyati [cp. BSk. apāvurīyati Mvu ii.158] to be opened MN iii.184 (v.l. avā˚) Ja i.63 (avā˚); Thig 494 (apāpuṇitvā). See also avāpurati.

Sk. apāvṛṇoti, apa + ā + vṛ; but Vedic only apa-vṛṇoti corresponding to Lat. aperio *apa-ṷerio. On form see Trenckner, Notes 63

Apābhata

taken away, stolen Ja iii.54.

pp. of apa + ā + bhṛ; cp. Vedic apa-bharati, but Lat. aufero to ava˚

Apāya

“going away” viz.

1. separation, loss Dhp 211 (piya˚ = viyoga Dhp-a iii.276).

2. loss (of property) DN iii.181, DN iii.182; AN ii.166; AN iv.283; Ja iii.387 (atth˚).

3. leakage, out flow (of water) DN i.74; AN ii.166; AN iv.287.

4. lapse, falling away (in conduct) DN i.100.

5. a transient state of loss and woe after death. Four such states are specified purgatory (niraya), rebirth as an animal, or as a ghost, or as a Titan (Asura). Analogous expressions are vinipāta & duggati;. All combined at DN i.82; DN iii.111; AN i.55; Iti 12, Iti 73; Nd ii.under kāya; & freq. elsewhere ■ apāyaduggativinipāta as attr. of saṃsāra SN ii.92, SN ii.232; SN iv.158 SN iv.313; SN v.342; opp. to khīṇâpāya-duggati-vinipāta of an Arahant AN iv.405; AN v.182 sq ■ See also foll. pass.: MN iii.25 (anapāya); Snp 231; Thig 63; Ja iv.299; Pp 51; Vv-a 118 (opp. sugati); Pv-a 103; Sdhp 43, Sdhp 75 & cp niraya, duggati, vinipāta.;

-gāmin going to ruin or leading to a state of suffering Dhp-a iii.175; cp. ˚gamanīya id. Ps. i.94, ˚gamanīyatā Ja iv.499. -mukha “facing ruin”, leading to destruction (= vināsa-mukha DN-a i.268), usually as nt. “cause of ruin” DN i.101 (cattāri apāya mukhāni); iii.181, 182 (cha bhogānaṃ a˚-mukhāni, i.e. causes of the loss of one’s possessions); AN ii.166; AN iv.283, AN iv.287. -samudda the ocean of distress Dhp-a iii.432. -sahāya a spendthrift companion DN iii.185.

Sk. apāya, fr. apa + i, cp. apeti

Apāyika

(adj.) belonging to the apāyas or states of misery DN i.103; DN iii.6, DN iii.9, DN iii.12; Iti 42; Pv-a 60 (dukkha).

also as āpāyika (q.v.); fr. apāya

Apāyin

(adj.) going away Ja i.163 (aḍḍharattāv’apāyin = aḍḍharatte apāyin C.). -an˚; not going away, i.e. constantly following (chāyā anapāyinī, the shadow) Dhp 2; Thag 1041; Mil 72.

fr. apāya

Apāra

(nt.) 1. the near bank of a river Ja iii.230 (+ atiṇṇaṃ, C. paratīraṃ atiṇṇaṃ).

2. (fig.) not the further shore (of life), the world here, i.e. (opp. pāraṃ Nibbāna) Snp 1129, Snp 1130; Nd ii.62; Dhp 385 (expld. as bāhirāni cha āyatanāni Dhp-a iv.141). See pāra & cp. avara.;

a + pāra

Apāraṇeyya

(adj.) that which cannot be achieved, unattainable Ja vi.36 (= apāpetabba).

grd. of paraneti + a˚

Apāruta

open (of a door) Vin i.7 = MN i.169 (apārutā tesaṃ Amatassa dvārā); DN i.136 (= vivaṭa-dvāra DN-a i.297); Ja i.264 (˚dvāra).

Sk. apāvṛta, pp. of apāpurati

Apālamba

a mechanism to stop a chariot, a safe guard “to prevent warriors from falling out” (C.) SN i.33 (Mrs Rh. D. trsl “leaning board”); Ja vi.252 (v.l. upā˚; Kern trsl. “remhout”, i.e. brake).

“a Vedic term for the hinder part of a carriage” Morris JP T S. 1886, 128; the “Vedic” unidentified

Apāhata

driven off or back, refuted, refused Snp 826 (˚smiṃ = apasādite vade Snp-a 541).

pp. of apa + hṛ;

Api

(indecl.) both prep. & conj., orig meaning “close by”, then as prep. “towards, to, on to on” and as adv. “later, and, moreover”.

1 (prep. pref.) (a) prep. c. loc.:; api ratte later on in the night (q.v.)-(b) pref.: apidhāna putting on to; apiḷahati bind on to, apihita (= Gr. ἐπιχετός, epithet) put on to (q.v.).

2. (conj. & part.). (a) in affirmative sentences meaning primarily “moreover, further, and then, even”-(α) (single) prothetic: api dibbesu kāmesu even in heavenly joys Dhp 187; ko disvā na pasīdeyya api kaṇhâbhijātiko even an unfortunate-born Snp 563 api yojanāni gacchāma, even for leagues we go Pv iv.107 (= anekāni yojanāni pi g. Pv-a 270. Epithetic (more freq. in the form pi ): muhuttam api even a little while Dhp 106, Dhp 107 aham api daṭṭhukāmo I also wish to see Snp 685. Out of prothetic use (= even = even if) develops the conditional meaning of “if”, as in api sakkuṇemu (and then we may = if we may) Ja v.24 (c. = api nāma sakkuṇeyyāma see further under β app’eva nāma) ■ api-api in correlation corresponds to Lat. et-et Sk ca-ca, meaning both… and, and… as well as, & is esp. freq. in comb;n. app’ ekacce… app’ ekacce (and) some… and others i.e. some… others [not with Kern Toev. s. v. to appa! ] e.g. at DN i.118; Thig 216; Vv-a 208, etc. -app’ ekadā “morever once” = sometimes Vin iv.178; SN i.162; SN iv.111; Ja i.67; Dhp-a iii.303, etc ■ (β) (in combn with other emphatic or executive particles) api ca further, and also moreover DN i.96; Mil 25, Mil 47. -api ca kho moreover and yet, still, all the same Iti 89 (+ pana v.l.); Mil 20, Mil 239. -api ca kho pana all the same, never mind nevertheless Ja i.253. -api ssu so much so Vin ii.76 -app’ eva nāma (with pot.) (either) surely, indeed, yes I reckon, (or) I presume, it is likely that, perhaps Vin i.16 (surely); ii.85 (id.); cp. pi DN i.205 (sve pi upasaṃkameyyāma tomorrow I shall surely come along), 226 (siyā thus shall it be); MN i.460 = Iti 89 (moreover, indeed) Ja i.168 (surely) Vin ii.262 (perhaps) Ja v.421 (id., piyavācaṃ labheyyāma) ■ (b) in interrog ■ dubit. sentences as part. of interrog. (w. indic. or pot.) corresponding to Lat. nonne, i e. awaiting an affirmative answer (“not, not then”): api Yasaṃ kulaputtaṃ passeyya do you not see… Vin i.16; api samaṇa balivadde addasā have you not then seen… SN i.115; api kiñci labhāmase shall we then not get anything? Ja iii.26; api me pitaraṃ passatha do you then not see my father? Pv-a 38 ■ Also combd. with other interr. part. e.g. api nu J. ii.415.

Sk. api & pi; Idg. *epi *pi *opi; cp. Gr. ε ̓́πι on to, ο ̓́πι (ο ̓́πιχεν behind, ὀπίσσα back = close at one’s heels); Lat. ob. in certain functions; Goth. iftuma. The assimil. form before vowels is app˚; (= Sk. apy˚) See further details under pi.

Apitika

(adj.) fatherless Ja v.251.

a + pitika

Apithīyati

Pass. of apidahati to be obstructed, covered, barred, obscured Ja ii.158. See also pithīyati.

for apidhīyati; api + dhā

Apidahati

to put on (see api 1 b), to cover up, obstruct, Ja v.60 (inf. apidhetuṃ) pp. apihita, Pass. apithīyati, Der. apidhāna (q.v.).

api + dhā, cp. Gr. ἐπιτἱχημι

Apidhāna

(nt.) cover, lid Vin i.203, Vin i.204; Vin ii.122. See apidahati.

Vedic apidhāna in same meaning

Apiratte

later in the night Ja vi.560.

read api ratte, see api 1 a

Apilāpana

(nt.) counting up, repetition [Kern, Toev, s.v. gives der. fr. a + plāvana] Ne 15, Ne 28 Ne 54; Mil 37.

fr. api + lap

Apilāpanatā

(f.) in the pass. at Dhs 14 = Nd ii.628 is evidently meant to be taken as a + pilāpana + tā (fr pilavati, plu ), but whether the der. & interpret. of Dhs A is correct, we are unable to say. On general principles it looks like popular etym. Mrs. Rh. D. translates (p. 16 “opposite of superficiality” (lit “not floating”); see her detailed note Dhs trsl. 16.

Apilāpeti

“to talk close by”, i.e. to count up, recite, or: talk idly, boast of Mil 37 (sāpatheyyaṃ).

api + lap

Apiḷandha

(adj.) at Vv 361 should be read as apiḷaddha (= Sk. apinaddha) pp. of apiḷandhati (apiḷandhati) “adorned with”, or (with v.l. SS) as apiḷandhana; Vv-a 167 expls. by analankata, mistaking the a of api for a negation.

Apiḷandhana

(nt.) that which is tied on, i.e band, ornament, apparel, parure Vv 6410, 6418 (expld. inacurately at Vv-a 279 by; a-kāro nipātamattaṃ, pilandhanaṃ = ābhāraṇaṃ); Ja vi.472 (c. pilandhituṃ pi ayuttaṃ?). Apilahati & Apilandhati;

fr. apiḷandhati, also in shorter (& more usual) form; piḷandhana, q.v.

Apiḷahati & Apiḷandhati

to tie on, fasten, bind together; to adorn oneself with (acc.) Ja v.400 (ger. apiḷayha = piḷandhitvā C.)-Cp. apiḷandhana & pp apiladdha.;

Sk. apinahyati, on n: ḷ see note on gala, & cp. guṇa: guḷa, veṇu: veḷu etc. On ndh for yh see avanandhati

Apiha

(adj.) “unhankering (Mrs Rh. D.) SN i.181 (+ akankha; v.l. BB asita).

apihālu? a + piha, uncertain origin, see next. Morris J.P.I.S. 1886 takes it as a + spṛha

Apihālu

(adj.) not hankering, free from craving, not greedy SN i.187 = Thag 1218 (akuhako nipako apihālu); Snp 852 (+ amaccharin, expld. at Snp-a 549 as apihana-sīlo, patthanātanhāya rahito ti vuttaṃ hoti, thus perhaps taking it as a + pi (= api) + hana (fr. dhā, cp. pidahati & pihita) cp. also Nd ii.227).

a + pihālu, analysed by Fausböll Sn. Gloss. p. 229 as a-spṛhayālu, but Bdhgh evidently different (see below)

Apihita

covered Ja iv.4.

pp. of apidahati

Apuccaṇḍatā

(f.) “not being a rotten egg,” i.e. normal state, healthy birth, soundness MN i.357.

a + pūti + aṇḍa + tā

Apuccha

(adj.) “not a question”, i.e. not to be asked Mil 316.

a + pucchā

Apekkha

(adj.) waiting for, looking for SN i.122 (otāra˚).

= apekkhā

Apekkhati

1. to desire, long for, look for, expect Snp 435 (kāme n’âpekkhate cittaṃ), 773 (ppr. apekkhamāna); Ja iv.226 (id.); Dhs A 365. anapekkhamāna paying no attention to (acc.) Snp 59; Ja v.359. 2. [Sk. avīkṣate, ava + īkṣ; see avekkḥati] to consider refer to, look at, ger. apekkhitvā (cp. Sk. avīkṣya) with reference to Vv-a 13 ■ pp. apekkhita (q.v.).

Sk. apīkṣate, apa + īkṣ

Apekkhavant

(adj.) full of longing or desire, longing, craving Vin iv.214; SN iii.16; Thag 558; Ja v.453 (= sataṇha); Snp-a 76. Apekkha & Apekha

fr. apekkhā

Apekkhā & Apekhā

(f.) attention, regard, affection for (loc.); desire longing for (c. loc.) SN i.77; SN iii.132; SN v.409 (mātā-pitusu) Vin iv.214; Snp 38 (= vuccati taṇhā etc. Nd ii.65; = taṇhā sineha Snp-a 76); Ja i.9, Ja i.141; Thag 558; Dhp 345 (puttesu dāresu ca = taṇhā Dhp-a iv.56); Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136 (= ālayakaraṇa-vasena apekkhatī ti apekkhā Dhs A 365, cp. Dhs trsl. 279). Freq. as adj. (-˚or in combn. with sa˚; and an˚; ), viz. Vin iii.90 (visuddha˚); SN i.122 (otara˚); sa˚ AN iii.258, AN iii.433; AN iv.60 sq.; an˚; without consideration regardless, indifferent SN v.164; AN iii.252, AN iii.347, AN iii.434; Snp 200 (anapekkhā honti ñātayo); Ja i.9. Cp. anapekkhin apekkhavant; also B.Sk. avekṣatā.

Sk. apekṣā, fr. apa + īkṣ. The spelling is either kkh or kh, they are both used promiscuously a tendency towards kh prevailing, as in upekhā, sekha

Apekkhita

taken care of, looked after, considered Ja vi.142, Ja vi.149 (= olokita C.).

pp. of apekkhati

Apekkhin

(adj.) considering, regarding, expecting looking for; usually neg. an˚; indifferent (against) = loc. SN i.16, SN i.77; SN ii.281; SN iii.19, SN iii.87; Snp 166 (kāmesu), 823 (id.), 857; Dhp 346. Cp. apekkhavant.

Sk. apekṣin, but B.Sk. avekṣin, e.g. Jtm 215; fr. apa + īkṣ

Apeta

(adj.) gone away; (med.) freed of, rid of, deprived of (instr., abl. or ˚-) Dhp 9 (damasaccena); Pv-a 35 (dukkhato); usually ˚-in sense of “without,-less”, e.g. apeta-kaddama free from mud stainless Dhp 95; ˚vattha without dress Ja v.16; ˚viññāṇa without feeling, senseless Dhp 41; Thig 468; ˚viññāṇattaṃ senselessness, lack of feeling Pv-a 63.

pp. of apeti

Apetatta

(nt.) absence (of) Pv-a 92.

abstr. to apeta

Apeti

to go away, to disappear DN i.180 (upeti pi apeti pi) Ja i.292; Snp 1143 (= n’ apagacchanti na vijahanti Nd ii.66) ■ pp. apeta (q.v.).

apa + i, cp. Gr. α ̓́πειμι, Lat. abeo, Goth. af-iddja

Apetteyyatā

(f.) in combn. with amatteyyatā irreverence against father and mother DN iii.70 (cp. Dhp 332 & Dhp-a iv.34).

a + petteyyatā, abstr. fr. *paitṛya fatherly

Apeyya

(adj.) not to be drunk, not drinkable Ja vi.205 (sāgara).

a + peyya, grd. of

Apesiya

(nt.) a means of barring a door Vin ii.154 (Bdhgh. explns on p. 321: apesī ti dīghadārumhi khāṇuke pavesetvā kaṇḍaka-sākhāhi vinandhitvā kataṃ dvāra-tthakanakaṃ).

? of uncertain origin

Apesiyamāna

(adj.) not being in service Vin ii.177.

ppr. fr. a + peseti (q.v.)

App’

in app’ ekacce etc. see api.

Appa

(adj.) small, little, insignificant, often in the sense of “very little = (next to) nothing” (so in most cpds.); thus expld. at Vv-a 334 as equivalent to a negative part. (see appodaka) DN i.61 (opp. mahant, DN-a i.170 parittaka); Snp 713, Snp 775, Snp 805, Snp 896 (= appaka, omaka thoka, lamaka, jatukka, parittaka Nd i.306); Dhp 174; Ja i.262; Pp 39 ■ nt. appaṃ a little, a small portion, a trifle; pl. appāni small things, trifles AN ii.26 = Iti 102; AN ii.138; Dhp 20 (= thokaṃ eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam pi Dhp-a i.158), 224 (˚smiṃ yācito asked for little), 259.

-aggha of little value (opp. mahaggha priceless) Ja i.9 Pp 33; Dhp-a iv.184. -assāda [BSk. alpâsvāda, cp. Divy 224 = Dhp 186; alpa + ā + svād ] of little taste or enjoyment affording little pleasure (always used of kāmā Vin ii.25 = MN i.130 = AN iii.97 = Nd ii.71; Snp 61; Dhp 186 (= supina-sadisatāya paritta-sukha Dhp-a iii.240); Thig 358 (= Thag-a 244); Ja ii.313; Vism 124. -ātaṅka little (or no illness, freedom from illness, good health (= appābādha with which often combd.) [BSk. alpātanka & alpātankatā DN i.204 (+ appābādha); iii.166; AN iii.65, AN iii.103; Mil 14 -ābādha same as appātanka (q.v.) DN i.204; DN iii.166, DN iii.237; MN ii.125; AN i.25; AN ii.88; AN iii.30, AN iii.65 sq., 103, 153; Pv iv.144; ˚ābādhatā id. [cp. BSk. alpābādhatā good health AN i.38. -āyuka short lived DN i.18; Pv-a 103, also as ˚āyukin Vv 416. -āhāra taking little or no food, fasting MN ii.5; Snp 165 (= ekāsana-bhojitāya ca parimita-bhojitāya ca Snp-a 207), also as ˚āhāratā MN i.245; MN ii.5. -odaka having little or no water, dry Snp 777 (macche va appodake khīṇasote = parittodake Nd i.50); Vv 843 (+ appabhakkha expld. at Vv-a 334 as “appa-saddo h’ ettha abhāvattho appiccho appanigghoso ti ādisu viya”); Ja i.70; Dhp-a iv.12 -kasira in instr. ˚kasirena with little or no difficulty DN i.251; SN v.51; Thag 16. -kicca having few duties, free from obligations, free from care Snp 144 (= appaṃ kiccaṃ assā ti Kp-a 241). -gandha not smelling or having a bad smell Mil 252 (opp. sugandha). -ṭṭha “standing in little” i.e. connected with little trouble DN i.143; AN i.169. -thāmaka having little or no strength, weak SN iv.206. -dassa having little knowledge or wisdom Snp 1134 (see Nd ii.69 expld. by paritta-pañña Snp-a 605). -nigghosa with little sound, quiet, still, soundless (cp. Vv-a 334, as quoted above under ˚odaka) AN v.15 (+ appasadda); Snp 338; Nd i.377; Mil 371. -pañña, of little wisdom Ja ii.166; Ja iii.223 Ja iii.263. -puñña of little merit MN ii.5. -puññatā having little merit, unworthiness Pv iv.107. -phalatā bringing little fruit Pv-a 139. -bhakkha having little or nothing to eat Vv 843. -bhoga having little wealth, i.e. poor, indigent Snp 114 (= sannicitānaṃ ca bhogānaṃ āyamukhassa ca abhāvato Snp-a 173). -maññati to consider as small, to underrate: see separately. -matta little, slight, mean (usually as ˚ka; not to be confounded with appamatta2 AN iii.275; Ja i.242; also meaning “contented with little (of the bhikkhu) Iti 103 = AN ii.27; f. ˚ā trifle, smallness însignificance DN i.91; DN-a i.55. -mattaka small, insignificant trifling, nt. a trifle (cp. ˚matta) Vin 1, Vin 213; ii.177 (˚vissajjaka the distributor of little things, cp. AN iii.275 & Vin iv.38, Vin iv.155); DN i.3 (= appamattā etassā ti appamattakaṃ DN-a i.55); Ja i.167; Ja iii.12 (= aṇu); Pv-a 262 -middha “little slothful”, i.e. diligent, alert Mil 412 -rajakkha having little or no obtuseness DN ii.37; MN i.169 Sdhp 519. -ssaka having little of one’s own, possessing little AN i.261; AN ii.203. -sattha having few or no companious lonely, alone Dhp 123. -sadda free from noise quiet MN ii.2, MN ii.23, MN ii.30; AN v.15; Snp 925 (= appanigghosa Nd i.377); Pp 35; Mil 371. -siddhika bringing little success or welfare, dangerous Ja iv.4 (= mandasiddhi vināsabahula C.); vi.34 (samuddo a. bahu-antarāyiko) -ssuta possessing small knowledge, ignorant, uneducated DN i.93 (opp. bahussuta); iii.252, 282; SN iv.242; Iti 59; Dhp 152; Pp 20, Pp 62; Dhs 1327. -harita having little or no grass SN i.169; Snp p.15 (= paritta-harita-tiṇa Snp-a 154).

Vedic alpa, cp. Gr. ἀλαπάζω (λαπάζω) to empty (to make little), ἀλαπαδνός weak; Lith. alpnas weak alpstù to faint

Appaka

(adj.) little, small, trifling; pl. few. nt. ˚ṃ adv. a little DN ii.4; AN v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Snp 909 (opp. bahu); Dhp 85 (appakā = thokā na bahū Dhp-a ii.160); Pv i.102 (= paritta Pv-a 48); ii.939; Pp 62; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 60 (= paritta). f. appikā Ja i.228 ■ instr. appakena by little, i.e. easily DN-a i.256. -anappaka not little, i.e. much, considerable, great; pl. many SN iv.46; Dhp 144; Pv i.117 (= bahū Pv-a 58); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 25 (read anappake pi for T. ˚appakeci; so also Kp-a 208).

appa + ka

Appakāra

(adj.) not of natural form, of bad appearance, ugly, deformed Ja v.69 (= sarīrappakāra-rahita dussaṇṭhāna C.). Cp. apākatika.

a + pakāra

Appakiṇṇa

little or not crowded, not overheaped AN v.15 (C. anākiṇṇa).

appa + kiṇṇa, although in formation also = a + pakiṇṇa

Appagabbha

(adj.) unobtrusive, free from boldness, modest SN ii.198 = Mil 389, Snp 144, Snp 852 (cp Nd i.228 & Kp-a 232); Dhp 245.

a + pagabbha

Appaccaya

1. (n.) discontent, dissatisfaction, dejection, sulkiness DN i.3 (= appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassitā ti appacayo; domanass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ DN-a i.52); iii.159; MN i.442; AN i.79, AN i.124, AN i.187; AN ii.203 AN iii.181 sq.; AN iv.168, AN iv.193; Ja ii.277; Snp p.92 (kapa dosa + appacaya); Vv 8331 (= domanassaṃ Vv-a 343) Snp-a 423 (= appatītaṃ domanassaṃ).

2. (adj.) unconditioned Dhs 1084, Dhs 1437.

a + paccaya

Appaṭi˚

see in general under paṭi˚.

a + paṭi˚

Appaṭikārika

(adj.) “not providing against”, i.e. not making good, not making amends for, destructive Ja v.418 (spelling here & in C. appati˚).;

a + paṭikārika

Appaṭikopeti

not to disturb, shake or break (fig.) Ja v.173 (uposathaṃ).

a + paṭikopeti

Appaṭikkhippa

(adj.) not to be refused Ja ii.370. Appatigandhika & iya;

a + paṭikkhippa, grd. of paṭikkhipati

Appaṭigandhika & ˚iya

(adj.) not smelling disagreeable, i.e. with beautiful smell, scented odorous Ja v.405 (˚ika, but C. ˚iya; expld. by sugandhena udakena samannāgata); vi.518; Pv ii.120; iii.226.

a + paṭi + gandha + ika

Appaṭigha

(adj.) (a) not forming an obstacle, not injuring, unobstructive Snp 42 (see expld. at Nd ii.239; Snp-a 88 expls. “katthaci satte vā sankhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaññatī ti a.”) ■ (b) psychol. t. t. appld. to rūpa not reacting or impinging (opp. sappaṭigha) DN iii.217; Dhs 660, Dhs 756, Dhs 1090, Dhs 1443.

a + paṭigha

Appaṭicchavi

(adj.) at Pv ii.113 is faulty reading for sampatitacchavi (v.l.).

Appaṭibhāga

(adj) not having a counterpart, unequalled, incomparable Dhp-a i.423 (= anuttara).

a + paṭibhāga

Appaṭibhāṇa

(adj.) not answering back, bewildered, cowed down Vin iii.162; AN iii.57; ˚ṃ karoti to intimidate, bewilder Ja v.238, Ja v.369.

a + paṭibhāṇa

Appaṭima

(adj.) matchless, incomparable, invaluable Thag 614; Mil 239.

a + paṭima fr. prep. paṭi but cp. Vedic apratimāna fr. prati +

Appaṭivattiya

(adj.) (a) not to be rolled back Snp 554 (of dhammacakka may however be taken in meaning of b.) ■ (b) irresistable Ja ii.245 (sīhanada). Note. The spelling with ṭ is only found as v.l. at Ja ii.245; otherwise as t.

a + paṭi + vattiya = vṛtya, grd. or vṛt

Appaṭivāṇa

(nt.) non-obstruction, not hindering not opposing or contradicting AN i.50; AN iii.41; AN v.93 sq. adj. Ja i.326.

a + paṭivāṇa, for ˚vrāṇa, the guṇa-form of vṛ; cp. Sk. prativāraṇa

Appaṭivāṇitā

(f.) not being hindered, non-obstruction, free effort; only in phrase “asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivāṇitā ca padhānasmiṃ” (discontent with good states and the not shrinking back in the struggle Dhs trsl.358) AN i.50 AN i.95 = DN iii.214 = Dhs 1367.

abstr. from (ap)paṭivāṇa

Appaṭivāṇī

(f.) non-hindrance, non-restriction, free action impulsive effort; only in stock phrase chando vāyāmo ussāho ussoḷhī appaṭivāṇī SN ii.132; SN v.440; AN ii.93 AN ii.195; AN iii.307 sq.; AN iv.320; Nd ii.under chanda C. [cp. similarly Divy 654].

almost identical w. appaṭivāṇitā, only used in diff. phrase

Appaṭivāṇīya

(adj.) not to be obstructed irresistible SN i.212 (appld. to Nibbāna; Mrs. Rh. D Kindred S. p. 274 trsls. “that source from whence there is no turning back”), Thig 55.

grd. of a + paṭi + vṛ; cp. BSk. aprativāṇiḥ Divy 655; Mvu iii.343

Appaṭividdha

(adj.) “not shot through” i.e. unhurt Ja vi.446.

a + paṭi + viddha

Appaṭivibhatta

(˚bhogin) (adj.) (not eating) without sharing with others (with omission of another negative: see Trenckner, Mil p.429, where also Bdhgh’s expln.) AN iii.289; Mil 373; cp. Mil trsl. ii.292.

a + paṭi + vibhatta

Appaṭivekkhiya

not observing or noticing Ja iv.4 (= apaccavekkhitvā anavekkhitvā C.).

ger. of a + paṭi + avekkhati

Appaṭisaṅkhā

(f.) want of judgment Pp 21 = Dhs 1346.

a + paṭisankhā

Appaṭisandhika

(and ˚iya ) (adj.) 1. what cannot be put together again, unmendable irreparable (˚iya) Pv i.129 (= puna pākatiko na hoti Pv-a 66) = Ja iii.167 (= paṭipākatiko kātuṃ na sakkā C.). 2. incapable of reunion, not subject to reunion, i.e. to rebirth Ja v.100 (˚bhāva).

a + paṭisandhi + ka (ya)

Appaṭisama

(adj.) not having it’s equal, incomparable Ja i.94 (Baddha-sirī).

a + paṭi = sama; cp. BSk. apratisama Mvu i.104

Appaṭissavatā

(f.) want of deference Pp 20 = Dhs 1325.

a + paṭissavatā

Appaṇihita

(adj.) aimless, not bent on anything, free from desire, usually as nt. aimlessness combd. w. animittaṃ Vin iii.92, Vin iii.93 = Vin iv.25; Dhs 351 Dhs 508, Dhs 556. See on term Cpd. 67; Dhs trsl. 93, 143 cp. paṇihita.;

a + paṇihita

Appatiṭṭha

(adj.) 1. not standing still SN i.1.

2. without a footing or ground to stand on, bottomless Snp 173.

a + patiṭṭha

Appatissa

(& appaṭissa) (adj.) not docile, rebellious, always in combn. with agārava AN ii.20; AN iii.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 439. Appatissa-vāsa an unruly state anarchy Ja ii.352. See also paṭissā.

a + paṭi + ; śru

Appatīta

(adj.) dissatisfied, displeased, disappointed (cp. appaccaya) Ja v.103 (at this passage preferably to be read with v.l. as appatika = without husband, C. expls. assāmika), 155 (cp C. on p. 156); DN-a i.52; Snp-a 423.

a + patīta, of prati + i, Sk. pratīta

Appaduṭṭha

(adj.) not corrupt, faultless, of good behaviour Snp 662 (= padosâbhāvena a. Snp-a 478) Dhp 137 (= niraparādha Dhp-a iii.70).

a + paduṭṭha

Appadhaṃsa

(adj.) not to be destroyed Ja iv.344 (v.l. duppadhaṃsa).

= appadhaṃsiya, Sk. apradhvaṃsya

Appadhaṃsika

(& ˚iya) (adj.) not to be violated or destroyed, inconquerable, indestructible DN iii.175 (˚ika, v.l. ˚iya); Ja iii.159 (˚iya); Vv-a 208 (˚iya); Pv-a 117 (˚iya). Cp. appadhaṃsa.

grd. of a + padhaṃseti

Appadhaṃsita

(adj.) not violated, unhurt, not offended Vin iv.229.

pp. of a + padhaṃseti

Appanā

(f.) [cp. Sk. arpaṇa, abstr. fr. appeti = arpayati from of ; to fix, turn, direct one’s mind; see appeti application (of mind), ecstasy,fixing of thought on an object conception (as psychol. t. t.) Ja ii.61 (˚patta); Mil 62 (of vitakka); Dhs 7, Dhs 21, Dhs 298; Vism 144 (˚samādhi); Dhs-a 55, Dhs-a 142 (def. by Bdhg. as “ekaggaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇe appeti”), 214 (˚jhāna). See on term Cpd. pp. 56 sq., 68 129, 215; Dhs trsl. xxviii.10, 53, 82, 347.

Appabhoti

(Appahoti) see pahoti.

Appamaññati

to think little of, to underrate, despise Dhp 121 (= avajānāti Dhp-a iii.16; v.l. avapamaññati).

appa + maññati

Appamaññā

(f.) boundlessness, infinitude, as psych. t. t. appld. in later books to the four varieties of philanthropy, viz mettā karuṃā muditā upekkhā i.e. love, pity, sympathy desinterestedness, and as such enumd. at DN iii.223 (q. v for detailed ref. as to var. passages); Pts i.84; Vb 272 sq.; Dhs-a 195. By itself at Snp 507 (= mettajjhānasankhātā a. Snp-a 417). See for further expln.Dhs trsl. p. 66 and mettā.

a + pamaññā, abstr. fr. pamāṇa = Sk. *pramānya

Appamatta1

(adj.) see appa.

appa + matta

Appamatta2

(adj.) not negligent, i.e. diligent, careful, heedful, vigilant, alert zealous MN i.391–⁠92; SN i.4; Snp 223 (cp. Kp-a 169), 507 779 (cp. Nd i.59); Dhp 22 (cp. Dhp-a i.229); Thig 338 = upaṭṭhitasati Th A 239).

a + pamatta, pp. of pamadati

Appamāda

thoughtfulness, carefulness, conscientiousness, watchfulness, vigilance, earnestness, zeal DN i.13 (: a. vuccati satiyā avippavāso DN-a i.104); iii.30 104 sq., 112, 244, 248, 272; MN i.477 (˚phala); SN i.25 SN i.86, SN i.158, SN i.214; SN ii.29, SN ii.132; SN iv.78 (˚vihārin), 97, 125, 252 sq.; v.30 sq. (˚sampadā), 41 sq., 91, 135, 240, 250, 308 350; AN i.16, AN i.50. (˚adhigata); iii.330, 364, 449; iv.28 (˚gāravatā) 120 (˚ṃ garu-karoti); v.21, 126 (kusalesu dhammesu); Snp 184, Snp 264, Snp 334 (= sati-avippavāsa-sankhāta a. Snp-a 339); Iti 16 (˚ṃ pasaṃsanti puññakiriyāsu paṇḍitā) 74 (˚vihārin); Dhp 57 (˚vihārin, cp. Dhp-a i.434); 327 (˚rata = satiyā avippavāse abhirata Dhp-a iv.26); Dāvs ii.35; Kp-a 142.

a + pamāda

Appamāṇa

(freq. spelled appamāna ) (adj.) 1. “without measure”, immeasurable, endless, boundless unlimited, unrestricted all-permeating SN iv.186 (˚cetaso) AN ii.73; AN v.63; Snp 507 (mettaṃ cittaṃ bhāvayaṃ appāmāṇaṃ = anavasesa-pharaṇena Snp-a 417; cp. appamaññā) Iti 21 (mettā), 78; Ja ii.61; Pts ii.126 sq.; Vb 16, Vb 24 Vb 49, Vb 62, Vb 326 sq.; Dhs 182, Dhs 1021, Dhs 1024, Dhs 1405; Dhs-a 45 Dhs-a 196 (˚gocara, cp. anantagocara). See also on term Dhs trsl. 60.

2. “without difference”, irrelevant, in general (in commentary style) Ja i.165; Ja ii.323.

a + pamāṇa

Appameyya

(adj.) immeasurable, infinite, boundless MN i.386; SN v.400; AN i.266; Thag 1089 (an˚); Pp 35; Mil 331 Sdhp 338.

a + pameyya = Sk. aprameya, grd. of a + pra +

Appavattā

(f.) the state of not going on, the stop (to all that), the non-continuance (of all that Thag 767; Mil 326.

a + pavattā

Appasāda

see pasāda.

Appassāda

see appa.

Appahīna

(adj.) not given up, not renounced MN i.386; Iti 56, Iti 57; Nd ii.70 D1 Pp 12, Pp 18.

a + pahīna, pp. of pahāyati

Appāṇaka

(adj.) breathless, i.e. (1) holding one’s breath in a form of ecstatic meditation (jhāna) MN i.243; Ja i.67 [cp. BSk. āsphānaka Lal. v.314, 324; Mvu ii.124; should the Pāli form be taken as *a + prāṇaka?] (2) not holding anything breathing, i.e. inanimate, lifeless not containing life Snp p.15 (of water).

a + pāṇa + ka

Appikā

(f.) of appaka.

Appiccha

(adj.) desiring little or nothing, easily satisfied, unassuming, contented unpretentious SN i.63, SN i.65; AN iii.432; AN iv.2, AN iv.218 sq., 229 v.124 sq., 130, 154, 167; Snp 628, Snp 707; Dhp 404; Pv iv.73; Pp 70.

appa + iccha from iṣ, cp. icchā

Appicchatā

(f.) contentment, being satisfied with little, unostentatiousness Vin iii.21; DN iii.115; MN i.13; SN ii.202, SN ii.208 sq.; AN i.12, AN i.16 sq.; AN iii.219 sq., 448 iv.218, 280 (opp. mahicchatā); Mil 242; Snp-a 494 (catubbidhā, viz. paccaya-dhutanga-pariyatti-adhigama-vasena); Pv-a 73. As one of the 5 dhutanga-dhammā at Vism 81.

abstr. fr. prec.

Appita

(adj.) 1. fixed, applied, concentrated (mind) Mil 415 (mānasa) Sdhp 233 (citta).

2. brought to, put to, fixed on Ja vi.78 (maraṇamukhe); visappita (an arrow to which) poison (is) applied, so read for visap(p)īta at Ja v.36 & Vism 303.; Appiya & Appiyata

pp. of appeti, cp. BSk. arpita, e.g. prītyarpitaṃ cakṣuḥ Jtm 3169

Appiya & Appiyatā

see piya etc.

Appekadā

(adv.) see api 2 ax.

Appeti

1. (*er) to move forward, rush on run into (of river) Vin ii.238; Mil 70.

2. (*ar) to fit in, fix, apply, insert, put on to (lit. & fig.) Vin ii.136 Vin ii.137; Ja iii.34 (nimba-sūlasmiṃ to impale, C. āvuṇāti) vi.17 (T. sūlasmiṃ acceti, vv.ll. abbeti = appeti & upeti C. āvuṇati); Mil 62 (dāruṃ sandhismiṃ); Vv-a 110 (saññāṇaṃ). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19, who defends reading abbeti at T. passages.

Vedic arpayati, Caus. of ; ṛṇoti & ṛcchati (cp. icchati;2), Idg. *ar (to insert or put together, cp. also *er under aṇṇava) to which belong Sk. ara spoke of a wheel; Gr. ἀραρίσκω to put together, α ̔́ρμα chariot, α ̓́ρχρον limb, ἀρετή virtue; Lat. arma = E. arms (i.e. weapon) artus fixed, tight, also limb, ars = art. For further connections see aṇṇava

Appesakkha

(adj.) of little power, weak, impotent SN ii.229; Mil 65; Sdhp 89.

acc. to Childers = Sk. *alpa + īśa + ākhya, the latter fr. ā + khyā “being called lord of little”; Trenckner on Mil 65 (see p. 422) says: “appesakkha & mahesakkha are traditionally expl;d. appaparivāra & mahāparivāra, the former, I suppose, from appe & sakkha (Sk. sākhya), the latter an imitation of it” Thus the etym. would be “having little association or friendship” and resemble the term appasattha. The BSk forms are alpeśākhya & maheśākhya, e.g. at Avs; ii. 153; Divy 243

Appoti

to attain, reach, get Vism 350 (in etym. of āpo).

the contracted form of āpnoti, usually pāpuṇāti, fr. āp

Appodaka

see appa.

Appossukka

(adj.) unconcerned, living at ease, careless, “not bothering”, keeping still, inactive Vin ii.188; MN iii.175, MN iii.176; SN i.202 (in stock phrase appossukka tuṇhībhūta saṅkasāya “living at ease, given to silence, resigned” Mrs Rh. D. Dhs trsl. 258, see also J.P.T.S. 1909, 22); ii. 177 (id.); iv.178 (id.); Thig 457 (= nirussukka Thag-a 282); Snp 43 (= abyāvaṭa anapekkha Nd ii.72); Dhp 330 (= nirālaya Dhp-a iv.31); Ja i.197; Ja iv.71; Mil 371 (a tiṭṭhati to keep still); DN-a i.264.

appa + ussuka, Sk. alpotsuka, e.g. Lal. V. 509; Divy 41, Divy 57, Divy 86, Divy 159. It is not necessary to assume a hypothetic form of *autsukya as der. fr ussuka

Appossukkatā

(f.) inaction, reluctance, carelessness, indifference Vin i.5; DN ii.36; Mil 232; Dhp-a ii.15.

abstr. fr. prec.

Apphuta

(& apphuṭa) untouched, unpervaded not penetrated. DN i.74 = MN i.276 (pītisukhena).

Sk. *ā-sphṛta for a-sphārita pp. of sphar, cp. phurati; phuṭa & also phusati

Apphoṭā

(f.) Name of a kind of Jasmine Ja vi.336.

fr. appoṭeti to blossom

Apphoṭita

having snapped one’s fingers or clapped one’s hands Ja ii.311 (˚kāle).

pp. of apphoṭeti

Apphoṭeti

to snap the fingers or clap the hands (as sign of pleasure) Mil 13, Mil 20. pp. apphoṭita.

ā + phoṭeti, sphuṭ;

Aphusa

not to be touched Mil 157 (trsl. unchangeable by other circumstances; Tr. on p. 425 remarks “aphusāni kiriyāni seems wrong, at any rate it is unintelligible to me”).

Sk. *aspṛśya, a + grd. of phusati to touch

Aphegguka

(adj.) not weak, i.e. strong Ja iii.318.

a + pheggu + ka

Abaddha

not tied, unbound, unfettered Snp 39 (v.l. and Nd ii.abandha; expld- by rajju-bandhan’ ādisu yena kenaci abaddha Snp-a 83).

a + baddha

Abandha

(n ■ adj.) not tied to, not a follower or victim of Iti 56 (mārassa; v.l. abaddha).

a + bandha

Abandhana

(adj.) without fetters or bonds, unfettered, untrammelled Snp 948, cp. Nd i.433.

a + bandhana

Ababa

. Name of a cert. Purgatory, enumd. with many other similar names at AN v.173 = Snp p.126 (cp. aṭaṭa, abbuda & also Av Ś; i.4, 10 & see for further expl;n. of term Snp-a 476 sq.

of uncertain origin, prob. onomatopoetic

Abala

(adj.) not strong, weak, feeble Snp 1120 (= dubbala, appabala, appathāma Nd ii.73); Dhp 29 (˚assa a weak horse = dubbalassa Dhp-a i.262; opp. sīghassa a quick horse).

a + bala

Abbaje

T. reading at AN ii.39, evidently interpreted by ed. as ā + vraje, pot. of ā + vraj to go to, come to (cp pabbajati), but is preferably with v.l. SS to be read aṇḍaje (corresponding with vihangama in prec. line).

Abbaṇa

(adj.) without wounds Dhp 124.

a + vaṇa, Sk. avraṇa

Abbata

(n ■ adj.) (a) (nt.) that which is not “vata” i.e. moral obligation, breaking of the moral obligation Snp 839 (asīlata + ); Nd i.188 (v.l. SS abhabbata; expld. again as a-vatta). Snp-a 545 (= dhutangavataṃ vinā ■ (b) (adj.) one who offends against the moral obligation, lawless Dhp 264 (= sīlavatena ca dhutavatena ca virahita Dhp-a iii.391; vv.ll. k. adhūta & abhūta; B abbhuta, C. abbuta).

a + vata, Sk. avrata

Abbaya

in uday˚ at Mil 393 stands for avyaya.

Abbahati

(& abbuhati) to draw off, pull out (a sting or dart); imper. pres. abbaha Thag 404; Ja ii.95 (v.l. BB appuha = abbuha; C. expls. by uddharatha) ■ aor. abbahi Ja v.198 (v.l. BB abbuhi), abbahī (metri causa) Ja iii.390 (v.l. BB dhabbuḷi = abbuḷhi) = Pv i.86 (which reads T. abbūḷha, but Pv-a 41 expls. nīhari) = Dhp-a i.30 (vv.ll. sabbahi, sabbamhi; gloss K. B abbūḷhaṃ) = Vv 839 (T. abbuḷhi; v.l. BB abbuḷhaṃ, SS avyahi; Vv-a 327 expls. as uddhari), & abbuhi AN iii.55 (v.l. abbahi, C abbahī ti nīhari), see also vv.ll. under abbahi ■ ger abbuyha Snp 939 (= abbuhitvā uddharitvā Nd i.419; v.l SS abbuyhitvā; Snp-a 567 reads avyuyha & expl;s. by uddharitvā); SN i.121 (taṇhaṃ); iii.26 (id.; but spelt abbhuyha) ■ pp. abbuḷha (q.v.) ■ Caus. abbāheti [Sk ābarhayati] to pull out, drag out Ja iv.364 (satthaṃ abbāhayanti; v.l. abbhā˚); Dhp-a ii.249 (asiṃ). ger. abbāhitvā (= ˚hetvā) Vin ii.201 (bhisa-muḷālaṃ) with v.l. BB aggahetvā SS abbūhitvā, cp. Vin i.214 (vv.ll. aggahitvā abbāhitvā). pp.; abbūḷhita (q.v.).

the first more freq. for pres., the second often in aor. forms; Sk. ābṛhati, ā + bṛh1, pp bṛḍha (see abbūḷha)

Abbāhana

(nt.) pulling out (of a sting) Dhp-a iii.404 (sic. T.; v.l. abbūhana; Fausböll aḍahana glosses C. aṭṭhangata & aṭṭhangika, K. nibbāpana). See also; abbuḷhana and abbhāhana.

abstr. fr. abbahati

Abbuda

(nt.) [etym. unknown, orig. meaning “swelling”, the Sk. form arbuda seems to be a trsl. of P. abbuda 1. the foetus in the 1st & 2;nd months after conception the 2nd of the five prenatal stages of development, viz kalala, abbuda, pesi, ghana, pasākha Nd i.120; Mil 40 Vism 236.

2. a tumour, canker, sore Vin iii.294, Vin iii.307 (only in Samantapāsādikā; both times as sāsanassa a).

3. a very high numeral, appld. exclusively to the denotation of a vast period of suffering in Purgatory; in this sense used as adj. of Niraya (abbudo nirayo the “vast-period hell, cp. nirabbuda). SN i.149 = AN ii.3 (chattiṃsati pañca ca abbudāni); SN i.152 = AN v.173 = Snp p.126 (cp. Snp-a 476: abbudo nāma koci pacceka-nirayo n’ atthi, Avīcimhi yeva abbuda-gaṇanāya paccanokāso pana abbudo nirayo ti vutto; see also Kindred Sayings p. 190); Ja iii.360 (sataṃ ninnahuta-sahassānaṃ ekaṃ abbudaṃ).

4. a term used for “hell” in the riddle SN i.43 (kiṃsu lokasmiṃ abhudaṃ “who are they who make a hell on earth” Mrs Rh. D. The answer is “thieves”; so we can scarcely take it in meaning of 2 or 3. The C. has vināsa-karaṇaṃ.

Abbuḷhati

(?) & Abbuhati see abbahati.

Abbuḷhana

(nt.) the pulling out (of a sting), in phrase taṇhā-sallassa abbuḷhanaṃ as one of the 12 achievements of a Mahesi Nd i.343 = Nd ii.503 (eds. of Nd i.have abbūhana, v.l. SS abbussāna; ed. of Nd ii.abbuḷhana, v.l. SS abbahana, BB abbuhana). Cp. abbāhana.

fr. abbahati = abbuhati (abbuḷhati)

Abbūḷha

(adj.) drawn out, pulled (of a sting or dart), fig. removed destroyed. Most freq. in combn. ˚salla with the sting removed, having the sting (of craving thirst, taṇhā) pulled out DN ii.283 (v.l. SS asammūḷha); Snp 593, Snp 779 (= abbūḷhita-salla Nd i.59; rāgâdi-sallānaṃ abbūḷhattā a. Snp-a 518); Ja iii.390 = Vv 8310 = Pv i.87 = Dhp-a i.30 ■ In other connection: MN i.139 = AN iii.84 (˚esika = taṇhā pahīnā; see esikā); Thag 321; Kp-a 153 (˚soka).

Sk. ābṛḍha, pp. of a + bṛh1, see abbahati

Abbūḷhatta

(nt.) pulling out, removal, destroying Snp-a 518.

abstr. of abbūḷha

Abbūḷhita

(& abbūhitta at Ja iii.541) pulled out, removed, destroyed Nd i.59 (abbūḷhita-sallo + uddhaṭa˚ etc. for abbūḷha); Ja iii.541 (uncertain reading; v.l. BB appahita, SS abyūhita; C. expls. pupphakaṃ ṭhapitaṃ appaggharakaṃ kataṃ; should we explain as ā + vi + ūh and read abyūhita?).

pp. of abbāheti Caus. of abbāhati

Abbeti

at Ja iii.34 & vi.17 is probably a mistake in MSS for appeti.

Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19

Abbokiṇṇa

1.filled MN i.387 (paripuṇṇa + ); Dhp-a iv.182 (pañca jātisatāni a.).

2. [seems to be misunderstood for abbocchinna, a + vi + ava + chinna] uninterrupted constant, as ˚ṃ adv. in combn. with satataṃ samitaṃ AN iv.13 = AN iv.145; Kv 401 (v.l. abbhokiṇṇa), cp. also Kvu trsl. 231 n. 1 (abbokiṇṇa undiluted?); Vb 320.

3 doubtful spelling at Vin iii.271 (Bdhgh on Pārāj. iii.1, 3).

= abbhokiṇṇa, abhi + ava + kiṇṇa, cp. abhikiṇṇa

Abbocchinna

see abbokiṇṇa 2 and abbhochinna.

Abbohārika

(adj.) not of legal or conventional status, i.e ■ (a) negligible, not to be decided Vin iii.91, Vin iii.112 (see also Kvu trsl. 361 n. 4) ■ (b) uncommon, extraordinary Ja iii.309 (v.l. BB abbho˚); v.271, 286 (Kern: ineffective).

a + vi + ava + hārika of voharati

Abbha

(nt.). A (dense & dark) cloud, a cloudy mass AN ii.53; Vin ii.295 = Mil 273 in list of to things that obscure moon-& sunshine, viz.; abbhaṃ mahikā (mahiyā A) dhūmarajo (megho Miln), Rāhu. This list is referred to at Snp-a 487 & Vv-a 134. SN i.101 (˚sama pabbata a mountain like a thunder-cloud); Ja vi.581 (abbhaṃ rajo acchādesi) Pv iv.39 (nīl˚ = nīla-megha Pv-a 251). As f. abbhā at Dhs 617 & Dhs-a 317 (used in sense of adj. “dull” Dhs-a expls. by valāhaka); perhaps also in abbhāmatta.

-kūṭa the point or summit of a storm-cloud Thag 1064; Ja vi.249, Ja vi.250; Vv 11 (= valāhaka-sikhara Vv-a 12) -ghana a mass of clouds, a thick cloud Iti 64; Snp 348 (cp. Snp-a 348). -paṭala a mass of clouds Dhs-a 239 -mutta free from clouds Snp 687 (also as abbhāmutta Dhp 382). -saṃvilāpa thundering SN iv.289.

Vedic abhra nt. & later Sk. abhra m. “dark cloud”; Idg. *m̊bhro, cp. Gr. ἀφρἀφρο scum, froth, Lat. imber rain; also Sk. ambha water, Gr. ο ̓́μβρος rain, Oir ambu water

Abbhakkhāti

to speak against to accuse, slander DN i.161 = AN i.161 (an-abbhakkhātu-kāma); iv.182 (id.); Ja iv.377. Cp. Intens. abbhācikkhati.

abhi + ā + khyā, cp. Sk. ākhyāti

Abbhakkhāna

(nt.) accusation, slander, calumny DN iii.248, DN iii.250; MN i.130; MN iii.207; AN iii.290 sq. Dhp 139 (cp. Dhp-a iii.70).

fr. abbhakkhāti

Abbhacchādita

covered (with) Thag 1068.

pp. of abhi + ā + chādeti

Abbhañjati

to anoint; to oil, to lubricate MN i.343 (sappi-telena); SN iv.177; Pp 56; Dhp-a iii.311; Vv-a 68 (sata-pāka-telena). Caus. abbhañjeti same Ja i.438 (telena ˚etvā); v.376 (sata-pāka-telena ˚ayiṃsu); Caus. ii. abbhanjāpeti to cause to anoint Ja iii.372.

abhi + añj

Abbhañjana

(nt.) anointing, lubricating, oiling; unction, unguent Vin i.205; Vin iii.79; Mil 367 (akkhassa a.); Vism 264; Vv-a 295.

fr. abbhañjati

Abbhatika

(adj.) brought (to), procured, got, Ja vi.291.

ā + bhata + ika, bhṛ;

Abbhatikkanta

one who has thoroughly, left behind Ja v.376.

pp. of abhi + ati + kram, cp. atikkanta

Abbhatīta

emphatic of atīta in all meanings, viz. 1 passed, gone by SN ii.183 (+ atikkanta); nt. ˚ṃ what is gone or over the past Ja iii.169.

2. passed away, dead MN i.465; SN iv.398; Thag 242, Thag 1035.

3. transgressed, overstepped neglected Ja iii.541 (saṃyama).

pp. of abhi + ati + i, cp. atīta & atikkanta

Abbhattha

(nt.) = attha2, only in phrase abbhatthaṃ gacchati “to go towards home”, i.e. setting; fig. to disappear, vanish MN i.115, MN i.119; MN iii.25; AN iv.32; Mil 305; pp. abhhattaṅgata “set”, gone, disappeared Dhs 1038 (atthangata + ) Kv 576.

abhi + attha2 in acc. abhi + atthaṃ, abhi in function of “towards” = homeward, as under abhi i.1 a; cp. Vedic abhi sadhasthaṃ to the seat R. V. ix. 21. 3

Abbhatthatā

(f.) “going towards setting”, disappearance, death Ja v.469.

abstr. fr. abbhatta

Abbhanumodati

to be much pleased at to show great appreciation of Vin i.196; DN i.143, DN i.190; SN iv.224; Mil 29, Mil 210; Dhp-a iv.102 (v.l. ˚ānu˚).

abhi + anu + modati

Abbhanumodana

(nt.) (& ˚ā f.) being pleased, satisfaction, thanksgiving DN-a i.227; Vv-a 52 (˚ānu˚); Sdhp 218.

fr. abbhanumodati

Abbhantara

(adj.) = antara, i.e. internal, inner, being within or between; nt. ˚ṃ the inner part, interior, interval (also as ˚-) Vin i.111 (satt˚ with interval of seven); AN iv.16 (opp. bāhira); Dhp 394 (id.); Thag 757 (˚âpassaya lying inside); Ja iii.395 (˚amba the inside of the Mango); Mil 30 (˚e vāyo jivo), 262, 281 (bāhir-abbhantara dhana) Dhp-a ii.74 (adj. c. gen. being among; v.l. abbhantare). Cases used adverbially: instr. abbhantarena in the meantime in between Dhp-a ii.59. loc. abbhantare in the midst of, inside of, within (c. gen. or-˚) Ja i.262 (rañño), 280 (tuyhaṃ); Dhp-a ii.64 (v.l. antare), 92 (sattavass˚); Pv-a 48 (= anto).

abhi + antara; abhi here in directive function = towards the inside, in there, with-in, cp. abhi i.1 a

Abbhantarika

(adj.-n.) intimate friend, confidant, “chum” Ja i.86 (+ ativissāsika), 337 (“insider”, opp. bāhiraka).

fr. abbhantara, cp. Sk. abhyantara in same meaning

Abbhantarima

(adj.) internal, inner (opp. bāhirima ) Vin iii.149; Ja v.38.

superl. formation fr. abbhantara in contrasting function

Abbhākuṭika

(adj.) not frowning, genial Vin iii.181 (but here spelt bhākuṭikabhākuṭika); DN i.116, cp. DN-a i.287; Dhp-a iv.8 (as v.l. T. has abbhokuṭika).

a + bhākuṭi + ka; Sk. bhrakuṭi frown

Abbhāgata

having arrived or come; (m.) a guest, stranger Vv 15 (= abhi-āgata, āgantuka Vv-a 24).

abhi + ā + gata

Abbhāgamana

(nt.) coming arrival, approach Vin iv.221.

abhi + ā + gamana; cp. Sk. abhyāgama

Abbhāghāta

slaughtering-place Vin iii.151 (+ āghāta).

abhi + āghāta

Abbhācikkhati

to accuse, slander, calumniate DN i.161; DN iii.248, DN iii.250; MN i.130, MN i.368, MN i.482 MN iii.207; AN i.161.

Intens. of abbhākkhāti

Abbhāna

(nt.) coming back, rehabilitation of a bhikkhu who has undergone a penance for an expiable offence Vin i.49 (˚âraha), 53 (id.), 143 327; ii.33, 40, 162; AN i.99 ■ Cp. abbheti.

abhi + āyana of ā + yā (i)

Abbhāmatta

(adj.) monstrous dreadful, enormous, “of the size of a large cloud (thus C. on SN i.205 & Ja iii.309) SN i.205 = Thag 652 (v.l. abbha˚ & abbhāmutta) = Ja iii.309 (v.l. ˚mutta).

abbhā + matta (?) according to the Pāli Com.; but more likely = Vedic abhva huge, enormous monstrous, with ā metri causa. On abhva (a + bhū what is contradictory to anything that is) cp. abbhuta abbhuṃ, and see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dubius

Abbhāhata

struck, attacked, afflicted SN i.40 (maccunā); Thag 448; Snp 581; Ja vi.26 Ja vi.440; Vism 31, Vism 232; DN-a i.140, DN-a i.147; Dhp-a iv.25.

abhi + ā + hata, pp. of han

Abbhāhana

(nt.) in udaka˚; the pulling up or drawing up of water Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh on Cullavagga v.16, 2, corresponding to udaka-vāhana on p. 122).

either = abbāhana or āvāhana

Abbhita

1. come back, rehabilitated, reinstated Vin iii.186 = Vin iv.242 (an˚).

2. uncertain reading at Pv i.123 in sense of “called” (an˚ uncalled), where id p. at Ja iii.165 reads anavhāta & at Thig 129 ayācita.;

pp. of abbheti

Abbhu

unprofitableness, idleness, nonsense Ja v.295 (= abhūti avaḍḍhi C.).

a + bhū most likely = Vedic abhva and P. abbhuṃ, see also abbhāmatta

Abbhuṃ

(interj.) alas terrible, dreadful, awful (excl. of fright & shock) Vin; ii. 115 (Bdhgh. expls. as “utrāsa-vacanam-etaṃ”); MN i.448. See also abbhu & abbhuta;.

Vedic abhvaṃ, nt. of abhva, see expld. under abbhamatta. Not quite correct Morris JP T S. 1889, 201: abbhuṃ = ā + bhuk; cp also abbhuta

Abbhukkiraṇa

(nt.) drawing out, pulling, in daṇḍa-sattha˚ drawing a stick or sword Nd ii.5764 (cp abbhokkiraṇa). Or is it abbhuttīraṇa (cp. uttiṇṇa outlet).

abhi + ud + kṛ;

Abbhukkirati

to sprinkle over, to rinse (with water) DN ii.172 (cakkaratanaṃ; neither with Morris JP T S. 1886, 131 “give up”, nor with trsl. of Ja ii.311 “roll along”); Ja v.390; Pv-a 75. Cp. abbhokkirati.

abhi + ud + kirati

Abbhuggacchati

to go forth, go out, rise into DN i.112, DN i.127; AN iii.252 (kitti-saddo a.) Pp 36. ger. ˚gantvā Ja i.88 (ākāsaṃ), 202; Dhp-a iv.198 aor. ˚gañchi MN i.126 (kittisaddo); Ja i.93 ■ pp. abbhuggata.

abhi + ud + gacchati

Abbhuggata

gone forth, gone out, risen DN i.88 (kitti-saddo a., cp. Dhp-a i.146: sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā uggato), 107 (saddo); Snp p.103 (kittisaddo).

pp. of abbhuggacchati

Abbhuggamana

(nt ■ adj.) going out over, rising over (c. acc.) Pv-a 65 (candaṃ nabhaṃ abbhuggamanaṃ; so read for T. abbhuggamānaṃ).

fr. abbhuggacchati

Abbhujjalana

(nt.) breathing out fire, i.e. carrying fire in one’s month (by means of a charm) DN i.11 (= mantena mukhato aggi-jala-nīharaṇaṃ DN-a i.97).

abhi + ud + jalana, from jval

Abbhuṭṭhāti

(˚ṭṭhahati) to get up to, proceed to, DN i.105 (cankamaṃ).

abhi + ud + sthā

Abbhuṇṇata

standing up, held up, erect Ja v.156 (in abbhuṇṇatatā state of being erect. stiffness), 197 (˚unnata; v.l. abbhantara, is reading correct?).

pp. of abbhunnamati

Abbhuṇha

(adj.) (a) very hot Dhp-a ii.87 (v.l. accuṇha). (b) quite hot, still warm (of milk) Dhp-a ii.67.

ahhi + uṇha

Abbhuta1

(adj. nt.) terrifying, astonishing; strange, exceptional puzzling, extraordinary, marvellous, supernormal Described as a term of surprise & consternation (vimhay;’ āvahass’ adhivacanaṃ DN-a i.43 & Vv-a 329) & expl;d. as “something that is not” or “has not been before”, viz abhūtaṃ Thag-a 233; abhūta-pubbatāya abbhutaṃ Vv-a 191 Vv-a 329; abhūta-pubbaṃ DN-a i.43.

1. (adj.) wonderful marvellous etc. Snp 681 (kiṃ ˚ṃ, combd. with lomahaṃsana) Ja iv.355 (id.); Thig 316 (abbhutaṃ vata vācaṃ bhāsasi = acchariyaṃ Thag-a 233); Vv 449 (˚dassaneyya); Sdhp 345, Sdhp 496.

2. (nt.) the wonderful, a wonder, marvel SN iv.371, also in ˚dhamma (see Cpd.). Very freq. in combn. with acchariyaṃ and a part. of exclamation, viz acchariyaṃ bho abbhutaṃ bho wonderful indeed & beyond comprehension, strange & stupefying DN i.206; acch. vata bho abbh. vata bho DN i.60; acch. bhante abbh. AN ii.50 aho acch. aho abbh. Ja i.88; acch. vata abbh. vata Vv 8316 ■ Thus also in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā wonderful & extraordinary signs or things MN iii.118, MN iii.125; AN ii.130; AN iv.198; Mil 8; and in acchariya-abbhutacitta-jāta dumbfounded & surprised Ja i.88; Dhp-a iv.52; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 50.

-dhamma mysterious phenomenon, something wonderful supernormal; designation of one of the nine angas or divisions of the Buddhist Scriptures (see nava B 2; Vin iii.8; MN i.133; AN ii.103; AN iii.86, AN iii.177; Pp 43; Mil 344; Pv-a 2, etc.

*Sk. adbhuta which appears to be constructed from the Pāli & offers like its companion *āścarya (acchariya abbhuta see below) serious difficulties as to etym. The most probable solution is that P. abbhuta is a secondary adj ■ formation from abbhuṃ which in itself is nt. of abbha = Vedic abhva (see etym. under abbhāmatta and cp. abbhu, abbhuṃ & J.P.T.S. 1889, 201). In meaning abbhuta is identical with Vedic abhva contrary to what usually happens, i.e. striking, abnormal, gruesome horrible etc.; & that its significance as a + ; bhū (“unreal?”) is felt in the background is also evident from the traditional etym. of the Pāli Commentators (see below) See also acchariya

Abbhuta2

(nt.) a bet, a wager, only in phrase abbhutaṃ karoti (sahassena) to make a bet or to bet (a thousand i.e. kahāpaṇa’s or pieces of money) Vin iii.138; Vin iv.5; Ja i.191; Ja v.427; Ja vi.192; Pv-a 151; & in phrase pañcahi sahassehi abbhutaṃ hotu Ja vi.193.

= abbhuta1 in the sense of invoking strange powers in gambling, thus being under direct spell of the “unknown”

Abbhudāharati

to bring towards, to fetch, to begin or introduce (a conversation) MN ii.132.

abhi + ud + ā + harati

Abbhudīreti

to raise the voice, to utter Thig 402; DN-a i.61; Sdhp 514.

abhi + ud + īreti

Abbhudeti

to go out over, to rise AN ii.50, AN ii.51 (opp. atthaṃ eti, of the sun) ■ ppr. abbhuddayaṃ Vv 6417 (= abhi-uggacchanto Vv-a 280; abbhusayaṃ ti pi pāṭho).

abhi + ud + eti

Abbhuddhunāti

to shake very much Vv 649 (= adhikaṃ uddhunāti Vv-a 278).

abhi + ud + dhunāti

Abbhunnadita

resounding, resonant Thag 1065).

pp. of abhi + ud + nadati

Abbhunnamati

to, spring up, burst forth DN ii.164 ■ pp. abbhuṇṇata (& ˚unnata), q.v.; Caus. abbhunnāmeti to stiffen, straighten out, hold up erect DN i.120 (kāyaṃ one’s body); AN ii.245 (id.); DN i.126 (patodalaṭṭhiṃ; opp. apanāmeti to bend down).

abhi, + ud + namati

Abbhuyyāta

marched against, attacked Vin i.342; MN ii.124.

pp. of abbhuyyāti

Abbhuyyāti

to go against, to go against, to march (an army) against, to attack SN i.82 (aor ˚uyyāsi) ■ pp. abbhuy y āta (q.v.).

abhi + up + yāti of

Abbhusūyaka

(adj.) zealous, showing zeal, endeavouring in (-˚) Pgdp 101. Abbhussakati & usukkati;

abhi + usūyā + ka

Abbhussakati & ˚usukkati

to go out over, rise above (acc.), ascend, freq. in phrase ādicco nabhaṃ abbhussakkamāno MN i.317; SN iii.156 = Iti 20 ■ See also SN i.65; SN v.44; AN i.242 (same simile); v.22 (id.).

abhi + ud + ṣvaṣk, see sakkati

Abbhussahanatā

(f.) instigation, incitement Vin ii.88.

abstr. fr. abhi + *utsahana, cp. ussāha

Abbhusseti

to rise; v.l. at Vv 6417 according to Vv-a 280: abbhuddayaṃ (see abbhudeti abbhussayan ti pi pāṭho.

abhi + ud + seti of śī

Abbheti

to rehabilitate a bhikkhu who has been suspended for breach of rules Vin ii.7 (abbhento) 33 (abbheyya); iii.112 (abbheti), 186 = iv.242 (abbhetabba)-pp. abbhita (q.v.). See also abbhāna.

abhi + ā + i

Abbhokāsa

the open air, an open & unsheltered space DN i.63 (= alagganatthena a. viya DN-a i.180), 71 (= acchanna DN-a i.210), 89; MN iii.132; AN ii.210; AN iii.92; AN iv.437, AN v.65; Snp p.139 (˚e nissinna sitting in the open) Ja i.29, Ja i.215; Pp 57.

abhi + avakāsa

Abbhokāsika

(adj.) belonging to the open air, one who lives in the open, the practice of certain ascetics. DN i.167; MN i.282; AN iii.220; Vin v.131, Vin v.193; Ja iv.8 (+ nesajjika); Pp 69; Mil 20, Mil 342. (One of the 13 Dhutaṃgas). See also Nd i.188; Nd ii.587.

-aṅga the practice or system of the “campers-out” Nd i.558 (so read for abbhokāsi-kankhā, cp. Nd i.188).

fr. abbhokāsa

Abbhokiṇṇa

see abbokiṇṇa.

pp. of abbhokirati

Abbhokirati

to sprinkle over, to cover, bedeck Vv 59 (= abhi-okirati abhippakirati), 3511 (v.l. abbhuk˚). Cp. abbhukkirati & abbhokkiraṇa; pp. abbhokiṇṇa see under abbokiṇṇa.

abhi + ava + kirati

Abbhokuṭika

spelling at Dhp-a iv.8 for abbhākuṭika.

Abbhokkiraṇa

(nt.) in naṭānaṃ a. “turnings of dancers” DN-a i.84 in expln of sobha-nagarakaṃ of DN i.6.

fr. abbhokirati

Abbhocchinna

(besides abbocch˚; q.v. under abbokiṇṇa2 ) not cut off, uninterrupted, continuous Ja i.470 (v.l. abbo˚); vi.254, 373; Cp i.63; Mil 72 Vism 362 (bb), 391 (bb).

a + vi + ava + chinna

Abbhohārika

see abbo˚.

Aby˚

see avy˚.

Abhabba

(adj.) impossible, not likely, unable DN iii.13 sq., 19 26 sq., 133; Iti 106, Iti 117; Snp 231 (see Kp-a 189); Dhp 32; Ja i.116; Pp 13.

-ṭṭhāna a (moral) impossibility of which there are 9 enumd. among things that are not likely to be found in an Arahant’s character: see D iii.133 & 235 (where the five first only are given as a set).;

a + bhavya. The Sk. abhavya has a different meaning

Abhabbatā

(f.) an impossibility, unlikelihood Snp 232, cp. Kp-a 191.

abstr. fr. abhabba

Abhaya

(adj.) free from fear or danger, fearless, safe Dhp 258 ■ nt. abhayaṃ confidence, safety Dhp 317 cp. Dhp-a iii.491. For further refs. see bhaya.

a + bhaya

Abhi-

I. Meaning.

1. The primary meaning of abhi is that of taking possession and mastering, as contained in E. coming by and over-coming, thus literally having the function of (a) facing and aggressing = towards, against on to, at (see II. 1, a); and (b) mastering = over, along over, out over, on top of (see II. 1, b). 2. Out of this is developed the fig. meaning of increasing, i.e., an intensifying of the action implied in the verb (see III. 1) Next to saṃ-it is the most frequent modification preflx in the meaning of “very much, greatly” as the first part of a double-prefix cpd. (see III. 2), and therefore often seemingly superfluous, i.e., weakened in meaning, where the second part already denotes intensity as in abhi-vi-ji (side by side with vi-ji), abhi-ā-kkhā (side by side with ā-kkhā), abhi-anu-mud (side by side with anu-mud). In these latter cases abhi shows a purely deictic character corresponding to Ger. her-bei-kommen (for bei-kommen) E. fill up (for fill); e.g. , abbhatikkanta (= ati ˚ C.) abbhatīta (“vorbei gegangen”), abbhantara (“with-in” b-innen or “in here”), abbhudāharati, abhipūreti (“fill up”) etc. (see also II. 1, c).

II. Lit. Meaning.

1. As single pref.: (a) against to, on to, at-, viz., abbhatthangata gone towards home abhighāta striking at, ˚jjhā think at, ˚mana thinking on ˚mukha facing, turned towards, ˚yāti at-tack, ˚rūhati ascend ˚lāsa long for, ˚vadati ad-dress, ˚sapati ac-curse, ˚hata hit at. (b) out, over, all around: abbhudeti go out over ˚kamati exceed, ˚jāti off-spring, ˚jānāti know all over ˚bhavati overcome, ˚vaḍḍhati increase, ˚vuṭṭha poured out or over, ˚sandeti make over-flow, ˚siñcati sprinkle over (c) abhi has the function of transitivising intrs. verbs after the manner of E. be-(con-) and Ger. er-, thus resembling in meaning a simple Caus. formation, like the foll.: abhigajjati thunder on, ˚jānāti “er-kennen” ˚jāyati be-get, ˚tthaneti = ˚gajjati, ˚nadati “er tönen”, ˚nandati approve of (cp. anerkennen), ˚passati con-template, ˚ramati indulge in, ˚ropeti honour, ˚vuḍḍha increased, ˚saddahati believe in.

2. As base in compn. (2nd part of cpd.) abhi occurs only in combn. sam-abhi (which is however, of late occurrence and a peeuliarity of later texts, and is still more freq. in BSk.: see under sam-).

III. Fig. Meaning (intensifying).

1. A single pref. abhikiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚jalati shine forth, ˚jighacchati be very hungry, ˚tatta much exhausted, ˚tāpa very hot ˚toseti pleuse greatly, ˚nava quite fresh, ˚nipuṇa very clever, ˚nīla of a deep black, ˚manāpa very pleasant ˚mangaly very lucky, ˚yobbana full youth, ˚rati great liking, ˚ratta deep red, ˚ruci intense satisfaction, ˚rūpa very handsome (= adhika-rūpa C.), ˚sambuddha wide and fully-awake, cp. abbhuddhunāti to shake greatly (adhikaṃuddh˚ C.) ■ As 1st part of a prep ■ cpd. (as modification-pref.) in foll. combinations: abhi-ud (abbhud-˚ati, ˚anu, ˚ava, ˚ā, ˚ni, ˚ppa, ˚vi, ˚saṃ. See all these s. v. and note that the contraction (assimilation before vowel) form of abhi is abbh˚ ■ On its relation to pari see pari˚, to ava see ava˚.

IV. Dialectical Variation.-There are dial. variations in the use and meanings of abhi. Vedic abhi besides corresponding to abhi in P. is represented also by ati˚; adhi˚; and anu˚; since all are similar in meaning, and psychologically easily fused and confused (cp. meanings abhi = on to, towards; ati = up to and beyond; adhi up to, towards, over; anu = along towards). For all the foll. verbs we find in Pāli one or other of these three prefixes. So ati in ˚jāti, ˚pīḷita, ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati ˚veṭheti; also as vv.ll. with abhi-kīrati, ˚pavassati, ˚roceti cp. atikkanta-abhi˚ (Sk. abhikrānta); adhi in ˚patthita ˚pāteti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta, ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha (vice versa P. abhi-ropeti compared with Sk. adhiropayati); anu in ˚gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati.

prefix, Vedic abhi, which represents both Idg *m̊bhi, as in Gr. ἀμφί/ around, Lat. ambi, amb round about, Oir imb, Gall. ambi, Ohg. umbi, Ags. ymb, cp. also Vedic (Pāli) abhitaḥ on both sides; and Idg. *obhi, as in Lat ob towards, against (cp. obsess, obstruct), Goth. bi, Ohg Ags. bī = E. be-.

Abhikaṅkhati

to desire after, long for, wish for SN i.140, SN i.198 (Nibbānaṃ); Ja ii.428; Ja iv.10, Ja iv.241; Vv-a 38, Vv-a 283; Thag-a 244 ■ pp. abhikaṅkhita. Cp. BSk abhikānkṣati, e.g. Jtm. p. 221.

abhi + kankhati

Abhikaṅkhanatā

(f.) wishing, longing, desire DN-a i.242.

abhi + kankhana + tā

Abhikaṅkhita

desired, wished, longed for Vv-a 201 (= abhijjhita).

pp. of abhikankhati

Abhikaṅkhin

(adj.) cp. wishing for, desirous (of-˚) Thig 360 (sītibhāva˚).

Abhikiṇṇa

1. strewn over with (-˚), adorned, covered filled Pv ii.112 (puppha˚).

2. overwhelmed overcome, crushed by (-˚) Iti 89 (dukkh˚ vv.ll. dukkhâtiṇṇa & otiṇṇa) = AN i.147 (which reads dukkhotiṇṇa). See also avatiṇṇa.

pp. of abhikirati

Abhikirati

1. to sprinkle or cover over: see abhikiṇṇa 1.

2. [Sk. avakirati, cp. apakiritūna to overwhelm, destroy, put out, throw away, crush SN i.54; Thag 598; Thag 2, Thag 447 (ger. ˚kiritūna, reading of C for T. apa˚, expld. by chaḍḍetvā); Dhp 25 (˚kīrati metri causa; dīpaṃ abhikīrati = viddhaṃseti vikirati Dhp-a i.255 v.l. atikirati); Ja iv.121 (˚kīrati; dīpaṃ = viddhaṃseti C.) vi.541 (nandiyo m˚ abhikīrare = abhikiranti abhikkamanti C.); Dhp-a i.255 (inf. ˚kirituṃ) ■ pp. abhikiṇṇa see abhikiṇṇa 2.

Sk. abhikirati

Abhikīḷati

to play (a game), to sport Mil 359 (kīḷaṃ).

abhi + kìḷati

Abhikūjita

resounding (with the song of birds) Pv ii.123 (cakkavāka˚; so read for kujita). Cp. abhinikūjita.

abhi + kūjita, pp. of kūj

Abhikkanta

(adj.-n.) (a) (adj.) lit. gone forward, gone out, gone beyond. According to the traditional expln. preserved by Bdhgh. & Dhp (see e.g. DN-a i.227 = Kp-a 114 = Vv-a 52) it is used in 4 applications: abhikkantasaddo khaya (+ pabbaniya Kp-a) sundar’-âbhirūpa-abbhanumodanesu dissati. These are: 1. (lit.) gone away, passed gone out, departed (+ nikkhanta, meaning khaya “wane”) in phrase abhikkantāya rattiyā at the waning of the night Vin i.26; DN ii.220; MN i.142. 2. excellent, supreme (sundara) Snp 1118 (˚dassāvin having the most exellent knowledge = aggadassāvin etc. Nd ii.76); usually in compar ˚tara (+ paṇītatara) DN i.62, DN i.74, DN i.216; AN ii.101; AN iii.350 sq.; AN v.140, AN v.207 sq.; DN-a i.171 (= atimanāpatara) 3. pleasing, superb, extremely wonderful, as exclamation ˚ṃ repeated with bho (bhante), showing appreciation (abbhânumodana) DN i.85, DN i.110, DN i.234; Snp p.15, Snp p.24, etc. freq 4. surpassing, beautiful (always with ˚vaṇṇa = abhirūpa Vin i.26; DN ii.220; MN i.142; Pv ii.110 = Vv 91 (atimanāpa abhirūpa Pv-a 71); Kp-a 115 (= abhirūpachavin) ■ (b) (nt.) abhikkantaṃ (combd. with and opp to paṭikkantaṃ) going forward (and backward), approach (and receding) DN i.70 (= gamaṇa + nivattana DN-a i.183) Vin iii.181; AN ii.104, AN ii.106 sq.; Vv-a 6.

pp. of abhikkamati, in sense of Sk. and also P. atikkanta

Abhikkama

going forward, approach, going out Pv iv.12 (opp. paṭikkama going back); Dhp-a iii.124 (˚paṭikkama).

Abhikkamati

to go forward, to proceed, approach DN i.50 (= abhimukho kamati gacchati, pavisati DN-a i.151); ii.147, 256 (abhikkā muṃ aor.); Dhp-a iii.124 (evaṃ ˚itabbaṃ evaṃ paṭikkamitabbaṃ thus to approach & thus to withdraw) ■ pp; abhikkanta (q.v.).

Vedic abhikramati, abhi + kamati

Abhikkhaṇa1

(nt.) digging up of the ground MN i.143.

fr. abhikkhanati

Abhikkhaṇa2

(nt.) [abhi + *ikkhaṇa from īkṣ, cp. Sk. abhīkṣṇa of which the eontracted form is P. abhiṇha only as acc. adv. ˚ṃ constantly, repeated, often Vv 2412 (= abhiṇhaṃ Vv-a 116); Pv ii.84 (= abhiṇhaṃ bahuso Pv-a 107); Pp 31; Dhp-a ii.91.

Abhikkhaṇati

to dig up MN i.142.

abhi + khaṇati

Abhikkhipati

to throw Dāvs iii.60; cp. abhinikkhipati ibid. 12.

abhi + khipati

Abhigajjati

(a) to roar, shout, thunder, to shout or roar at (c. acc.) Snp 831 (shouting or railing = gajjanto uggajjanto Nd i.172); ger. abhigajjiya thundering Cp iii.108. (b) hum, chatter, twitter (of birds); see abhigajjin.

abhi + gajjati from garj, sound-root, cp. P. gaggara

Abhigajjin

(adj.) warbling, singing, chattering Thag 1108, Thag 1136.

fr. abhigajjati

Abhigamanīya

(adj.) to be approached, accessible Pv-a 9.

grd. of abhigacchati

Abhigijjhati

1. to be greedy for, to crave for, show delight in (c. loc.) Snp 1039 (kāmesu, cp. Nd ii.77).

2. to envy (acc.) SN i.15 (aññam-aññaṃ).

abhi + gijjhati

Abhigīta

1. sung for. Only in one phrase, gāthābhigītaṃ, that which is gained by singing or chanting verses (Ger. “ersungen”) SN i.173; Snp 81 = Mil 228. See Snp-a 151.

2. resounding with filled with song (of birds) Ja vi.272 (= abhiruda).

pp. of abhigāyati, cp. gīta

Abhighāta

(a) striking, slaying, killing Pv-a 58 (daṇḍa˚), 283 (sakkhara˚). (b) impact, contact Dhs-a 312 (rūpa˚ etc.).

Sk. abhighāta, abhi + ghāta

Abhicetasika

(adj.) dependent on the clearest consciousness. On the spelling see ābhic˚ (of jhāna) MN i.33, MN i.356; MN iii.11; SN ii.278; AN ii.23; AN v.132 (Spelt. ābhi˚ at MN i.33; AN iii.114; Vin v.136). See Dial. iii.108.

abhi + ceto + ika

Abhiceteti

to intend, devise, have in mind Ja iv.310 (manasā pāpaṃ).

abhi + ceteti

Abhicchanna

(adj.) covered with, bedecked or adorned with (-˚) Ja ii.48 (hema-jāla˚, v.l. abhisañchanna), 370 (id.); Snp 772 (= ucchanna āvuṭa etc. Nd i.24, cp. Nd ii.365).

abhi + channa

Abhicchita

(adj.) desired Ja vi.445 (so read for abhijjhita ).

abhi + icchita, cp. Sk. abhīpsita

Abhijacca

(adj.) of noble birth Ja v.120.

Sk. ābhijātya; abhi + jacca

Abhijaneti

occasional spelling for abhijāneti.

Abhijappati

to wish for, strive after, pray for SN i.143 (read asmâbhijappanti & cp.; Kindred Sayings p. 180) = Ja iii.359 (= namati pattheti piheti C.); Ṣn 923, 1046 (+ āsiṃsati thometi; Nd ii.79 = jappati & same under icchati). Cp. in meaning; abhigijjhati.

abhi + jappati

Abhijappana

(nt.) [doubtful whether to jappati or to japati to mumble, to which belongs jappana in kaṇṃa˚ DN-a i.97 in hattha˚; casting a spell to make the victim throw up or wring his hands DN i.11; DN-a i.97.

Abhijappā

(f.) praying for, wishing, desire, longing Dhs 1059 = Nd ii.taṇhā ii. Dhs 1136.

abstr. fr. abhijappati, cp. jappā

Abhijappin

(adj.) praying for, desiring AN III.353 (kāma-lābha˚).

fr. abhijappati

Abhijalati

to shine forth, ppr. ˚anto resplendent Pv-a 189.

abhi + jalati

Abhijavati

to be eager, active Snp 668.

abhi + javati

Abhijāta

(adj.) of noble birth, well-born, SN i.69; Vv 293; Mil 359 (˚kulakulīna belonging to a family of high or noble birth).

abi + jāta

Abhijāti

(f.) 1. Species. Only as t. t. in use by certain non-Buddhist teachers. They divided mankind into six species, each named after a colour DN i.53, DN i.54; AN iii.383 ff. (quoted DN-a i.162) gives details of each species. Two of them, the black and the white, are interpreted in a Buddhist sense at DN iii.250, MN ii.222 and Netti 158. This interpretation (but not the theory of the six species) has been widely adopted by subsequent Hindu writers.

2. Rebirth, descent, Mil 226.

abhi + jāti

Abhijātika

(adj.) belonging to ones birth or race, born of, being by birth; only in cpd. kaṇhâbhijātika of dark birth, that is, low in the social scale DN iii.251; AN iii.348; Snp 563 = Thag 833; cp. Ja P T S. 1893, 11 in sense of “evil disposed or of bad character” at Ja v.87 (= kāḷaka-sabhāva C.).

fr. abhijāti

Abhijātitā

(f.) the fact of being born, descendency Vv-a 216.

abstr. fr. abhijāti

Abhijāna

(nt. or m?) recognition, remembrance, recollection Mil 78. See also abhiññā.

Sk. abhijñāna

Abhijānāti

to know by experience, to know fully or thoroughly, to recognise know of (c. acc.), to be conscious or aware of DN i.143; SN ii.58, SN ii.105, SN ii.219, SN ii.278; SN iii.59, SN iii.91; SN iv.50, SN iv.324, SN iv.399; SN v.52 SN v.176, SN v.282, SN v.299; Snp 1117 (diṭṭhiṃ Gotamassa na a.) Ja iv.142; Pv ii.710 = ii.103 (n’ābhijānāmi bhuttaṃ vā pītaṃ) Sdhp 550; etc ■ Pot. abhijāneyya Nd ii.78a, & abhijaññā Snp 917, Snp 1059 (= jāneyyāsi Snp-a 592); aor. abhaññāsi Snp p.16 ■ ppr. abhijānaṃ SN iv.19, SN iv.89; Snp 788 (= ˚jānanto C.), 1114 (= ˚jānanto Nd ii.78b) abhijānitva Dhp-a iv.233; abhiññāya SN iv.16; SN v.392; Snp 534 (sabbadhammaṃ), 743 (jātikkhayaṃ), 1115, 1148; Iti 91 (dhammaṃ) Dhp 166 (atta-d-atthaṃ); freq. in phrase sayaṃ abhiññāya from personal knowledge or self-experience Iti 97 (v.l abhiññā); Dhp 353; and abhiññā [short form, like ādā for ādāya, cp. upādā] in phrase sayaṃ abhiññā DN i.31 (+ sacchikatvā); SN ii.217; Iti 97 (v.l. for ˚abhiññāya), in abhiññā-vosita perfected by highest knowledge SN i.167 SN i.175 = Dhp 423 (“master of supernormal lore” Mrs Rh. D in kindred S. p. 208; cp. also Dhp-a iv.233); Iti 47 Iti 61 = Iti 81, and perhaps also in phrase sabbaṃ abhiññapariññeyya SN iv.29 ■ grd. abhiññe y ya SN iv.29; Snp 558 (˚ṃ abhiññātaṃ known is the knowable); Nd ii.s.v. Dhp-a iv.233 ■ pp. abhiññāta (q.v.).

abhi + jñā, cp. jānāti & abhiññā

Abhijāyati

to beget, produce, effect, attain, in phrase akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ Nibbānaṃ a. DN iii.251; AN iii.384 sq At Snp 214 abhijāyati means “to behave, to be”, cp Snp-a 265 (abhijāyati = bhavati).

abhi + jāyati, Pass. of jan, but in sense of a Caus. = janeti

Abhijigiṃsati

to wish to overcome, to covet Ja vi.193 (= jinituṃ icchati C). Burmese scribes spell ˚jigīsati; Thag 743 (“cheat”? Mrs Rh. D.; “vernichten” Neumann). See also abhijeti, and nijigiṃsanatā.

abhi + jigiṃsati

Abhijighacchati

to be very hungry Pv-a 271.

abhi + jighacchati

Abhijīvanika

(adj.) belonging to one’s livehood, forming one’s living Vin i.187 (sippa).

abhi + jīvana + ika

Abhijīhanā

(f.) strenuousness, exertion, strong endeavour Ja vi.373 (viriyakaraṇa C.).

abhi + jīhanā of jeh to open ones mouth

Abhijeti

to win, acquire, conquer Ja vi.273 (ābhi˚ metri causā).

abhi + jayati

Abhijoteti

to make clear, explain, illuminate Ja v.339.

abhi + joteti

Abhijjanaka

(adj.) not to be broken, not to be moved or changed uninfluenced Ja ii.170; Dhp-a iii.189.

a + bhijjana + ka, from bhijja, grd. of bhid

Abhijjamāna

(adj.) that which is not being broken up or divided. In the stock descrīption of the varieties of the lower Iddhi the phrase udake pi abhijjamāne gacchati is doubtful. The principal passages are DN i.78, DN i.212; DN iii.112, DN iii.281; MN i.34 MN i.494; MN ii.18; AN i.170, AN i.255; AN iii.17; AN v.199; SN ii.121; SN v.264 In about half of these passages the reading is abhijjamāno The various rcadings show that the MSS also are equally divided on this point. Bdgh. (Vism 396) reads ˚māne, and explains it, relying on Pts ii.208, as that sort of water in which a man does not sink. Pv iii.11 has the same idiom. Dhammapāla’s note on that (Pv-a 169) is corrupt. At DN i.78 the Colombo ed. 1904, reads abhejjamāne and tr. ʻnot dividing (the water)ʼ; at DN i.212 it reads abhijjamāno and tr. ʻnot sinking (in the water)ʼ.

ppr. passive of a + bhid, see bhindati

Abhijjhā

(f.), covetousness, in meaning almost identical with lobha (cp. Dhs. trsl. 22) DN i.70, DN i.71 (˚āya cittaṃ parisodheti he cleanses his heart from coveting; abhijjhāya = abl.; cp DN-a i.211 = abhijjhāto); MN i.347 (id.); DN iii.49, DN iii.71 sq. 172, 230, 269; SN iv.73, SN iv.104, SN iv.188, SN iv.322 (adj. vigat’âbhijjha) 343 (˚āyavipāka); AN i.280; AN iii.92; AN v.251 sq.; Iti 118 Nd i.98 (as one of the 4 kāya-ganthā, q.v.); Nd ii.taṇhā ii.1; Pp 20, Pp 59; Dhs 1136 (˚kāyagantha); Vb 195, Vb 244 (vigat’âbhijjha), 362, 364, 391; Ne 13; Dhp-a i.23; Pv-a 103, Pv-a 282; Sdhp 56, Sdhp 69 ■ Often combd with ˚domanassa covetousness & discontent, e.g. at DN iii.58, DN iii.77 DN iii.141, DN iii.221, DN iii.276; MN i.340; MN iii.2; AN i.39, AN i.296; AN ii.16, AN ii.152 AN iv.300 sq., 457 sq.; v.348, 351; Vb 105, Vb 193 sq -anabhijjhā absence of covetousness Dhs 35, Dhs 62 ■ See also anupassin, gantha, domanassa, sīla.

fr. abhi + dhyā (jhāyati1), cp. Sk. abhidhyāna

Abhijjhātar

see abhijjhitar.

Abhijjhāti

to wish for (acc.), long for, covet SN v.74 (so read for abhijjhati); ger. abhijjhāya Ja vi.174 (= patthetvā C.) ■ pp. abhijjhita.

cp. abhidyāti, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāyati

Abhijjhāyati

to wish for, covet (c. acc.). Snp 301 (aor abhijjhāyiṃsu = abhipatthayamāna jhāyiṃsu Snp-a 320).

Sk. abhidhyāyati, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāti

Abhijjhālū

(& ˚u) (adj.) covetous DN i.139; DN iii.82; Ṣ ii.168; iii.93; AN i.298; AN ii.30, AN ii.59, AN ii.220 (an˚ + avyapannacitto sammādiṭṭhiko at conclusion of sīla); v.92 sq., 163, 286 sq. Iti 90, Iti 91; Pp 39, Pp 40.

cp. jhāyin from jhāyati1; abhijjhālu with ˚ālu for ˚āgu which in its turn is for āyin The B.Sk. form is abhidyālu, e.g. Divy 301, a curious reconstruction

Abhijjhiṭṭa

v.l. at Dhp-a iv.101 for ajjhiṭṭha.

Abhijjhita

coveted, J. vi.445; usually neg. an˚ not coveted, Vin i.287; Snp 40 (= anabhipatthita Snp-a 85; cp. Nd ii.38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita Vv-a 201).

pp. of abhijjhāti

Abhijjhitar

one who covets MN i.287 (T. abhijjhātar, v.l. ˚itar) = AN v.265 (T. ˚itar, v.l. ˚ātar).

n. ag. fr. abhijjhita in med. function

Abhiñña

(adj.) (usually -˚) knowing, possessed of knowledge, esp. higher or supernormal knowledge (abhiññā), intelligent; thus in chalabhiñña one who possesses the 6 abhiññās Vin iii.88; dandh˚; of sluggish intellect DN iii.106; AN ii.149; AN v.63 (opp. khipp˚) mah˚; of great insight SN ii.139 ■ Compar. abhiññatara SN v.159 (read bhiyyo ˚bhiññataro).

Sk. abhijña

Abhiññatā

(f.) in cpd. mahā˚; state or condition of great intelligence or supernormal knowledge SN iv.263; V.175, 298 sq.

fr. abhiññā

Abhiññā1

(f.). Rare in the older texts. It appears in two contexts. Firstly, certain conditions are said to conduce (inter alia) to serenity, to special knowledge (abhiññā), to special wisdom, and to Nibbāna These conditions precedent are the Path (SN v.421 = Vin i.10 = SN iv.331), the Path + best knowledge and full emancipation (AN v.238), the Four Applications of Mindfulness (SN v.179) and the Four Steps to Iddhi (S. v.255) The contrary is three times stated; wrong-doing, priestly superstitions, and vain speculation do not conduce to abhiññā and the rest (D iii.131; AN iii.325 sq. and v.216) Secondly, we find a list of what might now be called psychic powers. It gives us 1, Iddhi (cp. levitation); 2 the Heavenly Ear (cp. clairaudience); 3, knowing others thoughts (cp. thought-reading); 4, recollecting one’s previous births; 5, knowing other people’s rebirths; 6, certainty of emancipation already attained (cp. final assurance) This list occurs only at DN iii.281 as a list of abhiññās It stands there in a sort of index of principal subjects appended at the end of the Dīgha, and belongs therefore to the very close of the Nikāya period. But it is based on older material. Descriptions of each of the six, not called abhiññās, and interspersed by expository sentences or paragraphs, are found at DN i.89 sq. (trsl. Dial. i.89 sq.); MN i.34 (see Buddh. Suttas, 210 sq.); AN i.255, AN i.258 AN iii.17, AN iii.280 = AN iv.421. At SN i.191; Vin ii.16; Pp 14, we have the adj. chaḷabhiññā (“endowed with the 6 Apperceptions”). At SN ii.216 we have five, and at SN v.282 SN v.290 six abhiññās mentioned in glosses to the text. And at SN ii.217, SN ii.222 a bhikkhu claims the 6 powers. See also MN ii.11; MN iii.96. It is from these passages that the list at DN iii. has been made up, and called abhiññās.

Afterwards the use of the word becomes stereotyped In the Old Commentaries (in the Canon), in the later ones (of the 5th cent. a.d.), and in medieval and modern Pāli, abhiññā, nine times out ten, means just the powers given in this list. Here and there we find glimpses of the older, wider meaning of special, supernormal power of apperception and knowledge to be acquired by long training in life aud thought. See Nd i.108, Nd i.328 (expln. of ñāṇa); Nd ii.s. v. and N0. 466; Pts i.35; Pts ii.156, Pts ii.189; Vb 228, Vb 334; Pp 14; Ne 19, Ne 20; Mil 342; Vism 373 Mvu xix.20; DN-a i.175; Dhp-a ii.49; Dhp-a iv.30; Sdhp 228 Sdhp 470, Sdhp 482. See also the discussion in the Cpd. 60 sp. 224 sq. For the phrase sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā and abhiññā-vosita see abhijānāti. The late phrase yath’ abhiññaṃ means ʻas you please, according to liking, as you likeʼ, Ja v.365 (= yathādhippāyaṃ yathāruciṃ C.). For abhiññā in the use of an adj. (˚abhiñña) see abhiñña.

fr. abhi + jñā, see jānāti

Abhiññā2

ger. of abhijānāti.

Abhiññāta

1. known, recognised Snp 588 (abhiññeyyaṃ ˚ṃ).

2. (well)-known, distinguished DN i.89 (˚kolañña = pākaṭa-kulaja DN-a i.252), 235; Snp p.115.

pp. of abhijānāti

Abhiññeyya

grd. of abhijānāti.

Abhiṭhāna

(nt.) a great or deadly crime Only at Snp 231 = Kp vi.10 (quoted Kv 109). Six are there mentioned, & are explained (Kp-a 189) as “matricide parricide, killing an Arahant, causing schisms, wounding a Buddha, following other teachers”. For other relations & suggestions see Dhs trsl.267 ■ See also ānantarika.

abhi + ṭhāna, cp. abhitiṭṭhati; lit. that which stands out above others

Abhiṇhaṃ

(adv.) repeatedly, continuous, often MN i.442 (˚āpattika a habitual offender), 446 (˚kāraṇa continuous practice); Snp 335 (˚saṃvāsa continuous living together); Ja i.190; Pp 32; Dhp-a ii.239; Vv-a 116 (= abhikkhaṇa), 207, 332; Pv-a 107 (= abhikkhaṇaṃ). Cp. abhiṇhaso.

contracted form of abhikkhaṇaṃ

Abhiṇhaso

(adv.) always, ever SN i.194; Thag 25; Snp 559, Snp 560, Snp 998.

adv. case fr. abhiṇha; cp. bahuso = Sk. bahuśaḥ

Abhitakketi

to search for Dāvs v.4.

abhi + takketi

Abhitatta

scorched (by heat), dried up, exhausted, in phrases uṇha˚ Vin ii.220; Mil 97, and ghamma˚ SN ii.110, SN ii.118; Snp 1014; Ja ii.223; Vv-a 40; Pv-a 114.

pp. of abhi + tapati

Abhitāpa

extreme heat, glow; adj. very hot Vin iii.83 (sīsa˚ sunstroke); MN i.507 (mahā˚ very hot) Mil 67 (mahābhitāpatara much hotter); Pv iv.18 (mahā˚ of niraya).

abhi + tāpa

Abhitāḷita

hammered to pieces, beaten, struck Vism 231 (muggara˚).

abhi + tāḷita fr. tāḷeti

Abhitiṭṭhati

to stand out supreme, to excel, surpass DN ii.261; Ja vi.474 (abhiṭṭhāya = abhibhavitvā C.).

abhi + tiṭṭhati

Abhitunna

(tuṇṇa). Overwhelmed, overcome overpowered SN ii.20; Pts i.129 (dukkha˚), 164; Ja i.407 Ja i.509 (˚tuṇṇa); ii.399, 401; iii.23 (soka˚); iv.330; v.268 Sdhp 281.

not as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 135, suggested fr. abhi + tud, but acc. to Kern, Toev. p. 4 fr. abhi + tūrv. (Cp. turati & tarati;2 and Ved. turvati) Thus the correct spelling is ˚tuṇṇa = Sk. abhitūrṇa. The latter occurs as v.l. under the disguise of (sok-)âhituṇḍa for ˚abhituṇṇa at M. Vastu iii.2

Abhito

(indecl.) adv. case fr. prep. abhi etym.].

1. round about, on both sides Ja vi.535 (= ubhayapassesu C.) 539.

2. near, in the presence of Vv 641 (= samīpe Vv-a 275).

Abhitoseti

to please thoroughly, to satisfy, gratify Snp 709 (= atīva toseti Snp-a 496).

abhi + toseti

Abhitthaneti

to roar, to thunder Ja i.330, Ja i.332 = Cp iii.107.

abhi + thaneti

Abhittharati

to make haste Dhp 116 (= turitaturitaṃ sīghasīghaṃ karoti Dhp-a iii.4).

abhi + tarati2, evidently wrong for abhittarati

Abhitthavati

to praise Ja i.89; Ja iii.531; Dāvs iii.23; Dhp-a i.77; Pv-a 22; cp. abhitthunati.

abhi + thavati

Abhitthavana

(nt.) praise Th A 74.

fr. prec.

Abhitthunati

to praise Ja i.17 (aor abhitthuniṃsu); cp. thunati 2 ■ pp. ˚tthuta Dhp-a i.88.

abhi + thunati; cp. abhitthavati

Abhida1

(adj.) as attr. of sun & moon at MN ii.34, MN ii.35 is doubtful in reading & meaning; vv.ll. abhidosa & abhidesa Neumann; trsl. “unbeschränkt”. The context seems to require a meaning like “full, powerful” or unbroken unrestricted (abhijja or abhīta “fearless”?”) or does abhida represent Vedic abhidyu heavenly?

Abhida2

Only in the difficult old verse DN ii.107 (= SN v.263 = AN iv.312 = Nd 64 = Ne 60 = Divy 203) Aorist 3rd sg. fr. bhindati he broke.

Abhidassana

(nt.) sight, appearance, show Ja vi.193.

abhi + dassana

Abhideyya

in sabba˚ at Pv-a 78 is with v.l. BB to be read sabbapātheyyaṃ.

Abhidosa

(˚-) the evening before, last night; ˚kālakata MN i.170 = Ja i.81; ˚gata gone last night Ja vi.386 (hiyyo paṭhama-yāme C.).

Abhidosika

belonging to last night (of gruel) Vin iii.15; Mil 291. See ābhi˚.

Abhiddavati

to rush on, to assail Mvu 6, Mvu 5; Dāvs iii.47.

abhi + dru, cp. dava2

Abhidhamati

blow on or at AN i.257.

abhi + dhamati, cp. Sk. abhi˚ & api-dhamati

Abhidhamma

the “special Dhamma,” i.e., 1. theory of the doctrine, the doctrine classified, the doctrine pure and simple (without any admixture of literary grace or of personalities, or of anecdotes, or of arguments ad personam), Vin i.64, Vin i.68; Vin iv.144; Vin iv.344 Coupled with abhivinaya, DN iii.267; MN i.272.

2. (only in the Chronicles and Commentaries) name of the Third Piṭaka, the third group of the canonical books. Dpvs v.37; Pv-a 140. See the detailed discussion at DN-a i.15 DN-a i.18 sq. [As the word abhidhamma standing alone is not found in Sn or S or A, and only once or twice in the Dialogues, it probably came into use only towards the end of the period in which the 4 great Nikāyas grew up.]

-kathā discourse on philosophical or psychological matters, MN i.214, MN i.218; AN iii.106, AN iii.392. See dhammakathā.

abhi + dhamma

Abhidhammika

see ābhidhammika.

Abhidhara

(adj.) firm, bold, in ˚māna firmminded Dhp p.81 (acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 135 not verified).

abhi + dhara

Abhidhāyin

(adj.) “putting on”, designing, calling, meaning Pgdp 98.

abhi + dhāyin fr. dhā

Abhidhāreti

to hold aloft Ja i.34 = Bv iv.1.

abhi + dhāreti

Abhidhāvati

to run towards, to rush about, rush on, hasten Vin ii.195; SN i.209; Ja ii.217 Ja iii.83; Dhp-a iv.23.

abhi + dhāvati

Abhidhāvin

(adj.) fr. abhidhāvati] “pouring in”, rushing on, running Ja vi.559.

Abhinata

bent, (strained, fig. bent on pleasure MN i.386 (+ apanata); SN i.28 (id.; Mrs. Rh. D “strained forth”, cp. Kindred S i.39). See also apanata.

pp. of abhi + namati

Abhinadati

to resound, to be full of noise Ja vi.531. Cp. abhinādita.

abhi + nadati

Abhinandati

to rejoice at, find pleasure in (acc.), approve of, be pleased or delighted with (acc. DN i.46 (bhāsitaṃ), 55 (id.), 158, 223; MN i.109, MN i.458; SN i.32 (annaṃ), 57, 14, (cakkhuṃ, rūpe etc.); AN iv.411 Thag 606; Dhp 75, Dhp 219; Snp 1054, Snp 1057, Snp 1111; Nd ii.82; Mil 25; DN-a i.160; Dhp-a iii.194 (aor. abhinandi, opp paṭikkosi) Vv-a 65 (vacanaṃ) ■ pp. abhinandita (q.v.). Often in combn. with abhivadati (q.v.).

abhi + nandati

Abhinandana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.), pleasure, delight, enjoyment DN i.244; MN i.498; Ja iv.397.

fr. abhinandati, cp. nandanā

Abhinandita

only in an˚; not enjoyed, not (being) an object of pleasure SN iv.213 = Iti 38; SN v.319.

pp. of abhinandati

Abhinandin

(adj.) rejoicing at, finding pleasure in (loc. or-˚), enjoying AN ii.54 (piyarūpa); esp. freq. in phrase (taṇhā) tatratatr’âbhinandinī finding its pleasure in this or that [cp. B.Sk. tṛṣṇā tatra-tatr’âbhinandinī Mvu iii.332] Vin i.10; SN v.421; Pts ii.147; Ne 72, etc.

fr. abhinandati, cp. nandin

Abhinamati

to bend ■ pp. abhinata (q.v.).

abhi + namati

Abhinaya

a dramatic representation Vv-a 209 (sākhā˚).

abhi + naya

Abhinava

(adj.) quite young, new or fresh Vin iii.337; Ja ii.143 (devaputta), 435 (so read for accuṇha in expln of paccaggha; v.v. ll. abbhuṇha & abhiṇha) Thag-a 201 (˚yobbana = abhiyobbana); Pv-a 40 (˚saṇṭhāna) 87 (= paccaggha) 155.

abhi + nava

Abhinādita

resounding with (-˚), filled with the noise (or song) of (birds) Ja vi.530 (= abhinadanto C.); Pv-a 157 (= abhiruda).

pp. of abhinādeti, Caus. of abhi + nad; see nadati

Abhinikūjita

(adj.) resounding with, full of the noise of (birds) Ja v.232 (of the barking of a dog) 304 (of the cuckoo); so read for ˚kuñjita T.). Cp. abhikūjita.

abhi + nikūjita

Abhinikkhamati

to go forth from (abl.), go out, issue Dhs A 91; esp. fig. to leave the household life, to retire from the world Snp 64 (= gehā abhinikkhamitvā kāsāya-vattho hutvā Snp-a 117).

abhi + nikkhamati

Abhinikkhamana

(nt.) departure, going away, esp. the going out into monastic life, retirement renunciation. Usually as mahā˚; the great renunciation Ja i.61; Pv-a 19.

abhi + nikkhamana

Abhinikkhipati

to lay down, put down Davs iii.12, 60.

abhi + nikkhipati

Abhiniggaṇhanā

(f.) holding back Vin iii.121 (+ abhinippīḷanā).

abstr. fr. abhiniggaṇhāti

Abhiniggaṇhāti

to hold back, restrain, prevent, prohibit; always in combn. with abhinippīḷeti MN i.120; AN v.230 ■ Cp. abhiniggaṇhanā.

abhi + niggaṇhāti

Abhinindriya

doubtful meaning. The other is expld by Bdhgh at DN-a i.120 as paripuṇṇ˚; and at 222 as avikal-indriya not defective, perfect sense-organ. He must have read ahīn˚ Abhi-n-indriya could only be expld as “with supersenseorgans”, i.e. with organs of supernormal thought or perception thus coming near in meaning to *abhiññindriya We should read ahīn˚ throughout DN i.34, DN i.77, DN i.186, DN i.195 DN ii.13; MN ii.18; MN iii.121; Nd ii.under pucchā6 (only ahīn˚).

vv.ll. at all passages for ahīnindriya

Abhininnāmeti

to bend towards, to turn or direct to DN i.76 (cittaṃ ñāṇa-dassanāya); MN i.234; SN i.123; SN iv.178; Pp 60.

abhi + ninnāmeti cp. BSk. abhinirṇāmayati Lal. V. 439

Abhinipajjati

to lie down on Vin iv.273 (+ abhinisīdati); AN iv.188 (in = acc. + abhinisīdati) Pp 67 (id.).

abhi + nipajjati

Abhinipatati

to rush on (to) Ja ii.8.

abhi + nipatati

Abhinipāta

(-matta) destroying, hurting (?) at Vb 321 is expld. by āpātha-matta.

cp. Divy 125 śastrâbhinipāta splitting open or cutting with a knife

Abhinipātana

(nt.) [fr. abhi-ni-pāteti in daṇḍa-sattha˚; attacking with stick or knife Nd ii.5764.

Abhinipātin

(adj.) falling on io (-˚) Ja ii.7.

abhi + nipātin

Abhinipuṇa

(adj.) very thorough, very clever DN iii.167.

abhi + nipuṇa

Abhinippajjati

to be produced, accrue, get, come (to) MN i.86 (bhogā abhinipphajjanti: sic) Nd ii.99 (has n’âbhinippajjanti) ■ Cp. abhinipphādeti.

abhi + nippajjati

Abhinippata

at Ja vi.36 is to be read abhinippanna (so v.l. BB.).

Abhinippatta

at Dhs 1035, Dhs 1036 is to be read abhinibbatta.

Abhinippanna

(& ˚nipphanna ) produced, effected, accomplished DN ii.223 (siloka); Ja vi.36 (so read for abhinippata); Mil 8 (pph.).

abhi + nippanna, pp. of ˚nippajjati

Abhinippīḷanā

(f.) pressing, squeezing, taking hold of Vin iii.121 (+ abhiniggaṇhanā).

abstr. to abhinippīḷeti, cp. nippīḷana

Abhinippīḷeti

to squeeze, crush, subdue Vism 399; often in combn. with abhiniggaṇhāti MN i.120; AN v.230.

abhi + nippīḷeti

Abhinipphatti

(f.) production, effecting DN ii.283 (v.l. ˚nibbatti).

abhi + nipphatti

Abhinipphādeti

to bring into existence, produce, effect, work, perform DN i.78 (bhājana-vikatiṃ) Vin ii.183 (iddhiṃ); SN v.156, SN v.255; Mil 39.

abhi + nipphādeti

Abhinibbatta

reproduced, reborn AN iv.40, AN iv.401; Nd ii.256 (nibbatta abhi pātubhūta); Dhs 1035, Dhs 1036 (so read for˚ nippatta) Vv-a 9 (puññ’ânubhāva˚ by the power of merit).

abhi + nibbatta, pp. of abhinibbattati

Abhinibbattati

to become, to be reproduced, to result Pp 51 ■ pp. abhinibbatta ■ Cp B.Sk. wrongly abhinivartate].

abhi + nibbattati

Abhinibbatti

(f.) becoming, birth, rebirth, DN i.229; DN ii.283 (v.l. for abhinipphatti) SN ii.65 (punabbhava˚), 101 (id.); iv.14, 215; AN v.121; Pv-a 35.

abhi + nibbatti

Abhinibbatteti

to produce, cause, cause to become SN iii.152; AN v.47; Nd ii.under jāneti.

abhi + nibbatteti, caus. of ˚nibbattati

Abhinibbijjati

to be disgusted with, to avoid, shun, turn away from Snp 281 (T. abhinibbijjayātha, v.l. BB˚ nibbijjiyātha & ˚nibbajjiyātha, Snp-a expl;s. by vivajjeyyātha mā bhajeyyātha; v.l. BB. abhinippajjiyā) = AN iv.172 (T. abhinibbajjayātha vv.ll. ˚nibbajjeyyātha & ˚nibbijjayātha); ger. abhinibbijja Thig 84.

either Med. fr. nibbindati of vid for *nirvidyate (see nibbindati B), or secondary formation fr ger. nibbijja. Reading however not beyond all doubt

Abhinibbijjhati

to break quite through (of the chick coming through the shell of the egg) Vin iii.3; MN i.104 = SN iii.153 (read˚ nibbijjheyyun for nibbijjeyyun-Cp. Buddh. Suttas 233, 234.

abhi + nibbijjhati

Abhinibbidā

(f.) disgust with the world, taedium Ne 61 (taken as abhinibbhidā, according to expln. as “padālanā-paññatti avijj˚aṇḍa-kosānaṃ”), 98 (so MSS, but C. abhinibbidhā).

abhi + nibbidā; confused with abhinibbhidā

Abhinibbuta

(adj.) perfectly cooled, calmed, serene, esp. in two phrases, viz. diṭṭha dhamm’ ābhinibbuta AN i.142 = MN iii.187; Snp 1087; Nd ii.83, and abhinibbutatta of cooled mind Snp 343 (= apariḍayhamāna-citta Snp-a 347), 456, 469, 783. Also at Sdhp. 35.

abhi + nibbuta

Abhinibbhidā

(f.) [this the better, although not correct spelling; there exists a confusion with abhinibbidā, therefore spelling also abhinibbidhā (Vin iii.4, C. on Ne 98) To abhinibbijjhati, cp. B.Sk. abhinirbheda Mvu i.272 which is wrongly referred to bhid instead of vyadh. the successful breaking through (like the chick through the shell of the egg), coming into (proper) life Vin iii.4; MN i.104; MN i.357; Ne 98 (C. reading). See also abhinibbidā.

Abhinimantanatā

(f.) speaking to, adressing, invitation MN i.331.

abstr. to abhinimanteti

Abhinimanteti

to invite to (c. instr.), to offer to DN i.61 (āsanena).

abhi + nimanteti

Abhinimmadana

(nt.) crushing, subduing, levelling out MN iii.132; AN iv.189 sq.

abhi + nimmadana

Abhinimmita

created (by magic) Vv 161 (pañca rathā satā; cp. Vv-a 79).

abhi + nimmita, pp. of abhinimmināti

Abhinimmināti

to create (by magic), produce, shape, make SN iii.152 (rūpaṃ); AN i.279 (oḷārikaṃ attabhāvaṃ); Nd ii.under pucchā6 (rūpaṃ manomayaṃ); Vv-a 16 (mahantaṃ hatthi-rāja-vaṇṇaṃ) ■ pp. abhinimmita (q.v.).

abhi + nimmināti, cp. BSk. abhinirmāti Jtm 32; abhinirminoti Divy 251; abhinirmimīte Divy 166

Abhiniropana

(nt.) & ā (f.) fixing one’s mind upon, application of the mind Pts i.16, Pts i.21, Pts i.30, Pts i.69 Pts i.75, Pts i.90; Vb 87; Dhs 7, Dhs 21, Dhs 298 (cp. Dhs trsl. ii.19) See also abhiropana.

fr. abhiniropeti

Abhiniropeti

to implant, fix into (one’s mind), inculcate Ne 33.

abhi + niropeti

Abhinivajjeti

to avoid, get rid of DN iii.113; MN i.119, MN i.364, MN i.402; SN v.119, SN v.295, SN v.318; AN iii.169 sq.; Iti 81.

abhi + nivajjeti

Abhinivassati

lit. to pour out in abundance, fig. to produce in plenty. Cp i.103 (kalyāṇe good deeds).

abhi + ni + vassati fr. vṛṣ

Abhiniviṭṭha

(adj.) “settled in”, attached to, clinging on Nd ii.152 (gahita parāmaṭṭha a.); Pv-a 267 (= ajjhāsita Pv iv.84).

abhi + niviṭṭha, pp. of abhi-nivisati

Abhinivisati

to cling to, adhere to, be attached to Nd i.308, Nd i.309 (parāmasati + ) ■ pp. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. also abhinivesa.

abhi + nivisati

Abhinivesa

“settling in”, i.e. wishing for, tendency towards (-˚) inclination, adherence; as adj. liking, loving, being given or inclined to DN iii.230; MN i.136, MN i.251; SN ii.17; SN iii.10 SN iii.13, SN iii.135, SN iii.161, SN iii.186 (saṃyojana˚ iv.50; AN iii.363 (paṭhavī˚ adj.); Nd ii.227 (gāha parāmasa + ); Pp 22; Vb 145; Dhs 381, Dhs 1003, Dhs 1099; Ne 28; Pv-a 252 (micchā˚), 267 (taṇhā˚); Sdhp 71 ■ Often combd. with adhiṭṭhāna e.g. SN ii.17; Nd ii.176, and in phrase idaṃ-sacc’ âbhinivesa adherence to one’s dogmas, as one of the 4 Ties see kāyagantha and cp. Cpd. 171 n. 5.

abhi + nivesa, see nivesa2 & cp. nivesana

Abhinisīdati

to sit down by or on (acc.), always combd. with abhinipajjati Vin iii.29; Vin iv.273; AN v.188; Pp 67.

abhi + nisīdati

Abhinissaṭa

(pp.) escaped Thag 1089.

abhi + nissaṭa

Abhinihata

(pp.) oppressed. crushed, slain Ja iv.4.

abhi + nihata

Abhinīta

(pp.) led to, brought to, obliged by (-˚) MN i.463 = Mil 32 (rājā & cora˚); MN i.282; SN iii.93; Thag 350 = Thag 435 (vātaroga˚ “foredone with cramping pains” Mrs. Rk. D.); Pp 29; Mil 362.

pp. of abhi-neti

Abhinīla

(adj.) very black, deep black, only with ref. to the eyes, in phrase ˚netta with deep-black eyes DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.167 sq. [cp. Sp. Avs i.367 Avs i.370 abhinīla-padma-netra]; Thig 257 (nettā ahesuṃ abbinīla-m-āyatā).

abhi + nīla

Abhinīhanati

to drive away, put away, destroy, remove, avoid MN i.119 (in phrase āṇiṃ a. abhinīharati abhinivajjeti).

abhi + nis + han, cp. Sk. nirhanti

Abhinīharati

1. to take out, throw out MN i.119 (see abhinīhanati).

2. to direct to, to apply to (orig. to isolate? Is reading correct?) in phrase ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti DN i.76 (= tanninnaṃ tappoṇaṃ karoti DN-a i.220, DN-a i.224; v.l. abhini˚) Cp. the latter phrase also in BSk. as abhijñâbhinirhāra Avs ii.3 (see ref. & note Index p. 221); and the pp. abhinirhṛta (ṛddhiḥ) in Divy 48, Divy 49 to obtain? Ind.) 264 (take to burial), 542.

abhi + nīharati

Abhinīhāra

being bent on (“downward force” Dhs trsl. 242), i.e. taking oneself out to, way of acting, (proper) behaviour, endeavour, resolve, aspiration SN iii.267 sq. (˚kusala); AN ii.189; AN iii.311; AN iv.34 (˚kusala) Ja i.14 (Buddhabhāvāya a. resolve to become a Buddha) 15 (Buddhattāya); Pts i.61 sq.; Pts ii.121; Ne 26; Mil 216; Dhp-a i.392; Dhp-a ii.82 (kata˚).

abhi + nīhāra, to abhinīharati; cp. BSk. sarīr’ âbhinirhāra taking (the body) out to burial, lit. meaning see note on abhinīharati

Abhipattika

(adj.) one who has attained, attaining (-˚), getting possession of SN i.200 (devakañña˚).

fr. abhipatti

Abhipatthita

(pp.) hoped, wished, longed for Mil 383; Snp-a 85.

fr. abhipattheti

Abhipattheti

to hope for, long for, wish for Kp viii.10; Snp-a 320; Dhp-a i.30 ■ pp. abhipatthita (q.v.).

abhi + pattheti

Abhipassati

to have regard for, look for, strive after AN i.147 (Nibbānaṃ); iii.75; Snp 896 (khema˚) 1070 (rattamahā˚) Nd i.308; Nd ii.428; Ja vi.370.

abhi + passati

Abhipāteti

to make fall, to bring to fall, to throw Ja ii.91 (kaṇḍaṃ).

abhi + pāteti

Abhipāruta

(adj.) dressed Mil 222.

abhi + pāruta, pp. of abhipārupati

Abhipāleti

to protect Vv 8421, cp. Vv-a 341.

abhi + pāleti

Abhipīḷita

(pp.) crushed, squeezed Sdhp 278, Sdhp 279.

fr. abhipiḷeti

Abhipīḷeti

to crush, squeeze Mil 166. - pp. abhipīḷita (q.v.).

abhi + pīḷeti

Abhipucchati

Sk. abhipṛcchati] to ask Ja iv.18.

abhi + pucchati

Abhipūreti

to fill (up) Mil 238; Dāvs iii.60 (paṃsūhi).

abhi + pūreti

Abhippakiṇṇa

completely strewn (with) Ja i.62.

pp. of abhippakirati

Abhippakirati

to strew over, to cover (completely) DN ii.137 (pupphāni Tathāgatassa sarīraṃ okiranti ajjhokiranti a.); Vv-a 38 (for abbhokirati Vv 59). pp. abhippakiṇṇa (q.v.).

abhi + pakirati

Abhippamodati

to rejoice (intrs.); to please, satisfy (trs, c. acc.) MN i.425; SN v.312, SN v.330; AN v.112; Ja iii.530; Pts i.95, Pts i.176, Pts i.190.

abhi + pamodati

Abhippalambati

to hang down MN iii.164 (olambati ajjholambati a.).

abhi + palambati

Abhippavassati

to shed rain upon, to pour down; intrs. to rain, to pour, fall. Usually in phrase mahāmegho abhippavassati a great cloud bursts Mil 8 Mil 13, Mil 36, Mil 304; Pv-a 132 (v.l. ati˚); intrs. Mil 18 (pupphāni ˚iṃsu poured down) ■ pp. abhippavuṭṭha.

abhi + pavassati

Abhippavuṭṭha

(pp.) having rained, poured, fallen; trs. SN v.51 (bandhanāni meghena ˚āni) AN v.127; intrs. MN ii.117 (mahāmegho ˚o there has been a cloudburst).

fr. abhippavassati

Abhippasanna

(adj.) finding one’s peace in (c. loc.), trusting in having faith in, believing in, devoted to (loc.) Vin iii.43; DN i.211 (Bhagavati) SN i.134; SN iv.319; SN v.225, SN v.378; AN iii.237, AN iii.270, AN iii.326 sq.; Snp p.104 (brāhmaṇesu); Pv-a 54 (sāsand), 142 (id.). Cp. vippasanna in same meaning.

pp. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhiprasanna

Abhippasāda

faith, belief, reliance, trust Dhs 12 (“sense of assurance” trsl., + saddhā), 25, 96 288; Pv-a 223.

abhi + pasāda, cp. BSk. abhiprasāda Avs 12 (cittasyu˚) & vippasāda

Abhippasādeti

to establish one’s faith in (loc.), to be reconciled with, to propitiate Thag 1173 = Vv 212 (manaṃ arahantamhi = cittaṃ pasādeti Vv-a 105).

Caus. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhiprasādayati Divy 68, Divy 85, pp. abhiprasādita-manāḥ Jtm 213 220

Abhippāsāreti

to stretch out Vin i.179 (pāde).

abhi + pasāreti, cp. BSk. abhiprasārayati Divy 389

Abhippasīdati

to have faith in DN i.211 (fut. ˚issati) ■ pp. abhippasanna; Caus. abhippasādeti.

abhi + pasīdati

Abhippaharaṇa

(nt.) attacking, fighting, as adj. f. ˚aṇī fighting, Ep. of Mārassa senā, the army of M. Snp 439 (kaṇhassa˚ the fighting army of k. = samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ nippothanī antarāyakārī Snp-a 390).

abhi + paharaṇa

Abhibyāpeti

to pervade Mil 251.

abhi + vyāpeti, cp. Sk. vyāpnoti, vi + āp

Abhibhakkhayati

to eat (of animals) Vin ii.201 (bhinko pankaṃ a.).

abhi + bhakkhayati

Abhibhava

defeat, humiliation Snp-a 436.

fr. abhibhavati

Abhibhavati

to overcome, master, be lord over, vanquish, conquer SN i.18, SN i.32, SN i.121 (maraṇaṃ); iv. 71 (rāgadose), 117 (kodhaṃ), 246, 249 (sāmikaṃ); Ja i.56 Ja i.280; Pv-a 94 (= balīyati, vaḍḍhati) ■ fut. abhihessati see abhihāreti 4 ■ ger. abhibhuyya Vin i.294; Dhp 328; Iti 41 (māraṃ sasenaṃ); Snp 45, Snp 72 (˚cārin), 1097, Nd ii.85 (= abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā, pariyādiyitvā); and abhibhavitvā Pv-a 113 (= pasayha), 136 ■ grd. abhibhavanīya to be overcome Pv-a 57 ■ Pass. ppr. abhibhūyamāna being overcome (by) Pv-a 80, Pv-a 103 ■ pp. abhibhūta (q.v.).

abhi + bhavati

Abhibhavana

(nt.) overcoming, vanquishing, mastering SN ii.210 (v.l. BB abhipatthana).

fr. abhibhavati

Abhibhavanīyatā

(f.) as an˚; invincibility Pv-a 117.

abstr. fr. abhibhavanīya, grd. of abhibhavati

Abhibhāyatana

(nt.) position of a master or lord, station of mastery. The traditional account of these gives 8 stations or stages of mastery over the senses (see Dial. ii.118; Exp. i.252), detailed identically at all the foll. passages, viz. DN ii.110; DN iii.260 (& 287) MN ii.13; AN i.40; AN iv.305, AN iv.348; AN v.61. Mentioned only at SN iv.77 (6 stations); Pts i.5; Nd ii.466 (as an accomplishment of the Bhagavant); Dhs 247.

abhibhū + āyatana

Abhibhāsana

(nt.) enlightenment or delight (“light & delight” trsl.) Thag 613 (= tosana C.).

abhi + bhāsana fr. bhās

Abhibhū

(n ■ adj.) overcoming, conquering, vanquishing, having power over, a Lord or Master of (-˚) DN iii.29; SN ii.284; Snp 211 (sabba˚), 545 (Māra˚, cp. Mārasena-pamaddana 561), 642 ■ Often in phrase abhibhū anabhibhūta aññadatthudasa vasavattin, i.e. unvanquished Lord of all DN i.18; DN iii.135 = Nd ii.276; AN ii.24; AN iv.94; Iti 122; cp DN-a i.111 (= abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhako’ ham asmīti).

Vedic abhibhū, fr. abhi + bhū, cp. abhibhavati

Abhibhūta

overpowered, overwhelmed, vanquished DN i.121; SN i.137 (jāti-jarā˚); ii.228 (lābhasakkāra-silokena); AN i.202 (pāpakehi dhammehi); Ja i.189; Pv-a 14, Pv-a 41 (= pareta), 60 (= upagata), 68, 77, 80 (pareta). Often neg. an˚; unconquered, e.g. Snp 934; Nd i.400; & see phrase under abhibhū.;

pp. of abhibhavati

Abhimaṅgala

(adj.) (very) fortunate, lucky, anspicious, in ˚sammatā (of Visākhā) “benedicted” blessed Vin iii.187 = Dhp-a i.409. Opp. avamangala.

abhi + mangala

Abhimaṇḍita

(pp ■ ˚) adorned, embellished, beautified Mil 361; Sdhp 17.

abhi + maṇḍita

Abhimata

(adj.) desired, wished for; agreeable, pleasant C on Thag 91.

BSk. abhimata, e.g. Jtm 211; pp. of abhimanyate

Abhimatthati

(˚eti) & ˚mantheti 1. to cleave, cut; to crush, destroy MN i.243 (sikharena muddhānaṃ ˚mantheti); SN i.127; Dhp 161 (v.l. ˚nth˚); Ja iv.457 (matthako sikharena ˚matthiyamāno) Dhp-a iii.152 (= kantati viddhaṃseti).

2. to rub, to produce by friction (esp. fire, aggiṃ; cp. Vedic agniṃ nirmanthati) MN i.240.

abhi + math or manth, cp. nimmatheti

Abhimaddati

to crush SN i.102; AN i.198; Sdhp 288.

Sk. abhimardati & ˚mṛdnāti; abhi + mṛd

Abhimana

(adj.) having one’s mind turned on, thinking of or on (c. acc.) Thag 1122; Ja vi.451.

abhi + mano, BSk. abhimana, e.g. Mvu iii.259

Abhimanāpa

(adj.) very pleasing Vv-a 53 (where id. p. at Pv-a 71 has atimanāpa ).

abhi + manāpa

Abhimantheti

see abhimatthati.

Abhimāra

a bandit, bravo, robber Ja ii.199; DN-a i.152.

cp. Sk. abhimara slaughter

Abhimukha

(adj.) facing, turned towards, approaching Ja ii.3 (˚ā ahesuṃ met each other). usually -˚ turned to, going to, inclined towards DN i.50 (purattha˚) Ja i.203 (devaloka˚), 223 (varaṇa-rukkha˚); ii.3 (nagara˚) 416 (Jetavana˚); Dhp-a i.170 (tad˚); ii.89 (nagara˚); Pv-a 3 (kāma˚, opp. vimukha), 74 (uyyāna˚) ■ nt. ˚ṃ adv. to towards Ja i.263 (matta-vāraṇe); Pv-a 4 (āghātana˚, may here be taken as pred. adj.); Dhp-a iii.310 (uttara˚).

abhi + mukha

Abhiyācati

to ask, beg, entreat Snp 1101, cp. Nd ii.86.

abhi + yācati

Abhiyāti

to go against (in a hostile manner, to attack (c. acc.) SN i.216 (aor. abhiyaṃsu, v.l. SS abhijiyiṃsu); Dhp-a iii.310 (aor. abhiyāsi as v.l. for T. reading pāyāsi; the id. p Vv-a 68 reads pāyāsi with v.l. upāyāsi).

Vedic abhiyāti in same meaning; abhi _

Abhiyujjhati

to contend, quarrel with Ja i.342.

abhi + yujjhati from yudh

Abhiyuñjati

to accuse, charge; intrs. fall to one’s share Vin iii.50; Vin iv.304.

abhi + yuj

Abhiyoga

practice, observance Dāvs iv.7.

cp. abhiyuñjati

Abhiyogin

(adj.) applying oneself to, practised, skilled (an augur, sooth sayer) DN iii.168.

fr. abhiyoga

Abhiyobbana

(nt.) much youthfulness, early or tender youth Thig 258 (= abhinavayobbanakāla Thag-a 211).

abhi + yobbana

Abhirakkhati

to guard, protect Ja vi.589 (= pāleti C.). Cp. parirakkhati.

abhi + rakkhati

Abhirakkhā

(f.) protection, guard Ja i.204 (= ārakkhā 203).

fr. abhirakkhati

Abhirata

(adj.) (-˚) found of, indulging in, finding delight in AN iv.224 (nekkhamma˚); v.175 (id.) Snp 86 (nibbāna˚), 275 (vihesa˚), 276 (kalaha˚); Ja v.382 (dāna˚); Pv-a 54 (puññakamma˚), 61 (satibhavana˚), 105 (dānâdipuñña˚).

pp. of abhiramati

Abhiratatta

(nt.) the fact of being fond of, delighting in (-˚) Ja v.254 (kāma˚).

abstr. fr. abhirata

Abhirati

(f.) delight or pleasure in (loc. or-˚) SN i.185; SN iv.260; AN v.122; Dhp 88. -an˚; displeasure discontent, distaste Vin ii.110; DN i.17 (+ paritassanā); SN i.185; SN v.132; AN iii.259; AN iv.50; AN v.72 sq., 122; Ja iii.395; DN-a i.111; Pv-a 187.

fr. abhi + ram

Abhiratta

(adj.) very red Ja v.156; fig. very much excited or affected with (-˚) Snp 891 (sandiṭṭhirāgena a.).

abhi + ratta

Abhiraddha

(adj.) propitiated, satisfied AN iv.185 (+ attamana).

pp. of abhi + rādh

Abhiraddhi

(f.) only in neg. an˚; displeasure, dislike, discontent AN i.79; DN-a i.52 (= kopass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ).

fr. abhiraddha

Abhiramati

to sport, enjoy oneself, find pleasure in or with (c. loc.), to indulge in love Snp 718 Snp 1085; Ja i.192; Ja iii.189, Ja iii.393; Dhp-a i.119; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 61 Pv-a 145 ■ ppr. act. abhiranto only as nt. ˚ṃ in adv. phrase yathâbhirantaṃ after one’s liking, as much as he pleases after one’s heart’s content Vin i.34; MN i.170; Snp 53. ppr. med. abhiramamāna Ja iii.188, Pv-a 162 ■ pp abhirata (q.v.).

2nd Caus. abhiramāpeti (q.v.).

abhi + ram

Abhiramana

(nt.) sporting, dallying, amusing oneself Pv-a 16.

fr. abhiramati

Abhiramāpana

(nt.) causing pleasure to (acc.), being a source of pleasure making happy MN iii.132 (gāmante).

fr. abhiramāpeti, Caus2 of abhiramati

Abhiramāpeti

1. to induce to sport, to cause one to take pleasure Ja iii.393.

2. to delight, amuse, divert Ja i.61 ■ Cp. abhiramāpana.

Caus. II. fr. abhiramati

Abhiravati

to shout ont Bv ii.90 = Ja i.18 (v.99)

abhi + ravati

Abhirādhita

having succeeded in, fallen to one’s share, attained Thag 259.

pp. of abhirādheti

Abhirādhin

(adj.) (-˚) pleasing, giving pleasure, satisfaction Ja iv.274 (mitta˚ = ārādhento tosento C.).

fr. abhirādheti

Abhirādheti

to please, satisfy, make happy Ja i.421; DN-a i.52 ■ aor. (pret.) abhirādhayi Vv 315 (= abhirādhesi Vv-a 130); Vv 6423 (gloss for abhirocayi Vv-a 282); Ja i.421; Ja iii.386 (= paritosesi C.) ■ pp abhirādhita.

abhi + rādheti

Abhiruci

(f.) delight, longing, pleasure, satisfaction Pv-a 168 (= ajjhāsaya).

Sk. abhiruci, fr. abhi + ruc

Abhirucita

(adj.) pleasing, agreeable, liked Ja i.402; Dhp-a i.45.

pp. fr. abhi + ruc

Abhiruda

(adj ■ ˚) resounding with (the cries of animals, esp. the song of birds), full of the sound of (birds) Thag 1062 (kuñjara˚), 1113 (mayūra-koñca˚) Ja iv.466 (adāsakunta˚); v.304 (mayūra-koñca˚); vi.172 (id. = upagīta C.), 272 (sakunta˚; = abhigīta C.), 483 (mayūra-koñca˚), 539; Pv ii.123 (haṃsa-koñca˚; = abhinādita Pv-a 157) ■ The form abhiruta occurs at Thag 49.

Sk. abhiruta

Abhirūpa

(adj.) of perfect form, (very), handsome, beautiful, lovely Snp 410 (= dassaniya’ angapaccanga Snp-a 383); Ja i.207; Pp 52; DN-a i.281 (aññehi manussehi adhikarūpa); Vv-a 53; Pv-a 61 (abhikkanta). Occurs in the idiomatic phrase denoting the characteristics of true beauty abhirūpa dassanīya pāsādika (+ paramāya vaṇṇa-pokkharatāya samannāgata), e.g. Vin i.268; DN i.47, DN i.114, DN i.120; SN ii.279; AN ii.86, AN ii.203 Nd ii.659; Pp 66; Dhp-a i.281 (compar.); Pv-a 46.

abhi + rūpa

Abhirūḷha

mounted, gone up to, ascended Ja v.217; Dhp-a i.103.

pp. of abhirūhati

Abhirūhati

(abhiruhati) to ascend, mount, climb; to go on or in to (c. acc.) Dhp 321; Thag 271; Ja i.259; Ja ii.388; Ja iii.220; Ja iv.138 (navaṃ); vi.272 (peculiar aor. ˚rucchi with ābhi metri causa; = abhirūhi C.); DN-a i.253 ■ ger. abhiruyha Ja iii.189; Pv-a 75, Pv-a 152 (as v.l. T. has ˚ruyhitva), 271 (nāvaṃ), & abhirūhitvā Ja i.50 (pabbataṃ) ii.128.

abhi + ruh

Abhirūhana

(nt.) climbing, ascending, climb Mil 356.

BSk. ˚rūhana, e.g. Mvu ii.289

Abhiroceti

1. to like, to find delight in (acc.), to desire, long for Ja iii.192; Ja v.222 (roceti); Vv 6423 (vataṃ abhirocayi = abhirocesi ruccitvā pūresi ti attho; abhirādhayi ti pi pāṭho; sādhesi nipphādesī ti attho Vv-a 282).

2. to please, satisfy, entertain gladden Vv 6424 (but Vv-a 292: abhibhavitvā vijjotati thus to no. 3).

3. v.l. for atiroceti (to surpass in splendour) at Vv 8112, cp. also no. 2.

abhi + roceti, Caus. of ruc

Abhiropana

(nt.) concentration of mind, attention (seems restricted to Pts ii. only) Pts ii.82 (v.l. abhiniropana), 84, 93, 115 (buddhi˚), 142 (˚virāga), 145 (˚vimutti), 216 (˚abhisamaya). See also abhiniropana.

fr. abhiropeti

Abhiropeti

to fix one’s mind on, to pay attention, to show reverence, to honour Vv 377 (aor. ˚ropayi = ropesi Vv-a 169), 3710 (id.; = pūjaṃ kāresi Vv-a 172), 604 (= pūjesi Vv-a 253); Dāvs v.19.

abhi + ropeti, cp. Sk. adhiropayati, Caus. of ruh

Abhilakkhita

(adj.) fixed, designed, inaugurated, marked by auspices Ja iv.1; DN-a i.18.

Sk. abhilakṣita in diff. meaning; pp. of abhi + lakṣ

Abhilakkhitatta

(nt.) having signs or marks, being characterised, characteristics Dhs-a 62.

abstr. fr. abhilakkhita

Abhilaṅghati

to ascend, rise, travel or pass over (of the moon traversing the sky) Ja iii.364; Ja vi.221.

abhi + langhati

Abhilambati

to hang down over (c. acc.) MN iii.164 = Ne 179 (+ ajjholambati); Ja v.70 (papātaṃ) 269 (Vetaraṇiṃ) ■ pp. abhilambita (q.v.).

abhi + lambati

Abhilambita

(adj.) hanging down Ja v.407 (nīladuma˚).

pp. of abhilambati

Abhilāpa

talk, phrasing, expression Snp 49 (vācâbhilāpa making phrases, talking, idle or objectionable speech = tiracchanakathā Nd ii.561); Iti 89 (? reading abhilāpāyaṃ uncertain, vv.ll. abhipāyaṃ abhipāpāyaṃ abhisāpāyaṃ, abhisapāyaṃ, atisappāyaṃ. The corresp. passage SN iii.93 reads abhisapayaṃ: curse, and C. on Iti 89 expls. abhilāpo ti akkoso, see Brethren 376 n. 1); Dhs 1306 = Nd ii.34 (as exegesis or paraphrase of adhivacana combd. with vyañjana & trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as “a distinctive mark of discourse”); DN-a i.20, DN-a i.23, DN-a i.281; Dhs-a 51.

fr. abhi + lap

Abhilāsa

desire, wish, longing Pv-a 154.

Sk. abhilāṣa, abhi + laṣ

Abhilekheti

to cause to be inscribed Dāvs v.67 (cāritta-lekhaṃ ˚lekhayi).

Caus. of abhi + likh

Abhilepana

(nt.) “smearing over”, stain, pollution Snp 1032, Snp 1033 = Ne 10, Ne 11 (see Nd ii.88 laggana “sticking to”, bandhana, upakkilesa).

abhi + lepana

Abhivagga

great mass (?), superior force (?), only in phrase ˚ena omaddati to crush with sup. force or overpower MN i.87 = Nd ii.1996.

abhi + vagga

Abhivañcana

(nt.) deceit, fraud Dāvs iii.64.

abhi + vañc

Abhivaṭṭa

rained upon Dhp 335 (gloss ˚vuṭṭha; cp. Dhp-a iv.45); Mil 176 Mil 197, Mil 286Note. Andersen P. R. prefers reading abhivaḍḍha at Dhp 335 “the abounding Bīraṇa grass”).

pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivuṭṭha

Abhivaḍḍhati

1. to increase (intrs.) DN i.113, DN i.195 (opp. hāyati); MN ii.225; AN iii.46 (bhogā a.); Dhp 24; Mil 374; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 133; Sdhp 288, Sdhp 523.

2. to grow over or beyond, to outgrow Ja iii.399 (vanaspatiṃ) ■ pp. abhivuḍḍha & ˚vuddha; (q.v.).

Vedic abhivardhati, abhi + vṛdh

Abhivaḍḍhana

(adj.-n..) increasing (trs.), augmenting; f. ˚ī Sdhp 68.

fr. abhivaḍḍhati

Abhivaḍḍhi

(f.) increase, growth Mil 94 ■ See also abhivuddhi.

cp. Sk. abhivṛddhi, fr. abhi + vṛdh

Abhivaṇṇita

praised Dpvs i.4.

pp. of abhivanneti

Abhivaṇṇeti

to praise Sdhp 588 (˚ayi). - pp. abhivaṇṇita.

abhi + vanneti

Abhivadati

1. to speak out, declare, promise Ja i.83 = Vin i.36; Ja vi.220.

2. to speak (kindly to, to welcome, salute, greet. In this sense always combd. with abhinandati, e.g. at MN i.109, MN i.266, MN i.458; SN iii.14 SN iv.36 sq.; Mil 69 ■ Caus. abhivādeti.

abhi + vadati

Abhivandati

to salute respectfully, to honour, greet; grd. ˚vandanīya Mil 227.

abhi + vandati

Abhivassaka

(adj.) raining, fig. shedding, pouring ont, yielding Vv-a 38 (puppha˚).

fr. abhivassati

Abhivassati

to rain, shed rain, pour; fig. rain down, pour out, shed DN iii.160 (ābhivassaṃ metri causa); AN iii.34; Thag 985; Ja i.18 (v.100 pupphā a. stream down); cp. iii.106; Mil 132, Mil 411. pp. abhivaṭṭa & abhivuṭṭha; (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. abhivassāpeti to cause (the sky to) rain Mil 132.

abhi + vassati from vṛṣ

Abhivassin

(adj.) = abhivassaka Iti 64, Iti 65 (sabbattha˚).

Abhivādana

(nt.) respectful greeting, salutation, giving welcome, showing respect or devotion AN ii.180; AN iv.130, AN iv.276; Ja i.81, Ja i.82, Ja i.218; Dhp 109 (˚sīlin of devout character, cp. Dhp-a ii.239); Vv-a 24; Sdhp 549 (˚sīla).

fr. abhivādeti

Abhivādeti

to salute, greet, welcome, honour Vin ii.208 sq.; DN i.61; AN iii.223; AN iv.173; Vv 15 (abhivādayiṃ aor. = abhivādanaṃ kāresiṃ vandiṃ Vv-a 24) Mil 162. Often in combn with padakkhiṇaṃ karoti in sense of to bid goodbye, to say adieu, farewell, e.g. DN i.89, DN i.125, DN i.225; Snp 1010 ■ Caus. II. abhivādāpeti to cause some one to salute, to make welcome Vin ii.208 (˚etabba).

Caus. of abhivadati

Abhivāyati

to blow through, to pervade Mil 385.

abhi + vāyati; cp. Sk. abhivāti

Abhivāreti

to hold back, refuse, deny Ja v.325 (= nivāreti C.).

abhi + vāreti, Caus. of vṛ;

Abhivāheti

to remove, to put away Bv x.5.

abhi + vāheti, Caus. of vah

Abhivijayati

(& vijināti ) to overpower, to conquer. Of ˚jayati the ger. ˚jiya at DN i.89, DN i.134 DN ii.16. Of ˚jināti the pres. 3rd pl. ˚jinanti at Mil 39 the ger. ˚jinitvā at MN i.253; Pp 66.

abhi + vijayati

Abhiviññāpeti

to turn somebody’s mind on (c. acc.), to induce somebody (dat.) to (acc.) Vin iii.18 (purāṇadutiyikāya methunaṃ dhammaṃ abhiviññāpesi).

abhi + viññāpeti

Abhivitarati

“to go down to”, i.e. give in, to pay heed, observe Vin i.134 and in ster. expln. of sañcicca at Vin ii.91; Vin iii.73, Vin iii.112; Vin iv.290.

abhi + vitarati

Abhivinaya

higher discipline, the refinements of discipline or Vinaya; combd. with abhidhamma, e.g. DN iii.267; MN i.472; also with vinaya Vin v.1 sg.

abhi + vinaya

Abhivindati

to find, get, obtain Snp 460 (= labhati adhigacchati Snp-a 405).

abhi + vindati

Abhivisiṭṭha

(adj.) most excellent, very distinguished DN-a i.99, DN-a i.313.

abhi + visiṭṭha

Abhivissajjati

to send out, send forth, deal out, give DN iii.160.

abhi + vissajjati

Abhivissattha

confided in, taken into confidence MN ii.52 (v.l. ˚visaṭṭha).

abhi + vissattha, pp. of abhivissasati, Sk. abhiviśvasta

Abhivuṭṭha

poured out or over, shed out (of water or rain) Thag 1065; Dhp 335 (gloss); Pv-a 29.

pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivaṭṭa

Abhivuḍḍha

increased, enriched Pv-a 150.

pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuddha

Abhivuddha

grown up Mil 361.

pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuḍḍha

Abhivuddhi

(f.) increase, growth, prosperity Mil 34.

Sk. abhivṛddhi, see also abhivaḍḍhi

Abhiveṭheti

: Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading at Ja v.452 for ati˚; which however does not agree with C expln. on p. 454.

Abhivedeti

1. to make known, to communicate Dāvs v.2, Dāvs v.11.

2. to know Ja vi.175 (jānāti C.).

abhi + Caus. of vid

Abhivihacca

having destroyed, removed or expelled; only in one simile of the sun driving darkness away at MN i.317 = SN iii.156; SN v.44 = Iti 20.

ger. of abhi + vihanati

Abhivyāpeti

see abhibyāpeti.

Abhisaṃvisati

. Only in abhisaṃvisseyyagattaṃ (or-bhastaṃ or-santuṃ) Thig 466 a compound of doubtful derivation and meaning. Mrs. Rh. D., following Dhammapāla (p. 283) ʻa bag of skin with carrion filledʼ.

abhi + saṃvisati

Abhisaṃsati

to execrate, revile, lay a curse on Ja v.174 (˚saṃsittha 3rd sg. pret med. = paribhāsi C.)-aor. abhisasi Ja vi.187, Ja vi.505, Ja vi.522 (= akkosi C.), 563 (id.) ■ pp. abhisattha. Cp. also abhisiṃsati.

Vedic abhiśaṃsati, abhi + śaṃs

Abhisaṃsanā

(f.) is doubtful reading at Vv 6410; meaning “neighing” (of horses) Vv-a 272, Vv-a 279.

? abhisaṃsati

Abhisaṅkhata

(adj.) prepared, fixed, made up, arranged, done MN i.350; AN ii.43; AN v.343; Ja i.50; Nd i.186 (kappita + ); Pv-a 7, Pv-a 8.

abhi + sankhata, pp. of abhisankharoti

Abhisaṅkharoti

(& ˚khāreti in Pot.) to prepare, do, perform, work, get up Vin i.16 (iddh’ âbhisankhāraṃ ˚khāreyya); DN i.184 (id.); SN ii.40; SN iii.87 SN iii.92; SN iv.132, SN iv.290; SN v.449; AN i.201; Snp 984 (ger. ˚itvā having got up this curse, cp. Snp-a 582); Pv-a 56 (iddh’ âbhisaṃkhāraṃ), 172 (id.), 212 (id.) ■ pp. abhisaṅkhata (q.v.).

abhi + sankharoti

Abhisaṅkhāra

1. putting forth, performance, doing, working, practice: only in two combns., viz (a) gamiya˚; (or gamika˚) a heathenish practice Vin i.233; AN iv.180, & (b); iddha˚; (= iddḥi˚) working of supernormal powers Vin i.16; DN i.106; SN iii.92; SN iv.289; SN v.270 Snp p.107; Pv-a 56, Pv-a 172, Pv-a 212.

2. preparation, store accumulation (of kamma, merit or demerit), substratum state (see for detail sankhāra) SN iii.58 (an˚); Nd i.334 Nd i.442; Nd ii.s. v.; Vb 135 (puñña˚ etc.), 340; Dhs-a 357 (˚viññāna “storing intellect” Dhs trsl. 262).

abhi + sankhāra

Abhisaṅkhārika

(adj.) what belongs to or is done by the sankhāras; accumulated by or accumulating merit, having special (meritorious) effect (or specially prepared?) Vin ii.77 = Vin iii.160; Sdhp 309 (sa ˚paccaya).

fr. abhisankhāra

Abhisaṅkhipati

to throw together, heap together, concentrate Vb 1 sq., 82 sq., 216 sq. 400; Mil 46.

abhi + sankhipati

Abhisaṅga

I. sticking to, cleaving to, adherence to Ja v.6; Ne 110 Ne 112; Dhs-a 129 (˚hetukaṃ dukkhaṃ) 249 (˚rasa).

fr. abhi + sañj, cp. abhisajjati & Sk. abhisanga

Abhisaṅgin

(adj.) cleaving to (-˚) Sdhp 566.

fr. abhisanga

Abhisajjati

to be in ill temper, to be angry, to curse, imprecate (in meaning of abhisanga 2) DN i.91 (= kodha-vasena laggati DN-a i.257) iii.159; Ja iii.120 (+ kuppati); iv.22 (abhisajji kuppi vyāpajji, cp. BSk. abhiṣajyate kupyati vyāpadyate. Avs i.286); v.175 (= kopeti C.); Dhp 408 (abhisaje Pot. kujjhāpana-vasena laggapeyya Dhp-a iv.182); Pp 30, Pp 36. See also abhisajjana & abhisajjanā.;

abhi + sañj; cp. abhisanga

Abhisajjana

(nt ■ adj.) only as adv. f. ˚nī Ep. of vācā scolding abusing, cursing AN v.265 (para˚). Cp. next.

abstr. fr. abhisajjati in meaning of abhisanga 2

Abhisajjanā

(f.) at Snp 49 evidently means “scolding, cursing, being in bad temper” (cp. abhisajjati), as its combn. with vāc’ âbhilāpa indicates, but is expld. both by Nd ii.& Bdhgh. as “sticking to, cleaving, craving, desire” (= taṇhā), after the meaning of abhisanga. See Nd ii.89 & 107; Snp-a 98 (sineha-vasena) cp. also the compromise-expln by Bdhgh. of abhisajjati as kodha-vasena laggati (DN-a i.257).

abstr. fr. abhisajjati, cp. abhisajjana

Abhisañcināti

(& ˚cayati) to accumulate, collect (merit) Vv 476 (Pot. ˚sañceyyaṃ = ˚sañcineyyaṃ Vv-a 202).

abhi + sañcināti

Abhisañcetayita

raised into consciousness, thought out, intended, planned MN i.350; SN ii.65; SN iv.132; AN v.343.

pp. of abhisañceteti

Abhisañceteti

to bring to consciousness, think out, devise, plan SN ii.82 ■ pp. abhisañcetayita (q.v.).

abhi + sañceteti or ˚cinteti

Abhisaññā

(f.). Only in the compound abhi-saññā-nirodha DN i.179, DN i.184. The prefix abhi qualifies, not saññā, but the whole compound, which means ʻtranceʼ. It is an expression used, not by Buddhists, but by certain wanderers See saññā-vedayita-nirodha.

Abhisaññūhati

to heap up, concentrate Vb 1, Vb 2, Vb 82 sq.; 216 sq., 400; Mil 46 Cp. abhisaṅkhipati.

abhi + saññūhati, i.e. saṃ-ni-ūhati

Abhisaṭa

1. (med.) streamed forth, come together Ja vi.56 (= sannipatita C.). 2. (pass.) approached, visited Vin i.268.

pp. of abhisarati, abhi + sṛ; to flow

Abhisatta

cursed, accursed, railed at, reviled Ja iii.460; Ja v.71; Snp-a 364 (= akkuṭṭha); Vv-a 335.

pp. of abhisapati, cp. Sk. abhiśapta, fr. abhi + śap

Abhisattha

cursed, accursed Thag 118 “old age falls on her as if it had been cursed upon her (that is, laid upon her by a curse). Morris JP T S. 1886 145 gives the commentator’s equivalents, “commanded worked by a charm”. This is a curious idiom. Any European would say that the woman herself, not the old age was accursed. But the whole verse is a riddle and Kern’s translation (Toev. s. v.) ʻhurried upʼ seems to us impossible.

pp. of abhisaṃsati

Abhisaddahati

to have faith in, believe in (c. acc.) believe SN v.226; Thag 785; Pv iv.113, 125 (˚saddaheyya paṭiñeyya Pv-a 226); Ne 11; Mil 258; Pv-a 26 Dāvs iii.58.

abhi + saddahati, cp. Sk. abhiśraddadhāti, e.g. Divy 17, Divy 337

Abhisantāpeti

to burn out, scorch, destroy MN i.121.

ahhi + santāpeti, Caus. of santapati

Abhisanda

outflow, overflow, yield, issue, result only in foll. phrases: cattāro puññ’ âbhisandā kusal’ âbhisandā (yields in merit) SN v.391 sq.; AN ii.54 sq. AN iii.51, AN iii.337; AN vi.245, & kamm’ âbhisanda result of kamma Mil 276 ■ Cp. abhisandana.

abhi + sanda of syad, cp. BSk. abhisyanda, e.g. Mvu ii.276

Abhisandana

(nt.) result, outcome, consequence Pts i.17 (sukhassa).

= abhisanda

Abhisandahati

to put together, to make ready Thag 151; ger. abhisandhāya in sense of a prep. = on account of, because of Ja ii.386 (= paṭicca C.).

abhi + sandahati of saṃ + dhā

Abhisandeti

to make overflow, to make full, fill, pervade DN i.73, DN i.74.

abhi + sandeti, Caus. of syad

Abhisanna

(adj.) overflowing, filled with (-˚), full Vin i.279 (˚kāya a body full of humours, cp. ii.119 & Mil 134) Ja i.17 (v.88; pītiyā); Mil 112 (duggandha˚).

pp. of abhisandati = abhi + syand, cp. Sk. abhisanna

Abhisapati

to execrate, curse, accurse Vin iv.276; Ja iv.389; Ja v.87; Dhp-a i.42 ■ pp abhisatta.

abhi + sapati, of śap

Abhisapana

(nt.) cursing, curse Pv-a 144 (so read for abhisampanna).

fr. abhisapati

Abhisamaya

“coming by completely”, insight into, comprehension, realization clear understanding, grasp, penetration. See on term Kvu trsl. 381 sq ■ Esp. in full phrases: attha˚; grasp of what is proficient SN i.87 = AN iii.49 = Iti 17, cp. AN ii.46 ariyasaccānaṃ a. full understanding of the 4 noble truths SN v.415, SN v.440, SN v.441 [cp. Divy 654: anabhisamitānāṃ caturnāṃ āryasatyānāṃ a.]; Snp 758 (sacca˚ = sacc’ âvabodha Snp-a 509); Mil 214 (catusacc˚); Sdhp 467 (catusacc˚) 525 (saccānaṃ); dhamm’ âbhisamaya full grasp of the Dhamma, quasi conversion [cp. dharm’ âbhisamaya Divy 200] SN ii.134; Mil 20, Mil 350; Vv-a 219; Pv-a 9 etc frequent; sammā- mān’ âbhisamaya full understanding of false pride in ster. phrase” acchecchi (for acchejji) taṇhaṃ vivattayi saññojanaṃ sammāmānâbhisamayā antam akāsi dukkhassa” at SN iv.205, SN iv.207, SN iv.399; AN iii.246, AN iii.444; Iti 47 cp. māna˚ SN i.188 = Thig 20 (tato mānâbhisamayā upasanto carissasi, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. 239 “hath the mind mastered vain imaginings, then mayst thou go thy ways calm and serene”); Snp 342 (expld. by mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaṃ Snp-a 344). Also in foll passages: SN ii.5 (paññāya), 104 (id.), 133 sq. (Abhisamaya Saṃyutta); Snp 737 (phassa˚, expld. ad sensum but not at verbum by phassa-nirodha Snp-a 509); Pts ii.215 Pp 41; Vv 1610 (= saccapaṭivedha Vv-a 85); DN-a i.32; Dhp-a i.109; Vv-a 73 (bhāvana˚), 84 (sacchikiriya˚); Dpvs i.31. -anabhisamaya not grasping correctly, insufficient understanding, taken up wrongly SN iii.260; Pp 21; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162 (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. “lack of coordination”).

abhi + samaya, from sam + i, cp. abhisameti & sameti; BSk. abhisamaya, e.g. Divy 200, Divy 654

Abhisamāgacchati

to come to (understand) completely, to grasp fully, to master Kp-a 236 (for abhisamecca Snp 143).

abhi + sam + āgacchati, cp. in meaning adhigacchati

Abhisamācārika

(adj.) belonging to the practice of the lesser ethics; to be practiced; belonging to or what is the least to be expected of good conduct, proper. Of sikkhā Vin v.181; AN ii.243 sq.; of dhamma MN i.469; AN iii.14 sq.; 422.

abhi + samācārika, to samācāra

Abhisamikkhati

(& ˚ekkhati), to behold, see, regard, notice J. iv.19 (2nd sg med. ˚samekkhase = olokesi C.) ■ ger. ˚samikkha ˚samekkha; [B.Sk. ˚samīkṣya, e.g. Jtm. p. 28, 30 etc. Ja v.340 (˚samikkha, v.l. sañcikkha = passitvā C.); 393 394 (= disvā C.).

abhi + sam + ; īks, cp. samikkhati

Abhisameta

completely grasped or realised, understood mastered S; v.128 (dhamma a.), 440 (anabhisametāni cattāri ariyasaccāni, cp. Divy 654 anabhisamitāni c.a.) AN iv.384 (appattaṃ asacchikataṃ + ).

pp. of abhisameti, fr. abhi + sam + i, taken as caus. formation, against the regular form Sk.P. samita & B.Sk. abhisamita

Abhisametāvin

(adj.) commanding full understanding or penetration, possessing complete insight (of the truth) Vin iii.189; SN ii.133; SN v.458 sq.

possess. adj ■ formation, equalling a n. ag. form., pp. abhisameta

Abhisameti

to come by, to attain, to realise grasp, understand (cp. adhigacchati) Mil 214 (catusaccâbhisamayaṃ abhisameti). Freg. in comb;n. abhisambujjhati abhisameti; abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā, e.g. SN ii.25 SN iii.139; Kv 321 ■ fut. ˚samessati SN v.441 ■ aor ˚samiṃsu Mil 350; ˚samesuṃ SN v.415 ■ ger. ˚samecca (for ˚icca under influence of ˚sametvā as caus. form. Trenckner’s expln.Notes 564 is unnecessary & hardly justifiable) S; v.438 (an˚ by not thoroughly understanding) AN v.50 (samm’attha˚ through complete realisation of what is proficient); Snp 143 (= abhisamāgantvā Kp-a 236) and ˚sametvā SN ii.25; SN iii.139 ■ pp. abhisameta (q.v.).

abhi + sameti, sam + i; in inflexion base is taken partly as ordinary & partly as causative, e.g. aor ˚samiṃsu & ˚samesuṃ, pp. sameta: Sk. samita. Cp. B.Sk abhisamayati, either caus. or denom. formation, Divy 617 caturāryasatyāni a.

Abhisampanna

at Pv-a 144 is wrong reading for v.l. abhisapana (curse).

Abhisamparāya

future lot, fate, state after death, future condition of rebirth; usually in foll phrases: kā gati ko abhisamparāyo (as hendiadys) ʻwhat fate in the world-to-comeʼ, DN ii.91; Vin i.293; SN iv.59 SN iv.63; SN v.346, SN v.356, SN v.369; Dhp-a i.221evaṃ-gatika evanabhisamparāya (adj.) “leading to such & such a revirn such & such a future state” DN i.16, DN i.24, DN i.32, DN i.33 etc (= evaṃ-vidhā paralokā ti DN-a i.108) ■ abhisamparāyaṃ (acc. as adv.) in future, after death AN i.48; AN ii.197; AN iii.347 AN iv.104; Pv iii.510 (= punabbhave Pv-a 200) ■ diṭṭhe c’eva dhamme abhisamparāyañ ca “in this world and in the world to come” AN ii.61; Pp 38; Mil 162; Pv-a 195 etc. (see also diṭṭha) ■ Used absolutely at Pv-a 122 (= fate).

abhi + samparāya

Abhisambujjhati

to become wideawake, to awake to the highest knowledge, to gain the highest wisdom (sammāsambodhiṃ) DN iii.135; Iti 121 aor. ˚sambujjhi SN v.433; Pv-a 19. In combn. abhisambujjhati abhisameti, e.g. SN ii.25; SN iii.139 ■ ppr. med ˚sambudhāna; pp. ˚sambuddha -Caus. ˚sambodheti to make awake, to awaken, to enlighten; pp. ˚bodhita.

abhi + sambujjhati

Abhisambujjhana

(nt.) = abhisambodhi Ja i.59.

Abhisambuddha

(a) (pass.) realised, perfectly understood DN iii.273; SN iv.331; Iti 121 an˚; not understood MN i.71, MN i.92, MN i.114, MN i.163, MN i.240 ■ (b (med.) one who has come to the realisation of the highest wisdom, fully-awakened, attained Buddhahood, realising enlightened (in or as to = acc.) Vin i.1; DN ii.4; MN i.6 (sammāsambodhiṃ); SN i.68, SN i.138, SN i.139 & passim Pv-a 94, Pv-a 99.;

pp. of abhisambujjhati

Abhisambuddhatta

(nt.) thorough realisation, perfect understanding SN v.433.

abstr. fr. abhisambuddha

Abhisambudhāna

(adj.) awaking realising, knowing, understanding Dhp 46 (= bujjhanto jānanto ti attho Dhp-a i.337).

formation of a ppr. med. fr. pp. abhsam + budh instead of abhisam + bujjh˚;

Abhisambodhi

(f.) the highest enlightenment Ja i.14 (parama˚). Cp. abhisambujjhana and (sammā-) sambodhi.

abhi + sambodhi

Abhisambodhita

(adj.) awakened to the highest wisdom Pv-a 137 (Bhagavā).

pp. of abhisambodheti, Caus. of abhi + sambujjhati

Abhisambhava

only in dur˚; hard to overcome or get over, hard to obtain or reach, troublesome SN v.454; AN v.202; Snp 429, Snp 701; Ja v.269, Ja vi.139, Ja vi.439. Abhisambhavati (bhoti)

fr. abhisambhavati

Abhisambhavati (˚bhoti)

“to come up to”, i.e. to be able to (get or stand or overcome) to attain, reach, to bear AN iv.241; Thag 436; Nd i.471 Nd i.485; Ja iii.140; Ja v.150, Ja v.417; Ja vi.292, Ja vi.293, Ja vi.507 (fut. med ˚sambhossaṃ = sahissāmi adhivāsessāmi C.); Pts ii.193. ger. ˚bhutvā Thag 1057 & ˚bhavitvā Snp 52 (cp. Nd ii.85) ■ aor. ˚bhosi DN ii.232 ■ grd. ˚bhavanīya DN ii.210; Pts ii.193 ■ See also abhisambhuṇāti.

abhi + sambhavati

Abhisambhuṇāti

to be able (to get or reach); only in neg ppr. anabhisambhuṇanto unable DN i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DN-a i.268); Nd i.77, Nd i.312.

considered to be a bastard form of abhisambhavati, but probably of diff. origin & etym.; also in Bh. Sk. freq.

Abhisambhū

(adj.) getting, attaining (?) DN ii.255 (lomahaṃsa˚).

fr. abhi + sam + bhū

Abhisambhūta

attained, got Sdhp 556.

pp. of abhisambhavati

Abhisammati

to cease, stop; trs. (Caus.) to allay, pacify, still Ja vi.420 (pp. abhisammanto for ˚śammento? Reading uncertain).

abhi + śam, Sk. abhiśamyati

Abhisara

retinue Ja v.373.

fr. abhi + sarati, of sṛ; to go

Abhisallekhika

(adj) austere, stern, only in f. ˚ā (scil. kathā) AN iii.117 sq.; AN iv.352, AN iv.357; AN v.67.

abhi + sallekha + ika

Abhisavati

(better ˚ssavati ?) to flow towards or into Ja vi.359 (najjo Gangaṃ a.).

abhi + savati, of sru

Abhisasi

aor. of abhisaṃsati (q.v.).

Abhisādheti

to carry out, arrange; to get; procure, attain Ja vi.180; Mil 264.

abhi + sādheti

Abhisāpa

a curse, anathema SN iii.93 = Iti 89 (which latter reads abhilāpa and It A expls. by akkosa see vv.ll. under abhilāpa & cp.; Brethren 376 n. 1.) Thag 1118.

abhisapati

Abhisāriyā

(f.) a woman who goes to meet her lover Ja iii.139.

Sk. abhisārikā, fr. abhi + sṛ;

Abhisāreti

to approach, to persecute Ja vi.377.

abhi + sāreti, Caus. of abhisarati

Abhisiṃsati

, to utter a solemn wish, Vv 8118 (aor. ˚sīsi. v.l. ˚sisi. Vv-a 316 expls. by icchi sampaṭicchi).

= abhisaṃsati, abhi + śaṃs. As to Sk. śaṃs → P. siṃs cp. āsiṃsati, as to meaning cp. nature of prayer as a solemn rite to the “infernals”, cp. im-precare

Abhisiñcati

to sprinkle over, fig. to anoint (King), to consecrate AN i.107 (Khattiy’ âbhisekena Ja i.399 (fig. ˚itvā ger. ii.409 (id.); vi.161 (id.); Nd i.298; Mil 336 (amatena lokaṃ abhisiñci Bhagavā); Pv-a 144 (read abhisiñci cimillikañ ca… )-Pass. abhisiñcati Mil 359 ■ pp. abhisitta ■ Caus. abhiseceti.

abhi + siñncati fr. sic to sprinkle; see also āsiñcati & ava˚, Vedic only ā˚

Abhisitta

1. sprinkled over, anointed Snp 889 (manasā, cp. N1 298); Mil 336 (amatena loka a.).

2. consecrated (King), inaugurated (more freq. in this conn. is avasitta), Vin iii.44; AN i.107 (Khattiyo Khattiyehi Khattiy’ âbhisekena a.); ii.87 (v.l. for avasitta also an˚).

pp. of abhisiñcati, Sk. ˚sikta

Abhiseka

anointing, consecration, inauguration (as king) AN i.107 (cp. abhisitta) ii.87 read abhisek’-anabhisitto; Ja ii.104, Ja ii.352; Dhp-a i.350; Pv-a 74. Cp. ābhisekika.

fr. abhi + sic, cp. Sk. abhiṣeka

Abhisecana

(nt.) = abhiseka, viz. (a) ablution, washing off Thig 239 & 245 (udaka˚) ■ (b) consecration Ja ii.353.

Abhiseceti

to cause to be sprinkled or inaugurated Ja v.26. (imper. abhisecayassu).

caus. of abhisiñcati

Abhisevanā

(f.) pursuit, indulgence in (-˚) Sdhp 210 (pāpakamma˚).

abhi + sevana fr. sev

Abhissara

(adj.) only neg. an˚; in formula atāṇo loko anabhissaro “without a Lord or protector MN ii.68 (v.l. ˚abhisaro); Pts i.126 (v.l. id.).

abhi + issara

Abhihaṃsati

1. (trs.) to gladden, please, satisfy SN iv.190 (abhihaṭṭhuṃ); AN v.350 (id.). 2. (intr.) to find delight in (c. acc.), to enjoy SN v.74 (rūpaṃ manāpaṃ); AN iv.419 sq. (T. reads ˚hiṃsamāna jhānaṃ v.l. ˚hisamāna).

abhi + haṃsati fr. hṛṣ

Abhihaṭa

brought, offered, presented, fetched DN i.166 = Pp 55 (= puretaraṃ gahetvā āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ Pp A 231); Dhp-a ii.79.

pp. of abhiharati

Abhihaṭṭhuṃ

. Only in praise abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreti, to offer having fetched up. MN i.224; AN v.350 AN v.352; SN iv.190, SN v.53, SN v.300. See note in Vinaya Texts ii.440.

ger. of abhiharati

Abhihata

hit, struck Pv-a 55.

pp. of abhihanati

Abhihanati

(& ˚hanti) 1. to strike, hit Pv-a 258.

2. to overpower, kill, destroy Ja v.174 (inf. ˚hantu for T. hantuṃ) ■ pp. abhihata (q.v.).

abhi + ; han

Abhiharati

1. to bring (to), to offer, fetch DN iii.170; Ja i.54, Ja i.157; Ja iii.537; Ja iv.421; DN-a i.272.

2 to curse, revile, abuse [cp. Sk. anuvyāharati & abhivyā˚ AN i.198 ■ Pass. abhihariyati Vv-a 172 (for abhiharati of Vv 3710; corresp. with ābhata Vv-a 172) ■ pp. abhihaṭa (q.v.) ■ Caus. abhihāreti 1. to cause to be brought to gain, to acquire DN ii.188 = DN ii.192 = DN ii.195 Thag 637; Ja iv.421 (abhihārayaṃ with gloss abhibhārayiṃ).

2. to betake oneself to, to visit, take to, go to Snp 414 (Paṇḍavaṃ ˚hāresi = āruhi Snp-a 383), 708 (vanantaṃ abhihāraye vanaṃ gaccheyya Snp-a 495); Thig 146 (aor. ˚hārayiṃ uyyānaṃ = upanesi Thag-a 138).

3. to put on (mail) only in fut. abhihessati Ja iv.92 (kavacaṃ; C. expls. wrongly by ˚hanissati bhindissati so evidently taking it as abhibhavissati).

4. At Ja vi.27 kiṃ yobbanena ciṇṇena yaṃ jarā abhihessati the latter is fut. of abhibhavati (for ˚bhavissati) as indicated by gloss abhibhuyyati.

abhi + harati, cp. Sk. abhyāharati & Vedic āharati & ābharati

Abhihāra

bringing, offering, gift SN i.82; Snp 710; Ja i.81 (āsanâ).

fr. abhiharati

Abhihiṃsati

spurious reading at AN iv.419 for ˚haṃsati (q.v.).

Abhihiṃsanā

(& ˚ṃ) neighing Vv 64;10 = Vv-a 279 (gloss abhihesana). See in detail under abhisaṃsanā.

for abhihesanā cp. P. hesā = Sk. hreṣā, & hesitaṃ

Abhihīta

S i.50. Read abhigīta with SS. So also for abhihita on p. 51. ʻSo enchanted was I by the Buddha’s runeʼ The godlet ascribes a magic potency to the couplet.

Abhihesana

see abhihiṃsanā.

Abhihessati

see abhihāreti 3 & 4.;

Abhīta

(adj.) fearless Ja vi.193. See also abhida 1.

a + bhīta

Abhīruka

(adj.) fearless DN-a i.250.

a + bhīru + ka

Abhumma

(adj.) groundless, unfounded, unsubstantial, Ja v.178; Ja vi.495.

a + bhumma

Abhūta

(adj.) not real, false, not true, usually as nt. ˚ṃ falsehood, lie, deceit Snp 387; Iti 37; instr abhūtena falsely DN i.161.

-vādin one who speaks falsely or tells lies Snp 661; Dhp 306 = Iti 42; expld. as “ariy’ ûpavāda-vasena alika-vādin” Snp-a 478; as “tucchena paraṃ abhācikkhanto Dhp-a iii.477.

a + bhūta

Abhejja

(adj.) not to be split or divided, not to be drawn away or caused to be dissented, inalienable Snp 255 (mitto abhejjo parehi) Ja i.263 (varasūra… ) iii.318 (˚rūpa of strong character abhijja-hadaya); Pp 30 (= acchejja Pp A 212); Mil 160 (˚parisā); Sdhp 312 (+ appadusiya); Pgdp 97 (˚parivāra).

grd. of a + bhid, cp. Sk. abhedya

Amacca

1. friend, companion, fellow-worker, helper, esp one who gives his advice, a bosom-friend Iti 73; Ja vi.512 (sahajātā amaccā); Pv ii.620 (a ˚-paricārikā well-advising friends as company or around him). Freq. in combn. with mitta as mitt’ âmaccā, friends & colleagues DN iii.189–⁠90; S 190 = AN ii.67; Pv-a 29; or with ñātī (ñāti-sālohitā intimate friends & near-relations), mittâmaccā ñātisālohitā Vin ii.126; Snp p.104 (= mittā ca kammakarā ca Snp-a 447); mittā vā amaccā vā ñātī vā sālohitā vā AN i.222; Pv-a 28; amaccā ñāti-sanghā ca AN i.152. 2. Especially a king’s intimate friend, king’s favourite confidant Ja i.262; Pv-a 73 (˚kula), 74 (amaccā ca purohito ca), 81 (sabba-kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahāmatta, pārisajja); usually combd. with pārisajjā (pl.) viz. DN i.136 (= piya-sahāyaka DN-a i.297, but cp. the foll. expln. of pārisajjā as “sesā āṇatti-karā”); Vin i.348; DN iii.64 (amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā); AN i.142 (catunnaṃ mahārājānaṃ a. pārisajjā) See on the question of ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 & Banerjea,; Public Administration in Ancient India pp. 106

120.

Vedic amātya (only in meaning “companion”), adj. formation fr. amā an adverbial loc ■ geName of pron. 1st person, Sk. ahaṃ = Idg. *emo (cp. Sk. m-ama), meaning “(those) of me or with me”, i.e. those who are in my house

Amajja

a bud Ja v.416 (= makula C.).

etym.?

Amajjapāyaka

one who abstains from intoxicants, a teetotaler Ja ii.192.

a + majja + pāyaka, cp. Sk. amadyapa

Amata1

(nt.) 1. The drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality, (cp BSk. amṛta-varṣa “rain of Ambrosia” Jtm 221).

2. A general conception of a state of durability & non-change a state of security i.e. where there is not any more rebirth or re-death. So Bdhgh at Kp-a 180 (on Snp 225) “na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati ti amatan ti vuccati”, or at Dhp-a i.228 “ajātattā na jiyyati na miyyati tasmā amatan ti vuccati” ■ Vin i.7 = MN i.169 (apārutā tesaṃ amatassa dvārā); Vin i.39; DN ii.39, DN ii.217, DN ii.241; SN i.32 (= rāgadosamoha-khayo), 193; iii.2 (˚ena abhisitta “sprinkled with A.”); iv.94 (˚assa dātā), 370; v.402 (˚assa patti); AN i.45 sq.; AN iii.451; AN iv.455; AN v.226 sq., 256 sq. (˚assa dātā); Ja i.4 (v.25); iv.378, 386; v.456 (˚mahā-nibbāna); Snp 204 Snp 225, Snp 228 (= nibbāna Kp-a 185); Thag 310 (= agada antidote); Iti 46 = Iti 62 (as dhātu), 80 (˚assa dvāra); Dhp 114, Dhp 374 (= amata-mahā-nibbāna Dhp-a iv.110); Mil 258 (˚dhura savanûpaga), 319 (agado amataṃ & nibbānaṃ amataṃ), 336 (amatena lokaṃ abhisiñci Bhagavā), 346 (dhamm;’ âmataṃ); DN-a i.217 (˚nibbāna); Dhp-a i.87 (˚ṃ pāyeti); Dāvs ii.34; Dāvs v.31; Sdhp 1, Sdhp 209, Sdhp 530, Sdhp 571.

-ogadha diving into the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) SN v.41, SN v.54, SN v.181, SN v.220, SN v.232; AN iii.79, AN iii.304; AN iv.46 sq., 317 387; v.105 sq.; Snp 635; Thag 179, Thag 748; Dhp 411 (amataṃ nibbānaṃ ogahetvā Dhp-a iv.186); Vv 5020. -osadha the medicine of Ambrosia, ambrosial medicine Mil 247 -gāmin going or leading to the ambrosia (of Nibbāna SN i.123; SN iv.370; SN v.8; AN iii.329; Thig 222. -dasa one who sees Amata or Nibbāna Thag 336. -dundubhi the drum of the Immortal (Nibbāna) MN i.171 = Vin i.8 (has ˚dudrabhi). -dvāra the door to Nibbāna MN i.353; SN i.137 = Vin i.5; SN ii.43, SN ii.45, SN ii.58, SN ii.80; AN v.346. -dhātu the element of Ambrosia or Nibbāna AN iii.356. -patta having attained to Ambrosia AN iv.455. -pada the region or place of Ambrosia SN i.212 (“Bourne Ambrosial” trsln. p. 274); ii.280; Dhp 21 (= amatassa adhigama -vupāyo vuttaṃ hoti Dhp-a i.228). -phala ambrosial fruit SN i.173 = Snp 80. -magga the path to Ambrosia Dhp-a i.94.

a + mata = mṛta pp. of mṛ; Vedic amṛta = Gr. ἀ μ(β)ροτ ο & ἀμβροσία = Lat. im-mort-a(lis

Amata2

(adj.) belonging to Amṛta = ambrosial Snp 452 = SN i.189 (amatā vācā = amata-sadisā sādubhāvena Snp-a 399: “ambrosial”), 960 (gacchato amataṃ disaṃ nibbānaṃ, taṃ hi amatan ti tathā niddisitabbato disā cā ti Snp-a 572). Perhaps also at Iti 46 = Iti 62 (amataṃ dhātuṃ = ambrosial state or Amṛta as dhātu).

see amata1

Amatabbāka

(?) at Vv-a 111, acc. to Hardy (Index) “a precious stone of dark blue colour”.

Amattaññu

(adj.) not knowing any bounds (in the taking of food), intemperate immoderate Iti 23 (bhojanamhi); Dhp 7 (id.); Pp 21.

a + matta + ˚ñu = Sk. amātrajña

Amattaññutā

(f.) immoderation (in food) DN iii.213; Iti 23 (bhojane); Pp 21; Dhs 1346 (bhojane) Dhs-a 402.

abstr. to prec.

Amatteyyatā

(f.) irreverence towards one’s mother DN iii.70, DN iii.71.

from matteyyatā

Amanussa

a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin i.277; DN i.116; SN i.91, Ja i.99; Dhs 617; Mil 207; Dhs-a 319; Dhp-a i.13 (˚pariggahīta haunted); Pv-a 216 ■ Cp. amānusa.

a + manussa

Amanussika

(adj.) belonging to or caused by a spirit Vin i.202, Vin i.203 (˚âbādha being possessed by a demon).

fr. amanussa

Amama

(adj.) not egotistical, unselfish Snp 220 (+ subbata), 777; Ja iv.372 (+ nirāsaya); vi.259 (= mamāyana-taṇhā-rahita C.); Pv iv.134 (= mamaṃkāravirahita Pv-a 230); Mvu 1, Mvu 66, combd. with nirāsa (free from longing), at Snp 469 = Snp 494; Ud 32; Ja iv.303; Ja vi.259.

a + mama, geName of ahaṃ, pron. 1st person, lit. “not (saying: this is) of me”

Amara

(adj.) not mortal, not subject to death Thag 276; Snp 249 (= amara-bhāva-patthanatāya pavatta-kāya-kilesa Snp-a 291); Ja v.80 (= amaraṇa-sabhāva) 218; Dāvs v.62.

a + mara from mṛ;

Amaratta

(nt.) immortality Ja v.223 (= devatta C.).

abstr. fr. amara

Amarā

(?) a kind of slippery fish, an eel (?) Only in expression amarā-vikkhepika eel-wobbler, one who practices eel-wriggling, fr. ˚vikkhepa “oscillation like the a. fish” In English idiom “a man who sits on the fence” DN i.24; MN i.521; Pts i.155. The expln. given by Bdhgh at DN-a i.115 is “amarā nāma maccha-jāti, sā ummujjana-nimmujjan-ādi vasena… gahetuṃ na sakkoti” etc. This meaning is not beyond doubt, but Kern’s expln.Toev. 71 does not help to clear it up.

Amala

(adj.) without stain or fault Ja v.4; Sdhp 246, Sdhp 591, Sdhp 596.

a + mala

Amassuka

(adj.) beardless Ja ii.185.

a + massu + ka

Amājāta

(adj.) born in the house, of a slave Ja i.226 (dāsa, so read for āmajāta, an old mistake, expld. by C. forcibly as “āma ahaṃ vo dāsī ti”!). See also āmāya.

amā + jāta; amā adv. “at home”, Vedic amā, see under amacca

Amātika

(adj.) without a mother, motherless Ja v.251.

a + mātika from mātā

Amānusa

(adj.) non-or superhuman unhuman, demonic, peculiar to a non-human (Peta or Yakkha) Pv ii.1220 (kāma); iv.157 (as n.); iv.36 (gandha, of Petas) ■ f. ˚ī Dhp 373 (rati = dibbā rati Dhp-a iv.110); Pv iii.79 (ratti, love).

Vedic amānuṣa, usually of demons, but also of gods; a + mānusa, cp. amanussa

Amāmaka

(adj.) “not of me” i.e. not belonging to my party, not siding with me Dhp-a i.66.

a + mama + ka, cp. amama

Amāya

(adj.) not deceiving, open, honest Snp 941 (see Nd i.422: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā). Cp. next.

a + māyā

Amāyāvin

(adj.) without guile, not deceiving, honest DN iii.47 (asaṭha + ), 55 (id.), 237; Dhp-a i.69 (asaṭhena a.).

a + māyāvin, cp. amāya

Amitābha

(adj.) of boundless or immeasurable splendour Sdhp 255.

a + mita (pp. of ) + ā + bhā

Amitta

one who is not friend, an enemy DN iii.185; Iti 83; Snp 561 (= paccatthika Snp-a 455); Dhp 66, Dhp 207; Ja vi.274 (˚tāpana harassing the enemies).

Vedic amitra; a + mitta

Amilātatā

(f.) the condition of not being withered Ja v.156.

a + milāta + tā

Amu˚

base of demonstr. pron. “that”, see asu.

Amucchita

(adj.) not infatuated (lit. not stupified or bewildered), not greedy; only in phrase agathita amucchita anajjhāpanna (or anajjhopanna) DN iii.46; MN i.369; SN ii.194. See ajjhopanna.

a + mucchita

Amutta

(adj.) not released, not free from (c. abl.) Iti 93 (mārabandhanā).

a + mutta

Amutra

(adv.) in that place, there; in another state of existence DN i.4, DN i.14, DN i.184; Iti 99. Amulha-vinaya

pron. base amu + tra

Amūḷha-vinaya

“acquittal on the ground of restored sanity” (Childers) Vin i.325 (ix.6, 2); ii.81 (iv.5), 99 (iv.14, 27) iv.207, 351; MN ii.248.

Amoha

(adj.) not dull. As n. absence of stupidity or delusion DN iii.214; Pp 25. The form amogha occurs at Ja vi.26 in the meaning of “efficacious, auspicious” (said of ratyā nights).

a + moha, cp. Sk. amogha

Amba

, the Mango tree, Mangifera Indica DN i.46, DN i.53, DN i.235; Ja ii.105 Ja ii.160; Vv 7910; Pp 45; Mil 46; Pv-a 153, Pv-a 187.

-aṭṭhi the kernel or stone of the m. fruit Dhp-a iii.207 Dhp-a iii.208. -ārāma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 795 Vv-a 305. -kañjika mango gruel Vv 3337 (= ambilakañjika Vv-a 147). -pakka a (ripe) mango fruit Ja ii.104 Ja ii.394; Dhp-a iii.207. -panta a border of mango trees Vv-a 198. -pānaka a drink made from mangoes Dhp-a iii.207 -piṇḍi a bunch of mangoes Ja iii.53; Dhp-a iii.207. -pesikā the peel, rind, of the m. fruit Vin ii.109. -potaka a mango sprout Dhp-a iii.206 sq. -phala a m. fruit Pv-a 273, Pv-a 274. -rukkha a m. tree Dhp-a iii.207; Vv-a 198 -vana a m. grove or wood DN ii.126; Ja i.139; Vv-a 305 -siñcaka one who waters the mangoes, a tender or keeper of mangoes Vv 797.

Derivation unknown. Not found in pre-Buddhist literature. The Sk. is āmra. Probably non-Aryan

Ambaka1

(adj.) “womanish” (?), inferior, silly, stupid, of narrow intellect. Occurs only with reference to a woman, in combn. with bālā AN iii.349 (v.l. amma˚) v.139 (where spelt ambhaka with v.l. appaka˚ and gloss andhaka); v.150 (spelt ambhaka perhaps in diff. meaning).

-maddarī see next.

= ambakā?

Ambaka2

a little mango, only in ˚maddarī a kiṇd of bird [etym. uncertain] AN i.188.

demiName of amba

Ambakā

(f.) mother, good wife used as a general endearing term for a woman Vin i.232; DN ii.97 (here in play of words with Ambapālī expld. by Bdhgh at Vin i.385 as ambakā ti itthiyikā).

Sk. ambikā demiName of ambī mother, wife, see P. amma & cp. also Sk. ambālikā f.

Ambara1

(nt.) the sky, Dāvs i.38; Dāvs iv.51; Dāvs v.32Note. At Ja v.390 we have to read muraja-ālambara, and not mura-jāla-ambara.

Vedic ambara circumference, horizon

Ambara2

(m ■ nt.) some sort of cloth and an (upper) garment made of it (cp. kambala) Vv 537 (ratt˚ = uttariya Vv-a 236).

etym. = ambara1 (?) or more likely a distortion of kambala; for the latter speaks the combn. rattambara = ratta-kambala ■ The word would thus be due to an erroneous syllable division rattak-ambala (ambara) instead of ratta-kambala

Ambala

at Ja ii.246 (˚koṭṭhaka-āsana-sālā) for ambara1 (?) or for ambaka2 (?), or should we read kambala˚?.

Ambāṭaka

the hog-plum, Spondias Mangifera (a kind of mango) Vin ii.17 (˚vana); DN-a i.271 (˚rukkha).

Ambila

(adj.) sour, acid; one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka kasāya, madhura (see under rasa): thus at Mil 56. Another enumeration at Nd ii.540 & Dhs 629Ja i.242 (˚anambila), 505 (loṇ˚); ii.394 (loṇ˚); DN-a i.270 (˚yāgu sour gruel); Dhp-a ii.85 (ati-ambila, with accuṇha & atisīta).;

Sk. amla = Lat. amarus

Ambu

(nt.) water Ja v.6; Nd i.202 (a. vuccati udakaṃ); Dāvs ii.16 ■ Cp. ambha.

-cārin “living in the water”, a fish Snp 62 (= maccha Nd ii.91). -sevāla a water-plant Thag 113.

Vedic ambu & ambhas = Gr. ο ̓́μβρος, Lat. imber rain; cp. also Sk. abhra rain-cloud & Gr.; ἀφρός scum: see P. abbha

Ambuja

(m. & nt.) “water-born”, i.e. 1. (m.) a fish SN i.52.

2. (nt.) a lotus Snp 845 (paduma Nd i.202); Dāvs v.46; Sdhp 360.

ambu + ja of; jan

Ambuda

“water-giver”, a cloud Dāvs v.32; Sdhp 270, Sdhp 275.

ambu + da fr.

Ambha & Ambho

(nt.) water, sea Dāvs iv.54.

see ambu

Ambhaka

see ambaka.

Ambho

(indecl.) part. of exclamation, employed: 1. to draw attention = look here, hey! hallo! Vin iii.73 (= ālapan’ âdhivacana); Ja ii.3; Pv-a 62.

2. to mark reproach anger = you silly, you rascal DN i.194; Iti 114; Ja i.174 (v.l. amho), 254; Mil 48.

fr. haṃ + bho, see bho, orig. “hallo you there”

Amma

(indecl.) endearing term, used (1) by children in addressing their mother = mammy, mother dear DN i.93; Ja ii.133; Ja iv.1, Ja iv.281 (amma tāta uṭṭhetha daddy, mammy, get up!); Dhp-a ii.87; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 74. (2) in general when addressing a woman familiarly good woman, my (good) lady, dear, thus to a woman Ja i.292; Pv-a 63; Dhp-a ii.44; to a girl Pv-a 6; to a daughter Dhp-a ii.48; Dhp-a iii.172 ■ Cp. ambakā.

voc. of ammā

Ammaṇa

(nt.) 1. a trough Ja v.297; Ja vi.381 (bhatt˚). 2. a certain measure of capacity Ja i.62; Ja ii.436 (taṇḍul˚). As ˚ka at Ja ii.117 (v.l. ampaṇaka); DN-a i.84.

of uncertain etym.; Sk. armaṇa is Sanskritised Pāli. See on form & meaning Childers s. v. and Kern,; Toev. p. 72

Ammā

(f.) mother Ja iii.392 (gen. ammāya) ■ Voc. amma (see sep.).

onomat. from child language; Sk. ambā, cp. Gr. ἀμμάς mother, Oisl. amma “granny”, Ohg. amma “mammy”, nurse; also Lat. amita father’s sister & amāre to love

Amha & Amhan

(nt.) a stone Snp 443 (instr. amhanā, but Snp-a 392 reads asmanā pāsāṇena).

-maya made of stone, hard Dhp 161 (= pāsāṇa˚ Dhp-a iii.151).

Sk. aśman, see also asama2

Amha, Amhi

see atthi.

Amhā

(f.) a cow (?) AN i.229. The C. says nothing. Amhakam, Amhe

etym. uncertain; Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 201 too vague

Amhākaṃ, Amhe

see ahaṃ.

Amho = ambho

Ja i.174 (v.l.).

Aya1

see ayo.

Aya2

(fr. i, go) 1. income, in aya-potthaka receipt book Ja i.2.

2. inlet (for water, aya-mukha ) DN i.74; AN ii.166, AN iv.287.

Ayaṃ

(pron.) demonstr. pron. “this, he”; f. ayaṃ; nt. idaṃ & imaṃ “this, it” etc. This pron. combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as˚; (ayaṃ in nom. m. & f.) & im˚; (id in nom. nt.).

I. Forms. A. (sg.) nom. m. ayaṃ Snp 235; Ja i.168, Ja i.279 f. ayaṃ [Sk. iyaṃ] Kp vii.12; Ja ii.128, Ja ii.133; nt. idaṃ Snp 224; Ja iii.53; & imaṃ Mil 46.; acc. m. imaṃ Ja ii.160 f. imaṃ [Sk. īmāṃ] Snp 545, Snp 1002; Ja i.280. gen. dat. m imassa Ja i.222, Ja i.279 & assa Snp 234, Snp 1100; Kp vii.12 (dat.); Ja ii.158; f. imissā Ja i.179 & assā [Sk. asyāḥ] Ja i.290; Dhp-a iii.172. instr. m. nt. iminā Ja i.279; Pv-a 80 & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā Snp 137; f imāya [Sk. anayā] Ja i.267. The instr. anena [Sk. anena is not proved in Pāli. abl. asmā Snp 185; Dhp 220; imasmā (not proved).; loc. m. nt. imasmiṃ Kp iii.; Ja ii.159 & asmiṃ Snp 634; Dhp 242; f. imissā Pv-a 79 (or imissaṃ?) & imāyaṃ (no ref.) ■ B.; (pl.) nom. m. ime Ja i.221; Pv i.83; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Snp 897 & imāyo Snp 1122; nt. imāni [ = Sk.] Vin i.84. acc. m. ime [Sk. imān Ja i.266; Ja ii.416; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Snp 429; Ja ii.160. gen. imesaṃ Ja ii.160 & esaṃ [Sk. eṣāṃ] MN ii.86, & esānaṃ MN ii.154; MN iii.259; f. also āsaṃ Ja i.302 (= etāsaṃ C.) & imāsaṃ; instr. m. nt imehi Ja vi.364; f. imāhi. loc. m. nt imesu [Sk. eṣu] Ja i.307.

II. Meanings (1) ayaṃ refers to what is immediately in front of the speaker (the subject in question) or before his eyes or in his present time & situation, thus often to be trsl;d. by “before our eyes”, “the present” “this here”, “just this” (& not the other) (opp. para) viz. atthi imasmiṃ kāye “in this our visible body” Kp iii. yath’ âyaṃ padīpo “like this lamp here” Snp 235; ayaṃ dakkhiṇā dinnā “the gift which is just given before our eyes” Kp vii.12; ime pādā imaṃ sīsaṃ ayaṃ kāyo Pv i.83 asmiṃ loke paramhi ca “in this world & the other” Snp 634, asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ kathaṃ pecca na socati Snp 185; cp. also Dhp 220, Dhp 410; Ja i.168; Ja iii.53 ■ (2) It refers to what immediately precedes the present of the speaker, or to what has just been mentioned in the sentence; viz. yaṃ kiñci vittaṃ… idam pi Buddhe ratanaṃ “whatever… that” Snp 224; ime divase these days (just gone) Ja ii.416; cp. also Vin i.84; Snp 429; Ja ii.128 Ja ii.160 ■ (3) It refers to what immediately follows either in time or in thought or in connection: dve ime antā “these are the two extremes, viz.” Vin i.10; ayaṃ eva ariyo maggo “this then is the way” ibid.; cp. Ja i.280. (4) With a touch of (often sarcastic) characterisation it establishes a closer personal relation between the speaker & the object in question & is to be trsl;d. by “like that such (like), that there, yonder, yon”, e.g. imassa vānarindassa “of that fellow, the monkey” Ja i.279; cp. Ja i.222, Ja i.307; Ja ii.160 (imesaṃ sattānaṃ “creatures like us”) So also repeated as ayañ ca ayañ ca “this and this”, “so and so” Ja ii.3; idañ c’ idañ ca “such & such a thing Ja ii.5 ■ (5) In combn with a pron. rel. it expresses either a generalisation (whoever, whatever) or a specialisation (= that is to say, what there is of, i.e. Ger. und zwar), e.g. yâyaṃ taṇhā Vin i.10; yo ca ayaṃ… yo ca ayaṃ “I mean this… and I mean” ibid.; ye kec’ ime Snp 381; yadidaṃ “i.e.” Mil 25; yatha-y-idaṃ “in order that” (w. pot.) Snp 1092. See also seyyathīdaṃ ■ (6) The geName of all genders functions in general as a possessive pron. of the 3rd = his, her, its (lit. of him etc.) and thus resembles the use of tassa, e.g. āsava’ ssa na vijjanti “his are no intoxications” Snp 1100; sīlaṃ assā bhindāpessāmi “I shall cause her character to be defamed” Ja i.290; assa bhariyā “his wife” Ja ii.158 etc. freq.

Sk. ayaṃ etc., pron. base Idg. *i (cp. Sk. iha), f. *ī. Cp. Gr. ἰν, μιν; Lat. is (f. ea, nt. id); Goth is, nt. ita; Ohg. er (= he), nt. ez (= it); Lith. jìs (he) f. jì (she).

Ayana

(nt.) (a) “going”, road ■ (b) going to, goal SN v.167 (ekāyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct way), 185 (id.); DN-a i.313; Dāvs iv.40. See also eka˚.

Vedic ayana, fr. i

Ayasa

(nt.) ill repute, disgrace Mil 139, Mil 272; Dāvs i.8.

a + yasa, cp. Sk. ayaśaḥ

Ayira

(& Ayyira) (n ■ adj.) (n.) ariyan nobleman, gentleman (opp. servant); (adj.) arīyan, well-born, belonging to the ruling race, noble, aristocratic gentlemanly Ja v.257; Vv 396 ■ f. ayirā lady, mistress (of a servant) Ja ii.349 (v.l. oyyakā); voc. ayire my lady Ja v.138 (= ayye C.).

Vedic ārya, Metathesis for ariya as diaeretic form of ārya, of which the contracted (assimilation) form is ayya. See also ariya

Ayiraka

= ayira; cp. ariyaka & ayyaka; DN iii.190 (v.l. BB yy); Ja ii.313.

Ayo & Aya

(nt.) iron. The; nom. ayo found only in set of 5 metals forming an alloy of gold (jātarūpa), viz ayo, loha (copper), tipu (tin), sīsa (lead), sajjha (silver AN iii.16 = SN v.92; of obl. cases only the instr. ayasā occurs Dhp 240 (= ayato Dhp-a iii.344); Pv i.1013 (paṭikujjita, of Niraya) ■ Iron is the material used κα ̓τἐςοξήν in the outfit & construction of Purgatory or Niraya (see niraya & Avīci & cp. Vism 56 sq.) ■ In comp;n. both ayo˚ & aya˚; occur as bases.

I. ayo˚:-kapāla an iron pot AN iv.70 (v.l. ˚guhala) Nd ii.304 iii. d.2 (of Niraya). -kūṭa an iron hammer Pv-a 284. -khīla an iron stake SN v.444; MN iii.183 = Nd ii.304 iii. c; Snp-a 479. -guḷa an iron ball SN v.283; Dhp 308; Iti 43 = Iti 90; Thig 489; DN-a i.84. -ghana an iron club Ud 93; Vv-a 20. -ghara an iron house Ja iv.492. -paṭala an iron roof or ceiling (of Niraya) Pv-a 52. -pākāra an iron fence Pv i.1013 = Nd ii.304 iii. d.1. -maya made of iron Snp 669 (kūṭa); Ja iv.492 (nāvā); Pv i.1014 (bhūmi of N.); Pv-a 43, Pv-a 52. -muggara an iron club Pv-a 55 -saṅku an iron spike SN iv.168; Snp 667.

II. aya˚:-kapāla = ayo˚ Dhp-a i.148 (v.l. ayo˚). -kāra a worker in iron Mil 331. -kūṭa = ayo˚ Ja i.108; Dhp-a ii.69 (v.l.). -naṅgala an iron plough Dhp-a i.223; Dhp-a iii.67 -paṭṭaka an iron plate or sheet (cp. loha˚) Ja v.359 -paṭhavi an iron floor (of Avīci) Dhp-a i.148. -saṅghāṭaka an iron (door) post Dhp-a iv.104. -sūla an iron stake Snp 667; Dhp-a i.148.

Sk. ayaḥ nt. iron & ore, Idg. *ajes-, cp. Av. ayah, Lat. aes, Goth. aiz, Ohg. ēr (= Ger. Erz.) Ags. ār (= E. ore).

Ayojjha

(adj.) not to be conquered or subdued MN ii.24.

Sk. ayodhya

Ayya

(n ■ adj.) (a) (n.) gentleman, sire, lord master Ja iii.167 = Pv-a 65; Dhp-a i.8 (ayyā pl. the worthy gentlemen, the worthies), 13 (amhākaṃ ayyo our worthy Sir); ii.95 ■ (b) (adj.) worthy, gentlemanly, honourable Vin ii.191; Dhp-a ii.94 sq ■ The voc. is used as a polite form of address (cp. Ger. “Sie” and E. address “Esq.” like E. Sir, milord or simply “you” with the implication of a pluralis majestatis; thus voc. proper ayya Ja i.221 Ja i.279, Ja i.308; pl. nom. as voc. ayyā in addressing several Ja ii.128, Ja ii.415; nom. sg. as voc. (for all genders & numbers); ayyo Vin ii.215; Ja iii.126, Ja iii.127 ■ f. ayyā lady mistress MN ii.96 (= mother of a prince); Dhp-a i.398 voc. ayye my lady Ja v.138.

-putta lit. son of an Ariyan, i.e. an aristocratic (young man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (lit.) said by a servant Ja iii.167; (b) lord master, “governor” Ja i.62 (by a servant); DN-a i.257 (sāmi, opp. dāsi-putta); Pv-a 145 (by a wife to her husband); Dhp-a ii.110; (c) prince (see W.Z.K.M. xii., 1898 75 sq. & Epigraphia Indica iii.137 sq.) Ja vi.146.

contracted form for the diaeretic ariya (q.v. for etym.). See also ayira

Ayyaka

grandfather, (so also BSk., e.g. Mvu ii.426; Mvu iii.264) Ja iii.155; Ja iv.146; Ja vi.196; Pv i.84; Mil 284. ayyaka-payyakā grandfather & great grandfather; forefathers, ancestors Ja i.2; Pv-a 107 (= pitāmahā) ■ f ayyakā grandmother, granny Vin ii.169; SN i.97; Ja ii.349 (here used for “lady”, as v.l. BB); & ayyikā Thig 159 Vism 379.

demiName of ayya

Ara

the spoke of a wheel DN ii.17 (sahass’ âra adj with thousand spokes), cp. Mil 285; Ja iv.209; Ja vi.261; Mil 238; Dhp-a ii.142; Vv-a 106 (in allegorical etym of arahant = saṃsāra-cakkassa arānaṃ hatattā “breaker of the spokes of the wheel of transmigration”) = Pv-a 7 (has saṃsāra-vaṭṭassa); Vv-a 277.

Vedic ara fr. ; ṛṇoti; see etym. under appeti & cp. more esp. Lat. artus limb, Gr.; α ̔́ρμα chariot, also P aṇṇava

Arakkhiya

(adj.) not to be guarded, viz. (1) impossible to watch (said of women folk) Ja ii.326 (a. nāma itthiyo); iii.90 (mātugāmo nāma a.) ■ (2) unnecessary to be guarded Vin ii.194 (Tathāgatā).

a + rakkhiya, grd. of rakkhati

Arakkheyya

(adj.) only in nt. “that which does not need to be guarded against”, what one does not need to heed, superfluous to beware of AN iv.82 (cattāri Tathāgatassa a˚ āni).

3 arakkheyyāni are enumd. at DN iii.217 (but as ārakkh˚, which is also given by Childers).

in form = arakkhiya

Araghaṭṭa

a wheel for raising water from a well Bdgh. on cakkavaṭṭaka at cv v.16, 2 (Vin ii.318). So read for T. arahatta-ghaṭi-yanta acc to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 30; cp. also Vin. Texts iii.112 ■ The 2rd part of the cpd. is doubtful; Morris & Aufrecht compare the modern Hindī form arhaṭ or rahaṭ “a well-wheel”.

Sk. araghaṭṭaka (so Halāyudha, see Aufrecht p. 138), dialect.

Araja

(adj.) free from dust or impurity SN iv.218 (of the wind); Vv 536 (= apagata-raja Vv-a 236).

a + raja

Arañña

(nt.) forest DN i.71; MN i.16; MN iii.104; SN i.4, SN i.7, SN i.29, SN i.181, SN i.203 (mahā); AN i.60 (˚vanapatthāni); ii.252; iii.135, 138; Snp 39, Snp 53, Snp 119; Dhp 99, Dhp 329, Dhp 330; Iti 90; Vv 567; Pts i.176 [The commentators, give a wider meaning to the word Thus the O. C. (Vin iii.46, quoted Vism 72 & Snp-a 83 says every place, except a village and the approach thereto, is arañña. See also Vin iii.51; DN-a i.209; Pv-a 73; Vv-a 249; Ja i.149, Ja i.215; Ja ii.138; Ja v.70].

-āyatana a forest haunt Vin ii.201; SN ii.269; Ja i.173; Vv-a 301; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 78, Pv-a 141. -kuṭikā a hut in the forest a forest lodge SN i.61; SN iii.116; SN iv.116, SN iv.380; Dhp-a iv.31 (as v.l.; T. has ˚kuṭi). -gata gone into the forest (as loneliness) MN i.323; AN iii.353; AN v.109 sq., 207, 323 sq -ṭhāna a place in the forest Ja i.253. -vāsa a dwelling in the forest, a hermitage Ja i.90. -vihāra living in (the loneliness (of the forest) AN iii.343 sq.

Vedic araṇya; from araṇa, remote, + ya. In the Rig V. araṇya still means remoteness (opp. to amā at home). In the Ath V. it has come to mean wilderness or forest. Connected with ārād and āre, remote, far from

Araññaka

(& Āraññāka) (adj.) belonging to solitude or to the forest, living in the forest, fond of solitude, living as hermits (bhikkhū) MN i.214 (ā˚), 469 iii.89; SN ii.187, SN ii.202 (v.l. ā˚), 208 sq.; 281; AN iii.343 AN iii.391; AN iv.291, AN iv.344, AN iv.435; AN v.10. See also āraññaka.

arañña + ka

Araññakatta

(nt.) the habit of one who lives in the forest, indulgence in solitude & sequestration a hermit’s practice, seclusion SN ii.202, SN ii.208 sq See also āraññakatta.

abstr. fr. araññaka

Araṇa1

(adj.-n.). (adj. living in solitude, far from the madding crowd MN iii.237 (˚vibhanga-sutta); SN i.44, SN i.45; Ja i.340 (tittha˚?).

Vedic araṇa fr. *ara √ ; which as abl. ārā is used as adv. far from, cp. P. ārakā. Orig. meaning “removed from, remote, far”. See also arañña

Araṇa2

(nt.) quietude, peace Ne 55 (+ tāṇa), 176 (or as adj. = peaceful) Thag-a 134 (+ saraṇa); Vb 19 sq. (opp. saraṇa ). See saraṇa2.

-vihārin (or araṇā-vihārin) [to be most likely taken as araṇā˚, abl. of araṇa in function of ārakā, i.e. adv far from, away; the spelling araṇa would refer it to araṇa2 As regards meaning the P. Commentators expln. it as opp. of raṇa fight, battle, i.e. peacefullness, friendliness & see in it a syName of metta. Thus Dhammapāla at Pv-a 230 expl;s. it as “mettā-vihārin”, & in this meaning it is found freq. in BSk. e.g. Divy 401; Avs ii.131 (q. v for further ref. under note 3); Mvu i.165; Mvu ii.292. Cp also the epithet of the Buddhas raṇañjaha] one who lives in seclusion, an anchoret, hermit; hence a harmless, peaceful person AN i.24; Thig 358, Thig 360; Pv iv.133 (= Pv-a 230); Thag-a 244. Cp. Dhs trsl. 336. Arani & i

a + raṇa

Araṇi & ˚ī

(f.) wood for kindling fire by attrition, only in foll. cpds.: ˚potaka small firewood, all that is needed for producing fire, chiefly drill sticks Mil 53; ˚sahita (nt.) same Vin ii.217; Ja i.212 (ī); v.46 (ī); Dhp-a ii.246; ˚mathana rubbing of firewood Ja vi.209Note. The reading at Pv-a 211 araṇiyehi devehi sadisa-vaṇṇa is surely a misreading (v.l. BB ariyehi).

Vedic araṇī & araṇi fr.; ;

Arati

(f.) dislike, discontent, aversion Snp 270, Snp 436, Snp 642, Snp 938; Dhp 418 (= ukkaṇṭhitattaṃ Dhp-a iv.225) Thig 339 (= ukkaṇṭhi Thag-a 239); Sdhp 476.

a + rati

Aravinda

a lotus, Nymphaea Nelumbo Dāvs v.62.

ara + vinda (?) Halāyudha gives as Sk. aravinda nt.

Araha

(adj.) (-˚) 1. worthy of, deserving, entitled to, worth Dhp 195 (pūjā˚); Pv ii.86 (dakkhiṇā˚); Vv-a 23 (daṇḍa˚ deserving punishment) Freq. in cpd. mahāraha [Sk. mahārgha] worth much, of great value, costly, dear Ja i.50, Ja i.58; Ja iii.83, etc. (see mahant).

2. fit for, apt for, suitable Pv-a 26 (paribhoga fit for eating).

Vedic arha of arh

Arahati

to be worthy of, to deserve, to merit (= Lat. debeo) Snp 431, Snp 552 (rājā arahasi bhavituṃ); Ja i.262; Dhp 9, Dhp 10, Dhp 230; Pv iii.66 ■ ppr. arahant (q.v.). Cp. also adj. araha.

Vedic arhati, etym. uncertain but cp. agghati

Arahatta1

(nt.) the state or condition of an Arahant, i.e. perfection in the Buddhist sense = Nibbāna (S iv.151) final & absolute emancipation Arahantship, the attainment of the last & highest stage of the Path (see magga & anāgāmin). This is not restricted by age or sex or calling. There is one instance in the Canon of a child having attained Arahantship at the age of 7. One or two others occur in the Comy Thag-a 64 (Selā) Pv-a 53 (Sankicca). Many women Arahants are mentioned by name in the oldest texts. About 400 men Arahants are known. Most of them were bhikkhus, but AN iii.451 gives the names of more than a score lay Arahants (cp DN ii.93 = SN v.360, and the references in Dial. iii.5 n4). Arahattaṃ is defined at SN iv.252 as rāga-kkhaya, dosa˚ moha˚. Descriptions of this state are to be found in the formulae expressing the feelings of an Arahant (see arahant ii.). Vin ii.254; DN iii.10, DN iii.11, DN iii.255; AN iii.34, AN iii.421 AN iii.430; AN v.209; Pp 73; Ne 15, Ne 82; DN-a i.180, DN-a i.188, DN-a i.191; Dhp-a ii.95; Dhp-a iv.193; Pv-a 14Phrases: arahattaṃ sacchikaroti to experience Arahantship Vin ii.74; DN i.229 arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti to attain or reach Arahantship (usually in aor. pāpuṇi) Ja ii.229 Thag-a 64; Dhp-a ii.49 (saha paṭisambhidāhi) 93 (id.); Pv-a 53, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 233 & freq elsewhere; cp. arahattāya paṭipanna DN iii.255; AN i.120 AN iv.292 sq., 372 sq.

-gahaṇa attainment of Arahantship Dhp-a i.8. -patta (& patti); one who has attained Ar. SN i.196; SN v.273; AN ii.157; AN iii.376; AN iv.235. -phala the fruit of Ar. Vin i.39 Vin i.41, Vin i.293; Vin iii.93; DN iii.227, DN iii.277; SN iii.168; SN v.44; AN i.23 AN i.45; AN iii.272; AN iv.276; Dhs 1017; Vb 326. -magga the Path of Ar. SN i.78; AN iii.391; DN-a i.224. -vimokkha the emancipation of Ar. Nd ii.19.

abstr. formation fr. arahat˚, 2nd base of arahant in compn.: see arahant iv.2

Arahatta2

in ˚ghaṭi see araghaṭṭa.

Arahant

(adj.-n.). Before Buddhism used as honorific title of high officials like the English ʻHis Worshipʼ; at the rise of Buddhism applied popularly to all ascetics (Dial. iii.3–⁠6). Adopted by the Buddhisṭs as t. t for one who has attained the Summum Bonum of religious aspiration (Nibbāna).

I. Cases nom. sg. arahaṃ Vin i.9; DN i.49; MN i.245 MN i.280; SN i.169; see also formula C. under ii., & arahā Vin i.8, Vin i.25, Vin i.26; Vin ii.110, Vin ii.161; DN iii.255; Iti 95; Kp iv. gen. arahato SN iv.175; Snp 590; instr. arahatā SN iii.168; DN-a i.43; acc. arahantaṃ DN iii.10; Dhp 420; Snp 644 Loc. arahantamhi Vv 212 ■ nom. pl. arahanto Vin i.19; Vin iv.112; SN i.78, SN i.235; SN ii.220; SN iv.123; gen. arahataṃ Vin iii.1; SN i.214; Snp 186; Iti 112; Pv i.1112. Other cases are of rare occurrence.

II. Formulae. Arahantship finds its expression in freq occurring formulae, of which the standard ones are the foll.: A. khīṇā jāti vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ nāparaṃ itthattāya “destroyed is (re-) birth lived is a chaste life, (of a student) done is what had to be done, after this present life there is no beyond”. Vin i.14, Vin i.35, Vin i.183; DN i.84, DN i.177, DN i.203; MN i.139; MN ii.39; SN i.140; SN ii.51, SN ii.82, SN ii.95, SN ii.120, SN ii.245; SN iii.21, SN iii.45, SN iii.55, SN iii.68, SN iii.71, SN iii.90 SN iii.94, SN iii.195, SN iii.223; SN iv.2, SN iv.20, SN iv.35, SN iv.45, SN iv.86, SN iv.107, SN iv.151, SN iv.383; SN v.72 SN v.90, SN v.144, SN v.222; AN i.165; AN ii.211; AN iii.93; AN iv.88, AN iv.179, AN iv.302 AN v.155, AN v.162; Snp p.16; Pp 61, etc ■ B. eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto ʻalone, secluded, earnest zealous, master of himselfʼ DN i.177; DN ii.153 & continued with A: SN i.140, SN i.161; SN ii.21; SN iii.36, SN iii.74; SN iv.64 SN v.144, SN v.166; AN i.282; AN ii.249; AN iii.70, AN iii.217, AN iii.301, AN iii.376; iv. 235 ■ C. arahaṃ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anupatta-sadattho parikkhīṇa-bhava-saññojano sammad-aññā vimutto: DN iii.83, DN iii.97; MN i.4 MN i.235; SN i.71; SN iii.161, SN iii.193; SN iv.125; SN v.145, SN v.205, SN v.273, SN v.302; AN i.144; AN iii.359, AN iii.376; AN iv.362, AN iv.369, AN iv.371 sq., Iti 38. D. ñāṇañ ca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi akuppā me ceto-vimutti ayaṃ antimā jāti natthi dāni punabbhavo “there arose in me insight, the emancipation of my heart became unshake able, this is my last birth, there is now no rebirth for me: SN ii.171; SN iii.28; SN iv.8; SN v.204; AN i.259 AN iv.56, AN iv.305, AN iv.448.

III. Other passages (selected) Vin i.8 (arahā sītibhūto nibbuto), 9 (arahaṃ Tathāgato Sammāsambuddho), 19 (ekādasa loke arahanto), 20 (ekasaṭṭhi id.). 25 sq.; ii. 110, 161; iii.1; iv.112 (te arahanto udake kīḷanti); DN i.49 (Bhagavā arahaṃ), 144; iii.10, 255: MN i.245 (Gotamo na pi kālaṃ karoti: arahaṃ samaṇo Gotamo), 280; SN i.9, SN i.26, SN i.50 (Tathāgato), 78, 140, 161, 169, 175, 178 (+ sītibhūta), 208, 214, 235 (khīnāsavā arahanto); iii. 160 (arahā tissa?), 168; iv.123, 175, 260, 393; v.159 sq., 164, 200 sq.; AN i.22 (Sammāsambuddho), 27, 109 266; ii.134; iii.376, 391, 439; iv.364, 394; v.120; Snp 186, Snp 590, Snp 644, Snp 1003; Iti 95 (+ khīṇāsava), 112; Kp iv. (dasahi angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati: see Kp-a 88); Vv 212; i.217; Dhp 164, Dhp 420 (khīṇāsava + ); Pts ii.3 Pts ii.19, Pts ii.194, Pts ii.203 sq.; Pp 37, Pp 73; Vb 324, Vb 336, Vb 422; Pv i.11 (khettûpamā arahanto), 1112; iv.132.

IV. In compn. & der. we find two bases, viz. (1) arahanta˚ in; ˚ghāta the killing or murder of an Arahant (considered as one of the six deadly crimes): see abhiṭhāna; ˚ghātaka the murderer of the A.: Vin i.89, Vin i.136 Vin i.168, Vin i.320; ˚magga (arahatta˚?) the path of an A.: DN ii.144 ■ (2) arahat˚; in (arahad-) dhaja the flag or banner of an A.: Ja i.65.

V. See further details & passages under anāgāmin khīṇa, buddha. On the relationship of Buddha and Arahant see Dial. ii.1

3; iii.6. For riddles or word-play on the form arahant see M i.280; AN iv.145; DN-a i.146 = Vv-a 105, Vv-a 6 = Pv-a 7; Dhp-a iv.228; Dhs-a 349.

Vedic arhant, ppr. of arhati (see arahati), meaning deserving, worthy

Arāti

an enemy Dāvs iv.1.

a + rāti, cp. Sk. arāti

Ari

an enemy ■ The word is used in exegesis & word expl;n, thus in etym. of arahant (see ref. under arahant v.); of bhūri Pts ii.197 ■ Otherwise in late language only, e.g. Sdhp 493 (˚bhūta). See also arindama & aribhāseti.;

Ved. ari; fr. ;

Ariñcamāna

not leaving behind, not giving up, i.e. pursuing earnestly Snp 69 (jhānaṃ = ajȧhamana Snp-a 123, cp. Nd ii.94).

ppr. med. of P. riñcati for ricyati

Ariṭṭha1

(adj.) unhurt Sdhp 279.

a + riṭṭha = Vedic ariṣṭa, pp of a + riṣ to hurt or be hurt

Ariṭṭha2

a kind of spirituous liquor Vin iv.110.

Sk. ariṣṭa, Name of a tree

Ariṭṭhaka

(adj.) (a) unhurt; perfect DA 1,94 (˚ṃ ñāṇaṃ) ■ (b) [fr. ariṭṭha in meaning of “soap-berry plant”?] in phrase mahā ariṭṭhako maṇi SN i.104 “a great mass of soap stone” (cp. Rh. D. in J.R. A. S. 1895 893 sq.), “a shaped block of steatite” (Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S 130).

fr. ariṭṭha

Aritta

(nt.) a rudder. Usually in combn. with piya (phiya) oar, as piyârittaṃ (phiy˚ oar & rudder, thus at SN i.103 (T. piya˚, v.l. phiya˚) AN ii.201 (piya˚); Ja iv.164 (T. piya˚, v.l. phiya˚); Snp 321 (piya + ; Snp-a 330 phiya = dabbi-padara, aritta = veḷudaṇḍa). Dhs-a 149.

Vedic aritra, Idg. *ere to row (Sk. ; to move); cf. Gr. ἐρέσσω to row, ἐρετμός rudder, Lat. remus, Ohg ruodar = rudder; Ags. rōwan = E. row

Arindama

a tamer of enemies, victor, conqueror Pv iv.315 (= arīnaṃ damanasīla Pv-a 251); Sdhp 276.

Sk. arindama, ariṃ + dama of dam

Aribhāseti

to denounce, lit. to call an enemy Ja iv.285. Correct to Pari˚ according to Fausböll (J v. corr.)

= ariṃ bhāseti

Ariya

(adj.-n.) 1.; (racial) Aryan DN ii.87. 2. (social) noble, distinguished, of high birth.

3. (ethical) in accord with the customs and ideals of the Aryan clans, held in esteem by Aryans, generally approved Hence: right, good, ideal. [The early Buddhists had no such ideas as we cover with the words Buddhist and Indian Ariya does not exactly mean either. But it often comes very near to what they would have considered the best in each](adj.): DN i.70 = (˚ena sīlakkhandhena samannāgata fitted out with our standard morality); iii.64 (cakkavatti-vatta), 246 (diṭṭhi); MN i.139 (pannaddhaja) ii.103 (ariyāya jātiyā jāto, become of the Aryan lineage) SN ii.273 (tuṇhībhāva); iv.250 (vaddhi), 287 (dhamma) v.82 (bojjhangā), 166 (satipaṭṭhānā), 222 (vimutti), 228 (ñāṇa), 255 (iddhipādā), 421 (maggo), 435 (saccāni), 467 (paññā-cakkhu); AN i.71 (parisā); ii.36 (ñāya); iii.451 (ñāṇa) iv.153 (tuṇhībhāva); v.206 (sīlakkhandha); Iti 35 (paññā) 47 (bhikkhu sammaddaso); Snp 177 (patha = aṭṭhangiko maggo Snp-a 216); Dhp 236 (bhūmi), 270; Pts ii.212 (iddhi) -alamariya fully or thoroughly good DN i.163 = DN iii.82; AN iv.363; nâlamariya not at all good, object, ignoble ibid ■ (m.) Vin i.197 (na ramati pāpe); DN i.37 = (yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā etc.: see 3rd. jhāna) 245; iii.111 (˚ānaṃ anupavādaka one who defames the noble); MN i.17, MN i.280 (sottiyo ariyo arahaṃ); SN i.225 (˚ānaṃ upavādaka); ii.123 (id.); iv.53 (˚assa vinayo), 95 (id.) AN i.256 (˚ānaṃ upavādaka); iii.19, 252 (id.); iv.145 (dele see arīhatatta); v.68, 145 sq., 200, 317; Iti 21, Iti 108; Dhp 22, Dhp 164, Dhp 207; Ja iii.354 = Mil 230; MN i.7, MN i.35 (ariyānaṃ adassāvin: “not recognising the Noble Ones” Pv-a 26, Pv-a 146; Dhp-a ii.99; Sdhp 444 (˚ānaṃ vaṃsa). anariya (adj. & n.); not Ariyan, ignoble, undignified, low common, uncultured AN i.81; Snp 664 (= asappurisa Snp-a 479; Dhs-a 353); Ja ii.281 (= dussīla pāpadhamma C.) v.48 (˚rūpa shameless), 87; Dhp-a iv.3 ■ See also ñāṇa magga, sacca, sāvaka.

-āvakāsa appearing noble Ja v.87uposatha the ideal feast day (as one of 3) AN i.205 sq., 212 ■ kanta loved by the Best DN iii.227gaṇā (pl.) troops of worthies Ja vi.50 (= brāhmaṇa-gaṇā, te kira tāda ariyâcārā ahesuṃ tena te evam āha C.) ■ garahin casting blame on the righteous Snp 660citta a noble heart ■ traja a true descendant of the Noble ones Dpvs v.92dasa having the ideal (or best) belief Iti 93 = Iti 94dhana sublime treasure; always as sattavidha˚ sevenfold, viz. saddhā˚ sīla˚, hiri˚, ottappa˚, suta˚, cāga˚, paññā˚ “faith, a moral life, modesty, fear of evil, learning, self-denial, wisdom Thag-a 240; Vv-a 113; DN-a ii.34dhamma the national customs of the Aryans (= ariyānaṃ eso dhammo Nd i.71 Nd i.72) MN i.1, MN i.7, MN i.135; AN ii.69; AN v.145 sq., 241, 274; Snp 783; Dhs 1003puggala an (ethically) model person, Pts i.167; Vin v.117; Thag-a 206magga the Aryan Path- vaṃsa the (fourfold) noble family, i.e. of recluses content with the 4 requisites DN iii.224 = AN ii.27 = Pts i.84 = Nd ii.141; cp. AN iii.146vattin leading a noble life, of good conduct Ja iii.443vatā at Thag 334 should be read ˚vattā (nom. sg. of vattar, vac ) “speaking noble words”:- vāsa the most excellent state of mind habitual disposition, constant practice. Ten such at DN iii.269 DN iii.291 = AN v.29 (Passage recommended to all Buddhists by Asoka in the Bhabra Edict) ■ vihāra the best practice SN v.326vohāra noble or honorable practice. There are four, abstinence from lying, from slander, from harsh language, from frivolous talk. They are otherwise known as the 4 vacī-kammantā & represent sīla nos. 4

7. See DN iii.232; AN ii.246; Vin v.125saṅgha the communion of the Nobles ones Pv-a 1sacca, a standard truth, an established fact, DN i.189, DN ii.90, DN ii.304 sq.; iii277; MN i.62, MN i.184; MN iii.248; SN v.415 sq. = Vin i.10, Vin i.230. Iti 17; Snp 229, Snp 230, Snp 267; Dhp 190; Dhp-a iii.246; Kp-a 81, Kp-a 151 Kp-a 185, Kp-a 187; Thag-a 178, Thag-a 282, Thag-a 291; Vv-a 73sāvaka a disciple of the noble ones (= ariyānaṃ santike sutattā a Snp-a 166). MN i.8, MN i.46, MN i.91, MN i.181, MN i.323; MN ii.262; MN iii.134, MN iii.228 MN iii.272; Iti 75; Snp 90; Mil 339; Dhp-a i.5, (opp. putthujjana) ■ sīlin of unblemished conduct, practising virtue DN i.115 (= sīlaṃ ariyaṃ uttamaṃ parisuddhaṃ DN-a i.286) MN ii.167.

When the commentators, many centuries afterwards began to write Pali in S. India & Ceylon, far from the ancient seat of the Aryan clans, the racial sense of the word; ariya was scarcely, if at all, present to their minds Dhammapāla especially was probably a non -Aryan, and certainly lived in a Dravidian environment. The then current similar popular etmologies of ariya and arahant (cp. next article) also assisted the confusion in their minds. They sometimes therefore erroneously identify the two words and explain Aryans as meaning Arahants (Dhp-a i.230; Snp-a 537; Pv-a 60). In other ways also they misrepresented the old texts by ignoring the racial force of the word. Thus at Ja v.48 the text, speaking of a hunter belonging to one of the aboriginal tribes, calls him anariya-rūpa. The C. explains this as “shameless” but what the text has, is simply that he looked like a non-Aryan. (cp ʻfrankʼ in English).

Vedic ārya, of uncertain etym. The other Pāli forms are ayira & ayya

Arīhatatta

in phrase “arīhatta ariyo hoti” at AN iv.145 is wrong reading for arīnaṃ hatattā. The whole phrase is inserted by mistake from a gloss explaining arahā in the foll. sentence “ārakattā kilesānaṃ arīnaṃ hatattā… arahā hoti”, and is to be deleted (omitted also by SS).

Aru

(nt.) a wound, a sore, only in cpds.: ˚kāya a heap of sores MN ii.64 = Dhp 147 = Thag 769 (= navannaṃ vaṇamukhānaṃ vasena arubhūta kāya Dhp-a iii.109 = Vv-a 77); ˚gatta (adj.) with wounds in the body MN i.506 (+ pakka-gatta); Mil 357 (id); ˚pakka decaying with sores SN iv.198 (˚āni gattāni) ˚bhūta consisting of wounds, a mass of wounds Vv-a 77; Dhp-a iii.109.

Vedic aruḥ, unknown etym.

Aruka

= aru; only in cpd. ˚ūpamacitto (adj.) having a heart like a sore (of a man in anger) AN i.124 = Pp 30 (expld at Pp A 212 as purāṇa-vaṇa-sadisa-citto “an old wound” i.e. continually breaking open).

Aruṇa

the sun Vin ii.68 Vin iv.245; Ja ii.154; Ja v.403; Ja vi.330; Dpvs i.56; DN-a i.30. a. uggacchati the sun rises Ja i.108; Vv-a 75, & see cpds.;

-ugga sunrise Vin iv.272; SN v.29, SN v.78, SN v.101, SN v.442 (at all Saṃyutta pass. the v.l. SS is aruṇagga); Vism 49 -uggamana sunrise (opp. oggamanna). Vin iii.196, Vin iii.204 Vin iii.264; Vin iv.86, Vin iv.166, Vin iv.230, Vin iv.244; Dhp-a i.165; Dhp-a ii.6; Pv-a 109 -utu the occasion of the sun (-rise) Dhp-a i.165. -vaṇṇa of the colour of the sun, reddish, yellowish, golden Vism 123; Dhp-a i.1.3 = Pv-a 216. -sadisa (vaṇṇa) like the sun (in colour) Pv-a 211 (gloss for suriyavaṇṇa).

Vedic aruṇa (adj.) of the colour of fire, i.e. ruddy, nt. the dawn; of Idg. *ereu as in Sk. aruṣa reddish, Av auruša white, also Sk ravi sun; an enlarged from of Idg *reu as in Sk. rudhira, rohita red (bloody; see etym under rohita), Gr. ἐρυδρός, Lat. ruber.

Arubheda

the Rigveda Thag-a 206.

Arūpa

(adj.) without form or body, incorporeal, DN i.195 sq.; DN iii.240; Snp 755; Iti 62; Sdhp 228, Sdhp 463 Sdhp 480. See details under rūpa.

-āvacara the realm or world of Formlessness, Dhs 1281–⁠1285; Pts i.83 sq., 101. -kāyika belonging to the group of formless beings Mil 317 (devā). -ṭhāyin standing in or being founded on the Formless Iti 62. -taṇhā “thirst for the Formless DN iii.216. -dhātu the element or sphere of the Incoporeal (as one of the 3 dhātus rūpa˚, arūpa˚ nirodha˚; see dhātu ) DN iii.215, DN iii.275; Iti 45. -bhava formless existence DN iii.216. -loka the world of the Formless Sdhp 494. -saññin not having the idea of form DN ii.110; DN iii.260; Exp. i.252.

a + rūpa

Arūpin

(adj.) = arūpa; DN i.31 (arūpī attā hoti: see DA i.119), 195; iii.111, 139; Iti 87 (rūpino va arūpino va sattā).

a + rūpin

Are

(indecl.) exclam. of astonishment & excitement: he! hallo I say!, implying an imprecation: Away with you (with voc.) Ja i.225 (dāsiputta-ceṭaka); iv.391 (duṭṭha-caṇḍāla) DN-a i.265 (= re); Vv-a 68 (dubbinī), 217 (“how in the world”).

onomat. Cp. Sk. lalallā, Gr. λαλέω, Lat. lallo = E. lull, Ger. lallen & without redupl. Ags. holā Ger. halloh, E. lo. An abbrev. form of are is re. Cf. also alālā

Ala1

freq. spelling for aḷa.

Ala2

(adj.) enough, only in neg. anala insufficient, impossible MN i.455; Ja ii.326 = Ja iv.471.

alaṃ adv. as adj.

Alaṃ

(indecl.) emphatic particle 1. in affirmative sentences: part. of assurance emphasis = for sure, very much (so), indeed, truly.; Note. In connection with a dat. or an infin. the latter only apparently depend upon alaṃ, in reality they belong to the syntax of the whole sentence (as dat. or inf. absolute) It is customary however (since the practice of the Pāli grammarians) to regard them as interdependent and interpret the construction as “fit for, proper” (= yuttaṃ Pāli Com.), which meaning easily arises out of the connotation of alaṃ, e.g. alam eva kātuṃ to be sure, this is to be done = this is proper to be done. In this sense (c. dat. it may also be compd. with Vedic araṃ c. dat ■ (a (abs.) only in combn. with dat. or inf. (see c. & Note above) ■ (b.) (˚-) see cpds ■ (c.) with; dat. or infin.: alaṃ antarāyāya for certain an obstacle MN i.130 (opp nâlaṃ not at all); alaṃ te vippaṭisārāya you ought to feel sorry for it Vin ii.250; alaṃ vacanāya one says rightly SN ii.18; alaṃ hitāya untold happiness Dhp-a ii.41 ■ ito ce pi so bhavaṃ Gotamo yojana sate viharati alam eva… . upasankamituṃ even if he were 100 miles from here (surely) even so (i.e. it is fit or proper even then) one must go to him DN i.117 (expld. at DN-a i.288 by yuttam eva = it is proper); alam eva kātuṃ kalyāṇaṃ indeed one must do good = it is appropriate to do good Pv ii.923 (= yuttaṃ Pv-a 122); alaṃ puññāni kātave “come, let us do meritorious works” Vv 4415 (= yuttaṃ Vv-a 191). 2. in negative or prohibitive sentences: part. of disapprobation reproach & warning; enough! have done with fie! stop! alas! (etc. see are) ■ (a) (abs.) enough: nâlaṃ thutuṃ it is not enough to praise Snp 217; te pi na honti me alaṃ they are not enough for me Pv i.63 ■ (b) with voc.: alaṃ Devadatta mā te rucci sanghabhedo “look out D. or take care D. that you do not split up the community Vin ii.198; alaṃ Vakkali kin te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena… SN iii.120 ■ (c) enough of (with instr.): alaṃ ettakena enough of this, so much of that Mil 18; alam me Buddhena enough for me of the Buddha = I am tired of the B. Dhp-a ii.34.

-attha (adj.) “quite the thing”, truly good, very profitable useful DN ii.231; MN ii.69 (so read for alamatta) AN ii.180; Thag 252; Ja i.401 (so read for ˚atta). -ariya truly genuine, right noble, honourable indeed, only in ˚ñāṇa-dassana [cp. BSk. alamārya-jñāna-darśana Lal v.309 Lal v.509] Vin i.9; AN iii.64, AN iii.430; AN v.88; Ja i.389 (cp. ariya) -kammaniya (quite or thoroughly) suitable Vin iii.187 -pateyya: see the latter. -vacanīyā (f.) a woman who has to be addressed with “alaṃ” (i.e. “fie”), which means that she ceases to be the wife of a man & returus into her parental home Vin iii.144, cp. 274 (Bdhgh’s expln.). -samakkhātar one who makes sufficiently clear Iti 107. -sājīva one who is thoroughly fit to associate with his fellow AN iii.81. -sāṭaka “curse-coat”, one who curses his waist-coat (alaṃ sāṭaka!) because of his having eaten too much it will not fit; an over-eater; one of the 5 kinds of gluttons or improper eaters as enumd. at Dhp-a iv.16 = Dhs-a 404.

Vedic araṃ. In meaning 1. alaṃ is the expanded continuation of Vedic araṃ, an adv. acc. of ara (adj.) suitable; fitly, aptly rightly fr. ; Cp. aṇṇava, appeti ara. In meaning 2. alaṃ is the same as are

Alakkhika

(& īka ) (adj.) unfortunate unhappy, of bad luck Vin iii.23; Ja iii.259.

a + lakkhika

Alakkhī

(f.) bad luck, misfortune Thag 1123.

a + lakkhi

Alagadda

a kind of snake MN i.133 = DN-a i.21; Dhp-a iv.132 (˚camma, so read for T. alla-camma, vv.ll. alanda & alandu˚).;

Der. unknown. In late Sk. alagarda is a watersnake

Alagga

(adj.) not stuck or attached Nd ii.107 (also alaggita); alaggamāna (ppr.) id. Dhp-a iii.298.

pp. of laggati

Alaggana

(nt.) not hanging on anything, not being suspended DN-a i.180.

a + laggana

Alaṅkata

1. “made too much”, made much of, done up, adorned, fitted out Dhp 142 (= vatthâbharaṇa-paṭimaṇḍita Dhp-a iii.83); Pv ii.36; Vv 11; Ja iii.392; Ja iv.60.

2. “done enough” (see alaṃ, use with instr.), only neg. analaṅkata in meaning “insatiate” SN i.15 (kāmesu).

pp. of alankaroti

Alaṅkaraṇa

(nt.) doing up, fitting out, ornamentation Ja i.60.

alaṃ + karaṇa, fr. alankaroti

Alaṅkaraṇaka

(adj.) adorning, embellishing, decorating Dhp-a i.410.

fr. alankaraṇa

Alaṅkaroti

to make much of i.e. to adorn, embellish, decorate Ja i.60; Ja iii.189; vi. 368. ger. ˚karitvā Dhp-a i.410; Pv-a 74 ■ pp. alaṅkata ■ Caus. alaṅkārāpeti to cause to be adorned Ja i.52.

alaṃ + karoti, Vedic araṅkaroti

Alaṅkāra

“getting up” i.e. fitting out, ornament, decoration; esp. trinkets, ornaments DN iii.190; AN iii.239; AN iii.263 sq.; Ja vi.368; Pv-a 23 Pv-a 46, Pv-a 70 (-˚ adj. adorned with), 74; Sdhp 249.

fr. alankaroti, cp. Vedic araṅkṛti

Alattaka

lac, a red animal dye Ja iv.114 (˚pāṭala); Dhp-a ii.174; Dhp-a iv.197.

Sk. alaktaka

Alanda & Alandu

see alagadda.

Alamba

(adj.) not hanging down, not drooping, short Ja v.302; Ja vi.3 (˚tthaniyo not flabby: of a woman’s breasts cp. alamb’ ordhva-stanī Suśruta i.371).

a + lamba

Alasa

(adj.) idle, lazy, slack, slothful, languid SN i.44, SN i.217; Snp 96 (= jāti-alaso Snp-a 170); Ja iv.30; Dhp 280 (= mahā-alaso Dhp-a iii.410). Opp. analasa vigorous energetic SN i.44; DN iii.190 (dakkha + ); Vin iv.211; Nd ii.141 (id.).

a + lasa

Alasatā

(f.) sloth, laziness; only in neg. analasatā zeal, industry Vv-a 229.

abstr. fr. alasa

Alassa

(nt.) at SN i.43 is spurious spelling for ālassa idleness, sloth; v.l. BB ālasya.

Alāta

(nt.) a firebrand AN ii.95 (chava˚ a burning corpse see chava); Ja i.68; Pp 36; Dhp-a iii.442.

Sk. alāta, related to Lat. altāre altar, adoleo to burn

Alāpu

(nt.) a gourd, pumpkin Dhp 149 (= Dhp-a iii.112; vv. ll alābu & alābbu).;

= alābu, with p for b: so Trenckner Notes 6216

Alābu

a long white gourd, Cucurbita Lagenaris MN i.80 (tittaka˚), 315 (id.); Pv-a 47 (id.); Dhs-a 405 ■ See also alāpu.

Sk. alābū f.

Alābhaka

not getting, loss, detriment Vin iii.77.

a + labhaka

Alālā

(indecl.) “not saying lā lā” i.e. not babbling not dumb, in ˚mukha not (deaf & ) dumb Snp-a 124 (aneḷamūga of Snp 70).;

a + lālā interjection fr. sound root *lal, see etym. under are

Alika

(adj.) contrary, false, untrue SN i.189; Ja iii.198; Ja vi.361; Mil 26, Mil 99 ■ nt. ˚ṃ a lie, falsehood Dhp 264.

-vādin one who tells a lie, a liar Dhp 223 = Vv-a 69 (has alīka˚); Ja ii.4; Snp-a 478 (for abhūta-vādin Snp 661).

Sk. alīka

Alīnatā

(f.) open mindedness, prudence, sincerity Ja i.366.

abstr. of alīna

Aluḷita

(adj.) umoved, undisturbed Mil 383.

a + luḷita, pp. of lul

Aloṇika

(adj.) not salted Ja iii.409; Vv-a 184.

a + loṇika

Aloma

(adj.) not hairy (upon the body) Ja vi.457.

a + loma

Alola

(adj.) undisturbed, not distracted (by desires), not wavering: of firm resolution, concentrated Snp 65 (= nillolupa Nd ii.98; = rasavisesesu anākula Snp-a 118).

a + lola

Alla

(adj.) (only ˚-)

1. moist, wet MN iii.94 (˚mattikā -puñja a heap of moist clay; may be taken in meaning 2).

2 fresh (opp. stale), new; freshly plucked, gathered or caught, viz. ˚āvalepana seei → adda3; ˚kusamuṭṭhi freshly plucked grass AN v.234 = AN v.249; ˚gomaya fresh dung AN v.234; Dhp-a i.377; ˚camma living skin Vism 195; ˚tiṇa fresh grass DN-a i.77; Pv-a 40; ˚dārūni green sticks Ja i.318 ˚madhu fresh honey Dhp-a ii.197; ˚maṃsa-sarīra a body of living flesh Dhp-a ii.51 = Dhp-a iv.166; ˚rasa fresh-tasting Dhp-a ii.155; ˚rohita-maccha fresh fish Ja iii.333. 3. wet = with connotation of clean (through being washed), freshly washed, ˚kesa with clean hair Pv-a 82 (sīsaṃ nahātvā allakesa); usually combd. with allavattha with clean clothes (in an ablution; often as a sign of mourning) Ud 14, Ud 91; Dhp-a iv.220; or with odāta vattha (id.) Ja iii.425. ˚pāṇi with clean hand Pv ii.99 (= dhotapāṇi Pv-a 116). [For analla-gatta at SN i.183 better read, with ibid 169, an-allīna -gatta. For allacamma at Dhp-a iv.132 alagadda-camma, with the v.l., is preferable].

Vedic ārdra, to Gr. α ̓́ρδω moisten, α ̓́ρδα dirt

Allāpa

conversation, talk; only in cpd. ˚sallāpa conversation (lit. talking to & fro or together Ja i.189; Mil 15; Vv-a 96; Pv-a 86.

Sk. ālāpa; ā + lāpa

Allika

(?) only in cpd. (kāma-) sukh’ allik’ânuyoga given to the attachment to sensual joys Vin i.10; DN iii.113 DN iii.130; SN iv.330; SN v.421; Ne 110.

either from alla = allikaṃ nt. in meaning defilement, getting soiled by (-˚), or from allīyati = alliyakaṃ a der. fr. ger. alliya clinging to, sticking to. The whole word is doubtful.

Allīna

(a) sticking to, adhering or adhered to, clinging MN i.80; AN v.187; Nd ii.under nissita (in form asita allīna upagata) ■ (b.) soiled by (-˚), dirtied AN ii.201. -anallīna “to which nothing sticks” i.e. pure, undefiled, clean SN i.169 (id. p. on p. 183 reads analla: see alla ). Cp. ālaya.

pp. of allīyati; Sk. ālīna

Allīyati

to cling to, stick to, adhere to (in both senses, good or bad); to covet ■ (a lit. kesā sīsaṃ allīyiṃsu the hair stuck to the head Ja i.64 khaggo lomesu allīyi the sword stuck in the hair Ja i.273-(b) fig. to covet, desire etc.: in idiomatic phrase allīyati (S iii.190 v.l.; T. ālayati) kelāyati vanāyati (S iii.190 v.l.; T. manāyati; MN i.260 T. dhanāyati, but v.l. p. 552 vanāyati) mamāyati “to caress dearly & be extremely jealous of” (c. acc.) at MN i.260 & SN iii.190. Ja iv.5; Ja v.154 (allīyituṃ, v.l. illīyituṃ); Dhs-a 364 (vanati bhajati a); pp. allīna-Caus. alliyāpeti [cp. Sk. ālāpayati, but B.Sk. allīpeti Mvu iii.144; pp. allīpita ibid. i.311; iii.408; pass. allīpīyate iii.127.] to make stick to to bring near to (c. acc. or loc.) Ja ii.325 (hatthiṃ mahābhittiyan alliyāpetvā); iv.392 (sīsena sīsaṃ alliyāpetvā).

ā + līyati, , līyate, layate

Aḷa

1. the claw of a crab MN i.234; SN i.123; Ja i.223, Ja i.505 (˚chinno kakkaṭako; T. spells ala˚); ii.342 iii.295;

2. the nails (of finger or toe) (?) in ˚chinna one whose nails are cut off Vin i.91.

etym. unknown

Aḷāra

(adj.) only used with ref. to the eyelashes, & usually expl;d. by visāla, i.e. extended wide, but also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning etym. is as yet uncertain. Kern, (;Toev. s.v.) transls. by “bent, crooked, arched”. ˚akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) Ja i.306 (= visāla-netta C.); ˚pamha with thick eye-lashes Vv 357 (= bahala-saṃyata-pakhuma C.; v.l ˚pamukha); ˚bhamuka having thick eyebrows or ˚lashes Ja vi.503 (so read for ˚pamukha; C. expls by visāl-akkhigaṇḍa). Cp. āḷāra.

Is it the same as uḷāra?

Aḷhaka

in udak’ aḷhaka Vv-a 155 read āḷhaka.

Ava˚

(prefix) I. Relation between ava & o.; Phonetically the difference between ava & o is this, that; ava is the older form, whereas o represents a later development. Historically the case is often reversed-that is, the form in o was in use first & the form in ava was built up, sometimes quite independently, long afterwards.; Okaḍḍhati okappati, okappanā, okassati, okāra, okantati, okkamati ogacchati, odāta and others may be used as examples The difference in many cases has given rise to a differentiation of meaning, like E. ripe: rife, quash: squash Ger. Knabe: Knappe etc. (see below B 2) ■ A. The old Pāli form of the prefix is o. In same cases however a Vedic form in ava has been preserved by virtue of its archaic character. In words forming the 2nd part of a cpd. we have ava, while the absolute form of the same word has o. See e.g. avakāsa (-˚) → okāsa (˚-); avacara → ocaraka; avatata; avadāta; avabhāsa; avasāna ■ B 1. the proportion in the words before us (early and later is that o alone is found in 65" of all cases, ava alone in 24", and ava as well as o in 11". The proportion of forms in ava increases as the books or passages become later. Restricted to the older literature (the 4 Nikāyas are the foll. forms with o: okiri, okkanti, okkamati okkhipati, ogacchati, ossajati ■ (1) The Pāli form (o˚ shows a differentiation in meaning against the later Sanskrit forms (ava˚; ). See the foll.:

avakappanā harnessing: okappanā confidence;

avakkanti (not Sk.): okkanti appearance;

avakkhitta thrown down: okkhitta subdued;

avacara sphere of motion: ocaraka spy;

avatiṇṇa descended: otiṇṇa affected with love;

avaharati to move down, put off: oharati to steal.

(2) In certain secondary verb-formations, arisen on Pāli grounds, the form o˚ is used almost exclusively pointing thus to a clearly marked dialectical development of Pali Among these formations are Deminutives in ˚ka usually; the Gerund & the; Infinitive usually; the Causatives throughout.

II. Ava as prefix.Meaning. (Rest:) lower, low (opp ut˚, see e.g. uccâvaca high & low, and below; iii. c) expld. as heṭṭhā (Dhp-a iv.54 under avaṃ) or adho (ibid 153; Snp-a 290) ■ (Motion:) down, downward, away (down), off; e.g. avasūra sun-down; adv. avaṃ (q.v. opp. uddhaṃ) ■ (a) lit. away from, off: ava-kantati to cut off; ˚gaṇa away from the crowd; ˚chindati cut off ˚yīyati fall off; ˚bhāsati shine out, effulge; ˚muñcati take off; ˚siṭṭha left over ■ down, out, over: ˚kirati pour down or out over; ˚khitta thrown down; ˚gacchati go down; ˚gāheti dip down; ˚tarati descend; ˚patita fallen down; ˚sajjati emit; ˚siñcati pour out over; ˚sīdati sink down ■ (b) fig. down in connection with verbs of emotion (cp. Lat. de-in despico to despise, lit. look down on), see ava-jānāti, ˚bhūta, ˚mānita, ˚vajja, ˚hasati away from, i.e. the opposite of, as equivalent to a negation and often taking the place of the neg. prefix a (an˚), e.g. in avajaya (= ajaya), ˚jāta, ˚mangala (= a˚) ˚pakkhin, ˚patta.

Affinities of ava.-(a) apa. There exists an exceedingly frequent interchange of forms with apa˚ and ava˚ the historical relation of which has not yet been thoroughly investigated. For a comparison of the two the BSk. forms are indispensable, and often afford a clue as to the nature of the word in question. See on this apa 2 and cp. the foll. words under ava: avakata, ˚karoti, ˚khalita, ˚anga ottappa, avattha, ˚nīta, ˚dāna, ˚pivati, ˚rundhati, ˚lekhati ˚vadati, ˚varaka, ˚sakkati, avassaya, avasseti, ˚hita, avāpurīyati avekkhati ■ (b) abhi. The similarity between abhi & ava is seen from a comparison of meaning abhi; ii. b and ava ii. a. The two prefixes are practically synonymous in the foll. words: ˚kankhati, ˚kamati, ˚kiṇṇa ˚khipati, ˚maddati, ˚rata, ˚lambati, ˚lekheti, ˚lepana ˚siñcati ■ (c) The contrary of ava is ut (cp. above ii.2) Among the freq. contrast-pairs showing the two, like E up & down, are the foll. ukkaṃsâvakaṃsa, uggaman-oggamana, uccâvaca, ullangheti-olangheti, ullittâvalitta; ogilituṃuggilituṃ onaman-unnamana. Two other combns. founded on the same principle (of intensifying contrast) are chiddâvacchidda and ava˚ in contrast with vi˚ in olambavilamba olugga-vilugga.

P. ava = Vedic ava & occasionally o Av. ava; Lat. au-(aufero = avabharati, aufugio etc.) Obg. u-; Oir. ō, ua. See further relations in Walde, Lat Wtb. under au

Avaṃ

(adv.) the prep. ava in adv. use, down, downward; in C. often expld. by adho. Rarely absolute, the only passage found so far being Snp 685 (avaṃ sari he went down, v.l. avasari, expld. by otari Snp-a 486). Opp. uddhaṃ (above, up high). Freq. in cpd avaṃsira (adj.) head downward (+ uddhaṃpāda feet up) a position characteristic of beings in Niraya (Purgatory) e.g. SN i.48; Snp 248 (patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirā adhogata-sīsā Snp-a 290); Vv 5225 (of Revatī, + uddhaṃpāda); Pv iv.146; Ja i.233 (+ uddhapāda); iv.103 (nirayaṃ vajanti yathā adhammo patito avaṃsiro); Nd i.404 (uddhaṃpāda + ); Dhp-a iv.153 (gloss adhosira) ■ On avaṃ˚ cp further avakkāra, avākaroti, avekkhipati.

Vedic avāk & avāṃ

Avakaṃsa

dragging down, detraction, abasement, in cpd. ukkaṃsāvak˚; lifting up & pulling down, raising and lowering rise & fall DN i.54.

fr. ava-karṣati; on ṃs: *rṣ cp. haṃsati: harṣati

Avakaṅkhati

(-˚) to wish for, strive after SN iv.57 (n’); Ja iv.371 (n’); V 340 (n’), 348 (n’ = na pattheti C).

ava + kankhati; cp. Sk. anu-kānkṣati

Avakaḍḍhati

Ne 4 (avakaḍḍhayitvā). Pass.; avakaḍḍhati Ja iv.415 (hadayaṃ me a. my heart is weighed down = sokena avakaḍḍhīyati C; v.l. avakassati) ■ pp. avakaḍḍhita.

ava + kaḍḍhati, cp. avakassati & apakassati

Avakaḍḍhita

pulled down, dragged away Dhp-a iii.195.

pp. of avakaḍḍhati

Avakata

= apakata, v.l. at Iti 89.

Avakanta

cut, cut open, cut off Ja iv.251 (galak’ âvakantaṃ).

for *avakatta, Sk. avakṛtta; pp. of avakantati, see kanta2

Avakantati & okantati

(okk˚) to cut off, cut out, cut away carve-(ava: ) Ja iv.155 ■ pp. avakanta & avakantita;.

cp. Sk. avakṛntati, ava + kantati, cp. also apakantati

Avakantita

cut out Pv-a 213. Avakappana & okappana

pp. of avakantati

Avakappanā & okappanā

(f.) preparation, fixing up, esp. harnessing Ja vi.408.

ava + kappanā

Avakaroti

“to put down”, to despise, throw away; only in der, avakāra & avakārin.; pp. avakata (q.v.) ■ See also avākaroti & cp. avakirati 2.;

Sk. apakaroti, cp. P. apa˚

Avakassati & okassati

to drag down, to draw or pull away, distract, remove ■ A; v.74 = Vin ii.204 (+ vavakassati).

cp. Sk. avakarṣati, ava + kṛṣ; see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati

Avakārakaṃ

(adv.) throwing away, scattering about Vin ii.214.

fr. avakāra

Avakārin

(adj.) (-˚) despising, degrading, neglecting Vb 393 sq. (an˚). Avakasa & okasa;

fr. avakāra

Avakāsa & okāsa

1. “appearance”: akkhuddâvakāso dassanāya not little (or inferior) to behold (of appearance) DN i.114; ariyāvakāsa appearing noble or having the app. of an Aryan Ja v.87; katâvakāsa put into appearance Vv 229.

2. “opportunity”: kata˚ given leave DN i.276; Snp 1030; anavakāsakārin not giving occasion Mil 383anavakāsa not having a chance or opportunity (to happen), impossible; always in ster. phrase aṭṭhānaṃ etaṃ anavakāso Vin ii.199; AN i.26; AN v.169; Pp 11, Pp 12; Pv-a 28.

ava + kāś to shine, cp. Sk. avakāśa

Avakirati & okirati

1. to pour down on, to pour out over; aor. avakiri Pv-a 86; ger. ˚kiritvā Ja v.144.

2. to cast out, reject, throw out; aor. avākiri Vv 305 = 485 (v.l. ˚kari; Vv-a 126 expls by chaḍḍesi vināsesi) ■ Pass. avakirīyati Pv iii.110 (= chaḍḍīyati Pv-a 174); grd. ˚kiriya (see sep.). See also apakiritūna. pp okiṇṇa.

ava + kirati

Avakiriya

to be cast out or thrown away; rejectable, low, contemptible Ja v.143 (taken by C. as ger. = avakiritvā).

grd of avakirati

Avakujja

(adj.) face downward, head first, prone, bent over (opp. ukkujja & uttāna) Ja i.13 Bv ii.52; Ja v.295; Ja vi.40; Pv iv.108; Pv-a 178.

-pañña (adj.) one whose reason is turned upside down (like an upturned pot, i.e. empty) AN i.130; Pp 31 (= adhomukha-pañña Pp A 214).

ava + kujja, cp. B.Sk. avakubja Mvu i.29, avakubjaka ibid. 213; ii.412

Avakkanta

(-˚) entered by, beset with, overwhelmed by (instr.) SN iii.69 (dukkha˚, sukha˚ and an˚).

pp. ofnext

Avakkanti

(f.) entry, appearance, coming down into, opportunity for rebirth SN ii.66 (nāmarūpassa) iii.46 (pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ); Pp 13 (= okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo PugA 184); Kv 142 (nāmarūpassa); Mil 123 (gabbhassa).

fr. avakkamati

Avakkama

entering, appearance Ja v.330 (gabbhassa).

fr. avakkamati

Avakkamati & okkamati

to approach. to enter, go into or near to, to fall into, appear in, only in ger. (poetically) avakamma Ja iii.480 (v.l. apa˚).

ava + kamati fr. kram

Avakkāra

throwing away, refuse, sweepings; only in cpd. ˚pātī a bowl for refuse, slop basin, ash-bin Vin i.157, Vin i.352; Vin ii.216; MN i.207; Dhp-a i.305.

Sk. avaskara faeces, fr. avaṃ + karoti

Avakkhalita

washed off, taken away from, detracted DN-a i.66 (v.l. apa˚).

pp. of avakkhaleti, Caus. of kṣal

Avakkhitta & okkhitta

1. [ = Sk. avakṣipta] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped thrown out, rejected. (ava: ) MN i.296 (ujjhita + ); DN-a i.281 (an˚), 289 (pinḍa); Pv-a 174 (piṇḍa). 2. [ = Sk. utkṣipta? thrown off, gained, produced, got (cp. uppādita), in phrase sed’ âvakkhitta gained by sweat AN ii.67; AN iii.45.

pp. of avakkhipati

Avakkhipati & okkhipati

to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig usually appld to the eyes = to cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning of “to keep under, to restrain, to have control over” (cp. also avakkhāyati), aor. ˚khipi DN-a i.268 (bhusaṃ, v.l. avakkhasi).

ava + khipati; cp. Sk. avakṣipati

Avakkhipana

(nt.) throwing down, putting down Ja i.163.

fr. avakkhipati

Avagacchati

to come to, approach, visit (cp. Vedic avagacchati) Pv-a 87. Avaganda (-karaka)

ava + gacchati

Avagaṇḍa (-kāraka)

(adj.) “making a swelling”, i.e. puffing out the cheeks, stuffing the cheeks full (when eating); only nt. ˚ṃ as adv. after the manner or in the way of stuffing etc. Vin ii.214; Vin iv.196.

ava + gaṇḍa˚

Avagata

at Pv-a 222 is uncertain reading; the meaning is “known, understood” (aññāta Pv iv.111); perhaps we should read āvikata or adhigata (so v.l. BB). Avagahati & ogahati;

pp. of avagacchati

Avagāhati & ogāhati

to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (acc. & loc.) Vism 678 (vipassanāvīthiṃ); Sdhp 370, Sdhp 383.

ava + gāhati

Avaguṇṭhana

(adj.) (-˚) covering Sdhp 314.

fr. oguṇṭheti

Avaggaha

hindrance, impediment, used at DN-a i.95 as syn. for drought (dubuṭṭhikā).

Sk. avagraha

Avaṅga

see apanga.

Avaca

(adj.) low, only in combn. uccāvacā (pl.) high and low, see ucca. KvuA 38.

der. fr. ava after the analogy of ucca → ut

Avacana

(nt.) “non-word”, i.e. the wrong word or expression Ja i.410.

a + vacana

Avacara

(-˚) (n ■ adj.) (a) (adj.) living in or with, moving in DN i.206 (santika˚ one who stays near, a companion); fig. dealing or familiar with, at home in AN ii.189 (atakka˚); iv.314 (parisā˚); Ja i.60 (tāḷa˚ one conversant with music, a musician see tāḷa1); ii.95 (sangāma˚); Mil 44 (id. and yoga˚) ■ (b) (n.) sphere (of moving or activity), realm plane (of temporal existence); only as t.t in kāmāvacara rupāvacara arūpāvacara or the 3 realms of sense-desires form and non-form: kāma˚; DN i.34 (˚deva); Dhs 431 (as adj.); rūpa˚; Pp 37; arūpa˚; Pp 38; Pts i.83, Pts i.84, Pts i.101; Dhs A 387; Pv-a 138, Pv-a 163; to be omitted in Dhs 1268, Dhs 1278.

ava + car, also BSk. avacara in same sense, e.g. antaḥpurâvacarā the inmates of the harem Jtm 210

Avacaraka & ocaraka

(adj.-n.) 1. only in cpd. kāmâvacarika as adj. to kāmâvacara, belonging to the sphere of sense experiences, Sdhp. 254.

2. Late form of ocaraka, spy, only in C. on Thag 315 ff. quoted in Brethren 189, n 3. Occurs in BSk (Divy 127).

fr. avacara

Avacaraṇa

(nt.) being familiar with, dealing with, occupation Ja ii.95.

fr. avacarati 1

Avacuttha

2nd pret. of vac, in prohib form mā evaṃ avacuttha do not speak thus Ja vi.72; Dhp-a iv.228.

Avacchidda

(-˚) (adj.) perforated, only in redupl. (intensive) cpd. chiddāvacchidda perforated all over, nothing but holes Ja iii.491; Dhp-a i.122. 284 319. Cp. chidda-vicchidda.

ava + chidda

Avacchedaka

(-˚) (adj) cutting off, as nt. ˚ṃ adv. in phrase kabaḷâvacchedakaṃ after the manner of cutting off mouthfuls (of food) Vin ii.214 Vin iv.196; cp. āsāvacchedika whose hope or longing has been cut off or destroyed Vin i.259.

ava + cheda + ka

Avajaya

defeat Dhp-a ii.228 (v.l. for T. ajaya).

ava + jaya, cp. apajita

Avajāta

(adj.) low-born, of low or base birth, fig of low character (opp. abhijāta) Snp 664 (= buddhassa avajātaputta Snp-a 479); Iti 63; Mil 359.

ava + jāta; cp. B.Sk. avajāta in meaning misborn, miscarriage

Avajānāti

1. to deny Vin ii.85; AN iii.164 = Pp 65.

2. (later) to despise Dhp-a iii.16; Pv-a 175 (grd ˚jānitabba)-Of short stem-form ñā are found the foll grd. avaññeyya Pv-a 175, and with o˚: grd. oñātabba Pv-a 195; pp. avañāta, besides avaññāta.

ava + jñā

Avajīyati

to be diminished, to be lost, be undone Ja i.313 (jitaṃ a; v.l. avajījy˚); Dhp 179 (jitaṃ a = dujjitaṃ hoti Dhp-a iii.197).

ava + jīyati; Sk. avajiryate

Avajja

(adj.) low, inferior, blamable bad, deprecable Dhp 318, Dhp 319; Dhs 1160. More fig. in neg. form anavajja blameless, faultless DN i.70 (= anindita DN-a i.183); AN ii.26 = Iti 102; Snp 47 (˚bhojin carrying on a blameless mode of livelihood, see Nd ii.39), 263 (= anindita agarahita Kp-a 140): Pts ii.116, Pts ii.170; Pp 30, Pp 41, Pp 58; Sdhp 436. Opp. sāvajja.

Sk. avadya, seemigly a + vadya, but in reality a der. fr. ava. According to Childers = Sk. avarjya from vraj, thus meaning “not to be shunned, not forbidden” This interpretn is justified by context of Dhp 318, Dhp 319. The P. commentator refers it to ava + vad (for *ava-vadya in sense of to blame, cp. apavadati

Avajjatā

(f.) [abstr. to prec.), only neg. an˚; blamelessness, faultlessness Pp 25, Pp 41; Dhs 1349.

Avajjha

(adj.) not to be killed or destroyed, inviolable Snp 288; Ja v.69; Ja vi.132.

grd of a + vadhati, Sk. vadhya, vadh

Avañcana

(adj.) not (even) tottering, i.e. unfit for any motion (esp. walking), said of crippled feet Ja i.214 = Cp iii.910.

a + vañcana from vañc

Avañña

(adj.) despised, despicable Pv iii.113 (= avaññeyya avajānitabba Pv-a 175).

to avaññā

Avaññatti

(f.) only as neg. an˚; the fact of not being despised inferior or surpassed, egotism, pride, arrogance Iti 72 Vb 350, Vb 356; ˚kāma (adj.) wishing not to be surpassed unvilling to be second, wanting to be praised AN ii.240 AN iv.1 sq.

ava + ñatti = Sk. *avajñapti, fr. ava + jñā

Avaññā

(f.) contempt, disregard, disrespect Ja i.257 (˚ya).

Sk. avajñā, fr. ava + jñā

Avaññāta

(adj.) despised, treated with contempt Pv-a 135 (an˚); Sdhp 88, Sdhp 90.

pp. of avajānāti

Avaṭaṃsaka

(= vaṭ˚) see Vin Texts ii.347.

Avaṭṭhāna

(nt.) position, standing place Ja i.508; Pv-a 286.

Sk. avasthāna

Avaṭṭhita

(ad.) “standing down” = standing up, firm, fixed, settled, lasting Thag 1140 Usually neg. an˚; unsettled, unsteady; not lasting, changeable Dhp 38 (˚citta; cp. Dhp-a i.308 cittaṃ thāvaraṃ natthi); Pv-a 87 (= na sassata not lasting for ever).

Sk. avasthita, ava + thita

Avaṭṭhitatā

(f.) steadiness, only as neg. an˚; unsteadiness, fickleness Thag-a 259.

abstr. fr. prec.

Avaṭṭhiti

(f.) (firm) position, posture, steadfastness SN v.228; Dhs 11, Dhs 570.

Sk. avasthiti

Avaḍḍhi

(f.) “non-growth”, decay Dhp-a iii.335; C on AN iii.76 (cp. apajaha).

a + vaḍḍhi

Avaṇṭa

(adj.) without a stalk Ja v.155.

a + vaṇṭa

Avaṇṇa

blame, reproach, fault DN i.1 (= dosā nindā DN-a i.37); Iti 67; Pp 48, Pp 59.

a + vaṇṇa

Avaṇṇanīya

(adj.) indescribable Ja v.282.

grd. of a + vaṇṇeti

Avataṃsa

see vataṃsaka.

Avatata & otata

stretched over, covered, spread over with Vv 643 (-˚); Vv-a 276 (chādita).

ava + tata, pp. of tan

Avatiṭṭhati

to abide, linger, stand still. DN i.251 = SN iv.322 = AN v.299 (tatra˚); SN i.25 (v.l otiṭṭhati); Th. 1, 21; Ja ii.62; Ja iv.208 (aor. avaṭṭhāsi). pp. avaṭṭhita (q.v.). Avatinna & otinna;

ava + tiṭṭhati

Avatiṇṇa & otiṇṇa

fallen into, affected with (-˚), as ava˚; rare late or poetical form of ; e.g. Ja v.98 (issâ˚). See otiṇṇa.

pp. of otarati

Avattha1

aimless (of cārikā, a bhikkhu’s wandering, going on tour) AN iii.171 (C. avavatthika).

der. uncertain

Avattha2

thrown away Ja v.302 (= chaḍḍita C.).

Sk. apāsta, apa + āsta, pp. of as2

Avattharaṇa

(nt.) setting in array, deploying (of an army) Ja ii.104 (of a robber-band), 336.

fr. avattharati

Avattharati

to strew, cover over or up Ja i.74 (˚amāna ppr.), 255 (˚itvā ger.); iv.84; Dāvs i.38 ■ pp. otthaṭa Cp. pariy˚.

ava + tharati, stṛ;

Avatthāraṇa

(nt.) = avattharaṇa DN-a i.274. Avatthu (& ka);

Avatthu (& ˚ka)

(adj.) groundless, unfounded (fig) Vin ii.241; Ja i.440 (˚kaṃ vacanaṃ). For lit meaning see vatthu.

a + vatthu

Avadāta

(= odāta) Dāvs iii.14 (metri causa).

Avadāna

see apadāna.

Avadāniya

(adj.) stingy, niggardly Snp 774 (= Nd i.36 which expls. as follows: avaṃ gacchanti ti pi avadāniyā; maccharino pi vuccanti avadāniyā; buddhānaṃ vacanaṃ n’âdiyantī ti avadāniyā. Snp-a 516 condenses this expln. into the foll. avangamanatāya maccharitāya buddhâdīnaṃ vacanaṃ anādiyanatāya ca avadāniyā).

fr. avadāna cutting off; ava + 2 to cut

Avadāpana

(cleansing): see vodāpana.

Avadāpeti

(to deal out) only BSk pary˚ Divy 202.

Avadāyati

to have pity on, to feel sorry for Ja iv.178 (bhūtānaṃ nâvadāyissaṃ, gloss n’ânukampiyaṃ).

denom. fr. avadā in same meaning as anuddā, to 1: see dayati2

Avadīyati

to burst, split open Ja vi.183 (= bhijjati C. see also uddīyati,

Sk. avadīryati, ava + ḍr1, ḍrṇāti, see etym. under darī

Avadehaka

(-˚) (adj.) in the idiom udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjati, to eat one’s fill MN i.102; Thag 935. Vism 33 has udarāvadehaka-bhojana, a heavy meal.

ava + deha + ka but more likely direct fr. ava + dih

Avadhāraṇa

(nt.) calling attention to, affirmation, emphasis; as t.t. used by C’s in explanation of evaṃ at DN-a i.27; and of kho at Pv-a 11, Pv-a 18.

Cp. Sk. avadhāraṇa, fr. ava + dhṛ;

Avadhi

3 sg. aor. of vadhati ■ At Dhp-a ii.73 avadhi = odhi.

Avanata

see oṇata.

Avanati

(-˚) (f.) stooping, bending, bowing down, humiliation Mil 387 (unnat’âvanati).

fr. avanamati

Avani

(f.) bed or course of a river; earth, ground Dāvs iv.5.

Vedic avani

Avapakāsati

is a doubtful compd. of kassati, the combd. ava + pa occurring only in this word. In all likelihood it is a distortion of vavakassati (vi + ava + kassati), supplementing the ordinary apakassati. See meaning & further discussion under apakāsati-Vin ii.204 (apakāsati + ; v.l. avapakassati Bdhgh. in expln. on p. 325 has apapakāsati which seems to imply (a)vavakassati); AN iii.145 sq. (avapakāsituṃ).

ava + pa + kāsati = kassati, fr. kṛṣ

Avapatta

see opatta.

Avapāyin

(-˚) (adj.) coming for a drink, drinking Ja i.163.

cp. avapivati

Avapivati

to drink from Ja i.163.

ava + , cp. apapibati

Avabujjhati

(-˚) to understand AN iv.96 = Iti 83 (n’avabujjhati); AN iv.98 (id.) Ja i.378 Ja iii.387 (interchanging with anubujjhati at the latter pass.).

Cp. BSk. avabudhyate

Avabodha

perception, understanding, full knowledge Snp-a 509 (sacca˚) ■ Neg. an˚; not awakened to the truth Vv 826 (= ananubodha Vv-a 319).

ava + bodha

Avabodhati

(-˚) to realise, perceive, pay attention to Ja iii.151 nâva˚).

cp. Sk. avabodhati

Avabhāsa

Only in cpd. gambhīrāvabhāso DN ii.55, looking deep. Same cpd. at AN ii.105 Pp 46 has obhāsa.

later form of obhāsa

Avabhāsaka

(-˚) (adj.) shining, shedding light on, illuminating Sdhp 14.

fr. avabhāsa

Avabhāsita

(-˚) shining with, resplendent Sdhp 590.

late form of obhāsita

Avabhuñjati

to eat, to eat up Ja iii.272 (inf. ˚bhottuṃ), 273.

ava + bhuñjati

Avabhūta

(adj.) “come down”, despised, low, unworthy MN ii.210.

ava + bhūta, pp. of ava + bhū

Avamaṅgala

(adj.) of bad omen, unlucky, infaustus (opp. abhimangala); nt. bad luck, ill omen Ja i.372, Ja i.402; Ja ii.197; Ja vi.10 Ja vi.424; Dhp-a iii.123; Pv-a 261. Cf. next.

ava + mangala, ava here in privative function

Avamaññati

to slight, to disregard, despise Dhp-a i.170; Pv-a 37, Pv-a 175; Sdhp 271 ■ pp. Caus avamānita.

Sk. avamanyate

Avamaṅgalla

(adj.) of bad omen, nt. anything importune, unlucky Ja i.446. Avamana & omana;

fr. avamangala

Avamāna & omāna

disregard, disrespect, contempt Ja ii.386; Ja iii.423; Ja v.384. Cp. next.

fr. ava + man, think

Avamānana

(nt.) = avamāna Ja i.22.

fr. avamāna

Avamāneti

to despise Ja v.246. - pp. avamānita Pv-a 36.

Caus. of avamaññati

Avaya

only in neg. anavaya.

Avayava

limb, member, constituent, part Vv-a 53 (sarīra˚ = gattā). 168 201, 276; Pv-a 211 (sarīra˚ = gattā), 251 (mūl˚ the fibres of the root). As t. t. g. at Snp-a 397. In the commentaries avayava is often used where aṅga would have been used in the older texts.

Dern uncertain. Cp. mediaeval Sk. avayava

Avarajjhati

(-˚) to neglect, fail, spurn Thag 167; Ja iv.428 (v.l. ˚rujjh˚).

ava + rajjhati of rādh, cp. Sk. avarādhyate

Avaruddha

1. Doubtful reading at Vin iv.181, apparently meaning ʻin revolt, out of handʼ (of slaves)

2. [late form of oruddha] restrained Sdhp. 592.

fr. avarundhati

Avaruddhaka

subdued, expelled, banished Ja vi.575; Dpvs i.21 (Np).

avruddha + ka

Avaruddhati

to expel, remove, banish Ja vi.505 (= nīharati C.), 515 See also avarundhati.

Sk. aparundhati; ava + ruddhati of rudh

Avarundhati

to put under restraint to put into one’s harem as subsidiary wife.

ava + rundhati. Only referred to by Dhp. in his Cy (Thag-a 271) on oruddha

Avalambati

. Only in late verse. To hang down. Pv ii.118; 102. Ger. avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35 cp. olubbha.

= olambati

Avalitta

(-˚) besmeared; in cpd. ullittāvalitta “smeared up & down” i.e. plastered inside & outside AN i.101.

Sk. avalipta, pp. of ava-limpati

Avalekhati

to scrape off Vin ii.221 (v.l. apa˚).

ava + lekhati, likh, Sk. avalikhati

Avalekhana1

(nt.) (a) scraping, scraping off Vin ii.141 (˚pidhara), 221 (˚kaṭṭha). (b) scratching in writing down Ja iv.402, (˚sattha a chisel for engraving letters).

fr. avalekhati

Avalekhana2

(nt.) v.l. for apalekhana.

Avalepana

(-˚) (nt.) smearing, daubing, plastering MN i.385 (pīta˚); Snp 194 (kāyo taca-maṃs’ âvalepano the body plastered with skin & flesh).;

fr. ava + lip

Avasa

(adj.) powerless Sdhp 290. Avasata & Osata;

a + vasa

Avasaṭa & Osaṭa

withdrawn, gone away; one who has left a community & gone over to another sect, a renegade Vin iv.216, Vin iv.217 (= titthāyatanaṃ saṃkata).

Sk. apasṛta, cp. also samavasṛta, pp. of ava + sṛ;

Avasarati

to go down, to go away (to) Snp 685 (v.l. BB. T. avaṃsari).

ava + sṛ;

Avasāna

(-˚) (nt.) stopping ceasing; end, finish, conclusion Ja i.87 (bhattakicc-âvasāne at the end of the meal); Pv-a 76 (id.).

for osāna

Avasāya

stopping, end, finish Thig 12 (= avasānaṃ niṭṭhānaṃ Thag-a 19). But the id. p. at Dhp 218 has anakkhāte.

fr. avaseti

Avasiñcanaka

(-˚) (adj.) pouring over (act. & med.), overflowing Ja i.400 (an˚).

fr. osiñcati

Avasiṭṭha

(sic & not osiṭṭha) left, remaining, over SN ii.133; Ja i.138; Ja v.339; Vv-a 66 pl. avasiṭṭhā all who are left, the others Pv-a 165 (janā).

pp. of avasissati, Sk. avaśiṣṭa

Avasiṭṭhaka

(adj.) remaining, left Ja iii.311.

fr. avasiṭṭha

Avasitta

(-˚) besprinkled, anointed, consecrated, only in phrase rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto of a properly consecrated king (see also khattiya) DN i.69; DN ii.227; DN iii.64; Pp 56; DN-a i.182 (T. muddhâvassita v.l. ˚abhisitta); etc ■ See also abhisitta.

pp. of osiñcati

Avasin

(adj.-n.) not having control over oneself, DN ii.275.

a + vasin fr. vaś

Avasissati

to be left over to remain, in phrase yaṃ pamāṇa-kataṃ kammaṃ na taṃ tatrâvasissati DN i.251; AN v.299 = SN iv.322; Ja ii.61 (see expln. on p. 62). Also in the phrases taco ca nahārū ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu sarīre upasussatu maṃsa-lohitaṃ MN i.481; AN i.50; SN ii.28, and sarīrāni avasissanti SN ii.83. With the latter phrases cp. avasussati.

Sk. avaśiṣyate; Pass. of ava + śis; but expld. by Kern, Toev. s. v. as fut of avasīdati

Avasī

metri causa for avasi, a + vasi, aor. of vas4 to stop, stay, rest Ja v.66 (mā avasī).

Avasussati

to dry up, to wither; in later quotations of the old kāmaṃ taco ca nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasussatu (upasussatu sarīre maṃsalohitaṃ Ja i.71, Ja i.110; Sdhp 46. It is a later spelling for the older avasissatu see Trenckner (MN i.569) ■ fut. avasucchati (= Sk. *˚śokṣyati, fut. of Intens.) Ja vi.550 (v.l. BB ˚sussati; C. avasucchissati).

Sk. *ava-suṣyati of śuṣ

Avasūra

[ava + sūra; ava here in function of *avaṃs see ava ii].sundown, sunset, acc. ˚ṃ as adv. at or with sundown Ja v.56 (anāvasūraṃ metrically).

Avasesa1

remainder, remaining part; only in cpds. an˚; (adj.) without any remainder i.e. fully, completely MN i.220 = AN v.347 (˚dohin); AN i.20 sq., 88; Snp 146; Pp 17; Dhs 363 Dhs 553; Snp-a 417 (˚pharaṇa); Pv-a 71 (˚ato, adv. altogether not leaving anything out); & sāvasesa leaving something over, having something left AN i.20 sq., 88; Pv iii.55 (jīvita˚ having still a little life left).

Sk. avaśeṣa, fr. ava + śiṣ, cp. avasissati

Avasesa2

(adj.) remaining, left Snp 694 (āyu avaseso); Ja iii.19; Vb 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā) Pv-a 19 (avasesā ca ñātakā the rest of the relatives), 21 (avasesā parisā), 201 (aṭṭhi-tacamatt’ âvasesa-sarīra with a body on which nothing but skin & bones were left), 206 (aṭṭhi-sanghātamatt;’ âvasesa-sarīra) ■ nt. (as pred.) ˚ṃ what is left Pv-a 52 (app’ avasesaṃ); Kp-a 245 (n’ atthi tesaṃ avasesaṃ).

see prec.

Avasesaka

(adj.) being left, overflowing, additional, more Ja i.400 (an˚); Dpvs iv.45.

fr. avasesa2

Avassa

(adj.) against one’s will, inevitable Ja i.19 (˚bhāvin); v.319 (˚gāmitā). Usually as nt. ˚ṃ adv inevitably (cp. BSk. avaśyaṃ Divy 347; Avs i.209 etc. Ja iii.271; DN-a i.263; Sdhp 293.

a + vaś

Avassakaṃ

(adv.) inevitably Dpvs ix.13.

see avassa

Avassajati & ossajati

to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release (ava) Ja iv.425; Ja v.487 (aor. avassaji read for avissaji).

ava + sṛj, perhaps ud + sṛj = Sk. utsṛjati, although the usual Vedic form is avasṛjati The form ossajati puzzled the BSk. writers in their sanskritisation apotsṛjati = apa + ut + sṛj Divy 203

Avassana

(nt.) not bleating Ja iv.251.

a + vassana, Sk. vāsana of vāś to bleat

Avassaya

support, help, protection, refuge Ja i.211; ii. 197; iv.167; Mil 160; Dhp-a ii.267; Dhp-a iv.198; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 113.

Sk. *avāśraya for the usual apāśraya, see P. apassaya1

Avassava

outflow, effect, only neg. anassava no further effect Vin ii.89; MN i.93; MN ii.246; AN iii.334 sp.

ava + sava, Sk. ˚srava fr. sru to flow

Avasseti

to lean against, to depend on, find shelter in (loc.) Ja ii.80 (aor. avassayiṃ = vāsaṃ kappesiṃ C.). pp. avassita.

ava + ā + śri, for the usual *apāśrayati; see apasseti

Avassāvana

(nt.) straining, filtering (?) Ja ii.288.

fr. ava + Caus. of sru to flow

Avassita

depending on, dealing with Ja v.375. See apassita.

for apassita, Sk. apaśrita

Avassuta

(adj.) 1. (lit.) flowing out or down, oozing, leaking Ja iv.20.

2. (fig.) (cp. anvāssava & āsava) filled with desire lustful (opp.; anavassuta, q.v.) Vin ii.236; SN iv.70, SN iv.184 (an˚); AN i.261, AN i.262 (an˚); ii.240; iv.128, 201; Snp 63 (an˚); Pp 27, Pp 36; Dpvs ii.5 (T. reads avassita ). Neg. anavassuta: 1. not leaking, without a leak Ja iv.20 (nāvā = udaka-pavesan’ âbhāvena a. C.).

2. free from leakage, i.e. from lust or moral intoxication Dhp 39 (˚citta) Snp 63 (see expld. in detail at Nd ii.40); Snp-a 116 (kilesa-anvāssava-virahita).

Sk. *avasruta, pp. of ava + sru, cp. avassava

Avahaṭa

taken away, stolen Mil 46.

pp. of avaharati

Avaharaṇa

(-˚) taking away, removal; theft Pv-a 47 (sāṭaka˚), 92 (soka˚).

fr. avaharati in both meanings

Avaharati & oharati

to steal Ja i.384; Pv-a 47 (avahari vatthaṃ), 86 (id., = apānudi) ■ pp. avahaṭa (q.v.).

ava + hṛ;

Avahasati

to laugh at, deride, mock Ja v.111 (aññamaññaṃ); Pv-a 178 ■ aor. avahasi Ja iv.413.

ava + has

Avahāra

taking, acquiring, acquisition Vin v.129 (pañca avahārā, viz. theyya˚, pasayha˚, parikappa˚ paṭicchanna˚, kusa˚).

fr. avaharati

Avahīyati

to be left behind, to stay behind Ja v.340.

for ohīyati

Avāgata

only in phrase dhammā avāgat-amhā, we are fallen from righteousness, Ja v.82 (C. explains apāgata).

ava + ā + gacchati

Avākaroti

1. to revoke, undo, rescind, not fulfill, spoil, destroy Ja iii.339 (avākayirā = avakareyya chindeyya C.); v.495, 500; vi. 280.

2. to give back, restore Ja vi.577 (= deti C.).

either ava + ā + karoti or avaṃ + karoti, the latter more probable. It is not necessary to take it with Kern, Toev. s. v. as Sk. apākṛṇoti, apa + ā + kṛ;

Avākirati

wrong by Hardy Vv-a Index for avakirati (q.v.).

Avāṭuka

see apāṭuka.

Avāpuraṇa

(nt.) a key SN iii.132; AN iv.374.

same as apāpuraṇa

Avāpurati

to open (a door) Ja i.63; Ja vi.373.

same as apāpurati

Avāvaṭa

(adj.) unobstructed, unhindered, free. Of a woman, not married Ja v.213 (= apetâvaraṇā, which read for ˚bharaṇā, apariggahitā C.).

a + vāvaṭa

Avikampamāna

(adj.) not hesitating, not wavering, not doubting Ja iv.310 (= anosakkamāna C.; Kern takes it at this passage as a + vikalpamāna, see Toev. s.v., but unnecessarily) vi.176 (= nirāsanka C.); Ja vi.273.

a + vi + kampamāna, ppr. med. of kamp

Avikampin

(adj.) unmoved, not shaking, steady Vv 5022 (= acala Vv-a 215).

fr. a + vi + kamp

Avikopin

(adj.) not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed Ja vi.226 (acchejja + ).

a + vikopin; fr. vi + kup

Avikkhepa

calmness, balance, equanimity DN iii.213; AN i.83; Pts i.94; Pts ii.228; Dhs 11, Dhs 15, Dhs 570.

a + vikkhepa

Avicāreti

not to examine Vv-a 336.

a + vicāreti

Aviccaṃ

at Ja v.434 read aviviccaṃ i.e. not secretly, openly.

a + viviccaṃ

Avijānaṃ

not knowing, ignorant Ḍh 38, 60; Iti 103.

a + vijānaṃ

Avijjā

(f.) ignorance; the main root of evil and of continual rebirth (see paṭicca-samuppāda, cp. SN ii.6, SN ii.9, SN ii.12; Snp p.141 & many other passages) See on term; Cpd. 83 n. 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail; vijjā. avijjā is termed an anusaya (D iii.254, 282; SN iv.205, SN iv.208 sq., 212); it is one of the āsavā (Vin iii.4; DN i.84; DN iii.216; Iti 49; Dhs 1100, Dhs 1109), of the oghā (D iii.230, 276; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162), of the nīvaraṇāni (S ii.23; AN i.223; Iti 8; Dhs 1162, Dhs 1486), of the saṃyojanāni (D iii.254; Dhs 1131, Dhs 1460). See for various characterisatons the foll. passages: Vin i.1; Vin iii.3; DN iii.212 DN iii.230, DN iii.234, DN iii.274; MN i.54, MN i.67, MN i.144; SN ii.4, SN ii.26, SN ii.263; SN iii.47 SN iii.162; SN iv.256; SN v.52; AN i.8, AN i.285; AN ii.132, AN ii.158, AN ii.247; AN iii.84 sq. 414; iv.228; Iti 34 (yā kāc’ imā duggatiyo asmiṃ loke paramhi ca avijjāmūlakā sabbā icchā-lobha-sammussayā) 57, 81; Snp 199, Snp 277, Snp 729 (jāti-maraṇa-saṃsāraṃ ye vajanti punappunaṃ… avijjāy’eva sā gati), 730, 1026, 1033 (avijjāya nivuto loko); Dhp 243; Nd ii.99; Pp 21; Dhs 390 Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162; Dhp-a iii.350; Dhp-a iv.161 (˚paligha).

Sk. avidyā; fr. a + vid

Aviññāṇaka

(adj.) senscless, without feeling or consciousness, unfeeling Dhp-a i.6 (saviññāṇaka + ).

a + viññāṇa + ka

Aviññū

(adj.) = aviddasu.

Avitakka

(adj.) free from thought DN iii.219, DN iii.274; Thig 75 (“where reasonings cease” trsl.); Dhs 161 (“free from the working of conception” trsl.), 504 etc.

a + vitakka

Avidūra

(adj.) not far, near; usually in loc. ˚e as adv. near Sn. 147.

a + vidūra

Aviddasu

(adj.) ignorant, foolish Snp 762 (= bāla Snp-a 509); Dhp 268 = Nd ii.514 (= aviññū Dhp-a iii.395); Pv-a 18 (so read for avindasu). Avinasaka (ika)

a + viddasu

Avināsaka (˚ika)

(adj.) not causing destruction AN iii.38 (˚ika); Ja v.116 (= anāsaka C.).

a + vināsa + ka

Avināsana

(adj.) imperishable Dpvs iv.16.

a + vināsana

Avinicchayaññū

(adj.) not knowing how to decide Ja v.367.

a + vinicchaya + ñū

Avinibbhujaṃ

(adj.) unable to distinguish or to know Ja v.121 (= atīrento C.).

ppr. of a + vinibbhujati

Avinibbhoga

(ad.) not to be distinguished, indistinct Ja iii.428 (˚sadda).

a + vinibbhoga

Avipariṇāma

absence of change, steadfastness, endurance DN i.18; DN iii.31, DN iii.33 (˚dhamma); DN-a i.113 (= jarā-vasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato).

a + viparināma

Avippaṭisāra

absence of regret or remorse AN iii.46.

a + vippaṭisāra

Avippavāsa

(adj.-n.) thoughtfulness, mindfulness, attention; adj. not neglectful, mindful, attentive eager Vin v.216; Snp 1142 (cp. Nd ii.101: anussatiyā bhāvento); DN-a i.104 (appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso) Dhp-a iv.26 (appamāda = satiyā avippavāsa).

a + vippavāsa

Aviruddha

(adj.) not contrary, unobstructed, free, without difficulties Dhp 406; Snp 365, Snp 704, Snp 854.

a + viruddha

Avirūḷhi

(f.) absence or cesssation of growth Snp 235; Dhp-a i.245 (˚dhamma).

a + virūḷhi

Avirodha

absence of obstruction, gentleness MN ii.105 = Thag 875.

a + virodha

Avirodhana

(nt.) = avirodha Ja iii.320, Ja iii.412; Ja v.378.

Avivāda

absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony DN iii.245; Snp 896 (˚bhūma Snp-a 557 or ˚bhumma Nd i.308, expld. as Nibbāna).

a + vivāda

Avisaṃvādaka

(adj.) not deceiving, not lying DN i.4; DN iii.170; Pp 57; DN-a i.73.

a + visaṃvada + ka

Avisaṃvādanatā

(f.) honesty, faithfulness, uprightness DN iii.190.

abstr. fr. a + visaṃvāda

Avisaṃvādeti

to keep one’s word, to be honest, to be true Ja v.124.

a + visaṃ + Caus. of vad

Avisaggatā

(f.) state of being undisturbed harmony, balance Ja vi.224 (C. avisaggata). Cp. avyagga.

a + visaggatā, v.l. viy˚, thus as a + viyagga, Sk. vyagra = ākula

Avisare

at Ja v.117 according to Kern, Toev. s.v. corrupted from avisaye, i.e. towards a wrong or unworthy object, C. differently: avisare = avisaritvā atikkamitva; v.l. adhisare.

a + visaya, loc

Avisāhaṭa

(adj.) imperturbed Dhs 15, Dhs 24, Dhs 287, Dhs 570. (˚mānasata).

a + visāhaṭa

Avissaji

at Ja vi.79 is with Kern, Toev. s. v. better to be read avassaji (see avassajati).

Avissajjiya

(adj.) not to be given away, inalienable (cp. avebhangiya) Vin i.305 (˚ika for ˚iya); ii.170 (five such objects in detail); v.216 (+ avebh˚) Ja vi.568.

grd. of a + vissajjati

Avissāsaniya

(adj.) not to be trusted, untrustworthy Ja iii.474.

a + visāsana + iya, ika

Aviha

the world of the Aviha’s, i.e. the 12th of the 16 Brahmā-words, cp. Kindred Sayings 48 n. 3; Cpd. 139 ■ SN i.35, SN i.60; AN i.279; Pp 17. Avihimsa (Avihesa)

of uncertain etym.

Avihiṃsa (Avihesa)

(f.) absence of cruelty, mercy, humanity, friendliness, love DN iii.213, DN iii.215, DN iii.240 (avihesā); Snp 292 (= sakaruṇabhāva Snp-a 318); Iti 82 (˚vitakka).

a + vihiṃsā

Aviheṭhaka

(adj.) not harassing, not hurting DN iii.166 (but cp. Snp-a 318 avihesaka in same context) Mil 219.

a + viheṭhaka

Avī˚

in general see vī˚.

Avīci

1. avīciniraya, one of the (great) hells (see niraya ), described in vivid colours at many passages of the Pāli canon, e.g at Vin ii.203 = Iti 86; Nd i.18, Nd i.347, Nd i.405 = Nd ii.304 iiid; Pts i.83; Dhs 1281; Ja i.71, Ja i.96; Ja iii.182; Ja iv.159; Dhp-a i.148; Pv-a 52; Snp-a 290; Sdhp 37, Sdhp 194; Pgdp 5 sq. etc etc.

2. disintegration, decay Vism 449 (a. jarā nāma).

B.Sk. avīci a + vīci (?) no intermission, or no pleasure (?), unknown, but very likely popular etym.

Avekalla

(˚-) adj.) without deficiency, in ˚buddhi complete knowledge Ja vi.297.

a + vekalla

Avekkhati

to look at, to consider, to see Iti 33 (v.l. ap˚); Dhp 28, Dhp 50, Ja iv.6; Dhp-a i.259 (= passati).

B.Sk. avīkṣate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati, to which the BSk. av˚ corresponds

Avekkhipati

to jump, hop lit. to throw (a foot) down Ja iv.251 (= pacchimapāde khipati C.).

avaṃ + khipati, avaṃ here in form ave corresp. to avaḥ, cp. pure for puraḥ etc.

Avecca

(adv.) certainly, definitely, absolutely, perfectly, expld. by Bdhgh. as acala (on DN ii.217), or as paññāya ajjhogahetvā (on Snp 229); by Dhp. as apara-paccaya-bhāvena (on Pv iv.125) ■ Usually in phrase Buddhe Dhamme Saṅghe avecca-pasādo perfect faith in the B., the Dhamma & the Sangha, e.g. at MN i.47; SN ii.69; SN iv.271 sq., 304 v.344, 405; AN i.222; AN ii.56; AN iii.212, AN iii.332, AN iii.451; AN iv.406 AN v.183; further at Pts i.161 (˚pasanna); Snp 229 (yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati); Pv iv.125.

Usually taken as ava + ger. of i (*itya), cp. adhicca & abhisamecca, but by P. grammarians as a vecca. The form is not sufficiently clear semantically B.Sk. avetya, e.g. Jtm. 210, is a Sanskritisation of the P. form

Avedha

(adj.) not to be hurt or disturbed, inviolable unshakable, imperturbable Snp 322 (˚dhamma = akampanasabhāva Snp-a 331).

a + vedha, grd. of vidh (vyadh) to pierce, Sk. avedhya

Avebhaṅgika

(adj.) not to be divided or distributed Vin i.305. Cp. next.

fr. a + vi + bhanga

Avebhaṅgiya

(nt.) that which is not to be divided, an inalienable possession; 5 such objects enumd. at Vin ii.171, which are the same as under avissajjiya (q.v.); v.129.

= avebhangika

Avera

(adj.) peaceable, mild, friendly Snp 150 (= veravirahita Kp-a 248); Sdhp 338 ■ ˚ṃ (nt.) friendliness kindness DN i.247 (˚citta); Dhp 5 (= khantimetta Dhp-a i.51).

a + vera

Averin

(adj.-n.) = avera Dhp 197, Dhp 258.

Avosita

only in neg. an˚; unfulfilled, undone Thag 101.

reading uncertain, cp. avyosita

Avyagga

(ad) not bewildered, not confused SN v.66. Cp. avisaggatā.

a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra

Avyattatā

(f.) state or condition of not being manifest or visible, concealment, hiding Dhp-a ii.38.

abstr. fr. avyatta

Avyatha

(adj.) not miserable, fortunate Ja iii.466 (= akilamāna C.).

a + vyatha, cp. Sk. vyathā misfortune

Avyaya

absence of loss or change, safety DN i.72 (instr. ˚ena safely); Mil 393 (as abbaya T.).

a + vyaya

Avyāpajjha1

(abyābajjha) (nt.) (act.) kindness of heart; (pass.) freedom from suffering (Ep. of Nibbāna Vin i.183 (avyāpajjh˚âdhimutta); Iti 31 (abyābajjh’ārāma).

a + vyapajjha or bajjha, a confusion between the roots bādh or pad

Avyāpajjha2

(abyābajjha) adj.) free from oppression or injury not hurting, kind DN ii.242 (avera + ), 276; MN i.90; Iti 16 = Iti 52 (sukhaṃ); Mil 410 (avera + ).

either a + *vyāpadya or more likely a + *vyābādhya

Avyāpanna

(adj.) free from desire to injure, free from malice, friendly, benevolent DN iii.82,83 (˚citta) AN ii.220 (id.); Pp 68 (id.) ■ Same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 105, Divy 302.

a + vyāpanna

Avyāpāda

absence of desire to injure, freedom from malice DN iii.215, DN iii.229, DN iii.240; Iti 82 (all MSS have aby˚); Dhs 33, Dhs 36, Dhs 277, Dhs 313, Dhs 1056.

a + vyāpāda

Avyāyata

(adj.) at random, without discrimination, careless Ja i.496 (= avyatta C.).

a + vyāyata of yam

Avyāyika

(adj.) not liable to loss or change, imperishable Ja v.508 (= avigacchanaka C.).

fr. avyaya

Avyāvaṭa

(adj.) not occupied, i.e. careless, neglectful, not worrying Vin iii.136; Nd ii.72 (abyāvaṭa for appossukka Snp 43); Ja iii.65; Ja vi.188. Mil 177 (abyā˚).

a + vyāvaṭa = Sk vyāpṛta

Avyāseka

(adj.) untouched, unimpaired DN i.182 (˚sukha = kilesa vyāseka-virahitattā avyāseka DN-a i.183); Pp 59.

a + vy + āseka

Avyāharati

not to bring or procure Ja v.80.

a + vy + āharati

Avyosita

(adj.) not having reached perfection, imperfect Thag 784 (aby˚).

a + vyosita, Sk. vyavasita

Avhaya

calling, name; adj. (-˚) called, having the name of Snp 684 (isi˚) 686 (Asit˚), 689 (kanhasiri˚), 1133 (Sace˚, cp. Nd ii.624).

fr. avhayati; cp. Sk. āhvaya “betting”

Avhayati & Avheti

1. to call upon, invoke, appeal to DN i.244 (avhayāma imper.) Pv-a 164.

2. to call, call up, summon MN i.17; Ja ii.10 Ja ii.252 (= pakkosati); v.220 (avhayesi); vi.18, 192, 273 (avhettha pret.); Vv 331 (avheti).

3. to give a name to call, to address Snp-a 487 (= āmanteti ālapati) ■ pp avhāta (q.v.).

Sk. āhvayati, ā + or hvā

Avhāta

called, summoned Ja iii.165 = (an˚ = anāhuta ayāctia) = Pv i.123, cp. Pv-a 64. The id p. at Thig 129 reads ayācita.

pp. of avhayati

Avhāna

(nt.) - 1. begging, calling, asking Snp 710; Vism 68 (˚ânabhinandanā).

2. addressing, naming Snp-a 605 (= nāma).

fr. avhayati, Sk. āhvāna in diff. meaning

Avhāyana

(nt.) calling to, asking, invocation, imploration DN i.11 (Sir-avhāyane, v.l. avhayana expld. at DN-a i.97 with reading Sirivhāyana as “ehi Siri mayhaṃ sire patiṭṭhāhī ti evaṃ sire Siriyā avhayanaṃ”) 244, 245 (v.l. avhāna).

cp. Sk. āhvayana

Avhāyika

(adj.) calling, giving a name; (m.) one who gives a name Ja i.401 = Ja iii.234.

fr. avhaya

Asa

(adj.) bad Ja iv.435 = Ja vi.235 (sataṃ vā asaṃ acc. sg. with v.l. santaṃ…, expld- by sappurisaṃ vā asappurisaṃ vā C.); v.448 (n. pl. f. asā expld. by asatiyo lāmikā C.; cp. p. 446 v.319).

for asaṃ = asanto, a + santo, ppr. of as in meaning “good”

Asaṃvata

(adj.) unrestricted, open Ja vi.306.

pp. of + saṃvuṇati, cp. saṃvuta

Asaṃvara

absence of closing or restraint, no control Dhs 1345.

a + saṃvāra

Asaṃvāsa

(adj.) deprived of co-residence, expelled from the community Vin iv.213, Vin iv.214.

a + saṃvāsa

Asaṃvindaṃ

not finding, not knowing Thag 717.

ppr. a + saṃvindati

Asaṃvuta

(adj.) not restrained Dhs 1345, Dhs 1347.

pp. of a + saṃvuṇāti, cp. saṃvata

Asaṃsaṭṭha

(adj.) not mixed or mixing, not associating, not given to society MN i.a i.4; SN i.63; Snp 628 = Dhp 404 (= dassana-savana-samullāpa paribhogakāya-saṃsaggānaṃ abhāvena Snp-a 468 = Dhp-a iv.173).

a + saṃsaṭṭha

Asaṃhārima

(adj.) = asaṃhāriya (?) Vin iv.272.

Asaṃhāriya

(adj.) not to be destroyed or shattered Iti 77; Thag 372; Nd ii.110.

grd. of a + saṃharati

Asaṃhīra

(adj.) immovable, unconquerable, irrefutable Vin ii.96; SN i.193; AN iv.141 AN v.71; Snp 1149 (as Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. Nd ii.110); Ja i.62; Ja iv.283 (˚citta unfaltering); Dpvs iv.12.

= asaṃhāriya of saṃ + hṛ;

Asakka

(adj.) impossible Ja v.362 (˚rūpa).

a + sakka; Sk. aśakya

Asakkuṇeyya

(adj.) impossible, unable to Ja i.55; Kp-a 185 and passim.

grd. of a + sakkoti

Asakkhara

(adj.) not stony, free from gravel or stones, smooth Ja v.168; Dhp-a iii.401 (opp. sasakkhara).

a + sakkhara

Asakyadhītā

(f.) not a true Buddhist nun Vin iv.214.

a + sakyadhītā

Asagguṇa

bad quality, vice Sdhp 382 (˚bhāvin, the a˚ belongs to the whole cpd.). Asankita & iya;

a + sagguṇa

Asaṅkita & ˚iya

(adj.) not hesitating, not afraid, not anxious, firm, bold Ja i.334 (˚iya) v.241; Sdhp 435, Sdhp 541.

a + sankita, pp. of śaṅk

Asaṅkuppa

(adj.) not to be shaken; immovable; steady, safe (Ep. of Nibbāna) Snp 1149 (cp. Nd ii.106); Thag 649.

a + sankuppa, grd. of kup

Asaṅkusaka

(adj.) [a + sankusaka, which is distorted from Sk. sankasuka splitting, crumbling, see Kern, Toev. p. 18 not contrary Ja vi.297 (˚vattin, C. appaṭilomavattin, cp. Ja trsln.vi.143).

Asaṅkheyya

(adj.) incalculable, innumerable, nt. an immense period AN ii.142; Mil 232 (cattāri a.), 289; Dhp-a i.5, Dhp-a i.83, Dhp-a i.104.

a + sankheyya, grd. of saṃ- khyā

Asaṅga

(adj.) not sticking to anything, free from attachment, unattached Thig 396 (˚mānasa, = anāsattacitta Thag-a 259); Mil 343. Cp. next.

a + sanga

Asaṅgita

(adj.) not sticking or stuck, unimpeded, free, quick Ja v.409.

fr. asanga, a + sangita, or should we read asangika?

Asacca

(adj.) not true, false Ja v.399.

a + sacca

Asajjamāna

(adj.) not clinging, not stuck, unattached Snp 38, Snp 71 (cp. Nd ii.107) Dhp 221 (nāmarūpasmiṃ a. = alaggamana Dhp-a iii.298).

ppr. med. of a + sajjati, sañj

Asajjittho

2nd sg. pret. med. of sajjati to stick or cling to, to hesitate Ja i.376. See sajjati.

Asajjhaya

non-repetition Dhp 241 (cp. Dhp-a iii.347).

a + sajjhāya

Asañña

(adj.) unconscious, ˚sattā unconscious beings Name of a class of Devas DN i.28 (cp. DN-a i.118 and BSk. asaṃjñika-sattvāḥ Divy 505).

a + saññā

Asaññata

(adj.) unrestrained, intemperate, lacking self-control Iti 43 = Iti 90; Snp 662 = Dhp 307.

a + saññata, pp. of saṃ + yam

Asaññin

(adj.) unconscious DN i.54 (˚gabbhā, cp. DN-a i.163); iii.111, 140, 263; Iti 87; Snp 874.

a + saññin

Asaṭha

(adj.) without guile, not fraudulent, honest DN iii.47, DN iii.55, DN iii.237; Dhp-a i.69.

a + saṭha

Asaṃṭhita

(adj.) not composed, unsettled, fickle Iti 62, Iti 94.

a + saṇṭhita

Asat (Asanto)

not being, not being good, i.e. bad, not genuine (cp. asa); freq., e.g. Snp 94 Snp 131, Snp 881, Snp 950; Dhp 73, Dhp 77, Dhp 367; Iti 69 (asanto nirayaṃ nenti). See also asaddhamma.

a + sat, ppr. of asti

*Asati

(& Asanāti q.v.) to eat; imper. asnātu Ja v.376; fut. asissāmi Thag 223; Snp 970 ■ ppr. med asamāna Ja v.59; Snp 239. ger. asitvā Mil 167; & asitvāna Ja iv.371 (an˚). pp. asita (q.v.). See also the spurious forms asmiye & añhati; (añhamāna Snp 240), also āsita1.

Sk. aśnāti, to partake of, to eat or drink cp. aṃśa share, part

Asatiyā

(adv.) heedlessly, unintentionally Ja iii.486.

instr. of a + sati

Asatta

(adj.) not clinging or attached, free from attachment Snp 1059; Dhp 419; Nd ii.107, Nd ii.108; Dhp-a iv.228.

pp. of a + sajjati

Asattha

(n. adj.) absence of a sword or knife, without a knife, usually combd. with adaṇḍa in var. phrases see under daṇḍa. Also at Thag 757 (+ avaṇa).

a + sattha

Asadisa

(adj.) incomparable, not having its like Dhp-a ii.89; Dhp-a iii.120 (˚dāna).

a + sadisa

Asaddha

(adj.) not believing, without faith DN iii.252, DN iii.282.

a + saddha

Asaddhamma

evil condition, sin, esp. sexual intercourse; usually mentioned as a set of several sins, viz. as 3 at Iti 85; as 4 at AN ii.47; as 7 at DN iii.252, DN iii.282; as 8 at Vin ii.202.

a + sat + dhamma, cp. asat & BSk. asaddharma

Asana1

(nt.) stone, rock Ja ii.91; Ja v.131.

Vedic aśan(m)

Asana2

(nt.) eating, food; adj. eating Ja i.472 (ghatâsana Ep. of the fire; v.64 (id.) Usually in neg. form anasana fasting, famine, hunger Snp 311 (= khudā Snp-a 324); DN-a i.139. See also nirasana.

cp. Sk. aśana of , cp. asati

Asana3

(nt.) the tree Pentaptera Tomentosa Ja i.40 (as Bodhi-tree of Gotama); ii.91; v.420; vi.530.

Sk. asana

Asana4

(nt.) an arrow MN i.82 = SN i.62. Cp. asani.

cp. Sk. asanā, to asyati to hurl, throw

Asanāti

to eat, to consume (food) Ja i.472; v. 64; vi.14 (Esb. note: read asnāti; C. paribhuñjati).

see asati

Asani

(f.) orig. a sharp stone as hurling-weapon thence in mythol. Indra’s thunderbolt thunder-clap, lightning Ja i.71, Ja i.167; Ja ii.154; Ja iii.323; Mil 277; Vv-a 83.

-aggi the fire of thunder, i.e. lightning or fire caused by lightning Dhp-a iii.71. -pāta the falling of the thunderbolt thunderclap, lightning DN-a i.280 (or should we read asannipāta?); Pv-a 45. -vicakka same as ˚pāta (?) SN ii.229 (= lābha-sakkāra-silokassa adhivacana); DN iii.44, DN iii.47. Asantasam & anto;

Vedic aśani in same meaning; with Sk. aśri corner, caturaśra four cornered (see assa), to Lat. ācer pointed, sharp, Gr. α ̓́κρος pointed, Ags. egl sting, Ohg ekka corner, point. Connected with this is Sk. aśan (see asana1 ). Cp. also aṃsa & asama;2

Asantasaṃ & ˚anto

(adj.) fearless, not afraid Snp 71, Snp 74; Ja iv.101; Ja vi.306; Nd ii.109.

ppr. of a + santasati

Asantāsin

(adj.) fearless, not trembling, not afraid Snp 850; Dhp 351; Nd ii.109; Dhp-a iv.70.

a + santāsin, cp. asantāsaṃ

Asantuṭṭha

not contented with, greedy, insatiate, unhappy Snp 108. Cp. next.

pp. of a + santussati

Asantuṭṭhitā

(f.) dissatisfaction, discontentment DN iii.214 (so read for tutth˚ = AN i.95.

abstr. fr. asantuṭṭhita = asantuṭṭha

Asanthava

dissociation, separation from society, seclusion Snp 207.

a + santhava

Asandhitā

(f.) absence of joints, disconnected state Ja vi.16.

a + sandhi + tā

Asannata

(adj.) not bent or bending Sdhp 417.

a + sannata

Asapatta

(adj.-n.) (act.) without enmity, friendly (med.) having no enemy or foe, secure peaceful DN ii.276; Snp 150 (= vigata-paccatthika, mettavihārin Kp-a 249); Thig 512.

a + sapatta = Sk. sapatna

Asapattī

(f.) without co-wife or rival in marriage SN iv.249.

a + sapattī

Asappurisa

a low, bad or unworthy man MN iii.37; Snp-a 479 (= anariya Snp 664).

a + sappurisa, cp. asat

Asabala

(adj.) unspotted DN ii.80 = DN iii.245.

a + sabala

Asabbha

(adj.) not belonging to the assembly-room, not consistent with good manners; impolite, vile, low, of base character Ja iii.527 (mātugāma); Dhp 77 = Ja iii.367 = Thag 994; Mil 221; Dhp-a i.256; Thag-a 246 (akkhi). Cp. next ■ Note. Both sabbha and sabbhin occur only in the negative form.

a + sabbha, i.e. *sabhya cp. sabhā & in meaning court: courteous, hof: hoflich etc.

Asabbhin = asabbna

Ja i.494, more freq. in cpds. as asabbhi˚; e.g.

-kāraṇa a low or sinful act Mil 280. -rūpa low common Ja vi.386 (= asādhu-jātika, lāmaka), 387 (= asabbhijātika), 414 (= apaṇḍita-jātika). Cp. prec.

*Asabha

see usabha.

Sk. ṛṣabha

Asama1

(adj.) unequal, incomparable Ja i.40 (+ appaṭipuggala); Sdhp 578 (+ atula). Esp. freq. in cpd ˚dhura lit. carrying more than an equal burden, of incomparable strength, very steadfast or resolute Snp 694 (= asama-viriya Snp-a 489); Ja i.193; Ja vi.259, Ja vi.330.

a + sama

Asama2

(nt.) stone, rock DN-a i.270, DN-a i.271 (˚muṭṭhika having a hammer of stone; v.l. BB. ayamuṭṭhika) Snp-a 392 (instr. asmanā).

the diaeretic form of Sk. aśman hurling stone, of whieh the contracted form is amha (q.v.); connected with Lat. ocris “mons confragosus”; Gr. α ̓́κμων anvil Lith. akmů̃ stone, see also asana1 (Sk. aśan stone for throwing) and asani

Asamaggiya

(nt.) lack of concord, disharmony Ja vi.516 (so read for asāmaggiya).

abstr. fr. a + samagga

Asamaṇa

at Pp 27 is to be read assamaṇa (q.v.).

Asamapekkhana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) lack of consideration SN iii.261; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162.

fr. a + sam + apekkhati

Asamāhita

(adj.) not composed, uncontrolled, not firm Iti 113 (opp. susamāhita); Dhp 110, Dhp 111; Pp 35.

a + samāhita

Asamijjhanaka

(adj.) unsuccessful, without result, fruitless; f. ˚ikā Ja iii.252.

a + samijjhana + ka

Asamiddhi

(f.) misfortune, lack of success Ja vi.584.

a + samiddhi

Asamosaraṇa

(nt.) not coming together, not meeting, separation Ja v.233.

a + samosaraṇa

Asampakampiya

(adj.) not to be shaken, not to be moved Snp 229 (= kampetuṃ vā cāletuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyo Kp-a 185).

grd. of a + sampakampeti

Asampajañña

(nt.) lack of intelligence DN iii.213; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162, Dhs 1351.

a + sampajañña

Asampāyanto

unable to solve or explain Snp p.92.

ppr. of a + sampāyati

Asambādha

(adj.) unobstructed Snp 150 (= sambādha-virahita Kp-a 248); Ja i.80; Thag-a 293.

a + sambādha

Asammodiya

(nt.) disagreement, dissension Ja vi.517 (= asamaggiya C.).

a + sammodiya

Asammosa

absence of confusion DN iii.221 = Dhs 1366.

a + sammosa cp. B.Sk. asammoṣadharman Ep. of the Buddha; Divy 49 etc

Asayaṃvasin

(adj.) not under one’s own control, i.e. dependent DN ii.262; Ja i.337.

a + sayaṃ + vasiṃ

Asayha

(adj.) impossible, insuperable Ja vi.337. Usually in cpd. ˚sāhin conquering the unconquerable, doing the impossible, acchieving what has not been achieved before Thag 536; Pv ii.922 (Angīrasa); Iti 32.

a + sayha, grd. of sah = Sk. asahya

Asahana

(nt ■ adj.) not enduring, non-endurance, inability Ja iii.20; Pv-a 17.

a + sahana

Asahāya

(adj.) one who is without friends; who is dependent on himself Mil 225.

a + sahāya

Asā

see āsa.

Asāta

(adj.) [a + sāta, Sk. aśāta, Kern’s interpretation & etymology of asāta at; Toev. s.v. p. 90 is improbable disagreeable Vin i.78 (asātā vedanā, cp. asātā vedanā M Vastu I 5); Snp 867; Ja i.288, Ja i.410; Ja ii.105; Dhs 152, Dhs 1343.

Asādhāraṇa

(adj.) not general, not shared, uncommon, unique Vin iii.35 Kp viii.9; Ja i.58, Ja i.78; Mil 285; DN-a i.71; Sdhp 589, Sdhp 592.

a + sādhāraṇa cp. asādhāraṇa Divy 561

Asāmapāka

(adj.) one who does not cook (a meal) for himself (a practice of ascetics) DN-a i.270.

a + sāma + pāka

Asāra

(n. adj.) that which is not substance, worthlessness; adj. worthless, vain, idle Snp 937 (= asāra nissāra sārâpagata Nd i.409); Dhp 11, Dhp 12 (cp. Dhp-a i.114 for interpretation).

a + sāra

Asāraka

(adj.) unessential, worthless, sapless, rotten Thag 260; Ja ii.163 = Dhp-a i.144.

a + sāraka

Asāraddha

(adj.) not excited, cool AN i.148 = Iti 119 (passaddho kāyo a.; v.l. assāraddha).

a + sāraddha

Asāhasa

(nt.) absence of violence, meekness, peaceableness DN iii.147 (asāhase rata fond of peace); acc as adv. asāhasaṃ without violence, not arbitrarily Ja iii.319 instr. asāhasena id. Ja vi.280; Dhp 257 (= amusāvādena Dhp-a iii.382).

a + sāhasa

Asi

a sword, a large knife DN i.77 (= DN-a i.222); MN ii.99; AN i.48 = (asinā sīsaṃ chindante); iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaṃ); Ja iv.118 (asi sunisito), 184; v.45 (here meaning “sickle”), 475 (asiñ ca me maññasi, probably faulty for either “āsiñ ca me or “āsiñcam me”); Vism 201 (ñāṇâsi the sword of knowledge); Pv-a 253 (asinā pahaṭa).

-camma sword & shield Vin ii.192; AN iii.93; Ja vi.449 -tharu the hilt of a sword Dhp-a iv.66. -nakha having nails like swords Pgdp 29. -patta having sword-like leaves with swords (knives) for leaves (of the sword-leaf-wood in Niraya, a late feature in the descriptions of Purgatory in Indian speculative Theology, see e.g. Mārk-aṇḍeyapurāṇa xii.24 sq.; Mhbhārata xii.321; Manu iv.90; xii. 75; Scherman, Visionsliteratur pp. 23 sq.) Ja vi.250 (˚niraya); Pv-a 221 (˚vana); Sdhp 194. -pāsa having swords for snares (a class of deities) Mil 191. -māla (-kamma) sword-garland (-torture) Ja iii.178 (+ sīsaṃ chindāpeti); Dāvs iii.35. Preferable to interpretation “sword-dirt”, see māla (mālā). -lakkhana “swordsign”, i.e. (fortune -telling from) marks or a sword DN i.9; Ja i.455. -loma having swords for hair SN ii.257 cp. Vin iii.106. -sūna slaughter-house (so also B.Sk asisūnā Divy 10, Divy 15; see further detail under “kāma similes) Vin ii.26; MN i.130, MN i.143; AN iii.97. -sūla a swordblade Thig 488 (expld. at Thag-a 287 by adhikuṭṭanatthena i.e. with reference to the executioner’s block, cp. also sattisūla).

Vedic asi, Av. aṃhū Lat. ensis

Asika

(adj.) (-˚) having a sword, with a sword in phrase ukkhitt’asika with drawn sword, MN i.377; Ja i.393.

asi + ka

Asita1

having eaten, eating; (nt.) that which is eaten or enjoyed, food MN i.57; AN iii.30, AN iii.32 (˚pīta-khāyita etc.); Pv-a 25 (id.); Ja vi.555 ˚(āsana having enjoyed one’s food, satisfied). Cp. āsita1.

Sk. aśita, pp. of *asati, Sk. aśnāti

Asita2

(adj.) not clinging to, unattached, independent, free (from wrong desires DN ii.261 (˚âtiga); MN i.386; Thag 38, Thag 1242 (see Mrs Rh. D. in Brethren 404 note 2); Ja ii.247; Iti 97; Snp 251, Snp 519, Snp 593, Snp 686 (Asitavhaya, called the Asita i.e. the Unattached; cp. Snp-a 487), 698 (id.), 717, 957, 1065 (cp. Nd ii.111 & nissaya).;

a + sita pp. of *śri, Sk. aśrita

Asita3

(adj.) black-blue, black MN ii.180 (˚vyābhangī); AN iii.5 (id.); Thig 480 (= indanīla Thag-a 286); Ja iii.419 (˚âpangin black-eyed); v. 302 Dāvs i.45.

Sk. asita; Idg. *ās, cp. Lat. āreo to be dry, i.e. burnt up; Gr. α ̓́ζω to dry; orig. meaning burnt, hence of burnt, i.e. black colour (of ashes)

Asita4

(m. nt.) a sickle Ja iii.129; Ja v.46.

fr. asi

Asīti

(num.) 80 (on symbolical meaning & freq. application see; aṭṭha1 B 1 c, where also most of the ref’s In addition we mention the foll.:) Ja i.233 (˚hattha 80 hands, i.e. 80 cubits deep); iii.174 (˚sahassa-vāraṇa-parivuta); vi.20 (vassasahassāni); Mil 23 (asītiyā bhikkhusahassehi saddhiṃ); Vīsm 46 (satakoṭiyo) Dhp-a i.14, Dhp-a i.19 (mahātherā); ii.25 (˚koṭi-vibhava). Cp. ạ̄sītika.

Sk. aśīti

Asu

(pron.) pron. dẹmonstr “that”, that one, usually combd. with yo (yaṃ), e.g. asu yo so puriso MN i.366; yaṃ aduṃ khettaṃ SN iv.315. nom. sg. m. asu SN iv.195; Mil 242; f. asu Ja v.396 (asū metri causâ); nt. aduṃ MN i.364, MN i.483; AN i.250. Of oblique cases e.g. amunā (instr.) AN i.250. Cp. also next.

Sk. asau (m.), adas (nt.); base amu˚ in oblique cases & derivation, e.g. adv. amutra (q.v.)

Asuka

(pron ■ adj.) such a one, this or that, a certain Vin iii.87; Ja i.148; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 30, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 109, Pv-a 122 (˚ṃ gatiṃ gata).

asn + ka

Asuci

(adj.) not clean, impure, unclean Snp 75 (˚manussā, see Nd ii.112); Pp 27, Pp 36; Sdhp 378, Sdhp 603.

a + suci

Asucīka

(nt.) impurity, unclean living, defilement Snp 243 (˚missita = asucibhāva-missita Snp-a 286.

abstr. fr. asuci

Asubha

(adj.) impure, unpleasant, bad, ugly, nasty; nt. ˚ṃ nastiness, impurity. Cp. on term and the Asubha-meditation, as well as on the 10 asubhas or offensive objects Dhs. trsl. 70 and Cpd. 121 n. 6 ■ SN iv.111 (asubhato manasikaroti); v.320; Snp 341; Sdhp 368. -subhāsubha pleasant unpleasant, good & bad Snp 633; Ja iii.243; Mil 136.

-ānupassin realising or intuiting the corruptness (of the body) Iti 80, Iti 81; Dhp-a i.76. -kathā talk about impurity Vin iii.68. -kammaṭṭhāna reflection on impurity Dhp-a iii.425. -nimitta sign of the unclean i.e. idea of impurity Vism 77. -bhāvanā contemplation of the impurity (of the body) Vin iii.68. -saññā idea of impurity DN iii.253, DN iii.283, DN iii.289, DN iii.291. -saññin having an idea of or realising the impurity (of the body) Iti 93.

a + subha

Asura

a fallen angel, a Titan pl. asurā the Titans, a class of mythological beings. Dhpāla at Pv-a 272 & the C. on Ja v.186 define them as kāḷakañjaka-bhedā asurā. The are classed with other similar inferior deities, e.g. with garuḷā, nāgā, yakkhā at Mil 117; with supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, yakkhā at DN-a i.51. The fight between Gods & Titans is also reflected in the oldest books of the Pāli Canon and occurs in identical description at the foll. passages under; the title of devāsura-saṅgāma: DN ii.285; SN i.222 (cp. 216 sq.), iv.201 sq., v.447; MN i.253; AN iv.432 ■ Rebirth as an Asura is considered as one of the four unhappy rebirths or evil fates after death (apāyā; viz. niraya, tiracchāna-yoni, petā or pettivisaya, asurā), e.g. at Iti 93; Ja v.186; Pv iv.111 see also apāya ■ Other passages in general: SN i.216 sq (fight of Devas & Asuras); iv.203; AN ii.91; AN iv.198 sq. 206; Snp 681; Nd i.89, Nd i.92, Nd i.448; Dhp-a i.264 (˚kaññā) Sdhp 366, Sdhp 436.

-inda Chief or king of the Titans. Several Asuras are accredited with the rôle of leaders, most commonly Vepacitti (SN i.222; SN iv.201 sq.) and Rāhu (A ii.17, 53; iii.243) Besides these we find Pahārāda (gloss Mahābhadda) at AN iv.197. -kāya the body or assembly of the asuras AN i.143; Ja v.186; Thag-a 285. -parivāra a retinue of Asuras AN ii.91 -rakkhasā Asuras and Rakkhasas (Rakṣasas) Snp 310 (defined by Bdhgh at Snp-a 323 as pabbata-pāda-nivāsino dānava-yakkha-saññitā).

Vedic asura in more comprehensive meaning; connected with Av. ahurō Lord, ahurō mazdā˚; perhaps to Av. anhuš & Lat. erus master

Asuropa

anger, malice, hatred abruptness, want of forbearance Pp 18 = Vb 357; Dhs 418, Dhs 1060, Dhs 1115, Dhs 1341 (an˚); Dhs-a 396.

probably a haplological contraction of asura-ropa. On various suggestions as to etym. & meaning see Morris’s discussion at; JP T S. 1893, 8 sq. The word is found as āsulopa in the Asoka inscriptions

Asussūsaṃ

not wishing to hear or listen, disobedient Ja v.121.

ppr. of a + susūsati, Desid. of śru, cp. Sk. śuśrūṣati

Asūyaka

see anasūyaka.

Asūra

(adj.)

1. not brave, not valiant, cowardly Snp 439.

2. uncouth, stupid Ja vi.292 (cp. Kern Toev. p. 48).

a + sura1

Asekha

(& Asekkha) (adj. n.) not requiring to be trained, adept, perfect, m. one who is no longer a learner, an expert; very often meaning an Arahant (cp B.Sk. aśaikṣa occurring only in phrase śaikṣâśaikṣāh those in training & the adepts, e.g. Divy 261, Divy 337; Avs i.269 Avs i.335; Avs ii.144) Vin i.62 sq.; Vin iii.24; SN i.99; DN iii.218, DN iii.219; Iti 51 (asekho sīlakkhandho; v.l. asekkha); Pp 14 (= arahant); Dhs 584, Dhs 1017, Dhs 1401; Kv 303 sq.

-muni the perfectly Wise Dhp-a iii.321. -bala the power of an Arahant, enumd. in a set of 10 at Pts ii.173, cp. 176.

a + sekha

Asecanaka

(adj.) unmixed, unadulterated, i.e. with full and unimpaired properties, delicious, sublime, lovely MN i.114; SN i.213 (a. ojava “that elixir that no infusion needs Mrs Rh. D.) = Thig 55 (expld. as anāsittakaṃ pakatiyā ’va mahārasaṃ at Thag-a 61) = Thig 196 (= anāsittakaṃ ojavantaṃ sabhāva-madhuraṃ Thag-a 168); SN v.321; AN iii.237 sq. Mil 405.

a + secana + ka, fr. sic to sprinkle, cp. B.Sk. asecanaka-darśana in same meaning e.g. Divy 23 Divy 226, Divy 334

Asevanā

(f.) not practising, abstinence from Snp 259 (= abhajanā apayirupāsanā Kp-a 124).

a + sevanā

Asesa

(adj.) not leaving a remnant, without a remainder, all, entire, complete Snp 2 sq., 351, 355, 500 1037 (= sabba Nd ii.113). As ˚-(adv.) entirely, fully completely Snp p.141 (˚virāga-nirodha); Mil 212 (˚vacana inclusive statement).

a + sesa

Asesita

(adj.) leaving nothing over, having nothing left, entire, whole all Ja iii.153.

pp. of a + Caus. of śiṣ, see seseti & sissati

Asoka1

(adj.) free from sorrow Snp 268 (= nissoka abbūḷha-soka-salla Kp-a 153); Dhp 412 Thig 512.

a + soka, cp. Sk. aśoka

Asoka2

the Asoka tree, Jonesia Asoka Ja v.188; Vv 354, 359 (˚rukkha); Vism 625 (˚ankura); Vv-a 173 (˚rukkha).

Sk. aśoka

Asoṇḍa

(adj.) not being a drunkard, abstaining from drink Ja v.116 ■ f. asoṇḍī AN iii.38.

a + soṇḍa

Asotatā

(nt.) [abstr. a + sota + ta, having no ears, being earless Ja vi.16.

Asnāti

to eat; imper asnātu Ja v.376.

Sk. aśnāti to eat, to take food; the regular Pāli forms are asati (as base) and asanāti

Asman

(nt.) stone, rock; only in instr. asmanā Snp-a 362.

Vedic aśman; the usual P. forms are amha and asama2

Asmasati

to trust, to rely on Ja v.56 (Pot. asmase).

spurious form for the usual assasati = Sk. āśvasati

Asmi

(I am) see atthi.

Asmimāna

the pride that says “I am”, pride of self, egotism (same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 210, Divy 314; Vin i.3; DN iii.273; MN i.139, MN i.425; AN iii.85; Pts i.26 Kv 212; Dhp-a i.237. Cp. ahaṃ asmi.

asmi + māna

Asmiye

1 sg. ind. pres. med. of to eat, in sense of a fut. “I shall eat” Ja v.397, Ja v.405 (C. bhuñjissāmi). The form is to be expld. as denom. formn. fr ■ āśa food, = aṃsiyati and with metathesis asmiyati. See also añhati which would correspond either to *aṃśyati or aśnāti (see asati ).

Assa1

shoulder; in cpd. assapuṭa shoulder-bag, knapsack i.e. a bag containing provisions instr. assupuṭena with provisions. Later exegesis has interpreted this as a bag full of ashes, and vv.ll. as well as Commentators take assa = bhasma ashes (thus also Morris JP T S. 1893, 10 without being able to give an etymology). The word was already misunderstood by Bdhgh. when he explained the Dīgha passage by bhasmapuṭena sīse chārikaṃ okiritvā ti attho DN-a i.267. After all it is the same as puṭaṃsa (see under aṃsa1 ) ■ DN i.98, cp. AN ii.242 (v.l. bhasma˚); DN-a i.267 (v.l. bhassa˚).

for aṃsa1, q.v. for etym.

Assa2

corner, point; occurs only in cpd. caturassa four-cornered, quadrangular, regular (of symmetrical form, Vin ii.316; Ja iv.46, Ja iv.492; Pv ii.119 Perhaps also at Thig 229 (see under assa3). Occurs also in form caturaṃsa under catur).

for aṃsa2 = Sk. aśra point, corner, cp. Sk. aśri, Gr. α ̓́κρος & ὀςύς sharp, Lat. acer

Assa3

a horse; often mentioned alongside of and combd. with hatthi (elephant) Vin iii.6 (pañcamattehi assa-satehi), 52 (enumd. under catuppadā, quadrupeds with hatthi oṭṭha goṇa gadrabha & pasuka); AN ii.207 AN v.271; Snp 769 (gavâssa). At Th ii.229 the commentary explains caturassa as ʻfour in handʼ; but the context shows that the more usual sense of caturassa (see assa2 was probably what the poet meant; Dhp 94, Dhp 143, Dhp 144 (bhadra, a good horse), 380 (id.); Vv 203 (+ assatarī) Vv-a 78; Dhp-a i.392 (hatthi-assâdayo); Sdhp 367 (duṭṭh˚).

-ājāniya [cp. BSk. aśvājāneya Divy 509, Divy 511] a thoroughbred horse, a blood horse AN i.77, AN i.244; AN ii.113 sq., 250 sq.; iii.248, 282 sq.; iv.188, 397; v.166, 323; Pv-a 216 See also ājāniya ■ āroha one who climbs on a horse, a rider on horseback, Name of an occupation “cavalry” DN i.51 (+ hatthâroha; expld. at DN-a i.156 by sabbe pi assācariyaassavejja-assabhaṇḍādayo). -kaṇṇa Name of a tree, Vatica Robusta, lit. “horse-ear” (cp. similarly Goth. aíhva-tundi the thornbush, lit. horse-tooth) Ja ii.161; Ja iv.209; Ja vi.528 -khaluṅka an inferior horse (“shaker”), opp. sadassa. AN i.287 = AN iv.397. -tthara a horse cover, a horse blanket Vin i.192; DN i.7 -damma a horse to be tamed, a fierce horse, a stallion AN ii.112; ˚sārathi a horse trainer AN ii.112, AN ii.114; AN v.323 sq.; Dhp-a iv.4. -potaka the young of a horse, a foal or colt Ja ii.288. -bandha a groom Ja ii.98; Ja v.449; Dhp-a i.392. -bhaṇḍa (for ˚bandha? or should we read ˚paṇḍaka?) a groom or horse-trainer, a trader in horses Vin i.85 (see on form of word Kern, Toev. p. 35) -bhaṇḍaka horse-trappings Ja ii.113. -maṇḍala circus Vism 308, cp. MN i.446. -maṇḍalika exercising-ground Vin iii.6. -medha Name of a sacrifice: the horse-sacrifice [Vedic aśvamedha as Np.] SN i.76 (v.l. sassa˚); Iti 21 (+ purisamedha); Snp 303. -yuddha a horse-fight DN i.7 -rūpaka a figure of a horse, a toy horse Dhp-a ii.69 (+ hatthi-rūpaka). -lakkhaṇa (earning fees by judging the marks on a horse DN i.9. -laṇḍa horse-manure, horsedung Dhp-a iv.156 (hatthi-laṇḍa + ). -vāṇija a horsedealer Vin iii.6. -sadassa a noble steed of the horse kind AN i.289 = AN iv.397 (in comparison with purisa˚).

Vedic aśva, cp. Av. aspō; Gr. ι ̔́ππος, dial. ι ̔́κκος; Lat. equus; Oir. ech; Gall. epo-; Cymr. ep, Goth. aíhva; Os ehu; Ags. eoh

Assa4

is gen. dat. sg. of ayaṃ, this.

Assa5

3. sg. Pot. of asmi (see atthi ).

Assaka1

(-˚) with a horse, having a horse; an’ without a horse Ja vi.515 (+ arathaka).

assa3 + ka

Assaka2

(adj.) not having one’s own, poor, destitute MN i.450; MN ii.68; AN iii.352; Pts i.126 (v.l. asaka).

a + saka; Sk. asvaka

Assatara

a mule Dhp 322; Dhp-a i.213; Dhp-a iv.4 (= vaḷavāya gadrabhena jāta); Ja iv.464 (kambojake assatare sudante; imported from Cambodia); vi.342 ■ f. assatarī a she-mule Vin ii.188; SN i.154; SN ii.241; AN ii.73; Mil 166assatarī-ratha a chariot drawn by she-mules Vv 203, 208 (T. assatarī ratā = 438; Pv i.111 (= assatariyutta ratha Pv-a 56); Ja vi.355.

Vedic aśvatara, aśva + compar. suffix tara in function of “a kind of”, thus lit. a kind of horse, cp. Lat matertera a kind of mother. i.e. aunt

Assattha1

the holy fig-tree, Ficus, Religiosa the tree under which the Buddha attained enlightenment i.e. the Bo tree Vin iv.35; DN ii.4 (sammā-sambuddho assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho); SN v.96; Ja i.16 (v.75 in word-play with assattha2 of v.79).

Vedic aśvattha, expld. in K Z i.467 as aśva-ttha dial. for aśva-stha “standing place for horses, which etym is problematic; it is likely that the Sk. word is borrowed from a local dialect.

Assattha2

encouraged, comforted AN iv.184 (v.l. as gloss assāsaka) Pts i.131 (loka an˚; v.l. assaka); Ja i.16 (v.79 cp. assattha1) vi.309 (= laddhassasa C.), 566.

pp. of assasati; cp. BSk. āsvasta Avs i.210

Assaddha

(adj.) without faith, unbelieving, Snp 663; Pp 13, Pp 20; Dhs 1327; Dhp-a ii.187.

a + saddhā

Assaddhiya

(nt.) disbelief SN i.25; AN iii.421 AN v.113 sq., 146, 148 sq., 158, 161; Vb 371; DN-a i.235 Sdhp 80.

a + saddhiya, in form, but not in meaning a grd. of saddahati, for which usually saddheyya cp. Sk. aśradheyya incredible

Assama

a hermitage (of a brahmin ascetic esp. a jaṭila) Vin i.24 = Vin iv.108; Vin i.26, Vin i.246; Vin iii.147; Snp 979; Snp p.104, Snp p.111; Ja i.315 (˚pada) v.75 (id.) 321. vi.76 (˚pada). The word is not found anywhere in the Canon in the technical sense of the later Sanskrit law books where “the 4 āśramas” is used as a t. t. for the four stages in the life of a brahmin priest (not of a brahmin by birth). See Dial. i.211–⁠217.

ā + śram

Assamaṇa

not a true Samaṇa Vin i.96; Snp 282; Pp 27 (so read for asamaṇa); Pp A 207 ■ f assamaṇī Vìn iv.214.

a + samaṇa

Assaya

resting place, shelter, refuge, seat DN-a i.67 (puññ˚). Cp. BSk. rājāśraya Jtm 3156; aśraya also in meaning “body”: see Avs. i.175 & Index; ii.223.

ā + sayati, śri

Assava

(adj.) loyal DN i.137; Snp 22, Snp 23, Snp 32; Ja iv.98; Ja vi.49; Mil 254; an˚; inattentive, not docile Dhp-a i.7.

ā + sunāti, śru

Assavati

to flow Ja ii.276 (= paggharati C.). Cp. also āsavati.

ā + sru

Assavanatā

(f.) not listening to, inattention MN i.168.

abstr. fr. assavana

Assavanīya

(adj.) not pleasant to hear Sdhp 82.

a + savanīya

Assasati

1. to breathe, to breathe out, to exhale Ja i.163; Ja vi.305 (gloss assāsento passāsento susu ti saddaṃ karonto); Vism 272. Usually in combn. with passasati to inhale, i.e. to breathe in & out, DN ii.291 = MN i.56, cp MN i.425; Ja ii.53, cp. v.36.

2. to breathe freely or quietly, to feel relieved, to be comforted, to have courage SN iv.43; Ja iv.93 assasitvāna ger. = vissamitvā c.); vi.190 (assāsa imper., with mā soci); med. assase Ja iv.57 (C for asmase T.; expld. by vissase), 111 (˚itvā).

3. to enter by the breath, to bewitch, enchant, take possession Ja iv.495 (= assāsa-vātena upahanati āvisati C.) ■ Caus assāseti ■ pp. assattha2. See also assāsa-passāsa.

ā + śvas, on semantical inversion of ā & pa see under ā;1 3

Assāda

taste, sweetness, enjoyment, satisfaction DN i.22 (vedanānaṃ samudaya atthangama assāda etc.); MN i.85; SN ii.84 sq. (˚ânupassin), 170 sq.; iii.27 sq (ko rūpassa assādo), 62, 102; iv.8 sq., 220; v.193, 203 sq.; AN i.50 (˚ânupassin), 258, 260; ii.10; iii.447 (˚diṭṭhi Ja i.508; Ja iv.113, Snp 448; Pts i.139 sq., (˚diṭṭhi), 157 cp. i.1017; Pv iv.62 (kām˚); Vb 368 (˚diṭṭhi); Ne 27 sq.; Mil 388; Vism 76 (paviveka-ras’); Sdhp 37, Sdhp 51 See also appassāda under appa.

ā + sādiyati, svad

Assādanā

(f.) sweetness, taste, enjoyment SN i.124; Snp 447 (= sādubhāva Snp-a 393).

cp. assāda

Assādeti

to taste SN ii.227 (lābha-sakkārasilokaṃ); Vism 73 (paviveka-sukha-rasaṃ); Dhp-a i.318.

Denom. fr. assāda

Assāraddha

v.l. at Iti 111 for asāraddha.

Assāvin

(adj.) only in an˚; not enjoying or finding pleasure, not intoxicated Snp 853 (sātiyesu a. sāta-vatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhā-santhava-virahita Snp-a 549) See also āsava.

ā + sru

Assāsa

1. (lit.) breathing, esp. breathing out (so Vism 272), exhalation, opp. to passāsa inhalation, with which often combd. or contrasted; thus as cpd. assāsa-passāsa meaning breathing (in & out), sign of life, process of breathing, breath DN ii.157 = SN i.159 Thag 905; DN iii.266; MN i.243; SN i.106; SN iv.293; SN v.330 SN v.336; AN iv.409; AN v.135; Ja ii.146; Ja vi.82; Mil 31, Mil 85 Vism 116, Vism 197assāsa in contrast with passāsa at Pts i.95, Pts i.164 sq., 182 sq.

2. (fig.) breathing easily, freely or quietly, relief, comfort, consolation, confidence MN i.64; SN ii.50 (dhamma-vinaye); iv.254 (param-assāsa-ppatta); AN i.192; AN iii.297 sq. (dhamma-vinaye); iv.185; Ja vi.309 (see assattha2); Mil 354; Pv-a 104 (˚matta only a little breathing space); Sdhp 299 (param˚), 313.

Sk. āśvāsa, ā + śvas

Assāsaka

(adj. n.) 1. (cp. assāsa 1) having breath, breathing, in an˚; not able to draw breath Vin iii.84; Vin iv.111.

2. (cp. assāsa2) (m. & nt.) that which gives comfort & relief, confidence, expectancy Ja i.84; vi. 150. Cp. next.

fr. assāsa

Assāsika

(adj.) only in neg. an˚; not able to afford comfort giving no comfort or security MN i.514; MN iii.30; Ja ii.298 (= aññaṃ assāsetuṃ asamatthaṭāya na assāsika). Cp. BSk anāśvāsika in ster. phrase anitya adhruva anāśvāsika vipariṇāmadharman Divy 207; Avs. 139, 144; whereas the corresp. Pāli equivalent runs anicca addhuva asassata (= appāyuka) vipariṇāma-dhamma thus inviting the conjecture that BSk. āśvāsika is somehow distorted out of P. asassata.

fr. assāsa in meaning of assāsa 2, cp. assāsaka 2

Assāsin

(adj.) reviving, cheering up, consoled, happy SN iv.43 (an˚).

Sk. āśvāsin

Assāseti

to console, soothe, calm, comfort, satisfy Ja vi.190, Ja vi.512; Dhp-a i.13.

Caus. of assasati

Assita

(adj.) dependent on, relying, supported by (acc.); abiding, living in or on DN ii.255 (tad˚); Vv 5016 (sīho va guhaṃ a.); Thag 149 (janaṃ ev’ assito jano); Sdhp 401.

Sk. aśrita, ā + pp. of śri

Assirī

(adj.) without splendour, having lost its brightness, in assirī viya khāyati Ne 62 = Ud 79 (which latter has sassar’ iva, cp. C. on passage l. c.).

a + sirī

Assu1

(nt.) DN i.115, DN i.141; Dhp 67; Pp 56; DN-a i.284; Pv-a 39. -mocana shedding of tears Pv-a 18.

Vedic aśru, Av. asrū, Lith aszarà, with etym. not definitely clear: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under lacrima a tear Vin i.87 (assūni pavatteti to shed tears); SN ii.282 (id.); Dhp 74; Thig 496 (cp. Thag-a 289); Kp-a 65; Dhp-a i.12 (˚puṇṇa-netta with eyes full of tears); ii.98; Pv-a 125. -dhārā a shower of tears Dhp-a iv.15 (pavatteti to shed) -mukha (adj.) with tearful face [cp. BSk. aśrumukha e.g. Jtm 3116

Assu2

is 3rd pl. pot. of atthi.

Assu3

(indecl.) expletive part. also used in emphatic sense of “surely, yes, indeed” Snp 231 (according to Fausböll but preferably with P. T. S. ed. as tayas su for tay’ assu, cp. Kp-a 188); Vv 324 (assa v.l. SS) = Vv-a 135 (assū ti nipāta-mattaṃ). Perhaps we ought to take this assu3 together with the foll. assu4 as a modification of ssu (see su2 ). Cp. āsu.

Sk. sma

Assu4

part. for Sk. svid (and sma?) see under su2. According to this view Fausbölls reading ken’ assu at Snp 1032 is to be emended to kena ssu.

Assuka

(nt.) a tear Vin ii.289; Snp 691; Pv iv.53.

assu1 + ka

Assutavant

(adj.) one who has not heard, ignorant MN i.1, MN i.8, MN i.135; Dhs 1003, Dhs 1217, cp. Dhs trsl.258.

a + sutavant

Aha1

(indecl.) exclamation of surprise, consternation, pain etc “ch! alas! woe!”. Perhaps to be seen in cpd. ˚kāmā miserable pleasures lit. “woe to these pleasures!”) gloss at Thag-a 292 for T. kāmakāmā of Thig 506 (expld. by C. as “ahā ti lāmaka-pariyāyo”). See also ahaha.

cp. Sk. aha & P. aho; Germ. aha; Lat. ehem etc.

Aha2

(-˚) & Aho (˚-) (nt.) a day. (1); ˚aha only in foll. cpds. & cases:; instr. ekâhena in one day Ja vi.366; loc. tadahe on that (same) day Pv-a 46; acc. katipâhaṃ (for) some or several days Ja i.152 etc (kattpâha); sattāhaṃ seven days, a week Vin i.1; DN ii.14; Ja iv.2, and freq.; anvahaṃ daily Dāvs iv.8 ■ The initial a of ahaṃ (acc.) is elided after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ’haṃ how many days? SN i.7 ekâha-dvī ’haṃ one or two days Ja i.292; dvīha-tī ’han two or three days Ja ii.103; Vv-a 45; ekâha-dvī ’h’ accayena after the lapse of one or two days Ja i.253 ■ A doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which only occurs in phrases pubbanho & sāyanha; (q.v.); an adj. der. fr. aha is ˚ahika: see pañcâhika (consisting of 5 days) ■ (2) aho˚; in cpd. ahoratta (m. & nt.) [cp BSk. ahorātraṃ Avs.; i.209] & ahoratti (f.) day & night occurring mostly in oblique cases and adverbially in; acc. ahorattaṃ: MN i.417 (˚ânusikkhin); Dhp 226 (id.; expld. by divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna Dhp-a iii.324); Thag 145 (ahorattā accayanti); Ja iv.108 (˚ānaṃ accaye); Pv ii.131 (˚ṃ); Mil 82 (ena) ■ ahorattiṃ Dhp 387; Ja vi.313 (v.l. BB for T. aho va rattiṃ).

Vedic ahan & ahas

Ahaṃ

(prom.) proName of 1st person “I”. nom. sg. ahaṃ SN iii.235; AN iv.53; Dhp 222, Dhp 320; Snp 172, Snp 192, Snp 685, Snp 989, Snp 1054, Snp 1143; Ja i.61; Ja ii.159 ■ In pregnant sense (my ego, myself, I as the one & only i.e. egotistically) in foll. phrases: yaṃ vadanti mama. na te ahaṃ SN i.116, SN i.123; ahaṃ asmi “I am” (cp. ahaṃkāra below) SN i.129; SN iii.46, SN iii.128 sq.; SN iv.203; AN ii.212 AN ii.215 sq.; Vism 13; ahaṃ pure ti “I am the first” Vv 8450 (= ahamahaṃkārā ti Vv-a 351) ■ gen. dat. mayhaṃ Snp 431, Snp 479; Ja i.279; Ja ii.160, mama SN i.115; Snp 22, Snp 23 Snp 341, Snp 997; Ja ii.159, & mamaṃ SN i.116; Snp 253 (= mama C.), 694, 982 ■ instr. mayā Snp 135, Snp 336, Snp 557, Snp 982; Ja i.222, Ja i.279 ■ acc. maṃ Snp 356, Snp 366, Snp 425, Snp 936; Ja ii.159; Ja iii.26, & mamaṃ Ja iii.55, Ja iii.394 ■ loc. mayi Snp 559; Ja iii.188. The enclitic form in the sg. is me, & functions in diff. cases, as gen. (Snp 983; Ja ii.159), acc. (Snp 982), instr. (Ja i.138, Ja i.222), & abl ■ Pl. nom.; mayaṃ (we) Snp 31, Snp 91, Snp 167, Snp 999; Ja ii.159; Ja vi.365, amhe Ja ii.129, & vayaṃ (q.v.) ■ gen. amhākaṃ Ja i.221; Ja ii.159 & asmākaṃ Snp p.106 ■ acc. amhe Ja i.222; Ja ii.415; asme Ja iii.359 ■ instr. amhehi Ja i.150; Ja ii.417 & asmābhi Thag-a 153 (Ap. 132) ■ loc. amhesu Ja i.222. The enclitic form for the pl. is no (for acc. dat & gen.) see under; vayaṃ.

-kāra selfishness, egotism, arrogance (see also mamaṃkāra) MN iii.18, MN iii.32; SN ii.253; SN iii.80, SN iii.136, SN iii.169 sq.; SN iv.41 SN iv.197, SN iv.202; AN i.132 sq.; AN iii.444; Ud 70; Ne 127, and freq. passim.

Vedic ahaṃ = Av. azəm; Gr. ἐγώ(ν); Lat. ego; Goth. ik, Ags. ic, Ohg. ih etc.

Ahaha

1. exclamation of woe Ja iii.450 (ahahā in metre).

2. (nt. Name of a certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), lit. oh woe! AN v.173 = Snp p.126.

onomat. after exclamation ahahā: see aha1

Ahāsa

absence of exultancy, modesty Ja iii.466 (= an-ubbillāvitattaṃ C.).

a + hāsa, cp. Sk. ahāsa & aharṣa

Ahāsi

3rd sg. aor. of harati (q.v.).

Ahi

a snake Vin ii.109; DN i.77; SN iv.198; AN iii.306 sq.; AN iv.320; AN v.289; Nd i.484; Vism 345 (+ kukkura etc.); Vv-a 100; Pv-a 144.

-kuṇapa the carcase of a snake Vin iii.68 = MN i.73; AN iv.377. -gāha a snake catcher or trainer Ja vi.192 -guṇṭhika (? reading uncertain, we find as vv.ll. ˚guṇḍika, ˚guṇṭika & ˚kuṇḍika; the BSk. paraphrase is ˚tuṇḍika Divy 497. In view of this uncertainty we are unable to pronounce a safe etymology; it is in all probability a dialectical; may be Non-Aryan, word. See also under kuṇḍika & guṇṭhika & cp. Morris in; J.P.T.S. 1886, 153 a snake charmer Ja i.370 (˚guṇḍ˚); ii.267; iii.348 (˚guṇḍ˚) iv.456 (T. ˚guṇṭ; v.l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚) 308 (T. ˚kuṇḍ˚, v.l. SS ˚guṇṭh˚), 456 (T. ˚guṇṭ˚; v.l. BB ˚kuṇḍ); vi.171 (T. ˚guṇḍ˚; v.l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚); Mil 23, Mil 305. -chattaka (nt.) “a snake’s parasol”, a mushroom DN iii.87; Ja ii.95; Ud 81 (C. on viii.5, 1). -tuṇḍika = ˚guṇṭhika Vism 304 Vism 500. -peta a Peta in form of a snake Dhp-a ii.63. -mekhalā “snake-girdle”, i.e. outfit or appearance of a snake Dhp-a i.139. -vātaka (-roga) Name of a certain disease (“snakewind-sickness”) Vin i.78; Ja ii.79; Ja iv.200; Dhp-a i.169 Dhp-a i.187, Dhp-a i.231; Dhp-a iii.437. -vijjā “snake-craft”, i.e. fortune-telling or sorcery by means of snakes DN i.9 (= sappa-daṭṭhatikicchana-vijjā c’ eva sapp’ avhāyana-vijjā ea “the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)” DN-a i.93).

Vedic ahi, with Av. aži perhaps to Lat. anguis etc., see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v.

Ahiṃsaka

(adj.) not injuring others, harmless, humane, SN i.165; Thag 879; Dhp 225; Ja iv.447.

fr. ahiṃsā

Ahiṃsā

(f.) not hurting, humanity, kindness DN iii.147; AN i.151; Dhp 261, Dhp 270; Ja iv.71; Mil 402.

a + hiṃsā

Ahita

(adj.-n.) not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness DN iii.246; Dhp 163; Snp 665, Snp 692; Mil 199 (˚kāma). Ahirika & Ahirika;

a + hita

Ahirika & Ahirīka

(adj.) shameless, unscrupulous DN iii.212, DN iii.252, DN iii.282; AN ii.219; Dhp 244; Snp 133 (˚īka); Iti 27 (˚īka); Pp 19 (also nt. unscrupulousness) Dhs 365; Ne 39, Ne 126; Dhp-a iii.352.

fr. a + hirī

Ahīnindriya

see discussed under abhinindriya.

Ahuvāsiṃ

1st sg. pret. of hotī (q.v.) I was Vv 826 (= ahosiṃ Vv-a 321).

Ahuhāliya

(nt.) a hoarse & loud laugh Ja iii.223 (= danta-vidaṃsaka-mahā-hasita C.).

onomat.

Ahe

(indecl.) exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in cpd. ahevana a dense forest (lit. oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i.e. how big it is) Ja v.63 (uttamāhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is not beyond doubt. C. on p. 64 expls. as “ahevanaṃ vuccati vanasaṇḍo”).

= aho, cp. aha1

Aho

(indecl.) exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed well; I say! for sure! Vv-a 103 (aho ti acchariy’ atthena nipāto); Ja i.88 (aho acchariyaṃ aho abbhutaṃ), 140. Usually combd. with similar emphatic particles, e.g. aho vata Dhp-a ii.85; Pv-a 131 (= sādhu vata); aho vata re DN i.107; Pv ii.94 5. Cp. ahe.

Sk. aho, for etym. see aha1

Ahosi-kamma

(nt.) an act or thought whose kamma has no longer any potential force: Cpd. 145. At p. 45 ahosikakamma is said to be a kamma inhibited by a more powerful one. See Buddhaghosa in Vism. Chap. xix.

ā

Ā

Ā1

(indecl.) a frequent prefix, used as well-defined simple base-prefix (with rootderivations), but not as modification (i.e. first part of a double prefix cpd. like sam-ā-dhi) except in one case ā-ni-saṃsa (which is doubtful & of diff. origin, viz. from comb;n. āsaṃsa-nisaṃsa, see below 3b). It denotes either touch (contact) or a personal (close) relation to the object (ā ti anussaraṇ’ atthe nipāto Pv-a 165), or the aim of the action expressed in the verb ■ (1.) As prep. c. abl only in Ja in meaning “up to, until, about, near” Ja vi.192 (ā sahassehi = yāva s. C.), prob. a late development As pref. in meaning “forth, out, to, towards, at, on” in foll. applications:-(a) aim in general or touch in particular (lit.), e.g. ākaḍḍhati pull to, along or up; ˚kāsa shining forth; ˚koṭeti knock at; ˚gacchati go towards ˚camati rinse over; ˚neti bring towards, ad-duce; ˚bhā shining forth; ˚bhujati bend in; ˚masati touch at; ˚yata stretched out; ˚rabhati at-tempt; ˚rohana a-scending; ˚laya hanging on; ˚loketi look at; ˚vattati ad-vert; ˚vahati bring to; ˚vāsa dwelling at; ˚sādeti touch; ˚sīdati sit by ˚hanati strike at ■ (b) in reflexive function: close relation to subject or person actively concerned, e.g. ādāti take on or up (to oneself); ˚dāsa looking at, mirror ˚dhāra support; ˚nandati rejoice; ˚nisaṃsa subjective gain ˚bādha being affected; ˚modita pleased; ˚rakkha guarding ˚rādhita satisfied; ˚rāma (personal) delight in; ˚lingati embrace (to oneself); ˚hāra taking to (oneself) ■ (c) in

transitive function: close relation to the object passively concerned, e.g. āghātana killing; ˚carati indulge in; ˚cikkhati point ont, explain; ˚jīva living on; ˚ṇāpeti give an order to somebody; ˚disati point out to some one; ˚bhindati cut; ˚manteti ad-dress; ˚yācati pray to; ˚roceti speak to; siñcati besprinkle; ˚sevati indulge in ■ (d) out of meaning (a) develops that of an intensive-frequentative prefix in sense of “all-round, completely, very much” e.g. ākiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚kula mixed up; ˚dhuta moved about; ˚rāva shouting out or very much; ˚luḷati move about; ˚hiṇḍati roam about.

2. Affinities. Closely related in meaning and often interchanging are the foll prep. (prefixes): anu (˚bhati), abhi (˚saṃsati), pa (˚tapati) paṭi (˚kankhati) in meaning 1 a-c; and vi (˚kirati ˚ghāta, ˚cameti, ˚lepa, ˚lopa), sam (˚tapati, ˚dassati) in meaning 1 d. See also 3b.

3. Combinations: (a) Intensifying combns. of other modifying prefixes with ā as base anu + ā (anvā-gacchati, ˚disati, ˚maddati, ˚rohati, ˚visati ˚sanna, ˚hata), paṭi + ā (paccā-janati, ˚ttharati, ˚dāti, ˚savati), pari + ā (pariyā-ñāta, ˚dāti, ˚pajjati, ˚harati), sam + ā (samā-disati, ˚dāna, ˚dhi, ˚pajjati, ˚rabhati) ■ (b) Contrast-combns. with other pref. in a double cpd. of noun, adj or verb (cp. above 2) in meaning of “up & down, in & out to & fro”; ā + ni: āvedhika-nibbedhika, āsaṃsa-nisaṃsa (contracted to ānisaṃsa), āsevita-nisevita; ā + pa: assasatipassasati (where both terms are semantically alike; in exegesis however they have been differentiated in a way which looks like a distortion of the original meaning viz. assasati is taken as “breathing out“, passasati as “breathing in“: see Vism 271), assāsa-passāsa, āmoditapamodita, āhuna-pāhuna, āhuneyya-pāhuneyya; ā + paccā ākoṭita-paccākoṭita; ā + pari: ākaḍḍhana-parikaḍḍhana āsankita-parisankita; ā + vi: ālokita-vilokita, āvāha-vivāha āveṭhana-viniveṭhana; a + sam: allāpa-sallāpa: ā + samā āciṇṇa-samāciṇṇa.

4. Before double consonants ā is shortened to a and words containing ā in this form are to be found under a˚, e.g. akkamaṇa, akkhitta, acchādeti aññāta, appoṭeti, allāpa, assāda.

Vedic ā, prep. with acc., loc., abl., meaning “to, towards”, & also “from”. Orig. an emphatic-deictic part. (Idg. *ē) = Gr. ̓ ̈η surely, really; Ohg ■ ā etc., increment of a (Idg. *e), as in Sk. a-sau; Gr. εκεϊ (cp. a3) see Brugmann, Kurze Vergl. Gr. 464, 465

Ā˚2

guṇa or increment of a˚ in connection with such suffixes as-ya,-iya,-itta. So in āyasakya fr. ayasaka; āruppa from arūpa; ārogya fr. aroga; ālasiya fr. alasa; ādhipacca fr. adhipati; ābhidosika fr. abhidosa etc.

Ā˚3

of various other origins (guṇa e.g. of ṛ or lengthening of ordinary root a˚), rare, as ālinda (for alinda), āsabha (fr. usabha).

Ā˚4

infix in repetition-cpds. denoting accumulation or variety (by contrast with the opposite, cp. ā1 3b), constitutes a guṇa-or increment-form of neg. pref. a (see a2), as in foll.: phalāphala all sorts of fruit (lit. what is fruit not fruit) freq. in Jātakas, e.g. ; i.416; ii.160; iii.127 iv.220, 307, 449; v.313; vi.520; kāraṇākāraṇāni all sorts of duties Ja vi.333; Dhp-a i.385; khaṇḍākhaṇḍa pêle-mêle Ja i.114; Ja iii.256; gaṇḍāgaṇḍa a mass of boils Dhp-a iii.297; cirāciraṃ continually Vin iv.261; bhavābhava all kinds of existences Snp 801, cp. Nd i.109; Nd ii.664; Thag 784 (˚esu = mahant-âmahantesu bh. C., see Brethren 305); rūpârūpa the whole aggregate Thag-a 285; etc.

Ākaṅkhati

to wish for, think of, desire; intend, plan, design Vin ii.244 (˚amāna); DN i.78, DN i.176; SN i.46; Snp 569 (˚amāna); Snp p.102 (= icchati Snp-a 436); Dhp-a i.29; Snp-a 229; Vv-a 149; Pv-a 229.

ā + kāṅkṣ, cp. kaṅkhati

Ākaṅkhā

f. longing, wish; as adj. at Thag 1030.

fr. ā + kāṅkṣ

Ākaḍḍhati

to pull along, pull to (oneself), drag or draw out, pull up Vin ii.325 (Bdhgh. for apakassati see under apakāsati); iv.219; Ja i.172, Ja i.192, Ja i.417; Mil 102, Mil 135; Thag-a 117 (˚eti); Vv-a 226; Pv-a 68. Pass. ākaḍḍhiyati Ja ii.122 (˚amāna-locana with eyes drawn away or attracted); Mil 102; Vism 163; Vv-a 207 (˚amāna-hadaya with torn heart) ■ pp. ākaḍḍhita.

ā + kaḍḍhati

Ākaḍḍhana

(nt.) drawing away or to, pulling out, distraction Vv-a 212 (˚parikaḍḍhana pulling about) Dhs-a 363; Mil 154 (˚parikaḍḍhana), 352 ■ As f Vin iii.121.

fr. ākaḍḍhati

Ākaḍḍhita

pulled out, dragged along; upset, overthrown Ja iii.256 (= akkhitta2).

pp. of akaḍḍheti

Ākantana

(?) a possible reading, for the dürakantana of the text at Thag 1123, for which we might read durākantana

Ākappa

1. attire, appearance, Vin i.44 (an˚) = ii.213; Ja i.505.

2. deportment Dhs 713 (ā˚ gamanādi-ākāro Dhs-a 321).

-sampanna, suitably attired, well dressed, AN iii.78; Ja iv.542; an˚ sampanna, ill dressed, Ja i.420.

cp. Sk. ākalpa ā + kappa

Ākampita

shaking, trembling Mil 154 (˚hadaya).

pp. of ākampeti, Caus. of ā + kamp

Ākara

a mine, usually in cpd. ratan-ākara a mine of jewels Thag 1049; Ja ii.414; vi. 459; Dpvs i.18 ■ Cp. also Mil 356; Vv-a 13.

cp. Sk. ākara

Ākassati

to draw along, draw after, plough, cultivate Nd i.428.

ā + kassati

Ākāra

“the (way of) making”, i.e. (1) state, condition Ja i.237 (avasan˚ condition of inhabitability); ii.154 (patan˚ state of falling, labile equilibrium) cp. paṇṇ˚ ■ (2) property, quality, attribute DN i.76 (anāvila sabb˚-sampanna endowed with all good qualities, of a jewel); ii.157 (˚varûpeta); Ja ii.352 (sabb˚ paripuṇṇa altogether perfect in qualities) ■ (3) sign, appearance form, DN i.175; Ja i.266 (chātak˚ sign of hunger); Mil 24 (˚ena by the sign of… ); Vv-a 27 (therassa ā. form of the Th.); Pv-a 90, Pv-a 283 (rañño ā. the king’s person) Sdhp 363 ■ (4) way, mode, manner, sa-ākāra in all their modes DN i.13 = DN i.82 = DN iii.111; Ja i.266 (āgaman˚ the mode of his coming). Esp. in instr. sg. & pl. with; num. or pron. (in this way, in two ways etc.): chah’ākārehi in a sixfold manner Nd ii.680 (cp. kāraṇehi in same sense) Ne 73, Ne 74 (dvādasah’ākārehi); Vism 613 (navah’ākārehi indriyāni tikkhāni bhavanti); Pv-a 64 (yen’ākārena āgato ten’ākārena gato as he came so he went), 99 (id.). (5) reason, ground, account DN i.138, DN i.139; Ne 4, Ne 8 sq. 38; Dhp-a i.14; Kp-a 100 (in expln. of evaṃ). In this meaning freq. with dass (dasseti, dassana, nidassana etc. in commentary style “what is meant by”, the (statement of) reason why or of, notion, idea Pv-a 26 (dātabb˚dassana), 27 (thoman˚-dassana), 75 (kāruññ ˚ṃ dassesi) 121 (pucchan˚-nidassanaṃ what has been asked); Snp-a 135 (˚nidassana).

-parivitakka study of conditions, careful consideration examination of reasons SN ii.115; SN iv.138; AN ii.191 Nd ii.151.

a + karoti, kṛ;

Ākāraka

(nt.) appearance; reason, manner (cp. ākāra4) Ja i.269 (ākārakena = kāraṇena C.).

ākāra + ka

Ākāravant

(adj.) having a reason, reasonable, founded MN i.401 (saddhā).

fr. ākāra

Ākāsa1

air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept see Cpd. 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etym. of ākāsa (fr. ā + kassati of kṛṣ ) at Dhs-a 325 see Dhs trsl. 178. DN i.55 (˚ṃ indriyāni sankamanti the sense-faculties pass into space); iii.224, 253, 262, 265; SN iii.207; SN iv.218 SN v.49, SN v.264; Ja i.253; Ja ii.353; Ja iii.52, Ja iii.188; Ja iv.154; Ja vi.126; Snp 944, Snp 1065; Nd i.428; Pv ii.118; Snp-a 110, Snp-a 152; Pv-a 93; Sdhp 42, Sdhp 464. -ākāsena gacchati to go through the air Pv-a 75 (āgacch˚), 103, 105, 162; ˚ena carati id. Ja ii.103; ˚e gacchati id. Pv-a 65 (cando) ■ Formula “ananto ākāso” freq.; e.g. at DN i.183; AN ii.184; iv. 40, 410 sq.; v.345.

-anta “the end of the sky”, the sky, the air (on ˚anta see anta1 4) Ja vi.89. -ānañca (or ānañca ) the infinity ef space, in cpd. ˚āyatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the “space-infinity-plane”, the sphere of unbounded space. The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4 (or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing beyond the fourth jhāna viz. (1) ākās˚, (2) viññāṇ’ānañc-āyatana (3) ākiñcaññ˚ (4) n’eva saññānâsaññ˚, (5) nirodha, (6) phala ■ DN i.34 DN i.183; DN ii.70, DN ii.112, DN ii.156; DN iii.224, DN iii.262 sq.; MN i.41, MN i.159.; iii. 27, 44; SN v.119; Pts i.36; Dhs 205, Dhs 501, Dhs 579, Dhs 1418 Ne 26, Ne 39; Vism 326, Vism 340, Vism 453; DN-a i.120 (see Nd ii.under ākāsa; Dhs 265 sq.; Dhs trsl. 71). As classed with jhāna see also Nd ii.672 (sādhu-vihārin). -kasiṇa one of the kasiṇ’āyatanas (see under kasiṇa) DN iii.268; AN i.41. -gaṅgā Name of the celestial river Ja i.95; Ja iii.344. -gamana going through the air (as a trick of elephants) Mil 201. -cārika walking through the air Ja ii.103. -cārin = ˚cārika Vv-a 6 -ṭṭha living in the sky (of devatā) Bv i.29; Mil 181 Mil 285; Kp-a 120; Snp-a 476. -tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace Snp-a 87. -dhātu the element of space DN iii.247; MN i.423; MN iii.31; AN i.176; AN iii.34; Dhs 638.

Sk. ākāśa fr. ā + kāś, lit. shining forth, i.e. the illuminated space

Ākāsa2

(nt.?) a game, playing chess ʻin the airʼ (sans voir) Vin ii.10 = DN i.6 (= aṭṭhapada-dasapadesu viya ākāse yeva kiḷanaṃ DN-a i.85).

Ākāsaka

(adj.) being in or belonging to the air or sky Ja vi.124.

ākāsa + ka

Ākāsati

to shine Ja vi.89.

fr. ākāsa1

Ākiñcañña

(nt.) state of having nothing, absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical t. t.; cp. below ˚āyatana & see Dhs trsl.74) ■ Snp 976, Snp 1070, Snp 1115 (˚sambhava, cp. Nd ii.116) Thig 341 (= akiñcanabhāva Thag-a 240; trsl. “cherish no wordly wishes whatsoëer”); Nd ii.115, see ākāsa Mil 342.

-āyatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ākāsa˚ DN i.35, DN i.184; DN ii.156; DN iii.224, DN iii.253, DN iii.262 sq.; MN i.41, MN i.165 MN ii.254, MN ii.263; MN iii.28, MN iii.44, SN iv.217; AN i.268; AN iv.40, AN iv.401; Pts i.36; Ne 26, Ne 39; Vism 333. See also jhāna & vimokkha.;

abstr. fr. akiñcana

Ākiṇṇa

1. strewn over, beset with, crowded, full of, dense, rich in (˚-) Vin iii.130 (˚loma with dense hair); SN i.204 (˚kammanta “in motley tasks engaged”) iv.37 (gāmanto ā. bhikkhūhi etc.); AN iii.104 (˚vihāro) iv.4; v.15 (an˚ C. for appakiṇṇa); Snp 408 (˚varalakkhaṇa = vipula- varalakkh˚ Snp-a 383); Pv ii.124 (nānā-dijagaṇ = āyutta Pv-a 157); Pp 31; Pv-a 32 (= parikiṇṇa) Sdhp 595 ■ Freq. in idiomatic phrase describing a flourishing city “iddha phīta bahujana ākiṇṇa-manussa” e.g. DN i.211; DN ii.147 (˚yakkha for ˚manussa; full of yakkhas i.e. under their protection); AN iii.215; cp. Mil 2 (˚jana-manussa).

2. (uncertain whether to be taken as above 1 or as equal to avakiṇṇa fr. avakirati 2) dejected base, vile, ruthless SN i.205 = Ja iii.309 = Ja iii.539 = Snp-a 383 At K. S. 261, Mrs. Rh. D. translates “ruthless” & quotes C. as implying twofold exegesis of (a) impure, and (b hard, ruthless. It is interesting to notice that Bdhgh explains the same verse differently at Snp-a 383, viz. by; vipula˚; as above under Snp 408, & takes ākiṇṇaludda as vipulaludda, i.e. beset with cruelty, very or intensely cruel, thus referring it to ākiṇṇa 1.;

pp. of ākirati

Ākirati

to strew over, scatter, sprinkle, disperse, fill, heap Snp 665; Dhp 313; Pv ii.49 (dānaṃ vipulaṃ ākiri vippakirati Pv-a 92); Mil 175, Mil 238, Mil 323 (imper. ākirāhi) Snp 383 ■ pp. ākiṇṇa.

ā + kirati

Ākiritatta

(nt.) the fact or state of being filled or heaped with Mil 173 (sakataṃ dhaññassa ā).

ākirita + tta; abstr. fr. ākirita, pp. of ākirati Caus.

Ākilāyati

v.l. at Kp-a 66 for āgilāyati.

Ākucca

(or ˚ā ?) an iguana Ja vi.538 (C. godhā; gloss amatt’ākuccā).

etym. unknown, prob. non-Aryan

Ākurati

to be hoarse Mil 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati).

onomat. to sound-root *kur = *kor as in Lat. cornix, corvus etc. See gala note 2 B and cp. kukkuṭa kokila, khaṭa etc., all words expressing a rasping noise in the throat. The attempts at etym. by Trenckner (Mil p.425 as Denom. of ākula) & Morris (;J.P.T.S. 1886 154 as contr. Denom. of ankura “intumescence”, thus meaning “to swell”) are hardly correct

Ākula

(adj.) entangled, confused upset, twisted, bewildered Ja i.123 (salākaggaṃ ˚ṃ karoti to upset or disturb); Vv 849 (andha˚); Pv-a 287 (an˚ clear). Often reduplicated as ākulākula thoroughly confused Mil 117, Mil 220; Pv-a 56; ākula-pākula Ud 5 (so read for akkula-pakkula); ākula-samākula Ja vi.270. On phrase tantākula- jātā gulā-guṇṭhika-jātā see guḷā.

ā + *kul of which Sk ■ P. kula, to Idg *qṷel to turn round, cp. also cakka & carati; lit. meaning “revolving quickly”, & so “confused”

Ākulaka

(adj.) entangled DN ii.55 (tant˚ for the usual tantākula, as given under guḷā).

fr. ākula

Ākulanīya

(adj.) in an˚; not to be confounded or upset Pv-a 118.

grd. of ā + *kulāyati, Denom. of kula

Ākulī

(-puppha) at Kp-a 60 (milāta˚) read (according to Index p. 870) as milāta-bakula-puppha. Vism 260 (id. p. however reads ākulī-puppha “tangle-flower” (?), cp. Ud 5 gāthā 7 bakkula, which is preferably to be read as pākula.

Ākoṭana1

(nt.) beating on, knocking MN i.385; Mil 63, Mil 306; Dhs-a 144.

fr. ākoṭeti

Ākoṭana2

(adj.) beating, driving, inciting, urging Ja vi.253 (f. ākoṭanī of paññā, expld. by “nivāraṇapatoda-laṭṭhi viya paññā koṭinī hoti” p. 254).

= ākoṭana1

Ākoṭita

1. beaten, touched, knocked against Ja i.303; Mil 62 (of a gong).

2. pressed beaten down (tight), flattened, in phrase ākoṭita-paccākoṭita flattened & pressed all round (of the cīvara) SN ii.281; Dhp-a i.37.

pp. of ākoṭeti

Ākoṭeti

1. to beat down, pound, stamp Ja i.264. 2. to beat, knock, thrash Vin ii.217; Ja ii.274; Pv-a 55 (aññamaññaṃ); Sdhp 159.

3. Esp. with ref. to knocking at the door, in phrases aggaḷaṃ ākoṭeti to beat on the bolt DN i.89; AN iv.359; AN v.65; DN-a i.252 (cp. aggaḷa) dvāraṃ ā. Ja v.217; Dhp-a ii.145; or simply ākoṭeti Vv 8117 (ākoṭayitvāna = appoṭetvā Vv-a 316).

4. (intrs. to knock against anything Ja i.239 ■ pp. ākoṭita (q.v.) Caus. ii. ākoṭapeti Ja iii.361.

a + koṭṭeti, Sk. kuṭṭayati; BSk. ākoṭayati e.g. Divy 117 dvāraṃ trir ā˚, Cowell “break” (?); Avs. Index p 222 s. v.

Ākhu

a mouse or rat Pgdp 10.

Vedic ākhu, fr. ā + khan, lit. the digger in, i.e. a mole; but given as rat or mouse by Halāyudha

Āgacchati

to come to or towards, approach, go back, arive etc.

I. Forms (same arrangement as under gacchati): (1 √ gacch: pres. āgacchati DN i.161; Ja ii.153; Pv iv.151fut. āgacchissati Ja iii.53; aor. āgacchi Pv ii.133; Pv-a 64 ■ (2) √ gam: aor. āgamāsi Pv-a 81, āgamā DN i.108; Ja iii.128, and pl. āgamiṃsu Ja i.118; fut. āgamissati Vv-a 3; Pv-a 122; ger. āgamma (q.v.) & āgantvā Ja i.151; Mil 14; Caus. āgameti (q.v.) ■ (3) √ : aor. āgā Snp 841; Pv i.123 (= āgacchi Pv-a 64) ■ pp. āgata (q.v.).

II. Mcanings: (1) to come to, approach, arrive DN i.108; Pv i.113; ii.133; Mil 14; to return, to come back (cp āgata) Pv-a 81, Pv-a 122 ■ (2) to come into, to result, deserve (cp. āgama2) DN i.161 (gārayhaṃ ṭhānaṃ deserve blame come to be blamed); Pv iv.151 (get to, be a profit to upakappati Pv-a 241) ■ (3) to come by, to come out to (be understood as), to refer or be referred to, to be meant or understood (cp. āgata 3 & āgama 3) Ja i.118 (tīṇi piṭakāni āgamiṃsu); Snp-a 321; Vv-a 3. See also āgamma.

ā + gacchati, gam

Āgata

(1) come, arrived Mil 18 (˚kāraṇa the reason of his coming); Vv-a 78 (˚ṭṭhāna); Pv-a 81 (kiṃ āgat’attha why have you come here) come by got attained (˚-) AN ii.110 = Pp 48 (˚visa); Mvu xiv.28 (˚phala = anāgānuphala) -āgat’āgatā (pl.) people coming & going, passers by, all comers Pv-a 39, Pv-a 78, Pv-a 129; Vv-a 190 (Ep. of sangha). -sv’āgata “wel-come”, greeted hailed; nt. welcome, hail Thig 337; Pv iv.315, opp durāgata not liked, unwelcome, AN ii.117, AN ii.143, AN ii.153; iii. 163; Thig 337 ■ (2) come down, handed down (by memory, said of texts) DN i.88; Dhp-a ii.35; Kp-a 229; Vv-a 30; āgatāgamo, one to whom the āgama, or the āgamas, have been handed down, Vin i.127, Vin i.337; Vin ii.8; Vin iv.158; AN ii.147; Mil 19, Mil 21 ■ (3) anāgata not come yet i.e. future; usually in combn. with atīta (past) & paccuppanna (present): see; atīta and anāgata.

pp. of āgacchati

Āgati

(f.) coming, coming back, return SN iii.53; Ja ii.172. Usually opp. to gati going away. Used in special sense of rebirth and re-death in the course of saṃsāra Thus in āgati gati cuti upapatti DN i.162; AN iii.54 sq. 60 sq., 74; cp. also SN ii.67; Pv ii.922 (gatiṃ āgatiṃ vā).

ā + gati

Āgada

(m.) & Āgadana (nt.) a word; talk, speech DN-a i.66 (= vacana).

ā + gad to speak

Āgantar

one who is coming or going to come AN i.63; AN ii.159; Iti 4, Iti 95 (nom. āgantā only one MS, all others āgantvā). an˚; AN i.64; AN ii.160.

N. ag. fr. āgacchati

Āgantu

(adj.)

1. occasional, incidental Ja vi.358.

2. an occasional arrival, a new comer, stranger Ja vi.529 (= āgantuka-jana C.); Thag-a 16.

Sk. āgantu

Āgantuka

(adj.-n.)

1. coming, arriving, new comer, guest stranger, esp. a newly arrived bhikkhu; a visitor (opp gamika one who goes away) Vin i.132, Vin i.167; Vin ii.170; iii. 65, 181; iv.24, AN i.10; AN iii.41, AN iii.366; Ja vi.333; Ud 25; Dhp-a ii.54, Dhp-a ii.74; Vv-a 24; Pv-a 54.

2. adventitions incidental (= āgantu1) Mil 304 (of megha & roga).; 3. accessory, superimposed, added Vism 195.

-bhatta food given to a guest, meal for a visitor Vin i.292 (opp. gamika˚); ii.16.

āgantu + ka; cp. BSk. āgantuka in same meaning as P. viz. āgantukā bhikṣavaḥ Avs i.87 Avs i.286; Divy 50

Āgama

1. coming, approach, result, DN i.53 (āgamanaṃ pavattatī ti DN-a i.160; cp. Sdhp 249 dukkh˚).

2. that which one goes by, resource, reference source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of(?) the Pātimokkha, Vin ii.95 = Vin ii.249, or of the Four Nikāyas, DN-a i.1, DN-a i.2 (dīgh˚). A def. at Vism 442 runs “antamaso opamma-vagga-mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇaṇaṃ”. See also āgata 2, for phrase āgat’āgama, handed down in the Canon, Vin loc. cit. Svāgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv iv.133 (sv˚ = suṭṭhu āgat’āgamo, Pv-a 230); Mil 215. BSk. in same use and meaning, e.g. Divy 17, Divy 333, āgamāni = the Four Nikāyas

3. rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Snp 834 (āgamā parivitakkaṃ), cp. Davs v.22 (takk˚, discipline of right thought) Sdhp 224 (āgamato, in obedience to). 4. meaning, understanding, Kp-a 107 (vaṇṇ˚).

5. repayment (of a debt) J. vi.245.

6. as gram. tt. “augment”, a consonant or syllable added or inserted Snp-a 23 (sa-kār’āgama).

fr. ā + gam

Āgamana

(nt.) oncoming, arrival, approach AN iii.172; DN-a i.160; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 81; Sdhp 224, Sdhp 356. an˚; not coming or returning Ja i.203, Ja i.264.

fr. āgacchati, Sk. same

Āgameti

to cause somebody or something to come to one, i.e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin ii.166, Vin ii.182, Vin ii.212; DN i.112, DN i.113; SN iv.291; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 55. (2) to wait for, to welcome Vin ii.128 (ppr. āgamayamāna); MN i.161 (id.) Ja i.69 (id. + kālaṃ).

caus of agacchati

Āgamma

(adv.). With reference to (c. acc.), owing to, relating to; by means of, thanks to In meaning nearly synonymous with ārabbha, sandhāya & paṭicca (see K. S. 318 s. v.) DN i.229; Iti 71; Ja i.50 Ja vi.424; Kp viii.14 (= nissāya Kp-a 229); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 21 etc.

orig. ger. of āgacchati, q.v. under i.2 for form & under; ii.3 for meaning. BSk. āgamya in meaning after the Pāli form, e.g. Divy 95, Divy 405 (with gen.); Av Ś i.85, 210 etc.; Mvu i.243, Mvu i.313

Āgāmitā

found only in neg. form anāgāmitā.

Āgāmin

(adj. n.) returning, one who returns, esp. one who returns to another form of life in saṃsāra (cp. āgati), one who is liable to rebirth AN i.63; AN ii.159; Iti 95. See anāgāmin.

ā + gāmin

Āgāra

(-˚) see agāra. Agaraka & ika;

Āgāraka & ˚ika

(adj.-n.) (-˚) belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control over the house, keeping, surveying, in cpds.; koṭṭh˚ possessor or keeper of a storehouse Vin i.209; bandhan˚ prison-keeper AN ii.207; bhaṇḍ˚; keeper of wares, treasurer Pv-a 2 (see also bhaṇḍ˚) ■ (2) being in the house, sharing (the house), companion SN iii.190 (paṃsv˚ playmate).

cp. BSk. āgārika Divy 275, & agārika

Āgāḷha

(adj.) (ā + gāḷha 1; cp. Sk. samāgāḍhaṃ] strong, hard, harsh, rough (of speech), usually in instr. as adv āgāḷhena roughly, harshly aN i.283, 295; Pp 32 (so to be read for agāḷhena, although Pp A 215 has a˚, but expls. by atigāḷhena vacanena); instr. f. āgāḷhāya Vin v 122 (ceteyya; Bdhgh. on p. 230 reads āgaḷāya and expls. by daḷhabhāvāya). See also Ne 77 (āgāḷhā paṭipadā a rough path), 95 (id.; v.l. agāḷhā).

Āgilāyati

to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin ii.200; DN iii.209; MN i.354; SN iv.184; Kp-a 66 (hadavaṃ ā.). Cp. āyamati.

ā + gilāyati; Sk. glāyati, cp. gilāna

Āgu

(nt.) guilt, offence, SN i.123; AN iii.346; Snp 522 = Nd ii.337 (in expln. of nāga as āguṃ na karotī ti nāgo); Nd i.201. Note. A reconstructed āgasa is found at Sdhp 294 in cpd. akatāgasa not having committed sin.

-cārin one who does evil, DN ii.339; MN ii.88; MN iii.163; SN ii.100, SN ii.128; AN ii.240; Mil 110.

for Vedic āgas nt.

Āghāta

anger, ill-will hatred, malice DN i.3, DN i.31; DN iii.72 sq.; SN i.179; Ja i.113; Dhs 1060, Dhs 1231; Vb 167, Vb 362, Vb 389; Mil 136; Vism 306; DN-a i.52; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 178. -anāghāta freedom from ill will Vin ii.249; AN v.80.

-paṭivinaya repression of ill-will; the usual enumn. of ā-˚ paṭivinayā comprises nine, for which see D iii.262 289; Vin v.137; AN iv.408; besides this there are sets of five at AN iii.185 sq.; Snp-a 10, Snp-a 11, and one of ten at Vin v.138. -vatthu occasion of ill-will; closely connected with ˚paṭivinaya & like that enum;d. in sets of nine (Vin v.137; AN iv.408; Pts i.130; Ja iii.291, Ja iii.404; Ja v.149; Vb 389; Ne 23; Snp-a 12), and of ten (Vin v.138; AN v.150; Pts i.130; Vb 391).

Sk. āghāta only in lit. meaning of striking, killing, but cp. BSk. āghāta in meaning “hurtfulness” at Mvu i.79; Avs ii.129; cp. ghāta & ghāteti

Āghātana

(nt.)

1. slaying, striking, destroying, killing Thag 418, Thag 711; death DN i.31 (= maraṇa DN-a i.119). 2. shambles, slaughter-house Vin i.182 (gav˚); AN iv.138; Ja vi.113.

3. place of execution Vin iii.151; Ja i.326 Ja i.439; Ja iii.59; Mil 110; Dhp-a iv.52; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 5.

ā + ghāta(na), cp. āghata which has changed its meaning

Āghāteti

only in phrase cittaṃ a. (with loc.) to incite one’s heart to hatred against, to obdurate one’s heart. Sdhp. 126 = SN i.151 = AN v.172.

Denom. fr. āghāta, in form = ā + ghāteti, but diff. in meaning

Ācamati

to take in water, to resorb, to rinse Ja iii.297; Mil 152, Mil 262 (+ dhamati) ■ Caus. I. ācamcti (a) to purge, rinse one’s mouth Vin ii.142; MN ii.112; AN iii.337; Pv iv.153 (ācamayitvā = mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā Pv-a 241); Mil 152 (˚ayamāna) ■ (b) to wash off, clean oneself after evacuation Vin ii.221 ■ Caus II. ācamāpeti to cause somebody to rinse himself Ja vi.8.

ā + cam

Ācamana

(nt.) rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth DN i.12 (= udakena mukhasiddhi-karaṇa DN-a i.98); (b) after evacuation Ja iii.486.

-kumbhī water-pitcher used for rinsing Vin i.49, Vin i.52 Vin ii.142, Vin ii.210, Vin ii.222. -pādukā slippers worn when rinsing Vin i.190; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.222. -sarāvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin ii.142, Vin ii.221.

ā + camana of cam

Ācamā

(f.) absorption, resorption Nd i.429 (on Snp 945, which both in T. and in Snp-a reads ājava expld. by taṇhā in Nidd.). Note. Index to Snp-a (Pj iii.has ācāma.

fr. ā + cam

Ācaya

heaping up, accumulation, collection, mass (opp. apacaya ). See on term Dhs trsl. 195 & Cpd. 251, 252 ■ SN ii.94 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); AN iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. apacaya); Dhs 642, Dhs 685; Vb 319, Vb 326, Vb 330; Vism 449; Dhp-a ii.25.

-gāmin making for piling up (of rebirth) AN v.243 AN v.276; Dhs 584, Dhs 1013, Dhs 1397; Kv 357.

ā + caya

Ācarati

1. to practice, perform, indulge in Vin i.56; Vin ii.118; Snp 327 (ācare dhamma-sandosa-vādaṃ) 401; Mil 171, Mil 257 (pāpaṃ). Cp. pp. ācarita in BSk e.g. Av. SN i.124, SN i.153, SN i.213 in same meaning ■ pp āciṇṇa.

2. to step upon, pass through Ja v.153.

ā + aarati

Ācarin

(adj.-n.) treaching, f. ācarinī a female teacher Vin iv.227 (in contrast to gaṇa & in same sense as ācariya m. at Vin iv.130), 317 (id.).

fr. ā + car

Ācariya

a teacher (almost syn. with upajjhāya ) Vin i.60, Vin i.61, Vin i.119 (˚upajjhāya); ii.231; iv.130 (gaṇo vā ācariyo a meeting of the bhikkhus or a single teacher cp. f. ācarinī); DN i.103, DN i.116 (gaṇ˚) 238 (sattamâcariyamahāyuga seventh age of great teachers); iii.189 sq.; MN iii.115; SN i.68 (gaṇ˚), 177; iv.176 (yogg˚); AN i.132 (pubb˚); Snp 595; Nd i.350 (upajjhāya vā āc˚); Ja ii.100 Ja ii.411; Ja iv.91; Ja v.501; Pv iv.323, 351 (= ācāra-samācāra-sikkhāpaka Pv-a 252); Mil 201, Mil 262 (master goldsmith?) Vism 99 sq.; Kp-a 12, Kp-a 155; Snp-a 422; Vv-a 138. For contracted form of ācariya see ācera.

-kula the clan of the teacher AN ii.112. -dhana a teacher’s fee SN i.177; AN v.347. -pācariya teacher upon teacher, lit. “teacher & teacher’s teacher” (see ā1 3b DN i.94, DN i.114, DN i.115, DN i.238; SN iv.306, SN iv.308; DN-a i.286; Snp-a 452 (= ācariyo c’eva ācariya-ācariyo ca). -bhariyā the teacher’s fee Ja v.457; Ja vi.178; Dhp-a i.253. -muṭṭhi “the teacher’s fist” i.e. close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back, DN ii.100; SN v.153; Ja ii.221, Ja ii.250; Mil 144; Snp-a 180, Snp-a 368. -vaṃsa the line of the teachers Mil 148 -vatta serving the teacher, service to the t. Dhp-a i.92 -vāda traditional teaching; later as heterodox teaching sectarian teaching (opp. theravāda orthodox doctrine) Mil 148; Dpvs v.30; Mhbv 96.

fr. ā + car

Ācariyaka

a teacher Vin i.249; Vin iii.25, Vin iii.41; DN i.88 DN i.119, DN i.187; DN ii.112; MN i.514; MN ii.32; SN v.261; AN ii.170; iv. 310. See also sācariyaka.

ācariya + ka, diff. from Sk. ācariyaka nt. art of teaching

Ācāma

the scum or foam of boiling rice DN i.166; MN i.78; AN i.295; Ja ii.289; Pp 55; Vv-a 99 sq. Dhp-a iii.325 (˚kuṇḍaka).

Sk. ācāma

Ācāmeti

at MN ii.112 in imper. ācāmehi be pleased or be thanked(?) perhaps the reading is incorrect.

for ācameti? cp. Sk. ācāmayati, Caus. of ā + cam

Ācāra

way of behaving, conduct, practice, esp. right conduct, good manners; adj. (-˚) practising, indulging in, or of such & such a conduct ■ Snp 280 (pāpa˚); Ja i.106 (vipassana˚); ii.280 (˚ariya); vi.52 (ariya˚) Snp-a 157; Pv-a 12 (sīla˚), 36, 67, 252; Sdhp 441. -an˚ bad behaviour Vin ii.118 (˚ṃ ācarati indulge in bad habits) Dhp-a ii.201 (˚kiriyā). Cp. sam˚.

-kusala versed in good manners Dhp 376 (cp. Dhp-a iv.111). -gocara pasturing in good conduct; i.e. practice of right behaviour DN i.63 = Iti 118; MN i.33; SN v.187; AN i.63 sq.; AN ii.14, AN ii.39; AN iii.113, AN iii.155, AN iii.262; AN iv.140, AN iv.172 AN iv.352; AN v.71 sq., 89, 133, 198; Vb 244, Vb 246 (cp. Mil 368, Mil 370, quot. Vin iii.185); Vism i.8. -vipatti failure of morality, a slip in good conduct Vin i.171.

ā + car

Ācārin

(adj. n.) of good conduct, one who behaves well AN i.211 (anācārī viratā l. 4 fr. bottom is better read as ācārī virato, in accordance with v.l.).

fr. ācāra

Ācikkhaka

(adj. n.) one who tells or shows Dhp-a i.71.

ā + cikkha + ka of cikkhati

Ācikkhati

to tell, relate, show, describe, explain DN i.110; AN ii.189 (atthaṃ ā to interpret); Pp 59; Dhp-a i.14; Snp-a 155; Pv-a 121, Pv-a 164 (describe) ■ imper. pres. ācikkha Snp 1097 (= brūhi Nd ii.119 & 455); Pv i.109; ii.81; and ācikkhāhi Dhp-a ii.27. aor. ācikkhi Pv-a 6, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 83 ■ ācikkhati often occurs in stock phrase ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati etc., e.g. Nd i.271; Nd ii.465; Vism 163 ■ attānaṃ ā. to disclose one’s identity Pv-a 89, Pv-a 100 ■ pp. ācikkhita (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. ācikkhāpeti to cause some body to tell Dhp-a ii.27.

Freq. of ā + khyā, i.e. akkhāti

Ācikkhana

(adj.-n..) telling, announcing Ja iii.444; Pv-a 121.

ā + cikkhana of cikkhati

Ācikkhita

shown, described, told Pv-a 154 (˚magga), 203 (an˚ = anakkhāta).

pp. of acikkhati

Ācikkhitar

one who tells or shows Dhp-a ii.107 (for pavattar).

n. ag. fr. ācikkhati

Āciṇa

accumulated; practised, performed Dhp 121 (pāpaṃ = pāpaṃ āciṇanto karonto Dhp-a iii.16). It may also be spelt ācina.

pp. of ācināti? or is it distorted from āciṇṇa?

Āciṇṇa

practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in MN i.372 (kamma, cp. Mil 226 and the expln. of āciṇṇaka kamma as “chronic karma at Cpd. 144); SN iv.419; AN v.74 sq.; Ja i.81; DN-a i.91 (for aviciṇṇa at DN i.8), 275; Vism 269; Dhp-a i.37 (˚samāciṇṇa thoroughly fulfilled); Vv-a 108; Pv-a 54; Sdhp 90.

-kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary practice (?) Vin i.79; Vin ii.301; Dpvs iv.47; cp. v.18.

ā + ciṇṇa, pp. of ācarati

Ācita

accumulated, collected, covered, furnished or endowed with Ja vi.250 (= nicita); Vv 411 Dhs-a 310. See also āciṇa.

pp. of ācināti

Ācināti

to heap up, accumulate SN iii.89 (v.l. ācinati); iv.73 (ppr. ācinato dukkhaṃ); Dhs-a 44 ■ pp ācita & āciṇa; (ācina) ■ Pass. ācīyati (q.v.).

ā + cināti

Ācīyati

(& Āceyyati) to be heaped up, to increase, to grow; ppr. āceyyamāna Ja v.6 (= ācīyanto vaḍḍhanto C.).

Pass. of ācināti, cp. cīyati

Ācera

is the contracted form of ācariya; only found in the Jātakas, e.g. Ja iv.248; Ja vi.563.

Ācela

in kañcanācela-bhūsita “adorned with golden clothes” Pv ii.127 stands for cela˚.

Ājañña

is the contracted form of ājāniya.

Ājava

see ācamā.

Ājāna

(adj.) understandable, only in cpd. durājāna hard to understand SN iv.127; Snp 762; Ja i.295 Ja i.300.

ā + jāna from jñā

Ājānana

(nt.) learning, knowing, understanding; knowledge Ja i.181 (˚sabhāva of the character of knowing, fit to learn); Pv-a 225.

ā + jānana, cp. Sk. ajñāna

Ājānāti

to understand, to know, to learn DN i.189; Snp 1064 (˚amāna = vijānamāna Nd ii.120). As aññāti at Vism 200 ■ pp. aññāta. Cp. also āṇāpeti. Ajaniya (ajaniya)

ā + jānāti

Ājāniya (ājānīya)

(adj. n.) of good race or breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse (cp. assājāniya under assa3). (a) ājāniya (the more common & younger Pāli form): Snp 462, Snp 528, Snp 532; Ja i.178, Ja i.194; Dpvs iv.26; Dhp-a i.402; Dhp-a iii.49; Dhp-a iv.4; Vv-a 78; Pv-a 216 ■ (b) ājānīya: MN i.445; AN v.323; Dhp 322 = Nd ii.475 ■ (c ājañña = (mostly in poetry): Snp 300 = Snp 304; Ja i.181; Pv iv.154; purisājañña “a steed of man”, i.e. a man of noble race) SN iii.91 = Thag 1084 = Snp 544 = Vv-a 9; AN v.325. -anājāniya of inferior birth MN i.367.

-susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal MN i.445 (˚ûpamo dhamma-pariyāyo).

cp. BSk. ājāneya & Sk. ājāti birth, good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from ā + ; jan (to be born, i.e. well-born) it is by Bdhgh. connected with ā + jñā (to learn, i.e. to be trained). See for these popular etym. e.g. Ja i.181: sārathissa cittarucitaṃ kāraṇaṃ ājānana-sabhāvo ājañño, and Dhp-a iv.4: yaṃ assadamma-sārathi kāraṇaṃ kāreti tassa khippaṃ jānana samatthā ājāniyā ■ The contracted form of the word is ājañña

Ājānīyatā

(f.) good breed Pv-a 214.

abstr. fr. ājāniya

Ājira

a courtyard Mvu 35, Mvu 3.

= ajira with lengthened initial a

Ājīva

livelihood, mode of living, living, subsistence, DN i.54; AN iii.124 (parisuddha˚); Snp 407 (˚ṃ = parisodhayi = micchājīvaṃ hitvā sammājīvaṃ eva pavattayī Snp-a 382), 617; Pp 51; Vb 107, Vb 235; Mil 229 (bhinna˚); Vism 306 (id.); Dhs-a 390; Sdhp 342, Sdhp 375 Sdhp 392. Esp. freq. in the contrast pair sammā -ājīva; micchā-ā˚; right mode & wrong mode of gaining a living e.g. at SN ii.168 sq.; SN iii.239; SN v.9; AN i.271; AN ii.53, AN ii.240, AN ii.270 AN iv.82; Vb 105, Vb 246. See also magga (ariyaṭṭhangika).

-pārisuddhi purity or propriety of livelihood Mil 336 Vism 22 sq., 44; Dhp-a iv.111. -vipatti failure in method of gaining a living AN i.270. -sampadā perfection of (right livelihood AN i.271; DN-a i.235.

ā + jīva; Sk. ājīva

Ājīvaka

(& ˚ika) an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non-buddhist ascetics. On their austerities, practice & way of living see esp. Dhp-a ii.55 sq. and on the whole question A. L Basham, Hist. & Doctrines of the Ājīvikas,; 1951-(a) ājīvaka: Vin i.291; Vin ii.284; Vin iv.74, Vin iv.91; MN i.31, MN i.483; SN i.217; AN iii.276, AN iii.384; Ja i.81, Ja i.257, Ja i.390 ■ (b) ājīvika Vin i.8; Snp 381 (v.l. BB. ˚aka).

-sāvaka a hearer or lay disciple of the ājīvaka ascetics Vin ii.130, Vin ii.165; AN i.217.

ājīva + ka, orig. “one finding his living” (scil. in a peculiar way); cp. BSk. ājīvika Divy 393 Divy 427

Ājīvika

(nt.) (or ājīvikā f.?) sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vb 379 (˚bhaya) Mil 196 (id.); Pv-a 274, and in phrase ājīvik’âpakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living MN i.463 = SN iii.93 (T. reads jīvikā pakatā) = Iti 89 (reads ājīvikā pakatā) = Mil 279.

fr. ājīva

Ājīvin

(adj.-n.) having one’s livelihood, finding one’s subsistence, living, leading a life of (-˚) DN iii.64; AN v.190 (lūkha˚)

fr. ājīva

Āṭa

a kind of bird Ja vi.539 (= dabbimukha C.).

etym.? Cp. Sk. āṭi Turdus Ginginianus, see Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 148

Āṭaviya

is to be read for aṭaviyo (q.v.) at Ja vi.55.

= Sk. āṭavika

Āṭhapanā

(f.) at Pp 18 & v.l. at Vb 357 is to be read; aṭṭhapanā (so T. at Vb 357).

Āṇañja

see ānejja.

Āṇaṇya

see ānaṇya.

Āṇatti

(f.) order, command, ordinance, injunction Vin i.62; Kp-a 29; Pv-a 260; Sdhp 59, Sdhp 354.

ā + ñatti (cp. āṇāpeti), Caus. of jñā

Āṇattika

(adj.) belonging to an ordinance or command, of the nature of an injunction Kp-a 29.

āṇatti + ka

Āṇā

(f.) order, command, authority Mil 253; DN-a i.289; Kp-a 179, Kp-a 180, Kp-a 194; Pv-a 217 Sdhp 347, Sdhp 576. rāj’āṇā the king’s command or authority Ja i.433; Ja iii.351; Pv-a 242. āṇaṃ deti to give an order Ja i.398; ˚ṃ pavatteti to issue an order Mil 189, cp āṇāpavatti Ja iii.504; Ja iv.145.

Sk. ājñā, ā + jñā

Āṇāpaka

(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) giving an order Vism 303.

2. (n.) one who gives or calls out orders a town-crier, an announcer of the orders (of an authority Mil 147.

fr. āṇāpeti

Āṇāpana

(nt.) ordering or being, ordered, command, order Pv-a 135.

abstr. fr. āṇāpeti

Āṇāpeti

to give an order, to enjoin, command (with acc. of person) Ja iii.351; Mil 147; Dhp-a ii.82; Vv-a 68 (dāsiyo), 69; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 81.

ā + ñāpeti, Caus. of ā + jānāti fr. jñā, cp. Sk. ājñāpayati

Āṇi

.

1. the pin of a wheel-axle, a linch-pin MN i.119; SN ii.266, SN ii.267; AN ii.32; Snp 654; Ja vi.253, Ja vi.432; Snp-a 243; Kp-a 45, Kp-a 50.

2. a peg, pin, bolt, stop (at a door) MN i.119; SN ii.266 (drum stick); Ja iv.30; Ja vi.432, Ja vi.460; Thag 744; Dhp i.39. 3. (fig.) (˚-) peg-like (or secured by a peg, of a door) small, little in ˚colaka a small (piece of) rag Vin ii.271 cp. i.205 (vaṇabandhana-colaka); ˚dvāra Thag 355; C khuddaka-dvāra, quoted at Brethren 200, trsl. by Mrs Rh. D. as “the towngate’s sallyport” by Neumann as “Gestöck” (fastening, enclosure) āṇi-gaṇṭhik’āhato ayopatto at Vism 108; DN-a i.199 is apparently a sort of brush made of four or five small pieces of flexible wood.

Vedic āṇi to aṇu fine, thin, flexible, in formation an n-enlargement of Idg. *olenā, cp. Ohg. lun, Ger. lünse Ags. lynes = E. linch, further related to Lat. ulna elbow Gr. ὠλένη, Ohg. elina, Ags. eln = E. el-bow. See Walde Lāt. Wtb. under ulna & lacertus

Ātaṅka

illness, sickness, disease MN i.437; SN iii.1; Snp 966 (˚phassa, cp. Nd i.486) Freq. in cpd. appātaṅka freedom from illness, health (cp. appābādha) DN i.204; DN iii.166; AN iii.65, AN iii.103; Mil 14 ■ f. abstr. appātaṅkatā MN i.124.

etym. uncertain; Sk. ātanka

Ātaṅkin

(adj.) sick, ill Ja v.84 (= gilāna C.).

fr. ātanka

Ātata

generic name for drums covered with leather on one side Dpvs xiv.14; Vv-a 37 (q.v. for enumn. of musical instruments), 96.

fr. ā + tan, pp. tata; lit. stretched, covered over

Ātatta

heated, burnt. scorched, dry Ja v.69 (˚rūpa = sukkha-sarīra C.).

ā + tatta1, pp. of ā-tapati

Ātapa

1. sun-heat Snp 52; Ja i.336; Dhs 617; Dpvs i.57; Vv-a 54; Pv-a 58.

2. glow, heat (in general Pv i.74; Sdhp 396.

3. (fig.) (cp. tapa2) ardour, zeal exertion Pv-a 98 (viriyā-tapa; perhaps better to be read ˚ātāpa q.v.). Cp. ātappa.

-vāraṇa “warding off the sun-heat”, i.e. a parasol sun-shade Dāvs i.28; Dāvs v.35.

ā + tapa

Ātapatā

(f.) glowing or burning state, heat Sdhp 122.

abstr. of ātapa

Ātapati

to burn Ja iii.447.

ā + tap

Ātappa

(nt.) ardour, zeal, exertion DN i.13; DN iii.30 sq., 104 sq., 238 sq.; MN iii.210; SN ii.132 SN ii.196 sq.; AN i.153; AN iii.249; AN iv.460 sq.; AN v.17 sq.; Snp 1062 (= ussāha ussoḷhi thāma etc. Nd ii.122); Ja iii.447; Nd i.378; Vb 194 (= vāyāma); DN-a i.104.

Sk. *ātāpya, fr. ātāpa

Ātāpa

glow, heat; fig. ardour, keen endeavour, or perhaps better “torturing mortification” Mil 313 (cittassa ātāpo paritāpo); Pv-a 98 (viriya˚) Cp. ātappa & ātāpana;.

ā + tāpa fr. tap; cp. tāpeti

Ātāpana

(nt.) tormenting, torture, mortification MN i.78; AN i.296 (˚paritāpana); ii.207 (id.); Pp 55 (id.); Vism 3 (id.).

ā + tāpana

Ātāpin

(adj.) ardént, zealous, strenuous, active DN iii.58, DN iii.76 sq., 141 (+ sampajāna), 221, 276; MN i.22 MN i.56, MN i.116, MN i.207, MN i.349; MN ii.11; MN iii.89, MN iii.128, MN iii.156; S 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; ii.21, 136 sq.; iii.73 sq.; iv.37, 48, 54 218; v.165, 187, 213; AN ii.13 sq.; AN iii.38, AN iii.100 sq.; iv. 29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; v.343 sq.; Snp 926 Nd i.378; Iti 41, Iti 42; Vb 193 sq.; Mil 34, Mil 366; Vism 3 (= viriyavā); Dhp-a i.120; Snp-a 157, Snp-a 503 ■ Freq. in the formula of Arahantship “eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto”: see arahant II. B. See also satipaṭṭhāna. Opp. anātāpin SN ii.195 sq.; AN ii.13; Iti 27 (+ anottappin).

fr. ātāpa, cp. BSk. ātāpin Avs i.233; ii. 194 = Divy 37; Divy 618

Ātāpeti

to burn, scorch; fig. to torment, inflict pain, torture MN i.341 (+ paritāpeti); SN iv.337; Mil 314, Mil 315.

ā + tāpeti

Ātitheyya

(nt.) great theft (?) AN i.93; iv. 63 sq. (v.l. ati˚ which is perhaps to be prcferred).

fr. ati + theyya

Ātu

father MN i.449 (cp. Trenckner’s note on p. 567: the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of patois).

dialectical

Ātuman

self. nom. sg. ātumo Pv iv.52 (= sabhāvo Pv-a 259), ātumā Nd i.69 (ātumā vuccati attā), 296 (id.) & ātumāno Nd i.351; acc. ātumānaṃ Snp 782 (= attānaṃ Snp-a 521), 888, 918; loc. ātume Pv ii.1311 (= attani C.).

Vedic ātman, diaeretic form for the usual contracted attan; only found in poetry. Cp. also the shortened form tuman

Ātura

(adj.) ill, sick, diseased; miserable, affected SN iii.1 (˚kāya); AN i.250; Snp 331; Vv 8314 (˚rūpa = abhitunna-kāya Vv-a 328); Ja i.197 (˚anna “food of the miserable”, i.e. last meal of one going to be killed; C. expls. as maraṇabhojana), 211 (˚citta); ii.420 (˚anna, as above); iii.201 v.90, 433; vi.248; Mil 139, Mil 168; Dhp-a i.31 (˚rūpa) Pv-a 160, Pv-a 161; Vv-a 77; Sdhp 507. Used by Commentators as syName of aṭṭo, e.g. at Ja iv.293; Snp-a 489. -anātura healthy, well, in good condition SN iii.1; Dhp 198.

Sk. ātura, cp. BSk. ātura, e.g. Jtm 3170

Āthabbaṇa

(nt.) the Atharva Veda as a code of magic working formulas, witchcraft, sorcery Snp 927 (v.l. ath˚, see interpreted at Nd i.381; expld. as āthabbaṇika-manta-ppayoga at Snp-a 564).

= athabbaṇa, q.v.

Āthabbaṇika

(adj. n.) one conversant with magic, wonder-worker, medicine-man Nd i.381; Snp-a 564.

fr. athabbana

Ādapeti

to cause one to take, to accept, agree to MN ii.104; SN i.132.

Caus. of ādāti

Ādara

consideration of, esteem, regard, respect reverence, honour Ja v.493; Snp-a 290; DN-a i.30; Dhs-a 61; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 61, Vv-a 101, Vv-a 321; Pv-a 121, Pv-a 123, Pv-a 135, Pv-a 278 Sdhp 2, Sdhp 21, Sdhp 207, Sdhp 560. -anādara lack of reverence, disregard disrespect; (adj.) disrespectful SN i.96; Vin iv.218; Snp 247 (= ādara-virahita Snp-a 290; DN-a i.284; Vv-a 219; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 5, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 257.

Sk. ādara, prob. ā + dara, cp. semantically Ger. ehrfurcht awe

Ādaratā

(f.) = ādara, in neg. an˚; want of consideration Ja iv.229; Dhs 1325 = Vb 359 (in expln. of dovacassatā).

abstr. fr. ādara

Ādariya

(nt.) showing respect of honour; neg. an˚; disregard, disrespect Vin ii.220; AN v.146, AN v.148 Pp 20; Vb 371; miln 266.

abstr. fr. ādara

Ādava

is gloss at Vv-a 216 for maddava Vv 5123; meaning: excitement, adj. exciting. The passage in Vv-a is somewhat corrupt, & therefore unclear.;

ā + dava2?

Ādahati1

to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism 289 (samaṃ ā. = samādahati). Cp. sam˚ and ādhiyati.

ā + dahati1

Ādahati2

to set fire to, to burn Ja vi.201, Ja vi.203.

ā + dahati2

Ādā

taking up, taking to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā C.; cp. the usual form ādāya). Adati (Adadati)

ger. of ādāti from reduced base *da of dadāti 1b

Ādāti (Ādadāti)

to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; grd. ādātabba Vin i.50; inf. ādātuṃ DN iii.133 (adinnaṃ theyyasankhātaṃ ā.). ger. ādā & ādāya; (see sep.); grd. ādeyya, Caus. ādapeti (q.v.) ■ See also ādiyati & ādeti;.

ā + dadāti of dadāti base 1 dā

Ādāna

(nt.) taking up, getting, grasping, seizing; fig. appropriating clinging to the world, seizing on (worldly objects). (1) (lit.) taking (food), pasturing MN iii.133; Ja v.371 (& ˚esana) ■ (2) getting, acquiring, taking, seizing SN ii.94; AN iv.400 (daṇḍ˚); Pv-a 27 (phal˚); esp. freq in adinn˚; seizing what is not given, i.e. theft: see under adinna ■ (3) (fig.) attachment, clinging AN v.233, AN v.253 (˚paṭinissagga); Dhp 89 (id.; cp. Dhp-a ii.163); Snp 1103 (˚taṇhā), 1104 (˚satta); Nd i.98 (˚gantha); Nd ii.123, Nd ii.124 -an˚; free from attachment SN i.236 (sādānesu anādāno “not laying hold mong them that grip” trsl.); AN ii.10; Iti 109; Ja iv.354; Mil 342; Dhp-a iv.70 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇo). Cp. upa˚, pari˚.

ād + āna, or directly from ā + , base 1 of dadāti

Ādāya

having received or taken taking up, seizing on, receiving; freq. used in the sense of a prep. “with” (c. acc.) Snp 120, Snp 247, Snp 452; Ja v.13 Vb 245; Dhp-a ii.74; Snp-a 139; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 61 etc ■ At Vin i.70 the form ādāya is used as a noun f ādāyā in meaning of “a casually taken up belief” (tassa ādāyassa vaṇṇe bhaṇati). Cp. upa˚, pari˚.

ger. of ādāti, either from base 1 of dadāti (dā) or base 2 (dāy). See also ādiya

Ādāyīn

(adj.-n.) taking up, grasping, receiving; one who takes, seīzes or appropriates DN i.4 (dinn˚); AN iii.80; AN v.137 (sār˚); DN-a i.72.

fr. ā + dadāti base 2, cp. ādāya

Ādāsa

a mirror Vin ii.107; DN i.7, DN i.11 (˚pañha mirror-questioning, cp DN-a i.97: “ādāse devataṃ otaretvā pañha-pucchanaṃ”), 80 ii.93 (dhamna’-ādāsaṃ nāma dhamma-pariyāyaṃ desessāmi) SN v.357 (id.); AN v.92, AN v.97 sq., 103; Ja i.504; Dhs 617 (˚maṇḍala); Vism 591 (in simile); Kp-a 50 (˚daṇḍa) 237; Dhp-a i.226.

-tala the surface of the mirror, in similes at Vism 450 Vism 456, Vism 489.

Sk. ādarśa, ā + dṛś, P. dass, of dassati1 2

Ādāsaka

= ādāsa Thig 411.

Ādi

1. (m.) starting-point, beginning Snp 358 (acc. ādiṃ = kāraṇaṃ Snp-a 351); Dhp 375 (nom. ādi); Mil 10 (ādimhi); Ja vi.567 (abl. ādito from the beginning). For use as nt. see below 2 b.

2. (adj & adv.) (a) (˚-) beginning, initially, first, principal chief: see cpds ■ (b) (˚-) beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed to be familiar in its constituents to the reader or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i.e. and so on, so forth (cp. adhika); e.g. rukkha-gumb-ādayo (acc. pl. trees, jungle etc. Ja i.150; amba-panas’ ādīhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar kinds of fruit) Ja i.278; amba-labuj’ādīnaṃ phalānaṃ anto Ja ii.159; asi-satti-dhami-ādīni āvudhāni (weapous, such as sword, knife, bow & the like) Ja i.150 kasi-gorakkh’ ādīni karonte manusse Ja ii.128;… ti ādinā nayena in this and similar ways Ja i.81; Pv-a 30. Absolute as nt. pl. ādinī with ti (evaṃ) (ādīni), closing a quotation, meaning “this and such like”, e.g. at Ja ii.128 Ja ii.416 (ti ādīni viravitvā) ■ In phrase ādiṃ katvā meaning “putting (him, her, it) first”, i.e. heginning with, from… on, from… down (c. acc.) e.g. Dhp-a i.393 (rājānaṃ ādiṃ K. from the king down); Pv-a 20 (vihāraṃ ādikatvā), 21 (pañcavaggiye ādiṃ K.).

-kammika [cp. BSk. ādikarmaka Divy 544] a beginner Vin iii.146; Vin iv.100; Mil 59; Vism 241; Dhs-a 187. -kalyāṇa in phrase ādikalyāṇa majjhe-kalyāṇa pariyosāna-kalyāṇa of the Dhamma, “beautiful in the beginning, the middle the end” see references under dhamma C. 3 and cp. DN-a i.175 (= ādimhi kalyāṇa etc.); Snp-a 444; abstr. ˚kalyāṇatā Vism 4. -pubbaṅgama original Dpvs iv.26. -brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life DN i.189; DN iii.284; MN i.431; MN ii.125, MN ii.211; iii. 192; SN ii.75, SN ii.223; SN iv.91; SN v.417, SN v.438; f. ˚ikā Vin i.64 Vin i.68; AN i.231 sq. -majjhapariyosāna beginning, middle & end Mil 10; cp. above ādikalyāṇa.

Sk. ādi, etym. uncertain

Ādika

(adj.) from the beginning, initial (see adhika); instr. ādikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time MN i.395, MN i.479; MN ii.213; SN ii.224; Ja vi.567. Cp. ādiya3.

ādi + ka

Ādicca

the sun SN i.15, SN i.47; SN ii.284; SN iii.156; SN v.44, SN v.101; AN i.242; AN v.22, AN v.263, AN v.266 sq.; Iti 85; Snp 550 Snp 569, Snp 1097 (“ādicco vuccati suriyo” Nd ii.125); Dhp-a iv.143; Sdhp 14, Sdhp 17, Sdhp 40.

-upaṭṭhānā sun-worship DN i.11 (= jīvikatthāya ādiccaparicariyā DN-a i.97); Ja ii.72 (˚jātaka; ādiccaṃ upatiṭṭhati p. 73 = suriyaṃ namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.). -patha the path of the sun, i.e. the sky, the heavens Dhp 175 (ākāsa Dhp-a iii.177). -bandhu “kinsman of the sun”, Ep of the Buddha Vin ii.296; SN i.186, SN i.192; AN ii.54; Snp 54 Snp 915, Snp 1128; Nd i.341; Nd ii.125b; Vv 425, 7810; Vv-a 116.

Vedic āditya

Ādiṇṇa

broken, split open SN iv.193 (= sipātikā with burst pod); cp MN i.306.

Sk. ādīrṇa, pp. of ā + dṛ; see ādiyati2

Ādiṇṇata

(nt.) state of being broken or split Pts i.49.

abstr. fr. ādiṇṇa

Āditta

set on fire, blazing, burning Vin i.34; Kv 209 (sabbaṃ ādittaṃ); SN iii.71; SN iv.19, SN iv.108; AN iv.320 (˚cela); Snp 591; Ja iv.391; Pv i.85 (= paditta jalita Pv-a 41); Kv 209; DN-a i.264; Pv-a 149; Sdhp 599.

-pariyāya the discourse or sermon on the fire (lit. being in fllames) SN iv.168 sq.; Vin i.34; Dhp-a i.88.

ā + ditta1, Sk. ādīpta, pp. of ā + dīp

Ādina

only at DN i.115 (T. reading ādīna, but v.l. S id. ādina, B p. abhinna) in phrase ādina-khattiya-kula primordial See note in Dial. i.148.

Ādiya1

(adj.) grd. of admi, ad, Sk. ādya] edible, eatable AN iii.45 (bhojanāni).

Ādiya2

in ˚mukha is uncertain reading at AN iii.164 sq. (vv.ll. ādeyya˚ & ādheyya), meaning perhaps “graspmouth”, i.e. gossip; thus equal to ger. of ādiyati1. Perhaps to be taken to ādiyati2. The same phrase occurs at Pp 65 (T. ādheyya˚, C. has v.l. ādheyya˚) where Pp A 248 explns. “ādito dheyyamukho, paṭhama-vacanasmiṃ yeva ṭhapita-mukho ti attho” (sticking to one’s word?) See ādheyya.

Ādiya3

= ādika, instr. ādiyena in the beginning Ja vi.567 (= ādikena C.).

Ādiya4

ger. of ādiyati.

Ādiyati1

to take up; take to oneself seize on, grasp, appropriate, fig. take notice of, take to heart, heed ■ pres. ādiyati A iij.46; Snp 119, Snp 156, Snp 633 Snp 785, Nd i.67; Nd ii.123, Nd ii.124; Ja iii.296: v.367 ■ pot ādiye Snp 400; imper. ādiya MN iii.133 (so read for ādissa?) ■ aor. ādiyi DN iii.65; AN iii.209, ādiyāsi Pv iv.148 (sayaṃ daṇḍaṃ ā. = acchinditvā gaṇhasi Pv-a 241) & ādapayi (Caus. formation fr. ādāti?) to take heed SN i.132 (v.l. ādiyi, trsl. “put this into thy mind”) ■ ger ādiyitvā Vin iv.120 (= ādā); Ja ii.224 (C. for ādiya T.) iii.104; iv.352 (an˚ not heeding; v.l. anāditvā, cp. anādiyanto not attending Ja iii.196); Dhp-a iii.32 (id.); Pv-a 13 (T. anādayitva not heeding), 212 (vacanaṃ anādiyitvā not paying attention to his word), ādiya SN iii.26 (v.l. an˚ for anādīya); Ja ii.223 (= ādiyitvā C.); see also ādiya2, & ādīya SN iii.26 (an˚). See also upādiyati & pariyādiyati;

ā + diyati, med. pass. base of dadāti4, viz. di˚ & dī˚; see also ādāti & ādeti

Ādiyati2

to split, go asunder, break Pts i.49. pp. ādiṇṇa. See also avadīyati. Cp. also upādiṇṇa.

ā + diyati, Sk. ādīryate, Pass. of dṛ; to split: see etym. under darī

Ādiyanatā

(f.) in an˚; the fact of not taking up or heeding Snp-a 516.

abstr. formation ādiyana (fr. ādiya ger. of ādiyati) + ta

Ādisati

(a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to ■ (b) to dedicate (a gift, dakkhiṇaṃ or dānaṃ). pres. ind. ādisati DN i.213 = AN i.170 (tell or read one’s character); Snp 1112 (atītaṃ); Nd i.382 (nakkhattaṃ set the horoscope); Mil 294 (dānaṃ); pot. ādiseyya Thig 307 (dakkhiṇaṃ); Pv iv.130 (id. = uddiseyya Pv-a 228) & ādise Vin i.229 = DN ii.88 (dakkhiṇaṃ); imper. ādisa Pv-a 49 ■ fut. ādissati Thig 308 (dakkhiṇaṃ) Pv-a 88 (id.) ■ aor. ādisi Pv ii.28; Pv-a 46 (dakkhiṇaṃ); pl ādisiṃsu ibid. 53 (id.) & ādisuṃ Pv i.106 (id.) ■ ger ādissa Vin iii.127; Snp 1018; Pv ii.16 (dānaṃ), & ādisitvāna Thig 311 ■ grd. ādissa (adj.) to be told or shown MN i.12.

ā + disati

Ādiso

(adv.) from the beginning, i.e. thoroughly, absolutely DN i.180; MN iii.208.

orig. abl. of ādi, formed with ˚saḥ

Ādissa

at MN iii.133 is an imper. pres. meaning “take”, & should probably better be read; ādiya (in corresponsion with ādāna). It is not grd. of ādisati, which its form might suggest.

Ādissa2

(adj.) blameworthy MN i.12; MA = garāyha.

Ādīna

at DN i.115 & S; v.74 (vv.ll. ādina, & abhinna) see ādina. See; diṇṇa.

Ādīnava

disadvantage, danger (in or through = loc.) DN i.38 (vedanānaṃ assādañ ca ādīnavañ ca etc.), 213 (iddhi-pāṭihāriye MN i.318; SN i.9 (ettha bhīyo) ii.170 sq. (dhātūnaṃ); iii.27, 62, 102 (rūpassa etc.); iv.7 168; AN i.57 (akaraṇīye kayiramāne) 258 (ko loke assādo) iii.250 sq.; 267 sq. (duccarite), 270 (puggala-ppasāde) iv.439 sq.; v.81; Ja i.146; Ja iv.2; Iti 9 = AN ii.10 = Nd ii.172a; Snp 36, Snp 50 (cp. Nd ii.127), 69, 424, 732; Thig 17 (kāye ā. = dosa Thag-a 23), 485 (kāmesu ā. = dosa Thag-a 287); Pv iii.107 (= dosa Pv-a 214); iv.67 (= dosa Pv-a 263); Pts i.192 sq.; Pts ii.9, Pts ii.10; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 208 ■ There are several sets of sources of evil or danger, viz. five dussīlassa sīla-vipattiyā ā. at DN ii.85 = DN iii.235 = AN iii.252 five akkhantiyā ā. at Vb 378; six of six each at DN iii.182 sq ■ In phrase kāmānaṃ ā. okāro saṅkileso DN i.110, DN i.148; MN i.115; Ne 42; Dhp-a 16.

-ānupassin realising the danger or evil of SN ii.85 (upā dāniyesu dhammesu) abstr. ˚ânupassanā Vism 647 sq., 695 -dassāvin same as ˚ânupassin DN i.245 (an˚); AN v.178 (id.); DN iii.46; SN ii.194, SN ii.269; AN iii.146; AN v.181 sq.; Nd ii.141. -pariyesanā search for danger in (-˚) SN ii.171 SN iii.29; SN iv.8 sq. -saññā consciousness of danger DN i.7) iii.253, 283; AN iii.79.

ā + dīna + va (nt.), a substantivised adj., orig. meaning “full of wretchedness”, cp. BSk. ādīnava Mvu iii.297 (misery); Divy 329

Ādīpanīya

(adj.) to be explained Mil 270.

grd. of ā + dīpeti

Ādīpita

ablaze, in flames SN i.31 (loka; v.l. ādittaka) 108; Ja v.366; Dhp-a iii.32 (v.l. āditta).

pp. of ādīpeti, ā + caus. of dīp, cp. dīpeti

Ādu

(indecl.) emphatic (adversative) part. (1) of affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather Ja iii.499 = Ja vi.443; Ja v.180; Ja vi.552 ■ (2) as 2nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udāhu… ādu (= kiṃ… udāhu Snp-a 350), viz. is it so… or Thag 1274 = Snp 354; Pv iv.317 = Dhp-a i.31; Ja v.384 Ja vi.382; without udāhu at Ja v.460 (adu). The close connection with udāhu suggests an expln. of ādu as a somehow distorted abbreviation of udāhu.

see also adu

Ādeti

to take, receive, get Snp 121 (= gaṇhāti Snp-a 179), 954 (= upādiyati gaṇhāti Nd;1 444); cp. i.43; Ja iii.103, Ja iii.296; Ja v.366 (= gaṇhāti C.; cp. ādiyati on p. 367) Mil 336.

a + deti, base2 of dadāti (day˚ & de˚), cp. also ādiyati

Ādeyya

(adj.) to be taken up, acceptable, pleasant, welcome, only in phrase ˚vacana welcome or acceptable speech, glad words Vin ii.158; Ja vi.243; Mil 110; Thag-a 42. Adeva, Adevana

grd. of ādāti (q.v.)

Ādeva, Ādevanā

lamenting, deploring, crying etc. in ster. phrase (explaining parideva or pariddava) ādevo paridevo ādevanā pari˚ ādevitattaṃ pari˚ Nd i.370 = Nd ii.416 = Pts i.38.

ā + div. devati

Ādesa

information, pointing out; as tt. g. characteristic, determination, substitute, e.g. kutonidānā is at Snp-a 303 said to equal kiṃ-nidānā, the to of kuto (abl.) equalling or being substituted for the acc case: paccatta-vacanassa to-ādeso veditabbo.

fr. ādisati, cp. Sk. ādeśa

Ādesanā

(f.) pointing out, guessing, prophesy; only in phrase ˚pāṭihāriya trick or marvellous ability of mind-reading or guessing other peoples character Vin ii.200; DN i.212, DN i.213; DN iii.220; AN i.170, AN i.292; AN v.327; Pts ii.227. For pāṭihāriya is subsiituted ˚vidhā (lit. variety of i.e. act or performance etc.) at DN iii.103.

ā + desanā

Ādhāna

(nt.)

1. putting up, putting down, placing, laying AN iv.41 (aggissa ādhānaṃ, v.l. of 6 MSS ādānaṃ).

2. receptacle MN i.414 (udak˚), cp. ādheyya. 3. enclosure, hedge Mil 220 (kaṇṭak˚ thorny brake, see under kaṇṭaka).

-gāhin holding one’s own place, i.e. obstinate (?) reading uncertain & interchanging with ādāna, only in one ster. phrase, viz. sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsin ādhāna-gāhin duppaṭinissaggin Vin ii.89; MN i.43, MN i.96; AN iii.335 (v.l. ādāna˚, C. expls by daḷhagāhin); DN iii.247 (adhāna˚).

ā + dhāna

Ādhāra

1. a container, receptacle, basin, lit. holder AN iii.27; Ja vi.257.

2. “holding up”, i.e. support, basis, prop. esp. a (round) stool or stand for the alms-bowl (patta) Vin ii.113 (an˚ patto); MN iii.95; SN v.21; Ja v.202 ■ fig. SN v.20 (an˚ without a support cittaṃ); Vism 8, Vism 444.

3. (tt. g.) name for the loc. case (“resting on”) Snp 211.

ā + dhāra

Ādhāraka

(m. & nt.)

1. a stool or stand (as ādhāra;2) (always m., except at Ja i.33 where ˚āni pl. nt.) Ja i.33; Dhp-a iii.290 = Vv-a 220; Dhp-a iii.120 = Dhp-a iii.186 (one of the four priceless things of a Tathāgata, viz.: setacchattaṃ, nisīdanapallanko, ādhārako pādapīṭhaṃ).

2. a reading desk, pulpit Ja iii.235 Ja iv.299.

ā + dhāraka, or simply ādhāra + ka

Ādhāraṇatā

(f.) concentration, attention, mindfulness Snp-a 290 (+ daḷhīkaraṇa), 398 (id.).

ā + dhāraṇatā

Ādhārita

supported, held up Mil 68.

pp. of ā + dhāreti, cp. dhāreti1

Ādhāvati

to run towards a goal, to run after MN i.265 (where id. p. SN ii.26 has upadh˚); DN-a i.39. Freq. in combn. ādhāvati paridhāvati to run about e.g. Ja i.127, Ja i.134, Ja i.158; Ja ii.68.

ā + dhavati1

Ādhāvana

(nt.) onrush, violent motion Mil 135.

fr. ādhāvati

Ādhipacca

(& Ādhipateyya) (nt.) supreme rule lordship, sovereignty, power SN v.342 (issariy˚); AN i.62 (id.), 147, 212; ii.205 (id.); iii.33, 76; iv.252 sg.; Pv ii.959 (one of the ṭhānas, cp. ṭhāna ii.2b; see also D iii. 146, where spelt ādhipateyya; expld. by issariya at Pv-a 137); Ja i.57; Dāvs v.17; Vv-a 126 (gehe ā = issariya) The three (att˚, lok˚, dhamm˚) at Vism 14.

fr. adhi + pati + ya “being over-lord”; see also adhipateyya

Ādhuta

shaken, moved (by the wind, i.e. fanned Vv 394 (v.l. adhuta which is perhaps to be preferred, i.e. not shaken, cp. vātadhutaṃ Dāvs v.49; Vv-a 178 expls. by saṇikaṃ vidhūpayamāna, i.e. gently fanned).

ā + dhuta1

Ādheyya

(adj.) to be deposited (in one’s head & heart Pp A), to be heeded to be appropriated [in latter meaning easily mixed with; ādheyya, cp. vv.ll. under ādiya2 ]; nt. depository (ādhātabbatā ṭhapetabbatā Pp A 217) Pp 34 (˚ṃ gacchati is deposited); Mil 359 (sabbe tass’ ādheyya2 honti they all become deposited in him, i.e. his deposits or his property).

-mukha see ādiya2.

grd. of ā + dadhāti cp. ādhāna2

Ānaka

a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end SN ii.266; Ja ii.344; Dpvs xvi.14.

Sk. ānaka, cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 10

Ānañca

see ākāsa˚; and viññāṇa˚.

Ānañja

see ānejja.

Ānaṇya

(nt.) freedom from debt DN i.73; AN iii.354 (Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. anaṇa ); Nd i.160; Vism 44; DN-a i.3.

Sk. ānṛṇya, so also BSk. e.g. Jtm 3118; from a + ṛṇa, P. iṇa but also aṇa in composition, thus an-aṇa as base of ānaṇya

Ānadati

to trumpet (of elephants) Ja iv.233.

ā + nadati

Ānana

(nt.) the mouth; adj. (-˚) having a mouth Sdhp 103; Pgdp 63 (vikaṭ˚).

Vedic āna, later Sk. ānana from an to breathe

Ānantarika

(& ˚ya) without an interval, immediately following, successive Vin i.321; ii. 212; Pp 13; Dhs 1291.

-kamma “conduct that finds retribution without delay (Kvu trsl. 275 n. 2) Vin ii.193; Ja i.45; Kv 480; Mil 25 (cp. Dhs trsl. 267); Vism 177 (as prohibiting practice of kammaṭṭhāna).

fr. an + antara + ika

Ānanda

joy, pleasure, bliss, delight DN i.3; Snp 679, Snp 687; Ja i.207 (˚maccha Leviathan); vi.589 (˚bheri festive drum) DN-a i.53 (= pītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ).

Vedic ānanda, fr. ā + nand, cp. BSk. ānandī joy Divy 37

Ānandati

to be pleased or delighted Ja vi.589 (aor. ānandi in T. reading ānandi vittā, expld. by C. as nandittha was pleased; we should however read ānandi-cittā with gladdened heart). See also ānandiya.

ā + nandati

Ānandin

(adj.) joyful, friendly Thag 555; Ja iv.226.

fr. ā + nand

Ānandiya

(adj ■. ) enjoyable, nt. joy, feast Ja vi.589 (˚ṃ acarati to celebrate the feast = ānandachaṇa C.).

grd. of ānandati

Ānandī

(f.) joy, happiness in cpd. ānandi-citta Ja vi.589 (so read probably for ānandi vitta see ānandati).

ā + nandī, cp. ānanda

Ānaya

(adj.) to be brought, in suvānaya easy to bring SN i.124 = Ja i.80.

ā + naya

Ānayati

see āneti.

Ānāpāna

(nt.) in haled & exhaled breath, inspiration & respiration S; v.132 311 sq.; Ja i.58; Pts i.162 (˚kathā); usually in cpd. ˚sati concentration by in-breathing & out-breathing (cp.; Man of Mystic 70) MN i.425 (cp. DN ii.291); iii.82; Vin iii.70; AN i.30; Iti 80; Pts i.166, Pts i.172, Pts i.185 (˚samādhi); Nd ii.466 B (id.); Mil 332; Vism 111, Vism 197, Vism 266 sq.; Snp-a 165. See detail under sati.

āna + apāna, cpds. of an to breathe

Ānāpeti

see āneti.

Ānāmeti

to make bend, to bend, to bring toward or under Ja v.154 (doubtful reading fut ānāmayissasi, v.l. ānayissati, C. ānessasi = lead to).

ā + nāmeti, Caus. of namati, which is usually spelt nameti

Ānisaṃsa

praise i.e. that which is commendable, profit, merit, advantage good result, blessing in or from (c. loc.). There are five ānisaṃsā sīlavato sīla-sampadāya or blessings which accrue to the virtuous enumd. at DN ii.86 viz. bhogakkhandha great wealth, kittisadda good report visārada self-confidence, asammūlho kālaṃ karoti an untroubled death, saggaṃ lokaṃ uppajjati a happy state after death ■ DN i.110, DN i.143; DN iii.132 (four), 236 (five) MN i.204; SN i.46, SN i.52; SN iii.8, SN iii.93 (mahā˚); v.69 (seven) 73, 129, 133, 237 (seven), 267, 276; AN i.58 (karaṇīye kariyamāne); ii.26, 185, 239, 243 (sikkhā˚); iii.41 (dāne) 248 (dhammasavane), 250 (yāguyā), 251 (upaṭṭhita-satissa) 253 sq. (sīlavato sīlasampadāya etc., as above), 267 (sucarite), 441; iv.150 (mettāya ceto-vimuttiyā), 361 (dhammasavane), 439 sq. (nekkhamme avitakke nippītike), 442 443 sq. (ākās’ānañcāyatane); vi., 106 (mahā˚), 311; Iti 28, Iti 29, Iti 40 (sikkhā˚); Snp 256 (phala˚), 784, 952; Ja i.9 Ja i.94; Ja v.491 (v.l. anu˚); Nd i.73, Nd i.104, Nd i.441; Kv 400; Mil 198; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 113; Pv-a 9 (dāna˚) 12, 64 (= phala) 208, 221 (= guṇa); Sdhp 263Eleven ānisaṃsas of mettā (cp. Pts ii.130) are given in detail at Vism 311 Vism 314; on another eight see pp. 644 sq.

ā + ni + saṃsa, BSk. distorted to anuśaṃsa

Ānisada

(nt.) “sit down”, bottom, behind MN i.80 = MN i.245; Ja iii.435 (gloss asata) Vism 251 = Kp-a 45 (˚ttaca), 252 (˚maṃsa).

a + sad

Ānuttariya

(nt.) incomparableness, excellency, supreme ideal DN iii.102 sq.; AN v.37.

see also anuttariya which as-˚ probably represents ānutt˚

Ānīta

fetched, brought (here), brought back adduced Ja i.291; Ja iii.127; Ja iv.1.

pp. of ānetī

Ānupuṭṭha

metri causa for anupuṭṭha (q.v.).

Ānupubba

(nt.) rule, regularity, order Thag 727 (cp. Mvu ii.224 ānupubbā).

abstr. fr. anupubba

Ānupubbatā

(f.) (or ˚ta nt.?) succession; only in tt. g. padânu-pubbatā word sequence, in expln. of iti Nd i.140; Nd ii.137 (v.l. ˚ka).

fr. last

Ānupubbikathā

regulated exposition, graduated sermon DN i.110; DN ii.41 sq. MN i.379; Ja i.8; Mil 228; DN-a i.277, DN-a i.308; Dhp-a iv.199.

for anupubbi˚ representing its isolated composition form, cp. ānubhāva & see also anupubbi˚

Ānubhāva

greatness, magnificence majesty, splendour Ja i.69 (mahanto); ii.102 (of a jewel) v.491; Dhp-a ii.58.

the dissociated composition form of anubhāva, q.v. for details. Only in later language

Ānejja

and Ānañja immovability, imperturbability, impassibility The word is; n. but occurs as adj. at Vin iii.109 (ānañja samādhi, with which cp. BSk. ānijyā śāntiḥ at Avs i.199 ■ The term usually occurs in cpd ānejja-ppatta (adj.) immovable lit. having attained impassibility expld. by Bdhgh. at Vin iii.267 (on Pār. i.1, 6 as acala, niccala, i.e. motionless. This cpd. is indicated below by (p.) after the reference ■ The various spellings of the word are as follows:

1. ānejja DN i.76 (v.l. ānañja-p.) AN ii.184 (p.); iii.93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq. (p.); Nd ii.471 (v.l. aneja, ānañja) = Vb 137 (āneñja) Nd ii.569a (v.l. ānañja), 601 (v.l. anejja & aneñja); Pp 60 (p.); DN-a i.219 (v.l. BB āneñja).

2. ānañja Vin iii.4 (p.) (v.l. ānañca˚, anañja˚, ānañja˚; Bdhgh. ānejja p. 267), 109; Ud 27 (samādhi, adj. v.l. ānañca); Dhp-a iv.46. See also below cpd. ˚kāraṇa ■ A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is āṇañja at MN ii.229 (v.l. aṇañja aneñja, āneñja), 253, 254.

3. āneñja SN ii.82. (v.l. āṇañje, or is it āṇeñja?); DN iii.217 (˚âbhisankhāra of imperturbable character, remaining static, cp. Kvu trsl. 358); Nd i.90 (id.), 206, 442; Pts ii.206; Vb 135, Vb 340 Vism 377 (p.), 386 (sixteen˚ fold), 571; Ne 87, Ne 99. See also iñjati.

-kāraṇa trick of immovability, i.e. pretending to be dead (done by an elephant, but see differently Morris J P T S. 1886, 154) Ja i.415; Ja ii.325 (v.l. āṇañja, āneñca ānañca); iv.308; v.273, 310.

abstr. fr. an + *añja or *ejja = *ijja. The Sanskritised equivalent would be *iñjya or *iñgya of iṅg to stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *aṅg in Pāli, referring it to a base with ṛ (probably Sk. ṛj ṛñjati) in analogy to a form like Sk. ṛṇa = Pāli aṇa iṇa, both a & i representing Sk. ṛ. The form; añja would thus correspond to a Sk. *añjya (*añgya). The third P form ān-eñja is a direct (later, and probably re-instituted formation from Sk. iñjya, which in an interesting way became in BSk. re-sanskritised to āñijya (which on the other hand may represent āñejja & thus give the latter the feature of a later, but more specifically Pāli form) The editions of P. Texts show a great variance of spelling based on MSS. vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation

Āneñjatā

(f.) steadfastness Vism 330, Vism 386.

fr. āneñja

Āneti

to bring, to bring towards, to fetch, procure, convey, bring back Snp 110; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 92. pot. 1st pl. ānema (or imper. 2nd pl ānetha MN i.371. fut. ānayissati SN i.124; Pv ii.65; Ja iii.173; Ja v.154 (v.l.),; ānessati Ja v.154. inf. ānayituṃ Pv ii.610, ger. ānetvā Pv-a 42, Pv-a 74. aor. ānesi Pv-a 3, & ānayi Pv i.77 (sapatiṃ) ■ pp. ānīta (q.v.) ■ Med. pass. ānīyati & āniyyati; DN ii.245 (āniyyataṃ imper. shall be brought); MN i.371 (ppr. ānīyamāna) ■ Caus. II. ānāpeti to cause to be fetched Ja iii.391; Ja v.225. Apa & Apo;

ā + neti

Āpa & Āpo

(nt.) water; philosophically t. t. for cohesion, representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahābhūta), viz. paṭhavī, āpo, tejo vāyo: see Cpd. 268 & Dhs trsl. 201, also below ˚dhātu. DN ii.259; MN i.327; SN ii.103; SN iii.54, SN iii.207; AN iv.312, AN iv.375; Snp 307, Snp 391 (˚ṃ), 392 (loc. āpe), 437 (id.); Ja iv.8 (paṭhavi-āpa-teja˚); Dhs 652; Mil 363 (gen. āpassa, with paṭhavī etc.); Sdhp 100.

-kasiṇa the water-device, i.e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 n.) DN iii.268; Ja i.313; Dhs 203 Vism 170; Dhp-a i.312; Dhp-a iii.214. -dhātu the fluid element the essential element in water, i.e. element of cohesion (see Cpd. 155 n. 2; Mystic 9 n. 2; Dhs trsl. 201, 242; DN iii.228, DN iii.247; MN i.187, MN i.422: Dhs 652; Ne 74. See also dhātu ■ rasa the taste of water AN i.32; Snp-a 6 -sama resembling water MN i.423.

Vedic ap & āp, f. sg. apā, pl. āpaḥ, later Sk. also āpaḥ nt ■ Idg.; *ap & *ab;, primarily to Lith. ùpé water, Old Prussian ape river, Gr. ̓*Λπία Name of the Peloponnesus; further (as *ab ) to Lat. amnis river Sk. abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water

Āpakā

(f.) river Ja v.452; Ja vi.518.

= āpagā

Āpagā

(f.) a river Thag 309; Snp 319; Ja v.454; Dāvs i.32; Vv-a 41.

āpa + ga of gam

Āpajjati

to get into, to meet with (acc.); to undergo; to make, produce, exhibit Vin ii.126 (saṃvaraṃ); DN i.222 (pariyeṭṭhiṃ); Iti 113 (vuddhiṃ) Ja i.73; Pp 20, Pp 33 (diṭṭh’ânugatiṃ); Pv-a 29 (ppr. āpajjanto); Dhp-a ii.71-pot. āpajjeyya DN i.119 (musāvādaṃ) ■ aor. āpajji Ja v.349; Pv-a 124 (sankocaṃ); āpādi SN i.37; AN ii.34; Iti 85; Ja ii.293; Ja ii.3rd pl. āpādu DN ii.273 ■ ger. āpajjitva Pv-a 22 (saṃvegaṃ), 151. pp. āpanna (q.v.) ■ Caus. āpādeti (q.v.) ■ Note. The reading āpajja in āpajja naṃ Iti 86 is uncertain (vv. ll āsajja & ālajja). The id. p. at Vin ii.203 (CV. vii.4, 8 has āsajjanaṃ, for which Bdhgh, on p. 325 has āpajjanaṃ Cp. pariyāpajjati.

Sk. āpadyate, ā + pad

Āpaṇa

a bazaar, shop Vin i.140; Ja i.55; Ja v.445; Pv ii.322; Mil 2, Mil 341; Snp-a 440; Dhp-a i.317; Dhp-a ii.89; Vv-a 157; Pv-a 88, Pv-a 333 (phal˚ fruit shop), 215.

Sk. āpaṇa, ā + paṇ

Āpaṇika

a shopkeeper, tradesman Ja i.124; Mil 344; Vv-a 157; Dhp-a ii.89.

fr. āpaṇa

Āpatacchika

at Ja vi.17 is C. reading for apatacchika in khārāpat˚; (q.v.).

Āpatati

to fall on to, to rush on to Ja v.349 (= upadhāvati C.); vi.451 (= āgacchati C.); Mil 371.

ā + patati

Āpatti

(f.) an ecclesiastical offence (cp.; Kvu trsl. 362 n. 1), Vin i.103 (˚khandha), 164 (˚ṃ paṭikaroti) 322 (˚ṃ passati), 354 (avasesā & anavasesā); ii.2 sq. (˚ṃ ropeti), 59, 60 (˚pariyanta), 88 (˚adhikaraṇa), 259 (˚ṃ paṭikaroti); iv.344; DN iii.212 (˚kusalatā); AN i.84 (id.) 87; ii.240 (˚bhaya); Dhs 1330 sq. (cp. Dhs trsl. 346). anāpatti Vin iii.35.

˚vuṭṭhānatā forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250 (put before anāpatti).

Sk. āpatti, fr. ā + pad, cp. apajjati & BSk. āpatti, e. g, Divy 330

Āpattika

(adj.) guilty of an offence MN i.443; Vin iv.224. an˚; Vin i.127.

āpatti + ka, cp. BSk. āpattika Divy 303

Āpatha

in micchāpatha, dvedhāpatha as classified in Vb Ind. p. 441 should be grouped under patha as micchā˚ dvedhā˚.

Āpathaka

in ˚jjhāyin Nd ii.3422 is read āpādaka˚; at Nd i.226, and āpātaka˚ at Vism 26.

Āpadā

(f.) accident, misfortune distress, DN iii.190; AN ii.68 (loc. pl. āpadāsu), 187; iii. 45; iv.31; Thag 371; Ja iv.163 (āpadatthā, a difficult form; vv.ll. T. aparattā, āpadatvā, C. aparatthā; expld. by āpadāya); v.340 (loc. āpade), 368; Pv-a 130 (quot.) Sdhp 312, Sdhp 554. Note. For the contracted form in loc. pl āpāsu (= *āpatsu) see *āpā.

Sk. āpad, fr. ā + pad, cp. āpajjati & BSk. āpad, e.g. in āpadgata Jtm 31;33

Āpanna

1. entered upon, fallen into, possessed of, having done Vin i.164 (āpattiṃ ā.); iii.90; DN i.4 (dayāpanna merciful); Nd ii.32 (taṇhāya).

2. unfortunate miserable Ja i.19 (v.124). Cp. pari˚. *Apa

pp. of āpajjati

*Āpā

(& *Āvā) (f.) misery, misfortune Ja ii.317 (loc. pl. āpāsu, v.l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu); iii.12 (BB āvāsu); v.82 (avāgata gone into misery, v.l. apagata, C apagata parihīna), 445 (loc. āvāsu, v.l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu) 448 (āvāsu kiccesu; v.l. apassu, read āpāsu). Note. Since *āpā only occurs in loc. pl., the form āpāsu is to be regarded as a direct contraction of Sk. āpatsu.

for āpadā, q.v.

Āpāṇa

life, lit. breathing, only in cpd. ˚koṭi the end of life Mil 397; Dāvs iii.93; adj. -koṭika MN ii.120; Vism 10.

ā + pāṇa

Āpātha

sphere, range, focus, field (of consciousness or perception; cp. Dhs trsl. 199), appearance AN ii.67; Ja i.336 Vb 321; Mil 298; Vism 21, Vism 548; DN-a i.228; Dhs-a 308 Dhs-a 333; Vv-a 232 (˚kāla); Dhp-a iv.85; Sdhp 356. Usually in phrase āpāthaṃ gacchati to come into focus, to become clear, to appear MN i.190; SN iv.160, or ˚ṃ āgacchati Vin i.184; AN iii.377 sq.; AN iv.404; Vism 125. Cp. ˚gata below.

-gata come into the sphere of, appearing, visible MN i.174 = Nd ii.jhāna (an˚ unapproached); Pv-a 23 (āpāthaṃ gata) -gatatta abstr. fr. last: appcarance Vism 617.

etym.? Trenckner, Mil p.428 says: “I suspect ā. to be corrupted from āpāta (cp. āpatati), under an impression that it is allied to patha; but it is scarcely ever written so”

Āpāthaka

(adj.) belonging to the (perceptual) sphere of, visible, in ˚nisādin lying down visible DN iii.44, DN iii.47. Cp. āpathaka.

fr. āpātha

Āpādaka

(adj.-n.)

1. (adj.) producing, leading to (-˚) Vv-a 4 (abhiññ˚ catuttha-jjhāna).

2 (n.) one who takes care of a child, a protector, guardian AN i.62 = AN i.132 = Iti 110 (+ posaka) ■ f. āpādikā a nurse, foster-mother Vin ii.289 (+ posikā).

fr. ā + pad

Āpādā

(f.) a nursing woman, in an˚; not nursing, unmarried Ja iv.178.

short for āpādikā

Āpādi

aor. of āpajjati (q.v.).

Āpādeti

to produce, make out, bring, bring into MN i.78; MN iii.248; SN iv.110 (addhānaṃ to live one’s life, cp. addhānaṃ āpādi Ja ii.293 = jīvit’addhānaṃ āpādi āyuṃ vindi C.); Snp-a 466 ■ Cp. pari˚

Caus. of āpajjati

Āpāna

(nt.) drinking; drinking party, banquet; banqueting-hall, drinking-hall Ja i.52 (˚maṇḍala); v.292 (˚bhūmi); Vism 399 (id.); Dhp-a i.213 (id., rañño).

fr. ā +

Āpānaka

(adj.) drinking, one who is in the habit of drinking DN i.167.

āpāna + ka

Āpānīya

(adj.) drinkable, fit for drinking or drinking with, in ˚kaṃsa drinking-bowl, goblet MN i.316; SN ii.110.

fr. āpāna, ā +

Āpāyika

(adj.-n.) one suffering in an apāya or state of misery after death Vin ii.202 = Iti 85 (v.l. ap˚) Vin ii.205; DN i.103; AN i.265; Iti 42; Vism 16; Pv-a 60.

fr. apāya

Āpiyati

to be in motion (in etym. of āpo) Vism 364.;

fr. ; cp. appāyati & appeti

Āpucchati

to enquire after, look for, ask, esp. to ask permission or leave; aor. āpucchi Ja i.140; Pv-a 110; grd. āpucchitabba Dhp-a i.6; ger. āpucchitvā Vin iv.267 (apaloketvā + ); Mil 29; Pv-a 111; āpucchitūna (cp. Geiger § 211) Thig 426; āpuccha Thig 416 & āpucchā [ = āpṛcchya, cp. Vedic ācyā for ācya], only in neg. form an˚; without asking Vin ii.211, Vin ii.219; Vin iv.165, Vin iv.226 (= anapaloketvā); Dhp-a i.81 ■ pp. āpucchita Vin iv.272.

ā + pucchati

Āpūrati

to be filled, to become full, to increase Ja iii.154 (cando ā. = pūrati C.); iv.26, 99, 100.

a + pūrati

Āpeti

to cause to reach or obtain Ja vi.46. Cp. vy˚.

Caus. of āp, see appoti & pāpuṇāti

Āphusati

to feel, realise, attain to, reach; aor. āphusi Vv 169 (= adhigacchi Vv-a 84).

ā + phusati

Ābaddha

tied, bound, bound up DN-a i.127; fig. bound to, attached to, in love with Dhp-a i.88; Pv-a 82 (Tissāya ˚sineha); Sdhp 372 (sineh, ˚hadaya).

pp. of ābandhati

Ābandhaka

(adj.) (being) tied to (loc.) Pv-a 169 (sīse).

ā + bandh, cp. Sk. ābandha tie, bond

Ābandhati

(ā + bandhati, Sk. ābadhnāti, bandh ] to bind to, tie, fasten on to, hold fast; fig. to tie to, to attach to, Ja iv.132, Ja iv.289; Ja v.319, Ja v.338, Ja v.359 ■ pp. ābaddha.

Ābandhana

(nt.)

1. tie, bond DN-a i.181 = Pp A 236 (˚atthena ñāti yeva ñāti-parivaṭṭo). 2. tying, binding Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa, of āpodhātu). 3. reins (?) or harness (on a chariot) Ja v.319 (but cp. C expln. “hatthi-assa-rathesu ābandhitabbāni bhaṇḍakāni” thus taking it as ā + bhaṇḍa + na, i.e. wares, loads etc.) With this cp. Sk. ābandha, according to Halāyudha 2 420 a thong of leather which fastens the oxen to the yoke of a plough.

fr. ā + bandh

Ābādha

affliction, illness, disease Vin iv.261; DN i.72; DN ii.13; AN i.121; AN iii.94, AN iii.143; AN iv.333, AN iv.415 sq., 440; Dhp 138; Pp 28 Vism 41 (udara-vāta˚) 95; Vv-a 351 (an˚ safe & sound) Snp-a 476; Sdhp 85 ■ A list of ābādhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuṭṭhānā semha˚, vāta˚, sannipātikā, utu-pariṇāmajā visama-parihārajā, opakkamikā, kammavipākajā (after Nd ii.304i.c., recurring with slight variations at SN iv.230; AN ii.87; AN iii.131; AN v.110; Nd i.17, Nd i.47; Mil 112, cp. 135). Another list of illnesses mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin ii., p. 351 ■ Five ābādhas at Vin i.71, viz. kuṭṭhaṃ gaṇḍo kilāso soso apamāro said to be raging in Magadha cp. p. 93 ■ Three ābādhas at DN iii.75, viz. icchā anasanaṃ jarā, cp. Snp 311 ■ See also cpd. appābādha (health) under appa.

ā + bādh to oppress, Vedic ābādha oppression

Ābādhika

(adj.-n.) affected with illness, a sick person AN iii.189, AN iii.238; Nd i.160; Mil 302; DA 212; Dhp-a i.31; Pv-a 271 ■ f. ābādhikinī a sick woman AN ii.144.

fr. ābādha

Ābādhita

afflicted, oppressed, molested Thag 185.

pp. of ābādheti, Caus. of ā + bādh

Ābādheti

to oppress, vex, annoy, harass SN iv.329.

ā + Caus. of bādh, cp. ābādha

Ābila

(adj.) turbid, disturbed, soiled Ja v.90.

Sk. āvila; see also P. āvila

Ābhata

brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken DN i.142; SN i.65; AN ii.71 AN ii.83; Iti 12, Iti 14 with phrase yathābhataṃ as he has been reared (cp. Ja v.330 evaṃ kicchā bhaṭo); Pv iii.5 (ratt˚ rattiyaṃ ā. Pv-a 199); Dhp-a ii.57, Dhp-a ii.81; Dhp-a iv.89; Vv-a 65 Cp. yathābhata.

pp. of ā + bharati from bhṛ;

Ābhataka

(adj.) = ābhata; DN-a i.205 (v.l. ābhata).

Ābharaṇa

(nt.) that which is taken up or put on, viz. ornament, decoration, trinkets DN i.104; Vv 802; Ja iii.11, Ja iii.31; Dhp-a iii.83; Vv-a 187.

Sk. ābharaṇa, ā + bhṛ;

Ābharati

to bring, to carry; ger. ābhatvā Ja iv.351.

ā + bhṛ;

Ābhassara

(adj.-n.) shining, brilliant, radiant, Name of a class of gods in the Brahma heavens “the radiant gods”, usually referred to as the representatives of supreme love (pīti & mettā) thus at DN i.17; Dhp 200; Iti 15; Dhp-a iii.258 (˚loka). In another context at Vism 414 sq.

etym. uncertain; one suggested in Cpd. 138 n. 4 is ā + *bha + *sar, i.e. from whose bodies are emitted rays like lightning, more probably a combn. of ābhā + svar (to shine, be bright), i.e. shining in splendour

Ābhā

(f.) shine, splendour, lustre, light DN ii.12; MN iii.147 (adj ■ ˚); SN ii.150 (˚dhātu) AN ii.130, AN ii.139; AN iii.34; Mvu xi.11; Vv-a 234 (of a Vimāna v.l. pabhā); Dhp-a iv.191; Sdhp 286.

Sk. ābhā, fr. ā + bhā, see ābhāti

Ābhāti

to shine, shine forth, radiate Dhp 387 (= virocati Dhp-a iv.144); Ja v.204. See also ābheti.

ā + bhā

Ābhāveti

to cultivate, pursue Pv ii.1319 (mettacittaṃ; gloss & v.l. abhāvetvā; expld. as vaḍḍhetvā brūhetvā Pv-a 168).

ā + bhāveti

Ābhāsa

splendour, light, appearance MN iii.215.

Sk. ābhāsa, fr. ā + bhās

Ābhicetasika

(adj.) See abhicetasika. This spelling, with guṇa of the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is the more frequent.

Ābhidosika

(adj.) belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin iii.15 (of food; stale); MN i.170 (˚kālakata died last night); Mil 291.

abhidosa + ika

Ābhidhammika

(adj.) belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the Abhidhamma Mil 17, Mil 341; Vism 93. As abhi˚ atKp-a 151; Ja iv.219.

abhidhamma + ika

Ābhindati

to split, cut, strike (with an axe) SN iv.160 (v.l. a˚).

ā + bhindati

Ābhisekika

(adj.) belonging to the consecration (of a king) Vin v.129.

fr. abhiseka

Ābhujati

to bend, bend towards or in, contract; usually in phrase pallaṅkaṃ ā˚; “to bend in the round lap” or “bend in hookwise”, to sit crosslegged (as a devotee with straightened back), e.g. at Vin i.24; DN i.71; MN i.56 (v.l. ābhuñjitvā), 219; AN iii.320; Pp 68; Pts i.176; Ja i.71, Ja i.213; Mil 289; DN-a i.58, DN-a i.210. In other connection Ja i.18 (v.101; of the ocean “to recede”); Mil 253 (kāyaṃ).

ā + bhujati, bhuj1

Ābhujana

(nt.) crouching, bending, turning in, in phrase pallank’ābhujana sitting cross-legged Ja i.17 (v.91); Pv-a 219.

fr. ābhujati

Ābhujī

(f.) Name of a tree, the Bhūrja or Bhojpatr Ja v.195 (bhūjapatta-vana C.), 405 (= bhūjapatta C.).

lit. the one that bends, prob. a poetic metaphor

Ābhūñjati

to enjoy, partake of, take in, feel, experience Ja iv.456 (bhoge; Rh. D. “hold in its hood”?); Dhs-a 333.

ā + bhuj2, Sk. bhunakti

Ābhuñjana

(nt.) partaking of, enjoying, experiencing Dhs-a 333.

fr. ābhuñjati

Ābheti

to shine Pv ii.126 (ppr. ˚entī); Vv 82 (˚antī, v.l. ˚entī; = obhāsentī Vv-a 50).

*ābhayati = ābhāti, q.v.

Ābhoga

ideation idea, thought DN i.37 (= manasikāro samannāhāro DN-a i.122; cp. semantically āhāra = ābhoga, food); Vb 320; Mil 97; Vism 164, Vism 325, Vism 354; Dāvs 62; Kp-a 42 (˚paccavekkhana), 43 (id.) 68.

fr. ābhuñjati, bhuj2 to enjoy etc. The translators of Kvu derive it from bhuj1 to bend etc. (Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4) which however is hardly correct, cp. the similar meaning of gocara “pasturing”, fig. perception etc.

Āma1

(indecl.) affirmative part. “yes, indeed, certainly” DN i.192 sq. (as v.l. BB.; T. has āmo); Ja i.115 Ja i.226 (in C. expln. of T. amā-jāta which is to be read for āmajāta); ii.92; v.448; Mil 11, Mil 19, Mil 253; Dhp-a i.10, Dhp-a i.34 Dhp-a ii.39, Dhp-a ii.44; Vv-a 69; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 22, Pv-a 56, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 93 etc.

a specific Pāli formation representing either amma (q.v.) or a gradation of pron. base amu˚ “that (see asu), thus deictic-emphatic exclamn. Cp. also BSk āma e.g. Avs i.36

Āma2

(adj.) [Vedic āma = Gr. ὠμός, connected with Lat. amārus. The more common P. form is āmaka (q.v.) raw, viz. (a) unbaked (of an earthen vessel), unfinished Snp 443; (b) uncooked (of flesh), nt. raw flesh, only in foll. cpds.: ˚gandha “smell of raw flesh”, verminous odour a smell attributed in particular to rotting corpses (cp similarly BSk. āmagandha Mvu iii.214) DN ii.242 sq. AN i.280; Snp 241, Snp 242 (= vissagandha kuṇapagandha Snp-a 286), 248, 251; Dhs 625; and ˚giddha greedy after flesh (used as bait) Ja vi.416 (= āmasankhāta āmisa C.).

Āmaka

(adj.) raw, uncooked DN i.5 = Pp 58 (˚maṃsa raw flesh); MN i.80 (titta-kalābu āmaka-cchinno).

-dhañña “raw” grain, corn in its natural, unprepared state DN i.5 = Pp 58 (see DA i.78 for definition); Vin iv.264; Vin v.135. -sāka raw vegetables Vism 70. -susāna “cemetery of raw flesh” charnelgrove (cp. āmagandha under ama2), i.e. fetid smelling cremation ground Ja i.264, Ja i.489 Ja iv.45 sq.; Ja vi.10; Dhp-a i.176; Vv-a 76; Pv-a 196.

= āma2

Āmaṭṭha

touched, handled Ja i.98 (an˚); DN-a i.107 (= parāmaṭṭha); Sdhp 333.

Sk. āmṛṣṭa, pp. of āmasati; cp. āmasita

Āmaṇḍaliya

a formation resembling a circle, in phrase ˚ṃ karoti to form a ring (of people or a circle, to stand closely together MN i.225 (cp. Sk āmaṇḍalikaroti).

ā + maṇḍala + iya

Āmata

in anāmata at Ja ii.56 is métric for amata.

Āmattikā

(f.) earthenware, crockery; in ˚āpaṇa a crockery shop, chandler’s shop Vin iv.243.

ā + mattikā

Āmaddana

(nt.) crushing Vv-a 311.

ā + maddana of mṛd

Āmanta

(adj ■ adv.) asking or asked, invited only as an˚; without being asked, unasked, uninvited Vin i.254 (˚cāra); AN iii.259 (id.).

either ger. of āmanteti (q.v.) or root der. fr. ā + mant, cp. āmantaṇā

Āmantana

(nt.) & ˚nā (f., also ˚ṇā ) addressing, calling; invitation, greeting Snp 40 (ep. Nd ii.128) ˚vacana the address-form of speech i.e. the vocative case (cp. Sk. āmantritaṃ id.) Snp-a 435; Kp-a 167.

from āmanteti

Āmantanaka

(adj.-n.) addressing, speaking to, conversing; f. ˚ikā interlocutor, companion, favourite queen Vv 188 (= allāpa-sallāpa-yoggā kīḷanakāle vā tena (i.e. Sakkena) āmantetabbā Vv-a 96).

fr. āmantana

Āmantaṇīya

(adj.) to be addressed Ja iv.371.

grd. of āmanteti

Āmantita

addressed, called, invited Pv ii.313 (= nimantita Pv-a 86).

pp. of āmanteti

Āmanteti

to call, address, speak to, invite, consult Ja vi.265; DN-a i.297; Snp-a 487 (ālapati & avhayati); Pv-a 75, Pv-a 80, Pv-a 127 ■ aor. āmantesi DN ii.16; Snp p.78 (= ālapi Snp-a 394) & in poetry; āmantayi Snp 997; Pv ii.27; 37 (perhaps better with v.l. SS samantayi) ■ ger. āmanta (= Sk. *āmantrya) Ja iii.209 Ja iii.315 (= āmantayitvā’ C.), 329; iv.111; v.233; vi.511. pp. āmantita (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. āmantāpeti to invite to come, to cause to be called, to send for DN i.134 (v.l. āmanteti); Mil 149.

denom. of ā + *mantra

Āmaya

affliction, illness, misery; only as an˚; (adj.) not afflicted, not decaying, healthy well (cp. BSk. nirāmaya Aśvaghoṣa ii.9) Vin i.294; Vv 1510 (= aroga Vv-a 74); 177; 368; Ja iii.260, Ja iii.528; iv. 427; vi.23. Positive only very late, e.g. Sdhp 397.

etym.? cp. Sk. āmaya

Āmalaka

emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin i.201, Vin i.278; Vin ii.149 (˚vaṇṭika pīthu); SN i.150; AN v.170; Snp p.125 (˚matti); Ja iv.363; Ja v.380 (as v.l. for T. āmala); Mil 11; Dhp-a i.319; Vv-a 7.

cp. Sk. āmalaka

Āmalakī

(f.) āmalaka Vin i.30; MN i.456 (˚vana).

Āmasati

to touch (upon), to handle, to lay hold on Vin ii.221; Vin iii.48 (kumbhiṃ); Ja iii.319 (id.); AN v.263, AN v.266; Ja iv.67; Pts ii.209; Mil 306; Snp-a 400; Dhs-a 302; Vv-a 17 ■ aor. āmasi Ja ii.360; ger āmasitvā Vin iii.140 (udakapattaṃ) Ja ii.330; grd. āmassa Ja ii.360 (an˚) and āmasitabba id. (C.) ■ pp. āmaṭṭha & āmasita; (q.v.).

ā + masati fr. mṛś

Āmasana

(nt.) touching, handling; touch Vin iv.214. Cp iii.118; Mil 127, Mil 306; DN-a i.78.

fr. āmasati

Āmasita

touched, taken hold of, occupied Vv-a 113 (an˚ khetta virgin land).

pp. of āmasati

Āmāya

(adj.) “born in the house” (cp semantically Gr. ἰχαγενής → indigenous), inborn, being by birth, in cpd. ˚dāsa (dāsī) a born slave, a slave by birth Ja vi.117 (= gehadāsiyā kucchismiṃ jātadasī C.), 285 (dāsassa dāsiyā kucchimhi jātadāsā).

to be considered either a der. from amā (see amājāta in same meaning) or to be spelt amāya which metri causa may be written ā˚

Āmāsaya

receptacle of undigested food, i.e. the stomach Vism 260 Kp-a 59. Opp. pakkāsaya.

āma2 + āsaya, cp. Sk. āmāśaya & āmāśraya

Āmilāka

(nt.?) a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DN-a i.87.

etym.?

Āmisa

(nt.); 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of “raw unprepared, uncultivated”; thus ˚khāra raw lye Vin i.206.

2. “fleshy, of the flesh” (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material, physical; generally in opposition to dhamma (see dhamma B 1. a. and also next no.) thus at MN i.12 (˚dāyāda); Iti 101 (id.); AN i.91 = Iti 98 (˚dāna material gifts opp. to spiritual ones); Dhs 1344 (˚paṭisanthāra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs trsl. 350).

3. food, esp. palatable food (cp. E. sweetmeat); food for enjoyment, dainties Vin ii.269 sq.; Ja ii.6; Mil 413 (lok˚); DN-a i.83 (˚sannidhi),

4. bait SN i.67 SN iv.158; Ja iv.57, Ja iv.219; Ja vi.416; DN-a i.270.

5. gain reward, money, douceur, gratuity, “tip” Pv-a 36, Pv-a 46; esp in phrase ˚kiñcikkha-hetu for the sake of some (little gain SN ii.234; AN i.128; AN v.265, AN v.283 sq., 293 sq.; Pp 29; Pv ii.83 (= kiñci āmisaṃ patthento Pv-a 107); Mil 93; Vv-a 241 (= bhogahetu).

6. enjoyment Pv ii.82 (= kāmāmise-laggacitto Pv-a 107).

7. greed, desire lust Vin i.303 (˚antara out of greed, selfish, opp. mettacitto); AN iii.144 (id.), 184 (id.); i.73 (˚garū parisā); Ja v.91 (˚cakkhu); Pts ii.238 (mār˚). See also cpds. with nir˚ and sa˚.

der. fr. āma raw, q.v. for etym ■ Vedic āmis (m.); later Sk. āmiṣa (nt.), both in lit. & fig. meaning

Āmuñcati

to put on, take up; to be attached to, cling to Dhs-a 305 ■ pp. āmutta (q.v.).

ā + mtic

Āmutta

having put on, clothed in, dressed with adorned with (always ˚-) DN i.104 (˚mālābharaṇa); Vin ii.156 = Vv 208 (˚maṇi-kuṇḍala); SN i.211; Ja iv.460; v. 155; vi.492; Vv 721 (= paṭimukka); 802 (˚hatthābharaṇa); Pv ii.951 (˚maṇikuṇḍala);J iv.183; Vv-a 182.

Sk. āmukta, pp. of ā + muc, cp. also BSk. āmukta jewel Divy 2, Divy 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later Pāli passages, e.g. at Pv-a 134. Semantically cp. ābharaṇa

Āmeṇḍita

(or Āmeḍita ) -(nt.) sympathy in ˚ṃ karoti to show sympathy (? so Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 106) DN-a i.228; Snp-a 155 (v.l. at DA āmeḍita).

Sk. āmreḍita fram ā + mreḍ, dialectical

Āmo

= āma DN i.192, DN i.3.

Āmoda

that which pleases; fragrance, perfume Dāvs v.51.

Sk. āmoda, fr. ā + mud

Āmodanā

(f.) rejoicing Dhs 86, Dhs 285.

fr. ā + mud

Āmodamāna

(adj.) rejoicing, glad SN i.100 (v.l. anu˚) = Iti 66; Vv 648 (= pamodamāna Vv-a 278); Ja v.45.

ppr. med. of āmodeti

Āmodita

pleased, satisfied, glad Ja i.17 (v.80); v.45 (˚pamodita highly pleased); Mil 346.

pp. fr. āmodeti

Āmodeti

to please, gladden, satisfy Thag 649 (cittaṃ); Ja v.34 ■ pp. āmodita (q.v.).

Sk. āmodayati, Caus. of ā + mud

Āya

1. coming in, entrance MN iii.93. - 2. tax Ja v.113.

3. income, earning, profit, gain (opp vaya loss) AN iv.282 = AN iv.323; Snp 978; Ja i.228; Kp-a 38 (in expln. of kāya), 82 (in etym. of āyatana); Pv-a 130. 4. (āyā f.?) a lucky dice (“the incomer”) Ja vi.281.

-kammika a treasurer Dhp-a i.184. -kusala clever in earnings Ne 20. -kosalla proficiency in money making DN iii.220 (one of the three kosallas); Vb 325. -pariccāga expediture of one’s income Pv-a 8. -mukha (lit. entrance, inflow, going in DN i.74 (= āgamana-magga DA 1.78); MN ii.15; AN ii.166; (fig.) revenue income, money Snp-a 173.

Sk. āya; ā + i

Āyata

1. (adj.) outstretched, extended, long, in length (with numeral) DN iii.73 (ñātikkhaya, prolonged or heavy?); MN i.178 (dīghato ā˚; tiriyañ ca vitthata); Ja i.77, Ja i.273 (tettiṃs’-angul’āyato khaggo); iii.438; Vv 8415 (˚aṃsa; cp. expln. at Vv-a 339) Snp-a 447; Dhs-a 48; Pv-a 152 (dāṭhā fangs; lomā hair) 185 (˚vaṭṭa); Sdhp 257.

2. (n.) a bow Ja iii.438.

-agga having its point (end) stretched forward, i.e. in the future (see āyati) Iti 15, Iti 52. -paṇhin having long eye-lashes (one of the signs of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.17 DN iii.143. -pamha a long eye-lash Thig 384 (= dīghapakhuma Thag-a 250).

Sk. āyata, pp. of ā + yam, cp. āyamati

Āyataka

(adj.)

1. long. extended, prolonged, kept up, lasting Vin ii.108 (gītassara); AN iii.251 (id.) Ja i.362.

2. sudden, abrupt, instr. ˚ena abruptly Vin ii.237.

= āyata

Āyatana

(nt.)

1. stretch, extent, reach, compass region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position, occasion (corresponding to Bdhgh’s definition at DN-a i.124 as “samosaraṇa”) DN iii.241, DN iii.279 (vimutti˚); SN ii.41, SN ii.269; SN iv.217 SN v.119 sq., 318. sq.; AN iii.141 (ariya˚); v.61 (abhibh˚ q.v.) Snp 406 (rajass˚ “haunt of passion” = rāgādi-rajassa uppatti-deso Snp-a 381); Ja i.80 (raj˚). Freq. in phrase araññ˚; a lonely spot, a spot in the forest Ja i.173; Vv-a 301; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 54.

2. exertion, doing, working, practice performance (comprising Bdhgh’s definition at DN-a i.124 as paññatti), usually -˚, viz. kamm˚; Nd i.505; Vb 324 Vb 353; kasiṇ˚; AN v.46 sq., 60; Pts i.28; titth˚; AN i.173 AN i.175; Vb 145, Vb 367; sipp˚; (art, craft) DN i.51; Nd ii.505 Vb 324, Vb 353; cp. an˚; non-exertion, indolence, sluggishness Ja v.121.

3. sphere of perception or sense in general, object of thought, sense-organ & object; relation order ■ Cpd. p. 183 says rightly: “āyatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense-organs (the mind being regarded as 6th sense) and sense objects” ■ These āyatanāni (relations, functions reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikāni) and outer (bāhirāni), and comprise the foll.: (a) ajjhatt˚;: 1. cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghāna nose, 4. jivhā tongue, 5. kāya body, 6. mano mind (b) bāh˚;: 1. rūpa visible object, 2. sadda sound, 3 gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phoṭṭhabba tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object ■ For details as regards connotation & application see Dhs trsl. introduction li sq. Cpd. 90 n. 2; 254 sq ■ Approximately covering this meaning (3) is Bdhgh’s definition of āyatana at DN-a i.124 as sañjāti and as kāraṇa (origin & cause i.e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations). See also Nd;2 under rūpa for further classifications-For the above mentioned 12 āyatanāni see the foll. passages: DN ii.302 sq.; DN iii.102, DN iii.243; AN iii.400 AN v.52; Snp 373 (cp. Snp-a 366); Pts i.7, Pts i.22, Pts i.101, Pts i.137; ii. 181, 225, 230; Dhs 1335; Vb 401 sq.; Ne 57, Ne 82 Vism 481; Thag-a 49, Thag-a 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at SN i.113, SN ii.3; SN iv.100, SN iv.174 sq.; Iti 114; Vb 135 sq., 294 Ne 13, Ne 28, Ne 30; Vism 565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Ne 69; of 4 at DN ii.112, DN ii.156; of 2 at DN ii.69 ■ Here also belongs ākās’ ānañc’ āyatana, ākiñcaññ˚ etc. (see under ākāsa etc. and s. v.), e.g. at DN i.34 sq., 183; AN iv.451 sq.; Vb 172, Vb 189, Vb 262 sq.; Vism 324 sq ■ Unclassified passages: MN i.61; MN ii.233; MN iii.32, MN iii.216, MN iii.273; SN i.196; SN ii.6 SN ii.8, SN ii.24, SN ii.72 sq.; SN iii.228; SN iv.98; SN v.426; AN i.113, AN i.163, AN i.225 AN iii.17, AN iii.27, AN iii.82, AN iii.426; AN iv.146, AN iv.426; AN v.30, AN v.321, AN v.351, AN v.359 Nd i.109, Nd i.133, Nd i.171, Nd i.340; Ja i.381 (paripuṇṇa˚); Vb 412 sq. (id.).

-uppāda birth of the āyatanas (see above 3) Vin i.185 -kusala skilled in the ā. MN iii.63. -kusalatā skill in the spheres (of sense) DN iii.212; Dhs 1335. -ṭṭha founded in the sense-organs Pts i.132; Pts ii.121.

Sk. āyatana, not found in the Vedas; but freq. in BSk. From ā + yam, cp. āyata. The pl. is āyatanā at SN iv.70 ■ For full definition of term as seen by the Pāli Commentators see Bdhgh’s expln at DN-a i.124, DN-a i.125, with which cp. the popular etym. at Kp-a 82 “āyassa vā tananato āyatassa vā saṃsāradukkhassa nayanato āyatanāni” and at Vism 527 “āye tanoti āyatañ ca nayatī ti ā.”

Āyatanika

(adj.) belonging to the sphere of (some special sense, see āyatana 3) SN iv.126 (phass niraya & sagga).;

fr. āyatana

Āyati

(f.) “stretching forth”, extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in acc. āyatiṃ (adv.) in future Vin ii.89, Vin ii.185; Vin iii.3; Snp 49; Iti 115 (T. reads āyati but cp. p. 94 where T. āyatiṃ, v.l. āyati) Ja i.89; Ja v.431; DN-a i.236.

fr. ā + yam, cp. Sk. āyati

Āyatika

(adj.) future SN i.142.

fr. last

Āyatikā

(f.) a tube, waterpipe Vin ii.123.

of āyataka

Āyatta

.

1. striving, active, ready, exerted Ja v.395 (˚mana = ussukkamana C.). 2. striven after, pursued Ja i.341.

3. dependent on Vism 310 (assāsa-passāsa˚); Ne 194; Sdhp 477, Sdhp 605.

Sk. āyatta, pp. of ā + yat

Āyanā

(f.) at Dhs-a 259 and Vism 26 is a grammarian’s construction, abstracted from f. abstr. words ending in ˚āyanā, e.g. kankhā → kankhāyanā, of which the correct expln. is a derivation fr. caus ■ formation kankhāyati → kankhāy + a + nā. What the idea of Bdhgh. was in propounding his expln. is hard to say, perhaps he related it to i and understood it to be the same as āyāna.

?

Āyamati

to stretch, extend, stretch out, draw out Mil 176, usually in ster. phrase piṭṭhi me āgilāyati tam ahaṃ āyamissāmi “my back feels weak, I will stretch it” Vin ii.200; DN iii.209; MN i.354; SN iv.184; Ja i.491. Besides this in commentaries e.g. Ja iii.489 (mukhaṃ āyamituṃ).

ā + yam

Āyasa

(adj.) made of iron SN ii.182; AN iii.58; Dhp 345; Ja iv.416; Ja v.81; Vv 845 (an˚ cp. the rather strange expln. at Vv-a 335).

Sk. āyasa, of ayas iron

Āyasakya

(nt.) dishonour, disgrace, bad repute AN iv.96; Ja v.17; Vv-a 110; usually in phrase ˚ṃ pāpuṇāti to fall into disgrace Thag 292; Ja ii.33 = Ja ii.271; Ja iii.514..

Bdhgh on AN iv.96 explains it as ayasaka + ya with guṇa of the initial, cp. ārogya

Āyasmant

(adj.) lit. old, i.e. venerable; used, either as adj. or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some standing (cp. the semantically identical thera ). It occurs usually in nom. āyasmā and is expld. in Nd by typical formula “piya-vacanaṃ garu˚, sagārava-sappaṭissâdhivacanaṃ”, e.g. Nd i.140, Nd i.445; Nd ii.130 on var. Sn loci (e.g. 814, 1032, 1040, 1061, 1096) ■ Freq. in all texts, of later passages see Snp-a 158; Pv-a 53, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 63 Pv-a 78 ■ See also āvuso.

Sk. āyuṣmant, the P. form showing assimilation of u to a

Āyāga

sacrificial fee, gift; (m.) recipient of a sacrifice or gift (deyyadhamma) Snp 486 (= deyyadhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhāna-bhūta Snp-a 412); Thag 566; Ja vi.205 (˚vatthu worthy objact of sacrificial fees).

ā + yāga of yaj

Āyācaka

(adj.-n.) one who begs or prays, petitioner Mil 129.

fr. ā + yāc

Āyācati

1. to request, beg, implore, pray to (acc.) Vin iii.127; DN i.240; Pv-a 160.

2. to make a vow, to vow, promise AN i.88; Ja i.169 = Ja v.472; Ja i.260; Ja ii.117 ■ pp. āyācita (q.v.).

ā + yāc, cp. Buddh. Sk. āyācate Divy 1.

Āyācana

(nt.)

1. asking, adhortation, addressing (t. t. g. in expln. of imperative) Snp-a 43, Snp-a 176 Snp-a 412.

2. a vow, prayer AN i.88; AN iii.47; Ja i.169 = Ja v.472.

fr. āyācati

Āyācita

vowed, promised Ja i.169 (˚bhattajātaka N.).

pp. of āyācati

Āyāta

gone to, undertaken Sdhp 407.

pp. of āyāt.; cp. BSk. āyāta in same meaning at Jtm 210

Āyāti

to come on or here, to come near, approach, get into SN i.240; Snp 669; Snp p.116 (= gacchati Snp-a 463); Ja iv.410; pv ii.1212 (= āgacchati Pv-a 158); Dhp-a i.93 (imper. āyāma let us go) ■ pp. āyāta.

ā + yāti of

Āyāna

(nt.) coming, arrival: see āyanā.

fr. ā + to go

Āyāma

1. (lit.) stretching, stretching out, extension Vin i.349 = Ja iii.488 (mukh˚). 2. (appl.) usually as linear measure: extension, length (often combd. with and contrasted to vitthāra breadth or width & ubbedha height), as n. (esp. in abl. āyāmato instr. āyāmena in length) or as adj. (-˚): Ja i.7, Ja i.49 (˚ato tīṇi yojanasatāni, vitthārato aḍḍhatiyāni); iii.389; Mil 17 (ratanaṃ soḷasahatthaṃ āyāmena aṭṭhahatthaṃ vitthārena) 282 (ratanaṃ catuhatth’āyāmaṃ); Vism 205 (+ vitth˚) Khb 133 (+ vitthāra & parikkhepa); Vv-a 188 (soḷasayojan˚), 199 (˚vitthārehi), 221 (˚ato + vitth˚); Pv-a 77 (+ vitth˚), 113 (id. + ubbedha); Dhp-a i.17 (saṭṭhi-yojan˚).

fr. ā + yam, see āyamati

Āyāsa

trouble, sorrow, only neg. an˚; (adj.) peaceful, free from trouble AN iv.98; Thag 1008.

cp. Sk. āyāsa, etym.?

Āyu

(nt.) life, vitality, duration of life, longevity DN iii.68, DN iii.69, DN iii.73, DN iii.77; SN iii.143 (usmā ca); iv.294; AN i.155; AN ii.63, AN ii.66 (addh˚); iii.47 iv.76, 139; Snp 694, Snp 1019; Iti 89; Ja i.197 (dīgh˚); Vv 555 (cp. Vv-a 247 with its definition of divine life as comprising 30 600 000 years); Vism 229 (length of man’s āyu = 100 years); Dhs 19, Dhs 82, Dhs 295, Dhs 644, Dhs 716; Sdhp 234, Sdhp 239, Sdhp 258 ■ Long or divine life, dibbaṃ āyu is one of the 10 attributes of ādhipateyya or majesty (see ṭhāna ) thus at Vin i.294; DN iii.146; SN iv.275 sq.; AN i.115; iii. 33; iv.242, 396; Pv ii.959 (= jīvitaṃ Pv-a 136).

-ūhā see āyūhā. -kappa duration of life Mil 141; Dhp-a i.250. -khaya decay of life (cp. jīvita-kkhaya) DN i.17 (cp. DN-a i.110); iii.29. -pamāṇa span or measure of life time DN ii.3; AN i.213, AN i.267; AN ii.126 sq.; AN iv.138 AN iv.252 sq., 261; v.172; Pp 16; Vb 422 sq.; Snp-a 476 -pariyanta end of life Iti 99; Vism 422. -saṅkhaya exhaustion of life or lifetime Dpvs v.102. -saṅkhāra (usually pl. ˚ā) constituent of life, conditions or properties resulting in life, vital principle DN ii.106; MN i.295 sq.; SN ii.266; AN iv.311 sq.; Ud 64; Ja iv.215; Mil 285; Vism 292; Dhp-a i.129; Pv-a 210. Cp. BSk. āyuḥ-saṃskāra Divy 203.

Vedic āyus; Av. āyu, gradation form of same root as Gr. αἰών “aeon”, αἰέν always; Lat. aevum, Goth aiws. Ohg. ēwa, io always; Ger. ewig eternal; Ags. āē eternity, ā always (cp. ever and aye)

Āyuka

(-˚) (adj.) -being of life; having a life or age AN iv.396 (niyat˚); Vv-a 196 (yāvatāyukā dibbasampatti divine bliss lasting for a lifetime). Esp. freq in combn. with dīgha (long) and appa (short) as dīghāyuka AN iv.240; Pv-a 27; appāyuka AN iv.247; Pv-a 103 both at Vism 422. In phrase vīsati-vassasahass’āyukesu manussesu at the time when men lived 20 000 years DN ii.5–⁠12 (see Table at Dial. ii.6); Dhp-a ii.9; Pv-a 135 dasa-vassasahass’āyukesu manussesu (10 000 years) Pv-a 73; cattāḷīsa˚ Dhp-a i.103; catusaṭṭhi-kapp’āyukā subhakiṇhā Vism 422.

fr. āyu

Āyukin

(adj.) = āyuka; in appāyukin short lived Vv 416.

fr. āyu

Āyuta

(adj.)

1. connected with, endowed, furnished with Thag 753 (dve pannaras’āyuta due to twice fifteen); Snp 301 (nārī-varagaṇ˚ = ˚saṃyutta Snp-a 320); Pv ii.124 (nānā-saragaṇ˚ ˚yutta Pv-a 157).

2. seized, conquered, in dur˚; hard to conquer, invincible Ja vi.271 (= paccatthikehi durāsada C.).

Sk. ayuta, pp. of ā + yu, yuvati

Āyutta

1. yoked, to connected with, full of Pv i.1014 (tejas’āyuta T., but Pv-a 52 reads ˚āyutta and explns. as samāyutta); Pv-a 157 (ākiṇṇa of Pv ii.124).

2. intent upon, devoted to SN i.67.

Sk. āyukta; pp. of ā + yuj

Āyuttaka

(adj.-n.) one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer Ja i.230 (˚vesa); iv.492; Dhp-a i.101, Dhp-a i.103, Dhp-a i.180.

āyutta + ka

Āyudha

is the Vedic form of the common Pāli form āvudha weapon, and occurs only spuriously at DN i.9 (v.l. āvudha).

Āyuvant

(adj.) advanced in years, old, of age Thag 234.

fr. āyu

Āyusmant

(adj.) having life or vitality Pv-a 63 (āyusmāviññāṇa feeling or sense of vitality; is reading correct?).

Sk. āyuṣmant; see also the regular P. form āyasmant

Āyussa

(adj.) connected with life, bringing (long) life AN iii.145 dhamma).

Sk. *āyuṣya

Āyūhaka

(adj.) keen, eager, active Mil 207 (+ viriyavā).

fr. āyūhati

Āyūhati

lit. to push on or forward aim at, go for, i.e. (1) to endeavour, strain, exert oneself SN i.1 (ppr. anāyūhaṃ unstriving), 48; Ja vi.35 (viriyaṃ karoti C.), 283 (= vāyamati C.) ■ (2) to be keen on (w. acc.), to cultivate, pursue, do Snp 210 (karoti Snp-a 258); Mil 108 (kammaṃ ūyūhitvā), 214 (kammaṃ āyūhi), 326 (maggaṃ) ■ pp. āyūhita (q.v.).

ā + y + ūhati with euphonic y, fr. Vedic ūhati, ūh1, a gradation of vah (see etym. under vahati). Kern’s etym. on Toev. 99 = āyodhati is to be doubted, more acceptable is Morris’ expln. at J.P.T.S. 1885, 58 sq. although contradictory in part.

Āyūhana

(adj.-n..)

1. endeavouring, striving, Pts i.10 sq., 32, 52; ii.218; Vism 103, Vism 212, Vism 462, Vism 579 f. āyūhanī Dhs 1059 (“she who toils” trsl.) = Vb 361 Nd ii.taṇhā 1. (has āyūhanā).

2. furtherance, pursuit DN-a i.64 (bhavassa).

fr. āyūhati

Āyūhā

f. life, lifetime, only in ˚pariyosāna at the end of (his) life Pv-a 136, Pv-a 162; Vv-a 319.

āyu + ūhā

Āyūhāpeti

to cause somebody to toil or strive after Dhs-a 364.

Caus. II. fr. āyūhati

Āyūhita

busy, eager, active Mil 181.

*Sk. ā + ūhita, pp. of ūh

Āyoga

1. binding, bandage Vin ii.135; Vv 3341; Vv-a 142 (˚paṭṭa).

2 yoke Dhs 1061 (avijj˚), 1162.

3. ornament, decoration Nd i.226; Ja iii.447 (˚vatta, for v.l. ˚vanta?).

4. occupation devotion to, pursuit, exertion DN i.187; Dhp 185 (= payoga-karaṇa Dhp-a iii.238).

5. (t. t.) obligation guarantee(?) Snp-a 179 ■ Cp. sam˚.

Sk. āyoga, of ā + yuj; cp. āyutta

Ārakatta

(nt.) warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. gen.); occurring only in pop. etym. of arahant at AN iv.145; Dhp-a iv.228; DN-a i.146 = Vv-a 105, Vv-a 106 = Pv-a 7; cp. Dhs-a 349.

*ārakāt + tvaṃ

Ārakā

(adv.) far off, far from, away from, also used as prep. c abl. and as adj. pl. keeping away from, removed, far Vin ii.239 = AN iv.202 (sanghamhā); DN i.99, DN i.102 (adj. 167; MN i.280 (adj.) SN ii.99; SN iv.43 sq.; AN i.281; Iti 91; Ja i.272; Ja iii.525; Ja v.451; Mil 243; Vv-a 72, Vv-a 73 (adj + viratā).

Sk. ārāt & ārakāt, abl. form. fr. *āraka, see ārā;2

Ārakkha

watch, guard, protection, care DN ii.59; DN iii.289; SN iv.97, SN iv.175, SN iv.195; AN ii.120; AN iii.38; iv. 266, 270, 281 (˚sampadā), 322 (id.), 400; v.29 sq.; Ja i.203; Ja ii.326; Ja iv.29 (˚purisa); v.212 (˚ṭṭhāna, i.e. harem) 374 (˚parivāra); Pp 21 (an˚), 24; Mil 154; Vism 19 (˚gocara preventive behaviour, cautiousness); Snp-a 476 (˚devatā); Kp-a 120 (id.), 169; Dhp-a ii.146; Pv-a 195 Sdhp 357, Sdhp 365.

ā + rakkha

Ārakkhika

a guard, watchman Ja iv.29.

fr. ārakkha

Ārakkheyya

see arakkheyya.

Āragga

(nt.) the point of an awl, the head of certain arrows having the shape of an awl, or an arrow of that kind (see Halayudha p. 151) AN i.65; Snp 625, Snp 631; Dhp 401 Dhp 407; Vism 306; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iv.181.

ārā + agga; Sk. ārāgra of ārā an awl, a prick

Āracayāracayā

by means of hammering, slashing or beating (like beating a hide) Snp 673 (gloss ārajayārajayā fr. ā + *rañj or *raj ) ■ Snp-a 481 explns. the passage as follows: ārajayārajayā; i.e. yathā manussā allacammaṃ bhūmiyaṃ pattharitvā khīlehi ākoṭenti, evaṃ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāḷetvā ekam ekaṃ koṭiṃ chinditvā vihananti, chinnachinnakoṭi punappuna samuṭṭhāti; āracayāracayā ti pi pāṭho, āviñjitvā (v.l. BB āvijjhitvā) āviñjitvā ti attho ■ Cp. ārañjita.

ā + racayā a ger. or abl. form. fr. ā + *rac, in usual Sk. meaning “to produce”, but here as a sound-root for slashing noise, in reduplication for sake of intensification. Altogether problematic

Āraññaka

(adj.) belonging to solitude or the forest, sequestered; living in the forest, fond of seclusion, living as hermits (bhikkhū). Freq. spelt araññaka (q.v.) ■ Vin i.92 (bhikkhū); ii.32, 197, 217 (bh.) 265 (bh.); MN i.214; AN iii.100 sq., 219; iv.21; v.66; Ja iii.174 (v.l. BB. a˚); Mil 342; Dhp-a ii.94 (vihāra).

fr. arañña + ka

Āraññakatta

(nt.) the habit of sequestration or living in solitude MN i.214; MN iii.40; AN i.38.

abstr. fr. āraññaka, see also araññakatta

Āraññika

(adj.) = āraññaka Vin iii.15; AN i.24; Pp 69; Vism 61, Vism 71 (where defined); Mil 341.

Ārañjita

furrowed, cut open, dug up, slashed torn (perhaps also “beaten”) MN i.178 (hatthipadaṃ dantehi ārañjitaṃ an elephant-track bearing the marks of tusks, i.e. occasional slashes or furrows).

in form = Sk. *ārañjita, ā + pp. of rañjayati, Caus. of rañj or raj, but in meaning different. Perhaps to rac (as *racita) to furnish with, prepare, or better still to be regarded as an idiomatic Pāli form of soundroot *rac (see āracayā˚) mixed with rañj, of which we find another example in the double spelling of āracayā (& ārajayā) q.v.

Ārata

leaving off, keeping away from, abstaining Ja iv.372 (= virata); Nd ii.591 (+ virata paṭivirata).

Sk. ārata, pp. of ā + ram, cp. ārati

Ārati

(f.) leaving off, abstinence Vv 639 (= paṭivirati Vv-a 263); in exegetical style occurring in typ. combn. with virati paṭivirati veramaṇī, e.g. at Nd ii.462; Dhs 299.

Sk. ārati, ā + ram

Āratta

(nt.?) time, period (orig. affected, tinted with), only in cpd. vassāratta the rainy season, lent Ja iv.444; Dāvs ii.74.

Sk. cp. ārakta, pp. of ā + raj

Āraddha

(adj.) begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm AN i.148 (āraddhaṃ me viriyaṃ Iti 30; Pv-a 73 (ṭhapetuṃ began to place) 212 (gantuṃ). Cp. ārādhaka 1.

-citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled DN i.176; MN i.414; SN ii.21; Snp p.102; Snp-a 436. Cp. ārādheti 1 -viriya (adj.) strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin i.182; DN iii.252, DN iii.268, DN iii.282, DN iii.285; AN i.24; Snp 68, Snp 344; Iti 71 (opp. hīna-viriya); Nd ii.131; Pts i.171; Thag-a 95. Cp viriyārambha; f. abstr. ˚viriyatā MN i.19.

pp. of ā + rabh

Ārabbha

(indecl.)

1. beginning undertaking etc., in cpd. ˚vatthu occasion for making an effort concern, duty, obligation DN iii.256 = AN iv.334 (eight such occasions enumd).

2. (prep. with acc.) lit. beginning with, taking (into consideration), referring to concerning, with reference to, about DN i.180; AN ii.27; Iti 103 (senāsanaṃ ā.); Snp 972 (upekhaṃ; v.l. ārambha C. uppādetvā); Pv i.41 (pubbe pete ā.); Dhp-a i.3; Dhp-a ii.37; Pv-a 3 (seṭṭhiputta-petaṃ ā.), 16, and passim.

ger. of ārabhati2 in abs. function; cp. Sk. ārabhya meaning since, from

Ārabhati1

to kill, destroy MN i.371 (pāṇaṃ).

not with Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 202 fr. rabh and identical with ārabhati2, but with Kern, Toev. s. v identical with Sk. ālabhate, ā + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirārambha

Ārabhati2 & Ārabbhati;

to begin, start, undertake, attempt SN i.156 (ārabbhatha “bestir yourselves”) = Mil 245 Thag 256 (bh.); Pp 64 (bh.); viriyaṃ ārabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself (cp. ārambha) AN iv.334. aor. ārabhi Dhp-a ii.38 & ārabbhi Pv-a 35 ■ ger ārabbha, see sep ■ pp. āraddha (q.v.).

ā + rabhati, Sk. ārabhati & ārambhati, ā + ; rabh

Ārambha

1. attempt, effort, inception of energy (cp. Dhs trsl. 15 & K. S. p. 318 giving C. def. as kicca, karaṇīya, attha, i.e. 1. undertaking duty, 2. object) SN i.76 (mah˚); v.66, 104 sq. (˚dhātu) iii.338 (id.), 166 (˚ja; T. arabbhaja, v.l. ārambhaja to be preferred) = Pp 64; Mil 244; Net 41; Dhs-a 145 -viriyārambha (cp. āraddha-viriya) zeal, resolution, energy Vin ii.197; SN iv.175; AN i.12, AN i.16.

2. support, ground object, thing Ne 70 sq., 107; an˚; unsupported, independent Snp 743 (= nibbāna Snp-a 507). Cp. also nirambha upārambha, sārambha.

Sk. ārambha in meaning “beginning”, fr ā + rabh (rambh) cp. ārabhati

Ārammaṇa

(nt.) primary meaning “foundation”, from this applied in the foll. senses: (1 support, help, footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means of achieving what is desired, i.e. basis of operation, chance Snp 1069 (= ālambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd ii.132); Pv i.41 (yaṃ kiñc’ ārammaṇaṃ katvā) ārammaṇaṃ labhati (+ otāraṃ labhati) to get the chance SN ii.268; SN iv.185 ■ (2) condition, ground, cause, means esp. a cause of desire or clinging to life, pl. ˚ā causes of rebirth (interpreted by taṇhā at Nd i.429), lust Snp 474 (= paccayā Snp-a 410), 945 (= Nd i.429); Kp-a 23; Dhp-a i.288 (sappāy˚); Pv-a 279 ■ (3) a basis for the working of the mind & intellect; i.e. sense-object, object of thought or consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of “relation” it is closely connected with āyatana (see āyatana3), so that it sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Cpd. 3 distinguishes a 5 fold object viz. citta, cetasika, pasāda-& sukhuma-rūpa, paññatti nibbāna. See on term especially; Cpd. 3, 14; Dhs trsl. xli..& 209 ■ A 1. sq.; iv.385; Snp 506; Pts i.57 sq. 84 (four ā.); ii.97, 118, 143; Dhs 1 (dhamm˚ object of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim; Vb 12, Vb 79, Vb 92 Vb 319, Vb 332 (four); Ne 191 (six); Vism 87 sq., 375 (˚sankantika), 430 sq. (in var. sets with ref. to var. objects) 533; Dhs-a 48, Dhs-a 127; Vv-a 11, Vv-a 38 ■ rūpārammaṇa lit dependence on form, i.e. object of sight, visible form especially striking appearance, visibility, sight DN iii.228; SN iii.53; AN i.82; Ja i.304; Ja ii.439, Ja ii.442; Pv-a 265. ārammaṇaṃ karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one’s concern (cp. Pv i.41, above 1)-ārammaṇa -kusala clever in the objects (of meditation SN iii.266; ā˚ -paccayatā relation of presentation (i.e. of subj. & obj.) Ne 80 ■ (4) (-˚) (adj.) being supported by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon Pv-a 8 (nissay˚), 98 (ek˚); Vv-a 119 (buddh˚ pīti rapture centred in the Buddha).

cp. Sk. ālambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh (see rabhati)

Āraha

(adj.) metri causa for araha deserving Ja vi.164.

Āraha

(nt.) only in pl. gihīnaṃ ārahāni, things proper to laymen, DN iii.163.

Ārā1

(f.) an awl; see cp āragga. Perhaps a der. of ārā is āḷakā (q.v.).

Sk. ārâ; *ēl “pointed”, as in Ohg. āla = Ger. ahle, Ags. āēl = E awl; Oicel. alr

Ārā2

(indecl.) far from, remote (from) (adv. as well as prep. with abl.) Snp 156 (pamādamhā), 736; Dhp 253 (āsavakkhayā; Dhp-a iii.377 expls. by dūragata); Ja ii.449 (jhānabhūmiyā; = dūre ṭhita C.) v.78 (saṃyame; = dūrato C.). See also ārakā.

-cāra [in this combn. by Kern, Toev. s. v. unecessarily expld. as ārā = ārya; cp. similar phrases under ārakā] a life remote (from evil) AN iv.389. -cārin living far from evil leading a virtuous life DN i.4; MN i.179; MN iii.33; AN iii.216, AN iii.348; AN iv.249; AN v.138, AN v.205; DN-a i.72 (= abrahmacariyato dūra-cārin).

Vedic ārād, abl. as adv.; orig. a root der. fr. *ara remoteness, as in Sk. araṇa foreign & araṇya solitude q.v. under araṇa;1 and arañña

Ārādhaka

(adj.-n.) 1. [perhaps for *āraddhaka because of analogy to āraddha of ā + rabh ] successful accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin i.70 (an˚ one who fails); MN i.491; MN ii.197 = AN i.69; Mil 243; SN v.19; AN v.329 (in correlation with āraddhaviriya).

2. pleasing, propitiating Mil 227; Vv-a 220 (˚ikā f.).

fr. ā + rādh

Ārādhana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) (either fr. ā + rādh or ā + rabh, cp. ārādhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment DN ii.287 (opp. virādhanā failure); MN i.479 MN ii.199; AN v.211 sq.; Ja iv.427.

Ārādhanīya

(adj.) to be attained, to be won; successful Vin i.70 (an˚); Ja ii.233 (dur˚).

grd. fr. ārādheti

Ārādhita

pleased Sdhp 510.

pp. of ārādheti; Sk. ārādhita, but BSk. ārāgita, e.g. Divy 131, Divy 233

Ārādheti

1. to please, win favour propitiate, convince Ja i.337 (dārake), 421, 452; ii.72 (manusse); iv.274 (for ābhirādheti T.); Vism 73 (ārādhayanto Nāthassa vana-vāsena mānasaṃ); Dhp-a ii.71; Dāvs iii.93 (ārādhayi sabbajanaṃ); Mil 352. In older literature only in phrase cittaṃ ārādheti to please one’s heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate DN i.118 sq., 175 (but cp āraddha-citta to ārabhati); MN i.85, MN i.341; SN ii.107; SN v.109; Ja ii.372; Mil 25.

2. to attain, accomplish, fulfill succeed SN v.23 (maggaṃ), 82, 180, 294; It iii. (v.l. ārām˚); Snp 488 = Snp 509. Cp. ārādhaka 1 ■ pp. ārādhita (q.v.) ■ See also parābhetvā.

Caus. of ā + rādh, in meaning 2 confused with ārabhati. In BSk. strangely distorted to ārāgayati; freq in Divy as well as Avs

Ārāma

1. pleasure, fondness of (-˚), delight, always as adj. (-˚) delighting in, enjoying finding pleasure in (usually combd. with rata, e.g. dhammārāma dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) SN i.235 SN iv.389 sq. (bhav˚, upādān˚); AN i.35, AN i.37, AN i.130; AN ii.28 (bhāvan˚); Iti 82 (dhamm˚); Snp 327 (id.; expld. by Snp-a 333 as rati and “dhamme ārāmo assā ti”); Pp 53 (samagg˚) Vb 351.

2. a pleasure-ground, park, garden (lit sport, sporting); classified at Vin iii.49 as pupph˚ and phal˚ a park with flowers or with fruit (i.e. orchard) def. at Dhp-a iii.246 as Veḷuvana-Jīvak’ ambavan’ ādayo i.e. the park of Veḷuvana, or the park belonging to Jīvaka or mango-groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin ii.109; DN i.106; Dhp 188; Vv 795 (amb˚ garden of mangoes); Vv-a 305 (id.); Pv ii.78 (pl. ārāmāni = ārām’ ûpavanāni Pv-a 102) ■ (b) (in special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Sangha for the benefit of the bhikkhus where they meet & hold discussions about sacred secular matters; a place of recreation and meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst the many ārāmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is that of Anāthapiṇḍika (Jetavana; see Ja i.92

94) DN i.178; Vin iv.69; others more frequently mentioned are e.g. the park of Ambapālī (Vin i.233); of Mallikā (DN i.178) etc ■ Vin i.39, Vin i.140, Vin i.283, Vin i.291; Vin ii.170; Vin iii.6, Vin iii.45, Vin iii.162 Vin iv.85; AN ii.176; Dpvs v.18.

-pāla keeper of a park or orchard, gardener Vin ii.109; Vv-a 288. -ropa,-ropana planter, planting of pleasuregroves SN i.33; Pv-a 151. -vatthu the site of an Ārāma Vin i.140; ii. 170; iii.50, 90.

Sk. ārāma, ā + ram

Ārāmakinī

(f.) see ārāmika.

Ārāmatā

(f.) pleasure, satisfaction AN ii.28; AN iii.116; Vb 381; Mil 233.

abstr. fr. ārāma 1

Ārāmika

(adj.) 1. (to ārāma 1) finding delight in, fond of (c. gen.) (or servant in general?) Mil 6 (sanghassa trsl. at the service of the order).

2. (to ārāma 2) belonging to an Ārāma, one who shares the congregation, an attendant of the Ārāma Vin i.207 sq. Vin ii.177 (& ˚pesaka), 211; iii.24; iv.40; v.204; AN ii.78 (˚samaṇuddesa); iii.109 (id.), 275 (˚pesaka); Ja i.38 (˚kicca Vism 74 (˚samaṇuddesa) ■ f. ārāmakiṇī a female attendant or visitor of an Ārāma Vin i.208.

fr. ārāma

Ārāva

cry, sound, noise Dāvs iv.46.

cp. Sk. ārāva, fr. ā + ru

Āriya

in anāriya at Snp 815 is metric for anariya (q.v.).

Āruṇṇa

(nt.) weeping, crying, lamenting Mil 357.

orig. pp of ā + rud

Āruppa

(adj.) formless, incorporeal; nt. formless existence DN iii.275; MN i.410 cp. 472; iii.163; SN i.131 (˚ṭṭhāyin); ii.123; AN iv.316; Iti 61; Snp 754; Ja i.406; Dhs 1385 (cp. trsl. 57); Vism 338; DN-a i.224; Snp-a 488, Snp-a 508; Sdhp 5, Sdhp 10; the four Vism iii, 326 sq.

fr. arūpa as ā (= a2)-*rūpya

Āruhati

to climb, ascend, go up or on to Snp 1014 (aor. āruhaṃ); Sdhp 188; ger. āruhitvā Snp 321 āruyha Ja vi.452; Snp 139 (v.l. abhiruyha); Iti 71. Caus. āropeti (q.v.).

ā + ruh

Ārūgya

see ārogya.

Ārūḷha

1. ascended, mounted, gone up, gone on to iv.137; Ja vi.452 (T. āruḷha); Vism 135 (nekkhamma-paṭipadaṃ an˚); Vv-a 64 (magga˚); Pv-a 47 (˚nāva), 56 (hatthi˚).

2. come about, effected, made done Pv-a 2, Pv-a 144 (cp. BSk. pratijñām ārūḍha having taken a vow Divy 26).

3. (of an ornament) put on (to), arrayed Ja vi.153, Ja vi.488.

pp. of āruhati

Ārūha

see āroha.

Ārogatā

(f.) freedom from illness, health Mil 341.

abstr. fr. a + roga + tā

Ārogya

(nt.) absence of illness, health DN i.11; DN iii.220 (˚mada), 235 (˚sampadā); MN i.451 (T. ārūgya, v.l. ārogya), 508, 509; SN ii.109; AN i.146 (˚mada); ii.143; iii.72; v.135 sq.; Snp 749, Snp 257 = Dhp 204 = Ja iii.196; Nd i.160; Vism 77 (˚mada pride of health); Pv-a 129, Pv-a 198; Sdhp 234.

abstr. fr. aroga, i.e. ā (= a2) + roga + ya

Ārocāpana

(nt.) announcement Dhp-a ii.167.

fr. ārocāpeti, Caus. of āroceti

Ārocāpeti

(Caus. II. of āroceti] to make some one announce, to let somebody know, usually in phrase kālaṃ ā. Snp p.111; Ja i.115, Ja i.125; Dhp-a ii.89; Pv-a 141.

Ārocita

announced, called Vin ii.213 (kāla).

pp. of āroceti

Āroceti

to relate, to tell, announce, speak to address DN i.109, DN i.224; Pv ii.89 (aor, ārocayi); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 13 (aññamaññaṃ anārocetvā not speaking to each other), 81 274 & freq. passim ■ pp. ārocita; Caus. II. ārocāpeti (q.v.).

ā + roceti, Caus. of ruc; cp. BSk. ārocayati Sp. Avs i.9 etc.

Ārodana

(nt.) crying, lamenting AN iii.268 sq.; Ja i.34; Dhp-a i.184; Dhp-a ii.100.

fr. ā + rud, cp. āruṇṇa

Āropana

(nt.) “putting on to”, impaling Mil 197 (sūl˚), 290 (id.).

fr. āropeti

Āropita

1. produced, come forward, set up Pv-a 2.

2. effected, made SN iii.12; Pv-a 92 Pv-a 257.

3. put on (to a stake), impaled Pv-a 220 (= āvuta).

pp. of āropeti

Āropeti

.

1. to make ascend, to lead up to (w. acc.) Pv-a 76 (pāsādaṃ), 160 (id.)

2. to put on, take up to (w. acc. or loc.) Pv ii.92 (yakkhaṃ yānaṃ āropayitvāna); Pv-a 62 (sarīraṃ citakaṃ ā.), 100 (bhaṇḍaṃ sakaṭesu ā.).

3. to put on, commit to the care of entrust, give over to (w. loc.) Ja i.227; Pv-a 154 (rajjaṃ amaccesu ā.).

4. to bring about, get ready, make Pv-a 73, Pv-a 257 (sangahaṃ ā. make a collection); Snp-a 51, Snp-a 142. 5. to exhibit, tell, show, give SN i.160 (ovādaṃ); Mil 176 (dosaṃ); Dhp-a ii.75 (id.)

6. vādaṃ āropeti to refute a person, to get the better of (gen.) Vin i.60; MN ii.122; SN i.160 ■ pp. āropita (q.v.).

Caus. of āruhati

Āroha

(-˚)

1. climbing up, growth, increase, extent, in cpd. ˚pariṇāha length & circumference SN ii.206; AN i.288; AN ii.250; AN iv.397; AN v.19; Ja iii.192; v. 299; vi.20; Vb 345 (˚māna + pariṇāha-māna); Snp-a 382.

2. one who has climbed up, mounted on, a rider usually in cpd. ass˚ & hatth˚; horse-rider & elephantrider SN iv.310; AN ii.166 = AN iii.162 (T. ārūha); iv.107; Dhs-a 305.

3. outfit, possession (or increase, as 1? Snp 420 (vaṇṇ˚).

fr. ā + ruh

Ārohaṇa

(nt.) climbing, ascending; ascent Ja i.70; Ja vi.488; Mil 352; Vism 244; Pv-a 74. Alaka-manda

fr. ā + ruh

Ālaka-manda

at Vin ii.152 is of uncertain reading and meaning (“open to view”? or “not having pegs” āḷaka?) vv.ll. āḷakamanta & ālakamandāra; Bdhgh on p. 321 explns. āḷakamandā ti ekangaṇā manussâbhikiṇṇā i.e. full of a crowd of people, Ch. quotes ālakamandā as “the city of Kuvera” (cp. Sk. alakā).

ālaya˚?

Ālaggeti

to (make) hang on to (loc.), to stick on, fasten to Vin ii.110 (pattaṃ veḷagge ālaggetvā).

ā + Caus. of lag

Ālapati

to address SN i.177, SN i.212; Ja v.201; Snp-a 42, Snp-a 347, Snp-a 383, Snp-a 394 (= āmantayi of Snp 997), 487 (avhayati); Pv-a 11, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 69.

ā + lapati

Ālapana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) talking to, addressing, conversation Vin iii.73 (with ref. to exclam. “ambho”) Ja v.253 (˚ā); Vism 23 (˚ā); Snp-a 396; Pv-a 131 (re ti ā.).

fr. ā + lap

Ālapanatā

(f.) speaking to, conversing with, conversation MN i.331) (an˚).

abstr. fr. ālapana

Ālamba

anything to hang on, support SN i.53 (an˚ without support); Snp 173 (id. + appatiṭṭha); Ja iii.396; Mil 343; Sdhp 245, Sdhp 463.

Sk. ālamba, ā + lamb

Ālambati

to hang on to or up, to take hold of, to fasten to Vin i.28, Ja i.57; Ja vi.192; Vv 8448; Thag-a 34ālambeti id. Vv-a 32.

ā + lamb

Ālambana

(adj.-n..) (adj.) hanging down from, hanging up Ja iii.396; Ja iv.457; Snp-a 214 ■ (nt.) support, balustrade (or screen?) Vin ii.117 Vin ii.152 (˚bāha) Mil 126. Alambara & Alambara;

fr. ā + lamb, cp. ālamba

Ālambara & Āḷambara

(nt.) a drum Vin i.15 (l); Ja ii.344 (ḷ); v.390 (l); Vv 5418 (ḷ).

Sk. āḍambara

Ālaya

(m. & nt.)

1. orig. roosting place, perch i.e. abode settling place, house Ja i.10 (geh˚); Mil 213; Dhp-a ii.162 (an˚ = anoka), 170 (= oka).

2. “hanging on”, attachment, desire, clinging, lust SN i.136 = Vin i.4 (˚rāma “devoted to the things to which it clings” K. S.) Vin iii.20, Vin iii.111; SN iv.372 (an˚); v.421 sq. (id.); AN ii.34, AN ii.131 (˚rāma); iii.35; Iti 88; Snp 177 (kām˚ = kāmesu taṇhā-diṭṭhi-vasena duvidho ālayo Snp-a 216), 535 (+ āsavāni), 635; Ne 121, Ne 123 (˚samugghāta); Vism 293 (id.) 497; Mil 203 (Buddh ˚ṃ akāsi?); Dhp-a i.121; Dhp-a iv.186 (taṇhā); Snp-a 468 (= anoka of Snp 366).

3. pretence pretext, feint [cp. BSk. ālaya Mvu iii.314] Ja i.157 (gilān˚) 438; iii.533 (mat˚); iv.37 (gabbhinī); vi.20, 262 (gilān˚).

cp. Sk. ālaya, ā + ; , līyate, cp. allīna & allīyati, also nirālaya

Ālayati

see allīyati.

Ālassa

(nt.) sloth, idleness, laziness SN i.43; DN iii.182; AN iv.59; AN v.136; Sdhp 567. Spelling also ālasya SN i.43 (v.l. BB); Vb 352; Mil 289, and ālasiya Ja i.427; DN-a i.310; Dhp-a i.299; Vv-a 43. Alana & Alana;

Der. fr. alasa

Ālāna & Āḷāna

(nt.) a peg, stake, post, esp one to which an elephant is tied Ja i.415; Ja iv.308; Dhp-a i.126 (ḷ) where all MSS. have āḷāhana, perhaps correctly.

for ānāhana with substitution of l for n (cp. apilandhana for apinandh˚ and contraction of ˚āhana to ˚āna originally meaning “tying to” then the thing to which anything is tied

Āli1

(m. or f.? a certain kind of fish Ja v.405.

Sk. āḷi

Āli2 & Āḷi;

(f.) a dike, embankment Vin ii.256; MN iii.96; AN ii.166 (˚pabbheda); iii.28; Ja i.336; Ja iii.533, Ja iii.334.

Sk. ālī

Ālika

in saccālika at SN iv.306 is sacc˚alika distortion of truth, falsehood SN iv.306.

Ālikhati

to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing Ja i.71; Mil 51.

ā + likhati

Āliṅga

a small drum Ja v.156 (suvaṇṇ˚-tala).

ā + ling

Āliṅgati

to embrace, enfold DN i.230; DN iii.73; Ja i.281; Ja iv.21, Ja iv.316, Ja iv.438; Ja v.8; Mil 7; Dhp-a i.101: Vv-a 260.

ā + liṅg

Ālitta

besmeared, stained Thag 737.

pp. of ālimpati; Sk. ālipta

Ālinda

(& Āḷinda) a terrace or verandah before the house-door Vin i.248; Vin ii.153; DN i.89; MN ii.119; SN iv.290 (ḷ); AN v.65 (ḷ); Ja vi.429; DN-a i.252; Dhp-a i.26; Dhp-a iv.196; Snp-a 55 (˚ka-vāsin; v.l. alindaka); Mvu 35, Mvu 3. As ālindaka at Ja iii.283.

Sk. alinda

Ālippati

Pass. of ālimpeti (q.v.).

Ālimpana

(nt.) conflagration, burning, flame Mil 43.

for āḷimp˚ = Sk. ādīpana, see ālimpeti2

Ālimpita

ignited, lit. AN iv.102 (v.l. ālepita).

pp. of ālimpeti2

Ālimpeti1

to smear, anoint Vin ii.107; SN iv.177 (vaṇaṃ) ■ Caus II. ālimpāpeti Vin iv.316 ■ Pass. ālimpīyati Mil 74 & ālippati Dhp-a iv.166 (v.l. for lippati) ■ pp. ālitta (q.v.).

Sk. ālimpayati or ālepayati. ā + lip or limp

Ālimpeti2

to kindle, ignite set fire to Vin ii.138 (dāyo ālimpetabbo); iii.85; DN ii.163 (citakaṃ); AN i.257; Dhp-a i.177 (āvāsaṃ read āvāpaṃ), 225; Pv-a 62 (kaṭṭhāni) ■ pp. ālimpita (q.v.).

for Sk. ādīpayati, with change of d to l over ḷ and substitution of limp for ḷīp after analogy of roots in ˚mp, like lup → lump, lip → limp

Ālu

(nt.) a bulbous plant, Radix; Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) Ja iv.371 = Ja vi.578; Ja iv.373.

Sk. ālu & ˚ka; cognate with Lat. ālum & alium, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under alium

Āluka1

= ālu Ja iv.46 (C. for ālupa).

Āluka2

(adj.) susceptiblé of, longing for, affected with (-˚) Vin i.288 (sīt˚); DN-a i.198 (id.); Ja ii.278 (taṇh˚ greedy).

etym.?

Ālupa

(nt.) = āluka the edible root of Amorphophallus Campanulatus Ja iv.46 (= āluka-kaṇḍa C.).

the form āluva occurs at Ap 237.

etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests ālu-a → āluva → ālupa

Ālumpakāra

breaking off, falling off (?) or forming into bits(?) Dhp-a ii.55 (˚gūtha).

reading not sure, to ālumpati or ālopa

Ālumpati

to pull out, break off MN i.324.

ā + lup or lump, cp. ālopa

Āluḷa

(adj. being in motion, confusion or agitation, disturbed, agitated Ja vi.431.

fr. ā + lul

Āluḷati

to move here & there, ppr. med.; āluḷamāna agitated, whirling about Dhp-a iv.47 (T. ālūl˚; v.l. āḷul˚) confuse Dhs-a 375 Caus. āluḷeti to set in motion, agitate, confound Ja ii.9 Ja ii.33 ■ pp. āluḷita (q.v.).

ā + lul; Sk. ālolati, cp. also P. āloḷeti

Āluḷita

agitated, confused Ja ii.101; Mil 397 (+ khalita).

pp. of āluḷeti

Ālepa

ointment, salve, liniment Vin i.274; Mil 74; Dhs-a 249.

cp. Sk. ālepa, of ā + lip

Ālepana

(nt.) anointing, application of salve DN i.7 (mukkh˚).

fr. ā + lip

Āloka

seeing, sight (obj. & subj.), i.e.

1. sight, view, look SN iv.128 = Snp 763; AN iii.236 (āloke nikkhitta laid before one’s eye). anāloka without sight, blind Mil 296 (andha + ).

2. light AN i.164 (tamo vigato ā. uppanno) = Iti 100 (vihato); AN ii.139 (four lights, i.e. canda˚, suriya˚, agg˚, paññ˚, of the moon, sun, fire & wisdom); Ja ii.34; Dhs 617 (opp. andhakāra); Vv-a 51 (dīp˚).

3. (clear) sight, power of observation, intuition, in combn. with vijjā knowledge DN ii.33 = SN ii.7 = SN ii.105, cp. Pts ii.150 sq. (obhāsaṭṭhena, S A on ii.7).

4. splendour Vv-a 53; DvA 71.

-kara making light, bringing light, n. light-bringer Iti 108. -karaṇa making light, illumining Iti 108. -da giving light or insight Thag 3. -dassana seeing light, i.e. perceiving Thag 422. -pharaṇa diffusing light or diffusion of light Vb 334; Ne 89. -bahula good in sight fig. full of foresight AN iii.432. -bhūta light Ja vi.459 -saññā consciousness or faculty of sight or perception DN iii.223; AN ii.45; AN iii.93 -saññin conscious of sight i.e. susceptible to sight or insight DN iii.49; MN iii.3; AN ii.211; AN iii.92, AN iii.323; AN iv.437; AN v.207; Pp 69. -sandhi “break for the light”, a slit to look through, an opening a crack or casement Vin i.48 = Vin ii.209 = Vin ii.218; Vin ii.172 Vin iii.65; Vin iv.47; Ja iv.310; Pv-a 24.

ā + lok, Sk. āloka

Ālokana

(nt.) looking at, regarding DN-a i.194.

fr. ā + lok

Ālokita

(nt.) looking before, looking at, looking forward (opp. vilokitaṃ looking behind or backward), always in combn. ālokita-vilokita in ster. phrase at DN i.70 = e.g. AN ii.104, AN ii.106, AN ii.210; Pp 44, Pp 45, Pp 50 Vism 19; Vv-a 6; DN-a i.193 (ālokitaṃ purato pekkhanaṃ vil˚ anudisā p.).

pp. of āloketi

Āloketar

one who looks forward or before, a beholder DN-a i.194 (opp. viloketar).

n. ag. to āloketi

Āloketi

to look before, look at, regard, see DA i.193, 194 ■ pp. ālokita (q.v.).

Sk. ālokayati, ā + lok

Ālopa

a piece (cut off), a bit (of food) morsel, esp. bits of food gathered by bhikkhus DN i.5 = AN v.206; AN iii.176; AN ii.209; AN iii.304; AN iv.318; Thag 1055; Iti 18; Pv ii.17; Pp 58; Mil 231, Mil 406; Vism 106; DN-a i.80 (= vilopa-karaṇaṃ).

ā + lup, cp. ālumpati; BSk. ālopa, e.g. Avs i.173, Avs i.341; Divy 290, Divy 481

Ālopati

to break in, plunder, violate Thag 743.

ālopeti? ā + lopeti, Caus. of ālumpati

Ālopika

(adj.) getting or having, or consisting of pieces (of food) AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55.

ālopa + ika

Āloḷa

confusion, uproar, agitation Dhp-a i.38.

fr. ā + luḷ, cp. āluḷati & āloḷeti

Āloḷī

(f.) that which is stirred up, mud, in cpd. sītāloḷī mud or loam from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206.

a + luḷ

Āloḷeti

to confuse, mix, shake together, jumble SN i.175; Ja ii.272, Ja ii.363; Ja iv.333; Ja vi.331 Vism 105.

Caus. of āluḷati, cp. āluḷeti

Āḷaka

(or ˚ā f.)

1. a thorn, sting, dart, spike used either as arrow-straightener Mil 418; Dhp-a i.288 or (perhaps also for piece of bone, fishbone) in making up a comb Vv-a 349 (˚sandhāpana = comb; how Hardy got the meaning of “alum” in Ind. to Vv-a is incomprehensible).

2 a peg, spike, stake or post (to tie an elephant to, cp. ālāna ). Cp ii.13. Alamba = alambara

Dimin of aḷa (?) or of ārā i.(?). See Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 158

Āḷamba = āḷambara

Vv 189 = 5024. See ālambara.

Āḷavaka

(& ˚ika) (adj.-n.) dwelling in forests, a forest-dweller SN ii.235. As Np. at Vism 208.

= āṭavika

Āḷādvāraka

(adj.) at Ja v.81, Ja v.82 is corrupt & should with v.l. perhaps better be read; advāraka without doors. Cp Kern, Toev. 29 (ālāraka?). Ja v.81 has āḷāraka only.

Āḷāra

(adj.) thick, massed, dense or crooked, arched (?), only in cpd. ˚pamha with thick eyelashes Vv 6411 (= gopakhuma Vv-a 279) Pv iii.35 (= vellita-dīgha-nīla-pamukha). Cp. alāra. Alarika & iya;

= aḷāra or uḷāra or = Sk. arāla?

Āḷārika & ˚iya

(adj.-n.) a cook DN i.51 (= bhattakāraka DN-a i.157); Ja v.296 (bhattakāraka C.); 307; vi.276 (˚iya, C. ˚ika = sūpika) Mil 331.

Sk. ārālika, of uncertain etym.

Āḷāhana

(nt.) a place of cremation, cemetery DN i.55; Ja i.287 (here meaning the funereal fire) 402; iii.505; Pv ii.122; Vism 76; Mil 350; DN-a i.166; Dhp-a i.26; Dhp-a iii.276; Pv-a 92, Pv-a 161, Pv-a 163 (= sarīrassa daḍḍha-ṭṭhāna) ■ Note. For āḷāhana in meaning “peg, stake” see ālāna.

fr. ā + ḍah or dah, see dahati

Āḷika

at AN iii.352, AN iii.384 (an˚) is preferably to be read āḷhika, see āḷhaka.

Āḷha

(nt.) = āḷhaka; only at AN iii.52 (udak˚), where perhaps better with v.l. to be read as āḷhaka. The id p. at AN ii.55 has ālhaka only.

Āḷhaka

(m. & nt.) a certain measure of capacity, originally for grain; in older texts usually applied to a liquid measure (udaka˚). Its size is given by Bdhgh. at Snp-a 476 as follows: “cattāro patthā āḷhakāni doṇaṃ etc.”-udakāḷhaka SN v.400; AN ii.55 = AN iii.337; Vv-a 155 ■ In other connections at Ja i.419 (aḍḍh˚); iii.541 (mitaṃ āḷhakena dhañña-māpaka-kammaṃ kataṃ C.); Mil 229 (patt˚); Dhp-a iii.367 (aḍḍh˚).

-thālikā a bowl of the capacity of an āḷhaka Vin i.240; AN iii.369; Dhp-a iii.370 (v.l. bhatta-thālikā).

Sk. āḍhaka, fr. *āḍha probably meaning “grain”

Āḷhiya

(& āḷhika) (adj.) rich, happy, fortunate; only in neg. anāḷhiya poor, unlucky, miserable MN i.450; MN ii.178 (+ daḷidda) AN iii.352 sq. (so read with v.l. BB. ˚āḷhika for T ˚āḷika; combd. with daḷidda; v.l. SS. anaddhika); Ja v.96, Ja v.97 (+ daḷidda; C. na āḷhika).

fr. *āḷha, Sk. āḍhya, orig. possessing grain, rich in grain, i.e. wealth; semantically cp dhañña2

Āvajati

1. to go into, to or towards Ja iii.434; Ja iv.49, Ja iv.107.

2. to return, come back Ja v.24, Ja v.479.

ā + vajati, vraj

Āvajjati

1. to reflect upon, notice, take in advert to, catch (a sound), listen Ja i.81; Ja ii.423; Ja v.3; Mil 106.

2. to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin i.286 (kumbhiṃ); Ja ii.102 (gloss āsiñcati) ■ Caus. āvajjeti (q.v.).

not with Senart M Vastu 377 = ava + dhyā, but = Sk. āvṛṇakti ā + vṛj, with pres. act. āvajjeti Sk. āvarjayati

Āvajjana

(nt.) turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the mind ■ See discussion of term at Cpd. 85, 227 (the C. derive āvajjana fr. āvaṭṭeti to turn towards, this confusion being due to close resemblance of jj and ṭṭ in writing); also Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4 (on Kv 380 which has āvaṭṭanā), 282 n. 2 (on Kv 491 āvaṭṭanā) ■ Pts ii.5, Pts ii.120; Ja ii.243; Vb 320; Mil 102 sq.; Vism 432; DN-a i.271.

fr. āvajjati, cp. BSk. āvarjana in diff. meaning

Āvajjita

bent, turned to, inclined; noticed, observed Mil 297; Vism 432 (citta); Sdhp 433.

pp. of āvajjeti cp. BSk. āvarjita, e.g. Divy 171; Itin 221

Āvajjitatta

(nt.) inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Pts ii.27 sq.

abstr. fr. āvajjita

Āvajjeti

1. to turn over, incline, bend MN iii.96; Ja iv.56 (so read for āvijjhanto); DN-a i.10 (kāyaṃ). 2. to incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think heed, listen for. According to Cpd. 227 often paraphrased in C. by pariṇāmeti ■ Ja i.69, Ja i.74, Ja i.81, Ja i.89, Ja i.108, Ja i.200; Mil 297; Dhp-a ii.96; Pv-a 181 (= manasikaroti).

3 to cause to yield AN iii.27 (perhaps better āvaṭṭ˚). pp. āvajjita (q.v.).

Caus. of āvajjati

Āvaṭa

covered, veiled, shut off against, prohibited DN i.97, DN i.246; MN i.381 (˚dvāra); Ja vi.267. -anāvaṭa uncovered, unveiled, exposed, open DN i.137 (˚dvāra); iii.191 (˚dvāratā); SN i.55; Ja v.213; Pv iii.64; Mil 283. Cp. āvuta2 & vy˚.;

Sk. āvṛta, pp. of ā + vṛ;

Āvaṭṭa

(adj.-n.)

1. turning round, winding, twisting MN i.382; SN i.32 (dvi-r-ā˚ turning twice) Ja ii.217; Snp-a 439 (˚gangā).

2. turned, brought round changed, enticed MN i.381; Dhp-a ii.153.

3. an eddy whirlpool, vortex MN i.461 = AN ii.123 (˚bhaya); Mil 122 Mil 196, Mil 377.

4. circumference Ja v.337; Dāvs v.24; Dhp-a iii.184.

Sk. āvarta, ā + vṛt

Āvaṭṭati

in phrase ā. vivaṭṭati to turn forward & backward Vism 504.;

= āvattati

Āvaṭṭana

(nt.) turning, twisting; enticement, snare, temptation Ja iii.494; Dhp-a ii.153.

fr. ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa 2 and āvaṭṭanin

Āvaṭṭanā

(f.) turning to (of the mind), adverting apprehending Kv 380, 491.

most likely for āvajjana. q.v. & see also Kvu trsl. 221, 282

Āvaṭṭanin

(adj.) turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing MN i.375, MN i.381; AN ii.190; Ja ii.330 = Ja iv.471; DN-a i.250 ■ Cp. etymologically the same, but semantically diff. āvattanin.

fr. āvaṭṭana

Āvaṭṭin

(adj.-n.) only at MN i.91 in neg. an˚; not enticed by (loc.), i.e. kāmesu. Cp. āvattin.

fr. āvaṭṭa instead of āvaṭṭana

Āvaṭṭeti

to turn round, entice, change convert, bring or win over MN i.375, MN i.381, MN i.383, MN i.505; AN iii.27; DN-a i.272.

ā + vatteti, Caus. of vṛt, cp. BSk. āvartayati to employ spells Divy 438

Āvatta1

(adj.) gone away to, fallen back to, in phrase hīnāy’āvatta (see same phrase under āvattati MN i.460; SN ii.50; Ja i.206.

pp. of āvattati

Āvatta2

(nt.) [Sk. āvarta, of ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa[ winding, turn, bent Ja i.70 (in a river); Ne 81 (v.l. āvaṭṭa?), 105 (˚hārasampāta).

Āvattaka

(adj.) turning, in dakkhiṇ˚; turning to the right, dextrorsal DN ii.18; cp. dakkhiṇâvatta at DN-a i.259.

āvatta + ka

Āvattati

to turn round, come to, go back, go away to, turn to; only in phrase hīnāya āvattati to turn to “the low”, i.e. to give up orders & return to the world Vin i.17; MN i.460; SN ii.231; SN iv.191; Snp p.92 (= osakkati Snp-a 423); Ud 21; Pp 66; Mil 246. pp. āvatta (q.v.). Cp. āvaṭṭati.

ā + vattati, of vṛt

Āvattana

(adj.-n..) turning; turn, return Ne 113; Mil 251.

Sk. āvartana

Āvattanin

(adj.) turning round or back Thag 16 (cp. āvaṭṭanin ).

fr. āvattana

Āvattin

(adj.-n.) returning, coming back, one who returns, in spec. meaning of one who comes back in transmigration, syn. with āgāmin (an˚), only in neg. anāvattin not returning, a non-returner, with ˚dhamma not liable to return at DN i.156; DN iii.132; SN v.346, SN v.357, SN v.376, SN v.406; MN i.91; DN-a i.313.

fr. āvatta, cp. āvaṭṭin in diff. meaning

Āvatthika

(adj.) befitting, original, inherent (one of the 4 kinds of nomenclature) Vism 210 = Kp-a 107.

ā + vatthika

Āvapati

to give away, to offer, to deposit as a pledge Mil 279.

a + vap

Āvapana

(nt.) sowing, dispersing, offering,depositing, scattering Ja i.321.

fr. āvapati

Āvara

(adj.) obstructing, keeping off from Ja v.325 (so to be read in ariya-magg-âvara).

fr. ā + vṛ;

Āvaraṇa

(adj.-n.) shutting off, barring out withstanding; nt. hindrance, obstruction, bar Vin i.84 (˚ṃ karoti to prohibit, hinder); ii.262 (id.); DN i.246 (syName of pañca nīvaraṇāni); SN v.93 sq.; AN iii.63; Ja i.78 (an˚); v.412 (nadiṃ ˚ena bandhāpeti to obstruct or dam off the river); Snp 66 (pahāya pañc’ āvaraṇāni cetaso, cp Nd ii.379), 1005 (an˚-dassāviṇ); Pts i.131 sq.; Pts ii.158 (an˚) Pp 13; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; Vb 341, Vb 342; Mil 21 (dur hard to withstand or oppose) ■ dant˚ “screen of the teeth”, lip Ja iv.188; Ja vi.590.

fr. ā + vṛ; cp. āvarati; BSk. āvaraṇa in pañc’ āvaraṇāni Divy 378

Āvaraṇatā

(f.) keeping away from, withholding from AN iii.436.

abstr. fr. āvaraṇa

Āvaraṇīya

(adj.), MN i.273; an˚; not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct MN iii.3; Mil 157.

grd. fr. āvarati

Āvarati

to shut out from (abl.), hold back from, refuse, withhold, obstruct MN i.380 (dvāraṃ) Snp 922 (pot. ˚aye, cp. Nd i.368); DN-a i.235 (dvāraṃ) Dpvs i.38 ■ pp. āvaṭa and āvuta2 (q.v.).

ā + vṛ; cp. āvuṇāti

Āvalī

(f.) a row, range Ja v.69; DN-a i.140.

cp. Sk. āvalī & see valī

Āvasati

to live at or in, to inhabit, reside, stay MN ii.72; SN i.42; Snp 43, Snp 805, Snp 1134; Nd i.123, Nd i.127; Nd ii.133; Ja vi.317 ■ pp. āvuttha (q.v.).

ā + vas

Āvasatha

dwelling-place, habitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin i.226 (˚âgāra restinghouse); iv.304 (= kavāṭabaddha); SN i.94, SN i.229; SN iv.329; Snp 287, Snp 672; Ja iv.396; Ja vi.425; Pp 51; Mil 279.

Sk. āvasatha, fr. ā + vas

Āvaha

(adj.) (-˚) bringing, going, causing Pv ii.924 (sukh˚); Vv 2211 (id); Dāvs ii.37; Pv-a 86 (upakār˚), 116 (anatth˚); Sdhp 15, Sdhp 98, Sdhp 206.

fr. ā + vah

Āvahati

to bring, cause, entail, give SN i.42 = Snp 181, Snp 182 (āvahāti sukhaṃ metri causā); Ja iii.169; v. 80; Snp 823; Nd i.302; Pv-a 6 ■ Pass. āvuyhati Vv-a 237 (ppr. ˚amāna ).

ā + vahati

Āvahana

(adj) (-˚) bringing, causing Thag 519; Snp 256.

= āvaha

Āvahanaka

(adj.-n.) one who brings Vv-a 114 (sukhassa).

= āvahana

Āva

(misery, misfortune) see avā.

Āvāṭa

a hole dug in the ground, a pit, a well DN i.142 (yaññ˚); Ja i.99, Ja i.264; Ja ii.406; Ja iii.286; Ja iv.46 (caturassa); vi.10; Dhp-a i.223; Vv-a 63; Pv-a 225.

etym.?

Āvāpa

a potter’s furnace Dhp-a i.177 (read for āvāsa?), 178.

if correct, fr. ā + 2 to blow with caus. p ■ Cp. JR A S. 1898, 750 sp.

Āvāra

warding off, protection, guard Ja vi.432 (yanta-yutta˚, does it mean “cover, shield”?). For cpd. khandh’āvāra see khandha.

Sk. āvāra, fr. ā + vṛ;

Āvāreti

to ward off, hold back, bar, SN iv.298; Ne 99.

Sk. āvārayati, ā + Caus. of vṛ;

Āvāsa

sojourn, stay, dwelling, living; dwelling-place, residence Vin i.92; DN iii.234; SN iv.91; AN ii.68, AN ii.168; AN iii.46, AN iii.262; Snp 406; Dhp 73 (cp. Dhp-a ii.77); Nd i.128; Ja vi.105; Dhs 1122; Pug, 15, 19, 57 Kp-a 40; Dhp-a i.177 (āvāsaṃ ālimpeti: read āvāpaṃ); Pv-a 13, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 36; Vv-a 113; Sdhp 247. -anāvāsa (n. & adj. uninhabited, without a home; an uninhabited place AN iv.345; Ja ii.77; Pv ii.333; Pv-a 80 (= anāgāra); Vv-a 46.

-kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different residence (within the same boundary) Vin ii.294, Vin ii.300, Vin ii.306 Dpvs iv.47, cp. v.18. -palibodha the obstruction of having a home (in set of 10 Palibodhas) Kp-a 39; cp Vism 90 sq. -sappāyatā suitability of residence Vism 127.

Sk. āvāsa; ā + vas

Āvāsika

(adj.) living in, residing at home, being in (constant or fixed) residence, usually appld. to bhikkhus (opp. āgantuka) Vin i.128 sq.; Vin ii.15, Vin ii.170; iii. 65; v.203 sq.; MN i.473; AN i.236; AN iii.261 sq., 366; Ja iv.310; Pv iv.84 (= nibaddha-vasanaka Pv-a 267).

āvāsa + ika

Āvāha

taking in marriage, lit. carrying away to oneself, marriage DN i.99; Ja vi.363; Snp-a 273, Snp-a 448; Dhp-a iv.7 Often in cpd. ā˚ vivāha(ka) lit. leading to (one’s home & leading away (from the bride’s home), wedding feast DN iii.183 (˚ka); Ja i.452; Vv-a 109, Vv-a 157. (v.l. ˚ka).

ā + vah

Āvāhana

(nt.)

1. = āvāha, i.e. marriage, taking a wife DN i.11 (= āvāha-karaṇa DN-a i.96).

2. “getting up, bringing together”, i.e. a mass, a group or formation, in senā˚ a contingent of an army Ja iv.91.

ā + vshana, of vah

Āvi

(adv.) clear, manifest, evident; openly, before one’s eyes, in full view. Only in phrase āvi vā raho openly or secret AN v.350, AN v.353; Pv ii.716 = Dhp-a iv.21 (āvī v.l.), expld. at Pv-a 103 by pakāsanaṃ paresaṃ pākaṭavasana Otherwise in foll. cpds. (with kar & bhū ) ˚kamma making clear, evidence, explanation Vin ii.88 Vin iii.24; Pp 19, Pp 23; ˚karoti to make clear, show, explain DN iii.121; Snp 84, Snp 85, Snp 349; Ja v.457; Pp 57; Vv-a 79 Vv-a 150; ˚bhavati (˚bhoti) to become visible or evident, to be explained, to get clear Ja i.136; Vism 287 (fnt. āvibhavissati); Dhp-a ii.51, Dhp-a ii.82; bhāva appearance, manifestation DN i.78; AN iii.17; Ja ii.50, Ja ii.111; Vism 390 sq. (revelation opp. tirobhāva). Cp. pātur. Avijjhati (avinjati, avinchati)

Sk. āviḥ, to Gr. ἀίω to hear, Lat. audio (fr. *auizdiō) to hear

Āvijjhati (āviñjati, āviñchati)

1. to encircle, encompass, comprise, go round, usually in ger. āvijjhitvā (w. acc.) used as prep round about, near Ja i.153 (khettaṃ), 170 (pokkharaṇiṃ) DN-a i.245 (nagaraṃ bahi avijjhitvā round the outer circle of the town). Ordinarily = go round (acc.) at Ja iv.59 (chārika-puñjaṃ).

2. [as in lit. Sk.] to swing round brandish, twirl, whirl round Vin iii.127 (daṇḍaṃ āviñji) MN iii.141 (matthena āviñjati to churn); Ja i.313; Ja v.291 (cakkaṃ, of a potter’s wheel); Snp-a 481 (T. āviñj˚, v.l. āvijjh˚; see āracaya˚); Dhp-a ii.277 (āviñchamāna T.; v.l. āsiñciy˚, āvajiy˚, āgañch˚).

3. to resort to, go to, approach incline to SN iv.199 (T. āviñch˚; v.l. avicch˚ āviñj˚); Ne 13.

4. to arrange, set in order Ja ii.406. 5. to pull (?) AN iv.86 (kaṇṇasotani āvijjeyyāsi, v.l. āvijj˚ āviñj˚, āvicc˚, āviñch˚; cp. Trenckner, Notes 59 āviñjati “to pull”) ■ pp. āviddha (q.v.).

ā + vijjhati of vyadh to pierce; thus recognised by Morris JP T S. 1884, 72 against Trenckner, Notes 59 (to piñj ) & Hardy Nett; Ind. = vicchāy

Āvijjhana

(so for āviñchana & āviñjana) (adj.-n.)

1. (āvijjhati 2) swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in; āvijjhana-rajju a loose, rope, esp. in mythology the swinging or whirling rope by which Sakka holds the world’s wheel or axis, in the latter sense at Dhp-a ii.143 (T. āviñch˚ (v.l. āvijj˚) = iii.97, 98 (where āviñjanaṭṭhāna for ˚rajju). Otherwise a rope used in connection with the opening & shutting of a door (pulling rope? Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148; Ja v.298, Ja v.299 (T. āviñj˚, v.l. āvicch˚ āvij˚).

2. (cp. āvijjhati 3) going to, approach, contact with Dhs-a 312 (˚rasa, T. āviñj˚, v.l. āviñch˚; or is it “encompassing”? = āvijjhati 1 ?); Vism 444 (āviñjanarasa).

3. (cp. āvijjhati 5) pulling, drawing along Vin iii.121 (= ākaḍḍhanā nāma).

fr. āvijjhati, lit. piercing through, i.e. revolving axis

Āvijjhanaka

(nt.) whirling round, that which spins round, the whirling-round wheel (or pole) of the world (cp. the potter’s wheel), the worldaxis Dhp-a ii.146 (T. āviñch˚).

fr. āvijjhati in meaning 2

Āviddha

whirling or spinning round, revolving; swung round, set into whirling motion Ja iv.6 (cakkaṃ = kumbhakāra-cakkam iva bhamati C.); v.291. What does an-āviddha at Pv-a 135 mean?

pp. of āvijjhati 2, cp. BSk. āviddha in meaning curved, crooked Av. SN i.87 Lal. V. 207

Āvila

(adj.) stirred up, agitated, disturbed, stained soiled, dirty AN i.9; AN iii.233; Ja v.16, Ja v.90 (ābila); Nd i.488 (+ luḷita), 489; Thag-a 251; DN-a i.226. More frequent as anāvila undisturbed, clean, pure, serene DN i.76; SN iii.83; SN iv.118; AN i.9; AN iii.236; Snp 160; Dhp 82, Dhp 413; Ja iii.157; Mil 35; Vv-a 29, Vv-a 30; Thag-a 251.

is it a haplological contraction from ā + vi + lul to roll about?

Āvilati

to whirl round, to be agitated, to be in motion Mil 259 (+ luḷati).

fr. āvila or is it a direct contraction of ā + vi + lulati?

Āvilatta

(nt.) confusion, disturbance, agitation Snp 967; Nd i.488.

abstr. fr. āvila

Āvisati

to approach, to enter Vin iv.334; Snp 936 (aor. āvisi); Ja iv.410, Ja iv.496; Vism 42.

ā + vīś

Āvuṇāti

to weave, thus a confusion of the two roots, the latter being merged into the former to string upon, to fix on to (c. loc.), to impale Ja i.430 Ja iii.35; Ja v.145; Ja vi.105 ■ Caus. II. āvuṇāpeti Ja iii.218 (sūle) ■ pp. āvuta1 (q.v.), whereas the other pp. āvaṭa is the true derivative of ā + vṛ.

in form = *avṛṇoti, ā + vṛ; cp. āvarati, but in meaning = *āvayati, ā +

Āvuta

1. strung upon, tied on, fixed on to DN i.76 (suttaṃ); ii.13 (id.) AN i.286 (tantāvutaṃ web); Ja iii.52 (valliyā); vi.346 (suttakena); DN-a i.94 (˚sutta).

2. impaled, stuck on (sūle on the pale) Ja i.430; Ja iii.35; Ja v.497; Ja vi.105; Pv-a 217, Pv-a 220.

pp. of āvuṇāti in meaning of Sk. āvayati, the corresponding Sk. form being ā + uta = ota

Āvuta2 = Āvaṭa

(see āvuṇāti & āvuta;1) covered, obstructed, hindered Iti 8 (mohena); also in phrase āvuta nivuta ophuta etc. Nd i.24 (ṭ) = Nd ii.365 = DN-a i.59.

Āvuttha

inhabited DN ii.50 (an˚); SN i.33.

pp. of āvasati

Āvudha

(nt.) an instrument to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. DN iii.219; MN ii.100; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; Snp 1008; Ja i.150; Ja ii.110; iii. 467; iv.160, 283, 437; Nd ii.on Snp 72; Mil 8, Mil 339; Dhp-a ii.2; Dhp-a iv.207; Snp-a 225, Snp-a 466 (˚jīvika = issattha). See also āyudha.

Vedic āyudha, fr. ā + yudh to fight

Āvuyhamāna

ppr. of āvuyhati (Pass. of āvahati), being conveyed or brought Vv-a 237 (reading uncertain).

Āvuso

(voc. pl. m.) friend, a form of polite address “friend, brother Sir”, usually in conversation between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the pl. of the verb, like bhavaṃ and bhavanto ■ Vin ii.302; DN i.151, DN i.157; DN ii.8; Snp-a 227; Dhp-a i.9; Dhp-a ii.93; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 208.

a contracted form of āyusmanto pl. of āyusman, of which the regular Pāli form is āyasmant with v for y as frequently in Pāli, e.g. āvudha for āyudha

Āveṭhana

(nt.) rolling up, winding up or round, fig. explanation Mil 28 (+ nibbeṭhana, lit rolling up and rolling down, ravelling & unravelling) 231 (˚viniveṭhana).;

ā + veṭhana, veṣṭ;

Āveṭhita

turned round, slung round or over Ja iv.383 sq. (v.l. āvedhita & āveḷita, C. expl;s. by parivattita).

pp. of āveṭheti, ā + veṣṭ; cp. āvedhikā

Āveṇi

(adj) (-˚) special peculiar, separate Vin ii.204 (˚uposatha etc.); Ja i.490 (˚sangha-kammāni).

according to Trenckner, Notes 75 fr. ā + vinā “Sine quā non”, but very doubtful

Āveṇika

(adj.) special, extraordinary, exceptional SN iv.239; AN v.74 sq.; Vism 268; Vv-a 112 (˚bhāva peculiarity, specialty), Kp-a 23, Kp-a 35.

fr. āveṇi; cp. BSk. āveṇika Avs i.14, Avs i.108; Divy 2, Divy 182, Divy 268, Divy 302

Āveṇiya

(adj.) = āveṇika Vin i.71; Ja iv.358; Ja vi.128.

Āvedha

piercing, hole, wound Ja ii.276 (v.l. aveddha; C. = viddha-ṭṭhāne vaṇa).

cp. Sk. āviddha, ā + pp. of vyadh

Āvedhika

(adj. f. scil. pannā) piercing, penetrating; or ravelling, turning rolling up or round (cp. āvijjhati which is derived from ā + vyadh, but takes its meaning from āveṭheti), discrimination thinking over Ja ii.9 (+ nibbedhikā, v.l. for both ṭh).

ā + vedhaka of āvedha, vyadh, but confused with āveṭh˚ of ā + veṣṭ; cp. āveṭhana & nibbedhaka

Āveḷa

(adj. & ˚ā f.)

1. turning round swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance, with reference to the rays of the Buddha at Ja i.12, Ja i.95, Ja i.501. 2. (f.) a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over the head Vv 36;2 (kañcan˚; = āveḷa-pilandhana VuA 167). See āveḷin.

not with Müller; P.Gr. 10, 30, 37 = Sk. āpīḍa, but fr. ā + veṣṭh to wind or turn round which in P. is represented by āveṭheti as well as āvijjhati ḷ then standing for either ḍh (ṭh) or dh (āvedha, q.v.) There may have been an analogy influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. āveḷita. Müller refers to āveḷā rightly the late dial. (Prk.) āmela

Āvelita

(ḷ?) turned round wound, curved Ja vi.354 (˚singika with curved horns v.l. āvellita).

pp. of ā + vell, cp. āveḷa & BSk. āviddha curved, crooked Avs i.87, Lal. V. 207

Āveḷin

(adj.) wearing garlands or other headornaments, usually in f. ˚inī Ja v.409 (= kaṇṇālankārehi yuttā C.); Vv 302 (voc. āvelinī, but at id. p. 482 āveline) 323; Vv-a 125 (on Vv 302 expls. as ratana-maya-pupph’ āveḷavatī).

fr. āveḷā

Āvesana

(nt.) entrance; workshop; living-place, house Vin ii.117 (˚vitthaka, meaning?); MN ii.53; Pv ii.915.

fr. āvisati

Āsa1

contr ■ form of aṃsa in cpd. koṭṭhāsa part., portion etc.: see aṃsa1. Can we compare BSk. āsapātrī (see next).

Āsa3

food, only in cpd. pātarāsa morning food, breakfast Snp 387 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍapātass’ etaṃ nāmaṃ Snp-a 374); Dhp-a iv.211; see further ref under pātar; and pacchā-āsa aftermath SN i.74. Can we compare BSk. āsa-pātrī (vessel) Divy 246? Der. fr. āsa is āsaka with abstr. ending āsakattaṃ “cating”, food, in nānā˚ various food or na + anāsak˚) Snp 249. See also nirāsa, which may be taken either as nir + *āśa or nir + *āsā.

Sk. āśa

Āsa3

the adj. form of āsā (f.), wish, hope. See under āsā.

Āsa4

archaic 3rd sg. perf. of atthi to be, only in cpd. itihāsa = iti ha āsa “thus it has been”.

Āsaṃsa

(adj.) hoping, expecting something, longing for AN i.108 = Pp 27 (expld. by Pp A 208 as “so hi arahattaṃ āsaṃsati patthetī ti āsaṃso”) Snp-a 321, Snp-a 336. Cp. nir˚.

of *āśaṃsā, see next

Āsaṃsati

to expect, hope for, wish Pp A 208 (= pattheti). See also āsamāna.

for the usual āsiṃsati, ā + śaṃs

Āsaṃsā

(f.) wish, desire, expectation, hope Ja iv.92 ■ Cp. nirāsaṃsa.

from ā + śaṃs

Āsạṃsuka

(adj.) full of expectation, longing, hankering after, Thig 273 (= āsiṃsanaka Thag-a 217 trsl. “cadging”).

fr. āsaṃsā

Āsaka

(adj.) belonging to food, having food, only in neg. an˚; fasting SN iv.118; Dhp 141 (f. ā fasting bhatta-paṭikkhepa Dhp-a iii.77); Ja v.17; Ja vi.63.

of āsa2

Āsakatta

(nt.) having food, feeding, in an˚ fasting Snp 249 (= abhojana Snp-a 292).

abstr. fr. āsaka

Āsaṅkati

to be doubtful or afraid, to suspect, distrust, Ja i.151 (pret. āsankittha), 163 (aor. āsanki); ii. 203; Snp-a 298 ■ pp. āsaṅkita (q v.),

ā + śaṅk

Āsaṅkā

(f.) fear, apprehension, doubt, suspicion Ja i.338; Ja ii.383; Ja iii.533; Ja vi.350, Ja vi.370; Dhp-a iii.485; Vv-a 110 ■ Cp. sāsaṅka & nirāsaṅka;.

Sk. āśankā fr. ā + śaṅk

Āsaṅkita

(adj.) suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Mil 173, Mil 372 (˚parisankita full of apprehension and suspicion); Dhp-a i.223; Vv-a 110 ■ Cp. ussaṅkita & parisaṅkita;.

pp. of āsankati

Āsaṅkin

(-˚) (adj.) fearing, anxious, apprehensive Snp 255 (bhedā˚); Ja iii.192 (id.).

fr. āsankā

Āsaṅga

1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit Ja iv.11.

2. that which hangs on (the body), clothing garment, dress; adj. dressed or clothed in (-˚); usually in cpd. uttarāsaṅga a loose (hanging) outer robe e.g. Vin i.289; SN iv.290; Pv-a 73; VvÁ 33 (suddh˚), 51 (id.).

ā + sanga fr. sañj to hang on, cp. Sk. āsaṅga & āsakti

Āsaṅgin

(adj.) hanging on, attached to Ja iv.11.

fr. āsanga

Āsajja

(indecl.)

1. sitting on, going to, approaching; allocated belonging to; sometimes merely as prep. acc “near” (cp. āsanna) Snp 418 (āsajja naṃ upāvisi he came up near to him), 448 (kāko va selaṃ ā. nibbijjāpema Gotamaṃ); Ja ii.95; Ja vi.194; Mil 271.

2. put on to (lit. sitting or sticking on), hitting, striking SN i.127 (khaṇuṃ va urasā ā. nibbijjapetha Gotamā “ye’ve thrust as ‘t were your breast against a stake. Disgusted, come ye hence from Gotama” trsl. p. 159; C. expls. by paharitvā which comes near the usual paraphrase ghaṭṭetvā) 3. knocking against or “giving one a setting-to”, insulting offending, assailing DN i.107 (ā. ā. avocāsi = ghaṭṭetvā DN-a i.276); AN iii.373 (tādisaṃ bhikkhuṃ ā.); Ja v.267 (isiṃ ā. Gotamaṃ; C. p. 272 āsādetvā); Pv iv.710 (isiṃ ā. āsādetvã Pv-a 266).

4. “sitting on”, i.e. attending constantly to, persevering, energetically, with energy or emphasis, willingly, spontaneously MN i.250; DN iii.258; AN iv.236 (dānaṃ deti); Vv 106 (dānaṃ adāsiṃ; cp. Vv-a 55 samāgantvā). See āsada, āsādeti, āsīdeti, āsajjana.

ger. of āsādeti, Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; Sk. āsādya

Āsajjana

(nt.) “knocking against”, setting on, insult, offence Vin ii.203 (˚ṃ Tathāgataṃ an insult to the T.; quoted as such at Vv-a 55 where two meanings of ā. are given, corresponding to āsajja 1 & 3, viz. samāgama & ghaṭṭana, the latter in this quot.) = Iti 86 (so to be read with v.l.; T. has āpajja naṃ); SN i.114 (apuññaṃ pasavi Māro āsajjanaṃ Tathāgataṃ; trsl. “in seeking the T. to assail”); Ja v.208.

fr. āsajja in meaning of no. 3

Āsati

to sit DN-a i.208; h. sg. āsi SN i.130. - pp. āsīna (q.v.).

from as

Āsatta1

(a) lit. hanging on, in phrase kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one’s neck MN i.120; Ja i.5 ■ (b) fig. attached to, clinging to Ja i.377 (+ satta lagga); Thag-a 259 (an˚).

pp. of ā + sañj

Āsatta2

accursed, cursed Ja v.446 (an˚).

pp. of ā + śap

Āsatti

(f.) attachment, hanging on (w. loc.), dependence, clinging Vin ii.156 = AN i.138; SN i.212; Snp 777 (bhavesu); Nd i.51, Nd i.221; Ne 12, Ne 128 ■ Cp nirāsattin.

ā + sañj

Āsada

1. approach, dealing with, business with (acc.), concern, affair, means of acting or getting Vin ii.195 = Ja v.336 (mā kuñjara nāgam āsado); MN i.326 (metaṃ āsado = mā etaṃ āsado do not meddle with this, lit., be not this any affair); Ja i.414 (cakkaṃ āsado you have to do with the wheel interpreted as adj. in meaning patto = finding, getting) vi.528 (interpreted as ankusa a hook, i.e. means of getting something).

2. (as adj.) in phrase durāsada hard to sit on, i.e. hard to get at, unapproachable, difficult to attack or manage or conquer Snp p.107 (cp. Snp-a 451); Ja vi.272; Vv 5016 (= anupagamanīyato kenaci pi anāsādanīyato ca durāsado Vv-a 213); Mil 21; Dpvs v.21; vi.38; Sdhp 384.

ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsādeti

Āsana

(nt.) sitting, sitting down; a seat, throne MN i.469; Vin i.272 (= pallankassa okāsa); SN i.46 (ek sitting alone, a solitary seat); AN iii.389 (an˚ without a seat); Snp 338, Snp 718, Snp 810, Snp 981; Nd i.131; Ja iv.435 (āsān ûdaka-dāyin giving seat & drink); v.403 (id.); vi.413; Dhp-a ii.31 (dhamm˚ the preacher’s seat or throne); Snp-a 401; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 141.

-ābhihara gift or distinction of the seat Ja i.81. -ūpagata endowed with a seat, sitting down Snp 708 (= nisinna Snp-a 495). -paññāpaka one who appoints seats Vin ii.305. -paṭikkhitta one who rejects all seats, or objects to sitting down DN i.167; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Pp 55. -sālā a hall with seating accommodation Vism 69; Dhp-a ii.65; Dhp-a iv.46.

from āsati

Āsana2

(?) eating Vism 116 (visam˚, cp. visam-āsita Mil 302). See, however, māsana.

Āsanaka

(nt.) a small seat Vv 15.

āsana + ka

Āsanika

(adj.) having a seat; in ek˚; sitting by oneself Vism 69.

fr. āsana

Āsandi

(f.) an extra long chair, a deck-chair Vin i.192; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169, Vin ii.170; DN i.7 (= pamāṇâtikkant’ āsanaṃ DN-a i.86), 55 = MN i.515 = SN iii.307 (used as a bier) AN i.181; Ja i.108. See note at Dial. i.11.

fr. ā + sad

Āsandikā

(f.) fr. āsandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin ii.149; Kp-a 44.

Āsanna

(adj.) near (cp. āsajja1), opp. dūra Ja ii.154; Dhp-a ii.91; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 243.

pp. of ā + sad, see āsīdati

Āsappanā

(fr.) lit. “creeping on to”, doubt, mistrust, always combd. with parisappanā Nd3 1; Dhs 1004 (trsl. “evasion”, cp. Dhs trsl. p 116), 1118, 1235; DN-a i.69.

fr. + sṛp

Āsabha

(in compn.) a bull peculiar to a bull, bull-like, fig. a man of strong & eminent qualities, a hero or great man, a leader, thus in tār˚ Snp 687; nar˚ Snp 684, Snp 696; āsabha-camma bull’s hide Ja vi.453 (v.l. usabha˚).

-ṭṭhāna (as āsabhaṇṭhāna) “bull’s place”, first place distinguished position, leadership MN i.69; SN ii.27; AN ii.8 (C. seṭṭha-ṭṭhāna uttama-ṭṭhāna); iii.9; v.33 sq.; DN-a i.31; Kp-a 104.

the guṇa-and compn. form of usabha, corresponding to Sk. ārṣabha → ṛṣabha, see usabha

Āsabhin

(adj.) bull-like, becoming to a bull, lordly, majestic, imposing, bold; only in phrase ˚ṃ vācaṃ bhāsati “speak the lordly word” DN ii.15, DN ii.82; MN iii.123j Ja i.53; DN-a i.91; cp. Dāvs i.28 (nicchārayi vācaṃ āsabhiṃ).

fr. āsabha

Āsamāna

(adj.) wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 846 (kiṃ ā = kiṃ paccāsiṃ santo Vv-a 336); Pv iv.124 (= āsiṃsamāna patthayamana Pv-a 226).

ppr. of āsaṃsati or āsiṃsati, for the usual earlier āsasāna

Āsaya

1. abode haunt, receptacle; dependence on, refuge, support, condition SN i.38; Vin iii.151; Ja ii.99; Mil 257; Vv-a 60; Pv-a 210; jal˚ river Vv-a 47; Pgdp 80; adj. depending on, living in (-˚) Mil 317; Nd i.362 (bil˚, dak˚ etc.) See also āmāsaya, pakkāsaya.

2. (fig.) inclination, intention will, hope; often combd. & compared with; anusaya (inclination, hankering, disposition), e.g. at Pts i.133; Pts ii.158; Vb 340; Vism 140 (˚posana); Pv-a 197. Snp-a 182 (˚vipatti), 314 (˚suddhi), Kp-a 103 (˚sampatti) Cp. nirāsaya.

3. outflow, excretion Pv iii.53 (gabbh = gabbha-mala Pv-a 198); Vism 344.

ā + śī, cp. in similar meaning & derivation anusaya. The semantically related Sk. āśraya from ā + ; śri is in P. represented by assaya. Cp. also BSk. āśayataḥ intentionally in earnest Divy 281; Avs ii.161

Āsayati

to wish, desire, hope, intend Ja iv.291 (grd. āsāyana, gloss esamāna). See āsaya.

ā + śī; lit. “lie on”, cp. Ger. anliegen & Sk. āśaya = Ger. Angelegenheit

Āsava

that which; flows (out or on to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C in Vin iv.110 (four kinds); B. on DN iii.182 (five kinds Dhs-a 48; Kp-a 26; Ja iv.222; Ja vi.9.

2. discharge from a sore, AN i.124, AN i.127 = Pp 30.

3. in psychology t.t. for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher things). Freedom from the “Āsavas” constitutes Arahantship, & the fight for the extinction of these āsavas forms one of the main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term see Cpd. 227. See also discussion of term āsava (= āsavantī ti āsavā) at Dhs-a 48 (cp Expositor pp. 63 sq). See also Cpd. 227 sq., & especially; Dhs trsl. 291 sq ■ The 4 āsavas are kām˚, bhav˚ diṭṭh˚, avijj˚; i.e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of life), speculation and ignorance ■ They are mentioned as such at DN ii.81, DN ii.84, DN ii.91, DN ii.94, DN ii.98, DN ii.123, DN ii.126; AN i.165 sq., 196 ii.211; iii.93, 414; iv.79; Pts i.94, Pts i.117; Dhs 1099, Dhs 1448 Nd ii.134; Ne 31, Ne 114 sq ■ The set of 3, which is probably older (kāma˚, bhava˚, avijjā˚) occurs at MN i.55; AN i.165; AN iii.414; SN iv.256; SN v.56, SN v.189; Iti 49; Vb 364 For other connections see Vin i.14 (anupādāya āsavehi cittani vimucciṃsu), 17, 20, 182; ii.202; iii.5 (˚samudaya ˚nirodha etc.); DN i.83, DN i.167; DN iii.78, DN iii.108, DN iii.130, DN iii.220, DN iii.223 DN iii.230, DN iii.240, DN iii.283; MN i.7 sq., 23, 35, 76, 219, 279, 445 (˚ṭhāniya); ii.22; iii.72, 277; SN ii.187 sq. (˚ehi cittaṃ vimucci); iii.45 (id.); iv.107 (id.), 20; v.8, 28, 410; AN i.85 sq. (vaḍḍhanti), 98, 165 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.) 187; ii.154 (˚ehi cittaṃ vimuttaṃ), 196; iii.21, 93 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; iv.13, 146 (˚pariyādāna end of the ā.), 161 (˚vighāta-pariḷāha); v.70 237; Thig 4, Thig 99, Thig 101 (pahāsi āsave sabbe); Snp 162 Snp 374, Snp 535 (pl. āsavāni), 546, 749, 915, 1100; Dhp 93 Dhp 253, Dhp 292; Nd i.331 (pubb˚); Vb 42, Vb 64, Vb 426; Pp 11 Pp 13, Pp 27, Pp 30 sq.; Mil 419; Dhs-a 48; Thag-a 94, Thag-a 173; Kp-a 26; DN-a i.224; Sdhp 1; Pgdp 65 (piyāsava-surā, meaning?).

Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the āsavas & to Arahantship following as a result are the foll. passages: (1); āsavānaṃ khaya DN i.156; SN ii.29 SN ii.214; SN iii.57, SN iii.96 sq, 152 sq; iv.105, 175; v.92, 203 220, 271, 284; AN i.107 sq., 123 sq., 232 sq., 273, 291 ii.6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; iii.69, 114, 131, 202, 306 319 sq.; iv.83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 36, 69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq.; Iti 49; Pp 27, Pp 62; Vb 334, Vb 344; Vism 9; DN-a i.224; cp. ˚parikkhaya AN v.343 sq. See also arahatta formula C ■ (2) khīṇāsava (adj. one whose Āsavas are destroyed (see khīṇa) SN i.13, SN i.48 SN i.53, SN i.146; SN ii.83, SN ii.239; SN iii.199, SN iii.128, SN iii.178; SN iv.217; AN i.77 AN i.109, AN i.241, AN i.266; AN iv.120, AN iv.224, AN iv.370 sq.; AN v.40, AN v.253 sq.; Pts ii.173; cp. parikkhīṇā āsavā AN iv.418, AN iv.434, AN iv.451 sq. āsavakhīṇa Snp 370 ■ (3) anāsava (adj.) one who is free from the āsavas, an Arahant Vin ii.148 = Vin ii.164; DN iii.112; SN i.130; SN ii.214, SN ii.222; SN iii.83; SN iv.128; AN i.81, AN i.107 sq., 123 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 87, 146; iii.19, 29, 114 166; iv.98, 140 sq., 314 sq., 400; AN v.10 sq., 36, 242 340; Snp 1105, Snp 1133; Dhp 94, Dhp 126, Dhp 386; Th i.100; Iti 75; Nd ii.44; Pv ii.615; Pp 27; Vb 426; Dhs 1101, Dhs 1451; Vv-a 9. Cp. nirāsava Thag-a 148 ■ Opp. sāsava SN iii.47 SN v.232; AN i.81 AN v.242; Dhs 990; Ne 10; Vism 13, Vism 438.

fr. ā + sru, would corresp. to a Sk. *āsrava, cp. Sk. āsrāva. The BSk. āśrava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pāli āsava, cp. Divy 391 & kṣīnāśrava

Āsavati

to flow towards, come to, occur, happen Ne 116.

ā + sru, cp. Sk. āsravati; its doublet is assavati

Āsasāna

hoping wishing, desiring, longing for Snp 369 (an˚; Snp-a 365 however reads āsayāna), 1090; Thag 528; Ja iv.18 (= āsiṃsanto C.), 381; v.391 (= āsiṃsanto C.). See anāsasāna āsaṃsati, āsamāna & āsayāna.;

either grd. for *āsaṃsāna or contracted form of ppr. med. of āsaṃsati (= āsiṃsati) for *asaṃsamāna

Āsā

(f.) expectation, hope, wish, longing, desire; adj. āsa (-˚) longing for, anticipating, desirous of Vin i.255 (˚avacchedika hope-destroying), 259; DN ii.206; DN iii.88; MN iii.138 (āsaṃ karoti); AN i.86 (dve āsā) 107 (vigat-āso one whose longings have gone); Snp 474 Snp 634, Snp 794, Snp 864; Ja i.267, Ja i.285; Ja v.401; Ja vi.452 (˚chinna chinnāsa C.); Nd i.99, Nd i.261, Nd i.213 sq; Vv 3713 (perhaps better to be read with v.l. SS ahaṃ, cp. Vv-a 172); Pp 27 (vigat˚ = arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāso Pp A 208) Dhs 1059 (+ āsiṃsanā etc.), 1136; Pv-a 22 (chinn˚ disappointed), 29 (˚âbhibhūta), 105; Dāvs v.13; Sdhp 78 Sdhp 111, Sdhp 498, Sdhp 609.

cp. Sk. āśaḥ f.

Āsāṭikā

(f.) a fly’s egg, a nit MN i.220 sq.; AN v.347 sq., 351, 359; Ne 59; Ja iii.176.

cp. Mārāṭhi āsāḍī

Āsādeti

- 1. to lay hand on, to touch, strike; fig. to offend, assail insult MN i.371; Ja i.481; Ja v.197; aor. āsādesi Thag 280 (mā ā. Tathāgate); ger. āsādetvā Ja v.272; Mil 100, Mil 205 (˚ayitvā); Pv-a 266 (isiṃ), āsādiya Ja v.154 (āsādiya metri causa; isiṃ, cp. āsajja3), & āsajja (q.v.); infin. āsāduṃ Ja v.154 & āsādituṃ ibid.; grd. āsādanīya Mil 205; Vv-a 213 (an˚).

2. to come near to (c. acc.), approach get Ja iii.206 (khuracakkaṃ). Asalha & Asalhi

Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsanna

Āsāḷhā & Āsāḷhī

(f.) Name of a month (JuneJuly) and of a Nakkhatta; only in compn. as Āsaḷha˚ Āsaḷhi˚, viz.; ˚nakkhatta Ja i.50; Snp-a 208; ˚puṇṇamā Ja i.63; Dhp-a i.87; Snp-a 199; Vv-a 66; Pv-a 137; ˚māsa Snp-a 378 (= vassûpanāyikāya purimabhāge A.); Vv-a 307 (= gimhānaṃ pacchimo māso).

Sk. āṣāḍha

Āsāvati

(f.) Name of a creeper (growing at the celestial grove Cittalatā) Ja iii.250, Ja iii.251.

Āsāsati

to pray for, expect, hope; confounded with śaṃs in āsaṃsati & āsiṃsati (q.v.) & their derivations ■ pp.; āsiṭṭha (q.v.). Asi & Asim

cp. Sk. āśāsati & āśāsti, ā + ; śās

Āsi & Āsiṃ

3rd & 1;st sg. aor. of atthi (q.v.).

Āsiṃsaka

(adj.) wishing, aspiring after, praying for Mil 342.

fr. ā + siṃsati, cp. āsaṃsā

Āsiṃsati

to hope for wish, pray for (lit. praise for the sake of gain), desire (w. acc.) SN i.34, SN i.62; Snp 779, Snp 1044, Snp 1046 (see Nd ii.135) Ja i.267; Ja iii.251; Ja iv.18; Ja v.435; Ja vi.43; Nd i.60; Mvu 30, Mvu 100; Vv-a 337; Pv-a 226 (ppr. āsiṃsamāna for āsamāna, q.v.).

Sk. āśaṃsati, ā + śaṃs, cp. also śās & āsāsati, further abhisaṃsati, abhisiṃsati & āsaṃsati

Āsiṃsanaka

(adj.) hoping for something, lit. praising somebody for the sake of gain, cadging Thag-a 217 (for āsaṃsuka Thig 273).

fr. āsiṃsanā

Āsiṃsanā

(f.) desire, wish, craving Ja v.28; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136 (+ āsiṃsitatta). As āsīsanā at Ne 53.

abstr. fr. ā + śaṃs, cp. āsiṃsati

Āsiṃsaniya

(adj.) to be wished for, desirable Mil 2 (˚ratana).

grd. of āsiṃsati

Āsikkhita

sohooled, instructed Pv-a 67, Pv-a 68.

pp. of ā + śikṣ, Sk. āśikṣita

Āsiñcati

to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin i.44; Vin ii.208; Ja iv.376; Vv 796 (= siñcati Vv-a 307); Pv-a 41 (udakena), 104, 213 (ger. ˚itvā). pp. āsitta (q.v.). Cp. vy˚.

ā + sic, cp. abhisiñcati & avasiñcati

Āsiṭṭha

wished or longed for Pv-a 104. *Asita

pp. of āsāsati, Sk. āśiṣṭa

*Āsita1

“having eaten”, but probably māsita (pp. of mṛś to touch, cp. Sk. mṛśita, which is ordinarily in massita), since it only occurs in combns. where m precedes, viz. Ja ii.446 (dumapakkani-m-asita, where C reading is māsita & expl;n. khāditvā asita (v.l. āsita) dhāta) Mil 302 (visam-āsita affected with poison = visamāsita) Cp. also the form māsi(n) touching, eating at Ja vi.354 (tiṇa˚, expld. by C. as khādaka) ■ āsita at Ja v.70 is very doubtful, v.l. āsina & asita; C. expls. by dhāta suhita p. 73. *Asita

= asita1?

*Āsita2

at Vv-a 276 is better read with v.l. SS bhāsita (-vādana etc.).

registered as such with meaning “performed” by Hardy in Index

Āsitta

sprinkled, poured out, anointed Ja v.87; Pp 31; Mil 286; Dhs-a 307; Dhp-a i.10; Vv-a 69.

pp. of āsiñcati, Sk. āsikta

Āsittaka

(adj.) mixed, mingled, adulterated Vin ii.123 (˚ûpadhāna “decorated divan”?); Thag-a 61, Thag-a 168 (an˚ for asecanaka, q.v.).

āsitta + ka

Āsītika

(adj.) 80 years old MN ii.124; Ja iii.395; Snp-a 172.

fr. asīta

Āsītika

(m.) a certain plant MN i.80 = MN i.245 (˚pabba).

etym.? Cp. BSk. āsītakī Lal. V. 319

Āsīdati

1. to come together, lit. to sit by DN i.248 (v.l. BB ādisitvā for āsīditvā, to be preferred?).

2. to come or go near, to approach (w. acc.), to get (to) AN iii.69 (āsīvisaṃ), 373 (na sādhurūpaṃ āsīde, should perhaps be read without the na); Ja iv.56.

3. to knock against, insult, offend attack Ja v.267 (Pot. āsīde = pharusa-vacanehe kāyakammena vā gbaṭṭento upagaccheyya C.) ■ pp. āsanna (q.v.). See also āsajja, āsajjana, āsada & Caus. āsādeti.;

cp. Sk. āsīdati, ā + sad

Āsīna

(adj.) sitting SN i.195 = Nd ii.136; Snp 1105, Snp 1136; Dhp 227, Dhp 386; Ja i.390; Ja iii.95; v. 340; vi.297; Dāvs ii.17.

pp. of ās, see āsati

Āsīyati

to have one’s home, one’s abode or support in (loc.), to live in, thrive by means of, to depend on Mil 75 (kaddame jāyati udake āsīyati i.e. the lotus is born in the mud and is supported or thrives by means of the water).

etym. doubtful; Trenckner Mil p.422 = ā + śyā to freeze or dry up, but taken by him in meaning to thaw, to warm oneself; Müller, P. Gr. 40 same with meaning “cool oneself”; Morris’ J.P. T. S. 1884, 72 as ā + śrā or śrī to become ripe, come to perfection, evidently at fault because of śrā etc. not found in Sk. More likely as a Pass. formation to be referred to ā + śī as in āsaya, i.e. to abide etc.

Āsīvisa

Derivation uncertain. The BSk. āsīviṣa (e.g. Jtm 3161) is a Sanskritisation of the Pali. To suppose this to come from ahi + visa (snake’s poison) would give a wrong meaning, and leave unexplained the change from ahi to āsi] a snake Vin iv.108; SN iv.172; AN ii.110; iii. 69; Ja i.245; Ja ii.274; Ja iv.30, Ja iv.496; Ja v.82, Ja v.267; Pp 48; Vism 470 (in comp.); Dhp-a i.139; Dhp-a ii.8, Dhp-a ii.38; Snp-a 334, Snp-a 458, Snp-a 465; Vv-a 308.

Āsīsanā

see āsiṃsanā.

Āsu

expletive particle = assu3 Ja v.241 (v.l. assu; nipātamattaṃ C. p.243).

Āsuṃ

3rd pl. aor. of atthi.

Āsumbhati

(& Āsumhati) to bring to fall, throw down or round, sling round Vin iv.263 Vin iv.265; Vv 5011 (˚itvāna); Ja iii.435 (aor. āsumhi, gloss khipi).

ā + śumbh to glide

Āsevati

to frequent, visit; to practise, pursue, indulge, enjoy AN i.10; Snp 73 (cp. Nd ii.94); Pts ii.93 (maggaṃ) ■ pp. āsevita.

ā + sev

Āsevana

(nt.) & āsevanā (f.)

1. practice, pursuit, indulgence in Vin ii.117; Pv-a 45.

2. succession repetition Dhs 1367; Kv 510 (cp. trsl. 294, 362); Vism 538.

fr. āsevati

Āsevita

frequented, indulged, practised, enjoyed Ja i.21 (v.141; āsevita-nisevita); ii.60; Sdhp 93, Sdhp 237.

pp. of āsevati

Āha

a perfect in meaning of pret. & pres. “he says or he said” he spoke, also spoke to somebody (w. acc.), as at Ja i.197 (cullalohitaṃ āha). Usually in 3rd person, very rarely used of 2nd person, as at Snp 839, Snp 840 (= kathesi bhaṇasi Nd 188, Nd 191).

3rd sg. āha Vin ii.191; Snp 790 (= bhaṇati Nd i.87), 888; Ja i.280; Ja iii.53 and freq. passim; 3rd pl āhu Snp 87, Snp 181; Dhp 345; Ja i.59; Snp-a 377, and āhaṃsu Ja i.222; Ja iii.278 and freq.

Vedic āha, orig. perfect of ah to speak, meaning “he began to speak”, thus in meaning of pres. “he says”

Āhacca1

ger. of āhanati.

Āhacca2

(adj.) 1. (cp. āharati1) to be removed, removable, in ˚pādaka-pīṭha & ˚mañca; a collapsible bed or chair, i e whose legs or feet can be put on & taken away at pleasure (by drawing out a pin) Vin ii.149 (cp. Vin Texts iii.164 n. 5); iv.40, 46 (def. as “ange vijjhitvā ṭhito hoti” it stands by means of a perforated limb), 168, 169.

2 (cp. āharati2) reciting, repeating, or to be quoted, recitation (of the Scriptures); by authority or by tradition MN iii.139; Dhs-a 9, & in cpds.; ˚pada a text quoted from Scripture), tradition Mil 148 (˚ena by reference to the text of the Scriptures); ˚vacana a saying of the Scriptures, a traditional or proverbial saying Ne 21 (in def. of suttaṃ).

grd. of āharati, corresponding to a Sk. *āhṛtya

Āhaṭa

brought, carried, obtained Vin i.121; Vin iii.53; DN ii.180 (spelt āhata); Ja iii.512 (gloss ānīta) Dāvs i.58.

pp. of āharati

Āhata

struck, beaten, stamped; afflicted, affected with (-˚) Vin iv.236 = DN iii.238 (kupito anattamano āhata-citto); Vin i.75, Vin i.76; SN i.170 (tilak˚, so read for tilakā-hata, affected with freckles, C. kāḷa-setādi vaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagatta, K. S. p. 318); Ja iii.456; Sdhp 187, Sdhp 401.

pp. of āhanati

Āhataka

“one who is beaten”, a slave, a worker (of low grade) Vin iv.224 (in def. of kammakāra, as bhaṭaka + ā).

fr. āhata

Āhanati

to beat, strike, press against, touch ppr. āhananto Mil 21 (dhamma-bheriṃ); Dāvs iv.50. ger. āhacca touching MN i.493; Ja i.330; Ja vi.2, Ja vi.200; Snp 716 = uppīḷetva Snp-a 498; Vism 420 ■ pp. āhata (q.v.).

1st sg. fut. āhañhi Vin i.8; DN ii.72, where probably to be read as āhañh (= āhañhaṃ). See Geiger, P.Gr. § 153, 2.

ā + han

Āhanana

(nt.) beating, striking, coming into touch, “impinging” Vism 142 (+ pariyāhanana, in def of vitakka) = Dhs-a 114 (cp. Expos. 151); Vism 515 (id.).

fr. ā + han

Āharaṇa

(adj.-n.) to be taken; taking away; only in phrase acorāharaṇo nidhi a treasure not to be taken by thieves Mil 320; Kp viii.9; Kp-a 224; Sdhp 589.

fr. āharati

Āharaṇaka

one who has to take or bring, a messenger Ja ii.199; Ja iii.328.

āharaṇa + ka

Āharati

1. to take, take up, take hold of, take out, take away MN i.429 (sallaṃ); SN i.121; SN iii.123; Ja i.40 (ger. āharitvā “with”), 293 (te hattaṃ); Nd ii.540c (puttamaṃsaṃ, read āhāreyya?); Pv ii.310; DN-a i.186, DN-a i.188 DN-a i.2. to bring, bring down, fetch DN ii.245; Ja iv.159 (nāvaṃ v.l. āhāhitvā); v.466; Vv-a 63 (bhattaṃ); Pv-a 75. 3. to get, acquire, bring upon oneself Ja v.433 (padosaṃ) Dhp-a ii.89.

4. to bring on to, put into (w. loc.); fig & intrs. to hold on to, put oneself to, touch, resort to MN i.395 (kaṭhalaṃ mukhe ā.; also inf. āhattuṃ); Thag 1156 (pāpacitte ā.; Mrs. Rh. D. Brethren ver. 1156, not as “accost” p. 419, n.).

5. to assault, strike, offend (for pāhari?) Thag 1173.

6. (fig.) to take up, fall or go back on (w. acc.), recite, quote, repeat (usually with desanaṃ dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) Ja iii.383 (desanaṃ), 401; v.462 (vatthuṃ āharitvā dassesi told a story for example); Snp-a 376; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 39 (atītaṃ) 42, 66, 99 (dhamma-desanaṃ). See also payirudāharati. pp. āhaṭa (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. āhārapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take, to call or ask for Ja iii.88, Ja iii.342; Ja v.466; Pv-a 215.

ā + hṛ;

Āharima

(adj.) “fetching”, fascinating, captivating, charming Vin iv.299; Thig 299; Thag-a 227; Vv-a 14, Vv-a 15, Vv-a 77.

fr. āharati

Āhariya

one who is to bring something Ja iii.328. Ahavana & Ahavaniya;

grd. of āharati

Āhavana & Āhavanīya

see under āhuneyya.

Āhāra

feeding, support, food, nutriment (lit & fig.). The term is used comprehensively and the usual enum;n. comprises four kinds of nutriment, viz. (1) kabaḷinkāra āhāro (bodily nutriment, either oḷāriko gross, solid, or sukhumo fine) (2) phassāhāro Name of contact, (3) manosañcetanā˚ Name of volition (= cetanā S. A. on ii.11 f.), (4) viññāṇ˚ of consciousness Thus at MN i.261; DN iii.228, DN iii.276; Dhs 71–⁠73 Vism 341. Another definition of Dhammapāla’s refers it to the fourfold tasting as asita (eaten), pīta (drunk), khāyita (chewed), sāyita (tasted) food Pv-a 25. A synonym with mūla, hetu, etc. for cause, Yamaka, i.3; Yam. A (J.P.T.S. 1910

12) 54. See on term also Dhs trsl. 30 ■ Vin i.84; DN i.166; SN i.172; SN ii.11, SN ii.13, SN ii.98 sq. (the 4 kinds in detail); iii.54 (sa˚); v.64, 391; AN iii.51 (sukhass˚) 79, 142 sq., 192 sq.; iv.49, 108; v.52 (the four) 108, 113 (avijjāya etc.), 116 (bhavataṇhāya), 269 sq (nerayikānaṃ etc.); Snp 78, Snp 165, Snp 707, Snp 747; Nd i.25; Pts i.22 (the four) 122 (id.), 55, 76 sq; Kv 508; Pp 21, Pp 55; Vb 2, Vb 13, Vb 72, Vb 89, Vb 320, Vb 383, Vb 401 sq. (the four) Dhs 58, Dhs 121, Dhs 358, Dhs 646; Ne 31, Ne 114, Ne 124; Dhs-a 153 Dhs-a 401; Dhp-a i.183 (˚ṃ pacchindati to bring up food, to vomit); ii.87; Vv-a 118; Pv-a 14, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 112, Pv-a 148 (utu physical nutriment); Sdhp 100, Sdhp 395, Sdhp 406; AN v.136 gives ten āhāra opposed to ten paripanthā. -an˚; without food unfed MN i.487 (aggi); SN iii.126; SN v.105; Snp 985.

-ūpahāra consumption of food, feeding, eating Vin iii.136. -ṭhitika subsisting or living on food DN iii.211, DN iii.273; AN v.50, AN v.55; Pts i.5, Pts i.122. -pariggaha taking up or acquirement of food Mil 244 or is it “restraint or abstinence in food”? Same combn. at Mil 313. -maya “food-like” feeding stuff, food Ja iii.523. -lolatā greed after food Snp-a 35. -samudaya origin of nutriment SN iii.59.

fr. ā + hṛ; lit. taking up or on to oneself

Āhāratthaṃ

the state of being food. In the idiom āhārattaṇ pharati; Vin i.199, of medicine, ʻto penetrate into food-nessʼ, to come under the category of food Mil 152, of poison, to turn into food. [According to Oldenberg (Vin i.381) his MSS read about equally ˚attaṃ and ˚atthaṃ. Trenckner prints ˚atthaṃ, and records no variant (see p. 425)].

āhāra + tta

Āhāreti

to take food, eat, feed on SN ii.13; SN iii.240; SN iv.104; AN i.114, AN i.295; AN ii.40, AN ii.145, AN ii.206; iv. 167; Nd ii.540c (āhāraṃ & puttamaṃsaṃ cp. SN ii.98).

Denom. fr. āhāra

Āhika

(-˚) (adj.) only in pañcāhika every five days (cp. pañcāhaṃ & sattāhaṃ) MN iii.157.

der. fr. aha2

Āhiṇḍati

to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w. acc.) Vin i.203 (senāsana-cārikaṃ), 217; ii. 132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṃ); iv.62; Ja i.48 Ja i.108, Ja i.239; Nd ii.540b; Pv iii.229 (= vicarati Pv-a 185) Vism 38, Vism 284 (aṭaviṃ); Vv-a 238 (tattha tattha); Pv-a 143.

ā + hiṇḍ, cp. BSk. āhiṇḍate Divy 165 etc.

Āhita

put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a fire), blazing Snp 18 (gini = ābhato jalito vā Snp-a 28). See sam˚.

pp. of ā + dhā

Āhu

3rd pl. of āha (q.v.).

Āhuti

(f.) oblation, sacrifice; veneration, adoration MN iii.167; SN i.141; Thag 566 (˚īnaṃ paṭiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts); Ja i.15; Ja v.70 (id.) Vv 6433 (paramâhutiṃ gato deserving the highest adoration); Snp 249, Snp 458; Kv 530; Snp-a 175; Vv-a 285.

Vedic āhuti, ā + hu

Āhuna

= āhuti, in āhuna-pāhuna giving oblations and sacrificing Vv-a 155; by itself at Vism 219.

Āhuneyya

(adj.) sacrificial, worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful DN iii.5, DN iii.217 (aggi); AN ii.56, AN ii.70 (sāhuneyyaka), 145 sq. (id.); iv.13, 41 (aggi); Iti 88 (+ pāhuneyya); Vv 6433 (cp. Vv-a 285). See def. at Vism 219 where expld. by “āhavanīya” and “āhavanaṃ arahati” deserving of offerings.

a grd. form. fr. ā + hu, cp. āhuti

Āhundarika

(adj.) according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 73 “crowded up, blocked up, impassable Vin i.79; Vin iv.297; Vism 413 (˚ṃ andha-tamaṃ).

I.

doubtful or āhuṇḍ˚?

I

I

in i-kāra the letter or sound i Snp-a 12 (˚lopa), 508 (id.).

Ikka

a bear Ja vi.538 [ = accha C.).

Sk. ṛkṣa, of which the regular representation is P. accha2

Ikkāsa

(?) at Vin ii.151 (+ kasāva) is trsl. by “slime of trees”, according to Bdhgh’s expln. on p. 321 (to C. V. vi.3, 1), who however reads nikkāsa.

uncertain as regard meaning & etym.

Ikkhaṇa

(nt.) seeing Vism 16.

fr. īkṣ

Ikkhaṇika

a fortuneteller Vin iii.107; SN ii.260; Ja i.456, Ja i.457; Ja vi.504.

fr. īkṣ to look or see, cp. akkhi

Ikkhati

to look Ja v.153; Thag-a 147; Dhs-a 172.

fr. īkṣ

Iṅgita

(nt.) movement, gesture, sign Ja ii.195, Ja ii.408; Ja vi.368, Ja vi.459.

pp. of ingati = iñjati

Iṅgha

(indecl.) part. of exhortation lit. “get a move on”, come on, go on, look here Snp 83, Snp 189, Snp 862, Snp 875 = Snp 1052; Ja v.148; Pv iv.57; Vv 539 (= codan’atthe nipāto Vv-a 237); Vv-a 47; Dhp-a iv.62.

Sk. anga prob. after P. ingha (or añja, q.v.); fr. iñjati, cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 84

Iṅghāḷa

coal, embers, in inghāḷakhu Thig 386 a pit of glowing embers (= angāra-kāsu Thag-a 256). The whole cpd. is doubtful.

according to Morris J.P. T.S. 1884, 74 = angāra, cp. Marāthī ingala live coal

Icc’

see iti.

Iccha

(-˚) (adj.) wishing, longing, having desires, only in pāp˚ having evil desires SN i.50 SN ii.156; an˚ without desires SN i.61, SN i.204; Snp 707; app id. Snp 628, Snp 707.

the adj. form of icchā

Icchaka

(-˚) (adj.) wishing, desirous, only in nt. adv. yad-icchikaṃ (and yen˚; ) after one’s wish or liking MN iii.97; AN iii.28.

fr. iccha

Icchati1

to wish, desire, ask for (c. acc.), expect SN i.210 (dhammaṃ sotuṃ i.); Snp 127, Snp 345, Snp 512, Snp 813, Snp 836; Dhp 162, Dhp 291; Nd i.3, Nd i.138, Nd i.164; Nd ii.s. v.; Pv ii.63; Pp 19; Mil 269, Mil 327; Snp-a 16, Snp-a 23, Snp-a 321; Kp-a 17; Pv-a 20 Pv-a 71, Pv-a 74; Pot. icche Dhp 84; Snp 835; Pv ii.66 & iccheyya DN ii.2, DN ii.10; Snp 35; Dhp 73, Dhp 88; ppr. icchaṃ Snp 826 Snp 831, Snp 937; Dhp 334 (phalaṃ) aor. icchi Pv-a 31 ■ grd icchitabba Pv-a 8 ■ pp. iṭṭha & icchita; (q.v.). Note. In prep ■ cpds. the root iṣ2 (icchati) is confused with root iṣ1 (iṣati, eṣati) with pp. both ˚iṭṭha and ˚iṣita Thus ajjhesati, pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk. parīcchati), pp. pariyiṭṭha pariyesita.;

Sk. icchati, iṣ, cp. Av. isaiti, Obulg. iskati, Ohg. eiscōn, Ags. āscian = E. ask; all of same meaning “seek wish”

Icchati2

see aticchati & cp.; icchatā.

Sk. rcchati of ṛ, concerning which see appeti

Icchatā

(-˚) (f.) wishfulness, wishing: only in aticchatā too great wish for, covetousness, greed Vb 350 (cp. aticchati, which is probably the primary basis of the word); mah˚ & pāp˚; Vb 351, Vb 370.

abstr. fr. icchā

Icchana

(nt.) desiring, wish Ja iv.5; Ja vi.244.

fr. iṣ2, cp. Sk. īpsana

Icchā

(f.) wish, longing, desire DN ii.243; DN iii.75; SN i.40 (˚dhūpāyito loko), 44 (naraṃ parikassati) AN ii.143; AN iv.293 sq.; 325 sq.; v.40, 42 sq.; Snp 773 Snp 872; Dhp 74, Dhp 264 (˚lobha-samāpanna); Nd i.29, Nd i.30; Pp 19; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; Vb 101, Vb 357, Vb 361, Vb 370; Ne 18 Ne 23, Ne 24; Asl. 363; Dhs-a 250 (read icchā for issā? See Dhs trsl.100); Snp-a 108; Pv-a 65, Pv-a 155; Sdhp 242, Sdhp 320.

-āvacara moving in desires MN i.27 (pāpaka); Ne 27 -āvatiṇṇa affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Snp 306. -pakata same Vin i.97; AN iii.119, AN iii.191, AN iii.219 sq. Pp 69; Mil 357; Vism 24 (where Bdhgh however takes it as “icchāya apakata” and puts apakata = upadduta) -vinaya discipline of one’s wishes DN iii.252, AN iv.15 AN v.165 sq.

fr. icchati, iṣ2

Icchita

wished, desired, longed for Ja i.208; Dhs-a 364; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 53, Pv-a 64 (read anicchita for anijjhiṭṭha which may be a contamination of icchita & iṭṭha), 113 127 (twice).;

pp. of icchati

Ijjhati

to have a good result, turn out a blessing. succeed prosper, be successful SN i.175 (“work effectively trsl.; = samijjhati mahapphalaṃ hoti C.); iv.303; Snp 461 Snp 485; Ja v.393; Pv ii.111; ii.913 (= samijjhati Pv-a 120) Pot. ijjhe Snp 458, Snp 459; pret. ijjhittha (= Sk. ṛdhyiṣṭha Vv 206 (= nippajjittha mahapphalo ahuvattha Vv-a 103). pp. iddha. See also aḍḍha2 & aḍḍhaka. Cp. sam˚.;

Vedic ṛdhyate & ṛdhnoti; Gr. α ̓́λχομαι to thrive, Lat. alo to nourish, also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power

Ijjhana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) success, carrying out successfully Pts i.17 sq., 74, 181; ii.125, 143 sq., 161, 174 Vb 217 sq.; Vism 266, Vism 383 (˚aṭṭhena iddhi); Dhs-a 91 Dhs-a 118, Dhs-a 237.

fr. ijjhati

Iñjati

to shake, move, turn about, stir DN i.56; SN i.107 SN i.132, SN i.181 (aniñjamāna ppr. med. “impassive”); iii.211 Thag 42; Thag 2, Thag 231; Nd ii.s. v. (+ calati vedhati); Vism 377; DN-a i.167 ■ pp. iñjita (q.v.).

Vedic ṛñjati (cp. P. ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda), and as aṅg in Sk. anga = P. añja & ingha Vedic pali-angati to turn about. See also ānejja & añjati;1

Iñjanā

(f.) & ˚aṃ (nt.) shaking, movement, motion Snp 193 (= calanā phandanā Snp-a 245); Ne 88 (= phandanā C.). an˚; immobility, steadfastness Pts i.15 Pts ii.118.

fr. iñj, see iñjati

Iñjita

shaken, moved Thag 386 (an˚). Usually as nt. iñjitaṃ shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation MN i.454; SN i.109; SN iv.202; AN ii.45; Snp 750, Snp 1040 (pl. iñjitā), 1048 (see Nd ii.140); Dhp 255; Vb 390. On the 7 iñjitas see J.P. T.S. 1884, 58.

pp. of iñjati

Iñjitatta

(nt.) state of vacillation, wavering, motion SN v.315 (kāyassa).

abstr. fr. iñjita nt.

Iṭṭha

(adj.) pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iṭṭha kanta manāpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) DN i.245; DN ii.192; MN i.85; SN iv.60, SN iv.158, SN iv.235 sq.; SN v.22, SN v.60, SN v.147; AN ii.66 sq.; AN v.135 (dasa, dhammā etc., ten objects affording pleasure); Snp 759; It. 15; Vb 2, Vb 100, Vb 337 ■ Alone as nt. meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, happiness at Snp 154 (+ aniṭṭha); Ne 28 (+ aniṭṭha); Vism 167 (id.); Pv-a 116 (= bhadraṃ), 140. -aniṭṭha unpleasant disagreeable Pv-a 32, Pv-a 52, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 116 ■ See also pariy˚ in which iṭṭha stands for eṭṭha. Itthaka (Itthaka)

pp. of icchati

Iṭṭhakā (Itthakā)

(f.)

1. a burnt brick a tile Vin ii.121 (˚pākara a brick wall, distinguished fr silāpakāra & dāru˚); Ja iii.435, Ja iii.446 (pākār iṭṭhikā read ˚aṭṭhakā); v.213 (rattiṭṭhikā); Vism 355 (˚dārugomaya) Pv-a 4 (˚cuṇṇa-makkhita-sīsa the head rubbed with brickpowder i.e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika x.5 piṣṭa-cūṛn’âvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ’haṃ paśūkṛtaḥ with striking equation iṣṭaka → piṣṭa). 2. pl. (as suvaṇṇa˚) gold or gilt tiles used for covering a cetiya or tope Dhp-a iii.29, Dhp-a iii.61; Vv-a 157.

BSk. iṣṭakā, e.g. Divy 221; from the Idg. root *idh → *aidh to burn, cp. Sk. idhma firewood inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edhaḥ fuel; Gr. ἀίχω burn, α ̔ϊχος fire-brand; Lat. aedes, aestas & aestus more especially Av. ištya tile, brick

Iṭṭhi˚

in ˚khagga-dhāra at Ja vi.223 should be read iddha.

Iṇa

(nt.) debt DN i.71, DN i.73; AN iii.352; AN v.324 (enumd. with baddha, jāni & kali); Snp 120; Ja i.307; Ja ii.388, Ja ii.423; Ja iii.66; Ja iv.184 (iṇagga for nagga?) 256; v.253 (where enumd. as one of the 4 paribhogas viz. theyya˚, iṇa˚, dāya˚, sāmi˚); vi.69, 193; Mil 375; Pv-a 273, Pv-a 276, iṇaṃ gaṇhāti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism 556; Snp-a 289; Pv-a 3 ■ iṇaṃ muñcati to discharge a debt Ja iv.280; Ja v.238; ˚ṃ sodheti same Pv-a 276; labhati same Pv-a 3.

-apagama absence of debt Thag-a 245. -gāhaka a borrower Mil 364. -ghāta stricken by debt Snp 246 (iṇaṃ gahetva tassa appadānena iṇaghāta). -ṭṭha (with iṇaṭṭa as v.l. at all passages, see aṭṭa) fallen into or being in debt MN i.463 = SN iii.93 = Iti 89 = Mil 279 -paṇṇa promissory note Ja i.230; Ja iv.256. -mokkha release from debt Ja iv.280; Ja v.239. -sādhaka negotiator of a loan Mil 365.

Sk. ṛṇa, see also P. an-aṇa

Iṇāyika

one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor SN i.170; Ja iv.159, Ja iv.256; Ja vi.178; Thag-a 271 see also dhanika); Pv-a 3 ■ (2) a debtor Vin i.76; Nd i.160.

fr. iṇa

Ita

gone, only in cpd. dur-ita gone badly, as nt. evil, wrong Davs i.61; otherwise in compn. with prep., as peta, vīta etc.

pp. of eti, i

Itara1

(adj.) other second, next; different Dhp 85, Dhp 104, Dhp 222; Ja ii.3; Ja iii.26 Ja iv.4; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 83, Pv-a 117. In repetition cpd. itarītara one or the other, whatsoever, any Snp 42; Ja v.425 Nd ii.141; Mil 395; Kp-a 145, Kp-a 147; acc. itarītaraṃ instr.; itarītarena used as adv. of one kind or another in every way, anyhow [cp. BSk. itaretara M Vastu iii. 348 and see Wackernagel Altind. Gram. II. Ś 121 c.] Ja vi.448 (˚ṃ); Dhp 331 (˚ena); Vv 841 (text reads itritarena v.l. itaritarena, expld. by itaritaraṃ Vv-a 333).

Ved. itara = Lat. iterum a second time; compar. of pron. base *i, as in ayaṃ, etaṃ, iti etc.

Itara2

(adj.) freq. spelling for ittara (q.v.).

Iti (ti)

(indecl.) emphatic deictic particle “thus”. Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style (poetry), the latter more familiar in conversational prose. The function of “iti” is expld. by the old Pāli C. in a conventional phrase, looking upon it more as a “filling” particle than trying to define its meaning viz ■ itī ti padasandhi padasaṃsaggo padapāripurī akkharasamavāyo etc.” Nd i.123 = Nd ii.137. The same expln. also for iti’ haṃ (see below iv.)-I. As deictic adv. “thus, in this way” (Vism 423 iti = evaṃ pointing to something either just mentioned or about to be mentioned: (a) referring to what precedes Snp 253 (n’eso maman ti iti naṃ vijaññā), 805; Iti 123 (ito devā.. taṃ namassanti); Dhp 74 (iti bālassa sankappo thus think the-foolish), 286 (iti bālo vicinteti); Vv 7910 (= evaṃ Vv-a 307); Vv-a 5 ■ (b) referring to what follows DN i.63 (iti paṭisañcikkhati); AN i.205 (id.)-II. As emphatic part. pointing out or marking off a statement either as not one’s own (reported) or as the definite contents of (one’s own or other’s) thoughts. On the whole untranslatable (unless written as quotation marks), often only setting off a statement as emphatic, where we would either underline the word or phrase in question, or print it in italics, or put it in quot. marks (e.g. bālo ti vuccati Dhp 63 = bālo vuccati).

1. in direct speech (as given by writer or narrator), e.g. sādhu bhante Kassapa lābhataṃ esā janatā dassanāyā ti. Tena hi Sīha tvaṃ yeva Bhagavato ārocehī ti. Evaṃ bhante ti kho Sīho… . DN i.151.

2. in indirect speech: (a) as statement of a fact “so it is that” (cp. E. “viz.”, Ger. “und zwar”), mostly untranslated Kp iv. (arahā ti pavuccati); Ja i.253 (tasmā pesanaka-corā t’ eva vuccanti); iii.51 (tayo sahāyā ahesuṃ makkato sigālo uddo ti); Pv-a 112 (ankuro pañca-sakaṭasatehi… aññataro pi brāhmaṇo pañca-sakaṭasatehī ti dve janā sakata-sahassehi… patipannā) ■ (b) as statement of a thought “like this”, “I think”, so, thus Snp 61 (“sango eso” iti ñatvā knowing “this is defilement”), 253 (“neso maman” ti iti naṃ vijaññā), 783 (“iti’ han” ti) 1094 (etaṃ dīpaṃ anāparaṃ Nibbānaṃ iti naṃ brūmi I call this N. ), 1130 (aparā pāraṃ gaccheyya tasmā “Parāyanaṃ” iti) ■ III. Peculiarities of spelling. (1) in combn. with other part. iti is elided & contracted as follows icc’ eva, t’ eva, etc ■ (2) final a, i, u preceding ti are lengthened to ā, ī, ū, e.g. mā evaṃ akatthā ti Dhp-a i.7 kati dhurānī ti ibid; dve yeva dhurāni bhikkhū ti ibid. IV. Combinations with other emphatic particles: + eva thus indeed, in truth, really; as icc’ eva Pv i.119 (evam eva Pv-a 59); t’ eva Ja i.253; Miin 114; tv’ eva Ja i.203; Ja ii.2. -iti kira thus now, perhaps, I should say DN i.228, DN i.229, DN i.240. -iti kho thus, therefore DN i.98, DN i.103 DN iii.135. iti and so on (?), thus and such (similar cases Nd i.13 = Nd ii.420 A1. -iti ha thus surely, indeed Snp 934, Snp 1084 (see below under ītihītihaṃ; cp. Snp-a Index 669: itiha? and itikirā); Iti 76; DN-a i.247, as iti haṃ at Snp 783 (same expln. at Nd i.71 as for iti). -kin ti how Ja ii.159.

-kirā (f.) [a substantivised iti kira] hearsay, lit. “so I guess” or “I have heard” AN i.189 = AN ii.191 sq. = Nd ii.151. Cp. itiha. -bhava becoming so & so (opp. abhava not becoming) Vin ii.184 (˚abhava); DN i.8 (ip = iti bhavo iti abhavo DN-a i.91); AN ii.248; Iti 109 (id.); syn. with itthabhava (q.v.). -vāda “speaking so & so”, talk, gossip MN i.133; SN v.73; AN ii.26; It iii.35. -vuttaka (nt. [a noun formation fr. iti vuttaṃ] “so it has been said” (book of) quotations, “Logia”, Name of the fourth book of the Khuddaka-nikāya, named thus because every sutta begins with vuttaṃ h’ etaṃ Bhagavatā “thus has the Buddha said” (see khuddaka and navanga) Vin iii.8; MN i.133; AN ii.7, AN ii.103; AN iii.86, AN iii.177, AN iii.361 sq.; Pp 43, Pp 62 Kp-a 12. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares the interesting BSk. distortion itivṛttaṃ. -hāsa [ = iti ha āsa, preserving the Vedic form āsa, 3rd sg. perf. of atthi] “thus indeed it has been”, legendary lore, oral tradition, history usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase itihāsa-pañca-mānaṃ padako veyyākaraṇo etc. DN i.88 = (see DA i.247); AN i.163; AN iii.223; Snp 447, Snp 1020 Cp. also Mvu i.556 ■ hītiha [itiha + itiha] “so so” talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc. (cp itikirā & anītiha. Nd;2 spells ītihītiha) MN i.520; SN i.154; Snp 1084; Nd ii.151.

Vedic iti, of pron. base *i, cp. Sk. itthaṃ thus, itthā here, there; Av. ipa so; Lat. ita & item thus Cp. also P. ettha; lit. “here, there (now), then”

Ito

(indecl.) adv. of succession or motion in space & time “from here”. “from now”. (1) with ref. to space: (a) from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in opp. to the “other” world) Iti 77; Snp 271 (˚ja. ˚nidāna caused or founded in or by this existence attabhāvaṃ sandhāy’ āha Snp-a 303), 774 (cutāse), 870 (˚nidāna), 1062 (from this source, i.e. from me), 1101; Pv i.57 (ito dinnaṃ what is given in this world); i.62 (i.e. manussalokato Pv-a 33); i.123 (= idhalokato Pv-a 64); Ne 93 (ito bahiddhā); Pv-a 46 (ito dukkhato mutti) ■ (b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c’ ito here and there Pv-a 4, Pv-a 6; and ito vā etto vā here & there Dhp-a ii.80 ■ (2) with ref. to time from here, from now, hence (in chronological records with num. ord. or card., with ref. either to past or future) (a) referring to the past, since DN ii.2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago); Snp 570 (ito aṭṭhame, scil. divase 8 days ago Snp-a 457; T. reads atthami); Vv-a 319 (ito kira tiṃsa-kappa-sahasse); Pv-a 19 (dvā navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (id.), 78 (pañcamāya jātiyā in the fifth previous re-birth) ■ (b) referring to the future, i.e. henceforth in future, from now e.g. ito sattame divase in a week Vv-a 138; ito paraṃ further, after this Snp-a 160 Snp-a 178, Snp-a 412, Snp-a 549; Pv-a 83; ito paṭthāya from now on, henceforward Ja i.63 (ito dāni p.); Pv-a 41.

Vedic itaḥ, abl ■ adv. formation fr. pron. base *i, cp. iti, ayaṃ etc.

Ittara

(sometimes spelt itara ) (adj.)

1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief unstable MN i.318 (opp. dīgharattaṃ); AN ii.187; Ja i.393 Ja iii.83 (˚dassana = khaṇika˚ C.), iv.112 (˚vāsa temporary abode); Pv i.1111 (= na cira-kāla-ṭṭhāyin anicca vipariṇāma-dhamma Pv-a 60); DN-a i.195; Pv-a 60 (= paritta khaṇika).

2. small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean MN ii.47 (˚jacca of inferior birth); AN ii.34; Snp 757 (= paritta paccupaṭṭhāna Snp-a 509); Mil 93, Mil 114 (˚pañña of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in BSk. itvaṛa, e.g. Divy 317 (dāna).

Vedic itvara in meaning “going”, going along, hence developed meaning “passing” fr. i

Ittaratā

(f.) changeableness Mil 93 (of a woman).

fr. ittara

Ittha

(indecl.) here, in this world (or “thus, in such a way”) only in cpd. ˚bhāv’ aññathā-bhāva such an (i.e. earthly existence and one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form” (cp. itibhāva & itthatta Snp 729, Snp 740 = Snp 752; Iti 9 (v.l. itthi˚ for iti˚) = AN ii.10 = Nd ii.172a; Iti 94 (v.l. ittha˚). There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sk. itthā & itthaṃ Sk. itthaṃ (see next).;

the regular representative of Vedic ittha here, there, but preserved only in cpds. while the Pāli form is ettha

Itthaṃ

(indecl.) thus, in this way DN i.53, DN i.213; Dāvs iv.35; Dāvs v.18.

-nāma (itthan˚) having such as name, called thus, socalled Vin i.56; Vin iv.136; Ja i.297; Mil 115; Dhp-a ii.98 -bhūta being thus, of this kind, modal, only in cpd. ˚lakkhaṇa or ˚ākhyāna the sign or case of modality, i.e. the ablative case Snp-a 441; Vv-a 162, Vv-a 174; Pv-a 150.

adv. fr. pron. base ˚i, as also iti in same meaning

Itthatta1

(nt.) [ittha + *tvaṃ, abstr. fr. ittha. The curious BSk. distortion of this word is icchatta M Vastu 417 being here (in this world), in the present state of becoming, this (earthly) state (not “thusness” or “life as we conceive it”, as Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. i.177; although a confusion between ittha & itthaṃ seems to exist, see ittha); “life in these conditions” K. S. ii.17; expld. by itthabhāva C. on SN i.140 (see K. S. 318) ■ See also freq formula A of arahatta ■ DN i.18, DN i.84; AN i.63; AN ii.82, AN ii.159 AN ii.203; Snp 158; Dhs 633; Pp 70, Pp 71; DN-a i.112.

Itthatta2

(nt.) state or condition of femininity, womanhood, muliebrity Dhs 633 (itthi-sabhāva Dhs-a 321). Itthi & Itthi

itthi + *tvaṃ abstr. fr. itthi

Itthi & Itthī

(f.) woman female; also (usually as-˚) wife. Opp. purisa man (see e.g. for contrast of itthi and purisa Ja v.72, Ja v.398; Ne 93; Dhp-a i.390; Pv-a 153) ■ SN i.33 (nibbānass’ eva santike) 42, 125 (majjhim˚, mah˚), 185; AN i.28, AN i.138; AN ii.115, AN ii.209 AN iii.68, AN iii.90, AN iii.156; AN iv.196 (purisaṃ bandhati); Snp 112, Snp 769 (nom. pl. thiyo = itthi-saññikā thiyo Snp-a 513); Ja i.286 (itthi doso), 300 (gen. pl. itthinaṃ); ii.415 (nom. pl. thiyo) v.397 (thi-ghātaka), 398 (gen. dat. itthiyā), v.425 (nom pl. itthiyo); Vb 336, Vb 337; DN-a i.147; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 44, Pv-a 46 Pv-a 67, Pv-a 154 (amanuss˚ of petīs); Sdhp 64, Sdhp 79anitthi a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, an unfaithful wife Ja ii.126 (= ucchiṭṭh˚ C.); kul’-itthi a wife of good descent Vin ii.10; AN iii.76; AN iv.16, AN iv.19; dahar a young wife Ja i.291; dur˚ a poor woman Ja iv.38. Some general characterisations of womanhood: 10 kinds of women enumd. at Vin iii.139 = AN v.264 = Vv-a 72 viz. mātu-rakkhitā, pitu˚, mātāpitu˚ bhātu˚, bhaginī˚ ñāti˚, gotta˚, dhamma˚, sarakkhā, saparidaṇḍā; see Vin iii.139 for expln.-S i.38 (malaṃ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); Ja i.287 (itthiyo nāma āsa lāmikā pacchimikā); iv. 222 (itthiyo papāto akkhāto; pamattaṃ pamathenti); v. 425 (sīho yathā… tath’ itthiyo); women as goods for sale SN i.43 (bhaṇḍānaṃ uttamaṃ); Dhp-a i.390 (itthiyo vikkiṇiya bhaṇḍaṃ).

-agāra (-āgāra) as itthā̆gāra women’s apartment, seraglio Vin i.72; Vin iv.158; SN i.58, SN i.89; Ja i.90; also coll. for womenfolk women (cp. Ger. frauenzimmer) DN ii.249; Ja v.188 -indriya the female principle or sex, femininity (opp. puris indriya) SN v.204; AN iv.57 sq.; Vism 447, Vism 492; Dhs 585, Dhs 633 Dhs 653 et passim. -kathā talk about women DN i.7 (cp. DN-a i.90). -kāma the craving for a woman SN iv.343. -kutta a woman’s behaviour, woman’s wiles, charming behaviour coquetry AN iv.57 = Dhs 633; Ja i.296, Ja i.433; Ja ii.127, Ja ii.329 Ja iv.219, Ja iv.472; Dhp-a iv.197. -ghātaka a woman-killer Ja v.398. -dhana wife’s treasure, dowry Vin iii.16. -dhutta a rogue in the matter of women, one who indulges in women Snp 106; Ja iii.260; Pv-a 5. -nimitta characteristic of a woman Dhs 633, Dhs 713, Dhs 836. -pariggaha a woman’s company, a woman Nd i.11. -bhāva existence as woman womanhood SN i.129; Thig 216 (referring to a yakkhinī cp. Thag-a 178; Dhs 633; Pv-a 168. -rūpa womanly beauty AN i.1; AN iii.68; Thig 294. -lakkhaṇa fortune-telling regarding a woman DN i.9 (cp. Dhp-a i.94, + purisa˚); Ja vi.135. -liṅga “sign of a woman”, feminine quality, female sex Vism 184; Dhs 633, Dhs 713, Dhs 836; Dhs-a 321 sq. -sadda the sound (or word) “woman” Dhp-a i.15. -soṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Snp 112.

Vedic stri, Av. strī woman, perhaps with Sk. sātuḥ uterus fr. Idg. ˚sī to sow or produce, Lat. sero Goth. saian, Ohg. sāen, Ags. sāwan etc., cp. also Cymr hīl progeny, Oir. sīl seed; see J. Schmidt, K. Z. xxv.29. The regular representative of Vedic strī is P. thī, which only occurs rarely (in poetry & comp;n.) see thī

Itthikā

(f.) a woman Vin iii.16; DN ii.14; Ja i.336; Vv 187; Sdhp 79. As adj. itthika in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women Vin ii.256 (kulāni bahuttikāni appapurisakāni rich in women & lacking in men); SN ii.264 (id. and appitthikāni ). Ida & Idam

fr. itthi

Ida & Idaṃ

(indecl.) emphatic demonstr. adv. in local, temporal & modal function, as (1) in this, here:; idappaccayatā having its foundation in this, i.e. causally connected, by way of cause Vin i.5 = SN i.136; DN i.185; Dhs 1004 Dhs 1061; Vb 340, Vb 362, Vb 365; Vism 518; etc ■ (2) now, then which idha is more freq.) DN ii.267, DN ii.270, almost syn. (for with kira ■ (3) just (this), even so, only: idam-atthika just sufficient, proper, right Thag 984 (cīvara); Pp 69 (read so for ˚maṭṭhika, see Pp A 250); as idam-atthitā “being satisfied with what is sufficient” at Vism 81 expld. as atthika-bhāva at Pp A 250. idaṃsaccābhinivesa inclination to say: only this is the truth, i.e. inclination to dogmatise, one of the four kāya-ganthā, viz abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṃ˚ (see Dhs 1135 & Dhs trsl.304); DN iii.230; SN v.59; Nd i.98; Ne 115 sq.

nt. of ayaṃ (idaṃ) in function of a deictic part.

Idāni

(indecl.) now Dhp 235, Dhp 237; Kp-a 247.

Vedic idānīṃ

Iddha1

in flames, burning, flaming bright, clear Ja vi.223 (˚khaggadharā balī; so read for T. iṭṭhi-khagga˚); Dpvs vi.42.

pp. of iddhe to idh or indh, cp. indhana & idhuma

Iddha2

(a) prosperous, opulent, wealthy DN i.211 (in idiomatic phrase iddha phīta bahujana of a prosperous town); AN iii.215 (id.); Ja vi.227 Ja vi.361 (= issara C.), 517; Dāvs i.11 ■ (b) successful satisfactory, sufficient Vin i.212 (bhattaṃ); iv.313 (ovādo).

pp. of ijjhati; cp. Sk. ṛddha

Iddhi

. There is no single word in English for Iddhi, as the idea is unknown in Europe. The main sense seems to be ʻpotencyʼ.

1. Pre-Buddhistic; the Iddhi of a layman The four Iddhis of a king are personal beauty, long life good health, and popularity (D ii.177; MN iii.176, cp. Ja iii.454 for a later set). The Iddhi of a rich young noble is 1. The use of a beautiful garden, 2. of soft and pleasant clothing, 3. of different houses for the different seasons 4. of good food, AN i.145. At MN i.152 the Iddhi of a hunter is the craft and skill with which he captures game; but at p. 155 other game have an Iddhi of their own by which they outwit the hunter. The Iddhi, the power of a confederation of clans, is referred to at DN ii.72. It is by the Iddhi they possess that birds are able to fly (Dhp 175).

2. Psychic powers. including most of those claimed for modern mediums (see under Abhiññā ). Ten such are given in a stock paragraph. They are the power to project mind-made images of oneself; to become invisible; to pass through solid things, such as a wall; to penetrate solid ground as if it were water; to walk on water; to fly through the air; to touch sun and moon; to ascend into the highest heavens (DN i.77, DN i.212; DN ii.87, DN ii.213 DN iii.112, DN iii.281; SN ii.121; SN v.264, SN v.303; AN i.170, AN i.255; AN iii.17 AN iii.28, AN iii.82, AN iii.425; AN v.199; Pts i.111; Pts ii.207; Vism 378 sq., 384; DN-a i.122). For other such powers see S i.144; iv.290 v.263; AN iii.340.

3. The Buddhist theory of Iddhi. At DN i.213 the Buddha is represented as saying: ʻIt is because I see danger in the practice of these mystic wonders that I loathe and abhor and am ashamed thereofʼ. The mystic wonder that he himself believed in and advocated (p. 214) was the wonder of education. What education was meant in the case of Iddhi, we learn from MN i.34; AN iii.425, and from the four bases of Iddhi, the Iddhipādā. They are the making determination in respect of concentration on purpose, on will, on thoughts & on investigation (D ii.213; MN i.103; AN i.39, AN i.297; AN ii.256; iii. 82; Pts i.111; Pts ii.154, Pts ii.164, Pts ii.205; Vb 216). It was ar offence against the regulations of the Sangha for a Bhikkhv to display before the laity these psychic powers beyond the capacity of ordinary men (Vin ii.112). And falsely to claim the possession of such powers involved expulsion from the Order (Vin iii.91). The psychic powers of Iddhi were looked upon as inferior (as the Iddhi of an unconverted man seeking his own profit), compared to the higher Iddhi, the Ariyan Iddhi (D iii.112; AN i.93; Vin ii.183). There is no valid evidence that any one of the ten Iddhis in the above list actually took place. A few instances are given, but all are in texts more than a century later than the recorded wonder. And now for nearly two thousand years we have no further instances Various points on Iddhi discussed at Dial. i.272, 3; Cpd. 60 ff.; Expositor 121. Also at Kv 55; Pts ii.150; Vism xii; Dhp-a i.91; Ja i.47, Ja i.360.

-ānubhāva (iddhånu˚) power or majesty of thaumaturgy Vin 31, Vin 209, Vin 240; iii.67; SN i.147; SN iv.290; Pv-a 53 -ābhisaṅkhāra (iddhåbhi˚) exercise of any of the psychic powers Vin i.16, Vin i.17, Vin i.25; DN i.106; SN iii.92; SN iv.289; SN v.270 Snp p.107; Pv-a 57, Pv-a 172 Pv-a 212. -pāṭihāriya a wonder of psychic power Vin i.25, Vin i.28, Vin i.180, Vin i.209; Vin ii.76, Vin ii.112, Vin ii.200; DN i.211, DN i.212; DN iii.3, DN iii.4, DN iii.9, DN iii.12 sq., 27; SN iv.290; AN i.170 AN i.292; Pts ii.227. -pāda constituent or basis of psychic power Vin ii.240; DN ii.103, DN ii.115 sq., 120; iii.77, 102 127, 221; MN ii.11; MN iii.296; SN i.116, SN i.132; SN iii.96, SN iii.153 SN iv.360; SN v.254, SN v.255, SN v.259 sq., 264 sq., 269 sq., 275, 285; AN iv.128 sq., 203, 463; v.175; Nd i.14, Nd i.45 (˚dhīra), 340 (˚pucchā); Nd i.s. v.; Pts i.17, Pts i.21, Pts i.84; Pts ii.56, Pts ii.85 sq., 120 166, 174; Ud 62; Dhs 358, Dhs 528, Dhs 552; Ne 16, Ne 31, Ne 83; Dhs-a 237; Dhp-a iii.177; Dhp-a iv.32. -bala the power of working wonders Vv-a 4; Pv-a 171. -yāna the carriage (fig.) of psychic faculties Mil 276. -vikubbanā the practice of psychic powers Vism 373 sq. -vidhā kinds of iddhi DN i.77, DN i.212; DN ii.213; DN iii.112, DN iii.281; SN ii.121; SN v.264 sq., 303; AN i.170 sq., 255; iii.17, 28, 82 sq., 425 sq.; v.199; Pts i.111; Pts ii.207; Vism 384; DN-a i.222. -visaya range or extent of psychic power Vin iii.67; Ne 23.

Vedic ṛddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pali ijjhati

Iddhika1

(-˚) (adj.) the compn. form of addhika in cpd. kapaṇ-iddhika tramps & wayfarers (see kapaṇa), e.g. at Ja i.6; Ja iv.15; Pv-a 78.

Iddhika2

(-˚) (adj.) possessed of power, only in cpd. mah-iddhika of great power, always combd. with mah-ānubhāva, e.g. at Vin i.31; Vin ii.193; Vin iii.101; SN ii.155; MN i.34; Thag 429. As mahiddhiya at Ja v.149 See mahiddhika.

iddhi + ka

Iddhimant

(adj.)

1. (lit.) successful, proficient, only in neg. an˚; unfortunate, miserable, poor Ja vi.361. 2. (fig.) possessing psychic powers Vin iii.67; Vin iv.108; AN i.23, AN i.25; AN ii.185; AN iii.340; AN iv.312; Snp 179; Ne 23 Sdhp 32, Sdhp 472.

fr. iddhi

Idha

(indecl.) here in this place, in this connection, now; esp. in this world or present existence Snp 1038, Snp 1056, Snp 1065; Iti 99 (idh ûpapanna reborn in this existence); Dhp 5, Dhp 15, Dhp 267, Dhp 343 Dhp 392; Nd i.40, Nd i.109, Nd i.156; Nd ii.145, Nd ii.146; Snp-a 147; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 71. -idhaloka this world, the world of men Snp 1043 (= manussaloka Nd ii.552c); Pv-a 64; in this religion Vb 245. On diff. meanings of idha see Dhs-a 348.

Sk. iha, adv. of space fr. pron. base *i (cp. ayaṃ, iti etc.), cp. Lat. ihi, Gr. ἰχα γενής, Av. ida

Idhuma

fire-wood - Tela-kaṭāha-gāthā, p. 53, J.P.T.S. 1884.

Sk. idhma, see etym. under iṭṭhakā

Inda

[Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz. *Idg. *eid to shine, cp. Lat. īdūs middle of month (after the full moon), Oir. ēsce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. xxxi.316 sq. connects Indra with Lat. neriosus strong Nero).

1. The Vedic god Indra DN i.244; DN ii.261, DN ii.274; Snp 310, Snp 316, Snp 679, Snp 1024; Nd i.177.

2. lord, chief, king Sakko devānaṃ indo DN i.216, DN i.217; DN ii.221, DN ii.275; SN i.219 Vepɔcitti asurindo SN i.221 ff. manussinda, SN i.69, manujinda Snp 553, narinda, Snp 863, all of the Buddha, ʻchief of menʼ; cp. Vism 491. [Europeans have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the Nikāyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken god of war. See the passages collected in Dial. ii.294 298. The idiom sa-Indā devā, DN ii.261, DN ii.274; AN v.325 means ʻthe gods about Indra, Indra’s retinueʼ, this being a Vedic story. But Devā Tāvatiṃsā sahindakā means the T. gods together with their leader (D ii.208

212; SN iii.90; cp. Vv 301) this being a Buddhist story].

-aggi (ind’ aggi) Indra’s fire, i.e. lightning Pv-a 56 -gajjita (nt.) Indra’s thunder Mil 22. -jāla deception DN-a i.85. -jālika a juggler, conjurer Mil 331. -dhanu the rainbow DN-a i.40. -bhavana the realm of Indra Nd i.448 (cp. Tāvatiṃsa-bhavana). -liṅga the characteristic of Indra Vism 491. -sāla Name of tree Ja iv.92.

Indaka

1. Np. (see Dict. of names), e.g. at Pv ii.957; Pv-a 136 sq.

2. (-˚) see inda 2.

dimin. fr. inda

Indakhīla

. “Indra’s post”; the post, stake or column of Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let into the ground at the entrance of a house DN ii.254 (˚ṃ ūhacca, cp. Dhp-a ii.181); Vin iv.160 (expld. ibid. as sayani-gharassa ummāro, i.e. threshold) SN v.444 (ayokhīlo + ); Dhp 95 (˚ûpama, cp. Dhp-a ii.181) Thag 663; Ja i.89; Mil 364; Vism 72, Vism 466; Snp-a 201; DN-a i.209 (nikkhamitvā bahi ˚ā); Dhp-a ii.180 (˚sadisaṃ Sāriputtassa cittaṃ), 181 (nagara-dvāre nikhataṃ ˚ṃ).

inda + khīla, cp. BSk. indrakīla Divy 250, Divy 365, Divy 544; Avs i.109, Avs i.223

Indagū

see hindagū.

Indagopaka

a sort of insect (“cochineal, a red beetle”, Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Thag 13; Vin iii.42; Ja iv.258; Ja v.168; Dhp-a i.20 Brethren p. 18, n.

inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector

Indanīla

a sapphire Ja i.80; Mil 118; Vv-a 111 (+ mahānīla).

inda + nīla “Indra’s blue”

Indavāruṇī

(f.) the Coloquintida plant Ja iv.8 (˚ka-rukkha).

inda + vāruṇa

Indīvara

(nt.) the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stellata or Cassia Fistula Ja v.92 (˚ī-samā ratti); vi.536; Vv 451 (= uddālaka-puppha Vv-a 197).

etym.?

Indriya

(nt.) A. On term: Indriya is one of the most comprehensive & important categories of Buddhist psychological philosophy & ethics meaning “controlling principle, directive force, élan, δύναμις” in the foll. applications: (a) with reference to sense-perceptibility “faculty, function”, often wrongly interpreted as “organ”; (b) w. ref. to objective aspects of form and matter “kind, characteristic, determinating principle, sign mark” (cp. woman-hood, hood = Goth. haidus “kind form”); (c) w. ref. to moods of sensation and (d) to moral powers or motives controlling action, “principle, controlling” force; (e) w. ref. to cognition & insight “category”. Definitions of indriya among others at Dhs-a 119; cp Expositor 157; Dhs trsl. lvii; Cpd. 228, 229.

B. Classifications and groups of indriyāni. An exhaustive list comprises the indriyāni enumd under A a-e, thus establishing a canonical scheme of 22 Controlling Powers (bāvīsati indriyāni), running thus at Vb 122 sq. (see trsl. at Cpd. 175, 176); and discussed in detail at Vism 491 sq (a. sensorial) (1) cakkh-undriya (“the eye which is a power”, Cpd. 228) the eye or (personal potentiality of vision, (2) sot-indriya the ear or hearing, (3) ghān˚; nose or smell, (4) jivh˚; tongue or taste, (5) kāy˚; body-sensibility, (6) man˚; ) mind; (b. material) (7) itth˚; female sex or femininity, (8) puris˚; male sex or masculinity (9) jīvit˚; life or vitality; (c. sensational) (10) sukh˚ pleasure, (11) dukkh˚; pain, (12) somanasa˚; joy, (13 domanass˚; grief, (14) upekh˚; hedonic indifference (d moral) (15) saddh˚; faith, (16) viriy˚; energy, (17) sat˚ mindfulness, (18) samādh˚; concentration, (19) paññ˚ reason; (e. cognitional) (20) anaññāta-ñassāmīt˚; the thought “I shall come to know the unknown”, (21) aññ˚ (= aññā) gnosis, (22) aññātā-v˚; one who knows ■ Jīvitindriya (no. 9) is in some redactions placed before itth (no. 7), e.g. at Pts i.7, Pts i.137 ■ From this list are detached several groups, mentioned frequently and in various connections no. 6 manas (mano, man-indriya) wavering in its function, being either included under (a) or (more frequently) omitted, so that the first set (a) is marked off as pañc’ indriyāni, the 6th being silently included (see below). This uncertainty regarding manas deserves to be noted. The foll. groups may be mentioned here viz 19 (nos. 1–⁠19) at Pts i.137; Pts i.10 (pañca rūpīni; pañca arūpīni) at Ne 69; three groups of five (nos 1

5, 10

14, 15

19) at DN iii.239, cp. 278; four (group d without paññā, i.e. nos. 15

18) at AN ii.141; three (saddh˚, samādh˚, paññ˚, i.e. nos. 15, 18, 19) at AN i.118 sq. Under aṭṭhavidhaṃ indriya-rūpaṃ (Cpd. 159) or rūpaṃ as indriyaṃ “form which is faculty” Dhs 661 (cp trsl. p. 204) are understood the 5 sensitives (nos. 1

5) the 2 séx-states (nos. 7, 8) and the vital force (no. 9) i.e. groups a & b of enum;n.; discussed & defined in detail at Dhs 709

717, 971

973 ■ It is often to be guessed from the context only, which of the sets of 5 indriyāni (usually either group a or d) is meant. These detached groups are classed as below under C. f ■; Note. This system of 22 indriyāni reflects a revised & more elaborate form of the 25 (or 23) categories of the Sānkhya philosophy, with its 10 elements, 10 indri, īni & the isolated position of manas.;

C. Material in detail (grouped according to A a-e (a) sensorial: (mentioned or referred to as set of 5 viz B. nos. 1

5): MN i.295: SN iii.46 (pañcannaṃ ˚ānaṃ avak kanti), 225; iv.168; AN ii.151 (as set of 6, viz. B. nos 1

6): MN i.9; SN iv.176; SN v.74, SN v.205, SN v.230; AN i.113; AN ii.16 AN ii.39, AN ii.152; AN iii.99, AN iii.163, AN iii.387 sq.; AN v.348. Specially referring to restraint & control of the senses in foll. phrases: in driyāni saṃvutāni SN ii.231, SN ii.271; SN iv.112; pañcasu ˚esu saṃvuto Snp 340 (= lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhaṃ pi vuttaṃ yeva hoti, i.e. the 6th as manas included, Snp-a 343) ˚esu susaṃvuta Thig 196 (= mana-chaṭṭhesu i˚ suṭṭhu saṃvutā Thag-a 168) indriyesu guttadvāra & guttadvāratā DN iii.107; SN ii.218; SN iv.103, SN iv.112, SN iv.175; AN i.25, AN i.94, AN i.113 AN ii.39; AN iii.70, AN iii.138, AN iii.173, AN iii.199, AN iii.449 sq.; AN iv.25, AN iv.166; AN v.134; Iti 23, Iti 24; Nd i.14; Vb 248, Vb 360; DN-a i.182 (= manachaṭṭesu indriyesu pihita-dvāro hoti), i. vippasannāni SN ii.275; SN iii.2, SN iii.235; SN iv.294; SN v.301; AN i.181; AN iii.380. ˚ānaṃ samatā (v.l. samatha) AN iii.375 sq. (see also f. below ˚āni bhāvitāni Snp 516 (= cakkh’ ādīni cha i. Snp-a 426) Nd ii.475 B8 ■ Various: SN i.26 (rakkhati), 48 (˚ûpasame rato); iv.40, 140 (˚sampanna); v.216, 217 sq. (independent in function, mano as referee); Ps. i.190 (man˚); Vb 13 (rūpa), 341 (mud˚ & tikkh˚) 384 (ahīn˚) ■ (b); physical: (above B 7

9) all three: SN v.204; Vism 447; itthi˚ & purisa˚ AN iv.57; Vb 122, Vb 415 sq.; puris˚ AN iii.404; jīvit Vb 123, Vb 137; Vism 230 (˚upaccheda = maraṇa). See also under itthi, jīvita & purisa ■ (c); sensational (above B 10

14): SN v.207 sq. (see Cpd. 111 & cp. p. 15), 211 sq.; Vb 15, Vb 71; Ne 88 ■ (d) moral (above B 15 19): SN iii.96, SN iii.153; SN iv.36, SN iv.365 sq.; SN v.193 sq., 202, 219 (corresponding to pañcabalāni), 220 sq. (and amata), 223 sq. (their culture brings assurance of no rebirth), 227 sq (paññā the chief one), 235, 237 (sevenfold fruit of), AN iv.125 sq., 203, 225; v.56, 175; Pts ii.49, Pts ii.51 sq., 86 Nd i.14; Nd ii.628 (sat˚ + satibala); Kv 589; Vb 341 Ne 15, Ne 28, Ne 47, Ne 54. Often in standard combn. with satipaṭṭhāna sammappadhāna. iddhipāda, indriya, bala, bojjhanga magga (see Nd ii.s. v. p. 263) DN ii.120; Vin iii.93, Pts ii.166 & passim. As set of 4 indriyāni (nos. 16; 19) at Ne 83 ■ (e) cognitional (above B 20

22) DN iii.219 = SN v.204 (as peculiar to Arahantship); Iti 53; Pts i.115; Pts ii.30 ■ (f) collectively, either two or more of groups a-e, also var. peculiar uses: personal; esp physical faculties. SN i.61 (pākat˚), 204 (id.); iii.207 (ākāsaṃ ˚āni sankamanti); iv.294 (vipari-bhinnāni); AN iii.441 (˚ānaṃ avekallatā). magic power AN iv.264 sq. (okkhipati ˚āni). indriyānaṃ paripāko (moral or physical) over-ripeness of faculties SN ii.2, SN ii.42; AN v.203; Nd ii.252 (in def. of jarā); Vb 137. moral forces Vin i.183 (˚ānaṃ samatā + viriyānaṃ s. as sign of Arahant); ii.240 (pañc˚). principle of life ekindriyaṃ jīvaṃ Vin iii.156; Mil 259. heart or seat of feeling in phrase ˚āni paricāreti to satisfy one’s heart Pv-a 16, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 77. obligation, duty, vow in phrase ˚āni bhinditvā breaking one’s vow Ja ii.274; Ja iv.190.

D. Unclassified material DN i.77 (ahīn˚); DN iii.239 (domanass˚ & somanass˚; ) MN i.437 (vemattatā), 453 (id.); ii. 11, 106; iii.296; SN iii.225; SN v.209 (dukkh˚, domanass˚) AN i.39, AN i.42 sq., 297; ii.38 (sant˚), 149 sq.; iii.277, 282; Pts i.16, Pts i.21, Pts i.88, Pts i.180; Pts ii.1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143 145, 110, 223; Nd i.45 (˚dhīra), 171 (˚kusala), 341 (pucchā); Dhs 58, Dhs 121, Dhs 528, Dhs 556 (dukkh˚), 560, 644. 736 Ne 18 (sotāpannassa), 28 (˚vavaṭṭhāna), 162 (lok’uttara) Vism 350 (˚vekallatā); Sdhp 280, Sdhp 342, Sdhp 364, Sdhp 371, Sdhp 449, Sdhp 473.

E. As adj. (-˚) having one’s senses, mind or heart as such & such SN i.138 (tikkh˚ & mud˚); iii.93 (pākat˚) v.269 (id.); AN i.70 (id) & passim (id.); AN i.70 (saṃvut˚ 266 (id.), 236 (gutt˚); ii.6 (samāhit˚); 8n 214 (susamāhit˚ his senses well-composed); Pv-a 70 (pīṇit˚ joyful or gladdened of heart).

F. Some compounds: -gutta one who restrains & watches his senses SN i.154; Dhp 375. -gutti keeping watch over the senses, self-restraint Dhp-a iv.111. a paropariya, b paropariyatta & c paropariyatti (˚ñāṇa) (knowledge of what goes on in the senses and intentions of others a Ja i.78; b AN v.34, AN v.38; b Pts i.121 sq., 133 sq.; ii.158, 175 b Vb 340, Vb 342; c SN v.205; c Ne 101. See remark under paropariya. -bhāvanā cultivation of the (five, see above Cd) moral qualities Vin i.294 (+ balabhāvanā) MN iii.298. -saṃvara restraint or subjugation of the senses DN ii.281; MN i.269, MN i.346; SN i.54; AN iii.360; AN iv.99; AN v.113 sq., 136, 206; Nd i.483; Ne 27, Ne 121 sq; Vism 20 sq.

Vedic indriya adj. only in meaning “belonging to Indra”; nt. strength, might (cp. inda), but in specific pāli sense “belonging to the ruler”, i.e. governing, ruling nt. governing, ruling or controlling principle

Indhana

(nt.) firewood, fuel Ja iv.27 (adj. an˚ without fuel aggi); v.447; Thag-a 256; Vv-a 335; Sdhp 608. Cp. idhuma.

Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha1

Ibbha

(adj.) menial; a retainer, in the phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā (kiṇhā) bandhupādāpaccā DN i.90 (v.l. SS imbha T. kiṇhā, v.l. kaṇhā), 91, 103; MN i.334 (kiṇhā, v.l. kaṇhā). Also at Ja vi.214. Expld. by Bdhgh. as gahapatika at DN-a i.254, (also at Ja vi.215).

Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants

Iriṇa

(nt.) barren soil, desert Ja vi.560 (= niroja C.) Cp. īriṇa.

Vedic iriṇa, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under rarus

Iriyati

to move, to wander about stir; fig. to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment MN i.74, MN i.75; SN i.53 (dukkhaṃ aticca iriyati); iv.71; AN iii.451; AN v.41; Snp 947, Snp 1063, Snp 1097; Thag 276; Ja iii.498 (= viharati); Nd i.431; Nd ii.147 (= carati etc.); Vism 16; DN-a i.70.

fr. īr to set in motion, to stir, Sk. īrte, but pres. formation influenced by iriyā & also by Sk. iyarti of; (see acchati & icchati;2); cp. Caus. īrayati (= P. īreti) pp. īrṇa & īrita. See also issā

Iriyanā

(f.) way of moving on, progress, Dhs 19, Dhs 82, Dhs 295, Dhs 380, Dhs 441, Dhs 716.

fr. iriyati

Iriyā

(f.) movement, posture, deportment MN i.81; Snp 1038 (= cariyā vatti vihāro Nd ii.148); Iti 31; Vism 145 (+ vutti pālana yapana).

-patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriyāpathas or postures, viz. walking, standing, sitting, lying down (see Pts ii.225 & DN-a i.183). Cp. BSk. īryāpatha Divy 37Vin i.39; Vin ii.146 (˚sampanna); Vin i.91 (chinn˚ a cripple); SN v.78 (cattāro i.); Snp 385; Nd i.225, Nd i.226; Nd ii.s. v.; Ja i.22 (of a lion) 66, 506; Mil 17; Vism 104, Vism 128, Vism 290, Vism 396; Dhp-a i.9 Dhp-a iv.17; Vv-a 6; Pv-a 141; Sdhp 604.

cp. from iriyati, BSk. īryā Divy 485

Irubbeda

the Rig-veda Dpvs v.62 (iruveda); Mil 178; DN-a i.247; Snp-a 447.

Illiyā

(f.) = illī Ja v.259; Ja vi.50.

fr. illī, cp. Sk. *īlikā

Illī

(f.) a sort of weapon, a short one-edged sword Ja v.259.

cp. Vedic ilībiśa Np. of a demon

Illīyituṃ

v.l. for allīyituṃ at Ja v.154.

Iva

(indecl.) part. of comparison: like, as Dhp 1, Dhp 2, Dhp 7, Dhp 8, Dhp 287, Dhp 334; Ja i.295; Snp-a 12 (opamma-vacanaṃ). Elided to ‘va, diaeretic-metathetic form viya (q.v.).

Vedic iva & va

Isi

a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, “Master DN i.96 (kaṇho isi ahosi); SN i.33, SN i.35, SN i.65, SN i.128, SN i.191, SN i.192 SN i.226 sq., 236 (ācāro isīnaṃ); ii.280 (dhammo isinaṃ dhajo) AN ii.24, AN ii.51; Vin iv.15 = Vin iv.22 (˚bhāsito dhammo); Iti 123; Snp 284, Snp 458, Snp 979, Snp 689, Snp 691, Snp 1008, Snp 1025, Snp 1043, Snp 1044 Snp 1116 (dev˚ divine Seer), 1126, Nd ii.149 (isi-nāmakā ye keci isi-pabbajjaṃ pabbajitā ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā jaṭilā tāpasā) Dhp 281; Ja i.17 (v.90: isayo n’ atthi me samā of Buddha) Ja v.140 (˚gaṇa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv ii.614 (yama-niyam’ ādīnaṃ esanatthena isayo Pv-a 98); ii.133 (= jhān’ ādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ esanatthena isi Pv-a 163); iv.73 (= asekkhānaṃ sīlakkhandh’ ādīnaṃ esanatthena isiṃ Pv-a 265); Mil 19 (˚vāta) 248 (˚bhattika); DN-a i.266 (gen isino); Sdhp 200, Sdhp 384. See also mahesi.

2. (in brahmanic tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of the Vedic hymns (brāhmaṇānaṃ pubbakā isayo mantānaṃ kattāro pavattāro), whose names are given at Vin i.245; DN i.104, DN i.238; AN iii.224, AN iv.61 as follows: Aṭṭhaka Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi) Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu.

-nisabha the first (lit. “bull”) among Saints, Ep. of the Buddha Snp 698; Vv 167 (cp. Vv-a 82). -pabbajjā the (holy) life of an anchoret Vism 123; Dhp-a i.105; Dhp-a iv.55; Pv-a 162. -vāta the wind of a Saint Mil 19; Vism 18 -sattama the 7th of the great Sages (i.e. Gotama Buddha as 7th in the sequence of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana & Kassapa Buddhas) MN i.386; SN i.192; Snp 356; Thag 1240 (= Bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena Snp-a 351); Vv 211 (= buddha-isinaṃ Vipassi-ādīnaṃ sattamo Vv-a 105). Isika (isika)

Vedic ṛṣi fr. ṛṣ. Voc. ise Snp 1025; pl. npm. isayo, gen. isinaṃ SN ii.280 & isīnaṃ SN i.192; etc. inst. isibhi Thag 1065–⁠1.

Isikā (isīkā)

(f.) a reed DN i.77, cp. DN-a i.222; Ja vi.67 (isikā).

Sk. iṣīkā

Isitta

(nt.) rishi-ship DN i.104 (= isi-bhāva DN-a i.274).

abstr. fr. isi

Issati

to bear ill-will, to be angry, to envy Ja iii.7; ppr. med. issamānaka Sdhp 89, f. ˚ikā AN ii.203 ■ pp. issita (q.v.).

denom. fr. issā. Av. areṣyeiti to be jealous, Gr. ε ̓́ραται to desire; connected also with Sk. arṣati fr. ṛṣ to flow, Lat. erro; & Sk. irasyati to be angry = Gr.; *ἄρης God of war, ἀρἀρη; Ags. eorsian to be angry

Issattha

(nt. m.)

1. (nt.) archery (as means of livelihood & occupation) MN i.85; MN iii.1; SN i.100 (so read with v.l.; T has issatta, C. explns. by usu-sippaṃ K. S. p. 318); Snp 617 (˚ṃ upajīvati = āvudha jīvikaṃ Snp-a 466); Ja vi.81 Sdhp 390.

2. (m.) an archer Mil 250, Mil 305, Mil 352, Mil 418.

cp. Sk. iṣvastra nt. bow, fr. iṣu (= P. usu) an arrow + as to throw. Cp. P. issāsa ■ Bdhgh in a strange way dissects it as “usuñ ca satthañ cā ti vuttaṃ hoti” (i.e. usu arrow + sattha sword, knife) Snp-a 466

Issatthaka

an archer Mil 419.

issattha + ka

Issara

lord, ruler, master, chief AN iv.90; Snp 552; Ja i.89 (˚jana), 100, 283 (˚bheri); iv.132 (˚jana); Pv iv.67 (˚mada) Mil 253 (an˚ without a ruler); Dhs-a 141; DN-a i.111; Pv-a 31 (gehassa issarā); Sdhp 348, Sdhp 431.

2. creative deity, Brahmā, DN iii.28; MN ii.222 = AN i.173; Vism 598.

Vedic īśvara, from īś to have power, cp. also P. īsa

Issariya

rulership, mastership, supremacy, dominion (Syn. ādhipacca) DN iii.190; SN i.43, SN i.100 (˚mada) v.342 (issariy-âdhipacca); AN i.62 (˚ādhipacca); ii.205 249; iii.38; iv.263; Snp 112; Dhp 73; Ud 18; Pts ii.171 Pts ii.176; Ja i.156; Ja v.443; Dhp-a ii.73; Vv-a 126 (for ādhipacca Pv-a 42, Pv-a 117, Pv-a 137 (for ādhipacca); Sdhp 418, Sdhp 583.

fr. issara

Issariyatā

(f.) mastership, lordship Sdhp 422.

fr. issariya

Issā1

(f.) jealousy, anger, envy, ill-will DN ii.277 (˚macchariya); DN iii.44 (id.); MN i.15; SN ii.260; AN i.95, AN i.105 (˚mala), AN i.299; AN ii.203; AN iv.8 (˚saññojana), AN iv.148, AN iv.349, AN iv.465; AN v.42 sq., AN v.156, AN v.310; Snp 110; Ja v.90 (˚âvatiṇṇa) Pv ii.37; Vv 155; Pp 19, Pp 23; Vb 380, Vb 391; Dhs 1121 Dhs 1131, Dhs 1460; Vism 470 (def.); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 87; Dhp-a ii.76; Mil 155; Sdhp 313, Sdhp 510.

-pakata overcome by envy, of an envious nature SN ii.260; Mil 155; Pv-a 31. See remarks under apakata & pakata.;

Sk. īrṣyā to Sk. irin forceful, irasyati to be angry, Lat. īra anger, Gr. *ἄρης God of war; Ags. eorsian to be angry. See also issati

Issā2

(f.) in issammiga (= issāmiga) Ja v.410, & issāmiga Ja v.431, a species of antelope, cp Ja v.425 issāsiṅga the antlers of this antelope.

cp. Sk. ṛśya-mṛga

Issāyanā

(& Issāyitatta) = issā Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhs 1121; Vism 470.

abstr. formations fr. issā

Issāsa

an archer Vin iv.124; MN iii.1; AN iv.423 (issāso vā issās’ antevāsī vā); Ja ii.87 Ja iv.494; Mil 232; DN-a i.156.

Sk. iṣvāsa, see issattha

Issāsin

an archer, lit. one having a bow Ja iv.494 (= issāsa C.).

Sk. iṣvāsa in meaning “bow” + in

Issita

being envied or scolded, giving offence or causing anger Ja v.44.

pp. of īrṣ (see issati); Sk. īrṣita

Issukin

(adj.) envious, jealous Vin ii.89 (+ maccharin); DN iii.45, DN iii.246; MN i.43, MN i.96; SN iv.241; AN iii.140, AN iii.335; AN iv.2; Dhp 262; Ja iii.259; Pv. ii.34 Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhp-a iii.389; Pv-a 174. See also an˚.

fr. issā, Sk. īrṣyu + ka + in

Iha

(indecl.) adv. of place “here” Snp 460.

ī.

Sk. iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha (q.v.)

Ī

Īgha

(?) confusion, rage badness Snp-a 590 (in expln of anigha). Usually as an˚ (or anigha), e.g. Ja iii.343 (= niddukkha C.); v.343. Iti & Iti

doubtful as to origin & etym. since only found in cpd. anīgha & abs. only in exegetical literature. If genuine, it should belong to; ṛgh Sk. ṛghāyati to tremble rage etc. See discussed under nigha1

Īti & Ītī

(f.) ill, calamity, plague, distress, often combb. with & substituted for upaddava cp. BSk. ītay’ opadrava (attack of plague) Divy 119.; Snp 51; Ja i.27 (v.189); v.401 = upaddava; Nd i.381 Nd ii.48, Nd ii.636 (+ upaddava = santāpa); Mil 152, Mil 274 Mil 418. -anīti sound condition, health, safety AN iv.238; Mil 323.

Sk. īti, of doubtful origin

Ītika

(adj.) connected or affected with ill or harm, only in neg. an˚.

fr. īti

Ītiha

a doublet of itiha, only found in neg. an˚.

Īdisa

(adj.) such like, such Dhs-a 400 (f. ˚ī); Pv-a 50, (id.) 51.

Sk. īdṛs, ī + dṛś, lit. so-looking

Īriṇa

(nt.) barren soil, desert DN i.248; AN v.156 sq.; Ja v.70 (= sukkha-kantāra C.); vi.560; Vv-a 334.

= iriṇa, q.v. & cp. Sk. īriṇa

Īrita

1. set in motion, stirred, moved, shaken Vv 394 (vāt’erita moved by the wind); Ja i.32 (id.); Vv 6420 (haday’erita); Pv ii.123 (malut’erita); Pv-a 156 (has erita for ī˚); Vv-a 177 (calita).

2. uttered, proclaimed, said Dāvs v.12.

pp. of īreti, Caus. of īr, see iriyati

Īsa

lord, owner ruler Ja iv.209 (of a black lion = kāḷa-sīha C.); Vv-a 168 f. īsī see mahesī a chief queen. Cp. also mahesakkha.

fr. to have power, perf. īśe = Goth. aih; cp. Sk. īśvara = P. issara, & BSk. īśa, e.g. Jtm 31;81

Īsaka

a pole Ja ii.152; Ja vi.456 (˚agga the top of a pole).

dimiName of īsā

Īsakaṃ

(adv.) a little, slightly, easily MN i.450; Ja i.77; Ja vi.456; DN-a i.252, DN-a i.310; Vv-a 36; Vism 136 Vism 137, Vism 231, īsakam pi even a little Vism 106; Sdhp 586.

nt. of īsaka

Īsā

(f.) the pole of a plough or of a carriage SN i.104 (nangal’ īsā read with v.l. for nangala-sīsā T.) 172, 224 (˚mukha): AN iv.191 (rath˚); Snp 77; Ja i.203 (˚mukha); iv.209; Ud 42; Mil 27; Snp-a 146; Vv-a 269 (˚mūlaṃ = rathassa uro).

-danta having teeth (tusks) as long as a plough-pole (of an elephant) Vin i.352; MN i.414; Vv 209 = 439 (ratha-īsā-sadisa-danto); Ja vi.490 = Ja vi.515.

Vedic īṣā

Īsāka

(adj.) having a pole (said of a carriage) Ja vi.252.

fr. īsā

Īhati

to endeavour, attempt, strive after Vin iii.268 (Bdhgh. Ja vi.518 (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 112); DN-a i.139; Vv-a 35.

Vedic īh, cp. Av. īžā ardour, eagerness, āziš greed

Īhā

(f.) exertion, endeavour, activity, only in adj. nir-īha void of activity Mil 413.

U.

fr. īh

U

U

the sound or syllable u, expld. by Bdhgh at Vism 495 as expressing origin (= ud).

Ukkaṃsa

exaltation, excellence, superiority (opp. avakkaṃsa) DN i.54 (ukkaṃs-âvakkaṃsa hāyana-vaḍḍhana DN-a i.165); MN i.518; Vism 563 (id.) Vv-a 146 (˚gata excellent), 335 (instr. ukkaṃsena par excellence exceedingly); Pv-a 228 (˚vasena, with ref. to devatās; v.l. SS okk˚).

fr. ud + kṛṣ see ukkassati

Ukkaṃsaka

(adj.) raising, exalting (oneself), extolling MN i.19 (att˚; opp. para-vambhin); Ja ii.152. Cp sāmukkaṃsika.

fr. ukkaṃsa

Ukkaṃsati

to exalt, praise MN i.498; Ja iv.108 ■ pp. ukkaṭṭha ■ ukkaṃseti in same meaning MN i.402 sq. (attānaṃ u. paraṃ vambheti); AN ii.27; Nd ii.141.

ud + kṛṣ, karṣati, lit. draw or up, raise

Ukkaṃsanā

(f.) raising, extolling, exaltation, in att˚ self-exaltation, self-praise MN i.402 (opp para-vambhanā); Nd ii.505 (id.).

abstr. of ukkaṃsati

Ukkaṭṭha

(adj.)

1. exalted, high, prominent, glorious, excellent, most freq. opp. to hīna in phrase hīna-m-ukkaṭṭha-majjhime Vin iv.7; Ja i.20 (v.129), 22 (v.143); iii.218 (= uttama C.). In other combn. at Vism 64 (u. majjhima mudu referring to the 3 grades of the Dhutangas); Snp-a 160 (dvipadā sabbasattānaṃ ukkaṭṭhā); Vv-a 105 (superl. ukkaṭṭhatama with ref. to Gotama as the most exalted of the 7 Rishis) Sdhp 506 (opp. lāmaka).

2. large, comprehensive great, in ukkaṭṭho patto a bowl of great capacity (as diff. from majjhima & omaka p.) Vin iii.243 (= uk. nāma patto aḍḍhālhak’ odanaṃ gaṇhāti catu-bhāgaṃ khādanaṃ vā tadūpiyaṃ vā byañjanaṃ).

3. detailed, exhaustive specialised Vism 37 (ati-ukkaṭṭha-desanā); also in phrase ˚vasena in detail Snp-a 181.

4. arrogant, insolent Ja v.16.

5. used as nom at Ja i.387 in meaning “battle conflict” ■ an˚; Vism 64 (˚cīvara).

-niddesa exhaustive exposition, special designation, term par excellence Dhs-a 70; Vv-a 231; Pv-a 7. -pariccheda comprehensive connotation Snp-a 229, Snp-a 231, Snp-a 376.

pp. of ukkaṃsati

Ukkaṭṭhatā

(f.) superiority, eminence, exalted state Ja iv.303 (opp. hīnatā).

abstr. fr. ukkaṭṭha

Ukkaṭṭhita

boiled up, boiling, seething AN iii.231 & 234 (udapatto agginā santatto ukkaṭṭhito, v.l. ukkuṭṭhito); Ja iv.118 (v.l. pakkudhita = pakkuṭhita, as gloss).

for ukkaṭhita, ud + pp. of kvath, see kaṭhati & kuthati

Ukkaṇṭhati

to long for, to be dissatisfied

to fret Ja i.386 (˚māna); iii.143 (˚itvā); iv.3, 160; v.10 (anukkhaṇṭhanto); Dhs-a 407; Pv-a 162 (mā ukkaṇṭhi v.l. ukkaṇhi, so read for T. mā khuṇḍali) ■ pp. ukkaṇṭhita (q.v.). Cp. pari˚.

fr. ud + kaṇṭh in secondary meaning of kaṇṭha neck, lit. to stretch one’s neck for anything; i.e. long for, be hungry after, etc.

Ukkaṇṭhanā

(f.) emotion, commotion DN ii.239.

fr. ukkaṇṭhati

Ukkaṇṭhā

(f.) longing, desire; distress, regret Ne 88; Pv-a 55 (spelt kkh), 60, 145, 152.

fr. ukkanṭḥ˚

Ukkaṇṭhi

(f.) longing, dissatisfaction Thag-a 239 (= arati).

fr. ukkanṭḥ˚

Ukkaṇṭhikā

(f.) = ukkaṇṭhi, i.e. longing, state of distress, pain Ja iii.643.

abstr. fr. ukkaṇṭhita

Ukkaṇṭhita

dissatisfied, regretting, longing, fretting Ja i.196; Ja ii.92, Ja ii.115; Ja iii.185; Mil 281; Dhp-a iv.66, Dhp-a iv.225; Pv-a 13 (an˚), 55, 187.

pp. of ukkaṇṭhati

Ukkaṇṇa

(adj.) having the ears erect (?) Ja vi.559.

ud + kaṇṇa

Ukkaṇṇaka

(ad.) a certain disease (? mange) of jackals SN ii.230, SN ii.271; S. A. ʻthe fur falls off from the whole bodyʼ.

ut + kaṇṇa + ka lit. “with ears out” or is it ukkandaka?

Ukkantati

to cut out, tear out, skin Vin i.217 (˚itva); Ja i.164; Ja iv.210 (v.l. for okk˚); v.10 (ger ukkacca); Pv iii.94 (ukkantvā, v.l. BB ukkacca); Pv-a 210 (v.l. SS ni˚), 211 (= chinditvā).

ud + kantati

Ukkapiṇḍaka

only in pl.; vermin, Vin i.211 = Vin i.239. See comment at Vin. Texts ii.70.

etymology unknown

Ukkantikaṃ

(nt. adv.), in jhān˚ & kasiṇ˚, after the method of stepping away from or skipping Vism 374.;

Ukkamati

(or okk˚; which is v.l. at all passages quoted) to step aside, step out from (w. abl.), depart from AN iii.301 (maggā); Ja iii.531; iv. 101 (maggā); Ud 13 (id.); DN-a i.185 (id.). Caus. ukkāmeti; Caus. II. ukkamāpeti Ja ii.3.

ud + kamati from kram

Ukkamana

(nt.) stepping away from Vism 374.

fr. ukkamati

Ukkala

in phrase ukkala-vassa-bhañña SN iii.73 = AN ii.31 = Kv 141 is trsld. as “the folk of Ukkala, Lenten speakers of old” (see Kvu trsl. 95 with n. 2). Another interpretation is ukkalāvassa˚, i.e. ukkalā + avassa, one who speaks of, or like, a porter (ukkala = Sk utkala porter, one who carries a load) and bondsman MN iii.78 reads Okkalā (v.l. Ukkalā)-Vassa-Bhaññā all as N. pr.

*avaśya˚

Ukkalāpa

see uklāpa.

Ukkalissati

to become depraved, to revoke(?) Mil 143.

= ukkilissati? ud + kilissati

Ukkā

(f.) 1. firebrand, glow of fire, torch DN i.49, DN i.108; SN ii.264; Thig 488 (˚ûpama) Ja i.34 (dhamm-okkā); ii.401; iv.291; v.322; Vism 428 Thag-a 287; DN-a i.148; Dhp-a i.42, Dhp-a i.205; Pv-a 154. Esp as tiṇ˚ firebrand of dry grass MN i.128, MN i.365; Nd ii.40Ie Dhp-a i.126; Sdhp 573.

2. a furnace or forge of a smith AN i.210, AN i.257; Ja vi.437; see also below ˚mukha. 3. a meteor: see below ˚pāta.

-dhāra a torch-bearer Snp 335; Iti 108; Mil 1. -pāta “falling of a firebrand”, a meteor DN i.10 (= ākāsato ukkānaṃ patanaṃ DN-a i.95); Ja i.374; Ja vi.476; Mil 178 -mukha the opening or receiver of a furnace, a goldsmith’s smelting pot A i.257; Ja vi.217 (= kammār’uddhana C.), 574; Snp 686; Dhp-a ii.250.

Vedic ulkā & ulkuṣī, cp. Gr.; α ̓́φλας (= λαμπρ ̈ως torch Hesychius), vελξάνος (= Volcanus); Lat. Volcanus Oir. Olcān, Idg. *ṷI̊q to be fiery

Ukkācanā

(f.) enlightening, clearing up, instruction Vb 352 (in def. of lapanā, v.l. ˚kāpanā). Note Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Vism p.115 & Sk. uddīpana in same sense. Def. at Vism 27 (= uddīpanā).;

fr. ukkāceti, ud + *kāc, see ukkācita

Ukkācita

enlightened, made bright (fig.) or cleaned, cleared up AN i.72, AN i.286 (˚vinīta parisā enlightened & trained).;

pp. either to * kāc to shine or to kāceti denom. fr. kāca1

Ukkāceti

to bale out water, to empty by means of buckets Ja ii.70 (v.l. ussiñcati).

according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 112 a denom. fr. kāca2 a carrying pole, although the idea of a bucket is somewhat removed from that of a pole

Ukkāmeti

to cause to step aside Ja vi.11.

Caus. of ukkamati

Ukkāra

dung, excrement Ja iv.485, otherwise only in cpd. ukkāra-bhūmi dung-hill Ja i.5, Ja i.146 (so read for ukkar˚), ii.40; iii.16, 75, 377; iv.72, 305 Vism 196 (˚ûpama kuṇapa); Dhp-a iii.208. Cp. uccāra.

fr. ud + kṛ; “do out”

Ukkāsati

to “ahem”! to cough, to clear one’s throat Vin ii.222; Vin iv.16; MN ii.4; AN v.65; aor. ukkāsi Ja i.161, Ja i.217 ■ pp. ukkāsita.

ud + kāsati of kas to cough

Ukkāsikā

(f.?) at Vin ii.106 is not clear. Vin Texts iii.68 leave it untranslated. Bdhgh’s expln. is vattavaṭṭi (patta˚? a leaf? Cp. SN iii.141), prob. = vaṭṭi (Sk varti a kind of pad). See details given by Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 113, who trsls. “rubber, a kind of pad or roll of cotton with which the delicate bather could rub himself without too much friction”.

doubtful

Ukkāsita

coughed, clearing one’s throat, coughed out, hawking DN i.89; Bv i.52 (+ khipita) ˚sadda the noise of clearing the throat DN i.50; Ja i.119; Dhp-a i.250 (+ khipita˚).

pp. of ukkāsati

Ukkiṇṇa

dug up or out DN i.105; Ja iv.106; Mil 330; DN-a i.274 (= khāta).

pp. of ud + kṛ; dig2

Ukkiledeti

to take the dirt out, to clean out DN-a i.255 (dosaṃ); Snp-a 274 (rāgaṃ v.l. BB. uggileti).

Caus. of ud + klid, see kilijjati

Ukkujja

(adj.) set up, upright, opp. either nikkujja or avakujja AN i.131; SN v.89 (ukkujj’âvakujja) Pp 32 (= uparimukho ṭhapito C. 214).

ud + kujja

Ukkujjati

(˚eti) to bend up, turn up, set upright Vin i.181; Vin ii.126 (pattaṃ), 269 (bhikkhuṃ) mostly in phrase nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya “(like) one might raise up one who has fallen” DN i.85, DN i.110; DN ii.132, DN ii.152 Snp p.15 (= uparimukhaṃ karoti DN-a i.228 = Snp-a 155).

Denom. fr. ukkujja

Ukkujjana

(nt.) raising up, setting up again Vin ii.126 (patt˚).

fr. ukkujjati

Ukkuṭika

a special manner of squatting. The soles of the feet are firmly on the ground, the man sinks down, the heels slightly rising as he does so, until the thighs rest on the calves, and the hams are about six inches or more from the ground. Then with elbows on knees he balances himself. Few Europeans can adopt this posture, & none (save miners) can maintain it with comfort, as the calf muscles upset the balance. Indians find it easy, & when the palms of the hands are also held together upwards, it indicates submission. See; Dial. i.231 n. 4 ■ Vin i.45 (˚ṃ nisīdati); iii.228; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Pp 55; Vism 62, Vism 104 Vism 105 (quot. fr. Papañca Sūdanī) 426; Dhp-a i.201, Dhp-a i.217 Dhp-a ii.61 (as posture of humility); iii.195; iv.223.

-padhāna [in BSk. distorted to utkuṭuka-prahāṇa Divy 339 = Dhp 141] exertion when squatting (an ascetic habit DN i.167; MN i.78, MN i.515; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Ja i.493; Ja iii.235 Ja iv.299; Dhp 141 (= ukkuṭika-bhāvena āraddha-viriyo Dhp-a iii.78).

fr. ud + *kuṭ = *kuñc, as in kuṭila & kuñcita; lit. “bending up”. The BSk. form is ukkuṭuka, e.g. Av SN i.315

Ukkuṭṭhi

(f.) shouting out, acclamation Ja ii.367; Ja vi.41 Bv i.35; Mil 21; Vism 245; Dhp-a ii.43; Vv-a 132 (˚sadda).

fr. ud + kruś, cp. *kruñc as in P. kuñca & Sk. krośati

Ukkusa

an osprey Ja iv.291 (˚rāja), 392.

see ukkuṭṭhi & cp. BSk. utkrośa watchman (?) Divy 453

Ukkūla

(adj.) sloping up, steep, high (opp. vikkūla) AN i.35 sq.; Vism 153 (nadi); Snp-a 42. Cp. utkūlanikūla-sama Lal. V. 340.

ud + kūla

Ukkoṭana

(nt.) crookedness, perverting justice taking bribes to get people into unlawful possessions (Bdhgh.) DN i.5; DN iii.176; SN v.473; AN ii.209, AN v.206; DN-a i.79 = Pp A 240 (“assāmike sāmike kātuṃ lañcagahaṇaṃ”).

fr. ud + * kuṭ; to be crooked or to deceive, cp. kujja & kuṭila crooked

Ukkoṭanaka

(adj.) belonging to the perversion of justice Vin ii.94.

fr. ukkoṭana

Ukkoṭeti

to disturb what is settled, to open up again a legal question that has been adjudged Vin ii.94, Vin ii.303; Vin iv.126; Ja ii.387; DN-a i.5.

denom. fr. *ukkoṭ-ana

Ukkhali

(˚lī) (f.) a pot in which to boil rice (& other food) Ja i.68, Ja i.235; v. 389, 471; Pp 33; Vism 346 (˚mukhavaṭṭi), 356 (˚kapāla in comp.); Dhp-a i.136; Dhp-a ii.5; Dhp-a iii.371; Dhp-a iv.130; Pp A 231; Vv-a 100. Cp. next.

der. fr. Vedic ukha & ukhā pot, boiler; related to Lat. aulla (fr. *auxla); Goth. auhns oven

Ukkhalikā

(f.) = ukkhali. Thig 23 (= bhatta-pacanabhājanaṃ Thag-a 29); Dhp-a iv.98 (˚kāla); Dhs-a 376.

Ukkhā

(?) in ukkhasataṃ dānaṃ, given at various times of the day (meaning ἑκατόμβη?) SN ii.264 (v.l. ukkā). Or is it to be read ukhāsataṃ d. i.e. consisting of 100 pots (of rice = mahā danaṃ?). S A: paṇītabhojana-bharitānaṃ mahā-ukkhalinaṃ sataṃ dānaṃ. Cp. ukhā cooking vessel Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.38) Kern, Toev. under ukkhā trsl. “zeker muntstuck”, i.e. kind of gift.

can it be compared with Vedic ukṣan?

Ukkhita

besmeared, besprinkled Ja iv.331 (ruhir˚, so read for ˚rakkhita). Cp. okkhita.

pp. of ukṣ sprinkle

Ukkhitta

taken up, lifted up, t.t. of the canon law “suspended” Vin iv.218; Ja iii.487.

-˚āsika with drawn sword MN i.377; SN iv.173; Ja i.393; Dhs-a 329; Vism 230 (vadhaka), 479. -paligha having the obstacles removed MN i.139; AN iii.84; Dhp 398 = Snp 622 (= avijjā-palighassa ukkhittatāya u. Snp-a 467; Dhp-a iv.161). -sira with uplifted head Vism 162.

pp. of ukkhipati

Ukkhittaka

(adj.-n.) a bhikkbu who has been suspended Vin i.97, Vin i.121; Vin ii.61, Vin ii.173, Vin ii.213.

fr. ukkhitta

Ukkhipati

. To hold up, to take up Ja i.213; Ja iv.391: vi.350; Vism 4 (satthaṃ); Pv-a 265. A t. t. of canon law, to suspend (a bhikkhu for breach of rules) Vin iv.309; Pp 33. -ukkhipiyati to be suspended Vin ii.61. Caus. II. ukkhipāpeti to cause to be supported Ja i.52; Ja ii.15, Ja ii.38; Ja iii.285, Ja iii.436 ■ pp. ukkhitta, ger. ukkhipitvā as adv. “upright” Vism 126.

ut + khipati, kṣip

Ukkhipana

(nt.) 1. pushing upwards Ja i.163.

2. throwing up, sneering Vism 29 (vācāya).

fr. ud + kṣip

Ukkheṭita

spit out, thrown off, in phrase moho (rāgo etc) catto vanto mutto pahino paṭinissaṭṭho u. Vin iii.97 = Vin iv.27.

pp. of ud + kheṭ; or *khel, see kheḷa

Ukkhepa

(adj.-n.) (adj.) throwing away Dhp-a iv.59 (˚dāya a throw-away donation, tip) ■ (m. lifting up raising Ja i.394 (cel˚); vi.508; DN-a i.273; dur˚ hard to lift or raise Sdhp 347.

fr. ud + kṣip

Ukkhepaka

(adj.) throwing (up); ˚ṃ (acc.) in the manner of throwing Vin ii.214 = Vin iv.195 (piṇḍ˚).

fr. ukkhepa

Ukkhepana

(nt.) suspension Ja iii.487.

fr. ud + kṣip

Ukkhepanā

(f.) throwing up, provocation, sneering Vb 352 = Vism 23, expld. at p. 29.

= last

Ukkhepaniya

(adj.) referring to the suspension (of a bhikkhu), ˚kamma act or resolution of suspension Vin i.49, Vin i.53, Vin i.98, Vin i.143, Vin i.168; Vin ii.27, Vin ii.226, Vin ii.230, Vin ii.298: AN i.99. Uklapa (ukkalapa)

ukkhepana + iya, cp. BSk. utkṣepanīyaṃ karma Divy 329

Uklāpa (ukkalāpa)

(adj.) - 1. deserted Ja ii.275 (ukkalāpa T.; vv.ll. uklāpa ullāpa).

2. dirtied, soiled Vin ii.154, Vin ii.208, Vin ii.222; Vism 128; Dhp-a iii.168 (ukkalāpa).

cp. Sk. ut-kalāpayati to let go

Ugga1

(adj.) mighty, huge, strong fierce, grave, m. a mighty or great person, noble lord DN i.103; SN i.51 = Vv-a 116 (uggateja “the fiery heat”) Ja iv.496; Ja v.452 (˚teja); vi.490 (+ rājaputtā, expld. with etymologising effort as uggatā paññātā by C.); Mil 331; Dhp-a ii.57 (˚tapa); Sdhp 286 (˚daṇḍa), 304 (id.). Cp. sam˚. As Np. at Vism 233 & Ja i.94.

-putta a nobleman, mighty lord SN i.185 (“high born warrior” trsl.); Ja vi.353 (= amacca-putta C.); Thag 1210.

Vedic ugra, from ukṣati, weak base of vakṣ as in vakṣana, vakṣayati = Gr. ἀvέςω, Goth. wahsjan “to wax”, also Lat. augeo & P. oja

Ugga2

= uggamana, in aruṇ-ugga sunrise Vin iv.272.

Uggacchati

to rise, get up out of (lit. & fig.) Thag 181; aruṇe uggacchante at sunrise Vv-a 75; Pv iv.8; Vism 43, ger. uggañchitvāna Mil 376 ■ pp uggata (q.v.).

ud + gam

Uggajjati

to shout out Nd i.172.

ud + gajjati

Uggaṇhāti

to take up, acquire, learn [cp. BSk. udgṛhṇāti in same sense, e.g. Divy 18 Divy 77 etc.] Snp 912 (uggahaṇanta = uggahaṇanti = uggaṇhanti Snp-a 561); imper. uggaṇha Ja ii.30 (sippaṃ); uggaṇhāhi Mil 10 (mantāni); ger. uggayha Snp 832 Snp 845; Nd i.173 ■ Caus. uggaheti in same meaning Sdhp 520; aor. uggahesi Pv iii.54 (nakkhatta-yogaṃ = akari Pv-a 198); ger. uggahetvā Ja v.282, Vv-a 98 (vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ); infin. uggahetuṃ Vv-a 138 (sippaṃ to study a craft) ■ Caus. II. uggaṇhāpeti to instruct Ja v.217; Ja vi.353 ■ pp. uggahita (q.v.). See also uggahāyati ■ A peculiar ppr. med. is uggāhamāna going or wanting to learn DN-a i.32 (cp. uggāhaka ).

ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti

Uggata

come out, risen; high, lofty, exalted Ja iv.213 (suriya), 296 (˚atta), 490; v.244; Pv iv.14 (˚atta one who has risen = uggata-sabhāva samiddha Pv-a 220); Vv-a 217 (˚mānasa); DN-a i.248; Pv-a 68 (˚phāsuka with ribs come out or showing, i.e. emaciated for upphāsulika). Cp. acc˚.

pp. of uggacchati

Uggatta

in all Pv. readings is to be read uttatta˚; thus at Pv iii.32; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 188.

Uggatthana

at Ja vi.590 means a kind of ornament or trinket, it should prob. be read ugghaṭṭana [fr. ghaṭṭeti lit. “tinkling”, i.e. a bangle.

Uggama

rising up Sdhp 594.

fr. ud + gam; Sk. udgama

Uggamana

(˚na) (nt.) going up, rising; rise (of sun & stars) DN i.10, DN i.240; SN ii.268 (suriy˚); Ja iv.321 (an˚), 388; Pv ii.941 (suriy˚); DN-a i.95 (= udayana); Dhp-a i.165 (aruṇ˚); ii.6 (id.); Vv-a 326 (oggaman˚) Pv-a 109 (aruṇ˚). Cp. ugga2 & uggama.;

fr. ud + gam

Uggaha

(adj) (-˚)

1. taking up, acquiring, learning Vism 96 (ācariy˚), 99 (˚paripucchā), 277 (kananaṭṭhānassa).

2. noticing, taking notice, perception (as opp. to manasikāra) Vism 125, Vism 241 sq neg. an˚ Snp 912 (= gaṇhāti Nd i.330). Cp. dhanuggaha.

fr. ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti

Uggahaṇa

(nt.) learning, taking up, studying Pv-a 3 (sipp˚). As uggaṇhana at Vism 277.

fr. uggaṇhāti

Uggahāyati

to take hold of, to take up Snp 791 (= gaṇhāti Nd i.91) ■ ger. uggahāya Snp 837.

poetic form of uggaheti (see uggaṇhati), but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. representing Ved. udgṛbhāyati

Uggahita

taken up, taken, acquired Vin i.212; Ja iii.168 (˚sippa, adj.), 325; iv.220; vi.76; Vism 241. The metric form is uggahīta at Snp 795, Snp 833, Snp 1098 Nd i.175 = Nd ii.152 (= gahita parāmaṭṭha).

pp. of uggaṇhāti

Uggahetar

one who takes up, acquires or learns AN iv.196.

n. ag. to ugganhāti, Caus. uggaheti

Uggāra

spitting out, vomiting, ejection Vism 54; DN-a i.41; Kp-a 61.

ud + gṛ; or *gḷ to swallow, see gala & gilati; lit. to swallow up

Uggāhaka

(adj.-n.) one who is eager to learn Ja v.148 [cp. Mvu iii.373 ogrāhaka in same context].

fr. ud + gṛh, see uggaṇhāti

Uggāhamāna

see uggaṇhāti.

Uggirati1

to vomit up (“swallow up”) to spit out Ud 14 (uggiritvāna); DN-a i.41 (uggāraṃ uggiranto). Cp. BSk. prodgīrṇa cast out Divy 589.

Sk. udgirati, ud + gṛ2; but BSk. udgirati in meaning to sing, chant, utter, formation fr. gṛ2 instead of gṛ1, pres. gṛṇāti; in giraṃ udgirati Jtm 3126 ■ The by-form uggirati is uggilati with interchange of I̊ and ṛ roots *gr̥ & *gI̊, see gala & gilati

Uggirati2

to lift up, carry Vin iv.147 = Dhp-a iii.50 (talasattikaṃ expld. by uccāreti) Ja i.150 (āvudhāni); vi.460, 472. Cp. sam˚.

cp. Sk. udgurate, ud + gur

Uggilati

= uggirati1, i.e. to spit out (opp. ogilati) MN i.393; SN iv.323; Ja iii.529; Mil 5; Pv-a 283.

Uggīva

(nt.) a neckband to hold a basket hanging down Ja vi.562 (uggīvañ c’âpi aṃsato = aṃsakūṭe pacchi-lagganakaṃ C.).

ud + gīva

Ugghaṃseti

to rub Vin ii.106. - pp. ugghaṭṭha (q.v.).

ud + ghṛṣ, see ghaṃsati1

Ugghaṭita

(adj.) striving, exerting oneself; keen, eager in cpd ˚ññū of quick understanding AN ii.135; Pp 41; Ne 7–⁠9, 125; DN-a i.291.

pp. of ud + ghaṭati; cp. BSk. udghaṭaka skilled Divy 3, Divy 26 and phrase at Mvu iii.260 udghaṭitajña

Ugghaṭeti

to open, reveal (? so Hardy in Index to Nett) Ne 9; ugghaṭiyati & ugghaṭanā ibid. Ugghatta (Ugghattha?)

ud + ghaṭati

Ugghaṭṭa (Ugghaṭṭha?)

knocked crushed, rubbed against, only in phrase ughaṭṭa-pāda foot-sore Snp 980 (= maggakkamaṇena ghaṭṭa-pādatala etc Snp-a 582); Ja iv.20 (ṭṭh; expld. by uṇha-vālukāya ghaṭṭapāda); v.69 (= raj okiṇṇa-pāda C. not to the point).

should be pp. of ugghaṃsati = Sk. udghṛṣṭa, see ghaṃsati1, but taken by Bdhgh. either as pp. of or an adj. der. fr. ghaṭṭ, see ghaṭṭeti

Uggharati

to ooze Thag 394 = Dhp-a iii.117.

ud + kṣar

Ugghāṭana

(nt.?) that which can be removed, in ˚kiṭikā a curtain to be drawn aside Vin ii.153 (cp. Vin Texts iii.174, 176). Ch s. v. gives “rope & bucket of a well” as meaning (kavāṭaṃ anugghāṭeti). Cp. ugghaṭanā.

fr. ugghāṭeti

Ugghāṭita

opened Mil 55; Dhp-a i.134.

pp. of ugghāṭeti

Ugghāṭeti

to remove, take away, unfasten, abolish, put an end to Vin ii.148 (tālāni), 208 (ghaṭikaṃ); iv.37; Ja ii.31; Ja vi.68; Mil 140 (bhava-paṭisandhiṃ), 371; Vism 374 ■ Caus. II. ugghāṭāpeti to have opened Ja v.381.

for ugghaṭṭeti, ud + ghaṭṭ but BSk. udghāṭayati Divy 130

Ugghāta

shaking, jolting; jolt, jerk Vin ii.276 (yān˚); Ja vi.253 (an˚); Dhp-a iii.283 (yān˚).

ud + ghāta

Ugghāti

(f.)

1. shaking, shock Vv-a 36.

2. striking, conquering; victory, combd. with nighāti Snp 828; Nd i.167; Snp-a 541; Ne 110 (T. reads ugghāta˚).

fr. ud + ghāta

Ugghātita

struck, killed AN iii.68.

pp. of ugghāteti, denom. fr. udghāta

Ugghosanā

(f.) proclamation DN-a i.310.

abstr. fr. ugghoseti, cp. ghosanā

Ugghoseti

to shout out, announce, proclaim Ja i.75; Dhp-a ii.94; Pv-a 127.

ud + ghoseti

Ucca

(adj.) high (opp. avaca low) DN i.194; MN ii.213; AN v.82 (˚ṭhāniyaṃ nīce ṭhāne ṭhapeti puts on a low place which ought to be placed high); Pv iv.74 (uccaṃ paggayha lifting high up = uccataraṃ katvā Pv-a 265); Pp 52 Pp 58; DN-a i.135; Pv-a 176.

-āvaca high and low, various, manifold Vin i.70, Vin i.203; Ja iv.115, Ja iv.363 (= mahaggha-samaggha C. p. 366); Snp 703, Snp 714, Snp 792, Snp 959; Dhp 83; Nd i.93, Nd i.467; Vv 121 (vividha Vv-a 60); 311. -kulīnatā high birth AN iii.48 (cp. uccā˚).

For udya, adj. formation from prep. ud above, up

Uccaka

(adj.) high Vin ii.149 (āsandikā a kind of high chair).

fr. ucca

Uccatta

(nt.) height Ja iii.318.

fr. ucca = Sk. uccatvaṃ

Uccaya

heaping up, heap, pile, accumulation Dhp 115, Dhp 191, Dhp 192; Vv 4711 827 (= cetiya Vv-a 321); Dhp-a iii.5, Dhp-a iii.9; Dhs-a 41 (pāpassa). -siluccaya a mountain Thag 692; Ja i.29 (v.209) vi.272, 278; Dāvs V.63.

fr. ud + ci, see cināti; Sk. uccaya

Uccā

(˚-) (adv.) high (lit. & fig.), raised, in foll. cpds.;

-kaṇerukā a tall female elephant MN i.178. -kāḷārikā id. MN i.178 (v.l. ˚kaḷārikā to be preferred). -kula a high noble family Pv iii.116 (= uccā khattiya-kul-âdino Pv-a 176). -kulīnatā birth in a high-class family, high rank MN iii.37; Vv-a 32. -sadda a loud noise DN i.143, DN i.178; AN iii.30. -sayana a high bed (+ mahāsayana) Vin i.192; DN i.5, DN i.7; cp. DN-a i.78.

cp. Sk. uccā, instr. sg. of uccaṃ, cp. paścā behind, as well as uccaiḥ instr. pl ■ In BSk. we find ucca˚ (uccakulīna Avs iii.117) as well as uccaṃ (uccaṃgama Divy 476). It is in all cases restricted to cpds.

Uccāra

discharge, excrement, faeces Vin iii.36 (˚ṃ gacchati to go to stool); iv.265, 266 (uccāro nāma gūtho vuccati); Dhp-a ii.56 (˚karaṇa defecation); uccārapassāva faeces & urine DN i.70; MN i.83; Ja i.5; Ja ii.19.

Ud + car

Uccāranā

(f.) lifting up, raising Vin iii.121.

fr. uccāreti

Uccārita

1. uttered, let out Pv-a 280 (akkharāni).

2. lifted, raised Thag-a 255.

pp. of uccāreti

Uccāreti

to lift up, raise aloft Vin iii.81; Vin iv.147 = Dhp-a iii.50; MN i.135 ■ pp. uccārita (q.v.).

ud + cāreti, Caus. of car

Uccāliṅga

a maw-worm Vin iii.38, Vin iii.112; Ja ii.146.

etym.?

Uccināti

to select, choose, search, gather, pick out or up Vin i.73; Vin ii.285 (aor. uccini); Ja iv.9; Pv iii.2 4 (nantake = gavesana-vasena gahetvāna Pv-a 185); Dpvs iv.2.

ud + cināti

Ucchaṅga

the hip, the lap Vin i.225; MN i.366; AN i.130 (˚pañña); Ja i.5, Ja i.308; Ja ii.412; Ja iii.22; Ja iv.38 Ja iv.151; Pp 31; Vism 279; Dhp-a ii.72.

Sk. utsanga, ts → cch like Sk. utsahate → BSk. ucchahate see ussahati

Ucchādana

(nt.) rubbing the limbs, anointing the body with perfumes shampooing DN i.7, DN i.76; at the latter passage in combn. anicc˚-dhamma, of the body, meaning “erosion, decay” and combd. with parimaddana abrasion (see about detail of meaning Dial. i.87); thus in same formula at MN i.500; SN iv.83; Ja i.146 & passim; AN i.62; AN ii.70 (+ nahāpana); iv.54, 386; Iti 111; Thig 89 (nahāpan˚); Mil 241 (˚parimaddana) 315 (+ nahāpana); DN-a i.88.

ut + sād, Caus. of sad, sīdati, cp. ussada

Ucchādeti

to rub the body with perfumes Ja vi.298; Mil 241 (+ parimaddati nahāpeti); DN-a i.88.

fr. ut + sād, see ucchādana

Ucchiṭṭha

left, left over, rejected, thrown out; impure, vile Vin ii.115 (˚odakaṃ); iv.266 (id.); Ja ii.83 (bhattaṃ ucchiṭṭhaṃ akatvā), 126 (˚nadī impure; also itthi outcast), 363; iv.386 (˚ṃ piṇḍaṃ), 388; vi.508; Mil 315; Dhp-a i.52; Dhp-a ii.85; Dhp-a iii.208; Pv-a 80 (= chaḍḍita), 173 (˚bhattaṃ). At Ja iv.433 read ucch˚ for ucciṭṭha ■ an˚ not touched or thrown away (of food) Ja iii.257; Dhp-a ii.3 ■ See also uttiṭṭha & ucchepaka;.

pp. of ud + śiṣ

Ucchiṭṭhaka

(fr. ucchiṭṭha) = ucchiṭṭha Ja iv.386; Ja vi.63, Ja vi.509.

Ucchindati

to break up, destroy, annihilate SN v.432 (bhavataṇhaṃ), AN iv.17 (fut. ucchecchāmi to be read with v.l. for T. ucchejjissāmi); Snp 2 (pret. udacchida), 208 (ger. ucchijja); Ja v.383; Dhp 285. Pass. ucchijjati to be destroyed or annihilated, to cease to exist SN iv.309; Ja v.242, Ja v.467; Mil 192; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 130 (= na pavattati), 253 (= natthi) ■ pp. ucchinna (q.v.).

ud + chid, see chindati

Ucchinna

broken up, destroyed SN iii.10; AN v.32; Snp 746. Cp. sam˚.

pp. of ucchindati

Ucchu

sugar-cane Vin iv.35; AN iii.76; AN iv.279; Mil 46; Dhp-a iv.199 (˚ūnaṃ yanta sugar-cane mill), Pv-a 257, Pv-a 260; Vv-a 124.

-agga (ucch˚) top of s. c. Vism 172. -khaṇḍikā a bit of sugar-cane Vv 3326. -khādana eating s. c. Vism 70 -khetta sugar-cane field Ja i.339; Vv-a 256. -gaṇṭhikā a kind of sugar-cane, Batatas Paniculata Ja i.339; Ja vi.114 (so read for ˚ghaṭika). -pāla watchman of s ■ c. Vv-a 256 -pīḷana, cane-pressing, Asl. 274. -puṭa sugar-cane basket Ja iv.363. -bīja seed of s ■ c. AN i.32; AN v.213. -yantra a sugar-mill Ja i.339. -rasa s ■ c. juice Vin i.246; Vism 489; Vv-a 180 -vāta, Asl. 274. -sālā, Asl. 274.

Sk. cp. Vedic Np. Ikṣvāku fr. ikṣu

Uccheda

breaking up, disintegration, perishing (of the soul) Vin iii.2 (either after this life, or after kāmadeva life, or after brahmadeva life) DN i.34, DN i.55; SN iv.323; Nd i.324; Mil 413; Ne 95, Ne 112, Ne 160; DN-a i.120.

-diṭṭhi the doctrine of the annihilation (of the soul) as opp. to sassata-or atta-diṭṭhi (the continuance of the soul after death) SN ii.20; SN iii.99, SN iii.110 sq; Pts i.150, Pts i.158 Nd i.248 (opp. sassati˚); Dhs 1316; Ne 40, Ne 127; Snp-a 523 (opp. atta˚). -vāda (adj.) one who professes the doctrine of annihilation (ucchedadiṭṭhi) Vin i.235; Vin iii.2; DN i.34, DN i.55; SN ii.18; SN iv.401; AN iv.174, AN iv.182 sq.; Nd i.282; Pp 38. -vādin = ˚vāda Ne 111; Ja v.244.

fr. ud + chid, chind, see ucchindati & cp. cheda

Ucchedana

(adj.) cutting off, destroying; f. ˚anī Ja v.16 (surā).

fr. ud + chid

Ucchedin

(adj.) an adherent of the ucchedavāda Ja v.241.

Ucchepaka

(nt.) leavings of food MN ii.7 (v.l. uccepaka with cc for cch as ucciṭṭha: ucchiṭṭha). The passage is to be read ucchepake va te ratā. A diff. connotation would be implied by taking ucchepaka = uñchā, as Neumann does (Majjhima trsl.2ii.682).

= ucchiṭṭhaka in sense of ucchiṭṭhabhatta

Uju & Ujju

(adj.) straight direct; straightforward, honest, upright DN iii.150 T. ujja) 352 (do.) 422, 550; Vv 187 (= sabba-jimha-vanka-kuṭilabhāv’âpagama-hetutāya u. Vv-a 96); Pp 59; Vb 244 (ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya); Vism 219 (uju avanka akuṭila) DN-a i.210 (id.), Kp-a 236; Dhp-a i.288 (cittaṃ ujuṃ akuṭilaṃ nibbisevanaṃ karoti); Vv-a 281 (˚koṭi-vanka); Pv-a 123 (an˚).

-aṅgin (ujjangin) having straight limbs, neg. an˚ not having straight limbs, i.e. pliable, skilful, nimble, graceful Ja v.40 (= kañcana-sannibha-sarīra C.); vi.500 (T anuccangin = anindita-agarahitangin C.). -gata walking straight, of upright life MN i.46; AN iii.285 sq. (˚citta) v.290 sq.; Snp 350 (ujju˚), 477 (id.); Dhp 108 (ujju˚, see Dhp-a ii.234 for interpretation). -gāmin, neg. an˚ going crooked, a snake Ja iv.330. -cittatā straightness, unwieldiness of heart Vb 350. -diṭṭhitā the fact of having a straightforward view or theory (of life) Mil 257. -paṭipanna living uprightly DN i.192; SN iv.304; SN v.343; Vism 219 -magga the straight road DN i.235; Vin v.149; Iti 104; Ja i.344 Ja vi.252; Dhp-a ii.192. -bhāva straightness, uprightness Snp-a 292, Snp-a 317; Pv-a 51. -bhūta straight, upright SN i.100, SN i.170 SN ii.279; SN v.384, SN v.404; AN ii.57; AN iv.292; Ja i.94; Ja v.293 (an˚) Vv 3423 (see Vv-a 155); Pv i.1010 (= citta-jimha-vankaKutīla-bhāva-karānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena ujubhāvappatta Pv-a 51). -vaṃsa straight lineage, direct descendency Ja v.251. -vāta a soft wind Mil 283. -vipaccanīka in direct opposition DN i.1; MN i.402; DN-a i.38.

Vedic ṛju, also ṛjyati, irajyate to stretch out: cp. Gr. ὀρέγω to stretch; Lat. rego to govern; Goth ufrakjan to straighten up; Ohg. recchen = Ger. recken E. reach; Oir. rēn span. See also P. ajjava

Ujuka & Ujjuka

(adj.) straight, direct, upright MN i.124; SN i.33 (ujuko so maggo, the road to Nibbāna) 260 (citta); iv.298; v.143, 165; Ja i.163; Ja v.297 (opp khujja); Dhp-a i.18 (˚magga); Sdhp 321. -anujjuka crooked not straight SN iv.299; Ja iii.318.

uju + ka

Ujukatā

(f.) straightness, rectitude Dhs 50, Dhs 51 (kāyassa, cittassa); Vism 436 sq.

abstr. fr. ujuka

Ujutā

(f.) straight(forward)ness, rectitude Dhs 50, Dhs 51.

abstr. of uju

Ujjagghati

to laugh at, deride, mock, make fun of Vin iii.128; Thig 74 (spelt jjh = hasati Thag-a 78); AN iii.91 (ujjh˚, v.l. ujj˚) = Pp 67 (= pāṇiṃ paharitvā mahāhasitaṃ hasati Pp A 249).

ud + jagghati

Ujjaṅgala

hard, barren soil; a very sandy and deserted place DN ii.146 (˚nagaraka, trsl. “town in the midst of a jungle”, cp. Dial. ii.161); Ja i.391; Vv 855 (= ukkaṃsena jangala i.e. exceedingly dusty or sandy dry); Pv ii.970 (spelt ujjhangala, expld. by ativiya-thaddhabhūmibhāga at Pv-a 139); Vism 107. Also in BSk. ujjangala e.g. Mvu ii.207.

ud + jangala

Ujjala

(adj.) blazing, flashing; bright, beautiful Ja i.220; Dāvs ii.63.

ud + jval, see jalati

Ujjalati

to blaze up, shine forth Vin i.31; Vv-a 161 (+ jotati) ■ Caus. ujjāleti to make shine, to kindle Vin i.31; Mil 259; Vism 428; Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.14, read dīpāṃ ujjālayiṃ); Vv-a 51 (padīpaṃ).

ud + jalati, jval

Ujjava

(adj.) “running up”, in cpd. ujjav-ujjava a certain term in the art of spinning or weaving Vin iv.300, expld. by “yattakaṃ patthena (patthana?) añcitaṃ hoti tasmi takkamhi vedhite”.

ud + java

Ujjavati

to go up-stream Vin ii.301.

ud + javati

Ujjavanikāya

instr. fem. of ujjavanaka used as adv. up-stream, lit “running up” Vin ii.290 Vin iv.65 (in expln. of uddhaṃgāmin, opp. ojavanikāya).

ud + javanaka, q.v.

Ujjahati

to give up, let go; imper. ujjaha SN i.188; Thig 19; Snp 342.

ud + jahati

Ujju & Ujjuka

see uju & ujuka;.

Ujjota

light, lustre Ja i.183 (˚kara); Mil 321.

ud + * jot of jotati, Sk. uddyotate

Ujjotita

illumined Dāvs v.53.

pp. of ujjoteti, ud + joteti

Ujjhaggati

see ujjagghati.

Ujjhaggikā

(f.) loud laughter Vin ii.213, cp. iv.187.

fr. ujjagghati, spelling varies

Ujjhati

1. to forsake, leave, give up Ja vi.138; Dāvs ii.86.

2. to sweep or brush away Ja vi.296 ■ pp. ujjhita (q.v.).

Sk. ujjhati, ujjh

Ujjhatti

(f.) irritation, discontent AN iv.223, AN iv.467 (v.l. ujj˚) cp. ujjhāna.

fr. ud + jhāyati1, corresponding to a Sk. *ud-dhyāti

Ujjhāna

(nt.)

1. taking offence, captiousness Dhp 253 (= paresaṃ randha-gavesitāya Dhp-a iii.377); Mil 352 (an˚-bahula).

2. complaining, wailing Ja iv.287.

-saññin,-saññika irritable SN i.23; Thag 958; Vin ii.214 cp. iv.194; Dpvs ii.6; Dhp-a iii.376 (˚saññitā irritability).

ud + jhāna1 or jhāna2?

Ujjhāpana

(nt.) stirring up, provoking Ja v.91 (devat˚), 94 (˚kamma).

fr. ud + jhāyati1 or jhāyati2 to burn, to which jhāpeti to bring to ruin etc.? cp. ujjhāna

Ujjhāpanaka

(adj.) one who stirs up another to discontent Vin iv.38.

fr. ujjhāpana

Ujjhāpeti

to harass, vex, irritate MN i.126; SN i.209 (“give occasion for offence”); Vin iv.38 (cp. p. 356); Ja v.286; Pv-a 266.

Caus. of ujjhāyati

Ujjhāyati

to be irritated, to be annoyed or offended, to get angry, grumble; often in phrase ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti expressing great annoyance Vin i.53, Vin i.62, Vin i.73; Vin ii.207; Vin iv.226; SN i.232 passim ■ SN i.232 (mā ujjhāyittha); Ja ii.15; Dhp-a ii.20 aor. ujjhāyi Ja i.475; Dhp-a ii.88; inf. ujjhātuṃ Ja ii.355. Caus. ujjhāpeti (q.v.).

ud + jhāyati1 or perhaps more likely jhāyati2 to burn, fig. to be consumed. According to Müller P. G pp. 12 & 42 = Sk. ava-; dhyā, but that is doubtful phonetically as well as semantically

Ujjhita

destitute, forsaken; thrown out, cast away MN i.296 (+ avakkhitta); Thag 315 (itthi); 2 386 (cp. Thag-a 256 vātakkhitto viya yo koci dahano) Dhp 58 (= chaḍḍita of sweepings Dhp-a i.445); Ja iii.499 Ja v.302; Ja vi.51. Uncha & Uncha

pp. of ujjhati

Uñcha & Uñchā

(f.) anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning SN ii.281; AN i.36; AN iii.66 sq., 104; Vin iii.87; Snp 977; Thig 329, Thig 349; Ja iii.389; Ja iv.23, Ja iv.28, Ja iv.434, Ja iv.471 (˚ya, dat. phalâphal’atthāya C.); Thag-a 235, Thag-a 242. Cp. samuñchaka.

-cariyā wandering for, or on search for gleaning, Ja ii.272; Ja iii.37, Ja iii.515; Ja v.3; DN-a i.270; Vv-a 103; Thag-a 208 -cārika (adj.) going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tāpasā Snp-a 295 (cp. DN-a i.270, DN-a i.271). -patta the gleaning-bowl, in phrase uñchāpattāgate rato “fond of that which has come into the gl. b.” Thag 155 = Pv iv.73 (= uñchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate āhāre rato Pv-a 265; trsld. in Psalms of Brethren “contented with whatever fills the bowl”). aññāt˚, marked off as discarded (goods) SN ii.281, so S A.

Sk. uñcha & uñchana, to; uñch. Neumann’s etym. uñchā = E. ounce, Ger. unze (Majjhima trsl.2ii.682) is incorrect, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under uncia

Uñchati

to gather for sustenance, seek (alms), glean Vism 60 (= gavesati).

fr. uñch

Uññā

(f.) contempt Vin iv.241; Vb 353 sq. (att˚).

= avaññā (?) from ava + jñā, or after uññātabba?

Uññātabba

(adj.) to be despised, contemptible, only in stock-phrase “daharo na uṇṇātabbo na paribhotabbo” SN i.69; Snp p.93; Snp-a 424 (= na avajānitabbo, na nīcaṃ katvā jānitabbo ti). In same connection at Ja v.63 mā naṃ daharo [ti] uññāsi (v.l. maññāsi) apucchitvāna (v.l. ā˚).

grd. fr. ava + jñā (?)

Uṭṭitvā

at Vin ii.131 is doubtful reading (see p. 318, v.l. uḍḍhetvā), and should perhaps be read uḍḍetvā (oḍḍetva, see uḍḍeti), meaning “putting into a sling, tying or binding up”.

Uṭṭepaka

one who scares away (or catches?) crows (kāk˚) Vin i.79 (vv.ll. uṭṭhe˚, uḍḍe˚, uḍe˚). See remarks on uṭṭepeti.

Uṭṭepeti

in phrase kāke u. “to scare crows away” (or to catch them in snares?) at Vin i.79. Reading doubtful should probably be read uḍḍepeti (? Caus. of uḍḍeti oḍḍeti, or of uḍḍeti to make fly away). The vv.ll. given to this passage are uṭṭeceti, upaṭṭhāpeti, uḍḍoyeti. See also; uṭṭepaka.

Uṭṭhapana

see vo˚. Utthahati & Utthati;

Uṭṭhahati & Uṭṭhāti

to rise, stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or exert oneself, to be active, pres.; uṭṭhahati Pp 51 ■ pot. uṭṭhaheyya SN i.217; as imper. uttiṭṭhe Dhp 168 (expld. by uttiṭṭhitvā paresaṃ gharadvāre ṭhatvā Dhp-a iii.165, cp. Vin Texts i.152) ■ imper. 2nd pl. uṭṭhahatha Snp 331; Snp 2nd sg. uṭṭhehi Pv ii.61; Ja iv.433 ■ ppr uṭṭhahanto MN i.86; SN i.217; Ja i.476 ■ aor. uṭṭhahi Ja i.117; Pv-a 75 ■ ger. uṭṭhahitvā Pv-a 4, Pv-a 43, Pv-a 55 Pv-a 152, & uṭṭhāya Snp 401 ■ inf. uṭṭhātuṃ Ja i.187. Note. When uṭṭh˚ follows a word ending in a vowel and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony, e.g. gabbho vuṭṭhāsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin ii.278; āsanā vuṭṭhāya arising from his seat, Vism 126. See also under vuṭṭhahati ■ pp uṭṭhita; Caus. uṭṭhāpeti ■ Cp. pariyuṭṭhāti.

ud + sthā see tiṭṭhati & uttiṭṭhati

Uṭṭhahāna

exerting oneself, rousing oneself; an˚; sluggish, lazy Dhp 280 (= ayāyāmanto Dhp-a iii.409); cp. anuṭṭhahaṃ SN i.217.

ppr. of uṭṭhahati

Uṭṭhātar

one who gets up or rouses himself, one who shows energy SN i.214; AN iv.285, AN iv.288, AN iv.322; Snp 187; Ja vi.297. -an˚; one who is without energy SN i.217; Snp 96.

n. ag. of ut + ṣṭhā, see uṭṭhahati

Uṭṭhāna

(nt.)

1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opp. sayana & nisīdana lying or sitting down) DN ii.134 (sīha-seyyaṃ kappesi uṭṭhāna-saññaṃ manasikaritvā); Dhp 280 (˚kāla); Ja i.392 (an˚-seyyā a bed from which one cannot get up); Vism 73 (aruṇ-uṭṭhānavelā time of sunrise) Dhp-a i.17.

2. rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as adj. (-˚) producing Ja i.47 (kapp˚) vi.459; Mil 326 (dhaññ˚ khettaṃ atthi).

3. “rousing” exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry often syn. with viriya MN i.86; AN i.94; AN ii.135 (˚phala) iii.45 (˚viriya), 311; iv.281 (˚sampadā); Iti 66 (˚adhigataṃ dhanaṃ earned by industry); Pv iv.324; Pp 51 (˚phala) Mil 344, Mil 416; Thag-a 267 (˚viriya); Pv-a 129 (+ viriya) -an˚; want of energy, sluggishness AN iv.195; Dhp 241. Note. The form vuṭṭhāna appears for uṭṭh˚ after a vowel under the same conditions as vuṭṭhahati for uṭṭhahati (q.v.) gabbha-vuṭṭhānaṃ Ja i.114. See also vuṭṭh˚; and cp. pariy˚.

fr. ut + ṣṭhā

Uṭṭhānaka

(-˚) (adj.)

1. giving rise to yielding (revenue), producing Ja i.377, Ja i.420 (satasahass˚); iii. 229 (id.); v.44 (id.). Cp. uṭṭhāyika.

2. energetic Ja vi.246.

fr. uṭṭhāna

Uṭṭhānavant

(adj.) strenuous, active Dhp 24.

uṭṭhāna + vant

Uṭṭhāpeti

1. to make rise, only in phrase aruṇaṃ (suriyaṃ) u. to let the sun rise, i.e. wait for sunrise or to go on till sunrise Ja i.318; Ja vi.330 Vism 71, Vism 73 (aruṇaṃ).

2. to raise Ja vi.32 (paṭhaviṃ). 3. to fit up Ja vi.445 (nāvaṃ).

4. to exalt, praise DN-a i.256.

5. to turn a person out Dhp-a iv.69 ■ See also vuṭṭhāpeti.

Caus. ii. of utthahati

Uṭṭhāyaka

(adj.) “getting-up-ish”, i.e. ready to get up, quick, alert active, industrious; f. ˚ikā Thig 413 (= uṭṭhāna-viriyasampannā Thag-a 267; v.l. uṭṭhāhikā)

adj. formation fr. uṭṭhāya, ger. of uṭṭhahati

Uṭṭhāyika

(adj.) yielding, producing Ja ii.403 (satasahass˚).

= uṭṭhānaka

Uṭṭhāyin

(adj.) getting up DN i.60 (pubb˚ + pacchā-nipātin rising early & lying down late).;

adj. form. fr. uṭṭhāya, cp. uṭṭhāyaka

Uṭṭhāhaka

(adj.) = uṭṭhāyaka Ja v.448; f. ˚ikā AN iii.38 (v.l. ˚āyikā) iv.266 sq.

for uṭṭhāyaka after analogy of gāhaka etc.

Uṭṭhita

1. risen, got up Pv ii.941 (kāl˚); Vism 73.

2. arisen, produced Ja i.36; Mil 155.

3. striving, exerting oneself, active Ja ii.61; Dhp 168; Mil 213. -an˚; SN ii.264; Pts i.172 ■ Cp. pariy˚. Note. The form is vuṭṭhita when following upon a vowel see vuṭṭhita & uṭṭhahati;, e.g. paṭisallāṇā vutthito arisen from the seclusion DN ii.9; pāto vuṭṭhito risen early Pv-a 128.

pp. of uṭṭhahati

Uḍḍayhana

(nt.) burning up, conflagration Pp 13 (˚velā = jhāyana-kālo Pp A 187) Kp-a 181 (T. uḍḍahanavelā, v.l. preferable uḍḍayh˚).

fr. uḍḍayhati, see uddahati

Uḍḍahati

to burn up (intrs.) Kp-a 181 (uḍḍaheyya with v.l. uḍḍayheyya, the latter preferable) Usually in Pass. uḍḍayhati to be burnt, to burn up (intrs.) SN iii.149, SN iii.150 (v.l. for ḍayhati); Ja iii.22 (udayhate); v.194. fut. uḍḍayhissati Ja i.48.

ud + ḍahati

Uḍḍita

ensnared (?), bound, tied up SN i.40 (= taṇhāya ullanghita C.; trsld. “the world is all strung up”).

pp. of uḍḍeti2

Uḍḍeti1

to fly up MN i.364 (kāko maṃsapesiṃ ādāya uḍḍayeyya; vv.ll. ubbaḍaheyya, uyya dayeyya); Ja v.256, Ja v.368, Ja v.417.

ud + ḍeti to fly. The etym. is doubtful, Müller P. Gr. 99 identifies uḍḍeti1 & uḍḍeti;2 both as causatives to ḍī. Of uḍḍeti2 two forms exist, uḍḍ˚ & oḍḍ˚, the latter of which may be a variant of the former, but with specialisation of meaning (“lay snares”), it may be a cpd with ava˚ instead of ud˚. It is extremely doubtful whether uḍḍeti2 belongs here, we should rather separate it & refer it to another root, probably; , layate (as in allīna, nilīyati etc.), to stick to, adhere, fasten etc. The change l → ḍ is a freq. Pāli phenomenon. Another Caus. II. of the same root (ḍī?) is uṭṭepeti

Uḍḍeti2

(a) to bind up, tie up to, string up Vin ii.131 (so read for uṭṭitvā, v.l. uḍḍhetvā) ■ (b) to throw away, reject Pv-a 256 (chaḍḍayāmi gloss) ■ pp. uḍḍita.

see discussion under uḍḍeti1

Uḍḍha

(-˚) (num. ord.) the fourth, only in cpd. aḍḍhuḍḍha “half of the fourth unit”, i.e. three & a half (cp; diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 and aḍḍha-teyya 2 1/2) Ja v.417 sq. (˚āni itthisahassāni); Mvu xii.53.

the apocope form of catuttha = uttha, dialectically reduced to uḍḍha under the influence of the preceding aḍḍha

Uṇṇa

(nt.) & Uṇṇā (f.)

1. wool AN iii.37 = AN iv.265 (+ kappāsā cotton) Ja ii.147; Snp-a 263 (patt˚).

2. hair between the eyebrows Snp 1022, & in stock phrase, describing one of the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa, bhamuk;’antare jātā uṇṇā odātā etc. DN ii.18 = DN iii.144 = DN iii.170 = Snp-a 285. Also at Vism 552 in jāti-uṇṇāya.

-ja in uṇṇaja mukha Ja vi.218, meaning “rounded swelling” (C. expls. by kañcan’ādāso viya paripuṇṇaṃ mukhaṃ). -nābhi (either uṇṇa˚ or uṇṇā, cp. Vedic ūrṇavābhi, ūrṇa + vābhi from Idg. *ṷebh to weave as in Lat. vespa = wasp, of which shorter root in Sk. ) a spider, lit. “wool-i.e. thread-weaver”, only in combn. with sarabū & mūsikā at Vin ii.110 = AN ii.73 = Ja ii.147 (= makkaṭaka C).

Sk. ūrṇa & ūrṇā; Lat. lāna wool; Goth. wulla; Ohg. wolla = E. wool; Lith. vilna; Cymr gwlan (= E. flannel); Gr. λ ̈ηνος, also ου ̈ ̓λος = Lat. vellus (fleece) = Ags. wil-mod

Uṇṇata

(adj.) raised, high, fig. haughty (opp. oṇata) AN ii.86; Snp 702 (an˚ care uddhaccaṃ n’āpajjeyya Snp-a 492); Pp 52 (= ucca uggata Pp A 229). Cp. unnata.

pp. of uṇṇamati, Sk. unnata

Uṇṇati

(f.) haughtiness Snp 830; Nd i.158, Nd i.170; Dhs 1116, Dhs 1233. Cp. unnati.

fr. uṇṇamati

Uṇṇama

loftiness, height, haughtiness Dhs 1116, Dhs 1233. Cp. unnama.

fr. uṇṇamati

Uṇṇamati

to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited Snp 366, Snp 829, Snp 928; Nd i.169; Ja vi.346 inf. uṇṇametave Snp 206. Cp. unnamati.

ud + nam

Uṇṇī

(f.) a woollen dress Vin ii.108.

Sk. aurṇī fr. aurṇa woollen, der. of ūrṇa

Uṇha

(adj.-n.) hot, as adj only in phrase uṇhaṃ lohitaṃ chaḍḍeti to spill hot blood, i.e. to kill oneself Dhp-a i.95; otherwise in cpds. abs. only as nt. “heat” & always in contrast to sītaṃ “cold” Vin ii.117 (sītena pi uṇhena pi); DN ii.15 (opp sīta); MN i.85; AN i.145 = AN i.170 = Ja v.417 (sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā tiṇaṃ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā); Snp 52, Snp 966 (acc ˚); Nd i.486 = Nd ii.677 (same as under sita); Ja i.17 (v.93); Mil 410 (megho uṇhaṃ nibbāpeti); Pv-a 37 (ati˚).

-ākāra appearance of heat, often in phrase (Sakkassa paṇḍu-kambala-sil’āsanaṃ uṇhākāraṃ dassesi, of Sakka’s throne showing an appearance of heat as a sign of some extraordinary event happening in the world, e.g. Ja i.330 Ja v.92; Dhp-a i.17, and passim. -odaka hot water Vv-a 68 -kalla glowing-hot embers or ashes Ja ii.94 (so read for ˚kalala); iv.389 (˚vassa, rain of hot ashes, v.l. ˚kukkuḷavassa). -kāla hot weather Vin ii.209.

Vedic uṣṇā f. to oṣati to burn, pp. uṣṭa burnt, Sk. uṣṇa = Lat. ustus; cp. Gr. ευὤ, Lat. uro to burn Ags. ysla glowing cinders, Lith. usnis nettle

Uṇhatta

(nt.) hot state, heat Vism 171.

abstr. fr. uṇha

Uṇhīsa

a turban DN i.7; DN ii.19 = DN iii.145 (˚sīsa cp. Dial. ii.16); Ja ii.88; Mil 330; DN-a i.89; Dhs-a 198. Ut(t)anda

Sk. uṣṇīṣa

Ut(t)aṇḍa

see uddaṇḍa.

Utu

(m. & nt.)

1. (lit. (a) (good or proper) time, season: aruṇa-utu occasion or time of the sun(-rise) Dhp-a i.165; utuṃ gaṇhāti to watch for the right time (in horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarīraṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpeti “to cause the body to take season”, i.e. to refresh the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. Ja iii.527; DN-a i.252 ■ (b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism 128. There are usually three seasons mentioned, viz. the hot, rainy and wintry season or gimha vassa & hemanta; AN iv.138; Snp-a 317. Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at Ja v.330 & vi.524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil. utunā in the wintry season SN v.51 ■ (c) the menses Snp-a 317; Ja v.330 (utusinātāya read utusi nhātāya; utusi loc. as expld. by C. pupphe uppanne utumhi nahātāya).

2 (applied in a philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opp. kamma), physical order: see Asl. 272 f.; Dialogues II, 8, n.; Kvu trsln. 207; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhism p. 119 f., Cpd. 161, Dhs trsln. introd. xvii; & cp. cpds So in connection with kamma at Vism 451, Vism 614; Ja vi.105 (kamma-paccayena utunā samuṭṭhitā Veraraṇī); perhaps also at Mil 410 (megha ututo samuṭṭhahitvā).

-āhāra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs trsln. 174) Pv-a 148. -ūpasevanā seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Snp 249 (= gimhe ātapa-ṭṭhāna-sevanā vasse rukkha-mūla-sevanā hemante jalappavesa-sevanā Snp-a 291). -kāla seasonable favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; Vin ii.173. -ja produced by the seasons or by physical change Mil 268 (kamma˚ hetu˚, utu˚); Vism 451. -nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Mil 268. -pamāṇa measure of the season, i.e. the exact season Vin i.95. -pariṇāma change (adversity) of the season (as cause of disease) SN iv.230; AN ii.87; AN iii.131; AN v.110; Mil 112, Mil 304; Vism 31. -parissaya danger or risk of the seasons AN iii.388. -pubba festival on the eve of each of the (6) seasons Ja vi.524 -vāra time of the season, ˚vārena ˚vārena according to the turn of the season Ja i.58. -vikāra change of season Vism 262. -veramanī abstinence during the time of menstruaīion Snp 291 (cp. Snp-a 317). -saṃvacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, pl. ˚ā the seasons DN iii.85; AN ii.75; SN v.442. The phrase utusaṃvaccharāni at Pv ii.955 is by Dhammapāla taken as a bahuvrīhi cpd., viz cycles of seasons & of years, i.e. vasanta-gimh ādike bahū utū ca citta-saṃvacchar;’adi bahūni saṃvaccharāni ca Pv-a 135. Similarly at Ja v.330 (with Cy). -sappāya suitable to the season, seasonable Dhp-a 327. -samaya time of the menses Snp-a 317.

Vedic ṛtu special or proper time, with adj. ṛta straight, right, rite, ṛti manner to Lat. ars “art”, Gr.δαμαρ(τ), further Lat. rītus (rite), Ags. rīm number; of *ar to fit in, adjust etc. q.v. under appeti

Utuka

(-˚) (adj.) seasonable, only in cpd. sabbotuka belonging to all seasons, perennial DN ii.179; Pv iv.122 (= pupphupaga-rukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukkhāvaha Pv-a 275); Sdhp 248.

utu + ka

Utunī

(f.) a menstruating woman Vin iii.18; Vin iv.303; SN iv.239; AN iii.221, AN iii.229; Mil 127. an˚; AN iii.221, AN iii.226.

formed fr. utu like bhikkhunī fr. bhikkhu

Utta

speaking badly or spoken of badly i.e. of bad repute AN ii.117, AN ii.143; AN iii.163; Kp viii.2 Kp-a 218.

pp. of vac, Sk. ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only as dur˚.

Uttaṇḍāla

(adj.) “grainy”, i.e. having too many rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp atikilinna too thin or liquid) Ja i.340; Ja iii.383 (id.) iv.44 (id.).

ud + taṇḍula

Uttatta

heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure Ja vi.574 (hemaṃ uttattaṃ agginā); Vv 8417; Pv iii.32 (˚rūpa so read for uggata˚, reading correct at Pv-a 188 ˚singī) Pv-a 10 (˚kanaka, T. uggatta˚); Mhbv 25 (id.).

ud + tatta1, pp. of ud + tap, Sk. uttapta

Uttanta

frightened, faint Vin iii.84. See uttasta & utrasta;.

= utrasta, is reading correct?

Uttama

(adj.) “ut-most”, highest, greatest, best Snp 1054 (dhammaṃ uttamaṃ the highest ideal = Nibbāna for which seṭṭhan Snp 1064; cp. Nd ii.317); Dhp 56; Nd i.211; Nd ii.502 (in paraphrase of mahā combd. with pavara) Kp-a 124; Dhp-a i.430: Pv-a 1, Pv-a 50 ■ dum-uttama a splendid tree Vv 393; nar˚ the best of men Snp 1021 (narāsabha of 996); pur˚ the most magnificent town Snp 1012; puris˚ the noblest man Thag 629, Thag 1084; nt. uttamaṃ the highest ideal, i.e. Arahantship Ja i.96.

-aṅga the best or most important limb or part of the body, viz. (a) the head Vin ii.256 = MN i.32 = AN iv.278 (in phrase uttamange sirasmiṃ); Ja ii.163; also in cpd ˚bhūta the hair of the head Thig 253 (= kesa-kalāpa Thag-a 209, Thag-a 210) & ˚ruha id. Ja i.138 = Ja vi.96 (= kesā C.) (b) the eye Ja iv.403; (c) the penis Ja v.197. -attha the highest gain or good (i.e. Arahantship Snp-a 332) Snp 324; Dhp 386, Dhp 403; Dhp-a iv.142; Thag-a 160. -adhama most contemptible Ja v.394, Ja v.437. -guṇā (pl.) loftiest virtues Ja i.96. -purisa Iti 97 & -porisa the greatest man (= mahāpurisa) Dhp 97 (see Dhp-a ii.188). -bhāva the highest condition, state or place Dhp-a ii.188 (˚ṃ patto = puris’ uttamo).

superl. of ud˚, to which compar. is uttara. See etym. under ud˚

Uttamatā

(f.) highest amount, climax, limit DN-a i.169 (for paramatā).

abstr. fr. uttama

Uttara1

(adj.) compar. of ud˚, q.v. for etym.; the superl. is uttama]

1. higher, high, superior, upper, only in cpds., Ja ii.420 (musal˚ with the club on top of him? Cy not clear, perhaps to uttara2); see also below.

2 northern (with disā region or point of compass) DN i.153; MN i.123; SN i.224; Pv-a 75. uttarāmukha (for uttaraṃmukha) turning north, facing north Snp 1010.

3. subsequent following, second (˚-) Ja i.63 (˚āsāḷha-nakkhatta). 4. over, beyond (-˚): aṭṭh’utara-sata eight over a hundred i.e. 108; Dhp-a i.388sa-uttara having something above or higher, having a superior i.e. inferior DN i.80 (citta), ii.299; MN i.59; SN v.265; Vb 324 (paññā); Dhs 1292, Dhs 1596; Dhs-a 50anuttara without a superior unrivalled, unparalleled DN i.40; SN i.124; SN ii.278; SN iii.84; Snp 179. See also under anuttara.

-attharaṇa upper cover Ja vi.253. -ābhimukha facing North DN ii.15. -āsaṅga an upper robe Vin i.289; ii. 126; SN i.81; SN iv.290; AN i.67, AN i.145; AN ii.146; Dhp-a i.218; Pv-a 73; Vv-a 33 = Vv-a 51. -itara something higher, superior DN i.45, DN i.156, DN i.174; SN i.81; Ja i.364; Dhp-a ii.60; Dhp-a iv.4 -oṭṭha the upper lip (opp. adhar˚) Ja ii.420; Ja iii.26; iv. 184. -chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa˚ a carpet with awnings or canopy above it) DN i.7; AN i.181; AN iii.50 -chadana = ˚chada DN ii.187; Dhp-a i.87. -dvāra the northern gate Ja vi.364. -dhamma the higher norm of the world (lok˚), higher righteousness DN ii.188 (paṭividdha-lok’uttara-dhammatāya uttama-bhāvaṃ patta). -pāsaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin ii.120 = Vin ii.148 -pubba north-eastern Ja vi.518. -sse (v.l. ˚suve) on the day after tomorrow AN i.240.

Uttara2

(adj.) crossing over, to be crossed, in dur˚; difficult to cross or to get out of SN i.197 (not duruttamo); Mil 158; and in cpd. ˚setu one who is going to cross a bridge Mil 194 (cp. uttara-setu).

fr. uttarati

Uttaraṇa

(nt.) bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Thag 418; Ja i.195. In BSk. uttaraṇa only in sense of crossing, overcoming, e.g. Jtm 31 8 (˚setu). Cp. uttara.

fr. uttarati

Uttarati

1. to come out of (water) Vin ii.221 (opp. otarati); Ja i.108 (id.).

2. to go over, to flow over (of water), to boil over Mil 117, Mil 118, Mil 132 Mil 260, Mil 277.

3. to cross over, to go beyond MN i.135 aor. udatāri Snp 471 (oghaṃ).

4. to go over, to overspread Ja v.204 (ger. uttariyāna = avattharitvā C.) ■ pp otiṇṇa (q.v.) ■ Caus. uttareti (q.v.). Uttari (-) & Uttarim

ud + tarati1

Uttari (˚-) & Uttariṃ

(adv.) out, over, beyond; additional moreover, further, besides ■ (1) uttariṃ: DN i.71; MN i.83 MN iii.148; SN iv.15; Snp 796 (uttariṃ kurute = uttariṃ karoti Nd ii.102, i.e. to do more than anything, to do best, to esteem especially); Ja ii.23; Ja iii.324; Mil 10 (ito uttariṃ anything beyond this, any more) Dhp-a iv.109 (bhaveti to cultivate especially; see vuttari); Vv-a 152 ■ uttariṃ appaṭivijjhanto not going further in comprehension, i.e. reaching the highest degree of comprehension, Vism 314 referring to Pts ii.131, which is quoted at Mil 198, as the last of the 11 blessings of mettā ■ (2) uttari˚; in foll. cpds.

-karaṇīya an additional duty, higher obligation SN ii.99; SN iii.168; AN v.157 = AN v.164; Iti 118. -bhaṅga an extra portion, tit-bit, dainties, additional or after-meal bits Vin ii.214; Vin iii.160; Vin iv.259; Ja ii.419; Dhp-a i.214 sa-uttaribhanga together with dainty bits Ja i.186, cp. 196 (yāgu) -bhaṅgika serving as dainties Ja i.196. -manussa beyond the power of men, superhuman, in cpd. ˚dhamma an order which is above man, extraordinary condition, transcendental norm, adj. of a transcendental character, miraculous overwhelming Vin i.209; Vin ii.112; Vin iii.105; Vin iv.24; DN i.211; DN iii.3, DN iii.12, DN iii.18; MN i.68; MN ii.200; SN iv.290, SN iv.300 SN iv.337; AN iii.430; AN v.88; Dhp-a iii.480. -sāṭaka a further i.e. upper or outer garment, cloak, mantle Ja ii.246; Dhp-a iv.200; Pv-a 48, Pv-a 49 (= uttarīyaṃ).

compn. form of uttara, cp. angi-bhūta uttāni-karoti etc.

Uttarika

(adj.) transcending, superior, superhuman Ne 50.

fr. uttara

Uttariya

(nt.)

1. state of being higher. Cp iii.35; neg. an˚ state of being unsurpassed (lit. with nothing higher), preeminence; see anuttariya.

2. an answer, rejoinder Dhp-a i.44 (karaṇ˚-karaṇa).

abstr. fr. uttara; uttara + ya = Sk. *uttarya

Uttarīya

(nt.) an outer garment, cloak Pvi.103 (= uparivasanaṃ uparihāraṃ uttarisāṭakaṃ Pv-a 49); Dāvs iii.30; Thag-a 253.

fr. uttara

Uttasati1

only in Caus. uttāseti to impale, q.v.

identical in form with next

Uttasati2

1. to frighten Ja i.47 (v.267). - to be alarmed or terrified Vin i.74 (ubbijjati u. palāyati) iii.145 (id.); Ja ii.384; Ja vi.79; ppr. uttasaṃ Thag 863; uttasanto Pv ii.23 ■ See utrasati. Caus. uttāseti (q.v.). pp. uttasta & utrasta (q.v.). Cp. also uttanta.;

ut + tasati2

Uttasana

(adj.-n..) frightening, fear Ja i.414 (v.l. for uttasta).

fr. ud + tras, cp. uttāsana

Uttasta

frightened, terrified, faint-hearted Ja i.414 (˚bhikkhu; v.l. uttasana˚).

pp. of uttasati2; usual form utrasta (q.v.)

Uttāna

(adj.)

1. streched out (flat), lying on one’s back, supine Vin i.271 (mañcake uttānaṃ nipajjāpetvā making her lie back on the couch) ii.215; Ja i.205; Pv iv.108 (opp. avakujja); Pv-a 178 (id.) 265.

2. clear, manifest, open, evident [cp. BSk. uttāna in same sense at Av. SN ii.106] DN i.116; SN ii.28 (dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito); Ja ii.168 (= pākaṭa); v.460; Pv-a 66, Pv-a 89, Pv-a 140, Pv-a 168anuttāna unclear, not explained Ja vi.247 ■ The cpd. form (˚-) of uttāna in combn. with kṛ & bhū is uttānī˚ (q.v.).

3. superficial, “flat”, shallow AN i.70 (parisa); Pp 46.

-mukha “clear mouthed”, speaking plainly, easily understood DN i.116 (see DA i.287); Dhp-a iv.8. -seyyaka “lying on one’s back”, i.e. an infant MN i.432; AN iii.6 Thag 935; Mil 40; Vism 97 (˚dāraka).

fr. ut + tan, see tanoti & tanta

Uttānaka

(adj.)

1. (= uttāna1) lying on one’s back Ja vi.38 (˚ṃ pātetvā); Dhp-a i.184.

2. (uttāna2) clear, open DN ii.55; MN i.340 = Dhp-a i.173.

fr. uttāna

Uttānī

(˚-) open, manifest etc., in ˚kamma (uttāni˚) declaration, exposition, manifestation SN v.443 Pp 19; Vb 259, Vb 358; Ne 5, Ne 8, Ne 9, Ne 38˚karaṇa id Snp-a 445˚karoti to make clear or open, to declare show up, confess (a sin) Vin i.103; SN ii.25, SN ii.154; SN iii.132 SN iii.139; SN iv.166; SN v.261; AN i.286; AN iii.361 sq.

the compn. form of uttāna in cpds. with kṛ & bhū cp. BSk. uttānī-karoti Mvu iii.408; uttānī-kṛta Avs i.287; Avs ii.151

Uttāpeti

to heat, to cause pain, torment Ja vi.161.

Caus. of uttapati

Uttāra

crossing, passing over, ˚setu a bridge for crossing (a river) SN iv.174 = MN i.134 cp. uttara2.

fr. ud + tṛ; as in uttarati

Uttārita

pulled out, brought or moved out Ja i.194.

pp. of uttāreti

Uttāritatta

(nt.) the fact of having or being brought or moved out Ja i.195.

abstr. fr. uttārita

Uttāreti

to make come out, to move or pull out Ja i.194; Snp-a 349 ■ pp. uttārita (q.v.).

Caus. of uttarati

Uttāsa

terror, fear, fright DN iii.148; SN v.386; Mil 170; Pv-a 180.

Sk. uttrāsa, fr. ud + tras

Uttāsana

(nt.) impalement Ja ii.444; Snp-a 61 (sūle).

fr. uttāseti2

Uttāsavant

(adj.) showing fear or fright, fearful SN iii.16 sq.

uttāsa + vant

Uttāsita

impaled Pv iv.16 (= āvuta āropita Vv-a 220); Ja i.499; Ja iv.29.

pp. of uttāseti2

Uttāseti1

to frighten, terrify Ja i.230, Ja i.385; Ja ii.117.

Caus of uttasati, ud + tras, of which taṃs is uttāseti2 is a variant

Uttāseti2

to impale AN i.48; Ja i.230, Ja i.326; Ja ii.443; Ja iii.34 Ja iv.29 ■ pp. uttāsita (q.v.). Cp. uttāsana.

cp. Sk. uttaṃsayati in meaning to adorn with a wreath; ud + taṃs to shake, a variation of tars to shake tremble

Uttiṭṭha

“alms which one stands up for, or expects” left over, thrown out Vin i.44 (˚patta); Thag 1057 (˚piṇḍa); 2, 349 (˚piṇḍa = vivaṭadvāre ghare ghare patiṭṭhitvā labhanaka-piṇḍa Thag-a 242); Ja iv.380 (˚piṇḍa; C similarly as at Thag-a; not to the point); 386 (˚piṇḍa ucchiṭṭhaka piṇḍa C.); Mil 213, Mil 214.

= ucchiṭṭha? Cp. ucchepaka. By Pāli Cys. referred to uṭṭhahati.

Uttiṭṭhe

see uṭṭhahati.

Uttiṇa

(adj.) in uttiṇaṃ karoti to take the straw off, lit. to make off-straw; to deprive of the roof MN ii.53. Cp. next.

ud + tiṇa

Uttiṇṇa

drawn out, pulled out, nt. outlet, passage Ja ii.72 (paṇṇasālāya uttiṇṇāni karoti make entrances in the hut). Or should it be uttiṇa?

pp. of uttarati

Utrasta

frightened, terrified, alarmed Vin ii.184; SN i.53, SN i.54 (an˚); Snp 986; Mil 23; Dhp-a ii.6 (˚mānasa); Pv-a 243 (˚citta), 250 (˚sabhāva).

pp. of uttasati, also cp. uttasta

Utrāsa

terror Ja ii.8 (citt˚).

= uttāsa

Utrāsin

(adj.) terrified, frightened, fearful, anxious SN i.99, SN i.219 ■ Usually neg. an˚ in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin without fear, steadfast & not running away SN i.99; Thag 864; Nd ii.13; Ja iv.296; Ja v.4; Mil 339. See also apalāyin.

fr. *Sk. uttrāsa = P. uttāsa

Ud-

prefix in verbal & nominal comb;n. One half of all the words beginning with u˚ are combns. with ud˚, which in compn. appears modified according to the rules of assimilation as prevailing in Pāli ■ I. Original meaning “out in an upward direction”, out of, forth; like ummujjati to rise up out of (water), ujjalati to blaze up high; udeti to come out of & go up; ukkaṇṭha stretching one’s neck out high (cp. Ger. “empor”); uggilati to “swallow up” i.e. spit out ■ The opposites of ud-are represented by either ava or ; (see under II. & IV. & cp. ucc-âvaca uddhambhāgiya: orambhāgiya), ni (see below) or vi (as udaya: vi-aya or vaya) ■ II. Hence develop 2 clearly defined meanings, viz. (1) out, out of, away from-˚aṇha (“day-out”); ˚agga (“top-out”); ˚āgacchati; ˚ikkhati look out for, expect; ˚kantati tear out; ˚khitta thrown off; ˚khipati pick out; ˚gacchati come out; ˚gamaṇa rising (opp. o˚); ˚gajjati shout out; ˚gilati (opp. o˚); ˚ghoseti shout out; ˚cināti pick out; ˚chiṭṭha thrown out; ˚jagghati laugh at, cp. Ger. aus-lachen ˚tatta smelted out; ˚tāna stretched out; ˚dāleti tear out; ˚dhaṭa lifted out, drawn out; ˚disati point out to; ˚drīyati pull out; ˚pajjati to be produced; ˚patti & ˚pāda coming out, origin, birth ˚paṭipatiyā out of reach; ˚paḷāseti sound out; ˚phāsulika “ribs out”; etc. etc ■ (2) up (high) or high up, upwards on to (cp. ucca high, uttara higher)-: ˚kujja erect (opp. ava˚); ˚kūla sloping up (opp. vi˚); ˚khipati throw-up, ˚gaṇhāti take up; ˚chindati cut up; ˚javati go up-stream, ˚javana id. (opp. o˚); uñña pride; ˚thāna “standing up” ˚ṭhita got up; ˚tarati come out, go up (opp. o˚); ˚nata raised up, high (opp. o˚); ˚nama e-levation ˚nāmin raised (opp. ni˚); ˚patati fly up; etc. etc ■ III More specialised meanings (from elliptical or figurative use) are: (1) ud˚ = without, “ex-”, e.g. unnangala “outplough” = without a plough; uppabbajita an ex-bhikkhu. (2) ud˚ = off, i.e. out of the way, wrong, e.g. uppatha a wrong road, ummagga id ■ (3) ud˚ = out of the ordinary, i.e. exceedingly, e.g. ujjangala extremely dusty uppanduka very pale; uppoṭheti to beat hard ■ IV Dialectical variations & combinations ■ (1) Owing to semantic affinity we often find an interchange between; ud˚; and ava˚; (cp. E. break up = break down, grind up or down, tie up or down), according to different points of view. This wavering between the two prefixes was favoured by the fact that o always had shown an unstable tendency & had often been substituted for or replaced by ū, which in its place was reduced to u before a double consonant, thus doing away with the diff. between; ū & u; or o & u;. For comparison see the foll.: ukkamati & okk˚ uññā: avañña; uddiyati: odd˚; uḍḍeyya oḍḍ˚; uppīḷeti opīḷ˚; etc., & cp. abbhokirati → abbhukkirati ■ (2) the most freq. comb;ns. that ud˚ enters into are those with the intensifying prefixes abhi˚; and sam˚; ; see e.g. abhi ud (= abbhud˚) + gacchati, ˚jalati; ˚ṭhāti; ˚namati etc. sam + ud + eti; ˚kamati; ˚chindati; ˚tejeti; ˚pajjati etc.

Vedic ud-; Goth. ūt = Ohg. ūz = E. out, Oir. ud-; cp. Lat. ūsque “from-unto” & Gr.; υ ̔́στερος = Sk. uttara

Uda1

(indecl.) disjunctive part. “or” either singly, as at Snp 455, Snp 955, Snp 1090; Ja v.478 (v.l. udāhu); Nd i.445 (expld. as “padasandhi” with same formula as iti, q.v.); Pv ii.1216 (kāyena uda cetasā); or combd. with other synonymous particles, as uda vā at Snp 193, Snp 842, Snp 1075; Iti 82 = Iti 117 (caraṃ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṃ nisinno uda vā sayaṃ walking or standing, sitting or lying down); Kp-a 191 ■ See also udāhu.

Sk. uta & u, with Lat. aut (or), Gr.; α ̔ϋτι (again), αὐτάρ (but, or), Goth. auk = Ger. auch to pron base ava˚ yonder, cp. ava ii.

Uda2

(˚-) water, wave. In cpds. sometimes the older form udan˚ is preserved (like udañjala, udaññavant), but generally it has been substituted by the later uda˚ (see under udakaccha, udakanti, udakumbha, udapatta udapāna, udabindu).

Vedic udan (nt.), also later uda (but only ˚-), commonly udaka, q.v.

Udaka

(nt.) water Vin ii.120, Vin ii.213; DN ii.15 (˚assa dhārā gushes or showers of w.); Dhp 80 Dhp 145; Ja i.212; Pv i.57; Pp 31, Pp 32; Mil 318; Vv-a 20 (udake temanaṃ aggimhe tāpanaṃ); Dhp-a i.289; Dhp-a iii.176, Dhp-a iii.256; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 70 ■ Syn. ambu, ela, jala etc. The compn. form (-˚) is either ūdaka (āsanûdaka-dāyin Ja iv.435) or ˚odaka (pādodaka water for the feet Pv-a 78) odaka occurs also in abs. form (q.v.), cp. also oka Bdgh.’s kaṃ = udakaṃ, tena dāritan: kandaran ti is a false etymology; DN-a i.209.

-aṇṇava water-flood MN i.134. -āyatika a water-pipe Vin ii.123. -āḷhaka a certain measure of water, an āḷhaka of w. SN v.400; AN ii.55 = AN iii.337; Vv-a 155. -ūpama resembling water, like water AN iv.11 (puggala). -ogāhana plunging into water Ja iii.235. -ogha a water flood Vv-a 48. -orohaka descending into water, bathing; Name of a class of ascetics, lit. “bather” MN i.281; SN iv.312; AN v.263. -orohaṇa plunging into water, taking a bath, bathing DN i.167; SN i.182; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Ja iv.299; Pp 55 -kalaha the “water dispute” Dhp-a iii.256. -kāka a water crow Ja ii.441. -kicca libation of water, lit. water-performance; cleansing, washing DN ii.15. -kīḷā sporting in the w. Ja vi.420. -gahaṇasāṭaka bathing-gown Ja v.477 -ghaṭa a water pitcher Pv-a 66. -cāṭi a water jar Dhp-a i.52. -ṭṭhāna a stand for water Vin ii.120. -tumba a water vessel Ja ii.441; DN-a i.202; Dhp-a ii.193. -telaka an oily preparation mixed with water Vin ii.107. -dantapoṇa water for rinsing the mouth & tooth-cleaner Vin iii.51; Vin iv.90, Vin iv.92, Vin iv.233; Ja iv.69. -daha a lake (of water DN i.45. -doṇikā a water-tub or trough Vin ii.220. -dhārā a shower of water Pts i.125; Ja iv.351. -niddhamana a water spout or drain Vin ii.120, Vin ii.123; Dhp-a ii.37. -nibbāhana an aquaduct Mil 295. -paṭiggaha receiving or accepting water Vin ii.213. -patta a waterbowl Vin ii.107; DN i.80; SN iii.105. -puñchanī a towel Vin ii.122 -posita fed or nourished by water Vv-a 173. -phusita a drop of water SN ii.135. -bindu a drop of w. Iti 84 (v.l. for udabindu); Pv-a 99. -bubbula a w. bubble AN iv.137 Vism 109, Vism 479 (in comp.). -bhasta devoid of water Thag-a 212 (for anodaka Thig 265). -maṇika a water-pot Vin i.227; MN i.354; AN iii.27; Mil 28; Dhp-a i.79. -mallaka a cup for w. AN i.250. -rakkhasa a water-sprite Dhp-a iii.74 -rahada a lake (of w.) DN i.74, DN i.84; AN i.9; AN ii.105; AN iii.25; Snp 467; Pp 47. -rūha a water plant Vv 356. -lekhā writing on w. AN i.283 = Pp 32 (in simile ˚ûpama like writing on w.; cp. Pp A 215). -vāra “waterturn”, i.e. fetching water Dhp-a i.49. -vāraka bucket SN ii.118 -vāha a flow of water, flowing w. Ja vi.162. -vāhaka rise or swelling (lit. carrying or pulling along (of water) overflowing, flood AN i.178. -vāhana pulling up water Vin ii.122 (˚rajju). -sadda sound of water Dhs 621 -sarāvaka a saucer for w. Vin ii.120. -sāṭaka = sāṭikā Ja ii.13. -sāṭikā “water-cloak”, a bathing-mantle Vin i.292; Vin ii.272; Vin iv.279 (= yāya nivatthā nhāyati C.); Dhp-a ii.61 (T. ˚sāṭaka). -suddhika ablution with water (after passing urine) Vin iv.262 (= mutta-karaṇassa dhovanā C.).

Vedic udaka, uda + ka (see uda2), of Idg. *ṷed, *ud, fuller form *eṷed (as in Sk. odatī, odman flood odana gruel, q.v.); cp. Sk. unatti, undati to water, udra = Av. udra = Ags. otor = E. otter (“water-animal”) Gr. υ ̔́δωρ water (“hydro”), υ ̔́δρα hydra (“water-animal”) Lat. unda wave; Goth. watō = Ohg. wazzar = E. water Obulg. voda water, vydra otter

Udakaccha

watery soil, swamp Ja v.137.

uda + kaccha

Udakumbha

a water jug Ja i.20; Dhp 121, Dhp 122; Pv i.129.

uda + kumbha

Udagga

(adj.) topmost, high, lofty Thag 110; fig. elated, exalted, exultant joyful, happy DN i.110 (˚citta); Snp 689 (+ sumana), 1028 (id.); Pv iv.155 (attamana + ); iv.58 (haṭṭha + ); Mil 248; Dhp-a ii.42 (haṭṭha-pahaṭṭha udagg-udagga in high glee & jubilant); Vism 346 (id.); Sdhp 323. See also der. odagya.

ud + agga, lit. “out-top”, cp. Sk. udagra

Udaggatā

(f.) exaltation, jubilation, glee Sdhp 298.

abstr. fr. udagga

Udaggi˚

in udaggihuttaṃ the fire prepared (for sacrifice) Ja v.396 (uda-aggihuttaṃ C. wrongly), lit. “the sacrifice (being) out”

= ud + aggi + hutta, cp. Vedic agnihotra

Udaṅgaṇa

(nt.) an open place Ja i.109.

ud + angaṇa1; Kern unnecessarily changes it to uttankana “a place for digging for water” see Toev. p. 96

Udacchidā

3rd sg. praet. of ucchindati to break up Snp 2, Snp 3 (˚ā metri causa).

Udañcana

(nt.) a bucket for drawing water out of a well Dhp-a i.94.

fr. ud + añc, see añchati

Udañcanin

(adj.-n.) draining, pulling up water f. ˚ī a bucket or pail Ja i.417 (f. ˚ī).

ud + añcanin to añc see añchati

Udañjala

in ˚ṃ kīḷati a water-game: playing with drops of water (?) Vin iii.118 (Bdhgh. udañjalan ti udaka-cikkhallo vuccati p. 274)

udan + jala see uda2

Udaññavant

(adj.) rich in water, well-watered Ja v.405 (= udaka-sampanna C.).

udan = uda(ka) + vant

Udaṇha

day-break, dawn, sunrise Ja v.155.

ud + aṇha

Udatāri

3rd sg aor. of uttarati to cross over Snp 471 (oghaṃ).

Udatta

(adj.) elevated, high, lofty, clever Ne 7, Ne 118, Ne 123 (= uḷārapañña C.).

Sk. udātta

Udadhi

the sea, ocean SN i.67; Iti 86; Snp 720; Ja v.326; Ja vi.526; Thag-a 289; Vv-a 155 (“udakaṃ ettha dhīyatī ti udadhi”); Sdhp 322, Sdhp 577.

uda + dhi, lit. water-container

Udapatta1 [ụda

for ud, and patta, pp. of pat, for patita? Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as udak-prāpta, risen, flying up sprung up Ja iii.484 (= uppatita C.); v.71 (= uṭṭhita C.).

Udapatta2

a bowl of water, a water-jug, ewer MN i.100; SN v.121; AN iii.230 sq., 236 v.92, 94, 97 sq.

uda + patta; Sk. udapātra

Udapādi

3rd sg. aor. of uppajjati to arise, originate, become DN i.110, DN i.180, DN i.185; SN ii.273; Iti 52, Iti 99; Snp-a 346, Snp-a 462.

Udapāna

a well, a cistern Vin i.139; Vin ii.122; MN i.80; AN iv.171; Ja iii.216; Ud 78; Pv ii.78; ii.925; Mil 411; Vism 244 (in simile) DN-a i.298; Vv-a 40; Pv-a 78.

uda + pāna lit. “(place for) drinking water”; cp. opāna, which in the incorrect opinion of Pāli Commentators represents a contracted udapāna

Udappatta

see udapatta.

Udabindu

a drop of water MN i.78; Snp 812; Dhp 121, Dhp 122, Dhp 336; Iti 84 (v.l. udaka˚); Nd i.135; Snp-a 114; Dhp-a ii.51.

uda + bindu

Udabbhadhi

aor. 3rd sg. of ubbadhati to destroy, kill Snp 4 (= ucchindanto vadhati Snp-a 18).

ud + vadh

Udabbahe

3rd sg. Pot. of ubbahati to draw out, tear out, remove Thag 158; Snp 583 (= ubbaheyya dhāreyya (?) Snp-a 460); Ja ii.223 (udabbaheyya C.); vi.587 (= hareyya C.); aor. udabbahi Vin iv.5.

ud + bṛh1, see also abbahati

Udaya

rise, growth; increment, increase; income, revenue, interest AN ii.199; Pts i.34; Vv 847 (dhan’atthika uddayaṃ patthayāna = ānisaṃsaṃ atirekalābhaṃ Vv-a 336); 8452; Dhp-a ii.270; Pv-a 146 (ulār vipāka), 273 (˚bhūtāni pañca kahāpaṇa-satāni labhitvā with interest); Sdhp 40, Sdhp 230, Sdhp 258 ■ See also uddaya.

-attha rise and fall, birth & death (to attha;2) MN i.356; SN v.197 sq., 395; AN iii.152 sq.; AN iv.111, AN iv.289, AN iv.352; AN v.15 AN v.25. -atthika desirous of increase, interest or wealth (cp above Vv 847 dhan’atthika) AN ii.199. -bbaya (ud-aya vy-aya) increase & decrease, rise & fall, birth & death up & down DN iii.223; SN i.46 = SN i.52 (lokassa); iii.130; AN ii.90; iii. 32; iv.153; Iti 120; Vism 287; Pts i.54; Thag-a 90 -vyaya = ˚bbaya SN iv.140; AN ii.15 (khandhānaṃ); Dhp 113, Dhp 374 (khandhānaṃ, see Dhp-a iv.110). Udayam & Udayanto;

fr. ud + i, cp. udeti

Udayaṃ & Udayanto

ppr. of udeti (q.v.).

Udayana

(nt.) going up, rise DN-a i.95.

fr. ud + i

Udara

(nt.)

1 the belly, stomach DN ii.266; Snp 78, Snp 604, Snp 609, Snp 716; Ja i.146, Ja i.164, Ja i.265; Mil 213; Pv-a 283; Kp-a 57, Kp-a 58; Dhp-a i.47 (pregnant); Sdhp 102.

2. cavity, interior, inside Dāvs i.56 (mandir-odare) -ūnūdara with empty belly Thag 982; Mil 406, Mil 407 cp. ūna.

-aggi the fire of the belly or stomach (i.e. of digestion Kp-a 59; Snp-a 462; Pv-a 33; -āvadehakaṃ (adv.) bhunjati to eat to fill the stomach, eat to satiety, to be gluttonous MN i.102; AN v.18; Thag 935; Vism 33. -paṭala the mucous membrane of the stomach Vism 359 (= sarīr˚abbhantara 261); Snp-a 248; Kp-a 55, Kp-a 61. -pūra stomachfilling Vism 108. -vaṭṭi “belly-sack”, belly Vin iii.39 Vin iii.117; Vism 262 where Kp-a reads ud. paṭala). -vāta the wind of the belly, stomach-ache 9Ja i.33, Ja i.433; Vism 41 (˚ābādha); Dhp-a iv.129.

Vedic udara, Av udara belly, Gr. υ ̔́στερος = Lat. uterus belly, womb; Lith. védaras stomach, See also Walde, Lat. Wtb. under vensica

Udariya

(nt.) the stomach Kp iii. (cp. Kp-a 57); Vism 258, Vism 358. Cp sodariya.

fr. udara

Udassaye

2nd sg. pot. of ud + assayati Ja v.26 (meaning to instal, raise?), expld. by C. as ussayāpesi (?) Reading may be faulty for udāsase (?).

ā + śri, cp. assaya

Udahāraka

a water-carrier Ja ii.80.

uda + hāraka

Udahāriya

(adj.) going for water Vv 509.

fr. udahāra fetching of water, uda + hṛ;

Udāgacchati

to come to completion DN-a i.288. Cp sam.

ud + ā + gacchati

Udāna

(nt.)

1. “breathing out”, exulting cry, i e. an utterance, mostly in metrical form, inspired by a particularly intense emotion, whether it be joyful or sorrowful (cp. K. S. p. 29 n. 2) DN i.50 DN i.92; SN i.20, SN i.27, SN i.82, SN i.160; AN i.67; Ja i.76; Pp 43, Pp 62 Ne 174; Pv-a 67; Sdhp 514 ■ The utterance of such an inspired thought is usually introduced with the standing phrase “imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi” i.e. breathed forth this solemn utterance [Cp. BSk. udānaṃ udānayati Divy 99 etc.], e.g. at Vin i.2 sq., 12, 230, 353; DN i.47; DN ii.107 (udāna of triumph); SN iii.55; Mvu xix.29; DN-a i.140; Ud. 1 passim; Snp-a 354 (“the familiar quotation about the sakyas”). Occasionally (later) we find other phrases, as e.g. udānaṃ pavatti Ja i.61; abhāsi Vin iv.54; kathesi Ja vi.38.

2. one of the angas or categories of the Buddhist Scriptures: see under nava & aṅga; ■ Cp. vodāna.

fr. ud + an to breathe

Udānita

uttered, breathed forth, said Dhp-a iv.55.

pp. of udāneti

Udāneti

to breathe out or forth, usually in phrase udānaṃ udānesi: see under udāna1. Absolutely only at Ja iii.218.

denom. f. udāna, cp. BSk. udānayati

Udāpatvā

at Ja v.255 is uncertain reading (v.l. udapatvā, C. explns. reading udapatvā by uppatitvā = flying up) perhaps we should read udapatta flew up, pret. of ud pat = Sk. *udapaptat (so Kern, Toev. s. v.).

Udāyati

at DN-a i.266 (udāyissati fut.) is hardly correct; DN i.96 has here udrīyissati (q.v.), which belongs to darati to break, tear etc., udāyati could only belong to dāyāti meaning to cut, mow, reap. but not to split etc. DN-a i.266 explns. udāyissati with bhijjhissati. The difficulty is removed by reading udrīyissati. To v.l. undriyati cp. ˚undriya for ˚uddaya (dukkh˚ for dukkhudraya see udraya). We find udāyati once more at Vism 156 in expln. of ekodi where it is evidently meant for udeti (Caus. = uṭṭhapeti).

Udāra

(adj.) raised, sublime noble, excellent Dāvs iii.4 (samussit-odāra-sitātapattaṃ) DN-a i.50 (˚issariya); Sdhp 429, Sdhp 591.

Sk. udāra, of which the usual P. form is ulāra (q.v.). Cp. BSk. audāra & audārika.

Udāvatta

retired, desisting Ja v.158 (= udāvattitva nivattitva C).

pp. of udāvattate, ud + ā vattati

Udāsīna

(adj.) indifferent, passive, neutral Dhs-a 129.

ud + āsīna, pp. of ās to sit; lit. sit apart, be indifferent

Udāhaṭa

uttered, spoken; called, quoted Pp 41.

pp of udāharati

Udāharaṇa

(nt.) example, instance Ja iii.401 (˚ṃ āharitvā dassento), 510; Mil 345; Snp-a 445; Vv-a 297.

fr. udāharati

Udāharati

to utter, recite. speak. Snp 389; Ja iii.289; DN-a i.140 (see udāhāra) ■ pp udāhaṭa (q.v.) Cp. pariy˚.

ud + ā + hṛ;

Udāhāra

utterance, speech DN-a i.140 (˚ṃ udāhari = udānaṃ udānesi); Pp A 223,

fr. udāharati

Udāhu

(indecl.) disjunctive-adversative particle “or”, in direct questions DN i.157; DN ii.8; Snp 599, Snp 875, Snp 885; Ja i.20, Ja i.83; Vv-a 258 (= ādu); Pv-a 33, Pv-a 51; Mil 10 ■ The first part of the question is often introduced with kiṃ, while udāhu follows in the second (disjunctive) part, e.g. kin nakkhattaṃ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiṃ karissasi Vv-a 63; kiṃ amhehi saddhiṃ āgamissasi udāhu pacchā will you come with us or later? Dhp-a ii.96: See under kiṃ ■ Often combd with other expletive particles, e.g. udāhu ve Snp 1075, Snp 1077; udāhu no Snp 347; eva… no udāhu (so… or not) DN i.152; (ayaṃ) nu kho-udāhu (ayaṃ) is it (this)-(this) Vism 313.

uta + āho, cp. P. uda & aho and Sk. utāro

Udi

(or udī ) is artificial adj. formn. fr. udeti, meaning “rising, excelling”, in expln. of ekodi at Vism 156 (udayatī ti udi uṭṭhapetī ti attho).

Udikkhati

1. to look at, to survey. to perceive Vin i.25 (udiccare, 3sd. pl. pres. med.) Ja v.71, Ja v.296; Vv 8121 (aor. udikkhisaṃ = ullokesiṃ Vv-a 316); Dāvs ii.109; Sdhp 308.

2. to look out for, to expect Ja i.344; Vv-a 118.

3. to envy Mil 338.

ud + īkṣ, Sk. udīkṣate

Udikkhitar

one who looks for or after DN iii.167.

n. ag. of udikkhati

Udicca

(adj.) “rising”, used in a geographical sense of the N. W. country, i.e. north-westerly, of north-western origin (cp. Brethren 79, Mil trsln. ii.45 n. 1) Ja i.140, Ja i.324 Ja i.343, Ja i.373; Mil 236 ■ See also uddiya.

apparently an adjectivised ger. of udeti but distorted from & in meaning = Sk. udañc, f. udīcī northern the north

Udiccare

3sd. pl. pres. med. of udikkhati (q.v.).

Udita1

risen, high, elevated Mil 222; (˚odita); Dāvs iv.42; Sdhp 14 (of the sun 442 (˚odita).

pp. of ud- i, see udeti

Udita2

spoken, proclaimed, uttered Vuttodaya 2 (quoted by Childers in Khuddaka-pātha ed 1869, p. 22).

pp. of vad, see vadati

Udīraṇa

(nt.) utterance, saying Ja v.237; Dhs 637, Dhs 720; Mil 145.

fr. udīreti

Udīrita

uttered Ja iii.339; Ja v.394 = Ja v.407.

pp. of udīreti

Udīreti

1. to set in motion, stir up, cause Ja iii.441 (dukkhaṃ udīraye Pot. udīreyya C.); v.395 (kalahaṃ to begin a quarrel).

2. to utter, proclaim, speak, say SN i.190; Snp 632 (pot. ˚raye bhāseyya Snp-a 468); Dhp 408 (giraṃ udīraye = bhāseyya Dhp-a iv.182); Ja v.78 (vākyaṃ); Pass. udīyati (uddiyyati = Sk. udīryate) Thag 1232 (nigghoso).

ud + īreti, cp. in meaning īrita

Udu

(adj.) straight, upright, in ˚mano straight-minded DN iii.167, DN iii.168 (= uju˚ in v.l. and expln. by C.).

= *ṛtu? cp. utu & uju

Udukkhala

(m. & nt.) a mortar Vin i.202 (+ musala pestle); Ja i.502; Ja ii.428; Ja v.49; Ja ii.161, Ja ii.335; Ud 69 (m; + musaḷa); Dhp-a ii.131 (˚sala); Vism 354 (in comp.). The relation between udukkhala and musala is seen best from the description of eating at Vism 344 and DN-a i.200, where the lower teeth play the role of ud. the upper teeth act as m., while the tongue takes the part of a hand. On this passage & other connections as well as etym. see Morris; J.P.T.S. 1893, 37.

Sk. ulukhala

Udukkhalikā

(f.) part of a door (threshold?) Vin ii.148 (+ uttara-pasaka lintel of a door).

fr. udukkhala

Udumbara

the glomerous fig tree, Ficus Glomerata DN ii.4; Vin iv.35; AN iv.283 (˚khādika), 283 (id.), 324 (id.); Snp 5; Dhp-a i.284; Snp-a 19; Kp-a 46, Kp-a 56; Vv-a 213. Cp. odumbara.

Sk. udumbara

Udeti

(ud + eti of i to go] to go out or up, to rise (of the sun), to come out, to increase Asl. 169; Vism 156 (eko udetī ti ekodi); Ja ii.33; Ja iii.324; ppr. udayaṃ Iti 85 (ādicco), & udayanto Pv-a 154 (udayante suriye = sole surgente) ■ pp.; udita (see udita1). Cp. udicca & udi.;

Udda1

an aquatic animal, the otter (?) Childers s. v. doubts the identity of this creature with the regular otter, since it lives in the jungle. Is it a beaver-Vin i.186 (˚camma otter-skin, used for sandals); Cp i.102 (˚pota); Ja iii.51 sq., 335. The names of two otters at Ja iii.333 are Gambhīra-cārin and Anutīra-cārin.

Vedic udra, to uda2 water, lit. living in water; Cp. Gr. υ ̔́δρος “hydra”; Ohg. ottar = Ags. otor = E. otter Lith. ûdra = Obulg. vydra otter

Udda2

water, in passage amakkhito uddena, amakkhito semhena, a. ruhirena i.e. not stained by any kind of (dirty) fluid DN ii.14; MN iii.122.

for uda2?

Uddaṇḍa

a kind of building (or hut), in which the sticks stand out (?) Nd i.226 = Nd ii.976 (uṭanda = Vism 25 (v.l. BB uṭṭanda).

ud + daṇḍa

Uddaya1

gain, advantage, profit Vv 847 (see udaya); Ja v.39 (satt˚-mahāpaduma of profit to beings?).

a (metric?) variant of udaya

Uddaya2

in compounds dukkh˚; and sukh˚. see udraya.

Uddalomī

[ = udda + lomin beaver-hair-y ] a woollen coverlet with a fringe at each end DN i.7 (= ubhato dasaṃ uṇṇā-may’ attharaṇaṃ; keci ubhato uggata-pupphaṃ ti vadanti DN-a i.87); AN i.181. See however uddha-lomin under uddhaṃ.

Uddasseti

to show, reveal, point out, order, inform, instruct DN ii.321 sq.; MN i.480 (read uddassessāmi for conjectured reading uddisissāmi?) ii.60 (v.l. uddiset˚) AN iv.66.

ud + dasseti, Caus. of dassati1

Uddāna

(nt.) a group of Suttas, used throughout the Vinaya Piṭaka with ref. to each Khandhaka, in the Saṃyutta, the Anguttara and other books (cp. Mil 407) for each group of about ten Suttas (cp. Dhs-a 27). The Uddāna gives in a sort of doggerel verse, at the end of each group the titles of the Suttas in the group. It may then be roughly rendered “summary”. If all the Uddānas were collected together, they would form a table of contents to the whole work ■ Otherwise the word has only been found used of fishes “macchuddāna” (so Ja ii.425; Dhp-a ii.132). It then means a group of fish placed apart for for sale in one lot. Perhaps a set or a batch would meet the case.

fr. ud + , dayati to bind: see under dāma

Uddāpa

foundation of a wall, in stock phrase daḷh˚; etc. DN iii.101; SN v.194 = also at Ja vi.276 (= pākāra-vatthu C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. refers it to Sk. ud-vapati to dig out, and translates “moat, ditch”. The meaning “wall” or “mound” however harmonises quite well with the der. fr. “digging”, cp. E. dike → Ger. Teich. See also uddāma 2.

*udvāpa

Uddāpavant

(adj.) having a wall or embankment SN ii.106 (v.l. uddhā˚); C. expls. as apato uggatattā Ja iv.536 (so read with v.l. for T. uddhā pavatta; C expls. as tīra-mariyādā-bandhana).

fr. uddāpa

Uddāma

1. (adj.) “out of bounds”, unrestrained, restless Dāvs v.56 (˚sāgara).

2. (n.) wall, enclosure (either as “binding in” protecting or as equivalent of uddāpa fr. ud + vam “to throw up” in sense of to throw up earth, to dig a mound = udvapati) in phrase aṭṭāla-uddāma-parikhâdīni watchtowers enceintes, moats etc. Dhp-a iii.488.

fr. ud + as in uddāna, see dāma

Uddāraka

some wild animal Ja v.416 (reading uncertain, expln. ditto).

?

Uddāla

= uddālaka, only as Np. Ja iv.298 sq.

Uddālaka

the Uddāla tree, Cassia Fistula (also known as indīvara), or Cordia Myxa lit. “uprooter” Vv 67 (= vātaghātako yo rājarukkho ti pi vuccati Vv-a 43); Ja iv.301 (˚rukkha), 440; v.199 (vātaghātaka C.), 405; vi.530 (so read for uddh˚); Vv-a 197 (˚puppha = indīvara); Pv-a 169.

fr. ud + dal, see dalati

Uddālanaka

(adj.) referring to destruction or vandalism, tearing out Vin iv.169.

fr. uddālana → ud + dāleti

Uddāleti

to tear out or off Vin iv.170; SN iv.178.

ud + dāleti, Caus. of dal, see dalati

Uddiṭṭha

1. pointed out, appointed, set out, put forth, proposed, put down, codified MN i.480 (pañha); Snp p.91 (id. = uddesa-matten’ eva vutta, na vibhangena Snp-a 422); Snp-a 372.

2. appointed, dedicated Ja v.393 (an ˚ṃ pupphaṃ = asukassa nāma dassāmī ti); Pv-a 50; Kp-a 138.

pp. of uddisati

Uddiya

(adj.) northern, northwestern (i.e. Nepalese) Ja iv.352 (˚kambala) in expln. of uddiyāna [Sk udīcīna?]. See udicca & cp. Morris in; J.P.T.S. 1889 202, and last not least Lüders in K. Z. 1920 (vol. 49) 233 sq. The word is not sufficiently cleared up yet.

Sk. udīcya?

Uddisati

to propose, point out, appoint, allot Dhp 353, cp. Dhp-a iv.72; Mil 94 (satihāraṃ) fut. uddisissati MN i.480 (ex conj., is probably to be changed to uddassessati, q.v.).

2. to specify Pv-a 22 (aor. uddisi), 25 (= nīyādeti, dadāti), 27 ■ Pass. uddissati to show oneself, to be seen Pv iii.212, and uddissiyati Pv-a 46 ■ pp. uddiṭṭha (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. uddisāpeti (q.v.) ■ ger. uddissa (q.v.)

ud + disati

Uddisāpeti

1. to make recite Vin i.47 = Vin ii.224; Vin iv.290.

2. to dedicate Pv-a 35 (v.l. ādisati ).

Caus. II. of uddisati

Uddissa

(indecl.)

1. indicating, with signs or indications Ja iii.354 = Mil 230.

2. prep w. acc.: (a) (lit.) pointing to, tending towards, towards to Pv-a 250 Suraṭṭha-visayaṃ) ■ (b) (appld.) with reference to, on account of, for, concerning Pv-a 8 (pete), 17 (= ārabbha), 49 (ratanattayaṃ), 70 (maṃ), 146.

-kata allotted to, specified as, meant for (cp. odissa & odissaka) Vin i.237 (maṃsa); ii.163; DN i.166 = AN i.295 = Pp 55 (viz. bhikkhā); MN i.77; Kp-a 222; Ja ii.262, Ja ii.263 (bhatta).

orig. ger. of uddisati

Uddissana

(nt.) dedication Pv-a 27, Pv-a 80.

fr. uddissa

Uddīpanā

(f.) explanation, reasoning, argument Vism 27 (for ukkācanā). Uddiyati, Uddiyana

fr. ud + dīpeti

Uddīyati, Uddīyana

ete. see udrī˚.

Uddeka

vomit, spouting out, eruption Vism 261 (where id. p. at Kp-a 61 reads uggāra) ˚ṃ dadāti to vomit Vin i.277.

Sk. udreka, ud + ric

Uddekanika

(adj.) spouting, ejecting MN ii.39 (maṇika; perhaps better to be read with v.l. as udañjanika = udañcanika fit for drawing up water).

uddeka + ana + ika

Uddesa

1. pointing out, setting forth, proposition, exposition, indication, programme MN iii.223 (u. uddiṭṭha), 239; SN iv.299; Snp-a 422.

2. explanation SN v.110 sq.; sa-uddesa (adj.) with (the necessary) expln. point by point, in detail, DN i.13, DN i.81; DN iii.111; AN iii.418; Iti 99; Nd ii.6171.

3. samaṇuddesa one marked as a Samaṇa, a novice (cp. sāmaṇera) DN i.151; MN iii.128; AN iv.343; uddesa-bhatta special or specified food Vin i.58 = Vin i.96, cp. ii.175, propounding, recitation, repetition Vin i.50 = Vin ii.228 (uddesena paripucchāya ovādena by recitation questioning & advice); ii.219 (˚ṃ dadāti to hold a recitation + paripucchaṃ d); AN iv.114 (+ paripucchā) v.50 sq. (pañho, u. veyyākaraṇaṃ); Nd ii.3852 (+ paripucchā); Ja i.116; Mil 257 (+ paripucchā). ek’uddesa a single repetition Vin iii.47; AN iii.67, AN iii.180; Mil 10, Mil 18.

fr. uddisati

Uddesaka

(adj.) assigning, defining, determining, in bhatt˚ one who sorts out the food Vv-a 92.

fr. uddesa

Uddesika

(adj. nt.)

1. indicating, referring to, respecting, defining; (nt.) indication, definition DN ii.100 (mam ˚bhikkhusangho); Mil 159 (id.); Kp-a 29. Esp. as-˚ in phrase aṭṭha-vass’ uddesika-kāla the time referring to (or indicating) the 8th year, i.e. at the age of 8; Pv-a 67; soḷasa-vass˚; MN i.88; Ja i.456; Vv-a 259 In the same application padesika (q.v.).

2. memorial Ja iv.228 (cetiya).

fr. uddesa

Uddehaka

(adj.) “bubbling up”, only adv. ˚ṃ in cpd. pheṇ˚; (paccamāna) boiling) under production of scum (foam) MN iii.167; AN i.141; Ja iii.46; Mil 357.

fr. ud + dih, see deha

Uddosita

shed, stable (?) Vin i.140; Vin ii.278; Vin iii.200; Vin iv.223.

Derivation uncertain. Cp. Müller P. Gr. 42

Uddha

(adj.) in phrase uddhehi vatthehi in rich, lofty clothes Ja iv.154 (of a devatā passage may be corrupt).

possibly a combn. of aḍḍha2 & uddhaṃ; or should we read aḍḍh˚ or vuḍḍh˚?

Uddhaṃ

(& Uddha˚) (indecl.) DN iii.237; SN v.69, SN v.201, SN v.205, SN v.237 SN v.285, SN v.314, SN v.378; AN i.233; AN ii.134; AN iv.14 sq., 73 sq., 146 380; v.120; Dhp 218; Th ii.12; Pp 17; Ne 190; Dhp-a iii.289; lit. up-stream at Ja iii.371.

nt. of adj. *uddha = Sk. ūrdhva high; to Idg. *ared (h) as in Lat. arduus steep or *ured as in Sk. vardhate to raise, Gr. ὀρχός straight high up, on top, above (adv. & prep.) ■ On uddhaṃ in spatial, temporal, ethical & psychological application see in detail Nd;2 155 ■ I. (adv.).-A. (of space) up aloft, on top, above (opp. adho) Vin iii.121; Kp-a 248 (= upari) ■ In contrast with adho (above → below DN i.23, DN i.153, DN i.251; Vism 176 (u. adho tiriyaṃ expld.) DN-a i.98 (see also adho) ■ Esp. with ref. to the points of the compass as “in zenith” (opp. adho “in nadir”) e.g. at DN i.222 (“straight up”); Iti 120; Ja i.20. B. (of time) in future, ahead, hence Snp 894; Nd i.303 (u vuccati anāgataṃ) ■ II. (prep. with abl. & instr.).; A. (of space) in phrase uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā (above the soles & below the scalp) DN ii.293, DN ii.294; DN iii.104; AN iii.323; AN v.109 ■ B. (of time after, hence Pv i.1012 (u. catūhi māsehi after 4 months catunnaṃ māsānaṃ upari Pv-a 52); Pv-a 147 (sattahi vassa satehi u., meaning here 700 years ago, cp. ito in similar application, meaning both past & future), 148 (sattāhato u. after a week; uttari v.l. BB.) ■ In cpds uddha˚ & uddhaṃ˚ (see below). The reading udhogalaṃ at Pv-a 104 is to corrected to adho˚ ■ III.; Note (cp Trenckner, Notes 60). In certain cases we find ubbhaṃ for uddhaṃ. Notice the foll.: ubbhaṃ yojanaṃ uggato Ja v.269; ubbhaṭṭhako hoti “standing erect” DN i.167; MN i.78; ubbhamukhu “mouth (face) upwards”, turned upwards SN iii.238; Mil 122. (1) uddha˚; in: -gāmin going upwards SN v.370 sq cchiddaka (-vātapānā) (windows) having openings above Dhp-a i.211. -pāda heels upwards either with adhosira (head down) AN iv.133, or avansira Vv 5225 (v.l.); Ja i.233. -mukha turned upwards, adv. ˚ā upwards or backwards (of a river) Mil 295 (Gangā u. sandati; in same context ubbha˚ Mil 122). -lomin “having hair on the upper side”, a kind of couch or bed (or rug on a couch Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169. So is prob. to be read for uddalomī (q.v.). -virecana action of an emetic (lit. throwing up) (opp. adho-virecana of a purgative) DN i.12 (= uddhaṃ dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ DN-a i.98); Dhp-a iii.126; Snp-a 86 -suddha clean on top Vin ii.152 ■ (2) uddhaṃ˚; in -āghātanika an after-deather, a teacher who maintains that the soul exists after death DN i.31, cp. DN-a i.119 -pāda feet up (& head down) Vv 52;25 (v.l. uddha˚) -bhāgiya belonging to the upper part (opp. oram˚): see saṃyojana. -virecana v.l. BB. at Snp-a 86 for uddha˚ -sara(ṃ) (adv.) with raised or lofty voice, lit. “sounding high” Snp 901, see Nd i.315. -sota (adj.) one who is going upwards in the stream of life [cp. BSk. ūrdhvasrotaḥ Mahāvy § 46

Uddhaṃsati

to fly out or up (of dust) Vv 784 na tatth’ uddhaṃsati rajo; expld. by uggacchati Vv-a 304 ■ pp uddhasta (q.v.).

ud + dhaṃsati, in lit. meaning of dhvaṃs, see dhaṃsati

Uddhagga

(adj.)

1. standing on end (lit. with raised point). bristling, of the hair of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.18 = DN iii.144, DN iii.154.

2. prominent, conspicuous Ja iv.345 (˚rājin having prominent stripes, of a lion). 3. pointing upwards (of the lower teeth, opp. adhagga point-downwards) Ja v.156 (= heṭṭhima-danta C.). 4. lofty, beneficial (of gifts) AN ii.68 (dakkhiṇā); iii.46 (id.) see also uddhaggika.

uddha + agga

Uddhaggika

(adj.) [cp. uddhagga) aiming at or resulting in a lofty end, promoting spiritual welfare, beneficial (of gifts) DN i.51 = DN iii.66; SN i.90; AN iii.259; DN-a i.158.

Uddhacca

(nt.) over-balancing, agitation, excitement distraction, flurry (see on meaning; Dialogues i.82; Dhs trsln. 119; Cpd. 18, 45, 83). AN i.256, AN i.282; AN iii.375, AN iii.421 AN iii.449; AN iv.87; AN v.142, AN v.145, AN v.148; DN iii.234; SN v.277 sq. DhSA 260; Snp-a 492 (in sense of “haughtiness”? for Snp 702 uṇṇata); Nd i.220, Nd i.501; Pts i.81, Pts i.83; Pts ii.9, Pts ii.97 sq. 119, 142, 145, 169, 176; Pp 18, Pp 59; Dhs 427, Dhs 429 (cittassa), 1159, 1229, 1426, 1482; Vb 168, Vb 369, Vb 372 Vb 377; Vism 137, Vism 469 (= uddhata-bhāva); Sdhp 459. Together with kukkucca “flurry or worry” u. is enumd. as the 4th of the 5th nīvaraṇa’s and as the 9th of the 10 saṃyojana’s (q.v.), e.g. at DN i.71, DN i.246; DN iii.49, DN iii.234, DN iii.269 DN iii.278; SN i.99; AN i.3; AN iii.16; AN v.30; Nd ii.379; Dhs 1486.

substantivised ger. of ud-dharati, ud + dhṛ; cp. uddhaṭa & uddhata. The BSk. auddhatya shows a strange distortion. BSk. uddhava seems to be also a substitute for uddhacca

Uddhaja

(adj.) upright, honest MN i.386 (v.l. for pannadhaja).

uddhaṃ + ja

Uddhaṭa

1. pulled out Ja ii.26.

2. pulled out destroyed, extirpated, in phrase˚ dāṭha with its fangs removed (of a snake) Ja i.505; Ja ii.259; Ja vi.6.

3. cut off or out Mil 231 (uddhaṭ-uddhaṭe ālope whenever a piece is cut off).

4. drawn out, lifted out, raised Ja i.143 sass˚kāle at the time of lifting the corn; v.49 (˚paṃsu) Cp. uddhaṭa -bīja castrated Ja ii.237.

pp. of uddharati2; see also uddhata, uddhita & uddhacca

Uddhata

.

1. lifted up, raised risen, high (of the sun, only in this special phrase u aruṇo) Vin ii.236; Ud 27 (vv.ll. uggata & uddhasta).; 2. unbalanced, disturbed, agitated, shaken SN i.61 (+ unnaḷa “muddled in mind & puffed up” trsl.), 204 (id. v.112 (līnaṃ cittaṃ uddhataṃ c.), 114 = Vism 133, Vism 269; AN ii.23; AN iii.391; AN v.93 sq., 142, 163; Iti 72; Thig 77 (so read with v.l., T. has uddhaṭa; Thag-a 80 explns. as nān’ ārammaṇe vikkhitta-citta asamāhita); Nd ii.433 (+ avūpasanta-citto); Pp 35 (= uddhaccena samannāgata Pp A 217). -an˚; well balanced, not shaken, calm, subdued MN i.470; AN ii.211; AN v.93 sq., 104; Snp 850 (= uddhaccavirahita Snp-a 549); Dhp 363 (= nibbutacitto Dhp-a iv.93) Ja v.203; Vv 648 ■ See also ubbhata.

pp. of uddharati1; as to its relation to uddhaṭa see remarks under uddhacca

Uddhana

(nt.) an oven Ja i.33, Ja i.68, Ja i.71, Ja i.346; Ja ii.133, Ja ii.277; Ja iii.178, Ja iii.425 Ja v.385, Ja v.471; Ja ii.218 (kammār˚), 574; Snp p.105; Mil 118 Mil 259; Vism 171, Vism 254; Dhp-a i.52, Dhp-a i.224; Dhp-a ii.3; Dhp-a iii.219 (˚panti); iv.176.

*ud-dhvana, fr. ud + dhvan instead of dhmā, for uddhamana (*uddhmāna Sk.), see dhamati

Uddhamma

false doctrine Dpvs v.19.

ud + dhamma

Uddharaṇa

(nt.)

1. taking up, lifting, raising Mil 307 (sass˚-samaya the time of gathering the corn; to uddharati 1. but cp. in same meaning uddhaṭa from uddharati 2). DN-a i.192.

2. pulling or drawing out (cp. uddharati 2) Vin iii.29. See also ubbahati2.

abstr. fr. uddharati

Uddharati

1. (in this meaning confused with ubbharati from bṛh, cp. interchange of ddh & bbh in uddha: ubbha, possibly also with; bṛh see abbahati and cp. ubbahati1). (a) to raise, rise, lift up hence: to raise too much, overbalance, shake etc.: see pp uddhata (*udbhṛta) & cp. uddhacca & uddharaṇa ■ (b) to take up, lift, to remove, take away DN i.135 (baliṃ uddhareyya raise a tax); MN i.306 (hiyaṃ); Ja i.193 (aor. poet. udaddhari = uddharitvā kaḍḍhitvā pavaṭṭesi C.); Vv-a 157 ■ Caus uddharāpeti Vin ii.180, Vin ii.181; Ja vi.95.

2. to pull out draw out (syn. with abbahati, q.v. for comparison) DN i.77 (ahiṃ karaṇḍā uddhareyya, further on ahi k. ubbhato Pv-a 115 (= abbahati); imper. uddharatha Ja ii.95 (for abbaha); Dhp 327 (attānaṃ duggā); aor. uddhari Ja iii.190 (ankena); cond. uddhare Thag 756; ger. uddharitvā DN i.234 Nd i.419; Snp-a 567; Dhp-a iv.26; Pv-a 139, & (poet.) uddhatvā Ja iv.406 (cakkhūni, so read for T. laddhatvañ cakkhūni akkhīni uddharitvā C.) ■ pp. uddhaṭa & ubbhata;.

ud + dharate of dhṛ;

Uddharin

īn an˚; Snp 952 see under niṭṭhurin.

Uddhasetā

see uddhasta.

Uddhasta

attacked, perhaps “spoilt” (smothered!) in combn. with pariyonaddha (covered) at AN i.202 (T. uddhaseta expld. by upari dhaṃsita C.); ii.211 (vv.ll. uddhasotā for ˚etā & uddhaṃso) ■ Registered with; an˚; as anuddhasta in Index vol. to A, should however be read as anuddhasta (q.v.). Cp. also viddhasta.

pp. of uddhaṃseti, see dhaṃsati & cp. anuddhaṃ seti

Uddhāra

(& ubbhāra in Vin.; e.g. ii.255, cp. 256 where ubbhata unterchanges with uddhāra) 1. taking away, withdrawal, suspension, in kaṭhin˚; (q.v. Vin i.255 sq.; Vin iii.262; Vin iv.287; Vin v.177 sq.

2. a tax levy, debt, in phrase ˚ṃ sodheti (so read for sādheti loc cit.) to clear up a debt Ja ii.341; Ja iii.106; Ja iv.45, Ja iv.247 uddhāra-sodhana (v.l. sādh˚) the clearance of a debt Ja ii.341.

3. synopsis or abstract Dpvs v.37 (atth˚ of the meaning of the Vin.); Snp-a 237 (atth˚ + pad˚).

fr. uddharati1

Uddhālaka

at Ja vi.530 is to be read uddālaka.

Uddhita

pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, removed Ja vi.237 (˚pphala = uddhaṭa-bīja C.).

a by-form of uddhaṭa

Uddhunāti

to shake Vv-a 279.

ud + dhunāti

Uddhumāta

(adj.) swollen, bloated, risen (of flour) AN i.140; Snp 200 (of a corpse); Snp-a 100 sq., 171; DN-a i.114. Cp. next.

pp. of uddhumāyati

Uddhumātaka

(adj.) swollen, bloated, puffed up MN i.88 (of a corpse; + vinīlaka); Vism 178, Vism 193 (id.) Ja i.164 (udaraṃ ˚ṃ katvā), 420 (˚nimitta appearance of being blown up); Mil 332; Dhp-a i.307. See also subha & asubha.;

-saññā the idea of a bloated corpse AN ii.17; Dhs 263; Mil 331; cp. Dhs trsln. 69.

prec. + ka

Uddhumātatta

(nt.) swollen condition Vism 178.

abstr. fr. uddhumāta

Uddhumāyati

to be blown up, to swell up, rise; aor. ˚āyi Ja iii.26; Vv-a 76; ger. ˚ājitvā Ja ii.18; Dhp-a i.126 ■ pp uddhumāta & ˚āyita; (q.v.).

ud + dhmā, see dhamati & remarks on uddhacca

Uddhumāyana

(nt.) puffing, blowing or swelling up Ja iv.37.

fr. uddhumāyati

Uddhumāyika

(adj.) like blowing or swelling up, of blown-up appearance MN i.142 sq.

cp. uddhumāyita

Uddhumāyita

swollen, bloated, puffed up Vv-a 218.

pp. of uddhumāyati

Udrabhati

to eat MN i.306 (upacikā bījaṃ na udrabheyyuṃ; vv.ll. on p. 555: udrah˚ udah˚, udāh˚, uddhah˚, uṭṭhah˚; udraheyyun ti khādeyyuṃ C. (udrabhāsane, Dhātum.)) ■ Note. The Dhātupāṭha 212, and the Dhātu-mañjūsā, 311, explain udrabha by adane, eating.

? doubtful in form & etym.

Udraya

(& Uddaya) (-˚) [perhaps a bastard form of uddaya = udaya yielding etc. The BSk. usually renders P. dd by dr. If so, then equal to adaya & uddaya;1 coming forth, result, consequence. Usually in foll. two phrases: dukkh˚; (yielding pain) & sukh˚; (giving pleasure) e.g. as dukkh˚; at MN i.415; Ja iv.398; Ja v.119 (v.l. ˚indriya); Pv i.1110 (so read for T. ˚andriya, cp. undriyati as v.l. for udāyati); Pts ii.79 (kammaṃ); as sukh˚; at Ja v.389 (v.l. ˚indriya); Dhp-a ii.47 (˚uddaya). Both dukkh & sukh˚ at Ps; i.80. Besides these in foll. combns.: kaṭuk causing bitterness Ja v.241; sa˚ with (good or evil) consequences SN ii.29; MN i.271.

Udrīyati

(& Uddīyati) to burst, split open, break, fall to pieces Vin i.148 (vihāro udriyati); ii.174 (id); iv.254 (i); DN i.96 (˚īyissati bhijjhissati DN-a i.96, so read for udāyati); SN i.113, SN i.119. Udriyana & Uddiyana;

cp. Sk. ud dīryate, Pass of ud + dṛ; dṛṇōti, and P. darati & dalati; see also avadīyati which may be a Sanskritised oddīyati for uddīyati

Udrīyana & Uddīyana

(nt.) breaking or splitting open, bursting Ja i.72; Dhp-a ii.7 (˚sadda), 100 (paṭhavī-uddīyana-sadda; vv.ll. uddri˚, udri˚).

fr. udrīyati

Undura

a rat Vin i.209; Vin ii.148, Vin ii.152; Vin iii.151; Ja i.120; Mil 23, Mil 363. Spelt undūra at Vism 62.

etym ?

Unna

in phrase pīti-vegen;’unna “bubbling up with the excitement of joy” overflowing with joy Mvu 19, Mvu 29 (expld. by uggatacitta i.e. lofty, exalted C.) ■ It may however be better more in keeping with Pāli word-formation as well as with meaning & interpretation to explain the word as ud na, taking ˚na as abs. (base)-form of; nam, thus lit. “bent up”, i.e. raised, high, in meaning of unnata. Cp. the exactly similar formation, use & meaning of ninna ninnata. Thus unna / ninna would correspond to unnata / ninnata.;

pp. of ud, unatti & undati, see udaka

Unnaka

a species of perfume Ja vi.537 (gloss kuṭantaja).

etym.?

Unnaṅgala

(adj.) in phrase ˚ṃ karoti, according to Morris JP T S 1887, 120 “to make an up-ploughing, to turn up etc.”, but more aptly with C. on Ja vi.328 to make “out-plough” (not “up-plough”) in sense of out-of-work i.e. to make the people put their ploughs (or work in general) away and prepare for a festival; to take a holiday A typical “Jātaka”-phrase; Ja i.228; Ja ii.296, Ja ii.367; iii. 129, 414; iv.355; vi.328; Dhp-a iii.10.

ud + nangala, on meaning of ud in this case see ud

Unnata

raised, high, lofty, in high situation (opp. oṇata) Pv iv.66 (= sāmin Pv-a 262); Ja i.71; ii369; vi.487; Mil 146, Mil 387; DN-a i.45 See also unnaḷa.

pp. of unnamati. Besides this form we find uṇṇata in fig. special meaning, q.v.

Unnati

(f) rising, lifting up, elevation Mil 387 (˚avanati).

fr. unnamati; cp. uṇṇati

Unnadati

to resound, shout out, roar Ja i.110; Ja ii.90; Ja iii.271, Ja iii.325; Mil 18; aor. unnadi Ja i.74; Mil 13 ■ Caus. unnādeti (q.v.).

ud + nadati

Unnama

rising ground, elevation, plateau Kp vii.7 = Pv i.57 (thala unnata-padesa Pv-a 29); Mil 349; DN-a i.154.

fr ud + nam; cp. also uṇṇama in fig. meaning

Unnamati

to rise up, ascend Mil 117 (oṇamati + ); Vism 306 ■ Caus unnāmeti (q.v.) ■ pp. unnara & uṇṇata; (q.v.). Unnala & Unnala;

ud + namati, see uṇṇamati in fig. meaning

Unnala & Unnaḷa

(adj.) showing off, insolent, arrogant, proud, haughty in phrase uddhata unnaḷa capala MN i.32; SN i.61 = SN i.204 (trsld. as “muddled in mind, puffed up, vain”, expld. as uggata-nala uddhaṭa-tuccha-māna K. S. 318); AN i.70, AN i.266 AN ii.26; AN iii.199, AN iii.355, AN iii.391; Iti 113 (+ asamāhita); Dhp 292 (+ pamatta; expld. as “māna-naḷaṃ ukkhipitvā caraṇena unnala” Dhp-a iii.452); Thag 634; Pp 35 (= uggatanaḷo tuccha-mānaṃ ukkhipitvā ti attho PugA 217).

Bdhgh. has ud + nala; but it is either a dissimilated form for *ullala (n → l change freq. cp. P. nangala → lāngala; nalāṭa → lalaṭa) from ud + lal to sport, thus meaning “sporting, sporty, wild” etc.; or (still more likely) with Kern, Toev. s. v. a dial. form of unnata P. uṇṇata, although the P. Commentators never thought of that. Cp. with this the BSk. unnata in same stock phrase uddhata unnata capala Mvu i.305, and the Marathic Prk. mula = Sk. mṛta, Pischel, Gr. § 244 To these may be added P. celakedu → cetakedu Ja vi.538

Unnahanā

(f.) flattering, tying or pushing oneself on to somebody, begging Vism 27.

ud + nah, see nayhati

Unnāda

shout, shouting Ja ii.405.

fr. ud + nad

Unnādin

(adj.) shouting out; resounding, noisy, loud, tumultuous Vin iii.336; DN i.95, DN i.143, DN i.178; Ja ii.216.

fr. ud + nad

Unnādeti

to make resound Ja i.408 (paṭhaviṃ), ii.34.

Caus. of unnadati

Unnāmin

(adj) raising or rising; in combn. with ninnāmin raised & bent, high & low AN iv.237 (of cultivated land).

ud + nam in Caus. form

Unnāmeti

(unn˚) to raise Dhs-a 5; written uṇṇameti (with a for ā before mutes & liquids at Snp 206 (inf. uṃṇametave).;

Caus. of unnamati

Upa

[Vedic upa; Av. upa on, up; Gr. ὑπό under, ὑπέρ over; Lat. sub fr. *(e)ks-upo; Goth. uf under & on; Ohg ūf = Ags. up = E. up; Oir. fo under. See also upari prefix denoting nearness or close touch (cp. similarly ā) usually with the idea of approach from below or rest on top, on, upon, up, by ■ In compn. a upa is always contracted to upa, e.g. devūpaṭṭhāna, lokûpaga, puññûpatthambhita-Meanings: (1) (Rest): on upon, up-˚kiṇṇa covered over; ˚jīvati live on (cp. anu˚); ˚tthambhita propped up, sup-ported; ˚cita heaped up, ac-cumulated ˚dhāreti hold or take up; ˚nata bent on; ˚nissaya foundation; ˚nissita depending on etc ■ (2) (Aim): (out up to (the speaker or hearer); cp. the meanings developed out of this as “higher, above” in upara, upari, upama Lat. superus, supremus E. g. ˚kaḍḍhati drag on to; ˚kappati come to, accrue; ˚kappana ad-ministering; ˚kāra service to; ˚kkhata administered; ˚gacchati go to, ap-proach (cp. upâtigacchati); ˚disati ad-vise; ˚dhāvati run up to ˚nadati to sound out; ˚nikkhamati come out up to; ˚nisevita gone on to or after; ˚neti bring on to; etc ■ (3 (Nearness): close by, close to, near, “ad-”; e.g. ˚kaṇṇaka close to the ear; ˚cāra ap-plication; ˚ṭṭhāna at-tending ṭṭhita ap-proached; ˚tiṭṭhati stand by, look after; ˚dduta urged; ˚nāmeti place close to; ˚nibandhati tie close to ˚nisīdati sit close to or down by ■ (4) (Intensive use) quite, altogether, “up”; e.g. ˚antika quite near; ˚chindati cut up ■ (5) (Diminutive use as in Lat. subabsurdus Gr. ὑπόλευκος whitish; Oir. fo-dord; Cymr. go-durdd murmur): nearly, about, somewhat, a little, secondary by-, miniature, made after the style of, e.g. ˚aḍḍha about half; ˚kacchaka like a little hollow; ˚kaṇḍakin (= ˚paṇḍukin? whitish); ˚deva a minor god; ˚nibha somewhat similar to; ˚nila bluish; upapurohita minor priest uparajja viceroyalty; upalohitaka, uparopa; ˚vana a little forest. etc. Note. The nearest semantie affinity of upa is ā˚.

Upaka

(-˚) found only in combn. kulūpaka where second k stands for g. through assimilation with first k. Only with ref. to a bhikkhu = one who frequents a certain family (for the purpose of getting alms), a family friend, associate Vin i.192, Vin i.208; Vin iii.84; SN ii.200 sq.; AN iii.258 sq.; Nd ii.3851; Pv iii.85; Pv-a 266 ■ f. kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; Vin iv.66 ■ Sporadic in gayhūpaka (for ˚ûpaga) at Ja iv.219.

for ˚upaga

Upakaccha

(˚-) only in combn. with ˚antare lit. “in between the hips or loins or arm-pits” in 3 phrases (cp. Kern, Toev. ii.140 s. v.), viz. upakacchantare katvā taking (it) between the legs Ja i.63, Ja i.425 khipitvā throwing (it) into the armpits Ja v.211 & ṭhapetvā id. Ja v.46.

upa + kacchā2

Upakacchaka

(1) [ = upa + kaccha1 + ka] like an enclosure adj. in the form of a hollow or a shelter Ja i.158 (2) [ = upa + kacchā2 + ka] like the armpit, a hollow usually the armpit, but occasionally it seems to be applied to the hip or waist Vin iii.39; Vin iv.260 (pudendum muliebre); Mil 293; Ja v.437 (= kaccha2).

upa + kacchā + ka, cp. Sk. upakakṣa in diff. meaning

Upakaṭṭha

(adj.) approaehing, near Ja iv.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha-majjhantikā till nearly noon). Usually in foll. two phrases: upakaṭṭhe kāle when the time was near, i.e. at the approach of meal time Vin iv.175; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 294; and upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya as Lent was approaching Vin i.253; Pv-a 42; Vv-a 44. Cp. vūpakaṭṭha ■ loc. upakaṭṭhe as adv. or prep. “near, in the neighbourhood of” Nd ii.639 (= santike); Dāvs v.41 (so read for upakaṇṭhe).

pp. of upa + karś to draw up or near to

Upakaḍḍhati

to drag or pull on to (w. dat.), or down to DN i.180 (+ apakaḍḍhati); iii.127 (id.); MN i.365; SN i.49; SN ii.99; Dhp 311 (nirayāya = niraye nibbattapeti Dhp-a iii.484).

upa + kaḍḍhati, cp. upakaṭṭha

Upakaṇṭha

at Dāvs v.41 is to be corrected to upakaṭṭha.

Upakaṇḍakin

(Pv ii.113) see under uppaṇḍukin.

Upakaṇṇa

(˚-) lit. (spot) near the ear, only in oblique cases or in der. ˚ka (q.v.) Thag 200 (upakannamhi close to the ear, under the ear).

upa + kaṇṇa

Upakannaka

(adj.) [upa + kaṇṇa + ka) by the ear, being at or on the ear of somebody, only in loc. as adv. upakaṇṇake secretly Vin i.237; Vin ii.99; Vin iv.20, Vin iv.271; SN i.86; AN iii.57; Snp-a 186; and in cpd. ˚jappin one who whispers into the ear (of another), spreader of reports AN iii.136. Cp. kaṇṇajappaka & kaṇṇajappana.;

Upakappati

intrs.) to be beneficial to (w. dat.), to serve, to accrue SN i.85; Pv i.44 (= nippajjati Pv-a 19); i.57 (petānaṃ); i.104 (= viniyujjati Pv-a 49) Ja v.350; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 29 (petānaṃ), 27 (id.), 241; Sdhp 501, Sdhp 504.

upa + kappati

Upakappana

(nt.) profit Pv-a 29 (dān˚), 49 (an˚).

fr. upakappati

Upakappanaka

(adj.) profitable Ja i.398; Dhp-a ii.133.

fr. upakappana

Upakaraṇa

(nt.) help, service, support; means of existence, livelihood DN ii.340; AN ii.86; Ja i.7; Pv-a 60 (commodities), 133 (˚manussa, adj. suitable, fit) Sdhp 69. In general any instrument or means of achieving a purpose, viz. apparatus of a ship Ja iv.165; tunnavaya˚ a weaver’s outfit Ja ii.364; dabb˚; fit to be used as wood Vism 120; dān˚; materials for a gift Pv-a 105 (so read & cp. upakkhaṭa); nahān˚; bathing requisites Vv-a 248 vitt˚ luxuries AN v.264 sq., 283, 290 sq.; Pv-a 71.

fr. upa + kṛ;

Upakaroti

to do a service, serve, help, support Thig 89 (aor. upakāsiṃ = anugaṇhiṃ santappesiṃ Thag-a 88) ■ pp. upakkhaṭa (q.v.).

upa + karoti

Upakāra

service, help, benefit, obligation, favour DN iii.187 sq.; Vv-a 68; Pv-a 8 Pv-a 18 (˚āya hoti is good for); Sdhp 283, Sdhp 447, Sdhp 530. bahūpakāra (adj.) of great help, very serviceable or helpful SN iv.295; Pv-a 114. upakāraṃ karoti to do a favour, to oblige Pv-a 42, Pv-a 88, Pv-a 159 (kata); katûpakāra one to whom a service has been rendered Pv-a 116.

-āvaha useful, serviceable, doing good Pv-a 86.

fr. upa + kṛ; cp. upakaraṇa

Upakāraka

(adj.) serviceable, helping, effective Ja v.99; Vism 534 ■ f. upakārikā 1. benefactress helper Ja iii.437.

2. fortification (strengthening of the defence) on a city wall DN i.105, see DA i.274 & cp parikkhāra; MN i.86 (= Nd ii.1996).

3. (philosophy) cause (that which is an aid in the persistence or happening of any given thing) Tikapaṭṭhāna i.11

fr. upakāra

Upakārin

(adj.-n.) a benefactor Ja iii.11; DN-a i.187; Sdhp 540 Sdhp 546.

fr. upakāra; cp. ASk. upakārin Jtm. 3142

Upakiṇṇa

strewn over with (-˚), covered Vv 351 (rucak˚, so read for rājak˚; expld by okiṇṇa Vv-a 160).

pp. of upakirati

Upakiriyā

(f.) implement, ornament Ja v.408.

fr. upa + kr

Upakūjati

to sing to (of birds) Ja iv.296 (kūjantaṃ u. = replies w. song to the singing) ■ pp upakūjita (q.v.).

upa + kūjati

Upakūjita

(-˚) resounding, filled with the hum or song of (birds) Ja iv.359; Pv-a 154.

pp. of upakūjati

Upakūla

embankment, a river’s bank, riverside Ja vi.26 (rukkh’ûpakūlaje the trees sprung up at its bank).

upa + kūla

Upakūlita

used of the nose in old age Thig 258 (jarāya paṭisedhikā viya says the commentary Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 74 trsls. obstructed; Mrs Rh. D. in “Sisters” takes it for upakūḷita and trsls. seared and shrivelled. So also Ed. Müller JR A S. 1919. 538 This is probably right; but Oldenberg, Pischel and Hardy all read upakūlita.

derivation uncertain

Upakūḷita

singed, boiled, roasted Ja i.405 (“half-roasted” = aḍḍhajjhāmaka C.) See also upakūsita.

pp. of kūḍ, a variant of kuth, kvathati

Upakūsita

at Ja ii.134 is perhaps faulty for ˚kūḷita, which is suggested by C. expln. “kukkule jhāmo” and also by v.l. ˚kuṭhita (for kuṭṭhita boiled, sweltering, hot). The variant (gloss) ˚kūjita may have the same origin, viz ˚kūḷita, was however interpreted (v.l. BB.) by ˚kupita (meaning “shaken, disturbed by fire”).

Upakka

see uppakka.

Upakkanta

1. attacked by (-˚) Mil 112.

2. attacking, intriguing or plotting against (loc. DN-a i.140.

pp. of upakkamati

Upakkama

(1) lit. (a) going to, nearing, approach (-˚) Vv-a 72 ■ (b) attack Vin ii.195; Mil 157; DN-a i.69, DN-a i.71 ■ (2) applied (a) in general: doing acting, undertaking, act SN i.152 = Snp p.126 ■ (b) in special: ways, means, i.e. either good of helpful means expedient, remedy Snp 575; Mil 151, Mil 152; or bad or unfair means, treachery, plotting Thag 143; Ja iv.115 (punishment); Mil 135, Mil 176.

fr. upa + kram

Upakkamati

to go on to, i e. (1) to attack MN i.86 = Ud 71 ■ (2) to undertake Vin iii.110, Vin iii.111 ■ (3) to begin Vin iv.316; DN-a i.318.

upa + kamati of kram

Upakkamana

(nt.) going near to, attacking Ja iv.12.

fr. upa + kram

Upakkitaka

a buyer, hawker, dealer combd. with bhataka Dhp-a i.119 = Ud 23 (C. expls. by “yo kahāpaṇâdīhi kiñci kināti so upakkitako ti vuccati”) Pts ii.196 (? T. upakkhittaka).

fr. upa + krī to buy

Upakkiliṭṭha

soiled, stained, depraved, impure SN i.179; AN i.207 (citta) Vism 13.

pp. of upa + klid or kliś, cp. kilesa & next

Upakkilesa

anything that spoils or obstructs, a minor stain, impurity, defilement, depravity, Vin ii.295 (cp. Snp-a 487 & Vv-a 134 & see abbha); MN i.36, MN i.91; DN iii.42 sq., 49 sq., 201; SN v.92 sq. (pañca cittassa upakkilesā), 108, 115; AN i.10 (āgantuka), 207 (cittassa), 253 (oḷārika etc.); ii.53 (candima-suriyānaṃ samaṇa-brāhmaṇānaṃ), 67; iii.16 (jātarūpassa, cittassa), 386 sq.; iv.177 (vigatā); v.195; Pts i.164 (eighteen); Pp 60; Dhs 1059 Dhs 1136; Ne 86 sq., 94, 114 sq.; Sdhp 216, Sdhp 225 (as upaklesa). Ten stains at Vism 633.

fr. upa + kliś

Upakkuṭṭha

blamed, reproached, censured, faulty DN i.113 (an˚); Snp p.115 (id.); Ja iii.523; DN-a i.211.

pp. of upakkosati

Upakkosa

censure, reproach Ja vi.489.

fr. upa + kruś

Upakkosati

to scold, reprove, blame DN i.161; Ja iii.436, Ja iii.523; Ja iv.81, Ja iv.317, Ja iv.409. Upakkhata & ta;

upa + kosati

Upakkhaṭa & ˚ta

done as a favour or service, given, prepared, administered DN i.127 (= sajjita DN-a i.294); Pv ii.84 (= sajjita Pv-a 107); Ja vi.139; Mil 156.

pp. of upakaroti

Upakkhalati

to stumble, trip DN ii.250; MN ii.209; AN iii.101; Ja iii.433.

upa + khalati

Upakkhalana

(nt.) stumbling, tripping Vism 500.

fr. prec.

Upakkhittaka

at Pts ii.196 see upakk˚.

Upakhandha

lit. upper (side of the) trunk, back, shoulder Ja iv.210 (= khandha C.).

upa + khandha

Upaga

(always as ˚ûpaga) (adj.)

1. going to, getting to, reaching, in phrases kāy˚, SN ii.24; ākās’ānañc’ āyatan˚ etc. Pts i.84; kāy˚ SN ii.24; brahmalok˚ Pv ii.1319 yathākamm˚ DN i.82.

2. coming into, experiencing, having as vikappan˚ according to option Vin iv.283; phal˚ bearing fruit, & pupph˚ having flowers, in flower Pv-a 275.; 3. attached to, belonging to, being at Ja i.51 (hatth˚) Vv-a 12 (id. + pādûpaga).

4. in phrase gayh˚; lit. “accessible to the grip”, acquisition of property, theft Ja iv.219 (T. gayhûpaka); Mil 325; Dhp-a ii.29; Pv-a 4.

upa + ga

Upagacchati

1. to come to, go to, approach, flow to (of water) DN ii.12; Pv-a 12 (vasanaṭṭhānaṃ), 29, 32 (vāsaṃ) 132; ger. ˚gantvā Pv-a 70 (attano santikaṃ), & ˚gamma SN ii.17, SN ii.20.

2. to undergo go (in) to, to begin, undertake Snp 152 (diṭṭhiṃ anupagamma); Ja i.106 (vassaṃ); Pv-a 42 (id.); Ja i.200; niddaṃ upagacchati to drop off into sleep Pv-a 43 (aor. upagacchi MSS. ˚gañchi), 105, 128 ■ pp. upagata (q.v.).

upa + gacchati

Upagaṇhanā

(f.) taking up, keeping up. meditating Mil 37.

abstr. of upa + gṛh

Upagaṇhāti

to take up (for meditation) Mil 38.

upa + gaṇhāti

Upagata

1. gone to, come, approached (intrs.) Snp 708 (āsan˚ = nisinna Snp-a 495) Pv-a 77 (santikaṃ), 78, 79 (petalokaṃ), 123.

2. undergoing coming or come under, overpowered, suffering Nd ii.under asita (= ajjhupagata in same conn. at AN v.187) Pv i.1110 (khuppipās˚); Pv-a 60 (= abhibhūta).

pp. of upagacchati

Upagamana

(nt.) approaching, going or coming to, undergoing, undertaking Vin ii.97 (+ ajjhupag˚) Ne 27; Vism 600; Pv-a 42 (vass˚).

fr. upa + gam

Upagamanaka

(adj.) going to, one who goes to (with acc.) Pv-a 168 (= ˚upaga).

fr. upagamana

Upagaḷita

flowing out, spat or slobbered out Ja v.471 (˚khelo; v.l. paggharita).

pp. of upagaḷati

Upagāmin

(adj.) going to, undergoing, experiencing AN ii.6 (jāti jar˚).

fr. upa + gam, cp. ˚upaga

Upagūhati

to embrace Ja i.346, Ja i.349; Ja ii.424; Ja iii.437; Ja v.157, Ja v.328, Ja v.384 ■ ger. upaguyha Ja vi.300.

upa + gūhati

Upagghāta

scented, smelled, kissed Ja vi.543 (C. sīsamhi upasinghita).

pp. of next

Upagghāyati

to smell at, in sense of “to kiss” Ja v.328 (also inf. upagghātuṃ).

upa + ghrā, see ghāyati1

Upaghaṭṭita

knocked or knocking against Ja i.26 (v.179).

pp. of upaghaṭṭeti

Upaghāta

hurting, injuring, injury MN iii.237; SN ii.218; SN iv.323 sq.; AN iii.173; Thag 583; Mil 274, Mil 307, Mil 347; DN-a i.273. an˚; not hurting others, kindness Dhp 185.

fr. upa + (g)han, cp. ghāta

Upaghātana

(nt.) hurting Dhp-a iii.237 (an˚).

fr. upaghāta

Upaghātika

(adj.) injuring, offending Vin ii.13.

fr. upaghāta

Upaghātin

(adj.) hurting, injuring Ja iii.523.

fr. upaghāta

Upacaya

heaping up, gathering, accumulation, heap. As t.t. with ref. to kamma “conservation”, with ref. to body & form “integration” (See discussion & defin. at; Cpd. 253; Dhs trsl. 195). DN i.76 (= odana = kummās’ûpacayo, see under kāya) Dhs 582, Dhs 642 (rūpassa u. = āyatanānaṃ ācayo), 864 Vb 147, Vb 151 sq.; Kv 520; Ne 113; Vism 449; DN-a i.220; Pv-a 198 (but v.l. paccayassa preferable).

fr. upa + ci, cp. caya & ācaya

Upacarati

to deal with, handle, use Ja vi.180 ■ pp. upaciṇṇa & upacarita; (q.v.).

upa + carati

Upacarita

practised, served, enacted, performed Mil 359, Mil 360.

pp. of upacarati

Upacāra

1. approach, access Vin ii.120, Vin ii.152; Vin iv.304; Ja i.83, Ja i.172; Dhs-a 328 (phal˚).

2. habit practice, conduct Vin ii.20 (dassan˚); Snp-a 140 (id.); Ja iii.280.

3. way, means application, use of (esp. of spells etc.) Ja iii.280 (mantassa); vi.180; Mil 153, Mil 154 (dur˚ an evil spell); Vv-a 127 (gram. t.t. kāraṇ˚).

4 entrance, access, i.e. immediate vicinity or neighbourhood of (-˚) Ja iv.182 (nagar˚); usually as gām˚; Vin i.109 Vin iii.46; Vin iv.230; Kp-a 77; Snp-a 83, Snp-a 179.

5. attention attendance Vin iv.272; Ja vi.180; Mil 154.

6. civility polite behaviour Ja ii.56; Ja vi.102.

7. On upacāra as philos, t.t. and its relation to appanā see Dhs trsln. 53 54; Cpd. 55; Mystic p. xi. Thus used of samādhi (neighbourhood-, or access-concentration, distinguishing it from appanā-samādhi) at Vism 85, Vism 126, Vism 144 and passim.

fr. upa + car

Upacikā

(f.) the termite or white ant Vin ii.113 Vin ii.148, Vin ii.152; Vin iii.151; MN i.306; Ja iii.320; Ja iv.331; Mil 363 Mil 392; Vism 62, Dhp-a ii.25; Dhp-a iii.15.

connected with Sk. upadīkā, although the relation is not quite clear. Attempts at explns. by Trencker Notes 62 (*utpādikā → upatikā → upacikā) & Kern,; Toev. p. 102 (upacikā = Vedic upajīka, this fr. upajihikā for ˚dihikā, vv.ll. upadehihā & upadīkā). It may however be a direct der. from upa + ; ci, thus meaning “making heaps, a builder”

Upaciṇṇa

used, frequented, known (as value) Ja vi.180.

pp. of upacarati

Upacita

1. heaped up, accumulated, collected, produced (usually of puñña merit, & kamma karma) Snp 697; Kp-a 132; Snp-a 492; Vv-a 7, Vv-a 271, Vv-a 342; Pv-a 30, Pv-a 150.

2. built up, conserved (of the body Mil 232; DN-a i.220.

pp. of upacināti

Upacitatta

(nt.) storing up, accumulation Dhs 431.

abstr. fr. upacita

Upacināti

1. to collect, heap up, accumulate (puññaṃ or pāpaṃ) Vv-a 254; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 241.

2. to concentrate pay attention Thag 199 (C. upacetuṃ for ocetuṃ T.); Ja v.339 (= oloketi) ■ Pass. upaciyyati Thag 807 ■ pp. upacita (q.v.).

upa + ci

Upacca = uppacca

(q.v.) “flying up” (= uppatitvā Pv-a 103) at Thig 248 (= Thag-a 205, where v.l. and gloss upecca & upacca, expl;d. by upanetvā), as well as at Pv ii.717 (= Pv-a 103 where read upaccha; & gloss upacca & upecca).;

Upaccagā

3rd sg. pret. of upâtigacchati (q.v.) to escape, pass, go by; to overcome Snp 333 (mā upaccagā = mā atikkami Snp-a 339) = Thig 5 (= mā atikkami Thag-a 12); Snp 636, Snp 641, Snp 827 (= accagā atikkanta Nd i.167); Dhp 315, Dhp 412, Dhp 417 (= atikkanta Dhp-a iv.225); Bv ii.43 ■ pl. upaccaguṃ SN i.35; AN iii.311.

upa + ati + agā of gam

Upaccati

(?) in phrase “akkhīni upacciṃsu” at Ja vi.187 is probably faulty for apaciyiṃsu aor. of apaciyyati, Pass of apacināti (cp. upaciyyati → upacināti) “the eyes failed” lost power, went bad; cp. apacaya falling off, diminution If not this reading we should suggest upacchijjiṃsu from upacchindati “were destroyed”, which however is not quite the sense wanted.

Upacchindati

to break up or off, to destroy, interrupt, to stop Snp 972 (pot. ˚chinde); Ja iv.127; Nd i.502; Thag-a 267; Pv-a 31 (kulavaṃso upacchijji aor. pass.); Vism 164, Vism 676 (bhavangaṃ).

upa + chindati

Upacchinna

cut off, interrupted Ja i.477; Mil 306.

pp. of upacchindati

Upacchubhati

to throw at MN i.364 (vv.ll. ˚chumbh˚, ˚cubh˚).

upa + chubhati from kṣubh or chubh, see chuddha, khobha, nicchubhati, nicchodeti

Upaccheda

breaking or cutting off, destruction, stoppage, interruption MN i.245, MN i.327 (pāṇ murder); Ja i.67; Mil 134 (paveṇ˚ break of tradition Pv-a 82 (kulavaṃs˚); Dhp-a i.152 (āhār ˚ṃ karoti to prevent fr. taking food); DN-a i.136, DN-a i.159.

fr. upa + chid

Upacchedaka

(adj.-n.) destroying, breaking off, stopping, interrupting Ja i.418 (vacan˚); iv.357; DN-a i.69 (jīvit’ indriy˚); Vv-a 72 (id.).

fr. upaccheda

Upajānāti

to learn, acquire or have knowledge of (w. gen. or instr.), to know Vin i.272 (saṃyamassa); ii.181 (gharāvās’atthena); AN i.50 (dvinnaṃ dhammānaṃ upaññāsin) ■ fut. upaññissati (& upaññassati; Snp 716) Snp 701, Snp 716 (= upaññayissati kathayissati Snp-a 498); Ja v.215 ■ pp. upaññāta (q.v.).

upa + jānāti

Upajīvati

to live on (w. acc.), to depend on, to live by somebody, to be supported by (acc.) DN i.228; SN i.217; Snp 612 sq.; Thag 943; Ja iii.309, Ja iii.338 Ja iv.271 (= anujīvati); Pv ii.950 (Ankuraṃ u. ti taṃ nissāya jīvanti Pv-a 134); Mil 231.

upa + jīvati

Upajīvika

(adj.) Sdhp 501 (see next).

= upajīvin

Upajīvin

(-˚) (adj.-n.) living on, subsisting by AN ii.135 (phal˚); Snp 217 (para-datt˚), Ja i.227 (vohār˚); iv.380; Pp 51; Mil 160 (Satth˚); Vv-a 141 (sipp˚). f. upajīvinī in rūp˚ (itthi) a woman earning her living by her beauty (i.e. a courtesan) Mil 122; Pv-a 46; cp. kiliṭṭha-kamm˚ gaṇikā Pv-a 195.

fr. upa + jīv

Upajūta

(nt.) stake at game Ja vi.192.

upa + jūta

Upajjha

see next.

Upajjhāya

a spiritual teacher or preceptor, master. Often combd. with ācariya e.g. Vin i.119; Nd i.350; the ācariya being only the deputy or substitute of the upajjhāya. Vin i.45, Vin i.53, Vin i.62, Vin i.120; iv. 130; SN i.185; AN ii.66, AN ii.78; AN iii.69; Snp-a 346; Dhp-a ii.93; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 230 ■ A short form of upajjhāya is upajjha, found in the Vinaya, e.g. at Vin i.94; Vin iii.35 with f. upajjhā Vin iv.326.

Vedic upādhyāya, upa + adhi + i, līt. “one who is gone close up to”

Upaññāta

found out, learnt, known Vin i.40; Ja v.325, Ja v.368; AN i.61.

pp. of upajānāti

Upaṭṭita

pained, terrified; overcome, overwhelmed Ja vi.82 (visavegena). Upatthapeti & tthapeti;

upa + aṭṭita, from ard, see aṭṭita

Upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti

1. to provide, procure, get ready, put forth, give Vin ii.210; DN ii.19; MN i.429; Ja i.266; Ja iv.2; Ja v.218; Pp 59, Pp 68; Mil 15, Mil 257, Mil 366 (pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ), 397; DN-a i.270; Sdhp 356.

2. to cause to be present Vin i.45; SN i.170; Pv iv.170.

3. to cause to be waited on or to be nursed AN v.72 (gilānaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ vā upaṭṭhāpetuṃ vā).

4. to keep (a servant) for hire Vin ii.267. 5. to ordain Vin i.62, Vin i.83. Upatthahati & tthati;

Caus. II. of upaṭṭhahati

Upaṭṭhahati & ˚ṭṭhāti

1 (trs.) to stand near or at hand (with acc.), to wait on attend on, serve, minister, to care for, look after, nurse (in sickness) Vin i.50, Vin i.302; Vin iv.326; MN iii.25; SN i.167; AN iii.94; AN v.72; Snp 82 = Snp 481 (imper. ˚ṭṭhahassu); Ja i.67 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahamāna), 262 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahanto); iv.131; v.396 Dpvs ii.16; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 20 ■ aor. upaṭṭhahi Pv-a 14, Pv-a 42 Pv-a 82 ■ inf. upaṭṭhātuṃ AN v.72; Pv-a 20 ■ ger. upaṭṭhahitvā Pv-a 76 ■ grd. upaṭṭhātabba Vin i.302; Pv-a 20 ■ pp. upaṭṭhita (q.v.).

2. (intrs.) to stand out or forth, to appear, to arise, occur, to be present MN i.104 sq.; AN iv.32; Ja iv.203 (mante anupaṭṭhahante since the spell did not occur to him); v.207; Mil 64; Thag-a 258. aor. upaṭṭhāsi Ja i.61; Ja iv.3; Pv-a 42 ■ Caus. I. upaṭṭheti; Caus. II. upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti; (q.v.) ■ Pass upaṭṭhīyati Ja iv.131 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhiyamāna), & upaṭṭhahīyati AN iii.94 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahiyamāna).

upa + sthā, cp. upatiṭṭhati

Upaṭṭhāka

a servitor, personal attendant, servant, “famulus” Ānanda was the last u. of Gotama Buddha (see D i.206 Thag 1041 f.; Thag-a in Brethren loc. cit.; Vin i.179 (Sāgato u.), 194; ii.186; iii.66; iv.47; DN i.150 (Nāgita) SN iii.113; AN i.121; AN iii.31, AN iii.189; Ja i.15, Ja i.100 (a merchant’s) ii.416; Pp 28; Dhp-a ii.93; Vv-a 149; Pv-a 211agg˚ main follower, chief attendant DN ii.6; gilān˚; an attendant in sickness, nurse Vin i.303; AN i.26; saṅgh˚; one who looks after the community of Bhikkhus Vin i.216; AN i.26 AN iii.39dupaṭṭhāka & supaṭṭhāka; a bad (& good) attendant Vin i.302.

-kula a family entertaining (or ministering to) a thera or a bhikkhu, a family devoted to the service of (gen. Vin i.83 (Sāriputtassa), 213; iii.62, 66, 67; iv.283, 286; Vv-a 120.

fr. upa + sthā, cp. BSk. upasthāka Mvu i.251, and upasthāyaka Divy 426; Avs. i.214; ii.85 112.

Upaṭṭhāna

(nt.)

1. attendance, waiting on, looking after, service, care, ministering AN i.151, AN i.225; Snp 138; Ja i.226, Ja i.237, Ja i.291; Ja ii.101; Ja iv.138; Ja vi.351; Pts i.107; Pts ii.7 sq., 28, 230; Pv-a 104, Pv-a 145 (paccekabuddhassa), 176; Vv-a 75 (ther˚); Sdhp 560.

2. worship (divine) service DN iii.188 sq. (˚ṃ gacchati); Pv-a 122. Buddh˚; attendance on a Buddha Pv-a 93; Thag-a 18. 3. a state room Ja iii.257.

-sambhāra means of catering, provisions Pv-a 20. -sālā hall for attendance, assembly room, chapel [cp. BSk upasthāna-śālā Divy 207] Vin i.49, Vin i.139; Vin ii.153, Vin ii.208; iii. 70 (at Vesālī); iv.15, 42; DN ii.119 (at Vesālī); SN ii.280 SN v.321; AN ii.51, AN ii.197; AN iii.298; Dhp-a i.37, Dhp-a i.38; Dhp-a iii.413.

fr. upa + sthā

Upaṭṭhāpana

(nt.) attendance, service Vin iv.291.

fr. upa + sthā

Upaṭṭhita

1. furnished provided, served got ready, honoured with Snp 295 (˚asmiṃ yaññasmiṃ) Ja v.173 (annena pānena); Pv i.52 (= sajjita paṭiyatta Pv-a 25); ii.98 (= payirupāsita Pv-a 116); Pv-a 132. 2. come, come about, appeared, arrived; present, existing Snp 130 (bhattakāle upaṭṭhite when mealtime has come) 898; Dhp 235; Mil 274; Pv-a 124 (dānakāle ˚e). 3. standing up (ready), keeping in readiness MN i.77; AN ii.206; Snp 708 (= ṭhito C.); Pv ii.953 (ready for service serving, waiting upon cp. Pv-a 135.

-sati with ready attention, one whose attention is fixed concentrated Vin i.63; DN iii.252, DN iii.282; SN iv.186; AN iii.251; Pp 25.

pp. of upaṭṭhahati or upatiṭṭhāti, cp. BSk. upasthita Divy 281, Divy 342

Upaṭṭheti

to make serve or attend; sakkaccaṃ u. (with acc.) to bestow respect (upon) Vin iv.275. fut. ˚essati Vin iv.291. to place, fix (parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā) Vibh. 244.

Caus. of upaṭṭhahati

Upaḍayhati

to be burnt up Mil 277.

upa + ḍayhati

Upaḍḍha

(adj.-n..) half Vin i.281 (˚kāsina); ii.200 (˚āsana); Ja iii.11 (˚rajja); Vism 320 (˚gāma); Dhp-a i.15 Dhp-a i.205 (˚uposathakamma); ii.85; Kp-a 239 (˚gāthā); Snp-a 298; Vv-a 38, Vv-a 61, Vv-a 120; Pv-a 209, Pv-a 276.

upa + aḍḍha, used abs. whereas aḍḍha only in compn., cp. also BSk. upārdha Divy 86, Divy 144 Divy 514; AvS i.211, 240

Upatappati

to be vexed or tormented Ja v.90; Dhs-a 42.

upa + tappati1)

Upatāpa

vexation, trouble Vism 166.

fr. upa + tap

Upatāpana

(nt.) vexation, tormenting, torture Ja iv.13; Thag-a 243.

upa + tāpana

Upatāpika

(adj.) causing pain, molesting Ja ii.224.

fr. upatāpa

Upatāpeti

to cause pain, to vex, torment, harass Ja ii.178, Ja ii.224; Ja iv.11; Dhs-a 42 (vibādhati + ).

upa + tāpeti

Upatiṭṭhati

lit. “to stand by”, to look after, to worship Pv iii.118; Ja ii.73 (ādiccaṃ = namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.); Mil 231 (ger ˚tiṭṭhitvā); Ja v.173 (˚tiṭṭhate). pp. upaṭṭhita (q.v.).

upa + sthā, cp. upaṭṭhahati, ˚ṭṭhāti etc.

Upatta

smeared, spread over MN i.343; Ja i.399.

upa + akta, pp. of añj

Upatthaddha

- 1. stiff Vin iii.37 (angāni).

2. supported or held up by, resting on, founded on, relying on Thag 1058, Thag 1194 Thag 2, Thag 72 (yobbanena); Ja i.47 (v. 267: mettābalena); v. 121 301; Kv 251 (cakkhu dhamm˚ “when it is the medium of an idea”); Ne 117; Mil 110 (kāruñña-bal˚).

upa + thaddha, pp. of upatthambhati

Upatthambha

1. a support, prop, stay Mil 355, Mil 415, Mil 417; Sdhp 565.

2. relief, ease Vin iii.112.

3. encouragement Ja v.270; Dhp-a i.279.

fr. upa + stambh

Upatthambhaka

(adj. nt.) [fr. upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining Dhs-a 153.

Upatthambhana

(nt.) = upatthambha Mil 36; Ja i.447; DN-a i.124; Thag-a 258; Vism 279.

Upatthambhita

propped up, supported, sustained Ja i.107; Mil 36; DN-a i.234; Pv-a 117 (puñña-phal˚), 148 (utu-āhārehi u.).

pp. of upatthambheti

Upatthambheti

to make firm, shore up, support, prop up Ja i.127 [ppr ˚ayamāna), 447; DN-a i.113; Dhp-a iii.73 (˚ayamāna ppr.). pp. upatthambhita.

upa + thambheti, Caus. of thambhati

Upatthara

a (floor) covering, carpet, rug DN i.103 (rath˚); Ja ii.126 (pabbat˚); ii.534.

fr. upa + stṛ;

Upatheyya

a cushion Ja vi.490, Ja vi.513.

for upadheyya, see Trenckner, Notes 6216

Upadaṃsitar

one who shows Pp 49 (where upadhaṃsita is to be corrected to upad˚, as already pointed out by Morris J P T S. 1887, 126. The word seems to be a crux to commentators, philologists and translators, like upadaṃseti. Kern, Toev. s. v. keeps to the reading upah˚, tries to connect it with Sk. dharṣati & trsl;s. “one who confirms”. The Pp A leaves the word unexplained).

n. ag. fr. upadaṃseti

Upadaṃseti

to cause to appear, to manifest MN ii.120; SN i.64, SN i.65 (of gods, to become resplendent, to show divers colour-tones); AN ii.84 = AN iii.139 = AN iii.264 = Pp 49 (to show pleasure); Th i.335, to bring forth (a goad, and so incite, urge on); Vin iv.309.

= upadasseti with ˚aṃs˚ for ˚ass˚ like dhanseti = Sk. dharṣayati, haṃsa = harṣa etc. only in poetical passages

Upadasseti

(upa + dasseti, Caus. of drś, cp. also upadaṃseti] to make manifest, to show Mil 276, Mil 316, Mil 347.

Upadahati

to put down, supply, furnish, put on; give, cause, make Vin iv.149; DN ii.135 (vippaṭisāraṃ); AN i.203 (dukkhaṃ); Mil 109, Mil 139, Mil 164, Mil 286 Mil 383. grd. pass. ˚dahātabba to be given or caused Vin ii.250 = AN iii.197 (vippaṭisāra). Cp. upadhi.

upa + dahati1

Upadāyaka

(adj.) (-˚) giving, bestowing Sdhp 319.

fr. upa +

Upadiṭṭha

pointed out, put forth, specified Mil 144 (pañha).

pp. of upadisati

Upadisati

to point out, show, advise, specify Ja v.457 (sippaṃ); Mil 21 (dhamma-maggaṃ) ■ pp upadiṭṭha (q.v.).

upa + disati

Upadissati

to be seen (open), to be shown up, to be found out or discovered Snp 140 (pres. upadissare = ˚nti Snp-a 192).

upa + dissati

Upadeva

a secondary, lesser, minor god Pv-a 136.

upa + deva, on use of upa in this meaning see upa 5

Upadesa

pointing out, indication, instruction, advice Pv-a 26 (tadupadesena read for tadupād˚; Kp-a 208 differs at id. p.); Kp-a 100; Sdhp 227.

fr. upadisati

Upaddava

lit. rushing on; accident, misfortune, distress, oppression SN ii.210; AN i.101; Snp 51; Dhp 338 (an˚); Dhp-a i.16; Sdhp 267, Sdhp 398.

upa + dava2 of dru

Upaddavati

to annoy, trouble DN-a i.213 ■ pp. upadduta (q.v.).

fr. upa + dru

Upadduta

overrun, oppressed, annoyed, overcome, distressed Vin ii.170; Vin iii.144, Vin iii.283; SN ii.210 SN iv.29; Ja i.26, Ja i.61, Ja i.339; Ja ii.102; Ja iv.324, Ja iv.494; Pv ii.108 Vism 24 (= apakata); Mil 279; Vv-a 311 (aṭṭita + ) Pv-a 61. an˚; unmolested Pv-a 195; anupaddutatta state of not being molested Vv-a 95. Upadhamsitar & Upadhamseti;

pp. of upaddavati

Upadhaṃsitar & Upadhaṃseti

at Pp 49 is to be read upad˚; (q.v.).

Upadhāna

(adj. nt.) “putting under”, i.e. (1) a pillow, cushion DN i.7; SN ii.267 = Mil 366 (kaḷingar˚); SN iii.145; AN i.137, AN i.181; AN iii.50; Ja iv.201; Ja v.506 (tamb˚ = ratt˚ C.); (2) imposing, giving causing Dhp 291 dukkh˚).

fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati

Upadhāneti

to suppose, think, reflect Dhp-a i.239 (should be corrected to upadhāreti ).

f. upa + dhā

Upadhāraṇā

(nt.) [fr. upa + dhṛ; ) “receptacle”, milk-pail DN ii.192; AN iv.393; Ja vi.503. See kaṃs˚. Kern, Toev. i. 142 proposes corruption fr. kaṃs’ûpadohana, which latter however does not occur in Pali.

Upadhāraṇā

(f) calculation Vv-a 7.

cp. upadhāraṇa

Upadhārita

considered, reflected upon Dhp i.28; sûpadh˚ Mil 10; dûpadh˚ Vin iv.275.

pp. of upadhāreti

Upadhāreti

(Caus. of upa + dhṛ; cp. dhāreti 3] 1. “to hold or take up” (cp. semantically Lat. teneo = E. tenet) to reason out, conclude, reflect, surmise, know as such such, realise Ja i.338; Dhp-a i.28, Dhp-a i.41; Dhp-a ii.15, Dhp-a ii.20, Dhp-a ii.37, Dhp-a ii.96 Dhp-a iv.197 (an˚); Vv-a 48, Vv-a 200 (an˚), 234, 260 (an˚), 324; Pv-a 119 (for jānāti).

2. to look out for (acc.) Ja iii.65; Ja vi.2.

Upadhāvati

to run up to or after, fall upon, surround Vin ii.207; Vin iv.260 (pp. ˚dhāvita); SN i.185; SN ii.26 (aparantaṃ); Thag 1209; Mil 209; Vv-a 256; Pv-a 154, Pv-a 168, Pv-a 173 (for padhāvitā).

upa + dhāvati 1

Upadhi

1. putting down or under, foundation basis, ground, substratum (of rebirth) SN i.117, SN i.124 SN i.134, SN i.186; AN ii.24 (˚sankhaya); iii.382 (id.); iv.150 (˚kkhaya); Iti 21, Iti 69; Snp 364, Snp 728 (upadhī-nidānā dukkha = vaṭṭa-dukkhaṃ Snp-a 505), 789, 992; Nd i.27, Nd i.141; Nd ii.157; Vb 338; Ne 29; Dhp-a iv.33 ■ (2) clinging to rebirth (as impeding spiritual progress), attachment (almost syn. with kilesa or taṇhā, cp. nirupadhi & anupadhi) S A. = pañcakkhandhā, SN ii.108. At MN i.162 (cp. Snp 33 = SN i.6 = SN i.107) wife and children, flocks and herds silver and gold are called upadhayo. upadhi is the root of sorrow ib. 454; SN ii.108; Snp 728 = Snp 1051 Th i.152 and the rejection of all upadhis is Nibbāna DN ii.36. (cp. SN i.136; SN iii.133; SN v.226; AN i.80; MN i.107 = MN ii.93; Vin i.5, Vin i.36 = Ja i.83 = Mvst ii.444; Iti 46 Iti 62); DN iii.112 calls that which has upadhi ignoble (non-Aryan). At SN i.117 = Divy 224 upadhi is called a bond (saṃgo). Cp. opadhika ■ The upadhis were later systematized into a set of 10, which are given at Nd ii.157 as follows: 5 taṇh’ upadhis (taṇhā, diṭṭhi, kilesa kamma, duccarita), āhār-upadhi, paṭigh˚, catasso upādinnā dhātuyo u. (viz. kāma, diṭṭhi, sīlabbata, attavāda; see D iii.230), cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni u., cha viññāṇa-kāyā u. Another modified classification see at Brethren p. 398. Upadhika (Upadhika)

fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati & BSk. upadhi Divy 50, Divy 224, Divy 534

Upadhika (Upadhīka)

(adj.) (-˚) having a substratum, showing attachment to rebirth, only in cpds. an˚ free from clinging Vin i.36; Snp 1057, & nir˚; id. SN i.141.

fr. upadhi

Upadheyya

(nt.) a cushion Ja vi.490 (for upatheyya, q.v.).

cp. upadhāna

Upanaccati

to perform a dance DN ii.268.

upa + naccati

Upanata

inclined, bent, prone Pv-a 190.

pp. of upanamati

Upanadati

to resound (with song) Pv iii.34 (= vikūjati Pv-a 189).

upa + nadati

Upanandha

scorned, grumbled at Vin ii.118.

pp. of upanayhati, see naddha & nandhati

Upanandhati

to bear enmity towards, to grumble at (with loc.) aor. upanandhi Vin ii.118 (tasmiṃ); iv.83; Mvu 36, Mvu 117.

a secondary der. fr. upanandha, pp. of upanayhati

Upanamati

to be bent on, strive after Ja iii.324 (= upagacchati C.) ■ pp. upanata; Caus upanāmeti (q.v.).

upa + namati

Upanayana

(nt.) tt. for the minor premiss, subsumption (see Kvu trsl. 11; Mil 154; Ne 63; Dhs-a 329 (so read with v.l. for ˚najana).

fr. upa + ni; cp. naya & nayana

Upanayhati

1. to come into touch with Iti 68 = Ja iv.435 (pūtimacchaṃ kusaggena, cp. Dhp-a i.45).

2. to bear enmity towards (loc.), to grudge scorn Dhp 3, Dhp 4 ■ pp. upanandha (for ˚naddha) ■ See also upanandhati.

upa + nayhati

Upanayhanā

(f.) & ˚nayhitatta (nt.) are syn. for upanāha (grudge, ill-will) in exegesis at Pp 18 = Pp 22, whereas id p. at Vb 357 reads upanahanā upanahitattaṃ (with v.l. upanayihanā & upanayihitattaṃ).;

Upanāmita

brought up to, placed against DN ii.134.

pp. of upanāmeti

Upanāmeti

1. to bend over to, to place against or close to, to approach, bring near DN ii.134; SN i.207; Thag 1055; Snp p.48 (= attano kāyaṃ Bhagavato upanāmeti); Ja i.62; Ja v.215; Snp-a 151.

2. to offer, to present Ja iv.386; Ja ii.5; Mil 210, Mil 373; Pv-a 274-pp. upanāmita (q.v.). [cp. BSk. upanāmayati to hand over Divy 13, Divy 14, Divy 22].

Caus. of upanamati

Upanāyika

(-˚) (adj.)

1. referring to, belonging to in cpd. att˚; ref. to oneself Vin iii.91; Vism 27.

2. beginning, in phrase vass’ūpanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, period for entering on Lent (cp. BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, Divy 489 & see also upakaṭṭha and vassa) Vin i.253; AN i.51 (divided into 2 parts first & second, or purimikā & pacchimikā); Ja iii.332; DN-a i.8; Dhp-a i.203; Dhp-a iii.438; Vv-a 44; Pv-a 42.

fr. upa +

Upanāha

ill-will, grudge, enmity MN i.15; AN i.91, AN i.95, AN i.299; AN iv.148, AN iv.349, AN iv.456; AN v.39, AN v.41 sq., 209 310; Pp 18 = Vb 357 (pubbakālaṃ kodho aparakālaṃ upanāho Mil 289.

fr. upa + nah, see upanayhati, same in BSk.; e.g. at Mvu ii.56.

Upanāhin

(adj.-n.) one who bears ill-will, grudging, grumbling, finding fault Vin ii.89; MN i.95; DN iii.45; SN ii.206; SN iv.241; AN iii.260, AN iii.334; AN v.123, AN v.156; Snp 116; Thag 502; Ja iii.260 (kodhana + ); Pp 18; Vb 357 ■ Opp. an˚; not being angry (loc.) DN iii.47; SN ii.207; SN iv.244; AN v.124 sq.; Ja iv.463.

fr. upanāha

Upanikkhamati

to go out, to come out (up to somebody) Thig 37; Thig 169; Ja iii.244; Pv i.101 (aor. ˚nikkhami; imper. ˚nikkhamassu).

upa + nikkhamati

Upanikkhitta

laid down (secretly), placed by or on top SN v.457; Ja vi.390; Mil 80 ■ m. a spy Ja vi.394 (˚purisa).

upa + n˚

Upanikkhittaka

a spy Ja vi.409 (˚manussa), 431 (id.), 450 (id.).

= prec.

Upanikkhipati

(upa + n˚] to deposit near, to lay up Vin i.312; SN ii.136 sq.; Mil 78, Mil 80; Ne 21, Ne 22; DN-a i.125 ■ pp. upanikkhitta (q.v.).

Upanikkhipana

(nt.) putting down (near somebody), putting in the way, trap Vin iii.77.

fr. ˚nikkhipati

Upanikkhepa

“putting near”, depositing;

1. appld. to the course of memory, association of ideas Mil 78, Mil 80; cp. ˚nikkhepana SN ii.276

2. deposit, pledge Ja vi.192, Ja vi.193 (= upajūta).

fr. upa + nis + kṣip

Upanighaṃsati

to rub up against, to crush (close) up to Dhp-a i.58.

upa + ni + ghaṃsati1

Upanijjhāna

(nt.) meditation, reflection, consideration only in two phrases: ārammaṇa˚ & lakkhaṇa˚ with ref. to jhāna Ja v.251; Dhp-a i.230; Dhp-a iii.276; Vv-a 38, Vv-a 213. Cp. nijjhāyana.

upa + nijjhāna1

Upanijjhāyati

to meditate upon, consider, look at, reflect on Vin i.193 (“covet”); ii.269; iii. 118; DN i.20; AN iv.55; Mil 124; Vism 418 ■ pp upanijjhāyita (q.v.).

upa + nijjhāyati

Upanijjhāyana

meditation, reflection Mil 127; Vism 418.

for ˚nijjhāna

Upanijjhāyita

considered, looked at, thought over or about Snp p.147 (= diṭṭha, ālokita Snp-a 508).

pp. of ˚nijjhāyati

Upanidhā

(f.) comparison Nd ii.158 (= upamā; should we read upanidhāya?).

abstracted from upanidhāya or direct formation fr. upa + ni + dhā ?

Upanidhāya

(indecl.) comparing in comparison, as prep. w. acc. “compared with” MN i.374; MN iii.177 (Himavantaṃ pabbatarājānaṃ); SN ii.133 (mahāpaṭhaviṃ), 262; v.457 (Sineru-pabbata-rājānaṃ) AN iii.181 sq.; AN iv.253 sq. (dibbasukhaṃ); Thag 496 (kammaṃ); Ja ii.93; DN-a i.29, DN-a i.59, DN-a i.283.

ger. of upa + nidahati of dhā

Upanidhi

(f.)

1. deposit, pledge Vin iii.51.

2. comparison, in phrase upanidhiṃ na upeti “does not come into comparison, cannot be compared with” MN iii.177; SN ii.263; SN v.457 (so read for upanidhañ); Ud 23.

upa + ni + dhā, cp. nidhi

Upanipajjati

to lie down close to or on top of (acc.) Vism 269; Ja v.231.

upa + ni + pad

Upanibajjhati

see upanibandhati.

Upanibaddha

1. tied on to Mil 253, Mil 254.

2. closely connected with, close to Vin iii.308 (Samanta Pāsādikā).

3. attached to DN-a i.128.

pp. of ˚nibandhāti

Upanibandha

1. close connection, dependence Vism 19 (˚gocara).

2. (adj ■ ˚) connected with, dependent on Vism 235 (jīvitaṃ assāsa-passāsa˚ etc).

upa + ni + bandh

Upanibandhati

to tie close to, to bind on to, attach MN iii.132; Mil 254, Mil 412 ■ Pass. upanibajjhati to be attached to Snp 218 ■ pp. ˚nibaddha (q.v.).

upa + n˚

Upanibandhana

(adj. nt.) (adj.) closely connected with DN i.46; DN-a i.128; (nt.) tie, fetter, leash Mil 253.

upa + n˚

Upanibbatta

come out, produced DN-a i.247.

upa + nibbatta

Upanibha

(adj. somewhat like (-˚) MN i.58 = AN iii.324 (sankha-vaṇṇa˚); Ja i.207 (= sadisa C.) v.302 (tāla˚).

upa + nibha

Upanivattati

to return Snp 712; Ja iv.417; Ja v.126.

upa + n˚

Upanisā

(f.)

1. cause, means DN ii.217, DN ii.259; MN iii.71 (samādhiṃ sa-upanisaṃ); SN ii.30

32 (S A. = kāraṇa, paccaya); v.25; AN i.198; AN iii.20, AN iii.200 sq. 360; iv.99, 336, 351; v.4 sq., 313 sq.; Snp 322 (= upanissaya Snp-a 331); p. 140 (= kāraṇa, payojana Snp-a 503) Dhp 75 (cp. Dhp-a ii.102 aññā nibbānagāminī paṭipadā). 2. likeness, counterfeit [ = Sk. upaniṣad = aupamye Pāṇini i.4, 79] Ja vi.470 (= paṭirūpaka C.).

if = Vedic upaniṣad, it would be fr. upa + ni + sad, but if, as is more likely, a contracted form of upanissaya, it would be fr. upa + ni + śri. The history of this word has yet to be written, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & Divy 530 svopaniṣad

Upanisīdati

to sit close to or down by DN i.95; AN iv.10; Ja ii.347; Pv iv.163 (ger. ˚sajja = ˚sīditvā Pv-a 242); Vism 269.

upa + nisīdati of sad

Upanisevati

to pursue, follow, go up after, cling to (acc) MN i.306 ■ pp. upanisevita (q.v.).

upa + n˚

Upanisevana

(adj.) going close after, following Ja v.399 [f. ˚ī.).

fr. upanisevati

Upanisevita

gone on to, furnished with, sticking or clinging to, full of Ja v.302 (kakka˚).

pp. of upanisevati

Upanissaya

basis, reliance, support, foundation, assurance, certainty; esp. sufficing condition or qualification for Arahantship (see long article in Childers s. v.); no 9 in the 24 paccayas, Tikapatthāṇa, Tikapaṭṭhāna i.1, a term only found in the Paṭṭhāna, the Jātaka & later exegetical literature Ja i.78, Ja i.508; Ja iv.96; Ja vi.70; Ne 80 Vism 19 (˚gocara), 535 (˚paccaya); Dhs-a 315 (id.); Dhp-a ii.33; Vv-a 98; Pv-a 38 (sotāpatti-phalassa), 55 (˚sampatti) Sdhp 265, Sdhp 320.

upa + ni˚

Upanissayati

to depend or rely on (acc.) Mil 240 (attānaṃ) ■ ger. ˚nissāya (q.v.) ■ pp ˚nissita (q.v.).

upa + ni˚

Upanissāya

(adv.) [ger. of upanissayati, cp. nissayati in same use & meaning) near, close by (with acc.); depending on, by means of (acc) MN ii.3; SN ii.269; Snp 867 (taṃ), 901 (tāpa˚), 978, Pv-a 9 (Rājagahaṃ), 67 (id.) Vv-a 63 (Rājagaha-seṭṭhiṃ “with”). Cp. BSk. upaniśritya also a ger. formation, in same meaning, e.g. at Divy 54 Divy 207, Divy 505.

Upanissita

dependent or relying on Snp 877; Nd i.283, Mil 245.

upa + ni˚

Upanīta

1. brought up to or into (mostly -˚) Thig 498; Snp 677 (niraye), 774 (dukkha˚), 898 (bhava˚); Ja iii.45 (thūṇa˚); iv.271 (dukkh˚); Nd i.38; Dhp 237 (˚yaya = atikkantavayo Dhp-a iii.337, advanced in age); Pv iv.110 (dukkha˚ made to suffer). an˚; Snp 846.

2. offered, presented Ja i.88; Pv-a 274, Pv-a 286. 3. brought to conclusion, brought to an end (of life) Ja v.375 (= maraṇa-santikaṃ u. C.).

4. bringing up (for trial), charging MN i.251 (vacanapatha, cp. upanīya). Upaniya (iyya, eyya)

pp. of upaneti

Upanīya (˚īyya, ˚eyya)

“bringing up” (for trial), charging, accusing DN i.107 (vadati, cp. DN-a i.276); AN i.172 (˚vācā); cp. upanīta 3.

ger. of upaneti

Upanīla

(adj.) somewhat dark-blue Ja v.168.

upa + nīla

Upaneti

to bring up to, conduce, adduce; to present, give Ja i.200; Mil 396; DN-a i.276; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 43 Pv-a 49, Pv-a 53, Pv-a 74 ■ Pass. upanīyati (˚niyyati)

1. to be brought (up to) Ja iv.398; ppr. ˚nīyamāna Ja i.200; Pv-a 5.

2. to be brought to conclusion, or to an end (of life) MN ii.68; SN i.2.

3. to be carried along or away AN i.155 ■ pp. upanīta (q.v.) ■ ger. upanīya (q.v.).

upa + neti

Upanti

(adv.) near, before, in presence of Ja iv.337.

upa + anti

Upantika

(adj.) nt. acc. ˚ṃ near Ja iv.337; Ja v.58 (with gen.); vi.418 (so read for ˚ā); loc. ˚e near or quite near Pv ii.915 (= samīpe gehassa Pv-a 120).

upa + antika

Upapacciyati

see uppaccati.

Upapajjati

to get to, be reborn in (acc.) to originate, rise Vin iii.20 (nirayaṃ); AN iii.415; AN v.292 sq.; Snp 584; Iti 13 (nirayaṃ), 14 (sugatiṃ; v.l. upp˚), 67 (saggaṃ lokaṃ; v.l. upp˚); 43 = Dhp 307 (nirayaṃ); Dhp 126, Dhp 140; Pv i.107 (v.l. BB. udapajjatha = uppajja Pv-a 50); Pp 16, Pp 51, Pp 60; Ne 37, Ne 99, cp. Kv 611 sq. pp. upapannā (q.v.) ■ Caus. upapādeti & pp.; upapādita (q.v.).

doubtful whether a legitimate form as upa + pad or a diaeretic form of uppajjati = ud + pad. In this case all passages ought to go under the latter. Trenckner however (Notes 77) defends upa˚ & considers in many cases upp˚ a substitution for upa. The diaeresis may be due to metre, as nearly all forms are found in poetry The v.l. upp˚ is apparently frequent; but it is almost impossible to distinguish between upap˚ and upp˚ in the Sinhalese writing, and either the scribe or the reader may mistake one for the other

Upapatti

1. birth, rebirth, (lit. attainment) MN i.82; SN iii.53; SN iv.398; AN v.289 sq.; Snp 139, Snp 643, Snp 836; Dhp 419 (sattānaṃ); in var specifications as: deva˚ rebirth among gods Pv-a 6, Pv-a 81 devaloka˚ AN i.115; kāma˚ existence in the sensuous universe DN iii.218; Iti 94; arūpa˚ in the formless spheres Vb 172, Vb 267, Vb 296; rūpa˚, in the world of form Vb 171 sq., 263 sq.; 299; niraya˚ in Purgatory Pv-a 53. 2. occasion, opportunity (lit. “coming to”); object for in dāna˚ objects suitable for gifts AN iv.239 (where 8 enumd., see dāna).

-deva a god by birth (or rebirth) Vv-a 18; also given as uppatti-deva, e.g. at Kp-a 123. See detail under deva.

fr. upa + pad, cp. uppatti

Upapattika

(-˚) (adj.) belonging to a birth or rebirth; in peta˚ born as a Peta Pv-a 119 ■ Cp upapātika.

fr. upapatti

Upapanna

1. (-˚) possessed of, having attained, being furnished with Snp 68 (thāma-bala) 212, 322, 1077 (ñāṇa˚, cp. Nd ii.266b and uppanna-ñāṇa). 2. reborn, come to existence in (with acc.) SN i.35 (Avihaṃ, expld. by C. not quite to the point as “nipphattivasena upagata”, i.e. gone to A, on account of their perfection. Should we read uppanna?) AN v.68.

pp. of upapajjati

Upaparikkhaṇa

(nt.) = upaparikkhā Vv-a 232.

Upaparikkhati

to investigate, ascertain, test, examine MN i.133, MN i.292, MN i.443; SN ii.216; SN iii.42, SN iii.140; SN iv.174; Ja i.489 Ja ii.400; Ja v.235; Mil 91, Mil 293; Dāvs v.27; Sdhp 539; Pv-a 60 (paññāya u. = ñatvā), 140 (= viceyya).

upa + pari + īkṣ; cp. BSk. upaparīkṣate Divy 5, Divy 230

Upaparikkhā

(f.) investigation, examination Vin iii.314; MN ii.175 (attha˚); AN iii.381 sq.; AN iv.221; AN v.126; Dhs 16, Dhs 20 Dhs 292; Pp 25; Ne 8, Ne 42; DN-a i.171.

fr. upaparikkhati, cp. BSk. upaparīkṣā Divy 3 etc.

Upaparikkhin

(adj.) investigating, reflecting, testing SN iii.61; AN iv.221 sq., 296, 328. Cp BSk. upaparīkṣaka Divy 212.

fr. upaparikkhati

Upapāta

= upapatti rebirth Vin iii.4; SN iv.59 (cut˚); Pp 50.

but der. fr. pat (cp. uppāda1 = ud + pat but uppāda2 = ud + pad ) with the meaning of the casual & unusual

Upapātika

(adj.) = opapātika i.e. rebirth without parents, as a deva DA on DN iii.107 Thag-a 207.

fr. upapāta but evidently mixed with uppāda1 and uppāda2, cp. upapajjati, upapatti & BSk upapāduka Av. SN ii.94, SN ii.95; Divy 523

Upapādita

accomplished Ja ii.236.

pp. of upapādeti, Caus. of upapajjati

Upapādeti

to execute, perform Ja v.346.

Caus. of upapajjati

Upapāramī

(f.) minor perfection Bv i.77 (opp. paramattha-pāramī); Dhp-a i.84.

upa + pāramī, cp. upa 5

Upapisana

grinding, powder, in añjan˚; powdered ointment (for the eyes) Vin i.203; Vin ii.112.

upa + piṣ

Upapurohita

a minor or assistant priest Ja iv.304.

upa + purohita, see upa 5

Upapīla

at DN i.135 read uppīḷa (q.v.).

Upapphusati

to touch; aor. upapphusi Ja v.417, Ja v.420.

upa + phusati, of spṛś

Upaplavati

to swim or float to (acc.), in uncertain reading as aor. upaplaviṃ at Snp 1145 (dīpā dīpaṃ upaplaviṃ floatcd from land to land vv.ll. at Snp-a 606 uppalaviṃ & upallaviṃ; all MSS. of Nd ii.p. 54 & no. 160 write upallaviṃ). Perhaps we should better read; uppalaviṃ (or upallaviṃ) as diaeretic form for *upplaviṃ, aor. of uppilavati (or uplavati), q. v Expld. at Nd ii.160 by samupallaviṃ.

upa + plavati, cp. uppilavati

Upabbajati

to go to, resort to, visit Thag 1052; Ja iv.270, Ja iv.295; Ja v.495 (= upagacchati C.); vi.43.

upa + vraj

Upabbūḷha

see sam˚.

Upabrūhaṇa

(nt.) expansion, increase, augmentation Vism 145; Dhs-a 117.

fr. upa + bṛh2, cp. BSk. upabṛṃhita Jtm 3195

Upabhunjaka

(adj.) one who eats or enjoys Vism 555.

fr. next

Upabhunjati

to enjoy Ja iii.495; Ja v.350 (inf. ˚bhottuṃ)-grd. upabhogga ■ pp. upabhattu (q.v.).

upa + bhuj

Upabhutta

enjoyed Dāvs iii.65.

pp. of upabhunjati

Upabhoga

enjoyment, profit Vin iv.267; Ja ii.431; Ja iv.219 (v.l. paribhoga); vi. 361; Mil 201, Mil 403; Pv-a 49, Pv-a 220 (˚paribhoga); Dhp-a iv.7 (id.); Sdhp 268, Sdhp 341, Sdhp 547.

fr. upa + bhuj cp. upabhuñjati

Upabhogin

(adj.) enjoying Mil 267.

fr. upabhuñjati

Upabhogga

(adj.) to be enjoyed, enjoyable Mil 201.

Sk. upabhogya, grd. of upabhuñjati

Upama

(adj.) “coming quite or nearly up to” i.e. like, similar, equal DN i.239 (andha-veṇ˚); MN i.432 (taruṇ˚ a young looking fellow); AN iv.11 udak˚ puggala a man like water); Pv i.11 (khett˚ like a well cultivated field; = sadisa Pv-a 7); Pv-a 2, Pv-a 8 etc ■ Note. ūpama metri causa see ū˚ and cp. opamma & upamā.;

compar ■ superl. formation fr. upa, cp. Lat. summus fr. *(s)ub-mo

Upamā

(f.) likeness, simile, parable, example (cp. formula introducing u. SN ii.114; MN i.148); Snp 705 (cp. Dhp 129, Dhp 130), 1137 (= upanidhā sadisaṃ paṭibhāgo Nd ii.158); Iti 114; Vism 341 Vism 478, Vism 512, Vism 582 sq., 591 sq.; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 112 (dhen˚); Snp-a 329, Snp-a 384; Sdhp 29, Sdhp 44, Sdhp 259.

-vacana expression of comparison (usually applied to part. evaṃ) Snp-a 13, Snp-a 472; Kp-a 185, Kp-a 195, Kp-a 208, Kp-a 212; Pv-a 25.

f. of upama in abstract meaning

Upamāna

(nt.) comparison, the 2nd part of the comparison Ja v.341; Vv-a 13.

fr. upa +

Upamānita

measured out, likened, like, comparable Thig 382 (= sadisa Thag-a 255).

pp. of caus. upa +

Upameti

to measure one thing by another, to compare Ja vi.252; Vism 314 (˚metvā, read ˚netvā?).

upa +

Upameyya

(adj.) to be compared, that which is to be likened or compared, the 1st part of a comparison Vv-a 13.

grd. of upa +

Upaya

approach, undertaking, taking up; clinging to, attachment, only as adj. (-˚) in an˚; (anûpaya metri causā) not going near, aloof, unattached SN i.141, SN i.181; SN ii.284; Snp 786, Snp 787, Snp 897 (cp. Snp-a 558); and in rūpūpaya (vv.ll. rūpupaya & rūpupāya “clinging to form” (etc.) SN iii.53 = Nd i.25 = Nd ii.570 (+ rup’ārammaṇa).

fr. upa + i, cp. upāya

Upayācati

to beg, entreat, pray to Ja vi.150 (divyaṃ).

upa + yācati

Upayācitaka

(nt.) begging, asking, praying, propitiation Ja vi.150 (= devatānaṃ āyācana).

of adj. upa + yācita + ka; pp. of yācati

Upayāti

to go to, to approach SN i.76; SN ii.118 (also Caus. ˚yāpeti ); Dpvs vi.69; Sdhp 579.

upa + yāti of

Upayāna

(nt.) nearing, approach, arrival DN i.10; DN-a i.94.

fr. upa + , cp. BSk. upayāna Jtm 3163

Upayānaka

a crab Ja vi.530.

fr. upayāna

Upayuñjati

to combine, connect with; to use, apply; ppr. med. upayujjamāna Vv-a 245 (preferably be read as ˚bhuñjamāna, with reference to enjoying drink & food).;

upa + yuj

Upayoga

connection, combination; employment, application Ja vi.432 (nagare upayogaṃ netvā for use in the town? v.l. upabhogaṃ). Usually in cpd ˚vacana as tt. g. meaning either combined or condensed expression, ellipsis Snp-a 386; Kp-a 236; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 135 or the acc. case, which is frequently substituted for the foll. cases: sāmi-vacana Snp-a 127; Pv-a 102; bhumma Snp-a 140; Kp-a 116; karaṇa˚ Snp-a 148; sampadāna˚ Ja v.214; Snp-a 317; itthambhūta˚ Snp-a 441; nissakka˚ Ja v.498.

fr. upa + yuj

Uparacita

formed Thag-a 211; Sdhp 616.

pp. of upa + rac

Uparajja

(nt.) viceroyalty AN iii.154 (v.l. opa˚); Ja i.511; Ja iv.176; DN-a i.134.

upa + rajja, cp. uparaja

Uparata

having ceased, desisting from (-˚), restraining oneself (cp. orata) Vin i.245 (ratt-ûparata abstaining from food at night = ratti-bhojanato uparata DN-a i.77); DN i.5 (id.); MN i.319 (bhaya˚); Snp 914 (virata etc. Nd i.337); Mil 96, Mil 307; Dhs-a 403 (vihiṃs˚).

pp. of uparamati

Uparati

(f.) ceasing, resting; cessation MN i.10; SN iv.104; Mil 274.

fr. upa + ram

Uparamati

to cease, desist, to be quiet Ja iii.489; Ja v.391 (v.l. for upāramati, also in C.); Mil 152.

upa + ram

Uparamā

(f.) cessation Mil 41, Mil 44 (an˚).

cp. lit. Sk. uparama, to uparamati

Uparava

noise Ja ii.2.

fr. upa + ru

Uparājā

a secondary or deputy king, a viceroy Ja i.504; Ja ii.316; Dhp-a i.392.

upa + rājā; see upa 5

Upari

(indecl.) over, above (prep. & prefix) 1. (adv. on top, above (opp. adho below) Vin iv.46 (opp. heṭṭhā) Ja vi.432; Kp-a 248 (= uddhaṃ; opp. adho); Snp-a 392 (abtimukho u. gacchati explaining paccuggacchati of Snp 442); Pv-a 11 (heṭṭhā manussa-saṇṭhānaṃ upari sūkara-s˚) 47 (upari chattaṃ dhāriyamāna), 145 (sabbattha upari upon everything).

2. (prep. w. gen) with ref. either to space = on top of, on, upon, as in kassa upari sāpo patissati on whom shall the curse fall? Dhp-a i.41; attano u. patati falls upon himself Pv-a 45; etissā upari kodho anger on her, i.e. against her Vv-a 68; or to time = on top of, after, later, as in catunnaṃ māsānaṃ upari after 4 months Pv-a 52 (= uddhaṃ catūhi māsehi of Pv i.1012) sattannaṃ vassa-satānaṃ upari after 700 years Pv-a 144. 3. (adv. in compn., meaning “upper, higher, on the upper or top side”, or “on top of”, if the phrase is in loc. case See below.

-cara walking in the air, suspended, flying Ja iii.454 -pāsāda the upper story of a palace, loc. on the terrace DN i.112 (loc.); Pv-a 105, Pv-a 279. -piṭṭhi top side, platform Vin ii.207 (loc). -bhaddaka Name of a tree [either Sk bhadraka Pinus Deodara, or bhadra Nauclea Cadamba after Kern, Toev. s. v.] Ja vi.269. -bhāga the upper part used in instr., loc or aor. in sense of “above, over beyond” Ja iv.232 (instr.). -bhāva higher state or condition MN i.45 (opp. adh˚). -mukha face upwards DN-a i.228; Pp A 214. -vasana upper garment Pv-a 49. -vāta higher than the wind, loc. on the wind Ja ii.11; or in ˚passe (loc.) on the upper (wind-) side Dhp-a ii.17. -visāla extended on top, i.e. of great width, very wide Ja iii.207 -vehāsa high in the air (˚-), in ˚kuṭī a lofty or open air chamber, or a room in the upper story of the Vihāra Vin iv.46 (what the C. means by expln. majjhimassa purisassa asīsa-ghaṭṭā “not knocking against the head of a middle-(sized) man” is not quite clear). -sacca higher truth Pv-a 66 (so read for upari sacca).

Vedic upari, der. fr. upa, Idg. *uper(i); Gr. υπερ, Lat. s-uper; Goth. ufar, Ohg. ubir = Ger. über E. over; Oir. for

Upariṭṭha

(adj.) highest, topmost, most excellent Thag 910. Cp. next.

superl. formation fr. upari in analogy to seṭṭha

Upariṭṭhima

(adj) = upariṭṭha uparima Dhs 1016, Dhs 1300, Dhs 1401; Pp 16, Pp 17 (sañyojanāni = uddhaṃbhāgiya-sañyojanāni Pp A 198).

double-superl. formation after analogy of seṭṭha, pacchima & heṭṭhima: heṭṭhā

Uparima

(adj.) uppermost, above, overhead DN iii.189 (disā); Ne 88. Cp. upariṭṭhima.

upari + ma, superl. formation

Upariya

(adv.) above, on top, in compd. heṭṭh˚; below and above Vism 1.

fr. upari

Uparujjhati

to be stopped, broken, annihilated, destroyed DN i.223; Thag 145; Iti 106; Snp 724, Snp 1036, Snp 1110; Nd ii.159 (= nirujjhati vūpasammati atthangacchati); Mil 151; Sdhp 280. pp. uparuddha.

Sk. uparudhyate, Pass. of uparundhati

Uparuddha

stopped, ceased Mil 151 (˚jīvita).

pp. of uparujjhati

Uparundhati

to break up, hinder, stop, keep in check MN i.243; Ja i.358; Thag 143, Thag 1117; Snp 118 Snp 916 (pot. uparundhe, but uparuddhe Nd i.346 = uparuddheyya etc.); Mil 151, Mil 245, Mil 313 ■ ger. uparundhiya Thag 525; Snp 751; aor. uparundhi Ja iv.133; Pv-a 271 ■ Pass. uparujjhati (q.v.).

upa + rudh

Uparūḷha

grown again, recovered Ja iv.408 (cakkhu).

upa + rūḷha, pp. of ruh

Uparocati

to please (intrs.) Ja vi.64.

upa + ruc

Uparodati

1. to lament Ja vi.551 (fut ˚rucchati)

2. to sing in a whining tone Ja v.304.

upa + rud

Uparodha

obstacle; breaking up, destruction, end Ja iii.210, Ja iii.252; Pv iv.15; Mil 245, Mil 313.

fr. upa + rudh

Uparodhana

(nt.) breaking up, destruction Snp 732, Snp 761.

fr. upa + rudh

Uparodheti

to cause to break up; to hinder, stop; destroy Vin iii.73.

Caus of uparundhati

Uparopa

“little plant”, sapling Vin ii.154. See also next.

upa + ropa, cp. upa 5

Uparopaka

= uparopa, sapling Ja ii.345; Ja iv.359.

Upala

a stone Dāvs iii.87.

Lit. Sk. upala, etym. uncertain

Upalakkhaṇā

(f.) & ˚aṃ (nt.) discrimination SN iii.261 (an˚); Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 292, Dhs 1057; Pp 25; Vv-a 240.

upa + lakkhaṇa

Upalakkheti

to distinguish, discriminate Vism 172.

upa + lakṣay

Upaladdha

acquired, got, found Ja vi.211 (˚bāla; v.l. paluddha˚); Sdhp 4, Sdhp 386.

pp. of upalabhati

Upaladdhi

(f.) acquisition; knowledge Mil 268; Vv-a 279.

fr. upa + labh

Upalabhati

to receive, get, obtain to find, make out Mil 124 (kāraṇaṃ); usually in Pass. upalabbhati to be found or got, to be known; to exist MN i.138 (an˚); SN i.135; SN iv.384; Snp 858; Pv ii.111 (= paccanubhavīyati Pv-a 146); Kv 1, 2; Mil 25; Pv-a 87.

upa + labh

Upalāpana

(nt.) talking over or down, persuasion; diplomacy, humbug DN ii.76; Mil 115, Mil 117.

fr. upa + lap

Upalāpeti

to persuade, coax, prevail upon, talk over, cajole Vin i.119; Vin iii.21; Ja ii.266; Ja iii.265 Ja iv.215; Pv-a 36, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 276.

Caus. of upa + lap

Upalāḷita

caressed, coaxed Sdhp 301.

pp. of upalāḷeti

Upalāḷeti

.

1. to caress, coax, fondle, win over Ja ii.267; Vism 300; Sdhp 375.

2. to boast of, exult in Ja ii.151 ■ pp. upalāḷita (q.v.).

Caus. of upa + lal; cp. BSk. upalāḍayati Divy 114, Divy 503

Upaḷāseti

to sound forth, to (make) sound (a bugle) DN ii.337 (for uppaḷāseti? q.v.).

upa + Caus. of las

Upalikkhati

to scratch, scrape, wound AN iii.94 sq. (= vijjhati C.).

upa + likh

Upalitta

smeared with (-˚), stained, tainted Thig 467 (cp. Thag-a 284; T. reads apalitta) Pp 56. Usually neg. an˚; free from taint, undefiled MN i.319, MN i.386; Mil 318; metri causa anūpalitta SN i.141 SN ii.284; Snp 211, Snp 392, Snp 468, Snp 790, Snp 845; Dhp 353 (cp. Dhp-a iv.7).

pp. of upalimpati

Upalippati

to be defiled; to stick to, hang on to Snp 547, Snp 812; Ja iii.66 (= allīyati C.); Mil 250, Mil 337.

Pass. of upalimpati

Upalimpati

to smear, defile DN ii.18; Vin iii.312; Ja i.178; Ja iv.435; Mil 154 ■ Pass. upalippati, pp upalitta (q.v.).

upa + lip

Upalepa

defilement Ja iv.435.

fr. upa + lip

Upalohitaka

(adj. reddish Ja iii.21 (= rattavaṇṇa C.).

upa + lohita + ka, see upa 5

Upallaviṃ

Snp 1145 see upaplavati.

Upavajja

(adj.) blameworthy SN iv.59, SN iv.60; AN ii.242. an˚; blameless, without fault SN iv.57 sq AN iv.82; Mil 391.

grd. of upavadati

Upavajjatā

(f.) blameworthiness SN iv.59 (an˚).

abstr. fr. upavajja

Upavaṇṇeti

to describe fully Sdhp 487.

upa + vaṇṇeti

Upavattati

to come to pass, to take place Ja vi.58.

upa + vṛt

Upavadati

to tell (secretly) against, to tell tales; to insult, blame DN i.90; SN iii.125 (attā sīlato na upav.); AN ii.121 (id.); v.88; Ja ii.196; Pv-a 13.

upa + vad

Upavana

(nt.) a kind of wood, miniature wood, park Ja iv.431; Ja v.249; Mil 1; Vv-a 170 (= vana), 344; Thag-a 201; Pv-a 102 (ārām˚), 177 (mahā˚).

upa + vana, see upa 5

Upavasati

.

1. to dwell in or at Ja iii.113; DN-a i.139.

2. to live (trs.); to observe, keep (a holy day); only in phrase uposathaṃ upavasati to observe the fast day SN i.208; AN i.142, AN i.144, AN i.205; Snp 402 (ger upavassa); Ja iii.444; Snp-a 199; Pv-a 209 ■ pp. upavuttha (q.v.). See also uposatha.

upa + vasiti

Upavāda

insulting, railing; blaming, finding fault Nd i.386; Pv-a 269; an˚; (adj.) not grumbling or abusing Dhp 185 (anûpa˚ metri causa).

fr. upa + vad

Upavādaka

(adj.) blaming, finding fault, speaking evil of (gen.), generally in phrase ariyānaṃ u insulting the gentle Vin iii.5; AN i.256; AN iii.19; AN iv.178 AN v.68; Iti 58, Iti 99an˚; Pts i.115; Pp 60.

fr. upavāda

Upavādin

(adj. = upavādaka; in ariy˚; SN i.225; SN ii.124; SN v.266; Pv iv.339. an˚ MN i.360.

fr. upavāda

Upavāyati

to blow on or towards somebody MN i.424; AN iv.46; Thag 544; Pv iii.66; Mil 97.

upa + vāyati

Upavāsa

keeping a prescribed day, fasting, self-denial, abstaining from enjoyments [Same as uposatha; used extensively in BSk. in meaning of uposatha, e.g. at Avs i.338, Avs i.339; Divy 398 in phrase aṣṭânga-samanvāgataṃ upavāsaṃ upavasati] AN v.40 (? uncertain; vv.ll. upāsaka, ovāpavāssa, yopavāsa); Ja vi.508; Snp-a 199 (in expln. of uposatha).

fr. upa + vas, see upavasati

Upavāsita

(adj.) (upa + vāsita] perfumed Pv-a 164 (for gandha-samerita).

Upavāhana

(nt.) carrying away, washing away Snp 391 (sanghāṭi-raj-ûpa˚ = paṃsu-malādino sanghāṭirajassa dhovanaṃ Snp-a 375).

upa + vāhana

Upavicāra

applying (one’s mind) to, discrimination DN iii.245 (domanass˚); MN iii.239; SN iv.232 (somanass˚ etc.); AN iii.363 sq.; AN v.134; Pts i.17; Dhp 8, Dhp 85, Dhp 284; Vb 381.

upa + vicāra; cp. BSk. upavicāra Divy 19, trsld on p. 704 in Notes by “perplexed by doubts” (?)

Upavijaññā

(f.) (adj.) about to bring forth a child, nearing childbirth MN i.384; Thig 218; Ud 13; Dāvs iii.38 Thag-a 197.

grd. formation of upa + vi + jan, cp. Sk. vijanya

Upavisati

to come near, to approach a person Ja iv.408; Ja v.377; aor. upāvisi Snp 415, Snp 418 (āsajja upāvisi = samīpaṃ gantvā nisīdi Snp-a 384).

upa + visati

Upavīna

the neck of a lute SN iv.197; Mil 53.

upa + vīṇā

Upavīta

covered (?) at Vv-a 8 in phrase “vettalatâdīhi upavītaṃ āsanaṃ” should prob. be read upanīta (vv. ll uparivīta & upajita); or could it be pp. of upavīyati (woven with)?

?

Upavīyati

te be woven Ja vi.26.

Pass. of upa + 2 to weave

Upavuttha

celebrated, kept (of a fastday) AN i.211 (uposatha); Snp 403 (uposatha). Cp. uposatha.

pp. of upavasati

Upavhyati

to invoke, call upon DN ii.259; SN i.168.

upa + ā + , cp. avhayati for *āhvayati

Upasaṃvasati

to live with somebody, to associate with (acc.) Ja i.152.

upa + saṃ + vas

Upasaṃharaṇa

(nt.) drawing together, bringing up to, comparison Vism 232 sq.; Ja v.186.

fr. upasaṃharati

Upasaṃharati

1. to collect, bring together, heap up, gather Mil 132.

2. to dispose arrange, concentrate, collect, focus Vin iv.220 (kāyaṃ) MN i.436 (cittaṃ), 468 (cittaṃ tathattāya); SN v.213 sq. (id.) Dhs-a 309 (cakkhuṃ).

3. to take hold of, take care of, provide, serve, look after Mil 232.

upa + saṃ + hṛ;

Upasaṃhāra

taking hold of, taking up, possession, in devat˚; being seized or possessed by a god Mil 298.

fr. upa + saṃ + hṛ;

Upasaṃhita

(adj.) accompanied by, furnished or connected with (-˚) DN i.152; MN i.37 MN i.119 (chand˚); SN ii.220 (kusal˚); iv.60 (kām˚), 79 (id.) Snp 341 (rāg˚), 1132 (giraṃ vaṇṇ˚ = vaṇṇena upetaṃ Nd2) Thag 970; Ja i.6; Ja ii.134, Ja ii.172; Ja v.361.

pp. of upa + saṃ + dhā

Upasaṅkamati

1. to go up to (with acc.), to approach come near; freq. in stock phrase “yena (Pokkharasādissa parivesanā) ten’ upasankami, upasankamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi”, e.g. Vin i.270; DN i.109; DN ii.1, and passim ■ aor. ˚sankami Pv. ii.210; Snp-a 130, Snp-a 140; Kp-a 116; Pv-a 88; ger. ˚sankamitvā Snp-a 140; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 12 Pv-a 19, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 88; ˚sankamma Snp 166, Snp 418, Snp 460, Snp 980, Snp 986; inf ˚sankamituṃ Pv-a 79 ■. 2. to attend on (as a physician), to treat Mil 169, Mil 233, Mil 353; DN-a i.7.

upa + saṃ + kram, cp. BSk. upasankramati Av. SN i.209

Upasaṅkamana

(nt.) going near, approach MN ii.176; SN v.67 = Iti 107; Pv-a 232.

fr. upasankamati

Upasaṅkheyya

(adj.) to be prepared, produced or contracted Snp 849 (= ˚sankhātabba Snp-a 549; cp. Nd i.213).

grd of upa + sankharoti

Upasagga

1. attack, trouble, danger Vin i.33; AN i.101; Thig 353; Dhp 139 (where spelt upassaga, cp. Dhp-a iii.70); Mil 418.

2. (tt. g. prefix, preposition Ja ii.67 (saṃ), 126 (apa); iii.121 (ni pa); DN-a i.245 (adhi); Kp-a 101 (sa˚ and an˚); Pv-a 88 (atthe nipāto a particle put in metri causa, expln. of handa) Dhs-a 163, Dhs-a 405.

Sk upasarga, of upa + sṛj

Upasaṇṭhapanā

(f.) stopping, causing to cease, settling Pp 18 (see also an˚; ).

fr. upa + sanṭḥapeti

Upasanta

calmed, composed, tranquil, at peace MN i.125; SN i.83, SN i.162; AN iii.394; Snp 848, Snp 919, Snp 1087, Snp 1099; Nd i.210, Nd i.352, Nd i.434; Nd ii.161; Dhp 201, Dhp 378; Mil 394; Dhp-a iii.260; Dhp-a iv.114; Pv-a 132 (= santa).

pp. of upa + śam, cp. upasammati

Upasama

calm, quiet, appeasement, allaying, assuagement, tranquillizing Vin i.10; SN iv.331 = SN v.421 (in freq. phrase upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati; see nibbāna iii.7); DN i.50; DN iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 229 (as one of the 4 objects of adhiṭṭhāna, viz. paññā˚ sacca˚ cāga˚ upasama˚); MN i.67; MN iii.246; SN i.30, SN i.34 (sīlena), 46 citta-v-ûpasama), 48 55; ii.223, 277; iii.86 (sankhārānaṃ… v-ūpasamo) DN ii.157; SN i.158 (see vūpasama and sankhāra); (ariyaṃ maggaṃ dukkh˚-gāminaṃ); iv.62, 331; v.65 (avūpasama), 179 234 (˚gāmin), 378 sq.; AN i.3 (avūpasama), 30, 42; ii.14 (vitakk˚); iii.325 sq.; v.216, 238 sq.; Snp 257, Snp 724, Snp 735 Snp 737; Iti 18 (dukkh˚) 83; Dhp 205; Nd i.351; Ja i.97; Pts i.95; Mil 170, Mil 248; Vism 197 (˚ânussati); Sdhp 587 Cp. vi˚ (vū˚).

Sk. upaśama, upa + śam

Upasamati

to appease, calm, allay, assuage Snp 919; Thag 50 (pot. upasame = upasameyya nibbāpeyya Nd i.352) ■ pp. upasanta q.v.).

upa + śam in trs. meaning for usual sammati in intrs. meaning

Upasamāna

(nt.) = upasama Thag 421; Sdhp 335 (dukkh˚).

Upasampajjati

to attain, enter on, acquire, take upon oneself usually in ger. upasampajja MN i.89; SN iii.8; AN iv.13; AN v.69; Dhs 160 (see Dhs-a 167) DN-a i.313; Snp-a 158 ■ pp. upasampanna (q.v.).

upa + sampajjati

Upasampadā

(f.)

1. taking, acquiring; obtaining, taking upon oneself, undertaking DN ii.49; MN i.93; AN iii.65; Dhp 183 (cp. Dhp-a iii.236) Ne 44 (kusalassa).

2. (in special sense) taking up the bhikkhuship, higher ordination, admission to the privileges of recognized bhikkhus [cp. BSk. upasampad ˚padā Divy 21, Divy 281 etc.] Vin i.12, Vin i.20, Vin i.95, Vin i.146 and passim; iii.15; iv.52; DN i.176, DN i.177, DN i.202; SN i.161; AN iv.276 sq. & passim; Dhp-a ii.61 (pabbajjā + ); Pv-a 54 (laddh one who has received ordination), 179 (id.).

fr. upa + saṃ + pad

Upasampanna

obtained, got, received; in special sense of having attained the recognition of bhikkhuship ordained [cp. BSk. upasampanna Divy 281] SN i.161; AN v.70; Vin iii.24; Vin iv.52, Vin iv.130; Mil 13.

pp. of upasampajjati

Upasampādeti

1. to attain to, obtain, produce Dhs-a 167 (= nipphādeti).

2. to admit to bhikkhuship, to ordain Vin iv.130, Vin iv.226, Vin iv.317 (= vutṭhāpeti); grd. ˚etabba Vin i.64 sq.; Vin iv.48; AN v.72.

Denom. fr. upasampadā

Upasamphassati

to embrace Ja v.297.

upa + sam + spṛś

Upasammati

to grow calm, to cease, to be settled or composed, to be appeased SN i.62, SN i.221; Dhp 100 sq.

Sk. upasamyati, upa + śam in intrs. function

Upasavyāna

(nt.?) “a robe worn over the left shoulder” (Hardy, Index to ed.) Vv-a 166 (v.l. upavasavya).

?

Upasiṃsaka

(adj.). striving after, longing or wishing for Mil 393 (āhār˚ Morris JP T S. 1884, 75 proposes reading upasinghaka).

fr. upa + siṃsati = śaṃs, cp. āsiṃsaka

Upasiṅghaka

(adj.) sniffing after Ja ii.339; Ja iii.144; Mil 393 (? see upasiṃsaka).

fr. upa + siṅgh

Upasiṅghati

1. to sniff at SN i.204 (padumaṃ); i.455; Ja ii.339, Ja ii.408; Ja vi.336.

2. to sniff up Vin i.279 ■ Caus. āyati to touch gently Kp-a 136 Caus. II. apeti to touch lightly, to stroke Ja iv.407.

upa + siṅgh

Upasiṅghita

scented, smelled at (loc.) Ja vi.543 (sisaṃhi, C. for upagghata).

pp. of upasinghati

Upasussati

to dry up MN i.481; Snp 433; Ja i.71.

upa + sussati

Upasecana

(nt.) sprinkling over, i.e. sauce Thag 842; Ja ii.422; Ja iii.144; Ja iv.371 (maṃs˚); vi.24. See also nandi˚ & maṃsa˚.;

fr. upa + sic

Upaseniyā

(f.) (a girl) who likes to be always near (her mother), a pet, darling, fondling Ja vi.64 (= mātaraṃ upagantvā sayanika C.).

Sk. upa + either śayanika of śayana, or sayaniya of śī

Upasevati

1. to practice, frequent, pursue Mil 355.

2. to serve, honour, Snp 318 (˚amāna). pp. upasevita (q.v.).

upa + sev

Upasevanā

(f.) serving, pursuing, following, service, honouring, pursuit SN iii.53 = Nd i.25 Nd ii.570 (nand˚ pleasure-seeking); Iti 68 (bāl˚ & dhīr˚) Snp 249 (utu˚ observance of the seasons); Mil 351.

abstr. fr. upasevati

Upasevita

visited, frequented Pv-a 147 (for sevita).

pp. of upasevati

Upasevin

(adj.) (-˚) pursuing, following, going after AN iii.136 (vyatta˚); Mil 264 (rāj˚); Dhp-a iii.482 (para-dār˚).

fr. upasevati

Upasobhati

to appear beautiful, to shine forth Thag 1080 ■ Caus. ˚sobheti to make beautiful embellish, adorn Vv 526; Ja v.132; Pv-a 153 ■ pp upasobhita (q.v.).

upa + śubh

Upasobhita

embellished, beautified, adorned Pv-a 153, Pv-a 187; Sdhp 593.

pp. of upasobheti

Upassagga

see upasagga.

Upassaṭṭha

“thrown upon”, overcome, visited, afflicted, ruined, oppressed SN iv.29; AN iii.226 (udak˚); Ja i.61; Ja ii.239.

Sk. upasṛṣṭa, pp. of upa + sṛj

Upassaya

abode, resting home, dwelling, asylum SN i.32, SN i.33; Vv 684 Mil 160. Esp. freq. as bhikkhuni˚; or bhikkhun˚; a nunnery Vin ii.259; Vin iv.265, Vin iv.292; SN ii.215; Ja i.147, Ja i.428; Mil 124.

fr. upa + śri, cp. assaya & missaya

Upassāsa

breathing Ja i.160.

upa + assāsa; upa + ā + śvas

Upassuti

(f.) listening to, attention SN ii.75; SN iv.91; Ja v.100; Mil 92.

fr. upa + śru

Upassutika

(adj.) one who listens, an eavesdropper Ja v.81.

fr. upassuti

Upahacca

(˚-)

1. spoiling, impairing, defiling Ja v.267 (manaṃ)

2. reducing, cutting short only in phrase upahacca-parinibbāyin “coming to extinction after reducing the time of rebirths (or after having almost reached the destruction of life”) SN v.70, SN v.201 sq. AN i.233 sq.; AN iv.380; Pp 17 (upagantvā kālakiriyaṃ āyukkhayassa āsane ṭhatvā ti attho Pp A 199); Ne 190 ■ The term is not quite clear; there seems to have existed very early confusion with upapacca → upapajja → uppajja, as indicated by BSk. upapadya-parinirvāyin, and by remarks of C. on Kv 268, as quoted at Kvu trsln. 158, 159.

ger. of upahanti

Upahaññati

to be spoilt or injured Snp 584; Ja iv.14; Mil 26.

Pass. of upahanti

Upahata

injured, spoilt; destroyed DN i.86 (phrase khata + upahata); SN i.238 (na sûpahata “not easily put out” trsl.); ii.227; AN i.161; Dhp 134; Ja vi.515; Mil 223, Mil 302; Dhp-a ii.33 (an˚).

The formula at DN i.86 (khata + upahata) is doubtful as to its exact meaning According to Bdhgh it means “one who has destroyed his foundation of salvation, i.e. one who cannot be saved. Thus at DN-a i.237: “bhinna-patiṭṭho jāto, i.e. without a basis. Cp. remarks under khata. The trsln at Dial. i.95 gives it as “deeply affected and touched in heart”: doubtful. The phrase upahaccaparinibbāyin may receive light from upahata.

pp. of upahanti

Upahattar

a bringer (of) MN i.447 sq.

Sk. *upahartṛ, n. ag. of upa + hṛ;

Upahanti

(& ˚hanati Ja i.454) to impair, injure; to reduce, cut short; to destroy, only in ger. upahacca; pp. upahata & Pass.; upahaññati (q.v.).

upa + han

Upaharaṇa

(nt.)

1. presentation; luxury Ja i.231.

2. taking, seizing Ja vi.198.

fr. upa + hṛ;

Upaharati

to bring, offer, present AN ii.87; iii. 33; Dhp i.301, Dhp i.302; Ja v.477.

upa + hṛ;

Upahāra

bringing forward, present, offering, gift Vin iii.136 (āhār˚) AN ii.87; AN iii.33; AN v.66 (mett˚); Ja i.47; Ja iv.455; Ja vi.117; DN-a i.97.

fr. upa + hṛ;

Upahiṃsati

to injure, hurt Vin ii.203; Ja iv.156.

upa + hiṃs

Upāgacchati

to come to, arrive at, reach, obtain, usually aor. upāgañchi Cp i.1010, pl. upāgañchuṃ Snp 1126; or upāgami Snp 426, Snp 685, pl. upāgamuṃ Snp 302, Snp 1126. Besides in pres. imper. upāgaccha Pv-a 64 (so read for upagaccha) ■ pp. upāgata.

upa + ā + gam

Upāgata

come to, having reached or attained Snp 1016; Pv-a 117 (yakkhattaṃ); Sdhp 280.

pp. of upāgacchati

Upāta

thrown up, cast up, raised (of dust) Thag 675.

according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. upātta, pp of upa + ā + “taken up”; after Morris J.P. T. S. 1884 75 = uppāta “flying up”

Upātigacchati

to “go out over”, to surpass, overcome, only in 3rd sg. pret. upaccagā Snp 333, Snp 636, Snp 641, Snp 827; Thag 181; Thag 2, Thag 4; Ja i.258; Ja vi.182 & 3;rd pl. upaccaguṃ SN i.35; AN iii.311; Ja iii.201.

upa + ati + gacchati

Upātidhāvati

to run on or in to Ud 72.

upa + ā + dhāvati

Upātipanna

fallen into, a prey to (with loc.) Snp 495 (= nipanna with gloss adhimutta Snp-a 415).

pp. of upâtipajjati, upa + ā + pad

Upātivatta

gone beyond, escaped from, free from (with acc.) SN i.143; AN ii.15; Snp 55, Snp 474, Snp 520 Snp 907; Ja iii.7, Ja iii.360; Fd1 322 = Nd ii.163. Cp. BSk. upātivṛtta in same sense at Mvu iii.281.

pp. of upâtivattati

Upātivattati

to go beyond, overstep MN i.327; Snp 712 (v.l. for upanivattati); Ne 49. pp. upātivatta (q.v.).

upa + ati + vattati

Upādā

(adv.) lit. “taking up”, i.e. subsisting on something else, not original, secondary derived (of rūpa form) Dhs 877, Dhs 960, Dhs 1210; Vism 275 Vism 444 (24 fold); Dhs-a 215, Dhs-a 299, Dhs-a 333, cp. Dhs trsln. 127 197 ■ Usually (and this is the earlier use of upādā as neg. anupādā (for anupādāya) in meaning “not taking up any more (fuel, so as to keep the fire of rebirth alive)”, not clinging to love of the world, or the kilesas q.v., having no more tendency to becoming; in phrases a. parinibbānaṃ “unsupported emancipation” MN i.148; SN iv.48; SN v.29; Dhp-a i.286 etc.; a. vimokkho mental release AN v.64 (A A: catuhi upādānehi agahetvā cittassa vimokkho; arahattass’etaṃ nāmaṃ); Vin v.164; Pts ii.45 sq.; a. vimutto DN i.17 (= kinci dhammaṃ anupādiyitvā vimutto DN-a i.109); cp. MN iii.227 (paritassanā).

shortened ger. of upādiyati for the usual upādāya in specialised meaning

Upādāna

(nt.) -(lit. that (material) substratum by means of which an active process is kept alive or going), fuel, supply, provision; adj. (-˚) supported by, drawing one’s existence from SN i.69; SN ii.85 (aggikkhandho ˚assa pariyādānā by means of taking up fuel); v.284 (vāt˚); Ja iii.342 sa-upādāna (adj.) provided with fuel SN iv.399; anupādāna without fuel Dhp-a ii.163. 2. (appld.) “drawing upon”, grasping, holding on, grip attachment; adj. (-˚) finding one’s support by or in clinging to, taking up, nourished by. See on term Dhs trsln. 323 & Cpd. 171. They are classified as 4 upādānāni or four Graspings viz. kām˚, diṭṭh˚, sīlabbat˚, attavād or the graspings arising from sense-desires, speculation belief in rites, belief in the soul-theory DN ii.58; DN iii.230; MN i.51, MN i.66; SN ii.3; SN v.59; Dhs 1213; Pts i.129; Pts ii.46 Pts ii.47; Vb 375; Ne 48; Vism 569 ■ For upādāna in var. connections see the foll. passages: DN i.25; DN ii.31, DN ii.33 DN ii.56; DN iii.278; MN i.66, MN i.136 (attavād˚) 266; SN ii.14, SN ii.17, SN ii.30 SN ii.85; SN iii.10, SN iii.13 sq., 101, 135, 167, 191; iv.32, 87 sq. 102 (tannissitaṃ viññāṇaṃ tadupādānaṃ), 390, 400 (taṇhā); AN iv.69; AN v.111 (upāy˚); Snp 170, Snp 358, Snp 546; Pts i.51 sq., 193; ii.45 sq, 113; Vb 18, Vb 30, Vb 67, Vb 79, Vb 119 Vb 132; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136, Dhs 1213, Dhs 1536 sq.; Ne 28 sq., 41 sq., 114 sq.; Dhp-a iv.194sa˚; full of attachment (to life) MN i.65; Vin iii.111; SN iv.102; an˚; unattached, not showing attachment to existence SN iv.399; Vin iii.111 Thag 840; Mil 32; DN-a i.98.

-kkhandha, usually as pañc’ upādāna-kkhandhā the factors of the “fivefold clinging to existence” [cp. BSk pañc’ u˚-skandhāḥ Avs ii.1681 & note] DN ii.35, DN ii.301 sq.; DN iii.223, DN iii.286; MN i.61, MN i.144, MN i.185; MN iii.15, MN iii.30, MN iii.114, MN iii.295; Pts ii.109 sq.; Vb 101; Vism 505 (khandha-pañcaka) See for detail khandha ii.B 2. -kkhaya extinction or disappearance of attachment SN ii.54; AN iii.376 sq.; Snp 475, Snp 743; Iti 75. -nidāna the ground of upādāna; adj founded on or caused by attachment Pts ii.111; Vb 135 sq -nirodha destruction of “grasping” Vin i.1 (in formula of paṭicca-samuppāda); SN ii.7; SN iii.14; AN i.177. -paccaya = ˚nidāna SN ii.5; SN iii.94; Snp 507, Snp 742.

fr. upa + ā +

Upādāniya

(adj.) belonging to or connected with upādāna, sensual, (inclined to) grasping; material (of rūpa), derived. See on term Dhs trsln. 203, 322 ■ SN ii.84; SN iii.47; SN iv.89, SN iv.108; Dhs 584, Dhs 1219, Dhs 1538; Vb 12 sq., 30, 56, 119, 125, 319, 326.

fr. upādāna, for *upādānika → ˚aka

Upādāya

(adv.)

1. (as prep. with acc.) lit. “taking it up” (as such & such), i.e. (a) out of, as, for; in phrase anukampaṃ upādāya out of pity or mercy DN i.204; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 164 ■ (b) compared with alongside of, with reference to, according to DN i.205 (kālañ ca samayañ ca acc. to time & convenience); Dhp-a i.391; Vv-a 65 (paṃsucuṇṇaṃ); Pv-a 268 (manussalokaṃ) The same use of upādāya is found in BSk., e.g. at Divy 25, Divy 359, Divy 413; Avs i.255.

2. (ic same meaning application as upādā, i.e. in neg. form first & then in positivé abstraction from the latter) as philosophical term “hanging on to”, i.e. derived, secondary (with rūpa) Vb 12, Vb 67 etc.; Nd i.266. Usually as anupādāya “not clinging to”, without any (further) clinging (to rebirth) emancipated, unconditioned, free [cp. BSk. paritt-anupādāya free from the world Divy 655], freq. in phrase a nibbuta completely emancipated SN ii.279; AN i.162; iv. 290; besides in foll. pass.: Vin i.14 (a. cittaṃ vimuccati 182 (id.); SN ii.187 sq.; SN iv.20, SN iv.107; SN v.317; Dhp 89 = SN v.24 (ādānapaṭi-nisagge a. ye ratā); Dhp 414; Snp 363; Iti 94 (+ aparitassato).

ger. of upādiyati

Upādi˚

= upādāna, but in more concrete meaning of “stuff of life”, substratum of being, khandha; only in combn. with ˚sesa (adj.) having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i.e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined SN v.129, SN v.181; AN iii.143; Iti 40; Vism 509. More frequently neg. an-upādi-sesa (nibbāna, nibbānadhātu or parinibbāna, cp. similarly BSk. anupādi-vimukti Mvu i.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material substratum Vin ii.239 (nibbāna-dhātu); DN iii.135; MN i.148 (parinibbāna); AN ii.120; AN iv.75 sq., 202, 313; Ja i.28, Ja i.55; Snp 876; Iti 39, Iti 121 (nibbāna-dhātu); Ps. i.101; Vism 509; Dhp-a iv.108 (nibbāna); Vv-a 164, Vv-a 165. Opp. saupādisesa AN iv.75 sq., 378 sq.; Snp 354 (opp. nibbāyi) Vism 509; Ne 92. See further ref. under nibbāna parinibbāna.;

the compn.-from of upādāna, derived fr. upādā in analogy to nouns in ˚a & ˚ā which change their a to i in comp;n. with kṛ & bhū; otherwise a n. formation fr analogous to ˚dhi fr. dhā in upadhi

Upādiṇṇa

grasped at, laid hold of; or “the issue of grasping”, i.e. material, derived, secondary (cp. upādā), see def. at Dhs trsln. 201, 324 ■ Dhs 585, Dhs 877, Dhs 1211, Dhs 1534 Vb 2 sq., 326, 433; Vism 349, Vism 451; an˚; Vin iii.113; Dhs 585, Dhs 991, Dhs 1212, Dhs 1535.

for ˚ādinna with substitution of ṇṇ for nn owing to wrong derivation as pp. from ādiyati2 instead of ādiyati1

Upādiṇṇaka

(adj,) = upādiṇṇa Dhs-a 311, Dhs-a 315, Dhs-a 378; Vism 398.

Upādiyati

to take hold of, to grasp, cling to, show attachment (to the world), cp. upādāna DN ii.292; MN i.56, MN i.67; SN ii.14; SN iii.73, SN iii.94, SN iii.135; iv. 168 (na kiñci loke u. = parinibbāyati); Snp 752, Snp 1103 Snp 1104; Nd i.444 (= ādeti); Nd ii.164. ppr. upādiyaṃ SN iv.24 = SN iv.65 (an˚) ■ ppr. med. upādiyamāna SN iii.73; Snp-a 409, & upādiyāna (˚ādiyāno) Snp 470; Dhp 20. ger. upādāya in lit. meaning “taking up” Ja i.30; Mil 184, Mil 338, Mil 341; for specialised meaning & use as prep see separately as also; upādā and upādiyitvā Vv-a 209; DN-a i.109 (an˚); Dhp-a iv.194 (an˚) ■ pp. upādiṇṇa (q.v.).

upa + ā + , see ādiyati1

Upādhi

1. cushion Ja vi.253.

2. supplement, ornament (?), in ˚ratha “the chariot with the outfit”, expld. by C. as the royal chariot with the golden slipper Ja vi.22.

fr. upa + ā + dhā

Upādhiya

being furnished with a cushion Ja vi.252 (adj.).

fr. upāhi

Upāya

approach; fig. way, means, expedient, stratagem SN iii.53 sq., 58; DN iii.220 (˚kosalla) Snp 321 (˚ññū); Ja i.256; Nd ii.570 (for upaya); Pv-a 20 Pv-a 31, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 45, Pv-a 104, Pv-a 161; Sdhp 10, Sdhp 12. 350, 385 ■ Cases adverbially; instr. upāyena by artifice or means of a trick Pv-a 93; yena kenaci u. Pv-a 113 ■ abl. upāyaso by some means, somehow Ja iii.443; Ja v.401 (= upāyena C.). anupāya wrong means Ja i.256; Sdhp 405; without going near, without having a propensity for SN i.181; MN iii.25.

-kusala clever in resource Ja i.98; Ne 20; Snp-a 274.

fr. upa + i, cp. upaya

Upāyatta

(nt.) a means of (-˚) Vv-a 84 (paṭipajjan˚).

abstr. fr. upāya

Upāyana

(nt.) going to (in special sense), enterprise, offering, tribute, present Ja v.347; vi. 327; Mil 155, Mil 171, Mil 241; Sdhp 616, Sdhp 619.

fr. upa + i, cp. upāya

Upāyāsa

(a kind of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance unsettled condition MN i.8, MN i.144, MN i.363; MN iii.237; AN i.144, AN i.177, AN i.203 (sa˚); ii.123, 203; iii.3, 97, 429; Snp 542; Iti 89 = AN i.147 = MN i.460; Ja ii.277 (˚bahula); iv.22 (id.); Pp 30, Pp 36; Vb 247; Ne 29; Mil 69; Vism 504 (def.); DN-a i.121anupāyāsa peacefulness, composure serenity, sincerity DN iii.159; AN iii.429; Pts i.11 sq.

upa + āyāsa, cp. BSk. upāyāsa Divy 210, Divy 314.

Upāramati

to cease, to desist Ja v.391, Ja v.498.

upa + ā + ram

Upāraddha

blamed, reprimanded, reproved AN v.230.

pp. of upārambhati

Upārambha

1. reproof, reproach, censure MN i.134, MN i.432; SN iii.73; SN v.73; AN i.199; AN ii.181; AN iii.175; AN iv.25; Vb 372.

2. (adj.) indisposed hostile Thag 360 sq.; DN-a i.21, DN-a i.263.

Sk. upārambha, upa + ālambhatc

Upārambhati

to blame, reprimand, reproach MN i.432, MN i.433 ■ pp. upāraddha (q.v.).

Sk. upālambhate, upa + ā + labh

Upālāpeti

at Pv-a 276 read upalāpeti (q.v.).

Upāvisi

3rd sg. aor. of upavisati (q.v.).

Upāsaka

a devout or faithful layman, a lay devotee Vin i.4, Vin i.16 (tevāciko u.), 37, 139 195 sq.; ii.125; iii.6, 92; iv.14, 109; DN i.85; DN ii.105 DN ii.113; DN iii.134, DN iii.148, DN iii.153, DN iii.168, DN iii.172 sq., 264; MN i.29, MN i.467 MN i.490; SN v.395, SN v.410; AN i.56 sq.; AN ii.132 (˚parisā); iii.206 (˚caṇḍāla, ˚ratana); iv.220 sq. (kittāvatā hoti); Snp 376 Snp 384; Ja i.83; Pv i.104; Vb 248 (˚sikkhā); DN-a i.234; Pv-a 36, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 207 ■ f. upāsikā Vin i.18, Vin i.141 Vin i.216; Vin iii.39; Vin iv.21, Vin iv.79; DN iii.124, DN iii.148, DN iii.172, DN iii.264; MN i.29 MN i.467, MN i.491; SN ii.235 sq.; AN i.88; AN ii.132; AN v.287 sq.; Mil 383; Pv-a 151, Pv-a 160.

fr. upa + ās, cp. upāsati

Upāsakatta

(nt.) state of being a believing layman or a lay follower of the Buddha Vin i.37; SN iv.301; Vv 8421.

abstr. fr. upāsaka

Upāsati

lit. “to sit close by”, to go after, attend, follow, serve, honour, worship DN ii.287; AN i.162; Ja v.339, Ja v.371 (= upagacchati C.); Mil 418 (lakkhe upāseti fix his attention on the target).

3rd pl. pres. med upāsare AN i.162; Ja iv.417 (= upāyanti C.). Cp. payirupāsati ■ pp. upāsita & upāsīna; (q.v.). See also upāsaka, upāsana1.

upa + ās

Upāsana1

(nt.) attendance, service, honour SN i.46 (samaṇ˚); Thag 239; Mil 115. Cp. payir˚.

fr. upāsati

Upāsana2

(nt.)

1. archery Ja vi.448; usually in phrase katūpāsana skilled in archery MN i.82; SN ii.266; AN ii.48; Ja iv.211; Mvu 24, Mvu 1Mil 232 (˚ṃ sikkhitvā).

2. practice Mil 419.

3. in ˚sālā gymnasium training ground Mil 352.

fr. upāsati

Upāsikā

see upāsaka; cp. payir˚.

Upāsita

honoured, served, attended S 1133, cp. Nd ii.165; Thag 179.

pp. of upāsati

Upāsīna

sitting near or close to Ja v.336.

pp. of upāsati

Upāhata

struck, afflicted, hurt Ja i.414.

upa + āhata

Upāhanā

(f.) a shoe, sandal Vin i.185; Vin ii.118, Vin ii.207 (adj. sa-upāhana), 208; SN i.226; Ja iv.173, Ja iv.223; Pv ii.49; Nd ii.226; Kp-a 45; Dhp-a i.381 (chatt ˚ṃ as nt? v.l. ˚nā); Pv-a 127, Pv-a 186. upāhanaṃ (or upāhanā) ārohati to put on sandals Ja iv.16; vi. 524; opp. omuñcati take off Vin ii.207, Vin ii.208; Ja iii.415; Ja iv.16Note. An older form upānad˚; (for upānadh = Sk. upānah) is seen by Kern in pānadûpama Ja ii.223, which is read by him as upānadûpama (v.l. upāhan-upama). See Toev. s. v. upānad.

with metathesis for upānahā = Sk. upānah f. or upānaha m.; but cp. BSk. upānaha nt. Divy 6

Upiya

undergoing, going into, metri causa as ūpiya (-˚) and opiya, viz. hadayasmiṃ opiya SN i.199 = Thag 119; senûpiya Ja v.96 (v.l. senopiya; C. sayanûpagata). In tadūpiya the 2nd part upiya represents an adj. upaka fr. upa (see ta I. a), thus found at Mil 9.

ger. of upeti

Upekkhaka

(adj.) disinterested, resigned, stoical Vin iii.4; DN i.37, DN i.183; DN iii.113, DN iii.222, DN iii.245, DN iii.269, DN iii.281; SN v.295 sq., 318; AN iii.169 sq., 279; v.30; Snp 515 Snp 855, Snp 912; Iti 81; Nd i.241, Nd i.330; Pp 50, Pp 59; Dhs 163; Dhs-a 172.

fr. upekkhā

Upekkhati

to look on, to be disinterested or indifferent Snp 911; Nd i.328; Ja vi.294.

upa + īkṣ

Upekkhanā

(f.) is commentator’s paraphrase for upekkhā (q.v.) Nd i.501 = Nd ii.166 Vb 230.

abstr. fr. upa + īkṣ

Upekkhavant

(adj.) = upekkhaka Ja v.403. Upekkha & Upekha

Upekkhā & Upekhā

(f.) “looking on”, hedonic neutrality or indifference, zero point between joy & sorrow (Cpd. 66) disinterestedness, neutral feeling, equanimity. Sometimes equivalent to adukkham-asukha-vedanā “feeling which is neither pain nor pleasure”. See detailed discussion of term at Cpd. 229–⁠232, & cp.; Dhs trsln. 39 ■ Ten kinds of upekkhā are enumd. at Dhs-a 172 (cp. Dhs trsln. 48; Hardy, Man. Buddhism 505) ■ D 138 (˚sati-parisuddhi purity of mindfulness which comes of disinterestedness cp. Vin iii.4; Dhs 165 & Dhs trsln;n. 50), 251 ii.279 (twofold); iii.50, 78, 106, 224 sq., 239, 245 (six ˚upavicāras), 252, 282; MN i.79, MN i.364; MN iii.219; SN iv.71 SN iv.114 sq., SN v.209 sq. (˚indriya); AN i.42; AN i.81 (˚sukha), 256 (˚nimitta); iii.185, 291 (˚cetovimutti); iv.47 sq., 70 sq. 300, 443; v.301, 360; Snp 67, Snp 73, Snp 972, Snp 1107, (˚satisaṃsuddha); Nd i.501 = Nd ii.166; Pts i.8, Pts i.36, Pts i.60, Pts i.167 Pts i.177; Pp 59 (˚sati); Ne 25, Ne 97 (˚dhātu), 121 sq.; Vb 12, Vb 15 (˚indriya), 54 (id.), 69, 85 (˚dhātu), 228, 324, 326 (˚sambojjhanga), 381 (˚upavicāra); Dhs 150, Dhs 153, Dhs 165 Dhs 262, Dhs 556, Dhs 1001, Dhs 1278, Dhs 1582; Vism 134 (˚sambojjhanga 5 conditions of), 148 (˚ânubrūhanā), 160 (def. & tenfold) 317 (˚bhāvanā), 319 (˚brahmavihāra), 325 (˚vihārin), 461; Snp-a 128; Sdhp 461.

fr. upa + īkṣ, cp. BSk. upekṣā Divy 483; Jtm 211. On spelling upekhā for upekkhā see Müller P. Gr. 16

Upeta

furnished with, endowed with, possessed of Snp 402, Snp 463, Snp 700, Snp 722; Dhp 10, Dhp 280; Nd ii.s. v. Thag 789; Pv i.76 (bal˚); ii.712 (phal˚, v.l. preferable ˚upaga), iv.112 (ariyaṃ aṭṭhangavaraṃ upetan = aṭṭhahi angehi upetaṃ yuttaṃ Pv-a 243); Vism 18 (+ sam˚, upagata samupagata etc); Pv-a 7Note. The BSk. usually has samanvāgata for upeta (see aṭṭhanga).

pp. of upeti

Upeti

to go to (with acc.), come to, approach, undergo, attain DN i.55 (paṭhavi-kāyaṃ an-upeti does not go into an earthly body), 180; MN i.486 (na upeti, as answer: “does not meet the question”); SN iii.93; Iti 89; Snp 209, (na sankhaṃ “cannot be reckoned as”) 749, 911 1074; 728 (dukkhaṃ), 897; Snp 404 (deve); Nd i.63; Nd ii.167; Dhp 151, Dhp 306, Dhp 342; Snp 318; Ja iv.309 (maraṇaṃ upeti to die), 312 (id.), 463 (id.); v.212 (v.l. opeti, q.v.) Thag 17 (gabbhaṃ); Pv ii.334 (saggaṃ upehi ṭhānaṃ); iv. 352 (saraṇaṃ buddhaṃ dhammaṃ); Ne 66; fut. upessaṃ Snp 29; Snp 2nd sg. upehisi Dhp 238, Dhp 348 ■ ger. upecca Vv 337; SN i.209 = Ne 131; Vv-a 146 (realising = upagantvā cetetvā vā); Pv-a 103 (gloss for uppacca flying up); see also upiya & uppacca ■ pp.; upeta.

upa + i

Upocita

heaped up, abounding, comfortable Ja iv.471.

pp. of upa + ava + ci

Uposatha

. At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon’s waxing and waning, viz. 1st, 8th, 15th 23d nights of the lunar month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath. These days were utilized by the pre-Buddhistic reforming communities for the expounding of their views, Vin i.101. The Buddhists adopted this practice and on the 15th day of the half-month held a chapter of the Order to expound their dhamma, ib. 102 They also utilized one or other of these Up. days for the recitation of the Pāṭimokkha (pāṭimokkhuddesa), ibid. On Up. days laymen take upon themselves the Up. vows that is to say, the eight Sīlas, during the day. See Sīla The day in the middle of the month is called cātudassiko or paṇṇarasiko according as the month is shorter or longer The reckoning is not by the month (māsa), but by the half-month (pakkha), so the twenty-third day is simply aṭṭhamī, the same as the eighth day. There is an accasional Up. called sāmaggi-uposatho, “reconciliation-Up.”, which is held when a quarrel among the fraternity has been made up, the gen. confession forming as it were a seal to the reconciliation (Vin v.123; Mah. 42) ■ Vin i.111 Vin i.112, Vin i.175, Vin i.177; Vin ii.5, Vin ii.32, Vin ii.204, Vin ii.276; Vin iii.164, Vin iii.169; DN iii.60, DN iii.61, DN iii.145, DN iii.147; AN i.205 sq. (3 uposathas: gopālaka˚ nigaṇṭha˚, ariya˚), 208 (dhamm˚), 211 (devatā˚); iv.248 (aṭṭhanga-samannāgata), 258 sq. (id.), 276, 388 (navah angehi upavuttha); v.83; Snp 153 (pannaraso u); Vb 422; Vism 227 (˚sutta = AN i.206 sq.); Sdhp 439; DN-a i.139; Snp-a 199; Vv-a 71, Vv-a 109; Pv-a 66, Pv-a 201 ■ The hall or chapel in the monastery in which the Pāṭimokkha is recited is called uposathaggaṃ (Vin iii.66), or ˚āgāraṃ (Vin i.107; Dhp-a ii.49). The Up. service is called ˚kamma (Vin i.102; Vin v.142; Ja i.232; Ja iii.342, Ja iii.444; Dhp-a i.205) uposathaṃ karoti to hold the Up. service (Vin i.107 Vin i.175, Vin i.177; Ja i.425). Keeping the Sabbath (by laymen is called uposathaṃ upavasati (AN i.142, AN i.144, AN i.205, AN i.208 AN iv.248; see upavasati), or uposathavāsaṃ vasati (Ja v.177) The ceremony of a layman taking upon himself the eight sīlas is called uposathaṃ samādiyati (see sīlaṃ & samādiyati); uposatha-sīla observance of the Up. (Vv-a 71) The Up. day or Sabbath is also called uposatha-divasa (J iii.52).

Vedic upavasatha, the eve of the Soma sacrifice, day of preparation

Uposathika

(adj.)

1. belonging to the Uposatha in phrase anuposathikaṃ (adv.) on every U., i.e. every fortnight Vin iv.315.

2. observing the Sabbath fasting (cp. BSk. uposadhika Mvu ii.9); Vin i.58; iv. 75, 78; Ja iii.52; Vism 66 (bhatta); Dhp-a i.205.

fr. uposatha

Uposathin

(adj.) = uposathika, fasting Mvu 17, Mvu 6.

fr. upusatha

Uppakitaka

indexed at Ud iii.2 wrongly for upakkitaka (q.v.).

Uppakka

(adj.)

1. “boiled out”, scorched, seared, dried or shrivelled up; in phrase itthiṃ uppakkaṃ okiliniṃ okiriniṃ Vin iii.107 = SN ii.260; expld. by Bdhgh. Vin iii.273 as “kharena agginā pakkasarīra”.

2. “boiled up”, swollen (of eyes through crying) Ja vi.10.

fr. ud + pac, cp. Sk. pakva & see also uppaccati

Uppacca

flying up Thig 248 (see under upacca)); SN i.209 (v.l. BB. upecca, C. uppatitvā pi sakuṇo viya) = Pv ii.717 (= uppatitvā Pv-a 103) = Dhp-a iv.21 (gloss uppatitvā) = Ne 131 (upecca).

ger. of uppatati

Uppaccati

in ppr. uppacciyamāna (so read for upapacciyamāna, as suggested by v.l. BB. uppajj˚) “being boiled out”, i.e. dried or shrivelled up (cp. uppakka 1) Ja iv.327. Not with Morris JP T S. 1887, 129 “being tormented”, nor with Kern, Toev. under upapacc˚ as ppr. to pṛc (*upapṛcyamāna) “dicht opgesloten”, a meaning foreign to this root.

ud + paccati, Pass. of pac

Uppajjati

to come out, to arise, to be produced, to be born or reborn, to come into existence DN i.180; Snp 584; Pv ii.111 (= nibbattati Pv-a 71); Pv-a 8 (nibbattati + ), 9, 20, 129 (= pātubhavati); DN-a i.165. Pass. uppajjiyati Vin i.50 ■ ppr. uppajjanto Pv-a 5 Pv-a 21; fut. ˚pajjissati Pv-a 5 (bhummadevesu, corresp. with niraye nibbattissati ibid.), 67 (niraye); aor. uppajji Pv-a 21, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 66; & udapādi (q.v.) Vin iii.4; Ja i.81; ger ˚pajjitvā DN ii.157 = SN i.6, SN i.158 = SN ii.193 = Ja i.392 = Thag 1159; & uppajja Ja iv.24 ■ Caus. uppādeti (q.v.). pp. uppanna (q.v.). See also upapajjati and upapanna.

ud + pajjati of pad

Uppajjana

(adj.-n..) coming into existence; birth, rebirth Pv-a 9 (˚vasena), 33 (id.).

fr. uppajjati

Uppajjanaka

(adj.) (belonging to) coming into existence, i.e. arising suddenly or without apparent cause, in ˚bhaṇḍa a treasure trove Ja iii.150.

fr. uppajjana

Uppajjitar

one who produces or is reborn in (with acc.) DN i.143 (saggaṃ etc.).

n. ag. fr. uppajjati

Uppaṭipāṭiyā

lit. “out of reach”, i.e. in a distance Ja i.89; or impossible Vism 96 (ekapañho pi u. āgato nâhosi not one question was impossible to be understood). As tt. g. “with reference to the preceding”, supra Vism 272; Snp-a 124, Snp-a 128; Dhs-a 135 (T. ˚paṭipāṭika).

abl. of uppaṭipāṭi, ud + paṭipāṭi

Uppaṇḍanā

(f.) ridiculing, mocking Mil 357; Vism 29; PugA 250 (˚kathā).

abstr. fr. ut + paṇd or unknown etym.

Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāta

(adj.) “having become very pale” (?), or “somewhat pale” (?), with dubbaṇṇa in Khp, A 234, and in a stock phrase of three different settings, viz. (1) kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo upp˚ dhamani-santhata-gatto Vin i.276 Vin iii.19, Vin iii.110; MN ii.121; distorted to BSk. bhīto utp˚. kṛśāluko durbalako mlānako at Divy 334 ■ (2) kiso upp˚. Ja vi.71; Dhp-a iv.66 ■ (3) upp˚ dhamanisanth˚ Ja i.346; Ja ii.92 Ja v.95; Dhp-a i.367. Besides in a doubtful passage at Pv ii.112 (upakaṇḍakin, v.l. uppaṇḍ˚ BB.), expld. at Pv-a 72 “upakaṇḍakajāta”, vv.ll. uppaṇḍaka˚ and uppaṇḍupaṇḍuka˚.

redupl. intens. formation; ud + paṇḍu + ka + jāta; paṇḍu yellowish. The word is evidently a corruption of something else, perhaps upapaṇṇḍuka upa in meaning of “somewhat like”, cp. upanīla upanibha etc. and reading at Pv ii.113 upakaṇḍakin. The latter may itself be a corruption, but is expld. at Pv-a 72 by upakaṇḍaka-jāta “shrivelled up all over, nothing but pieces (?)”. The trsln. is thus doubtful; the BSk. is the P. form retranslated into utpāṇḍuka Divy 334, Divy 463, and trsld. “very pale”

Uppaṇḍeti

to ridicule, mock, to deride, make fun of Vin i.216, Vin i.272, Vin i.293; iv. 278; AN iii.91 = Pp 67 (ūhasati ullapati + ); Ja v.288 Ja v.300; Dhp-a ii.29; Dhp-a iii.41; Pv-a 175 (avamaññati + ). Note. The BSk. utprāsayati at Divy 17 represents the P uppaṇḍeti & must somehow be a corruption of the latter (vv.ll. at Divy 17 are utprāśayati, utprāṇayati & utprāśrayati).;

ut + paṇḍ, of uncertain origin

Uppatati

to fly or rise up into the air; to spring upwards, jump up; 3rd sq. pret. udapatta [Sk *udapaptat] Ja iii.484 (so read for ˚patto, & change si to pi); ger. uppatitvā Ja iii.484; Ja iv.213; Pv-a 103, Pv-a 215; and uppacca (q.v.) ■ pp. uppatita (q.v.).

ud + patati

Uppatita

jumped up, arisen, come about Snp 1 (= uddhamukhaṃ patitaṃ gataṃ Snp-a 4), 591; Dhp 222 (= uppanna Dhp-a iii.301); Thag 371.

pp. of uppatati

Uppatti

(f.) coming forth, product, genesis, origin, rebirth, occasion AN ii.133 (˚paṭilābhikāni sanyojanāni); Vb 137 (˚bhava), 411; cp. Compendium, 262 f. (khaṇa); Mil 127 (˚divasa); Vism, 571 sq. (˚bhava 9 fold: kāma˚ etc.); Snp-a 46, Snp-a 159, Snp-a 241, Snp-a 254, Snp-a 312, Snp-a 445; Pv-a 144, Pv-a 215. On uppatti deva see deva and upapatti. See also aṭṭhuppatti, dānuppatti.

Vedic utpatti, ud + pad

Uppatha

a wrong road or course DN i.10 (˚gamana, of planets); SN i.38, SN i.43; Ja v.453; vi. 235; Dhp-a iii.356 (˚cāra).

Sk. utpatha, ud + patha

Uppanna

born, reborn, arisen, produced, DN i.192 (lokaṃ u. born into the world); Vin iii.4; Snp 55 ˚ñāṇa; see Nd ii.168), 998; Ja i.99; Pv ii.22 (pettivisayaṃ) Dhs 1035, Dhs 1416; Vb 12, Vb 17, Vb 50, Vb 319; Vb 327; Dhp-a iii.301; Pv-a 21 (petesu), 33, 144, 155 ■ anuppanna not arisen MN ii.11; not of good class DN i.97 (see DA i.267).

pp. of uppajjati

Uppabbajati

to leave the Order Dhp-a i.68; Pv-a 55 ■ pp. ˚pabbajita ■ Caus. uppabbājeti to turn out of the Order Ja iv.219; Dhp-a iv.195 ■ Caus II. uppabbajāpeti to induce some one to leave the Order Ja iv.304.

ud + pabbajati

Uppabbajjita

one who has left the community of bhikkhus, an ex-bhikkhu Vv-a 319; Dhp-a i.311.

ud + pabbajita

Uppala

the (blue) lotus; a waterlily. The 7 kinds of lotuses, mentioned at Ja v.37 are: nīla-ratta-set-uppala, ratta-seta-paduma, seta-kumuda kalla-hāra ■ DN i.75; DN ii.19; Vin iii.33 (˚gandha); Ja ii.443; Dhp 55; Vv 322; 354; Pv ii.120; iii.105; Dhp-a i.384 (nīl˚); iii.394 (id.); Thag-a 254, Thag-a 255; Vv-a 132, Vv-a 161. What is meant by uppala-patta (lotus-leaf?) at Vin iv.261?

Sk. utpala, uncertain etym.

Uppalaka

“lotus-like”, Name of a hell (cp. BSk. utpala at Divy 67 etc.) AN v.173. See also puṇḍarika.

uppala + ka

Uppalin

(adj.-n.) having lotuses rich in l., only in f. uppalinī a lotus-pond DN i.75; DN ii.38; SN i.138; AN iii.26; Vv 322; DN-a i.219.

fr. uppala

Uppaḷāseti

to sound out or forth, to make sound Mil 21 (dhamma-sankhaṃ). Reading at DN ii.337 is upaḷāseti in same meaning.

ud + pra + las, cp. Sk. samullāsayati in same meaning

Uppāṭaka

an insect, vermin SN i.170 (santhāro ˚ehi sañchanno “a siesta-couch covered by vermin swarm” trsld. p. 215 & note).;

fr. ud + paṭ; in meaning of “biting, stinging”

Uppāṭana

(nt.) pulling out, uprooting, destroying, skinning Ja i.454; Ja ii.283; Ja vi.238; Mil 166; Pv-a 46 (kes˚); Sdhp 140 (camm˚). Cp. sam˚.

fr. ud + paṭ;

Uppāṭanaka

(adj.) pulling up, tearing out, uprooting Ja i.303 (˚vāta); iv.333 (id.).

fr. uppāṭana

Uppāṭeti

to split, tear asunder; root out, remove, destroy Vin ii.151 (chaviṃ to skin); MN ii.110 (attānaṃ); Thig 396 (ger. uppāṭiyā = ˚pāṭetvā Thag-a 259); Ja i.281 (bījāni) iv.162, 382; vi.109 (= luñcati); Mil 86; Dhp-a iii.206. Caus. uppāṭāpeti in pp. uppāṭāpita caused to be torn off Dhp-a iii.208. See also upphāleti.

Sk. utpāṭayati, Caus. uf ud + paṭ; to split, cp. also BSk. utpāṭayati nidhānaṇ to dig out a treasure Av Ś i.294

Uppāda1

flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen DN i.9 (v.l. uppāta) Vism 30 (T. uppāta, v.l. uppāda) Snp 360; Ja i.374; vi. 475; Mil 178.

Sk. utpāta, ud + pat

Uppāda2

coming into existence, appearance, birth Vin i.185; DN i.185; SN iii.39 (+ vaya) iv.14; v.30; AN i.152 (+ vaya), 286, 296; ii.248 (taṇh˚) iii.123 (citt˚ state of consciousness); iv.65 (id.); Dhp 182 Dhp 194; Ja i.59, Ja i.107 (sat˚); Vb 303 (citt˚), 375 (taṇh˚) Pv-a 10; Thag-a 282anuppāda either “not coming into existence” DN iii.270, MN i.60; AN i.286, AN i.296; AN ii.214, AN ii.249 AN iii.84 sq.; Pts i.59, Pts i.66; Dhs 1367; or “not ripe” DN i.12.

Sk. utpāda, ud + pad

Uppādaka

(adj.) (-˚) producing, generating Pv-a 13 (dukkh˚). f. ˚ikā Dhp-a iv.109 (jhān’).

fr. uppāda2

Uppādana

(nt.) making, generating, causing Pv-a 71 (anubal˚ read for anubalappadāna?) 114.

fr. uppada2

Uppādin

(adj.) having an origin, arising, bound to arise Dhs 1037, Dhs 1416; Vb 17, Vb 50, Vb 74, Vb 92 and passim; Dhs-a 45.

fr. uppāda2

Uppādetar

one who produces, causes or brings into existence, creator, producer MN i.79; SN i.191; SN iii.66; SN v.351; Mil 217.

n. ag. fr. uppādeti

Uppādeti

1. to give rise to, to produce, put forth, show, evince, make DN i.135 MN i.162, MN i.185; Pp 25; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 19, Pv-a 59; Sdhp 539 cittaṃ u. to give a (temporary) thought to (with loc. Ja i.81; Mil 85; Dhp-a ii.89; Pv-a 3.

2. to get, obtain find Ja iv.2; Mil 140; Dhp-a i.90; Pv-a 121.

3 in lohitaṃ u. to draw (blood) Mil 214.

Caus. of uppajjati, ud + pad

Uppilavati

(& Uplavati)

1. to emerge (out of water), to rise, float SN iv.313 (uplava imper.); Mil 80, Mil 379; Vv-a 47 (uplavitvā, v.l. uppalavitvā); DN-a i.256 (v.l. upari lavati).

2. to jump up frisk about, to be elated or buoyant Ja ii.97 (cp. Morris JP T S. 1887, 139); Mil 370 ■ See also upaplavati uplāpeti & ubbillāvita etc.;

Sk. utplavati, ud + plu, cp. utplutya jumping up, rising Sp. Avs i.209

Uppīḷa

(adj.) oppressing or oppressed: an˚; free from oppression, not hurt or destroyed DN i.135 (opp sa-uppīḷa; T. upapīḷa but v.l. upp˚); Ja iii.443; Ja v.378; Pv-a 161.

ud + pīḍ

Uppīḷita

pressed Ja vi.3.

pp. of uppīḷeti

Uppīḷeti

1. to press (down) on to, to hold (tight to (with acc.), to cover up or close MN i.539 (piṭṭhi-pāṇiṃ hanukena); Ja i.483 (hatthena akkhīni); ii.245 (hatthikumbhe mukhaṃ); v.293 (aggalaṃ); Thag-a 188.

2. to stampede Vv-a 83 (paṭhaviṃ).

ud + pīḍ for ava + pīḍ, cp. uplāpeti = opilāpeti, & opīḷeti

Uppoṭheti

to beat Pv-a 4.

ud + poṭheti

Upplavana

at Dhp-a i.309 remains to be explained, T. faulty.

Upphāleti

to cut, rip or split open Vin i.276 (udara-cchaviṃ upphāletvā; v.l. uppāṭetvā, perhaps preferable).

Caus. of ud + phal

Upphāsulika

(adj.) “with ribs out”, i.e. with ribs showing emaciated, thin, “skinny” Pv ii.11 (= uggata-phāsuka Pv-a 68); iv.101 (MSS. uppā˚); Thag-a 133 (spelt uppā˚).

ud + phāsulikā for phāsukikā = phāsuka a rib

Uplāpeti

to immerse MN i.135 (vv.ll. upal˚ & opil˚); Ja iv.162 (fig. put into the shade, overpower; v.l. upal˚). See also opilāpeti ubbillāvita;.

Sk. avaplāvayati, Caus. of ava + plu, with substitution of ud for ava; see also uppilavati

Ubbaṭuma

(adj.) going out of its direction, going wrong (or upset?), in phrase; ubbaṭumaṃ rathaṃ karoti to put a cart out of its direction AN iv.191, AN iv.193.

ud + *vṛti (of vṛt ) + ma (for mā → mant); cp. Sk. udvṛtta & vṛtimant

Ubbaṭṭeti

to anoint, give perfumes (to a guest), to shampoo Ja i.87 (gandhacuṇṇena), 238 (id.); v.89, 438.

Caus. of ud + vṛt, as doublet of ubbatteti, cp. BSk. udvartayati Divy 12, Divy 36

Ubbaṭṭhaka

misprint in Pp Index as well as at Pp A 233 for ubbhaṭṭhaka (q.v.).

Ubbattati

to go upwards, to rise, swell Ja vi.486 (sāgaro ubbatti). See also next.

ud + vṛt

Ubbatteti

1. to tear out Ja i.199; Mil 101 (sadevake loke ubbattiyante); Dhp-a i.5 (hadayamaṃsaṃ) 75 (rukkhaṃ).

2. to cause to swell or rise Ja iii.361 (Gangāsotaṃ); iv.161 (samuddaṃ).

3. (intrs.) to go out of direction, or in the wrong direction Vism 327 (neva ubbaṭṭati na vivaṭṭati; v.l. uppaṭṭati); Dhp-a iii.155.

Caus. of ud + vṛt, of which doublet is ubbaṭṭeti; cp. also ubbaṭuma

Ubbadhati

to kill, destroy Snp 4 (praet. udabbadhi = ucchindanto vadheti Snp-a 18).

ud + vadhati

Ubbandhati

to hang up, strangle Vin iii.73 (rajjuyā); Ja i.504 (id.); iii.345; Thig 80; Vism 501; Vv-a 139, Vv-a 207 (ubbandhitu-kāmā in the intention of hanging herself).

ud + bandhati

Ubbarī

(f.) fertile soil, sown field; fig. woman, wife Ja vi.473 (= orodha C.).

Sk. urvarā, Av. urvara plant

Ubbasati

see ubbisati.

Ubbaha

(adj.) (-˚) only in cpd. dur˚ hard to pull out, difficult to remove Thag 124, Thag 495 = Thag 1053.

fr. ud + vṛh, i.e. to ubbahati1

Ubbahati1

to pull out, take away, destroy Snp 583 (udabbahe pot. = ubbaheyya dhāreyya Snp-a 460); Thag 158; Ja ii.223 (udabbahe = udabbaheyya C.); iv.462 (ubbahe); vi.587 (= hareyya C.).

ud + bṛh or vṛh, see also uddharati

Ubbahati2

to carry away, take away, lift (the corn after cutting); only in Caus. II. ubbahāpeti to have the corn harvested Vin ii.180 = AN i.241 ■ Here belong uddhaṭa and uddharaṇa. Cp. also pavāḷha.

ud + vahati, although possibly same as ubbahati1, in meaning of uddharati, which has taken up meanings of *udbharati, as well as of *udbṛhati and *udvahati

Ubbāḷha

oppressed, troubled, harassed, annoyed vexed Vin i.148, Vin i.353; Vin ii.119; Vin iv.308; Ja i.300; Vism 182 (kuṇapa-gandhena); Dhp-a i.343.

adj. pp. of ud + bāhati = vāh or more likely of ud + bādh

Ubbāsīyati

“to be dis-inhabited”, i.e. to be abandoned by the inhabitants Mvu 6, Mvu 22 (= chaḍḍīyati C.) ■ Cp. ubbisati.

Pass. of ubbāseti, ud + vas

Ubbāhana

(nt.) carrying, lifting, in ˚samattha fit for carrying, i.e. a beast of burden, of an elephant Ja vi.448.

fr. ubbahati2

Ubbāhikā

(f.) a method of deciding on the expulsion of a bhikkhu, always in instr. ubbāhikāya “by means of a referendum”, the settlement of a dispute being laid in the hands of certain chosen brethren (see Vin Texts iii.49 sq. Vin ii.95, Vin ii.97, Vin ii.305; Vin v.139, Vin v.197; AN v.71; Mvu 4, Mvu 46.

orig. f. of ubbāhika, adj. fr. ubbāheti in abstr. use

Ubbāheti

to oppress vex, hinder, incommodate Ja v.417 sq.

hardly to be decided whether fr. ud + vāh (to press, urge), or bṛh or bādh; cp. uddharati 2

Ubbigga

agitated, flurried, anxious Vin ii.184; SN i.53; Thag 408; Ja i.486; Ja iii.313; Mil 23, Mil 236, Mil 340 (an˚); Vism 54 (satat˚); Dhp-a ii.27 Thag-a 267; Sdhp 8, Sdhp 77.

Sk. udvigna, pp. of ud + vij

Ubbijjati

to be agitated, frightened or afraid Vin i.74 (u. uttasati palāyati); iii.145 (id.); SN i.228 (aor. ubbijji); Mil 149 (tasati + ), 286 (+ saṃviji) Vism 58 ■ Caus. ubbejeti (q.v.) ■ pp. ubbigga (q.v.).

Pass. of ud + vij

Ubbijjanā

(f.) agitation, uneasiness DN-a i.111. Cp. ubbega.

abstr. fr. ubbijjati

Ubbinaya

(adj.) being outside the Vinaya, ex-or un-Vinaya, wrong Vinaya Vin ii.307; Dpvs v.19.

ud + vinaya

Ubbilāpa

(v.l. uppilāva, which is prob. the correct reading] joyous state of mind, elation Ud 37. See next.

Ubbilāvita

(according to the very plausible expln. given by Morris JP T S. 1887, 137 sq. for uppilāpita, pp. of uppilāpeti = uplāpeti d. under uppilavati ud + plu; with ll for l after cases like Sk. ālīyate → P allīyati, ālāpa → allāpa etc., and bb for pp as in vanibbaka = Sk. vanīpaka (*vanipp˚)] happy, elated, buoyant, ltt frisky; only in cpds. ˚atta rejoicing, exultancy, elation of mind DN i.3, DN i.37; Ja iii.466; Mil 183; DN-a i.53, DN-a i.122; and ˚ākāra id. Dhp-a i.237. At Vism 158 “cetaso ubbilāvitaṃ stands for ubbilāvitattaṃ, with v.l. BB uppilāvitaṃ. Cp Ja v.114 (ubbilāvita-cittatā).

Ubbilla

elation, elated state of mind MN iii.159; ˚bhāva id. DN-a i.122; Sdhp 167. See next.

either a secondary formation fr. ubbilāvita, or representing uppilava (uppilāva) for upplava, ud + plu as discussed under ubbilāvita. The BSk. word udvilya Lal. V. 351, 357, or audvilya Divy 82 is an artificial reconstruction from the Pāli, after the equation of Sk dvādaśa → dial. P. bārasa, whereas the original Sk. dv is in regular P. represented by dd, as in dvīpa → dīpa *udvāpa → uddāpa. Müller’s construction ubbilla → *udvela rests on the same grounds, see P. Gr. 12.

Ubbisati

“to be out home”, to live away from home Ja ii.76 ■ See also ubbāsīyati ■ pp. ubbisita (˚kāle) ibid.

better reading v.l. ubbasati, ud + vas

Ubbūḷhavant

see uruḷhavant.

Ubbega

excitement, fright, anguish DN iii.148; later, also transport, rapture, in cpd (˚pīti); Vism 143; Dhs-a 124; PugA 226.

Sk. udvega, fr. ud + vij

Ubbegin

(adj.) full of anguish or fear Ja iii.313 (= ubbegavant C.).

fr. ubbega

Ubbejanīya

(adj.) agitating, causing anxiety Ja i.323, Ja i.504.

fr. ubbejeti

Ubbejitar & Ubbejetar

a terrifier, a terror to AN ii.109 (˚etar); iv.189 (id.); Pp 47, Pp 48 (= ghaṭṭetvā vijjhītvā ubbegappattaṃ karotī ti PugA 226).

n. ag. fr. ubbejeti

Ubbejeti

to set into agitation, terrify, frighten Mil 388 (˚jayitabba grd.); PugA 226.

Caus. of ud + vij

Ubbeṭhana

(nt.) an envelope, wrap Ja vi.508.

fr. ud + veṣṭ;

Ubbedha

height, only as measure, contrasted with āyāma length, & vitthāra width Ja i.29 (v.219; asīti-hatth˚), 203 (yojana-sahass˚); Vv-a 33 (yojana˚) 66 (asīti-hatth˚), 158 (hattha-sat˚), 188 (soḷasa-yojan˚), 221 339; Pv-a 113. See also pabbedha.

ud + vedha of vyadh

Ubbedhati

to be moved, to shake (intrs.), quiver, quake Ja vi.437 (= kampati C.).

ud + vedhati = Sk. vyathate

Ubbhaṃ

(& Ubbha˚) (indecl.) up, over, above, on top Ja v.269 (ubbhaṃ yojanaṃ uggata); in cpds. like ubbhakkhakaṃ above the collar bone Vin iv.213; ubbhajānumaṇḍalaṃ above the knee Vin iv.213; ubbhamukha upwards SN iii.238; Mil 122.

a doublet of uddhaṃ, see uddhaṃ iii.

Ubbhaṭṭhaka

(adj.) standing erect or upright DN i.167; MN i.78, MN i.92, MN i.282, MN i.308, MN i.343; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Pp 55 (ubb˚; = uddhaṃ ṭhitaka PugA 233).

ubbha + ṭha + ka of sthā, prob. contracted fr. ubbhaṭṭhitaka

Ubbhaṇḍita

bundled up, fixed up, wrapped up, full Vin i.287.

pp. of ubbhaṇḍeti, ud + *bhaṇḍ, cp. bhāṇḍa

Ubbhata

drawn out, pulled out, brought out, thrown out or up withdrawn Vin i.256 (kaṭhina, cp. uddhāra & ubbhāra) iii.196 (id.); DN i.77 (cp uddharati); MN i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhihi); Dhp 34 (okamokata u. = *okamokataḥ u.); Ja i.268; Pv-a 163.

pp. of uddharati with bbh for ddh as in ubbhaṃ for uddhaṃ; cp. ubbahati and see also the doublet uddhaṭa

Ubbhava

birth, origination, production Pgdp 91 (dānassa phal˚). Cp. BSk. udbhāvanā Divy 184 (guṇ˚ 492 (id.).

ud + bhava

Ubbhāra

= uddhāra (suspension, withdrawal, removal) Vin i.255, Vin i.300; Vin v.136, Vin v.175; cp. Vin Texts i.19; ii.157.

Ubbhijjati

to burst upwards, to spring up out of the ground, to well up; to sprout DN i.74 = MN iii.93 = MN iii.26; Ja i.18 (v.104); Dhp 339 (ger. ubbhijja uppajitvā Dhp-a iv.49); DN-a i.218 ■ pp. ubbhinna.

ud + bhid

Ubbhida1

(nt.) kitchen salt Vin i.202, cp. Vin Texts ii.48.

Sk. udbhida

Ubbhida2

(adj.) breaking or bursting forth, in cpd. ˚odaka “whose waters well up”, or “spring water DN i.74; MN i.276; DN-a i.218.

fr. ud + bhid

Ubbhinna

springing up, welling up Dhp i.218.

pp. of ubbhijjati

Ubbhujati

to bend up, to lift up (forcibly), ger. ˚itvā in meaning of “forcibly” Vin ii.222; Vin iii.40.

ud + bhuj

*Ubha

see ubho; cp. ubhato & ubhaya.;

Ubhato

(adv.) both, twofold, in both (or two) ways, on both sides usually ˚-, as ˚bhāgavimutta one who is emancipated in two ways DN ii.71; Dialogues ii.70, n. 1; MN i.477 (cp. 385 ˚vimaṭṭha); SN i.191; AN i.73; AN iv.10, AN iv.77; Png 14 73; Ne 190; ˚byañjanaka (vyañj˚) having the characteristics of both sexes, hermaphrodite Vin i.89, Vin i.136, Vin i.168 Vin iii.28; v. 222; ˚saṅgha twofold Sangha, viz. bhikkhu˚ bhikkhunī Vin ii.255; Vin iv.52, Vin iv.242, Vin iv.287; Mvu 3234. See further Vin ii.287 (˚vinaye); DN i.7 (˚lohitaka, cp. DN-a i.87); MN i.57 (˚mukha tied up at both ends), 129 (˚daṇḍakakakaca a saw with teeth on both sides), 393 (koṭiko pañho SN iv.323 (id.).

abl. of *ubha, to which ubhaya & ubho

Ubhaya

(adj.) both, twofold Snp 547, Snp 628, Snp 712, Snp 1106, Snp 1107, Snp 801 (˚ante); Nd i.109 (˚ante) Ja i.52; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 24, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 51 ■ nt. ˚ṃ as adv. in combn. with ca c’ûbhayaṃ following after 2nd. part of comprehension) “and both” for both-and; and also, alike, as well Dhp 404 (gahaṭṭhehi anāgārehi c’ûbhayaṃ with householders and houseless alike); Pv i.69Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as fem. pl. of ubho (= duve Pv-a 86).

-aṃsa lit. both shoulders or both parts, i.e. completely thoroughly, all round (˚-) in ˚bhāvita thoroughly trained DN i.154 (cp. DN-a i.312 ubhaya-koṭṭhāsāya bhāvito).

*ubha + ya, see ubho

Ubhayattha

in both places, in both cases Vin i.107; AN iii.64; Dhp 15–⁠17; Dhp-a i.29 (˚ettha), 30; Pv-a 130.

adv.) [Sk. ubhayatra, fr. ubhaya

Ubho

(udj.) both; nom. acc. ubho SN i.87; AN iii.48 = Iti 16; Iti 43 = Snp 661 = Dhp 306; Snp 220 Snp 543, Snp 597; Dhp 74, Dhp 256, Dhp 269; Dhp 412; Nd i.109; Pv i.76 Ja i.223; Ja ii.3; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 82 (tā ubho) ■ ubhantaṃ both ends, both sides Snp 1042 (see Nd ii.169; Snp-a 588 expls. by ubho ante) ■ gen. ubhinnaṃ SN i.162; ii. 222; Ja ii.3 instr. ubhohi (hatthehi) Vin ii.256; Ja iv.142; loc. ubhosu Snp 778 (antesu); Ja i.264 (passesu; Pv-a 94 (hatthesu). Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as a nom. fem. (= duve Pv-a 86).

Sk. ubhau, an old remnant of a dual form in Pāli; cp. Gr. α ̓́μφω both, Lat. ambo, Lith. abū, Goth. bai Ohg. beide = E. both. To prep ■ adv. *amb, *ambi; see abhi & cp. also vīsati

Ummagga

1. an underground watercourse, a conduit, main MN i.171; AN ii.189; Ja vi.426, Ja vi.432; Snp-a 50 (“ummaggo paññā pavuccati”) Dhp-a i.252 (˚cora); ii.37 (v l. umanga); iv.104; Pv-a 44 (read with v.l. SS kummagga).

2. a side track, a wrong way, devious way SN i.193 (v.l. ˚manga) = Thag 1242; SN iv.195; AN iv.191.

ud + magga, lit. “off-track”

Ummaṅga

“out luck”, i.e. unlucky; or “one who has gone off the right path” Vin v.144.

ud + manga (?) or for ummagga, q.v. for vv.ll.

Ummatta

(adj.) out of one’s mind, mad SN v.447 (+ viceta); Ja v.386; Mil 122; Sdhp 88; Pv-a 40 (˚puggala read with v.l. SS for dummati puggala). Cp. next & ummāda.

-rūpa like mad, madly, insane Pv i.81; ii.62 (where Ja iii.156 has santaramāna).

ud + matta of mad

Ummattaka

(adj.) = ummatta; Vin i.123, Vin i.321; Vin ii.60, Vin ii.80; Vin iii.27, Vin iii.33; AN iv.248; Vism 260 (reason for); Mil 277; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 93 (˚vesa appearance of a madman), 95. f. ummattikā Vin iv.259, Vin iv.265; Thag-a 111.

Ummaddeti

to rub something on (acc.) Vin ii.107 = Vin ii.266 (mukhaṃ).

ud + maddeti, Caus. of mṛd

Ummasati

to touch, take hold of, lift up Vin iii.121. Cp. next.

ud + masati of mṛś.

Ummasanā

(f.) lifting up Vin iii.121 (= uddhaṃ uccāraṇā).

abstr. fr. ummasati

Ummā

(f.) flax, only in cpd. ˚puppha the (azure) flower of flax MN ii.13 = AN v.61 (v.l. dammā˚ ummāta˚); DN ii.260; Thag 1068; Dhs-a 13. Also (m. Name of a gem Mil 118.

cp. Sk. umā

Ummāda

madness, distraction, mental aberration SN i.126 (˚ṃ pāpuṇeyya citta-vikkhepaṃ vā); AN ii.80 AN iii.119; AN v.169; Pp 69; Pv-a 6 (˚patta frantic, out of mind), 94 (˚vāta), 162 (˚patta).

ud + māda

Ummādanā

(f.) (or ˚aṃ nt.) maddening Snp 399 (+ mohanaṃ = paraloke ummādanaṃ ihaloke mohanaṃ Snp-a 377); Thag-a 2, Thag-a 357 (cp. Thag-a 243).

abstr. fr. ummāda

Ummāra

- 1. a threshold Vin iv.160 (= indakhīla); Thig 410; Ja i.62; Ja iii.101; Vism 425; Dhp-a i.350.

2. a curb-stone Ja vi.11.

3. as uttar˚; (the upper threshold) the lintel Ja i.111; Dhp-a ii.5 (v.l. upari˚).

4. window-sash or sill Ja i.347; Ja iv.356.

according to Müller P. Gr. = Sk. udumbara (?)

Ummi

(& Ummī) (f.) a wave Thag 681; Mil 346.

for the usual ūmi, cp. similar double forms of bhummi → bhūmi

Ummisati

to open one’s eyes Ja iii.96 (opp. nimisati; v.l. ummisati for ˚mīḷ˚?).

ud + misati

Ummihati

to urinate Vin i.78 (ūhanati + ).

ud + mih

Ummīleti

to open one’s eyes Ja i.439; Ja ii.195; Ja iv.457; Ja vi.185; Mil 179, Mil 357 Mil 394; Vism 185, Vism 186; Dhp-a ii.28 (opp. ni˚); Vv-a 205, Vv-a 314.

Caus. of ud + mīl; opp. ni(m)mīleti

Ummuka

(nt.) a fire brand Vin iv.265; SN iv.92 (T. ummukka meaning “loosened”?); Ja ii.69 v.l. ˚kk), 404 (kk); iii.356.

Sk. ulmuka perhaps to Lat. adoleo, cp. also alāta firebrand; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. adoleo

Ummujjati

to emerge, rise up (out of water) Vin i.180; SN iv.312; AN iv.11 sq; Ja ii.149, Ja ii.284; Ja iii.507 Ja iv.139; Pp 71; Mil 118; DN-a i.37, DN-a i.127; Pv-a 113.

ud + majj

Ummujjana

(nt.) emerging Vism 175 (+ nimmujjana); DN-a i.115.

fr. ummujjati

Ummujjamānaka

(adj.) emerging AN ii.182.

ummujjamāna, ppr. med, of ummujjati, + ka

Ummujjā

(f.) emerging, jumping out of (water), only in phrase ummujja-nimujjaṃ karoti to emerge & dive DN i.78; MN i.69; AN i.170; Ja iv.139; Ne 110; Vism 395 (= Pts ii.208).

fr. ummujjati

Ummūla

(adj.) “roots-out”, with roots showing, laying bare the roots Ja i.249 (˚ṃ karoti); Sdhp 452.

ud + mūla

Ummūlaka

(adj.) uprooting, laying bare the roots Ja i.303 (vāta).

= ummūla

Ummūleti

to uproot, to root out Ja i.329.

Caus. fr. ummūla

Umhayati

to laugh out loud Ja ii.131 (= hasitaṃ karoti); iii.44; iv.197; v.299 (˚amāna hasamāna C.). Caus. umhāpeti Ja v.297.

Sk. *ut-smayate, ud + smi

Uyyassu

(imper. 3rd. sg.) is v.l. BB. and C. reading at Ja vi.145, Ja vi.146 for dayassu, fly; probably for (i) yassu of to go.

Uyyāti

to go out, to go away Ja ii.3, Ja ii.4 (imper. uyyāhi); iv.101 ■ Caus. uyyāpeti to cause to go away to bring or take out SN iv.312.

ud +

Uyyāna

(nt.) a park, pleasure grove, a (royal) garden Ja i.120, Ja i.149; Ja ii.104; Ja iv.213 Ja v.95; Ja vi.333; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 74, Pv-a 76; Vv-a 7; Sdhp 7.

-kīḷā amusement in the park, sports Dhp-a i.220; Dhp-a iv.3 -pāla overseer of parks, head gardener, park keeper Ja ii.105, Ja ii.191; Ja iv.264 bhūmi garden ground, pleasure ground Ja i.58; Vv 6419; Pv ii.129; DN-a i.235.

Sk. udyāna, fr. ud +

Uyyānavant

(adj.) full of pleasure gardens Pv iii.36.

fr. uyyāna

Uyyāma

exertion effort, endeavour Dhs 13, Dhs 22, Dhs 289, Dhs 571; Dhs-a 146.

Sk. udyama, ud + yam; P. uyyāma with ā for a, as niyāma → niyama; cp. BSk. udyama Jtm 210

Uyyuñjati

to go away, depart, leave one’s house Dhp 91 (cp. Dhp-a ii.170) ■ pp. uyyutta ■ Caus uyyojeti (q.v.).

ud + yuj

Uyyuta

(adj.) striving, busy (in a good or bad cause) Snp 247, Snp 248; Ja v.95.

ud + yuta

Uyyutta

striving, active, zealous, energetic Ja i.232.

pp. of uyyuñjati

Uyyoga

departure, approach of death Dhp 236 (cp. Dhp-a iii.335).

fr. ud + yuj

Uyyojana

(nt.) inciting, instigation AN iv.233.

fr. uyyojeti

Uyyojita

instigated Mil 228; Pv-a 105.

pp. of uyyojeti

Uyyojeti

1. to instigate Vin iv.235; Ja iii.265.

2. to dismiss, take leave of (acc.), send off let go Vin i.179; AN iii.75; Ja i.119 (bhikkhu-sanghaṃ) 293; iii.188; v.217; vi.72; Vism 91; Dhp-a i.14, Dhp-a i.15, Dhp-a i.398 Dhp-a ii.44; Vv-a 179; Pv-a 93 ■ pp. uyyojita (q.v.).

Caus. of uyyuñjati

Uyyodhika

(nt.) a plan of combat, sham fight Vin iv.107; DN i.6; AN v.65; DN-a i.85.

fr. ud + yudh

Ura

(m. nt.) & Uro (nt.)

1. the breast, chest ■ Cases after the nt. s ■ declension are instr. urasā Thag 27; Snp 609; & loc.; urasi Snp 255; Ja iii.148; iv. 118, also urasiṃ Ja iii.386 (= urasmiṃ C.). Other cases of nt. a-stem, e.g. instr. urena Ja iii.90; Pv-a 75; loc ure DN i.135; Ja i.156, Ja i.433, Ja i.447; Pv-a 62 (ure jāta; cp orasa) ■ Vin ii.105 (contrasted with piṭṭhi back); iv.129; Ja iv.3; Ja v.159, Ja v.202; Nd ii.659; Pv iv.108; Dhp-a iii.175; DN-a i.254; Dhs-a 321; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 66uraṃ deti (with loc.) to put oneself on to something with one’s chest fig. to apply oneself to Ja i.367, Ja i.401, Ja i.408; Ja iii.139, Ja iii.455 Ja iv.219; Ja v.118, Ja v.278.

2. (appld.) the base of a carriage pole Vv 6328 (= īsāmūla Vv-a 269).

-ga going on the chest, creeping, i.e. a snake SN i.69; Snp 1, Snp 604; Ja i.7; Ja iv.330; Ja vi.208; Vv 808; Pv i.121 (urena gacchati ti urago sappass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ Pv-a 63); Pv-a 61, Pv-a 67. -cakka an iron wheel (put on the chest), as an instrument of torture in Niraya Ja i.363, Ja i.414 -cchada “breast cover”, breast plate (for ornament) Vin ii.10; Ja iv.3; Ja v.215, Ja v.409; Ja vi.480; Thag-a 253. -ttāḷi beating one’s breast (as a sign of mourning & sorrow) MN i.86 MN i.136; AN ii.188; AN iii.54, AN iii.416; AN iv.293; Pv-a 39. -tthala the breast AN ii.174.

Sk. uras

Urabbha

a ram DN i.127; AN i.251 sq. AN ii.207; AN iv.41 sq.; Ja v.241; Pp 56; DN-a i.294; Dhp-a ii.6 See also orabbhika.

Sk. urabhra, with ulā & uraṇa to be compared with Gr.; ἀρήν wether, cp. Hom. εἰρος wool; Lat. vervex Ags. waru = E. ware (orig. sheepskins) = Ger. ware Here also belongs P. urāṇī

Urāṇī

(f.) an ewe Ja v.241 (= urāṇikā C.); v.l. uraṇī & uraṇikā.;

or uraṇī?, f. of uraṇa, see urabbha

Uru

(adj.) [cp. Av. ravah space; Gr. εὐρυς wide; Lat. rūs free or wide space, field; Idg. *ru, *uer wide, to which also Goth. rūms space = Ags. rūm, E. room, Ger. raum wide, large; excellent, eminent Ja v.89; Mil 354; Sdhp 345, Sdhp 592 ■ pl. urū sands, soil Ja v.303.

Urundā

(f.) freedom of the chest, free breathing, relief DN ii.269 (v.l. uruddhā perhaps preferable, for ura uddharana lifting or raising the chest).

ura + undā?

Urūḷhava

(adj.) large, bulky, immense; great big, strong. Only in one stock phrase “nāgo isādanto urūḷhavo” Vv 209, 439; Ja vi.488; of which variant n. ī ubbuḷhavā MN i.414 = MN i.450. The word is expld. at Ja vi.488 by “ubbāhana-samattha”; at Vv-a 104 (pl. urṳ̄ḷhavā) by “thāmajava-parakkamehi byūhanto (v.l. brahmanto) mahantaṃ yuddha-kiccaṃ vahituṃ samatthā ti attho”. The BSk. udviddha (Divy 7) may possibly be a corruption of ubbūḷha.

doubtful, prob. for urūḷhavant, with affix vant to a pp. formed with ud˚. The word is taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as ud-ūḷha of vah (with d for r). The well accredited (and older) variant ubbuḷhavā is expld. (see Kern, s. v.) as pp. of ud + bṛh2, cp. upabrūhana Perhaps we have to consider this as the legitimate form urūḷhava as its corruption. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 141 takes urūḷhavā as ud + rūḷha, pp. of ruh (with r. for rr = dr), thus “overgrown”

Ulati

is a commentator’s invention; said to be = gacchati to go Vism 60 (in definition of paṃsu-kūla; paṃsu viya kucchita-bhāvaṃ ulatī ti paṃsu-kūlaṃ).

Ulūka

an owl Vin i.186 (˚camma, sandals of owl’s skin); iii.34; AN v.289 sq.; Ja ii.208, Ja ii.352 (as king of the birds); Mil 403; Dhp-a i.50 (kāka˚ crows & owls).;

-pakkha owls’ wings (used as dress) Vin i.305; DN i.167. -pakkhika dress of owls’ wings, or owl feathers AN i.241, AN i.296; AN ii.206; Pp 55 (= ulūka-pattāni ganthetvā kata-nivāsanaṃ Pp A 233).

Sk. ulūka; cp. Lat. ulucus & ulula owl, ululāre to howl, Ger. uhu; onomat. *ul, as in Gr. ὀλολύζω, Sk. ululi, Lith. ulůti

Ullaṅghati

to leap up Ja iii.222 (udakato ˚itvā) ■ Caus. ullaṅgheti to make jump up (always with olangheti, i.e. to make dance up & down Vin iii.121; Ja v.434; Dhp-a iv.197 ■ pp. ullaṅghita (q v.).

ud + laṅgh, cp. BSk. prollanghya transgressing (= pra + ullangh˚) Divy 596

Ullaṅghanā

(f.) jumping up, lifting up, raising Vin iii.121; Ja iv.5 (˚samattha?).

abstr. fr. ud + laṅgh

Ullaṅghita

being jumped on, set on C. on SN i.40 (see K. S. i.318) (for uḍḍita = taṇhāya ullanghita).

pp. of ullangheti

Ullapati

to call out, to talk to, lay claim to Vin i.97; Vin iii.105; Pp 67 (= katheti Pp A 249).

ud + lapati

Ullapana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) calling out, enticing, laying claim to Vin iii.101; Thig 357; Mil 127; Thag-a 243ullapanā = uddhaṃ katvā lapanā Vism 27.

fr. ullapati

Ullahaka

(adj.) only in acc. nt. ullahakaṃ used adverbially, in cpd. dant˚; after the manner of rubbing the teeth, by means of grinding the teeth MN iii.167. Seems to be a α ̔́πας λεγομένον.

?

Ullāpa

is v.l. for uklāpa (q.v.).

Ullikhana

(nt.) combing, scratching Vv-a 349; Thag-a 267.

fr. ud + likh

Ullikhita

scratched, combed Vin i.254; Ja ii.92 (aḍḍhullikhitehi kesehi); Ud 22 (id. with upaḍḍh for aḍḍh˚); Vv-a 197.

pp. of ud + likh

Ulliṅgeti

to exhibit, show as a characteristic Vism 492.

Denom. of ud + linga

Ullitta

smeared; only in combn. ullittāvalitta smeared up & down, i.e. smeared all round Vin ii.117; MN ii.8; AN i.101, AN i.137; AN iv.231; Thag 737.

pp. of ud + lip

Ullumpati

to take up, to help (with acc.), to save Vin ii.277; DN i.249.

ud + lup, cp. BSk. ullumpati Mahāvy § 268

Ullumpana

(nt.) saving, helping; in phrase ˚sabhāva-saṇṭhita of a helping disposition, full of mercy DN-a i.177; Pv-a 35. Same as ullopana (q.v.).

fr. ullumpati

Ullulita

waved, shaken (by the wind); waving Ja vi.536.

pp. of ulloleti

Ulloka

doubtful in its meaning; occurs at Vin i.48 = Vin ii.209 as ullokā paṭhamaṃ ohāreti, trsl. Vin Texts by “a cloth to remove cobwebs”, but better by Andersen Pāli Reader as “as soon as it is seen”; at Vin ii.151 the translators give “a cloth placed under the bedstead to keep the stuffing from coming out”. See on term Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 31 ■ In cpd ulloka-paduma at Ja vi.432 it may mean “bright lotus” (lit. to be looked at) See ulloketi.

ud + lok˚

Ullokaka

(adj.) looking on (to), looking out; in phrase mukh˚; looking into a person’s face; i.e. cheerful winning; or “of bright face”, with a winning smile DN i.60; DN-a i.59, DN-a i.168; Pv-a 219 (˚ika for ˚aka).

fr. ulloketi

Ullokita

looked at, looked on Ja i.253; DN-a i.193.

pp. of ulloketi

Ulloketi

to look on to, look for, await Ja i.232 (ākāsaṃ), 253; ii.221, 434; DN-a i.153, DN-a i.168; Vv-a 316 ■ pp. ullokita (q.v.).

ud + lok˚, cp. loka, āloka & viloka

Ullopana

(nt.) = ullumpana Dhp-a i.309 (T. faulty; see remarks ad locum).

Ullola

1. a wave Ja iii.228; Ja vi.394. - 2. commotion, unrest Ja iv.306, Ja iv.476.

fr. ud + lul

Ullolanā

(f.) wavering, loitering (in expectation of something), greed Thag-a 243.

fr. ulloleti

Ulloleti

to stroll or hang about, to wait for, expect Thag-a 243 ■ pp. ullulita.

denom. fr. ullola

Uḷāra

(adj.) great, eminent, excellent, superb, lofty, noble, rich ■ Dhammapāla at Vv-a 10–⁠11 distinguishes 3 meanings: tīhi atthehi ūḷāraṃ paṇītaṃ (excellent), seṭṭhaṃ (best), mahantaṃ (great) Vin iii.41 (˚bhoga); DN i.96; MN iii.38 (˚bhogatā); SN v.159; Snp 53, Snp 58, Snp 301; Nd ii.170; Ja i.399; Ja v.95; Vv 11 8426; Pv i.512 (= hita samiddha Pv-a 30); Vv-a 18 (˚pabhāva = mahānubhāva); Thag-a 173, Thag-a 280; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 6 Pv-a 7, Pv-a 8, Pv-a 25, Pv-a 30, Pv-a 43, Pv-a 58 and passim; Sdhp 26, Sdhp 260, Sdhp 416. Der. oḷārika (q.v.).

Vedic udāra, BSk. audāra

Uḷāratā

(f.) = uḷāratta Sdhp 254.

Uḷāratta

(nt.) greatness etc.; only neg. an˚; smallness, insignificance, inferiority Vv-a 24.

abstr. fr. uḷāra

Uḷu

a lunar mansion Mil 178.

Sk. uḍu, dialectical?

Uḷuṅka

a ladle, a spoon Vin i.286; Ja i.120, Ja i.157; Ja iii.461; Mil 8; Dhp-a i.425; Dhp-a ii.3, Dhp-a ii.20; Dhp-a iv.75, Dhp-a iv.123.

dial.?

Uḷumpa

a raft, a float Vin i.230; Vin iii.63 (˚ṃ bandhati); Ja iv.2; Dhp-a ii.120.

dial.?

Uviṭṭa

having entered, come in DN ii.274 (v.l. BK. upa˚).

= viṭṭha, pp. of viś, with prefixed u

Usabha1

a bull; often fig as symbol of manliness and strength (cp. nisabha) DN i.6 (˚yuddha bull-fight), 9 (˚lakkhaṇa signs on a b.), 127; Vin iii.39 (puris˚ “bull of a man”, a very strong man) AN i.188; AN ii.207; AN iv.41 sq., 376; v.347, 350; Snp 26 sq. 416, 646, 684; Dhp 422; Ja i.28 (v.203; ˚kkhandha broadshouldered), 336; v.99 (bharatûsabha); vi.136; Pp 56 Vism 153 (˚camma, in simile); Dhp-a i.396; Snp-a 226, Snp-a 333 Kp-a 144; Pv-a 163; Vv-a 85 ■ The compn. forms of usabha are āsabha, isabha (in nisabha) & esabha (q.v.) The relations between usabha, vasabha & nisabha are discussed at Snp-a 40.;

Vedic ṛṣabha; Av. aršan male, Gr. α ̓́ρσην, α ̓́ρρην masculine, to Idg. *eres & *rēs; to wet, sprinkle (with semen), as also in Sk. rasa juice, rasā wet, liquid, Lat rōs dew. A parallel root *ueres in Sk. varṣa rain, Gr ε ̓́ρση dew; Sk. vṛṣan & vṛṣabha bull

Usabha2

(nt.) a certain measure of length, consisting of 20 yaṭṭhis (see yaṭṭhi or 140 cubits Ja i.64 (eight), 70 (id.); ii.91; iv.17 (one) 142 (eight); Dhp-a i.108 (˚mattaṃ).

= usabha1, in special application (?)

Usā

(f.) (a certain) food Ja vi.80.

doubtful

Usīra

(m. & nt.) the fragrant root of Andropogon Muricatum (cp. bīraṇa) Vin i.201; Vin ii.130 (˚mayā vijanī) SN ii.88 (˚nāḷi); AN ii.199 (id.); Dhp 337; Ja v.39; Thag 402 (˚attho).

Sk. uśīra

Usu

(m. & f) Sk. iṣu] an arrow Vin iii.106 (˚loma); DN i.9; MN i.86; MN iii.133; SN i.127; AN ii.117; AN iii.162; Ja iv.416 Ja vi.79, Ja vi.248, Ja vi.454; Mil 331, Mil 339; Snp-a 466; Pv-a 155.

-kāra an arrow-maker, fletcher MN ii.105; Dhp 80, Dhp 145 Thag 29; Ja ii.275; Ja vi.66; Dhp-a i.288.

Usumā

(f.) heat Ja i.31 (= uṇha iii.55), 243; ii.433; Vism 172 (usuma-vaṭṭi-sadisa); DN-a i.186; Dhp-a i.225; Dhp-a ii.20.

the diaeretic form of Sk. uṣman, of which the direct equivalent is P. usmā (q.v.)

Usuyyaka

(adj.) envious, jealous Vin ii.190; Snp 318, Snp 325; Ja ii.192 (v.l. asuyy˚); v.114 ■ Note. The long vowel form usūyaka occurs in cpd. abbhusūyaka (q.v.). Spelling ussuyikā occurs at Vv 3321 (see Vv-a 147). Usuyyati & Usuyati;

fr. usuyyā

Usuyyati & Usūyati

to be jealous or envious, to envy (with acc.) Vin i.242; Ja iii.27 (ppr. an-usuyyaṃ); Pv ii.320 (maṃ usūyasi = mayhaṃ issaṃ karosi Pv-a 87).

Sk. asūyati; fr. usuyā envy

Usuyyanā

(f.) & Usuyyitatta (nt.) are exegetical abstr. formations of usuyyā (q.v.). Dhs 1121; Pp 19. Usuyya & Usuya

Usuyyā & Usūyā

(f.) envy, jealousy, detraction SN i.127 (ū); Snp 245 (u); Ja ii.193 (ū); iii.99 (ū; v.l. ussuyyā); Mil 402 (ū); Dhs 1121 (u); Vv-a 71 (u) Snp-a 332 (u).

Sk. asūyā

Usmā

(f.) heat DN ii.335, DN ii.338; MN i.295; S ii. iii.143; iv.215, 294; v.212; Dhs 964; DN-a i.310 ■ In combn. with ˚kata it appears as usmī˚; e.g. at MN i.132, MN i.258.

-gata heated, belonging to heat Dhs 964; as tt. one who mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic Ja v.209 (samaṇateja C.; cp. BSk. uṣṇagata & uṣmagata Divy 166 Divy 240, Divy 271. 469, & see Kern’s mistakes at; Toev. s. v.).

see usumā

Ussa

(adj.) superior, higher (opp. oma inferior) AN iii.359; Snp 860 (= Nd i.251 with spelling ossa), 954.

der. fr. ud = *ud-s(y)a, in analogy to oma fr. ava; but taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as an abbreviated ussada

Ussakkati1

to creep out or up to, to rise AN iii.241 sq.; Mil 260.

ud + sakkati, see sakkati

Ussakkati2

to endeavour Vism 437; Vv-a 95 (Caus. II. ussakkāpesi), 214.

by-form of ussukkati

Ussaṅkita

(adj.) = ussankin AN iii.128; Dhp-a iii.485 (+ pari˚; cp. ā˚).

pp. of ud + śaṅk

Ussaṅkin

(adj.) distrustful, fearful, anxious Vin ii.192.

fr. ud + śaṅk

Ussaṅkha

(adj.) with ankles midway (?) in ˚pāda the 7th of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.17; DN iii.143, DN iii.154; DA explains: the ankles are not over the heels, but midway in the length of the foot.

ud + sankha

Ussajjati

to dismiss, set free, take off, hurl AN iv.191.

ud + sṛj, cp. BSk. protsṛjati Divy 587

Ussaṭa

run away MN ii.65.

pp. of ud + sarati of sṛ; cp. saṭa for *sūta

Ussada

: this word is beset with difficulties, the phrase satt-ussada is applied in all kinds of meanings, evidently the result of an original application & meaning having become obliterated satt˚ is taken as *sapta (seven) as well as *sattva (being), ussada as prominence, protuberance, fulness arrogance. The meanings may be tabulated as follows (1) prominence (cp. Sk. utsedha), used in characterisation of the Nirayas, as “projecting, prominent hells”, ussadanirayā (but see also below 4) Ja i.174; Ja iv.3, Ja iv.422 (pallankaṃ, v.l. caturassạṃ, with four corners); v.266 ■ adj prominent Thag-a 13 (tej-ussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi, or as below 4?).

2. protuberance, bump, swelling Ja iv.188 also in phrase sattussada having 7 protuberances, a qualification of the Mahāpurisa DN iii.151 (viz. on both hands, feet, shoulders, and on his back).

3. rubbing in, anointing, ointment; adj. anointed with (-˚), in candan˚ Ja iii.139; Ja iv.60; Thag 267; Vv 537; Dhp-a i.28; Vv-a 237.

4. a crowd adj. full of (-˚) in phrase sattussada crowded with (human beings) DN i.87 (cp. DN-a i.245: aneka-satta-samākiṇṇa; but in same sense BSk sapt- otsada Divy 620, Divy 621); Pv iv.18 (of Niraya = full of beings, expld. by sattehi ussanna uparûpari nicita Pv-a 221.

5. qualification, characteristic, mark, attribute, in catussada “having the four qualifications (of a good village)” Ja iv.309 (viz. plenty of people, corn, wood and water C.). The phrase is evidently shaped after DN i.87 (under 4). As “preponderant quality, characteristic” we find ussada used at Vism 103 (cf. Asl. 267) in combns. lobh˚, dos˚, moh˚, alobh˚ etc. (quoted from the “Ussadakittana”), and similarly at Vv-a 19 in Dhammapāla’s definition of manussa (lobh’ādīhi alobh’ādīhi sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā), viz. sattā manussa-jātikā tesu lobh’ ādayo alobh’ādayo ca ussadā.

6. (metaph.) self-elevation, arrogance, conceit, haughtiness Vin i.3; Snp 515, Snp 624 (an˚ = taṇhā-ussada-abhāvena Snp-a 467), 783 (expld. by Nd i.72 under formula sattussada; i.e. showing 7 bad qualities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc.), 855 ■ See also ussādana, ussādeti etc.

most likely to ud + syad; see ussanna

Ussadaka

(adj.) over-full, overflowing AN iii.231, AN iii.234 (˚jāta, of a kettle, with vv.ll. ussuraka˚ & ussuka˚).;

fr. ussada 4

Ussanna

(adj.)

1. overflowing, heaped up, crowded; extensive, abundant preponderant, excessive, full of (˚-) Vin i.285 (cīvaraṃ u. overstocked; ii.270 (āmisaṃ too abundant); iii.286 Thig 444 (= upacita Thag-a 271); Ja i.48, Ja i.145 ˚kusalamūla); Dhp-a i.26 (id.); (lobho etc.) Asl. 267; Mil 223 (id.); Ja i.336 (kāla, fulfilled); iii.418; iv.140; Pv iii.51 (˚puñña, cp. Pv-a 197); Pv-a 71 (˚pabhā thick glow). Cp accussanna.

2. anointed Vv-a 237.

3. spread out wide Dhp-a ii.67 (mahāpaṭhavī u.), 72 (id.).

pp. of ud + syad, cp. abhisanna

Ussannatā

(f.) accumulation, fulness, plenty Kv 467 (where Kvu trsln. p. 275 gives ussadattā); Vv-a 18, Vv-a 19.

abstr. fr. ussanna

Ussaya

in ˚vādika Vin iv.224 is a variant of usuyya˚; “using envious language, quarrelsome” ■ Another ussaya [fr. ud + śri, cp. Sk. ucchrita, P. ussita & ussāpeti meaning “accumulation” is found in cpd. samussaya only.

Ussayāpeti

see udassaye.

Ussarati

to run out, run away Ja i.434 (imper. ussaratha); v.437 ■ pp. ussaṭa (q.v.) ■ Caus ussāreti (q.v.).

ud + sarati of sṛ;

Ussava

feast, making merry, holiday Vin iii.249; Ja i.475; Ja ii.13, Ja ii.248; Vv-a 7, Vv-a 109 (˚divasa).

Sk. utsava

Ussahati

to be able, to be fit for, to dare, venture Vin i.47, Vin i.83; Vin ii.208; Vin iii.17; DN i.135; SN iv.308, SN iv.310; Mil 242; Vv-a 100 ■ Caus. ussāheti (see pp. ussāhita ).

ud + sah, cp. BSk. utsaha Jtm 215; utsahetavya Divy 494; utsahana Divy 490; ucchahate for utsahate Avs ii.21

Ussāda

throwing up on DN-a i.122.

fr. ussādeti

Ussādana

(nt.)

1. overflowing, piling up, abundance MN iii.230 (opp. apasādana).

2 (probably confused with ussāraṇa) tumult, uproar, confusion AN iii.91, AN iii.92 (v.l. ussāraṇa) = Pp 66 (= hatthiassarathâdīnaṃ c’eva balakāyassa ca uccāsadda-mahāsaddo Pp A 249).

to ussādeti, cp. ussādita

Ussādita

. [See ussāpita & ussārita under ussāpeti & ussāreti. There exists in Pāli as well as in BSk. a confusion of different roots to express the notion of raising, rising, lifting unfolding, viz.; sṛ, syad, śri, sad, chad. (See ussada ucchādana, ussādeti, ussāpeti, ussāreti)].

fr. ussādeti, BSk. ucchrāyita Divy 76, Divy 77, Divy 466

Ussādiyati

to be in abundance, to be over Vin ii.167.

Pass. med. of ussādeti, cp. ussada 4

Ussādeti

1. to dismiss DN iii.128 [for ussāreti1]

2. to raise, cause to rise up on, haul up, pile up MN i.135; MN iii.230; AN iv.198, AN iv.201; Mil 187 Mil 250 ■ Pass. ussādiyati (q.v.) ■ pp. ussādita (q.v.).

denom. fr. ussada 1

Ussāpana

(nt.) lifting up, raising, erecting, unfolding (of a flag or banner) AN iv.41; Nd ii.503 (dhamma-dhajassa).

fr. ussāpeti

Ussāpita

lifted, raised, unfurled Mil 328 (dhamma-dhaja); Ja ii.219.

pp. of ussāpeti, cp. ussādita

Ussāpeti

to lift up, erect, raise, exalt Vin ii.195; AN iv.43; Ja ii.219; Ja iv.16; Ja v.95 (chattaṃ); Pv-a 75 (id.); Mil 21; Dhp-a i.3; Dhp-a iii.118 (kaṭṭhāni) ■ pp. ussāpita & ussita; (q.v.). See also usseti.

Caus. of ud + śri, cp. BSk. ucchrāpayati Av. SN i.384, SN i.386, SN i.387; SN ii.2

Ussāraṇa

(nt.) procession, going or running about, tumult Dhp-a ii.7 (so read for ossāraṇā). Cp. ussādana.

fr. ussāreti

Ussārita

lifted out or up Vism 63 (samuddavīcīhi thale ussārita; v.l. ussādita).

pp. of ussāreti2

Ussāreti1

to cause to move back, to cause to go away or to recede Vin i.32, Vin i.46 (here a student, when folding up his master’s robe, has to make the corners move back a hand’s breadth each time. Then the crease or fold will change and not tend to wear through), 276; ii.237 (here the reading ussādeti may be preferred); Ja i.419; Ja iv.349; Ja v.347 ■ Caus. II. ussārāpeti Ja ii.290.

Caus. of ussarati

Ussāreti2

to cause to raise aloft (of a flag), to lift Ja v.319 (= ussāpeti) ■ pp. ussārita.

= ussādeti

Ussāva1

hoarfrost, dew DN ii.19; Ja iv.120; Ja v.417; ˚bindu a dew drop AN iv.137; Pv iv.15; Snp-a 458; in comparisons: Vism 231, Vism 633.

either = Sk. avaśyāya, or to ud + sru

Ussāva2

outflow, taint, stain (cp. āsava) Dhp-a iv.165 (taṇhā˚; v.l. ussada, to ussada 6).

fr. ud + sru

Ussāvana

(nt.) proclamation (of a building as legal store house); in ˚antika within the proclaimed limit Vin i.239.

= ussāpana

Ussāsa

see nirussāsa.

Ussāha

strength, power, energy; endeavour, good-will MN ii.174; SN v.440; AN i.147; AN ii.93, AN ii.195; AN iii.75, AN iii.307; AN iv.320; AN v.93 sq.; Mil 323 Mil 329 (dhiti + ) Vism 330; Sdhp 49, Sdhp 223, Sdhp 535, Sdhp 619; Snp-a 50; Dhp-a iii.394; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 106, Pv-a 166; Vv-a 32, Vv-a 48 ■ In exegetical literature often combd. with the quâsi synonym ussoḷhi e.g. at Nd ii.s. v.; Dhs 13, Dhs 22, Dhs 289, Dhs 571.

Sk. utsāha & utsaha, see ussahati

Ussāhana

(f.) = ussāha Ne 8.

fr. ussahati cp. BSk. utsahana Divy 490

Ussāhita

determined, incited, encouraged, urged Ja i.329; Vv-a 109; Pv-a 201 Cp. sam˚.

pp. of ussāheti, Caus. of ussahati

Ussiñcati

to bale out, exhaust Ja i.450, Ja ii.70; Ja iv.16; Mil 261.

ud + sic

Ussiñcana

(nt.) drying, baling out, raising water, exhausting Ja i.417.

fr. ussiñcati

Ussita

erected, high SN v.228; Thag 424 (pannaddhaja); Ja v.386; Vv 8415; Vv-a 339. Cp. sam˚.

Sk. ucchrita, pp. of ud + sri, see ussāpeti

Ussīsaka

(nt.) the head of a bed, a pillow for the head Ja i.266; Ja ii.410, Ja ii.443; Ja iv.154; Ja v.99; Ja vi.32 Ja vi.37, Ja vi.56; Dhp-a i.184 (˚passe, opp. pāda-passe).

ud + sīsa + ka

Ussuka

(adj.)

1. endeavouring, zealous, eager, active SN i.15 (an˚ inactive) AN iv.266; Snp 298.

2. greedy, longing for Dhp 199 (an˚).

Sk. utsuka, also BSk. e.g. Jtm 3168

Ussukita

(adj.) = ussukin; only neg. an˚; free from greed Vv-a 74.

Ussukin

(adj.) greedy, longing; only neg. an˚ Pp 23.

fr. ussuka

Ussukka

(nt.) zeal, energy, endeavour hard work, eagerness Vin i.50; SN iv.288, SN iv.291, SN iv.302; Nd ii.s. v. Ne 29; Vv-a 147; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 135; Vism 90 (āpajjati) 644 (˚ppahānaṃ) ■ Cp. appossukka.

*utsukya fr. ussuka; cp. BSk. utsukya Divy 601 and autsukya Avs i.85

Ussukkatā

(f.) = ussukka Ay. 195.

Ussukkati

to endeavour DN i.230. - Caus. II. ussukkāpeti to practice eagerly, to indulge in to perform Vv-a 95, Vv-a 98, Vv-a 243. See also ussakkati.

denom. fr. ussukka

Ussuta

(adj.) defiled, lustful (cp. āsava), only neg. an˚; free from defilement Dhp 400. Ussuya, Ussuyaka

pp. of ud + sru, cp. avassuta

Ussuyā, Ussuyaka

, uss.

Ussussati

to dry up (intrs.) SN i.126; SN iii.149 (mahāsamuddo u.); Snp 985; Ja vi.195.

ud + sussati of śuṣ

Ussūra

(adj) “sun-out”, the sun being out; i.e. after sunrise or after noon, adverbially in ˚bhatta eating after mid-day, unpunctual meals AN iii.260, and ˚seyyā sleep after sunrise, sleeping late DN iii.184; Dhp-a ii.227. Besides as loc. adv. ussūre the sun having been up (for a long time), i.e. at evening Vin i.293; Vin iv.77; Ja ii.286, also in ati-ussūre too long after sunrise Vv-a 65; Dhp-a iii.305.

ut + sūra

Usseti

to erect, raise, stand up Ja iv.302; aor. ussesi Ja vi.203 ■ Caus. ussāpeti; pp. ussita & ussāpita; (q.v.).

ud + śri

Usseneti

to draw on to oneself, to be friendly SN iii.89 (v.l. ussi˚) AN ii.214 sq. (opp. paṭisseneti); Pts ii.167 (ussi˚); Kvu i. 93 (reading ussineti + visineti). See also paṭiseneti.

denom. fr. ussena = ussayana, ud + śri (?)

Usseḷheti

(?) Vin ii.10 (for ussoḷh˚?); cp. ussoḷhikāya.

Ussota

(adj.) nt. ussotaṃ as adv. “up-stream” Mil 117.

ud + sota

Ussoḷhi

(f.) exertion MN i.103; SN ii.132; SN v.440; AN ii.93, AN ii.195; AN iii.307; AN iv.320; AN v.93 sq. Often comḅd. with ussāha (q.v.).

a by-form of ussāha fr. ud + sah, pp. *soḍha dialectical

Ussoḷhikā

(f.) belonging to exertion, only in instr. as adv. ussoḷhikāya “in the way of exertion” i.e. ardently, keenly, eagerly SN i.170 (naccati).

adj. of ussoḷhi

Uhuṅkara

an owl (lit. “uhu”-maker) Ja vi.538 (= ulūka C.).

ū.

onomat. uhu + kara, see under ulūka

Ū

Ūkā

(f.) a louse Ja i.453; ii. 324; iii.393; v.298; Mil 11; Vism 445; Dhs-a 307 Dhs-a 319; Dhp-a iii.342; Vv-a 86.

is also used as linear measure (cp. Sk. yūkālikṣaṃ) Vb-a 343 (where 7 likkhā are said to equal 1 ūkā).

Sk. yūkā, prob. dialectical

Ūtagītaṃ

at Ja i.290 in phrase “jimaṃ ūtagītaṃ gāyanto” read “imaṃ jūtagītaṃ g.”

Ūna

(adj.) wanting, deficient less MN ii.73; Ja v.330; Dhp-a i.77; Dhp-a iv.210. Mostly adverbially with numerals = one less, but one, minus (one or two); usually with eka (as ekūna one less, e.g. ekūna-aṭṭhasataṃ (799) Ja i.57; ekūna-pañcasate Kp-a 91 ekūna-vīsati (19) Vism 287; eken’ūnesu pañcasu attabhāvasatesu (499) Ja i.167; also with eka in instr. as eken’ūnapañcasatāni (deficient by one) Vin ii.285; Kp-a 91; sometimes without eka, e.g. ūnapañcasatāni (499) Vin iii.284 ūnavīsati (19) Vin iv.130, Vin iv.148. With “two” less: dvīhi ūnaṃ sahassaṃ (998) Ja i.255anūna not deficient complete Pv-a 285 (= paripuṇṇa).

-udara (ūnudara, ūnūdara, ūnodara) an empty stomach adj. of empty stomach; ˚udara Ja ii.293; Ja vi.295; ˚ūdara

J vi.258; Mil 406; odara Snp 707; Dhp-a i.170. -bhāva depletion, deficiency Snp-a 463 (v.l. hānabhāva).

Vedic ūna; cp. Av. ūna, Gr. ε ̓ϋνις, Lat. vāpus, Goth. wans, Ags. won = E. want

Ūnaka

(adj.) deficient, wanting, lacking Vin iii.81, Vin iii.254; Vin iv.263; Snp 721; Mil 310, Mil 311, (˚satta-vassika one who is not yet 7 years old), 414; Dhp-a i.79.

ūna + ka

Ūnatta

(nt.) depletion, deficiency Vin ii.239; Ja v.450.

abstr. fr. ūna

Ūpāya

at Dhp-a ii.93 stands for upāya.

Ūpiya

see upiya & opiya;.

Ūmika

wave Mil 197 (˚vanka waterfall, cataract). Umi & Umi;

f. ūmi

Ūmī & Ūmi

(f.) a wave MN i.460 (˚bhaya); SN iv.157; SN v.123 (˚jāta); AN iii.232 sq. (id.); Snp 920; Ja ii.216; Ja iii.262 Ja iv.141; Mil 260 (˚jāta) ■ Note. A parallel form of ūmī is ummī.

Sk. ūrmi, fr. Idg. *ṷel (see nibbāna i.2); cp. Gr. ἐλύω io wind, ε ̔́λις wound; Lat. volvo to roll Ags. wylm wave; Ohg. wallan; also Sk. ulva, varutra valaya, valli, vṛṇoti. See details in Walde, Lat. Wtb under volvo

Ūru

the thigh Snp 610; Vin ii.105 (in contrast with bāha); iii. 106; Ja i.277; Ja ii.275, Ja ii.443; Ja iii.82; Ja v.89, Ja v.155; Nd ii.659 (so read for uru); Vv 6413; DN-a i.135 = Vin ii.190.

-aṭṭhi(ka) the thigh bone MN i.58; MN iii.92; Ja i.428 (ūraṭṭhika); Kp-a 49, Kp-a 50 (ūraṭṭhi). -(k)khambha stiffening or rigidity of the thigh, paralysis of the leg (as symptom of fright) MN i.237; Ja v.23.

Vedic ūru; cp. Lat. vārus bow-legged, of Idg. *ṷā, to which also Ohg. wado = Ger. wade calf of leg

Ūsa

salt-ground; saline substance, always combd. with khāra SN iii.131 (˚gandha); AN i.209.

Sk. ūṣa

Ūsara

(adj.) saline SN iv.315; AN iv.237; Dhs-a 243 ■ nt. ˚ṃ a spot with saline soil Pv-a 139 (gloss for ujjhangala).

Sk. ūṣara, fr. ūṣa

Ūha

see vy˚, sam˚.

Ūhacca1

(indecl.)

1. lifting up, raising or rising Ja iii.206.

2. pulling out, taking away, removing DN ii.254 (cp. Dhp-a ii.181); SN i.27 (v.l. for ohacca); Snp 1119 (= uddharitvā uppāṭayitvā Nd ii.171).

ger. of ūharati, ud + hṛ; (or ava + hṛ; cp. ohacca & oharati) for uddharati 1 & 2

Ūhacca2

(indecl.) soiling by defecation, defecating Ja ii.71 (= vaccaṃ katvā C.).

ger. of ūhanati2 = ūhadati

Ūhaññati

to be soiled; to be disturbed aor. ūhaññi Vin i.48; MN i.116; aor. also ūhani MN i.243.

Pass. of ūhanati1

Ūhata1

1. lifted, risen, raised Vin iii.70; Ja v.403. 2. taken out, pulled out, destroyed Thag 223 = Nd ii.974 Thag 514; Dhp 338 (= ucchinna Dhp-a iv.48).

3. soiled with excrements Vin ii.222.

pp. of ud + hṛ; or dhṛ; thus for uddhaṭa as well as uddhata

Ūhata2

disturbed MN i.116.

pp. of ūhanati1

Ūhadati

to defecate Ja ii.355; Dhp-a ii.181 (so read with v.l. for T. ūhadayati).

for ūhanati2 (?) or formed secondarily fr. ūhacca or ohacca?

Ūhana

(nt.) reasoning, consideration, examination Mil 32 (“comprehension” trsl.; as characteristic of manasikāra); Vism 142 = Dhs-a 114 (“prescinding” trsl. as characteristic of vitakka).

fr. ūhanati?

Ūhanati1

to disturb, shake up, defile, soil MN i.243; Ja ii.73 ■ Pass. aor. ūhani: see ūhaññati ■ pp ūhata2 (q.v.). Cp. sam˚.

ud + han

Ūhanati2

1. to cut off, discharge, emit, defecate Vin i.78; Vin iii.227. 2. [prob. for ūharati, cp. ūhacca1] to lift up, to take away MN i.117 (opp. odahati). Cp. ohana in bimb ohana. ger. ūhacca2 (q.v.).

either ud + han or ava + han, cp. ohanati

Ūharati

only in forms of ger. ūhacca1 and pp. ūhata1 (q.v.).

for uddharati

Ūhasati

to laugh at, deride, mock AN iii.91; Ja v.452 (+ pahasati); Pp 67 (= avahasati Pp A 249).

either ud or ava + has, cp. avahasati

Ūhasana

(nt.) laughing, mocking Mil 127.

fr. ūhasati

Ūhā

(f.) life, only in cpd. āyūha lifetime Pv-a 136, Pv-a 162 (˚pariyosāna) ■ As Name of a river at Mil 70. Cp. BSk. ūhā in ūhāpoha Av. SN i.209, SN i.235.

E.

etym.?

E

Eka

(adj.-n.m.) one. Eka follows the pron. declension i.e. nom. pl. is eke (e.g. Snp 43, Snp 294, Snp 780 etc.)

1 “one” as number, either with or without contrast to two or more; often also “single” opp. to nānā various, many (q.v.). Very frequent by itself as well as with other numerals, ekangula one thumb Mvu 29, Mvu 11; Dhp-a iii.127; ekapasse in one quarter Dhp-a ii.52; ekamaccha a single fish Ja i.222. In enumeration: eka dve pañca dasa Dhp-a i.24. With other numerals: eka-tiṃsa (31) DN ii.2 ˚saṭṭhi (61) Vin i.20; ˚navuti (91) Dhp-a i.97; ˚sata (101; Dhp-a ii.14. Cp. use of “one less” in ekūna (see under cpds. & ūna).

2. (as predicative and adj.) one, by oneself, one only, alone, solitary AN iii.67 (ek-uddesa) Ja i.59 (ekadivasena on the one day only, i.e. on the same day); Dhp 395; Snp 35, Snp 1136 (see Nd ii.172a), ekaṃ ekaṃ one by one SN i.104 (devo ekaṃ ekaṃ phusāyati rains drop by drop), cp. ekameka.

3. a certain one, some one, some; adj. in function of an indefinite article = a one (definite or indefinite): ekasmiṃ samaye once upon a time Ja i.306; ekena upāyena by some means Ja iii.393 ekaṃ kulaṃ gantuṃ to a certain clan (corresp. with asuka Dhp-a i.45; ekadivasaṃ one day Ja i.58; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 67 Cp. Snp 1069 (see Nd ii.172b) ■ All these three categories are found represented in freq. cpds., of which the foll. are but a small selection.

-akkhi see ˚pokkhara. -agga calm, tranquil (of persons just converted), collected [cp. Buddh. Sk. ekāgra Jtm 3170] SN iv.125; AN i.70, AN i.266; AN ii.14, AN ii.29; AN iii.175 (˚citta), 391; Snp 341; Ja i.88; Ne 28, cp. Mil 139 -aggatā concentration; capacity to individualise; contemplation, tranquillity of mind (see on term Cpd. 16, 1785 237, 240) SN v.21, SN v.197, SN v.269 (cittassa); AN i.36; AN iv.40; Dhs 11 (cittassa); Vism 84. -aṅga a part, divisioh, something

belonging to Ja iii.308; Ud 69. -aṅgaṇa one (clear space Ja ii.357. -āgārika a thief, robber DN i.52, DN i.166; AN i.154, AN i.295; AN ii.206; AN iii.129; Nd i.416; Nd ii.304 iii.a. DN-a i.159 (= ekam eva gharaṃ parivāretvā vilumpanaṃ DN-a i.159). -āyana leading to one goal, direct way or “leading to the goal as the one & only way (magga MN i.63; SN v.167, SN v.185. -ārakkha having one protector or guardian DN iii.269; AN v.29 sq. -ālopika = ekāgārika DN i.166; AN i.295; AN ii.206. -āsana sitting or living alone MN i.437; Snp 718; Dhp 305; Ja v.397; Mil 342; Vism 60 (expld. with reference to eating, viz. ekāsane bhojanaṃ ekāsanaṃ, perhaps comparing āsana with asana2. The foll ˚āsanika is ibid. expld. as “taṃ sīlam assā ti ekāsaniko”) -āsanika one who keeps to himself Mil 20, Mil 216; Vism 69. -āha one day MN i.88; usually in cpd. ekâhadvîhaṃ one or two days Ja i.255; Dhp-a i.391. -āhika of or for one day DN i.166. -uttarika (-nikāya) is another title for Anguttarika-nikāya Mil 392. -ūna one less, minus one usually as 1st part of a numeral cpd., like ˚vīsati (20

1 = 19) Dhp-a i.4; ˚paññāsa (49) Ja iii.220; ˚saṭṭhi (59; Dhp-a iii.412; ˚pañcasatā (499) Dhp-a ii.204. See ūna-eka one by one, each, severally, one to each DN ii.18 (˚loma); iii.144 (id.), 157; Ja i.222; Dhp-a i.101 (ekekassa no ekekaṃ māsaṃ one month for each of us); ii.114; Vv-a 256; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 43. -ghana compact, solid, hard Dhp 81. -cara wandering or living alone, solitary SN i.16; Snp 166, Snp 451; Dhp 37. -cariyā walking alone, solitude Dhp 61; Snp 820. -cārin = ˚cara Mil 105. -cittakkhaṇika of the duration of one thought Vism 138. -cintin “thinking one thing (only)”, simple Mil 92. -thūpa (all in one heap, mixed up, together Ja v.17 (= sūkarapotakā viya C.). -doṇikā (-nāvā) a trough-shaped canoe with an outrigger Ja vi.305. -paṭalika having a single sole (of sandals, upāhanā) Vism 125. -paṭṭa single cloth (cp. dupaṭṭa) Vism 109. -padika (-magga) a small (lit. for one foot) foot-path Ja i.315; Ja v.491. -pala one carat worth (see pala) Vism 339. -passayika is to be read ek’apassayika (see under apa˚). -pahārena all at once Vism 418; Dhs-a 333. -piṭaka knowing one Piṭaka Vism 62 -puttika having only one son Kp-a 237. -purisika (itthi (a woman) true to one man Ja i.290. -pokkhara a sort of drum Ja vi.21, Ja vi.580 (C. explns. by ek-akkhi-bherī) -bījin having only one (more) seed, i.e. destined to be reborn only once SN v.205; AN i.233; AN iv.380; Ne 189 -bhattika having one meal a day AN i.212; AN iii.216; Ja i.91 -bhattakinī a woman true to one husband Ja iii.63. -rajja sole sovereignty Dhp 178; Pv-a 74. -rājā universal king Ja i.47 (of the Sun). -vāciya a single remark or objection Ja ii.353. -vāraṃ once Ja i.292; ˚vārena id. Dhp-a i.10. -sadisa fully alike or resembling, identical Ja i.291 -sama equal Ja vi.261. -sāṭa & sāṭaka; having a single vestment, a “one-rober” SN i.78 (˚ka); Ud 65.

Vedic eka, i.e. e-ka to Idg. *oi as in Av. aēva, Gr. ο ̓ϊος one, alone; and also with diff. suffix in Lat. ū-nus, cp. Gr. οἰνός (one on the dice), Goth. etc ains = E. one

Ekaṃsa1

(adj.) belonging to one shoulder, on or with one shoulder; only in phṛase ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsangaṃ karoti to arrange the upper robe over one shoulder (the left) Vin i.46; Vin ii.188 & passim.;

eka + aṃsa1

Ekaṃsa2

“one part or point”, i.e. one-pointedness, definiteness; affirmation, certainty absoluteness DN i.153; AN ii.46; Snp 427, Snp 1027; Ja iii.224 (ekaṃsatthe nipāto for “nūna”); Snp-a 414 (˚vacana for “taggha”) ■ Opp. an˚; Mil 225 ■ instr. ekaṃsena as adv. for certain, absolutely, definitely, inevitably DN i.122 DN i.161, DN i.162; MN i.393; SN iv.326; AN v.190; Ja i.150; iii. 224; Pv-a 11.

eka + aṃsa1 or better aṃsa2

Ekaṃsika

(adj.) certain DN i.189, DN i.191; an˚; uncertain, indefinite DN i.191.

fr. ekaṃsa2

Ekaṃsikatā

(f.) as neg. an˚; indefiniteness Mil 93.

abstr. fr. ekaṃsika

Ekaka

(adj.) single, alone, solitary Vin ii.212; Ja i.255; Ja ii.234; Ja iv.2 ■ f. ekikā Vin iv.229; Ja i.307; Ja iii.139.

eka + ka

Ekacca

(adj.) one, certain, definite DN i.162, AN i.8; often in pl ekacce some, a few DN i.118; AN v.194; Thig 216; Ja ii.129; Ja iii.126. See also app˚ under api.

der. fr. eka with suffix *tya, implying likeness or comparison, lit. “one-like”, cp. E. one-like = one-ly only

Ekaccika

(adj.) single, not doubled (of cloth, opp. to diguṇa) Ja v.216 (˚vasana = eka-paṭṭa-nivattha).

fr. ekacca

Ekacciya

(adj.) = ekacca SN i.199; Ja iv.259; acc. as adv. ˚ṃ once, single Vin i.289 (cp. Vin Texts ii.212).

Ekajjhaṃ

(adv.) in the same place, in conjunction together Mil 144 (karoti), Kp-a 167; Snp-a 38.

fr. eka, cp. literary Sk. aikadhyaṃ, but BSk. ekadhyaṃ Mvu i.304

Ekato

(adv.)

1. on the one side (opp. on the other) Ja iii.51; Ja iv.141. 2. together Ja ii.415; Ja iii.57 (vasanto), 52 (sannipatanti) 391; iv.390; Dhp-a i.18. ekato karoti to put together, to collect Vv-a 3. ekato hutvā “coming to one”, agreeing Dhp-a i.102, cp. ekato ahesuṃ Ja i.201.

abl. formation fr. eka, cp. Sk. ekataḥ

Ekatta

(nt.)

1. unity DN i.31.

2. loneliness, solitude, separation Snp 718; Thag 49; Mil 162; Ja vi.64; Vv-a 202 (= ekībhāva).

abstr. fr. eka

Ekattatā

(f.) unity, combination, unification, concentration Ne 4, Ne 72 sq, 107 sq.

fr. ekatta

Ekadatthu

(adv.) once, definitely, specially Ja iii.105 (= ekaṃsena C.).

eka-d-atthu, cp. aññadatthu

Ekadā

(adv.) once, at the same time, at one time, once upon a time SN i.162; Snp 198; Dhp-a ii.41; Mil 213.

fr. eka

Ekanta

(adj.) one-sided, on one end, with one top, topmost (˚-) usually in function of an adv. as ˚-meaning “absolutely, extremely, extraordinary, quite” etc. 1. (lit.) at one end, only in ˚lomin a woollen coverlet with a fringe at one end DN i.7 (= ekato dasaṃ uṇṇāmay’ attharaṇaṃ keci ekato uggata-pupphan ti vadanti DN-a i.87) Vin i.192; Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169; AN i.181.

2. (fig.) extremely very much, in freq. combns; e.g. ˚kāḷaka AN iii.406; iv. 11; ˚gata SN v.225; AN iii.326; ˚dukkha MN i.74; SN ii.173 SN iii.70 (+ sukha); AN v.289; ˚dussīlya Dhp-a iii.153; ˚nibbida AN iii.83; AN iv.143; ˚paripuṇṇa SN ii.219; SN v.204; ˚manāpa SN iv.238; ˚sukha AN ii.231; AN iii.409; ˚sukhin DN-a i.119 etc.

Sk. ekānta

Ekantarika

(adj.) with one in between, alternate Ja iv.195, ˚bhāvena (instr. adv.) in alternation alternately Vism 374; ekantarikāya (adv.) with intervals Vism 244.

eka + antarika

Ekamantaṃ

(adv.) on one side, apart, aside Vin i.47, Vin i.94 = Vin ii.272; DN i.106; Snp p.13 (expld. at Snp-a 140 as follows: bhāvana-puṃsaka-niddeso, ek’okāsaṃ ekapassan ti vuttaṃ hoti, bhummatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ) Snp 580, Snp 1009, Snp 1017; Ja i.291; Ja ii.102, Ja ii.111; Snp-a 314, Snp-a 456. Also in loc. ekamante on one side Dhp-a i.40.

eka + anta, acc. in adv. function, cp. BSk. ekamante Mvu i.35

Ekameka

(adj.) one by one, each AN v.173; Vv 782.

eka-m-eka, cp. BSk. ekameka Mvu iii.358

Ekavidha

(adj.) of one kind, single, simple Vism 514; adv. ekavidhā singly, simply Vism 528.

eka + vidha

Ekaso

(adv.) singly, one by one Ja iii.224 (an˚).

Sk. ekaśaḥ

Ekākiya

(adj.) alone, solitary Thag 541; Mil 398.

Ekādasa

(num.) eleven Vin i.19 ■ num. ord. ekādasama the eleventh Snp 111, Snp 113.

Sk. ekādaśa

Ekānika

(adj) = ekākiya; instr. ekānikena as adv. “by oneself” Mil 402.

Ekikā

see ekaka.

Ekībhāva

being alone, loneliness, solitude DN iii.245; MN ii.250; AN iii.289; AN v.89, AN v.164; Vism 34; Snp-a 92, Snp-a 93; Dhp-a ii.103; Vv-a 202; DN-a i.253, DN-a i.309.

eka + bhāva, with ī for a in compn. with bhū

Ekodi

(adj.) concentrated attentive, fixed AN iii.354; Nd i.478. Usually in compn. with kṛ & bhū (which points however to a form ekoda with the regular change of a to i in connection with these roots!), as ekodi -karoti to concentrate MN i.116; SN iv.263; ˚bhavati to become settled SN iv.196; SN v.144; ˚bhūta concentrated Snp 975; ˚bhāva concentration, fixing one’s mind on one point DN i.37; DN iii.78, DN iii.131; AN i.254; AN iii.24 Vism 156 (expld. as eko udeti); Dhs 161 (cp. Dhs trsln. 46); Dhs-a 169; Ne 89.

most likely eka + odi for odhi, see avadhi2 & cp. avadahati, avadahana, lit. of one attention, limited to one point. Thus also suggested by Morris; J.P.T.S. 1885, 32 sq. The word was Sanskritised into ekoti, e.g. at Mvu iii.212, Mvu iii.213; Lal 147, Lal 439

Ejā

(f.) motion, turbulence, distraction seduction, craving SN iv.64; Snp 791; Iti 91; Nd i.91, Nd i.353; Dhs 1059 (cp. Dhs trslu. 277); Vv-a 232aneja (adj. unmoved, undisturbed, calm, passionless SN i.27, SN i.141, SN i.159 SN iii.83; SN iv.64; AN ii.15; Nd i.353; Vv-a 107.

to iñj, q.v. and see ānejja. There is also a Sk. root ej to stir, move

Eṭṭha

see pariy˚; do. ˚eṭṭhi.

pp. of ā + iṣ

Eṭṭhi

(f.) desire, wish, in combn. with gaveṭṭhi pariyeṭṭhi etc. Vb 353 = Vism 23, Vism 29 etc.

fr. eṭṭha, ā + iṣ, cp. Sk. eṣṭi

Eṇi

(f.) a kind of antelope, only two foll. cpds.: ˚jaṅgha “limbed like the antelope” (one of the physical characteristics of the Superman) DN ii.17; DN iii.143 DN iii.156; MN ii.136; SN i.16; Snp 165; ˚miga the eṇi deer Ja v.416; Snp-a 207, Snp-a 217.

etym.? dial.

Eṇeyya

D iii.157; Ja vi.537 sq., & Eṇeyyaka AN i.48; ii. 122; Ja v.155 Nd ii.604 = eṇi.

Etad

(pron. adj.) demonstr. pron. “this”, with on the whole the same meaning and function as tad only more definite and emphatic. Declined like tad Cases: nt. sg. etad (poetical-archaic form) AN ii.17; Snp 274, Snp 430, Snp 822, Snp 1087; Ja i.61, Ja i.279; & etaṃ (the usual form) Snp 51, Snp 207, Snp 1036, Snp 1115; Ja ii.159; pl. etāni Snp 52; Ja ii.159 ■ m. sg. esa Snp 81, Snp 416, Snp 1052; Ja i.279; ii. 159; Mil 18; Dhp-a i.18; & eso Snp 61, Snp 312, Snp 393; Ja vi.336; pl. ete Snp 188, Snp 760; Ja i.223 ■ f. sg. esā Snp 80 Snp 451; Ja i.307; pl. etā Snp 297, Snp 897; Ja ii.129 ■ Oblique cases: gen. dat. etassa Ja ii.159; f. etissā Ja iii.280; instr etena Snp 655; Ja i.222; pl. loc. etesu Snp 248, Snp 339, Snp 1055 f. etāsu Snp 607. Other cases regular & frequent.;

Vedic etad, of pron. base *e; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under equidem

Etarahi

(adv.) now, at present DN i.29, DN i.151, DN i.179, DN i.200; DN ii.3; Ja i.215 (opp. tadā) iii.82; vi.364 (instead of paccuppanna).

Sk. etarhi, cp. tarahi & carahi

Etādisa

(adj.) such, such like, of this kind DN ii.157; Snp 588, Snp 681, Snp 836; Pv i.94; iv.186 (= edisa yathā-vutta-rūpa Pv-a 243); Pv-a ii.71.

etad + disa, of dṛś, cp. Sk. etādṛśa

Eti

to go, go to, reach; often (= ā + eti) to come back, return Snp 364, Snp 376, Snp 666 (come); Ja vi.365 (return); ppr. ento Ja iii.433 (acc. suriyaṃ atthaṃ entaṃ the setting sun); imper 2nd sg. ehi only in meaning “come” (see separately) 3rd etu DN i.60; DN i.2nd pl. etha DN i.211; Snp 997; Ja ii.129; Dhp-a i.95 (in admission formula “etha bhikkhavo” come ye [and be] bhikkhus! See ehi bhikkhu) ■ fut. essati Ja vi.190, Ja vi.365, & ehiti Ja ii.153; Ja ii.2nd sg. ehisi Dhp 236 Dhp 369 ■ pp. ita (q.v.).

P. eti represents Sk. eti as well as ā-eti, i.e. to go and to come (here); with Sk. eti cp. Av. aeiti, Gr. ε ̓ϊσι Lat. eo, it; Goth. iddja went, Obulg. iti, Oir. etha

Etta

(adv.) there, here Pv i.56 (sic; cp. Kp-a 254 note).

= Sk. atra, see also ettha

Ettaka

(adj.) so much, this much, according to context referring either to deficiency or abundance, thus developing 2 meanings, viz. (1) just as much (& no more), only so little, all this, just this, such a small number, a little pl. so few, just so many DN i.117 (opp. aparimāṇa), 124; AN iv.114; Nd ii.304iii. (ettakena na tussati is not satisfied with this much); Vv 7912 (cp. Vv-a 307); Mil 10, Mil 18 (alaṃ ettakena enough of this much); Dhp-a i.90 (enough this much), 93, 399 (pl. ettakā); ii.54 (only one), 174 sq. Vv-a 233 (a little), 323 ■ ettakaṃ kālaṃ a short time (but see also under 2) Ja i.34; Dhp-a ii.20 ■ (2) ever so much (and not less), so much, pl. so many, ever so many, so & so many, such a lot AN iii.337; Ja i.207 (pl ettakā), 375 (nt. ettakaṃ); iii.80 (id.), 94 (˚ṃ dhanaṃ such great wealth); Mil 37 (pl.); Dhp-a i.392, Dhp-a i.396 (pl f. ettikā), 397, 398; ii.14, 89 (pl.), 241 (pl. so many) Vv-a 65 (dhanaṃ) ■ ettakaṃ kālaṃ for some time, such a long time (see also above, under 1) Dhp-a ii.62, Dhp-a ii.81 Dhp-a iii.318; Vv-a 330.

etta + ka, contrasting-comparative function, cp. tattaka

Ettato

(adv.) from here, therefore SN i.185.

with double suffix for *atra-taḥ

Ettāvatā

(adv.) so far, to that extent, even by this much DN i.205, DN i.207; SN ii.17; Snp 478; Vv 556 (cp. Vv-a 248); Pv iv.167 Mil 14; DN-a i.80; Snp-a 4; Pv-a 243.

fr. etta = ettaka, cp. kittāvatā: kittaka

Etto

(adv.) orig. abl. of etad; from this, from it, thence, hence, out of here Snp 448, Snp 875; Ja i.223 (opp. ito), v.498; Pv i.11ii.104; Dhp-a ii.80 (ito vā etto vā here & there); Pv-a 103.

in analogy to ito fr. *et˚, as ito fr. *it˚

Ettha

(adv.) here, in this place; also temporal “now”, & modal “in this case, in this matter” DN ii.12; SN v.375; Dhp 174; Snp 61, Snp 171, Snp 424 Snp 441, Snp 502, Snp 1037, & freq. passim.;

= Sk. atra, cp. etta

Edisa

(adj.) such like, such Vv 373; Pv-a 69, Pv-a 243.

Sk. īdṛśa

Edisaka

= edisa Snp 313.

Edha

fuel, fire etc. Only in adj. neg. an˚ without fuel Ja iv.26.

Sk. edhaḥ, cp. idhma, inddhe; Gr. α ̓ϊχος, ἀίχω, Lat. aedes, Ohg. eit, Ags. ād funeral pile, etc. See idhuma iṭṭhaka

Edhati

to prosper, succeed in, increase SN i.217 (sukhaṃ); Snp 298; Dhp 193; Ja i.223; Ja iii.151. sukh˚edhita at Vin iii.13 is better read as sukhe ṭhita as at Ja vi.219.

edh, cp. iddhati

Ena

(pron.) [fr. pron. base *ē̆, cp. e-ka; to this cp. in form & meaning Lat. ūnus, Gr.; οἰνός, Ohg. ein, Oir. ōin only used in acc. enaṃ (taṃ enaṃ) “him, this one, the same” Snp 583, Snp 981, Snp 1114; Dhp 118, Dhp 313; Ja iii.395; Nd ii.304 iii.b. See also naṃ.

Eraka1

(adj.) driving away, moving Ja iv.20 (˚vāta); ˚vattika a certain kind of torture MN i.87 = AN i.47 = AN ii.122 = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197.

fr. ereti

Eraka2

(nt.) Typha-grass Ja iv.88. As eragu (?) a kind of grass used for making coverlets Vin i.196 (eraka Bdhgh. on DN i.166).

fr. ereti

Eraṇḍa

the castor oil plant Nd ii.680ii.; Ja ii.440. Cp. elaṇḍa.

dial.?

Erāvaṇa

Name of Indra’s elephant Snp 379; Vv 4413; Vv-a 15.

Erita

moved, shaken, driven Ja iv.424; Vv 394, 424; Thag 104, Pv ii.123; Vism 172 (+ samerita) 342 (vāt˚ moved by the wind). Cp. īrita.

pp. of ereti

Ereti

to move, set into motion, raise (one’s voice) MN i.21; Snp 350 (eraya imper.); Thag 209 (eraye); Ja iv.478 ■ pp. erita (q.v.).

= īreti (q.v.) Caus. of īr, Sk. īrayati

Ela

(nt.) salt(?) or water(?) in elambiya (= el˚ambu-ja) born in (salt) water Snp 845 (= ela-saññaka ambumhi jāta); Nd i.202 (elaṃ vuccati udakaṃ).

?

Elaṇḍa

= eraṇḍa (?) MN i.124.

Elambaraka

Name of a creeping vine Ja vi.536. Elaluka (Elaluka)

?

Elāluka (Eḷāluka)

(nt.) a kind of cucumber(?) Vv 3329; Ja i.205; Ja v.37; Dhp-a i.278.

etym.?

Eḷa

(nt.) in eḷamūga deaf & dumb AN ii.252; AN iii.436; AN iv.226; Mil 20, Mil 251 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.71). A rather strange use and expln. of eḷamūga (with ref. to a snake “spitting”) we find at Ja iii.347, where it is expld. as “eḷa-paggharantena mukhena eḷamūgaṃ” i.e. called eḷamūga because of the saliva (foam?) dripping from its mouth, v.l. elamukha ■ Cp. neḷa & aneḷa;.

Sk. enas

Eḷaka1

a threshold (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 146) Vin ii.149 (˚pādaka-pītha, why not “having feet resembling those of a ram”? Cp. Vin Texts iii.165 “a chair raised on a pedestal”); DN i.166; AN i.295; AN ii.206. The word its meaning seems uncertain.;

?

Eḷaka2

a ram, a wild goat Snp 309; Vism 500 (in simile); Ja i.166; Pp A 233 (= urabbha) ■ f. eḷakā SN ii.228, eḷakī Thig 438, eḷikī Ja iii.481.

Sk. eḍaka

Eḷagala

see aneḷa.

Eḷagalā

(f.) the plant Cassia Tora (cp. Sk. eḍagaja the ringworm-shrub, Cassia Alata, after Halāyudha), Ja iii.222 (= kambojī C.).

dial.?

Eḷagga

in kāmāmis˚ at Pv-a 107 is to be read kāmāmise lagga˚.

Eva

(adv.) emphatic part “so, even, just”; very freq. in all contexts & comb;ns.

1. eva Ja i.61 (ajj’eva this veryday), 278 (tath’eva likewise); ii.113 (ahaṃ e just I), 154 (ekam e. just one), 160 (attano e. his very own).

2. eva often appears with prothetic (sandhi-)y as yeva, most frequently after i and e, but also after the other vowels and ṃ, cp. Ja i.293, Ja i.307; Ja ii.110, Ja ii.128, Ja ii.129 Ja ii.159; Ja iv.3; Ja vi.363.

3. After ṃ eva also takes the form of ñeva, mostly with assimilation of ṃ to ñ, viz. tañ ñeva Ja i.223; tasmiñ ñeva Ja i.139; ahañ ñeva Mil 40.

4 After long vowels eva is often shortened to va (q.v.).

-rūpa (1) such, like that Snp 279, Snp 280; Iti 108; Ja ii.352, etc ■ (2) of such form, beauty or virtue Ja i.294 Ja iii.128, etc.

Vedic eva

Evaṃ

(adv.) so, thus, in this way, either referring to what precedes or what follows, e.g. (1) thus (as mentioned, expld. at Vism 528 as “niddiṭṭha-nayanidassana”) DN i.193 (evaṃ sante this being being so) 195 (id.); Vin ii.194 (evaṃ bhante, yes); Ja i.222; Pv ii.1312 evaṃ etaṃ, just so) ■ (2) thus (as follows) MN i.483 (evaṃ me sutaṃ “thus have I heard”) ■ Often combd. with similar emphatic part., as evam eva kho “in just the same way” (in final conclusions) DN i.104, DN i.199 DN i.228, DN i.237, DN i.239; in older form evaṃ byā kho (= evam iva kho) Vin ii.26; Vin iv.134 = DN-a i.27; evam evaṃ “just so” DN i.51; Snp 1115; evaṃ kho DN i.113; evam pi Snp 1134; evaṃ su DN i.104; etc. etc.

-diṭṭhin holding such a view MN i.484. -nāma having that name MN i.429.

Vedic evaṃ

Esa1

see etad.

Esa2

(adj.) = esin Snp 286.

Esati

to seek, search, strive for Snp 592 (esāno ppr. med.), 919; Dhp 131.

ā + iṣ1 with confusion of iṣ1 and iṣ2, icchati, see also ajjhesati, anvesati, pariyesati

Esanā

(f.) desire, longing, wish DN iii.216, DN iii.270; MN i.79; SN v.54, SN v.139; AN i.93; AN ii.41; AN v.31; Vv-a 83; Pv-a 98, Pv-a 163, Pv-a 265. See also anesanā, isi & pariy˚;.

fr. esati

Esanī

(f.) a surgeon’s probe MN ii.256.

fr. iṣ

Esabha

(-˚) a by-form of usabha (q.v.), in cpd. rathesabha.

Esika

(nt.) & Esikā1 (f.) a pillar, post AN iv.106, AN iv.109. Freq. in cpd. ˚ṭṭhāyin as stable as a pillar DN i.14; SN iii.202, SN iii.211, SN iii.217; DN-a i.105.

a by-form of isīkā

Esikā2

desire, see abbūḷha.

Esin

(adj.) seeking, wishing, desiring SN ii.11 (sambhav˚); Ja i.87 (phal˚); iv.26 (dukkham˚); Pv ii.928 (gharam); Pv-a 132.

Sk. eṣin, of iṣ

Ehi

come, come here Snp 165; Ja ii.159; vi. 367; Dhp-a i.49. In the later language part. of exhortation = Gr. α ̓́γε, Lat. age, “come on” Dhp-a ii.91; Pv-a 201 (+ tāva = α ̓́γεδή). ehipassika (adj.) [ehi + passa ika] of the Dhamma, that which invites every man to come to see for himself, open to all, expld. at Vism 216 as “ehi, passa imaṃ dhamman ti evaṃ pavattaṃ ehi-passavidhaṃ arahatī ti”, DN ii.217; DN iii.5, DN iii.227; SN i.9; SN iv.41, SN iv.272 SN v.343; AN i.158; AN ii.198. ehibhadantika one who accepts an invitation DN i.166; MN i.342; MN ii.161; AN i.295; AN ii.206 ehi bhikkhu “come bhikkhu!” the oldest formula of admission to the order Vin i.12; Vin iii.24; Dhp-a i.87; Ja i.82 f. ehi bhikkhunī Vin iv.214 pl. etha bhikkhavo Dhp-a i.95. ehibhikkhu-pabbajjā initiation into Bhikkhuship Snp-a 456. ehibhikkhubhāva-state of being invited to join the Sangha, admission to the Order Ja i.82, Ja i.86; Dhp-a ii.32; Snp-a 456. ehisāgata-(& svāgata-)vādin; a man of courtesy (lit. one who habitually says: “come you are welcome” DN i.116; Vin ii.11; Vin iii.181.

O.

imper. of eti

O

O

Initial o in Pali may represent a Vedic o or a Vedic au (see ojas, ogha, etc.). Or it may be guṇa of u (see oḷārika opakammika, etc.). But it is usually a prefix representing Vedic ava. The form in o is the regular use in old Pali; there are only two or three cases where ava for metrical or other reasons, introduced. In post-canonical Pali the form in ava is the regular one. For new formations we believe there is no exception to this rule. But the old form in o has in a few cases, survived. Though o; standing alone, is derived from ava, yet compounds with o are almost invariably older than the corresponding compounds with ava (see note on ogamana).

Oka

(nt.) [Vedic okas (nt.), fr. uc to like, thus orig. “comfort”, hence place of comfort, sheltered place, habitation The indigenous interpretation connects oka partly with okāsa = fig. room (for rising), chance, occasion (thus Nd i.487 on Snp 966: see anoka; Snp-a 573 ibid.; Snp-a 547: see anoka; Snp-a 573 ibid.; Snp-a 547: see below) partly with udaka (as contraction): see below on Dhp 34 Geiger (P. Gr. § 20) considers oka to be a direct contraction of udaka (via *udaka, *utka, *ukka, *okka). The customary synomym for oka (both lit. & fig.) is ālaya resting place, shelter, resort; house, dwelling; fig. (this meaning according to later commentators prevailing in anoka, liking, fondness, attachment to (worldly things) SN iii.9 = Snp 844 (okam pahāya; oka here is expld. at Snp-a 547 by rūpa-vatth’ ādi-viññaṇass’ okāso); SN v.24 = AN v.232 = Dhp 87 (okā anokam āgamma); Dhp 34 (oka-m-okata ubbhato, i.e. oka-m-okato from this & that abode, from all places, thus taken as okato, whereas Bdhgh. takes it as okasya okato and interprets the first oka as contracted form of udaka, water, which happens to fit in with the sense required at this passage, but is not warranted otherwise;

except by Bdhgh’s quotation “okapuṇṇehi cīvarehī ti ettha udakaṃ”. This quot. is taken from Vin i.253, which must be regarded as a corrupt passage cp. remarks of Bdhgh. on p. 387: oghapuṇṇehī ti pi pāṭho. The rest of his interpretation at Dhp-a i.289 runs: “okaṃ okaṃ pahāya aniketa-sārī ti ettha ālayo, idha (i.e. at Dhp 34) ubhayam pi labbhati okamokato udaka-sankhātā ālayā ti attho” i.e. from the water’s abode. Bdhgh’s expln. is of course problematic); Dhp 91 (okam okaṃ jahanti “they leave whatever shelter they have”, expld. by ālaya Dhp-a ii.170).

-cara (f. ˚carikā Ja vi.416; ˚cārikā MN i.117) living in the house (said of animals), i.e. tame (cp. same etym of “tame” = Lat. domus, domesticus). The passage MN i.117, MN i.118 has caused confusion by oka being taken as “water”. But from the context as well as from C. on Ja vi.416 it is clear that here a tame animal is meant by means of which other wild ones are caught. The passage at MN i.117 runs “ odaheyya okacaraṃ ṭhapeyya okacārikaṃ” i.e. he puts down a male decoy and places a female (to entice the others), opp. “ ūhaneyya o. nāseyya o.” i.e. takes away the male & kills the female; -(ñ)jaha giving up the house (and its comfort), renouncing (the world), giving up attachment Snp 1101 (= ālayaṃjahaṃ Snp-a 598; cp. Nd ii.176 with v.l. oghaṃjaha). -anoka houseless, homeless, comfortless, renouncing, free from attachment: see separately.

Okaḍḍhati

to drag away, remove Thig 444. See also ava˚. Okantati (okkant)

o + kaḍḍhati

Okantati (okkant˚)

to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve; pres. okantati MN i.129; Pv iii.102 (= ava˚ Pv-a 213); ger. okantitvā Ja i.154 (migaṃ o. after carving the deer); Pv-a 192 (piṭṭhi maṃsāni), & okacca Ja iv.210 (T. okkacca, v.l. BB ukk˚ C. expls. by okkantitvā) ■ pp. avakanta & avakantita;.

o + kantati, cp. also apakantati

Okappati

to preface, arrange, make ready, settle on, feel confident, put (trust) in Vin iv.4; Pts ii.19 (= saddahati ibid. 21); Mil 150, Mil 234; DN-a i.243.

o + kappati

Okappanā

(f.) fixing one’s mind (on), settling in, putting (trust) in, confidence Dhs 12, Dhs 25, Dhs 96 Dhs 288; Ne 15, Ne 19, Ne 28; Vb 170.

o + kappanā

Okappeti

to fix one’s mind on, to put one’s trust in MN i.11; Mil 234 (okappessati).

o + kappeti

Okampeti

to shake, to wag, only in phrase sīsaṃ okampeti to shake one’s head MN i.108 MN i.171; SN i.118.

o + Caus. of kamp

Okassati

to drag down, draw or pull away, distract, remove. Only in ger.; okassa, always combd. with pasayha “removing by force” DN ii.74 (T. okk˚); AN iv.16 (T. okk˚, v.l. ok˚) 65 (id.); Mil 210. Also in Caus. okasseti to pull out draw out Thig 116 (vaṭṭiṃ = dīpavaṭṭiṃ ākaḍḍheti Thag-a 117). [MSS. often spell okk˚; ].

o + kassati, see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati

Okāra

only in stock phrase kāmānaṃ ādīnavo okāro sankileso DN i.110, DN i.148 (= lāmaka-bhāva DN-a i.277); MN i.115 MN i.379, MN i.405 sq.; MN ii.145; AN iv.186; Ne 42 (v.l. vokāra) Dhp-a i.6, Dhp-a i.67. The exact meaning is uncertain. Etymologically it would be degradation. But Bdhgh. prefers folly vanity, and this suits the context better.

o + kāra fr. karoti, BSk. okāra, e.g. M Vastu iii. 357

Okāsa

1. lit. “visibility”, (visible) space as geometrical term, open space, atmosphere, air as space DN i.34 (ananto okāso); Vism 184 (with disā pariccheda), 243 (id.); Pv-a 14 (okāsaṃ pharitvā permeating the atmosphere). This meaning is more pronounced in ākāsa.

2. “visibility”, i.e. appearance, as adj looking like, appearing. This meaning closely resembles & often passes over into meaning 3, e.g. katokāsa kamma when the k. makes its appearance = when its chance or opportunity arises Pv-a 63; okāsaṃ deti to give one’s appearance, i.e. to let any one see, to be seen by (dat. Pv-a 19.

3. occasion, chance, opportunity, permission consent, leave AN i.253; AN iv.449; Ja iv.413 (vātassa o. natthi the wind has no access); Snp-a 547 ■ In this meaning freq. in combn. with foll. verbs: (a) okāsaṃ karoti to give permission, to admit, allow; to give a chance or opportunity, freq. with pañhassa veyyā-karaṇāya (to ask a question), e.g. DN i.51, DN i.205; MN ii.142; SN iv.57. Vin i.114, Vin i.170; Nd i.487; Pv-a 222 ■ Caus. ˚ṃ karoti Vin ii.5, Vin ii.6, Vin ii.276; Caus. II. ˚ṃ kārāpeti Vin i.114, Vin i.170. katokāsa given permission (to speak), admitted in audience granted leave Snp 1031; Vv-a 65 (raññā); anokāsakata without having got permission Vin i.114 ■ (b) okāsaṃ yācati to ask permission MN ii.123 ■ (c) okāsaṃ deti to give permission, to consent, give room Ja ii.3; Vv-a 138. (d) with bhū: anokāsa-bhāva want of opportunity Sdhp 15; anokāsa-bhūta not giving (lit. becoming) an opportunity Snp-a 573. Elliptically for o. detha Yogāvacara’s Man. 4 etc.

-ādhigama finding an opportunity DN ii.214 sq.; AN iv.449. -kamma giving opportunity or permission Snp p.94 (˚kata allowed); Pv iv.111 (˚ṃ karoti to give permission) -matta permission Snp p.94. -loka the visible world (manussa-loka) Vism 205; Vv-a 29.

ava + kāś to shine

Okāsati

to be visible; Caus. okāseti to make visible, let appear, show SN iv.290.

ava + kāś

Okiṇṇa

strewn over, beset by, covered with, full of Ja v.74, Ja v.370; Pv-a 86, Pv-a 189 (= otata of Pv iii.33).

pp. of okirati; BSk. avakīrṇa Divy 282; Jtm 3192

Okiraṇa

casting out (see the later avakirati2), only as adj ■ f. okirinī (okilinī through dialect. variation a cast-out woman (cast-out on acct of some cutaneous disease), in double combn. okilinī okirinī (perhaps only the latter should be written) Vin iii.107 = SN ii.260 (in play of words with avakirati1). Bdhgh’s allegorical expln. at Vin iii.273 puts okilinī = kilinnasarīrā, okiriṇī = angāraparikiṇṇa Cp. kirāta.

o + kiraṇa

Okirati

1. to pour down on, pour out over MN i.79; aor. okiri Vin iii.107 = SN ii.260; Pv ii.38; Pv-a 82.

2. to cast-out, reject, throw out: see okiraṇa. pp. okiṇṇa (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. okirāpeti to cause to pour out or to sprinkle over Vism 74 (vālikaṃ).

o + kirati

Okilinī

see okiraṇa.

Okoṭimaka

(adj.) lit. “having the top lowered”, with the head squashed in or down, i.e. of compressed & bulging out stature; misshapen, deformed, of ugly shape (Mrs. Rh. D trsls hunchback at SN i.94, pot-bellied at SN i.237; Warren Buddhism p. 426 trsls. decrepit). It occurs only in one stock phrase, viz. dubbaṇṇa dud-das(s)ika okoṭimaka “of bad complexion, of ugly appearance and dwarfed” at Vin ii.90 = SN i.94 = AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = AN iii.285 sq. = Pp 51. The same also at MN iii.169; SN i.237; SN ii.279; Ud 76.

o + koṭi + mant + ka. Ava in BSk., in formula durvarṇa durdarśana avakoṭimaka Sp. Avs i.280. Kern (note on above passage) problematically refers it to Sk. avakūṭara = vairūpya (Pāṇini v.2, 30). The Commentary on SN i.237 explns. by mahodara (fat-bellied as well as lakuṇṭaka (dwarf); Pp A 227 expls. by lakuṇṭaka only

Okkanta

coming on, approaching, taking place DN ii.12; Mil 299 (middhe okkante). See also avakkanta SN ii.174; SN iii.46.

pp. of okkamati

Okkanti

(f.) entry (lit. descent), appearance, coming to be. Usually in stock phrase jāṭi sañjāti o. nibbatti MN iii.249; SN ii.3; SN iii.225; Nd ii.257; Pp A 184 Also in gabbh˚ entry into the womb DN-a i.130.

fr. okkamati

Okkantika

(adj.) coming into existence again and again, recurring. Only as epithet of pīti, joy. The opposite is khaṇika, momentary Vism 143 = Dhs-a 115 (Expositor 153 trsls. “flooding”).

fr. okkanti

Okkandika

at Ja ii.448 is doubtful, v.l. okkantika. It is used adverbially: okkandikaṃ kīḷati to sport (loudly or joyfully). C. explns. as “migo viya okkandi-katvā kīḷati”; in the way of roaring(?) or frisking about(?), like a deer.

kand or kram?

Okkamati

lit. to enter, go down into, fall into. fig. to come on, to develop, to appear in (of a subjective state). It is strange that this important word has been so much misunderstood, for the English idiom is the same. We say ʻhe went to sleepʼ, without meaning that he went anywhere. So we may twist it round and say that ʻsleep overcame himʼ, without meaning any struggle. The two phrases mean exactly the same an internal change, or development, culminating in sleep. So in Pali niddā okkami sleep fell upon him, Vin i.15 niddaṃ okkami he fell on sleep, asleep, Dhp-a i.9; Pv-a 47 At Iti 76 we hear that a dullness developed (dubbaṇṇiyaṃ okkami) on the body of a god, he lost his radiance. At DN ii.12; MN iii.119 a god, on his rebirth, entered his new mother’s womb (kucchiṃ okkami). At DN ii.63 occurs the question ʻif consciousness were not to develop in the womb?ʼ (viññāṇaṃ na okkamissatha) SN v.283 ʻabiding in the sense of blissʼ (sukha-saññaṃ okkamitvā). See also Pp 13 = Pp 28 (niyāma okk˚, ʻhe enters on the Pathʼ). Caus. okkāmeti to make enter, to bring to SN iv.312 (saggaṃ) ■ pp. okkanta. See also avakkamati.

o + kamati fr. kram

Okkamana

(nt.) entering into, approaching, reaching MN iii.6; AN iii.108 (entering the path); also in phrase nibbānassa okkamanāya AN iv.111 sq., cp. 230 sq.

fr. okkamati

Okkala

see ukkala.

Okkassa

see okassati.

Okkhāyati

to lie low, to be restrained (in this sense evidently confounded with avakkhipati) SN iv.144 sq. (cakkhuṃ etc okkhāyati).

ava + khāyati, corresp. to Sk. kṣeti fr. kṣi to lie

Okkhāyika

(adj.) low-lying, deep remote, only in one phrase, viz. udaka-tarakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā MN i.80, MN i.245.

fr. ava + khāyin fr. kṣi, cp. avakkhāyati; Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests relation to BSk. avakhāta of khan, and compares Lal. V. 319

Okkhita

besprinkled, bestrewn with (-˚) Thig 145 (candan˚ = candanânulitta Thag-a 137); Ja v.72 (so in v.l. T. reads okkita; C. explns. by okiṇṇa parikkita parivārita).

pp. of ava + ukkhati, Sk. avokṣita, fr. ukṣ to sprinkle

Okkhitta

thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected; only in phrase okkhitta-cakkhu, with down-cast eyes, i.e. turning the eyes away from any objectionable sight which might impair the morale of the bhikkhu; thus meaning “with eyes under control” Snp 63, Snp 411, Snp 972; Nd i.498; Nd ii.177; Pv iv.344 (v.l. ukkh˚); Vv-a 6 ■ For further use & meaning see; avakkhitta.

pp. of okkhipati

Okkhipati

to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld. to the eyes = cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning “keep under, restrain, to have control over” (cp. also avakkhāyati); aor. ˚khipi AN iv.264 (indriyāni); ger. ˚khipitvā Vin iv.18 (id.) ■ pp. avakkhitta & okkhitta; (q.v.).

ava + khipati; Sk. avakṣipati

Ogacchati

to go down, sink down, recede; of sun & moon: to set DN i.240 (opp. uggacchati); AN iv.101 (udakāni og.). See also ava˚.

ava + gacchati

Ogaṇa

(adj.) separated from the troop or crowd, standing alone, Vin i.80; Ja iv.432 = (gaṇaṃ ohīna C.).

Vedic ogaṇa with dial. o for ava

Ogadha

(-˚) (adj.) immersed, merging into, diving or plunging into. Only in two main phrases viz.; Amatogadha & Nibbānogadha; diving into N. Besides these only in jagat’ogadha steeped in the world SN i.186.

Sk. avagāḍha; P. form with shortened a, fr. ava + gāh, see gādha1 & gāhati

Ogamana

(nt.) going down, setting (of sun & moon), always in contrast to; uggamana (rising), therefore freq.v.l. ogg DN i.10, DN i.68; DN-a i.95 (= atthangamana); Vv-a 326.

o + gam + ana; Sk. avagamana. That word is rather more than a thousand years later than the Pāli one. It would be ridiculous were one to suppose that the P. could be derived from the Sk. On the other hand the Sk. cannot be derived from the P. for it was formed at a time & place when & where P. was unknown, just as the Pali was formed at a time & place when & where Sk. was unknown. The two words are quite independent. They have no connection with one another except that they are examples of a rule of word-formation common to the two languages

Ogahana

(nt.) submersion ducking, bathing; fig. for bathing-place Snp 214 (= manussānaṃ nahāna-tittha Snp-a 265). See also avagāhana.

o + gahana fr. gāhati; Sk. avagāhana; concerning shortening of ā cp. avagadha

Ogādha1

(adj.) immersed, entered; firm, firmly footed or grounded in (-˚), spelt ogāḷha Mil 1 (abhidhamma-vinay˚). Cp. BSk. avagādhaśrāddha of deep faith Divy 268. Cp. pariyogāḷha.

Sk. avagāḍha; ava + gādha2

Ogādha2

(nt.) a firm place, firm ground, only in cpd. ogādhappatta having gained a sure footing AN iii.297 sq.

ava + gādha2

Ogāha

diving into; only in cpd. pariy˚. Ogahati (ogaheti)

fr. o + gah

Ogāhati (ogāheti)

to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (w. acc. or loc.). Pv ii.1211; Vv 61 (= anupavisati Vv-a 42), 392 (sālavanaṃ o = pavisati Vv-a 177). ogāheti Pv-a 155 (pokkharaṇiṃ) ger. ogāhetvā MN iii.175 (T. ogah˚; v.l. ogāhitvā); Pv-a 287 (lokanāthassa sāsanaṃ, v.l. ˚itvā). See also ava˚.

Sk. avagāhate; ava + gāhati

Ogāhana

(nt.) plunging into (-˚) Pv-a 158.

fr. ogāhati

Ogilati

to swallow down (opp. uggilati) MN i.393 (inf. ogilituṃ) Mil 5 (id.).

o + gilati

Oguṇṭhita

covered or dressed (with) Vin ii.207; Pv-a 86 (v.l. okuṇṭhita).

pp. of oguṇṭheti, cp. BSk. avaguṇṭhita, e.g. Jtm 30

Oguṇṭheti

to cover, veil over, hide SN iv.122 (ger. oguṇṭhitvā sīsaṃ, perhaps better read as oguṇṭhitā v.l. SS. okuṇṭhitū) ■ pp. oguṇṭhita (q.v.).

o + guṇṭheti

Ogumpheti

to string together, wind round, adorn with wreaths, cover, dress Vin i.194 (Pass. ogumphiyanti; vv.ll. ogumbhiyanti ogubbiy˚, ogummīy˚, okumpiy˚); ii.142 (ogumphetvā).

ava + Denom. of gumpha garland

Oggata

gone down, set (of the sun) Vin iv.55 (oggate suriye = atthangate s.), 268 (id. = ratt’ andhakāre); Thag 477 (anoggatasmiṃ suriyasmiṃ).

pp. of avagacchati: spelling gg on acct. of contrast with uggata, cp. avagamana. Müller P. Gr. 43 unwarrantedly puts oggata = apagata

Ogha

1. (rare in the old texts) a flood of water Vv-a 48 (udak’ ogha); usually as mahogha a great flood Dhp 47; Vism 512; Vv-a 110; Dhp-a ii.274 = Thag-a 175.

2. (always in sg.) the flood of ignorance and vain desires which sweep a man down, away from the security of emancipation To him who has “crossed the flood”, oghatiṇṇo, are ascribed all, or nearly all, the mental and moral qualifications of the Arahant. For details see Snp 173, Snp 219, Snp 471 Snp 495, Snp 1059, Snp 1064, Snp 1070, Snp 1082; AN ii.200 sq. Less often we have details of what the flood consists of. Thus kāmogha the fl. of lusts AN iii.69 (cp. Dhs 1095, where o. is one of the many names of taṇhā, craving, thirst). In the popular old riddle at SN i.3 and Thag 15, Thag 633 (included also in the Dhp. Anthology, 370) the “flood” is 15 states of mind (the 5 bonds which impede a man on his entrance upon the Aryan Path, the 5 which impede him in his progress towards the end of the Path, and 5 other bonds: lust, ill-temper, stupidity, conceit, and vain speculation). Five Oghas referred to at SN i.126 are possibly these last. Snp 945 says that the flood is gedha greed and the avijjogha of Pp 21 may perhaps belong here. As means of crossing the flood we have the Path SN i.193 (˚assa nittharaṇatthaṃ); iv.257; v.59; It iii.(˚assa nittharanatthāya); faith SN i.214 = Snp 184 = Mil 36; mindfulness SN v.168, SN v.186; the island Dhp 25; and the dyke Thag 7; Snp 4 (cp. DN ii.89). 3. Towards the close of the Nikāya period we find, for the first time, the use of the word in the pl., and the mention of 4 Oghas identical with the 4 Āsavas (mental Intoxicants). See DN iii.230, DN iii.276; SN iv.175, SN iv.257; SN v.59, SN v.292, SN v.309; Nd i.57, Nd i.159; Nd ii.178 When the oghas had been thus grouped and classified in the livery, as it were, of a more popular simile, the older use of the word fell off, a tendency arose to think only of 4 oghas, and of these only as a name or phase of the 4 āsavas. So the Abhidhamma books (Dhs 1151 Vb 25 sq., 43, 65, 77, 129; Comp. Phil. 171). The Netti follows this (31, 114

24). Grouped in combn. āsavagantha-ogha-yoga-agati-taṇh’upādāna at Vism 211. The later history of the word has yet to be investigated. But it may be already stated that the 5th cent. commentators persist in the error of explaining the old word ogha used in the singular, as referring to the 4 Āsavas; and they extend the old simile in other ways. Dhammapāla of Kāñcipura twice uses the word in the sense of flood of water (Vv-a 48, Vv-a 110, see above 1).

-ātiga one who has overcome the flood Snp 1096 (cp Nd ii.180). -tiṇṇa id. SN i.3, SN i.142; Snp 178, Snp 823, Snp 1082 Snp 1101, Snp 1145; Dhp 370 (= cattāro oghe tiṇṇa Dhp-a iv.109) Vv 6428 (= catunnaṃ oghānaṃ saṃsāra-mah’oghassa taritattā o. Vv-a 284); 827; Nd i.159; Nd ii.179.

Vedic ogha and augha; BSk. ogha, e.g. Divy 95 caturogh’ ottīrṇa, Jtm 215 mahaugha. Etym. uncertain

Oghana

(nt.) watering, flooding (?) MN i.306 (v.l. ogha).

Oghaniya

(adj.) that which can be engulfed by floods (metaph.) Dhs 584 (cp. Dhs trsl. 308); Vb 12, Vb 25 & passim; Dhs-a 49.

fr. ogha(na)

Ocaraka

in special meaning of one who makes himself at home or familiar with, an investigator, informant scout, spy (ocarakā ti carapurisā C. on Ud 66) ■ Thus also in BSk. as avacaraka one who furnishes information Divy 127; an adaptation from the Pāli ■ Vin iii.47 Vin iii.52; MN i.129 = MN i.189 (corā ocarakā, for carā?); SN i.79 (purisā carā (v.l. corā) ocarakā (okacarā v.l. SS) janapadaṃ ocaritvā etc.; cp. K. S. p. 106 n. 1) = Ud 66 (reads coiā o.).

fr. ocarati

Ocarati

to be after something, to go into, to search, reconnoitre, investigate, pry Vin iii.52 (ger. ˚itvā) M 1502 (ocarati); SN i.79 (˚itvā: so read for T. ocaritā C. explns. by vīmaṃsitvā taṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā). pp. ociṇṇa.

o + carati

Ociṇṇa

gone into, investigated, scouted, explored SN i.79 = Ud 66 (reads otiṇṇa).

pp. of ocarati

Ocita

gathered, picked off Ja iii.22; Ja iv.135, Ja iv.156; Sdhp 387. Ocinati (ocinati)

o + cita, pp. of ocināti1

Ocināti (ocinati)

1. to gather, pluck, pick off Dhp-a i.366; also in pp. ocita. 2. [ = Sk. avacinoti or ˚ciketi ava + ci2, cp. apacināti2 to disregard, disrespect, treat with contempt; pres. ocināyati (for ocināti metri causa) Ja vi.4 (= avajānāti C.).

= Sk. avacinoti, ava + ci1

Ocīraka

see odīraka.

Occhindati

to cut off, sever Ja ii.388 (maggaṃ occhindati & occhindamāna to bar the way; v.l. BB ochijjati), 404.

o + chindati

Ojavant

(adj.) possessing strengthening qualities, giving strength MN i.480; SN i.212 (so read for ovajaṃ; phrase ojavaṃ asecanakaṃ of Nibbāna, trsld. “elixir”); Thig 196 (id. ojavantaṃ Thag-a 168); AN iii.260 (an˚ of food, i.e. not nourishing Dhp-a i.106.

fr. ojā; Vedic ojasvant in diff. meaning: powerful

Ojavantatā

(f.) richness in sap, strength giving (nourishing) quality Ja i.68 (of milk).

abstr. fr. ajavant

Ojahāti

to give up, leave, leave behind, renounce, ger. ohāya DN i.115 (ñāti-sanghaṃ & hirañña-suvaṇṇaṃ) MN ii.166 (id.); Ja v.340 (= chaḍḍetvā C.); Pv-a 93 (maṃ). Pass. avahīyati & ohīyati;, pp. ohīna (q.v.) ■ See also ohanati.

o + jahati

Ojā

(f.) strength, but only in meaning of strength-giving, nutritive essence (appl;d. to food) MN i.245; SN ii.87; SN v.162 (dhamm’); AN iii.396; Ja i.68; Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; Mil 156; Dhp-a ii.154 (paṭhav˚). See also def. at Vism 450 (referring to kabalinkār’āhāra. The compn. form is oja, e.g. ojadāna Ja v.243; ojaṭṭhamaka (rūpa) Vism 341.

Vedic ojas nt., also BSk. oja nt. Divy 105; fr. *aug to increase, as in Lat. auges, augustus & auxilium Goth. aukan (augment), Ags. ēacian; cp. also Gr. ἀέςω Sk. ukṣati & vakṣana increase

Ojināti

to conquer, vanquish, subdue Ja vi.222 (ojināmase).

Sk. avajayati, ava + ji

Oñāta

despised Mil 191, Mil 229, Mil 288.

pp. o + jānāti, see also avañāta

Oṭṭha1

the lip AN iv.131; Snp 608; Ja ii.264; Ja iii.26 (adhar˚ & uttar˚ lower & upper lip) 278; v.156; Dhp-a i.212; Dhp-a iii.163; Dhp-a iv.1; Vv-a 11; Pv-a 260 Cp. bimboṭṭha.

Vedic oṣṭha, idg. *ō (u) s; Av. aosta lip; Lat. ōs mouth = Sk. āḥ Ags. ōr margin

Oṭṭha2

. It is mentioned in two lists of domestic animals, Vin iii.52; Mil 32. At Ja iii.385 a story is told of an oṭṭhī-vyādhi who fought gallantly in the wars, and was afterwards used to drag a dung-cart. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 150 suggests elephant.

Vedic uṣṭra, f. uṣṭrī, buffalo = Ohg. Ags. ur, Lat. urus bison, aurochs. In cl. Sk. it means a camel

Oṭṭhubhati

to spit out MN i.79, MN i.127.

cp. Sk. avaṣṭhīvati

Oḍḍita

thrown out, laid (of a snare) Ja i.183; Ja ii.443; Ja v.341; Thag-a 243.

pp. of oḍḍeti

Oḍḍeti

to throw out (a net), to lay snares AN i.33 = Ja ii.37, Ja ii.153; Ja iii.184 and passim; Thag-a 243 ■ pp. oḍḍita (q.v.).

for uḍḍeti (?). See further under uḍḍeti

Oḍḍha

carried away, appropriated, only in cpd. sah-oḍhā corā thieves with their plunder Vism 180 (cp. Sk. sahoḍha Manu ix.270).

better spelling oḍha, pp. of ā + vah

Oṇata

bent down, low, inclined. Usually of social rank or grade, combd. with & opp. to; uṇṇata i.e. raised & degraded, lofty and low AN ii.86 = Pp 52 (= nīca lāmaka Pp A 229); Pv iv.66; Mil 387; DN-a i.45; Pv-a 29.

pp. of oṇamati

Oṇamati

(instr.) to incline, bend down to, bow to (dat.) Mil 220, Mil 234 (oṇamati & oṇamissati), 400; DN-a i.112. Caus. oṇāmeti MN ii.137 (kāyaṃ) ■ pp. oṇata & Caus.; oṇamita.

o + namati

Oṇamana

(nt.) bending down, inclining, bowing down to Mil 234.

fr. oṇamati

Oṇamita

having bowed down, bowing down Mil 234.

pp. of oṇameti, Caus. of nam

Oṇi

(m. or f.) charge, only in cpd. oṇi-rakkha a keeper of entrusted wares, bailee Vin iii.47, Vin iii.53 (= āhaṭaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gopento).

cp. Vedic oṇi charge, or a kind of Soma vessel

Oṇīta

see onīta.

Oṇojana

(nt.) washing off, cleaning, washing one’s hands Vin ii.31 (Bdhgh. refers it to fig. meaning onojeti2 by explaining as “vissajjana gift, presentation).

fr. oṇojeti, Sk. avanejana

Oṇojeti

(with vowel assimilation o nij. Kern, Toev. ii.138, complementary to remarks s. v. on p. 5 explns. as assimil. onuj˚i.39; iv.156; AN iv.210 = AN iv.214 (oṇojesi aor.); Mil 236.

Otata

stretched over, covered, spread over with; Dhp 162 (v.l. otthata); Mil 307 (+ vitata) Dhp-a iii.153 (= pariyonandhitvā ṭhita). See also avatata & sam-otata;.

o + tata, pp. of tan

Otaraṇa

(adj.) going down, descending Ne 1, Ne 2, Ne 4, Ne 107.

fr. otarati

Otarati

to descend, to go down to (c. acc.), to be-take oneself to. ppr. otaranto Vin ii.221 ■ aor otari Snp-a 486 (for avaṃsari); Dhp-a i.19 (cankamanaṃ) Pv-a 47 (nāvāya mahāsamuddaṃ), 75 ■ inf. otarituṃ Pp 65, Pp 75 (sangamaṃ) ■ ger. otaritvā Pv-a 94 (pāsādā from the palace), 140 (devalokato) ■ Caus. II. otarāpeti to cause to descend, to bring down to Ja vi.345 ■ pp otiṇṇa ■ Caus. I. otāreti. Opp. uttarati.

o + tarati

Otallaka

(adj.) clothed in rags, poor indigent Ja iv.380 (= lāmaka olamba-vilamba-nantakadharo C.).

of uncertain etym. perhaps *avatāryaka from ava + tṛ; or from uttāḷa?

Otāpaka

(adj.) drying or dried (in the sun), with ref. to food Snp-a 35 (parivāsika-bhattaṃ bhuñjati hatth’otāpakaṃ khādati).

fr. otāpeti

Otāpeti

to dry in the sun Vin ii.113; Vin iv.281; Mil 371 (kummo udakato nikkhamitvā kāyaṃ o. fig applied to mānasa).

o + tāpeti

Otāra

1. descent to, i.e. approach to, access, fig. chance, opportunity otāraṃ labhati. Only in the Māra myth.He, the tempter, ʻgets his chanceʼ to tempt the Buddha or the disciples, MN i.334; SN i.122; SN iv.178, SN iv.185; Dhp-a iii.121. (avatāraṃ labhati Divy 144, Divy 145) ot˚ adhigacchati, to find a chance Snp 446. [Fausböll here translates ʻdefectʼ. This is fair as exegesis. Every moral or intellectual defect gives the enemy a chance. But otāra does not mean defect]. Ot gavesati to seek an opportunity, Dhp-a iii.21. Otārāpekkha watching for a chance, SN i.122. At one passage, AN iii.67 = AN iii.259, it is said that constant association leads to agreement, agreement to trust, and trust to otāra. The Com. has nothing. ʻCarelessnessʼ would suit the context o. gavesati to look for an opportunity Dhp-a iii.21, and otāraṃ labhati to get a chance SN i.122; SN iv.178, SN iv.185; MN i.334; Dhp-a iii.21 (gloss okāra & okāsa); cp. avatāraṃ labhati Divy 144, Divy 145 etc.

2. access, fig. inclination to, being at home with, approach, familiarity (cp. otiṇṇa and avacara adj.) AN iii.67, AN iii.259.

3. (influenced by ocarati2 and ociṇṇa) being after something, spying, finding out; hence: fault, blame, defect, flaw Snp 446 (= randha vivara Snp-a 393); also in phrase otārāpekkha spying faults SN i.122 (which may be taken to meaning 1, but meaning 3 is accredited by BSk. avatāraprekṣin Divy 322) Mrs. Rh. D. translates the latter passage by “watching for access”.

fr. otarati, BSk. avatāra. The Sk. avatāra is centuries later and means ʻincarnationʼ

Otāreti

to cause to come down, to bring down, take down Ja i.426; Ja iv.402; Ne 21, Ne 22; Dhp-a ii.81.

Caus. of otarati

Otiṇṇa

1. (med.) gone down, descended Pv-a 104 (uddho-galaṃ na otiṇṇaṃ not gone down further than the throat).

2. (pass.) beset by (cp. avatāra 2), affected with, a victim of, approached by MN i.460 = AN ii.123 (dukkh’ otiṇṇa) = Iti 89 (as v.l.; T. has dukkhâbhikiṇṇa which is either gloss or wrong reading for dukkhâvatiṇṇa) MN ii.10; SN i.123 (sokâva˚), 137 (id.); Snp 306 (icchâvatiṇṇa affected with desire), 939 (sallena otiṇṇo = pierced by an arrow, expld. by Nd i.414 as “sallena viddho phuṭṭho”) Ja v.98 (issâva˚ = issāya otiṇṇa C.).

3. (in special sense affected with love, enamoured, clinging to, fallen in love with Vin iii.128 (= sāratto apekkhavā paṭibaddha-citto) AN iii.67, AN iii.259 (˚citta); Snp-a 322 (id.) ■ Note. otiṇṇa at SN v.162 should with v.l. SS be deleted. See also avatiṇṇa.

pp. of otarati; the form ava˚ only found in poetry as-˚ e.g. issâvatiṇṇa Ja v.98; dukkha˚, soka˚ etc. see below 2

Ottappa

(nt.) fear of exile, shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse. See on term and its distinction from hiri (shame) Dhs trsl. 20, also Dhs-a 124, Dhs-a 126; Vism 8, Vism 9 and the definition at Snp-a 181 Ottappa generally goes with hiri as one of the 7 noble treasures (see ariya-dhanā). Hiri-ottappa Iti 36; Ja i.129 hir-ottappa at MN i.271; SN ii.220; SN v.1; AN ii.78; AN iv.99 AN iv.151; AN v.214; Iti 34; Ja i.127, Ja i.206; Vv-a 23. See also hiri ■ Further passages: DN iii.212; MN i.356; SN ii.196 SN ii.206, SN ii.208; SN v.89; AN i.50, AN i.83, AN i.95; AN iii.4 sq., 352; iv.11 v.123 sq.; Pp 71; Dhs 147, Dhs 277; Ne 39anottappa (nt.) lack of conscience, unscrupulousness, disregard of morality AN i.50, AN i.83, AN i.95; AN iii.421; AN v.146, AN v.214; Vb 341, Vb 359, Vb 370, Vb 391; as adj. Iti 34 (ahirika + ).

-gāravatā respect for conscience, AN iii.331; AN iv.29 -dhana the treasure of (moral) self-control DN iii.163, DN iii.251 DN iii.282; Vv-a 113. -bala the power of a (good) conscience DN iii.253; Pts ii.169, Pts ii.176; Dhs 31, Dhs 102 (trln. power of the fear of blame).

fr. tappati1 + ud, would corresp. to a Sk. form *auttapya fr. ut-tapya to be regretted, tormented by remorse. The BSk. form is a wrong adaptation of the Pāli form, taking o˚ for apa˚, viz. apatrapya M Vastu iii. 53 and apatrapā ibid. i.463. Müller, P. Gr. & Fausböll Sutta Nipāta Index were both misled by the BSk. form as also recently Kern,; Toev. s. v.

Ottappati

to feel a sense of guilt, to be conscious or afraid of evil SN i.154; Pts ii.169, Pts ii.176; Pp 20, Pp 21; Dhs 31; Mil 171. Ottappin & Ottapin;

ut + tappati1

Ottappin & Ottāpin

(adj.) afraid of wrong, conscientious, scrupulous (a) ottappin DN iii.252, DN iii.282; Iti 28, Iti 119 ■ (b) ottāpin MN i.43 sq.; SN ii.159 sq., 196 207; iv.243 sq.; AN ii.13 sq.; AN iii.3 sq., 112; iv.1 sq.v.123, 146. Anottappin bold, reckless, unscrupulous Pp 20 (+ ahirika). anottāpin at SN ii.159 sq., 195, 206; iv. 240 sq.; Snp 133 (ahirika + ).

fr. ottappa

Otthaṭa

1. spread over, veiled, hidden by (-˚) Mil 299 (mahik˚ suriya the sun hidden by a fog).

2. strewn over (with) Sdhp 246 (-˚). Otthata = Otthata

pp. of ottharati

Otthata = Otthaṭa

, v.l. at Dhp 162 for otata.

Ottharaka

(nt.) a kind of strainer, a filter Vin ii.119.

fr. of tharati

Ottharaṇa

(nt.) spreading over, veiling Mil 299 (mahik˚).

fr. ottharati

Ottharati

to spread over, spread out, cover Mil 121 (opp. paṭikkamati, of water). See also avattharati.

o + tharati, Sk. root str

Odaka

(nt.) water; abs. only at Ja iii.282an˚; without water, dried up Thig 265 (udaka-bhasta Thag-a 212). Cp. combn. sītodaka, e.g. MN i.376. See udaka.

-antika

1. neighbourhood of the water, a place near the water (see antika1) Kp viii.1, Kp viii.3 (gambhīre odakantike which Childers, Kh. trsln. p. 30, interprets “a deep pit” see also Kp-a 217 sq.).

2. “water at the end”, i.e. final ablution (see antika2), in spec. sense the ablution following upon the sexual act Vin iii.21; cp. odak-antikatā (f. abstr.) final ablution, cleansing Ja ii.126.

compn. form of udaka

Odagya

(nt.) exultation, elation Nd i.3 = Nd ii.446 = Dhs 9, Dhs 86, Dhs 285, Dhs 373; Dhs-a 143 (= udaggasabhāva a “topmost” condition).

der. fr. udagga

Odana

(m. & nt.) boiled (milk-)rice, gruel Vin ii.214 (m.); DN i.76, DN i.105; SN i.82 (nāḷik˚); Dhp-a iv.17 (id.); AN iii.49; AN iv.231; Snp 18; Ja iii.425 (til˚ m.) Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; Pv-a 73; Vv-a 98; Sdhp 113. Combd. with kummāsa (sour milk) in phrase o-k-upa-caya a heap of boiled rice and sour milk, of the body (see kāya I.) also at MN i.247.

Sk. odana, to Idg.; *ud, from which also udaka, q.v. for full etym.

Odanika

a cook Ja iii.49.

fr. odana

Odaniya

(adj.) belonging to rice-gruel, made of rice-gruel Vin iii.59 (˚ghara a ricekitchen); Vv-a 73 (˚surā rice-liquor).

fr. odana, cp. Sk. odanika

Odapattakinī

(f.) (adj.) [f. of uda + pattaka + in, i.e. having a bowl of water, Ep. of bhariyā a wife, viz. the wife in the quality of providing the house with water Thus in enumn. of the 10 kinds of wives (& women in general) at Vin iii.140 (expld. by udakapattaṃ āmasitvā vāseti) = Vv-a 73.

Odapattiyā

at Cp ii.48 = last. Odarika & ya;

Odarika & ˚ya

(adj.) living for one’s belly, voracious, gluttonous Mil 357; Ja vi.208 (˚ya); Thag 101.

fr. udara

Odarikatta

(nt.) stomach-filling MN i.461; Vism 71.

fr. odarika

Odahati

1. to put down, to put in, supply MN i.117 (okacaraṃ, see under oka); ii.216 (agad’angāraṃ vaṇa-mukhe odaheyya); Thag 774 (migavo pāsaṃ odahi the hunter set a snare; Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 suggests change of reading to oḍḍayi, hardly justified); Ja iii.201 (visaṃ odahi araññe), 272 (passaṃ o to turn one’s flanks towards, dat.); Mil 156 (kāye ojaṃ odahissāma supply the body with strength).

2. (fig. to apply, in phrase sotaṃ odahati to listen DN i.230 Dāvs v.68 ■ pp. ohita.

o + dahati, fr. dhā

Odahana

(nt.)

1. putting down, applying, application MN ii.216; heaping up, storing Dhp-a iii.118. 2. putting in, fig, attention, devotion Ne 29.

fr. odahati

Odāta

(adj.).

Derivation unknown. The Sk. is avadāta, ava + dāta, pp. of hypothetical 4 to clean, purify clean, white, prominently applied to the dress as a sign of distinction (white), or special purity at festivities, ablutions & sacrificial functions DN ii.18 (uṇṇā, of the Buddha) iii.268; AN iii.239; AN iv.94, AN iv.263, AN iv.306, AN iv.349; AN v.62; Dhs 617 = (in enumeration of colours); DN-a i.219; Vv-a 111. See also ava˚. -kasiṇa meditation on the white (colour) Vism 174 -vaṇṇa of white colour, white MN ii.14; Dhs 247. -vattha a white dress; adj. wearing a white dress, dressed in white DN i.7, DN i.76, DN i.104; Ja iii.425 (+ alla-kesa). -vasana dressed in white (of householders or laymen as opposed to the yellow dress of the bhikkhus) DN i.211; DN iii.118 DN iii.124 sq., 210; MN i.491, MN ii.23; AN i.73; AN iii.384; AN iv.217 [cp. BSk. avadāta-vasana Divy 160

Odātaka

(adj.) white, clean, dressed in white SN ii.284 (v.l. SS odāta); Thag 965 (dhaja).

fr. odāta

Odissa

(adv.) only in neg. anodissa without a purpose, indefinitely (? Mil 156 (should we read anudissa?).

ger. of o + disati = Sk. diśati, cp. uddissa

Odissaka

(adj.) only in adv. expression odissaka-vasena definitely, in special, specifically (opp. to anodissaka-vasena in general, universally) Ja i.82; Ja ii.146; Vv-a 97. See also anodissaka & odhiso;.

fr. odissa

Odīraka

in odīrakajāta SN iv.193 should with v.l. be read ocīraka “with its bark off”, stripped of its bark.

= ava + cira + ka

Odumbara

(adj.) belonging to the Udumbara tree Vv 5016; cp. Vv-a 213.

fr. udumbara

Odhasta

fallen down, scattered MN i.124 = SN iv.176 (˚patoda; S reads odhasata but has v.l. odhasta).

Sk. avadhvasta, pp. of ava + dhvaṃsati: see dhaṃsati

Odhānīya

(nt.) a place for putting something down or into a receptacle Vin i.204 (salāk˚, vy. ll. and gloss on p. 38 as follows: sālākāṭṭhāniya A, salākātaniya C, salākadhāraya B, salāk’odhāniyan ti yattha salākaṃ odahanti taṃ D E) ■ Cp. samodhāneti.

fr. avadhāna, ava + dhā, cp. Gr. ἀποχήκη, see odahati

Odhi

putting down, fixing, i.e. boundary, limit, extent Dhp-a ii.80 (jaṇṇu-mattena odhinā to the extent of the knee, i.e. kneedeep); iv.204 (id.) ■ odhiso (adv.) limited, specifically Vb 246; Ne 12; Vism 309. Opp. anodhi MN iii.219 (˚jina), also in anodhiso (adv.) unlimited, universal general Pts ii.130, cp. anodissaka (odissaka); also as anodhikatvā without limit or distinction, absolutely Kv 208, and odhisodhiso “piecemeal” Kv 103 (cp. Kvu trsln. 762, 1271).

-suṅka “extent of toll”, stake Ja vi.279 (= sunkakoṭṭhāsaṃ C.).

from odahati, Sk. avadhi, fr. ava + dhā

Odhika

(adj.) “according to limit”, i.e. all kinds of, various, in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Snp 60, cp Nd ii.526; Ja v.392 (id.).

fr. odhi

Odhunāti

to shake off MN i.229; SN iii.155; AN iii.365 (+ niddhunāti); Pv iv.354 (v.l. BB ophun˚, SS otu˚) = Pv-a 256; Vin ii.317 (Bdhgh. in expln. of ogumphetvā of CV. v.11, 6; p. 117); Mil 399 (+ vidhunāti).

o + dhunāti

Onaddha

bound, tied; put over, covered Vin ii.150, Vin ii.270 sq. (˚mañca, ˚pīṭha); MN ii.64; Dhp 146 (andhakārena); Sdhp 182. See also onayhati.

pp. of onandhati

Onandhati

to bind, fasten; to cover up Vin ii.150 (inf onandhituṃ); Mil 261.

o + nandhati, a secondary pres. form constructed from naddha after bandhati → baddha; see also apiḷandhati

Onamaka

(adj.) bending down, stooping Dhp-a ii.136 (an˚).

fr. onamati

Onamati

to bend down (instr.), stoop DN ii.17 (anonamanto ppr. not bending); iii.143 (id.); Vv 393 (onamitvā ger.) ■ pp. oṇata.

o + namati

Onamana

(nt.) in compn. with ˚unnamana lowering & raising, bending down & up Dhp-a i.17.

abstr. fr. onamati

Onayhati

to tie down, to cover over, envelop, shroud Dhs-a 378 (megho ākāsaṃ o.)-pp. onaddha.

ava + nayhati

Onāha

drawing over, covering, shrouding DN i.246 (spelt onaha); Mil 300; Dhs 1157 (= megho viya ākāsaṃ kāyaṃ onayhati).

fr. ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati

Onīta

only found in one ster. phrase, viz. onīta-patta-pāṇi “having removed (or removing) his hand from the bowl” a phrase causing constructional difficulties & sometimes taken in glosses as “onitta˚” (fr. nij ), i.e. having washed (bowl and hands after the meal). The Cs. expln. as onīto pattato pāṇi yeva, i.e. “the hand is taken away from the bowl”. The spelling is frequently oṇīta, probably through BB sources. See on term also Trenckner, Notes 6624 cp. apa-nīta-pātra at M Vastu; iii.142. The expression is always combd. with bhuttāvin “having eaten” and occurs very frequently, e.g. at Vin ii.147: DN i.109 (= DN-a i.277, q.v. for the 2 explns. mentioned above MN ii.50, MN ii.93; SN v.384; AN ii.63; Snp p.111 (= pattato onītapāṇi, apanītahattha Snp-a 456); Vv-a 118; Pv-a 278.

in form = Sk. avanīta, but semantically = apanīta. Thus also BSk. apanīta, pp. of apa + , see apaneti

Oneti

, prob. for apaneti, see apaneti & pp.; onīta.

Onojeti

see oṇojeti.

Opakkamika

(adj.) characterising a sensation of pain: attacking suddenly, spasmodic, acute; always in connection with ābādha or vedanā MN i.92, MN i.241; SN iv.230 = AN ii.87 = AN iii.131 = AN v.110 = Nd ii.304ic = Mil 112.

fr. upakkama

Opakkhin

(adj.) “with wings off” i.e. having one’s wings clipped, powerless AN i.188 (˚ṃ karoti to deprive of one’s wings or strength; so read for T. opapakkhiṃ karoti).

o + pakkhin, adj. fr. pakkha wing, cp. similarly avapatta

Opaguyha

see opavayha.

Opatati

to fall or fly down (on), to fall over (w. acc.) Ja ii.228 (lokāmisaṃ ˚anto); vi.561 (˚itvā ger.) Mil 368, Mil 396 ■ pp. opatita.

o + pat

Opatita

falling (down) Pv-a 29 (udaka; v.l. ovuḷhita, opalahita; context rcads at Pv-a 29 mahāsobbhehi opatitena udakena, but id. p. at Kp-a 213 reads mahāsobbha-sannipātehi).

pp. of opatati

Opatta

(adj.) with leaves fallen off, leafless (of trees) Ja iii.495 (opatta = avapatta nippatta patita-patta C.).

o + patta, Sk. avapattra

Opadhika

(adj.) forming a substratum for rebirth (always with ref. to puñña, merit). Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885 38 as “exceedingly great”; the correct interpretation is given by Dhpāla at Vv-a 154 as “atta-bhāva-janaka paṭisandhi-pavatti-vipāka-dāyaka” ■ SN i.233 = AN iv.292; Vv 3421; Iti 20 (v.l. osadhika), 78.

fr. upadhi. BSk. after the P., aupadhika Divy 542

Opanayika

(adj.) leading to (Nibbāna) SN iv.41 sq., 272, 339; v.343; AN i.158; AN ii.198; DN iii.5; Vism 217.

fr. upaneti, upa +

Opapakkhi

in phrase ˚ṃ karoti at AN i.188 read opakkhiṃ karoti to deprive of one’s wings, to render powerless.

Opapaccayika

(adj.) having the characteristic of being born without parents, as deva Ne 28 (upādāna).

= opapātika

Opapātika

(adj.) arisen or reborn without visible cause (i.e. without parents), spontaneous rebirth (Kvu trsl. 2832), apparitional rebirth (Cpd. 1654, q.v.) DN i.27 DN i.55, DN i.156; DN iii.132, DN iii.230 (˚yoni), 265; MN i.34, MN i.73, MN i.287, MN i.401 sq., 436 sq, 465 sq.; ii.52; iii.22, 80, 247; SN iii.206 SN iii.240 sq., 246 sq.; iv.348; v.346, 357 sq., 406; AN i.232 AN i.245, AN i.269; AN ii.5, AN ii.89, AN ii.186; AN iv.12, AN iv.226, AN iv.399, AN iv.423 sq.; v. 265 sq., 286 sq., 343 sq.; Pp 16, Pp 62, Pp 63; Vb 412 sq. Mil 267; Vism 552 sq., 559; DN-a i.165, DN-a i.313. The C on MN i.34 explns. by “sesa-yoni-paṭikkhepa-vacanaṃ etaṃ” See also Pug. A 1, § 40.

fr. upapatti; the BSk. form is a curious distortion of the P. form, viz. aupapāduka Avs ii.89 Divy 300, Divy 627, Divy 649

Opapātin

(adj.) = opapātika, in phrase opapātiyā (for opapātiniyā?) iddhiyā at SN v.282 (so read for T. opapāti ha?) is doubtful reading & perhaps best to be omitted altogether.;

Opama

at Ja i.89 & Sdhp 93 (anopama) stands for ūpama, which metri causā for; upama.

Opamma

(nt.) likeness, simile, comparison, metaphor MN i.378; Vin v.164; Mil 1, Mil 70, Mil 330; Vism 117, Vism 622; Thag-a 290.

fr. upama; cp. Sk. aupamya

Oparajja

viceroyalty is v.l. for uparajja. Thus at MN ii.76; AN iii.154.

Opavayha

(adj. n.) fit for riding, suitable as conveyance, state-elephant (of the elephant of the king) SN v.351 = Ne 136 (v.l. opaguyha C. explns. by ārohana-yogga); Ja ii.20 (SS opavuyha); iv. 91 (v.l. ˚guyha); vi.488 (T. opavuyha, v.l. opaguyha gajuttama opavayha = rāja-vāhana C.); DN-a i.147 (ārohanayogga opavuyha, v.l. ˚guyha); Vv-a 316 (T. opaguyha to be corrected to ˚vayha).

fr. upavayha, grd. of upavahati

Opasamika

(adj.) leading to quiet, allaying quieting; Ep. of Dhamma DN iii.264 sq.; AN ii.132.

fr. upa + sama + ika; cp. BSk. aupaśamika Avs ii.107; Mvu ii.41

Opasāyika

(adj.) being near at hand or at one’s bidding (?) MN i.328.

fr. upasaya, upa + śī

Opāṭeti

to tear asunder, unravel, open Vin ii.150 (chaviṃ opāṭetvā).

ava + Caus. of paṭ; Sk. avapāṭayati

Opāta

1. falling or flying down, downfall, descent Ja vi.561.

2. a pitfall Ja i.143; Dhp-a iv.211.

o + pāta fr. patati to fall, Vedic avapāta

Opāteti

to make fall, to destroy (cp. atipāteti), i.e. 1. to break, to interrupt, in kathaṃ opāteti to interrupt a conversation MN ii.10, MN ii.122, MN ii.168; AN iii.137 AN iii.392 sq.; Snp p.107.

2. to drop, to omit (a syllable Vin iv.15.

o + Caus. of pat

Opāna

(nt.). Only in phrase opāna-bhūta (adj.) a man who has become a welling spring as it were, for the satisfaction of all men’s wants; expld. as “khata-pokkharaṇī viya hutvā” DN-a i.298 = Ja v.174Vin i.236; DN i.137; MN i.379; AN iv.185; Vv 654; Pv iv.160; Ja iii.142; Ja iv.34; Ja v.172; Vb 247; Mil 411; Vism 18; Vv-a 286; DA 1177, 298.

o + pāna fr. pivati. Vedic avapāna. The P. Commentators however take o as a contracted form of udaka, e.g. Bdhgh. at DN-a i.298 = udapāna

Opārambha

(adj.) acting as a support, supporting, helpful MN ii.113.

fr. upārambha

Opiya

is metric for upiya undergoing, going into SN i.199 = Thag 119 (nibbānaṃ hadayasmiṃ opiya; Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. “suffering N. in thy heart to sink”, S A. hadayasmiṃ pakkhipitvā.

upa + ger. of i

Opilavati

to be immersed, to sink down SN ii.224 ■ Caus. opilāpeti (see sep.).

Sk. avaplavati, ava + plu

Opilāpita

immersed into (loc.), gutted with water, drenched Ja i.212, Ja i.214.

pp. of opilāpeti

Opilāpeti

to immerse, to dip in or down, to drop (into = loc.) Vin i.157 = Vin i.225 = SN i.169 (C.: nimujjapeti, see K. S. 318) MN i.207 = MN iii.157; Dhp-a iii.3 (˚āpetvā; so read with vv.ll. for opīḷetvā); Ja iii.282 ■ pp. opilāpita.

Caus. of opilavati, cp. Sk. avaplāvayati

Opīḷeti

in “bhattaṃ pacchiyaṃ opīḷetvā” at Dhp-a ii.3 is with v.l. to be read opilāpetvā (gloss odahitvā), i.e. dropping the food into the basket.

Opuñchati

is uncertain reading for opuñjeti.

Opuñchana

or Opuñjana (nt.) heaping up, covering over; a heap, layer Dhp-a iii.296.

fr. opuñjeti

Opuñjeti

or ˚ati to heap up, make a heap, cover over with (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 153 trsls. “cleanse”) Vin ii.176 (opuñjati bhattaṃ) Ja iv.377 (opuñchetvā T., but v.l. opuñjetvā; gloss upalimpitvā); Dhp-a iii.296 (opuñchitvā, gloss sammajjitvā). Caus. opuñjāpeti in same meaning “to smear” Vin iii.16 (opuñjāpetvā; v.l. opuñchāpetvā).

o + puñjeti Denom. of puñja, heap

Opunāti

also as opuṇāti (Dh) to winnow, sift; fig. lay bare, expose Dhp 252 (= bhusaṃ opuṇanto viya Dhp-a iii.375); Snp-a 312 ■ Caus. opunāpeti [cp. BSk. opunāpeti Mvu iii.178] to cause to sift AN i.242; Ja i.447.

o + punāti fr.

Opuppha

bud, young flower Ja vi.497 (vv.ll. p. 498 opaṇṇa & opatta).;

o + puppha

Opeti

to deposit, receive (syn. with osāpeti) SN i.236 (SA na… pakkhipanti) = Thig 283; Ja v.252 (T. upeti); in which Thig 283 has oseti (Thag-a 216, with expln. of oseti = ṭhapeti on p. 219) ■ aor opi Ja iv.457 (ukkhipi gloss); vi.185 (= pakkhipi gloss). ger. opitvā (opetvā?) Ja iv.457 (gloss khipetvā).

unless we here deal with a very old misspelling for oseti we have to consider it a secondary derivation from opiya in Caus. sense, i e. Caus. fr. upa + i. Trenckner Notes 77, 78 offers an etym. of ā + vapati, thus opiya would be *āvupiya, a risky conclusion, which besides being discrepant in meaning (āvapati = to distribute) necessitates der. of opiya fr. opati (*āvapati) instead of vice versā. There is no other instance of *āva being contracted to o Trenckner then puts opiya = ūpiya in tadūpiya (“conform with this”, see ta˚ Ia), which is however a direct derivation from upa = upaka, upiya, of which a superl formation is upamā (“likeness”). Trenckner’s expln. of ūpiya as der. fr. ā + vap does not fit in with its meaning to make go into (c. loc.)

Ophuṭa

covered, obstructed; always in combn. āvuta nivuta ophuṭa (oputa ovuta) DN i.246 (T. ophuta, vv.ll. ophuṭa & opuṭa); MN iii.131 (T. ovuṭa); Nd i.24 ovuṭa, v.l. SS ophuṭa); Nd ii.365 (ophuṭa, v.l. BB oputa; SS ovuta); DN-a i.59 (oputa) Snp-a 596 (oputa = pariyo-naddha); Mil 161 (ovuta).

a difficult, but legitimate form arisen out of analogy, fusing ava-vuta (= Sk. vṛta from vṛ; opp. *apāvuta P. apāruta) and ava-phuṭa (Sk. sphuṭa from sphuṭ; ). We should probably read ovuta in all instances

Obandhati

to bind, to tie on to Vin ii.116 (obandhitvā ger.).

o + bandhati

Obhagga

broken down, broken up, broken SN v.96 (˚vibhagga); AN iv.435 (obhagg’obhagga); Dhp-a i.58 (id.); Ja i.55 (˚sarīra).

o + bhagga, pp. of bhañj, Sk. avabhagna

Obhañjati

to fold up, bend over, crease (a garment); only Caus. II. obhañjāpeti Ja i.499 (dhovāpeti + ). See also pp. obhagga.

o + bhañj

Obhata

having taken away or off, only in cpd. ˚cumbaṭā with the “cumbaṭa” taken off, descriptive of a woman in her habit of carrying vessels on her head (on the cumbaṭa stand) Vin iii.140 = Vv-a 73 (Hardy: “a woman with a circlet of cloth on her head”?).

pp. of obharati

Obharati

to carry away or off, to take off ■ pp. obhata.

ava + bharati, cp. Sk. avabharati = Lat. aufero

Obhāsa

shine, splendour, light, lustre, effulgence; appearance. In clairvoyant language also “aura (see Cpd. 2141 with C. expln. “rays emitted from the body on account of insight”)-D i.220 (effulgence of light); MN iii.120, MN iii.157; AN ii.130, AN ii.139; AN iv.302; Iti 108 (obhāsakara); Pts i.114, Pts i.119 (paññā˚); ii.100, 150 sq. 159, 162; Vism 28, Vism 41; Pv-a 276 (˚ṃ pharati to emit a radiance); Sdhp 325. With nimitta and parikathā at Vism 23; Snp-a 497. See also avabhāsa.

from obhāsati

Obhāsati1

to shine, to be splendid Pv i.21 (= pabhāseti vijjoteti Pv-a 10) ■ Caus. obhāseti to make radiant or resplendent to illumine, to fill with light or splendour ■ pres. obhāseti Pv iii.115 (= joteti Pv-a 176); Mil 336; ppr obhāsayanto Pv i.111 (= vijjotamāna Pv-a 56) & obhāsento Pv ii.110 (= jotanto ekālokaṃ karonto Pv-a 71) ger. obhāsetvā SN i.66; Kp v. = Snp p.46; Kp-a 116 (ābhāya pharitvā ekobhāsaṃ karitvā) ■ pp. avabhāsita.

o + bhāsati from bhās, cp. Sk. avabhāsati

Obhāsati2

to speak to (inopportunely), to rail at, offend, abuse Vin ii.262; Vin iii.128.

ava + bhāsati fr. bhāṣ; Sk. apabhāṣati

Obhāsana

(nt ■ adj.) shining Vv-a 276 (Hardy: “speaking to someone”).

fr. obhāsa, cp. Sk. avabhāsana

Obhoga

bending, winding, curve, the fold of a robe Vin i.46 (obhoge kāyabandhanaṃ kātabbaṃ).

o + bhoga from bhuj to bend

Oma

(adj.) lower (in position & rank), inferior, low; pl. omā AN iii.359 (in contrast with ussā superiors); Snp 860 (ussā samā omā superiors, equals, inferiors), 954; Snp-a 347 (= paritta lāmaka) ■ More freq. in neg. form anoma not inferior i.e. excellent.

Vedic avama, superl. formation fr. ava

Omaka

(adj.) lower in rank, inferior; low, insignificant Nd i.306 (appaka + ); Ja ii.142; Dhp-a i.203.

oma + ka

Omaṭṭha

touched SN i.13 = SN i.53 = Thag 39.

pp. of omasati

Omaddati

1. to rub Ja vi.262 (sarīraṃ omaddanto); Mil 220.

2. to crush, oppress MN i.87 = Nd ii.1996 (abhivaggena); Ja ii.95.

o + maddati from mṛd, BSk. avamardati Jtm 3133

Omasati

1. (lit.) to touch Ja v.446.

2. (fig.) to touch a person, to reproach, insult Vin iv.4 sq ■ pp. omaṭṭha.

o + mas = Sk. mṛṣ

Omasanā

(f.) touching, touch Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā oropanā).

fr. omasati

Omāna1

disregard, disrespect, contempt Dhp-a ii.52 (+ atimāna) Cp. foll. & see also; avamāna.

fr. o + man, think. The Sk. avamāna is later

Omāna2

at Ja ii.443 we read ucce sakuṇa omāna meaning ʻOh bird, flying highʼ. With the present material we see no satisfactory solution of this puzzle. There is a Burmese correction which is at variance with the commentary “flying”, the v.l. BB is ḍemāna (fr. ḍī ). C. explns. by caramāna gacchamāna. Müller, P. Gr. 99 proposes to read ḍemāna for omāna.

Omissaka

(adj.) mixed, miscellaneous, various Ja v.37; Ja vi.224 (˚parisā). Cp. vo˚.

o + missaka

Omukka

(adj.) cast off, second hand Vin i.187.

fr. + muc

Omuñcati

to take off, loosen, release; unfasten, undo, doff DN i.126 (veṭhanaṃ as form of salute); Ja ii.326 Ja vi.73 (sāṭakaṃ); Vism 338; Pv-a 63 (tacaṃ); Vv-a 75 (ābhāraṇāni) ■ Caus. omuñcāpeti to cause to take off Vin i.273 ■ pp. omutta.

o + muc

Omutta

released, freed, discharged, taken off Iti 56 (read omutt’assa Mārapāso for T. omukkassa m.).

pp. of omuñcati

Omutteti

to discharge urine, pass water MN i.79, MN i.127.

Sk. avamūtrayati, Denom. fr. mūtra, urine

Oyācati

to wish ill, to curse, imprecate Vin iii.137.

o + yāc, opp. āyācati

Ora

(adj.) below, inferior, posterior. Usually as nt. oraṃ the below, the near side, this world Snp 15; Vv-a 42 (orato abl. from this side) ■ Cases adverbially: acc. oraṃ (with abl. on this side of, below, under, within MN ii.142; Snp 804 (oraṃ vassasatā); Pv iv.335 (oraṃ chahi māsehi in less than 6 months or after 6 months; id. p. at Pv i.1012 has uddhaṃ); Pv-a 154 (dahato); instr. orena Ja v.72 abl. orato on this side Mil 210.

-pāra the below and the above, the lower & higher worlds Snp 1 (see Snp-a 13 = Nd;2 422b and cp. paroparaṃ); Mil 319 (samuddo anorapāro, boundless ocean) -pure (avarapure) below the fortress MN i.68 (bahinagare + ) -mattaka belonging only to this world, mundane; hence trifling, insignificant, little, evanescent Vin ii.85, Vin ii.203; Iti 85; DN i.3; MN i.449; AN iv.22; AN v.157, AN v.164; Vb 247 Ne 62; Dhp-a i.203; DN-a i.55.

compar. formation fr. ava; Vedic avara

Oraka

(adj.) inferior, posterior Vin i.19; ii. 159; MN ii.47; Snp 692 (= paritta Snp-a 489; cp. omaka) Ja i.381.

ora + ka

Orata

1. delighted, satisfied, pleased Mil 210 (cp. abhirata).

2. desisting, abstaining from, restraining oneself Vv-a 72 (= virato; cp. uparata).

o + rata, pp. of ramati

Orabbhika

one who kills sheep, a butcher (of sheep) MN i.343, MN i.412; SN ii.256; AN i.251; AN ii.207 = Pp 56; iii.303; Thig 242 (= urabbhaghātaka Thag-a 204) Ja v.270; Ja vi.111 (and their punishment in Niraya); Pp A 244 (urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā; urabbhe hanatī ti orabbhiko).

fr. urabbha. The Sk. aurabhrika is later & differs in meaning

Oramati

to stay or be on this side, i.e. to stand still, to get no further Ja i.492 (oramituṃ na icchi), 498 (oramāma na pārema) Note. This form may also be expld. & taken as imper of ava + ramati (cp. avarata 2), i.e. let us desist, let us give up, (i.e. we shall not get through to the other side); -anoramati (neg.) see sep ■ On the whole question see also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 154 sq.

Denom. fr. ora instead of orameti

Oramāpeti

(Caus. II. of oramati] to make someone desist from Ja v.474 (manussa-maṃsā).

Orambhāgiya

(adj.) being a share of the lower, i e this world, belonging to the kāma world, Ep. of the 5 saṃyojanāni (see also saṃyojana) DN i.156; DN iii.107, DN iii.108 DN iii.132; MN i.432; Iti 114; Pp 22; Ne 14; Snp-a 13; DN-a i.313Note. A curious form of this word is found at Thig 166 orambhāga-manīya, with gloss (Thag-a 158) oraṃ āgamanīya. Probably the bh should be deleted.

ora + bhāga + iya; BSk. avarabhāgīya, e.g. Divy 533

Oravitar

doubtful reading at AN v.149, meaning concerned with worldly things (?). The vv.ll. are oramitā, oravikā, oramato, oravi.

ora + n. ag. of vitarati?

Orasa

(adj.) belonging to one’s own breast, self-begotten, legitimate; innate natural, own MN ii.84; MN iii.29; SN ii.221 (Bhagavato putto o. mukhato jāto); iii.83; Ja iii.272; Vv 5022; Thag-a 236 Kp-a 248; Pv-a 62 (urejāta + ).

Fr. ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa

Orima

the lower or lowest, the one on this side, this (opp. yonder) only in combn. orima-tīra the shore on this side, the near shore (opp. pāra˚ and pārima˚ the far side) DN i.244; SN iv.175 (sakkāyass’ adhivacanaṃ) = Snp-a 24; Dhs 597 Vism 512 (˚tīra-mah’ogha); Dhp-a ii.99.

superl. formation fr. ora, equivalent to avama

Oruddha

1. kept back, restrained, subdued AN iii.393.

2. imprisoned Ja iv.4. See also ava˚.

fr. orundhati. In meaning equalling Sk. aparuddha as well as ava˚

Orundhati

to get, attain, take for a wife ■ ger. orundhiya Ja iv.480 ■ aor. oruddha Thig 445 ■ pp. oruddha. See also avarundhati.

cp. Sk. avarundhate

Orodha

obstruction; confinement, harem, seraglio Vin ii.290; Vin iv.261 (rāj’ orodhā harem-lady, concubine); Ja iv.393, Ja iv.404.

fr. orundhati; Sk. avarodha

Oropaṇa

(nt.) taking down, removal, cutting off (hair), in kes’ oropaṇa hair-cutting Dhp-a ii.53 (T. has at one place orohaṇa, v.l. oropaṇa).

abstr. fr. oropeti

Oropeti

to take down, bring down, deprive of, lay aside, take away, cut off (hair) Vv-a 64 (bhattabhājanaṃ oropeti)-ger. oropayitvā Snp 44 (= nikkhipitvā paṭippassambhayitvā Nd ii.181 apanetvā Snp-a 91); Ja vi.211 (kesamassuṃ).

Caus. fr. orohati; BSk. avaropayati

Orohaṇa

(nt.) descent, in udak’orohaṇânuyoga practice of descending in to the water (i.e. bathing Pp 55; Ja i.193; Mil 350.

abstr. fr. orahati

Orohati

to descend, climb down DN ii.21; MN iii.131; Ja i.50; Mil 395; Pv-a 14 ■ Caus. oropeti (q.v.).

o + rohati

Olaggeti

to make stick to, to put on, hold fast, restrain MN ii.178; AN iii.384 (vv.ll. oloketi olabheti, oketi); Thag 355.

Caus. of o + lag

Olagga

restrained, checked Thag 356

Sk. avalagna, pp. of avalagati

Olaṅghanā

(f.) bending down Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā onamanā).

fr. olaṅgheti

Olaṅgheti

to make jump down, in phrase ullaṅgheti olaṅgheti to make dance up down Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197 (the latter has T. ullaggheti ol˚; but v.l. ullangheti ol˚).

Caus. of ava + laṅgh

Olamba

(adj.) hanging down Vin iii.49; Ja iv.380 (˚vilamba).

fr. ava + lamb

Olambaka

(adj.-n.)

1. (adj.) hanging down Vv-a 32 (˚dāma).

2. (n.) (a) support, walking stick Ja iv.40 (hatth˚) ■ (b) plumb-line Ja vi.392.

see olambati

Olambati & avalambati

to hang down, hang on, to be supported by, rest on. The form in o is the older. Pres. avalambare Pv ii.118 (= olambamānā tiṭṭhanti Pv-a 77); ii.102 (= olambanti Pv-a 142); olambati MN iii.164 (+ ajjholambati); Ja i.194; Pv-a 46 ■ ger avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35 (= olambitva Pv-a 189 & olambetvā Ja iii.218. See also olubbha.

ava + lamb

Olambanaka

an armchair, lit. a chair with supports Vin ii.142.

fr. olambati

Olikhati

to scrape off, cut off, shave off (hair) AN iii.295 (veṇiṃ olikhituṃ); Thag 169 (kese olikhissaṃ); 2, 88.

o + likh, cp. Sk. apalikhati

Oligalla

a dirty pool near a village MN iii.168; SN v.361; AN i.161; AN iii.389; Mil 220; Vism 343.

of unknown etym.: prob. Non-Aryan, cp. BSk. oḍigalla Saddh. P. chap. vi.

Oliyati

to stick, stick fast, adhere, cling to Iti 43; Ne 174 ■ pp. olīna (see avalīna).

o + līyate from

Olīna

adhering, sticking or clinging to (worldliness), infatuated MN i.200 (˚vuttika); Ja vi.569 (anolīna-mānasa); Vb 350 (˚vuttikā); Mil 393 (an˚).

pp. of oliyate

Olīyanā

adhering, infatuation Pts i.157; Dhs 1156, Dhs 1236.

fr. oliyati

Olugga

breaking off, falling to pieces, rotting away MN i.80, MN i.245 (olugga-vilugga), 450 (id.) Vism 107 (id.).

pp. of olujjati

Olujjati

to break off, go to wreck, fall away SN ii.218 (v.l. ull˚) ■ pp. olugga.

Sk. avarujyate, Pass. of ava + ruj

Olubbha

holding on to leaning on, supporting oneself by (with acc.); most frequently in phrase daṇḍaṃ olubbha leaning on a stick e.g. MN i.108 (= daṇḍaṃ olambitvā C.; see M i.539); AN iii.298; Thig 27 (= ālambitvā); Vv-a 105. In other connections: SN i.118; SN iii.129; Ja i.265 (āvāṭa-mukha-vaṭṭiyaṃ); vi.40 (hatthe); Dhp-a ii.57 (passaṃ; gloss olambi) Vv-a 217, Vv-a 219.

assimil. form of olumbha which in all likelihood for olambya, ger. of olambati. The form presents difficulties See also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156

Olumpeti

to strip off, seize, pick, pluck Vin i.278 (bhesajjan olumpetvā, vv.ll. ulumpetvā, oḷump˚ odametvā).

o + Caus. of lup

Olokana

(nt.) looking, looking at, sight Sdhp 479 (mukhass’).

see oloketi

Olokanaka

(adj.-n.) window Vin ii.267 (olokanakena olokenti, adv.).

fr. oloketi

Oloketi

to look at, to look down or over to, to examine, contemplate, inspect, consider Ja i.85, Ja i.108 (nakkhattaṃ); Pv ii.964; Dhp-a i.10, Dhp-a i.12 Dhp-a i.25, Dhp-a i.26; Dhp-a ii.96 (v.l. for T. voloketi); iii.296; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 5 Pv-a 74, Pv-a 124.

BSk. avalokayati or apaloketi

Oḷāra

at Pv-a 110 is with v.l. BB to be read uḷāra.

Oḷārika

(adj.) gross, coarse, material, ample (see on term Dhs trsl. 208 & Cpd. 159 n. 4) DN i.37, DN i.186 sq (attā) 195, 197, 199; MN i.48, MN i.139, MN i.247; MN ii.230; MN iii.16 MN iii.299; SN ii.275 (vihāra); iii.47 (opp. sukhuma); iv.382 (id.); v.259 sq.; AN iv.309 sq. (nimittaṃ obhāso); Ja i.67; Dhs 585, Dhs 675, Dhs 889; Vb 1, Vb 13, Vb 379; Vism 155 (˚anga) 274 sq. (with ref. to breathing), 450.

fr. uḷāra

Oḷumpika

(adj.) Sen. Kacc 390 belonging to a skiff (no ref. in Pāli Canon?); cp. BSk. olumpika M Vastu iii. 113 & oḍumpika ibid. 443.;

Deriv. unknown, BSk. olumpika and oḍumpika Mvu iii.113, Mvu iii.443. In the Śvet-Upan. we find the form uḍupa a skiff.

Ovaja

at SN i.212 read ojava.

Ovaṭa

obstructed, prevented Vin ii.255 = Vin iv.52; AN iv.277 (v.l. ovāda); also an˚; ibid.

o + vaṭa, pp. of vṛ; another form of ovuta = ophuta, q.v.

Ovaṭṭika

(nt.)

1. girdle, waistband MN ii.47; Ja iii.285 (v.l. ovaddhi˚); Vism 312; Dhp-a ii.37 Dhp-a iv.206; DN-a i.218 (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156: a kind of bag).

2. a bracelet Vin ii.106 (= vaḷayaṃ C.). 3. a patch, patching (˚karaṇa), darning (?) Vin i.254 (vv ll. ovaṭṭiya˚, ovadhita˚ ovadhīya˚); Ja ii.197 (v.l. ovaddhi˚) See also ovaddheyya (ava˚).

fr. ava + vṛt

Ovadati

to give advice, to admonish exhort, instruct, usually combd. with anusāsati ■ pres ovadati Vin iv.52 sq.; Dhp-a i.11, Dhp-a i.13; imper. ovadatu MN iii.267 ■ pot. ovadeyya Vin iv.52 (= aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadati); Snp 1051 (= anusāseyya) ■ aor ovadi Dhp-a i.397 ■ inf. ovadituṃ Vin i.59 (+ anusāsituṃ) ■ grd. ovaditabba Vin ii.5; and ovadiya (see sep.) ■ Pass. avadiyati; ppr. ˚iyamāna Pp 64 (anusāsiyamāna).

o + vadati. The Sk. avavadati is some centuries later and is diff. in meaning

Ovadiya

(adj.) who or what can be advised, advisable Vin i.59 (+ anusāsiya); Vv 8436 (ovāda-vasena vattabbaṃ Vv-a 345).

grd. of ovadati

Ovaddheyya

a process to be carried out with the kaṭhina robes. The meaning is obscure Vin i.254. See the note at Vin. Texts ii.154; Vin i.254 is not clear (see expln. by C. on p. 388). The vv.ll. are ovadeyya˚ ovadheyya ovaṭṭheyya˚.

Ovamati

to throw up, vomit Ud 78.

o + vam

Ovaraka

(nt.) an inner room Vin i.217; MN i.253; Ja i.391 (jāto varake T. to be read as jāt’ovarake i.e. the inner chamber where he was born, thus also at Vv-a 158); Vism 90, Vism 431; Vv-a 304 (= gabbha).

Deriv. uncertain. The Sk. apavaraka is some centuries later. The Sk. apavaraka forbidden or secret room, Halāyudha “lying-in chamber”

Ovariyāna

forbidding, obstructing, holding back, preventing Thig 367 (v.l. ovadiyāna, thus also Thag-a 250 explained “maṃ gacchantiṃ avaditvā gamanaṃ nisedhetvā”). Ovassa & ka;

ger. of o + vṛ;

Ovassa & ˚ka

see anovassa(ka).

Ovassati

to rain down on, to make wet. - Pass. ovassati to become wet through rain Vin ii.121.

o + vassati

Ovahati

to carry down ■ Pass. ovuyhati Iti 114 (ind. & pot. ovuyheyya).;

o + vahati

Ovāda

advice, instruction, admonition, exhortation Vin i.50 = Vin ii.228; Vin ii.255 Vin iv.52; DN i.137 (˚paṭikara, function of a king); Ja iii.256 (anovādakara one who cannot be helped by advice, cp ovadaka); Ne 91, Ne 92; Dhp-a i.13, Dhp-a i.398 (dasavidha o.) Vv-a 345 ■ ovādaṃ deti to give advice Pv-a 11, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 15,

BSk. avavāda in same sense as P.

Ovādaka

(adj.-n.) admonishing (act.) or being admonished (pass.); giving or taking advice; a spiritual instructor or adviser MN i.145; AN i.25; SN v.67; Iti 107anovādaka one who cannot or does not want to be advised, incorrigible Ja i.159; Ja iii.256, Ja iii.304; Ja v.314.

fr. ovāda; cp. BSk. avavādaka in same meaning, e.g. Divy 48, Divy 254, Divy 385

Ovādin

(adj.-n.) = ovādaka MN i.360 (anovādin).

fr. ovāda

Ovijjhati

to pierce through Vism 304.

ava + vyadh

Ovuta

see ophuta.

Ovuyhati

to be carried down (a river) Iti 114.

Pass. of ovahati

Osakkati

to draw back, move back DN i.230; Ja iv.348 (for apavattati C.); v.295 (an-osakkitvā) See also Trenckner, Notes p. 60.

o + sakkati fr. P. sakk = *Sk. ṣvaṣk, cp. Māgadhī osakkai; but sometimes confused with sṛp, cp P. osappati & Sk. apasarpati

Osajjati

to emit, evacuate Pv-a 268 (vaccaṃ excrement, + ohanati) ■ pp. osaṭṭha.

o + sṛj

Osaṭa

having withdrawn to (acc.), gone to or into, undergone, visited MN i.176, MN i.469 (padasamācāro sangha-majjhe o.); ii.2 (Rājagahaṃ vass˚āvāsaṃ o.); Mil 24 (sākacchā osaṭā bahū). See also avasaṭa.

pp. of o + sṛ;

Osaṇheti

to make smooth, to smooth out, comb or brush down (hair) Vin ii.107 (kese); Ja iv.219 (id.).

o + saṇheti, denom. fr. saṇha

Osadha

(nt.) see osadhī.

Vedic auṣadha

Osadhika

v.l. Iti 20 for opadhika.

Osadhikā

(f.) remedy, esp. poultice, fomentation Ja iv.361.

fr. osadha

Osadhī

(f.). There is no difference in meaning between osadha and osadhī; both mean equally any medicine whether of herbs or other ingredients. Cp. e.g. AN iv.100 (bījagāma-bhūtagāmā… osadhi-tiṇavanappatayo) Pv ii.610 with Snp 296 (gāvo… yāsu jāyanti osadhā); DN i.12, cp DN-a i.98; Pv iii.53; Pv-a 86; Ja iv.31; Ja vi.331 (? trsln. medicinal herb). Figuratively, ʻbalm of salvationʼ (amatosadha) Mil 247. Osadhi-tārakā, star of healing. The only thing we know about this star is its white brilliance, SN i.65; Iti 20 = AN v.62; Vv 92; Pv ii.110; cp. Pv-a 71 Vism 412. Childers calls it Venus, but gives no evidence other translators render it ʻmorning starʼ. According to Hindu mythology the lord of medicine is the moon (oṣadhīśa), not any particular star.

Vedic avaṣa + dhī: bearer of balm, comfort, refreshment

Osanna

(adj.) given out, exhausted, weak Mil 250 (˚viriya).

o + pp. of syad to move on

Osappati

to draw back, give way Ja vi.190 (osappissati; gloss apīyati).

o + sṛp to creep

Osaraka

(adj.) of the nature of a resort, fit for resorting to, over-hanging eaves, affording shelter Vin ii.153. See also osāraka.

fr. osarati, osarana & osaṭa

Osaraṇa

(nt.)

1. return to, going into (acc.) visiting Ja i.154 (gāmantaṃ ˚kāle).

2. withdrawal distraction, drawing or moving away, heresy Snp 538 (ogahanāni titthāni, diṭṭhiyo ti attho Snp-a 434).

fr. avasarati

Osarati

to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit MN i.176 (gāmaṃ etc.); ii.122 ■ pp. osaṭa. See also avasarati.

o + sṛ;

Osāna

(nt.) stopping, ceasing; end, finish, conclusion SN v.79 (read paṭikkamosāna), 177, 344; Snp 938

fr. osāpeti

Osāpeti

to put forth, bring to an end, settle, put down, fix, decide SN i.81 (fut. osāpayissāmi; vv.ll. oyayiss˚ and obhāyiss˚ Ud 66 (T. otarissāmi? vv.ll. obhāyiss˚, otāy˚ & osāy˚ C. paṭipajjissāmi karissāmi); Ja i.25 (osāpeti, v.l. obhāseti); Nd i.412 (in expln. of osāna); Vv-a 77 (agghaṃ o to fix a price; vv.ll. ohāpeti & onarāpeti) = Dhp-a iii.108 (v.l. osāreti). Cp. osāreti.

With Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 158 Caus. of ava + , Sk. avasāyayati (cp. P. avaseti, oseti), but by MSS & Pāli grammarians taken as Caus. of; sṛ;: sarāpeti contracted to sāpeti, thus ultimately the same as Sk. sārayati = P. sāreti (thus vv.ll.). Not with Trenckner, Notes 78 and Müller P. Gr. 42. Caus. of ā + viś to sling

Osāraka

shelter, outhouse Ja iii.446. See also osaraka.

fr. osarati

Osāraṇā

(f.)

1. restoration, rehabilitation reinstatement (of a bhikkhu after exclusion from the Sangha) Vin i.322; Mil 344.

2. procession (?) (perhaps reading should be ussāraṇā) Dhp-a ii.1 (T. oss˚).

fr. osāreti 3

Osārita

restored, rehabilitated Vin iv.138.

pp. of osāreti 3

Osāreti

1. (with v.l. osāpeti, reading osāreti is uncertain) to stow away, deposit, put in, put away (see also opeti) Ja vi.52, Ja vi.67 (pattaṃ thavikāya o.).

2. to bring out, expound, propound, explain Mil 13 (abhidhammapiṭikaṃ), 203 (kāraṇaṃ), 349 (lekhaṃ to compose a letter).

3. (t.t.) to restore a bhikkhu who has undergone penance Vin i.96, Vin i.322, Vin i.340; Vin iv.53 (osārehi ayyā ti vuccamāno osāreti) ■ Pass. osāriyati Vin ii.61 pp. osārita (cp. osāraṇā ).

Caus. of o + sṛ; to flow

Osiñcati

1. to pour out or down over, to besprinkle Vin ii.262; MN i.87 (telena); Pv i.85 (ppr osiñcaṃ = āsiñcanto Pv-a 41).

2. to scoop out, empty drain (water) Ja v.450 (osiñciyā, pot. = osiñceyya C.). pp. avasitta & ositta;.

o + siñcati

Osita

inhabited (by), accessible (to) Snp 937 (an˚). Cp. vy˚.

pp. of ava +

Ositta

sprinkled, besprinkled Ja v.400. See also avasitta.

pp. of osiñcati

Osīdati

to settle down, to sink, run aground (of ships) SN iv.314 (osīda bho sappi-tela); Mil 277 (nāvā osīdati) ■ ger. osīditvā Ja ii.293 ■ Caus. II osīdāpeti Ja iv.139 (nāvaṃ).

fr. o + sad

Osīdana

(nt.) sinking Dhs-a 363.

fr. osīdati

Ossa

see ussa.

Ossakk˚

see osakk˚.

Ossagga

relaxation, in cpd. sati-ossagga (for which more common sati-vossagga) relaxation of memory inattention, thoughtlessness Dhp-a iii.163 (for pamāda Dhp 167). See vossagga.

fr. ossajati

Ossajjati

to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release DN ii.106 (aor. ossaji); Snp 270 = SN i.207; Thag 321; Ja iv.260 ■ pp. ossaṭṭha. See also avassajati.

o + sṛj send off

Ossajjana

(nt.) release, dismissal, sending off DN-a i.130.

fr. ossajati

Ossaṭṭha

let loose, released, given up, thrown down DN ii.106; SN iii.241; Ja i.64; Ja iv.460 (= nissaṭṭha).

pp. of ossajati

Ossanna

sunk, low down, deficient, lacking Ja i.336 (opp. ussanna) Hardly to be derived from ava + syad.

pp. of osīdati for osanna, ss after ussanna

Ossavana

(nt.) outflow, running water MN i.189 (v.l. ossāvana & osavana). Cp.; avassava.

fr. ava + sru

Ohana

only in cpd. bimb’ohana, see under bimba.

Ohanati

to defecate, to empty the bowels Pv-a 268 (+ osajjati).

ava + han, but prob. a new formation from Pass. avahīyati of , taking it to han instead of the latter

Oharaṇa

(nt.) lit. “taking away”, leading astray, side-track, deviating path Ja vi.525 (C.: gamana-magga) Cp. avaharaṇa.

fr. oharati

Oharati

1. to take away, take down, take off SN i.27 (ger. ohacca, v.l. ūhacca); Pv ii.66 (imper ohara = ohārehi Pv-a 95); Dhp-a iv.56 (see ohārin). See also ava˚ ■ Caus. I. ohāreti (see avahārati); Caus. II oharāpeti in meaning of oharati to take down, to cut or shave off (hair) Ja vi.52 (kesamassuṃ); Dhp-a ii.53 (cp oropeti) ■ pp. avahaṭa.

o + hṛ; take

Ohāya

ger. of ojahāti.

Ohāra

see avahāra & cp.; vohāra.

Ohāraṇa

(nt.) taking down, cutting off (hair) Ja i.64 (kesa-massu˚).

fr. ohāreti, cp. avaharaṇa

Ohārin

(adj.-n.) dragging down, weighty, heavy Dhp 346 (= avaharati heṭṭhā haratī ti Dhp-a iv.56).

fr. avaharati

Ohāreti

1. to give up, leave behind, renounce (cp. ojahāti) Snp 64 (= oropeti Nd ii.183).

2 to take down (see oharati 1) Vin i.48; Pv-a 95.

3 to cut down, shave off (hair; see oharāpeti under oharati) Iti 75 (kesamassuṃ hair & beard, v.l. ohāyāpetvā); Pp 56 (id.).

Caus. of oharati

Ohita

1. put down into, deposited Dhp 150.

2. put down, laid down, taken off relieved of, in phrase ohitabhāro (arahaṃ) (a Saint) who has laid down the burden: see arahatta iii. C.; cp. ˚khandhabhāra Dhp-a iv.168.

3. put down in, hidden, put away in (-˚) Snp 1022 = (kos’ohita).

4. (fig.) put down to applied to, in ohita-sota listening, attentive, intent upon (cp. sotaṃ odahati to listen) usually in phrase ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti; MN i.480; MN iii.201; SN v.96; AN iv.391 Vism 300 (+ aṭṭhiṃ katvā).

pp. of odahati; BSk. avahita (Jtm 210 e.g. ) as well as apahita (Lal. V. 552 e.g. )

Ohiyyaka

(adj.-n.) one who is left behind (in the house as a guard) Vin iii.208; Vin iv.94; SN i.185 (vihārapāla).

fr. ohīyati, avahiyyati

Ohīna

having left behind Ja iv.432 (gaṇaṃ).

pp. of ojahāti

Ohīyati

(ohiyyati) - 1. to be left behind, to stay behind Ja v.340 (avahīyati ohiyyati C.).

2. to stay behind, to fall out (in order to urinate or defecate); ger. ohīyitvā Vin iv.229; Dhp-a ii.21 (cp. ohanati). See also ohiyyaka.

ava + hīyati, Pass. of ha, see avajahāti

Ohīḷanā

(f.) scorning, scornfulness Vb 353 (+ ohīḷattaṃ).

K.

ava + hīḷanā, of hīḍ

K

Ka˚

(pron. interr.) who?-m. ko f. kā (nt. kiṃ, q.v.); follows regular decl. of an atheme with some formations fr. ki˚, which base is otherwise restricted to the nt ■ From ka˚ also nt. pl. kāni (Snp 324, Snp 961) & some adv. forms like kathaṃ, kadā kahaṃ, etc.

1.; (a) ka˚;: nom. m. ko Snp 173, Snp 765, Snp 1024; Ja i.279; Dhp 146; f. Ja vi.364; Pv-a 41; gen. sg. kassa Mil 25; instr. kena; abl. kasmā (nt.) as adv. “why Snp 883, Snp 885; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 63, etc ■ (b) ki˚; (m. & f.; nt see kiṃ): gen. sg. kissa Dhp 237; Ja ii.104. ko-nāmo (of) what name Mil 14; Dhp-a ii.92, occurs besides kin-nāmo Mil 15kvattho what (is the) use Vv 5010 stands for ko attho ■ All cases are freq. emphasized by addition of the affirm. part. nu & su;. e.g. ko su’dha tarati oghaṃ (who then or who possibly) Snp 173; kena ssu nivuto loko “by what then is the world obstructed? Snp 1032; kasmā nu saccāni vadanti… Snp 885. 2. In indef. meaning combd with-ci (Sk. cid: see under ca 1 and ci˚): koci, kāci, etc., whoever, some (usually with neg. na koci, etc., equalling “not anybody”), nt kiñci (q.v.); e.g. mā jātu koci lokasmiṃ pāpiccho Iti 85; no yāti koci loke Dhp 179; n’âhaṃ bhatako ‘smi kassaci Snp 25; na hi nassati kassaci kammaṃ “nobody’s trace of action is lost” Snp 666; kassaci kiñci na (deti (he gives) nothing to anybody Vv-a 322; Pv-a 45 ■ In Sandhi the orig. d of cid is restored, e.g. app’ eva nāma kocid eva puriso idh’ agaccheyya, “would that some man or other would come here!” Pv-a 153. Also in correl. with rel. pron. ya (see details under ya˚) yo hi koci gorakkhaṃ upajīvati kassako so na brāhmano (whoever-he) Snp 612. See also kad˚.

Sk. kaḥ, Idg. *qṷo besides *qui (see ki˚ & kiṃ) & *qṷu (see ku˚). Cp. Av. ka-; Gr. πῃ, π ̈ως, ποϊος, etc.; Lat. quī; Oir. co-te; Cymr. pa; Goth hvas, Ags. hwā (= E. who), Ohg. hwër

Kaṃsa

1. bronze Mil 2 magnified by late commentators occasionally into silver or gold. Thus Ja vi.504 (silver) and Ja i.338; Ja iv.107 Ja vi.509 (gold), considered more suitable to a fairy king

2. a bronze gong Dhp 134 (Dhp-a iii.58).

3. a bronze dish Ja i.336; āpānīya˚ a bronze drinking cup, goblet MN i.316.

4. a “bronze,” i.e. a bronze coin worth 4 kahāpaṇas Vin iv.255, Vin iv.256. See Rhys Davids, Coins and Measures §§ 12, 22 ■ “Golden bronze” in a fairy tale at Vv 54 is explained by Dhammapāla Vv-a 36 as “bells.”-It is doubtful whether brass was known in the Ganges valley when the earlier books were composed; but kaṃsa may have meant metal as opposed to earthenware. See the compounds.

-upadahārana (n. a.) metal milk-pail (?) in phrase dhenusahassāni dukūla-sandanāni (?) kaṃsūpadhāraṇām DN ii.192; AN iv.393; Ja vi.503 (expld at 504). Kern (Toev. p. 142) proposes correction to kaṃs’ûpadohana (= Sk. kāṃsy’opodohana), i.e. giving milk to the extent of a metal pailful. -kaṇṭaka metal thorns bits of sharp metal, nails Ja v.102 (cp. sakaṇṭaka -kūta cheating with false or spurious metal DN i.5 (= DN-a i.79: selling brass plates for gold ones). -tāla bronze gong Dhp-a i.389; Dhs-a 319 (˚tāḷa); Vv-a 161 or cymbals Ja vi.277. 411. -thāla metal dish, as

distinguished from earthenware DN i.74 (in simile of dakkho nahāpako = AN iii.25) cp. DN-a i.217; Vism 283 (in simile); Dhp-a iii.57 (: a gong); DN-a i.217; Dhp-a iv.67 = Ja iii.224; reading at Mil 62 to be ˚tāla (see J.P.T.S. 1886, 122). -pattharika a dealer in bronze ware Vin ii.135. -pāti & pātī a; bronze bowl, usually for food: MN i.25; AN iv.393; Snp 14; Pv-a 274. -pūra full of metal Ja iv.107. -bhaṇḍa brass ware Vin ii.135 -bhājana a bronze vessel Vism 142 (in simile). -maya made of bronze Vin i.190; Vin ii.112; -mallaka metal dish e.g. of gold Ja iii.21. -loha bronze Mil 267.

cp. Sk. kaṃsa; of uncertain etym., perhaps of Babylonian origin, cp. hirañña

Kaṃsati

= kassati, see ava˚.

Kakaca

a saw Thag 445; Ja iv.30; Ja v.52; Ja vi.261; DN-a i.212; in simile ˚-ūpama ovāda MN i.129. Another simile of the saw (a man sawing a tree) is found at Pts i.171, quoted & referred to at Vism 280, Vism 281.;

-khaṇḍa fragment or bit of saw Ja i.321. -danta tooth of a saw, DN-a i.37 (kakaca-danta-pantiyaṃ kīḷamāna).

onomat. to sound root kr̥, cp. note on gala; Sk. krakaca

Kakaṇṭaka

, the chameleon Ja i.442, Ja i.487; Ja ii.63; Ja vi.346; Vv-a 258.

Kaku

a peak, summit, projecting corner SN i.100 (where satakkatu in Text has to be corrected to satakkaku: megho thanayaṃ vijjumālā satakkaku. Com. expln sikhara, kūṭa ) AN iii.34 (= AA 620~kūṭa). Cp. satakkaku & Morris,; J.P.T.S. 1891–⁠93, 5.

Brh. kakud, cp. kākud hollow, curvature, Lat. cacumen, & cumulus

Kakuṭa

a dove, pigeon, only in cpds.:

-pāda dove-footed (i.e. having beautiful feet) Dhp-a i.119; f. pādī appl. to Apsaras, Ja ii.93; Dhp-a i.119; Mil 169.

Kakutthaka

see ku˚.

Kakudha

1. the hump on the shoulders of an Indian bull Ja ii.225; Ja vi.340. 2. a cock’s comb: see sīsa kakudha.

3. a king’s symbol or emblem (nt.) Ja v.264. There are 5 such insignia regis, regalia: s. kakudha-bhaṇḍa.

4. a tree the Terminalia Arjuna, Vin i.28; Ja vi.519; kakudharukkha Dhp-a iv.153. Note. On pakudha as twin-form of ka˚ see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 108.

-phala the fruit of the kakudha tree Mvu xi.14, where it is also said to be a kind of pearl; see mutta. -bhaṇḍa ensign of royalty Ja i.53; Ja iv.151; Ja v.289 (= sakāyura) The 5 regalia (as mentioned at Ja v.264) are vāḷavījanī uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā: the fan, diadem, sword canopy, slippers ■ pañcavidha-k˚ Pv-a 74.

cp. Sk. kakuda, and kaku above

Kakka1

a sediment deposited by oily substances, when ground; a paste Vin i.205 (tila˚), 255. Three kinds enumerated at J. vi.232: sāsapa˚ (mustard-paste), mattika˚ (fragrant earth-paste, cp. Fuller’s earth), tila˚ (sesamum paste). At DN-a i.88, a fourth paste is given as haliddi˚ used before the application of face powder (poudre de riz, mukha-cuṇṇa). Cp. kakku.

cp. Sk. kalka, also kalanka & kalusa

Kakka2

a kind of gem; a precious stone of yellowish colour Vv-a 111.

cp. Sk. karka

Kakkaṭa

a large deer (?) Ja vi.538 (expld as mahāmiga).

Kakkaṭaka

a crab SN i.123; MN i.234; Ja i.222; Vv 546 (Vv-a 243, Vv-a 245); Dhp-a iii.299 (mama… kakkaṭakassa viya akkhīni nikkhamimsu, as a sign of being in love). Cp. kakkhaḷa.

-nala a kind of sea-reed of reddish colour, Ja iv.141 also a name for coral, ibid. -magga fissures in canals frequented by crabs, Dhs-a 270. -yantaka a ladder with hooks at one end for fastening it to a wall, Mvu ix.17. -rasa a flavour made from crabs, crab-curry Vv-a 243.

cp. Sk. karkaṭa, karkara “hard,” kankata “mail”; cp. Gr. καρκίνος & Lat. cancer; also B. Sk kakkaṭaka hook

Kakkara

a jungle cock used as a decoy Ja ii.162 purāṇa˚, ii.161; cp. dīpaka1 & see Kern,; Toev. p. 118 K˚-Jātaka, N˚ 209.

onomat, cp. Sk. kṛkavāku cock, Gr. κέρκας, κερκίς, Lat. querquedula, partridge; sound-root kr̥ see note on gala

Kakkaratā

(f.) roughness, harshness, deceitfulness, Pp 19, Pp 23.

Kakkariya

(nt.) harshness, Pp 19, Pp 23.

Kakkaru

a kind of creeper (˚jātāni = valliphalāni) Ja vi.536.

Kakkasa

(adj.) rough, hard, harsh, esp. of speech (vācā para-kaṭukā Dhs 1343), MN i.286 = Dhs 1343; AN v.265 = AN v.283, AN v.293; Dhs-a 396 ■ akakkasa: smooth Snp 632; Ja iii.282 Ja v.203, Ja v.206, Ja v.405, Ja v.406 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1891–⁠93, 13); akakkasanga with smooth limbs, handsome, Ja v.204.

Sk. karkaśa to root kr̥ as in kakkaṭaka

Kakkassa

roughness Snp 328, Mil 252.

Kakkārika

(and ˚uka ) a kind of cucumber Vv 3328 = eḷāluka Vv-a 147.

fr. karkaru

Kakkāru

(Sk. karkāru, connected with karkaṭaka] 1. a pumpkin-gourd, the Beninkasa Cerifera Ja vi.536 kakkārujātāni = valliphalāni (reading kakkaru to be corr.).

2. a heavenly flower Ja iii.87, Ja iii.88 = dibbapuppha

Kakkāreti

to make the sound kak, to half choke Ja ii.105.

*kaṭ-kāreti to make kaṭ, see note on gala for sound-root kr̥ & cp. khaṭakhaṭa

Kakku

a powder for the face, slightly adhesive, used by ladies, Ja v.302 where 5 kinds are enumd: sāsapa˚, loṇa˚, mattika˚, tila˚, haliddi˚.

cp. kakka = kalka

Kakkoṭaka

(?) Kp-a 38, spelt takk˚; at Vism 258.

Kakkola

see takkola.

Kakkhaḷa

1. rough, hard, harsh (lit. & fig.) Dhs 648 (opp.; muduka Dhs 962 (rūpaṃ paṭhavīdhātu: kakkhalaṃ kharagataṃ kakkhaḷattaṃ kakkhaḷabhāvo); Vism 349 (= thaddha) 591, 592 (˚lakkhaṇa); Dhp-a ii.95; Dhp-a iv.104; Mil 67, Mil 112; Pv-a 243 (= asaddha, akkosakāraka, opp. muduka ) Vv-a 138 (= pharusa).

2. cruel, fierce, pitiless Ja i.187 Ja i.266; Ja ii.204; Ja iv.162, Ja iv.427. Akakkhaḷa not hard or harsh smooth, pleasant Dhs-a 397. -˚vacata, kind speech ibid. (= apharusa ˚vācatā mudu˚; ).

-kathā hard speech, cruel words Ja vi.561. -kamma cruelty, atrocity Ja iii.481. -bhāva rigidity Dhs 962 (see kakkhala) MA 21; harshness, cruelty Ja iii.480. absence of hardness or rigidity Dhs-a 151.

kakkhaṭa, cp. Sk. karkara = P. kakkaṭaka

Kakkhaḷatā

(f.) hardness, rigidity, Dhs 859; Vb 82; Ja v.167; Dhs-a 166akakkhaḷatā absence of roughness, pleasantness Dhs 44, Dhs 45, Dhs 324 Dhs 640, Dhs 728, Dhs 859; Dhs-a 151; Vv-a 214 (= saṇha).

abstr. fr. prec.

Kakkhalatta

(nt.) hardness, roughness, harshness Vin ii.86; Vb 82; Vism 365; cp. M.Vastu i.166 kakkhaṭatva.

Kakkhaḷiya

hardness, rigidity, roughness, Vb 350.

Kaṅka

a heron MN i.364, MN i.429; Ja v.475.

-patta a heron’s plume Ja v.475.

Sk. kanka, to sound-root kn̊, cp. kinkiṇī & see note on gala

Kaṅkata

elephant’s trappings Vv-a 104 (= kappa).

= kaṃ or kiṃ + kṛta, to kiṇi, “the tinklings”

Kaṅkaṇa

(nt.) a bracelet, ornament for the wrist Thig 259 (= Thag-a 211).

to same root as kanka

Kaṅkala

skeleton; only in cpd. atthi˚ Aṭṭhikankal’ ūpamā kāmā Vin ii.25; MN i.130, MN i.364; Ja v.210; Thag 1150 (˚kuṭika): aṭṭhikankalasannibha Thig 488 (= Thag-a 287; cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 75) aṭṭhikankala aṭṭhi-puñja aṭṭhi-rāsi SN ii.185 = Iti 17 (but in the verses on same page: puggalass’ aṭṭhisañcayo). Cp. aṭṭhisankhalikā Pv-a 152; aṭṭhika sankhalikā Ja i.433; aṭṭhi-sanghāṭa Thag 60.

Sk. kankāla & cp. śṛnkhala (as kaṇṇa → śṛnga), orig. meaning “chain”

Kaṅkuṭṭhaka

a kind of soil or mould, of a golden or silver colour Mvu 32. 6 (see note on p. 355).

cp. Sk. kankuṣṭha

Kaṅkhati

1. with loc.: to be uncertain, unsettled, to doubt (syn. vicikicchati with which always combined). Kaṅkhati vicikicchati dvīsu mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇesu DN i.106 is in doubt and perplexity about (Bgh’s gloss, patthanaṃ uppādati DN-a i.275, is more edifying than exact.) = Snp 107; na kankhati na vicikicchati SN ii.17 = SN iii.135; kankheyya vicikiccheyya SN ii.50, SN ii.54; SN iii.122; SN v.225 (corr. khankheyya!) 226; same with Satthari kankheyya dhamme sanghe˚ sikkhāya˚ AN iv.460 = AN v.17 = MN i.101 = Dhs 1004 cp. Dhs. 1118.

2. with acc.: to expect, to wait for, to look forward to. Kālaṃ k. to abide one’s time, to wait for death SN i.65 (appiccho sorato danto k. k. bhāvito (so read for bhatiko) sudanto); Snp 516 (id. with bhāvito sadanto); Iti 69 (id. bhāvitatto) ■ Ja v.411 (= icchati) vi.229 (= oloketi). pp. kaṅkhita SN iii.99; Snp 540 (+ vicikicchita); inf. kaṅkhituṃ SN iv.350 = SN iv.399 (+ vicikicchituṃ).

Sk. kāṅkṣ cp. śaṅk, Lat. cunctor

Kaṅkhana

(nt.) doubting, doubt, hesitation MA 97; Dhs-a 259.

Kaṅkhanīya

to be doubted SN iv.399.

grd. of kankhati

Kaṅkhā

(f.) 1. doubt, uncertainty SN i.181; SN iii.203 (dukkhe k. etc.; cp. Nd ii.1); Snp 541, Snp 1149; ˚ṃ vinayati Snp 58, Snp 559, Snp 1025; k. pahīyati Pts ii.62; combd with vimati: DN i.105; DN iii.116; SN iv.327; SN v.161; AN ii.79 AN ii.160, AN ii.185; DN-a i.274; with vicikicchā: SN iv.350; Dhs. 425 Defined as = kankhāyanā & kankhāyitatta Nd;21; Dhs 425 (under vicikicchā). 3 doubts enumd at DN iii.217; DN iii.4 in passages with vimati (see above); 7 at Dhs 1004; Dhs 8 at Nd ii.1 & Dhs 1118; Dhs 16 at MN i.8 & Vism 518.

2. as adj. doubting, doubtful, in; akaṅkha one who has overcome all doubt, one who possesses right knowledge (vijjā), in combns akankha apiha anupaya SN i.181; akhila a. Snp 477, Snp 1059; Nd2i; cp. vitiṇṇa Snp 514; avitiṇṇa˚ Snp 249, Snp 318, Snp 320 (= ajānaṃ); nikkankha SN ii.84 (+ nibbicikiccha).

3. expectation SA 183-On connotation of k. in general see Dhs trsl. p. 115 n1.

-cchida removing or destroying doubt Snp 87. -cchedana the removal of d. Ja i.98; Ja iv.69. -ṭṭhāniya founded on d., doubtful (dhammā) DN iii.285; AN iv.152, AN iv.154 AN v.16; AA 689. -dhamma a doubting state of mind doubt DN ii.149; SN iv.350. -vitaraṇa overcoming of doubt Mil 233; Dhs-a 352, ˚visuddhi complete purification in consequence of the removal of all doubt DN iii.288; MN i.147; Ud 60; Vism 523; Bdhd 116 sq. -samaṅgin affected with doubts, having doubts Dhs-a 259.

cp. Sk. kānkṣā

Kaṅkhāyati

to doubt, pp. Kaṅkhāyita Snp 1021.

Denom. fr. kankhā

Kaṅkhāyanā

(f.) + kaṅkhāyitatta (nt.) doubting and hesitation, doubtfulness, Nd ii.1; Dhs 425, Dhs 1004, Dhs 1118; Dhs-a 259.

Kaṅkhin

(adj.) 1. doubting, wavering, undecided, irresolute DN ii.241; Snp 1148; Nd ii.185; combd with vecikicchin SN iii.99; MN i.18; AN ii.174; Snp 510–⁠2. longing for Pgdp 106 (mokkha˚) ■ akaṅkhin not doubting, confident, sure (cp. akaṅkha ) DN ii.241; AN ii.175.

Sk. kānkṣin

Kaṅgu

(f.) the panic seed, Panicum Italicum; millet used as food by the poor (cp. piyangu); mentioned as one of the seven kinds of grains (see dhañña) at Vin iv.264; DN-a i.78Mil 267; Mvu 32, Mvu 30.

-piṭṭha millet flour, in ˚maya made of m. meal Ja vi.581. -bhatta a dish of (boiled) millet meal Vism 418 (in simile).

derivation unknown, prob. non-Aryan, cp. Sk. kangu

Kaca

the hair (of the head), in ˚kalāpa a mass of hair, tresses Dāvs iv.51.

Sk. kaca, cp. kāñcī and Latin cingo, cicatrix

Kacavara

1. sweepings, dust, rubbish (usually in combn with chaḍḍeti and sammajjati ) Ja i.292 Ja iii.163; Ja iv.300; Vism 70; DN-a i.7; Dhp-a i.52; Snp-a 311–⁠2. rags, old clothes SA 283 (= pilotikā).

-chaḍḍana throwing out sweepings, in ˚pacchi a dust basket, a bin Ja i.290. -chaḍḍanaka a dust pan Ja i.161 (+ muṭṭhi-sammjjanī). -chaḍḍani a dust pan Dhp-a iii.7 (sammajjanī + ). -chaḍḍikā (dāsī) a maid for sweeping dust, a cinderella Dhp-a iv.210.

to kaca?

Kacci & kaccid

(indecl.) indef. interrog. particle expressing doubt or suspense equivalent to Gr. α ̓́ν, Lat. ne, num, nonne: then perhaps; I doubt whether, I hope, I am not sure, etc. Vin i.158, Vin i.350; DN i.50 (k. maṃ na vañcesi I hope you do not deceive me), 106; SN iii.120, SN iii.125; Sn. 335, 354 p. 87; Ja i.103, Ja i.279; Ja v.373; Dhp-a ii.39 (k. tumhe gatā “have you not gone,” answer: āma “yes”); Pv-a 27 (k. tan dānaṃ upakappati does that gift really benefit the dead?), 178 (k. vo piṃḍapāto laddho have you received any alms?). Cp. kin ■ Often combd with other indef. particles, e.g. kacci nu Vin i.41; Ja iii.236 Ja vi.542; k. nu kho “perhaps” (Ger. etwa, doch nicht Ja i.279; k. pana Ja i.103 ■ When followed by nu or su the original d reappears according to rules of Sandhi kaccinnu Ja ii.133; Ja v.174, Ja v.348; vi. 23; kaccissu Snp 1045 Snp 1079 (see Nd ii.186).

Sk. kaccid = kad + cid, see kad˚

Kaccikāra

a kind of large shrub, the Caesalpina Digyna Ja vi.535 (should we write with BB kacchi˚?).

Kaccha1

(nt.) 1. marshy land, marshes; long grass, rush, reed SN i.52 (te hi sotthiṃ gamissanti kacche vāmakase magā), 78 (parūḷha k-nakha-lomā with nails and hair like long-grown grass cp. same at Ja iii.315 & Sdhp 104); Ja v.23 (carāmi kacchāni vanāni ca); vi.100 (parūḷha-kacchā tagarā) Snp 20 (kacche rūḷhatiṇe caranti gāvo); Snp-a 33 (pabbata opp. to nadī˚, mountain, & river marshes). Kern (;Toev. ii.139) doubts the genuineness of the phrase parūḷha˚.

2. an arrow (made of reed) MN i.429 (kaṇḍo… yen’ amhi viddho yadi vā kacchaṃ yadi vā ropiman ti).

cp. Sk. kaccha, prob. dial.

Kaccha2

(adj.) fit to be spoken of AN i.197 (Com. = kathetuṃ yutta). akaccha ibid.

ger. of kath

Kacchaka1

a kind of fig-tree DN-a i.81.

2. the tree Cedrela Toona Vin iv.35; SN v.96; Vism 183.

Kacchati1

Pass. of katheti (ppr. kacchamāna AN iii.181).

2. Pass. of karoti.

Kacchantara

(nt.) 1. interior, dwelling, apartment Vv-a 50 (= nivesa).

2. the armpit: see upa˚.

see kacchā2

Kacchapa

a tortoise, turtle SN iv.177 (kummo kacchapo); in simile of the blind turtle (kāṇo k.) MN iii.169 = SN v.455; Thig 500 (cp J.P.T.S. 1907, 73, 174) ■ f. kacchapinī a female t Mil 67.

-lakkhaṇa “tortoise-sign,” i.e. fortune-telling on the ground of a tortoise being found in a painting or an ornament; a superstition included in the list of tiracchāna-vijjā DN i.9≈; DN-a i.94. -loma “tortoise-hair, i.e. an impossibility, absurdity Ja iii.477, cp. sasavisāṇa ˚maya made of t. hair Ja iii.478.

Sk. kacchapa, dial. fr. *kaśyapa, orig. Ep of kumma, like magga of paṭipadā

Kacchapaka

see hattha˚.

Kacchapuṭa

reed-basket, sling-basket, pingo, in -vāṇija a trader, hawker, pedlar Ja i.111.

see kaccha1

Kacchā1

(f.) 1. enclosure denoting both the enclosing and the enclosed i.e. wall or room: see kacchantara.

2. an ornament for head & neck (of an elephant), veilings, ribbon Vv 21;9 = 699 (= gīveyyaka Vv-a); Ja iv.395 (kacchaṃ nāgānaṃ bandhatha gīveyyaṃ paṭimuñcatha). 3. belt loin-or waist-cloth (cp. next) Vin ii.319; Ja v.306 (= saṃvelli); Mil 36; Dhp-a i.389.

derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣā, Lat. cohus, incohare & see details under gaha;1

Kacchā2

(f.) & kaccha (m. nt.); the armpit Vin i.15 (addasa… kacche vīṇaṃ… aññissā kacche ālambaraṃ); SN i.122 = Snp 449 (sokaparetassa vīṃā kacchā abhassatha); Iti 76 (kacchehi sedā muccanti sweat drops from their armpits); Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197 (thanaṃ dasseti k˚ṃ dass˚ nābhiṃ dass˚); Ja v.435 (thanāni k˚ āni ca dassayantī; expld on p. 437 by upakacchaka); vi.578. The phrase parūḷha-kaccha-nakhaloma means “with long-grown finger-nails and long hair in the armpit,” e.g. SN i.78.

-loma (kaccha˚) hair growing in the armpit Mil 163 (should probably be read parūḷha-k ■ nakha-l., as above).

Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣa & kakṣā, Lat. coxa, Ohg. hahsa

Kacchikāra

see kacci˚.

Kacchu

1. the plant Carpopogon pruriens, the fruit of which causes itch when applied to the skin Dhp-a iii.297 (mahā-phalāni).

2. itch, scab, a cutaneous disease, usually in phrase kacchuyā khajjati “to be eaten by itch (cp. E. itch → eat) Vin i.202, Vin i.296; Ja v.207; Pv ii.311 (cp. kapi˚); Vism 345; Dhp-a i.299.

-cuṇṇa the powdered fruit of Carpopogon pruriens causing itch Dhp-a iii.297. -piḷakā scab & boils Ja v.207.

Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kacchu, dial. for kharju: perhaps connected with khajjati, eating, biting

Kajjala

orig. burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn lamp-black or soot, used as a collyrium Vin ii.50 (read k. for kapalla, cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167).

Sk. kajjala, dial. fr. kad + jala, from jalati, jval

Kajjopakkamaka

a kind of gem Mil 118 (vajira k. phussarāga lohitanka).

Kañcaka

a kind of tree (dāsima˚) Ja vi.536 (expld as “dve rukkhajātiyo”). BB have koñcaka.

Kañcana

(nt.) gold AN iii.346 Thag 691 (muttaṃ selā va k.); Thig 266 (k˚ ssa phalakaṃ va); Vv-a 4, Vv-a 9 (= jātarūpa). Esp. freq. in cpds. = of or like gold.

-agghika a golden garland Bv X. 26. -agghiya id Bv v.29. -āveḷā id. Ja vi.49; Vv 362; Pv ii.127 (thus for ˚ācela); iii.93; Pv-a 157. -kadalikkhaṇḍa a g bunch of bananas Ja vi.13. -thūpa a gilt stupa Dhp-a iii.483; Dhp-a iv.120. -patimā a gilt or golden image or statue Ja vi.553; Vv-a 168. -paṭṭa a g. turban or coronet Ja vi.217. -patta a g. dish Ja v.377. -pallaṅka a gilt palanquin Ja i.204. -bimba the golden bimba fruit Vv 366 (but expld at Vv-a 168 by majjita-kpaṭimā-sadisa “like a polished golden statue”) -bubbula a gilt ornament in form of a ball Mvu 34, Mvu 74 -rūpa a g. figure Ja iii.93. -latā g. strings surrounding the royal drum Ja vi.589. -vaṇṇa of g. colour, gilt shining, bright Ja v.342 (= paṇḍara). -velli a g. robe girdle or waist cloth Ja v.398 (but expld as “k-rūpakasadisa-sarīra “having a body like a g. statue”), cp Ja v.306, where velli is expld by kacchā, girdle. -sannibha like g., golden-coloured (cp. k-vaṇṇa and Sk kanaka-varṇa Sp. Avs. i.121, 135, etc.), in phrase ˚taca “with golden-coloured skin,” Ep. of the Buddha and one of the 32 signs of a great man (mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇa) DN ii.17; DN iii.143, DN iii.159; MN ii.136; Mil 75; attr of a devatā Vv 302, 322; Vv-a 284; of a bhikkhu Snp 551 = Thag 821. -sūci a gold pin, a hair-pin of gold Ja vi.242.

Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kāñeana, either from khacati (shine = the shining metal, cp. kāca (glass) & Sk.; kāś ), or from kanaka gold, cp. Gr. κνηκός (yellow). P. kañcana is poetical

Kañcanaka

(adj.) golden Ja iv.379 (˚daṇḍa).

Kañcuka

1. a closely fitting jacket, a bodice Vin i.306 = Vin ii.267; AN i.145; Dhp-a iii.295 (paṭa˚ṃ paṭimuncitvā dressed in a close bodice); Pv-a 63 (urago tacaṃ kañcukaṃ omuñcanto viya).

2. the slough of a snake (cp. 1) DN-a i.222.

3. armour, coat of mail Ja v.128 (sannāha˚); DN-a i.157 (of leather); Dāvs v.14

4. a case, covering, encasement; of one pagoda incasing another: Mvu i.42.

from kañc (kac) to bind, cp. Gr. κάκαλα fetter, Sk. kañcuka

Kañjaka

Name of a class of Titans Pv-a 272 (kāḷa-k˚-bhedā Asurā; should we read khañjaka? Cp. Hardy Manual of Buddhism 59).

Kañjika

(nt.) sour rice-gruel Ja i.238 (udaka˚); Vv 3337 (amba˚), 435 (= yāgu Vv-a 186) Dhp-a i.78, Dhp-a i.288; Vv-a 99 (ācāma-k˚-loṇudaka as expln of loṇa-sovīraka “salty fluid, i.e. the scum of sour gruel”). Cp. next.

Sk. kāñjika

Kañjiya

(nt.) = kañjika; Ja iii.145 (ambila˚); vi.365 (˚āpaṇa); Dhp-a ii.3; Dhp-a iv.164.

-teḷa a thick substance rising as a scum on rice-gruel used in straightening arrows Dhp-a i.288.

Kaññā

(f.) a young (unmarried woman, maiden, girl Pv i.111 ■ As emblem of beauty in simile khattiya-kaññā vā… pannarasa-vassuddesikā vā solasa-vassuddesikā vā… MN i.88; in combn khattiya-kaññā, brāhmaṇa-k˚, etc. AN ii.205 AN iv.128; Kisāgotamī nāma khattiya-k˚ Ja i.60; deva˚ a celestial nymph Ja i.61.

-dāna giving away of a girl in marriage Pgdp 85.

from kanīna young, compar. kanīyah, superl. kaniṣṭha; orig. “newly sprung” from *qen, cp. Gr. καινός, Vedic kanyā, Lat. re-cen(t)s, Ags. hindema “novissimus.” See also kaniṭṭha

Kaṭa1

a mat: see cpds. & kaṭallaka.;

-sara a reed: Saccharum Sara, used as medicine Dhs-a 78. -sāra (Dhp-a i.268) & sāraka a mat for sitting or lying on, made of the stalks of the screw-pine, Pandanus Furcatus Ja vi.474; Ja v.97; DN-a i.137; Dhp-a ii.183

Sk. kaṭa from kṛṇatti: to do wicker-work, roll up, plait; *gert, cp. Gr. κάρταλος, Lat. cratis = E. crate Goth. haurds, E. hurdle

Kaṭa2

another form of kaṭi (hip), only used in cpds.:

-aṭṭhika the hip-bone DN ii.296 = MN i.58, MN i.89 = MN iii.92 (as v.l.). Note. kaṭiṭṭhika at MN iii.92 and as v.l. at DN ii.296. -sāṭaka a loin-cloth Ja iv.248.

Kaṭa3

= kata in meaning of “original,” good (cp. sat); as nt. “the lucky die” in phrase kaṭaggaha (see below). Also in combn with su˚ & duk˚; for sukata & dukkata (e.g. Vin ii.289; Dhp-a iii.486; Dhp-a iv.150) and in meaning of “bad, evil” in kaṭana. Cp. also kali.

-ggaha “he who throws the lucky die,” one who is lucky, fortunate, in phrase “ubhayattha k.” lucky in both worlds, i.e. here & beyond Thag 462; Ja iv.322 (= jayaggaha victorious C.); cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 159. Also in “ubhayam ettha k.” SN iv.351 sq-Opposed to kali the unlucky die, in phrase kaliṃ gaṇhāti to have bad luck Ja vi.206 (kaliggaha = parājayasaṃkhāta, i.e. one who is defeated, as opp. to kaṭaggaha = jayasankhāta), 228, 282.

pp. of karoti

Kaṭaka

(m. nt.) anything circular, a ring, a wheel (thus in kara˚ Vin ii.122); a bracelet Pv-a 134.

Kaṭakañcukatā

see kaṭu˚.

Kaṭakaṭāyati

= taṭataṭāyati to crush, grind, creak, snap PugA. i.34; Vv-a 121 (as v.l.); Vism 264. Cp. also karakarā.

Kaṭacchu

a ladle, a spoon; expld by uḷunka Dhp-a iv.75, Dhp-a iv.123; by dabbi Pv-a 135. Used for butter Vv-a 68, otherwise for cooked food in general, esp. rice gruel ■ Vin ii.216; Ja i.454; Ja iii.277.

-gāha “holding on to one’s spoon,” i.e. disinclination to give food, niggardliness, stinginess Dhs-a 376 cp. Dhs trsl.300 n2. -gāhika “spoon in hand,” serving with ladles (in the distribution of food at the Mahādāna Pv-a 135. -parissāvana a perforated ladle Vin ii.118 -bhikkhā “ladle-begging,” i.e. the food given with a ladle to a bhikkhu when he calls at a house on his begging tour Thag 934; Mil 9; Dhp-a iv.123; as representing a small gift to one individual, opposed to the Mahādanā Pv ii.957; as an individual meal contrasted with public feeding (salāka-bhatta) Dhp-a i.379. -matta (bhatta “only a spoonful of rice” Mil 8; Dhp-a iv.75.

cp. on etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 163

Kaṭacchuka

(adj.) relating to spoons Vin ii.233.

Kaṭana

(nt.) an evil deed AN iv.172 (v.l. = AA 744 kaṭanaṃ vuccati pāpakammaṃ).

from kaṭa, pp. of karoti

Kaṭallaka

a puppet (pagliaccio), a marionette with some contrivance to make it dance Ja v.16 (dāru expld by dārumaya-yanta-rūpaka).

to kaṭa1

Kaṭasī

(f.) a cemetery; only in phrase kaṭasiṃ vaḍḍheti “to increase the cemetery” referring to dying and being buried repeatedly in the course of numerous rebirths, expld by susāna & āḷāhana Thag-a 291-vaḍḍhenti kaṭasiṃ ghoraṃ ādiyanti punabbhavaṃ Vin ii.296 = AN ii.54 = Thag 456 (where ācinanti (?) for ādiy˚), 575; Thig 502. Also in cpds. ˚vaḍḍhana Ja i.146; Ud 72 = Ne 174; ˚vaḍḍhita SN ii.178 sq. Nd ii.664.

prob. a contamination of kaṭa + sīva(thikā), charnel-house, under influence of foll. va (ḍḍh˚), cp Sk. kaṭa (?) a corpse

Kaṭākaṭa

see kata i.3.

Kaṭāha

(m. nt.) a pot [in older texts only as-˚].

1. pot, vessel, vase, receptacle. udaka˚; Vin ii.122; ghaṭi˚; Vin ii.115; loha˚; Vin ii.170. ayo˚; (in simile “diva-santatte ayokaṭāhe”) MN i.453 = AN iv.138 gūtha˚; Vin iv.265; tumba˚; (a gourd used as receptacle for food) vin ii.114; alābu˚; Dhs-a 405 ■ Uncompounded only at Dpvs 92 (˚ka); Mvu 17, Mvu 47; Mvu 18, Mvu 24.

2. anything shaped like a pot, as the skull: sīsa˚; DN ii.297; MN i.58; Mil 197.

Sk. kaṭāha

Kaṭi

hip, waist Vin iii.22, Vin iii.112; Nd ii.659; Ja iv.32; Mil 418. In cpds. also kaṭa (q.v.).

-thālaka a cert. bone on the small of the back Ja vi.509. -padesa the buttocks Ja iii.37. -pamāṇa (adj. as far as the waist Ja vi.593. -pariyosāna the end of the hips, the bottom Ja ii.275. -puthulaka (adj.) with broad hips, having beautiful hips Ja v.303 (in expln of soṇī puthulā). -bhāga the waist Ja iii.373. -bhāra a burden carried on the hip (also a way of carrying children) Vin ii.137; Vin iii.49. -sandhi the joint of the hip Mil 418, Vism 185. -samohita (adj.) fastened or clinging to the waist Ja v.206. -sutta a belt, girdle (as ornament) Pv-a 134. -suttaka a string or cord around the waist to fasten the loin-cloth Vin ii.271 also an ornamental waist-band, girdle Vin ii.107 (see Vin. Texts iii.69, 142, 348).

Sk. kaṭi, *(s)qṷel; orig. bending, curvature, cp. Gr. σκέλος hip, Lat. scelus crooked deed, Ger. scheel squint

Kaṭuka

(adj.) sharp, bitter, acid, severe

1. severe, sharp (fig.), of dukkha, vedanā, kāmā, etc MN i.10 = AN ii.143; Ja vi.115; Thig 451 (= Thag-a 281) SA 56 ■ painful, terrible, frightful (-appld to the fruits of evil actions and to the sufferings in Niraya: see kammapphala & niraya) Ja iii.519; Pv i.102, 111iv.18, 76 ■ bitter, or perhaps pungent of taste DhS 291; Mil 65, Mil 112; Ja iii.201.

2. (nt.) pungency, acidity bitterness DN ii.349 = Ja i.380; Thig 503 (pañca˚) Ja vi.509Note. Is k. to be written instead of kadukkha at Vv-a 316, where it explains maraṇa? Cp. Ja iii.201 tesaṃ taṃ kaṭukaṃ āsi, maraṇaṃ ten’ upāgamuṃ.

-udraya causing bitterness or pain Ja v.241, cp. dukkhudraya Ja v.119. -odaka a bitter draught Sdhp 159 -pabhedana (adj.) having a pungent juice exuding from the temples, said of an elephant in rut Dhp 324 (= tikhiṇamada Dhp-a iv.13). -pphala a kind of perfume made of the berry of an aromatic plant Ja ii.416 = Dhp-a iii.475 (kappūra-k˚-ādīni), cp. Sk. kakkolaka ■ (adj.) of bitter fruit Ja ii.106 (of the mango); SN i.57 = Ja iii.291 = Dhp 66 (of kamma); Pv i.1110 (id.). -bhaṇḍa (sg. & pl.) spices There are 4 enum;d at Ja iii.86: hingujīraka, singiveraka marica, pipphali; 3 at Vv-a 186 (as tikaṭuka, cp kaṭula): ajamoja, hingujīraka, lasuṇa; Pv-a 135; Dhp-a ii.131. -bhāva stinginess Dhs-a 376. -rohiṇī the black hellebore Vin i.201 (as medicine). -vipāka (adj. having a bitter result (of pāpa) Mil 206; compar. ˚tara SN ii.128. -sāsana a harsh command Ja vi.498.

Sk. kaṭu(ka), from *(s)qṷer to cut; cp. Sk. kṛṇoti (kṛṇtati), Lat. caro “cutlet.”-k. is almost exclusively poetical; usually expld in prose by aniṭṭha tikhiṇa, ghora (of niraya); often combd with khara opp. madhura, e.g. Pv-a 119

Kaṭukañcukatā

(f.) closeness, tightness close-fistedness, niggardliness. Expld as “the shrinking up of the heart,” which prevents the flow or manifestation of generosity. It occurs only in the stock phrase “vevicchaṃ kadariyaṃ k. aggahitattaṃ cittassa” in macchariya -passage at Nd ii.614 = Dhs 1122 = Pp 19, Pp 23 = Vb 357, Vb 371; and in the macchariya expln at Vism 470.

der. by Bdhgh. as kaṭuka + añcuka (añc), a popular etymology (Dhs-a 376). At Dhs 1122 and as v.l. K in Vb we have the spelling kaṭakancukatā (for kaṭakuñcakatā?), on which and ˚kuñcaka see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 159 sq. and Dhs. trsl. 300 n2-Morris’ derivation is kaṭa (kar ) + kañcuka + tā (kañcuka = kuñcaka to kuñc, to contract), thus a dern fr. kañcuka “bodice” and meaning “being tightened in by a bodice,” i.e. tightness. Although the reading kaṭukañc˚ is the established reading, the var lect. kaṭakuñc˚; is probably etym. correct, semantically undoubtedly better. It has undergone dissimilatory vowel-metathesis under influence of popular analogy with kaṭuka. With kuñcikatā cp. the similar expression derived from the same root: kuṇalī-mukha, of a stingy person Pv ii.928, which is expld by “sankucitaṃ mukhaṃ akāsi” (see kuñcita)

Kaṭukatta

(nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness Mil 56, Mil 63.

Kaṭumikā

(f.) artificiality, outward help, suggestion appl;d to sati Mil 78, Mil 79 (cp. Mil trsl. i.121 n and Mvu i.477).

from karoti; see Sk. kṛtrima & kuṭṭima; also kutta & kutti

Kaṭula

(adj.) containing pungent substances (generally three: tekaṭula) Vin i.210 (yāgu), cp. tikaṭuka

Sk. kaṭura

Kaṭuviya

(adj.) impure, defiled, in ˚kata AN i.280.

kaṭu viya?

Kaṭerukkha

a kind of creeper Ja vi.536 (perhaps read as next).

Kaṭeruha

a flowering plant Ja vi.537 (= pupphagaccha). Cp. kaseruka.

Kaṭṭha1

ploughed, tilled Snp 80; Mil 255; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 62. a˚ untilled, unprepared Anvs 27. su˚ well-ploughed AN i.229; Mil 255.

Sk. kṛṣṭa, pp. of kasati, cp. kiṭṭha

Kaṭṭha2

(adj.) bad, useless: see kaṭṭhaka2. Only in cpds.; perhaps also in pakaṭṭhaka.

-aṅga pithless, sapless, of no value (of trees) Ja ii.163; Dhp-a i.144. -mukha “with the injurious mouth,” a kind of snake Dhs-a 300.

Sk. kaṣṭa

Kaṭṭha3

(nt.) 1. a piece of wood, esp. a stick used as fuel, chips, firewood SN i.168 = Snp 462; MN i.234 (+ kaṭhala); Pv-a 256 (+ tiṇa). In phrase “sattussada sa-tiṇa-kaṭṭh’ odaka sa-dhañña” (densely populated with good supply of grass, firewood, water, and corn) in ster. description of a prosperous place (cp. Xenophon’s πόλις οἰκουμένη εὐδαίμων καπόλις οἰκουμένη εὐδαίμων και μεγάλη) DN i.87, DN i.111, etc. Both sg (coll.) & pl. as “sticks” DN ii.341, esp. in phrase kaṭṭhaṃ phāleti to chop sticks Vin i.31; Snp p.104; Ja ii.144; Pv ii.951 (= Pv-a 135), or k˚ṃ pāteti (phāṭeti = phāleti See pāteti) MN i.21. Frequent also in similes: MN i.241 MN ii.93 = MN iii.95 (alla k.); MN iii.242 = SN ii.97 = SN iv.215 SN v.212 (dve k.); AN iii.6 (+ kaṭhala); iv.72 (+ tiṇa) i.124 = Pp 30, Pp 36 (+ kaṭhala).

2. a piece of stick used for building huts (wattle and daub) MN i.190. 3. a stick, in avalekhana˚; (for scraping) Vin ii.141, Vin ii.221 and in danta˚; a tooth-pick Vv-a 63, etc. (see danta)

4. (adj.) in cpds. = of wood, wooden.

-aggi wood-fire, natural fire AN iv.41, AN iv.45, enumerated last among the 7 fires. -atthaṃ for the purpose of fuel in phrase k. pharati to serve as fuel AN ii.95 = SN iii.93; Iti 90 = Ja i.482. -atthara a mat made of twigs (cp kaṭasāra) Ja v.197, also as -attharika (& ˚kā) Ja vi.21; Dhp-a i.135; f. at Ja i.9; Ja iv.329; Ja vi.57. -kaliṅgara chips and chaff Dhp-a iii.122 (cp. k-khaṇḍa). -khaṇḍa a piece of wood, splinter, chip, suggesting something useless trifling Dhp-a i.321 (as expln of niratthaṃ va kalingaraṃ) Thag-a 284 (as expln of chuṭṭho kalingaraṃ viya). -tāla a wooden key Vin ii.148 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.162) -tāḷa a w. gong Dhs-a 319. -tumba a w. vessel Vin i.205. -pādukā a wooden shoe, clog Vin i.188. -puñja a heap of w. AN iv.72; Ja ii.327. -phālaka wood-cutter Vism 413. -bhatin a wood-cutter Dpvs 20, 28, where given as a nickname of King Tissa. -mañcaka a wooden bed Mil 366. -maya wooden Vin i.203; Ja i.289 Ja v.435. -rūpa (& ˚ka) a w. figure, doll Ja i.287. -vāha a cartload of fire-wood SN ii.84. -vāhana riding on a faggot Ja i.136. -vipalāvita drifting wood Ja i.326 -hatthin a w. elephant, built by order of King Caṇḍapajjota to decoy King Udena (cp. the horse of Troy Dhp-a i.193. -hāraka (f. ˚ikā) gathering fire-wood, an occupation of poor people MN i.79; SN i.180; Ja i.134 Ja ii.412; iv. 148; v.417; Mil 331; Vism 120; Vv-a 173 -hārin = ˚hāraka Vin iii.41; Ja i.133 (title of Ja no.7 referred to at Dhp-a i.349).

Brh. kāṣṭha, cp. Ohg. holz

Kaṭṭhaka1

(m. nt.) a kind of reed Dhp 164; Dhp-a iii.156 (= velu-sankhāta-kaṭṭha).

to kaṭṭha3

Kaṭṭhaka2

(m. pl.) a kind of fairy DN ii.261

to kaṭṭha2

Kaṭṭhissa

(nt.) a silken coverlet embroidered with gems DN i.7 = Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163; DN-a i.87 = AA 445.

Sk.?

Kaṭhati

1. to boil, to stew Bdhgh on Vin i.205 see Vin. Texts ii.57 n1, where pp. is given as kuthita Similarly Thig 504 (cp. Sisters 174 n4, but cp. Mil trs. ii.271 “distressed”; E. Müller, J.R.A.S. 1910 539).

2. to be scorched, pp. kaṭhita (= hot) Mil 323, Mil 325, Mil 357, Mil 397 ■ The pp. occurs as ˚kaṭṭhita ˚kuṭṭhita in cpds uk˚ pa˚ (q.v.). See also kuṭṭhita.;

Sk. kvathati; cp. Goth. hvapo scum, hvapjan to seethe. The Dhātumañjūsā (no. 132, ed. Andersen Smith) comments on; kaṭh with “sosāna-pākesu.” See also kuthati

Kaṭhala

gravel, pebble, potsherd Ja iii.225; Ja v.417; Vv-a 157; combd with sakkhara at DN i.84 = AN i.9, and in simile at AN i.253. As f. combd with kaṭṭha at AN i.124 = Pp 30, Pp 36; AN iii.6; as m. in same combn at Vism 261.

Sk. kaṭhara (˚la, ˚lla, ˚lya: all found in Av. S and Divy), to kṛṇāti; cp. khāṭi

Kaṭhalaka

gravel, potsherd Ja iii.227; Mil 34.

Kaṭhina

(adj.-n.). 1. (adj.) hard, firm, stiff Cp ii.2; Dhs 44, Dhs 45 (where also der. f. abstr. akaṭhinatā absence of rigidity, combd with akakkhalatā, cp Dhs-a 151 akaṭhina-bhāva); Pv-a 152 (˚dāṭha) ■ (fig. hard, harsh, cruel Ja i.295 = Ja v.448 (= thaddha-hadaya) adv. ˚ṃ fiercely, violently Mil 273, Mil 274.

2. (nt.) the cotton cloth which was annually supplied by the laity to the bhikkhus for the purpose of making robes Vin i.253 sq.; also a wooden frame used by the bh. in sewing their robes Vin. ii.115

117 ■ On the k. robe see Vin i.298 sq.; Vin iii.196 sq., 203 sq., 261 sq.; iv.74, 100, 245 sq. 286 sq.; v.15, 88, 119, 172 sq.; 218. Cp. Vin. Texts i.18; ii.148; iii.92.

-attharaṇa the dedication of the k. cloth Vin i.266 see next. -atthāra the spreading out, i.e. dedication of the k. cloth by the people to the community of bhikkhus On rules concerning this distribution and description of the ceremony see Vin i.254 sq.; Bv ix.7; cp. Vin v.128 sq., 205 -uddhāra the withdrawal or suspension of the five privileges accorded to a bhikkhu at the k. ceremony Vin i.255, Vin i.259; Vin iii.262; Vin iv.287, Vin iv.288; Vin v.177

179, cp. next & Vin. Texts ii.157, 234, 235. -ubbhāra = ˚uddhāra, in kaṭhinassa ubbhārāya “for the suspension of the k privileges” Vin i.255. -khandhaka the chapter or section treating of k., the 7th of the Mahāvagga of the Vinaya Vin ii.253

267. -cīvara a k. robe made of k cloth Bv ix.7. -dussa the k. cloth Vin i.254. -maṇḍapa a shed in which the bhikkhus stitched their k. cloth into robes Vin ii.117. -rajju string used to fix the k. cloth on to the frame Vin ii.116. -sālā = ˚maṇḍapa Vin ii.116.

Sk. kaṭhina & kaṭhora with dial. ṭh for rth; cp. Gr. κρατύς, κρατερός strong, κράτος strength; Goth. hardus = Ags. heard = E. hard. Cp also Sk. kṛtsna = P. kasiṇa

Kaṭhinaka

(adj.) referring to the kaṭhina cloth Vin v.61, Vin v.114.

Kaḍḍhati

1. to draw out, drag, pull, tug Ja i.193, Ja i.225, Ja i.265, Ja i.273 (khaggaṃ k. to draw the sword).

2. to draw in, suck up (udakaṃ) Ja iv.141.

3. to draw a line, to scratch Ja i.78, Ja i.111, Ja i.123; Ja vi.56 (lekhaṃ).

dialect. form supposed to equal Sk. karṣati, cp. Prk. kaḍḍhai to pull, tear, khaḍḍā pit, dug-out See also Bloomfield, J.A.O.S. xiv. 1921 p. 465.

Kaḍḍhana

(nt.). 1. pulling, drawing Mil 231. - 2. refusing, rejecting, renunciation, appl. to the selfdenial of missionary theras following Gotama Buddha’s example Mvu 12, Mvu 55.

Kaḍḍhanaka

(adj.) pulling, dragging Ja v.260.

Kaṇa

the fine red powder between the husk and the grain of rice, huskpowder DN i.9 (˚homa), expld at DN-a i.93 by kuṇḍaka. (adj.) made of husk-powder or of finely broken rice, of cakes Ja i.423 (k-pūva = kuṇḍakena pakka-pūva)- akaṇa (adj.) free from the coating of red powder characteristic of the best rice Mvu 5, Mvu 30; Anvs 27 (akaṇaṃ karoti to whiten the rice). Cp. kākaṇa.

-bhakkha eating husk-powder, a practice of cert ascetics DN i.166 = MN i.78 = AN i.241≈.

Derivation uncertain, possibly connected with kana; positive of kanīyān = small; Vedic kaṇa

Kaṇaya

a sort of spear, lance Ja i.273; Ja ii.364 (like a spear, of a bird’s beak); Mil 339.

-agga the point of a spear Ja i.329 (like…, of a beak).

Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kaṇaya = kaṇapa

Kaṇavīra

Nerium odorum, oleander, the flower of which is frequently used in the garland worn by criminals when led to the place of execution (cp Rouse, J. trsl. iv.119 and Mṛcchakaṭika X. beginning diṇṇa-kalavīla-dāme. See also under kaṇṭha) Vism 183 (n); Dhs-a 317; Snp-a 283; Vv-a 177; cp. next.

Sk. karavīra

Kaṇavera

= kaṇavīra Ja iii.61; Ja iv.191; Ja v.420; Ja vi.406.

Kaṇājaka

(nt.) a porridge of broken rice, eaten together with sour gruel (bilanga-dutiya; always in this combn except at Ja v.230) Vin ii.77 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.9) SN i.90, SN i.91; AN i.145; AN iv.392; Ja i.228; Ja iii.299; Dhp-a iii.10; Dhp-a iv.77; Vv-a 222, Vv-a 298 (corr. bilanka; Hardy at Vv-a Index p. 364 expl. as “a certain weight“(?)).

-bhatta a meal of k. porridge Ja v.230.

Kaṇikā

(f.) 1. a small particle of broken rice (opp. taṇḍula a full grain) Ja vi.341, Ja vi.366 (˚āhi pūvaṃ pacitvā). 2. a small spot, a freckle, mole, in ; (adj. having no moles DN i.80, and sa˚; with moles DN i.80 (cp DN-a i.223).

cp. kaṇa

Kanikāra

(m. nt.) & kaṇṇikāra Ja iv.440; Ja v.420; the difference stated at Ja v.422 is kaṇi˚ = mahāpupphā kaṇṇi˚ = khuddakapupphā)

1. (m.) the tree Pterospermum acerifolium Ja i.40; Ja v.295; Ja vi.269 Ja vi.537.

2. (nt.) its (yellow) flower (k- puppha ), taken metaphorically as typical emblem of yellow and of brightness. Thus in similes at DN ii.111 (= pīta) MN ii.14 (ṇṇ) = AN v.61 (ṇṇ); Dhp-a i.388; of the yellow robes (kāsāyāni) Ja ii.25; with ref. to the blood of the heart Vism 256; = golden Vv-a 65; Dhp-a ii.250 (v.l. ṇṇ).

-makula a k. bud Ja ii.83.

Sk. karṇikāra

Kaṇerika

(nt.) a helmet (?) Ja vi.397.

Kaṇeru

(m. f.) a young elephant Ja ii.342; Ja iv.49; Ja v.39, Ja v.50, Ja v.416; Ja vi.497; Dhp-a i.196 (v.l.) kareṇukā)-f. ˚kā MN i.178 ■ See also kareṇu.

Derivation uncertain, just possibly connected with kara, trunk. Sanskrit has kareṇu, but the medieval vocabularies give also kaṇeru

Kaṇṭa

(cp. next) a thorn Mil 351.

Kaṇṭaka

1. a thorn Snp 845; Vin i.188; Ja v.102 Ja vi.105 (in description of the Vetaraṇī); cp. kusa˚

2. any instrument with a sharp point Sdhp 201. 3. a bone, fish-bone Ja i.222; in piṭṭhi˚; a bone of the spine DN ii.297≈ (see kaṭaṭṭhi); MN i.80 = MN i.245; Vism 271; Sdhp 102.

4. (fig.) an obstacle, hindrance nuisance (“thorn in my side”); Kv 572; enemy infestor; a dacoit, thief, robber DN i.135 (sa˚ and a˚, of the country as infested with dacoits or free from them, cp DN-a i.296); Ja i.186 (paṭikaṇṭaka, enemy); v.450; Thag 946; Dhp-a i.177 (akkhimhi); Vv-a 301.

5. (fig.) anything sharp, thorny, causing pain: of kāmā (passions SN iv.189, SN iv.195, SN iv.198; Ud 24; Kv 202; cp. sa˚ ■ Thus grouped, like saṃyojanāni, into 10 obstacles to perfection (dasa k.) AN v.134; as “bringing much trouble Ja iv.117. Often in standing phrase khāṇu-kaṇṭaka stumbling and obstruction AN i.35; Snp-a 334. As abstr kaṇṭakattaṃ hindrance at Vism 269 (sadda˚) ■ akaṇṭaka 1. free from thorns Ja ii.118; Ja v.260.

2. (fig. free from thieves, quiet, peaceful DN i.135; also not difficult, easy, happy, bringing blessings (of the right path) AN v.135; Vv 187; Vv-a 96sakaṇṭaka 1. having bones (of food) Ja iv.192, Ja iv.193.

2. (fig.) beset with thieves, dangerous DN i.135; thorny, i.e. painful, miserable (of duggati and kāmā) SN iv.195; Thig 352; Ja v.260 ■ Cp. also kaṇḍaka and nikkaṇṭaka.

-āpacita covered with thorns Ja vi.249 (cp. ˚ācita) -āpassaya (= kaṇṭak’ apāśraya) a bed made of an outstretched skin, under which are placed thorns or iron spikes; to lie or stand on such is a practice of certain naked ascetics DN i.167 = MN i.78≈. -āpassayika (adj to prec.) “bed-of-thorns-man” DN i.167≈. At Ja i.493 the reading is k-āpassaya, at iii.74 k-apassaya; at iii.235 the reading is kaṇṭhaka-seyyaṃ kappetha (should it be k-āpassaye seyyaṃ k˚?); DN i.167 reads kaṇṭhakā-passayika. -ācita covered with thorns Ja v.167. -ādhāna a thorny brake, a thorny hedge MN i.10 (k-dhāna; for dhāna = ṭhāna see dhāna & cp rāja-dhānī); AN i.35; Mil 220. -kasā a thorny whip used for punishment and torture Ja iii.41. -gahana a thorny thicket or jungle SN ii.228. -gumba a th. bush Ja i.208. -latā a th. creeper, the Capparis Zeilanica Ja v.175. -vaṭṭa a thorny brake or hedge MN i.448.

From kantati2 to cut. Brh. kaṇṭaka. Spelt also kaṇṭhaka

Kaṇṭaki

(f.) in cpd. ˚vāṭa a thorny fence (cactus hedge?) Vin ii.154.

Kaṇṭha

1. throat AN iv.131; Ja v.448; Mil 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati, is hoarse); Pv-a 280 (akkharāni mahatā kaṇṭhena uccaritāni). The throat of Petas is narrow and parched with thirst: Pv-a 99 (k-oṭṭha-tālūnaṃ tassita), 180 (sūci˚ like a needle’s eye, cp. sūcicchidda v.l. sūcikaṭṭha “whose bones are like needles”), 260 (visukkha-k-ṭṭha-jivhā).

2. neck Vin i.15; Dhp 307 (kāsāva˚); Vv 6417 (expid at Vv-a 280 by gīvūpagasīsūpagādi-ābharaṇāni). Esp. in loc. kaṇṭhe round the neck, with ref. to var. things tied round, e.g. kuṇapaṃ k āsattaṃ AN iv.377; kuṇapaṃ k. baddhaṃ Ja i.5; k. mālā Ja i.166, Ja i.192; k. bandhanti vaḍḍhanaṃ Ja iii.226; with the wreath of karavīra flowers (q.v.) on a criminal ready for execution: rattavaṇṇa-virala-mālāya bandhakaṇṭha Pv-a 4 (cp. Avs i.102; Avs ii.182; karavīra-mālābaddha [sakta ii.182]-kaṇṭheguṇa).

-kūpa the cavity of the throat Mhbv 137. -ja produced in the throat, i.e. guttural Sāsv 150. -suttaka an ornamental string or string of beads worn round the neck Vin ii.106.

*qṷent from *qṷelt, primarily neck, cp. Lat. collus “the turner.” Syn. with k. is gīvā, primarily throat Brh. kaṇṭha

Kaṇṭhaka1

thorn, see kaṇṭaka.

Kaṇṭhaka2

Name of Gotama’s horse, on which he left his father’s palace Mhbv 25; spelt kanthaka at Ja i.54, Ja i.62 sq.

Kaṇḍa

(m. nt.) 1. the portion of a stalk or cane between one knot and another; the whole stalk or shaft; the shaft of an arrow, an arrow in general MN i.429 (two kinds of arrows: kaccha & ropima, cp kaṇḍa-cittaka); Ja i.150; Ja ii.91; Ja iii.273; Ja v.39; Mil 44, Mil 73; Mvu 25, Mvu 89. As arrow also in the “Tell story of Culladhanuggaha at Ja iii.220 & Dhp-a iv.66. 2. a section, portion or paragraph of a book DN-a i.12 Pgdp 161.

3. a small portion, a bit or lump Dhp-a i.134 (pūva˚); Mvu 17, Mvu 35.

4. kaṇḍaṃ (adv.) a portion of time, for a while, a little Pgdp 36 ■ See also khaṇḍa, with which it is often confounded. Der upa- kaṇḍakin (adj.) (thin) like a stalk or arrow Pv. ii.113 (of a Petī).

-gamana the going of an arrow, i.e. the distance covered by an arrow in flight, a bow-shot Ja ii.334; cp kaṇḍu. -cittaka (Sk. kāṇḍa-citraka) an excellent arrow AN ii.202. -nāḷī a quiver Ja iii.220. -pahāra an arrow-shot, arrow-wound Mil 16 (ekena k-paharena dve mahākāyā padālitā “two birds killed with one stone”), 73. -vāraṇa (adj.) warding off arrows, appl to a shield Ja vi.592 (nt.); a shield Ja iv.366.

perhaps as *kaldno fr. *kalad to break, cp. Gr. κλαδαρός, Lat. clades, etc., Sk. kāṇḍa. See also khagga and khaṇḍa

Kaṇḍaka

= kaṇṭaka Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh.); AN iii.383; Bv xiii.29akaṇḍaka free from thieves, safe, secure Pv-a 161.

Kaṇḍarā

(f.) sinew, tendon Vin i.91, Vin i.322 (in cpd. kaṇḍara-cchinna one whose tendons (of the feet) have been cut); Kv 23, 31; Vism 253, Vism 254 (where Kp-a 49 reads miñja).

Kaṇḍita

at Ja i.155 is misprint; read: kaṇḍam assa atthī ti kaṇḍī taṃ kaṇḍinaṃ.

Kaṇḍin

(adj.) having a shaft inserted, appl. to the head of an arrow (salla) Ja i.155; (m.) an archer ibid.

Kaṇḍu1

(f.) the itch, itching, itchy feeling, desire to scratch Vin i.202, Vin i.296; Ja v.198; Vism 345. kaṇḍuṃ karoti to make or cause to itch Ja v.198; vineti to allay the itch, to scratch Ja v.199 ■ (fig.) worldly attachment irritation caused by the lusts, in “kaṇḍuṃ saṃhanti (as result of jhāna) AN iv.437.

-uppala a kind of lotus-blossom Dāvs iv.48; -paṭicchādi an “itch-cloth,” i.e. a covering allowed to the bhikkhus when suffering from itch or other cutaneous disease Vin i.296, Vin i.297; Vin iv.171, Vin iv.172. -rogin (adj. suffering from the itch Khus 105.

perhaps from *kanad to bite, scratch; cp. Sk. kandara, Gr. κναδάλλω to bite, κνώδων, κνώδαλον, etc., Sk kaṇḍu m. & f.

Kaṇḍu˚2

an arrow-shot (as measure), in sahassa-kaṇḍu sata-bheṇḍu Thag 164 = Ja ii.334 (but the latter: sata-bhedo), expld at Thag 164n by sahassakaṇḍo sahassa [sata?]-bhūmako, and at Ja ii.334 by sahassa-kaṇḍubbedho ti pāsādo satabhūmiko ahosi; in preceding lines the expression used is “sahassa-kaṇḍagamanaṃ uccaṃ.”

= kaṇḍa in compn

Kaṇḍuka

the itch, itchy feeling, irritation Ja v.198.

Kaṇḍuvati

(kandūvati) 1. to itch, to be itchy, to be irritated, to suffer from itch Vin i.205; Vin ii.121; Ja v.198 (kaṇḍuvāyati) Dhp-a iii.297 (kaṇḍūvantī).

2. to scratch, rub, scrape AN ii.207; Ja vi.413; Pp 56.

Denom. fr. kaṇḍu. Sk. kandūyati

Kaṇḍuvana

(nt.) 1. itching, itchy feeling Dhp-a i.440; cp. Dhātumañjūsā no. 416 kaṇḍūvana. 2. scratching, scraping MN i.508; Ja ii.249 (appl. to bad music).

fr. kaṇḍūvati

Kaṇḍusa

(nt.) a strip of cloth used to mark the kaṭhina robe, in ˚karaṇa Vin i.254, and ˚ka ibid. 290.

Kaṇḍūyana

(nt.) the itch Ja v.69.

See kaṇḍuvana

Kaṇḍolikā

(f.) a wicker-basket or stand Vin ii.114, Vin ii.143 (see Vin. Texts iii.86).

Kaṇṇa

1. a corner, an angle Vin i.48, Vin i.286; Ja i.73; Ja iii.42 Ja v.38; Ja vi.519; Pv-a 74; Dhp-a ii.178; Dāvs ii.111- cīvara˚; the edge of the garment Vism 389. Freq. in cpd. catu˚; (catukkaṇṇa) four-cornered, square, as Ep of Niraya Nd ii.304iii = Pv i.1013 (expld by catu-koṇa) Also of cloth Vin ii.228; Ja i.426; Ja iv.250.

2. the ear Snp 608; Ja i.146, Ja i.194; Dhp-a i.390 (dasā˚). Freq. in phrase kaṇṇaṃ chindati (to cut off the ear) as punishment e.g. AN i.47 ■ loc. kaṇṇe in the ear, i.e. in a low tone, in a whisper Dhp-a i.166.

3. the tip of a spoon Ja i.347assakaṇṇa Name of a tree (see under assa3).

-alaṅkāra an ornament for the ear Ja v.409. -āyata (mutta) (a pearl) inserted in the lobe of the ear Ja ii.275 Ja ii.276. -kita (should it be kaṇha˚? cp. paṃsukita, malaggakita; kita = kata) spoiled, rusty, blunt Vin ii.115 (of needles); dirty, mouldy Vin i.48 (of a floor); ii.209 (of walls); stained, soiled Vin iv.281 (of robes). -gūthaka the cerumen, wax, of the ear, Vin ii.134; Snp 197; Ja i.146. -cālana shaking the ears Ja iii.99. -cūḷa the root of the ear Ja vi.488; as ˚cūlikā at Ja ii.276; Vism 255; Dhp-a iv.13. -chidda (nt.) the orifice of the ear, the outer auditory passage (cp. sūci-chidda eye of the needle Vin iii.39; Ja ii.244, Ja ii.261. -chinna one whose ears are cut off Vin i.322; Kv 31. -cheda cutting or tearing off of the ear Mil 197, Mil 290. -jappaka one who whispers into the ear, one who tells secretly, also a gossip Vin ii.98; sa˚; whispered into the ear, appl. to a method of taking votes ibid. Cp. upakaṇṇakajappin. -jappana whispering into the ear DN i.11; DN-a i.97. -tela anointing the ear with medicinal oil DN i.12 (expld at DN-a i.98 where reading is ˚telanaṃ). -nāsa ear & nose Ja ii.117; Mil 5 (˚chinna). -patta the lobe of the ear Ja v.463 As ˚panta at Thag-a 211. -pāli = ˚patta Thig 259 (expld by ˚panta). -piṭṭhī the upper part or top of the ear Dhp-a i.394. -puccha the “tail” or flap of the ear Sdhp 168. -bila orifice of the ear Vism 195. -bheri a sort of drum. Cp ix.24. -mala “ear-dirt,” ear-wax in ˚haraṇī, an instrument for removing the wax from the ear Vin ii.135. -mālā a garland from corner to corner (of a temple) Dāvs ii.111. -muṇḍa 1. (adj.) one whose ears have been shorn or clipped Pv ii.1218 (of the dog of Hell, cp. Pv-a 152 chinnakaṇṇa).

2. (˚ka) “with blunt corners,” Name of the first one of the fabulous 7 Great Lakes (satta-mahāsarā) in the Himavant, enumd at Ja v.415; Vism 416; DN-a i.164. -mūla the root of the ear, the ear in gen. Ja i.335; Ja iii.124; loc. fig in a low tone Dhp-a i.173; near, near by Dhp-a ii.8 (mama k.). -roga a disease of the ear Dhs-a 340. -vallī the lobe of the ear Mvu 25, Mvu 94. -vijjhana perforating the ear, ˚mangala the ceremony of ear-piercing Dhp-a ii.87; cp. mangala -vedha (cp. prec.) ear-piercing, a quasi religious ceremony on children Ja v.167. -sakkhali & ˚ikā the orifice or auditory passage of the ear Dhp-a i.148; Dhs-a 334 in which latter passage ˚ikaṃ paharati means to impinge on the ear (said of the wind); ˚ikaṃ bhindati (= bhindanto viya paharati) to break the ear (with unpleasant words) Dhp-a ii.178 (T. sankhaliṃ, v.l. sakkhaliṃ). -saṅkhali a small chain attached to the ear with a small ornament suspended from it Ja v.438 -sandhovika washing the ears AN v.202. -sukha 1 (adj.) pleasant to the ear, agreable DN i.4 = MN i.179, MN i.268 = AN ii.209≈; Mil 1; DN-a i.75 = Dhs-a 397;

2. (nt. pleasant speech Ja ii.187; Ja v.167; opp. kaṇṇa -sūla -sutta an ornamental string hanging from the ear Vin ii.143. -suttaka a string from corner to corner, a clothes-line Vin i.286. -sūla 1. a piercing pain (lit stake) in the ear, ear-ache Vv-a 243.

2. what is disagreeable to hear, harsh speech Dhs-a 397 (opp. ˚sukha).

-sota the auditory passage, the ear (+ nāsika-sotāni as ubho sotāni, i.e. heṭṭhā & uparimā) DN i.106 = Snp p.108; AN iv.86; Ja ii.359; Mil 286, Mil 357; Dhp-a ii.72.

Vedic karṇa, orig. not associated with hearing, therefore not used to signify the sense (sota is used instead; cp. akkhi → cakkhu), but as “projection” to *ker, from which also Sk. śṛṇga horn. Cp. Gr. κόρυς helmet; Lat. cornu & cervus = E. corner, horn & hart. Further related Sk. aśri (caturaśraḥ four-cornered), śaṣkuli auditory passage; Lat. ācer = Gr. α ̓́κρις, α ̓́κανος, ὀςύς; Ger. ecke; also Sk. śūla & P. koṇa

Kaṇṇaka

(& ˚ika) (adj.) having corners or ears (-˚); f. ˚ikā Vin ii.137; Ja ii.185kāḷa-kaṇṇika see under kāḷa.

fr. kaṇṇa

Kaṇṇavant

(adj.) having an (open) ear, i.e. clever, sharp Ja ii.261 (= kaṇṇachiddaṃ pana na kassaci n’atthi C.).

fr. kaṇṇa

Kaṇṇikā

(f.) 1. an ornament for the ear, in ˚lakkhaṇa: see below.

2. the pericarp of a lotus Ja i.152, Ja i.183; Ja v.416; Mil 361; Vism 124 (paduma˚); Vv-a 43.

3. the corner of the upper story of a palace or pagoda, house-top Ja i.201; Ja iii.146, Ja iii.318 Ja iii.431, Ja iii.472; Dhp-a i.77 (kūṭāgāra˚); DN-a i.43; Vv-a 304 Bdhd 92.

4. a sheaf in the form of a pinnacle Dhp-a i.98 ■ In cpds. kaṇṇika˚.

-baddha bound into a sheaf; fig. of objects of thoughts Dhp-a i.304. -maṇḍala part of the roof of a house J. iii.317; Dhp-a iii.66; Dhp-a vi.178. -rukkha a tree or log used to form the top of a house Ja i.201 = Dhp-a i.269 -lakkhaṇa the art of telling fortune by marks on ornaments of the ear, or of the house-top DN i.9 (= pilandhana-k˚ pi geha-k˚ pi vasena DN-a i.94).

cp. kaṇṇaka & Sk. karṇikā

Kaṇṇikāra

see kaṇikāra.

Kanha

(adj.) dark, black, as attr. of darkness, opposed to light, syn. with kāḷa (q.v. for etym.); opp. sukka. In general it is hard to separate the lit. and fig. meanings, an ethical implication is to be found in nearly all cases (except 1.). The contrast with sukka (brightness) goes through all applications with ref. to light as well as quality. I. Of the sense of sight: k-sukka dark & bright (about black white see nīla & seta), forming one system of coloursensations (the colourless, as distinguished from the red-green and yellow-blue systems). As such enum;d in connection with quasi definition of vision, together with nīla, pīta, lohita, mañjeṭṭha at DN ii.328 = MN i.509 sq = ii.201 (see also mañjeṭṭha) ■ II. (objective) 1. of dark (black), poisonous snakes: kaṇhā (f.) Ja ii.215 (= kāḷa-sappa C); ˚sappa Ja i.336; Ja iii.269, Ja iii.347; Ja v.446 Vism 664 (in simile); Mil 149; Pv-a 62; ˚sīsā with black heads AN iii.241 (kimī).

2. of (an abundance of smooth, dark (= shiny) hair (cp. in meaning E. gloom gloss = black: shiny), as Ep. of King Vasudeva Pv ii.61 syn. with Kesavā (the Hairy, cp. ̓*Απόλλων *Οὐλαϊος Samson, etc., see also siniddha-, nīla-, kāla-kesa) sukaṇha-sīsa with very dark hair Ja v.205, also as sukaṇha-kaṇha-sīsa Ja v.202 (cp. susukāḷa). ˚jaṭi an ascetic with dark & glossy hair Ja vi.507, cp. v.205 sukaṇhajaṭila. ˚añjana glossy polish Ja v.155 (expld as sukhumakaṇha-lom’ ācitattā).

3. of the black trail of fire in ˚vattanin (cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa-vartaniṃ agniṃ R. V. viii.23, 19) SN i.69 = Ja iii.140 (cp. iii.9); Ja v.63. 4. of the black (fertile) soil of Avanti “kaṇh-uttara black on the surface Vin i.195 ■ III. (Applied) 1. ˚pakkha the dark (moonless) half of the month during which the spirits of the departed suffer and the powers of darkness prevail Pv-a 135, cp. Pv iii.64, see also pakkha1 3.

2. attr. of all dark powers and anything belonging to their sphere, e.g. of Māra Snp 355 Snp 439 (= Namuci); of demons, goblins (pisācā) DN i.93 with ref. to the “black-born” ancestor of the Kaṇhāyanas (cp. Dhp i.263 kāḷa-vaṇṇa), cp. also kāḷa in ˚sunakha, the Dog of Purgatory Pv-a 152.

3. of a dark, i.e. miserable, unfortunate birth, or social condition DN iii.81 sq. (brāhmano va sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo). ˚abhijāti a special species of men according to the doctrine of Gosāla DN-a i.162; AN iii.383 sq. ˚abhijātika “of black birth,” of low social grade DN iii.251 = AN iii.384; Snp 563; cp. Thag 833 and J.P.T.S. 1893, 11; in the sense of “evil disposition” at Ja v.87 (expld as kāḷaka-sabhāva).

4. of dark, evil actions or qualities: ˚dhamma AN v.232 = Dhp 87; DN iii.82; Snp 967; Pp 30; Mil 200, Mil 337; ˚paṭipadā Ja i.105, and ˚magga the evil way AN v.244, AN v.278; ˚bhāvakara causing a low (re-)birth Ja iv.9 (+ pāpa-kammāni), and in same context as dhamma combd with ˚sukka at AN iv.33; Snp 526 (where kaṇhā˚ for kaṇha˚) Mil 37; ˚kamma “black action” MN i.39; ˚vipāka black result, 4 kinds of actions and 4 results, viz kaṇha˚, sukka˚, kaṇha-sukka˚, akaṇha-asukka˚; DN iii.230 = MN i.389 sq. = AN ii.230 sq.; Ne 232. akaṇha 1. not dark, i.e. light, in ˚netta with bright eyes, Ep of King Pingala-netta Ja ii.242 in contrast with Māra (although pingala-cakkhu is also Ep. of Māra or his representatives, cp. Ja v.42; Pv ii.41).

2. not evil i.e. good AN ii.230, AN ii.231atikaṇha very dark Vin iv.7 sukaṇha id. see above ii.2.

cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa, Lith. kérszas

Kata

(& sometimes; kaṭa ) done, worked, made. Extremely rare as v. trs. in the common meaning of E. make, Ger. machen, or Fr. faire (see the cognate kapp and jan, also uppajjati & vissajjati); its proper sphere of application is either ethical (as pāpaṃ, kusalaṃ kammaṃ: cp. ii.1 b) or in such combinations, where its original meaning of “built, prepared, worked out” is still preserved (cp. i.1 a nagara, and 2 a).

I. As verb-determinant (predicative).

1. in verbal function (Pass.) with nominal determination “done made” (a) in predicative (epithetic) position: Dhp 17 (pāpaṃ me kataṃ evil has been done by me), 68 (tañ ca kammaṃ kataṃ), 150 (aṭṭhīnaṃ nagaraṃ kataṃ a city built of bones, of the body), 173 (yassa pāpaṃ kataṃ kammaṃ)-(b) in absolute (prothetic) position, often with expression of the agent in instr. DN i.84 = DN i.177 = MN i.40 = Snp p.16 (in formula kataṃ karanīyaṃ, etc., done is what had to be done, cp. arahant ii.A.); Vin iii.72 (kataṃ mayā kalyāṇaṃ akataṃ mayā pāpaṃ); Pv i.55 (amhākaṃ katā pūjā done to us is homage) ■ So also in composition (˚-), e.g. (nahāpakehi) ˚parikammatā the preparations (being) finished (by the barbers) Ja vi.145 (tena) ˚paricaya the acquaintance made (with him Vv-a 24; Pv-a 4; (tattha) ˚paricayatā the acquaintance (with that spot) Vv-a 331; (tesaṃ) ˚pubba done before DN ii.75 = AN iv.17; (kena) Ja vi.575; ˚matta (made drunk Thag 199; (cira) ˚saṃsagga having (long) been in contact with, familiar Ja iii.63 (and a˚). 2. in adj (med-passive) function (kaṭa & kata); either passive made, or made of; done by = being like, consisting of or medio-reflexive: one who has done, having done also “with” (i.e. this or that action done) ■ (a) in pregnant meaning: prepared, cultivated, trained, skilled kaṭ-âkaṭa prepared & natural Vin i.206 (of yūsa) akaṭa natural ibid., not cultivated (of soil) Vin i.48 Vin ii.209; DN-a i.78, DN-a i.98; untrained Ja iii.57, Ja iii.58˚atta selfpossessed disciplined Ja vi.296; ˚indiya trained in his senses Thag 725; ˚ūpāsana skilled, esp. in archery MN i.82; SN i.62; AN ii.48 = AN iv.429; SN i.99; Ja iv.211; Mil 352, ˚kamma practised, skilled Ja v.243; of a servant SN i.205 (read āse for ase), of a thief AN iii.102 (cp. below ii.1 a); ˚phaṇa having (i.e. with) its hood erected, of a snake Ja vi.166; ˚buddhi of trained mind clever Ja iii.58; a˚ ibid.; ˚mallaka of made-up teeth, an artificial back-scratcher Vin ii.316; a˚ not artificially made, the genuine article Vin ii.106; ˚yogga trained serviceable SN i.99; a˚ useless SN i.98. ˚rūpa done naturally, spontaneously Ja v.317 (expld by ˚jāniya ˚sabhāva); ˚veṇī having (i.e. with) the hair done up into a chignon Ja v.431; ˚hattha (one) who has exercised his hands, dexterous, skilful, esp. in archery MN i.82; SN i.62, SN i.98; SN ii.266; AN ii.48; Ja iv.211,; v.41; vi.448; Mil 353; Dhp-a i.358; a˚ unskilled, awkward SN i.98 su˚ well-trained Ja v.41 (cp. ˚upāsana), ˚hatthika an artificial or toy-elephant Ja vi.551 ■ (b) in ordinary meaning: made or done; ˚kamma the deed done (in a former existence) Ja i.167; Vv-a 252; Pv-a 10; ˚piṭṭha made of flour (dough) Pv-a 16 (of a doll); ˚bhāva the performance or happening of Ja iii.400; Mhbv 33 ˚saṅketa (one who has made an agreement) Ja v.436-(c) with adverbial determination (su˚, du˚; cp. dūrato puro, atta, sayaṃ, & ii.2 c): sukata well laid out, of a road Ja vi.293, well built, of a cart Snp 300 = Snp 304; Ja iv.395, well done, i.e. good AN i.102 (˚kamma-kārin doing good works). -dukkata badly made, of a robe Vin iv.279 (ṭ), badly done, i.e. evil AN i.102 (˚kamma kārin) sukata-dukkata good & evil (˚kammāni deeds) DN i.27 DN i.55 = SN iv.351; Mil 5, Mil 25. 3. as noun (nt.) kataṃ that which has been done, the deed ■ (a) absolute: Ja iii.26 (katassa appaṭikāraka not reciprocating the deed) v.434 (kataṃ anukaroti he imitates what has been done kat-ākataṃ what has been done & left undone Vin iv.211; katāni akatāni ca deeds done & not done Dhp 50 ■ (b); with adv. determination (su˚, du˚) sukataṃ goodness (in moral sense) Snp 240; Dhp 314 dukkataṃ badness Vin i.76; Vin ii.106; Dhp 314; dukkatakārin doing wrong Snp 664.

II. As noun-determinant (attributive) in composition (var. applications & meanings).

1.; As 1st pt. of compd: Impersonal, denoting the result or finishing of that which is implied in the object with ref. to the act or state resulting, i.e. “so and so made or done” or personal, denoting the person affected by or concerned with the act. The lit. translation would be “having become one who has done” (act.: see a), or “to whom has been done” (pass.: see b) ■ (a) medio-active Temporal: the action being done, i.e. “after.” The noun-determinates usually bear a relation to time, especially to meal-times, as kat-anna-kicca having finished his meal Dāvs i.59; ˚bhatta-kicca after the meal Ja iv.123; Pv-a 93; ˚purebhatta-kicca having finished the duties of the morning DN-a i.45 sq.; Snp-a 131 sq.; ˚pātarāsa breakfast Ja i.227; Dhp-a i.117, a before br. AN iv.64; ˚pātarāsa-bhatta id. Ja vi.349 ˚ānumodana after thanking (for the meal) Ja i.304 ˚bhatt’ānumodana after expressing satisfaction with the meal Pv-a 141. In the same application: kat-okāsa having made its appearance, of kamma Vv 329 (cp Vv-a 113); Pv-a 63; ˚kamma (-cora) (a thief) who has just “done the deed,” i.e. committed a theft Ja iii.34 Vism 180 (katakammā corā & akata˚ thieves who have finished their “job” & those who have not); Dhp-a ii.38 (corehi katakammaṃ the job done by the th.), cp above i.2 a; ˚kāla “done their time,” deceased, of Petas Ja iii.164 (pete kālakate); Pv-a 29, cp. kāla ˚cīvara after finishing his robe Vin i.255, Vin i.265; ˚paccuggamana having gone forth to meet Ja iii.93. ˚paṇidhāna from the moment of his making an earnest resolve (to become a Buddha) Vv-a 3; ˚pariyosita finished, ready, i.e. after the end was made Vv-a 250 ˚buddha-kicca after he had done the obligations of a Buddha Vv-a 165, Vv-a 319; DN-a i.2; ˚maraṇa after dying i.e. dead Pv-a 29; ˚massu-kamma after having his beard done Ja v.309 (see note to ii.1 b) ■ Qualitative: with ethical import, the state resulting out of action i.e. of such habit, or “like, of such character.” The qualification is either made by kamma, deed, work, or kicca, what can be or ought to be done, or any other specified action, as ˚pāpa-kamma one who has done wrong Dhp-a i.360 (& a˚); ˚karaṇīya one who has done all that could be done, one who is in the state of perfection (an Arahant), in formula arahaṃ khīṇ’āsavo vusitavā ohitabhāro (cp. above i.1 b & arahant; ii.A MN i.4, MN i.235; Iti 38; Mil 138; ˚kicca having performed his obligations, perfected, Ep. of an Arahant, usually in combn with anāsava SN i.47, SN i.178; Dhp 386; Pv ii.615 Thig 337, as adj.: kata-kiccāni hi arahato indriyāni Ne 20; ˚kiccatā the perfection of Arahantship Mil 339 ■ With other determinations: -āgasa one who has done evil Sdhp 294. -ādhikāra having exerted oneself one who strives after the right path Ja i.56; Mil 115 -āparādha guilty, a transgressor Ja iii.42. -ābhinihāra (one) who has formed the resolution (to become a Buddha) Ja i.2; Dhp-a i.135. -ābhinivesa (one) who studies intently, or one who has made a strong determination Ja i.110 (& a˚).; -ussāha energetic Sdhp 127 -kalyāṇa in passage kata-kalyāno kata-kusalo katabhīruttāṇo akata-pāpo akata-luddho (luddo) [: ˚thaddho It] akata-kibbiso having done good, of good character, etc. AN ii.174 = Vin iii.72 = Iti 25 = Dhs-a 383; Pv-a 174; also Pass. to whom something good has been done Ja i.137; Ja iii.12; Pv ii.99; akata-kalyāṇa a man of bad actions Iti 25; Pv ii.79. -kibbisa a guilty person MN i.39; Vin iii.72 (a˚), of beings tormented in Purgatory Pv iv.77; Pv-a 59. -kusala a good man: see ˚kalyāṇa -thaddha hard-hearted, unfeeling, cruel: see ˚kalyāṇa -nissama untiring, valiant, bold Ja v.243. -parappavāda practised in disputing with others DN-a i.117. -pāpa an evil-doer Iti 25; Pv ii.79 (+ akata-kalyāṇa); Pv-a 5 a˚: see ˚kalyāṇa. -puñña one who has done good deeds a good man DN ii.144; Dhp 16, Dhp 18, Dhp 220; Pv iii.52; Mil 129; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 176; a˚ one who has not done good (in previous lives) Mil 250; Vv-a 94. -puññatā the fact of having done good deeds DN iii.276 (pubbe in former births) AN ii.31; Snp 260, cp. Kp-a 132, Kp-a 230; Ja ii.114. -bahukāra having done much favour, obliging Dāvs iv.39. -bhīruttāṇa one who has offered protection to the fearful see ˚kalyāṇa. -bhūmikamma one who has laid the ground-work (of sanctification) Mil 352. -ludda cruel MN iii.165; a˚ gentle Ne 180; cp ˚kalyāṇa -vināsaka (one) who has caused ruin Ja i.467. -vissāsa trusting, confiding Ja i.389. -ssama painstaking, taking trouble Sdhp 277 (and a˚) ■ (b) medio-passive: The state as result of an action, which affected the person concerned with the action (reflexive or passive), or “possessed of, afflicted or affected with.” In this application it is simply periphrastic for the ordinary Passive ■ Note. In the case of the noun being incapable of functioning as verb (when primary), the object in question is specified by ˚kamma or ˚kicca, both of which are then only supplementary to the initial kata˚, e.g. kata-massu-kamma “having had the beard (-doing done,” as diff. fr. secondary nouns (i.e. verb-derivations) e.g. kat-âbhiseka “having had the anointing done ■ In this application: ˚citta-kamma decorated, variegated Dhp-a i.192; ˚daṇḍa-kamma afflicted with punishment (= daṇḍāyita punished) Vin i.76; ˚massu-kamma with trimmed beard, after the beard-trimming Ja v.309 (cp. Ja iii.11 & karana) ■ Various combinations:; katañjalin with raised hands, as a token of veneration or supplication Snp 1023; Thig 482; Ja i.17 = Bv 24, Bv 27; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 141; Vv-a 78. -attha one who has received benefits Ja i.378. -ānuggaha assisted, aided Ja ii.449; Vv-a 102. -ābhiseka anointed, consecrated Mvu 26, Mvu 6 -ūpakāra assisted, befriended Ja i.378; Pv-a 116. -okāsa one who has been given permission, received into audience, or permitted to speak Vin i.7; DN ii.39, DN ii.277; Snp 1030, Snp 1031 (˚âva˚); Ja v.140; Ja vi.341; Mil 95. -jātihiṅgulika done up, adorned with pure vermilion Ja iii.303 -nāmadheyya having received a name, called Ja v.492 -paṭisanthāra having been received kindly Ja vi.160; Dhp-a i.80. -pariggaha being taken to wife, married to (instr.) Pv-a 161 (& a˚).; -paritta one on whom a protective spell has been worked, charm-protected Mil 152 -bhaddaka one to whom good has been done Pv-a 116 -sakkāra honoured, revered Ja v.353; Mvu 9, Mvu 8 (su˚) -saṅgaha one who has taken part in the redaction of the Scriptures Mvu 5, Mvu 106. -sannāha clad in armour Dhp-a i.358. -sikkha (having been) trained Mil 353

2. As 2nd pt. of compd: Denoting the performance of the verbal notion with ref. to the object affected by it i.e. simply a Passive of the verb implied in the determinant with emphasis of the verb-notion: “made so & so, used as, reduced to” (garukata = garavita). (a) with nouns (see s. v.) e.g. , anabhāva-kata, kavi˚ kāla-vaṇṇa˚ (reduced to a black colour) Vin i.48 Vin ii.209, tāl’āvatthu˚, pamāṇa˚, bahuli˚, yāni˚, sankhār’ûpekkhā˚ etc ■ (b) with adjectives, e.g. garu˚, bahu˚-(c) with adverbial substitutes, e.g. atta˚, para (paraṃ˚), sacchi˚, sayaṃ, etc.

pp. of karoti

Kataka

(nt.) a scrubber, used after a bath Vin ii.129, Vin ii.143; cp. Vin. Texts ii.318.

fr. kantati2

Kataññu

(adj.) lit. knowing, i.e. acknowledging what has been done (to one), i.e. grateful often in combn with katavedin grateful and mindful of benefits SN ii.272; AN i.87 = Pp 26; Vv 8127 Sdhp 509, Sdhp 524. akataññu 1. ungrateful SN i.225; Ja iii.26 (= kata-guṇaṃ ajānanto C.), 474; iv.124; Pv-a 116; Bdhd 81.

2. (separate akata-ññu) knowing the Uncreated, i.e. knowing Nibbāna Dhp 97, Dhp 383; Dhp-a ii.188; Dhp-a iv.139 ■ akataññu-rūpa (& ˚sambhava of ungrateful nature Ja iv.98, Ja iv.99.

cp. Sk. kṛtajña

Kataññutā

(f.) gratefulness (defined at Kp-a 144 as katassa jānanatā) Snp 265; Ja i.122 (T. ˚nā v.l. ˚tā); iii.25; Pv ii.97; Vv-a 63; Sdhp 497, Sdhp 540. In combn with kataveditā SN ii.272; AN i.61; AN ii.226, AN ii.229 kataññū-kataveditā Ja iii.492. -akataññutā ungratefulness in combn with akataveditā AN i.61; AN iii.273; Ja v.419; as one of the 4 offences deserving of Niraya AN ii.226.

abstr. fr. last

Katatta

(nt.) the doing of, performance of, only in abl. katattā DN ii.213; AN i.56; Ja iii.128; Dhs 431, Dhs 654; Snp-a 356; Dhp-a iii.154 Dhp-a iv.142. Used adverbially in meaning of “owing to, on account of” Mil 275; Dhs-a 262; Mvu 3, Mvu 40. -akatattā through non-performance of, in absence or in default of AN i.56; Pv-a 69, Pv-a 154.

abstr. fr. kata, cp. Sk. kṛtatvaṃ

Katana

(nt.) a bad deed, injuring, doing evil (cp. kaṭana) Ja iv.42 (yam me akkhāsi… katanaṃ kataṃ), cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1893, 15.

fr. kata

Katama

(adj.) which, which one (of two or more) Vin ii.89; MN i.7; Ja i.172; Mil 309; Pv-a 27. In some cases merely emphatic for ko, e.g. Vin i.30 (katamena maggena āgato?); DN i.197 (katamo so atta-paṭilābho?); Ja i.97; Snp 995; Mil 51 ■ instr katamena (scil. maggena) adv. by which way, how Mil 57, Mil 58.

cp. Vedic katama, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., in function = katara, cp antama → antara, Lat. dextimus → dexter

Katara

(adj.) which one (of a certain number, usually of two) Ja i.4; Pv-a 119 Often only emphatic for ko, e.g. Ja i.298 (kataraṃ upaddavaṃ na kareyya), and used uninflected in cpds. as katara-geha Ja iii.9; ˚gandhaṃ Ja vi.336; ˚divasaṃ Ja ii.251; ˚nagarato (from what city) Dhp-a i.390; ˚nāma (kataraṃnāma, adj.) (of what name) ibid ■ katarasmiṃ magge in which way, how? Ja iv.110.

Vedic katara, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., cp. Gr. πότερος, Lat. uter

Katavedin

(adj.) mindful, grateful SN i.225; Pp 26; Ja i.424; Ja ii.26.

kata + vedin, see kataññu

Kataveditā

(f.) gratefulness: see kataññutā.

abstr. fr. last

Katāvin

(adj.-n.) one who has done (what could be done), used like katakicca to denote one who has attained Arahantship SN i.14; Mil 264.

secondary formation fr. kata

Kati

(indecl.) how many? Vin i.83 (k. sikkhāpadāni), 155; SN i.3 (˚sangâtiga having overcome how many attachments ), 70; Snp 83, Snp 960, Snp 1018; Pts ii.72; Mil 78; Dhp-a i.7, Dhp-a i.188; Pv-a 74.

interr. pron.; used like Lat. quot. Already Vedic.

Katikā

(f.) 1. agreement, contract, pact Vin i.153 (T. kātikā ), 309; Ja vi.71; Mil 171, Mil 360–⁠2. talking, conversation, talk (adhammikā k., cp kathikā & kathā) Ja ii.449katikaṃ karoti to make an arrangement or agreement Vin iii.104, Vin iii.220, Vin iii.230 Ja i.81; Ja iv.267; Dhp-a i.91; Vv-a 46. In cpds. katika˚; e.g. ˚vatta observance of an agreement, ˚ṃ karoti to be faithful to a pact Dhp i.8; ˚ṃ bhindati to break an agreement Ja vi.541; ˚saṇṭhāna the entering of an agreement Vin ii.76, Vin ii.208: iii.160.

to katheti or karoti?

Katipaya

(adj.) some, several; a few (in cpds. or in pl.) Ja i.230, Ja i.487; Ja iii.280, Ja iii.419; Ja iv.125 Ja v.162; Pv ii.920 (= appake only a few); Dhp-a i.94 (very few); Pv-a 46. In sg. little, insignificant Vv 5320 (= appikā f.). ˚vāre a few times, a few turns Ja v.132 Ja vi.52; Pv-a 135; Mhbv 3.

cp. Sk. katipaya

Katipāhan

(adv.) (for) a few days Vin iii.14; Ja i.152, Ja i.298, Ja i.466; Ja ii.38 Ja iii.48; Ja iv.147; Mvu 7, Mvu 38; Pv-a 145, Pv-a 161; Vv-a 222 katipāhena (instr.) within a few days Mvu 17, Mvu 41; Dhp-a i.344; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 161. katipāh’accayena after (the lapse of) a few days Ja i.245; Dhp-a i.175; Pv-a 47.

katipaya + ahan, contracted, see aha2

Katima

, f. katimī in k. pakkhassa which (of many other) day of the half-month Vin i.117.

num. ord. fr. kati

Kativassa

(adj.) 1. (having) how many years, how old? Ja v.331.

2. (having had) how many rainy seasons (in the bhikkhu’s career) of how many years’ seniority? Vin i.86; Ud 59; Mil 28; Dhp-a i.37.

kati + vassa

Katividha

(adj.) of how many kinds Vism 84.

kati + vidha, for Vedic katidhā

Kate

(adv.) for the sake of, on behalf of; with acc. maṃ k. Ja iv.14; with gen. maṃsassa k. Ja v.500.

loc. of kata

Katta

is represented in Pali by kanta2; katta being found only in cpd. pari˚.

pp. of kantati2; cp. Sk. kṛtta

Kattabba

(adj.) 1. to be done, to be made or performed; that which might or could be done Dhp 53; Ja i.77, Ja i.267; Ja v.362.

2. (nt.) that which is to be done, obligation, duty Thag 330; Ja ii.154; Ja v.402; Dhp-a i.211akattabba (adj.) not to be done Ja iii.131 Ja v.147; (nt.) that which ought not to be done Ja v.402 kattabb’ ākattabba to be done and not to be done Ja i.387. kattabba-yuttaka 1. (adj.) fit or proper to be done Dhp-a i.13.

2. (nt.) duty, obligation Ja iii.9 Ja vi.164; Dhp-a i.180; (the last) duties towards the deceased Ja i.431 ■ Cp. kātabba.

grd. of karoti

Kattabbaka

(nt.) task, duty Thag 330.

fr. last

Kattabbatā

(f.) fitness, duty, that which is to be done Ja ii.179 (iti-˚āya because I had to do it thus).

fr. kattabba

Kattar

one who makes or creates, a maker, doer; in foll. construction. I. Dependent Either in verb-function with acc., as n. agent to all phrases with karoti e.g. pañhaṃ karoti to put a question, pañhaṃ kattā one who puts a question or in n. function with gen., e.g. mantānaṃ kattāro the authors of the Mantas, or in cpd. rāja-kattāro makers of kings ■ II. Dependent. as n. kattā the doer kattā hoti no bhāsitā he is a man of action, and not of words.

1. (indef.) one who does anything (with acc. AN i.103; AN ii.67; AN v.347, AN v.350 sq.; (with gen.) Ja i.378 Ja iii.136 (one who does evil, in same meaning at iii.26 C. akataññū, cp. J.P.T.S. 1893, 15: not to kṛt! ) iv.98 (expld as kata by C); v.258; Mil 25, Mil 296; Bdhd 85 sq.

2. an author, maker, creator DN i.18 (of Brahmā: issaro, k., nimmātā), 104 (mantānaṃ); AN ii.102; Dhp i.111.

3. an officer of a king, the king’s messenger Ja v.220 (= 225); vi.259, 268, 302, 313, 492 Note. At Ja v.225 & vi.302 the voc. is katte (of a-decl.) cp. also nom. ˚katta for ˚kattā in salla-katta.

4. as t.t.g. Name of the instr. case Vv-a 97; Kacc 136, 143, 277.

n. ag. fr. karoti, cp. Sk. kartṛ

Kattara

(adj.) (only˚-) ˚daṇḍa a walking-stick or staff (of an ascetic) Vin i.188 Vin ii.76 = Vin ii.208 sq.; Vin iii.160; Ja i.9; Ja v.132; Ja vi.52, Ja vi.56, Ja vi.520 Vism 91, Vism 125, Vism 181. ˚yaṭṭhi = prec. Ja ii.441; DN-a i.207 DN-a iii.140. ˚ratha an old (?) chariot Ja iii.299. ˚suppa a winnowing basket Vin i.269 = Dhp-a i.174 (˚e pakkhipitvā sankāra-kūṭe chaḍḍehi). Kattari & i

cp. Sk. kṛtvan (?), in diff. meaning

Kattari & ˚ī

(f.) scissors, shears Ja iii.298, with ref. to the “shears” of a crab, “as with scissors”: cp Vin. Texts iii.138 (see next).

to kantati2

Kattarikā

(f.) scissors, or a knife Vin ii.134; Ja i.223.

fr. last

Kattikā

(f.) (& ˚kattika ) Name of a month (Oct ■ Nov.), during which the full moon is near the constellation of Pleiades It is the last month of the rainy season, terminating on the full moon day of Kattikā (kattika-puṇṇamā). This season is divided into 5 months: Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa Bhaddara (Poṭṭhapāda), Assayuja, Kattikā; the month Assayuja is also called pubba-kattikā, whereas the fifth K., is also known as pacchima-kattikā; both are comprised in the term k ■ dvemāsika. Bhikkhus retiring for the first 3 months of the Vassa (rainy season) are kattika-temāsikā, if they include the 4th, they are k ■ cātumāsikā. The full moon of Assayuja is termed k ■ temāsinī; that of Kattika is k ■ cātumāsinī. See Vinaya passages & cp. nakkhatta ■ Ne 143 (kattiko v.l. kattikā).;

-cātumāsinī see above Vin iii.263. -coraka a thief who in the month of K., after the distribution of robes attacks bhikkhus Vin iii.262. -chaṇa a festival held at the end of Lent on the full moon of pubba-kattikā and coinciding with the Pavāraṇā Ja i.433; Ja ii.372 Ja v.212 sq.; Mvu 17, Mvu 17. -temāsi (-puṇṇamā) (the full moon) of pubbakattikā Vin iii.261; Mvu 17, Mvu 1 (˚puṇṇamāsī). -māsa the month K. Ja ii.372; Mvu 12, Mvu 2 (kattike māse). -sukkapakkha the bright fortnight of K. Mvu 17, Mvu 64.

cp. Sk. kṛttikā f. pl. the Pleiades & BSk. karthika

Kattu˚

1. base of inf. kattuṃ (of karoti), in compds ˚kamyatā willingness to do something Vb 208; Vism 320, Vism 385; Dhp-a iii.289; ˚kāma desirous to do Vin ii.226 ˚kāmatā desire to do or to perform Vism 466; Vv-a 43–⁠2. base of kattar in compn.

Kattha

(adv.) where? where to whither? Vin i.83, Vin i.107; Vin ii.76; DN i.223; Snp 487, Snp 1036; Ja iii.76; Pv ii.916; Dhp-a i.3 ■ k. nu kho where then where I wonder? DN i.215 sq., Pv-a 22 (with Pot. -katthaci(d) (indef.) anywhere, at some place or other Ja i.137; Ja v.468; wherever, in whatever place Mil 366; Pv-a 284; Kp-a 247; Ja iii.229; Ja iv.9, Ja iv.45; as katthacid eva J. iv. 92; Pv-a 173. Sometimes doubled katthaci katthaci in whatsoever place Ja iv.341na k. nowhere MN i.424; Mil 77; Vv-a 14.

-ṭhita fig. in what condition or state? DN ii.241 (corresp. with ettha); Ja iv.110. -vāsa in what residence Snp 412. -vāsika residing where? Ja ii.128, Ja ii.273.

der. fr. interr. base ka˚; (kad2), whereas Sk. kutra is der. fr. base ku˚; cp. kuttha

Katthati

to boast Snp 783 (ppr. med. akatthamāna). Cp. pavikatthita.

cp. Sk. katthate, etym. unexpld

Katthitar

(n. ag. fr. katthati] a boaster Snp 930.

Katthin

(adj.) boasting AN v.157 (+ vikatthin).

fr. katth

Katthu

(?) a jackal, in ˚soṇā j. & dogs Ja vi.538 (for koṭṭhu˚).

Kathaṃ

(adv.) dubit. interr. part. 1. how; with ind. pres. Pv-a 6 (k. puriso paṭilabhati), or with fut. & cond. Ja i.222; Ja ii.159 (k. tattha gamissāmi); vi.500; Pv-a 54 (na dassāmi)

2. why for what reason? Ja iii.81; Ja v.506. Combined with -ca Vin i.114; Vin ii.83. -carahi DN ii.192. -nu &-nu kho; Vin ii.26, Ja iii.99; iv. 339; Nd ii.189, see also evaṃ nu kho. -pana DN ii.163. -su Nd ii.189. -hi Ja iv.339; Dhp-a i.432. -hi nāma Vin i.45; Vin ii.105; Vin iii.137; Vin iv.300 all in the same meaning; -ci (kathañci) scarcely, with difficulty Thag 456.

-kathā “saying how? how?” i.e. doubt, uncertainty unsettled mind (cp. kaṅkhā); expl. as vicikicchā dukkhe kankhā Nd ii.190; DN ii.282; Snp 500, Snp 866, Snp 1063 Snp 1088; Dhp-a iv.194; as adj. and at end of cpd. ˚-katha e.g. vigata˚ (in phrase tiṇṇa-vicikiccha… vesārajjappatta) DN i.110 = Vin i.12; tiṇṇa˚ (+ visalla) Snp 17 Snp 86, Snp 367. k-k-salla “the arrow of doubt” DN ii.283 (vicikicchā + ). -kathin having doubts, unsettled uncertain DN ii.287; MN i.8; Nd ii.191; Dhs-a 352; ; free from doubt, Ep. of Arahant (expld DN-a i.211: “not saying how and how is this?”); MN i.108; Iti 49; Snp 534 Snp 635, Snp 868, Snp 1064; in phrases tiṇṇa-vicikiccho viharati akathankathī kusalesu dhammesu DN i.71 = Pp 59 jhāyī anejo a˚ Dhp 414 (: Dhp-a iv.194) = Snp 638. -kara (adj.) how acting, what doing? k. ahaṃ no nirayam pateyyaṃ (“τί ποι ̈ων μακάριος ε ̓́σομαι”) Ja iv.339; Snp 376; Ja iv.75; Ja v.148. -jīvin leading what kind of life? Snp 181. -dassin holding what views? Snp 848 (see ˚sīla). -pakāra of what kind Vin i.358; Snp 241 (:kathappakāra). -paṭipanna going what way, i.e. how acting? DN ii.277, DN ii.279, DN ii.281. -bhāvita how cultivated or practised? SN v.119. -bhūta “how being,” of what sort, what like DN ii.139, DN ii.158; -rūpa of what kind MN i.218; AN i.249; AN iii.35; Ja iii.525. -vaṇṇa of what appearance, what like? DN ii.244. -vidha what sort of Ja v.95, Ja v.146; Dhs-a 305. -sameta how constituted Snp 873. -sīla of what character or conduct? how in his morality? Snp 848 (kathaṃdassī kathaṃsīlo upasanto ti vuccati).

cp. Vedic kathaṃ & kathā

Kathana

(nt.) 1. conversing, talking Ja i.299; Ja iii.459; Ja vi.340.

2. telling i.e. answering solving (a question) Ja v.66 (pañha˚).

3. preaching Dhp-a i.7.

4. reciting, narrating Kacc. 130. Cp. kathita- akathana not talking or telling Ja i.420; Ja vi.424; not speaking fr. anger Ja iv.108; Dhp-a i.440.

-ākāra, in ˚ṃ karoti to enter into conversation with Ja vi.413. -samattha able to speak (of the tongue Ja iii.459; able to talk or converse with (saddhiṃ Ja vi.340. -sīla (one) in the habit of talking, garrulous Ja i.299; a˚ Ja i.420.

fr. kath, see katheti

Kathala

(potsherd) spelling at Vism 261 for kaṭhala.

Kathali

(metri causâ) = next, in the Uddāna at Vin ii.234

Kathalika

(nt.), always in combn pād’odaka pāda-pīṭha pāda-k˚: either a cloth to wipe the feet with after washing them, or a footstool Vin i.9, Vin i.47 Vin ii.22 sq., 210, 216. At Vv-a 8 however with pāda-pīṭha expld as a footstool (pāda-ṭhāpana-yoggaṃ dārukhaṇḍaṃ āsanaṃ). Bdhgh (on CV ii.1.1) expld pādapīṭha as a stool to put the washed foot on, pāda- kathalika as a stool to put the unwashed foot on, or a cloth to rub the feet with (ghaṃsana).

the meaning “bowl” seems to be preferable to Bdhgh’s forced interpretation as “towel.”

der. uncertain

Kathā

(f.) 1. talk talking, conversation AN i.130; Pv-a 39. So in antarā˚ DN i.179; Snp p.107, Snp p.115; cp. sallāpa. Also in tiracchāna˚; low, common speech, comprising 28 kinds of conversational talk a bhikkhu should not indulge in enumd in full at DN i.7 = DN i.178 = DN iii.36 & passim (e.g. S; v.419: corr. suddha˚ to yuddha˚!; AN v.128 = Nd ii.192) ref. to at AN iii.256; AN v.185; Ja i.58; Pp 35. Similarly in gāma˚; Snp 922; viggāhikā k. AN iv.87; Snp 930. Ten good themes of conversation (kathā-vatthūni) are enumd at MN iii.113 = AN iii.117 = AN iv.357 = AN v.67; Mil 344 similarly dhammī kathā AN ii.51; AN iv.307; AN v.192; Snp 325 pavattanī k. AN i.151; yutta kathāyaṃ Snp 826; sammodanīyā k. in salutation formula s˚ṃ k˚ṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā DN i.52, DN i.108, etc.; AN v.185; Snp 419, pp. 86, 93 107, 116.

2. speech, sermon, discourse, lecture Vin i.203, Vin i.290 (˚ṃ karoti to discuss); AN iii.174; iv. 358 Freq. in anupubbi˚; a sermon in regular succession graduated sermon, discussing the 4 points of the ladder of “holiness,” viz. dānakathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚ (see anupubba) Vin i.15; AN iii.184; AN iv.186, AN iv.209, AN iv.213; Dhp-a i.6; Vv-a 66.

3. a (longer) story, often with vitthāra˚; an account in detail, e.g. Pv-a 19. bāhira˚ profane story Kp-a 48.

4. word, words, advice: ˚ṃ gaṇhāti to accept an advice Ja ii.173; Ja iii.424.

5 explanation, exposition, in aṭṭha˚; (q.v.), cp. gati Pts ii.72.

6. discussion, in ˚vatthu (see below) Mvu 5 Mvu 138. -dukkathā harmful conversation or idle talk AN iii.181; opp. su˚; AN iii.182. -kathaṃ vaḍḍheti “to increase the talk,” to dispute sharply Ja i.404; Ja v.412 ˚ṃ samuṭṭhāpeti to start a conversation Ja i.119; iv. 73-At the end of cpds. (as adj.) ˚kathā e.g. chinna Snp 711; ṭhita˚ DN-a i.73; madhura˚ Ja iii.342; Ja vi.255.

-ābhiññāṇa recollection due to speech Mil 78, Mil 79 -ojja (k˚-udya, to vad ) a dispute, quarrel Snp 825, Snp 828 -dhamma a topic of conversation DN-a i.43. -nigghosa the sound of praise, flattery Ja ii.350. -pavatti the course of a conversation Ja i.119; Dhp-a i.249; Mhbv 61 -pābhata subject of a conversation, story Ja i.252, Ja i.364 -bāhulla abundance of talk, loquacity AN iv.87. -magga narrative, account, history Ja i.2. -rasa the sweetness of (this) speech Mil 345. -vatthu 1. subject of a discourse or discussion, argument MN i.372; MN ii.127, MN ii.132 There are 10 enumd at AN iv.352, AN iv.357 (see kathā) and at Vism 19 as qualities of a kalyāṇa-mitta, referred to at AN v.67, AN v.129; Vism 127; Dhp-a iv.30. Three are given at DN iii.220 = AN i.197. ˚kusala well up in the subjects of discussion Vv-a 354.

2. Name of the fifth book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, the seven constituents of which are enumd at var. places (e.g. DN-a i.17; Mhbv 94, where Kvu takes the 3rd place), see also J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888 1896. -samuṭṭhāna the arising of a discussion Mvu 5 Mvu 138. -samuṭṭhāpana starting a conversation Ja i.119 Ja iii.278; Dhp-a i.250. -sampayoga conversational intercourse AN i.197. -sallāpa talk, conversation Vin i.77; DN i.89 sq., 107 sq.; ii.150; MN i.178; AN ii.197; AN v.188; Ud 40; Ja ii.283; Mil 31; DN-a i.276 (expld as kathanapaṭikathana); Dhp-a ii.91 (˚ṃ karoti) Vv-a 153.

fr. kath to tell or talk, see katheti; nearest synonym is lap, cp. vāc’ âbhilāpa & sallāpa

Kathāpeti

Caus. ii. of katheti (q.v.).

Kathālikā

(f.) kettle, cooking pot; in daṇḍa˚ (a pot with a handle) Vin i.286 (v.l. kathālaka), and meda˚ AN iv.377; Dhp-a ii.179.

fr. kuth, to boil

Kathika

(adj.) (-˚) relating, speaking, conversing about, expounding, in cpds. citta˚ Thig 449 (cp. citra-kathin); (a) tiracchāna˚; AN iv.153 dhamma˚; Ja i.148; Ja iii.342; Ja iv.2 (˚thera); vi.255 (mahā˚) as noun a preacher, speaker, expounder AN iii.174 Mvu 14, Mvu 64 (mahā˚).

fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathaka

Kathikā

(f.) agreement Dpvs 19, 22; see katikā.

fr. last?

Kathita

said, spoken, related Ja ii.310; Ja iv.73; Ja v.493. su˚; well said or told J. iv.73. As nt. with instr. Ja iv.72 (tena kathitaṃ the discourse (given) by him).

pp. of katheti, cp. Sk. kathita

Kathin

(adj.) (-˚) speaking; one who speaks, a speaker, preacher Ja i.148 (dhamma-kathikesu citrakathī); Mil 90, Mil 348 (˚seṭṭha best of speakers). See also kathaṃ-kathin.

cp. kathika

Katheti

(v. den. fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathayate] aor. kathesi, inf. kathetuṃ & kathetave (Vin i.359); Pass. kathīyati & katheti (Mil 22, cp. Trenckner,; Notes 122); ppr Pass. kathīyamāna & kacchamāna (A.; iii.181); grd kathetabba, kathanīya & kaccha,

1. to speak, say tell, relate (in detail: vitthārato Pv-a 77). mā kathesi (= mā bhaṇi) do not speak Pv-a 16 ■ to tell (a story) J.; i.2; iv.137; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13.

2. to converse with J. vi.413; Pv-a 86 (= āmantayi).

3. to report, to inform Ja v.460.

4. to recite Dhp-a i.166.

5. to expound, explain, preach Ja i.30; Mil 131; Dhp-a i.88 Nd ii.s. v.

6. to speak about (with acc.) Vin ii.168

7. to refer to Ja i.307.

8. to answer or solve (a question) Ja i.165; Ja v.66 ■ Caus ii. kathāpeti to make say Mvu 24, Mvu 4 (aor. kathāpayi); Dhp-a ii.35; Kp-a 118.

Kad˚

[old form of interr. pron. nt., equal to kiṃ; cp. (Vedic) kad in kadarthaṃ = kiṃarthaṃ to what purpose orig. “what?” used adverbially; then indef. “any kind of,” as (na) kac(-cana) “not at all”; kac-cid “any kind of; is it anything? what then?” Mostly used in disparaging sense of showing inferiority, contempt, or defectiveness, and equal to kā˚; (in denoting badness or smallness, e.g. kākaṇika, kāpurisa, see also kantāra kappaṭa),; kiṃ˚, ku.˚; For relation of ku → ka cp. kutra → kattha & kadā.;

-anna bad food Kacc 178. -asana id. Kacc 178 -dukkha (?) great evil (= death) Vv-a 316 (expld as maraṇa, cp. kaṭuka).

Kadamba

(cp. Sk. kadamba] the kadamba tree, Nauclea cordifolia (with orange-coloured, fragrant blossoms J. vi.535, 539; Vism 206; Dhp-a i.309 (˚puppha) Mvu 25, Mvu 48 (id.).

Kadara

(adj.) miserable Ja ii.136 (expld as lūkha, kasira).

Kadariya

(adj.) mean, miserly, stingy, selfish; usually expld by thaddhamaccharī (Pv-a 102; Dhp-a iii.189, Dhp-a iii.313), and mentioned with maccharī, freq. also with paribhāsaka SN i.34, SN i.96; AN ii.59; AN iv.79 sq.; Dhp 177, Dhp 223; Ja v.273; Snp 663; Vv 295. As cause of Peta birth freq. in Pv., e.g. i.93; ii.77; iv.148; Pv-a 25, Pv-a 99, Pv-a 236 ■ (nt.) avarice stinginess, selfishness, grouped under macchariya Dhs 1122; Snp 362 (with kodha).

cp. Sk. kadarya, kad + arya?

Kadariyatā

(f.) stinginess, niggardliness DN ii.243; Mil 180; Pv-a 45.

abstr. fr. last

Kadala

(nt.) the plantain tree Kacc 335.

Kadalī1

(f.)

1. the plantain, Musa sapientium. Owing to the softness and unsubstantiality of its trunk it is used as a frequent symbol of unsubstantiality transitoriness and worthlessness. As the plantain or banana plant always dies down after producing fruit, is destroyed as it were by its own fruit, it is used as a simile for a bad man destroyed by the fruit of his own deeds: SN i.154 = Vin ii.188 = SN ii.241 = AN ii.73 = Dhp-a iii.156; cp. Mil 166 ■ as an image of unsubstantiality Cp iii.24. The tree is used as ornament on great festivals: Ja i.11; Ja vi.590 (in simile), 592; Vv-a 31

2. a flag, banner, i.e. plantain leaves having the appearance of banners (-dhaja) Ja v.195; Ja vi.412. In cpds. kadali˚.

-khandha the trunk of the plantain tree, often in similes as symbol of worthlessness, e.g. MN i.233; SN iii.141 = SN iv.167; Vism 479; Nd ii.680 Aii.; Ja vi.442 as symbol of smoothness and beauty of limbs Vv-a 280 -taru the plantain tree Dāvs v.49; -toraṇa a triumphal arch made of pl. stems and leaves Mhbv 169; -patta a pl. leaf used as an improvised plate to eat from Ja v.4; Dhp-a i.59; -phala the fruit of the plantain Ja v.37.

Sk. kadalī

Kadalī2

(f.) a kind of deer, an antelope only in ˚miga Ja v.406, Ja v.416; Ja vi.539; DN-a i.87; and ˚pavara-pacc. attharaṇa (nt.) the hide of the k. deer, used as a rug or cover DN i.7 = AN i.181 = Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169; sim DN ii.187; (adj.) (of pallanka) AN i.137 = AN iii.50 = AN iv.394.

Kadā

(indecl.). interr. adv. when? (very often foll. by fut.) Thag 1091–⁠1106; Ja ii.212; vi. 46; Dhp-a i.33; Pv-a 2 ■ Combd with-ssu Ja v.103, Ja v.215; Ja vi.49 sq -ci [cid] indef.

1. at some time AN iv.101.

2. sometimes Ja i.98; Pv-a 271.

3. once upon a time Dāvs i.30.

4. perhaps, may be Ja i.297; Ja vi.364. + eva kadācideva Vv-a 213; -kadāci kadāci from time to time, every now and then Ja i.216; iv. 120; Dhs-a 238; Pv-a 253. -kadāci karahaci at some time or other, at times AN i.179; Mil 73; Dhp-a iii.362. -na kadāci at no time, never SN i.66; Ja v.434; Ja vi.363; same with mā k Ja vi.310; Mvu 25, Mvu 113; cp. kudācana ■ kadāc -uppattika (adj.) happening only sometimes, occasional Mil 114.

Vedic kadā. Cp. tadā, sadā in Pali, and perhaps Latin quando

Kaddama

mud, mire, filth Nd ii.374 (= panka); Ja i.100; Ja iii.220 (written kadamo in verse and kaddemo in gloss); vi.240, 390; Pv-a 189 (= panka), 215; compared with moral impurities Ja iii.290 & Mil 35.; ; free from mud or dirt clean Vin ii.201, of a lake Ja iii.289; fig. pure of character Ja iii.290. kaddamīkata made muddy or dirty, defiled Ja vi.59 (kilesehi).

-odaka muddy water Vin ii.262; Vism 127. -parikhā a moat filled with mud, as a defence Ja vi.390; -bahula (adj.) muddy, full of mud Dhp-a i.333;

Derivation unknown. Sk. kardama

Kanaka

(nt.) gold, usually as uttatta˚; molten gold; said of the colour of the skin Bv i.59; Pv iii.32; Ja v.416; Pv-a 10 suvaṇṇa).

-agga gold-crested Ja v.156; -chavin of golden complexion Ja vi.13; -taca (adj.) id. Ja v.393; -pabhā golden splendour Bv xxiii.23; -vimāna a fairy palace of gold Vv-a 6; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 53; -sikharī a golden peak, in ˚rājā king of the golden peaks (i.e. Himālayas): Dāvs iv.30.

cp. Sk. kanaka; Gr. κν ̈ηκος yellow; Ags. hunig = E. honey. See also kañcana

Kaniṭṭha

(adj.) younger, youngest, younger born Vin iii.146 (isi the younger); Ja ii.6; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 54; esp. the younger brother (opp. jeṭṭha, ˚ka) Ja i.132; Dhp-a i.6, Dhp-a i.13; Mvu 9, Mvu 7; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 55. Combd with jeṭṭhaka the elder younger brothers Ja i.253; sabba-k. the very youngest Ja i.395. f. kaniṭṭhā the youngest daughter Dhp-a i.396-fig. later, lesser, inferior, in ˚phala the lesser fruit (of sanctification) Pv iv.188akaniṭṭha “not the smaller” i.e. the greatest, highest; in akaniṭṭhagāmin going to the highest gods (cp. parinibbāyin) SN v.237 SN v.285, etc. ˚bhavana the abode of the highest gods J. iii.487.

Sk. kaniṣṭha; compar. & superl.; see kaññā

Kaniṭṭhaka

(adj.) younger (opp. jeṭṭha) AN iv.93 = Ja ii.348; Dhp-a i.152; the younger brother Mvu 5, Mvu 33, Mvu 8, Mvu 10 Mvu 35, Mvu 49; Mvu 36, Mvu 116; -˚ikā and ˚akā a younger sister, Mvu 1, Mvu 49; Pv i.115 (better read for kaniṭṭhā).

Kaniṭṭhatta

(nt.) the more recent and therefore lower, less developed state (of sanctification) Dhp-a i.152.

Kaniṭṭhī

(f.) a younger sister Mvu 7, Mvu 67.

Kaniya

(adj.) younger, less, inferior Kacc 122 (only as a grammarian’s construction not in the living language where it had coalesced with *kanyā = kaññā).

compar. of kan˚, Sk. kanīyaṃs

Kanta1

1. (adj.) in special sense an attribute of worldly pleasure (cp. kāma kāmaguṇā): pleasant, lovely, enjoyable; freq. in form iṭṭhā kantā manāpā, referring to the pleasures of the senses SN i.245; SN ii.192; SN iv.60, SN iv.158, SN iv.235 sq.; SN v.22, SN v.60, SN v.147; AN ii.66 sq.; MN i.85; Snp 759; Iti 15; Vb 2, Vb 100, Vb 337 bāla˚ (lovely in the opinion of the ignorant) Snp 399. DN ii.265; DN iii.227 (ariya˚); Ja iii.264; Ja v.447; with ref. to the fruit of action as giving pleasure: ˚phala Kv 35, 211; Pv-a 277 (hatthi-) k˚ pleasing to elephants; of manta Dhp-a i.163; of vīṇā Ja vi.255, Ja vi.262; Dhp-a i.163.

2. beloved by, favourite of, charming Ja vi.255, Ja vi.262; Dhp-a i.163.

3. (n.) the beloved one, the husband Ja vi.370 (wrongly written kan tena); of a precious stone Mil 118; Sdhp 608, cp. suriya˚, canda˚- kantā (f.) the beloved one, the wife Ja v.295; kantena (instr.) agreeably with kind words AN ii.213; Ja v.486 (where porisādassa kante should be read as porisādassak’ ante)-a˚ undesired, disagreeable, unpleasant, in same form as kanta, e.g. DN ii.192; in other combn Ja v.295 Vb 100; Ne 180; Pv-a 193akantena with unpleasant words AN ii.213kantatara compar. Ja iii.260.

-bhāva the state of being pleasant DN-a i.76; Vv-a 323.

Sk. kānta, pp. of kāmeti

Kanta2

cut cut out or off Thig 223 (˚salla = samucchinna-rāg’-ādisalla Thag-a 179) cp. katta & pari˚.;

pp. of kantati2, Sk. kṛtta. kanta is analogyform. after pres. kantati, regularly we should expect katta. See also avakanta. It may be simply misreading for katta, cp. Kern, Toev. under parikanta.

Kantati1

to plait, twist, spin, esp. suttaṃ (thread) Vin iv.300; Pv-a 75; Dhp-a iii.273; kappāsaṃ AN iii.295. Cp pari˚.

Sk. kṛṇatti, *qert, cp. kata, & Lat. cratis, crassus, E. crate

Kantati2

to cut, cut off Ja ii.53 (: as nik˚ in gloss, where it should be mūlāni kant˚); iii.185; vi.154; Dhp-a iii.152 (+ viddhaṃseti).

Sk. kṛṇtati; *(s)qert, to cut; cp. Gr. κείρω, to shear; Lat. caro, cena; Ohg. sceran, E. shear; see also kaṭu

Kantāra

(adj. n.) difficult to pass, scil. magga, a difficult road, waste land, wilderness, expld as nirudaka īriṇa Vv-a 334 (on Vv 843), combd with maru˚ Pv-a 99 and marukantāramagga Pv-a 112; opp. khemantabhūmi Usually 5 kinds of wilds are enumerated cora˚, vāla˚, nirudaka˚, amanussa˚, appabbhakkha Ja i.99; SA 324; 4 kinds at Nd ii.630: cora˚, vāla˚, dubhikkha˚ nirudaka˚. The term is used both lit. & fig (of the wilds of ignorance, false doctrine, or of difficulties hardship). As the seat of demons (Petas and Yakkhas freq. in Pv (see above), also Ja i.395. As diṭṭhi˚; in pass diṭṭhi-gata, etc. MN i.8, MN i.486, Pp 22 (on diṭṭhi vipatti).

-addhāna a road in the wilderness, a dangerous path (fig.)Thag 95~D i.73 = MN i.276; -paṭipanna a wanderer through the wilderness, i.e. a forester Ja iii.537. -magga a difficult road (cp. kummagga) Ja ii.294 (lit.); in simile SN ii.118. -mukha the entrance to a desert Ja i.99.

perhaps from kad-tarati, difficult to cross, Sk. (?) kāntāra

Kantāriya

(adj.) (one) living in or belonging to the desert, the guardian of a wilderness, applied to a Yakkha Vv 8421 (= Vv-a. 341).

from kantāra

Kantika1

(adj.) spinning Pv-a 75 (sutta˚ itthiyo).

to kantati1

Kantika2

= kanta1 in a˚ unpleasant, disgusting Pv iii.41 (= Pv-a 193).

Kantita1

spun, (sutta) Vin iv.300.

Sk. kṛtta, pp. of kantati1

Kantita2

(adj.) Sk. kṛtta pp. of kantati2] cut off, severed, at Mil 240 better as kantita1, i.e. spun.

Kanda

a tuberous root, a bulb, tuber, as radish, etc. Ja i.273; Ja iv.373; Ja vi.516; Vv-a 335; ˚mūla bulbs and roots (˚phala) DN i.101; a bulbous root Ja v.202.

Sk. kanda

Kandati

to cry, wail, weep, lament, bewail Dhp 371; Vv 8312 Ja vi.166; Mil 11, Mil 148; freq. of Petas: Pv-a 43, Pv-a 160 Pv-a 262 (cp. rodati) ■ In kāmaguṇā pass. urattāḷiṃ k MN i.86 = Nd ii.s. v.; AN iii.54 (urattāḷī for ˚iṃ v.l.); in phrase bāhā paggayha k˚ Vin i.237; Vin ii.284; Ja v.267.

Sk. krandati to *q(e)lem; cp. Gr. καλέω, κέλαδος, Lat. clamor, calare, calendae, Ohg. hellan to shout

Kandana

(nt.) crying, lamenting Pv-a 262

Sk. krandana

Kandara

1. a cave, grotto, generally, on the slope or at the foot of a mountain Vin ii.76, Vin ii.146 used as a dwelling-place Thag 602; Ja i.205; Ja iii.172. 2. a glen, defile, gully DN i.71 = AN ii.210 = Pp 59; AN iv.437; Mil 36; expld at DN-a i.209 (as a mountainous part broken by the water of a river; the etym. is a popular one, viz. “kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ; tena dāritaṃ”) k-padarasākhā AN i.243 = AN ii.240; Pv-a 29.

Sk. kandara

Kandala

Name of a plant with white flowers Ja iv.442 ■ makuḷa knob (?) of k. plant Vism 253 (as in description of sinews).

Kandaḷa

Name of esculent water lily, having an enormous bulb DN i.264.

Kandita

(adj.) weeping, lamenting Dāvs iv.46; a˚ not weeping Ja iii.58. (n. nt.) crying, lamentation Ja iii.57; Mil 148.

pp. of kandati

Kanna

(adj.) trickling down Ja v.445.

Sk. skanna

Kannāma

= kinnāma Ja vi.126.

Kapaṇa

(adj. n.) [Sk. kṛpaṇa from kṛp wail, cp. Lat. crepo; Ags. hraefn = E. raven. Cp. also Sk. kṛcchra

1. poor, miserable, wretched; a beggar; freq expld by varāka, duggata, dīna and daḷidda; very often classed with low-caste people, as caṇḍālā Pv iii.113 & pesakārā (Ud 4). Snp 818; Ja i.312, Ja i.321; Ja iii.199; Pv ii.914; iii.113, iv.52; DN-a i.298; Dhp-a i.233; Thag-a 178

2. small, short, insignificant AN i.213; Bdhd 84. (f. ˚ā a miserable woman Ja iv.285; -˚an (adv.) pitifully piteously, with verbs of weeping, etc. Ja iii.295; Ja v.499 Ja vi.143; ; not poor Ja iii.199;- ati˚; very miserable Pgdp 74. Der. ˚tā wretchedness Sdhp 315.

-addhikā pl. often with ˚ādi, which means samaṇabrāhmaṇa-k˚-vaṇibbaka-yācakā (e.g. DN i.137; Pv-a 78 beggars and wayfarers, tramps Ja i.6, Ja i.262, Dhp-a i.105, Dhp-a i.188 (written k˚-andhika); see also DA i.298 and kapaṇikā-iddhikā pl. (probably miswriting for ˚addh˚, cp Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 130) DN i.137; Iti 65; DN-a i.298 -itthī a poor woman Ja iii.448; -jīvikā in ˚aṃ kappeti to make a poor livelihood Ja i.312; -bhāva the state of being miserable Pv-a 274; -manussa a wretched fellow, a beggar Vism 343; -laddhaka obtained in pain, said of children Ja vi.150, cp. kiccha laddhaka; -visikhā the street or quarter of the poor, the slums Ud 4; -vuttin leading a poor life Pv-a 175.

Kapaṇikā

(f.) a (mentally) miserable woman Thig 219; Thag-a 178; cp. kapaṇā; also as kapaṇiyā Ja vi.93.

Kapalla

at Vin i.203, is an error for kajjala, lamp-black, used in preparation of a collyrium (cp. J.P.T.S. 1887 167).

Kapalla

(nt.); 1. a bowl in form of a skull, or the shell of reptiles; see kapāla.

2. an earthenware pan used to carry ashes Ja i.8; Ja vi.66, Ja vi.75; Dhp-a i.288.

3. a frying pan (see cpds. & cp. angāra-kapalla) Snp 672.; -kapalla is only a variant of kapāla.

-pāti an earthen pot, a pan Ja i.347 = Dhp-a i.371 -pūva a pancake Ja i.345; Dhp-a i.367; Vv-a 123; Mvu 35, Mvu 67.

Sk kapāla; orig. skull, bowl, cp. kapola & Lat. caput, capula, capillus, Goth. haubi, E. head

Kapallaka

1. a small earthen bowl Ja vi.59; Dhp-a i.224.

2. a frying pan Ja i.346.

Kapāla

(nt.)

1. a tortoiseor turtle-shell SN i.7 = Mil 371; SN iv.179; as ornament at DN-a i.89.

2. the skull, cp. kaṭāha in sīsakaṭāha. 3. a frying pan (usually as ayo˚, of iron, e.g. AN iv.70 Nd ii.304iii; Vv-a 335) Ja ii.352; Vv 845; Dhp-a i.148 (v.l. ˚kapalla); Bdhd 100 (in simile).

4. a begging bowl, used by certain ascetics SN iv.190; SN v.53, SN v.301; AN i.36; AN iii.225; Ja i.89; Pv-a 3.

5. a potsherd Ja ii.301.

-ābhata the food collected in a bowl AN i.36; -khaṇḍa a bit of potsherd Ja ii.301; -hattha “with a bowl in his hand,” begging, or a beggar, Thag 1118; Ja i.89; Ja iii.32 Ja v.468; Pv-a 3.

Sk. kapāla, see kapalla

Kapālaka

1. a small vessel, bowl Ja i.425.

2. a beggar’s bowl Ja i.235; Dhp-a ii.26.

Kapāsa

= kappāsa, q.v. Dāvs ii.39.

Kapi

a monkey (freq. in similes) Snp 791; Thag 1080; Ja i.170; Ja iii.148, cp. kavi.

-kacchu the plant Mucuna pruritus Pv ii.310; ˚phala its fruit Pv-a 86; -citta “having a monkey’s mind, capricious, fickle Ja iii.148 = Ja iii.525; -naccanā Npl., Pv iv.137; -niddā “monkey-sleep,” dozing Mil 300.

Sk. kapi, original designation of a brownish colour, cp. kapila & kapota

Kapiñjala

a wild bird, possibly the francolin partridge Kv 268; Ja vi.538 (B.B. kapiñjara).

Derivation unknown. Sk. kapiñjala

Kapiṭhana

the tree Thespesia populneoides Vin iv.35.

Kapiṭṭha

and ˚ttha

1. the tree Feronia elephantum, the wood-apple tree Ja vi.534; Vism 183 (˚ka); Mvu 29, Mvu 11

2. ˚ṃ (nt.) the wood apple Mil 189;

3. the position of the hand when the fingers are slightly and loosely bent in Ja i.237; kapitthaka SN v.96.

Kapitthana

= kapiṭhana Ja ii.445; Ja vi.529, Ja vi.550, Ja vi.553; v.l. at Vism 183 for ˚itthaka.

Kapila

(adj.) brown, tawny, reddish, of hair & beard Vv-a 222; ˚ā f. a brown cow Dhp-a iv.153.

Sk. kapila, cp. kapi

Kapisīsa

the lintel of a door DN ii.143 (cp. Rh.D. Buddh. Suttas p. 95 n1) -˚ka the cavity in a doorpost for receiving the bolt Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148 (cp. Vin Texts ii.106 n3).

Sk. kapiśīrṣa

Kapota

1. (m.) a pigeon, a dove Ja i.243; Mil 403;

2. (f.) ˚i a female pigeon Pv-a 47; ˚ka (f. ˚ikā Mil 365) a small pigeon Ja i.244.

-pāda (of the colour) of a pigeon’s foot Ja i.9.

Sk. kapota, greyish blue, cp. kapi

Kapola

the cheek Vism 263, Vism 362; Dhp-a i.194.

Sk. kapola, cp. kapalla, orig. meaning “hollow”

Kappa

(adj. n.) anything made with a definite object in view prepared, arranged; or that which is fit, suitable, proper See also DN-a i.103 & Kp-a 115 for var. meanings-I; Literal Meaning.

1. (adj.) fitting, suitable, proper (cp. ˚tā) (= kappiya) in kappâkappesu kusalo Thag 251 ˚kovido Mvu 15, Mvu 16; Snp 911; as juice Mil 161. (-˚) made as, like, resembling Vin i.290 (ahata˚) Snp 35 (khaggavisāṇa˚); hetu˚ acting as cause to Snp 16; Mil 105 ■ a˚ incomparable Mvu 14, Mvu 65;

2. (nt.) a fitting, i.e. harness or trapping (cp. kappana) Vv 209 (Vv-a 104) ■ a small black dot or smudge (kappabindu) imprinted on a new robe to make it lawful Vin i.255; Vin iv.227, Vin iv.286: also fig. a making-up (of a trick) lesa˚ DN-a i.103; Vv-a 348 ■ II. Applied Meaning. 1. (qualitative) ordinance, precept, rule; practice manner Vin ii.294, Vin ii.301 (:kappati singiloṇa-kappo “fit is the rule concerning… ”); cp. Mvu 4, Mvu 9; one of the chalanga, the 6 disciplines of Vedic interpretation Vv-a 265;

2. (temporal) a “fixed” time, time with ref. to individual and cosmic life. As āyu at DN-a i.103 (cp.kappaṃ); as a cycle of time = saṃsāra at Snp 521, Snp 535 Snp 860 (na eti kappaṃ); as a measure of time: an age of the world Vin iii.109; Mil 108; Sdhp 256, Sdhp 257; Pv-a 21; Iti 17 = Bdhd 87 = SN ii.185. There are 3 principal cycles or aeons: mahā˚, asaṅkheyya˚, antara˚; each mahā consists of 4 asankheyya-kappas, viz. saṃvaṭṭa˚ saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ vivaṭṭa˚ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ AN ii.142; often abbreviated to saṃvaṭṭa-vivaṭṭa˚ DN i.14; Iti 15; freq in formula ekampijātiṃ, etc. Vin iii.4 = DN iii.51, DN iii.111; Iti 99. On pubbanta˚ & aparanta˚, past & future kappas see D; i.12 sq. paṭhama-kappe at the beginning of the world, once upon a time (cp. atīte) Ja i.207. When kappa stands by itself, a Mahā-kappa is understood DN-a i.162. A whole, complete kappa is designated by kevala˚ Snp p.. 18 = 46~125; Snp 517; also dīgha SN ii.181; Sdhp 257. For similes as to the enormous length of a kappa see S ii.181 & DN-a i.164 = Pv-a 254-acc. kappaṃ adv.: for a long time DN ii.103 = DN ii.115; Ud 62, quot. at DN-a i.103; Vin ii.198; Iti 17; Mil 108 mayi āyukappaṃ Ja i.119, cp. Mil 141. Cp. saṅkappa.

-ātīta one who has gone beyond time, an Arahant Snp 373. -āvasesaṃ (acc.) for the rest of the kappa, in kappaṃ vā k-âvasesaṃ vā DN ii.117 = AN iv.309 = Ud 62; Mil 140: -āyuka (one) whose life extends over a kappa Mvu v.87; -uṭṭhāna arising at or belonging to the (end of a) kappa: -aggi the fire which destroys the Universe Ja ii.397; Ja iii.185; Ja iv.498; Ja v.336; Ja vi.554; Vism 304 -kāla the time of the end of the world Ja v.244 ■ uṭṭhāna (by itself) the end of the world Ja i.4 = Vism 415; -kata on which a kappa, i.e. smudge, has been made, ref. to the cīvara of a bhikkhu (see above) Vin i.255; Vin iv.227 Vin iv.286; DN-a i.103; -(ñ)jaha (one) who has left time behind free from saṃsāra, an Arahant Snp 1101 (but expld at Nd ii.s. v., see also DA i.103, as free from dve kappā diṭṭhi˚ taṇha˚). -jāla the consumption of the kappa by fire, the end of a kappa Dpvs i.61. -ṭṭha staying there for a kappa, i.e. in purgatory in āpāyiko nerayiko atekiccho, said of Devadatta Vin ii.202, Vin ii.206; AN iii.402 ~iv.160; Iti 11~85. -ṭṭhāyin lasting a whole cycle of a vimāna Thag 1190. -ṭṭhika enduring for an aeon kibbisa (of Devadatta) Vin ii.198 = Vin ii.204; (cp. Vin. Texts iii.254) sālarukkha Ja v.416; see also ṭhitakappiṃ Pp 13. -ṭṭhitika id. Dhp-a i.50 (vera); Mil 108 (kammaṃ) (“sabbe pi magga-samangino puggalā ṭhita-kappino.” -ṭṭhiya- = prec. AN v.75; Ja i.172, Ja i.213; Ja v.33; Mil 109 Mil 214. ˚rukkha the tree that lasts for a kappa, ref. to the cittapāṭalī, the pied trumpet-tree in the abode of the Asuras Ja i.202; -nibbatta originated at the beginning of the k. (appl. to the flames of purgatory) Ja v.272 -parivaṭṭa the evolution of a k; the end of the world Dpvs i.59; -pādapa = ˚rukkha Mhbv 2; -rukkha a wishing tree, magical tree, fulfilling all wishes; sometimes fig. Ja vi.117, Ja vi.594; Vism 206; Pv-a 75, Pv-a 176, Pv-a 121; Vv-a 32 (where combd with cintāmaṇi); Dhp-a iv.208 -latā a creeper like the kapparukkha Vv-a 12; -vināsaka (scil. aggi): the fire consuming the world at the end of a k. Vism 414 sq.; (mahāmegho) Dhp-a iii.362; -samaṇa an ascetic acc. to precepts, an earnest ascetic Ja vi.60 (cp. samaṇa-kappa); -halāhala “the k-uproar,” the uproar near the end of a kalpa Ja i.47.

Sk. kalpa, see kappeti for etym. & formation

Kappaka

a barber, hairdresser, also attendant to the king; his other function (of preparing baths) is expressed in the term nahāpaka (Pv ii.937) or nahāpita (˚ā?) (DN-a i.157) Vin. i.344; ii.182; DN i.51 (= DN-a i.157, in list of various occupations); Ja i.60, Ja i.137 Ja iii.315; Pv ii.937; iii.14 (where expl. by nahāpita in the meaning of “bathed,” cp. expl. ad i.106) Dhp-a i.85 (˚vesa disguise of a barber), 342 (pasādhana˚ one who arranges the dress, etc., hairdresser).

-jātika belonging to or reborn in the barber class, in this sense representing a low, “black” birth Pv-a 176.

fr. kḷp, kappeti

Kappaṭa

a dirty, old rag, torn garment (of a bhikkhu) Thag 199.

kad-paṭa = ku-paṭa

Kappatā

(f.) fitness, suitability DN-a i.207.

abstr. fr. kappa

Kappati

to be fit, seeming, proper, with dat. of person DN ii.162; Vin ii.263, Vin ii.294; Vin iii.36; Thag 488; Mvu 4, Mvu 11; Mvu 15, Mvu 16.

Pass. of kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpyate

Kappana

(nt.) the act of preparing, fixing; that which is fixed, arranged, performed 1. kappanā (f.) the fixing of a horse’s harness harnessing, saddling Ja i.62;

2. (nt.) (-˚) procuring making: jīvika˚; a livelihood Ja iii.32; putting into order; danta˚ Ja i.321;

3. (adj.) (-˚) trimmed arranged with: nānāratana˚ Vv-a 35.

fr. kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpana

Kappara

the elbow Vin iii.121 = Vin iv.221; Ja i.293, Ja i.297; Dhp-a i.48, Dhp-a i.394; Vv-a 206.

cp. Sk. kūrpara

Kappāsa

1. the silk-cotton tree Ja iii.286; Ja vi.336.

2. cotton DN ii.141; AN iii.295; SN v.284; Ja i.350; Ja vi.41; comb. w. uṇṇa AN iii.37 = AN iv.265 = AN iv.268.

-aṭṭhi a cotton seed Dhp-a iii.71; -paṭala the film of the cotton seed Vism 446; Bdhd 66; -picu cotton SN v.284; Ja v.110, Ja v.343; Ja vi.184: -maya made of cotton Pv-a 77.

cp. Sk. karpāsa

Kappāsika

(adj.) made of cotton DN ii.188, cp. AN iv.394; DN ii.351; Vin i.58 = Vin i.97 = Vin i.281; Ja vi.590; Pv ii.117. (nt cotton stuff Mil 267.

-paṇṇa the leaf of the cotton tree, used medicinally Vin i.201; -sukhuma fine, delicate cotton stuff DN ii.188; AN iv.394; Mil 105.

Kappāsī

(f.) cotton Ja vi.537; Pv-a 146.

= kappāsa

Kappika

(-˚) (adj.) 1. belonging to a kappa, in paṭhama˚ ■ kāla the time of thé first Age DN-a i.247 Vb 412 (of manussā); Vv-a 19 (of Manu); without the kāla (id.) at Ja i.222; as noun the men of the first Age Ja ii.352.

2. In cpds.… pubbanta˚ and aparanta the ika˚ belongs to the whole cpd. DN i.39 sq.; DN-a i.103 See also kappiya 2.

fr. kappa

Kappita

1. prepared, arranged, i.e. harnessed DN i.49; Ja vi.268; i.e. plaited DN-a i.274; i.e. trimmed: ˚kesamassu “with hair & beard trimmed DN ii.325; SN iv.343; Ja v.173, Ja v.350; Ja vi.268; Vv 731. 2. getting procuring; as ˚jīvika a living Ja v.270 made ready, drawn up (in battle array) DN ii.189; DN ii.3. decorated with, adorned with Sdhp 247su˚; well prepared, beautifully harnessed or trimmed Vv 601.

pp. of kappeti

Kappin

(adj.) 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) getting, procuring, acquiring (pañña˚) Snp 1090;

2. (cp kappa ii.1b) having a kappa (as duration), lasting a Cycle Pp 13; in Mahā˚ enduring a Mahākappa DN-a i.164 = Pv-a 254.

fr. kappa

Kappiya

(adj.) 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) according to rule, right, suitable, fitting, proper, appropriate (Pv-a 26 = anucchavika paṭirūpa) Ja i.392; DN-a i.9; Pv-a 25 Pv-a 141; not right, not proper, unlawful Vin i.45 Vin i.211; Vin ii.118; Vin iii.20; (nt) that which is proper AN i.84; Dhs 1160;- ; ibid; -kappiyākappiya (nt) that which is proper and that which is not Ja i.316; DN-a i.78. 2. (cp. kappa ii.1b) connected with time, subject to kappa, i.e. temporal, of time, subject to saṃsāra; of devamanussā Snp 521; na + of the Muni Snp 914. In another sense (“belonging to an Age”) in cpd. paṭhama ˚-kāla the time of the first Age Ja ii.352; delivered from time, free from saṃsāra, Ep. of an Arahant Snp 860 cp. Mil 49, Mil 50. See also kappika.

-ānuloma (nt.) accordance with the rule Ne 192 -kāraka “one who makes it befitting,” i.e. who by offering anything to a Bhikkhu, makes it legally acceptable Vin i.206; -kuṭī (f.) a building outside the Vihāra wherein allowable articles were stored, a kind of warehouse Vin i.139; Vin ii.159; -dāraka a boy given to the Bhikkhus to work for them in the Vihāra DN-a i.78 (v.l. BB ˚kāraka); -bhaṇḍa utensils allowable to the Bhikkhus Ja i.41; Dhp-a i.412. ; thing unauthorised Vin ii.169; a list of such forbidden articles is found at Vin i.192; -bhūmi (f.) a plot of ground set apart for storing (allowable) provisions Vin i.239 (cp. ˚kuṭi) -lesa [cp. Sk. kalpya] guile appropriate to one’s own purpose Vv-a 348; -saññin (a) imagining as lawful (that which is not) AN i.84; ; opp. ibid ■ ˚tā the imagining as lawful (that which is not) appl. to kukkucca Dhs 1160 ; opp. ibid.

fr. kappa

Kappu

(nt.) = kappa in the dialect used by Makkhali Gosāla, presumably the dialect of Vesāli, DN i.54; DN-a i.164 (a Burmeṣe MS. reads kappi, and so do Pv iv.332; Pv-a 254).

Kappūra

(m. & nt.) camphor: (a) the plant Ja vi.537 ■ (b) the resinous exudation, the prepared odoriferant substance (cp. kaṭukapphala Ja ii.416 = Dhp-a iii.475; Mil 382; Dāvs v.50.

cp. Sk. karpūra

Kappeti

to cause to fit, to create, build, construct arrange, prepare, order.

I. lit. 1. in special sense: to prepare, get done, i.e. harness: Ja i.62; plait DN-a i.274, an offering (yaññaṃ) Snp 1043; i.e. to trim etc. MN ii.155; Ja i.223; Mvu 25, Mvu 64 Mvu 2, generally (to be translated according to the meaning of accompanying noun), to make, get up, carry on etc (= Fr. passer), viz. iriyāpathaṃ to keep one’s composure Th i.570; Ja v.262; Bdhd 33; jīvitaṃ: to lead one’s life Pv-a 3, Pv-a 4, Pv-a 13; divāvihāraṃ to take the noonday rest Mvu 19, Mvu 79; nisajjaṃ to sit down Vin iii.191; vāsaṃ, saṃvāsaṃ to make one’s abode DN ii.88; Snp 283; Pv-a 36, Pv-a 47 saṃvāsaṃ to have (sexual) intercourse with Ja iii.448 Mvu 5, Mvu 212; Pv-a 6; seyyaṃ: to lie down, to make one’s bed Pp 55 etc. (acelaka-passage = DN i.166).

II. fig. 1. in special sense: to construct or form an opinion, to conjecture, to think Snp 799; DN-a i.103–⁠2. generally: to ordain, prescribe, determine Ja v.238 (= say vidahati)-Caus. II. kappāpeti to cause to be made in all senses of kappeti; e.g. Vin ii.134 (massuṃ k. to get one’s beard done); Ja v.262 (hatthiyānāni k. to harness the elephant-cars); DN-a i.147 (pañca hatthinikā-satāni k. harness the 500 elephants). Pass kappiyati in ppr. kappiyamāna getting harnessed Ja i.62.

Der. from kappa, cp. Sk. kṛpa shape, form; *qṷrep caus. from. fr. *qṷer = Sk. kr, karoti to shape, to make, cp. karoti

Kabara

(adj.) variegated, spotted, striped; mixed, intermingled; in patches Vism 190. Of a cow (˚gāvī) Dhp-a i.71 (˚go-rūpa) ibid. 99; of a calf (˚vaccha Ja v.106; of a dog (˚vaṇṇa = sabala q.v.) Ja vi.107; of leprosy Ja v.69; of the shade of trees (˚cchāya, opp sanda˚) MN i.75; Ja iv.152; Dhp-a i.375.

-kucchi having a belly striped with many colours, of a monster Ja i.273; -kuṭṭha a kind of leprosy Ja v.69 -maṇi the cat’s eye, a precious stone, also called masāragalla but also an emerald; both are prob. varieties of the cat’s eye Vv-a 167, Vv-a 304.

cp. Sk. kabara

Kabala

(m., nt.) a small piece (= ālopa Pv-a 70) a mouthful, always appl. to food, either solid (i.e. as much as is made into a ball with the fingers when eating) or liquid Vin ii.214; Iti 18 = Ja iii.409; Ja iv.93; Dhp 324; Mil 180, Mil 400; Bdhd 69; Dhp-a ii.65; Pv-a 39; Mvu 19 Mvu 74. Kabale kabale on every morsel Ja i.68; Mil 231 -sakabala appl. to the mouth, with the mouth full of food Vin ii.214; iv. 195 ■ Sometimes written kabala.

-āvacchedaka choosing portions of a mouthful nibbling at a morsel Vin ii.214; Vin iv.196.

cp. Sk. kavala BSk. kavaḍa Divy 290 (+ ālopa), 298, 470

Kabaliṅkāra

(adj.) always in combn with āhāra, food “made into a ball,” i.e. eatable, material food, as one of the 4 kinds of food (see stock phrase k˚ āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā… at MN i.48; SN ii.11, SN ii.98 = DN iii.228, DN iii.276; Bdhd 135) Dhs 585, Dhs 646 (where fully described), 816; Mil 245; Vism 236, Vism 341 Vism 450, Vism 616; Bdhd 69, 74; DN-a i.120. Written kabalīkāra nearly always in Burmese, and sometimes in Singh MSS.; s. also Ne 114–⁠118.

-āhāra-bhakkha (of attā, soul) feeding on material food DN i.34, DN i.186, DN i.195; -bhakkha, same AN iii.192 = AN v.336 (appl. to the kāmâvacara devas); DN-a i.120.

kabala in compn form kabalī˚ before kr & bhū; kabalin for kabalī˚

Kabaḷikā

(f.) a bandage, a piece of cloth put over a sore or wound Vin i.205 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.58 n4).

cp. Sk. kavalikā

Kabba

(nt.) a poem, poetical composition, song, ballad in ˚ṃ karoti to compose a song Ja vi.410 -karaṇa making poems DN-a i.95; and -kāra a poet Kh 21; Ja vi.410.

cp. Sk. kāvya

Kabya

= kabba in cpds. ˚ālaṅkāra composing in beautiful verse, a beautiful poem in ˚ṃ bandhati, to compose a poem ibid.; and -kāraka a poet, ibid.

Kama

1. (nt.) going, proceeding course, step, way, manner, e.g. sabbatth’âvihatakkama “having a course on all sides unobstructed Sdhp 425; vaḍḍhana˚ process of development Bdhd 96 paṭiloma˚ (going) the opposite way Bdhd 106; cp. also Bdhd 107, 111. a fivefold kama or process (of development or division), succession, is given at Vism 476 with uppattik˚, pahāna˚, patipattik˚, bhūmik˚, desanāk˚ where they are illustrated by examples. Threefold applied to upādāna at Vism 570 (viz. uppattik˚ pahānak˚, desanāk˚)

2. oblique cases (late and technical) “by way of going,” i.e. in order or in due course, in succession: kamato Vism 476, Vism 483, Vism 497 Bdhd 70, 103; kamena by & by, gradually Mvu 3, Mvu 33 Mvu 5, Mvu 136; Mvu 13, Mvu 6; Dāvs i.30; Snp-a 455; Bdhd 88; yathākkamaṃ Bdhd 96.

3. (adj.) (-˚) having a certain way of going: catukkama walking on all fours (= catuppāda Pv i.113.

fr. kram, cp. Vedic krama (-˚) step, in uru˚, BSk. krama reprieve, Divy 505

Kamaṇa

a step, stepping, gait Ja v.155, in expln Ja v.156 taken to be ppr. med ■ See san˚.

Kamaṇḍalu

(m., nt.) the waterpot with long spout used by non-Buddhist ascetics SN i.167; Ja ii.73 (= kuṇḍikā); iv.362, 370; vi.86, 525, 570 Snp p.80; Dhp-a iii.448-adj. kamaṇḍaluka [read kā˚; ? “with the waterpot” AN v.263 (brāhmaṇā pacchābhūmakā k.).

etym. uncertain

Kamati

to walk (I) lit. 1. c. loc. to walk, travel, go through: dibbe pathe Snp 176; ariye pathe SN i.33; ākāse DN i.212 = MN i.69 = AN iii.17;

2. c. acc. to go or get to, to enter MN ii.18; Ja vi.107; Pv i.12 (saggaṃ)-(II) fig. 1. to succeed, have effect, to affect MN i.186; Ja v.198; Mil 198;

2. to plunge into, to enter into AN ii.144; AN ii.3. impers. to come to (c. dat) SN iv.283.

kram, Dhtp. expld by padavikkhepe; ppr. med. kamamāna SN i.33; Snp 176; Intens. cankamati.

Kamatthaṃ

(adv.) for what purpose, why? Ja iii.398 (= kimatthaṃ).

kaṃ atthaṃ

Kamanīya

(adj.) (a) desirable, beautiful, lovely Ja v.155, Ja v.156; Mil 11; (b) pleasant, sweet (-sounding) DN ii.171; Ja i.96 ■ As nt. a desirable object SN i.22.

grd of kāmayati

Kamala

(nt.) a lotus, freq. combd with kuvalaya; or with uppala Ja i.146; DN-a i.40, expld as vārikiñjakkha Pv-a 77. 1. lotus, the lotus flower, Nelumbium Ja i.146; DN-a i.40; Mhbv 3; Sdhp 325; Vv-a 43, Vv-a 181, Vv-a 191; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 77 ■ At Ja i.119, Ja i.149 a better reading is obtained by corr. kambala to kamala, at Ja i.178 however kamb˚ should be retained.

2. a kind of grass, of which sandals were made Vin. i.190 (s. Vin. Texts ii.23 n.)

3. f. kamalā a graceful woman Ja v.160;

-komalakarā (f.) (of a woman) having lotus-like (soft hands Mhbv 29; -dala a lotus leaf Vism 465; Mhbv 3 Bdhd 19; Dhs-a 127; Vv-a 35, Vv-a 38-pādukā sandals of k. grass Vin i.190.

Kamalin

(adj.) rich in lotus, covered with lotuses (of a pond) in kamalinī-kāmuka “the lover of lotuses,” Ep. of the Sun Mhbv. 3 (v.l. ˚sāmika perhaps to be preferred).

fr. kamala

Kampa

(-˚) trembling, shaking; tremor DN-a i.130 (paṭhavi˚); Sdhp 401; ; (adj.) not trembling unshaken; calm, tranquil Sdhp 594; Mvu 15, Mvu 175.

fr. kamp

Kampaka

(adj.) shaking, one who shakes or causes to tremble Mil 343 (paṭhavi˚).

fr. kampa

Kampati

to shake, tremble, waver Kh 6; Ja i.23; Snp 268 (expl. Kp-a 153: calati, vedhati) Bdhd 84 ■ Cp. anu˚, pa˚, vi˚, sam˚ ■ kampamāna (adj.) trembling Ja iii.161; agitated, troubled (˚citta Ja ii.337; ; not trembling, unhesitating, steadfast Ja vi.293.

kamp to shake Dhtp. 186: calane; p. pres. kampanto, kampaṃ, kampamāna; aor. akampi; caus kampeti; p. pres. kampetan Dpvs xvii.51; ger. kampayitvāna DN ii.108; Ja v.178

Kampana

1. adj. causing to shake Dhp-a i.84, trembling Kacc 271; 2. (nt) (a) an earthquake Ja i.26 Ja i.47; (b) tremor (of feelings) Ja iii.163.

-rasa (adj.) “whose essence is to tremble,” said of doubt (vicikicchā) Dhs-a 259.

fr. kamp

Kampin

(adj.) see vi˚.

fr. kampa

Kampiya

(adj.) in ; not to be shaken, immovable, strong Thig 195; Mil 386; (nt.) firmness said of the 5 moral powers (balāni) DN-a i.64.

grd. of kampati

Kampurī

(va.) at Thig 262 is to be corr. into kambu-r-iva (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76).

Kambala

(m., nt.) 1. woollen stuff, woollen blanket or garment. From Ja iv.353 it appears that it was a product of the north, probably Nepal (cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 203); enumd as one of the 6 kinds of cīvaras together w. koseyya & kappāsika; at Vin i.58 = Vin i.96, also at AN iv.394 (s. ˚sukhuma); freq. preceded by ratta (e.g. DN-a i.40. Cp. also ambara2 and ambala), which shows that it was commonly dyed red; also as paṇḍu Snp 689; Bdhd 1 ■ Some woollen garments (aḍḍhakāsika) were not allowed for Bhikkhus: Vin i.281; Vin ii.174 see further Ja i.43, Ja i.178, Ja i.322; Ja iv.138; Mil 17, Mil 88, Mil 105; Dhp-a i.226; Dhp-a ii.89 sq. 2. a garment: two kinds of hair (blankets, i.e.) garments viz. kesa˚; and vāla˚; mentioned Vin i.305 = DN i.167 = AN i.240, AN i.295.

3. woollen thread Vin i.190 (expld by uṇṇā) (cp. Vin. Texts ii.23) Ja vi.340;

4. a tribe of Nāgas Ja vi.165.

-kañcuka a (red) woollen covering thrown over a temple, as an ornament Mvu 34, Mvu 74; -kūṭāgāra a bamboo structure covered with (red) woollen cloth used as funeral pile Dhp-a i.69; -pādukā woollen slippers Vin i.190; -puñja a heap of blankets Ja i.149; -maddana dyeing the rug Vin i.254 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.154); -ratana a precious rug of wool Ja iv.138; Mil 17 (16 ft. long 18 ft. wide); -vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of woollen fabric, i.e. red Ja v.359 (˚maṃsa); -silāsana (paṇḍu˚) a stone-seat, covered with a white k. blanket, forming the throne of Sakka Dhp-a i.17; -sukhuma fine, delicate woollen stuff DN ii.188 = AN iv.394; Mil 105; -sutta a woollen thread Ja vi.340.

cp. Sk. kambala

Kambalin

(adj.) having a woollen garment DN i.55; DN ii.150.

fr. kambala

Kambalīya

(nt.) (a sort of) woollen garment Pv ii.117 (cp. Pv-a 77).

fr. kambala

Kambu

1. a conch, a shell: saṇha-kambu-r-iva… sobhate su gīvā Thig 262 (for kampurī’va); s cpds.

2. a ring or bracelet (made of shells or perhaps gold: see Kern. Toev. s. v.) Ja iv.18, Ja iv.466 (+ kāyūra) Pv ii.127, iii.93 (= Pv-a 157, sankhavalaya) Vv 362 (= Vv-a 167 hatth’âlankāra), worn on the wrist, while the kāyūra is worn on the upper part of the arm (bhujâlankāra ibid.);

3. a golden ring, given as second meaning at Vv-a 167, so also expl. at Ja iv.18, Ja iv.130; Ja v.400.

-gīva (adj.) having a neck shaped like a shell, i.e. in spirals, having lines or folds, considered as lucky Ja iv.130 (= suvaṇṇālingasadisagīvo), cp. above 1 -tala the base or lower part of a shell, viz. the spiral part, fig. the lines of the neck Ja v.155 (˚ābhāsā gīvā expld on p. 156 as suvaṇṇālingatala-sannibhā); also the (polished) surface of a shell, used as simile for smoothness Ja v.204, Ja v.207; -pariharaka a wristlet or bracelet Vv-a 167.

cp. Sk. kambu, Halāyudha = śankha; Dhtp. saṃvaraṇe

Kambussa

gold or golden ornament (bracelet) Ja v.260, Ja v.261 (: kambussaṃ vuccati suvaṇṇaṃ).

fr. preceding

Kambojaka

(adj.) coming fr. Kamboja Ja iv.464 (assatara).

Kambojā

(f.) N of a country Ja v.446 (˚ka raṭṭha); Pv ii.91 (etc.); Vism 332, Vism 334, Vism 336.

Kamboji

(m., nt.) the plant Cassia tora or alata Ja iii.223 (˚gumba = elagalāgumba; vv.ll. kammoja˚ & tampo˚ [for kambo˚]).;

meaning & etym. unexpl;d

Kamma

(nt.) the doing, deed, work orig. meaning (see karoti) either building (cp. Lit kùrti, Opr. kūra to build) or weaving, plaiting (still in mālākamma and latā˚ “the intertwining of garlands and creepers”; also in kamma-kara possibly orig employed in weaving, i.e. serving); cp. Lat. texo, to weave = Sk. takṣan builder, artisan, & Ger. wirken orig. weben. Grammatically karman has in Pāli almost altogether passed into the-a decl., the cons forms for instr. & abl. kammā and kammanā gen. dat kammuno, are rare. The nom. pl. is both kammā and kammāni.;

I. Crude meaning. 1. (lit.) Acting in a special sense i.e. office, occupation, doing, action, profession. Two kinds are given at Vin iv.6, viz. low (hīna) & high (ukkaṭṭha) professions. To the former belong the kammāni of a koṭṭhaka and a pupphacchaḍḍaka, to the latter belong vāṇijjā and gorakkhā ■ Kamma as a profession or business is regarded as a hindrance to the religious life, & is counted among the ten obstacles (see palibodha). In this sense it is at Vism 94 expl;d by navakamma (see below 2a) ■ kassa˚; ploughing, occupation of a ploughman Vism 284; kumbhakāra˚; profession of a potter Ja vi.372; tunna˚; weaving Vism 122; Pv-a 161. purohita˚; office of a high-priest (= abstr n. porohiccaṃ) Snp-a 466; vāṇija˚; trade Sāsv. 40 ■ kammanā by profession Snp 650, Snp 651; kammāni (pl.) occupations Snp 263 = Kp v.6 (anavajjāni k. = anākulā kammantā Snp 262). paresaṃ k˚ṃ katvā doing other people’s work = being a servant Vv-a 299; sa˚ pasutā bent upon their own occupations DN i.135, cp. attano k˚-kubbānaṃ Dhp 217. kamma-karaṇa-sālā work-room (here: weaving shed) Pv-a 120.

2. Acting in general, action, deed, doing (nearly always-˚) (a) (active) act, deed, job, often to be rendered by the special verb befitting the special action like cīvara˚; mending the cloak Vv-a 250; uposatha˚ observing the Sabbath Vb 422; nava˚; making new renovating, repairing, patching Vin ii.119, Vin ii.159 (˚karoti to make repairs); Ja i.92: Vism 94, adj. navakammika one occupied with repairs Vin ii.15; SN i.179; patthita˚ the desired action (i.e. sexual intercourse) Dhp-a ii.49 kammaṃ karoti to be active or in working, to act nāgo pādehi k.k. the elephant works with his feet MN i.414; kata˚; the job done by the thieves Dhp-a ii.38 (corehi), as adj. kata˚ cora (& akata ˚cora) a thief who has finished his deed (& one who has not) Vism 180 also in special sense: occasion for action or work, i. e; necessity, purpose: ukkāya kammaṃ n’atthi, the torch does not work, is no good Vism 428. (b) (passive) the act of being done (-˚), anything done (in its result) work, often as collect. abstr. (to be trsld. by E. ending-ing): apaccakkha˚; not being aware, deception Vb 85 daḷhī˚; strengthening, increase Vb 357, Vism 122 citta˚; variegated work, mālā˚; garlands, latā˚; creeper (-work) Vism 108; nāma˚; naming Bdhd 83; pañhā˚ questioning, “questionnaire” Vism 6 ■ So in definitions niṭṭhuriya˚ = niṭṭhuriya Vb 357; nimitta˚ nimitta, obhāsa˚ = obhāsa (apparition → appearing) Vb 353 ■ (c) (intrs.) making, getting, act, process (-˚) Often trsl. as abstr. n. with ending-ion or-ment, e.g. okāsa˚; opportunity of speaking, giving an audience Snp p.94; pātu˚; making clear, manifestation Dhp-a iv.198 anāvi˚, anuttāni˚; concealment Vb 358; kata˚ (adj.) one who has done the act or process, gone through the experience Snp-a 355; añjali˚, sāmīci˚; veneration honouring (in formula with nipaccakāra abhivādana paccuṭṭhāna) DN iii.83 (≈Vin ii.162, Vin ii.255); AN i.123; AN ii.180 Ja i.218, Ja i.219.

3. (Specialised) an “act” in an ecclesiastical sense proceedings, ceremony, performed by a lawfully constituted chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.49, Vin i.53, Vin i.144, Vin i.318; Vin ii.70 Vin ii.93; Vin v.220 sq.; Khus J.P.T.S. 1883, 101. At these formal functions a motion is put before the assembly and the announcement of it is called the ñatti Vin i.56, after which the bhikkhus are asked whether they approve of the motion or not. If this question is put once, it is a ñattidutiyakamma Vin ii.89; if put three times, a ñatticatuttha˚ Vin i.56 (cp. Vin. Texts i.169 n2) There are 6 kinds of official acts the Sangha can perform: see Vin i.317 sq.; for the rules about the validity of these ecclesiastical functions see Vin i.312–⁠333 (cp Vin T. ii.256

285). The most important ecclesiastical acts are: apalokanakamma, ukkhepanīya˚ uposatha tajjaniya˚ tassapāpiyyasikā˚ nissaya˚, patiññākaraṇīya˚ paṭipucchākaraṇīya˚ paṭisāraṇiya˚ pabbājaniya˚ sammukhākaraṇīya˚ ■ In this sense: kammaṃ karoti (w. gen.) to take proceedings against Vin i.49, Vin i.143, Vin i.317 Vin ii.83, Vin ii.260; kammaṃ garahati to find fault with proceedings gone through Vin ii.5; kammaṃ paṭippassambheti to revoke official proceedings against a bhikkhu Vin iii.145.

4. In cpds.:- -ādhiṭṭhāyaka superintendent of work inspector Mvu 5, Mvu 174; Mvu 30, Mvu 98; -ādhipateyya one whose supremacy is action Mil 288; -ārambha commencement of an undertaking Mvu 28, Mvu 21; -āraha (a) entitled to take part in the performance of an “act” Vin iv.153 Vin v.221; -ārāma (a) delighting in activity DN ii.77; AN iv.22; Iti 71, Iti 79; -ārāmatā taking pleasure in (worldly activity DN ii.78 = AN iv.22, cp. Vb 381; AN iii.116, AN iii.173 AN iii.293 sq., 330, 449; iv.22 sq., 331; v.163; Iti 71; āvadāna a tale of heroic deeds Ja vi.295; -kara or ˚kāra used indiscriminately. 1. (adj.) doing work, or active in puriso dāso + pubbuṭṭhāyī “willing to work DN i.60 et sim. (= DN-a i.168: analaso). AN i.145; AN ii.67; Vv 754; 2. (n.) a workman, a servant (a weaver? usually in form dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā Vin i.243; DN i.141 = Pp 56 (also ˚kārā); AN ii.208 AN iii.77, AN iii.172; Thig 340; Ja i.57. Also as dāsā pessā k˚kārā AN iii.37 = AN iv.265, AN iv.393, and dāsā k˚ kārā Vin i.240, Vin i.272; Vin ii.154; DN iii.191; SN i.92 ■ a handyman Ja i.239; Mil 378; (f) a female servant Vin ii.267 ˚kāra Vin iv.224, kārī Dhs A98 = Vv-a 73 (appl. to a wife); -karaṇa 1. working, labour, service Ja iii.219; Pv-a 120; DN-a i.168; DN-a i.2. the effects of karma Ja i.146 -karanā and kāraṇā see below; -kāma liking work industrious; a˚ lazy AN iv.93 = Ja ii.348; -kāraka a workman, a servant DN-a i.8; Mvu 30, Mvu 42; Nd ii.427 a sailor Ja iv.139; -garu bent on work Mil 288; -ccheda the interruption of work Ja i.149; Ja i.246; Ja iii.270; -jāta sort of action Ja v.24 (= kammam eva); -dhura (m. nt. draught-work Ja i.196; -dheyya work to be performed duty AN iv.285 = AN iv.325; cp. Ja vi.297; -dhoreyya “fit to bear the burden of action” Mil 288 (cp. Mil. trsl. ii.140); -niketavā having action as one’s house or temple ibid.; -nipphādana accomplishing the business Ja vi.162; -ppatta entitled to take part in an eccles act Vin i.318; Vin v.221; -bahula abounding in action (appl. to the world of men) Mil 7; -mūla the price of the transaction Mil 334; -rata delighting in business DN ii.78; Iti 71; -vatthu objects, items of an act Vin v.116; -vācā the text or word of an official Act. These texts form some of the oldest literature and are embodied in the Vinaya (cp. Vin i.317 sq.; Vin iii.174, Vin iii.176 Vin iv.153, etc.). The number of officially recognized k is eleven, see J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896, 1907; k˚ṃ karoti to carry out an official Act Mvu 5, Mvu 207; Dhs-a 399 ■ ˚ṃ anussāveti to proclaim a k˚, to put a resolution to a chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.317; -vossagga difference of occupation Ja vi.216; -sajja (a) “ready for action,” i.e. for battle Ja v.232; -sādutā “agreeableness to work” Dhs-a 151 (cp. kammaññatā & kamyatā) -sāmin “a master in action,” an active man Mil 288 -sippī an artisan Vv-a 278; -sīla one whose habit it is to work, energetic, persevering Mil 288; ; indolent lazy Ja vi.245; a˚-ttaṃ indolence, laziness Mvu 23, Mvu 21 -hīna devoid of occupation, inactive Mil 288.

II. Applied (pregnant) meaning: doing, acting with ref. to both deed and doer. It is impossible to draw a clear line between the source of the act (i.e. the acting subject, the actor) and the act (either the object or phenomenon acted, produced, i.e. the deed as objective phenomenon, or the process of acting, i.e. the deed as subjective phenomenon). Since the latter (the act) is to be judged by its consequences, its effects, its manifestation always assumes a quality (in its most obvious characteristics either good or bad or indifferent), and since the act reflects on the actor, this quality is also attached to him. This is the popular, psychological view, and so it is expressed in language, although reason attributes goodness and badness to the actor first, and then to the act. In the expression of language there is no difference between: 1. the deed as such and the doer in character: anything done (as good or bad) has a corresponding source; 2. the performance of the single act and the habit of acting: anything done tends to be repeated; 3. the deed with ref. both to its cause and its effect: anything done is caused and is in itself the cause of something else. As meanings of kamma we therefore have to distinguish the foll. different sides of a “deed,” viz.

1. the deed as expressing the doer’s will, i.e. qualified deed, good or bad; 2. the repeated deed as expression of the doer’s habit = his character; 3. the deed as having consequences for the doer, as such a source qualified according to good and evil; as deed done accumulated and forming a deposit of the doer’s merit and demerit (his “karma”). Thus pāpakamma = a bad deed, one who has done a bad deed, one who has a bad character, the potential effect of a bad deed = bad karma. The context alone decides which of these meanings is the one intended by the speaker or writer.

Concerning the analysis of the various semantic developments the following practical distinctions can be made: 1. Objective action, characterized by time as past = done, meaning deed (with kata); or future = to be done, meaning duty (with kātabba). 2. Subjective action, characterized by quality, as reflecting on the agent. 3. Interaction of act and agent: (a) in subjective relation, cause and effect as action and reaction on the individual (individual “karma,” appearing in his life, either here or beyond), characterized as regards action (having results) and as regards actor (having to cope with these results): (b) in objective relation, i.e. abstracted from the individual and generalized as Principle, or cause and effect as Norm of Happening (universal “karma,” appearing in Saṃsāra, as driving power of the world), characterized (a) as cause, (b) as consequence, (c) as cause-consequence in the principle of retribution (talio), (d) as restricted to time.

1. (Objective): with ref. to the Past: kiṃ kammaṃ akāsi nārī what (deed) has this woman done? Pv i.92 tassā katakammaṃ pucchi he asked what had been done by her Pv-a 37, Pv-a 83, etc ■ with ref. to the Future: k kātabbaṃ hoti I have an obligation, under 8 kusītavatthūni DN iii.255 = AN iv.332; cattāri kammāni kattā hoti “he performs the 4 obligations” (of gahapati) AN ii.67.

2. (Subjective) (a) doing in general, acting, action deed; var. kinds of doings enum. under micchājīva DN i.12 (santikamma, paṇidhi˚, etc.); tassa kammassa katattā through (the performance of) that deed DN iii.156; dukkaraṃ kamma-kubbataṃ he who of those who act, acts badly SN i.19; abhabbo taṃ kammaṃ kātum incapable of doing that deed SN iii.225; sañcetanika k. deed done intentionally MN iii.207; AN v.292 sq. pamāṇakataṃ k. DN i.251 = SN iv.322. kataraṃ k˚ṃ karonto ahaṃ nirayaṃ na gaccheyyaṃ? how (i.e. what doing) shall I not go to Niraya? Ja iv.340; yaṃ kiñci sithilaṃ k˚ṃ… na taṃ hoti mahapphalaṃ… SN i.49 = Dhp 312 = Thag 277; kadariya˚ a stingy action Pv-a 25; k. classed with sippa, vijjā-caraṇa DN iii.156 kāni k˚āni sammā-niviṭṭha established slightly in what doings? Snp 324; (b) Repeated action in general, constituting a person’s habit of acting or character (cp kata ii.1. a.); action as reflecting on the agent or bearing his characteristics; disposition, character. Esp. in phrase kammena samannāgata “endowed with the quality of acting in such and such a manner, being of such and such character”: tīhi dhammehi samannāgato niraye nikkhitto “endowed with (these) three qualites a man will go to N.” AN i.292 sq.; asucinā kāyak˚ena sam˚ asucimanussā “bad people are those who are of bad ways (or character)” Nd ii.112; anavajja kāya-k˚ sam˚ AN ii.69 (cp. AN iv.364); kāya-kammavacī-kammena sam˚ kusalena (pabbajita) “a bhikkhu of good character in deed and speech” DN i.63; kāya… (etc.)-k˚sam˚ bāla (and opp. paṇḍita) AN ii.252 (cp. AN i.102, AN i.104); visamena kāya (etc.)-k˚ sam AN i.154 = AN iii.129; sāvajjena kāya (etc.)-k˚ sam˚ AN ii.135-kammaṃ vijjā ca dhammo ca sīlaṃ jīvitam uttamaṃ, etena maccā sujjhanti, na gottena dhanena vā SN i.34 = SN i.55; MN iii.262, quoted at Vism 3, where k is grouped with vipassanā, jhāna, sīla, satipaṭṭhāna as main ideals of virtue; kammanā by character, as opp to jaccā or jātiyā, by birth: Snp 136; Snp 164; Snp 599; nihīna manussā (of bad, wretched character) Snp 661; manāpena bahulaṃ kāya (etc.)-kammena AN ii.87 = AN iii.33, AN iii.131 and esp. with mettā, as enum. under aparihāniyā and sārāṇīyā dhammā DN ii.80; AN iii.288; mettena kāya (etc.)-kammena DN ii.144; DN iii.191; AN v.350 sq. (c) Particular actions, as manifested in various ways, by various channels of activity (k˚-dvārā), expressions of personality as by deed, word and thought (kāyena vācāya, manasā). Kamma κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν means action by hand (body) in formula vacasā manasā kammanā ca Snp 330, Snp 365; later specified by kāya-kamma, for which kāya-kammanta in some sense (q.v.), and complementing vacī-k˚ mano-k˚; so in foll. combns: citte arakkhite kāya-k˚ pi arakkhitaṃ hoti (vacī˚ mano˚ AN i.261 sq.; yaṃ nu kho ahaṃ idaṃ kāyena k˚ kattukāmo idaṃ me kāya-k˚ attabyādhāya pi saṃvatteyya… “whatever deed I am going to do with my hands (I have to consider:) is this deed, done by my hands likely to bring me evil?” MN i.415; kāya-(vacī-etc. kamma, which to perform & to leave (sevitabbaṃ and a˚) AN i.110 = AN iii.150; as anulomika˚ AN i.106; sabbaṃ kāya-k˚ (vacī˚ mano˚) Buddhassa ñāṇânuparivattati “all manifestation of deed (word & thought) are within the knowledge of Buddha” Nd ii.235; yaṃ lobhapakataṃ kammaṃ karoti kāyena vā vācāya vā manasā vā tassa vipākaṃ anubhoti… Ne 37; kin nu kāyena v˚ m dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ what evil have you done by body, word or thought? Pv ii.13 and freq.; ekūna-tiṃsa kāyakammāni Bdhd 49. (d) Deeds characterized as evil (pāpa-kammāni, pāpāni k˚, pāpakāni k˚; pāpakamma adj., cp. pāpa-kammanta adj.). pāpakamma: n’atthi loke raho nāma p˚ pakubbato “there is no hiding (-place) in this world for him who does evil” AN i.149 so p˚-o dummedho jānaṃ dukkaṭaṃ attano… “he afflicted with (the result of) evil-doing…” AN iii.354 p˚-ṃ pavaḍḍhento ibid.; yaṃ p˚-ṃ kataṃ sabban taṃ idha vedanīyaṃ “whatever wrong I have done I have to suffer for” AN v.301; pabbajitvāna kāyena p˚-ṃ vivajjayī “avoid evil acting” Snp 407; nissaṃsayaṃ p˚-ṃ… “undoubtedly there is some evil deed (the cause of this) i.e. some evil karma Pv iv.161pāpaṃ kammaṃ: appamattikam pi p˚ k˚ kataṃ taṃ enaṃ nirayaṃ upaneti “even a small sin brings man to N. AN i.249, tayā v’etaṃ p˚ k˚ kataṃ tvañ ñeva etassa vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedissasi “you yourself have done this sin you yourself shall feel its consequences” MN iii.180; AN i.139, na hi p˚ kataṃ k˚ sajju khīraṃ va muccati Dhp 71 = Ne 161; yassa p˚ kataṃ k˚ kusalena pithīyati so imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti “he will shine in this world who covers an evil deed with a good one” MN ii.104; Dhp 173 = Thag 872; p˚-ssa k˚-ssa samatikkamo “the overcoming of evil karma” SN iv.320; p˚ssa k˚ssa kiriyāya “in the performance of evil” MN i.372; p˚āni k˚āni karaṃ bālo na bujjhati “he, like a fool, awaketh not, doing sinful deeds” Dhp 136 = Thag 146; pāpā p˚ehi k˚ehi nirayaṃ upapajjare “sinners by virtue of evil deeds go to N.” Dhp 307; te ca p˚esu k˚esu abhiṇham upadissare Snp 140. -pāpakāni kammāni: p˚ānaṃ k˚ānaṃ hetu coraṃ rājāno gāhetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti “for his evil deeds the kings seize the thief and have him punished” AN i.48; ye loke p˚āni k karonti te vividhā kamma-kāraṇā karīyanti “those who do evil deeds in this world, are punished with various punishments” MN iii.186 = AN i.142; k˚ṃ karoti p˚ṃ kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā Snp 232 (= kh 190) similarly Snp 127; karontā p˚ṃ k˚ṃ yaṃ hoti kaṭukapphalaṃ “doing evil which is of bitter fruit” Dhp 66; SN i.57 = Ne 131; k˚ehi p˚ehi Snp 215In the same sense: na taṃ k˚ṃ kataṃ sādhu yaṃ katvā anutappati “not well done is that deed for which he feels remorse” SN i.57 = Dhp 67 = Ne 132; āveni-kammāni karonti (with ref. to sangha-bheda) AN v.74; adhammikakammāni AN i.74; asuci-k˚āni (as suggested by 5 and attributes: asuci, duggandha, etc.) AN iii.269; sāvajjakammāni (as deserving Niraya) (opp. avajja → sagga AN ii.237; kammāni ānantarikāni deeds which have an immediate effect; there are five, enumd at Vb 378. (e) deeds characterized as good or meritorious (kusala bhaddaka, etc.) taṃ k˚ṃ katvā kusalaṃ sukhudrayaṃ DN iii.157; puñña-kammo of meritorious (character SN i.143; kusalehi k˚ehi vippayuttā carati viññāṇacariyā Pts i.80; kusalassa k˚ssa katattā Vb 173 sq. 266 sq.; 297 sq.; kusala-k˚-paccayāni Bdhd 12; puññakamma merit, compd with kapparukkha in its rewarding power Vv-a 32 (cp. puññânubhāva-nissandena “in consequence of their being affected with merit Pv-a 58)-Cp. also cpds.: kamma-kilesa, k˚-ṭṭhāna k˚-patha; k˚lakkhaṇa k˚-samādāna.

3. (Interaction) A. in subjective relation; (a) character of interaction as regards action; action or deed as having results: phala and vipāka (fruit and maturing); both expressions being used either singly or jointly, either˚-or independt; phala: tassa mayhaṃ atīte katassa kammassa phalaṃ “the fruit of a deed done by me in former times Thag-a 270; Vv 479 (= Vv-a 202); desanā… k-phalaṃ paccakkhakāriṇī “an instruction demonstrating the fruit of action” Pv-a 1; similarly Pv-a 2; cp. also ibid 26, 49, 52, 82 (v.l. for kammabala). vipāka: yassa k˚ssa vipākena… niraye pacceyyāsi… “through the ripening of whatever deed will you be matured (i.e. tortured in N.” MN ii.104; tassa k˚ssa vipākena saggaṃ lokaṃ uppajji “by the result of that deed he went to Heaven SN i.92; SN ii.255; k-vipāka-kovida “well aware of the fruit of action,” i.e. of retribution Snp 653; kissa kvipākena “through the result of what (action)” Pv i.65; inunā asubhena k-vipākena Ne 160; k-vipāka with ref. to avyākata-dhammā: Vb 182; with ref. to jhāna ibid. 268, 281; with ref. to dukkha ibid. 106 k-vipāka-ja produced by the maturing of (some evil action, as one kind of ābādha, illness: AN v.110 = Nd ii.3041; same as result of good action, as one kind of iddhi (supernatural power) Pts ii.174 ■ vipāka (adj.). asakkaccakatānaṃ kammānaṃ vipāko the reaper of careless deeds AN iv.393; der. vepakka (adj.) in dukkha-vepakka resulting in pain Snp 537-phala + vipāka: freq. in form. sukaṭa dukkhaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko DN i.55 = DN iii.264 = MN i.401 = SN iv.348 = AN i.268 = AN iv.226 AN v.265, AN v.286 sq.; cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 8; nissanda-phalabhūto vipāko Thag-a 270; tiṇṇaṃ k˚ānaṃ phalaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ k-ānaṃ vipāko DN ii.186-(b) the effect of the deed on the doer: the consequences fall upon the doer, in the majority of cases expressed as punishment or affliction: yathā yathâyaṃ puriso kammaṃ karoti tathā tathā taṃ paṭisaṃvedissati “in whichever way this man does a deed, in the same way he will experience it (in its effect)” AN i.249; na vijjati so jagati-ppadeso yathā ṭhito muñceyya pāpa-kammā “there is no place in the world where you could escape the consequences of evil-doing” Dhp 127 = Mil 150 = Pv-a 104, cp. Divy 532; so the action is represented as vedaniya, to be felt; in various combinations: in this world or the future state, as good or bad, as much or little AN iv.382 the agent is represented as the inheritor, possessor, of (the results of) his action in the old formula: kammassakā sattā k-dāyādā k-yonī k-bandhū… yaṃ k˚ṃ karonti kalyānaṃ vā pāpakaṃ vā tassa dāyādā bhavanti MN iii.203 = AN iii.72 sq. = 186 = v.88~288 sq. (see also cpds.). The punishment is expressed by kammakaraṇa (or ˚kāraṇa), “being done back with the deed, or the reaction of the deed, in phrase kamma-karaṇaṃ kāreti or kārāpeti “he causes the reaction of the deed to take place” and pass, kamma-karaṇā karīyati he is afflicted with the reaction, i.e. the punishment of his doing. The 5 main punishments in Niraya see under kāraṇaṃ, the usual punishments (beating with whips etc.) are enumerated passim, e.g. MN iii.164, MN iii.181; and Nd ii.604. [As regards form and meaning Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 and 1893, 15 proposes kāraṇā f. “pain, punishment” fr. k̆ṛ̆ to tear or injure, “the pains of karma, or torture”; Prof. Duroiselle follows him, but with no special reason: the derivation as nt. causative-abstr. fr karoti presents no difficulty.]-ye kira bho pāpakāni k˚-āni karonti te diṭṭh’ eva dhamme evarūpā vividhā k-kāraṇā karīyanti, kim anga pana parattha! “Those who, as you know, do evil are punished with various tortures even in this world, how much more then in the world to come!” MN iii.181; MN iii.186 = AN i.142; sim k˚-kāraṇāni kārenti (v.l. better than text-reading SN iv.344; Sdhp 7; Nd ii.on dukkha. As k-karaṇaṃ saṃvidahiṃsu Ja ii.398; kamma-kāraṇa-ppatta one who undergoes punishment Vism 500. See also examples under 2d and MN i.87; AN i.47; Ja v.429; Mil 197.

B. in objective relation: universal karma, law of cause and consequence ■ (a) karma as cause of existence (see also d, purāṇa˚ and pubbe kataṃ k˚): compared to the fruitful soil (khetta), as substratum of all existence in kāma, rūpa, arūpa dhātu AN i.223 (kāmadhātu-vepakkañ ce kammaṃ nâbhavissa api nu kho kāmabhavo paññāyethā ti? No h’etaṃ… iti kho kammaṃ khettaṃ… ); as one of the 6 causes or substrata of existence AN iii.410; kammanā vattati loko kammanā vattati pajā “by means of karma the world goes on, mankind goes on” Snp 654; kamma-paccayā through karma Pv-a 25 (= Kh 207); k˚ṃ kilesā hetu saṃsārassa “k. and passions are the cause of saṃsāra (renewed existence)” Ne 113; see on k. as principle Pts ii.78; Pts ii.79 (ch. vii., kamma-kathā) MN i.372 sq.; Ne 161; Ne 180

182; k. as 3 fold: Bdhd 117; as 4 fold MN iii.215 and as cause in general Vism 600 (where enumd as one of the 4 paccaya’s or stays of rūpa, viz. k., citta, utu āhāra); Bdhd 63, 57, 116, 134 sq.; Vb 366; Mil 40 sq. as a factor in the five-fold order (dhammatā or niyama) of the cosmos: k˚-niyama DA. on D 11, 12; Dhs-a. 272; Cp. cpds.: kammaja (resulting from karma Bdhd 68, 72, 75; ˚-vātā, birth-pains i.e. the winds resulting from karma (caliṃsu) Dhp-a i.165; Dhp-a ii.262 k˚-nimitta Bdhd 11, 57, 62; k˚-sambhava Bdhd 66 k˚-samuṭṭhāna Vism 600; Bdhd 67, 72; see further cpds. below ■ (b) karma as result or consequence There are 3 kamma-nidānāni, factors producing karma and its effect: lobha, dosa, moha, as such (tīṇi nidānāni kammānaṃ samudayāya, 3 causes of the arising of karma) described AN i.134 = AN i.263 = AN iii.338 = Nd ii.517 so also AN v.86; AN v.262; Vb 208. With the cessation of these 3 the factor of karma ceases: lobha-kkhayā kamma-nidāna-saṃkhayo AN v.262. There are 3 other nidānāni as atīte anāgate paccuppanne chanda AN i.264 and 3 others as producing or inciting existence (called here kamma-bhava, consequential existence) are puñña, apuñña, ānejja (merit, demerit and immovability) Vb 137 = Nd ii.471 ■ (c) karma as causeconsequence: its manifestation consists in essential likeness between deed and result, cause and effect: like for like “as the cause, so the result.” Karma in this special sense is Retribution or Retaliation; a law, the working of which cannot be escaped (cp. Dhp 127, as quoted above 3 A (b), and Pv ii.717: sace taṃ pāpakaṃ kammaṃ karissatha karotha vā, na vo dukkhā pamutt atthi)-na hi nassati kassaci kammaṃ “nobody’s (trace, result of) action is ever lost” Snp 666; puññâpuñña-kammassa nissandena kanaka vimāne ekikā hutvā nibbatti “through the consequence of both merit and demerit” Pv-a 47; cp. Vv-a 14; yatth’ assa attabhāvo nibbattati tattha taṃ k˚ṃ vipaccati “wherever a man comes to be born, there ripens his action AN i.134 ■ correspondence between “light” and “dark” deeds and their respective consequence are 4 fold: kaṇha-kamma → kaṇha vipāka, sukka˚, kaṇhasukka akaṇha-asukka: DN iii.230 = MN i.389 = AN ii.230 sq.; so sakena kammena nirayaṃ upapajjati Nd ii.304iii-ānubhāva -ukkhitta “thrown, set into motion, by the power of k.” Pv-a 78; sucarita-k-ânubhavâvanibbattāni vimānāni “created by the power of their result of good conduct” Vv-a 127; k-ânubhāvena by the working of k. Pv-a 77; k˚ -vega -ukkhittā (same) Pv-a 284; yathā kamm -ūpaga “undergoing the respective consequences (of former deeds) affected with respective karma: see cpds., and cp. yathā kammaṃ gato gone (into a new existence) according to his karma Ja i.153 & freq.; see cpds.; k-sarikkhatā “the karma-likeness, the correspondence of cause and consequence: taṃ k-s˚ṃ vibhāventaṃ suvaṇṇamayaṃ ahosi “this, manifesting the karma-correspondence, was golden Vv-a 6; so also k-sarikkhaka, in accordance with their deed, retributionary, of kamma-phalaṃ, the result of action: tassa kamma-sarikkhakaṃ kammaphalaṃ hoti “for her the fruit of action became like action,” i.e. the consequence was according to her deed. Pv-a 206 Pv-a 284; Pv-a 258; as nt.: k-s˚ṃ pan’assa udapādi “the retribution for him has come” Dhp-a i.128; Ja iii.203; cp. also Mil 40 sq.; 65 sq.; 108 ■ (d) The working and exhaustion of karma, its building up by new karma (nava˚) and its destruction by expiration of old karma (purāṇa). The final annihilation of all result (˚kkhaya constitutes Arahantship. nava → purāṇa-kamma: as aparipakka, not ripe, and paropakka, ripe DN i.54 = SN iii.212; as pañca-kammuno satāni, etc. ibid.; kāyo… purāṇaṃ k˚ṃ abhisankhataṃ (“our body is an accumulation of former karma”) SN ii.65 = Nd ii.680 D; see also A ii.197; Pv iv.71; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 45; Ne 179; and with simile of the snake stripping its slough (porāṇassa k˚ssa parikkhīṇattā… santo yathā kammaṃ gacchati) Pv-a 63 ■ k˚-nirodha or ˚kkhaya: so… na tāva kālaṃ karoti yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ vyanti hoti “He does not die so long as the evil karma is unexhausted” AN i.141≈; nava-purāṇāni k˚āni desissāmi k˚-nirodhaṃ k˚-nirodha-gāminiñ ca paṭipadaṃ “the new and the old karma I shall demonstrate to you the destruction of k. and the way which leads to the destruction of k.” SN iv.132~A iii.410;… navānaṃ k˚ānaṃ akaraṇā setughātaṃ; iti k-kkhayā dukkhakkhayo… (end of misery through the end of karma AN i.220 = MN ii.214; same Pts i.55

57; cp. also AN i.263 Nd ii.411 (expl. as kamma-parāyaṇa vipāka-p˚: “gone beyond karma and its results,” i.e. having attained Nibbāna). See also the foll. cpds.: k˚-âbhisankhīsa ˚āvaraṇa, ˚kkhaya, ˚nibandhana.

-ādhikata ruled by karma, Mil 67, Mil 68; ˚ena by the influence of k. ibid. -ādhiggahita gripped by karma Mil 188, Mil 189; -ānurūpa (adj.) (of vipāka) according to one’s karma Ja iii.160; DN-a i.37; -ābhisaṅkhāra (3 B) accumulation of k. Nd ii.116, Nd ii.283, Nd ii.506. -ābhisanda in ˚ena in consequence of k. Mil 276, cp. J.P.T.S. 1886 146; -āraha see I.; -āyatana 1. work Vb 324, cp Mil 78; Mil 2. action = kamma Ja iii.542; cp. Ja iv.451, Ja iv.452 -āyūhana the heaping up of k. Vism 530; Dhs-a 267 Dhs-a 268; cp. k˚ṃ āyūhi Mil 214 and J.P.T.S. 1885, 58 -āvaraṇa the obstruction caused by k. AN iii.436 Pp 13 = Vb 341 (in defiName of sattā abhabbā: kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā, kiles˚, vipāk˚… ), Kv 341; Mil 154, Mil 155; Vism 177 (= ānantariya-kamma) -ūpaga in yatha kamm-ûpage satte: the beings as undergoing (the consequences of) their respective kamma (3B) in form. cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate… pajānāti (or passati) Vin iii.5 = DN i.82 = SN ii.122 (214) v.266 = AN iv.178 = AN v.13 (35, 200, 340) = Vb 344; abbreviated in MN iii.178; Nett. 178; see also similar Snp 587 Bdhd 111; -upacaya accumulation of k. Kvn A. 156 -kathā exposition of k.; chapter in Pts ii.98; -kāma (adj. desirous of good karma Thig 275; Pv-a 174; a˚ opp. inactive, indolent AN iv.92, Pv-a 174; -kiriyā -dassana (adj.) understanding the workings of k. Ja i.45; -kiliṭṭha bad, evil k. Dhp 15 (= Dhp-a i.129, expl. kiliṭṭha-k˚) -kilesa (2) depravity of action, bad works, there are 4 enumd at DN iii.181 = Ja iii.321, as the non-performance of sīla 1

4 (see sīla), equal to pāpa-kāya-k˚; -kkhaya (3 B) the termination, exhaustion of the influence of k. its destruction: sabba-k˚-kkhayaṃ patto vimutto upadhi-sankhaye SN i.134; as brought about by neutral indifferent kamma: DN iii.230 = AN ii.230 sq.; MN i.93; Dhs-a 89; -ja (3 B) produced by k. Ja i.52; as one mode of the origin of disease Mil 135; Nd ii.3041; appld. to all existence Mil 271; Vism 624 (kammajaṃ āyatanadvāra-vasena pākaṭaṃ hoti); appld to rūpa Vism 451 Vism 614; appl. to pains of childbirth (˚vātā) Ja i.52, Dhp-a i.165 a˚ not caused by k., of ākāsa and nibbāna Mil 268, Mil 271 -ṭṭhāna (2) 1. a branch of industry or occupation, profession said of diff. occupations as farmer, trader householder and mendicant MN ii.197; AN v.83. 2. occasion or ground for (contemplating) kamma (see ṭhāna ii.2. c.), kamma-subject, a technical term referring to the instruments of meditation, esp. objects used by meditation to realize impermanence. These exercises (“stations of exercise” Expos. 224) are highly valued as leading to Arahantship Dhp-a i.8 (yāva arahattaṃ kamma-ṭṭhānaṃ kathesi), 96; Pv-a 98 (catu-saccakamma-ṭṭhāna-bhāvanā meditation on the 4 truths and the objects of meditation). Freq. in phrase kammaṭṭhāne anuyutto (or anuyoga vasena) na cirass’eva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi: Ja iii.36; Sāsv 49; see also Ja i.7, Ja i.97 Ja i.182, Ja i.303, Ja i.414; Sdhp 493. These subjects of meditation are given as 38 at Dhs-a 168 (cp. Cpd. 202), as 32 (dvattiṃs’ ākāra-k˚) at Vism 240 sq., as 40 at Vism 110 sq. (in detail); as pañca-sandhika at Vism 277 some of them are mentioned at Ja i.116; Dhp-a i.221, Dhp-a i.336 Dhp-a iv.90 ■ ˚ṃ anuyuñjati to give oneself up to meditation Sāsv 151; Pv-a 61 ■ ˚ṃ uggaṇhāti to accept from his teacher a particular instrument of meditation Vism 277 sq. (also ˚assa uggaho & uggaṇhana); Kp-a 40; Dhp-a i.9, Dhp-a i.262; Dhp-a iv.106; Pv-a 42 ■ ˚ṃ katheti to teach a pupil how to meditate on one of the k˚ Dhp-a i.8, Dhp-a i.248 Dhp-a i.336; Pv-a 61 ■ ˚ṃ adāsi Dhp-a iv.106; ˚gaṇhāti Ja iii.246 Vism 89; ˚ācikkhana instruction in a formula of exercise Dhs-a 246; ˚dāyaka the giver of a k-ṭṭh˚ object, the spiritual adviser and teacher, who must be a kalyāṇamitta (q.v.), one who has entered the Path; Vism 89 Bdhd 89, 91, cp. Vism 241; -ṭṭhānika a person practising kammaṭṭhāna Vism 97, Vism 187, Vism 189; Dhp-a i.335; -tappana the being depressed on acct. of one’s (bad) karma Dhp-a i.150-dāyāda (3 A (b) and cp. ˚ssaka) the inheritor of k., i.e. inheriting the consequences of one’s own deeds MN i.390; Mil 65 = Dhs-a 66; -dvāra “the door of action,” i.e. the medium by which action is manifested (by kāya, vacī, mano) (s. 2b) Ja iv.14 KvuA 135; Dhs-a 82; Bdhd 8; -dhāraya name of a class of noun-compounds Kacc 166; -nānatta manifoldness of k. Dhs-a 64 (also-nānākaraṇa ib.); -nibandhana (3 B) bound to k. (: rathass’āṇī va yāyato, as the linchpin to the cart) Snp 654; -nibbatta (3 B) produced through k. Mil 268; Dhs-a 361; -nimitta the sign token of k. Dhs-a 411; -nirodha the destruction of k [see 3 B (d)]; -paccaya the ground, basis of karma Vism 538; KvuA 101; ˚paccayena by means of k Ja vi.105, Vism 538; (adj.) Ja v.271, Dhs-a 304; -paṭisaraṇa (a) having k. as a place of refuge or as a protector Ja vi.102; Mil 65; cp. Dhs-a 66; -paṭibāḷha strong by k. Mil 301; -pathā (2 b) pl. the ways of acting (= sīla q.v.), divided into kusala (meritorious, good) and akusala (demeritorious, evil) and classified according to the 3 manifestations into 3 kāya˚, 4 vācī˚, 3 mano˚ altogether 10; so at Vin v.138, SN ii.168, AN v.57, AN v.268 as kus˚ and akus˚ at DN iii.71, DN iii.269, DN iii.290; as 7 only at SN ii.167; as akus˚ only at AN v.54, AN v.266; Vb 391; Ne 43; Bdhd 129, 131; ˚ppatta having acquired the 10 items of (good) action Sdhp 56, Sdhp 57. -phala [3 A (a)] the fruit of k., the result of (formerly) performed actions Ja i.350; Vv-a 39, Pv-a 1, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 52; ˚-upajīvin 1. living on the fruit of one’s labour (ad I) Ja iv.160;

2. living according to the result of former deeds AN ii.135 -bandhu having k. as one’s relative, i.e. closely tied to one’s karma (see ˚ssaka) Thag 496; cp. Ja vi.100, etc -bala the power of k. Ja vi.108; Pv-a 82. -bhava [3 B (b)] karmic existence, existence through karma Vb 137; Dhs-a 37; -bhūmi 1. the place of work Ja iii.411; Ja iii.2. the ground of actions, i.e. the field of meritorious deeds Mil 229; -mūla (good) k. as a price (for long life, etc.) Mil 333, Mil 334, Mil 341; -mūlaka produced by k. Mil 134; -yoni having k. for matrix, i.e. as the cause of rebirth Mil 65; Dhs-a 66. -lakkhaṇa having k. as distinctive characteristic AN i.102 AA 370; -vagga name of section in Nipāta IV of Anguttara (Nos. 232

238) AN ii.230 sq.; -vavaṭṭhāna the continuance of k. Dhs-a 85; -vāda (a) holding to the view of (the power and efficacy of) k. SN ii.33 sq.; AN i.287 (+ kiriyavāda, viriyavāda); -vādin believing in k. DN i.115; Vin i.71; Ja vi.60; -vipāka [3 A (a)] the ripening of k., the result of one’s actions (see above Vb 106, Vb 182, Vb 268, Vb 281; as one of the four mysteries (acinteyyāni) of Buddhism at Mil 189˚ja produced as a result of k.: DN ii.20; Mhbv 78; Pts ii.174, Pts ii.213; Mil 135; Vism 382 (appld to iddhi); concerning disease as not produced by k., see A v.110; Mil 134 Mil 135; AA 433, 556. -visuddhi meritorious karma Dhp 16 (= Dhp i.132); -visesa variety or difference of k Dhs-a 313; -vega the impetus of k. Pv-a 284; -sacca (adj.) having its reality only in k.; said of loka, the world AN ii.232. -samādāna (2) the acquisition of ways of acting, one’s character, or the incurring of karma either as micchādiṭṭhi˚ (of wrong views) or sammādiṭṭhi (conforming to the right doctrine), so in yathākamm-ûpaga passage (q.v.): DN iii.96; MN i.70; MN iii.178 MN iii.179; four such qualities or kinds of karma enum. at Ne 98; of Buddha’s knowledge as regards the quality of a man’s character: SN v.304; AN iii.417 sq.; Pts ii.174 Vb 338; -samārambha [3 B (a)] having its beginning in k.; said of loka, the world of men; with ˚ṭṭhāyin: lasting as long as the origin (cause) of k. exists AN ii.232 -samuṭṭhāna [3 B (a)] rising from k. Mil 127; Dhs-a 82 Kvn 100; -sambhava produced by k. Mil 127; -sarikkhaka [see above 3 B (c)] similar or like in consequence to the deed done Dhp-a iii.334 (˚vipāka). -sarikkhatā (do.) the likeness between deed and result; -sahāya “companion to the deed,” said of thought Dhs-a 323 -socana sorrowing for one’s (bad) deeds Dhp-a i.128 -(s)saka [3 A (b), q.v.] (a) one whose karma is his own property, possessed of his own k. MN iii.203, etc. (in phrase k., kamma-dāyāda, kamma-bandhu, etc.; cp Vism 301); Ja iv.128; Mil 65; DN-a i.37 = who goes according to his own karma (attano k˚ânurūpaṃ gatiṃ gacchanti, n’eva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena… ); der. ˚tā the fact that every being has his very own karma AN iii.186; Dhs 1366 Vb 324; ˚ta as adj.; qualifying ñāṇa, i.e. the knowledge of the individual, specific nature of karma Dhs 1366, Vb 328.

Vedic karman, work esp. sacrificial process. For ending ˚man = Idg. *men cp. Sk. dhāman = Gr.δημα, Sk. nāman = Lat nomen

Kammaka

(adj.) connected with, dependt on karma Mil 137 (a˚). Kammaniya, iya & kammanna;

fr. kamma

Kammanīya, ˚iya & kammañña

(adj.) “workable,” fit for work, dexterous, ready, wieldy. Often of citta “with active mind” in formula vigatūpakkilesa mudubhūta k˚ ṭhita ānejjappatta DN i.76, etc. = MN i.22 Pp 68; SN iii.232; SN v.92, SN v.233; AN i.9; Dhp-a i.289; Bdhd 101, expld at Vism 377 (˚iya). Further of citta (muduñ ca kammaññañ ca pabhassarañ ca) AN i.257 (reads ˚iyañ) = Vism 247; of upekhā and sati Nd ii.661 cp. Bdhd 104; of kāya & citta Bdhd 121. Said of a lute = workable, ready for playing AN iii.375 = Vin i.182 Of the body AN iv.335; not ready, sluggish AN iv.333; Vism 146kammañña-bhāva the state of being workable, readiness, of kāya Dhs 46, of vedanā etc., Dhs 326, of citta Dhs-a 130, see next; ; unworkable condition Dhs-a 130.

Kammaññatā

(f.) workableness, adaptability, readiness, appl. to the wood of the sandal tree (in simile) AN i.9; said of kāya and citta in connection with kammaññattaṃ k˚bhāvo k˚mudutā: Dhs 46 Dhs 47 = Dhs 326 = Dhs 641 = Dhs 730; cp. Dhs 585; similar Bdhd 16, 20 71; Dhs-a 136, Dhs-a 151 (= kammasādutā) ; unworkableness inertness, unwieldiness, sluggishness Mil 300; Ne 86 Ne 108, cp. Dhs 1156, Dhs 1236; Dhs-a 255; expld as cittagelaññaṃ Dhs-a 377; as cetaso līnattaṃ Vb 373.

abstr. fr. prec.

Kammanta

1. doing, acting, working; work, business, occupation profession. paṭicchanna˚ of secret acting Snp 127 Vb 357; as being punished in Niraya AN i.60; SN iv.180 as occupation esp. in pl. kammantā: SN v.45 = SN v.135; Dhp-a i.42 (kammantā nappavattanti, no business proceeds all occupations are at a standstill); anākula Snp 262 = Kp v.5; abbhantarā k˚ uṇṇā ti vā, kappāsā ti vā as housework, falling to the share of the wife AN iii.37 = AN iv.365; khetta˚ occupation in the field AN iii.77; see also D i.71; MN iii.7; SN i.204; Mil 9, Mil 33 and below; as place of occupation: Snp p.13, Pv-a 62 Phrases: ˚ṃ adhiṭṭhāti to look after the business AN i.115; Pv-a 141; jahati give up the occupation SN iv.324; Pv-a 133; ˚ṃ payojeti to do or carry on business DN i.71; DN ii.175; DN iii.66, DN iii.95; AN iii.57; ˚ṃ pavatteti to set a business on foot Pv-a 42 (and vicāreti: Pv-a 93); ˚ṃ saṃvidahati to provide with work AN iv.269 = AN iv.272 Mvu vi.16.

2. deed, action in ethical sense kamma, character, etc., Kh 136 (k˚ = kamma); pāpa˚ doing wrong Pv iv.81; Pv iv.161; Ja vi.104 (opp. puñña˚) as specified by kāya˚ vacī ˚mano˚ AN v.292 sq.; Vv-a 130 (in parisuddha-kāya-kammantatā); dhammikā k˚ā MN ii.191; ākiṇṇa-k˚ (evam-) of such character SN i.204 kurūra-k˚ (adj.) of cruel character AN iii.383 = Pp 56 (in def. of puggalo orabbhiko); sammā˚; of right doing opp. micchā˚, as constituting one element of character as pertaining to “Magga” (: q.v.) DN ii.216; SN ii.168 SN v.1; AN iii.411; Bdhd 135; expl. as kāya-kamma (= sīla 1

3) at SN v.9 = Vb 105; Vb 235; as kāya-duccaritehi ārati virati… Vb 106.

-ādhiṭṭhāyika superintendent of work Dhp-a i.393 -ṭṭhāna: 1. the spot where the ceremonies of the Ploughing Festival take place Ja i.57; Ja i.2. the common ground of a village, a village bazaar Ja iv.306; -dāsa a farm-servant Ja i.468; -bheri the drum announcing the (taking up of) business Dhp-a iii.100; -vipatti “failure of action,” evil-doing AN i.270 opp. -sampadā “perfection of action, right-doing” AN i.271; -saṃvidhāna the providing of work DN iii.191 (one of the 5 duties of the gahapati).

Sk. karmānta; kamma + anta, cp. anta 14.

Kammantika

(adj.) 1. a business manager Ja i.227.

2. a labourer, artisan, assistant Ja i.377.

fr. kammanta

Kammāra

a smith, a worker in metals generally DN ii.126, AN v.263; a silversmith Snp 962; Dhp 239; Ja i.223; a goldsmith Ja iii.281; Ja v.282. The smiths in old India do not seem to be divided into black-, gold-and silver-smiths, but seem to have been able to work equally well in iron, gold, and silver, as can be seen e.g. from Ja iii.282 and Vv-a 250, where the smith is the maker of a needle. They were constituted into a guild, and some of them were well-to-do as appears from what is said of Cunda at DN ii.126; owing to their usefulness they were held in great esteem by the people and king alike Ja iii.281.

-uddhana a smith’s furnace, a forge Ja vi.218; -kula a smithy MN i.25; kūṭa a smith’s hammer Vism 254 -gaggarī a smith’s bellows SN i.106; Ja vi.165; Vism 287 (in comparison); -putta “son of a smith,” i.e. a smith by birth and trade DN ii.126; AN v.263; as goldsmith Ja vi.237, Snp 48 (Nd ii.ad loc.: k˚ vuccati suvaṇṇakāro) -bhaṇḍu (bhaṇḍ, cp. Sk. bhāṇḍika a barber) a smith with a bald head Vin i.76; -sālā a smithy Vism 413 Mvu 5, Mvu 31.

Vedic karmāra

Kammāsa

1. variegated, spotted, blemished Ja v.69 (˚vaṇṇa), said of the spotted appearance of leprosy ■ fig. inconsistent, varying AN ii.187.

2. (nt. inconsistency, blemish, blot AN iv.55; Vism 51 not spotted, i.e. unblemished, pure, said of moral conduct DN ii.80; AN ii.52; AN iii.36, AN iii.572; AN vi.54, AN vi.192 Bdhd 89.

-kārin in ; not acting inconsistently AN ii.187; cp ibid. 243. -pāda 1. (a) having speckled feet Ja v.475 (b) (m) one who has speckled feet, i.e. an ogre; also Name of a Yakkha Ja v.503, Ja v.511 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1909, 236 sq.).

Vedic kalmāṣa, which may be referred, with kalana, kaluṣa, kalanka and Gr. κελαινός to *qel fr. which also Sk. kāla black-blue, Gr. κηλάς, κηλίς; Lat. cālīgo & callidus

Kammika

(adj.-n.) 1. (-˚) one who does or looks after; one whose occupation is of such & such a character:; āya˚; revenue-overseer, treasurer Dhp-a i.184 sabba˚; (always with ref. to amacca, the king’s minister one who does everything, the king’s confidant Vism 130; Pv-a 81 ■ On term ādi˚ beginner (e.g. Vism 241 see Cpd. 53, 129 n.2.

2. a merchant, trader, in jalapatha˚; and thalapatha˚; by sea & by land Ja i.121

3. a superintendent, overseer, manager Ja ii.305 (executioner of an order); vi.294; Mvu 30, Mvu 31.

4. one connected with the execution of an ecclesiastical Act Vin ii.5 (cp. p. 22); Bdhd 106.

fr. kamma

Kammin

(adj.) (-˚) doing, performing, practising Ja vi.105; Sdhp 196, Sdhp 292.

fr. kamma, cp. kammaka

Kamya

(adj.) (-˚) wishing for, desiring Dhs-a 365 (sādhu˚; v.l. ˚kāma); kamyā, abl. in the desire for, see next.

fr. kām

Kamyā

(-˚) in abl. function (of kamyā f. for kamyāya or kamya adj.?) in the desire for: SN i.143 = Ja iii.361 (expld by kāmatāya); Snp 854, Snp 929. Kamyata (-) & kammata

Kamyatā (-˚) & kammatā

(Nd) wish, desire, longing for, striving after; with inf. or equivalent kathetu˚ Vv-a 18; muñcitu˚ (+ paṭisankhā) Pts i.60 Pts i.65; Bdhd 123; asotu˚, adaṭṭhu˚ and adassana˚ Vb 372. Esp. in definitions, as of chanda: kattu˚; Vb 208; Bdhd 20; of jappā: puñcikatā sādhu˚; Vb 351 Vb 361 = Dhs 1059; Nd ii.s. v. taṇhāii (: has the better reading mucchañci katā asādhu˚; v.l. pucchañci˚ both Vb and Dhs have sādu in text which should be corrected to asādhu˚; see detail under puñcikatā) of māna; ketu˚; Nd ii.505; Dhs 1116 = Dhs 1233; Vb 350 sq.; Bdhd 24; of lapanā: pāṭu˚ (v.l. cāṭu˚) Vb 246 Vb 352 ■ As abl. (= kamyā) in dassana˚ SN i.193 = Thag 1241; Snp 121 (expl. as icchāya Snp-a 179). Cp. kammaññatā & kamma-sādutā.;

fr. kām

Kaya

purchase, buying AN iii.226 (+ vi˚).

-(a)kkaya, buying & selling Pv i.56 (see also Kp vii.6 and note). -vikkaya (kraya vikraya) buying selling, trade in ˚paṭivirata DN i.5 = AN ii.209 = AN v.205 Pp 58; DN i.64; SN v.473; Snp 929; Ja v.243; Khus 114; Dhp-a i.78; Pv-a 29 (= Kp-a 212).

fr. kri

Kayati

to buy; Inf. ketuṃ Ja iii.282; cp. kiṇāti.

krī, perhaps connected with kṛ

Kayika

a buyer, trader, dealer Mil 334.

fr. krī, cp. BSk. krayika Divy 505

Kayin

a buyer Ja vi.110.

Kara

1. (adj.) (-˚) producing, causing, forming, making, doing, e.g. anta˚ putting an end to; pabhaṃ causing splendour; pāpa˚ doing evil; divā˚ & divasa the day-maker, i.e. the sun; kaṇhabhāva˚ causing a “black” existence (of pāpakamma) Ja iv.9; padasandhi˚ forming a hiatus Pv-a 52; vacana˚, etc. 2. (m) “the maker,” i.e. the hand Mvu 5, Mvu 255–⁠256 30, 67. -atikaraṃ (adv.) doing too much, going too far Ja i.431; -dukkara (a) difficult to do, not easy, hard arduous SN i.7; SN iv.260; AN i.286; AN iv.31, AN iv.135; AN v.202 + durabhisambhavo Snp 429 Snp 701; Ud. 61; (n. nt.) something difficult, a difficult task AN i.286 (cp. iv.31) Ja i.395; Mil 121, dukkara-kārikā “doing of a hard task,” exertion, austerity MN i.93; Nd ii.262b. -sukara easy to do SN i.9; SN ii.181; Dhp 163; Ud 61; na sukaraṃ w. inf. it is not easy to… DN i.250; AN iii.52, AN iii.184 AN iv.334.

-kaṭaka (m. nt.) a hand-wheel, i.e. a pulley by which to draw up a bucket of water Vin ii.122; cp. Vin. Texts iii.112; -ja “born of kamma” in karaja-kāya the body sprung from action, an expression always used in a contemptible manner, therefore = the impure, vile, low body AN v.300; Ja i.5; Vism 287, Vism 404; DN-a i.113, DN-a i.217 DN-a i.221; Dhp-a i.10; Dhp-a iii.420; Dhs-a 403. karaja-rūpa Vism 326. -tala the palm of the hand Mhbv 6, 34 -mara “one who ought to die from the hand (of the enemy),” but who, when captured, was spared and employed as slave; a slave Ja iii.147, Ja iii.361; Ja iv.220; Dhp-a iii.487; -˚ānītā a woman taken in a raid, but subsequently taken to wife; one of the 10 kinds of wives (see itthi) Vin iii.140 (= dhajāhaṭā); -gāhaṃ gaṇhāti to make prisoner Ja i.355; Ja iii.361; -mita “to be measured with (two) hands,” in ˚majjhā, a woman of slender waist Ja v.219; Ja vi.457.

fr. kṛ;

Karaka1

1. Water-pot, drinking-vessel (= pānīya-bhājana Pv-a 251). It is one of the seven requisites of a samaṇa Vin ii.302. It is called dhammakaraka there and at ii. 118, 177. This means “regulation waterpot” as it was provided with a strainer (parissavana to prevent injury to living things. See also Mil 68; Pv iii.224; Pv-a 185.

2. hail (also karakā) Ja iv.167; Mil 308; Mvu xii.9.

-vassa a shower of hail, hail-storm Ja iv.167; Mil 308; Dhp-a i.360.

Etymology unknown. The Sanskrit is also karaka, and the medieval koṣas give as meaning, besides drinking vessel, also a coco-nut shell used as such (with which may be compared Lat. carīna, nutshell, keel of a boat; and Gr. κάρυα, nut.) It is scarcely possible that this could have been the original meaning. The coconut was not cultivated, perhaps not even known, in Kosala at the date of the rise of Pali and Buddhism.

Karakarā

(for kaṭakaṭā, q.v.) (adv.) by way of gnashing or grinding the teeth (cp. Sk. dantān kaṭakaṭāpya) i.e. severely (of biting) Ja iii.203 (passage ought to be read as karakarā nikhāditvā).

Karañja

the tree Pongamia glabra, used medicinally Vin i.201; Ja vi.518, Ja vi.519.

cp. Sk. karañja, accord. to Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 176 the Dalbergia arborea

Karaṇa

1. adj. (f. ī) (-˚) doing, making, causing, producing; as cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ (leading to clear knowledge) SN iv.331; SN v.97; Iti 83; and acakkhu etc. SN v.97; nāthā ˚ā dhammā AN v.23 (cp. v.89) and thera˚ AN ii.22; dubbaṇṇa˚ SN v.217; see also D i.245 MN i.15; SN v.96, SN v.115; AN iv.94; AN v.268; Mil 289. 2. (nt.) (-˚) the making, producing of; the doing, performance of (= kamma), as bali˚ offering of food = bali kamma) Pv-a 81; gabbha˚ Snp 927; pānujja Snp 256. 3. (abs.) (a) the doing up, preparing Ja v.400 Ja vi.270 (of a building: the construction) (b) the doing performance of, as pāṇâtipātassa k˚ and ak˚ (“commission and omission”); Dhp-a i.214; means of action Ja iii.92. (c) ttg. the instrumental case (with or without ˚vacana) Pv-a 33; Vv-a 25, Vv-a 53, Vv-a 162, Vv-a 174. -˚atthe in the sense of, with the meaning of the instrumental case Ja iii.98; Ja v.444; Pv-a 35; Vv-a 304; Dhs-a 48; Kacc 157–⁠4. (-˚) state, condition; in noun-abstract function ˚ttaṃ (cp. kamma I.2) as nānā˚ (= nānattaṃ) difference MN ii.128; SN iv.294; Bdhd 94; kasi˚ ploughing Pv-a 66 kattabba˚ (= kattabbattaṃ) “what is to be done, i.e. duty Pv-a 30; pūjā˚ veneration Pv-a 30. sakkāra reverence, devotion Snp-a 284.

Note: in massu˚ and kamma˚ some grammarians have tried to derive k˚ from a root kṛ; to hurt, cut, torture (see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15), which is however quite unnecessary [see kamma 3 A (b), kataii 1 (b)]. Karaṇa here stands for kamma, as clearly indicated by semantic grounds as well as by Ja vi.270 where it explains kappita-kesa-massu, and Ja v.309 & Dhp-a i.253 where massukamma takes the place of ˚karaṇa, and Ja iii.314, where it is represented by massu-kutti (C.: massukiriya). Cp. also DN-a i.137 a˚ Negative in all meanings of the positive, i.e. the non-performing Ja i.131; Ja v.222; Ne 81; Pv-a 59; Dhs-a 127; non-undertaking (of business) Ja i.229; noncommission MN i.93; abstaining from Dhs 299. Cpd -uttariya (nt.) angry rejoinder, vehement defence Dhp-a i.44.

fr. kṛ; cp. Vedic karaṇa

Karaṇīya

1. adj. (a) that ought to be, must or should be done, to be done, to be made (= kātabbaṃ karaṇârahaṃ Kp-a 236) Vin i.58; DN i.3, cp. Mil 183; AN v.210; DN-a i.7. Often-˚ in the sense of “doing making,” as yathā kāma˚ SN ii.226; cp. iv.91, 159 “having business” bahu˚ DN ii.76; AN iii.116; SN ii.215 anukampa˚ Pv-a 61:-(b) done, in the sense of undoing i.e. overcome, undone DN ii.76 cp. Dial. ii.81 n

2. (m.) one who has still something left to perform (for the attainment of Arahantship, a sekha Ja iii.23

3. (nt.) (a) what ought to be done, duty, obligation affairs, business DN i.85; DN ii.68, DN ii.74 cp. AN iv.16; MN i.271; SN iii.168; SN iv.281 cp. Vin iii.12; Vin i.139; AN i.58; Snp 143; Snp p.32 (yan te karanīyaṃ taṃ karohi “do what you have to do”) ■ ˚ṃ tīreti to conclude a business Vin. ii.158; Ja v.298. Kataṃ ˚ṃ done is what was to be done, I have done my task, in freq. formula “khīṇā jāti vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ…” to mark the attainment of Arahantship DN i.84; DN ii.68 = DN ii.153; Thig 223; Vin i.14; Snp p.16; DN-a i.226, etc. See Arahant ii.C. There are 3 duties each of a samaṇa, farmer and householder enumerated at AN i.229; AN i.3 of a bhikkhu AN i.230-(b) use, need (with instr.): appamādena k˚ SN iv.125 cetanāya k˚ AN v.2, AN v.312; cp. Mil 5, Mil 78. akaraṇīya 1. (adj.) (a) what ought not to be done, prohibited AN i.58; AN iii.208 = DN-a i.235 ■ (b) incapable of being done (c. gen.) Iti 18 ■ (c) improper, not befitting (c. gen.) Vin i.45 = Vin i.216 = Vin iii.20; Pv-a 64 ■ (d) not to be “done,” i.e. not to be overcome or defeated DN ii.76; AN iv.113 ■ (e) having nothing to do Vin i.154. 2. (nt.) a forbidden matter, prohibition Vin ii.278 sa˚ 1. having business, busy Vin i.155;

2. one who has still something to do (in sense of above 2) DN ii.143 Thag 1045; DN-a i.9.

grd. of karoti

Karaṇīyatā

(f.) the fact that something has to be performed, an obligation Vin ii.89, Vin ii.93; sa˚ being left with something to do Mil 140.

abstr. fr. prec.

Karaṇḍa

(m. nt.) 1. a basket or box of wicker-work Mvu 31, Mvu 98; Dāvs v.60; Dhp-a iii.18;

2. the cast skin, slough of a serpent DN i.77 (= DN-a i.222 ahi-kañcuka) cp. Dial. i.88.

cp. Sk. karaṇḍa, ˚ka, ˚ikā. The Dhātumañjūsā expls k. by “bhājanatthe”

Karaṇḍaka

a box, basket, casket, as dussa˚ MN i.215 = SN v.71 = AN iv.230 (in simile); SN iii.131 SN v.351 cp. Pp 34; Ja i.96; Ja iii.527; Ja v.473 (here to be changed into koraṇḍaka); DN-a i.222 (vilīva˚); Snp-a 11.

fr. last

Karamanda

a shrub Vism 183 (+ kanavīra).

etym.?

Karati1

to cut, injure, hurt; in “karato kārayato chindato chedāpayato…” DN i.52 = MN i.516; SN iii.208.

cp. Sk. kṛntati

Karati2

(˚tī) (f.) a superior kind of bean, the Dolichos catjang Ja vi.536 (= rājamāsa).

Karabha

the trunk of an elephant; in karabhoru (k˚ + ūru) (a woman) with beautiful thighs Mhbv 29.

Karamara

see Kara.

Karaḷa

(karala) a wisp of grass (tiṇa˚) Dhp-a iii.38; Dhs-a 272.

Karavī

the Indian cuckoo Ja vi.539.

cp. Sk. kala-kaṇṭha cuckoo, & kalavinka sparrow

Karavīka

same Ja v.204, Ja v.416; Vv 364; Vism 112, Vism 206; Vv-a 166, Vv-a 219.

-bhāṇin speaking like the cuckoo, i.e. with a clear and melodious voice, one of the mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇas DN ii.20 = DN iii.144 = DN iii.173 = MN ii.137, etc.; cp. Dial. ii.17 n and BSk. kalaviṅka-manojña-bhāṣin Sp. Av.Ś i.371 (Index p. 225, where references to Lalitavist. are given).

Karavīya

(˚iya) = prec. Ja vi.538.

Karavīra

1. the oleander, Nerium odorum. Its flower was used especially in garlands worn by delinquents (see kaṇṭha)

2. a kind of grass Ja iv.92. -patta a kind of arrow MN i.429.

cp. Sk. karavīra

Karahi

(Sk. karhi, when? kar = loc. of pron. st. *quo = Lat. cur why, Goth. hvar, E. where), only in karaha-ci (karhi cid) at some time, generally preceded by kadāci DN i.17; DN ii.139; MN i.177, MN i.454; AN i.179; AN iv.101; Mil 73, Mil 76.

Karin

(adj.) “one who has a hand,” an elephant (cp. hatthin) Mvu 24, Mvu 34; Mvu 25, Mvu 68; Dāvs iv.2. In cpds. kari.

-gajjita the cry of the elephant, an elephant’s trumpeting Dāvs v.56; -vara an excellent elephant Mhbv 4, 143 Dāvs iv.2.

fr. kara

Kari-paribandha

(adj.) bound up in filth, full of filth, disgusting; Ep. of the body Thag 1152 Kari here is abbrev. of karīsa2 (see note ad loc.).

= karīsa-paribaddha

Karīsa1

(nt.) a square measure of land, being that space on which a karīsa of seed can be sown (Tamil karīsa) see Rhys Davids, Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon, p. 18; Ja i.94, Ja i.212; Ja iv.233, Ja iv.276; Vv-a 64.

Karīsa2

(nt.) refuse, filth, excrement dung DN ii.293; Ja i.5; Vism 259, Vism 358 (in detail) Pv-a 87, Pv-a 258; Kp-a 59; mutta˚ urine and faeces AN i.139; Snp 835.

-magga the anus Ja iv.327; -vāca (nt.) a cesspool Ja iii.263 (= gūthakūpa); -vāyin, f. ˚inī diffusing an odour of excrement Pv-a 87.

cp. Sk. karīṣa, to chṛṇatti to vomit, cp. Lat ■ cerda in mūscerda, sūcerda

Karuṇā

(f.) pity compassion. Karuṇā is one of the 4 qualities of character significant of a human being who has attained enfranchisement of heart (ceto-vimutti) in the 4 sentiments viz. mettā k.˚ upekhā muditā Freq. found in this formula with ˚sahagatena cetasā. The first two qualities are complementary, and Snp-a 128 (on Snp 73 explains k˚ as “ahita-dukkh-âpanaya-kāmatā,” the desire of removing bane and sorrow (from one’s fellowmen), whilst mettā is expl. as “hita-sukh-ûpanayakāmatā,” the desire of bringing (to one’s fellow-men) that which is welfare and good. Other definitions are “paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadayakampanaṃ karotī ti” Bdhd 21; “sattesu k˚ karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaṃ karuṇā cetovimutti” as expl. of avihiṃsa dhātu Vb 87; paradukkhāsahana-rasā Vism 318. K˚-sahagatena cetasā denotes the exalted state of compassion for all beings (all that is encompassed in the sphere of one’s good influence: see cātuddisa “extending over the 4 i.e. all, directions): DN i.251; DN iii.78, DN iii.50, DN iii.224; SN iv.296 SN iv.322, SN iv.351; SN v.115; AN i.183, AN i.196; AN ii.129, AN ii.184; AN iii.225 AN v.300, AN v.345; Ja ii.129; Nd ii.on Snp 73; Vb 273, Vb 280; Dhs 1258. The def. of karuṇā at Vism 318 runs “paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadaya-kampanaṃ karoti. Frequently referred to as an ideal of contemplation (in conn. w. bhāvanā & jhāna), so in “karuṇaṃ cetovimuttiṃ bhāveti” SN v.119; AN i.38; AN v.360; in k˚ cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulī-katā, etc. DN iii.248; AN iii.291 AN iv.300; in k˚-sahagataṃ saddhindriyaṃ AN i.42; unspecified SN v.131; AN iii.185; Ne 121, Ne 124; Pts i.8 k˚ + mettā Ne 25; k˚ + muditā Bdhd 16 sq., 26 sq. 29; ananta k˚ pañña as Ep. of Buddha Bdhd 1 karuṇaṃ dūrato katvā, without mercy, of the Yamadūtā messengers of Death Sdhp 287; mahā˚; great compassion Pts i.126, Pts i.133; -˚samāpatti a ʻgest,ʼ feat of great compassion: in which Buddha is represented when rising and surveying the world to look for beings to be worthy of his mercy and help DN ii.237; Ps. 1, 126 f Dhp-a i.26, Dhp-a i.367; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 195;

3. As adj. only in cpds. (e.g. ˚vācā merciful speech; neg. akaruṇa merciless Mhbv 85, & ati˚ very merciful Ja iv.142) and as adv. karuṇaṃ pitifully, piteously, mournfully, in k paridevati Ja vi.498, Ja vi.513, Ja vi.551; Cp ix.54; also in abl karuṇā Ja vi.466 ■ See also kāruñña.

-ādhimutta intent upon compassion DN ii.241, DN ii.242 -ānuvattin following the dictates of mercy Dāvs iii.46 -guṇaja originating in the quality of compassion Sdhp 570; -jala water of c., shower of mercy Mil 22; Mhbv 16; -jhāna meditation on pity, ecstasy of c. DN ii.237

39 -ṭṭhāniya worthy of c. Pv-a 72; -para one who is highest in compassion, compassionate Sdhp 112, Sdhp 345; -bala the power of c. Mvu 15, Mvu 61, Mvu 130; Sdhp 577; -brahmavihāra divine state of pity Vism 319. -bhāvanā consideration or cultivation of pity Vism 314 sq. -rasa the sweetness of c. Mhbv 16; -vihāra (a heart) in the state of c. Vism 324 (& adj. ˚vihārin); DN-a i.33; -sāgara an ocean of mercy Mhbv 7; -sītala “cool with c.” + hadaya whose heart is tempered with mercy Sdhp 33; DN-a i.1.

cp. Vedic karuṇa nt. (holy) action; Sk. karuṇā, fr. kṛ. As adj. karuṇa see under 3.

Karuṇāyati

to feel pity for, to have compassion on Snp 1065 (˚āyamāna; expl. by Nd ii.as anuddayamāno anurakkh anuggaṇh˚ anukamp˚); Vb 273; Vism 314. Der. ˚āyanā compassionateness Vb 87 = Vb 273 (and ˚āyitattaṃ ibid.).

v. den. fr. karuṇā; cp. BSk. karuṇāyati Divy 105

Karumbhaka

a species of rice-plant of a ruddy colour Mil 252 (see Mil. trsl. ii.73).

Karumhā

(pl.) a class of Devas DN ii.260.

Kareṇu

elephant, in cpd. -lolita resounding with the noise made by elephants, of a forest Thig 373.

metathesis for kaṇeru, q.v., cp. Sk. kareṇu

Kareṇukā

(f.) [fr. kareṇu) a female elephant Ja ii.343; Dhp-a i.196 (v.l. for kaṇeru).

Kareri

in Childers the tree Capparis trifoliata, but see Brethren, p. 363, n. 2: musk-rose tree or “karer” Thag 1062; Ud 31; Ja v.405; Ja vi.534.

Karoṭi1

(f.) 1. a basin, cup, bowl, dish Ja i.243; Ja ii.363; Ja iii.225; Ja iv.67; Ja v.289, Ja v.290.

2. the skull (cp. kaḷopi On the form cp. Dial. i.227 n.) Ja vi.592.

Karoṭi2

(m.) a class of genii that formed one of the 5 guards of the devas against the asuras Ja i.204, associated with the nāgas (cp. Divy 218; and Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 22). As Name of Supaṇṇas (a kind of Garuḍas expld as “tesaṃ karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaṃ” by C on Ja i.204. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares BSk. karoṭapāṇayah a class of Yakṣas Mvu i.30.

Karoṭika

1. a bowl, basin Ja iv.68; Dhp-a ii.131 (sappi˚).

2. the skull Ja vi.592; where it may be a helmet in the form of a skull.

fr. karoṭi1)

Karoṭiya

= karoṭika 2, Ja vi.593.

Karoti

v. irreg.. Of the endless variety of forms given by grammarians only the foll. are bona fide and borne out by passages from our texts (when bracketed found in gram. works only): I. Act. 1. Ind. Pres karomi, etc. Snp 78, Snp 216, Snp 512, Snp 666 = Dhp 306 = Iti 42 Opt. kare Dhp 42, Dhp 43, pl. (kareyyāma) kareyyātha Snp p.101; or (sing.) kareyya (freq.), kareyyāsi Pv-a 11 kareyya Snp 920, Snp 923; kuriyā (= Sk. kuryāt) Ja vi.206 Ppr. karan Dhp 136, or karonto (f. karontī) Dhp 16, Dhp 116–⁠2. Impf. (akara, etc.).

3. Aor. (akaṃ) akariṃ etc., 3rd sing. akāsi Snp 343, Snp 537, Snp 2nd pl. akattha Pv i.112; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 75; Pv-a 3rd pl. akariṃsu; akaṃsu Snp 882; Pv-a 74; without augment kari Dhp-a ii.59. Prohibitive mā(a)kāsi Snp 339, Snp 1068, etc.

4. Imper. karohi Snp p.32; Snp p.1062; karotha Snp 223; Kp-a 168.

5. Fut karissāmi, etc.; kassāmi Pv iv.139; kāsaṃ Ja iv.286 Ja vi.36; kāhāmi (in sense of I will do, I am determined to do, usually w. puññaṃ & kusalaṃ poetical only) Pv ii.113; Vv 33192; 2nd sing. kāhasi Snp 427, Snp 428; Dhp 154 Dhp 1st pl. kāhāma Pv iv.1011.

6. Inf. kātuṃ Pv-a 4, Pv-a 61 Pv-a 69, Pv-a 115, Kp vi.10, etc.; kattuṃ Vv-a 13; kātave Mvu 35, Mvu 29; Vv 4415 (= kātuṃ); kātuye Thig 418.

7. Pp kata, see sep.

8. Ger. katvā Snp 127, Snp 661, Snp 705, etc. katvāna (poet.) Snp 89, Snp 269, Pv i.13; karitvā see iv. II. Med. 1. Ind. pres. (kubbe, etc.) 3rd sing. kubbati Snp 168, Snp 811; Snp 3rd pl. kubbanti Snp 794; or 3rd sing kurute Snp 94, Snp 796, Snp 819; It. 67; Opt. (kubbe, etc.) 2nd pl. kubbetha Snp 702, Snp 719, Snp 917; Iti 87; or 3rd sing kayirā Snp 728 = Snp 1051; SN i.24; Dhp 53, Dhp 117; kayirātha (always expl. by kareyya) Dhp 25, Dhp 117; Iti 13; Pv i.1111 Kp-a 224; kubbaye Snp 943 ■ Ppr. (kurumāna, kubbāno karāno) (a)kubbaṃ Snp 844, Snp 913; (a)kubbanto Iti 86; f. (vi)kubbantī Vv 112; (a)kubbamāna Snp 777 Snp 778, Snp 897; (vi)kubbamāna Vv 331.

2. Impf. (akariṃ 2nd sing. akarase, etc.) 3rd sing. akubbatha Pv ii.1318 1st pl. akaramhase Ja iii.26, ˚a Dhp-a i.145.

3. Aor (none)

4. Imper. (2nd sing. kurussu, 3rd sing. kurutaṃ 2nd pl. kuruvho) 3rd sing. kurutaṃ (= Sk. kurutāṃ Ja vi.288.

5. Fut. (none). III. Pass. 1. Ind. pres (karīyati, etc.) kayirati Dhp 292 = Thag 635; Kp-a 168 and kīrati Thag 143. Ppr. (karīyamāna, kayīra˚). 2. Fut. kariyissati Vin i.107.

3. Grd. karaṇīya (q.v.), (kayya) kātabba Dhp-a i.338. IV. Caus. I (Denom. to kāra) kārayati = kāreti, in origin. meaning of build, construct, and fig. perform, exercise, rule wield (rajjaṃ): kārehi Pv-a 81 (of huts), kārayissāmi Pv ii.64 (of doll); kāressaṃ Ja v.297 (do.), akārayi Pv ii.1310; akārayuṃ Mvu iv.3; akāresi Mvu 23, Mvu 85 kāretuṃ Pv-a 74; kārayamāna Vv-a 9 (of chair); kāretvā (nāmaṃ) Pv-a 162; karitvā Snp 444 (vasiṃ) 674; 680 (vittiṃ); p. 97 (uttarāsangaṃ). V. Caus. II. Kārāpeti SN i.179; Pv-a 20; Aor. kārāpesi he had (= caused to be) erected, constructed Vin ii.159; fut. kārāpessāmi Mvu 20, Mvu 9; ger. kārāpetvā Pv-a 123; grd. kārapetabba Vin ii.134.

Meanings of karoti: 1. to build, erect Mvu 19, Mvu 36 Mvu 20, Mvu 9 (Caus.).

2. to act, perform, make, do Vin i.155; Ja i.24; Ja ii.153 (tathā karomi yathā na… I prevent cp. Lat. facio ne… ); iii.297; Pv i.88 = ii.619; Mvu 3, Mvu 1; Mvu 7, Mvu 22;

3. to produce Dhp-a i.172;

4. to write compose Ja vi.410; Pv-a 287;

5. to put on, dress Vin ii.277; Ja i.9;

6. to impose (a punishment Mvu 4, Mvu 14;

7. to turn into (with loc. or two acc. Ja ii.32; Mvu 9, Mvu 27;

8. to use as (with two acc. Ja i.113; Ja ii.24;

9. to bring into (with loc.) Ja v.454 Ja v.10. to place (with loc.) Ja v.274; (with acc. of the person Dhp 162. It is very often used periphrastically, where the trsln would simply employ the noun as verb, e.g. kathaṃ k˚ DN ii.98; kodhaṃ k˚ and kopaṃ k˚ to be angry Ja iv.22; Ja vi.257; cayaṃ k˚ to hoard up; corikaṃ k˚ to steal Vin i.75; taṇhaṃ k˚ (c. loc.) to desire Ja i.5 sītaṃ k˚ to cool DN ii.129 ■ It is often compd with nouns or adjectives with a change of final vowel to ī (i) uttāni˚ to make clear DN ii.105; pākaṭī˚, bahulī˚ muṭṭhī˚, etc. (q.v.). Cp. the same process in conn with bhavati ■ The meanings of karoti are varied according to the word with which it is connected; it would be impossible and unnecessary to give an exhaustive list of all its various shades. Only a few illustrations may suffice: aṃse k˚ to place on one’s shoulder Ja i.9; antarāyaṃ k˚ to prevent Ja i.232; ādiṃ k˚ (c. acc.) to begin with; nimittaṃ k˚ to give a hint DN ii.103; pātarāsaṃ k˚ to breakfast; mānasaṃ k˚ to make up one’s mind; mahaṃ k˚ to hold a festival DN ii.165; massuṃ k˚ to trim the beard Dhp-a i.253; musāvādaṃ k˚ to tell a lie Ja vi.401; rajjaṃ k˚ to reign SN i.218 vase k˚ to bring into one’s power Ja i.79; sandhiṃ k˚ to make an agreement Mvu 16; sinehaṃ k˚ to become fond of Ja i.190 ■ Similarly, cpd with adverbs: alaṃ k˚ to make much of, i.e. to adorn, embellish; dūrato k˚ to keep at a distance, i.e. keep free from Pv-a 17 Sdhp 287; purak k˚ (purakkharoti) to place before, i.e. to honour Pv iii.71 ■ Note phrase kiṃ karissati what difference does it make? (Cp. Ger. was macht’s) DN i.120 or what about… Ja i.152.

Sk. karoti, *qṷer to form, to build (or plait, weave? see kamma), cp. kar-man, Lith. kùrti to build, O.Tr. cruth form; Lat. corpus, with p-addition as Sk. kṛpa, kḷp = kṛp. Derived are kalpa → kappa kalpate → kappeti

Kalakala

(adj.) any indistinct and confused noise Mhbv 23 (of the tramping of an army); in -mukhara sounding confusedly (of the ocean) ibid. 18. Cp karakarā.

cp. Sk. kala

Kalati

to utter an (indistinct) sound: pp. kalita Thag 22.

kal, kālayati

Kalanda

heap, stack (like a heap of wood? cp. kalingara) Mil 292 (sīsa˚).

cp. Sk. karaṇḍa piece of wood?

Kalandaka

1. a squirrel Mil 368;

2. an (ornamental) cloth or mat, spread as a seat Ja vi.224; -nivāpa Name of a locality in Veḷuvana, near Rājagaha, where oblations had been made to squirrels DN ii.116; Vin i.137; Vin ii.105 Vin ii.290, etc.

Kalabha

the young of an elephant: see hatthi˚; and cp. kalāra.

cp. Sk. kalabha

Kalamba

(nt.) Name of a certain herb or plant (Convolv. repens?); may be a bulb or radish Ja iv.46 (= tālakanda), cp. p. 371, 373 (where C expls by tāla-kanda; gloss BB however gives latā-tanta); vi.578 See also kaḍamba & kaḷimba;.

-rukkha the Cadamba tree Ja vi.290.

cp. Sk. kalamba menispermum calumba, kalambī convolvulus repens

Kalambaka

= kalamba, the C. tree Ja vi.535.

Kalambukā

(f.) = kalambaka DN iii.87 (vv.ll. kaladukā, kalabakā) the trsln (Dial. iii.84) has “bamboo.”

Kalala

(m. nt.) 1. mud Ja i.12, Ja i.73; Mil 125, Mil 324, Mil 346; Mhbv 150; Pv-a 215 (= kaddama); Dhp-a iii.61; Dhp-a iv.25- su˚; “well-muddied” i.e. having soft soil (of a field Mil 255.

2. the residue of sesamum oil (tela˚), used for embalming Ja ii.155.

3. in Embryology: the “soil,” the placenta SN i.206 = Kvu ii.494; Mil 125 Also the first stage in the formation of the foetus (of which the first 4 during the first month are k., abbuda pesi, ghana, after which the stages are counted by months 1

5 & 10; see Vism 236; Nd i.120; & cp. Mil 40).

4. the foetus, appl. to an egg, i.e. the yolk Mil 49 ■ In cpds with kar & bhū the form is kalalī˚.;

-gata (a) fallen into the mud Mil 325; -gahaṇa “mud thicket,” dense mud at the bottom of rivers or lakes Ja i.329; -kata made muddy, disturbed Vv 8431 (Vv-a 343); -bhūta = prec., AN i.9, cp. Ja ii.100; AN iii.233; Mil 35; -makkhita soiled with mud Dhp-a iii.61.

Kalasa

(nt.) 1. a pot, waterpot, dish, jar MN iii.141; Ja iv.384; Dāvs iv.49; Pv-a 162.

2. the female breasts (likened to a jar) Mhbv 2, 22.

cp. Vedic kalaśa

Kalaha

quarrel, dispute, fight AN i.170; AN iv.196, AN iv.401; Snp 862, Snp 863 (+ vivāda); Ja i.483 Nd ii.427; Dhp-a iii.256 (udaka˚ about the water) iv.219; Sdhp 135. ˚ṃ udīreti to quarrel Ja v.395 karoti id. Ja i.191, Ja i.404; Pv-a 13; vaḍḍheti to increase the tumult, noise Ja v.412; Dhp-a iii.255; harmony accord, agreement SN i.224; mahā˚ a serious quarrel, a row Ja iv.88.

-ābhirata delighting in quarrels, quarrelsome Snp 276 Thag 958. -ṅkara picking up a quarrel Ja vi.45 -karaṇa quarrelling, fighting Ja v.413; -kāraka (f ■ ī quarrelsome, pugnacious AN iv.196; Vin i.328; Vin ii.1 -kāraṇa the cause or reason of a dispute Ja iii.151 Ja vi.336; -jāta “to whom a quarrel has arisen,” quarrelling disputing AN i.70; Vin i.341; Vin ii.86, Vin ii.261; Ud 67; Ja iii.149; -pavaḍḍhanī growth or increase of quarrels prolongation of strife (under 6 evils arising from intemperance) DN iii.182 = Dhs-a 380; -vaḍḍhana (nt. inciting & incitement to quarrel Ja v.393, Ja v.394; -sadda brawl, dispute Ja vi.336.

cp. Sk. kalaha, fr. kal

Kalā

1. a small fraction of a whole generally the 16th part; the 16th part of the moon’s disk; often the 16th part again subdivided into 16 parts and so on: one infinitesimal part (see Vv-a 103; Dhp-a ii.63), in this sense in the expression kalaṃ nâgghati soḷasiṃ “not worth an infinitesimal portion of” = very much inferior to SN i.19; SN iii.156 = SN v.44 = Iti 20; AN i.166 AN i.213; AN iv.252; Ud 11; Dhp 70; Vv 437; Dhp-a ii.63 (= koṭṭhāsa) Dhp-a iv.74.

2. an art, a trick (lit. part, turn Ja i.163 ■ kalaṃ upeti to be divided or separated Mil 106; Dhp-a i.119; see sakala ■ In cpd. with bhū as kalī -bhavati to be divided, broken up Ja i.467 (= bhijjati). Cp. vikala.

Vedic kalā *squel, to Lat scalpo, Gr. σκάλλω, Ohg scolla, scilling, scala. The Dhtp. (no 613) expls kala by “sankhyāne.”

Kalāpa

1. anything that comprises a number of things of the same kind; a bundle, bunch sheaf; a row, multitude; usually of grass, bamboo-or sugar-canes, sometimes of hair and feathers SN iv.290 (tiṇa˚); Ja i.158 (do.); 25 (naḷa˚), 51 (mālā˚), 100 (uppalakumuda˚); v.39 (usīra˚); Mil 33; Pv-a 257, Pv-a 260 (ucchu˚) 272 (veḷu˚); 46 (kesā), 142 (mora-piñja˚)

2. a quiver Vin ii.192; Iti 68; Ja vi.236; Mil 418; Pv-a 154, Pv-a 169

3. in philosophy: a group of qualities, pertaining to the material body (cp. rūpa˚) Vism 364 (dasadhamma˚ 626 (phassa-pañcamakā dhammā); Bdhd 77 (rūpa˚ 78, 120.

-agga (nt.) “the first (of the) bunch,” the first (sheaves) of a crop, given away as alms Dhp-a i.98 -sammasanā grasping (characteristics) by groups Vism 287, Vism 606, Vism 626 sq.

cp. Sk. kalāpa

Kalāpaka

1. a band, string (of pearls) Vin ii.315; Mvu 30, Mvu 67.

2. a bundle, group Ja i.239.

Kalāpin

(adj.) having a quiver Ja vi.49 (acc. pl. ˚ine). f. kalāpinī a bundle, sheaf (yava˚) SN iv.201 SN ii.114 (naḷa˚).

fr. kalāpa

Kalābuka

(nt.) a girdle, made of several strings or bands plaited together Vin ii.136, Vin ii.144, Vin ii.319;

cp. Sk. kalāpaka

Kalāya

a kind of pea, the chick-pea MN i.245 (kaḷāya); SN i.150; AN v.170; Snp p.124; Ja ii.75 (= varaka, the bean Phaseolus trilobus, and kālarāja-māsa); Ja iii.370; Dhp-a i.319. Its size may be gathered from its relation to other fruits in ascending scale at AN v.170 = SN i.150 Snp p.124 (where the size of an ever-increasing boil is described). It is larger than a kidney bean (mugga and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolaṭṭhi).

-matta of the size of a chick-pea SN i.150; AN v.170 Snp p.124 (ḷ); Ja iii.370; Dhp-a i.319.

Kalāyati

to have a measure, to outstrip Ja i.163 (taken here as “trick, deceive”).

Denom. fr. kalā

Kalāra

in hatthi˚ at Ud 41, expld in C by potaka, but cp. the same passage at Dhp-a i.58 which reads kalabha undoubtedly better. Cp. kaḷārikā.

Kali

(m.) 1. the unlucky die (see akkha); “the dice were seeds of a tree called the vibhītaka… An extra seed was called the kali” (Dial. ii.368 n. DN ii.349; Ja i.380; Dhp 252 (= Dhp-a iii.375) at Ja vi.228 Ja vi.282, Ja vi.357 it is opposed to kaṭa, q.v.

2. (= kaliggaha an unlucky throw at dice, bad luck, symbolically as a piece of bad luck in a general worldly sense or bad quality demerit, sin (in moral sense) kaliṃ vicināti “gathers up demerit” Snp 658; appamatto kali… akkhesu dhanaparājayo… mahantataro kali yo sugatesu manam padosaye SN i.149 = AN ii.3 = AN v.171, AN v.174 = Snp 659 = Ne 132; cp. MN iii.170; AN v.324; Dhp 202 (= Dhp-a iii.261 aparādha).

3. the last of the 4 ages of the world (see ˚yuga).

4. sinful, a sinner Snp 664 (= pāpaka). 5. saliva, spittle, froth (cp. kheḷa) Thig 458, Thig 501; Ja v.134.

-(g)gaha the unlucky throw at dice, the losing throw symbolically bad luck, evil consequence in worldly moral sense (ubhayattha k˚ faring badly in both worlds MN i.403 = MN i.406; MN iii.170 (in simile). See kaṭaggaha -devatā (m. pl.) the devotees of kali, the followers of the goddess kali Mil 191 (see Mil trsl. i.266 n.) -(p)piya one who is fond of cheating at dice, a gambler Pgdp 68; -yuga (nt.) one of the 4 (or 8) ages of the world, the age of vice, misery and bad luck; it is the age in which we are Sāsv 4, 44, Vinl 281; -sāsana (nt. in ˚ṃ āropeti to find fault with others Vin iv.93, Vin iv.360.

cp. Sk. kali

Kaliṅgara

(m. nt.) (BB ḷ) 1. a log, a piece of wood MN i.449, MN i.451; SN ii.268; Dhp-a iii.315; often in sense of something useless, or a trifle (combd with kaṭṭha q.v.) Dhp 41; Dhp-a i.321 (= kaṭṭhakhaṇḍa, a chip) Thig 468 (id.) as kaṭṭhakalingarāni Dhp-a ii.142.

2. a plank, viz. a step in a staircase, in sopāna˚ Vin ii.128, cp. sopāna-kaḷevara.

-ūpadhāna a wooden block used for putting one’s head on when sleeping SN ii.267; Mil 366; -kaṇḍa a wooden arrow Ja iii.273 (acittaṃ k˚: without feeling)

cp. Sk. kaḍankara & kaḍangara, on which in sense of “log” see Kern, Toev. s. v. kalingara

Kaliṅgu

(m. nt.) the Laurus camphora, the Indian laurel Ja vi.537.

cp. Sk. kalinga & kalingaka

Kalita

sounding indistinctly Thag 22.

pp. of kalati

Kalusa

muddy, dirty, impure; in ˚bhāva the state of being turbid, impure, obscured (of the mind) DN-a i.275.

cp. Sk. kaluṣa

Kalevara

see kaḷebara.

Kalya

see kalla;

Kalyatā

(f.) 1. the state of being sound, able, pliant Ja ii.12.

2. pleasantness, agreeableness, readiness, in ; opp. (appld to citta) Dhs 1156; Dhs-a 377 (= gilānabhāva).

Kalyāṇa

(& kallāṇa) 1. (adj.) beautiful, charming; auspicious, helpful, morally good. Syn bhaddaka Pv-a 9, Pv-a 116) and kusala (S ii.118; Pv-a 9 Pv-a 122); opp. pāpa (SN i.83; MN i.43; Pv-a 101, Pv-a 116 and under ˚mitta). kata˚ = katûpakāra Pv-a 116 Appld to dhamma in phrase ādi˚ majjhe˚ pariyosāne˚ DN i.62 and ≈; SN v.152; Snp p.103; Vv-a 87; Vism 213 sq. (in var. applications); etc ■ As m. one who observes the sīlapadaṃ (opp. pāpa, who violates it) AN ii.222, cp k˚-mittā = sīlâdīhi adhikā Snp-a 341SN iv.303; SN v.2 SN v.29, SN v.78; AN iii.77; AN iv.361; Vin ii.8, Vin ii.95; Ja i.4; Mil 297-kata˚ (opp. kata-pāpa) of good, virtuous character, in phrase k˚ katakusala, etc. Iti 25, etc. (see kata ii.1 a) k˚ of kitti (-sadda) DN i.49 (= DN-a i.146 seṭṭha); SN iv.374 SN v.352; of jhāna (tividha˚) Bdhd 96, 98, 99; of mittā friends in general (see also cpd.) Dhp 78 (na bhaje pāpake mitte… bhajetha m˚ kalyāṇe), 116, 375 (= suddhâjīvin); Snp 338.

2. (nt.) (a) a good or useful thing good things Vin i.117; AN iii.109; cp. bhadraṃ. (b) goodness, virtue, merit, meritorious action Ja v.49 (kalyāṇā here nt. nom. in sense of pl.; cp. Vedic nt.) 492 ■ ˚ṃ karoti to perform good deeds SN i.72; AN i.138 sq.; Vin i.73; Pv-a 122 ■ (c) kindness, good service Ja i.378; Ja iii.12 (= upakāra), 68 (˚ṃ karoti). (d) beauty, attraction, perfection; enumd as 5 kalyāṇāni viz. kesa˚, maṃsa˚, aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚ i.e. beauty of hair, flesh, teeth, skin, youth Ja i.394; Dhp-a i.387.

-ajjhāsaya the wish or intention to do good Dhp-a i.9;- -ādhimuttika disposed towards virtue, bent on goodness SN ii.154, SN ii.158; Iti 70, Iti 78; Vb 341; -kāma desiring what is good AN iii.109; -kārin (a) doing good virtuous (opp. pāpa˚) SN i.227, cp. Ja ii.202 = Ja iii.158; Dhs-a 390; (m.) who has rendered a service Ja vi.182 -carita walking in goodness, practising virtue Vb 341 -jātika one whose nature is pleasantness, agreeable Ja iii.82; -dassana looking nice, lovely, handsome Snp 551 = Thag 821 (+ kañcanasannibhattaca); -dhamma (1) of virtuous character, of good conduct, virtuous Vin i.73; Vin iii.133; SN v.352; Pp 26; Iti 96; Pv iv.135 Mil 129; Dhp-a i.380; Ja ii.65 (= sundara˚), Pv-a 230 (= sundara-sīla); sīlavā + k˚ (of bhikkhu, etc.) MN i.334; SN iv.303; Pv-a 13 ■ k˚ena k˚atara perfectly good or virtuous AN ii.224 ■ (2) the Good Doctrine Dhp-a i.7 -˚tā the state of having a virtuous character AN ii.36 -pañña “wise in goodness” possessed of true wisdom Thag 506; Iti 97; -paṭipadā the path of goodness or virtue, consisting of dāna, uposathakamma & dasakusalakammapathā Ja iii.342; -paṭibhāṇa of happy retort, of good reply AN iii.58, cp. Mil 3; -pāpaka good and bad Ja v.238; Ja vi.225; Kv 45; (nt.) goodness and evil Ja v.493; -pīti one who delights in what is good Snp 969; -bhattika having good, nice food Vin ii.77 Vin iii.160 (of a householder); -mitta 1. a good companion a virtuous friend, an honest, pure friend; at Pp 24 he is said to “have faith, be virtuous, learned, liberal and wise”; MN i.43 (opp. pāpa˚); SN i.83, SN i.87 (do.); AN iv.30 AN iv.357; Pp 37, Pp 41; Ja iii.197; Bdhd 90; ; not a virtuous friend Dhs-a 247.

2. as t.t. a spiritual guide, spiritual adviser. The Buddha is the spiritual friend par excellence but any other Arahant can act as such SN v.3 Vism 89, Vism 98, Vism 121; cp. kammaṭṭhāna-dāyaka. -mittatā friendship with the good and virtuous, association with the virtuous SN i.87; such friendship is of immense help for the attainment of the Path and Perfection SN v.3 SN v.32; it is the sign that the bhikkhu will realize the 7 bojjhangas SN v.78 = SN v.101; AN i.16, AN i.83, it is one of the 7 things conducive to the welfare of a bhikkhu DN iii.212; AN iv.29, AN iv.282; Thig 213; Iti 10; Dhs 1328 = Pp 24 Vism 107; not having a virtuous friend and good adviser Dhs-a 247. -rūpa beautiful, handsome Ja iii.82 Ja v.204; -vākkaraṇa, usually comb. with ˚vāca, of pleasant conversation, of good address or enunciation, reciting clearly DN i.93, DN i.115; AN ii.97; AN iii.114, AN iii.263; AN iv.279; Vin ii.139; Mil 21; DN-a i.263 (= madhura-vacana); not pronouncing or reciting clearly DN i.94. 122; -˚tā the fact of being of good and pleasing address AN i.38 -vāca, usually in form. k˚ k˚-vākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato DN i.114; AN ii.97; AN iii.114, AN iii.195, AN iii.263 AN iv.279; Vin ii.139; DN-a i.282; -sadda a lucky word or speech Ja ii.64; -sampavaṅka a good companion AN iv.357 (in phrase k˚-mitta k˚-sahāya k˚- s˚); Pp 37 -˚tā companionship with a virtuous friend SN i.87 -sahāya a good, virtuous companion AN iv.284; AN iv.357 Pp 37; cp. prec., -˚tā = prec. SN i.87; -sīla practising virtue, of good conduct, virtuous Thag 1008; Iti 96.

Vedic kalyāṇa

Kalyāṇaka

(adj.) good, virtuous DN-a i.226; Dhs-a 32.

fr. last

Kalyāṇatā

(f.) beauty, goodness, virtuousness Vism 4 (ādi); k˚ -kusala clever, experienced in what is good Ne 20.

abstr. fr. kalyāṇa

Kalyāṇin

(adj.) (a) beautiful, handsome Vv iv.5 ■ (b) auspicious, lucky, good, proper Ja v.124; Ud 59 ■ (c) f. [cp. Vedic kalyāṇī] a beautiful woman a belle, usually in janapada˚ DN i.193 = MN ii.40; SN ii.234; Ja i.394; Ja v.154.

fr. kalyāṇa

Kalla1 & Kalya;

(adj.) 1. well, healthy, sound Vin i.291.

2. clever, able, dexterous Mil 48 Mil 87.

3. ready, prepared Ja ii.12, cp ■ citta.

4. fit proper, right SN ii.13 (pañha) ■ nt. kallaṃ it is proper befitting (with inf. or inf ■ substitute): vacanāya proper to say DN i.168, DN i.169; AN i.144; abhinandituṃ DN ii.69-kallaṃ nu [kho] is it proper? MN iii.19; SN iv.346; Mil 25; 1. not well, unfit Thig 439, cp. Thag-a 270. 2. unbecoming, unbefitting DN ii.68; Ja v.394.

-kāya sound (in body), refreshed Vin i.291; -kusala of sound skill (cp. kallita) SN iii.265; -citta of ready, amenable mind, in form. k˚, mudu-citta, vinīvaraṇa˚, udagga˚ etc. DN i.110 = DN i.148 = DN ii.41 = AN iv.209 = Vin i.16 = Vin ii.156; Vv-a 53, Vv-a 286; Vv 5019 (= kammaniya-citta “her mind was prepared for, responsive to the teaching of the dhamma”); Pv-a 38. -cittatā the preparedness of the mind (to receive the truth) Ja ii.12 (cp citta-kalyatā) -rūpa 1. of beautiful appearance Thag 212,

2. pleased joyful (kalya˚) Snp 680, Snp 683, Snp 691; -sarīra having a sound body, healthy Ja ii.51; a˚-tā not being sound in body ill-health Vv-a 243.

cp. Sk. kalya

Kalla2

(m. nt.) ashes Ja iii.94 (for kalala), also in ˚-vassa a shower of ashes Ja iv.389.

Kallaka

(adj.) in ; unwell, indisposed Vin iii.62; Ja iii.464; Dhs-a 377.

fr. last

Kallatā

(f.) see kalyatā; -a˚; unreadiness, unpreparedness, indisposition (of citta), in expln of thīna Nd ii.290; Dhs 1156 = Dhs 1236 = Ne 86; Dhs-a 378; Ne 26. The reading in Nd ii.is akalyāṇatā, in Dhs akalyatā; follows akammaññatā.

Kallahāra

the white esculent water lily Ja v.37; Dpvs xvi.19.

cp. Sk. kahlāra, the P. form to be expld as a diaeretic inversion kalhāra → kallahāra

Kallita

(nt.) pleasantness, agreeableness SN iii.270, SN iii.273 (samādhismiṃ-˚kusala); AN iii.311; AN iv.34 (id.).

fr. kalla

Kallola

a billow, in -˚mālā a series of billows Dāvs iv.44.

cp. Sk. kallola

Kaḷāya

= kalāya.

Kaḷāra

(adj.) always referring to teeth: with long, protruding teeth, of Petas (cp. attr. of the dog of the “Underworld” Pv-a 152: tikhiṇâyatakaṭhina-dāṭho and the figure of the witch in fairy-tales) Ja v.91 (= nikkhantadanto); vi.548 (= sūkara-dāṭhehi samannāgato p. 549); Pv ii.41 (= k˚-danto Pv-a 90).

cp. Sk. karāla projecting (of teeth), whereas kaḍāra means tawny

Kaḷārikā

(f.) a kind of large (female) elephant M 1. 178 (so read with v.l. for kāḷ˚). Cp. kalāra.

fr. last, lit. with protruding teeth

Kaḷiṅgara

= kalingara. Kalimb(h)aka

Kaḷimb(h)aka

(cp. kaḍamba, kalamba) a mark used to keep the interstices between the threads of the kaṭhina even, when being woven Vin ii.116, Vin ii.317 (v.l. kaḷimpaka).

Kaḷīra

the top sprout of a plant or tree, esp. of the bamboo and cert. palm trees (e.g. coco-nut tree) which is edible Snp 38 (vaṃsa˚ = veḷugumba Nd ii.556 and p. 58) Thag 72; Ja i.74, cp. iii.179; vi.26; Mil 201 (vaṃsa˚) Vism 255 (vaṃsa˚-cakkalaka, so read for kalira˚ Kp-a 50 at id. passage reads kaḷīra-daṇḍa).

-(c)chejja (nt.) “the cutting off of the sprout,” a kind of torture Mil 193, cp. Miln. trsl. i.270 and kadalīccheda.

Kaḷebara

(: kale˚ and kalevara) (m. & nt.) 1. the body SN i.62 = AN ii.48; = iv.429 = MN i.82; Ja ii.437, Ja iii.96, Ja iii.244; Vism 49, Vism 230.

2. a dead body, corpse, carcass; often in description of death: khandhānaṃ bhedo k˚assa nikkhepo, DN ii.355 MN i.49 = Vb 137; Thig 467; Ja iii.180, Ja iii.511; Ja v.459 Mvu 2010; 3781; Pv-a 80. Cp. kuṇapa.

3. the step in a flight of stairs MN ii.92, cp. kalingara.

cp. BSk. kaḍebara Avs.; ii.26

Kaḷopī

(= khaḷopi) f. 1. a vessel, basin, pot: see cpds. - 2. a basket, crate (= pacchi Thag-a 219; Ja v.252) MN i.77 MN i.342; SN i.236 = Thig 283 (where osenti is to be corr. to openti); Ja v.252 ■ On the form of the word (= karoṭi? see Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 109 and Davids, Dial. i.227. kaḷopī (as khaḷopī) is expld at Pp A p. 231 as “ukkhalī, pacchi vā.”

-mukha the brim of a pan or cooking vessel DN i.166 = MN i.77 = MN i.342 = AN i.295 = AN ii.206 (kumbhi-m˚ + kaḷopim˚); -hattha with a vessel or basket in his hand AN iv.376.

Kavaca

(nt.) a mail, a coat of mail, armour DN ii.107 = Ud 64 (appld to existence); Thag 614 (of sīla); Ja iv.92, Ja iv.296; Mil 199, Mil 257; Vism 73.

-jālikā a mail-coat Mil 199.

cp. Sk. kavaca

Kavandha

(m. nt.) 1. the (headless) trunk of the body, endowed with the power of motion Vin iii.107; cp. SN ii.260 (asīsaka˚); Mil 292; Dhp-a i.314.

2. a headless dwarf, whose head has been crushed down into his body Ja v.424, Ja v.427 (cp. the story of Dhanu, the Rākṣasa who was punished by having his head and thighs forced into his body, Raghuvaṃsa xii.57).

cp. Sk. kavandha & kabandha

Kavāṭa

(m. nt.) 1. the panels of the door, the door proper, not the aperture Vin ii.114, Vin ii.120, Vin ii.207, Vin ii.208 (see Vin ii.148 for the description of a door) iv.269, 304 (˚baddha = āvasatha); Ja i.19; Nd ii.2351d; Vism 28 (˚koṇa doorcorner).

2. dvāra˚; a door-post Ja i.63; Ja ii.334; Pv-a 280.

3. a window Mvu ix.17 ■ ˚ṃ paṇāmeti to open the door Vin ii.114, Vin ii.120, Vin ii.207; ˚ṃ ākoṭeti to knock at the door DN i.88 (= DN-a i.252); Vin ii.208akavāṭaka (adj.) having no doors, doorless Vin ii.148, Vin ii.154 (v.l. for akkavāta Text).

-piṭṭha the panels and posts of a door; the door and the door-posts Vin i.47, Vin i.48 = Vin ii.208, Vin ii.218; -baddha “door-bound,” closed, secure Vin iv.292 (see also above).

Kavāṭaka

= kavāṭa Vin ii.148; DN-a i.62 (nīvaraṇa˚).

Kavi

a poet SN i.38; SN ii.267; Dāvs i.10; four classes enumd at AN ii.230 & DN-a i.95, viz. 1. cintā˚ an original p. 2. suta˚ one who puts into verse what he Las heard. 3. attha˚ a didactic p. 4. paṭibhāṇa˚ an improvisor

-kata composed by poets SN ii.267; AN i.72.

Vedic kavi

Kavya

poetry; ballad, ode (cp. kabba) Ja vi.213, Ja vi.216.

-kāra a poet Ja vi.216.

cp. Vedic kavya wise; sacrificer

Kaviṭṭha

the elephant-apple tree, Feronia elephantum Ja v.38 (˚vana).

cp. kapittha

Kasaka

see kassaka.

Kasaṭa

(metathesis of sakaṭa, cp. Trenckner, Mil p.423) 1. (adj.) bad, nasty; bitter, acrid; insipid, disgusting AN i.72; Ja ii.96; Ja ii.159.

2. (m.) (a) fault, vice, defect MN i.281; Pts ii.87 ■ (b) leavings, dregs Vv-a 288 (v.l. sakaṭa) ■ (c) something bitter or nasty Ja ii.96; Ja v.18-(d) bitter juice Ja ii.105 (nimba˚) ■ sa˚; faulty wrong, bitter to eat, unpalatable Mil 119.

-odaka insipid, tasteless water Ja ii.97.

Kasati

to till, to plough SN i.172, SN i.173 = Snp 80; Th i.531; Ja i.57; Ja ii.165; Ja vi.365 ■ kassate (3rd sing med.) Thag 530 ■ pp. kattha (q.v.) Caus. II. kasāpeti Mil 66, Mil 82; Dhp-a i.224.

kṛṣ or karṣ

Kasana

(nt.) ploughing, tilling Ja iv.167; Ja vi.328, Ja vi.364; Vism 384 (+ vapana sowing).

Kasambu

anything worthless, rubbish, filth, impurity; fig. low passions SN i.166; Snp 281 = Mil 414 = AN iv.172; Vism 258 (maṃsa˚), 259 (parama˚).

-jāta one whose nature is impurity, in comb. brahmacāripaṭiñño antopūti avassuto k˚ SN iv.181; AN ii.240; AN iv.128, AN iv.201; Vin ii.236; Pp 27, Pp 34, Pp 36; Vism 57 (+ avassuta pāpa). ˚ka -jāta ibid. in vv.ll.

Derivation uncertain

Kasā

(f.) a whip Vin i.99 (in Uddāna); MN i.87, etc.; Dhp 143; Mil 197-kasāhi tāḷeti to whip lash, flog as punishment for malefactors here, as well as in Niraya (see kamma-karaṇā) MN i.87 = AN i.47 AN ii.122, etc.; Pv-a 4 (of a thief scourged on his way to the place of execution); Dhp-a ii.39 (id.).

-niviṭṭha touched by the whip, whipped Dhp 144 (= Dhp-a iii.86); -pahāra a stroke with the whip, a lash Ja iii.178; -hata struck with the whip, scourged Vin i.75; Vin i.91 = Vin i.322; Sdhp 147.

Vedic kaśā

Kasāya

and Kasāva 1. a kind of paste or gum used in colouring walls Vin ii.151.

2. an astringent decoction extracted from plants Vin i.201, Vin i.277; Ja v.198.

3. (of taste), astringent DhS 629; Mil 65; Dhp-a ii.31. 4. (of colour) reddish-yellow, orange coloured Vin i.277

5. (ethical) the fundamental faults (rāga, dosa moha) AN i.112; Dhp 10; Vb 368. -a˚; faultless, flawless in akasāvattaṃ being without defect AN i.112 (of a wheel with -sa˚; ibid.); -sa˚; faulty Dhp-a i.82; -mahā˚; wicked Ja iv.387. In cpds. both forms, viz. (kasāya)-yoga an astringent remedy Ja v.198 (kasāva˚ ibid.); -rasa reddishyellow dye Ja ii.198; (kasāva)-odaka an astringent decoction Vin i.205; -gandha having a pungent smell Vin i.277; -rasa having an astringent taste ibid. -vaṇṇa of reddish-yellow colour ibid.

Derivation uncertain. The word first appears in the late Vedic form kaṣāya, a decoction distillation, essence; used figy of evil. The old Pali form is kasāva

Kasāyatta

(nt.) astringency Mil 56.

abstr. fr. kasāya

Kasi

and Kasī (f.) tilling, ploughing; agriculture, cultivation MN ii.198; SN i.172, SN i.173 = Snp 76 sq. Vin iv.6; Pv i.56 (k˚, gorakkha, vaṇijjā); Pv-a 7 Sdhp 390 (k˚, vaṇijjā); Vv-a 63˚ṃ kasati to plough to till the land Ja i.277; Vism 284.

-kamma the act or occupation of ploughing, agriculture Ja ii.165, Ja ii.300; Ja iii.270. -karaṇa ploughing, tilling of the field Pv-a 66; -khetta a place for cultivation, a field Pv-a 8 (kasī˚); -gorakkha agriculture and cattle breeding DN i.135; -bhaṇḍa ploughing implements Dhp-a i.307.

fr. kasāti

Kasiṇa1

(adj.) entire, whole Ja iv.111, Ja iv.112.

Vedic kṛtsna

Kasiṇa2

(nt.) one of the aids to kammaṭṭhāna the practice by means of which mystic meditation (bhāvanā, jhāna) may be attained. They are fully described at AN v.46 sq., 60; usually enumerated as ten [sāvakā dasa k˚-āyatanāni bhāventi] paṭhavī˚, āpo˚, tejo˚, vāyo˚, nīla˚, pīta˚, lohita˚ odāta˚, ākāsa˚, viññāṇa˚-that is, earth, water, fire air; blue, yellow, red, white; space, intellection (or perhaps consciousness) MN ii.14; DN iii.268, DN iii.290; Ne 89 Ne 112; Dhs 202; Pts i.6, Pts i.95; cp. Manual 49–⁠52; Bdhd 4 90 sq., 95 sq ■ For the last two (ākāsa˚ and viññāṇa˚ we find in later sources āloka˚ and (paricchinn’) ākāsa Vism 110; cp. Dhs trsl. 43 n. 4, 57 n. 2; Cpd. 54, 202-Eight (the above omitting the last two) are given at Pts i.49, Pts i.143, Pts i.149 ■ See further Ja i.313; Ja iii.519; Dhs-a 186 sq. There are 14 manners of practising the kasiṇas (of which the first nine are: k˚-ânulomaṃ k˚-paṭilomaṃ; k˚-ânupaṭilomaṃ; jhānânulomaṃ; jh˚paṭi˚; jh˚-ânupaṭi˚; jh˚-ukkantikaṃ; k˚ ukk˚; jh˚k˚-ukk˚) Vism 374; cp. Bdhd 5, 101 sq., 104, 152. Nine qualities or properties of (paṭhavi-) kasiṇa are enumd at Vism 117 ■ Each k. is fivefold, according to uddhaṃ, adho, tiriyaṃ, advayaṃ, appamāṇaṃ; MN ii.15 etc ■ kasiṇaṃ oloketi to fix one’s gaze on the particular kasiṇa chosen Ja v.314; ˚ṃ samannāharati to concentrate one’s mind on the k. Ja iii.519.

-āyatana the base or object of a kasiṇa exercise (see above as 10 such objects) DN iii.268; MN ii.14; Pts i.28 etc.; -ārammaṇa = ˚āyatana Vism 427 (three, viz. tejo˚ odāta˚, āloka˚). -kamma the k. practice Ja i.141 Ja iv.306; Ja v.162, Ja v.193. -jhāna the k. meditation Dhs-a 413 -dosa fault of the k. object Vism 117, Vism 123 (the 4 faults of paṭhavī-kasiṇa being confusion of the 4 colours) -parikamma the preliminary, preparatory rites to the exercise of a kasiṇa meditation, such as preparing the frame, repeating the necessary formulas, etc. Ja i.8 Ja i.245; Ja iii.13, Ja iii.526; Dhs-a 187 ■ ˚ṃ katheti to give instructions in these preparations Ja iii.369; ˚ṃ karoti to perform the k-preparations Ja iv.117; Ja v.132, Ja v.427; Ja vi.68 -maṇḍala a board or stone or piece of ground divided by depressions to be used as a mechanical aid to jhāna exercise. In each division of the maṇḍala a sample of a kasiṇa was put. Several of these stone maṇḍalas have been found in the ruins at Anurādhapura. Cp Cpd. 54 f. 202 f. Ja iii.501; Dhp-a iv.208. -samāpatti attainment in respect of the k. exercise Nd ii.4668 (ten such).

Deriv. uncertain

Kasita

(pp. of kasati) ploughed, tilled Anvs 44; -a˚; untilled ibid. 27, 44 ■ Cp. vi˚.

Kasira

(adj.) miserable, painful, troubled wretched AN iv.283; Snp 574; Ja ii.136; Ja iv.113 = Ja vi.17; Pv iv.121 (= Pv-a 229 dukkha) ■ adv. kasirā (abl.) with difficulty Ja v.435; -kasirena (instr.) DN i.251; MN i.104; SN i.94; Vin i.195; Ja i.338; Ja iii.513. ; without pain easy, comfortable Ja vi.224 (= niddukkha); -lābhin obtaining without difficulty (f˚ inī AN iv.342) in formula akicchalābhī akasiralābhī etc. MN i.33; SN ii.278; AN i.184; AN ii.23, AN ii.36; AN iv.106; Ud 36; Pp 11, Pp 12.

-ābhata amassed with toil and difficulty (of wealth Ja v.435; -vuttika finding it hard to get a livelihood AN i.107 = Pp 51.

Probably fr. Vedic kṛcchra, the deriv. of which is uncertain

Kaseruka

a plant, shrub Snp-a 284 (v.l. kaṃsīruka for kiṃsuka?) See also kaṭeruha.

etym. connected with Sk. kaseru backbone?

Kassaka

a husbandman, cultivator, peasant, farmer, ploughman DN i.61 (k˚ gahapatiko kārakārako rāsi-vaḍḍhako); AN i.241; AN i.229, AN i.239 (the three duties of a farmer); SN i.172 = Snp 76; iii.155 (v.l. for T. kasaka) iv. 314; Vin iv.108; Bdhd 96; DN-a i.170; often in similes, e.g. Pv i.11; ii.968 (likeness to the doer of good works); Vism 152, Vism 284, Vism 320. -vaṇṇa (under) the disguise of a peasant SN i.115 (of Māra).

fr. kasati

Kassati

see ava˚, anu˚ (aor. anvakāsi), pari˚; otherwise kasati; cp. also kissati.

kṛṣ

Kassāma

fut. of karoti.

Kahaṃ

interr. adv. where? whither? Vin i.217; DN i.151; Snp p.106; Ja ii.7 Ja iii.76; Ja v.440 ■ k-nu kho where then? DN i.92; DN ii.143 DN ii.263.

cp. Vedic kuha; for a: u cp. kad˚.

Kahāpaṇa

1. A square copper coin MN ii.163; AN i.250; AN v.83 sq. Vin ii.294; iii. 238; Dhs-a 280 (at this passage included under rajataṃ, silver, together with loha-māsaka, dārumāsaka and jatu-māsaka); SN i.82; AN i.250; Vin ii.294 Vin iv.249; Ja i.478, Ja i.483; Ja ii.388; Mvu 3014. The extant specimens in our museums weigh about 5/6 of a penny and the purchasing power of a k. in our earliest records seems to have been about a florin ■ Frequent numbers as denoting a gift, a remuneration or alms, are 100,000 (J ii.96); 18 koṭis (Ja i.92); 1,000 (J ii.277, 431; v.128 217; Pv-a 153, Pv-a 161); 700 (J iii.343); 100 (Dhp-a iii.239) 80 (Pv-a 102); 10 or 20 (Dhp-a iv.226); 8 (which is considered socially, almost the lowest sum Ja iv.138; Ja i.483) A nominal fine of 1 k. (= a farthing) Mil 193 ■ ekaṃ k˚ pi not a single farthing Ja i.2; similarly eka-kahāpaṇen eva Vism 312 ■ Various qualities of a kahāpaṇa are referred to by Bdhgh in similes at Vism 437 and 515 Black kahāpaṇas are mentioned at Dhp-a iii.254 ■ See Rh. Davids, Ancient Measures of Ceylon; Buddh. India, pp. 100–⁠102, fig. 24; Mil trsl. i.239.

-gabbha a closet for storing money, a safe Dhp-a iv.104 -vassa a shower of money Dhp 186 (= Dhp-a iii.240).

doubtful as regards etym.; the (later) Sk. kārṣāpaṇa looks like an adaptation of a dial. form

Kahāpaṇaka

(nt.) Name of a torture which consisted in cutting off small pieces of flesh, the size of a kahāpaṇa, all over the body, with sharp razors MN i.87 = AN i.47, AN ii.122 cp. Mil 97, Mil 290, Mil 358.

(indecl.) interj. imitating the crow’s cry: kā kā Ja iv.72.

Kā˚

in composition, is assimilated (and contracted) form of kad˚ as kāpuppha, kāpurisa.

Kāka

the crow; freq. in similes: SN i.124; Snp 448; Ja i.164. Its thievish ways are described at Dhp-a iii.352; said to have ten bad qualities AN v.149; Ja i.342; Ja iii.126; kākā vā kulalā vā Vin iv.40 ■ As bird (of the dead) frequenting places of interment and cremation, often with other carcass-eating animals (sigāla, gijjha) Snp 201; Pv-a 198 (= dhanka); cp. kākoḷa-In cpds. often used derisively ■ f. kākī Ja ii.39, Ja ii.150 Ja iii.431.

-āmasaka “touching as much as a crow,” attr. of a person not enjoying his meals Dhp-a iv.16; Dhs-a 404 -uṭṭepaka a crow-scarer, a boy under fifteen, employed as such in the monastery grounds Vin i.79 cp. 371 -opamā the simile of the crow Dhp-a ii.75. -orava “crow-cawing,” appld to angry and confused words Vin i.239, cp. iv.82; -olūka crows and owls Ja ii.351; Dhp-a i.50; Mhbv 15; -guyha (tall) enough to hide a crow (of young corn, yava) Ja ii.174; cp. J. trsl. ii.122 -nīḷa a crow’s nest Ja ii.365; -paññā “crow -wisdom, i.e. foolishness which leads to ruin through greed Ja v.255, Ja v.258; cp. vi.358; -paṭṭanaka a deserted village inhabited only by crows Ja vi.456; -pāda crow’s foot or footmark Vism 179 (as pattern); -peyya “(so full that a crow can easily drink of it,” full to the brim overflowing, of a pond: samatittika k˚ “with even banks and drinkable for crows” (i.e. with the water on a level with the land) DN i.244; SN ii.134 (do.); DN ii.89; MN i.435; AN iii.27; Ja ii.174; Ud 90; cp. note to J. trsl. ii.122; Pv-a 202. See also peyya. -bhatta “a crow’s meal,” i.e. remnants left from a meal thrown out for the crows Ja ii.149; -vaṇṇa “crow-coloured” Name of a king Mvu 2211; -vassa the cry of a crow Vin ii.17 -sīsa the head of a crow Ja ii.351; as adj.: having a crow’s head, appld to a fabulous flying horse DN ii.174 cp. Ja ii.129; -sūra a “crow-hero,” appl. to a shameless unconscientious fellow Dhp 244; Dhp-a iii.352; -ssaraka (having a voice) sounding like a crow Vin i.115.

onomat., cp. Sk. kāka; for other onomat. relatives see note on gala

Kākacchati

to snore Vin iv.355; AN iii.299; Ja i.61, Ja i.160 (= ghurughurûpassāsa; cp. DN-a i.42 ghurû-ghurûpassāsī); i.318 vi.57; Mil 85; Vism 311.

derived by Fausböll fr. kās, to cough; by Trenckner fr. krath; by Childers & E. Müller fr.; kath should it not rather be a den. fr. kakaca a saw?

Kākaṇa

(nt.) a coin of very small value Sdhp 514.

kā (for kad˚) + kaṇa = less than a particle

Kākaṇikā

(f.) = prec. Ja i.120, Ja i.419; Ja vi.346; DN-a i.212; Dhp-a i.391; Vv-a 77 = Dhp-a iii.108. From the latter passages its monetary value in the opinion of the Commentator may be guessed at as being 1/8 of a kahāpaṇa it occurs here in a descending line where each succeeding coin marks half the value of the preceding one, viz. kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha, pāda, māsaka, kākaṇikā, upon which follows mudhā “for nothing.”

-agghanaka “not even a farthing’s worth,” worth next to nothing Ja vi.346.

Kākola

and Kākoḷa a raven, esp. in his quality as bird of prey, feeding on carrion (cp. kāka) Ja iii.246 (= vanakāka); v.268, 270 (gijjha k˚ ā ca ayomukhā… khādanti naraṃ kibbisakārinaṃ); vi.566.

-gaṇā (pl.) flocks of ravens Snp 675; VV5215 (= Vv-a 227).

Onomat. The Lit. Sk. has the same form

Kāca1

a glass-like substance made of siliceous clay; crystal Vin i.190; Vin ii.112 (cp Divy 503, kācamaṇi rock-crystal) ■ ; not of glass or quartz, i.e. pure, clear, flawless, appl. to precious stones DN ii.244 = Ja ii.418 (= akakkasa) Snp 476. In the same sense also Mvu i.164.

-ambha (nt.) red crystal Ja vi.268 (= rattamaṇi) -maya made of crystal, crystalline Vin i.190; Vin ii.112.

Der. unknown. The word first occurs in the Śat Br. & may well be non-Aryan

Kāca2

a pingo, a yoke, a carryingpole, usually made of bamboo, at both ends of which baskets are hung (double pingo). Besides this there is a single pingo (ekato-kājo) with only one basket and “middle” p. (antarā˚) with two bearers and the basket suspended in the middle Vin ii.137; Ja i.154; Ja v.13, Ja v.293 Ja v.295 sq., 320, 345; Pv-a 168.

-daṇḍaka the pole of a pingo DN-a i.41.

cp. Sk. kāca & kāja

Kācanā

(f.) balancing like carrying on a kāca, fig. deliberation, pondering Vb 352 = Vism 27.

fr. kāca2

Kācin

(adj.), only neg. ; free from quartz, free from grit, flawless Vv 601 (= niddosa Vv-a 253).

fr. kāca1

Kāja

= kāca2, i.e. carrying-pole MN iii.148; Ja i.9; Ja iii.325; Ja v.200; Dpvs xii.3; Mvu 5, Mvu 24; Dhp-a iv.232.

-koṭi the end of a carrying-pole Ja i.9; Ja v.200. -hāraka a pingo-bearer Dhp-a iv.128. Kata-kotacika

Kāṭa-koṭacikā

a low term of abuse, “pudendum virile & muliebre” Vin iv.7 (buddhagh iv.354: kātan ti purisa-nimittaṃ); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 89.

kāṭa + koṭacikā

Kāṇa

(adj.) blind, usually of one eye, occasionally of both (see PugA 227) SN i.94; Vin ii.90; AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = Pp 51 (in expln of tamaparāyaṇa purisa); Thig 438; Ja i.222 (one-eyed); vi.74 (of both eyes); Dhp-a iii.71.

-kaccha Np. Sdhp 44; -kacchapa “the blind turtle in the well-known parable of a man’s chances of human rebirth after a state of punishment Thig 500 (= Thag-a 290); Mil 204; Dhs-a 60; cp. MN iii.169 = SN v.455.

cp. Sk. kāṇa

Kātabba

(adj.-n.) (grd. of karoti) that which ought to, can or must be done (see karoti) Ja i.264, etc. Also as kattabba Pv-a 30.

Kātuṃ

and Kātu˚; (in compn with kāma) inf. of karoti.

-kāma desirous of doing or making, etc. Mvu 3734 (a˚) Pv-a 115; -kāmatā the desire to do, etc. Ja iv.253; Ja v.364 See also kattu˚ in same combns.

Kātuye

is Vedic inf. of karoti Thig 418 (in Thag-a 268 taken as kātuṃ ayye!).

Kādamba

a kind of goose with grey wings Ja v.420; Vv-a 163.

cp. Sk. kādamba

Kādambaka

made of Kadamba wood; also ˚ya for ˚ka; both at Ja v.320.

Kānana

(nt.) a glade in the forest, a grove, wood Snp 1134 (= Nd ii.s. v. vanasaṇḍa); Thig 254 (= Thag-a 210 upavana); Ja vi.557; Sdhp 574.

cp. Sk. kānana

Kānāmā

f. of konāma of what name? what is her (or your) name? Vin ii.272, Vin ii.273; Ja vi.338.

Kāpilanī

patron. f. of Kapila; the lady of the Kapila clan Thig 65.

Kāpilavatthava

(adj.) of or from Kapilavatthu, belonging to K. DN ii.165, DN ii.256; SN iv.182.

Kāpurisa

a low, vile, contemptible man, a wretch Vin ii.188; DN iii.279; SN i.91, SN i.154; SN ii.241 SN v.204; Thag 124, Thag 495; Ja ii.42; Ja vi.437; Pv ii.930 (Pv-a 125 = lāmaka˚); sometimes denoting one who has not entered the Path AN iii.24; Thig 189.

kad + purisa

Kāpotaka

(adj.) pigeon-coloured, grey, of a dull white, said of the bones of a skeleton DN i.55; Dhp 149 (= Dhp-a iii.112).

fr. kapota

Kāpotikā

(f.) a kind of intoxicating drink of a reddish colour (like pigeons’ fect) Vin iv.109, cp Ja i.360 (surā).

of doubtful origin, fr. kapota, but probably popular etym., one may compare Sk. kāpiśāyana, a sort of spirituous liquor Halāyudha 2, 175, which expresses a diff. notion, i.e. fr. kapi

Kāma

(m. nt.) to desire cp. Lat. carus, Goth. hōrs, E whore.

1. Objective: pleasantness, pleasure-giving, an object of sensual enjoyment;

2. subjective: (a) enjoyment, pleasure on occasion of sense, (b) sense-desire. Buddhist commentators express 1 and 2 by kāmiyatī ti kāmo, and kametī ti kāmo Cpd. 81, n. 2. Kāma as sense-desire and enjoyment plus objects of the same is a collective name for all but the very higher or refined conditions of life. The kāma-bhava or-loka (worlds of sensedesire) includes 4 of the 5 modes (gati’s) of existence and part of the fifth or deva-loka. See Bhava. The term is not found analyzed till the later books of the Canon are consulted, thus, Nd i.1 distinguishes (1 vatthukāmā: desires relating to a base, i.e. physical organ or external object, and (2) kilesakāmā: desire considered subjectively. So also Nd ii.202, quoted Dhp-a ii.162; Dhp-a iii.240; and very often as ubho kāmā. A more logical definition is given by Dhammapāla on Vv 11 (Vv-a 11). He classifies as follows: 1. manāpiyā rūpādi-visayā.

2. chandarāga.

3. sabbasmiṃ lobha

4. gāmadhamma.

5. hitacchanda.

6. serībhāva i.e. k. concerned with (1) pleasant objects, (2) impulsive desire, (3) greed for anything, (4) sexual lust (5) effort to do good, (6) self-determination.

In all enumerations of obstacles to perfection, or of general divisions and definitions of mental conditions kāma occupies the leading position. It is the first of the five obstacles (nīvaraṇāni), the three esanās (longings), the four upādānas (attachments), the four oghas (floods of worldly turbulence), the four āsavas (intoxicants of mind), the three taṇhās, the four yogas; and k stands first on the list of the six factors of existence kāmā, vedanā, saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkha, which are discussed at AN iii.410 sq. as regards their origin difference, consequences, destruction and remedy. Kāma is most frequently connected with rāga (passion) with chanda (impulse) and gedha (greed), all expressing the active, clinging, and impulsive character of desire. The foll. is the list of synonyms given at various places for kāma-cchanda: (1) chanda, impulse; (2) rāga excitement; (3) nandī, enjoyment; (4) taṇhā, thirst (5) sineha, love; (6) pipāsā, thirst; (7) pariḷāha, consuming passion; (8) gedha, greed; (9) mucchā, swoon or confused state of mind; (10) ajjhosāna, hanging on, or attachment Nd1. At Nd ii.200; Dhs 1097 (omitting No. 8), cp. Dhs-a 370; similarly at Vism 569 (omitting Nos. 6 and 8), cp. Dhs 1214; Vb 375. This set of 10 characteristics is followed by kām-ogha, kāma-yoga kām-upādāna at Nd ii.200, cp. Vism 141 (kām-ogha ˚āsava, ˚upādāna). Similarly at DN iii.238: kāme avigata-rāga, ˚chanda, ˚pema, ˚pipāsa, ˚pariḷāha ˚taṇha. See also kāma-chanda below under cpds. In connection with synonyms it may be noticed that most of the verbs used in a kāma-context are verbs the primary meaning of which is “adhering to” or “grasping,” hence, attachment; viz. esanā (iṣ to Lat ira) upādāna (upa + ā + taking up), taṇhā (tṛṣ, Lat torreo = thirst) pipāsā (the wish to drink), sineha (snih, Lat. nix = melting), etc ■ On the other hand, the reaction of the passions on the subject is expressed by khajjati “to be eaten up” pariḍayhati “to be burnt, etc. The foll. passage also illustrates the various synonymic expressions: kāme paribhuñjati, kāmamajjhe vasati, kāma-pariḷāhena pariḍayhati, kāmavitakkehi khajjati, kāma-pariyesanāyā ussukko, AN i.68 cp. MN i.463; MN iii.129. Under this aspect kāma is essentially an evil, but to the popular view it is one of the indispensable attributes of bliss and happiness to be enjoyed as a reward of virtue in this world (mānussakāmā) as well as in the next (dibbā kāmā). See kāmāvacara about the various stages of next-world happiness Numerous examples are to be found in Pv and Vv where a standing Ep. of the Blest is sabbakāmasamiddha “fully equipped with all objects of pleasure, e.g. Pv i.105; Pv-a 46. The other-world pleasures are greater than the earthly ones: SN v.409; but to the Wise even these are unsatisfactory, since they still are signs of, and lead to, rebirth (kāmûpapatti, It (4): api dibbesu kāmesu ratiṃ so nâdhigacchati Dhp 187; rāgaṃ vinayetha mānusesu dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhu Snp 361 see also Iti 94 ■ Kāma as sensual pleasure finds its most marked application in the sphere of the sexual kāmesu micchācārin, transgressing in lusts, sinning in the lusts of the flesh, or violating the third rule of conduct equivalent to abrahmacariyā, inchastity (see sīla Pp 38, Pp 39; Iti 63, etc. itthi-kāmehi paricāreti “he enjoys himself with the charms of woman” SN iv.343 Kāmesu brahmacariyavā practising chastity Snp 1041 Kāmatthā for sexual amusement AN iii.229.

Redemption from kāma is to be effected by selfcontrol (saṃyama) and meditation (jhāna), by knowledge right effort and renunciation. “To give up passion” as a practice of him who wishes to enter on the Path is expressed by: kāmānaṃ pahānaṃ, kāmasaññānaṃ pariññā, kāma-pipāsānaṃ-paṭivinayo, kāmavitakkānaṃ samugghāto kāma-pariḷāhānaṃ vūpasamo Vin iii.111 ■ kāmesu (ca) appaṭibaddhacitto “uddhaṃsoto” ti vuccati: he whose mind is not in the bonds of desire is called “one who is above the stream” Dhp 218 cp. Thig 12 ■ tasmā jantu sadā sato kāmāni parivajjaye Snp 771 ■ yo kāme parivajjeti Snp 768 = Ne 69-nikkhamma gharā panujja kāme Snp 359 ■ ye ca kāme pariññāya caranti akutobhayā te ve pāragatā loke ye pattā āsavakkhayaṃ AN iii.69 ■ Kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññāpeti Gotamo MN i.84; cp. AN v.64 kāme pajahati: SN i.12 = SN i.31; Snp 704; kāmānaṃ vippahāna SN i.47 ■ ye kāme hitvā agihā caranti Snp 464-kāmā nirujjhanti (through jhāna) AN iv.410; kāme panudati Dhp 383 = SN i.15 (context broken), cp. kāmasukhaṃ analaṃkaritvā Snp 59 ■ kāmesu anapekkhin Snp 166 = Ś i.16 (abbrev.); SN ii.281; Snp 857 ■ cp rāgaṃ vinayetha… Snp 361. vivicc’ eva kāmehi aloof from sensuous joys is the prescription for all Jhāna-exercise.

Applications of these expressions:-kāmesu palāḷita AN iii.5; kāmesu mucchita SN i.74; kāmālaye asatta SN i.33; kāmesu kathaṃ nameyya SN i.117; kāmesu anikīḷitāvin SN i.9 (cp. kela); kittassa munino carato kāmesu anapekhino oghatiṇṇassa pihayanti kāmesu gathitā pajā Snp 823 (gadhitā Nd1) ■ kāmesu asaññata Snp 243 ■ yo na lippati kāmesu tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ Dhp 401 ■ Muni santivādo agiddho kāme ca loke ca anûpalitto Snp 845; kāmesu giddha DN iii.107; Snp 774; kāmesu gedhaṃ āpajjati SN i.73 ■ na so rajjati kāmesu Snp 161 ■ kāmānaṃ vasam upāgamum Snp 315 (= kāmānaṃ āsattataṃ pāpuniṃsu Snp-a 325); kāme parivajjeti Snp 768, kāme anugijjhati Snp 769.

Character of Kāmā. The pleasures of the senses are evanescent, transient (sabbe kāmā aniccā, etc. AN ii.177) and of no real taste (appāsādā); they do not give permanent satisfaction; the happiness which they yield is only a deception, or a dream, from which the dreamer awakens with sorrow and regret. Therefore the Buddha says “Even though the pleasure is great, the regret is greater: ādīnavo ettha bhīyyo” (see k-sukha). Thus kāmā as kālikā (needing time) SN i.9, SN i.117; aniccā (transitory) SN i.22; kāmā citrā madhurā “pleasures are manifold and sweet” (i.e. tasty) Snp 50; but also appassādā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā: quot. MN i.91 see Nd ii.71. Another passage with var. descriptions and comparisons of kāma, beginning with app’ assādā dukkhā kāmā is found at Ja iv.118. -atittaṃ yeva kāmesu antako kurute vasaṃ Dhp 48 ■ na kahāpaṇavassena titti kāmesu vijjati appasādā dukkhā kāmā iti viññāya paṇḍito “not for showers of coins is satisfaction to be found in pleasures-of no taste and full of misery are pleasures: thus say the wise and they understand” Dhp 186; cp. MN i.130; Vin ii.25 (cp. Divy 224)-Kāmato jāyatī soko kāmato jāyatī bhayaṃ kāmato vippamuttassa n’atthi soko kuto bhayan ti “of pleasure is born sorrow, of pleasure is born fear” Dhp 215. Kāmānam adhivacanāni, attributes of kāma are bhaya, dukkha, roga, gaṇḍa, salla, sanga, panka, gabbha AN iv.289; Nd ii.p. 62 on Snp 51; same, except salla gabbha: AN iii.310. The misery of such pleasures is painted in vivid colours in the Buddha’s discourse on pains of pleasures MN i.85 and parallel passages (see e.g. Nd ii.199), how kāma is the cause of egoism, avarice quarrels between kings, nations, families, how it leads to warfare, murder, lasciviousness, torture and madness Kāmānaṃ ādīnavo (the danger of passions) MN i.85 sq = Nd ii.199, quot. Snp-a 114 (on Snp 61); as one of the five anupubbikathās: K˚ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ AN iv.186, AN iv.209, AN iv.439 ■ they are the leaders in the army of Māra: kāmā te paṭhamā senā Snp 436 ■ yo evamvādī… n’atthi kāmesu doso ti so kāmesu pātavyataṃ āpajjati AN i.266 = MN i.305 sq.

Similes.-In the foll. passage (following on appassādā bahudukkhā, etc.) the pleasures of the senses are likened to: (1) aṭṭhi-kankhala, a chain of bones; (2) maṃsapesi, a piece of (decaying) flesh ■ (3) tiṇ’ukkā a torch of grass; (4) angāra-kāsu, a pit of glowing cinders ■ (5) supina, a dream; (6) yācita, beggings-(7) rukkha-phala, the fruit of a tree ■ (8) asisūna a slaughter-house ■ (9) satti-sūla, a sharp stake ■ (10) sappa-sira, a snake’s head, i.e. the bite of a snake at Vin ii.25; MN i.130; AN iii.97 (where aṭṭhisankhala); Nd ii.71 (leaving out No. 10). Out of this list are taken single quotations of No. 4 at DN iii.283; AN iv.224 = AN v.175; No. 5 at Dhp-a iii.240; No. 8 at MN i.144; No. 9 at SN i.128 = Thig 58 & 141 (with khandhānaṃ for khandhāsaṃ); No. 10 as āsīvisa (poisonous fangs of a snake) yesu mucchitā bālā Thig 451, and several at many other places of the Canon.

Cases used adverbially:- kāmaṃ acc. as adv. (a) yathā kāmaṃ according to inclination, at will, as much as one chooses SN i.227; Ja i.203; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 113, Pv-a 176; yena kāmaṃ wherever he likes, just as he pleases AN iv.194; Vv i.11 (= icchānurūpaṃ Vv-a 11)-(b) willingly gladly, let it be that, usually with imper. SN i.222; Ja i.233; Ja iii.147; Ja iv.273; Vv-a 95; kāmaṃ taco nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (avasussatu in J) sarīre upasussatu maṃsa-lohitaṃ “willingly shall skin, sinews and bone remain, whilst flesh and blood shall wither in the body” MN i.481; AN i.50; SN ii.28; Ja i.71, Ja i.110; -kāmasā (instr.) in same sense Ja iv.320; Ja vi.181; -kāmena (instr. do. Ja v.222, Ja v.226; -kāmā for the love of, longing after (often with hi) Ja iii.466; Ja iv.285, Ja iv.365; Ja v.294 Ja vi.563, Ja vi.589; cp. Mhv iii.18, 467. -akāmā unwillingly DN i.94; Ja vi.506; involuntarily Ja v.237.

˚kāma (adj.) desiring, striving after, fond of, pursuing in kāma-kāma pleasure-loving Snp 239 (kāme kāmayanto Snp-a 284); Dhp 83 (cp. on this passage Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 39

41); same expln as prec. at Dhp-a ii.156; Thig 506atthakāma well-wishing, desirous of good, benevolent Ja i.241; Ja v.504 (anukampakā + ) sic lege for attakāmarūpā, MN i.205, MN iii.155, cf. SN i.44 with ib. 75; AN ii.21; Pv iv.351; Vv-a 11 (in quotation) Pv-a 25, Pv-a 112; mānakāma proud SN i.4; lābhakāma fond of taking; grasping, selfish AN ii.240; dūsetu˚ desiring to molest Vin iv.212; dhamma˚ Snp 92; pasaṃsa˚ Snp 825 So frequently in comb. w. inf., meaning, willing to wishing to, going to, desirous of: jīvitu˚, amaritu˚ dātu˚, daṭṭhu˚, dassana˚, kātu˚, pattu˚, netu˚, gantu˚ bhojetu˚, etc. -sakāma (-adj.) willing Ja v.295. -akāma 1. not desiring, i.e. unwilling: MN ii.181; mayhaṃ akāmāya against my wish (= mama anicchantiyā) Pv ii.107, Ja v.121, Ja v.183, etc. 2. without desire, desireless passionless Snp 445. -nikkāma same Snp 1131.

-agga (nt.) the greatest pleasure, intense enjoyment MN ii.43; Vv 163 (= Vv-a 79, attributed to the Paranimmita-vasavattino-devā); -aggi the fire of passion Ja v.487; -ajjhosāna (nt.) attachment to lust and desire No. 10 in kāmacchanda series (see above); -ādhikaraṇa having its cause in desire MN i.85; SN i.74; -ādhimutta bent upon the enjoyment of sensual pleasures AN iii.168; Ja vi.159; -ānusārin pursuing worldly pleasures Ja ii.117 -andha blinded by passion Ud 76 = Thag 297;- ābhibhū overcoming passions, Ep. of the Buddha DN ii.274 -ābhimukha bent upon lust, voluptuous Pv-a 3; -āvacara “having its province in kāma,” belonging to the realm of sensuous pleasures. This term applies to the eleven grades of beings who are still under the influence of sensual desires and pleasures, as well as to all thoughts and conditions arising in this sphere of sensuous experience DN i.34 (of the soul, expld DA 120: cha k˚-devapariyāpanna); Ja i.47; Dhs 1, Dhs 431; Pts 1, Pts 84, Pts 85, Pts 101 Vb 324; Vism 88, Vism 372, Vism 452 (rūpa˚, arūpa˚, lokuttara) 493 (of indriyas), 574; Pv-a 138. -kamma an action causing rebirth in the six kāma-worlds Dhs 414, Dhs 418 Dhs 431; -devatā Pv-a 138 (+ brahmādevatā) and -devā the gods of the pleasure-heavens Ja i.47; Ja v.5; Ja vi.99; Vism 392; or of the kāmâvacara-devaloka Ja vi.586, -bhūmi and -loka the plane or world of kāma Pts i.83; Ja vi.99 see also avacara; -āvacaraka belonging to the realm of kāma Ja vi.99; Sdhp 254 (˚ika); -assāda the relish of sensual pleasures Pv-a 262; DN-a i.89, DN-a i.311; -ātura affected by passion, love-sick Ja iii.170; -ārāma pleasure-loving AN iv.438 (gihī k-bhogī, ˚ratā, ˚sammuditā); -ālaya, the abode of sensual pleasure (i.e. kāma-loka) SN i.33 = Snp 177; Snp 306; -āvaṭṭa the whirlpool of sensuality Ja ii.330; -āsava the intoxication of passion, sensuality lusts; def. as kāmesu kāma-chando, etc. (see above k-chando) Vb 364, Vb 374; Dhs 1097; as the first of four impurities, viz. k˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ at Vin iii.5 (the detachment from which constitutes Arahantship) Vb 373; Dhs 1096, Dhs 1448; as three (prec. without diṭṭhi˚) at Iti 49; Vb 364; cp. DN i.84; DN ii.81; DN iii.216; MN i.7; -itthi a pleasure-woman, a concubine Vin i.36; Ja i.83; Ja v.490; Ja vi.220; -upabhoga the enjoyment of pleasures Vv-a 79; -upādāna clinging to sensuality arising from taṇhā, as k˚ diṭṭhi˚ sīlabbata˚, attavāda DN iii.230; MN i.51; Vb 136, Vb 375; Vism 569; -ūpapatti existence or rebirth in the sensuous universe. These are three: (1) Paccupaṭṭhita-kāmā (including mankind four lowest devalokas, Asuras, Petas and animals) (2) Nimmāna-ratino devā, (3) Paranimmita-vasavattino devā DN iii.218; Iti 94. -ūpasaṃhita endowed with pleasantness: in formula rūpā (saddā, etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā k˚ rajaniyā “forms (sounds etc. = any object of sense), desirable, lovely, agreeable pleasant, endowed with pleasantness, prompting desires” DN i.245 = MN i.85; MN i.504; DN ii.265; MN iii.267; Vv-a 127. -esanā the craving for pleasure. There are three esanās: kāma˚, bhava˚, brahmacariya˚ DN iii.216 DN iii.270; AN ii.42; Vb 366; Iti 48; SN v.54; -ogha the flood of sensual desires AN iii.69; DN iii.230, DN iii.276; Vb 375 Vism 141; Dhs-a 166; Nd ii.178 (viz. kām˚, bhav˚ diṭṭh˚, avijj˚). -kaṇṭaka the sting of lust Ud 27 -kara the fulfilment of one’s desires Ja v.370 (= kāmakiriyā) -karaṇīya in yathā˚ pāpimato the puppet of the wicked (lit. one with whom one can do as one likes MN i.173; Iti 56; -kalala the mud of passions Ja iii.293 -kāra the fulfilment of desires Snp 351 = Thag 1271 -kārin acting according to one’s own inclination Thag 971; or acting willingly DN-a i.71; -koṭṭhāsa a constituent of sensual pleasure (= kāmaguṇa) Ja iii.382; Ja v.149; DN-a i.121; Pv-a 205; -kopa the fury of passion Thag 671 -gavesin, pleasure-seeking Dhp 99 = Thag 992. -gijjha Ja i.210 and -giddha greedy for pleasure, craving for love Ja iii.432; Ja v.256; Ja vi.245; -giddhimā, same Ja vi.525 -giddhin f. ˚inī same Mvu vi.3. -guṇā (pl.) always as pañca: the five strands of sensual pleasures, viz., the pleasures which are to be enjoyed by means of the five senses; collectively all sensual pleasures. Def. as cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā, etc. AN iii.411; DN i.245; DN ii.271 DN iii.131, DN iii.234; Nd ii.s. v.; Pts i.129; as manāpiyehi rūpâdīhi pañcahi kāma-koṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā DN-a i.121 where it is also divided into two groups: mānusakā and dibbā. As constituents of kāmarāga at Ne 28; as vana (desire) Ne 81 ■ In the popular view they are also to be enjoyed in “heaven”: saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjissāmi tattha dibbehi pañcahi k-guṇehi samappito samangibhūto paricāressāmī ti Vin iii.72; mentioned as pleasures in Nandana SN i.5; MN i.505; AN iii.40, AN iv.118 in various other connections SN iv.202; Vv 307; Pv iii.71 (˚ehi sobhasi; expl. Pv-a 205 by kāma-koṭṭhāsehi) Pv-a 58 (paricārenti); cp. also kāma-kāmin. As the highest joys of this earth they are the share of men of good fortune, like kings, etc. (mānusakā k˚ guṇā SN v.409; AN v.272, but the same passage with “dibbehi pañcahi k˚-guṇehi samappita…” also refers to earthly pleasures, e.g. SN i.79, SN i.80 (of kings); SN v.342 (of a Cakkavatti); AN ii.125; AN iv.55, AN iv.239; AN v.203; of the soul DN i.36; Vb 379; other passages simply quoting k-g as worldly pleasures are e.g. SN i.16 = Snp 171; SN i.92 SN iv.196. 326; AN iii.69 (itthirūpasmiṃ); DN i.60, DN i.104 Sdhp 261. In the estimation of the early Buddhists however, this bundle of pleasures is to be banned from the thought of every earnest striver after perfection their critique of the kāmaguṇā begins with “pañc’ ime bhikkhave kāmaguṇā…” and is found at various places, e.g. in full at MN i.85 = Nd ii.s. v.; MN i.454; MN ii.42 MN iii.114; quoted at MN i.92; AN iii.411; AN iv.415, AN iv.430, AN iv.449 AN iv.458. Other expressions voicing the same view are gedho pañcannaṃ k˚-guṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ AN iii.312 sq. asisūnā… adhivac˚ MN i.144; nivāpo… adhivac MN i.155; sāvaṭṭo… adhivac˚ Iti 114. In connection w. rata & giddha Pv-a 3; pahīna MN iii.295; gathita mucchita MN i.173; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ “Let not thy heart roam in the fivefold pleasures Dhp 371; cittassa vossaggo Vb 370; asantuṭṭha Vb 350. See also Snp 50, Snp 51, Snp 171, Snp 284, Snp 337. -guṇika consisting of fivefold desire, appl. to rāga SN ii.99; Ja iv.220; Dhs A.371; -gedha a craving for pleasure SN i.100 Thag-a 225; -cāgin he who has abandoned lusts Snp 719 -citta impure thought Ja ii.214; -chanda excitement of sensual pleasure, grouped as the first of the series of five obstacles (pañca nīvaraṇāni) DN i.156, DN i.246; DN iii.234 DN iii.278; AN i.231; AN iv.457; AN i.134 = Snp 1106; SN i.99; SN v.64 Bdhd 72, 96, 130; Nd ii.200, Nd ii.420A. Also as the first in the series of ten fetters (saṃyojanāni) which are given above (p. 31) as synonyms of kāma. Enumerated under 1

10 at Nd ii.200 as eight in order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 7, 9, 10 (omitting pipāsā and gedha) Vb 364; Dhs 1114 Dhs 1153; Nd ii.ad chandarāga and bhavachanda; in order 2, 3, 5, 9, 6, 7, 10, 4 at AN ii.10 ■ as nine (like above omitting gedha) at Vb 374; Dhs 1097 ■ as five in order: 1, 5, 9, 6, 7, (cp. above passage AN ii.10) at MN i.241 ■ as four in order: 1, 5, 9, 7 at SN iv.188 ■ as six nīvaraṇas (5 + avijjā) at Dhs 1170, Dhs 1486. See also DN i.246; DN iii.234, DN iii.269; Pts i.103, Pts i.108; Pts ii.22, Pts ii.26, Pts ii.44, Pts ii.169 Vism 141; Sdhp 459; -jāla the net of desires Thag 355 -taṇhā thirst after sensual pleasures; the first of the three taṇhās, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚ DN iii.216 DN iii.275; Iti 50; Vb 365 (where defined as kāmadhātupaṭisaṃyutto rāgo); Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136 (cp. taṇhā: jappāpassage); as the three taṇhā, viz. ponobbhavikā, nandirāga-sahagatā, tatratatr’ âbhinandinī at Vin i.10 Vb 101; as k-taṇhāhi khajjamāno k-pariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno MN i.504. See also DN ii.308; SN i.131; AN ii.11; Thig 140; Ja ii.311; Ja v.451; Mil 318. -da granting desires, bestowing objects of pleasure and delight; Ep. of Yakkhas and of Vessantara (cp. the good fairy) Ja vi.498, Ja vi.525; Mvu 19, Mvu 9; as sabba˚ Pv ii.138; -dada = prec. Pv ii.918; Pv-a 112; Ja vi.508; of a stone Mil 243, Mil 252; of Nibbāna Mil 321; Kp viii.10 esa devamanussānaṃ sabbakāmadado nidhi “this is the treasure which gives all pleasures to gods and men” -dukkha the pain of sensual pleasures Ja iv.118; -duha granting wishes, like a cow giving milk Ja v.33; Ja vi.214 f. ˚duhā the cow of plenty Ja iv.20; -dhātu “element of desire.” i.e. 1. the world of desire, that sphere of existence in which beings are still in the bonds of sensuality extending from the Avīci-niraya to the heaven of the Paranimmita-vasavatti-devas SN ii.151; Thag 181; also 2. sensual pleasures, desires, of which there are six dhātus, viz. kāma˚, vyāpāda, vihiṃsā˚, nekkhamma˚ avyāpāda˚, avihiṃsā˚, Vb 86; Ne 97; DN iii.215 Vb 363 (as the first three = akusaladhātus); Vb 404 See also DN iii.275; Thag 378; Ja v.454; Vism 486 (cp Vb 86). -nandī sensual delight (cp. ˚chanda) AN ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. -nidānaṃ acc. adv. as the consequence of passion, through passion, MN i.85, etc. (in kāmaguṇā passage); -nissaraṇa deliverance from passion, the extinction of passion Iti 61 (as three nissaraṇīyā dhātuyo), cp. AN iii.245; -nissita depending on craving Mil 11; -nīta led by desire Ja ii.214, Ja ii.215; -paṅka the mire of lusts Snp 945; Thig 354; Ja v.186, Ja v.256; Ja vi.230 Ja vi.505; Mhbv 3; -paṭisandhi -sukhin finding happiness in the association with desire MN iii.230; -pariḷāha the flame or the fever of passion MN i.242, MN i.508; SN iv.188; AN i.68 (pariḍayhati, khajjati, etc.); AN ii.11; Vin iii.20 Nd ii.374 (comd with ˚palibodha); Dhp-a ii.2; see also kāmacchanda passage. -pāla the guardian of wishes i.e. benefactor Ja v.221; -pipāsā thirst for sensuality MN i.242; AN ii.11, and under k˚-chanda; -bandha Ud 93 and -bandhana the bonds of desire Ja vi.28, also in the sense of k˚-guṇā, q.v.; -bhava a state of existence dominated by pleasures. It is the second kind of existence, the first being caused by kamma Vb 137 It rests on the effect of kamma, which is manifested in the kāma-dhātu AN i.223. It is the first form of the 3 bhavas, viz. kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚ Vin i.36; DN iii.216; AN iv.402; Vism 572. Emancipation from this existence is the first condition to the attainment of Arahantship: kāmabhave asatta akiñcana Snp 176, Snp 1059, Snp 1091 (expl. Snp-a 215: tividhe bhave alaggana); Bdhd 61 ˚parikkhīṇa one who has overcome the desire-existence Dhp 415 = Snp 639. -bhoga enjoyment of sensual pleasures gratification of desires SN i.74 (sāratta-˚esu giddhā kāmesu mucchitā); Thig 464; Iti 94 (-˚esu paṇḍito who discriminates in worldly pleasures) Ja ii.65; -bhogin enjoying the pleasures of the senses Vin i.203, Vin i.287; Vin ii.136, Vin ii.149; DN iii.124, DN iii.125; Mil 243 Mil 350, as Ep. of the kāmûpapatti-beings Iti 94; as ten kinds AN v.177; as bringing evil, being blameworthy SN i.78; cp. AN iv.281, AN iv.438; SN iv.333 sq.; AN iii.351; Thig 486; Ja iii.154. ye keci kāmesu asaññatā janā avītarāgā idha k-bhogino (etc.) AN ii.6, cp. ii.17. kāmabhogī kām’ārāmo kāmarato kāma-sammudita AN iv.439 -˚seyyā sleeping at ease, way of lying down, the second of the four ways of sleeping (kāmabhogīseyyā vāmena passena) AN ii.244; -bhojin = ˚bhogin Ud 65; -magga the path of sensuous pleasures Ja v.67; -matta intoxicated with sensuous pleasures Ja vi.231; -mucchā sensual stupor or languor SN iv.189; AN ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. (see kāmacchanda); -yoga application to sensuous enjoyment one of the four yogas, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚ avijjā˚ (cp. āsavā) AN ii.10; only the first two at Iti 95 cp. DN iii.230, DN iii.276; SN v.59; Dhs-a 166; -rata delighting in pleasures Ja v.255; -rati amorous enjoyment (as arati Thig 58 and 141; Ja i.211; Ja iii.396; Ja iv.107 ■ n’atthi nissaraṇaṃ loke kiṃ vivekena kāhasi bhuñjassu kratiyo mâhu pacchânutāpinī SN i.128. mā pamādam anuyuñjetha, mā kāmaratisanthavaṃ appamatto hi jhāyanto pappoti paramaṃ sukhan SN i.25 = Dhp 27 = Thag 884; -rasa the taste of love Ja ii.329; Ja iii.170; Ja v.451 -rāga sensual passion, lust. This term embraces the kāmaguṇā & the three rāgas: Dhs 1131, Dhs 1460 Ne 28; MN i.433 sq.; DN iii.254, DN iii.282; SN i.22; AN iii.411; SN i.13, SN i.53; SN iii.155; Thig 68, Thig 77; Pv-a 6; see also k-chanda passage. Relinquishing this desire befits the Saint: Snp 139 (˚ṃ virājetvā brahmalokûpago). As k-rāgavyāpāda Dhs 362; Snp-a 205; -rūpa a form assumed at will Vv-a 80, or a form which enjoys the pleasures of heaven Vb 426; -lāpin talking as one likes DN i.91 (= DN-a i.257 yadicchaka-bhāṇin); -lābha the grasping of pleasures, in ˚abhijappin AN iii.353; -loka the world of pleasures = kāmâvacara, q.v. Sdhp 233, Sdhp 261 -vaṇṇin assuming any form at will, Protean Ja ii.255 Ja iii.409 = Vv 33191; Ja v.157; Vv 163; Vv-a 80, Vv-a 143, Vv-a 146 -vasika under the influence of passions Ja ii.215; -vitakka a thought concerning some sensuous pleasure, one of the three evil thoughts (kāma˚ vyāpāda˚ vihiṃsā˚ DN iii.215, DN iii.226; MN i.114; AN i.68; Ja i.63; Ja iii.18, Ja iii.375 Ja iv.490; Ja vi.29; Iti 82, Iti 115; Vb 362; Mil 310; -vega the impulse of lust Ja vi.268; -sagga the heaven of sensuous beings, there are six q.v. under sagga Ja i.105 Ja ii.130; Ja iii.258; Ja iv.490; Ja vi.29, Ja vi.432; at all these passages only referred to, not enumd; cp. k-âvacara; -saṅkappa- bahula full of aspirations after pleasure AN iii.145, AN iii.259; DN iii.215; -saṅga attachment to passion Ud 75; -saññā lustful idea or thought; one of the three akusalasaññās (as vitakka) DN i.182; DN iii.215; MN ii.262; SN i.126 Vb 363; Thag 1039; virata k˚ āya SN i.53 = Snp 175 -saññojana the obstacle or hindrance formed by pleasures; ˚âtiga Ep. of Arahant, free of the fetters of lust AN iii.373 (+ kāmarāgaṃ virājetvā); -sineha love of pleasures Dhs 1097 (also as ˚sneha MN i.241; SN iv.188; AN ii.10); see k-chanda; -sukha happiness or welfare arising from (sensual) pleasure, worldly happiness valued as mīlha˚, puthujjana˚, anariya˚, and not worth pursuit: see kāmaguṇā, which passage closes: yaṃ ime pañca k-guṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati k-sukhaṃ AN iv.415; SN iv.225; varying with… somanassaṃ ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo MN i.85, MN i.92 etc ■ As kāma˚ and nekkhamma˚ AN i.80; as renounced by the Saint: anapekkhino k˚ ṃ pahāya Dhp 346; SN i.77; MN iii.230; Snp 59 (see Nd ii.s. v.). See also SN iv.208; MN ii.43; Thig 483; Vv 617; Ja ii.140; Ja iii.396 Ja v.428; kāmasukhallik’ ânuyoga attachment to worldly enjoyment SN iv.330; SN v.421; Vin i.10; DN iii.113 Ne 110; Vism 5, Vism 32; -sutta Name of the first sutta of the Aṭṭhakavagga of Sn; -seṭṭhā (pl.) a class of devas DN ii.258; -sevanā pursuit of, indulgence in, sensuous pleasure Ja ii.180; Ja iii.464; -sevin adj. to prec. Ja iv.118 -hetu having craving as a cause: in ādīnava-section foll. on kāmaguṇā MN i.86, etc., of wealth SN i.74 -hetuka caused by passion Thig 355 = Thag-a 243; Ja v.220, Ja v.225.

Dhtp (603) & Dhtm (843) paraphrase by “icchāyaṃ,” cp. Vedic kāma, kam = Idg. *qā

Kāmaka

(adj.) only-˚ in neg. akāmaka unwilling, undesirous DN i.115; MN i.163; Vin iii.13; Ja iv.31 cp. kāmuka.

fr. kāma

Kāmaṇḍaluka

(adj.) having a kamaṇḍalu (q.v.) SN iv.312 cp. AN v.263.

Kāmatā

(f.) desire, longing, with noun: viveka˚… to be alone Pv-a 43; anattha˚ Ja iv.14 with inf. Pv-a 65 (gahetu˚); Ja iii.362 (vināsetu˚) Mvu 5, Mvu 260; Dhp-a i.91.

abstr. fr. kāma

Kāmin

(adj.) 1. having kāma, i.e. enjoying pleasure, gratifying one’s own desires in kāma-kāmin realizing all wishes; attr. of beings in one of the Sugatis the blissful states, of Yakkhas, Devas or Devaññataras (Pv i.33 = Pv-a 16), as a reward for former merit usually in combn with bhuñjāmi paribhogavant (Pv iv.346) or as “nandino devalokasmiṃ modanti kkāmino” AN ii.62 = Iti 112; Thag 242; Ja iii.154; Pv ii.115; Pv iii.116 (expl. “as enjoying after their hearts content all pleasures they can wish for”).

2. giving kāma, i.e. benevolent, fulfilling people’s wishes; satisfying their desires, in atthakāminī devatā Snp 986- akāmakāmin passionless, dispassionate Snp 1096 syName of vītataṇhā without desire (cp. Nd ii.4).

fr. kāma

Kāmuka

(adj.-n.) desiring, loving, fond of; a sweetheart, lover Ja v.306; Mhbv 3.

cp. Sk. kāmuka

Kāmeti

to desire, to crave, 1. to crave for any object of pleasure: Thag 93; Ja iii.154; Ja iv.167 Ja v.480;

2. to desire a woman, to be in love with DN i.241; MN ii.40; Ja ii.226; Ja v.425; Ja vi.307, Ja vi.326, etc. pp. kāmita in kāmita-vatthu the desired object Pv-a 119; Vv-a 122; grd. kāmitabba to be desired, desirable Pv-a 16 (v.l. for kañña, better), 73; Vv-a 127; and kāmetabba Ja v.156 (= kamaṇīya); ppr. (kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa Snp 766 (= icchamānassa, etc., Nd1) Ja vi.172 = Ne 69.

den. fr. kāma

Kāya

group, heap, collection, aggregate, body ■ Definitions and synonyms ■ Snp-a 31 gives the foll. synonyms and similes of kāya: kuṭī, guhā (Snp 772), deha, sandeha (Dhp 148 = Thag 20), nāvā (Dhp 369), ratha (S iv.292) dhaja, vammīka (MN i.144), kuṭikā (Thag 1); and at Kp-a 38 the foll. def.: kāye ti sarīre, sarīraṃ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṃ vā kesādīnaṃ āyabhūtato kāyo ti vuccati.… It is equivalent to deha: SN i.27; Pv-a 10; to sarīra Kp-a 38; Pv-a 63, to nikāya (deva˚ DN iii.264; and cp. formula of jāti: sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti… Nd ii.257.

Literal meaning.

1. mahājana-kāya a collection of people, a crowd SN iv.191; SN v.170; Vv-a 78 ■ bala˚ a great crowd Snp p.105; Dhp-a i.193, Dhp-a i.398.

2. group or division: satta kāyā akaṭā, etc. (seven eternal groups or principles) DN i.56 = MN i.517 = SN iii.211 (in Pakudha Kaccāyana’s theory); with reference to groups of sensations or sense-organs, as vedanā-kāya, saññā˚, viññāṇa˚ phassa˚, etc. SN iii.60, SN iii.61; DN iii.243, DN iii.244; taṇhā DN iii.244; appl. to hatthi˚, ratha˚, patti˚, groups of elephants, carriages or soldiers SN i.72 ■ A good idea of the extensive meaning of kāya may be gathered from the classification of the 7 kāyas at Ja ii.91, viz. camma˚ dāru˚, loha˚, ayo˚, vāluka˚, udaka˚, phalaka˚, or “bodies” (great masses, substances) of skin, wood copper, iron, sand, water, and planks ■ Var. other combns: Asura˚ AN i.143; DN iii.7; Ābhassara˚ (“world of radiance”) DN i.17 = DN iii.29, DN iii.84; Deva˚ SN i.27, SN i.30; DN iii.264 (˚nikāya); dibbā kāyā AN i.143; Tāvatiṃsa DN iii.15.

Applied meaning.-I. Kāya under the physical aspect is an aggregate of a multiplicity of elements which finally can be reduced to the four “great elements, viz. earth, water, fire, and air (DN i.55). This “heap,” in the valuation of the Wise (muni), shares with all other objects the qualities of such elements and is therefore regarded as contemptible, as something which one has to get rid of, as a source of impurity. It is subject to time and change, it is built up and kept alive by cravings, and with death it is disintegrated into the elements. But the kamma which determined the appearance of this physical body has naturally been renewed and assumes a new form. II. Kāya under the psychological aspect is the seat of sensation (Dhs §§ 613 16), and represents the fundamental organ of touch which underlies all other sensation. Developed only in later thought Dhs-a. 311 cf. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Bud. Psy Ethics lvi. ff.; Bud. Psy. 143, 185 f.

I. (Physical).-(a) Understanding of the body is attained through introspection (sati). In the group of the four sati-paṭṭhānas, the foundations of introspection the recognition of the true character of “body” comes first (see Vb 193). The standing formula of this recognition is kāye kāyānupassī… contemplating body as an accumulation, on which follows the description of this aggregate: “he sees that the body is clothed in skin, full of all kinds of dirty matter, and that in this body there are hair, nails, teeth,” etc. (the enumeration of the 32 ākāras, as given Kp iii.). The conclusions drawn from this meditation give a man the right attitude. The formula occurs frequently, both in full and abridged, e.g. DN ii.293, DN ii.294; DN iii.104, DN iii.141; AN iii.323 = AN v.109; SN iv.111 = SN v.278; Vb 193, Vb 194 Ne 83, Ne 123; with slight variation: kāye asubhânupassī… AN iii.142 sq.; AN v.109 (under asubhasaññā) Iti 81; cp. kāye aniccânupassī SN iv.211; and kāyagatā sati ■ This accumulation is described in another formula with: ayaṃ… kāyo rūpī cātum(m)ahābhūtiko mātā-pettika-sambhavo odana-kummās’ upacayo etc. “this body has form (i.e. is material, visible) is born from mother and father, is a heap of gruel and sour milk, is subject to constant dressing and tending to breaking up and decay,” etc., with inferences DN i.55 = SN iii.207; SN ii.94; SN iv.194; SN v.282, SN v.370; DN i.76 DN i.209; MN i.144, MN i.500; MN ii.17; AN iv.386 = SN iv.83.

(b) Various qualities and functions of the material body. As trunk of the body (opposed to pakkhā and sīsa) SN ii.231; also at Pv i.83; as depending on nourishment (āhāra-ṭṭhitika, etc.) Sv.64; AN ii.145 (with taṇhā māna, methuna); as needing attention: see ˚parihārika. As saviññāṇaka, having consciousness AN iv.53; SN ii.252 = SN iii.80, SN iii.103, SN iii.136, SN iii.169; cp. āyu usmā ca viññānaṃ yadā kāyaṃ jahant’ imaṃ SN iii.143. As in need of breathing assāsa-passāsa SN v.330, SN v.336; as tired fatigued (kilanta-kāya) kilanta-kāyā kilanta-cittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti “tired in body, tired in mind these gods fall out of this assembly” (DN i.20; DN iii.32≈) in other connection Pv-a 43; see also kilanta. kāyo kilanto DN iii.255 sq.; = AN iv.332; SN v.317; MN i.116 jiṇṇassa me… kāyo na paleti Snp 1144; ātura-kāyo SN iii.1 (cittaṃ anāturaṃ); paripuṇṇa-k˚ suruci sujāto etc., with a perfect body (of the Buddha) Snp 548 Thag 818; cp. mahā-k˚ (of Brahmins) Snp 298. The body of a Buddha is said to be endowed with the 32 signs of a great man: Bhagavato kāye dvattiṃsa mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni… Snp p.107, cp. 549. The Tathāgata is said to be dhamma-kāyo “author and speaker of Doctrine,” in the same sense Brahma-kāyo “the best body” (i.e. of Doctrine) DN iii.84 (Dial. iii, 81).

(c) Valuation of physical body. From the contemplating of its true character (kāyânupassī) follows its estimation as a transient, decaying, and repulsive object-kāye anicc’ ânupassī SN iv.211 (and vay’ ânupassī nirodh’ ânupassī), so also asubhânupassī Iti 81 kāyañ ca bhindantaṃ ñatvā Iti 69; evaṃdhammo (i.e. a heap of changing elements) AN iii.324; aciraṃ vat ayaṃ kāyo paṭhaviṃ adhisessati chuddho apetaviññāṇo niratthaṃ va kaliṅgaraṃ Dhp 41. pittaṃ semhañ ca vamati kāyamhā Snp 198. As bahu-dukkho bahuādīnavo AN v.109; as anicca dukkha, etc. MN i.500; MN ii.17 kāyena aṭṭiyamānā harayamānā SN iv.62; SN v.320 dissati imassa kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi ādānam pi nikkhepanam pi SN ii.94 ■ This body is eaten by crows and vultures after its death: SN v.370. Represented as pūti˚; foul SN i.131; SN iii.120 ■ Bdhgh. at Vism 240 defines kāya as “catu-mahābhūtika pūti-kāya” (cp similar passages on p. 367: patthaddho bhavati kāyo pūtiko bhavati kāyo).

(d) Similes.-Out of the great number of epithets (adhivacanāni) and comparisons only a few can be mentioned (cp. above under def. & syn.): The body is compared to an abscess (gaṇḍa) SN iv.83 = AN iv.386; a city (nagara) SN iv.194; a cart (ratha) SN iv.292; an anthill (vammīka) MN i.144; all in reference to its consisting of the four fundamental elements, cp. also: pheṇ ûpamaṃ kāyaṃ imaṃ viditvā “knowing that the body is like froth” Dhp 46; kumbh’ ûpamaṃ kāyaṃ imaṃ viditvā nagar’ ûpamaṃ cittaṃ idaṃ ṭhapetvā Dhp 40 the body is as fragile as a water-pot.

(e) Dissolution of the body is expressed in the standard phrase: kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā…, i.e. after death… upon which usually follows the mention of one of the gatis, the destinies which the new kāya has to experience, e.g. DN i.82, DN i.107, DN i.143, DN i.162, DN i.245, DN i.247, DN i.252 DN iii.96, DN iii.97, DN iii.146, DN iii.181, DN iii.235; MN i.22; SN i.94; SN iii.241; Dhp 140; Iti 12, Iti 14; Ja i.152; Pv-a 27, etc., etc. Cp. also iv.

II. (Psychological).-As the seat of feeling, kāya is the fifth in the enumeration of the senses (āyatanāni) It is ajjhattika as sense (i.e. subjective) and its object is the tangible (phoṭṭhabba). The contact between subject and object consists either in touching (phusitvā or in sensing (viññeyya). The formulas vary, but are in essence the same all through, e.g. kāya-viññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā DN i.245; kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā DN iii.226, DN iii.250, DN iii.269; MN i.33; MN ii.42; SN iv.104, SN iv.112 kāyena phusitvā AN v.11; kāyo c’ eva phoṭṭhabbā ca DN iii.102. Best to be grouped here is an application of kāya in the sense of the self as experiencing a great joy the whole being, the “inner sense,” or heart. This realization of intense happiness (such as it is while it lasts), pīti-sukha, is the result of the four stages of meditation, and as such it is always mentioned after the jhānas in the formula: so imaṃ eva kāyaṃ vivekajena pīti-sukhena abhisandeti… “His very body does he so pervade with the joy and ease born of detachment from worldliness” DN i.73 sq. = MN i.277; AN ii.41 etc ■ A similar context is that in which kāya is represented as passaddha, calmed down, i.e. in a state which is free from worldly attachment (vivekaja). This “peace” of the body (may be translated as “my senses my spirits” in this connection) flows out of the peace of the mind and this is born out of the joy accompanying complete satisfaction (pamuditā) in attaining the desired end. The formula is pamuditassa pīti jāyati pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati DN iii.241, DN iii.288; SN iv.351; MN i.37; AN iii.21, AN iii.285; AN iv.176; AN v.3, AN v.333; Vb 227. Similarly: pamuditāya pīti jāyati, pītimanāya kāyo p˚ passadhakāyā sukhaṃ ved˚ Vin i.294 (c̣p. Vin. Texts ii.224: “all my frame will be at peace,” or “individuality”; see note) passaddhakāya-sankhāra mentioned at AN v.29 sq. is one of the ten ariya-vāsā, the noblest conditions. A quasi-analogy between kāya and kāma is apparent from a number of other passages kāya-chando-˚sneho-˚anvayatā pahīyati MN i.500; ajjhattañ ca bahiddha ca kāye chandaṃ virājaye Snp 203 kāye avigata-rāgo hoti (kāme, rūpe) DN iii.238 = AN iii.249; madhurakajāto viya kāyo SN iii.106; AN iii.69.

III. (Ethical).-Kāya is one of the three channels by which a man’s personality is connected with his environment & by which his character is judged, viz action, the three being kāya, vacī (vāca) and manas These three; kammantas, activities or agents, form the three subdivisions of the sīla, the rules of conduct Kāya is the first and most conspicuous agent, or the principle of action κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν, character in its pregnant sense.

Kāya as one of a triad.-Its usual combination is in the formula mentioned, and as such found in the whole of the Pāli Canon. But there is also another combination found only in the older texts, viz. kayenā vācāya uda cetasā: yañ ca karoti kāyena vācāya uda cetasā taṃ hi tassa sakaṃ hoti tañ ca ādāya gacchati SN i.93 yo dhammacārī kāyena vācāya uda cetasā idh eva nam pasaṃsanti pacca sagge pamodati SN i.102 ■ So also at AN i.63; Snp 232. Besides in formula arakkhitena kāyena a˚ vācāya a˚ cittena SN ii.231 = SN ii.271; SN iv.112. With su- and duccarita the combn is extremely frequent e.g. SN i.71, SN i.72; MN i.22, etc., etc. In other comb we have kāya-(v˚., m.˚) kamma, moneyya, soceyya, etc-k˚. v˚. m˚. hiṃsati SN i.165; saṃsappati AN v.289 sq. kāye (v˚. m˚.) sati kāya-sañcetanā-hetu uppajjati SN ii.39 sq.; The variations of k-in the ethics of the Dhamma under this view of k˚. v˚. m˚. are manifold, all based on the fundamental distinctions between good and bad, all being the raison d’être of kamma: yaṃ… etarahi kammaṃ karoti kāyena v. m. idaṃ vuccati navakammaṃ SN iv.132 ■ Passages with reference to good works are e.g. DN iii.245; AN i.151; AN v.302 sq.; (see also Kamma ii.2 b. c.) ■ With reference to evil SN iii.241, SN iii.247; AN i.201; kin nu kāyena vācāya manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ Pv ii.13 and passim. Assutavā puthujjano tīhi ṭhānehi micchā paṭipajjati kāyena v. m SN ii.151; pāpaṃ na kayirā vacasā manasā kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloke SN i.12 = SN i.31; yassa kāyena vācāya manasā n’atthi dukkaṭaṃ saṃvutaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi, tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ Dhp 391 = Ne 183. Kāyena saṃvaro sādhu sādhu vācāya saṃvaro manasā saṃvaro sādhu sādhu sabbattha saṃvaro Dhp 361 = SN i.73; Mil 399; ye ca kāyena v. m. ca susaṃvutā na te Māravasânugā na te Mārassa paccagū SN i.104; vācānurakkhī manasā susaṃvuto kāyena ca akusalaṃ na kayirā Dhp 281 = Ne 183.

Kāya as one of a dyad: vācā and kāya: SN i.172 (˚gutta) MN i.461 (rakkhita and a˚); Pv i.22 (˚saññatā and opp.); Vism 28 (k˚-vacī-kamma); Pv-a 98.

Kāya alone as a collective expression for the three: AN i.54; Dhp 259, Dhp 391; Snp 206, Snp 407; kāye avītarāgo MN i.101; AN iii.249; AN iv.461 sq.; ˚-samācāra SN v.354 kāyaṃ paṇidhāya Pts i.175; Vb 244 = Vb 252; bhāvita and a˚ MN i.239; AN i.250; AN iii.106 sq., cp.: kāya-ppakopaṃ rakkheyya, kāyena saṃvuto siyā kāyaduccaritaṃ hitvā kāyena sucaritaṃ care Dhp 231. Ahiṃsakā ye munayo niccaṃ kāyena saṃvutā Dhp 225.

Kāya in combn with citta: ṭhito va kāyo hoti ṭhitaṃ cittaṃ… SN v.74; anikaṭṭha-kāyo nikaṭṭha-citto AN ii.137; sāraddha-kāyo sankiliṭṭha-citto AN v.93 = AN v.95 AN v.97; bhāvita-kāyo, ˚sīlo, ˚citto, ˚pañño SN iv.111; AN iv.111; AN v.42 sq. Apakassa kāyaṃ apakassa cittaṃ SN ii.198. Kāya-citta-passaddhi, etc. Dhs §§ 29

51 In these six couples (or yugalas) later Abhidhamma distinguished kāya as = the cetasikas (mental properties or the vedanā, saññā and sankhārā khandhas), body being excluded. Cpd. 96. See also combn kilantakāya kilanta-citta under kilamati.

IV. (Various).-Kāyena (i.e. “visibly”) aññamaññaṃ passituṃ AN ii.61; as nānatta˚ and ekatta˚ at AN iv.39 = Nd ii.570. The relation between rūpa-kāya (= cātumahābhūtika), and nāma-kāya, the mental compound (= vedanā saññā, etc.) is discussed at Ne 77, Ne 78, and Pts i.183 sq., see also SN ii.24. K. is anattā, i.e. k. has no soul AN v.109; SN iv.166. n’âyaṃ kāyo tumhākaṃ n’āpi paresaṃ, purāṇaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ… “neither is this body yours, nor anyone else’s: it is (the appearance of) former karma” SN ii.64, SN ii.65 = Nd ii.680. Dissamānena kāyena and upaḍḍha-dissamānena SN i.156. Manomaya-kāya a body made by the mind (cp. Vv-a 10 and DN-a i.110, DN-a i.120, DN-a i.222) according to Bdhgh only at the time of jhāna SN v.282 sq.; manomaya pīti-bhakkha sayaṃpabha DN i.17 = Vv-a 10; manomayaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimmināya… DN i.77; m˚ sabbanga-paccangī DN i.34, DN i.77, DN i.186, DN i.195 ■ Under the control of psychic powers (iddhi): kāyena va saṃvatteti he does as he likes with his body, i.e. he walks on water, is ubiquitous, etc (yāva brahmalokā pi: even up to heaven) SN v.265; DN i.78 = AN i.170: see also S v.283, 284 ■ In the various stages of Saṃsāra; kāyaṃ nikkhipati he lays down his (old) body SN iv.60, SN iv.400; cp. SN iii.241 (ossaṭṭha-kāya) referring to continuous change of body during day and night (of a Petī) Pv ii.1211.

-aṅga a limb of the body, kāy’angaṃ vāc’angaṃ vā na kopenti: they remain motionless and speechless (ref. to the bhikkhus begging) Ja iii.354; Dhs-a 93, Dhs-a 240; -ānupassin in combn kāye kāyânupassī “realizing in the body an aggregate” DN ii.94, DN ii.100, DN ii.291 sq.; DN iii.58 DN iii.77, DN iii.141, DN iii.221, DN iii.276; MN i.56; AN i.39, AN i.296; AN ii.256; AN iii.449 AN iv.300, AN iv.457 sq.; SN iv.211; SN v.9, SN v.75, SN v.298, SN v.329 sq.; Vb 193 sq.; 236; see also above. Der.: ˚anupassanā Ps. i.178, 184; ii.152, 163, 232; ˚passita Nett. 123 -āyatana the sense of touch DN iii.243, DN iii.280, DN iii.290; Dhs 585, Dhs 613, Dhs 653, Dhs 783;- indriya same DN iii.239; Dhs 585 Dhs 613, Dhs 972; -ujjukatā straightness of body (+ citta˚, of thought) Dhs 53, Dhs 277, Dhs 330; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20 -ūpaga going to a (new) body SN ii.24; -kamma “bodily action,” deed performed by the body in contradistinction to deeds by speech or thought (see above DN i.250; DN iii.191, DN iii.245, DN iii.279; MN i.415; MN iii.206; AN i.104 AN iii.6, AN iii.9, AN iii.141 sq.; AN v.289; Thig 277; Pts ii.195; Dhs 981 Dhs 1006; Vb 208, Vb 321, Vb 366; Pp 41; Bdhd 69; Dhs-a 68 Dhs-a 77, Dhs-a 344. -kammaññatā wieldiness, alertness of the bodily senses included under nāmakāya Dhs 46, Dhs 277 Dhs 326. -kammanta = ˚kamma, in comb. ˚sampatti and ˚sandosa AN v.292, AN v.294, AN v.297; MN i.17. -kali “the misfortune of having a body” = this miserable body Thig 458, Thig 501; Thag-a 282, Thag-a 291; -kasāva bodily impurity or depravity AN i.112; -gata “relating to the body, always combined with sati in the same sense as ˚anupassin (see above) SN i.188; MN iii.92; AN i.44; Snp 340 (cp. Snp-a 343); Thag 468, Thag 1225; Ja i.394; Dhp 293 Ne 39; Dhp 299; Mil 248, Mil 336, Mil 393; Vism 111, Vism 197 Vism 240 sq. -gantha bodily tie or fetter (binding one to saṃsāra), of which there are four: abhijjhā, byāpāda sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṃ-saccâbhinivesa DN iii.230; SN v.59 = Dhs 1135 = Vb 374; cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs trsl. p. 304;- gandha spelling for ˚gantha at Ne 115 Ne 119; -gutta one who guards his body, i.e. controls his action (+ vacīgutta) SN i.172 = Snp 74; -gutti the care or protection of the body Vin i.295; Ja ii.162; -citta body and mind: ˚ābādha physical and mental disease Ja iv.166; see other combns above; -ḍāha fever Vin i.214; -tapana chastisement of body, curbing one’s material desires, asceticism Pv-a 98. -thāma physical strength Ja iii.114; -daratha bodily distress Ja v.397 Ja vi.295; -daḷha bodily vigour Vin ii.76, Vin ii.313; -dukkha bodily pain (+ ceto˚) MN iii.288; -duccarita misconduct by the body, evil deeds done through the instrumentality of the body (cp. ˚kamma) DN iii.52, DN iii.96, DN iii.111, DN iii.214; AN i.48; Dhp 231; Iti 54, Iti 58; Dhs 300, Dhs 1305; Bdhd 16, 20 -duṭṭhulla unchastity Thag 114; -dvāra the channel or outlet of bodily senses Ja i.276; Ja iv.14; Vv-a 73; Dhp-a iv.85; Bdhd 69; -dhātu the “element” of body, i.e. the faculty of touch, sensibility Dhs 613; Kv 12 -pakopa blameworthy conduct, misbehaviour (+ vacī˚ mano˚) Dhp 231 = Dhp-a 330; -pacālaka (nt.) shaking or swaying the body, “swaggering” Vin ii.213; -paṭibaddha 1. adj. (of the breath), dependent on, or connected with the body SN iv.293; attached or bound to the body Ja iii.377; Ja v.254; Ja v.2. m. an article of dress worn on the body Vin iii.123, Vin iv.214; -payoga the instrumentality or use of the body DN-a i.72 = Dhs-a 98 -pariyantika limited by the body, said of vedanā, sensation SN v.320 = AN ii.198; -parihārika tending or protecting the body DN i.71 = AN ii.209 = Pp 58; Vism 65 (cīvara); DN-a i.207; -pasāda clearness of the sense of touch or sense in general Dhs-a 306; Bdhd 62, 66, 74 cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 173n, 198n; -passaddhi serenity or quietude of the senses SN iv.125 (cp. iv.351 and above) v.66, 104; Dhs 40, Dhs 277, Dhs 320; Dhs-a 130; Bdhd 16, 19 29; -pāgabbhiya “body-forwardness” immodesty lasciviousness, gener. said of women Ja ii.32; Ja v.449 -pāgabbhiniya same Ja i.288; -pāguññatā good condition of the mental faculties, fitness of sense, opp. kāyagelañña apathy Dhs 46, Dhs 277, Dhs 326; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -phandita (nt.) bodily activity Ja iii.25 -baddha fastened to the body, appl. to robes DN-a i.207 -bandhana a girdle or waistband Vin i.46, Vin i.51; Vin ii.118 Vin ii.135, Vin ii.177, Vin ii.213, Vin ii.266; MN i.237; -bala physical strength Pv-a 30; -bhāvanā meditation or training with regard to action DN iii.219; MN i.237; cp. Mil 85; -macchera “body-selfishness,” pampering the body Thag 1033 -mudutā pliability of sense = ˚kammaññatā Dhs 44 Dhs 277, Dhs 324; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -muni a sage with regard to action Iti 56; -moneyya the true wisdom regarding the use of the body as an instrument of action Iti 56 Iti 67; DN iii.220; AN i.273; Nd ii.514; -ratha the “carriagelike” body Ja vi.253; -lahutā buoyancy of sense ˚muduta, same loci; -vaṅka crookedness of action AN i.112; -vikāra change of position of the body Ja iii.354 -vijambhana alertness Dhp-a iv.113; -viññatti intimation by body, i.e. merely by one’s appearance, appl chiefly to the begging bhikkhu Dhs 585, Dhs 636, Dhs 654, Dhs 844; Dhs-a 82, Dhs-a 301; Mil 229, Mil 230; Vism 448; Bdhd 69, 70 -viññāṇa consciousness by means of touch, sensory consciousness DN iii.243; Dhs 556, Dhs 585, Dhs 651, Dhs 685, Dhs 790; Mil 59; Vb 180; ˚dhātu element of touch-consciousness Dhs 560; Vb 88; Kv 12; -viññeyya to be perceived by the sense of touch (+ phoṭṭhabba, see above DN i.245; DN ii.281; DN iii.234; MN i.85, MN i.144; Dhs 589, Dhs 967 Dhs 1095; Vb 14; Kv 210; Mil 270; -vipphandana throbbing of the body, bodily suffusion, appld to ˚vinnatti Bdhd 69, 70; Dhs-a 323; -viveka seclusion of the body, hermitism Ja i.289; Dhs-a 165; -vūpakāsa ˚viveka DN iii.285 (+ citta˚ “singleness” of heart) -veyyāvacca menial duties Ja i.12; ˚kara a servant Ja ii.334; -veyyāvaṭika same Ja vi.418; Snp p.104; Dhp-a i.27; ˚kamma id. Ja v.317 (= veyyāvacca) Dhs-a 160; -saṃsagga bodily contact, sexual intercourse Vin iii.121, Vin iii.190; Ja vi.566; -sakkhin he who has realized and gained the final truth concerning the body (cp ˚anupassin) DN iii.105, DN iii.254; MN i.478 = Pp 14, Pp 29; MN ii.113; MN iii.45; AN i.74; AN i.118; AN iv.10, AN iv.451; AN v.23; Pts ii.52, Pts ii.62; Ne 190; Kv 58; Vism 93, Vism 387. -saṅkhāra the material aggregate, substratum of body Vin iii.71; SN ii.40; SN iii.125; SN iv.293; AN i.122; AN ii.158 AN ii.231; Pts i.184, Pts i.186; Vism 530. -saṅgaha control of body (+ citta˚) Ne 91; -sañcetanā (-hetu) ground (for the rise of), material, i.e. impure thoughts AN ii.157 Vism 530 (+ vacī˚, mano˚). -samācāra (good) conduct as regards one’s actions DN ii.279 (+ vacī˚) MN i.272 sq. MN ii.113; MN iii.45; SN v.354; AN iii.186 sq. -sampīlana crushing the body (of dukkha) Ne 29; -samphassa the sense of touch (see āyatana) DN iii.243; SN v.351; Dhs 585, Dhs 616, Dhs 651, Dhs 684; ˚ja arisen through touch or sensibility DN iii.244; Dhs 445, Dhs 558; -sucarita good conduct in action, as one of the three ˚kammāni (vacī˚, mano˚ DN iii.52, DN iii.96, DN iii.111, DN iii.169, DN iii.215; Iti 55, Iti 59, Iti 99, Dhs 1306 -suci purity of body, i.e. of action (+ vacī˚, ceto˚ AN i.273; Iti 55; -soceyya purification of body (+ vacī˚ mano˚) DN iii.219; AN i.271; AN v.264, AN v.266; Iti 55.

der. probably fr. ci, cinoti to heap up, cp. nikāya heaping up, accumulation or collection; Sk. kāya

Kāyika

(adj.) 1. belonging to the body, i.e. felt by the body (experienced by the senses), or resulting from the body, i.e. done by the body (= acted as opposed to spoken or thought). sukhaṃ physical happiness (opp. cetasika˚) SN v.209; AN i.81; dukkhaṃ DN ii.306; MN i.302 (opp. cetasikaṃ); kāyikaṃ (sc. dhammaṃ sikkhati to teach the conduct of body (opp. vācasikaṃ Vin ii.248. In comb. with vācasika also at SN i.190 Pp 21; Vism 18 (of anācara); Pv-a 119 (of saṃyama control) Shhp 55; Bdhd 26, 134; referring to diff. kinds of amusements Nd ii.219 = Snp-a 86. 2 ■ ˚ (of devas belonging to the company of-: ˚ DN i.220; gandhabba Pv-a 119. Kayura & Kayura;

fr. kāya

Kāyūra & Kāyura

1. an ornamental bracket or ring worn on the upper arm (bāh’âlankāra Pv; bhuj˚ Vv) or neck (gīvāya pilandhana Ja iii.437); a bracelet or necklace Vin ii.106; Ja iii.437; Ja iv.92; Pv iii.93; Vv 362.

2. adj as sakāyura raṭṭha having the insignia “regis” Ja v.289 = Ja v.486.

see also keyūra, which is the only form in Sk.

Kāyūrin

(adj.) wearing bracelets Pv iii.91.

fr. last

Kār

secondary root of karoti, in denom. and intensive function in kāra, kāraka, kāraṇa, kārin, kāreti and their derivations.

Kāra

1. abs. (a) deed, service, act of mercy or worship, homage: kāra-paṇṇaka Ja vi.24 (vegetable as oblation); appako pi kato kāro devûpapattiṃ āvahati “even a small gift of mercy brings about rebirth among the gods” Pv-a 6. -kāraka one who performs a religious duty DN i.61 (= DN-a i.170). (b) doing manner, way: yena kārena akattha tena k˚ pavattamānaṃ phalaṃ “as you have done so will be the fruit Pv-a 45.

2. (-˚) (a) the production or application of i.e. the state or quality of…: atta˚; one’s own state = ahaṃ kāra, individuality; para˚; the personality of others AN iii.337; citti˚; reflection, thought Pv-a 26; see e.g. andha˚; darkness, sak˚; homage, etc ■ balakkārena forcibly Pv-a 68 ■ (b) as ttg. the item, i.e. particle letter, sound or word, e.g. ma-kāra the letter m Pv-a 52; ca-kāra the particle ca Pv-a 15; sa-kāra the sound sa Snp-a 23(c) (adj.-n.) [cp. kara] one who does handles or deals with: ayakāra iron-smith Mil 331.

fr. kār-, cp. Vedic kāra song of praise, which is, however, derived fr. kṛ = kir to praise; also Vedic ˚kāra in brāhma˚, fr. kṛ;

Kāraka

(usually -˚) the doer (of): Vin ii.221 (capu-capu˚); sāsana˚ he who does according to (my) advice Snp 445 Bdhd 85 sq ■ f. kārikā: veyyāvacca˚ a servant Pv-a 65 (text reads ˚tā); as n. the performance of (-˚) service: dukkara-kārikā the performance of evil deeds SN i.103; Thig 413 (= Thag-a 267). -agga-kārikā first test, sample Vin iii.80.

Kāraṇa

(nt.) 1 ■ (a) a deed, action, performance, esp. an act imposed or inflicted upon somebody by a higher authority (by the king as representative of justice or by kamma MN iii.181; see kamma 11 3.A b.) as an ordeal, a feat or punishment: a labour or task in the sense of the 12 labours of Heracles or the labours of Hades. kāraṇaṃ kārāpeti “he makes somebody perform the task. Pass, kāraṇaṃ or kāraṇā karīyati. Thus as a set of five tasks or purgatory obligations under the name of pañcavidha-bandhana “the group of five” (not, as Warren trsl. p. 257 “inflict on him the torture called the fivefold pinion”), a means of punishment in Niraya (q.v. under pañca). Not primarily torture (Rh. Davids, Mil trsl. i.254, and others with wrong derivation from kṛṇtati). At Dhp-a iii.70 these punishments are comprehended under the term dasa-dukkhakāraṇāni (the ten punishments in misery); the meaning “punishment” also at Ja iv.87 (tantarajjukaṃ k˚ṃ katvā), whereas at Ja vi.416 k. is directly paraphrased by “maraṇa,” as much as “killing.” Often spelt karaṇa q.v.; the spelling kāraṇā (as f.) at Mil 185 seems to be a later spelling for kāraṇaṃ. See karaṇa for further reference ■ Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ajja kāressati “what task will he impose on me to-day?” AN v.324; as pañcavidhabandhana K˚ AN i.141, Pv-a 251, Nd ii.304iii ■ As adj. ˚kāraṇa in dāruṇa˚ “being obliged to go through the dreadful trial” Pv-a 221 ■ (b) duty obligation, in kāraṇ’ âkāraṇā (pl.) duties great and small Dhp-a i.385 Cp. also kāraṇaṃ karoti to try MN i.444 ■ (c) a trick (i.e. a duty imposed by a higher authority through training) Ja ii.325 (ānañja˚); Mil 201 (ākāsa-gamana˚) 2 ■ (a) acting, action as (material) cause: k˚-bhūta being the cause of… Pv-a 15 ■ (b) (intellectual cause, reason Mil 150; Dhp-a i.389; esp. as-˚: arodana the reason for not crying Pv-a 63; asocana˚ same, ibid 62; āgamana˚ the reason for coming (here) ibid. 81 106. = pariyatti, Dhp-a. 36. = attha, SA on i.215, Snp-a i.238-instr. kāraṇena by necessity, needs Pv-a 195 tena k˚ therefore ibid. 40-abl. kāranā by means of through, by (= hetu or nissāya) Pv-a 27; imasmā k therefore Pv-a 40; kāraṇaṭṭhā (expl. as attha-kāraṇā Nd2) for the purpose of some object or advantage Snp 75; opp. nikkāraṇā from unselfishness ibid ■ sakāraṇa (adj.) with good reason (of vacana) Pv-a 109.

in meaning 1 represented in later Sk. by kāraṇā f., in meaning 2 = Sk. kāraṇa nt., equivalent to prakṛti, natural form, constituent, reason, cause

Kāraṇika

the meaning ought to be “one who is under a certain obligation” or “one who dispenses certain obligations.” In usu˚ SN ii.257 however used simply in the sense of making: arrow-maker fletcher. Perhaps the reading should be ˚kāraka.

der. fr. prec.

Kāraṇḍava1

chaff, offal, sweepings, fig. dirt, impurity: yava˚ AN iv.169 (chaff) samaṇa˚ ibid ■ In passage kāraṇḍavaṃ niddhamatha kasambuṃ apakassatha AN iv.172 = Snp 281 = Mil 414 trsld by Rh. Davids Mil trsl. ii.363 “get rid of filth put aside rubbish from you,” expl. Snp-a 311 by kacavara (q.v.). Rh. D’s note3 loc. cit. is to be modified according to the parallel passages just given.

of uncertain etym., cp. karaṇḍa

Kāraṇḍava2

a sort of duck Vv 358 (expld as also by Halāyudha 2, 99 by kādamba, black goose).

cp. Sk. kāraṇḍava

Kārā

(f.) confinement, captivity, jail, in ˚bhedaka cora a thief who has broken out of jail Vin i.75.

cp. Sk. kārā

Kārāpaka

a schemer, inventor Ja vi.333.

fr. kārāpeti

Kārāpaṇa

see kāreti.

Kārāpita

made to do Ja vi.374.

pp. of kārāpeti, Caus. of karoti

Kārikā

see kāraka

Kāritā

= kārikā (performance); see pāripūri˚.

Kārin

(-˚) (adj.) doing: yathāvādī tathākārī “as he says so he does” DN iii.135, Snp 357; see for examples the various cpds. as kamma˚, kibbisa˚, khaṇḍa˚, chidda˚ dukkaṭa˚, dvaya˚, paccakkha˚, pubba˚, sakkacca˚ sampajāna˚, etc.

Kāriya

(adj.) to be done, neg. akāriya to be undone, (not) to be made good Iti 18.

grd. of kāreti, Caus. of karoti

Kāruñña

(nt.) compassion (usually with anudayā and anukampā) SN ii.199; AN iii.189; Vism 300; Pv-a 75; Sdhp 509.

fr. karuṇa

Kāruññatā

(f.) compassionateness SN i.138.

Kāruṇika

(adj.) compassionate, merciful Pv ii.113; Pv-a 16; Bdhd 49; often with mahā˚;: of great mercy Sdhp 330, Sdhp 557; so of the Buddha: mahākāruṇika nātha “the Saviour of great mercy” in introductory stanzas to Pv and Vv.

fr. karuṇa

Kāreti

(Causative of karoti), to construct, to build, etc.; pp. kārita; der. -kārāpaṇa the construction of (vihāra˚ Dhp-a i.416. For details see karoti iv.; see also kārāpaka & kārāpita.;

Kāla

(and Kāḷa )-Preliminary. 1. dark (syn. kaṇha, which cp. for meaning and applications), black, blueblack misty, cloudy. Its proper sphere of application is the dark as opposed to light, and it is therefore characteristic of all phenomena or beings belonging to the realm of darkness, as the night, the new moon, death ghosts, etc ■ There are two etymologies suggestible both of which may have been blended since IndoAryan times: (a) kāla = Sk. kāla, blue-black, kālī black cloud from *qāl (with which conn. *qel in kalanka spot, kalusa dirty, kammāsa speckled, Gr. κελαινός, Mhg. hilwe mist) = Lat. cālidus spot, Gr. κηλίς spot and κηλάς dark cloud; cp. Lat. cālīgo mist, fog, darkness-(b) see below, under note ■ Hence. 2. the morning mist, or darkness preceding light, daybreak morning (cp. E. morning = Goth. maúrgins twilight Sk. marka eclipse, darkness; and also gloaming gleaming = twilight), then: time in general, esp. a fixed time, a point from or to which to reckon, i.e. term or terminus (a quo or ad quem) ■ Note. The definition of colour-expressions is extremely difficult. To a primitive colour-sense the principal difference worthy of notation is that between dark and light, or dull and bright, which in their expressions, however, are represented as complements for which the same word may be used in either sense of the complementary part (dark for light and vice versa, cp. E. gleam → gloom). All we can say is that kāla belongs to the group of expressions for dark which may be represented simultaneously by black, blue, or brown. That on the other hand, black when polished or smooth, supplies also the notion of “shining” is evidenced by kāḷa and kaṇha as well as e.g. by *skei in Sk. chāyā = Gr. σκιά shadow as against Ags. hāēven “blue” (E. heaven) and Ohg skīnan, E. to shine and sky. The psychological value of a colour depends on its light-reflecting (or light-absorbing) quality. A bright black appears lighter (reflects more light) than a dull grey, therefore a polished (añjana) black (= sukāḷa) may readily be called “brilliant.” In the same way kāla, combined with other colour-words of black connotation does not need to mean “black,” but may mean simply a kind of black i.e. brown. This depends on the semasiological contrast or equation of the passage in question. Cp. Sk śyāma (dark-grey) and śyāva (brown) under kāsāya That the notion of the speckled or variegated colour belongs to the sphere of black, is psychologically simple (: dark specks against a light ground, cp. kammāsa), and is also shown by the second etymology of kāla = Sk śāra, mottled, speckled = Lat. caerulus, black-blue and perhaps caelum “the blue” (cp. heaven) = Gr. κηρύλος the blue ice-bird. (On k → s cp. kaṇṇa → śṛṇga, kilamati → śramati, kilissati → ślis˚; etc.) The usual spelling of kāla as kāḷa indicates a connection of the ḷ with the r of śāra ■ The definition of kāḷa as jhām’ angārasadisa is conventional and is used both by Bdhgh. and Dhpāla: Dhs-a 317 and Pv-a 90.

1. Kāḷa, dark, black, etc., in enumn of colours Vv 221 (see Vv-a 111). na kāḷo samaṇo Gotamo, na pi sāmo: mangura-cchavi samano G. “The ascetic Gotamo is neither black nor brown: he is of a golden skin” MN i.246; similarly as kāḷī vā sāmā vā manguracchavī vā of a kalyāṇī, a beautiful woman at DN I.193 MN ii.40; kāḷa-sāma at Vin iv.120 is to be taken as dark-grey ■ Of the dark half of the month: see ˚pakkha, or as the new moon: āgame kāḷe “on the next new moon day” Vin i.176 ■ of Petas: Pv ii.41 (kāḷī f.); Pv-a 561 (˚rūpa); of the dog of Yama (˚sunakha Pv-a 151 ■ In other connn: kāḷavaṇṇa-bhūmi darkbrown (i.e. fertile) soil Vin i.48 = Vin ii.209.

-añjana black collyrium Vin i.203; -ānusārī black (polished?) Anusāri (“a kind of dark, fragrant sandal wood” Vin. Texts ii.51) Vin i.203; SN iii.156 = SN v.44; AN v.22; -ayasa black (dark) iron (to distinguish it from bronze, Rh. D., Mil trsl. ii.364; cp. blacksmith → silversmith) Mil 414, Mil 415; -kañjaka a kind of Asuras Titans DN iii.7; Ja v.187; Pv-a 272; -kaṇṇī “black-cared, as an unlucky quality. Cp iii.611; Ja i.239; Ja iv.189 Ja v.134, Ja v.211; Ja vi.347; Dhp-a i.307; Dhp-a ii.26; the vision of the “black-eared” is a bad omen, which spoils the luck of a hunter, e.g. at Dhp-a iii.31 (referring here to the sight of a bhikkhu); as “witch” Pv-a 272; Dhp-a iii.38, Dhp-a iii.181 as k-k. sakuṇa, a bird of ill omen Ja ii.153; -kaṇṇika prec.; -kabara spotted, freckled Ja vi.540; -kesa (adj. with glossy or shiny hair, by itself (kāḷa-kesa) rare e.g. at Ja vi.578; usually in cpd. susukāḷa-kesa “having an over-abundance of brilliant hair” said of Gotama This was afterwards applied figuratively in the description of his parting from home, rising to a new life, as it were, possessed of the full strength and vigour of his manhood (as the rising Sun). Cp. the Shamash-Saga which attributes to the Sun a wealth of shiny, glossy (= polished, dark) hair (= rays), and kāḷa in this connection is to be interpreted just as kaṇha (q.v.) in similar combinations (e.g. as Kṛṣṇa Hṛṣīkesa or Kesavā) On this feature of the Sun-god and various expressions of it see ample material in Palmer, The Samson Saga pp. 33–⁠46 ■ The double application of su˚ does not offer any difficulty, sukāḷa is felt as a simplex in the same way as εὐπλοκαμός or duh˚ in combns like sudubbala Pv-a 149, sudullabha Vv-a 20. Bdhgh. already interprets the cpd. in this way (DN-a i.284 = suṭṭhu-k˚ añjana-vaṇṇa k˚ va hutvā; cp. kaṇh-añjana Ja v.155) Cp. also siniddha-nīla-mudu-kuñcita-keso Ja i.89, and sukaṇhakaṇha Ja v.202 ■ susukāḷakesa of others than the Buddha: MN ii.66. Modern editors and lexicographers see in susu˚ the Sk. śiśu young of an animal, cub, overlooking the semantical difficulty involved by taking it as a separate word. This mistake has been applied to the compound at all the passages where it is found, and so we find the reading susu kāḷakeso at MN i.82 = AN ii.22 = Ja ii.57; MN i.163 = AN i.68 = SN i.9, SN i.117; also in Childers’ (relying on Burnouf), or even susū k˚ at SN iv.111; the only passages showing the right reading susu-k˚ are DN i.115, MN i.463. Konow under susu J.P.T.S. 1909 212 has both. -kokila the black (brown) cuckoo Vv-a 57; -jallika (kāḷi˚ for kāḷa˚) having black drops or specks (of dirt) AN i.253; -daṇḍa a black staff, Sdhp 287 (attr. to the messengers of Yama, cp. Yama as having a black stick at Śat. Br. xi. 6, 1, 7 and 13); -pakkha the dark side, i.e. moonless fortnight of the month AN ii.18cātuddasī the 14th day of the dark fortnight Pv-a 55ratti a moonless night Vv-a 167; (opp. dosina r. -meyya a sort of bird Ja vi.539; -loṇa black (dark) salt Vin i.202 (Bdhgh. pakati-loṇa, natural salt); -loha “black metal,” iron ore Mil 267; -valli a kind of creeper Vism 36, Vism 183. -sīha a special kind of lion Ja iv.208. -sutta a black thread or wire, a carpenter’s measuring line Ja ii.405; Mil 413; also Name of a Purgatory (nivaya) Ja v.266. See Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76- 78 -hatthin “black elephant,” an instrument of torture in Avīci Sdhp 195.

2. Kāla time, etc. (a) Morning: kāle early Pv ii.941 (= pāto Pv-a 128), kālassa in the morning (geName of time), early Vv-a 256. Cp. paccūsa-kāle at dawn Dhp-a iii.242. Opposed to evening or night in kāḷena in the morning Pv i.63 (opp. sāyaṃ). Kāle juṇhe by day and by night Nd ii.631 ■ (b) time in general: gacchante gacchante kāle in course of time Dhp-a i.319 evaṃ gacchante kāle as time went on Pv-a 54, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 127 etc ■ kālaṃ for a time Vin i.176 (spelt kāḷaṃ); kañci kālaṃ some time yet Vv-a 288; ettakaṃ kālaṃ for a long time Pv-a 102 ■ kālena kālaṃ (1) from time to time Pv-a 151; Vv-a 255, Vv-a 276 ■ (2) continuously constantly AN iv.45; Pp 11 (+ samayena samayaṃ) DN i.74 (: but expld at DN-a i.218 by kāle kāle in the sense of “every fortnight or every ten days”). kāle in (all) time, always (cp. αἰεί) Snp 73 (expl. in Nd ii.by niccakāle under sadā; but at Snp-a 128 by phāsu-kālena “in good time”); -kāle kāle from time to time, or repeatedly Vv-a 352. See also cira˚, sabba˚ ■ (c) Time in special, either (1) appointed time, date, fixed time or (2) suitable time, proper time, good time, opportunity Cp. Gr. καιρίς and ὡρα; or (3) time of death, death. (1) Mealtime: Pv-a 25; Vv-a 6; esp. in phrase kālo bho Gotamo, niṭṭhitaṃ bhattaṃ “it is time, Gotama, the meal is ready” DN i.119 = DN i.226; Snp p.111; and in kālaṃ āroceti or ārocāpeti he announces the time (for dinner DN i.109, DN i.226; Snp p.111; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 141; Vv-a 173. -date: kālato from the date or day of…, e.g. diṭṭha˚ paṭṭhāya “from the day that she first saw her” Vv-a 206 gihī˚ paṭṭhāya “from the day of being a layman Pv-a 13. (2) proper time, right time: also season, as in utu˚; favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; Vin ii.173 kālaṃ jānāti “he knows the proper time” A iv.114; as cattāro kālā, four opportunities AN ii.140; yassa kālaṃ maññasi for what you think it is time (to go), i.e. goodbye DN i.106, DN i.189, etc. The 3 times of the cycle of existence are given at Vism 578 as past, present, and future ■ kāla˚; (adj.) in (due) time, timely Vism 229 (˚maraṇa timely death) ■ Opp. akāla (it is the) wrong time or inopportune DN i.205; akāla-cārin going (begging at the improper time Snp 386. akālamegha a cloud arising unexpectedly (at the wrong time) Mil 144- kāle at the proper time, with vikāle (opp.) Vin i.199 Vin i.200; Ja ii.133; Snp 386. akāle in the wrong season Vv-a 288. kālena in proper time, at the right moment AN ii.140; Snp 326, Snp 387 (= yutta kālena Snp-a 374) Pv i.53 (= ṭhitakālena Pv-a 26); Pp 50; Iti 42; Kp-a 144 (= khaṇena samayena). Cp. vikāla. (3) The day as appointed by fate or kamma, point of time (for death, cp. Vism 236), the “last hour,” cp. ἠμαρ, illa dies. So in the meaning of death appld not only to this earthly existence, but to all others (peta˚, deva˚, etc. as well, in phrase kālaṃ karoti “he does his time = he has fulfilled his time” Vin iii.80; Snp 343, Dhp-a i.70 and frequently elsewhere; cp ■ kata,-kiriyā ■ As death in kālaṃ kankhati to await the appointed time SN i.187; Snp 516 (cp. kankhati) and in dern kālika ■ Other examples for this use of kāla see under bhatta˚, yañña˚ vappa˚.

-antara interval, period: kālantarena in a little while Pv-a 13; na kālantare at once Pv-a 19; -kata (adj. dead Snp 586, Snp 590; in combn petā kālakatā “the Petas who have fulfilled their (earthly) time Snp 807; Pv i.57i.121. Also as kālaṅkata Pv ii.79; Vv 809; Vism 296 -kiriyā death (often combd with maraṇa) MN ii.108; AN i.22, AN i.77, AN i.261 (as bhaddikā, cp. AN iii.293); iv.320; Snp 694; Pv i.1012 (of a Petī who has come to the end of her existence); Dhp-a ii.36; Dhp-a iv.77. -gata = ˚kata Pv-a 29, Pv-a 40. -ññū knowing the proper time for… (c dat. or loc.) Snp 325; described at AN iv.113 sq.; as one of the five qualities of a rājā cakkavattī (viz. atthaññū dhamma˚, matta˚, k˚, parisa˚) AN iii.148; one of the seven qual. of a sappurisa, a good man (= prec. + atta˚ puggala˚) DN iii.252, DN iii.283; as quality of the Tathāgata DN iii.134 = Nd ii.276; Pp 50. -ññutā n. abstr. to prec AN ii.101; -(p)pavedana announcement of death (-time Thag 563 = Ja i.118 = Vism 389 = Dhp-a i.248. -bhojana in a˚ eating at the improper time SN v.470; -vādin speaking at the proper time, in formula kāla˚ bhūta˚ attha dhamma˚ vinaya˚ under sīla No. 7: DN i.4; DN iii.175; DN-a i.76; AN ii.22, AN ii.209; Pp 58; -vipassin considering the right moment, taking the opportunity Iti 41. -sataṃ (˚sahassaṃ, etc.) a hundred (thousand, etc.) times Vism 243.

Kālika

(adj.) belonging to time, in time, as sabba-kālika always in time, cp. Gr. ὡραϊος Vv 392 with time, i.e. gradual, slowly, delayed SN i.117 = Nd ii.645; usually neg. akālika 1. not delayed, immediate, in this world, comb. with sandiṭṭhika SN ii.58; SN i.117 SN iv.41 = SN iv.339 = SN v.343;

2. subject to time, i.e. temporal vanishing Pv-a 87;

3. unusual, out of season Mil 114 (cp. akāla) ■ See also tāva-kālika.

fr. kāla 2

Kālīya

a kind of (shiny) sandal wood; so to be read for tālīsa at Vin i.203 (see note on p. 381).

Kālusiya

(and Kālussiya ) (nt.) darkness obscurity DN-a i.95; Pv-a 124 (cakkhu˚); fig. (dosa˚ Vv-a 30.

der. fr. kalusa, stained, dirty see cognates under kammāsa and kāla

Kāḷa

see kāla 1.

Kāḷaka

(adj.) black, stained; in enumeration of colours at Dhs 617 (of rūpa) with nīla, pītaka, lohitaka odāta, k˚, mañjeṭṭha; of a robe AN ii.241; f. kāḷikā Vv-a 103 ■ (nt.) a black spot, a stain, also a black grain in the rice, in apagata˚ without a speck or stain (of a clean robe) DN i.110 = AN iv.186 = AN iv.210 = AN iv.213; vicita˚ (of rice) “with the black grains removed” DN i.105; AN iv.231; Mil 16; vigata˚; (same) AN iii.49 ■ A black spot (of hair) Ja v.197 (= kaṇha-r-iva) ■ Fig. of character Dhp-a iv.172.

fr. kāḷa

Kāḷārika

see kaḷārika.

Kāveyya

(nt.) 1. poetry, the making of poems, poetry as business. one of the forbidden occupations DN i.11 (= DN-a i.95 kabba-karaṇa)

2. poetry, song, poem (of suttanta) AN i.72 = AN iii.107.

-matta intoxicated with poetry, musing, dreaming SN i.110, SN i.196.

grd. fr. kāvyate fr. kavi poet cp. Sk. kāvya

Kāsa1

a kind of reed, Saccharum spontaneum SN iii.137.

cp. Sk. kāśa

Kāsa2

cough; in list of diseases under ābādhā AN v.110 = Nd ii.3041.

cp. Sk. kāsa

Kāsāya

and Kāsāva (adj.) [Sk. kāṣāya from the Pāli; kāsāya prob. fr. Sk. śyāma or śyāva brown = Pāli sāma with kā = kad, a kind of, thus meaning a kind of brown i.e. yellow. See further under sāma and cp. kāla 1. Kāsāya as attr. of vatthāni, the yellow robes of the Buddhist mendicant, in phrase kāsāyāni v˚ acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitvā, describing the taking up of the “homeless state” DN i.60, DN i.61, DN i.63, DN i.115; MN ii.67; AN i.107; AN ii.208; AN iv.118, AN iv.274, AN iv.280; Pp 57; Nd ii.172. ˚vattha (adj.) with yellow robes Snp 64; cp ’nivattha Ja iii.179 (dressed in yellow, of the executioner see Fick, Soziale Gliederung p. 104 & cp. kāsāya-nivāsana Ja iii.41; kāsāviya Ja iv.447); Pv-a 20; ˚vāsin dressed in yellow Snp 487.

2. Kāsāva (vattha) the yellow robe (never in above formula) Vin i.287; SN iv.190 = SN v.53 = SN v.301; Dhp 9, Dhp 10 = Thag 969, Thag 970 = Ja ii.198 = Ja v.50; Mil 11. ˚kaṇṭhā (pl.) the “yellow necks those whose necks are dressed in yellow Dhp 307 (Dhp-a iii.480) = Iti 43; ˚pajjota glittering with yellow robes Vb 247; Mil 19.

Kāsāvaka

a yellow robe Dhp-a ii.86.

fr. kāsāva

Kāsāviya

one who is dressed in yellow, esp. of the royal executioner (cp. kāsāya-vattha) Ja iv.447 (= cora-ghātaka C.).

fr. kāsāva

Kāsika

(adj.) belonging to the Kāsī country, or to Benares; in ˚uttama (scil. vattha) an upper garment made of Benares cloth Pv i.108; Ja vi.49 (where to be read kāsik’ uttama for kāsi-kuttama). ˚vattha Benares muslin AN i.248 AN iii.50; Pp 34; Mil 2; Dhp-a i.417; Vism 115.

cp. Sk. kāśika & in a diff. sense aḍḍha-kāsika

Kāsu

a hole; only in cpd. aṅgārakāsu a cinderhole, a fire-pit, usually understood as a pit of glowing cinders Ja i.232. Mostly found in similes e.g. SN iv.56, SN iv.188; Snp 396; Sdhp. 208; and in kāmā angārakās’ ûpamā metaphor AN iv.224 = AN v.175; see also kāma.

cp. Sk. karṣū, fr. kṛṣ

Ki˚

2nd. stem of interr. pron. (cp. ka˚ ku˚); 1. in oblique cases of ko (kaḥ), as gen. kissa. loc. kismiṃ & kiṃhi.; 2. in nt. kiṃ what? (cp. Gr. τί, Lat. quid; ending-m besides-d in kad, as Lat. quom, tum besides quod id).

3. in primary derivations, as kittaka, kīva (= Sk. kiyant) which stands in same relation to *qṷi as Lat. quantus to *qṷo; and in secondary derivations from kiṃ, as kiñci, kiñcakkha, kīdisa, etc.

Kiṃ

1. as nt. subst. what? sotānaṃ kiṃ nivāraṇaṃ what is the obstruction? Snp 1032; kiṃ tava patthanāya what is it about your wish, i.e. what good is your wish? Vv-a 226; kim idaṃ this is what, that is why, therefore, Pv-a 11; often with su in dubitative question: kiṃ sū’ dha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭhaṃ what then, is the best treasure of man in this world? Snp 181 or with nu: kiṃ nu kho what is it then (in series evañ nu kho, na nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho) Nd ii.186 ■ Gen kissa of what? Pv i.91; ii.940 (= kīdisassa) and in kissa hetu on the ground of what i.e. why? Snp 1131; Pv ii.81 (= kiṃ nimittaṃ) ■ Instr. kena by what or how is it that: kena ssu nivuto loko Snp 1032 ■ Acc. kiṃ: kiṃ kāhasi what will you do? Snp 428; kiṃ āgamma kiṃ ārabbha on what grounds & for what reason? DN i.13 DN i.14, etc.; kiṃ nissita to what purpose Snp 1043 ■ Loc. kismiṃ in what or what about: kismiṃ vivādo “what is the quarrel about?” DN i.237; or kimhi, e.g. kimhi sikkhamāno in what instructed? DN ii.241 (corresponds to ettha = in this). The ṃ of kiṃ in Sandhi is either elided or contracted or undergoes the usual Sandhi changes ki ha = kiṃ ha Kp-a 78, kissa = kiṃ assa Snp 1032; kīdisa (q.v.) = kiṃ disa; kiñci (see below) = kiṃ cid; kiṃ va a little: see kittaka.

2. as interr. particle, introducing a question = Lat. nonne, Gr. α ̓́ν: kiṃ idāni pi dinne te labheyyuṃ? “Will they receive that which is given now?” Pv-a 22. So as disjunctive particle in comb with udāhu (whether-or): kiṃ-udāhu what (about this… or is it (otherwise), is it so… or is it not so (cp. πότερον η ̓́, Lat. utrum-an): kim imasmiṃ attabhāve pitaraṃ pucchasi udāhu atīte? “do you enquire about your father in this existence, or in a past one? Pv-a 38; kiṃ nakkhattaṃ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiṃ karissasi “Will you take a holiday or will you work?” Vv-a 63 ■ Very often modified and intensified by other exhortative particles: kiṃ aññatra (with abl.) unless (by), except for Snp 206 (see aññatra) kin nu kho why but why, why in the world? DN ii.131; Ja ii.159; Dhp-a ii.91. As kimo in kimo nu why then? Ja iii.373 Ja v.479 (= kim eva); kimu Sdhp 137; kim pana = nonne kim pana bhante addasa? “Have you not seen? DN ii.132; kim pana tvaṃ maññasi what then do you think = do you not think then, that?… Ja i.171 kim aṅga how much more or less, i.e. far more, or far less Mil 274 as kim aṅga pana why then? MN iii.181; Mil 23; Vism 233; kin ti how then? DN ii.74; kin ti te sutaṃ have you not heard? DN i.104; kintikaro kathankaro q.v.; kiñca (cp. kiñcâpi under kiñci) num-que, nonne; is it not that, rather Ja i.135 (expld in c. by garahatte ca anuggahatthe nipāto) ■ kiñci in comb. with yaṃ or yad: whatever; in other combn positive: some, neg.: na kiñci nothing; yad atthi kiñci whatever there is of… Snp 231; n’atthi kiñci there is nothing: see under atthi and kiñcana; kiñci n’atthi loke there is nothing in this world… Snp 1122. kiñcāpi whatever, however much: kiñcâpi te tattha yatā caranti “however much they endeavour in this Snp 1080; Ja i.147; Iti 114; Kp-a 187, Kp-a 190. Same as disjunctive conjunction with foll. pana: (= Lat. quamvis kiñcāpi hi… pana although… yet Dhp-a i.391; kiñcâpi with pot.… atha kho although-yet; it may be that-but SN i.72.

3. In composition (˚-) often implying doubt, uncertainty (“what is it, that is so & so?”), or expressing strangeness (: doubtful likeness), e.g. kinnara a kind of man (but not sure about it), a half-man kimpakka odd-looking or doubtful (poisonous) fruit kimpurisa a strange man (doubtful whether man or beast); cp. kiṃsuka.

-akkhāyin preaching what? in conn. with kiṃ vādin saying what? i.e. holding what views? AN i.62 -atthaṃ for what purpose Ja i.279. -atthiya to what purpose Ja iv.239; Mil 19; Vv-a 230; to any purpose, of any use SN v.171; -abhiñña having what name? Ja vi.126 -kara doing whatever (his duty), a servant, in k˚-patissāvin an obedient servant DN i.60 (cp. expln at DN-a i.168; AN iii.37; AN iv.265 sq.; Thag-a 252; -karaṇīya business occupation AN iii.113, AN iii.116, AN iii.258; AN v.24, AN v.90, AN v.338; -kāraṇā (abl. of kāraṇa) by reason of what, i.e. why? Pv-a 25; -kusalagavesin striving after that which is good MN i.163 = MN i.240; -jacca of what caste? Snp p.80; -nāma of what name? Mil 15, Mil 17; Dhp-a iii.397 (both konāma and kiṃnāma). -pakka strange or unknown (doubtful fruit, in ˚rukkha a tree with odd fruit (i.e. poisonous fruit, cp. Rām. ii.66, 6; Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it to be Strychnos nux vomica) Ja i.368. -purisa 1. a wild man of the woods Ja iv.254; Ja vi.272, Ja vi.497.

2. = kinnara (q.v.) AN i.77; Ja v.42, Ja v.416. f. kimpurisī Ja v.215 Ja v.216. -phala = ˚pakka, in ˚rukkha a tree with unknown (poisonous) fruit Ja i.271. -rukkha what kind of tree Ja v.203. -vādin holding what view? AN i.62; -samācāra (a) of what conduct, in comb. with; -sīla of what character Snp 324 (= Snp-a 331).

nt. of rel. pron. ka

Kiṃsuka

Name of a tree (creeper), lit. “whatever-like,” or “what do you call it,” i.e. strange tree (see kiṃ su & kiṃ 3), pop. name for the Butea frondosa SN iv.193 (parable of the k.); Ja ii.265 (˚opama-jātaka) v.405; vi.536. Perhaps v.l. at Snp-a 284.

-puppha the (red) flower of the k. tree Vism 252 -vaṇṇa of the colour of the k. (flower) Ja i.73 (angārā ashes).

kiṃ + su + ka

Kikita

(?) dense, thick (?) SS at SN iv.289 (for kuṭṭhita), said of the heat.

Kikī

1. (m. the blue jay (J ii.350 k. sakuṇo).

2. (f.) a hen (or the female of the jay?), in simile fr. the Apadāna of a hen watching her egg Vism 36 (aṇḍaṃ anurakkhamānā) Ja iii.375 (rakkhati); cp. Snp-a 317 (kikī sakuṇikā aṇḍassa upari seti).

onomat. to sound-root kṛ; (see note on gala), cp. Sk. kṛka-vāku cock, after the cry of the bird

Kiṅkaṇika

(m. nt.) a small bell Ja iv.362; Vv-a 12.

= kinkiṇika

Kiṅkiṇika

(m. nt.) a small bell Ja iv.259, Ja iv.413; (suvaṇṇa˚); Vv 781 (= kinkiṇi Vv-a 303); Vin iii.42 (kinkiṇikā saddo).

-jāla a net or fringe of tinkling bells DN ii.183; Ja i.32; Dhp-a i.274.

onomat. formation fr. sound part. kiṇi, see note on gala

Kicca

(nt.) 1. (adj.) that which ought to be done, that which is to be performed; nt something to do Dhp-a i.15. Defd as kātabban ti kiccaṃ kiñcid eva karaṇīyan ti Kp-a 218; kattabaṃ karaṇīyaṃ Dhp-a iii.452.

2. (nt.) (a) duty, obligation, service attention; ceremony, performance. The sg. is used collectively as pl ■ adj. (-˚) one who is under an obligation, etc., or to whom an obligation, etc., is due AN ii.67; Dhp 276, Dhp 293; Ja iii.26; Dhp-a i.5 ■ kattabbak˚-karaṇa “the performance of incumbent duties Pv-a 30; idaṃ me kiccaṃ akāsi “he has done me this service” Pv-a 29 ■ In special sense of the duties to the dead: ahaṃ tava pitu ˚ṃ karomi “I will do the last duty to your father” Pv-a 274; that which is not (his) duty AN ii.67; Dhp 292, Dhp 293 ■ (b) (as philos. term function; rasa (essence) is either kicca r˚-or sampatti r function or property. Cpd. 13, 213, n. l.; Vism 162 (parivyatta˚ quite conspicuous f.), 264 (abbhañjana f. of lucubrating), 338, 493 (indriyānaṃ kiccaṃ), 547 (tad-ārammaṇa˚, bhavanga˚, cuti˚, etc.); kiccavasena by way of f. Abhdh ■ sangaha v.8, cp. Dhs. trsl. 132 (with ref. to Dhs-a 264); kiccato Vism 581appa˚; having few or no duties Snp 144 (cp. Kp-a 241ārāmika˚ duties of the Ārāma Ja i.38udaka˚; water-performance, ablution DN ii.15kata˚; one who has performed his duties or mission, i.e. an Arahant Snp 1105; Vv 531 (cp. Vv-a 231bahu˚; having many obligations, being very busy AN iii.116 sq ■ bhatta˚; meal DN-a i.45 sq. Pv-a 76; freq. in formula kata˚ (see kata), cp. kat-annakicca Dāvs i.59mata˚; funeral rites Pv-a 274sarīra˚ the duties of the body, i.e. funeral rites Pv-a 74). Note. In compn with kud˚ kicca appears as kuk-kucca (q.v.).

-ākiccā pl. (kicca + kicca, see Trenckner, Notes J.P.T.S. 1908, 127; cp. ṭhānāṭhāna, bhavābhava maggāmagga, phalāphala, etc.) duties of all kinds various duties: ativasā assu kiccākiccesu “they shall serve me in all duties” Dhp 74 (Dhp-a ii.78 = khuddakamahantesu karaṇīyesu “in small and great duties”) ˚esu yuttapayutto māṇavo (cp. a maid “of all work” Vv-a 298; ˚esu ussukā endeavouring to do all duties Snp 298 (but expld at Snp-a 319 as “zeal in what is to be done and what is not to be done,” taken as kicca akicca cp. akicca); -ādhikaraṇa settlement of the agenda at formal meetings of a chapter Vin ii.89 = Vin iii.164 Vin iii.168; Vin v.101 sq.; 150 sq.; See Vin Texts iii.45; -kara doing one’s duty SN i.91; Snp 676; -karaṇīyāni pl. = kiccākicca, various duties AN iv.87; -kārin = kiccakara AN iii.443.

grd. of karoti = Sk. kṛtya

Kiccayatā

(f.) duty Vin ii.89 (k˚ karaṇīyatā); Mil 42.

abstr. fr. last

Kiccha

1. (adj.) (a) distressed, in difficulty, poor, miserable, painful: kicchā vatâyaṃ idha vutti yaṃ jano passati kibbisakārī (miserable is the life of one who does wrong) Snp 676 = parihīnattha, in poverty Pv-a 220 (kicco = kiccho) ■ (b) difficult to obtain, hard troublesome Dhp 182 (kiccho manussapaṭilābho, Dhp-a 235 = dullabho).

2. (nt.) distress, misery, pain, suffering: kicchaṃ āpanno loko DN ii.30; SN ii.5; ˚ṃ vā so nigacchati “he gets into difficulties (i.e. becomes poor)” Ja v.330 (= dukkhaṃ nigacchati); Vism 314; Dhp-a i.80 ■ Oblique cases used adverbially: instr kicchena with difficulty Ja i.147, Ja i.191 (paṭijaggita) v.331 (id.) abl. kicchā id. Ja v.330akiccha (˚-) without difficulty, easily, in phrase akiccha-lābhin taking or sharing willingly (+ kasira-lābhin) MN i.33, MN i.354 = SN ii.278 = AN ii.23, AN ii.36; AN iii.31, AN iii.114.

-patta fallen into misery Pv iii.54 (= Pv-a 199 dukkhappatta) -vuttin living in misery, poor Pv ii.914 (= dukkhajīvita).

see kasira

Kicchati

to be troubled, to be wearied, to suffer Thag 962 (w. acc. of obj.); usually with kilamati: k˚ kāyo kilamati Thag 1073. Used in a play of words with vicikicchati by Bdhgh at Dhs-a 354 as “ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ asakkonto kicchati kilamati” and at Bdhd. 25 (on vicikicchā) as sabhāvaṃ vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamati.

v. denom. fr. kiccha, cp. Sk. kṛcchrāyate

Kiñcana

(adj.-n..) only in neg. sentences: something, anything From the freq. context in the older texts it has assumed the moral implication of something that sticks or adheres to the character of a man, and which he must get rid of, if he wants to attain to a higher moral condition. Def. as the 3 impurities of character (rāga, dosa, moha at DN iii.217; MN i.298; SN iv.297; Vb 368; Nd ii.206b (adding māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, duccarita); as obstruction (palibujjhana), consisting in rāga, etc. at Dhp-a iii.258 (on Dhp 200). Khīṇa-saṃsāro na c’atthi kiñcanaṃ “he has destroyed saṃsāra and there is no obstruction (for him)” Thag 306. n’āhaṃ kassaci kiñcanaṃ tasmiṃ na ca mama katthaci kiñcanaṃ n’atthi “I am not part of anything (i.e. associated with anything), and herein for me there is no attachment to anything” AN ii.177. akiñcana (adj.) having nothing Mil 220 ■ In special sense “being without a moral stain,” def. at Nd ii.5 as not having the above (3 or 7) impurities. Thus freq. an attribute of an Arahant: “yassa pure ca pacchā ca majjhe ca n’atthi kiñcanaṃ akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇan” Dhp 421 = Snp 645, cf. Th i. 537 kāme akiñcano “not attached to kāma” as Ep. of a khīṇāsava AN v.232 sq. = 253 sq. Often combd with anādāna: Dhp 421; Snp 620, Snp 645, Snp 1094 ■ Akiñcano kāmabhave asatto “having nothing and not attached to the world of rebirths” Vin i.36; Snp 176, Snp 1059 ■ akiñcanaṃ nânupatanti dukkhā “ill does not befall him who has nothing” SN i.23sakiñcana (adj.) full of worldly attachment Snp 620 = DA 246.

kiṃ + cana, equal to kiṃ + ci, indef. pron.

Kiñcikkha

(nt.) a trifle, a small thing: yaṃ vā taṃ vā appamattakaṃ Snp 121; Snp 131; PugA 210 (iii.4). āmisa-kiñcikkha-hetu “for the sake of a little gain” AN i.128 = Pp 29; at Pv ii.83 as āmisa-kiñci-hetu (but all vv.ll. B. have ˚kiñcakkha˚) “for some food” (expld at Pv-a 107 kiñci āmisaṃ patthento) ■ katā kiñcikkhabāvanā at SN iv.118 is evidently corrupt (v.l. ˚bhādhanā for bādhanā ).

-kamyatā in the desire for some little thing Snp 121 (cp. Snp-a 179: appamattake kismiñcid eva icchāya).

E. Mūller P. Gr. p. 35 expls kiñcid + ka

Kiñjakkha

(m. nt.) a filament, esp. of the lotus SN iii.130; Ja i.60, Ja i.183; Ja v.39; Vv 221 ■ vāri˚ Pv ii.120 (= kesara Pv-a 77) in combn with kesara Vv-a 12, Vv-a 111, Vv-a 175.

cp. Sk. kiñjalka & remarks at Aufrecht; Halāyudha p. 186

Kiṭaka

only at Pv i.92,4, of clothes which are changed into missā kiṭakā, which is expl. at Pv-a 44 by kiṭakasadisāni lohapaṭṭasadisāni bhavanti “they become like (hot) copper plates.”

doubtful

Kiṭika

at Vin ii.153 of ālinda, a verandah, said to be saṃsaraṇa˚ ugghāṭana˚ (a movable screen or a curtain that can be drawn aside) Vin Texts iii.174, 176.

Kiṭṭha

growing corn, the crop on the ground, a cornfield AN iii.393 (in simile), cp. SN iv.195.

-āda eating corn AN iii.393. -ārakkha the guardian of the cornfield SN iv.196. -sambādha “when the corn is thick,” in ˚samaye near harvest-time MN i.115 (in simile) Ja i.143 (sassa-samaye + ), 338.

cp. Sk. kṛṣṭa kṛṣ

Kiṇakiṇāyati

to tinkle; also spelt kiṇikiṇāyati Ja iii.315. See also kilikilāyati and cp. Sk. kiṭikiṭāyati to grind (one’s teeth) & Prk. kiḍikiḍiya (chattering) Weber,; Bhagavatī p. 289; also BSk. kaṭakaṭāyati Tal. Vist. 251. See taṭataṭayati & note on gala.;

= kinkiṇāyati, denom. fr. kinkiṇi, small bell

Kiṇāti

to buy Vism 318; pot. kiṇe Ja v.375; ger. kiṇitvā MN i.384; Ja i.92, Ja i.94; inf. kiṇituṃ Ja iii.282.

krī Vedic kriṇāti

Kiṇi

(indecl.) a part., expressing the sound of a small bell: “tink” Dhp-a i.339 (v.l. kiri; see also kili and note on gala).

Kiṇṇa1

ferment, yeast; Vin ii.116; Vv-a 73.

cp. Sk. kiṇva

Kiṇṇa2

strewn, scattered, covered; only in compn with profixes: ā˚, o˚, ud˚, upa˚, pari˚, saṃ˚ see also appa˚.

pp. of kirati

Kiṇha

(adj.) black; in the stock phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā k˚ bandhupādâpaccā DN i.90 = DN i.116; SN iv.117; MN i.334; MN ii.177; in a moral sense = bad, wicked, with nâlam-ariyā dhammā DN i.163.

see kaṇha; DN-a i.254 kiṇhā ti kaṇhā, kāḷakā ti attho

Kita

1. adorned: mālā˚ adorned with garlands Vin iii.249.

2. soiled, only in cpds kaṇṇa˚; said of a wall, also of the ground at Vin i.48 Vin ii.209; and paṃsu˚; soiled with dust Vin ii.121, Vin ii.174. Kitava & kitava

pp. of kṛ; with i for a, cp. kiraṇa for karaṇa. The Dhtp. expld by nivāsane

Kitava & kitavā

one who plays false; a cheat; adj. deceitful SN i.24; Ja v.116; Ja v.117 (a˚) ■ kitavā at Dhp 252 (= Dhp-a iii.375) in combn with saṭha also at Ja vi.228, where the connection with kaṭa is evident: kaṭaṃ Aḷāto gaṇhāti kiṭavā sikkhito yathā like one who is skilled in having the kaṭa, the lucky die. Expld at Dhp-a iii.375 as taken from fowling kitavāya attabhāvaṃ paṭicchādeti “he hides himself by means of a pretence” (behind sham branches).

= kaṭavā? cp. kaṭa

Kittaka

(pron. interr.) how much how great? nt. as adv.: to what extent? pl.: how many? Vin i.297; k˚ṃ antovassaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ “how much of the rainy season is left?” Vv-a 66; kittakā pana vo bhante parivāra-bhikkhū? “How many bhikkhus are in your retinue?” Ja i.32 ■ As indef.: a little; kittakaṃ jīvissāmi, Ja v.505; kittakaṃ addhānaṃ a short time Vv-a 117 (= kiṃva ciraṃ).

fr. kīva, cp. ettaka & BSk. kettaka (Mvu i.50); see Trenckner, Notes p. 134

Kittana

(nt.) praise Pv-a 31, Pv-a 107.

f. kitteti

Kittāvatā

(adv.) to what extent? how far? in what respect? K˚ nu kho mahāpurisa hoti “in what respect is a man a great man?” Nd ii.502 B; k˚ nu kho paññavā ti vuccati? MN i.292. Kitti & Kitti

Kitti & Kittī

f. fame, renown, glory, honour, yaso ca kittī ca SN i.25; kittiñ ca sukhañ ca SN i.187; yaso kitti sukhañ ca AN ii.32 yaso kittī ca “fame and renown” Snp 817 (= Nd i.147, where appl. to the religious perfection attained by a samaṇa); Snp 185 (in the same sense) Vv-a 68 (bāhira˚-bhāva becoming known outside) yaso kitti Sdhp 234.

-sadda the sound of fame, praise, renown (thutighosa DN-a i.146) esp. appld to the Buddha, whose fame is heralded before him: Bhagavantaṃ Gotamaṃ evaṃ kalyāṇo k˚-saddo abbhuggato “the high reputation went forth over the world, concerning the Venerable Gotama”: (such is this Exalted One, Arahant, etc. DN i.49, DN i.87, DN i.115, DN i.116, DN i.236; SN iv.323, SN iv.374; SN v.352; AN i.57 AN i.180; AN iii.30, AN iii.39, AN iii.58, AN iii.253, AN iii.267; AN iv.80; etc. The same with reference to others: Mil 284. Appld to the good reputation of a man (of a kalyāṇamitta) at Pp 37; the opposite is pāpako kittisaddo, bad reputation: AN i.126 AN iii.269; Pp 36; -vaṇṇa praise, in ˚hara receiving or deserving praise DN iii.191; cp. ˚bhatā Nd i.147.

Vedic kīrti, *qer: cp. Gr. καρκαίρω, Ohg. hruod, hruom = Ger. ruhm; *qār: cp. Sk. kāru poet Gr. κ ̈ηρυς herald, Lat. carmen hymn of praise ■ The explns of Dhtp (579) & Dhtm (812) are; saṃsadde saṃsaddane;

Kittika

(adj.) famous Vv-a 200.

fr. kitti

Kittita

(pp. of kitteti] told Bdhd 124; su˚ well told Snp 1057.

Kittima

(adj.). Cp. also kutta,-f. kittimā at Ja iii.70; Ja vi.508 is according to Kern, Toev. s. v. a misspelling for tittima.

cp. Sk. kṛtimā, der. fr. kṛti, karoti, in sense of kata i.2 (a) made up, artificial; clever, skilful Thag-a 227; Dhp-a 391 (of nāma); Vv-a 275 (of ratha cleverly constructed)

Kitteti

1. to praise, extol Pv-a 124, Pv-a 162;

2. to proclaim, announce, relate, tell; ppr. kittento praising Pv-a 159fut. kittayissati in sense of aor Vv 345 (= katheti Vv-a 151) ■ kittayissāmi I shall relate Snp 1053, Snp 1132. grd: kittanīya to be praised Pv-a 9aor. akittayi Snp 875, Snp 921 ■ pp. kittita.

v. den. fr. kitti

Kinnara

a little bird with a head like a man’s] Ja iv.106, Ja iv.254, Ja iv.438, Ja v.47, Ja v.456; Mil 267. Canda kinnara Np. Ja i.91, Ja vi.283, Ja vi.74. f. kinnarā Np. of a queen Ja v.437 sq., and kinnarī Thig 381 (cp. Thag-a 255), Ja ii.121 (matta-kinnarī viya), 230 iv.432 sq. Cp. kimpurisa.

kiṃ + nara, lit. what-man, see kiṃ 3

Kinnāma

see under kiṃ.

Kipillikā

(f.) & Kipillaka (nt.) an ant Snp 602 (kuntha˚) Dhp-a i.360; Ja iv.142 (kuntha˚); v.39 (tamba˚-˚āni) Mil 272kipillaka Ja i.487 (v.l. BB. for pillaka) iv.375 (tamba˚-puṭa); Dhp-a iv.134 (v.l. SS. for T pillaka) ■ Cp. kuntha & pipīlikā.;

Cp. Sk. pipīlikā, see Trenckner, Notes, p. 108

Kibbisa

(nt.) wrongdoing, demerit, fault, usually with ˚ṃ karoti to do wrong Snp 246; Sdhp, 204; Ja iii.135 or ˚ṃ pasavati AN v.75; Vin ii.198. -kata˚; (adj.) having done wrong in akata-kalyāṇo, etc. AN ii.174 and ≈(see kalyāṇa and kata ii.1 a); MN i.39; Pv iv.77; Pv-a 59.

-kāraka1 = next Ja iii.14; -kārin, doing wrong Snp 665 sq.; Pv-a 58.

Ved. kilbiṣa, according to Grassmann to *kil as in kilāsa, thus originally “stain, dirt.” Buddh Sk. kilviṣa classed with aparādha at Mvyntp. 245 No 903

Kibbisaka

= kibbisa Sdhp 290.

Kimi

m. a worm, vermin: setā kimī kaṇhasīsā AN iii.241; Mil 272; DN-a i.199 ■ As animal of death and putrefaction MN i.507; Ja i.146; Snp 201; esp with ref. to the punishment of Petas: Pv i.31; Thig 439; Pv-a 192; Sdhp 603. As glow-worm MN ii.34; MN ii.41 (with khajjopanaka); sālaka˚ a very minute insect Mil 312. In similes: Thag 1175 (kimī va mīlhasallitto); Vism 500, Vism 598. In cpd. kimi-kula the worm kind (genus worm) Mil 100; Vism 235; ˚gaṇa crowd of worms Vism 314.

Vedic kṛmi

Kimina

(adj.) covered with worms Ja v.270.

from kimi

Kira

(& Kila) adv. 1. emphatic: really, truly, surely. (Gr. δή)

2. presumptive (with pres. or fut.) I should think one would expect.

3. narrative (with aor.): now, then, you know (Gr. δδε, Lat. at, G. aber). kira in continuous story is what “iti” is in direct or indirect speech. It connects new points in a narrative with something preceding, either as expected or guessed It is aoristic in character (cp. Sk. sma). In questions it is dubitative, while in ordinary statements it gives the appearance of probability, rather than certainty to the sentence. Therefore the definitions of commentators: “people say” or “I have heard”: kirasaddo anussavane: “kira refers to a report by hearsay” Pv-a 103; kira-saddo anussav’atthe Ja i.158; Vv-a 322 are conventional and one-sided, and in both cases do not give the meaning required at the specified passages. The same holds good for Ja i.158; Ja ii.430 (kirā ti anussavatthe nipāto).

1. mahantaṃ kira Bārāṇasirajjaṃ “the kingdom of B. is truly great Ja i.126; attā hi kira duddamo “self is difficult to subdue we know” Dhp 159; amoghaṃ kira me puṭṭhaṃ Snp 356 ■ na kira surely not Snp 840; Ja i.158.

2. esā kira Visākhā nāma “that I presume is the Visākhā (of whom we have heard) Dhp-a i.399; petā hi kira jānanti “the petas, I should say, will know” Pv ii.710 evaṃ kira Uttare? “I suppose this is so, Uttarā” Vv-a 69. evaṃ kira saggaṃ gamissatha “thus you will surely go to Heaven” Vv 828; “I hear” Dhp-a i.392.

3. atīte kira with aor. once upon a time… Pv-a 46, etc.; so kira pubbe… akāsi, at one time, you know, he had made… Ja i.125; sā kira dāsī adāsi now the maid gave her… Pv-a 46; cp. Ja i.195, etc.

Vedic kila

Kiraṇa

(nt.) 1. an occupation, place of work, workshop Ja iv.223. Cp. kita & kittima.; 2. [fr. kṛ; kirati to scatter, cp. pp. kiṇṇa] scattering effusion (of sun rays), effulgence Vv-a 169, Vv-a 199.

fr. kṛ; karoti to do

Kirati

to scatter, strew; not found in simples, only in cpds. apa˚, abbhuk˚, abhi˚, ava˚ (o˚), pari˚, vi˚ See also pp., kiṇṇa2.

kīr

Kirāta

(& kirāṭa) a man of a tribe of junglemen, classed with dwarfs among the attendants of a chief DN-a i.148. See on the Kirāta as a mountain tribe Zimmer, Altindisches Leben p. 34. Cp. also apakiritūna & okirati;2, okiraṇa ■ A secondary meaning of kirāṭa is that of a fraudulent merchant, a cheat (see kirāsa & kerāṭika).;

prob. dial.

Kirāsa

(adj.) false, fraudulent Ja iv.223 (= kerāṭika).

a by-form of kirāṭa

Kiriyati

to be affected or moved Vism. 318. Kiriya, Kiriya & Kriya

Pass. of kirati or karoti

Kiriya, Kiriyā & Kriyā

1. (n.)-(a) (-˚) action, performance, deed; the doing = fulfilment cp. ˚karaṇa, anta˚, making an end of, putting a stop to (dukkhassa) SN iii.149; SN iv.93; Snp 454, Snp 725 ■ kāla˚ “fulfilment of one’s time” i.e. death SN iii.122; Pv i.1012 Snp 694; Pp 17; kusala˚ performance of good actions SN i.101; SN v.456; dāna˚ the bestowing of gifts Pv-a 123 pāpa˚ commission of sin Pp 19 = Pp 23; puñña˚ the performance of good works SN i.87 = SN i.89 = AN iii.48; a Pv-a 54 mangala˚ celebration of a festival Pv-a 86 massu-kiriyā the dressing of the beard Ja iii.314 (cp m-karaṇa and kappanā); sacchi˚ realization, see s. v -akiriyā the non-performance of, omission, abstaining from (a˚ akaraṇa = veramaṇī) Ja iii.530; Vb 285. (b) an act in a special sense = promise, vow, dedication intention, pledge: Pv-a 18; justice: Mil 171; kiriyaṃ bhindati to break one’s vow Mil 206 ■ (c) philosophically: action ineffective as to result, non-causative an action which ends in itself (Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs. trsl. xciii.), inoperative (see Cpd. 19). In this sense it is grouped with kamma (cp. for relation kamma: kiriyā Ger. sache: ursache). Thus is the theory of Makkhali n’atthi kammaṃ, n’atthi kiriyaṃ n’atthi viriyan ti there is no karma, no after-effect and no vigour in this world AN i.286 (different at DN i.53); n’atthi kiriyā it does not matter MN i.405.

2. (adj.) (a) making no difference, indefinite; of no result, as def. of avyākatā dhammā Vb 106, Vb 182 = Vb 302 = Dhs 566 and 989 (manodhātu kiriyā neva kusalā nâkusalā na ca kammavipākā: indifferent, neither good nor bad and having no fruit of kamma), same of jhāna Vb 268 = Vb 281; Dhs-a 388 ■ (b) indecisive, in akiriyaṃ vyākaroti to give an indecisive answer, to reply evasively DN i.53 and≈

-pada (ttg.) the verb (i.e. that which supplies the action) Vv-a 315; -vāda (adj.) promulgating the (view of a) consequence of action, believing in merit and demerit, usually combd with kammavāda (q.v.) also ˚vādin: DN i.115 (of Gotama) AN i.62; Vin i.71; ; denying the difference between merit & demerit AN iv.174 = Vin i.234; Vin i.242, Vin iii.2; AN iv.180 sq.; SN iii.73 (+ natthikavāda); -vādin adj. to prec. AN i.62; -hetu being a cause of discrimination Dhs 1424 sq.

abstr. fr. karoti

Kiriyatā

(f.) the performance of (-˚), state of, etc. See sakkacca˚, sacchi˚, sātacca˚.

abstr. fr. last

Kirīṭin

(adj.) enveloped, adorned Pv iii.91 (= veṭhitasīsa).

Kila

see kili (the sound click).

Kilañjā

(f.) a mat of fibre or rushes, matting Vism 327; also a screen, a fascine, hurdle, faggots; a crate, crating tassa gandhabbaṃ kilañjā-kaṇḍūvanaṃ viya hutvā… Ja ii.249; “his music was like the scraping of a mat” suvaṇṇa-kilañjā a gilt mat Ja iv.212. As a fascine used in making a road: Dhp-a i.442. as a screen (combd with chatta, fan) Pv-a 127; as faggots: Ja i.158; Mil 287; as a crate or basket, used by distillers: MN i.228 MN i.374 (soṇḍikā-kilañjā) (cp. the trsln under soṇḍa in J.P.T.S. 1909); to which is likened the hood of a snake SN i.106 (snake = māra).

Kilanta

tired, exhausted, weary, either with ˚kāya tired in body Pv-a 43; Vv-a 65 (indicating the falling asleep); or ˚citta tired in mind DN i.20 DN iii.32 (paduṭṭhacitta + , of the waning of the gods) or both ˚kāya-citta Pv iii.23; opp. akilanta-kāya-citta alert, vigorous; with sound body and mind.

pp. of kilamati

Kilama

fatigue Ja v.397 (= kilantabhāva).

spelt klama, fr. klam

Kilamati

1. to go short of, to be in want of (instr.) Dhp-a ii.79; na piṇḍakena kilamati does not go short of food Vin ii.15, Vin ii.87; Vin iv.23 sq.

2. to weary, to be wearied, tired, fatigued; to be in trouble or in misery Pv-a 215 (to be incommodated) 277 (be in distress); fut. kilamissāmi Pv-a 76. Cp. pari˚ ■ pp kilanta.

Sk. klamati, a variation of śramati sri from sri to lean, cp. kilanta, as “sleepy,” and Lat. clīnāre clemens. To k → ś cp. kaṇṇa → śṛṇga, kilissati → śliṣyati, etc. The Dhtp (222) & Dhtm (316) paraphrase; kilam by gilāne.

Kilamatha

tiredness, fatigue, exhaustion MN i.168; AN ii.199; SN i.136; as kāya˚, citta˚ SN v.128; as daratha˚ AN iii.238; Pv-a 23 as niddā˚ AN ii.48, AN ii.50.

fr. klam, in formation cp. samatha

Kilamita

worn out, tired, fatigued Pvii.83.

pp. of kilameti

Kilameti

to be tired or fatigued Ja i.115; ppr. kilamayanto DN i.52 ■ pp. kilamita.

denom. fr. kilama

Kilāsa

a cutaneous disease, perhaps leprosy, enumd under the var. diseases (ābādhā together with kuṭṭha gaṇḍa k˚ sosa Vin ii.271; AN v.110 Nd ii.3041. Kilasika & iya;

cp. Sk. kilāsa

Kilāsika & ˚iya

(adj.) afflicted with a cutaneous disease, a leper, in same combn as kilāsa, Vin i.93 Kv 31 (˚iya).

fr. last

Kilāsu

exhausted, tired of (c. dat. or inf.) Vin iii.8; ; untiring in (c. dat. or acc.) SN i.47 SN v.162; Ja i.109; Mil 382.

fr. sram, cp. kilamatha. E Müller P. Gr. 38 = glāsnu, glā, cp. gilāna

Kili

(sometimes kila ) 1. indecl. the sound “click,” of the noise of a trap when shutting Ja i.243; Ja ii.363, Ja ii.397 (as “kilī”) ■ Also repeated “kilikilī ti” click, click Ja i.70.

2. as n. f tinkling, clicking, ticking (cp. kiṇi), in kiliṃ karoti to tinkle Ja v.203.

onomat. fr. sound-root kḷ

Kilikilāyati

to tinkle Ja v.206; (freq. fr. kili or den. fr. kilikilā; cp. kilakilā “shouting for joy” Avs i.48 and in cpd. hāhākārakilakilā “shouting hā-hā and hail-hail” ibid. i.67 Mvu iii.312 and Divy 459). See also kiṇakiṇāyati Note.- Kil is one of the variations of the sound-imitating qel, which otherwise appears as qal, qul in Gr. κελ αδος, L. cal-are, Ohg. hell-an (cp. Sk. krandati?) also Gr.κλάζω, L. clango, Goth. hlahjan (“laugh”) and in Sk kolāhala, kokila, cp. cuculus (cuckoo) and perhaps Sk ululī, ulūka (owl), Gr. ὀλολύζω, L. ululare. See also the cognate qer under kitti.

denom. fr. kili with reduplication

Kilijjati

to become heated, to get into a state of inflammation, to fester (of wounds) Vin i.205 (vaṇo kilijjittha festered); Snp 671 (gloss for kilissati, expld at Snp-a 481 by pūti hoti)-pp. kilinna. See also ukkiledeti (to clean out a stain, to “disinfect”).

med-pass. of kilid = Sk. klid, to be wet. prob. = śliṣ to stick to, and confounded with svid, cp. also kelana & khela. The meaning “to get wet, to be soiled” only in pp. kilinna ■ The Dhtm (199), however expls k. by parideva lament, to be in trouble, which is not quite in harmony with the meaning; it is more likely that in P. we have a confusion between klid kliś in a meaning which differs from Sk.

Kiliṭṭha

1. soiled, stained, impure; of gatta, limbs Ja i.129; of cīvara, cloak Bdhd 92; of vattha clothes Dhp-a ii.261; of pāvāra-puppha, mango blossom Kp-a 58 = Vism 258.

2. unclean, lustful (morally bad, in ˚kamma dirty pursuit, i.e. cohabitation Ja iv.190; Pv-a 195 (of a gaṇikā); together with kuthita Mil 250.

pp of kilissati

Kilinna

1. wet, usually with saliva and perspiration Vin iii.37; Ja i.61 (lālā˚), 164 (kheḷa˚) DN-a i.284 (assu˚); Vv-a 67 (seda˚).

2. The other meaning of kilid (to get inflamed) is to be found in kilinna-sarīra (adj.) with an inflamed body (i.e. suffering from a skin-disease), which is Bdhgh’s expln of okilinī see under okiraṇa.

pp. of kilijjati

Kilissati

1. to get wet, soiled or stained, to dirty oneself, be impure Iti 76 (of clothes, in the passing away of a deva) Thag 954 (kilisissanti, for kilissanti); Pts i.130. Kilisseyya Dhp 158 (expld as nindaṃ labhati) to do wrong Cp. pari˚.

Sk. kliśyati = kliś or śliṣ to adhere, cp. P. kheḷa and silesuma or semha, Sk. śleṣma, slime. Same root as Gr. λείμας snail; Ags. slīm slime. Another, specifically Pali, meaning is that of going bad, being vexed with ref. to a heated state. This lies at the bottom of the Dhtp. (445) & Dhtm. (686) expl;n by upatāpe.

Kilissana

(nt.) getting dirty, staining Ja i.8.

Kilesa

(and klesa ) 1. stain, soil, impurity, fig. affliction; in a moral sense, depravity, lust. Its occurrence in the Piṭakas is rare; in later works, very frequent, where it is approx. tantamount to our terms lower, or unregenerate nature, sinful desires, vices passions.

1. Kilesa as obstacle (see ˚āvaraṇa, ˚-sampayutta ˚-vippayutta, ˚pahāna) Pts i.33; Sdhp 455; bhikkhu bhinnakileso “one whose passions are broken up Vḅh 246, Pv-a 51; upasanta kileso “one whose passions are calmed” Pv-a 230; no ce pi jātu puriso kilese vāto yathā abbhaghanaṃ vihāne Snp 348; pariyodapeyya attānaṃ cittaklesehi paṇḍito SN v.24 = AN v.232, AN v.253 = Dhp 88. 2. Occurs in such combinations as kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd ii.487; kilesa + khandha: Pts i.69 Pts i.72; Pts ii.36, Pts ii.140; cp. Vb 44, Vb 68; kilesa + saṃsāra Pv-a 7 kammaṃ kilesā hetu saṃsārassa Ne 113, cp. 191. 3. kilesa also occurs in a series explanatory of taṇhā, in the stereotype combn of t., diṭṭhi, kilesa “clinging to existence, false ideas and lust” (see Nd ii.s. v. taṇhā v.).

4. In the same function it stands with rāga, viz rāga dosa moha kilesa, i.e. sensuality, bewilderment and lust (see Nd ii.s. v. rāga ii.), cp. Dhs 982, Dhs 1006. The grouping as dasa kilesa-vatthūni is: lobha dosa moha māna diṭṭhi vicikicchā thīnaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappaṃ Dhs 1548 = Vb 341; Vism 683; mentioned at Pts i.130 ■ These with the exception of the last two, are also grouped as aṭṭha k˚-vatthūni at Vb 385 ■ As three kilesas (past, present and future at Pts ii.217.

5. The giving up of kilesa is one of the four essentials of perfection: the recognition of evil the removal of its source (which is kilesa), the meditation on the Path, and the realization of the extinction of evil (see Nd ii.s. v. dukkha ii.). Kilesa in this connection interchanges with samudaya, as denoting the origin of evil; cp. samudayo kilesā Ne 191.

-āvaraṇa the obstacle of lust Vb 342 Pp 13 Vism 177; ˚āvaraṇatā id. AN iii.436; -kkhaya the destruction of lust Bdhd 81; -paripantha danger of lust Ja vi.57; -pahāna the giving up of worldly lust Vin iii.92 sq., Vin iv.25; Bdhd 129, 131; -puñja the heap of lusts; consisting of ten qualities, viz. the four āhārā (etc. four of each:), vipallāsā, upādānāni, yogā, gandhā āsavā, oghā, sallā, viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, agatigamanāni Ne 113, Ne 114; Ne 116 sq. -bhūmi the substratum or essence of lust Ne 2, Ne 192; there are four mentioned at Ne 161: anusaya˚, pariyuṭṭhāna˚, saṃyojana˚ upādāna˚; -māra death which is the consequence of sinful desire Dhp-a i.317 (in expl. of Māra); -vatthūni (pl.) the (10) divisions of kilesa (see above) Dhs 1229 Dhs 1548; Vism 20. -vinaya the discipline of lust Ne 22 -vippayutta free from lust (dhamma principles, to which belongs Nibbāna) Dhs 1555; -sampayutta connected or affected with lust Dhs 1554 (as 12 principles) Vb 18 = Vb 30 = Vb 44 = Vb 56, Vb 68, Vb 80, Vb 96, Vb 120, Vb 323.

from kilissati

Kileseti

to become soiled or stained (fig.): indriyāni kilesenti Sdhp. 364.

v. den. fr. kilesa

Kiloma

at Ja iii.49 taken as syName of loma, hair and used in sense of pharusa, shaggy, rough (in kiloma maṃsakhaṇḍa as simile for kiloma-vācā).

= next?

Kilomaka

the pleura MN i.185 = Kp iii.Ne 77 = Vb 193; Ja iv.292; Mil 26. Discussed in detail at Vism 257, Vism 357.

= Sk. kloman, the right lung, cp. Gr. πλεύμων, Lat. pulmo

Kisa

(adj.) lean, haggard, emaciated, opp. thūla fat (Vv-a 103). As Ep of ascetics Snp 165, Dhp 395 = Thag 243; esp. as Ep. of petas: Pv ii.113; Snp 426, Snp 585; Sdhp 101; Mil 303 For phrase kisa-dhamani-santhata see the latter.

Sk. kṛśa, perhaps to Lat. gracilis, slim

Kisaka

= kisa Vin i.36 = Ja i.83; f. kisikā Thig 27.

Kissati

1. to get thin, to become exhausted, to waste, weary, worry Ja vi.495 (pret. mā kisittha C. mā kisā bhava).

2. [Pass. of kassati, kṛṣ ] see pari˚

den. fr. kisa

Kissava

in neg. akissava at SN i.149 is doubtful in origin and meaning. The trsln gives “without wisdom.” Should we read akittima or akiñcana, as we suggested under a˚, although this latter does not quite agree with the sense required?

Kīṭa

(nt.) a general term for insect Dhp-a i.187; usually in combn with paṭanga, beetle (moth? MN iii.168 (with puḷava); Snp 602; Ja vi.208; Mil 272 (˚vaṇṇa); Pv-a 67; Vism 115. kīṭa at Ja v.373 means a kind of shield (= cāṭipāla ? c.), the reading should prob. be kheṭa.

cp. Sk. kīṭa

Kīṭaka

(nt.) one or all kinds of insects Vin i.188.

Kīta

bought Ja i.224 (˚dāsa a bought slave) ii.185.

pp. of kiṇāti

Kīdisa

(interr. adj.) what like? of what kind? which? (cp. tādisa) Snp 836, Snp 1089 (= kiṃ saṇṭhita Nd2; Pv ii.63; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 51; Vv-a 76) ■ As Np. SN iv.193 ■ See also Kīrisa.

cp. Sk. kīdṛś = kiṃ dṛśa

Kīra

a parrot Abhp 640 (cp. cirīṭi).

cp. Sk. kīra

Kīrisa

= kīdisa Thig 385 (cp. Thag-a 256).

Kīla

= a pin, a stake, see Khīla.

Kīḷati

to play, sport, enjoy or amuse oneself Vin iv.112 (udake k. sport in the water); Pv ii.121 (= indriyāni paricarāmi Pv-a 77) DN ii.196; Ja v.38 Thig 147; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 77, Pv-a 189 ■ c. acc. to celebrate nakkhattaṃ Ja i.50; Vv-a 63; Pv-a 73; Thag-a 137 chaṇaṃ Dhp-a iii.100 ■ pp. kīḷita. Caus. II. kīḷāpeti to make play, to train Ja ii.267 (sappaṃ to train or tame a snake).

Sk. krīḍati

Kīḷanaka

a plaything, a toy Thig 384 (with ref. to the moon).

fr. kīḷati

Kīḷanā

(f.) [fr. same) playing, sport, amusement Ne 18; Pv-a 67; Dhp-a iii.461 (nakkhatta˚ celebration).

Kīḷā

f. play, sport, enjoyment; udakakīḷaṃ kīḷantī enjoying herself on the water Pv-a 189 ■ uyyāna˚ amusement in the park Dhp-a i.220 iv. 3; nakkhatta-kīḷaṃ kīḷati to celebrate a festival (i.e. the full moon when standing in a certain Nakkhatta) Vv-a 109, Thag-a 137; sāla-kīḷā sport in the sāla woods Ja v.38; kīḷādhippāyena in play, for fun Pv-a 215-Cp. kīḷikā.

-goḷa a ball to play with Vism 254. -goḷaka id Vism 256 (cp. Kp-a 53); Thag-a 255; -pasuta bent on play Ja i.58; -bhaṇḍaka (nt.) toy Mil 229 (= kīḷāpanaka MN i.266); -maṇḍala play-circle, children’s games, playground Ja vi.332; Dhp-a iii.146; -sālā playhouse Ja vi.332.

fr. krīḍ, cp. Sk. krīḍā

Kīḷāpanaka

1. (nt.) a plaything, toy MN i.266, MN i.384; a list given at AN v.203.

2. (adj.) one who makes play Ja iv.308 (sappa˚ a snake-trainer, cp. sappaṃ kīḷāpeti Ja ii.267).

Kīḷikā

(f.) play, sport, amusement; always-˚, like kumāra˚ DN ii.196; uyyāna˚ (sport in the garden Ja iii.275; Ja iv.23, Ja iv.390; udaka˚ Thag-a 186.

Kīḷita

played or having played, playing, sporting; celebrated (of a festival) AN iv.55 (hasitalapita˚); Pv-a 76 (sādhu˚) ■ (nt.) amusement, sport celebration MN i.229 (kīḷita-jātaṃ kīḷati). Cp. sahapaṃsu˚˚; see also keḷi & khiḍḍā.; Kivant & Kiva;

pp. of kīḷati

Kīvant & Kīva

(interr. adj. and adv.) how great? how much? how many? and in later language how? (cp rel. yāva). As indef.: Kīvanto tattha bheravā “however great the terrors” Snp 959 ■ Kīva kaṭuka how painful? Pv-a 226; k˚-ciraṃ how long? Pj and Snp 1004 k˚-dīghaṃ same Snp p.126; k˚ dūre how far? Mil 16; Dhp-a i.386; k˚-mahantaṃ how big? Dhp-a i.29; Vv-a 325 k˚ bahuṃ how much? Dhp-a iv.193.

Sk. kiyant and kīvant; formed fr. interr. stem ki

Kīvatika

(interr. adj.) of number: how much? how many? Kīvatikā bhikkhū how many Bhikkhus Vin i.117.

fr. last

Ku

(kud-and kum-) 3rd stem of interrog. pron. ka (on form and meaning cp. kad; = Lat.* qṷu in (qṷ)ubi, like katara 1. Kuto where from? whence? Dhp 62; k˚bhayaṃ whence i.e. why fear? Dhp 212 sq.; Snp 270, Snp 862; Pv ii.69; how? Ja vi.330; with nu whence or why then Snp 1049 (= kacci ssu Nd ii.s. v.). kut-ettha = kuto ettha Ja i.53 ■ na kuto from nowhere Snp 35, Snp 919; a-kuto id in akutobhaya “with nothing to fear from anywhere i.e. with no reason for fear SN i.192; Thag 510; Th 11 333; Snp 561 (modāmi akutobhayo); Pv ii.121 (id.) kuto-ja arisen from where? Snp 270 ■ ˚nidāna having its foundation or origin in what? Snp 270, Snp 864 sq.

2. Kudā at what time, when? (cp. kadā) Pp 27 indef. kudācanaṃ: at any time, na k˚ never Snp 221 (expl. by soḷasim pi kalaṃ Snp-a 277); Dhp 5, Dhp 210; Bdhd 125; gamanena na pattabbo lokass’ anto k˚ “by walking, the end of the world can never be reached” SN i.62.

3. Kuva, kva, where? Snp 970 (kuvaṃ & kuva) indef kvaci anywhere; with na: nowhere; yassa n’atthi upamā kvaci “of whom (i.e. of Gotama) there is no likeness anywhere” Snp 1137; cp. 218, 395; expld by Nd ii.like kuhiñci. kuvaṃ at DN iii.183.

4. Kutha (kudha) where? Ja v.485 (= kuhiṃ).

5. Kuhiṃ (= kuhaṃ, cp. Sk. kuha) where? whither Often with fut.: k˚ bhikkhu gamissati Snp 411; ko gacchasi where are you going? Pv ii.81; tvaṃ ettakaṃ divasaṃ k˚ gatā where have you been all these days Pv-a 6; Pv-a 13; Pv-a 42; indef. kuhiñci, anywhere, with na k˚ nowhere, or: not in anything, in: n’atthi taṇhā k˚ loke “he has no desire for anything in this world” Snp 496 Snp 783, Snp 1048 see Nd on 783 & 1048 = kimhici; Dhp 180.

Kukutthaka

(v.l. BB. kukkuṭhaka) a kind of bird Ja vi.539. Kern (Toev. s. v.) takes it to be Sk. kukkuṭaka, phasianus gallus.

Kukku

a measure of length SN v.445 = AN iv.404, and in kukkukata Vin i.255 = Vin v.172 (cp however Vin. Texts i.154, on Bdhgh’s note = temporary).

cp. Sk. kiṣku?

Kukkuka

“of the kukku-measure,” to be measured by a kukku. Of a stone-pillar, 16 k’s high SN v.445; AN iv.404akukkuka-jāta of enormous height (of a tree) MN i.233 = SN iii.141 (text: akukkajāta = iv.167; AN ii.200 (text: akukkuccakajāta ). Kern (Toev. s. v. kukka) takes it to mean “grown crooked, a˚ the opposite.

fr. kukku

Kukkucca

1. bad doing, misconduct, bad character. Def. kucchitaṃ kataṃ kukataṃ tassa bhāvo kukkuccaṃ Vism 470 & Bdhd 24 ■ Various explanations in Nd ii.on Snp 1106 = Dhs 1160, in its literal sense it is bad behaviour with hands and feet (hattha-pada˚ Ja i.119 = DN-a i.42 (in combn with ukkāsita & khipitasadda); hattha˚ alone Ja ii.142.

2. remorse, scruple worry. In this sense often with vippaṭissāra; and in conn. w. uddhacca it is the fourth of the five nīvaraṇas (q.v.) Vin i.49; Vin iv.70; DN i.246; SN i.99; MN i.437; AN i.134 = Snp 1106; AN i.282; Snp 925; Nd ii.379; Dhp-a iii.483; Dhp-a iv.88; Sdhp 459; Bdhd 96 ■ na kiñci k˚ṃ na koci vippaṭissāreti “has nobody any remorse?” SN iii.120 = SN iv.46. The dispelling of scrupulousness is one of the duties and virtues of a muni: k˚ṃ vinodetuṃ AN v.72; k. pahāya DN i.71 = AN ii.210 = Pp 59; chinnakukkucca (adj.) free from remorse MN i.108; khīṇāsava k˚-vūpasanta SN i.167 = Snp 82akukkucca (adj.) free from worry, having no remorse Snp 850. Kukkuccaṃ kurute (c. gen.) to be scrupulous about Ja i.377; kariṃsu Dhp-a iv.88; cp. kukkuccaṃ āpajjati (expl. by sankati Ja iii.66.

kud-kicca

Kukkuccaka

(adj.) conscientious (too) scrupulous, “faithful in little” Ja i.376; Vv-a 319.

Kukkuccāyati

to feel remorse, to worry AN i.85; Pp 26. Der. are kukkuccāyanā and ˚āyitatta = kukkucca in def. at Dhs 1160 = Nd ii.s. v.

denom. fr. kukkucca

Kukkucciya

= kukkucca Snp 972.

Kukkuṭa

(Sk. kurkuṭa & kukkuṭa; onomatopoetic = Lat. cucurio, Ger. kikeriki) a cock Mil 363; Ja iv.58; Vv-a 163; f. kukkuṭī a hen Dhp-a i.48; Thag-a 255; in simile MN i.104 = MN i.357 = AN iv.125 sq., 176 sq. (cp. ˚potako).

-aṇḍa (kukkuṭ˚) a hen’s egg Vism 261. -patta the wing of a cock AN iv.47. -potaka a chicken, in simile MN i.104 = MN i.357 = AN iv.126 = AN iv.176. -yuddha a cock fight DN i.6; -lakkhaṇa divining by means of a cock DN i.9 -sampātika a shower of hot ashes (cock as symbol of fire) AN i.159 = DN iii.75, cp. Divy 316 and see Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 38; -sūkarā (pl.) cocks and pigs DN i.5; AN ii.209 = Pp 58; DN i.141; AN ii.42 sq.; Iti 36.

Kukkura

a dog. usually of a fierce character, a hound AN iii.389 AN v.271; Ja i.175 sq.; 189; Pv iii.79; Sdhp 90. In similes SN iv.198; MN i.364; AN iv.377 ■ f. kukkurinī Mil 67.

-vatika (adj.) imitating a dog, cynic MN i.387 (+ dukkara kāraka; also as k˚-vata, ˚sīla, ˚citta, ˚ākappa) DN iii.6, DN iii.7; Ne 99 (+ govatika; -saṅgha a pack of hounds AN iii.75.

Sk. kurkura, or is it ku-krura? Cp. kurūra

Kukkuḷa

hot ashes, embers SN iii.177; Ja ii.134; Kv 208 cf. trans. 127; with ref. to Purgatory SN i.209; Ja v.143 (˚nāma Niraya); Sdhp 194; Pgdp 24.

-vassa a shower of hot ashes Ja i.73; Ja iv.389 (v.l.).

taken as variant of kukkuṭa by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 39; occurs also in BSk. as Name of a Purgatory e.g. Mvu i.6; Mvu iii.369, Mvu iii.455. The classical Sk. form is kukūla

Kukkusa

1. the red powder of rice husks Vin ii.280 (see Bdgh ii.328: kukkusaṃ mattikaṃ = kuṇḍakañ c’eva mattikañ ca).

2. (adj.) variegated, spotted Ja vi.539 (= kaḷakabara 540; v.l. B. ukkusa).

Kuṅkuma

(nt.) saffron Mil 382; Vism 241.

cp. Sk. kunkuma

Kuṅkumin

(adj.) fidgety Ja v.435.

Kuṅkumiya

(nt.) noise, tumult Ja v.437 (= kolāhala).

Kucchi

(f.) a cavity, esp. the belly (Vism 101) or the womb; aṇṇava˚ the interior of the ocean i.119, 227; Ja v.416; jāla˚ the hollow of the net Ja i.210. As womb frequent, e.g. mātu˚ Ja i.149; DN-a i.224; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 111, Pv-a 195; as pregnant womb containing gabbha Ja i.50; Ja ii.2; Ja vi.482; Dhp-a ii.261.

-ḍāha enteric fever Dhp-a i.182; -parihārika sustaining, feeding the belly DN i.71 = Pp 58; -roga abdominal trouble Ja i.243; -vikāra disturbance of the bowels Vin i.301; -vitthambhana steadying the action of the bowels (digestion) Dhs 646 = Dhs 740 = Dhs 875.

Sk. kukṣiḥ, cp. kośa

Kucchita

contemptible, vile, bad, only in Coms Vv-a 215; in def. of kāya Kp-a 38 in def. of kusala Dhs-a 39; Vv-a 169; in def. of kukkucca Vism 470; in def. of paṃsu-kūla Vism 60.

Sk. kutsita, pp. of kutsāy

Kucchimant

(adj.) pregnant Ja v.181.

fr. kucchi

Kujati

in kujantā dīnalocanā Sdhp 166: to be bent, crooked, humpbacked?

or kujjati? see kujja

Kujana

(adj.) only neg. ; not going crooked, in ratho akujano nāma SN i.33.

fr. kujati

Kujja

(adj.) lit. “bent,” as nt kujjaṃ in ajjhena-kujjaṃ Snp 242 crookedness, deceit fraud (cp. Snp-a 286 kūṭa?). Cp. kujati & khujja, see also ava˚, uk˚, nik˚, paṭi˚, pali˚.;

Sk. kubja, humpbacked; √qub, Lat. cubare, Gr. κυφός, Mhg. hogger, humpback

Kujjhati

to be angry with (dat.) AN i.283 = Pp 32, Pp 48; Vism 306; mā kujjhittha kujjhataṃ, “don’t be angry” SN i.240; mā kujjhi Ja iii.22; na kujjheyya Dh. 224; ger. kujjhitvā Pv-a 117, grd. kujjhitabba Pv iv.1.11

cp. Vedic krunhyate, fr. krudh

Kujjhana

(adj.) angry = kodhana Vv-a 71; Pp A 215 (˚bhāva). Kujjhanā (f.) anger, irritation together with kujjhitattaṃ in defn of kodha Dhs 1060 Pp 18, Pp 22.

fr. kujjhati

Kujjhāpana

(nt.) being angry at Dhp-a iv.182.

Caus. formation fr. kujjhati

Kuñca

(nt.) a crowing or trumpeting noise (in compounds only)- kāra cackling (of a hen) Thag-a 255; -nāda trumpeting (of an elephant) Ja iii.114.

kruñc, cp. Sk. krośati, Pali koñca, Lat. crocio, cornix, corvus; Gr. κρώςω, κραυγή; all of crowing noise; from sound-root k̥r, see note on gala

Kuñcikā

(f.) a key, Bdhgh on C. V. v.29, 2 (Vin ii.319) cp. tāla Vin ii.148; Vism 251 (˚kosaka a case for a key) DN-a i.200, DN-a i.207, DN-a i.252; Dhp-a ii.143.

Kuñcita

(adj.) bent, crooked Ja i.89 (˚kesa with wavy hair) v.202 (˚agga: kaṇṇesu lambanti ca kuñcitaggā: expld on p. 204 by sīhakuṇḍale sandhāya vadati, evidently taking kuñcita as a sort of earring); of Petas, Sdhp 102.

pp. of kuñc or kruñc; cp. Sk. kruñcati, to be crooked, Lat. crux, Ohg. hrukki, also Sk. kuñcita bent

Kuñja

(m.) a hollow, a glen, dell, used by Dhpāla in expln of kuñjara at Vv-a 35 (kuñjaro ti kuñje giritale ramati and Pv-a 57 (kuṃ pathaviṃ jīrayati kuñjo suvāraṃ aticarati kuñjaro ti). -nadī˚; a river glen DN-a i.209.

Kuñjara

(m.) an elephant Vin ii.195; MN i.229, MN i.375; SN i.157; Dhp 322, Dhp 324, Dhp 327; Ja v.336; Vv 51; Pv i.113; Dhp-a iv.4; Thag-a 252; Mil 245 ■ deva˚ chief of the gods Ep. of Sakka Vv 477; Ja v.158.

-vara a state elephant Vv-a 181. -sālā an elephant’s stable Dhp-a iv.203.

Deriv. unknown. The sound is not unlike an elephant’s trumpeting & need not be Aryan, which has hasti. The Sk. of the epics & fables uses both h˚ and k˚

Kuṭa

a pitcher Vv 509; Ja i.120; Dhp-a ii.19, Dhp-a ii.261; Dhp-a iii.18. Kuṭa is to be read at Ja i.145 for kūṭa (antokuṭe padīpo viya; cp. ghaṭa). Note. Kuṭa at Dhs-a 263 stands for kūṭa3 sledge-hammer.

Kuṭaka

a cheat Pgdp 12; read kūtaka. So also in gāma kuṭaka SN ii.258.

Kuṭaja

a kind of root (Wrightia antidysenterica or Nericum antidysentericum), used as a medicine Vin i.201 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.45).

Kuṭati

see paṭi˚ and cp. kūṭa1, koṭṭeti & in diff. sense kuṭṭa;1.

Kuṭava

(v.l. S. kū˚; B. kulāvaka) a nest Ja iii.74; v.l. at Dhp-a ii.23 (for kuṭikā).

Kuṭikā

(f.) from kuṭī a little hut, usually made of sticks, grass and clay, poetical of an abode of a bhikkhu Vin iii.35, Vin iii.41, Vin iii.42 = Vv-a 10; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 81; Dhp-a ii.23. Cp. also tiṇa˚, dāru˚; arañña a hut in the woods SN i.61; SN iii.116; SN iv.380. Often fig. for body (see kāya). Thag 1 ■ As adj ■ ˚, e.g. aṭṭhakuṭiko gāmo a village of 8 huts Dhp i.313.

B. Sk. kuṭikā Av.Ś. ii.156

Kuṭimbika

(also kuṭumbika) a man of property, a landlord, the head of a family, Ja i.68, Ja i.126, Ja i.169, Ja i.225; Ja ii.423; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 82. Kutumbiya-putta Np. Vism 48.

Kuṭila

(adj.) bent, crooked (cp. kuj and kuc, Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15) Ja iii.112 (= jimha); Mil 297 (˚sankuṭila), 418 (of an arrow); nt. a bend, a crook Mil 351. -a˚; straight Vv 167 (-magga).

-bhāva crookedness of character Vism 466; Pv-a 51; Vv-a 84. -a˚; uprightness Bdhd 20.

Kuṭilatā

(f.) crookedness, falseness, in a˚, uprightness of character Dhs 50, Dhs 51; Dhp-a i.173.

fr. kuṭila

Kuṭī

(kuṭi˚) (f.) any single-roomed abode, a hut, cabin, cot, shed Vin iii.144 (on vehāsa-kuṭī see vehāsa Vin iv.46); Snp 18, Snp 19; Pv ii.28; Vv-a 188, Vv-a 256 (cīvara˚ a cloak as tent). See also kappiya˚, gandha˚, paṇṇa˚ vacca˚.

-kāra the making of a hut, in ˚sikkhāpada, a rule regarding the method of building a hut Ja ii.282; Ja iii.78 Ja iii.351; -dūsaka (a) destroying a hut or nest Dhp-a ii.23-purisa a “hut man,” a peasant Mil 147.

Kuṭukuñcaka

see kaṭukañcuka.

Kuṭumba

(nt.) family property & estates Ja i.122, Ja i.225; rāja˚ (and ˚kuṭumbaka) the king’s property Ja i.369 Ja i.439 ■ kuṭumbaṃ saṇṭhapeti to set up an establishment Ja i.225; Ja ii.423; Ja iii.376.

Kuṭumbika

see kuṭimbika.

Kuṭṭa1

powder. Sāsapa˚ mustard powder Vin i.205; Vin ii.151 (at the latter passage to be read for ˚kuḍḍa, cp. Vin Texts iii.171), 205.

cp. koṭṭeti, kuṭ; to crush, which is expld by Dhtp (90, 555) & Dhtm (115, 781) together with; koṭṭ; by chedana; it is there taken together with kuṭ; of kūṭa1 which is expld as koṭilla

Kuṭṭa2

only found in cpds. ˚dārūni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism 354, and in kuṭṭa-rājā subordinate prince, possibly kuḍḍa˚ a wattle and daub prince SN iii.156 (v.l. kuḍḍa˚) = v.44 (v.l. kujja˚); cp. kuḍḍa˚ Ja v.102 sq., where expl. pāpa-rājā, with vv.ll. kuṭa and kūṭa. See also khujja and khuddaka-rājā.

of doubtful origin & form, cp. var. BSk. forms koṭṭa-rājā, koṭa˚ & koḍḍa˚, e.g. Mvu i.231

Kuṭṭha1

(nt.) (cp. kus; Sk. kuṣṭhā f.) leprosy Ja v.69, Ja v.72, Ja v.89; Ja vi.196, Ja vi.383; Vism 35 (+ gaṇḍa); DN-a i.260, DN-a i.261 DN-a i.272. The disease described at Dhp-a 161 sq. is probably leprosy. Cp. kilāsa. On var. kinds of leprosy see Ja v.69, Ja iv.196.

Kuṭṭha2

a kind of fragrant plant (Costus speciosus) or spice Ja vi.537.

Kuṭṭhita

hot, sweltering (of uṇha) SN iv.289 (v.l. kikita ); molten (of tamba, cp. uttatta) Pgdp 33. See also kathati kuthati, ukkaṭṭhita & pakkuṭṭhita.;

Kuṭṭhin

a leper MN i.506 (in simile); Thag 1054; Ja v.413; Ja vi.196; Ud 49; Dhp-a iii.255.

Kuṭṭhilikā

the pericarp or envelope of a seed (phala˚) Vv-a 344 (= sipāṭikā).

Kuṭhārī

(f.). An axe, a hatchet Vin iii.144; SN iv.160, SN iv.167; MN i.233 = SN iii.141 AN i.141; AN ii.201; AN iv.171; Ja i.431; Dhp-a iii.59; Pv-a 277 Purisassa hi jātassa kuthārī jāyate mukhe “when man is born, together with him is born an axe in his mouth (to cut evil speech)” SN i.149 = Snp 657 = AN v.174.

cp. Sk. kuṭhāra, axe = Lat. culter, knife from *(s)qer, to cut, in Lat. caro, etc

Kuḍumalaka

an opening bud AN iv.117, AN iv.119.

for kusuma˚

Kuḍḍa

a wall built of wattle and daub, in ˚nagaraka “a little wattle and daub town” DN ii.146, DN ii.169 (cp. Rh.D. on this in Buddh Suttas p. 99). Three such kinds of simply-built walls are mentioned at Vin iv.266, viz. iṭṭhakā˚ of tiles, silā of stone, dāru˚ of wood. The expln of kuḍḍa at Vism 394 is “geha-bhittiyā etam adhivacanaṃ. Kuḍḍa-rājā see under kuṭṭa). Also in tirokuḍḍaṃ outside the wall MN i.34 = MN ii.18; AN iv.55; Vism 394, and tirokuḍḍesu Kp viii1 = Pv i.51 ■ parakuḍḍaṃ nissāya Ja ii.431 (near another man’s wall) is doubtful; vv. ll S. kuḍḍhaṃ. B. kuṭaṃ and kuṭṭaṃ. (kuḍḍa-) pāda the lower part of a lath and plaster wall Vin ii.152 Note. Kuḍḍa at Vin ii.151 is to be read kuṭṭa. Kudda-mula

to kṣud to grind, cp. cuṇṇa

Kuḍḍa-mūla

a sort of root Vin iii.15.

Kuḍḍaka

in eka˚ and dvi˚ having single or double walls Ja i.92.

Kuṇa

(adj.) distorted bent, crooked, lame Pv ii.926 (v.l. kuṇḍa; cp Pv-a 123. kuṇita paṭikuṇita an-ujubhūta); Dhp-a iii.71 (kāṇa˚ blind and lame).

cp. kuṇi lame from *qer, to bend = Gr. κυλλός crooked and lame, Lat. curvus & coluber snake

Kuṇapa

a corpse, carcase, Vin iii.68 = MN i.73 = AN iv.377 (ahi˚, kukkura˚, manussa pūti˚); AN iv.198 sq.; Snp 205; Ja i.61, Ja i.146; Pv-a 15 Kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one’s neck MN i.120; Ja i.5; also Vin iii.68≈ ■ The abovementioned list of corpses (ahi˚, etc.) is amplified at Vism 343 as follows: hatthi˚, assa˚; go˚, mahiṃsa˚ manussa˚, ahi˚, kukkura˚. Cp. kaḷebara.

gandha smell of a rotting corpse Snp-a 286; Pv-a 32.

der. fr. kuṇa? cp. Sk. kuṇapa

Kuṇalin

in kuṇalīkata and kuṇalīmukha contracted, contorted Pv ii.9 26.28. (Hardy, but Minayeff and Hardy’s S.S. Kuṇḍalī˚), expld Pv-a 123 by mukhavikārena vikuṇitaṃ (or vikucitaṃ SS.) sakuṇitaṃ (better: sankucitaṃ) (cp. Sk. kuc or kuñc to shrink).

Kuṇāla

Name of a bird (the Indian cuckoo) Ja v.214 sq. (kuṇāla-jātaka). Kuṇāla-daha “cuckoo-lake,” Name of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant Vism 416.

Kuṇālaka

the cuckoo Ja v.406 (= kokila).

fr. kuṇāla

Kuṇi

(adj.) deformed, paralysed (orig. bent, crooked, cp. kuṇa) only of the arm, acc. to Pp AN iv.19 either of one or both arms (hands) Ja i.353 (expl. kuṇṭhahattha) Dhp-a i.376; Pp 51 (kāṇa, kuṇi, khañja); see khañja.

Kuṇita

(or kuṇika) = kuṇa Pv-a 123, Pv-a 125 (or should it be kucita?). Cp. paṭi˚.

Kuṇṭha

1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword) Dhp-a i.311 (˚kuddāla); Pp AN i.34 (of asi, opp tikkhina); ˚tiṇa a kind of grass Vism 353.

2. a cripple Ja ii.117.

cp. kuṇa and kuṇḍa

Kuṇṭhita

Pv ii.38 and kuṇḍita SN i.197, both in phrase paṃsu˚, according to Hardy, Pv-a p.302 to be corrected to guṇṭhita covered with dust (see guṇṭheti) The v.l. at both places is ˚kuṭṭhita. Also found as paṃsukuṇṭhita at Ja vi.559 (= ˚makkhita C; v.l. B B kuṇḍita).

a variant of guṇṭhita, as also found in cpd. palikuṇṭhita

Kuṇḍa

(a) bent, crooked DN-a i.296 (˚daṇḍaka); Pv-a 181.

Kuṇḍaka

the red powder of rice husks (cp. kukkusa) Vin ii.151; Vin ii.280; Ja ii.289 (text has kuṇḍadaka) = Dhp-a iii.325 (ibid. as ācāma˚). Also used as toilet powder Dhp-a ii.261 (kuṇḍakena sarīraṃ makkhetvā) ■ sakuṇḍaka (-bhatta) (a meal) with husk powder-cake Ja v.383.

-aṅgārapūva pancake of rice powder Dhp-a iii.324 -kucchi in ˚sindhavapotaka “the rice-(cake-) belly colt” Ja ii.288; -khādaka (a) eating rice-powder Ja ii.288 (cp. Dhp-a iii.325); -dhūma, lit. smoke of red rice powder Ep. of the blood Ja iii.542; -pūva cake of husk-powder Ja i.422 sq.; -muṭṭhi a handful of rice-powder Vv-a 5; Dhp-a i.425; -yāgu husk-powder gruel Ja ii.288.

Kuṇḍala

a ring esp. earring AN i.254 = AN iii.16; Ja iv.358 (su˚ with beautiful earrings); Dhp-a i.25. Frequent as maṇi˚, a jewelled earring Vin ii.156; SN i.77; MN i.366; Pv ii.950; sīha˚ or sīhamukha˚ an earring with a jewel called “lion’s mouth” Ja v.205 (= kuñcita), 438. In sāgara˚ it means the ocean belt Mil 220 = Ja iii.32 (where expl. as sāgaramajjhe dīpavasena ṭhitattā tassa kuṇḍalabhūtaṃ) Cp. also rajju˚ a rope as belt Vv-a 212 ■ kuṇḍalavatta turning, twisting round DN ii.18 (of the hair of a Mahāpurisa).

cp. kuṇḍa, orig. bending, i.e. winding

Kuṇḍalin1

(adj.) wearing earrings SN iv.343; Ja v.136; Ja vi.478. su˚; Vv 731. Cp. Maṭṭha˚ Np Dhp-a i.25; Pv ii.5.

fr. kuṇḍala

Kuṇḍalin2

in kuṇḍalī-kata contorted Pv ii.927. See kuṇalin and cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 14.

Kuṇḍi

(f.) a pail or pot, in phrase kuṇḍipaddhana giving a pailful of milk Ja vi.504 (Kern Toev. s. v. compares phrase Sk. kāṃsy’ôpadohana proposes reading; kuṇḍ’ opadohana. See also kaṃsupadhāraṇa).

= kuṇḍikā

Kuṇḍika

bending, in ahi-kuṇḍika (?) a snake charmer (lit. bender) Ja iv.308 (v.l. S. guṇṭhika) see ahi and catu-kuṇḍika bent as regards his four limbs, i.e. walking on all fours MN i.79; Pv iii.24 (expl. at Pv-a 181).

cp. kuṇḍa

Kuṇḍikā

(f.) a water-pot Ja i.8, Ja i.9, Ja ii.73 (= kamaṇḍalu), 317; v.390; Dhp-a i.92 (cp. kuṭa).

Kutuka

(adj.) eager, in sakutuka eagerness Dāvs iv.41.

Kutumbaka

(-puppha) Name of a flower Ja i.60.

Kutūhala

(m. nt.) tumult, excitement; Dāvs v.22; Dhp-a iii.194 (v.l. kot˚). ; (adj.) unperturbed, not shamming Ja i.387 (expl. by avikiṇṇa-vaco of straight speech) See also kotūhala.

-maṅgala a festivity, ceremony, Nd ii.in expl. of anekarūpena Snp 1079, Snp 1082; -sālā a hall for recreation a common room DN i.179 = SN iv.398 = MN ii.2, cp. Divy 143.

Kuto

see under ku˚.

Kutta

(nt.) “being made up.” 1. Work The beginning of things was the work of Brahmā The use of kutta implies that the work was so easy as to be nearer play than work, and to have been carried out in a mood of graceful sport. DN iii.28–⁠2. behaviour, i.e. charming behaviour, coquetry Ja ii.329, combd with līḷā (graceful carriage) Ja i.296 Ja i.433; and with vilāsa (charming behaviour) Ja ii.127 Ja iv.219, Ja iv.472; itthi˚ and purisa˚ AN iv.57 = Dhs 633 (expl. at Dhs-a 321 by kiriyā) ■ As adj. in kuttavāla well arranged, plaited tails DN i.105 (expld at DN-a i.274 as kappita-vāla; cp. kappita).

Der. fr. kattā = Sk. kṛtṛ as kṛttra = P. kutta, cp. Sk. kṛtrima artificial = P. kuttima, in caus ■ pass sense = kappita of kḷp )

Kuttaka

1. nt. a woollen carpet (DN-a i.87 = as used for dancing-women), together with kaṭṭhissa and koseyya in list of forbidden articles of bedding DN i.7 = AN i.181 = Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163.

2. adj “made up,” pretending, in samaṇa-k˚ a sham ascetic Vin iii.68

71.

der. fr. kutta, that which is made up or “woven,” with orig. meaning of karoti to weave?

Kuttama

in kāsi-kuttama Ja vi.49 should be read as kāsik’uttama.

Kutti

(f.) arrangement, fitting, trapping, harnessing Vin ii.108 (sara˚: accuracy in sound, harmony); Ja iii.314 (massu˚ beard-dressing, expld by massu-kiriyā. Here corresponding to Sk *kḷpti!) iv.352 (hattha˚, elephant trappings, cp. kappanā) v.215 (= karaṇa, cp. Sk. kalpa).

cp. kutta

Kutthaka

S i.66 should be replaced by v.l. koṭṭhuka.

Kutha

see under ku˚.

Kuthati

to cook, to boil: kuthanto (ppr) boiling (putrid, foul? So Kern, Toev, s. v. Ja vi.105 (of Vetaraṇī, cp. kuṭṭhita) ■ pp. kuthita.

Sk. kvathati cp. kaṭhati, kaṭhita, kuṭṭhita, ukkaṭṭhita & upakūḷita;2

Kuthana

(nt.) digestion Vism 345.

fr. kvath = kuth

Kuthita

1. boiled, cooked Thig 504; Kp-a 62; Vism 259 = Kp-a 58. Cp. vikkuthita. 2. digested Vism 345.

3. fig. tormented, distressed (perhaps: rotten, foul, cp. kilijjati = pūti hoti) Mil 250 (+ kiliṭṭha) ■ Cp. Vin. Texts ii.57 on Bdhgh’s note to MV vi.14, 5.

pp. of kuthati

Kudaṇḍaka

a throng Ja iii.204.

Kudassu

(kud-assu) interj. to be sure, surely (c. fut.) AN i.107; Ne 87; Snp-a 103.

Kudā

see under ku˚.

Kudāra

(ku-dāra) a bad wife Pv iv.147.

Kudārikā

at Pv iv.147 & Pv-a 240 is spelling for kuṭhārikā.;

Kudiṭṭhi

(f.) wrong belief Sdhp 86.

ku + diṭṭhi

Kuddāla

a spade or a hoe (kanda-mūla-phalagahaṇ’atthaṃ DN-a i.269) Vin iii.144; Ja v.45; Dhp-a iv.218 Often in combn kuddāla-piṭaka “hoe and basket DN i.101; SN ii.88; SN v.53; AN i.204; AN ii.199; Ja i.225, Ja i.336.

Kuddālaka

= prec. Dhp-a i.266.

Kuddha

(adj.) angry AN iv.96 (and akkuddha iv.93); Pv i.77; Ja ii.352, Ja ii.353; Ja vi.517; Dhp-a ii.44. Nom. pl. kuddhāse Iti 2 = Iti 7.

pp. of kujjhati

Kudrūsa

a kind of grain Mil 267; also as kudrūsaka Vin iv.264; DN iii.71; Nd ii.314; DN-a i.78; Dhs-a 331.

Kunta

a kind of bird, otherwise called adāsa Ja iv.466.

cp. Sk. kunta lance?

Kuntanī

(f.) a curlew (koñca), used as homing bird Ja iii.134.

Kuntha

, only in combn kuntha-kipillaka (or ˚ikā) a sort of ant Ja i.439; Ja iv.142; Snp 602 (˚ika); Vism 408; Kp-a 189. Cp. kimi.

Kunda

(nt.) the jasmine Dāvs v.28.

Kunnadī

(f.) (kuṃ-nadī) a small river, a rivulet SN i.109; SN ii.32, SN ii.118; AN iv.100; Ja iii.221; Vism 231, Vism 416; DN-a i.58.

Kupatha

(kuṃ + patha) wrong path (cp. kummagga) Mil 390.

Kupita

(adj.)

1. shaken, disturbed Thig 504 (by fire = Thag-a 292); Ja iii.344 (˚indriya). 2. offended, angry DN iii.238 = MN i.101 = AN iv.460 AN v.18; MN i.27; AN iii.196 sq.; Pv i.67. Often combd with anattamana “angry and displeased” Vin ii.189; DN i.3, DN i.90 (= DN-a i.255 kuddha) ■ As nt. kupitaṃ disturbance in paccanta˚; a disturbance on the borderland Ja iii.497; Mil 314; Pv-a 20.

pp. of kuppati

Kuppa

(adj.) shaking, unsteady, movable; AN iii.128 (˚dhammo, unsteady, of a pāpabhikkhu) Snp 784; of a kamma: a proceeding that can be quashed Vin ii.71 (also a˚). nt. kuppaṃ anger Vin ii.133 (karis sāmi I shall pretend to be angry) ■ akuppa (adj.) and akuppaṃ (nt.) steadfast, not to be shaken, an Ep. of arahant and nibbāna (cp. asankuppa); akuppa-dhammo Pp 11 (see akuppa). Akuppaṃ as freedom from anger at Vin ii.251.

ger. of kuppati

Kuppati

to shake, to quiver, to be agitated, to be disturbed, to be angry. aor. kuppi, pp. kupita, ger. kuppa, caus. kopeti AN iii.101 Sn. 826, 854; Pp 11, Pp 12, Pp 30. Of the wind Mil 135 of childbirth udaravāto kuppi (or kupita) Ja ii.393, Ja ii.433 paccanto kuppi the border land was disturbed Ja iv.446 (cp. kupita).

Sk. kupyate, *qup to be agitated, to shake = Lat. cupio, cupidus, “to crave with agitation,” cp semantically Lat. tremere → Fr. craindre

Kuppila

a kind of flower Ja vi.218 (C: mantālakamakula).

?

Kubbati2

etc. see karoti ii.

Kubbanaka

brushwood or a small, and therefore unproductive, wood Snp 1134 (expl. Nd ii.by rittavanaka appabhakkha appodaka).

fr. kuṃ-vana

Kubbara

the pole of a carriage AN iv.191, AN iv.193; Vv-a 269, Vv-a 271, Vv-a 275. ratha˚ SN i.109, Vv 642 (= vedikā Vv-a) Der. (vividha-) kubbaratā Vv-a 276.

Kumati

wrong thought, wrong view (cp. kudiṭṭhi) Bdhd 137.

Kumāra

a young boy, son Snp 685 sq. (kuhiṃ kumāro aham api daṭthukāmo: w. ref. to the child Gotama); Pv iii.52; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 41 (= māṇava) daharo kumāro MN ii.24, MN ii.44 ■ a son of (-˚) rāja˚ Pv-a 163; khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚ Bdhd 84; deva˚ Ja iii.392 yakkha˚ Bdhd 84.

-kīḷā the amusement of a boy Ja i.137; -pañhā questions suitable for a boy Kp iii.; -lakkhaṇa divination by means of a young male child (+ kumāri˚) DN i.9.

Vedic kumāra

Kumāraka

1. m. a young boy, a youngster, kumārakā vā kumāriyo boys and girls SN iii.190. 2. nt. ˚ṃ a childish thing AN iii.114 ■ f. ˚ikā a young girl, a virgin Ja i.290 Ja i.411; Ja ii.180; Ja iv.219 (thulla˚); vi.64; Dhp-a iii.171.

-vāda speech like a young boy’s; SN ii.219.

Kumārī

(f.) a young girl Vin ii.10; Vin v.129 (thulla˚); AN iii.76; Ja iii.395 (daharī k˚); Pp 66 (itthī vā k˚ vā).

-pañha obtaining oracular answers from a girl supposed to be possessed by a spirit DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.97).

Kumina

(nt.) a fish net Vin iii.63; Thag 297; Ja ii.238; Thag-a 243.

Kumuda

(nt.) 1. the white lotus Dhp 285; Vv 354 (= Vv-a 161); Ja v.37 (seta˚); Vism 174; DN-a i.139.

2. a high numeral, in vīsati kumudā nirayā AN v.173 = Snp p.126.

-naḷa a lotus-stalk Ja i.223; -patta (-vaṇṇa) (having the colour of) white lotus petals Ja i.58 (Ep. of sindhavā steeds); -bhaṇḍikā a kind of corn Mil 292; -vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of white lotus (sindhavā) Pv-a 74 -vana a mass of white lotuses Ja v.37.

Kumbha

1. a round jar, waterpot (= kulālabhājana earthenware Dhp-a i.317), frequent in similes, either as illustrating fragility or emptiness and fullness: AN i.130, AN i.131 = Pp 32; AN v.337; SN ii.83; Mil 414. As uda˚ waterpot Dhp 121; Ja i.20; Pv i.129

2. one of the frontal globes of an elephant Vin ii.195 (hatthissa); Vv-a 182 (˚ālankārā ornaments for these).

-ūpama resembling a jar, of kāya Dhp 40 (= Dhp-a i.317); of var. kinds of puggalā AN ii.104 = Pp 45 -kāra 1. a potter; enumerated with other occupations and trades at DN i.51 = Mil 331. Vin iv.7. In similes, generally referring to his skill DN i.78 = MN ii.18 Vism 142, Vism 376; Snp 577; Dhp-a i.39 (˚sālā). rāja˚ the king’s potter Ja i.121.

2. a bird (Phasianus gallus Hardy) Vv-a 163 ■ Cpds.: ˚antevāsin the potter’s apprentice DN i.78 = MN ii.18; -˚nivesana the dwelling of a potter Vin i.342, Vin i.344; SN iii.119; ˚pāka the potter’s oven SN ii.83; AN iv.102; ˚-putta son of a potter (cp. Dial. i.100), a potter Vin iii.41 sq. -kārikā a large earthen vessel (used as a hut to live in Bdhgh) Vin ii.143, cp. Vin. Texts iii.156; -ṭṭhānakathā gossip at the well DN i.8 = DN iii.36 = AN v.128; SN v.419, expld. at DN-a i.90 by udaka-ṭṭhānakathā, with variant udakatittha-kathā ti pi vuccati kumbha-dāsikathā vā; -thūṇa a sort of drum DN i.6 (expl. at DN-a i.84 caturassara-ammaṇakatāḷaṃ kumbhasaddan ti pi eke) DN iii.183; Ja v.506 (pāṇissaraṃ + ). -˚ika one who plays that kind of drum Vin iv.285 = Vin iv.302; -tthenaka of cora a thief, “who steals by means of a pot” (i.e. lights his candle under a pot (?) Bdhgh on Vin ii.256, cp. Vin Texts iii.325 “robber burglars”) only in simile Vin ii.256 = SN ii.264 = AN iv.278; -dāsī a slave girl who brings the water from the well DN i.168; Mil 331; Dhp-a i.401 (udakatitthato k˚ viya ānītā). -dūhana milking into the pitchers, giving a pail of milk (of gāvo, cows) Snp 309. Cp. kuṇḍi. -bhāramatta as much as a pot can hold Ja v.46; -matta of the size of a pot, in kumbhamattarahassangā mahodarā yakkhā, expln. of kumbhaṇḍā Ja iii.147.

for etym. s. kūpa and cp. Low Ger. kump or kumme, a round pot

Kumbhaṇḍa

1. m. a class of fairies or genii grouped with Yakkhas, Rakkhasas and Asuras SN ii.258 (k˚ puriso vehāsaṃ gacchanto); Ja i.204; Ja iii.147 (with def.); Mil 267; Dhp-a i.280; Pgdp 60.

2. nt. a kind of gourd Ja i.411 (lābu˚); v.37; (elāḷuka-lābuka˚); DN-a i.73; Dhp-a i.309 (placed on the back of a horse, as symbol of instability); the same as f. kumbhaṇḍī Vism 183 (lābu + ).

Kumbhī

(f.) a large round pot (often combd with kaḷopī,) Vin i.49, Vin i.52, Vin i.286; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.210; Thig 283. loha˚ a copper (also as lohamaya k˚ Snp 670), in ˚pakkhepana, one of the ordeals in Niraya Pv-a 221. Also a name for one of the Nirayas (see lohakumbhī). Cp. nidhi˚.

-mukha the rim of a pot (always with kaḷopi-mukha DN i.166 and≈(see kaḷopī); Vism 328.

Kumbhīla

(kuṃ + bhīra?) a crocodile (of the Ganges) Ja i.216, Ja i.278; Dhp-a i.201; Dhp-a iii.362.

-bhaya the fear of the crocodile, in enumeration of several objects causing fear, at MN i.459 sq. = AN ii.123 sq.; Mil 196 = Nd ii.on bhaya ■ Thig 502; -rājā the king of the crocodiles Ja ii.159.

Kumbhīlaka

a kind of bird (“little crocodile”) Ja iv.347.

fr. kumbhīla

Kumma

a tortoise SN iv.177 (+ kacchapa); MN i.143; Ja v.489; Mil 363, Mil 408 (here as land-tortoise cittaka-dhara˚).

Vedic kūrma

Kummagga

(and kumagga ) a wrong path (lit. and fig.) Mil 390 (+ kupatha); fig. (= micchāpatha) Dhs 381, Dhs 1003; Pp 22. Kummaggaṃ paṭipajjati to lose one’s way, to go astray. lit. Pv iv.35 Pv-a 44 (v.l. SS.); fig. Snp 736; Iti 117; Thig 245.

kuṃ + magga

Kummāsa

junket, usually with odana, boiled rice. In formula of kāya (cātummahābhūtika etc., see kāya) DN i.76 = MN ii.17 and ≈; in enum. of material food (kabaḷinkārâhāra) Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875. Vin iii.15; Ja i.228; Vv 146 (= Vv-a 62 yava˚); Vv-a 98 (odana˚). In combn with pūva (cake) Dhp-a i.367; Pv-a 244.

Vedic kulmāṣa

Kummiga

(kuṃ + miga] a small or insignificant animal Mil 346.

Kuyyaka

a kind of flower Ja i.60 (˚puppha).

Kuraṇḍaka

a shrub and its flower Vism 183 (see also kuravaka & koraṇḍaka). ˚leṇa Npl. Vism 38.;

cp. Sk. kuraṇṭaka blossom of a species of Amaranth

Kurara

an osprey Ja iv.295, Ja iv.397 (= ukkusa); v.416; vi.539 (= seta˚).

Kuravaka

Name of a tree, in ratta˚ Ja i.39 (= bimbijāla the red Amaranth tree).

= Sk. kuraṇṭaka Halāyudha, cp. kuraṇḍaka

Kuruṅga

a kind of antelope, in -miga the antelope deer Ja i.173 (k˚-jatāka); ii.153 (do.).

deriv. unknown. The corresponding Sk. forms are kulunga and kulanga

Kuruṭṭharū

(v.l. kururū) a badly festering sore DN ii.242.

Kurundī

Name of one of the lost SS commentaries on the Vinaya, used by Buddhaghosa (cp. Vin. Texts i.258 ii.14).

Kuruvindaka

vermillion in cuṇṇa, a bath-powder made from k. Ja iii.282; and ˚suttī a string of beads covered with this powder Vin ii.106 (cp. Bdhgh Vin ii.315 Vin. Texts iii.67).

Kurūra

(adj.) bloody raw, cruel, in ˚kammanta following a cruel (bloody occupation (as hunting, fishing, bird killing, etc. AN iii.383 = Pp 56 (expld. Pp A 233 by dāruṇa˚, also at Pv-a 181).

Sk. krūra, cp. Lat. cruor thick blood, Gr. κρέας (raw) flesh, Sk. kravih; Ohg. hrō, E. raw

Kurūrin

= kurūra Pv iii.23.

Kula

(nt.; but poetic pl. kulā Pv ii.943 1. clan a high social grade, “good family,” cp. Gr. (doric) φυά, Goth. kuni. A collection of cognates and agnates, in sense of Ohg. sippa, clan; “house” in sense of line or descent (cp. House of Bourbon, Homeric γενέη). Bdhgh at Vism 91 distinguishes 2 kinds of kulāni, viz. ñātikulaṃ & upaṭṭhāka-kulaṃ.

1. AN ii.249 (on welfare and ill-luck of clans); Snp 144; Snp 711; Iti 109 sq. (sabrahmakāni, etc.); Dhp 193 ■ brāhmaṇa˚ a Brahmanic family AN v.249; Ja iv.411, etc.; vāṇija˚ the household of a trader Ja iii.82; kassaka˚ id. of a farmer Ja ii.109 purāṇaseṭṭhi˚ of a banker Ja vi.364; upaṭṭhāka˚ (Sāriputtassa) a family who devoted themselves to the service of S. Vin i.83; sindhava˚ Vv-a 280 ■ uccākula of high descent Pv iii.116, opp. nīca˚ of mean birth Snp 411 (cp. ˚kulīno); viz. caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚ etc. MN ii.152 = AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = AN iii.385 = Pp 51; sadisa a descent of equal standing Pv-a 82; kula-rūpa-sampanna endowed with “race” and beauty Pv-a 3, Pv-a 280

2. household, in the sense of house; kulāni people Dhp-a i.388; parakulesu among other people Dhp 73 parakule do. Vv-a 66; kule kule appaṭibaddhacitto not in love with a particular family Snp 65; cp. kule gaṇe āvāse (asatto or similar terms) Nd ii.on taṇhā iv ■ devakula temple Ja ii.411; rāja˚ the king’s household palace Ja i.290; Ja iii.277; Ja vi.368; kulāni bahutthikāni (= bahuitthikāni, bahukitthī˚ AN iv.278) appapurisāni “communities in which there are many women but few men” Vin ii.256 = SN ii.264 = AN iv.278; ñāti-kula (my) home Vv 3710 (: pitugehaṃ sandhāya Vv-a 171).

-aṅgāra “the charcoal of the family” i.e. one who brings a family to ruin, said of a squanderer SN iv.324 (text kulangāroti: but vv.ll. show ti as superfluous) printed kulanguro (for kul-ankuro? v.l. kulangāro kulapacchimako (should it be kulapacchijjako? cp vv.ll. at Ja iv.69) dhanavināsako Ja vi.380. Also in kulapacchimako kulagaro pāpadhammo Ja iv.69. Both these refer to an avajāta putta. Cp. also kulassa angārabhūta Dhp-a iii.350; Snp-a 192 (of a dujjāto putto) and kulagandhana; -itthi a wife of good descent together with kuladhītā, ˚kumārī, ˚suṇhā, ˚dāsī at Vin ii.10; AN iii.76; Vism 18. -ūpaka (also read as ˚upaka, ˚ûpaga; ˚upaga; for ûpaga, see Trenckner P.M. 62, n. 16; cp. kulopaka Divy 307) frequenting a family, dependent on a (or one & the same) family (for alms, etc.); a friend, an associate. Freq. in formula kulūpako hoti bahukāni kulāni upasankamati, e.g. Vin iii.131, Vin iii.135; Vin iv.20Vin i.192, Vin i.208; Vin iii.84, Vin iii.237 Vin v.132; SN ii.200 sq.; AN iii.136, AN iii.258 sq.; Pv iii.85; Vism 28; DN-a i.142 (rāja˚); Pv-a 266. f. kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; Vin iv.66; -gandhana at Iti 64 and kule gandhina at Ja iv.34 occur in the same sense and context as kulangāra in J ■ passages on avajāta-putta. The It-MSS. either explain k-gandhana by kulacchedaka or have vv.ll. kuladhaṃsana and kusajantuno. Should it be read as kulangāraka? Cp. gandhina; -geha clanhouse i.e. father’s house Dhp-a i.49. -tanti in kulatantikulapaveṇi-rakkhako anujāto putto “one who keeps up the line & tradition of the family” Ja vi.380; -dattika (and ˚dattiya ) given by the family or clan Ja iii.221 (˚sāmika); iv.146 (where Dhp-a i.346 reads ˚santaka) 189 (˚kambala); vi.348 (pati). -dāsī a female slave in a respectable family Vin ii.10; Vv-a 196; -dūsaka one who brings a family into bad repute Snp 89; Dhp-a ii.109 -dvāra the door of a family Snp 288; -dhītā the daughter of a respectable family Vin ii.10; Dhp-a iii.172; Vv-a 6; Pv-a 112; -pasāda the favour received by a family, ˚ka one who enjoys this favour AN i.25, cp. Snp-a 165, opp. of kuladūsaka; -putta a clansman, a (young) man of good family, fils de famille, cp. Low Ger. haussohn; a gentleman, man of good birth. As 2nd characteristic of a Brahmin (with sujāto as 1st) in formula at DN i.93 DN i.94≈; Vin i.15, Vin i.43, Vin i.185, Vin i.288, Vin i.350; MN i.85≈(in kāmānaṃ ādīnavo passage), 192, 210, 463; AN ii.249; Ja i.82 Ja vi.71; Iti 89; Vv-a 128; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 29; -macchariya selfishness concerning one’s family, touchiness about his clan DN iii.234 (in list of 5 kinds of selfishness); also to be read at Dhs 1122 for kusala˚; -vaṃsa lineage, progeny MN ii.181; AN iii.43; AN iv.61; DN-a i.256; expressions for the keeping up of the lineage or its neglect are: ˚ṭhapana DN iii.189; Pv-a 5; nassati or nāseti Ja iv.69; Vv-a 149; upacchindati Pv-a 31, Pv-a 82; -santaka belonging to one’s family, property of the clan Ja i.52; Dhp-a i.346 (where Ja iv.146 reads ˚dattika).

Idg. *qṷel (revolve); see under kaṇṭha, cakka and carati

Kulaṅka

pādaka “buttresses of timber” (Vin. Texts iii.174) Vin ii.152 (cp. Bdhgh. p. 321 and also Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 78).

Kulattha

a kind of vetch MN i.245 (˚yūsa): Mil 267; Vism 256 (˚yūsa).

Kulala

a vulture, hawk, falcon, either in combn with kāka or gijjha, or both. Kāka + k˚ Vin iv.40; Snp 675 (= Snp-a 250); gijjha + k˚ Pv-a 198; gijjhā kākā k Vin iii.106; kākā k˚ gijjhā MN i.58; cp. gijjho kanko kulalo MN i.364, MN i.429.

Kulāla

a potter; only in -cakka a potter’s wheel Ja i.63; -bhājana a potter’s vessel Dhp-a i.316; Pv-a 274.

Kulāva

1. waste (?) Vin ii.292: na kulāvaṃ gamenti “don’t let anything go to waste.” Reading doubtful.

2. a cert. bird Ja vi.538.

Kulāvaka

(nt.) a nest DN i.91 (= DN-a i.257 nivāsaṭṭhanaṃ); SN i.8; SN i.224 = Ja i.203 (a brood of birds = supaṇṇapotakā); Ja iii.74 (v.l. BB), 431; vi.344; Dhp-a ii.22.

Kulika

(adj.) belonging to a family, in agga˚; coming from a very good family Pv-a 199.

fr. kula

Kuḷika

(?) in kata˚-kalāpaka a bundle of beads? Bdhgh Vin ii.315 (C.V. v.1, 3) in expln of kuruvindaka-sutti.

Kuliṅka

a bird Ja iii.541 (= sakuṇika 542). Cp. kulunka.

Kulin

= kulika, in akulino rājāno ignoble kings Anvs. introd. (see J.P.T.S. 1886 p. 355, where akuliro which is conjectured as akulino by Andersen, Pāli Reader p. 1024).

Kulīna

= prec. in abhijāta-kula-kulīna descendant of a recognized clan Mil 359 (of a king); uccā˚ of noble birth, in uccākulīnatā descent from a high family SN i.87; MN iii.37; Vv-a 32; nīca˚ of mean birth Snp 462.

Kulīra

a crab, in kulīra- pādaka “a crab-footer,” i.e. a (sort of) bedstead Vin ii.149; Vin iv.40 (kulira), cp. Bdhgh on latter passage at Vin iv.357 (kuḷira˚ and kuḷiya˚): a bedstead with curved or carved legs; esp. when carved to represent animal’s feet (Vin. Texts iii.164).

Kulīraka

a crab Ja vi.539 (= kakkaṭaka 540).

Kuluṅka

a cert. small bird Ja iii.478. Cp. kulinka.

Kulla1

a raft (of basket-work) (orig. meaning “hollow shaft,” cp. Sk. kulya, bone; Lat. caulis stalk, Gr.καυλός, Ohg. hol, E. hollow) Vin i.230; DN ii.89 (kullaṃ bandhati); MN i.134 (kullūpama dhamma).

Kulla2

(adj.) belonging to the family Ja iv.34 (˚vatta family custom).

fr. kula, Sk. kaula & kaulya, *kulya

Kullaka

crate, basket work, a kind of raft, a little basket Ja vi.64.

-vihāra (adj.) the state of being like one who has found a raft (?) Vin ii.304 (cp. Bdhgh uttānavihāra ibid. p. 330, and Vin. Texts iii.404: an easy life). More correct is Kern’s expln (Toev. s. v.) which puts kullaka in this combn = kulla2 (Sk. kauyla), thus meaning well-bred, of good family, gentlemanly. -saṇṭhāna consisting of stalks bound together, like a raft Ja ii.406–⁠408 (not correct Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78). Cp. Kern Toev. i.154.

Kuva

(ṃ) see ku-.

Kuvalaya

the (blue) water-lily, lotus, usually combd with kamala, q.v. Vv 354; DN-a i.50; Vv-a 161, Vv-a 181; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 77.

Kuvilāra

= koviḷāra Ja v.69 (v.l. B. ko˚).

Kusa

1. the kusa grass (Poa cynosuroides) Dhp-a iii.484: tikhiṇadhāraṃ tiṇaṃ antamaso tālapaṇṇam pi; Dhp 311; Ja i.190 (= tiṇa); iv.140.

2. a blade of grass used as a mark or a lot: pātite kuse “when the lot has been cast” Vin i.299; kusaṃ sankāmetvā “having passed the lot on” Vin iii.58.

-agga the point of a blade of grass Pv-a 254 = DN-a i.164; Sdhp 349; kusaggena bhuñjati or pivati to eat or drink only (as little as) with a blade of grass Dhp 70; Vv-a 73 (cp. Udānavarga p. 105); -kaṇṭhaka = prec Pv iii.228; -cīra a garment of grass Vin i.305 = DN i.167 = AN i.240, AN i.295 = AN ii.206 = Pp 55; -pāta the casting of a kusa lot Vin i.285; -muṭṭhi a handful of grass AN v.234 AN v.249.

Kusaka

= prec. Vv 355 (= Vv-a 162).

Kusala

(adj.) 1. (adj.) clever, skilful, expert; good, right, meritorious MN i.226; Dhp 44; Ja i.222 Esp. appl. in moral sense (= puñña), whereas akusala is practically equivalent to pāpa. ekam pi ce pāṇaṃ aduṭṭhacitto mettāyati kusalo tena hoti Iti 21; sappañño paṇḍito kusalo naro Snp 591, cp. 523; Pv i.33 (= nipuṇa). With kamma = a meritorious action, in kammaṃ katvā kusalaṃ DN iii.157; Vv iii.27; Pv i.1011 see cpds ■ ācāra-k˚ good in conduct Dhp 376; parappavāda˚ skilled in disputation Dpvs iv.19; magga˚ (and opp. amagga˚) one who is an expert as regards the Path (lit. & fig.) SN iii.108; samāpatti˚, etc. AN v.156 sq. sālittaka-payoge k˚ skilled in the art of throwing potsherds Pv-a 282 ■ In derivation k. is expld by Dhpāla & Bdhgh by; kucchita and salana, viz. kucchita-salanādi atthena kusalaṃ Vv-a 169; kucchite pāpadhamme salayanti calayanti kappenti viddhaṃsenti ti kusalā Dhs-a 39; where four alternative derivations are given (cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. lxxxii).

2. (nt.) a good thing, good deeds, virtue, merit, good consciousness (citta omitted; cp. Dhs-a 162, Dhs-a 200, etc.): yassa pāpaṃ kataṃ kammaṃ kusalena pithīyati, so imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti “he makes this world shine, who covers an evil deed with a good one” MN ii.104 = Dhp 173 = Thag 872; sukhañ ca k. pucchi (fitness) Snp 981; Vv 301 (= ārogyaṃ); DN i.24; Ja vi.367; Pv i.13 (= puñña) Pv-a 75; Mil 25 ■ In special sense as ten kusalāni equivalent to the dasasīlaṃ (cp. sīla) MN i.47; AN v.241 AN v.274. All good qualities (dhammā) which constitute right and meritorious conduct are comprised in the phrase-kusala-dhammā Snp 1039, Snp 1078, expld. in extenso Nd ii.s. v. See also cpd. ˚dhamma ■ Kusalaṃ karoti to do what is good and righteous, i.e. kāyena, vācāya manasā Iti 78; cp. Dhp 53; sabba-pāpassa akaraṇaṃ kusalassa upasampadā sacittapariyodapanaṃ etaṃ Buddhānusāsanaṃ DN ii.49 = Dhp 183; cp. Ne 43, Ne 81 Ne 171, Ne 186. Kusalaṃ bhāveti to pursue righteousness (together with akusalaṃ pajahati to give up wrong habits) AN i.58; AN iv.109 sq.; Iti 9akusala adj.: improper wrong, bad; nt.: demerit, evil deed DN i.37, DN i.163 bālo + akusalo Snp 879, Snp 887; = pāpa Pv-a 60, cp. pāpapasuto akatakusalo ib. 6. kusalaṃ & akusalaṃ are discussed in detail (with ref. to rūpâvacara˚ fivefold, to arūpâvacara˚ & lokuttara˚ fourfold, to kāmâvacara eight & twelvefold) at Vism 452

454 ■; kusalākusala good and bad MN i.489; SN v.91; Mil 25; Ne 161, Ne 192; Dhs 1124 sq ■ sukusala (dhammānaṃ) highly skilled DN i.180 (cp. MN ii.31).

-anuesin striving after righteousness Snp 965; cp kinkusalānuesin DN ii.151 and kinkusalagavesin MN i.163 sq.; -abhisanda overflow of merit (+ puñña˚) AN ii.54 sq.; AN iii.51; AN iii.337; -kamma meritorious action, right conduct AN i.104; AN i.292 sq.; Pts i.85; Pts ii.72 sq.; Pv-a 9, Pv-a 26 -cittā (pl.) good thoughts Vb 169

173, 184, 285 sq. 294 sq.; -cetanā right volition Vb 135; -dhammā (pl. (all) points of righteousness, good qualities of character SN ii.206; MN i.98; AN iv.11 sq.; AN v.90 sq.; 123 sq.; Pp 68, Pp 71; Vb 105; Pts i.101, Pts i.132; Pts ii.15, Pts ii.230; Vv-a 74 Vv-a 127; -pakkha “the side of virtue,” all that belongs to good character MN iii.77 (and a˚) with adj. ˚pakkhika SN v.91; -macchariya Dhs 1122 is to be corrected to kula˚ instead of kusala˚ (meanness as regards family cp. Nd ii.on veviccha; -mūla the basis or root of goodness or merit; there are three: alobha, adosa, amoha MN i.47, MN i.489 = AN i.203 = Ne 183; DN iii.214; Dhs 32, Dhs 313 Dhs 981; Vb 169 sq., 210; Ne 126. Cp. ˚paccaya Vb 169; ˚ropanā Ne 50; -vitakka good reasoning, of which there are three: nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiṃsā˚ DN iii.215; Iti 82; Ne 126; -vipāka being a fruit of good kamma Dhs 454; Vism 454 (twofold, viz ahetuka & sahetuka).; -vedanā good, pure feeling Vb 3 sq.; cp. ˚saññā and ˚sankhārā Vb 6 sq.; Ne 126 (three ˚saññā, same as under ˚vitakkā); -sīla good proper conduct of life MN ii.25 sq.; adj. ˚sīlin DN i.115 (= DN-a i.286).

cp. Sk. kuśala

Kusalatā

(only-˚) skill, cleverness, accomplishment; good quality ■ lakkhaṇa˚ skill in interpreting special signs Vv-a 138; aparicita˚ neglect in acquiring good qualities Pv-a 67. For foll. cp Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs. trsl. pp. 345–⁠348; āpatti˚ skill as to what is an offence; samāpatti˚ in the Attainments dhātu˚ in the Elements; manasikāra˚ proficiency in attention; āyatana˚ skill in the spheres; paṭiccasamuppāda˚ skill in conditioned Genesis; ṭhāna˚ and aṭṭhāna˚ skill in affirming (negating) causal conjuncture: all at DN iii.212 and Dhs 1329

1338; cp. AN i.84, AN i.94.

fem. abstr. fr. kusala

Kusi

(nt.) one of the four cross seams of the robe of a bhikkhu Vin i.287; Vin ii.177; and aḍḍha˚ intermediate cross seam ibid. See Bdhgh’s note in Vin. Texts ii.208.

Kusīta

(adj.) indolent, inert, inactive. Expl. by kāma-vitakkādīhi vitakkehi vītināmanakapuggalo Dhp-a ii.260; by nibbiriyo Dhp-a iii.410; by alaso Pv-a 175, Often combd with hīnaviriya, devoid of zeal; Iti 27, Iti 116; Dhp 7, Dhp 112, Dhp 280; Mil 300, Mil 396. Also equivalent to alasa Dhp 112 combd with dussīla Mil 300, Mil 396; with duppañña DN iii.252 = DN iii.282; AN ii.227, AN ii.230; AN iii.7, AN iii.183, AN iii.433 ■ In other connections: MN i.43, MN i.471; AN iii.7 sq., 127; v.95 146, 153, 329 sq.; SN ii.29, SN ii.159, SN ii.206; Iti 71, Iti 102; Ja iv.131 (nibbiriya + ); Vism 132; Dhp-a i.69. The eight kusītavatthūni occasions of indolence, are enumerated at AN iv.332; DN iii.255; Vb 385akusīta alert, mindful careful Snp 68 (+ alīnacitto); Nd ii.s. v.; Sdhp 391.

Sk. kusīda; cp. kosajja

Kusītatā

(f.) in a˚ alertness, brightness, keenness Vv-a 138.

abstr. fr. kusīta

Kusuma

(nt.) any flower Ja iii.394 (˚dāma); v.37; Pv-a 157 (= puppha); Vv-a 42; Dpvs i.4; Sdhp 246, Sdhp 595 Dāvs v.51 (˚agghika), fig. vimutti˚ the flower of emancipation Thag 100; Mil 399.

Kusumita

(adj.) in flower, blooming Vv-a 160, Vv-a 162.

Kusumbha

(nt.) the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius, used for dying red Ja v.211 (˚rattavattha); vi.264 (do) Khus iv.2.

Kussubbha

and kussobbha (nt.) a small pond, usually combd with kunnadī and appld in similes: SN ii.32 = AN i.243 = AN v.114; SN ii.118; SN v.47, SN v.63 SN v.395; AN ii.140; AN iv.100; Snp 720; Pv-a 29; DN-a i.58.

Sk. kuśvabhra

Kuha

(adj.) deceitful, fraudulent, false, in phrase kuhā thaddhā lapā singī AN ii.26 = Thag 959; Iti 113akuha honest, upright MN i.386; Snp 957; Mil 352.

Sk. kuha; *qeudh to conceal, cp. Gr. κεύδω; Ags hȳdan, E. hide

Kuhaka

deceitful, cheating; a cheat, a fraud, combd with lapaka DN i.8; AN iii.111AN v.159 sq.; Snp 984, Snp 987; Ja i.375 (˚tāpasa); Dhp-a iv.152 (˚brāhmaṇa); iv.153 (˚cora); Mil 310, Mil 357; Pv-a 13; DN-a i.91.

der. fr. prec.

Kuhanā

(f.) 1. deceit, fraud, hypocrisy, usually in combn kuhana-lapana “deceit and talking-over” = deceitful talk DN i.8; AN iii.430; DN-a i.92; Mil 383; Nd ii.on avajja ■ MN i.465 = Iti 28, Iti 29; SN iv.118; AN v.159 sq.; Vism 23 Vb 352; Sdhp 375.

2. menacing Snp-a 582 ■ Opp akuhaka Snp 852 ■ Var. commentator’s derivations are kuhāyanā (fr. kuhanā) and kuhitattaṃ (fr. kuheti) to be found at Vism 26.

-vatthūni (pl.) cases or opportunities of deceit, three of which are discussed at Nd ii.on nikkuha, mentioned also at Vism 24; DN-a i.91 & Snp-a 107.;

abstr. fr. adj. kuhana = kuhaka

Kuhara

(nt.) (der. fr. kuha) a hole, a cavity; lit. a hidingplace Dāvs i.62.

Kuhiṃ

see under ku˚.

Kuhilikā

(pl.) kuhali flowers Attanugaluvaṃsa 216.

Kuhīyati

only in pahaṃsīyati + k˚ “he exults and rejoices” at Mil 325 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.220, where printed kuhūyati).

Kuheti

to deceive DA 91; ger. kuhitvā deceiving Ja vi.212.

v. denom. fr. kuha

Kūjati

to sing (of birds; cp. vikūjati) Ja ii.439 Ja iv.296; Dāvs v.51 ■ pp. kūjita see abhi˚, upa˚.

kuj, expld with guj at Dhtp 78 by “avyatte sadde”

Kūṭa1

(nt.) a trap, a snare; fig. falsehood, deceit. As trap Ja i.143 (kūṭapāsādi); iv.416 (expln paṭicchannapāsa). As deceit, cheating in formula tulā˚ kaṃsa māna˚ “cheating with weight, coin and measure (DN-a i.78 = vañcana) DN i.5 = DN iii.176 = SN v.473 = MN i.180 = AN ii.209; AN v.205 = Pp 58. māna˚ Pv-a 278 ■ As adj. false, deceitful, cheating, see cpds ■ Note. kūṭe Ja i.145 ought to be read kuṭe (antokuṭe padīpo viya cp. ghaṭa).

-aṭṭa a false suit, in ˚kāra a false suitor Ja ii.2; Dhp-a i.353; -jaṭila a fraudulent ascetic Ja i.375; Dhp-a i.40 -māna false measure Pv-a 191; -vāṇija a false-trader Pv iii.42; Pv-a 191; -vinicchayikatā a lie (false discrimination) Pv-a 210. -vedin lier, calumniator Ja iv.177.

Dhtp 472 & Dhtm 526 expl.; kuṭ; of kūṭa1 by koṭille (koṭilye), cp. Sk. kūṭa trap, cp. Gr. παλεύω to trap birds

Kūṭa2

(m. nt.) -(a) prominence, top (cp. koṭi), in abbha ridge of the cloud Vv i.1 (= sikhara); aṃsa˚ shoulder clavicle, Vv-a 121, Vv-a 123 pabbata˚ mountain peak Vin ii.193; Ja i.73. Cp. koṭa ■ (b) the top of a house roof, pinnacle AN i.261; Vv 784 (= kaṇṇikā Vv-a 304) gaha˚ Dhp 154; Pv-a 55. Cp. also kūṭāgāra ■ (c) a heap, an accumulation, in sankāra˚ dust-heap MN ii.7; Pv-a 144 ■ (d) the topmost point, in phrase desanāya kūṭaṃ gahetvā or desanā kūtaṃ gaṇhanto “leading up to the climax of the instruction” Ja i.275, Ja i.393, Ja i.401 Ja v.151; Ja vi.478; Vv-a 243. Cp. arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto Ja i.114; arahattaphalena k. gaṇhiṃ Thag-a 99.

-aṅga the shoulder Vv 158 (= Vv-a 123). -āgāra (nt.) a building with a peaked roof or pinnacles, possibly gabled; or with an upper storey Vin i.268; SN ii.103 SN v.218; SN iii.156; SN iv.186; SN v.43, SN v.75, SN v.228; AN i.101, AN i.261 AN iii.10, AN iii.364; AN iv.231; AN v.21; Pv iii.17; 221; Vv 82 (= ratanamayakaṇṇikāya bandhaketuvanto Vv-a 50); Vv-a 6 (upari˚, with upper storey) v.l. kuṭṭhāgāra; Pv-a 282 (˚dhaja with a flag on the summit); Dhp-a iv.186. In cpds.:-˚ matta as big as an upper chamber Ja i.273; Mil 67; -˚sālā a pavilion (see description of Maṇḍalamāḷa at DN-a i.43) Vin iii.15, Vin iii.68, Vin iii.87; Vin iv.75; DN i.150; SN ii.103 = SN v.218; SN iv.186. -(n)gama going towards the point (of the roof), converging to the summit SN ii.263 SN iii.156 = SN v.43; -ṭṭha standing erect, straight, immovable in phrase vañjha k˚ esikaṭṭhāyin DN i.14 = DN i.56; SN iii.211 = MN i.517 (expl. DN-a i.105 by pabbatakūṭaṃ viya ṭhita); -poṇa at Vism 268 is to be read ˚goṇa: see kūṭa4.

Vedic kūṭa horn, bone of the forehead, prominence, point, *qele to jut forth, be prominent; cp Lat. celsus, collis, columen; Gr. κολωνός κολοφών; Ags holm, E. hill

Kūṭa3

(nt.) a hammer, usually as aya˚; an iron sledge hammer Ja i.108; or ayo˚; Pv-a 284; ayomaya˚; Snp 669 kammāra˚; Vism 254.

*qolā to beat; cp. Lat. clava; Gr. κλάω, κόλος, and also Sk. khaḍga; Lat. clades, procello; Gr. κλαδαρός. The expln of kuṭ3 at Dhtp 557 & Dhtm 783 is “āko ṭane”

Kūṭa4

(adj.) without horns, i.e. harmless, of goṇa a draught bullock Vin iv.5 = Ja i.192 (in play of words with kūṭa deceitful J. trsl. misses the point translates “rascal”). These maimed oxen (cows calves) are represented as practically useless & sluggish in similes at Vism 268, Vism 269: kūṭa-goṇa-(so read for ˚poṇa)-yutta-ratha a cart to which such a bullock is harnessed (uppathaṃ dhāvati runs the wrong way) kūṭa-dhenuyā khīraṃ pivitvā kūṭa-vaccho, etc., such a calf lies still at the post ■ Kūṭa-danta as Np. should prob. belong here, thus meaning “ox-tooth” (derisively (DN i.127; Vism 208), with which may be compared danta-kūṭa (see under danta).

Sk. kūṭa, not horned; *(s)qer to cut, mutilate, curtail, cp. Lat. caro, curtus; also Sk kṛdhu maimed The expln of kuṭ; as “chede,” or “chedane” (cutting at Dhtp 90, Dhtp 555; Dhtm 115, Dhtm 526, Dhtm 781 may refer to this kūṭa. See also kuṭṭa

Kūṭeyya

(nt.) fraud, deceit, in combn with sāṭheyya vankeyya MN i.340; AN v.167.

der. fr. *kūṭya of kūṭa1, cp. in formation sāṭheyya

Kūpa

(m.). 1. a pit, a cavity akkhi˚; the socket of the eye MN i.80, MN i.245; Dhs-a 306 gūtha˚; a cesspool DN ii.324; Snp 279; Pv ii.316; Pp 36 miḷha˚; a pit for evacuations Pgdp 23, Pgdp 24; loma˚; the root of the hair, a pore of the skin DN-a i.57; Vism 262 Vism 360; also in na loma-kūpamattaṃ pi not even a hairroot Ja i.31; Ja iii.55; vacca˚; = gūtha˚ Vin ii.141, Vin ii.222. As a tank or a well: Ja vi.213; Vv-a 305.

2. the mast of a boat Ja iii.126; Mil 363, Mil 378. See next.

-khaṇa one who digs a pit Ja vi.213. -tala the floor of a pit Vism 362.

Vedic kūpa, orig. curvature viz. (a) interior = cavity, cp. Lat. cupa, Gr. κύπελλον cup; also Gr.κύμβη, Sk. kumbha ■ (b) exterior = heap, cp. Ags hēap, Ohg. heap, Sk. kūpa mast

Kūpaka

= kūpa 1. Vism 361 (akkhi˚), 362 (nadītīra˚), 449 (id.); = kūpa. 2. Ja ii.112; Ja iv.17.

Kūla

(nt.) a slope, a bank, an embankment. Usually of rivers: SN i.143 = Ja iii.361; AN i.162; Snp 977; Ja i.227; Mil 36: udapāna˚ the facing of a well Vin ii.122; vaccakūpassa k˚ the sides of a cesspool Vin ii.141. See also paṃsu˚, & cp. uk˚, upa˚ paṭi˚.;

Dhtp 271: kūla āvaraṇe

Kūra

(nt.) in sukkha˚; boiled rice (?) Vin iv.86; Dhp-a ii.171.

Keka

Name of a tree Ja v.405. Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests misreading for koka Phoenix sylvestris.

?

Keṭubha

expld by Buddhaghosa DN-a i.247 as “the science which assists the officiating priests by laying down rules for the rites, or by leaving them to their discretion” (so Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 116) In short, the ritual; the kalpa as it is called as one of the vedangas. Only in a stock list of the subject a learned Brahmin is supposed to have mastered DN i.88; AN i.163, AN i.166; Snp 1020; Mil 10, Mil 178. So in BSk; Avs ii.19; Divy 619.

deriv. unknown

Keṭubhin

MA 152 (on MN i.32) has “trained deceivers (sikkhitā kerātikā); very deceitful false all through”; iii.6 = AN iii.199.

deriv. unknown

Ketaka

Name of a flower Ja iv.482.

etym. uncertain

Ketana

sign etc., see saṃ˚.

Ketu

1. ray, beam of light splendour, effulgence Thag 64; which is a riddle on the various meanings of ketu.

2. flag, banner, sign perhaps as token of splendour Thag 64. dhamma-k˚ having the Doctrine as his banner AN i.109 = AN iii.149 dhūma-k˚; having smoke as its splendour, of fire, Ja iv.26; Vv-a 161 in expln of dhūmasikha.

-kamyatā desire for prominence, self-advertisement (perhaps vainglory, arrogance) Vism 469; Dhs 1116 (Dhs A. trs. 479), 1233 = Nd ii.505; Nd i.on Snp 829 (= uṇṇama);- mālā “garland of rays” Vv-a 323.

Vedic ketu, *(s)qait, clear; cp. Lat. caelum (= *caidlom), Ohg heitar, heit; Goth. haidus; E ■ hood, orig appearance, form, like

Ketuṃ

see kayati.

Ketuvant

(adj.) having flags, adorned with flags Vv-a 50.

fr. ketu

Kedāra

(m. nt.) an irrigated field, prepared for ploughing, arable land in its first stage of cultivation: kedāre pāyetvā karissāma “we shall till the fields after watering them” Ja i.215; as square-shaped (i.e. marked out as an allotment) Vin i.391 (caturassa˚; Bdhgh on MV viii.12, 1); Ja iii.255 (catukkaṇṇa˚); surrounded by a trench, denoting the boundary (-mariyādā) Dhp-a iii.6Ja iv.167; Ja v.35; Pv-a 7 (= khetta). The spelling is sometimes ketāra (J iii.255 v.l.) see Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 112. Note. The prefix ke-suggests an obsolete noun of the meaning “water,” as also in kebuka ke-vaṭṭa; perhaps Sk. kṣvid, kṣvedate, to be wet, ooze? ke would then be k(h)ed, and kedara ked + dṛ; bursting forth of water = inundation; kebuka = kedvu(d)ka (udaka); kevaṭṭa = ked + vṛ; moving on the water, fisherman; (cp. Avs Index Kaivarta: name of an officer on board a trading vessel).

-koṭi top or corner-point of a field Vism 180.

Kebuka

water Ja vi.38 (= 42: k. vuccati udakaṃ). As nadī a river at Ja iii.91, where Seruma at similar passage p. 189.

on ke-see note to prec.

Keyūra

(nt.) a bracelet, bangle Dhp-a ii.220 (v.l. kāyura).

Keyūrin

(adj.) wearing a bracelet Pv-a 211 (= kāyūrin).

Keyya

(ger. of kayati) for sale Ja vi.180 (= vikkiṇitabba).

Kerāṭika

(adj.) deceitful, false, hypocritic Ja i.461 (expld by biḷāra); iv.220; iv.223 (= kirāsa) MA 152; Dhp-a iii.389 (= saṭha) ■ a˚ honest, frank Ja v.117 (= akitava, ajūtakara).

fr. kirāṭa

Kerāṭiya

= prec. Ja iii.260 (˚lakkhaṇa); MA 152.

Kelisā

at Thag 1010 is to be corrected into keḷiyo (see keḷi2).

Keḷanā

(f.) desire, greed, usually shown in fondness for articles of personal adornment: thus “selfishness” Vb 351 = DN-a i.286 (+ paṭikeḷanā ). In this passage it is given as a rather doubtful expln of cāpalla, which would connect it with kṣvel to jump, or khel to swing, oscillate, waver cp. expln Dhtp 278 kela khela = calane. Another passage is Nd ii.585, where it is combd with parikeḷanā and acts as syName of vibhūsanā.

fr. kilissati? or is it kheḷana?

Keḷāyati

to adorn oneself with (acc.), to fondle, treasure take pride in (gen.) MN i.260 (allīyati kelāyati dhanāyati mamāyati, where dhanāyati is to be read as vanāyati as shown by v.l. SN iii.190 & MN i.552); SN iii.190 (id.) Mil 73 ■ pp. keḷāyita.

Denom. fr. kīḷ in meaning “to amuse oneself with,” i.e. take a pride in. Always combd with mamāyati. BSk. same meaning (to be fond of) śālikṣetrāṇi k. gopāyati Divy 631. Morris. J.P.T.S. 1893, 16 puts it (wrongly?) to kel to quiver: see also keḷanā

Keḷāyana

(nt.) playfulness, unsettledness Vism 134 (opp. majjhatta), 317.;

fr. keḷāyati, cp. kelanā & keḷi

Keḷāyita

desired, fondled, made much of Ja iv.198 (expld with the ster. phrase kelāyati mamāyati pattheti piheti icchatī ti attho).

pp. of keḷāyati

Keḷāsa

(cp. Sk. kailāsa] Name of a mountain Bdhd 138.

Keḷi1

(f.) 1. play, amusement, sport Pv-a 265 (= khiḍḍā); parihāsa merry play, fun Ja i.116.

2. playing at dice, gambling in ˚maṇḍala “circle of the game,” draught-board; ˚ṃ bhindati to break the board, i.e. to throw the die over the edge so as to make the throw invalid (cp. Cunningham Stupa of Bharhut, plate 45) Ja i.379.

fr. krīḍ to play, sport: see kīḷati

Keḷi2

(f.) the meaning is not quite defined it may be taken as “attachment, lust, desire,” or “selfishness, deceit” (cp. kerāṭika & kilissati), or “unsettledness, wavering.”- keḷi-sīla of unsettled character unreliable, deceitful Pv-a 241. ˚sīlaka id. Ja ii.447 ■ pañca citta-keḷiyo = pañca nīvaraṇāni (kāmacchanda etc.), the gratifications of the heart Thag 1010 (corr. kelisā to keḷiyo!) ■ citta-keḷiṃ kīḷantā bahuṃ pāpakammaṃ katvā enjoying themselves (wrongly) to their heart’s content Ja iii.43. Cp. kāmesu a-ni-kīḷitāvin unstained by desires SN i.9, SN i.117.

either fr. kil as in kilijjati & kilissati, or fr.; kel, as given under keḷanā

Kevaṭṭa

fisherman DN i.45 (in simile of dakkho k˚) AN iii.31 = AN iii.342, cp. iv.91; Ud 24 sq.; Ja i.210; Dhp-a ii.132; Dhp-a iv.41; Pv-a 178 (˚gāma, in which to be reborn, is punishment, fishermen being considered outcast); cp. Ja vi.399 Name of a brahmin minister, also DN i.411 Name of Kevaḍḍha (?).

-dvāra Name of one of the gates of Benares, and a village near by Vv 197; Vv-a 97.

on ke-see kedāra

Kevala

(adj ■ adv.) expression of the concept of unity and totality: only, alone; whole, complete; adv altogether or only

1. ˚ṃ (adv.) (a) only = just: k tvaṃ amhākaṃ vacanaṃ karohi “do all we tell you Pv-a 4 ■ only = but, with this difference: Vv-a 203 Vv-a 249 ■ k.… vippalapati he only talks Pv-a 93; and yet: “sakkā nu kiñci adatvā k. sagge nibbattituṃ” is it possible not to give anything, and yet go to heaven? kevalaṃ mano-pasāda-mattena only by purity of mind Dhp-a i.33; kevalaṃ vacchake balava-piyacittatāya simply by the strong love towards the babycalf Vism 313; (b) alone: k. araññaṃ gamissāmi Vv-a 260 ■ exclusive Mil 247 ■ na k.… atha kho not only… but also Vv-a 227.

2. whole, entire Snp p.108; Cp i.1019; Pv ii.63 (= sakala Pv-a 95); Vism 528 (= asammissa, sakala); Pv ii.63 (= sakala Pv-a 95). k. → akevala entire → deficient MN i.326. ˚ṃ entirely thoroughly, all round: k˚ obhāsenti Vv-a 282.

-kappa a whole kappa Snp p.. 18, 45, 125; Kp-a 115; Vv-a 124, Vv-a 255. -paripuṇṇa fulfilled in its entirety (sakala DN-a i.177) of the Doctrine; expld also at Ne 10.

cp. Lat. caelebs = *caivilo-b˚ to live by oneself, i.e. to live in celibacy, perhaps also, Goth hails, Ohg. heil, E. whole

Kevalin

(adj.) one who is fully accomplished, an Arahant; often with mahesi and uttamapurisa Defn sabbaguṇa-paripuṇṇa sabba-yoga-visaṃyutta Snp-a 153 ■ ye suvimuttā te kevalino ye kevalino vaṭṭaṃ tesaṃ natthi paññâpanāya SN iii.59 sq., i.e. “those who are thoroughly emancipated, these are the accomplished…”; kevalīnaṃ mahesiṃ khīṇ’ āsavaṃ Snp 82 = SN i.167 ■ k. vusitavā uttamapuriso Nd ii.on tiṇṇa = AN v.16 ■ with gen.: brahmacariyassa k. “perfected in morality” AN ii.23 ■ As Ep. of “brāhmaṇa Snp 519 = Nd ii.s. v.; of dhammacakka AN ii.9; see also Snp 490, Snp 595akevalin not accomplished, not perfected Snp 878, Snp 891.

fr. kevala

Kesa

the hair of the head SN i.115 (haṭa-haṭa-k˚, with dishevelled hair) AN i.138 (palita-kesa with grey hair; also at Ja i.59) Snp 456 (nivutta˚), 608; Thag 169; Ja i.59, Ja i.138; Ja iii.393; Mil 26; Kp-a 42; Vism 353 (in detail). The wearing of long hair was forbidden to the Bhikkhus: Vin ii.107 sq.; 133 (cp. kesa-massu) ■ dark (glossy) hair is a distinction of beauty: susukāḷa-keso (of Gotama DN i.115; cp. kaṇha and kalyāṇa; Pv-a 26 ■ The hair of Petas is long and dishevelled Pv-a 56; Sdhp 103 it is the only cover of their nakedness: kesehi paṭicchanna “covered only with my hair” Pv i.102 ■ kesesu gahetvā to take by the hair (in Niraya) DN i.234 ■ kesaṃ oropeti to have one’s hair cut Vin ii.133.

-oropaṇa (-satthaka) (a) hair-cutting (knife), i.e. a razor Dhp-a i.431; -ohāraka one who cuts the hair, a barber Vism 413. -kambala a hair blanket (according to Bdhgh human hair) DN i.167 = AN i.240, AN i.295 = AN ii.206; Vin i.305 = MN i.78 = Pp 55; AN i.286. -kambalin wearing a hair blanket (of Ajita) DN i.55. -kalāpā (pl. (atimanohara˚) beautiful tresses Pv-a 46; -kalyāṇa beauty of hair Dhp-a i.387 ■ kārika hairdresser Vv 175 -dhātu the hair-relic (of the Buddha) Ja i.81; -nivāsin covered only with hair of Petas (: keseh’ eva paṭicchādita-kopīnā) Pv iii.16. ˚massu hair and beard; kappita-k˚-m˚ (adj.) with h. and b. dressed DN i.104; AN iv.94; Ja vi.268. Esp. freq. in form kesa-massuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati “to shave off hair & beard, dress in yellow robes and leave the home for the homeless state, i.e. renounce the world and take up the life of a Wanderer DN i.60, DN i.115; DN iii.60, DN iii.64, DN iii.76; AN i.107; AN iii.386; Iti 75; Pp 57; similarly AN ii.207 = Pp 56. -sobha the splendour or beauty of the hair Pv-a 46. -hattha a tuft of hair Pv-a 157; Vv-a 167.

Vedic keśa; cp. kesara hair, mane = Lat. caesaries, hair of the head, Ags. heord = E. hair

Kesayati

see kisa.

Kesara1

a mane, in -sīha a maned lion Ja ii.244; Snp-a 127.

Kesara2

filament of flowers, hairy structures of plants esp. of the lotus; usually of kiñjakkha Pv-a 77; Vv-a 12; Vv-a 111 ■ sa-kesarehi padumapattehi lotusleaves with their hairs Vv-a 32; nicula-k˚ fibres of the Nicula tree Vv-a 134.

-bhāra a sort of fan (cp. vāladhi and cāmara) Vv-a 278.

fr. kesa

Kesarin

having a mane, of a lion, also name of a battle-array (˚saṃgāmo) Dpvs i.7; cp. Avs i.56.

fr. kesara1

Kesava

of rich hair, of beautiful hair. Ep. of King Vāsudeva (cp. kaṇha) Pv ii.62.

fr. last

Kesika

(adj.) hairy, of mangoes Mil 334.

fr. kesa

Ko

see ka.

Koka1

a wolf Ja vi.525; Nd i.13 = Nd ii.420; Mil 267 = Ja v.416. ˚vighāsa remainder of a wolf’s meal Vin iii.58.

not = Sk. koka, cuckoo

Koka2

Name of a tree, Phoenix sylvestris: see keka.

cp. Sk. koka

Kokanada

(nt.) the (red) lotus AN iii.239 = Ja i.116.

cp. Sk. kokanada

Kokāsika

the red lotus in ˚jāta “like the red lotus,” said of the flower of the Pāricchattaka tree AN iv.118.

Kokila

the Indian cuckoo. Two kinds mentioned at Vv-a 57: kāḷa˚; and phussa˚ black and speckled k. As citra˚; at Ja v.416Vv 111, 588; Vv-a 132, Vv-a 163.

cp. Sk. koka a kind of goose, also cuckoo, with derivation kokila cuckoo; cp. Gr. κόκκυς, Lat. cuculus E. cuckoo

Koca

see saṃ˚.

fr. kuc

Koci

see ka.

Koccha1

(nt.) some kind of seat or settee, made of bark, grass or rushes Vin ii.149; Vin iv.40 (where the foll. def. is given: kocchaṃ nāma vāka-mayaṃ vā usīra-mayaṃ vā muñjamayaṃ vā babbaja-mayaṃ vā anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhaṃ hoti. Cp. Vin. Texts i.34; iii.165); Ja v.407 Also in list of 16 obstructions (palibodhā) at Mil 11.

Koccha2

(nt.) a comb (for hair-dressing) Vin ii.107; Vv 8446 (= Vv-a 349); Thig 254, Thig 411 (= Thag-a 267).

-kāra a comb-maker Mil 331 (not in corresp. list of vocations at DN i.51).

Koja

mail armour Ja iv.296 (= kavaca).

Kojava

a rug or cover with long hair, a fleecy counterpane Vin i.281; Dhp-a i.177; Dhp-a iii.297 (pāvāra˚); Dāvs v.36 Often in expln of goṇaka (q.v.) as dīgha-lomaka mahākojava DN-a i.86; Pv-a 157.

Koñca1

the heron, often in comb;n with mayūra (peacock): Thag 1113; Vv 111, 358 Ja v.304; Ja vi.272; or with haṃsa Pv ii.123 ■ Expld as sārasa Vv-a 57; jiṇṇa˚ an old heron Dhp 155.

cp. Sk. krauñca & kruñc

Koñca2

= abbr. of koñca-nāda, trumpeting, in koñcaṃ karoti to trumpet (of elephants) Vin iii.109; Ja vi.497.

-nāda the trumpeting of an elephant (“the heron’s cry”) Ja i.50; Mil 76 (in etymol play with koñca); Vv-a 35. -rāva = prec. Dhp-a iv.70 -vādikā a kind of bird Ja vi.538.

not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 163 sq. to kruñc. (meaning to bend, cp. Lat. crux, E. ridge), but prob. a contamination of krośa, fr. krus to crow, and kuñja = kuñjara, elephant (q.v.). Partly suggested at Divy 251; see also expln at Vv-a 35, where this connection is quite evident.

Koṭa

belonging to a peak, in cpd. ˚pabbata “peak-mountain,” Npl. Vism 127 (write as K˚), 292.

fr. kūṭa2

Koṭacikā

pudendum muliebre, in conn. with kāṭa as a vile term of abuse Vin iv.7 (Bdhgh. koṭacikā ti itthinimittaṃ… hīno nāma akkoso).

Koṭi

(f.) the end-(a) of space: the extreme part, top, summit, point (cp. anta to which it is opposed at Ja vi.371): dhanu-koṭiṃ nissāya “through the (curved) end of my bow,” i.e. by means of hunting Ja ii.200; aṭṭhi-koṭi the tip of the bone Ja iii.26; cāpa a bow Vv-a 261; vema˚ the part of a loom that is moved Dhp-a iii.175; khetta˚ the top (end) of the field Snp-a 150 cankamana˚ the far end of the cloister Ja iv.30; Pv-a 79 ■ (b) of time: a division of time, with reference either to the past or the future, in pubba˚; the past (cp pubbanta), also as purima˚; ; and pacchima˚; the future (cp. aparanta). These expressions are used only of saṃsāra: saṃsārassa purimā koṭi na paññāyati “the first end, i.e. the beginning of S. is not known” Nd ii.664; Dhs-a 11; of pacchimā koṭi ibid ■ anamatagg âyaṃ saṃsāro, pubba˚ na paññāyati S’s end and beginning are unthinkable, its starting-point is not known (to beings obstructed by ignorance) SN ii.178 = SN iii.149 Nd ii.664 = Kv 29 = Pv-a 166; cp. Bdhd 118 (p.k. na ñāyati) ■ koṭiyaṃ ṭhito bhāvo “my existence in the past” Ja i.167 ■ (c) of number: the “end” of the scale, i.e. extremely high, as numeral representing approximately the figure a hundred thousand (cp Kirfel, Kosmographie. p. 336). It follows on satasahassāni Nd ii.664, and is often increased by sata˚ or sahassa˚, esp. in records of wealth (dhana) Snp 677; Ja i.227, Ja i.230, Ja i.345 = Dhp-a i.367 (asīti˚-vibhavo); Ja i.478; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 96; cp. also koṭisatā arahanto Mil 6, Mil 18-kahāpaṇa-koṭi-santhārena “for the price (lit. by the spreading out) of 10 million kahāpaṇas” Vin ii.159; Ja i.94 (ref. to the buying of Jetavana by Anāthapiṇḍika).

-gata “gone to the end,” having reached the end i.e. perfection, nibbāna. Nd ii.436; -ppatta = prec Nd ii.436; as “extreme” Ja i.67. -simbalī Name of a tree (in Avīci) Sdhp 194.

cp. Sk. koṭi & kūṭa;2

Koṭika

(adj.) 1. having a point or a top, with ref. to the human teeth as eka˚, dvi˚; ti˚, catu˚, or teeth with one, two, etc., points Vism 251.

2. having an end or climax SA on pariyanta (see KS. p. 320) āpāna˚; lasting till the end of life Mil 397: Vism 10. 3. referring to (both) ends (of saṃsāra), in ubhato˚ pañhā questions regarding past & future MN i.393 sq.

fr. koṭi

Koṭin

(adj.) aiming for an end or goal Ja vi.254 (cp. ākoṭana2).

fr. koṭi

Koṭilla

(nt.) crookedness Dhtm 526; Abhp 859. As koṭilya at Dhtp 472.

fr. kuṭila

Koṭumbara

(nt.) a kind of cloth Ja vi.47 (coming from the kingdom of k.), 500 (spelt kodumb˚). -˚ka k ■ stuffs Mil 2.

cp. BSk. kauṭumba Divy 559

Koṭṭa

(?) breaking, asi-k˚ note on Vin iv.363 (for asikoṭṭha Vin iv.171?); ˚aṭṭhi at Vism 254 read koṭṭh˚.

Koṭṭana

1. grinding, crushing, pounding (grains) Ja i.475; ˚pacan’ ādi pounding and cooking, etc Dhp-a ii.261.

2. hammering or cutting (?) in dāru Ja ii.18; Ja vi.86 (maṃsa˚, here “beating,” T. spells ṭṭh) Cp. adhikuṭṭanā.

fr. koṭṭeti

Koṭṭita

(pp. of kotteti] beaten down, made even Vism 254, Vism 255.

Koṭṭima

a floor of pounded stones, or is it cloth? Dāvs iv.47.

Koṭṭeti

1. to beat, smash, crush, pound Ja i.478 Ja vi.366 (spelt ṭṭh); Dhp-a i.25 (suvaṇṇaṃ) 165.

2. to make even (the ground or floor) Vin ii.291 (in making floors); Ja vi.332.

3. to cut, kill Snp-a 178 (= hanti of Snp 121); Dhp-a i.70 (pharasunā) ■ pp. koṭṭita ■ Caus koṭṭāpeti to cause to beat, to massage Vin ii.266; Ja iv.37 (ṭṭ the only v.l. B.; T. has ṭṭh).

cp. Sk. kuṭ; & kuṭṭa;1. Expld one-sidedly by Dhtp (91 & 556) as “chedane” which is found only in 3 and adhikuṭṭanā. The meaning “beat” is attributed by Dhtp (557) & Dhtm (783) to root; kuṭ3 (see kūṭa3) by expla “akoṭane.” Cp. also kūṭa4; ākoṭeti & paṭikoṭeti

Koṭṭha1

(m. nt.) anything hollow and closed in (Cp. gabbha for both meanings) as

1. the stomach or abdomen Mil 265, Vism 357; Sdhp 257.

2. a closet, a monk’s cell, a storeroom MN i.332; Thig 283 (?) = Thag-a, 219; Ja ii.168. 3. a sheath, in asi˚ Vin iv.171.

-aṭṭhi a stomach bone or bone of the abdomen Vism 254, Vism 255. -abbhantara the intestinal canal Mil 67 -āgāra (nt.) storehouse, granary, treasury: in conn with kosa (q.v.) in formula paripuṇṇa-kosa-koṭṭhâgāra (adj.) DN i.134, expld at DN-a i.295 as threefold, viz dhana˚ dhañña˚ vattha˚, treasury, granary, warehouse Pv-a 126, Pv-a 133; -āgārika a storehouse-keeper, one who hoards up wealth Vin i.209; Dhp-a i.101; -āsa [ = koṭṭha + aṃsa] share, division, part; ˚koṭṭhāsa (adj.) divided into, consisting of. K. is a prose word only and in all Com. passages is used to explain bhāga: Ja i.254; Ja i.266 Ja vi.368; Mil 324; Dhp-a iv.; 108 (= pada), 154; Pv-a 58 Pv-a 111, Pv-a 205 (kāma˚ = kāmaguṇā); Vv-a 62; anekena k˚-ena infinitely Pv-a 221.

Sk. koṣṭha abdomen, any cavity for holding food, cp. kuṣṭa groin, and also Gr. κύτος cavity κύσδος pudendum muliebre, κύστις bladder = E. cyst chest; Lat. cunnus pudendum, Ger. hode testicle

Koṭṭha2

a bird Ja vi.539 (woodpecker?).

Koṭṭha3

Name of a plant, Costus speciosus (?) Ja v.420.

cp. Sk. kuṭṭha

Koṭṭhaka1

(nt.) “a kind of koṭṭha,” the stronghold over a gateway, used as a store-room for various things, a chamber, treasury, granary Vin ii.153, Vin ii.210; for the purpose of keeping water in it Vin ii.121 = Vin ii.142; Vin ii.220 treasury Ja i.230; Ja ii.168 ■ store-room Ja ii.246; koṭthake pāturahosi appeared at the gateway, i.e. arrived at the mansion Vin i.291.;- udaka-k a bath-room, bath cabinet Vin i.205 (cp. Bdhgh’s expln at Vin. Texts ii.57); so also nahāna-k˚; and piṭṭhi-k˚; bath-room behind a hermitage Ja iii.71; Dhp-a ii.19; a gateway Vin ii.77; usually in cpd. dvāra-k˚; “door cavity, i.e. room over the gate: gharaṃ satta-dvāra-koṭṭhakapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ “a mansion adorned with seven gateways” Ja i.227 = Ja i.230, Ja i.290; Vv-a 322. dvāra-koṭṭhakesu āsanāni paṭṭhapenti “they spread mats in the gateways” Vv-a 6; esp. with bahi: bahi-dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvā “leading him out in front of the gateway” AN iv.206; ˚e thiṭa or nisinna standing or sitting in front of the gateway SN i.77; MN i.161, MN i.382; AN iii.30 ■ bala-k. a line of infantry Ja i.179 ■ koṭṭhaka-kamma or the occupation connected with a storehouse (or bathroom?) is mentioned as an example of a low occupation at Vin iv.6; Kern, Toev. s. v “someone who sweeps away dirt.”

Koṭṭhaka2

the paddy-bird, as rukkha˚; Ja iii.25; Ja ii.163 (v.l. ṭṭ).

cp. Sk. koyaṣṭika

Koṭṭhu

see kotthu.

Koṭṭheti

at Ja ii.424 the v.l. khobheti (nāvaṃ) should be substituted. See also koṭṭeti.

Koṇa

1. a corner Vin ii.137; catu˚ = catu-kaṇṇa Pv-a 52;- ˚racchā crossroads Pv-a 24.

2. a plectrum for a musical instrument Mil 53.

cp. Sk. koṇa & also P. kaṇṇa

Koṇṭa

(v.l. B. koṇḍa) (?) a man of dirty habits Ja ii.209. 210, 212.

Koṇṭha

a cripple Ja ii.118. Konda-

Koṇḍa-

damaka (?) Ja iv.389; also as v.l. B at Ja ii.209.

cp. kuṇḍa

Koṇḍañña

a well-known gotta Ja ii.360.

Kotūhala

(nt.) excitement, tumult, festival, fair Dāvs ii.80 esp. in ˚maṅgalaṃ paccāgacchati he visits the fair or show of… MN i.265; AN iii.439; ˚maṅgalika celebrating feasts, festive AN iii.206; Ja i.373; Mil 94 (cp. Mil trsl. i.143n: the native commentator refers it to erroneous views and discipline called kotūhala and mangalika)-(b) adj.: kotūhala excited, eager for, desirous of Mil 4; Dhp-a i.330.

-sadda shout of excitement Mil 301.

on formation cp. kolāhala; see also kutūhala

Kotthalī

(koṭṭhalī?) a sack (?) Vin iii.189 = Vin iv.269.

Kotthu

a jackal DN iii.25, DN iii.26; MN i.334; Nd i.149 (spelt koṭṭhu); Ja vi.537 (˚sunā: expld by sigāla-sunakhā, katthu-soṇā ti pi pāṭho). kotthuka (and koṭṭhuka) = prec. SN i.66 (where text has kutthaka) Ja ii.108; Mil 23.

koṭṭhu Ja only: cp. Sk. kroṣṭu, of kruś

Kodaṇḍa

(nt.) a cross-bow MN i.429 (opp. to cāpa); Mil 351 (dhanu and k˚). ˚ka same Ja iv.433 (expld by dhanu).

cp. Sk. kodaṇḍa

Kodumbara

see koṭumbara.

Kodha

anger. Nearest synonyms are āghāta (Dhs. 1060 = Nd ii.576 both expositions also of dosa), upanāha (always in chain rāga, dosa, moha, kodha, upanāha) and dhūma (cp χυμός, Mhg. toûm = anger). As pair k. and upanāha AN i.91, AN i.95; in sequence kodha upanāha makkha paḷāsa etc. Nd ii.rāga 1.; Vb 357 sq.; Vism 53, Vism 107, Vism 306; in formula abhijjhā byāpāda k. upanāha MN i.36; AN i.299 = AN iv.148; cp. AN iv.456 = AN v.209; AN v.39, AN v.49 sq., 310 361. As equivalent of āghāta Dhs 1060 = Nd ii.576, cp Pp 18. In other combn: with mada and thambha Snp 245; kadariya Snp 362; pesuniya Snp 928; mosavajja Snp 866, Snp 868 (cp. SN i.169). Other passages, e.g. AN i.283; SN i.240; Snp 537, (lobha˚); Pv ii.37; Dhp i.52 (anattha-janano kodho); Pv-a 55, Pv-a 222 ■ kodha is one of the obstacles to Arahantship, and freedom from kodha is one of the fundamental virtues of a well-balanced mind ■ mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi “let not anger get the better of you” SN i.240; māno hi te brāhmaṇa khāribhāro kodho dhūmo bhasmani mosavajjaṃ etc. “anger is the smoke (smouldering) in the ashes” SN i.169 = Nd ii.576 ■ kodhaṃ chetvā cutting off anger SN i.41 = SN i.47 = SN i.161 = SN i.237; kodhaṃ jahe vippajaheyya mānaṃ “give up anger, renounce conceit Ja i.23 Ja i.25 = Dhp 221; kodhaṃ pajahanti vipassino: “the wise give up anger” Iti 2 = Iti 7; panuṇṇa-kodha (adj.) one who has driven out anger Snp 469; akkodhena jine kodhaṃ conquer anger by meekness Dhp 223 = Ja ii.4 = Vv-a 69. Yo ye uppatitaṃ kodhaṃ rathaṃ bhantaṃ va dhāraye tam ahaṃ sārathiṃ brūmi. “He who restrains rising anger as he would a drifting cart, him I call a waggoner” Dhp 222, cp. Snp 1akkodha freedom from anger, meekness, conciliation MN i.44; SN i.240 (with avihiṃsā tenderness, kindness); AN i.95; Dhp 223 = Ja ii.4 = Vv-a 69.

-ātimāna anger and conceit Snp 968. -upāyāsa companionship or association with anger, the state of being pervaded with anger (opp. akkodh˚) MN i.360, MN i.363 often compared with phenomena of nature suggesting swelling up, viz. “uddhumāyika” kodhupāyāsassa adhivacanaṃ MN i.144; “sa-ummī” Iti 114; “sobbho papāto” SN iii.109; -garu “having respect for” i.e. pursuing anger (opp. saddhammagaru) AN ii.46 sq., 84 -paññāṇa (adj.) knowing the true nature of anger Snp 96 (cp. Snp-a 170); -bhakkha feeding on, i.e. fostering anger, Ep. of a Yakkha SN i.238; -vinaya the discipline or control of anger AN i.91; AN v.165, AN v.167 (combd. with upanāha vinaya).

Vedic krodha fr. krudh, cp. kujjhati

Kodhana

(adj.); usually in combn with upanāhin, e.g. Vin ii.89; DN iii.45, DN iii.246; AN v.156, cp. Snp 116; SN ii.206 Pp 18 ■ k˚ kodhābhibhūta AN iv.94 sq.; k˚ kodhavinayassa na vaṇṇavādī AN v.165 ■ Used of caṇḍa Pv-a 83 ■ Cp. SN iv.240; MN i.42 sq., 95 sq.; Pv-a 82. akkodhana friendly, well-disposed, loving DN iii.159; SN ii.207; SN iv.243; MN i.42 sq., 95 sq.; Snp 19, Snp 624, Snp 850, Snp 941; Vv 155; Vv-a 69.

fr. kodha) having anger, angry, uncontrolled

Konta

a pennant, standard (cp. kunta) Ja vi.454; DN-a i.244; Snp-a 317.

Kontīmant

at Ja vi.454 is expld by camma-kāra, thus “worker in leather (-shields or armour),” with der. fr konta (“satthitāya kontāya likhattā… ”), but reading and meaning are uncertain.

Kopa

ill-temper, anger, grudge Vin ii.184 = Snp 6; Dhs 1060; with appaccaya (mistrust) MN i.27; almost exclusively in phrase kopañ ca dosañ ca appaccayañ ca pātukaroti (pātvakāsi) “he shows forth ill-temper malice and mistrust” (of a “codita” bhikkhu) DN iii.159; SN iv.305; MN i.96 sq., 250, 442; AN i.124, AN i.187 AN ii.203; AN iii.181 sq.; AN iv.168, AN iv.193; Ja i.301; Snp p.92. akopa (adj.) friendly, without hatred, composed Snp 499.

-antara (adj.) one who is under the power of ill-temper SN i.24.

fr. kup

Kopaneyya

(adj.) apt to arouse anger Ja vi.257.

fr. kopa

Kopīna

(nt.) a loin-cloth Ja v.404; Pv ii.323; Pv-a 172; Sdhp 106.

-niddaṃsanin “one who removes the loin-cloth,” i.e. shameless, impure DN iii.183.

cp. Sk. kaupīna

Kopeti

to set into agitation, to shake, to disturb: rājadhamme akopetvā not disturbing the royal rules Pv-a 161; Ja ii.366 = Dhp-a iv.88; kammaṃ kopetuṃ Vin iv.153 to find fault with a lawful decision kāyangaṃ na kopeti not to move a limb of the body see kāya. Cp. paṭi˚, pari˚, vi˚, saṃ˚.

caus. of kuppati

Komala

see kamala; Mhbv 29.

Komāra

(adj.) juvenile, belonging to a youth or maiden: f. komārī a virgin AN iv.210.

-pati husband of a girl-wife Ja ii.120. -brahmacariyā (˚ṃ carati) to practise the vow of chastity or virginity AN iii.224; Thag-a 99. -bhacca Np. “master of the k˚-science,” i.e. of the medical treatment of infants (see note on Vin i.269 at Vin. Texts ii.174). As such it is the cognomen of Jīvaka DN i.47 (as Komārabhacca DN-a i.132); Vin i.71; Ja i.116; cp. Sdhp 351.

fr. kumāra

Komāraka

(and ˚ika) = prec. AN i.261; Ja ii.180 (dhamma virginity); of a young tree SN iv.160 ■ f. ˚ikā Ja iii.266.

Komudī

(f.) moonlight; the full-moon day in the month Kattika, usually in phrase komudī catumāsinī Vin i.155, Vin i.176, sq.; DN i.47 (expld at DN-a i.139 as: tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti) or in phrase komudiyā puṇṇamāya Dhp-a iii.461.

fr. kumuda the white waterlily, cp. Sk. kaumudī

Koraka

(m. nt.) 1. a bud Ja ii.265. - 2. a sheath Ja iii.282.

cp. Sk. koraka

Korakita

(adj.) full of buds Vv-a 288.

fr. koraka

Korajika

(adj.) affected, excitable, infatuated Nd i.226 = Nd ii.342 (v.l. kocaraka) = Vism 26 (v.l. korañjika).

fr. ku + raj or rañj, cp. rāga

Koraṇḍaka

a shrub and its flower Ja v.473 (˚dāma, so read for karaṇḍaka), vi.536; as Npl. in Koraṇḍaka-vihāra Vism 91.

= kuraṇḍaka

Korabya

Np. as cognomen: the descendant of Kuru Ja ii.371 (of Dhanañjaya).

Sk. kauravya

Koriyā

(f.) a hen v.l. (ti vā pāḷi) at Thig 381 for turiyā. See also Thag-a 255 (= kuñcakārakukkuṭī).

Kola

(m. nt.) the jujube fruit MN i.80; AN iii.49 (sampanna-kolakaṃ sūkaramaṃsa “pork with jujube”); Ja iii.22 (= badara); vi.578.

-mattiyo (pl.) of the size of a j. truit, always comb w. kolaṭṭhi-mattiyo, of boils AN v.170 = Snp p.125, cp SN i.150; -rukkha the j. tree Snp-a 356; DN-a i.262; -sampāka cooked with (the juice of) jujube Vv 435 (= Vv-a 186).

Halāyudha ii.71 gives kola in meaning of “hog,” corrupted fr. kroḍa

Kolaṅkola

going from kula to kula (clan to clan) in saṃsāra: AN i.233 = Pp 16; SN v.205; Ne 189 cp. AN iv.381; AN v.120.

der. fr. kula

Kolañña

(adj.) born of (good) family (cp. kulaja); as-˚, belonging to the family of… DN i.89; DN-a i.252; Mil 256khīṇa-kolañña (adj.) one who has come down in the world Vin i.86.

fr. kula

Kolaṭṭhi

the kernel of the jujube, only in cpd. ˚mattiyo (pl.) SN i.150 = AN v.170 = Snp p.125 (with kolamattiyo) and ˚mattā Thig 498 = Thag-a 289; Dhp-a i.319.

Kolaputti

at AN i.38 is composition form of kulaputta, and is to be combined with the foll ■ vaṇṇa-pokkharatā i.e. light colour as becoming a man of good family. Kern Toev. s. v. quite unnecessarily interprets it as “heroncolour,” comparing Sk. kolapuccha heron. A similar passage at Nd i.80 = Nd ii.505 reads kolaputtikena vā vaṇṇapokkharatāya vā, thus taking kolaputtikaṃ as nt, meaning a man of good virtue. The A passage may be corrupt and should then be read ˚puttikaṃ.

Kolamba

(and koḷamba Vv-a) a pot or vessel in general. In Vin always together with ghaṭa, pitcher: Vin i.208 Vin i.213, Vin i.225, Vin i.286; Ja i.33; DN-a i.58; Vv-a 36.

Kolāhala

(nt.) (cp. also halāhala) shouting, uproar, excitement about (-˚), tumult, foreboding, warning about something, hailing. There are 5 kolāhalāni enumd at Kp-a 120 sq. viz. kappa˚; (the announcement of the end of the world, cp. Vism 415 sq.), cakkavatti˚; (of a worldking), buddha˚; (of a Buddha), maṅgala˚; (that a Buddha will pronounce the “εὐαγγέλιον”), moneyya˚ (that a monk will enquire of the Lord after the highest wisdom cp. Snp-a 490). One may compare the 3 (mahā-)halāhalāni given at Ja i.48 as kappa-halāhala, buddha˚ and cakkavatti˚, eka-kolāhalaṃ one uproar Ja iv.404; Ja vi.586; Dhp-a ii.96. See also Vin ii.165, Vin ii.275, Vin ii.280; Ja v.437; Dhp-a i.190; Pv-a 4; Vv-a 132.

Koliya

(adj.) of the fruit of the jujube tree Ja iii.22, but wrongly expld as kula-dattika ph. = given by a man of (good) family.

fr. kola

Kolīniyā

(f.) well-bred, of good family Ja ii.348 (BB koleyyaka ).

Koleyyaka

(adj.) of good breed, noble, appld to dogs Ja i.175; Ja iv.437. Cp. kolīniyā, and Divy 165: kolikagadrabha a donkey of good breed.

Koḷāpa

(and kolāpa ) (adj.) 1. dry, sapless; always appld to wood, freq. in similes SN iv.161, SN iv.185; MN i.242; MN iii.95; Ja iii.495; Mil 151; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iv.166.

2. hollow tree Nd ii.40; Snp-a 355 (where Weber, Ind. Streifen v.1862, p. 429 suggests reading koṭara = Sk. koṭara hollow tree; unwarranted).

Koḷikā

(or kolika?) (f.) adj. = kolaka, appl. to boils, in pīḷikoḷikā (itthi) having boils of jujube size Thig 395 (expl. at Thag-a 259; akkhidalesu nibbattanakā pīḷikā vuccati).

Kovida

(adj.) one who is in the possession of right wisdom, with ref. either to dhamma, magga, or ariyasaccāni, closely related to medhāvin and paṇḍita SN i.146, SN i.194, SN i.196 (ceto-pariyāya˚); AN ii.46; MN i.1, MN i.7 MN i.135, MN i.300, MN i.310, MN i.433; Dhp 403 = Snp 627; Snp 484 (jātimaraṇa˚), 653 (kammavipāka˚); Pv i.1112; Vv 159 (= Vv-a 73), 6330 (= Vv-a 269); Mil 344; Sdhp 350- akovida ignorant of true wisdom (dhammassa) SN i.162; Snp 763; SN iv.287 = Nd ii.on attānudiṭṭhi.

ku + vid.

Koviḷāra

Bauhinia variegata; a tree in the devaloka (pāricchattaka koviḷāra: k-blossom called p. Vv-a 174) AN iv.117 sq.; Snp 44; Ja iv.29; Vv 381 Dhp-a i.270.

-puppha the flower of the K. tree Snp-a 354 (where the limbs of one afflicted with leprosy are compared with this flower).

cp. Sk. kovidāra

Kosa1

(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kośa and koṣa, cavity, box vessel, cp. Goth. hūs, E. house; related also kukṣi = P. kucchi any cavity or enclosure containing anything, viz. 1. a store-room or storehouse, treasury or granary AN iv.95 (rāja˚); Snp 525; Ja iv.409 (= wealth, stores); Ja vi.81 (aḍḍhakosa only half a house) in cpd ■ ˚ koṭṭhāgāra expld at DN-a i.295 as koso vuccati bhaṇḍāgāraṃ. Four kinds are mentioned: hatthī˚, assā˚, rathā˚, raṭṭhaṃ˚. 2. a sheath, in khura˚ Vism 251, paṇṇa˚ Kp-a 46. 3. a vessel or bowl for food: see kosaka.

4. a cocoon see-˚kāraka;

5. the membranous cover of the male sexual organ, the praeputium Ja v.197. The Com expls by sarīra-saṃkhāta k˚. See cpd. kosohita. Cp. also kosī.

-ārakkha the keeper of the king’s treasury (or granary AN iii.57; -ohita ensheathed, in phrase kosohita vatthaguyha “having the pudendum in a bag.” Only in the brahmin cosmogonic myth of the superman (mahā-purisa) DN iii.143, DN iii.161. Applied as to this item to the Buddha DN i.106 (in the Cy DN-a i.275, correct the misprint kesa into kosa) DN ii.17; Snp 1022 pp. 106, 107 Miln 167. For the myth see Dial iii.132

136. -kāraka the “cocoon-maker,” i.e. the silk-worm, Vin iii.224; Vism 251. -koṭṭhāgāra “treasury and granary” usually in phrase paripuṇṇa-k-k (adj.) “with stores of treasures and other wealth” Vin i.342; DN i.134; SN i.89; Mil 2; & passim.;

Kosa2

at Vv-a 349 is marked by Hardy, Index and trsld by scar or pock. It should be corrected to kesa, on evidence of corresp. passage in Thag-a 267 (cp. koccha).

Kosaka

1. a sheath for a needle Ja iii.282; - 2. a bowl, container, or vessel for food Ja i.349 (v.l. kesaka); MN ii.6, MN ii.7, (-˚āhāra adj. living on a bowl-full of food; also aḍḍha˚) Vism 263.

3. case for a key (kuñcikā˚) Vism 251.

fr. kosa

Kosajja

(nt.) idleness, sloth, indolence; expld at Vb 369Vin ii.2; SN v.277–⁠280; AN i.11, AN i.16 AN ii.218; AN iii.375, AN iii.421; AN v.146 sq.; 159 sq.; AN iv.195; Dhp 241; Mil 351; Vism 132; Ne 127; Dhp-a iii.347 Dhp-a iv.85; Dhs-a 146; Snp-a 21.

From kusīta

Kosamattha

= ka + samattha “who is able,” i.e. able, fit DN-a i.27.

Kosalla

(nt.) proficiency. There are 3 kinds mentioned at DN iii.220, Vb 325 & Vism 439 sq. viz.; āya˚, apāya˚; and upāya˚; ; at Dhs 16 = Dhs 20 = Dhs 292 Dhs 555 = Nd ii.ad paññā it is classed between paṇḍicca and nepuñña. See also Pp 25; Vism 128 sq. (appanā˚) 241 sq. (uggaha˚ & manasikāra˚), 248 (bojjhanga˚); Pv-a 63, Pv-a 99 (upāya˚).

der. fr. kusala

Kosātakī

(f.) a kind of creeper Vv 474; Vism 256, Vism 260, Vism 359; Vv-a 200 ■ bīja the seed of the k. AN i.32 = AN v.212.

cp. Sk. kośātakī

Kosika

= kosiya, an owl Ja v.120.

Kosiya

an owl Ja ii.353, cp. Np. Kosiyāyana Ja i.496. Biḷārakosika (and ˚kosiya) Ja iv.69.

Kosī

(f.) a sheath DN i.77 = MN ii.17.

Koseyya

silk; silken material Vin i.58 = Mil 267; Vin i.192, Vin i.281; Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169; DN i.7, cp. AN i.181 (see DA i.87); AN iv.394; Pv ii.117; Ja i.43; Ja vi.47.

-pāvāra a silk garment Vin i.281; -vattha a silk garment Dhp-a i.395.

der. fr. kosa, cp. Sk. kauśeya silk-cloth and P. kosa-kāraka

Kohañña

(nt.) hypocrisy, deceit Ja ii.72; Ja iii.268; Ja iv.304; Dhp-a i.141.

fr. kuhana

Kvaṇ

(indecl.) is together with kuṇ registered as a part. of sound (“sadde”) at Dhtp 118 & Dhtm 173.;

Kh.

Kh

Kha

syllable & ending, functioning also as root, meaning “void, empty” or as n. meaning “space”; expld. by Bdhgh with ref. to dukkha as “khaṃ saddo pana tucche; tucchaṃ hi ākāsaṃ khan ti vuccati” Vism 494-In meaning “space, sky” in cpd. khaga “sky-goer (cp. viha-ga of same meaning), i.e. bird Abhp 624 Bdhd 56.

Khagga

1. a sword (often with dhanu, bow) at DN i.7 (Dhp i.89 = asi) as one of the forbidden articles of ornament (cp. BSk. khaḍga-maṇi Divy 147, one of the royal insignia) ■ khaggaṃ bhandati to gird on one’s sword Pv-a 154, khaggaṃ sannayhati id. Dhp-a iii.75 ˚gāhaka a sword-bearer Mil 114; ˚tala sword-blade Mvu 25, Mvu 90.

2. a rhinoceros Ja v.406 (= gavaja)

416; vi.277 (˚miga), 538. In cpd. ˚visāṇā (cp. BSk khaḍgaviṣāṇa Divy 294 = Snp 36) the horn of a rh (: khagga-visāṇaṃ nāma khagga-miga-singaṃ Snp-a 65; Snp 35 sq. (Name of Sutta); Nd ii.217 (khagga-visāṇa-kappa “like the horn of the rh.” Ep. of a Paccekabuddha (cp. Divy 294, Divy 582), also at Vism 234.

Sk. khaḍga; perhaps to Lat. clades and gladius; cp. also kūṭa3

Khacita

inlaid, adorned with, usually with jewels e.g. Vv-a 14, Vv-a 277; maṇi-muttâdi khacitā ghaṇṭā “bells inlaid with jewels, pearls, etc.” Vv-a 36; of a fan inlaid with ivory (danta-khacita) Vin iii.287 (Sam. Pās.) Suvaṇṇa-khacita-gajak’ attharaṇā “elephants’ trappings interwoven with gold” Vv-a 104; of a chair, inlaid with pearls Ja i.41; of a canopy embroidered with golden stars Ja i.57.

pp. of khac as root expld at Dhtm. 518 by “bandhana”

Khajja

(adj.-n..) to be eaten or chewed, eatable, solid food, usually in cpd. -bhojja solid and other food, divided into 4 kinds, viz. asita, pīta, khāyita sāyita Pv i.52 (= Pv-a 25) Ja i.58; Mil 2. -bhājaka a distributor of food (an office falling to the lot of a senior bhikkhu) Vin ii.176 (= v.204); iv. 38, 155.

grd. of khajjati

Khajjaka

(adj.) eatable, i.e. solid food (as ˚bhojjanāni opposed to yāgu Pv-a 23); (nt.) Ja i.186 (of 18 kinds, opp. yāgu); i.235 (id.); Mil 294 ■ ˚bhājaka prec.

fr. last

Khajjati

(= khādiyati, Pass. of khādati; Dhtm 93 bhakkhaṇa) 1. to be eaten, chewed, eaten up, as by animals upacikāhi Vin ii.113; suṇakhehi Pv iii.78; puḷavehi Ja iii.177; cp. Pv iv.52 (cut in two)

2. to be itchy to be irritated by itch (cp. E. “itch” = Intens. of “eat”) Ja v.198 (kh˚ kanduvāyati); Pv ii.39 (kacchuyā kh˚)

3. to be devoured (fig.), to be consumed to be a victim of: kāmataṇhāhi MN i.504; rūpena SN iii.87, SN iii.88 (khajjanīya-pariyāya, quoted Vism 479). ppr. khajjamāna Pv ii.15 (consumed by hunger & thirst).;

Khajjara

caterpillar Pgdp 48.

Khajjopanaka

the fire-fly MN ii.34 = MN ii.41; Ja ii.415; Ja vi.330, Ja vi.441; Dhp-a iii.178; also khajjūpanaka Vism 412 (in simile). See Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908 59 & 79.;

cp. Sk. khadyota

Khañja

(adj.) lame (either on one foot or both: PugA 227; Vin ii.90 = AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = Pp 51 (comb. with kāṇa and kuṇi); Thig 438 (+ kāṇa); Dhp-a i.376 (+ kuṇi).

cp. Sk. khañja, Dhtp 81: khañja gativekalye

Khañjati

to be lame Pv iii.228.

fr. khañja

Khañjana

(nt.) hobbling, walking lame Pv-a 185.

Khaṭakhaṭa

(khāṭ-kata, making khāṭ; cp. kakkāreti) the noise of hawking or clearing one’s throat: -sadda Vin i.188; Dhp-a iii.330; cp. khakkhaṭa (v.l. khaṭkhaṭa Divy 518 = utkāśanaśabda.

Khaṭopikā

(f.) couch, bedstead MN i.450, MN i.451 (vv.ll. ka˚, khajj˚).

perhaps connected with Sk khaṭvā? uncertain

Khaṇa1

(m.) 1. (1) a (short), moment, wink of time; in phrase khaṇen’ eva “in no time” Pv-a 38.117; Sdhp 584 (etc.). Sdhp 584; khaṇo ve mā upaccagā “let not the slightest time be wasted Snp 333 = Dhp 315; cf. Th. ii.5 (cp. khaṇâtīta); n’ atthi so kh˚ vā layo vā muhutto vā yaṃ (nadī) āramati “there is no moment, no inkling, no particle of time that the river stops flowing” AN iv.137 (as simile of eternal flow of happening, of unbroken continuity of change); Vism 238 (jīvita˚), 473; (khaṇa-vasena uppād’ ādi-khaṇa-ttaya, viz. uppāda, ṭhiti, bhanga, cp. p. 431) Ja iv.128; aṭṭha-kkhaṇa-vinimmutto kh˚ paramadullabho: one opportunity out of eight, very difficult to be obtained Sdhp 4, Sdhp 16; cp. 45, 46.

2. moment as coincidence of two events: “at the same moment,” esp. in phrase taṃ khaṇaṃ yeva “all at once,” simultaneously with which syn. ṭhānaso Ja i.167, Ja i.253; Ja iii.276, Pv-a 19; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 35; tasmiṃ khaṇe Ja ii.154; Pv-a 67; Sdhp 17. 3. the moment as something expected or appointed (cp καιρός), therefore the right moment, or the proper time. So with ref. to birth, rebirth, fruit of action attainment of Arahantship, presence on earth of a Buddha, etc., in cpds.: cuti-kkhaṇo Bdhd 106; paṭisandhi˚ Pts ii.72 sq.; Bdhd 59, 77, 78; uppatti˚ Vb 411 sq.; sotāpattimagga˚ Pts ii.3; phala˚ Pts i.26 Bdhd 80; nikanti˚ Pts ii.72 sq.; upacāra˚ Bdhd 94 citta˚ id. 38, 95 ■ khaṇe khaṇe from time to time Dhp 239 (= okāse okāse Dhp-a iii.340, but cp. Comp. 161, n. 5) Buddhuppāda˚, Th ii.A, 12. akkhaṇa see sep. Also akkhaṇavedhin. -akkhaṇe at the wrong time inopportune Pv iv.140 (= akāle). On kh. laya, muhutta cp. Points of Contr. 296, n. 5.

-ātīta having missed the opportunity Snp 333 = Dhp 315 (= Dhp-a iii.489); -ññū knowing, realizing the opportunity Snp 325 (cp. Snp-a 333). -paccuppanna arisen at the moment or momentarily Vism 431 (one of the 3 kinds of paccuppanna: kh˚., santati˚, addhā˚) -paritta small as a moment Vism 238.

Derivation unknown. It has been suggested that khaṇa and the Sk. kshaṇa are derived from īkshaṇa (seeing) by process of contraction. This seems very forced; and both words are, in all probability, other than the word from which this hypothesis would derive them.

Khaṇa2

digging Ja ii.296. Cp. atikhaṇa.

fr. khaṇ

Khaṇati

1. to dig (? better “destroy”; cp. Kern Toev. s. v.), dig out uproot Dhp 247, Dhp 337; Snp p.101; Ja ii.295; Ja iv.371, Ja iv.373 Sdhp 394. Also khanati & cp.; abhikkhaṇati palikkhaṇati.

2. [ = Sk. kṣanati] to destroy Vin ii.26 (attānaṃ); MN i.132 (id.) ■ pp. khata & khāta; (cp palikkhata).

fr. khan or khaṇ; Dhtp 179: anadāraṇe

Khaṇana

(nt.) digging Mil 351 (pokkharaṇi˚).

fr. khaṇ

Khaṇika

(adj.) unstable, momentary, temporary, evanescent, changeable; usually syn. with ittara, e.g. Ja i.393; Ja iii.83; Pv-a 60Vism 626 (khaṇikato from the standpoint of the momentary). Khaṇikā pīti “momentary joy” is one of the 5 kinds of joy, viz. khuddikā, khaṇikā, okkantikā, ubbegā pharaṇā (see pīti) Vism 143, Dhs-a 115.

-citta temporary or momentary thought Vism 289 -maraṇa sudden death Vism 229. -vassa momentary i.e. sudden rain (-shower) Ja vi.486.

fr. khaṇa

Khaṇikatta

(nt.) evanescence, momentariness Vism 301.

fr. khaṇika

Khaṇḍa

1. (adj.) broken, usually of teeth; Thig 260 (= Thag-a 211); Mil 342; Vism 51. 2. (m. nt.) a broken piece, a bit, camma˚ a strip of hide Vin ii.122; coḷa˚ a bit of cloth Pv-a 70; pilotika˚ bits of rags Pv-a 171; pūva˚ a bit of cake Ja iii.276;- akhaṇḍa unbroken, entire, whole, in -kārin (sikkhāya) fulfilling or practising the whole of (the commandments) Pv iv.343 and ˚sīla observing fully the sīla-precepts Vv 113 cp. Vism 51 & Bdhd 89.;

-ākhaṇḍa (redupl ■ iter. formation with distributive function) piece by piece, nothing but pieces, broken up into bits Vism 115. -ākhaṇḍika piece by piece, consisting of nothing but bits, in kh ˚ṃ chindati to break up into fragments AN i.204 (of māluvālatā); ii.199 (of thūṇā); SN ii.88 (of rukkha); cp. Vin iii.43 (dārūni ˚ṃ chedāpetvā); Ja v.231 (˚ṃ katvā). -danta having broken teeth, as sign of old age in phrase kh˚ palitakesa, etc “with broken teeth and grey hair” AN i.138 and ≈ Ja i.59, Ja i.79 (id.). -phulla [Bdhgh on Vin ii.160; khaṇḍa = bhinn’okāso, phulla = phalit’ okāso.] broken and shattered portions; ˚ṃ paṭisankharoti to repair dilapidations Vin ii.160 (= navakammaṃ karoti) 286; iii.287; AN iii.263; cp. same expression at Divy 22. ; unbroken and unimpaired fig. of sīla, the rule of conduct in its entirety, with nothing detracted Vv 8316 = Pv iv.176 (cp. akhaṇḍasīla) = Dhp-a i.32.

freq. spelt kaṇḍa (q.v.). Cp. Sk. khaṇḍa; expld at Dhtp 105 as “chedana”

Khaṇḍati

to break, Dhp-a iv.14; pp. khaṇḍita broken, Pv-a 158 (-kaṇṇo = chinnakaṇṇo).

Khaṇḍikā

(f.) a broken bit, a stick, in ucchu˚ Vv 3326 (= ucchu-yaṭṭhi Dhp-a iii.315).

fr. khaṇḍa

Khaṇḍicca

(nt.) the state of being broken (of teeth), having broken teeth, in phrase kh˚ pālicca, etc., as signs of old age (see above) MN i.49 = DN ii.305; AN iii.196; Dhs 644 = Dhs 736 = Dhs 869; Dhp-a iii.123; in similar connection Vism 449.

Khaṇḍeti

to renounce, to remit, in vetanaṃ ˚etvā Ja iii.188.

v. denom. fr. khaṇḍa

Khata1

1. dug up, uprooted, fig. one whose foundation (of salvation) has been cut off; in combn with upahata DN i.86 (= DN-a i.237); khataṃ upahataṃ attānaṃ pariharati “he keeps himself uprooted and half-dead” i.e. he continues to lead a life of false ideas AN i.105 = AN ii.4; opp. akkhataṃ anupahataṃ etc. AN i.89.

pp. of khanati

Khata2

hurt, wounded; pādo kh˚ hoti sakalikāya “he grazed his foot” SN i.27 = Mil 134 Mil 179akkhata unmolested, unhurt Vv 8452 (= anupadduta Vv-a 351). See also parikkhata.

pp. of kṣan, to wound

Khataka

damage, injury Vv-a 206, khatakaṃ dāsiyā deti “she did harm to the servant, she struck the s.” Or is it khalikaṃ? (cp. khaleti); the passage is corrupt.

fr. khata2

Khatta

(nt.) rule, power, possession; only in cpds.:

-dhamma the law of ruling, political science Ja v.490 (is it khattu˚ = khattā˚?) -vijjā polity DN i.9, condemned as a practice of heretics. Bdhgh at DN-a i.93 explains it as nīti-sattha, political science (= ˚dhamma) See Rh. D. Dialogues i.18. -vijjavādin a person who inculcates Macchiavellian tricks Ja v.228 (paraphrased mātāpitaro pi māretvā attano va attho kāmetabbo ti “even at the expense of killing father and mother is wealth to be desired for oneself”), so also Ja v.240 -vijjācariya one who practises kh-˚vijjā ibid.; -vida (so read for ˚vidha) = ˚vijja (adj.) a tricky person, ibid (v.l. ˚vijja, better). Cp. Sk. kṣātra-vidya.

Sk. kṣatra, to kṣi, cp. Gr. κτάομαι, κτ ̈ημα, possession

Khattar

attendant, companion, charioteer, the king’s minister and adviser (Lat. satelles “satellite” has been compared for etym.) DN i.112 (= DN-a i.280, kh˚ vuccati pucchita-pucchita-pañhaṃ vyākaraṇa-samattho mahāmatto: “kh˚ is called the King’s minister who is able to answer all his questions”) Buddhaghosa evidently connects it with katheti, to speak, respond = katthā; gādhaṃ k˚ AN ii.107 = Pp 43 v.l. for kattā (cp. Pp A 225).

Sk. kṣattṛ fr. kṣatra

Khattiya

pl. nom. also khattiyāse Ja iii.441. A shortened form is khatya Ja vi.397 ■ f. khattiyā AN iii.226–⁠229, khattī DN i.193, and khattiyī. A member of one of the clans or tribes recognised as of Aryan descent. To be such was to belong to the highest social rank. The question of such social divisions in the Buddha’s time is discussed in Dialogues i.97

107 and it is there shown that whenever they are referred to in lists the khattiyas always come first. Khattiyo seṭṭho jane tasmiṃ DN i.199 = DN ii.97 = MN i.358 = SN i.153 SN ii.284. This favourite verse is put into the mouth of a god; and he adds that whoever is perfect in wisdom and righteousness is the best of all. On the social prestige of the khattiyas see further MN ii.150

157 iii.169; AN ii.86; SN i.71, SN i.93; Vin iv.6

10. On the religious side of the question DN iii.82; DN iii.93; MN i.149, MN i.177 MN ii.84; SN i.98. Wealth does not come into consideration at all. Only a very small percentage of the khattiyas were wealthy in the opinion of that time and place Such are referred to at SN i.15. All kings and chieftains were khattiyas DN i.69, DN i.136; DN iii.44, DN iii.46, DN iii.61; AN i.106 AN iii.299; AN iv.259. Khattiyas are called rājāno Dhp 294 quoted Netti 165.

-ābhiseka the inauguration of a king AN i.107, AN i.108 (of the crown-prince) = AN ii.87; -kaññā a maid of khattiya birth Ja i.60; Ja iii.394; -kula a khattiya clan, a princely house, Vin ii.161 (w. ref. to Gotama’s descent) iii.80; -parisā the assembly of the khattiyas; as one of the four parisās (kh˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚ samaṇa) at Vin i.227; AN ii.133; as the first one of the eight (1

4 as above, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiṃsa˚ Māra˚, Brahma˚) at MN i.72 = DN iii.260; -mahāsāla “the wealthy khattiya” (see above ii.1) DN iii.258, etc.; -māyā “the magic of the noble” Dhp-a i.166; -vaṃsa aristocratic descent DN-a i.267; -sukhumāla a tender, youthful prince (of the Tathāgata: buddha˚, kh˚) Dhp-a i.5.

der. fr. khatta = kṣatra “having possessions”; Sk. kṣatriya

Khattiyī

(f.) a female khattiya, in series brāhmaṇī kh˚ vessī suddī caṇḍālī nesādī veṇī rathakārī pukkusī AN iii.229; similarly MN ii.33, MN ii.40.

˚Khattuṃ

in compn with numerals “times”: dvikkhattuṃ, tikkhattuṃ, etc.; twice, three times, etc.

Sk. ˚kṛtvah, cp. ˚kad

Khadira

the tree Acacia catechu, in cpds. -aṅgārā (pl. embers of (burnt) acacia-wood Ja i.232; Pv-a 152 -ghaṭikā a piece of a ■ wood Ja iv.88; -tthambha a post of a ■ wood Dhp-a iii.206; -patta a bowl made of a ■ wood Ja v.389; -vana a forest of acacias Ja ii.162; -sūla an impaling stake of a ■ wood Ja iv.29.

Sk. khadira; Gr. κίσσαρος, ivy; Lat. hedera, ivy

Khanati

see khaṇati.

Khanittī

(f.) a spade or hoe Vin i.270; Ja vi.520 = V.89 (+ ankusa).

to khan, cp. Sk. khanitra

Khantar

possessed of meekness or gentleness; docile, manageable. Said of an elephant AN ii.116 = AN iii.161 sq. Khanti & Khanti

n. agent of khanti

Khanti & Khantī

f. patience, forbearance, forgiveness. Def. at Dhs 1341: khantī khamanatā adhivāsanatā acaṇḍikkaṃ anasuropo attamanatā cittassa Most frequent combinations: with mettā (love (see below); -titikkhā (forbearance): khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti Buddhā Dhp 184 = DN ii.49 = Vism 295; khantiyā bhiyyo na vijjati, SN i.226; cp. Dhp-a iii.237: titikkhā-sankhātā khantī;-avihiṃsā (tolerance): kh˚, avihiṃsā, mettatā anudayatā, SN v.169; -akodhana (forbearing, gentle Vv-a 71; -soraccaṃ (docility, tractableness) DN iii.213; AN i.94; also with maddava (gentleness) and s. as quality of a well-bred horse AN iii.248, cp. AN ii.113 and khantā -sovaccassatā (kind speech) Snp 266 (cp. Kp-a 148). See also cpds ■ Khantī is one of the ten paramitās Ja i.22 Ja i.23: cp. AN iii.254, AN iii.255 ■ In other connections: khantiyā upasamena upeta SN i.30; ativissuto Sdhp 473 anulomikāya kh˚iyā samannāgata (being of gentle and forbearing disposition) AN iii.437, AN iii.441; Pts ii.236 sq. Vb 340. See also AN iii.372; Snp 189, Snp 292, Snp 897, Snp 944. In scholastic language frequent in combination diṭṭhi khanti ruci, in def. of idha (Vbh 245), tattha (Nd2) diṭṭhi (Nd2), cp. Nd ii.151 and Vb 325 sq ■ akkhanti intolerance Vin iv.241 (= kopa); Vb 360 (in def as opp. of khanti Dhs 1341. q.v. above), 378.

-bala (nt.) the force of forbearance; (adj.) one whose strength is patience:… aduṭṭho yo titikkhati khantībalaṃ balānīkaṃ tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ Dhp 399 = Snp 623Dhp-a iv.164; Pts ii.171, Pts ii.176 -mettā forbearing love, in phrase kh˚-mettânuddayasampanna (adj.) one whose character is compassion and loving forbearance Ja i.151, Ja i.262; Pv-a 66 (+ yuttakāra) Vv-a 71 (in expln of akodhana); -suñña (nt.) the void of khanti Pts ii.183; -soracca (nt.) gentleness and forbearance SN i.100, SN i.222; AN ii.68; Ja iii.487; Dhp-a i.56 ˚e niviṭṭha “established in forbearance and meekness” AN iii.46 = DN iii.61.

Sk. kṣānti

Khantika

(adj.) acquiescing in-, of such and such a belief, in añña˚; belonging to another faith combd with aññadiṭṭhika and aññarucika DN i.187; MN i.487.

fr. prec.

Khandati

to jump, only in cpd. pakkhandati; given as root khand at Dhtm 196 with meaning “pakkhandana.”

skand

Khandha

I. Crude meaning: bulk, massiveness (gross) substance. A. esp. used (a) of an elephant: the bulk of the body, i.e. its back SN i.95 vāraṇassa Ja iii.392; hatthi-khandha-vara-gata on the back of the state elephant Ja i.325; Pv-a 75. Also with ref. to an elephant (hatthināga) sañjāta˚ “to whom has grown bulk = a large back” Snp 53, expl. Snp-a 103 by susaṇṭhitakkhandho “well endowed with bulk.” (b) of a person: the shoulder or back: nangalaṃ khandhe karitvā SN i.115 appl. to Māra; Vism 100; Dhp-a iv.168 (ohita˚-bhāra the load lifted off his shoulder). -(c) of a tree: the trunk. rukkhassa Pv-a 114, also as rukkha˚; Ja i.324; tāla˚ the stem of a palm Pv-a 56 nigrodhassa khandhaja (see cpds.) SN i.207 = Snp 272 mūlaṃ atikkamma kh˚ ṃ sāraṃ pariyesitabbaṃ “one must go beyond the root and search the trunk for sweetness” SN iv.94 ■ (d) as t.t. in exegetical literature section, chapter, lit. material as collected into uniform bulk; freq. in postscripts to Texts and Commentaries See also khandhaka ■ B. More general as denoting bulk (-˚); e.g. aggi˚ a great mass of fire MN ii.34, MN ii.41; Ja iv.139; udaka˚ a mass of water (i.e. ocean) AN iii.336; SN iv.179; Ja i.324; Pv-a 62; puñña˚ a great accumulation of merit AN iii.336 = SN v.400; bhoga˚ a store of wealth AN v.84; Ja i.6; maṇi˚ an extraordinarily large jewel (possessing magic power) Ja ii.102 sq. -

II. Applied meaning.-A. (-˚) the body of, a collection of, mass, or parts of; in collective sense “all that is comprised under”; forming the substance of. (a) dukkha˚; all that is comprised under “dukkha,” all that goes to make up or forms the substance, the idea of “ill.” Most prominent in phrase kevalassa dukkhakhandhassa samudaya and nirodha (the origin destruction of all that is suffering) with ref. to the paṭiccasamuppāda the chain of causal existence (q.v.) Vin i.1; SN ii.95; SN iii.14; AN i.177; v. 184 & passim. Similarly samudaya Vb 135 sq. nirodha Ne 64; antakiriyā AN i.147; vyādhimaraṇatunnānaṃ dukkhakkhandhaṃ vyapānudi Thig 162 ■ (b) lobha˚; dosa˚ moha˚ the three ingredients or integrations of greed, suffering and bewilderment, lit. “the big bulk or mass of greed” (see also under padāleti), SN v.88 (nibbijjhati through the satta bojjhangā) ■ (c) vayo˚; a division of age, part of age, as threefold: purima˚, majjhima˚, pacchima Nd ii.in def. of sadā ■ (d) sīla (etc.) kh˚ the 3 (or 5 groups or parts which constitute the factors of right living (dhamma), viz. (1) sīla˚ the group dealing with the practice of morality; (2) samādhi˚ that dealing with the development of concentration; (3) paññā˚ that dealing with the development of true wisdom. They are also known under the terms of sīla-sampadā, citta˚ paññā˚ DN i.172 sq.; see sīla. -D i.206; Ne 64 sq.; 126 tīhi dhammehi samannāgato “possessed of the three qualities,” viz. sīla-kkhandhesu, etc. Iti 51; cp AN i.291; AN v.326. tīhi khandhehi… aṭṭhangiko maggo sangahito MN i.301; sīlakkhandhaṃ, etc. paripūreti “to fulfil the sīla-group” AN i.125; AN ii.20, AN iii.15 sq. These 3 are completed to a set of 5 by (4) vimutti the group dealing with the attainment of emancipation and (5) vimutti-ñāṇa-dassana ˚the group dealing with the realization of the achievement of emancipation. As 1–⁠4 only at DN iii.229 (misprint puñña for paññā); cp AN i.125. As 5 at SN i.99 = AN i.162; SN v.162; AN iii.134 AN iii.271; AN v.16 (all loc. = SN i.99); Iti 107, Iti 108; Nd ii.under sīla.

B. (absolute) in individual sense: constituent element, factor, substantiality. More especially as khandhā (pl.) the elements or substrata of sensory existence, sensorial aggregates which condition the appearance of life in any form. Their character according to quality and value of life and body is evanescent fraught with ills & leading to rebirth. Paraphrased by Bdhgh. as rāsi, heap, e.g. Asl. 141; Vibh A 1 f.; cf B. Psy. 42. 1. Unspecified. They are usually enumerated in the foll. stereotyped set of 5: rūpa˚; (material qualities), vedanā (feeling), saññā (perception), saṅkhārā (coefficients of consciousness), viññāṇa (consciousness) For further ref. see rūpa; cp. also Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. pp. 40

56. They are enumerated in a different order at SN i.112, viz. rūpaṃ vedayitaṃ saññaṃ viññāṇaṃ yañ ca sankhataṃ n’ eso ‘ham asmi. Detailed discussions as to their nature see e.g. SN iii.101 (= Vb 1

61) SN iii.47; SN iii.86. As being comprised in each of the dhātus, viz. kăma˚; rūpa˚ arūpa-dhātu Vb 404 sq.

(a) As factors of existence (cp. bhava). Their rôle as such is illustrated by the famous simile: “yathā hi angasambhārā hoti saddo ratho iti evaṃ khandhesu santesu hoti satto ti sammuti” “just as it is by the condition precedent of the co-existence of its various parts, that the word ʻchariotʼ is used, just so it is that when the skandhas are there, we talk of a ʻbeingʼ” (Rh. D. (cp. Hardy, Man. Buddh. p. 425) SN i.135 = Mil 28 Their connotation “khandha” is discussed at SN iii.101 = MN iii.16: “kittāvatā nu kho khandhānaṃ khandhâdhivacanaṃ rūpaṃ (etc.) atītânāgatapaccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṃ,” etc.: i.e. material qualities are equivalent terms for the kh. What causes the manifestation of each kh.? cattāro mahābhūtā… paccayo rūpa-khandhassa paññāpanāya; phasso… vedana˚, saññā˚, sankhārā˚, etc. nāmarūpaṃ… viññāṇa˚: the material elements are the cause of rūpa, touch is that of vedanā, saññā sankhārā, name and shape that of viññāṇa (S iii.101); cp. MN i.138 sq., 234 sq. On the same principle rests their division in: rūpa-kāyo rūpakkhandho nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā “the material body forms the material factor (of existence), the individualized body the 4 immaterial factors” Ne 41; the rūpakkhandha only is kāmadhātu-pariyāpanno: Vb 409 the 4 arūpino kh˚ discussed at Pts ii.74, also at Vb 230 Vb 407 sq. (grouped with what is apariyāpanna)-Being the “substantial” factors of existence, birth & death depend on the khandhas. They appear in every new conjuncture of individuality concerning their function in this paṭisandhi-kkhaṇe; see Pts ii.72

76. Thus the var phases of life in transmigration are defined as-(jāti: ya tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi satta-nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo āyatanānaṃ paṭilābho Nd ii.on Snp 1052; cp. jāti dvīhi khandhehi sangahitā ti Vv-a 29; khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo jāti SN ii.3; Ne 29; khandhānaṃ nibbatti jāti Vism 199 ■ (maraṇaṃ: ) yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ… cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṃ maccu maraṇaṃ kālakiriyā khandhānaṃ bhedo kalevarassa nikkhepo MN i.49 = Vb 137 = SN ii.3, SN ii.42 ■ vivaṭṭa-kkhandha (adj.) one whose khandhas have revolved (passed away) i.e. dead SN i.121 = SN iii.123 ■ kh˚anaṃ udaya-vyaya (or udayabbaya) the rising and passing of the kh., transmigration Dhp 374 = Thag 23, Thag 379 = Iti 120 = Kp-a 82; Pts i.54 sq ■ (b) Their relation to attachment and craving (kāma): sattisūlûpamā kāmā khandhānaṃ adhikuṭṭanā SN i.128 = Thig 58, Thig 141 (Thag-a 65: natthi tesaṃ adhik˚?); craving is their cause & soil: hetupaṭicca sambhūtā kh. SN i.134; the 4 arūpino kh. are based on lobha, dosa, moha Vb 208. -(c) their annihilation: the kh. remain as long as the knowledge of their true character is not attained, i.e. of their cause & removal: yaṃ rūpaṃ, etc.… n’ etaṃ mama n’ eso ‘haṃ asmi na m’ eso attā ti; evaṃ etaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya passati; evaṃ kho jānato passato… ahankāramamankāra-mānânusayā na hontī ti SN iii.103-pañca-kkhandhe pariññāya SN iii.83; pañca-kkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā Thig 106. See also SN i.134 ■ (d) their relation to dhātu (the physical elements) and āyatana (the elements of sense-perception) is close, since they are all dependent on sensory experience. The 5 khandhas are frequently mentioned with the 18 dhātuyo & the 12 āyatanāni: khandhā ca dh˚ cha ca āyatanā ime hetuṃ paṭicca sambhūtā hetubhangā nirujjhare SN i.134; kh˚-dh˚-āyatanaṃ sankhataṃ jātimūlaṃ Thig 472; dhammaṃ adesesi khandh’ āyatana-dhātuyo Thig 43 (cp. Thag-a 49). Enumerated under sabba-dhammā Pts i.101 = Pts ii.230; under dhammā (states) Dhs 121, as lokuttara-kkhandhā, etc. Dhs 358 Dhs 528, Dhs 552 ■ khandhānaṃ khandhaṭṭho abhiññeyyo dhātūnaṃ dhātuṭṭho, etc. Pts i.17; cp. i.132; ii.121, 157 In def. of kāmâvacarā bhūmi Pts i.83. In def. of dukkha and its recognition Ne 57. In def. of arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd ii.on sankhāta-dhammā (“kh sankhātā,” etc.), on tiṇṇa (“khandha-(etc.) pariyante thitā”), & passim ■ (e); their valuation & their bearing on the “soul”-conception is described in the terms of na mama (na tumhākaṃ), anattā, aniccaṃ and dukkhaṃ (cp. upādānakkh˚ infra and rūpa) rūpaṃ (etc.)… aniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ, n’ eso ‘ham asmi, n ‘eso me attā “material qualities (etc. kh. 2

5) are evanescent bad, I am not this body, this body is not my soul” Vin i.14 = SN iv.382. n’ eso ‘ham asmi na m’ eso attā SN i.112; SN iii.103, SN iii.130 & passim; cp. kāyo na tumhākaṃ (anattā rūpaṃ) SN ii.65; Nd ii.680; and rūpaṃ na tumhākaṃ SN iii.33; MN i.140 = Nd ii.680 ■ rūpaṃ etc. as anattā: Vin i.13; SN iii.78, SN iii.132

134; AN i.284 AN ii.171; AN ii.202; cp. SN iii.101; Vin i.14 ■ as aniccaṃ SN iii.41, SN iii.52, SN iii.102, SN iii.122, SN iii.132 sq., 181 sq., 195 sq., 202

224 227; AN iv.147 (aniccânupassī dukkhânupassī); anicca dukkha roga, etc., Pts ii.238 sq.; Vb 324.

2. Specified as panc’ upādāna-kkhandhā the factors of the fivefold clinging to existence. Defined & discussed in detail (rūpûpadāna-kkhandha, etc.) SN iii.47; SN iii.86

88; also Vin i.10; SN iii.127 sq. Specified SN iii.58 SN iii.100 = MN iii.16; SN iii.114, SN iii.158 sq.; SN v.52, SN v.60; AN iv.458; Vism 443 sq (in ch. xiv: Khandha-niddesa), 611 sq. (judged aniccato etc.) ■ Mentioned as a set exemplifying the number 5 Kp iii.; Pts i.22, Pts i.122. Enumerated in var. connections SN i.112; DN iii.233; MN i.190; AN v.52; Kp iv. (expld Kp-a 82 = AN v.52); Mil 12 (var. references concerning the discussion of the kh. in the Abhidhamma) ■ What is said of the khandhas alone-see above 1 (a)-(e)-is equally applied to them in connection with upādāna. (a) As regards their origin they are characterized as chandamūlakā “rooted in desire, or in wilful desire” SN iii.100; cp. yo kho… pañcas’ upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo taṃ tattha upādānaṃ ti MN i.300, MN i.511. Therefore the foll. attributes are characteristic: kummo pañcann’ etaṃ upād˚ ānaṃ adhivacanaṃ MN i.144; bhārā have pañcakkh˚ā SN iii.26 pañcavadhakā paccatthikā pañcann’… adhivacanaṃ SN iv.174; pañc’ upād˚… sakkāyo vutto MN i.299; SN iv.259 ■ (b) their contemplation leads to the recognition of their character as dukkha, anicca, anattā: na kiñci attānaṃ vā attaniyaṃ vā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu SN iii.128; rogato, etc.… manasikātabbā pañc˚ SN iii.167; pañcasu upād˚esu aniccânupassī “realizing the evanescence in the 5 aggregates of attachment” AN v.109; same with udayavyayânupassī SN iii.130; AN ii.45, AN ii.90; AN iii.32; AN iv.153; and dhammânupassī MN i.61. Out of which realization follows their gradual destruction: pañc’… khandhānaṃ samudayo atthangamo assādo, etc. SN iii.31, SN iii.160 sq.; AN ii.45, AN ii.90 AN iv.153; Nd ii.under sankhārā. That they occupy a prominent position as determinants of dukkha is evident from their rôle in the exposition of dukkha as the first one of the noble truths: sankhittena pañc’upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā “in short, the 5 kh. are associated with pain Vin i.10 = MN i.48 = AN i.177 = SN v.421; Pts i.37, Pts i.39 Vb 101 & passim; cp. katamaṃ dukkham ariyasaccaṃ pañc’upād˚ ā tissa vacanīyaṃ, seyyathīdaṃ… SN iii.158 = SN v.425; khandhādisā dukkhā Dhp 202 (expl. Dhp-a iii.261).

3. Separately mentioned: khandhā as tayo arūpino kh˚ (ved˚, sañña˚, sankh˚) Dhp-a i.22; viññāṇa-kh˚ (the skandha of discriminative consciousness) in Def. of manas: manindriyaṃ viññāṇaṃ viññ˚-khandho tajjā manoviññāṇadhātu Nd ii.on Snp 1142 = Dhs 68.

-ādhivacana having kh. as attribute (see above SN iii.101 = MN iii.16; -āvāra a camp, either (1) fortified (with niveseti) or (2) not (with bandhāpeti), esp. in the latter meaning w. ref. to a halting place of a caravan (= khandhāvāra?) (1) Ja iv.151; Ja v.162; Dhp-a i.193, Dhp-a i.199. (2) Ja i.101, Ja i.332; Pv-a 113; Dhp-a ii.79. Said of a hermitage Ja v.35 ■ fig. in sīla-khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā “to settle in the camp of good conduct” DN-a i.244-ja (adj.-n.) sprung from the trunk (of the tree), i.e. a growth or parasite SN i.207 = Snp 272, expl. at Snp-a 304 khandhesu jātā khandha-jā, pārohānam etaṃ adhivacanaṃ -niddesa disquisition about the khandhas Vism (ch. xiv esp.) 482, 485, 492, 509, 558, 389. -paṭipāṭi succession of khandhas Vism 411 sq. -paritta protective spell as regards the khandhas (as Name of a Suttanta) Vism 414. -bīja “trunk seed” as one kind of var. seeds, with mūla˚ phaḷu˚ agga˚ bīja˚ at Vin v.132, & DN i.5, expld. DN-a i.81: nāma assattho nigrodho pilakkho udumbaro kacchako kapitthano ti evam-ādi -rasa taste of the stem, one of various tastes, as mūla khandha˚ taca˚ patta˚ puppha˚, etc. Dhs 629 = Nd ii.540. -loka the world of sensory aggregates, with dhātu-and āyatanaloka Pts i.122. -vibhaṅga division dealing with the khandhas (i.e. Vibh. 1 sq.) Mil 12 -santāna duration of the khandhas Vism 414.

Sk. skandha

Khandhaka

division, chapter, esp. in the Vinaya (at end of each division we find usually the postscript: so & so khandhakaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ “here ends the chapter of… ”); in cpd. ˚vatta, i.e. duties or observances specified in the v. khandha or chapter of the Vinaya which deals with these duties Vism 12, Vism 101 (cp. Vin ii.231), 188.

fr. khandha

Khandhiman

(adj.) having a (big) trunk, of a tree AN iii.43.

Khama

(adj.) (a) patient, forgiving. (b) enduring, bearing, hardened to (frost & heat, e.g. ), fit for ■ (a) kh. belongs to the lovable attributes of a bhikkhu (kh. rūpānaṃ, saddānaṃ, etc.; indulgent as regards sights, sounds, etc.) AN iii.113 = AN iii.138; the same applied to the king’s horse AN iii.282. Khamā paṭipadā the way of gentleness (and opp. akkhamā), viz. akkosantaṃ na paccakosati “not to shout back at him who shouts at you” AN ii.152 sq.; cp. Ne 77; classified under the four paṭipadā at DN iii.229. In combn. w vacana of meek, gentle speech, in vattā vacana˚ a speaker of good & meek words SN i.63; SN ii.282; Mil 380 cp. suvaco khamo AN v.24 sq., forgiving: Mil 207. (b) khamo sītassa uṇhassa, etc., enduring frost & heat AN iii.389 = AN v.132; addhāna˚ padhāna˚ (fit for) AN iii.30 ranga˚, anuyoga˚, vimajjana˚ MN i.385akkhama (adj.) impatient, intolerant, in combn dubbaca dovacassa karaṇehi dhammehi samannāgata SN ii.204 sq. AN ii.147 sq. With ref. to rūpa, saddā, etc. (see also above), of an elephant AN iii.156 sq ■ DN iii.229; Sdhp 95.

fr. kṣam

Khamati

1. to be patient, to endure, to forgive (acc. of object and geName of person): n’ âhaṃ bhayā khamāmi Vepacittino (not do I forgive V. out of fear) SN i.221 SN i.222; aparādhaṃ kh. to forgive a fault Ja iii.394. khamatha forgive Dhp-a ii.254; khamatha me pardon me Mil 13; Dhp-a i.40.

2. (impers.) to be fit, to seem good; esp. in phrase yathā te khameyya “as may seem good to you; if you please” DN i.60, DN i.108; MN i.487 sabbaṃ me na khamati “I do not approve of” MN i.497 sq.; na khamati “it is not right” DN ii.67.

3. to be fit for, to indulge in, to approve of, in nijjhānaṃ khamanti MN i.133, MN i.480; cp. diṭṭhi-nijjhāna-kkhanti MN i.480 & AN i.189 ■ ppr. med. khamamāna Vin i.281 (uppaḍḍhakāsinaṃ kh˚) fit for, allowing of, worth, cp Bdhgh. note Vin Texts i.195 ■ grd. khamanīya to be allayed, becoming better (of a disease) Vin i.204; DN ii.99 ■ caus. khamāpeti to pacify, to ask one’s pardon, to apologize (to = acc.) Ja i.267; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 195; Dhp-a i.38, Dhp-a i.39; Dhp-a ii.75, Dhp-a ii.254 ■ to ask permission or leave (i.e. to say good-bye) Dhp-a i.14.

Dhtp 218: sahane, cp. Sk. kṣamate, perhaps to Lat. humus, cp. Sk. kṣāh, kṣāman soil; Gr. ξχών, ξαμαι

Khamana

(nt.) long-suffering Mil 351; bearing, suffering Sdhp 202; and a˚ intolerance Bdhd 24.

Khamanatā

(f.) forbearance and a˚ intolerance, harshness both as syName of khanti & akkhanti Dhs 1342 Vb 360.;

Khamā

(f.) (a) patience, endurance. (b) the earth (cp. chamā & see khamati) Ja iv.8 (v.l. B. chamāya).

fr. ksam

Khamāpanā

(f.) asking for pardon Ja iv.389.

abstr. fr. khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati

Khambha

1. prop, support, in; ˚kata “making a prop,” i.e. with his arms akimbo Vin ii.213 = Vin iv.188.

2. obstruction, stiffening, paralysis in ūru˚ “stiffening of the thigh” MN i.237 (through pain); Ja v.23 (through fear). See also chambheti thambha.;

Sk. khambha & sthambha

Khambheti

1. to prop, to support Thig 28 (but expl. at Thag-a 35 by vi˚, obstruct)

2. to obstruct, to put out, in pp khambhita (= vi˚) Nd ii.220, where it explains khitta. ger. khambhiya: see vi˚.

Caus. fr. prec ■ Sk. skambh, skabhnāti

Khaya

waste, destruction, consumption decay, ruin, loss; of the passing away of night Vv-a 52 mostly in applied meaning with ref. to the extinction of passions & such elements as condition, life, & rebirth e.g. āsavānaṃ kh. Iti 103 sq., esp. in formula āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ upasampajja AN i.107 AN i.221 = DN iii.78, DN iii.108, DN iii.132 = Iti 100 and passim ■ rāgassa dosassa, mohassa kh. MN i.5; AN i.299, cp. rāga˚, dosa˚ moha˚, AN i.159; dosa˚ SN iii.160, SN iii.191; SN iv.250 ■ taṇhānaṃ kh. Dhp 154; sankhārānaṃ kh. Dh. 383; sabbamaññitānaṃ etc. MN i.486; āyu˚, puñña˚ Vism 502-yo dukkhassa pajānāti idh’ eva khayaṃ attano Snp 626 = Dhp 402; khayaṃ virāgaṃ amataṃ paṇītaṃ Snp 225-In exegesis of rūpassa aniccatā: rūpassa khayo vayo bhedo Dhs 645 = Dhs 738 = Dhs 872 ■ See also khīṇa and the foll. cpds. s. v.: āyu˚, upadhi˚, upādāna˚, jāti˚, jīvita˚ taṇha˚, dukkha˚, puñña˚, bhava˚, loka˚, saṃyojana sabbadhamma˚, samudda˚.

-ātīta (a) gone beyond, recovered from the waning period (of chanda, the moon = the new moon) Snp 598 -ānupassin (a) realizing the fact of decay AN iv.146 sq.v.359 (+ vayânupassin); -ñāṇa knowledge of the fact of decay MN ii.38 = Pp 60; in the same sense khaye ñāṇa Ne 15, Ne 54, Ne 59, Ne 127, Ne 191, cp. kvu 230 sq.; -dhamma the law of decay AN iii.54; Pts i.53, Pts i.76, Pts i.78.

Sk. kṣaya to kṣi, kṣiṇoti & kṣiṇāti; cp. Lat. situs withering, Gr. φχίσις, φχίνω, φχίω wasting. See also khepeti under khipati

Khara1

1. (adj.) rough, hard, sharp; painful DN ii.127 (ābādha); Ja iii.26 (vedanā) Mil 26 (+ sakkhara-kaṭhala-vālikā), Pv-a 152 (loma, shaggy hair; cp. Np. Khara-loma-yakkha Vism 208) ■ ˚ka khara rough, stony Pv-a 265 (= thaṇḍila).

2. (m.) a donkey, a mule, in -putta, nickname of a horse Ja iii.278.

3. a saw Ja ii.230 (= kakaca C.); vi.261.

-ājina a rough skin, as garment of an ascetic Snp 249 (= kharāni ajina-cammāni Snp-a 291); Pp 56; -gata of rough constitution Dhs 962; also as khari-gata MN i.185; Vism 349 (= pharusa). -mukha a conch Ja vi.580. -ssara of rough sound SN ii.128.

cp. Sk. khara

Khara2

water Ja iii.282.

Sk. kṣara

Kharatta

(nt.) roughness AN i.54; Pv-a 90 (in expln of pharusa).

fr. khara

Khala

1. corn ready for threshing, the threshing floor Nd ii.587; Vism 120; DN-a i.203 (khalaṃ sodheti).

2. threshing, mash, in ekamaṃsa-khalaṃ karoti “to reduce to one mash of flesh” DN i.52 = MN i.377 (+ maṃsa-puñja; DN-a i.160 = maṃsa-rāsi).

-agga the best corn for threshing Dhp-a i.98; Dhp-a iv.98 -kāla the time for threshing Dhp-a iv.98; -bhaṇḍ’agga the best agricultural implement for threshing Dhp-a i.98; Dhp-a iv.98; -bhaṇḍa-kāla the time for the application of the latter Dhp-a iv.98; -maṇḍala a threshing-floor Vism 123; Dhp-a i.266 (˚matta, as large as… ).

cp. Sk. khala

Khalaṅka

in -pāda at Ja vi.3 should probably be read kalanka˚ (q.v.).

Khalati

to stumble; ger. khalitvā Thag 45; Mil 187; pp. khalita q.v. Cp. upa˚, pa˚.

Dhtp 260: kampane; Dhtm 375: sañcalane; cp. Sk. skhalati, cp. Gr. σφάλλω to bring to fall, to fail

Khali

a paste Vin ii.321 (:Bdhgh. on C.V. vi.3, 1 for madda).

Khalika

(or khalikā f.) a dice-board, in khalikāya kīḷanti to play at dice (see illustr. in Rh. D. Buddh. India p. 77; Vin ii.10; cp. DN i.6 (in enumn of various amusements expl. at DN-a i.85 by jūta-khalika pāsaka-kīḷanaṃ). See also kali.

Khalita1

bald-headed AN i.138 (+ vilūna); Thig 255 (= vilūnakesa Thag-a 210).

Sk. khalati = Lat. calvus, bald; cp. khallāṭa

Khalita2

(adj. & n.) 1. faltering, stumbling wrong-doing, failure AN i.198; Nd i.300; Thig 261; Dhp-a iii.196 (of the voice; Thag-a 211 = pakkhalita) Ja i.78; Mil 94, Mil 408.

2. disturbed, treated badly Ja vi.375akhalita undisturbed Thag 512.

pp. med. of khalati, cp. Dhtp 611; Dhtm 406 khala = soceyye

Khalu

either positive: indeed, surely, truly DN i.87; Snp p.103; Ja iv.391 (as khaḷu); Mvu vii.17; or negative: indeed not Vism 60 (= paṭisedhan’ atthe nipāto). -pacchābhattika (adj.) = na p˚: a person who refuses food offered to him after the normal time Vin v.131 = Vin v.193; Pp 69 Vism 61. See Com. quot. by Childers, p. 310.

indecl., usually contracted to kho, q.v.

Khaluṅka

only appld to a horse shaking, a shaker, racer (esp. as java AN i.287), fig. of purisa at Anguttara passages. Described as bold and hard to manage AN iv.190 sq.; as a horse which cannot be trusted and is inferior to an ājānīya (a thoroughbred AN v.166. Three kinds at AN i.287 sq. = AN iv.397 sq. In expl. of vaḷavā (mare) at Ja i.180 = sindhavakule ajāto khalunk’asso; as vaḷavā khaḷunkā Ja i.184 ■ Der khaluṅkatā in a˚, not shaking, steadiness Vv-a 278.

adj. fr. khala in caus. sense of khaleti, to shake. In formation = khalanga → khalanka → khalunka, cp kulūpaka for kulūpaga

Khaleti

lit. to wash (cp. pakkhāleti), slang for “to treat badly,” “to give a rubbing or thrashing (exact meaning problematic); only at Ja iv.205 = Ja iv.382: gale gahetvā khalayātha jammaṃ “take the rascal by the throat and thrash him” (Com. khalayātha khalīkāraṃ (i.e. a “rub,” kind of punishment pāpetvā niddhamatha = give him a thrashing & throw him out. v.l. at both passages is galayātha).;

Sk. kṣālayati of kṣal ?

Khallaka

in baddhā upāhanāyo shoes with heel-coverings (?) Vin i.186 (see Bdhgh. note on it Vin Texts ii.15). Also as khalla- baddhâdibhedaṃ upāhanaṃ at Pv-a 127 in expln of upāhana. Kern (Toev. s. v.) sees in it a kind of stuff or material.

Khallāta

bald, in -sīsa a bald head Dhp-a i.309. Der. khallātiya baldness, in khallātiyapetī the bald-headed Petī Pv-a 46 (where spelled khalātiya) and 67.

Sk. khalvāta, cp. khalita

Khallika

only at SN v.421; cp. SN iv.330 (Dhammacakka-p-Sutta). It is a misreading. Read with Oldenberg Vin i.10, kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyoga (devotion to the passions, to the pleasures of sense). See kāmasukha and allika.

Khaḷopī

a pot, usually with kumbhī: DN i.167 (-mukha + kumbhi-mukha); Pp 55; Mil 107.

and khalopi, also kalopī, q.v. Cp. Trenckner Notes, p. 60, possibly = karoṭi

Khāṇu

a stump (of a tree), a stake. Often used in description of uneven roads; together with kaṇṭaka thorns AN i.35; AN iii.389; Vism 261 (˚paharaṇ’ aggi), 342 (˚magga); Snp-a 334 ■ jhāma˚ a burnt stump (as characteristic of kālaka) SN iv.193 ■ nikhāta˚ an uprooted trunk DN-a i.73. Khāṇu-kondañña Name of a Thera Vism 380; Dhp-a ii.254.

also often spelled khānu; prob. = Sk. sthāṇu, corrupted in etym. with khaṇati, cp. Trenckner, Notes 58, n. 6

Khāṇuka

= khāṇu SN v.379 (avihata˚): Ja ii.18, Ja ii.154; Ja v.45 (loha-daṇḍa-kh˚ pins & stakes of brass); Mil 187 (mūle vā khāṇuke vā… khalitvā stumbling over roots stumps); Vism 381 = Dhp-a ii.254 (with ref. to the name of Khāṇu-kondañña who by robbers was mistaken for a tree stump); Vv-a 338 (in a road = sankuka).

Khāta

(adj.) dug DN-a i.274 (= ukkiṇṇa), a˚ not dug Mil 351 (˚taḷāka). Cp atikhāta Ja ii.296.

Sk. khāta; pp. of khan

Khāda

(nt.) eating, in -kāraṇa the reason of eating… Pv-a 37.

Khādaka

(adj.) eating (nt.) Vism 479; eating, living on (adj ■ ˚), an eater Ja iv.307; Pv-a 44; lohita-maṃsa˚ (of Yakkhas) Ja i.133, Ja i.266; camma˚ Ja i.176; gūtha˚ (of a Peta) Pv-a 266.

Khādati

to chew, bite, eat devour (= Ger. fressen); to destroy ■ Pres. Dhp 240; Ja i.152 (sassāni); iii.26; Pv i.63 (puttāni, of a Petī) i.94 ■ kaṭṭhaṃ kh˚ to use a toothpick Ja i.80, Ja i.282, dante kh˚ to gnash the teeth Ja i.161 ■ santakaṃ kh to consume one’s property Dhs-a 135 ■ of beasts, e.g. Snp 201, Snp 675Pot. khādeyya Ja iii.26Imper. khāda Ja i.150 (maṃsaṃ); ii.128 (khādaniyaṃ); vi.367 (pūvaṃ); Pv-a 39, Pv-a 78Part. pres. khādanto Ja i.61 Ja iii.276Fut. khādissati Ja i.221; Ja ii.129Aor. khādiṃsu Pv-a 20Pass. ppr. khādiyamāna (cp khajjati) Pv-a 69 (taṇhāya) (expl. of khajjamāna). Inf. khādituṃ Ja i.222; Ja ii.153; Dhp-a iv.226Ger. khāditvā Ja i.266, Ja i.278 (phalāni); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 32 (devour) poetical khādiyā Ja v.464 (= khāditvā) ■ Grd. khāditabba Ja iii.52, and khādaniya (q.v.) ■ Pp. khādita (q.v.). Cp. pali˚.

Dhtp 155 “khāda bhakkhane”; cp. Sk. khādati, cp. Gr. κνώδων the barbed hook of a javelin, i.e. “the biter”; Lith. kándu to bite

Khādana

(nt.) the act of eating (or being eaten) Pv-a 158 ■ adj. f. khādanī the eater Dpvs 238; khādana at Ja ii.405 is to be read as ni˚ (q.v.). Cp. vi˚.

Khādaniya

hard or solid food, opp. to and freq, combd with bhojaniya (q.v.). So at DN ii.127; Ja i.90, Ja i.235; Ja iii.127; Sn. p 110; Mil 9, Mil 11 ■ Also in combn anna, pāna, kh˚ Snp 924 ii.49. By itself Ja iii.276 ■ piṭṭha˚ pastry Vin i.248.

grd. of khādati; also as khādanīya

Khādā

(f.) food, in rāja˚ royal food Snp 831 (rājakhādāya puṭṭho = rājakhādanīyena rājabhojanīyena posito Nd i.171; where printed ˚khadāya throughout).

Khādāpana

causing to be eaten (kind of punishment) Mil 197 (sunakhehi).

fr. khādāpeti

Khādāpeti

(Caus. ii. of khādati] to make eat Ja iii.370; Ja vi.335.

Khādika

= khādaka, in aññamañña˚ SN v.456.

Khādita

(adj.) eaten, or having eaten, eaten up, consumed Ja i.223; Ja ii.154; Pv-a 5 ■ A twin form of khādita is khāyita, formed prob. on analogy of sāyita, with which freq. combined (cp., however, Trenckner P.M. 57), e.g. Pp 59; Vism 258; Pv-a 25. Used as the poetical form Pv i.1211 (expl. Pv-a 158 = khādita) ■ Der. khāditatta (nt.) the fact of being eaten Ja i.176.

- ṭṭhāna the eating place, place of feeding Ja v.447.

pp. med. & pass. of khādati

Khādin

, f. khādinī = khādaka Pv-a 31.

Khāyati

to seem to be, to appear like (viya) Ja i.279; aor. khāyiṃsu Ja i.61; ppr med. khāyamāna Ja iv.140; Pv-a 251. Cp. pakkhāyati.

pass. = Sk. khyāyate, khyā

Khāyita

see khādita; cp. avakkhāyika.

Khāra

any alkaline substance, potash, lye. In combn with ūsa (salt earth) at SN iii.131 (-gandha) AN i.209 ■ Used as a caustic Pv iii.102; Sdhp 281. See also chārikā.

-āpatacchika a means of torturing, in enumn of var tortures (under vividha-kamma-kāranā kārenti) MN i.87; AN i.48 = AN ii.122 = Nd ii.604; Ja vi.17 (v.l. ˚ṭicch˚; C. has āpatacchika, v.l. paṭicchaka); Vism 500; Mil 197 Both A & Nd have v.l. kharāpaṭicchaka; -odaka an alkaline solution Vism 264, Vism 420; Dhp-a i.189; Pv-a 213 cp. khārodikā nadī (in Niraya) Sdhp 194.

Sk. kṣāra, pungent, saline, sharp to ksā, kṣāyati to burn, cp. Gr. ςηρός, dry; Lat. serenus, dry, clear seresco to dry

Khāraka

(adj.) sharp or dry, said of the buds of the Pāricchattaka AN iv.117 sq.

fr. khāra

Khārī

(f.) a certain measure of capacity (esp. of grain, see below khārika). It is used of the eight requisites of an ascetic, and often in conn. with his yoke (kāja): “a khārī-load.”

-kāja Vin i.33 (cp. Vin Texts i.132); Ja v.204. -bhaṇḍa Dhp-a iii.243 (:kahaṃ te kh-bh˚ ko pabbajita parikkhāro) -bhāra a shoulder-yoke SN i.169; Ja iii.83; -vidha = ˚kāja SN i.78 = Ud 65; DN i.101. At Ud and D passages it is read vividha, but DN-a i.269 makes it clear: khārī ti araṇi-kamaṇḍalu-sūcâdayo tāpasa-parikkhārā; vidho ti kāco, tasmā khāribharitaṃ kācam ādāyā ti attho As Kern (Toev. s. v.) points out, ˚vidha is a distortion of vivadha, which is synonymous with kāja.

and khāri-

Khārika1

alkaline, in enumn of tastes (cp. rasa) at SN iii.87; Dhs 629 and ≈.

adj. to khāra

Khārika2

of the khārī measure, in vīsati˚ kosalako tilavāho AN v.173 = Snp p.126.

adj. of khārī

Khāleti

Caus. of khalati: see khaleti & vikkhāleti.;

Khāhinti

at Thig 509 is to be read kāhinti (= karissanti Thag-a 293).

Khiḍḍā

play, amusement, pleasure usually combd with rati, enjoyment. Var. degrees of pleasures (bāla˚, etc.) mentioned at AN v.203; var kinds of amusement enumerated at Nd ii.219; as expounded at DN i.6 under jūta-pamādaṭṭhāna. Generally divided into kāyikā & vācasikā khiḍḍā (Nd;2; Snp-a 86) Expl. as kīḷanā Snp-a 86, as hassādhippāya (means of mirth) Pv-a 226; sahāyakādīhi keḷi Pv-a 265. Cp Snp 926; Pv iv.121.

-dasaka “the decad of play,” i.e. the second 10 years of man’s life, fr. 11–⁠20 years of age Vism 619. -padosika corrupted by pleasures DN i.19, DN i.20 = DN-a i.113 (v.l. padūsika); -rati play & enjoyment Snp 41, Snp 59; Vv 1612 327; Pv iv.72; Vism 619.

Vedic krīḍā, cp. kīḷati

Khitta

thrown; cast, overthrown Dhp 34; rajo paṭivātaṃ kh˚, dirt thrown against the wind SN i.13, SN i.164 = Snp 662 = Dhp 125; Ja iii.203; ratti-khittā sarā arrows shot in the night Dhp 304 = Ne 11; acchi vātavegena khittā a flame overthrown by the power of the wind, blown out Snp 1074 (expld Nd ii.220 by ukkhittā nuṇṇā, khambhitā) in interpret. of khetta Pv-a 7 said of sowing: khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ ■ akkhitta not upset, not deranged, undisturbed in qualities required of a brahmin w. ref. to his genealogy: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto DN i.113 = Snp p.115, etc. Cp. vi˚.

-citta (a) one whose mind is thrown over, upset, unhinged usually combd with ummattaka, out of one’s mind Vin i.131, Vin i.321; Vin ii.64, etc.; Sdhp 88. Cp. citta-kkhepa.

pp. of khip, to throw Dhtp 479; peraṇe

Khipa

(nt.) a throw, anything thrown over, as ajina˚ a cloak of antelope hide DN i.167 and ≈; or thrown out, as a fishing net (= kumina) eel-basket AN i.33 = AN i.287 Thig 357 (= Thag-a 243). Cp. khippa & vikkhepika.;

fr. ksip

Khipati

to throw, to cast, to throw out or forth, to upset Snp p.32 (cittaṃ); Ja i.223 (sīsaṃ). 290 (pāsake); ii.3 (daḷhaṃ dalhassa: to pit force against force)-aor. khipi SN iv.2, SN iv.3 (khuracakkaṃ); Pv-a 87 (= atthāresi) ■ ger. khipitvā Ja i.2021st caus. khepeti (perhaps to kṣi, see khaya) to throw in, to put in, to spend (of time): dīgham addhānaṃ khepetvā Ja i.137; Thig 168 (khepeti jātisaṃsāraṃ = pariyosāpeti Thag-a 159); Dhp-a i.102 (dvenavuti-kappe khepesuṃ) āyuṃ khepehi spend (the rest of) your life Pv-a 148 ger. khepayitvāna (saṃsāraṃ) Pv iv.332 (= khepetvā Pv-a 254). In this sense Trenckner (P. M. 76) takes it as corresponding to Sk. kṣāpayati of kṣi = to cause to waste. See also khepana.

2nd caus. khipāpeti to cause to be thrown Ja i.202; Ja iv.139 (jalaṃ). Cp also khepa.

Vedic kṣipati

Khipana

(nt.) the act of throwing or the state of being thrown Ja i.290 (pasaka-k˚).

Khipanā

(f.) throwing up, provocation, mockery, slander Mil 357; Vb 352; cp. Vism 29.

fr. khipati

Khipita

(nt.) sneezing expectoration Pv ii.23 (expl. Pv-a 80: mukhato nikkhantamala); Dhp-a i.314 (˚roga + kāsa, coughing).

-sadda the sound of expectorations DN i.50; Dhp-a i.250.

pp. of khipati = that which is thrown out; acc. to Trenckner Notes p. 75 for khupita fr. kṣu to sneeze; possibly a contamination of the two

Khippa

(adj.): 1. quick, lit. in the way of throwing (cp. “like a shot”) Snp 350 (of vacana = lahu Snp-a).

2. a sort of fishing net or eel-basket (cp. khipa & Sk. kṣepaṇī) SN i.74 ■ nt. adv. khippaṃ quickly AN ii.118 = AN iii.164; Snp 413, Snp 682, Snp 998; Dhp 65, Dhp 137 Dhp 236, Dhp 289; Ja iv.142; Pv ii.84, 92, 1221, Pp 32 ■ Compar khippatara Snp p.126.

-ābhiññā quick intuition (opp. dandh˚; ) DN iii.106; Dhs 177; Ne 7, Ne 24, Ne 50, Ne 77, Ne 112 sq.; 123 sq.; Vism 138.

Vedic kṣipra to kṣip

Khippati

to ill-treat, in ppr. khippamāna Vv 8444, expld at Vv-a 348 by vambhento, pīḷanto.

fr. kṣip

Khila

(m. nt.) waste or fallow land AN iii.248; fig. barrenness of mind, mental obstruction. There are five ceto-khilā enumd in detail at MN i.101 = AN iv.460; DN iii.238 (see under ceto); mentioned AN v.17; Snp-a 262 As three khilā, viz. rāga, dosa, moha at SN v.57; also with other qualities at Nd ii.9. In combn with paligha SN i.27 (chetvā kh˚ ṃ); khilaṃ pabhindati to break up the fallowness (of one’s heart) SN i.193; SN iii.134; Snp 973. akhila (adj.) not fallow, unobstructed, open-hearted cittaṃ susamāhitaṃ… akhilaṃ sabbabhūtesu Dii.261; SN iv.118; in combn with anāsava Snp 212; with akankha Snp 477, Snp 1059; with vivattacchada Snp 1147; cp. vigatakhila Snp 19.

cp. Sk. khila

Khiḷa

hard skin, callosity Ja v.204 (v.l. kiṇa).

cp. Sk. kiṇa

Khīṇa

destroyed, exhausted, removed, wasted, gone; in cpds. ˚-often to be translated “without.” It is mostly applied to the destruction of the passions (āsavā) & demerit (kamma). Khīṇā jāti “destroyed is the possibility of rebirth,” in freq. occurring formula “kh. j vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ nâparaṃ itthattāya,” denoting the attainment of Arahantship (See arahant ii, formula A) Vin i.35; DN i.84, DN i.177, DN i.203; MN ii.39; Snp p.16; Pp 61 etc. See expln at DN-a i.225; Snp-a 138 ■ khīṇaṃ mayhaṃ kammaṃ Ja iv.3, similarly khīṇaṃ purāṇaṃ navaṃ natthi sambhavaṃ Snp 235 (khīṇa = samucchinna Kp-a 194); pāpakamme khīṇe Pv-a 105. āsavakhīṇa one whose cravings are destroyed Snp 370, cp. 162.

-āsava (adj.) whose mind is free from the four mental obsessions, Ep. of an Arahant Vin i.183; MN i.145 MN ii.43; MN iii.30; DN iii.97, DN iii.133, DN iii.235; Iti 95; Snp 82, Snp 471, Snp 539 Snp 644; Dhp 89, Dhp 420; Pv-a 7 (= arahanto); cp. BSk kṣīṇāśrava Divy 542 ■ The seven powers of a kh.˚ (khīṇāsava-balāni) discussed at DN iii.283; Pts i.35; ten powers at Pts ii.173, Pts ii.176; cp. Vism 144 (where a kh. walks through the air). -punabbhava one in whom the conditions of another existence have been destroyed (= khīṇāsava) Snp 514, Snp 656; -bīja one who is without the seed (of renewed existence) (= prec.) Snp 235 (= ucchinna-bīja Kp-a 194); -maccha without fish (of a lake) Dhp 155; -vyappatha without the way of (evil speech (vyapp˚ = vācāya patho; expl. Snp-a 204 as na pharusavāco) Snp 158; -sota with the stream gone, i.e. without water, in macche appodake kh˚ Snp 777.

pp. of khīyati, Pass. to khayati

Khīṇatta

(nt.) DN-a i.225 & khīṇatā (f.) Dhp-a iv.228, the fact of being destroyed.

Khīya

in -dhammaṃ āpajjati to fall into a state of mental depression Vin iv.151, Vin iv.154; AN iii.269 AN iv.374. See also remarks by Kern, Toev. s. v.

cp. khīyati2

Khīyati

to be exhausted, to waste away, to become dejected, to fall away from Vin iv.152; Ja i.290 (dhạna); Pv ii.942; 112; Pts i.94, Pts i.96 Pts ii.31 (āsavā); Bdhd 80 ■ ppr. khīyamāna Snp 434 Bdhd 19. aor. khīyi DN iii.93; grd. khīyitabba ibid see also khāya and khīyanaka. In phrase “ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti it seems to correspond to jhāyati2 [Sk. kṣāyati] and the meaning is “to become chafed or heated, to become vexed, angry; to take offence”; as evidenced by the combn with quâsi-synonyms ujjhāyati & vipāceti, both referring to a heated state, fig for anger (cp. kilissati). Thus at Vin ii.259 & passim See ujjhāyati for further refs.;

Sk. kṣīyate, pass. to khayati

Khīyanaka

(a) in combn with pācittiya a “falling away” offence (legal term denoting the falling away from a consent once given) (see khīya) Vin ii.94 Vin ii.100; Vin iv.38.

der. fr. khīya

Khīra

(nt.) milk, milky fluid, milky juice Vin i.243; Vin ii.301; MN i.343 sq. = AN ii.207 = Pp 56; AN ii.95 (in simile with dadhi, navanīta, sappi, sappi-maṇḍa) DN i.201; Dhp-a i.98; enumd with dadhi, etc., as one constituent of material food (kabalinkāro ähāro) at Dhs 646 = Dhs 740 = Dhs 875Ja iv.138 (mātu kh˚); 140; Dhp 71 = Ne 161; Mil 41; Pv-a 198 (= sneha, milky juice); Vv-a 75; Dhp-a i.98 (nirudaka kh˚, milk without water) ■ duddha-khīra one who has milked Snp 18.

-odaka (nt.) milk-water or milk & water lit. Ja ii.104 Ja ii.106; fig. in simile khīrodakībhūtā for a samaggā parisā “a congregation at harmony as milk and water blend AN i.70; SN iv.225 = MN i.207, MN i.398 = AN iii.67, AN iii.104; -odana (nt.) milk-rice (boiled) Vv3324 (= Vv-a 147). -gandha the smell of milk Ja vi.357. -ghaṭa a pot of milk Mil 48; -paka drinking milk; sucking (of a calf: vaccho mātari kh˚) Dhp 284 (v.l. khīra-pāna); Dhp-a iii.424 -paṇṇin (m.) Name of a tree the leaves of which contain a milky sap, Calotropis gigantea MN i.429; -matta having had his fill of milk, happy (of a babe) SN i.108; -mūla the price of milk; money with which to buy milk Dhp-a iv.217; -sāmin master of the milk (+ dhīrasāmin Bdhd 62.

Sk. kṣīra

Khīranikā

(f.) a milk-giving cow SN i.174.

Khīla

a stake, post, bolt, peg Vin ii.116 (khīlaṃ nikhanitvā digging in or erecting a post) SN iii.150 (kh˚ vā thambha vā); iv.200 (daḷha˚ a strong post, Ep. of satī); Mvu 29, Mvu 49ayo˚; an iron stake AN i.141; SN v.444; Nd ii.304iii; Snp 28 (nikhāta, erected) Snp-a 479. Cp. inda˚.

-ṭṭhāyi-ṭhita standing like a post (of a stubborn horse AN iv.192, AN iv.194.

Sk. kīla & khīla

Khīlaka

(adj.) having sticks or stumps (as obstacles), in a˚ unobstructed Ja v.203 (= akāca nikkaṇṭaka 206).

Khīḷana

scorn Mil 357.

der. fr. khīḷeti

Khīḷeti

to scorn, deride, only in combn hīḷita khīḷita garahita (pp.) Mil 229, Mil 288; cp. khīḷana.

to kīḷ or to khila ?

Khu

(-˚) is doubtful second part of iṅghāḷa˚; (q.v.).

Khuṃseti

to scold, to curse, to be angry at, to have spite against DN i.90, DN-a i.256 (= ghaṭṭeti); Vin iv.7; Snp-a 357; Dhp-a iv.38 ■ pp. khuṃsita Dhp-a ii.75.

kruś ? Dhtp 625: akkosane; cp. Müller P.G. 52

Khujja

(adj.) 1. humpbacked Ja v.426 (+ piṭhasappī); DN-a i.148 (in combn with vāmana kirāta); f. Dhp-a i.194, Dhp-a i.226.

2. small, inferior, in kh˚-rājā a smaller, subordinate king Sdhp 453.

either Sk kubja, of which khujja would be the older form (cp. Walde, Lat. Etym. Wtb. s. v. cubitum) or Sk. kṣudra (?) (so Müller, P.G. p. 52). See also the variant kujja & cp. kuṭṭa;2

Khuṇḍali

at Pv-a 162 (mā kh.) is to be read ukkaṇṭhi.

Khudā

hunger Snp 52 (+ pipāsā Nd;2 s. v. kh˚ vuccati chātako), 966; Pv i.64 (= jighacchā) ii.15 (+ taṇhā), 24; Pv-a 72. See khuppipāsā.

Sk. kṣudh & kṣudhā, also BSk. kṣud in kṣuttarṣa hunger & thirst Jtm p. 30

Khudda

(adj.) small, inferior, low; trifling, insignificant; na khuddaṃ samācare kiñci “he shall not pursue anything trifling” Snp 145 (= lāmakaṃ Kp-a 243) kh˚ ca bālaṃ Snp 318. Opp. to strong Vv 3210 (of migā balavasena nihīnā Vv-a 136).

-ānukhuddaka, in ˚āni sikkhāpadāni the minor observances of discipline, the lesser & minor precepts Vin ii.287 = DN ii.154; Vin iv.143; AN i.233; cp. Divy 465; -āvakāsa in akhuddâvakāso dassanāya not appearing inferior, one of the attributes of a well-bred brahmin (with brahmavaṇṇī) DN i.114, DN i.120, etc. -desa, in ˚issara ruler of a small district Sdhp 348.

Vedic kṣudra

Khuddaka

= khudda; usually in cpds. In sequence khuddaka-majjhima-mahā Vism 100. Of smaller sections or subdivisions of canonical books Vin v.145 sq (with ref. to the paññattis), see also below ■ catuppade kh˚ ca mahallake Snp 603. Khuddaka (m.) the little one, Mil 40 (mātā ˚assa).

-nadī = kunnadī, a small river Pv-a 154; -nikāya name of a collection of canonical books, mostly short (the fifth of the five Nikāyas) comprising the foll. 15 books: Khuddaka-Pāṭha, Dhammapada, Udāna, Itivuttaka Sutta-Nipāta, Vimāna-Vatthu, Peta-Vatthu Thera and Therī Gāthā, Jātaka (verses only), Niddesa Paṭisambhidāmagga, Apadāna, Buddha-Vaṃsa, CariyāPiṭaka. The name Kh-N. is taken from the fact that it is a collection of short books-short, that is, as compared with the Four Nikāyas. Anvs (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 35 Gvns (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 57; Pv-a 2, etc. -pāṭha Name of the first book in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -mañcaka a small or low bed Ja i.167; -rājā an inferior king Ja v.37 (+ mahārājā) Snp-a 121; cp. khujja & kuṭṭa; -vaggulī (f.) a small singing bird Dhp-a iii.223; -vatthuka belonging to or having smaller sections Vin v.114.

Khuppipāsā

hunger & thirst: ˚āya mīyamāno MN i.85. Personified as belonging to the army of Māra Snp 436 = Nd ii.on visenikatvā. To be tormented by hunger & thirst is the special lot of the; Petas: Pv i.1110ii.22, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 37, Pv-a 58, etc.; Vism 501; Sdhp 9, Sdhp 101 Sdhp 507.

cp. khudā

Khubhati

see saṃ˚ & khobha. The root is given at Dhtp 206 & 435 as “khubha = sañcalane.”

Khura1

the hoof of an animal Vv 6410 (of a horse = turagānaṃ khuranipāta, the clattering of a horse’s hoof Vv-a 279), cp. Sk. kṣura, a monkey’s claw Sp. Avs i.236.

khura-kāse MN i.446, read (with Neumann) for khura-kāye, “in the manner of dragging (kṛṣ ) the hoofs.”

Vedic khura

Khura2

a razor Vin ii.134; SN iv.169 (tiṇha a sharp r.) Dhp-a ii.257.

-agga the hall of tonsure Pv-a 53; -appa a kind of arrow DN i.96; MN i.429 (+ vekaṇḍa); Vism 381. -kosa razor-sheath Vism 251, Vism 255. -cakka a wheel, sharp as a razor Ja iv.3; -dhāra 1. carrying razors, said of the Vetaraṇī whose waters are like razors Snp 674 (+ tiṇha dhāra); Ja v.269; Vism 163.

2. the haft of a razor or its case Snp 716 (˚ûpama); Vism 500; Dhp-a ii.257 -nāsa having a nose like a razor Ja iv.139; -pariyanta a disk as sharp as a razor, a butcher-knife DN i.52 (= DN-a i.160; khura-nemi khura-sadisa-pariyanta), cp. ˚cakka -māla Name of an ocean, in ˚samudda Ja iv.137; -mālī (f.) prec. ibid.; -muṇḍa close-shaven Vin i.344; Vv-a 207 Khuramuṇḍaṃ karoti to shave closely DN i.98; SN iv.344; AN ii.241; -bhaṇḍa the outfit of a barber, viz. khura khura-silā, khura-sipāṭikā, namataka Vin i.249; Vin ii.134 cp. Vin. Texts iii.138; -silā a whetstone Vin ii.134 -sipāṭikā a powder prepared with s. gum to prevent razors from rusting Vin ii.134. Khulukhulu-karakam

Vedic kṣura, to kṣṇu, kṣṇoti to whet, kṣṇotra whetstone; cp. Gr. ξναύω scrape, ςύω shave, Lat. novacula razor. The Pali Dhtp (486) gives as meanings “chedana & vilekhana”

Khulukhulu-kaṛakaṃ

(nt. adv.) “so as to make the sound khulu, khulu,” i.e. clattering or bumping about MN ii.138. Cp. ghuru-ghuru.

Kheṭa

a shield: see kīṭa.

cp. Sk. kheṭaka

Khetta

(nt.) 1. (lit.) a field, a plot of land, arable land, a site, DN i.231; SN i.134 (bījaṃ khette virūhati; in simile); three kinds of fields at SN iv.315, viz. agga˚ majjhima˚, hīna˚ (in simile); AN i.229 = AN i.239; AN iv.237 (do.); Snp 524; Ja i.153 (sāli-yava˚); Pv ii.968 = Dhp-a iii.220 (khette bījaṃ ropitaṃ); Mil 47; Pv-a 62; Dhp-a i.98. Often as a mark of wealth = possession, e.g. DN iii.93 in defn of khattiya: khettānaṃ patī ti khattiya. In the same sense connected with vatthu (field & farm cp. Haus und Hof), to denote objects of trade, etc DN i.5 (expld at DN-a i.78: khetta nāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ rūhati, vatthu nāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ rūhati “kh. is where the first crop grows and v. where the second.” A similar expln at Nd i.248, where khetta is divided into sāli˚, vīhi. mugga˚, māsa˚, yava˚ godhūma˚, tila˚, i.e. the pubbaṇṇāni, and vatthu expld ghara˚, koṭṭhaka˚, pure˚, pacchā˚, ārāma˚, vihāra without ref. to aṇṇa.) SN ii.41; Snp 769. Together with other earthly possessions as wealth (hirañña, suvaṇṇa Snp 858; Nd ii.on lepa, gahaṭṭha, etc. As example in definition of visible objects Dhs 597; Vb 71 sq ■ Kasī a tilled field, a field ready to bear Pv i.12, cp. Pv-a 8 jāti˚ “a region in which a Buddha may be born (Hardy, after Childers s. khetta) Pv-a 138. Cp. the threefold division of a Buddha-kkhetta at Vism 414 viz. jāti˚, āṇā˚, visaya˚.

2. fig. (of kamma) the soil of merit, the deposit of good deeds, which, like a fertile field, bears fruit to the advantage of the “giver” of gifts or the “doer” of good works. See dakkhiṇeyya˚ puñña˚ (see detailed expln at Vism 220; khetta here virūhana-ṭṭhāna), brahma˚ ■ AN i.162, AN i.223 (kammaṃ khettaṃ, viññāṇaṃ bījaṃ); iv.237; Iti 98; Vv-a 113. akhetta barren soil AN iii.384 (akhettaññu not finding a good soil); iv.418 (do.); Pv-a 137. Sukhetta a good soil, fertile land SN i.21; Pv-a 137; opp. dukkhetta SN v.379.

-ūpama to be likened to a (fruitful) field, Ep. of an Arahant Pv i.11; -kammanta work in the field AN iii.77 -gata turned into a field, of puññakamma “good work becoming a field of merit” Pv-a 136, Pv-a 191; -gopaka a field watcher Ja iii.52; -ja “born on one’s land,” one of the 4 kinds of sons Nd i.247; Nd ii.448; Ja i.135. -jina one unsurpassed in the possession of a “field” Snp 523, Snp 524 -pāla one who guards a field Ja iii.54; -mahantatā the supremeness of the field (of merit) Vv-a 108; -rakkhaka the guardian of a field Ja ii.110; -vatthu possession of land & goods (see above) DN iii.164; SN v.473 = AN ii.209; AN v.137; Pp 58; Pv-a 3; -sampatti the successful attainment of a field of (merit) Pv-a 198; Vv-a 102; see Vv-a 30, Vv-a 32 on the three sampattis, viz. khetta˚, citta˚ payoga˚; -sāmika the owner of the field Mil 47; Vv-a 311. -sodhana the cleaning of the field (before it is ploughed) Dhp-a iii.284.

Vedic kṣetra, to kṣi, kṣeti, kṣiti, dwelling-place, Gr. κτίζω, Lat. situs founded, situated, E. site; cp. also Sk. kṣema “being settled,” composure. See also khattiya. Dhammapāla connects khetta with kṣip trā in his expln at Pv-a 7: khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ tāyati… ti khettaṃ

Kheda

(adj.) subject to fatigue, tired Vv-a 276 ■ As noun “fatigue” at Vism 71.

Sk. kheda fatigue, khedati; perhaps to Lat. caedo

Khepa

(-˚) throwing, casting, Sdhp 42. Usually in citta-kkhepa loss of mind, perplexity Dhp 138 Cp. vi˚, saṃ˚.

cp. khipati

Khepana

˚ the passing of, appld to time: āyu˚ Vv-a 311.

cp. khepeti

Khepita

destroyed, brought to waste, annihilated, khepitatta (nt.) the fact of being destroyed destruction, annihilation, Dhp-a ii.163 (kilesavaṭṭassa kh.).

pp. of khepeti

Khepeti

see khipati.

Khema

1. (adj.) full of peace, safe; tranquil, calm DN i.73 (of a country) SN i.123 (of the path leading to the ambrosial, i.e. Nibbāna) i.189 = Snp 454 (of vācā nibbānapattiyā); MN i.227 (vivaṭaṃ amatadvāraṃ khemaṃ nibbānapattiyā “opened is the door to the Immortal, leading to peace, for the attainment of Nibbāna”) AN iii.354 (of ñāna) Iti 32; Snp 268 (= abhaya, nirupaddava Kp-a 153); Dhp 189 sq. Pv iv.33 (of a road = nibbhaya Pv-a 250); Vv-a 85. 2. (nt.) shelter, place of security, tranquillity, home of peace, the Serene (Ep. of Nibbāna). In general DN i.11 (peace, opp. bhaya); Snp 896 (+ avivādabhūmi) 953 ■ In particular of Nibbāna: SN iv.371; AN iv.455; Vv 5320 (amataṃ khemaṃ); Pts i.59. See also yoga Abl. khemato, from the standpoint of the Serene SN ii.109; Snp 414, Snp 1098; Nd ii.s. v. (+ tāṇato, etc.).

-atta one who is at peace (+ viratta) SN i.112 (= khemībhūtaṃ assabhāvaṃ SA). -anta security, in ˚bhūmi a peaceful country (opp, kantāra), a paradise (as Ep. of Nibbāna) DN i.73; Nd ii.on Satthā; Vism 303. -ṭṭhāna the place of shelter, the home of tranquillity Thig 350 (= Nibbāna Thag-a 242); -ṭṭhita peaceful, appeased, unmolested DN i.135; -dassin looking upon the Serene Snp 809; -ppatta having attained tranquillity (= abhayappatta, vesārajjappatta) MN i.72 = AN ii.9.

Vedic kṣema to kṣi, cp. khetta

Khemin

(adj.) one who enjoys security or peace SN iii.13; Snp 145 (= abhaya Kp-a 244); Dhp 258.

Kheḷa

phlegm, saliva, foam; usually with singhānikā mucus, sometimes in the sense of perspiration, sweat AN i.34; AN iv.137; Snp 196 (+ singh˚); Kp ii. = Mil 26 (cp Vism 263 in detail, & Kp-a 66); Ja i.61; Ja iv.23; Ja vi.367 Vism 259, Vism 343 (+ singhāṇikā), 362; Dhp-a iii.181; Dhp-a iv.20 Dhp-a iv.170; Pv ii.23 as food for Petas, cp. Av.S. i.279 (kheṭamūtropajīvinī; ii.113: kheṭavadutsṛjya); Pv-a 80 (= niṭṭhubhana).

-kilinna wet with exudation Ja i.164; -mallaka a spitting box, a cuspidor Vin i.48; Vin ii.175, Vin ii.209 sq. -siṅghānikā phlegm & mucus Dhp-a i.50.

Sk. kheṭa, cp. kṣveḍa and śleṣma, P. silesuma. See also kilid & kilis;, cp. ukkheṭita. On root khela see keḷanā; it is given by Dhtp 279 in meaning “calana. The latter (khela) has of course nothing to do with kheḷa

Kheḷāpaka

(Vin) & kheḷāsika (Dhp-a) an abusive term “eating phlegm” (?) [Müller, P.G. 30 = kheṭâtmaka Vin ii.188, cp. Vin. Texts iii.239; ˚vāda the use of the term “phlegm-eater,” calling one by this name Vin ii.189; Dhp-a 140. Cp. āpaka.? spittle-dribbler; “wind bag.”

Kho

an enclitic particle of affirmation & emphasis indeed, really, surely; in narration: then, now (cp kira); in question: then, perhaps, really. Def. as adhikār’ antara-nidassan’ atthe nipāto Kp-a 113 as avadhāraṇaṃ (affirmative particle) Pv-a 11, Pv-a 18 ■ A few of its uses are as foll.: abhabbo kho Vin i.17 pasādā kho DN ii.155. After pron.: mayhaṃ kho Ja i.279; ete kho Vin i.10; idaṃ kho ibid.; so ca kho Ja i.51; yo kho MN i.428 ■ After a negation: na kho indeed not Ja ii.111; no ca khv’ āssa AN v.195; mā kho Ja i.253 ■ Often combd with pana: na sakkhā kho pana “is it then not possible” Ja i.151; api ca kho pana Ja i.253; siyā kho pana DN ii.154 ■ Following other particles. esp. in aoristic narration: atha kho (extremely frequent); tatra kho; tâpi kho; api ca kho; evaṃ bhante ti kho; evaṃ byā kho Vin iv.134; Dhp i.27, etc-In interr. sentences it often follows nu: kin nu kho Ja i.279; atthi nu kho Ja iii.52; kahan nu kho Ja i.255.

before vowels often khv’; contr. of khalu = Sk. khalu

Khobha

(m.) shaking, shock Vism 31, Vism 157; khobhaṃ karoti to shake Vv-a 35, Vv-a 36 Vv-a 278; khobha-karaṇa shaking up, disturbance Vism 474 See also akkhobbha.

cp. Vedic kṣubh kṣobhayati, to shake = Goth. skiuban Ger. schieben, to push, E. shove

Khoma

adj. flaxen; nt. a linen cloth, linen garment, usually combd with kappāsika Vin i.58 Vin i.96, Vin i.281; AN iv.394; AN v.234 = AN v.249 (˚yuga); Ja vi.47, Ja vi.500; Pv ii.117; Dhp-a i.417.

-pilotikā a linen cloth Vin i.296.

G.

cp. Vedic kṣauma

G

˚Ga

adj., only as ending: going. See e.g. atiga, anuga, antalikkha˚, ura˚, pāra˚, majjha˚, samīpa˚ hattha˚. It also appears as ˚gu, e.g. in addha˚, anta˚ paṭṭha˚, pāra˚, veda˚ ■ dugga (m. & nt.) a difficult road Dhp 327 = Mil 379; Pv ii.78 (= duggamana-ṭṭhāna Pv-a 102); ii.925; Ja ii.385.

fr. gam

Gagana

(nt.) the sky (with reference to sidereal motions); usually of the moon: g˚ majjhe puṇṇacando viya Ja i.149, Ja i.212; g˚ tale canda-maṇḍalaṃ Ja iii.365; cando g˚ majjhe ṭhito Ja v.137; cando gagane viya sobhati Vism 58; g˚ tale candaṃ viya Dhp-a i.372; g˚ tale puṇṇacanda “the full-moon in the expanse of the heavens Vv-a 3; g˚ talamagga the (moon’s) course in the sky Pv-a 188; etc. Of the sun: suriyo ākāse antalikkhe gaganapathe gacchati Nd ii.on Snp 1097. Unspecified: Ja i.57; Vism 176 (˚tal-âbhimukhaṃ).

Gaggara

1. roaring, only in f. gaggarī a blacksmith’s bellows: kammāra˚, in simile MN i.243

S i.106; Vism 287.

2. (nt.) cackling, cawing, in haṃsa˚; the sound of geese Ja v.96 (expl. by haṃsamadhurassara). Gaggarā as Name of a lake at Vism 208-See note on gala.

Vedic gargara throat, whirlpool. *gṷer to sling down, to whirl, cp. Gr. βάραχρον, Lat. gurges, gurgulio Ohg. querechela “kehle”

Gaggaraka

a whirlpool, eddy Ja v.405; according to Kern Toev. s. v. a sort of fish (Sk. gargaraka Pimelodus Gagora); as gaggalaka at Mil 197.

fr. gaggara

Gaggarāyati

to whirl, roar, bellow, of the waves of the Gangā Mil 3 ■ cp. gaḷagaḷāyati.;

v. den. fr. prec.; cp. gurgulio: gurges, E. gargle & gurgle

Gaccha

a shrub, a bush, usually together with latā, creeper; rukkha, tree, e.g. Nd ii.235, id; Ja i.73; Mil 268; Vism 182 (described on p. 183). With dāya, wood AN iv.74 puppha˚ a flowering shrub Ja i.120; khuddaka˚-vana a wood of small shrubs Ja v.37Pv-a 274; Vv-a 301 (-gumba, brushwood, underwood); Dhp-a i.171 (-pothana-ṭṭhāna); iv.78 (-mūla).

not = Sk. kaccha, grass-land, as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 16. The passage Ja iii.287 stands with gaccha v.l. kaccha for gaccha at AN iv.74; g˚ for k˚ at Snp 20

Gacchati

. These three formations are represented in Pāli as follows (1) gacch˚, in pres gacchati; imper. gaccha & gacchāhi; pot. gacche (Dhp 46, Dhp 224) & gaccheyya; p.pres. gacchanto, med. gacchamāna; fut (2nd) gacchissati; aor. agacchi (Vv-a 307 v.l. agañchi) ■ (2) gam˚ in three variations; viz (a) gam˚, in pres. caus. gameti; fut. gamissati; aor 3 sg. agamā (Snp 408, Snp 976; Vv 797; Mvu vii.9), agamāsi & gami (Pv ii.86) 1. pl. agamiṃhase (Pv ii.310), pl agamuṃ (Snp 290), agamaṃsu & gamiṃsu; prohib. mā gami; ger. gamya (Ja v.31); grd. gamanīya (Kp-a 223) See also der. gama, gamana, gāmika, gāmin ■ (b gan˚, in aor. agañchi (on this form see Trenckner Notes, p. 71 sq ■ In n’āgañchi Ja iii.190 it belongs to ā + gam); pres ■ aor gañchisi (Snp 665); inf. gantuṃ ger. gantvā; grd. gantabba. See also der. gantar. (c) ga˚, in pp. gata. See also ga, gati, gatta.

3. gā˚ in pret. agā (Pv ii.322), 3rd pl. aor. agū (= Sk. ˚uḥ), in ajjhagū, anvagū (q.v.).

Meanings and Use: 1. to go, to be in motion, to move, to go on (opp. to stand still, tiṭṭhati). Freq in combn with tiṭṭhati nisīdati seyyaṃ kappeti “to go to stand, sit down & lie down,” to denote all positions and every kind of behaviour; Nd ii.s. v. gacchati. evaṃ kāle gacchante, as time went on Ja iii.52, or evaṃ g˚ kāle (Pv-a 54, Pv-a 75) or gacchante gacchante kāle Dhp-a i.319; gacchati = paleti Pv-a 56; vemakoṭi gantvā pahari (whilst moving) Dhp-a iii.176.

2. to go, to walk (opp. to run, dhāvati) Dhp-a i.389.

3. to go away, to go out, to go forth (opp. to stay, or to come āgacchati): agamāsi he went Pv ii.86; yo maṃ icchati anvetu yo vā n’ icchati gacchatu “who wants me may come, who does not may go” Snp 564; āgacchantānañ ca gacchantānañ ca pamāṇaṃ n’ atthi “there was no end of all who came & went” Ja ii.133; gacchāma “let us go” Ja i.263; gaccha dāni go away now! Ja ii.160 gaccha re muṇḍaka Vism 343; gacchāhi go then Ja i.151, Ja i.222; mā gami do not go away! Ja iv.2; pl. mā gamittha Ja i.263; gacchanto on his way Ja i.255, Ja i.278 agamaṃsu they went away Ja iv.3; gantukāma anxious to go Ja i.222, Ja i.292; kattha gamissasi where are you going? (opp. agacchasi) Dhp-a iii.173; kahaṃ gacchissatha id. Ja ii.128; kuhiṃ gamissati where is he going Snp 411, Snp 412.

4. with acc. or substitute: to go to, to have access to, to arrive or get at (with the aim of the movement or the object of the intention); hence fig to come to know, to experience, to realize ■ (a) with acc. of direction: Rājagahaṃ gami he went to R Pv ii.86; Devadaha-nagaraṃ gantuṃ Ja i.52; gacchām ahaṃ Kusināraṃ I shall go to K. DN ii.128; Suvaṇṇabhūmiṃ gacchanti they intended to go (“were going” to S. Ja iii.188; migavaṃ g. to go hunting Ja i.149; janapadaṃ gamissāma Ja ii.129; paradāraṃ g. to approach another man’s wife Dhp 246 ■ (b) with adverbs of direction or purpose (atthāya): santikaṃ (or santike) gacchati to go near a person (in gen.), pitu s. gacchāma Dhp-a iii.172; devāna santike gacche Dhp 224 santikaṃ also Ja i.152: ii.159, etc. Kathaṃ tattha gamissāmi how shall I get there? Ja i.159; Ja ii.159; tattha agamāsi he went there Ja ii.160. dukkhānubhavanatthāya gacchamānā “going away for the purpose of undergoing suffering” Ja iv.3; vohāratthāya gacchāmi I am going out (= fut.) on business Ja ii.133 ■ Similarly (fig.) in foll. expressions (op. “to go to Heaven,” etc. = to live or experience a heavenly life, op. next); Nirayaṃ gamissati Ja vi.368; saggaṃ lokaṃ g. Ja i.152; gacche pāram apārato Snp 1129, in this sense interpreted at Nd ii.223 as adhigacchati phusati sacchikaroti, to experience-Sometimes with double acc.: Bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi “I entrust myself to Bh.” Vin i.16-Cp. also phrases as atthangacchati to go home, to set, to disappear; antarā-gacchati to come between, to obstruct.

5. to go as a stronger expression for to be, i.e. to behave, to have existence, to fare (cp. Ger. es geht gut, Fr. cela va bien = it is good). Here belongs gati “existence,” as mode of existing, element, sphere of being, and out of this use is developed the periphrastic use of gam˚, which places it on the same level with the verb “to be” (see b) ■ (a) sugatiṃ gamissasi you will go to the state of well-being, i.e. Heaven Vin ii.195; Iti 77; opp. duggatiṃ gacchanti Dhp 317

319 maggaṃ na jānanti yena gacchanti subbatā (which will fall to their share) Snp 441; gamissanti yattha gantvā na socare “they will go where one sorrows not” Snp 445; Vv 514; yan ca karoti… tañ ca ādāya gacchati “whatever a man does that he will take with him SN i.93 ■ (b) periphrastic (w. ger. of governing verb) nagaraṃ pattharitvā gaccheyya “would spread through the town” Ja i.62; pariṇāmaṃ gaccheyya “could be digested” DN ii.127; sīhacammaṃ ādāya agamaṃsu “they took the lion’s skin away with them” Ja ii.110 itthiṃ pahāya gamissati shall leave the woman alone Ja vi.348; sve gahetvā gamissāmi “I shall come for it tomorrow” Mil 48.

Vedic gacchati, a desiderative (future) formation from *gṷem “I am intent upon going,” i.e. I go, with the foll. bases ■ (1) Future-present *gṷemskéti → *gaścati → Sk. gacchati = Gr. βάσκω (to βαινω). In meaning cp. i, Sk. emi, Gr. εἰμι “I shall go” & in form also Sk. pṛcchati = Lat. porsco “I want to know,” Vedic icchati “to desire.”-(2) Present *gṷemi̯o = Sk. gamati = Gr. βαίνω, Lat. venio, Goth. qiman, Ohg koman, E. come; and non-present formations as Osk kúmbened, Sk. gata = Lat. ventus; gantu = (ad) ventus-(3) *gṷā, which is correlated to *stā, in Pret. Sk ágām, Gr. ε ̓́βην, cp. β ̈ημα

Gaja

an elephant Ja iv.494; Mil 2, Mil 346; Dhs-a 295 (appld to a kind of thought).

-potaka the young of an elephant Pv-a 152 ■ rājā the king of the elephants Mil 346.

Sk. gaja

Gajaka

= gaja, in gajakattharaṇa an elephant’s cover Vv-a 104.

Gajjati

to roar, to thunder, usually of clouds. Of the earth: Dāvs v.29; of a man (using harsh speech) Ja i.226; Ja ii.412 (mā gajji); Nd i.172 (= abhi˚); Ja iv.25 ■ Caus. gajjayati, ger. gajjayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā pavassati Iti 66.

Sk. garjati, cp. gargara & jarā roaring, cp. uggajjati Dhtp 76: gajja sadde

Gajjitar

one who thunders, of a man in comparison with a cloud AN ii.102 = Pp 42.

n. agent fr. prec.

Gaṇa

1. (a) in special sense: a meeting or a chapter of (two or three bhikkhus, a company (opposed both to sangha, the order & puggala, the individual) Vin i.58, Vin i.74, Vin i.195, Vin i.197 Vin ii.170, Vin ii.171; Vin iv.130, Vin iv.216, Vin iv.226, Vin iv.231, Vin iv.283, Vin iv.310, Vin iv.316, Vin iv.317 Vin v.123, Vin v.167 ■ (b) in general: a crowd, a multitude, a great many. See cpds.

2. as-˚: a collection of, viz. of gods, men, animals or things; a multitude, mass flock, herd; host, group, cluster ■ (a) deva˚ Ja i.203; Dhp-a iii.441; Pv-a 140 (˚parivuta); pisāca˚ SN i.33 tidasa˚ Snp 679 ■ (b) amacca˚ suite of ministers Ja i.264; ariya˚ troup of worthies Ja vi.50; naranarī˚ crowds of men & women Mil 2; dāsi˚ a crowd of servants Ja ii.127; tāpasa˚ a group of ascetics Ja i.140 (˚parivuta) bhikkhu˚ Ja i.212 (˚parivuta) ■ (c) dvija˚ Ja i.152 dija˚ Pv ii.124; sakuṇa˚, of birds Ja i.207; Ja ii.352; go˚ of cows AN i.229; AN v.347, AN v.359; Ja ii.128; kākola˚, of ravens Snp 675; bhamarā˚, of bees Ja i.52; miga˚ of beasts Ja i.150 ■ (d) taru˚ a cluster of trees Pv-a 154; tāra˚ a host of stars AN i.215; Pv ii.967; with ref. to the books of the Canon: Suttantika˚ & Ābhidhammika˚ Vism 93.;

-ācariya “a teacher of a crowd,” i.e. a t. who has (many) followers. Always in phrase sanghī ca gaṇī ca ganācariyo ca, and always with ref. either to Gotama DN i.116; MN ii.3; or to the 6 chief sectarian leaders, as Pūraṇa Kassapa, etc.: DN i.47, DN i.163; SN i.68; SN iv.398; MN i.198, MN i.227, MN i.233; MN ii.2; Snp p.91; cp. DN-a i.143. In general: Mil 4. -ārāma (adj.) & -ārāmatā in phrase gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇārāmataṃ anuyutto: a lover of the crowd AN iii.422 sq.; MN iii.110 = Nd ii.on Snp 54 -gaṇin the leader of many, Ep. of Bhagavā Nd ii.307 -(ṃ)gaṇupāhanā (pl.) shoes with many linings Vin i.185 Vin i.187; cp. Vin. Texts ii.14. See also Bdhgh. on aṭaliyo (q.v. under aṭala). -pūraka (adj.) one who completes the quorum (of a bhikkhus chapter) Vin i.143 sq. -bandhana in ˚ena dānaṃ datvā to give by co-operation to give jointly Dhp-a ii.160; -bhojana food prepared as a joint meal Vin ii.196; iv. 71; v.128, 135, 205; -magga in ˚ena gaṇetuṃ to count by way of batches Vin i.117 -vassika (adj.) through a great many years Snp 279 -saṅganika (adj.) coming into contact with one another Dhp-a i.162.

Vedic gaṇa; *ger to comprise, hold, or come together, cp. Gr. ἀγείρω to collect, ἀγορά meeting, Lat. grex flock, Sk. jarante “conveniunt” (see Wackernagel Altind. Gr. i.193). Another form of this root is grem in Sk. grāma, Lat. gremium; see under gāma

Gaṇaka

a counter, one skilled in counting familiar with arithmetic; an accountant, overseer or calculator. Enumd as an occupation together with muddika at DN i.51 (expl DN-a i.157 by acchidda-pāṭhaka); also with muddika and sankhāyika SN iv.376; as an office at the king’s court (together with amaccā as gaṇaka-mahāmatta = a ministerial treasurer) DN iii.64, and in same context DN iii.148 DN iii.153, DN iii.169, DN iii.171, DN iii.177; as overseer Vin iii.43; as accountant Mil 79, Mil 293; Vv-a 66.

fr. gaṇ, to comprise in the sense of to count up

Gaṇakī

(f.) = gaṇikā Vin iii.135–⁠136, in purāṇa˚ a woman who was formerly a courtesan, & as adj. gaṇakī-dhītā the daughter of a courtesan.;

Gaṇanā

(f.) counting, i.e. 1. counting up, arithmetic, number Ja i.29; Vism 278 sq.; Mil 79; Vv-a 194. 2. counting, census, statistics; Tikap. 94; Ja i.35; Mil 4 (senā ˚ṃ kāretvā); Dhp-a i.11, Dhp-a i.34.

3. the art of counting arithmetics as a study & a profession, forbidden to the bhikkhus Vin i.77 = Vin iv.129 (˚ṃ sikkhati to study ar.) DN i.11 (expl. DN-a i.95 by acchiddaka-gaṇanā); MN i.85 MN iii.1 (˚ājīva); DN-a i.157. -gaṇana-patha (time-) reckoning, period of time Mil 20, Mil 116.

Gaṇikā1

(f.) “one who belongs to the crowd,” a harlot, a courtesan (cp. gaṇakī) Vin i.231 (Ambapālī) 268, (do.) ii.277 (Aḍḍhakāsī); Ud 71; Mil 122; Dhp-a iii.104; Vv-a 75 (Sirimā); Pv-a 195, Pv-a 199 ■ Customs of a gaṇikā Ja iv.249; Ja v.134 ■ Cp. saṃ˚.

Gaṇikā2

(f.) = gaṇanā, arithmetic Mil 3.

Gaṇin1

(adj.) one who has a host of followers, Ep. of a teacher who has a large attendance of disciples; usually in standing combn sanghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo (see above) Also in foll.: Snp 955, Snp 957; Dpvs iv.8 (mahāgaṇī), 14 (therā gaṇī); gaṇī-bhūtā (pl.) in crowds, combd with sanghā sanghī DN i.112, expld at DN-a i.280: pubbe nagarassa anto agaṇā bahi nikkhamitvā gaṇa-sainpannā ti. See also paccekagaṇin.

Gaṇin2

a large species of deer Ja v.406 (= gokaṇṇa).

Gaṇeti

1. to count, to reckon, to do sums Dhp 19; Ja vi.334; Mil 79, Mil 293 pp. gaṇita Snp 677; pass. gaṇīyati Sdhp 434; inf. (vedic gaṇetuye Bw. iv.28; caus. gaṇāpeti MN iii.1.

2. to regard, to take notice of, to consider, to care for Ja i.300 Ja iv.267.

denom. to gaṇa Dhtp 574: sankhyāne

Gaṇṭhi

(m.) 1. a knot, a tie, a knot or joint in a stalk (of a plant) Ja i.172; DN-a i.163; Dhp-a i.321 (˚jātaṃ what has be come knotty or hard) ■ diṭṭhi-gaṇṭhi the tangle of false doctrine Vv-a 297; anta-gaṇṭh-ābādha entanglement of intestines Vin i.275.

2. a (wooden) block Vin ii.110 (of sandal wood).

-ṭṭhāna (for gaṇṭhikaṭṭhāna?) the place of the block (i.e. of execution) Ja iii.538; (reads gaṇṭhi-gaṇṭi-ṭṭhāna) Vism 248bhedaka, in ˚cora “the thief who breaks the block” (or rope, knot?) Dhp-a ii.30.

Vedic granthi, to grem to comprise, hold together, cp. Lat. gremium, Sk. gaṇa & grāma, see also gantha

Gaṇṭhikā

(f.) (freq. spelled gaṇḍikā, q.v.) = gaṇṭhi, viz. 1. a knot, a tie DN-a i.199 (catu-pañca-gaṇṭhik’āhata patta a bowl with 4 or 5 knots, similarly āṇi-gaṇṭhik’ āhata ayopatta Vism 108; but see āṇi); Dhp-a i.335 (˚jāta = gaṇṭhijāta knotty part), 394.

2. a block (or is it knot?) Vin ii.136 (? + pāsaka; cp. Vin. Texts iii.144) v.140. Esp. in phrase gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā Vin i.46 Vin ii.213, Vin ii.215, trsld at Vin. Texts iii.286 “fasten the block on (to the robe)” but at i.155 “tie the knots. Also in dhamma-gaṇṭhikā a block for execution Ja i.150 (v.l. gaṇḍikā).

3. Name of a plant Pv-a 127 ■ ucchugaṇṭhikā sugar cane: see ucchu.

-kāsāva a yellow robe which was to be tied (or which had a block?) Ja iv.446.

Gaṇḍa

1. a swelling, esp. as a disease, an abscess, a boil. Freq. in similes with ref. to kāma and kāya. Mentioned with similar cutaneous diseases under kilāsa (q.v. for loci). As Ep. of kāya SN iv.83 = AN iv.386 of kāmā AN iii.310, AN iv.289; Nd ii.on Snp 51; also Thig 491 (= dukkhatā sūlaya Thag-a 288); SN iv.64 (= ejā) Snp 51, Snp 61 (v.l. for gaḷa); Ja i.293; Vism 360 (˚pilakā) Dhp-a iii.297 (gaṇḍ-ā-gaṇḍajāta, covered with all kinds of boils); iv.175; Pv-a 55. Cp. Av. SN ii.1681.

2. a stalk, a shaft, in Name of a plant-˚tindu-rukkha Ja v.99 and in der. gaṇḍikā & gaṇḍī, cp. also Av. SN ii.13312. 3. = gaṇḍuppāda in cpd. gaṇḍamattikā clay mixed with earth-worms Vin ii.151 (cp. Bdhgh. gaṇḍuppādagūtha-mattikā clay mixed with excrement of earthworms Vin. Texts iii.172).

-uppāda (lit. producing upheavals, cp. a mole) an earth-worm, classed as a very low creature with kīṭā puḷavā at MN iii.168; Ja v.210 (˚pāṇa); Dhp-a iii.361 (˚yoni) Snp-a 317.

a variation of gaṇṭha (-i), in both meanings of (1) swelling, knot, protuberance, and (2) the interstice between two knots or the whole of the knotty object i.e. stem, stalk

Gaṇḍaka

(adj.) having boils Sdhp 103.

Gaṇḍamba

Name of the tree, under which Gotama Buddha performed the double miracle; with ref. to this freq in phrase gaṇḍamba-rukkha-mūle yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā Ja i.77; Ja iv.263 sq.; DN-a i.57; Pv-a 137; Mil 349 Dāvs v.54. Also at Dhp-a iii.207 in play of words with amba-rukkha.

Gaṇḍikā

(f.)

1. a stalk, a shaft (cp. gaṇḍī) Ja i.474; Dhs-a 319 (of the branches of trees: g˚-ākoṭana-sadda)

2. a lump, a block of wood (more freq. spelling gaṇṭhikā, q.v.).

3. Name of a plant Vv 354 (= bandhujīvaka Vv-a 161).

-ādhāna the putting on of a shaft or stem, as a bolt or bar Vin ii.172; cp. Vin. Texts iii.213 and gaṇḍī; also ghaṭikā2.

a-n. formation from gaṇḍa or gaṇṭha, see also gaṇṭhikā

Gaṇḍin

1. having swellings, in ure gaṇḍī (f.) with swellings on the chest, i.e. breasts Ja v.159 Ja v.202 (thane sandhāyâha 205).

2. having boils, being afflicted with a glandular disease (with kuṭṭhin kilāsin) Kv 31.;

adj. fr. gaṇḍa

Gaṇḍī

(f.)

1. a shaft or stalk, used as a bar Ja i.237

2. a gong Dhp-a i.291 (gaṇḍiṃ paharati to beat the g.) ii.54, 244; gaṇḍiṃ ākoṭetvā Kp-a 251. Cp. AvS i.258 264, 272; ii.87, 95 & Divy 335, Divy 336. Also in gaṇḍisaññā “sign with the gong” Ja iv.306.

3. the executioner’s block (= gaṇḍikā or gaṇṭhikā) Ja iii.41.

= gaṇḍikā in meaning 1; prob. = Sk. ghaṇṭā in meaning 2

Gaṇḍusa

a mouthful Ja i.249 (khīra˚). Ganhati & Ganhati;

cp. Sk. gaṇḍūṣa

Gaṇhati & Gaṇhāti

. The forms of the verb are from three bases, viz. (1); gaṇha- (Sk. gṛhṇā-); Pres.: ind. gaṇhāti (gaṇhāsi Pv-a 87) pot. gaṇheyya, imper. gaṇha (Ja i.159; Pv-a 49 = handa) & gaṇhāhi (Ja i.279). Fut. gaṇhissati; Aor gaṇhi. Inf. gaṇhituṃ (J iii.281). Ger. gaṇhitvā Caus. ganhāpeti & gāhāpeti.

2.; gahe- (Sk. gṛhī-) Fut. gahessati. Aor. aggahesi (Snp 847; Ja i.52). Inf gahetuṃ (Ja i.190, Ja i.222). Ger. gahetvā & gahetvāna (poet.) (Snp 309; Pv ii.3).

3. gah- (Sk. gṛh-): Aor aggahi. Ger. gayha & gahāya (Snp 791). Pass. gayhati Pp. gahita & gahīta. Cp. gaha, gahaṇa, gāha.;

Meanings: to take, take up; take hold of; grasp seize; assume; e.g. ovādaṃ g. to take advice Ja i.159 khaggaṃ to seize the sword Ja i.254

255; gocaraṃ to take food Ja iii.275; jane to seize people Ja i.253; dhanaṃ to grasp the treasure Ja i.255; nagaraṃ to occupy the city Ja i.202; pāde gāḷhaṃ gahetvā holding her feet tight Ja i.255; macche to catch fish Ja iii.52; mantaṃ to use a charm Ja iii.280; rajjaṃ to seize the kingdom Ja i.263 Ja ii.102; sākhaṃ to take hold of a branch Snp 791; Ja i.52 Very often as a phrase to be translated by a single word, as: nāmato g. to enumerate Pv-a 18; paṭisandhiṃ g. to be born Ja i.149; maraṇaṃ g. to die Ja i.151 mūlena g. to buy Ja iii.126; vacanaṃ g. to obey Ja iii.276 (in neg.). The ger. gahetvā is very often simply to be translated as “with,” e.g. tidaṇḍaṃ gahetvā caranto Ja ii.317; satta bhikkhū gahetvā agamāsi Vv-a 149.

Caus. gaṇhāpeti to cause to be seized, to procure, to have taken: phalāni Ja ii.105; rājānaṃ Ja i.264. Cp gāhāpeti.

Vedic grah (grabh), gṛhṇāti pp. gṛhīta to grasp. *gher to hold, hold in, contain; cp. Gr. ξόρτος enclosure, Lat. hortus, co-hors (homestead) Goth. gards (house); Ohg. gart; E. yard & garden. To this belong Vedic gṛha (house) in P. gaha˚, gihin, geha ghara, & also Vedic harati to seize, hasta hand

Gata

gone, in all meanings of gacchati (q.v.) viz. 1. literal gone away, arrived at, directed to (c. acc.), opp ṭhita: gate ṭhite nisinne (loc. abs.) when going standing, sitting down (cp. gacchati 1) DN i.70; opp āgata: yassa maggaṃ na jānāsi āgatassa gatassa vā Snp 582 (cp. gati 2). Also periphrastic (= gacchati 5 b) aṭṭhi paritvā gataṃ “the bone fell down” Ja iii.26 Very often gata stands in the sense of a finite verb (= aor. gacchi or agamāsi): yo ca Buddhaṃ… saraṇaṃ gato (cp. gacchati 4) Dhp 190; attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gato he went to his domicile Ja i.280; Ja ii.160; nāvā Aggimālaṃ gatā the ship went to Aggimālā Ja iv.139. 2. in applied meaning: gone in a certain way, i.e. affected, behaved, fared, fated, being in or having come into a state or condition. So in sugata & duggata (see below) and as 2nd part of cpds. in gen., viz.; gone; atthaṃ˚ gone home, set; addha˚ done with the journey (cp. gat-addhin); gone into: taṇhā˚ fallen a victim to thirst, tama˚ obscured, raho˚, secluded, vyasana˚ fallen into misery; having reached: anta˚ arrived at the goal (in this sense often combd with patta: antagata antapatta Nd2, 436, 612), koṭi˚ perfected, parinibbāna having ceased to exist. vijjā˚ having attained (right knowledge; connected with, referring to, concerning: kāya˚ relating to the body (kāyagatā sati, e.g. Vism 111, Vism 197, Vism 240 sq.); diṭṭhi˚ being of a (wrong) view sankhāra˚, etc ■ Sometimes gata is replaced by kata and vice versa: anabhāvaṃkata → anabhāvaṃ gacchati kālagata → kālakata (q.v.).

agata not gone to, not frequented: ˚ṃ disaṃ (of Nibbāna) Dhp 323; purisantaraṃ ˚ṃ mātugāmaṃ “a maid who has not been with a man” Ja i.290.

sugata of happy, blessed existence, fortunate; one who has attained the realm of bliss (= sugatiṃ gata, see gati), blessed. As np. a common Ep. of the Buddha Vin i.35; Vin iii.1; DN i.49; SN i.192; AN ii.147 et passim (see Sugata) ■ DN i.83; Snp 227 (see expl. Kp-a 183).

duggata of miserable existence, poor, unhappy, ill-fated, gone to the realm of miscry (duggatiṃ gata Pv-a 33, see gati) Pv i.62; ii.317; duggata-bhāva (poverty) Ja vi.366; duggat-itthi (miserable, poor Ja i.290; parama-duggatāni kulāni clans in utmost misery (poverty) Pv-a 176 ■ Compar. duggatatara Dhp-a i.427; Dhp-a ii.135.

-atta (fr. attā) self-perfected, perfect DN i.57 (expl by koṭippatta-citto DN-a i.168); cp. paramāya satiyā ca gatiyā ca dhitiyā ca samannāgata MN i.82; -addhin (adj of addhan) one who has completed his journey (cp addhagata) Dhp 90; -kāle (in gata-gata-kāle) whenever he went Ja iii.188; -ṭṭhāna place of existence Pv-a 38 = gamana in āgata-ṭṭhānaṃ vā: coming and going (lit. state of going) Ja iii.188; -yobbana (adj.) past youth, of old age AN i.138; Snp 98 = Snp 124.

pp. of gacchati in medio-reflexive function

Gataka

a messenger Ja i.86.

Gatatta

1. = Sk. gat-ātman (see prec.).

2. = Sk. gatatvaṃ the fact of having gone Kp-a 183.

Gati

(f.) 1. going, going away, (opp. āgati coming) (both gati & āgati usually in pregnant sense of No. 2. See āgati); direction, course, career. Freq of the two careers of a Mahāpurisa (viz. either a Cakkavatti or a Buddha) DN ii.16 = Snp p.106; Snp 1001, or of a gihī arahattaṃ patto Mil 264, with ref. to the distinction of the child Gotama Ja i.56 ■ phassâyatanānaṃ gati (course or direction) AN ii.161; jagato gati (id. AN ii.15, AN ii.17; sakuntānaṃ g. the course, flight of birds Dhp 92 = Thag 92 ■ Opp. āgati Pv ii.922 ■ tassā gatiṃ jānāti “he knows her going away, i.e. where she has gone” Pv-a 6.

2. going away, passing on (= cuti opp. upapatti coming into another existence); course esp after death, destiny, as regards another (future existence AN i.112; DN ii.91; MN i.388 (tassa kā gati ko abhisamparāyo? what is his rebirth and what his destiny?); in combn āgati vā gati vā (= cutûpapatti) rebirth & death MN i.328, MN i.334. In defn of saṃsāra expld as gati bhavâbhava cuti upapatti = one existence after the other Nd ii.664; as gati upapatti paṭisandhi Nd ii.on dhātu (also as puna-gati rebirth) ■ The Arahant as being beyond Saṃsāra is also beyond gati yassa gatiṃ na jānanti devā gandhabba-mānusā Dhp 420 = Snp 644; yesaṃ gati n’ atthi Snp 499; and Nibbāna coincides with release from the gatis: gativippamokkhaṃ parinibbānaṃ Snp-a 368 ■ attā hi attano gati “everybody is (the maker of) his own future life Dhp 380; esā maccharino gati “this is the fate of the selfish” Pv iii.114; sabbagatī te ijjhantu “all fate be a success to you” Ja v.393; gato so tassa yā gati “he has gone where he had to go (after death)” Pv i.122. 3. behaviour, state or condition of life, sphere of existence element, especially characterized as sugati duggati, a happy or an unhappy existence. gati migānaṃ pavanaṃ, ākāso pakkhīnaṃ gati, vibhavo gati dhammānaṃ nibbānaṃ arahato gati: the wood is the sphere of the beasts, the air of the birds, decay is the state of (all) things, Nibbāna the sphere of the Arahant Vin v.149 = Snp-a 346; apuññalābho ca gatī ca pāpikā Dhp 310; duggati Ja i.28; avijjāy’ eva gati the quality of ignorance Snp 729; paramāya gatiyā samannāgato of perfect behaviour MN i.82; see also defn at Vism 237. 4. one of the five realms of existence of sentient beings (= loka), divided into the two categories of sugati (= Sagga, realm of bliss) & duggati (= Yamaloka apāya, realm of misery). These gatis are given in the foll. order: (1) niraya purgatory, (2) tiracchānayoni the brute oreation, (3) pittivisaya the ghost world (4) manussā (m-loka) human beings, (5) devā gods MN i.73; DN iii.234; AN iv.459; Nd ii.550; cp. SN v.474

77 Vism 552. They are described in detail in the Pañcagatidīpana (ed. L. Feer, J.P.T.S. 1884, 152 sq.; trsl. by the same in Annales du Musée Guimet v. 514

528) under Naraka-kaṇḍa, Tiracchāna˚, Peta˚, Manussa˚, Deva˚ Of these Nos. 1

3 are considered duggatis, whilst Nos. 4 and 5 are sugati. In later sources we find 6 divisions, viz. 1

3 as above, (4) asurā, (5) manussā (6) devā, of which 1

4 are comprised under apāyā (conditions of suffering, q.v.) or duggatiyo (see Pv iv.11 cp. Pv-a 103). These six also at DN iii.264 ■ lokassa gatiṃ pajānāti Bhagavā Snp 377 (gati = nirayādipañcappabhedaṃ Snp-a 368). The first two gatis are said to be the fate of the micchādiṭṭhino DN i.228, dve niṭṭhā DN-a i.249 (q.v. for var. appl. of gati) as well as the dussīlā (AN i.60), whilst the last two are the share of the sīlavanto (A. i.60).

-gata gone its course (of a legal enquiry, vinicchaya Vin ii.85 (cp. Vin Texts iii.26); Ja ii.1.

agati 1. no course, no access, in agati tava tattha there you have no access SN i.115.

2. = duggati, a wrong course. agatigamana a wrong course of life DN iii.133; AN i.72; AN ii.18 sq.; AN iii.274 sq.; Ja v.510; Pv-a 161. Technically the four agati-gamanāni are: chanda dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚ DN iii.228 (see also under chanda).

sugati (sometimes suggati after duggati e.g. Ja vi.224 a happy existence; a realm of bliss; the devaloka. Cp sugatin. Usually with gacchati (sugatiṃ) & gata “gone to Heaven” Vin ii.195; DN ii.202; Iti 77; Pv-a 65. In combn w. sagga loka (sugatiṃ, etc. uppajjati) DN i.143; AN i.97; Ja i.152. parammaraṇā sugati pāṭikankhā Iti 24; suggatiṃ gata Dhp 18; sugati pāpehi kammehi sulabhā na hoti “bliss is not gained by evil” Pv-a 87 = sugga & dibbaṭṭhāna Pv-a 89; sugati-parāyana sure of rebirth in a realm of bliss, ib.

duggati a miserable existence; a realm of misery (see above gati 4). Usually with gacchati (duggatiṃ gata reborn in a miserable state) or uppajjati DN i.82; AN i.97 AN i.138 (+ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ); ii.123; iii.3; iv.364; Dhp 17; Snp 141; Snp-a 192 (= dukkhappatti); Pv-a 87 Sakakammāni nayanti duggatiṃ, one’s own deeds lead to rebirth in misery, Dhp 240; with ref. to a Peta existence: Pv i.62; ii.16; 113; 317. Cp. duggata.

fr. gacchati; cp. Gr. βάσις, Lat. (in-) ventio, Goth. (ga-)qumps

Gatika

(adj.) 1. going to, staying with, in bhikkhu˚ a person living with the bhikkhus Vin i.148.

2. leading to: yaṃ˚ what they lead to (of the 5 indriyas) SN v.230

3. having a certain gati, leading to one of the four kinds of rebirth: evaṃ˚ DN i.16 (w. ref. to one of the first 3 gatis: DN-a i.108); niyata˚ whose destiny is certain (w. ref. to sugati) and aniyata˚ whose destiny is uncertain (w. ref. to a duggati) Dhp-a iii.173.

Gatin

(adj. = gatika) 1. going, i.e. having a certain course: sabbā nadī vankagatī “every river flows crooked” Ja i.289.

2. having a certain gati, fated destined, esp. in su˚ & dug˚: samparāye suggatī going to a happy existence after death Vin ii.162 = Ja i.219 saggaṃ sugatino yanti “those who have a happy fate (because of leading a good life) go to one of the Heavens” Dhp 126.

Gatimant

(adj.) of (perfect) behaviour, going right, clever (cp. gatatta under gata, & gati 3) MN i.82.

Gatta

(nt.) the body, pl. gattāni the limbs. - As body: Vin i.47; SN i.169 = SN i.183 (analla˚ with pure bodies; anallīna˚ at 169, but v.l. analla˚); AN i.138; Snp 673 (samacchida˚ with bodies cut up); Pv i.112 (bhinna-pabhinna˚, id.); Pv-a 56 (= sarīra); 68 ■ As limbs: SN iv.198 (arupakkāni festering with sores) MN i.506 (id.); MN i.80 = MN i.246; Ja i.61 (lālākilinna˚); Snp 1001 (honti gattesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇā), 1017, 1019; Pv iii.91 (= sarīrâvayavā Pv-a 211); Mil 357 (arupakkāni).

Vedic gātra

Gathita

(adj.) tied, bound, fettered; enslaved, bound to greedy for, intoxicated with (c. loc.). When abs. always in combn w. paribhuñjati and w. ref. to some object of desire (bhoga, lābha, kāmaguṇe). Usually in standing phrase gathita mucchita ajjhāpanna (ajjhopanna) “full of greed & blind desire.” In this connection it is frequently (by B MSS.) spelt gadhita and the editors of S, A, & Mil have put that in the text throughout With mucchita & ajjhāpanna: DN i.245; DN iii.43; MN i.162, MN i.173; SN ii.270; SN iv.332; AN v.178, AN v.181 Nd ii.on nissita C ■ c. loc.: Ja iv.371 (gharesu); DN-a i.59 (kāmaguṇesu). In other connections: ādānaganthaṃ gathitaṃ visajja Snp 794 (cp. Nd i.98); yāni loke gathitāni na tesu pasuto siyā Snp 940Ja iv.5 (= giddha); v.274 (gedhita for pagiddha); Pv-a 262 (gadhita as expln of giddha)-agathita (agadhita) not fettered (by desire without desire, free from the ties of craving (+ m˚, a˚ SN ii.194, SN ii.269; AN v.181; Mil 401 (trsl. Rh.D. ii.339 “without craving, without faintness, without sinking”).

pp. of ganthati to tie, cp. gantha, knot; Sk. grathita

Gada

speech, sentence Dhp i.66, DN-a i.66 f.; and on DN iii.135 (§ 28); gada at SN ii.230 (v.l.) in phrase diṭṭhagadena sallena is to be read diddhagadena s.

Gaddula

(and gaddūla) a leather strap SN iii.150; Ja ii.246; Ja iii.204; fig, in taṇhā-gaddūla “the leash of thirst,” Nd ii.on jappā (taṇhā) = Dhs 1059 = Vb 361, cp. Dhs-a 367.

Gaddūhana

(nt.) a small measure of space & time MN iii.127; SN ii.264 (˚mattam pi, SA “pulling just once the cow’s teat”) AN iv.395; Mil 110. See Trenckner P.M. 59, 60; Rh D. J.R.A.S. 1903, 375.

Derivation unknown; Sk. dadrūghna

Gaddha

a vulture; in gaddhabādhipubbo, of the bhikkhu Ariṭṭha, who had been a vulture trainer in a former life Vin ii.25 = Vin iv.218; MN i.130; see also Vin. Texts ii.377.

Vedic gṛdha; see gijjha

Gadrabha

an ass, donkey Vin v.129; MN i.334; AN i.229; Ja ii.109, Ja ii.110; Ja v.453; DN-a i.163 ■ f. gadrabhī Ja ii.340.

-bhāraka a donkey load Ja ii.109; Dhp-a i.123 -bhāva the fact of being an ass Ja ii.110 ■ rava (-rāva) the braying of an ass ibid. & Vism 415.;

Vedic gardabha., Lat. burdo, a mule; see Walde Lat. Wtb., s. v.

Gadhita

see gathita.

Gantar

“goer” in gantā hoti he will go, he is in the habit of going, combd w. sotā hantā khantā, of the king’s elephant AN ii.116 = AN iii.161; v.l. for gatā at MN ii.155.

n. agent of gacchati in the sense of a periphrastic future

Gantha

(in BB often misspelt gandha)

1. a bond, fetter, trammel; always fig. and usually referring to and enumd as the four bodily ties, or knots (kāya˚, see under kāya): SN v.59 = Dhs 1135; DN iii.230; Nd i.98; Dhp-a iii.276; Dhp-a iii.4 kāyaganthā, viz., abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbataparāmasa idaṃsaccâbhinivesa; thus Nd i.98; Vism 683. In other conn. Snp 347, Snp 798, Snp 847, Snp 857, Snp 912; Nd ii.on jappā (taṇhā); Dhp 211; Pts i.129; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1472 Vb 18, Vb 24, Vb 55, Vb 65, Vb 77, Vb 117, Vb 120; Ne 31, Ne 54, Ne 114, Ne 124 (gandha); Sdhp 616 ■ chinna˚ (adj.) one who has cut the ties (of bad desires, binding him to the body) Combn w. anigha nirāsa SN i.12 (˚gandha), 23; w. asita anāsava Snp 219. Cp. pahīnamānassa na santi ganthā SN i.14. See also ādāna˚; cp. ganthaniya.

2. [only in late Pali, and in Sk.] composition, text, book (not with ref. to books as tied together, but to books as composed, put together. See gantheti 2).

-dhura the burden of the books, i.e. of studying the Scriptures, expld as one who knows by heart one, two or all Nikāyas. Always combd w. vipassanādhuraṃ the burden of contemplation Dhp-a i.8; Dhp-a iv.37; -pamocana the state of being released from, freed from the fetters of the “body” always w. ref.to Nibbāna SN i.210; AN ii.24; Iti 104, cp. 122; -pahīna (adj.) connected with or referring to the ganthas Dhs 1480; opp. vi˚ Dhs 1482.

fr. ganthati

Ganthati & Gantheti

1. to tie, knot, bind, fasten together: kathaṃ mittāni ganthati “how does he bind friends” SN i.214; Snp 185; mālaṃ ganthamāna tying a garland Vv 381 (ganthento Vv-a 173). Of medicines: to mix, to prepare Ja iv.361 ■ pp. ganthita tied, bound, fettered catūhi ganthehiPts i.129 ■ grd. ganthaniya to be tied or tending to act as a tie (of “body”); expl. as ārammaṇa-karaṇa-vasena ganthehi ganthitabba Dhs-a 69; dhammā g˚ ā (“states that tend to be are liable to be ties” Buddh. Ps. p. 305; Expositor 64) Dhs 1141; Dhs 1478 In combn saññojaniya g˚ oghaniya (of rūpa) Dhs 584 = Vb 12; of rūpa-kkhandha Vb 65, of dasāyatanā ib. 77, dasindriyā ib. i.29, saccā g˚ and ag (= gantha-sampayutta & vippayuttā) ib. 117.

2. to put together, to compose: mante ganthetvā (v. l; gandhitvā ) Snp 302, Snp 306.

Vedic grath, granth, grathnāti, to *grem, cp. Lat. gremium; see also gaṇṭhi gathita gantha

Ganthika

(adj.) hard-studying Dhp-a i.156 (bhikkhu; cp. gantha-dhura).

fr. gantha 2

Gandha

smell, viz.

1. odour, smell, scent in gen Ja iii.189; Dhp 54

56 = Mil 333; Dhs 605 under ghānâyatanāni); āma˚ smell of raw flesh AN i.280; DN ii.242; Snp 241 sq; maccha˚ the scent of fish Ja iii.52; muttakarīsa˚ the smell of faeces and urine AN iii.158; catujāti˚ four kinds of scent Ja i.265; Pv-a 127; dibba-g˚puppha a flower of heavenly odour Ja i.289.

2. odour smell in particular: enumerated as mūla˚, sāra˚ puppha˚, etc., SN iii.156 = SN v.44 = AN v.22; Dhs 625 (under ghandāyatanāni, sphere of odours). Specified as māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚ under tīṇi gandhajātāni AN i.225-puppha˚ Dhp 54 = AN i.226.

3. smell as olfactory sensation, belonging to the sphere (āyatanāni) of sense-impressions and sensory objects & enum. in set of the 12 ajjhatta-bāhirāni āyatanāni (see under rūpa with ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā “sensing smell by means of the olfactory organ” DN iii.102; DN iii.244 = DN iii.250 DN iii.269 = Nd ii.on rūpa; MN iii.55, MN iii.267; SN iv.71; Vin i.35 Defined at Vism 447. Also as gandhā ghānaviññeyya under kāmaguṇā MN ii.42; DN iii.234, etc. In series of 10 attributes of physical quality (-rūpa, etc.) as characteristic of devas DN iii.146; Pv ii.958; as sāra˚, pheggu˚ taca˚, etc. (nine qualities in all) in definition of Gandhabba-kāyikā devā SN iii.250 sq ■ In the same sense & similar connections: vaṇṇa-g˚-ras’ûpeto Dhp 49; Ja ii.106; gandhānaṃ khamo & akkhamo (of king’s elephant) AN iii.158 sq.; itthi˚, purisa˚ AN i.1, AN i.2; AN iii.68 in combn w. other four senses Snp 387, Snp 759, Snp 974. 4. perfume, prepared odorific substance used as a toilet requisite, either in form of an unguent or a powder. Abstinence from the use of kallaesthetics is stated in the Sīlas (DN i.8) as characteristic of certain Wanderers and Brahmins. Here gandha is mentioned together with mālā (flowers, garlands): DN i.5 = Kp ii.D i.7 (˚kathā); Vin ii.123; Snp 401; Ja i.50, Ja i.291; Pv-a 62. The use of scented ointment (-vilepana & ālepa see cpds.) is allowed to the Buddhist bhikkhus (Vin i.206); and the giving of this, together with other commodities, is included in the second part of the deyyadhamma (the list of meritorious gifts to the Sangha), under Nos. 5

14 (anna-pāna-vattha-yānamālā-gandhā-vilepana-seyy-âvasatha-padīpeyya): SN iii.252; Nd ii.523 = Iti 65. Out of this enumeration g˚-m˚-v˚-Pv ii.316; chatta-g˚-m˚-upāhanā Pv ii.49ii.936; m˚-g˚-v˚ kappūra-kaṭukapphalāni Ja ii.416. The application of scented ointment (gandhena or gandhehi vilimpati) is customary after a bath, e.g. Pv-a 50 (on Pv i.106); Ja i.254, Ja i.265; Ja iii.277. Var. kinds of perfumes or scented substances are given as g˚dhūpa-cuṇṇa-kappūra (incense, powder, camphor) Ja i.290; vāsa-cuṇṇa-dhūpanādi g˚ Kp-a 37. See also cpds

5. occurs as v.l. for gantha (book).

duggandha a disagreeable smell Dhs 625; ˚ṃ vāyati to emit a nasty odour Pv-a 14; as adj. having a bad smell, putrid Snp 205; Pv-a 15 (= pūtigandha), f ■ ā duggandhā pūti vāyasi “you emit a bad odour” Pv i.61 (= aniṭṭha˚). -sugandha an agreeable smell Dhs 625; as adj. of pleasant smell Ja iii.277; Sdhp. 246.

-āpaṇa a perfumery shop Ja i.290; ˚ika perfume seller Mil 344; -āyatana an olfactory sense-relation, belonging to the six bāhirāni āyatanāni, the objective sensations DN iii.243, DN iii.290; Dhs 585, Dhs 625, Dhs 655; -ārammaṇa bearing on smell, having smell as its object Dhs 147, Dhs 157, Dhs 365 Dhs 410, Dhs 556, Dhs 608; -ālepa (nt.) anointing with perfumes Vin i.206; -āsā “hunger for odours,” craving for olfactory sensations Dhs 1059; -odaka scented water Ja i.50; Ja ii.106; Ja iii.189; -karaṇḍaka a perfume-box SN iii.131; SN v.351; Pp 34; -kuṭī (f.) a perfumed cabin name of a room or hut occupied by the Buddha, esp that made for him by Anāthapiṇḍika in Jetavana (Ja i.92). Gotamassa g˚ Ja ii.416, cp. Avs ii.401 Dhp-a iv.203, Dhp-a iv.206; -cuṇṇa scented (bath-) powder Ja iii.277; -jāta (nt.) odour, perfume (“consisting of smell”). Three kinds at AN i.225 (māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚); enum. as candanādi Dhp-a i.423; in defiName of gandha DN-a i.77Dhp 55; -taṇhā thirst or craving for odours (cp. g˚-āsā) Dhs 1059 = Nd ii.on jappā; -tela scented oil (for a lamp) Ja i.61; Ja ii.104; Dhp-a i.205 -tthena a perfume-thief SN i.204; -dhātu the (sensory element of smell Dhs 585; Dhs 625. 707 (in conn. w. ˚āyatana); -pañcaṅgulika see sep.; -sañcetanā the olfactory sensation; together with ˚saññā perception of odours DN iii.244; AN iv.147; AN v.359; -sannidhi the storing up of scented unguents DN i.6 (= DN-a i.82).

Vedic gandha, from ghrā ghrāti to smell, ghrāna smell, & see P. ghāna. Possibly conn. w. Lat. fragro E. fragrant

Gandhana

see gandhina.

Gandhabba

1. a musician, a singer Ja ii.249 sq.; Ja iii.188; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 137.

2. a Gandharva or heavenly musician, as a class (see ˚kāyika) belonging to the demigods who inhabit the Cātummahārājika realm DN ii.212; AN ii.39 (as birds); iv.200 (with asurā & nāgā), 204, 207; cp. SN iii.250 sq.; also said to preside over child-conception: MN i.265 sq.; Mil 123 sq.

-kāyika belonging to the company of the G. SN iii.250 sq.; Pv-a 119; -mānusā (pl.) G. & men Dhp 420; Snp 644; -hatthaka “a G ■ hand,” i.e. a wooden instrument in the shape of a bird’s claw with which the body was rubbed in bathing Vin ii.106, see Vin. Texts iii.67.

Vedic gandharva

Gandhabbā

(f.) music, song Ja ii.254; Vv-a 139; Mil 3; ˚ṃ karoti to make music Ja ii.249; Ja iii.188.

Gandhāra

(adj.) belonging to the Gandhāra country (Kandahar) f. gandhārī in gandhārī vijjā Name of a magical charm DN i.213; at Ja iv.498 it renders one invisible.

Gandhika

(and ˚uja Pv ii.120; ii.121)

1. having perfume, fragrant, scentful, Ja i.266 (su˚); Pv ii.110 (= surabhigandha); ii.121 (sogandhiya); Vv-a 58 (read gandhikāgandhikehi).

2. dealing in perfume, a perfumer Mil 262 (cp. gandhin 2).

Gandhin

(adj.) 1. having a scent of, smelling of (-˚), i.e. candana˚ of sandal wood Ja iii.190; gūtha of˚ faeces Pv ii.315 (= karīsavāyinī Pv-a).

2. dealing with scents a perfumer Pv-a 127 (= māgadha; cp. gandhika 2).

Gandhina

in kule antimagandhina Ja iv.34 (expl. by sabbapacchimaka) and gandhana in kula-gandhana Iti 64 see under kula˚.

Gabbita

(adj.) proud, arrogant Ja ii.340 (˚bhāva = issariya); iii.264 (˚sabhāva = dittasabhāva); Sum. V. on DN iii.153 (= avamata).

Gabbha

1. interior, cavity (loc. gabbhe in the midst of: angāra˚ Ja iii.55); an inner room, private chamber, bedroom, cell. Of a Vihāra Vin ii.303; Vin iii.119; Vin iv.45; Vv-a 188; Vv-a 220Ja i.90 (siri˚ royal chamber); iii.276; Vv 785 (= ovaraka Vv-a 304); Dhp-a i.397; Mil 10, Mil 295. See also anto˚. 2. the swelling of the (pregnant) womb, the womb (cp kucchi). ˚ṃ upeti to be born Dhp 325 = Thag 17 Ne 34, Ne 129; ˚ṃ upapajjati to be born again Dhp 126 gabbhā gabbhaṃ… dukkaṃ nigacchanti from womb to womb (i.e. from birth to birth) Snp 278; gabbhato paṭṭhāya from the time of birth Ja i.290, Ja i.293. As a symbol of defilement g. is an ep. of kāma AN iv.289, etc

3. the contents of the womb, i.e. the embryo foetus: dasa māse ˚ṃ kucchinā pariharitvā having nourished the foetus in the womb for 10 months DN ii.14 dibbā gabbhā DN i.229; on g. as contained in kucchi foetus in utero, see Ja i.50 (kucchimhi patiṭṭhito) 134 ii.2; iv.482; MN i.265; Mil 123 (gabbhassa avakkanti); Dhp-a i.3, Dhp-a i.47; Dhp-a ii.261Pv i.67; Pv-a 31; gabbho vuṭṭhāsi the child was delivered Vin ii.278; itthi-gabbho & purisa˚ female & male child Ja i.51; gabbhaṃ pāteti to destroy the foetus Vin ii.268; apagatagabbhā (adj. having had a miscarriage Vin ii.129; mūḷha-gabbhā id. MN ii.102 (+ visatā˚); paripuṇṇa-gabbhā ready to be delivered Ja i.52; Pv-a 86; saññi˚ a conscious foetus DN i.54 = MN i.518 = SN iii.212; sannisinna-gabbhā having conceived Vin ii.278.

-avakkanti (gabbhe okkanti Nd ii.3041) conception DN iii.103, DN iii.231; Vism 499, Vism 500 (˚okkanti); this is followed by gabbhe ṭhiti & gabbhe vuṭṭhāna, see Nd;2; -āsaya the impurities of childbirth Pv iii.53 (= ˚mala) -karaṇa effecting a conception Snp 927; -gata leaving the womb, in putte gabbhagate when the child was born Pv-a 112; -dvāra the door of the bed-chamber Ja i.62; -pariharaṇa = next Vism 500; -parihāra “the protection of the embryo,” a ceremony performed when a woman became pregnant Ja ii.2; Dhp-a i.4; -pātana the destruction of the embryo, abortion, an abortive preparation Vin iii.83 sq.; Pv i.66 (akariṃ); Pv-a 31 (dāpesi); Dhp-a i.47 (˚bhesajja); -mala the uncleanness of delivery, i.e. all accompanying dirty matter Pv-a 80, Pv-a 173 (as food for Petas), 198; Dhp-a iv.215; -vīsa in ahañc’ amhi gabbhavīso “I am 20 years, counting from my conception” Vin i.93; -vuṭṭhāna (nt.) childbirth delivery Ja i.52; Dhp-a i.399; Dhp-a ii.261; -seyyā (f.) the womb; only in expressions relating to reincarnation as: na punar eti (or upeti) gabbhaseyyaṃ “he does not go into another womb,” of an Arahant Snp 29, Snp 152 Snp 535; Vv 5324; and gabbhaseyyaka (adj.) one who enters another womb Vb 413 sq.; Vism 272, Vism 559, Vism 560 Bdhd 77, 78.

Vedic garbha, either to *gelbh, as in Lat. galba, Goth. kalbo, Ohg. kalba, E. calf, or *gṷe bh, as in Gr.δελφύς womb, αδελφός sharing the womb, brother δέλφας young pig; cp. *gelt in Goth. kilpei womb. Ags cild, Ger. kind, E. child. Meaning: a cavity, a hollow or, seen from its outside, a swelling

Gabbhara

(nt.) a cavern Snp 416 (giri˚); Vv 635 (giri˚).

Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. gahvara

Gabbhinī

(adj. f.) pregnant, enceinte Vin ii.268; SN iii.202; Ja i.151, Ja i.290; Ja iv.37; Pv i.66; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 82: Vv-a 110 (-bhāva); in combn g˚ pāyamānā purisantaragatā (pregnant, lactating & having had sex. intercourse AN i.295 = AN ii.206 = MN i.77, MN i.238, MN i.307, MN i.342 = Pp 55; with utunī anutunī (menstruating & having ceased to menstruate) AN iii.226 sq.

˚Gama

1. adj. going, able to go; going to, leading to; in vihangama going in the air Snp 221, Snp 606; Th i.1108; Ja i.216 (cp. gamana); aghasi˚ id. Vv 161 (= vehāsaṃ Vv-a 78); nabhasi˚ going on clouds Snp 687; nibbāna leading to N. SN v.11; dūraṃ˚ going far, hadayaṃ˚ going to one’s heart, q.v.

2. m. course, going to; in atthaṃ going home, going to rest, etc., q.v.

Gamana

1. (nt.) the fact or the state of going, movement, journey, walk; (-˚) striving for, the leading of, pursuit AN ii.48 sq. (gamanena na pattabbo lokass’ anto = one cannot walk to the end of the world); Dhp 178 (saggassa going to heaven); Snp 40, Snp 691, cp. vāraṃ˚; Ja i.62; Ja i.216 (in expl. of vihaṃgama: (ākāse) gamanato pakkhī vihaṃ gamā ti vuccanti); 295; Pv-a 57 ■ pahiṇa˚ going on messages DN i.5, etc.; agati˚ wrong pursuit, ˚ṃ gacchati to pursue a wrong walk of life AN ii.18; Pv-a 161; magga tramping, being on the road Pv-a 43; saraṇa˚ finding shelter (in the Dhamma) Pv-a 49.

2. (adj.) (-˚) going or leading to, conducive to: nibbāna˚ maggo the Path leading to Nibbāna SN i.186; Dhp 289; duggati˚ magga the road to misery Thig 355; duggamana-ṭṭhānā (pl. inaccessible places Pv-a 102 (in expl. of duggā).

-antarāya an obstacle to one’s departure Ja i.62 -āgamana going & coming, rise and set Vv 83;6 (= ogamanuggamana Vv-a 326); Dhp-a i.80 (˚kāle); ˚sampanna senāsana a dwelling or lodging fit for going and coming, i.e. easily accessible AN v.15; Ja i.85; ˚ṃ karoti to go to and fro Vv-a 139. -kamma going away Dhp-a ii.81. -kāraṇa a reason for or a means to going, in ˚ṃ karoti to try to go Ja i.2; -bhāva the state of having gone away Ja ii.133; -magga (pleonastic) the way Ja i.202; Ja i.279; -vaṇṇa the praise of his course or journey Ja i.87.

Gamanīya

(adj.; grd to gam ) 1. as grd. to gacchati: (a place where one) ought to go; in a˚ not to be gone to (+ ṭhāna) Vv-a 72.

2. as grd. to gameti: in bhogā pahāya gamanīyā (riches that have) to be given up (by leaving) Kp viii.8 (see expl. as Kp-a 223); Pv-a 87 (= kālikā, transient).

Gamika

(and gamiya Ja i.87) (adj.) going away, setting out for a journey (opp. āgantuka coming back) appl. to bhikkhus only: Vin i.292 (˚ bhatta food for outgoing bh.); ii.170 (āgantuka˚), 211, 265; v.196; Ja vi.333 (āgantuka˚). See also under abhisankhāra. Cp. Av Ś i.87; Divy 50.

Gamina

(adj.) being on a “gati,” only at Snp 587 in “aññe pi passe gamine yathākamm’ ûpage nare.”

Gameti

to make go, to send, to set into motion, to cause to go Iti 115 (anabhāvaṃ to destroy) see under gacchati.

caus. of gacchati

Gambhīra

(adj.) deep, profound, unfathomable, well founded, hard to perceive difficult ■ (a) lit. of lakes: Dhp 83; Pv ii.119 (= agādha) Pp 46; of a road (full of swamps) Ja i.196 ■ (b) fig of knowledge & wisdom: dhammo g. duddaso… MN i.487; SN i.136; Tathāgato g. appameyyo duppariyogāho MN i.487; parisā g. (opp. uttāna, shallow, superficial thoughtless) AN i.70; g. ṭhāna w. ref. jhāna, etc Pts ii.21; saddhamma g. Sdhp. 530; g. gūḷha nipuṇa Nd 342; lokanātho nipuṇo g. Pv-a 1; also w. nipuṇa Ja vi.355; Mil 234; Bdhd. 118, 137 ■ (nt.) the deep deep ground, i.e. secure foundation Snp 173; Kp viii.1 Kp viii.3 (see Kp-a 217).

-avabhāsa (adj.) having the appearance of depth or profundity, DN ii.55; SN ii.36; Pp 46 (+ uttāna), cp Pp A 226; -pañña one whose wisdom is profound Snp 176, Snp 230; Snp 627 = Dhp 403 (+ medhāvin) cp. Dhp-a iv.169 & see Ps; ii.192 for detailed explanation; -sita resting on depth (of soil), well-founded AN iv.237.

Vedic gambhīra & gabhīra

Gambhīratā

(f.) depth Dhp-a i.92.

abstr. fr. prec.

Gamma

(adj.) of or belonging to the village, common, pagan (cp. Fr. villain), always combd with hīna, low & pagan Vin i.10 and ≈ (anta standard of life); AN iii.325 (dassana, view); DN iii.130 (sukhallikânuyoga, hedonist) Sdhp 254. Cp. pothujjanika

fr. gāma. Vedic gramya

Gayha

(adj.) to be taken, to be seized, as nt, the grip, in gayhūpaga (adj.) for being taken up, for common use Snp-a 283 ■ (nt.) that which comes into one’s grasp, movable property, acquisition of property Dhp-a ii.29; Dhp-a iii.119; Pv-a 4. As gayhūpakaṃ at Ja iv.219.

grd. of gayhati; Vedic grāhya

Gayhaka

(adj. = gayha) one who is to be taken (prisoner), in ˚niyyamāna id. SN i.143 = Ja iii.361 (expl. as karamaragāhaṃ gahetvā niyyamāna; cp. karamara).

Gayhati

to get seized, to be taken (see gaṇhāti); p.pres. gayhamāna being caught Dhp-a iii.175 (˚ka) ■ grd. gayha.

Pass. to gaṇhāti

Garahaka

(adj.) finding fault with, rebuking; in paṭhavī˚ āpa˚, etc., combd w. paṭhavī-jigucchaka, etc. (disgusted w. the great elements) MN i.327.

Garahaṇa

(nt.) reproof Vv-a 16, as f. ˚ṇā at Vism 29.

Garahati

to reproach, to blame, scold, censure, find fault with: agarahiyam mā garahittha “do not blame the blameless” SN i.240; DN i.161 (tapaṃ to reject, disapprove of); DN iii.92, DN iii.93 (aor. garahi, grd. garahitabba); Snp 313, Snp 665; Mil 222 (+ jigucchanti); Pv-a 125, Pv-a 126; Sdhp. 382 ■ pp garahita blameworthy Dhp 30 (pamādo); Snp 313; Ja v.453; Mil 288 (dasa puggalā g.). agarahita blameless faultless Pv-a 89 (= anindita, 131) ■ See also gārayha & cp. vi˚.;

Vedic garhati Dhtp 340 nindāyaṃ

Garahā

(f.) blame, reproach DN i.135 “stating an example,” see DA i.296; DN iii.92, DN iii.93; Snp 141; Ja i.10 (garahapaṭicchādanabhāva preventing all occasion for finding fault); 132 (garaha-bhaya-bhīta for fear of blame), 135 (garahatthe as a blame); Ne 184.

Garahin

(adj.) blaming, censuring Snp 660 (ariya˚), 778 (atta˚), 913 (anatta˚); Mil 380 (pāpa˚).

Garu

1. adj. (a) lit. heavy, opp. lahu light, appl;d to bhāra, a load SN iii.26; Ja i.196 (= bhārika); vi.420; Dhp-a i.48; Sdhp 494 (rūpagarubhāra the heavy load of “form”). Compar. garutara (as against Sk. garīyaṃ Pv-a 191 ■ (b) fig. important, to be esteemed, valued or valuable AN iii.110 sq. (piya manāpa g. bhavanīya) c. gen. or-˚ bent on (often in sequence ˚garu, ˚ninna ˚poṇa, etc., e.g. Vism 135); pursuing, paying homage to, reverent; (or) esteemed by, honoured, venerated Satthugaru esteeming the Lord; Dhamma˚, Sanghe g. AN iii.331 = AN iv.28 sq.; dosa˚ SN i.24; kodha˚, saddhamma˚ (pursuing, fostering) AN ii.46 sq. = 84 sq. Sdhp 1 (sabba-loka˚ worshipped by all the world) Dpvs iv.12agaru (c. gen.) irreverent towards Snp p.51 (Gotamassa). Cp. garuka, gārava; also agaru agalu.

2. N. a venerable person, a teacher: garunaṃ dassanāya & sakāsaṃ Snp 325, Snp 326 (v.l. garūnaṃ to be preferred, so also Snp-a 332, Snp-a 333); garūnaṃ dārā Iti 36-garukaroti (for garuṃ k˚) to esteem, respect, honour usually in series sakkaroti g˚ māneti pūjeti Vin ii.162; MN i.31; DN i.91; AN iii.76; AN iv.276; Nd ii.334 (on namati) 530 (on yasassin); Pv-a 54. Expl. at DN-a i.256 by gāravaṃ karoti. -garukātabba worthy of esteem Pv-a 9 ■ garukāra (sakkāra g. mānana vandana esteem, honour, regard Pp 19 = Dhs 1121 ■ See also guru.

-upanissita (adj.) depending on a teacher, one being taught Pts ii.202; -ṭṭhāniya one who takes the place of a teacher AN iii.21, AN iii.393; Ne 8; Vism 344. -dhamma a rule to be observed. There are 8 chief rules enum at Vin ii.255 = AN iv.276, AN iv.280; see also Vin iv.51, Vin iv.315 Vin v.136. Taken in the sense of a violation of these rules Vin i.49 = Vin ii.226; Vin i.52, Vin i.143, Vin i.144; Vin ii.279; -nissaya in ˚ṃ gaṇhāti to take up dependency on a teacher, i.e. to consider oneself a pupil Vin ii.303; -saṃvasa association with a teacher Nd ii.235 Nd ii.4˚; Mil 408.

Vedic guru; Gr. βαρύς, Lat. gravis & brutus, Goth. kaurus

Garuka

somewhat heavy.

1. lit. Ja i.134 (of the womb in pregnancy); Dhp 310; Mil 102. Usually coupled & contrasted with; lahuka, light: in def. of sense of touch Dhs 648; similarly w. sithila, dhanita dīgha, rassa Mil 344; DN-a i.177 (in expl. of dasavidha vyañjana).

2. fig. (a) heavy, grave, serious esp. appld to- āpatti, breach of regulations, offence (opp. lahuka Vin v.115, Vin v.130, Vin v.145, Vin v.153; Dhp 138 (ābādha, illness) appld to kamma at Vism 601 (one of the four kinds) nt. as adv. considerably Mil 92 (˚ṃ parinamati). (b) important, venerable, worthy of reverence Thig 368 (Satthu sāsana = garukātabba Thag-a 251); Mil 140 ■ (c)-˚ “heavy on,” bent on, attaching importance to: nahāna˚ fond of bathing Vin i.196; tadattha engaged in (jhāna) Nd ii.264; kamma˚ attributing importance to k. Nd ii.411; saddhamma˚ revering the Doctrine Sdhp. 520. Nibbāna-garuka Vism 117 (+ Nâdhimutta & N-pabbhāra).;

-āpatti a grievous offence, see above. As terasa g-˚ino at Mil 310.

from garu

Garutta

(nt.) the fact of being honoured or considered worthy of esteem, honourableness AN v.164 sq.

Garuḷa

. Name of a mythical bird, a harpy Pts ii.196 = Nd ii.235, Nd ii.3 q.; Vism 206; Vv-a 9 (= supaṇṇa) Dhp-a i.144.

Derivation uncertain. Sk. garuḍa, Lat. volucer winged, volo to fly

Gala

the throat Ja i.216, Ja i.264 Ja iii.26; Ja iv.494: i.194 (a dewlap); Pv-a 11, Pv-a 104.

-agga the top of the throat Sdhp 379; -ajjhoharaniya able to be swallowed (of solid food) Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875 -ggaha taking by the throat, throttling DN i.144 (+ daṇḍapahāra); -nāḷī the larynx Dhp-a i.253; Dhp-a ii.257 -ppamāṇa (adj.) going up to the neck Ja i.264 (āvāṭa) -pariyosāṇa forming the end of the throat Ja iii.126 -ppavedhaka (nt.) pain in the throat MN i.371; -mūla the bottom of the throat Pv-a 283. -vāṭaka the bottom (?) of the throat (oesophagus?) Vism 185, Vism 258.

Note.- gala with many other words containing a guttural + liquid element belongs to the onomatopoetic roots k̥l g̥l (k̥r g̥r), usually reduplicated (iterative), the main applications of which are the following:

1. The (sounding) throat in designation of swallowing, mostly with a dark (guttural) vowel: gulp, belch gargle, gurgle.

2. The sound produced by the throat (voice) or sound in general, particularly of noises or sounds either inarticulate, confused & indefinable or natural sounds striking enough; per se to form a sufficient means of recognition (i.e. name) of the animal which utters this sound (cuckoo, e.g. ). To be divided into:

A. palatal group (“light” sounds): squeak, yell giggle, etc., applied to-(a) Animate Nature: the cackling, crowing noise of Palmipeds & related birds reminding of laughter (heron, hen, cock; cp. P. koñca Lat. gallus)-(b) Inanimate Nature: the grinding nibbling, trickling, dripping, fizzing noises or sounds (P. galati, etc.).

B. guttural group (“dark” sounds): groan, growl howl, etc., appld to-(a) Animate N.: the snorting grunting noise of the Pachyderms & related quadrupeds (elephant, op. P. koñca, kuñjara; pig, boar)-(b) Inanimate N.: the roaring, crashing, thundering noises (P gaḷagaḷāyati, ghurughurāyati).

3. The sound as indicating motion (produced by motion):

A. palatal group (“sharp” sounds, characteristic of quick motion: whizz, spin, whirl): P. gaggaraka whirlpool Gr. κερκίς spindle, bobbin.

B. guttural group (“dull” sounds, characteristic of slow and heavy motion: roll, thud, thunder). Sometimes with elimination of the sound-element appld to swelling & fullness, as in “bulge” or Gr. σφαραγέω (be full).

These three categories are not always kept clearly separate, so that often a palatal group shifts into the sphere of a guttural one & vice versa ■ The formation of k̊l gI̊ roots is by no means an extinct process nor is it restricted to any special branch of a linguistic; family, as examples show. The main roots of Idg origin are the foll. which are all represented in Pāli (the categories are marked acc. to the foregoing scheme 1, 2A, 2B, 3): kal (2A): κλάζω, clango, Goth. hlahjan laugh; kār (2 A): κ ̈ηρυς, Sk. kāru (cp. P. kitti) cārmen; kel (2 A): κέλαδος, calo (cp. P. kandati) Ohg. hellan; ker (2 Aa): καρκαίρω, κόρκορος = querquedula = kakkara (partridge); kol (2 B): cuculus kokila (a); kolāhala and halāhala (b); kor (2 Ba) cornix (cp. P. kāka), corvus = crow = raven; Sk. krośati P. koñca ■ gṷel (1) Lat. gula, glutio, δέλεαρ; gṷer (1) βόρος, βιβρώσκω, Lat. voro, Sk. girati, Ohg querka; (3) βάραχρον (whirlpool) Sk. gargara: gel (1) Sk. gilati, Ohg. kela- gal (2 A): gallus (a) gloria (b); gar (2 Ab): γ ̈ηρυς, garrulus, Ohg. kara: gel (2 A) ξελιδών (a) hirrio (to whine), Ohg. gellan (b): ger (1) γαργαρίζω (gargle) Sk. gharghara (gurgling) (2 Aa) γέρανος = crane, Ger. krähen, Lat. gracillo (cackle); (2 Ba) Ohg. kerran (grunt), Sk. gṛṇāti (sing) (2 Ab) Sk. jarate (rustle); gur (2 Ba): γρύζω = grundio grunt; Lat. gurgulio; Sk. ghurghura.

With special reference to Pāli formations the foll list shows a few sound roots which are further discussed in the Dictionary s. v. Closely connected with Idg. k̊l gI̊ is the Pāli cerebral ṭ, tḥ, ḷ, ṇ, so that roots with these sounds have to be classed in a mutual relation with the liquids. In most cases graphic representation varies between both (cp. gala & gaḷa)-; kil (kiṇ) (2 Ab): kikī (cp. Sk. kṛka˚), kilikilāyati & kinkiṇāyati (tinkle) kili (click), kinkaṇika (bell); kur (2 B): ākurati to hawk to be hoarse; khaṭ; (1) khaṭakhaṭa (hawking) kākacchati (snore); (2 Aa) kukkuṭa (cock); gal (1) gala (throat) uggilati (vomit); (2 Ab) galati (trickle): (2 Ba Pk. galagajjiya (roar) & guluguliya (bellow); (2 Bb gaḷagaḷāyati (roar); gar (2 A); gaggara (roar & cackle cp. Sk. gargara to 3); (2 B); gaggarāyati (roar); (3) gaggaraka (whirlpool); ghar (1) Sk. gharghara (gurgling) (2 Ab) gharati (trickle), Sk. ghargharikā (bell); (2 Bb ghurughurāyati (grunt) ■ See also kakaca, kanka kankaṇa, cakora (cankora), cakkavaka, jagghati, ciṭiciṭāyati taṭataṭayati, timingala, papphāsa.

*gel to devour, to swallow = Lat. gula, Ohg. kela, cp. Sk. gala jalukā, and *gṷel, as Gr. δέλεαρ, cp. also Sk. girati, gilati Dhtp 262 gives as meaning of gal “adana.” This root gal also occurs at Vism 410 in fanciful def. of “puggala”; the meaning here is not exactly sure (to cry, shout?)

Galaka

(nt.) throat Ja iii.481; Ja iv.251.

Gaḷa

1. a drop, i.e. a fall: see gaḷāgala.

2. a swelling, a boil (= gaṇḍa Ja iv.494 (mattā gajā bhinnagaḷā elephants in rut, with the temple-swellings broken; expl. p. 497 by madaṃ gaḷantā); Snp 61 (? v.l. gaṇḍa).

3. a hook, a fishhook Snp 61 (?), expl. at Snp-a 114 by ākaḍḍhanavasena baḷiso.

gaḷāgaḷaṃ gacchati to go from drop to drop, i.e. from fall to fall, w. ref. to the gatis Ja v.453 (expl. by apāyaṃ gacchati).

same as gala, see note on prec.

Gaḷagaḷāyati

to roar, to crash, to thunder; deve gaḷagaḷāyate (loc. abs.) in a thunderstorm, usually as deve vassante deve g˚; amidst rain and heavy thunder DN ii.132; SN i.106; AN v.114 sq (gala˚); Thag 189; Mil 116 (gaganaṃ ravati galag˚) Kp-a 163 (mahāmegha) ■ Gangā galagalantī the roaring Gangā Mil 122 (cp. halāhalasadda ibid.).

= gaggarāyati, see note on gala

Gaḷati

(and galati) [Sk. galati, cp. Ohg. quellan to well up, to flow out; see note on gala and cp. also jala water 1. to drip, flow, trickle (trs. & intr.) Vin i.204 (natthu g.); MN i.336 (sīsaṃ lohitena gaḷati); Ja iv.497 (madaṃ) iv.3 (lohitaṃ g.); v.472 (do. v.l. paggharati); Pv iv.53 (assukāni g.).

2. to rain Thag 524 (deve gaḷantamhi in a shower of rain. Cp. gala-gaḷāyati).

3. to drop down, to fall Dhp-a ii.146 (suriyo majjhaṭṭhānato galito)-Cp. pari˚.

Gaḷayati

to drip, to drop, in assukāni g. to shed tears Snp 691.

denom. to gaḷa in sense of gaḷati 1

Gaḷita

rough, in a˚ smooth Ja v.203, Ja v.206 (+ mudu & akakkasa); vi.64.

Gaḷocī

(f.). Name of a shrub (Cocculus cordifolius); in gaḷocilatā Dhp-a iii.110; a creeper. Cp. pūtilatā.

Gava˚

base of the N. go, a bull, cow, used in cpds. See gāv˚, go.

-akkha a kind of window Mvu 9. 15, 17; -āghātana slaughtering of cows Vin i.182 ■ âssa cows & horses Vin v.350; DN i.5~; Snp 769; -caṇḍa fierce towards cows Pp 47; -pāna milky rice pudding Ja i.33-(˚m)pati “lord of cows,” a bull Snp 26, Snp 27 (usabha).

Gavacchita

furnished with netting (?) (Hardy in Index) Vv-a 276, of a carriage (= suvaṇṇajālavitata).

Gavaja

see gavaya.

Gavaya

(and gavaja) a species of ox, the gayal Ja v.406. (˚ja = khagga) Mil 149; Dhs-a 331.

Sk. gavaya, cp. gavala, buffalo

Gavi

a tree-like creeper, in -pphala the fruit of a g. Snp 239 (= rukkhavalliphala Snp-a).

˚Gavesaka

(adj. fr. next) looking for, seeking Ja i.176 (kāraṇa˚); ii.3 (aguṇa˚).

Gavesati

to seek, to search for, to wish for, strive after Dhp 146 (gavessatha), 153; Thag 183; Nd ii.2, Nd ii.70, Nd ii.427; Ja i.4, Ja i.61; Mil 326; Pv-a 187, Pv-a 202 (aor. gavesi = vicini); Bdhd 53 In Nd ii.always in combn esati gavesati pariyesati.

gava + esati. Vedic gaveṣate. Origin. to search after cows. Dhtp 298 = maggana tracking

Gavesana

search for Pv-a 185.

Gavesin

(adj.) seeking, looking for, striving after (usually -˚) DN i.95 (tāṇa˚, etc.); Dhp 99 (kāma˚), 245 (suci˚), 355 (pāra˚); Nd ii.503 (in expl. of mahesi, with esin pariyesin); Bdhd 59.

Gassetuṃ

at Dhs-a 324 is to be corrected into dassetuṃ.

Gaha1

a house, usually in cpds. (see below). Ja iii.396 (= the layman’s life; Com. geha).

-kāraka a house-builder, metaph. of taṇhā (cp. kāya as geha) Dhp 153, Dhp 154 = Thag 183, Thag 184; Dhp-a iii.128 -kūṭa the peak of a house, the ridge-pole, metaph. of ignorance Dhp 154 (= kaṇṇika-maṇḍala Dhp-a 128) replacing thūṇirā (pillar) at Thag 184 in corresp passage (= kaṇṇikā Com.); -ṭṭha a householder one who leads the life of a layman (opp anagāra, pabbajita or paribbājaka) Vin i.115 (sagahaṭṭhā parisā an assembly in which laymen were present); SN i.201; AN iii.114, AN iii.116, AN iii.258; It. 112 (gharaṃ esino gahaṭṭhā) Dhp 404 = Snp 628; Snp 43 (gharaṃ āvasanto, see Nd ii.226 for explanation), 90, 134 (paribbājaṃ gahaṭṭhaṃ vā) 398, 487; Sdhp 375. -˚vatta a layman’s rule of conduct Snp 393 (= agāriyā paṭipadā Snp-a 376) -˚ka belonging to a layman; acting as a layman or in the quality of a l. AN ii.35 (kinkaraṇiyāni) iii.296 (brahmacariyā); -pati see sep.

see under gaṇhāti

Gaha2

“seizer,” seizing, grasping, a demon, any being or object having a hold upon man. So at SN i.208 where Sānu is “seized by an epileptic fit (see note in K.S. i.267, 268). Used of dosa (anger) Dhp 251 (exemplified at Dhp-a iii.362 by ajagara˚ the grip of a boa, kumbhīla˚ of a crocodile yakkha˚ of a demon). sagaha having crocodiles, full of e. (of the ocean) (+ sarakkhasa) Iti 57. Cp. gahaṇa & saṃ˚.;

Sk. graha, gaṇhāti, q.v. for etym.

Gahaṇa

(adj.) seizing, taking; acquiring; (n.) seizure, grasp, hold, acquisition Vism 114 (in detail) usually -˚: nāma˚-divase on the day on which a child gets its name (lit. acquiring a name) Ja i.199, Ja i.262 arahatta˚ Dhp-a i.8; dussa˚ Dhp-a ii.87; maccha˚ Ja iv.139; hattha˚ Ja i.294; byanjana˚-lakkhaṇa Ne 27 gahaṇatthāya in order to get… Ja i.279; Ja ii.352. amhākaṃ g˚ sugahaṇaṃ we have a tight grip Ja i.222, Ja i.223.

fr. gaṇhāti

Gahaṇī

(f.) the “seizer,” a supposed organ of the body dealing with digestion and gestation. Sama-vepākiniyā g˚ iyā samannāgata “endowed with good digestion” DN ii.177 = DN iii.166. Same phrase at Av Ś i.168, 172. Cp. Vedic graha. B. Psy. 59, 67.

Gahaṇika in phrase saṃsuddha -gahaṇika coming from a clean womb, of pure descent, in the enum. of the indispensable good qualities of a brahmin or a noble DN i.113, DN i.115, DN i.137 (gahaṇī expl. as kucchi DN-a i.281) AN i.163, AN iii.154, AN iii.223; Snp p.115. Ja i.2; duṭṭha-gahaṇika having a bad digestion Vin i.206.

Gahana

1. adj. deep, thick, impervious, only in a˚ clear, unobstructed, free from obstacles Vv 187 (akanataka + ); Mil 160 (gahanaṃ a kataṃ the thicket is cleared).

2. nt. an impenetrable place, a thicket jungle, tangle ■ (a) 18 gahanāni at Ja v.46; usually appl. to grass: tiṇa˚ AN i.153 = AN iii.128 (+ rukkha˚); Mil 369; adj. tiṇagahanā obstructed with grass (of vihārā) Vin ii.138SN i.199 (rukkhamūla˚); Ja i.7, Ja i.158; Pv-a 5 (pabbata˚), 43; Vv-a 230 (vana˚) ■ (b) fig. imperviousness, entanglement, obstruction appl. to diṭṭhi, the jungle of wrong views or heresy (usually combd w. diṭṭhi-kantāra, the wilderness of d., see diṭṭhi) MN i.8, MN i.485; Pp 22; DN-a i.108. Of rāga˚, moha˚, etc., and kilesa˚ Nd ii.630 (in expl. of Satthā; rāgagahanaṃ tāreti); Dhp-a iv.156 (on Dhp 394) Vv-a 96 ■ manussa˚ MN i.340.

-ṭṭhāna a lair in the jungle Ja i.150, Ja i.253.

Sk. gahana, cp. also ghana

Gahapati

the possessor of a house, the head of the household pater familias (freq. + seṭṭhi).

1. In formulas (a) as regards social standing, wealth & clanship: a man of private (i.e. not official) life, classed w. khattiyā brāhmaṇā in kh˚-mahāsālā, wealthy Nobles, brahm˚mahāsālā do. Brahmins, gah˚-m˚ well-to-do gentry SN i.71; Nd ii.135; Dhp-a i.388 ■ kh˚-kula, br˚-kula g˚-kula the kh˚, etc. clans: Vin ii.161; Ja i.218. kh˚ amaccā, br˚, g.˚ DN i.136 ■ (b) as regards education mode of life ranking with kh˚, br˚, g.˚ and samaṇā Vin i.227; AN i.66; Nd ii.235, see also cpd ■ paṇḍita. 2. Other applications: freq. in combn brāhmaṇagahapatikā priests & yeomen: see gahapatika. In comb;n w. gahapatiputta (cp. kulaputta) it comprises the members of the g. rank, clansmen of the (middle class, and implies a tinge of “respectable people” esp in addresses. So used by the Buddha in enumerating the people as gahapati vā gah˚-putto vā aññatarasmiṃ vā kule paccājāto DN i.62; MN i.344. gahapatī ca gahapatāniyo householders and their wives AN ii.57. In sg the voc. gahapati may be rendered by “Sir” (Mil 17 e.g. and freq.), & in pl. gahapatayo by “Sirs” (e.g. Vin i.227; MN i.401; AN ii.57) ■ As regards occupation all resp. businesses are within the sphere of the g., most frequently mentioned as such are seṭṭhino (see below & cp. seṭṭhi˚ Vin i.16, but also kassaka, farmer AN i.229 AN i.239 sq.; and dārukammika, carpenter AN iii.391. Var duties of a g. enum. at AN i.229, AN i.239 ■ The wealth comfortably-living position of a g. is evident from an expression like kalyāṇa-bhattiko g. a man accustomed to good food Vin ii.77 = Vin iii.160 ■ f. gahapatānī Vin iii.211, Vin iii.213 sq., 259 (always w. gahapati); Dhp-a i.376 pl. gahapatāniyo see above ■ Note. The gen. sg. of gahapati is ˚ino (Ja i.92) as well as-issa (Vin i.16; DN iii.36).

3. Single cases of gahapatis, where g almost assumes the function of a title are Anāthapiṇḍika g. Vin ii.158 sq.; SN i.56; SN ii.68; AN ii.65; Ja i.92; Pv-a 16 Meṇḍaka g. Vin i.240 sq.; Citta SN iv.281 sq.; Nakulapitā SN ii.1 sq.; Potaliya MN i.359; Sandhāna DN iii.36 sq. Hāliddikāni SN ii.9 ■ See next.

-’aggi the sacred fire to be maintained by a householder interpreted by the Buddha as the care to be bestowed on one’s children & servants AN iv.45; see enum. under aggī at AN iv.41; DN iii.217; -cīvara the robe of a householder (i.e. a layman’s robe) Vin i.280 sq.; ˚dhara wearing the householder’s (private man’s robe (of a bhikkhu) MN i.31; AN iii.391 sq.; -necayika (always with brāhmaṇa-mahāsālā) a business man of substance DN i.136; DN iii.16 sq.; -paṇḍita a learned householder Cp. above 1 (b), together w. khattiya˚, etc MN i.176, MN i.396; w. samaṇa-brāhmaṇa˚ Mil 5; -parisā a company of gahapatis (together w. khattiya˚, etc., see above) Vin i.227; MN i.72; DN iii.260; -putta a member of a g. clan DN i.62, DN i.211; MN i.344; SN iii.48, SN iii.112; Pv-a 22 -mahāsāla a householder of private means (cp. above 1 a) usually in combn with khattiya˚, etc. DN iii.258; SN i.71; SN iv.292; AN ii.86; AN iv.239; -ratana the “householder-gem” one of the seven fairy jewels of the mythical overlord. He is a wizard treasure-finder (see ratana) DN ii.16, DN ii.176; Snp p.106. Cp. Rh.D. Dialogues etc. ii.206.

gaha + pati. Vedic gṛhapati, where pati is still felt in its original meaning of “lord,” “master, implying dignity, power & auspiciousness. Cp. Sk dampati = dominus = ;δεσπότης; and pati in P. senāpati commander-in-chief, Sk. jāspati householder, Lat hospes, Obulg. gospoda = potestas, Goth. brūp-faps bride-groom, hunda-faps = senāpati. See details under pati.

Gahapatika

(adj.-n.) belonging to the rank or grade of a householder, a member of the gentry, a man of private means (see gahapati) DN i.61 (expl. as gehassa pati ekageha-matte jeṭṭhaka DN-a i.171); Nd ii.342; Pv-a 39 Often in combn w. khattiya & brāhmaṇa: AN i.66; DN iii.44, DN iii.46, DN iii.61; & often in contrast to brāhmaṇa only brāhmaṇa-gahapatika Brahmins & Privates (priests laymen, Rh.D.; Buddh. S. p. 258) MN i.400; AN i.110 It iii.; Ja i.83, Ja i.152, Ja i.267; Pv-a 22 ■ paṇṇika g˚ “owner of a house of leaves” as nickname of a fruiterer Ja iii.21; of an ascetic Ja iv.446.

Gahita

(and gahīta Dhp 311) (adj.) seized. taken, grasped DN i.16; DN-a i.107 (= ādinna, pavattita) Ja i.61; Ja iv.2; Pv-a 43 (v.l. for text gaṇhita) ■ nt a grasp, grip Dhp-a iii.175 ■ gahitakaṃ karoti to accept Vv-a 260. -duggahīta (always ˚gahīta) hard to grasp MN i.132 sq.; AN ii.147, AN ii.168; AN iii.178; Dhp 311; Ja vi.307 sq.; sugahita (sic) easy to get Ja i.222.

-bhāva (cittassa) the state of being held (back) holding back, preventing to act (generously) Dhs-a 370 (in expln of aggahitattaṃ cittassa Dhs 1122 see under ā˚).

pp. of gaṇhāti

Gāthaka

= gāthā, in ekaṃ me gāhi gāthakaṃ “sing to me only one little verse” Ja iii.507.

demiName of gāthā

Gāthā

(f.) a verse, stanza, line of poetry, usually referring to an Anuṭṭhubbaṃ or a Tuṭṭhubbaṃ, & called a catuppādā gāthā, a stanza (śloka) of four half-lines AN ii.178; Ja iv.395 Def. as akkhara-padaniya-mita-ganthita-vacanaṃ at Kp-a 117. For a riddle on the word see S i.38. As a style of composition it is one of the nine Angas or divisions of the Canon (see navanga Satthu sāsana). Pl gāthā Snp 429; Ja ii.160; gāthāyo Vin i.5, Vin i.349; DN ii.157 gāthāya ajjhābhāsati to address with a verse Vin i.36 Vin i.38; Kp v. intr ■ gāthāhi anumodati to thank with (these) lines Vin i.222, Vin i.230, Vin i.246, Vin i.294, etc ■ gāthāyo gīyamāna uttering the lines Vin i.38 ■ anantaragāthā the foll. stanza Ja iv.142; Snp 251; Ja i.280; Dhp 102 (˚sataṃ).

-abhigīta gained by verses SN i.167 = Snp 81, Snp 480 (gāthāyo bhāsitvā laddhaṃ Com. cp. Ger. “ersungen”) -āvasāne after the stanza has been ended Dhp-a iii.171 -jānanaka one who knows verses Anvs. p. 35; -dvaya (nt.) a pair of stanzas Ja iii.395 sq.; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 40; -pada a half line of a gāthā Dhp 101; Kp-a 123; -sukhattaṃ in order to have a well-sounding line, metri causā, Pv-a 33.

Vedic gāthā, on dern see gāyate

Gādha1

depth; a hole, a dugout AN ii.107 = Pp 43 (cp. PugA 225); Sdhp 394 (˚ṃ khaṇati). Cp. gāḷha2.

Sk. gāḷha pp. of gāh, see gāhati

Gādha2

adj. passable, fordable in a˚ unfathomable, deep Pv-a 77 (= gambhīra). nt. a iord, a firm stand, firm ground, a safe place: gambhīre ˚ṃ vindati AN v.202. ˚ṃ esati to seek the terra firma SN i.127; similarly: ˚ṃ labhati to gain firm footing SN i.47; ˚ṃ ajjhagā SN iv.206; ˚ṃ labhate Ja vi.440 (= patiṭṭhā). Cp. o˚, paṭi˚.

Sk. gāḷha firm Dhtp 167 “paṭiṭṭhāyaṃ” cp. also Sk. gādha, fordable & see gāḷha;1

Gādhati

to stand fast, to be on firm ground, to have a firm footing: āpo ca paṭhavī ca tejo vāyo na gādhati “the four elements have no footing DN i.223 = SN i.15 ■ Dhamma-Vinaye gādhati “to stand fast in the Doctrine & Discipline” SN iii.59 sq.

v. der. fr. gādha2

Gāma

a collection of houses, a hamlet (cp. Ger. gemeinde), a habitable place (opp. arañña: gāme vā yadi vâraññe Snp 119), a parish or village having boundaries & distinct from the surrounding country (gāmo ca gāmupacāro ca Vin i.109 Vin i.110; Vin iii.46). In size varying, but usually small distinguished from nigama, a market-town. It is the smallest in the list of settlements making up a “state (raṭṭhaṃ). See definition & description at Vin iii.46 Vin iii.200. It is the source of support for the bhikkhus, and the phrase gāmaṃ piṇḍāya carati “to visit the parish for alms” is extremely frequent.

1. a village as such Vin i.46; Ārāmika˚, Pilinda˚ Vin i.28, Vin i.29 (as Ārāmikagāmaka & Pilinda-gāmaka at Vin iii.249); Sakyānaṃ gāme janapade Lumbineyye Snp 683; Uruvela˚ Pv ii.1318; gāmo nâtikālena pavisitabbo MN i.469; ˚ṃ raṭṭhañ ca bhuñjati Snp 619, Snp 711; gāme tiṃsa kulāni honti Ja i.199Snp 386, Snp 929, Snp 978; Ja ii.153; Ja vi.366; Dhp 47, Dhp 49; Dhs 697 (suñño g.); Pv-a 73 (gāme amaccakula); 67 (gāmassa dvārasamīpena) ■ gāmā gāmaṃ from hamlet to hamlet MN ii.20; Snp 180 (with nagā nagaṃ; expl. Snp-a 216 as devagāmā devagāmaṃ), 192 (with purā puraṃ); Pv ii.1318. In the same sense gāmena gāmaṃ Nd ii.177 (with nigamena n˚, nagarena n˚., raṭṭhena r˚., janapadena j˚.).

2. grouped with nigama, a market-town: gāmanigamo sevitabbo or asevitabbo AN iv.365 sq., cp. v.101 (w. janapadapadeso)-Vin iii.25, Vin iii.184 (˚ṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya) iv.93 (piṇḍāya pavisati); gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre DN i.237; MN i.488; gāme vā nigame vā Pp 66

3. as a geographical-political unit in the constitution of a kingdom, enumd in two sets: (a) gāma-nigamarājadhāniyo Vin iii.89; AN iii.108; Nd ii.271iii; Pv ii.1318 Dhp-a i.90 ■ (b) gāma-nigama-nagara-raṭṭha-janapada Nd ii.177, Nd ii.304iii (˚bandhana), 305 (˚kathā); with the foll. variations: g. nigama nagara MN ii.33

40; g nigama janapada Snp 995; Vism 152; gāmāni nigamāni ca Snp 118 (expld by Snp-a 178: ettha ca saddena nagarāni ti pi vattabbaṃ) ■ See also dvāra˚; paccanta˚ bīja˚; bhūta˚; mātu˚.

-anta the neighbourhood of a village, its border, the village itself, in ˚nāyaka leading to the village AN iii.189 ˚vihārin (= āraññaka) living near aN v. MN i.31, MN i.473; AN iii.391 (w. nemantanika and gahapati-cīvara -dhara)-Snp 710; -antara the (interior of the) village, only in t. t. gāmantaraṃ gacchati to go into the v. Vin ii.300 & in; ˚kappa the “village-trip-licence” (Vin. Texts iii.398) ib. 294, 300; cp. iv.64, 65; v.210; -ūpacāra the outskirts of aN v. Vin i.109, Vin i.110; defined at Vin iii.46 Vin iii.200; -kathā village-talk, gossip about v ■ affairs. Included in the list of foolish talks (+ nigama˚, nagara˚ janapada˚) DN i.7 (see expln at DN-a i.90); Snp 922. See kathā; -kamma that which is to be done to, or in a village, in ˚ṃ karoti to make a place habitable Ja i.199 -kūṭa “the village-fraud,” a sycophant SN ii.258; Ja iv.177 (= kūṭavedin); -goṇā (pl.) the village cattle Ja i.194; -ghāta those who sack villages, a marauder dacoit (of corā thieves) DN i.135; SN ii.188; -ghātaka (corā = ˚ghāta SN iv.173; Mil 20; Vism 484; nt. village plundering Ja i.200. -jana the people of the v. Mil 47-ṭṭhāna in purāṇa˚ a ruined village Ja ii.102; -dārakā (pl.) the youngsters of the v. Ja iii.275; f. -dārikā the girls of the v. Pv-a 67; -dvaya, in ˚vāsika living in (these) two vs. Pv-a 77; -dvāra the v. gates, the entrance to the v. Vin iii.52; Ja ii.110, Ja ii.301; cp. Pv-a 67-dhamma doings with women-folk (cp. mātugāma), vile conduct DN i.4≈(+ methuna) AN i.211; Ja ii.180 (= vasaladhamma); Vv-a 11; DN-a i.72 (= gāma-vāsīnaṃ dhamma?); -poddava (v.l. kāmapudava) a shampooer (? Vin. Texts iii.66; Bdhgh explains: kāmapudavā ti chavi-rāga-maṇḍanânuyuttā nāgarikamanussā gāmaṃ podavā ti pi pādho es’ ev’ attho, Vin ii.315; Vin ii.105; -bhojaka the village headman Ja i.199; Dhp-a i.69; -majjhe in the midst of the v. Ja i.199 Ja vi.332; -vara an excellent v. SN i.97; Ja i.138; -vāsin the inhabitant of aN v. Ja ii.110; Ja v.107; DN-a i.72; -saññā the thought of aN v. MN iii.104; -samīpe near aN v. Ja i.254 -sahassa a thousand parishes (80,000 under the rule of King Bimbisāra) Vin i.179; -sāmanta in the neighbourhood of aN v., near aN v. DN i.101; (+ mgama˚) -sīmā the boundary of the parish Vin i.110 (+ nigama˚) -sūkara a village pig Ja iii.393.

Vedic grāma, heap, collection, parish; *grem to comprise; Lat. gremium; Ags. crammian (E. cram) Obulg. gramada (village community) Ohg. chram; cp *ger in Gr. ἀγειρω, ἀγορά, Lat, grex.

Gāmaka

1. = gāma Vin i.208; Ja i.199 (Macala˚), 253; iv.431 (cora˚); Pv-a 67 (Iṭṭhakāvatī and Dīgharājī) Dhp-a ii.25 (dvāra˚).

2. a villager Ja v.107 (= gāmavāsin).

-āvāsa an abode in a village Pv-a 12; Vv-a 291.

Gāmaṇika

= gāmaṇi SN i.61; AN iii.76 (pūga˚).

Gāmaṇī

(m.) the head of a company, a chief, a village headman Vin ii.296 (Maṇicūḷaka). Title of the G. Saṃyutta (Book VIII. of the Saḷāyatana-Vagga) SN iv.305 sq.; & of the G ■ Jātaka Ja i.136, Ja i.137SN iv.306 (Talapuṭa naṭa˚), 308 (yodhājīvo g.), 310 (hatthāroho g.), 312 (Asibandhakaputta), 330 (Rāsiya).

Gāmaṇḍala

“the round of the ox,” like the oxen driven round & round the threshing-floor Thag 1143 ■ Cp gomaṇḍala (s.v. go).;

Gāmika

1. a governor of a village, overseer of a parish Vin i.179; AN iii.76, AN iii.78, AN iii.300 (in series w. raṭṭhika pettanika, senāpatika, pūgagamaṇika).

2. [to gam ] adj. going wandering, travelling (-˚) Ja ii.112.

to gāma

˚Gāmin

(adj.) f. ˚iṇī, in composition ˚gāmi˚ ■ (a) going, walking, lit.: sīgha˚ walking quickly Snp 381 ■ (b) leading to, making for, usually with magga or paṭipadā (gāminī), either lit. Pāṭaliputtagāmi-magga the road to P. Mil 17; or fig. of ways means connected w. one of the “gatis.” as apāya Dhp-a iii.175, udaya˚ paṭipadā SN v.361; nibbāna dhamma Snp 233; amata-gāmi-magga SN v.8; udayatthagāmiṇī paññā AN v.15; dukkhanirodha˚ paṭipadā Vin i.10; cp. ācaya˚ Dhs 584. 1013. Acc. ˚gāminaṃ khemaṃ Amata˚ MN i.508; brahmacariyaṃ: nibbān ogadha˚ Iti 28, Iti 29; dukkhûpasama˚ maggaṃ Snp 724; Dhp 191; niraya˚ maggaṃ Snp 277, Thag-a 243. Or ˚gāmiṃ Snp 233, Snp 381.

from gacchati, gam

Gāmeyya

(adj.) belonging to a village in sa˚; of the same v., a clansman SN i.36 = SN i.60 (+ sakhā).

Gāyaka

a singer Pv-a 3 (naṭaka˚).

fr. next

Gāyati

to sing, to recite, often comb w. naccati to dance; ppr. gāyanto, gāyamāna & gīyamāna (Vin i.38); imper. gāhi (J iii.507); fut. gāyissati grd. gāyitabba. Vin ii.108 (dhammaṃ), 196 (gāthaṃ) Snp 682 (g˚ ca vādayanti ca); Ja i.290 (gītaṃ); iii.507 (naccitvā gāyitvā); Vism 121 (aor. gāyi); Pv-a 151 Cp. gāthā, gīta, geyya.

Vedic gai, gāyate

Gāyana

(nt.) singing Vv-a 315 (naccana + ).

Gārayha

(adj.) contemptible, low Vin iii.186; Vin iv.176 sq.; 242; v.149; MN i.403; AN ii.241 (kammaṃ pādaṃ gārayhaṃ mosallaṃ); Snp 141; Ne 52; Snp-a 192. ; not to be blamed Ja vi.200 (spelt aggarayha).

grd. of garahati

Gārava

(m. and nt.) [cp. Sk. gaurava, fr. garu] reverence, respect, esteem; with loc. respect for reverence towards; in the set of six venerable objects Buddhe [Satthari], Dhamme, Sanghe, sikkhāya, appamāde paṭisanthāre Vin v.92 = DN iii.244. As 7 gāravā (the 6 + samānhi) in adj. ; and sa˚; at AN iv.84 (see below) DN iii.284; Snp 265; Vism 464 (atta˚ & para˚). Expl;d Kp-a 144 by garubhāvo; often in combn with bahumāna Pv-a 135 (= pūjā), sañjāta-g˚-bahumāna (adj. Pv-a 50; Vv-a 205. Instr. gāravena out of respect respectfully DN ii.155; Ja i.465. Appld to the terms of address bhante & bhaddante Pv-a 33, Pv-a 121, & āyasmā (see cpd. ˚adhivacana) ■; agārava (m. nt.) disrespect Vin v.92 (six: as above); Ja i.217; Pv-a 54 ■ As adj. in sagārava and agārava full of reverence toward (with loc.) & disrespectful; DN iii.244 (six g.); AN iv.84 (seven) MN i.469; combd with appatissa & sappatissa (obedient AN iii.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 340. Also in tibba-gārava full of keen respect (Satthu-garu Dhamma-garu Sanghe ca tibba-gārava, etc.) AN iii.331 = AN iv.28 sq.

-ādhivacana a title of respect, a reverential address Nd ii.466 (with ref. to Bhagavā), cp. sagārava sappaṭissâdhivacana Nd ii.130 (āyasmā).

later

Gāravatā

reverence, respect, in Satthu˚, Dhamma˚, etc. AN iii.330 sq., 423 sq.; iv.29 (ottappa˚).

Der. fr. gārava

Gāḷha

(adj.) 1. [cp. gādha1] strong, tight, close; thick. In phrase pacchābāhaṃ g˚ bandbanaṃ bandhati to pinion the arms tightly DN i.245; AN ii.241; Ja i.264; Pv-a 4. Of an illness (gāḷhena rogâtankena phuṭṭha) AN ii.174 sq.; appld to poison smeared on an arrow MN i.429 ■ gālhaṃ & gālhakaṃ (adv.) tightly Ja i.265, Ja i.291 ■ agāḷha (? prob. to be read āgāḷha ) (of vacana, speech, combd with pharusa) strong (?) Pp 32 (expl by Com. atigāḷha thaddha), cp. 2. and gaḷita. 2. [cp. gādha1 deep Ja i.155 (˚vedhin, piercing); Mil 370 (ogāhati). Cp. ajjhogāḷha, atigāḷha, ogāḷha, nigāḷhita pagāḷha.

cp. Sk. gāḍha

Gāvī

(f.) gen. sg. gāviyā (Pp 56 = AN ii.207); nom. pl. gāviyo (Snp-a 323; Vv-a 308); gen. pl. gāvīnaṃ Dhp-a i.396; Snp-a 323; Vv-a 308) ■ A cow Vin i.193; AN iv.418; Ja i.50; Ud 8, Ud 49; Vism 525 (in simile) Dhp-a ii.35; Vv-a 200.

see go

Gāvuta

(nt.) a linear measure, a quarter of a yojana = 80 usabhas, a little less than two miles, a league Ja i.57, Ja i.59; Ja ii.209 Vism 118; Dhp-a i.396.

cp. Vedic gavyūti pasture land, district

Gāvutika

(adj.) reaching a gāvuta in extent DN-a i.284.

Gāvo

see go.

Gāha

1. (n.) seizing, seizure, grip (cp. gaha): canda˚ suriya˚ an eclipse (lit. the moon, etc., being seized by a demon) DN i.10 (= DN-a i.95: Rāhu candaṃ gaṇhāti). Esp. appld to the sphere of the mind obsession, being possessed (by a thought), an idea opinion, view, usually as a preconceived idea, a wrong view, misconception. So in defn of diṭṭhi (wrong views) with paṭiggāha & abhinivesa Nd;2 271iii (on lepa); Pp 22; Dhs 381 (= obsession like the grip of a crocodile Dhs-a 253), 1003; Vb 145, Vb 358. In the same formula as vipariyesa ggāha (wrong view), cp viparīta˚ Vv-a 331 (see diṭṭhi). As doubt & error in anekaṃ sa + g˚ in def;n of kankhā & vicikicchā Nd;2 1 Vb 168; ekaṃsa˚ & apaṇṇaka˚ certainty, right thought Ja i.97 ■ gāhaṃ vissajjeti to give up a preconceived idea Ja ii.387.

2. (adj.) act. holding: rasmi˚ holding the reins Dhp 222; dabbi˚ holding the spoons Pv ii.953 (= gāhaka Pv-a 135) ■ (b) med ■ pass. taken: jīvagāha taken alive, in ˚ṃ gaheti to take (prisoner) alive SN i.84 karamaragāhaṃ gaheti same Ja iii.361 (see kara).

fr. gaṇhāti

Gāhaka

(adj.) f. gāhikā holding (-˚) chatta˚ Snp 688; Dāvs ii.119; katacchu˚ Pv-a 135; cāmarī˚ Ja vi.218 Cp. saṃ˚.

Gāhati

to immerse, to penetrate, to plunge into: see gādha & gāḷha; cp also avagadha ajjhogāhati, ogāhati, pagāhati.

Sk. gāhate but Dhtp 349 = viloḷana

Gāhana

(nt.) submersion, see avagahana, avagāhati & avagāhana.;

fr. last

Gāhavant

in ekaṃsa-gāhavatī nibbici kicchā “doubtlessness consisting in certainty” Vv-a 85 in expld of ekaṃsika.

Gāhāpaka

one who is made to take up, a receiver Vin ii.177 (patta˚).

fr. gāhāpeti

Gāhāpeti

to cause to take; to cause to be seized or fetched; to remove. Aor, gāhāpesi Ja i.53; Ja ii.37; gāhāpayi Pv iv.142 ■ Ger. gāhāpetvā Ja i.166; Ja ii.127; Ja iii.281; Dhp-a i.62 (patta-cīvaraṃ) With double acc. mahājanaṃ kathaṃ g˚ made people believe your words Ja ii.416; cetake kasā g. made the servants seize their whips Ja iii.281. Cp. gaṇhāpeti.

caus. of gaṇhāti

Gāhi

Imper. pres. of gāyati Ja iii.507.

Gāhika

(-˚) = gahin, see anta˚.

Gāhin

(adj.) (-˚) grasping, taking up, striving after, ādhāna˚ DN iii.247; udaka˚ Ja i.5; piya˚ Dhp 209; nimitta˚ anubyañjana˚ etc.

Gāheti

to understand, to account for DN-a i.117.

v. denom. fr. gāha

Giṅgamaka

(v.l. BB kinkamaka) a sort of ornament Ja vi.590.

Gijjha

1. (m.) a vulture. Classed with kāka, crow & kulala, hawk MN i.88; (kākā + ) 364 (in simile, with kankā & kulatā) 429 (do.); Snp 201 (kākā + ); Pv-a 198 (+ kulalā). It occurs also in the form gaddha.

2. (adj.) greedy, desirous of (-˚) kāma˚ Ja i.210 (cp. giddha); cp. paṭi˚.

-kūṭa “Vulture’s Peak” Np. of a hill near Rājagaha Vin ii.193; Dhp-a i.140; Pv-a 10 and passim -potaka the young of a vulture Vism 537 (in simile).

Vedic gṛdhra, cp. gijjhati

Gijjhati

to desire, to long for, to wish: pp. gaddha & giddha. Cp. abhi˚, pali˚.; pp. (Pass.) gijjhita Thig 152 (= paccāsiṃsita Thag-a).

Sk. gṛdhyati, to Lat. gradior?

Giñjakā

(f.) a brick, in ˚āvasatha a house of bricks, as N pl. “the Brick Hall” DN i.91; Vin i.232; MN i.205.

Giddha

(adj.) greedy; greedy for, hankering after (with loc.) SN i.74 (+ kāmesu mucchita); ii.227; AN ii.2; AN iii.68; Snp 243 (rasesu), 774 (kāmesu); 809; Pv iv.62 (sukhe); Pv-a 3 (+ rata (= gadhita), 271 (āhāre = hungry; cp. giddhin). In series with similar terms of desire; giddha gathita (or gadhita) mucchita ajjhopanna Nd ii.369 (nissita); Snp-a 286. Cp. gathita ■ agiddha without greed, desireless controlled Iti 92 (+ vītagedha); Snp 210 (do), 845 Cp. pa˚.

pp. of gijjhati

Giddhi

(f.) greed, usually in cpds.: ˚māna greed & conceit Snp 328,; ˚lobha g. desire MN i.360, MN i.362 (also a˚ and giddhilobhin); Ja v.343 Der. giddhikatā (f. abstr. = Sk. gṛdhnutā) greed Vb 351 (v.l. gedhi˚).

cp. Sk. gṛdhyā or gṛdhnutā

Giddhin

(adj. fr. prec.) greedy, usually -˚ greedy for, desirous after Pv iv.107 (āhāra˚) f. giddhinī: gāvī vaccha Vin i.193; SN iv.181. Cp. also paligedhin.

Giddhimā

(adj. fr. giddhi) greedy, full of greed Ja v.464 (rasa˚).

Gini

(poet.) fire AN iii.347 (mahāgini); Snp 18 Snp 19 (āhito → nibbuto: made → extinguished); Ja iv.26. Note. The occurrence of two phonetic representatives of one Vedic form (one by diaeresis & one by contraction is common in words containing a liquid or nasal element (l. r. n; cp. note on gala), e.g. supina & soppa (Sk svapna), abhikkhaṇa and abhiṇha (abhīkṣṇa), silesuma & semha (śleṣman) gaḷagaḷa & gaggara (gargara), etc.;

Vedic agni; this the aphetic form, arisen in a combn like mahāgni = mahā-gini, as against the usual assimilation aggi

Gimha

I. (sg.) heat, in special application to the atmosphere: hot part (of the day or year), hot season, summer; a summer month. Always used in loc. as a designation of time. 1. of the day: Vv-a 40 (˚samaye; v.l. gimhānamāse).

2. of summer usually in combn w. and in contrast to hemanta winter: hemanta-gimhisu in w. & s. Dhp 286 (cp. gimhika for ˚isu). Mil 274; Dpvs i.55; Vism 231 (˚âbhitatta worn out by the heat); Sdhp 275 (˚kāle). In enumn w. other seasons: vasse hemante gimhe Nd ii.631 (sadā) vasanta gimhādika utū Pv-a 135.

3. of a summer month; paṭhamasmiṃ gimhe Snp 233 (see Kp-a 192 for expln)-II. (pl.) gimhā the hot months, the season of summer, in ˚naṃ pacchime māse, in the last month of summer MN i.79; SN iii.141; SN v.50, SN v.321; Vv 795 (= āsāḷhimāse Vv-a 307).

Vedic grīṣma

Gimhāna

(adj.-n.) of summer, summerly, the summer season AN iv.138 (+ hemanta & vassa); Snp 233 (gimhānamāse); Vv-a 40 (v.l.). On terms for seasons in gen. cp. Mil trsl. ii.113.

orig. gen. pl. of gimhā = gimhānaṃ, fr. combn gimhāna(ṃ) māse, in a month of summer

Gimhika

(adj. fr. gimha) summerly, relating to the summer, for the summer Vin i.15; DN ii.21 (+ vassika & hemantika).;

Girā

utterance (orig. song, important utterance still felt as such in older Pāli, therefore mostly poetical), speech, words DN iii.174; Snp 350, Snp 632, Snp 690 Snp 1132; Dhp 408; Thig 316, Thig 402; Vv 5018 (= vācā Vv-a) Dhs 637, Dhs 720; Dhs-a 93; DN-a i.61 (aṭṭhangupetaṃ giraṃ) Ja ii.134.

Vedic gir & gēr, song; gṛṇāti to praise, announce gūrti praise = Lat. grates “grace”; to *ger or *gṷer, see note on gala

Giri

a mountain; as a rule only in cpds, by itself (poetical) only at Vism 206 (in enumn of the 7 large mountains).

-agga mountain top, in giraggasamajja Name of a festival celebrated yearly at Rājagaha, orig. a festival on the mountain top (cp. Dial. i.8 & Vin. Texts iii.71). Vin ii.107, Vin ii.150; Vin iv.85, Vin iv.267; Ja iii.538; Dhp-a i.89. The BSk version is girivaggu-samāgama Avs ii.24; -kannikā (f.) Name of a plant (Clitoria ternatea) Vism 173; Dhp-a i.383 (v.l. kaṇṇikā cp. Sk. ˚karnī;) -gabbhara = ˚guhā Snp 416; -guhā a mountain cleft, a rift, a gorge; always in formula pabbata kandara g˚, therefore almost equivalent to kandara, a grotto or cave Vin ii.146; DN i.71; MN i.269, MN i.274, MN i.346, MN i.440 = AN ii.210 = Pp 59 (as giriṃ guhaṃ); AN iv.437; expl. at DN-a i.210: dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antaraṃ ekasmiṃ yeva vā ummagga-sadisaṃ mahā-vivaraṃ; -bbaja (nt.) [Etym. uncertain, according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 79 to vaja “a pen,” cp Marāthī vraja “a station of cowherds,” Hindi vraja “a cow-pen”; the Vedic giribhraj˚ (RV. x.68. 1) “aus Bergen hervorbrechend” (Roth) suggests relation to bhraj, to break = bhañj = Lat. frango] = ˚guhā, a mountain cave or gorge, serving as shelter & hiding place Ja iii.479 (trsl. by Morris loc. cit. a hill-run, a cattle-run on the hills); v.260 (sīhassa, a lion’s abode) expld as kañcanaguhā ibid. (for kandara-guhā? cp. Kern Toev. p. 130). SN ii.185. Also N. for Rājagaha Snp 408 Dpvs v.5; in its Sk. form Girivraja, which Beal, Buddh Records ii.149 expls as “the hill-surrounded,” cp. ib ii.158 (= Chin. Shan-Shing), 161; see also Cunningham Ancient Geogr. 462. It does not occur in the Avadānas; -rājā king of the mountains, of Mount Sineru Mil 21, Mil 224; -sikhara mountain top, peak Vv-a 4; (kañcana˚, shining).

Vedic giri, Obulg. gora mountain

Giriyā

(pl.) in dhamma˚ & brahma˚, a name of certain theatrical entertainers Mil 191.;

Gilati

to swallow to devour: mā Rāhu gilī caraṃ antalikkhe SN i.51 = Vv-a 116; mā gilī lohagulaṃ Dhp 371Ja iii.338; Mil 106-pp. gilita: gilitabaḷisa having swallowed the hook SN iv.159. Cp. ud˚, o˚, pari˚ ■ Caus. gilāpeti to make swallow Ja iii.338.

Vedic girati & gilati Dhtp 488: adane; cp. gala throat, Ohg. kela, E. gullet; see note on gala

Gilana

(nt.) devouring, swallowing Mil 101.

fr. gilati

Gilāna

(adj.) sick ill Vin i.51, Vin i.53, Vin i.61, Vin i.92, Vin i.142 sq., 176, 302 sq.; ii.165 227 sq.; iv.88, etc.; SN v.80, SN v.81 (bāḷha˚ very ill); AN i.120 = Pp 27; AN iii.38, AN iii.143 sq.; AN iv.333; AN v.72 sq. Ja i.150; Ja ii.395; Ja iii.392; Pv-a 14; Vv-a 76.

-ālaya pretence of illness Ja vi.262. -upaṭṭhāka (f ■ ī) one who attends to the sick Vin i.92, Vin i.121 sq. 142 sq.; 161, 303, AN i.26; AN iii.143 sq.; -˚bhatta food for the attendant or nurse Vin i.292 sq.; -upaṭṭhāna tending or nursing the sick DN iii.191; -paccaya support or help for the sick Pv-a 144; usually with ˚bhesajja medicine for the sick in freq. formula of cīvarapiṇḍapāta˚ (the requisites of the bhikkhu): see cīvara; -pucchaka one who asks (i.e. enquires after) the sick Vin iv.88 = Vin iv.115 Vin iv.118; -bhatta food for the sick Vin i.142 sq.; 292 sq. 303; Vism 66. -bhesajja medicine Vin i.292 sq. -sālā a hall for the sick, hospital SN iv.210; AN iii.142 Vism 259.

Sk. glāna, glā to fade, wither, be exhausted, expld suitably by “hāsa-kkhaya” at Dhtp 439

Gilānaka

(adj.) 1. ill (= gilāna) AN iii.142;

2. fit for an illness (bhesajja medicine) Mil 74.

Gilāyati

: see āgilāyati.

Giha

only in agiha (adj.) houseless, homeless (= pabbajita, a Wanderer); poet. for anagāra Snp 456 Snp 464, Snp 487, Snp 497.

= gaha

Gihin

(adj.-n.) a householder, one who leads a domestic life, a layman (opp. pabbajita & paribbājaka). Geu. sg. gihissa (D iii.147, 167) & gihino (D iii.174); n. pl. gihī; in cpds. gihī˚ & gihi˚; (usually the latter). gihī agāraṃ ajjhāvasantā AN i.49; gihī odātavasanā (clad in white robes as distinguished fr. kasāva-vasanā the yellowrobed i.e. bhikkhus) DN i.211; DN iii.117, DN iii.124, DN iii.210; MN i.340; MN iii.261; AN i.74 ■ Contrasted with pabbajitā AN i.69; DN iii.147, DN iii.167, DN iii.179. gihī dhaññena dhanena vaḍḍhati DN iii.165 ■ Other passages in general SN ii.120, SN ii.269; SN iii.11; SN iv.180, SN iv.300 sq.; AN ii.65; AN ii.69 (kāmabhogī); iv.438 (do.); DN iii.124 (do.); AN iii.211 (sambodhiparāyano); iv.345 sq.; DN iii.167 sq.; 171 sq.; 176 192; Snp 220, Snp 221, Snp 404; Dhp 74; Mil 19, Mil 264; Dhp-a i.16 (gihīniyāma); Sdhp 376, Sdhp 426; Pv-a 13 (gihīkālato paṭṭhāya from the time of our laymanship); Dhp-a ii.49 (id.).

-kicca a layman’s or householder’s duties Pv iv.142 (= kuṭumba-kiccāni Pv-a 240); -dhamma a layman’s duty AN iii.41; -parisā a congregation of laymen SN i.111; MN i.373; AN iii.184; -bandhanāni (pl.) a layman’s fetters Snp 44 (= Nd ii.228 puttā ca dāsī dāsā ca, etc.); -byañjanāni (pl.) characteristics of a layman, or of a man of the world (w. ref. to articles of dress & ornament Snp 44, Snp 64 (= Nd;2 229); Mil 11; -bhūta as a householder DN ii.196; -bhoga riches of a worldly man SN iii.93; Iti 90; -liṅga characteristic of a layman Dhp-a ii.61. -saṃsagga association with laymen AN iii.116, AN iii.258 -saṃyojana the impediments of a householder (cp. ˚bandhanāni) MN i.483; -sukha the welfare of a g. AN i.80.

fr. gaha, cp. gaha & geha; Sk. gṛhin

Gīta

1. (pp.) sung, recited, solemnly proclaimed, enunciated: mantapadaṃ gītaṃ pavuttaṃ DN i.104 (cp. gira).

2. (nt.) singing, a song; grouped under vācasikā khiḍḍā, musical pastimes at Nd ii.219; Snp-a 86. Usually combd with nacca, dancing: AN i.261; Vv8110 as naca gītādi Ja i.61; Vv-a 131; referring to nacca-gīta-vādita, dancing with singing & instrumental accompaniment DN iii.183 (under samajja, kinds of festivities); Vv 324. Same with visūkadassana, pantomimic show at DN i.5≈(cp. DN-a i.77; Kp-a 36).

-rava sound of song Mvu vii.30; -sadda id. Ja iv.3; Dhs 621; Dhp-a i.15; -ssara id. Vin ii.108; AN iii.251; Ja iii.188.

pp. of gāyati

Gītaka

(nt.) & gītikā (f.) a little song Ja iii.507.

Gīvā

(f.) the neck Snp 609; Ja i.74 (˚ṃ pasāreti to stretch forth), 167 (pasārita˚) 207, 222, 265; iii.52; Vv-a 27 (mayūra˚), 157; DN-a i.296 (˚āya kuṇḍa-daṇḍaka-bandhana, as exhibition punishment): similarly in the sense of “life” (hinting at decapitation) Ja ii.300 (˚ṃ karissāmi “I shall go for his neck”); iv.431 = v.23 ■ Syn. kaṇṭha the primary meaning of which is neck, whereas gīvā orig. throat.

Sk. grīvā, to *gṷer to swallow, as signifying throat: see note on gala for etym.

Gīveyyaka

(nt.) necklace, an ornament for the neck (orig. “something belonging to the neck,” cp. necklet, bracelet, etc.) Vin i.287; AN i.254 sq (= Vism 247, where gīveyya only); 257; iii.16; Ja iv.395 (gīveyya only); v.297; vi.590; Vv-a 104.

cp. Sk. graiveyaka

Guggula

a kind of perfume Ja vi.537.

?

Gucch˚

in jigucchati (Des. of gup = Sk. jugupsate) to detest, see s. v.

Guñjā

(f.) a plant (Abrus precatorius); the redness of its berries is referred to in similes; Dhp-a iv.133 (˚vaṇṇāni akkhīni). See also jiñjuka.

Guṇa1

1. a string, a cord-(a) of a robe, etc., in (kāya-bandhanaṃ) saguṇaṃ katvā to make tight by tying with a knot Vin i.46 (Vin. Texts: “laying the garments on top of each other,” wrongly construed) ii.213 (trsln. “folding his garments”); cp. guṇaka. (b) of musical instruments Vin i.182 = AN iii.375 (vīṇā) ■ (c) of a bow, in aguna stringless Ja v.433 (dhanu). 2. (a strand of a rope as) constituent part ingredient, component, element; with numerals it equals-fold, e.g. pañca kāmaguṇā the 5 strands of kāma, or 5-fold craving (see kāma); ekaguṇaṃ once, diguṇaṃ twice Snp 714; diguṇaṃ nivāpaṃ pacitvā cooking a double meal Vv-a 63; catugguṇa fourfold, of a sanghāti DN ii.128; SN ii.221, cp. Rhys Davids, Dialogues ii.145 aṭṭhaguṇa (hirañña) Th. 2, 153; aneka-bhāgena guṇena seyyo many times or infinitely better Pv iv.19; sataguṇena sahassa˚ 100 and 1,000 times Pv-a 41; asankheyyena guṇena infinitely, inconceivably Mil 106 sataguṇaṃ sahassaguṇaṃ Vism 126.

3. (a part as quality, esp. good quality, advantage, merit Ja i.266 Ja ii.112; Ja iii.55, Ja iii.82 ■ lobha˚ Snp 663; sādhu˚ Snp 678 sīla˚ Ja i.213; Ja ii.112; Buddha˚ Ja ii.111; pabbajita Ja i.59.

-aggatā state of having the best qualities, superiority Dpos iv.1. -aḍḍha rich in virtue Sdhp 312, Sdhp 561 -upeta in khuppipāsāhi guṇûpeto as Pv-a 10 is to be read khuppipās’ âbhibhūto peto. -kathā “tale of virtue,” praise Ja i.307; Ja ii.2. -kittana telling one’s praises Pv-a 107, Pv-a 120. -guṇika in phrase tantākulajāta g-g-jāta at SN iv.158, see under guḷā-guṇṭhika.

Non-Aryan?

Guṇa2

a ball, a cluster, a chain (?), in anta˚ the intestines; MN i.185-, Kh 11., cp. Kp-a 57 for expln ■ mālāguṇa a garland or chain (cluster of flowers Dhp 53 (but ˚guḷa at Ja i.73, Ja i.74). See guḷa3.

for which often guḷa with common substitution of ḷ for ṇ, partly due to dissimilation, as mālāguḷa → mālāguṇa; cp. Sk. guṇikā tumour: guḷa and gaḷa veḷu: veṇu, and note on gala

Guṇa2

a woodworm Ja iii.431 (˚pāṇaka).

Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. ghuna

Guṇaka

(adj.) having a knot at the end, thickened at the top (with ref. to kāyabandha, see guṇa 1a) Vin ii.136, cp. Vin. Texts ii.143.

to guḷa1, cp. guḷika?

Guṇavant

(adj.) possessed of good qualities, virtuous Pv ii.971 (= jhān’ ādiguṇa-yutta); Pv-a 62 (mahā˚).

to guṇa1

Guṇi

(f.) a kind of armour Ja vi.449 (g. vuccate kavacaṃ C.); see Kern, Toev. p. 132.

of adj. guṇin, having guṇas or guḷas, i.e. strings or knots

Guṇṭhika

(in meaning = guṇṭhita) one who is covered with or wrapped up in, only in ahi˚; a snake-trainer (like a Laocoon). See details under ahi or Ja ii.267; Ja iii.348 (text ˚guṇḍika); Ja iv.308 (ahi-kuṇḍika, v.l. SS guṇṭhika) iv.456 (text ˚guṇṭika; v.l. BB ˚kuṇḍika). Also in guḷā-guṇṭhika (q.v.).

Guṇṭhima

covered over (?), see pāli˚.

Guṇṭheti

to cover to veil, to hide; pp. guṇṭhita in paṃsu˚ covered with dust Pv ii.35 (in Hardy’s conjecture for kuṇṭhita, q.v.) Also in cpd. paliguṇṭhita obstructed, entangled Snp 131 (mohena) where v.l. BB kuṇṭhita. Cp. o˚.

cp. Sk. guṇṭhayati Dhtp (563) & Dhtm (793) give both roots; guṇṭh & guṇḍ as syName of veṭh

Guṇḍika

see guṇṭhika.

Gutta

■ I. as pp. guarded, protected ■ (a) lit nagaraṃ guttaṃ a well-guarded city Dhp 315 = Thag 653 Thag 1005; Devinda˚ protected by the Lord of gods Vv 308-(b) fig. (med.) guarded, watchful, constrained guarded in, watchful as regards… (with loc. SN iv.70 (agutta & sugutta, with danta, rakkhita) AN iii.6 (atta˚ self-controlled); Snp 250 (sotesu gutto vijitindriyo), 971 (id. + yatacārin); Dhp 36 (cittaṃ). II. as n. agent (= Sk. goptṛ, cp. kata in kāla-kata kāḷaṃ kartṛ) one who guards or observes, a guardian in Dhammassa gutta Dhp 257, observer of the Norm (expl. Dhp-a iii.282: dhammojapaññāya samannāgata) cp. dhammagutta SN i.222.

-indriya one whose senses are guarded; with well-guarded senses Snp 63 (+ rakkhita-mānasāno; expl Snp-a: chassu indriyesu gopitindriyo); Nd ii.230; Vv 5015; Pv iv.132; -dvāra “with guarded doors” always in combn with indriyesu g-d. having the doors of the senses guarded, practising. self-control DN i.63≈(expld DN-a i.182 by pihita-dvāro), 70; SN ii.218; SN iv.103, SN iv.112 SN iv.119 sq., 175; Snp 413 (+ susaṃvuta); Pp 24. Cp. foll. -dvāratā (f. abstr. to prec.) in indriyesu g˚ self constraint, control over (the doors of) one’s senses, always combd with bhojane mattaññutā (moderation in taking food) DN iii.213; Iti 24; Pp 20, Pp 24; Dhs 1347; Pv-a 163 Opp. ; lack of sense-control DN iii.213; Iti 23; Dhs 1345.

Sk. gupta, pp. of gup in med. pass. sense, cp. gopeti

Gutti

(f.) protection, defence, guard; watchfulness ■ (a) lit. of a city AN iv.106 sq ■ (b) fig. of the senses in indriyānaṃ gutti Dhp 375; Pp 24 (+ gopanā) Dhs 1348; Sdhp 341 (agutti); Vin iv.305; AN ii.72 (atta˚) also in pl.: guttīsu ussuka keen in the practice of watchfulness DN iii.148.

Vedic gupti

Guttika

a guardian, one who keeps watch over, in nagara˚; the town-watchman, the chief-constable Pv-a 4; Mil 345.

fr. last

Gumpha

see ogumpheti.

Gumba

1. a troop, a heap, cluster, swarm. Of soldiers Vin i.345; of fish (maccha˚) DN i.84 = MN i.279 = MN ii.22; AN i.9.

2. a thicket, a bush, jungle; the lair of an animal in a thicket (sayana˚ Ja iv.256) SN iii.6 (eḷagalā˚) Ja iii.52 (nivāsa˚, vasana˚); Vv-a 301 (gaccha˚ underwood); Ja i.149, Ja i.167; Ja ii.19; Ja iii.55; Ja iv.438; Vv-a 63, Vv-a 66 Cp. pagumba = gumba, in vana˚ Snp 233 (see Kp-a 192) veḷu˚ Thag 919 ■ Acc. gumbaṃ (adv.) thickly, in masses balled together Mil 117 (of clouds).

-antara thicket Vv-a 233.

Sk. gulma, *glem to *gel, to be thick, to conglomerate, cp. Lat. glomus (ball), globus, etc. See guḷa

Gumbiya

(adj.) one of the troop (of soldiers) Vin i.345.

fr. gumba

Guyha

1. adj. to be hidden, hidden in ˚bhaṇḍaka the hidden part (of the body Dhp-a iv.197.

2. (nt.) that which is hidden; lit. in vattha˚; hidden by the dress, i.e. the pudendum DN i.106; Snp 1022, etc. (see vattha), fig. a secret Mil 92 guyhaṃ pariguyhati to keep a secret AN iv.31; Nd ii.510.

ger. of guh = Vedic guhya

Guru

(adj.-n.) venerable, reverend, a teacher Vv-a 229, Vv-a 230 (˚dakkhiṇā a teacher’s fee); Pv-a 3 (˚janā venerable persons) Sdhp 227 (˚ûpadesa), 417.

a younger form of garu (q.v.); Sk. guru

Guḷa1

to make into a ball, to conglomerate. Cp Sk. glauḥ ball; Gr. γλουτός; Ohg. chliuwa; Ger. kugel kloss; E. clot, cleat; also *gel with same meaning Sk. gulma.] tumour, gilāyu glandular swelling; cp. Lat glomus, globus; Ger. klamm; E. clamp, clump. A root guḷ is given by Dhtp 576,77 in meaning of “mokkha” a ball, in cpds. sutta˚ a ball of string (= Ohg. chliuwa DN i.54 = ; MN iii.95; Pv-a 145; ayo˚ an iron globe Dhp 308; DN-a i.84; loha˚ of copper Dhp 371; sela˚ a rockball i.e. a heavy stone-ball Ja i.147.

-kīḷā play at ball Dhp-a i.178; Dhp-a iii.455; Dhp-a iv.124. -parimaṇḍala the circumference of a ball, or (adj.) round globular, like a ball Pv-a 253.

Sk. guḍa and gulī ball, guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour; to *gleu.

Guḷa2

(Non-Aryan?] sugar, molasses Vin i.210, Vin i.224 sq., 245 ■ saguḷa sugared, sweet, or “with molasses Ja vi.324 (saguḷāni, i.e. saguḷa-pūve pancakes).

-āsava sugar-juice Vv-a 73. -odaka s ■ water Vin i.226. -karaṇa a sugar factory ibid. 210. -pūvaka sweet cake Mvu 10. 3. -phāṇita molasses Vv-a 179.

Guḷa3

a cluster, a chain (?), in maṇi˚; a cluster of jewels, always in simile with ref. to sparkling eyes “maniguḷa-sadisāni akkhīni” Ja i.149; Ja iii.126, Ja iii.184 (v.l. BB ˚guḷika); iv.256 (v.l. id.); mālā˚; a cluster, a chain of flowers, a garland Ja i.73, Ja i.54; puppha˚; id. Dh. 172 233.

for guṇa2, due to distance dissimilation in maṇiguṇa and mālāguṇa → maṇigula and mālāgula; cp similarly in meaning and form Ohg. chliuwa → Ger knäuel

Guḷā

(f.) a swelling, pimple, pustule, blight, in cpd. guḷā-guṇṭhika-jāta DN ii.55, which is also to be read at AN ii.211 (in spite of Morris, prelim. remarks to AN ii.4 whose trsln. is otherwise correct) = guḷā-gunṭḥita covered with swellings (i.e. blight); cp. similar expression at Dhp-a iii.297 gaṇḍāgaṇḍa (-jāta) “having become covered all over with pustules (i.e. rash).” All readings at corresp. passages are to be corrected accordingly, viz. SN ii.92 (guḷigandhika˚); iv.158 (guṇaguṇika˚); the reading at Dpvs xii.32, also v.l. SS at AN ii.211, is as quoted above and the whole phrase runs: tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajātā “entangled like a ball of string and covered with blight.”

to guḷa1

Guḷika

(adj.) like a chain, or having a chain, (nt. & f.) a cluster, a chain in maṇi a string of jewels, a pearl necklace Ja iii.184 (v.l. BB for ˚guḷa); iv.256; Vism 285 (+ muttā-guḷikā).

to guḷa3 = guṇa, cp. also guṇaka

Guḷikā

(f.) a little ball SN v.462 (satta-kolaṭṭhi-mattiyo guḷikā, pl.) Thig 498 (kolaṭṭhimatta g˚ balls of the size of a jujube) cp. Thag-a 289.

to guḷa1; cp. Sk. guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour

Guhanā

(f. abstr. to gūhati) hiding, concealing, keeping secret Vb 358 (+ pariguhanā). Also as gūhanā, q.v.

Guhā

(f.) a hiding place, a cave, cavern (cp kandara & see giriguhā); fig. the heart (in ˚āsaya) According to Bdhgh. (on Vin i.58, see Vin. Texts i.174 “a hut of bricks, or in a rock, or of wood.” Vin i.58 Vin i.96, Vin i.107, Vin i.239, Vin i.284; Vin ii.146; Vin iii.155; Vin iv.48 (cp. sattapaṇṇi-guhā); Snp 772, Snp 958; Ja ii.418; Ja vi.574; Vv 5016.

-āsaya hiding in the heart; or the shelter of the heart AN iv.98 (maccupāso + ); Ja v.367 (id.); Dhp 37 (cittaṃ see Dhp-a i.304).

Vedic guhā, guh, gūhati to hide (q.v.) Dhtp 337: saṃvaraṇa

(-˚) going, having gone (through), being skilled or perfected in. See addha˚, anta˚ chanda˚, dhamma˚, paṭṭha˚, pāra, veda˚.

fr. gam, cp. ˚ga

Gūtha

excrements, faeces, dung. As food for Petas frequently mentioned in Pv; (cp. Stede, Peta Vatthu 24 sq.), as a decoction of dung also used for medicinal purposes (Vin i.206 e.g. ). Often combn with mutta (urine): Pv i.91; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 78; DN-a i.198.

-kaṭāha an iron pot for defecation Vin iv.265. -kalala dung & mire Ja iii.393; -kīḷana playing with excrements Vism 531. -kūpa a privy (cp. karīsa) MN i.74; Snp 279; Pv ii.316; Pp 36; Ja vi.370; Vism 54. -khādaka living on faeces Ja ii.211 (˚pāṇaka) Pv-a 266; -gata having turned to dung Iti 90; -gandhin smelling of excrements Pv ii.315; -ṭṭhāna a place for excrementation Thag 1153; -naraka = foll. Vism 501; -niraya the mirepurgatory Vv-a 226; Sdhp 194; -pāṇa an insect living on excrement (= ˚khādakapāṇa) Ja ii.209, Ja ii.212; -bhakkha feeding on stercus MN iii.168; Pv-a 192; Dhp-a ii.61 -bhānin of foul speech AN i.128; Pp 29 (Kern, Toev. s. v. corrects into kūṭa˚?).

Sk. gūtha; probably to Lat. bubino, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.

Gūthaka

“a sort of gūtha,” excretion, secretion, rheum, in akkhi˚; and kaṇṇa˚; (of eye & ear) Snp 197 (cp. Snp-a 248; Vism 345 sq.). Gulha & gulhaka;

Gūḷha & gūḷhaka

(adj.) hidden, secret Vin ii.98 (gūḷha-ko salākagāho).

pp. of gūhati

Gūhati

to hide, to conceal. See paṭi˚, pari˚ ■ Caus. gūhayati Sdhp 189 (gūhayaṃ ppr.). Cp. gūḷha.

Sk. gūhati, pp. gūḍha; see guyha, guhā, etc.

Gūhana

(nt.) hiding, concealment Sdhp 65 (laddhi˚-citta).

Gūhanā

(f.) = gūhanā (q.v.) Pug. 19. Cp. pari˚.

abstr. fr. gūhati

Geṇḍuka

a ball for playing. The SS spelling is in all places bheṇḍuka, which has been taken into the text by the editors of J. and Dhs-a. The misspelling is due to a misreading of Singhalese bh → g; cp. spelling parābhetvā for parāgetvā ■ bheṇḍukena kīḷi Ja iv.30 bhūmiyaṃ pahata-bheṇḍuka (striking against the ground) Ja iv.30; Vism 143 (pahaṭa-citra˚) = Dhs-a 116 (where wrongly pahaṭṭha-citta-bheṇḍuka); Ja v.196 (citra-bh˚); Dhp-a iii.364.

Gedha1

greed. Its connection with craving and worldly attachment is often referred to. Kāmesu g˚ SN i.73; Snp 152; AN iii.312 sq. (gedho pañcann’ etaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ). gedhataṇhā SN i.15 (v.l. kodha˚); Snp 65, Snp 945, Snp 1098; Thig 352 Nd ii.231; Dhs 1059 (under lobha), 1136; Ne 18; Dhp-a i.366; Pv-a 107. -agedhatā freedom from greed Mil 276 ■ See also gedhi & paligedha.;

Vedic gṛdhyā, cp. gijjhati

Gedha2

a cave AN i.154 = AN iii.128 (the latter passage has rodha, cp. v.l. under gedhi).

= geha? Kern

Gedhi

greed, desire, jealousy, envy: gedhiṃ karoti (c. loc.) to be desirous after MN i.330 -gedhikata in ˚citta (adj.) jealous, envious, ibid. As gedhikatā (f.) vanity, greed, conceit Nd ii.585 (v.l. rodhigatā).

Sk. gṛdhi, cp. gedha

Gedhita

greedy, in gedhita-mano greedyminded Pv ii.82; as nt. greed, in der. gedhifatta (syn of gedhikatā) Nd ii.585.

pp. of gijjhati

Geyya

(nt.) a certain style of Buddhist literature consisting of mixed prose & verse It is only found in the ster. enum of the Scriptures in their ninefold division, beginning suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ See under; navaṅga.

grd. of gāyati, Sk. geya

Geruka

(nt.) & gerukā (f.) yellow ochre (Bdhgh suvaṇṇa˚ cp. Sk. kañcana˚ & svarṇa˚), red chalk used as colouring Vin i.203; Vin ii.151; AN i.210; Mil 133 (˚cuṇṇa). Freq. in ˚parikamma a coating of red chalk, red colouring Vin ii.117, Vin ii.151, Vin ii.172; ˚parikammakata “coated with red colouring” Vin i.48 Vin ii.218.

Sk. gairika

Gelañña

(nt.) sickness, illness DN ii.99; AN i.219; AN iii.298; AN iv.333 sq.; Vism 321, Vism 466, Vism 478.

n-abstr. fr. gilāna

Geha

(nt.) a dwelling, hut, house the household Ja i.145, Ja i.266, Ja i.290; Ja ii.18, Ja ii.103, Ja ii.110, Ja ii.155 Ja vi.367; Vism 593; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 62, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 82; fig. of kāya (body) Thag 184 = Dhp 154 ■ Appld to a cowshed at Mil 396.

-aṅgana the open space in front of the house Vv-a 6 -jana (sg. collective) the members of the household, the servants Pv-a 16, Pv-a 62, Pv-a 93; -jhāpana incendiarism Vism 326. -ṭṭhāna a place for a dwelling Dhp-a iii.307 -dvāra the house door Pv-a 61; -nissita (adj.) concerning the house, connected with (the house and worldly life Snp 280 (pāpiccha); Iti 117 (vitakka); cp ˚sita; -patana the falling of the house Ja iii.118. -pavesana (-mangala) (the ceremony of) entering a new hut Dhp-a iii.307; -piṭṭhi the back of the house Pv-a 78 -rakkhika keeping (in the) house, staying at home Vv-a 76 (dārakā); -vigata (nt.) the resources of the house, worldly means, riches Thig 327 (= upakaraṇa Thag-a 234); -sita (*śrita) = ˚nissita, connected with worldly life (opp. nekkhamma, renunciation). Of chandā & vitakkā (pl.) MN i.123; domanassa & somanassa (grief & pleasure) SN iv.232 = Mil 45; Vb 381; Dhs-a 194; dhammā, etc. SN iv.71; Vb 380; Ne 53.

Sk. geha = gṛha, to gṛh, gaṇhāti; cp. gaha, gihin, ghara; see also gedha2

Go

(m ■ f.) a cow, an ox, bull, pl. cattle. For f. cp gāvī; see also gava˚ for cpds ■ Sg. nom. go (Snp 580 also in composition, cp. aja-go-mahisādi Pv-a 80 = pasū) gen. gavassa (MN i.429); instr. gavena, gāvena; acc gavaṃ, gāvan; abl. gavamhā, gavā (DN i.201 = AN ii.95 Pp 69); loc. gavamhi, gāvimhi (Snp-a 323), gave (Snp 310) ■ Pl. nom. gāvo (DN i.141; MN i.225; AN i.205 AN ii.42 sq.; Snp 20, Snp 296, Snp 307; Ja i.295); gen. gonaṃ AN ii.75 (cp. Vedic gonām), gavaṃ (J iv.172, cp. gavaṃ pati) gunnaṃ (AN i.229, AN ii.75; AN v.271; Ja i.194; Ja iii.112; Ja iv.223) instr. gohi (Snp 33); acc. gāvo (MN i.225; AN i.205; Snp 304; Dhp 19, Dhp 135); abl. gohi; loc. gosu, gavesu ■ See also gava, gavesati, goṇa.

-kaṇṭaka the hoof of an ox, in ˚haṭā bhūmi, trampled by the feet of cattle Vin i.195; AN i.136 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.34); -kaṇṇa a large species of deer Ja v.406 (= gaṇin) 416 (khagga + ); Dhs-a 331 (gavaya + ); cp. next -kāṇā (f.) = gokaṇṇa DN iii.38 = DN iii.53; -kula (nt.) a cow pen, a station of cattle SN iv.289; -gaṇa a herd of cattle MN i.220; AN i.229; Ja ii.127; Dhp-a i.175; Vv-a 311 -ghaṃsikā a cow-hide (?). Vin ii.117 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.98); -ghātaka one who kills cows, a butcher DN ii.294 (in simile); MN i.58, MN i.244, MN i.364 (˚sūnā, slaughter-house) SN ii.255; SN iv.56; AN iii.302, AN iii.380; Ja v.270; Vism 348 (in simile). -cara I. Lit. A. (noun-m.) pasture, lit. “a cow’s grazing,” search after food; fodder, food, subsistence (a) of animals: Ja i.221; Ja iii.26; Dhp 135 (daṇḍena gopālo gāvo pāceti gocaraṃ: with a stick the cowherd drives the cattle to pasture). Sīho gocarāya pakkamati “the lion goes forth for his huut” AN ii.33 AN iii.121; gocarāya gacchati to go feeding, to graze Snp 39; Ja i.243; gocare carati to go feeding, to feed Ja i.242. (b) metaph. of persons, esp. the bhikkhu: pucchitabba gocara (and agocara) “enquiries have to be made concerning the fitness or otherwise of his pasturage (i.e. the houses in which he begs for food)” Vin ii.208 samaṇo gocarato nivatto an ascetic returned from his “grazing” Pv iv.142: Similarly at Vism 127, where a suitable g ■ gama ranks as one of the 7 desiderata for one intent on meditation ■ B. (adj.) (-˚) feeding on or in, living in; metaph. dealing with, mixing with. vana living in the woods Pv ii.65; vāri˚ (in water) Snp 605 jala˚ (id.) Ja ii.158 (opp. thala˚). Vesiyā˚ (etc.) associating with v. Vin i.70 ■ II. Applied. A. (noun-m. or nt.) a “field” (of sense perception, etc.), sphere, object-˚ food for, an object of (a) psychologically indriyānaṃ nānāgocarāni various spheres of sense-perception SN v.218; sense-object (= ārammaṇaṃ) Pts i.180; Pts ii.97 Pts ii.150 sq.; Dhs-a 314, Dhs-a 315 (sampatta˚ physical contact with an object, gandha˚ smell-contact, i.e. sensation) indriya˚ Sdhp 365 ■ (b) ethically: ariyānaṃ gocare ratā “finding delight in the pasture of the good, walking in the ways of the good Dhp 22; vimokho yesaṃ gocaro “whose pasture is liberty” Dhp 92 = Thag 92 Esp. in phrase ācāra-gocara-sampanna “pasturing in the field of good conduct” DN i.63 = Iti 118; MN i.33; SN v.187 It. 96; analysed as Dvandva cpd. at Vb 246, Vb 247 but cp. pāpācāra-gocara Snp 280, Snp 282. This phrase (ācāra-gocara) is also discussed in detail at Vism 19 where 3 kinds of gocarā are distinguished, viz. upanissaya˚ ārakkha˚, upanibandha˚. So also in contrast w. agocara, an unfit pasture, or an unfit, i.e. bad sphere of life, in gocare & agocare carati to move in a congenial or uncongenial sphere AN iii.389; AN iv.345 sq. DN iii.58 = DN iii.77; SN v.147; Vb 246, Vb 247 (expl. w. vesiyā etc., cp. above = having bad associations) ■ B. (adj ■ ˚: belonging to, dependent on, falling to the share of eta˚ dependent on this MN i.319; sattasaddhamma˚ moving in the sphere of the seven golden rules SN iii.83 rūpa˚ to be perceived by sight Ja i.396; Nibbāna belonging to N. Sdhp 467. -˚kusala (adj.) skilled in (finding proper) food; clever in right living-˚ behaving properly in, exercising properly MN i.220 = AN v.347 (of a cowherd driving out his cattle); SN iii.266 sq. (samādhi˚); AN iii.311 (do.) v.352 sq. (w. ref. to cattāro satipaṭṭhānā); -˚gahaṇa the taking of food, feeding Ja i.242 -˚gāma a village for the supply of food (for the bhikkhus) Pv-a 12, Pv-a 42; -˚ṭṭhāna pasturage Ja iii.52; -˚pasuta intent on feeding Ja iii.26; -˚bhūmi pasturage, a common Dhp-a iii.60; -˚visaya (the sphere of) an object of sense SN v.218; Vb 319; -caraṇa pasturing Ja vi.335; -ṭṭha (nt.) [Sk. goṣṭha to sthā to stand; cp. Lat. stabulum stable; super-stes; Goth. awistr] a cow-stable, cow-pen MN i.79; Ja iv.223; -pa [Sk. gopa, cp. gopati] a cowherd herdsman Snp 18; Dhp 19; Ja iv.364 (a robber); Vism 166 (in simile); Dhp-a 157, f. gopī Snp 22, Snp 32; -pakhuma (adj.) having eyelashes like a heifer DN ii.18; DN iii.144 DN iii.167 sq.; Vv-a 162, Vv-a 279 (= āḷārapamha); -pada a cow’s footprint, a puddle AN iii.188; AN iv.102; Mil 287; also ˚padaka AN iii.188 v.l.; DN-a i.283; -pariṇāyaka leader of the cows, Ep. of a bull (gopitā + ) MN i.220, MN i.225; -pāla a cowherd (usually as ˚ka) Dhp 135; -pālaka = prec. Vin i.152, Vin i.243 sq.; MN i.79, MN i.115 sq., 220 = AN v.347; MN i.333; SN iv.181; AN i.205 (-˚uposatha); Mil 18, Mil 48; Vism 279 (in comparison); Dhp-a iii.59; -pitā “father (protector of the cows” = gavaṃ pati, Ep. of a bull MN i.220 (+ ˚pariṇāyaka); -pī f. of gopa, q.v.; -pura (nt.) [Sk. gopura] the gate of a city Ja vi.433; Mil 1, Mil 67, Mil 330; Bdhd 138; -balivadda in ˚nayena; in the expression gobalivadda (black-cattle-bull) i.e. by an accumulation of words Vv-a 258; -bhatta cows’ fodder Ja iv.67; -maṇḍala ox-beat, ox-round, Cp iii.151 (as gā˚), quoted Ja i.47 (cp. assa-m˚); Snp-a 39; also in phrase ˚paribbūḷha Snp 301 (expld by Snp-a 320 as goyūthehi parikiṇṇa) Ja vi.27; at MN i.79 however it means the cowherds or peasants (see note MN i.536: gopāladārakā or gāmadārakā to v.l. gāmaṇḍala) cp. gāmaṇḍala; -maya (m. nt. cowdung MN i.79; AN i.209, AN i.295; AN v.234, AN v.250, AN v.263 sq. Ne 23; Dhp-a i.377. -˚pāṇaka a coprophagan, dor beetle Ja ii.156; -˚piṇda a lump of cowdung Ja i.242 -˚bhakkha eating cowdung DN i.166≈; -māyu a jackal Pgdp 49; -mutta (and ˚ka) a precious stone of light red colour Vv-a iii; Dhs-a 151; -medaka = gomuttaka Vv-a 111.; -medha a cow sacrifice, in ˚yañña Snp-a 323 -yūtha a herd of cows Snp-a 322; Dhp-a i.323; -rakkhā (f.) cow-keeping, tending cattle, usually combd with kasī, agriculturing MN i.85; Pv i.56; Ja i.338; Ja ii.128; given as a superior profession (ukkaṭṭha-kamma) Vin iv.6 -ravaka the bellowing of a cow MN i.225; -rasa (usually pl.) produce of the cow, enumd in set of five, viz khīra, dadhi, takka, navanīta, sappi (milk, cream buttermilk, butter, ghee) Vin i.244; Dhp-a i.158, Dhp-a i.323 Dhp-a i.397; Vv-a 147; Snp-a 322; -rūpa (collect.) cattle Ja i.194 Ja iv.173; Mil 396 (bull); -lakkhaṇa fortune telling from cows DN i.9≈; -vaccha (khīra˚ & takka˚) Vism 28; -vatika [Sk. govratin] one who lives after the mode of cows, of bovine practices MN i.387; Ne 99 (cp. govata Dhs-a 355, and Dhs. trsl. p. 261); -vikattana (and ˚vikantana; Sk. vikṛntana) a butcher’s knife MN i.244 MN i.449; AN iii.380 Sdhp 381 (vikatta only); -vittaka one whose wealth is cattle Ja i.191; -vinda the supt. of cowherds AN iii.373; -sappi ghee from cow’s milk Vin iii.251; Dhs-a 320; -sālā cow-stable AN i.188; -siṅga a cow’s horn Vism 254. -sita mixed with milk Vv-a 179 -sīla = govatika Dhs-a 355; -sīsa (nt.) an excellent kind of sandal wood Pv-a 215 (cp. Sp. AvS i.67, 68, 109) -hanuka the jaw bone of a cow, in ˚ena koṭṭāpeti (koṭṭh˚ J) to massage with a cow’s jaw bone Vin ii.266; Ja iv.188; Ja v.303.

Vedic go, Lat. bos, Gr. βοϋς, Ohg. chuo, Ags. cū = E. cow

Goṭaviya

(goṭavisa Text) v.l. Ja vi.225, part of a boat, the poop (expl. ib. p. 226 by nāvāya pacchimabandho).

Goṭhaphala

a medicinal seed Vin i.201.

Sk. gotravṛkṣa? Kern

Goṇa1

an ox, a bullock SN iv.195 sq.; Ja i.194 Ja iv.67; Pv i.82; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 40; Vv-a 63 (for ploughing) DN-a i.163; Dhp-a iii.60. -˚sira wild ox Ja vi.538(= araññagoṇaka).

The Sanskrit goṇa, according to B. R., is derived from the Pali

Goṇa2

= goṇaka2, in ˚santhata (of a pallanka), covered with a woollen rug Vv 818; Pv iii.117; (text saṇṭhita v.l. BB goṇakatthata, cp. next).

Goṇaka1

a kind of ox, a wild bull Ja vi.538 (arañña˚).

goṇa1

Goṇaka2

a woollen cover with long fleece (DN-a i.86: dīghalomako mahākojavo; caturangulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni) DN i.7≈; SN iii.144; Ja v.506; Pv ii.128 Thig 378 (+ tūlika); Thag-a 253 (= dīgha-lomakāḷakojava). -˚atthata spread w. a goṇaka-cover AN i.137 AN iii.50 = AN iv.394; cp. iv.94, 231 (always of a pallaṅka) See also goṇa2.

Sk. BSk. goṇika, cp. Pischel, Beitr. iii.236; also spelled gonaka

Goṇisādika

an ox-stall Vin i.240; cp. Vin. Texts ii.121. As gonisādi Vin iii.46.

Gotta

(nt.) ancestry, lineage. There is no word in English for gotta. It includes all those descended, or supposed to be descended, from a common ancestor. A gotta name is always distinguished from the personal name, the name drawn from place of origin or residence, or from occupation, and lastly from the nick-name. It probably means agnate rather than cognate. About a score of gotta names are known They are all assigned to the Buddha’s time. See also Rh. D. Dialogues i.27, 195 sq ■ jāti gotta lakkhaṇa Snp 1004; gotta salakkhaṇa Snp 1018; Ādiccā nāma gottena, Sākiyā nāma jātiyā Snp 423; jāti gotta kula Ja ii.3; jātiyā gottena bhogena sadisa “equal in rank lineage & wealth” Dhp-a ii.218 ■ evaṃ-gotta (adj. belonging to such & such an ancestry MN i.429; MN ii.20, MN ii.33 kathaṃ˚ of what lineage, or: what is your family name DN i.92; nānā˚ (pl.) of various families Pv ii.916 ■ With nāma (name & lineage, or nomen et cognomen): nāmagottaṃ Vin i.93; Vin ii.239; DN i.92 (expl. at DN-a i.257 paññatti-vasena nāmaṃ paveṇi-vasena gottaṃ: the name for recognition, the surname for lineage); Snp 648; Vv 8445 (with nāma & nāmadheyya; expl. at Vv-a 348 Vv-a 349: nāmadheyya, as Tisso, Phusso, etc.; gotta, as Bhaggavo Bhāradvājo, etc.) ■ gottena by the ancestral name: Vin i.93; DN ii.154; Snp 1019; Dhp 393; gottato same Ja i.56. Examples: Ambaṭṭha Kaṇhāyana-gottena DN i.92; Vipassī Koṇḍañño g˚; Kakusandho Kassapo g˚ Bhagavā Gotamo g˚ DN ii.3; Nāgito Kassapo g˚ DN-a i.310 Vasudevo Kaṇho g˚ Pv-a 94.

-thaddha conceited as regards descent (+ jāti˚ dhana˚) Snp 104; -pañha question after one’s family name Snp 456; -paṭisārin (adj.) relying on lineage DN i.99 (cp. Dialogues i.122); AN v.327 sq.; -bandhava connected by family ties (ñāti˚ + ) Nd ii.455; -rakkhita protected by a (good) name Snp 315; Vv-a 72; -vāda talk over lineage, boasting as regards descent DN i.99.

Vedic gotra, to go

Gottā

f. gottī protectress Ja v.329.

n. ag. to gopeti = Sk. goptṛ

Gotrabhū

“become of the lineage”; a technical term used from the end of the Nikāya period to designate one, whether layman or bhikkhu, who, as converted, was no longer of the worldlings (puthujjanā), but of the Ariyas, having Nibbāna as his aim. It occurs in a supplementary Sutta in the Majjhima (Vol. III. 256), and in another found in two versions, at the end of the Anguttara (A iv.373 and v.23). Defined at Pp 12, Pp 13 & Vism 138 amplified at Pts i.66–⁠68, frequent in P (Tikap. 154 sq. 165, 324 etc.), mentioned at Vv-a 155. On the use of gotrabhū in medieval psychology see Aung, in Compendium 66

68. Comp. the use of upanissaya at Ja i.235-˚ñāṇa, PPA 184; Vism 673. Ā˚ Vism 683.

Godhaka

a kind of bird Ja vi.358.

Godharaṇī

(f ■ adj.) being able to be paired (of a young cow), or being with calf (?) Snp 26.

Godhā1

(f.) iguana, a large kind of lizard Vin i.215–⁠16 (˚mukha); DN i.9≈(˚lakkhaṇa, cp. DN-a i.94); Ja ii.118; Ja iii.52; Ja iii.538; Dhp-a iii.420. As godha (m.) at Ja v.489. Dimin. golikā at Ja ii.147.

Sk. godhā

Godhā2

(f.) string of a lute Ja vi.580 (cp. RV. 8, 58, 9).

Godhūma

wheat (usually mentioned with yava, spelt) Mil 267; DN-a i.163; Snp-a 323. See dhañña.

Gopaka

a guardian, watchman DN-a i.148; cp. khetta˚.

Gopanā

(f.) protecting, protection, care, watchfulness (cp. gutti) Pp 24 (+ gutti) Dhs 1347; Mil 8, Mil 243.

Gopānasī

(f.) a beam supporting the framework of a roof, shaped *Λ; fig. of old people, bent by age (see ˚vanka) Vin iii.65, Vin iii.81; SN ii.263; SN iii.156; SN v.43, SN v.228; MN i.80; AN i.261; AN iii.364; AN v.21; Vism 320; Dhp-a ii.190; Vv-a 188.

-gaṇā (pl.) a collection of beams, the rafters Vv 784 -bhogga (-sama) bent like a rafter (nārī) Ja iii.395 -vaṅka (gopānasi˚) as crooked as a rafter (of old people cp. BSk. gopānasī-vakra Avs ii.25n5) SN i.117; MN i.88; AN i.138.

Gopita

(adj.) protected, guarded, watched (lit. & fig.) Ja vi.367; Mil 345; Snp-a 116 (˚indriya guttindriya); Sdhp 398.

pp. of gopeti

Gopeti

to watch, guard, pot. gopetha Dhp 315 ■ pp. gopita (q.v.).

Sk. gopayati, gup; cp. gutta, gottā

Gopphaka

the ankle Vin iv.112; AN iv.102; Ja v.472; Dhp-a ii.80, Dhp-a ii.214; Snp-a ii.230.

Dem. of goppha = Sk. gulpha

Gomika

an owner of cows SN i.6 = Snp 33, Snp 34.

Sk. gomin

Golikā

see godhā1.

Golomika

(adj.) like a cluster; in phrase massuṃ golomikaṃ kārāpeti “to have the beard trimmed into a ball-or cluster-shape Vin ii.134. Bdhgh’s expln “like a goat’s beard” (cp Vin. Texts iii.138) is based on pop. etym. go + loma ika “cow-hair-like,” the discrepancy being that go does not mean goat.

inverted diaeretic form fr. Sk. gulma = P. gumba: viz. *golmika → *golmika → golomika

Goḷaka

a ball Thag-a 255 (kīḷā˚).

Gh.

Gh

˚Gha

(adj ■ suffix to ghan ) killing, destroying, see hanati ■ iṇagha at Snp 246 is v.l. SS for iṇaghāta. Cp. paṭi & see also ghana;2 & ghāta.;

Ghaṃsati1

to rub, crush, grind, SN ii.238; Ja i.190 (= ghasituṃ? to next?) 216; vi.331 ■ Caus ghaṃsāpeti to rub against, to allow to be rubbed or crushed Vin ii.266. Cp. upani˚, pari˚, & pahaṃsati;1. Pass. ghaṃsīyati (ghaṃsiyati) to rub (intr.), to be rubbed Vin i.204; Vin ii.112.

Sk. gharṣati, *ghṛṣ to *gher to rub or grind, cp. Gr. ξέραδος, ξερμάς, ξρίω, enlarged in Lat. frendo Ags. grindan to grind

Ghaṃsati2

to be pleased, to rejoice Ja iv.56 (v.l. ghasati). Cp. pahaṃsati2.

= haṃsati for Sk. haṛsati, see haṃsati

Ghaṃsana

rubbing, in pāda-gh ˚ī a towel for rubbing the feet Vin ii.130.

Ghaṃsikā

in go˚, cow-hide (?) see go.

Ghaccā

(f.) destruction (usually -˚) DN iii.67 (mūla˚); Ja i.176 (sakuṇa˚).

fr. hanati, han and ghan

Ghañña

(adj.-n.) killing, destroying (-˚) see atta˚.;

fr. Sk. ghana to han, cp. ghānya & hatya

Ghaṭa1

a hollow vessel, a bowl, vase, pitcher. Used for holding water, as well as for other purposes, which are given under pānīya˚ paribhojana vacca˚ at Vin i.157 = Vin i.352 = MN i.207. In the Vinaya freq. combd with kolamba, also a deep vessel: i.209 213, 225, 286 ■ As water-pitcher: Ja i.52, Ja i.93 (puṇṇa˚) 166; Vv-a 118, Vv-a 207, Vv-a 244 (˚satena nhāto viya); Pv-a 66 (udaka˚), 179 (pānīya˚), 282 ■ In general: SN iv.196 For holding a light (in formula antoghaṭe padīpo viya upanissayo pajjalati) Ja i.235 (cp. kuṭa), Pv-a 38. Used as a drum Ja vi.277 (= kumbhathūna); as bhadda Sdhp 319, Sdhp 329.

-pamāṇa (adj.) of the size of a large pot Ja ii.104; Pv-a 55.

Non-Aryan?

Ghaṭa2

(m. & f.) multitude, heap, crowd, dense mass, i.e. thicket, cluster. itthi˚ a crowd of women Ja iv.316 maccha˚ a swarm of fish Ja ii.227; vana˚ dense forest Ja ii.385; Ja iv.56; Ja v.502; Ja vi.11, Ja vi.519, Ja vi.564; brahma company of brahmins Ja vi.99.

Sk. ghaṭā; conn. with ganthati to bind together

Ghaṭaka

1. a small jar (?) Vin ii.129, Vin ii.130 (combd w. kataka & sammajjanī); cp. Vin. Texts iii.130.

2. the capital of a pillar Ja i.32 (cp. kumbha).

Dem. of prec.

Ghaṭati

to apply oneself to, to exert oneself to strive; usually in formula uṭṭhahati gh˚ vāyamati MN i.86; SN i.267 (yamati for vāy˚); Pp 51; or yuñjati gh˚ vāy˚ Ja iv.131Sdhp 426, Sdhp 450.

Sk. ghaṭate, to granth, cp. ganthati. The Dhtp gives two roots ghaṭ; of which one is expld by “ghāṭane” (No. 554), the other by “īhāyaṃ,” i.e. from exertion (No. 98)

Ghaṭana

see Ghaṭṭana].

Ghaṭikā1

(f.) a small bowl, used for begging alms Thig 422 (= Thag-a 269: bhikkhā-kapāla).

to ghaṭa1

Ghaṭikā2

(f.) 1. a small stick, a piece of a branch a twig Ja i.331; Ja iv.87 (khadira˚); vi.331; Thig 499 (= khaṇḍa Thag-a 290). upadhānaghaṭikā Ja iii.179 (belonging to the outfit of an executioner); pāsa Ja ii.253 is a sort of magic stick or die (= pāsaka) 2. a game of sticks (“tip-cat” sticks Mil trsl. ii.32) DN i.6≈(DN-a i.85: ghaṭikā ti vuccati dīgha-daṇḍakena rassa daṇḍaka-paharaṇa kīḷā, tip-cat); Vin ii.10 Vin iii.181; MN i.266; AN v.203; Mil 229.

3. a stack of twigs SN ii.178, SN ii.4; (a stick used as) a bolt Vin ii.120 Vin ii.208; Vin iii.119; usually as sūci˚ a needle-shaped stick Vin ii.237 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.106); SN iv.290; Ud 52; Ja i.346. Cp. gaṇḍikādhāna.

to ghaṭa2, orig. meaning “knot,” cp. gantha & gaṇṭhi, also; gaṇḍa

Ghaṭita

connected, combined Vism 192.

pp. of ghaṭeti

Ghaṭī

(f.) a jar Dhp-a i.426. In cpds. also ghaṭi˚.

-odana rice boiled in a jar Dhp-a i.426; -kaṭāha a water pot, or rather a bowl for gathering alms (cp. ghaṭikā1 Vin ii.115 (= ghaṭi-kapāla Bdhgh); -kāra a potter Dhp-a i.380; Np. of a kumbhakāra SN i.35, SN i.60; MN ii.45 sq (= ˚suttanta, mentioned as such at Dhp-a iii.251); Ja i.43.

to ghaṭa1

Ghaṭīyati

1. to be connected or continued Dhp-a i.46 (paveṇī na gh.), 174.

2. to be obstructed Nd ii.102 (= virujjhati, paṭihaññati).

Pass. of ghaṭeti

Ghaṭeti

to join, to connect, to unite Ja i.139; freq. in anusandhiṃ ghaṭetvā adding the connection (between one rebirth & another) Ja i.220, Ja i.308.

Denom. fr. ghaṭa2, cp. gantheti

Ghaṭṭa

see araghaṭṭa; meaning “rubbed, knocked against” in phrase ghaṭṭa-pāda-tala Snp-a 582 (for ugghaṭṭha) also at Vin iv.46 in def. of vehāsa-kuṭī (a cell or hut with air, i.e., spacious, airy) as majjhimassa purisassa a-sīsa-ghaṭṭā “so that a man of medium height does not knock his head (against the ceiling)”; of uncertain meaning (“beating”?) at Ja i.454 (v.l. for T. ghota).

Ghaṭṭana

(nt.) 1. combining, putting together, combination, composition Ja i.220; PA. 312, etc.

2. striking, fig. insulting (ghaṭṭana = āsajjana) Vv-a 55. To meaning “strike” cp. saṃghaṭṭana.

Sk. ghaṭana, to granth, cp. gantha

Ghaṭṭeti

to strike, beat, knock against, touch; fig. to offend, mock, object to. (a) lit. MN ii.4 (jannukena; text reads ghatteti, v.l. ghaṭeti); Snp 48 (= saṃ˚ Nd ii.233); Ja i.218; Pv iv.109 (= paṭihaṃsati Pv-a 271); DN-a i.256 (= khuṃseti); Dhp-a i.251 ■ (b) fig AN iii.343; Snp 847 (cp. Nd i.208); Vism 18 ■ pp ghaṭṭita Pp 30, Pp 36; psychologically ghaṭṭayati = ruppati B or SN iii.86 ■ Pass. ghaṭīyati (q.v.) ■ Cp. āsajja and ugghāṭeti.

Sk. ghaṭṭayati

Ghaṇṭā

(f.) a small bell (cp. kinkanikā) Ja iv.215; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 37, Vv-a 279 (khuddaka˚). As ghaṇṭī at Vism 181.

Ghata

(nt.) clarified butter Vv-a 326; Mil 41; Sdhp 201 (-bindu) With ref. to the sacrificial fire (fire as eating ghee, or being sprinkled w. ghee) ghatāsana; Ja i.472; Ja v.64, Ja v.446; Pv i.85 (ghatasitta).

Vedic ghṛta, ghṛ; to sprinkle, moisten

Ghana1

(a) (adj.) solid, compact, massive; dense, thick; in eka˚ of one solid mass (of sela, rock) Vin i.185 = Dhp 81 = Thag 643; Mil 386; AN iii.378, cp. ghanasela-pabbata Dhp-a i.74-gh. paṃsu Ja i.264, paṭhavī (solid ground) Ja i.74; Pv-a 75; palāsa (foliage) Pv-a 113; buddharasmiyo Ja i.12; ˚maṃsa solid, pure flesh Dhp-a i.80; ˚sāṭaka (thick cloth) Ja i.292; ˚sañchanna (thickly covered Pv-a 258; ˚suvaṇṇakoṭṭima Dhp-a iv.135; abbha˚ a thick cloud Snp 348 (cp. Snp-a 348) ■ (b) (m. the foetus at a certain stage (the last before birth the 4;th in the enum. of the foll. stages: kalala, abbuda pesī, gh.) SN i.206; Ja iv.496; Mil 40; Vism 236. The latter meaning is semantically to be explained as “swelling” & to be compared with Gr.; βρύω to swell and ε ̔́μβρυον = embryo (the gravid uterus).

Vedic ghana, cp. Gr. εὐχηνής?

Ghana2

a club, a stick, a hammer; in ayo˚ an iron club Vv-a 20. Also coll. term for a musical instrument played by striking, as cymbal, tambourine etc. Vv-a 37.

Vedic ghana to hanti (ghanti, cp. ghātayati), *gṷhen “strike,” cp. Gr. χείνω, φόνος, Lat. of-fendo Ags. gud, Ohg. gundea

Ghanika

a class of devas (cloud-gods?) Mil 191.

to ghana1 in meaning of “cloud” (Sk.)

Ghamma

heat; hot season, summer. Either in loc. ghamme Ja iv.172 (= gimha-kāle); Pv iv.53 ghammani (“in summer” or “by the heat”) SN i.143; Ja iii.360 (sampareta overcome by heat); Snp 353; Ja iv.239; Ja v.3 ■ Or. in cpd. with ˚abhitatta (ghammâbhitatta, overpowered by heat) MN i.74; DN ii.266; AN iii.187 sq.; Snp 1014 (cp. 353 ghammatatta); Mil 318; Vv-a 40; Pv-a 114.

Vedic gharma = Gr. χερμός, Lat. formus, Ohg. etc. warm; to *gṷher “warm,” cp. Sk. ghṛṇoti, hara Gr. χέρος, etc.

Ghara1

(nt.; pl. ˚ā Dhp 241, Dhp 302) a house AN ii.68; Snp 43 (gahaṭṭhā gharaṃ āvasantā), 337 (abl gharā), 889 (id. gharamhā); Ja i.290 (id. gharato) iv.2, 364, 492 (ayo˚); Pp 57; Mil 47. Combd with vatthu Pv-a 3, Pv-a 17 ■ sūcighara a needle-case Vv-a 251.

-ājira house-yard Vism 144 (where Dhs A 116 in id. passage reads gharadvāra). -āvāsa the household life (as contrasted with the life of a mendicant) Vin ii.180 (gharāvāsatthaṃ); AN ii.208; MN i.179, MN i.240, MN i.267 MN i.344; Snp 406 (cp. SN v.350); Ja i.61; Pv-a 61; -kapoṭa [Sk. gṛhakapota] the house-pigeon Mil 364, Mil 403 -golikā house or domestic lizard Ja ii.147. -dāsī a female house-slave Pv ii.321; -dvāra a house-door Ja iv.142; Dhs A 116; Pv-a 93; -bandhana the bonds of the house i.e. the establishing of marriage Dhp-a i.4; -mukha an opening in the house, the front of the house Nd ii.177; -mesin one who looks after the house, a pater familias, householder Snp 188; Iti 112 (gahaṭṭha + ) Ja vi.575; -sandhi a cleft or crevice in the house Pv-a 24 -sūkara a tame, domestic pig Dhp-a iv.16.

cp. gaha & geha

Ghara2

(˚-); in -˚dinnakābādha sickness in consequence of a poisonous drink (expl. as suffering fr. the results of sorcery) Vin i.206 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.60); -visa poison Pp 48; Dhp-a ii.38 -sappa a poisonous snake Dhp-a ii.256.

a drink (cp. gala) & garala poison

Gharaṇī

(f.) a house-wife Vin i.271; SN i.201; Pv iii.19 (= ghara-sāminī Pv-a 174); Dhp-a iii.209.

fr. ghara1

Ghasa

(adj.-n.) eating, an eater; in mahagghasa a big eater AN v.149 (of the crow); Dhp 325; Mil 288.

Ghasati

to eat Ja iii.210; ppr. ghasamāna Vin ii.201; Thag 749 ■ Cp ghasa, ghasta & ghāsa. See also jaddhu. Desid jighacchati.;

Vedic grasati & *ghasti, pp. grasta, cp. Gr.; γράω to gnaw, γράστις fodder, Lat. gramen grass

Ghasta

only in vanka˚ having eaten or swallowed the hook (cp. grasta-vanka) DN ii.266 (v-g˚ va ambujo); Ja vi.113.

pp. of ghasati = Sk. grasta

Ghāṭa

see saṃ˚; ghāṭana see ghaṭati.

Ghāta

(usually -˚) killing murdering; slaughter, destruction, robbery DN i.135 (gāma˚, etc. village robbery); setu˚ the pulling down of a bridge (fig.) Vin i.59, etc. (see setu); pantha highway robbery, brigandage, “waylaying” Ja i.253. Thig 474, Thig 493 (= samugghāta Com.); Snp 246 (ina˚) Vv-a 72 (pāṇa˚ + pāṇa-vadha & ˚atipāta). Cp. next vi˚; saṃ˚.

Sk. ghāta & ghātana; to han (ghan), strike, kill; see etym. under ghana2 & hanti

Ghātaka

(adj ■ ˚) murdering, destroying, slaughtering Vin i.89 (arahanta˚), 136 (id.), 168 (id.); ii.194 (manussa˚); iv.260 (tala˚) Ja iv.366 (gāma˚ corā robbers infesting the village); v.397 (thī˚ = itthi˚); Pp 56 (maccha˚) ■ As noun: (m.) one who slays, an executioner: go˚ a bull-slaughterer MN i.244, etc. (see go) cora˚ an executioner or hangman Ja iii.41; Pp 56; Pv-a 5 ■ (nt.) brigandage, robbery, slaughtering gāmaghātakaṃ karoti Ja i.200.

Ghātikā

(f. abstr. to ghātaka) murder Ja i.176 sq.

Ghātita

(adj.) killed, destroyed Thag-a 289; also in Der. ghātitatta (nt.) the fact of having killed Ja i.167. Cp. ugghātita.

pp. of ghāteti

Ghātin

(adj.-n.) killing; a murderer Ja i.168 (pāṇa˚); vi.67 (ghātimhi = ghātake).

Ghātimant

(adj.) able to strike, able to pierce (of a needle), in ghana˚ going through hard material easily Ja iii.282.

Ghāteti

tc kill, slay, slaughter Iti 22 (yo na hanti na ghāteti) Dhp 129, Dhp 405; Ja i.255; Mvu vii.35, Mvu vii.36 ■ aor. aghātayi Ja i.254; ger. ghātetvā Ja i.166 ■ Caus. ghātāpeti to have somebody killed Ja iv.124 ■ Cp. ghacca, ghātita āghāteti.

Denom. fr. ghāta, cp. Sk. ghātayati to han

Ghāna

(nt.) the nose; usually in its function as organ of smell = sense of smell (either in phrase ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyati: to smell an odour by means of the nose; or in ghana-viññeyyā gandhā odours which are sensed by the nose). In the enum. of the senses gh. is always mentioned in the 3rd place (after cakkhu & sota, eye & ear); see under rūpa. In this connection: Vin i.34; DN i.21, DN i.245 DN iii.102, DN iii.244 sq.; SN i.115; MN i.112, MN i.191; MN ii.42; Dhp 360 Pp 20; Mil 270; Vism 444 sq. (with defn) ■ In other connections: Pv ii.24 (ghāna-chinna, one whose nose is cut off).

-āyatana the organ of smell DN iii.243, DN iii.280; Dhs 585 Dhs 605, Dhs 608; -indriya the sense of smell DN iii.239; Dhs 585 etc. (as above); -dhātu the element of smell Dhs as above; -viññāṇa perception of smell Dhs 443, Dhs 608 Dhs 628; -samphassa contact with the sense of smell SN i.115; DN iii. & Dhs as above.;

Sk. ghrāṇa to ghrā, see ghāyati. On n for ṇ cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 81

Ghāyati1

to smell, always with gandhaṃ; ger. ghātvā SN iv.71, SN iv.74 or ghāyitvā Ja i.210 (jālagandhaṃ); iii.52 (macchagandhaṃ); Mil 347. Cp. sāyati & upagghāyati.;

Sk. ghrāti & jighrati, to; ghrā, cp. gandha

Ghāyati2

to be consumed, to be tormented by thirst Pv i.1110 (ghāyire = ghāyanti Pv-a 60 v.l. BB jhāyire & jhāynati) Mil 397.;

a variant of jhāyati

Ghāsa

grass for fodder, pasturing: food Ja i.511 (˚ṃ kurute); Pv-a 173 (˚atthāya gacchati “go feeding”) Mostly in: -esana search for food (= gocara) SN i.141; Snp 711 ■ Cp. vi˚.

-chada (chāda & chādana) food & clothing, i.e. tending, fostering, good care (= posana) (act.) or being well looked after, well provided (pass.); chada: Pp 51 chāda: Ja i.94; AN i.107; AN ii.85; AN iii.385; chādana DN i.60; MN i.360; Vv-a 23, Vv-a 137; -hāraka one who fetches the fodder (food) Thag 910.

Vedic ghāsa, fr. ghasati, q.v. cp. Lat. gramen = grass

Ghāsana

(nt.) = ghāsa; in -˚ṭṭhāna pasture (= gocara) Vv-a 218.

Ghuṭṭha

proclaimed, announced; renowned Ja i.50 (of festival) 425 (nakkhattaṃ); ii.248 (ussava); Pv ii.82 (dūra˚ of wide renown, world-famed of Bārāṇasī); Dhp-a iii.100 (chaṇe ghuṭṭhe when the fair was opened).

Sk. ghuṣṭa, pp. ghuṣ, see ghoseti & cp. saṃ˚

Ghuru-ghuru

onomat. expression of snoring & grunting noise in -passāsa (& ˚in) snoring & breathing heavily, panting, snorting & puffing SN i.117 (of Māra); Ja i.160 (of sleeping bhikkhus gh˚ kākacchamānā breathing loud & snoring) Cp. next.;

gṛ-gṛ to; *gel or *ger, see note on gala

Ghurughurāyati

to snore Ja iii.538; Dhp-a i.307. Cp. Prk. ghurughuranti varāhā (grunting hogs) & ghurukkanti vagghā (roaring tigers).;

Denom. fr. prec.

Ghoṭaka

a (bad) horse Ja vi.452.

cp. Sk. ghoṭaka, Halāyudha 2, 281

Ghota

is read at Ja i.454, probably for ghaṭṭa; meaning is “striking, stroke,” combd with kasā, whip.

Ghora

(adj.) terrible, frightful, awful Vin ii.147. Freq. as attr. of niraya (syn. with dāruṇa Pv-a 87, Pv-a 159, Pv-a 206) Pv i.1012; iv.18. Of an oath (sapatha Pv i.68; ii.1216 ■ ghorassara of a terrible cry (Ep. of an ass) Mil 363, Mil 365.

Vedic ghora, orig. meaning, wailing, howling, lamenting, to *gher, *ger, see note on gala & cp. ghuru A root; ghur is given by Dhtp 487 in meaning of “bhīma,” i.e. horrible ■ Rel. to Goth. gaurs, sad; Ohg gōrag, miserable; & perhaps Lat. funus, funeral. See Walde,; Lat. Wtb. s. v.

Ghosa

1. shout, sound, utterance Vin ii.155 (“Buddha”-ghosa); MN i.294; AN i.87, AN i.228 Snp p.106; Snp 696, Snp 698; Dhs 637, Dhs 720 (+ ghosa-kamma)

2. shouting, howling, wailing (of Petas) Pv iii.34iv.36, 338.

-pamāṇa to be measured (or judged) by one’s reputation AN ii.71 = Pp 53; also as pamāṇika Dhp-a iii.114 (in same context).

Vedic ghoṣa to ghus

Ghosaka

(adj.) sounding, proclaiming, shouting out (-˚), in dhamma˚ praising the Law Ja ii.286; Satthu guṇa sounding the praise of the Master Dhp-a iii.114. As n Name of a deva (Gh. devaputta) Dhp-a i.173.

Ghosanā

(f.) fame, renown, praise, in Māra˚ Ja i.71.

Ghosavant

(adj.) full of sound, roaring Ja iii.189.

Ghosita

1. proclaimed, renowned, Pv-a 107 (= ghuṭṭha); Vv-a 31 (nakkhattaṃ). As Npl Ghositārāma Dhp-a i.53, Dhp-a i.161, Dhp-a i.208.

2. [n. ag. = ghositṛ cp. ghosaka] one who proclaims, advocates, or heralds in Np. Ghositaseṭṭhi Dhp-a i.187.

pp. of ghoseti

Ghoseti

to proclaim, announce; cry aloud, wail, shout Ja ii.112; Ja iii.52; Pv ii.937 (= uggh˚); iv.63; pp. ghosita & ghuṭṭha (q.v.) ■ Caus.; ghosāpeti to have proclaimed Ja i.71.

C.

Denom. of ghosa, cp. Sk. ghoṣayati, caus. to ghuṣ

C

Ca

(indef. enchtic particle) 1. Indefinite (after demonstr. pron. in the sense of kiṃ = what about? or how is it? cp. kiṃ) = ever, whoever what-ever, etc. [Sk. kaśca, Gr. ὁς τε, Lat: quisque Goth. hvazuh] so ca whoever (see below 3), tañ ca pan amhākaṃ ruccati tena c’ amhā attamanā MN i.93; yañ ca kho… ceteti yañ ca pakappeti… whatever he thinks, whatever he intends… SN ii.65. As a rule the Pali form corresp. to Sk. kaśca is *kascid = koci & ci (cid) is the regular P. representative of the indefinite ca (cp. cana & api).

2.; Copulative or disjunctive according to the general context being positive or negative. (a) copulative: and, then, now: tadā ca now then, and then (in historical exposition) Ja iii.188 Most frequent in connecting two or three words, usually placed after the second, but also after the third: atthaṃ anatthañ ca Dhp 256; pubbâparāni ca Dhp 352 alaṃ etehi ambehi jambūhi panasehi ca Ja ii.160 ■ In the same sense added to each link of the chain as ca-ca (cp. Sk. ca-ca, Gr. τε τε, Lat. que que; also mixed with constituents of similar pairs as api-ca, cp. τε και) tuyhañ ca tassā ca to you and her (orig. this or whatever to you, whatever to her) = to you as well as to her Ja i.151. Often with the first member emphasized by eva: c’ eva, as well as: hasi c’ eva rodi ca he laughed as well as cried Ja i.167; maṃsena c’ eva phalāphalena ca with flesh as well as with all kinds of fruit Ja iii.127 subhaddako c’ eva supesalo ca Ja iii.82; c’ eva apace padūse pi ca waste and even defile Thag-a 72 (Ap v.40). (b) disjunctive: but (esp. after a negation): yo ca but who Thag 401; yadā ca but when (cp. tadā ca) Ja iii.128 In conditional clauses (cp. 3) combd with sace = but if on the other hand: sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasati… sace ca pabbajati agārā Snp 1003. With neg, na ca = but not: mahatī vata te bondi, na ca paññā tadūpikā (but your wisdom is not in the same proportion) Ja ii.160. 3. Conditional: if [ = Vedic ced, Lat. absque] DN i.186

207; ii.36, 57 (jāti ca not va); MN i.91; SN iii.66 (rūpañ ca attā abhavissa); AN i.58; AN v.87; Ja ii.110 (ciram pi kho khadeyya yavaṃ… ravamāno ca dūsayi: “he might have caten a long time, if he had not come to harm by his cry,” or “but”); iv.487; v.185, 216 (Sakko ca me varaṃ dajjā so ca labbhetha me varo: “if S. will give me a wish, that wish will be granted,” or: “whatever wish he will allow, that one will be fulfilled”); vi.206 208 ■ na ca (at the beginning of an interrog. phrase) if not SN i.190 (ahaṃ ca kho… pavāremi, na ca me Bhagavā kiñci garahati: if the Bh. will not blame me) For BSk. ca = ced see Avs ii.189, n. o.

Vedic ca adv. to rel. pron. *qṷo, idg. *que = Gr. τε, Lat. que, Goth ■ h. Cp. ka ki, ku

Cakita

(adj.) disturbed; afraid, timid Dāvs iv.35, Dāvs iv.46.

Sk. cakita, cak

Cakora

the francolin partridge (Perdix rufa) Ja v.416; Vv 358 Vv-a 163. See also cankora.

Sk. cakora to kol (kor), see note on gala

Cakka

(nt.) I. Crude meaning: 1. a wheel (of a carriage) Dhp 1; Pv-a 65 (ratha˚); Mil 27.

2. a discus used as a missile weapon Ja i.74; Pgdp 36; cp khura˚ a razor as an instr. of torture.

3. a disc, a circle: heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni, forming the 2nd characteristic mark of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.17 DN iii.143; DN iii.149Ja ii.331; Mil 51.

4. an array of troops (under tayo vyūhā: paduma˚ cakka˚ sakaṭa˚ Ja ii.404 = Ja iv.343 ■ II. Applied meaning: 1. (a wheel as component part of a carriage, or one of a duad or tetrad = ) collection, set, part; succession; sphere region, cycle Vin i.330 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.281); iii.96 iriyāpatha˚ the 4 ways of behaviour, the various positions (standing, walking, sitting, lying down) DN-a i.249 Sdhp 604. sā˚, miga˚ the sphere or region of dogs wild animals Mil 178; cakkena (instr.) in succession Pv-a iii. cakkaṃ kātabbaṃ, or bandhitabbaṃ freq. in Yam. and Paṭṭh, “The cycle of formulated words is to be here repeated.”

2. (like the four wheels constituting the moving power of a carriage = ) a vehicle, instrument, means & ways; attribute, quality state, condition, esp. good condition (fit instrumentality) catucakka an instr. of four, a lucky tetrad, a fourwheeler of the body as expressing itself in the four kinds of deportment, iriyāpathas AN ii.32; SN i.16, SN i.63 (catucakkaṃ). In this sense generalized as a happy state consisting of “4 blessings”: paṭirūpadesa-vāsa, sappurisûpassaya atta-sammāpaṇidhi, pubbe-kata-puññatā AN ii.32; Ja v.114; mentioned at Pts i.84. Cp. also Snp 554 sq.; 684. Esp. pronounced in the two phrases dhamma-cakka (the wheel of the Doctrine, i.e. the symbol of conquering efficacy, or happiness implicated in the D.) and brahma-c˚ the best wheel, the supreme instrument, the noblest quality. Both with pavatteti to start & kcep up (like starting & guiding a carriage), to set rolling, to originate, to make universally known.; dhamma˚; e.g. SN i.191; AN i.23, AN i.101; AN ii.34, AN ii.120 AN iii.151; AN iv.313; Snp 556 sq.; 693; Ja iii.412; Pts ii.159 sq.; Pv-a 67 (see dhamma). brahma˚; MN i.71; SN ii.27; AN ii.9, AN ii.24; AN iii.9, AN iii.417; AN v.33; Vb 317 sq.; 344 (see brahma). Cp. cakkavattin (below) ■ Cp. vi˚.

-chinna (udaka) (water of a well) the wheel of which is broken Ud 83; -bhañjanin one who destroys a state of welfare & good Ja v.112 (patirāpadesavāsādino kusala-cakkassa bhañjanī C.); -bheda breaking peace or concord, sowing discord Vin ii.198; Vin iii.171; -yuga a pair of wheels Vv 832; -ratana the treasure of the wheel that is of the sun (cp. Rh. D. Buddh. Suttas p. 252 Dialogues ii.197, 102) DN ii.171; DN iii.59 sq., 75; Ja i.63 Ja ii.311; DN-a i.249. See also cakkavattin; -vaṭṭaka (nt. a scoop-wheel (a wheel revolving over a well with a string of earthen pots going down empty & coming up full, after dredger fashion) Vin ii.122; -vattin (cp dhammacakkaṃ pavatteti above) he who sets rolling the Wheel, a just & faithful king (rājā hoti c. dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto Snp p.106, in corresp. pass v. 1002 as vijeyya pathaviṃ imaṃ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena-m-anusāsati). A definition is given by Bdhgh. at DN-a i.249 ■ Three sorts of c. are later distinguished: a cakkavāla-c˚ a universal king, or cāturanta-c˚ (ruling over four great continents Snp p.106 Kp-a 227), a dīpa-c˚ (ruling over one), a padesa-c (ruling over part of one) Usually in phrase rājā cakka vattin: DN i.88; DN iii.156; DN iv.302; DN v.44, DN v.99, DN v.342; DN ii.16 DN ii.172; DN iii.59 sq., 75, 142 sq.; MN iii.65; AN i.76, AN i.109 sq. AN ii.37, AN ii.133, AN ii.245; AN iii.147 sq; 365; iv.89, 105; v.22; Kp viii.12 (˚sukha); Ja i.51; Ja ii.395; Ja iv.119; Vb 336; Pv-a 117; Vv-a 18; Sdhp 238, Sdhp 453; Dhp-a ii.135 (˚sirī)-˚gabbha Vism 126:-˚rajjaṃ kāresi Ja ii.311; -viddha (nt.) a particular form of shooting Ja v.130; -samārūḷha (adj.) having mounted the wheels, i.e. their carts (of janapadā) AN i.178; AN iii.66, AN iii.104.

Vedic cakra, redupl. formation fr. *quel to turn round (cp. P. kaṇṭha → Lat. collus & see also note on gala) = that which is (continuously) turning, i.e. wheel, or abstr, the shape or periphery of it, i.e. circle; Cakra = Gr. κύκλος, Ags. hveohl, hveol = wheel. The unredupl. form in Sk. carati (versatur), Gr. πέλομαι, πολεύω, πόλος (pole); Lat. colo, incolo; Obulg. kolo wheel, Oisl. hvel

Cakkalaka

a disc or tuft (?) Vism 255 (kaḷīra˚, where Kp-a 50 reads in same context kaḷīra-daṇḍa).

fr. cakka

Cakkali

(f.) drapery Vin ii.174.

Cakkalikā

a window blind, curtain Vin ii.148.

Cakkavāka

the ruddy goose (Anas Casarca Ja iii.520; Ja iv.70 sq. (Name of Ja No. 451); Pv ii.123; Mil 364, Mil 401 ■ f. cakkavākī Ja iii.524; Ja vi.189 = Ja vi.501.

Vedic cakravāka, cp. kṛkavāku, to sound root kṛ, see note on gala

Cakkavāḷa

(m. & nt.) a circle, a sphere, esp. a mythical range of mountains supposed to encircle the world; pl worlds or spheres Ja i.53, Ja i.203; Ja vi.330; Vism 205 (its extent), 207, 367, 421; Dhs-a 297; Dhp-a 11. 15; iii.498; in the trope “cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ brahmaloko atinīco” (= the whole world cannot hold it) to express immensity Dhp-a i.310; Vv-a 68.

-gabbha the interior of the C. sphere Ja iv.119; DN-a i.284; -pabbata (nt.) the C. mountains, “world’s end Ja iii.32; Ja vi.272; -rajja (nt.) the whole world, strictly speaking the whole region of a sphere Ja ii.392.

Cakkhu

(nt.) [Vedic cakṣuḥ, etym. not clear, as redupl. perhaps to īks, akṣa eye, kṣạṇa moment, or as intens to cit, cp. cinteti, & see Walde,; Lat. Wtb. under inquam the eye (nom. sg. cakkhuṃ Vin i.34; SN i.115; MN iii.134 etc.) ■ I. The eye as organ of sense-(a) psychologically cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā “seeing visible object (shape with the eye” (Nd ii.on rūpa q.v.) is the defiName of this first & most important of the senses (cp. Pv ii.61 dakkhiṇa c. = the most valuable thing): the psychology of sight is discussed at DN-a i.194 sq., and more fully at Dhs 597 sq. (see Dhs-a 306 sq; Dhs trsl. 173 sq.); cp. cak khunā puriso ālokati rūpagatāni Nd ii.234. In any enumeration of the senses cakkhu heads the list, e.g. Vin i.34; DN i.21; DN ii.308, DN ii.336 sq.; DN iii.102, DN iii.225, DN iii.244 sq.; 269 Ne 28 ■ See rūpa. Also combd. with sota: MN i.318 MN iii.264; AN i.281 ■ cakkhusmiṃ haññati rūpehi SN iv.201 hata˚ AN i.129. passāmi naṃ manasā cakkhunā va “I see him with my mind as with my eye” Snp 1142Vin i.184; SN i.32, SN i.199; SN iv.123; Dhp 360; Ja iv.137; DN-a i.183; Ne 191. Vism 444 sq. As adj. (-˚) seeing, having or catching sight of: eka˚ (dvi˚) one-eyed (two˚) AN i.128 sq.; āmisa seeing an object of sensual enjoyment SN ii.226; SN iv.159; Ja v.91 (= kilesalola). acakkhu blind AN iii.250, AN iii.256; Pts i.129 ■ (b) ethically: as a “sense” belonging to what is called “body” (kāya) it shares all the qualities of the latter (see kāya), & is to be regarded as an instr. only i.e. the person must not value it by itself or identify himself with it. Subduing the senses means in the first place acquiring control over one’s eyes (cp. okkhitta cakkhu with down-cast eyes Snp 63, Snp 411, Snp 972; Pv iv.344; & indriyesu guttadvāra; ˚indriya). In this connection the foll passages may be mentioned: Vin i.34; DN i.70; SN iv.123 SN ii.244 (aniccaṃ, etc.); iii.255 (do.) iv.81, 128 (na tumhākaṃ); Pts I.132 (aniccatṭhaṃ). Numerous others see under rūpa ■ II. The eve as the most important channel of mental acquiring, as faculty of perception & apperception; insight, knowledge (cp. veda, ολδα to vid, to see). In connection with ñāṇa (γη ̈ωσις) it refers to the apperception of the truth (see dhamma-cakkhu): intuition and recognition, which means perfect understanding (cp. the use of the phrase jānāti passati “to know and to see” = to understand clearly). See e.g. SN ii.7–⁠11, 105; iv.233; v.179; 258; 422 sq. Most frequently as dhamma˚; “the eye of the truth,” said of the attainment of that right knowledge which leads to Arahantship, in phrase virajaṃ vitamalaṃ dh-cakkhuṃ uppajjati Vin i.16; DN i.86, DN i.110; SN ii.134 sq.; SN iv.47 SN iv.107; SN v.467; AN iv.186; Pts ii.150 sq.; 162; Mil 16 Similarly paññā˚, Iti 52; ariya˚ MN i.510 ■ III. The eye as the instr. of supersensuous perception, “clear” sight clairvoyance. This is the gift of favoured beings whose senses are more highly developed than those of others and who through right cognition have acquired the two “eyes” or visionary faculties, termed dibba- cakkhu & buddha- cakkhu Iti 52; DN ii.38 resp. They are most completely described at Nd ii.235 (under cakkhumā), & the foll. categories of the range of application of cakkhu are set forth: 1.; maṃsa-cakkhu: the physical eye which is said to be exceptionally powerful & sensitive See Kv; iii.7 (trans. p. 149 ff.). Vism 428 (maṃsa 2 ñāṇa˚).

2. dibba-˚;: the deva-eye, the eye of a seer, all-pervading, & seeing all that proceeds in hidden worlds.; 3. paññā˚;: the eye of wisdom; he who knows all that can be known (jānaṃ passaṃ recognizing & seeing, i.e. of perfect understanding; cakkhubhūta ñāṇa˚ dhamma˚ brahma˚)

4. buddha˚;: the eye of a Buddha or of complete intuition, i.e. of a person who “sees the heart of man, of a being realizing the moral state of other beings and determined to help them on the Path to Right Knowledge

5. samanta˚;: (a summary account of Nos. 1

4, & in all Scripture-passages a standing Ep. of Gotama Buddha see below), the eye of all round knowledge, the eye of a Tathāgata, of a being perfected in all wisdom ■ Out of these are mentioned & discussed singly or in sets; (Nos. 1

5): Dhs-a 306; Snp-a 351; (Nos. 1

3:) Iti 52 = Kv 251 sq. (Iti 52 = Kv 254); (dibba:) Vin i.8, Vin i.288; Vin ii.183 Vin iii.5; DN i.82, DN i.162; iii. 52, iii. 281; MN i.213; SN i.144, SN i.196 SN ii.122, SN ii.213, SN ii.276; SN iv.240; SN v.266, SN v.305; AN i.165, AN i.256, AN i.281 sq.; AN iii.19, AN iii.29, AN iii.418; AN iv.85, AN iv.141, AN iv.178, AN iv.291; AN v.13, AN v.35, AN v.68, AN v.200, AN v.211, AN v.340; Ja iii.346; Pts i.114; Pts ii.175; Vb 344; Pv-a 5 ■ (paññā˚:) SN iv.292; SN v.467, AN i.35; Dhp-a iii.174, Dhp-a iii.175 ■ (buddha˚:) Vin i.6; SN i.138; Pts ii.33; Pv-a 61 ■ (samanta˚:) SN i.137 = Nd ii.2354; Snp 345, Snp 378 Snp 1063, Snp 1069, Snp 1090, Snp 1133; Pts ii.31 = Nd ii.2355.

-āyatana (either cakkh’ or cakkhv˚) the organ or sense of sight DN iii.243, DN iii.280, DN iii.290; Dhs 585, Dhs 653; -indriya (cakkhundriya) the organ of eye, faculty of vision DN i.70; DN iii.225, DN iii.239; AN i.113; Dhs 585, Dhs 597, Dhs 661, Dhs 830, Dhs 971 Vism 7; -karaṇa (always in combn w. ñāṇa-karaṇa) producing (right) insight (and knowledge) Iti 82 (of kusalavitakkā); f. ˚ī SN iv.331 (of majjhimā paṭipadā); Pts ii.147; -dada one who gives the eye (of understanding Thag 3; -dhātu the element of vision Dhs 597, Dhs 703, Dhs 817 -patha the range of vision; sight Ja i.65 = Dhp-a i.173; Ja i.146; Ja iv.189, Ja iv.378, Ja iv.403 (= cakkhūnaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ C.) Vv-a 119; -bhāta (+ ñāṇa˚) (adj.) one who has become the possessor of right understanding SN ii.255; SN iv.94; AN v.226 sq. -lola greed (or greedy) with the eye Nd ii.177; -viññāṇa consciousness by means of visual perception visual cognition Vin i.34; DN ii.308, DN ii.310 DN iii.243; Dhs 433, Dhs 556, Dhs 585, Dhs 589, Dhs 620; cp. Mrs. Rh. D Buddh. Psych. Eth. p. 177; Mil trsl. i.80, 89; -viññeyya (adj.) (i.e. rūpā) to be apperceived by the sense of sight Vin i.184; DN ii.281; DN iii.234; Dhs 589, Dhs 967, Dhs 1095 -samphassa contact with the sense of vision (usually with ˚ja: sprung from visual contact) (of vedanā feelings) Vin i.34; DN ii.308 sq.; DN iii.243; Pts i.5, Pts i.40, Pts i.136.

Cakkhuka

(adj.) having eyes, seeing (-˚), in dibba˚ AN i.23. 148 (see cakkhu iii.2) and a˚ blind DN i.191; SN iii.140 Nd 67.

Cakkhumant

(adj.) having eyes, being gifted with sight; of clear sight, intuition or wisdom possessing knowledge (cp. samantacakkhu) DN i.76 (one who knows, i.e. a connoisseur); cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhinti “those who have eyes to see shall see” (of the Buddha) DN i.85, DN i.110, etc ■ Vin i.16; SN i.27; AN i.116 AN i.124; AN iv.106; Dhp 273; Iti 108, Iti 115; DN-a i.221; Dhp-a iii.403; Dhp-a iv.85 ■ Esp. as Ep. of the Buddha: the Allwise SN i.121, SN i.134, SN i.159, SN i.210; Snp 31, Snp 160, Snp 992, Snp 1028, Snp 1116 Snp 1128; Vv 125 (= pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā Buddho Bhagavā Vv-a 60, cp. cakkhu iii.); Vv 8127.

cakkhu + mant

Cakkhula

(adj.) in visama˚ squint-eyed. squinting Ja i.353; Ja vi.548.

= cakkhuka

Cakkhussa

(adj.) pleasing to or good for the eyes (opp. a˚) Vin ii.137, Vin ii.148.

Vedic cakṣuṣya

Caṅkama

(a) walking up & down SN iv.104 ■ (b) the place where one is walking, esp. a terraced walk, cloister Vin i.15 Vin i.182; Vin ii.220; DN i.105; SN i.212; AN i.114; AN i.183; AN iii.29 AN iv.87; Ja i.17; Ja ii.273; Ja v.132 (cp. kattaradaṇḍa-passages).

Sk. cankrama & cankramā, fr. cankamati

Caṅkamati

to walk about, to walk up & down Vin i.15 Vin i.182; Vin ii.193, Vin ii.220; Vin iv.18; SN i.107, SN i.212; Pv-a 105 ■ Caus cankamāpeti Ja iii.9.

Intens. of kamati, to kram = Sk. cankramīti; cp. kamati

Caṅkamana

(nt.) 1. walking up & down SN ii.282; Dhp-a i.10.

2. a cloister walk (= cankama Vv-a 188. Usually ˚- ■ Vin i.139 (˚sālā); Ja iii.85 Ja iv.329; Pv-a 79 (˚koṭi the far end of the cloister).

fr. cankamati

Caṅkamika

(adj.) one who has the habit of walking about Mil 216 (ṭhāna˚ standing & walking).;

fr. cankama

Caṅkora

the Greek partridge Vv 358 (cp. Vv-a 163); Ja vi.538.

cp. cakora

Caṅgavāra

a hollow vessel, a bowl, cask MN i.142; Ja v.186 (in similes). As ˚ka Mil 365 (trsl. Mil ii.278 by “straining cloth”). Cp. cañcu “a box” Divy 131.

cp. Tamil canguvaḍa a dhoney, Anglo-Ind. ḍoni, a canoe hollowed from a log, see also doṇi

Caṅgoṭaka

a casket, a box Ja i.65; Ja iv.257; Ja v.110, Ja v.303; Ja vi.369, Ja vi.534; Dhp-a ii.116; Dhp-a iii.101; Vv-a 33 Vv-a 158; Mvu iv.106; Anvs p. 35 Vism 173.

cp. cangavāra

Caccara

(nt.) a quadrangular place, a square, courtyard; a place where four roads meet, a cross road Vin iii.151; Vin iv.271; Mil 1 (+ catukkasinghāṭaka), 330 (do.); Ja i.425 (˚raccha).

Sk. catvara, cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 56

Caja

(adj.) giving up, to be given up; in cpd. duc˚ hard to give up AN iii.50; Ja v.8. Cp. cāga.

Cajati

1. to let loose, to emit, to discharge AN ii.33; Ja ii.342 (mutta karīsaṃ) fig. to utter (a speech) Ja v.362.

2. to abandon to give up, sacrifice (with loc. of person to whom Asuresu pāṇaṃ SN i.224 = Ja i.203) Dhp 290; Ja ii.205 Ja iii.211; Ja v.464; Ja vi.570 ■ pp. catta, q.v ■ grd. caja [Sk. tyajya] q.v.

Sk. tyajate, tyaj = Gr. σο βέω to scare away

Cañcala

(adj.) moving to & fro, trembling, unsteady Ja iv.498 (= calācala) Sdhp 317, Sdhp 598.

Intens. of cal = car, to move, with n instead of r in reduplication, cp. Sk. cañcūryate = carcarīti cañcala (= *carcara), Gr. γαργαλιζω & γαγγαλιζω to tickle; see also note on gala & cp. cankamati

Caṭula

(adj.) clever, skilled Mhbv 148. See catura.

Sk. catura

Caṇḍa

(adj.) fierce, violent; quick-tempered, uncontrolled, passionate Vin ii.194 (hatthī); DN i.90 (= māṇa-nissita-kopa-yutta DN-a i.256); SN i.176; SN ii.242; AN ii.109 = Pp 47 (sakagava˚); Ja i.450; Ja ii.210, Ja ii.349 Vism 343, Vism 279 (˚sota, fierce current), (˚hatthi); Dhp-a iv.9 (goṇa) 104; Sdhp 41, Sdhp 590, Sdhp 598 ■ f. caṇḍī MN i.126; Ja ii.443; Ja iii.259; Pv ii.34 (= kodhanā Pv-a 83). Compar. caṇḍatara SN ii.242 ■ In cpds. caṇḍi˚, see caṇḍikata & caṇḍitta.;

Sk. caṇḍa

Caṇḍaka

(adj.) = caṇḍa; f. caṇḍikā Pv ii.35, & caṇḍiyā Ja iii.259 (= kodhaṇā).

Caṇḍāla1

a man of a certain low tribe, one of the low classes, an outcaste; grouped with others under nīcā kulā (low born clans) as caṇḍālā nesādā veṇā rathakārā pukkusā at AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = Pp 51 As caṇḍāla-pukkusā with the four recognized grades of society (see jāti & khattiya) at AN i.162Vin iv.6; MN ii.152; SN v.168 sq. (˚vaṃsa); AN iii.214, AN iii.228 (brāhmaṇa˚); iv.376; Ja iv.303; Pv-a 175; Mil 200 ■ f caṇḍālī AN iii.226; Pv iii.113; Dhp-a ii.25. See also pukkusa.

Vedic caṇḍāla

Caṇḍāla2

(nt.) a kind of amusement or trick DN i.6≈(= ayogulakīḷā play with an iron ball DN-a i.84).

Caṇḍikata

(adj.) angry Vin iv.310.

cp. caṇḍa

Caṇḍikka

(nt.) ferocity anger, churlishness Nd ii.313, Nd ii.576, Dhs 418, Dhs 1060, Dhs 1115 Dhs 1231; Vb 357; Dhp-a ii.227. Cp. caṇḍitta.

*caṇḍikya, of caṇḍika → caṇḍaka

Caṇḍitta

(nt.) anger Dhs 418; Pp 18 = Pp 22. Cp. caṇḍikka.

Catukka1

(nt.) 1. a tetrad, a set of four, consisting of four parts: ˚pañcakajjhānā (pl.) the fourfold & the fivefold system of meditation Dhs-a 168; see cpds.

2. a place where four roads meet Ja vi.389; Mil 330 (see also below); esp. in phrase catukke catukke kasāhi tāḷeti (or is it “in sets of four” See Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 79) Ja i.326; Ja ii.123; Dhp-a iv.52.

3. a square (in a village) Mil 1, Mil 365; Ja ii.194 Ja v.459; Dhp-a 317.

-bhatta a meal for four bhikkhus Vin ii.77; Vin iii.160 -magga the 4 fold path Ne 113; -yañña (usually sabba catukka˚) a sacrifice consisting of (all) the four parts Ja iii.44, Ja iii.45; Pv-a 280; cp. Ja i.335. (Or is it the “cross-road sacrifice”?)

fr. catu = *catuka → *catukyaṃ

Catukka2

empty, shallow, little Nd ii.415 (˚pañña, with omakapañña lāmaka-p˚); Ja iv.441 (nadī = tuccha Com.).

origin. “consisting only of one quarter”?

Catuttha

(num. ord.) the fourth Snp 97 Snp 99, Snp 450; Ja iii.55; Ja vi.367; ˚ṃ (adv.) for the fourth time Dhp-a iii.174 ■ f. catutthī Snp 436; Vism 338 ■ See also (s.v. Aḍḍha) aḍḍhuḍḍha.

-bhatta food eaten only every fourth day Ja v.424 -magga “the fourth Path,” of Arahantship Dhp-a i.309 -mana (?) (nt.) name of the tongue, in so far as it forms the fourth vatthu (beside eyes, ears, nose) according to the gloss: Ja v.155; extremely doubtful.

Vedic caturtha, Idg. *queturto = Gr. τέτρατος, Lat. quartus, Ohg. fiordo

Catur

, catu˚ in composition; instr. catubbhi (Snp 229), catūhi (Snp 231) & catuhi; loc. catūsu (Ja i.262) catusu.

2. As; num. adv., catu˚ catur˚ in cpds catuddasa (14), also through elision & reduction cuddasa Pv-a 55, Pv-a 283, etc., cp. also cātuddasī. Catuvīsati (24) Snp 457; catusaṭṭhi (64) Ja i.50; Ja ii.193; Pv-a 74; caturāsīti (84) usually with vassa-sahassāni Ja i.137 Ja ii.311; Pv iv.77; Dhp-a ii.58; Pv-a 9, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 254, etc. See also cattārīsa (40).

-(r)aṃsa (= caturassa, having four edges, four-edged Dhs 617; Pv-a 189 (read ˚sobhitāya); -(r)aṅga (consisting of) four limbs or divisions, fourfold MN i.77; Ja i.390; Ja ii.190, Ja ii.192; Ja vi.169 (uposatha, cp. aṭṭhanga) Dpvs i.6; Sdhp 64; -(r)aṅgika = prec. Dhs 147, Dhs 157, Dhs 397 Kp-a 85; Sdhp 58; -(r)aṅgin (adj.) comprising four parts f. ˚inī, of an army consisting of elephants, chariots cavalry & infantry DN ii.190; Ja ii.102, Ja ii.104; Vism 146; Snp-a 225, Snp-a 353; Dhp-a iv.144; cp. Ja vi.275; -(r)aṅgula (adj.) measuring 4 fingers, 4 fingers broad or wide, Vin i.46; SN ii.178; Ja vi.534; Thag 1137; Vism 124. -(r)aṅgulika = prec. Thig 498 (-Thag-a, 290); -(r)anta see cātur˚; -(r)assa [catur + assa2] four-cornered, quadrangular regular Vin ii.310 (Bdhgh); Ja iv.46 (āvāṭa) 492 (sālā); v.49; Pv ii.119. Cp. caturaṃsa & next; -(r)assara (see last) with 4 sharp sides (of a hammer; ˚muggara Dhp-a i.126; -(r)ādhiṭṭhāna (adj.) one who has taken the four resolutions (see adhiṭṭhāna) MN iii.239; -(r)āpassena (adj.) endowed with the four apassena: lit. reclining on four AN v.29, AN v.30; DN iii.269, DN iii.270; -ussada (catussada) full of four, endowed with 4 things, rich in four attributes Ja iv.309 (expld. p. 311 as having plenty of people, grain, wood & water); iv.422 = 461 “with four pillows” (p. 422 has caturassada for caturussada which latter is also to be preferred to catussada, unless this is a haplology). In the same connection occurs satt-ussada (full of people) DN i.111 e.g. & Pv iv.18 (see satta). The formation “cattussada” has probably been influenced by “sattussada”; -(k)kaṇṇa (& ˚ka (a) with 4 corners Vin ii.137; Ja iii.255 ■ (b) “between four ears,” i.e. secret, of manta (counsel) Ja vi.391 -(k)kama walking with four (feet), quadruped Vv 648 Pv i.113; -kuṇḍika on all fours MN i.79; AN iii.188; DN iii.6; Pv iii.27 (cp. Pv-a 181); -koṇa four cornered crossed, in ˚raccha cross road Pv-a 24; -(k)khandha the four khandhas, viz. feeling, perception, synthesis & intellect (see khandha) Dhs-a 345; -(g)guṇa fourfold quadruple DN ii.135; SN i.27; Ja i.213; Vv-a 186; Sdhp 240; -cakka with four wheels SN i.16 = SN i.63 (said of the human body, see under cakka); -jāta of four sorts viz. gandha (perfume) having four ingredients Thag-a 72 (see next) -jāti of four kinds Ja i.265, Ja v.79; (gandha) These 4 ingredients of perfume are saffron, jasmine Turkish (tarukkha) & Greek incense (yavana); -jātiya (& ˚jātika) in ˚gandha prec. Ja iii.291; Ja iv.377; Pv-a 127; Mil 354; Ja i.178 (˚ka); -(d)disā (pl.) the 4 quarters of the globe SN i.167 = Snp p.79; DN i.251; may also be taken for abl. sg. as adv.: in the 4 quarters Vin i.16 cp. acc. catuddisaṃ DN ii.12; -(d)dīpika covering the 4 continents, of megha (a cloud) Dhp-a ii.95; -dvāra with 4 gates, of a house DN i.102 (= DN-a i.270); of Avīciniraya Iti 86; Ja iv.3; Pv i.1013; cp. Catudvāra Jātaka (No. 439; Ja iv.1 sq.); -nahuta ninety-four Ja i.25; Ja vi.486 -paccaya the four requisites (see paccaya) Ja iii.273 ˚santosa contentment with ˚Dhp-a iv.111; -paṇṇasa fifty-four Dhp-a i.4; -(p)patha a fourways Ja iv.460; -(p)pada [Sk caturpād, Gr. τετράπους, Lat. quadrupes] a quadruped Vin ii.110; SN i.6; AN v.21; Snp 603, Snp 964; Iti 87; Ja i.152 Ja iii.82; -parivaṭṭa (cp. aṭṭha ˚adhideva-ñāṇadassana AN iv.304) fourfold circle SN iii.59 sq. (pañcupādānakkhandhe). -parisā (f.) the fourfold assembly, scil. of male & female bhikkhus & upāsakas (cp. parisā) Pv-a 11; -pala fourfold Vism 339. -(p)pādaka (adj.) consisting of 4 padas, i.e. a sloka; f. ˚ikā (gāthā) a complete stanza or sloka Anvs p. 35; -pārisuddhasīla (nt. the four precepts of purity Ja iii.291; Dhp-a iv.111-(b)bidha (catur + vidha) fourfold Thag-a, 74; -(b)bipallāsa (catur + vipallāsa) the fourfold change (cp. Ne 85 Th + 1, 1143; Snp-a 46; -byūha (catur + vyūha) arranged in 4 arrays (of hāra) Ne 3, Ne 105; -bhāga the 4th part, a quarter Dhp 108; -bhūmika having 4 stories or stages (of citta or dhamma) Dhp-a i.21; Dhp-a iv.72; Dhs-a 344, Dhs-a 345 cp. Vism 493 (of indriya); -madhura (nt.) sweetness (syrup) of 4 (ingredients) DN-a i.136; Thag-a 68; -mahāpatha a crossing on a high-road Vism 235. -mahābhūtika consisting of the four great elements Dhs-a 403; -(m)mahārājika: see cātum˚; -māsa 4 months, a season Pv-a 96 Dpvs i.24, 37 (cā˚); see under māsa; -sacca the four truths or facts (see ariyasacca) Dhp-a iii.380; Mil 334; (s)sāla (nt.) [catur + sāla] a square formed by 4 houses, in phrasc catuhi gabbhehi paṭimaṇḍitaṃ catussälaṃ kāretvā Vv-a 220; Dhp-a iii.291; -’ha (catuha & catūha) 4 days catuhena within 4 days SN ii.191; catūhapañcāha 4 or 5 days Vin iv.280 ■ See also cpds. with cātu˚.

Vedic catvārah (m.) catvāri (nt.) fr. *qṷetuor, *qṷetur = Gr. τέτταρες (hom πίσυρες), Lat. quattuor, Goth. fidwōr, Ohg. fior, Ags fēower, E. four; catasras (f.) fr. *qṷ(e)tru, cp. tisras Also as adv. catur fr. *quetrus = Lat. quater & quadru˚ base of numeral four; 1. As num. adj. nom. & acc. m cattāro (Dhp 109; Ja iii.51) and caturo (Snp 84, Snp 188), f catasso (Snp 1122), nt. cattāri (Sn. 227); gen. m. catunnaṃ (Snp p.102), [f. catassannaṃ

Catura

clever, skilled, shrewd Ja iii.266; Ja vi.25 ■ Der. f. abstr. caturatā cleverness Vb 351 (= cāturiya).

Deriv. uncertain. Perhaps from tvar to move, that is quickly. Sk. catura

Caturiya

at Vv 412 is to be read ca turiya, etc. Otherwise see cāturiya.

Catta

given up. sacrificed AN ii.41; AN iii.50; Thag 209 (˚vaṇṇa who has lost fame); Ja ii.336; Ja iv.195 Ja v.41 (˚jīvita).

pp. of cajati

Cattatta

(nt.) the fact of giving up, abandonment, resignation Vb 254 sq.; Dhs-a 381.

fr. catta

Cattārīsa

(& cattālīsa) forty SN ii.85; Snp p.87; Iti 99≈. Usually cattāḷīsa Ja i.58; Ja v.433; Dhp-a i.41; Dhp-a ii.9. 93.

-danta having 40 teeth (one of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.172.

Sk. catvāriṃśat

Cattārīsaka

(adj.) having forty MN iii.77.

Cadika

at Mil 197 (ūmikavankacadika) prob. for ˚madika.

Cana

(-˚) indef. particle “like, as if,” added to rel. or interrog. pronouns, as kiñcana anything, kudācana at any time, etc. Cp. ca & ci.;

Vedic cana fr. rel. pron. *qṷo + demonstr. pron. *no, cp. anā, nānā; Gr. ρή; Lat ■ ne in quandone = P kudācana. cana = Goth. hun, Ohg. gin, Ger. ir-gen-d Cp. ci

Canaṃ

= cana; and then, if Vin iii.121 (cp. ca 3); or should it be separated at this passage into ca naṃ?

Canda

the moon (i.e. the shiner) SN i.196; SN ii.206; MN ii.104; AN i.227 AN ii.139 sq.; AN iii.34; Dhp 413; Snp 465, Snp 569, Snp 1016; Ja iii.52 Ja vi.232; Pv i.127; ii.66; Vv 647 (maṇi˚ a shiny jewel or a moonlike jewel, see Vv-a 278, v.l. ˚sanda). -puṇṇa˚ the full moon Ja i.149, Ja i.267; Ja v.215; ˚mukha with a face like a full moon (of the Buddha) Dhp-a iii.171. Canda is extremely frequent in similes & comparisens: see list in; J.P.T.S. 1907, 85 sq. In enumerations of heavenly bodies or divine beings Canda always precedes Suriya (the Sun), e.g. DN ii.259; AN i.215; AN ii.139; Nd ii.308 (under Devatā). Cp. candimant. On quâsi mythol etym. see Vism 418.

-kanta a gem Mil 118; -(g)gāha a moon-eclipse (lit seizure, i.e. by Rāhu) DN i.10 (cp. DN-a i.95); -maṇḍala the moon’s disc, the shiny disc, i.e. the moon AN i.283; Ja i.253; Ja iii.55; Ja iv.378; Ja v.123; Dhs 617; Vism 216 (in compar,); Pv-a 65; -suriyā (pl.) sun & moon Ja iv.61.

Vedic candra from *(s)quend to be light or glowing, cp. candana sandal (incense) wood, Gr. κάηδαρος cinder; Lat. candeo, candidus, incendo; Cymr. cann white; E. candid, candle, incense, cinder

Candaka

= canda Vv-a 278 (maṇi˚); Sdhp 92 (mayūra˚ the eye in a peacock’s tail).

Candatta

(nt.) in cpd. paripuṇṇa˚; state or condition of the full moon Snp-a 502.

abstr. fr. canda

Candana

(m. & nt.) sandal (tree wood or unguent, also perfume) Vin i.203; AN i.9, AN i.145 AN i.226; AN iii.237; Dhp 54; Ja v.420 (tree, m.); Mil 382; Dhp-a i.422; Dhp-a iv.189 (˚pūjā); Vv-a 158 (agalu˚ with aloe & sandal); Pv-a 76 ■ Kāsika˚ sandal from Kāsī AN iii.391; AN iv.281; Mil 243, Mil 348; ratta˚ red s. Ja iv.442 lohita˚ id. AN v.22; Ja i.37; hari˚ yellow s. Ja i.146.

-ussada covered with sandal perfumes Thag 267; Pv iii.91 (= candanasārānulitto Pv-a 211); -gaṇṭhi (or better gaṇḍi; see the latter) a block of sandal wood Vin ii.110; -gandhin having a scent of sandal Ja iii.190 -vilepana sandal unguent Ja iv.3. -sāra choice sandal (wood or perfume) Vv 523, Ja i.53, Ja i.340.

Deriv. unknown. Possibly nonAryan; but see under canda, Sk. candana

Candanikā

(f.) a pool at the entrance of a village (usually, but not necessarily dirty: see Vin ii.122 & cp. candanapanka Av.Ś; i.221, see also PW sub candana2) SN v.361; MN i.11, MN i.73, MN i.448; AN i.161; Thag 567; Ja v.15; Mil 220 Vism 264, Vism 343, Vism 359; Sdhp 132.

Candimā

(m. or f.?) the moon. By itself only in similes at Dhp 208 Dhp 387 (at end of pada) & in “abbhā mutto va candimā MN ii.104 = Dhp 172 = Thag 871; Dhp 382 = Thag 873; Pts i.175 ■ Otherwise only in combn with suriya moon & sun, DN i.240; DN ii.12; DN iii.85 sq., 90, 112; SN ii.266 SN v.264 sq.; AN i.227; AN ii.53, AN ii.130; AN v.59; Vv 30; Ja ii.213; Mil 191; Vism 153. Also in cpd. candimāpabhā the light of the moon (thus BB, whereas SS read at all passages candiyā˚ or candiya-pabhā) SN iii.156 = SN v.44; Iti 20.

Sk. candramas m. & candrimā f., cp. pūrṇimā; a cpd. of canda + mā, cp. māsa. The Pāli form, however, is based on a supposed derivation fr canda + mant, like bhagavā, and is most likely m. On this formation cp. Lat. lumen = Sk. rukmān luminous shiny

Capala

(adj.) moving to & fro, wavering, trembling, unsteady, fickle SN i.204 SN v.269; MN i.470 (and a˚ steady); AN iii.199, AN iii.355, AN iii.391; Dhp 33; Pp 35; Ja i.295; Ja ii.360. At Ja vi.548 it means one who lets the saliva flow out of his mouth (expld by paggharita-lāla “trickle-spit”).

Sk. capala cp. cāpa bow; from *qep to shake or quiver, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under caperro

Capalatā

(f.) fickleness, unsteadiness Mil 93. 251; Pgdp 47, Pgdp 64. At Nd ii.585 as capalanā + cāpalyaṃ with gedhikatā, meaning greed, desire (cp. capala at Ja vi.548).

fr. last

Capu

(or capucapu) a sound made when smacking one’s lips Vin ii.214 (capucapukāraka adj.), 221; iv.197.

Cappeti

to chew Bdhgh on Vin ii.115. Cp. jappati.

Sk. carvayati Dhtp 295 gives root cabb in meaning “adana”

Camati

(& cameti) to rinse, only in cpd ācamati (ācameti).

; cam. to sip; but given at Dhtm 552 in meaning “adana,” eating

Camara

1. the Yak ox (Bos grunniens) Ja i.149; Ja iii.18 Ja iii.375; Ja v.416; Mil 365 ■ f. Ja i.20; Sdhp 621 ■ In cpds. camari˚ Ja iv.256.

2. a kind of antelope (-ī Ja vi.537.

-vījanī (f.) a chowry (the bushy tail of the Yak made into a brush to drive away flies) Vin ii.130. This is one of the royal ensigns (see kakudhabhaṇḍa & cp vāla-vījanī).;

Deriv. unknown, probably non-Aryan. Sk. camara

Camasa

a ladle or spoon for sacrificing into the sacred fire Ja vi.52824 = 5294 (unite ca with masa, cp. 5299 and n. 4: aggijuhana-kaṭacchu-sankhātimasañca [for camasañ ca] v.l. Bd). Cp. Kern Toevoegselen s. v.

Vedic camasa, a cup

Camu

(f.) an army Ja ii.22; camūpati a general Mvu 10, Mvu 65; Mvu 23, Mvu 4; Dāvs i.3.

Both derivation and exact meaning uncertain. The Vedic camū is a peculiar vessel into wh. the Soma flows from the press. In late Pali & Sk. it means a kind of small army, perhaps a division drawn up more or less in the shape of the Vedic vessel

Campa

= campaka Ja vi.151.

Campaka

the Champaka tree (Michelia champaka) having fragrant white & yellow flowers Ja v.420; Ja vi.269; Mil 338; DN-a i.280; Vism 514 (˚rukkha, in simile); Dhp-a i.384; Vv-a 194.

Campā

(f.) Name of a town (Bhagulpore) & a river DN i.111; DN-a i.279; Ja iv.454.

Campeyya

Name of a Nāgarāja Ja iv.454 (= ˚jātaka, No. 506); Vism 304.

Campeyyaka

(adj.) belonging to Campā Vin v.114; Ja vi.269 (here: a Champaka-like tree).

Camma

(nt.) 1. skin, hide, leather Vin i.192 (sīha˚ vyaggha˚ dīpi˚), 196 (elaka˚ aja˚ miga˚) AN iv.393 (sīha˚ dīpi˚); Pv-a 157 (kadalimiga˚ as rug) Ja ii.110 (sīha˚); iii.82, 184; Mil 53; Sdhp 140. It is supposed to be subcutaneous (under chavi as tegument) & next to the bone: chaviṃ chindetvā cammaṃ chindati SN ii.238 = AN iv.129; freq. in expr. like aṭṭhi-cammanahāru-matta (skin & bones) Pv-a 68, see under nahāru camma-maṃsa-nahāru Pv-a 80.

2. a shield Vin ii.192 (asi˚ sword & shield); MN i.86; AN iii.93; Ja v.373 Ja vi.580.

-aṇḍa a water-skin Ja i.250; -kāra a worker in leather a tanner Vin iv.7; Mil 331; a harness-maker Ja v.45 a waggon-builder and general artisan Ja iv.174 (= rathakāra); also as -kārin Pv-a 175 (= rathakārin); -khaṇḍa an animal’s skin, used as a rug Mil 366; Vism 99; skin used as a water-vessel (see khaṇḍa) Vin ii.122; Pts i.176 -ghaṭaka a water- skin Ja ii.345; -naddha (nt.) a drum Bv i.31; -pasibbaka a sack, made of skin or leather Thag-a 283; Ja vi.431, Ja vi.432 (as v.l.); -bandha a leather strap Vin i.194; -bhastā (f.) a sack Ja v.45; -māluka a leather bag Ja vi.431, Ja vi.432; -yodhin a soldier in cuirass DN i.51≈(in list of var. occupations; DN-a i.157: cammakañcukaṃ pavisitvā); AN iv.107, AN iv.110; -varatta (f.) a leather thong Ja ii.153; -vāsin one who wears the skin (of a black antelope), i.e. a hermit Ja vi.528; -sāṭaka an ascetic wearing clothes of skin Ja iii.82 (nāma paribbājaka).

Vedic carman, cp. Lat. corium hide or leather, cortex bark, scortum hide; Ohg. herdo; Ags heorδa = E. hide; also Sk. kṛtti; Ohg. scirm (shield) E. skin; from *sqer to cut, skin (cp. kaṭu) = the cut-off hide, cp. Gr. δέρω: (δέρμα

Cammaka

a skin Bv ii.52.

Caya

piling, heaping; collection, mass Vin ii.117; Dhs-a 44; in building: a layer Vin ii.122, Vin ii.152 As-˚ one who heaps up, a collector, hoarder MN i.452 (nikkha˚, khetta˚, etc.). See also ā˚, apa˚, upa˚.

from cināti

Cara

(n-adj.) 1. the act of going about, walking; one who walks or lives (usually -˚): oka˚ living in water MN i.117; Ja vi.416; antara˚ SN iv.173; eka˚ solitary Snp 166; saddhiṃ˚ a companion Snp 45; anattha˚ Ja v.433 jala˚ Dāvs iv.38. See also cāreti & gocara ■ Instr; carasā (adv.) walking MN i.449 ■ cara-vāda “going about talk,” gossip, idle talk SN iii.12; SN v.419 ■ sucara easy, duccara difficult Vin iii.26.

2. one who is sent on a message, a secret emissary, a spy SN i.79. Also as carapurisa Ja ii.404; Ja iv.343; Ja vi.469; Dhp-a i.193. Note.-cara-purāya at AN v.133 should be changed into v.l. SS paramparāya.

from car, carati

Caraka

1. = cara2 (a messenger) Ja vi.369 (attha˚); adj. walking through: sabbalokaṃ˚ Ja v.395.

2. any animal SN i.106; Pv-a 153 (vana˚).

Caraṇa

(nt.) 1. walking about grazing, feeding Vv-a 308 (˚ṭṭhāna).

2. the foot Vin iv.212; Ja v.431.

3. acting, behaviour, good conduct, freq. in combn with vijjā, e.g. AN ii.163 AN v.327; Dhp 144; Vism 202 (in detail); Pv-a 1, etc. DN iii.97, DN iii.156; Snp 410, Snp 462, Snp 536; Mil 24. sampannacaraṇa (adj.) accomplished in right behaviour SN i.153 SN i.166; Snp 1126; Pv ii.138 ■ Cp. sañ˚.

of a deer, called pañca-hattha “having 5 hands,” i.e. the mouth and the 4 feet

Caraṇavant

(adj.) one of good conduct (= sampannacaraṇa) Snp 533, Snp 536.

Carati

to move about, to “live and move,” to behave, to be ■ Imper. act. cara (Ja i.152), carā (metri causa, Ja iii.393); imper. med. carassu (Snp 696), pl. carāmase (= exhortative, Snp 32);-ppr. caranto (Ja i.152; Pv-a 14) caraṃ (Snp 151; Dhp 61, Dhp 305; Iti 117); med. caramāna (Vin i.83; Pv i.1010; Pv-a 160);-pot. careyya (Snp 45 Snp 386, Snp 1065; Dhp 142, Dhp 328) & care (Snp 35; Dhp 49, Dhp 168 Dhp 329; Iti 120);-fut. carissati (MN i.428);-aor. sg. 1st acariṃ (S iii.29), acārisaṃ (Pv iii.95), 3rd acari (Snp 344) acāri (Snp 354; Dhp 326); cari (J ii.133) ■ pl. 3rd acariṃsu (Snp 809), acārisuṃ (Snp 284); cariṃsu (Snp 289) acaruṃ (Snp 289), acāruṃ (J vi.114);-inf. carituṃ (caritu-kāma Ja ii.103);-ger. caritvā (Ja i.50) & caritvāna (Snp 816);-pp. ciṇṇa (q.v.)-Caus. cāreti (= Denom. of cara), pp. carita. 2nd caus. carāpeti (q.v.)-See also cara, caraṇa, cariyā, cāraka, cārikā, cārin.

Meaning: 1. Lit. (a) to move about, to walk, travel etc.; almost synon. with gacchati in contrast to tiṭṭhati to stand still; cp. phrase carañ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṃ nisinno udāhu sayaṃ Iti 117 (walking, standing, sitting reclining; the four iriyāpathā); care tiṭṭhe acche saye Iti 120; tiṭṭhaṃ caraṃ nisinno vā sayāno vā Snp 151. Defined as “catūhi iriyāpathehi vicarati” (i.e. more generally applied as “behaviour,” irrespective of position) Dhp-a ii.36. Expl. constantly by series viharati iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti Nd ii.237 ■ carāmi loke I move about (= I live) in the world Snp 25, Snp 455 agiho c. I lead a homeless life Snp 456, Snp 464; eko c. he keeps to himself Snp 35, Snp 956; Dhp 305, Dhp 329; sato c. he is mindful Snp 1054, Snp 1085; gocaraṃ gaṇhanto c. to walk about grazing (see below) Ja iii.275; gavesanto c. to look for Ja i.61 ■ (b) With definition of a purpose piṇḍāya c. to go for alms (gāmaṃ to the village) Snp 386 bhikkhāya c. id. Ja iii.82 ■ With acc. (in etymol constr.) to undertake, set out for, undergo, or simply to perform, to do. Either with c. cārikaṃ to wander about, to travel: Vin i.83; SN i.305 (applied: “walk ye a walk”); Snp 92; Dhp 326; Pv-a 14 (janapada-cārikaṃ) 160 (pabbata-c˚ wandering over the mountains); or with cāraṃ: piṇḍa-c.˚ carati to perform the begging-round Snp 414; or with caritaṃ: duccaritaṃ c. to lead a bad life Snp 665 (see carita). Also with acc. of similar meaning, as esanaṃ c. to beg Thag 123; vadhaṃ c. to kill Thag 138; dukkhaṃ c. to undergo pain SN i.210. (c) In pregnant sense: to go out for food, to graze (as gocaraṃ c. to pasture, see gocara). Appl. to cows caranti gāvo Snp 20; Ja iii.479; or to the bhikkhu Pv i.1010 (bh. caramāno = bhikkhāya c. Pv-a 51); Snp 386 (vikāle na c. buddhā: the Buddhas do not graze at the wrong time).

2. Appld meaning: (a) abs. to behave, conduct oneself Snp 1080; Ja vi.114; Mil 25 (kāmesu micchā c. to commit immorality) ■ (b) with obj. to practise, exercise, lead a life: brahmacariyaṃ c to lead a life of purity Vin i.17; Snp 289, Snp 566, Snp 1128 dhammañ c. to walk in righteousness Ja i.152; sucaritaṃ c. to act rightly, duccaritaṃ c. to act perversely SN i.94; Dhp 231.

Vedic carati, *qṷel to move, turn, turn round (cp. kaṇṭha & kula) = Lat. colo (incolo), Gr.; πέλομαι, πόλος (also αἰπόλος goat-herd & βουκόλος cowherd = gocara) also P. cakka, q.v. A doublet of car is cal, see calati Dhtp 243 expld car by “gati-bhakkhanesu”

Carahi

(adv.) then, therefore now, esp. after interr. pron.: ko carahi jānāti who then knows? Snp 990; kathañ carahi jānemu how then shall we know? Snp 999; kiñ c. AN v.194Vin i.36; Vin ii.292; Snp 988; Ja iii.312; Mil 25; DN-a i.289.

Sk. tarhi; with change t → c due to analogy with ˚ci (˚cid) in combn with interr.

Carāpeti

to cause to move, to make go Ja i.267 (bheriṃ c. to have the drum beaten); Pv-a 75 (do.); Dhp-a i.398 (to circulate). As cārāpeti Ja v.510 (bheriṃ).

Caus. 11. of carati

Carita

1. (adj.) going, moving, being like, behaving (-˚) Ja vi.313; Mil 92 (rāgac˚ = ratta); Vism 105, Vism 114 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚ etc.).

2. (nt.) action, behaviour, living Dhp 330 (ekassa c. living alone); Pts i.124; Mil 178. See also carati 1b, 2b. Esp. freq. with su˚ and duc˚: good, right proper or (nt.) good action, right conduct & the opposite; e.g. sucarita Dhp 168, Dhp 231; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 71, Pv-a 120 duccarita AN i.146; AN ii.85, AN ii.141; AN iii.267, AN iii.352; DN iii.111 DN iii.214; Dhp 169, Snp 665; Pv i.94 (˚ṃ caritvā), etc See also kāya˚ vacī˚ mano˚ under kāya.

pp. of cāreti, see cara & carati

Caritaka

(nt.) conduct (= carita2) Thag 36.

Caritar

walking, performing (c. acc.) MN i.77.

n. agent to cāreti, cp. carita

Carima

(adj.) subsequent, last (opp. pubba) Thag 202; Iti 18; Ja v.120acarima not later (apubba ac˚ simultaneously) DN i.185; MN iii.65; Pug. 13.

-bhava the last rebirth (in Saṃsāra, with ref. to Arahantship) Thag-a 260, cp. caramabhavika in Divy (freq. & next.;

Vedic carama, Gr. τέλος end, πάλαι a long time (ago)

Carimaka

(adj.) last (= carima) MN i.426; Nd ii.569b (˚viññāṇassa nirodha, the destruction of the last conscious state, of the death of an Arahant); Vism 291.

Cariya

(nt.) & cariyā (f.) (mostly-˚) conduct, behaviour, state of, life of. Three cariyās at Pts i.79; six at Vism 101; eight at Pts ii.19 sq., 225 & four sets of eight in detail at Nd;2 237b. Very freq. in dhamma & brahma˚, a good walk of life, proper conduct, chastity-eka˚ living alone Snp 820; unchā˚ begging Ja ii.272 Ja iii.37; bhikkhā˚ a life of begging Snp 700; nagga˚ nakedness Dhp 141 ■ See also carati 2b. In cpds. cariyā˚.

-piṭaka the last book in the Khuddaka-nikāya -manussa a spy, an outpost Ja iii.361 (v.l. cārika˚).

from; car, carati

Cala

(adj.) moving, quivering; unsteady, fickle, transient SN iv.68 (dhammā calā c’ eva vyayā ca aniccā, etc.); Ja ii.299; Ja iii.381; Ja v.345; Mil 93, Mil 418 Sdhp 430, Sdhp 494. -acala steadfast, immovable SN i.232; Ja i.71 (ṭṭhāna); Vv 514 (˚ṭṭhāna = Ep. of Nibbāna) acalaṃ sukhaṃ (= Nibbāna) Thig 350; cp. niccala motionless Dhp-a iii.38.

-ācala [intens. redupl.] moving to & fro, in constant motion, unsteady Ja iv.494, Ja iv.498 (= cañcala); Mil 92 (cp. Divy 180, Divy 281); -kkaku having a quivering hump Ja iii.380 Ja iv.330 (= calamānakakudha or calakakudha).

see calati

Calaka1

(m.) a camp marshal, adjutant DN i.51≈(in list of various occupations); AN iv.107 sq.

Calaka2

(nt.) a piece of meat thrown away after having been chewed Vin ii.115 Vin iv.266 (= vighāsa); Vv-a 222 (˚aṭṭhikāni meat-remnants & bones).;

perhaps from carv to chew; but Sk. carvana, chewing, is not found in the specific sense of P. calaka. Cp. ucchiṭṭha and cuṇṇa

Calati

to move, stir, be agitated, tremble, be confused, waver SN i.107; Snp 752; Ja i.303 (kileso cali) iii.188 (macchā c.) Mil 260 ■ ppr. med. calamāna Ja iv.331 ■ Esp. freq. in expression kammaja-vātā caliṃsu the labour-pains began to stir Ja i.52; Ja vi.485. pp. calita (q.v.) ■ caus. caleti to shake SN i.109.

Dhtp 251 kampana, to shake. Perhaps connected with car, carati

Calana

(adj. & nt.) shaking, trembling, vibrating; excitement Ja iii.188; Dhs-a 72 ■ f. calanī (quick, + langhī a kind of antelope Ja vi.537.

Calita

(adj.) wavering, unsteady Mil 93, Mil 251; Vism 113; Vv-a 177 ■ (nt.) Snp p.146.

pp. of calati

Cavati

to move, get into motion, shift, to fall away, decease, esp. to pass from one state of existence into another DN i.14 (sañsaranti c˚ upapajjanti, cp. DN-a i.105); Kp viii.4 (= Kp-a 220: apeti vigacchati acetano pi samāno puññakkhaya-vasena aññaṃ thānaṃ gacchati); Iti 99 Nd ii.2352 (satte cavamāne upapajjamāne); Iti 77 (devo deva-kāyā c. “the god falls from the assembly of gods”) Snp 1073 for bhavetha (= Nd ii.238;) Pv-a 10. Caus cāveti: inf. cāvetuṃ SN i.128 sq., 134 (˚kāma.)-pp cuta (q.v.), see also cuti.

Vedic cyavate from cyu = Gr. σεύω; cp. Lat. cieo, cio, sollicitus, Gr. κίω, κινέω, Goth. haitan = Ohg heizan

Cavana

(nt.) shifting, moving, passing away, only in ˚dhamma doomed to fall, destined to decease DN i.18, DN i.19; DN iii.31, DN iii.33; MN i.326; Iti 76; Ja iv.484; Ja vi.482 (˚dhammatā).

from cavati

Cavanatā

(f) state of shifting, removal SN ii.3≈(cuti + ); MN i.49 (id.).

Cāga

(a) abandoning, giving up, renunciation Vin i.10; SN iii.13, SN iii.26, SN iii.158; MN i.486; AN i.299. More freq. as (b) liberality, generosity, munificence (n.) generous munificent (adj.): sīlasampanno saddho purisapuggalo sabbe maccharino loke cāgena atirocati “he who is virtuous & religious excels all stingy people in generosity” AN iii.34. In freq. combns e.g. sacca dama dhiti c. Snp 188 = SN i.215; sacca dama c. khanti Snp 189; SN i.215; mutta˚ (adj.) liberal, munificent, SN v.351 = SN v.392 ˚paribhāvita citta “a heart bent on giving” SN v.309 In this sense cāga forms one of the (3, 4, 5 or 7) noble treasures of a man (cp. the Catholic treasure of grace & see ˚dhana below), viz. (as 5) saddhā, sīla, suta, cāga paññā (faith, virtue, right knowledge, liberality wisdom) SN i.232; AN i.210; AN iii.80 = SN iv.250; MN iii.99; DN iii.164, DN iii.165; cp. AN i.152 = AN iii.44; (as 4: the last minus suta) SN v.395; AN ii.62 (sama˚); (as 3) saddhā, sīla, cāga Ja ii.112; (as 7) ajjhesanā, tapo, sīla, sacca, cāga, sati mati Ja ii.327; cp. śīla-śruta-tyāga Itm 311Pv-a 30, Pv-a 120; Sdhp 214, Sdhp 323. See also anussati & anussarati;

-ādhiṭṭhāna the resolution of generosity, as one of the 4: paññā˚, sacca˚, c˚., upasama˚ DN iii.229; -ānussati generosity AN i.30; AN v.331; DN iii.250, DN iii.280; Vism 197; -kathā talk about munificence AN iii.181; -dhana the treasure of the good gift, as one of the 7 riches or blessings, the ariyadhanāni viz. saddhā, sīla, hiri, ottappa, suta, c. paññā DN iii.163, DN iii.251,; AN iv.5; Vv-a 113; as one of 5 (see above) AN iii.53; -sampadā (& sampanna) the blessing of (or blessed with) the virtue of munificence AN i.62; AN ii.66; AN iii.53; AN iv.221, etc.

from cajati, to give up, Vedic tyaj. Cp. Sk. tyāga

Cāgavant

(adj.) generous AN iii.183; AN iv.217, AN iv.220; Pp 24.

Cāgin

(adj.) giving up, sacrificing, resigning Snp 719 (kāma˚).

Cāṭi

(f.) 1. a jar, vessel, pot Ja i.199; Ja i.302 (pānīya˚); iii.277 (madhu˚ honey jar); Dhp-a i.394 (tela oil tank); Vv-a 76 (sālibhatta˚ holding a meal of rice). 2. a measure of capacity Ja ii.404; Ja iv.343.

3. a large vessel of the tank type used for living in Vin i.153.

-pañjara a cage made of, or of the form of a large earthen jar, wherein a man could lie in ambush Ja v.372, Ja v.385; -pāla (nt.) an earthenware shield (? Ja v.373 (= kīṭa).

cp. Hindī cāṭā

Cāṭu

pleasant, polite in ˚kammatā politeness, flattery Mil 370 (cp. Sk. cāṭukāra); cāṭu-kamyatā Vb 246; Vism 17, Vism 23, Vism 27; Kp-a 236.

cp. cāru

Cātur˚

(and cātu˚) consisting of four. Only in cpds. viz.

-(r)anta (adj.) “of four ends,” i.e. covering or belonging to the 4 points of the compass, all-encircling, Ep of the earth: Ja ii.343 (paṭhavī); iv.309 (mahī)-(n-m. one who rules over the 4 points; i.e. over the whole world (of a Cakkavattin) DN i.88 (cp. DN-a i.249); ii.16; Snp 552. See also Sp. AvS ii.111, n. 2; -kummāsa sour gruel with four ingredients Vv-a 308; -(d)dasī (f.) [to catuddasa fourteen] the 14th day of the lunar half month AN i.144. Pv-a 55; Vv-a 71, Vv-a 99, Vv-a 129. With pancadasī aṭṭhamī & pāṭihāriyapakkha at Snp 402; Vv 155 ˚dasika belonging to the 14th day at Vin iv.315 -(d)disa (adj.) belonging to, or comprising the four quarters, appld to a man of humanitarian mind Snp 42 (“showing universal love,” see Nd ii.239); cp. RV x.136. Esp. appld to the bhikkhu-sangha “the universal congregation of bhikkhus” Vin i.305; Vin ii.147; DN i.145; Ja i.93; Pv ii.28; iii.214 (expld Pv-a 185 by catūhi disāhi āgata-bhikkhu-sangha). Cp. Avs i.266 Avs ii.109; -(d)dīpa of four continents: rājā Thig 486; cp Mvu i.108, Mvu i.114; -(d)dīpaka sweeping over the whole earth (of a storm) Vin i.290, cp. Ja iv.314 & Avs i.258 -(b)bedā (pl.) the four Vedas Mil 3; -māsin of 4 months f. ˚inī Vin i.155; DN i.47; MN iii.79; DN-a i.139, cp. komudī -(m)mahāpatha the place where 4 roads cross, a crossroad DN i.102, DN i.194 = DN i.243; MN i.124; MN iii.91; cp. catu˚ -(m)mahābhūtika consisting of the 4 great elements (of kāya) DN i.34, DN i.55, DN i.186, DN i.195; SN ii.94 sq.; Mil 379; cp Av.Ś ii.191 & Sk. cāṭurbhautika; -(m)mahārājikā (pl. (sc. devā) the retinue of the Four Kings, inhabiting the lowest of the 6 devalokas Vin i.12; Vin iii.18; DN i.215 Nd ii.307 (under devā); Ja ii.311 (deva-loka); -yāma (saṃvara) fourfold restraint (see yāma) DN i.57, DN i.58 (cp DN-a i.167); iii.48 sq.; SN i.66; MN i.377; Vism 410 Cp. Dial. i.75 n1.

see catur

Cāturiya

(nt.) skill, cleverness, shrewdness Ja iii.267; Ja vi.410; Thag-a, 227; Vb 551; Vism 104 Dāvs v.30.

cp. catura + iya

Cāpa

(m. nt.) a bow MN i.429 (opposed to kodaṇḍa); Dhp 156 (˚âtikhīṇa shot from the bow, cp Dhp-a iii.132), 320 (abl. cāpāto metri causa); Ja iv.272 Ja v.400; Mil 105 (daḷha˚), 352.

-koṭi the end of a bow Vv-a 261; nāḷi (f.) a bow-case Ja ii.88; -lasuṇa (nt.) a kind of garlic Vin iv.259.

Sk. cāpa, from *qēp tremble, cp. capala wavering, quivering

Cāpalla

(nt.) fickleness DN i.115 (= DN-a i.286). Also as cāpalya MN i.470 Vb 351; Vism 106.

Der. fr. capala, Sk. cāpalya

Cāmara

(nt.) a chowrie, the tail of bos grunniens used as a whisk Snp 688; Vv 643; Ja vi.510; Vv-a 271, Vv-a 276. Cpd. cāmarī-gāhaka Ja vi.218 (anka) a hook holding the whisk.

from camara

Cāmikara

(nt.). gold Vv-a 12, Vv-a 13, Vv-a 166.

Deriv. unknown. Sk. cāmīkara

Cāvati

to honour, only in cpd. -apacāyati (q.v.). The Dhtp (237) defines the root cāy by pūjā.

fr. ci

Cāra

motion, walking, going; doing, behaviour, action, process Mil 162 (+ vihāra) Dhs 8 = Dhs 85 (= vicāra); Dhs-a 167. usually -˚ (n. adj.): kāma˚ going at will Ja iv.261; pamāda˚ a slothful life Ja i.9; piṇḍa˚ alms-begging Snp 414, Snp 708; sabbaratti wandering all night SN i.201; samavattha˚ AN iii.257 See also carati ib.

-vihāra doing & behaving, i.e. good conduct Ja ii.232 Dpvs. vi.38; cp. Mil 162 (above).

fr. car carati to move about

Cāraka

(cārika) (adj.) wandering about, living, going, behaving, always-˚, like ākāsa˚, niketa˚, pure˚ (see pubbangama), vana˚,-f. cārikā journey, wandering esp. as cārikaṃ carati to go on alms-pilgrimage (see carati ib) Vin i.83; Ja i.82; Ja ii.286; Dhp 326; Mil 14, Mil 22 ˚ñ pakkamati to set out wandering Ja i.87; Mil 16. SN i.199; MN i.117; AN iii.257; DN-a i.239 sq. (in detail on two cārikā); Vv-a 165; EnA 295 (unchā˚).

Cāraṇa

(adj.) = cāraka Snp 162 (saṃsuddha˚).

Cāraṇika

v.v. vāraṇika Th i.1129? a little play, masque, cp. Sk cāraṇa & Mrs. Rh. D.; Pss of the Brethren, 419.

Cāritta

(nt.) practice, proceeding, manner of acting, conduct Ja i.90, Ja i.367; Ja ii.277 (loka˚); v.285 (vanka˚); Mil 133; Vv-a 31cārittaṃ āpajjati to mix with, to call on, to have intercourse with (c. loc. MN i.470; SN ii.270 (kulesu); MN i.287 = MN iii.40 (kāmesu) Ja iii.46 (rakkhita-gopitesu).

-vāritta manner of acting & avoiding Ja iii.195, cp Th 1. 591; Vism 10. See on their mutual relation Vism 11; -sīla code of morality Vv-a 37.

From car

Cārin

(only-˚) (adj.) walking, living, experiencing; behaving, acting, practising. (a) lit. asanga˚ SN i.199 akāla˚ Snp 386; ambu˚ Snp 62; vihangapatha˚ Sdhp 241; sapadāna˚ MN i.30; Snp 65; pariyanta˚ Snp 904. (b) fig. anudhamma˚ Snp 69; āgu˚ AN ii.240; AN iii.163 dhamma˚ Mil 19; brahma˚ Snp 695; manāpa˚ Vv 314 yata˚ Snp 971; sama˚ Mil 19. See all s. v. & cp caṭu.;

Cāru

(adj.) charming, desirable pleasant, beautiful Ja vi.481; Mil 201; Sdhp 428, Sdhp 512; Vv-a 36 (= vaggu), sucāru SN i.181; Pv ii.1212 (= suṭṭhumanorama).

-dassana lovely to behold Snp 548; Ja vi.449 (expl. on p. 450 as: cāru vuccati suvaṇṇaṃ = suvaṇṇadassana) vi.579; f. Pv iii.614.

Vedic cāru & cāyu to; *qe-*qā, as in kāma, Lat. carus, etc., see under kāma

Cāreti

to set going, to pasture, feed, preserve: indriyāni c. to feast one’s senses (cp. Ger. “augenweide”) Pv-a 58; khantiṃ c to feed meekness DN-a i.277; olambakaṃ cārento drooping Ja i.174; Pass. ppr. cāriyamāna being handed round Ja iv.2 (not vā˚)-pp. carita ■ Cp. vi˚.

Denom. fr. cara; cp. carati

Cāla

shaking, a shock, only in bhūmi˚; earthquake.

From calati

Cālanī

(f.) a pestle, a mortar Vin i.202 (in cuṇṇa˚ & dussa˚, cp. saṇha).;

to cālana of calaka2

Cāleti

to move, to shake Ja v.40; to scatter Ja i.71 (tiṇāni); to sift Vin i.202.

caus. of calati

Cāvanā

(f.) moving, shifting, disappearance Vin iii.112 (ṭhānato); Sdhp 61 (id.).

Cāveti

to bring to fall, move, drive away; disturb, distract AN iv.343 (samādhimhā); Ja i.60 (inf cāvetu-kāma); ii.329 (jhānā, abl.). Aor. acāvayi (prohib.) Snp 442 (ṭhānā).

caus. of cavati

Ci

(cid in Sandhi) indef. interr particle (always-˚), in koci (= Sk. kaścid) whoever kiñci (kincid-eva) whatever, kadāci at some time or any time, etc. (q.v.), see also ca, cana, ce.;

Vedic cid nom. nt. to interr. base *qṷi (as in Gr. τίς, Lat. quis, Goth. hvi-leiks, see ki˚, cp ka˚, ku˚), = Gr. τ ́δ, Lat. quid & quid(d)em, Av. ciṭ (cp. tad, yad, kad beside taṃ, yaṃ, kiṃ)

Cikicchati

, usually tikicchati to reflect, think over, intend aim at. Pp. cikicchita Kp-a 188 (in expln of vicikicchita q.v.).

Sk. cikitsati, Desid. of cit, cinteti. Cp. vicikicchā

Cikkhati

(cikkhanā, etc.) to tell, to announce: see ā˚ & paṭisaṃ˚.;

Freq. of khyā, Dhtp 19: cikkh = vacane

Cikkhalla

(nt.) mud, mire, swamp; often with udaka˚. Vin i.253; Vin ii.120 Vin ii.159, Vin ii.291: iii.41; AN iii.394; Ja i.196; Mil 286, Mil 311, Mil 397; Pv-a 102, Pv-a 189, Pv-a 215 ■ (adj.) Vin ii.221; Vin iv.312; Pv iv.116; Mil 286.

Sk. cikkaṇa & cikkala, slippery + ya

Cikkhallavant

(adj.) muddy Pv-a 225.

Cikkhassati

to wish to drop, to ooze out Mil 152 (˚ssanto), see Kern. Toev. ii.139 & Morris,; J.P.T.S. 1884, 87.

Desid. of kṣar = Sk. cikṣariṣati

Ciṅgulaka

(& ˚ika) (m. nt.) 1. a kind of plant Snp 239 (= kaṇavīra-pupphasaṇṭhāna-sīsa Snp-a 283).

2. a toy windmill, made of palm-leaves, etc. (DN-a i.86: tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṃ vātappahārena paribbhamana-cakkaṃ Vin ii.10; DN i.6; MN i.266; AN v.203; Mil 229.

Ciṅgulāyati

to twirl round, to revolve like a windmill AN i.112.

Denom. fr. cingula

Cicciṭāyati

to hiss, fizz, sizzle (always combd with ciṭiciṭāyati) Vin i.225; SN i.169 Snp p.15; Pp 36; Mil 258 sq.

onomat. cp. ciṭiciṭāyati

Cicciṭāyana

(nt.) fizzing Vism 408 (˚sadda).

Ciñcā

(f.) the tamarind tree Ja v.38 (˚vana); Snp-a 78. Citi-citi

Sk. ciñcā & tintiḍikā

Ciṭi-ciṭi

fizz DN-a i.137.

redupl. interj.

Ciṭiciṭāyati

see cicciṭāyati; Vin i.225; cp. Divy 606.

Ciṇṇa

travelled over, resorted to, made a habit of; done, performed, practised Ja iii.541; Mil 360-su˚ well performed, accomplished SN i.42 = SN i.214 = Snp 181; Pv iii.56 ■ Cp. ā˚, pari˚, vi˚.

-ṭṭhāna the place where one is wont to go Ja ii.159 -mānatta one who performs the Mānatta Vin iv.242 -vasin one who has reached mastership in (c. loc.) Thag-a 74; Vism 154, Vism 158, Vism 164, Vism 169, Vism 331 sq., 376; der. -vāsibhāva Dhs-a 167 (read vasī˚).

pp. of carati

Ciṇṇatta

(nt.) custom, habit Mil 57, Mil 105.

Der. fr. ciṇṇa

Cita

heaped; lined or faced with (cp. citaka2) pokkharaṇiyo iṭṭhakāhi citā DN ii.178, cp. Vin ii.123.

-antaraṃsa “one whose shoulder-hole is heaped up, one who has the shoulders well filled out (Ep. of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.164. Citaka & Citaka

pp. of cināti

Citaka & Citakā

(f.).

1. a heap, a pile, esp. a funeral pile; a tumulus DN ii.163; cp ii.1014. Ja i.255; Ja v.488; Ja vi.559, Ja vi.576; DN-a i.6; Dhp-a i.69 Dhp-a ii.240; Vv-a 234; Pv-a 39.

2. (adj.) inlaid: suvaṇṇa˚ with gold Ja vi.218 (= ˚khacita).

from ci, cināti to heap up

Citi

(f.) a heap, made of bricks Ja vi.204 (city-avayata-piṭṭhikā). See also cetiya.

From ci, cināti, to heap up

Cittaka

(nt.) a sectarian mark on the forehead in ˚dhara-kumma a tortoise bearing this mark, a landtortoise Mil 364, Mil 408, cp. Mil trsl. ii.352.

to citta1

Cittaka2

: see acittaka.

Citta1 & Citra;

(adj.) variegated, manifold, beautiful; tasty, sweet, spiced (of cakes), Ja iv.30 (geṇḍuka); Dhp 171 (rājaratha); Vv 479; Pv ii.112 (aneka˚); iv.313 (pūvā = madhurā Pv-a 251). Citta (nt.) painting Thag 674Snp 50 (kāmā = Nd ii.240 nānāvaṇṇā), 251 (gāthā); Ja v.196 (geṇḍuka), 241 vi.218 ■ sucitta gaily coloured or dressed SN i.226 (b) Dhp 151 (rājaratha); Pv i.109 (vimāna).

-akkhara (adj.) with beautiful vowels SN ii.267 (Cp ˚vyañjana); -attharaka a variegated carpet DN-a i.256 -āgāra a painted house, i.e. furnished with pictures a picture gallery Vin iv.298; -upāhana a gaily coloured sandal DN i.7≈; -kata adorned, dressed up MN ii.64; Dhp 147 = Thag 769; Dhp-a iii.109 (= vicitta); -katha (adj.) = next SN i.199 (+ bahussuta); -kathin a brilliant speaker, a wise speaker, an orator, preacher. Freq combd w. bahussuta (of wide knowledge, learned), e.g. paṇḍita… medhāvin kalyāṇapaṭibhāna SN iv.375 samaṇa bahussuta c. uḷāra Vv 8426AN iii.58; Ja i.148; Mil 1, Mil 21; -kathika = ˚kathin AN i.24; Thig 449 (+ bahussuta), expld at Thag-a 281 by cittadhammakatha -kamma decoration, ornamentation, painting Ja iv.408 Ja vi.333; Mil 278; Vism 306; Pv-a 147; Dhs-a 334 (m.) a painter Ja vi.481; -kāra a painter, a decorator (cp. rajaka) SN ii.101 = SN iii.152; Thig 256; Ja vi.333 -chatta at Ja vi.540 to be changed into ˚patta; -patta (adj.) having variegated wings Ja vi.540, Ja vi.590; -pāṭalī (f.) Name of a plant (the “pied” trumpet-flower) in the world of Asuras Ja i.202; Dhp-a i.280; -pekhuna having coloured wings Ja i.207; Ja vi.539; -bimba (-mukhi) (a woman whose face is) like a painted image Ja v.452 (cp cittakata); -miga the spotted antelope Ja vi.538 -rūpa (nt.) a wonder, something wonderful Ja vi.512 as adv. ˚ṃ (to citta2?) easily Vin ii.78 = Vin iii.161; Vin iv.177 Vin iv.232; -latā the plant Rubia Munjista Ja vi.278; ˚vana the R.M. grove, one of Indra’s gardens [Sk. caitraratha] Ja i.52, Ja i.104; Ja ii.188; Ja vi.590, etc.; -vitāna a bright canopy Dhp-a iv.14; -vyañjana (adj.) with beautiful consonants (cp. ˚akkhara) SN ii.267 = AN i.73 = AN iii.107 -sāṇī variegated cloth Ja ii.290; Dhp-a iv.14; -sālā a painted room or picture gallery DN-a i.253; -sibbana with fine sewing; a cover of various embroidery Snp 304; Ja iv.395; Ja vi.218.

to cetati; *(s)qait to shine, to be bright, cp. Sk. citra, Sk. P. ketu, Av. ciprō, Lat. caelum Ags. hador, Ohg. heitar, see also citta2

Citta2

(nt.).

I. Meaning: the heart (psychologically), i.e. the centre & focus of man’s emotional nature as well as that intellectual element which inheres in & accompanies its manifestations; i.e. thought. In this wise citta denotes both the agent & that which is enacted (see kamma II. introd.), for in Indian Psychology citta is the seat & organ of thought (cetasā cinteti; cp. Gr. φρήν, although on the whole it corresponds more to the Homeric χυμός). As in the verb (cinteti) there are two stems closely allied and almost inseparable in meaning (see § III.), viz. cit & cet (citta & cetas); cp. ye should restrain, curb, subdue citta by ceto, MN i.120, MN i.242 (cp attanā coday’ attānaṃ Dhp 379 f.); cetasā cittaṃ samannesati SN i.194 (cp. cetasā cittaṃ samannesati SN i.194). In their general use there is no distinction to be made between the two (see § III.) ■ The meaning of citta is best understood when explaining it by expressions familiar to us, as: with all my heart heart and soul; I have no heart to do it; blessed are the pure in heart; singleness of heart (cp. ekagga); all of which emphasize the emotional & conative side or “thought” more than its mental & rational side (for which see manas & viññāṇa). It may therefore be rendered by intention, impulse, design; mood, disposition state of mind, reaction to impressions. It is only in later scholastic lgg. that we are justified in applying the term “thought” in its technical sense. It needs to be pointed out, as complementary to this view, that citta nearly always occurs in the singular (= heart) & out of 150 cases in the Nikāyas only 3 times in the plural (= thoughts). The substantiality of citta (cetas is also evident from its connection with kamma (heart as source of action), kāma & the senses in general.; On the whole subject see Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych Eth. introd. & Bud. Psy. ch. II.

II. Cases of citta (cetas), their relation & frequency (enum;d for gram. purposes) ■ The paradigma is (numbers denoting ", not including cpds.): Nom cittaṃ; Gen. (Dat.) cetaso (44) & cittassa (9); Instr cetasā (42) & cittena (3); Loc. citte (2) & cittamhi (2)-Nom.; cittaṃ (see below). Gen. cittassa only (of older passages) in c˚ upakkileso SN iii.232; SN v.92; AN i.207; c˚ damatho Dhp 35 & c˚ vasena MN i.214; MN iii.156 Instr. cittena only in SN i. viz. cittena nīyati loko p. 39 upakkiliṭṭha˚ p. 179; asallīnena c˚ p. 159. Loc. citte only as loc. abs. in samāhite citte (see below) & in citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi v. hoti AN i.162; cittamhi only SN i.129 & cittasmiṃ only SN i.132 ■ Plural only in Nom. cittāni in one phrase: āsavehi cittāni (vi) mucciṃsu “they purified their hearts from intoxications Vin i.35; SN iii.132; SN iv.20; Snp p.149; besides this in scholastic works = thoughts, e.g. Vb 403 (satta cittāni).

III. Citta & cetas; in promiscuous application. There is no cogent evidence of a clear separation of their respective fields of meaning; a few cases indicate the rôle of cetas as seat of citta, whereas most of them show no distinction. There are cpds. having both citta˚ ceto˚ in identical meanings (see e.g. citta-samādhi ceto˚), others show a preference for either one or the other, as ceto is preferred in ceto-khila & ceto-vimutti (but: vimutta-citta), whereas citta is restricted to comb;n w. upakkilesa, etc. The foll. sentences will illustrate this. Vivaṭena cetasā sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ bhāveti “with open heart he contemplates a radiant thought” SN v.263 = DN iii.223 = AN iv.86; cetasā cittaṃ samannesati vippamuttaṃ “with his heart he scrutinizes their pure mind” SN i.194; vigatâbhijjhena cetasā is followed by abhijjāya cittaṃ parisodheti DN iii.49 anupārambhacitto bhabbo cetaso vikkhepaṃ pahātuṃ AN v.149; cetaso vūpasamo foll. by vūpasanta-citto AN i.4; samāhite citte foll. by ceto-samādhi DN i.13≈ cittaṃ paduṭṭhaṃ foll. by ceto-padosa AN i.8; cp. It. 12 13; cetaso tato cittaṃ nivāraye “a desire of his heart he shall exclude from this” SN iv.195.

IV. Citta in itṡ relation to other terms referring to mental processes.

1. citta≈hadaya, the heart as incorporating man’s personality: hadayaṃ phaleyya, cittavikkhepaṃ pāpuṇeyya (break his heart, upset his reason) SN i.126 cittaṃ te khipissāmi hadayan te phālessāmi id. SN i.207 SN i.214; Snp p.32; kāmarāgena cittaṃ me pariḍayhati SN i.188 → nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṃ Mil 318 (“my heart is on fire”); cp. abhinibbutatto Snp 343 = apariḍayhamāna-citto Snp-a 347; cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahati to set one’s heart on, to wish Dhp-a i.327.

2. c. as mental status, contrasted to (a) physical status: citta → kāya, e.g. kilanta˚ weary in body mind DN i.20 = DN iii.32; ātura˚ SN iii.2–⁠5; nikaṭṭha˚ AN ii.137; ṭhita˚ steadfast in body & soul (cp. ṭhitatta S; v.74; ˚passaddhi quiet of body & soul S; v.66. The Commentators distinguish those six pairs of the sankhārākkhandha or the cetasikas: citta-kāya-passaddhi-lahutā, etc. as quiet, buoyancy, etc., of (a) the viññāṇakkhandha (consciousness), (b) the other 3 mental khandhas, making up the nāma-kāya (Dhs-a 150 on Dhs. 62: Compendium of Phil. 96, n. 3); passaddha DN iii.241, DN iii.288 ■ (b) intellectual status: citta → manas & viññāṇa (mind → thought & understanding). These three constitute the invisible energizer of the body alias mind in its manifestations: yañ ca vuccati cittan ti vā mano ti vā viññāṇan ti vā: (;α) ayaṃ attā nicco dhuvo, etc., DN i.21; (β) tatr’ assutavā puthujjano n’ âlaṃ nibbindituṃ, etc. SN ii.94; (γ) taṃ rattiyā ca divasassa ca añña-d-eva uppajjati aññaṃ nirujjhati SN ii.95, cf. Thag-a. 1 on 125 ■ Under ādesanā-pāṭihāriya (thought reading): evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṃ (thus is your thought & thus your mind, i.e. habit of thinking) DN i.213 = DN iii.103; AN i.170 ■ niccaṃ idaṃ c. niccaṃ idaṃ mano SN i.53; cittena niyyati loko “by thoughts the world is led” SN i.39 = AN ii.177 (cp KS 55); apatiṭṭhita-citto ādīna-manaso avyāpaṇnacetaso SN v.74; vyāpanna-citto paduṭṭha-manasankappo SN iii.93; paduṭṭha-citto = paduṭṭha-manaso Pv-a 34, Pv-a 43.

3. c. as emotional habitus: (a) active = intention contrasted or compared with: (α) will, c. as one of the four samādhis, viz. chanda, viriya, c., vīmaṃsā DN iii.77; SN v.268; Vb 288 ■ (β) action, c. as the source of kamma: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṃ hoti “when the intention is evil, the deed is evil as well” AN i.262; cittaṃ appamāṇaṃ… yaṃ kiñci pamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ, etc. AN v.299 ■ Esp. in contrast to kāya & vācā, in triad kāyena vācāya cittena (in deed & speech & will otherwise as k. v. manasā, see under kāya III.) SN ii.231, SN ii.271 = SN iv.112. Similarly taṃ vācaṃ appahāya (cittaṃ˚, diṭṭhiṃ˚) SN iv.319 = DN iii.13 DN iii.15; & under the constituents of the dakkhiṇeyyasampatti as khetta-sampatti, citta˚, payoga˚ (the recipient of the gift, the good-will, the means) Vv-a 30 Vv-a 32 ■ (b); passive = mood, feelings, emotion, ranging with kāya & paññā under the (3) bhāvanā DN iii.219; SN iv.111; AN iii.106; cp. MN i.237; Ne 91; classed with kāya vedanā dhammā under the (4) satipaṭṭhānas DN ii.95, DN ii.100, DN ii.299 sq.; SN v.114, etc. (see kāya cpds.). As part of the sīlakkhandha (with sīla ethics, paññā understanding) in adhisīla, etc. Vin v.181; Pts ii.243; Vb 325; cp. tisso sampadā, scil. sīla, citta, diṭṭhi (see sīla & cp. cetanā, cetasika) AN i.269 ■ citta & paññā are frequently grouped together, e.g. SN i.13 = SN i.165; DN iii.269; Th i.125 sq. As feeling citta is contrasted with intellection in the group saññā c. diṭṭhi AN ii.52; Pts ii.80; Vb 376.

4. Definitions of citta (direct or implied): cittan ti viññāṇaṃ bhūmikavatthu-ārammaṇa-kiriyādi-cittatāya pan’ etaṃ cittan ti vuttaṃ Dhp-a i.228; cittan ti mano mānasaṃ Kp-a 153; cittaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ ti cittassa etaṃ vevacanaṃ Ne 54. yaṃ cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ hadayaṃ paṇḍaraṃ, etc. Dhs 6 = Dhs 111 (same for def. of manindriya, under § 17; see Buddh. Psych.). As rūpâvacara citta at Vism 376.

V. Citta in its range of semantical applications: (1) heart, will, intention, etc. (see I.).

(a) heart as general status of sensory-emotional being; its relation to the senses (indriyāni). A steadfast & constrained heart is the sign of healthy emotional equilibrium, this presupposes the control over the senses; samādahaṃsu cittaṃ attano ujukaṃ akaṃsu sārathī va nettāni gahetvā indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā SN i.26; ujugato-citto ariyasāvako AN iii.285; ṭhita c SN i.159≈; AN iii.377 = AN iv.404 (+ ānejjappatta); c. na kampati Snp 268; na vikampate SN iv.71; opp. capalaṃ c. Dhp 33; khitta˚; a heart unbalanced AN ii.52 (+ visaññin); opp.: avikkhitta˚ AN v.149; Pv-a 26; c. rakkhitaṃ mahato atthāya saṃvattati a guarded heart turns to great profit AN i.7; similarly: c. dantaṃ, guttaṃ, saṃvutaṃ ibid ■ cittaṃ rakkhetha medhāvī cittaṃ guttaṃ sukhāvahaṃ Dhp 36; cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutassa viharato cittaṃ vyāsiñcati… rūpesu SN iv.78; ye cittaṃ saññamessanti mokkhanti Mārabandhanā “from the fetters of Māra those are released who control their heart” Dhp 37; pāpā cittaṃ nivāraye Dhp 116; bhikkhuno c. kulesu na sajjati, gayhati, bajjhati SN ii.198 (cp. Schiller: “Nicht an die Güter hänge dein Herz”).

(b) Contact with kāma & rāga;: a lustful, worldly craving heart ■ (α) kāmā: kāmā mathenti cittaṃ Snp 50; SN iv.210; kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi SN i.188; kāme nâpekkhate cittaṃ Snp 435; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ Dhp 371; manussakehi kāmehi cittaṃ vuṭṭhapetvā SN v.409; na uḷāresu kāmaguṇesu bhogāya cittaṃ namati AN iv.392; SN i.92; kāmāsavā pi cittaṃ vimuccati AN ii.211, etc.; kāmesu c. na pakkhandati na ppasīdati na sanṭiṭṭhati (my h. does not leap, sit or stand in cravings) DN iii.239; kāmesu tibbasārāgo vyāpannacitto SN iii.93; kāmāmise laggacitto (divide thus!) Pv-a 107-(β) rāgā: rāgo cittaṃ anuddhaṃseti (defilement harasses his heart) SN i.185; SN ii.231 = SN ii.271; AN ii.126 AN iii.393; rāga-pariyuṭṭhitaṃ c. hoti AN iii.285; sārattacitto SN iv.73; viratta˚ SN iv.74; Snp 235; Pv-a 168. (γ) various: patibaddha-c. (fettered in the bonds of ˚) AN iv.60; Snp 37, Snp 65; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 151, etc ■ pariyādinna˚ (grasping, greedy), usually combd w. lābhena abhibhūta: SN ii.226, SN ii.228; SN iv.125; AN iv.160; DN iii.249- upakkiliṭṭha˚; (etc.) (defiled) SN i.179; SN iii.151, SN iii.232 sq.v.92 (kāmacchando cittassa upakkileso); AN i.207 AN v.93 sq ■ otiṇṇa˚ fallen in love AN iii.67; Snp-a 322.

(c) A heart, composed, concentrated, settled, selfcontrolled mastered, constrained ■ (α) c. pasīdati (pasanna-˚c) (a heart full of grace, settled in faith) SN i.98; AN i.207; AN iii.248; Snp 434; pasanna˚: AN iv.209, AN iv.213; Snp 316, Snp 403, Snp 690, cp. c. pakkhandati pasīdati SN iii.133; AN iii.245; also vippasanna˚: SN v.144; Snp 506; cp vippasannena cetasā Pv i.1010 ■ (β) c. santiṭṭhati in set s. sannisīdati, ekodihoti, samādhiyati (cp. cetaso ekodibhāva) SN ii.273; SN iv.263; AN ii.94, AN ii.157 ■ (γ) c samādhiyati (samāhita-c˚, cp. ceto-samadhi quiescence DN i.13 = DN iii.30, DN iii.108; SN i.120, SN i.129, SN i.188; SN iv.78 = SN iv.351; AN i.164; AN ii.211; AN iii.17, AN iii.280; AN iv.177; Vb 227; Vism 376 etc ■ (δ) supatiṭṭhita -c˚ always in formula catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu-s-c˚: SN iii.93; SN v.154; SN v.301; DN iii.101; AN v.195-(ε) susaṇṭhita c. SN v.74vasībhūta c. SN i.132; AN i.165danta c. Dhp 35 ■ (d) “with purpose of heart,” a heart set on, striving after, endeavouring etc ■ (α) cittaṃ namati (inclines his h. on, with dat appossukkatāya SN i.137); nekkhamma-ninna SN iii.233 viveka˚ DN iii.283; AN iv.233; AN v.175 ■ (β) cittaṃ padahati (pa + dhā: προ τίχητι) in phrase chandaṃ janeti vāyamati viriyaṃ ārabbhati c˚ ṃ paggaṇhāti padahati DN iii.221; AN ii.15 = AN iv.462; SN v.269; Nd ii.97; Ne 18 In the same ṣense pa-ni-dahati (in paṇidhi, paṇihita bent down on) (cp. ceto-paṇidhi) SN i.133 (tattha iv.309 (dup˚); v.157; Dhp 42 = Ud 39; Dhp 43 (sammā˚).

(e) An evil heart (“out of heart proceed evil thoughts Mk. 7, 21)-(α) paduṭṭha -c˚ (cp. ceto-padosa) DN i.20 DN iii.32; AN i.8 (opp. pasanna-c˚); iv.92; Iti 12, Iti 13; Pv-a 33, 43, etc ■ (β) vyāpanna -c˚: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṃ hoti AN i.262. Opp. a˚ SN iv.322; AN ii.220 ■ (γ) samoha -c˚ (+ sarāga, etc. DN i.79; DN ii.299; DN iii.281; Vism 410, & passim.;

(f) “blessed are the pure in heart,” a pure, clean, purified (cp. Ger. geläutert), emancipated, free, detached heart. (α) mutta -c˚, vimutta - c˚, etc. (cp. cetaso vimokkho ceto-vimutti, muttena cetasā), āsavehi cittāni mucciṃsu SN iii.132, etc.; vi˚ Snp p.149 ■ vimutta SN i.28 (+ subhāvita), 29, 46 = 52; iii.45 (+ viratta), 90 iv.236 (rāgā); Snp 23 (+ sudanta); Nd ii.587 ■ suvimutta: SN i.126, SN i.141, SN i.233; SN iv.164; AN iii.245; AN v.29; Snp 975 (+ satimā) ■ (β) cittaṃ parisodheti MN i.347; AN ii.211; SN iv.104 ■ (γ) alīna c. (unstained) SN i.159; AN v.149; Snp 68; Snp 717; Nd ii.97 (cp. cetaso līnatta).

(g) good-will, a loving thought, kindliness, tenderheartedness love (“love the Lord with all your heart”)-(α) metta -c˚ usually in phrase mettacittaṃ bhāveti “to nourish the heart with loving thought,” to produce good-will DN i.167; SN ii.264; AN i.10; AN v.81; Snp 507 (cp mettā-sahagatena cetasā) ■ (β) bhāvita -c˚ “keep thy heart with all diligence” (Prov. 4, 23) SN i.188 (+ susamāhita); iv.294; v.369 (saddhā-paribhāvita); AN i.6 (+ bahulīkata, etc.); Snp 134 (= SN i.188); Dhp 89 = SN v.29; Pv-a 139.

(h) a heart calmed, allayed, passionless (santa upasanta˚; ) D.iii.49; SN i.141; Snp 746.

(i) a wieldy heart, a heart ready & prepared for truth an open & receptive mind:; kalla˚, mudu˚, udagga˚ pasanna˚; AN iv.186; kalla˚; Pv-a 38 (sanctified); lahu SN i.201; udagga˚; Snp 689, Snp 1028; SN i.190 (+ mudita) mudu˚ Pv-a 54.

(k) Various phrases. Abbhuta-cittajātā “while wonder filled their hearts” SN i.178; evaṃcitto “in this state of mind” SN ii.199; Snp 985; cittam me Gotamo jānāti (G. knows my heart) SN i.178; theyya-citto intending to steal Vin iii.58; āraddha-citto of determined mind MN i.414; SN ii.21, cp. 107; Snp p.102; aññācittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti SN ii.267; nānā˚ of varying mind Ja i.295 nihīnacitto low-minded Pv-a 107; nikaṭṭha˚ AN ii.137 āhata˚ AN iv.460 = AN v.18; supahata˚ SN i.238 (cp. Mil 26); visankhāragata˚ Dhp 154; sampanna˚ Snp 164 vibbhanta˚ SN i.61 = AN i.70 = AN ii.30 = AN iii.391.

(2) thought: mā pāpakaṃ akusalaṃ cittaṃ cinteyyātha (do not think any evil thought) SN v.418; na cittamattam pi (not even one thought) Pv-a 3; mama cittaṃ bhaveyya (I should think) Pv-a 40. For further instances see Dhs & Vb Indexes & cp. cpds. See also remarks above (under I.). Citta likened to a monkey Vism 425.;

-ādhipati the influence of thought (adj. ˚pateyya Ne 16; Dhs 269, Dhs 359; Dhs-a 213. Commentators define c. here as javanacittuppāda, our “thought” in its specialized sense, Compendium of Phil. 177, n. 2 -ānuparivattin consecutive to thought Dhs 671, Dhs 772 Dhs 1522; -ānupassanā the critique of heart, adj. ˚ânupassin DN ii.299; DN iii.221, DN iii.281; MN i.59 & passim (cp kāy˚); -āvila disturbance of mind Nd ii.576 (˚karaṇa) -ujjukatā rectitude of mind Dhs 51, Dhs 277, etc.; -uppāda the rise of a thought, i.e. intention, desire as theyya ˚ṃ uppādesi he had the intention to steal (a thought of theft) Vin iii.56MN i.43; MN iii.45; Ja ii.374; -ekaggatā “one-pointedness of mind,” concentration Ne 15, Ne 16 Vism 84, Vism 137, Vism 158; Dhp-a iii.425; Thag-a 75; cp ekagga-citto AN iii.175; -kali a witch of a heart, a witch-like heart Thag 356; -kallatā readiness of heart, preparedness of mind Vv-a 330; -kilesa stain of h. Dhp 88 (Dhp-a ii.162 = pañca nīvaraṇā); -kelisā pastime of the mind Thag 1010; -kkhepa derangement of the mind, madness Vin v.189 = Vin v.193 (ummāda + ); AN iii.219 (ummāda + ); Dhp-a iii.70 (= ummāda); Pv-a 39; Dhp 138; cp. ˚vikkhepa; -cetasika belonging to heart & thought, i.e. mental state thought, mind DN i.213; Dhs 1022 (-dhammā, Mrs Rh. D.: emotional, perceptual & synthetic states as well as those of intellect applied to sense-impressions) 1282; Pts i.84; Mil 87; Vism 61, Vism 84, Vism 129, Vism 337 -dubbhaka a rogue of a heart, a rogue-like heart Thag 214; -pakopana shaking or upsetting the mind Iti 84 (dosa); -pamaddin crushing the h. Thig 357 (= Thag-a 243; v.l. pamāthin & pamādin; ) -pariyāya the ways (i.e. behaviour) of the h. AN v.160 (cp. ceto-paricca); -passaddhi calm of h., serenity of mind (cp. kāya˚; ) SN v.66; Dhs 62; -bhāvanā cultivation of the h. MN iii.149; -mala stain of h. Pv-a 17; -mudutā plasticity of mind (or thought) Dhs 62, Dhs 277, Dhs 325 -rucita after the heart’s liking Ja i.207; -rūpaṃ according to intention, as much as expected Vin i.222; Vin ii.78 Vin iii.161; Vin iv.177, Vin iv.232; -lahutā buoyancy of thought Dhs 62, Dhs 323, Dhs 1283; Vism 465; -vikkhepa (cp. ˚kkhepa madness SN i.126 (+ ummāda ); Ne 27; Vism 34; -vippayutta disconnected with thought Dhs 1192, Dhs 1515; -visaṃsaṭṭha detached fr. thought Dhs 1194, Dhs 1517; -vūpasama allayment of one’s h. SN i.46; -saṅkilesa (adj.) with impure heart (opp. c ■ vodāna) SN iii.151; -saññatti conviction Mil 256; -santāpa “heart-burn,” sorrow Pv-a 18 (= soka); -samādhi (cp. ceto- samādhi ) concentration of mind, collectedness of thought, self-possession SN iv.350; SN v.269; Vb 218; -samodhāna adjustment calming of thoughts Thag-a 45; -sampīḷana (adj.) h. crushing (cp. ˚pamaddin & ˚pakopana; ) Ne 29 (domanassa). -sahabhū arising together with thought Dhs 670, Dhs 769, Dhs 1520. -hetuka (adj.) caused by thought Dhs 667, Dhs 767.

Sk. citta, orig. pp. of cinteti, cit, cp. yutta → yuñjati, mutta → muñcati. On etym. from cit. see cinteti

Citta2

Name of the month Chaitra Pv-a 135. Cp. Citra-māsa Kp-a 192.

cp. Sk. caitra, the first month of the year: MarchApril, orig. Name of the star Spica (in Virgo); see E Plunket, Ancient Calendars, etc., pp. 134 sq., 171 sq.

Cittaka(a) & Citraka(;b)

1. (adj.)(a) coloured Ja iv.464. - 2. (m.)(b) the spotted antelope Ja vi.538.

3. (nt. a (coloured) mark (on the forehead) Mil 408 (˚dharakumma) ■ f. cittakā a counterpane of many colours (DN-a i.86 cittikā: vāna citra-uṇṇā-may attharaṇaṃ) Vin i.192; Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169; DN i.7; AN i.181≈.

read nāna˚

Cittatara

, compar. of citta1, more various, more varied. SN iii.151 sq ■ a punning passage, thus: by the procedure (caraṇa) of mind (in the past) the present mind (citta) is still more varied. Cp. SA in loco: Asl. 66 Expositor 88.

Cittatā

. SA on SN iii.151 sq. (bhūmicittatāya dvāracittatāya ārammaṇacittatāya kammanānatta).

f. abstr. to citta1

Cittatā

“being of such a heart or mind,” state of mind, character SN iii.152; SN iv.142 (vimutta˚); v.158 (id.); AN v.145 sq. (upārambha˚) Vb 372 (id.); Vb 359 (amudu˚); Pv-a 13 (visuddhi˚ noble character); paṭibaddha˚ (in love with) Pv-a 145 Pv-a 147, Pv-a 270. In SN iii.152 l cittitā q.v.

f. abstr. to citta2

Cittatta

(n.) = cittatā SN v.158.

Citti

(f.) “giving thought or heart only in combn w. kar: cittikaroti to honour, to esteem Ger. cittikatvā MN iii.24; AN iii.172; Pv ii.955 (cittiṃ k. = pūjetvā Pv-a 135); Dpvs i.2 ■ acittikatvā MN iii.22; AN iv.392 ■ pp. cittikata thought (much) of Vin iv.6 (& a˚); Vb 2.

fr. cit, cp. citta, cintā, cinteti, formation like mutti → muc, sitti → sic

Cittikāra

respect, consideration Vv-a 178 (garu˚), 242; Pv-a 26; Vb 371 (a˚); Vism 123 (cittī˚), 188.

see citti

Cittita

painted, variegated, varied, coloured or resplendent with (-˚) SN iii.152 (sic l. for cittatā) So SA, which, on p. 151, reads citten’ eva cittitaṃ for cintitaṃ. Thag 736; Thag 2, Thag 390 (su˚); Vv 367; 402.

pp. of citteti, Denom. fr. citta1

Citra

= citta3, the month Chaitra, Kp-a 192 (˚māsa).

Cināti

to heap up, to collect, to accumulate Inf. cinituṃ Vin ii.152; pp. cita (q.v.). Pass cīyati Ja v.7. Caus. cināpeti to construct, to build Ja vi.204; Mil 81Note cināti at Ja ii.302 (to weave is to be corr. to vināti (see Kern, Toev. s. v.) ■ Cp ā˚, pa˚, vi˚ ■ Note. cināti also occurs as cinati in pa˚.

Sk. cinoti & cayati,; ci, to which also kāya, q.v. See also caya, cita

Cintaka

(adj.) one who thinks out or invents, in akkhara˚; the grammarian Pv-a 120, nīti˚; the lawgiver ib. 130; cp. Divy 212, Divy 451, “overseer.”

cp. cintin

Cintana

(nt.) = cintā Thag 695; Mil 233.

Cintanaka

(adj.) thoughtful, considerate Ja i.222.

Cintā

“the act of thinking” (cp. citti), thought SN i.57; Pp 25; Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 292; Sdhp 165 Sdhp 216 ■ loka˚ thinking over the world, philosophy SN v.447; AN ii.80.

-kavi “thought-poetry,” i.e. original poetry (see kavi) AN ii.230; -maṇi the jewel of thought, the true philosopher’s stone Vv-a 32; Name of a science Ja iii.504 -maya consisting of pure thought, metaphysical DN iii.219; Ja iv.270; Vb 324; Ne 8, Ne 50, Ne 60 (˚mayin, of paññā); Vism 439 (id.).

to cit, cinteti

Cintita

(a) (adj.) thought out, invented, devised SN i.137 (dhammo asuddho samalehi c.); iii.151 (caraṇaṃ nāma cittaṃ citten’ eva c.); Pv ii.613 (mantaṃ brahma˚, expl. Pv-a 97 by kathitaṃ) ■ (b) (nt.) a thought, intention, in duc˚ su˚; (bad & good) AN i.102; Thag-a 76; -matta as much a a thought, loc. cintita-matte (yeva) at the mere thoughts just as he thought it Dhp-a i.326 (= cintita kkhaṇe in the moment of thinking it, p. 329).

pp. of cinteti, cp. also cintaka

Cintin

only-˚: thinking of, having one’s thoughts on AN i.102 (duccintita˚ & su˚); Snp 174 (ajjhatta˚; v.l. B. ˚saññin) 388; Ja iii.306 = Ja iv.453 Ja v.176 = Ja v.478; Mil 92.

adj. to cintā

Cinteti & ceteti

Forms: (a) cint: pres. cinteti pot. cinteyya; ppr. cintento & cintayanto (Snp 834)-aor. cintesi, 3rd pl. cintesuṃ (Ja i.149), acintayuṃ (Snp 258) ■ ger. cintetvā (Ja i.279) & cintiya (Mvu vii.17, Mvu vii.32) ■ grd. cinteyya & cintetabba; pp. cintita (q.v.). Cp. also cintana, cintin ■ (b) cet: pres ceteti & cetayati (SN i.121), pot. cetaye (Pv ii.97 cinteyya Pv-a 116); ppr. cetayāna (Ja v.339); fut cetessati (Vin iii.19) ■ aor. acetayi (Pv i.66 = cetesi Pv-a 34) ■ ger cecca (Vin iii.112; Vin iv.290); also cicca see sañ˚ ■ grd. cetabba (for *cetetabba only at Ja iv.157, v.l. ceteyya, expl. by cintetabba) ■ pp cetayita (q.v.). Cp. also cetanā.

Note. The relation in the use of the two forms is that cet is the older & less understood form, since it is usually expl;d by cint, whereas cint is never expld by cet & therefore appears to be the more frequent & familiar form.;

Meaning: (a) (intr.) to think, to reflect, to be of opinion, Grouped with (phuṭṭho) vedeti, ceteti, sañjānāti he has the feeling, the awareness (of the feeling) the consciousness SN iv.68. Its seat is freq. mentioned with manasā (in the heart), viz. manasā diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Snp 834; na pāpaṃ manasā pi cetaye Pv ii.97; Ja i.279; Pv-a 13 (he thought it over), ib. (evaṃ c you think so); Sdhp 289 (īdisaṃ c. id.) Mvu vii.18, Mvu vii.32; Mil 233 (cintayati), 406 (cintayitabba) ■ Prohibitive mā cintayi don’t think about it, don’t worry, don’t be afraid, never mind Ja i.50, Ja i.292, Ja i.424; Ja iii.289; Ja vi.176 pl. mā cintayittha Ja i.457; Ja iv.414; Ja vi.344; Vism 426; Dhp-a i.12; Dhp-a iii.196; also mā cintesi Ja iii.535 ■ (b) (with acc.) to ponder, think over, imagine, think out, design scheme, intend, plan. In this sense grouped with (ceteti) pakappeti anuseti to intend, to start to perform, to carry out SN ii.65. maraṇaṃ ākankhati cetayati (ponders over) SN i.121; acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni AN ii.80; cetabba-rūpa (a fit object of thought, a good thought) Ja iv.157 (= cintetabba); loka-cintaṃ c SN v.447; ajjhattarūpe, etc. ceteti Vin iii.113; mangalāni acintayuṃ Snp 258; diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Snp 834 kiṃ cintesi Ja i.221; sokavinayan’-upāyaṃ c. to devise a means of dispelling the grief Pv-a 39 ■ Esp. with pāpaṃ & pāpakaṃ to intend evil, to have ill-will against (c. dat.): mā pāpakaṃ akusalaṃ cittaṃ cinteyyātha SN v.418; na p. cetaye manasā pi Pv ii.97 (= cinteyya piheyya Pv-a 116); p. na cintetabba Pv-a 114; tassā p. acetayi Pv i.66 (= cetesi Pv-a 34); kiṃ amhākaṃ cintesi what do you intend against us? Ja i.211 ■ (c (with dat.) (restricted to ceteti) to set one’s heart on, to think upon, strive after, desire: āgatipunabbhavāya c. to desire a future rebirth SN iv.201; vimokkhāya c to strive after emancipation SN iii.121; attavyābadhāya c. MN iii.23 = AN i.157 = SN iv.339; pabbajjāya c. Iti 75 rakkhāya me tvaṃ vihito… udāhu me cetayase vadhāya Ja iii.146-acinteyya that which must not or cannot be thought AN ii.80 (cattāri ˚āni four reflections to be avoided); Vv-a 323 (a. buddhânubhāva unimaginable majesty of a B.).

Sk. cetati to appear, perceive, & cintayati to think,; cit (see citta2) in two forms: (a) Act, base with nasal infix cint (cp. muñc, yuñj, siñc, etc.); (b) Med base (denom.) with guṇa cet (cp. moc, yoj, sec, etc & the analogous formations of; chid, chind, ched under chindati) to *(s)qait: see citta1, with which further cp caksu, cikita, ciketi, cikitsati, & in meaning passati (he sees = he knows), Gr.; οἰδα = vidi, E. view = thought Ger. anschauung

Cipiṭa

(adj.) pressed flat, flattened Vv-a 222 To be read also at Ja vi.185 for vippita.

pp. to cip (?) see next: cp. Sk. cipiṭa grain flattened after boiling

Cippiyamāna

crushed flat (Rh. D.; cp. also Kern Toev.) Mil 261.

ppr. Pass. of cip, see cipiṭa

Cimilikā

(f.) see cilimikā Vin ii.150; Vin iv.40; Cp. Vin. Texts iii.167; J.P.T.S. 1885, 39.

Cira

(adj.) long (of time), usually in cpds. & as adv. Either; ciraṃ (acc.) for a long time Snp 678, Snp 730, Snp 1029; Dhp 248; Kp vii.5; Ja ii.110; Ja iv.3; Pv ii.333 or cirena (instr.) after a long time Vin iv.86; Dhs-a 239; or cirāya (dat.) for long Dhp 342. cirassa (gen.) see cirassaṃcirataraṃ (compar.) for a (comparatively) long time, rather long AN iii.58; Pv ii.87. cir-â-ciraṃ continually Vin iv.261; Ja v.233acira not long (ago) lately, newly: ˚arahattappatta SN i.196; ˚pabbajita SN i.185; ˚parinibbute Bhagavati shortly after the death of the Bhagavant DN i.204, etc.; Snp p.59.

-kālaṃ (adv.) a long time freq. e.g. Pv-a 19, Pv-a 45, Pv-a 60 Pv-a 109; -ṭṭhitika perpetual, lasting long AN iv.339 (opp pariyāpajjati); Vv 801; Pp 32, Pp 33; Vism 37, Vism 175; DN-a i.3. -dikkhita (not ˚dakkhita) having long since been initiated SN i.226 = Ja v.138 (= cirapabbajita) -nivāsin dwelling (there) for a long time SN ii.227 -paṭika [cp. Sk. ciraṃ prati] long since, adj. constr in conformity w. the subject Vin i.33; DN ii.270; SN iii.120; -pabbajita having long since become a wanderer AN iii.114; Snp p.92; DN-a i.143; -ppavāsin (adj.) long absent Dhp 219 (= cirappavuttha Dhp-a iii.293). -rattaṃ (adv.) for a long time Snp 665, Snp 670; Ja iv.371; and -rattāya id. Ja ii.340; Pv i.94.

Vedic. cira, perhaps to *quei̯e to rest, cp. Lat. quiēs, civis; Goth. hveila; Ohg. wīlōn; E. while

Cirassaṃ

(adv.) at last Vin ii.195; DN i.179; SN i.142; Ja ii.439; Ja iii.315; Ja iv.446 (read cirassa passāmi); v.328; Thag 868; Thag-a 217; Pv-a 60- na cirass’ eva shortly after DN iii.11; Ja iv.2; Dhp-a iii.176; Pv-a 32sucirass’ eva after a very long while SN i.193.

origin. geName of cira = cirasya

Cirāyati

to be long, to tarry, to delay, Dhp-a i.16; Vv-a 64, Vv-a 208; cp. ciraṃ karoti id. Ja ii.443.

Sk. cirayati, v. denom. fr. cira

Cirīṭa

a parrot Ja v.202 (in compn cirīti˚).

Sk. ciri, cp. kīra

Cilimikā

(f.) as cimilikā at Vin ii.150; Vin iv.40 a kind of cloth or carpeting, made from palmleaves bark, etc. Also at Pv-a 144 (doubtful reading).

Der. fr. cīra

Cillaka

a peg, post, pillar, in dāruka˚; Thig 390 (cp. Thag-a 257). Not with Kern (Toev.) “a wooden puppet,” as der. fr. citta.1

kilaka or khīlaka, q.v.

Cīnaka

(m. nt.) a kind of bean Snp 239 (= aṭavi-pabbatapadesu āropita-jāta-cīna-mugga Snp-a 283); Ja v.405.

Cīnapiṭṭha

(nt.) red lead DN-a i.40; Dhs-a 14.

Cīyati

to be gathered, to be heaped up Snp 428 (cīyate pahūtaṃ puññaṃ). See also ā˚.

Pass. of cināti

Cīra

(nt.) 1. bark, fibre DN i.167 (kusa˚, vāka˚, phalaka˚); Vin iii.34; AN i.295; Pp 55-a bark dress Vin i.305; Ja vi.500 (cp. cīraka).

2. a strip (orig. of bark), in suvaṇṇa˚-khacita gold-brocaded Vv-a 280 (see also next). Cp. ocīraka (under odīraka).

Sk. cīra, cp. cīvara

Cīraka

1. bark (see cpds.)

2. a strip, in suvaṇṇa˚; gold brocade (dress) Ja v.197.

-vāsika (nt.) bark-dress (a punishment) MN i.87 = AN i.48 = Mil 197.

cp. cīra

Cīriya

(adj.) like or of bark, in cpd. dāru˚; (as Np.) “wood-barker” Dhp-a ii.35.

fr. cīra

Cīriḷikā

(f.) a cricket AN iii.397 (v.l. cīrikā). Cp. on word-formation pipiḷikā & Mod. Gr.; τσίτσικος cricket.

cp. Sk. cīrī & jhillikā a cricket, cīrilli a sort of large fish

Cīvara

(nt.) the (upper) robe of a Buddhist mendicant C. is the first one of the set of 4 standard requisites of a wandering bhikkhu, vir. c˚, piṇḍapāta alms-bowl, senāsana lodging, a place to sleep at, gilānapaccaya-bhesajja-parikkhāra medicinal appliances for use in sickness. Thus mentioned passim e.g. Vin iii.89, Vin iii.99, Vin iii.211; Vin iv.154 sq.; DN i.61; MN ii.102; AN i.49 Nd ii.s. v.; Iti 111. In abbreviated form Snp 339; Pv-a 7; Sdhp 393. In starting on his begging round the bhikkhu goes patta-cīvaraṃ ādāya, The 3 robes are sanghāṭi, uttarāsaṅga, antaravāsaka given thus, e.g. at Vin i.289. that is literally ʻtaking his bowl & robe.ʼ But this is an elliptical idiom meaning ʻputting on his outer robe and taking his bowl.ʼ A bhikkhu never goes into a village without wearing all his robes, he never takes them, or any one of the three, with him. Each of the three is simply; an oblong piece of cloth (usually cotton cloth). On the mode of wearing these three robes see the note at Dialogues ii.145 ■ Vin iii.11; DN ii.85; Snp p.21; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 13 & passim. The sewing of the robe was a festival for the laity (see under kaṭhina). There are 6 kinds of cloth mentioned for its manufacture, viz khoma, kappāsika, koseyya, kambala, sāṇa, bhanga Vin.; i.58 = 96 = 281 (cp. ˚dussa). Two kinds of robes are distinguished: one of the gahapatika (layman) a white one, and the other that of the bhikkhu, the c proper, called paṃsukūlaṃ c. “the dust-heap robe Vin v.117 (cp. gahapati) ■ On cīvara in general also on special ordinances concerning its making, wearing & handling see Vin i.46, Vin i.49 sq., 196, 198, 253 sq. 285, 287 sq., 306 = ii.267 (of var. colours); ii.115 sq (sibbati to sew the c.); iii.45, 58 (theft of a c.), 195–⁠223 254

266; iv.59

62, 120

123, 173, 279 sq., 283 (six kinds)-A iii.108 (cīvare kalyāṇakāma); v.100, 206; Vism 62; Iti 103; Pv-a 185Sīse cīvaraṃ karoti to drape the outer robe over the head Vin ii.207, Vin ii.217; ˚ṃ khandhe karoti to drape it over the back Vin ii.208, Vin ii.217; ˚ṃ nikkhipati to lay it down or put it away Vin i.47 sq.; Vin ii.152 Vin ii.224; Vin iii.198, Vin iii.203, Vin iii.263; ˚ṃ saṃharati to fold it up Vin i.46 ■ Var. expressions referring to the use of the robe atireka˚; an extra robe Vin iii.195; acceka˚; id. Vin iii.260 sq.; kāla˚; (& akāla˚) a robe given at (and outside) the specified time Vin iii.202 sq.; Vin iv.284, Vin iv.287; gahapati˚ a layman’s r. Vin iii.169, Vin iii.171; ti˚; the three robes, viz sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga, antaravāsaka Vin i.288, Vin i.289 Vin iii.11, Vin iii.195, Vin iii.198 sq.; Vin v.142; adj. tecīvarika wearing 3 rs. Vin v.193; dubbala˚; (as adj.) with a worn-out c Vin iii.254; Vin iv.59, Vin iv.154, Vin iv.286; paṃsukūla˚; the dust-heap robe Pv-a 141; sa˚-bhatta food given with a robe Vin iv.77; lūkha˚; (adj.) having a coarse robe Vin i.109 (+ duccola); iii.263 (id.); AN i.25; vihāra˚; a robe to be used in the monastery Vin iii.212.

-kaṇṇa the lappet of a monk’s robe Dhp-a iii.420; Vv-a 76 = Dhp-a iii.106, cp. cīvarakarṇaka Av.Ś ii.184 & ˚ika Divy 239, Divy 341, Divy 350.; -kamma (nt.) robe-making Vin ii.218; Vin iii.60, Vin iii.240; Vin iv.118, Vin iv.151; AN v.328 sq.; Dhp-a iii.342; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 145. -kāra (-samaya) (the time of sewing the robes Vin iii.256 sq. -kāla (-samaya) the right time for accepting robes Vin iii.261; Vin iv.286, Vin iv.287 -dāna (-samaya) (the ime for) giving robes Vin iv.77 Vin iv.99; -dussa clothing-material Vin iv.279, Vin iv.280; -nidāhaka putting on the c. Vin i.284; -paṭiggāhaka the receiver of a robe Vin i.283; Vin ii.176; Vin v.205; AN iii.274 sq. -paṭivisa a portion of the c. Vin i.263, Vin i.285, Vin i.301 -palibodha an obstacle to the valid performance of the kathina ceremony arising from a set of robes being due to a particular person [a technical term of the canon law. See Vinaya Texts ii.149, 157, 169]. It is one of the two kaṭhinassa palibodhā (c. & āvāsa˚ Vin i.265; Vin v.117, cp. 178; -paviveka (nt.) the seclusion of the robe, i.e. of a non-Buddhist with two other pavivekāni (piṇḍapāta˚ & senāsana˚) at AN i.240 -bhaṅga the distribution of robes Vin iv.284; -bhatta robes & a meal (given to the bh.) Vin iii.265; -bhājaka one who deals out the robes Vin i.285; Vin ii.176 Vin v.205; AN iii.274 sq. (cp. ˚paṭiggāhaka); -bhisī a robe rolled up like a pillow Vin i.287 sq.; -rajju (f.) a rope for (hanging up) the robes; in the Vinaya always combd with ˚vaṃsa (see below); -lūkha (adj.) one who is poorly dressed Pp 53; -vaṃsa a bamboo peg for hanging up a robe (cp. ˚rajju) Vin i.47, Vin i.286; Vin ii.117 Vin ii.121, Vin ii.152, Vin ii.153, Vin ii.209, Vin ii.222; Vin iii.59; Ja i.9; Dhp-a iii.342 -saṅkamanīya (nt.) a robe that ought to be handed over (to its legal owner) Vin iv.282; Vin iv.283.

*Sk. cīvara, prob. = cīra, appld orig. to a dress of bark

Cuṇṇa

1. pp. broken up powdered; only in cpd. ˚vicuṇṇa crushed to bits smashed up, piecemeal Ja i.73; Ja ii.120, Ja ii.159, Ja ii.216; Ja iii.74–⁠2. (nt.) (a) any hard substance ground into a powder dust, sand Ja i.216; Vv-a 65 (paṃsu˚); Pv iii.33 (suvaṇṇa gold-dust; Pv-a 189 = vālikā); DN-a i.245 (id.); Dhs-a 12 ■ (b) esp. “chunam” (Anglo-Ind.) i.e. a plaster of which quicklime & sand are the chief ingredients which is largely used in building, but also applied to the skin as a sort of soap-powder in bathing. Often comb;d with mattikā clay, in distinction of which c. is for delicate use (tender skin), whereas m. for rougher purposes (see Vin i.202); cuṇṇāni bhesajjāni an application of c. Vin i.202Vin i.47 = Vin i.52; Vin ii.220, Vin ii.224 sq. AN i.208; AN iii.25; Ja v.89. cuṇṇa-tela-vālaṇḍupaka Vism 142 (where Asl 115 reads cuṇṇaṃ vā telaṃ vā leḍḍūpaka)- nahāniya˚; DN i.74 = MN iii.92; Pv-a 46; na-hāna Ja ii.403, Ja ii.404gandha -cuṇṇa aromatic (bath) powder Ja i.87, Ja i.290; Ja iii.276; candana˚; id. Mil 13, Mil 18iṭṭhaka˚ plaster (which is rubbed on the head of one to be executed) Pv-a 4, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X, beginning (stanza 5) “piṣṭa-cūrṇâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ‘haṃ paśūkṛtaḥ.”

-cālanī a mortar for the preparation of chunam Vin i.202; -piṇḍa a lump of ch. Vin iii.260; Vin iv.154 sq.

Sk. cūrṇa, pp. of carvati, to chew, to *sqer to cut, break up, as in Lat. caro, Sk. kṛṇāti (cp. kaṭu); cp Lit. kirwis axe, Lat. scrūpus sharp stone, scrupulus scortum. See also calaka2 & cp. Sk. kṣunna of; kṣud to grind, to which prob. P. kuḍḍa

Cuṇṇaka

(adj.) (a) a preparation of chunam, paint (for the face, mukha˚) DN i.7; MN ii.64 = Thag 771; Ja v.302 ■ (b) powder; cuṇṇakajātāni reduced to powder MN iii.92 (aṭṭhikāni) ■ f. ˚ikā in cuṇṇikamaṃsa mince meat Ja i.243.

fr. cuṇṇa

Cuṇṇeti

to grind to powder, to crush; to powder or paint w. chunam Vin ii.107 (mukhaṃ) Ja iv.457 ■ ppr. pass cuṇṇiyamāna being ground Ja vi.185.

Denom. of cuṇṇa

Cuta

1. (adj.) shifted, disappeared, deceased, passed from one existence to another Vin iv.216; Snp 774, Snp 899; Iti 19, Iti 99; Ja i.139, Ja i.205; Pp 17-accuta permanent. not under the sway of Death Ep. of Nibbāna Dhp 225.

2. (n.) in cpd. cutūpapāta disappearance & reappearance, transmigration, Saṃsāra (see cuti) SN ii.67 (āgatigatiyā sati c˚ hoti); AN iii.420; AN iv.178; Dhp-a i.259; usually in phrase sattānaṃ cutûpapāta-ñāṇa the discerning of the saṃsāra of beings DN i.82 = MN i.248; DN iii.111. As cutuppāta at AN ii.183. Cp. jātisaṃsāra-ñāṇa.

pp. of cavati; Sk. cyuta

Cuti

(f.) vanishing, passing away, decease, shifting out of existence (opp. upapatti, cp also gati & āgati) DN i.162; SN ii.3 = SN ii.42; SN iii.53; MN i.49; Snp 643; Dhp 419; Ja i.19, Ja i.434; Vism 292, Vism 460, Vism 554; Dhp-a iv.228.

cp. Sk. cyuti, to cavati

Cudita

(adj.) being urged, receiving blame, being reproved Vin i.173; Vin ii.250; Vin ii.250, Vin ii.251; MN i.95 sq.; AN iii.196 sq. -˚ka id. Vin v.115, Vin v.158, Vin v.161, Vin v.164.

pp. of codati

Cuddasa

fourteen Ja i.71; Ja vi.8; Mil 12; Dhp-a iii.120, Dhp-a iii.186.

contracted fr. catuddasa, Sk. caturdaśa, cp. catur

Cunda

an artist who works in ivory Ja vi.261 (Com: dantakāra); Mil 331.

Cundakāra

a turner Ja vi.339.

Cumbaṭa

(nt.) (a) a coil; a pad of cloth, a pillow Ja i.53 (dukūla˚); ii.21 (id.); Vv-a 73 ■ (b) a wreath Ja iii.87. Cp. next.

cp. Prk. cumbhala

Cumbaṭaka

(nt.) cumbaṭa, viz. (a) a pillow Dhp-a i.139; Vv-a 33, Vv-a 165 ■ (b) a wreath Ja iv.231 (puppha˚); Snp-a 137; Dhp-a i.72 (mālā˚).

Cumbati

to kiss Ja ii.193; Ja v.328; Ja vi.291, Ja vi.344; Vv-a 260. Cp. pari˚. Culla & cula;

Sk. cumbati. Dhtp 197 defines as “vadanasaṃyoge”

Culla & cūḷa

(adj.) small, minor (opp mahā great, major), often in conn. with names & titles of books, e.g. c˚ Anāthapiṇḍika = A jr. Ja ii.287, cp Anglo-Indian chota sahīb the younger gentleman (Hind. chhota = culla); or Culla-vagga, the minor section (Vin ii.) as subordinate to Mahā-vagga (Vin i.) Culla-niddesa the minor exposition (following upon Mahā-niddesa); culla-sīla the siṃple precepts of ethics (opp. mahā˚ the detailed sīla) DN i.5, etc. Otherwise only in cpds.:

-aṅgulī little finger Dhp-a ii.86. -ūpaṭṭhāka a “lesser follower, i.e. a personal attendant (of a thera) Ja i.108 (cūl˚); ii.325 (cull˚; Dhp-a i.135; Dhp-a ii.260; cūḷ); -pitā an uncle (“lesser” father = sort of father, cp. Lat matertera, patruus, Ger. Vetter = father jun.) Ja ii.5 Ja iii.456 (v.l. petteyya); Pv-a 107; Dhp-a i.221 (cūḷa˚).

Sk. kṣulla = kṣudra (P. khudda, see khuddaka), with c: k = cuṇṇa: kṣud

Cullāsīti

eighty-four Ja vi.226 (mahākappe as duration of Saṃsāra); Pv-a 254 (id.). Also as cūḷāsīti q.v.

= caturāsīti

Cūlikā

(f.) = cūḷa; kaṇṇa˚; the root of the ear Ja ii.276; Vism 249, Vism 255; Dhp-a iv.13 (of an elephant). ˚baddha SN ii.182; KS ii.122. See also cūḷā.

Sk. cūlikā, cp. cūḍā

Cūḷa

1. swelling, protuberance; root, knot, crest. As kaṇṇa-cūḷa the root of an elephant’s ear Ja vi.488. aḍḍha-cūḷa a measure (see aḍḍha). See also cūlikā.

2. (adj.) see culla.

Sk. cūḍa & cūlikā

Cūḷaka

(adj.) having a cūḷa or top-knot; pañca˚; with five top-knots Ja v.250 (of a boy).

fr. cūḷā

Cūḷanikā

(f.) only in phrase sahassi cūḷanikā lokadhātu “the system of the 1,000 lesser worlds” (distinguished from the dvi-sahassī majjhimakā & the ti-sahassī mahāsahassi lokadhātu) AN i.227; Nd ii.235, Nd ii.2b.

Der. fr. culla, q.v.

Cūḷā

(f.) = cūḷa, usually in sense of crest only, esp. denoting the lock of hair left on the crown of the head when the rest of the head is shaved (cp. Anglo-Indian chuḍā & Gujarāti choṭali) Ja i.64 Ja i.462; Ja v.153, Ja v.249 (pañcacūḷā kumārā); Dhp-a i.294; as mark of distinction of a king Ja iii.211; Ja v.187; of a servant Ja vi.135 ■ a cock’s comb Ja ii.410; Ja iii.265.

-maṇi (m.) a jewel worn in a crest or diadem, a jewelled crest Ja i.65; Ja ii.122; Ja v.441.

Vedic cūḍā. to cūḍa

Cūḷāsīti

for cullāsīti at Thig 51.

Ce

conditional particle “if,” constructed either with Indicative (ito ce pi yojanasate viharati even if he lived 100 y. from here DN i.117) or Conditional (tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā DN i.3), or Potential (passe ce vipulaṃ sukhaṃ Dhp 290) ■ Always enclitic (like Lat. que) & as a rule placed after the emphasized word at the beginning of the sentence: puññañ ce puriso kayirā Dhp 118; brāhmaṇo ce tvaṃ brūsi Snp 457. Usually added to pronouns or pron. adverbs ahañ ce va kho pana ceteyyaṃ DN i.185; ettha ce te mano atthi SN i.116, or combd with other particles, as noce, yañce, sace (q.v.). Freq. also in combn with other indef. interrog. or emphatic particles, as ce va kho pana if then, if now: ahañ ce va kho pana pañhaṃ puccheyyaṃ DN i.117; ahañ ce va kho pana abhivādeyyaṃ DN i.125; api (pi) ce even if: api ce vassasataṃ jīve mānavo Snp 589.

Vedic ced; ce = Lat. que in absque, ne-c, etc., Goth. h in ni-h. see also ca 3

Cecca

= cicca (equal to sañcicca), ger. of cinteti, corresp. to either *cetya or *cintya [ cint ]; only in ster def. jānanto sañjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā Vin ii.91 Vin iii.73, Vin iii.112; Vin iv.290.

cet

Ceṭa

a servant, a boy Ja iii.478. See next.

Ceṭaka

a servant, a slave, a (bad) fellow Vin iv.66; ] ii.176 = Dhp-a iv.92 (duṭṭha˚ miserable fellow); iii.281 iv.82 (bhātika-ceṭakā rascals of brothers); v.385; Mil 222.

Cetaka

a decoy-bird (Com. dīpaka-tittira, exciting partridge) Ja iii.357.

Cetakedu

a kind of bird Ja vi.538. See also cela˚.

Cetanaka

(adj.) connected with a thought or intention Ja vi.304; usually in ; without a thought unintentional Ja ii.375; Ja vi.178; Vb 419.

see cetanā

Cetanā

state of ceto in action, thinking as active thought, intention, purpose, will Defined as action (kamma: AN iii.415; cp. KV. viii.9 § 38 untraced quotation; cp. AN v.292). Often combd w. patthanā & paṇidhi (wish & aspiration), e.g. SN ii.99 SN ii.154; AN i.32, AN i.224; AN v.212; Nd ii.112 (in def. of asucimanussā people of ignoble action: asuciyā cetanāya patthanāya, paṇidhinā samannāgatā). Also classed with these in a larger group in KV., e.g. 343, 380-Combd w. vedanā saññā c. citta phassa manasikāra in def. of nāmakāya (opp. rūpakāya) SN ii.3 (without citta), Pts i.183 (do.); Ne 77, Ne 78 ■ Enumd under the four blessings of vatthu, paccaya, c., guṇātireka (-sampadā) & def. as “cetanāya somanassa-sahagatañāṇa-sampayutta-bhāvo” at Dhp-a iii.94 ■ C. is opposed to cetasika (i.e. ceto) in its determination of the 7 items of good conduct (see sīla) which refers to actions of the body (or are wilful, called cetanākamma Ne 43, Ne 96; otherwise distinguished as kāya-& vacīkammantā A; v.292 sq.), whereas the 3 last items (sīla 8–⁠10) refer to the behaviour of the mind (cetasikakamma Nett., mano-kammanta A), viz. the shrinking back from covetousness, malice, & wrong views.; Vin iii.112; SN iii.60; AN ii.232 (kaṇhassa kammassa pahānāya cetanā: intention to give up wrong-doing) Vv-a 72 (vadhaka-cetanā wilful murder); maraṇacetanā intention of death Dhp-a i.20; āhār’ āsā cetanā intention consisting in deśire for food Vism 537. Pv-a 8, Pv-a 30 (pariccāga˚ intention to give); Pp 12; Mil 94; Sdhp 52, Sdhp 72 ■ In scholastic lgg. often expld as cetanā sañcetanā sañcetayitatta (viz. state or behaviour of volition) Dhs 5; Vb 285 ■ Cp. Dhs 58 (+ citta); Vb 401 (id.); Vb 40, Vb 403; Vism 463 (cetayatī ti cetanā; abhisandahatī ti attho).

f. abstr. fr. cet, see cinteti

Cetayita

intended AN v.187; Mil 62.

pp. of ceteti, see cinteti

Cetasa1

Name of a tree, perhaps the yellow Myrobalan Ja v.420.

Cetasa2

(adj.) only in-˚: sucetasa of a good mind, good-hearted SN i.4 = SN i.29, SN i.46 = SN i.52; paraphrased by Buddhaghosa as sundaracetasa; pāpa˚ of a wicked mind, evil-minded SN i.70 = SN i.98; a˚ without mind SN i.198; sabba˚; all-hearted, with all one’s mind or heart, in phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā sabbacetaso samannāharitva ohitasoto (of one paying careful & proper attention) SN i.112 sq. = 189, 220; AN ii.116; AN iii.163, AN iii.402; AN iv.167. The editors have often misunderstood the phrase & we freq. find vv.ll. with sabbaṃ cetaso & sabbaṃ cetasā-appamāṇa˚ SN iv.186; avyāpanna˚ SN v.74.

orig. the geName of ceto used as nominative

Cetasika

(adj.) belonging to ceto, mental (opp. kāyika physical). Kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ → cetasikaṃ s. AN i.81; SN v.209; kāyikā darathā → c. d. MN iii.287, MN iii.288; c. duk khaṃ DN ii.306; AN i.157; c. roga Ja iii.337. c. kamma is sīla 8–⁠10 (see under cetanā) Ne 43 ■ As n combd with citta it is to be taken as supplementing it, viz. mind & all that belongs to it, mind and mental properties, adjuncts, co-efficients (cp. vitakka-vicāra sach cpds. as phalâphala, bhavâbhava) DN i.213; see also citta. Occurring in the Nikāyas in sg. only, it came to be used in pl. and, as an ultimate category, the 52 cetasikas, with citta as bare consciousness, practically superseded in mental analysis, the 5 khandha-category See Cpd. p. 1 and pt. II. Mrs. Rh. D., Bud. Psy. 6 148, 175. -˚cetasikā dhammā Pts i.84; Vb 421; Dhs 3 Dhs 18, etc. (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 6, 148).

Cetaso

gen. sg. of ceto, functioning as gen. to citta (see citta & ceto).;

Cetāpana

(nt.) barter Vin iii.216, see also Vin. Texts i.22 & Kacc. 322.;

see cetāpeti; cp. BSk. cetanika

Cetāpeti

to get in exchange, to barter, buy Vin iii.216 (expld by parivatteti), 237; iv.250.

Caus. of *cetati to ci, collect; see also Kern, Toev. s. v.

Cetiya

(nt.) 1. a tumulus, sepulchral monument, cairn, MN i.20; Dhp 188; Ja i.237; Ja vi.173; Snp-a 194 (dhātu-gharaṃ katvā cetiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpesuṃ); Kp-a 221; Dhp-a iii.29 (dhātu˚) iv. 64; Vv-a 142; Sdhp 428, Sdhp 430. Pre-Buddhistic cetiyas mentioned by name are Aggāḷava˚ Vin ii.172; SN i.185; Snp p.59; Dhp-a iii.170; Ānanda˚ DN ii.123, DN ii.126; Udena˚ DN ii.102, DN ii.118; DN iii.9; Dhp-a iii.246; Gotama (ka) ibid.; Cāpāla˚ DN ii.102, DN ii.118; SN v.250; Ma-kuṭabandhana˚ DN ii.160; Bahuputta˚ DN ii.102, DN ii.118; DN iii.10; SN ii.220; AN iv.16; Sattambaka˚ DN ii.102, DN ii.118; Sārandada DN ii.118, DN ii.175; AN iii.167; Supatiṭṭha˚ Vin i.35.

-aṅgaṇa the open space round a Cetiya Mil 366 Vism 144, Vism 188, Vism 392; DN-a i.191, DN-a i.197; Vv-a 254. -vandanā Cetiya worship Vism 299.

cp. from ci, to heap up, cp. citi, cināti

Ceteti

see cinteti.

Ceto

(nt.) = citta, q.v. for detail concerning derivation, inflexion & meaning. Cp. also cinteti.; Only the gen. cetaso & the instr.; cetasā are in use besides these there is an adj. cetaso, der. from nom base cetas. Another adj ■ form is the inflected nom ceto, occurring only in viceto SN v.447 (+ ummatto, out of mind).

I. Ceto in its relation to similar terms: (a) with kāya & vācā: kāyena vācāya cetasā (with hand speech & heart) Snp 232; Kh IX. kāya (vācā˚, ceto˚-muni a saint in action, speech & thought AN i.273 Nd ii.514. In this phrase the Nd has mano˚ for ceto˚ which is also aN v.l. at A-passage ■ (b) with paññā (see citta iv. b) in ceto-vimutti, paññā-vimutti (see below iv.) ■ (c) with samādhi, pīti, sukha, etc.: see ˚pharaṇatā below.

II. Cetaso (gen.) (a) heart. c˚ upakkilesa (stain of h.) DN iii.49, DN iii.101; SN v.93. līnatta (attachment) SN v.64. appasāda (unfaith) SN i.179; ekodibhāva (singleness) DN iii.78; SN iv.236 (see 2nd jhāna); āvaraṇāni (hindrances) S 66 ■ vimokkha (redemption) SN i.159 santi (tranquillity) Snp 584, Snp 593. vūpasama (id. AN i.4; SN v.65. vinibandha (freedom) DN iii.238; AN iii.249; AN iv.461 sq ■ (b) mind. c˚ vikkhepa (disturbance) AN iii.448; AN v.149: uttrāsa (fear) Vb 367. abhiniropanā (application) Dhs 7 ■ (c) thought. in c˚ parivitakko udapādi “there arose a reflection in me (gen.) SN i.139; SN ii.273; SN iii.96, SN iii.103.

III. Cetasā (instr.)-(a) heart. mettā-sahagatena c (with a h. full of love) freq. in phrase ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā etc. e.g. DN i.186, DN iii.78, DN iii.223; SN iv.296; AN i.183 AN ii.129; AN iv.390; AN v.299, AN v.344; Vb 272. ujubhūtena (upright) SN ii.279; AN i.63; vivaṭena (open) DN iii.223; SN v.263; AN iv.86. macchera-maḷa-pariyuṭṭhitena (in which has arisen the dirt of selfishness) SN iv.240; AN ii.58. santim pappuyya c. SN i.212. taṇhādhipateyyena (standing under the sway of thirst) SN iii.103-vippasannena (devout) SN i.32 = SN i.57, SN i.100; Dhp 79; Pv i.1010. muttena AN iv.244. vimariyādi-katena SN iii.31 vigatâbhijjhena DN iii.49. pathavī-āpo etc ■ samena AN iv.375 sq. ākāsasamena AN iii.315 sq. sabba˚ SN ii.220 abhijjhā-sahagatena AN i.206. satārakkhena DN iii.269; AN v.30 ■ migabhūtena cetasā, with the heart of a wild creature MN i.450 ■ acetasā without feeling heartlessly Ja iv.52, Ja iv.57 ■ (b) mind: in two phrases viz. (α) c. anuvitakketi anuvicāreti “to ponder & think over in one’s mind” DN iii.242; AN i.264; AN iii.178; (β) c. pajānāti (or manasikaroti) “to know in one’s mind,” in the foll. expressions: para-sattānaṃ para-puggalānaṃ cetasā ceto-paricca pajānāti “he knows in his mind the ways of thought (the state of heart) of other beings” (see ceto-paricca & ˚pariyāya) MN ii.19; SN ii.121, SN ii.213; SN v.265; AN i.255 = AN iii.17 = AN iii.280. puggalaṃ paduṭṭha-cittaṃ evaṃ c˚ ceto-paricca p. Iti 12, cp. 13 Arahanto… Bhagavanto c˚ cetoparicca viditā DN iii.100. para-cittapariyāya kusalo evaṃ c˚ ceto paricca manasikaroti AN v.160. Bhagavā [brāhmaṇassa c˚ ceto-parivitakkaṃ aññāya “perceiving in his mind the thought of [the b.]SN i.178; DN iii.6; AN iii.374; Mil 10.

IV. Cpds. -khila fallowness, waste of heart or mind usually as pañca c-khilā, viz. arising from doubt in the Master, the Norm, the Community, or the Teaching or from anger against one’s fellow-disciples, DN iii.237 DN iii.278; MN i.101; AN iii.248 = AN iv.460 = AN v.17; Ja iii.291; Vb 377; Vism 211. -paṇidhi resolution, intention, aspiration Vv 4712 (= cittassa samma-d-eva ṭhapanaṃ Vv-a 203) Mil 129; -padosa corruption of the h., wickedness AN i.8; Iti 12, Iti 13 (opp. pasāda): -paricca “as regards the heart,” i.e. state of heart, ways of thought, character mind (= pariyāya) in ˚ñāṇa Thig 71 = Thig 227 (expld at Thag-a 76, Thag-a 197 by cetopariyañāṇa) see phrase cetasā c-p above (iii. b.); -pariyāya the ways of the heart (= paricca), in para-ceto-pariyāya-kusalo “an expert in the ways of others’ hearts” AN v.160; c ■ p-kovido encompassing the heart of others SN i.146, SN i.194 = Thag 1248; i.196 = Thag 1262. Also with syncope: ˚pariyañāṇa DN i.79; DN iii.100; Vism 431; DN-a i.223. -parivitakka reflecting, reasoning SN i.103, SN i.178; -pharaṇatā the breaking forth or the effulgence of heart, as one of five ideals to be pursued, viz. samādhi, pīti-pharaṇatā sukha˚, ceto˚, āloka˚ DN iii.278; -vasippatta mastery over one’s h. AN ii.6, AN ii.36, AN ii.185; AN iv.312; MN i.377; Vism 382; Mil 82, Mil 85; -vimutti emancipation of h. (always w paññā-vimutti), which follows out of the destruction of the intoxications of the heart (āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavā c ■ v.) Vin i.11 (akuppā); DN i.156, DN i.167, DN i.251; DN iii.78, DN iii.108 DN iii.248 (muditā); SN ii.265 (mettā); MN i.197 (akuppā), 205 296; iii.145 (appamāṇā, mahaggatā); AN i.124; AN ii.6 AN ii.36; AN iii.84; Snp 725, Snp 727 = Iti 106; Iti 20 (mettā), 75, 97 Pp 27, Pp 62; Vb 86 (mettā) Ne 81 (virāgā); DN-a i.313 (= cittavimutti); -vivaraṇa setting the h. free AN iv.352 AN v.67. See also arahant II D. -samatha calm of h Thig 118; -samādhi concentration of mind (= cittasamādhi DN-a i.104) DN i.15; iii. 30; SN iv.297; AN ii.54 AN iii.51; -samphassa contact with thought Dhs 3.

Sk. cetas

Cela

(nt.) cloth, esp. clothes worn, garment, dress AN i.206; Pv ii.127 (kañcanā˚ for kañcana˚); iii.93 (for veḷa); dhāti˚ baby’s napkin Ja iii.539. In simile of one whose clothes are on fire (āditta˚ + ādittasīsa) SN v.440; AN ii.93; AN iii.307; AN iv.320-acela a naked ascetic DN i.161, DN i.165≈; Ja v.75; Ja vi.222.

-aṇḍaka (v.l. aṇḍuka) a loincloth MN i.150; -ukkhepa waving of garments (as sign of applause), usually with sādhukāra Ja i.54; Ja ii.253; Ja iii.285; Ja v.67; Dhp-a ii.43; Snp-a ii.225; Vv-a 132, Vv-a 140; -paṭṭikā (not ˚pattika) a bandage of cloth, a turban Vin ii.128 (Bdhgh. celasandhara); MN ii.93; Dhp-a iii.136; -vitāna an awning Ja i.178; Ja ii.289; Ja iv.378; Mhbv 122; Vism 108.

Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. cela

Celaka

1. one who is clothed; acelaka without clothes DN i.166; MN i.77.

2. a standard-bearer DN i.51; DN-a i.156; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; Mil 331.

cp. Sk. ceḍaka P. ceṭa & in meaning E. knight → Ger. knecht; knave → knabe, knappe

Celakedu

= cetakedu Ja vi.538.

Celāpaka

= celāvaka Ja v.418.

Celāvaka

a kind of bird Ja vi.538 (Com. celabaka; is it celā bakā?); Ja v.416. See also celāpaka.

cp. Sk. chilla?

Cokkha

(adj.) clean Ja iii.21; ˚bhāva cleanliness MN i.39 (= visuddhibhāva; to be read for T mokkha˚? See Trenckner’s note on p. 530).

Cp. Sk. cokṣa

Coca

(nt.) the cocoa-nut or banana, or cinnamon Ja v.420 (˚vana); -˚pāna a sweet drink of banana or cocoa-nut milk Vin i.246.

Both derivation & meaning uncertain. The word is certainly not Aryan. See the note at; Vinaya Texts ii.132

Codaka

(adj.) one who rebukes; exhorting, reproving Vin i.173; Vin ii.248 sq.; Vin v.158, Vin v.159 etc.; SN i.63; MN i.95 sq.; DN iii.236; AN i.53; AN iii.196; AN iv.193 sq. DN-a i.40.

to codeti

Codanā

(f.) reproof, exhortation DN i.230; DN iii.218; AN iii.352; Vin V.158, 159; Vism 276 ■ As ttg in codan’ atthe nipāto an exhortative particle Ja vi.211 (for ingha); Vv-a 237 (id.); Pv-a 88 v.l. (for handa).

see codeti

Codita

urged, exhorted, incited; questioned Snp 819; Ja vi.256; Pv ii.966; Vv 161; Pv-a 152; Sdhp 309.

pp. of codeti, q.v.

Codetar

one who reproves, one who exacts blame, etc. Vin v.184.

n. ag. to codeti

Codeti

aor. acodayi (Ja v.112), inf. codetuṃ, grd. codetabba; Pass. cujjati & codiyati; pp. cudita & codita (q.v.): Caus.; codāpeti (Vin. iii.165) to urge, incite, exhort; to reprove, reprimand, to call forth, to question; in spec. sense to demand payment of a debt (J vi.69 iṇaṃ codetvā 245; Snp 120 iṇaṃ cujjamāna being pressed to pay up Pv-a 3 iṇayikehi codiyamāna) DN i.230; Vin i.43 (āpattiyā c. to reprove for an offence), 114, 170 sq. 322 sq.; ii.2 sq., 80 sq.; iii.164, etc.; Ja v.112; Dhp 379; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 74.

Vedic codati & codayati, from; cud

Copana

(nt.) moving, stirring Dhp-a iv.85; Dhs-a 92, Dhs-a 240, Dhs-a 323.

cup, copati to stir, rel. to kup, see kuppati

Cora

a thief, a robber Vin i.74, Vin i.75, Vin i.88, Vin i.149; SN ii.100, SN ii.128 = AN ii.240; SN ii.188 (gāmaghāta, etc.); iv.173; MN ii.74 = Thag 786; AN i.48; AN ii.121 sq.; AN iv.92, AN iv.278; Snp 135, Snp 616, Snp 652; Ja i.264 (˚rājā, the robber king); ii.104; iii.84; Mil 20; Vism 180 (sah’ oḍḍha c.), 314 (in simile), 489 (rāja-puris ânubandha˚, in comparison), 569 (andhakāre corassa hattha-pasāraṇaṃ viya); Dhp-a ii.30; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 274- mahā˚; a great robber Vin iii.89; DN iii.203; AN i.153 AN iii.128; AN iv.339; Mil 185 ■ Often used in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87.

-āṭavi wood of robbers Vism 190; -upaddava an attack from robbers Ja i.267; -kathā talk about thieves (one of the forbidden pastimes, see kathā) DN i.7 = Vin i.188≈; -ghātaka an executioner AN ii.207; Ja iii.178 Ja iv.447; Ja v.303; Pv-a 5.

cur, corayati to steal; Dhtp 530 = theyye

Coraka

a plant used for the preparation of perfume Ja vi.537.

cp. Sk. coraka

Corikā

f. thieving, theft Vin i.208; Ja iii.508; Mil 158; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 86, Pv-a 192; Vv-a 72 (= theyyā).

Corī

(f.) a female thief Vin iv.276; Ja ii.363; (adj.) thievish, deceitful Ja i.295dāraka˚; a female kidnapper Ja vi.337.

Corovassikaṃ

at Nd ii.40 (p. 85) read terovassikaṃ (as SN iv.185).

Cola

(& coḷa) a piece of cloth, a rag SN i.34; Ja iv.380; Mil 169; Pv-a 73; Sdhp 396. -bhisi a mat spread with a piece of cloth (as a seat) Vin iv.40. duccola clad in rags, badly dressed Vin i.109; Vin iii.263.

Cp. Sk. coḍa

Colaka

(& coḷaka) = cola Vin i.48, Vin i.296; Vin ii.113, Vin ii.151, Vin ii.174, Vin ii.208, Vin ii.225; Pv ii.17; Mil 53 (bark for tinder?); Dhp-a ii.173.

Ch. Cha & Chal

Ch

Cha & Chaḷ

(cha in composition effects gemination of consonant, e.g. chabbīsati = cha + vīsati, chabbaṇṇa cha + vaṇṇa, chaḷ only before vowels in compn chaḷanga, chaḷ-abhiññā) the number six.

Cases: nom. cha, gen. channaṃ, instr. chahi (chambhī (?) Ja iv.310, which should be chambhi & prob chabbhi = ṣaḍbhiḥ; see also chambhī), loc. chasu (chassu), num. ord. chaṭṭha the sixth. Cp. also saṭṭhi (60) soḷasa (16). Six is applied whenever a “major set is concerned (see 2), as in the foll.: 6 munis are distinguished at Nd ii.514 (in pairs of 3: see muni); 6 bhikkhus as a “clique” (see chabaggiya, cp. the Vestal virgins in Rome, 6 in number); 6 are the sciences of the Veda (see chaḷanga); there are 6 buddha-dhammā (Nd ii.466) 6 viññāṇakāyā (see upadhi); 6 senses & sense-organs (see āyatana)-cha dānasālā Ja i.282; oraṃ chahi māsehi kālakiriyā bhavissati (l shall die in 6 months, i.e. not just yet, but very soon, after the “next” moon) Pv iv.335. Six bodily faults Ja i.394 (viz. too long, too short too thin, too fat, too black, too white). Six thousand Gandhabbas Ja ii.334.

-aṃsa six-cornered Dhs 617. -aṅga the set of six Vedāngas, disciplines of Vedic science, viz. 1. kappa 2. vyākaraṇā, 3. nirutti, 4. sikkhā, 5. chando (viciti) 6. jotisattha (thus enumd at Vv-a 265; at Pv-a 97 in sequence 4, 1, 3, 2, 6, 5): DN iii.269; Vv 6316; Pv ii.613 Mil 178, Mil 236. With ref. to the upekkhās, one is called the “one of six parts” (chaḷ-ang’ upekkhā) Vism 160 -abhiññā the 6 branches of higher knowledge Vin ii.161 Pp 14. See abhiññā. -āsīti eighty-six [i.e. twice that many in all directions: psychologically 6 X 80 6 X (4 X 2)10], of people: an immense number, millions Pv ii.137: of Petas Pv-a 212; of sufferings in Niraya Pv iii.106. -āhaṃ for six days Ja iii.471. -kaṇṇa heard by six ears, i.e. public (opp. catukaṇṇa) Ja vi.392 -tiṃsa(ti) thirty-six AN ii.3; Iti 15; Dhp 339; Dhp-a iii.211 Dhp-a iii.224 (˚yojana-parimaṇḍala); iv.48. -danta having six

tusks, in ˚daha Name of one of the Great Lakes of the Himavant (satta-mahā-sarā), lit. lake of the elephant with 6 tusks. cp. cha-visāṇa Vism 416. -dvārika entering through six doors (i.e. the senses) Dhp-a iv.221 (taṇhā). -dhātura (= dhātuya) consisting of six elements MN iii.239. -pañca (chappañca) six or five Mil 292. -phass’ āyatana having six seats of contact (i.e. the outer senses) MN iii.239; Thag 755; Pv-a 52 cp. Snp 169. -baṇṇa (= vaṇṇa) consisting of six colours (of raṃsi, rays) Ja v.40; Dhp-a i.249; Dhp-a ii.41; Dhp-a iv.99. -baggiya (= vaggiya) forming a group of six, a set of (sinful Bhikkhus taken as exemplification of trespassing the rules of the Vinaya (cp. Oldenberg, Buddha 7384) Their names are Assaji, Punabhasu, Paṇḍuka, Lohitaka, Mettiya, Bhummajaka Vin ii.1, Vin ii.77, and passim Ja ii.387; Dhp-a iii.330. -bassāni (= vassāni) six years Ja i.85; Dhp-a iii.195. -bidha (= vidha) sixfold Vism 184 -bisāṇa (= visāṇa) having six (i.e. a “major set”) of tusks (of pre-eminent elephants) Ja v.42 (Nāgarājā), 48 (kuñjara), cp. chaddanta ■ bīsati (= vīsati) twenty-six Dhp-a iv.233 (devalokā). Chakana & Chakana;

Vedic ṣaṣ & ṣaṭ (ṣaḍ = chaḷ) Gr.; ε ̔́ς, Lat. sex, Goth, saihs

Chakana & Chakaṇa

(nt.) the dung of animals Vin i.202; Ja iii.386 (ṇ); v.286; vi.392 (ṇ).

Vedic śakṛt & śakan; Gr. κόπρος; Sk. chagana is later, see Trenckner, Notes 62 n. 16

Chakaṇatī

(f.) = chakana Nd ii.199.

Chakala

a he-goat Ja vi.237; ˚ka ibid. & Vin iii.166 ■ f. chakalī Ja vi.559.

cp. Sk. chagala, from chāga heifer

Chakka

(nt.) [fr. cha) set of six Vism 242 (meda˚ & mutta˚).;

Chakkhattuṃ

(adv.) six times DN ii.198; Dhp-a iii.196.

Sk. ṣaṭkṛtvas

Chaṭṭha

the sixth Snp 171, Snp 437; Dhp-a iii.200: Snp-a 364. Also as chaṭṭhama Snp 101, Snp 103; Ja iii.280.

Chaḍḍaka

(adj.) throwing away, removing, in puppha˚ a flower-rubbish remover (see pukkusa) Thag 620; Vism 194 ■ f. chaḍḍikā see kacavara˚.

Chaḍḍana

(nt.) throwing away, rejecting Ja i.290; Dhtp 571 ■ ī (f.) a shovel, dust-pan Dhp-a iii.7. See kacavara˚

Chaḍḍita

thrown out. vomited; cast away, rejected, left behind SN iii.143; Ja i.91, Ja i.478; Pv ii.23 (= ucchiṭṭhaṃ vantan ti attho Pv-a 80); Vv-a 100; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 185.

pp. of chaddeti

Chaḍḍeti

to spit out, to vomit, throw away; abandon, leave reject Vin 214 sq.; iv.265; MN i.207; SN i.169 (chaṭṭehi wrongly for chaḍḍehi) = Snp p.15; Ja i.61, Ja i.254, Ja i.265, Ja i.292 Ja v.427; Pp 33; Dhp-a i.95 (uṇhaṃ lohitaṃ ch. to kill oneself); ii.101; iii.171; Vv-a 126; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 174 Pv-a 211; Pv-a 255; Mil 15 ■ ger. chaḍḍūna Thig 469 (= chaḍḍetvā Thag-a 284); grd. chaḍḍetabba Vin i.48; Ja ii.2 chaḍḍanīya Mil 252; chaḍḍiya (to be set aside) MN i.12 sq ■ Pass. chaḍḍīyati Pv-a 174 ■ Caus. chaḍḍāpeti to cause to be vomited, to cast off, to evacuate to cause to be deserted Vin iv.265; Ja i.137; Ja iv.139 Ja vi.185, Ja vi.534; Vism 182 ■ pp. chaḍḍita (q.v.) ■ See also kacavara˚

Vedic chardayati & chṛṇatti to vomit; cp. also avaskara excrements & karīsa dung. From; *sqer to eliminate, separate, throw out (Gr. κρίνω, Lat. ex (s)cerno), cp. Gr. σκ ̈ως, Lat. mus(s)cerda, Ags. scearn.

Chaṇa

a festival Ja i.423, Ja i.489 (surā˚), 499; ii.48 (mangala˚), 143, iii.287, 446, 538; iv.115 (surā˚); v.212; vi.221 399 (˚bheri); Dhp-a iii.100 (surā˚), 443 (˚vesa); iv.195; Vv-a 173.

Chaṇaka

the Chaṇaka plant Mil 352; cp. akkhaṇa.

= akkhaṇa? Kern; cp. Sk. *ākhaṇa

Chatta1

(nt.) a sunshade (“parasol” would be misleading. The handle of a chatta is affixed at the circumference, not at the centre as it is in a parasol), a canopy Vin i.152; Vin ii.114; DN i.7≈; ii.15 (seta˚, under which Gotama is seated); Ja i.267 (seta˚); iv.16 v.383; vi.370; Snp 688, Snp 689; Mil 355; Dhp-a i.380 sq. DN-a i.89; Pv-a 47 ■ Esp. as seta˚ the royal canopy, one of the 5 insignia regis (setachatta-pamukhaṃ pañcavidhaṃ rāja-kakudhabhaṇḍaṃ Pv-a 74), see kakudhabhaṇḍa Ja vi.4, Ja vi.223, Ja vi.389; ˚ṃ ussāpeti to unfold the r canopy Pv-a 75; Dhp-a i.161, Dhp-a i.167. See also paṇṇa˚.

-daṇḍa the handle of a sunshade Dhp-a iii.212; -nāḷi the tube or shaft (of reeds or bamboo) used for the making of sunshades MN ii.116; -maṅgala the coronation festival Ja iii.407; Dhp-a iii.307; Vv-a 66.

late Vedic chattra = *chad-tra, covering to chad, see chādati

Chatta2

a pupil, a student Ja ii.428.

cp. Sk. chātra, one who carries his master’s sunshade

Chattaka

(m. nt.) 1. a sun-shade Ja vi.252; Thig 23 (= Thag-a 29 as nickname of sun-shade makers). See also paṇṇa˚.

2. ahi˚; “snake’s sun-shade,” N. for a mushroom: toadstool DN iii.87; Ja ii.95; a mushroom, toadstool Ja ii.95.

Chattiṃsakkhattuṃ

(adv.) thirty-six times Iti 15.

Chada

anything that covers, protects or hides, viz. a cover, an awning DN i.7≈ (sa-uttara˚ but ˚chadana at DN ii.194) ■ a veil in phrase vivaṭacchada “with the veil lifted” thus spelt only at Nd ii.242, Nd ii.593, Dhp-a i.106 (vivattha˚ v.l. vaṭṭa˚) & DN-a i.251 (vivatta˚), otherwise ˚chadda -shelter, clothing in phrase ghāsacchada Pp 51 (see ghāsa & cp. chāda) ■ a hedge Ja vi.60 ■ a wing Th 1 i.108 (citra˚).

cp. chādeti chad = saṃvaraṇe Dhtp 586

Chadana

(nt.) = chada, viz. lit. 1. a cover, covering Ja i.376; Ja v.241.

2. a thatch, a roof Vin ii.154 (various kinds), 195; Ja ii.281; Dhp-a ii.65 (˚piṭṭha) iv.104 (˚assa udaka-patana-ṭṭhāna), 178; Pv-a 55. 3. a leaf, foliage Ja i.87; Thag 527.

4. hair Ja v.202-fig. pretence, camouflage, counterfeiting Snp 89 (= paṭirūpaṃ katvā Snp-a 164); Dhs 1059 = Vb 361 Nd ii.271ii. Dhs reads chandanaṃ & Vb chādanaṃ.;

-iṭṭhikā a tile Dhp-a iv.203.

Vedic chad

Chadda

(nt.) = chada, only in phrase vivattacchadda (or vivaṭa˚) DN i.89; Snp 372, Snp 378, Snp 1003, Snp 1147; DN-a i.251 Nd ii.however & DA read ˚chada expl. by vivaṭa-rāgadosamoha-chadana Snp-a 365.;

Dhtp 590 & Dhtm 820 expl;n a root chadd by “vamane,” thus evidently taking it as an equivalent of chaḍḍ

Chaddhā

sixfold Mil 2.

Sk. ṣaṭśaḥ

Chanda

. 1. impulse, excitement; intention, resolution, will desire for, wish for, delight in (c. loc.). Expld at Vism 466 as “kattu-kāmatāy” adhivacanaṃ; by Dhtp 587 & Dhtm 821 as; chand = icchāyaṃ ■ A. As virtue: dhammapadesu ch. striving after righteousness SN i.202 tibba˚ ardent desire, zeal AN i.229; AN iv.15; kusaladhamma˚ AN iii.441. Often combd with other good qualities, e.g. ch. vāyāma ussāha ussoḷhi AN iv.320 ch. viriya citta vīmaṃsā in set of samādhis (cp. iddhipāda) DN iii.77 (see below), & in cpd. ˚âdhipateyya-kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya chandaṃ janeti vāyamati viriyaṃ ārabhati, etc., see citta; v. 1 dβ. MN ii.174; AN i.174 (ch. vā vāyāmo vā); iii.50 (chandasā instr.); Snp 1026 (+ viriya); Vv 2412 (= kusala˚ Vv-a 116); Ja vi.72; Dhp-a i.14 ■ B. As vice: (a) kinds character of ch ■ With similar expressions: (kāya-ch. sneha anvayatā MN i.500 ■ ch. dosa moha bhaya DN iii.182; Nd ii.3372 (See also below chandâgati). Its nearest analogue in this sense is rāga (lust), e.g. ch rāga dosa paṭigha DN i.25 (cp. DN-a i.116); rūpesu uppajjati ch. vā rāgo SN iv.195. See below ˚rāga. In this bad sense it is nearly the same as kāma (see kāma kāmachanda: sensual desire, cp. Dhs-a 370, Vism 466 & Mrs. Rh. D. in; Dhs trsl. 292) & the comb;n kāmachanda is only an enlarged term of kāma. Kāye chanda “delight in the body” MN i.500; Snp 203. bhave ch. (pleasure in existence) Thig 14 (cp. bhavachanda) lokasmiṃ ch. (hankering after the world) Snp 866; methunasmiṃ (sexual desire) Snp 835 (expl. by ch. vā rāgo vā peman Nd i.181) ■ Ch. in this quality is one of the roots of misery: cittass’ upakkileso SN iii.232 sq.v.92; mūlaṃ dukkhassa Ja iv.328 sq ■ Other passages illustrating ch. are e.g. vyāpāda˚ & vihiṃsā˚ SN ii.151 rūpa-dhātuyā˚ SN iii.10; SN iv.72; yaṃ aniccaṃ, etc.… tattha˚ SN iii.122, SN iii.177; SN iv.145 sq.; asmī ti ch. SN iii.130 atilīno ch. SN v.277 sq., cp. also DN ii.277 ■ (b) the emancipation from ch. as necessary for the attainment of Arahantship ■ vigata˚ (free from excitement) and a˚ SN i.111; SN iii.7, SN iii.107, SN iii.190; SN iv.387; AN ii.173 sq.; DN iii.238; ettha chandaṃ virājetvā Snp 171 = SN i.16. Kāye chandaṃ virājaye Snp 203. (a)vīta˚ AN iv.461 sq. ˚ṃ vineti SN i.22, SN i.197; ˚ṃ vinodeti SN i.186; ch. suppaṭivinīta SN ii.283. na tamhi ˚ṃ kayirātha Dhp 117. 2. (in the monastic law) consent, declaration of consent (to an official act: kamma) by an absentee Vin i.121 Vin i.122. dhammikānaṃ kammānaṃ chandaṃ datvā having given (his) consent to valid proceedings Vin iv.151, Vin iv.152 cp. ˚dāyaka ii.94 ■ Note. The commentaries follow the canonical usage of the word without adding any precision to its connotation. See Nd ii.s. v.; Dhs-a 370; Dhp-a i.14, Ja vi.72, Vv-a 77.

-āgati in ˚gamana the wrong way (of behaviour, consisting) in excitement, one of the four agatigamanāni viz. ch˚, dosa˚, moha˚, bhaya˚ DN iii.133, DN iii.228; Vb 376 (see above); -ādhipateyya (adj.) standing under the dominant influence of impulse Dhs 269, Dhs 359, Dhs 529 Vb 288 (+ viriya˚, citta˚, vīmaṃsā˚); -ānunīta led according to one’s own desire SN iv.71; Snp 781; -āraha (adj.) fit to give one’s consent Vin ii.93; Vin v.221; -ja sprung from desire (dukkha) SN i.22; -nānatta the diversity or various ways of impulse or desire SN ii.143 sq.; DN iii.289; Vb 425; -pahāna the giving up of wrong desire SN v.273; -mūlaka (adj.) having its root in excitement AN iv.339; AN v.107; -rāga exciting desire (cp kāmachanda) DN ii.58, DN ii.60; DN iii.289; SN i.198; SN ii.283 iii. 232 sq. (cakkhusmiṃ, etc.); iv.7 sq. 164 (Bhagavato ch-r. n’ atthi), 233; AN i.264 (atīte ch-r-ṭṭhānīyā dhammā); ii.71; iii.73; Nd ii.413; Dhp-a i.334; -samādhi the (right) concentration of good effort, classed under the 4 iddhipādā with viriya˚; citta˚ vīmaṃsā˚ DN iii.77; SN v.268; AN i.39; Vb 216 sq.; Ne 15; -sampadā the blessing of zeal SN v.30.

cp. Vedic and Sk. chanda, and skandh to jump

Chandaka

a voluntary collection (of alms for the Sangha), usually as ˚ṃ saṃharati to make a vol. coll. Vin iv.250; Ja i.422; Ja ii.45, Ja ii.85 (saṃharitvā v.l. BB; text sankaḍḍhitvā), 196, 248; iii.288 (nava˚, a new kind of donation); Cp. BSk. chandaka-bhikṣana Avs vol. ii.227.

Chandatā

(f.) (strong) impulse, will, desire Nd ii.394; Vb 350, Vb 370.

see chanda

Chandavantatā

(f.) = chandatā Vv-a 319.

abstr. to adj. chandavant, chanda + vant

Chandasā

(f.) metrics, prosody Mil 3.

see chando

Chandika

(adj.) having zeal, endeavouring usually as ; without (right) effort, & always comb;d w. anādara & assaddha Pp 13; Vb 341; Pv-a 54 (v.l.), 175.

see chanda

Chandīkata

(adj.) & chandīkatā (f.) (with) right effort, zealous, zeal (adj.) Thag 1029 (chandi˚) (n.) Vb 208.

Chando

(nt.) metre, metrics, prosody, esp. applied to the Vedas Vin ii.139 (chandaso buddhavacanaṃ āropeti to recite in metrical form, or acc. to Bdhgh. in the dialect of the Vedas cp. Vin. Texts iii.150) SN i.38; Snp 568 (Sāvittī chandaso mukhaṃ: the best of Vedic metres).

-viciti prosody Vv-a 265 (enumd as one of the 6 disciplines dealing with the Vedas: see chaḷanga).

Vedic chandas, from skandh, cp. in meaning Sk. pada; Gr. ιἄμβος

Channa1

1. covered Ja iv.293 (vāri˚); vi.432 (padara˚, ceiling); Thag-a 257. 2. thatched (of a hut) Snp 18.

3. concealed, hidden secret Ja ii.58; Ja iv.58 ■ nt. channaṃ a secret place Vin iv.220.

pp. of chad, see chādeti1

Channa2

fit, suitable, proper Vin ii.124 (+ paṭirūpa); iii.128; DN i.91 (+ paṭirūpa); SN i.9; MN i.360; Ja iii.315; Ja v.307 Ja vi.572; Pv ii.1215 (= yutta Pv-a 159).

pp. to chad (chand), chandayati, see chādeti2

Chapaka

name of a low-class tribe Vin iv.203 (= caṇḍāla Bdhgh. on Sekh. 69 at Vin iv.364), f. ˚ī ib.

Chappañca

six or five Mil 292.

cha + pañca

Chab˚

see under cha.

Chamā

(f.) the earth; only in oblique cases, used as adv. Instr. chamā on the ground, to the ground (= ved. kṣamā) MN i.387; DN iii.6; Ja iii.232; Ja iv.285; Ja vi.89, Ja vi.528; Vv 414 (Vv-a 183; bhūmiyaṃ); Thig 17; Thig 112 (Thag-a 116: chamāyaṃ); Pv iv.53 (Pv-a 260: bhūmiyaṃ) ■ loc. chamāyaṃ Vin i.118; AN i.215; Snp 401; Vism 18; Thag-a 116; chamāya Vin ii.214.

from kṣam, cp. khamati. It remains doubtful how the Dhtm (553, 555) came to define the root cham (= kṣam) as 1. hīḷane and 2. adane

Chambhati

to be frightened Dhp-a iv.52 (+ vedhati).

see chambheti

Chambhita

. Only in der. chambhitatta (nt.) the state of being stiff, paralysis, stupefaction consternation, always combd with other expressions of fear, viz. uttāsa SN v.386; bhaya Ja i.345 (where spelled chambhittaṃ); ii.336 (where wrongly expld by sarīracalanaṃ), freq. in phrase bhaya ch. lomahaṃsa (fear stupefaction & horripilation (“gooseflesh”) Vin ii.156; SN i.104; SN i.118; SN i.219; DN i.49 (expld at DN-a i.50 wrongly by sakala-sarīra calanaṃ); Nd ii.470; Mil 23; Vb 367 Vism 187 ■ In other connections at Nd ii.1 (= Dhs 425 Dhs 1118, where thambhitatta instead of ch˚); Dhs 965 (on which see Dhs trsl. 242).

pp. of chambheti

Chambhin

(adj.) immovable, rigid; terrified, paralysed with fear SN i.219; MN i.19; Ja iv.310 (v.l. jambhī, here with ref. to one who is bound (stiff with ropes (pāsasatehi chambhī) which is however taken by com. as instr. of cha & expl;d by chasu ṭhānesu, viz on 4 limbs, body & neck; cp. cha) ■ acchambhin firm steady, undismayed SN i.220; Snp 42; Ja i.71 ■ See chambheti & chambhita.;

see chambheti

Chambheti

to be firm or rigid, fig. to be stiff with fear, paralysed: see chambhin & chambhitatta, Cp. ūrukhambha (under khambha;2).

cp. Sk. skabhnāti & stabhnāti,; skambh, and P. khambha, thambha & khambheti

Challi

bark, bast Dhp-a ii.165; Bdhgh on MV. viii.29.

Sk. challi

Chava

1. a corpse Vin ii.115 (˚sīsassa patta a bowl made out of a skull) See cpds.

2. (adj.) vile, low, miserable, wretched Vin ii.112, Vin ii.188; SN i.66; MN i.374; AN ii.57; Ja iv.263.

-aṭṭhika bones of a corpes, a skeleton C iii.15, 1 (?) -ālāta a torch from a pyre SN iii.93 = AN ii.95 = Iti 90; Ja i.482; Vism 54, Vism 299 (˚ûpama). -kuṭikā a charnelhouse morgue, Vin i.152; -dāhaka one who (officially burns the dead, an “undertaker” Vin i.152; Dhp-a i.68 (f. ˚ikā); Vism 230; Mil 331. -dussa a miserable garment DN i.166≈A i.240; ii.206. -sarīra a corpse Vism 178 sq. -sitta a water pot (see above 1) Thag 127.

Derivation doubtful. Vedic śava

Chavaka

1. a corpse Ja v.449.

2. wretched Mil 156, Mil 200; (˚caṇḍāla, see expln at Ja v.450).

Chavi

(f.) the (outer thin) skin, tegument SN ii.256; AN iv.129; Snp 194; Ja ii.92 Distinguished from camma, the hide (under-skin corium) SN ii.238 (see camma); also in combn ch-cammamaṃsa Vism 235; Dhp-a iv.56.

-kalyāṇa beauty of complexion, one of the 5 beauties (see kalyāṇa 2d) Dhp-a i.387; -dos’-ābādha a skin disease, cutaneous irritation Vin i.206; -roga skin disease Dhp-a iii.295; -vaṇṇa the colour of the skin, the complexion, esp. beautiful compl., beauty Vin i.8; Ja iii.126; Dhp-a iv.72; Pv-a 14 (vaṇṇadhātu), 70, 71 (= vaṇṇa).

*(s)qeu to cover. Vedic chavi, skuṇāti; cp. Gr. σκϋλον; Lat. ob-scurus; Ohg. skūra (Nhg. scheuer) Ags scēo → E. sky also Goth. skōhs → E. shoe

Chāta

(adj.) hungry Ja i.338; Ja ii.301; Ja v.69; Pv ii.113 (= bubhukkhita, khudāya abhibhūta Pv-a 72 ii.936 (jighacchita Pv-a 126); Pv-a 62; Vv-a 76; Mil 253; Mvu vii.24. Cp. pari˚.

-ajjhatta with hungry insides Ja i.345; Ja ii.203; Ja v.338 Ja v.359; Dhp-a i.125; Dhp-a i.367 (chātak’); iii.33, 40. -kāla time of being hungry.

cp. Sk. psāta from bhas (*bhsā), Gr. ψώξω; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sabulum & cp. bhasman probably Non-Aryan

Chātaka

1. adj. hungry Ja i.245, Ja i.266.

2. (nt.) hunger, famine Ja i.266; Ja ii.124, Ja ii.149, Ja ii.367; Ja vi.487; Dhp-a i.170.

fr. prec.

Chātatā

hunger (lit. hungriness) Dhp-a i.170.

f. abstr. fr. chāta

Chādana

(nt.) covering. clothing, often combd with ghāsa˚; food & clothing (q.v.) Ja ii.79 (vattha˚) Pv i.107 (bhojana˚); ii.17 (vattha˚); Pv-a 50 (= vattha) Dhp-a iv.7 ■ As adj. Ja vi.354 (of the thatch of a house).

to chādeti

Chādanā

(f.) covering, concealment Pp 19, Pp 23. Cp. pari˚.

fr. chādeti

Chādi

(f.) shade Ja iv.351.

chādeti1

Chādiya

(nt.) covering (of a house or hut), thatch, straw, hay (for eating) Ja vi.354 (= gehacchādana-tiṇa).

Chādeti1

(a) to cover, to conceal Vin ii.211 (Pass. chādīyati); Snp 1022 (mukhaṃ jivhāya ch.); Dhp 252; Pv iii.43 ■ (b) (of sound) to penetrate, to fill Ja ii.253; Ja vi.195 ■ pp. channa1 (q.v.).

Caus. of chad, Sk. chādayati

Chādeti2

(a) to seem good, to please, to give pleasure SN ii.110; AN iii.54; Dhp-a iii.285 (bhattaṃ me na ch.). (b) to be pleased with, to delight in, to approve of (c acc.) esp. in phrase bhattaṃ chādeti to appreciate the meal Vin ii.138; DN i.72 (= rucceyya); v.31 (chādayamāna), 33 (chādamana), 463; Thig 409; Pv i.118 (nacchādimhamhase), pp. channa2. Chapa & ka;

for chandeti, cp. Sk. chandati & chadayati; to khyā ?

Chāpa & ˚ka

the young of an animal MN i.384 (˚ka); SN ii.269 (bhinka˚); Ja i.460; Ja ii.439 (sakuṇa˚) Mil 402 ■ f. chāpī Ja vi.192 (maṇḍūka˚).

Sk. śāva

Chāyā

(f.) [Vedic chāyā, light & shade,; *skei (cp. (s)qait σκιά & σκοιόςskia/ & skoio/s; Goth. skeinan See note on kāla, vol. ii. p. 382] shade, shadow SN i.72, SN i.93; MN ii.235; MN iii.164; AN ii.114; Snp 1014; Dhp 2; Ja ii.302 Ja iv.304; Ja v.445; Mil 90, Mil 298; Dhp-a i.35; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 45 Pv-a 81, etc ■ Yakkhas have none; Ja v.34; Ja vi.337. chāyā is frequent in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87.

Chārikā

(f.) Ashes Vin i.210; Vin ii.220; DN ii.164 = Ud 93; AN i.209; AN iv.103; Ja iii.447; Ja iv.88; Ja v.144; Dhp-a i.256 Dhp-a ii.68; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 80 (chārikangāra).

Cp. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāra burning; Gr. ςηρός dry, Lat. serenus dry, clear. See also khāra bhasma.

Chiggaḷa

a hole, in eka˚-yuga MN iii.169≈; tāḷa˚ key hole SN iv.290; Vism 394.

cp. chidda

Chida

(always-˚) (adj.) breaking, cutting, destroying MN i.386; SN i.191 = Thag 1234; Thag 521; Thag 1143; Snp 87 (kankha˚) 491, 1021, 1101 (taṇha˚); Vv-a 82 (id.).

Chidda

1. (adj.) having rents or fissures, perforated SN iv.316; Ja i.419; (fig.) faulty defective, Vin i.290.

2. (nt.) a cutting, slit, hole aperture, SN i.43; Ja i.170 (eka˚), 172, 419, 503; ii.244 261; (kaṇṇa˚); Vism 171, Vism 172 (bhitti˚), 174 (tāḷa˚) Snp-a 248 (akkhi˚); Dhp-a iii.42; Vv-a 100 (bhitti˚) Pv-a 180 (kaṇṇa˚), 253 (read chidde for chinde); fig a fault, defect, flaw Dhp 229 (acchidda-vutti faultless conduct) Mil 94.

-āvachidda full of breaches and holes Ja iii.491 Vism 252; Dhp-a i.122, Dhp-a i.284 (cp. ˚vichidda); iii.151 -kārin inconsistent AN ii.187; -vichidda = ˚âvachidda Ja i.419; Ja v.163 (sarīraṃ chiddavichiddaṃ karoti to perforate a body).

cp. Ohg. scetar. For suffix ˚ra, cp. rudhira, etc. Vedic chid + ra. Cp. Sk. chidra

Chiddaka

(adj.) having holes or meshes (of a net) DN i.45.

Chiddatā

(f.) perforation, being perforated Ja i.419.

Chiddavant

(adj.) having faults, full of defects MN i.272.

Chindati

to cut off, to destroy, to remove, both lit. (bandhanaṃ, pāsaṃ, pasibbakaṃ, jīvaṃ, gīvaṃ, sīsaṃ hatthapāde, etc.) and fig. (taṇhaṃ, mohaṃ, āsavā saṃyojanāni, vicikicchaṃ, vanathaṃ, etc.) Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 88 ■ Forms: (1) chid: aor acchidā Snp 357, as acchidaṃ MN ii.35, acchidda Dhp 351 (cp. agamā); Pass. pres. chijjati (Sk. chidyate) Dhp 284; Iti 70; Ja i.167; Thag 1055 = Mil 395; Mil 40; aor chijji Ja iii.181 (dvidhā ch. broke in two) ■ fut. chijjissati Ja i.336 ■ ger. chijjitvā Ja i.202; Ja iv.120 ■ pp chijjita Ja iii.389; see also chida, chidda, chinna. (2) chind: Act. pres. chindati SN i.149 = AN v.174; Snp 657; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 114; Vv-a 123 ■ imper. chinda Snp 346; Ja ii.153; chindatha Dhp 283 ■ pot. chinde Dhp 370 ■ ppr. chindamāna Ja i.70, Ja i.233 ■ fut. chindissati Dhp-a ii.258 ■ aor. acchindi Vin i.88 & chindi Ja i.140 ■ ger. chinditvā Ja i.222, Ja i.254, Ja i.326; Ja ii.155. inf. chindituṃ Vin i.206; Pv-a 253 ■ grd. chindiya Ja ii.139 (duc˚) ■ Caus. chindāpeti Ja ii.104, Ja ii.106; Vism 190 (rājāno core ch.) ■ (3) ched: fut. checchati (Sk chetsyati) MN i.434; Dhp 350; Mil 391 ■ aor. acchecchi (Sk. acchaitsīt) SN i.12; AN ii.249; Snp 355 = Thag 1275; Ja vi.261. acchejji (v.l. of acchecchi) is read at SN iv.205, SN iv.207, SN iv.399; SN v.441; AN iii.246, AN iii.444; Iti 47 ■ inf chetuṃ Ja iv.208; Pv iv.328, & chettuṃ Snp 28 ■ ger; chetvā Snp 66, Snp 545, Snp 622; Dhp 283, Dhp 369; Ja i.255; Nd ii.245 & chetvāna Snp 44; Dhp 346; Ja iii.396 ■ grd. chetabba Vin ii.110, & chejja (often combd w. bhejja, torture & maiming, as punishments) Vin iii.47 (+ bh˚); Ja v.444 (id.) vi.536; Mil 83, Mil 359. Also chejja in neg acchejja S vi.226 ■ Caus. chedeti Vin i.50, & chedāpeti ib.; Ja iv.154. See also cheda, chedana.

Vedic chid in 3 forms viz. 1. (Perf.) base chid; 2. Act. (pres.) base w. nasal infix. chind; 3. Med (denom). base w. guṇa ched. Cp. the analagous formations of cit under cinteti ■ Idg.* sk(h)eid, Gr. σξίζω (E. schism); Lat. scindo (E. scissors); Ohg scīzan; Ags. scītan; cp. also Goth. skaidan, Ohg. sceidan Root chid is defined at Dhtp 382, Dhtp 406 as “dvedhākaraṇa”

Chindanaka

(adj.) breaking, see pari˚.

fr. chindati

Chinna

cut off, destroyed Vin i.71 (acchinna-kesa with unshaven hair); MN i.430; DN ii.8 (˚papañca); Ja i.255; Ja ii.155; Ja iv.138; Dhp 338; Pv i.112 (v.l. for bhinna), 116; Dhp-a iv.48. Very often in punishments of decapitation (sīsa˚) or mutilation (hatthapāda˚, etc.) e.g. Vin i.91; Vin iii.28; Pv ii.24 (ghāna-sīsa˚); Mil 5. Cp. sañ˚. As first part of cpd. chinna˚ very frequently is to be rendered by “without, e.g.

-āsa without hope Ja ii.230; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 174; -iriyāpatha unable to walk, i.e. a cripple Vin i.91; -kaṇṇa without ears Pv-a 151; -gantha untrammelled, unfettered Snp 219; -pilotika with torn rags, or without rags SN ii.28; Pv-a 171 (+ bhinna˚); -bhatta without food i.e. famished starved Ja i.84; Ja v.382; Dhp-a iii.106 = Vv-a 76 -saṃsaya without doubt Snp 1112; Iti 96, Iti 97, Iti 123; Nd ii.244. -sāṭaka a torn garment Vism 51.

pp. of chindati

Chinnaka

(adj.) cut; ; uncut (of cloth) Vin i.297.

fr. chinna

Chinnikā

(f.) deceitful, fraudulent, sly, only in combn w. dhuttā (dhuttikā) & only appl;d to women Vin iii.128 Vin iv.61; Ja ii.114; Mil 122.

Chuddha

thrown away, removed, rejected, contemptible Dhp 41 = Thig 468 (spelled chuṭṭha); Ja v.302.

Sk. kṣubdha (?) kṣubh, perhaps better ṣṭīv, pp. ṣṭyūta (see niṭṭhubhati), cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 66, 120 & Trenckner; Notes p. 75. See also khipita

Chupati

to touch Vin i.191; Vin iii.37, Vin iii.121; Ja iv.82; Ja vi.166; Vism 249; Dhp-a i.166 (mā chupi) ■ pp. chupita.

Dhtp 480 = samphasse

Chupana

(nt.) touching Vin iii.121; Ja vi.387.

Chupita

touched Vin iii.37; Ja vi.218.

pp. of chupati

Chubhati

given as root chubh (for kṣubh ) with def. “nicchubhe” at Dhtm 550. See khobha.

Churikā

(f.) a knife, a dagger, kreese Thig 302; Ja iii.370; Mil 339; cp. Mil trsln. ii.227; Thag-a 227; Dhp-a iii.19.

Sk. kṣurikā to kṣura see khura, cp. chārikā → khara

Churita

: see vi˚.

Cheka

(adj.) 1. clever, skilful, shrewd; skilled in (c. loc.) Vin ii.96; MN i.509; Ja i.290 (anga-vijjāya); ii.161, 403 v.216, 366 (˚pāpaka good & bad); vi.294 (id.); Mil 293.; DN-a i.90; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 215; Dhp-a i.178.

2. genuine Vism 437 (opp. kūṭa).

Chekatā

(f.) skill Vv-a 131.

cheka + tā

Chejja

1. see chindati.

2. one of the 7 notes in the gamut Vv-a 139.

Cheta

an animal living in mountain cliffs, a sort of leopard SN i.198.

Chettar

cutter, destroyer Snp 343; Ja vi.226.

Sk. chettṛ, n-agent to chindati

Cheda

cutting, destruction, loss Snp 367 (˚bandhana); Ja i.419; Ja i.485; sīsa˚; decapitation Dhp-a ii.204; Pv-a 5; aṇḍa˚; castration Ja iv.364;- bhatta ˚ṃ karoti to put on short rations Ja i.156. pada˚; separation of words Snp-a 150. -˚gāmin (adj.) liable to break fragile AN ii.81; Ja v.453 ■ Cp. vi˚.

see chindati

Chedaka

(adj.) cutting; in aṇḍa˚; one who castrates Ja iv.366.

fr. cheda

Chedana

(nt.) cutting, severing, destroying DN i.5; (= DN-a i.80 hattha˚-ādi); iii.176; Vin ii.133; AN ii.209; AN v.206; SN iv.169 (nakha˚); v.473; Mil 86 Vism 102 (˚vadha-bandana, etc.).

see chindati

Chedanaka

1. (adj.) one who tears or cuts off Pv-a 7. - 2. (nt.) the process of getting cut (a cert. penance for offences: in combn with āpattiyo & pācittiyaṃ) Vin ii.307; Vin iv.168, Vin iv.170, Vin iv.171, Vin iv.279; Vin v.133, Vin v.146 (cha ch. āpattiyo).

Cheppā

(f.) tail Vin i.191; Vin iii.21.

J.

Sk. sépa

J

Ja

(-˚) born, produced, sprung or arisen from. Freq. in cpds.: atta˚, ito˚, eka˚, kuto˚, khandha˚, jala˚ daratha˚, dāru˚, di˚, puthuj˚, pubba˚, yoni˚, vāri˚ saha˚, sineha˚.

adj ■ suffix from jan, see janati; cp. ˚ga; gacchati

Jagat

(nt.) the world, the earth AN ii.15, AN ii.17 (jagato gati); SN i.186 (jagatogadha plunged into the world).

Vedic jagat, intens. of gam, see gacchati

Jagatī

(f.) only in cpds. as jagati˚:

-ppadesa a spot in the world Dhp 127 = Pv-a 104 -ruha earth grown, i.e. a tree Ja i.216.

see jagat

Jagga

(nt.) wakefulness SN i.111.

jaggati + ya

Jaggati

(= jāgarati, Dhtp 22 gives jagg as root in meaning “niddā-khaya.”] (a) to watch, to lie awake Ja v.269. (b) to watch over, i.e. to tend, to nourish, rear, bring up Ja i.148 (dārakaṃ), 245 (āsīvisaṃ).

Jaggana

(nt.) watching, tending, bringing up Ja i.148 (dāraka˚).

from jaggati

Jagganatā

(to jāgarati] watchfulness Ja i.10.

Jagghati

to laugh, to deride Ja iii.223; Ja v.436; Ja vi.522. pp. jagghita Ja vi.522. See also anu˚, pa˚.

Intens. to sound-root ghar. for *jaghrati. See note on gala. Kern compares Ved. jakṣati, Intens of hasati (Toev. under anujagghati); Dhtp 31 jaggh hasane

Jagghitā

(f.) laughter Ja iii.226.

Jaghana

(nt.) the loins, the buttocks Vin ii.266; Ja v.203.

Vedic jaghana, cp. Gr. κοξώνη; see janghā

Jaṅgala

(nt.) a rough, sandy & waterless place, jungle A; v.21; Ja iv.71; Vv-a 338. Cp. ujjangala.

Jaṅghā

(f.) the leg, usually the lower leg (from knee to ankle) DN ii.17≈(SN i.16 = Snp 165 (eṇi˚); Snp 610; Ja ii.240; Ja v.42; Ja vi.34; Thag-a 212). In cpds. jangha (except in janghā-vihāra).

-ummagga a tunnel fit for walking Ja vi.428; -pesanika adj. going messages on foot Vin iii.185; Ja ii.82; Mil 370 (˚iya); Vism 17. -bala(ṃ) (nissāya) by means of his leg (lit. by the strength of, cp. Fr. à force de) -magga a footpath Ja ii.251; Ja v.203; Vv-a 194. -vihāra the state of walking about (like a wanderer), usually

in phrase ˚ṃ anucaṅkamati anuvicarati DN i.235; MN i.108 Snp p.105, p. 115; or ˚ṃ carati Pv-a 73AN i.136; Ja ii.272; Ja iv.7, Ja iv.74; Dhp-a iii.141.

Vedic janghā; cp. Av. zanga, ankle; Goth. gaggan, to go; Ags. gang, walk. From *gheṅgh to walk see also jaghana

Jaṅgheyyaka

(nt.) lit. “belonging to the knees”; the kneepiece of a robe Vin i.287.

see janghā

Jacca

(adj.) of birth, by birth (usually -˚) MN ii.47 (ittara˚. of inferior birth); Snp p.80 (kiṃ˚ of what birth, i.e. of what social standing); Ja i.342 (hīna˚ of low birth): Sdhp 416 (id.) Ja v.257 (nihīna˚); Mil 189 (sama˚ of equal rank).

-andha (adj.) blind from birth Ud 62 sq. (Jaccandhavagga vi.4); Ja i.45, Ja i.76; Ja iv.192; Vb 412 sq.; in similes at Vism 544, Vism 596.

jāti + tya

Jaccā

instr. of jāti.

Jajjara

withered, feeble with age Thig 270; Ja i.5, Ja i.59 (jarā˚); Thag-a 212; Pv-a 63 (˚bhāva, state of being old)- ; not fading (cp. amata & ajarāmara), of Nibbāna SN iv.369.

From intensive of jarati

Jajjarita

weakened Dhp-a i.7.

pp. of intens. of jar see jarati

Jañña

(adj.) of (good) birth, excellent, noble, charming, beautiful MN i.30 (jaññajañña, cp. p. 528); Ja ii.417 (= manāpa sādhu). ; Ja ii.436.

= janya, cp. jātya; see kula & koleyyaka

Jaṭa

a handle, only in vāsi˚; (h. of an adze) Vin iv.168; SN iii.154 = AN iv.127.

Jaṭā

(f.) tangle, braid, plaiting, esp. (a) the matted hair as worn by ascetics (see jatila) Snp 249; Dhp 241, Dhp 393; Ja i.12 (ajina + ); ii.272 ■ (b) the tangled branches of trees Ja i.64 ■ (c) (fig.) (the tangle of desire, lust SN i.13 = SN i.165.

-aṇḍuva (= ˚andu?) a chain of braided hair, a matted topknot SN i.117; -ājina braided hair & an antelope’s hide (worn by ascetics) Snp 1010 (˚dhara), cp. above Ja i.12; -dharaṇa the wearing of matted hair MN i.282.

B.Sk. jatā

Jaṭita

entangled SN i.13; Mil 102, Mil 390; Vism 1 (etym.).

pp. of jaṭ; to which also jaṭā; Dhtp 95: sanghāte

Jaṭin

one who wears a jaṭā, an ascetic Snp 689; f. -inī Ja vi.555.

Jaṭila

one who wears a jaṭā, i.e. a braid of hair, or who has his hair matted, an ascetic. Enumd amongst other ʻreligiousʼ as ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā j paribbājakā Nd ii.308; ājīvikā nig˚ j. tāpasā Nd ii.149 Nd ii.513Vin i.24 = Vin iv.108; Vin i.38 (purāṇa˚ who had previously been j.) = Vv-a 13 = Pv-a 22; SN i.78; Snp p.103 Snp p.104 (Keṇiya j.); Ja i.15; Ja ii.382; Ud 6; Dpvs i.38.

BSk. jaṭila

Jaṭilaka

= jaṭila MN i.282; AN iii.276; Mil 202; Vism 382.

Jaṭhara

(m. nt.) [Vedic jaṭhara, to *gelt = *gelbh (see gabbha), cp. Goth. kilpei uterus, Ags. cild = E. child the belly Mil 175. Jannu(ka)

Jaṇṇu(ka)

the knee DN ii.160; Ja vi.332; Snp-a ii.230; Dhp-a i.80 (˚ka); ii.57 (id.), 80; iv.204; Vv-a 206 (jaṇṇu-kappara).

cp. jānu & jannu

Jatu

lac. As medicine Vin i.201 ˚maṭṭhaka a decking with lac. used by women to prevent conception Vin iv.261; consisting of either jatu kaṭṭha (wood), piṭṭha (flour), or mattikā (clay).

Sk. jatu; cp. Lat. bitumen pitch; Ags. cwidu. resin, Ohg. quiti glue

Jattu

(nt.) the collar-bone Dhp-a ii.55 (gloss: aṃsakūṭa); Dāvs iv.49.

Vedic jatru

Jaddhu

only in composition as ; not eating, abstaining from food. ˚ka one who fasts MN i.245; ˚māra death by starvation Ja vi.63 (= anāsaka-maraṇa; Fsb. has note: read ajuṭṭha˚?) ˚mārika AN iv.287 (v.l. ajeṭṭha˚).

for jaddhuṃ, inf. to jakṣ (P. jaggh), corresp. to Sk. jagdhi eating food; intens. of ghasati

Jana

a creature, living being: (a) sg. an individual, a creature person, man Snp 121, Snp 676, Snp 807, Snp 1023 (sabba everybody) Usually collectively: people, they, one (= Fr. on), with pl. of verb Dhp 249 (dadanti); often as mahājana the people, the crowd SN i.115; Ja i.167, Ja i.294; Pv-a 6; lokamahājana = loka Dhp-a iii.175; or as bahu(j)jana many people, the many AN i.68; Dhp 320; Dhp-a iii.175. See also puthujjana ■ (b) pl. men, persons, people, beings nānā˚ various living beings Snp 1102 (expld at Nd ii.248 as khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā gahaṭṭhā pabbajitā devā manussā.) dve janā Ja i.151; Ja ii.105; tayo j. Ja i.63 Ja iii.52; keci janā some people Pv-a 20. See also Snp 243, Snp 598, Snp 1077, Snp 1121.

-ādhipa a king of men Ja ii.369; -inda = prec. Ja iii.280 Ja iii.294; -esabha the leader of men, the best of all people Dhp 255; -kāya a body or group of people Ja i.28; Dhp-a i.33 (dve j.: micchā & sammā-diṭṭhikā); Dpvs i.40 -pada country see sep.; -majjhe (loc.) before (all) the people Ja i.294; Thig 394; -vāda people’s talk, gossip Snp 973.

*gené: see janati. Cp. Gr. γίνος, γόνος; Lat. genus = Fr. gens, to which also similar in meaning

Janaka

1. producing, production Vism 369; adj. (-˚) producing: pasāda˚ Mvu i.4 (= ˚kāraka); a species of karma Vism 601; Cpd. 144 (A.i).

2. n. f ˚ikā genetrix, mother Ja i.16; Dhs 1059≈(where it represents another jānikā, viz. deception, as shown by syn. māyā & B.Sk. janikā Lal. V. 541; Kern, Toev. p. 41).

to janati

Janatā

(f.) a collection of people (“mankind”), congregation, gathering; people, folk DN i.151 (= DN-a i.310, correct jananā), 206; Vin ii.128 = MN ii.93 (pacchimā); AN i.61 (id.); iii.251 (id.); Iti 33; Ja iv.110; Pv iii.57 (= janȧsamūha upāsakagaṇa Pv-a 200).

from janati

Janati1

only in Caus. janeti [Sk. janayati] often spelled jāneti (cp. jaleti: jāleti) & Pass. (intrs.) jāyati to bring forth, produce, cause, syn. sañjaneti nibbatteti abhinibbatteti Nd;2 s. v. (cp. karoti). ussāhaṃ j. to put forth exertion Ja ii.407 (see chanda); (saṃ)vegaṃ j. to stir up emotion (aspiration) Ja iii.184; Pv-a 32; Mvu i.4 dukkhaṃ j. to cause discomfort Pv-a 63 ■ Aor. janayi Thig 162 (Māyā j. Gotamaṃ: she bore) ■ Pp. janita produced Pv-a 1 ■ See also jantu jamma, jāta, jāti ñāti, etc.

Sk. janati (trs.) & jāyate (intrs.); *gene & *gné to (be able to) produce; Gr. γίγνομαι (γένεσις) γνωτός = jāta = (g)nātus; Lat. gigno, natura, natio; Goth knōps & kunps; Cymr. geni, Ags. cennan, Ohg. kind etc.

Janati2

to make a sound Ja vi.64 (= sanati saddaṃ karoti).

Janana

(adj.) producing, causing (-˚) Iti 84 (anattha˚ dosa); Ja iv.141; Dpvs i.2; Dhs-a 258 Dhtp 428 ■ f. jananī Pv-a 1 (saṃvega˚ dẹsanā); mother (cp. janettī) Ja iv.175; Pv-a 79. Note. jananā DN-a i.310 is misprint for janatā.

to janati

Janapada

inhabited country, the country (opp. town or market-place), the continent politically: a province, district, county DN i.136 (opp nigama); ii.349; AN i.160, AN i.178; Snp 422, Snp 683, Snp 995, Snp 1102; Ja i.258; Ja ii.3 (opp. nagara), 139, 300; Pv-a 20, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 111 (province). See also gāma. The 16 provinces of Buddhist India are comprised in the soḷasa mahā-janapadā (Mil 350) enumd at AN i.213 = AN iv.252 sq. = Nd ii.247 (on Snp 1102) as follows: Angā, Magadhā (+ Kālingā Nd2] Kāsī, Kosalā, Vajjī, Mallā, Cetī (Cetiyā AN iv.) Vaṃsā (Vangā AN i.), Kurū, Pañcālā, Majjā (Macchā A) Sūrasenā, Assakā, Avantī, Yonā (Gandhārā A), Kambojā Cp. Rhys Davids, B. India p. 23.

-kathā talk or gossip about the province DN i.7-kalyāṇī a country-beauty, i.e. the most beautiful girl in the province DN i.193 (see kalyāṇa); -cārikā tramping the country Pv-a 14; -tthāvariya stableness, security of the realm, in ˚patta, one who has attained a secure state of his realm, of a Cakkavattin DN i.88; DN ii.16; Snp p.106; -padesa a rural district AN iv.366; AN v.101.

jana + pada, the latter in function of collective noun-abstract: see pada 3

Janavati

(?) AN iv.172.

Janitta

(nt.) birthplace Ja ii.80.

jan + tra, cp. Gr. γενέτειρα

Janettī

(f.) [f. to janitṛ = γενέτως = genitor, cp. genetrix. The Sk. form is janitrī. On e: i cp. petti˚: pitri˚ mother DN ii.7 sq.; MN iii.248; AN iv.276; Ja i.48; Ja ii.381 Ja iv.48.

Jantāghara

1. a (hot room for bathing purposes, a sitzbath Vin i.47, Vin i.139 Vin ii.119, Vin ii.220 sq., 280; iii.55; MN iii.126; Ja ii.25, Ja ii.144 Vism 18; Dpvs viii.45.

2. living room Ja i.449.

acc. to Abhp. 214 = aggisālā, a room in which a fire is kept (viz. for the purpose of a steam bath, i.e. a hot room, cp. in meaning Mhg. kemenate = Lat. caminata Ger. stube = E. stove; Low Ger. pesel (room) Lat. pensile (bath) etc.) Etym. uncertain. Bühler KZ 25, p. 325 = yantra-gṛha (oil-mill?); E. Hardy (D. Lit. Ztg. 1902, p. 339) = jentāka (hot dry bath), cp Vin. Texts i.157; iii.103. In all probability it is a distorted form (by dissimilation or analogy), perhaps of *jhānt-āgāra, to jhā to burn = Sk. kṣā, jhānti heat or heating (= Sk. kṣāti) + āgāra, which latter received the aspiration of the first part (= āghāra), both being reduced in length of vowels = jant-āghara

Janti

at DN-a i.296 in jantiyā (for DN i.135 jāniyā) = hāni, abandonment, giving up, payment, fine. But see jāni.

prob. = jahanti to jahāti

Jantu1

a creature, living being, man, person SN i.48; AN iv.227; Snp 586, Snp 773 sq., 808 1103; Nd ii.249 (= satta, nara, puggala); Dhp 105, Dhp 176 Dhp 341, Dhp 395; Ja i.202; Ja ii.415; Ja v.495; Pv ii.949 (= sattanikāya, people, a crowd Pv-a 134).

Vedic jantu, see janati

Jantu2

a grass Vin i.196.

Jannu

the knee Dhp-a i.394. -˚ka DN ii.17≈(in marks of a Mahāpurisa, v.l. ṇṇ); Ja iv.165; Dhp-a i.48.

cp. jaṇṇu(ka) & jānu

Japa

(& jappa vv.ll.) 1. muttering, mumbling.; recitation AN iii.56 = Ja iii.205 (+ manta); Snp 328 (jappa (= niratthaka-kathā Snp-a 334).

2. studying Ja iii.114 (= ajjhena).

fr. japati

Jap(p)aka

(adj.) whispering, see kaṇṇa

Japati

(& jappati Dhtp 189, also japp 190 = vacane; sound-root jap ) to mumble, whisper, utter, recite Ja iv.204; Pv ii.61 (= vippalapati Pv-a 94); Pv-a 97 ppr. jappaṃ SN i.166 (palāpaṃ); Ja iv.75. See japa japana; also pari˚.

Japana

(sic. DN-a i.97, otherwise jappana ) whispering, mumbling (see japati), in kaṇṇa˚. See also pari˚.

Jappati

to hunger for, to desire, yearn long for, (c. acc.) Snp 771 (kāme), 839 (bhavaṃ), 899, 902 Nd ii.79 (= pajappati),-pp. jappita Snp 902. See also jappā, jappanā, etc., also abhijjappati & pa˚.;

not, as customary, to jalp, Sk. jalpati (= japati), but in the meaning of desire, etc., for cappati to capp as in cappeti = Sk, carvayati to chew, suck, be hungry (q.v.) cp. also calaka

Jappanā

= jappā Snp 945; Dhs 1059≈. Cp. pa˚.

Jappā

(f.) desire, lust, greed, attachment, hunger (cp. Nd ii.on taṇhā) SN i.123 (bhava-lobha˚) Snp 1033; Nd ii.250; Ne 12; Dhs 279, Dhs 1059.

to jappati

Jambāla

mud; adj. jambālin muddy, as n. jambālī (f.) a dirty pool (at entrance to village) AN ii.166.

Sk. jambāla

Jambu

(f.) the rose-apple tree, Eugenia Jambolana Ja ii.160; Ja v.6; Vv 67; 4413, 164 ■ As adj f. jambī sarcastically “rose-apple-maid,” appld to a gardener’s daughter Ja iii.22.

-dīpa the country of the rose-apples i.e. India Ja i.263; Vv-a 18; Mil 27, etc. -nada see jambonada -pakka the fruit of Eugenia jambolana, the rose-apple (of black or dark colour) Vism 409; -pesī the rind of the r ■ a. fruit Ja v.465; -rukka the r ■ a. tree Dhp-a iii.211 -saṇḍa rose-apple grove (= ˚dīpa, N. for India) Snp 552 Thag 822.

Sk. jambu

Jambuka

a jackal Ja ii.107; Ja iii.223.

Sk. jambuka, to jambh ?

Jambonada

a special sort of gold (in its unwelded state); also spelled jambunada (J iv.105; Vv-a 13, Vv-a 340) AN i.181; AN ii.8, AN ii.29; Vv 8417. Cp. jātarūpa.

Sk. jāmbūnada; belonging to or coming from the Jambu river (?)

Jambhati

to yawn, to arouse oneself, to rise, go forth (of a lion Ja vi.40.

cp. Vedic jehate, Dhtp 208 & Dhtm 298 define; jambh as “gatta-vināma,” i.e. bending the body

Jambhanā

(f.) arousing, activity, alertness Vb 352.

to jambhati

Jamma

(adj.) miserable, wretched, contemptible Ja ii.110; Ja iii.99 (= lāmaka) f. SN v.217; Dhp 335, Dhp 336 (of taṇhā); Ja ii.428; Ja v.421; Dhp-a iv.44 (= lāmakā).

Vedic *jālma (?), dialectical?

Jamman(a)

(nt.) birth, descent, rank Snp 1018.

to janati

Jaya

vanquishing, overcoming, victory DN i.10; Snp 681; Ja ii.406; opp. parājaya Vism 401.

-ggaha the lucky die Ja iv.322 (= kaṭaggaha, q.v.) -parājaya victory & defeat Dhp 201; -pāna the drink of victory, carousing, wassail; ˚ṃ pivati Dhp-a i.193 -sumana “victory’s joy,” Name of a plant (cp. jātisumana Vism 174; Dhp-a i.17, Dhp-a i.383.

see jayati

Jayati

(jeti, jināti) to conquer surpass; to pillage, rob, to overpower, to defeat-Pres. [jayati] jeti Ja ii.3; jināti Snp 439; Dhp 354; Ja i.289; Ja iv.71 ■ Pot. jeyya Com. on Dhp 103; jine Dhp 103 = Ja ii.4 = Vv-a 69; Vv-a 3rd pl. jineyyuṃ SN i.221 (opp parājeyyuṃ) ■ Ppr. jayaṃ Dhp 201 ■ Fut. jessati Vv 332; jayissati ib.; jinissati Ja ii.183 ■ Aor. jini Ja i.313; Ja ii.404; ajini Dhp 3; pl. jiniṃsu SN i.221 (opp parājiṃsu), 224 (opp. parājiṃsu, with v.l. ˚jiniṃsu); AN iv.432 (opp. ˚jiyiṃsu, with v.l. ˚jiniṃsu). Also aor. ajesi Dhp-a i.44 (= ajini) ■ Proh. (mā) jīyi Ja iv.107 ■ Ger jetvā Snp 439; jetvāna Iti 76 ■ Inf. jinituṃ Ja vi.193; Vv-a 69 ■ Grd. jeyya Snp 288 (a˚); jinitabba Vv-a 69 (v.l. jetabba) ■ Pass. jīyati (see parā˚), jīyati is also Pass. to jarati-Caus. 1. jayāpeti to wish victory to to hail (as a respectful greeting to a king) Ja ii.213, Ja ii.369 Ja ii.375; Ja iv.403.

2. jāpayati to cause to rob, to incite to plunder MN i.231; Iti 22 = Ja iv.71 (v.l. hāpayati) Mil 402; Ja vi.108 (to annul); Mil 227 ■ Des jigiṃsati (q.v.) ■ pp. jina & jita; (q.v.).

Sk. jayati, ji to have power, to conquer, cp. jaya = βία; trans. of which the intrans. is jināti to lose power, to become old (see jīrati)

Jayā

f. wife only in cpd. jayampatikā, the lady of the house and her husband, the two heads of the household. That the wife should be put first might seem suggestive of the matriarchate, but the expression means just simply “the pair of them,” and the context has never anything to do with the matriarchate. husband & wife, a married couple SN ii.98; Ja i.347; Ja iv.70 of birds. See also jāyampatikā.

Vedic jāyā

Jara

(adj.) (˚-) old, decayed (in disparaging sense), wretched, miserable; -ūdapānaṃ a spoilt well Ja iv.387; -gava = ˚goṇa Pv i.81; -goṇa [cp. Sk. jaradgava] a decrepit, old bull Ja ii.135; -sakka “the old S. Ja iv.389; -sālā a tumble-down shed Pv-a 78.

See jarati

Jaratā

(f.) old age Dhs 644≈ (rūpassa j. decay of form); Vism 449.

see jarati

Jarati

to suffer destruction or decay, to become old in two roots, viz. 1. jar [jarati] in Caus. jarayati to destroy, to bring to ruin Ja v.501 = Ja vi.375.

2. jīr [Sk. jīryati] see jīyati, jīrati, jīrayati, jīrāpeti ■ Pp jiṇṇa ■ Cp. also jara, jarā, jajjara, jīraṇatā.

Vedic jarati & jīryati,; *gerā to crush, to pound, overcome (cp. jayati); as intrs. to become brittle, to be consumed, to decay, cp. Lat. granum, Goth kaúrn, E etc. corn

Jarā

(f.) & (older); jaras (nt.) decay, decrepitude, old age Vin i.10, Vin i.34; AN i.51, AN i.138 (as Death’s messenger); v.144 sq. (bhabbo jaraṃ pahātuṃ); Snp 311 (cp. DN iii.75); Ja i.59; Thig 252 sq.; Vism 502 (def as twofold & discussed in its valuation as dukkha) Defined as “yā tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaṃ pāliccaṃ valittacatā āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripāko” DN ii.305 = MN i.49; SN ii.2 = Nd ii.252 = Dhs 644, cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 195 ■ Frequently combd with maraṇa (maccu, etc.) “decay death” (see under jāti as to formulas): ˚maraṇa DN ii.31 sq.; MN i.49; Snp 575; ˚maccu Snp 581, Snp 1092, Snp 1094 ajarāmara not subject to decay & death (cp. ajajjara Th II, 512; Pv ii.611; Vv 6311; Ja iii.515.

-ghara the house of age (adj.) like a decayed house Thig 270 (= jiṇṇagharasadisa Thag-a 213). -jajjara feeble with age Ja i.59; -jiṇṇa decrepit with age Pv-a 148; -dhamma subject to growing old AN i.138, AN i.145 AN ii.172, AN ii.247; AN iii.54 sq., 71 sq.; -patta old Ja iii.394 Ja iv.403; -bhaya fear of old age AN i.179; AN ii.121; -vata the wind of age Dhp-a iv.25. -sutta the Suttanta on old age, Name of Sutta Nipāta iv.6 (p. 157 sq.; beginning with “appaṃ vata jīvitaṃ idaṃ”), quoted at Dhp-a iii.320.

of the latter only the instr. jarasā in use: Snp 804, Snp 1123 (= jarāya Nd ii.249) ■ Sk jarā & jaraḥ to; *gerā: see jarati; cp. Gr. γ ̈ηρας, γέρας, γραϋς old age, etc. See also jīraṇa(tā)

Jala

(nt.) water Snp 845; Ja i.222; Ja iii.188; Ja iv.137.

-gocara living in the water Ja ii.158. -ja born or sprung from w. Ja iv.333; Ja v.445; Vv-a 42; -da “giving water,” rain-cloud Dāvs v.32; -dhara [cp. jalandhara rain-cloud] the sea Mil 117; -dhi = prec. Dāvs v.38.

Sk. jala, conn. with gala drop (?), prob. dialectical; cp. udaka

Jalati

to burn, to shine D 3, 188; MN i.487; Ja i.62 Ja ii.380; Ja iv.69; Iti 86; Vv 462; Vv-a 107; Mil 223, Mil 343-Caus. jaleti & jāleti (cp. janeti: jāneti) to set on fire light, kindle SN i.169; Ja ii.104; Mil 47 ■ Pp. jalita Intens. daddaḷhati (q.v.). Cp. ujjāleti.

Sk. jvalati, with jvarati to be hot or feverish, to jval to burn (Dhtp 264: dittiyaṃ), cp. Ohg. kol = coal Celt. gûal

Jalana

(n ■ adj.) burning Pgdp 16.

Sk. jvalana

Jalābu

1. the womb SN iii.240.

2. the embryo Ja iv.38.

3. the placenta Ja ii.38.

-ja born from a womb, viviparous MN i.73; DN iii.230; Ja ii.53 = Ja v.85.

Sk. jarāyu, slough & placenta, to; jar see jarati, originally that which decays (= decidua); cp. Gr. γ ̈ηρας slough. As to meanings cp. gabbha

Jalita

(adj.) set on fire, burning, shining, bright, splendid Snp 396, Snp 668, Snp 686; Vv 216 (= jalanto jotanto Vv-a 107); Pv i.1014 (burning floor of Niraya) ii.112 (˚ânubhāva: shining majesty); Pv-a 41 (= āditta burning); Thag-a 292.

pp. to jalati

Jalūpikā

(f.) a leech Mil 407 (v.l. jalopikā).

Sk. *jalūkikā = jalūkā & (pop. etym.) jalankā (sprung fr. water), borrowed fr. Npers. ƶalū (?Uhlenbeck); cp. Gr. βδέλλα leech, Celt. gel; perhaps to gal in the sense of such (?)

jalūkā

leech DN-a i.117.

Jalogi

(nt.?) toddy (i.e. juice extracted from the palmyra, the date or the cocoa palm) Vin ii.294 (pātuṃ the drinking of j.), 301, 307; Mvu 4, Mvu 10.

Jalla1

(nt.) moisture, (wet) dirt, perspiration (mostly as seda˚ or in cpd. rajo˚, q.v. Snp 249 (= rajojalla Snp-a 291); Ja vi.578 (sweat under the armpits = jallikā Com.).

*jalya to jala or gal

Jalla2

athlete, acrobat Ja vi.271.

prob. = jhalla, see Kern, Toevoegselen s. v.

Jallikā

(f.) a drop (of perspiration), dirt in seda˚; etc. AN i.253 (kāli˚); Snp 198 = Ja i.146; Ja vi.578.

demiName of jalla

Jaḷa

(adj.) dull, slow, stupid DN iii.265 (a˚); AN ii.252; Pp 13; Mil 251; DN-a i.290.

Sk. jaḍa

Java

1. (n.) speed SN ii.266; SN v.227; MN i.446; AN ii.113; AN iii.248; Snp 221; Ja ii.290; Ja iv.2 Often combd with thāma, in phrase thāmajavasampanna endowed with strength & swiftness Ja i.62; Vv-a 104; Pv-a 4; Mil 4javena (instr.) speedily Ja ii.377.

2. (adj.) swift, quick Ja iii.25; Ja vi.244 (mano˚, as quick as thought); Vv 16 (= vegavanto Vv-a 78); Vv-a 6 (sīgha˚).

-cchinna without alacrity, slow, stupid (opp. sīghajava) Dhp-a i.262; -sampanna full of swiftness, nimbleness or alacrity AN i.244 sq.; AN ii.250 sq.

Sk. java, to javati

Javati

Vedic ju javate intr. to hurry, junāti trs. to incite, urge: to run, hurry, hasten SN i.33; Ja iv.213; Dāvs v.24; Dhs-a 265, pp. jūta.

Javana

(nt.) 1. alacrity, readiness; impulse, shock Pts i.80 sq.; Vism 22; Dhs-a 265 (cp. Dhs trsl. pp. 132 156); DN-a i.194. Usually in cpd. javana-pañña (adj. of alert intellection, of swift understanding, together with hāsa-pañña (hāsu˚ at MN iii.25; Ja iv.136) & puthu tikkha˚ S; v.376, 377; Nd ii.235, Nd ii.3a. Also in cpds. ˚paññā Pts ii.185 sq.; ˚paññatā AN i.45; ˚paññattaṃ SN v.413. 2. The twelfth stage in the function (kicca ) of an act of perception (or vīthicitta ): the stage of full perception or apperception. Vism ch. xiv. (e.g. p. 459) Abhdhs. pt. iii, § 6 (kiccaṃ ); Comp. pp. 29, 115, 245 In this connection javana is taken in its equally fundamental sense of “going” (not “swiftness”), and the “going” is understood as intellectual movement.

Javanaka

= java 2 (adj.) Vv-a 78.

Jaha

(adj.) (-˚) leaving behind, giving up, see attaṃ˚, okaṃ˚, kappaṃ˚, raṇaṃ˚, sabbaṃ˚, etc (SN i.52; Iti 58; Snp 790, Snp 1101, etc.); duj˚; hard to give up Thag 495. Jahati & jahati;

to jahati

Jahati & jahāti

to leave, abandon, lose; give up, renounce forsake. Ster. expln at Nd ii.255 (and passim): pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhāvaṃ gameti. Lit. as well as fig.; esp. w. ref. to kāma, dosa & other evil qualities ■ Pres.; jahāti Snp 1, Snp 506 (dosaṃ), 589; Dhp 91 imper. jahassu Snp 1121 (rūpaṃ); pot. jahe Iti 34; Dhp 221; Ja iv.58, & jaheyya Snp 362; Iti 115; Ja i.153 Ja iv.58 ■ Fut. jahissāmi Ja iii.279; Ja iv.420; Ja v.465; in verse: hassāmi Ja iv.420; Ja v.465 ■ Ger. hitvā (very frequent) Snp 284, Snp 328; Dhp 29, Dhp 88, etc.; hitvāna (Snp 60) jahitvā & jahetvā (Snp 500) ■ Inf.; jahituṃ Ja i.138-Pp. jahita Snp 231; Kh 9; Mil 261Pass. hāyati SN ii.224; Snp 817; Mil 297, hāyate Ja v.488 & hīyati Ja ii.65; Snp 944 (hīyamāna), cp. hāyare Ja ii.327; pp hīna (q.v.) ■ Caus. hāpeti (q.v.). See also hāni hāyin, jaha.

Vedic root . Cp. *ghē(i) & ghī to be devoid (of), Gr. ξ ̈ηρος void of, ξ ̈ηρα widow, ξώρα open space (cp. Sk. vihāya = ākāsa), ξωρίζω separate; Lat her-es; Sk. jihīte to go forth = Ohg. gēn, gān, Ags gan = go; also Sk. hāni want = Goth. gaidw, cp. Gr.ξατίζω

Jahitikā

(f.) (a woman) who has been jilted, or rejected, or repudiated Ja i.148.

See jahati

Jāgara

(adj.) waking, watchful, careful, vigilant SN i.3; AN ii.13 = Iti 116; MN ii.31; Iti 41; Mil 300bahu˚; wide awake, well aware, cautious Snp 972 (cp. rakkhita-mānasāno in same context v. 63) Dhp 29.

fr. jāgarti

Jāgaraṇa

(nt.) a means for waking or keeping awake Mil 301.

der. fr. jāgara

Jāgaratā

(f.) watchfulness, vigilance SN i.3.

cp. Sk. jāgaraṇa

Jāgarati

to be awake, to be watchful, to be on the alert (cp. guttadvāra) Dhp 60 (dīghā jāgarato rattī), 226; Iti 41; Mil 300 ■ pp. jāgarita (q.v.).

Sk. jāgarti to be awake (redupl. perf. for jājarti) *ger & gerēi; cp. Lat. expergiscor (*exprogrīscor); Gr.ἐγείρω, perf. ἐγρήγορα (for *ἐγήγορα). Def. at Dhtp 254 by niddā-khaya

Jāgarita

(nt.) waking, vigil Iti 41; Pp 59.

pp. of jāgarti

Jāgariyā

(f.) keeping awake, watchfulness, vigilance, esp. in the sense of being cautious of the dangers that are likely to befall one who strives after perfection. Therefore freq. in combn “indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyaṃ anuyutto” (anuyuñjati: to apply oneself to or being devoted to vigilance), e.g. SN ii.218; MN i.32, MN i.273, MN i.354 sq. 471; AN i.113 sq.; AN ii.40 ■ Also in ˚ṃ bhajati to pursue watchfulness (bhajetha keep vigil) Iti 42; Snp 926 (niddaṃ na bahulīkareyya j˚ṃ bhajeyya ātāpī) ■ SN iv.104; MN i.273, MN i.355; Mil 388.

-ānuyoga application or practice of watchfulness Nd i.484.

BSk. M Vastu jāgarikā

Jāta

1. As adj.-n.un (a) born, grown, arisen, produced (= nibbatta pātubhūta Nd ii.256) Snp 576 (jātānaṃ maccānaṃ niccaṃ maraṇato bhayaṃ); jātena maccena kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahuṃ Dhp 53 = Mil 333; yakkhinī jātâsi (born a G. Ja vi.337; rukkho j. Ja i.222; latā jātā Dhp 340; gāmanissandhena jātāni sūpeyya-paṇṇāni Vism 250 ■ (n. he who or that which is born: jātassa maraṇaṃ hoti Snp 742; jātassa jarā paññāyissati Ja i.59; jātaṃ + bhūtaṃ (opp. ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ) Iti 37 ■ (b) “genuine,” i.e natural, true, good, sound (cp. kata, bhūta, taccha & opp. ajāta like akata, abhūta): see cpds.

2. As predicate, often in sense of a finite verb (cp. gata); born, grown (or was born, grew); become; occurred happened Snp 683 (Bodhisatto hitasukhatāya jāto) bhayaṃ jātaṃ (arose) Snp 207; vivādā jātā Snp 828 ekadivase j. (were born on the same day) Ja iii.391 aphāsukaṃ jātaṃ (has occurred Ja i.291 ■ So in loc abs. jāte (jātamhi) “when… has arisen, when there is…, ” e.g. atthamhi Vin i.350 = MN iii.154 = Dhp 331 vādamhi Snp 832; oghe Snp 1092; kahāpaṇesu jātesu Ja i.121.

3. ˚jāta (nt.) characteristic; pada˚ pedal character SN i.86; anga˚ the sexual organ Vin i.191; as adj. having become… (= bhūta); being like or behaving as, of the kind of…, sometimes to be rendered by an adj. or a pp. implied in the noun: cuṇṇakajātāni aṭṭhikāni (= cuṇṇayitāni) MN iii.92; jālakajāta in bud AN iv.117; chandajāta = chandika Snp 767 sujāta Snp 548 (well-born, i.e. auspicious, blessed happy); pītisomanassa˚ joyful & glad Snp p.94; Ja i.60 etc.; gandhajāta a kind of perfume (see gandha) Often untranslatable: lābhappatto jāto Ja iii.126 vināsa-ppaccayo jāto Ja i.256.

4. a Jātaka or Buddhist birth story Dhp-a i.34.

-āmaṇḍa the (wild) castor oil plant Vv-a 10; -ovaraka the inner chamber where he was born Vv-a 158; Ja i.391 (so read for jāto varake). -kamma the (soothsaying) ceremony connected w. birth, in ˚ṃ karoti to set the horoscope Pv-a 198 (= nakkhatta-yogaṃ uggaṇhāti); -divasa the day of birth, birthday Ja iii.391 Ja iv.38; -maṅgala birth festival, i.e. the feast held on the birth of a child Dhp-a ii.86; -rūpa “sterling,” pure metal, i.e. gold (in its natural state, before worked cp. jambonada). In its relation to suvaṇṇa (worked gold) it is stated to be suvaṇṇavaṇṇo (i.e. the brightcoloured metal: Vv-a 9; Dhp-a iv.32: suvaṇṇo jātarūpo); at DN-a i.78 it is expld by suvaṇṇa only & at Vin iii.238 it is said to be the colour of the Buddha j. Satthu-vaṇṇa. At AN i.253 it is represented as the material for the suvaṇṇakāra (the “white”-smith as opp. to “black”-smith) ■ Combd w. hirañña Pv ii.75; very freq. w. rajata (silver), in the prohibition of accepting gold & silver (DN i.5)≈ as well as in other connections, e.g. Vin i.245; Vin ii.294 sq.; SN i.71, SN i.95 SN iv.326 (the moral dangers of “money”: yassa jātarūpa-rajataṃ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti); v.353, 407; Dhs 617 ■ Other passages illustr the use & valuation of j. are SN ii.234 (˚paripūra); v.92 (upakkilesā); AN i.210 (id.); iii.16 (id.) ■ SN i.93, SN i.117; MN i.38; AN i.215; AN iii.38; AN iv.199, AN iv.281; AN v.290; Ja ii.296 Ja iv.102; -veda [cp. Vedic jātaveda = Agni] fire SN i.168; Snp 462 (kaṭṭhā jāyati j.) Ud 93; Ja i.214; Ja ii.326 Ja iv.471; Ja v.326; Ja vi.204, Ja vi.578; Vism 171; DN-a i.226; Dhp-a i.44 (nirindhana, without fuel); -ssara a natural pond or lake Vin i.111; Ja i.470; Ja ii.57.

pp. of janati (janeti), cp. Lat. (g)nātus, Goth. kunds; also Gr. (κασί-) γνητός, Ohg. knabo

Jātaka1

(nt.) 1. a birth story as found in the earlier books. This is always the story of a previous birth of the Buddha as a wise man of old. In this sense it occurs as the name of one of the 9 categories or varieties of literary composition (MN i.133; AN ii.7, AN ii.103 AN ii.108; Vin iii.8; Pp 43. See navanga ).

2. the story of any previous birth of the Buddha, esp. as an animal In this sense the word is not found in the 4 Nikāyas but it occurs on the Bharhut Tope (say, end of 3rd cent. b.c., and is frequent in the Jātaka book. 3. the name of a book in the Pāli canon, containing the verses of 547 such stories. The text of this book has not yet been edited. See Rh. Davids’ Buddhist India, 189

209, and Buddh. Birth Stories, introd., for history of the Jātaka literature ■ jātakaṃ niṭṭhapeti to wind up a Jātaka tale Ja vi.363; jātakaṃ samodhāneti to apply a Jātaka to the incident Ja i.106; Dhp-a i.82. Note. The form jāta in the sense of jātaka occurs at Dhp-a i.34.

-atthavaṇṇanā the commentary on the Jātaka book, ed. by V. Fausböll, 6 vols. with Index vol. by D. Andersen, London, 1877 sq.; -bhāṇaka a repeater of the J. book Mil 341.

jāta + ka, belonging to, connected with what has happened

Jātaka2

(m.) a son Ja i.239; Ja iv.138.

jāta + ka, belonging to what has been born

Jātatta

(nt.) the fact of being born or of having grown or arisen Vism 250; Dhp-a i.241.

abstr. fr. jāta

Jāti

(f.) ■ Instr. jātiyā (Snp 423) & jaccā (D ii.8; Ja iii.395; Dhp 393); abl. jātiyā (SN i.88) & jātito (by descent: DN ii.8); loc. jātiyaṃ (Pv-a 10) & jātiyā (Pv-a 78).

1. birth, rebirth, possibility of rebirth “future life” as disposition to be born again, “former life” as cause of this life. Defined (cp. the corresp expln of jarā) as: yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattanaṃ tamhi tamhi satta-nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo āyataṇānaṃ paṭilābho DN ii.305 = SN ii.3 = Nd ii.257 ■ Jāti is a condition precedent of age, sickness & death, and is fraught with sorrow, pain & disappointment. It is itself the final outcome of a kamma, resting on avijjā, performed in anterior births & forms thus the concluding link in the chain of the Paṭicca-samuppāda. Under the first aspect it is enum;d in various formulae, either in full or abbreviated (see Nd ii.258), viz, (a) as (1) jāti, (2) jarā, (3) vyādhi (4) maraṇa, (5) sokaparidevadukkhadomanass’ upāyāsa in the dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ (the noble truth of what is misfortune) Vin i.10; AN i.176; AN iii.416; ˚dhamma destined to be born, etc. MN i.161 sq., 173 ■ AN v.216 Nd ii.258, Nd ii.304, Nd ii.630, etc., in var. connections (referring to some dukkha) ■ (b) as Nos. 1

4: Nd ii.254, Nd ii.494b Ja i.168, etc ■ (c) as Nos. 1, 2, 4 (the standard quotation implying the whole series 1

5): SN v.224; AN v.144 jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ Vin i.1; DN ii.31, DN ii.57, etc. ˚ika AN ii.11, AN ii.173; ˚īya MN i.280; Nd ii.40 ■ (d) to this is sometimes added (as summing up) saṃsāra: Nd ii.282f; cp. kicchaṃ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca mīyati ca cavati ca uppajjati ca DN ii.30 ■ (e) as Nos. 1 + 4 pahīna-jātimaraṇa (adj.) (= free from life & death i.e. saṃsāra) AN i.162; ˚bhayassa pāraga AN ii.15 ˚kovida Snp 484; atāri ˚ṃ asesaṃ Snp 355 (cp. 500) ˚assa pāraga Snp 32 ■ (f) = e + saṃsāra (cp. d): sattā gacchanti saṃsāraṃ jātimaraṇagāmino AN ii.12 = AN ii.52 jātimaraṇasaṃsāraṃ ye vajanti punappunaṃ… avijjāy’ eva sā gati Snp 729 ■ (g) as Nos. 1 + 2, which implies the whole series: atāri so jātijaraṃ AN i.133; Snp 1048; jātijar’ upaga Snp 725 = Iti 106; saṃyojanaṃ jātijarāya chetvā Iti 42Snp 1052, Snp 1060; Dhp 238, Dhp 348 cp. jāti ādinā nihīna Pv-a 198Other phrases applications:; Various rebirths are seen by one who has perfect insight into all happening & remembers his former existences (DN i.81; DN iii.50; AN i.164; MN ii.20) Arahantship implies the impossibility of a future rebirth: see formula khīṇā jāti (MN i.139; Snp p.16, etc. and arahant ii.A: jātiyā parimuccati SN i.88; jātiṃ bhabbo pahātuṃ AN v.144 sq ■ antimā jāti the last rebirth DN ii.15 (cp. carima); purimā j. a former existence Pv-a 1; atītajātiyaṃ in a former life (= pure Pv-a 10. On jāti as dukkha see Vism 498

501. 2. descent, race, rank, genealogy (cp. φυή, genus), often combd w. gotta. Two grades of descent are enumd at Vin iv.6 as hīnā jāti (low birth), consisting of Candāḷa, Veṇa, Nesāda, Rathakāra & Pukkusa; and ukkaṭṭhā j. (superior birth), comprising Khattiyas Brāhmaṇas ■ The var. meanings of jāti are given by Bdhgh at Vism 498, Vism 499 in the foll. classification (with examples) bhava, nikāya, sankhata-lakkhaṇa paṭisandhi, pasūti, kula, ariya-sīla ■ Kiṃ hi jāti karissati? What difference makes his parentage DN i.121; jāti-rājāno kings of birth, genuine kings Ja i.338; na naṃ jāti nivāresi brahmalok’ ûpapattiyā Snp 139; jātiṃ akkhāhi tell me the rank of his father mother Snp 421, Snp 1004; cp. 462; na jaccā vasalo hoti Snp 136; Snp 142; id. w. brāhmaṇo Snp 650; with nāma gotta in the description of a man jātiyā nāmena gottena etc. Vin iv.6; jātito nāmato gottato by descent, personal & family name DN ii.8; cp. jāti-gotta-kula Ja ii.3 See also j ■ vāda.

3. a sort of, kind of (cp. jāta 3) catujātigandha four kinds of scent Ja i.265; Ja ii.291. 4. (jāti˚) by (mere) birth or nature, natural (opp artificial); or genuine, pure, excellent (opp. adulterated inferior), cp. jāta 1 (b): in cpds., like ˚maṇi, ˚vīṇā, etc.

-kkhaya the destruction of the chance of being reborn SN v.168; AN i.167; Snp 209, Snp 517, Snp 743; Dhp 423. -khetta the realm of rebirth Pv-a 138 (= dasa cakkavāḷasahassāni); -thaddha conceited, proud of birth Snp 104 (+ dhanatthaddha, gotta˚: proud of wealth & name) -thera a Th. by rank DN iii.218; -nirodha the extermination of (the cause of) rebirth Vin i.1≈; -pabhava the origin or root of existence Snp 728; -puppha nutmeg Ja vi.367; -bhaya the fear of rebirth AN ii.121; -bhūmi natural ground, in ˚bhūmaka, ˚bhūmika, ˚bhūmiya living on nat. gr. (vassaṃ vasati) MN i.145; AN iii.366 -maṇi a genuine precious stone Ja ii.417; -maya constituting birth, being like birth Thag-a 285; -vāda reputation of birth, character of descent, parentage. The 1st of the 5 characteristics constituting a “well-bred brahmin: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena “of unblemished parentage back to the 7th generation” DN i.120, etc. (= DN-a i.281) AN i.166; AN iii.152, AN iii.223; Snp 315, Snp 596. Cp. gotta-vāda (e.g. DN i.99); -vibhaṅga a characteristic of birth, a distinction in descent Snp 600; -vīṇā a first-class lute Ja ii.249; -sampanna endowed with (pure) birth (in phrase khattiyo muddhâvasitto j.˚) AN iii.152; -sambhava the origin of birth AN i.142; AN iii.311; Ja i.168 -sambheda difference of rank Dhp-a i.166; -saṃsāra the cycle of transmigration, the saṃsāra of rebirths (see above 1 d. f.): pahīna left behind, overcome (by an Arahant) MN i.139; AN iii.84, AN iii.86; ˚ṃ khepetvā id. Thig 168; vitiṇṇo j.˚ n’ atthi tassa punabbhavo Snp 746 -sindhava a well-bred horse Ja ii.97; -ssara the remembrance of (former) births (˚ñāṇa) Ja i.167; Ja iv.29; Dhp-a ii.27; Dhp-a iv.51; cp. cutûpapāta-ñāṇa); -hiṅgulaka (& hingulikā) natural vermilion Ja v.67; Vv-a 4, Vv-a 168 Vv-a 324.

see janati & cp. Gr.; γενεά, γένεσις; Lat. gens; Goth. kind-ins

Jātika

(-˚) (adj.) 1. being like, being of, having, etc. (see jāta 3): duppañña˚ & sappañña˚ MN i.225; dabba AN i.254; mukhara˚ Snp 275; viññū˚ Snp 294; māna Ja i.88.

2. descended from, being of rank, belonging to the class of: maṇḍana˚ MN ii.19; aviheṭhaka˚ Mil 219; samāna˚ (of equal rank) Dhp-a i.390; veṇa˚ (belonging to the bamboo-workers) Pv-a 175.

Jātimant

(adj.) of good birth, having natural or genuine qualities, noble, excellent Snp 420 (vaṇṇārohena sampanno jātimā viya khattiyo); Ja i.342 (jātimanta-kulaputtā). Of a precious stone: maṇi veḷuriyo subho j.˚ DN i.76 = MN ii.17; DN-a i.221; Mil 215. Sometimes in this spelling for jutimant Snp 1136 Nd ii.259 (expld by paṇḍita paññavā) ■ ajātima not of good birth Ja vi.356 (opp. sujātimant ibid.).

jāti + mant

Jātu

(indeel.) surely, undoubtedly (ekaṃsavacanaṃ Snp-a 348) usually in negative (& interrog. sentences as na jātu, not at all, never (cp. also sādhu) mā jātu Vin ii.203; Snp 152, Snp 348 (no ce hi jātu); Ja i.293 Ja i.374; Ja iv.261; Ja v.503. Na jātucca at Ja vi.60 is apparently for na jātu ca.

Vedic jātu, particle of affirmation. Perhaps for jānātu one would know, cp. Gr. ο ̓ϊμαι, Lat. credo P. maññe. But BR. and Fausböll make it a contraction of jāyatu “it might happen.” Neither of these derivations is satisfactory

Jāna

(adj.) knowing or knowable, understandable Ja iii.24 (= jānamāna). dujjāna difficult to understand DN i.170, DN i.187; MN i.487; MN ii.43. su˚ recognizable, intelligible Pv iv.135 (= suviññeyya Pv-a 230). Cp. ājāna.

to jñā, see jānāti

Jānana

(nt.) knowledge, cognizance, recognition; intelligence, learning, skill Ja i.145 (attānaṃ-˚kālato paṭṭhāya from the time of self-recognition), 200 (-˚manta knowledge of a spell, a spell known by tumhākaṃ) ii.221; Snp-a 330; Dhp-a ii.73 (˚sabhāva ñatta); DN-a i.86 (akkhara˚); Vism 391 (˚atthāya in order to know), 436 (= pajānana). Cp. ājānana. ajānana not knowing (˚-) Ja v.199; Ja vi.177; not known Ja i.32 (˚sippa).

fr. jñā

Jānanaka

(adj.) knowing Dhs-a 394.

Sk. *jñānaka, cp. jānana & Sk. jānaka (c. gen.) expert Av Ś; ii.119, 120, as n. ib. i.216

Jānanatā

(f.) the fact of knowing, knowledge Kp-a 144.

abstr. fr. jānana

Jānapada

(adj.-n.) belonging to the country, living in the c.; pl. country-folk (opp. negamā townsfolk) DN i.136, DN i.142; MN ii.74; Ja ii.287, Ja ii.388; DN-a i.297 (= janapada-vāsin).

fr. janapada

Jānāti

to know.

I. Forms: The 2 Vedic roots jān˚ & jñā˚; are represented in P. by jān˚ & ñā˚ (ña˚) 1.; jān: pres. jānāti pot. jāneyya (Snp 781) & jaññā (A iv.366; Snp 116, Snp 775; Dhp 157, Dhp 352; Ja ii.346; Ja iv.478) 2nd sg. jāneyyāsi (MN i.487; Ja i.288), 1st pl. jāniyāma (Snp 873) & (archaic jānemu (Snp 76, Snp 599; Vv 8311) ■ imper. jānāhi (Snp 596 Snp 1026; Pv ii.912), 3rd. sg. jānātu (Iti 28) ■ ppr. jānanto & jānaṃ (DN i.192; AN i.128; Snp 722), ppr. med. jānamāna (Ja i.168) ■ fut. jānissati (J ii.342; vi.364) ■ aor ajāni (Snp 536) & jāni (Ja i.125, Ja i.269), 3rd pl. jāniṃsu (J ii.105; Vv-a 113) ■ ger. jānitvā (Ja i.293; Ja iii.276) inf. jānituṃ (Ja i.125). Caus. jānāpeti (see below iv.2)

2. ñā: fut. ñassati (DN i.165) ■ aor. aññāsi (Ja i.271 & nāsi (Snp 471), 3rd pl. aññaṃsu (Vv 22;4) ■ ger. ñatvā (freq.) ■ grd. ñeyya AN ii.135 (see below) & ñātabba (Pv-a 133) ■ inf. ñātuṃ (freq.)-pp. ñāta (q.v.). Pass. ñāyati to be called or named (Mil 25).

II. Cognate Forms: Nd ii.s. v. explains jānāti by passati dakkhati adhigacchati vindati paṭilabhati, & ñatvā (No. 267) by jānitvā tulayitvā tirayitva vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaṃ katvā (very freq.) The 1st expln is also applied to abhijānāti, & the 2nd to passitvā, viditaṃ katvā, abhiññāya & disvā. The use of the emphatic phrase jānāti passati is very frequent. Yaṃ tvaṃ na jānāsi na passasi taṃ tvaṃ icchasi kāmesi? Whom you know not neither have seen, is it she that you love and long for? DN i.193; Bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto MN i.111; similarly AN iv.153 sq. See further DN i.2, DN i.40, DN i.84, DN i.157 sq, 165 192 sq., 238 sq.; AN i.128; AN iii.338; AN v.226; Snp 908 Nd ii.35, Nd ii.413, Nd ii.517; Vism 200.

III. Meaning: (1) Intrs. to know, to have or gain knowledge, to be experienced, to be aware, to find out mayam pi kho na jānāma surely, even we do not know DN i.216; te kho evaṃ jāneyyaṃ they ought to know ib. jānantā nāma n’ âhesuṃ “nobody knew” Ja iii.188 jānāhi find out Ja i.184; kālantarena jānissatha you will see in time Pv-a 13; ajānanto unawares, unsuspecting i.223; ajānamāna id. Pv ii.314.

2. Trs. to know recognize, be familiar with (usually c. acc., but also with gen.: Ja i.337; Ja ii.243), to have knowledge of, experience find; to infer, conclude, distinguish, state, define: yaṃ ahaṃ jānāmi taṃ tvaṃ jānāsi DN i.88; aham p’ etaṃ na jānāmi Snp 989; jānanti taṃ yakkhabhūtā Pv iv.135 paccakkhato ñatvā finding out personally Ja i.262 Ja iii.168; cittam me Gotamo jānāti SN i.178; jānāti maṃ Bhagavā SN i.116; kathaṃ jānemu taṃ mayaṃ? How shall we know (or identify) him? Vv 8311; yathā jānemu brāhmaṇaṃ so that we may know what a b. is Snp 599 yath’ âhaṃ jāneyyaṃ vasalaṃ Snp p.21; ajānanto ignorant Pv-a 4; annapānaṃ ajāṇanto (being without bread water) Pv-a 169; ittaraṃ ittarato ñatvā inferring the trifling from the trifle Pv i.1111; ingha me uṇh’ odakaṃ jānāhi find me some hot water SN i.174; seyyaṃ jānāhi Vin iv.16; phalaṃ pāpassa jānamāna (having experienced) Ja i.168; mantaṃ j. (to be in possession of a charm Ja i.253; maggaṃ na j. Snp 441; pamāṇaṃ ajānitvā (knowing no measure) Pv-a 130.

3. With double acc.: to recognize as, to see in, take for, identify as, etc (cp. Caus.): petaṃ maṃ jānāhi “see in me a Peta Pv ii.912 (= upadhārehi Pv-a 119); bhadd’ itthiyā ti maṃ aññaṃsu (they knew me as = they called me Vv 224.

IV. Various: 1. Grd. ñeyya as nt. = knowledge (cp ñāṇa): yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ (knowledge coincides with the knowable, or: his knowledge is in proportion to the k., i.e. he knows all) Nd ii.2352m ñāṇaṃ atikkamitvā ñeyyapatho n’ atthi “beyond knowledge there is no way of knowledge” ib.; ñeyyasāgara the ocean of knowledge Pv-a 1.

2. Caus jānāpeti to make known, to inform, or (with attānaṃ to identify, to reveal oneself Ja i.107 (att. ajānāpetvā) vi.363; Vism 92 (att.); Pv-a 149 (att.); Dhp-a ii.62.

Vedic jña, jānāti *genē & *gné, cp. Gr. γιγνώσκω, γνωτός, γν ̈ωσις; Lat. nosco, notus, (i)gnarus (cp E. i-gnorant); Goth. kunnan; Ohg. kennan, Ags cnāwan = E. know

Jāni1

(f.) deprivation, loss, confiscation of property; plundering, robbery; using force, ill-treatment DN i.135 = AN i.201 (vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā); SN i.66 (hatajānisu), Ja i.55 (v.l. jāti), 212 (mahājānikara a great robber): iv.72 (dhana,˚ v.l. hāni); Dhp 138 (= Dhp-a iii.70 dhanassa jāni, v.l. hāni).

from jahati, confused in meaning with jayati. See jahati & cp. janti

Jāni2

(f.) wife, in jānipatayo (pl.) wife & husband (cp. jāyā(m)pati) AN ii.59 sq.

Jānu

(nt.) (also as jaṇṇu(ka), q.v.) the knee Ja ii.311; Ja iv.41; Ja vi.471; DN-a i.254.

-maṇḍala the knee-cap, the knee AN i.67; AN ii.21 AN iii.241 sq.; Pv-a 179.

Vedic jānu = Gr. γόνυ, Lat. genu, Goth., Ohg., etc. kniu, E. knee

Jānuka

(nt.) = jānu AN iv.102.

Jāpayati

Caus. of jayati.

Jāmātar

(& jāmāta Ja iv.219) daughter’s husband, son-inlaw Thig 422 (= Thag-a 269 duhitu pati); Ja ii.63; Ja v.442.

Vedic jāmātar. Deriv. uncertain. BR. take it as jā + mātar, the builder up of the family, supposing the case where there is no son and the husband goes to live in the wife’s family, a bīna marriage. More likely fr. ldg *gem, to marry. Cp. Gr.γαμέω· γαμβρός, Lat. gener

Jāyati

(jāyate) to be born, to be produced, to arise, to be reborn. Pres. 3rd pl. jāyare Ja iii.459; Ja iv.53; Mil 337; ppr, jāyanto Snp 208; aor jāyi Ja iii.391; inf. jātum Ja i.374jāyati (loko) jīyati, miyati one is born, gets old, dies DN ii.30; Vism 235. Kaṭṭhā jāyati jātavedo out of fire-wood is born the fire Snp 462Vin ii.95 = Vin ii.305; Snp 114, Snp 296, Snp 657; Dhp 58, Dhp 193, Dhp 212, Dhp 282; Pv iii.114 (are reborn as). Cp vi˚.

from jan, see janati

Jāyampatikā

(pl.) wife & husband Vv-a 286.;

see jayampatikā & cp. jāyāpatī

Jāyā

(f.) wife Vin ii.259 = Vin ii.264; Ja iv.285.

-patī (pl.) husband & wife Pv-a 159; Dāvs v.2.

from jan

Jāyikā

f. (cp. jāyā) wife MN i.451.

Jāra

a paramour, adulterer Ja i.293; Ja ii.309. f. ˚t adulteress Vin ii.259, Vin ii.268; Vin iii.83.

Vedic jāra

Jāla1

(nt.) a net; netting, entanglement (lit. or fig.): snare, deceptíon (= māyā) ■ A I.it. Nd ii.260 (= suttajāla, a plaiting of threads); Snp-a 115 Snp-a 263 (= suttamaya) DN i.45 (anto-jālikata caught in a net); Snp 62, Snp 71, Snp 213, Snp 669; Ja i.52; Ja vi.139 ■ kinkiṇika a row of bells DN ii.183; muttā˚ a net of pearls Ja i.9; Vv-a 40; loha˚ Pv-a 153; hema˚ Vv 35; a fowler’s net Dhp 174; a spider’s web Dhp 347; nets for hair Ja vi.188 pabbata˚ a chain of mountains Ja ii.399; sirā˚ network of veins Ja v.69; Pv-a 68 ■ Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 90 ■ B. Fig. Very often appld to the snares of Māra: SN i.48 (maccuno); Snp 357 (id.); Dhp-a iii.175 (Māra˚); Snp 527 (deception); taṇhā˚ the snare of worldly thirst (cp. ˚tanhā) MN i.271; Thag 306; Snp-a 351 kāma˚ Thag 355; moha˚ SN iii.83; mohasama Dhp 251 diṭṭhi˚ the fallacies of heresy DN i.46; Ja vi.220; ñāṇa the net of knowledge Vv-a 63; Dhp-a iii.171. bhumma (vijjā) “earthly net,” i.e. gift of clearsight extending over the earth Snp-a 353.

-akkhi a mesh of a net Ja i.208: -taṇhā the net of thirst Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; Dhs-a 367; -pūpa a “netcake”? Dhp-a i.319; -hatthapāda (adj.) having net-like hands & feet (one of the 32 marks of a Mahāpurisa prob. with reference to long nails DN ii.17 (see Dial. ii.14, note 3), cp. jālitambanakhehi Vv 8116 (expld at Vv-a 315: jālavantehi abhilohita-nakkehi. Tena jāli (v.l. jāla-) hatthataṃ mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇaṃ tambanakhataṃ anuvyañ anañ ca dasseti).

Vedic jāla, prob. from jaṭ; to plait, make a tangle cp. jaṭita & jaṭā; on l:ṭ cp. phulla: sphuṭa cāru: cāṭu; cela: ceṭa

Jāla2

glow, blaze Ja v.326; Pv-a 52 (= tejas), 154 (raṃsi˚); Mil 357; Vism 419 (kappavināsaka˚).

-roruva Name of one of the two Roruva hells (“blazes” Ja v.271; -sikhā a glowing crest i.e. a flame Nd ii.11 (= accī).

Sk. jvāla, from jalati

Jālaka

(nt.) 1. a net Ja vi.536; Dāvs v.51. - 2. a bud AN iv.117 sq. (˚jāta in bud) ■ f. jālikā chain armour Mil 199.

jāla1 + ka

Jālā

(f.) a flame Ja i.216, Ja i.322; Mil 148, Mil 357.

see jāla2

Jālin

(adj.-n.) “having a net,” ensnaring, deceptive: (a) lit. a fisherman Ja ii.178 ■ (b) fig. usually in f ˚inī of tanhā (ensnarer, witch) SN i.107 = Dhp 180; AN ii.211 Thag 162, Thag 908; Dhs 1059; Vism 1; Dhs-a 363; cp Mvu i.166; Mvu iii.92.

Jāleti

to cause to burn, to light, kindle Ja ii.104; Ja iv.290; Ja v.32.

caus. of jalati. See also jaleti

-Ji

(adj ■ suffix) winning, victorious: sangāma˚ victorious in fight, in sangāmaj uttama “greatest of conquerors” Dhp 103; sabba SN iv.83.

From jayati to conquer

Jigacchā

(f.) see jighacchā.

Jigiṃsaka

(adj.) one who wishes to gain, desirous of, pursuing Snp 690.

see next

Jigiṃsati

to desire, to wish to acquire, to covet Snp 700; Ja ii.285; Ja iii.172 (v.l. BB. jigissaṃ); iv.406 (v.l. SS. jihiṃ˚, BB. jigī˚); v.372; vi.268. As jigīsati Thag 1110.

Desid. of ji, jayati. On etym. see also Kern, Toev. p. 44

Jigiṃsanatā

(f.) desire for, covetousness Vb 353 (v.l. BB. nijigīsanatā); cp. Vism. 29

n. abstr. fr. jigiṃsati

Jigucchaka

(adj.) one who dislikes or disapproves of MN i.327 (paṭhavī˚, āpa˚ etc.) Mil 343.

Jigucchati

to shun, avoid, loathe, detest, to be disgusted with or horrified at (c. instr.) DN i.213 (iddhi-pāṭihāriyena aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi j.): AN iv.174 (kāyaduccaritena); Snp 215 (kammehi pāpakehi; Snp-a 266 = hiriyati); Ja ii.287; Pug. 36 ■ ppr. jigucchamāna Iti 43; grd. jigucchitabba AN i.126; pp. jigucchita Snp 901 ■ See also jeguccha, jegucchin.

Desid. of gup

Jigucchana

(nt.) dislike, contempt, disgust Vism 159; Pv-a 120.

Jigucchā

(f.) disgust for, detestation, avoidance, shunning: tapo˚ (detesting asceticism) DN i.174; SN i.67; AN ii.200 jigucchabībhaccha-dassana detestable & fearful-looking Pv-a 56.; Note. A diff. spelling, digucchā, occurs at Dhs-a 210.

Jighacchati

to have a desire to eat, to be hungry DN ii.266; pp. jighacchita Dhp-a ii.145.

Desid. to ghasati, eat

Jighacchā

(f.) appetite, hunger, often combd with pipāsā, desire to drink, thirst, e.g. SN i.18; AN ii.143, AN ii.153; Mil 304MN i.13, MN i.114; MN i.364; MN iii.97, MN iii.136; AN iii.163; Dhp 203 (j. paramā rogā); Ja ii.445; Ja iii.19 (˚abhibhūta = chāta); Mil 204, Mil 304; Sdhp 118, Sdhp 388 Cp. khudā & chāta.; Note. A diff. spelling as dighacchā occurs at AN ii.117.

from jighacchati

Jiñjuka

the Gunja shrub (Abrus precatorius) Ja iv.333 (akkhīni j. ˚phalasadisāni, cp. in same application guñjā); v.156 (j. ˚phalasannibha); Dhp-a i.177 (˚gumba).

Jiṇṇa

1. decayed, broken up, frail, decrepit, old: vuḍḍha mahallaka andhagata vayo-anupatta Nd ii.261; jarājiṇṇatāya jiṇṇa DN-a i.283Vin ii.189; DN i.114; MN ii.48 sq., 66; AN ii.249; AN iv.173; Snp 1 (urago va jiṇṇaṃ tacaṃ jahāti); Pv i.121 (same simile); Snp 1120 Snp 1144; Ja i.58; Ja iii.22 (-pilotikā worn-out rags); Dhp 155 Dhp 260; Pv ii.114 (jarājiṇṇa Pv-a 147); Pp 33; Vism 119 (˚vihārā), 356 (˚sandamānikā), 357 (˚koṭṭha); Thag-a 213 (-ghara a tumble-down house); Pv-a 40 (-goṇa = jaraggava), 55 (of a roof). Cp. ˚tara Ja iv.108.

2. digested Ja ii.362

pp. of jarati

Jiṇṇaka

(adj.) = jiṇṇa Snp 98, Snp 124; Ja iv.178, Ja iv.366; Sdhp 299 (sālā).

Jiṇṇatā

(f.) decrepitude DN-a i.283 (jarā˚).

cp. jiṇṇa, jaratā & jīraṇatā

Jita

conquered, subdued, mastered: (nt.) victory. jitā me pāpakā dhammā Vin i.8; Dhp 40, Dhp 104 (attā jitaṃ seyyo for attā jito seyyo see Dhp-a ii.228), 105, 179; Vv 6427 (jitindriya one whose senses are mastered, cp. guttindriya) ■ Cp. vi˚.

pp. of jayati, conquer

Jitatta

(nt.) mastery, conquest Vv-a 284.

n. abstr. of jita

Jina

conquering, victorious, often of the Buddha, “Victor”: jitā me pāpakā dhammā tasmâhaṃ Upaka jino ti Vin i.8 = MN i.171; Vin v.217; Snp 379, Snp 697, Snp 989, Snp 996. magga˚ conqueror of the Path Snp 84 sq.; saṃsuddha˚ (id.) Snp 372. Cp khetta˚. In other connections: Pv iv.333; Thig 419 (jin’ amhase rūpinaṃ Lacchiṃ expld at Thag-a 268 as jinā amhase jinā vat’ amha rūpavatiṃ Siriṃ).

-cakka the Buddha’s reign, rule, authority Ja iv.100 -putta disciple of the B. Mil 177; -bhūmi the ground or footing of a conqueror Pv-a 254; -sāsana the doctrine of the B. Dpvs iv.3, 10.

pp. med. of jayati

Jināti

= jayati (jeti). See also vi˚.

Jimha

(adj.) crooked, oblique, slant, fig. dishonest, false (cp. vanka, opp. uju | MN i.31 (+ vanka) AN v.289, AN v.290; Ja i.290 (spelled jima); iii.111 = v.222 vi.66; Vism 219 (ajimha = uju); Pv-a 51 (citta˚ vanka… ; opp. uju). Cp. kuṭila.

Vedic jihma

Jimhatā

(f.) crookedness, deceit (opp. ujutā) Dhs 50, Dhs 51 (+ vankatā); Vb 359.

n. abstr. to jimha

Jimheyya

(nt.) crookedness, deceit, fraud MN i.340 (sāṭheyyāni kūṭeyyāni vankeyyāni j.˚); AN iv.189 (id.) v.167.

from jimha

Jiyā

(f.) a bow string MN i.429 (five kinds); Ja ii.88 Ja iii.323; Vism 150; DN-a i.207. -kāra bowstring-maker Mil 331.

Vedic jyā = Gr. βιός bow, cp. also Lat. filum thread

Jivhā

(f.) the tongue. (a) physically: Vin i.34; AN iv.131; Snp 673, Snp 716; Dhp 65 Dhp 360; Ja ii.306; Pv-a 99 (of Petas: visukkha-kanthaṭṭha j.), 152 ■ Of the tongue of the mahāpurusha which could touch his ears & cover his forehead: Snp 1022; p. 108; & pahūta-jivhatā the characteristic of possessing a prominent tongue (as the 27th of the 32 Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni) DN i.106 = Snp p.107; DN ii.18 -dujjivha (adj.) having a bad tongue (of a poisonous snake) AN iii.260 ■ (b) psychologically: the sense of taste. It follows after ghāna (smell) as the 4th sense in the enumn of sense-organs (jivhāya rasaṃ sāyati Nd ii.under rūpa; jivhā-viññeyya rasa DN i.245; DN ii.281; MN ii.42) Vin i.34; DN iii.102, DN iii.226; MN i.191; Vism 444.

-agga the tip of the tongue AN iii.109; AN iv.137; Dhp-a ii.33. -āyatana the organ of taste DN iii.243, DN iii.280, DN iii.290; Dhs 585, Dhs 609, Dhs 653; -indriya the sense of taste DN iii.239; Dhs 585, Dhs 609, Dhs 972; -nittaddana (corr. to -nitthaddhana tying the tongue by means of a spell DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.96) -viññāṇa the cognition of taste MN i.112; DN iii.243; Dhs 556, Dhs 612, Dhs 632; -samphassa contact with the sense of taste SN i.115; DN iii.243; Dhs 585, Dhs 632, Dhs 787.

Vedic jihvā, cp. Lat. lingua (older dingua); Goth. tuggo; Ohg. zunga; E. tongue

Jīna

diminished, wasted, deprived of (with acc. or abl.) having lost; with acc.: Ja iii.153, Ja iii.223, Ja iii.335 Ja v.99 (atthaṃ: robbed of their possessions; Com parihīna vinaṭṭha) ■ with abl.: Ja v.401 (read jīnā dhanā).

pp. of jīyati

Jīyati

to become diminished, to be deprived, to lose (cp. jayati, jāni) to decay; to become old (cp. jarati, jiṇṇa) jīyasi Ja v.100 jīyanti Ja iii.336 (dhanā); jīyittha SN i.54; Ja i.468; mā jīyi do not be deprived of (ratiṃ) Ja iv.107. Koci kvaci na jīyati mīyati (cp. jāyati) DN ii.30; cakkhūni jīyare the eyes will become powerless Ja vi.528 (= jīyissanti) grd. jeyya: see ajeyya2. Cp. parijīyati. Sometimes spelt jiyy˚: jiyyati Ja vi.150; jiyyāma Ja ii.75 (we lose parihāyāma). Pp. jīna, q.v.

Pass. of ji, cp. Sk. jyāti & jīryate

Jīraka1

digestion, in ajīrakena by want or lack of digestion Ja ii.181. See ajīraka.

Vedic jīra, lively, alert, cp. jīvati & Gr.; διερός, Lat. viridis

Jīraka2

cummin-seed Mil 63; Ja i.244; Ja ii.363; Vv-a 186.

Jīraṇa

(nt.) decaying, getting old Dhtp 252.

fr. jīr

Jīraṇatā

(f.) the state of being decayed or aged, old age decay, decrepitude MN i.49; SN ii.2; Nd ii.252 = Dhs 644; Pv-a 149. Jirati & Jirayati;

n. abstr. of jīr = jar, see jarati; cp. jarā & jiṇṇatā

Jīrati & Jīrayati

1. to destroy, bring to ruin, injure, hurt Vin i.237 (jīrati); Ja v.501 (v.l. BB for jarayetha, Com. vināseyya) = vi.375; Pv-a 57. 2. (cp. jīyati) to get old AN iii.54 (jarā-dhammaṃ mā jīri “old age may not get old,” or “the law of decay may not work”); Vism 235 (where id. p. DN ii.30 reads jīyati); Dhp-a i.11 (cakkhūni jīranti).

3. (intrs.) to be digested Vism 101. Jireti & Jirapeti;

Caus. of jarati

Jīreti & Jīrāpeti

to work out, to digest Ja i.238, Ja i.274 (jīreti); Dhp-a i.171. Appl to bhati, wages: bhatiṃ ajīrāpetva not working off the w. Ja ii.309, Ja ii.381; jīrāpeti as “destroy” at Thag-a 269 in expln of nijjareti (+ vināseti).

Verbal formation from jīra1

Jīva1

(adj.-n.) 1. the soul. Sabbe jīvā all the souls, enumd with sattā pāṇā bhūta in the dialect used by the followers of Gosāla DN i.53 (= DN-a i.161 jīvasaññī). “taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīraṃ udāhu aññaṃ j. aññaṃ s.” (is the body the soul, or is the body one thing and the soul another?) see D i.157 188; ii.333, 336, 339; SN iv.392 sq.; MN i.157, MN i.426 sq. AN ii.41 ■ Also in this sense at Mil 30, Mil 54, Mil 86Vin iv.34; SN iii.215, SN iii.258 sq.; SN iv.286; SN v.418; AN v.31, AN v.186 AN v.193.

2. life, in yāvajīvaṃ as long as life lasts, for life, during (his) lifetime DN iii.133; Vin i.201; Dhp 64; Ja ii.155; Pv-a 76.

-gāhaṃ (adv.) taken alive, in phrase j.˚ gaṇhāti or gaṇhāpeti SN i.84; Ja i.180; Ja ii.404; cp. karamara; -loka the animate creation Ja iii.394; -sūla “life-pale,” a stake for execution Ja ii.443; -sokin (= sokajīvin) leading a life of sorrow Ja vi.509.

Sk. jīva, Idg. *gīṷos = Gr. βίος, Lat. vīvus, Goth. quius, Ohg. queck, E. quick, Lith. gyvas

Jīva2

(nt.) the note of the jīvaka bird Sum. V. on DN iii.201.

Jīvaka

(adj.) = jīva, in bandhu˚; Name of a plant Vv-a 43 ■ f. ˚ikā q.v. Jivam-jivaka

Jīvaṃ-jīvaka

(m. onom.) name of a bird, a sort of pheasant (or partridge?), which utters a note sounding like jīvaṃ jīva DN iii.201; Ja v.406, Ja v.416; Ja vi.276, Ja vi.538. With this cp. the Jain phrase jīvaṃjīveṇa gacchaï jīvaṃjīveṇaṃ ciṭṭhaï, Weber Bhagavatī pp. 289, 290, with doubtful interpretation (“living he goes with life”? or “he goes like the j bird”?).

Fausböll reads jīvajīvaka in all the Jātaka passages. Speyer Avs ii.227 has jīvañjīvaka

Jīvati

to live be alive, live by, subsist on (c. instr. or nissāya). Imper pres. jīva Snp 427, very freq. with ciraṃ live long… as a salutation & thanksgiving. ciraṃ jīva Ja vi.337 c. jīvāhi Snp 1029; Pv ii.333; c. jīvantu Pv i.55 ■ pot jīve Snp 440, Snp 589; Dhp 110 ■ ppr. jīvaṃ Snp 427, Snp 432; ppr. med. jīvamāna Ja i.307; Pv-a 39 ■ inf. jīvituṃ Ja i.263; Dhp 123Snp 84 sq., 613 sq., 804; Dhp 197; Ja iii.26; Ja iv.137; Ja vi.183 (jīvare); Pv-a 111.

Vedic jīvati, cp. jinoti (jinvati); Dhtp 282: pāṇadhāraṇe *gei̯é = Gr. βίομαι & ζώω, ζ ̈ην; Lat. vīvo Goth. ga-quiunan; Mhg. quicken, cp. E. quicken

Jīvana

(nt.) living, means of subsistence, livelihood Pv-a 161. Spelt jīvāna (v.l. jīvino) (adj.) at Ja iii.353 (yācana˚).

Jīvamānaka

(adj.) living, alive Vism 194.

ppr. med. of jīvati + ka

Jīvikā

(f.) living, livelihood SN iii.93; AN v.87, AN v.210; Ja iv.459; Mil 122; Snp-a 466. Freq. in combn ˚ṃ kappeti to find or get one’s living: Ja ii.209; Pv-a 40, etc.; ˚kappaka finding one’s livelihood (c. ger by) Ja ii.167. Cp. next.

abstr. fr. jīvaka

Jīvita

(nt.) (individual) life, lifetime, span of life; living, livelihood (cp jīvikā) Vin ii.191; SN i.42; SN iv.169, SN iv.213; MN ii.73 (appaṃ) AN i.155, AN i.255; AN iii.72; AN iv.136 (appakaṃ parittaṃ); Snp 181 Snp 440, Snp 574, Snp 577, Snp 931, Snp 1077; Dhp 110, Dhp 111, Dhp 130; Ja i.222; Pv i.1111 (ittaraṃ); ii.67 (vijahati); Dhs 19, Dhs 295; Vism 235, Vism 236; Pts ii.245; Pv-a 40 ■ jīvitā voropeti to deprive of life, to kill Vin iii.73; DN iii.235; MN ii.99; AN iii.146 AN iii.436; AN iv.370 sq.; Pv-a 67.

-āsā the desire for life AN i.86; -indriya the faculty of life, vitality Vin iii.73; SN v.204; Kv 8, 10; Mil 56; Dhs 19; Vism 32, Vism 230 (˚upaccheda destruction of life) 447 (def.); Dhp-a ii.356 (˚ṃ upacchindati to destroy life) Vv-a 72; -kkhaya the dissolution of life, i.e. death Ja i.222; Pv-a 95, Pv-a 111; -dāna “the gift of life,” saving or sparing life Ja i.167; Ja ii.154; -nikanti desire for life AN iv.48; -parikkhārā (pl.) the requisites of life MN i.104 sq. AN iii.120; AN v.211; -pariyādāna the cessation or consummation of life DN i.46 (= DN-a i.128); SN ii.83; AN iv.13 -pariyosāna the end of life, i.e. death Ja i.256; Pv-a 73; -mada the pride of life, enumd under the 3 madā viz. ārogya, yobbana, j.: of health, youth, life DN iii.220; AN i.146; AN iii.72; -rūpa (adj.) living (lifelike) Ja ii.190 -saṅkhaya = ˚khaya Snp 74; Dhp 331; Nd ii.262 (= ˚pariyosāna); -hetu (adv.) on the ground of life, for the sake of life AN iv.201, AN iv.270

Vedic jīvita, orig. pp. of jīvati “that which is lived,” cp. same formation in Lat. vīta = *vīvita; Gr.βιότη living, sustenace, & δίαιτα, “diet”

Jīvin

(adj.) (usually -˚) living, leading a life (of… ) SN i.42, SN i.61; Snp 88, Snp 181; Dhp 164; Pv-a 27. Cp. dīgha˚ dhamma˚.

Juṇhā

(f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, see also P. dosinā) moonlight, a moonlit night, the bright fortnight of the month (opp kālapakkha) Vin i.138, Vin i.176; Ja i.165; Ja iv.498 (˚pakkha).

Juti

(f.) splendour, brightness, effulgence, light Ja ii.353; Pv-a 122, Pv-a 137, Pv-a 198. The spelling juti at MN i.328 (in combn gati + juti) seems to be faulty for cuti (so as v.l. given on p. 557).

-dhara (jutin˚) carrying or showing light, shining resplendent, brilliant SN i.121; Ja ii.353; Dhp-a i.432.

Sk. jyuti & dyuti, to dyotate, see jotati

Jutika

(adj.) (-˚) having light, in mahā˚; of great splendour DN ii.272; AN i.206; AN iv.248.

Jutimatā

(f.) splendour, brightness, prominence Ja 14; v.405

fr. jutimant

Jutimant

(adj.) brilliant, bright; usually fig. as prominent in wisdom: “bright.” distinguished, a great light (in this sense often as v.l. to jātimant) DN ii.256 (ī); SN v.24; Dhp 89 (= Dhp-a ii.163 ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā) Snp 508; Pv iv.135 (= Pv-a 230 ñāṇajutiyā jutimā).

fr. juti

Jutimantatā

(f.) splendour Snp-a 453.

fr. jutimant

Juhati

to pour (into the fire), to sacrifice, offer; to give, dedicate AN ii.207 (aggiṃ) Snp 1046 (= Nd ii.263 deti cīvaraṃ, etc.); 428 (aggihuttaṃ jūhato), p. 79 (aggiṃ); Pp 56; fut. juhissati SN i.166 (aggiṃ); caus. hāpeti2 pp. huta; see also hava, havi, homa.

Sk. juhoti, *gheu(d); cp. Gr. ξέω, ξύτρα, ξϋλος; Lat. fundo; Goth. giutan, Ohg. giozan

Juhana

(nt.) offering, sacrifice DN i.12, Ja ii.43.

fr. juhati

Jūta

(nt.) gambling, playing at dice DN i.7 (˚ppamādaṭṭhāna cp. DN-a i.85)≈; iii.182, 186 (id.); Ja i.290; Ja iii.198 Ja vi.281; Dhp-a ii.228. ˚ṃ kīḷati to play at d. Ja i.289 Ja iii.187 ■ See also dūta2.

-gīta a verse sung at playing dice (for luck) Ja i.289 Ja i.293; -maṇḍala dice board (= phalaka Ja i.290) Ja i.293 -sālā gambling hall Ja vi.281.

Sk. dyūta pp. of div, dīvyati, P. dibbati to play at dice

Je

(part.) exclamation: oh! ah! now then! Vin i.232, Vin i.292 (gaccha je); MN i.126; Vv-a 187, Vv-a 207; Dhp-a iv.105.

Jeguccha

(adj.) & jegucchiya (J ii.437) contemptible, loathsome, detestable Ja iv.305; Vism 250; Thag 1056; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 192 (asuci + ). Cp pari˚ ■ a˚ not despised Snp 852; Thag 961.

sec. der. fr. jigucchā

Jegucchitā

(f.) avoidance, detestation, disgust Vin i.234; MN i.30; AN iv.182 sq.

see jigucchita

Jegucchin

(adj.) one who detests or avoids (usually -˚) MN i.77; (parama˚), 78; AN iv.174, AN iv.182 sq., 188 sq., Mil 352 (pāpa˚).

Jeṭṭha

(adj.) better (than others), best first, supreme; first-born; elder brother or sister, elder eldest DN ii.15 (aggo jeṭṭho seṭṭho = the first, foremost & best of all); AN i.108; AN ii.87; AN iii.152; AN iv.175; Ja i.138 (˚putta); ii.101 (˚bhātā), 128 (˚yakkhinī); iv.137.

-apacāyin, in phrase kule-j ■ apacāyin paying due respect to the clan-elders DN iii.72, DN iii.74; SN v.468; Vism 415; Dhp-a i.265. Same for ˚apacāyikā (f.) honour to… Nd ii.294, & ˚apacāyitar DN iii.70, DN iii.71, DN iii.145, DN iii.169 -māsa Name of a month Snp-a 359.

compar ■ superl. formation of jyā power. Gr. βία, from ji in jināti & jayati “stronger than others, used as superl. (& compar.) to vuḍḍha old-elder, eldest The compar. *jeyya is a grammarian’s construction see remarks on kaniṭṭha

Jeṭṭhaka

= jeṭṭha Ja i.253; Ja ii.101 (˚tāpasa); iii.281 (˚kam māra: head of the silversmith’s guild); iv.137, 161 v.282; Pv i.113 (putta = pubbaja Pv-a 57); Dhp-a iii.237 (˚sīla); iv.111 (id.); Pv-a 36 (˚bhariyā), 42 (˚pesakāra head of the weaver’s guild), 47 (˚vāṇija), 75.

Jeti

see jayati.

Jevanīya

(nt.) a kind of (missile) weapon AN iv.107 = AN iv.110 (combd with āvudha & salāka; vv.ll. vedhanika jeganika, jevanika).

Jotaka

(adj.) illuminating, making light; explaining Ja ii.420; Dpvs xiv.50; Mil 343 (= lamp-lighter) ■ f. ˚ikā explanation, commentary, Name of several Commentaries, e.g. the Paramatthajotikā on the Sutta Nipāta (Kp-a 11); cp. the similar expression dīpanī (Paramatthadīpanī on Th 2; Vv & Pv.).; Jotika Np. Dhp-a i.385 (Jotiya); Vism 233, Vism 382.

from juti

Jotati

to shine, be splendid Jˋ i.53; vi.100, 509; Pv-a 71 (jotantī = obhāsentī ).

Sk. dyotate to shine, *dei̯ā; cp. Gr. δέαται shine, δ ̈ηλος clear; also Sk. in dīpyate; Lat. dies. Dhtp 120 gives jut in meaning “ditti,” i.e. light

Jotana

(nt.) & jotanā (f.) illumination, explanation Ja vi.542; Pts ii.112; Vv-a 17 (˚nā).

cp. Sk. dyotana

Joti

(m. nt.) 1. light, splendour, radiance SN i.93; AN ii.85; Vv 162.

2. a star: see cpds.

3. fire SN i.169; Thag 415; Ja iv.206; sajotibhūta set on fire SN ii.260; AN iii.407 sq.; Ja i.232.

-parāyaṇa (adj.) attaining to light or glory SN i.93; AN ii.85; DN iii.233; Pp 51; -pāvaka a brilliant fire Vv 162 (expl. Vv-a 79: candima-suriya-nakkhatta tāraka-rūpānaṃ sādhāraṇa-nāmaṃ); -pāsāṇa a burning glass made of a crystal Dhp-a iv.209; -mālikā a certain torture (setting the body on fire: making a fiery garland MN i.87 = AN i.47 = AN ii.122 = Nd i.154 = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197 -rasa a certain jewel (wishing stone) Vv-a 111, Vv-a 339; Dhp-a i.198; Mil 118; -sattha the science of the stars astronomy: one of the 6 Vedic disciplines: see chaḷanga cp. jotisā.

Sk. jyotis (cp. dyuti) nt. to dyotate, see jotati

Jotimant

(adj.) luminous, endowed with light or splendour, bright, excellent (in knowledge) Snp 348 (= paññājoti-sampanna Snp-a 348).

joti + mant, cp. also P. jutimant

Jotisā

(f.) astronomy Mil 3.

= Sk. jyotiṣa (nt.)

Joteti

(a) trs. to cause to shine, illuminate, make clear, explain AN ii.51 = Ja v.509 (bhāsaye jotaye dhammaṃ; Gloss Ja v.510 katheyya for joteyya = jotaye Iti 108; Ja ii.208; Pv-a 18 ■ (b) intrs. to shine Dhp-a ii.163 (ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā); pp. jotita resplendent Pv-a 53.

Jh.

Caus. of jotati

Jh

Jhatta

set on fire, consumed, dried up (w. hunger or thirst: parched combd w. chāta Ja ii.83; Ja vi.347.

pp. of jhāpeti; cp. ñatta → *jñāpayati

Jhatvā

see jhāpeti.

Jhasa

(?) a window or opening in general Ja ii.334.

Jhāna1

(nt.) literally meditation. But it never means vaguely meditation It is the technical term for a special religious experience reached in a certain order of mental states. It was originally divided into four such states. These may be summarized: 1. The mystic, with his mind free from sensuous and worldly ideas, concentrates his thoughts on some special subject (for instance, the impermanence of all things). This he thinks out by attention to the facts, and by reasoning. 2. Then uplifted above attention & reasoning, he experiences joy & ease both of body and mind 3. Then the bliss passes away, & he becomes suffused with a sense of ease, and 4. he becomes aware of pure lucidity of mind & equanimity of heart. The whole really forms one series of mental states, & the stages might have been fixed at other points in the series. So the Dhamma-saṃgani makes a second list of five stages by calling, in the second jhāna, the fading away of observation one stage, & the giving up of sustained thinking another stage (Dhs 167–⁠175). And the Vibhaṃga calls the first jhāna the; pañcaṅgika-jhāna because it, by itself, can be divided into five parts (Vbh 267). The state of mind left after the experience of the four jhānas is described as follows at DN i.76: “with his heart thus serene, made pure, translucent, cultured, void of evil supple, ready to act, firm and imperturbable.” It will be seen that there is no suggestion of trance, but rather of an enhanced vitality. In the descriptions of the crises in the religious experiences of Christian saints and mystics, expressions similar to those used in the jhānas are frequent (see F. Heiler Die Buddhistische Versenkung, 1918). Laymen could pass through the four jhānas (S iv.301). The jhānas are only a means, not the end. To imagine that experiencing them was equivalent to Arahantship (and was therefore the end aimed at) is condemned (DN i.37 ff.) as a deadly heresy In late Pali we find the phrase arūpajjhānā. This is merely a new name for the last four of the eight Vimokkhā, which culminate in trance. It was because they

made this the aim of their teaching that Gotama rejected the doctrines of his two teachers. Āḷāra-Kāḷāma Uddaka-Rāmaputta (MN i.164 f.) ■ The jhānas are discussed in extenso & in various combinations as regards theory & practice at: DN i.34 sq.; 73 sq.; SN ii.210 sq.; SN iv.217 sq., 263 sq.; v.213 sq.; MN i.276 sq. 350 sq., 454 sq.; AN i.53, AN i.163; AN ii.126; AN iii.394 sq. AN iv.409 sq.; AN v.157 sq.; Vin iii.4; Nd ii.on Snp 1119 & s.v. Pts i.97 sq.; Pts ii.169 sq.; Vb 257 sq.; 263 sq.; 279 sq. Vism 88, Vism 415 ■ They are frequently mentioned either as a set, or singly, when often the set is implied (as in the case of the 4th jh.). Mentioned as jh. 1

4 e.g. at Vin i.104; Vin ii.161 (foll. by sotāpanna, etc.); DN ii.156, DN ii.186 DN iii.78, DN iii.131, DN iii.222; SN ii.278 (nikāmalābhin); AN ii.36 (id.) iii.354; SN iv.299; SN v.307 sq.; MN i.21, MN i.41, MN i.159, MN i.203, MN i.247 MN i.398, MN i.521; MN ii.15, MN ii.37; Snp 69, Snp 156, Snp 985; Dhp 372; Ja i.139; Vv-a 38; Pv-a 163 ■ Separately: the 1st: AN iv.422 AN v.135; MN i.246, MN i.294; Mil 289; Mil 1st

3rd: AN iii.323; MN i.181; MN i.1st & 2nd: MN ii.28; MN ii.4th: AN ii.41; AN iii.325 AN v.31; DN iii.270; Vv-a 4 ■ See also Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh Psych. (Quest Series) p. 107 sq.; Dhs. trsl. p. 52 sq. Index to Saṃyutta N. for more refs.; also Kasiṇa.

-anuyutta applying oneself to meditation Snp 972 -aṅga a constituent of meditation (with ref. to the 4 jhānas) Vism 190. -kīḷā sporting in the exercise of meditation Ja iii.45. -pasuta id. (+ dhīra) Snp 709; Dhp 181 (cp. Dhp-a iii.226); -rata fond of meditation SN i.53, SN i.122; SN iv.117; Iti 40; Snp 212, Snp 503, Snp 1009; Vv 5015 Vv-a 38; -vimokkha emancipation reached through jhāna AN iii.417; AN v.34; -sahagata accompanied by jh (of paññābala) AN i.42.

from jhāyati,1 BSk. dhyāna. The (popular etym-) expln of jhāna is given by Bdhgh at Vism 150 as follows: “ārammaṇ’ ûpanijjhānato paccanīka-jhāpanato vā jhānaṃ,” i.e. called jh. from meditation on objects & from burning up anything adverse

Jhāna2

(nt.) conflagration, fire DN iii.94; Ja i.347.

from jhāyati2

Jhānika

(adj.) belonging to the (4) meditations Vism 111.

fr. jhāna1

Jhāpaka

(adj.) one who sets fire to (cp. jhāpeti), an incendiary Ja iii.71.

Jhāpana

(nt.) setting fire to, consumption by fire, in sarīra˚-kicca cremation Vv-a 76.

Jhāpita

set on fire Mil 47; Vism 76 (˚kāla time of cremation).

pp. jhāpeti

Jhāpeti

1. to set fire to, to burn, to cook Vin iv.265; Ja i.255, Ja i.294; Dhp-a ii.66; Pv-a 62.

2. to destroy, to bring to ruin, to kill (see Kern, Toev., p. 37 sq. Ja iii.441 (= ḍahati pīḷeti); Vv-a 38 (= jhāyati1, connected w. jhāna: to destroy by means of jhāna); inf jhāpetuṃ Ja vi.300 (+ ghātetuṃ hantuṃ); ger. jhatvā ref. SN i.161 (reads chetvā) = Ne 145 (reads jhitvā, with v.l. chetvā) SN i.19 (reads chetvā, vv.ll. ghatvā & jhatvā) = Ja iv.67 (T. jhatvā, v.l. chetvā; expld by kilametvā); SN i.41 (v.l. for T. chetvā, Bdhgh says “jhatvā ti vadhitvā”) Ja ii.262 (+ hantvā vadhitvā; expld by kilametvā) vi.299 (+ vadhitvā); also jhatvāna Ja iv.57 (= hantvā)-pp. jhatta & jhāpita;.

Caus. of jhāyati2

Jhāma

(adj.-n.) burning, on fire, conflagration, in ˚khetta charcoal-burner’s field Ja i.238; Ja ii.92; ˚aṅgāra a burning cinder Pv-a 90. By itself: Ja i.405; Dhp-a ii.67.

jhāyati2

Jhāmaka

Name of a plant Ja vi.537; also in ˚bhatta (?) Ja ii.288.

Jhāyaka

(adj.) one who makes a fire DN iii.94.

Jhāyati1

to meditate, contemplate think upon, brood over (c. acc.): search for, hunt after DN ii.237 (jhānaṃ); SN i.25, SN i.57; AN v.323 sq. (+ pa,˚ ni, ava˚); Snp 165, Snp 221, Snp 425, Snp 709, Snp 818 (= Nd i.149 pa˚, ni˚ ava˚); Dhp 27, Dhp 371, Dhp 395; Ja i.67, Ja i.410; Vv 5012; Pv iv.166 Mil 66; Snp-a 320 (aor. jhāyiṃsu thought of) ■ pp jhāyita.

Sk. dhyāyati, dhī; with dhīra, dhīḥ from didheti shine, perceive; cp. Goth. filu-deisei cunning, & in meaning cinteti → citta;1

Jhāyati2

to burn, to be on fire: fig. to be consumed, to waste away, to dry up DN i.50 (= jāleti DN-a i.151) iii.94 (to make a fire); Ja i.61, Ja i.62; Pv i.1110 (jhāyare v.l. BB. for ghāyire); Mil 47; Pv-a 33 (= pariḍayhati)-aor. jhāyi Dhp-a ii.240 sq ■ (fig.) Dhp 155; Ja vi.189-Caus. jhāpeti ■ Cp. khīyati2.

Sk. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāy & kṣī, cp. khara & chārikā

Jhāyana1

(nt.) meditating, in ˚sīla the practice of meditation (cp. Sk. dhyānayoga) Vv-a 38.

der. fr. jhāyati1

Jhāyana2

(nt.) cremation, burning Pp A 187.

fr. jhāyati2

Jhāyin

(adj.) pondering over (c. acc.) intent on: meditative, self-concentrated, engaged in jhāna-practice Vin ii.75; SN i.46 = SN i.52; SN ii.284; MN i.334; AN i.24; AN iii.355; AN iv.426; AN v.156, AN v.325 sq.; Snp 85 (magga˚) 638, 719, 1009, 1105; Iti 71, Iti 74, Iti 112; Ja iv.7; Dhp 23 Dhp 110, Dhp 387 (reminding of jhāyati2, cp. Dhp-a iv.144) Nd ii.264; Vv 58; Pv iv.132; Vb 342. Nd i.226 Nd ii.3422 = Vism 26 (āpādaka˚).

see jhāyati1 & jhāna

Jhitvā

is reading at Ne 145 for jhatvā (see jhāpeti).

Ñ

Ñatta

(nt.) the intellectual faculty, intelligence Dhp 72 (= Dhp-a ii.73: jānanasabhāva).

nomen agentis from jānāti

Ñatti

(f.) announcement, declaration, esp. as t. t. a motion or resolution put at a kammavācā (proceedings at a meeting of the chapter. The usual formula is “esā ñatti; suṇātu me bhante sangho”: Vin i.340; Vin iii.150, Vin iii.173, Vin iii.228 ■ ˚ṃ ṭhapeti to propose a resolution Vin iv.152Vin v.142 Vin v.217 (na c’ âpi ñatti na ca pana kammavācā). This resolution is also called a ñattikamma: Vin ii.89 Vin iv.152; Vin v.116; AN i.99. Two kinds are distinguished viz. that at which the voting follows directly upon the motion, i.e. a ñatti-dutiya-kamma, & that at which the motion is put 3 times, & is then followed (as 4th item) by the decision, i.e. a ñ-catuttha-kamma. Both kinds are discussed at Vin i.56, Vin i.317 sq.; Vin ii.89; Vin iii.156; Vin iv.152; & passim. Cp. Divy 356: jñapticaturtha Cp. āṇatti, viññatti.;

Sk. jñapti, from jñāpayati, caus of jñā

Ñatvā

etc.: see jānāti.

Ñāṇa

(nt.) knowledge, intelligence insight, conviction, recognition, opp. añāṇa avijjā, lack of k. or ignorance.

1.; Ñāṇa in the theory of cognition: it occurs in intensive couple-compounds with terms of sight as cakkhu (eye) & dassana (sight, view) e.g. in cakkhu-karaṇa ñāṇa-karaṇa “opening our eyes & thus producing knowledge” i.e. giving us the eye of knowledge (a mental eye) (see cakkhu, jānāti passati & cpd. ˚karaṇa): Bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhu-bhūto ñāṇa-bhūto (= he is one perfected in knowledge) MN i.111 = Nd ii.2353h; natthi hetu natthi paccayo ñāṇāya dassanāya ahetu apaccayo ñāṇaṃ dassanaṃ hoti “through seeing & knowing,” i.e. on grounds of definite knowledge arises the sure conviction that where there is no cause there is no consequence SN v.126. Cp. also the relation of diṭṭhi to ñāṇa. This implies that all things visible are knowable as well as that all our knowledge is based on empirical grounds yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ Nd ii.2353m; yaṃ ñāṇaṃ taṃ dassanaṃ, yaṃ dassanaṃ taṃ ñāṇaṃ Vin iii.91; ñāṇa + dassana (i.e. full vision) as one of the characteristics of Arahantship: see arahant ii.D. Cp BSk. jñānadarśana, e.g. Avs i.210.

2. Scope and

character of ñāṇa: ñ. as faculty of understanding is included in paññā (cp. wisdom = perfected knowledge) The latter signifies the spiritual wisdom which embraces the fundamental truths of morality & conviction (such as aniccaṃ anattā dukkhaṃ: Mil 42); whereas ñ. is relative to common experience (see Nd ii.2353 under cakkhumā, & on rel. of p. & ñ. Ps; i.59 sq.; 118 sq. ii.189 sq.) ■ Perception (saññā) is necessary to the forming of ñāṇa, it precedes it (DN i.185); as sure knowledge ñ. is preferable to saddhā (S iv.298); at Vin iii.91 the definition of ñ. is given with tisso vijjā (3 kinds of knowledge); they are specified at Nd ii.266 as aṭṭhasamāpatti-ñāṇa (consisting in the 8 attainments, viz jhāna & its 4 succeeding developments), pañc’ abhiññā (the 5 higher knowledges, see paññā & abhi˚), micchā (false k. or heresy). Three degrees of k. are distinguished at DN-a i.100, viz. sāvaka-pāramī-ñāṇa, paccekabuddha˚ sabbaññuta˚ (highest k. of a relig. student k. of a wise man, & omniscience). Four objects of k (as objects of truth or sammādiṭṭhi) are enum;d as dhamme ñāṇaṃ, anvaye ñ., paricchede ñ., sammuti ñ at DN iii.226, DN iii.277; other four as dukkhe ñ. (dukkha-samudaye ñ., nirodhe ñ., magge ñ. (i.e. the knowledge of the paṭicca-samuppāda) at DN iii.227; Pts i.118 Vb 235 (= sammādiṭṭhi). Right knowledge (or truth is contrasted with false k. (micchā-ñāṇa = micchādiṭṭhi): SN v.384; MN ii.29; AN ii.222; AN v.327; Vb 392. 3. Ñāṇa in application: (a) Vin i.35; DN ii.155 (opp pasāda); SN i.129 (cittamhi susamāhite ñāṇamhi vuttamānamhi); ii.60 (jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan ti ñ.: see ñ-vatthu); AN i.219 (on precedence of either samādhi or ñ.); Snp 378, Snp 789, Snp 987 (muddhani ñāṇaṃ tassa na vijjati), 1078 (diṭṭhi, suti, ñ.: doctrine, revelation personal knowledge, i.e. intelligence; differently expl at Nd ii.266), 1113; Pv iii.51 (Sugatassa ñ. is asādhāraṇaṃ) Pts i.194 sq.; Pts ii.244; Vb 306 sq. (ñ-vibhanga) 328 sq. (kammassakataṃ ñ.); Ne 15 sq.; 161 (+ ñeyya) 191 (id.) ■ (b) ñāṇaṃ hoti or uppajjati knowledge comes to (him) i.e. to reason, to arrive at a conclusion (with iti = that… ) SN ii.124 = SN iii.28 (uppajjati) DN iii.278 (id.); AN ii.211≈; iv.75; v.195; SN iii.154. See also arahant ii.D ■ (c) Var. attributes of ñ.: anuttariya AN v.37; aparapaccayā (k. of the non-effect of causation through lack of cause) SN ii.17, SN ii.78; SN iii.135 SN v.179, SN v.422 sq. (= sammādiṭṭhi), same as ahetu-ñāṇa SN v.126; asādhāraṇa (incomparable, uncommon k. AN iii.441; Pv-a 197; akuppa DN iii.273; ariya AN iii.451 pariyodāta SN i.198; bhiyyosomatta SN iii.112; yathā bhūtaṃ (proper, definite, right k.) (concerning kāya etc.) SN v.144; AN iii.420; AN v.37 ■ (d) knowledge of about or concerning, consisting in or belonging to, is expressed either by loc. or-˚ (equal to subj. or obj. gen.)-(a) with loc.: anuppāde ñ. DN iii.214, DN iii.274; anvaye DN iii.226, DN iii.277; kāye DN iii.274; khaye DN iii.214, DN iii.220 (āsavānaṃ; cp. MN i.23, MN i.183, MN i.348; MN ii.38), 275; SN ii.30 Ne 15; cutûpapāte DN iii.111, DN iii.220; dukkhe (etc. D iiii.227; SN ii.4; SN v.8, SN v.430; dhamme DN iii.226; SN ii.58 nibbāne SN ii.124 (cp. iv.86) ■ (β) as-˚: anāvaraṇa˚ DN-a i.100; ariya SN i.228; AN iii.451; khanti Pts i.106 jātissara Ja i.167; cutûpapāta MN i.22, MN i.183, MN i.347; MN ii.38 etc.; ceto-pariya DN iii.100, & ˚pariyāya S; v.160 dibbacakkhu Pts i.114; dhammaṭṭhiti SN ii.60, SN ii.124; Pts i.50; nibbidā Pts i.195; pubbe-nivāsânusati MN i.22 MN i.248, MN i.347; MN ii.38, etc.; Buddha˚ Nd ii.2353; Pts i.133 Pts ii.31, Pts ii.195; DN-a i.100; sabbaññuta Pts i.131 sq.; DN-a i.99 sq.; Pv-a 197; sekha SN ii.43, SN ii.58, SN ii.80, & asekha SN iii.83 ■ (e) aññāṇa wrong k., false view, ignorance untruth SN i.181; SN ii.92; SN iii.258 sq.; SN v.126; AN ii.11; Snp 347, Snp 839; Pts i.80; Pp 21; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061; see avijjā & micchādiṭṭhi.;

-indriya the faculty of cognition or understanding Dhs 157; -ūpapanna endowed with k. Snp 1077 (= Nd ii.266b ˚upeta); -karaṇa (adj.) giving (right) understanding enlightening, in combn w. cakkhukaraṇa (giving (in)-sight, cp. “your eyes shall be opened and ye shall be knowing good and evil” Gen. 35): kusalavitakkā anandha-karaṇā cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ Iti 82; f ■ ī (of majjhimā-paṭipadā) SN iv.331; -cakkhu the eye of k Pv-a 166; -jāla the net of k., in phrase ñāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭha coming within the net, i.e. into the range of one’s intelligence or mental eye (clear sight) Dhp-a i.26 Dhp-a ii.37, Dhp-a ii.58, Dhp-a ii.96; Dhp-a iii.171, Dhp-a iii.193; Dhp-a iv.61; Vv-a 63; -dassana “knowing and seeing,” “clear sight,” i.e. perfect knowledge; having a vision of truth, i.e. recognition of truth, philosophy, (right) theory of life, all-comprising knowledge. Defined as tisso vijjā (see above 2) at Vin iv.26; fully discussed at DN-a i.220, cp. also def. at Pts ii.244Vin ii.178. (parisuddha˚; + ājīva, dhammadesanā veyyākaraṇa); iii.90 sq.; v.164, 197; DN i.76≈(following after the jhānas as the first step of paññā, see paññā-sampadā); iii.134, 222 (˚paṭilābha) 288 (˚visuddhi); MN i.195 sq.; 202 sq., 482; ii.9, 31 Ne 17, Ne 18, Ne 28; see also vimutti˚; -dassin one who possesses perfect k. Snp 478; -patha the path of k. Snp 868; -phusanā experience, gaining of k. Dhp-a i.230 -bandhu an associate or friend of k. Snp 911; -bhūta in comb” w. cakkhubhūta, having become seeing knowing, i.e. being wise SN ii.255; SN iv.94; AN v.226 sq. -vatthūni (pl.) the objects or items of (right) knowledge which means k. of the paṭiccasamuppāda or causal connection of phenomena. As 44 (i.e. 4 X 11 all constituents except avijjā, in analogy to the 4 parts of the ariyasaccāni) SN ii.56 sq., as 77 (7 X 11) SN ii.59 sq. discussed in extenso at Vb 306

344 (called ñāṇavatthu); -vāda talk about (the attainment of supreme knowledge DN iii.13 sq.; AN v.42 sq.; -vippayutta disconnected with k. Dhs 147, Dhs 157, Dhs 270; -vimokkha emancipation through k. Pts ii.36, Pts ii.42; -visesa distinction of k., superior k. Pv-a 196; -sampayutta associated with k Dhs 1, Dhs 147, Dhs 157, etc.; Vb 169 sq., 184, 285 sq., 414 sq.

from jānāti. See also jānana. *gené, as in Gr. γν ̈ω σις (cp. gnostic), γνώμη; Lat. (co)gnitio; Goth kunpi; Ogh. kunst; E. knowledge

Ñāṇika

(adj.) in pañca˚ having five truths (of samādhi) DN iii.278.

Ñāṇin

(adj.) knowing, one who is possessed of (right) knowledge SN ii.169; AN ii.89 (sammā˚); iv.340 ■ aññāṇin not knowing, unaware Vv-a 76.

Ñāta

known, well-known experienced, brought to knowledge, realized. In Nd ii.s. v. constantly expl. by tulita tirita vibhūta vibhāvita which series is also used as expln. of diṭṭha & vidita A; v.195; Ja i.266; Snp 343 (+ yasassin); Mil 21 (id.)- aññāta not known, unknown Vin i.209; MN i.430; SN ii.281; Dhp-a i.208.

pp. of jānāti = Gr. γνωτός, Lat. (g)notus; ajñāta (P. aññāta) = α ̓́γνωτος = ignotus

Ñātaka

a relation, relative, kinsman Vin ii.194; MN ii.67; Dhp 43; Snp 263 (= Kp-a 140 ñāyante amhākaṃ ime ti ñātakā), 296, 579; Pv ii.14 (Minayeff, but Hardy ˚ika); Pv-a 19, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 62, Pv-a 69; DN-a i.90.

for *ñātika from ñāti

Ñāti

a relation, relative (= mātito pitito ca sambandhā Pv-a 25; = bandhū Pv-a 86; specialized as ˚sālohitā, see below). Pl. ñātayo (Pv i.43; Kp-a 209 Kp-a 214) and ñātī (M ii.73; Kp-a 210, cp. 213; acc. also ñātī Pv i.67); Snp 141; Dhp 139, Dhp 204, Dhp 288; Ja ii.353; Pv i.53, 122; ii.313, 67 ■ Discussed in detail with regard to its being one of the 10 paḷibodhā at Vism 94.

-kathā (boastful) talk about relatives DN i.7≈ (cp DN-a i.90); -gata coming into (the ties of) relationship Ja vi.307 (˚gataka ib. 308); -ghara the paternal home Ja i.52; -dhamma the duties of relatives Pv i.512 (= ñātīhi ñātīnaṃ kattabba-karaṇaṃ Pv-a 30); -parivatta the circle of relations DN i.61; MN i.267; Pp 57-peta a deceased relation Pv i.54; -majjhagata (adj.) in the midst of one’s relations Pp 29; -mittā (pl.) friends & relatives Dhp 219; Ja iii.396; Pv i.126; -vyasana misfortune of relatives (opp. ˚sampada) DN iii.235; enum as one of the general misfortunes under dukkha (see Nd ii.304F); -saṅgha the congregation of kinsmen, the clan AN i.152; Snp 589; -sālohita a relation by blood (contrasted with friendship: mittāmaccā Snp p.104), often with ref. to the deceased: petā ñ-sālohitā the spirits of deceased blood-relations MN i.33; AN v.132, AN v.269; Pv-a 27 Pv-a 28; -sineha the affection of relationship Pv-a 29; -hetusampatti a blessing received through the kinsmen Pv-a 27.

see janati; cp. Sk. jñāti, Gr. γνωτός, Lat. cognatus, Goth. knops

Ñāpeti

to make known, to explain, to announce Ja ii.133. Cp. jānāpeti āṇāpeti.;

Caus. of jānāti, cp. also ñatti

Ñāya

1. method, truth, system, later = logic: ˚gantha book on logic Dāvs iii.41.

2. fitness right manner, propriety, right conduct, often appld to the “right path” (ariyamagga = ariyañāya Vin i.10) DN iii.120; SN v.19, SN v.141, SN v.167 sq., 185; AN ii.95 AN iv.426; AN v.194; Dhp i.249; ariya ñ. SN ii.68; SN v.387; the causal law SN v.388; = kalyāṇa-kusala-dhammatā AN ii.36; used in apposition with dhamma and kusala DN ii.151; MN ii.181, MN ii.197; is replaced herein by sacca SN i.240; = Nibbāna at Vism 219, Vism 524; ñ ■ paṭipanna walking in the right path SN v.343; AN ii.56; AN iii.212, AN iii.286 AN v.183. -Nu

Sk. nyāya = ni + i

-Ñū

(-ññū) (adj ■ suffix) knowing, recognizing, acknowledging, in ughaṭita˚, kata˚, kāla˚, khaṇa˚, matta˚, ratta˚, vara˚ vipacita˚, veda˚, sabba˚, etc. (q.v.)-fem. abstr. ˚ñutā in same combinations.

Sk ■ jña, from jānāti, *gn: cp. P. gū → Sk. ga

Ṭan

(?) (adv.) part of sound Ja i.287 (ṭan ti saddo).

Ṭh.

Ṭh

˚Ṭha

(˚ṭṭha) (adj ■ suffix) standing, as opposed to either lying down or moving; located, being based on, founded on (e.g. appa˚ based on little DN i.143): see kappa˚ (lasting a k.), kūṭa˚ (immovable) gaha˚ (founding a house, householder), dhamma˚, nava˚ vehāsa˚ (= vihan-ga) ■ (n.) a stand i.e. a place for goṭṭha a stable.

from tiṭṭhati

Ṭhapana

(nt.) 1. setting up, placing, founding; establishment, arrangement, position Vin v.114; Ja i.99 (aggha fixing prices); Mil 352 (pāda˚); DN-a i.294; (= vidhārite); Pv-a 5 (kulavaṃsa˚).

2. letting alone, omission suspension, in pāṭimokkha˚ Vin ii.241.

Ṭhapanā

(f.) 1. arrangement DN-a i.294.

2. application of mind, attention Pp 18, Vism 278 (= appanā).

Ṭhapita

1. placed, put down; set up, arranged, often simply pleonastic for finite verb (= being): saṃharitvā ṭh. being folded up Ja i.265 (cp similar use of gahetvā c. ger.): mukkhe ṭh. Ja vi.366 ˚sankāra (dustheap) Pv-a 82; pariccajane ṭh. appointed for the distribution of gifts Pv-a 124.

2. suspended left over, set aside Vin ii.242 (pāṭimokkha).

pp. of ṭhapeti

Ṭhapeti

to place, set up, fix, arrange, establish; appoint to (c. loc.); to place aside, save, put by, leave out Vin ii.32 (pavāraṇaṃ), 191 (ucce & nīce ṭhāne to place high or low), 276 (pavāraṇaṃ); v.193 (uposathaṃ), 196 (give advice); DN i.120 (leaving out discarding); Dhp 40 (cittaṃ ṭh. make firm) Ja i.62, Ja i.138 Ja i.223, Ja i.293 (except); ii.132 (puttaṭṭhāne ṭh. as daughter) Ja ii.159; Ja vi.365 (putting by); Vv-a 63 (kasiṃ ṭhapetvā except ploughing); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 20 (varaṃ ṭhapetvā denying a wish), 39, 114 (setting up); Mil 13 (ṭhapetvā setting aside, leaving till later) ■ inf. ṭhapetuṃ Vin ii.194; Pv-a 73 (saṃharitvā ṭh. to fold up: cp. ṭhapita); grd ṭhapetabba Ja ii.352 (rājaṭṭhāne); Pv-a 97; & ṭhapaniya (in pañha ṭh. a question to be left standing over i.e. not to be asked) DN iii.229 ■ ger. ṭhapetvā (leaving out, setting aside, excepting) also used as prep. c. acc (before or after the noun): with the omission of, besides except DN i.105 (ṭh. dve); Ja i.179 (maṃ but for me), 294 (tumhe ṭh.); ii.154 (ekaṃ vaddhaṃ ṭh.); iv.142 (ṭh maṃ); Vv-a 100 (ṭh. ekaṃ itthiṃ); Pv-a 93 (ṭh. maṃ) Cp. BSk. sthāpayitvā “except” Avs ii.111 ■ Caus ṭhapāpeti to cause to be set up; to have erected, to put up Ja i.266; Dhp-a ii.191.

Caus. of tiṭṭhati

Ṭhāna

(ṭṭhāna) (nt.) -I. Connotation As one of the 4 iriyāpathā (behaviours) 1. contrasted (a) as standing position with sitting or reclining (b) as rest with motion; 2. by itself without particular characterization as location.

II. Meanings-(1) Literal: place, region, locality abode, part (-˚ of, or belonging to)-(a) cattāri ṭhānāni dassanīyāni four places (in the career of Buddha) to be visited DN ii.140 = AN ii.120; vāse ṭhāne gamane Snp 40 (expl. by Snp-a 85 as mahā-upaṭṭhāna-sankhāte ṭhāne but may be referred to I. 1 (b)); ṭhānā cāveti to remove from one’s place Snp 442; Ja iv.138; Pv-a 55 (spot of the body) ■ (b) kumbha˚ (the “locality of the pitcher, i.e. the well) q.v.; arañña˚ (part of the forest) Ja i.253; Pv-a 32; nivāsana˚ (abode) Pv-a 76; phāsuka˚ Ja ii.103

Pv-a 13; vasana˚ Ja i.150, Ja i.278; Vv-a 66; virūhana˚ (place for the growing of… ) Pv-a 7; vihāra (place of his sojourn) Pv-a 22; saka˚ (his own abode) Ja ii.129; Pv-a 66 ■ (c) In this meaning it approaches the metaphorical sense of “condition, state” (see 2 & cp. gati in: dibbāni ṭhānāni heavenly regions SN i.21; tidivaṃ SN i.96; saggaṃ ṭh. a happy condition Pv i.13; pitu gata the place where my father went (after death) Pv-a 38 Yamassa ṭh. = pettivasaya Pv-a 59 ■ (d) In its pregnant sense in combn with accuta & acala it represents the connotation I. 1 (b), i.e. perdurance, constancy i.e. Nibbāna Vv 51;4; Dhp 225.

2. Applied meanings (a) state, condition; also-˚ (in sg.) as collective-abstract suffix in the sense of being, behaviour (corresponding to E. ending hood, ion, or ing), where it resembles abṡtr formations in ˚tā & ˚ttaṃ (Sk. tā & tvaṃ), as lahuṭṭhāna = lahutā & collect. formations in ˚ti (Sk. daśati ten-hood; devatāti godhead, sarvatāti = P. sabbattaṃ comprehensiveness; cp. also Lat. civitātem, juventūtem) ■ SN i.129 (condition) ii.27 (asabha˚) = MN i.69; SN iii.57 (atasitāyaṃ fearless state): AN ii.118 sq. (four conditions); Ḍh 137 (dasannaṃ aññataraṃ th.˚ nigacchati he undergoes one of the foll. ten conditions, i.e. items of affliction, expld at Dhp-a iii.70 with kāraṇa “labours”), 309 (states = dukkhakāraṇāni Dhp-a iii.482 conditions of suffering or ordeals); hattha-pasāraṇa-ṭṭhāna condition of outstretched hands Dhp-a i.298 loc. ṭhāne (-˚) when required, at the occasion of… Dhp-a i.89 (hasitabba˚, saṃvega˚, dātuṃ yutta˚); pubbe nibbatta -ṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya “since the state (or the time) of his former birth” Pv-a 100 ■ vibhūsanaṭṭhāna ornamentation, decoration, things for adornment DN i.5; Snp 59 (DN-a i.77 superficially: ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ; Snp-a 112 simply vibhūsā eva v-ṭṭhānaṃ); jūta-pamāda˚ (gambling & intoxication) DN i.6 (cp. expl. at Kp-a 26); gata˚ & āgata˚; (her) going coming Ja iii.188 ■ pariccāga˚ distribution of gifts Pv-a 124 ■ (b) (part = ) attribute, quality, degree aggasāvaka˚ (degrees of discipleship) Vv-a 2; esp. in set of 10 attributes, viz. rūpa (etc. 1

5), āyu, vaṇṇa sukha, yasa, ādhipateyya DN iii.146; SN iv.275; Pv ii.958 also collectively [see (a)] as dasaṭṭhānaṃ SN i.193; out of these are mentioned as 4 attributes āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha bala at Vv 327; other ten at AN v.129 (pāsaṃsāni). (c) (counter-part = ) object (-˚ for), thing; item, point pl. grounds, ways, respects. With a numeral often = a (five)fold collection of… SN iv.249 sq. (5 objects or things, cp. Ger. fünferlei); AN iii.54 sq. (id.), 60 sq. 71 sq.; etehi tīhi ṭhānehi on these 3 grounds Dhp 224 manussā tīhi ṭhānehi bahuṃ puññaṃ pasavanti: kāyena vācāya manasā (in 3 ways, qualities or properties A 151 sq.; cp. ii.119 sq. (= saṃvutaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi Dhp 391); catuhi ṭhānehi in Com. equals catuhi ākārehi or kāraṇehi pāmujjakaraṇaṃ ṭh. (object) Snp 256; ekaccesu ṭhānesu sameti ekaccesu na sameti “I agree in certain points, but not in others” DN i.162; kankhaniya doubtful point SN iv.350, SN iv.399 ■ n’ atthi aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ no other means, nothing else Dhp-a ii.90; agamanīya something not to be done, not allowed Vv-a 72; cp. also kamma˚ ■ (d) (standpoint = ) ground for (assumption) reason, supposition, principle, esp. a sound conclusion logic, reasonableness (opp. a˚ see 4): garayhaṃ th. āgacchati “he advocates a faulty principle” DN i.161 catuhi ṭh. paññāpeti (four arguments) SN iii.116; SN iv.380 ṭhāna-kusala accomplished in sound reasoning SN iii.61 sq (satta˚); AN ii.170 sq. Also with aṭṭhāna-kusala: see below 4.

III. Adverbial use of some cases acc. ṭhānaṃ: ettakaṃ ṭh. even a little bit Dhp-a i.389 ■ abl. ṭhānaso: in combn w. hetuso with reason & cause, causally conditioned [see 2 (d)] S; v.304; AN iii.417; AN v.33; Ne 94 (ñāṇa); abs. without moving (see I. 1 (b) & cp. Lat statim) i.e. without an interval or a cause (of change) at once, immediately, spontaneously, impromptu (cp cpd.˚ uppatti) SN i.193; SN v.50, SN v.321, SN v.381; Pv i.44 (= khaṇaṃ yeva Pv-a 19) ■ loc. ṭhāne instead = like, as dhītu ṭhāne ṭhapesi he treats her like a daughter Vv-a 209 puttaṭṭhāne as a son Ja ii.132.

IV. Contrasted with negation of term (ṭhāna & aṭṭhāna) The meanings in this category are restricted to those mentioned above under 1 [esp. 1 (c)] & 2 (d), viz. the relations of place → not place (or wrong place, also as proper time & wrong time), i.e. somewhere → nowhere and of possibility → impossibility (truth → falsehood) (a) ṭhānaṃ upagacchati (pathaviyā) to find a (resting place on the ground, to stay on the ground (by means of the law of attraction and gravitation) Mil 255; opp. na ṭhānaṃ upa˚ to find no place to rest, to go into nothingness Mil 180, Mil 237, Mil 270 ■ (b) ṭhānaṃ vijjati there is a reason, it is logically sound, it is possible DN i.163 DN i.175; MN iii.64; Pts ii.236 sq.; cp. Mvu ii.448; opp na etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati it is not possible, feasible, plausible logically correct Vin ii.284; DN i.104, DN i.239; MN ii.10 MN iii.64; Mil 237; Ne 92 sq ■ (c) aṭṭhānaṃ an impossibility Snp 54 (aṭṭhāna, with elision of ṃ); aṭṭhāne at the wrong time Ja i.256; ṭhāna is that one of the gatis which is accessible to human influence, as regards gifts of relief or sacrifice (this is the pettivisaya), whilst aṭṭhāna applied to the other 4 gatis (see gati) Pv-a 27 sq. In cpd. ṭhānāṭhāna-gata it means referring or leading to good & bad places (gatis): of sabbe khayadhammā (i.e. keci saggûpagā keci apāyûpagā) Ne 94 In comb;n apucchi nipuṇe pañhe ṭhānâṭhānagate (Mil 1) it may mean either questions concerning possibilities & impossibilities or truths & falsehoods, or questions referring to happy & unhappy states (of existence); ṭhānâṭhāna-ñāṇa is “knowledge of correct & faulty conclusions” Ne 94, cp. Kv 231 sq.; the same combn occurs with ˚kusala ˚kusalatā “accomplished or skilled (& skill) in understanding correct or faulty conclusions” DN iii.212 (one of the ten powers of the Buddha); MN iii.64; Dhs 1337, Dhs 1338 (trsl. by Mrs Rh. D. on p. 348 Dhs. trsl. as “skill in affirming or negating causal conjuncture”). In the same sense ṭhānaṃ ṭhānato pajānāti (& aṭṭhānaṃ aṭṭhānato p.) to draw a logical inference from that which is a proper ground for inference (i.e. which is logical) S; v.304; MN i.69 sq. = AN iii.417; AN v.33.

-uppatti arising instantaneously (see ṭhānaso, above III.) Vv-a 37; Ja vi.308 (˚kāraṇavindana finding a means right on the spot); -ka (adj.) on the spot, momentary spontaneous Ja vi.304.

Vedic sthāna, sthā, see tiṭṭhati; cp. Sk. sthāman Gr. σταχμίς, Lat. stamen

Ṭhānīya

(adj.) standing, having a certain position, founded on or caused by (-˚) Vin ii.194 (-nīca˚) AN i.264 (chanda-rāga-dhamma˚). See also under tiṭṭhati.

grd. of tiṭṭhati

Ṭhāyika

(adj.) at Mil 201 “one who gains his living or subsists on” (instr.) is doubtful reading.

Ṭhāyin

(adj.-n.) standing, being in, being in a state of (-˚), staying with, dependent on (with gen.) pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin “being in a state of one to whom it has arisen,” i.e. one who has got the idea of… or one who imagines SN iii.3 sq.; arūpa-ṭṭhāyin Iti 62 Yamassa ṭhāyino being under the rule of Yama Pv i.119.

from tiṭṭhati

Ṭhita

standing, i.e. (see ṭhāna I) either upright (opp nisinna, etc.), or immovable, or being, behaving in general. In the latter function often (with ger. pleonastic for finite verb (cp. ṭhapita) ■ resting in abiding in (-˚ or with loc.); of time: lasting, enduring fig. steadfast, firm, controlled: amissīkatam ev’ assa cittaṃ hoti, ṭhitaṃ ānejjappattaṃ AN iii.377 = AN iv.404 tassa ṭhito va kāyo hoti thitaṃ cittaṃ (firm, unshaken SN v.74 = Nd ii.475 B2DN i.135 (khema˚); AN i.152; Snp 250 (dhamme); Iti 116 sq. (ṭh. caranto nisinna sayāna); Ja i.167; Ja i.279; Ja iii.53 ■ with ger.: nahātvā ṭh. & nivāsetvā ṭh. (after bathing & dressing) Ja i.265 dārakaṃ gahetvā th. Ja vi.336. Cp. saṇ˚.

-atta self-controlled, composed, steadfast DN i.57 (+ gatatta yatatta; expl. at DN-a i.168 by suppatiṭṭhitacitto); SN i.48; SN iii.46; AN ii.5; AN iv.93, AN iv.428; Snp 370 (+ parinibbuta), 359 (id. expl. at Snp-a 359 by lokadhammehi akampaneyya-citta); Pp 62; -kappin (adj.) (for kappa-*ṭhitin) standing or waiting a whole kappa Pp 13 (expl. at Pp A 187 by ṭhitakappo assa atthī ti; kappaṃ ṭhapetuṃ samattho ti attho); -citta (adj.) of controlled heart (= ˚atta) DN ii.157≈; -dhamma (adj.) everlasting eternal (of mahāsamudda, the great ocean) Vin ii.237; AN iv.198.

pp. of tiṭṭhati = Gr. στατός, Lat. status, Celt. fossad (firm)

Ṭhitaka

(adj.) = ṭhita in meaning of standing, standing up, erect Vin ii.165; DN ii.17 = DN iii.143; MN ii.65; Ja i.53, Ja i.62; Vv-a 64.

Ṭhitatā

(f.) the fact of standing or being founded on (-˚) SN ii.25 = AN i.286 (dhamma˚ + dhamma-niyāmatā).

Ṭhitatta

(nt.) standing, being placed; being appointed to, appointment Ja i.124.

Ṭhiti

(f.) state (as opposed to becoming), stability, steadfastness; duration, continuance immobility; persistence, keeping up (of c. gen.); condition of (-˚) relation SN ii.11; SN iii.31; SN iv.14 SN iv.104, SN iv.228 sq., AN v.96; Vism 32 (kāyassa); in jhāna SN iii.264, SN iii.269 sq., saddhammassa (prolongation of) SN ii.225; A i.59; ii.148; iii.177 (always with asammosa & anantaradhāna), cp. MN ii.26 sq ■ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa (state or condition of) SN ii.124; Pts i.50 sq ■ n atthi dhuvaṃ ṭhiti: the duration is not for long MN ii.64 = Dhp 147 = Thag 769 = Vv-a 77, cp. Thig 343 (= Thag-a 241); Snp 1114 (viññāṇa˚) Pv-a 198 (position, constellation), 199 (jīvita˚ as remainder of life, cp. ṭhitakappin) Dhs 11≈(cittassa), 19≈(+ āyu = subsistence).

-bhāgiya connected with duration, enduring, lasting permanent (only appl. to samādhi) DN iii.277; AN iii.427 Ne 77; cp. samādhissa ṭhitikusala “one who is accomplished in lasting concentration” AN iii.311, AN iii.427; AN iv.34.

from tiṭṭhati Sk. sthiti, Gr. στάσις, Lat. statio (cp. stationary), Ohg. stat, Ags. stede

Ṭhiṭika

(adj.) standing, lasting, enduring; existing, living on (-˚), e.g. āhāra˚ dependent on food Kp iii. (see āhāra); nt. adv. ṭhitikaṃ constantly Vv-a 75.

Der. fr. ṭhiti

Ṭhīyati

see patiṭṭhīyati.

Ḍaṃsa

a yellow fly, gadfly (orig. “the bite”) Nd ii.268 (= pingala-makkhika, same at Ja iii.263; Snp-a 101); usually in combn with other biting or stinging sensations, as ˚siriṃsapa Snp 52, & freq. in cpd; ḍaṃsa-makasa-vāt’ ātapa-siriṃsapa-samphassa MN i.10; AN ii.117, AN ii.143 = AN iii.163; AN iii.388; AN v.15; Vin i.3; Nd ii.s. v. (enumd under var. kinds of dukkhā); Vism 31 (here expld as ḍaṃsana-makkhikā or andha-makkhikā).

see ḍasati

Ḍaṭṭha

bitten Pv-a 144.

pp. of daṃśati or dasati to bite

Ḍasati

(& ḍaṃsati) to bite (esp. of flies snakes, scorpions, etc.), pres. ḍasati MN i.519; pot ḍaseyya MN i.133; AN iii.101 = AN iv.320 (where ḍaṃs˚) ḍaṃseyya AN iii.306; ppr. ḍasamāna Ja i.265 (gīvāya) fut. ḍaṃsayissāmi Ja vi.193 (v.l. ḍass˚); aor. aḍaṃsi Vv 808 (= Sk. adānkṣīt), ḍaṃsi Pv-a 62 & ḍasi Ja i.502; Dhp-a ii.258; inf. ḍasituṃ Ja i.265; ger. ḍasitvā Ja i.222 Ja ii.102; Ja iii.52, Ja iii.538; Dhp-a i.358 ■ Pp. daṭṭha; cp. also dāṭhā & saṇḍāsa.;

cp. Sk. da ati & daṃśati, Gr.; δάκνω, Ohg. zanga, Ags. tonge, E. tong

Ḍahati

(& dahati) to burn (trs.) consume, torment MN i.365; MN ii.73

A v.110; Ja ii.44 (aor. 3 sg. med. adaḍḍha = Sk. adagdha) Dhp 31, Dhp 71, Dhp 140; Mil 45, Mil 112 (cauterize). Pp. daḍḍha -Pass. ḍayhati SN i.188 (kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi cittam me pariḍayhati); ib. (mahārāga: mā ḍayhittho punappunaṃ) MN ii.73; SN iii.150 (mahāpaṭhavī ḍayhati vinassati na bhavati) esp. in ppr. ḍayhamāna consumed with or by, burning, glowing Dhp 371; Iti 23 (˚ena kāyena cetasā Pv i.1110, 122; ii.23) (of a corpse being cremated) Pv-a 63, Pv-a 152 (vippaṭisārena: consumed by remorse) See also similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. Cp. uḍ˚.

Sk. dahati, pp. dagdha, cp. dāha, nidāgha (summer heat); Gr. τέφρα ashes, Lat. favilla (glowing) cinders, Goth. dags, Ger. tag. E. day = hot time

Ḍāka

(m. nt.) green food, eatable herbs, vegetable Vin i.246 (˚rasa), 248; Thig 1; Vv 206 (v.l. sāka); Vv-a 99 (= taṇḍuleyyakādi-sākavyañjana).

Sk. sāka (nt.) on ś → ḍ cp. Sk. sākinī → dākinī

Ḍāha

burning, glow, heat DN i.10 (disā˚ sky-glow = zodiacal light?); MN i.244; Pv-a 62; Mil 325. Sometimes spelt dāha, e.g. AN i.178 (aggi˚) Sdhp 201 (id.);- dava˚; a jungle fire Vin ii.138; Ja i.461.

Sk. dāha, see ḍahati

Ḍeti

to fly; only in simile “seyyathā pakkhī sakuṇo yena yen’ eva ḍeti…” DN i.71 = MN i.180, MN i.269 = AN ii.209 Pp 58; Ja v.417. Cp. dayati & dīyati, also uḍḍeti.;

T.

Sk. *ḍayate = dīyati; ḍayana flying. The Dhtp gives the root as ḍī or ḷī with def. of “ākāsa-gamana”.

T

-T-

as composition-consonant (see Müller pp. 62, 63, on euphonic cons.) especially with agge (after, from), in ajja-t-agge, tama-t-agge, dahara-t-agge AN v.300; cp deva ta-t-uttari for tad-uttari AN iii.287, AN iii.314, AN iii.316.

Ta˚

base of demonstr. pron. for nt., in oblique cases of m. & f., in demonstr. adv. of place & time (see also sa).; 1. Cases: nom. sg. nt. tad (older) Vin i.83; Snp 1052; Dhp 326; Mil 25 & taṃ (cp. yaṃ, kiṃ) Snp 1037, Snp 1050; Ja iii.26; acc. m. taṃ Ja ii.158, f. taṃ Ja vi.368; gen. tassa f. tassā (Snp 22, Snp 110; Ja i.151); instr. tena, f. tāya (J iii. 188); abl. tasmā (Ja i.167); tamhā Snp 291, Snp 1138 (J iii.26) & tato (usually as adv.) (Snp 390); loc. tasmiṃ (Ja i.278), tamhi (Dhp 117); tahiṃ (adv.) (Pv i.57) tahaṃ (adv.) (Ja i.384; Vv-a 36); pl. nom. m. te (J ii.129), f. tā (J ii.127), nt. tāni (Snp 669, Snp 845); gen. tesaṃ, f. tāsaṃ (Snp 916); instr. tehi, f. tāhi (J ii.128) loc. tesu, f. tāsu (Snp 670) ■ In composition (Sandhi both tad-& taṃ-are used with consecutive phonetic changes (assimilation), viz. (a); tad˚;: (α) in subst function: tadagge henceforth DN i.93 taduṭṭhāya Dhp-a iii.344; tadūpiya (cp. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78 = tadopya (see discussion under opeti), but cp. Sk. tadrūpa Divy

543 & tatrupāya. It is simply tad-upa-ka, the adj.; positive of upa, of which the compar ■ superlative is upama, meaning like this, i.e. of this or the same kind Also spelt tadūpikā (f.) (at Ja ii.160) agreeing with, agreeable pleasant Mil 9; tadatthaṃ to such purpose Snp-a 565 ■ With assimilation: taccarita; tapparāyaṇa Snp 1114; tappoṇa (= tad-pra-ava-nata) see taccarita tabbisaya (various) Pv-a 73; tabbiparīta (different Vism 290; Dhp-a iii.275; tabbiparītatāya in contrast to that Vism 450 ■ (β) as crude form (not nt.) originally only in acc. (nt.) in adj. function like tad-ahan this day then felt as euphonic d, esp. in forms where similarly the euphonic t is used (ajja-t-agge). Hence ta- is abstracted as a crude (adverbial) form used like any other root in composition. Thus: tad-ah-uposathe on this day’s fast-day = to-day (or that day) being Sunday DN i.47; Snp p.139 (expld as tam-ah-uposathe, uposatha-divase ti at Snp-a 502); tadahe on the same day Pv-a 46; tadahū (id.) Ja v.215 (= tasmiṃ chaṇa-divase) tad-aṅga for certain, surely, categorical (orig. concerning this cp. kimanga), in tadanga-nibbuta SN iii.43 tadaṅga-samatikkama Nd ii.203; tadaṅga-vikkhambhana-samuccheda Vism 410; tadaṅga-pahāna Dhs-a 351; Snp-a 8; tadangena AN iv.411 ■ (b) tan˚;: (α) as subst.: tammaya (equal to this, up to this) Snp 846 (= tapparāyana Nd ii.206); AN i.150 ■ (β) Derived from acc. use (like a β) as adj. is tankhaṇikā (fr. taṃ khaṇaṃ Vin iii.140 (= muhuttikā) ■ (γ) a reduced form of taṃ is to be found as ta˚ in the same origin & application as ta-d-(under a; β) in combn ta-y-idaṃ (for taṃidaṃ → taṃ-idaṃ → ta-idaṃ → ta-y-idaṃ) where y. takes the place of the euphonic consonant. Cp. in application also Gr. τοϋτο & ταϋτα, used adverbially as therefore (orig. just that) Snp 1077; Pv i.33; Pv-a 2, Pv-a 16 (= taṃ idaṃ), 76. The same ta˚ is to be seen in tāhaṃ Vv 8315 (= taṃ-ahaṃ), & not to be confused with tāhaṃ = te ahaṃ (see tvaṃ) ■ A similar comb;n is taṃyathā Mil 1 (this is how, thus, as follows) which is the Sk. form for the usual P. seyyathā (instead of ta-(y)-yathā, like ta-y-idaṃ); cp. Trenckner, P.M. p. 75 ■ A sporadic form for tad is tadaṃ Snp p.147 (even that, just that for tathaṃ?) ■ II. Application: 1. ta˚; refers or points back to somebody or something just mentioned or under discussion (like Gr. οὑτος, Lat. hic, Fr. ci in voici cet homme-ci, etc.): this, that, just this (or that), even this (or these). In this sense combd with api: te c’ âpi (even these) Snp 1058. It is also used to indicate something immediately following the statement of the speaker (cp. Gr. ο ̔́δε, E. thus): this now, esp. in adv. use (see below); taṃ kiṃ maññasi DN i.60; yam etaṃ pañhaṃ apucchi Ajita taṃ vadāmi te: Snp 1037; taṃ te pavakkhāmi (this now shall I tell you:) Snp 1050; tesaṃ Buddho vyākāsi (to those just mentioned answered B.) Snp 1127; te tositā (and they, pleased… ) ib. 1128.

2. Correlative use: (a) in rel. sentences with ya˚ (preceding ta˚): yaṃ ahaṃ jānāmi taṃ tvaṃ jānāsi “what I know (that) you know” DN i.88; yo nerayikānaṃ sattānaṃ āhāro tena so yāpeti “he lives on that food which is (characteristic of the beings in N.; or: whichever is the food of the N. beings, on this he lives” Pv-a 27 ■ (b) elliptical (with omission of the verb to be) yaṃ taṃ = that which (there is), what (is), whatever, used like an adj.; ye te those who, i.e. all (these), whatever: ye pana te manussā saddhā… te evam ahaṃsu… “all those people who were full of faith said” Vin ii.195; yena tena upāyena gaṇha “catch him by whatever means (you like),” i.e. by all means Ja ii.159; yaṃ taṃ kayirā “whatever he may do” Dhp 42.

3. Distributive and iterative use (cp. Lat. quisquis, etc.):… taṃ taṃ this & that, i.e. each one; yaṃ yaṃ passati taṃ taṃ pucchati whomsoever he sees (each one) he asks Pv-a 38; yaṃ yaṃ manaso piyaṃ taṃ taṃ gahetvā whatever… (all) that Pv-a 77; yo yo yaṃ yaṃ icchati tassa tassa taṃ taṃ adāsi “whatever anybody wished he gave to him” Pv-a 113. So with adv. of ta˚: tattha tattha here & there (freq.); tahaṃ tahaṃ id. Ja i.384; Vv-a 36 Vv-a 187; tato tato Snp 390 ■ (b) the same in disjunctivecomparative sense: taṃ… taṃ is this so & is this so (too) = the same as, viz. taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīraṃ is the soul the same as the body (opp. aññaṃ j. a. s.) A; v.193, etc (see jīva).

4. Adverbial use of some cases (locala temporalb, & modal;c): acc. taṃ (a) there (to): tad avasari he withdrew there DN ii.126, DN ii.156; (b) taṃ enaṃ at once, presently (= tāvad-eva) Vin i.127 (cp. Ved enā); (c) therefore (cp. kiṃ wherefore, why), that is why, now, then: SN ii.17; MN i.487; Snp 1110; Pv i.23 (= tasmā Pv-a 11 & 103); ii.716; cp. taṃ kissa hetu Nd ii.on jhāna ■ gen. tassa (c) therefore AN iv.333. instr. tena (a) there (direction = there to), always in correl. with yena: where-there, or in whatever direction here & there. Freq. in formula denoting approach to a place (often unnecessary to translate); e.g. yena Jīvakassa ambavanaṃ tena pāyāsi: where the Mangogrove of J. was, there he went = he went to the M. of J. DN i.49; yena Gotamo ten’ upasankama go where G is DN i.88; yena āvasathâgāraṃ ten’ upasankami DN ii.85 etc.; yena vā tena vā palāyanti they run here there AN ii.33; (c) so then, now then, therefore, thus (often with hi) Ja i.151, Ja i.279; Pv-a 60; Mil 23; tena hi DN ii.2; Ja i.266; Ja iii.188; Mil 19abl. tasmā (c) out of this reason, therefore Snp 1051, Snp 1104; Nd ii.279 (= taṃ kāraṇaṃ); Pv-a 11, Pv-a 103; tato (a) from there, thence Pv i.123; (b) then, hereafter Pv-a 39loc. tahiṃ (a) there (over there → beyond) Pv i.57; (c) = therefore Pv-a 25; tahaṃ (a) there; usually repeated: see above II. 3 (a) ■ See also tattha, tathā, tadā, tādi, etc.

Vedic tad, etc.; Gr. τόν τήν τό; Lat. is-te, tālis, etc.; Lith. tás tā; Goth. pata; Ohg. etc. daz; E. that

Taka

a kind of medicinal gum, enumerated with two varieties, viz. takapattī & takapaṇṇī under jatūni bhesajjāni at Vin i.201.

Takka1

doubt; a doubtful view (often diṭṭhi, appl. like sammā˚, micchā-diṭṭhi), hair-splitting reasoning, sophistry (= itihītihaṃ Nd ii.151). Opp. to takka (= micchā-sankappo Vb 86, Vb 356) is dhammatakka right thought (:vuccati sammā-sankappo Nd ii.318; cp. Dhs 7, Dhs 298), DN i.16 (˚pariyāhata); MN i.68 (id.) Snp 209 (˚ṃ pahāya na upeti sankhaṃ) 885 (doubt), 886; Dhs 7, Dhs 21, Dhs 298 (+ vitakka, trsl. as “ratiocination” by Mrs. Rh. D.); Vb 86, Vb 237 (sammā˚) 356; Vism 189 See also vitakka.

-āgama the way of (right) thought, the discipline of correct reasoning Dāvs v.22; -āvacara as neg. atakkâvacarâ in phrase dhammā gambhīrā duddasā a˚ nipuṇā (views, etc.) deep, difficult to know, beyond logic (or sophistry: i.e. not accessible to doubt?), profound Vin i.4 = DN i.12 = SN i.136 = MN i.487. Gogerley trsl. “unattainable by reasoning,” Andersen “being beyond the sphere of thought”; -āsaya room for doubt Snp 972 -gahaṇa the thicket of doubt or sophistry Ja i.97 -vaḍḍhana increasing, furthering doubt or wrong ideas Snp 1084 (see Nd ii.269); -hetu ground for doubt (or reasoning?) AN ii.193 = Nd ii.151.

Sk. tarka doubt; science of logic (lit. “turning & twisting”) *treik, cp. Lat. tricae, intricare (to “trick,” puzzle), & also Sk. tarku bobbin, spindle, Lat torqueo (torture, turn)

Takka2

(nt.) buttermilk (with 1/4 water), included in the five products from a cow (pañca gorasā) at Vin i.244 made by churning dadhi Mil 173; Ja i.340; Ja ii.363; Dhp-a ii.68 (takkâdi-ambila).

Should it not belong to the same root as takka1?

Takkaṇa

(nt.) thought, representation (of:-˚) Ja i.68 (ussāvabindu˚).

Takkara1

(= tat-kara) a doer thereof DN i.235, MN i.68; Dhp 19.

Takkara2

a robber, a thief Ja iv.432.

Takkaḷa

(nt.) a bulbous plant, a tuberose Ja iv.46, Ja iv.371 (biḷāli˚, expl. at 373 by takkala-kanda) = vi.578.

Takkārī

(f.) the tree Sesbania Aegyptiaca (a kind of acacia) Thig 297 (= dālika-laṭṭhi Thag-a 226).

Takkika

(adj.) doubting, having wrong views, foolish; m. a sophist, a fool Ud 73; Ja i.97; Mil 248.

fr. takka1

Takkin

(adj.-n.) thinking, reasoning, esp. sceptically; a sceptic DN i.16≈(takkī vīmaṃsī); MN i.520; DN-a i.106 (= takketvā vitakketvā diṭṭhi-gāhino etaṃ adhivacanaṃ), cp. pp. 114, 115 (takki-vāda).

fr. takka1

Takketi

to think, reflect, reason, argue DN-a i.106; Dhs-a 142 ■ attānaṃ t. to have self-confidence, to trust oneself Ja i.273, Ja i.396, Ja i.468; Ja iii.233.

Denom. of tarka

Takkoṭaka

a kind of insect or worm Vism 258. Reading at id. p. Kp-a 58 is kakkoṭaka.

is reading correct?

Takkola

Bdellium, a perfume made from the berry of the kakkola plant Ja i.291; also as Npl. at Mil 359 (the Takola of Ptolemy; perhaps Sk. karkoṭa: Trenckner, Notes, p. 59).

Sk. kakkola & takkola

Tagara

(nt.) the shrub Tabernaemontana coronaria, and a fragrant powder or perfume obtained from it, incense Vin i.203; Iti 68 (= Udānavarga p. 112, No. 8); Dhp 54 Dhp 55, Dhp 56 (candana + ); Ja iv.286; Ja vi.100 (the shrub) 173 (id.); Mil 338; Dāvs v.50; Dhp-a i.422 (tagara-mallikā two kinds of gandhā).

Taggaruka

= tad + garuka, see taccarita.

Taggha

affirmative particle (“ekaṃsena” DN-a i.236; ekaṃsa-vacana Ja v.66; ekaṃse nipāta Ja v.307) truly, surely, there now! Vin ii.126, Vin ii.297; DN i.85; MN i.207, MN i.463; MN iii.179; Ja v.65 (v.l. tagghā); Snp p.87.

tad + gha, cp. in-gha & Lat. ec-ce ego-met, Gr.; ἐγώ γε

Taca

(& taco nt.) 1. bark. - 2. skin, hide (similar to camma, denoting the thick outer skin, as contrasted with chavi, thin skin, see chavi & cp. Ja i.146).

1. bark: MN i.198, MN i.434, MN i.488; AN v.5.

2. skin: often used together with nahāru aṭṭhi (tendons & bones), to denote the outer appearance (framework) of the body, or that which is most conspicuous in emaciation: AN i.50 = Sdhp. 46; tacamaṃsâvalepana (+ aṭṭhī nahārusaṃyutta) Snp 194; Ja i.146 (where ˚vilepana); Snp-a 247; aṭṭhi-taca-mattâvasesasarīra “nothing but skin & bones” Pv-a 201. Of the cast-off skin of a snake: urago va jiṇṇaṃ tacaṃ jahāti Snp 1, same simile Pv i.121 (= nimmoka Pv-a 63)-kañcanasannibha-taca (adj.) of golden-coloured skin (a sign of beauty) Snp 551; Vv 302 = 323; Mil 75; Vv-a 9 ■ valita-tacatā a condition of wrinkled skin (as sign of age) Nd ii.252≈; Kp iii.; Kp-a 45; Sdhp 102.

-gandha the scent of bark Dhs 625; -pañcaka-kammaṭṭhāna the fivefold “body is skin,” etc, subject of kammaṭṭhāna-practice. This refers to the satipaṭṭhānā (kāye kāy’ ânupassanā:) see kāya I. (a) of which the first deals with the anupassanā (viewing) of the body as consisting of the five (dermatic) constituents of kesā lomā nakhā dantā, taco (hair of head, other hair, nails, teeth, skin or epidermis: see Kp iii.). It occurs in formula (inducing a person to take up the life of a bhikkhu): taca-p-kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhitvā taṃ pabbājesi Ja i.116; Dhp-a i.243; Dhp-a ii.87, Dhp-a ii.140, Dhp-a ii.242. Cp also Vism 353; Dhp-a ii.88; Snp-a 246, Snp-a 247; -pariyonaddha with wrinkled (shrivelled) skin (of Petas: as sign of thirst) Pv-a 172; -rasa the taste of bark Dhs 629 -sāra (a) (even) the best (bark, i.e.) tree SN i.70 = SN i.90; Iti 45 ■ (b) a (rope of) strong fibre Ja iii.204 (= veṇudaṇḍaka).

Vedic tvak (f.), gen. tvacaḥ

Taccarita

(adj.) in combn with tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabhāra freq. as formula, expressing: converging to this end, bent thereon, striving towards this (aim): Nd ii.under tad. The same combn with Nibbāna-ninna, N ■ poṇa, N ■ pabhāra freq. (see Nibbāna).

Taccha1

a carpenter, usually as ˚ka: otherwise only in cpd. ˚sūkara the carpenter-pig (= a boar, so called from felling trees), title & hero of Jātaka No. 492 (;iv.342 sq.). Cp. vaḍḍhakin.

Vedic takṣan, cp. taṣṭṛ, to takṣati (see taccheti), Lat. textor, Gr. τέκτων carpenter (cp. architect) τέξνη art

Taccha2

(adj.) true, real, justified, usually in combn w bhūta. bhūta taccha tatha, DN i.190 (paṭipadā: the only true & real path) S; v.229 (dhamma; text has tathā v.l. tathaṃ better); as bhūta t. dhammika (well founded and just) DN i.230. bhūta + taccha: AN ii.100 = Pp 50; Vv-a 72 ■ yathā tacchaṃ according to truth Snp 1096 which is interpreted by Nd ii.270: tacchaṃ vuccati amataṃ Nibbānaṃ, etc ■ (nt.) taccha a truth Snp 327- ataccha false, unreal, unfounded; a lie, a falsehood DN i.3 (abhūta + ); Vv-a 72 (= musā).

Der. fr. tathā + ya = tath-ya “as it is,” Sk. tathya

Tacchaka

= taccha1. (a) a carpenter Dhp 80 (cp. Dhp-a ii.147); Mil 413. magga˚ a road-builder Ja vi.348-(b) = taccha-sūkara Ja iv.350 ■ (c) a class of Nāgas DN ii.258 ■ f. tacchikā a woman of low social standing (= veṇī, bamboo-worker) Ja v.306.

Tacchati

to build, construct; maggaṃ t. to construct or repair a road Ja vi.348.

fr. taccha1, cp. taccheti

Taccheti

to do wood-work, to square, frame, chip Ja i.201; Mil 372, Mil 383.

probably a denom. fr. taccha1 = Lat. texo to weave (orig. to plait, work together, work artistically) cp. Sk. taṣṭṛ architect = Lat. textor; Sk. takṣan, etc. Gr. τέξνη craft, handiwork (cp. technique), Ohg. dehsa hatchet. Cp. also orig. meaning of karoti & kamma.

Tajja

“this like,” belonging to this, founded on this or that; on the ground of this (or these), appropriate, suitable; esp. in combn with vāyāma (a suitable effort as “causa movens”) AN i.207; Mil 53. Also with reference to sense-impressions, etc denoting the complemental sensation SN iv.215; MN i.190, MN i.191; Dhs 3–⁠6 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 6 & Com. expl anucchavika) ■ Pv-a 203 (tajjassa pāpassa katattā by the doing of such evil, v.l. SS tassajjassa, may be a contraction of tādiyassa otherwise tādisassa); Note. The expln of Kern, Toev. ii.87 (tajja = tad + ja “arising from this”) is syntactically impossible.

tad + ya, cp. Sk. tadīya

Tajjanā

(f.) threat, menace Ja ii.169; Vv 509; Vv-a 212 (bhayasantajjana).

from tajjeti

Tajjaniya

to be blamed or censured Vism 115 (a˚); (n.) censure, blame, scorn, rebuke. M 50th Sta Mil 365. As t. t. ˚kamma one of the sangha-kammas Vin i.49, Vin i.53, Vin i.143 sq., 325; ii.3 sq., 226, 230; AN i.99.

grd. of tajjeti

Tajjārī

a linear measure, equal to 36 aṇu’s and of which 36 form one rathareṇu Vb-a 343; cp. Abhp 194 (tajjarī ).

Tajjita

threatened, frightened, scared; spurred or moved by (-˚) DN i.141 (daṇḍa˚, bhaya˚) Dhp 188 (bhaya˚); Pp 56. Esp. in combn maraṇabhaya˚; moved by the fear of death Ja i.150, Ja i.223; Pv-a 216.

pp. of tajjeti

Tajjeti

to frighten threaten; curse, rail against Ja i.157, Ja i.158; Pv-a 55. Pp. tajjita ■ Caus. tajjāpeti to cause to threaten, to accuse Pv-a 23 (= paribhāsāpeti).

Caus. of tarjati, to frighten. Cp. Gr. τάρβος fright, fear, ταρβέω; Lat. torvus wild, frightful

Taṭa

declivity or side of a hill, precipice; side of a river or well, a bank Ja i.232, Ja i.303; Ja ii.315 (udapāna˚); iv.141; Snp-a 519; Dhp-a i.73 (papāta˚). See also talāka.

*tḷ, see tala & cp. tālu, also Lat. tellus

Taṭataṭāyati

to rattle, shake, clatter; to grind or gnash one’s teeth; to fizz. Usually said of people in frenzy or fury (in ppr. ˚yanto or ˚yamāna) Ja i.347 (rosena) 439 (kodhena); ii.277 (of a bhikkhu kodhana “boiling with rage” like a “uddhane pakkhitta-loṇaṃ viya”); the latter trope also at Dhp-a iv.176; Dhp-a i.370 (aggimhi pakkhitta-loṇasakkharā viya rosena t.); iii.328 (vātâhata-tālapaṇṇaṃ viya) Vv-a 47, Vv-a 121 (of a kodhâbhibhūto; v.l. kaṭakaṭāyamāna), 206 (+ akkosati paribhāsati), 256. Cp. also kaṭakaṭāyati & karakarā.;

Onomatopoetic, to make a sound like taṭtaṭ. Root *kḷ (on ṭ for I̊ cp. taṭa for tala) to grind one’s teeth, to be in a frenzy. Cp. ciṭiciṭāyāti. See note on gala and kiṇakiṇāyati

Taṭṭaka

a bowl for holding food, a flat bowl, porringer, salver Ja iii.10 (suvaṇṇa˚), 97, 121, 538 iv.281. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. taken into Tamil as taṭṭaṃ, cp. also Av. taśta. Morris (J.P.T.S. 1884, 80) compares Marathi tasta (ewer).

Etym. unknown

Taṭṭikā

(f.) a (straw) mat Vin iv.40 (Bdhgh on this: teṭṭikaṃ (sic) nāma tālapaṇṇehi vā vākehi vā katataṭṭikā, p. 357); Ja i.141 (v.l. taddhika) Vism 97.

cp. kaṭaka

Taṇḍula

(*Sk. taṇḍula: dialectical] rice-grain, rice husked & ready for boiling; freq. combd with tila (q.v.) in mentioning of offerings, presentations, etc.: loṇaṃ telaṃ taṇḍulaṃ khādaniyaṃ sakaṭesu āropetvā Vin i.220, Vin i.238, Vin i.243, Vin i.249; talitaṇḍulâdayo Ja iii.53; Pv-a 105Vin i.244; AN i.130; Ja i.255; Ja iii.55, Ja iii.425 (taṇḍulāni metri causa); vi.365 (mūla˚ coarse r., majjhima medium r., kaṇikā the finest grain); Snp 295; Pp 32; Dhp-a i.395 (sāli-taṇḍula husked rice); DN-a i.93. Cp ut˚.

-ammaṇa a measure (handful?) of rice Ja ii.436 -dona a rice-vat or rice-bowl Dhp-a iv.15; -pāladvārā “doors (i.e. house) of the rice-guard” Npl. MN ii.185 -muṭṭhi a handful of rice Pv-a 131; -homa an oblation of rice DN i.9.

Taṇḍuleyyaka

the plant Amaranthus polygonoides Vv-a 99 (enumd amongst various kinds of ḍāka).

cp. Sk. taṇḍulīya

Taṇhā

(f.) lit drought, thirst; fig. craving, hunger for, excitement the fever of unsatisfied longing (c. loc.: kabaḷinkāre āhāre “thirst” for solid food SN ii.101 sq.; cīvare piṇḍapāte taṇhā = greed for Snp 339). Oppd to peace of mind (upekhā, santi) ■ A. Literal meaning: khudāya taṇhāya ca khajjamānā tormented by hunger & thirst Pv ii.15 (= pipāsāya Pv-a 69) ■ B. In its secondary meaning: taṇhā is a state of mind that leads to rebirth Plato puts a similar idea into the mouth of Socrates (Phaedo 458, 9). Neither the Greek nor the Indian thinker has thought it necessary to explain how this effect is produced. In the Chain of Causation (D ii. 34) we are told how Taṇhā arises-when the sense organs come into contact with the outside world there follow sensation and feeling, & these (if, as elsewhere stated, there is no mastery over them) result in Taṇhā In the First Proclamation (S; v.420 ff.; Vin i.10) it is said that Taṇhā, the source of sorrow, must be rooted out by the way there laid down, that is by the Aryan Path. Only then can the ideal life be lived. Just as physical thirst arises of itself, and must be assuaged got rid of, or the body dies; so the mental “thirst, arising from without, becomes a craving that must be rooted out, quite got rid of, or there can be no Nibbāna The figure is a strong one, and the word Taṇhā is found mainly in poetry, or in prose passages charged with religious emotion. It is rarely used in the philosophy or the psychology. Thus in the long Enumeration of Qualities (Dhs), Taṇhā occurs in one only out of the 1,366 sections (Dhs 1059), & then only as one of many subordinate phases of; lobha. Taṇhā binds a man to the chain of Saṃsāra, of being reborn & dying again again (2;b) until Arahantship or Nibbāna is attained taṇhā destroyed, & the cause alike of sorrow and of future births removed (2;c). In this sense Nibbāna is identical with “sabbupadhi-paṭinissaggo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho” (see Nibbāna).

1. Systematizations: The 3 aims of t. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚, that is craving for sensuous pleasure, for rebirth (anywhere but especially in heaven), or for no rebirth; cp. Vibhava These three aims are mentioned already in the First Proclamation (SN v.420; Vin i.10) and often afterwards DN ii.61, DN ii.308; DN iii.216, DN iii.275; SN iii.26, SN iii.158; Iti 50; Pts i.26 Pts i.39; Pts ii.147; Vb 101, Vb 365; Ne 160. Another group of 3 aims of taṇhā is given as kāma˚, rūpa˚ & arūpa at DN iii.216; Vb 395; & yet another as rūpa˚, arūpa & nirodha˚ at DN iii.216 ■ The source of t. is said to be sixfold as founded on & relating to the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see rūpa), objects of sense or sensations viz. sights, sounds, smells, etc.: DN ii.58; Pts i.6 sq. Nd ii.271i; in threefold aspects (as kāma-taṇhā, bhava & vibhava˚) with relation to the 6 senses discussed at Vism 567 sq.; also under the term cha-taṇha-kāyā (sixfold group, see cpds.) MN i.51; MN iii.280; Pts i.26 elsewhere called chadvārika-taṇhā “arising through the 6 doors” Dhp-a iii.286.

18 varieties of t. (comprising worldly objects of enjoyment, ease, comfort & well-living are enum;d at Nd ii.271iii (under taṇhā-lepa) 36 kinds: 18 referring to sensations (illusions) of subjective origin (ajjhattikassa upādāya), & 18 to sensations affecting the individual in objective quality (bāhirassa upādāya) at AN ii.212; Ne 37; & 108 varieties or specifications of t. are given at Nd;2 271ii (under Jappā) = Dhs 1059 = Vb 361 ■ Taṇhā as “kusalā pi akusalā pi” (good & bad) occurs at Ne 87 cp. Tālapuṭa’s good t. Th i.1091 f.

2. Import of the term: (a) various characterizations of t.: mahā˚ Snp 114 kāma˚ Si.131; gedha˚ Si.15; bhava˚ DN iii.274 (+ avijjā) grouped with diṭṭhi (wrong views) Nd ii.271iii, 271vi. T fetters the world & causes misery: “yāya ayaṃ loko uddhasto pariyonaddho tantākulajāto” AN ii.211 sq. taṇhāya jāyatī soko taṇhāya jāyatī bhayaṃ taṇhāya vippamuttassa natthi soko kuto bhayaṃ Dhp 216 taṇhāya uḍḍito loko SN i.40; yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ etth’ esā taṇhā… Vb 103; it is the 4th constituent of Māra’s army (M-senā) Snp 436; M’s daughter SN i.134. In comparisons: t. + jālinī visattikā SN i.107 = bharâdānaṃ (t. ponobbhavikā nandirāga-sahagatā SN iii.26; SN v.402: gaṇḍa = kāya, gaṇḍamūlan ti taṇhāy etaṃ adhivacanaṃ SN iv.83; = sota SN iv.292 (and a khīṇāsavo = chinnasoto); manujassa pamatta-cārino t vaḍḍhati māluvā viya Dhp 334 ■ (b) taṇhā as the inciting factor of rebirth & incidental cause of saṃsāra kammaṃ khettaṃ viññāṇaṃ bījaṃ; taṇhā sineho… evaṃ āyatiṃ punabbhavâbhinibbatti hoti AN i.223; t ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaṃ vuccati dukkha-samudayo Vb 107, similarly Ne 23 sq.; as ponobbhavikā (causing rebirth) SN iii.26; Pts ii.147, etc.; as a link in the chain of interdependent causation (see paṭiccasamuppāda): vedanā-paccayā taṇhā, taṇhā-paccayā upādānaṃ Vin i.1, Vin i.5; DN ii.31, DN ii.33, DN ii.56, etc.; t. & upadhi; taṇhāya sati upadhi hoti t. asati up. na hoti SN ii.108 ye taṇhaṃ vaḍḍhenti te upadhiṃ vaḍḍhenti, etc. SN ii.109 taṇhāya nīyati loko taṇhāya parikissati SN i.39; taṇhā saṃyojanena saṃyuttā sattā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsaranti Iti 8. See also t ■ dutiya ■ (c) To have got rid of t. is Arahantship: vigata- taṇha vigata-pipāsa vigata-pariḷāha DN iii.238; SN iii.8, SN iii.107 sq., 190 samūlaṃ taṇhaṃ abbuyha SN i.16 = SN i.63, SN i.121 (Godhiko parinibbuto); iii.26 (nicchāto parinibbuto); vīta Snp 83, Snp 849, Snp 1041 (+ nibbuta); taṇhāya vippahānena SN i.39 (“Nibbānan” iti vuccati), 40 (sabbaṃ chindati bandhanaṃ); taṇhaṃ mā kāsi mā lokaṃ punar āgami Snp 339; taṇhaṃ pariññāya… te narā oghatiṇṇā ti Snp 1082; ucchinna -bhava-taṇhā Snp 746; taṇhāya vūpasama SN iii.231; t ■ nirodha SN iv.390 ■ See also MN i.51; Dhp 154; Iti 9 (vita˚ + anādāna), 50 (˚ṃ pahantvāna); Snp 495, Snp 496, Snp 916; & cp. ˚khaya.

3.; Kindred terms which in Commentaries are expld by one of the taṇhā-formulae (cp. Nd ii.271v & 271;vii): (a) t. in groups of 5: (α) with kilesa saṃyoga vipāka duccarita (β) diṭṭhi kilesa duccarita avijjā; (γ) diṭṭhi kil˚ kamma duccarita ■ (b) quasi-synonyms: ādāna, ejā, gedha jappā, nandī, nivesana, pariḷāha, pipāsā, lepa, loluppa vāna, visattikā, sibbanī ■ In cpds. the form taṇhā is represented by taṇha before double consonants, as taṇhakkhaya, etc.

-ādhipateyya mastery over t. SN iii.103; -ādhipanna seized by t. SN i.29; Snp 1123; -ādāsa the mirror of t AN ii.54; ābhinivesa full of t. Pv-a 267; -āluka greedy Ja ii.78; -uppādā (pl.) (four) grounds of the rise of craving (viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senâsana, itibhavâbhava) AN ii.10 = Iti 109; DN iii.228; Vb 375; -kāyā (pl.) (six) groups of t. (see above B i) SN ii.3; DN iii.244 DN iii.280; Pts i.26; Vb 380; -kkhaya the destruction of the excitement of cravings, almost synonymous with Nibbāna (see above B2c): ˚rata Dhp 187 (expld at Dhp-a iii.241: arahatte c’ eva nibbāne ca abhirato hoti); Vv 735 (expld by Nibbāna Vv-a 296); therefore in the expositionary formula of Nibbāna as equivalent with N. Vin i.5; SN iii.133; Iti 88, etc. (see N.). In the same sense: sabbañjaho taṇhakkhaye vimutto Vin i.8; MN i.171 = Dhp 353; taṇhākkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna AN ii.34, expld at Vism 293; bhikkhu arahaṃ cha ṭhānāni adhimutto hoti: nekkhammâdhimutto, paviveka˚ avyāpajjha˚, upādānakkhaya˚, taṇhakkhaya˚ asammoha˚ Vin i.183; cp. also Snp 70, Snp 211, Snp 1070, Snp 1137 -gata obsessed with excitement, i.e. a victim of t Snp 776; -gaddula the leash of t. Nd ii.271ii≈; -cchida breaking the cravings Snp 1021, Snp 1101; -jāla the snare of t. MN i.271; Thag 306; Nd ii.271ii; -dutiya who has the fever or excitement of t. as his companion AN ii.10; Iti 9 = Iti 109 = Snp 740, Snp 741 = Nd ii.305; cp. Dhs. trsl. p 278; -nadī the river of t. Nd ii.271ii; cp. nadiyā soto ti taṇhāy’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ Iti 114; -nighātana the destruction of t. Snp 1085; -pakkha the party of t., all that belongs to t. Ne 53, Ne 69, Ne 88, Ne 160; -paccaya caused by t. Snp p.144; Vism 568; -mūlaka rooted in t. (dhammā: 9 items) Pts i.26, Pts i.130; Vb 390; -lepa cleaving to t. Nd ii.271iii; (+ diṭṭhi-lepa); -vasika being in the power of t. Ja iv.3; -vicarita a thought of t AN ii.212; -saṅkhaya (complete) destruction of t. ˚sutta MN i.251 (cūḷa˚), 256 (mahā˚): ˚vimutti salvation through cessation of t. MN i.256, MN i.270, & ˚vimutta (adj. SN iv.391; -samudda the ocean of t. Nd 271ii; -sambhūta produced by t. (t. ayaṃ kāyo) AN ii.145 (cp. Snp p.144 yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti sabbaṃ taṇhāpaccayā) -saṃyojana the fetter of t. (adj.) fettered, bound by t. in phrase t ■ saṃyojanena saṃyuttā sattā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsaranti Iti 8, & t ■ saṃyojanānaṃ sattānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarataṃ SN ii.178 = SN iii.149; Pv-a 166; AN i.223; -salla the sting or poisoned arrow of t. SN i.192 (˚assa hantāraṃ vande ādiccabandhunaṃ), the extirpation of which is one of the 12 achievements of a mahesi Nd ii.503 (˚assa abbuḷhana; cp. above).

Sk. tṛṣṇā, besides tarśa (m.) & ṭṛṣ (f.) = Av. tarśna thirst, Gr.; ταρσία dryness, Goth. paúrsus, Ohg durst, E. drought & thirst; to *ters to be, or to make dry in Gr. τέρσομαι, Lat. torreo to roast, Goth. gapaírsan Ohg. derren ■ Another form of t. is tasiṇā

Taṇhīyati

to have thirst for SN ii.13 (for v.l. SS tuṇhīyati; BB. tasati); Vism 544 (+ upādiyati ghaṭ yati); cp. tasati & pp. tasita.;

= taṇhāyati, denom. fr. taṇhā, cp. Sk. tṛṣyati to have thirst

Tata

stretched, extended, spread out SN i.357 (jāla); Ja iv.484 (tantāni jālāni Text, katāni v.l. for tatāni). Note: samo tata at Ja i.183 is to be read as samotata (spread all over).

pp. of tanoti

Tatiya

Num. ord. the third ■ Snp 97 (parābhavo); 436 (khuppipāsā as the 3rd division in the army of Māra), 1001; Ja ii.353; Dhp 309; Pv-a 69 (tatiyāya jātiya: in her third birth). Tatiyaṃ (nt. adv. for the 3rd time DN ii.155; Snp 88, Snp 95, Snp 450; tatiyavāraṃ id. Dhp-a i.183; Vv-a 47 (= at last); yāva tatiyaṃ id Vin ii.188; Ja i.279; Dhp-a ii.75; Pv-a 272 (in casting the lot: the third time decides); yāva tatiyakaṃ id DN i.95.

Sk. tṛtīya, Av. ðritya, Gr. τρίτος, Lat. tertius, Goth. pridja, E. third

Tato

1. from this, in this SN iii.96 (tatoja); Ja iii.281 (tato paraṃ beyond this after this); Nd ii.664 (id.); DN-a i.212 (tatonidāna). 2. thence Ja i.278; Mil 47.

3. thereupon, further afterwards Ja i.58; Dhp 42; Mil 48; Pv-a 21, etc.

abl. of pron. base ta˚ (see ta˚ ii.4)

Tatta1

heated, hot, glowing; of metals: in a melted state (cp. uttatta) AN ii.122≈(tattena talena osiñcante, as punishment); Dhp 308 (ayoguḷa) Ja ii.352 (id.); iv.306 (tattatapo “of red-hot heat, i.e. in severe self-torture); Mil 26, Mil 45 (adv. red-hot) Pv-a 221 (tatta-lohasecanaṃ the pouring over of glowing copper, one of the punishments in Niraya).

pp. of tapati

Tatta2

(nt.) truth; abl. tattato according to truth; accurately Ja ii.125 (ñatvā); iii.276 (ajānitvā not knowing exactly).

tad + tva

Tattaka1

pleasing, agreeable, pleasant Mil 238 (bhojana).

tatta pp. of tappati2 + ka

Tattaka2

(adj.) (= tāvataka) of such size, so large Vism 184 (corresponding with yattaka); tattakaṃ kālaṃ so long, just that time, i.e. the specified time (may be long or short = only so long) Dhp-a i.103 (v.l. ettakaṃ) ii.16 (= ettaka).

Tattha

A. 1. of; place: (a) place where there, in that place Snp 1071, Snp 1085; Dhp 58; Ja i.278; Pv i.1015; often with eva: tatth’ eva right there, on the (very same) spot SN i.116; Ja ii.154; Pv-a 27. In this sense as introduction to a comment on a passage in this, here, in this connection (see also tatra) Dhs 584; Dhp-a i.21; Pv-a 7, etc. (b) direction: there, to this place Ja ii.159 (gantvā); vi.368; Pv-a 16 (tatthagamanasīla able to go here & there, i.e. wherever you like of a Yakkha).

2. as (loc.) case of pron. base ta˚ in this, for or about that, etc. Snp 1115 (etam abhiññāya tato tattha vipassati: Snp-a tatra); tattha yo manku hoti Dhp 249 (= tasmiṃ dāne m. Dhp-a iii.359) tattha kā paridevanā Pv i.123 (“why sorrow for this?”)

3. of time: then, for the time being, interim (= ettha cp. tattaka2) in phrase tattha-parinibbāyin, where corresp. phrases have antarā-parinibbāyin (A ii.238 e.g. ≈i.134; see under parinibbāyin) DN i.156; AN i.232 AN ii.5; AN iv.12; SN v.357; MN ii.52, etc. The meaning of this phrase may however be taken in the sense of tatra A 3 (see next) ■ B. Repeated: tattha tattha here and there, in various places, all over; also corresponding with yattha yattha wherever… there Iti 115; Ne 96 (˚gāmini-paṭipadā); Vv-a 297; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 2, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 77, etc-See tatra.

Sk. tatra adv. of place, cp. Goth. papro & also Sk. atra, yatra

Tatra

(Sk. tatra] = tattha in all meanings & applications, viz. A. 1. there: Dhp 375; Pv-a 54. tatrâpi DN i.81 = Iti 22≈(tatrâpâsiṃ). tatra pi DN i.1 (= DN-a i.42). tatra kho Vin i.10, Vin i.34; AN v.5 sq.; 354 sq. (cp. atha kho). In explanations: Pv-a 19 (tatrâyaṃ vitthārakathā “here follows the story in detail”).

2. in this Snp 595 (tatra kevalino smase); Dhp 88 (tatr’ abhirati enjoyment in this).

3. a special application of tatra (perhaps in the same sense to be explained tattha A 3 is that as first part of a cpd., where it is to be taken as generalizing (= tatra tatra): all kinds of (orig. in this & that), in whatever condition, all-round, complete (cp. yaṃ taṃ under ta˚; ii.2, yena tena upāyena): tatramajjhattatā (complete) equanimity (keeping balance here & there) Vism 466 (cp. tatra-majjhatt’ upekkhā 160); Dhs-a 132, Dhs-a 133 (majjh˚ + tatra majjh˚); Bdhd 157. tatrûpāyaññū (= tatra upāyaññū) having all-round knowledge of the means and ways Snp 321 (correct reading at Snp-a 330); tatrupāyāya vīmaṃsāya samannāgatā endowed with genius in all kinds of means Vin iv.211 (or may it be taken as “suitable, corresponding proportionate”? cp. tadūpiya) ■ B. tatra tatra, in t ■ t ■ abhinandinī (of taṇhā) finding its delight in this & that, here & there Vin i.10; Pts ii.147; Ne 72 Vism 506.

Tatha

(adj.) (being) in truth, truthful true, real DN i.190 (+ bhūta taccha); MN iii.70; Thag 347; Snp 1115 (= Nd ii.275 taccha bhūta, etc.). (nt. tathaṃ = saccaṃ, in cattāri tathāni the 4 truths SN v.430 SN v.435; Pts ii.104 sq. (+ avitathāni anaññathāni). As ep. of Nibbāna: see derivations & cp. taccha. abl tathato exactly v.l. B for tattato at Ja ii.125 (see tatta2) ■ yathā tathaṃ (cp. yathā tacchaṃ) according to truth, for certain, in truth Snp 699, Snp 732, Snp 1127 ■ Cp vitatha.

-parakkama reaching out to the truth Ja v.395 (= saccanikkama); -vacana speaking the truth (cp. tathāvādin) Mil 401.

an adjectivized tathā out of combn tathā ti “so it is,” cp. taccha

Tathatā

(f.) state of being such, such-likeness, similarity, correspondence Vism 518.

abstr. fr. tathā → tatha

Tathatta

(nt.) “the state of being so,” the truth, Nibbāna; only in foll. phrases: (a) tathattāya paṭipajjati to be on the road to (i.e. attain) Nibbāna DN i.175, similarly SN ii.199; SN ii.209 (paṭipajjitabba being conducive to N.); Mil 255; Vism 214 ■ (b) tathattāya upaneti (of a cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ) id. SN iv.294 = MN i.301; SN v.90, SN v.213 sq ■ (c) tathattāya cittaṃ upasaṃharati id. MN i.468 ■ abl. tathattā in truth, really Snp 520 sq. (cp. Mvu iii.397).

*tathātvaṃ

Tathā

(adv.) so, thus (and not otherwise, opp. aññathā), in this way, likewise Snp 1052 (v.l. yathā); Ja i.137, etc ■ Often with eva tath’ eva just so, still the same, not different DN iii.135 (taṃ tath’ eva hoti no aññathā); Ja i.263, Ja i.278; Pv i.83 Pv-a 55. Corresponding with yathā: tathā-yathā so-that Dhp 282; Pv-a 23 (tathā akāsi yathā he made that…, cp. Lat. ut consecutive); yathā-tathā asso also Snp 504; Ja i.223; Pv i.123 (yath’ āgato tathā gato as he has come so he has gone) ■ In cpds. tath before vowels.

-ūpama such like (in comparisons, following upon a preceding yathā or seyyathā) Snp 229 (= tathāvidha Kp-a 185), 233; Iti 33, Iti 90; -kārin acting so (corresp. w yathāvādin: acting so as he speaks, cp. tāthāvādin Snp 357; Iti 122; -gata see sep.; -bhāva “the being so, such a condition Ja i.279; -rūpa such a, like this or that esp. so great, such Vin i.16; Snp p.107; Iti 107; DN-a i.104; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 56. nt. adv. thus Pv-a 14. Cp. evarūpa-vādin speaking so (cp. ˚kārin) Snp 430; Iti 122 (of the Tathāgata); -vidha such like, so (= tathārūpa) Snp 772 Snp 818, Snp 1073, Snp 1113; Nd ii.277 (= tādisa taṃsaṇṭhita tappakāra).

Sk. tathā, cp. also kathaṃ

Tathāgata

[Derivation uncertain. Buddhaghosa (DN-a i.59

67) gives eight explanations showing that there was no fixed tradition on the point, and that he himself was in doubt]. The context shows that the word is an epithet of an Arahant, and that non-Buddhists were supposed to know what it meant. The compilers of the Nikāyas must therefore have considered the expression as pre-Buddhistic; but it has not yet been found in any pre-Buddhistic work. Mrs. Rhys Davids (Dhs. tr. 1099, quoting Chalmers J.R.A.S. Jan., 1898 suggests “he who has won through to the truth.” Had the early Buddhists invented a word with this meaning it would probably have been tathaṃgata, but not necessarily, for we have upadhī-karoti as well as upadhiṃ karoti ■ DN i.12, DN i.27, DN i.46, DN i.63; DN ii.68, DN ii.103, DN ii.108 DN ii.115, DN ii.140, DN ii.142; DN iii.14, DN iii.24 sq., 32 sq., 115, 217, 264 sq. 273 sq.; SN i.110 sq.; SN ii.222 sq.; SN iii.215; SN iv.127, SN iv.380 sq. AN i.286; AN ii.17, AN ii.25, AN ii.120; AN iii.35, etc.; Snp 236, Snp 347, Snp 467 Snp 557, Snp 1114; Iti 121 sq.; Kp-a 196; Pts i.121 sq.; Dhs 1099, Dhs 1117, Dhs 1234; Vb 325 sq., 340, etc., etc.

-balāni (pl.) the supreme intellectual powers of a T. usually enumd as a set of ten: in detail at AN v.33 sq = Pts ii.174; MN i.69; SN ii.27; Nd ii.466. Other sets of five at AN iii.9; of six AN iii.417 sq. (see bala); -sāvaka a disciple of the T. DN ii.142; AN i.90; AN ii.4; AN iii.326 sq. Iti 88; Snp p.15.

Tathiya

(adj.) [Sk. tathya = taccha] true, Snp 882, Snp 883.

Tadanurūpa

(adj.) befitting, suitable, going well with Ja vi.366; Dhp-a iv.15.

cp. ta˚ i.a

Tadā

(adv.) then, as that time (either past or future) DN ii.157; Ja ii.113, Ja ii.158; Pv i.105; Pv-a 42. Also used like an adj.: te tadā-mātāpitaro etarahi m˚ ahesuṃ “the then mother & father” Ja i.215 (cp Lat. quondam); tadā-sotāpanna-upāsaka Ja ii.113. Tadupika & Tadupiya;

Vedic; cp. kadā

Tadūpika & Tadūpiya

see ta˚ I. a.

Tanaya & tanuya

offspring, son Mvu vii.28. pl. tanuyā [ = Sk. tanayau] son & daughter SN i.7.

at SN i.7, v.l. tanaya, cp. BSk. tanuja Avs ii.200

Tanu

1. (adj.) thin, tender, small, slender Vv 162 (vara graceful = uttamarūpa-dhara Vv-a 79; perhaps to 2) Pv-a 46 (of hair: fine + mudhu).

2. (n. nt.) body (orig. slender part of the body = waist) Vv 537 (kañcana˚); Pv i.121; Vism 79 (uju + ). Cp. tanutara.

-karaṇa making thinner, reducing, diminishing Vin ii.316 (Bdhgh on CV. v.9, 2); -bhāva decrease Pp 17; -bhūta decreased, diminished Pp 17; esp in phrase ˚soka with diminished grief, having one’s grief allayed Dhp-a iii.176; Pv-a 38.

Vedic tanu, f. tanvī; also n. tanu & tanū (f.) body; *ten (see tanoti) = Gr. τανυ-, Lat. tenuis, Ohg. dunni, E thin

Tanuka

(adj.) = tanu; little, small Dhp 174 (= Dhp-a 175); Snp 994 (soka).

Tanutara

the waist (lit. smaller part of body, cp. body and bodice) Vin iv.345 (sundaro tanutaro “her waist is beautiful”).

Tanutta

(nt.) diminution, reduction, vanishing, gradual disappearance AN i.160 (manussānaṃ khayo hoti tanuttaṃ paññāyati); ii.144 (rāga˚, dosa˚ moha˚); esp. in phrase (characterizing a sakadāgāmin “rāga-d ■ mohānaṃ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti” DN i.156; SN v.357 sq., 376, 406; AN ii.238; Pp 16.

n ■ abstr. of tanu

Tanoti

to stretch extend; rare as finite verb, usually only in pp. tata. Pgdp 17.

*ten; cp. Sk. tanoti, Gr. τείνω, τόνος, τέτανος; Lat. teneo, tenuis, tendo (E. ex-tend); Goth. panjan Ohg. denen; cp. also Sk. tanti, tāna, tantra

Tanta

(nt.) a thread, a string, a loom Ja i.356 (˚vitata-ṭṭhāna the place of weaving); Dhp-a i.424. At Ja iv.484 tanta is to be corrected to tata (stretched out).

-ākula tangled string, a tangled skein, in phrase tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajāta “entangled like a ball of string & covered with blight” SN ii.92; SN iv.158; AN ii.211; Dpvs xii.32. See guḷā; -āvuta weaving weft, web SN v.45; AN i.286; -bhaṇḍa weaving appliances Vin ii.135; -rajjuka “stringing & roping,” hanging execution Ja iv.87; -vāya a weaver Ja i.356; Mil 331 Vism 259; Dhp-a i.424.

Vedic tantra, to tanoti; cp. tantrī f. string

Tantaka

(nt.) “weaving,” a weaving-loom Vin ii.135.

Tanti

(f.) 1. the string or cord of a lute, etc.; thread made of tendon Vin i.182; Thig 390 (cp. Thag-a 257); Ja iv.389; Dhp-a i.163; Pv-a 151.

2. line lineage (+ paveṇi custom, tradition) Ja vi.380; Dhp-a i.284. -dhara bearer of tradition Vism 99 (+ vaṃsânurakkhake & paveṇipolake).

3. a sacred text a passage in the Scriptures Vism 351 (bahu-peyyāla˚) avimutta-tanti-magga DN-a i.2; MN-a i.2.

-ssara string music Vin i.182; Ja iii.178.

Vedic tantrī, see tanta

Tantu

a string, cord, wire (of a lute) Ja v.196.

Vedic tantu, cp. tanta

Tandita

(adj.) weary, lazy, giving way Mil 238 (˚kata). Usually ; active, keen, industrious sedulous Dhp 305, Dhp 366, Dhp 375; Vv 3322; Mil 390; Vv-a 142. Cp. next.

pp. of tandeti = Sk. tandrayate & tandate to relax. From; *ten, see tanoti

Tandī

(f.) weariness, laziness, sloth SN v.64; MN i.464; AN i.3; Snp 926, Snp 942; Ja v.397 (+ ālasya) Vb 352 (id.).

Sk. tanita

Tapa & Tapo

1. torment, punishment, penance, esp. religious austerity, selfchastisement ascetic practice. This was condemned by the Buddha: Gotamo sabbaṃ tapaṃ garahati tapassiṃ lūkhajīviṃ upavadati DN i.161 = SN iv.330 anattha-sañhitaṃ ñatvā yaṃ kiñci aparaṃ tapaṃ SN i.103; Ja iv.306 (tattatapa: see tatta).

2. mental devotion self-control, abstinence, practice of morality (often brahmacariyā & saṃvara); in this sense held up as an ideal by the Buddha. DN iii.42 sq., 232 (attan & paran˚) 239; SN i.38, SN i.43; SN iv.118, SN iv.180; MN ii.155, MN ii.199; DN ii.49; Dhp 184 (paramaṃ tapo), 194 (tapo sukho); Snp 77; SN i.172 (saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhi); Snp 267 (t. ca brahmacariyā ca), 655 (id.), 901; Pv i.32 (instr. tapasā brahmacariyena Pv-a 15); Ja i.293; Ne 121 (+ indriyasaṃvara); Kp-a 151 (pāpake dhamme tapatī ti tapo): Vv-a 114 (instr. tapasā); Pv-a 98.

-kamma ascetic practice SN i.103; -jigucchā disgust for asceticism DN i.174; DN iii.40, DN iii.42 sq., 48 sq.; AN ii.200 -pakkama = ˚kamma DN i.165 sq. (should it be tapopakkama = tapa + upakkama, or tapo-kamma?). -vana the ascetic’s forest Vism 58, Vism 79, Vism 342.

from tapati, cp. Lat. tepor, heat

Tapati

1. to shine, to be bright, Dhp 387 (divā tapati ādicco, etc. = virocati Dhp-a iv.143); Snp 348 (jotimanto narā tapeyyuṃ), 687 (suriyaṃ tapantaṃ) ■ ger tapanīya: see sep ■ pp. tatta1.

Sk. tapati, *tep, cp. Lat. tepeo to be hot or warm, tepidus = tepid

Tapana

(adj.-n.) burning, heat; fig. torment, torture, austerity.

1. (as nt.) Pv-a 98 (kāya ˚sankhāto tapo).

2. (as f.) tapanī Ja v.201 (in metaphorical play of word with aggi & brahmacārin Com. visīvana-aggiṭṭha-sankhātā-tapanī).

to tapati & tapa

Tapanīya1

burning: fig. inducing selftorture, causing remorse, mortifying AN i.49 = Iti 24; AN iv.97 (Com. tāpajanaka); v.276; Ja iv.177; Dhs i305.

grd. of tapati

Tapanīya2

(nt.) also tapaneyya (Ja v.372) & tapañña (J vi.218) shining; (n.) the shining bright metal, i.e. gold (= rattasuvaṇṇa Ja v.372 Thag-a 252) Thig 374; Vv 8416; Vv-a 12, Vv-a 37, Vv-a 340.

orig. grd. of tapati

Tapassin

(adj.-n.) one devoted to religious austerities, an ascetic (non-Buddhist). Fig. one who exercises self-control & attains mastery over his senses Vin i.234 = AN iv.184 (tapassī samaṇo Gotamo); DN iii.40, DN iii.42 sq., 49; SN i.29; SN iv.330 SN iv.337 sq.; MN i.77; Snp 284 (isayo pubbakā āsuṃ saññatattā tapassino); Vv 2210; Pv i.32 (˚rūpa, under the appearance of a “holy” man: samaṇa-patirūpaka Pv-a 15); ii.614 (= saṃvāraka Pv-a 98; tapo etesaṃ atthī ti ibid.).

tapas + vin; see tapati & tapa

Tappaṇa

(nt.) satiating, refreshing; a restorative, in netta˚ some sort of eye-wash DN i.12 (in combn w. kaṇṇa-tela & natthu-kamma).;

Sk. tarpaṇa

Tappati1

to burn, to be tormented: to be consumed (by remorse) Dhp 17, Dhp 136 (t. sehi kammehi dummedho = paccati Dhp-a iii.64).

Sk. tapyate, Pass. of tapati

Tappati2

(instr.) to be satiated, to be pleased, to be satisfied Ja i.185 (puriso pāyāsassa t.); ii.443; v.485 = Mil 381 (samuddo na t. nadīhi the ocean never has enough of all the rivers); Vv 8413 ■ grd. tappiya satiable, in atappiya-vatthūni (16) objects of insatiability Ja iii.342 (in full). Also tappaya in cpd. dut˚; hard to be satisfied AN i.87; Pp 26 ■ pp. tittaCaus. tappeti to satisfy, entertain, regale, feed Iti 67 (annapānena) Pv ii.48 (id.) Mil 227 ■ pp. tappita.

Sk. tṛpyate, caus. tarpayati; *terp = Gr. τέρπω

Tappara

(adj.) quite given to or intent upon (-˚), diligent, devoted Thag-a 148 (Ap. 57, 66) (mānapūjana˚ & buddhopaṭṭhāna˚).;

Sk. tatpara

Tappetar

one who satisfies, a giver of good things in combn titto ca tappetā ca: self-satisfied & satisfying others AN i.87; Pp 27 (of a Sammāsambuddha).

n. ag. to tappeti

Tab˚

in cpds. tabbisaya, tabbahula, etc. = taṃ˚, see under ta˚ I. a.

Tama

(nt.) & tamo darkness (syn. andhakāra, opp. joti), lit. as well as fig. (mental darkness = ignorance or state of doubt); one of the dark states of life & rebirth; adj. living in one of the dark spheres of life (cp. kaṇhajāta) or in a state of suffering (duggati) Snp 248 (pecca tamaṃ vajanti ye patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirā), 763 (nivutānaṃ t. hoti andhakāro apassataṃ), 956 (sabbaṃ tamaṃ vinodetvā) Vb 367 (three tamāni: in past, present & future) adj.: puggalo tamo tama-parāyaṇo DN iii.233; AN ii.85 Pp 51; Ja ii.17 ■ tamā tamaṃ out of one “duggati into another Snp 278 (vinipātaṃ samāpanno gabbhā gabbhaṃ t. t.… dukkaṃ nigacchati), cp. Mvu ii.225, also tamāto tamaṃ ibid. i.27; ii.215 ■ tamat-agge beyond the region of darkness (or rebirth in dark spheres), cp. bhavagge (& Sk. tamaḥ pāre) S; v. 154, 163.

-andhakāra (complete) darkness (of night) v.l. for samandha˚ at Ja iii.60 (Kern: tamondhakāra); -nivuta enveloped in d. Snp 348; -nuda (tama˚ & tamo˚), dispelling darkness, freq. as Ep. of the Buddha or other sages Snp 1133, Snp 1136; Iti 32, Iti 108; Nd ii.281; Vv 352 (= Vv-a 161); Mil 1, Mil 21, etc.; -parāyaṇa (adj.) having a state of darkness or “duggati” for his end or destiny SN i.93; AN ii.85 = Pp 51.

Sk. tamas, tam & tim;, cp. tamisra = Lat. tenebrae; also timira dark & P. tibba, timira Ohg. dinstar & finstar; Ags. thimm, E. dim

Tamāla

Name of a tree (Xanthochymus pictorius) Pv iii.105 (+ uppala).

Sk. tamāla

Tamba

(nt.) copper (“the dark metal”); usually in combinations, signifying colour of or made of (cp. loha bronze), e.g. lākhātamba (adj.) Thig 440 (colour of an ox); ˚akkhin Vv 323 (timira˚) Sdhp 286; ˚nakhin Ja vi.290; ˚nettā (f.) ibid.; ˚bhājana Dhp-a i.395; ˚mattika Dhp-a iv.106; ˚vammika Dhp-a iii.208; ˚loha Pv-a 95 (= loha).

Sk. tāmra, orig. adj. = dark coloured, leaden; cp. Sk. adj. taṃsra id., to tama

Tambūla

(nt.) betel or betel-leaves (to chew after the meal) Ja i.266, Ja i.291; Ja ii.320; Vism 314; Dhp-a iii.219. -˚pasibbaka betel-bag Ja vi.367.

Sk. tambūla

Taya

(nt.) a triad, in ratana-ttaya the triad of gems (the Buddha, the Norm. & the Community) see ratana e.g. Pv-a 1, Pv-a 49, Pv-a 141piṭaka-ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas Snp-a 328.

Sk. trayaṃ triad, cp. trayī; see also tāvatiṃsa

Tayo

num. card. three.

nom ■ acc. m. tayo (Snp 311), & tayas (tayas; su dhammā Snp 231, see Kp-a 188) f. tisso (DN i.143; AN v.210; Iti 99) nt. tīṇi (AN i.138, etc.), also used as absolute form (eka dve tīṇi) Kp iii. (cp. Kp-a 79 tīṇi lakkhaṇā for lakkhaṇāni Snp 1019); gen. m. nt tiṇṇaṃ (J iii.52, 111, etc.), f. tissannaṃ; instr. tīhi (ṭhānehi Dhp 224, vijjāhi Iti 101); loc. tīsu (janesu Ja i.307; vidhāsu Snp 842) ■ In composition & derivation: ti in numerical cpds.: tidasa (30) q.v.; tisata (300) Snp 566 (brāhmaṇā tisatā); 573 (bhikkhavo tisatā); tisahassa (3000) Pv ii.951 (janā ˚ā); in numerical derivations: tiṃsa (30), tika (triad), tikkhattuṃ (thrice) tidhā (threefold) ■ In nominal cpds.: see ti˚ te (a) in numerical cpds.: terasa (Snp-a 489; Dhs-a 333; Vv-a 72: terasī the 13th day) & teḷasa (SN i.192 Snp p.. 102 103) (13) [Sk. trayodaśa, Lat. tredecim]; tevīsa (23; Vv-a 5; tettiṃsa (33) Ja i.273; Dhp-a i.267; tesaṭṭhi (63; Pv-a 111 (Jambudīpe tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu). (b) in nominal cpds.: see te˚.

f. tisso, nt. tīṇi; Vedic traya, trī & trīṇi; Gr. τρεϊς, τρια; Lat. trēs, tria; Goth. preis, prija; Ohg. drī E. three, etc.

Tara

(n.) crossing, “transit,” passing over Snp 1119 (maccu˚) ■ (adj.) to be crossed, passable, in duttara hard to cross SN iv.157; Snp 174, Snp 273 (oghaṃ t duttaraṃ); Thig 10; Iti 57. Also as su-duttara SN i.35; SN v.24.

-esin wanting to pass over Ja iii.230

see tarati

Taraṅga

a wave Vism 157.

tara + ga

Taraccha

hyena Vin iii.58; AN iii.101; Mil 149, Mil 267; Dhp A 331; Mhbv 154 ■ f. taracchi Ja v.71 Ja v.406; Ja vi.562.

Derivation unknown. The Sk. forms are tarakṣu & tarakṣa

Taraṇa

(nt.) going across, passing over, traversing Vin iv.65 (tiriyaṃ˚); Pts i.15; Pts ii.99, Pts ii.119.

see tarati

Tarati1

(lit.) to go or get through, to cross (a river), pass over, traverse (fig.) to get beyond, i.e. to surmount, overcome, esp oghaṃ (the great flood of life, desire, ignorance, etc. SN i.53, SN i.208, SN i.214; SN v.168, SN v.186; Snp 173, Snp 273, Snp 771, Snp 1069 sangaṃ Snp 791; visattikaṃ Snp 333, Snp 857; ubhayaṃ (both worlds, here & beyond) Pv iv.131 (= atikkameti Pv-a 278); Nd ii.282-ppr. taranto Vin i.191 (Aciravati) grd. taritabba Vin iv.65 (nadī); aor. atari Ja iii.189 (samuddaṃ) & atāri Snp 355, Snp 1047 (jāti-maraṇaṃ), pl atāruṃ Snp 1045 ■ See also tāreti (Caus.), tāṇa, tāyate tiro, tiriyaṃ, tīra, tīreti.;

Vedic tarati, *ter (tṛ) to get to the other side, cp. Lat. termen, terminus, Gr. τέρμα, τέρχρον; also Lat trans = Goth. pairh = Ags. purh = E. through

Tarati2

to be in a hurry, to make haste Thag 291; ppr. taramāna in ˚rūpa (adj.) quickly, hurriedly Snp 417; Pv ii.62; Pv-a 181 (= turita) & ataramāna Vin i.248; grd. taraṇīya Thag 293 ■ See also tura, turita, turiya.

tvarate, pp. tvarita; also turati, turayati from *ter to turn round, move quickly, perhaps identical with the *ter of tarati1; cp. Ohg. dweran = E. twirl Gr. τορύνη = Lat. trua = Ger. quirl twirling-stick, also Lat. torqueo & turba & perhaps Ger. stūren, zerstören E. storm, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under trua

Tarahi

(adv.) then, at that time Vin ii.189.

Vedic tarhi, cp. carahi & etarahi

Tari

(f.) a boat Dāvs iv.53.

from tarati

Taritatta

(nt.) the fact of having traversed, crossed, or passed through Vv-a 284.

abstr. of tarita pp. of tarati1

Taru

tree, Pv-a 154 (˚gaṇā), 251.

Perhaps dialect. for dāru

Taruṇa

(adj.) 1. tender, of tender age, young new, newly (˚-) fresh. Esp. appld to a young calf MN i.459 (in simile); ˚vaccha, ˚vacchaka, ˚vacchī Vin i.193; Ja i.191; Dhp-a ii.35; Vv-a 200Vin i.243 (fresh milk); DN i.114 (Gotamo t. c’ eva t ■ paribbājako ca “a young man and only lately become a wanderer”) Pv-a 3, Pv-a 46 (˚janā), 62 (˚putta); Bdhd 93, 121.

2. (m & nt.) the shoot of a plant, or a young plant Vin i.189 (tāla˚); MN i.432; Vism 361 (taruṇa-tāla).

Vedic taruṇa, cp. Gr. τέρυς, τέρην; Lat. tener & perhaps tardus

Tala

(nt.) (a) flat surface (w. ref. to either top or bottom: cp. Ger. boden), level, ground, base Ja i.60 Ja i.62 (pāsāda˚ flat roof); iii.60 (id.); paṭhavī˚ (level ground) Ja ii.111, cp. bhūmi˚ Pv-a 176; ādāsa˚ surface of a mirror Vism 450, Vism 456, Vism 489; salila˚ (surface of pond Pv-a 157; Vv-a 160; heṭṭhima˚ (the lowest level Ja i.202; Pv-a 281Ja i.233 (base); 266 (khagga˚ the flat of the sword); ii.102 (bheri˚) ■ (b) the palm of the hand or the sole of the foot Ja ii.223; Vism 250 & cpds ■ See also taṭa, tāla, tālu.;

-ghātaka a slap with the palm of the hand Vin iv.260 Vin iv.261; -sattika in ˚ṃ uggirati to lift up the palm of the hand Vin iv.147; Dhp-a iii.50; cp. Vin. Texts i.51.

Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. tala m. & nt.; cp. Gr. τηλία (dice-board), Lat. tellus (earth), tabula (= table). Oir. talam (earth), Ags. pel (= deal), Ohg dili = Ger. diele

Talika

(adj.) having a sole, in eka-˚upāhanā a sandal with one sole Ja ii.277; Ja iii.80, Ja iii.81 (v.l. BB paṭilika); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 165.

from tala

Taluṇa

= taruṇa Dhs-a 333 (cp. Burnouf, Lotus 573).

Taḷāka

(nt.) a pond, pool reservoir Vin ii.256; Ja i.4, Ja i.239; Pv-a 202; DN-a i.273; Mil 1, Mil 66 = Mil 81, Mil 246, Mil 296, Mil 359.

Derivation uncertain. Perhaps from taṭa. The Sk. forms are taṭaka, taṭāka, taḍāga

Tasa

(adj.) 1. trembling, frightened Ja i.336 = Ja i.344 (vakā, expl. at 342 by tasita); perhaps the derived meaning of:

2. moving, running (cp. to meaning 1 & 2 Gr.; τρέω to flee & to tremble), always in comb;n tasa-thāvarā (pl.) movable & immovable beings [cp. M Vastu; i.207 jangama-sthāvara; ii.10 calaṃ sthāvara]. Metaphorically of people who are in fear & trembling, as distinguished from a thāvara, a selfpossessed & firm being (= Arahant Kp-a 245). In this sense t. is interpreted by tasati;1 as well as by tasati2 (to have thirst or worldly cravings) at Kp-a 245 tasantī ti tasā, sataṇhānaṃ sabhayānañ c’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; also at Nd ii.479: tasa ti yesaṃ tasitā (tasiṇā? taṇhā appahīnā, etc., & ye te santāsaṃ āpajjanti.; SN i.141; SN iv.117, SN iv.351; SN v.393; Snp 146, Snp 629; Dhp 405 Thag 876; Ja v.221; Nd ii.479; Dhp-a iv.175.

from tasati2

Tasati1

to be thirsty fig. to crave for SN ii.13; Mil 254 ■ pp. tasita1. Cp pari˚.

Sk. tṛṣyati = Gr. τέρσομοι to dry up, Lat. torreo (= E. torrid, toast), Goth. gapairsan & gapaúrsnan Ohg. derren; see also taṇhā & taṇhīyati

Tasati2

to tremble, shake, to have fear; to be frightened Snp 394 (ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke) Nd ii.479 (= santāsaṃ āpajjati); Kp-a 245 (may be taker as tasati1, see tasa) ■ pp. tasita2, cp. also tasa uttasati.;

Vedic trasati = Gr. τρέω, Lat. terreo (= terror); *ters fr. *ter in Sk. tarala, cp. also Lat. tremo (= tremble and trepidus

Tasara

(nt.) a shuttle Snp 215, Snp 464, Snp 497; Dhp-a i.424; Dhp-a iii.172. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 160.

Vedic tasara, cp. tanta, etc.

Tasiṇā

(f.) thirst; fig. craving (see taṇhā SN v.54, SN v.58; Nd ii.479 (to be read for tasitā?); Dhp 342, Dhp 343.

Diaeretic form of taṇhā, cp. dosiṇā → juṇhā, kasiṇa → kṛtsṇa, etc.

Tasita1

dried up, parched, thirsty SN ii.110, SN ii.118; Snp 980, Snp 1014 (not with Fausböll = tasita2); Ja iv.20; Pv ii.936 (chāta + ), 103 (= pipāsita Pv-a 143); iii.65 (= pipāsita Pv-a 127, Pv-a 202); Mil 318 (kilanta + ).

pp. of tasati1

Tasita2

frightened, full of fear Ja i.26 (bhīta + ). 342, iv.141 (id.): Nd ii.479 (or = tasiṇā?). atasita fearless SN iii.57. Tassa-papiyyasika

pp. of tasati2

Tassa-pāpiyyasikā

(f.) (viz. kiriyā) Name of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathā: guilt (legal wrong) of such & such a character Vin i.325; in detail expl. MN ii.249; + tiṇavatthāraka DN iii.254; AN i.99. ˚kammaṃ karoti to carry out proceedings against someone guilty of a certain legal offence Vin ii.85, Vin ii.86; ˚kata one against whom the latter is carried out AN iv.347.

Tāṇa

(nt.) shelter, protection refuge, esp. as tt. of shelter & peace offered by the Dhamma. Mostly in comb;n with leṇa & saraṇa; (also dīpa & abhaya; ), in var. contexts, esp. with ref to Nibbāna (see Nd ii.s. v.): DN i.95 (˚ṃ, etc. gavesin seeking refuge); AN i.155; SN iv.315 (maṃtāṇa, etc. adj protected by me, in my shelter) ■ SN i.2, SN i.54, SN i.55, SN i.107 (˚ṃ karoti); iv.372 (˚gāmī maggo); AN iv.184; Snp 668 (˚ṃ upeti); Dhp 288; Ja i.412 (= protector, expld by tāyitā parittāyitā patiṭṭhā); Sdhp 224, Sdhp 289. Cp tātar & tāyati.;

from Vedic root trā, variation of *ter in tarati. Orig. bringing or seeing through

Tāṇatā

(f.) protection, sheltering Dhp 288.

abstr. of tāṇa

Tāta

father; usually in voc. sg. tāta (and pl. tātā) used as term of affectionate, friendly or respectful address to one or more persons, both younger & older than the speaker, superior or inferior. As father (perhaps = tātā, see next) at Thig 423, Thig 424 (+ ammā). tāta (sg.) in addr. one: Ja iii.54; Ja iv.281 (amma tāta mammy & daddy) Dhp-a ii.48 (= father) iii.196 (id.); Pv-a 41 (= father), 73 (a son), 74 (a minister); Ja i.179 (id.); Mil 15, Mil 16, Mil 17 (a bhikkhu or thera) in addr. several Vin i.249; Ja ii.133; Pv-a 50. tātā (pl.) Ja i.166; Ja i.263; Ja iv.138.

Vedic tāta, Gr. τάτα & τέττα, Lat. tata, Ger. tate, E. dad(dy); onomat.

Tātar

protector, saviour, helper DN-a i.229. For meaning “father see tāta & cp. pitā = tāyitā at Ja i.412.

from Vedic trā, n. ag. to trāyati to protect

Tādin

(adj. n.) (nom. tādī & tādi, in cpds. tādi˚) such, such like of such (good) qualities, “ecce homo”; in pregnant sense appl. to the Bhagavant & Arahants, characterized as “such” in 5 ways: see Nd i.114 sq.; Snp-a 202 & cp Mil 382. tādī: Snp 712, Snp 803 (& 154 tādī no for tādino see Snp-a 201 sq.); tādi Snp 488, Snp 509, Snp 519 sq.; Dhp 95 gen. tādino Dhp 95, Dhp 96; with ref. to the Buddha DN ii.157≈ (ṭhitacittasa tādino, in BSk. sthiracittasya tāyinaḥ Avs ii.199); Vv 186 (expln Vv-a 95: iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇasampattiyā tādino Satthu: see Nd i.114 sq.) of Arahant AN ii.34; Snp 154 (or tādī no); instr. tādinā Snp 697; Mil 382; acc. tādiṃ Snp 86, Snp 219, Snp 957;: loc. pl tādisu Pv ii.971 (= iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇappattesu Pv-a 140, cp. Vv-a 95) ■ See tādisa1.

-bhāva “such-ness,” high(est) qualification Vism 5 Vism 214. -lakkhaṇa the characteristic of such (a being Ja iii.98 (˚yoga, cp. nakkhatta-yoga); Snp-a 200 (˚patta) Vv-a 95 (˚sampatti).

Vedic tādṛś from tad-dṛś of such appearance

Tādina

(adj.) [enlarged form of tādin) = tādin, only in loc. tādine Vv 212 (= tādimhi Vv-a 106).

Tādisa1

(adj.) such like, of such quality or character, in such a condition Ja i.151 Ja iii.280; Snp 112, Snp 317, Snp 459; Nd ii.277 (in expl. of tathāvidha); Iti 68; Pv ii.94; Pv-a 69, Pv-a 72; Mil 382. Also correlative tādisa-tādisa the one-the other Vv-a 288-f. tādisī [Sk. tādṛsī] Pv i.56 (vaṇijjā).

Vedic tādṛśa from tad-dṛsa = tad-rūpa; a reduction of this form in P. tādin

Tādisa2

(adj.) like you Ja i.167; Ja v.107.

tvaṃ + disa. Cp. Sk. tvādṛśa

Tādisaka

(adj.) = tādisa1, of such character Snp 278; Iti 68.

Tāpana

(nt.) burning, scorching, roasting; fig. tormenting, torture, self-mortification Vv-a 20 (aggimhi t. udake vā temanaṃ). Cp. ā˚; upa˚ pari˚.

from tāpeti

Tāpasa

one who practises tapas, an ascetic (brahmin). Eight kinds are enum;d at DN-a i.270 & Snp-a 295Ja ii.101, Ja ii.102; Ja v.201; Pv-a 153 ˚pabbajjā the life of an a. Ja iii.119; Dhp-a iv.29; DN-a i.270-f. tāpasī a female ascetic Mvu vii.11, Mvu vii.12.

from tapa & tapas

Tāpeti

to burn out, scorch, torment, fig. root out, quench Snp 451 (attānaṃ); Ja v.267 (janapadaṃ); Vv-a 114 (kilesaṃ t. in expl. of tapassin). Cp. pari˚.

Sk. tāpayati, Caus. to tapati

Tāma

desire, longing, greed in tāmatamadasangha-suppahīna Thag 310, an epithet of frogs which perhaps (with Kern, Toev. ii.88) is to be read as tāma-tamata-suppahita; “horribly greedy” (Kern gruwelijk vraatzuchtig).

Sk. tāma

Tāyati

to shelter protect, preserve, guard; bring up, nourish SN iv.246 (rūpa-balaṃ, bhoga˚, ñāti˚, putta˚); Ja iv.387; Snp 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaṃ ñātī vā pana ñātake) Pv-a 7 (khettaṃ tāyati bījaṃ).

Sk. trāyate & trāte, connected with; *ter in tarati, orig. to see through, to save, cp. tāṇa, etc.

Tāyitar

one who protects, shelters or guards Ja i.412 (in expl. of tāṇa, q.v.).

n. ag. from tāyati

Tārā

(f.) a star, a planet Snp 687 (tārāsabha the lord, lit. “the bull” of the stars, i.e. the Moon).

-gaṇa (tāra˚) the host of stars Pv ii.967 (cando va t ■ gaṇe atirocati). -maṇivitāna “star-jewel-awning” canopy of jewelled stars Vism 76.

Sk. tārā = Gr. ἀστήρ, α ̓́στον (= Lat. astrum, in E. disaster), Lat. stella, Goth. staírnō, Ohg. sterro (:E. star), perhaps loan word from Semitic sources

Tārakā

(f.) 1. a star, a planet: osadhī viya tārakā like the morning-star (Venus) Vv 92 = Pv ii.110Ja i.108; tāraka-rūpa the light (or sparkling of the stars DN iii.85, DN iii.90; SN iii.156 = Iti 19; SN v.44; Vv-a 79; Dhs 617.

2. fig. sparkling, glitter, twinkle akkhi˚ the pupil of the eye MN i.80; udaka˚ sparkling of the water ibid.

Sk. tārakā

Tāreti1

to make cross, to help over, to bring through, save, help, assist Snp 319 (pare tārayetuṃ), 321 (so tāraye tattha bahū pi aññe); Iti 123 (tiṇṇo tarayataṃ varo: “one who is through is the best of those who can help through”); Ja i.28 (v.203). aor atārayi Snp 539, Snp 540 & ṭāresi Snp 545.;

Caus. of tarati1

Tāreti2

to make haste Thag 293.

Caus. of tarati2

Tāla

1. the palmyra tree (fan palm), Borassus flabelliformis; freq. in comparisons similes MN i.187; Ja i.202 (˚vana), 273 (˚matta as tall as a palm): Vv-a 162; Pv-a 100 (chinnamūlo viya tālo)

2. a strip, stripe, streak Ja v.372 (= raji).

-aṭṭhika a kernel of the palm fruit Dhp-a ii.53, cp 60 (˚aṭṭhi-khaṇḍa); -kanda a bulbous plant Ja iv.46 (= kalamba); -kkhandha the trunk of a palm Ja iv.351; Vv-a 227 (˚parimāṇā mukhatuṇḍā: beaks of vultures in Niraya); Pv-a 56; -cchidda see tāḷa˚; -taruṇa a young shoot of the p. Vin i.189; -pakka palm fruit Iti 84 -paṇṇa a palm-leaf Dhp-a i.391; Dhp-a ii.249; Dhp-a iii.328; Bdhd 62; also used as a fan (tālapattehi kata-maṇḍalavījanī Vv-a 147) Vv 3343 (Hardy for ˚vaṇṭha of Goon ed. p. 30); Vv-a 147 (v.l. ˚vaṇṭa q.v.); Nd ii.562 (+ vidhūpana); -patta a palm-leaf Vin i.189; Vv-a 147 -miñja the pith of a p. Ja iv.402; -vaṇṭa [Sk. tālavṛṇta a fan Vin ii.130 (+ vidhūpana), 137; Ja i.265; Vv-a 44 cp. ˚paṇṇa; -vatthu (more correct tālâvatthu = tāla-avatthu) in tālāvatthukata a palm rendered groundless i.e. uprooted; freq. as simile to denote complete destruction or removal (of passions, faults, etc.) Nearly always in formula pahīna ucchinna-mūla t anabhāvaṃ-kata “given up, with roots cut out, like a palm with its base destroyed, rendered unable to sprout again” (Kern, Toev. ii.88: as een wijnpalm die niet meer geschiḳt is om weêr uit te schieten). This phrase was misunderstood in BSk.: Mvu iii.360 has kālavastuṃ ■ The readings vary: tālāvatthu e.g. at MN i.370; SN i.69; SN iv.84; AN i.135; AN ii.38; Ja v.267; tālav SN iii.10; SN v.327; Thig 478 (Thag-a 286: tālassa chindita-ṭṭhāna-sadisa); Nd ii.freq. (see under pahīna); tālāvatthukatā at Vin iii.3 ■ In other combn tālāvatthu bhavati (to be pulled out by the roots & thrown away; Ja v.267 (= chinnamūla-tālo viya niraye nibbattanti p. 273), cp. MN i.250; -vāra “palm-time” (?) or is it tāḷa˚; (gong-turn?) Dhp-a ii.49 (note: from tala-pratiṣṭhāyāṃ?).

Sk. tāla, cp. Gr. τ ̈αλις & τηλεχάω (be green, sprout up) Lat. talea shoot, sprout

Tālīsa

(nt.) (also tālissa Ja iv.286, tālīsaka Mil 338) the shrub Flacourtia cataphracta & a powder or ointment obtained from it Vin i.203 (+ tagara); Ja iv.286 (id.); Mil 338.

cp. Sk. tālī, tālīśa & talāśā

Tālīsa2

(No. 40) is short for cattālīsa, e.g. Ap. 103, 234 and passim.

Tālu

the palate Snp 716; Ja i.419; Vism 264 (˚matthaka top of p.); Pv-a 260.

Sk. tālu, see tala

Tāḷa1 [taḍ

, cp. Sk. tāla a blow, or musical time; tālīyaka cymbal] beating, striking, the thing beaten or struck i.e. a musical instrument which is beaten, an instr. of percussion, as a cymbal, gong, or tambourine (for tāḷa gong cp. thāla): (a) gong, etc. Ja i.3; Ja vi.60; Thag 893; DN-a i.85; Dhs-a 319 (kaṃsa˚) ■ (b) music in general Dhp-a iv.67.

-āvacara musical time or measure, music, a musician DN ii.159 (v.l. tāla˚); Ja i.60 (l); iv.41; Vv-a 257 (˚parivuta, of an angel).

Tāḷa2

(nt.) [Sk. tālaka = tāḍa Avs ii.56, tāḍaka Divy 577] a key (orig. a “knocker”?) Vin ii.148 (3 kinds loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, visāṇa˚); Bdhd 1.

-cchiggala a key-hole SN iv.290; SN v.453; Vism 500 -cchidda id. Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148, Vin ii.153 (all tāla˚); iii.118; Dhp-a iii.8 (l).

Tāḷī

(f.) a strike, a blow, in urattāḷiṃ karoti to strike one’s chest (as a sign of grief) Pv-a 39, etc. (see ura).

Tāḷeti

to strike a blow, flog, beat, esp. freq. in phrase kasāhi tāḷeti to flog with whips, etc. (in list of punishments, see kasā) MN i.87; AN ii.122; Nd ii.604; Pv-a 4, etc ■ ppr. pass. taḍḍamāna (for *tāḍyamāna) Ja vi.60 (so read for taddamāna; Com poṭhīyamāna) ■ pp. tāḷita Ja vi.60 (turiya˚); Vv 621 (id.); Sdhp 80. Cp. abhi˚.

Sk. tāḍayati, taḍ perhaps = tud

Tāva

(adv.) so much, so long; usually correl. with yāva how long, how much; in all meanings to be understood out of elliptical application of this correlation Thus I. yāva-tāva as long as: yāva dve janā avasiṭṭhā ahesuṃ tāva aññamaññaṃ ghātayiṃsu Ja i.254; yāva dukkhā nirayā idha tattha pi tāva ciraṃ vasitabbaṃ Snp 678. Neg. na tāva-yāva na not until MN i.428; SN v.261; AN i.141≈(na t. kālaṃ karoti yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ byantihoti he does not die until his evil kamma is exhausted). II. Elliptical: 1. temporal: so long as, for the time (tāvakālikaṃ = yāvak˚tāvak˚; see below).

2. comparative: (such-) as, like so, such, just so, rather, in such a degree, even; tāvabahuṃ suvaṇṇaṃ so much gold Vin i.209; t ■ mahanto so much Ja i.207; t. madhuraphala with such sweet fruit Ja ii.105; asītiyā tāva kimi-kulānaṃ sādhāraṇa (of the body) or rather, i.e. Vism 235; vatthāni t. devapātubhūtāni Pv-a 44; paṭhamaṃ t. (even) at once, right away Pv-a 113, Pv-a 132; gilānāya t. ayaṃ etissā rūpasobhā even in sickness she is so beautiful Vv-a 76; parittakassa kusalakammassa t. = quidem Pv-a 51; paṃsukūlikangaṃ t. in the first place Vism. 62.

3. concessive (a) (absol.) as far as it goes, considering, because: yadi evaṃ pitā tāva purisabhāve na rodati, mātu nāma hadayaṃ mudukaṃ “even if the father as man does not weep, surely,” & c., Pv-a 63 ■ (b) with imper. in expr like gaccha tāva go as long as you like (to go) (= gaccha tāva yāva gaccheyyāsi), i.e. if you like, cp. Ger. geh’immer; passa tāva just look = Lat. licet. Therefore sometimes = please or simply an emphatic imper. as “do go,” etc. Ja ii.5 (ete t. aguṇā hontu let them be faulty), 133 (ehi t.), 352 (tiṭṭha t. leave off please) iii.53 (pāto va t. hotu only let it be to-morrow, i.e. wait tillt-m.); iv.2 taṃ t. me detha give me this though) Vv-a 289 (vīmaṃsatha t. just think); Pv-a 4 (t. ayyo āgametu yāvâyaṃ puriso pānīyaṃ pivissati may your honour wait till this man shall have drunk the water) 13 (therā t. gacchantu). With prohibitive: mā tāva ito agā please do not go from here Pv ii.322.

4. hortative with 1st pers. fut. equal to imperative-subjunctive or injunctive, cp. 3 (b): let me, well, now, then (cp Lat. age in dic age, etc.). Ja i.62 (puttaṃ t. passissāmi please let me see the son), 263 (vīmaṃsissāmi t. let me think), 265 (nahāyissāmi t. just let me bathe). III. In other combinations: tāva-na although-yet not even: ajjā pi t. me balaṃ na passasi not even to-day have you yet seen my full strength Ja i.207; t. mahādhanassāmī na me dātuṃ piyaṃ ahu although lord of wealth yet I did not like to give Pv ii.76. na-tāva (or tāva in neg. sentence) not yet, not even, not so much as (= Lat. ne-quidem) Pv ii.112 (na ca tāva khīyati does not even diminish a bit); Pv-a 117 (attano kenaci anabhibhavanīyataṃ eva tāva: that he is not to be overpowered, even by anyone). tāva-d-eva just now instantly, on the spot, at once Snp 30; Ja i.61, Ja i.151 Ja iv.2; Pv ii.89 (= tadā eva Pv-a 109); Pv-a 23, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 74 Pv-a 88, etc. tāvade (= tāva-d-eva) for all times Pv iv.338 (= Pv-a 255).

-kālika (adj.) “as long as the time lasts,” i.e. for the time being, temporary, pro tempore Vin ii.174; Vin iii.66 Vin iv.286; Ja i.121, Ja i.393; Vism 95; Thag-a 288; Pv-a 87 (= na sassata).

Sk. tāvat

Tāvataka

(adj.) just so much or just so long (viz. as the situation requires), with (or ellipt. without a corresp. yāvataka Vin i.83 (yāvatake-t. as many as) DN ii.18 (yāvatakv’ assa kāyo tāvatakv’ assa vyāmo as tall as is his body so far can he stretch his arms: the 19th sign of a Mahāpurisa); instr. as adv. tāvatakena after a little time Mil 107; Dhp-a iii.61 ■ See also tattaka (contracted of tāvataka).

der. fr. tāva

Tāvatā

(adv.) 1. so long (corr. to yāva) Dpvs iv.17.

2. on that account, thus DN i.104 (v.l. ettāvatā); Dhp 266.

from tāva

Tāvatiṃsa

No. 33, only in cpds. denoting the 33 gods, whose chief is Sakka, while the numeral 33 is always tettiṃsa. This number occurs already in the Vedas with ref. to the gods & is also found in Zend-Avesta (see Haug,; Language & Writings,; etc., pp. 275, 276). The early Buddhists, though they took over the number 33, rejected the superstitious beliefs in the magical influence and mystic meaning of that & other simple numbers. And they altered the tradition. The king of the gods had been Indra, of disreputable character from the Buddhist point of view. Him they deposed, and invented a new god named Sakka, the opposite in every way to Indra (see for details; Dial. ii.294–⁠298). Good Buddhists, after death in this world, are reborn in heaven (sagga), by which is meant the realm of the Thirty-three (D ii.209). There they are welcomed by the Thirty-three with a song of triumph (D ii.209, 211, 221, 227) The Thirty-three are represented as being quite good Buddhists. Sakka their new chief and Brahmā address them in discourses suitable only for followers of the new movement (D ii.213, 221). See further Vin i.12; MN i.252; MN ii.78; MN iii.100; AN iii.287; AN iv.396 = Vv-a 18 (cpd with the people of Jambudīpa); v.59, 331, Vism 225, etc ■ See also tidasa.

-devaloka the god-world of the 33; freq. e.g. Ja i.202 Vism 399; Dhp-a iii.8; -bhavana the realm of the 33 gods Ja i.202; Vism 207 sq., 390, 416, and passim.

tayo + tiṃsa. Cp. Vedic trayastriṃśat

Tāvata

(nt.) lit. “so-much-ness,” i.e. relative extent or sphere, relatively Vism 481, Vism 482.

abstr. fr. tāva

Tāsa

terror, trembling, fear, fright, anxiety SN iii.57; Ja i.342; Ja iii.177, Ja iii.202; Mil 24. Cp. san˚.

see tasati2

Tāsaniya

(adj.) to be dreaded, dreadful, fearful Mil 149.

Tāhaṃ

contraction of 1. taṃ ahaṃ: see ta˚; 2. te ahaṃ: see tvaṃ.

Ti

(adv.) the apostrophe form of iti, thus. See iti.

cp. Sk. iti

Ti˚

base of numeral three in compn; consisting of three, threefold; in numerical cpds. also three (3 times).

-kaṭuka threefold spices (kaṭuka-bhaṇḍa) Vv-a 186 -gāvuta a distance of 3/4 of a league (i.e. about 2 miles), Dhp-a i.108 (less than yojana, more than usabha), 131, 396; ii.43, 61, 64, 69; iii.202, 269; Vv-a 227; B. on SN i.52 (sarīra); -catu three or four Dhp-a i.173; -cīvara (nt.) the 3 robes of a bhikkhu consisting of: diguṇā sanghāṭi, ekacciya uttarāsanga ekacciya antaravāsaka Vin i.289, Vin i.296; Vin ii.302. ticīvarena avippavāsa Vin i.109 sq ■ Vism 60, Vism 66; Dhp-a iv.23. -tālamattaṃ 3 palm-trees high Dhp-a ii.62 -daṇḍa 1. a tripod as one of the requisites of a hermit to place the water-pot on (kuṇḍikā) Ja i.8 (tidaṇḍakuṇḍikādike tāpasa-parikkhārā), 9 (hanging from the kāja); ii.317 (see tedaṇḍika).

2. part of a chariot AN iv.191 (v.l. daṇḍa only). -diva the 3 heavens (that is the Tāvatiṃsa heaven) DN ii.167, DN ii.272 (tidivûpapanna) SN i.96 (˚ṃ ṭhānaṃ upeti), 181 (ākankha-māno ˚ṃ anuttaraṃ). -pada [cp. Vedic tripad or tripād, Gr. τρίπους Lat. tripes: tripod] consisting of 3 feet or (in prosody of 3 padas Snp 457 (w. ref. to metre Sāvittī); -(p)pala threefold Vism 339; -pallattha “turning in 3 ways, i.e. skilled in all occupations (Kern, Toev.: zeer listig Ja i.163 (of miga; Com. expl. as lying on 3 sides of its lair); -piṭaka the 3 Piṭakas Vism 62, Vism 241; Dhp-a i.382 -peṭaka = tepiṭaka Mil 90; tipeṭakin at Vin v.3 -maṇḍala (nt.) the 3 circles (viz. the navel & the 2 knees) Vin ii.213 (˚ṃ paṭicchādento parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsento ); cp. Vin. Texts i.155; -yojana a distance of 3 leagues, i.e. 20 miles, or fig. a long dist.; Vism 392 (tiyojanika setacchatta); Dhp-a ii.41 (˚magga); Vv-a 75 (˚mattake vihāraṃ agamāsi); Pv-a 216 (sā ca pokkharaṇī Vesaliyā ˚mattake hoti); ˚satika 300 cubits long Ja ii.3 -loka the 3 worlds (i.e. kāma, rūpa, arūpa-loka) Sdhp 29, Sdhp 276, Sdhp 491 (cp. tebhūmaka); -vagga consisting of 3 divisions or books DN-a i.2 (Dīghāgamo vaggato t. hoti) -(v)aṅgika having 3 angas (of jhāna) Dhs 161; -vassika for the 3 seasons (-gandha-sālibhattaṃ bhuñjantā) Dhp-a ii.9; Ja i.66 (id.); -vidha 3 fold, of sacrifice (yañña DN i.128, DN i.134, DN i.143; of aggi (fire) Ja i.4 & Mil 97; Vism 147 (˚kalyāṇatā). -visākha a three-forked frown on the forehead SN i.118; MN i.109; -sandhi consisting of 3 spaces Ja vi.397 (tāya senāya Mithilā t ■ parivāritā) expld as an army made up of elephants, chariots, cavalry and infantry, with a space between each two.

Vedic tris, Av. priś, Gr. τρίς, Lat. ter (fr. ters → *tris, cp. testis → *tristo, trecenti → *tricenti), Icl. prisvar Ohg. driror

Tiṃsaṃ

(tiṃsa˚) the number 30; DN i.81≈(tiṃsaṃ pi jātiyo); SN ii.217 (t ■ mattā bhikkhū); dat. instr. tiṃsāya AN v.305 (dhammehi samannāgato); Snp p.87 (pi dadāmi) Pv-a 281 (vassasahassehi): t ■ yojana-maggaṃ (āgato) Dhp-a ii.76 Dhp-a ii.79; Dhp-a iii.172; Pv-a 154; ˚yojanika kantāra Dhp-a ii.193 (cp. 192); Ja v.46 (magga); Dhp-a i.26 (vimāna) t ■ vassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṃ (of Konāgamana Buddha) DN ii.3; t ■ mattāni vassāni Mil 15; t ■ vassasahassāni Pv-a 281 = Dhp-a ii.10. So of an immense crowd: tiṃsa bhikkhu-sahassāni DN ii.6; tiṃsa-mattā sūkarā Ja ii.417; ˚sahassa-bhikkhū Dhp-a i.24.

Vedic triṃśat, cp. Lat. trīginta, Oir. tricha

Tika

(adj.-n.) consisting of 3, a triad SN ii.218 (t ■ bhojana); Dhp-a iv.89 (-nipāta, the book of the triads, a division of the Jātaka), 108 (t ■ catukka-jhāna the 3 & the 4 jhānas); Mil 12 (tika-duka-paṭimaṇḍitā dhammasanganī); Vism 13 sq.; Dhs-a 39 (-duka triad & pair).;

Vedic trika

Tikicchaka

a physician, a doctor AN v.219; Ja i.4 (adj. & vejja); iv.361; Pv-a 233.

fr. tikicchati

Tikicchati

to treat medically, to cure Vin i.276; SN i.222; Mil 172, Mil 272, Mil 302. Caus. tikicchāpeti Ja i.4.

also cikicchati = Sk. cikitsati. Desid. of cit, to aim at, think upon, in pregnant sense of endeavouring to heal

Tikicchā

(f.) the art of healing, practice of medicine DN i.10 (dāraka˚ infant healing); Snp 927 (˚ṃ māmako na seveyya) ■ See also tekiccha.

from last

Tikkaṃ

at Ja v.291 in “yāva majjhantikā tikkam āgami yeva” is to be read as “yāva majjhantik’ âtikkamm’ âgami yeva.”

Tikkha

(adj.) sharp, clever, acute, quick (only fig. of the mind), in tikkh-indriya (opp. mud-indriya Nd ii.2353p = Pts i.121 = Pts ii.195; & tikkha-paññatā AN i.45.

= tikhiṇa

Tikkhattuṃ

(adv.) three times (cp. tayo II. C 2), esp. in phrase vanditvā t. padakkhiṇaṃ katvā “having performed the reverent parting salutation 3 times” Vv-a 173, Vv-a 219; t. sāvesi he announced it 3 times Ja ii.352; Dhp-a ii.4; t. paggaṇhāpesi offered 3 times Pv-a 74. See also Ja iv.267; Ja v.382; Ja vi.71; Dhp-a ii.5, Dhp-a ii.42, Dhp-a ii.65, Dhp-a ii.338; Dhp-a iv.122 & passim.;

Sk. trikṛtvaḥ

Tikhiṇa

(adj.) pointed, sharp pungent, acrid; fig. “sharp,” clever, cunning, acute (in this meaning only in contr. form tikkha) Ja v.264; Dhp-a ii.9; Dhp-a iv.13; Pv-a 152, Pv-a 221 (= tippa). (ati-tikhinatā Mil 278. See also tippa & tibba & cp. tejo.;

Vedic tīkṣṇa of which t. is the diaeretic form, whereas the contracted forms are tiṇha (q.v. & tikkha. Cp. also Sk. tikta pp. of; tij, tejate. From *steg in Gr. στίζω “stitch” & στικτός, Lat. instīgo Ohg. stehhan, Ger. stecken, E. stick

Tiṭṭha

(adj.) dry, hard, rough Ja vi.212 (˚sela hard rock).

pp. of tasati1

Tiṭṭhati

to stand, etc ■ I. Forms: pres. ind. tiṭṭhati (Snp 333, Snp 434; Pv i.51); imper. 2nd tiṭṭha, 3rd tiṭṭhatu ppr. tiṭṭhaṃ, tiṭṭhanto, tiṭṭhamāna; pot. tiṭṭhe (Snp 918, Snp 968) & tiṭṭheyya (Sn. 942); fut. ṭhassati (Ja i.172 Ja i.217); aor. aṭṭhāsi (Ja i.279, pl. aṭṭhaṃsu Ja ii.129) aṭṭhā (cp. agā, orig. impf.) (Snp 429; Ja i.188); inf ṭhātuṃ (Pv-a 174); ger. ṭhatvā (Snp 887); grd. ṭhānīya (Pv-a 72) ■ pp. ṭhita, Caus. ṭhapeti. An apparent Med ■ Pass. ṭhīyati, as found in cpd. pati-ṭṭhīyati is to be expld as Med. of paṭi + sthyā (see thīna), and should be written paṭi-tthīyati. See under patiṭṭhīyati. See also ṭhāna & ṭhiti ■ II.; Meanings.

1. to stand stand up, to be standing (see ṭhāna I. 1a): ṭhānakappana-vacanaṃ nisajjādi-paṭikkhepato Pv-a 24; opp to walking or lying down: tiṭṭhaṃ caraṃ nisinno vā Snp 151, Snp 193; tiṭṭhamānāya eva c’ assā gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ ahosi “she was delivered standing” Ja i.52; ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi Pv-a 68, etc.; cankamana-koṭiyaṃ ṭhatvā Pv-a 79.

2. to stop, stay, abide; to last, endure be at rest; fig. to remain in, abide by, acquiesce in (see ṭhāna I. 1b). In imper. tiṭṭhatu it approaches the meanings of ṭhapeti viz. leave it alone, let it be so all right. yāva kāyo ṭhassati tāva naṃ dakkhinti deva-manussā (as long as the body shall last) DN i.46 tiṭṭhe shall he live on (cp. ṭhāna II.d Snp 1053, Snp 1072 = Nd ii.283, tiṭṭheyya saṭṭhikappasahassāni to stay on indefinitely); tiṭṭheyya kappaṃ DN ii.103. tiṭṭhantī anto vimānasmiṃ “remaining inside the castle” Pv i.101; tiṭṭha tāva “stop please” Ja ii.352; tiṭṭhabhadantika one who bids the guest stay (combd w ehi-bh˚) DN i.166; MN i.342; AN i.295; AN ii.206: ovāde ṭhatvā (abiding by) Ja i.153; Ja vi.367; similarly Ja vi.336-Imper. tiṭṭhatu Ja iv.40; Mil 14; Pv-a 74.

3. to live (on = instr.), behave, exist, be (see ṭhāna I. 2); to be in a certain condition [gati, cp. ṭhāna II. (c)]. Often periphrastically for finite verb (with ger.: cp. gata ṭhita) tiṭṭhantam enaṃ jānāti (he knows their “gati” Snp 1114 (see Nd ii.283); āhārena tiṭṭhati Pv-a 27 (is supported by, cp. ṭhiti); yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā (outliving their lives) Pv-a 66; karuṇa-ṭhānīya (= *kāruṇayitabba) deserving pity Pv-a 72; yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi (how you are or look!) Vv 441, etc ■ with ger.: pharitvā aṭṭhāsi (pervaded) Ja vi.367; aṭṭhiṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsi (cut through to the bone) Ja iv.415; gehaṃ samparivāretvā aṭṭhaṃsu (encircled the house) Pv-a 22.

Frequentative of Vedic sthā, stand (cp. sthāna, Lat. sto: see ṭhāna) = Av. hiśtaiti, Gr. ι ̔́στημι, Lat sisto

Tiṇa

(nt.) grass, herb; weed; straw; thatch hay, litter SN iii.137 (tiṇa, kasā, kusa, babbaja, bīraṇa) satiṇakaṭṭhodaka full of grass, wood & water (of an estate) DN i.87, DN i.111, etc.; sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā rajo vā tiṇaṃ vā ussāvo vā (dust & weeds) DN ii.19; AN i.145 t. + paṇṇa (grass & leaves;1) AN i.183; Vv-a 5Ja i.108 (dabba˚), 295; iii.53; Pv i.81 (harita t.); iv.148; Vism 353 (kuṇṭha˚); DN-a i.77 (alla˚ fresh grass); Pv-a 7 (weed), 62 (grass), 112; Dhp-a iv.121; Mil 47 (thatch) 224 (id.).

-aṇḍupaka a roll of grass Vin i.208 = Vin iii.249; -āgāra a thatched cottage AN i.101 (+ naḷāgāra); -ukkā a firebrand of dry grass or hay SN ii.152; SN iii.185; Ja i.212 Ja i.296; Vism 428; Dhp-a i.126; Thag-a 287; Bdhd 107 -karala a wisp of grass Dhp-a iii.38; -kājaka a load of g Dhp-a iv.121; -gahana a thicket of g., a jungle AN i.153 -cuṇṇa crushed & powdered (dry) grass or herbs Vin i.203; Vv-a 100 (-rajânukiṇṇa); -jāti grass-creeper Vv-a 162; -dāya a grass-jungle SN ii.152; -dosa damaged by weeds (khetta) Dhp 356; Pv-a 7; -pupphaka (-roga sickness caused by the flowering of grass, hay-fever Mil 216; -purisaka a straw-man, a scarecrow Mil 352; Vism 462; Dhs-a 111; -bhakkha eating grass; of animals MN iii.167; of ascetics DN i.166; Pp 55; AN i.241 AN i.295; -bhusa chaff, litter, dry grass Vv-a 47; -rukkha a shrub; -vatthāraka one of the seven Adhikaraṇasamathas (ways in which litigation may be settled). In case mutual complaints of breach of the rules have been brought before a chapter, then the chapter may decline to go into the details and, with the consent of the litigants, declare all the charges settled. See Vin Texts, iii.30–⁠34. This is the “covering over as if with grass” Vin ii.87 (in detail, cp. also tassapāpiyyasikā) DN iii.254; AN i.99; MN ii.250; -santhāraka a mat of grass Vin i.286; Vin ii.113, Vin ii.116; Ja i.360.

Vedic tṛṇa, from *ter (cp. tarati) to pierce, orig. “point” (= blade); Goth. paúrnus, Ags. porn = E thorn, Ger. dorn

Tiṇava

a sort of drum AN ii.117.

Tiṇḍuka

see tinduka.

Tiṇṇa

one who has reached the other shore (always fig.) gone through, overcome, one who has attained Nibbāna. Ogha˚ gone through the great flood SN i.3, SN i.142; Snp 178, Snp 823, Snp 1082, Snp 1101, Snp 1145; DN iii.54; Snp 21 (+ pāragata), 359 (+ parinibbuta), 515 545 (tiṇṇo tāres’ imaṃ pajaṃ); Iti 123 (tiṇṇo tārayataṃ varo); Dhp 195 (-sokapariddava); Nd ii.282.

-kathaṅkatha (adj.) having overcome doubt, free from doubt Snp 17, Snp 86, Snp 367; -vicikiccha = prec. Vin i.16; DN i.110; DN ii.224, DN ii.229; Pp 68; DN-a i.211.

pp. of tarati

Tiṇha

sharp (of swords, axes, knives, etc.) DN i.56 (sattha); SN iv.160, SN iv.167 (kuṭhārī); AN iv.171; Snp 667 (˚dhāra), 673 (asipattavana); Ja i.253; Sdhp 381.

see tikhiṇa

Titikkhati

to bear, endure, stand SN i.221; Snp 623; Dhp 321 = Nd ii.475 B7; Dhp 399 (titikkhissaṃ = sahissāmi Dhp-a iv.3) Ja v.81, Ja v.368.

Sk. titikṣate, Desid. of tij, cp. tijo & tikhiṇa.

Titikkhā

(f.) endurance, forgiveness, longsuffering SN i.7; SN v.4; Dhp 184; Nd ii.203.

see last

Titta

satisfied (with = instr.) enjoying (c. gen.), happy, contented AN i.87 = Pp 26 (+ tappetar) Mil 249; Vv-a 86 (= pīṇita); Pv-a 46 (dibbâhārassa) 59 (= suhita), 109 (= pīṇita) ■ atitta dissatisfied, insatiate Ja i.440; Ja iii.275; Dhp 48 (kāmesu).

pp. of tappati2

Tittaka

(adj.) sharp, bitter (of taste) MN i.80 (˚alābu), 315 (id.); Pv-a 47 (id.; so read for tintaka lābu) Dhs 629 = Nd ii.540 (tittika; enumd between lavaṇa & kaṭuka); Dhs-a 320.

cp. Sk. tiktaka from tij

Tittakatta

(nt.) bitterness, enumd with lavaṇattaṃ & kaṭukattaṃ at Mil 56 = Mil 63 (cp. Nd;2 540).

abstr. to tittaka

Titti

(f.) satisfaction (in = loc.) Dhp 186 = Thag-a 287 (na kahāpaṇavassena t. kāmesu vijjati); n atthi t. kāmānaṃ Thig 487; Ja v.486 (dhammesu) Vv-a 11; Pv-a 32 (˚ṃ gacchati find s.) 55 (paṭilabhati) 127.

from tappati2

Tittika

in sama˚; at DN i.244, Vin i.230, brimful, of a river. Derivation & meaning doubtful. See the note at; Buddhist Suttas, 178, 9.

Tittimant

(adj.) satisfied, contented, so read at Ja iii.70 & vi.508 for kittimant.

titti + mant

Tittira

partridge Ja i.218; Ja iii.538. -pattikā a kind of boot Vin i.186.

Onomat. cp. Vedic tittira & tittiri, Gr.; τατύρας pheasant, Lit. teterva heath-cock; Lat. tetrinnio to cackle

Tittiriya

(adj.) belonging to a partridge, like a partridge Ja i.219 (brahmacariya).

fr. tittira

Tittha

(nt.) 1. a fording place, landing place, which made a convenient bathing place DN ii.89 = Vin i.230 (Gotama˚ the G. ford) Ja i.339, Ja i.340 (titthāraṇa); ii.111; iii.228 (˚nāvika ferryman); 230 (nāvā˚ a ferry); iv.379; Pv ii.120; iii.64iv.122 (su˚); Dāvs. v.59 (harbour). Titthaṃ jānāti to know a “fording place,” i.e. a means or a person to help over a difficulty or doubt MN i.223 = AN v.349 (neg. 2. a sect (always with bad connotation. Promising to lead its votaries over into salvation, it only leads them into error).

-āyatana the sphere or fold of a sect (cp. titthiya Vin i.60, Vin i.69; Vin ii.279; MN i.483; AN i.173; Pp 22; Dhs 381, Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101n); DN-a i.118; Ledi Sadaw in J.P.T.S. 1913, 117–⁠118; -kara a “ford-maker, founder of a sect DN i.47, DN i.116; MN i.198; Snp p.. 90, 92; Mil 4, Mil 6, etc.; -ññutā knowledge of a ford, in fig sense of titthaṃ jānāti (see above) Ne 29, Ne 80.

Vedic tīrtha, from *ter, tarate, to pass through, orig. passage (through a river), ford

Titthika

(adj.).

Possible reading in Burmese MSS. for tittika. But the two compound letters (tt and tth are so difficult to distinguish that it is uncertain which of the two the scribe really meant

Titthiya

an heretic Vin i.54, Vin i.84, Vin i.136, Vin i.159 (˚samādāna), 306 (˚dhaja), 320; SN i.65; SN iv.37, SN iv.394; DN iii.44, DN iii.46; Snp 381, Snp 891; Nd ii.38; Pts i.160; Pp 49; Vb 247. añña˚ e.g. Vin i.101; DN i.175 sq.; DN iii.130 sq.; Ja ii.415, Ja ii.417. -sāvaka a follower of an heretic teacher Vin i.172; Ja i.95 Vism 17.

from tittha 2, cp. Divy 817; Avs i.48; Avs ii.20. An adherent of another sect (often as añña˚)

Tithi

a lunar day Dhp-a i.174; Pv-a 198.

Sk. tithi

Tidasa

(num.) thirty (cp. tiṃsa), esp. the thirty deities (pl.) or belonging to them (adj.). It is the round figure for 33, and is used as equivalent to tāvatiṃsa. Nandanaṃ rammaṃ tidasānaṃ mahāvanaṃ Pv iii.119 = Vv 1813; devā tidasā sahindakā Vv 301 Sdhp 420.

-ādhipati the Lord of the 30 (viz. Sakka) Vv 478 -inda ruler of the 30 Sdhp 411, Sdhp 478; -gaṇa the company of the 30; Snp 679 (Com. tettiṃsa); Vv 416; -gatin going to the 30 (as one of the gatis) Vv 3512 (= tidasabhavanaṃ gata Tāvatiṃsadevanikāyaṃ uppanna Vv-a 164) -pura the city of the 30, i.e. Heaven Mil 291; -bhavana the state of the 30, i.e. heavenly existence Vv-a 164 (= Tāvatiṃsabhavana).

Vedic tridaśa

Tidhā

(adv.) in three ways or parts, threefold Mil 282 (-pabhinna nāgarājā).

ti + dhā

Tinta

(adj.) wet, moist Mil 286; Dhp-a ii.40 (˚mukha).

= timita from temeti

Tintaka

at Pv-a 47 (˚alābu) is to be read as tittaka˚.

Tintiṇa

(nt.) greed, desire; (adj.) greedy. Ep. of a pāpabhikkhu AN v.149 (Com. tintiṇaṃ vuccati taṇhā, tāya samannāgato āsankābahulo vā); Vb 351 (tintiṇaṃ tintiṇāyanā, etc. = loluppaṃ). Tintinati & Tintinayati;

Tintiṇāti & Tintiṇāyati

to become sick, to swoon, to (stiffen out in a) faint Ja i.243 (tintiṇanto corresp. with mucchita); vi.347 (tintiṇāyamāna, v.l. tiṇāy˚).

either = Sk. timirayati to be obscured, from tim in timira, or from stim (Sk. *tistimāyati → *stistim˚ after tiṣṭhati → *stiṣṭhati; = P. titiṇāyati) to become stiff, cp. timi, thīna and in meaning mucchati. The root tam occurs in same meaning in cpd. nitammati (q.v. = Sk. nitāmyati) at Ja iv.284 expld by atikilamati

Tinduka

the tree Diospyros embryopteris DN i.178 (v.l. tiṇḍ˚; Ja v.99; tiṇḍukāni food in a hermitage Ja iv.434; Ja vi.532 ■ tindukakandarā Npl. the T. cave Vin ii.76 ■ See also timbaru & timbarūsaka.;

Sk. tinduka

Tipu

lead, tin Vin i.190 (˚maya); SN v.92; Ja ii.296; Mil 331 (˚kāra a worker in lead, tinsmith); Vism 174 (˚maṇḍala); Dhp-a iv.104 (˚parikhā).

cp. Sk. trapu, non-Aryan?

Tipusa

(nt.) a species of cucumber Ja v.37; Vv-a 147.

Sk. trapusa

Tippa

(adj.) piercing, sharp acute, fierce; always & only with ref. to pains, esp pains suffered in Niraya. In full comb;ns sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā tippā kharā MN i.10; AN ii.116, AN ii.143, AN ii.153 ekantadukkhā t. kaṭukā ved. MN i.74; bhayānaka ekantatippa Niraya Pv iv.19 (= tikhiṇadukkha˚ Pv-a 221); nerayikā sattā dukkhā t. kaṭukā ved˚ vediyamānā Mil 148.

a variant of tibba = Sk. tīvra, presumably from tij (cp. tikhiṇa), but by Bdhgh connected w tap (tapati, burn): tippā ti bahalā tāpana-vasena vā tippā Com. to Anguttara (see M i.526)

Tibba

(adj.) probably a contamination of two roots of different meaning; viz. tij & tim; (of tamas) or = stim to be motionless, cp. styā under thīna] 1. sharp, keen eager: tibbagārava very devout AN ii.21; Ne 112 (cp tīvraprasāda Avs i.130); t ■ cchanda DN iii.252, DN iii.283. 2. dense, thick; confused, dark, dim: t ■ rāga Dhp 349 (= bahalarāga Dhp-a iv.68); AN ii.149; tibbo vanasaṇḍo avijjāya adhivacanaṃ SN iii.109; tibbasārāga (kāmesu SN iii.93 = Iti 90; AN ii.30; tibbo manussaloko (dark dense) Mil 7; ˚andhakāra dense darkness Vism 500 sq. ˚kilesu deep blemish (of character) Vism 87.

Timi

a large fish, a leviathan; a fabulous fish of enormous size. It occurs always in combn w. timiṅgala, in formula timi timingala timitimingala, which should probably be reduced to one simple timitimingala (see next).

Derivation unknown. Sk. timi

Timiṅgala

in combn w. timi, timitimiṅgala. Sk. has timingila & timingilagila redupl. in 2nd syllable where P. has redupl. in 1st; fisheater redupl. as intens. = greedy or monstrous fisheater a fabulous fish of enormous size, the largest fish in existence Vin ii.238 = AN iv.200 = Nd ii.2353q; Pts ii.196; Mil 377. At Ud 54 sq. & Mil 262 we find the reading timi timingala timirapingala, which is evidently faulty A Sanskritized form of t. is timitimingala at Divy 502 See timiratipingala, & cp. also the similar Sk. cilicima a sort of fish.;

timi + gila, gl, see note on gala

Timira

(adj.) dark; nt. darkness Vv 323 (t ■ tamba) Ja iii.189 (t ■ rukkha); vanatimira a flower Ja iv.285 Ja v.182.

Sk. timira fr. tim = tam (as in tamas), to which also belong tibba 2 & tintiṇāti. This is to be distinguished from; tim in temeti to (be or) make wet See tama

Timiratipiṅgala

(nt.) a great ocean fish, Dhs-a 13, v. timingala.

Timirāyittata

(nt.) gloom, darkness SN iii.124 (= Māra).

abstr. to timirāyita, pp. of timirayati to obscure, denom. to timira

Timisa

(nt.) darkness Ja iii.433 (andhakāra-timissāya); Pp 30 (andh˚-timisāya); Mil 283

Vedic tamisrā = tamas

Timīsikā

(f.) darkness, a very dark night Vv 96; Ja iv.98.

timisa + ka

Timbaru

a certain tree (Strychnos nux vomica or Diospyros) Ja vi.336; ˚tthanī (f.) “with breasts like the t fruit” Snp 110; Ja vi.457 (Snp-a 172: taruṇadārikā) Vv-a 137 (t ■ nādasadisa).

Timbarukkha

= timbarūsaka Ja vi.529.

Timbarūsaka

= timbaru (Diospyros or Strychnos) Vin iii.59; Vv 3327 (= tindukaphala Vv-a 147; tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarūsakan ti ca vadanti) Dhp-a iii.315.

Tiraccha

(adv.) across, obliquely; in ˚bhūta deviating, going wrong, swerving from the right direction DN-a i.89 (see under tiracchāna-kathā).

Vedic tiryañc, obliquely, from *ter (tarati). Goth. pairh, Ohg. durh, E. through; cp tiriyaṃ

Tiracchāna

an animal Iti 92 (tiracchānaṃ ca yoniyo for tiracchāna-yoniyo); Vb 339 (˚gāminī paṭipadā leading to rebirth among beasts); Vv-a 23 (manussatiracchāna an animal-man, wild man, “werwolf”).

-kathā “animal talk”; wrong or childish talk in general Vin i.188; DN i.7, DN i.178; DN iii.54; Vism 127; expld at DN-a i.89 by anīyānikattā sagga-mokkha-maggānaṃ tiraccha-bhūtā kathā; -gata an animal, a beast Vin iv.7; SN iii.152 = DN-a i.23; (t. pāṇā) MN iii.167 (t. pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā); Nd ii.on Snp 72 (t ■ pāṇā); Ja i.459 (= vanagocara); Vb 412 sq.; -yoni the realm of the brute creation, the animals. Among the 5 gatis (niraya t manussā devā pettivisaya) it counts as an apāyagati a state of misery DN i.228; DN iii.234; SN i.34; SN iii.225 sq. iv. 168, 307; AN i.60; AN ii.127, AN ii.129; Pv iv.111; Vism 103 Vism 427; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 166; -yonika (& yoniya; AN i.37) belonging to the realm of the animals SN v.356; -vijjā a low art, a pseudo-science Vin ii.139; DN i.9 sq.

for ˚gata = Sk. tiraścīna (˚gata) = tiraśca; “going horizontally,” i.e. not erect. Cp. tiraccha tiriyaṃ, tiro

Tiriyaṃ

(adv.) transversely, obliquely, horizontally (as opp to uddhaṃ vertically, above, & adho beneath), slanting across. In comb;n uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ sabbadhi “in all directions whatever” DN i.251 = AN ii.129; similarly uddhaṃ adho t. vâpi majjhe Snp 1055; with uddhaṃ adho DN i.23, DN i.153; Vism 176 (where expld) ■ AN ii.48; Snp 150, Snp 537; Ja i.96; Iti 120; Dhp-a i.40 (dvāra-majjhe t across the doorway), 47 (sideways); DN-a i.312; Kp-a 248.

-taraṇa ferrying across, adj. ˚ā nāvā, a vessel crossing over, a traject Vin iv.65.

Vedic tiryañc (tiryak) to tiras, see tiro & cp. perhaps Ger. quer = E. thwart, all to; *ter in tarati

Tiriyā

(f.) a kind of grass or creeper AN iii.240, AN iii.242 (tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti; Com. dabbatiṇa).

Tirivaccha

a certain tree Ja v.46.

Tirīṭa

(nt.) the tree Symplocos racemosa, also a garment made of its bark Vin i.306 (˚ka); DN i.166 = AN i.295; MN i.343; Pp 51.

Tiro

(prep. & adv.) (always ˚-) across, beyond, over, outside afar. See also tiraccha & tiriyaṃ.;

-karaṇī (f.) a curtain, a veil (lit. “drawing across” Vin i.276; Vin ii.152; -kucchigata having left the womb DN ii.13; -kuḍḍa outside the fence or wall, over the wall Vin iv.265 (˚kuḍḍe uccāraṃ chaḍḍeti); DN i.78; AN iii.280 (in phrase tirobhāvaṃ t. kuḍḍaṃ t. pākāraṃ t ■ pabbataṃ asajjamāno gacchati to denote power of transplacement); Pv i.51 (˚kuḍḍesu tiṭṭhanti: the Tirokuḍḍa-Sutta, Khp VII.); Vism 176, Vism 394; Dhp-a i.104; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 31; -gāma a distant village Vin iii.135; -chada “outside the veil,” conspicuous Ja vi.60; -janapada a distant or foreign country DN i.116; -pākāra beyond or over a fence (˚pākāraṃ or ˚pākāre) Vin iv.266; see also ˚kuḍḍa; -bhāva (ṃ) beyond existence, out of existence magic power of going to a far away place or concealment Vism 393 sq. (= a-pākaṭa-pāṭihāriya), see also under ˚kuḍḍa. -raṭṭha a foreign kingdom DN i.161 (= pararaṭṭha DN-a i.286).

Vedic tiras across, crossways, from; *ter of tarati = to go through; cp. Av tarō, Lat. trans, Cymr. tra

Tirokkha

1. (adj.) one who is outside, or absent Vin iii.185.

2. (adv.) in tirokkha-vāca one who speaks abusively or with disregard Ja v.78.

= tiras + ka, cp. tiraskāra disdain abuse

Tila

(m. nt.) the sesame plant & its seed (usually the latter, out of which oil is prepared: see tela), Sesamum Indicum. Often comb;d with taṇḍula e.g. AN i.130 = Pp 32; Ja i.67; Ja iii.53Vin i.212 (navātilā); AN iv.108; Snp p.126; Ja i.392; Ja ii.352; Vism 489 (ucchu˚); Dhp-a i.79; Pv-a 47 (tilāni pīḷetvā telavaṇijjaṃ karoti).

-odana rice with sesame Ja iii.425; -kakka sesame paste Vin i.205; -tela ses. oil Vv-a 54 (˚ṃ pātukāma) Dhp-a iii.29; Bdhd 105; -piññāka tila seed-cake, oilcake Vv-a 142; -piṭṭha sesamum-grinding, crushed s seed Vin iv.341. -muṭṭhi a handful of ses. Ja ii.278 -rāsi a heap of t. seeds Vv-a 54; -vāha a cartload of t seeds AN v.173 = Snp p.126; -saṅgulikā a ses. cake Dhp-a ii.75.

Vedic tila m.

Tilaka

1. a spot, stain, mole, freckle MN i.88; SN i.170; Vv-a 253; Dhp-a iv.172 (˚ṃ vā kālakaṃ vā adisvā).

2. a kind of tree Vv 67 (= bandhu-jīvaka-puppha-sadisa-pupphā ekā rukkha-jāti).

tila + ka, from its resemblance to a sesame seed

Tilañchaka

at J. iv.364 acc. to Kern (Toev. ii.91) to be read as nilañchaka.

Tisata

(num.) three hundred Ja vi.427 (˚mattā nāvā). See also under tayo.

ti + sata

Tīra

(nt.) [Vedic tiras from *ter, tarati; orig. the opposite bank, the farther side (of a river or ocean), cp. tittha a shore, bank Vin i.1; DN i.222, DN i.244; AN ii.29, AN ii.50; Dhp 85; Snp 672; Ja i.212, Ja i.222, Ja i.279; Ja ii.111, Ja ii.159; Dhs 597; Vb 71 sq.; Vism 512 (orima˚); Pv-a 142, Pv-a 152 ■ tīra-dassin finding the shore SN iii.164; AN iii.368 ■ a-tīra-dassanī (f.) not seeing the shore (nāvā a ship) Ja v.75.

Tīraṇa

measurement, judgment, recognition, Nd ii.413 (v.l. tir˚); Ne 54 (+ vipassanā), 82 (≈ñāṇa), 191; Vism 162 ■ tīraṇa is one of the 3 pariññās, viz. t˚, pahāna˚, ñāta-pariññā. See under pariññā.

from tīreti 2

Tīriya

(adj.) dwelling on the banks of… Vin ii.287.

from tīra

Tīreti

1. to bring through, to finish, to execute (business), to accomplish: karaṇīyaṃ Mil 7; Pv-a 203; kiccaṃ Pv-a 278.

2. to measure, judge recognize, always in formula tūleti tīreti vibhāveti (Nd ii.tul˚ tir˚, etc.) as interpretation of jānāti; pp tīrita (Nd ii.tirita) Pts ii.200; Nd ii.under ñāta & No. 413.;

Caus. of tarati

Tīvarā

(pl.) Name of a people in the time of Buddha Kakusandha SN ii.191.

Tīhaṃ

(adv.) a period of three days, for 3 days; usually as cpd. dvīhatīhaṃ 2 or 3 days (see dvīha Ja ii.103, etc.

tri + aha

Tu

(indecl.) however, but, yet, now, then (similar in appl. to tāva); kin tu but (= quid nunc). Frequent in late verse ante tu, J.P.T.S. 1884, 5, 31, 37 etc. J.P.T.S. 1913 53; Bd’s Man. 1152 & c. Usually comb;d with eva: tv eva however Snp p.141; na tv eva not however, but not AN v.173.

Vedic tu, belonging to pron. base of 2nd sg. tvaṃ = Lat. tu; Gr. τύ, τοί = indeed, however (orig ethical dat, of σύ), τοίνυν, τοίγαρ; Goth. pu, etc., cp tuvaṃ

Tuṅga

(adj.) [Sk. tunga, tum to stand out, cp. Gr. τύμβος hillock, Lat. tumeo & tumulus, Mir. tomm hill high, prominent, long Ja i.89; Ja iii.433 (pabbata, expld however by tikhiṇa, sharp, rough); Dāvs. iv.30.

-nāsika one with a prominent or long nose SN ii.284 cp. saṇha-tunga-sadisī nāsikā Thig 258; -vaṇṭaka having a long stalk; Name of a plant Ja vi.537.

Tuccha

(adj.) empty, vain, deserted very often combd with ritta DN i.55; DN iii.53 (˚kumbhi) MN i.207; Ja i.209 (˚hattha, empty-handed); vi.365; Snp 883; Pp 45, Pp 46; Mil 5 (+ palāpa), 10 (id.), 13; Dhp-a ii.43; Pv-a 202; Sdhp 431.

Sk. tuccha, prob. rel. to Lat. tesqua deserted place, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.

Tucchaka

= tuccha; always combd w. rittaka DN i.240; SN iii.141; MN i.329.

Tujjati

Pass. of tudati.

Tuṭṭha

pleased, satisfied; often combd w. haṭṭha (q.v.) i.e. tuṭṭha-haṭṭha Ja i.19 or haṭṭha-tuṭṭha Ja ii.240; cp. tuṭṭha-pahaṭṭha Ja ii.240Snp 683; Iti 103; Ja i.62 (˚mānasa), 87, 266 (˚citta), 308 (id.); iv.138 ■ tuṭṭhabba (grd.) to be pleased with Vin iv.259.

pp. of tussati to be satisfied

Tuṭṭhi

(f.) pleasure, joy, enjoyment SN i.48; Dhp 331 (nom. tuṭṭhī); Ja i.60, Ja i.207.

from tussati

Tuṇḍa

(nt.) the beak of birds, the mouth, snout SN v.148 (of a monkey); Ja i.222; Ja iv.210; Dhp-a i.394.

Sk. tuṇḍa, prob. dial. for tunda which belongs to tudati

Tuṇḍaka

(nt.) = tuṇḍa Ja i.222; Ja iii.126.

Tuṇḍika

see ahi˚.

Tuṇḍiya

(adj.) having a beak; n. a pecker, fig. a tax-collector Ja v.102 (= adhamma-bali-sādhaka 103).

from tuṇḍi

Tuṇhikkhaka

(adj.) silent Ja iv.25 (= kiñci avadanto).

fr. tūṣṇīṃ, see next

Tuṇhī

(indecl.) silently, esp. in phrase tuṇhī ahosi he remained silent, as a sign of consent or affirmative answer (i.e. he had nothing to say against it) DN ii.155; AN v.194; Dhp 227; Snp 720 (tuṇhī yāti mahodadhi); Pv-a 117.

-bhāva silence, attitude of consent, usually in form adhivāsesi tuṇhī-bhāvena he agreed Vin i.17; Snp p.104, etc ■ SN ii.236, SN ii.273 (ariyo t ■ bhāvo); MN i.161 (id.) AN iv.153 (id.) ■ Mil 15; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 20, etc.; -bhūta silent Snp p.140; Vv 20; Dhp-a 172, etc.

Sk. tūṣṇīṃ acc. sg. of fem. abstr. tūṣṇī, used adverbially, from tussati

Tuṇhīyati

= taṇhāyati, misspelling at SN ii.13.

Tuṇhīra

inorganic form for tūṇīra quiver Ja v.128, also as v.l. at Ja v.48.

Tutta

(nt.) a pike for guiding elephants, a goad for driving cattle (cp. tomara & patoda) DN ii.266 (˚tomara); Ja iv.310 Ja v.268; Cp iii.5, 2 (t ■ vegahata).

Sk tottra, from tudati to prick, push

Tudati

to strike with an instrument; to prick peck, pierce; to incite, instigate Ja iii.189 (= vijjhati) Pass. tujjati to be struck Thag 780; Vism 503 (cp vitujjati); Sdhp 279 ■ pp. tunna. See also tuṇḍa (beak = pecker), tutta (goad), tomara (lance = striker & thūpa (point).;

Vedic tudati; *steud, enlarged fr. *steu, cp. Lat. tundo, tudes (hammer); Goth. stautan, Ohg stozan (to push), E. stutter, Nhg. stutzen; Ags. styntan = E. stunt

Tudampatī

(dual) husband & wife. See under dampati.

tu˚ = dial. for du˚, Sk. dve; dampati from dama = domus, Sk. daṃpati = Gr. δεσπότης; cp. also Kern, Toev. ii.93, who compares tuvantuva for duvanduva

Tunna1

struck Thig 162 (vyādhimaraṇa˚ str. with sickness and death).

pp. of tudati

Tunna2

any pointed instrument as a stick, a goad, a bolt, or (usually) a needle Vin i.290 (+ aggaḷa means of fastening); Ja i.8 (id.).

-kamma “needle-work,” tailoring, patching, sewing Ja iv.40; Ja vi.366; Vism 112. -kāra (& ˚ka) a (mending tailor Ja iv.38 (v.l. ˚ka); Vv-a 251 (˚ka); Pv-a 120) -vāya [Sk. tunnavāya] a “needle-weaver,” a tailor Vin ii.159; Ja vi.364, Ja vi.368 (˚vesaṃ gahetvā in the disguise of a tailor); Pv-a 161 (id.); Pv ii.914 (= tunnakāra Pv-a 120); Mil 331, Mil 365.

from tudati

Tuma

(pron ■ adj.) oneself, himself, etc.; every or anybody (= quisque) yaṃ tumo karissati tumo va tena paññāyissati (quid quisque faciat) Vin ii.186 = AN iii.124; Snp 890 (cp. ātumānaṃ v.888), 908; Pv iii.24 (= attānaṃ Pv-a 181).

most likely apostrophe form of ātuma = attā, Sk. ātman self; cp. also Sk. tman oneself. See Oldenberg, KZ. xxv.319. Less likely = Sk. tva one or the other (Kern, Toev. s. v.). Expld by Com. to AN iii.124 as esa.

Tumula

tumult, uproar, commotion Ja vi.247 (by Com. expld as “andhakāra,” darkness); Dpvs xvii.100.

Sk. tumala; to *teu, Lat. tumeo, tumulus, tumultus, etc. E. thumb (swelling), cp. tunga tūla

Tumba

(m. nt.) 1. a kind of water vessel (udaka DN-a i.202), made of copper, wood or a fruit (like a calabash, cocoanut, etc., cp. kaṭāha, E. skull) Vin i.205 (loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, phala˚); ii.114 (˚kaṭāha of gourd); Ja iii.430 (udaka˚); iv.114; Dhp-a ii.193 (udaka˚)

2. a measure of capacity, esp. used for grain Ja i.233 (mahā˚), 467 (= 4 nāḷi p. 468); Mil 102.

possibly = Sk. tumra swollen (of shape), same root as tumula

Tumhādisa

(pron ■ adj.) like you, of your kind Snp 459; Ja vi.528; DN-a i.146.

tumhe + ādisa

Tumhe

.

pl. of pron. 2nd pers., see tuvaṃ

Tura

(adj.) swift, quick; only in composition with ˚ga, etc., “going swiftly,” denoting the horse; viz. turaga Vv-a 279; turaṅga Vv-a 281; Mil 192 (gaja˚, etc.), 352 (id.) 364; turaṅgama Dāvs v.56; turagamana Pv-a 57.

Vedic tura, cp. tvaraṇa

Turati

to be in a hurry, to be quick, hasten Ja vi.229 (mā turittho, Prohib.) ■ pp. turita. Cp. also tura, etc.

= tarati2

Turita

hastening, speedy, quick; hastily, in a hurry Snp 1014; Ja i.69 (turita-turita); Vv 808 (= sambhamanto Vv-a 311); DN-a i.319; Pv-a 181- aturita leisurely, with leisure, slow Ja i.87 ■ See also tuvaṭaṃ.

pp. of turati

Turiya

(nt.) sometimes tūriya (e.g. Vv 54) musical instruments in general, usually referred to as comprising 5 kinds of special instruments (pañcangika t. e.g. Vv 54; 391; Vv-a 181, Vv-a 183, Vv-a 210, Vv-a 257), viz ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana, susira (Vv-a 37) Freq. in phrase nippurisehi turiyehi parivāriyamāna (or paricāriyamāna) “surrounded by (or entertained by) heavenly music” Vin i.15; DN ii.21; AN i.145; Ja i.58Vv 384; 412; 5024, 645; Pv iii.81; Dhp-a iii.460; Vv-a 92; Pv-a 74.

-sadda the sound of music, music Mvu vii.30.

Derivation uncertain, probably connected with tuleti, Sk. tūrya

Turī

a hen Thig 381 (= migī Thag-a 254) (v.l. korī, cp. Tamil kōḷi hen).

Tula

(adj.) only in negative atula incomparable, not to be measured, beyond compare or description Vv 304 (= anupama Vv-a 126); Pv ii.89 (= appamāṇa Pv-a 110); iii.32 (= asadisarūpa Pv-a 188); Mil 343.

see tuleti

Tulanā

(f.) weighing, rating; consideration, deliberation MN i.480; MN ii.174; Ne 8, Ne 41.

see tuleti

Tulasi

basil (common or sweet) Ja v.46 (˚gahana a thicket of b.; v.l. tūlasi); vi.536 (tuḷasi = tuḷasigaccha).

Derivation unknown

Tulā

(f.) 1. a beam or pole for lifting, carrying or supporting, a rafter Vin ii.122; Vv-a 188 (+ gopānasī); Dhs-a 107.

2. a weighing pole or stick, scales balance AN i.88; Ja i.112; Dhp 268; Mil 356 (t. nikkhepanāya).

3. fig. measure (“weighing,” cp. tulanā) standard, rate SN ii.236 (+ pamāṇa).

-kūṭa false weighing, false weight (often combd with kaṃsakūṭa & mānakūṭa, false coining & false measuring DN i.5 = AN ii.209≈; DN-a i.79; Dhp-a i.239; -daṇḍa the beam or lever of a balance Ja i.113; -puttaka a goldsmith (using scales) Ja v.424 (or should it be tulādhuttaka ).

see tuleti. Vedic tulā; Gr. τάλας, τάλαντον (balance, weighing & weight = talentum),; τόλμα; Lat tollo (lift); Goth. pulan (to carry patiently, suffer) Ger. geduld, etc.

Tulita

weighed, estimated, compared, gauged, considered Thig 153 (yattakaṃ esā t. what she is worth = lakkhaṇaññūhi parichinna Thag-a 139); Nd ii.under ñāta (as syName of tirita); Pv-a 52 (in expln of mita measured).

pp. of tuleti

Tuliya

a flying fox Ja vi.537.

Sk.?

Tuleti

to weigh, examine, compare; match, equal MN i.480; Thag 107; Ja vi.283-ger. tulayitvā MN i.480 ■ grd. tuliya & tulya (see sep.) ■ pp.; tulita.

from tulā; Lat. tollo, etc.

Tulya & Tuliya

(also tulla Ja iv.102) (adj.) to be weighed, estimated, measured; matched equal, comparable Snp 377; Ja iii.324; Pv-a 87 (= samaka) Mostly in the negative atulya incomparable, not having its equal Snp 83, Snp 683; Ja iv.102 (atulla); Mil 249 (atuliyā guṇā), 343 (id.)-See also tula. Tuvam & Tvam

orig. grd. of tuleti

Tuvaṃ & Tvaṃ

Snp 983, Snp 1030; Ja i.279; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 73, etc ■ (b) ta˚, tay˚, taṃ (acc. MN i.487; Snp 31, Snp 241, Snp 1043, Snp 1049; Ja i.222; Ja ii.159; Pv i.101; ii.16; tayā (instr.) Snp 335, Snp 344; Ja i.222; Pv ii.36 (= bhotiyā Pv-a 86): Pv-a 71; tayi (loc.) Snp 382; Ja i.207; tava (gen.) Snp 1102, Snp 1110; Ja ii.153; Pv-a 106–⁠2. pl.: tumh˚; [Sk. yuṣm˚]: tumhe (nom. & acc. Iti 31; Ja i.221 (acc.); Pv i.112. Also as pl. majesticus in addressing one person Ja ii.102; Ja iv.138; tumhaṃ (gen.) Pv-a 58 (for sg.), 78; tumhākaṃ (gen. dat. SN ii.65; Iti 32; Ja i.150; Ja ii.102; tumhesu (loc.) Ja i.292 (for sg.); tumhehi (instr.) Ja ii.154; Pv i.512 ■ II. Enclitic forms (in function of an ethical dative “in your interest,” therefore also as possessive gen. or as instrumental or any other case of the interested person according to construction). 1. sg. te DN ii.127 (dat.) Snp 76, Snp 120, Snp 1099 (dat.), 1102 (dat.); Ja i.151; Ja ii.159 (instr.); Pv i.23 (dat.); ii.32 (gen.), 46 (gen.).

2. pl vo SN iii.33 (instr.) Snp 135, Snp 172 (dat.), 331 (dat.); Ja i.222 (acc.); ii.133; iii.395 (gen.).

Sk. tvaṃ & (Ved.) tuaṃ, cp. also part. tu; Gr. τύ, σύ; Lat. tu; Goth. pu; E. thou, etc.; Oir. tū proName of 2nd pers. in foll. forms & applications:; 1. Full forms: 1. sg.: (a) tv˚, tu˚, tuyh˚;: nom. tvaṃ (in prose & verse) Snp 179, Snp 241, Snp 1029, Snp 1058; Ja i.279 Ja ii.159; Pv i.84. Also for nom. pl. at Ja i.391, Ja i.395 Ja vi.576; tuvaṃ (in verse) Snp 1064, Snp 1102, Snp 1121; Ja iii.278 Ja iii.394; Pv i.33; ii.32; also for acc. Snp 377; Pv ii.81 tuyhaṃ (gen. & dat.) [Sk. tubhyaṃ

Tuvaṭaṃ

(adv.) quickly AN v.342; Ja i.91; Ja ii.61; Ja vi.519 (as tvātaṃ ); Mil 198; Vism 305 Vism 313.

Sk. tvaritaṃ, cp. tūrta

Tuvaṭṭeti

(for *Sk. dvandvayati, denom. fr. dvandva] to share (with = loc. or abl.) Vin ii.10, Vin ii.124; Vin iv.288.

Tuvantuva

(nt.) quarrel, strife MN i.110, MN i.410.

Sk. dvandva, with dialect. t. (cp. tudampati), not (with Müller, P. Gr. 38) through confusion with pron. tvaṃ

Tussati

to be satisfied, pleased or happy Ja iii.280; Ja iv.138; Mil 210. Cp. tuṭṭha (pp.), tuṭṭhi, tuṇhī, tosa, tosana toseti.

Sk. tuṣyati to *teus to be quiet, contented, happy

Tussana

(nt.) satisfying, pleasing, in ˚kāraṇa cause for satisfaction or delight Ja iii.448.

Sk. toṣaṇa

Tūṇira

= tūṇī, Vism 251.

Tūṇī

(f.) a quiver (lit. “carrier”) Ja ii.403 (dhanuṃ tūṇiñ ca nikkhippa); v.47.

Sk. *tūṇa & tūṇī, to; *tI̊n: see under tulā; cp. Lat. tollo. On ṇ → l. cp. cikkaṇa & cikkhala, guṇa → guḷa, kiṇi → kili, etc.

Tūla

(nt.) a tuft of grass, cotton Vin ii.150 (3 kinds: rukkha˚, latā˚ poṭaki˚); Snp 591 = Ja iv.127 (vāto tūlaṃ va dhaṃsaye) DN-a i.87.

-picu cotton-wool Vism 282, Vism 285, Vism 404; Dhp-a iii.202 Kp-a 173. -puṇṇikā (“stuffed with tuft of cotton” a kind of shoe Vin i.186.

Sk. tūla, to *teu, Sk. tavīti, to swell or be bushy, cp. Gr. τύλη swelling; Ags. pol peg

Tūlikā

(f.) a mattress (consisting of layers of grass or wool: tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ aññatara-puṇṇa-tūlikā DN-a i.87) Vin i.192; Vin ii.150; DN i.7; AN i.181.

der. fr. tūla

Tūlinī

(f.) the silk-cotton tree MN i.128.

Sk. tūlinī

Te˚

secondary base of numeral three (fr. ti) in compn: having a relation to a triad of, three-; in numerical cpds. also = three (see under tayo).

-kaṭula containing 3 spices (of yāgu), viz. tila taṇḍula, mugga Vin i.210; Vin iii.66; -cīvarika wearing three robes (cp. ticīvara) Vin i.253; Ud 42; Pp 69 Vism 60. -daṇḍika carrying the tripod (see tidaṇḍa) Ep. of a brahmin ascetic AN iii.276; Ja ii.316 (= kuṇḍikaṃ ṭhapanatthāya tidaṇḍaṃ gahetvā caranto); -dhātuka (nt.) the (worlds of the) threefold composition of elements = tiloka Ne 14, Ne 63 (tedhātuke vimutti sabbadhi vippamutta), 82; cp. Kv 605; -piṭaka versed in the three piṭakas (see piṭaka), Ep. of theras bhikkhus Ja iv.219; Mil 18 sq.; Dhp-a i.7, Dhp-a i.384; Dhp-a iii.385 Dāvs v.22. Cp. Sk. tripiṭo bhikṣuḥ (Avs i.334 Index to Divy); -bhātika having 3 brothers Dhp-a i.88, Dhp-a i.97. -bhūmaka belonging to the 3 stages of being (viz. the kāma, rūpa, arūpa existences; cp. ˚dhātuka & tiloka) Dhp-a i.305; Dhp-a iv.72; Dhs-a 50, Dhs-a 214 (˚kusala) 291; -māsa (nt.) 3 months, i.e. a season MN i.438; Mil 15; Dhp-a ii.192; Pv-a 20; -vācika pronouncing the threefold formula (of the saraṇa-gata) Vin i.18; -vijja (adj. possessed of the 3 fold knowledge (i.e. either the higher knowledge of the Brahmins, i.e. the 3 Vedas [cp. Sk. trayī vidyā = the knowledge of the Vedas] or of the Buddha Arahants, as defined at AN i.164 sq., viz. (1) remembrance of former births, (2) insight into the (future) destiny of all beings, (3) recognition of the origin of misery & of the way to its removal, i.e. of the Path): 1. brahmanic DN i.238; AN i.163; also as tevijjaka (n.) DN i.88, DN i.107, DN i.119–⁠2. buddhistic: Vin ii.161; MN i.482; SN i.194; AN i.167 = Iti 100; Snp 594 = Vv-a 10; Pp 14; Dhp-a i.138; Sdhp 420. -tevijjatā (abstr.) Vism 5.

Sk. trai˚

Tekiccha

(adj.) curable; fig. one who can be helped or pardoned. Only in cpds. ; incurable unpardonable Vv-a 322 (of a sick person); Dhp-a i.25 (id.); Mil 322; of Devadatta w. ref. to his rebirth in Niraya Vin ii.202 = Iti 85; MN i.393; & sa˚; pardonable Mil 192, Mil 221, Mil 344.

der. fr. tikiccha

Teja & Tejo

“sharpness,” heat, flame, fire, light; radiance, effulgence splendour, glory, energy, strength, power DN ii.259 (personified as deva, among the 4 Elements paṭhavī, āpo, t., vāyo; cp. tejo-dhātu); SN iv.215; MN i.327; Snp 1097 (glory of the sun compd with that of the Buddha); Dhp 387 (sabbaṃ ahorattiṃ Buddho tapati tejasā); Ja iii.53 (sīla˚); i.93 (puñña˚ the power of merit); Vb 426 (id.); Pts i.103; Vism 350 (def.) Vv-a 116.

-kasiṇa fire-contemplation for the purpose of kammaṭṭhāna practice (see kasiṇa) DN iii.268; Dhs 203; Vism 171; Dhp-a ii.49; Dhp-a iii.214; Bdhd 106; -dhātu the element of flame (or fire), the 3rd of the 6 Elements, viz. paṭhavī āpo t. vāyo ākāsa viññāṇa (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 242) DN iii.27 DN iii.228, DN iii.247; MN i.188, MN i.422; AN i.176; AN ii.165; Dhs 588, Dhs 648 Dhs 964; Ne 74; Vism 363.

Vedic tejas (nt.) from tij to be sharp or to pierce = a (piercing) flame. See tejate; semantically (sharp → light) cp. Ger. strahl (ray of light) = Ags. strael (arrow) ■ The nt. tejo is the usual form; instr. tejasā (Dhp 387; Snp 1097) & tejena (J iii.53), cp. tapa & tapo

Tejate

to be sharp or to make sharp, to prick, to incite, etc ■ See tikkha, tikhiṇa, tiṇha, titikkhati tittaka, teja, etc.

Vedic tejate from tij (*stij) = Lat. in-stīgo (to spur), Gr. στίζω, στικτός, Ohg. stehhan, Nhg. stecken E. stick

Tejana

(nt.) the point or shaft of an arrow, an arrow Thag 29; Dhp 80, Dhp 145; Dhp-a ii.147.

see tejate

Tejavant

(adj.) 1. splendid, powerful, majestic Dhp-a i.426.

2. in flames, heated, burning with (-˚) Mil 148.

tejas + vant

Tejin

(adj.-n.) having light or splendour, shining forth, glorious Snp 1097 (= Nd ii.286 tejena samannāgata).

see teja

Tettiṃsa

(num.) thirty-three Ja i.273; Dhp-a i.267 sq. See also under tayo & tāvatiṃsa.;

tayo + tiṃsa

Temana

(nt.) wetting, moistening Vism 338; Vv-a 20 (aggimhi tāpanaṃ udake vā temanaṃ) Dhp-a iii.420.

from temeti

Temeti

to make wet, to moisten Vin i.47 (temetabba); ii.209 (temetvā); Dhp-a i.220, Dhp-a i.394 (id.) Ja i.88Kp-a 164; Ja ii.325 (temento); Pv-a 46 (sutemitvā for temetvā).

cp. Divy 285 tīmayati; Caus. of tim to moisten. There is an ancient confusion between the roots tim tamas, etc. (to be dark), tim, temeti (to be wet), and stim to be motionless. Cp. tintiṇāyati, tinta, tibba (= tamas), timira

Terasa

see under tayo.

Terovassika

(adj.) lasting over or beyond a year (or season), a year old, dried up or decayed SN iv.161 (thero vassiko in text) = 185 (of wood) MN i.58 (of bones).

tiro + vassa + ika

Tela

(nt.) sesamum-oil (prepared from tila seeds), oil in general (tela = tilatelādika DN-a i.93): used for drinking, anointing & burning purposes Vin i.205, Vin i.220 Vin i.245, etc.; AN i.209, AN i.278 (sappi vā t. vā); ii.122≈(tattena pi telena osiñcante; punishment of pouring over with boiling oil); Ja i.293; Ja ii.104; Pv iv.148 (tiṇena telaṃ pi na tvaṃ adāsi: frequent as gift to mendicants) Pp 55; Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 815; Pv-a 80 (kaḷebarānaṃ vasā telañ ca: fat or oil in general) ■ tila ˚ṃ pātukāma desire to drink tila-wine Vv-a 54; pāka-tela oil concoction Vv-a 68 = Dhp-a iii.311; Ja ii.397 (sata˚); iii.372 (sahassa worth a thousand); v.376 (sata˚ worth a hundred) pādabbhañjana˚ oil for rubbing the feet Vv-a 44 sāsapa˚ (mustard seed & oil) Pv-a 198; sappi˚ (butter & oil) Snp 295; Pv-a 278 (also + madhu) as var. objects of grocery trade (dhañña).

-koṭṭhāgāra oil store Dhp-a i.220; -ghaṭa oil jar DN-a i.144; -cāṭī an oil tank Dhp-a i.220; -dhūpita spiced or flavoured with oil (of a cake) Vv 435; -nāḷi a reed used for keeping oil in, an oil tube Vism 99; Dhp-a ii.193 (+ udakatumba); -pajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16; DN i.85 = AN i.56 = Snp p.15; -padīpa an oil lamp Vin i.15; SN iii.126; SN v.319; Vv-a 198; -pāka an oil decoction mixed with spirits, oil-wine Vin i.205; -pilotikā (pl. rags soaked in oil Dhp-a i.221; -makkhana anointing (the body) with oil Mil 11; -miñjaka an oil-cake Pv-a 51 -vaṇijjā oil trade Pv-a 47; -homa an oblation of oil DN i.9.

from tila

Telaka

(nt.) = tela Vin i.204 (“a small quantity of oil”); ii.107 (sittha-t. oil of beeswax).

Teliya

(adj.) oily Ja iii.522.

Tevijja

see Vijjā.

Tomara

(m. nt.) a pike, spear, lance, esp. the lance of an elephant-driver DN ii.266 (tutta-t. a driving lance); MN iii.133 (t. hattha) Vism 235; DN-a i.147.

Sk. tomara from tud, see tudati

Toya

(nt.) water (poetical for udaka) only in simile: puṇḍarīkaṃ (or padumaṃ) toyena na upalippati AN ii.39 = Snp 547; Snp 71 = Snp 213; Thag 700 Nd ii.287 (t. vuccati udakaṃ) ■ Bdhd 67, 93.

Vedic toya from *tāu̯ to melt away; Lat. tabeo, tabes (consumption); Ags. pāwan = E. dew, Oir. tām tabes; also Gr. τήκω, etc.

Toraṇa

(nt.) an arched gateway, portal Vin ii.154; DN ii.83; Vv 351 (= dvārakoṭṭhaka-pāsādassa nāmaṃ Vv-a 160); Ja iii.428; Dāvs v.48.

Sk. toraṇa, perhaps related to Gr. τύρσις, τύρρις = Lat. turris (tower), cp. Hor. Od. i.47 “regumque turris” = palaces

Tosana

(adj.-n.) satisfying, pleasing; satisfaction Snp 971.

see toseti

Tosāpana

(adj.) pleasing, giving satisfaction Ja ii.249.

= tosana, in formation of a 2nd causative tosāpeti

Toseti

to please, satisfy, make happy Snp 1127 (= Nd ii.288); Ja iv.274; Sdhp 304 ■ pp tosita contented, satisfied Snp 1128. Cp. pari˚.

Caus. of tussati

Tya

base of demonstr. pron. = ta˚, this that; loc. sg. tyamhi Ja vi.292; loc. pl. fem. tyāsu Ja v.368 (Com. tāsu).

Sk. tya˚, nt. tyad; perhaps to Gr. σήμερον to-day, σ ̈ητες in this year

Tyassu

= te assu DN ii.287, see su3.

Tvaṃ

see tuvaṃ.

Tvātaṃ

see tuvaṭaṃ.

Th.

Th

Thakana

(nt.) covering, lid; closing up Dhp-a iv.85 (saṃvara + ).

see next

Thaketi

to cover, cover up, close (usually of doors windows) Vin ii.134 (kaṇṇagūthakehi kaṇṇā thakitā honti: the ears were closed up), 148 (kavaṭā na thakīyanti, Pass.), 209 (vātapāna); iv.54; Ja iv.4 (sabbe apihitā dvārā; api-dhā = Gr. ἐπι χη˚, cp. Hom. Od. 9, 243 ἠλίβατον πέτρην ἑπέχηκε χύρησιν the Cyclops covered the door with a polished rock) v.214; Dhp-a iv.180 (ṭhakesi, v.l. ṭhapesi); Vv-a 222; Pv-a 216 (dvārā Dāvs iv.33; Dāvs v.25 (chiddaṃ mālāguḷena th.).

Sk. sthagayati, Caus. to sthagati, from *steg to cover; cp. Gr. στέγω cover, τέγη roof; Lat. tego tegula (E. = tile), toga; Oir. tech house; Ohg. decchu cover, dah roof. On P. form cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 62

Thañña

(nt.) mother’s milk Vin ii.255 = Vin ii.289 (˚ṃ pāyeti); AN iv.276; Ja iii.165; Ja vi.3 (madhura˚) Thig 496.

see thana

Thaṇḍila

(nt.) bare, esp. hard, stony ground Pv iv.75 (= kharakaṭhāna bhūmippadesa Pv-a 265).

-sāyikā (f.) the act of lying on the bare ground (as a penance) [BSk. sthaṇḍila-śāyikā] SN iv.118; Dhp 141

(= Dhp-a iii.77: bhūmisayana); -seyyā (f.) a bed on bare ground DN i.167≈(v.l. BB. taṇḍila˚) Mil 351 cp. Sk. sthaṇḍilaśayyā.

Vedic sthaṇḍila a levelled piece of ground prepared for a sacrifice. Cognate with sthala, level ground

Thaddha

1. lit. hard, rigid firm Ja i.293 (opp. muduka); Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa) Pv-a 139 (= ujjhangala).

2. fig. (a) hardened, obdurate callous, selfish DN i.118 (māna˚); iii.45 (+ atimānin); AN ii.26 = Iti 113 (kuha th. lapa); Snp 104 (see gotta˚); Ja i.88 (māna˚) ii.136; Sdhp 90 ■ (b) slow Mil 103 (opp. lahuka; cp. BSk. dhandha, on which Kern, Toev. ii.90) ■ See thambha & thūṇa.;

-maccharin obdurate & selfish, or very selfish Dhp-a iii.313; Vv-a 69; Pv-a 45; -hadaya hard-hearted Ja iii.68.

pp. of thambeti, Sk. stabhnāti to make firm, prop, hold up; cp. Av. stawra firm, Gr. ἀστεμφής, σταφυλή; Goth. stafs, Ags. staef = E. staff; Ohg. stab See also khambha & chambheti

Thana

1. the breast of a woman DN ii.266; Ja v.205; Ja vi.483 Sdhp 360.

2. the udder of a cow MN i.343 = Pp 56; Dhp-a ii.67.

-mukha the nipple Ja iv.37. -sita-dāraka [see sita a child at the breast, a suckling Mil 364 = Mil 408.

Vedic stana; cp. Gr. στηνιον = στ ̈ηχος (Hesychius)

Thanaka

, a little breast, the breast of a girl Thig 265 (= Thag-a 212).

Thanita

(nt.) thundering thunder Ja i.470; Thag 1108; Mil 377.

pp. of thaneti cp. Vedic (s)tanayitnu thunder = Lat. tonitrus, Ohg. donar, etc.

Thanin

(adj.) having breasts,-breasted; in timbaru˚; Snp 110; Ja vi.457pucimanda˚; Ja vi.269.

Thaneti

to roar, to thunder DN ii.262; SN i.100, SN i.154 (megho thanayaṃ), 154 (thaneti devo) Iti 66 (megho thanayitvā) ■ pp. thanita. See also gajjati & thunati.;

Vedic stanayati & stanati to thunder; cp. Gr. στένω, στενάζω to moan, groan, στονος; Lat. tono; Ags stunian; Ger. stöhnen

Thapati

1. a builder, master carpenter MN i.396 = SN iv.223; MN iii.144, MN iii.2. officer, overseer SN v.348.

Vedic sthapati, to sthā + pati

Thabbha

is to be read for ˚tthambha in para˚ Ja iv.313.

Thambha

1. a pillar, a post Vin i.276; DN i.50 (majjhimaṃ ˚ṃ nissāya) ii.85 (id.); Snp 214; Vv 782 (veḷuriya˚, of the pillars of a Vimāna); Pv iii.31 (id.); Dhp-a iv.203; Vv-a 188 (+ tulā-gopānasī); Pv-a 186.

2. (fig.) in all meanings of thaddha, applied to selfishness, obduracy, hypocrisy & deceit; viz. immobility, hardness, stupor, obstinacy (cp. Ger. “verstockt”): thambho ti thaddha-bhāvo Snp-a 288, Snp-a 333; th. thambhanā thambhittaṃ kakkhaliyaṃ phāruliyaṃ ujucittatā (an˚?) amudutā Vb 350 ■ Often combd w. māna (= arrogance), freq. in set sāṭheyyaṃ th. sārambho māno, etc. AN i.100, AN i.299 = Nd ii.under rāga = Mil 289; cp. MN i.15AN iii.430 (+ māna) iv.350, 465 (+ sāṭheyya); Snp 245 (+ mada), 326, 437 (as one of Māra’s combatants: makkho th. te aṭṭhamo) Ja i.202.

3. a clump of grass MN i.324; cp. thambhaka.

see etym. under thaddha; occasionally spelt thamba, viz. AN i.100; MN i.324; Pv-a 186, Pv-a 187

Thamhhaka

(= thambha 3) a clump of grass Vv-a 276 (= gumba).

Thambhati

& thambheti, see upa˚, paṭi˚.;

Thambhanā

(f.) firmness, rigidity, immobility Dhs 636 = Dhs 718; Vb 350.

abstr. to thambha

Thambhitatta

(nt.) = thambha 2, viz. hardness, rigidity, obduracy, obstinacy Vb 350 Note. Quite a late development of the term, caused by a misinterpretation of chambhitatta, is “fluctuation unsteadiness, inflation” at Dhs 965 (in def. of vāyodhātu: chambhittattaṃ [?] thambhitattaṃ. See on this Dhs. trsl. p. 242), & at Vb 168 (in def. of vicikicchā v.l. chambhitatta), and at Asl. 338 (of vayo). None of these meanings originally belong to the term thambha.

abstr. to thambha

Thambhin

(adj.) obstinate Thag 952.

Tharaṇa

(nt.) strewing, spreading. In cpds. like assa˚, bhumma˚, ratha˚, hattha˚, etc. the reading ass-attharaṇa, etc. should be preferred (= ā stṛ; ). See attharaṇa and cpds.

Sk. staraṇa to stṛ;

Tharati

only in cpds. ā˚, ava˚, etc.

Sk. stṛṇoti

Tharu

the hilt or handle of a sword or other weapons, a sword AN iii.152; Ja iii.221 (= sword); Mil 178; Dhp-a ii.249 (˚mūla); iv.66 (asi˚) ■ tharusmiṃ sikkhati to learn the use of a sword Vin ii.10; Mil 66.

-ggaha one who carries a sword-(handle) Mil 331 (dhanuggaha + ; not in corresponding list of occupations at DN i.51); -sippā training in swordsmanship Ud 31.

Sk. tsaru

Thala1

(nt.) dry ground, viz. high, raised (opp. low) or solid, firm (opp. water) SN iv.179. As plateau opp. to ninna (low lying place) at Snp 30 (Snp-a 42 = ukkūla) Dhp 98; Iti 66 = SN i.100 (megho thalaṃ ninnañ ca pūreti) Pv-a 29 (= unnatapadesa). As dry land, terra firma opp. to jala at Dhp 34; Ja i.107, Ja i.222; Pv iv.121; Pv-a 260 As firm, even ground or safe place at DN i.234; Snp 946. Cp. Ja iii.53; Ja iv.142; Vism 185.

-gocara living on land Ja ii.159; -ja sprung from land (opp. vārija Dhp 34 or udakarūha Vv 356 = water-plant) referring to plants AN i.35; Ja i.51; Vv 356 (= yodhikādikā Vv-a 162); Mil 281; -ṭṭha standing on firm ground AN ii.241; -patha a road by land (opp. jala˚ by water Ja i.121; Ja iii.188.

Vedic sthala, to sthā, orig. standing place; cp. Gr. στέλλω, στόλος; Ags. steall (place); also P thaṇḍila

Thala2

(nt.) the haft of a sword, the scabbard Ja iii.221 (reading uncertain).

prob. dialect. variant of tharu

Thava

praise, praising, eulogy Ne 161, Ne 188, Ne 192.

see thavati

Thavati

to praise, extol; inf. thutuṃ Snp 217 (= thometuṃ Snp-a 272). Caus. thaveti [Sk. stavayati] pp. thavita Miln 361 See thuta, thuti, thoma, thometi.

Sk. stauti, Av. staviti, cp. Gr. στεϋται

Thavikā

(f.) a knapsack, bag, purse; esp. used for the carrying of the bhikkhu’s strainer Vin i.209 (parissāvanāni pi thavikāyo pl pūretvā), 224 (patte + pariss˚ + th.); Ja i.55 (pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvā); vi.67 (pattaṃ thavikāya osāretvā); Vv-a 40 (patta-thavikato parissāvanaṃ nīharitvā). Also for carrying money: sahassathavikā a purse of 1,000 pieces Ja i.54, Ja i.195, Ja i.506; Vv-a 33; Anvs 35. See also Vin ii.152, Vin ii.217; Vism. 91.

derivation uncertain

Thāma

(& thāmo nt. in instr. thāmasā MN i.498; SN ii.278 = Thag 1165; iii.110, see below) “standing power, power of resistance, steadfastness, strength, firmness vigour, instr. thāmena (Mil 4; Pv-a 193); thāmasā (see above); thāmunā (J vi.22). Often combd with bala Ja i.63; Snp 68; with bala + java Pv-a 4; with bala viriya Nd ii.289, Nd ii.651; with java Ja i.62; Vv-a 104; with viriya Ja i.67DN iii.113; SN i.78; SN ii.28; SN v.227; AN i.50 AN ii.187 sq.; AN iv.192. Ja i.8, Ja i.265 (˚sampanna); ii.158 (id.); Dhs 13, Dhs 22; Vism 233 (˚mahatta); Dhp-a iv.18; Pv-a 259 ■ Instr. used as adv.: thāmena hard, very much Pv-a 193; thāmasā obstinately, perseveringly MN i.257.

-gatadiṭṭhika (adj.) one in whom heresy has become strong Ja i.83 = Ja vi.220.

Vedic sthāman sthāmas nt.,; sthā cp. Gr. στήμων, Lat. stamen (standing structure); Goth. stoma foundation

Thāmaka

(adj.) having strength Snp 1144 (dubbala˚ with failing strength); Nd i.12 (appa˚ + dubbala).

Thāmavant

(adj.) strong, steadfast, powerful, persevering SN v.197, SN v.225; AN ii.250; AN iv.110, AN iv.234, AN iv.291 AN v.24; Nd ii.131; Vv 51 (= thira balavā Vv-a 35).

thāma + vant

Thāra

see vi˚, san˚.

Thāla

(nt.) a plate, dish, vessel DN i.74; Ja i.69; Mil 282. Kaṃsa˚; a gong Mil 62 Vism 283 (in simile). See also thālī.

from thala orig. a flat dish

Thālaka

(nt.) a small bowl, beaker Pv ii.18 (thālakassa pānīyaṃ), 119 (id.); Ne 79 (for holding oil: dīpakapallika Com.).

thāla + ka

Thālikā

(f.) = thālakaVin i.203, Vin i.240. See āḷhaka˚.

Thālī

(f.) (thāli˚ in cpds.) an earthen pot, kettle, large dish; in -dhovana washing of the dish AN i.161 (+ sarāva-dhovana); -pāka an offering of barley or rice cooked in milk Vin iii.15; DN i.97 (= DN-a i.267) SN ii.242; SN v.384; AN i.166; Ja i.186; Mil 249.

Sk. sthālī, cp. thāla

Thāvara1

(adj.) “standing still,” immovable (opp to tasa) firm, strong (Ep. of an Arahant: Kp-a 245; Dhp-a iv.176. Always in connection with tasa, contrasting or comprising the movable creation (animal world) & the immovable (vegetable world), e.g. Snp 394 (“sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke”); Iti 32 (tasaṃ vā thāvaraṃ vā). See tasa for ref.

Vedic sthāvara, from sthā, cp. sthavira, Gr. σταυρός post, Lat. re-stauro, Goth. stana judgment & stojan to judge

Thāvara2

(nt.) old age Pv-a 149 (thāvari-jiṇṇa in expl. of therī, otherwise jarā-jiṇṇa Should we read thāvira-jiṇṇa?).

from thavira = thera, old

Thāvariya

(nt.) immobility, firmness, security, solidity, an undisturbed state; always in janapada˚; an appeased country, as one of the blessings of the reign of a Cakkavattin. Expld at DN-a i.250 as “janapadesu dhuvabhāvaṃ thāvarabhāvaṃ vā patto na sakkā kenaci cāletuṃ.” DN i.88; DN ii.16, DN ii.146, DN ii.169; SN i.100; Snp p.106; Iti 15.

fr. thāvara

Thāvareyya

(nt.) the rank of a Thera. AN i.38; AN ii.23. This has nothing to do with seniority It is quite clear from the context that Thera is to be taken here in the secondary sense explained under Thera. He was a bhikkhu so eminently useful to the community that his fellow bhikkhus called him Thera.

from thāvara2

Thāsotu˚

in thāsotujana savana at Thag-a 61 according to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 81 it is to be read ṭhānaso tu jana˚.

Thika

(adj.) dropping forming drops: madhutthika Ja iii.493; Ja vi.529 (= madhuṃ paggharantiyo madhutthevasadisā p. 530 “dropping honey.”

cp. Sk. styāyate to congeal, form a (solid) mass; see cognates under thīna & cp. theva

Thiṇṇa

pp. of tharati, only in cpds. parivi˚, vi˚.

Thira

(adj.) solid, hard, firm; strenuous, powerful Ja i.220 Ja iv.106 (= daḷha); Mil 194 (thir-âthira-bhāva strength or weakness); Vv-a 212 (id.), 35 (= thāmavant); Sdhp 321.

Vedic sthira, hard, solid; from sthā or Idg. ster (der. of stā ) to stand out = to be stiff; cp. Gr.στερεός; Lat. sterilis (sterile = hardened, cp. Sk. starī) Ohg. storrēn, Nhg. starr & starren, E. stare; also Lat strenuus

Thiratā

(f.) steadfastness, stability Dhp-a iv.176 (thiratāya thavarā; so read for ṭhira˚).

fr. thira

Thī

(f.) [Vedic strī, on which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sero. This form thī is the normal correspondent to Vedic strī; the other, more usual (& dial.) form is itthi a woman Ja i.295, Ja i.300; Ja v.296 (thī-pura), 397; vi.238.

Thīna

(nt.) stiffness, obduracy, stolidity indifference (cp. thaddha & tandī, closely related in meaning). Together with; middha it is one of the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) to Arahantship (see below) Def. as cittassa akammaññatā, unwieldiness or impliability of mind (= immobility) at Nd ii.290 = Dhs 1156 Dhs 1236 = Ne 86; as citta-gelaññaṃ morbid state of mind (“psychosis”) at DN-a i.211Snp 942 (niddaṃ tandiṃ sahe thīnaṃ pamādena na saṃvase), 1106; Vb 352 (= Nd ii.290 as expln of līnatta); Vism 262 (˚sineha where p. 361 reads patthinna˚).

-middha sloth & drowsiness, stolidity & torpor; two of the 5 nīvaraṇāni (Dhs. trsl. pp. 120, 310) Vin ii.200 (vigata˚); DN i.71, DN i.246; DN iii.49, DN iii.234, DN iii.269, DN iii.278; SN i.99 SN iii.106; SN v.277 sq.; AN iii.69 sq.; 421; Snp 437 (pañcamī senā Mārassa); Iti 27, Iti 120; Ps. i.31, 45, 162; ii.12, 169 179, 228; Pp 68; Dhs 1154, Dhs 1486; Vism 469; Sdhp 459.

Sk. styāna; orig. pp. of styāyate to become hard, to congeal; stei̯ā (cp. also thira) = Gr. στέας grease, tale; Lat. stīpo to compress; also Sk. stimita (motionless) = P. timi; stīma (slow), Mhg. stīm; Goth etc. stains = E. stone; Gr. στϊφος (heap); Lat. stīpes (pale); Ohg. stīf = E. stiff

Thīyati

see patiṭṭhīyati.

Thīyanā

(f.) & thīyitatta (nt.) = thīna, in exegesis at Nd ii.290≈(see thīna) Vb 352.

abstr. formations from thīna

Thuta

praised Dhs-a 198; Ja iv.101 (sada˚ = sadā thuto niccapasattho); Mil 278 (vaṇṇita th. pasattha).

cp. pp. of thavati

Thuti

(f.) praise Ja iv.443 (thutiṃ karoti); Vv-a 158.

cp. thavati

Thunati

1. to moan, groan, roar SN v.148 (thunaṃ ppr.; v.l. thanaṃ); Vv 521 (of beings in Niraya otherwise ghosenti), v.l.SS thananti (better?). 2. to proclaim; shout, praise (confused with thavati Snp 884.

see thaneti

Thulla

see thūla.

Thusa

(nt.) husk of grain, chaff AN i.242 (together w. other qualities of corn); Ja iv.8; Vism 346. athusa DN iii.199.

-aggi a fire of husks Ne 23; -odaka gruel (= sabbasambhārehi kataṃ sovīrakaṃ Pp A 232) DN i.166; AN i.295 = Pp 55; -pacchi a bird stuffed with chaff, a straw-bird Ja i.242; -piṇḍa a lump of husks Vin ii.151 -rāsi a heap of h. Dhp-a i.309; -homa an oblation of h DN i.9 (= DN-a i.93; v.l. BB kana, for kaṇa; cp. kaṇahoma DN i.9).

Vedic tuṣa (m.)

Thūṇā

(f.) a pillar, prop support AN ii.198; Vv 541 (= thambha Vv-a 245); DN-a i.124. Esp. the sacrificial post in phrase thūṇûpanīta “lead to sacrifice” (yūpa-sankhātuṃ thūṇaṃ upa DN-a i.294): DN i.127≈S i.76≈Dhp-a ii.7; Ja iii.45 kumbhathūṇā a sort of drum DN i.6 etc. (see kumbha where also kumbha -thūṇika Vin iv.285) ■ eka-thūṇaka with one support Ja iv.79.

Vedic sthūṇā from sthā, standing fast, as in thambha, thīna, etc. Nearest relation is thāvara (= thūrā, on r: ṇ = l (thūla): n see tūṇī). Cp. Gr.σταυρός (post); Lat. restauro (to prop up again) Gr. στϋλος pillar, “style”; Goth. stojan etc. (see thāvara); Ags. styran = E. steer, Ger. steuer

Thūṇira

house-top, gable Thag 184 (= kanṇikā Com.).

der. fr. thūṇā

Thūpa

a stupa or tope, a bell-shaped pile of earth, a mound, tumulus, cairn; dome, esp. a monument erected over the ashes of an Arahant (otherwise called dhātugabbha = dāgaba), or on spots consecrated as scenes of his acts. In general as tomb: Vin iv.308; Ja iii.156 (mattika˚) = Pv i.84; in special as tope: DN ii.142, DN ii.161, DN ii.164 sq.; AN i.77; MN ii.244; Ja v.39 (rajata˚) Vv-a 156 (Kassapassa bhagavato dvādasayojanikaṃ kanaka˚); Ud 8; Pv iii.105. Four people are thūpārahā, worthy of a tope, viz. a Tathāgata, a Tathāgatasāvaka a Paccekabuddha, a Cakkavattin DN ii.143; AN ii.245 ■ At Dpvs vi.65 th. is to be corrected into dhūpaṃ.

Vedic stūpa, crown of the head, top, gable; cp. Gr. στύπος (handle, stalk). Oicel. stūfr (stump), to *steud as in tudati

Thūpika

(adj.) having domed roofs (“house-tops” Ja vi.116 (of a Vimāna = dvādasayojanika maṇimayakañcanathūpika; cp. p. 117: pañcaṭhūpaṃ vimānaṃ expld as pañcahi kūṭāgārehi samannāgataṃ).

from thūpa. The ika applies to the whole compound

Thūpikata

(adj.) “made a heap,” heaped of an alms-bowl: so full that its contents bulge out over the top Vin iv.191.

thūpa + kata

Thūla

(a) & Thulla (b) (the latter usual in cpds.) (adj.) compact, massive; coarse gross; big, strong, clumsy; common, low, unrefined rough DN i.223; Snp 146 (aṇuka˚), 633 (id.); Dhp 31, Dhp 265 Dhp 409; Ja i.196 (b); Dhs 617; Kp-a 246; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 74 (of a cloak); Vv-a 103; Sdhp 101, Sdhp 346 ■ thullāni gajjati to speak rough words Ja i.226 (= pharusavacanāni vadati).

-aṅga (adj.) heavy-limbed Ja i.420; -accaya a grave offence Vin i.133, Vin i.167, Vin i.216; Vin ii.110, Vin ii.170 etc.; Vism 22 -kacchā thick scurf Vin i.202; -kumārī (Vin. v.129); kumārikā a stout, fat girl Ja iii.147; Ja iv.220 (Com. pañcakāmaguṇika-rāgena thūlatāya thullak˚ ti vuccati) Vism 17. -phusitaka (deva) (the rain-god, probably with reference to the big drops of the rain cp. DN-a i.45; SN iii.141; SN v.396; AN i.243; AN ii.140 (a); v.114 sq.; Dhp-a iii.243; -vajja a grave sin Vin ii.87 (a); MN ii.250; -vattha a coarse garment Ja v.383; -sarīra (adj.) fat, corpulent Ja i.420; Ja iv.220 (opp. kisa thin); -sāṭaka coarse cloth Dhp-a i.393 (a).

Vedic sthūla (or sthūra); cp. Lith. storas (thick) Lat. taurus, Goth. stiur, Ags. steor (bull = strong, bulky) Ohg. stūri (strong). From sthā: see thīna, cp. thūṇā To ūl: ull cp. cūḷa: culla

Thūlatā

(f.) coarseness, roughness, vileness Ja iv.220.

abstr. to thūla

Theta

(adj.) firm, reliable, trustworthy, true DN i.4 (DN-a i.73: theto ti thiro; ṭhita-katho ti attho); MN i.179; SN iv.384; AN ii.209 = Pp 57; Nd ii.623 ■ abl. thetato in truth SN iii.112attheta Ja iv.57 (= athira).

Sk. from tiṭṭhita, Müller P. Gr. 7 = sthātṛ

Thena

a thief adj. stealing: athenena not stealing, not stealthily, openly DN i.4; DN-a i.72. f. athenī AN iii.38. Cp. kumbhatthena Vin ii.256 (see k.).

Vedic stena & stāyu, besides which tāyu, the latter prob. original, cp. Gr.; τϋτάω to deprive; Oir. tāid thief, to a root meaning “conceal”

Thenaka

a thief Ja vi.115.

= prec.

Theneti

to steal, to conceal Ja iv.114; Dhp-a i.80.

Denom. fr. thena

Theyya

(nt.) theft Vin i.96; AN i.129; Snp 119 (theyyā adinnaṃ ādiyati); 242, 967 (˚ṃ na kareyya) Vv 158 (: theyyaṃ vuccati thenabhāvo Vv-a 72); Mil 264, Mil 265; Vism 43 (˚paribhoga); DN-a i.71; Sdhp 55, Sdhp 61.

-citta intending to steal Vin iii.58; -saṃvāsaka one who lives clandestinely with the bhikkhus (always foll by titthiyapakkantaka) Vin i.86, Vin i.135, Vin i.168, Vin i.320; Vin v.222; Mil 310; -saṅkhātaṃ (adv.) by means of theft, stealthily DN iii.65 sq., 133; AN iii.209; AN iv.370 sq.; AN v.264.

Vedic steya

Thera

t.t. only used with ref. to the bhikkhus of Gotama Buddha’s community ■ (a) (adj.) senior Vin i.47, Vin i.290 (th. bhikkhū opp. navā bh.), 159 (th bhikkhu a senior bh. opp. to navaka bh. a novice), 187 ii.16, 212. Therânutherā bhikkhū seniors & those next to them in age dating not from birth, but from admission to the Order). Three grades are distinguished thera bh., majjhima bh., nava bh., at DN i.78 ■ See also AN ii.23, AN ii.147, AN ii.168; AN v.201, AN v.348; DN iii.123 sq., 218; Dhp 260, Dhp 261. In Sangha-thera, used of Bhikkhus not senior in the Order, the word thera means distinguished Vin ii.212, Vin ii.303. In Mahāthera the meaning, as applied to the 80 bhikkhus so called, must also have some similar meaning Dīpv iv.5 Psalms of the Brethren xxxvi. Ja v.456. At AN ii.22 it is said that a bhikkhu, however junior, may be called thera on account of his wisdom It is added that four characteristics make a man a thera-high character, knowing the essential doctrines by heart, practising the four Jhānas, and being conscious of having attained freedom through the destruction of the mental intoxications. It is already clear that at a very early date, before the Anguttara reached its extant shape, a secondary meaning of thera was tending to supplant that of senior-that is, not the senior of the whole Order, but the senior of such a part of the Sangha as live in the same locality, or are carrying out the same function ■ Note. thera in thero vassiko at SN iv.161 is to be read tero-vassiko.

-gāthā hymns of senior bhikkhus, Name of a canonical book, incorporated in the Khuddaka-Nikāya. Theratara very senior, oppd to navatara, novice DN ii.154 -vāda the doctrine of the Theras, the original Buddhist doctrine MN i.164; Dpvs iv.6, 13.

Vedic sthavira. Derivation uncertain. It may come from sthā in sense of standing over, lasting (one year or more), cp. thāvara old age, then “old = venerable”; (in meaning to be compared w. Lat. senior, etc from num. sem “one” = one year old, i.e. lasting over one and many more years). Cp. also vetus = Gr. ε ̓́τος year, E. wether, one year old ram, as cpd. w. veteran old man. Or it may come from sthā in der. *stheṷā in sthūra (sthūla: see etym. under thūla) thus, “strong venerable”

Theraka

(adj.) strong (?), of clothes: therakāni vatthāni DN ii.354 (vv.ll. thevakāni, dhorakāni, corakāni). Theri & Therika

Therī & Therikā

(f.) 1. an old woman (cp. sthavirikā Mvu iii.283) Pv ii.116 (= thāvarijiṇṇā Pv-a 149).

2. a female thera (see cpds.), as therikā at Thig 1; Dpvs xviii. 11.

-gāthā hymns of the therīs, following on the Theragāthā (q.v.).

see thera

Theva

(m.?) a drop; stagnant water. In Vin. only in phrase cīvaraṃ… na acchinne theve pakkamitabbaṃ Vin i.50, Vin i.53 = Vin ii.227, Vin ii.230; Ja vi.530 (madhu-ttheva a drop of honey).

see etym. under thīna, with which cp. in meaning from same root Gr. στοιβή & Lat. stīria, both drop. Cp. also thika. Not with Trenckner (Notes p. 70 fr.; stip

Thevati

to shine, glitter, shimmer (like a drop) Ja vi.529 (= virocati p. 530).

fr. theva; orig. “to be congealed or thick”

Thoka

(adj.) little, small, short, insignificant; nt. a trifle. AN iv.10; Ja vi.366; Pv-a 12 (kāla): nt. thokaṃ as adv. = a little Ja i.220 Ja ii.103, Ja ii.159; Ja v.198; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 43thokaṃ thokaṃ a little each time, gradually, little by little Dhp 121, Dhp 239; Mil 9; Snp-a 18; Pv-a 168.

for etymology see under thīna

Thokaka

(adj.) = thoka; fem. thokikā Dhp 310.

Thoma

praise.

Vedic stoma a hymn of praise

Thomana

(nt.) & thomanā (f.) praising, praise, laudation Ja i.220 (= pasaṃsa); Pp 53; Pv-a 27.

see thavati

Thometi

to praise, extol, celebrate (often with vaṇṇeti) DN i.240; Snp 679, Snp 1046 Nd ii.291; Ja vi.337; Snp-a 272 (= thutuṃ); Vv-a 102; Pv-a 196 ■ pp. thomita Ja i.9.

D.

denom. fr. thoma; cp. thavati

D

-D-

euphonic consonant inserted to avoid hiatus: (a) orig. only sandhi-cons. in forms ending in t & d (like tāvat kocid, etc.) & thus restored in cpds. where the simplex has lost it; (b) then also transferred to & replacing other sandhi-cons. (like puna-d-eva for punar eva).; (a) dvipa-d-uttama Snp 995; koci-d-eva Pv-a 153; kincid-eva ibid. 70; tāva-d-eva ib. 74; yāva-d-atthaṃ ib 217; ahu-d-eva Mil 22 etc ■ (b) puna-d-eva Pv ii.113 (v.l. BB); Dhp-a ii.76; samma-d-eva Snp p.16; Vv-a 148; Pv-a 66 etc.; cp. Snp-a 284. bahu-d-eva Ja i.170.

-Da

(adj.) giving, bestowing, presenting, only ; as anna˚, bala˚, vaṇṇa˚, sukha˚, Snp 297; vara˚ Snp 234; kāma˚ Ja vi.498; Pv ii.138; ambu giving water, i.e. a cloud Dāvs v.32; amatamagga Sdhp 1; uḷāraphala˚ ib. 26; maṃsa˚ Pgdp 49, etc.

Suffix of , see dadāti

Daṃsaka

: see vi˚.

Daṃseti

(for dasseti): see upa˚; pavi˚, vi˚.

Daka

(nt.) Vin iii.112; SN iii.85; AN ii.33 = Nd ii.420 B3 (: the latter has udaka, but Nd i.14 daka).

-āsaya (adj.) (beings) living in water AN ii.33≈; -ja (adj.) sprung from water, aquatic Ja i.18 (thalajā d pupphā); -rakkhasa a water-sprite Ja i.127, Ja i.170 Ja vi.469.

= udaka, aphaeretic from combns like sītodaka which was taken for sīto + daka instead of sīt odaka

Dakkha1

(adj.) dexterous skilled, handy, able, clever DN i.45, DN i.74, DN i.78; DN iii.190 (+ analasa) MN i.119; MN iii.2; SN i.65; Nd ii.141 (+ analasa & sampajāna); Ja iii.247; DN-a i.217 (= cheka); Mil 344 (rūpadakkhā those who are of “fit” appearance).

Vedic dakṣa = Gr. ἀρι δείκετος & δεςιός; dakṣati to be able; to please, satisfy, cp. daśasyati to honour, Denom. fr. *dasa = Lat. decus honour, skill All to *dek in Lat. decet to be fit, proper, etc. On var theories of connections of root see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under decet. It may be that *deks is an intens. formation fr. *diś to point (see disati), then the original meaning would be “pointing,” i.e. the hand used for pointing. For further etym. see dakkhiṇa

Dakkha2

(nt.) dexterity, ability, skill Ja iii.466.

dakkha1 + ya, see dakkheyya

Dakkhati & Dakkhiti

see dassati.

Dakkhiṇa

(adj.) 1. right (opp vāma left), with a tinge of the auspicious, lucky prominent: Vin ii.195 (hattha); Pv-a 112, Pv-a 132 (id.) Pts i.125. hattha, pāda, etc. with ref. to a Tathāgata’s body); Ja i.50 (˚passa the right side); Pv-a 178 (id.), 112 (˚bāhu); Snp p.106 (bāha); Pv-a 179 (˚jānumaṇḍalena with the right knee: in veneration).

2. skilled, well-trained (= dakkha) Ja vi.512 (Com. susikkhita).

3. (of that point of the compass which is characterized through “orientation” by facing the rising sun, & then;

lies on one’s right:) southern, usually in combn with disā (direction): DN iii.180 (one of the 6 points, see disā), 188 sq. (id.); MN i.487; MN ii.72; SN i.145, etc.

-āvattaka (adj.) winding to the right DN ii.18 (of the hairs of a Mahāpurisa, the 14th of his characteristics or auspicious signs; cp. BSk. dakṣiṇāvarta a precious shell, i.e. a shell the spiral of which turns to the right Avs i.205; Divy 51, Divy 67, Divy 116); Ja v.380; -janapada the southern country the “Dekkan” (= dakkhiṇaṃ) DN i.96, DN i.153 (expld by Bdhgh as “Gangāya dakkhiṇato pākaṭa-janapado” DN-a i.265); -samudda the southern sea Ja i.202.

Vedic dakṣiṇa, Av. dašinō; adj. formation fr. adv. *deksi = *deksinos, cp. purāṇa fr. purā viṣuṇa fr. viṣu, Lat. bīni (= bisni) fr. bis. From same root *deks are Lat. dexter (with compar ■ antithetic suffix ter = Sk. tara, as in uttara) & Gr.; δεςιτερός cp. also Goth. taihswa (right hand), Ohg. zeso & zesawa See dakkha for further connections

Dakkhiṇā

(f.) a gift, a fee, a donation; a donation given to a “holy” person with ref. to unhappy beings in the Peta existence (“Manes”), intended to induce the alleviation of their sufferings; an intercessional, expiatory offering, “don attributif” (Feer) (see Stede, Peta Vatthu, etc. p. 51 sq.; Feer Index to Avs p. 480) DN i.51 = DN iii.66 (d ■ uddhaggikā), cp. AN ii.68 (uddhaggā d.) AN iii.43, AN iii.46, AN iii.178, AN iii.259; AN iv.64 sq., 394; MN iii.254 sq (cuddasa pāṭipuggalikā d. given to 14 kinds of worthy recipients) Snp 482, Snp 485; Iti 19; Ja i.228; Pv i.44 (= dāna Pv-a 18), i.59 (petānaṃ d ˚ṃ dajjā), iv.151; Mil 257 Vism 220; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 70, Pv-a 110 (pūjito dakkhiṇāya) guru-d. teacher’s fee Vv-a 229, Vv-a 230; dakkhiṇaṃ ādisati (otherwise uddisati) to designate a gift to a particular person (with dat.) Vin i.229 = DN ii.88.

-āraha a worthy recipient of a dedicatory gift Pv ii.86; -odaka water to wash in (orig. water of dedication consecrated water) Ja i.118; Ja iv.370; Dhp-a i.112; Pv-a 23; -visuddhi. purity of a gift MN iii.256 sq. = AN ii.80 sq. = DN iii.231, cp. Kv 556 sq.

Vedic dakṣiṇā to dakṣ as in daśasyati to honour, to consecrate, but taken as f. of dakkhiṇa by grammarians expl. as gift by the “giving” (i.e. the right) hand with popular analogy to to give (dadāti)

Dakkhiṇeyya

(adj.-n.) one worthy of a dakkiṇā The term is expl. at Kp-a 183, & also (with ref to brahmanic usage) at Nd;2 291 ■ SN i.142, SN i.168, SN i.220; MN i.37, MN i.236 sq.; 446; AN i.63, AN i.150; AN ii.44; AN iii.134, AN iii.162 AN iii.248; AN iv.13 sq.; DN iii.5; Iti 19 (annañ ca datvā bahuno dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇaṃ… saggaṃ gacchanti dāyakā); Snp 227, Snp 448 sq., 504, 529; Nd ii.291 (as one of the 3 constituents of a successful sacrifice, viz. yañña the gift, phala the fruit of the gift, d. the recipient of the gift). Cp i.105 (where also adj. to be given, of dāna). Pv iv.133; Vv-a 120, Vv-a 155 (Ep. of the Sangha ujubhūta); Pv-a 25, Pv-a 125, Pv-a 128, Pv-a 262.

-aggi the (holy) fire of a good receiver of gifts; a metaphor taken from the brahmanic rite of sacrifice as one of the 7 fires (= duties) to be kept up (or discarded) by a follower of the Buddha AN iv.41, AN iv.45; DN iii.217; -khetta the fruitful soil of a worthy recipient of a gift Pv-a 92; -puggala an individual deserving a donation Ja i.228; there are 7 kinds enumd at DN iii.253 DN iii.8 kinds at DN iii.255; -sampatti the blessing of finding a worthy object for a dakkhiṇā Pv-a 27, Pv-a 137 sq.

grd ■ formation fr. dakkhiṇā as from a verb *dakṣiṇāti = pūjeti

Dakkhiṇeyyatā

(f.) the fact of being a dakkhiṇeyya Mil 240 (a˚).

abstr. fr. prec.

Dakkhita

consecrated, dedicated Ja v.138. Cp dikkhita.

Vedic dīkṣita pp. of dīkṣ, Intens to daśayati: see dakkha1

Dakkhin

(adj.) seeing, perceiving; f. ˚ī in atīra-dakkhiṇī nāvā a ship out of sight of land DN i.222.

fr. dakkhati, see dassati

Dakkheyya

(nt.) cleverness, skill Ja ii.237 (Com. kusalassa-ñāṇa-sampayuttaṃ viriyaṃ); iii.468.

cp. dakkha2

Daṭṭha

bitten Ja i.7; Mil 302; Pv-a 144.

pp. of daśati, see ḍasati

Daṭṭhar

one who sees AN ii.25.

n. ag. to dassati

Daṭṭhā

(f.) a large tooth, tusk, fang Mil 150 (˚visa).

cp. dāṭhā

Daḍḍha

burnt, always with aggi˚; consumed by fire Snp 62; Pv i.74 Mil 47; Pv-a 56 (indaggi˚).

-ṭṭhāna a place burnt by fire Ja i.212; also a place of cremation (sarīrassa d.) Pv-a 163 (= āḷāhana).

Sk. dagdha, pp. of dahati, see ḍahati

Daḍḍhi˚

making firm, strengthening, in; kayādaḍḍhi-bahula strengthened by gymnastics, an athlete Ja iii.310 (v.l. daḷhi˚), iv.219 (v.l. distorted kādaḷiphahuna).

not with Trenckner, Notes p. 65 = Sk. dārḍhya, but with Kern, Toev. 113 = Sk. dṛḍhī (from dṛḍha, see daḷha), as in compn dṛḍhī karoti & bhavati to make or become strong

Daṇḍa

ra; (on ṇ: l cp. guṇa: guḷa etc.) to *del as in Sk. dala, dalati. Cp. Lat. dolare to cut, split, work in wood; delere to destroy; Gr.δαίδαλον work of art; Mhg. zelge twig; zol a stick Possibly also fr. *dan[d]ra (r = l freq., ṇ: l as tulā tūṇa; veṇu: veḷu, etc. cp. aṇḍa, caṇḍa), then it would equal Gr. δένδρον tree, wood, & be connected with Sk dāru] 1. stem of a tree, wood, wood worked into something, e.g. a handle, etc. Ja ii.102; Ja ii.405 (v.l. dabba) Vism 313; Pv-a 220 (nimbarukkhassa daṇḍena [v.l. dabbena] katasūla). tidaṇḍa a tripod.

2. a stick staff, rod, to lean on, & as support in walking; the walking-stick of a Wanderer Vin ii.132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṃ), 196; SN i.176; AN i.138, AN i.206; Snp 688 (suvaṇṇa˚); Ja iii.395; Ja v.47 (loha˚); Sdhp 399 (eka˚, ˚dvaya, ti˚). daṇḍaṃ olubbha leaning on the st. MN i.108; AN iii.298; Thig 27.

3. a stick as means of punishment. a blow, a thrashing: daṇḍehi aññamaññaṃ upakkamanti “they go for each other with sticks” MN i.86 = Nd ii.199; ˚ṃ dadāti to give a thrashing Ja iv.382; Ja v.442; daṇḍena pahāraṃ dadāti to hit with a stick SN iv.62; brahma˚ a certain kind of punishment DN ii.154, cp. Vin ii.290 & Kern,; Manual p. 87; pañca satāni daṇḍo a fine of 500 pieces Vin i.247; paṇīta receiving ample p. Pv iv.166; purisa-vadha˚ Ja ii.417 rāja-daṇḍaṃ karoti (c. loc.) to execute the royal beating Pv-a 216. See also Dhp 129, Dhp 131, Dhp 310, Dhp 405

4. a stick as a weapon in general, only in cert. phrases & usually in comb;n w. sattha, sword. daṇḍaṃ ādiyati to take up the stick, to use violence: attadaṇḍa (atta = ā-dā violent Snp 935; attadaṇḍesu nibbuta Dhp 406 = Snp 630 a. + kodhâbhibhūta SN iv.117: ādinna-daṇḍa ādinnasattha Vin i.349; opp. daṇḍaṃ nidahati to lay down the stick, to be peaceful: sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ Snp 35, Snp 394, Snp 629; nihita-d. nihita-sattha using neither stick nor sword, of the Dhamma DN i.4, DN i.63; MN i.287; AN i.211; AN ii.208; AN iv.249; AN v.204. daṇḍaṃ nikkhipati id. AN i.206. d ■ sattha parāmasana Nd ii.576 daṇḍa-sattha-abbhukkirana & daṇḍa-sattha-abhinipātana Nd;2 5764. Cp. paṭidaṇḍa retribution Dhp 133. 5. (fig.) a means of frightening, frightfulness, violence teasing. In this meaning used as nt. as MN i.372; tīṇi daṇḍāni pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya: kāyadaṇḍaṃ vacī˚, mano˚; in the same sense as m. at Nd ii.293 (as expld to Snp 35).

6. a fine, a penalty, penance in general: daṇḍena nikkiṇāti to redeem w. a penalty Ja vi.576 (dhanaṃ datvā Com.); daṇḍaṃ dhāreti to inflict a fine Mil 171, Mil 193; daṇḍaṃ paṇeti id. Dhp 310 (cp. Dhp-a iii.482); Dhp-a ii.71; aṭṭha-kahāpaṇo daṇḍo a fine of 8 k. Vv-a 76adaṇḍa without a stick, i.e. without force or violence, usually in phrase adaṇḍena asatthena (see above 4): Vin ii.196 (ad. as. nāgo danto mahesinā; thus of a Cakkavattin who rules the world peacefully: paṭhaviṃ ad. as. dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati DN i.89 = AN iv.89, AN iv.105, or dhammena-manusāsati Snp 1002 = SN i.236.

-ābhighata slaying w. cudgels Pv-a 58; -āraha (adj. deserving punishment Ja v.442; Vv-a 23; -ādāna taking up a stick (weapon) (cp. above 4), combd with satth ādāna MN i.110, MN i.113, MN i.410; DN iii.92, DN iii.93, DN iii.289; AN iv.400 Vism 326. -kaṭhina k. cloth stretched on a stick (for the purpose of measuring) Vin ii.116; -kathālikā a large kettle with a handle Vin i.286; -kamma punishment by beating, penalty, penance, atonement Ja iii.276 Ja iii.527; Ja v.89; Mil 8; ˚ṃ karoti to punish, to inflict a fine Vin i.75, Vin i.76, Vin i.84; Vin ii.262; -koṭi the tip of a branch or stick Dhp-a i.60; -dīpikā a torch Ja vi.398; Vism 39; Dhp-a i.220, Dhp-a i.399; -ppatta liable to punishment Mil 46 -paduma Name of a plant (cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala = sahadevā Halāyudha) Ja i.51; -parāyana supported by or leaning on a stick (of old people) MN i.88; AN i.138; Mil 282 -parissāvana a strainer with a handle Vin ii.119 -pahāra a blow with a stick DN i.144; -pāṇin carrying a staff, “staff in hand” MN i.108; -bali (-ādi) fines taxes, etc. Dhp-a i.251; -bhaya fear of punishment AN ii.121 sq. = Nd ii.470 = Mil 196; -(m)antara among the sticks DN i.166 = AN i.295 = AN ii.206 = MN i.77, MN i.238, MN i.307, MN i.342 Pp 55; see note at Dial. i.228; -yuddha a club-fight DN i.6; Ja iii.541; -lakkhaṇa fortune-telling from sticks DN i.9; -vākarā a net on a stick, as a snare, MN i.153 -veḷupesikā a bamboo stick Ja iv.382; -sikkā a rope slung round the walking-staff Vin ii.131; -hattha with a stick in his hand Ja i.59.

Vedic daṇḍa, dial. = *dal[d

Daṇḍaka

1. a (small) stick, a twig; a staff, a rod; a handle DN i.7 (a walking stick carried for ornament: see DA i.89); Ja i.120 (sukkha˚ a dry twig) ii.103; iii.26; Dhp-a iii.171; Vism 353aḍḍha˚; a (birch) rod, used as a means of beating (tāḷeti) AN i.47 AN ii.122 = MN i.87 = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197; ubhato˚; two handled (of a saw) MN i.129 = MN i.189; ratha˚; the flag-staff of a chariot Mil 27; veṇu˚; a jungle rope Ja iii.204 ■ See also kudaṇḍaka a twig used for tying Ja iii.204.

2. the crossbar or bridge of a lute Ja ii.252, Ja ii.253.

-dīpikā a torch Ja i.31; -madhu “honey in a branch, a beehive Dhp-a i.59.

DemiName of daṇḍa

Daṇḍaniya

(adj.) liable to punishment Mil 186.

grd. formation from daṇḍa

Datta1

given (-˚ by; often in Np. as Brahmadatta, Deva-datta = Theo-dor. etc.) Snp 217 (para˚ = Snp-a 272 (v.l. dinna).

pp. of dadāti

Datta2

(adj.-n.) stupid; a silly fellow MN i.383; Ja vi.192 (Com.: dandha lāḷaka).

prob. = thaddha, with popular analogy to datta1, see also dandha & cp. dattu

Datti

(f.) gift, donation, offering DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.342; AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55.

from dadāti + ti

Dattika

(adj.) given; Ja iii.221 (kula˚); iv.146 (id.); nt. a gift DN i.103 (= dinnaka DN-a i.271).

der. fr. datta

Dattiya

= dattika, given as a present Ja ii.119 (kula˚); v.281 (sakka˚); vi.21 (id.): Vv-a 185 (mahārāja˚ by the King).

Dattu

(adj.?) stupid, in d˚-paññatta a doctrine of fools DN i.55 = MN i.515; Ja iv.338.

is it base of n. ag. dātar? see datta2

Dada

(-˚) (adj ■ suff.) giving, to be given SN i.33 (paññā˚); Kp viii.10 (kāma˚); Pv ii.91 (id. = dāyaka Pv-a 113); ii.124 (phala = dāyin Pv-a 157); Vv-a 171 (puriṃ˚) ■ duddada hard to give SN i.19 = SN iv.65 = Ja ii.86 = Ja vi.571.

Sk.˚ dad or ˚dada, cp ˚da & dadāti base 3

Dadāti

to give, etc. I. Forms. The foll. bases form the Pāli verb-system: dā, dāy, dadā & di.

1. Bases dā & (reduced); da ■ (a) dā˚;: fut. dassati Ja i.113, Ja i.279 Ja iii.83; AN iii.37; AN iii.1st sg. dassāmi Ja i.223; Ja ii.160; Pv-a 17 Pv-a 35, etc ■ dammi interpreted by Com. as fut. is in reality a contraction fr. dātuṃ īhāmi, used as a hortative or dubitative subjunctive (fr. dāhāmi, like kāhami I am willing to do fr. kātuṃ īhāmi) Snp p.15 (“shall I give”); ii.112; iv.10 (varaṃ te dammi); Pv i.103ii.324 (kin t’ āhaṃ dammi what can I give thee = dassāmi Pv-a 88) ■ pret. adā Snp 303; Pv ii.28 (= adāsi Pv-a 81) Mvu vii.14; Mvu vii.2nd sg. ado Ja iv.10 (= adāsi Com.): Mil 384; Mil 1st. pl. adamha Ja ii.71; Mil 10; Mil 2nd pl. adattha Ja i.57 (mā ad.); Mil 10, & dattha Ja ii.181 ■ aor. adāsi Ja i.150, Ja i.279; Pv-a 73, etc.; pl. adaṃsu Pv i.116 ■ inf dātuṃ Ja iii.53; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 48 (˚kāma), etc. & dātave Snp 286 ■ grd. dātabba Ja iii.52; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 88, etc. (b) da˚;: pp. datta -ger. datvā Ja i.152, Ja i.290 (a˚); Pv-a 70, Pv-a 72, etc. & datvāna Pv i.113; also as ˚dā (for ˚dāya or ˚dāna) in prep. cpds., like an-upādā, ādā, etc. Der fr. 1. are Caus. dāpeti, pp. dāpita; n. ag. dātar; nt dāna. See also suffix dā,˚ datti, dattikā, etc.; and pp atta (= ā-d[a]ta).

2. Bases dāy & (reduced); day contracted into de. (a) dāy˚;: only in der. dāya, dāyaka dāyin and in prep. cpds. ā-dāye (ger. of ādāti). (b) de˚;: pres. ind. deti Snp 130; Ja ii.111, Ja ii.154; Pv-a 8 Pv-a 1st sg. demi Ja i.228, Ja i.307; Ja i.2nd desi Ja i.279; Pv-a 39 Pv-a 1st pl. dema Ja i.263; Ja iii.126; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 75 (shall we give) 2nd detha Ja iii.127; Ja iii.3rd denti Snp 244 ■ imper. dehi Vin i.17; Ja i.223; Ja iv.101; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 73; Pv-a 3rd sg. detu Ja i.263; Ja ii.104; Ja ii.2nd pl. detha Iti 66; Ja iii.126; Pv-a 29 Pv-a 62, Pv-a 76 ■ ppr. dento Ja i.265; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 11 etc ■ grd deyya Mvu vii.31. BtSk. deya ■ Other der. fr. base 2 are dayati & dayā (q.v.).

3. Base dadā: pres. ind dadāti SN i.18; Snp p.87; Snp p.1st. sg. dadāmi Ja i.207; Snp 421 Snp 3rd. pl. dadanti Ja iii.220; Dhp 249 ■ imper. dadāhi Pv ii.14 ■ pot. dadeyya Pv-a 17; Mil 28 & dade Pv ii.322; Vv 625; 1st. sg. dadeyyaṃ Ja i.254, Ja i.265; Ja i.2nd sg. dadeyyāsi Ja iii.276. Also contracted forms dajjā SN i.18 (may he give); Dhp 224; Pv i.41 (= dadeyya Pv-a 17); ii.940; 1st sg. dajjaṃ Vin i.232 (dajjâhaṃ = dajjaṃ ahaṃ). Cp i.109 (dajjâhaṃ); Ja iv.101 (= dammi Com.) Pv ii.945; 2nd. pl. dajjeyyātha Vin i.232; Vin i.3rd y. dajjeyya & 3rd. pl. dajjuṃ in cpd. anupa˚ ■ ppr.; dadanto Snp p.87. gen. etc. dadato It. 89; Dhp 242; Pv ii.942 & dadaṃ Snp 187, Snp 487; Pv ii.942; Vv 676 ■ ppr. med dadamāna Ja i.228, Ja ii.154; Pv-a 129 ■ aor. adadaṃ Vv 3411 (= adāsiṃ Vv-a 151); proh. 2nd. pl. mā dadiṭṭha Dhp-a i.396; Ja iii.171 ■ ger. daditvā Pv ii.89.ii (v.l. BB datvā): contr. into dajjā (should be read dajja Pv ii.967 (= datvā Pv-a 139) ■ Der. dada for ˚da. 4. (Passive) base di (& dī);: pp. dinna pres. dīyati SN i.18; Thig 475; Pv-a 26, & diyyati Vv-a 75; cp ādiyati; pret. dīyittha Dhp-a i.395 ■ ppr. dīyamāna Pv-a 8, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 49, Pv-a 110, Pv-a 133, etc ■ Der. fr. 4 are Desid dicchati, diti, etc ■ II. Meanings i. (trs.) with acc. to give, to present with: dānaṃ deti (w. dat. & abs.) to be liberal (towards), to be munificent, to make a present SN i.18; Iti 89; Pv i.41; ii3; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 27, etc ■ (fig. okāsaṃ to give opportunity, allow Ja i.265; ovādaṃ to give advice Pv-a 11; jīvitaṃ to spare one’s life Ja ii.154 paṭivacanaṃ to answer Ja i.279; sādhukāraṃ to applaud Ja i.223; paṭiññaṃ to promise Pv-a 76 ■ to offer, to allow: maggaṃ i.e. to make room Vin ii.221; Ja ii.4 maggaṃ dehi let me pass Ja iv.101 ■ to grant: varaṃ a wish Ja iv.10; Pv ii.940 ■ to give or deal out: daṇḍaṃ a thrashing Ja iv.382; pahāraṃ a blow SN iv.62.

2. with ger. to give out, to hand over: dārūni āharitvā aggiṃ katvā d. to provide with fire Ja ii.102; sāṭake āharitvā to present w. clothes Ja i.265; dve koṭṭhāse vibhajitvā d. to deal out Ja i.226; kuṭikāyo kāretvā adaṃsu had huts built & gave them Pv-a 42.

3. (abs.); with inf. to permit, to allow: khādituṃ Ja i.223; nikkhamituṃ Ja ii.154; pavisituṃ Ja i.263, etc.

Redupl. formation as in Lat. do, perf. de-di, Gr. δίδωμι; cp. Lat. dōs dowry, Gr. δώς; Ohg. dati Lith. důti to give

Daddabha

a heavy, indistinct noise, a thud Ja iii.76 (of the falling of a large fruit), v.l. duddabhayasadda to be regarded as a Sk. gloss = dundubhyaśabda. See also dabhakka.

onomatop.

Daddabhāyati

to make a heavy noise, to thud Ja iii.77.

Denom. fr. prec.

Daddara1

partridge Ja iii.541.

onomat. from the noise, cp. next & cakora, with note on gala

Daddara2

a cert. (grinding, crashing) noise AN iv.171; Ja ii.8; Ja iii.461; Name of a mountain, expld as named after this noise Ja ii.8; Ja iii.16, Ja iii.461.

cp. Sk. dardara

Daddaḷhati

to blaze, to shine brilliantly; only in pp. med. daddaḷhamāna resplendent, blazing forth SN i.127 = Ja i.469; Vv 173; 341; Pv ii.126; iii.35; Vv-a 89 (ativiya vijjotamāna); Pv-a 157 (at. virocamāna), 189 (at. abhijalanto) ■ Spelling daddallamāna at Ja v.402; Ja vi.118.

Sk. jājvalyati, Intens. of jval, see jalati

Daddu

(nt.) a kind of cutaneous eruption Mil 298; Vism 345.

-bandhana in d ■ bandhanādi-bandhana at Thag-a 241 should be read daṇḍa˚.

Sk. dadru f. & dardru a kind of leprosy, dadruna leprous (but given by Halāyudha in the meaning of ringworm, p. 234 Aufrecht); fr. *der in Sk. dṛṇāti to tear, chap, split (see dara & dala); cp Lat. derbiosus; Ohg. zittaroh; Ags. teter

Daddula1

a cert. kind of rice DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.343; AN i.241, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55.

Daddula2

(nt.) in nahāru˚ (v.l. dala & dadalla) both at MN i.188 (kukkuṭapattena pi. n-daddulena pi aggiṃ gavesanti) & AN iv.47 (kukkuṭapattaṃ vā n-daddulaṃ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṃ paṭilīyati) unexplained; perhaps a muscle.

Sk. dārdura?

Dadhi

(nt.) sour milk, curds junket Vin i.244 (in enumn of 5-fold cow-produce, cp gorasa); DN i.201 (id.); MN i.316; AN ii.95; Ja ii.102 Ja iv.140; Mil 41, Mil 48, Mil 63; Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; Vism 264 Vism 362.

-ghaṭa a milk bowl Ja ii.102; -maṇḍaka whey SN ii.111 -māla “the milk sea,” Name of an ocean Ja iv.140; -vāraka a pot of milk-curds Ja iii.52.

Sk. dadhi, redpl. formation fr. dhayati to suck. Cp. also dhenu cow, dhīta, etc.

Danta1

, a tooth, a tusk, fang, esp. an elephant’s tusk; ivory Vin ii.117 (nāga-d. a pin of ivory); Kp ii. (as one of the taca-pañcaka, or 5 dermatic constituents of the body, viz. kesā, lomā nakhā d. taco, see detailed description at Kp-a 43 sq.); pankadanta rajassira “with sand between his teeth & dust on his head” (of a wayfarer) Snp 980; Ja iv.362, Ja iv.371; MN i.242; Ja i.61; Ja ii.153; Vism 251; Vv-a 104 (īsā˚ long tusks); Pv-a 90, Pv-a 152 (fang); Sdhp 360.

-ajina ivory MN ii.71 (gloss: dhanadhaññaṃ); -aṭṭhika “teeth-bone,” ivory of teeth i.e. the tooth as such Vism 21. -āvaraṇa the lip (lit. protector of teeth Ja iv.188; Ja vi.590; Dhp-a i.387. -ullahakaṃ (M iii.167 see ullahaka; -kaṭṭha a tooth-pick Vin i.46 = Vin ii.223 Vin i.51, Vin i.61; Vin ii.138; AN iii.250; Ja i.232; Ja ii.25; Ja vi.75; Mil 15; Dhp-a ii.184; Vv-a 63; -kāra an artisan in ivory ivory-worker DN i.78; Ja i.320; Mil 331; Vism 336 -kūta tooth of a maimed bullock (?) (thus taking kūṭa as kūṭa4, and equivalent to kūṭadanta), in phrase asanivicakkaṃ danta-kūṭaṃ DN iii.44 = DN iii.47, which has also puzzled the translators (cp. Dial. iii.40: “munching them all up together with that wheel-less thunderbolt of a jawbone,” with note: “the sentence is not clear”) -pāḷi row of teeth Vism 251; -poṇa tooth-cleaner, always combd with mukh’ odaka water for rinsing the teeth Vin iii.51; Vin iv.90, Vin iv.233; Ja iv.69; Mil 15; Snp-a 272. The C. on Pārāj. ii.4, 17, (Vin iii.51) gives 2 kinds of dantapoṇa, viz. chinna & acchinna.; -mūla the root of a tooth; the gums Ja v.172; -vakkalika a kind of ascetics (peeling the bark of trees with their teeth? DN-a i.271; -vaṇṇa ivory-coloured, ivory-white Vv 4510 -valaya an iv. bangle Dhp-a i.226; -vikati a vessel of iv DN i.78; MN ii.18; Ja i.320; Vism 336. -vikhādana biting with teeth, i.e. chewing Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; -vidaṃsaka (either = vidassaka or to be read ˚ghaṃsaka) showing one’s teeth (or chattering?) AN i.261 (of hasita, laughter) -sampatti splendour of teeth Dhp-a i.390.

Sk. danta fr. acc. dantaṃ of dan, gen. datah = Lat. dentis. Cp. Av. dantan, Gr. ὀδόντα, Lat. dentem Oir. dēt; Goth. tunpus, Ohg. zand, Ags. tōot (= tooth & tusc (= tusk); orig. ppr. to *ed in atti to eat = “the biter.” Cp. dāṭhā

Danta2

(adj.) made of ivory, or iv ■ coloured Ja vi.223 (yāna = dantamaya).

-kāsāva ivory-white & yellow Vin i.287; -valaya see danta1.

Sk. dānta

Danta3

tamed, controlled restrained Vin ii.196; SN i.28, SN i.65, SN i.141 (nāgo va danto carati anejo); AN i.6 (cittaṃ dantaṃ); Iti 123 (danto damayataṃ seṭṭho); Snp 370, Snp 463, Snp 513, Snp 624; Dhp 35, Dhp 142 (= catumagga-niyamena d. Dhp-a iii.83), 321 sq. = Nd ii.475sudanta well-tamed, restrained Snp 23; Dhp 159 Dhp 323.

-bhūmi a safe place (= Nibbāna), or the condition of one who is tamed SN iii.84; Nd ii.475 (in continuation of Dhp 323); Dhp-a iv.6.

Sk. dānta, pp. dāmyati to make, or to be tame, cp. Gr. δμητός, Lat. domitus. See dameti

Dantaka

a pin of tooth or ivory; makara˚; the tooth of a sword-fish Vin ii.113, Vin ii.117; Vin iv.47. See details under makara.

Dandha

(adj.) slow slothful, indocile; silly, stupid MN i.453; SN iv.190; Dhp 116; Ja i.116, Ja i.143; Ja ii.447; Ja v.158; Ja vi.192 (+ laḷāka) Thag 293; Mil 59, Mil 102, Mil 251; Dhp-a i.94, Dhp-a i.251; Dhp-a iii.4 Vism 105, Vism 257 (with ref. to the liver).

-ābhiññā sluggish intuition DN iii.106; AN v.63; Dhs 176; Ne 7, Ne 24, Ne 50, Ne 123 sq., cp. AN ii.149 sq.; Vism 85.

Sk.? Fausböll refers it to Sk. tandra; Trenckner (Notes 65) to dṛḍha; see also Müller, P. Gr. 22, & Lüders; Z.D.M.G. 58, 700. A problematic connection is that with thaddha & datta;2 (q.v.)

Dandhatā

(f.) stupidity Dhp-a i.250; as dandhattaṃ at DN iii.106.

Dandhanatā

(f.), in ; absence of sluggishness Dhs 42, Dhs 43.

Dandhāyanā

(f.) clumsiness Mil 105.

Dandhāyitatta

(nt.) stupidity (= dandhatā) DN i.249 (opp. vitthāyitatta); SN ii.54; Mil 105; DN-a i.252.

der. fr. dandheti

Dandheti

to be slow, to tarry Thag 293 (opp. tāreti) ■ pp. dandhāyita see in der. ˚tta.

Denom. fr. dandha

Dapeti

Caus. fr. 4 to clean, see pariyo˚; pp. dāta see ava˚.

Dappa

wantonness, arrogance Ja ii.277; Mil 361, Mil 414; Pgdp 50. Cp. ditta2 ■ In def. of root gabb at Dhtm 289.

Sk. darpa, to dṛpyati

Dappita

(adj.) arrogant, haughty Ja v.232, Ja v.301.

Dabba1

(adj.-n.) (a) fit for, able, worthy, good, SN i.187 = Thag 1218, cp. Pss of the Brethren, 399, n. 4 (= Sk. bhavya, cp. Pāṇini v.3, 104 dravyaṃ ca bhavyaḥ) ■ (b) material, substance property; something substantial, a worthy object Pgdp 14.

-jātika of good material, fit for, able MN i.114; AN i.254 (cp. Sk. pātrabhūta); Vism 196. -saṃhāra collecting something substantial Pv-a 114 (should prob. be read sambhāra). -sambhāra the collection of something substantial or worth collecting,; a gift worth giving Ja iv.311; Ja v.48; Ja vi.427; Dhp-a i.321; Dhp-a ii.114.

Sk. dravya, nt. to dravati (dru )

Dabba2

(adj.-n.) treelike, wooden; a tree, shrub, wood Ja i.108 (d ■ tiṇagaccha a jungle of wood & grass); v.46 (d ■ gahana a thicket of shrubs & trees); Vism 353 (˚tiṇa).

Sk. dravya, of dru wood, see dāru

Dabbī

(f.) a (wooden) spoon, a ladle; (met.) the hood of a snake (dabbimattā, phaṇapuṭakā Dhp-a iv.132) ■ Dhp 64 gen. & instr, davyā Ja iii.218; Mil 365 ■ In cpds dabbi˚.

-kaṇṇa the tip of the ladle Dhp-a i.371; -gāha holding a spoon, viz. for the purposes of offering MN ii.157 (of a priest); Pv ii.953 (= kaṭacchu-gāhika Pv-a 135) -mukha a kind of bird Ja vi.540 (= āṭa); -homa a spoonoblation DN i.9.

Sk. darvī = *dāru-ī made of wood, see dāru

Dabbha

a bunch of kuśa grass (Poa Cynosuroides) DN i.141; MN i.344; AN ii.207.

-puppha “kuśa-flower,” Ep. of a jackal Ja iii.334.

Sk. darbha to dṛbhati, to plait, interlace, etc. cp. Lith. darbas plaiting, crating

Dabhakkaṃ

(?) (indecl.) = daddabhaṃ; a certain noise (of a falling fruit) Ja iii.77 (v.l. duddabha = daddabha).

Dama

(adj.-n.) (& of a nt.; damo the instr. damasā) taming, subduing; self-control, self-command moderation DN i.53 (dānena damena saṃyamena = Iti 15 expl. at DN-a i.160 as indriya-damena uposatha-kammena) iii.147, 229; SN i.4, SN i.29, SN i.168 = Snp 463 (saccena danto damasā upeto); SN iv.349; AN i.151; AN ii.152 sq. MN iii.269 (+ upasama); Snp 189, Snp 542 (˚ppatta), 655; Dhp 9, Dhp 25, Dhp 261; Ne 77; Mil 24 (sudanto uttame dame). duddama hard to tame or control Dhp 159; Pv-a 280; Sdhp 367arindama taming the enemy (q.v.).

Ved. dama; Ags. tam = E. tame, Ohg. zam to *demā in dameti

Damaka

(adj.-n.) 1. subduing, taming; converting; one who practises self-control MN i.446 (assa˚); iii.2 (id.) Ja i.349 (kula˚ bhikkhu), one who teaches a clan self-mastery 505 (go˚, assa˚, hatthi˚); Thig 422 (= kāruññāya paresaṃ cittassa damaka Thag-a 268).

2. one who practises self-mortification by living on the remnants of offered food (Childers) Abhp 467.

= dama

Damatha

taming, subduing, mastery, restraint, control MN i.235; DN iii.54 (+ samatha); Dhp 35 (cittassa d.); Pv-a 265; Dpvs vi.36.

Sk. damatha

Damana

(adj.-n..) taming, subduing, mastery Pv-a 251 (arīnaṃ d˚-sīla = arindama).

Damaya

(adj.) to be tamed: duddamaya difficult to tame Thag 5 (better to be read damiya ).

Sk. damya, see damma

Damita

subdued, tamed Ja v.36; Pv-a 265.

Sk. damāyita = danta3; cp. Gr. α δάματος; Lat. domitus

Dametar

one who tames or subdues, a trainer, in phrase adantānaṃ dametā “the tamer of the untamed” (of a Buddha) MN ii.102; Thig 135.

n ■ ag. to dameti = Sk. damayitṛ, cp. Sk. damitṛ = Gr. (παν)δαμάτωρ δμητήρ; Lat. domitor

Dameti

to make tame, chastise, punish master, conquer, convert Vin ii.196 (daṇḍena); MN ii.102; Dhp 80, Dhp 305 (attānaṃ); Iti 123 (ppr. [danto] damayataṃ seṭṭho [santo] samayataṃ isi); Mil 14, Mil 386; Pv-a 54 (core d. = converted).

Sk. damayati, caus. to dāmyati of *dam to bring into the house, to domesticate; Gr. δαμάω, δμητός Lat. domare; Oir. dam (ox); Goth. tamjan = Ohg zemman = Ags. temian = E. tame; to *demā of dama house, see dampati

Dampati

master of the house, householder, see tudampati & cp. gahapati.;

Sk. dampati master of the house; dual: husband & wife; cp. also patir dan, *dam, as in Gr. δ ̈ω, δ ̈ωμα & δες-in δεσπότης = dampati, short base of *dama house = Ved. dama, Gr. δόμος, Lat. domus to *demā (as also in dameti to domesticate) to build, cp. Gr. δέμω & δέμας; Goth. timrjan; Ohg. zimbar; E. timber

Damma

(adj.) to be tamed or restrained; esp with ref. to a young bullock MN i.225 (balagāvā dammagāvā the bulls & the young steers); Iti 80; also of other animals: assadamma-sārathi a horse-trainer AN ii.112 & fig. of unconverted men likened to refractory bullocks in phrase purisa-damma-sārathi (Ep. of the Buddha “the trainer of the human steer” DN i.62 (misprint ˚dhamma˚) = ii.93 = iii.5; MN ii.38; AN ii.112; Vv 1713 (nara-vara-d ■ sārathi cp. Vv-a 86.

Sk. damya, grd. of dāmyati see dameti & cp. damaya (damiya)

Dayati1

= dayati (q.v.) to fly Ja iv.347 (+ uppatati); vi.145 (dayassu = uyyassu Com.).

Dayati2

= to have pity (c. loc.), to sympathize, to be kind Ja vi.445 (dayitabba), 495 (dayyāsi = dayaṃ kareyyāsi).

Ved. dayate of day to divide, share, cp. Gr. δαίομαι, δαίνυμι, δαίτη, etc. to (see dadāti, base 2) & with p. Gr.; δαπάνη, Lat. daps (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)

Dayā

(f.) sympathy, compassion, kindness MN i.78; Snp 117; Ja i.23; Ja vi.495. Usually as anuddayā; freq. in cpd. dayāpanna showing kindness DN i.4 (= dayaṃ metta-cittaṃ āpanno DN-a i.70); MN i.288; AN iv.249 sq.; Pp 57; Vv-a 23.

Ved. dayā, to dayati2

Dara

fear, terror; sorrow, pain Vin ii.156 = AN i.138 (vineyya hadaye daraṃ); SN ii.101, SN ii.103; SN iv.186 sq.; Thig 32 (= cittakato kilesa-patho Thag-a, 38); Ja iv.61; Vv 838 (= daratha Vv-a 327); Pv i.85 (= citta-daratha Pv-a 41) ■ sadara giving pain, fearful, painful MN i.464; AN ii.11, AN ii.172; SN i.101. Cp. ādara & purindada.;

Sk. dara; see etym. connection under darī

Daratha

anxiety, care, distress AN ii.238; MN iii.287 sq. (kāyikā & cetasikā d.); Snp 15 (darathajā: the Arahant has nought in him born of care Cy explains by pariḷāha fever); Ja i.61 (sabbakilesa-d.) Pv-a 230 (id.); Dhp-a ii.215; Mil 320; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 41; Vv-a 327.

Sk. daratha, der. fr. dara

Darī

(f.) [Sk. darī to dṛṇāti to cleave, split, tear, rend, caus. darayati *der = Gr. δέρω to skin, δέρμα, δορά skin); Lith. dirù (id.) Goth. ga-taíran = Ags. teran (tear = Ohg. zeran (Ger. zerren). To this the variant (r:l *del in dalati, dala, etc. See also daddara, daddu, dara avadīyati, ādiṇṇa, uddīyati, purindada (= puraṃ-dara) a cleavage, cleft; a hole, cave, cavern Ja i.18 (v. 106), 462 (mūsikā˚ mouse-hole); ii.418 (= maṇiguhā); Snp-a 500 (= padara).

-cara a cave dweller (of a monkey) Ja v.70; -mukha entrance of a cave Vism 110. -saya a lair in a cleft Cp iii.71.

Dala

(nt.) a blade, leaf, petal (usually -˚); akkhi-d eyelid Thag-a 259; DN-a i.194; Dhs-a 378; uppala˚ Dhs-a 311; kamala˚ (lotus-petal) Vv-a 35, Vv-a 38; muttā˚ (? DN-a i.252; ratta-pavāḷa˚ Ja i.75.

Sk. dala, *del (var. of *der, see dara) in dalati (q.v.) orig. a piece chipped off = a chip, piece of wood cp. daṇḍa, Mhg. zelge (branch); Oir delb (figure, form) deil (staff, rod)

Dalati

to burst, split break ■ Caus.; dāleti Snp 29 (dalayitvā = chinditvā Snp-a 40); Mil 398 ■ Pass. dīyati (Sk. dīryate) see uddīyati. Dalidda & Dalidda;

Sk. dalati, del to split off, tear; Gr. δαιδάλλω, Lat. dolare & delere. See dala & dara

Dalidda & Daḷidda

(adj.-n.) vagrant, strolling, poor, needy wretched; a vagabond, beggar-(l:) Vin ii.159; SN i.96 (opp. aḍḍha); AN ii.57, AN ii.203; AN iii.351; AN iv.219; AN v.43 Pp 51; Vv-a 299 (ḷ:) MN ii.73; SN v.100, SN v.384, SN v.404; Vv201 (= duggata Vv-a 101); DN-a i.298; Pv-a 227 Sdhp 89, Sdhp 528.

Sk. daridra, to daridrāti, Intens. to drāti run (see dava), in meaning cp. addhika wayfarer = poor

Daḷiddatā

(f.) poverty Vv-a 63.

Sk. daridratā

Daḷiddiya

see dāḷiddiya.

Daḷha

(adj.) firm, strong, solid; steady, fast nt. adv. very much, hard, strongly-D i.245; SN i.77; AN ii.33; Snp 321 (nāvā), 357, 701, 821 (˚ṃ karoti to strengthen), 966 (id.); Dhp 112; Ja ii.3; Ja iv.106; Dhp-a iv.48; Kp-a 184; Vv-a 212 (= thira); Pv-a 94, Pv-a 277- daḷhaṃ (adv.) Dhp 61, Dhp 313.

-dhamma strong in anything, skilled in some art proficient SN ii.266 = AN ii.48 (of an archer); MN i.82; Ja vi.77; Vv 631 acc. to Trenckner, Notes p. 60 (cp also Vv-a 261) = dṛḍha-dhanva, from dhanu = having a strong bow; -nikkama of strong exertion Snp 68 (= Nd ii.294); -parakkama of strong effort, energetic MN ii.95; AN ii.250; Dhp 23; Thig 160; -pahāra a violent blow Ja iii.83; -pākāra (etc.) strongly fortified SN iv.194 -bhattin firmly devoted to somebody Dhs-a 350.

Sk. dṛḍha to dṛhyati to fasten, hold fast; *dhergh, cp. Lat. fortis (strong). Gr. ταρφύς (thick) Lith. dir̃žas (strap). For further relations see Walde Lat. Wtb. under fortis

Daḷhī˚

in kāya-daḷhī-bahula strong in body athletic Vin ii.76, cp. Com. on p. 313; Ja iii.310; Ja iv.219 daḷhīkaraṇa steadiness, perseverance Snp-a 290 (+ ādhāraṇatā), 398 (id). In cpds. also daḷhi˚ viz. -kamma making firm; strengthening Vin i.290; Ja v.254; Pp 18, Pp 22; Vism 112.

f. of dṛḍha → daḷha in compn like dṛḍhī-bhūta, etc.; cp. daḍḍhi

Dava1

fire, heat Ja iii.260 ■ See also dāva & dāya.;

-ḍāha (= Sk. davāgni) conflagration of a forest, a jungle-fire Vin ii.138; MN i.306; Ja i.641; Cp iii.93 Mil 189; Vism 36.

Sk. dava, to dunoti (q.v.); cp. Gr. δαις fire-brand

Dava2

running, course, flight quickness, sporting, exercise, play Vin ii.13; MN i.273 MN iii.2; AN i.114; AN ii.40, AN ii.145; AN iv.167; Pp 21, Pp 25davā (abl.) in sport, in fun Vin ii.101; davāya (dat.) id. Nd ii.540; Mil 367; Dhs 1347, cp. Dhs-a 402 ■ davaṃ karoti to sport, to play Ja ii.359, Ja ii.363.

-atthāya in joke, for fun Vin ii.113; -kamyatā fondness for joking, Vin iv.11, Vin iv.354; MN i.565.

Sk. drava to dravati to run, flow, etc. *dreu besides *drā (see dalidda) & *dram (= Gr. δρόμος); cp. abhiddavati also dabba = dravyaṃ

Davya

= dabba1, in sarīra˚; fitness of body, a beautiful body Ja ii.137.

for *dravya

Dasa1

the number ten; gen dasannaṃ (Dhp 137); instr. dasahi (Kp iii.) & dasabhi (Vin i.38). In cpds. (-˚) also as ḷasa (soḷasa 16) rasa (terasa 13; pannar˚ 15; aṭṭhār˚ 18).

Metaphorical meaning. (A) In the first place 10 is used for measurement (more recent & comprehensive than its base 5); it is the no. of a set or comprehensive unity, not in a vague (like 3 or 5), but in a definite sense. (B) There inheres in it the idea of a fixed measure, with which that of an authoritative, solemn & auspicious importance is coupled. This applies to the unit as well as its decimal comb;ns (100, 1000) Ethically it denotes a circle, to fulfil all of which constitutes a high achievement or power.

Application (A) (based on natural phenomena): dasa disā (10 points of the compass; see disā): Snp 719, Snp 1122; Pv-a 71, etc.; d. lokadhātuyo Pv ii.961 (= 10X1000; Pv-a 138); d. māse (10 months as time of gestation kucchiyā pariharitvā Ja i.52; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 82 ■ (B) (fig. 1. a set: (a) personal (cp. 10 people would have saved Sodom: Gen. 18, 32; the 10 virgins (2X5) Matt. 25, 1) divase divase dasa dasa putte vijāyitvā (giving birth to 10 sons day by day) Pv i.6 ■ (b) impersonal: 10 commandments (dasa sikkhāpadāni Vin i.83), cp. Exod 34, 28; 10 attributes of perfection of a Tathāgata or an Arahant: Tathāgata-balāni; with ref. to the Buddha see Vin i.38 & cp.; Vin. Texts i.141 sq.; dasah’ angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati (in memorizing of No. 10 Kp iii. dasahi asaddhammehi sam˚ kāko Ja iii.127–⁠10 heavenly attributes (ṭhānāni): āyu etc. DN iii.146; SN v.275; Pv-a 9, opp. 10 afflictions as punishment (cp 10 plagues Exod. 7

11): dasannaṃ aññataraṃ ṭhānaṃ nigacchati Dhp 137 (= das. dukkha-kāraṇānaṃ, enumd v. 138, 139) “afflicted with one of the 10 plagues” cp. Dhp-a iii.70.

10 good gifts to the bhikkhu (see deyyadhamma) Nd ii.523; Pv-a 7; Pv-a 10 rules for the king Pv-a 161 ■ dividing the Empire into 10 parts: Pv-a 111; etc. vassa-dasa a decade: das’ ev’ imā vassa-dasā Ja iv.396 (enumd under vassa); dasa-rāja-dhammā Ja ii.367; das’ akkosa-vatthūni Dhp-a i.212 ■ See on similar sets AN v.1

310; DN iii.266

271.

2. a larger unity, a crowd, a vast number (of time & space) (a); personal, often meaning “all” (cp. 10 sons of Haman were slain Esth. 9, 10; 10 lepers cleansed at one time Luke 17, 12): dasa bhātaro Ja i.307; dasa bhātikā Pv-a 111; dasa-kaññā-sahassa-parivārā Pv-a 210 etc. (b) impersonal (cp. 10 X 10 = many times, S.B.E. 43, 3) dasa-yojanika consisting of a good many miles Dhp-a iii.291. dasavassasahassāni dibbāni vatthāni paridahanto (“for ever and aye”) Pv-a 76, etc.

-kkhattuṃ [Sk. ˚kṛtvah] ten times Dhp-a i.388; -pada (nt.) a draught-board (with 10 squares on each side) a pre-Buddhistic game, played with men and dice, on such a board DN i.6; Vin ii.10 = Vin iii.180 (˚e kīḷanti) DN-a i.85. -bala, [Sk. daśabala] endowed with 10 (supernormal) powers, Ep. of the Buddhas, esp. of Kassapa Buddha Vin i.38 = Ja i.84; SN ii.27; Vism 193, Vism 391; Dhp-a i.14; Vv-a 148, Vv-a 206, etc. -vidha tenfold Dhp-a i.398. -sata ten times a hundred Vin i.38 (˚parivāro) Snp 179 (yakkhā); Dhs-a 198 (˚nayano). -sahassa ten times a thousand (freq.); ˚ī in dasa-sahassi-lokadhātu Vin i.12 (see lokadhātu).

Sk. daśa = Av. dasa, Gr. δέκα, Lat. decem, Goth. taíhun, Oir. deich, Ags. tīen, Ohg. zehan fr. *dekm̊, a cpd. of dv + km̊ = “two hands”

Dasa2

(-˚) seeing, to be seen, to be perceived or understood DN i.18 (aññadatthu˚ sureseeing all-perceiving = sabbaṃ passāmī ti attho DN-a i.111); Snp 653 (paṭiccasamuppāda˚), 733 (sammad˚) Ja i.506 (yugamatta˚; v.l. dassa) ■ duddasa difficult to be seen or understood DN i.12 (dhammā gambhīrā d. see gambhīra); MN i.167, MN i.487; Snp 938; Dhp 252; also as sududdasa Dhp 36.

Sk ■ dṛśa; cp. dassa

Dasaka

(nt.) 1. a decad, decade, a decennial Ja iv.397; Dhs-a 316. khiḍḍā˚; the decad of play Vism 619; cakkhu etc. sense-decads Vism. 553; Comp. 164, 250; kāya˚ Vism. 588.

Dasana

a tooth Dāvs v.3 (d.dhātu, the tooth relic of the Buddha).

Sk. daśana to ḍasati

Dasā

(f.) & dasa; (nt.) unwoven thread of a web of cloth, fringe, edge or border of a garment DN i.7 (dīgha˚ long-fringed, of vatthāni); Ja v.187; Dhp-a i.180 Dhp-a iv.106 (dasāni) ■ sadasa (nt.) a kind of seat, a rug (lit. with a fringe) Vin iv.171 (= nisīdana); opp. adasaka (adj.) without a fringe or border Vin ii.301 = Vin ii.307 (nisīdana). -anta edge of the border of a garment Ja i.467; Dhp-a i.180 sq., 391.

Sk. daśā

Dasika1

(adj.) (-˚) to be seen, to behold, being of appearance, only in dud˚; or frightful app., fierce, ugly Si..94 & id. p. (q.v. under okoṭimaka); Ja i.504 (kodha, anger); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 90 (of Petas)-Note. The spelling is sometimes ˚dassika: AN ii.85 Pp 51; Pv-a 90.

Sk. dṛśika, cp. dassin

Dasika2

(adj.) belonging to a fringe, in dasika -sutta an unwoven or loose thread Vin iii.241; Dhp-a iv.206 (˚mattam pi not even a thread, i.e. nothing at all, cp. Lat. nihīlum = ne-fīlum not a thread = nothing) See also dasaka under dasā.

fr. dasā

Dassa

(-˚) to see or to be seen, perceiving, perceived Snp 1134 (appa˚ of small sight, not seeing far, knowing little = paritta-dassa thoka-dassa Nd ii.69). Cp. akkha˚ a judge Mil 114. -su˚; easily perceived (opp. duddasa) Dhp 252.

Sk ■ darśa; cp. dasa2

*Dassati1

to see, to perceive.

1. (pres.) base dakkh [Sk. drakṣ]: pres. (a) dakkhati Nd ii.428 (= passati), 1st dakkhāmi ibid. (= passāmi) 2nd dakkhasi SN i.116; Pv ii.113 (v.l. BB adakkhi) imper. dakkha Nd ii.428 (= passa) ■ (b) dakkhiti Snp 909 (v.l. BB dakkhati), 3rd pl. dakkhinti Vin i.16Snp p.15 (v.l. BB dakkhanti); DN i.46 ■ aor. addakkhi (Sk adrakṣīt) Vin ii.195; SN i.117; Snp 208 (= addasa Snp-a 257), 841, 1131; Iti 47; Ja iii.189; & dakkhi Iti 47; Iti 1st sg. addakkhiṃ Snp 938. Spelling also adakkhi (v.l. BB at Pv ii.113) & adakkhiṃ (Nd;2 423) ■ inf. dakkhituṃ Vin i.179 ■ Caus. p.p. dakkhāpita (shown, exhibited) Mil 119 ■ Der. dakkhin (q.v.).

2. (pret.) base dass (Sk. darś & draś): aor. (a); addasa (Sk. adarśat) Snp 358, Snp 679, Snp 1016; Ja i.222; Ja iv.2; Pv ii.323 (mā addasa = addakkhiṃ Pv-a 88); Dhp-a i.26; Pv-a 73 & (older, cp. agamā); addasā Vin ii.192, Vin ii.195; DN i.112 DN ii.16; Snp 409 (v.l. BB addasa), 910 (id.); Mil 24, Mil 1st sg. addasaṃ SN i.101; Nd ii.423 & addasaṃ Snp 837 (= adakkhiṃ Nd i.185), 1st pl. addasāma Snp 31, Snp 178, Snp 459, Snp 3rd pl. (mā) addasuṃ Pv ii.76 (= mā passiṃsu Pv-a 102). (b) addasāsi, 1st sg. addasāsiṃ Snp 937, Snp 1145; Vv 3552 (v.l. addasāmi), 3rd pl. addasāsuṃ Vin ii.195; DN ii.16; MN i.153 ■ (c) shortened forms of aor. are: adda Thag 986; addā Ja vi.125, Ja vi.126 ■ inf. daṭṭhuṃ Snp 685 (daṭṭhukāma); Ja i.290; Pv iv.13 (= passituṃ Pv-a 219); Pv-a 48, Pv-a 79; Vv-a 75 ■ ger. daṭṭhu (= Sk. dṛṣṭvā) Snp 424 (in phrase nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khemato) = 1098; 681 Expl. at Nd ii.292 with expl. of disvā = passitvā, etc. grd. daṭṭhabba (to be regarded as) DN ii.154; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 9 Pv-a 10, etc., Vism 464; & dassanīya (see sep.). Also in Caus. (see below) & in daṭṭhar (q.v.).;

3. (med ■ pass.) base diss (Sk. dṛś): pres. pass. dissati (to be seen, to appear) Vin i.16; Snp 194, Snp 441, Snp 688 (dissare), 956; Ja i.138; Dhp 304; Pv i.84; Pv-a 61 (dissasi you look, intrs.); ppr. dissamāna (visible) Pv-a 71, Pv-a 6 (˚rūpa), 162 (id.); Vv-a 78 (˚kāya); Mvu. vii.35, & der; dissamānatta (nt.) (visibility) Pv-a 103 ■ ger. disvā Snp 48, Snp 409, Snp 687 sq. Iti 76; Pv-a 67, Pv-a 68, etc., & disvāna Vin i.15; Vin ii.195; Snp 299, Snp 415, Snp 1017; Pv ii.87, etc., also a ger. form diṭṭhā, q.v. under adiṭṭhā ■ pp. diṭṭha (q.v.).

4. Caus. (of base 2) dasseti (Sk. darśayati), aor dassesi & (exceptional); dassayi, only in dassayi tumaṃ showed himself at Pv iii.24 (= attānaṃ uddisayi Pv-a 181) & iii.216 (= attānaṃ dassayi dassesi pākaṭo ahosi Pv-a 185). 3rd pl. dassesuṃ; ger. dassetvā; inf. dassetuṃ to point out, exhibit, explain, intimate Dhp 83; Ja i.84, Ja i.200, Ja i.263, Ja i.266; Ja ii.128, Ja ii.159; Ja iii.53, Ja iii.82; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 8 Pv-a 16 (ovādaṃ d. give advice), 24, 45, 73 etc ■ to point to (acc.) Pv-a 151 (sunakhaṃ), 257 (dārakaṃ) ■ to make manifest, to make appear, to show or prove oneself; also intr. to appear Ja ii.154 (dubbalo viya hutvā attānaṃ dassesi: appeared weak); vi.116; Pv iii.23 (= sammukhībhāvaṃ gacchanti Pv-a 181); Pv-a 13 (mitto viya attānaṃ dassetvā: acting like a friend) Mil 271. Esp. in phrase attānaṃ dasseti to come into appearance (of Petas): Pv-a 32, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 79, etc. (cp above dassayi) ■ pp. dassita.

Sk. *darś in dadarśa pref. to dṛś; caus. darśayati. Cp. Gr. δέρκομαι to see; Oir. derc eye; Ags torht; Goth. ga-tarhjan to make conspicuous. The regular Pāli Pres. is dakkhiti (younger dakkhati), a new formation from the aor. addakkhi = Sk. adrākṣīt The Sk. Fut. draksyati would correspond formally to dakkhati, but the older dakkhiti points toward derivation from addakkhi. This new Pres. takes the function of the Fut.; whereas the Caus. dasseti implies a hypothetical Pres. *dassati. On dakkhati, etc. see also Kuhn, Beitr. p. 116; Trenckner, Notes pp. 57, 61 Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 554

Dassati2

fut. of dadāti, q.v.

Dassana

(nt.)

1. Lit. seeing, looking; noticing; sight of, appearance, look. Often equivalent to an infinitive “to see,” esp. as dat. dassanāya in order to see, for the purpose of seeing (cp. dassana-kāma = daṭṭhu-kāma): [Bhagavantaṃ] dassanāya MN ii.23, MN ii.46; AN i.121; AN iii.381; Snp 325 ■ (a) (nt. “sight” DN ii.157 (visūka˚, looking on at spectacles) AN iii.202 (+ savana hearing); iv.25 sq. (bhikkhu˚) Snp 207 (muni˚, may be taken as 2, cp. Snp-a 256), 266 (= pekkhaṇa Kp-a 148); Dhp 206 (ariyānaṃ d., cp ariyānaṃ dassāvin), 210 (appiyānaṃ), 274; Vv 342 Vv-a 138 (sippa˚ exhibition of art, competition). (b) adj. as (-˚) “of appearance” (cp. ˚dasa) Snp 548 (cāru˚ lovely to behold); Pv-a 24 (bhayānaka˚ fearful to look at), 68 (bībhaccha˚).

2. Appld. (power of perception, faculty of apperception, insight, view theory; esp. (a) in combn ñāṇa-dassana either “knowing & seeing,” or perhaps “the insight arising from knowledge,” perfect knowledge, realization of the truth, wisdom (cp. ñāṇa): SN i.52; SN ii.30; SN v.28, SN v.422; MN i.195 sq., 241, 482 (Gotamo sabbaññū sabba-dassāvī aparisesaṃ ñ-d ˚ṃ paṭijānāti; id. ii.31); DN iii.134; AN i.220; AN ii.220; AN iv.302 sq.; cp. ñ-d-paṭilābha AN i.43 AN ii.44 sq.; AN iii.323; ñ-d-visuddhi MN i.147 sq. Also with further determination as adhideva -ñ-d˚ AN iv.428 alam-ariya˚; SN iii.48; SN iv.300; SN v.126 sq.; MN i.68, MN i.71, MN i.81 MN i.207, MN i.246, MN i.440 sq., AN i.9; AN iii.64, AN iii.430; AN v.88; parisuddha AN iii.125; maggāmagga˚; AN v.47; yathābhūta˚; AN iii.19 AN iii.200; AN iv.99, AN iv.336; AN v.2 sq., 311 sq.; vimutti˚; SN i.139 SN v.67; AN iii.12, AN iii.81, AN iii.134; AN iv.99, AN iv.336; AN v.130; Iti 107, Iti 108; Mil 338. See also vimutti ■ (b) in other contexts: ariyasaccāna-dassana Snp 267; ujubhūta˚ SN v.384, SN v.404 dhamma˚ (the right doctrine) SN v.204, SN v.344, SN v.404; AN iii.263; pāpa˚ (a sinful view) Pv iv.355; viparīta AN iii.114; AN iv.226; AN v.284 sq. (and a˚), 293 sq. sammā (right view) SN iii.189; AN iii.138; AN iv.290; AN v.199; sabbalokena d. SN iv.127; sahetu d. SN v.126 sq.; suvisuddha d. SN iv.191SN iii.28, SN iii.49; MN ii.46; MN iii.157; Snp 989 (wisdom: Jinānaṃ eta d. corresponding with ñāṇa in preceding line); Dhs 584, Dhs 1002 (insight: cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 256) ■ (adj.) perceiving or having a view (cp dasseti) SN i.181 (visuddha˚); Thag 422 ■ (c) as nt. from the Caus. dasseti: pointing out, showing; implication definition, statement (in Com. style) Pv-a 72 often as ˚ākāra -dassana: Pv-a 26 (dātabba˚), 27 (thomana˚), 35 (kata˚) & in; dassanatthaṃ in order to point out, meaning by this, etc. Pv-a 9, Pv-a 68.

3. adassana not seeing SN i.168 = Snp 459; invisibility Ja iv.496 (˚ṃ vajjati to become invisible); wrong theory or view AN v.145 sq.; Snp 206; Pp 21.

-anuttariya (nt.) the pre-eminence or importance of (right or perfect) insight; as one of the 3 anuttariyāni viz. d˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutta˚ at DN iii.219, DN iii.250, DN iii.281; AN iii.284, AN iii.325; -kāma (adj.) desirous of seeing AN i.150 AN iv.115; Mil 23; -bhūmi the level or plane of insight Ne 8, Ne 14, Ne 50; -sampanna endowed with right insight SN ii.43 sq., 58.

Sk. darśana, see dassati1

Dassanīya

(adj.) fair to behold, beautiful good-looking (= dassituṃ yutta DN-a i.141), often in formula abhirūpa d. pāsādika paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgəta to express matchless physical beauty: DN i.114; SN ii.279; Pv-a 46 etc. Also with abhirūpa & pāsādika alone of anything fair & beautiful DN i.47Vin iv.18; SN i.95; Ja iii.394; Pp 52, Pp 66; DN-a i.281; Pv-a 44 (= subha), 51 (= rucira) ■ Comparative dassanīyatara SN i.237; Sdhp 325: Dhp-a i.119.

Sk. darśanīya; grd. formation of dassana, also as dassaneyya

Dassaneyya

(adj.) = dassanīya Ja v.203 (bhusa˚).

Dassāvitā

(f.) seeing, sight (-˚) Mil 140 (guṇavisesa˚).

abstr. to dassāvin

Dassāvin

(adj.-n.) full of insight, seeing, perceiving, taking notice of. In combn with ˚ñū (knowing) it plays the part of an additional emphasis to the 1st term = knowing & seeing i.e. having complete or highest knowledge of, gifted with “clear” sight or intuition (see jānāti passati & cp. ñāṇa-dassana).; (a) As adj ■ ˚: seeing, being aware of, realizing; anicca SN iii.1; ādīnava˚ SN ii.194; SN iv.332; MN i.173; AN v.181 sq. pariyanta˚ AN v.50 sq.; bhaya˚ SN v.187: Iti 96; esp. in phrase anumattesu vajjesu bhaya˚ DN i.63 = Iti 118 (cp bhaya-dassin); lokavajjabhaya˚ SN i.138; sabba˚; (+ sabbaññū) MN i.482 (samaṇo Gotamo s˚ s˚); ii.31; Mil 74 (Buddho s˚ s˚); cp. Mvu iii.51 sarvadarśāvin; sāra˚ Vin ii.139 ■ (b) (n.) one who sees or takes notice of in phrase ariyānaṃ dassāvī (+ sappurisānaṃ dassāvī kovido) MN i.8; SN iii.4; opp. adassāvī one who disregards the Noble Ones SN iii.3, SN iii.113; MN iii.17; Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs-a 350).

Sk. *darśavant

Dassika

(-˚): see dasika1.

Dassita1

shown, exhibited, performed Vin iv.365; Ja i.330. Cp. san˚.

Sk. darśita, pp. of dasseti1

Dassita2

at Ja vi.579 accord. to Kern (Toev. p. 114) = Sk. daṃśita mailed, armed.

Dassin

(-˚) (adj.) seeing, finding, realizing, perceiving. Only in cpds., like attha˚ Snp 385; ananta SN i.143; ādīnava˚ Sdhp 409; ekanga˚ Ud 69; jātikkhaya˚ Snp 209; Iti 40; ñāṇa˚ Snp 478 (= sacchikatasabbaññuta-ñāṇa Snp-a 411; cp. dassāvin); tīra˚ SN iii.164 sq.; AN iii.368, cp. tīra-dakkhin; dīgha˚ (= sabbadassāvin) Pv-a 196; bhaya˚ Dhp 31 (˚dassivā = dassī vā?), 317; Iti 40; DN-a i.181 (= bhaya dassāvin); viveka Snp 474, Snp 851.

Sk. ˚darśin

Dassimant

see attha˚.

Dassu

enemy, foe; robber, in dassukhīla robber-plague DN i.135, DN i.136 (= corakhīla DN-a i.296).

Sk. dasyu, cp. dāsa

Dassetar

one who shows or points out, a guide, instructor, teacher AN i.62 AN i.132 = Iti 110.

Sk. darśayitṛ, n. agent to dasseti

Dasseti

Caus. of dassati1 (q.v.).

Dasso

n. pl. of dāsī.

Daha

a lake DN i.45 (udaka˚); Ja i.50; Ja ii.104; Ja v.412; Mil 259; Pv-a 152; Dpvs i.44.

Sk. draha, through metathesis fr. hrada, hlād, see hilādate

Dahati1

(dahate) to put, place; take for (acc or abl.), assume, claim, consider DN i.92 (okkākaṃ pitāmahaṃ = ṭhapeti DN-a i.258); SN iii.113 (mittato daheyya) AN iv.239 (cittaṃ d. fix the mind on); Snp 825 (bālaṃ dahanti mithu aññamaññaṃ = passanti dakkhanti, etc Nd i.163). Pass dhīyati (q.v.); grd. dheyya (q.v.). Note. dahati is more frequent in combn with prefixes compositions like ā˚, upa˚, pari˚, sad˚, san˚, samā˚, etc pp.; hita.

Sk. dadhāti to put down, set up; *dhe = Gr. τίχημι, Lat. facio, Ohg. tuon, Ags. dōn E. to do. See also dhātu

Dahati2

= ḍahati to burn; as dahate Pv ii.98 (= dahati vināseti Pv-a 116).

Dahana

fire Vism 338 (˚kicca); Thag-a 256; Dāvs v.6; Sdhp 20.

Sk. dahana, to dahati, orig. “the burner”

Dahara

(adj.) small, little delicate, young; a young boy, youth, lad DN i.80, DN i.115; SN i.131; SN ii.279 (daharo ce pi paññavā); MN i.82; MN ii.19 MN ii.66; AN v.300; Snp 216, Snp 420 (yuvā + ), 578 (d. ca mahantā ye bālā ye ca paṇḍitā sabbe maccuvasaṃ yanti); Ja i.88 (daharadahare dārake ca dārikāyo), 291 (˚itthī a young wife); ii.160, 353; iii.393; Dhp 382; Pv iv.150 (yuvā) Dhp-a i.397 (sāmaṇera); DN-a i.197 (bhikkhū), 223 (= taruṇa), 284 (id.); Pv-a 148; Vv-a 76; Thag-a 239, Thag-a 251 Opposed to mahallaka Ja iv.482; to vuḍḍha Vism 100. f. daharā Vv 315 (young wife) (+ yuvā Vv-a 129); daharī Ja iv.35; Ja v.521; Mil 48 (dārikā).

Sk. dahara & dahra for dabhra to dabhnoti to be or make short or deficient, to deceive

Daharaka

= dahara, young Mil 310 ■ f. ˚ikā a young girl Thig 464, Thig 483.

Dāṭhā

(f.) a large tooth, fang, tusk; as adj. (-˚) having tusks or fangs DN ii.18 (susukkha˚); Ja i.505 (uddhaṭa-dāṭho viya sappo); iv.245 (nikkhanta˚); Dhp-a i.215; Pv-a 152 (kaṭhina˚); Sdhp 286.

-āvudha [Sk. daṃṣṭrāyudha] using a tusk as his weapon Ja v.172; -danta a canine tooth Kp-a 44; -balin one whose strength lies in his teeth (of a lion) Snp 72.

Sk. daṃṣṭrā to ḍasati (q.v.), cp. also daṭṭha

Dāṭhikā

(f.) beard, whiskers Vin ii.134 (na d. ṭhapetabbā, of the bhikkhus) Ja i.305; Ja v.42 (tamba˚), 217 (mahā˚ having great whiskers); DN-a i.263 (parūḷha-massu˚ with beard whiskers grown long).;

Sk. *dāḍhikā = Prk. for daṃṣṭrikā

Dāṭhin

(adj.) having tusks Ja ii.245; Ja iv.348; Thag p.1; Sdhp 286.

cp. Sk. daṃṣṭrin

Dātar

a giver, a generous person Pgdp 50adātā one who does not give, a miser Pv ii.82; otherwise as na dātā (hoti) AN ii.203; Iti 65.

Sk. dāṭr, n. ag. of dadāti to give; cp. Gr. δώτωρ & δοτήρ

Dātta

(nt.) sickle, scythe Mil 33.;

Sk. dātra, to , Sk. dāti, dyati to cut, divide, deal out; cp. Gr. δατέομαι, δαίομαι & see dāna, dāpeti dāyati

Dāna

(nt.) (a) giving, dealing out, gift; almsgiving liberality, munificence; esp. a charitable gift to a bhikkhu or to the community of bhikkhus, the Sangha (cp. deyyadhamma & yañña). As such it constitutes a meritorious act (puññaṃ) and heads the list of these, as enumerated in order, dānamaya puññaṃ, sīlamaya p. bhāvanāmaya p. viz. acts of merit consisting of munificence good character & meditation (D iii.218 e.g. cp. cāga, puñña, sīla). Thus in formula dānâdīni puññāni katvā Ja i.168; Pv-a 66, Pv-a 105; cp. cpds. under ˚maya ■ (b) Special merit & importance is attached to the; mahādāna the great gift, i.e. the great offering (of gifts to the Sangha), in character the buddhistic equivalent of the brahmanic mahāyajña the chief sacrifice. On 16 Mahādānas see Wilson Hindu Caste 413; on 4 Beal. Chinese Texts 88 ■ AN iv.246; Ja i.50 Ja i.74; Ja v.383 (devasikaṃ chasatasahassa-pariccāgaṃ karonto mahādānaṃ pavattesi “he gave the great largesse spending daily 600,000 pieces”); Pv-a 19, Pv-a 22, Pv-a 75 Pv-a 127, etc ■ (c) Constituents, qualities & characteristics of a dāna: 8 objects suitable for gifts form a standard set (also enum;d as 10), viz. anna pāna vattha yāna mālā gandha-vilepana seyyāvasatha padīpeyya (bread water, clothes, vehicle, garlands, scented ointment conveniences for lying down & dwelliṅg, lightiṅg facility) AN iv.239; cp. Pv ii.49 & see ˚vatthu & deyyadhamma; Eight ways of giving alms at DN iii.258; AN iv.236, five ways, called sappurisa-dāna (& asapp˚) at AN iii.171 sq.; eight sapp˚ at AN iv.243. Five manners of almsgiving metaphorically for sīlas 1–⁠5 at AN iv.246; DN-a i.306. Five characteristics of a beneficial gift at AN iii.172, viz. saddhāya dānaṃ deti, sakkaccaṃ d.d. kālena (cp. kāladāna AN iii.41), anuggahitacitto, attānañ ca parañ ca anupahacca d.d ■ (d) Various passages showing practice & value of dāna: Vin i.236; DN i.53 (+ dama & saṃyama; cp. Iti 15; Pv-a 276); ii.356 sq (sakkaccaṃ & a˚); AN iv.392 sq. (id.); DN iii.147 sq. 190 sq., 232; SN i.98 (dānaṃ dātabbaṃ yattha cittaṃ pasīdati); AN i.91 = Iti 98 (āmisa˚ and dhamma˚, material & spiritual gifts); AN i.161; AN iii.41 (dāne ānisaṃsā) iv.60; 237 sq. (mahapphala), 392 sq. (˚ssa vipāka) v.269 (petānaṃ upakappati); Ja i.8 (aggaḷa˚); ii.112 (dinna˚), iii.52 (id.); Snp 263, Snp 713 (appaṃ dānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ) Pv-a 54 (āgantuka˚ gift for the newcomer); Sdhp 211

213 ■ adāna withholding a gift neglect of liberality, stinginess Pv ii.945; Mil 279; Pv-a 25; cp. ˚sīla under cpds.: atidāna excessive almsgiving Pv ii.945 (cp. Pv-a 129); Mil 277.

-agga [Sk. dānāgara, cp. bhattagga, salākagga; see Trenckner, Notes p. 56] a house where alms or donations are given, a store-house of gifts, fig. a source or giver of gifts, a horn of plenty Ja vi.487; Dhp-a i.152, Dhp-a i.189; Mil 2; Pv-a 121, Pv-a 124, Pv-a 127, Pv-a 141. A possible connection w. agga = āgra is suggested by combn dānāni mahādānāni aggaññāni AN iv.246; -ādhikāra supervision or charge of alms-distributing. Pv-a 124 (cp. Pv ii.927) -ānisaṃsa praise of generosity Pv-a 9; cp. AN iii.41 -upakaraṇa means or materials for a gift Pv-a 105 -upapatti (read uppatti at DN iii.258) an object suitable for gifts, of which 8 or 10 are mentioned (see above c AN iv.239 = DN iii.258; -kathā talk or conversation about (the merit & demerit of) almsgiving, one of the anupubbi-kathā Vin i.15, Vin i.18; -dhamma the duty or meritorious act of bestowing gifts of mercy (cp. deyyadhamma) Pv-a 9; -pati “lord of alms,” master in liberality, a liberal donor (def. by Bdhgh as: yaṃ dānaṃ deti tassa pati hutvā deti na dāso na sahāyo DN-a i.298) DN i.137 (+ saddho & dāyako, as one of the qualifications of a good king); AN iii.39; AN iv.79 sq (+ saddho); Snp 487; Pv i.114 (+ amaccharin); Ja i.199; Mil 279 sq.; Sdhp 275, Sdhp 303; -puñña the religious merit of almsgiving or liberality (see above a) Pv-a 73; -phala the fruit of munificence (as accruing to the donor) AN iii.39; AN iv.79; Pv ii.83 (˚ṃ hoti paramhi loke is rewarded in the life to come, cp. Iti 19); Pv-a 8 (cp Pv i.1); -maya consisting in giving alms or being liberal (see above a) DN iii.218 (puññakiriya-vatthu); Vb 135 (kusala-cetanā), 325 (pañña); Pv-a 8 (puñña), 60 (id.) 9 (kusala-kamma), 51, etc.; -vaṭṭa alms Ja vi.333 -vatthu that which constitutes a meritorious gift almsgiving, beneficence, offering, donation DN iii.258; AN iv.236; Pv-a 20 (= annapānādika dasavidha dātabbavatthu Pv-a 7); -veyyāvaṭika services rendered at the distribution of gifts Dhp-a iii.19; -saṃvibhāga liberal spending of alms DN iii.145, DN iii.169; AN i.150, AN i.226; AN iii.53 AN iii.313; AN v.331; Iti 19; Vism 306; freq. with ˚rata fond of giving alms SN v.351, SN v.392; AN iv.6 (vigatamalamaccherena cetasā), 266 (id.); -salā a hall, built for the distribution of alms & donations to the bhikkhus & wanderers Ja i.231, Ja i.262; Ja iv.402 (six); v.383 (id.); -sīla liberal disposition Pv-a 89; usually as adāna-sīla (adj.) of miserly character, neglecting the duty of giving alms Snp 244; Pv ii.83 (˚ā na saddahaṇti dānaphalaṃ hoti paramhi loke); Pv-a 45 (= adāyaka), 59 (+ maccharin) 68 (id.).

Ved. dāna, as in dadāti to give & in dāti, dyāti to deal out, thus: distribution (scil. of gifts); cp Gr. δάνος (present), Lat. damnum (E. damages); Gr δ ̈ωρον, Lat. donum; also Ags. tīd (= E. tide, portion, i.e. of time), & tīma (= E. time). See further dadāti dayati, dātta, dāpeti. Def;n at Vism 60: dānaṃ vuccati avakhaṇḍanaṃ

Dānava

a kind of Asuras or Titans, the offspring of Danu Ja iii.527; Ja v.89; Mil 153; Dpvs xvii.98.

Sk. dānava

Dāni

(adv.) now, Vin i.180; Vin ii.154; SN i.200, SN i.202; SN ii.123; SN iv.202; Ja ii.246; Mil 11, etc.

shortened form for idāni, q.v.

Dāpana

: see vo˚.

Dāpita

given, sent Pv-a 6; Mvu vii.26.

Sk. dāpayita pp. of dāpeti1

Dāpeti1

to induce somebody to give, to order to be given, to deal out, send, grant, dedicate Ja vi.485; Pv-a 46; aor dāpesi Ja iv.138; Dhp-a i.226, Dhp-a i.393 (sent); Pv-a 5 (id.), 31 fut. dāpessati Ja ii.3; Dhp-a 371. Cp. ava˚.

Sk. dāpayati, dap fr. (see dadāti & dayati) = deal out, spend, etc., cp. Gr.; δάπτω, δαπάνη (expenditure), δεϊπνον (meal); Lat. daps (id.), damnum (expense fr. *dapnom). See also dātta & dāna

Dāpeti2

to cause to run Ja ii.404.

Sk. drāvayati & drapayati, Caus. to; dru, see davati

Dāma

(nt.) a bond, fetter, rope; chain, wreath, garland SN iv.163 (read dāmena for damena), 282, (id.); AN iii.393 (dāmena baddho); Snp 28 (= vacchakānaṃ bandhanatthāya katā ganthitā nandhipasayuttā rajjubandhanavisesā); Vism 108. usually -˚, viz. anoja-puppha Ja i.9; Ja vi.227; olambaka˚ Vv-a 32; kusuma˚ Ja iii.394 gandha˚ Ja i.178; Vv-a 173, Vv-a 198; puppha˚ Ja i.397; Vv-a 198; mālā˚ Ja ii.104; rajata˚ Ja i.50; Ja iii.184; Ja iv.91 rattapuppha˚ Ja iii.30; sumana˚ Ja iv.455.

Sk. dāman to dyati to bind (Gr. δίδημι), *dé, as in Gr. δέσμα (rope), διάδημα (diadem), ὑπόδημα (sandal)

Dāya1

wood jungle, forest; a grove Vin i.10 (miga˚), Vin i.15, Vin i.350; Vin ii.138; SN ii.152 (tiṇa˚); SN iv.189 (bahukaṇṭaka d. = jungle) AN v.337 (tiṇa˚); Ja iii.274; Ja vi.278. See also dāva.

-pāla a grove keeper Vin i.350; MN i.205.

Sk. dāva, conflagration of a forest; wood = easily inflammable substance; to dunoti (to burn) caus dāvayati, cp. Gr. δαίω (to burn) & P. dava;1

Dāya2

a gift, donation; share, fee DN i.87≈(in phrase rājadāya brahmadeyya, a king’s grant, cp. rājadattiya); Ja iv.138; Ja v.363; Ja vi.346. Cp dāyāda & brahmadeyya.;

Sk. dāya, to dadāti, etc.

Dāyaka

(adj.) giving, bestowing, distributing, providing (usually -˚); (n.) a donor, benefactor; a munificent person MN i.236 sq. AN i.26, AN i.161; AN ii.64, AN ii.80; AN iii.32, AN iii.336; AN iv.81; Snp p.87; Iti 19 (ito cutā manussattā saggaṃ gacchanti dāyakā); Ja v.129 (kaṇḍa˚); Pv i.11 sq.; 12; 42; 55; DN-a i.298; Pv-a 113 (= dada); Mil 258 (˚ānaṃ dakkhiṇā); Sdhp 276 ■ f dāyikā Vin ii.216 (bhikkhā˚), 289 (khīrassa) ■ adāyaka a stingy person, one who neglects almsgiving (cp. adānasīla) Pv i.119; f. ˚ikā Pv i.93.

Sk. dāyaka, as in dadāti & dāna

Dāyajja

(nt.) inheritance Vin i.82; DN iii.189; AN iii.43; Ja i.91; Vism 43 sq.; dowry Ja iii.8 ■ (adj.) one who inherits Vin iii.66 (pituno of the father).

-upasampadā, lit. the Upasampadā by way of inh., a particular form of ordination conferred on Sumana Sopāka, both novices seven yrs. old Dhp-a iv.137.

Sk. dāyādya; see dāyāda

Dāyati

to cut, mow, reap, caus. dāyāpeti to cause to be cut or mowed Dhp-a iii.285.

Sk. dāti & dyāti; (dā) to cut, divide, etc.; cp. dayati, dātta, dāna

Dāyana

(nt.) cutting; ˚agga the first of what has been cut (on fields) Dhp-a i.98; ˚atthaṃ for the purpose of mowing Dhp-a iii.285.

see dayati

Dāyāda

heir MN i.86 = Nd ii.199; SN i.69, SN i.90; SN iv.72; AN iii.72 sq.; Ja iii.181; Ja vi.151; Kp viii.5. Often fig. with kamma˚; one who inherits his own deeds (see kamma 3 A b & cpds.): MN i.390 sq.; AN v.289; & as; dhamma˚; (spiritual heir) opposed to āmisa (material h.): MN i.12; Iti 101; also as dhamma˚ DN iii.84 as brahma˚; MN ii.84; DN iii.83adāyāda not having an heir SN i.69; Ja v.267. See dāyajja & dāyādaka.;

Sk. dāyāda = dāya + ā-da receiving the (son’s) portion, same formation on ground of sam̊e idea as Lat heres = *ghero + ē-do receiver of what is left: see Brugmann Album Kern p. 29 sq.

Dāyādaka

heir MN ii.73; Thag 781, Thag 1142; f. ˚ikā Thig 327 (= dāyajjarahā Thag-a 234).

= dāyāda

Dāyika

(adj.) = dāyaka Pv-a 157; Sdhp 211, Sdhp 229. -Dayin

-Dāyin

(adj.) giving, granting, bestowing Pv-a 121 (icchit’ icchita˚), 157 (= [kāma dada); Sdhp 214 (dānagga˚). Dara & Dara

Sk. dāyin, of dadāti

Dāra & Dārā

(f.) a young woman, esp. married woman, wife. As; dārā f. at Nd ii.295 (d. vuccati bhariyā & Iti 36; f. also dārī maiden, young girl Pv i.115. Otherwise as dāra (coll-masc.): Dhp 345; Ja i.120; Ja ii.248 Ja iv.7; Ja v.104, Ja v.288; Vv-a 299 (˚paṭiggaha) ■ putta-dārā (pl.) wife & children Snp 108, Snp 262; Ja i.262; cp. saputtadāra with w. & ch. Pv iv.347; putta ca dārā ca Snp 38 Snp 123. Freq. in definition of sīla No. 3 (kāmesu micchācārin or abrahmacariyā, adultery) as sakena dārena santuṭṭha AN iii.348; AN v.138; Snp 108 (a˚); Pv 177, etc- paradāra the wife of another MN i.404 sq.; Dhp 246 Dhp 309; Snp 396 (parassa d.) Pv-a 261.

Sk. dāra (m.) & dārā (f.), more freq. dārā (m.pl.); instr. sg. dārena Ja iv.7; Pv iv.177, etc. instr, pl. dārehi Snp 108 (sehi d. asantuṭṭho not satisfied with his own wife), loc. pl. dāresu Snp 38 (puttesu dāresu apekkhā), orig. “wives, womenfolk,” female members of the household = Gr. δοϋλος (slave; Hesychius δουλος = ἡ οἰκία; cp. also origin of Germ. frauenzimmer & E. womanhood). Remnants of pl. use are seen in above passage. fr. Sn.

Dāraka

a (young) boy, child, youngster; a young man. f. dārikā girl (see next) Vin i.83; Ja i.88 (dārake ca dārikāyo boys & girls); Ja ii.127; Ja vi.336; Pv i.127 (= bāla˚ Pv-a 65) Dhp-a i.99 (yasa˚ = yasa-kulaputta); Mil 8, Mil 9; Pv-a 176-Freq. as gāmadārakā (pl.) the village-boys, streeturchins Ja ii.78, Ja ii.176; Ja iii.275.

-tikicchā the art of infant-healing DN i.12 (= komārabhacca-vejjakamma DN-a i.98).

Sk. dāraka, cp. dāra & Gr.; δουλος (slave)

Dārikā

(f.) a young girl, daughter Ja iii.172; Ja vi.364; Mil 48, Mil 151; Pv-a 16 (daughter), 55 67, 68.

Sk. dārikā, see dāraka

Dāru

(nt.) wood, piece of wood; pl. woodwork, sticks AN i.112; Iti 71; Dhp 80; Ja ii.102; Ja iii.54; Ja vi.366; Dhp-a i.393; Pv-a 76 (candana˚) 141.

-kuṭikā a hut, log-house Vin iii.43; -kkhandha pile of wood Pv-a 62; -gaha a wood yard Vin iii.42 sq. -ghaṭika wooden pitcher Thag-a 286. -cīriya “woodbarked” Np, Dhp-a ii.35. -ja made of wood SN i.77; Dhp 345; -dāha the burning of wood SN i.169; -dhītalikā a wooden doll Vin iii.36, Vin iii.126; -patta a wooden bowl Vin ii.112, Vin ii.143; pattika one who uses a wooden bowl for collecting alms DN i.157; DN iii.22; DN-a i.319; pādukā a wooden shoe, a clog Vin ii.143; -bhaṇḍa wooden articles Vin ii.143 (specified), 170, 211; -maṇḍalika a wooden disk Dhp-a iii.180; -maya wooden Vv-a 8; Dhp-a i.192; -yanta a wooden machine Vism 595 -saṅghāta (-yāna) “a vehicle constructed of wood, i.e. a boat Ja v.194; -samādahāna putting pieces of wood together SN i.169.

Sk. dāru, *dereṷo (oak) tree; cp. Av. dāuru (wood) Gr. δόρυ (spear), δρυς (oak); Lat. larix (fr *dārix) = larch; Oir. daur (oak); Goth. triu, Ags. treo tree. Also Sk. dāruṇa, Lat. dūrus (hard) etc., Oir. dru strong. See also dabba2, dabbī & duma

Dāruka

(cp. dāru] a log SN i.202 = Thag 62 = Dhp-a iii.460; adj. made of wood Th 2. 390 (˚cillaka, a wooden post see Thag-a 257).

Dāruṇa

(adj.) strong, firm, severe harsh, cruel, pitiless SN i.101; SN ii.226; Snp 244; Dhp 139; Ja iii.34; Pv iv.36 (= ghora Pv-a 251); Mil 117 (vāta) Pv-a 24, Pv-a 52 (= ghora), 159 (sapatha a terrible oath ghora), 181 (= kurūrin), 221 (˚kāraṇa); Sdhp 5, Sdhp 78, Sdhp 286.

Ved. dāruṇa, to dāru (“strong as a tree”), cp. Gr. δροόν = ἰσξυρόν Hesych; Lat. dūrus; Oir. dron (firm), Mir. dūr (hard) Ags. trum

Dālana

see vi˚. Dalika & Dalima;

f. dalati

Dālikā & Dālima

in; ˚laṭṭhi a kind of creeper; equivalent to takkāri (?) Thig 297 (dālikā) = Thag-a 226 (dālikā & dālima).;

Sk. dālika the colocynth & dāḍima the pomegranate tree

Dāḷiddiya

(& daḷiddiya) (nt.) poverty DN iii.65, DN iii.66; AN iii.351 sq.; Ja i.228; Dāvs ii.60; Sdhp 78.

Sk. *dāridrya

Dāleti

see dalati.

Dāva

in ˚aggi a jungle-fire Ja i.213; Ja iii.140; Vism 470; Dhp-a i.281.

Sk. dāva, see dava1 & daya;1

Dāvika

(adj.) in piṇḍa˚, a cert. rank in the army (v.l. piṇḍa-dāyika) DN i.51 = Mil 331 (DN-a i.156: sāhasikamahāyodhā etc., with popular expl. of the terms piṇḍa & davayati).;

Dāsa

a slave, often combd w. f. dāsī. Def. by Bdhgh as “antojāto” (DN-a i.300), or as “antojātadhanakkīta-karamarânīta-sāmaṃ dāsabyaṃ upagatānaṃ aññataro” (ibid. 168) ■ In phrase dāsā ca kammakarā “slaves & labourers” Vin i.243, Vin i.272; Vin ii.154; as dāso kammakaro “a slave-servant” DN i.60 (cp. d. kammakara) ■ Vin i.72, Vin i.76 (dāso na pabbājetabbo the slave cannot become a bhikkhu); DN i.72; MN ii.68 (fig. taṇhā˚); Ja i.200, Ja i.223; Ja iii.343 (bought for 700 kahāpaṇas), 347; Pp 56; Pv-a 112.

-kammakara (porisa) a slave-servant, an unpaid labourer, a serf Vin i.240; AN i.206; DN iii.189; Dhp-a iv.1; -gaṇa a troop of slaves Pv iv.141; -purisa a servant Ja i.385; -porisa a servant, slave Snp 769 (cp. Nd i.11 where 4 kinds of d. are mentioned); -lakkhaṇa fortunetelling from (the condition of) slaves DN i.9.

Ved. dāsa; orig. adj. meaning “non-Aryan,” i.e. slave (cp. Gr. βάρβαρος, Ger. sklave = slave); Av. dāha a Scythian tribe. Also connected w. dasyu (see dassukhīla)

Dāsaka

= dāsa in ˚putta a slave, of the sons of the slaves, mentioned as one of the sipp’ āyatanas at DN i.51 (expl. by Bdhgh as balavasinehā-gharadāsa-yodhā DN-a i.157) ■ sadāsaka with slaves, followed by slaves Vv 324 ■ f. dāsikā a female slave (= dāsī) MN i.126; Ja vi.554.

Dāsabyatā

(f.) = dāsavya Sdhp 498. Dasavya & Dasabya;

Dāsavya & Dāsabya

(nt.) the condition of a slave, slavery, serfdom DN i.73; MN i.275 (b); Ja i.226; DN-a i.168 (b), 213; Dhp-a iii.35; Pv-a 112, Pv-a 152.

cp. Sk. dāsya

Dāsitta

(nt.) the status of a (female) slave Mil 158.

Sk. dāsītva

Dāsima

a species of tree Ja vi.536.

Dāsiyā

= dāsikā, a female slave Ja vi.554.

Dāsī

(f.) a female servant, a handmaiden a slave-girl Vin i.217, Vin i.269, Vin i.291; Vin ii.10 (kula˚), 78 iii.161; MN i.125; MN ii.62 (ñāti˚); Pv ii.321 (ghara˚); Pv-a 46, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 65 ■ Cp. kumbha˚.

-gaṇa a troop of slave-girls Ja ii.127; -dāsā (pl.) maid& man-servants Dhp-a i.187; freq. to cpd. d-d-paṭiggahaṇa slave-trading DN i.5≈(cp. DN-a i.78); -putta the son of a slave, an abusive term (gharadāsiyā va putto Dhp i.257; cp. Sk. dāsīsuta) DN i.93 (˚vāda); -bhoga the possessions of a slave Vin iii.136.

Sk. dāsī, cp. dāsa. Nom. pl. dasso for dāsiyo Ja iv.53; in cpds. dāsi˚

Dāha

see ḍāha.

Di˚

secondary base of numeral “2,” contracted fr. dvi: see under dvi B i.4.

Dikkhita

initiated, consecrated, cira˚ initiated long since SN i.226 = Ja v.138, Ja v.139 (where dakkhita q.v.; Com. cira-pabbājita).

Sk. dīkṣita “having commenced the preparatory rites for sacrifice”

Digucchā

(f.) disgust Dhs-a 210 (asuci˚).

= jigucchā; Sk. jugupsā

Dighacchā

(f.) hunger AN ii.117.

= jighacchā

Dighañña

(adj.) inferior, low, last, hindmost (i.e. westward) Ja v.24 (where the Com. seems to imply a reading jighacchaṃ with meaning of 1st sg. pot. intens. of ghas, but d. is evidently the right reading), 402, 403 (˚rattiṃ at the end of the night).

for jighañña = Sk. jaghanya fr. janghā

Dicchati

to wish to give, to be desirous of giving SN i.18, SN i.20 (dicchare 3rd pl.); Ja iv.64.

Sk. ditsati, Desid. fr. dadāti, base 4, q.v.

Dija

see under dvi B i.4.

Diṭṭha1

1. seen; a˚ not seen DN i.222 (a˚ + avedita asacchikata); MN i.3 sq. (diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhato sañjānāti); Snp 147 (diṭṭhā vā ye vā addiṭṭhā) 995 (na me diṭṭho ito pubbe na ssuto… Satthā) Ja ii.154; Ja iii.278; Pv i.23 (sāmaṃ d. = seen by yourself) 33 (id.) ■ nt. diṭṭhaṃ a vision Ja iii.416 ■ Since sight is the principal sense of perception as well as of apperception (cp. cakkhu), that which is seen is the chief representation of any sense-impression, & diṭṭha combd with suta (heard) and muta (sensed by means of smell taste & touch), to which; viññāta (apperceived by the mind) is often joined, gives a complete analysis of that which comprises all means of cognition & recognition Thus; diṭṭha + suta stands collectively for the whole series Snp 778, Snp 812, Snp 897, Snp 1079; Pv iv.13; diṭṭha suta muta (see Nd ii.298 for detail & cp. diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena) Snp 790, Snp 901, Snp 914, Snp 1082, Snp 1086, Snp 1122 (na tuyhaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ asutaṃ amutaṃ kiñcanaṃ atthi = you are omniscient); d. suta muta viññāta in the same sense as Snp 1122 in “yaṃ sadevakassa lokassa d. s. m. v sabbaṃ taṃ Tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ” of the cognitive powers of the Tathāgata DN iii.134 = Nd ii.276; Iti 121; DN iii.232; Snp 1086, Snp 1122.

2. known, understood MN i.486; Snp 761; diṭṭha pañha a problem or question solved Ja vi.532. See also conclusion of No. 1

3. (adj.) visible, determined by sight, in conn. with dhamma meaning the visible order of things, the world of sensation, this world (opp. samparāyika dhamma the state after death, the beyond). Usually in cpds. (-˚) of this world, in this world ■ diṭṭhadhamma Vin ii.188; DN iii.222 sq.; AN i.249; AN ii.61; Nd ii.297 (= ñātadhamma); DN-a i.278; Sdhp 470˚abhinibbuta attained to Nibbāna in this birth AN i.142; Snp 1087 (see Nibbāna) ˚nibbāna earthly N. DN i.36; DN-a i.121; ˚sukhavihāra (& ˚in) happy condition (or faring well) in this world Vin ii.188; MN i.40, MN i.331, MN i.459; SN ii.239; Dhs 577, Dhs 1283; Dhs-a 296; ˚vedanīya to be perceived in this condition AN i.249, AN i.251; Pv-a 145 ■ Freq. in loc. diṭṭhe dhamme (in this world) Iti 17 (attha, opp. samparāyika attha) or diṭṭhe va dhamme (already or even in the present existence) DN i.156, DN i.167, DN i.177, DN i.196; DN iii.108; MN i.341 sq. 485; ii.94, 103; AN ii.155, AN ii.167; AN iii.429; Snp 141, Snp 343, Snp 1053; Iti 22, Iti 23, etc ■ In the same sense diṭṭhadhammika (adj.) belonging or referring to this world or the present existence, always contrasted with samparāyika belonging to a future state: Vin i.179; Vin iii.21; DN iii.130; AN i.47, AN i.98; Nd ii.26; Iti 16; Vv-a 149; Pv-a 131, etc.

-ānugati imitation of what one sees, emulation, competition SN ii.203; MN i.16; AN i.126; AN iii.108, AN iii.251, AN iii.422 Pp 33; Dhp-a iv.39; -āvikamma making visible or clear open statement, confession Vin v.183, Vin v.187 sq.; -kāla the time of seeing (anybody), opportunity Vv-a 120 -ppatta one who has obtained (Nibbāna) in this world Ne 190; -padā (pl.) visible signs or characteristics AN iv.103; -maṅgalika (adj.) of puccha, a question concerning visible omina. Ja iv.390; as ˚ikā (f.) Np at Ja iv.376 sq. Snp-a 185 sq. -saṃsandana Nd ii.447 = Dhs-a 55.

Sk. dṛṣṭa, pp. of *dassati

Diṭṭha2

(n.) an enemy Ja i.280; cp. Sk. dviṣat ■ (adj.) poisoned, in diṭṭhagatena sallena with a p. arrow SN ii.230; misreading for diddh-agadena, q.v. The Cy. has diddhagatena with v.l. dibba-gadena.

Sk. dviṣṭa, pp. of dveṣṭi dviṣ to hate

Diṭṭhaka

(adj.) seen, visible, apparent Dhp-a ii.53, Dhp-a ii.90.

= diṭṭha1

Diṭṭhā

(indecl.) exclamation of joy, hurrah! DN iii.73; Ja i.362.

Sk. dṛṣṭyā, instr. of diṭṭhi

Diṭṭhi

(f.) view, belief, dogma, theory, speculation, esp. false theory, groundless or unfounded opinion ■ (a) The latter is rejected by the Buddha as pāpa˚; (A iv.172) and pāpikā d. (opp bhaddikā: AN v.212 sq.; Iti 26): Vin i.98, Vin i.323; Dhp 164; Pv iv.354; whereas the right, the true, the best doctrine is as sammā d. the first condition to be complied with by anyone entering the Path. As such the sammā d is opposed to micchā d. wrong views or heresy (see b) Equivalent with micchā d. is kudiṭṭhi (late) Dāvs ii.58 ■ (b) Characterized more especially as: (a) sammā diṭṭhi right doctrine, right philosophy Vin i.10; SN ii.17; SN v.11, SN v.14, SN v.30 sq., 458 sq., MN i.315; MN ii.12, MN ii.29, MN ii.87 MN iii.72; Nd ii.485; Vb 104 sq. See magga ■ ujukā d SN v.143, SN v.165; ujugatā d. MN i.46 sq ■ (β) micchā d wrong theory, false doctrine SN i.145; SN ii.153 (caused by avijjā); MN iii.71; Dhp 167, Dhp 316; Nd ii.271iiib; Vb 361 Vb 389 ■ The foll. theories are to be considered as varieties of micchā d., viz. (in limited enumn) akiriyavāda SN iii.208; SN iv.349; aññaṃ aññena SN iii.211; antaggāhikā AN i.154; AN ii.240; AN iii.130; antānantikā DN i.22 sq. SN iii.214, SN iii.258 sq.; assāda˚; AN iii.447; ahetukavādā SN iii.210 ucchedavādā DN i.34; SN ii.20; SN iii.99; SN iii.110 sq.; bhava˚ SN iii.93; MN i.65; AN i.83; sakkāya˚; AN iii.438; AN v.144; Snp 231 (cp. Kp-a 188); Nd ii.271iiib (20 fold, as diṭṭhilepa); sassatavādā DN i.13; SN ii.20; SN iii.98, SN iii.213 sq. 258 sq ■ (c) Various theories & doctrines are mentioned & discussed at: Vin i.115; SN i.133; SN ii.61 sq. 75 sq., 222; iii.215 sq., 258 sq.; iv.286; v.448 (= DN i.31) DN iii.13 sq., 45, 246, 267; MN i.40; AN i.32; AN ii.252 sq. AN iii.132, AN iii.289, AN iii.349; Thig 184; Pts i.135 sq.; Pp 22; Dhs 392, Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 257 sq., 293, 325) Vb 145, Vb 245, Vb 341, Vb 393 sq.; Sdhp 13, Sdhp 333 ■ (d) Miscellaneous: 4 diṭṭhiyo at Vb 376; also at Vism 511 (sakkāya˚, uccheda˚, sassata˚, akiriya˚); 5 Vb 378 Vb 6 at MN i.8; Vb 382; Vb 7 at Vb 383; Vb 20 see under sakkāya˚; 62 under diṭṭhigata ■ In series diṭṭhi khanti ruci laddhi characterizing “diṭṭhadhamma” at Nd ii.299 & passim. Diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena in def. of a theory of cognition at Nd;2 300 as complementing taṇhā see taṇhā B 3. Coupled with vācā & citta in formula (taṃ) vācaṃ appahāya cittaṃ appahāya diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā… (nikkhitto evaṃ niraye) at SN iv.319; DN iii.13, DN iii.15; combd with (& opposed to) sīla (as pāpaka & bhaddaka) at Iti 26, Iti 27 ■ diṭṭhiṃ āsevati to hold a view MN i.323; ˚ṃ bhindati to give up a view Ja i.273 Dāvs ii.58.

-ānugati a sign of speculation Vin ii.108; SN ii.203 Pp 33. -ānusaya inclination to speculation DN iii.254 DN iii.282; SN v.60; AN iv.9; -āsava the intoxicant of speculation the 3rd of four āsavā, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, d.˚ avijjā˚ Vin iii.5; Nd ii.134; Dhs 1099, Dhs 1448; Vb 373 cp. ˚ogha; -upadānā taking up or adhering to false doctrines, the 2nd of the four upādānāni or attachments viz. kāma˚, d.˚, sīlabbata˚, attavāda˚ DN iii.230; Dhs 1215, Dhs 1536; -ogha the flood of false doctrine, in set of four ogha’s as under ˚āsava DN iii.230, DN iii.276; Nd ii.178 -kantāra the wilderness of groundless speculation Dhs 381, Dhs 1003, Dhs 1099, etc.; see ˚gata; -gaṇṭhi the web or tangle of sophisticism Vv-a 297; cp. ˚sanghāṭa; -gata (nt.) “resorting to views,” theory, groundless opinion false doctrine, often followed by series of characterizing epithets: d ■ gahana, ˚kantāra, ˚visūka, ˚vipphandita ˚saññojana, e.g. MN i.8; Nd ii.271iiib. Of these sophistical speculations 2 are mentioned at Iti 43, Pts i.129 Pts i.6 at Pts i.130; Pts i.62 (the usual number, expressing “great and small” sets, cp. dvi AN ii.) at DN i.12–⁠39 (in detail) SN iv.286; Pts i.130; Nd ii.271iiib; Ne 96, Ne 112, Ne 160. Vin i.49; DN i.162, DN i.224, DN i.226; SN i.135, SN i.142; SN ii.230; SN iii.109 SN iii.258 sq. (anekavihitāni); iv.286 (id.); MN i.8, MN i.176, MN i.256 sq. (pāpaka), 326 (id.), 426 sq.; AN iv.68; AN v.72 sq., 194 (pāpaka); Snp 649, Snp 834, Snp 913; Pp 15; Dhs 277, Dhs 339, Dhs 392 Dhs 505; Vism 454 ■ adj. ˚gatika adhering to (false) doctrine Dpvs vi.25; -gahana the thicket of speculation Dhs 381, Dhs 1003; see ˚gata; -jāla the net of sophistry DN i.46; DN-a i.129; -ṭṭhāna a tenet of speculative philosophy DN i.16; MN i.136; AN v.198; Pts i.138 (eight) Mil 332; DN-a i.107; -nijjhānakkhanti forbearance with wrong views SN ii.115; SN iv.139; AN i.189 sq.; AN ii.191; Nd ii.151; -nipāta a glance Vv-a 279; -nissaya the foundation of speculation MN i.137; DN ii.137 sq.; -pakkha the side or party of sophists Ne 53, Ne 88, Ne 160; -paṭilābha the attainment of speculation MN iii.46; -paṭivedha = prec DN iii.253; -patta one who has formed (a right or wrong view DN iii.105, DN iii.254; MN i.439; AN i.74; AN i.118, AN iv.10; AN v.23 -parāmasa perversion by false doctrine Dhs 1498 -maṇḍala the circle of speculative dogmatics Dhs-a 109 -vipatti failure in theory, the 3rd of the four vipattiyo viz. sīla˚, ācāra˚, d.˚, ājīva˚; opp. ˚sampadā Vin v.98; DN iii.213; AN i.95, AN i.268; Pp 21; Dhs 1362; Vb 361 -vipallāsa contortion of views AN ii.52; -visaṃyoga disconnection with false doctrine DN iii.230, DN iii.276; -visuddhi beauty of right theory AN i.95; MN i.147 sq.; DN iii.214 DN iii.288; -visūka (nt.) the discord or disunion (lit. the going into parties) of theories, the (?) puppet-show of opinion MN i.8, MN i.486; Snp 55 (= dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni), K S ii.44; Vv 8426; Pv iv.137; Nd ii.301 (= vīsati-vattukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi); cp. Nd ii.25 (attānudiṭṭhi); Dhs 381 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101), 1003, 1099. See also ˚gata; -vyasana failing or misfortune in theory (+ sīla˚, in character) DN iii.235 Nd ii.304; -saṃyojana the fetter or bond of empty speculation (cp. ˚anusaya) DN iii.254; AN iv.7 sq.; -saṅghāta the weft or tangle of wrong views (cp. ˚gaṇṭhi) Nd i.343 Nd ii.503; -samudaya the origin of wrong views AN iv.68 -sampadā success in theory, blessing of right views attainment of truth DN iii.213; DN iii.235 (opp. ˚vipatti), SN v.30 sq.; AN i.95, AN i.269; AN iii.438; AN iv.238; Pp 25; Dhs 1364; Vv-a 297; -sampanna endowed with right views SN ii.43, SN ii.58, SN ii.80; SN v.11; AN iii.438 sq.; AN iv.394; Vb 366 Dialogues iii.206, n. 10; -sārin (adj.) following wrong views Snp 911.

Sk. dṛṣṭi; cp. dassana

Diṭṭhika

(adj.) (-˚) seeing, one who regards; one who has a view MN iii.24 (āgamana˚ one who views the arrival i.e. of guests); SN ii.168 sq. (sammā˚ & micchā˚ hoḷding right & wrong theories); DN iii.96 (vītimissa˚). See añña˚, micchā˚, sammā˚.

Diṭṭhitā

(f.) the fact of having a (straightforward) view (uju˚) Mil 257.

fr. diṭṭhi

Diṭṭhin

(adj.-n.) one who has a view, or theory, a follower of such & such a doctrine Ud 67 (evaṃ˚ + evaṃ vādin).;

Diṇṇa

broken, split, undone, torn, as neg. adiṇṇa unbroken DN i.115 (so read for ādina-khattiya-kula; v.l. BB. abhinna˚); SN v.74 (so read for ādīna-mānaso, v.l. BB. adinā & SS ādina˚) Cp. also; ādiṇṇa.

Sk. dīrṇa, pp. of dṛ; dṛṇāti, see darī

Ditta1

blazing. Dāvs v.32. Usually in cpd. āditta.

Sk. dīpta, dīp; cp. dīpa

Ditta2

proud, arrogant, insolent; wanton Thag 198; Ja ii.432; Ja iii.256 = Ja iii.485; Ja v.17, Ja v.232 Ja vi.90, Ja vi.114.

Sk. dṛpta; cp. dappa

Diddha

smeared Ja v.425 sq.; esp. smeared with poison, poisoned Ja iv.435 (sara, a poisoned arrow); perhaps to be read at Iti 68 for duṭṭha (scil. sara) and at SN ii.230 for diṭṭha Cp. san˚.

Sk. digdha to dih, see deha

Dina

(nt.) day Sdhp 239 -duddinaṃ darkness Dāvs v.50 (d. sudinaṃ ahosi, cp i.49, 51); also as f. duddinī Vin i.3.

Sk. dina; Lat. nun-dinae (*noven-dinom); Oir. denus; Goth. sin-teins; cp. divasa

Dindibha

a kind of bird Ja vi.538.

cp. Sk. ṭiṭṭibha?

Dindima

(nt.) a musical instrument, a small drum Ja vi.580; Bv i.32. See also deṇḍima.

Sk. ḍiṇḍima, cp. dundubhi

Dinna

given, granted, presented etc., in all meanings of dadāti q.v.; esp. of giving alms Pv iv.326 (= mahādāna Pv-a 253) & in phrase adinn’ādāna taking what is not given, i.e. stealing, adj adinnâdāyin stealing, refraining from which constitutes the 2nd sīla (see under sīla) ■; dinna: DN i.55≈(n’ atthi dinnaṃ the heretic view of the uselessness of almsgiving); Ja i.291; Ja ii.128; Snp 191, Snp 227, Snp 240; Dhp 356; Pv-a 68 (given in marriage). Used as finite tense freq. e.g. Ja i.151, Ja i.152; Ja vi.366adinna: MN i.39, MN i.404; Snp 119 (theyyā adinnaṃ ādiyati), 156, 395, 400, 633; Pv-a 33 etc.

-ādāyin taking (only) what is given DN i.4; DN-a i.72 -dāna almsgiving Ja iii.52; Dhp-a i.396; -dāyin giving alms, liberal, munificent DN iii.191.

Sk. dinna, pp. of dadāti

Dinnaka

an adopted son, in enumn of four kinds of sons (atraja, khettaja, antevāsika, d.) Nd ii.448; Ja i.135 (= posāvanatthāya dinna).

Dippati

to shine, to shine forth, to be illustrious Vin ii.285. Cp. pa˚.

Sk. dīpyate, see under dīpa1 & cp. jotati

Dibba

(adj.) [Ved. divya = P. divya in verse (q.v.), Gr. δϊος (*Διvιος), Lat. dīus (*divios) = divine. Cp. deva of the next world, divine, heavenly, celestial, superb magnificent, fit for exalted beings higher than man (devas, heroes, manes etc.), superhuman, opp. mānusaka human. Freq. qualifying the foll. “summa bona” cakkhu the deva-eye, i.e. the faculty of clairvoyance attr. in a marked degree to the Buddha & other perfect beings (see cakkhumant) DN i.82, DN i.162; DN ii.20 (yena sudaṃ samantā yojanaṃ passati divā c’ eva rattiñ ca); DN iii.219; SN i.196; SN ii.55 sq.; MN ii.21; Iti 52; Thig 70; Pts i.114 Pts ii.175; Vism 434; Sdhp 482; Pv-a 5 (of Moggallāna) Tikp 278; Dukp 54. sota the d. ear, matching the d. eye DN i.79, DN i.154; Ja v.456; also as sotadhātu AN i.255; MN ii.19; DN iii.38, DN iii.281; Vism 430. rūpa DN i.153. Āyu, vaṇṇa etc. (see dasa ṭhānāni) AN i.115; AN iii.33; AN iv.242; Pv-a 9 Pv-a 89. kāmā Snp 361; Dhp 187; Iti 94; also as kāmaguṇā AN v.273. Of food, drink, dress & other commodities AN i.182; Ja i.50, Ja i.202; Ja iii.189; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 70, Pv-a 76 etc. Def. as devaloke sambhūta DN-a i.120; divibhavattā dibba Kp-a 227; divibhāvaṃ devattabhāva-pariyāpanna Pv-a 14 ■ See further e.g. SN i.105; DN iii.146; Snp 176, Snp 641; Dhp 236, Dhp 417; Pp 60; Vism 407 (defn) 423.

-osadha magical drugs Mil 283; -kāmā (pl.) heavenly joys (see above) Ja i.138 (opp. mānusakā); -cakkhuka endowed with the superhuman eye SN ii.156; AN i.23 AN i.25; -paṇṇākāra (dasavidha˚) the (tenfold) heavenly gift (viz. āyu, vaṇṇa etc.: see ṭhāna) Dhp-a iii.292 -bhāva divine condition or state Pv-a 110; -yoga union with the gods SN i.60; -vihāra supreme condition of heart Mil 225; -sampatti heavenly bliss Ja iv.3; Dhp-a iii.292; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 30.

Dibbati

to sport, to amuse oneself Vv-a 18 (in expl. of devī); to play at dice MN ii.106 (akkhehi).

Sk. dīvyati, pp. dyūta see jūta

Dirasaññu

(adj.) one who has little common-sense Ja vi.206, Ja vi.207 Ja vi.213, Ja vi.214. Com. expls wrongly on p. 209 with “one who possesses two tongues” (of Agni), but has equivalent nippañña on p. 217 (text 214: appapañña + ).

Sk. dara-saṃjña? See Kern, Toev. p. 118

Diva

(a) heaven Ja iv.134 (˚ṃ agā); Ja v.123 (˚ṃ patta); Pv-a 74 (˚ṃ gata) ■ (b) day Snp 507 (rattindivaṃ night day); Vv-a 247 (rattindiva one night & one day, i.e. 24 hrs.); Dhp-a ii.8 (divā-divassa so early in the day) Also in divaṃ-kara, daymaker, = sun, Vv-a 307; usually as divākara (q.v.). Cp. devasika; see also ajja.

-santatta heated for a whole day Ja iv.118 (cp. divasa˚)

Sk. diva (nt.), weak base diṷ (div) of strong form di̯ē (see deva) to *dei̯eṷo to shine; cp. Sk. dyo heaven divā adv. by day; Lat. biduum (bi-divom) two days

Divasa

(m; nt. only in expression satta divasāni 7 days or a week Ja iv.139; Mil 15) a day AN i.206 (˚ṃ atināmeti); Ja iii.52 (uposatha˚); Pv-a 31 (yāva sattadivasā a week long), 74 (sattamo divaso) Usually in oblique cases adverbially, viz. acc. divasaṃ (during) one day, for one day, one day long AN iii.304 AN iv.317; Ja i.279; Ja ii.2; Dhp-a iii.173 (taṃ d. that day) eka˚ one day Ja i.58; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 33, Pv-a 67 ■ gen. divasassa (day) by day SN ii.95 (rattiyā ca d. ca); Ja v.162; DN-a i.133 ■ instr. divasā day by day Ja iv.310; divasena (eka˚) on the same day Ja i.59; sudivasena on a lucky day Ja iv.210 ■ loc. divase on a day: eka Ja iii.391; jāta˚ on his birth-day Ja iii.391; Ja iv.138 dutiya˚ the next day Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 17, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 80 etc.; puna id. Ja i.278; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 38; sattame d. on the 7th day Snp 983; Mil 15; Pv-a 6; ussava˚ on the festive d. Vv-a 109; apara˚ on another day Pv-a 81. Also repeated divase divase day after day, every day Ja i.87; Pv-a 3. abl. divasato from the day (-˚) Ja i.50; DN-a i.140.

-kara the “day-maker,” i.e. the sun (cp. divākara Vv-a 169, Vv-a 271; -bhāga the day-part (opp. ratti˚ the night-part), day-time Mil 18 (˚ena); Pv-a 152 (˚ṃ) 206 (˚e = divā); -santatta heated the livelong day SN i.169; MN i.453; AN iv.70, cp. Vin i.225; Mil 325; cp diva˚

Sk. divasa; see diva

Divā

(adv.) by day SN i.183; MN i.125; Dhp 387; DN-a i.251; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 142, Pv-a 206 (= divasa-bhāge) Often combd & contrasted with; rattiṃ (or ratto) by night; e.g. divārattiṃ by day & by night SN i.47; divā c’ eva rattiñ ca DN ii.20; rattim pi divā pi Ja ii.133 divā ca ratto ca SN i.33; Snp 223; Dhp 296; Vv 314; Vv-a 128divātaraṃ (compar. adv.) later on in the day MN i.125; Ja iii.48, Ja iii.498atidivā too late SN i.200; AN iii.117.

-kara (= divaṃ kara) the day-maker, the sun Thag-a 70 (= Ap. v.16); Pv-a 155; -divassa (adv.) early in the day, at sunrise, at an early hour Vin ii.190; SN i.89, SN i.91 SN i.97; AN v.185; MN ii.100, MN ii.112; Ja ii.1; Ja vi.31; Dhp-a ii.8; Vv-a 239, Vv-a 242; -vihāra the day-rest, i.e. rest during the heat of the day Vin i.28, SN i.129, SN i.132, SN i.146, SN i.193 = Thag 1241; Snp 679; -saññā consciousness by day, daily c DN iii.223 = AN ii.45; -seyyā = ˚vihāra DN i.112.

Ved. divā, cp. diva

Divi˚

an abstraction fr. divya constructed for etym. expln of dibba as divi-bhava (˚bhāva) of divine existence or character, a divine being, in “divi-bhavāni divyāni ettha atthī ti divyā” Snp-a 219; “divi-bhavattā dibbā ti” Kp-a 227; “divibhāvaṃ devattabhāvapariyāpanno ti dibbo” Pv-a 14.

Divilla

a musical instrument Dpvs xvi.14.

Divya

(adj.) divine Snp 153 (cp. Snp-a 219 under divi˚), 524 (+ mānusaka); Ja vi.172 ■ (nt.) the divinity a divine being (= devatā) Ja vi.150; Snp-a 219.

Sk. divya; the verse-form for the prose-form dibba (q.v.)

Disa

an enemy Dhp 42, Dhp 162; Ja iii.357; Ja iv.217; Ja v.453; Th i.874–⁠6; cp. Pss. Breth., 323, n. i.

Sk. dviṣant & dviṣa (-˚); dveṣṭi & dviśati to hate; cp. Gr. δεινός (corynthic δvεινία, hom. δέδvιμεν fearful; Lat. dīrus = E. dire

Disatā1

(f.) direction, quarter, region, part of the world Ja iv.359; Pv ii.921 (kiṃ disataṃ gato “where in the world has he gone?”); Vv ii.32 (sādisatā the circle of the 6 directions, cp. Vv-a 102).

Sk. diśatā, see disā

Disatā2

(f.) state of being an enemy, a host of enemies Ja iv.295 (= disasamūha, v.l. as gloss: verasamoha).

Sk. *dviṣatā, see disa

Disati

to point, show; to grant, bestow etc. Usually in combn with pref. ā, or in Caus. deseti (q.v.). As simplex only at SN i.217 (varaṃ disā to be read for disaṃ cp. Sk. adiśat). See also upa˚.

Ved. diśati, *deik to show, point towards; cp. Gr. δείκνυμι (δίκη = diśā), Lat. dico (indico, index = pointer judex), Goth. gateihan = Ger. zeigen, Ags. taecan = E token

Disā

(f.) point of the compass, region quarter, direction, bearings. The 4 principal points usualy enumd are puratthimā (E) pacchimā (W) dakkhiṇā (S) uttarā (N), in changing order. Thus at SN i.101, SN i.145; SN ii.103; SN iii.84; SN iv.185, SN iv.296; Nd ii.302; Pv ii.126 (caturo d.); Pv-a 52 (catūsu disāsu nirayo catūhi dvārehi yutto), and passim ■ To these are often added the two locations “above & below” as uparimā & heṭṭhimā disā (also as uddhaṃ adho SN iii.124 e.g. also called paṭidisā DN iii.176), making in all 6 directions: DN iii.188 sq. As a rule, however, the circle is completed by the 4 anudisā (intermediate points; sometimes as vidisā: SN i.224; SN iii.239; DN iii.176 etc.), making a round of 10 (dasa disā) to denote completeness, wide range & all pervading comprehensiveness of states activities or other happening: Snp 719, Snp 1122 (disā catasso vidisā catasso uddhaṃ adho: dasa disā imāyo) Thig 487; Pts ii.131; Nd ii.239 (see also cātuddisa in this sense); Pv i.111; ii.110; Vism 408. sabbā (all) is often substituted for 10: SN i.75; DN ii.15; Pv i.21; Vv-a 184; Pv-a 71anudisā (sg.) is often used collectively for the 4 points in the sense of “in between,” so that the circle always implies the 10 points. Thus at SN i.122 SN iii.124. In other combinations as 6 abbreviated for 10 four disā plus uddhaṃ & anudisaṃ at DN i.222 = AN iii.368 four d. + uddhaṃ adho & anudisaṃ at SN i.122; SN iii.124; AN iv.167. In phrase “mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharati” (etc. up to 4th) the all-comprehending range of universal goodwill is further denoted by uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ etc., e.g. DN i.250 Vb 272; see mettā ■ As a set of 4 or 8 disā is also used allegorically (“set, circle”) for var. combinations viz. the 8 states of jhāna at MN iii.222; the 4 satipaṭṭhānā etc. at Ne 121; the 4 āhārā etc. at Ne 117. See also in other applications Vin i.50 (in meaning of “foreign country”); ii.217; SN i.33 (abhayā), 234 (puthu˚); iii.106; v.216; DN iii.197 sq.; Iti 103; Thag 874; Vv 416 (disāsu vissutā) ■ disaṃ kurute to run away Ja v.340. diso disaṃ (often spelt disodisaṃ) in all directions (lit. from region to region) DN iii.200; Ja iii.491 Thag 615; Bv ii.50; Pv iii.16; Mil 398. But at Dhp 42 to disa (enemy), cp. Dhp-a i.324 = coro coraṃ. See also J.P.T.S. 1884, 82 on abl. diso = diśatah. Cp. vidisā.

-kāka a compass-crow, i.e. a crow kept on board ship in order to search for land (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 173 E. Hardy, Buddha p. 18) Ja iii.126, Ja iii.267; -kusala one who knows the directions Vin ii.217; -cakkhuka “seeing” (i.e. wise) in all directions Ja iii.344; -ḍāha “sky-glow,” unusual redness of the horizon as if on fire, polar light (?) or zodiacal light (?) DN i.10; Ja i.374 Ja vi.476; Mil 178; DN-a i.95; cp. BSk. diśodāha Avs ii.198; -pati (disampati) a king SN i.86; Ja vi.45; -pāmokkha world-famed Ja i.166; -bhāga [Sk. digbhāga direction, quarter Vin ii.217; -mūḷha [Sk. diṅmūḍha one who has lost his bearings Dpvs ix.15; -vāsika living in a foreign country Dhp-a iii.176. -vāsin = ˚vāsika Dhp-a iv.27.

Ved. diś & diśā, to diśati “pointing out,” point; cp. Gr. δίκη = diśā

Dissati

Pass. of *dassati, q.v.

Dīgha

(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) long DN i.17; MN i.429; SN i.104 (˚ṃ addhānaṃ); Snp 146, Snp 633 (opp. rassa); Dhp 60 Dhp 409; Pv i.1011 (˚ṃ antaraṃ all the time); ii.955 (id.) Thag 646 (˚m-antare); Dhs 617; Kp-a 245; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 28 Pv-a 33, Pv-a 46. See def. at Vism 272 ■ dīghato lengthways Ja vi.185; dīghaso in length Vin iv.279; atidīgha too long Vin iv.7, Vin iv.8.

2. (m.) a snake (cp. Mvu ii.45 dīrghaka) Ja i.324; Ja ii.145; Ja iv.330.

3. Name of the Dīgha Nikāya (“the long collection”) Vism 96.

-aṅgulin having long fingers (the 4th of the marks of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.17; DN iii.143, DN iii.150; -antara corridor Ja vi.349. -āyu long-lived (opp. app’ āyu) DN i.18; Ja v.71. Also as ˚ka DN iii.150; DN-a i.135; Sdhp 511 -āvu = ˚āyu in the meaning of āyasmant (q.v.) Ja v.120 -jāti (f.) a being of the snake kind, a snake Dhp-a iii.322 also as ˚ka at Ja ii.145; Ja iii.250; Ja iv.333; Ja v.449; DN-a i.252; -dasa having long fringes DN i.7; -dassin [Sk dīrghadarśin] far-seeing (= sabba-dassāvin) Pv-a 196 -nāsika having a long nose Vism 283. -bhāṇaka a repeater or expounder of the Dīgha Nikāya Ja i.59 Vism 36, Vism 266, Vism 286; DN-a i.15, DN-a i.131; -rattaṃ (adv.) [Sk *dīrgharātraṃ, see Indexes to Avs; Divy & Lal. V. otherwise dīrgha-kālaṃ] a long time DN i.17, DN i.206; AN v.194; Snp 649; Iti 8; Ja i.12, Ja i.72; Pv i.44; ii.1311 (˚rattāya = ˚rattaṃ Pv-a 165); Pp 15; Dhp-a iv.24; -loma long-haired Vin iii.129; also as ˚ka at Ja i.484, f. ˚ikā SN ii.228; -sotthiya (nt.) long welfare or prosperity Dhp-a ii.227.

Ved. dīrgha, cp. Caus. drāghayati to lengthen, *dlāgh as in Gr. δολιξός (shaft), ἐνδελεξής (lasting etc.; cp. E. entelechy); Lat. indulges; Goth tulgus (enduring)

Dīghatta

(nt.) length AN i.54.

Sk. dīrghatvaṃ

Dīna

(adj.) poor, miserable, wretched; base, mean, low DN ii.202 (?) (˚māna; v.l. ninnamāna) Ja v.448; Ja vi.375; Pv ii.82 (= adānajjhāsaya Pv-a 107) iv.81; Mil 406; Pv-a 120 (= kapaṇa), 260 (id.), 153 Sdhp 188, Sdhp 324.

Sk. dīna

Dīnatta

(nt.) wretchedness, miserable state Sdhp 78.

Sk. *dīnatvaṃ

Dīpa1

a lamp Ja ii.104 (˚ṃ jāleti to light a l.); Dhp-a ii.49 (id.), 94 (id.)

-acci the flame of a lamp Thag-a 154; -āloka light of a l. Ja i.266; Ja vi.391; Dhp-a i.359; Vv-a 51;- (˚ṃ)kara making light, shining, illuminating Nd ii.399 (= pabhaṃ kara Snp 1136; but cp. Dhp 236 under dīpa2); Vism 203 -tittira a decoy partridge (cp. dīpaka˚) Ja iii.64; -rukkha lit. lamp-tree, the stand of a lamp, candlestick Dhp-a iv.120; -sikhā the flame (lit. crest) of a l. Vism 171; Dhp-a ii.49.

Ved. dīpa to Ved. , dīpyate; Idg. *dei̯ā to shine (see dibba, deva); cp. Gr. δίαλος, δ ̈ηλος; see also jotati

Dīpa2

(m. & nt.) an island continent (mahā˚, always as 4); terra firma, solid foundation, resting-place, shelter, refuge (in this sense freq. combd w. tāṇa lena & saraṇa & expl. in Com by patiṭṭhā)-(a) lit. island: S; v.219; Ja iii.187; Vv-a 19; Mvu vii.7, Mvu vii.41 ■ continent: cattāro mahādīpā SN v.343; Vv 2010 (= Vv-a 104); Vv-a 19; Pv-a 74 etc. Opp. the 2000 paritta-dīpā the smaller islands Kp-a 133 ■ (b) fig. shelter, salvation etc. (see also tāṇa): SN iii.42 (atta˚ + attasaraṇa etc., not with S Index to dīpa1); SN v.154, SN v.162 (id.) iv.315 (maṃ˚, not to dīpa1), 372; AN i.55 sq. (+ tāṇa etc.); Snp 501 (atta˚ selfreliant self-supported, not with Fausböll to dīpa1) 1092, 1094, 1145 (= Satthā); Nd ii.303; Dhp 236 (˚ṃ karohi = patiṭṭhā Pv-a 87); Pv iii.19 (id. Pv-a 174) Ja v.501 = Ja vi.375 (dīpañ ca parāyaṇaṃ); Mil 84, Mil 257 (dhamma-dīpa, Arahantship).

-ālaya resting place Ja vi.432; -gabbhaka same Ja vi.459, Ja vi.460.

Ved. dvīpa = dvi + ap (*sp.) of āpa water, lit. “double-watered,” between (two) waters

Dīpa3

a car covered with a panther’s skin Ja i.259; Ja v.259 = Ja vi.48.

cp. Sk. dvīpa tiger’s skin

Dīpaka1

(= dīpa1) (a) f. dīpikā a lamp, in daṇḍa˚ a torch Dhp-a i.220, Dhp-a i.399,-(b) (˚-) an image of, having the appearance of, sham etc.; in -kakkara a decoy partridge Ja ii.161; -tittira same Ja iii.358; -pakkhin a decoy bird Ja v.376; -miga a d. antelope Ja v.376.

Dīpaka2

(= dīpa2) a (little) island Ja i.278, Ja i.279; Ja ii.160.

Dīpaka3

in vaṇidīpaka Pv-a 120 for vanibbaka (q.v.).

Dīpana

(adj.) illustrating, explaining; f. ˚ī explanation, commentary, Name of several Commentaries, e.g. the Paramattha-dīpanī of Dhammapāla on Th 2; Pv Vv ■ Cp. jotikā & uddīpanā.;

Dīpika

a panther Ja iii.480.

fr. dīpin

Dīpita

explained Vism 33.

pp. of dīpeti

Dīpitar

one who illumines Vism 211.

n. ag. fr. dīpeti

Dīpin

a panther, leopard, tiger Vin i.186 dīpicamma a leopard skin = Sk. dvīpicarman); AN iii.101; Ja i.342; Ja ii.44, Ja ii.110; Ja iv.475; Ja v.408; Ja vi.538. dīpi-rājā king of the panthers Vism 270 ■ f. dīpinī Mil 363 Mil 368; Dhp-a i.48.

Sk. dvīpin

Dīpeti

to make light, to kindle, to emit light, to be bright; to illustrate, explain AN v.73 sq.; Dhp 363; Mil 40; Pv-a 94, Pv-a 95, Pv-a 102, Pv-a 104 etc.; Sdhp 49, Sdhp 349. Cp. ā˚.

Sk. dīpayati, Caus. to dīp, see dīpa1 & cp. dippati

Du˚1

(& before vowels; dur˚; ) (indecl.) 1. syllable of exclamation (= duḥ “bad, woe” (beginning the word du (j)-jīvitaṃ) Dhp-a ii.6, Dhp-a ii.10 = Pv-a 280, cp. Ja iii.47; Bdhgh’s expln of the syllable see at Vism 494.

2. prefix, implying perverseness difficulty, badness (cp. dukkha). Original form *duḥ is preserved at dur- before vowels, but assimilated to a foll. consonant according to the rules of Assimilation, i.e. the cons. is doubled, with changes of v to bb & usual lengthening; before r (but also du˚). For purposes of convenience all cpds. with du are referred to the simplex, e.g. dukkaṭa is to be looked up under kata, duggati under gati etc.

See: A. dur˚. akkhāta, accaya, atikkama, atta adhiroha, anta, annaya, abhisambhava; āgata, ājāna āyuta, āsada; itthi; ukkhepa, ubbaha ■ B. du˚; (k)kata, kara; (g)ga, gata, gati, gandha, gahīta (c)caja, carita, cola; (j)jaha, jāna, jivha, jīvita; (t)tappaya, tara; (d)dama, dasika; (n)naya, nikkhaya, nikkhitta niggaha, nijjhāpaya, nibbedha, nīta; (p)pañña paṭiānaya, paṭinissaggin, paṭipadā, paṭivijjha, paṭivedha pabhajja, pamuñca, pameyya, parihāra, payāta pasu, peyya, posa; (p)phassa; (bb = b): bala, balika budha; (bb = v): dubbaca = ) vaca, vacana, vaṇṇa vijāna, vidū, vinivijjha, visodha, vuṭṭhika; (b) bhaga bhara, bhāsita, bhikkha; (m)mati, mana, manku mukha, mejjha, medha; (y)yiṭṭha, yuja, yutta (du + r) = du-ratta, ropaya (dū + r): dū-rakkha; (l)labha; (s)saddhapaya, sassa, saha, sīla; hara.

Sk. duḥ & duṣ = Gr.; δύς-, Oir. du-, Ohg. zur-, zer-; antithetic prefix, generally opposed to su˚ = Gr. εὐ-etc. Ultimately identical with du2 in sense of asunder, apart, away from opposite or wrong

Du˚2

in cpds. meaning two˚; see dvi B II.

Du3

(-˚) (adj ■ suff.) hurting, injuring, acting perfidiously, betraying, only in mitta˚ deceiving one’s friends SN i.225; Snp 244 expl. as mitta-dūbhaka Snp-a 287, v.l. B mittadussaka; cp. mitta-dubbhika & mitta-dubbhin.;

Sk. druha, druh, see duhana & duhitika

Duka

(nt.) [see dvi B ii].a dyad Dhs-a 36, Dhs-a 343, Dhs-a 347, Dhs-a 406; Vism 11 sq. & in titles of books “in pairs, on pairs, e.g. Dukapaṭṭhāna; or chapters, e.g. Ja ii.1 (˚nipāta).

Dukūla

a certain (jute?) plant; (nt.) [cp. Sk. dukūlaṃ woven silk] very fine cloth, made of the fibre of the d. plant SN iii.145; AN iv.393; Ja ii.21; Ja iv.219 Ja v.400; Ja vi.72; Vism 257, Vism 262; Vv-a 165; DN-a i.140 Dāvs v.27.

Sk. dukūla

Dukkha

(adj.-n.) A. (adj. unpleasant, painful, causing misery (opp. sukha pleasant Vin i.34; Dhp 117. Lit. of vedanā (sensation) MN i.59 (˚ṃ vedanaṃ vediyamāna, see also below iii.1 e) AN ii.116 = MN i.10 (sarīrikāhi vedanāhi dukkhāhi). Fig. (fraught with pain, entailing sorrow or trouble) of kāmā DN i.36 (= paṭipīḷan-aṭṭhena DN-a i.121); Dhp 186 (= bahudukkha Dhp-a iii.240); of jāti MN i.185 (cp ariyasacca, below B I.); in combn dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā DN iii.106; Dhs 176; Ne 7, Ne 112 sq., cp AN ii.149 sq. ekanta˚; very painful, giving much pain SN ii.173; SN iii.69. dukkhaṃ (adv.) with difficulty, hardly Ja i.215.

B. (nt.; but pl. also dukkhā, e.g. SN i.23; Snp 728; Dhp 202, Dhp 203, Dhp 221. Spelling dukha (after sukha) at Dhp 83, Dhp 203). There is no word in English covering the same ground as Dukkha does in Pali. Our modern words are too specialised, too limited, and usually too strong. Sukha & dukkha are ease and dis-ease (but we use disease in another sense); or wealth and ilth from well & ill (but we have now lost ilth); or wellbeing and ill-ness (but illness means something else in English). We are forced, therefore, in translation to use half synonyms, no one of which is exact. Dukkha is equally mental & physical. Pain is too predominantly physical, sorrow too exclusively mental, but in some connections they have to be used in default of any more exact rendering. Discomfort, suffering, ill, and trouble can occasionally be used in certain connections Misery, distress, agony, affliction and woe are never right. They are all much too strong & are only mental (see Mrs. Rh. D.; Bud. Psy. 83–⁠86, quoting Ledi Sadaw).

I. Main Points in the Use of the Word.-The recognition of the fact of Dukkha stands out as essential in early Buddhism. In the very first discourse the four socalled Truths or Facts (see saccāni) deal chiefly with dukkha. The first of the four gives certain universally recognised cases of it, & then sums them up in short. The five groups (of physical & mental qualities which make an individual) are accompanied by ill so far as those groups are fraught with āsavas and grasping. (Pañc’ upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā; cp SN iii.47). The second Sacca gives the cause of this dukkha (see Taṇhā). The third enjoins the removal of this taṇhā. And the fourth shows the way, or method, of doing so (see Magga). These ariyasaccāni are found in two places in the older books Vin i.10 = SN v.421 (with addition of soka-parideva… etc. [see below in some MSS). Comments on this passage, or part of it, occur SN iii.158, SN iii.159; with expln of each term (+ soka) DN i.189; DN iii.136, DN iii.277; MN i.185; AN i.107; Snp p.140; Nd ii.under sankhārā; Iti 17 (with dukkhassa atikkama for nirodha), 104, 105; Pts i.37; Pts ii.204, Pts ii.147 Pp 15, Pp 68; Vb 328; Ne 72, Ne 73. It is referred to as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha, magga at Vin i.16, Vin i.18, Vin i.19; DN iii.227; Nd ii.304iib; as āsavānaṃ khaya-ñāṇa at DN i.83; Vin iii.5; as sacca No. 1 + paṭiccasamuppāda at AN i.176 sq. (+ soka˚); in a slightly diff. version of No. 1 (leaving out appiyehi & piyehi, having soka instead) at DN ii.305; and in the formula catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ananubodhā etc. at DN ii.90 = Vin i.230.

II. Characterisation in Detail.

1. A further specification of the 3rd of the Noble Truths is given in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.), which analyses the links & stages of the causal chain in their interdependence as building up (anabolic = samudaya) &, after their recognition as causes, breaking down (katabolic = nirodha the dukkha-synthesis, & thus constitutes the Metabolism of kamma; discussed e.g. at Vin 1; DN ii.32 sq = SN ii.2 sq.; SN ii.17, SN ii.20, SN ii.65 = Nd ii.680i.c; SN iii.14; MN i.266 sq.; MN ii.38; AN i.177; mentioned e.g. at AN i.147; MN i.192 sq., 460; Iti 89 (= dukkhassa antakiriyā). 2. Dukkha as one of the 3 qualifications of the sankhārā (q.v.), viz. anicca, d., anattā, evanescence, ill, nonsoul: SN i.188; SN ii.53 (yad aniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ); SN iii.112 (id.) iii.67, 180, 222; iv.28, 48, 129 sq.; 131 sq ■ rūpe anicc’ ânupassī (etc. with dukkh’ & anatt’) SN iii.41 anicca-saññā, dukkha˚ etc. DN iii.243; AN iii.334, cp iv.52 sq ■ sabbe sankhārā aniccā etc. Nd ii.under sankhārā.

3. Specification of Dukkha. The Niddesa gives a characteristic description of all that comes under the term dukkha. It employs one stereotyped explanation (therefore old & founded on scholastic authority) (Nd;2 304i.), & one expl;n (304iii.) peculiar to itself & only applied to Snp 36. The latter defines illustrates dukkha exclusively as suffering & torment incurred by a person as punishment, inflicted on him either by the king or (after death) by the guardians of purgatory (niraya-pālā; see detail under niraya, & cp below III. 2 b) ■ The first expl;n (304i.) is similar in kind to the definition of d. as long afterwards given in the Sānkhya system (see Sānkhya-kārikā-bhāṣya of Gauḍapāda to stanza 1) & classifies the various kinds of dukkha in the foll. groups: (a) all suffering caused by the fact of being born, & being through one’s kamma tied to the consequent states of transmigration; to this is loosely attached the 3 fold division of d. as dukkha˚, sankhāra˚, vipariṇāma˚ (see below III. 1 c)-(b) illnesses & all bodily states of suffering (cp ādhyātmikaṃ dukkhaṃ of Sānkhya k.) ■ (c) pain (bodily) discomfort through outward circumstances, as extreme climates, want of food, gnat-bites etc. (cp ādhibhautikaṃ & ādhidaivikaṃ d. of Sk.) ■ (d) (Mental distress & painful states caused by the death of one’s beloved or other misfortunes to friends or personal belongings (cp. domanassa) ■ This list is concluded by a scholastic characterisation of these var. states as conditioned by kamma, implicitly due to the afflicted person not having found his “refuge,” i.e. salvation from these states in the 8 fold Path (see above B I.).

III. General Application, & various views regarding dukkha.

1. As; simple sensation (: pain) & related to other terms: (a) principally a vedanā, sensation, in particular belonging to the body (kāyika), or physical pain (opp. cetasika dukkha mental ill: see domanassa) Thus defined as kāyikaṃ d. at DN ii.306 (cp. the distinction between śarīraṃ & mānasaṃ dukkhaṃ in Sānkhya philosophy) MN i.302; SN v.209 (in def. of dukkhindriya); AN ii.143 (sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā); Ne 12 (duvidhaṃ d.: kāyikaṃ = dukkhaṃ; cetasikaṃ domanassaṃ); Vism 165 (twofold), 496 (dukkhā aññaṃ na bādhakaṃ), 499 (seven divisions), 503 (kāyika) Snp-a 119 (sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā Snp 67 = kāyikaṃ sātāsātaṃ). Bdhgh. usually paraphrases d. with vaṭṭadukkha e.g. at Snp-a 44, Snp-a 212, Snp-a 377, Snp-a 505 ■ (b) Thus to be understood as physical pain in combn dukkha domanassa “pain & grief,” where d. can also be taken as the gen. term & dom˚ as specification, e.g. in cetasikaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti AN i.157, AN i.216 AN iv.406; SN ii.69; rāgajan d ˚ṃ dom ˚ṃ paṭisaṃvedeti AN ii.149; kāmûpasaṃhitaṃ d ˚ṃ dom ˚ṃ AN iii.207; d ˚ṃ dom ˚ṃ paṭisaṃvediyati SN iv.343. Also as cpd. dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthangamāya AN iii.326, & freq. in formula soka-parideva-d˚-domanass-upāyāsā (grief sorrow, afflictions of pain & misery, i.e. all kinds of misery) DN i.36 (arising fr. kāmā); MN ii.64; AN v.216 sq. Iti 89 etc. (see above B I. 4). Cp. also the combn dukkhī dummano “miserable and dejected” SN ii.282-(c) dukkha as “feeling of pain” forms one of the three dukkhatā or painful states, viz. d ■ dukkhatā (painful sensation caused by bodily pain), sankhāra id. having its origin in the sankhārā, vipariṇāma˚, being caused by change SN iv.259; SN v.56; DN iii.216; Ne 12 (d) Closely related in meaning is ahita “that which is not good or profitable,” usually opposed to sukha hita. It is freq. in the ster. expression “hoti dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya” for a long time it is a source of discomfort & pain AN i.194 sq.; MN i.332; DN iii.157 Pp 33. Also in phrases anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya DN iii.246 & akusalaṃ… ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattati AN i.58 ■ (e) Under vedanā as sensation are grouped the 3: sukhaṃ (or sukhā ved.) pleasure (pleasant sensation), dukkhaṃ pain (painful sens.), adukkham-asukhaṃ indifference (indifferent sens.), the last of which is the ideal state of the emotional habitus to be gained by the Arahant (cp. upekhā & nibbidā) Their rôle is clearly indicated in the 4th jhāna: sukhassa pahānā dukkhassa pahānā pubbe va somanassadomanassānaṃ atthangamā adukkham-asukhaṃ upekhā parisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati (see jhāna) ■ As contents of vedanā: sukhaṃ vediyati dukkhaṃ v. adukkham-asukhaṃ v. tasmā vedanā ti SN iii.86, SN iii.87; cp. SN ii.82 (vedayati). tisso vedanā sukha, d˚, adukkham-asukhā˚ DN iii.275; SN ii.53 SN iv.114 sq., 207, 223 sq., cp. MN i.396; AN i.173; AN iv.442; Iti 46, Iti 47. yaṃ kiñc’ āyaṃ purisa-puggalo paṭisaṃvedeti sukhaṃ vā d ˚ṃ vā a ˚ṃ vā sabban taṃ pubbe katahetū ti = one’s whole life-experience is caused by one’s former kamma AN i.173 = MN ii.217 ■ The combn (as complementary pair) of sukha + dukkha is very freq for expressing the varying fortunes of life & personal experience as pleasure & pain, e.g. n’ âlam aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā DN i.56 = SN iii.211. Thus under the 8 “fortunes of the world” (loka dhammā) with lābha (& a˚), yasa (a˚) pasaṃsā (nindā), sukha (dukkha) at DN iii.260; Nd ii.55 Regarded as a thing to be avoided in life: puriso jīvitukāmo… sukhakāmo dukkha-paṭikkūlo SN iv.172 SN iv.188 ■ In similar contexts: DN i.81≈; iii.51, 109, 187; SN ii.22, SN ii.39; SN iv.123 sq.; AN ii.158 etc. (cp. sukha).

2. As complex state (suffering) & its valuation in the light of the Doctrine: (a) any worldly sensation pleasure & experience may be a source of discomfort (see above, I.; cp. esp. kāma & bhava) Ps; i.11 sq. (specified as jāti etc.); dukkhaṃ = mahabbhayaṃ SN i.37; bhārādānaṃ dukkhaṃ loke bhāra-nikkhepanaṃ sukhaṃ (pain is the great weight) SN iii.26; kāmānaṃ adhivacanaṃ AN iii.310; AN iv.289; cp. AN iii.410 sq. (with kāmā, vedanā saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkhaṃ) ■ (b) ekanta˚; (extreme pain) refers to the suffering of sinful beings in Niraya, & it is open to conjecture whether this is not the first & orig. meaning of dukkha; e.g. MN i.74; AN ii.231 (vedanaṃ vediyati ekanta-d˚ṃ seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); see ekanta. In the same sense:… upenti Roruvaṃ ghoraṃ cirarattaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavanti SN i.30; niraya-dukkha Snp 531; pecca d˚ṃ nigacchati Snp 278, Snp 742; anubhonti d˚ṃ kaṭuka-pphalāni Pv i.1110 (= āpāyikaṃ d˚ṃ Pv-a 60); Pv-a 67; mahādukkhaṃ anubhavati Pv-a 43, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 107 etc. atidukkhaṃ Pv-a 65; dukkhato pete mocetvā Pv-a 8 ■ (c) to suffer pain, to experience unpleasantness etc. is expressed in foll. terms: dukkhaṃ anubhavati (only w ref. to Niraya, see b); anveti Dhp 1 (= kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ vipāka-dukkhaṃ anugacchati Dhp-a i.24), upeti Snp 728 carati SN i.210; nigacchati MN i.337; Snp 278, Snp 742; paṭisaṃvedeti MN i.313 (see above); passati SN i.132 (jāto dukkhāni passati: whoever is born experiences woe) vaḍḍheti SN ii.109; viharati AN i.202; AN ii.95; AN iii.3; SN iv.78 (passaddhiyā asati d˚ṃ v. dukkhino cittaṃ na samādhiyati); vedayati, vediyati, vedeti etc. see above III 1 e; sayati AN i.137 ■ (d) More specific reference to the cause of suffering & its removal by means of enlightenment:; (a) Origin (see also above I. & II. 1): dukkhe loko patiṭṭhito SN i.40; yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti sabbaṃ sankhāra-paccayā Snp 731; ye dukkhaṃ vaḍḍhenti te na parimuccanti jātiyā etc. SN ii.109; d˚ṃ ettha bhiyyo Snp 61, Snp 584; yo paṭhavī-dhātuṃ abhinandati dukkhaṃ so abhin˚ Si i.174; taṇhā d ˚ssa samudayo etc. Ne 23 sq.; as result of sakkāyadiṭṭhi SN iv.147, of chanda SN i.22 of upadhi SN ii.109, cp. upadhīnidānā pabhavanti dukkhā Snp 728; d˚ṃ eva hi sambhoti d˚ṃ tiṭṭhati veti ca SN i.135 ■ (β) Salvation from Suffering (see above I.): kathaṃ dukkhā pamuccati Snp 170; dukkhā pamuccati SN i.14; SN iii.41, SN iii.150; SN iv.205 SN v.451; na hi putto pati vā pi piyo d ˚ā pamocaye yathā saddhamma-savanaṃ dukkhā moceti pāṇinaṃ SN i.210 na appatvā lokantaṃ dukkhā atthi pamocanaṃ AN ii.49 Kammakkhayā… sabbaṃ d˚ṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ bhavissati MN ii.217, cp. i.93. kāme pahāya… d˚ṃ na sevetha anatthasaṃhitaṃ SN i.12 = SN i.31; rūpaṃ (etc.) abhijānaṃ bhabbo d-˚kkhayāya SN iii.27; SN iv.89; d˚ṃ pariññāya sakhettavatthuṃ Tathāgato arahati pūraḷāsaṃ Snp 473 pajahati d˚ṃ Snp 789, Snp 1056. dukkhassa samudayo ca atthangamo ca SN ii.72; SN iii.228 sq.; SN iv.86, SN iv.327 ■ dukkhass’ antakaro hoti MN i.48; AN iii.400 sq.; Iti 18 antakarā bhavāmase Snp 32; antaṃ karissanti Satthu sāsana-kārino AN ii.26; d ˚parikkhīṇaṃ SN ii.133; akiñcanaṃ nânupatanti dukkhā SN i.23; sankhārānaṃ nirodhena n’ atthi d˚assa sambhavo Snp 731 ■ muniṃ d˚assa pārayuṃ SN i.195 = Nd ii.136v; antagū ‘si pāragū d˚assa Snp 539 ■ sang’ ātiko maccujaho nirūpadhi pahāya d˚ṃ apunabbhavāya SN iv.158; ucchinnaṃ mūlaṃ d˚assa, n’ atthi dāni punabbhavo Vin i.231; DN ii.91.

-ādhivāha bringing or entailing pain SN iv.70; -anubhavana suffering pain or undergoing punishment (in Niraya) Ja iv.3; -antagū one who has conquered suffering Snp 401; -ābhikiṇṇa beset with pain, full of distress Iti 89; -āsahanatā non-endurance of ills Vism 325 -indriya the faculty of experiencing pain, painful sensation SN v.209, SN v.211; Dhs 556, Dhs 560; Vb 15, Vb 54, Vb 71 -udraya causing or yielding pain, resulting in ill, yielding distress MN i.415 sq.; AN i.97; AN iv.43 (+ dukkhavipāka); v.117 (dukh˚), 243; Ja iv.398; of kamma Pts i.80; Pts ii.79; Pv i.1110 (so read for dukkhandriya which is also found at Pv-a 60); Dhp-a ii.40 (˚uddaya) -ūpadhāna causing pain Dhp 291; -ūpasama the allayment of pain or alleviation of suffering, only in phrase (aṭṭhangiko maggo) d-ûpasama-gāmino SN iii.86; Iti 106; Snp 724 = Dhp 191;- (m)esin wishing ill, malevolent Ja iv.26; -otiṇṇa fallen into misery SN iii.93; MN i.460 MN ii.10; -kāraṇa labour or trials to be undergone as punishment Dhp-a iii.70 (see Dhp 138, Dhp 139 & cp. dasa;1 B 1 b) -khandha the aggregate of suffering, all that is called pain or affliction (see above B II. 1) SN ii.134; SN iii.93; MN i.192 sq.; 200 sq.; etc.;- khaya the destruction of pain, the extinction of ill MN i.93; MN ii.217 (kammakkhayā d-kkhayo); SN iii.27; Snp 732. Freq. in phrase (nīyāti or hoti) sammā-d-kkhayāya “leads to the complete extinction of ill,” with ref. to the Buddha’s teaching or the higher wisdom, e.g. of brahmacariyā SN ii.24; of paññā DN iii.268; AN iii.152 sq.; of ariyā diṭṭhi DN iii.264 = AN iii.132; of sikkhā AN ii.243; of dhamma MN i.72; -dhamma the principle of pain, a painful object, any kind of suffering (cp. ˚khandha DN iii.88; SN iv.188 (˚ānaṃ samudayañ ca atthagamañ ca yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti); Iti 38 (nirodha ˚anaṃ); -nidāna a source of pain MN ii.223; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; -nirodha the destruction of pain, the extinction of suffering (see above B II. 1) MN i.191; MN ii.10; AN iii.410, AN iii.416; etc. -paṭikkūla averse to pain, avoiding unpleasantness, in combn sukhakāmo d-p. SN iv.172 (spelt ˚kulo), 188; MN i.341; -patta being in pain Ja vi.336; -pareta afflicted by pain or misery SN iii.93; Iti 89 = AN i.147; -bhummi the soil of distress Dhs 985; -vāca hurtful speech Pv i.32 (should probably be read duṭṭha˚); -vipāka (adj. having pain as its fruit, creating misery SN ii.128; DN iii.57, DN iii.229; AN ii.172 (kamma); Pts ii.79 (id.); -vepakka = ˚vipāka Snp 537 (kamma); -saññā the consciousness of pain Ne 27; -samudaya the rise or origin of pain or suffering (opp. ˚nirodha; see above B II. 1) SN iv.37; MN i.191; MN ii.10; MN iii.267; Vb 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaṃ vuccati d-s.); -samphassa contact with pain MN i.507; Dhs 648; f. abstr. ˚tā Pp 33; -seyya an uncomfortable couch Dhp-a iv.8.

Sk. duḥkha fr. duḥ-ka, an adj. formation fr. prefix duḥ (see du). According to others an analogy formation after sukha, q.v.; Bdhgh (at Vism 494) expls dukkha as du + kha, where du = du1 and kha = ākāsa. See also def. at Vism 461.

Dukkhatā

(f.) state of pain, painfulness, discomfort, pain (see dukkha B III. 1 c) DN iii.216; SN iv.259; SN v.56; Ne 12 (expl.).

cp. Sk. duḥkhatā, abstr. to dukkha

Dukkhati

to be painful Vism 264.

fr. dukkha

Dukkhatta

(nt.) = dukkhatā DN iii.106 (+ dandhatta).

Sk. *duhkhatvaṃ

Dukkhāpana

(nt.) bringing sorrow, causing pain Mil 275 sq., 351.

abstr. to dukkhāpeti

Dukkhāpita

pained, afflicted Mil 79, Mil 180.

pp. of dukkhāpeti

Dukkhāpeti

to cause pain, to afflict Ja iv.452; Mil 276 sq.; Pv-a 215 ■ pp. dukkhāpita.

caus. to dukkha

Dukkhita

(adj.) afflicted, dejected, unhappy, grieved, disappointed miserable, suffering, ailing (opp. sukhita) DN i.72 (puriso ābādhiko d. bāḷha-gilāno); DN ii.24; SN i.149; SN iii.11 = SN iv.180 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); SN v.211; MN i.88; MN ii.66; Vin iv.291; Snp 984, Snp 986; Ja iv.452; Mil 275; Dhp-a ii.28; Vv-a 67.

Sk. duḥkhita; pp. of *dukkhāpeti

Dukkhin

(adj.-n.) 1. afflicted, grieved, miserable SN i.103 sq., 129 sq., ii.282 (+ dummano) iv.78; AN iii.57.

2. a loser in the game Ja ii.160.

Sk. duḥkhin

Dukkhīyati

to feel pain, to be distressed Dhp-a ii.28 (= vihaññati).

Sk. duḥkhīyati & duḥkhāyati Denom. fr. dukkha; cp. vediyati & vedayati

Dugga

a difficult road Dhp 327; Pv ii.78. dugge saṅkamanāni passages over difficult roads, usually combd with papā (water-shed) SN i.100; Vv 5222 Pv ii.925.

du + ga

Duṭṭha

(adj.-n.) spoilt, corrupt; bad, malignant, wicked Vin iii.118; SN ii.259 SN ii.262; SN iv.339; AN i.124 (˚âruka), 127 (id.), 157 sq.; Iti 68 (saro d., perhaps should be read as diddho); Ja i.187 Ja i.254 (˚brāhmaṇa); Ja iv.391 (˚caṇḍāla); Pv-a 4 (˚corā rogues of thieves); Sdhp 86, Sdhp 367, Sdhp 434aduṭṭha not evil, good Snp 623; Iti 86; Dhp-a iv.164. Cp. pa˚.

-gahaṇika suffering from indigestion Vin i.206 -citta evil-minded Vin ii.192; MN iii.65.

Sk. duṣṭha, pp. of dussati, q.v.

Duṭṭhu

(adv.) badly, wrong Dhs-a 384; Snp-a 396; Vv-a 337.

Sk. duṣṭhu, cp. suṣṭhu

Duṭṭhulla

(adj.) wicked, lewd Vin iv.128; SN i.187 (˚bhāṇin “whose speech is never lewd,” cp. Thag 1217 padulla gāhin, expld as duṭṭhullagāhin Psalms of Brethren 399 n. 3); MN i.435; MN iii.159; Vism 313 ■ (nt.) wicked ness Vin iii.21; kāya˚; unchastity MN iii.151; Thag 114 Vism 151.

-āduṭṭhulla that which is wicked & that which is not Vin v.130; -āpatti a grave transgression of the Rules of the Order, viz. the 4 Pārājika & the 13 Sanghādisesa Vin iv.31 (opp. a˚ Vin iv.32).

Dutiya

(num. ord.) [Sk. dvitīya, with reduction of dvi to du, as in compn mentioned under dvi B II. For the meaning “companion” cp. num. ord. for two in Lat secundus<sequor i.e. he who follows Gr. δεύτεροσ ̓ δεύομαι he who stays behind, also Sk. davīyas farther (a) (num.) the second, the following Ja ii.102, Ja ii.110 dutiyaṃ for the second time (cp. tatiyaṃ in series 1, 2 3) Vin ii.188; DN ii.155 ■ (b) (adj. n.) one who follows or is associated with, an associate of; accompanying or accompanied by (-˚); a companion, friend, partner Vin iv.225; SN i.25 (saddhā dutiyā purisassa hoti = his 2nd self); SN iv.78 (id.) i.131; Iti 9; Ja v.400; Thig 230 (a husband); Snp 49 (= Nd ii.305, where two kinds of associates or companions are distinguished, viz. taṇhā˚ puggalo˚). taṇhā-dutiyā either “connected with thirst” or “having thirst as one’s companion” (see taṇhā) SN iv.37; Iti 109 = AN ii.10; bilanga˚ kaṇājaka (rice with sour gruel) Vin ii.77; SN i.90, SN i.91adutiya alone, unaccompanied Pv-a 161.

Dutiyaka

(adj.-n.) (a) the second, following, next Ja i.504 (˚cittavāre); ˚ṃ a 2nd time MN i.83 ■ (b) a companion; only in f. dutiyikā a wife or female compn Vin iv.230, Vin iv.270 (a bhikkhunī as compn of another one); Freq. as purāṇa-dutiyikā one’s former wife Vin i.96; Vin iii.16; SN i.200; MN ii.63; Ja i.210; Ja v.152; Dhp-a i.77. Cp. Mvu ii.134 dvitīyā in the same sense.

Dimin. of dutiya

Dutiyyatā

(f.) companionship, friendship, help Ja iii.169.

Duddabha

see daddabha.

Duddha

(Sk. dugdha, pp. of duh, see dohati] milked, drawn Snp 18 (duddha-khīra = gāvo duhitvā gahitakhīra Snp-a 27); MN ii.186 ■ (nt.) milk Dāvs v.26.

Dudrabhi

a kettle-drum, in; Amata˚; the drum of Nibbāna Vin i.8 = MN i.171 (dundubhi at the latter passage); Pv-a 189 (v.l. for dundubhi).

another form of dundubhi, cp. duddabha & dundubhya

Dundubhi

(m. & f.) a kettle-drum, the noise of a drum, a heavy thud, thunder (usually as deva in the latter meaning) Pv iii.34; Ja vi.465; Pv-a 40, Pv-a 189 (v.l. dudrabhi) ■ Amata˚ the drum of Nibbāna MN i.171 = Vin i.8 (: dudrabhi); deva˚ thunder DN ii.156; AN iv.311.

Sk. dundubhi, onomat.; cp. other forms under daddabha, dudrabhi

*Dunoti

to burn, see der, dava, dāva & dāya.;

Dupaṭṭo

see dvi B II.

Dubbaṇṇa

see under vaṇṇa.

Dubbuṭṭhika

see under vuṭṭhi.

Dubbha

(& dūbha) (adj.) deceiving, hurting, trying to injure Vin ii.203 (= Iti 86 where dubbhe); Pv ii.93 (mitta˚). adubbha one who does not do harm, harmless Pv ii.98 (˚pāṇin = ahiṃsakahattha). As nt. harmlessness, frankness, friendliness good-will Vin i.347 (adrūbhāya, but cp. vv.ll. p. 395 adubbhaya & adrabbhāvāya); SN i.225 (adubbhāya trustily); Ja i.180 (id. as adūbhāya); spelt wrongly adrūbhaka (for adubbhaka, with v.l. adrabhaka in expl. of adubbha-pāṇin) at Ja vi.311. Note: dabhāya (dat.) is also used in Sk. in sense of an adv. or infinitive which confirms the etymology of the word. Cp. dobha.

Sk. dambha, see dubbhati

Dubbhaka

(adj.) perfidious, insidious, treacherous Thag 214 (citta˚). Cp. dubbhaya dūbhaka.;

Sk. dambhaka

Dubbhati

(& dūbhati) to injure, hurt, deceive; to be hostile to, plot or sin against (either w. dat. Ja v.245; Ja vi.491, or w. loc Ja i.267; Ja iii.212) SN i.85 (ppr. adubbhanto), 225; Iti 86 (dubbhe = dusseyya Com.) = Vin ii.203 (where dubbho) Thag 1129; Ja ii.125; Ja iv.261; Ja v.487, Ja v.503 ■ ppr. also dūbhato Ja iv.261; ger. dubbhitvā Ja iv.79; grd. dubbheyya (v.l. dūbheyya) to be punished Ja v.71. Cp. pa˚.

Sk. dabhnoti cp.; J.P.T.S. 1889, 204: dabh (dambh), pp. dabdha; idg. *dhebh, cp. Gr. ἀτέμβω to deceive. Cp. also Sk druh (so Kern, Toev. p. 11 s. v. padubbhati). See also dahara & dūbha, dūbhaka dūbhi

Dubbhana

(nt.) hurtfulness, treachery, injury against somebody (c. loc.) Pv-a 114 (= anattha).

Sk. *dambhana

Dubbhaya

= dubbhaka, SN i.107.

Dubbhika

= dubbhaka, Pv iii.113 (= mittadubbhika, mittānaṃ bādhaka Pv-a 175).

Dubbhikkha

see bhikkhā.

Dubbhin

(adj.-n.) seeking to injure, deceitful; a deceiver, hypocrite Ja iv.41; Pv ii.98 (mitta˚) Dhp-a ii.23 (mitta-dūbhin) ■ f. dubbhinī Vv-a 68 (so read for dubbinī).

Sk. dambhin

Dubha

(num ■ adj.) both; only in abl. dubhato from both sides Thag 1134; Pts i.69; Pts ii.35, Pts ii.181; Vv 4621; Vv-a 281 (for Vv 6419 duvaddhato).

See dubhaya & cp. dvi B II.

Dubhaya

(num. adj.) both (see ubhaya) Snp 517, Snp 526 Snp 1007, Snp 1125; Ja iii.442; Ja vi.110.

a contaminated form of du(ve) & ubhaya; see dvi B II.

Duma

tree AN iii.43; Ja i.87, Ja i.272; Ja ii.75, Ja ii.270; Ja vi.249, Ja vi.528; Vv 8414; Mil 278 Mil 347; Vv-a 161.

-agga 1. the top of a tree Ja ii.155.

2. a splendid tree Vv 354.

3. a tooth-pick Ja v.156; -inda “king of trees,” the Bodhi tree Dpvs i.7; -uttama a magnificent tree Vv 393; -phala fruit of a tree MN ii.74; Vism 231 (in comparison).

Sk. druma = Gr. δρυμός, see dāru

Duyhati

Pass to dohati (q.v.).

Dussa1

(nt.) woven material, cloth, turban cloth; (upper) garment, clothes Vin i.290 Vin ii.128, Vin ii.174; Vin iv.159. DN i.103; SN v.71; MN i.215; MN ii.92; AN v.347; Snp 679; Pv i.103 (= uttarīyaṃ sāṭakaṃ Pv-a 49); ii.314; Pp 55; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 75 ■ cīvara˚, q.v. chava˚ a miserable garment DN i.166; AN i.295; AN ii.206; MN i.78, MN i.308.

-karaṇḍaka a clothes-chest SN v.71 = MN i.215; AN iv.230 -koṭṭhagāra a store-room for cloth or clothes Dhp-a i.220 Dhp-a i.393; -gahaṇa (-mangala) (the ceremony of) putting on a garment Dhp-a ii.87; -cālanī a cloth sieve Vin i.202 -paṭṭa turban cloth Vin ii.266 (= setavattha-paṭṭa Bdhgh.); SN ii.102; -phala having clothes as fruit (of magic trees, cp. kapparukkha) Vv 462 (cp. Vv-a 199) -maya consisting in clothes Vv 467 (cp. Vv-a 199) -yuga a suit of garments Vin i.278; MN i.215 = SN v.71; Mil 31 (cp. Mvu i.61); Dhp-a iv.11; -ratana “a pearl of a garment,” a fine garment Mil 262. -vaṭṭi fringed cotton cloth Vin ii.266. -veṇi plaited cotton cloth Vin ii.266.

Sk. dūrśa & dūṣya

Dussa2

at Ja iii.54 is usually taken as = amussa (cp. amuka). C. expls as “near,” & adds “asammussa.” Or is it Sk. dūṣya easily spoilt? See on this passage Andersen Pali Reader ii.124.

Dussaka

= dūsaka (q.v.).

Dussati

to be or become bad or cor rupted, to get damaged; to offend against, to do wrong Vin ii.113; SN i.13 = SN i.164; Dhp 125 = Pv-a 116; Dhp 137; Iti 84 (dosancyye na d.) cp. AN iii.110 (dussanīye d.) Ja vi.9; Mil 101, Mil 386 ■ pp. duṭṭha (q.v.) ■ Caus dūseti (q.v.). See also dosa1 & dosaniya; & pa˚.;

Sk. duṣyati, Denom. fr. pref. duḥ (du˚); pp. duṣṭha, caus. dūṣayati

Dussanā

(f.) & Dussana (nt.) defilement, guilt AN ii.225; Pp 18, Pp 22; Dhs 418, Dhs 1060; DN-a i.195 (rajjana-d. muyhana).

Sk. dūṣana, cp. dussati

Dussanīya

(adj.) able to give offence, hateful, evil (always combd with rajanīya, cp. rāga dosa moha AN iii.110 (dusanīye dussati, where Iti 84 has dosaneyye) Ja vi.9; Mil 386.

cp. Sk. dveṣanīya, because of doṣa = dveṣa taken to dus

Dussassa

see sassa.

Dussika

a cloth merchant Ja vi.276; Mil 262, Mil 331 sq.

Dussitatta

(nt.) = dussanā, Pp 18, Pp 22.

Sk. *dūṣitatva

Duha

(adj ■ ˚.) milking; yielding, granting, bestowing: kāma˚ giving pleasures Ja iv.20; Ja v.33.

Sk. duh & duha; see dohati

Duhati

(to milk) see dohati.

Duhana

(adj.-n.) one who injures, hurts or deceives; insidious, infesting; a robber, only in pantha a dacoit DN i.135; DN-a i.296 ■ (nt.) waylaying, robbery (pantha˚) Ja ii.281 (text dūhana), 388 (text: panthadūbhana vv.ll. duhana & dūhana); Dhs-a 220 ■ Cp maggadūsin.

Sk. *druhana, to druh, druhyati to hurt, cp. Oir. droch; Ohg. triogan to deceive, traum dream; also Sk. dhvarati. For further connections see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fraus

Duhitika

(adj.) infested with robbers, beset with dangers SN iv.195 (magga). Note. This interpretation may have to be abandoned in favour of duhitika being another spelling of dvīhitika hard to get through (q.v.), to be compared are the vv.ll. of the latter at SN iv.323 (S.S. dūhitika & dūhītika).;

cp. Sk. druha, fr. druhyati

Dūta1

a messenger, envoy Vin i.16 Vin ii.32, Vin ii.277; DN i.150; SN iv.194; Snp 411 (rāja˚), 417. deva˚ Yama’s envoy, Death’s messenger AN i.138, AN i.142; MN ii.75 sq.; Ja i.138 ■ ˚ṃ pāheti to send a messenger Mil 18, Pv-a 133.

Ved. dūta, prob. to dūra (q.v.) as “one who is sent (far) away,” also perhaps Gr. δουλος slave. See Walde Lat. Wtb. under dudum

Dūta2

(nt.) play, gaming, gambling Ja iv.248.

Sk. dyūta, see jūta

Dūteyya

(nt.) errand, commission, messages AN iv.196; Ja iii.134; DN-a i.78. ˚ṃ gacchati to go on an errand Vin ii.202; ˚ṃ harati to obtain a commission Vin iii.87; Vin iv.23.

-kamma doing a messenger’s duty Vin i.359; -pahiṇagamana sending & going on messages DN i.5 = MN iii.34; AN ii.209; MN i.180.

Sk. dūtya, but varying in meaning

Dūbha

(adj.) deceiving, see dubbha.

Dūbhaka1

(adj.) deceiving, treacherous, harmful Snp-a 287 (mitta˚); f. ˚ikā Ja ii.297.

Sk. dambhaka

Dūbhaka2

a diamond Ja i.363 = Ja iii.207.

Sk. dambha, cp. dambholi

Dūbhana

(nt.) deceiving, pillaging, robbing etc. at Ja ii.388 is to be read as (pantha-) duhana.

Dūbhin

(adj.)-dubbhin Ja ii.180 (vv.ll. dūbha & dubbhi), 327; iv.257; Dhp-a ii.23.

Dūbhī

(f.) perfidy, treachery, Ja i.412; Ja iv.57 (v.l. dubhī ); Ja vi.59 (= aparādha ).

cp. Sk. dambha, see dubbhati

Dūra

(adj.) far distant, remote,; opp. āsanna (J ii.154) or santika (Dhs 677; Vism 402) ■ Pv-a 117. Often in cpds. (see below), also as dūri˚; e.g. dūri-bhāva distance Vism 71 Vism 377; Dhs-a 76 ■ Cases mostly used adverbially, viz acc. dūraṃ far Ja ii.154; Dhp-a i.192 ■ abl. dūrato from afar, aloof Vin i.15; Vin ii.195; SN i.212; Snp 511; Dhp 219; Ja v.78 (dūra-dūrato); Mil 23; Pv-a 107. dūrato karoti to keep aloof from Pv-a 17 ■ loc. dūre at a distance also as prep. away from, far from (c. abl.), e.g. Snp 468; Ja ii.155, Ja ii.449 (= ārā); Ja iii.189Snp 772; Dhp 304; Ja vi.364; Dhs 677dūre-pātin one who shoots far [cp. Sk. dūra-pātin] AN i.284; AN ii.170, AN ii.202. Ja iv.494 See also akkhaṇavedhin ■ atidūre too far Vin ii.215.

-kantana at Thag 1123: the correct reading seems to be the v.l. durākantana, see ākantana; -gata gone far away Pv ii.134 (= paralokagata Pv-a 164); Dhp-a iii.377 (durā˚). -(ṃ)gama far-going, going here there Dhp 37 (cp. Dhp-a i.304); Pv ii.910; -ghuṭṭha farrenowned Pv ii.82; -vihāra (-vuttin) living far away Snp 220.

Sk. dūra, Ved. duva (stirring, urging on), compar. davīyān, Av. dūrō (far), *dāu; cp. Ohg zawen, Goth. taujan = E. do. Another form is *deṷā far in respect to time, as in Gr. δήν, δηρόν, Lat. dū-dum (cp. dū-rare = en-dure). See also dutiya & dūta

Dūrakkha

see rakkha & cp. du;1.

du1 + rakkha

Dūratta

(adj.) reddish MN i.36 (˚vaṇṇa).

du1 + ratta

Dūsaka

(adj.-n.) corrupting, disgracing, one who defiles or defames; a robber, rebel AN v.71 (bhikkhunī˚); Ja ii.270; Ja iv.495; Snp 89 (kula˚ one who spoils the reputation of the clan); Dhp-a ii.23 (kuṭi˚ an incendiary); Mil 20 (pantha˚). As dussaka at Ja v.113 (kamma˚); Snp-a 287 (mitta˚, v.l. B. for dūbhaka)-panthadūsaka a highwayman Mil 290 ■ f. dūsikā Ja iii.179 (also as dūsiyā = dosakārikā); ; harmless Snp 312 (see a˚).

Sk. dūṣaka

Dūsana

(nt.) spoiling, defiling Ja ii.270; Sdhp 453.

see dūseti

Dūsita

depraved, sinful, evil Pv-a 226 (˚citta).

Sk. dūṣita, pp. of dūseti

Dūsin

(adj.-n.) = dūsạka, in magga˚; (cp. pantha-dusaka) a highway robber Snp 84 sq

Sk. dūṣin

Dūseti

to spoil, ruin; to injure, hurt; to defile, pollute, defame Vin i.79, Vin i.85, Vin i.86; Vin iv.212 (maṃ so dūsetukāmo, said by a bhikkhunī), 316 (dūsetuṃ) AN iv.169 sq.; Ja i.454; Ja ii.270; Dhp-a ii.22 (kuṭiṃ, damage destroy) ■ aor. dūsayi Ja ii.110 (fared ill) ■ pp dūsita. Cp. pa˚, pari˚.

Sk. dūṣayati, caus. of dussati (q.v.). Also as dusseti Pv-a 82

Dūhana1

(nt.) infesting, polluting, defaming; robbing, only in pantha˚; (with v.l. duhana) waylaying Ja ii.281, Ja ii.388; Tikp 280.

see duhana

Dūhana2

(nt.) milking (-˚), in kumbha˚; filling the pails with milk, i.e. giving much milk (gāvo; cp. Sk. droṇadughā a cow which yields much milk) Snp 309.

Sk. dohana, see dohati

Dūhitika

see duhitika.

Dejjha

(= dvejjha, see dvi B i.5] divided, in ; undividedness Ja iii.7 (com. abhejja), 274 = iv.258 (dhanuṃ a ˚ṃ karoti to get the bow ready, v.l. BB. sarejjhaṃ C expld jiyāya ca sarena ca saddhiṃ ekam eva katvā).

Deḍḍubha

a water-snake; salamander Ja iii.16; Ja vi.194; Sdhp 292. See next.

Sk. duṇḍubha

Deḍḍubhaka

1. a sort of snake (see prec.) Ja i.361.

2. a kind of girdle (in the form of a snake’s head) Vin ii.136 (expld by udaka-sappi-sira-sadisa).

Deṇḍima

(m. nt.) a kind of kettle-drum DN i.79 (v.l. dindima); Nd ii.219 (˚ka, v.l. dind˚); Ja i.355; (= paṭaha-bheri); v.322 = vi.217 vi.465 = 580.

Sk. diṇḍima, cp. dindima

Depiccha

(adj.) having two tail-feathers Ja v.339.

= dvepiccha, see dvi B I. 5

Deyya

(adj.) (a) to be given (see below) ■ (b) deserving a gift, worthy of receiving alms Ja iii.12 (a˚); Mil 87 (rāja˚) -nt. a gift offering Vin i.298 (saddhā˚).

-dhamma a gift, lit. that which has the quality of being given; esp. a gift of mercy, meritorious gift SN i.175; AN i.150, AN i.166; AN ii.264 (saddhā˚); Pv i.11; ii.318 Pv-a 5, Pv-a 7 sq., 26, 92 (˚bīja), 103, 129; cp. Avs i.308. The deyyadhamma (set of gifts, that which it is or should be a rule to give) to mendicants, consists of 14 items, which are (as enumd at Nd ii.523 under the old Brahman’s term yañña “sacrifice”) (1) cīvara, (2) piṇḍapāta (3) senāsana, (4) gilāna-paccaya-bhesajja-parikkhāra, (5) anna, (6) pāna, (7) vattha, (8) yāna, (9) mālā (10) gandhā, (11) vilepana, (12) seyya, (13) āvasatha (14) padīpeyya. A similar enumn in diff. order is found at Nd i.373.

Sk. deya, grd. of , see dadāti I. 2, b

Deva

a god, a divine being; usually in pl. devā the gods. As title attributed to any superhuman being or beings regarded to be in certain respects above the human level. Thus primarily (see 1a) used of the first of the next-world devas, Sakka, then also of subordinate deities, demons & spirits (devaññatarā some kind of deity; snake-demons: nāgas, tree-gods: rukkhadevatā etc.). Also title of the king (3). Always implying splendour (cp. above etym.) & mobility, beauty goodness & light, & as such opposed to the dark powers of mischief & destruction (asurā: Titans; petā: miserable ghosts; nerayikā sattā: beings in Niraya). A double position (dark & light) is occupied by Yama, the god of the Dead (see Yama & below 1 c). Always implying also a kinship and continuity of life with humanity and other beings; all devas have been man and may again become men (cp. DN i.17 sq.; SN iii.85), hence “gods” is not a coincident term. All devas are themselves in saṃsāra, needing salvation. Many are found worshipping saints (Th i.627–⁠9; Th ii.365) ■ The collective appellations differ; there are var. groups of divine beings, which in their totality (cp. tāvatiṃsa) include some or most of the well-known Vedic deities. Thus some collect. designations are devā sa-indakā (the gods including Indra or with their ruler at their head: DN ii.208; SN iii.90, AN v.325), sa-pajāpatikā (S iii.90), sa-mārakā (see deva-manussaloka), sa-brahmakā (S iii.90). See below 1 b. Lists of popular gods are to be found, e.g. at DN ii.253; DN iii.194 ■ A current distinction dating from the latest books in the canon is that into 3 classes, viz. sammuti- devā (conventional gods, gods in the public opinion, i.e. kings & princes Ja i.132; DN-a i.174) visuddhi˚; (beings divine by purity, i.e. of great religious merit or attainment like Arahants & Buddhas),; upapatti˚; (being born divine, i.e. in a heavenly state as one of the gatis, like bhumma-devā etc.). This division in detail at Nd ii.307; Vb 422; Kp-a 123; Vv-a 18 Under the 3rd category (upapatti˚) seven groups are enumerated in the foll. order: Cātummahārājikā devā Tāvatiṃsā d. (with Sakka as chief), Yāmā d., Tusitā d. Nimmānaratī d., Paranimmita-vasavattī d., Bṛahmakāyikā d. Thus at DN i.216 sq.; AN i.210, AN i.332 sq.; Nd ii.307; cp. SN i.133 & Ja i.48. See also devatā.

1. good etc ■ (a) sg. a god, a deity or divine being MN i.71 (d. vā Māro vā Brahmā vā); SN iv.180 = AN iv.461 (devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā ti: I shall become a god or some one or other of the (subordinate gods angels); Snp 1024 (ko nu devo vā Brahmā vā Indo vāpi Sujampati); Dhp 105 (+ gandhabba, Māra, Brahmā) AN ii.91, AN ii.92 (puggalo devo hoti devaparivāro etc.); Pv-a 16 (yakkho vā devo vā) ■ (b) pl. devā gods. These inhabit the 26 devalokas one of which is under the rule of Sakka, as is implied by his appellation S. devānaṃ indo (his opponent is Vepacitti Asur-indo SN i.222) SN i.216 sq.; SN iv.101, SN iv.269; AN i.144; Snp 346; Pv-a 22 etc-Var. kinds are e.g. appamāṇ’-ābhā (opp. paritt ābhā) MN iii.147; ābhassarā DN i.17; Dhp 200; khiḍḍāpadosikā DN i.19; gandhabba-kāyikā SN iii.250 sq. cattāro mahārājikā SN v.409, SN v.423; Jat i.48; Pv iv.111 Pv-a 17, Pv-a 272; naradevā tidasā SN i.5; bhummā Pv-a 5 manāpa-kāyikā AN iv.265 sq.; mano-padosikā DN i.20 valāhaka-kāyikā SN iii.254 ■ Var. attributes of the Devas are e.g. āyuppamāṇā AN i.267; AN ii.126 sq. AN iv.252 sq.; dīghāyukā SN iii.86; AN ii.33; rūpino manomayā MN i.410, etc. etc ■ See further in general: DN i.54 (satta devā); DN ii.14, DN ii.157, DN ii.208; SN v.475 = AN i.37; Snp 258 (+ manussā), 310 (id.); 404, 679; Dhp 30, Dhp 56, Dhp 94, Dhp 230 Dhp 366; Pts i.83 sq.; Pts ii.149; Vb 86, Vb 395, Vb 412 sq.; Ne 23 Sdhp 240 ■ (c) deva = Yama see deva-dūta (expld at Ja i.139: devo ti maccu) ■ atideva a pre-eminent god god above gods (Ep. of the Buddha) Nd ii.307; Dhs-a 2 etc.; see under cpds.

2. the sky, but only in its rainy aspect, i.e. rain-cloud, rainy sky, rain-god (cp Jupiter Pluvius; K.S. i.40, n. 2 on Pajjunna, a Catumahārājika), usually in phrase deve vassante (when it rains etc.), or devo vassati (it rains) DN i.74 (: devo ti megho DN-a i.218); SN i.65, SN i.154 (cp. Iti 66 megha); Snp 18 Snp 30; Ja v.201; Dhp-a ii.58, Dhp-a ii.82; Pv-a 139. devo ekam ekam phusāyati the cloud rains drop by drop, i.e. lightly SN i.104 sq., 154, 184; iv.289 ■ thulla-phusitake deve vassante when the sky was shedding big drops of rain SN iii.141; SN v.396; AN i.243; AN ii.140; AN v.114; Vism 259-vigata-valāhake deve when the rain-clouds have passed SN i.65; MN ii.34, MN ii.42.

3. king, usually in voc deva, king! Vin i.272; Vin iii.43; AN ii.57; Ja i.150, Ja i.307; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 74 etc.

devī (f.) 1. goddess, of Petīs, Yakkhiṇīs etc.; see etym expl. at Vv-a 18Pv ii.112; Vv 13 etc.

2. queen Vin i.82 (Rahulamātā), 272; DN ii.14; AN ii.57, AN ii.202 (Mallikā) Ja i.50 (Māyā); Ja iii.188; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 75.

-accharā a divine Apsarā, a heavenly joy-maiden Vism 531; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 279; -aññatara, in phrase devo vā d. vā, a god or one of the retinue of a god SN iv.180; AN iv.461; Pv-a 16; -ātideva god of gods, i.e. divine beyond all divinities, a super-deva, of Buddha Nd ii.307 & on Snp 1134; Ja iv.158 = Dhp-a i.147; Vv 6427; Vv-a 18; Mil 241, Mil 258, Mil 368, Mil 384 & passim; cp. Mvu i.106, Mvu i.257 Mvu i.283, Mvu i.291; -attabhāva a divine condition, state of a god Pv-a 14; -ānubhāva divine majesty or power DN ii.12; MN iii.120; Ja i.59; -āsana a seat in heaven Iti 76; -āsurasaṅgāma the fight between the Gods & the Titans DN ii.285; SN i.222; SN iv.201; SN v.447; MN i.253; AN iv.432 (at all passages in identical phrase); -iddhi divine power Vv 313; Vv-a 7; -isi a divine Seer Snp 1116; Nd ii.310 -ūpapatti rebirth among the gods Pv-a 6; -orohaṇa descent of the gods Dhp-a iii.443; -kaññā a celestial maiden, a nymph SN i.200; Ja i.61; Vv-a 37, Vv-a 78; -kāya a particular group of gods SN i.200; Iti 77; Thig 31 -kuñjara “elephant of the gods,” of Indra Ja v.158 -kumāra son of a god (cp. ˚putta) Ja iii.391; -gaṇa a troop of gods Ja i.203; Dhp-a iii.441; -gaha a temple chapel Vin iii.43; -cārikā a visit to the gods, journeying in the devaloka Vv-a 3, Vv-a 7, Vv-a 165 etc.; -ṭṭhāna heavenly seat Ja iii.55; a temple, sacred place Mil 91, Mil 330 -dattika given or granted by a god, extraordinary Pv-a 145; -dattiya = ˚dattika Ja iii.37; Dhp-a i.278 -dāruka a species of pine Ja v.420; -dundubhi the celestial drum, i.e. thunder DN i.10; Mil 178; DN-a i.95; -dūta the god’s (i.e. Yama’s see above 1˚) messenger AN i.138 AN i.142; MN ii.75; MN iii.179; Ja i.138; Dhp-a i.85 (tayo d.) Mhbv. 122 (˚suttanta); -deva “the god of gods,” Ep of the Buddha (cp. devâtideva) Thag 533, Thag 1278 (of Kappāyana); Dhs-a 1; Pv-a 140; -dhamma that which is divine or a god AN iii.277 (˚ika); Dhp-a iii.74; -dhītā a female deva or angel (cp. devaputta), lit. daughter of a god Ja ii.57; Vv-a 137, Vv-a 153 (with ref. to Vimānapetīs) -nagara the city of the Devas, heaven Ja i.168, Ja i.202; Dhp-a i.280; -nikāya a class, community or group of gods, celestial state or condition DN ii.261 (sixty enumd) SN iv.180; MN i.102 sq.; AN i.63 sq.; AN ii.185; AN iii.249 sq. AN iv.55; AN v.18; -pañha questioning a god, using an oracle DN i.11 (= DN-a i.97: devadāsiyā sarīre devataṃ otāretvā pañha-pucchanaṃ); -parivāra a retinue of gods AN ii.91 -parisā the assembly of gods AN ii.185; Tikp 241. -putta “son of a god,” a demi-god, a ministering god (cp. f deva-dhītā), usually of Yakkhas, but also appld to the 4 archangels having charge of the higher world of the Yāmā devā (viz. Suyāma devaputta); the Tusitā d (Santusita d.); the Nimmānaratī d. (Sunimmita d.); the Paranimmitavasavattī d. (Vasavattī d.) DN i.217 sq. cp. Ja i.48DN ii.12, DN ii.14; SN i.46 sq.; 216 sq.; iv.280; AN i.278; Iti 76; Ja i.59 (jarā-jajjara); Ja iv.100 (Dhamma d.); vi.239 (Java d.); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 9, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 113 (Yakkho ti devaputto); Mil 23; -pura the city of the gods heaven SN iv.202; Vv 6430 (= Sudassana-mahānagara Vv-a 285); Ja iv.143; -bhava celestial existence Pv-a 167 -bhoga the wealth of the gods Pv-a 97; -manussā (pl.) gods & men DN i.46, DN i.62≈, 99 (˚mānuse); MN ii.38 MN ii.55; Snp 14 (sa˚), 236 (˚pūjita), 521; Iti 80 (˚seṭṭhā) Kp viii.10; Kp-a 196; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 117; -˚loka the world of gods and men. It comprises (1) the world of gods proper (Devas, i.e. Sakka, Māra & Brahmā corresp. to sammuti-devā, see above); (2) samaṇas brāhmaṇas (cp. visuddhi-devā); (3) gods & men under the human aspect (gati, cp. upapatti-devā): Snp 1047 Snp 1063; expl. at Nd ii.309 & (with diff. interpretations DN-a i.174 sq.; -yāna leading to the (world of the gods, i.e. the road to heaven Snp 139, also in ˚yāniya (magga) DN i.215; -rājā king of the devas, viz Sakka Nd i.177; Ja iii.392 (= devinda); Dhp-a iii.441; Pv-a 62; -rūpa divine appearance or form Pv-a 92 -loka the particular sphere of any devas, the seat of the devas, heaven; there exist 26 such spheres or heavens (see loka); when 2 are mentioned it refers to Sakka’s & Brahma’s heavens. A seat in a devaloka is in saṃsāra attained by extraordinary merit: Dhp 177; Ja i.202 Ja i.203; Ja iv.273; Thag-a 74; Kp-a 228; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 9, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 66, Pv-a 81 Pv-a 89; Vism 415, etc.; -vimāna the palace of a deva Ja i.58; Vv-a 173; -saṅkhalikā a magic chain Ja ii.128; Ja v.92, Ja v.94 -sadda heavenly sound or talk among the devas Iti 75 (three such sounds).

Ved. deva, Idg. *dei̯ā to shine (see dibba & diva), orig. adj. *deiṷos belonging to the sky, cp. Av. daēvō (demon.), Lat. deus, Lith. dë̃vas; Ohg. Ƶīo; Ags. Tīg gen. Tīwes (= Tuesday); Oir. dia (god). The popular etymology refers it to the root div in the sense of playing sporting or amusing oneself: dibbanti ti devā, pañcahi kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti attano vā siriyā jotantī ti attho Kp-a 123

Devaka

(adj.) (-˚) belonging or peculiar to the devas; only in sa˚-loka the world including the gods in general DN i.62; Nd ii.309; Snp 86 Snp 377, Snp 443, Snp 760 etc. Mil 234. See also devamanussa-loka.

deva + ka

Devata

(adj.) (-˚) having such & such a god as one’s special divinity, worshipping, a worshipper of, devotee of Mil 234 (Brahma˚ + Brahma (garuka) ■ f.; devatā in pati “worshipping the husband,” i.e. a devoted wife Ja iii.406; Vv-a 128.

Devatā

(f.) “condition or state of a deva, divinity; divine being, deity, fairy. The term comprises all beings which are otherwise styled devas, & a list of them given at Nd;2 308 & based on the principle that any being who is worshipped (or to whom an offering is made or a gift given: de-vatā = yesaṃ deti, as is expressed in the conclusion “ye yesaṃ dakkhiṇeyyā te tesaṃ devatā”) is a devatā, comprises 5 groups of 5 kinds each, viz. (1) ascetics; (2) domestic animals (elephants, horses, cows, cocks, crows); (3) physical forces & elements (fire, stone etc.); (4) lower gods (: bhumma devā) (nāgā, suvaṇṇā, yakkhā, asurā gandhabbā); (5) higher gods (: inhabitants of the devaloka proper) Mahārājā, Canda, Suriya, Inda, Brahmā) to which are added the 2 aspects of the sky-god as devadevatā & disā-devatā) ■ Another definition at Vv-a 21 simply states: devatā ti devaputto pi Brahmā pi devadhītā pi vuccati ■ Among the var. deities the foll. are frequently mentioned:; rukkha˚; tree-gods or dryads MN i.306; Ja i.221; Pv-a 5; vatthu˚; earth gods (the four kings) Pv 41; Pv-a 17; vana˚; wood-nymphs MN i.306; samudda˚; water-sprites Ja ii.112 etc. etc. DN i.180 (mahiddhikā, pl.), 192; ii.8, 87, 139, 158; SN i. sq.; iv.302; MN i.245; MN ii.37; AN i.64, AN i.210, AN i.211; AN ii.70 (sapubba˚); AN iii.77 (bali-paṭiggāhikā), 287 (saddhāya samannāgatā); 309; iv.302 sq., 390 (vippaṭisāriniyo) v.331; Snp 45, Snp 316, Snp 458, Snp 995, Snp 1043; Dhp 99; Ja i.59, Ja i.72 Ja i.223, Ja i.256; Ja iv.17, Ja iv.474; Vv 163; Pv ii.110; Kp-a 113, Kp-a 117; Pv-a 44.

-ānubhāva divine power or majesty Ja i.168; -ānussati “remembrance of the gods,” one of the 6 ânussatiṭṭhānāni, or subjects to be kept in mind DN iii.250, DN iii.280 cp. AN i.211; Vism 197. -uposatha a day of devotion to the gods AN i.211; -paribhoga fit to be enjoyed by gods Ja ii.104; -bali an offering to the gods AN ii.68 -bhāva at Pv-a 110 read as devattabhāva (opp. petattabhāva).

deva + tā, qualitative-abstr. suffix, like Lat. juventa, senecta, Goth. hauhipa, Ohg. fullida cp. Sk pūrṇatā, bandhutā etc.

Devati

to lament, etc.; see pari˚. Cp. also parideva etc.

div

Devatta

(nt.) the state of being a deva, divinity Thag-a 70; Pv-a 110 (˚bhāva as Yakkha, opp. petatta bhāva; so read for devatā-bhāva).

deva + tta

Devattana

(nt.) state or condition of a deva Thag 1127; cp. petattana in the foll. verse.

= last

Devara

husband’s brother, brother-in-law Ja vi.152; Vv 326 (sa˚), popularly expld at Vv-a 135 as “dutiyo varo ti vā devaro, bhattu kaniṭṭha bhātā.”

Sk. devṛ & devara Gr.; δ ̈αήρ (*δαιvήρ), Lat. levir, Ohg. zeihhur, Ags. tācor

Devasika

(adj.) daily Ja v.383; DN-a i.296 (˚bhatta = bhattavetena); Dhp-a i.187 sq.,-nt. ˚ṃ as adv daily, every day Ja i.82, Ja i.149, Ja i.186; Vv-a 67, Vv-a 75; Dhp-a i.28; Dhp-a ii.41.

Der. fr. divasa

Desa

point, part, place, region, spot, country, Vin i.46; Vin ii.211; MN i.437; Ja i.308; Dhs-a 307 (˚bhūta); Pv-a 78 (˚antara prob. to be read dos˚), 153 Kp-a 132, Kp-a 227desaṃ karoti to go abroad Ja v.340 (p. 342 has disaṃ) ■ kañcid-eva desaṃ pucchati to ask a little point DN i.51; MN i.229; AN v.39, sometimes as kiñcid-eva d. p. SN iii.101; MN iii.15; v.l. at DN i.51- desāgata pañha a question propounded, lit. come into the region of some one or having become a point of discussion Mil 262.

Ved. deśa, cp. disā

Desaka

(adj.) pointing out, teaching, advising Sdhp 217, Sdhp 519-(nt.) advice, instruction, lesson MN i.438.

Sk. deśaka

Desanā

(f.) 1. discourse, instruction, lesson SN v.83, SN v.108; Ja iii.84; Pp 28; Ne 38; Vism 523 sq (regarding Paṭiccasamuppāda); Pv-a 1, Pv-a 2, Pv-a 9, Pv-a 11; Sdhp 213. 2. Freq. in dhamma˚; moral instruction, exposition of the Dhamma, preaching, sermon Vin i.16; AN i.53 AN ii.182; AN iv.337 sq.; Iti 33; Ja i.106 etc. (a˚ gāminī āpatti) a Pārājika or Sanghādisesa offence Vin ii.3, Vin ii.87; Vin v.187 Cp. Vin. Texts ii.33.

3. (legal) acknowledgment Mil 344 ■ Cp. ā˚.

-avasāne (loc.) at the end of an instruction discourse or sermon Dhp-a iii.175; Pv-a 54; -pariyosāne = proc Pv-a 9, Pv-a 31 etc. -vilāsa beauty of instruction Vism 524; Tikapaṭṭhāna 21.

Sk. deśanā

Desika

(adj.) = desaka, su˚; one who points out well, a good teacher Mil 195.

Sk. deśika

Desita

expounded, shown, taught etc., given, assigned, conferred Vin iii.152 (marked out) Vin v.137; DN ii.154 (dhamma); Dhp 285 (nibbāna); Pv-a 4 (magga: indicated), 54 (given).

pp. of deseti

Desetar

one who instructs or points out; a guide, instructor, teacher MN i.221, MN i.249; AN i.266 AN iii.441; AN v.349.

n. ag. to deseti

Deseti

to point out, indicate, show; set forth, preach, teach; confess. Very freq. in phrase dhammaṃ d. to deliver a moral discourse to preach the Dhamma Vin i.15; Vin ii.87, Vin ii.188; Vin v.125, Vin v.136; DN i.241, AN ii.185, AN v.194; Iti 111; Ja i.168; Ja iii.394; Pp 57; Pv-a 6 ■ aor. adesesi (SN i.196 = Thag 1254) & desesi (Pv-a 2, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 78 etc.)-pp. desita (q.v.).

Sk. deśayati, Caus. of disati, q.v.

Dessa & Dessiya

(adj.) disagreeable, odious, detestable Ja i.46; Ja ii.285; Ja iv.406 Ja vi.570, Thag-a 268, Mil 281.

Sk. dveṣya, to dvis, see disa

Dessati

to hate, dislike, detest Snp-a 168 (= na piheti, opp. kāmeti).

Sk. dviṣati & dveṣṭi; see etym. under disa

Dessatā

(f.) repulsiveness Mil 281.

Sk. dvesyatā

Dessin

(adj.) hating, detesting Snp 92 (dhamma˚); better desin, cp. viddesin.

Sk. dveṣin

Deha

body AN ii.18; Pv-a 10 Pv-a 122. Usually in foll. phrases: hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ SN i.60; Pv ii.956; pahāya m. d. SN i.27, SN i.30; jahati d MN ii.73; ˚ṃ nikkhipati Pv ii.615; (muni or khīṇāsavo antima-deha-dhārin (˚dhāro) SN i.14, SN i.53; SN ii.278; Snp 471 Th ii.7, 10; Iti 32, Iti 40, Iti 50, Iti 53. ˚nikkhepana laying down the body Vism 236.

Sk. deha to *dheigh to form, knead, heap up (cp. kāya = heap), see diddha. So also in uddehaka. Cp Kern, Toev. p. 75 s. v. sarīradeha. Cp. Gr. τεϊξος (wall) = Sk. dehī; Lat. fingo & figura; Goth. deigan (knead) = Ohg. teig = E. dough

Dehaka

(nt.) = deha; pl. limbs Thig 392; cp. Thag-a 258.

Dehin

(adj.-n.) that which has a body, a creature Pgdp 12, Pgdp 16.

Doṇa

a wooden pail, vat, trough; usually as measure of capacity (4 Āḷhaka generally) Pv iv.333 (mitāni sukhadukkhāni donehi piṭakehi). taṇḍula˚ a doṇa of rice Dhp-a iii.264 Dhp-a iv.15. At Ja ii.367 doṇa is used elliptically for doṇamāpaka (see below).

-pāka of which a d. full is cooked, a doṇa measure of food SN i.81; Dhp-a ii.8. -māpaka (mahāmatta) (a higher official) supervising the measuring of the doṇa-revenue (of rice) Ja ii.367, Ja ii.378, Ja ii.381; Dhp-a iv.88; -mita a d measure full DN i.54; MN i.518.

Sk. droṇa (nt.) conn. with *dereṷo tree, wood, wooden, see dabbi & dāru & cp. Sk. druṇī pail

Doṇika

(adj.) measuring a doṇa in capacity Vin i.240 (catu˚ piṭaka).

fr. doṇa

Doṇikā

(f.) = donī1, viz. a hollow wooden vessel, tub, vat Vin i.286 (rajana˚ for dyeing); Vin ii.120 (mattikā to hold clay) 220 (udaka˚), 221 (vacca˚ used for purposes of defaecation). See also passāva˚.

Donī1

(f.) 1. a (wooden) trough, a vat, tub SN ii.259; AN i.253; AN v.323; Ja i.450; Mil 56-tela˚ an oil vat AN iii.58 (āyasā made of iron & used as a sarcophagus).

2. a trough-shaped canoe (cp. Marāthi ḍon “a long flat-bottomed boat made of unḍi wood,” Kanarese ḍoni “a canoe hallowed from a log”] Ja iv.163 (= gambhīrā mahānāvā p. 164); Pv-a 189.

3. a hollow dug in the ground Mil 397.

4. the body of a lute, the sounding-board (?)] i.450; Mil 53; Vv-a 281.

Sk. droṇī, see doṇa

Doṇī2

(f.) an oil-giving plant (?) (or is it = donī1 meaning a cake made in a tub, but wrongly interpreted by Dhammapāla?) only in -nimmiñjana oil-cake Pv i.1010; as ˚nimmijjani at Vv 3338; expld by telamiñjaka at Pv-a 51 & by tilapiññāka at Vv-a 147.;

Sk. droṇi?

Dobbhagga

(nt.) ill luck, misfortune Vin iv.277; Dhp-a 281 (text: ˚dobhagga).

Sk. daurbhāgya fr. duḥ + bhāga

Dobha

fraud, cheating DN ii.243 (v.l. dobbha = dubbha).

see dubbha

Domanassa

(nt.) distress, dejectedness, melancholy, grief. As mental pain (cetasikaṃ asātaṃ cet. dukkhaṃ SN v.209 = Nd ii.312; cp DN ii.306; Ne 12) opp. to dukkha physical pain: see dukkha B III. 1 a). A synonym of domanassaṃ is appaccaya (q.v.). For defn of the term see Vism 461 Vism 504. The freq. combn dukkha-domanassa refers to an unpleasant state of mind & body (see dukkha B III 1 b; e.g. SN iv.198; SN v.141; MN ii.64; AN i.157; Iti 89 etc.) the contrary of somanassaṃ with which dom˚ is combd to denote “happiness & unhappiness,” joy & dejection e.g. DN iii.270; MN ii.16; AN i.163; Snp 67 (see somanassa)-Vin i.34; DN ii.278, DN ii.306; SN iv.104, SN iv.188; SN v.349, SN v.451; MN i.48, MN i.65, MN i.313, MN i.340; MN ii.51; MN iii.218; AN i.39 (abhijjhā covetousness & dejection, see abhijjhā); AN ii.5, AN ii.149 sq. AN iii.99, AN iii.207; AN v.216 sq.; Snp 592, Snp 1106; Pp 20, Pp 59; Ne 12 Ne 29 (citta-sampīḷanaṃ d.) 53, Dhs 413, Dhs 421, Dhs 1389; Vb 15, Vb 54, Vb 71, Vb 138 sq.; Dhp i.121.

-indriya the faculty or disposition to feel grief DN iii.239 (+ som˚); SN v.209 sq.; -upavicāra discrimination of that which gives distress of mind DN iii.245; -patta dejected, disappointed Ja ii.155.

Sk. daurmanasya, duḥ + manas

Dolā

(f.) a swing Ja iv.283; Ja vi.341; Vism 280 (in simile).

Sk. dolā, *del as in Ags. tealtian = E. tilt, adj. tealt unstable = Sk. dulā iṣṭakā an unstable woman

Dolāyati

to swing, to move to & fro Ja ii.385.

Denom. of dolā

Dovacassa

(nt.) unruliness indocility, bad conduct, fractiousness SN ii.204 sq (˚karaṇā dhammā); MN i.95 (id. specified); AN ii.147 AN iii.178; Ne 40, Ne 127.

contamination of Sk. *daurvacasya evil speech & *daurvratya disobedience, defiance

Dovacassatā

(f.) unruliness, contumacy, stubbornness, obstinacy AN i.83, AN iii.310, AN iii.448 AN v.146 sq.; DN iii.212, DN iii.274; Pp 20; Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs trsl. p. 344); Vb 359, Vb 369, Vb 371.

2nd abstr. of dovacassa

Dovacassiya

(nt.) = dovacassa Pp 20; Dhs 1325.

Dovārika

gatekeeper, janitor Vin i.269; DN ii.83; DN iii.64 sq., 100; SN iv.194; MN i.380 sq.; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; AN v.194; Ja ii.132; Ja iv.382 (two by name, viz. Upajotiya & Bhaṇḍa-kucchi), 447 vi.367; Mil 234, Mil 332; Vism 281; Sdhp 356.

cp. Sk. dauvārika, see dvāra

Dovila

(adj.) being in the state of fructification, budding Ja vi.529 (cp. p. 530); Mil 334.

Sk.?

Dosa1

corruption blemish, fault, bad condition, defect; depravity, corrupted state; usually -˚, as khetta˚ blight of the field Mil 360; tiṇa˚ spoilt by weeds Dhp 356; Pv-a 7; visa ill effect of poison Thag 758, Thag 768; sneha˚ blemish of sensual affection Snp 66. Four kasiṇa-dosā at Vism 123; eighteen making a Vihāra unsuitable at Vism 118 sq ■ Ja ii.417; Ja iii.104; Mil 330 (sabba-d ■ virahita faultless); DN-a i.37, DN-a i.141 ■ pl. dosā the (three) morbid affections, or disorder of the (3) humours Mil 43; adj with disturbed humours Mil 172, cp. DN-a i.133.

Sk. doṣa to an Idg. *deu(s) to want, to be inferior etc. (cp. dussati), as in Gr. δέομαι, δεύομαι

Dosa2

anger, ill-will evil intention, wickedness, corruption, malice, hatred In most freq. combn of either rāga (lust) d. & moha; (delusion), or lobha (greed) d. moha (see rāga & lobha) to denote the 3 main blemishes of character. For def;n see Vism 295 & 470. Interpreted at Nd;2 313 as “cittassa āghāto paṭighāto paṭigho… kopo… kodho… vyāpatti.”-The distinction between dosa & paṭigha is made at DN-a i.116 as: dosa = dubbalakodha; paṭigha = balavakodha ■ In combn lobha d moha e.g. SN i.98; MN i.47, MN i.489; AN i.134, AN i.201; AN ii.191 AN iii.338; Iti 45 (tīṇi akusalamūlāni). With rāga moha;: Dhp 20; Iti 2 = Iti 6; with rāga & avijjā; Iti 57; rāga & māna; Snp 270, Snp 631 etc ■ See for ref.: Vin i.183; DN iii.146, DN iii.159, DN iii.182, DN iii.214, DN iii.270; SN i.13, SN i.15, SN i.70; SN v.34 sq. MN i.15, MN i.96 sq., 250 sq., 305; AN i.187; AN ii.172, AN ii.203 AN iii.181; Snp 506; Iti 2 (dosena duṭṭhāse sattā gacchanti duggatiṃ); Pts i.80 sq., 102; Pp 16, Pp 18; Dhs 418, Dhs 982 Dhs 1060; Vb 86, Vb 167, Vb 208, Vb 362; Ne 13, Ne 90; Sdhp 33 Sdhp 43Variously characterised as: 8 purisa-dosā Vb 387; khila, nīgha, mala SN v.57; agati (4 agati-gamanāni chanda, d. moha, bhaya) DN iii.228, cp. 133, 182; ajjhattaṃ AN iii.357 sq.; its relation to kamma AN i.134; AN iii.338 AN v.262; to ariyamagga SN v.5, SN v.8sadosa corrupted depraved, wicked DN i.80; AN i.112; adosa absence of ill-will, adj. kind, friendly, sympathetic AN i.135, AN i.195, AN i.203 AN ii.192; Vb 169, Vb 210; Dhs 33 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 21, 99) Vv-a 14 (+ alobha amoha).

-aggi the fire of anger or ill-will DN iii.217; SN iv.19 sq. Iti 92 (+ rāgaggi moh˚); Ja i.61; -antara (adj.) bearing anger, intending evil in one’s heart Vin ii.249; DN iii.237; MN i.123; AN i.59; AN iii.196 sq.; AN v.81 (opp. metta-citta) perhaps at Pv-a 78 (for des˚); -kkhaya the fading away dying out of anger or malice SN iii.160, SN iii.191; SN iv.250 SN v.8; Vb 73, Vb 89; -gata = dosa (+ paṭigha) SN iv.71 -garu full of anger SN i.24; -dosa (: dosa1) spoilt by anger Dhp 357; -saññita connected with ill-will Iti 78; -sama like anger Dhp 202; -hetuka caused by evil intention or depravity AN v.261 (pāṇātipāta). Dosaniya, Dosaniya & Dosaneyya;

Sk. dveṣa, but very often not distinct in meaning from dosa1. On dveṣa see under disa

Dosaniya, Dosanīya & Dosaneyya

(adj.) corruptible; polluting, defiling; hateful sinful SN iv.307; AN ii.120; Iti 84 (where AN iii.110 has dussanīya in same context).

grd ■ formation either to dosa1 or dosa2, but more likely = Sk. *dūṣanīya = dūṣya (see dussa2 & dussati) influenced by dveṣaṇīya

Dosā

(f.) evening, dusk. Only in acc. as adv. dosaṃ (= doṣāṃ) at night Ja vi.386.

Sk. doṣā & doṣas, cp. Gr.; δύω, δύομαι to set (of the sun)

Dosin

(adj.) angry Ja v.452, Ja v.454.

to dosa2

Dosinā

(f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, cp. P. juṇhā) a clear night, moonlight; only in phrase ramaṇīyā vata bho dosinā ratti “lovely is the moonlight night” DN i.47Ja i.509; Ja v.262; Mil 5, Mil 19 etc. Expld in popular fashion by Bdhgh. as “dosâpagatā” ratti DN-a i.141.

-puṇṇamāsī a clear, full moon night Thag 306, Thag 1119 -mukha the face of a clear night Ja vi.223.

Doha1

milking, milk Ja v.63, Ja v.433.

Sk. doha & dogha

Doha2

(adj.) injuring (-˚) DN-a i.296.

Sk. droha

Dohaka

a milk-pail Ja v.105.

Sk. doha

Dohati

to milk ■ pres. 1 pl.; dohāma & duhāma; Ja v.105; pret. 1 pl. duhāmase ibid.; pot duhe Jvi.211; ger. duhitvā Snp-a 27; pp. duddha (q.v ■ Pass. duyhati SN i.174 (so read for duhanti); Ja v.307 ppr. duyhamāna Mil 41 ■ See also dūhana, doha1 dohin.

Sk. dogdhi, to which prob. duhitṛ daughter: see under dhītā & cp. dhenu

Dohaḷa

(a) the longing of a pregnant woman Ja iii.28, Ja iii.333; Dhp-a i.350; Dhp-a ii.139-(b) intense longing, strong desire, craving in general Ja ii.159, Ja ii.433; Ja v.40, Ja v.41; Ja vi.263, Ja vi.308; Dhp-a ii.86 (dhammika d.).

Sk. dohada & daurhṛda, of du + hṛd, sick longing, sickness, see hadaya. Lüders; Gōttinger GelehrteNachrichten 1898, 1 derives it as dvi + hṛd

Dohaḷāyati

to have cravings (of a woman in pregnancy) Ja vi.263.

Denom. fr. dohaḷa

Dohaḷinī

(adj ■ f.) a woman in pregnancy having cravings; a pregnant woman in general Ja ii.395, Ja ii.435; Ja iii.27 Ja iv.334; Ja v.330 (= gabbhinī); Ja vi.270, Ja vi.326, Ja vi.484; Dhp-a iii.95.

Dohin

(adj. n.) one who milks, milking MN i.220 sq. = AN v.347 sq. (anavasesa˚ milking out fully).

Drūbha

incorrect spelling for dubbha (q.v.) in adrūbhāya Vin i.347.

Dva˚

in numeral composition, meaning two etc., see under dvi B III.

Dvaya

(adj.-n.) (adj.) (a) twofold Snp 886 (saccaṃ musā ti dvayadhammaṃ); Dhp 384; Pv iv.129 (dvayaṃ vipākaṃ = duvidhaṃ Pv-a 228)- advaya single AN v.46 ■ (b) false, deceitful Vin iii.21-nt. a duality, a pair, couple SN ii.17 (˚ṃ nissito loko) Ja iii.395 (gātha˚); Pv-a 19 (māsa˚); Dhp-a ii.93 (pada two lines, “couplet”).

-kārin “doing both,” i.e. both good & evil deeds (su˚ & duccaritaṃ) SN iii.241, cp. 247 sq.; DN iii.96.

Ved. dvaya; cp. dvi B I. 6

Dvā

(cp. dva˚) see dvi B III.

Dvāra

(nt.) [Ved. dvār (f.) & dvāra (nt.), base; *dhvār, cp. Av. dvarəm; Gr. χύρ ̈α, χυρών; Lat. fores (gate), forum Goth. daúr, Ohg. turi = Ger. tür, Ags. dor = E. door. 1. lit. an outer door, a gate, entrance Vin i.15; SN i.58 SN i.138, SN i.211; Ja i.346; Ja ii.63; Ja vi.330; Vb 71 sq.; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 67 (village gate), 79; Sdhp 54, Sdhp 356 ■ That d. cannot be used for an inner door see Vin ii.215; on knocking at a d. see DA i.252; cp. Dhp-a i.145 (dvāraṃ ākoṭeti); to open a door: āvarati; to shut: pidahati; to lock thaketi. dvāraṃ alabhamāna unable to get out Vin ii.220mahā˚; the main or city gate Ja i.63; culla˚ Ja ii.114; catu˚; (adj.) having 4 doors (of niraya) Pv i.1013; cha˚; with 6d. (nagaraṃ, w. ref. to the 6 doors of the senses, see below) SN iv.194; pure˚; the front d Ja ii.153; pacchima˚; the back d. Ja vi.364; uttara˚; the E. gate (Pv-a 74); nagara˚; the city gate (Ja i.263; deva Dhp-a i.280); gāma˚; the village g. (Vin iii.52; Ja ii.110) ghara˚; (J iv.142; Pv-a 38) & geha˚; (Pv-a 61) the house door; antepura˚; the door of the inner chamber MN ii.100 kula˚; the doors of the clan-people Snp 288 ■ metaph. of the door leading to Nibbāna: amata˚; SN i.137; AN v.346. 2. (fig.) the doors = in-& outlets of the mind, viz. the sense organs; in phrase indriyesu gutta-dvāra (adj. guarding the doors with respect to the senses or faculties (of the mind): see gutta (e.g. SN ii.218; SN iv.103 & cp; Dhs. trsl. p. 175) ■ SN iv.117, SN iv.194 (with simile of the 6 gates of a city); Vv-a 72 (kāya-vacī˚). The nine gates of the body at Vism 346. Thus also in f. abstr. guttadvāratā the condition of well protected doors (see gutta).

-kavāṭa a door post Ja i.63; Ja ii.334; Ja vi.444; Pv-a 280 -koṭṭhaka [cp. Sk. dvārakoṣṭhaka Sp. Avs i.24, Avs i.31 gateway; also room over the gate Ud 52, Ud 65; Ja i.290 Ja iii.2; Ja iv.63, Ja iv.229; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 160; Dhp-a i.50; Dhp-a ii.27, Dhp-a ii.46 Dhp-a iv.204; Vism 22; Mil 10 ■ bahidvārakoṭṭhake or ˚ā outside the gate MN i.382; MN ii.92; AN iii.31; AN iv.206 -gāma a village outside the city gates, i.e. a suburb (cp. bahidvāragāma Ja i.361) Ja iii.126 (˚gāmaka), 188 iv.225; Dhp-a ii.25 (˚ka); -toraṇa a gateway Ja iii.431 -pānantara at Ja vi.349 should be read ˚vātapānantara -pidahana shutting the door Vism 78. -bāhā a door post SN i.146; Pv i.51; Dhp-a iii.273; -bhatta food scattered before the door Snp 286; -vātapāna a door-window Vin ii.211; Ja vi.349; -sālā a hall with doors MN i.382 MN ii.61.

Dvārika

(-˚) (adj.) referring or belonging to the door of-; in cha ˚ā taṇhā, craving or fever, arising through the 6 doors (of the senses) Dhp-a iv.221, & kāya˚ ■ saṃvara control over the “bodily” door, i.e. over action (opp speech) Pv-a 10 (so read for kāyañ cārika˚).

Dvi

turning twice SN i.32; -ja “twice born,” i.e. a bird Ja i.152 (gaṇā) -jātin one who is born twice, i.e. a brāhmaṇa Th, 2, 430 (Thag-a 269 = brahmajātin); -tālamatta of the size of 2 palms Dhp-a ii.62; -pad [Sk. dvipad, Lat. bipes, Gr.δίπους etc.] a biped, man SN i.6; -pala twofold Vism 339 -pādaka = dvipad Vin ii.110; -bandhu having two friends Ja vi.281; -rattatiratta two or three nights Vin iv.16; also in dvīha two days (q.v.).

3. as diaeretic form duvi˚:-ja (cp. dija) “growing again” i.e. a tooth Ja v.156.

4. as contracted form di˚:-(y)aḍḍha one and a half (lit. the second half, cp. Ger. anderthalb) Dhp 235; Ja i.72 (diyaḍḍha-yojana-satika 150 y. long or high etc.) 202; iv.293 (˚yāma); Dhp-a i.395; DN-a i.17; Mil 243 Mil 272; Dhs-a 12; -guṇa twofold, double Vin i.289; Snp 714; Ja v.309; Mil 84; Dhp-a ii.6; Vv-a 63, Vv-a 120; -ja (cp. dvija, duvija) (a) “twice-born,” a bird SN i.224; Snp 1134 (d. vuccati pakkhī Nd ii.296); Ja i.152, Ja i.203 Ja ii.205; Ja iv.347; Ja v.157; Pv ii.124; Vv 358 (cp. Vv-a 178) Mil 295 ■ (b) a brahmin Thag-a, 70, 73; -jivha “twotongued,” i.e. a snake (cp. du˚) Ja iii.347; -pad (-pada or-pa) a biped (cp. dvi˚) AN i.22; AN v.21; Snp 83 (dipa-duttama), 995 (id.) 998; Dhp 273; -pādaka = ˚pad Thag 453 = Snp 205.

5. as sec. cpd. form (with guṇa) dve˚; (and de˚) -caturaṅga twice fourfold-eightfold Thag 520 (˚gāmin); -patha a “double” path, a border path, the boundary between two villages Vv 5317 (-sīmantika-patha Vv-a 241); -piccha having two tail-feathers Ja v.341 (cp. de˚); -pitika having two feathers Ja v.424 -bhāva doubling kacc. 21; -māsika two months old Pv i.67; -vācika pronouncing (only) two words, viz Buddha & Dhamma (cp. tevācika, saying the whole saraṇa-formula), Vin i.4; Ja i.81; -sattaratta twice seven nights, a fortnight [cp. Sk. dvisapta] Ja vi.230 ■ See also der. fr. numer. adv. dvidhā, viz. dvejjha (& dejjha) dvedhā˚, dveḷhaka.;

6. as noun-derivation dvaya a dyad (q.v.).

II. du; reduced base in numeral and nominal compn & der;n:

-(v)addhato from both sides (a distorted form of dubhato q.v.) Vv 6419 (= dubhato Vv-a 281); -(v)aṅgika consisting of two parts Dhs 163; -(v)aṅgula & dvaṅgula; two finger-breadths or depths, two inches long, implying a minimum measure (see above AN I.2a) Vin ii.107 Vin iv.262; usually in cpds ■ kappa the 2 inch rule, i.e. a rule extending the allotted time for the morning meal to 2 inches of shadow after mid day Vin ii.294 Vin ii.306 -pannā wisdom of 2 finger-breadths, i.e. that of a woman SN i.129 = Thig 60 (dvanguli˚, at Thag-a 66 as ˚saññā); -buddhika = ˚paññā Vv-a 96; -jivha twotongued (cp. di˚); a snake Ja iv.330; Ja v.82, Ja v.425; -paṭṭa “double cloth” (Hind. dupaṭṭā; Kanarese dupaṭa duppaṭa; Tamil tuppaṭṭā a cloak consisting of two cloths joined together, see Kern, Toev. i.179) Ja i.119; Ja iv.114, Ja iv.379 (ratta˚); Dhp-a i.249 (suratta˚) Dhp-a iii.419 (˚cīvarā); -matta (about) 2 in measure Mil 82 -māsika 2 months old or growing for 2 months (of hair Vin ii.107; -vagga consisting of two Vin i.58; -vassa 2 years old Vin i.59; -vidha twofold, instr. duvidhena MN iii.45 sq.; etc ■ Derivations from du˚ see sep. under duka (dyad), dutiya (the second), & the contamination forms; dubha (to) & dubhaya (for ubha & ubhaya).;

III. dvā (& reduced; dva ), base in numeral compn only: dvatikkhattuṃ two or three times Ja i.506; DN-a i.133, DN-a i.264; Dhp-a iv.38; dvādasa twelve (on meaning of this & foll. numerals see above AN II. & III.) Ja iii.80 Ja vi.116; Dhp-a i.88; Dhp-a iii.210; Vv-a 156, Vv-a 247 etc.; ˚yojanika Ja i.125; Ja iv.499; dvāvīsati (22) Vv-a 139; dvattiṃsa (32) Kp ii. (˚ākāra the 32 constituents of the body) Dhp-a ii.88; Vv-a 39 etc.; dvācattālīsa (42) Nd ii.15 Vism 82; dvāsaṭṭhi (Nd ii.271iii. & dvaṭṭhi (62) DN i.54; SN iii.211; DN-a i.162); dvānavuti (92) Pv-a 19, Pv-a 21-Note. A singular case of dva as adv. = twice is in dvâhaṃ Snp 1116.

Sk. dvi, dva etc ■ Bases: I. dvi = Sk. dvi in dvipad = Lat. bipēs (fr. dṷipēs), Ags. twiféte; dvidant = bidens Reduced to di (see B I.4) as in Gr. δδιπους (= dipad), Lat diennium & pref. dis-(cp. Goth. twis asunder, Ogh zwisk between) ■ II.; du (= dvi in reduced grade, cp Lat. du-plex, dubius etc.) ■ III. dvā (& dva) = Sk dvāu, dvā, f. nt. dve (declined as dual, but the P (plural) inflexion from base I. see B I.;1); Gr. δύω, Lat duo; Oir. dāu, dā, f. dī; Goth. twai, f. twōs; Ags. twā (= E. two); Ohg. zwēne, zwō zwei. Also in cpd num. dva-daśa twelve = Gr. δ(* ̔́)ώδεκα = Lat. duodecim ] number two.

A. Meanings-I. Two as unit: 1. with objective foundation: (a) denoting a combn (pair, couple) or a repetition (twice). In this conn. frequent both objective & impersonal in mentioning natural pairs as well as psychologically contrasted notions. E. g. dvipad (biped), nāgassa dve dantā (elephants’ tusks), cakkhūni (eyes); dvija (bird), duvija (tooth), dijivha (snake) See also dutiya & dvaya ■ dve: kāmā, khiḍḍā, gatiyo (Snp 1001), dānāni (Iti 98), piyā, phalāni (Snp 896; Iti 39), mittā, sinehā etc. See Nd ii.under dve, cp. AN i.47 AN i.100; DN iii.212–⁠214 ■ (b) denoting a separation (in two, twofold etc.): see dvidhā & cpds.

2. with symbolic, sentimental meaning: (a); only two (i.e. next to one or “next to nothing”), cp. the two mites of the widow (Mark xii. 42), two sons of Rachel (Gen. 30) dumāsika not more than 2 months (Vin ii.107); dvemāsiko gabbho (Pv i.67); dvevācika; duvangula (see below) ■ (b) a few-more than one, some, a couple (often intermediate between 1 & 3, denoting more than once, or a comparatively long, rather long, but not like 3 a; very long time): māsadvayaṃ a couple of months dvisahassa dīpā 2000 islands (= a large number) diyaḍḍhasata 150 = very long etc.; dvīhatīha (2 or 3 a couple of days) q.v.; dvirattatiratta (id. of nights) dvīsu tīsu manussesu to some people (Pv-a 47); dvatikkhattuṃ soveral times; cp. dvikkhattuṃ (more than once), dutiyaṃ (for the 2nd time).

II. Two as unit in connection with its own & other; decimals means a complex plus a pair, which amounts to the same as a large & a small unit, or so to speak “a year & a day.” E. g. 12 (sometimes, but rarely 10 + 2, see sep.);- 32: rests usually on 4 X 8, but as No. of the Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni it denotes 30 + 2 the great circle plus the decisive (invisible) pair;- 62 views of heresy: see diṭṭhi; also as a year of eternity 60 kappas + 2;- 92: as measure of eternity = 90 + 2 kappas = a year & a day.;

III. Number twelve. 1. Based on natural phenomena it denotes the solar year (dvādasamāsako saṃvaccharo Vv-a 247).

2. Connected with the solar cult it is used with human arrangements to raise them to the level of heavenly ones and to impart to them a superior significance. Thus: (a) as denoting a set (cp. 12 months = companions of the Sun) it is the No. of a respectful holy, venerable group (cp. 12 sons of Jacob Gen. 35, 22 cakes as shewbread Lev. 25, 5; stones erected Josh. 4 8; apostles Math. 10, 2; patriarchs Acts 7, 8; companions of Odysseus Hom. Od. 9, 195; Knights of Arthur etc.): of theras, accompd by 12 bhikkhus Pv-a 67, Pv-a 141. 179 etc.; dvādasa koṭisatāni Snp 677; five groups of 12 musicians Vv-a 96 (cp. 5 X 12 cromlechs in the outer circle of Stonehenge) ■ (b) as measure of distance in space & time it implies vast extent great importance, a climax, divine symmetry etc 12 yojanas wide extends the radiance Vv-a 16 Vv-a 12 y. as respectful distance Pv-a 137 (cp. 2000 cubits in same sense at Josh. 3, 4); 12 y. in extent (height breadth & length) are the heavenly palaces of the Vimāna-petas or Yakkhas Vv 55;1; Ja vi.116; Vv-a 6 Vv-a 217, Vv-a 244, Vv-a 291, Vv-a 298 etc. In the same connection we freq. find the No. 16: solasa-yojanikaṃ kanaka-vimānaṃ Vv 671; Vv-a 188, Vv-a 289 etc ■ Of years: Ja iii.80; Vv-a 157 (dvādasa-vassikā; in this sense also 16 instead of 12 soḷasa-vassuddesika Vv-a 259 etc. See soḷasa).

B. Bases & Forms;-I. dvi; main base for numeral nominal composition & derivation, in:;

1. numeral dve (& duve) two: nom. acc.; dve (Snp p.107; Iti 98; Ja i.150; Ja iv.137 etc.) & (in verse); duve (Snp 896, Snp 1001); gen. dat. dvinnaṃ (Iti 39, Iti 40, Iti 98; Ja ii.154) instr. dvīhi (Ja i.87: v.l. dīhi; 151; ii.153); loc. dvīsu (Ja i.203; Pv-a 47) & duvesu (Vv 412).

2. as numeral base: -sahassa 2000 (see A I. 2b) Ja i.57; Vv-a 261; Pv-a 74; also in dvittā and adv. dvikkhattuṃ twice & dvidhā in two parts ■ (b) as nominal base:- (r)āvaṭṭa [Sk. dviḥ cp. Lat. bis

Dvikkhattuṃ

(adv.) twice Nd ii.on Snp 1116 (= dva); Nd ii.296 (jāyati dijo). See dvi B I. 2a.

Sk. *dvikṛtvaḥ

Dvittā

(pl.) two or three SN i.117 (perhaps we should read tad vittaṃ: Windisch, Māra & Buddha; 108).

Sk. dvitrā; see dvi B I. 2a

Dvidhā

(num. adv.) in two parts, in two MN i.114; Ja i.253 (karoti), Ja i.254 (chindati); Ja i.298 (id.); Ja iii.181; Ja iv.101 (jāta disagreeing); Ja vi.368 (bhindati). See also dvedhā & dveḷhaka.;

-gata gone to pieces Ja v.197; -patha a twofold way a crossing; only fig. doubt SN iii.108; MN i.142, MN i.144; Ud 90. See also dvedhāpatha.

Sk. dvidhā, see dvi B I. 2a

Dvīha

(adv.) two days; dvīhena in 2 days SN ii.192; dvīha-mata 2 days dead MN i.88; MN iii.91.

-tīha 2 or 3 days (˚ṃ adv.) (on meaning cp. dvi AN I.2b) DN i.190 (˚assa accayena after a few days) Ja ii.316; Dhp-a iii.21 (˚accayena id., gloss: katipāh’ accayena); DN-a i.190 (˚ṃ) 215; Vv-a 45.

Sk. dvis-ahnah; see dvi B I.2b

Dvīhika

(adj.) every other day MN i.78.

Dvīhitika

(adj.) to be gained or procured with difficulty (i.e. a livelihood which is hardly procurable), only in phrase “dubbhikkhā d setaṭṭhikā salākavuttā,” of a famine Vin iii.6, Vin iii.15, Vin iii.87 Vin iv.23; SN iv.323. On the term & its expl;n by Bdhgh (at Vin iii.268: dujjīvikā īhī tī… dukkhena īhitaṃ ettha pavattatī ti) see Kern, Toev. i.122 ■ Note. Bdhgh’s expln is highly speculative, & leaves the problem still unsolved. The case of du;1 appearing as du-(and not as dur-) before a vowel is most peculiar there may be a connection with druh (see duhana), which is even suggested by vv.ll. at SN iv.223 as dūhitika duhitika (q.v.). Dve & Dve;

du-īhitika, of du1 + īhati

Dve & Dve˚

see dvi B 1 & 5.;

Dvejjha

(adj.) divided, twofold, only in neg. advejjha undivided, certain, doubtless; simple, sincere, uncontradictory AN iii.403; Ja iv.77 Nd ii.30 (+ adveḷhaka); Mil 141 ■ Cp. dejjha.

Sk. dvaidhya; cp. dvi B I. 5

Dvejjhatā

(f.) in ; undividedness Ja iv.76.

fr. prec.

Dvedhā

(adv.) in two Ja v.203, Ja v.206 (˚sira); Dhp-a ii.50 (bhijji: broke in two, broke asunder).

Sk. dvedhā, cp. dvidhā

Dvedhāpatha

(a) a double, i.e. a branching road; a cross-road Dhp-a ii.192; Mil 17. (b) doubt Dhp 282; Dhs 1004, Dhs 1161 Vism 313.

cp. dvidhā & dvi B I.5

Dveḷhaka

(nt.) doubt Vin iii.309; Dhs 1004, Dhs 1161; DN-a i.68; Dhs-a 259; ˚citta uncertain Pv-a 13; ˚jāta in doubt Vin iii.309; DN iii.117 sq.; 210 ■ adveḷhaka (adj. sure, certain, without doubt Nd ii.30 (+ advejjha).

Dh.

Sk. *dvaidhaka fr. adv. dvidhā, cp. dvi B I. 5

Dh

Dhaṃsati

to fall from, to be deprived of (c. abl.) to be gone DN iii.184 (with abl. asmā lokā dh.) AN ii.67 AN v.76, AN v.77; Iti 11; Thag 225, Thag 610; Ja iii.260, Ja iii.318, Ja iii.441, Ja iii.457 Ja iv.611; Ja v.218, Ja v.375 ■ Caus. dhaṃseti [Sk. dhvaṃsayati but more likely = Sk. dharṣayati (to infest, molest Lat. infestare. On similar sound-change P. dhaṃs˚ → Sk. dharṣ cp. P. daṃseti → Sk. darśayati). Caus. of dhṛṣṇoti to be daring, to assault cp. Gr. χάρσος audacious bold, Lat. festus, Goth. gadars = E. dare; Ohg gitar] to deprive of, to destroy, assault, importune DN i.211; SN iii.123; Snp 591; Ja iii.353; Mil 227; Sdhp 357, Sdhp 434. Cp. pa˚, pari˚.

Ved. dhvaṃsati to fall to dust, sink down, perish; Idg. dheṷes to fly like dust, cp. Sk. dhūsara “dusky” Ags. dust; Ger. dust & dunst; E. dusk & dust; prob also Lat. furo

Dhaṃsana

(n ■ adj.) destroying, bringing to ruin, only in kula˚ as v.l. to kula-gandhana (q.v.) at Iti 64, and in dhaṃsanatā at Dhp-a iii.353 in expln of dhaṃsin (q.v.).

Sk. dharṣana

Dhaṃsin

(adj.-n.) obtrusive, bold, offensive MN i.236; AN ii.182; Dhp 244 (= Dhp-a iii.353 paresaṃ guṇaṃ dhaṃsanatāya dh.).

Sk. dharṣin to dhṛṣṇoti, see dhaṃseti

Dhaṅka

a crow SN i.207; SN ii.258; Snp 271 = Nd ii.420; Ja ii.208; Ja v.107, Ja v.270; Ja vi.452; Pv iii.52 (= kāka Pv-a 198); Vv-a 334.

Sk. dhvānkṣa, cp. also dhunkṣā

Dhaja

a flag, banner; mark, emblem, sign, symbol Vin i.306

(titthiya˚: outward signs of); ii.22 (gihi˚); SN i.42 SN ii.280; AN ii.51; AN iii.84 sq. (panna˚); MN i.139 (id.) AN iii.149 (dhamma); Ja i.52 (+ patākā); Vv-a 173 (id.) Ja i.65 (arahad ˚;)Th i.961; Ja v.49 = Mil 221; Ja v.509 Ja vi.499; Nd i.170; Vv 361, 6428 (subhāsita˚ = dhamma Vv-a 284); Dhs 1116, Dhs 1233; Vism 469 (+ paṭȧka, in comparison); Pv-a 282; Vv-a 31, Vv-a 73; Mil 21; Sdhp 428, Sdhp 594. Cp. also panna.

-agga the top of a standard SN i.219; AN iii.89 sq.; Pp 67, Pp 68; Vism 414 (˚paritta). -ālu adorned with flags Thag 164 = Ja ii.334 (: dhajasampanna Com.); -āhaṭa won under or by the colours, taken as booty, captured Vin iii.139, Vin iii.140; Vism 63. -baddha captured (= ˚āhaṭa Vin i.74 (cora).

Sk. dhvaja, cp. Ohg. tuoh “cloth” (fr. *dwōko)

Dhajinī

(f.) “bearing a standard,” i.e. an army, legion Snp 442 (= senā Snp-a 392).

Sk. dhvajinī, f. to adj. dhvajin

Dhañña1

(nt.) grain, corn. The usual enumn comprises 7 sorts of grain, which is however not strictly confined to grain-fruit proper (“corn”) but includes, like other enumns, pulse seeds. These 7 are sāli & vīhi (rice-sorts), yava (barley) godhuma (wheat), kangu (millet), varaka (beans) kudrūsaka (?) Vin iv.264; Nd ii.314; DN-a i.78Nd ii.314 distinguishes two oategories of dhañña: the natural (pubbaṇṇa ) & the prepared (; aparaṇṇa ) kinds. To the first belong the 7 sorts, to the second belongs sūpeyya (curry). See also bīja-bīja ■ Six sorts are mentioned at MN i.57, viz. sāli, vīhi, mugga, māsa, tila, taṇḍula. DN i.5 (āmaka˚; q.v.); AN ii.209 (id.); MN i.180; AN ii.32 (+ dhana); Thag 531; Pp 58; Dhp-a i.173; Vv-a 99; Pv-a 29 (dhanaṃ vā dh ˚ṃ vā), 198 (sāsapa-tela-missitaṃ) 278 (sappi-madhu-tela-dhaññādīhi vohăraṃ katvā)- dhaññaṃ ākirati to besprinkle a person with grain (for good luck) Pv iii.54 (= mangalaṃ karoti Pv-a 198 see also mangala).

-āgāra a store house for grain Vin i.240; -piṭaka a basket full of grain Dhp-a iii.370; -rāsi a heap of g AN iv.163, AN iv.170; -samavāpaka grain for sowing, not more & not less than necessary to produce grain MN i.451.

Ved. dhānya, der. fr. dhana

Dhañña2

(adj.) “rich in corn,” rich (see dhana) happy, fortunate, lucky. Often in combn dhanadhañña-Dhp-a i.171; Dhp-a iii.464 (dhaññādika one who is rich in grains etc., i.e. lucky); Dhs-a 116 ■ dhaññapuñña-lakkhaṇa a sign of future good fortune & merit Pv-a 161; as adj. endowed with the mark of… Ja vi.3 See also dhāniya.

Sk. dhānya, adj. to dhana or dhānya. Semantically cp. āḷhiya

Dhata

1. firm, prepared, ready, resolved AN iii.114; Dāvs v.52–⁠2. kept in mind, understood, known by heart Vin ii.95; AN i.36.

Sk. dhṛta, pp. of dharati; cp. dhara & dhāreti

Dhana

(nt.) wealth, usually wealth of money, riches, treasures 1.; Lit. DN i.73 (sa˚); MN ii.180.; AN iii.222; AN iv.4 sq. Nd ii.135 (+ yasa, issariya etc.) Thig 464 (+ issariya) Ja i.225 (paṭhavigataṃ karoti: hide in the ground), 262 289; ii.112; iv.2; Snp 60, Snp 185, Snp 302; Pv ii.610; Dhp-a i.238. Often in combn aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga to indicate immense wealth (see aḍḍha) Pv-a 3, Pv-a 214 etc (see also below ˚dhañña).

2. fig. Used in the expression sattavidha-ariya-dhana “the 7 fold noble treasure” of the good qualities or virtues, viz. saddhā cāga etc. (see enumd under cāga) DN iii.163, DN iii.164, DN iii.251; Vv-a 113; Thag-a 240.

-agga the best treasure (i.e. the ariya-dhana) DN iii.164; -atthika wishing for or desiring wealth Snp 987 -āsā craving for wealth; -kkīta bought for money Dhp-a ii.3, -thaddha proud of wealth, snobbish Snp 104 -dhañña, usually Dvandva-cpd. “money & money’s worth,” but as adj. (always in phrase pahūta˚) it may be taken as Tatpuruṣa “rich in treasures,” otherwise “possessing money & money’s worth” cp. pahūtadhanadhaññavā Ja i.3. As n. Pv i.1111; iii.104; Pv-a 60; Mil 2, Mil 280; as adj. freq. “pahūtadhana-dhañña Vv 6313 = Pv ii.611: Pv-a 97. Thus in ster. formula of aḍḍha mahaddhana etc. DN iii.163 sq.; SN i.71; AN ii.86 -parājaya loss of money, as adj. appl. to kali: the dice marking loss in game Snp 659; -lobha “greed of gold Ja iv.1; -lola = lobha Ja ii.212; -viriya wealth & power Snp 422; -hetu for the sake of wealth Snp 122.

Ved. dhana; usually taken to dhā (see dadhāti) as “stake, prize at game, booty,” cp. pradhāna & Gr. χέμα; but more likely in orig. meaning “grain, posses sion of corn, crops etc.,” cp. Lith. dūna bread, Sk dhānā pl. grains & dhañña = dhana-like, i.e. corn grain

Dhanatta

(nt.) being bent on having money Ja v.449.

Sk. *dhanatvaṃ

Dhanavant

(adj.) wealthy Nd ii.462; Ja i.3.

Sk. dhanavant

Dhanāyati

to desire (like money), to wish for, strive after MN i.260 (perhaps better to be read vanāyati, see formula under allīyati, and note MN i.552).

Denom. to dhana

Dhanika

a creditor, Thig 443, Thag-a, 271; Pv-a 276. Cp. dhaniya.

Sk. dhanika

Dhanita

sounded; as nt sonant (said of a letter) Mil 344.

Sk. dhvanita, pp. of dhvan, cp. Ags. dyn noise = E. din; Ags. dynnan to sound loud

Dhaniya

= dhanika Vin i.76.

Dhanu

(nt.) a bow MN i.429; Ja i.50, Ja i.150 Ja ii.88; Ja iv.327; Pv-a 285.

-kalāpa bow & quiver Vin ii.192; MN i.86; MN ii.99; AN iii.94; Pv-a 154; -kāra a bow maker Mil 331 -kārika Name of a tree Ja v.420; -kārin = prec. Ja v.422 (= ˚pāṭali); -ggaha an archer DN i.51; AN ii.48; AN iv.107; Ja i.58, Ja i.356; Ja ii.87, Ja ii.88; Ja iii.220 (dhanuggaha) Ja iii.322 Ja v.129 (where 4 kinds are enumd); Vism 150 (in simile) DN-a i.156; -takkāri (f.) a plant Ja vi.535; -pāṭali Name of a tree Ja v.422; -lakkhaṇa prophesying from marks on a bow DN i.9.

Sk. dhanus, to Ohg. tanna fir-tree, also oak, orig tree in general, cp. dāru

Dhanuka

(nt.) a (small) bow Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; DN i.7; AN iii.75; AN v.203; Ja vi.41; Mil 229; DN-a i.86.

Sk. dhanuṣka

Dhanta

blown, sounded AN i.253; Ja i.283, Ja i.284.

Sk. dhvānta in meaning of either dhvanita fr. dhvan to sound, or dhamita fr. dhmā to blow, see dhameti

Dhama

(-˚) (adj.) blowing, n. a blower, player (on a horn: sankha˚) DN i.251; SN iv.322.

Sk. dhama, to dhamati

Dhamaka

(-˚) (adj.) one who blows Mil 31; see vaṃsa˚, sankh˚, singa˚.

Dhamati

to blow, to sound (a drum) to kindle (by blowing), melt, smelt, singe AN i.254 AN iv.169; Ja i.283, Ja i.284; Ja vi.441; Nd i.478; Mil 262. ppr. dhamāna SN i.106; Mil 67 ■ Caus. dhameti to blow (an instrument) Ja ii.110; Mil 31, and dhamāpeti to cause to blow or kindle Dhp-a i.442 ■ pp. dhanta dhanita; (the latter to dhvan, by which dhamati is influenced to a large extent in meaning. Cp. uddhana).

Ved. dhamati, dhmā, pp. dh amita & dhmāta, cp. Ohg. dampf “steam”

Dhamadhamāyati

to blow frequently, strongly or incessantly Mil 117.

cp. Sk. dadhmāti, Intens. to dhamati

Dhamani

(f.) a vein Thag 408 Usually in cpd.: -santhata strewn with veins, with veins showing, i.e. emaciated (: nimmaṃsa-lohitatāya sirājālehi vitthatagatta Pv-a 68) Vin iii.110; Ja iv.371 Ja v.69; Dhp 395 = Thag 243 = Pv ii.113; Pv iv.101; Dhp-a i.299, Dhp-a i.367; Dhp-a iv.157; Thag-a 80. So also in Jain Pk. “kisa dhamaṇisaṃtata”: Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; cp. Lal Vist. 226 ■ Also as ˚santhatagatta (adj.) having veins showing all over the body for lack of flesh Vin i.55 Vin iii.146; MN ii.121; Ja i.346, Ja ii.283; Thag-a 80.

Sk. dhamani, to dhamati, orig. a tube for blowing, a tubular vessel, pipe

Dhamma1

(m. & rarely nt.) constitution etc. A. Definitions by Commentators: Bdhgh gives a fourfold meaning of the word dhamma (at DN-a i.99; Dhp-a i.22), viz. (1) guṇe (saddo), applied to good conduct (2) desanāyaṃ, to preaching & moral instruction (3) pariyattiyaṃ, to the 9 fold collection of the Buddh Scriptures (see navanga); (4) nissatte (-nijjīvate), to cosmic (non-animistic) law ■ No. 1 is referred to freq in expls of the term, e.g. dhammiko ti ñāyena samena pavattatī ti DN-a i.249; dhamman ti kāraṇaṃ ñāyaṃ Pv-a 211; as paṭipatti-dhamma at Vv-a 84; No. 3 e.g. also at Pv-a 2. Another and more adequate fourfold definition by Bdhgh is given in Dhs-a 38, viz. (1) pariyatti or doctrine as formulated, (2) hetu, or condition causal antecedent, (3) guṇa, or moral quality or action (4) nissatta-nijīvatā, or “the phenomenal” as opposed to “the substantial,” “the noumenal,” “animistic entity.” Here (2) is illustrated by hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā: “analytic knowledge in dhamma’s means insight into condition, causal antecedent Vibh 293, and see Niyama (dhamma˚). Since, in the former fourfold definition (2) and (3) really constitute but one main implication considered under the two aspects of Doctrine as taught and Doctrine as formulated we may interpret Dhamma by the fourfold connotation:-doctrine, right, or righteousness, condition phenomenon ■ For other exegetic definitions see the Coms & the Niddesa, e.g. Nd;1 94; for modern expls & analyses see e.g. Rhys Davids,; Buddh. India pp. 292–⁠4; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism (1912) pp. 32 sq. 107 sq., 235 sq.; Dhs. trsl. xxxiii. sq.; and most recently the exhaustive monograph by M. & W. Geiger,; Pāli Dhamma. Abhandlungen der Bayer. Akademie xxxi..1; München 1920; which reached the editors too late to be made use of for the Dictionary.

B. Applications and Meaning.

1. Psychologically; “mentality” as the constitutive element of cognition & of its substratum, the world of phenomena. It is that which is presented as “object” to the imagination & as such has an effect of its own:-a presentation; (Vorstellung), or idea, idea, or purely mental phenomenon as distinguished from a psycho-physical phenomenon or sensation (re-action of sense-organ to sensestimulus). The mind deals with ideas as the eye deals with forms: it is the abstraction formed by mano, or mind proper, from the objects of sense presented by the sense-organ when reacting to external objects Thus cakkhu “faculty of sight” corresponds to rūpa “relation of form” & mano “faculty of thought (citta & ceto its organ or instrument or localisation corresponds to dhamma “mentalized” object or “idea” (Mrs. Rh. D. “mental object in general,” also “state of mind”)-(a) subjective: mental attitude thought, idea, philosophy, truth, & its recognition (anubodhi) by the Buddha, i.e. the Dhamma or worldwisdom = philosophy of the Buddha as contained expounded in the Dialogues of the 5 Nikāyas (see below C.)-;Note. The idea of dhamma as the interpreted Order of the World is carried further in the poetical quasi-personification of the Dh. with the phrase “dhammaja dh-nimmita dh-dāyāda” (born of the Norm, created by the Norm, heir of the Norm; see under cpds. and Dhammatā; also s. v. Niyama). That which the Buddha preached, the Dhamma κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν, was the order of law of the universe, immanent, eternal uncreated, not as interpreted by him only, much less invented or decreed by him, but intelligible to a mind of his range, and by him made so to mankind as bodhi revelation, awakening. The Buddha (like every great philosopher & other Buddhas preceding Gotama: ye pi te ahesuṃ atītaṃ addhānaṃ Arahanto Sammāsambuddhā te pi dhammaṃ yeva sakkatvā SN i.140) is a discoverer of this order of the Dhamma, this universal logic, philosophy or righteousness (“Norm”), in which the rational & the ethical elements are fused into one. Thus by recognition of the truth the knower becomes the incorporation of the knowable (or the sense of the universe = Dhamma) & therefore a perfect man one who is “truly enlightened” (sammā-sambuddha) so Bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhu-bhūto ñāṇa-bhūto dhamma˚ brahma˚ & in this possession of the truth he is not; like Brahmā, but Brahmā himself & the lord of the world as the “master of the Truth” vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā Amatassa dātā dhammassāmī SN iv.94; & similarly “yo kho Dhammaṃ passati so mam passati; yo mam passati so Dhammaṃ passati = he who sees the Buddha sees the Truth SN iii.120. Cp with this also the dhamma-cakka idea (see cpds.). On equation Dhamma = Brahman see esp. Geiger, Dhamma pp. 76

80, where is also discussed the formula Bhagavato putto etc. (with dhammaja for the brahmanic brahmaja) ■ In later (Abhidhamma) literature the (dogmatic) personification of Dhamma occurs. See e.g. Tikp A 366.

As 6th sense-object “dhamma” is the counterpart of “mano”: manasā dhammaṃ viññāya “apperceiving presentations with the mind” SN iv.185 etc. (see formula under rūpa); mano-viññeyyā dhammā SN iv.73 cp. SN iii.46; SN iv.3 sq.; SN v.74; DN iii.226, DN iii.245, DN iii.269. Ranged in the same category under the anupassanā-formula (q.v.) “dhammesu dhamm-ânupassin” realising the mentality of mental objects or ideas, e.g. DN ii.95, DN ii.100 DN ii.299; AN i.39, AN i.296; AN ii.256; AN iii.450; AN iv.301. Also as one of the 6 taṇhās “desire for ideas” DN iii.244, DN iii.280 ■ As spirituality opposed to materiality in contrast of dh. āmisa: Iti 98 (˚dāna: a mat. & a spir. gift) ■ (b); objective: substratum (of cognition), piece, constituent (= khandha), constitution; phenomenon, thing “world,” cosmic order (as the expression of cosmic sense, as under a & 2). Thus applied to the khandhas vedanādayo tayo kh. Dhp-a i.35 (see Khandha B 3); to rūpa vedanā saññā sankhārā viññāna SN iii.39; = sankhārā DN iii.58, DN iii.77, DN iii.141. Freq. in formula sabbe dhammā aniccā (+ dukkhā anattā: see nicca) “the whole of the visible world, all phenomena are evanescent etc.” SN iii.132 sq. & passim.; diṭṭhe [va] dhamme in the phenomenal world (opp. samparāyika dh. the world beyond): see under diṭṭha (S iv.175, 205 etc.) ■ ye dhammā hetuppabhavā tesaṃ hetuṃ Tathāgato āha “of all phenomena sprung from a cause the Buddha the cause hath told” Vin i.40 (cp. Isā Upanishad 14). lokadhammā things of this world (viz. gain, fame happiness etc., see under lābha) DN iii.260; Nd ii.55. uttari-manussa-dh˚ā transcendental, supernormal phenomena DN i.211, cp. DN iii.4; abbhuta-dh˚ā wonderful signs, portents Mil 8 (tayo acchariyā a. dh. pāturahesuṃ); Pv-a 2: hassa-khiḍḍhā-rati-dh ■ samāpanna endowed with the qualities or things of mirth, play enjoyment DN i.19; DN iii.31; gāma˚ things or doings of the village DN i.4 (cp. DN-a i.72).

2. Ratio-ethically-(a) objective: “rationality,” anything that is as it should be according to its reason & logicality (as expressed under No. 1 a), i.e. right property, sound condition, norm, propriety, constitution as conforming to No. 1 in universal application i. e; Natural or Cosmic Law: yattha nāmañ ca rūpaṃ ca asesam uparujjhati, taṃ te dhammaṃ idhâññāya acchiduṃ bhavabandhanaṃ (recognising this law) SN i.35 cittacetasikā dh˚ ā a term for the four mental khandhas, and gradually superseding them Dhs 1022 (cf. Compendium of Philosophy, 1); dasadhamma-vidū Vin i.38 (see dasa); with attha, nirutti and paṭibhāna one of the 4 Paṭisambhidās (branches of analytic knowledge AN ii.160; Pṭs i.84, 88 etc.; Vibh. 293 f., Points of Controversy, p. 380. In this sense freq ■ ˚ as adj.: being constituted, having the inherent quality (as based on Natural Law or the rational constitution of the Universe), destined to be…, of the (natural) property of…, like (cp. Gr ■ ειδής or E ■ able, as in change-able = liable to change, also E ■ hood,-ly & P-gata,-ṭhita), e.g. ; khaya -dhamma liable to decay (+ vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha˚), with ref. to the Sankhāras SN iv.216 sq.; in the Paṭiccasamuppāda SN ii.60; akkhaya imperishable Pv iv.152 (dānaṃ a-dh. atthu). cavana˚ destined to shift to another state of existence DN i.18 DN iii.31; Iti 76; Vv-a 54. jāti-jarā-maraṇa˚ under the law of birth, age, & death DN iii.57; AN i.147; AN iii.54; Pv-a 41 (sabbe sattā… ); bhedana˚; fragile (of kāya) DN i.76; SN i.71; Pv-a 41 (bhijjana˚ of sankhārā). vipariṇāma changeable AN i.258; AN iv.157; Pv-a 60 (+ anicca). unchanging DN iii.31 sq. samudaya˚ & nirodha˚;, in formula yaṃ kiñci s-dh˚ṃ sabban tan n-dh˚ṃ “anything that is destined to come into existence must also cease to exist” DN i.110, DN i.180; SN iv.47 & passim. Cp. further anāvatti˚ avinipāta˚ DN i.156; DN iii.107, DN iii.132; AN i.232 AN ii.89, AN ii.238; AN iv.12; anuppāda˚ DN iii.270 ■ (b) subjective: “morality,” right behaviour, righteousness practice, duty; maxim (cp. ṭhāna), constitution of character as conforming to No. 1 in social application i.e. Moral Law.-Often in pl.: tenets, convictions moral habits; & as; adj. that which is proper, that which forms the right idea; good, righteous, true; opp. adhamma false, unjust etc.; evil practice-(a) Righteousness etc.: SN i.86 (eko dh. one principle of conduct ii.280 (dh. isinaṃ dhajo: righteousness is the banner of the Wise); kusala dh. DN i.224; dhamme ṭhita righteous Vv 168; ñāti˚ duty against relatives Pv-a 30; deyya˚ dāna Pv-a 9, Pv-a 70; sad˚ faith (q.v.)-opp. adhamma unrighteousness, sin AN ii.19; AN v.73 sq.; DN iii.70 (˚rāga visama-lobha & micchā-dhamma); Pv iii.96 (˚ṃ anuvattisaṃ I practised wrong conduct) ■ In the same sense: dh. asuddho Vin i.5 = SN i.137 (pāturahosi Magadhesu pubbe dh. a.); pāpa˚ (adj.) of evil conduct Vin i.3; aṭṭhita˚ unrighteous DN iii.133; lobha˚ greedy quality DN i.224, DN i.230; methuna dh. fornication DN iii.133-(β) (pl.) Tenets, practices etc ■ (aa) good: kusalā dh. DN ii.223, DN ii.228; DN iii.49, DN iii.56, DN iii.82, DN iii.102 etc.; SN ii.206 sappurisa˚ AN v.245, AN v.279; Pv-a 114; samaṇa˚ Wanderer’s practice or observances Dhp-a ii.55. brāhmaṇakaraṇā DN i.244; yesaṃ dh˚ānaṃ Gotamo vaṇṇavādin DN i.206 cp. sīlaṃ samādhi paññā ca vimutti ca anuttarā: anubuddhā ime dhammā Gotamena yasassinā DN ii.123 dhammānaṃ sukusalo perfect in all (these) qualities DN i.180; samāhite citte dhammā pātubhavanti “with composed mind appear true views” SN iv.78; dhammesu patiṭṭhito SN i.185; ananussutesu dh˚esu cakkhuṃ udapādi “he visualized undiscovered ideas” SN ii.9. (bb) evil: āvaraṇīyā SN iv.104; pāpakā Vin i.8; DN i.70; AN i.202; akusalā DN iii.56, DN iii.57, DN iii.73, DN iii.91 etc.; lobha˚, dosa˚ moha˚ SN i.70 = Iti 45 = Nd ii.420; SN i.43; MN iii.40; dukkhavipākā vodanīyā saṃkilesikā ponobbhavikā DN i.195 DN iii.57 ■ (cc) various: gambhīrā duddasā etc. Vin i.4; DN i.12; SN i.136 ■ Cp. SN ii.15, SN ii.26; Nd ii.320; Iti 22, Iti 24; Pts i.5, Pts i.22, Pts i.28; Vb 105, Vb 228, Vb 293 sq. etc. etc ■ (γ) (adj. good, pious, virtuous etc.: adhammo nirayaṃ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiṃ “the sinners go to niraya, the good to heaven” Thag 304 = DN-a i.99 = Dhs-a 38; Dhp-a i.22. kalyāṇa˚ virtuous AN i.74, AN i.108; AN ii.81, AN ii.91 AN ii.224 sq.; Pv-a 13. Opp. pāpa˚ Vin iii.90; cp. above a.-(δ) (phrases). Very freq. used as adv. is the instr dhammena with justice, justly, rightly, fitly, properly Vin i.3; DN i.122; SN iv.331; Vv 3419 (= kāraṇena ñāyena vā Vv-a); Pv ii.930 (= yutten’ eva kāraṇena Pv-a 125 as just punishment); iv.169 (= anurūpakāraṇena Pv-a 286). Esp. in phrase of the cakkavattin, who rules the world according to justice: adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena anusāsati (or ajjhāvasati) DN i.89; DN ii.16; SN i.236 = Snp 1002; cp. Snp 554 (dhammena cakkaṃ vattemi, of the Buddha). Opp. adhammena unjustly unfitly, against the rule Vin iv.37; SN i.57; SN iv.331; DN-a i.236dhamme (loc.) honourably Ja ii.159. dhammaṃ carati to live righteously Pv ii.334; see also below C 3 & dh ■ cariyā.;

C. The Dhamma, i.e. moral philosophy, wisdom truth as propounded by Gotama Buddha in his discourses & conversations, collected by the compilers of the 5 Nikāyas (dhamma-vinayaṃ sangāyantehi dhammasangāhakehi ekato katvā Vv-a 3; cp. mayaṃ dh.˚ṃ ca vinayañ ca sangāyāma Vin ii.285), resting on the deeper meaning of dhamma as expld under B 1 a, & being in short the “doctrinal” portions of the Buddhist Tipiṭaka in contradiction to the Vinaya, the portion expounding the rules of the Order (see piṭaka). Dhamma as doctrine is also opposed to Abhidhamma “what follows on the Dhamma.”-(1) Dhamma and Vinaya, “wisdom & discipline,” as now found in the 2 great Piṭakas of the B. Scriptures, the Vinaya and SuttantaPiṭaka (but the expression “Piṭako” is later. See Piṭaka). Thus bhikkhū suttantikā vinaya-dharā dhamma kathikā, i.e. “the bhikkhus who know the Suttantas, remember the Vinaya & preach the Word of the Buddha” Vin ii.75 (≈i.169), cp. iv.67. Dhamma & Vinaya comb;d: yo ‘haṃ evaṃ svâkkhāte Dh-vinaye pabbajito SN i.119; bhikkhu na evarūpiṃ kathaṃ kattā hoti: na tvaṃ imaṃ Dh-v˚ṃ ājānāsi, ahaṃ imaṃ Dh-v˚ṃ ājānāmi etc. SN iii.12; imaṃ Dh-v˚ṃ na sakkomi vitthārena ācikkhituṃ SN i.9; samaṇā… imasmiṃ Dh-v˚e gādhanti SN iii.59 ■ Thus in var. cpds. (see below), as Dh-dhara (+ V-dh.) one who knows both by heart Dh-vādin (+ V-v.) one who can recite both, etc ■ See e.g. the foll. passages: Vin ii.285 (dh. ca v. ca pariyatta), 304; iii.19, 90; DN i.8, DN i.176, DN i.229; DN ii.124 (ayaṃ Dh. ayaṃ V. idaṃ Satthu-sāsanaṃ); DN iii.9, DN iii.12, DN iii.28, DN iii.118 sq. SN i.9, SN i.119, SN i.157; SN ii.21, SN ii.50, (dh-vinaye assāsa); AN iii.297 (id.); SN ii.120; SN iii.91; SN iv.43 sq., 260; AN i.34, AN i.121, AN i.185 AN i.266; AN ii.2, AN ii.26, AN ii.117, AN ii.168; AN iii.8, AN iii.168 sq.; AN iv.36, AN iv.200 sq.v.144, 163, 192; Iti 112; Snp p.102; Ud 50. 2. Dhamma, Buddha, Sangha. On the principle expld in Note on B 1 a rests the separation of the personality of the teacher from that which he taught (the “Doctrine,” the “Word,” the Wisdom or Truth, cp Dhamma-kāyo Tathāgatassa adhivacanaṃ DN iii.84) A person becoming a follower of the B. would conform to his teaching (Dh.) & to the community (“Church” Sangha) by whom his teaching was handed down. The formula of Initiation or membership is therefore threefold, viz. Buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ upemi (gacchāmi), Dhp ˚ṃ…, Sanghaṃ… i.e. I put myself into the shelter of the B., the Dh. & the S. (see further ref. under Sangha) SN i.34 (Buddhe pasannā Dhamme ca Sanghe tibbagāravā: ete sagge pakāsenti yattha te upapajjare i.e. those who adore the B. & his Church will shine in Heaven); DN ii.152 sq., 202 sq., 352; SN iv.270 sq (˚saraṇagamana); Dhp-a i.206; Pv-a 1 (vande taṃ uttamaṃ Dhp ˚ṃ, B ˚ṃ, S ˚ṃ). Cp. Satthari, Dhamme Sanghe kankhati, as 3 of the ceto-khilā AN iii.248

3. Character of the Dhamma in var. attributes, general phraseology ■ The praise of the Dh. is expressed in many phrases, of which only a few of the more frequent can be mentioned here. Among the most famous is that of “dhammaṃ deseti ādi- kalyāṇaṃ majjhe-k˚ pariyosāna-k˚, etc. “beautiful in the beginning, beautiful in the middle & beautiful in the end,” e.g. DN i.62; SN i.105; SN iv.315; AN ii.147, AN ii.208; AN iii.113 sq., 135, 262; DN iii.96, DN iii.267; Nd ii.316; Iti 79; Vv-a 87. It is welcome as a friend, beautifully told, & its blessings are immediate:; sv’ akkhāta, sandiṭṭhika, akālika, ehipassika etc. DN ii.93; DN iii.5, DN iii.39, DN iii.45, DN iii.102; SN i.9, SN i.117; SN ii.199; SN iv.271; AN iii.285 etc. It is mahā -dh. SN iv.128; ariya˚; SN i.30; AN v.241, AN v.274; Snp 783; sammā˚; SN i.129. It is likened to a splendid palace on a mountain-top Vin i.5 = Iti 33 or to a quiet lake with sīla as its banks SN i.169 = SN i.183 and it is above age & decay: satan ca dhammo na jaram upeti SN i.71. Whoever worships the Dh. finds in this worship the highest gratification: diyo loke sako putto piyo loke sako pati, tato piyatarā… dhammassa magganā SN i.210; ye keci ariyadhamme khantiyā upetā… devakāyaṃ paripūressanti SN i.30. Dhp ˚ṃ garukaroti DN iii.84. Opp. Dhamme agārava AN iii.247 AN iii.340; AN iv.84: the slanderers of the Dh. receive the worst punishment after death SN i.30 (upenti Roruvaṃ ghoraṃ)-Var. phrases: to find the truth (i.e. to realize intuitively the Dh.) = dh˚ṃ anubodhati DN ii.113; SN i.137, or vindati DN i.110, DN i.148. To expound the Dh., teach the truth, talk about problems of ethics & philosophy dh˚ṃ deseti Vin iv.134; SN i.210 etc.; katheti Pv-a 41 bhāsati Vin i.101; bhaṇati Vin i.169; pakāseti SN ii.28 SN iv.121. To hear the Dh., to listen to such an exposition: dh˚ṃ suṇāti SN i.114, SN i.137, SN i.196, SN i.210; AN i.36; AN iii.163; Dhp-a iii.81, Dhp-a iii.113. To attain full knowledge of it: dh ˚ṃ pariyāpuṇāti AN ii.103, AN ii.185; AN iii.86, cp. 177 & ˚pariyatti To remember the Dh.: dhāreti AN iii.176 (for details of the 5 stages of the Dh ■ accomplishment); to ponder over the Dh., to study it: dh ˚ṃ viciṇāti SN i.34 = SN i.55, SN i.214; AN iv.3 sq. To enter a relation of discipleship with the Dh.: dh ˚ṃ saraṇaṃ gacchati (see above 2) Pv iv.348 dhammaṃ saraṇatthaṃ upehi Vv 532 (cp. Vv-a 232). See further Pts i.34, Pts i.78, Pts i.131; Pts ii.159 sq.; Pp 58, Pp 66 Vb 293 sq., 329; Ne 11, Ne 15, Ne 31, Ne 83, Ne 112; & cp. cpds

4.; Dhamma and anudhamma. Childers interprets anudhamma with “lesser or inferior dhamma,” but the general purport of the Nikāya passages seems to be something like “in conformity with, in logical sequence to the dhamma” i.e. lawfulness, righteousness, reasonableness, truth (see KS ii.202; Geiger, Pāli Dhamma pp. 115

118). It occurs (always with Dh.) in the foll contexts: dhammassa c’ ânudh ˚ṃ vyākaroti “to explain according to the truth of the Dhamma” DN i.161 DN iii.115; Ud 50; dhammassa hoti anudhammacārin “walking in perfect conformity to the Dh.” AN ii.8 dh ■ anudh ˚ṃ ācaranti id. DN iii.154; dh ■ anudh˚ paṭipanna “one who has reached the complete righteousness of the Dh.” DN ii.224; DN iii.119; SN iii.40 sq.; Iti 81; AN iii.176 (where it forms the highest stage of the Dhammaknowledge viz. (1) dh ˚ṃ suṇāti; (2) pariyāpuṇāti (3) dhāreti; (4) atthaṃ upaparikkhati; (5) dh-anudh ˚ṃ paṭipajjati). Further in series bahussuta, dhammadhara dh-anudh˚-paṭipanna DN ii.104; SN v.261; AN ii.8; Ud 63; also in dhamma-kathika, dh-anudh˚-paṭi panna, diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna-patta SN ii.18 = SN ii.114 SN iii.163; & in atthaṃ aññāya, dhammaṃ aññāya, dhanudh˚-paṭipanna AN i.36; AN ii.97.

-akkhāna discussing or preaching of the Dhamma Nd i.91; -atthadesanā interpretation of the Dh. Mil 21 -ādhikaraṇa a point in the Dh. SN iv.63 = SN v.346; -ādhipa Lord of righteousness (+ anudhamma-cārin) AN i.150 cp. ˚ssāmi; nt. abstr. ˚ādhipateyya the dominating influence of the Dh. AN i.147 sq.; DN iii.220; Mil 94 Vism 14. -ānudhamma see above C 4; -anuvattin acting in conformity with the moral law Dhp 86, cp Dhp-a ii.161; -ānusārin of righteous living DN iii.105, DN iii.254 (+ saddhā˚); MN i.226, MN i.479; AN i.74; AN iv.215; AN iv.23; SN v.200; Pp 15; Ne 112, Ne 189; -anvaya main drift of the faith, general conclusions of the Dh., DN ii.83 DN iii.100; MN ii.120; -abhisamaya understanding of the Truth, conversion to the Dhamma [cp. dharmâbhisamaya Divy 200] SN ii.134 (+ dh ■ cakkhu-paṭilābha) Pp 41; Mil 20; Dhp-a i.27; Dhp-a iv.64; Pv-a 31 etc. -āmata the nectar of righteousness or the Dh. Mil 22 (˚meghena lokaṃ abhitappayanto), 346; -ādāsa the mirror of the Dhamma DN ii.93 (name of an aphorism SN v.357 (id.); Thag 395; Thag-a 179; -āyatana the field of objects of ideation SN ii.72; Dhs 58, Dhs 66, Dhs 147, Dhs 397, Dhs 572 Dhs 594; Vb 70, Vb 72 sq.; -ārammaṇa: dh. as an object of ideation Dhs 146, Dhs 157, Dhs 365; cp. Dhs. trsl. 2; -ārāma “one who has the Dh. as his pleasure-ground,” one who rejoices in the Dh. AN iii.431; Iti 82 (+ dh-rata); Snp 327; Dhp 364, cp. Dhp-a iv.95; -ālapana using the proper address, a fit mode of addressing a person as followed by the right custom. See Dial. i.193

196; Ja v.418 -āsana “the Dh-seat,” i.e. flat piece of stone or a mat on which a priest sat while preaching Ja i.53; Dhp-a ii.31 -ūposatha the fast day prescribed by the Dh. AN i.208 -okkā the torch of Righteousness Ja i.34; -oja the essence or sap of the Dh. SN v.162; Dhp-a iv.169; -osadha the medicine of the Dh. Mil 110, Mil 335. -kathā ethical discussion, fit utterance, conversation about the Dh. advice DN iii.151; Ja i.217; Vv-a 6; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 66; -kathika (adj.) one who converses about ethical problems, one who recites or preaches the Dh., one who speaks fitly or properly. Often in combn. with Vinaya-dhara “one who masters (knows by heart) the Vinaya,” & bahussuta “one who has a wide knowledge of tradition” Vin iv.10, Vin iv.13, Vin iv.141; AN iii.78; Dhp-a ii.30; also with suttantika “one who is versed in the Suttantas” Vin i.169; Vin ii.75; Vin iv.67. The ability to preach the Dhp is the first condition of one who wishes to become perfected in righteousness (see dhamm-ânudhamma, above C 4): SN ii.18, SN ii.114 = SN iii.163; MN iii.40AN i.25 sq. AN ii.138; Pp 42; Ja i.217; Ja iv.2 (˚thera). Cp. also Avs ii.81; -kathikatta (nt.) speaking about the Dh.; preaching MN iii.40; AN i.38 (+ vinayadhara-katta); -kamma a legally valid act, or procedure in accordance with the Rules of the Order Vin iv.37, Vin iv.136, Vin iv.232; AN i.74 (+ vinaya˚); a˚ an illegal act Vin iv.232; AN i.74 -karaka a proper or regulation (standard) water-pot i.e. a pot with a filter for straining water as it was used by ascetics Vin ii.118, Vin ii.177, Vin ii.301; Ja i.395; Ja vi.331; Dhp-a iii.290, Dhp-a iii.452; Vv-a 220 (not ˚karaṇena); Pv-a 185; Mil 68; -kāma a lover of the Dh. DN iii.267; AN v.24, AN v.27 AN v.90, AN v.201; Snp 92. -kāya having a body according to the Norm (the dhammatā of bodies). See Bdhgh as translated in Dial. iii. ad loc.; having a normal body (sic Bdhgh, esp. of the B. DN iii.84; -ketu the standard of the Dh., or Dh. as standard AN i.109 = AN iii.149; -khan- dha the (4) main portions or articles of the Dh. (sīla samādhi, paññā, vimutti) DN iii.229; cp. Sp. Avs ii.155; -gaṇa a body of followers of the Dh. Pv-a 194 -gaṇḍikā (better gaṇṭhikā, q v.) a block of justice, i.e. of execution Ja i.150, Ja i.151; Ja ii.124; Ja vi.176; Ja v.303; -garu worshipping the Dh. SN iv.123; Dhp-a i.17 (˚ka); -gariya a kind of acrobatic tumbler, lit. excellent t. (+ brahma˚ Mil 191; -gu one who knows the Dh. (analogous to vedagu) Ja v.222; Ja vi.261; -gutta protecting the Dh. or protected by the Dh. (see gutta) SN i.222; Ja v.222 (+ dhpāla); -ghosaka (-kamma) praise of the Dh. Dhp-a iii.81 -cakka the perfection or supreme harmony of righteousness (see details under cakka), always in phrase dhcakkaṃ pavatteti (of the Buddha) “to proclaim or inaugurate the perfect state or ideal of universal righteousness” Vin i.8 = MN i.171; Vin i.11; SN i.191 SN iii.86; Snp 556, Snp 693; Mil 20, Mil 343; Dhp-a i.4; Vv-a 165; Pv-a 2, Pv-a 67 etc.; besides this also in simile at SN i.33 of the car of righteousness; -cakkhu “the eye of wisdom, perception of the law of change. Freq. in the standing formula at the end of a conversation with the Buddha which leads to the “opening of the eyes” or conversion of the interlocutor, viz. “virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhcakkhuṃ udapādi” DN i.86, DN i.110; DN ii.288; SN iv.47; AN iv.186; Vin i.11, Vin i.16, Vin i.40 etc. Expl. at DN-a i.237 dhammesu vā cakkhuṃ dhammamayaṃ vā cakkhuṃ Cp. SN ii.134 (˚paṭiĺābha; + dhammâbhisamaya); Dial. i.184; ii.176; -cariyā walking in righteousness, righteous living, observance of the Dh., piety (= dānādi-puññapaṭipatti Vv-a 282) SN i.101 (+ samacariyā kusalakiriyā); AN ii.5; AN iii.448; AN v.87, AN v.302; Snp 263 (= kāyasucaritâdi˚ Snp-a 309), 274 (+ brahma˚). a˚ evil way of living AN i.55 (+ visama-cariyā); -cārin virtuous, dutiful MN i.289; MN ii.188; Dhp 168; Mil 19 (+ samacārin) -cetiya a memorial in honour of the Dh. MN ii.124 -chanda virtuous desire (opp. kāma˚) Dhs-a 370; Vb 208; -ja born of the Dh. (see above, Note on B 1 a), in formula “Bhagavato putto oraso dh-jo, dh-nimmito dh.dāyādo” (the spiritual child of the Buddha) DN iii.84 = SN ii.221; Iti 101; -jāla “net of the Dh.,” name of a discourse (cp. ˚ādāsa & pariyāya) DN i.46; -jīvin living righteously Iti 108; Dhp 24 (= dhammenā samena Dhp-a i.239); -ññū one who knows the Dh. Ja vi.261 -ṭṭha standing in the Law, just, righteous SN i.33 (+ sīlasampanna); Snp 749; Ja iii.334; Ja iv.211; Thag-a 244 -ṭṭhita = ˚ṭṭha DN i.190; -ṭṭhiti˚; having a footing in the Dh. SN ii.60, SN ii.124, cp. ˚ṭṭhitatā: establishing of causes and effects SN ii.25; -takka right reasoning Snp 1107 (= sammāsankappa Nd ii.318); -dāna gift of; -dāyāda heir of the Dh.; spiritual heir (cp. above note on B 1 a) DN iii.84; SN ii.221; MN i.12; MN iii.29; Iti 101; -dīpa the firm ground or footing of the Dh. (usually combd with atta-dīpa: having oneself as one’s refuge, self-dependent) DN ii.100; DN iii.58 DN iii.77; SN v.154; -desanā moral instruction, exposition of the Dh. Vin i.16; DN i.110 etc. (see desanā); -dessin a hater of the Dh. Snp 92; -dhaja the banner of the Dh. AN i.109 AN iii.149; Nd ii.503; Mil 21; -dhara (adj.) one who knows the Dh. (by heart); see above C 4. Combd w. Vinayadhara Vin i.127, Vin i.337; Vin ii.8; AN i.117, & bahussuta (ibid) Snp 58 (cp. Snp-a 110) ■ See also AN iii.361 sq., AN iv.310 Nd ii.319; -dhātu the mental object considered as irreducible element Dhs 58, Dhs 67, Dhs 147 etc.; Vb 87, Vb 89 (see above B 1); an ultimate principle of the Dh., the cosmic law DN ii.8; MN i.396; SN ii.143 sq.; Ne 64 sq.; Vism 486 sq. -dhāraṇa knowledge of the Dh. MN ii.175 -nāṭaka a class of dancing girls having a certain duty Ja v.279; -nimmita see ˚ja; -niyāma belonging to the order of the Norm DN i.190; DA on DN ii.12: dhammatā (˚ka); -niyāmatā, certainty, or orderliness of causes and effects SN ii.25; Points of Controversy, 387; -netti niyāma Mil 328; DN-a i.31; cp. Sk. dharmanetrī Mvu ii.357; Mvu iii.234, Mvu iii.238; -pajjota the lamp of the Dh. Mil 21; -pada (nt.) a line or stanza of the Dhamma a sentence containing an ethical aphorism; a portion or piece of the Dh. In the latter meaning given as 4 main subjects, viz. anabhijjhā, avyāpāda, sammā-sati sammā-samādhi DN iii.229; AN ii.29 sq. (in detail) Ne 170SN i.22 (dānā ca kho dh-padaṃ va seyyo) 202 (dh-padesu chando); AN ii.185; Snp 88 (dh-pade sudesite = nibbāna-dhammassa padattā Snp-a 164) Ja iii.472 (= nibbāna); Dhp-a iii.190 (ekaṃ dh-padaṃ) As Np. title of a canonical book, included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -pamāṇa measuring by the (teaching of Dh. Pp 53; Dhp-a iii.114 (˚ikāni jātisatāni); -pariyatti attainment of or accomplishment in the Dh., the collection of the Dh. in general AN iii.86 (w. ref. to the 9 angas see navanga); -pariyāya a short discourse, or a verse or a poem, with a moral or a text; usually an exposition of a single point of doctrine DN i.46; DN ii.93; DN iii.116; MN i.445; Vin i.40 (a single verse); AN i.65; AN iv.63 (a poem Snp 190

218, where also it is called a dh˚pariyāyo) AN v.288, AN v.291. Such a dh˚pariyāya had very often a special name. Thus Brahmajāla, the Wondrous Net DN i.46; Dhammādāso dh˚p˚, the Mirror of the Law DN ii.93 = SN v.357; Sokasallaharaṇa, Sorrow’s dart extractor AN iii.62; Ādittap˚ dh˚p˚, the Red-hot lancet SN iv.168; Lomahaṃsana˚ MN i.83; Dhammatā-dhamma Mil 193, etc. -pāla guardian of the Law or the Dhp Ja v.222, freq. also as Np.; -pīti (-rasa) the sweetness of drinking in the Dh. (pivaṃ) Snp 257; Dhp 79 (= dhammapāyako dhammaṃ pivanto ti attho Dhs-a ii.126) -bhaṇḍāgārika treasurer of the Dh., an Ep. of Ānanda Thag 1048; Ja i.382, Ja i.501; Ja ii.25; Dhp-a iii.250; Pv-a 2 -bhūta having become the Dh.; righteousness incorporated said of the Buddhas DN iii.84. Usually in phrase (Bhagavā) cakkhu-bhūta… dh-bhūta brahmabhūta AN v.226 sq. (cp. cakkhu); Thag 491; see also above, note B 1 a; -bheri the drum of the Dh. Mil 21 -magga the path of righteousness Snp 696; Mil 21 -maya made (built) of the Dh. (pāsāda) SN i.137; -yanta the (sugar-) mill of the Dh. (fig.) Mil 166. -yāna the vehicle of the Law (the eightfold Noble Path) SN v.5 -rakkhita rightly guarded Snp 288; -rata fond of the Law Snp 327; Dhp 364; Dhp-a iv.95; cp. dh ■ [gatā]rati Th i.742; Dhp. 354; -rasa taste of Dhp. 354; -rājā king of righteousness, Ep. of the Buddha SN i.33 = SN i.55; DN i.88 (of a cakkavatti); AN i.109; AN iii.149; Snp 554; Ja i.262 interpreted by Bdhgh at DN-a i.249 as “dhammena rajjaṃ labhitvā rājā jāto ti” = a king who gained the throne legitimately; -laddha one who has acquired the Dh., holy, pious SN ii.21; Ja iii.472; justly acquired (bhogā) Snp p.87; -vara the best of truths or the most excellent Doctrine Snp 233, Snp 234; -vādin speaking properly speaking the truth or according to the Doctrine Vin ii.285; Vin iii.175 (+ Vinaya-vādin); DN iii.135 (id.) DN i.4, DN i.95 (of Gotama; DN-a i.76: nava-lokuttara-dhamma sannissitaṃ katvā vadati); SN iv.252; AN i.75; AN ii.209 -vicaya investigation of doctrine, religious research Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 90, Dhs 309, Dhs 333, Dhs 555; Vb 106; Vism 132 -vitakka righteous thought AN i.254; -vidū one who understands the Dh., an expert in the Dh. Ja v.222 Ja vi.261; -vinicchaya righteous decision, discrimination of the truth Snp 327; Dhp 144; Dhp-a iii.86; -vihārin living according to the Dh. AN iii.86 sq.; -saṃvibhāga sharing out or distribution of the Dh., i.e. spiritual gifts Iti 98 (opp. āmisa˚ material gifts); -saṅgāhaka a compiler of the sacred scriptures, a διασκευαστής Vv-a 3, Vv-a 169 -saññā righteous thought, faith, piety Pv-a 3; -sabhā a hall for the discussion of the Dh., a chapel, meetinghouse Ja vi.333; Dhp-a i.31; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iv.91; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 196 -samaya a meeting where the Dh. is preached SN i.26 -samādāna acquisition of the Dh., which is fourfold as discussed at MN i.305; DN iii.229; -saraṇa relying on or putting one’s faith in the Dh. (see above C 3) DN iii.58 DN iii.77; SN v.154; -savana hearing the preaching of the Dh. “going to church” Vin i.101; MN ii.175; AN ii.248, AN ii.381 AN iv.361; Snp 265; Dhp-a iii.190; -sākaccha conversation about the Dh. Snp 266; -ssāmi Lord of the Truth, Ep. of the Buddha (see above B 1 a note) SN iv.94; -sāra the essence of the Dh. SN v.402; -sārathi in purisa-dh ■ s˚ at DN i.62 misprint for purisa-damma-s˚; -sārin a follower of the Dh. SN i.170; -sudhammatā excellency of the Dhp SN ii.199; Thag 24, Thag 220, Thag 270, Thag 286; -senāpati “captain of the Dhamma,” Ep. of Sāriputta Thag 1083; Ja i.408; Mil 343; Dhp-a iii.305; Vv-a 64, Vv-a 65, Vv-a 158; -soṇḍatā thirst after justice Ja v.482; -sota the ear of the Dh. SN ii.43.

Ved. dharma & dharman, the latter a formation like karman (see kamma for expl;n of subj. & obj. meanings); dhṛ; (see dhāreti) to hold support: that which forms a foundation and upholds constitution. Cp. Gr. χρόνος, Lat. firmus & fretus Lith. derme (treaty), cp. also Sk. dhariman form, constitution perhaps = Lat. forma, E. form

Dhamma2

(adj.) only in f. in combn with kathā: relating to the Dhamma, viz conversation on questions of Ethics, speaking about the Dh., preaching, religious discourse, sermon. Either as dhammī kathā Vin ii.161; Vin iv.56 & in instr ■ abl dhammiyā kathāya (sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti saṃpahaṃseti: ster. formula) SN i.114, SN i.155, SN i.210, SN iv.122; Pv-a 30 etc.; or as cpd. dhammī-kathā DN ii.1; MN i.161; Snp 325; & dhammi-kathā SN i.155; Pv-a 38.

Sk. *dhārma, cp. dhammika

Dhamma3

(adj.) having a bow: see daḷha˚; also as dhammin in daḷha˚ SN i.185 (see dhammin).

Sk. dhanvan

Dhammatā

(f.) conformity to the Dhammaniyāma (see niyāma), fitness, propriety; a general rule higher law, cosmic law, general practice, regular phenomenon usual habit; often used in the sense of a finite verb: it is a rule, it is proper, one should expect SN i.140 (Buddhānaṃ dh. the law of the B.’s i.e. as one is wont to expect of the B.s), 215 (su˚); iv.216 sq. (khaya˚ etc.) DN ii.12; AN ii.36 (kusala˚); AN v.46; Thag 712; Ja i.245 Ja ii.128; Ne 21, Ne 50, cp. Mil 179; Pv-a 19; Vv-a 7. See also Avs Index.

Sk. dharmitā

Dhammatta (nt.)

liability to be judged Vin ii.55 (& a˚).;

Sk. *dharmatvaṃ

Dhammani

only found in SN i.103, where the Comy. takes it as a locative, and gives, as the equivalent, “in a forest on dry land” (araññe thale). Cp. Kindred Sayings i.129, n. 2.

Dhammika

(adj.) lawful, according to the Dh. or the rule; proper, fit, right permitted, legitimate, justified; righteous, honourable of good character, just, esp. an attr. of a righteous King (rājā cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā) DN i.86; DN ii.16; AN i.109 = AN iii.149; Ja i.262, Ja i.263; def. by Bdhgh as “dhammaṃ caratī ti dh.” (DN-a i.237) & “dhammena caratī ti dh., ñāyena samena pavattalī ti” (ib. 249). Vin iv.284; DN i.103; SN ii.280 (dhammikā kathā) SN iii.240 (āhāra); iv.203 (dhammikā devā, adh˚ asurā) AN i.75; AN iii.277; Snp 404; Dhp-a ii.86 (dohaḷa); iv.185 (˚lābha); Pv-a 25 (= suddha, manohara). Also as saha-dh˚; (esp. in conn. w. pañha, a justified, reasonable proper question: DN i.94; SN iv.299 in detail) Vin iv.141; DN i.161; DN iii.115; AN i.174; unjust, illegal etc. Vin iv.285; SN iv.203; AN iii.243.

= Sk. dharmya, cp. dhammiya

Dhammin1

(adj.) only-˚: having the nature or quality of, liable to, consisting in, practising, acting like, etc. (as ˚dhamma B 2 a), viz. uppāda-vaya˚ DN ii.157; maraṇa˚ (= maraṇadhamma) AN i.147; pāpa Pv i.117 of evil nature.

Sk. dharmin

Dhammin2

(-˚) only in daḷha-dh˚; which is customarily taken as a dern from dhanu, bow = having a strong bow (see dhamma3); although some passages admit interpretation as “of strong character or good practice, e.g. SN i.185.

Dhammiya

(adj.) in accordance with the Dhamma Pv-a 242 (also ; ); Vism 306 (˚lābha).

Sk. dharmya; cp. dhammika

Dhammilla

the braided hair of women Dāvs iv.9.

Sk. dhammilla

Dhammī

in ˚kathā see dhamma2.

*Dhayati

to suck: see dhātī. Caus. dhāpayati, pp. dhāta (q.v.).

Dhara

(usually -˚, except at Mil 420) (adj.) bearing, wearing, keeping; holding in mind, knowing by heart. Freq. in phrase dhammadhara (knowing the Dhamma, q.v.), vinaya˚, mātikā e.g. DN ii.125. dhamma˚ also Snp 58; Thag 187; Nd ii.319; vinaya˚ Mil 344; jaṭājina˚ Snp 1010. See also dhāra.

Sk. dhara, to dhr see dharati

Dharaṇa

(adj.) bearing, holding, comprising Vv-a 104 (suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa˚ nikkha holding, i.e. worth or equal to 15 parts of gold) ■ f. bearing, i.e. pregnant with Snp 26 (of cows: godharaṇiyo paveniyo = gabbhiniyo Snp-a 39). As n. the Earth Ja v.311; Ja vi.526; Mil 34; dharaṇī-ruha Name of a tree Ja vi.482, Ja vi.497; Mil 376.

Dharati

to hold, bear, carry, wear; to hold up, support; to bear in mind, know by heart; to hold out, endure, last continue, live Snp 385 (take to heart, remember); Dhp-a ii.68 ■ ppr. dharamāṇa living, lasting Ja i.75 (dh˚e yeva suriye while the sun was still up); Ja ii.6; Mil 240 Mil 291 (Bhagavato dh˚-kāle) ■ grd. dhareyya, in dh˚divasa the day when a young girl is to be carried (into the house of her husband) Thag-a, 25; cp. dhāreyya Thig 472 = vivāha Thag-a 285 ■ pp. dhata (q.v.)-Caus dhāreti (q.v.).

Sk. dharati, dhṛ; as in Gr. χρόνος; Lat. firmus & fretus. See also daḷha, dhata, dhamma, dhiti, dhuva

Dhava1

the shrub Grislea Tomentosa AN i.202, AN i.204; Ja iv.209; Ja vi.528.

Sk. dhava = madhuratvaca, Halāyudha

Dhava2

a husband Thag-a 121 (dh. vuccati sāmiko tad abhāvā vidhavā matapatikā ti attho).

Sk. dhava, a newly formed word after vidhava, widow, q.v.

Dhavala

(adj.) white, dazzling white Vv-a 252; Dāvs ii.123 Dāvs v.26.

Sk. dhavala, to dhavati, see dhāvati & dhovati

Dhavalatā

(f.) whiteness Vv-a 197.

Dhāta

fed, satiated; satisfied, appeased Vin i.222; Ja i.185; Ja ii.247, Ja ii.446; Ja v.73; Ja vi.555; Pv i.118 (so read for dāta) = Pv-a 59 (: suhita titta); Mil 238, Mil 249 ■ f abstr. dhātatā satiation, fulness, satisfaction, in ati Ja ii.293.

Sk. *dhāyita of dhayati to suck, nourish, pp. dhīta

Dhātar

upholder Ja v.225.

n. ag. fr. dhṛ;

Dhātī

(f.) wet nurse, fostermother DN ii.19; MN i.395 MN ii.97; Ja i.57; Ja iii.391; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 176. In cpds. dhāti˚; viz. -cela swaddling cloth, baby’s napkin SN i.205; Ja iii.309.

Sk. dhātrī = Gr. τιχήνη wet nurse, to dhayati suck, suckle; Idg. *dhēi as in Gr. χ ̈ησχαι to milk, χ ̈ηλυς feeding χηλή female breast; cp. Lat. felare, femina (“giving suck”), filius (“suckling”); Oir. dīnu lamb; Goth daddjan; Ohg. tila breast. See also dadhi, dhītā dhenu

Dhātu

(f.) element. Closely related to dhamma in meaning B 1b, only implying a closer relation to physical substance. As to its gen. connotation cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 198.

1. a primary element, of which the usual set comprises the four paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth water, fire, wind), otherwise termed cattāro mahābhūtā(ni): DN i.215; DN ii.294; DN iii.228; SN i.15; SN ii.169 sq. 224; iv.175, 195; AN ii.165; AN iii.243; Vb 14, Vb 72; Ne 73. See discussed at Cpd. 254 sq ■ A defn of dhātu is to be found at Vism 485 ■ Singly or in other combns paṭhavī˚ SN ii.174; tejo˚ SN i.144; DN iii.227; the four plus ākāsa SN iii.227, plus viññāna SN ii.248; SN iii.231; see below 2 b.

2. (a) natural condition, property, disposition; factor, item, principle, form. In this meaning in var. combns & applications, esp. closely related to khandha. Thus mentioned with; khandha & āyatana; (sensory element & element of sense-perception) as bodily or physical element, factor (see khandha B 1 d & cp. Nd;2 under dhātu) Thig 472. As such (physical substratum) it constitutes one of the lokā or forms of being (khandha˚ dhātu˚ āyatana˚ Nd ii.550). Freq also in combn kāma-dhātu, rūpa˚ arūpa˚ “the elements or properties of k. etc.” as preceding & conditioning bhava in the respective category (Nd;2 s. v.). See under d ■ As “set of conditions or state of being (-˚) in the foll.: loka˚; a world, of which 10 are usually mentioned (equalling 10,000: Pv-a 138) SN i.26; SN v.424; Pv ii.961; Vb 336; Pv-a 138; KS ii.101, n. 1;- nibbāna˚; the state of N. SN v.8; AN ii.120; AN iv.202; Ja i.55; Iti 38 (dve: see under Nibbāna); Mil 312. Also in the foll. connections: amata˚ Iti 62; bhū˚ the verbal root bhū DN-a i.229; ṭhapitāya dhātuyā “while the bodily element, i.e. vitality lasts” Mil 125; vaṇṇa˚ form beauty SN i.131; Pv i.31. In these cases it is so far weakened in meaning, that it simply corresponds to E abstr. suffix-hood or-ity (cp. ˚hood = origin. “form” see ketu), so perhaps in Nibbāna˚ = Nibbāna-dom. Cp dhātuka ■ (b) elements in sense-consciousness: referring to the 6 ajjhattikāni & 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni SN ii.140 sq. Of these sep. sota˚ DN i.79; DN iii.38; Vb 334 dibbasota˚ SN ii.121, SN ii.212; SN v.265, SN v.304; AN i.255; AN iii.17 AN iii.280; AN v.199; cakkhu˚ Vb 71 sq.; mano˚ Vb 175, Vb 182 Vb 301; mano-viññāṇa˚ Vb 87, Vb 89, Vb 175, Vb 182 sq. (c) various: aneka˚ AN i.22; AN iii.325; AN v.33; akusala˚ Vb 363; avijjā˚ SN ii.132; ābhā˚ SN ii.150; ārambha˚ SN v.66 SN v.104 sq.; AN i.4; AN ii.338; ṭhiti˚ SN ii.175; SN iii.231; AN iii.338 dhamma˚ SN ii.56; nekkhamma˚ SN ii.151; AN iii.447 nissāraṇiyā dhātuyo (5) DN iii.239; AN iii.245, AN iii.290. See further SN i.134, SN i.196; SN ii.153, SN ii.248 (aniccā); SN iii.231 (nirodha); iv.67; AN i.176; AN ii.164; AN iv.385; Dhs 58, Dhs 67, Dhs 121 Ne 57, Ne 64 sq.; Thag-a 20, Thag-a 49, Thag-a 285,-(d) Different sets and enumerations: as 3 under kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa AN i.223 AN iii.447; Pts i.137; Vb 86, Vb 363, Vb 404 sq.; under rūpa˚ arūpa˚, nirodha˚ Iti 45 ■ as 6 (pathavī etc. + ākāsa & viññāṇa˚): DN iii.247; AN i.175 sq.; MN iii.31, MN iii.62, MN iii.240; Pts i.136; Vb 82 sq ■ as 7 (ābhā subha etc.): SN ii.150

18: Pts i.101, Pts i.137; Pts ii.230, Dhs 1333; Vb 87 sq. 401 sq.; Vism 484 sq.

3. a humour or affection of the body DN-a i.253 (dhātusamatā).

4. the remains of the body after cremation Pv-a 76; a relic Vv-a 165 (sarīra˚, bodily relic); Dāvs v.3 (dasana˚ the toothrelic) ■ abl. dhātuso according to one’s nature SN ii.154 sq. (sattā sattehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti etc.) Iti 70 (id.); SN iii.65.

-kathā Name of 3rd book of the Abhidhamma Vism 96 -kucchi womb Mil 176; -kusala skilled in the elements MN iii.62; ˚kusalatā proficiency in the (18) elements DN iii.212; Dhs 1333; -ghara “house for a relic,” a dagoba Snp-a 194. -cetiya a shrine over a relic Dhp-a iii.29; -nānatta diversity of specific experience DN iii.289; SN ii.143; SN iv.113 sq., 284; -vibhāga distribution of relics Vv-a 297; Pv-a 212.

Sk. dhātu to dadhāti, Idg. *dhé, cp. Gr. τίχημι, ἀνά χημα, Sk. dhāman, dhāṭr (= Lat. conditor); Goth gadēds; Ohg. tāt, tuom (in meaning-˚ = dhātu, cp. E serf-dom “condition of… ”) tuon = E. to do; & with k-suffix Lat. facio, Gr. (ε ̓́)χηκ(α), Sk. dhāka; see also dhamma

Dhātuka

(adj.) (only-˚) having the nature, by nature, affected with,-like (cp. ˚dhamma B 2a); often simply first part of cpd. (cp. E. friend-like = friendly = friend Ja i.438 (kiliṭṭha˚ miserable), Ja ii.31 (sama˚), 63 (badhira deaf), 102 (paṇḍuroga˚ having jaundice), 114 (dhuttika˚); iv.137 (vāmanaka˚ deformed), 391 (muddhā˚) v.197 (āvāṭa˚); Dhp-a i.89 (anattamana˚).

Dhātura

(adj ■ ˚) in cha˚ consisting of six elements (purisa) MN iii.239 (where āpodhātu omitted by mistake). See dhātu 2 c.

= *dhātuya

Dhāna

(adj.-n.) (adj.) holding, containing (-˚) MN i.11 (ahi kaṇṭaka˚; cp ādhāna & kaṇṭaka) ■ (n.) nt. a receptacle Dhp 58 (sankāra˚ dust-heap = ṭhāna Dhp-a i.445). f. dhānī a seat (= ṭhāna), in rāja˚; “the king’s seat,” a royal town Often in comb with gāma & nigama (see gāma 3 a) Vin iii.89; Ja vi.397; Pv ii.1318.

Sk. dhāna, to dadhāti; cp. dhātu

Dhāniya

(adj.) wealthy, rich, abundant in (-˚) Ja iii.367 (pahūtadhana˚; v.l. BB ˚dhāritaṃ); (nt.) riches, wealth Ja v.99, Ja v.100.

Sk. dhānya, cp. dhañña2

Dhāra

(adj.) (-˚) bearing, holding, having DN i.74 (udaka-rahado sītavāri˚); MN i.281 (ubhato˚) Snp 336 (ukkā˚); Iti 101 (antimadeha˚) 108 (ukkā˚). See also dhārin.

Sk. dhāra to dhāreti; cp. dhara

Dhāraka

(adj.-n.) 1. bearing, one who holds or possesses Dhp-a iii.93 (sampattiṃ).

2. one who knows or remembers AN ii.97 (˚jātika); AN iv.296 sq., 328 (id.).

Dhāraṇa

(nt.) 1. wearing, in mālā˚ (etc.) DN i.5 = AN ii.210 = Pp 58; Kp-a 37 cīvara˚ AN ii.104 = Pp 45.

2. maintaining, sustaining keeping up Mil 320 (āyu˚ bhojana).

3. bearing in mind, remembrance Vin iv.305; MN ii.175 (dhamma˚).

cp. Sk. dhāraṇa, to dhāreti

Dhāraṇaka

1. a debtor (see dhāreti 4) Ja ii.203; Ja iv.45.

2. a mnemonician Mil 79.

der. fr. dhāraṇa

Dhāraṇatā

(f.) 1. wearing, being dressed with (= dhāraṇa 1) Mil 257.

2. mindfulness (= dhāraṇa 3) Nd ii.628; Dhs 14.

Dhāraṇā

(f.) 1. memory Mil 79.

2. the earth (“the upholder,” cp. dharaṇī) Ja vi.180.

to dhāraṇa

Dhārā1

(f.) torrent, stream, flow, shower DN i.74 (sammā˚ an even or seasonable shower; DN-a i.218 = vuṭṭhi); ii.15 (udakassa, streams) Ja i.31; Pts i.125 (udaka˚); Pv ii.970 (sammā˚); Vv-a 4 (hingulika˚); Pv-a 139; Dhp-a iv.15 (assu˚); Sdhp 595 (vassa˚).

Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 1

Dhārā2

(f.) the edge of a weapon Ja i.455; Ja vi.449; Dhp-a 317; DN-a i.37 ■ (adj. (-˚) having a (sharp) edge Ja i.414 (khura˚) Mil 105 (sukhuma˚); ekato˚-ubhato˚ single-& double-edged Ja i.73 (asi); Ja iv.12 (sattha).

Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 2.

Dhārin

(adj ■ ˚) holding, wearing, keeping; often in phrase antimadeha˚ “wearing the last body” (of an Arahant SN i.14; Snp 471; Iti 32, Iti 40Ja i.47 (virūpa-vesa˚) Dāvs v.15 ■ f. ˚inī Pv i.108 (kāsikuttama˚).

Sk. dhārin, see dhāreti & cp. ˚dhara, ˚dhāra

Dhāretar

one who causes others to remember, an instructor, teacher (cp. dhāraṇaka) AN iv.196 (sotā sāvetā uggahetā dh.).

n. ag. to dhāreti 3

Dhāreti

to hold, viz. 1. to carry, bear, wear, possess; to put on, to bring give DN i.166≈(chavadussāni etc.); Vin i.16 = DN i.110 (telapajjotaṃ); DN ii.19 (chattaṃ to hold a sunshade over a person); Pv-a 47 (id.); dehaṃ dh. to “wear,” i.e. to have a body Iti 50, Iti 53 (antimaṃ d.); Ja iv.3 (padumaṃ) Ja vi.136; Pv i.31 (vaṇṇaṃ dh. = vahasi Pv-a 14); tassa kahāpaṇaṃ daṇḍaṃ dh. “to inflict a fine of a k. on him Mil 171.

2. to hold back, restrain Vin iv.261 (kathaṃ dhāretha how do you suppress or conceal pregnancy?); Dhp 222 (kodhaṃ).

3. to bear in mind know by heart, understand: dhammaṃ to know the Dhamma AN iii.176; tipiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ to know the 3 Piṭakas Mil 18DN ii.2; Pp 41 (suṇāti bhaṇati, dh. = remember). Cp. upadhāreti ■ With double acc.: to receive as, to take = believe, to take for consider as, call: upāsakaṃ maṃ dhāretu Bhagavā “call me your disciple” Vin i.16 & passim; atthajālan ti pi naṃ dhārehi (call it… ) DN i.46; yathā pañhaṃ Bhagavā vyākaroti tathā naṃ dhareyyāsi (believe it) DN i.222; yathā no (atthaṃ) Gotamo vyākarissati tathā naṃ dhāressāma DN i.236; evaṃ maṃ dhārehi adhimuttacittaṃ (consider as) Snp 1149 (= upalakkhehi Nd ii.323)

4. to admit, allow, allow for, take up, support (a cause); to give, to owe DN i.125 (may allow), 126; AN ii.69 (na kassa kiñci dh. pays no tribute); Mil 47 (atthaṃ).

Caus. of dharati, q.v. for etym.

Dhāreyya

(nt.) the ceremony of being carried away, i.e. the marriage ceremony, marriage (cp. dhareyya under dharati) Thig 472 (text has vāreyya but Thag-a, 285 explains dhāreyya = vivāha).

orig. grd. of dhāreti

Dhāva

running, racing MN i.446.

Sk. dhāva

Dhāvati

[Sk. dhāvati & dhāvate: 1. to flow, run etc.; cp. Gr. χέω (both meanings); Ags. déaw = E. dew; Ohg tou = Ger. tau; cp. also dhārā & dhunāti.

2. to clean (by running water) etc. = P.; dhovati, q.v.] 1. to run run away, run quickly Snp 939 (cp. Nd i.419); Dhp 344; Ja i.308; Ja vi.332; Nd i.405 = Nd ii.304iii.; Pv iv.161 = palāyati Pv-a 2841; Dhp-a i.389 (opp. gacchati); Pv-a 4; Sdhp 378.

2. to clean etc.: see dhovati; cp dhavala & dhārā;2.

Dhāvana

(nt.) [Sk. dhāvana] running, galloping Ja ii.431; Mil 351.

Dhāvin

: see pa˚.

Dhi1 & Dhī

(indecl.) an excln of reproach & disgust: fie! shame! woe! (with acc. or gen.) S; v.217 (read dhī taṃ for dhītaṃ); Dhp 389 (dhī = garahāmi Dhp-a iv.148); Ja i.507; Dhp-a i.179 (haṃ dhī), 216 (v.l. BB but text has haṃdi). An inorganic r replaces the sandhi-cons. in dhī-r-atthu jīvitaṃ Snp 440; cp. Th i.1150; dhi-r-atthu jātiyā Ja i.59.

Sk. dhik

Dhi2

(f.) wisdom, only in Com. expl. of paññā: “dhi vuccati paññā” (exegesis of dhīra) at Nd i.44 = Ja ii.140 = Ja iii.38.

Sk. dhīḥ to didheti, cp. Av. dī to see, Goth. (filu-) deisei cunning. See also dhīra

Dhikkita

(adj.) reproached, reviled; used also medially: blaming, censuring, condemning Ja i.155 (= garahitā Com.); also in Com expl. of dhīra (= dhikkita-pāpa detesting evil) at Nd i.44 = Ja ii.140 = Ja iii.38 (cp. dhi2).

Sk. dhikkṛta, of dhi1 + kata

Dhiti

(f.) energy, courage, steadfastness, firm character, resolution. SN i.122, SN i.215 = Snp 188 (cp. Snp-a 237); Ja i.266, Ja i.280; Ja iii.239; Ja vi.373 Vb 211; Dhs 13 (+ thāma), 22, 289, 571; Mil 23, Mil 329 Sdhp 574. Equivalent to “wisdom” (cp. juti jutimant & Sk. dhīti) in expl. of dhīra as “dhitisampanna” Nd i.44≈(see dhi2); Pv-a 131.

Sk. dhṛti to dhṛ; see dharati

Dhitimant

(adj.) courageous, firm, resolute AN i.25; Snp 462, Snp 542; Th i.6; Ja ii.140; Ja vi.286 (wise, cp. dhiti).

Sk. dhṛtimant; cp. also dhīmant

Dhītar

and Dhītā (f.) daughter Thig 336 (in faith); Ja i.152, Ja i.253 Ja vi.366; Pv i.115; Dhp-a iii.171, Dhp-a iii.176; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 105 deva˚ a female deva (see deva) Vv-a 137 etc.; nattu˚ a granddaughter Pv-a 17; mātula˚ a niece Pv-a 55; rāja a princess Ja i.207; Pv-a 74. In compn dhītu.

-kkama one who is desirous of a daughter Ja vi.307 (= dhītu atthāya vicarati Com.; v.l. dhītu-kāma) -dhītā granddaughter Pv-a 16.

Sk. dhītā, orig. pp. of dhayati to suck (cp. Lat. filia): see dhāta & dhātī, inflūenced in inflection by Sk. duhitṛ, although etymologically different

Dhītalikā

(f.) a doll Vin iii.36, Vin iii.126 (dāru˚); Dhs-a 321; Pv-a 16.

DimiName of dhītā; cp. dhītikā & potthalikā

Dhītikā

(f.) a doll Thig 374 (= dhītalikā Thag-a 252).

cp. dhītalikā

Dhīna

see adhīna.

Dhīyati

to be contained Thag-a 13 (so read for dhiyati); Pv-a 71.

Sk. dhīyate, Pass. to dahati1

Dhīra

(adj.) constant, firm, self-relying of character; wise, possessing the knowledge of the Dhamma, often = paṇḍita & Ep. of an Arahant DN ii.128; SN i.24 (lokapariyāyaṃ aññāya nibbutā dh.) 122, 221; Snp 45, Snp 235 (nibbanti dhīrā), 913 (vippamutto diṭṭhigatehi dh.), 1052; Iti 68 (˚upasevanā, opp. bāla) 122 (dh. sabbaganthapamocano); Dhp 23, Dhp 28, Dhp 177 (opp bāla); Thag 4; Thag 2, Thag 7 (dhammā = tejussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi Thag-a 13); Ja iii.396; Ja v.116; Pv ii.16ii.945; Nd i.44, Nd i.55, Nd i.482; Nd ii.324 (= jutimant); Mil 342; Kp-a 194, Kp-a 224, Kp-a 230; Dhp-a iii.189 (= paṇḍita).

combining in meaning 1. Sk. dhīra “firm” fr. dhārayati (see dharati & dhiti); 2. Vedic. dhīra “wise” fr. dīdheti (see dhi2). The fluctuation of connotation is also scen in the expls of Coms which always give the foll. three conventional etymologies, viz. dhikkitapāpa dhiti-sampanna, dhiyā (= paññāya) samannāgata Nd144≈(see dhi2)

Dhuta

(& Dhūta ) 1. shaken, moved Dāvs v.49 (vāta˚).

2. lit. “shaken off,” but always expld in the commentaries as “one who shakes off” either cvil dispositions (kilese), or obstacles to spiritual progress (vāra, nīvaraṇa). The word is rare. In one constantly repeated passage (Vin i.45 = Vin i.305 = Vin ii.2 = Vin iii.21 = Vin iv.213) it is an adj opposed to kosajja lazy, remiss; and means either scrupulous or punctilious. At DN i.5 it is used of a pain At Snp 385 we are told of a dhutadhamma, meaning a scrupulous way of life, first for a bhikkhu, then for a layman. This poem omits all higher doctrine and confines itself to scrupulousness as regards minor elementary matters. Cp. Vism 61 for a defn of dhuta.

-aṅga a set of practices leading to the state of or appropriate to a dhuta, that is to a scrupulous person First occurs in a title suffixed to a passage in the Parivāra deprecating such practices. The passage occurs twice (Vin v.131, Vin v.193), but the title, probably later than the text, is added only to the 2nd of the two. The passage gives a list of 13 such practices, each of them an ascetic practice not enjoined in the Vinaya. The 13 are also discussed at Vism 59 sq. The Milinda devotes a whole book (chap. vi.) to the glorification of these 13 dhutangas, but there is no evidence that they were ever widely adopted. Some are deprecated at MN i.282, & examples of one or other of them are given at Vin iii.15; Bv i.59; Ja iii.342; Ja iv.8; Mil 133, Mil 348 Mil 351; Vism 59 (˚kathā), 65 (˚cora), 72 (id.), 80 (defn) Snp-a 494; Dhp-a i.68; Dhp-a ii.32 (dhūtanga); Dhp-a iv.30. Nd i.188 says that 8 of them are desirable. -dhara mindful of punctiliousness Mil 342 (āraññaka dh. jhāyin). -vata the vow to perform the dhutangas Dhp-a vi.165. -vāda one who inculcates punctiliousness SN ii.156; AN i.23; Mil 380; Vism 80; Thag-a 69; Dhp-a ii.30. -vādin ˚vāda Ja i.130.

cp. Sk. dhuta & dhūta, pp. of dhunāti

Dhutatta

(nt.) the state of being punctilious Vin i.305 (of going naked).

Sk. *dhūtatvaṃ

Dhutta

of abandoned life, wild fast, cunning, crafty, fraudulent; wicked, bad. (m.) a rogue, cheat, evil-minded person, scoundrel, rascal There are three sorts of a wild life, viz. akkha˚; in gambling, itthi˚; with women, surā˚; in drink (Snp 106; Ja iv.255) ■ Vin ii.277 (robber, highwayman); AN iii.38 (a˚); AN iv.288 (itthi˚); Ja i.49 (surā˚), 290, 291; ii.416 iii.287; iv.223, 494 (surā˚); Thag-a 250 (itthi˚), 260 (˚purisa), 266 (˚kilesa); Pv-a 3, Pv-a 5 (itthi˚, surā˚), 151. f. dhutti (dhuttī) Ja ii.114 (˚brāhmaṇī).

Sk. dhūrta, from dhūrvati & dhvarati to injure, deceive, cp. Lat. fraus; Idg. *dhreu, an enlarged form of which is *dreugh in Sk. druhyati, drugdha = Ohg triogan, troum etc.: see duhana

Dhuttaka

= dhutta SN i.131; Thig 366 (= itthi-dhutta Thag-a 250); Dhp-a iii.207; Dpvs ix.19 ■ f. dhuttikā always in combn w. chinnikā (meretrix, q.v.) Vin iii.128; Ja ii.114; Mil 122.

Dhunana

(nt.) shaking, in ˚ka (adj.) consisting in shaking off, doing away with, giving up (kilesa˚) Snp-a 373.

Sk. dhūnana

Dhunāti

to shake, toss; to shake off, remove destroy SN i.156 (maccuno senaṃ); Thag 256 = Mil 245; dhunāti pāpake dhamme dumapattaṃ va māluto Th i.2; Ja i.11 (v. 48); Ja iii.44 (hatthe dhuniṃsu, wrung their hands); Vv 649 (= Vv-a 278 misprint dhumanti) aor. adhosi [ = Sk. adhauṣīt] Snp 787 (micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahi Snp-a 523). pp. dhuta & dhūta; (q.v.). Cp nis˚, o˚.

Sk. dhunoti (dhūnoti), dhunāti & dhuvati, Caus. dhūnayati. Idg.; *dhū to be in turbulent motion cp. Gr. χύω, χύνω (to be impetuous), χύελλα (storm) χύμος “thyme”; Lat. fūmus (smoke = fume), suffio Lith. duja (dust); Goth. dauns (smoke & smell); Ohg toum. Connected also w. dhāvate; see further dhūpa dhūma, dhūsara, dhona & a secondary root Idg; *dheṷes in dhaṃsati

Dhuma

in ˚kaṭacchuka = druma˚; having a wooden spoon (see duma), cp. Mar. dhumārā? (Ed. in note) Dhp-a ii.59.

Doubtful reading.

Dhura

(m. & nt.) 1. a yoke, a pole, the shaft of a carriage Ja i.192 (purima-sakaṭa˚) 196; Cp ii.8, 4.

2. (fig.) a burden, load, charge office, responsibility Snp 256 (vahanto porisaṃ dh ˚ṃ “carrying a human yoke” = purisânucchavikā bhārā Snp-a 299), 694 (asama˚ one who has to bear a heavy burden = asamaviriya Snp-a 489); Dhp-a ii.97 (sama˚) dve dhurāni two burdens (viz. gantha˚ & vipassanā study & contemplation) Dhp-a i.7; Dhp-a iv.37; asamadhura Ja i.193; Ja vi.330. Three dhurā are enumd at Ja iv.242 as saddhā˚, sīla˚, and paññā˚ ■ Sdhp 355 (saddhā˚), 392 (+ viriya), 413 (paññā˚) dh ˚ṃ nikkhipati to take off the yoke, to put down a burden, to give up a charge or renounce a responsibility (see ˚nikkhepa): nikkhittadhura AN i.71; AN ii.148; AN iii.65, AN iii.108, AN iii.179 sq.; ; SN v.197 SN v.225; Nd ii.131; Snp-a 236 (= dhuravant).

3. the forepart of anything, head, top, front; fig. chief, leader leading part. nāvāya dh. the forecastle of a ship Ja iii.127 = Ja iv.142; dh-vāta head wind Ja i.100; ekaṃ dh ˚ṃ nīharati to set aside a foremost part DN-a i.135. 4. the far end, either as top or beginning Ja iii.216 (yāva dh-sopānā); Ja iv.265 (dh- sopānaṃ katvā making the staircase end); Ja v.458 (magga-dhure ṭhatvā standing on the far end or other side of the road, i.e. opposite gloss BB maggantare); Vv-a 44 (dh-gehassa dvāre at the door of the top house of the village, i.e. the first or last house).

-gāma a neighbouring village (lit. the first v. that one meets) Ja i.8, Ja i.237; Ja iv.243; Dhp-a iii.414; -dhorayha a yoked ox SN i.173 = Snp 79 (viriyam me dh-dh ˚ṃ); Snp-a 150. -nikkhepa the putting down of the yoke, the giving up of one’s office Ja iii.243; Vism 413. -bhatta a meal where a monk is invited as leader of other monks who likewise take part in it Ja i.449. v.l. (for dhuva˚) iii.97 (v.l. dhuva˚); Vism 66. -yotta yoke-tie, i.e. the tie fastening the yoke to the neck of the ox Ja i.192 Ja vi.253; -vahana bearing a burden (cp. dhorayha) Dhp-a iii.472; -vihāra a neighbouring monastery (cp. ˚gāma Ja i.23; Ja iv.243; Dhp-a i.126 (Np.); Dhp-a iii.224 (id.); -sampaggāha “a solid grip of the burden” (Mrs. Rh.D.) Dhs 13, Dhs 22 etc. (opp. nikkhepa); -ssaha enduring one’s yoke Thag 659. Cp. dhuratā.

Sk. dhur f. & dhura m.

Dhuratā

(f.) in cpd. anikkhitta-dh. “a state of unflinching endurance” Nd ii.394, Nd ii.405 = Dhs 13 etc. = Vb 350, Vb 370 (+ dhura-sampaggāha); opp nikkhitta-dh. weakness of character, lack of endurance (= pamāda) ibid.

abstr. fr. dhura

Dhuravant

(adj.) one who has or bears his yoke, patient, enduring SN i.214 = Snp 187 (: cetasikaviriya-vasena anikkhittadhura Snp-a 236).

cp. Sk. dhuradhara

Dhuva

(adj.) stable, constant, permanent; fixed, regular certain, sure DN i.18; SN i.142; SN iv.370; AN ii.33; Ja i.19 Ja v.121 (˚sassataṃ maraṇaṃ); Ja iii.325; Bv ii.82; Mil 114 (na tā nadiyo dh-salilā). 334 (˚phala); Vism 77; DN-a i.112 (maraṇaṃ apassanto dh.), 150 (= thāvara); Dhp-a iii.170 (adhuvaṃ jīvitaṃ dhuvaṃ maraṇaṃ); Thag-a 241 Sdhp 331nt. permanence, stability MN i.326; Dhp 147. Also Ep. of Nibbāna (see ˚gāmin) ■ nt. as adv dhuvaṃ continuously, constantly, always Ja ii.24 = Mil 172; Pv-a 207; certainly Ja i.18, Ja v.103adhuva (addhuva) changing, unstable, impermanent DN i.19 (anicca a. appāyuka); MN i.326; SN iv.302; Ja i.393; Ja iii.19 (addhuva-sīla); Vv-a 77.

-gāmin leading to permanence, i.e. Nibbāna SN iv.370 (magga); -colā (f.) constantly dressed, of a woman Vin iii.129; -ṭṭhāniya lasting (of shoes) Vin i.190 -dhamma one who has reached a stable condition Dhp-a iii.289; -paññatta (a) permanently appointed (seat Vin iv.274; -bhatta a constant supply of food Vin i.25 Vin i.243; Vin ii.15 (˚ika); Ja i.449 (where the v.l. dhura˚ seems to be preferable instead of dhuva˚, see dhurabhatta) cp. niccabhatta; -yāgu constant (distribution of) rice-gruel Vin i.292 sq.; -lohitā (f.) a woman whose blood is stagnant Vin iii.129; -ssava always discharging, constantly flowing Ja i.6, Ja v.35. Dhuta & Dhutanga;

Sk. dhruva, cp. Lith. drúta firm; Goth. triggws = Ohg. triuwi (Ger. treue, trost); Ags. tréowe E. true, of Idg. *dheru, enlarged form of *dher, see dharati

Dhūta & Dhūtaṅga

see dhuta.

Dhūpa

incense Ja i.51, Ja i.64, Ja i.290 (gandha˚, dvandva cpd.); Ja iii.144; Ja vi.42; Pv-a 141 (gandhap̄uppha˚) dh˚ṃ dadāti to incense (a room) Ja i.399. Sometimes misspelt dhūma, e.g. Vv-a 173 (gandhapuppha˚).

Sk. dhūpa of Idg. *dhūp, enlarged fr. *dhū in dhunāti (q.v.)

Dhūpana

(nt.) incensing, fumigation; perfume, incense, spice Ja iii.144; Ja iv.236; Pv iii.53 (sāsapa˚). Dhupayati & Dhupayati;

Sk. dhūpana

Dhūpāyati & Dhūpayati

to fumigate, make fragrant, perfume Vin i.180; SN i.40 (dhūpāyita) = Thag 448; AN ii.214 sq.; Ja i.73; Mil 333 (sīlagandhena lokaṃ dh.); Dhp-a i.370 (aor. dhūpāyi) Dhp-a iii.38 (ppr. dhūpayamāna) ■ pp. dhūpita.

Sk. dhūpayati; caus. fr. dhūpa

Dhūpita

fumigated, flavoured Vv 435 (tela˚ flavoured with oil). Cp. pa˚.

pp. of dhūpāyati

Dhūma

smoke, fumes Vin i.204 (aroma of drugs) MN i.220 (dh ˚ṃ kattā); AN v.352 (id.); AN ii.53; AN iv.72 sq.v.347 sq.; Ja iii.401, Ja iii.422 (tumhākaṃ dh-kāle at the time when you will end in smoke, i.e. at your cremation) Dhp-a i.370 (eka˚ one mass of smoke); Vv-a 173 (for dhūpa, in gandhapuppha˚); Pv-a 230 (micchā-vitakka in expl. of vidhūma).

-andha blind with smoke Ja i.216; -kālika (cp. above dh ■ kāle) lasting till a person’s cremation Vin ii.172 Vin ii.288; -ketu fire (lit. whose sign is smoke) Ja iv.26; Ja v.63 -jāla a mass of smoke Ja v.497; -netta a smoke-tube, i.e. a surgical instrument for sniffing up the smoke of medical drugs Vin i.204; Vin ii.120; Ja iv.363; Thag-a 14 -sikhā fire (Ep. of Agni; lit. smoke-crested) Vv 352 (sikha) = Vv-a 161; Vism 416; also as sikhin Ja vi.206. Dhumayati & Dhumayati;

Vedic dhūma = Lat. fumus; Gr. χυμός (mood, mind), χυμιάω (fumigate); Ohg. toum etc. Idg. *dhu cp. Gr. χύω (burn incense), χύος (incense). See also dhunāti

Dhūmāyati & Dhūmayati

to smoke, to smoulder, choke; to be obscured to cloud over MN i.142 (v.l. dhūpāyati); Pv i.64 (pariḍayhati + dh. hadayaṃ); Dhp-a i.425 (akkhīni me dh. I see almost nothing). pp. dhūmāyita.

Sk. dhūmayati, Denom. fr. dhūma

Dhūmāyanā

(f.) smoking, smouldering MN i.143; Ne 24 (as v.l. to dhūpāyanā).

Dhūmāyitatta

(nt.) becoming like smoke, clouding over, obscuration SN iii.124 (+ timirāyitattaṃ).

abstr. to dhūmāyati

Dhūsara

(adj.) dust-coloured Vv-a 335.

Sk. dhūsara, Ags. dust = E. dust & dusk, Ger. dust; see dhvaṃsati & dhunoti & cp. Walde,; Lat Wtb. under furo

Dhenu

(f.) a milch cow, a female animal in general Ja i.152 (miga˚ hind); Vv 806; Dhp-a i.170; Dhp-a i.396; Pv-a 112. In simile at Vism 313.

Sk. dhenu, to dhayati to give suck, see dhātī & dhītar

Dhenupa

a suckling calf MN i.79; Snp 26.

dhenu + pa from pibati

Dheyya

(-˚) 1. in the realm of, under the sway or power of: anañña˚ Ja iv.110; kamma˚; AN iv.285; maccu˚; (q.v.) SN i.22; Snp 358, Snp 1104; Thig 10 (= maccu ettha dhīyati Thag-a 13) māra˚; AN iv.228.

2. putting on, assigning, in nāma˚ Dhs 1307.

Sk. dheya, orig. grd. of dhā, see dahati1

Dhota

washed, bleached, clean Ja i.62 (˚sankha a bleached shell); Ja ii.275; Pv-a 73 (˚vattha), 116 (˚hattha with clean hands), 274 (id.); Vism 224 (id.).

Sk. dhāuta, pp. of dhavati2, see dhovati

Dhona

(adj.-n.) 1. purified MN i.386; Snp 351, Snp 786, Snp 813, Snp 834 (= dhutakilesa Snp-a 542); Ja iii.160 (˚sākha = patthaṭasākha Com.; v.l. BB vena˚); Nd i.77 = Nd i.176 (: dhonā vuccati paññā etc., dhuta & dhota used indiscriminately in exegesis following).

2. (pl. the four requisites of a bhikkhu Dhp-a iii.344 (: dhonā vuccati cattāro paccayā, in Com. on atidhonacārin Dhp 240; gloss K. dhovanā, cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887 100).

either = dhota, Sk. dhauta, see dhovati or = dhuta, see dhuta & dhunana. Quite a diff. suggestion as regards etym. is given by Kern,; Toev. 117 who considers it as a possible dern fr. (a)dho, after analogy of poṇa. Very doubtful

Dhopati

to wash, cleanse DN i.93 (dhopetha, imper.; v.l. B dhovatḥa), 124 (dhopeyya; v.l. B. dhoveyya).

a variant of dhovati, taken as Caus. formation

Dhopana

(nt.) 1. ceremonial washing of the bones of the dead DN i.6; aṭṭhi-dhovana Bdhgh at DN-a i.84; AN v.216 (see Commentary at 364). 2. Surgical washing of a wound Ja ii.117.

3. In vaṃsadhopana apparently a feat by acrobats Ja iv.390. It is possible that the passage at DN i.6 really belongs here See the note at Dial. i.9.

a variant of dhovana, q.v.

Dhorayha

“Carrying a yoke” a beast of burden SN i.28; DN iii.113 (purisa˚); AN i.162.

-vata (nt.) the practice of carrying a burden, the state of a beast of burden, drudgery SN i.28; -sīla accustomed to the yoke, enduring; patient Dhp 208 (= dhuravahana-sīlatāya dh. Dhp-a iii.272); -sīlin ˚sīla Ja ii.97 (= dhura-vahanaka-ācārena sampanna Com.).

for *dhor-vayha = Sk. *dhaurvahya, abstr. fr. dhurvaha; may also directly correspond to the latter.

Dhoreyya

(-˚) “to be yoked,” accustomed to the yoke, carrying a burden, in kamma˚ Mil 288.

Sk. dhaureya, der. fr. dhura

Dhova

(adj.-n.) washing, cleansing Bv ii.15.

Sk. dhāva, see dhovati

Dhovati

to rinse, wash, cleanse, purify Vin ii.208, Vin ii.210, Vin ii.214; Snp p.104 (bhājanāni) Ja i.8; Ja v.297dhovi Ja vi.366; Dhp-a iii.207. ger dhovitvā Ja i.266; Ja iv.2; Vv-a 33 (pattaṃ), 77 (id.) Pv-a 75, Pv-a 144. inf. dhovituṃ Vin ii.120; Vin iv.261 pp dhota (q.v.) & dhovita Ja i.266 ■ See also dhopati (*dhopeti).

Sk. dhāvati, see dhāvati

Dhovana

(nt.) washing Vin iv.262; SN iv.316 (bhaṇḍa˚); AN i.132, AN i.161, AN i.277; Iti 111 (pādānaṃ); Ja ii.129; Ja vi.365 (hattha˚); Mil 11 Vism 343; Pv-a 241 (hattha-pāda˚); Dhp-a ii.19 (pāda˚) fig. (ariyaṃ) AN v.216.

N.

Sk. dhāvana; see also dhopana

N

Na1

expletive-emphatic particle, often used in comparative-indefinite sense just so, like this, as if, as (see cana & canaṃ) Ja v.339 (Com. cttha na-kāro upamāne). Also as naṃ (cp. cana → canaṃ) Vin ii.81, Vin ii.186 (kathaṃ naṃ = kathaṃ nu); Ja ii.416; Ja v.302; Ja vi.213 (Com. p. 216: ettha eko na-karo pucchanattho hoti); Thag 1204; Mil 177. Perhaps at Snp 148 (kattha-ci naṃ, v.l. BB na; but Com. Kp-a 247 etaṃ). To this na belongs na3; see also nu & nanu.;

Sk. na (in cana) & nā (in nānā, vi-nā) Idg. pron. base *no, cp. Gr.; νή, ναί; Lat. nē, nae surely, also encl. in ego-ne & in question utruṃne, nam; fuller form *eno as in Sk. anā (adv.) anena, anayā (instr. pron. 3rd) Gr. ε ̓́νη “that day”; Lat. enim

Na2

negātive & adversative particle “not” (Nd ii.326: paṭikkhepa; Kp-a 170 paṭisedhe) 1. often apostr. n’: n’ atthi, n’ etaṃ etc.; or contracted: nāhaṃ, nāpi etc., or with cuphonic consonant y: nayidaṃ (Iti 29, Ja iv.3), nayidha (Iti 36, Iti 37) nayimaṃ (Iti 15) etc. As double negation implying emphatic affirmation: na kiñci na all, everything Ja i.295.

2. In disjunctive clauses: na… na neither-nor, so-or not so. In question: karoti na karoti (“or not”) Ja ii.133. Cp. in same use. Often with added pi (api) in second part: na-nāpi neither-nor (“not-but also not”) SN ii.65; MN i.246; Pv i.119.

3. In syntactic context mostly emphasized by var. negative & adversative particles, viz.; nāpi (see under 2); n’ eva indeed not, not for all that Ja iii.55; or not Kp-a 219; n’ eva-na neither-nor DN i.33, DN i.35; MN i.486; AN v.193; Ja i.207, Ja i.279; Vin ii.185; Dhp-a i.328; Dhp-a ii.65; DN-a i.186, DN-a i.188; n’ eva-na pana id. DN i.24; na kho not indeed Ja ii.134; na ca but not (= this rather than that Ja i.153; na tāva = na kho Vv 3713; na nu (in quest. noune) is it not? Pv-a 74, Pv-a 136; na no surely not Snp 224 na hi [cp. Gr. ούξί not at all; ναίξι certainly] certainly not Dhp 5, Dhp 184; Snp 666; Kp vii.6; na hi jātu id. Snp 152-See also nu, nū, no.

4, na is also used in the function of the negative prefix a-(an-) in cases where the word-negation was isolated out of a sentence negation or where a negated verb was substantified, e.g. (a) nacira (= acira) short, napparūpa abundant, napuṃsaka neuter, neka (= aneka) several; (b) natthi, natthika etc. (q.v.).

Ved. na = Idg. *ně; Lat. ne in n’ unquam etc., Goth. ni; Sk. na ca = Lat. neque = Goth. nih. Also Sk. nā Idg. *nē, cp. Lat. Goth. nē

Na3

base of demonstr. pron. 3rd pers. (= ta˚), only in foll. cases: acc. sg. naṃ (mostly enclitic) fuller form enaṃ him, her, that one etc. Snp 139, Snp 201, Snp 385 Snp 418, Snp 980, Snp 1076; Iti 32; Dhp 42, Dhp 230; Ja i.152, Ja i.172, Ja i.222 Ja iii.281; Kp-a 220; Dhp-a i.181; Dhp-a iii.173; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 73.

acc. pl. ne them Iti 110 (v.l. te); Snp 223 (= te manusse Kp-a 169); Ja ii.417; Ja iii.204; Ja v.458; Dhp-a i.8 Dhp-a i.13, Dhp-a i.61, Dhp-a i.101, Dhp-a i.390; Vv-a 299 ■ gen. dat. pl. nesaṃ DN i.175, DN i.191; Iti 63; Ja i.153; Dhp-a iv.41; Vv-a 37, Vv-a 136. Pv-a 54, Pv-a 201, Pv-a 207. See also cna; cp. nava2.

identical with na1

Nakula

a mungoose, Viverra Ichneumon AN v.289 sq.; Ja ii.53; Ja vi.538; Mil 118, Mil 394.

Ved. nakula, cp. nakra crocodile

Nakkhatta

(nt.) the stars or constellations, a conjunction of the moon with diff. constellations, a lunar mansion or the constellations of the lunar zodiac, figuring also as Names of months & determinant factors of horoscopic and other astrological observation; further a celebration of the beginning of a new month, hence any kind of festival or festivity ■ The recognised number of such lunar mansions is 27, the names of which as given in Sk. sources are the same in Pāli, with the exception of 2 variations (Assayuja for Aśvinī, Satabhisaja for Śatatāraka). Enumd at Abhp. 58–⁠60 as follows Assayuja [Sk. Aśvinī] Bharaṇī, Kattikā, Rohiṇī, Magasiraṃ [Sk. Mṛgaśīrṣa] Addā [Sk. Ārdrā], Punabbasu Phussa [Sk. Puṣya], Asilesā, Maghā, Pubba-phaggunī [Sk. Pūrva-phalgunī). Uttara˚, Hattha, Cittā [Sk Chaitra], Sāti [Svātī], Visākhā, Anurādhā, Jeṭṭhā Mūlaṃ, Pubb-āsāḷha [˚āṣāḍha], Uttar˚, Savaṇa, Dhaniṭṭhā Satabhisaja [Śatatāraka], Pubba-bhaddapadā Uttara˚, Revatī ■ It is to be pointed out that the Niddesa speaks of 28 N. instead of 27 (Nd i.382: aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni), a discrepancy which may be accounted by the fact that one N. (the Orion) bore 2 names, viz. Mṛgaśīrṣa & Agrahayanī (see Plunkett; Ancient Calendars etc. p. 227 sq.) ■ Some of these Ns. are more familiar & important than others, & are mentioned more frequently, e.g. Āsāḷha (Āsālhi˚) Ja i.50 & Uttarāsāḷha Ja i.63, Ja i.82; Kattikā & Rohiṇī Snp-a 456 ■ nakkhattaṃ; ādisati to augur from the stars, to set the horoscope Nd i.382; oloketi to read the stars to scan the constellations Ja i.108, Ja i.253; ghoseti to proclaim (shout out) the new month (cp. Lat. calandae fr. cālāre to call out, scil. mensem), and thereby announce the festivity to be celebrated Ja i.250; n. ghuṭṭhaṃ Ja i.50, Ja i.433; sanghuṭṭhaṃ Pv-a 73; ghositaṃ Vv-a 31 kīḷati to celebrate a (nakkhatta-) festival Ja i.50, Ja i.250; Vv-a 63; Dhp-a i.393 (cp. ˚kīḷā below). n. ositaṃ the festival at an end Ja i.433nakkhatta (sg.) a constellation Snp 927; collect. the stars Vv 811 (cando nparivārito). nakkhattāni (pl.) the stars: nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ chando (the moon is the most prominent of the lights of night) Th 2.143; Vin i.246 = Snp 569 (but cp. expl. at Snp-a 456: candayogavasena “ajja kattikā ajja Rohiṇī” ti paññāṇato ālokakāraṇato sommabhāvato ca nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando ti vutto); DN i.10 (nakkhattānaṃ pathagamanaṃ & uppatha-gamanaṃ a right or wrong course, i.e. a straight ascension or deviation of the stars or planets); DN ii.259; DN iii.85, DN iii.90; AN iv.86; Thig 143 (nakkhattāni namassantā bālā).

-kīḷana = kīḷā Dhp-a iii.461; -kīḷā the celebration of a festival, making merry, taking a holiday Ja i.50; Thag-a 137; Vv-a 109; -ggāha the seizure of a star (by a demon see gāha), the disappearance of a planet (transit?) DN i.10 (expl. at DN-a i.95 as nakkhattasa angārakādi-gahasamāyoga); -patha “the course of the stars,” i.e. the nocturnal sky Dhp 208; -pada a constellation Vin ii.217 -pāṭhaka an astrologer, soothsayer, augur Nd i.382 -pīḷana the failing or obscuration of a star (as a sign of death in horoscopy) Dhp-a i.166;- mālā a garland of stars Vv-a 167; -yoga a conjunction of the planets, a constellation in its meaning for the horoscope Ja i.82 Ja i.253; Dhp-a i.174 (+ tithi-karaṇa); ˚ṃ oloketi to set the horoscope Dhp-a i.166, ˚ṃ uggaṇhāti id. Pv iii.54. -rājā the king of the nakkhattas (i.e. the moon) Ja iii.348.

Ved. nakṣatra collect. formation from naktiḥ & naktā = Gr.; νύς, Lat. nox, Goth. nahts, E night = the nightly sky, the heavenly bodies of the night as opposed to the Sun: ādicco tapataṃ mukhaṃ Vin i.246

Nakha

a nail of finger or toe, a claw Vin ii.133; Snp 610 (na angulīhi nakhehi vā); Ja v.489 (pañcanakhā sattā five-nailed or-toed beings); Kp ii. = Mil 26, cp. taca (pañcatacakaṃ); Kp-a 43; Vv-a 7 (dasa-nakhasamodhāna putting the 10 fingers together); Pv-a 152, Pv-a 192; Sdhp 104.

Ved. nakha, cp. Sk. anghri foot; Gr. ο ̓́νυς (claw, nail), Lat. unguis = Oir. inga; Ohg. nagal = E. nail

Nakhaka

(adj.) belonging to, consisting of or resembling a claw, in hatthi˚; like elephants’ claws, Ep. of a castle (pāsāda) Vin ii.169 (Bdhgh on p. 323: hatthikumbhe patiṭṭhitaṃ, evaṃ evaṃkatassa kir’ etaṃ nāmaṃ) (?).

Nakhin

(adj.) having nails Ja vi.290 (tamba˚ with coppercoloured nails).

Naga

mountain SN i.195 Nd ii.136a (nagassa passe āsīna, of the Buddha); Snp 180 (= devapabbata royal mountain Snp-a 216; or should it mean “forest”?); Thag 41 (˚vivara), 525; Pv ii.961 (˚muddhani on top of the Mount, i.e. Mt. Sineru Pv-a 138; the Buddha was thought to reside there); Mil 327 (id.); Vv 166 (˚antare in between the (5) mountains, see Vv-a 82).

Sk. naga tree & mountain, referred by Fausböll & Uhlenbeck to na + gacchati, i.e. immovable (= sthāvara) more probably however with Lidén (see Walde under nāvis) to Ohg. nahho, Ags. naca “boat = tree”; semantically mountain = trees, i.e. forest

Nagara

(nt.) a stronghold, citadel, fortress a (fortified) town, city. As seat of the government as important centre of trade contrasted with gāma nigama (village & market-place or township) Vin iii.47 (˚bandhana), 184; cp. gāma 3 b. deva˚; deva-city Ji. 3 168, 202; Dhp-a i.280 etc.; cp. yakkha˚ Ja ii.127Vin i.277, Vin i.342, Vin i.344; Vin ii.155, Vin ii.184; DN ii.7; SN ii.105 sq.; SN iv.194 (kāyassa adhivacanaṃ); v.160; AN i.168, AN i.178; AN iv.106 sq (paccantima); v.194 (id.) Dhp 150 (aṭṭhīnaṃ); Snp 414 Snp 1013 (Bhoga˚); Ja i.3, Ja i.50 (Kapilavatthu˚); Ja ii.5; Ja iii.188 Ja vi.368 etc.; Pp 56; Dhp-a iv.2; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 73; Dpvs xiv.51 (+ pura). Cp. nāgara.

-ūpakārikā a town fortified with a wall covered with cement at its base DN i.105, cp. DN-a i.274; -ūpama like a citadel (of citta) Dhp 40, cp. Dhp-a i.317 & Nagaropama sūtra Divy 340; -kathā town-gossip DN i.7; -guttika superintendent of the city police Ja iii.30, Ja iii.436; Ja iv.279; Mil 345 (dhammanagare n-g.), Dhp-a iv.55. Cp. Kern Toev. p. 167; -vara the noble town (of Rājagaha Vv 166, cp. Vv-a 82; -vīthi a city street Ja ii.416; -sobhinī the city belle, a town courtesan Ja ii.367 (˚anā); iii.435 (Sulasā), 475 (˚anī); Dhp-a i.174; Dhp-a ii.201; Pv-a 4 (Sulasā) Mil 350.

Ved. nagara, Non-aryan? Connection with agāra is very problematic

Nagaraka

(nt.) a small city DN i.146 = DN i.169, quoted Ja i.391.

Nagga

(adj.) naked, nude Vin ii.121; Ja i.307; Pv i.61 (= niccola Pv-a 32); ii.15; 81; Pv-a 68 Pv-a 106.

-cariyā going naked Dhp 141; Dhp-a iii.78; cp. Sk nagnacaryā Divy 339; -bhogga one whose goods are nakedness, an ascetic Ja iv.160; Ja v.75; Ja vi.225.

Ved. nagna = Lat. nudus (fr. *nogṷedhos) Goth. naqaps = Ohg. naccot, Ags. nacod = naked; Oir nocht; perhaps Gr. γυμνός

Naggatta

(nt.) = naggiya nakedness Pv-a 106.

Sk. nagnatva

Naggiya

(nt.) naked state, nudity Vin i.292, Vin i.305; SN iv.300; Snp 249.

Sk. *nagnyaṃ

Naggiyā

(adj. f.) = naggā, naked Pv ii.312.

Sk. nagnikā

Naṅgala

(nt.) a plough SN i.115; SN iii.155; AN iii.64; Snp 77 (yuga˚ yoke & plough); Snp p.13; Ja i.57; Thig 441 (= sīra Thag-a 270); Snp-a 146; Vv-a 63 Vv-a 65; Pv-a 133 (dun˚ hard to plough); Dhp-a i.223 (aya˚) iii.67 (id.).

-īsā the beam of a plough SN i.104 (of an elephant’s trunk); -kaṭṭhakaraṇa ploughing SN v.146 = Ja ii.59 -phāla [mod. Ind. phār] ploughshare (to be understood as Dvandva) Dhp-a i.395.

Ved. lāngala; nangala by dissimilation through subsequent nasal, cp. Milinda → Menandros Etym. unknown, prob. dialectical (already in RV iv. 574), because unconnected with other Aryan words for plough. Cp. Balūčī nangār

Naṅgalin

(adj.-n.) having or using a plough, ploughman, in mukha˚ “using the mouth as plough” Thag 101 (maulvergnügt, Neumann) (Mrs. Rh. D. harsh of speech).

Naṅguṭṭha

(nt.) = nangula AN ii.245; Ja i.194 (of a bull); ii.19 (of an elephant); iii.16 (sūci˚), 480 (panther); iv.256 (of a deer); Dhp-a i.275 (of a fish); ii.64.

dial. for *nangūlya → *nanguḷhya?

Naṅgula

(nt.) a tail Thag 113 = Thag 601 (go˚).

Sk. lāngū̆la to langa & lagati (q.v.). cp. Gr.; λαγγάζω, Lat. langueo

Nacira

(adj.) not of long duration, short Snp 694; gen nacirass’ eva after a short time shortly Snp p.16; Ja iv.2, Ja iv.392; Mil 250.

Sk. nacira = na + cira

Nacca

(nt.) (pantomimic) dancing usually combd with singing (gīta, q.v.) & instrumental music (vādita) ■; nacca: AN i.261; DN iii.183; Ja i.61 Ja i.207; DN-a i.77; Pv-a 231nacca-gīta: Ja i.61; Pv iv.72; Dhp-a iii.129; Vv-a 131, Vv-a 135nacca-gīta-vādita (+ visūkadassana): Vin i.83; DN i.5, DN i.6; Kp-a 36; cp Vv 8110 (naccagīte suvādite).

Ved. nṛtya = Anglo-Ind. nautch, etym. uncertain, cp. naccati & naṭati

Naccaka

a dancer, (pantomimic actor Mil 191, Mil 331, Mil 359 (naṭa˚) ■ f. naccakī Vin ii.12.

Sk. *nṛtyaka, distinguished from but ultimately identical with naṭaka, q.v.

Naccati

to dance, play Vin ii.10; Ja i.292; Vv 501 (= naṭati Vv-a 210); 6421. pp. naccento DN i.135; fut. naccissati Vin ii.12; aor nacci Ja iii.127; inf. naccituṃ Ja i.207 ■ Caus. naccāpeti to make play Vism 305 (so read for nacch˚).

Ved. nṛtyati nṛt, cp. nacca & naṭati

Naccana

(nt.) dance, dancing Vv-a 282, Vv-a 315.

Ved. *nṛtyana, cp. naṭana

Najjuha

a kind of cock or hen Ja vi.528, Ja vi.538.

Sk. dātyūha

Naṭa

a dancer, player, mimic, actor Vin iv.285; SN iv.306 sq. Dhp-a iv.60 (˚dhītā), 65 (˚karaka), 224 (˚kīḷā); Mil 359 (˚naccaka); Sdhp 380 ■ Cp. naṭaka & nāṭaka.;

Sk. naṭa dial. ṭ, cp. Prk. naḍa, of nṛt, see naccati

Naṭaka

= naṭa Vin iv.285; Mil 331; Pv-a 3 ■ f. naṭikā DN-a i.239.

Sk. naṭaka

Naṭati

to dance, play Vv-a 210 (= naccati).

Sk. naṭati, of nṛt, with dial. ṭ, cp. naccati

Naṭṭha

perished, destroyed; lost AN ii.249; Ja i.74; Ja i.267.

Sk. naṣṭha, pp. of nassati (naśyati), q.v.

Naṭṭhana

(nt.) destruction Mil 180, Mil 237.

Der. fr. naṭṭha

Naṭṭhāyika

bankrupt Mil 131, Mil 201.

cp. Sk. naṣṭhārtha, i.e. naṣṭha + artha

Nata

bent (on) SN i.186 (a˚); Snp 1143; Nd ii.327.

Sk. nata, pp. of namati, q.v.

Nati

(f.) bending, bent, inclination SN ii.67; SN iv.59; MN i.115. Kalya-rupa

Sk. nati of nam

Kalya-rūpa

pleased, glad Snp 680, Snp 683; not pleased Snp 691.

Natta

(nt.) night, acc. nattaṃ by night, in nattam-ahaṃ by day & by night Snp 1070 (v.l. BB and Nd;2 rattamahaṃ).

Sk. nakta, see nakkhatta

Nattar

grandson Ja i.60 (nattu, gen.), 88; Ud 91 Ud 92; Pv-a 17 (nattu-dhītā great-grand-daughter), 25 (nattā nom.).

Sk. naptṛ, analogy-formation after mātṛ etc. from Ved. napāt; cp. Lat. nepos; Ags. nefa = E. nephew Ohg. nevo

Natthika

(adj.-n.) one who professes the motto of “natthi,” a sceptic, nihilist SN i.96; usually in cpds.

-diṭṭhi scepticism, nihilistic view, heresy Snp 243 (= micchāditthi Com.); Vv-a 342; Pv-a 244; -vāda one who professes a nihilistic doctrine SN iii.73; MN i.403; AN ii.31; Pv-a 215 (+ micchādiṭṭhika).

Sk. nāstika

Natthitā

(f.) nihilism SN ii.17; Ja v.110.

Sk. nāstitā, fr. n’ atthi

Natthibhāva

non-existence Dhp-a iii.324.

n’ atthi-bhāva

Natthu

1. the nose Ja v.166 (= nāsā Com.).

2. = ˚kamma medical treatment through the nose Vin iii.83 (deti).

-kamma nose-treatment, consisting in the application of hot oil (DN-a i.98: telaṃ yojetvā n-karaṇaṃ) DN i.12; Vin i.204; MN i.511; Dhp-a i.12; -karaṇī a pockethandkerchief Vin i.204.

cp. Sk. nas f. & nasta, see etym. under nāsā

Nadati

to roar, cry, make a noise (nadaṃ nadati freq.) Snp 552 (sīha), 684 (id.), 1015; Ja i.50, Ja i.150; Ja ii.110; aor. nadi Ja iii.55; anādisuṃ Ja iv.349. Caus. nadāpeti to make roar Ja ii.244. See also nadī & nāda, & cp. onadati.;

Ved. nadati, nad of unknown etym.

Nadana

(nt.) roaring Ja i.19 (sīhanāda˚ the sound of a lion’s roar).

cp. Sk. nadanu

Nadita

(nt.) roar, noise Ja ii.110.

cp. Sk. nādita, pp. of caus. nadayati

Nadī

(f.) a river; often characterised as mahā˚ in opp to kun˚ rivulet; pl. nadiyo also collect. “the waters ■ DN i.244 (Aciravatī nadī); SN ii.32, SN ii.118, SN ii.135; SN v.390; AN i.33, AN i.136, AN i.243 (mahā˚); ii.55, 140 (mahā˚); iii.52 iv.101 (m˚), 137; Snp 425, Snp 433, Snp 568, Snp 720; Dhp 251; Ja i.296; Ja ii.102; Ja iii.51; Ja iii.91 (Kebukā); v.269 (Vetaraṇī˚); vi.518 (Ketumatī); Pv iv.354; Vism 468 (sīghasotā); Pv-a 256 (m˚); Sdhp 21, Sdhp 194, Sdhp 574 ■ gen. sg nadiyā Ja i.278; Iti 113; instr. nadiyā Ja i.278; Pv-a 46 pl. nom. nadiyo Mil 114 (na tā n. dhuva-salilā), najjo Pv-a 29 (mahā˚); & najjāyo Ja vi.278; gen nadīnaṃ Vin i.246 = Snp 569 (n. sāgaro mukhaṃ) ■ kunnadī a small river SN i.109; SN ii.32, SN ii.118; SN v.47, SN v.63; AN ii.140; AN iv.100 V.114 sq ■ On n. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1906, 100.

-kuñja a river glen DN-a i.209; -kūla the bank of a river Cp iii.71; -tīra = ˚kūla Ja i.278; -dugga a difficult ford in a river SN ii.198; -vidugga = ˚dugga AN i.35; AN iii.128.

Ved. nadī, from nadati = “the roaring,” cp. also nandati

Naddha

tied, bound, fastened, put on Ja i.175 (rathavarattaṃ); Bv i.31 (camma˚, of a drum); Mvu vii.16 (˚pañcāyudha) Mil 117 (yuga˚); Dhs-a 131. Cp. onaddha, vi˚, san˚.

Sk. naddha pp. of nah, see nayhati

Nanandar

(f.) husband’s sister Ja v.269 (= sāmikassa bhaginī p. 275).

Sk. nanāndṛ & nanāndā, to nanā “mother”

Nanikāma

(adj.) disagreeable, unpleasant Dhp 309 (˚seyyā an uncomfortable bed).

na + nikāma = anikāma

Nanu

(indecl.) 1. part. of affirmation (cp. na1): surely, certainly Pv ii.67 (so to be read for nanda? v.l. BB nuna); Manor. Pūr. on AN v.194 (Andersen P. R. 91)

2. part. of interrogation (= Lat. nonne) “is it not (cp. na2): Ja i.151; Ja iii.393; Dhp-a i.33.

Ved. nanu

Nantaka

(nt.) a shred rag, worn-out cloth, usually expld by jiṇṇapilotika (J iii.22) or khaṇḍabhūtā pilotikā (Pv-a 185) or pilotika only (Vv-a 311) ■ SN v.342; AN iii.187; AN iv.376 (˚vāsin as v.l.; text has nantikavāsin); Vv 807 (anantaka) Pv iii.214; Ja iii.22 (˚vāsin clad in rags).

a contamination of namataka (Kern, Toev. p. 169), maybe Sk. naktaka “cover for nakedness (Trenckner, Notes 811), unless it be non-Aryan

Nanda

at Pv ii.67 used either as interj. (= nanu, q.v.) or as voc. in the sense of “dear”; the first expln to be preferred & n. probably to be read as nanu (v.l. nuna or; handa (in which case nanu would be gloss).

Nandaka

(adj.) giving pleasure, pleasing, full of joy; f. nandikā Ja iv.396 (+ khiḍḍā), either as adj or f. abstr. pleasure, rejoicing (= abhindandanā Com.).

Sk. nandikā

Nandati

to be glad, to rejoice, find delight in, be proud of (c. instr.) SN i.110; AN iv.94 sq.; Snp 33; Dhp 18 ■ Caus. nandeti to please, to do a favour Ja iv.107 (nandaya = tosehi Com.); Pv-a 139 (= toseti)-ppr. nandayanto Ja vi.588 ■ Cp. ānandati.

Ved. nandati, nand = nad (cp. vind → vid etc.) orig. to utter sounds of joy

Nandanā

(f.) rejoicing, delight, pleasure SN i.6 = Snp 33.

Sk. nandanā

Nandi1

& (freq.); Nandī (f.) 1. joy, enjoyment, pleasure, delight in (c loc.) SN i.16, SN i.39, SN i.54; SN ii.101 sq. (āhāre); iii.14 (= upādāna) iv.36 sq.; AN ii.10 (kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚), iii.246 iv.423 sq. (dhamma˚); Snp 1055 (+ nivesana); Nd ii.330 (= taṇhā); Pp 57; Dhs 1059≈(in def. of taṇhā) Vb 145, Vb 356, Vb 361; Dhs-a 363; Thag-a 65, Thag-a 167 ■ For nandī at Mil 289 read tandī.

2. a musical instrument: joy-drum [Sk. nandī] Vin iii.108 (= vijayabheri) Cp. ā˚.

-(y)āvatta “turning auspiciously” (i.e. turning to the right: see dakkhiṇāvatta), auspicious, good Ne 2 Ne 4, Ne 7, Ne 113 (always attr. of naya); -ūpasecana (rāgasalla sprinkled over with joy, having joy as its sauce Ne 116, Ne 117; cp. maṃsûpasecana (odana) Ja iii.144 = Ja vi.24 -kkhaya the destruction of (finding) delight SN iii.51 -(ṃ)jaha giving up or abandoning joy Snp 1101 (+ okañjaha & kappañjaha); Nd ii.331; -bhava existence of joy, being full of joy, in ˚parikkhīṇa one in whom joy is extinct (i.e. an Arahant), expld however by Com as one who has rid himself of the craving for rebirth (tīsu bhavesu parikkhīnataṇha Dhp-a iv.192 = Snp-a 469; SN i.2, SN i.53; Snp 175, Snp 637 = Dhp 413; -mukhī (adj ■ f.) “joyfaced,” showing a merry face, Ep. of the night (esp the eve of the uposatha) Vin i.288 (ratti); ii.236 (id.) -rāga pleasure & lust, passionate delight SN ii.227 SN iii.51; SN iv.142, SN iv.174, SN iv.180; MN i.145; Dhs 1059≈, 1136 esp. as attr. of taṇhā in phrase n-r-sahagata-taṇhā (cp Mvu iii.332: nandīrāgasahagatā tr̥ṣṇā) Vin i.10; SN iii.158; SN v.425 sq.; Pts ii.137; Ne 72; -saṃyojana the fetter of finding delight in anything Snp 1109, Snp 1115 Nd ii.332; -samudaya the rise or origin of delight MN iii.267.

Sk. nandi, but cp. BSk. nandī Divy 37

Nandi2

= nandhi.

Nandin

(adj.) finding or giving delight, delighting in, pleasurable, gladdening SN ii.53 (vedanā) AN ii.59, AN ii.61; Iti 112.

Sk. nandin

Nandha

see yuga˚.

Nandhati

meaning not so much “to bind as “to cover”: see apiḷandhati, upanandhati, onandhati pariyonandhati.

for nayhati, der. fr. naddha after analogy of baddha → bandhati

Nandhi

(f.) (usually spelt nandi) a strap, thong Ja i.175 (rathassa cammañ ca nandiñ ca); Snp 622 = Dhp 398 (+ varatta) Snp-a 400; Dhp-a i.44, Dhp-a iv.160.

Sk. naddhrī to naddha, pp. of nah to bind

Napuṃsaka

(adj.) of no sex; lit. Vism 548, Vism 553; Thag-a 260; Vb 417; in gram. of the neuter gender Kacc. 50; Pv-a 266 (is reading correct?)

Ved. napuṃsaka = na + puṃs “notmale”

Nabha

(nt.) & Nabhas (in oblique cases) mist, vapour clouds, sky AN i.242; AN ii.50 (nabhā), iii.240, Snp 687 (nabhasi-gama, of the moon); Vv 323, 352 (= ākāsa Vv-a 161), 534 (id. 236), 6327 (id. 268); Pv-a 65; Mvu vii.9 (nabhasā instr.).

Sk. nabhas; Gr. νέφος & νεφέλη, Lat. nebula, Oir. nēl, Ags. nifol (darkness), Ohg. nebul. See also abbha

Nabbho

= nābhiyo, nom. pl. of nābhi (q.v.).

Namataka

(nt.) a piece of cloth Vin ii.115 (satthaka), 123, 267 (˚ṃ dhāreti).

word & etym. doubtful; cp. nantaka & Bdhgh. Vin ii.317: matakan (sic) ti satthakavedhanakaṃ (= veṭhanakaṃ) pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ

Namati

to bend, bend down (trs. & instr.) direct, apply SN i.137 (cittaṃ) Snp 806; Ja i.61 (aor. nami, cittaṃ) ■ Caus. nameti (not nāmeti, Fsb. to Snp 1143 nāmenti, which is to be corrected to n’ âpenti) to bend, to wield Dhp 80 = Dhp 145 (namayati). As nāmeti at Ja vi.349. pp. namita (q.v.).

Ved. namati, Idg. *nem to bend; also to share out, cp. Gr. νέμω, Goth. niman = Ger. nehmen. See cognates in Walde loc. cit. under nemus

Namana

(nt.) naming, giving a name Kp-a 78; Dhs-a 52 (see nāma2); Vism 528.

a philosophical term constructed by Bdhgh. from nāma, cp. ruppana-rūpa

Namanā

(f.) bent, application, industry Vb 352.

abstr. to namati, cp. Sk. namana nt.

Namassati

to pay honour to, to venerate, honour, do homage to (often with pañjalika & añjaliṃ katvā) Snp 236, Snp 485, Snp 598, Snp 1058 Snp 1063; Nd ii.334; Ja iii.83; Pv ii.1220; Kp-a 196; pot namasseyya Iti 110; Dhp 392, Dhp 1st pl. namassemu Snp 995 ppr. namassaṃ Snp 334, Snp 934; namassanto Snp-a 565, (usually) namassamāna Snp 192, Snp 1142; Nd i.400; Ja ii.73; Vv-a 7 ■ aor. namassiṃsu Snp 287 ■ ger. namassitvā Ja i.1 ■ grd. (as adj.) namassaniya (venerable) Mil 278.

Ved. namasyati, Denom. fr. namo

Namassana

(nt.) (?) veneration Ja i.1.

Namassiyā

(namassā) (f.) worship, veneration Mil 140.

Sk. namasyā

Namita

bent on, disposed to (-˚), able or capable of Ja iii.392 (pabbajjāya-namita-citta); Mil 308 (phalabhāra˚).

pp. nameti

Namo

(nt.) & Nama (nt.) nomage, veneration esp. used as an exclamation of adoration at the beginning of a book (namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammāsambuddhassa) Snp 540, Snp 544; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 67.

Ved. namas, cp. Av. nəmo prayer; Gr. νέμος, Lat. nemus (see namati)

Namuci

(Np.) a name of Māra.

Naya

(adj.-n.) “leading”; usually m: way (fig.), method, plan, manner; inference; sense, meaning (in grammar); behaviour, conduct AN ii.193 = Nd ii.151 (˚hetu through inference); Ne 2 (method), 4 (id.), 7, 113; Mil 316 (nayena = nayahetu); Kp-a 74; Vv-a 112 (sense, context, sentence) Pv-a 1 (ways or conduct), 117 (meaning), 126 (id.), 136 280 ■ nayaṃ neti to draw a conclusion, apply an inference, judge, behave SN ii.58 = Vb 329; Ja iv.241 (anayaṃ nayati dummedho: draws a wrong conclusion) Pv-a 227 (+ anumināti) ■ With ˚ādi˚; N. has the function of continuing or completing the context “and similarly,” e.g. ˚ādinaya-pavatta dealing with this & the following Vv-a 2;… ti ādinā nayena thus & similarly, & so forth Ja i.81; Pv-a 30 ■ Instr. nayena (-˚) as adv. in the way of, as, according(ly): āgata according to what has been shown or said in… Ja i.59; Vv-a 3; Pv-a 280; purima˚ as before Ja i.59 Ja iv.140; vutta˚ as said (above) (cp. vutta-niyāmena Pv-a 13, Pv-a 29, Pv-a 36, Pv-a 71, Pv-a 92 etc ■ sunaya a sound judgment Ja iv.241; dunnaya a wrong principle, method or judgment, or as adj.: wrongly inferred, hard to be understood, unintelligible AN iii.178 = Ne 21; Ja iv.241.

from nayati, to lead, see neti

Nayati

see neti.

Nayana

(nt.) the eye Thig 381; Vv 353; Dhs 597 Vb 71 sq.; Mil 365; Thag-a 255; Vv-a 161 (= cakkhu) Pv-a 40 (nettāni nayanāni), 152; Sdhp 448, Sdhp 621.

Sk. nayana, to nayati = the leader cp. also netra = P. netta

Nayhati

to tie, bind; only in comp. with prep. as upanayhati (cp. upāhanā sandal), pilandhati etc ■ pp naddha (q.v.). See also nandhi, nāha; onayhati unnahanā, piḷayhati.

Ved. nahyati, Idg. *nedh as in Lat. nodus & Ved. nahu

Nayhana

(nt.) tying, binding; bond, fetter Dhp-a iv.161.

Sk. nahana

Nara

man (in poetry esp. a brave, strong heroic man), pl. either “men” or “people” (the latter e.g. at Snp 776, Snp 1082; Pv i.1112) ■ AN i.130 AN ii.5; AN iii.53; Snp 39, Snp 96, Snp 116, Snp 329, Snp 591, Snp 676, Snp 865 etc. Dhp 47, Dhp 48, Dhp 262, Dhp 309, Dhp 341; Ja iii.295; Nd i.12 = Nd ii.335 (definition); Vv-a 42 (popular etymology: narati netī ti naro puriso, i.e. a “leading” man); Pv-a 116 = Dhp 125.

-ādhama vilest of men Snp 246; -āsabha “man bull, i.e. lord of men Snp 684, Snp 996; -inda “man lord,” i.e. king Snp 836; Ja i.151; -uttama best of men (Ep. of the Buddha) SN i.23; DN iii.147; Snp 1021; -deva god-man or man-god (pl.) gods, also Ep. of the B. “king of men SN i.5; Pv iv.350; -nārī (pl.) men & women, appl. to male & female angelic servants (of the Yakkhas) Vv 32;4, 337 538; Pv ii.112; -vīra a hero (?), a skilled man (?) Thag 736 (naravīrakata “by human skill & wit” Mrs. Rh D.). -sīha lion of men Ja i.89.

Ved. nara, cp. nṛtu; Idg. *ner to be strong or valiant = Gr. ἀνήρ, ἀγ ήνωρ (valiant), δρώψ (*νρώψ); Lat neriosus (muscuḷar), Nero (Sabinian, cp. Oscan ner Lat. vir); Oir. nert

Naraka

1. a pit DN i.234; Thag 869; Ja iv.268 (˚āvāṭa Pv-a 225).

2. a name for Niraya, i.e. purgatory; a place of torment for the deceased (see niraya & cp. list of narakas at Divy 67) SN i.209; Snp 706; Pv-a 52; Sdhp 492 (saṃsāraghora˚), 612.

-aṅgāra the ashes of purgatory Sdhp 32.

Sk. naraka; etym. doubtful, problematic whether to Gr. νέρτερος (= inferus), Ags. nord = north as region of the underworld

Narada

(nt.) nard, ointment Ja vi.537. Nala & Nala;

Sk. nalada, Gr. νάρδος, of Semitic origin, cp. Hebr. nīrd

Nala & Naḷa

a species of reed; reed in general Vin iv.35; AN ii.73; Dhp 337; Nd ii.680ii; Ja i.223; Ja iv.141 Ja iv.396 (n. va chinno); Pv i.116 (id.); Dhp-a iii.156; Dhp-a iv.43 See also nāḷa, nāḷī & nāḷikā.;

-āgāra a house built of reeds SN i.156; SN iv.185 (+ tiṇāgāra); AN i.101 (+ tiṇāgāra); Nd ii.40d (id.), Mil 245 cp. Avs Index ii.228 (naḍāgāra); -aggi a fire of reeds Ja vi.100 (˚vaṇṇaṃ pabbataṃ); -kalāpī a bundle of r SN ii.114; -kāra a worker in reeds, basket-maker DN i.51 (+ pesakāra & kumbhakāra); Ja v.291; Thag-a 28; Pv-a 175 (+ vilīvakāra); Dhp-a i.177; -daṇḍaka a shaft of r. Ja i.170; -maya made of r. Vin ii.115; -vana a thicket of reeds Ja iv.140; Mil 342; -sannibha reedcoloured Ja vi.537 (Com.: naḷa-puppha-vaṇṇa rukkhasunakha); -setu a bridge of reeds Snp 4.

Ved. naḍa & Sk. naḷa, with dial. ḍ (ḷ) for *narda, cp. Gr.; νάρδης

Naḷapin

a water-animal Ja vi.537.

Nalāṭa

(nt.) the forehead SN i.118; Ja iii.393; Ja iv.417 (nalāṭena maccuṃ ādāya: by his forelock); Vism 185; Dhp-a i.253.

-anta the side of the forehead Ja vi.331; -maṇḍala the round of the f. DN i.106; Snp p.108.

Ved. lalāṭa = rarāṭa; on n → l cp. nangala

Nalāṭikā

(f.) “belonging to the forehead,” a frown Vin ii.10 (nalāṭikaṃ deti to give a frown).

Sk. lalāṭikā

Nalinī

(f.) a pond Ja iv.90; Vism 84, Vism 17.

Sk. nalinī

Nassati

(v. intr.) to perish, to be lost or destroyed, to disappear, come to an end Snp 666 (na hi nassati kassaci kammaṃ); Iti 90; Ja i.81, Ja i.116, Ja i.150; pret. nassaṃ (prohib.) Snp 1120, pl anassāma MN i.177; aor. nassi AN iii.54 (mā nassi prohib.) Ja iv.137 (cakkhūni ˚iṃsu: the eyes failed); fut. nassisati Ja i.5; cond. nassissa Ja ii.112 ■ Caus. nāseti (q.v.) See also pa˚.

Ved. naś; naśyati & naśati, cp. Gr.; νέκυς, νεκρός (corpse), νέκταρ (“overcoming death = nec + tr̥, cp. tarati); Lat. neco, noceo, noxius

Nassana

(nt.) disappearance, loss, destruction AN iii.54 (˚dhamma adj. doomed to perish).

cp. Sk. naśana

Nahāta

one who has bathed Vin ii.221; Ja i.266; Dhp-a iv.232 (˚kilesatā washed off moral stain).

Sk. snāta, see nahāyati

Nahātaka

“one who has bathed,” a brahmin who has finished the studies MN i.280; AN iv.144; Dhp 422 (expl. at Dhp-a iv.232 with ref. to perfection in the Buddha’s teaching: catusaccabuddhatāya buddha); cp. Snp 521 (one who has washed away all sin), 646.

Ved. snātaka, cp. nahāta & nahāyati

Nahāna

(nt.) bathing, a bath Vin i.47, Vin i.51 = Vin ii.224; Vin i.196 (dhuva˚ constant bathing), 197; SN i.183 SN v.390 (fig.); Ja i.265; Pv-a 50; Vism 27.

-kāla bathing time Pv-a 46; -koṭṭhaka bath-room Dhp-a iii.88; -garuka fond of bathing Vin i.196; -cuṇṇa bath powder (cp. nahāniya˚) Dhp-a i.398; -tittha a shallow place for bathing Dhp-a i.3; Dhp-a iii.79.

Sk. snāna

Nahāniya

(adj.) belonging to a bath, bath-; in ˚cuṇṇa bath-powder Pv-a 46.

Nahāpaka

a barber, bath attendant DN i.74; AN iii.25; DN-a i.157 (= ye nahāpenti); Pv-a 127 (= kappaka).

Sk. snāpaka, fr. Caus, nahāpeti; cp. nahāpita

Nahāpana

(nt.) bathing, washing (trs.) DN i.7, DN i.12; AN i.62, AN i.132; AN ii.70; AN iv.54; Iti 111 (ucchādana + ); Vv-a 305 (udakadāna + ).

Nahāpita

a barber, who has also the business of preparing & giving baths (cp. Ger “bader”) a bath-attendant (see kappaka). Barbers ranked as a low class socially, and rebirth in a barber’s family was considered unfortunate. Vin i.249 (˚pubba who had formerly been a barber); DN i.225; Ja i.137 Ja ii.5; Ja iii.451; Ja iv.138 (eight kahāpaṇas as a barber’s fee) DN-a i.157 (= kappaka); Vv-a 207 (˚sālā a barber’s shop).

Sk. only snāpaka (see nahāpaka); new formation fr. Caus. nahāpeti as n. ag. with a- theme instead of ar-, cp. sallakatta for sallakattar

Nahāpeti

to wash, to give a bath, bathe Ja i.166; Pv-a 49; Vv-a 68, Vv-a 305.

Sk. snāpayati, Caus. of nahāyati

Nahāmin

(adj.-n.) a barber, a low-class individual Pv iii.114 (= kappaka-jātika Pv-a 176).

= nahāpaka; Kern, Toev. asks: should it be nahāpin?

Nahāyati

(rarely nhāyati ) to bathe (trs. & intr.), to wash, to perform an ablution (esp. at the end of religious studentship or after the lapse of a lustrative period) Vin ii.280; Ja i.265; Ja vi.336; Pv-a 93. ppr. nahāyanto (Pv-a 83); nahāyamāna (Vin ii.105); inf. nahāyituṃ (Vin i.47; Pv-a 144); ger. nahāyitvā (Ja i.50; Ja vi.367; Pv-a 42); nahātvā (Ja i.265; Ja iii.277; Dhp-a iii.88; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 62 (after mourning), 82; grd. nahāyitabba (Vin ii.220 Vin ii.280). Naharu & Nharu;

Ved. snāti & snāyati,; snā = Gr. νήξω (to swim), ναρός, *Νηρεύς (Nereid), ν ̈ησος (island) Lat. nare (to swim); cp. also Sk. snauti, Gr. νάω, νέω; Goth. sniwan

Nahāru & Nhāru

sinew, tendon muscle. In the anatomy of the body n. occupies the place between maṃsa (flesh, soft flesh) & aṭṭhi (bone) as is seen from ster. sequence chavi, camma, maṃsa nahāru, aṭṭhi, aṭṭhi-miñja (e.g. at Vin i.25; Ja iii.84) See also defn in detail at Snp-a 246 sq. & Kp-a 47.; Vin i.25 (nh˚); MN i.429 (used for bow strings); AN i.50 AN iii.324; AN iv.47 sq. (˚daddula), 129; Kh 111.; Snp 194 (aṭṭhi˚) Nd ii.97 (nh˚); Dhp-a iii.118; Thag-a 257 (nh˚) Pv-a 68 (aṭṭhi-camma˚), 80 (camma-maṃsa˚); Sdhp 46 Sdhp 103.

Sk. snāyu, Idg. *sné to sew, cp. Gr. νέω, νήχω, ν ̈ημα (thread); Ohg. nājan; also Gr. νεϋρον (= Lat. nervus); Ags. sinu (= sinew); Ohg. senawa Goth. nepla = Ags. nāēdl (= needle); Oir. snātha (thread); Ohg. snuor (cord) = Ags. snōd

Nahuta

(nt.) a vast number, a myriad Snp 677; Ja i.25, Ja i.83; Pv iv.17; Dhp-a i.88; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 265.

Sk. nayuta (m. pl.) of unknown etym. Is it the same as navuti? The corresponding v → y → h is frequent, as to meaning cp. nava 3

Nāga

1. a serpent or Nāga demon, playing a prominent part in Buddh. fairy-tales, gifted with miraculous powers & great strength. They often act as fairies are classed with other divinities (see devatā), with whom they are sometimes friendly, sometimes at enmity (as with the Garuḷas) DN i.54; SN iii.240 sq.v.47, 63; Bu. i.30 (dīghāyukā mahiddhikā); Mil 23 Often with supaṇṇā (Garuḷas); Ja i.64; Dhp-a ii.4; Pv-a 272. Descriptions e.g. at Dhp-a iii.231, Dhp-a iii.242 sq.; see also cpds.

2. an elephant, esp. a strong, stately animal (thus in combn hatthi-nāga characterising “a Nāga elephant”) & freq. as symbol of strength & endurance (“heroic”). Thus Ep. of the Buddha & of Arahants Popular etymologies of n. are based on the excellency of this animal (āguṃ na karoti = he is faultless, etc.): see Nd;1 201 = Nd ii.337; Thag 693; Pv-a 57 ■ (a) the animal DN i.49; SN i.16; SN ii.217, SN ii.222; SN iii.85; SN v.351; AN ii.116; AN iii.156 sq.; Snp 543; Vv 55 (= hatthināga Vv-a 37); Pv i.113. mahā˚ AN iv.107, AN iv.110 ■ (b) fig. hero or saint: SN ii.277; SN iii.83; MN i.151, MN i.386; Dhp 320; Snp 29, Snp 53, Snp 166, Snp 421, Snp 518. Of the Buddha: Snp 522, Snp 845 Snp 1058, Snp 1101; Mil 346 (Buddha˚).

3. The Nāga-tree (now called “iron-wood tree,” the P. meaning “fairy tree”), noted for its hard wood & great masses of red flowers (= Sk. nāgakesara, mesua ferrea Lin.): see cpds ˚rukkha, ˚puppha, ˚latā.;

-āpalokita “elephant-look” (turning the whole body) a mark of the Buddhas MN i.337; cp. BSk. nāgâvalokita Divy 208; -danta an ivory peg or pin, also used as a hook on a wall Vin ii.117 (˚ka Vin ii.114, Vin ii.152); Ja vi.382 -nāṭaka snakes as actors Dhp-a iv.130; -nāsūru (f. (woman) having thighs like an elephant’s trunk Ja v.297 -puppha iron-wood flower Mil 283; -bala the strength of an elephant Ja i.265; Ja ii.158; -bhavana the world of snakes Nd i.448; Ja iii.275; Dhp-a iv.14; -māṇavaka a young serpent Ja iii.276; f. ˚ikā ib. 275; Dhp-a iii.232 -rājā king of the Nāgas, i.e. serpents Ja ii.111; Ja iii.275; Snp 379 (Erāvaṇa, see detail Snp-a 368); Dhp-a i.359 Dhp-a iii.231, Dhp-a iii.242 sq. (Ahicchatta); iv.129 sq. (Paṇṇaka) -rukkha the iron-wood tree Ja i.35 (cp. Mvu ii.249) -latā = rukkha Ja i.80 (the Buddha’s toothpick made of its wood), 232; Dhp-a ii.211 (˚dantakaṭṭha toothpick) -vatta habits of serpents Nd i.92, also adj. ˚ika ibid. 89 -vana elephant-grove Dhp 324; Dhp-a iv.15; -vanika cl hunter MN i.175; MN iii.132; -hata one who strikes the el (viz. the Buddha) Vin ii.195.

Ved. nāga; etym. of 1. perhaps fr. *snagh = Ags. snaca (snake) & snaegl (snail); of 2 uncertain, perhaps a Non-Aryan word distorted by popular analogy to nāga1

Nāgara

a citizen Ja i.150; Ja iv.404; Ja v.385; Dāvs ii.85; Vv-a 31; Pv-a 19; Dhp-a i.41.

Sk. nāgara, see nagara

Nāgarika

(adj.) citizen-like, urbane, polite DN-a i.282.

Sk. nāgarika

Nāṭaka

1. (m.) a dancer, actor, player Ja i.206; Ja v.373; Dhp-a iii.88; Dhp-a iv.59, Dhp-a iv.130; nāṭakitthi a dancing-girl, nautch-girl Dhp-a iii.166; Vv-a 131.

2. (nt.) a play, pantomime Ja i.59; Ja v.279, also used coll. = dancing-woman Ja i.59 (?) ii.395.

Sk. nāṭaka; see naccati

Nātha

protector, refuge, help AN v.23, AN v.89; Dhp 160 (attā hi attano n.), 380; Snp 1131 (Nd ii.has nāga) Dhp-a iv.117; Pv-a 1. lokanātha Saviour of the world (Ep. of the Buddha) Snp 995; Pv-a 42anātha helpless, unprotected, poor Ja i.6 (nāthânāthā rich poor); Pv-a 3 (˚sālā poor house) 65. Cp. nādhati.

Ved. nātha, nāth, to which Goth. nipan (to support), Ohg. gināda (grace)

Nāda

loud sound, roaring, roar Ja i.19 (sīha˚), 50 (koñca˚), 150 (mahā˚). Cp. pa˚.

Sk. nāda, see nadati

Nādi

(f.) = nāda, loud sound, thundering (fig.) Vv 6410.

Nādhati

to have need of to be in want of (c. gen.) Ja v.90 (Com. expls by upatappati milāyati; thinking perhaps of nalo va chinno).

Sk. nādhate = nāthate (see nātha), only in nadhamāna, cp. RV x.65, 5: nādhas

Nānatta

(nt. m.) diversity, variety, manifoldness, multiformity, distraction; all sorts of (opp. ekatta, cp. MN i.364: “the multiformity of sensuous impressions,” M.A.). Enumn of diversity as nānattā, viz. dhātu˚ phassa˚ vedanā˚ saññā˚ sankappa chanda˚ pariḷāha˚ pariyesanā˚ lābha˚ DN iii.289; SN ii.140 sq., cp. iv.113 sq., 284 sq.; Pts i.87AN iv.385; Pts i.63 sq., 88 sq.; SN ii.115 (vedanā˚); Pts i.91 (samāpatti & vihāra˚); Ja ii.265. In composition, substituted sometimes for nāna. Cp. Dialogues i.14, n. 2.

-kathā desultory talk, gossip DN i.8; (= niratthakakathā DN-a i.90); SN v.420; -kāya (adj.) having a variety of bodies or bodily states (combd with or opp. to ekatta˚, nānatta-saññin, & ekatta-saññin), appl. to manussā, devā, vinipātikā (cp. nava sattâvāsā) AN iv.39 sq. = Nd ii.5702; DN iii.253, DN iii.263, DN iii.282; -saññā consciousness of diversity (Rh. D.: “idea of multiformity, Dial. ii.119; Mrs. Rh. D. “consciousness of the manifold”) MN i.3; SN iv.113 sq.; DN iii.224, DN iii.262 sq., 282; AN i.41, AN i.267; AN ii.184; AN iii.306; Pts ii.172; Dhs 265 (cp trsl. p. 72); Vb 342, Vb 369; -saññin having a varying consciousness (cp. ˚kāya), DN i.31 (cp. DN-a i.119) 183 iii.263.

Sk. nānatva; abstr. fr. nānā

Nānattatā

(f.) = nānatta, diversity (of states of mind). Seven sorts at Vb 425: ārammaṇa manasikāra˚ chanda˚ paṇidha˚ adhimokkha˚ abhinīhāra paññā˚.

2nd abstr. to nānā

Nānā

(adv.) variously differently. 1. (abs.) AN i.138 (on different sides, viz right

1 285), 884 sq.

2. more frequently in cpds., as first part of adj. or n. where it may be trsld as “different, divers, all kinds of” etc Before a double cons. the final ā is shortened: nānagga (for nānā + agga), nānappakāra etc. see below.

-agga (-rasa) all the choicest delicacies Ja i.266 (˚bhojana, of food); Ja vi.366; Pv-a 155 (˚dibbabhojana) -ādhimuttikatā diversity of dispositions DN-a i.44 Ne 98; -āvudhā (pl.) various weapons Ja i.150; -karaṇa difference, diversity Vin i.339 (sangha˚); MN ii.128 cp. Divy 222; -gotta of all kinds of descent Pv ii.916 -citta of varying mind Ja i.295 (itthiyo); -jana all kinds of folk Snp 1102; Nd i.308 (puthu˚); -titthiya of var. sects DN iii.16 sq.; -pakkāra various, manifold Ja i.52 (sakuṇā) 127, 278 (phalāni); DAi. 148 (āvudhā); Pv-a 50, Pv-a 123 Pv-a 135; -ratta multi-coloured Snp 287; Ja vi.230; -rasā (pl. all kinds of dainties Pv ii.911; -vāda difference of opinion DN i.236; -vidha divers, various, motley Pv-a 53, Pv-a 96 Pv-a 113, and passim; -saṃvāsaka living in a different part or living apart Vin i.134 sq. (opp. samāna˚), 321; ii.162. Nabhi & Nabhi

Ved. nānā, a redupl. nā (emphatic particle, see na1) “so and so,” i.e. various, of all kinds

Nābhi & Nābhī

(f.) 1. the navel AN iii.240; Ja i.238; DN-a i.254 (where it is said that the Vessā (Vaiśyas) have sprung from the navel of Brahmā).

2. the nave of a wheel Vv 644 (pl. nabhyo & nabbho SS = nābhiyo Vv-a 276) Ja i.64; Ja iv.277; Mil 115.

Vedic nābhi, nābhī; Av. nabā; Gr. ὀμφαλός (navel); Lat. umbo & umbilicus; Oir. imbliu (navel); Ags. nafu; Ohg. naba (nave), Ger. nabel = E nave & navel

Nāma

(nt.) name.

1. Literal. nom. nāmaṃ SN i.39; Snp 808; Ja ii.131; Mil 27; acc. nāmaṃ Pv-a 145 (likhi: he wrote her name) ■ nāmaṃ karoti to give a name Snp 344 Nd ii.466 (n’ etaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ on “Bhagavā”) Ja i.203, Ja i.262 (w. double acc.) ■ nāmaṃ gaṇhāti to call by name, to enumerate Ja iv.402; Pv-a 18 (v.l. BB nāmato g.). Definitions at Vin iv.6 (two kinds: hīna & ukkatṭha˚) and at Vism 528 (= namanalakkhaṇa)

2.; Specified. nāma as metaphysical term is opposed to rūpa, & comprises the 4 immaterial factors of an individual (arūpino khandhā, viz. vedanā saññā sankhāra viññāṇa; see khandha II. Ba). These as the noëtic principle combd with the material principle make up the individual as it is distinguished by “name & body” from other individuals. Thus nāmarūpa individuality, individual being. These two are inseparable (aññamaññûpanissitā ete dhammā, ekato va uppajjanti Mil 49). SN i.35 (yattha n. ca rūpañ ca asesaṃ uparujjhati taṃ te dhammaṃ idh’ aññāya acchiduṃ bhavabandhanaṃ); Snp 1036, Snp 1100; Nd i.435 = Nd ii.339 (nāma = cattāro arūpino khandhā); Dhp-a iv.100 (on Dhp 367): vedanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ rūpakkhandhassa cā ti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ vasena pavattaṃ nāmarūpaṃ; Dhs-a 52: nāmarūpa-duke nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena nāmaṭṭhena namanaṭṭhena ca nāmaṃ ruppanaṭṭhena rūpaṃ. Cp. DN i.223; DN ii.32, DN ii.34, DN ii.56, DN ii.62; SN i.12 (taṇhā nrūpe), 23 (n-rūpasmiṃ asajjamāna); ii.3, 4, 66 (nrūpassa avakkanti), 101 sq. (id.); MN i.53; AN i.83, AN i.176 AN iii.400; AN iv.385 (˚ārammaṇa); v.51, 56; Snp 355, Snp 537 Snp 756, Snp 909; Dhp 367; Iti 35; Pts i.193; Pts ii.72, Pts ii.112 sq. Vb 294; Ne 15 sq., 28, 69; Mil 46. Nāma + rūpa form an elementary pair DN iii.212; Kp iv. Also in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.), where it is said to be caused (conditioned) by viññāṇa & to cause saḷāyatana (the 6 senses), DN ii.34; Vin i.1 sq.; SN ii.6 sq.; Snp 872 (nāmañ ca rūpañca paṭicca phassā; see in detail expld at Nd i.276). Synonymous with nāmarūpa is nāmakāya Snp 1074; Nd ii.338; Pts i.183; Ne 27, Ne 41, Ne 69, Ne 77. In this connection to be mentioned are var. definitions of nāma as the principle or distinguishing mark (“label” of the individual, given by Coms, e.g. Nd i.109, Nd i.127 Kp-a 78; with which cp. Bdhgh’s speculation concerning the connotation of nāma mentioned by Mrs. Rh. D. at Dhs. trsl. p. 341.

3. Use of Cases. Instr. nāmena by name Pv-a 1 (Petavatthū ti n.); Mvu vii.32 (Sirīsavatthu n.) ■ acc. nāma (the older form, cp. Sk. nāma by name SN i.33, SN i.235 (Anoma˚); Snp 153, Snp 177; Ja i.59 (ko nām’ esa “who by name is this one” = what is his name), 149 (nāmena Nigrodhamigarājā n.), 203 (kiṃsaddo nāma esa); ii.4; iii.187; vi.364 (kā nāma tvaṃ). See also evaṃnāma, kinnāma; & cp. the foll.

4.; nāma (acc.) as adv. is used as emphatic particle = just, indeed for sure, certainly Ja i.222; Ja ii.133, Ja ii.160, Ja ii.326; Ja iii.90; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 63 etc. Therefore freq. in exclamation exhortation (“please,” certainly) Ja vi.367; Dhp-a iii.171; Pv-a 29 (n. detha do give); in combn with interr. pron. = now, then Ja i.221 (kiṃ n.), 266 (kathaṃ n.); iii.55 (kiṃ); Kp iv. (ekaṃ n. kiṃ); with neg. = not at all, certainly not Ja i.222; Ja ii.352; Ja iii.126 etc ■ Often further emphasised or emphasising other part.; e.g. pi (= api) nāma really, just so Vin i.16 (seyyathā p. n.) Snp p.15 (id.); Vv-a 22 (read nāma kāro); Pv-a 76 app’ (= api) eva n. thus indeed, forsooth Vin i.16; Iti 89 = MN i.460; Ja i.168; Pv ii.26 (= api nāma Pv-a 80) eva nāma in truth Pv-a 2; nāma tāva certainly Dhp-a i.392, etc.

-kamma giving a name, naming, denomination Dhs 1306; Bdhd 83; -karaṇa name-giving, “christening Dhp-a ii.87; -gahaṇa receiving a name, “being christened” Ja i.262 (˚divasa) -gotta ancestry, lineage SN i.43 (˚ṃ na jīrati); Snp 648, Nd ii.385 (mātāpettikaṃ n.) -dheyya assigning a name, name-giving Ja iii.305 Ja iv.449; Ja v.496; Dhs 1306. -pada see pada. -matta a mere name Mil 25.

Vedic nāman, cp. Gr. ο ̓́νομα (ἀν ώνυμος without name); Lat. nomen; Goth. namō; Ags. noma, Ohg namo

Nāmaka

(adj.) 1. (-˚) by name SN ii.282 (Thera˚); Pv-a 67, Pv-a 96 (kaṇha˚).

2. consisting of a mere name i.e. mere talk, nonsense, ridiculous DN i.240.

fr. nāma

Nāmeti

at Snp 1143 (Fsb.) is to be read as nâpenti. Otherwise see under namati.

Nāyaka

a leader, guide, lord, mostly as Ep. of the Buddha (loka˚ “Lord of the World” Snp 991 (loka˚); Mvu vii.1 (id.); Sdhp 491 (tilokassa) bala-nāyakā gang leaders Ja i.103.

BSk. nāyaka (cp. anāyaka without guide Avs i.210); fr. neti; cp. naya

Nārāca

an iron weapon, an arrow or javelin MN i.429; Ja iii.322; Mil 105, Mil 244, Mil 418 -valaya an iron ring or collar (?) Mvu vii.20 (Com “vaṭṭita-assanārāca-pasa” = a noose formed by bending the ends of the n. into a circle).

Sk. nārāca; perhaps for *nāḍāca & conn. with nālīka, a kind of arrow, to nāḷa

Nārī

(f.) woman, wife, female Snp 301, Snp 836; Dhp 284; Ja i.60; Ja iii.395; Ja iv.396 (˚gaṇa); Vv 61, 4416; Pv i.91 (= itthi Pv-a 44). pl. nariyo (Snp 299, Snp 304, Snp 703), nāriyo (Snp 703 v.l. BB; Pv ii.952). Combd with nara as naranārī, male & female (angels), e.g. Vv 53;8 Pv ii.112 (see nara). Nala & Nala;

Sk. nārī to nara man, orig. “the one belonging to the man”

Nāla & Nāḷa

(nt.) a hollow stalk, esp. that of the water lily AN iv.169; Ja i.392 (˚pana v.l. ˚vana); Vv-a 43. See also nāḷikā & nālī.;

Sk. nāla, see nala

Nālaṃ

(adv.) not enough, insufficient Iti 37; Ja i.190; DN-a i.167.

= na alaṃ

Nāḷikā

(f.) a stalk, shaft; a tube, pipe or cylinder for holding anything; a small measure of capacity Vin ii.116 (sūci˚, cp. sūcighara, needle-case) DN i.7 (= bhesajja˚ DN-a i.89); AN i.210; Ja i.123 (taṇḍula a nāḷi full of rice); vi.366 (aḍḍha-n-matta); Nd ii.229 Cp. pa˚.

-odana a nāḷi measure of boiled rice SN i.82; Dhp-a iv.17; -gabbha an (inner) room of tubular shape Vin ii.152.

Sk. nāḍikā & nālikā

Nāḷikera

the coconut tree Vv 4413 Ja iv.159; Ja v.384; DN-a i.83; Vv-a 162.

Sk. nārikera, nārikela, nalikera, nālikela: dialect, of uncertain etym.

Nāḷikerika

(adj.) belonging to the coconut tree Ja v.417.

Nāḷī

(f.) & (in cpds.); nāḷi a hollow stalk, tube, pipe; also a measure of capacity Vin i.249; AN iii.49; Ja i.98 (suvaṇṇa˚), 124 (taṇḍula˚), 419; iii.220 (kaṇḍa˚ a quiver); iv.67; Dhp-a ii.193 (tela˚), 257. Cp pa˚.

-paṭṭa a covering for the head, a cap Ja vi.370, Ja vi.444 (text ˚vaṭṭa); -matta as much as a tube holds AN ii.199; Pv-a 283; Dhp-a ii.70; Ja i.419 (of aja-laṇḍikā).

Sk. nāḍī, see nala

Nāvā

(f.) a boat, ship Vin iii.49 (q.v. for definition & description) SN i.106 (eka-rukkhikā); iii.155 = v.51 = AN iv.127 (sāmuddikā “a liner”); AN ii.200; AN iii.368; Snp 321, Snp 770, Snp 771; Dhp 369 (metaphor of the human body); Ja i.239 Ja ii.112; Ja iii.126; Ja iii.188; Ja iv.2, Ja iv.21, Ja iv.138; Ja v.75 (with “500 passengers), 433; vi.160 (= nāvyā canal? or read nālaṃ?); Vv 61 (= pota Vv-a 42, with pop. etym. “satte netī ti nāvā ti vuccati”); Pv iii.35 (= doṇi Pv-a 189) Mil 261 (100 cubits long); Dāvs iv.42; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 53 Sdhp 321. In simile Vism 690.

-tittha a ferry Ja iii.230; -sañcaraṇa (a place for) the traffic of boats, a port Mil 359.

Ved. nāuḥ & nāvā, Gr.; ναϋς, Lat. navis

Nāvāyika

a mariner, sailor, skipper Mil 365.

Sk. nāvāja = Gr. ναυηγός, cp. Lat. navigo

Nāvika

1. a sailor, mariner Ja ii.103; Ja iv.142; Mil 359; Dāvs iv.43 (captain).

2. a ferryman Ja ii.111; Ja iii.230 (Avariya-pitā.).

Sk. nāvika

Nāvutika

(adj.) 90 years old Ja iii.395 (˚ā itthi); Snp-a 172.

fr. navuti

Nāsa

destruction, ruin, death Ja i.5, Ja i.256; Sdhp 58, Sdhp 319. Usually vi˚, also adj. vināsaka Cp. panassati.

Sk. nāśa, see nassati

Nāsana

(nt.) destruction, abandoning, expulsion, in ˚antika (adj.) a bhikkhu who is under the penalty of expulsion Vin i.255.

Sk. nāśana

Nāsā

(f.) 1. the nose, Snp 198, Snp 608.

2. the trunk (of an elephant) Ja v.297 (nāga˚-uru); Sdhp 153.

-puṭa “nose-cup”; the outside of the nose, the nostril Ja vi.74; Vism 195 (nāsa˚), 264 (nāsa˚, but Kp-a 67 nāsā˚), 283 (nāsa˚). -vāta wind, i.e. breath from the nostrils Ja iii.276.

Vedic nāsā (du.); Lat. nāris, Ohg. nasa, Ags. nasu

Nāsika

(adj.) belonging to the nose, nasal, in ˚sota the nostril or nose (orig. “sense of smell” DN i.106; Snp p.108.

cp. Sk. nāsikya

Nāsitaka

(adj.) one who is ejected Vin iv.140 (of a bhikkhu).

see nāsa & nāseti

Nāseti

1. to destroy, spoil, ruin; to kill Ja i.59; Ja ii.105, Ja ii.150; Ja iii.279, Ja iii.418. 2. to atone for a fault (with abl.) Vin i.85, Vin i.86, Vin i.173 etc. Cp. vi˚.

Sk. nāśayati, Caus. of nassati, q.v.

Nāha

(nt.) armour Ja i.358 (sabba˚sannaddha). Cp. onāha.

cp. nayhati, naddha

Ni˚

;. Nearly all (ultimately prob. all words under this heading are cpds. with the pref. ni.; A. Forms. 1. Pāli ni˚; combines the two prefixes ni nis; (nir). They are outwardly to be distinguished inasmuch as ni is usually followed by a single consonant (except in forms where double cons. is usually restored in composition, like ni-kkhipati = ni + kṣip; nissita ni + sri. Sometimes the double cons. is merely graphic or due to analogy, esp. in words where ni-is contrasted with ud- (“up”), as nikkujja → ukkujja, niggilati → uggilati, ninnamati → unnamati). On the other hand a compn with nis is subject to the rules of assimilation viz. either doubling of cons. (nibbhoga = nir-bhoga where vv is represented by bb (nibbiṇṇa fr. nir-vindati) or lengthening of ni to (nīyādeti as well as niyy˚ nīharati = nir + har ), or single cons. in the special cases of r & v; (niroga besides nīroga for nirroga, cp. duratta → dūrakkha; niveṭheti = nibbeṭheti, nivāreti = *nivvāreti = nīvāreti). Before a vowel the sandhi-cons. r is restored: nir-aya, nir-upadhi etc.

2. Both ni & nis are base-prefixes only, & of stable, well-defined character i.e. never enter comb;ns with other prefixes as first (modifying) components in verb-function (like saṃ, vi etc.), although nis occurs in such combn in noun-cpds negating the whole term: nir-upadhi, nis-saṃsaya etc. 3. ni is freq. emphasised by saṃ as saṃni˚ (tud, dhā pat, sad); nis most freq. by abhi as abhinis˚ (nam, pad vatt, har).

B. Meanings. 1. ni (with secondary derivations like nīca “low”) is a verb-pref. only, i.e. it characterises action with respect to its direction, which is that of (a) a downward motion (opp. abhi & ud); (b) often implying the aim (= down into, on to, cp. Lat. sub in subire, or pref. ad˚); or (c) the reverting of an upward motion = back (identical with b); e.g. (a) ni-dhā (put down), ˚kkhip (throw d.), ˚guh (hide d.), ˚ci (heap up) ˚pad (fall d.), ˚sad (sit d.); (b) ni-ratta (at-tached to) ˚mant (speak to); ˚yuj (ap-point), ˚ved (ad-dress), ˚sev (be devoted to) etc.; (c) ni-vatt (turn back).

2. nis (a) as verb-pref. it denotes the directional “out” with further development to “away from, opposite, without, pointing out the finishing, completion or vanishing of an action & through the latter idea often assuming the meaning of the reverse, disappearance or contrary of an action = “un” (Lat. dis-), e.g. nikkhamati (to go out from) opp. pavisati (to enter into), ˚ccharati (nis to car to go forth), ˚ddhamati (throw out), ˚pajjati (result from), ˚bbattati (vatt spring out from), nīharati (take out), nirodhati (break up, destroy) ■ (b) as nounpref it denotes “being without” or “not having” E. -less, e.g. niccola without clothes, ˚ttaṇha (without thirst), ˚ppurisa (without a man), ˚pphala (without fruit); niccala motion-less, ˚kkaruṇa (heartless), ˚ddosa (fault˚), ˚maṃsa (flesh˚), ˚saṃsaya (doubt˚) nirattha (useless), ˚bbhaya (fear˚) ■ Bdhgh evidently takes ni- in meaning of nis only, when defining: ni-saddo abhāvaṃ dīpeti Vism 495.

Sk. ni-& nih-, insep. prefixes: (a) ni down = Av. ni, cp. Gr.; νειός lowland, νείατος the lowest, hindmost Lat. nīdus (*ni-zdos: place to sit down = nest); Ags nēol, nider = E. nether; Goth. nidar = Ohg. nidar; also Sk. nīca, nīpa etc ■ (b) niḥ out, prob. fr. *seni & to Lat. sine without

Nikacca

see nikati.

Nikaṭṭha

(adj.) brought down, debased, low. As one kind of puggala (n-kāya + ncitta) AN ii.137. loc. nikaṭṭhe (adv.) near Ja iii.438 Thag-a 105 (v. 33) (= santike Ja iii.438).

cp. Sk. nikṛṣṭa, ni + kasati

Nikaṇṇika

(adj.) under (4) ears, secret, cp. catukkaṇṇa Ja iii.124; nt. adv. secretly Vin iv.270, Vin iv.271.

Nikata

(adj.) deceived, cheated MN i.511 (+ vañcita paladdha); SN iv.307 (+ vañcita paluddha).

Sk. nikṛta, ni + karoti “done down”

Nikati

(f.) fraud, deceit, cheating DN i.5 (= DN-a i.80 paṭirūpakena vañcanaṃ); iii.176; Snp 242 (= nirāsaṃ-karaṇaṃ Snp-a 286); Ja i.223; Pv iii.95 (+ vañcana); Pp 19, Pp 23, Pp 58; Vv-a 114; Pv-a 211 (paṭirūpadassanena paresaṃ vikāro) ■ instr. nikatiyā (metri causa) Ja i.223, nikatyā Ja ii.183, nikacca SN i.24. Cp nekatika.

Sk. nikṛti, see prec.

Nikanta

(adj.) cut, (ab-)razed MN i.364 (of a fleshless bone).

Sk. nikṛtta & nikṛntita (cp. Divy 537, Divy 539), ni + kantati;2

Nikantati

to cut down, to cut up, cut off Pv-a 210 (piṭṭhi-maṃsāni the flesh of the back, v.l. SS for ukkant˚); Pgdp 29.

Sk. ni-kṛṇtati, see kantati2

Nikanti

(f.) desire, craving, longing for, wish Thag 20; Pts ii.72, Pts ii.101; Dhs 1059 Dhs 1136; Vism 239, Vism 580; Dhs-a 369; Dhp-a iv.63; DN-a i.110 Dāvs iii.40.

Sk. nikānti, ni + kamati

Nikara

a multitude Dāvs v.25 (jātipuppha˚).

Sk. nikara, ni + karoti

Nikaraṇā

(f. or is it ˚aṃ?) = nikati (fraud) Pp 19, Pp 23 (as syName of māyā).

Nikaroti

to bring down, humiliate, to deceive, cheat Snp 138 (nikubbetha Pot. = vañceyya Kp-a 247). pp. nikata (q.v.).

Sk. nikaroti, ni + karoti

Nikasa

a whetstone Dāvs iii.87 (˚opala).

Sk. nikasa, ni + kasati

Nikasāva

(adj.) free from impurity Vin i.3; opp. anikkasāva (q.v. Dhp 9≈.

Sk. niṣkaṣāya nis + kasāva see kasāya 2d

Nikāma

desire, pleasure, longing: only in cpds.; see nanikāma.

-kāra read by Kern (Toev. 174) at Thag 1271 for na kāmakāra but unjustified (see Snp-a on Snp 351); -lābhin gaining pleasure SN ii.278; MN i.354; MN iii.110; AN ii.23, AN ii.36 Pp 11, Pp 12; Vb 332.

Vedic nikāma, ni + kāma

Nikāmanā

(f.) = nikanti, Dhs 1059.

Nikāmeti

to crave, desire, strive after, ppr nikāmayaṃ SN i.122, & nikāmayamāna Vin ii.108. Cp. nikanta & nikanti.;

Sk. ni-kāmayati, ni + kāmeti

Nikāya

collection (“body”) assemblage, class, group; 1. generally (always-˚): eka˚; one class of beings Dhs-a 66; tiracchāna˚; the animal kingdom SN iii.152; deva˚; the assembly of the gods, the gods DN ii.261 (60); MN i.102; SN iv.180; AN iii.249; AN iv.461; Pv-a 136; satta˚; the world of beings, the animate creation, a class of living beings SN ii.2, SN ii.42, SN ii.44; MN i.49 (tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi s ■ nikāye of all beings in each class); Vb 137; Pv-a 134.

2. especially the coll. of Buddhist Suttas, as the 5 sections of the Suttanta Piṭaka, viz. Dīgha˚, Majjhima˚, Saṃyutta˚ Anguttara˚ (referred to as D.M.S.A. in Dictionaryquotations), Khuddaka˚; enumd Pv-a 2; Anvs p. 35; Dhp-a ii.95 (dhammāsanaṃ āruyha pañcahi nikāyehi atthañ ca kāraṇañ ca ākaḍḍhitvā). The five Nikāyas are enumd also at Vism 711; one is referred to at Snp-a 195 (pariyāpuṇāti master by heart). See further details under piṭaka. Cp. nekāyika.

Sk. nikāya, ni + kāya

Nikāra

service, humility Ja iii.120 (nikāra-pakāra, prob. to be read nipaccākāra, q.v.).

Sk. nikāra in diff. meaning, ni + kāra

Nikāsa

(n ■ adj.) appearance; adj. of appearance, like Ja v.87 (-˚), corresp. to ˚avakāsa.

ni + kaś

Nikāsin

(adj.) “shining,” resembling, like Ja iii.320 (aggi-nikāsinā suriyena).

cp. Sk. nikāśin; fr. ni + kāsati

Nikiṇṇa

(adj.) “strewn down into,” hidden away, sheltered Ja iii.529.

Sk. *nikīrṇa, pp. ni + kirati, cp. kiraṇa

Nikiḷita

(adj.) engrossed in play Ja vi.313.

Sk. *nikrīḍita, pp. of nikrīḍayati, ni + kīḷati

Nikīḷitāvin

(adj.) playful, playing or dallying with (c. loc.), finding enjoyment in SN i.9 (a˚ kāmesu) iv.110 (id.).

fr. ni-kīḷati

Nikujja

see nikkujja, q.v. also for nikujjita which is more correctly spelt k than kk (cp. Trenckner, Preface to Majjhima Nikāya & see ni˚ A 1).;

Nikujjati

to be bent down on, i.e. to attach importance to, to lay weight on DN i.53 (as vv.ll. to be preferred to text reading nikkujj˚ cp. nikujja); DN-a i.160 (nikk˚).

ni + kujjati, see kujja & cp. nikkujja

Nikuñja

a hollow down, a glen, thicket Dāvs iv.32.

Sk. nikuñja, ni + kuñja

Nikūjati

1. to chirp, warble, hum Thag 1270 (nikūjaṃ); Thag-a 211 (nikūji).

2. to twang, jingle, rustle Ja iii.323 ■ pp. nikūjita ■ Cp abhi˚.

ni + kūjati “to sing on”

Nikūjita

sung forth, warbled out Thig 261.

see nikūjati

Nikūṭa

a corner, top, climax Ja i.278 (arahatta˚, where usually arahattena kūṭaṃ etc.) DN-a i.307 (id.).

ni + kūṭa to kūṭa2

Niketa

1. house, abode Dhp 91 (= ālaya Dhp-a ii.170).

2. (fig.) company association. (In this sense it seems to be interpreted as belonging to ketu “sign, characteristic, mark,” and niketa-sārin would have to be taken as “following the banner or flag of…, ” i.e. belonging or attached to i.e. a follower of, one who is devoted to.) ; not living in company, having no house Snp 207; Mil 244 (+ nirālaya).

-vāsin (a˚) not living in a house, not associating with anybody Mil 201; -sayana = ˚vāsin Mil 361; -sārin (a˚) “wandering homeless” or “not living in company, i.e. not associating with, not a follower of… SN iii.9 sq. = Nd i.198; Snp 844 = SN iii.9; Snp-a 255 = SN iii.10; Snp 970 (= Nd i.494 q.v.).

Sk. niketa settlement, ni + cināti

Niketavant

(adj.) parting company with Mil 288 (kamma˚).

to niketa

Niketin

(adj.) having an abode, being housed, living in Snp 422 (kosalesu); Ja iii.432 (duma-sākhā-niketinī f.).

Nikkaṅkha

(adj.) not afraid, fearless, not doubting confident, sure Ja i.58. Cp. nissaṃsaya.

Sk. niḥśanka, nis + kankha, adj. of kankhā, cp. kankhin

Nikkaṅkhā

(f.) fearlessness, state of confidence, trust (cp. nibbicikicchā) SN v.221.

Sk. niḥśankā, nis + kankhā

Nikkaḍḍhati

to throw out Vin iv.274 (Caus. nikkaḍḍhāpeti ibid.) Ja i.116; Ja ii.440; Snp-a 192. pp. nikkaḍḍhita.

Sk. niṣkarṣati, nis + kasati, cp. kaḍḍhati

Nikkaḍḍhanā

(f.) throwing out, ejection Ja iii.22 (a˚); v.234. (= niddhamanā).

Nikkaḍḍhita

(adj.) thrown out Ja ii.103 (gehā); Pv-a 179 (read ḍḍh for ḍḍ).

Sk. *niṣkarṣita see nikkaḍḍhati

Nikkaṇṭaka

(adj.) free from thorns or enemies Mil 250; cp. akaṇṭaka.

Sk. niṣkaṇṭaka, nis + kaṇṭaka

Nikkaddama

(adj.) unstained, not dirty, free from impunity DN-a i.226.

nis + kaddama

Nikkama

(n ■ adj.) exertion, strength, endurance. The orig. meaning of “going forth” is quite obliterated by the fig. meaning (cp nikkhamati & nekkhamma) AN i.4; AN iii.214; Vv 187 (= viriya Vv-a 96); Dhs 13, Dhs 22, Dhs 219, Dhs 571; Vism 132; Mil 244 (+ ārambha) ■ (adj.) strong in (-˚), enduring exerting oneself SN i.194 (tibba˚); v.66, 104 sq.; Snp 68 (daḷha˚, cp. Nd ii.under padhānavā), 542 (sacca˚).

Sk. niṣkrama; nis + kama

Nikkamati

to go out, to go forth; in fig meaning: to leave behind lust, evil & the world, to get rid of “kāma” (craving), to show right exertion strength Mil 245 (+ arabhati) + S i.156 (kkh).

Sk. niṣkramati, nis + kamati, see also nikkhamati & nekkhamma

Nikkaya

“buying off,” redemption Ja vi.577.

cp. Sk. niṣkraya, nis + kaya cp. nikkiṇāti

Nikkaruṇa

(adj.) without compassion, heartless Snp 244 (= sattānaṃ anatthakāma); Sdhp 508.

nis + karuṇa, adj. of karuṇā

Nikkarunatā

(f.) = following Vism 314.

Nikkaruṇā

(f.) heartlessness Pv-a 55.

Sk. niṣkaruṇatā; nis + karuṇā

Nikkasāva

see nikasāva.

Nikkāma

(adj.) without craving or lust, desireless Snp 1131 (= akāmakāmin Nd ii.340 pahīnakāma Snp-a 605 with v.l.: nikkāma). Cp. next.

Sk. niṣkāma, nis + kāma

Nikkāmin

(adj.) = nikkāma Snp 228 (= katanikkhamana Kp-a 184).

nis + kāmin

Nikkāraṇā

(abl. = adv.) without reason, without cause or purpose Snp 75 (= akāraṇā ahetu Nd ii.341).

Sk. niṣkāraṇā, nis + kāraṇaṃ

Nikkāsa

is Bdhgh’s reading for ikkāsa (q.v.) Vin ii.151, with C. on p. 321.

Nikkiṇati

to buy back, to redeem Ja vi.576, Ja vi.585; Mil 284.

Sk. niṣkriṇāti, nis + kiṇāti

Nikkiṇṇa

(adj.) spread out, spread before, ready (for eating) Ja vi.182 (= ṭhapita Com.).

Sk. niṣkīrṇa, nis + kiṇṇa, see kiraṇa

Nikkilesa

freedom fr. moral blemish Nd i.340 = Nd ii.under pucchā Nd ii.185; as adj. pure, unstained Dhp-a iv.192 = Snp-a 469 (= anāvila).

nis + kilesa

Nikkujja

(adj.) bent down, i.e. head forward, lying on one’s face; upset, thrown over AN i.130; SN v.48; Pv iv.77 (k); Pp 31. Opp. ukkujja.

ni + kubja, better spelling is nikujja see nikkujjati

Nikkujjati

to turn upside down, to upset Vin ii.113; AN iv.344 (pattaṃ). pp. nikkujjita.

for nikujjati (q.v.) through analogy with opp. ukkujjati. Etym. perhaps to kujja humpback, Sk kubja, but better with Kern, Toev. 1. p. 175 = Sk. nyubjati influenced by kubja with regard to k.

Nikkujjita

(adj.) lying face downward, overturned, upset fallen over, stumbled Vin i.16; DN i.85, DN i.110; DN i.147, MN i.24 (k.); AN i.173; AN iii.238; Thig 28, Thig 30 (k.); Ja iii.277; Snp-a 155 (= adhomukha-ṭhapita); DN-a i.228.

pp. of nikkujjati; often (rightly) spelt nikujjita, q.v.

Nikkuha

(adj.) without deceit, not false AN ii.26 = Iti 113; Snp 56; Nd ii.342.

nis + kuha

Nikkodha

(adj.) without anger, free from anger Ja iv.22.

nis + kodha

Nikkha

(m. & nt.) 1. a golden ornament for neck or breast, a ring Ja ii.444; Ja vi.577.

2. (already Vedic) a golden coin or a weight of gold (cp. a “pound sterling”) equal to 15 suvaṇṇas (Vv-a 104 = suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa-dharaṇaṃ nikkhan ti vadanti) SN ii.234 (suvaṇṇa & singi˚); Ja i.84 (id.); AN iv.120 (suvaṇṇa˚); Vv 208 438 (v.l. SS nekkha) Ja vi.180; Mil 284. suvaṇṇanikkha-sataṃ (100 gold pieces) Ja i.376; Ja iv.97; Ja v.58 ˚sahassaṃ (1000) Ja v.67; Dhp-a i.393 ■ See also nekkha.

Vedic niṣka; cp. Oir. nasc (ring), Ohg. nusca (bracelet)

Nikkhanta

(adj.) gone out, departed from (c. abl.), gone away; also med going out, giving up, fig. leaving behind, resigning renouncing (fusing in meaning with kanta1 of kāmyati = desireless) SN i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaṃ); Snp 991 (Kapilavatthumhā n. lokanāyako); Ja i.149; Ja ii.153 Ja iv.364 (˚bhikkhā, in sense of nikkhāmita˚, v.l. nikkhitta˚ perhaps preferable, expld p. 366 nibaddha˚ designed for, given to); Snp-a 605 (fig.; as v.l. for nikkāma); Dhp-a ii.39; Pv-a 61 (bahi); Nd ii.under nissita Nd ii.107 (free, unobstructed).

pp. of nis + kamati, see nikkhamati

Nikkhama

(adj.) going out from Pv-a 80 (nāsikāya n ■ mala). dun˚; at Thag 72 is to be read dunnikkhaya, as indicated by vv.ll. See the latter.

cp. Sk. niṣkrama

Nikkhamati

to go forth from, to come out of (c. abl.), to get out, issue forth depart, fig. to leave the household life behind (agārā n.), to retire from the world (cp. abhinikkhamati etc.) or to give up evil desire ■ (a) lit. (often with bahi outside, out; opp. pavisati to enter into: AN v.195) DN ii.14 (mātu kucchismā); Ja i.52 (mātukucchito) Imper. nikkhama Pv. i.103; ppr. nikkhamanto Ja i.52 Ja ii.153; Ja iii.26 (mukhato); Pv-a 90; aor. nikkhami Ja ii.154; Ja iii.188; fut. ˚issati Ja ii.154; ger. nikkhamma Ja i.51, Ja i.61 (fig.) & nikkhamitvā Ja i.16, Ja i.138 (fig.), 265 iii.26; iv.449 (n. pabbajissāmi); Pv-a 14, Pv-a 19 (fig.) 67 (gāmato), 74 (id.); inf. nikkhamituṃ Ja i.61 (fig.); ii.104; Pv i.102 (bahi n.); grd. nikkhamitabba Vin i.47. (b) fig. (see also nikkamati, & cp. nekkhamma & BSk niṣkramati in same meaning, e.g. Divy 68 etc.) SN i.156 (ārabbhati + ) = Mil 245 (where nikkamati); Ja i.51 (agārā), 61 (mahābhinikkhamanaṃ “the great renunciation”), Pv-a 19 (id.) ■ pp. nikkhanta; caus. nikkhameti (q.v.).

Sk. niṣkramati, nis + kamati

Nikkhamana

going out, departing Ja ii.153; Vv-a 71 (opp. pavesana); fig renunciation Kp-a 184 (kata˚ as adj. = nikkāmin). See also abhi˚. Nikkhameti & Nikkhameti;

BSk. niṣkramaṇa, to nikkhamati

Nikkhameti & Nikkhāmeti

to make go out or away, to bring out or forth SN ii.128; Ja i.264 Ja ii.112 ■ pp. nikkhāmita Ja iii.99 (+ nicchuddha thrown out, in expln of nibbāpita; v.l. BB. nikaḍhāpita).

Caus. of nikkhamati

Nikkhaya

(adj.) liable to destruction, able to be destroyed, in dun˚; hard to destroy Ja iv.449 (= dun-nikkaḍḍhiya Com.); also to be read (v.l.) at Thag 72 for dunnikkhama. Cp. nikhīṇa.

Sk. *niḥkṣaya, nis + khaya

Nikkhitta

(adj.) laid down, lying; put down into, set in, arranged; in cpds. (˚-having laid down = freed of, rid of DN ii.14 (maṇi-ratanaṃ vatthe n. set into); Iti 13 (sagge: put into heaven) Ja i.53, Ja i.266; Pv iii.68; Mil 343 (agga˚; put down as the highest, i.e. of the highest praise; cp. BSk. agranikṣipta Lal. V. 167); Pv-a 148 (dhana n. = collected v.l. SS. nikkita). nikkhitta- daṇḍa (adj.) not using a weapon (cp. daṇḍa) SN i.141 etc.; nikkhitta- dhura unyoked freed of the yoke AN i.71; AN iii.108; cp. Dhs-a 145;- su˚; well set, well arranged AN ii.147 sq. (˚assa pada-vyañjanassa attho sunnayo hoti); opp. dun˚ AN i.59; Ne 21.

Sk. nikṣipta, see nikkhipati

Nikkhittaka

(adj.-n.) one to whose charge something has been committed Dpvs iv.5 (agga˚; thera original depositary of the Faith).

fr. nikkhitta

Nikkhipati

1. to lay down (carefully), to put down, to lay (an egg) Vin ii.114; Iti 13, Iti 14 (Pot. nikkhipeyya); Pp 34; Ja i.49 (aṇḍakaṃ)

2. to lay aside, to put away Vin i.46 (patta-cīvaraṃ) AN i.206 (daṇḍaṃ to discard the weapon; see daṇḍa) Mvu 14, Mvu 10 (dhanu-saraṃ).

3. to eliminate, get rid of, give up Pv ii.615 (dehaṃ to get rid of the body) Dhs-a 344 (vitthāra-desanaṃ).

4. to give in charge to deposit, entrust, save Pp 26; Vv-a 33 (sahassathavikaṃ) ■ aor. nikkhipi DN ii.161 (Bhagavato sarīraṃ Ja ii.104, Ja ii.111, Ja ii.416; fut. ˚issati DN ii.157 (samussayaṃ) ger. ˚itvā MN iii.156 (cittaṃ); Ja ii.416; Ja vi.366; grd ˚itabba Vin i.46 ■ pp. nikkhitta (q.v.) ■ Caus. nikkhipāpeti to cause to be laid down, to order to be put down etc. Pv-a 215 (gosīsaṭṭhiṃ). Cp. abhi˚.

Sk. nikṣipati, ni + khipati

Nikkhepa

putting down, laying down; casting off, discarding, elimination giving up, renunciation; abstract or summary treatment Dhs-a 6, Dhs-a 344 (see under mātikā); in grammar pada˚ the setting of the verse; i.e. rules of composition (Mil 381). Vin i.16 (pādukānaṃ = the putting down of the slippers i.e. the slippers as they were, put down) Ja iii.243 (dhura˚ giving up one’s office or charge), i.236 (sarīra ˚ṃ kāresi had the body laid out); Dpvs xvii.109 (id.). Vism 618 (= cuti); Dhp-a ii.98 (sarīra˚); DN-a i.50 (sutta˚); Dhs-a 344; Mil 91.

Sk. nikṣepa, see nikkhipati

Nikkhepana

(nt.) = nikkhepa SN iii.26 (bhāra˚ getting rid of the load, opp. bhārâdānaṃ); Mil 356 (= comparison) Vism 236 (deha˚). Nikhanati & Nikhanati;

Nikhanati & Nikhaṇati

to dig into, to bury, to erect, to cover up Vin ii.116; Vin iii.78 (akkhiṃ = cover the eye, as a sign); Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197 (id.); DN ii.127 (ṇ); Ja i.264; Snp-a 519 (ṇ, to bury)-pp. nikhāta.

Sk. nikhanati, ni + khanati

Nikhāta

1. dug, dug out (of a hole), buried (of a body) Snp-a 519.

2. dug in, erected (of a post) Snp 28; Dhp-a ii.181 (nagara-dvāre n. indakhīla) See also a˚.

pp. of nikhaṇati

Nikhādana

(nt.) “eating down,” a sharp instrument, a spade or (acc. to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 83) a chisel Vin iii.149 Vin iv.211; Ja ii.405 (so read for khādana); Ja iv.344; Ja v.45.

Sk. *nikhādana, ni + khādati, cp. khādana

Nikhila

(adj.) all, entire, whole Dāvs v.40 (˚loka v.l. sakala˚).

Sk. nikhila cp. khila

Nikhīṇa

(adj.) having or being lost Ja vi.499 (˚patta without wings, deprived of its wings).

nis + khīṇa

Niga

in gavaya-gokaṇṇa-nig-âdīnaṃ Dhs-a 331 is misprint for miga.

Nigacchati

to go down to, to “undergo,” incur, enter, come to; to suffer esp. with dukkhaṃ & similar expressions of affliction or punishment SN iv.70 (dukkhaṃ); MN i.337 sq. (id.); AN i.251 (bandhanaṃ); Dhp 69 (dukkhaṃ = vindati, paṭilabhati Dhp-a ii.50), 137; Nd ii.1994 (maraṇaṃ + maraṇamattam pi dukkhaṃ) Pv iv.77 (pret. nigacchiṭṭha = pāpuṇi Pv-a 266).

Sk. nigacchati, ni + gacchati

Nigaṇṭha

a member of the Jain order (see M i.370–⁠375 380 & cp. jaṭila) Vin i.233 (Nātaputta, the head of that Order, cp. DN i.57; also Sīho senāpati n-sāvako); SN i.78 SN i.82 (˚bhikkhā); AN i.205 sq. (˚uposatha), cp. 220; ii.196 (˚sāvaka); iii.276, 383; v.150 (dasahi asaddhammehi samannāgata); Snp 381; Ud 65 (jaṭilā, n., acelā, ekasātā paribbājakā); Ja ii.262 (object to eating flesh); DN-a i.162; Dhp-a i.440; Dhp-a iii.489; Vv-a 29 (n. nāma samaṇajāti) ■ f nigaṇṭhī DN i.54 (nigaṇṭhi-gabbha).

BSk. nirgrantha (Divy 143, Divy 262 etc.) “freed from all ties,” nis + gaṇṭhi. This is the customary (correct?) etym. Prk. niggantha, cp. Weber, Bhagavatī p. 165

Nigati

(f.) destiny, condition, behaviour Ja vi.238. See also niyati & cp. niggatika.;

ni + gati, q.v.

Nigama

a small town market town (opp. janapada); often combd with gāma (see gāma 2) Vin i.110 (˚sīma), 188 (˚kathā), 197 (Setakaṇṇika˚); DN i.7 (˚kathā), 101 (˚sāmanta), 193, 237; MN i.429, MN i.488; Pv ii.1318; Ja vi.330; Pv-a 111 (Asitañjana˚, v.l. BB nagara). Cp. negama.

Sk. nigama, fr. nigacchati = a meeting-place or market, cp. E. moot-hall = market hall

Nigamana

(nt.) quotation, explanation, illustration Vism 427 (˚vacana quotation); Pv-a 255 (perhaps we should read niyamana); conclusion, e.g. Paṭṭh.A 366; Vb-a 523.

Sk. nigamana

Nigaḷa

an (iron) chain for the feet Ja i.394; Ja ii.153; Ja vi.64 (here as “bracelet”).

Sk. nigaḍa, ni + gaḷa, cp. gala3

Nigāḷhika

(better v.l. nigāḷhita) sunk down into, immersed in Thag 568 (gūthakūpe).

Sk. nigāḍhita; ni + gāḍhita, see gāḷha2

Nigūḷha

hidden (down), concealed; (n.) a secret Ja i.461; Dāvs iii.39.

Sk. nigūḍha, but BSk. nirgūḍha (Divy 256); ni + gūḷha

Nigūhati

to cover up, conceal, hide Ja i.286; Ja iii.392; Ja iv.203; Pv.iii.43 (≈parigūhāmi v.l. SS guyhāmi). pp. nigūḷha (q.v.).

Sk. nigūhati, ni + gūhati

Nigūhana

(nt.) covering, concealing, hiding Vv-a 71.

Sk. nigūhana, see nigūhati

Niggacchati

to go out or away, disappear; to proceed from, only in pp. niggata (q.v.); at Ja vi.504 as ni˚.

Sk. nirgacchati, nis + gacchati

Niggaṇṭhi

(adj.) free from knots (said of a sword) Mil 105 See also nighaṇḍu.

Sk. nirgranthi, nis + gaṇṭhi, cp. also nigaṇṭha

Niggaṇhāti

1. to hold back, restrain Dhp 326; Ja iv.97; Mil 184; Vism 133 ■ Opp paggaṇhāti.

2. to rebuke, censure (c. instr.) AN iii.187; Ja iii.222; Mil 9 (musāvādena); Dhp-a i.29. ger. niggayha, pp. niggahīta (q.v.). Cp. abhi˚.

Sk. nigṛhṇāti, ni + gaṇhāti

Niggata

(adj.) 1. going out, proceeding from (abl.): dahato niggatā nadī (a river issuing from a lake) Pv-a 152.

2. (= nigata? or = nis + gata “of ill fate”) destined, fateful; miserable unfortunate Pv-a 223 (˚kamma = punishment in expln of niyassa kamma, v.l. SS. nigaha for niggata; see also niya & niyata); Sdhp 165 (of niraya = miserable), cp niggatika & niggamana.;

Sk. nirgata, see niggacchati

Niggatika

having a bad “gati” or fate, ill-fated, bad, unfortunate, miserable Ja iii.538 (v.l. BB as gloss, nikkāruṇika); iv.48 (v.l. BB nikatika).

Sk. *nirgatika, nis + gati-ka

Niggama

(n.) in logic, deduction, conclusion. Pts. of Controversy p. 1.

Niggamana

1. going away DN-a i.94.

2. result, fate, consequence, outcome Sdhp 172, Sdhp 173 (dun˚).

3. (log.) conclusion Kv 4. Niggayha-vadin

Sk. *nirgamana, of niggacchati

Niggayha-vādin

(adj.) one who speaks rebukingly, censuring, reproving, resenting Dhp 76 (see expln in detail at Dhp-a ii.107 & cp. MN iii.118).

see niggaṇhāti

Niggayhati

to be seized by (?), to be blamed for Dhp-a i.295 (cittaṃ dukkhena n., in expln of dunniggaha).

Sk. nigṛhyate, ni + gayhati, Pass. of niggaṇhāti

Niggaha

1. restraint, control, rebuke, censure, blame Vin ii.196; AN i.98, AN i.174; AN v.70; Ja v.116 (opp. paggaha); vi.371 (id.) Mil 28, Mil 45, Mil 224dun˚; hard to control (citta) Dhp 35 (cp. expl. at Dhp-a i.295).

2. (log.) refutation Kv 3.

Sk. nigraha, ni + gaha2; see niggaṇhāti

Niggahaṇa

(adj.) without acquisitions, i.e. poor Ja ii.367 (v.l. BB. as gloss nirāhāra).

Sk. *nirgahaṇa, cp. nirgṛha homeless; nis + gahaṇa

Niggahaṇatā

(f.) restraint Vism 134 (cittassa). Opp. pagg˚.

abstr. fr. ni + gṛh, cp. next

Niggahīta

(adj.) restrained, checked, rebuked, reproved SN iii.12; AN i.175 (aniggahīto dhammo); Ja vi.493.

Sk. nigṛhīta, but cp. Divy 401: nigṛhīta; ni + gahita

Niggāhaka

(adj.-n.) one who rebukes, oppresses, oppressor Snp 118 (= bādhaka Snp-a 178, with v.l. ghātaka); Ja iv.362 (= balisādhaka Com.).

ni + gāhaka, see niggaṇhāti

Niggilati

(niggalati) to swallow down (opp. uggilati to spit out, throw up) Ja iv.392 (sic as v.l.; text niggalati).

Sk. nigirati, ni + gilati

Nigguṇa

(adj.) devoid of good qualities, bad Mil 180.

Sk. nirguṇa, nis + guṇa

Nigguṇḍi

(f.) a shrub (Vitex Negundo) Mil 223 (˚phala); Vism 257 (˚puppha).

Sk. nirguṇḍī, of obscure etym.

Niggumba

(adj.) free from bushes, clear Ja i.187; Mil 3.

Sk. *nirgulma, nis + gumba

Nigghātana

(nt.) destruction, killing, rooting out Snp 1085 (taṇhā˚; Snp-a 576 = vināsana); Nd ii.343 (v.l. nighātana).

Sk. nirghātana, nis + ghātana, but cp. nighāta

Nigghosa

1. “shouting out,” sound; fame, renown; speech, utterance, proclamation word of reproach, blame SN i.190; AN iv.88 (appa˚ noiseless lit. of little or no noise); Snp 719, Snp 818 (= nindāvacana Snp-a 537), 1061; Ja i.64; Ja vi.83; Vv 55; Nd i.150 Nd ii.344; Dhs 621; Vv-a 140 (madhura˚); 334 (in quotation appa-sadda, appa˚); Sdhp 245.

2. (adj. noiseless, quiet, still Snp 959 (= appasadda appanigghosa Nd i.467).

Sk. nirghoṣa, nis + ghosa

Nigrodha

the banyan or Indian fig-tree, Ficus Indica, usually as cpd. ˚rukkha Vin iv.35; DN ii.4; Snp 272; Ja iii.188 (r.) Dhp-a ii.14 (r.) Pv-a 5 (r.) 112, 244; Sdhp 270; -pakka the fruit of the fig-tree Vism 409. -parimaṇḍala the round or circumference of the banyan DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.162.

Sk. nyagrodha; Non-Aryan?

Nigha1

(nīgha) (adj.-n.) is invented by Com. & scholiasts to explain the comb;n anigha (anīgha sporadic, e.g. SN v.57). But this should be divided an-īgha instead of a-nīgha ■ (m.) rage, trembling, confusion, only in formula rāgo n. doso n. moho n. explaining the adj anīgha. Thus at SN iv.292 = Nd ii.45; SN v.57 ■ (adj. anigha not trembling, undisturbed, calm [see etym under īgha = Sk. ṛgh of ṛghāyati to tremble, rage, rave SN i.54; SN iv.291; Ja v.343. Otherwise always combd with nirāsa: SN i.12 = SN i.23, SN i.141; Snp 1048, Snp 1060, Snp 1078. Expld correctly at Snp-a 590 by rāgādi-īgha-virahita. Spelling anīgha Ja iii.443 (Com. niddukkha); Pv iv.134 (+ nirāsa expld by niddukkha Pv-a 230). anīgha also at Iti 97 (+ chinnasaṃsaya); Ud 76; Dhp 295 (v.l. aniggha expld by niddukkha Dhp-a iii.454).

Nigha2

(nt.) killing, destruction Thig 491 (= maraṇasampāpana Thag-a 288).

prob. ni + gha = Sk. ˚gha of hanati (see also P. ˚gha), to kill; unless abstracted from anigha as in prec. nigha1

Nighaṃsa

rubbing, chafing Dhs-a 263, Dhs-a 308.

Sk. nigharṣa

Nighaṃsati

1. to rub, rub against, graze, chafe Vin ii.133; Vism 120; Dhp-a i.396–⁠2. to polish up, clean Ja ii.418; Ja iii.75.

Sk. nigharṣati, ni + ghaṃsati1

Nighaṃsana

(nt.) = nighaṃsa Mil 215.

Sk. nigharṣana

Nighaṇḍu

an explained word or a word expln, vocabulary, gloss, usually in ster. formula marking the accomplishments of a learned Brahmin “ sanighaṇḍu-keṭubhānaṃ… padako” (see detail under keṭubha) DN i.88; AN i.163, AN i.166; AN iii.223; Snp p.105; Mil 10. Bdhgh’s expln is quoted by Trenckner Notes p. 65.

Sk. nighaṇṭu, dial. for nirgrantha from grathnāti (see gaṇṭhi & ghaṭṭana), orig. disentanglement unravelling, i.e. explanation; cp. niggaṇṭhi, which is a variant of the same word ■ BSk. nighaṇṭa (Divy 619 Avs ii.19), Prk. nighaṇṭu

Nighāta

striking down, suppressing, destroying, killing MN i.430; Ne 189. Cp. nighāti.

Sk. nighāta, ni + ghāta

Nighāti

“slaying or being slain,” defeat, loss (opp. ugghāti) Snp 828. Cp. nighāta.

ni + ghāti

Nicaya

heaping up, accumulation; wealth, provisions SN i.93, SN i.97; Vin v.172 (˚sannidhi). See also necayika.

Sk. nicaya, ni + caya, cp. nicita

Nicita

(adj.) heaped up, full, thick, massed, dense Thig 480 (of hair); Pv-a 221 (ussanna uparûpari nicita, of Niraya).

Sk. nicita, ni + cita, of nicināti

Nicula

a plant (Barringtonia acutangula) Vv-a 134.

Sk. nicula

Nicca

(adj.) constant, continuous, permanent DN iii.31; SN i.142; SN ii.109, SN ii.198; SN iv.24 sq., 45, 63; AN ii.33, AN ii.52 AN v.210; Pts ii.80; Vb 335, Vb 426. In chain of synonyms nicca dhuva sassata avipariṇāmadhamma DN i.21; SN iii.144, SN iii.147; see below anicca,-nt. adv. niccaṃ perpetually, constantly, always (syn. sadā) MN i.326 MN iii.271; Snp 69, Snp 220, Snp 336; Dhp 23, Dhp 109, Dhp 206, Dhp 293; Ja i.290 Ja iii.26, Ja iii.190; Nd ii.345 (= dhuvakālaṃ); Pv-a 32, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 134. Far more freq. as anicca (adj.; aniccaṃ nt. n.) unstable impermanent, inconstant; (nt.) evanescence, inconstancy, impermanence ■ The emphatic assertion of impermanence (continuous change of condition) is a prominent axiom of the Dhamma, & the realization of the evanescent character of all things mental or material is one of the primary conditions of attaining right knowledge (: anicca-saññaṃ manasikaroti to ponder over the idea of impermanence SN ii.47; SN iii.155; SN v.132; Pts ii.48 sq., 100; Pv-a 62 etc ■ kāye anicc’ ânupassin realizing the impermanence of the body (together with vayânupassin & nirodha˚) SN iv.211; SN v.324, SN v.345; Pts ii.37, Pts ii.45 sq., 241 sq. See anupassanā). In this import anicca occurs in many combinations of similar terms all characterising change, its consequences & its meaning esp. in the famous triad “ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā ” (see dukkha ii.2), e.g. SN iii.41, SN iii.67, SN iii.180; SN iv.28 (sabbaṃ), 85 sq., 106 sq.; 133 sq. Thus anicca addhuva appāyuka cavanadhamma DN i.21. anicca + dukkha SN ii.53 (yad aniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ); iv.28, 31, v.345; AN iv.52 (anicce dukkhasaññā); MN i.500 (+ roga etc.); Nd ii.214 (id. cp roga). anicca dukkha vipariṇāmadhamma (of kāmā DN i.36. aniccasaññī anattasaññī AN iv.353; etc. Opposed to this ever-fluctuating impermanence is Nibbāna (q.v.), which is therefore marked with the attributes of constancy & stableness (cp. dhuva, sassata amata, vipariṇāma) ■ See further for ref. SN ii.244 sq (saḷāyatanaṃ a.), 248 (dhātuyo); iii.102 (rūpa etc.) iv.131, 151; AN ii.33, AN ii.52; AN v.187 sq., 343 sq.; Snp 805; Pts i.191; Pts ii.28 sq., 80, 106; Vb 12 (rūpa etc.), 70 (dvādasâyatanāni), 319 (viññāṇā), 324 (khandhā), 373; Pv-a 60 (= ittara).

-kālaṃ (adv.) constantly Nd ii.345; -dāna a perpetual gift DN i.144 (cp. DN-a i.302); -bhatta a continuous food-supply (for the bhikkhus) Ja i.178; Vv-a 92; Pv-a 54 -bhattika one who enjoys a continuous supply of food (as charity) Vin ii.78; Vin iii.237 (= dhuva-bhattika) iv.271; -saññā (& adj.; saññin ) the consciousness or idea of permanence (adj. having etc.) AN ii.52; AN iii.79, AN iii.334 AN iv.13, AN iv.145 sq.; Ne 27; -sīla the uninterrupted observance of good conduct Vv-a 72; Pv-a 256.

Vedic nitya, adj ■ formation fr. ni, meaning “downward” = onward, on and on; according to Grassmann (Wtb. z. Rig Veda) originally “inwardly homely”

Niccatā

(f.) continuity, permanence, only as ; changeableness, impermanence SN i.61, SN i.204 SN iii.43; SN iv.142 sq., 216, 325.

abstr. to nicca

Niccatta

(nt.) = niccatā Vism 509.

Niccamma

without skin, excoriated, in ˚ṃ karoti to flog skinless, to beat the skin off Ja iii.281. niccamma-gāvī “a skinless cow,” used in a well-known simile at SN ii.99, referred to at Vism 341 & 463.;

Sk. niścarman, nis + camma

Niccala

(adj.) motionless Ja iv.2; Pv-a 95.

Sk. niścala, nis + cala

Niccittaka

(adj.) thoughtless Ja ii.298.

Sk. niścitta, nis + citta (ka)

Niccola

(adj.) without dress, naked Pv-a 32 (= nagga).

nis-cola

Nicchanda

(adj.) without desire or excitement Ja i.7.

nis + chanda

Nicchaya

discrimination, conviction, certainty; resolution, determination Ja i.441 (˚mitta a firm friend); Dhs-a 133 (adhimokkha = its paccupaṭṭhāna); Snp-a 60 (daḷha˚ adj. of firm resolution). See vi˚.

Sk. niścaya, nis + caya of cināti

Niccharaṇa

(nt.) emanation, sending out, expansion, efflux Vism 303.

fr. niccharati

Niccharati

to go out or forth from, to rise, sound forth, come out Iti 75 (devasadda) Vv 382; Ja i.53, Ja i.176; Dhp-a i.389; Vv-a 12, Vv-a 37 (saddā). Caus. nicchāreti to make come out from, to let go forth get rid of, emit, utter, give out DN i.53 (anattamanavācam a˚ not utter a word of discontent); Ja iii.127 Ja v.416 (madhurassaraṃ); Pp 33; Mil 259 (garahaṃ) Dāvs i.28 (vācaṃ).

Sk. niścarati, nis + carati

Nicchāta

having no hunger, being without cravings, stilled, satisfied. Ep. of an Arahant always in combn with nibbuta or parinibbuta: SN iii.26 (tanhaṃ abbuyha); iv.204 (vedanānaṃ khayā); MN i.341; MN i.412, AN iv.410; AN v.65 (sītibhūta); Snp 707 (aniccha), 735, 758; Iti 48 (esanānaṃ khayā); Thig 132 (abbūḷhasalla) ■ Expld at Pts ii.243 by nekkhammena kāmacchandato n.; arahattamaggena sabbakilesehi n. muccati.

Sk. *niḥpsāta, nis + chāta

Nicchādeti

see nicchodeti.

Nicchāreti

Caus. of niccharati, q.v.

Nicchita

(adj.) determined, convinced Mvu 7, Mvu 19.

Sk. niścita, nis + cita, see nicchināti

Nicchināti

to discriminate, consider, investigate, ascertain; pot. niccheyya Snp 785 (expld by nicchinitvā vinicchinitvā etc. Nd i.76) Dhp 256 (gloss K vinicchaye) ■ pp. nicchita.

Sk. niścinoti, nis + cināti

Nicchuddha

(adj.) thrown out Ja iii.99 (= nibbāpita, nikkhāmita); Mil 130.

Sk. niḥkṣubdha, nis + chuddha, see nicchubhati

Nicchubhati

to throw out Ja iii.512 (= nīharati Com.; v.l. nicchurāti); Mil 187 ■ pp. nicchuddha q.v.

Sk. *niḥkṣubhati, nis + khubhati or chubhati, cp. chuddha & khobha, also nicchodeti & upacchubhati and see Trenckner, Mil pp.423, Mil pp.424

Nicchubhana

(nt.) throwing out, ejection, being an outcaste Mil 357.

see nicchubhati

Nicchodeti

(& v.l.; nicchādeti ) to shake or throw about, only in phrase odhunāti nidhunāti nicchodeti at SN iii.155 = MN i.229 MN i.374 = AN iii.365, where S has correct reading (v.l. ˚choṭeti); M has ˚chādeti (v.l. ˚chodeti); A has ˚chedeti (v.l. ˚choreti, ˚chāreti; gloss nippoṭeti). The C. on AN iii.365 has: nicchedetī ti bāhāya vā rukkhe vā paharati-nicchedeti (chid ) is pardonable because of Prk chollai “to cut.” Cp. also nicchubhati with v.l. BB nicchurāti. For sound change P. ch<sk. kṣ cp. P chamā<k ch churik etc.

shows a confusion of two roots, which are both of Prk. origin, viz. chaḍḍ; choṭ; the former = P. chaḍḍeti, the latter = Sk. kṣodayati or BSk. chorayati, Apabhraṃśa chollai; with which cp. P. chuddha

Nija

(adj.) own Dāvs ii.68. Cp. niya.

Sk. nija, wth dial. j. for nitya = P. nicca

Nijana

(nt.) washing, cleansing Vism 342 (v.l. nijj˚).

fr. nij

Nijigiṃsati

to desire ardently, to covet DN-a i.92 (= maggeti pariyesati).

Sk. nijigīṣati, ni + jigiṃsati

Nijigiṃsanatā

(f.) covetousness Vism 23 sq. (defined), 29 (id. = magganā), referring to Vb 353 where T has jigiṃsanatā, with v.l. nijigīsanatā.

fr. last

Nijigiṃsitar

(n. adj.) one who desires ardently, covetous, rapacious DN i.8 (lābhaṃ) AN iii.111 (id.).

n. ag. fr. prec.

Nijjaṭa

(adj.) disentangled Ja i.187; Mil 3.

Sk. *nirjaṭa, nis + jaṭa, adj. to jaṭā

Nijjara

(adj.) causing to decay, destroying, annihilating; f. ˚ā decay, destruction, death SN iv.339; AN i.221; AN ii.198; AN v.215 sq. (dasa-n-vatthūni) Pts i.5 (id.).

Sk. nirjara in diff. meaning, P. nis functioning as emphatic pref.; nis + jara

Nijjareti

to destroy, annihilate, cause to cease or exist MN i.93; Thig 431 (nijjaressāmi = jīrāpessāmi vināsessāmi Thag-a 269).

Sk. nir-jarayati; nis + jarati1

Nijjāleti

to make an end to a blaze, to extinguish, to put out Ja vi.495 (aggiṃ).

nis + jāleti

Nijjiṇṇa

(adj.) destroyed, overcome, exhausted, finished, dead DN i.96; MN ii.217; AN i.221 (vedanākkhayā sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ n. bhavissati) MN i.93; AN v.215 sq.; Ne 51.

Sk. nirjīrṇa, nis + jiṇṇa

Nijjita

(adj.) unvanquished Mil 192 (˚kammasūrā), 332 (˚vijita-sangāma); Sdhp 360.

Sk. nirjita, nis + jita

Nijjīvata

(adj.) lifeless, soulless Dhs-a 38; Mil 413.

Sk. nirjīvita, nis + jīva1

Nijjhatta

(adj.) satisfied, pacified, appeased Ja vi.414 (= khamāpita Com.); Vv 6319 (= nijjhāpita Vv-a 265) Mil 209. See also paṭi˚

pp. of nijjhāpeti, *Sk. nidhyapta or nidhyāpita

Nijjhatti

(f.) conviction, understanding realization; favourable disposition, satisfaction MN i.320; AN iv.223; Pts ii.171, Pts ii.176; Mil 210.

abstr. to nijjhatta, cp. BSk. nidhyapti, formation like P. ñatti → Sk. jñapti

Nijjhāna1

(nt.) understanding, insight, perception, comprehension; favour, indulgence (= nijjhāpana), pleasure, delight Ja vi.207. Often as ˚ṃ khamati: to be pleased with, to find pleasure in SN iii.225, SN iii.228; MN i.133, MN i.480; Vv 8417. Thus also diṭṭhinijjhāna-kkhanti delighting in speculation AN i.189 sq. AN ii.191. Cp. upa˚.

*Sk. nidhyāna, ni + jhāna1

Nijjhāna2

(nt.) conflagration, in anto˚ = nijjhāyana Pv-a 18 (cittasantāpa + in expln of soka).

nis + jhāna2

Nijjhāpana

(nt.) favourable disposition, kindness, indulgence Ja iv.495 (˚ṃ karoti = khamāpeti Com.; text reads nijjhapana).

Sk. *nidhyāpana, ni + jhāpana, Caus. to jhāpeti

Nijjhāpaya

(adj.) to be discriminated or understood, in dun˚; hard to… Mil 141 (pañha).

Sk. *ni-dhyāpya, to nijjhāpeti

Nijjhāpeti

to make favourably disposed, to win somebody’s affection, or favour, to gain over Vin ii.96; MN i.321; Ja iv.108; Ja iv.414, Ja iv.495; Ja vi.516; Mil 264; Vv-a 265 (nijjhāpita = nijjhatta).

Sk. nidhāyayati, ni + jhāpeti, Caus. to jhāyati1; cp. Sk. nididhyāsate

Nijjhāma

(adj. n.) burning away, wasting away, consuming or consumed AN i.295; Ne 77, Ne 95 paṭipadā.

-taṇha (adj.) of consuming thirst, very thirsty Ja i.44 -taṇhika = ˚taṇha denoting a class of Petas (q.v. Mil 294, Mil 303, Mil 357.

Sk. niḥkṣāma, cp. niḥkṣīṇa, nis + jhāma of jhāyati2 = Sk. kṣāyati

Nijjhāyati1

to meditate, reflect, think SN iii.140 sq. (+ passati, cp. jānāti), 157; MN i.334 (jhāyati n. apajjhāyati); iii.14 (id.). Cp. upa˚.

Sk. nidhyāyati, ni + jhāyati1

Nijjhāyati2

to be consumed (by sorrow), to fret Nd i.433.

ni + jhāyati2

Nijjhāyana

(nt.) burning away, consumption; fig. remorse, mortification in anto˚; Ja i.168 (cp. nijjhāna2).

Sk. *niḥkṣāyana, nis + jhāyana of jhāyati2

Niṭṭha

(adj.) dependent on, resting on, intent upon SN iii.13 (accanta˚); Nd i.263 (rūpa˚).

Sk. niṣṭha, ni + ˚tha; cp. niṭṭhā1

Niṭṭhā1

(f.) basis, foundation, familiarity with Snp 864 (expl Snp-a 551 by samiddhi, but see Nd i.263).

Sk. niṣṭhā; ni + ṭhā, abstr. of adj ■ suff. ˚ṭha

Niṭṭhā2

(f.) end, conclusion; perfection, height, summit; object aim Vin i.255; SN ii.186; AN i.279 (object); Pts i.161 niṭṭhaṃ gacchati to come to an end; fig. to reach perfection be completed in the faith MN i.176; Ja i.201; Mil 310; freq. in pp. niṭṭhaṃ gata (niṭṭhangata) one who has attained perfection (= pabbajitānaṃ arahattaṃ patta) Dhp-a iv.70; SN iii.99 (a˚); AN ii.175; AN iii.450 AN v.119 sq.; Dhp 351; Pts i.81, Pts i.161.

Vedic niṣṭhā (niḥṣṭhā), nis + ṭhā from ˚ṭha

Niṭṭhāti

to be at an end, to be finished Ja i.220; Ja iv.391; Dhp-a i.393 ■ pp. niṭṭhita, Caus niṭṭhāpeti (q.v.).

Sk. niṣṭiṣṭhati, nis + tiṭṭhati, the older *sthāti restored in compn

Niṭṭhāna

(nt.) being finished, carrying out, execution, performance DN i.141; Thag-a 19 (= avasāya). Cp. san˚.

abstr. of niṭṭhāti

Niṭṭhāpita

(& niṭṭhapita) accomplished, performed, carried out Ja i.86, Ja i.172 (˚ṭha˚), 201.

pp. of niṭṭhāpeti

Niṭṭhāpeti

to carry out, perform; prepare, make ready, accomplish Ja i.86, Ja i.290; Ja vi.366; Dhp-a iii.172 ■ pp. niṭṭhāpita Cp. pari˚.

Caus. to niṭṭhāti

Niṭṭhita

(adj.) brought or come to an end, finished, accomplished; (made) ready, prepared (i.e. the preparations being finished) Vin i.35; DN i.109 (bhattaṃ: the meal is ready); ii.127 (id.); Ja i.255 (id.); Ja ii.48; Ja iii.537 (finished); Vv-a 188; Pv-a 81; & often at conclusion of books & chapters. aniṭṭhita not completed Dhp-a iii.172su˚; well finished, nicely got up, accomplished Snp 48, Snp 240. Cp. pari˚.

Sk. niṣṭhita (niḥṣṭhita), nis + ṭhita, cp. niṭṭhāti

Niṭṭhubhati

(& nuṭṭhubhati Vin i.271; Ja i.459; also niṭṭhuhaṭi) to spit out, to expectorate Vin i.271 (nuṭṭhuhitvā) iii.132 (id.); Ja ii.105, Ja ii.117 (nuṭṭh˚); vi.367; Dhp-a ii.36 (niṭṭhuhitvā). pp. nuṭṭhubhita Sdhp 121 ■ Cp. oṭṭhubhati

Sk. niṣṭhubhati, but in meaning = Sk. niṣṭhīvati nis + *thīv, stubh taking the function of ṣṭhīv, since stubh itself is represented by thavati & thometi

Niṭṭhubhana

(nt.) spitting out, spittle Ja i.47; Pv-a 80 (= kheḷa, v.l. SS niṭṭhuvana, BB niṭhūna).

Sk. niṣṭhīvana, see niṭṭhubhati & cp. Prk. niṭṭhuhana

Niṭṭhurin

(adj.) rough, hard, cruel, merciless Snp 952 (a˚; this reading is mentioned as v.l. by Bdhgh at Snp-a 569, & the reading; anuddharī given; vv. ll SS anuṭṭhurī, BB anuṭṭharī, expld as anissukī Nd i.440 however has aniṭṭhurī with expln of nitthuriya as under issā at Vb 357).

Sk. niṣṭhura or niṣṭhūra, ni + thūra = thūla; cp. Prk. niṭṭhura

Niṭṭhuriya

(nt.) hardness, harshness, roughness Nd i.440; Nd ii.484 (in exegesis of makkha) Vb 357.

cp. Sk. niṣṭhuratva

Niḍḍāyati

to cut out, to weed DN i.231 (niddāyit˚); Iti 56 (as v.l. niddāta for niṇhāta, q.v.); Ja i.215. Caus niḍḍāpeti to cause to weed, to have weeds dug up Vin ii.180.

Sk. nirdāti, nis + dāyati, cp. Sk. nirdātar weeder

Niḍḍha

(nt.) nest, place, seat Dhp 148 (v.l. niḷa).

Vedic nīḍa resting-place ni + sad “sitting down”

Niṇhāta

(adj.) cleansed, purified Iti 56 (˚pāpaka = sinless; with several vv. ll amongst which niddāta of niḍḍāyati = cleansed of weeds = Nd i.58 (ninhāta˚) = Nd ii.514 (ninhāta, v.l. SS ninnahāta).

Sk. *niḥsnāta, nis + nahāta

Nitamba

the ridge of a mountain or a glen, gully DN-a i.209.

Sk. nitamba; etym. unknown

Nitammati

to become dark, to be exhausted, faint; to be in misery or anxiety Ja iv.284 (Com.: atikilamati).

Sk. nitāmyati, ni + tam as in tama

Nitāḷeti

to knock down, to strike Ja iv.347.

Sk. nitāḍayati, ni + tāḷeti

Nittaṇha

(adj.) free from thirst or desire, desireless Pv-a 230 (= nirāsa) f. abstr. nitthaṇhatā Ne 38.

BSk. niṣṭṛṣṇa (Divy 210 etc.), nis + taṇhā

Nittaddana

(better: nitthaddhana ) (nt.) paralysing DN i.11 (jīvhā˚ = mantena jivhāya thaddhakaraṇa DN-a i.96 v.l. (gloss) nibandhana).

Sk. *niṣṭambhana, abstr. fr. ni + thaddha = making rigid

Nittāreti

see nittharati.

Nittiṇa

(adj.) free from grass Ja iii.23.

Sk. niṣṭṛṇa, nis + tiṇa

Nittiṇṇa

(pp.) got out of, having crossed or overcome DN ii.275 (-ogha; v.l. BB nitiṇṇa) Nd i.159 (as v.l.; text has nitiṇṇa); Nd ii.278 (t.). Cp nittharati.

Sk. nistīrṇa, nis + tiṇṇa

Nittudana

(nt.) pricking, piercing AN i.65 (text: nittuddana) iii.403 sq.

nis + tudana, abstr. fr. tudati; cp. Sk. nistodā

Nitteja

(adj.) 1. without energy Vism 596.

2. “put out, abashed, put to shame, in ˚ṃ karoti to make blush or put to shame Ja ii.94 (lajjāpeti + ).

cp. Sk. nistejas only in meaning 1; nis + teja

Nitthanati & Nitthunati

to moan, groan: (a) ˚thanati Ja i.463; Ja ii.362; Ja iv.446; Ja v.296; DN-a i.291 ■ (b) ˚thunati Vin ii.222; Ja v.295, Ja v.389; Vism 311; Vv-a 224. Cp nitthuna.

Sk. nisstanati “moan out,” nis + thaneti & thunati;1

Nitthanana

(nt.) groaning, moaning DN-a i.291 (v.l. BB. ˚ṭhuna). As nitthunana Vism 504.

nis + thanana, abstr. to thaneti

Nittharaṇa1

(nt.) getting across, ferrying over, traversing, overcoming SN i.193 (oghassa); AN ii.200 (id.); Iti 111 (id.) MN i.134; Ja i.48 (loka˚); Dāvs ii.29 (id.); Vism 32; Sdhp 334 (bhava˚), 619 (tiloka˚).

Sk. nistaraṇa, nis + taraṇa, cp. nittharati

Nittharaṇa2

(nt.) “strewing or being strewn down,” putting down, carrying, bearing SN iv.177 (bhārassa, of a load, cp. nikkhepa); Vv-a 131 (so read for niddharaṇa, in kuṭumba-bhārassa nsamatthā = able to carry the burden of a household).

Sk. nistaraṇa, ni + tharaṇa

Nittharati

to cross over, get out of, leave behind, get over DN i.73 (kantāraṃ). pp nittiṇṇa q.v. Caus. nitthāreti to bring through, help over Nd ii.630 (nittāreti).

Sk. nistarati, nis + tarati1

Nitthāra

passing over, rescue, payment, acquittance, in ˚ṃ vattati to be acquitted, to get off scot-free MN i.442 (v.l. netth˚, which is the usual form). See netthāra.

Sk. nistāra; nis + tāra of tarati1

Nitthuna

(a) (of thunati;1) moan, groan DN-a i.291 (as v.l. BB for nitthanana)-(b) (of thunati2) blame, censure, curse Pv-a 76 (˚ṃ karoti to revile or curse).

Sk. *nis-stanana & nistava to thunati

Nitthunati

etc., see nitthanati etc.

Nidassana

(nt.) “pointing at” evidence, example, comparison, apposition, attribute characteristic; sign, term DN i.223 (a˚ with no attribute) iii.217 (id.); SN iv.370 (id.); AN iv.305 sq. (nīla˚, pīta etc.); Snp 137; Vb 13, Vb 64, Vb 70 sq. (sa˚, a˚); Vv-a 12, Vv-a 13; Pv-a 26, Pv-a 121 (pucchanākāra˚) 226 (paccakkhabhūtaṃ n “sign, token”).

Sk. nidarśana, ni + dassana

Nidassati

v.l. BB at Snp 785 for nirassati (q.v.) Nd i.76 has nid˚ in text, nir˚ as v.l. SS; Snp-a 522 reads nirassati

Nidassita

(pp.) pointed out, defined as, termed Pv i.512; Pv-a 30.

see nidasseti

Nidasseti

to point out (“down”), explain, show, define Vv-a 12, Vv-a 13 (˚etabbavacana the word to be compared or defined, correl. to nidassana-vacana) ■ pp. nidassita (q.v.).

Sk. nidarśayati, ni + dasseti

Nidahati

to lay down or aside, deposit; accumulate, hoard, bury (a treasure) Vin i.46 (cīvaraṃ); Mil 271; ger. nidahitvā Pv-a 97 (dhanadhaññaṃ) & nidhāya Dhp 142, Dhp 405; Snp 35 (daṇḍaṃ), 394 629; Nd ii.348; pres. also nidheti Kp-a 217, Kp-a 219; fut nidhessati Pv-a 132. Pass. nidhīyati Kp-a 217. Caus nidhāpeti Pv-a 130 (bhoge). See also nidāhaka, nidhāna & nidhi; also upanidhāya.

Sk. nidadhāti, ni + dahati1

Nidāgha

heat, summer-heat, summer, drought Ja i.221 (-samaya dry season); ii.80; Vism 259 (˚samaya, where Kp-a 58 reads sarada-samaya); Pv-a 174 (-kāla summer). fig Ja iv.285; Ja v.404; Dāvs ii.60.

Sk. nidāgha, fr. nidahati, ni + dahati2, see ḍahati

Nidāna

(nt.) (a) (n.) tying down to; ground (lit. or fig.), foundation, occasion source, origin, cause; reason, reference, subject (“sujet”) MN i.261; AN i.134 sq.; 263 sq., 338; ii.196 iv.128 sq.; Dhs 1059 (dukkha˚, source of pain), 1136 Ne 3, Ne 32; Mil 272 (of disease: pathology, aetiology) 344 (˚paṭhanakusala, of lawyers); Pv-a 132, Pv-a 253. (b) (adj ■ ˚) founded on, caused by, originating in relating to SN v.213 sq. (a˚ & sa˚); AN i.82 (id.); Snp 271 (ito˚), 866 (kuto˚), 1050 (upadhi˚ = hetuka, paccayā kāraṇā Nd ii.346); 872 (icchā˚) etc.; Vv-a 117 (vimānāni Rājagaha˚ playing at or referring to R.) ■ (c) nidānaṃ (acc. as adv.) by means of, in consequence of, through usually with tato˚ through this, yato˚ through which DN i.52, DN i.73; MN i.112; Pv iv.161 (through whom = yaṃ nimittaṃ Pv-a 242); Pv-a 281; ito˚ by this Nd ii.2912.

Sk. nidāna, ni + *dāna of , dyati to bind, cp. Gr. δέσμα, δ ̈ημα (fetter) & see dāma

Nidāhaka

(adj.) one who puts away, one who has the office of keeper or warder (of robes: cīvara˚ Vin i.284.

fr. nidahati

Nidda

(nt.) a cave Nd i.23 (Ep. of kāya).

nis + dara, see darī

Niddanta

= niddā Ja vi.294.

so read for niddanna, v.l. niddhā = niddā; cp. supinanta

Niddaya

(adj.) merciless, pitiless, cruel Sdhp 143, Sdhp 159.

Sk. nirdaya, nis + dayā (adj.)

Niddara

(adj.) free from fear, pain or anguish Dhp 205 = Snp 257 (expld at Dhp-a iii.269 by rāgadarathānaṃ abhāvena n.; at Snp-a 299 by kilesapariḷāhâbhāvena n.).

nis + dara

Niddasa

see niddesa.

Niddā

(f.) sleep AN ii.48, AN ii.50; AN iii.251; Snp 926 (opp. jāgariyā), 942 (see expln at Nd i.423); Ja i.61, Ja i.192; Ja ii.128 ■ niddaṃ okkamati to fall asleep Vin i.15 (niddā?); Ja iii.538 Ja iv.1; Dhp-a i.9; Vv-a 65; Pv-a 47; ˚ṃ upagacchati id Pv-a 43, Pv-a 105, Pv-a 128.

-ārāma fond of sleep, slothful, sluggish Iti 72 (+ kammarāma, bhassarata); -ārāmatā fondness of sleep laziness, sluggishness AN iii.116, AN iii.293 sq., 309 sq.; iv.25 (+ kamm˚, bhass˚); v.164; -sīlin of drowsy habits slothful, sleepy Snp 96.

Vedic nidrā, ni + drā in Sk. drāti, drāyate, Idg. *dorē; cp. Gr. (hom.) ε ̓́δραχον, Lat. dormio

Niddāna

(nt.) cutting off, mowing, destroying Snp 78 (= chedana lunana uppāṭana Snp-a 148) = SN i.172; K.S. i.319, cp. niḍḍāyati.

Sk. *nirdāna, nis + dāna of dayati2, Sk. dāti, cp. dātta

Niddāyati

to sleep DN i.231; Ja i.192, Ja i.266; Ja ii.103; Ja v.68, Ja v.382; Dhp-a iii.175; Snp-a 169.

Denom. fr. niddā

Niddāyitar

a sleepy person Dhp 325.

n. ag. fr. niddāyati

Niddiṭṭha

(pp.) expressed, explained, designated Mil 3; Dhs-a 57; Vism 528; Vv-a 13.

see niddisati

Niddisati

(& niddissati) to distinguish, point out, explain designate, define, express, to mean Iti 122 = Nd ii.276f Mil 123, Mil 345; Dhs-a 57; Dhp-a ii.59; Pv-a 87, Pv-a 217 (˚itvā); aor. niddisi Dhs-a 57; Snp-a 61 ■ grd. niddisitabba Dhs-a 56; Ne 96. Pass. niddissīyati Pv-a 163-pp. niddiṭṭha (q.v.).

Sk. nir-diśati, nis + disati, cp. Lat. distinguo

Niddukkha

(adj.) without fault or evil Ja iii.443 (in expln of anīgha); Pv-a 230 (id.); (in expln of mārisa) K.S. (S.A.) 1, 2, n. 1.

nis + dukkha

Niddesa

1. description, attribute, distinction Pv-a 7 (ukkaṭṭha˚) ˚vatthu object of distinction or praise DN iii.253; AN iv.15 (where reading is niddasa, which also as v.l. at DN iii.253 & Ps; i.5).

2. descriptive exposition analytic explanation by way of question & answer interpretation, exegesis Vin v.114 (sa˚); Ne 4, Ne 8 Ne 38 sq.; Vism 26; Dhs-a 54; Vv-a 78; Pv-a 71, Pv-a 147. 3. Name of an old commentary (ascribed to Sāriputta) on parts of the Sutta Nipāta (Aṭṭhaka-vagga, interpreted in the Mahā-Niddesa; Pārāyana-vagga and, as a sort of appendix, the Khaggavisāṇa-sutta, interpreted in the Culla-Niddesa); as one of the canonical texts included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; editions in P.T.S. Quoted often in the Visuddhimagga, e.g. p. 140, 208 sq. etc.

Sk. nirdeśa, fr. niddisati, cp. desa, desaka etc.

Niddosa1

(adj.) faultless, pure, undefiled Snp 476; Dhs-a 2; Pv-a 189 (= viraja); Dhp-a i.41.

Sk. nirdośa, nis + dosa1

Niddosa2

(adj.) free from hatred Ja iv.10 (su˚; Com. “adussanavasena,” foll. upon sunikkodha).

Sk. nirdveṣa, nis + dosa2

Niddhana

(adj.) without property, poor Ja v.447.

nis + dhana

Niddhanta

(adj.) blown off, removed, cleaned, purified AN i.254 (jātarūpa “loitered,” cp. niddhota); Snp 56 (˚kasāva-moha; Com vijahati); Dhp 236 (˚mala, malānaṃ nīhaṭatāya Dhp-a iii.336); Nd ii.347 (= vanta & pahīna); Ja vi.218 (of hair Com. expls siniddharutā, v.l. BB siniddha-anta thus meant for Sk. snigdhānta).

pp. of niddhamati, nis + dhanta, q.v.

Niddhamati

to blow away, blow off; to clean, cleanse, purify; to throw out, eject, remove Snp 281 = Mil 414 (kāraṇḍavaṃ) Snp 282 (˚itvā pāpicche), 962 (malaṃ = pajahati (Nd i.478); Dhp 239 (id.); Mil 43 ■ pp. niddhanta ).

in form = Sk. nirdhmāti, nis + dhamati, but in meaning the verb, as well as its derivations, are influenced by both meanings of niddhāvati (dhāvati1 & 2): see niddhāpeti, niddhamana, & niddhovati

Niddhamana

(nt.) drainage, drain, canal Vin ii.120 (udaka˚; dhovituṃ immediately preceding); Ja i.175 Ja i.409, Ja i.425; Ja iii.415; Ja iv.28; Ja v.21 (udaka˚); Dhp-a ii.37.

of niddhamati or = *nirdhāvana = ˚dhovana to dhāvati2

Niddhamanā

(f.) throwing out, ejection, expulsion Ja v.233 (= nikkaḍḍhanā Com.).

either to niddhamati or to niddhāpeti

Niddharaṇa

(nt.) not with Hardy (Index Vv-a) = Sk. nirdhāraṇa (estimation), but to be read as nittharaṇa (see nittharaṇa2).

Niddhāpita

(adj.) thrown out Ja iii.99 (v.l. for nibbāpita).

pp. of niddhāpeti, q.v.

Niddhāpeti

to throw out, chase away, expel Ja iv.41 (niddhāpayiṃsu), 48 (? for niddhāmase). pp. niddhāpita.

Sk. nirdhāvayati, nis + dhāveti (dhāpeti), Caus. of dhāvati1; may also stand for niddhamāpeti Caus. fr. niddhamati, cp. contamination niddhāmase at Ja iv.48, unless misread for niddhāpaye, as v.l. BB bears out

Niddhāmase

at Ja iv.48 should probably be read niddhāpaye (as v.l. BB), q.v.

Niddhunāti

to shake off SN iii.155; AN iii.365 (odhunāti + ; spelt nidhunāti) MN i.229; Thag 416; Pv-a 256 (= odhunāti).

Sk. nirdhunoti, nis + dhunāti

Niddhuniya

(?) (nt.) hypocrisy Pp 18 (= makkha); cp J.P.T.S. 1884, 83.

= Sk. nihnuvana fr. nihnute with diff. derivation

Niddhūpana

(adj.) unscented Ja vi.21 (udaka).

nir + dhūpana

Niddhota

(adj.) washed, cleansed, purified Dāvs v.63 (˚rūpiya; cp. niddhanta).

nis + dhota; pp. of niddhovati

Niddhovati

to wash off, clean, purify AN i.253 (jātarūpaṃ, immediately followed by niddhanta). pp. niddhota.

Sk. nirdhāvati, nis + dhovati, cp. niddhamati

Nidhāna

(nt.) laying down, depositing, keeping; receptacle; accumulation, (hidden treasure Ja iv.280 (nidhi˚); Pv-a 7 (udaka-dāna-nīharaṇa-n˚), 97 (n-gata dhana = hoarded, accumulated), 132 (˚ṃ nidhessāmi gather a treasure); Dhs-a 405 (˚kkhama).

Vedic nidhāna, see nidahati

Nidhānavant

(adj.) forming or having a receptacle, worth treasuring or saving DN i.4 (= hadaye nidhātabba-yuttavāca DN-a i.76). Nidhapeti, Nidhaya & Nidhiyati;

Nidhāpeti, Nidhāya & Nidhīyati

, see nidahati.

Nidhi

1. “setting down,” receptacle; (hidden) treasure Snp 285 (brahma n.); Dhp 76; Kp viii.2 (see Kp-a 217 sq.: nidhīyatī ti nidhi, def. of n.), 9 (acorâharaṇo nidhi cp. “treasures in heaven, where thieves do not steal” Matt. 6, 20) Sdhp 528, Sdhp 588.

2. “putting on,” a cloak Ja vi.79 (expld as vākacīra-nivāsanaṃ = a bark dress). Cp sannidhi.

-kumbhī a treasure-pot, a treasure hidden in a pot = a hidden treasure Dhp-a ii.107; Dhp-a iv.208; -nidhāna laying up treasures, burying a treasure Ja iv.280 -mukha an excellent treasure AN v.346.

Vedic nidhi, ni + dhā, see nidahati

Nidhura

see nīdhura.

Nidheti

see nidahati.

Nindati

to blame, find fault with, censure AN ii.3; AN v.171 AN v.174; Snp 658; Ja vi.63; Dhp 227; inf. nindituṃ Dhp 230 grd. nindanīya Snp-a 477. pp. nindita (q.v.); cp. also nindiya.

Sk. nindati, nid as in Gr. ο ̓́νειδος (blame), Lith. naids (hatred), Goth. naitjan (to rail or blaspheme) Ohg. neizzan (to plague); cp. Goth. neip = Ohg. nīd (envy)

Nindana

(nt.) blaming, reviling, finding fault Dhp-a iii.328.

abstr. fr. nindati

Nindā

(f.) blame, reproach, fault-finding, fault, disgrace SN iii.73; AN ii.188; AN iv.157 sq.; MN i.362; Snp 213 (+ pasaṃsā blame & praise) Dhp 81 (id.); Snp 826, Snp 895, Snp 928; Dhp 143, Dhp 309; Nd i.165 Nd i.306, Nd i.384; Dhp-a ii.148 ■ In compn nindi˚; see anindi˚.

cp. Sk. nindā, to nindati

Nindita

(adj.) blamed, reproved, reviled; faulty, blameworthy Dhp 228; Pv ii.334 (a˚ blameless agarahita pasaṃsa Pv-a 89); Sdhp 254, Sdhp 361anindita Ja iv.106 (˚angin).

pp. of nindati

Nindiya

(adj.) blameable, faulty, blameworthy Snp 658 (= nindanīya Snp-a 477) Ne 132. pi nindiyā at Pv-a 23 is to be read as pīṇitindriyā

Sk. nindya, orig. grd. of nindati

Ninna

(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) bent down (cp ninnata), low-lying, deep, low, sunken Ja ii.3 (magga) Pv-a 29 (bhūmibhāga), 132 (ṭhāṇa); esp. freq. as-˚ bent on, inclining to, leading to, aiming at, flowing into etc. Often combd with similar expressions in chain taccarita tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra tadādhimutta (with variation nibbāna˚ viveka˚ etc. for tad˚): Nd ii.under tad; Ja ii.15; Pts ii.197-Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198 (samuddo anupubba˚ etc.) AN iv.224 (viveka˚); v.175 (id.); MN i.493 (Nibbāna˚) Similarly: samudda˚ Gangā MN i.493; nekkhamma Ja i.45 (v.258); samādhi˚ Mil 38.

2. (acc. as adv. downward: ninnaṃ pavattati to flow downward MN i.117; Pv i.57; ninnagata running down Mil 259 (udaka); ninnaga Dāvs iv.28.

3. (nt.) low land, low ground, plain (opp. thala elevation, plateau): usually with ref. to a raincloud flooding the low country Snp 30 (mahamegho ˚ṃ pūrayaṃto); Snp-a 42 (= pallala); Iti 66 (megho ˚ṃ pūreti); Pv ii.945 (megho ˚ṃ paripūrayanto).

-unnata low lying & elevated Mil 349 (desabhāga).;

Vedic nimna, der. fr. ni down, prob. combd with ˚na of nam to bend, thus meaning “bent down,” cp. unna & panna

Ninnata

(adj.) bent down, bent upon, in ninnatattā (fem. abstr.) aim, purpose (?) Dhs-a 39 (is the reading correct?).

ni + nata

Ninnāda

(& Nināda Miln, Dāvs) sounding forth, sound, tune, melody AN ii.117 (˚sadda) Ja vi.43; Vv-a 161; Mil 148; Dāvs v.31.

Sk. nināda, ni + nāda

Ninnādin

(adj.) sounding (loud), resonant (of a beautiful voice) DN ii.211 (cp. aṭṭhanga brahmassara & bindu).;

fr. ninnāda

Ninnāmin

(adj.) bending downwards, descending AN iv.237.

fr. ni + nam

Ninnāmeti

to bend down, put out (the tongue) DN i.106 (jivhaṃ = nīharati DN-a i.276) Ja i.163, Ja i.164; cp. Divy 7, Divy 71 (nirṇāmayati).

Caus. of ni + namati

Ninnīta

(adj.) lead down, lead away; drained, purified, free from (˚-) AN i.254 (ninnīta-kasāva of gold: free fr. dross).

pp. of ninneti

Ninnetar

one who leads down to, one who disposes of (c. gen.) bringer of, giver, usually in phrase atthassa n. (bringer of good: “Heilbringer”) of the Buddha SN iv.94; MN i.111; AN v.226 sq., 256 sq.; Pts ii.194.

n. ag. to ni-nayati = Sk. *ninayitṛ, cp. netar

Ninneti

to lead down, lead away; drain, (udakaṃ), desiccate Vin ii.180 ■ pp ninnīta, q.v.

Sk. ninayati, ni + nayati

Ninhāta

see niṇhāta.

Nipa

at Ja v.6 read as nīpa.

Nipaka

(adj.) intelligent, clever, prudent, wise SN i.13, SN i.52, SN i.187; MN i.339; AN i.165 (+ jhāyin); iii.24, 138; Snp 45Dhp 328Dhp-a i.62; Snp 283, Snp 962, Snp 1038; Nd ii.349 (= jātimā = Nd i.478; Bv i.49; Vb 426; Mil 34, Mil 342, Mil 411 Vism 3 (defn).

cp. BSk. nipaka chief, fr. Sk. nipa, chief, master

Nipakka

at Vin i.200 read nippakka. Nipacc-akara

Nipacc-ākāra

obedience, humbleness, service SN i.178; SN v.233; AN v.66; Ja i.232 Ja iv.133; Vv-a 22, Vv-a 320; Pv-a 12. Nipacca-vadin

nipacca, ger. of nipatati + ākāra

Nipacca-vādin

(adj.) speaking hurtfully Snp 217 (= dāyakaṃ nipātetvā appiyavacanāni vattā Snp-a 272).

nipacca, ger. of nipāteti + vādin

Nipajjati

to lie down (to sleep) DN i.246; AN iv.332; Ja i.150; Dhp-a i.40; Pv-a 280; aor nipajji Ja i.279; Ja ii.154; Ja iii.83; Vv-a 75, Vv-a 76; Pv-a 74, Pv-a 75 Pv-a 93; ger. nipajja Ja i.7 (v.44: ˚ṭṭhānacankama) ■ Caus nipajjāpeti to lay down, deposit Ja i.50, Ja i.253, Ja i.267 Ja iii.26, Ja iii.188; Dhp-a i.50; Vv-a 76 (˚etvā rakkhāpetha) Cp. abhi˚.

Sk. nipadyate, ni + pajjati

Nipatati

1. (intrs. ) to fall down, fly down, descend, go out Vin ii.192 (Bhagavato pādesu sirasā n. bending his head at the feet of Bh.); Pv-a 60 (id.); Ja i.278; Ja v.467 (nippatissāmi = nikkhamissāmi Com.) Pv ii.89 (v.l. BB parivisayitvā) = nikkhamitvā Pv-a 109 (cp. nippatati).

2. (trs.) to bring together to convene, in nipatāmase (pres. subj.) “shall we convene ” Ja iv.361. See also nipadāmase ■ Cp. abhi˚ san˚.

Sk. nipatati, ni + patati

Nipadāmase

at Ja iii.120 is an old misreading & is to be corrected into; nipatāmase (= let us gather, bring together = dedicate), unless it be read as nipphadāmase (= do, set forth, prepare, give), in spite of Com. expln p. 121: nikārapakārā (= nipaccakārā?) upasaggā (upasajja?) dāmase ( ) ti attho; endorsed by Müller, P.G. p. 97 & Kern,; Toev. p. 175. It cannot be ni + pa dāmase, since ni is never used as secondary (modifying verb-component (see ni˚ A 2), & Bdhgh’s expl;n is popular etym. Cp. nipatāmase at Ja iv.361 (see nipatati).

Nipanna

(adj.) lying down Ja i.151, Ja i.279; Ja ii.103; Ja iii.276 (˚kāle while he was asleep), iv.167; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 265 (spelt nippanna, opp. nikujja).

pp. of nipajjati

Nipannaka

(adj.) = nipanna Pts ii.209; Ja i.151.

Nipalāvita

(pp.) (Com. reading for vipalāvita text) made to swim, immersed, thrown into water Ja i.326.

Sk. viplāvita, see plavati

Nipāka

(adj.) full grown, fully developed, in full strength Ja vi.327 (of a tree).

Sk. nipāka, ni + pāka (pacati)

Nipāta

1. falling down Dhp 121 (udabindu˚); Vv-a 279 (diṭṭhi˚, a glance) Pv-a 45 (asa˚).

2. descending MN i.453.

3. a particle the gram. term for adverbs, conjunctions & interjections Ja v.243 (assu); Pv-a 11 (mā), 26 (vo), 40 (taṃ) 50 (ca).

4. a section of a book (see next). Cp. vi˚ san˚.

Sk. nipāta, ni + pāta, of nipatati

Nipātaka

(adj.) divided into sections or chapters Dpvs iv.16.

to nipāta

Nipātana

(nt.) 1. falling upon Dhp-a i.295. - 2. going to bed Vv-a 71 (pacchā˚ opp. pubbuṭṭhāna) Cp. nipātin.

to nipatati

Nipātin

(adj.) 1. falling or flying down, chancing upon Dhp 35, Dhp 36 (yatthakāma˚ cittaṃ = yattha yattha icchati tattha tatth’ eva nipatati Dhp-a i.295). 2. going to bed DN i.60 (pacchā˚ going to bed late). Cp. abhi˚.

to nipatati

Nipāteti

to let fall, throw down into (c. loc.); bring to fall, injure; fig. cast upon, charge with DN i.91; MN i.453 (ayokaṭāhe); Ja iii.359; Snp-a 272; Pv-a 152 (bhūmiyaṃ). pp. nipātita corrupt, evil wicked Vin ii.182 (caṇḍa + ; text nippātita, v.l. nipphātita).

ni + Caus. of patati

Nipuṇa

(adj.) clever, skilful, accomplished; fine, subtle, abstruse DN i.26≈(n. gambhīra dhamma), 162 (paṇḍita + ); MN i.487 (dhamma); SN i.33; SN iv.369; AN iii.78; Snp 1126 (= gambhīra duddasa etc. Nd ii.350); Vb 426; Mil 233, Mil 276; DN-a i.117; Vv-a 73 (ariyasaccesu kusala + ) 232; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 16. Cp. abhinipuṇa.

Sk. nipuṇa, dial. for nipṛṇa, to pṛṇoti, pṛ;

Nippakāra

(adj.) of no flavour, tasteless, useless Ja i.340.

nis + pakāra 2

Nippakka

(adj.) boiled, infused Vin i.200.

nis + pakka

Nippajjati & Nipphajjati

to be produced, be accomplished, spring forth, ripen result, happen Dhp-a ii.4 (pph); Pv-a 19 (= upakappati) 71 (phalaṃ ijjhati n.), 120 (id.). pp. nipphanna. See also nipphādeti & nipphatti etc.; cp. also abhi˚.

Sk. niṣpadyate, nis + pajjati

Nippañña

(adj.) unwise, foolish Pv-a 40, Pv-a 41 (= dummati).

nis + pañña

Nippatati & Nipphatati

to fall out; rush out, come forth, go out from (c. abl.) Vin ii.151 (nipphaṭati v.l. nippaṭati); Ja v.467 (= nikkhamati Com.; or is it nipatati?) ■ ger. nippacca (cp. BSk. nirpatya Avs i.209).

nis + patati

Nippatta

(adj.) 1. without wings, plucked (of a bird) Vin iv.259.

2. without leaves Ja iii.496 (= patita-patta); Snp-a 117 (˚puppha) ■ Note nippatta at Dhs 1035 is to be read as nibbatta.

nis + patta

Nippatti

see nipphatti.

Nippadā

(?) at SN i.225 read nipphādā (q.v.).

Nippadesa

only in instr. & abl. = separately Dhs-a 2, Dhs-a 30, Dhs-a 37, Dhs-a 297.;

Sk. *niṣpradesa, nis + padesa

Nippanna

see nipanna & nipphanna.;

Nippapañca

(adj.) free from diffuseness SN iv.370; Dhp 254 (Tathāgata); ˚ārāma not fond of delay MN i.65 (Neumann trsl. i.119: “dem keine Sonderheit behagt”); AN iii.431; AN iv.229 sq.; Mil 262.

nis + papañca

Nippabha

(adj.) without splendour Ja ii.415; Mil 102.

nis + prabhā

Nippariyāya

1. without distinction or difference, absence of explanation or demonstration Dhs-a 317 (˚ena not figuratively), 403 (˚desanā); Vv-a 320.

2. unchangeable, not to be turned Mil 113, Mil 123 Mil 212.

nis + pariyāya

Nippalāpa

(adj.) free from prattle or talk, not talking AN ii.183 (apalāpa + ; v.l. ˚palāsa).

nis + palāpa

Nippalibodha

(adj.) without hindrances, unobstructed Mil 11.

nis + palibodha

Nippādeti

see nipphādeti.

Nippāpa

(adj.) free from sin Snp 257 = Dhp 205.

nis + pāpa

Nippitika

(adj.) a bastard Ja i.133 (v.l. nippītika q.v.).

Sk. *niṣpaitṛka = fatherless or *niṣprītika?

Nippipāsa

(adj.) without thirst or desire Snp 56; Nd ii.351.

nis + pipāsā

Nippītika

(adj.) 1. free from (feelings of) enjoyment (characteristic of 3rd jhāna, q.v.) DN i.75; AN i.81.

2. being unloved, a foster child etc. (?) see nippitika.

nis + pīti + ka

Nippīḷana

(nt.) squeezing, pressing; a blow Ja iii.160. Cp. abhinippīḷanā.

nis + pīḷana

Nippīḷeti

to squeeze, press, clench, urge Ja i.63, Ja i.223. Pass. nippīḷiyati, only in ppr. nippīḷiyamāna being urged Vin ii.303; Vv-a 138; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 192. Cp. abhi˚.

nis + pīḷeti

Nippurisa

(adj.) 1. without men Pv-a 177. - 2. without men, executed by females (female devas only (of turiyā = a female orchestra) Vin i.15; DN ii.21; Ja v.506. Cp. Mvu iii.165 (niṣpuruṣena nāṭakena & Avs i.321 (niṣpuruṣena tūryeṇa; see also note in Index p. 229), whereas Divy 3 (see Index) has niṣparuṣa (soft), with v.l. niṣpuruṣa.

nis + purisa

Nippesika

one who performs jugglery, a juggler DN i.8 (= nippeso sīlaṃ etesan ti DA.i.91); AN iii.111.

cp. Sk. niṣpeṣa clashing against, bounce, shock, niṣ + piṣ

Nippesikatā

(f.) jugglery, trickery (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 176) Vb 353 (expld at Vism 29); Mil 383.

abstr. fr. prec.

Nippothana

(nt.) crushing, beating, destroying Snp-a 390.

nis + pothana of puth to crush

Nipphajjati

see nippajjati.

Nipphajjana

(nt.) (or ˚nā f. ?) resulting, procedure, achievement, plot Ja iv.83.

n. abstr. fr. nipp(h)ajjati

Nipphatti

(f.) result, accomplishment, effect, end, completion, perfection Ja i.56, Ja i.335 (of dreams), 343, 456; iv.137 (sippe); vi.36; Vv-a 138 (sippa˚); Dhp-a ii.6 (import, meaning, of a vision); Dhs-a 354; Pv-a 122, Pv-a 282 (sippe); Ne 54. Cp. abhi˚.

cp. Sk. niṣpatti

Nipphattika

(adj.) having a result Ja iii.166 (evaṃ˚ of such consequence).

fr. nipphatti

Nipphanna

(adj.) accomplished, perfected, trained SN i.215 (˚sobhin, spelt nippanna) Ja iv.39 (˚sippa master of the art, M.A.); Dhp-a iii.285 (sasse); Dhs-a 316; in phil. determined, conditioned Kvu xi.7; xxiii.5; Vism 450; Pts. of Controversy, 395 Cp. abhi˚, pari˚. See also Cpd. 156, 157.

pp. of nippajjati

Nipphala

(adj.) without fruit, barren in ; not without fruit, i.e. amply rewarded (dāyaka, the giver of good gifts) Pv i.42; 55, Pv-a 194; Sdhp 504.

nis + phala

Nipphalita

(adj.) broken out, split open Ja i.493 (lasī = nikkhantā Com.; v.l. nipphaḷita).

Sk. niṣphārita, pp. of nipphaleti, nis + phaleti

Nipphāṇitatta

(nt.) state of being free from sugar or molasses Ja iii.409.

nis + phāṇita + tva

Nipphādaka

(adj.) producing, accomplishing Dhs-a 47; Pv-a 147 (sukha-˚ṃ puññaṃ).

fr. nipphādeti

Nipphādana

(nt.) accomplishment Mil 356; DN-a i.195.

Sk. niṣpādana, to nipphādeti

Nipphādar

one who produces or gains SN i.225 (atthassa; read nipphādā nom. for nippadā).

n. ag. = Sk. niṣpādayitṛ cp. nipphāditar

Nipphādita

(having) produced, producing (perhaps = nipphāditar) Vv-a 113.

pp. of nipphādeti

Nipphāditar

one who produces or accomplishes Pv-a 8 (read “so nipphāditā” for sā nipphādikā). Cp. nipphādita and nipphādaka.

n. ag. to nipphādeti, cp. nipphādar

Nipphādeti

to bring forth, produce; accomplish, perform Ja i.185 (lābhasakkāraṃ); v.81; Mil 299; Vv-a 32, Vv-a 72 (grd. nipphādetabba, Name of ablative case); Sdhp 319, Sdhp 426 ■ pp. nipphādita. Cp abhinipphādeti.

Caus. of nippajjati

Nipphoṭana

(nt.) beating SN iv.300 (v.l. ṭh.). Cp. nippothana.

nis + pothanā

Nipphoṭeti

to beat down, smother, crush SN i.101, SN i.102.

nis + potheti

Nibaddha

(adj.) bound down to, i.e. (1) fixed, stable, sure Ja iv.134 (bhattavetana); Mil 398 (a˚ unstable, ˚sayana). At DN-a i.243 two kinds of cārikā (wanderings, pilgrimages) are distinguished, viz. nibaddha˚; definite, regular and anibaddha˚; indefinite irregular pilgrimage ■ (2) asked, pressed, urged Ja iii.277 ■ (3) nibaddhaṃ (nt. as adv.) constantly always, continually Ja i.100, Ja i.150; Ja iii.325; Ja v.95, Ja v.459 Ja vi.161; Pv-a 267 (˚vasanaka); Dhp-a ii.41, Dhp-a ii.52 sq.

ni + baddha

Nibandha

binding, bond; attachment, continuance, continuity SN ii.17; Vv-a 259 Vv-a 260 (perseverance). acc. nibandhaṃ (often misspelt for nibaddhaṃ ) continually Vv-a 75. Cp. vi˚.

Sk. nibandha, ni + bandha

Nibandhati

1. to bind Mil 79.

2. to mix, apply, prepare Vin ii.151 (anibandhanīya unable to be applied, not binding); Ja i.201 (yāgubhattaṃ). 3. to press, urge, importune Ja iii.277.

ni + bandhati

Nibandhana

(nt.) tying, fastening; binding, bond; (adj.) tied to, fettered Snp 654 (kamma˚); Mil 78, Mil 80.

ni + bandhana

Nibodhati

to attend to, to look out for, to take Ja iii.151 (= gaṇhati) ■ Caus. nibodheti to waken, at Thag 22 is probably to be read as vibodheti.

ni + bodhati

Nibbatta

(pp.) existing, having existed, being reborn Vin i.215 (n. bījaṃ phalaṃ fruit with seed); Ja i.168; Ja ii.111; Pv-a 10 (niraye) 35 (petayoniyaṃ), 100 (pubbe n ■ ṭhānato paṭṭhāya) Mil 268 (kamma˚, hetu˚ & utu˚) ■ Cp. abhi˚.;

Sk. nirvṛtta, nis + vaṭṭa, pp. of nibbattati

Nibbattaka

(adj.) producing, yielding Pv-a 26 (phala ˚ṃ kusalakammaṃ), 126 (= sukha˚ = sukhāvaha).

cp. nibbatta

Nibbattati

to come out from (cp. E. turn out), arise, become, be produced, result, come into being, be reborn, ex-ist (= nir-vatt) Dhp 338; Pv i.11 (nibbattate); Thag-a 259 (= jāyati); Dhp-a iii.173; Pv-a 8 (= uppajjati) 71 (id.); ger. nibbattitvā Ja ii.158 (kapiyoniyaṃ); Pv-a 68, Pv-a 78; aor. nibbatti Ja i.221; Pv-a 14 (Avīcimhi), 67 (petesu), 73 (amaccakule) ■ pp. nibbatta (q.v.). Caus. nibbatteti (q.v.). Cp. abhi˚.

nis + vattati

Nibbattana

(nt.) growing, coming forth; (re)birth, existence, life Ja ii.105; Pv-a 5 (devaloke n-araha deserving rebirth in the world of gods) 9 67 etc.

abstr. fr. nibbattati

Nibbattanaka

(adj.) 1. arising, coming out, growing Thag-a 259 (akkhidalesu n. pīḷikā).

2. one destined to be reborn, a candidate of rebirth Ja iii.304 (sagge).

fr. nibbattana

Nibbattāpana

(nt.) reproduction Mil 97.

fr. nibbattāpeti, see nibbatteti

Nibbatti

(f.) constitution, product; rebirth Ja i.47; Ne 28, Ne 79; Vism 199, Vism 649; Vv-a 10 Cp. abhi˚.

Sk. nirvṛtti, nis + vatti

Nibbattita

(adj.) done, produced, brought forth Pv-a 150 (a˚kusalakamma = akata).

pp. of nibbatteti

Nibbattin

(adj.) arising, having rebirth, in neg. anibbattin not to be born again Ja vi.573.

fr. nibbatti

Nibbatteti

to produce, bring forth; practise, perform; to bring to light, find something lost (at Mil 218) Nd ii.= jāneti (s. v.); Ja i.66, Ja i.140; Ja iii.396 (jhānâbhiññaṃ); Pv-a 76 (jhānāni) 30; Mil 200; Sdhp 470 ■ pp. nibbattita (q.v.) 2nd Caus. nibbattāpeti to cause rebirth Dhp-a iii.484 see also nibbattāpana ■ Cp. abhi˚.

nis + vatteti, Caus. of nibbattati

Nibbaṅka

(adj.) not crooked, straight Dhp-a i.288.

nis + vanka

Nibbajjeti

to throw away, to do without, to avoid Thag 1105.

nis + vajjeti

Nibbana

(adj.) 1. without forest, woodless Ja ii.358.

2. [an abstr. fr. nibbāna, see nibbāna I. cp. vana2. Freq. nibbāna as v.l. instead of nibbana without cravings Snp 1131 (nikkāmo nibbano); Dhp 283 (nibbanā pl.) Vv 5014 (better reading nibbāna, in phrase “vanā nibbānaṃ āgataṃ,” as found at AN iii.346 Thag 691, although the latter has nibbanaṃ in text) expld by “nittaṇhabhāvaṃ nibbānam eva upagataṃ Vv-a 213.

Sk. nirvana

Nibbanatha

(adj.) free from lust or cravings SN i.180, SN i.186 (so ‘haṃ vane nibbanatho visallo); Thag 526; Dhp 344; Dāvs i.18.

nis + vanatha

Nibbasana

(adj.) no longer worn, cast off (of cloth) SN ii.202, SN ii.221.

nis + vasana

Nibbahati

to stretch out Ja iii.185 (asiṃ); to pull out Ja v.269 (jivhaṃ = jivhaṃ balisena n. 275). See also nibbāheti & nibbāhāpeti.;

nis + bahati

Nibbāti

(instr.) to cool off (lit. & fig.), to get cold to become passionless Snp 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaṃ padīpo = vijjhāyanti; yathâyaṃ padīpo nibbuto evaṃ nibbanti Kp-a 194, Kp-a 195), 915 (kathaṃ disvā nibbāti bhikkhu = rāgaṃ etc. nibbāpeti Nd i.344); Ja iv.391 (pāyāsaṃ). See also parinibbāti (e.g. Vb 426).

see nibbuta etym.; influenced in meaning by Sk. nirvāti, nis + vāti to blow, i.e. to make cool, see vāyati & nibbāpeti

Nibbāna

(nt.) ■ I. Etymology. Although nir + “to blow”. (cp. BSk. nirvāṇa) is already in use in the Vedic period (see nibbāpeti), we do not find its distinctive application till later and more commonly in popular use, where is fused with vṛ; in this sense, viz. in application to the extinguishing of fire, which is the prevailing Buddhist conception of the term. Only in the older texts do we find references to a simile of the wind and the flame; but by far the most common metaphor and that which governs the whole idea of nibbāna finds expression in the putting out of fire by other means of extinction than by blowing, which latter process rather tends to incite the fire than to extinguish it. The going out of the fire may be due to covering it up, or to depriving it of further fuel, by not feeding it, or by withdrawing the cause of its production. Thus to the Pali etymologist the main reference is to the root vṛ; (to cover), and not to (to blow). This is still more clearly evident in the case of nibbuta (q.v. for further discussion). In verbal compn. nis + (see vāyati) refers only to the (non-emittance of an odour, which could never be used for a meaning of “being exhausted”; moreover, one has to bear in mind that native commentators themselves never thought of explaining nibbāna by anything like blowing (vāta), but always by nis + vana (see nibbana) For Bdhgh’s defn of nibbāna see e.g. Vism 293-The meanings of n. are: 1. the going out of a lamp or fire (popular meaning).

2. health, the sense of bodily well-being (probably, at first, the passing away of feverishness, restlessness).

3. The dying out in the heart of the threefold fire of rāga, dosa & moha; lust, ill-will & stupidity (Buddhistic meaning).; 4. the sense of spiritual well-being, of security, emancipation victory and peace, salvation, bliss.

II. Import and Range of the Term. A. Nibbāna is purely and solely an ethical state, to be reached in this birth by ethical practices, contemplation and insight It is therefore not transcendental. The first and most important way to reach N. is by means of the eightfold Path, and all expressions which deal with the realisation of emancipation from lust, hatred and illusion apply to practical habits and not to speculative thought. N is realised in one’s heart; to measure it with a speculative measure is to apply a wrong standard ■ A very apt and comprehensive discussion of nibbāna is found in F. Heiler, “Die buddhistische Versenkung” (München2 1922), pp. 36

42, where also the main literature on the subject is given ■ N. is the untranslatable expression of the Unspeakable, of that for which in the Buddha’s own saying there is no word, which cannot be grasped in terms of reasoning and cool logic, the Nameless Undefinable (cp. the simile of extinction of the flame which may be said to pass from a visible state into a state which cannot be defined. Thus the Saint (Arahant) passes into that same state, for which there is “no measure” (i.e. no dimension): “atthangatassa na pamāṇam atthi… yena naṃ vajju: taṃ tassa n’ atthi” Snp 1076. The simile in v. 1074: “accī yathā vāta-vegena khitto atthaṃ paleti, na upeti sankhaṃ evaṃ munī nāmakāyā vimutto atthaṃ paleti, na upeti sankhaṃ”). Yet, it is a reality, and its characteristic features may be described, may be grasped in terms of earthly language, in terms of space (as this is the only means at our disposal to describe abstract notions of time and mentality); e.g. accutaṃ ṭhānaṃ, pāraṃ amataṃ padaṃ, amata (& nibbāna-) dhātu ■ It is the speculative, scholastic view and the dogmatising trend of later times, beginning with the Abhidhamma period which has more and more developed the simple, spontaneous idea into an exaggerated form either to the positive (i.e. seeing in N. a definite; state or sphere of existence) or the negative side (i.e. seeing in it a condition of utter annihilation). Yet its sentimental value to the (exuberant optimism of the) early Buddhists (Rh. Davids, Early Buddhism, p. 73) is one of peace and rest, perfect passionlessness, and thus supreme happiness As Heiler in the words of R. Otto (Das Heilige etc. 1917; quoted l. c. p. 41) describes it, “only by its concept Nirvāna is something negative, by its sentiment however, a positive item in most pronounced form ■ We may also quote Rh. Davids’ words: “One might fill columns with the praises, many of them among the most beautiful passages in Pāli poetry and prose lavished on this condition of mind, the state of the man made perfect according to the B. faith. Many are the pet names, the poetic epithets, bestowed upon it, each of them-for they are not synonyms-emphasising one or other phase of this many-sided conception-the harbour of refuge, the cool cave, the island amidst the floods, the place of bliss, emancipation, liberation, safety the supreme, the transcendental, the uncreated, the tranquil, the home of ease, the calm, the end of suffering, the medicine for all evil, the unshaken, the ambrosia the immaterial, the imperishable, the abiding, the further shore, the unending, the bliss of effort, the supreme joy, the ineffable, the detachment, the holy city, and many others. Perhaps the most frequent in the B. texts is Arahantship, ʻthe state of him who is worthyʼ; and the one exclusively used in Europe is Nirvana, the ʻdying out,ʼ that is, the dying out in the heart of the fell fire of the three cardinal sins-sensuality, ill-will, and stupidity (Saṃyutta iv.251, 261), (Early Buddhism pp. 72, 73.) And Heiler says (p. 42 l. c.): “Nirvāna is, although it might sound a paradox in spite of all conceptional negativity nothing but ʻeternal salvation,ʼ after which the heart of the religious yearns on the whole earth.”

The current simile is that of fire, the consuming fire of passion (rāg-aggi), of craving for rebirth, which has to be extinguished, if a man is to attain a condition of indifference towards everything worldly, and which in the end, in its own good time, may lead to freedom from rebirth altogether, to certain and final extinction (parinibbāna) ■ Fire may be put out by water, or may go out of itself from lack of fuel. The ethical state called Nibbāna can only rise from within. It is therefore in the older texts compared to the fire going out, rather than to the fire being put out. The latter point of view, though the word nibbāna is not used, occurs in one or two passages in later books. See Ja i.212; Mil 346, Mil 410; Snp-a 28; Sdhp 584. For the older view see M i.487 (aggi anāhāro nibbuto, a fire gone out through lack of fuel); Snp 1094 (akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ etaṃ dīpaṃ anāparaṃ Nibbānaṃ iti); SN i.236 (attadaṇḍesu nibbuto sādānesu anādāno); SN ii.85 (aggikkhandho purimassa upādānassa pariyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya, as a fire would go out, bereft of food because the former supply being finished no additional supply is forthcoming); sa-upādāno devānaṃ indo na parinibbāyati, the king of the gods does not escape rebirth so long as he has within him any grasping SN iv.102; pāragū sabbadhammānaṃ anupādāya nibbuto AN i.162; pāragato jhāyī anup˚ nibbuto, a philosopher freed, without any cause, source, of rebirth AN iv.290 (etc., see nibbuta). dāvaggi-nibbānaṃ the going out of the jungle fire Ja i.212; aggi nibbāyeyya, should the fire go out MN i.487; aggikkhandho nibbuto hoti the great fire has died out Mil 304; nibbuto ginī my fire is out Snp 19. The result of quenching the fire (going out) is coolness (sīta); and one who has attained the state of coolness is sītibhūta. sītibhūto ‘smi nibbuto Vin i.8; Pv i.87; sītibhūto nirūpadhi, cooled, with no more fuel (to produce heat) Vin ii.156; AN i.138; nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto (cp. nicchāta) AN ii.208; AN v.65 anupādānā dīpacci viya nibbutā gone out like the flame of a lamp without supply of fuel Thag-a 154 (Ap 153) ■ nibbanti dhīrā yath’ āyaṃ padīpo the Wise go out like the flame of this lamp Snp 235. This refers to the pulling out of the wick or to lack of oil, not to a blowing out; cp. vaṭṭiṃ paṭicca telapadīpo jāleyya SN ii.86; Thig 116 (padīpass’ eva nibbānaṃ vimokkho ahu cetaso). The pulling out of the wick is expressed by vaṭṭiṃ okassayāmi (= dīpavaṭṭiṃ ākaḍḍhemi Thag-a 117) cp. on this passage Pischel, Leben & Lehre des Buddha; 71; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism 176; Neumann Lieder 298). pajjotass’ eva nibbānaṃ like the going out of a lamp SN i.159≈.

B. Since rebirth is the result of wrong desire (kāma kilesa, āsava, rāga etc.), the dying out of that desire leads to freedom & salvation from rebirth and its cause or substratum. Here references should be given to (1) the; fuel in ethical sense (cp. A 1: aggi); (2) the aims to be accomplished (for instance, coolness = peace) (3) the seat of its realisation (the heart); (4) the means of achievement (the Path); (5) the obstacles to be removed.

1. Fuel = cause of rebirth & suffering; āsāva (intoxications). khīṇāsavā jutimanto to loke parinibbutā the wise who are rid of all intoxications are in this world the thoroughly free SN v.29; sāvakā āsavānaṃ khayā viharanti AN iv.83; kodhaṃ pahatvāna parinibbiṃsu anāsavā (are completely cooled) AN iv.98 āsavakhīṇo danto parinibbuto Snp 370; saggaṃ sugatino yanti parinibbanti anāsavā those of happy fate go to heaven, but those not intoxicated die out Dhp 126 nibbānaṃ adhimuttānaṃ atthaṅgacchanti āsavā Dhp 226 āsavānaṃ khayā bhikkhu nicchāto parinibbuto Iti 49 vimutti-kusuma-sañchanno parinibbissati anāsavo Thag 100kāmā (cravings) nikkāmo nibbano Nāgo Snp 1131kilesa-(nibbāna) vice (only in certain commentaries). kilesa-nibbānass’ āpi anupādā parinibbānass’ āpi santike Dhp-a i.286; upādānaṃ abhāvena anupādiyitvā kilesa-nibbānena nibbutā Dhp-a iv.194nibbidā (disenchantment). Nibbānaṃ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya etc. saṃvattati SN ii.223; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe nibbānaṃ attano Snp 940rāga virāgo nirodho nibbānaṃ SN i.136≈; desento virajaṃ dhammaṃ nibbānaṃ akutobhayan SN i.192; yo rāgakkhayo (dosa˚ .… moha˚… ): idaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ SN iv.251, same of Amata S; v.8; chandarāga-vinodanaṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ Snp 1086; kusalo ca jahati pāpakaṃ rāgadosamoha-kkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85; ye ‘dha pajahanti kāmarāgaṃ bhavarāgânusayañ ca pahāya parinibbānagatā Vv 5324vana sabba-saṃyojan’ atītaṃ vanā nibbānaṃ āgataṃ AN iii.346; nikkhantaṃ vānato ti nibbānaṃ Kp-a 151; taṇhā-sankhāta-vānâbhāvato nibbānaṃ Snp-a 253.

2. Aims: khema (tranquillity). ātāpī bhikkhu nibbānāya bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāya Iti 27; ajaraṃ amaraṃ khemaṃ pariyessāmi nibbutiṃ Ja i.3; acala (immovable, not to be disturbed). patto acalaṭṭhānaṃ Vv 514; accuta (stable) patthayaṃ accutaṃ padaṃ SN iii.143; chandarāga-vinodanaṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ Snp 1086. nekkhamma (renunciation, dispassionateness). vanā nibbānaṃ āgataṃ kāmehi nekkhammarataṃ AN iii.346pāragū (victor). pāragū sabbadhammānaṃ anupādāya nibbuto AN i.162 (cp AN iv.290 with tiṇṇo pāragato) ■ santipada (calm, composure). santī ti nibbutiṃ ñatvā Snp 933; santimaggaṃ eva brūhaya nibbānaṃ sugatena desitaṃ Dhp 285 s. = acala Vv-a 219samatha (allayment, quietude) sabbasankhārasamatho nibbānaṃ SN i.136≈ ■ sotthi (welfare). saccena suvatthi hotu nibbānaṃ Snp 235.

3. The Heart: (a) attā (heart, self). abhinibbut-atto Snp 456; thiṭatto frequent, e.g. parinibbuto ṭh˚; Snp 359 danto parinib˚ ṭh˚; Snp 370 ■ (b) citta (heart). apariḍayhamāna-citto Snp-a 347 (for abhinibbutatto Snp 343)-(c) hadaya (heart) nibbānaṃ hadayasmiṃ opiya SN i.199; mātuhadayaṃ nibbāyate Ja i.61; nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṃ (quench the fever of my heart Mil 318 ■ (d) mano (mind). mano nibbāyi tāvade Ja i.27; disvā mano me pasīdi Vv 5014.

4. The Path: dhīra. lokapariyāyaṃ aññāya nibbutā dhīrā tiṇṇā etc. SN i.24; nibbanti dhīrāSnp 235 sabbābhibhū dhīro sabbagantha-ppamocano Iti 122 Recognition of anicca (transitoriness, see nicca). aniccasaññī… bhikkhu pāpuṇāti diṭṭh’ eva dhamme nibbānaṃ AN iv.353paññā. nibbānaṃ ev’ ajjhagamuṃ sapaññā SN i.22; n’ abhirato paññā SN i.38. paṇḍita & nipaka;. anupubbena n˚ṃ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā AN i.162; nipakā asesaṃ parinibbanti Iti 93. vijjā. bhikkhu paṇihitena cittena avijjaṃ bhecchati vijjaṃ uppādessati n˚ṃ sacchikarissati the bhikkhu with devout heart will destroy ignorance, gain right cognition & realise Nibbāna AN i.8; idh’ aññāya parinibbāti anāsavo AN iii.41; sabb’ āsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā Vb 426.

5. The Obstacles: gantha (fetter). nibbānaṃ adhigantabbaṃ sabba-g˚-pamocanaṃ SN i.210; Iti 104 similarly Iti 122 (see above). gabbhaseyyā (rebirth) na te punam upenti gabbhaseyyaṃ, parinibbānagatā hi sītibhūtā Vv 5324- nīvaraṇa (obstacles). pañca n˚ anibbāna-saṃvattanikā SN v.97punabbhava (rebirth) nibbāpehi mahārāgaṃ mā ḍayhittho punappunaṃ SN i.188 vibhavañ ca bhavañ ca vippahāya vusitavā khīṇapunabbhavo sa bhikkhu Snp 514; bhava-nirodha nibbānaṃ SN ii.117saṅkhārā (elements of life). sabbasaṅkhāra-samatho nibbānaṃ SN i.136; N. = sabbasankhārā khayissanti AN iii.443saṃyojanāni (fetters). sabbas-âtītaṃ vanā Nibbānaṃ āgataṃ AN iii.346; s. pahāya n˚ṃ sacchikarissati AN iii.423; saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā antarā-parinibbāyī hoti SN v.69.

III. Nibbāna: its ethical importance and general characterisation. 1. Assurance of N. (nibbānass’ eva santike, near N., sure of N.): SN i.33 (yassa etādisaṃ yānaṃ… sa etena yānena n. e. s.: with the chariot of the Dhamma sure of reaching N.); iv.75; AN ii.39 (abhabbo parihānāya n. e. s. impossible to fail in the assurance of final release, of one “catuhi dhammehi samannāgato, viz. sīla, indriyaguttadvāratā, bhojanamattaññutā jāgariyā”); iii.331 (id. with appamādagaru: ever active & keen); ii.40 = Iti 40 (id. with appamāda-rato); Snp 8222. Steps and Means to N.: nibbāna-sacchikiriyā, attainment of N., is maṅgalaṃ uttamaṃ & to be achieved by means of; tapo, brahmacariyā and ariyasaccāna-dassanaṃ Snp 267brahmacariya (a saintly life) is n ■ parāyanā (leading to N. SN iii.189, cp. v.218; also called n ■ ogadhā (with similar states of mind, as nibbidā, virāgo, vimutti) ibid. AN ii.26 = Iti 28, cp. Iti 29 (nibbān’-ogadha-gāminaṃ b˚ṃ). The stages of sanctification are also discussed under the formula “ nibbidā virāgo vimutti… vimuttasmiṃ vimuttaṃ iti ñāṇaṃ hoti: khīṇā jāti etc. (i.e. no more possibility of birth) SN ii.124 = SN iv.86. dhamma: Buddha’s teaching as the way to N. “dhammavaraṃ adesayi n ■ gāmiṃ paramaṃ hitāya Snp 233; ahaṃ sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ desemi sattānaṃ visuddhiyā… n˚assa sacchikiriyāya AN v.194, cp 141; pubbe dh ■ ṭhiti-ñāṇaṃ pacchā nibbāne ñāṇan ti SN ii.124magga: Those practices of a moral & good life embraced in the 8 fold Noble Path (ariyamagga) Sace atthi akammena koci kvaci na jīyati; nibbānassa hi so maggo SN i.217; ekāyano ayaṃ maggo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā… N˚assa sacchikiriyāya DN ii.290; SN v.167, SN v.185; bhāvayitvā sucimaggaṃ n˚-ogadha-gāminaṃ… Vb 426; ādimhi sīlaṃ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṃ vibhāvaye, pariyosānamhi nibbānaṃ… DN-a i.176N ■ gamanaṃ maggaṃ: tattha me nirato mano “my heart rejoices in the path to Nibbāna SN i.186; N ■ gāminī paṭipadā AN iv.83 (the path to salvation). Cp. §§ 4 & 7 ■; 3. The Search for N. or the goal of earnest endeavour. ārogya-paramā lābhā nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukhaṃ, aṭṭhangiko ca maggānaṃ khemaṃ amata-gāminaṃ “N. is a higher bliss than acquisition of perfect health, the eightfold Path (alone of all leads to perfect peace, to ambrosia” MN i.508, cp Dhp 204 (“the fullest gain is for health etc.; N. is the highest happiness” Dhp-a iii.267). Similarly: khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā, n˚ṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhā DN ii.49 = Dhp 184; n˚ṃ paramaṃ sukhaṃ: Dhp 204 = Snp 257 = Ja iii.195; id.: Dhp 203; jhānaṃ upasampajja… okkamanāya n.˚assa AN iv.111 sq.; cp. 230 sq.; kaṭuviyakato bhikkhu… ārakā hoti N˚ā AN i.281; n˚ṃ ajjhagamuṃ sapaññā SN i.22; devalokañ ca te yanti… anupubbena n˚ṃ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā AN i.162; n˚ṃ abhikaṅkhati SN i.198; abhipassati AN i.147; tiṇṇakathankatho visallo n ■ ābhirato Snp 86; bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātuṃ… paṇītâdhimutto hoti ṇ-ābhirato ca AN iii.435; n ■ ābhirato… sabbadukkhā pamuccati SN i.38; n ■ ogadhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ vussati n ■ parāyaṇaṃ n ■ pariyosānaṃ SN iii.189 = SN v.218 n˚ṃ gavesanto carāmi (Bodhisat, Ja i.61). All means of conduct & all ideals of reason & intellect lead to one end only: Nibbāna. This is frequently expressed by var similes in the phrase; n ■ ninna, ˚poṇa, ˚pabbhāra, e.g. SN v.75 = SN v.134 = SN v.137 = SN v.190; SN v.244; AN v.75, AN v.134, AN v.190, AN v.244 AN v.291; Vv 8442. Saddahāno arahataṃ dhammaṃ n. pattiyā sussūsā labhate paññaṃ appamatto SN i.214; Snp 186, cp. SN i.48; Gotamo n ■ paṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya bhikkhū sandasseti SN i.214 = SN i.192 = SN i.210; Ud 80 n˚ṃ pariyesati AN ii.247; n ■ pariyosānā sabbe dhammā AN v.107; n ■ poṇaṃ me mānasaṃ bhavissati, saṃyojanā pahāṇaṃ gacchanti AN iii.443; odhunitvā malaṃ sabbaṃ patvā n ■ sampadaṃ muccati sabba-dukkhehi: sā hoti sabbasampadā AN iv.239; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe n˚ṃ attano Snp 940, cp. 1061 ■ 4. Some Epithets of Nibbāna: akutobhayaṃ AN ii.24 = Iti 122 accutaṃ padaṃ (careyya āditta-sīso va patthayaṃ a. p. SN iii.143; Snp 1086; pattā te acalaṭṭhānaṃ yattha gantvā na socare Vv 514; amataṃ AN ii.247; MN iii.224 (Bhagavā atthassa ninnetā a ˚assa dātā); Mil 319; Vv 6427 (apāpuranto a ˚assa dvāraṃ); Vv-a 85 (a-rasa) Vv 5020 (amatogadha magga = nibb˚-gāminī paṭipadā) amosadhammaṃ Snp 758; khemaṃ appaṭibhayaṃ SN iv.175; SN i.189 = Snp 454; Thig 350 (˚ṭṭhāne vimuttā te patta te acalaṃ sukhaṃ); MN i.508 (+ amatagāminaṃ) AN ii.247 (yogakkhemaṃ anuttaraṃ); same at AN iii.294; Iti 27; Dhp 23taṇhakkhaya Vv 735; ṭhānaṃ dud- dasaṃ SN i.136 (= sabba-sankhāra -samatho); dhuvaṃ (q.v.); niccaṃ Kv 121; nekkhammaṃ AN i.147 (˚ṃ daṭṭhu khemato… nibbānaṃ abhipassanto); Vv 8442. sabba-gantha-pamocanaṃ (deliverance from all ties) SN i.210; SN ii.278 (sabbadukkha˚); Iti 222 = AN ii.24 yathābhūtaṃ vacanaṃ SN iv.195; yathāsukhaṃ (the Auspicious) AN iv.415 sq.; (chanda-) rāga vinodanaṃ Snp 1086; rāgakkhayo (dosa˚, moha˚) SN v.8; rāgavinayo (dosa˚, moha˚) ibid., santi (calm, peace) Vv 5021 = Snp 204 (chandarāga-viratto bhikkhu paññāṇavā ajjhagā amataṃ santiṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ); Vv-a 219 (= acala); santimaggaṃ eva brūhaya n˚ṃ Sugatena desitaṃ Dhp 285 = Ne 36; sandiṭṭhikaṃ akālikaṃ etc. AN i.158; samo bhūmibhāgo ramaṇīyo SN iii.109; sassataṃ Kv 34; suvatthi Snp 2355. N. is realisable in this world, i.e. in this life if it is mature (diṭṭhe va dhamme): SN ii.18 = SN ii.115 = SN iii.163 = SN iv.141 (diṭṭha-dh-npatta); MN ii.228; AN iv.353 = AN iv.358, cp. 454 ■ 6. Definitions with regard to the destruction of the causes or substrata of life (cp. above I.): taṇhāya vippahānena n˚ṃ iti vuccati SN i.39 = Snp 1109; as sabba- saṅkhārasamatho (calming down of all vital elements) Vin i.5; SN i.136; AN ii.118 = AN iii.164; AN iv.423; AN v.8, AN v.110, AN v.320, AN v.354 akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ etaṃ dīpaṃ anāparaṃ n˚ṃ iti nam brūmi jarāmaccu-parikkhayaṃ Snp 1094; bhavanirodho n˚ṃ ti SN ii.117; AN v.9; rāga-kkhayo (dosa˚, moha˚ SN iv.251 = SN iv.261; virāgo nirodho n˚ṃ in typical & very freq. exposition at Nd;2 = SN i.136≈. See also vana cp. the foll.: taṇhā-sankhāta-vānâbhāvato n˚ṃ Snp-a 253; nikkhantaṃ vānato ti n˚ṃ Kp-a 151; kilesa-n ass’ âpi anupādā parinibbānass’ âpi santike yeva Dhp-a i.286 (on Dhp 32) ■ 7. N. as perfect wisdom and what is conducive to such a state (saṃvattati ). The foll phrase is one of the oldest stereotype phrases in the Canon & very freq.; it is used of all the highest means & attainments of conduct & meditation & may be said to mark the goal of perfect understanding & a perfect philosophy of life. It is given in 2 variations, viz. in a simple form as; “upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati,” with ref. to majjhimā paṭipadā at Vin i.10 = SN iv.331 = SN v.421; of satta bojjhangā at SN v.80; and in a fuller form as “ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya etc. as above” at DN i.189 (negative); ii.251 (of brahmacariyaṃ), 285 iii.130 (sukhallikânuyogā, neg.) 136 (avyākataṃ, neg.) SN ii.223 (brahmacariya); v.82 (satta bojjhangā), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā), 255 (iddhipādā), 361 (ariyamagga), 438; AN iii.83, AN iii.326 sq.; etc ■ Cp. n- saṃvattanika SN v.97 (upekhāsambojjhanga); Nd ii.281 (neg. of tamo). 8. N. as the opposite of rāga (passion, lust). Freq. is the combn of virāga nirodha nibbāna, almost used as three synonyms, thus at SN ii.18; Vin iii.20 = Vin iii.111; AN ii.118 = AN iii.164 = AN iv.423 = AN v.8 = Nd ii.under Nibbāna AN ii.34 = Iti 88 (dhammānaṃ aggaṃ akkhāyati, madanimmadano pipāsa-vinayo ālaya-samugghāto vaṭṭûpacchedo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodha nibbānaṃ), cp Vin iii.20≈. Similarly SN i.192 (Sugataṃ payirupāsati desentaṃ virajaṃ dhammaṃ nibbānaṃ akutobhayaṃ). 9. Various Characterisations & Similes; (cp. above II A 4 & 5). sukkâbhijātiko samāno akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ n˚ṃ abhijayati DN iii.251; AN iii.384 sq.; aniccā sabbe sankhārā dukkhā ‘nattā ca sankhātā: nibbānañ c’ eva paññatti anattā iti nicchayā Vin v.86. On anicca anattā in rel. to N. see also S iv.133 sq.; AN iv.353 dukkhato & sukhato n˚ṃ samanupassati AN iii.442 On comparison with a lamp see e.g. SN i.159 = DN ii.157 Thag 906 (pajjotass’ eva nibbānaṃ vimokkho cetaso ahū), AN iv.3 (pajjotass’ eva n. vimokkho hoti cetaso) Snp 235 (.… te khīṇabījā avirūḷhichandā nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaṃ padīpo).

-abhirata fond of N. (cp. III. 3) SN i.38; AN iii.435; Snp 86 (visalla + ); -ogadha merging into N. (of brahmacariya) SN iii.189; SN v.218; AN ii.26 = Iti 28; Vb 426 cp. amatogadha AN v.107; -gamana (magga; cp. III. 2 leading to N. DN ii.223; SN i.186, SN i.217; AN iv.83; (dhamma: SN v.11; Snp 233; -dhātu the sphere or realm of N. always in phrase anupādisesāsaya n ■ dhātuyā parinibbāyate Vin ii.239; DN iii.135; Iti 38, Iti 121; Pts i.101; cp. rāgavinayo n ■ dhātuyā adhivacanaṃ SN v.8. See parinibbāyin; -ninna (+ ˚poṇa, ˚pabbhāra; cp. III. 3) converging into N. AN iii.443; Vv 8442 & passim; -paṭisaññuta (dhammikathā; cp. III. 2) relating or referring to N. SN i.114 = SN i.192 = SN i.210; Ud 80; -patta having attained N. (diṭṭha-dhamma˚, see above III. 5) SN ii.18 = SN ii.114 SN iii.163; -patti attainment of N. SN i.48, SN i.214 = Snp 186 -pada = Nibbāna (see pada 3) Snp 204. -pariyosāna ending in N. having its final goal in N. SN iii.189; SN v.218; AN v.107; -saṃvattanika conducive to N.; contributing toward the attainment of N. SN v.97; Nd ii.281 (a˚); cp above III. 7; -sacchikiriyā realisation of N. (identical with ñāṇa and constituting the highest ideal; cp. above III. 2) Snp 267. Cp. also DN ii.290; SN v.167; AN iii.423 AN v.141; -saññā perception of N. AN iii.443; -sampatti successful attainment of N. Kp viii.13; -sampadā the blessing of the attainment of N. AN iv.239.

Nibbāpana

(nt.) means of extinguishing, extinction, quenching SN i.188 (cittaṃ pariḍayhati: nibbāpanaṃ brūhi = allayment of the glow); AN iv.320 (celassa n˚āya chandaṃ karoti: try to put out the burning cloth); Mil 302 (jhāyamāno n˚ṃ alabhamāno) 318 (pariḷāha˚).

abstr. fr. nibbāpeti

Nibbāpita

(adj.) extinguished, put out, quenched Ja iii.99 (= nicchuddha).

pp. of nibbāpeti

Nibbāpeti

1. to extinguish, put out, quench SN i.188 (mahārāgaṃ); Iti 93 (rāg-aggiṃ; & nibbāpetvā aggiṃ nipakā parinibbanti); cp. aggiṃ nijjāleti Ja vi.495; Pv i.85 (vārinā viya osiñcaṃ sabbaṃ daraṃ nibbāpaye); Mil 304 (aggikhandhaṃ mahāmegho abhippavassitvā n.) 318 (nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṃ), 410 (megho uṇhaṃ n.); Dhp-a ii.241 (fire); Sdhp 552 (bhavadukkh aggiṃ).

2. to cleanse, purify (cittaṃ, one’s heart Vism 305 ■ pp. nibbāpita. See also nibbāpana.

Sk. ni(r)vārayati, Caus. of ni(r)varati, influenced in meaning by nirvāpayati. Caus. of nirvāti make cool by blowing (e.g. RV x.1613). See nibbuta on etym.

Nibbāyati

1. to be cooled or refreshed, to be covered up = to be extinguished, go out (of fire), to cease to exist, always used with ref. to fire or heat or (fig.) burning sensations (see nibbāna II. A end):; aggikkhandho purimassa ca upādānassa puriyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya SN ii.85 (opp. jāleyya); do. of telaṃ & vaṭṭiṃ paṭicca; telappadīpo n. SN ii.86 = SN iii.126 = SN iv.213 = SN v.319; sace te purato so aggi nibbāyeyya jāneyyāsi tvaṃ: ayaṃ… aggi nibbuto MN i.487; AN iv.70 (papaṭikā n.); aggi udake tiṇukkā viya n. Ja i.212; mātuhadayaṃ n. Ja i.61; aggi upādāna-sankhayā n. Mil 304 ■ aor. nibbāyi [Sk niravāri] Ja i.27 (mano n.: was refreshed) 212 (aggi udake n.: was extinguished); vi.349 (cooled down).

2. to go out (of light) Vism 430 (dīpā nibbāyiṃsu the lights went out); Thag-a 154 (dīpacci n. nirāsanā: went out). See also parinibbāyati & cp. nibbuta, nibbāpeti, nibbāpana.;

Sk. ni-(or nir-)vriyate, Pass. of ni(r)varati, influenced by nirvāyati intrs. to cease to blow; see on etym. & Pāli derivation nibbuta

Nibbāyin

see pari˚.

Nibbāhana

(adj.-n.) leading out, removing, saving; (nt.) removal, clearance, refuge, way out Mil 119, Mil 198, Mil 295, Mil 309, Mil 326 (˚magga). [Miln. the only references!]

fr. nibbāheti

Nibbāhati

to lead out, carry out, save from, remove Mil 188.

2nd Caus. nibbāhāpeti to have brought out, to unload (a waggon) Vin ii.159 (hiraññaṃ) iii.43. See also nibbāhana & nibbuyhati.;

nis + vahati

Nibbikappa

distinction, distinguishing Vism 193.

nis + vikappa

Nibbikāra

(adj.) steady, unchanged, steadfast; persevering Ja i.66; Pv-a 178, Pv-a 253 (+ nicca); Snp-a 189, Snp-a 497; Vism 311.

nis + vikāra

Nibbicikicchā

(f.) surety, reliance, trust SN ii.84; SN v.221 (= nikkankhā); Vv-a 85 (= ekaṃsikā).

nis + vicikicchā

Nibbijjhati

to pierce, transfix, wound SN v.88 (+ padāleti); Sdhp 153 (patodehi). ger nibbijjha Snp 940 (= paṭivijjhitvā Nd i.420) ■ pp nibbiddha. Cp. abhi˚.

nis + vijjhati, vyadh

Nibbiṭṭha

(pp.) gained, earned Vin iv.265; Snp 25; Snp-a 38.

nis + viṭṭha, of nibbisati

Nibbiṇṇa

(adj.) tired of, disgusted with (c. instr. or loc.), wearied of, dissatisfied with, “fed up” Ja i.347; Ja vi.62; Thig 478 (= viratta Thag-a 286); Dhp-a i.85 (˚hadaya); Vv-a 207 (˚rūpa) Pv-a 159 (tattha-vāsena n-mānaso tired of living there) 272 (˚rūpa), 283 (˚rūpa, tired of: purohite).

Sk. nirviṇṇa, pp. of nibbindati

Nibbidā

(f.) weariness, disgust with worldly life, tedium, aversion, indifference, disenchantment N. is of the preliminary & conditional states for the attainment of Nibbāna (see nibbāna II B 1) & occurs frequently together with; virāga, vimutti & nibbāna; in the formula: etaṃ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya… sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati “this leads to being thoroughly tired (of the world), to dispassionateness to destruction (of egoism), to perfect wisdom, to Nibbāna,” e.g. at DN i.189; SN v.82, SN v.179, SN v.255 SN v.361; AN iii.83; AN iv.143; AN v.216 ■ In other connections Vin i.15 (nibbidāya cittaṃ saṇṭhāsi); DN iii.130 sq. SN ii.30; SN iii.40; SN iii.179, SN iii.189; SN iv.86, SN iv.141 (read nibbidāya for nibbindāya?); AN i.51, AN i.64; AN iii.19, AN iii.200, AN iii.325 sq.; AN iv.99, AN iv.336 AN v.2 sq., 311 sq.; Ja i.97; Ja iv.471, Ja iv.473; Snp 340; Pts i.195 Pts ii.43 sq.; Vb 330; Ne 27, Ne 29; Vism 650. Cp. abhi˚.

Sk. nirvid, f. (also BSk. e.g. Lal. V. 300) & nirveda; to nibbindati

Nibbiddha

1. in phrase ˚piṅgala (with) disgustingly red (eyes) (perhaps = nibbiṇṇa?) Ja v.42 (of a giant).

2. with ref. to a road: broken up, i.e. much frequented, busy street Ja vi.276 (of vīthi, bazaar, in contrast with a-nibbiddha-raccha carriage-road, which is not a thoroughfare. The reading patatthiyo at Ja vi.276, for which nibbiddha-vīthiyo is the C. expln is to be corrected into pathaddhiyo).

pp. of nibbijjhati

Nibbindati

to get wearied of (c. loc.); to have enough of, be satiated, turn away from, to be disgusted with. In two roots A. vind: prs. nibbindati etc. usually in combn with virajjati & vimuccati; (cp nibbāna III. 2). Vin i.35; SN ii.94; SN iv.86, SN iv.140; AN v.3; Dhp 277 sq.; Iti 33; Ja i.267; Mil 235, Mil 244; Sdhp 612 ppr. nibbindaṃ SN iv.86; Pv-a 36 (nibbinda-mānasa) ger. nibbindiya Ja v.121 (˚kārin) ■ B. vid: Pot. nibbide (v.l. BB nibbije) Ja v.368 (= nibbindeyya Com.); ger nibbijjitvā Ja i.82, & nibbijja Snp 448 = SN i.124 (nibbijjâpema = nibbijja pakkameyya Snp-a 393) ■ pp. nibbiṇṇa. See also nibbidā.

nis + vindati, vid2

Nibbiriya

(adj.) lacking in strength, indolent, slothful, weak Ja iv.131; Pv-a 175 (= alasa, kusīta].

nis + viriya

Nibbivara

(adj.) without holes or fissures, without omissions Ja v.429; Vv-a 275 (= atīva sangata).

nis + vivara

Nibbisa

earnings, wages Thag 606 = Thag 1003 = Mil 45 (cp. Manu vi.45); Snp-a 38.

to nibbisati

Nibbisaṅka

(adj.) fearless, not hesitating, undaunted Snp-a 61.

nis + visanka, Sk. viśankā

Nibbisati

to enter into; to earn, gain, find, enjoy, only in pp. anibbisaṃ not finding Thig 159 (= avindanto Thag-a 142); Ja i.76 = Dhp 153 ■ pp. nibbiṭṭha. See also nibbisa.

nis + visati

Nibbisaya

(adj.) having no residence, banished, driven from (-˚) Ja ii.401.

nis + visaya

Nibbisevana

(adj.) not self-indulgent, selfdenying, meek, tame, gentle Ja ii.210 (dametvā nibbisevanaṃ katvā), 351; v.34, 381, 456; vi.255; Dhp-a i.288 (cittaṃ ujuṃ akuṭilaṃ n. karoti), 295; Vv-a 284 (˚bhava = jitindriya).

nis + visevana

Nibbisesa

(adj.) showing no difference, without distinction, equal, similar Ja ii.32; Ja vi.355; Mil 249.

nis + visesa

Nibbujjhati

to wrestle, to fight with fists Vin iii.180 ■ pp. nibbuddha.

ni + yujjhati, yudh. Pāli form difficult to explain: niy˚ = niyy˚ = nivv˚ = nibb˚

Nibbuta

(adj.) (lit.) extinguished (of fire), cooled, quenched (fig. desireless (often with nicchāta & sītibhūta), appeased pleased, happy ■ (a) (lit.) aggi anāhāro n. MN i.487; Snp 19 (ginī n. = magga-salila-sekena n. Snp-a 28); Ja iv.391 (anibbute pāyāse); Mil 304 (aggikkhandha), 346 (mahāmeghena n˚ṃ pathaviṃ); Thag-a 154 (anupādānā dīp’ accī); Kp-a 194 (padīpo n.) ■ (b) (fig.) combd with sītibhūta (& nicchāta): Vin i.8; MN i.341; AN ii.208 = DN iii.233 = Pp 56, Pp 61; AN iv.410; AN v.65; Snp 593, Snp 707; Pv i.87 ■ In phrase anupādāya nibbuta: SN ii.279; AN i.162; AN iv.290 = Dhp 414 = Snp 638 ■ In other connections: attadaṇḍesu n. sādānesu anādāno SN i.236; Dhp 406 = Snp 630; aññāya nibbutā dhīrā SN i.24; tadangan SN iii.43; ejânugo anejassa nibbutassa anibbuto Iti 91 vītataṇho n. Snp 1041; tiṇṇa-sokapariddavo n. Dhp 196 rāg’ aggimhi n. & n. mātā, pitā, nārī Ja i.60; n. veyyākaraṇena Mil 347; upādānānaṃ abhāvena… kilesanibbānena n. Dhp-a iv.194 ■ See also abhinibbuta and parinibbuta.

Nibbuta represents Sk. nirvṛta (e.g. Avs i.48) as well as nivṛta, both pp. of vṛ; which in itself combines two meanings, as exhibited in cognate languages and in Sk. itself: (a) Idg. ṷer to cover, cover up (Lat. aperio = *apa-veri̯o to cover up, Sk. varutram upper garment, “cover”) and (b) *ṷel to resolve, roll move (Lat. volvo = revolve; Gr. ε ̔́λις, ἐλύω; Sk. vāṇa reed = Lat. ulva; Sk. ūrmi wave; P. valli creeper, valita wrinkled). *ṷer is represented in P. by e.g. vivarati to open, nivāreti to cover, obstruct, nīvaraṇa, nivāraṇa obstruction; *ṷel by āvuta, khandh-āvāra, parivāra vyāvaṭa (busy with = moving about), samparivāreti Thus we gain the two meanings combd and used promiscuously in the one word because of their semantic affinity: (a) *nivṛta covered up, extinguished, quenched and (b) *nirvṛta without movement, with motion finished (cp. niṭṭhita), ceasing, exhaustion, both represented by P. nibbuta ■ In derivations we have besides the rootform vṛ; (= P. bbu˚) that with guṇa vṝ (cp. Sk. vārayati vrāyati) or vrā = P.* bbā˚ (with which also cp. paṭivāṇa = *prativāraṇa). The former is in nibbuti (ceasing, extinction, with meaning partly influenced by nibbuṭṭhi = Sk. nirvṛṣṭi pouring of water), the latter in instr. nibbāti and nibbāyati (to cease or to go out) and trs. nibbāpeti (Caus.: to make cease, to stop or cool and further in nibbāna (nt. instr. abstr.) (the dying out)

Nibbuti

(f.) allayment, refreshment, cooling, peace, happiness Ja i.3 (khemaṃ pariyessāmi n˚ṃ); Snp 228 (nikkāmino n˚ṃ bhuñjamānā), 917, 933 (santī ti n˚ṃ ñatvā); Nd i.399; Pv i.74 (n˚ṃ n’ âdhigacchāmi = quenching of hunger & thirst) Kp-a 185 (= paṭippassaddha-kilesa-daratha).

Sk. nirvṛti, abstr. to nibbuta

Nibbuddha

wrestling, fist-fight DN i.6 (= mallayuddhaṃ DN-a i.85); Dhs-a 403.

Sk. niyuddha, pp. of nibbujjhati

Nibbuyhati

to be led out to (c. acc.): susānaṃ Thig 468 (= upanīyati Thag-a 284); to be led out of = to be saved SN i.1, cp. RV i.117, 14; vi.62, 6.

Sk. niruhyate, nis + vuyhati, Pass. of vahati, cp. nibbāhati

Nibbusitattā

(nibbusitattan?) a dislocated or disconcerted mind, unrest uneasiness DN i.17.

Sk. *nir-vasit-ātman or *nirvasitatvaṃ (nt. abstr.), to nis-vasati, cp. nirvāsana = nibbisaya

Nibbecikicchā

= nibbicikicchā certainty, doubtlessness Nd ii.185 (opp. savicikicchā).

Nibbejaniya

at SN i.124 should probably be read as nibbeṭhaniya (rejecting, evading).

Nibbeṭhana

(nt.) unwinding, fig. explanation Mil 28.

Sk. nirveṣṭana, nis + veṭhana

Nibbeṭhita

explained, unravelled, made clear Mil 123 (su˚).

pp. of nibbeṭheti

Nibbeṭheti

1. to unravel, untwist, unwind; to explain, make clear DN i.54 (nibbeṭhiyamāna, v.l. BB nibbedh˚); Pv iv.329 (˚ento = niveṭhīyamāna Pv-a 253 v.l. BB nibbedh˚) Mil 3; Sdhp 153.

2. to deny, reject Vin ii.79; DN i.3 (= apanetabba Com.); SN iii.12 (v.l. BB ˚dh˚). 3. to give an evasive answer Vin iii.162 ■ See also nibbejaniya ■ pp. nibbeṭhita, q.v.

Sk. nirveṣṭate, nis + veṭheti, to twist round

Nibbedha

penetration, insight; adj.: penetrating, piercing, scrutinising, sharp. Freq. in phrase nibbedha-bhāgiya (sharing the quality of penetration), with ref. to samādhi, saññā etc. [cp. BSk nirvedha˚ Divy 50; but also nirbheda˚ Avs ii.181, of kusalamūlāni; expld as lobhakkhandhassa (etc.) nibbijjhanāni at Ne 274] DN iii.251, DN iii.277; AN iii.427 Vb 330; Ne 21, Ne 48, Ne 143 sq., 153 sq.; Vism 15, Vism 88; Dhs-a 162 ■ Also in nibbedha-gāminī (paññā) Iti 35 & dunnibbedha (hard to penetrate, difficult to solve Mil 155, Mil 233 (pañha); spelt dunniveṭha at Mil 90).

nis + vedha, to vyadh

Nibbedhaka

(adj.) piercing, sharp, penetrating, discriminating; only in f. nibbedhikā (cp. āvedhikā), appld to paññā (wisdom) DN iii.237, DN iii.268; SN v.197, SN v.199; MN i.356; AN i.45; AN ii.167 AN iii.152; AN iii.410 sq., 416; v.15; Pts ii.201; Nd ii.235, Nd ii.3a (+ tikkha-paññā), 415, 689; Ja ii.9, Ja ii.297; Ja iv.267.

nis + vedhaka, to vyadh

Nibbematika

(adj.) not disagreeing, of one accord, unanimous Vin ii.65; Dhp-a i.34.

nis + vimati + ka

Nibbhacceti

to threaten, revile, scorn Ja iii.338.

Sk. nirbhartsayati, nis + bhaccheti

Nibbhaya

(adj.) free from fear or danger, fearless, unafraid Ja i.274; Ja iii.80; Ja v.287; Vism 512.

nis + bhaya

Nibbhujati

to twist round, bend, wind, contort oneself Mil 253. Cp. vi˚.

Sk. ni-or nirbhujati, nis + bhujati

Nibbhoga

(adj.) deprived of enjoyment; deserted, being of no avail, useless Ja vi.556; Pv i.12. Cp. vi˚.

Sk. nirbhoga, nis + bhoga1

Nibbhoga

bending, contortion Ja ii.264 (oṭṭha˚).

ni + bhoga2

Nibyaggha

see nivyaggha.

Nibha

(adj.) shining; like, equal to, resembling (-˚) Ja v.372; Vv 401; Pv iv.312; Vv-a 122 (vaṇṇa˚ = vaṇṇa); Nd ii.608.

Sk. nibha, to bhāti

Nibhatā

(f.) likeness, appearance Vv-a 27.

abstr. to nibha

Nibhā

(f.) shine, lustre, splendour Vv-a 179 (nibhāti dippatī ti nibhā).

to nibha

Nibhāti

to shine Vv-a 179 (= dippati).

ni + bhāti

Nimajjhima

(adj.) the middle one Ja v.371.

Nimantaka

(adj.-n.) one who invites Mil 205.

Nimantana

(nt.) invitation Vin i.58 = Vin ii.175; DN i.166; MN i.77; AN i.295; Ja i.116 (ṇ), 412 Pp 55.

to nimanteti

Nimantanika

(adj.) inviting; (nt.) Name of a Suttanta MN i.331; quoted at Vism 393.

Nimantita

invited Snp p.104; Pv-a 22 (bhattena to the meal), 86 (= āmantita), 141.

pp. of nimanteti

Nimanteti

to send a message, to call, summon, invite, coax (to = c. instr. Snp 981 (nimantayi aor., āsanena asked him to sit down) Ja vi.365; Nd ii.342; Dhp-a iii.171 (˚ayiṃsu); DN-a i.169; Vv-a 47 (pānīyena invite to a drink); Pv-a 75, Pv-a 95. pp. nimantita, q.v ■ Cp. abhi˚.

Sk. nimantrayati, ni + manteti

Nimitta

(nt.) 1. sign, omen, portent, prognostication DN i.9 (study of omens = n. satthaṃ DN-a i.92, q.v. for detailed expln); Ja i.11 (caturo nimitte nâddasaṃ); Mil 79, Mil 178 Esp. as pubba˚; signs preceding an event, portents, warnings, foreshadowings SN v.154, SN v.278, SN v.442; Iti 76 (cp. Divy 193, of the waning of a god); Ja i.48, Ja i.50 (32 signs before birth, some at DN-a i.61), 59; Mil 298; Vism 577. 2. outward appearance, mark, characteristic, attribute phenomenon (opp. essence) DN iii.249; AN i.256; AN iii.319 AN iii.375 sq.; AN iv.33, AN iv.418 sq.; Ja i.420; Pts i.60, Pts i.91 sq., 164, 170 ii.39, 64; Vb 193 sq ■ Mental reflex, image (with ref to jhāna) Vism 123, cp. Dhs-a 167 ■ Specified e.g. as foll.: oḷārika SN v.259; pasādaniya SN v.156; paccavekkhana˚ DN iii.278; Vb 334; bahiddhā-sankhārā Pts i.66 sq.; bāla˚ (opp. paṇḍita˚) MN iii.163; AN i.102 mukha˚ (= face) DN i.80; SN iii.103; SN v.121; AN v.92, AN v.97 sq., 103; rūpa˚, sadda˚ etc. SN iii.10; MN i.296; Pts i.92 Pts i.112; samatha˚ DN iii.213; samādhi˚ etc. AN i.256 sq. subha˚ (& asubha˚) S; v.64, 103 sq.; AN i.3 sq., 87, 200 v.134; Vism 178 sq. nimittaṃ gaṇhāti to make something the object of a thought, to catch up a theme for reflection Vin i.183, cp. SN v.150 sq. (˚ṃ uggaṇhāti) MN i.119 (= five sorts of mental images); Nd ii.659; Dhs-a 53 (= ākāra). See below n-gāhin & animitta.; nimittaṃ parivajjeti to discard the phenomenal SN i.188; Snp 341.

3. mark, aim: in nimittaṃ karoti to pick out the aim, to mark out Ja v.436; Nd ii.235, Nd ii.1d; Mil 418. 4. sexual organ (cp. lakkhaṇa) Vin iii.129 (n. & a˚, as term of abuse); see also kāṭa & koṭacikā.

5. ground reason, condition, in; nimittena (instr.) and nimittaṃ (acc.) as adv. = by means of, on account of Dhp-a iii.175 (instr.) Pv-a 8, Pv-a 97 (jāti-nimittaṃ), 106 (kiṃ n˚ṃ = kissa hetu), 242 (yaṃ n˚ṃ = yato nidānaṃ). gahita-nimittena “by means of being caught” Vism 144 = Dhs-a 116 (read trsln 154 accordingly!). adj. nimitta (-˚ caused by, referring to Pv-a 64 (maraṇa-nimittaṃ rodanaṃ) ■ animitta free from marks or attributes not contaminated by outward signs or appearance undefiled, ụnaffected, unconditioned (opp. sa˚) SN i.188 SN iv.225 (phassa), 268, 360 (samādhi); MN i.296 (cetovimutti); AN i.82; AN iii.292; AN iv.78; Vin iii.129; Thag 92; DN iii.219, DN iii.249; Dhp 92; Snp 342; Pts i.60, Pts i.91; Pts ii.36, Pts ii.59 sq (vimokha), 65 sq., 99; Dhs 530 (read a˚ for appa˚) Vism 236; Dhs-a 223 (absence of the 3 lakkhaṇas) Mil 333, Mil 413; Dhp-a ii.172; Thag-a 50. See also Cpd. 199 2115. sanimitta SN v.213 sq.; AN i.82.

-ānusārin following outward signs (= ˚gāhin) AN iii.292; Ne 25; -kamma prognostication, prophecy Vin v.172; Vb 353; -karaṇa = gāhin SN iv.297; -gāhin “taking signs,” enticed or led away by outward signs entranced with the general appearance, sensuously attracted DN i.70 (cp. Dialogues i.80); iii.225; SN iv.104 SN iv.168; AN ii.16; AN iii.99; AN v.348; Pp 20, Pp 24, Pp 58; Dhs 1345; Mil 367, Mil 403. Cp. Vism 151, Vism 209.

cp. Sk. nimitta, to , although etym. uncertain

Nimināti

to turn round, change to barter, exchange for (c. instr.): pres. imper. niminā Ja v.343 (= parivattehi Com.); pres. 1st pl. nimimhase Ja ii.369, pot. nimineyya Ja iii.63; fut. nimissati Ja v.271 Ja v.453 (devatāhi nirayaṃ); aor. nimmini Ja iii.63; ger niminitvā Milo 279.

Sk. niminoti in diff. meaning, the P. meaning being influenced by ; ni + mināti, mi to fix, measure cp. Sk. nimaya barter, change

Nimisa

winking, shutting the eyes; animisa not winking Dāvs v.26. See also nimesa.

cp. Vedic nimiṣ f. & nimiṣa nt.

Nimisatā

(f.) winking Ja vi.336 (a˚).

abstr. to nimisati

Nimisati

to wink DN ii.20 (animisanto, not winking; v.l. BB animm˚; Ja iii.96 (ummisati + ). Cp. nimisatā.

Sk. nimiṣati, ni + misati

Nimīlati

(& Nimmīlati) to shut, close (the eyes) Ja i.279; Dhp-a ii.6 (akkhīni nimmīlituṃ nâsakkhi) Caus. nim(m)īl-eti id. MN i.120; Dhp-a ii.28 (paralokaṃ opp. ummīleti); Ja i.279; Vism 292 (akkhīni ni˚).

ni + mīlati

Nimugga

(adj.) plunged, immersed in, sunk down or fallen into (-˚) (c. loc. Vin iii.106 (gūthakūpe sasīsakaṃ n.); DN i.75; Ja i.4 Ja iii.393 (gūthakalale), 415; Nd i.26; Pp 71; Mil 262 Sdhp 573. Nimujja (nimmujja)

cp. Sk, nimagna, pp. of nimujjati

Nimujjā (nimmujjā)

diving, immersion, in cpd. ummujja-nimujja(ṃ karoti) DN i.78. See ummujjā

Sk. *nimajj-yā

Nimujjati

to sink down, plunge into (with loc.), dive in, be immersed AN iv.11; Pp 74; Ja i.66, Ja i.70; Ja iii.163, Ja iii.393 (kāmakalale); iv.139; aor nimujji Ja ii.293; Pv-a 47 (udake) ■ Caus. nimujjeti (so read for nimujjati Ja v.268) & nimujjāpeti to cause to sink or dive, to drown J-iii.133; iv.142 (nāvaṃ) ■ pp nimugga q.v.

Sk. nimajjati, ni + mujjati

Nimujjana

(nt.) diving, ducking; bathing Pv-a 47.

Sk. nimajjana

Nimesa

winking Mil 194.

= nimisa, cp. Vedic nimesa

Nimokkha

= vimokkha SN i.2 (v.l. SS vi˚, preferable).

Nimba

the Nimb tree (Azadirachta Indica), bearing a bitter leaf, & noted for its hard wood Vin i.152 (˚kosa), 284 (id.), 201 (˚kasāva); AN i.32 AN v.212; Vv 3336 (˚muṭṭhi, a handful of N. leaves); Ja ii.105, Ja ii.106; Dhp-a i.52 (˚kosa); Dhs-a 320 (˚paṇṇa, the leaf of the N. as example of tittaka, bitter taste); Vv-a 142 (˚palāsa); Pv-a 220 (˚rukkhassa daṇḍena katasūla).

Sk. nimba, non-Aryan

Nimmaṃsa

(adj.) fleshless MN i.58, MN i.364; Pv-a 68.

nis + maṃsa

Nimmakkha

(adj.) without egotism, not false, not slandering Snp 56 (cp Nd ii.356 makkha = niṭṭhuriya; see also Snp-a 108; paraguṇa-vināsana-lakkhaṇo makkho).

nis + makkha, cp. Sk. nirmatsara

Nimmakkhika

(adj.) free from flies Ja i.262; Dhp-a i.59. Nimmajjana (Nimminjana?)

Sk. nirmakṣika

Nimmajjana (Nimmiñjana?)

a kind of (oil-)cake Vv 3338 (nimmajjani = tilapiññāka Vv-a 147); Pv i.1010 (˚miñjana, v.l. BB ˚majjani); Pv-a 47 (doṇi˚).

*mṛd-yana? perhaps nonAryan

Nimmathana

(nt.) crushing Ja iii.252; Vism 234 (sattu˚); Dhp-a iii.404; Vv-a 284.

nis + mathana

Nimmatheti

to crush out, suppress, destroy Ja i.340. Cp. abhimatthati.

nis + matheti

Nimmadana

(nt.) touching, touch, crushing, subduing AN ii.34 (mada-nimmadana, crushing out pride; may, however, be taken as nis + mada of mad “de-priding,” lit. disintoxication); Bv i.81; Vism 293.

to nimmādeti

Nimmadaya

(adj.) suppressible DN ii.243.

Sk. nirmṛdya, grd. of nimmadeti

Nimmaddana

(nt.) touching, crushing Mil 270 (na vāto hattha-gahaṇaṃ vā nimmaddanaṃ vā upeti the wind cannot be grasped).

nis + mṛd

Nimmanussa

(nt.) void of men, absence of men Ja iii.148.

nis + manussa + ya

Nimmala

(adj.) free from impurity, stainless, clean, pure AN iv.340; Dhp 243; Nd ii.586; Vism 58 Sdhp 250. Nimmata-pitika

nis + mala

Nimmāta-pitika

(adj.) one who has neither mother nor father, an orphan Dhp-a ii.72.

nis + māta-pitika

Nimmātar

maker, builder, creator DN i.18, DN i.56 (in formula: brahmā… kattā nimmātā… ).

Sk. nirmātṛ, n. ag. of nimmināti

Nimmādeti

to crush, subdue humiliate; insult DN i.92 (v.l. ˚maddeti; = DN-a i.257 nimmadati nimmāne karoti), 93, 96.

either = Sk. nirmṛdayati (mṛd ) or *nirmādayati to nirmada. free from pride = nirmāna

Nimmāna1

(nt.) measuring; production, creation, work; issara-n-hetu caused by God MN ii.122; AN i.173; Vb 367. N ■ ratī devā a class of devas, e.g. at DN i.218; Iti 94; Vism 225; DN-a i.114 Thag-a 169; Vv-a 149. Cp. (para-) nimmita.

Sk. nirmāṇa, see nimmināti

Nimmāna2

(adj.) free from pride, humble DN-a i.257.

Sk. nirmāna, nis + māna

Nimmāniyati

to be abased, to be mocked Vin ii.183.

Pass. to nimmāna, of nis + māna

Nimmita

(adj ■ pp.) measured out, planned, laid out; created (by supernatural power iddhi); measured, stately DN i.18, DN i.56 (iddhiyā pi DN-a i.167), 219 (Su˚ devaputta. Np.), ibid. (Paranimmitavasavattī devā a class of devas, lit. “created by others, but also possessed of great power: Vv-a 79, Vv-a 80); also one of the 5, or the 3 spheres (kāmûpapattiyo) in the kāmaloka, viz. paccupaṭṭhita-kāmā, nimmānarati˚ (or nimmita˚), paranimmita˚. Iti 94; Dhs 1280 (cp. kāma) DN iii.218; Ja i.59, Ja i.146 (kāyo n’ eva deva˚ na brahma˚) 232, Nd ii.202a, also under pucchā; P ii.119 (su˚, well constructed i.e. symmetrical); Vism 228 (Mārena nimmitaṃ Buddharūpaṃ); Vv-a 36 (= mitaṃ gacchati vāraṇo), 79 Thag-a 69, Thag-a 70; Mil 1, Mil 242. See also abhinimmita.

pp. of nimmināti

Nimmināti

to measure out, fashion, build, construct form; make by miracle, create, compose produce, lay out, plan, aor. nimmini Ja i.232; Pv-a 245; Dhp-a iv.67; ger nimminitvā Ja i.32; Vv-a 80, & nimmāya Vv 163 ■ pp. nimmita See also nimmātar and nimmāna. Cp. abhi˚.

cp. Sk. nirmimīti & nirmāti, nis + mināti,; ; cp. nimināti

Nimmīleti

see nimīlati.

Nimmūla

(adj.) without root, rootless Ja vi.177.

nis + mūla

Nimmoka

the slough or castoff skin of a snake Pv-a 63.

Sk. nirmoka fr. nis + moceti

Niya

(adj.) one’s own Snp 149 (˚putta = orasaputta Kp-a 248); niyassakamma at AN i.99 & Pv iv.113 (v.l. Minayeff tiyassa) is to be read as nissayakamma (q.v.).

Sk. nija, q.v.

Niyaka

(adj.) one’s own Thig 469; Thag-a 284; Dhs-a 169, Dhs-a 337; DN-a i.183; Vb 2; Vism 349.

= niya

Niyata

(adj.) restrained, bound to, constrained to, sure (as to the future), fixed (in its consequences), certain, assured, necessary DN ii.92 (sambodhiparāyanā), 155; iii.107; Snp 70 (= ariyamaggena niyāmappatta Snp-a 124, cp. Nd ii.357); Dhp 142 (= catumagga niyamena n. Dhp-a iii.83); Ja i.44 (bodhiyā); Pp 13, Pp 16 Pp 63; Kv 609 sq.; Dhs 1028 sq. (micchatta˚ etc.; cp Dhs. trsl. 266, 267), 1414, 1595; Vb 17, Vb 24, Vb 63, Vb 319 Vb 324; Mil 193; Tikp 168 (˚micchādiṭṭhi); Dhp-a iii.170; Pv-a 211. Discussed in Pts. of Contr. (see Index). aniyata see separately.

pp. of ni + yam

Niyati

(f.) necessity, fate, destiny DN i.53; DN-a i.161; Vv-a 341; Pv-a 254.

cp. Sk. niyati, ni + yam

Niyama

1. restraint, constraint, training, self-control Mil 116 (yama + ); Pv-a 98 (yama + ).

2. definiteness certainty, limitation Dhp-a iii.83 (catumagga˚, v.l. niyāma); Snp-a 124 (niyāma); Dhs-a 154; Pv-a 166 (ayaṃ n. saṃsāren’ atthi: law, necessity) ■ aniyama indefiniteness choice, generality Dhs-a 57; Vv-a 16 (yaṃ kiñci = aniyame, i.e. in a general sense), 17 (same of ye keci); Pv-a 175 (vā saddo aniyamattho = indefinite)- niyamena (instr.) adv. by necessity, necessarily Pv-a 287; niyamato (abl.) id. Dhs-a 145, Dhs-a 304 (so read). 3. natural law, cosmic order; in Commentarial literature this was fivefold: utu-, bīja-, kamma-, ćitta-, dhammaDA on DN ii.11; Dial. ii.8; Dhs-a 272; trs. 360.

cp. Sk. niyama, ni + yam; often confused with niyāma

Niyamana

(nt.) fixing, settling, definition, explanation in detail Mil 352 (lakkha-n aiming at the target); Vv-a 22 (visesattha˚); 231, Pv-a 255 (so read for nigamana?).

Sk. niyamana, to niyameti

Niyameti

to tie down, to fix; explain in detail, exemplify Pv-a 265; Vism 666. pp. niyamita see a˚.

cp. Sk. niyamayati, ni + yamati

Niyāteti

see niyyādeti.

Niyāma

way, way to an end or aim, esp. to salvation, right way (sammatta˚); method manner, practice SN i.196; SN iii.225 (sammatta˚); AN i.122; Snp 371 (˚dassin = sammatta-niyāmabhūtassa maggassa dassāvin Snp-a 365); Nd i.314 (˚avakkanti); Nd ii.358 (= cattāro maggā); Pts ii.236 sq. (sammatta˚ okkamati); Pp 13, Pp 15; Vb 342niyāmena (instr.) adv in this way, by way of, according to Ja i.278; Ja iv.139 Ja iv.414 (suta˚ as he had heard); Dhp-a i.79; Dhp-a ii.9, Dhp-a ii.21; Vv-a 4; Pv-a 260; Kvu trs. 383 ■ aniyāmena (see also aniyāmena) without order, aimlessly, at random Ja v.337.

Sk. niyama & niyāma

Niyāmaka1

(adj.) sure of or in, founded in, or leading to, completed in DN i.190 (dhamma-n. paṭipadā, cp. niyamatā).

either to niyama or niyāma

Niyāmaka2

(see niyyāmaka ) ship’s captain Vism 137 (simile).

Niyāmatā

(f.) state of being settled, certainty, reliance surety, being fixed in (-˚) SN ii.25 (dhamma˚ + dhammaṭṭhitatā); AN i.286 (id.), Ja i.113 (saddhammassa n assurance of… ); Kv 586 (accanta˚ final assurance).

abstr. to niyāma, influenced in meaning by niyama

Niyāmeti

to restrain, control, govern, guide Mil 378 (nāvaṃ).

Denom. fr. niyāma or niyama

Niyujjati

to be fit for, to be adapted to, to succeed, result, ensue Pv-a 49 (= upakappati).

Pass. of niyuñjati

Niyutta(ka)

(adj.) tied to, appointed to (with loc.), commissioned, ordered Dhs-a 47; Pv-a 20 (janapade), 124 (dānâdhikāre), 127 (dāne).

pp. of niyuñjati

Niyoga

command, order; necessity. abl. niyogā “strictly speaking” Dhs 1417.

ni + yoga

Niyojeti

to urge, incite to (with loc.) Vin ii.303; AN iv.32; Pv ii.14; Mil 229. Niyyati = Niyati

Caus. of niyuñjati

Niyyati = Nīyati

(Pass. of nayati).

Niyyatta

(nt.) escape Ja i.215.

cp. Sk. niryaṇa

Niyyāta

(pp.) = niyyādita MN i.360.

Niyyātana

(nt.) returning, return to (-˚) Ja v.497 (saka-raṭṭha˚); Vism 556; DN-a i.234.

fr. niyyāti

Niyyātar

a guide, leader MN i.523 sq.

n. ag. to niyyāma

Niyyāti

to go out, get out (esp. of saṃsāra); SN v.6 (niyyanti dhīrā lokamhā); Snp-a 212 aor. niyyāsi DN i.49, DN i.108; Ja i.263; Snp 417; Snp 3rd pl. niyyiṃsu AN v.195; fut. niyyassati AN v.194 ■ See also niyyāna & niyyānika.;

Sk. niryāti, nis + yāti

Niyyādita

assigned, presented, given, dedicated Pv-a 196 (dhana nī˚). As niyyātita at Vism 115.

pp. of niyyādeti

Niyyādeti

(niyyāteti, nīyādeti) to give (back), give into charge give over, assign, dedicate, to present, denote SN i.131 (niyyātayāmi); iv.181 (sāmikānaṃ gāvo), 194; Ja i.30 Ja i.66, Ja i.496; Ja ii.106, Ja ii.133; Vv 468 niyyādesi = sampaṭicchāpesi adāsi Vv-a 199); Pv iii.211 (niyātayiṃsu = adaṃsu Pv-a 184); Vism 115 (t); Dhp-a i.70; Dhp-a ii.87; Vv-a 33, Vv-a 67; Pv-a 20 (vihāraṃ nīyādetvā), 25 (= uddissati dadāti), 42 81, 276 (at all Pv-a passages as nī˚) ■ pp. niyyādita Cp. similarly paṭiyādeti & paṭiyādita.;

cp. Sk. ni-or nir-yātayati, Caus. of ni(r)yatati

Niyyāna

(nt.) 1. going out, departure DN i.9 (= niggamana DN-a i.94).

2. way out, release deliverance Snp 170, Snp 172 (“magga-saccaṃ bhāvento lokamhā niyyāti” Snp-a 212); Pts i.163, Pts i.176; Ne 119 Cp. niyyānika ■ aniyyāna Dhp-a ii.209.

nis + yāna, cp. niyyāti

Niyyānika

(adj.) leading out (of saṃsāra), leading to salvation, salutary, sanctifying, saving profitable DN i.235, DN i.237; SN i.220; SN v.82, SN v.166, SN v.255, SN v.379 sq. Ja i.48 (a˚), 106; Dhs 277, Dhs 339, Dhs 505 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 82 335); Vb 12, Vb 19, Vb 56, Vb 319, Vb 324; Ne 29, Ne 31, Ne 63, Ne 83; Dhp-a iv.87 ■ Also found in spelling nīyānika e.g. AN iii.132 (ariyā diṭṭhi n. nīyāti takkarassa sammādukkha-khayāya); DN-a i.89 (anīyānikattā tiracchanabhūtā kathā). Niyyama(ka)

to niyyāna

Niyyāma(ka)

a pilot, helmsman, master mariner, guide Ja i.107 (thala˚); iv.137, 138; Mil 194, Mil 378 sq.; Dāvs iv.42.

Sk. niyāmaka & niryāma(ka). Cp. also P. niyāmaka

Niyyāsa

any exudation (of plants or trees), as gum, resin, juice, etc. Vism 74 (˚rukkha, one of the 8 kinds of trees), 360 (paggharitan ■ rukkha). Cp. nivāyāsa.

cp. Sk. niryāsa, Halāyudha 5, 75

Niyyūha

a pinnacle, turret, gate MN i.253; DN-a i.284 (pāsāda + ).

Sk. niryūha (& nirvyūha?), perhaps to; vah

Niraṅkaroti

(& nirākaroti) to think little of, despise, neglect, disregard, repudiate throw away, ruin, destroy Thag 478; Iti 83 (nirākare) Ja iii.280 = Ja v.498; Ja iv.302; Pv iii.96 (= chaḍḍeti pajahati Pv-a 211); Vv-a 109 ■ pp. (a)nirākata Iti 39.

Sk. nirākaroti, nis + ā kṛ;

Niraggala

(niraggaḷa) (adj.) unobstructed, free, rich in result SN i.76 = Iti 21; AN ii.43; AN iv.151; MN i.139; Snp 303; Nd ii.284 Ca; Vv 6431 (= Vv-a 285).

nis + aggala

Niraggika

(adj.) without fire Mil 324 (˚okāsa).

nis + aggi + ka

Nirajjati

to be thrown out, to be expelled, to lose (with abl.) Ja vi.502, Ja vi.503 (raṭṭhā); v.l. BB nirajhati Com. ni(g)gacchati; Thig 93 (aor. nirajji ‘haṃ = na jānim ahaṃ Thag-a, 90. Kern (wrongly) proposes reading virajjhi).

Pass. of nirajati, nis + ajati, Vedic nirajati to drive out cattle

Nirata

(adj.) fond of, attached to (-˚) SN i.133; DN-a i.250; Pv-a 5 (duccarita˚), 89, 161 (hitakaraṇa˚).

pp. of niramati

Niratta1

(adj.-n..) soulless; view of soullessness or unsubstantiality; thus interpreted (in preference to niratta2) by Com. on Snp 787 Snp 858, Snp 919. See foll.

Sk. *nirātman, nis + attan

Niratta2

(adj.) rejected, thrown off, given up Snp 1098; Nd ii.359. Note. At Snp 787, Snp 858, Snp 919 the interpretation of Nd i.82 Nd i.248 = Nd i.352 and also Bdhgh assume a cpd. of nis + attan (= nirātman): see niratta1.

Sk. nirasta, pp. of nirasyati, see nirassati

Nirattha

(adj.) useless, groundless, unproficient, vain (opp. sāttha profitable) Snp 582 (nt. as adv.) 585 (niratthā paridevanā); Dhp 41; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 18 (˚bhāva uselessness), 83 (= duḥ).

nis + attha

Niratthaka

(adj.) = nirattha; Vv-a 324; Pv-a 18, Pv-a 40, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 102 etc ■ f. ˚ikā Thag-a 258; Mil 20; Sdhp 68.

Nirantara

(adj.) having no interval, continuous, uninterrupted Pv-a 135. Usually in nt. as adv nirantaraṃ always, incessantly, constantly; immediately at once Dhs-a 168; Pv-a 52, Pv-a 80, Pv-a 107, Pv-a 110 (= satataṃ) 120; Dhp-a i.13.

nis + antara

Niraparādha

(adj.) without offence, guiltless, innocent Ja i.264.

nis + aparādha

Nirapekkha

(adj.) not heeding, unsuspecting, disregarding, indifferent, reckless Vv-a 27, Vv-a 47 (jīvitaṃ); Pv-a 62; DN-a i.177; Mil 343 (jīvitaṃ).

nis + apa + īkṣ

Nirabbuda1

(m. nt.) a vast number; also Name of a hell SN i.149 = AN ii.3 = AN v.171 (expld at 173 as “seyyathā pi vīsati abbudā nirayā evam eko nirabbudo nirayo”); Ja iii.360 (Com.: vīsati abbudāni ekaṃ nirabbudaṃ).

cp. BSk. nirarbuda & abbuda 3

Nirabbuda2

(adj.) free from boils or tumours, healthy (also fig.) Vin iii.18 (of the Sangha).

nis + abbuda2

Niraya

purgatory, hell, a place of punishment & torture, where sin is atoned (i.e. kamma ripens = paccati, is literally boiled) by terrible ordeals (kāraṇāni) similar to & partly identical with those of Hades & Tartarus. There are a great number of hells, of which the most fearful is the; Avīcimahāniraya (see Avīci). Names of other purgatories occur frequently in the Jātaka collection, e.g. Kākola vi.247; Khuradhāra v.269 sq.; Dhūma-roruva v.271 Patāpana v.266, 271, 453; Paduma iv.245; Roruva iii.299; v.266; vi.237; Sanghāta v.266; Sañjīva ibid. Sataporisa v.269; Sattisūla v.143. As the principal one n. is often mentioned with the other apāyas (states of suffering), viz. tiracchānayoni (animal world) & pittivisaya (the; manes), e.g. at Nd i.489; Nd ii.517, Nd ii.550; Pv iv.11; Thag-a 282; Pv-a 27 sq. (see apāya) ■ There is a great variety of qualifying adjectives connected with niraya, all of which abound in notions of fearful pain, awful misery & continuous suffering, e.g. kaṭuka ghora, dāruṇa, bhayānaka, mahābhitāpa, sattussada etc ■ Descriptions of N. in glowing terms of frightfulness are freq. found from the earliest books down to the late Peta-Vatthu, Pañcagati-dīpana & Saddhammopāyana Of these the foll. may be quoted as characteristic: SN i.152 (10 nirayas); MN iii.183; AN i.141 Snp p.126 = AN v.173; Nd i.404 sq. = Nd ii.304iii.c; Ja iv.4 (Mittavindaka); Vv 52 (Revatī); Pv i.10; Pv iii.10; Pv iv.1 Pv iv.7; Dhp-a i.148 ■ See on the whole subject, esp. L Scherman, Materialen zur indischen Visionsliteratur, Leipzig 1792; & W. Stede,; Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914, pp. 33–⁠39 ■ References: Vin i.227 (apāya duggati vinipāta niraya); DN i.82, DN i.107 (id.); Vin ii.198 (yo kho sanghaṃ bhindati kappaṃ nirayamhi paccati), 204; ii.203 = Iti 86; DN i.228 (+ tiracchānayoni), 54 (read nirayasate for niriyasate); iii.111; SN iv.126; SN v.356, SN v.450; MN i.73, MN i.285, MN i.308, MN i.334; MN ii.86, MN ii.149 MN ii.186; MN iii.166, MN iii.203, MN iii.209; AN iv.405; AN v.76, AN v.182, AN v.184; Snp 248 (patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirā), 333, 660 sq., 677 sq. Dhp 126, Dhp 140, Dhp 306, Dhp 311, Dhp 315; Thag 304 (adhammo nirayaṃ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiṃ) = Dhs-a 38 = DN-a i.99 = Dhp-a i.22; Thig 456; Iti 12; Ja iv.463; Pp 60; Pts i.83 (Avīci˚); Vb 86, Vb 337; Vism 102; Mil 148; Dhp-a i.22; Dhp-a iii.71; Sdhp 7, Sdhp 285 ■ See also nerayika.

-gāmin (adj.) leading to purgatory (magga) Snp 277 -dukkha the pain of H. Snp 531; -pāla a guardian of P. a devil AN i.138, AN i.141; MN iii.179; Nd i.404; Vv-a 226 Names of guardians (after their complexion) e.g. Kāḷa (black) & Upakāḷa (blackish) Ja vi.248. -bhaya the fear of P. Ja i.168; Vism 392; -saṃvattanika conducive to P. Nd i.489.

BSk. niraya, nis + aya of i = to go asunder, to go to destruction, to die, cp. in meaning Vedic nirṛti. The popular etym. given by Dhammapāla at Pv-a 53 is “n’ atthi ettha ayo sukhan ti” = there is no good; that given by Bdhgh at Vism 427 “n’ atthi ettha assādasaññito ayo” (no refreshment)

Niravasesa

(adj.) without remainder, complete, inclusive Ne 14, Ne 15, cp. Mil 91, Mil 182.

nis + avasesa

Nirasana

(adj.) without food or subsistence, poor Ja iv.128.

nis + asana2

Nirassati

to throw off, despise, neglect Snp 785, Snp 954; Nd i.76 (so read for nidassati, v.l. SS nir˚), 444; Snp-a 522 ■ pp niratta2.

cp. Sk. nirasyati, nis + assati, as to throw

Nirassāda

(adj.) without taste, insipid, dull Vism 135. Cp. nirāsāda.

nis + assāda

Nirākaroti

see nirankaroti.

Nirākula

(adj.) unconfused, clear, calm, undisturbed Ja i.17 (v. 94).

nis + ākula

Nirātaṅka

(adj.) healthy Mil 251 (of paddy).

nis + ātanka

Nirādīnava

(adj.) not beset with dangers, not in danger, unimperilled Vin iii.19.

nis + ādīnava

Nirāma

(adj.) healthy, undepraved, without sin, virtuous Snp 251, Snp 252 (˚gandha nikkilesayoga Snp-a 293), 717 (id. = nikkilesa Snp-a 499).

nis + āma, cp. nirāmaya

Nirāmaya

(adj.) not ill, healthy, good, without fault Pv-a 164.

nis + āmaya

Nirāmisa

(adj.) having no meat or prey; free from sensual desires, disinterested, not material SN i.35, SN i.60; SN iv.219, SN iv.235; SN v.68, SN v.332; AN iii.412; DN iii.278 Vb 195; Vism 71; Sdhp 475, Sdhp 477.

nis + āmisa

Nirārambha

(adj.) without objects (for the purpose of sacrificing), i.e. without the killing of animals (of yañña) SN i.76; AN ii.42 sq.

nis + ārambha

Nirālamba

(adj.) unsupported Mil 295 (ākāsa).

nis + ālamba

Nirālaya

(adj.) houseless, homeless Mil 244 (= aniketa). At Dhp-a iv.31 as expln of appossukka. f. abstr. nirālayatā homelessness Mil 162, Mil 276, Mil 420.

nis + ālaya

Nirāsa

(adj.) not hungry, not longing for anything, desireless SN i.12, SN i.23, SN i.141; AN i.107 sq.; Snp 1048 (anigha + ), 1078 (id.); Nd ii.360; Pp 27; Pv iv.133 (= nittaṇha Pv-a 230). See also amama.

nis + āsā

Nirāsaṃsa

(adj.) without wishes, expectations or desires, desireless Snp 1090 (Nd ii.reading for nirāsaya); Nd ii.361 (cp. Dhp-a iv.185 nirāsāsa *nirāsaṃsa, v.l. for nirāsaya).

nis + āsaṃsa, śaṃs

Nirāsaṅka

(adj.) without apprehension, unsuspicious, not doubting Ja i.264; Vism 180.

nis + āsankā

Nirāsaṅkatā

(f.) the not hesitating Ja vi.337.

abstr. fr. nirāsanka

Nirāsattin

(adj.) not hanging on to, not clinging or attached to (c. loc.) Snp 851 (= nittaṇha Snp-a 549); Nd i.221.

adj. to pp. āsatta1 with nis

Nirāsaya

(adj.) without (outward) support, not relying on (outward) things, without (sinful) inclinations Snp 56 (: Nd ii.360 b reads nirāsasa) 369, 634, 1090 (Nd ii.361 reads nirāsaṃsa); Dhp 410; Dhp-a iv.185 (v.l. BB nirāsāsa; expld by nittaṇha).

nis + āsaya, fr. śri

Nirāsava

(adj.) without intoxication, undefiled, sinless Thag-a 148.

nis + āsava

Nirāsāda

(adj.) tasteless, yielding no enjoyment Thag 710. Cp. nirassāda.

nis + assāda

Nirāhāra

(adj.) without food, not eating, fasting Ja iv.225; Sdhp 389.

nis + āhāra

Niriñjana

(adj.) not moving, stable, unshaken Vism 377 (= acala, āneñja).

nis + iñjanā, fr. iñjati

Nirindhana

(adj.) without fuel (of fire), Thag-a 148 (aggi); Dhp-a i.44 (jātaveda). Niriha(ka)

nis + indhana

Nirīha(ka)

(adj.) inactive, motionless, without impulse Thag-a 148 (˚ka); Mil 413 (+ nijjīvata); Vism 484, Vism 594 sq.

nis + īha

Nirujjhati

to be broken up, to be dissolved, to be destroyed, to cease, die Vin i.1; DN i.180 sq., 215; ii.157; SN iii.93 (aparisesaṃ); iv.36 sq., 60, 98, 184 sq.; 294 402; v.213 sq.; AN iii.165 sq. (aparisesaṃ); v.139 sq. Ja i.180; Pp 64; Sdhp 606 ■ pp. niruddha. Cp nirodha.

Pass. of nirundhati (nirodhati) ni + rundhati

Niruttara

(adj.) making no reply Pv-a 117.

nis + uttara

Nirutti

(f.) one of the Vedāngas (see chaḷanga), expln of words, grammatical analysis etymological interpretation; pronunciation, dialect way of speaking, expression Vin ii.139 (pabbajitā… sakāya niruttiyā Buddhavacanaṃ dūsenti); DN i.202 (loka˚, expression); MN iii.237 (janapada˚); SN iii.71 (tayo n-pathā); AN ii.160 (˚paṭisambhidā); iii.201; Dhp 352 (˚padakovida = niruttiyañ ca sesapadesu cā ti catūsu pi paṭisambhidāsu cheko ti attho Dhp-a iv.70 i.e. skilled in the dialect or the original language of the holy Scriptures); Pts i.88 sq.; Pts ii.150 (˚paṭisambhidā) Nd ii.563; Dhs 1307; Ne 4, Ne 8, Ne 33, Ne 105; Mil 22 Vism 441; Snp-a 358; Pv-a 97.

Sk. nirukti, nis + vac

Nirudaka

(adj.) without water, waterless MN i.543; Nd ii.630.

nis + udaka

Niruddha

(pp.) expelled, destroyed; vanished, ceased SN iii.112; Dhs 1038.

pp. of nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati

Nirundhati

see nirujjhati, niruddha, nirodha & nirodheti. Cp. parirundhati.;

Nirupakāra

(adj.) useless Ja ii.103.

nis + upakāra

Nirupaghāta

(adj.) not hurt, not injured or set back Mil 130.

nis + upaghāta

Nirupatāpa

(adj.) not harassed (burnt) or afflicted (by pain or harm) Thig 512.

nis + upatāpa

Nirupaddava

(adj.) without affliction or mishap, harmless, secure, happy Ja iv.139; Pv-a 262 (sotthi).

nis + upaddava

Nirupadhi

(adj.) (in verse always nirūpadhi ) free from passions or attachment, desireless controlled Vin ii.156; SN i.194 (vippamutta + ) iv.158; AN i.80, AN i.138 (sītibhūta + ); Dhp 418 (id.); Thag 1250; Thag 2, Thag 320 (vippamutta + ; expld by niddukkha Thag-a 233); Iti 46, Iti 50, Iti 58, Iti 62; Snp 33, Snp 34, Snp 642 (sītibhūta + ) Pv iv.134; Dhp-a iv.225 (= nirupakkilesa); Pv-a 230.

nis + upadhi, cp. upadhīka

Nirupama

(adj.) without comparison, incomparable Snp-a 455 (= atitula).

nis + upama

Nirumbhati

to suppress, hush, silence Ja i.62 (text nirumhitvā, v.l. SS nirumbhitvā, cp. san-nirumhitvā Vv-a 217).

Sk. ? Trenckner, Notes p. 59 ni + rudh (?)

Niruḷha

(adj.) grown, risen; usual, customary, common Vv-a 108.

cp. Sk. nirūḍha, pp. of niruhati

Nirussāsa

(adj.) breathless Ja iii.416; Ja iv.121, cp. vi.197; vi.82.

cp. Sk. nirucchvāsa, nis + ussāsa

Nirussukka

(adj.), careless, unconcerned, indifferent to (c. loc.) Thag-a 282.

nis + ussukka

Niroga

see nīroga.

Niroja

(adj.) tasteless, insipid Ja ii.304; Ja iii.94; Ja vi.561.

nis + oja

Nirodha

oppression, suppression; destruction, cessation annihilation (of senses, consciousness, feeling being in general: sankhārā). Bdhgh’s expl;n of the word is: “ni-saddo abhāvaṃ, rodha-saddo ca cārakaṃ dīpeti Vism 495 ■ N. in many cases is synonymous with nibbāna & parinibbāna; it may be said to be even a stronger expression as far as the active destruction of the causes of life is concerned. Therefore frequently combd with nibbāna in formula “sabbasankhāra-samatho… virāgo nirodho nibbānaṃ,” e.g. SN i.136; Iti 88. Nd ii.s. nibbāna (see nibbāna iii.6). Also in combn with nibbidā, e.g. SN iii.48, SN iii.223; SN iii.163 sq.v.438 ■ The opposite of nirodha is samudaya, cp formula “yaṃ kiñci samudaya-dhammaṃ sabban taṃ nirodha-dhammaṃ” e.g. Nd ii.under sankhārā & passim (a) Vin i.1, Vin i.10; DN ii.33, DN ii.41, DN ii.57 sq., 112; iii.130 sq. 136 sq., 226 sq.; Ja i.133; Ja ii.9 sq., 223; iii.59 sq., 163 v.438; MN i.140, MN i.263, MN i.410; AN i.299; AN iv.456 (= āsavānaṃ parikkhaya); Thig 6 (= kilesanirodha Thag-a 13), 158; Iti 46 = Snp 755 (nirodhe ye vimuccanti te janā maccuhāyino); Iti 62 = Snp 754; Snp 731, Snp 1037; Pts i.192; Pts ii.44 sq. 221; Pp 68; Vb 99 sq., 229; Ne 14, Ne 16 sq.; Vism 372; Vv-a 63; Pv-a 220 (jīvitassa) ■ (b) (as-˚): anupubba DN iii.266; AN iv.409, AN iv.456; abhisaññā˚ DN i.180; asesavirāga˚ SN ii.4, SN ii.12; SN iv.86; SN v.421 sq.; AN i.177; AN ii.158, AN ii.161 upādāna˚ SN iii.14; kāma˚ AN iii.410 sq.; jāti˚ SN iv.86 taṇhā˚ DN iii.216; dukkha˚ DN iii.136; SN iii.32, SN iii.60 SN iv.4 sq., 14, 384; AN i.177; nandi˚ SN iii.14; SN iv.36; bhava (= nibbāna) SN ii.117; SN iii.14; AN v.9; Pts i.159; sakkāya DN iii.240; SN v.410; AN ii.165 sq.; AN iii.246, AN iii.325 sq.v.238 sq.; saññāvedayita˚ DN iii.262, DN iii.266; SN iv.217, SN iv.293 sq.; v. 213 sq.; AN i.41; AN iii.192; AN iv.306; AN v.209.

-dhamma subject to destruction, able to be destroyed destructible (usually in formula of samudaya-dhamma see above) Vin i.11; DN i.110; SN iv.47, SN iv.107, SN iv.214; MN iii.280; AN v.143 sq.; -dhammatā liability to destruction SN iv.217 -dhātu the element or condition of annihilation, one of the 3 dhātus, viz. rūpa, arūpa˚ n˚. DN iii.215; Iti 45 Ne 97; -saññā perception or consciousness of annihilation DN iii.251 sq., 283; AN iii.334; -samāpatti attainment of annihilation Pts i.97, Pts i.100; Mil 300 Vism 702.

BSk. nirodha, to nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati & niruddha

Nirodhika

(adj.) obstructing, destroying Iti 82 (paññā˚), cp. MN i.115.

fr. nirodha

Nirodheti

to oppress, destroy Vism 288 (in expln of passambheti).

Denom. fr. nirodha

Nilaya

a dwelling, habitation, lair, nest Ja iii.454.

fr. ni +

Nilicchita

see nillacchita.

Nilīna

(adj.) sitting on (c. loc.), perched; hidden, concealed, lying in wait Ja i.135, Ja i.293; Ja iii.26; Vv-a 230.

pp. of nilāyati

Nilīyati

to sit down (esp. for the purpose of hiding), to settle, alight; to keep oneself hidden, to lurk, hide Ja i.222, Ja i.292; Mil 257; Pv-a 178. aor nilīyi Ja i.158; Ja iii.26; Dhp-a ii.56; Pv-a 274 ■ pp nilīna. Caus. II. nilīyāpeti to conceal, hide (trs.) Ja i.292.

ni + līyati

Nilīyana

(nt.) hiding Ja v.103 (˚ṭṭhāna hiding-place).

abstr. fr. nilīyati, cp. Sk. nilayana

Nilenaka

(nt.) settling place, hiding-place, refuge Ja v.102 (so read for nillenaka expld by nilīyanaṭṭhāna p. 103).

cp. Sk. nilayana, fr. ni +

Nillacchita

(adj.) castrated Thig 440; written as nilicchita at Ja vi.238 (v.l. BB as gloss niluñcita). expld by “vacchakakāla… nibbījako kato, uddhaṭabījo (p. 239).

Sk. *nirlāñchita, nis + lacchita of nillaccheti

Nillaccheti

to deprive of the marks or characteristics (of virility), to castrate Thig 437 (= purisa-bhāvassa lacchana-bhūtāni bījakāni nillacchesi nīhari Thag-a 270). See also nillañchaka & nillacchita.;

nis + laccheti of lāñch, cp. lakkhaṇa

Nillajja

(adj.) shameless Sdhp 382. Ni(l)lanchaka

nis + lajjā

Ni(l)lañchaka

(adj.-n.) one who marks cattle, i.e. one who castrates or deprives of virility Ja iv.364 (spelt tilañchaka in text, but right in v.l.), expld as “tisūlâdi-ankakaraṇena lañchakā ca lakkhaṇakārakā ti attho” (p 366). cp. nillacchita.

cp. Sk. nirlāñchana, of nirlāñchayati = nis + laccheti

Nillapa

(adj.) without deceit, free from slander AN ii.26 = Iti 113. Nillaleti & Nilloleti;

nis + lapa

Nillāḷeti & Nilloḷeti

to move (the tongue) up & down SN i.118; MN i.109; DN-a i.42 (pp. nillāḷita-jivhā); Dhp-a iv.197 (jivhaṃ nilloleti; v.l. nillāleti & lilāḷeti) = Ja v.434 (v.l. nillelati for ˚lo˚).

nis + lul, cp. Sk. laḍayati & loḍayati

Nillekha

(adj.) without scratches, without edges (?) Vin ii.123 (of jantāghara).

nis + lekha

Nillokana

(adj.-n.) watching out; watchful, careful Ja v.43, Ja v.86 (˚sīla).

nis + lokana

Nilloketi

to watch out, keep guard, watch, observe Vin ii.208.

nis + loketi

Nillopa

plundering, plunder DN i.52; AN i.154; Nd i.144 (˚ṃ harati); Nd ii.1997; Tikp 167, 280; DN-a i.159.

cp. Sk. nirlopa, nis + lup

Nillobha

(adj.) free from greed Ja iv.10.

nis + lobha

Nillolup(p)a

(adj.) free from greed or desires Snp 56 (= Nd ii.362 nittaṇha); Ja v.358.

nis + loluppā

Nivatta

(pp.) returned, turning away from, giving up, being deprived of, being without (˚-Vin ii.109 (˚bīja); Ja i.203; Vv-a 72.

pp. of nivattati

Nivattati

to turn back, to return (opp. gacchati), to turn away from, to flee vanish, disappear Vin i.46; DN i.118; Ja i.223; Ja ii.153 Ja iv.142; Snp p.80; Pv ii.934; iv.107; Snp-a 374; Pv-a 74 Pv-a 161. aor. nivatti Ja ii.3; Pv-a 141. pp. nivatta (q.v.)-Caus. I. nivatteti to lead back, to turn from, to make go back, to convert Ja i.203; Vv-a 110; Pv-a 204 (pāpato from sin). Cp. upa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚ ■ Caus. II. nivattāpeti to send back, to return Pv-a 154.

Vedic nivartati, ni + vattati

Nivattana

(nt.) 1. returning, turning, fig. turning away from, giving up, “conversion” Pv-a 120 (pāpato).

2. a bend, curve (of a river), nook Ja i.324; Ja ii.117, Ja ii.158; Ja iv.256; Ja v.162.

fr. nivattati

Nivattanīya

(adj.) only neg. ; not liable to return, not returning Dhp-a i.63.

grd. formation fr. nivattana

Nivatti

(f.) returning, return Pv-a 189 (gati˚ going & coming).;

fr. ni + vṛt

Nivattha

(pp.) clothed in or with (-˚ or acc.), dressed, covered SN i.115; Ja i.59 (su˚), 307 (sāṭakaṃ); Pv-a 47, Pv-a 49 (dibbavattha˚), 50.

pp. of ni + vasati1

Nivapati

to heap up, sow, throw (food) MN i.151 sq. (nivāpaṃ) ■ pp. nivutta (q.v.).

ni + vapati

Nivaraṇa

see vi˚.

Nivarati

only in Caus. nivāreti (q.v.), pp. nivuta.

ni + varati

Nivasati

to live, dwell, inhabit, stay Vin ii.11 ■ pp. nivuttha, cp. also nivāsana2 & nivāsin.;

ni + vasati2

Nivaha

multitude, quantity, heap Dāvs iv.53; Dāvs v.14, Dāvs v.24, Dāvs v.62.

fr. ni + vah

Nivāta1

(adj.) with the wind gone down, i.e. without wind, sheltered from the wind, protected, safe, secure Vin i.57, Vin i.72; MN i.76; AN i.137 (kūṭāgāra); AN i.101 (id.); Iti 92 (rahada); Thag 1 (kuṭikā); 2, 376 (pāsāda) ■ (nt.) a calm (opp. pavāta Vin ii.79.

Sk. nivāta, ni + vāta “wind-down”

Nivāta2

lowliness, humbleness, obedience, gentleness MN i.125; Snp 265 (= nīcavattana Kp-a 144); Ja vi.252; Pv iv.712. Cp. Mvu ii.423. Freq. in cpd. nivātavutti (id.) AN iii.43; Snp 326 (= nīcavutti Snp-a 333) Ja iii.262; Mil 90, Mil 207; Vv-a 347.

identical with nivāta1, sheltered from the wind = low

Nivātaka

a sheltered place, a place of escape, opportunity (for hiding) Ja i.289 = Ja v.435; cp. Mil 205 (where reading is nimantaka, with v.l. nivātaka, see note on p. 426). See Com. on this stanza at Ja v.437.

fr. nivāta1

Nivāpa

food thrown (for feeding), fodder, bait; gift, portion, ration MN i.151 sq. (Nivāpa-sutta); Ja i.150; Ja iii.271; Dhp-a i.233 (share); iii.303; Vv-a 63 (diguṇaṃ ˚ṃ pacitvā cooking a double portion). Cp. nevāpika.

-tiṇa grass to eat Ja i.150; -puṭṭha fed on grains Dhp 325 (= kuṇḍakâdinā sūkara-bhattena puṭṭho Dhp-a iv.16 = Ne 129 = Thag 17; -bhojana a meal on food given, a feeding MN i.156).

cp. Sk. nivāpa, ni + vap, cp. nivapati

Nivāyāsa

(?) oozing of trees; Bdhgh’s expln of ikkāsa at Vin ii.321. See niyyāsa.

Nivāraṇa

(nt. & adj.) warding off, keeping back, preventing; refusal Snp 1034, Snp 1035, Snp 1106 (= Nd ii.363 āvāraṇa rakkhaṇa gopana); Dhs-a 259; Pv-a 102 Pv-a 278; Sdhp 396.

fr. nivāreti

Nivāraya

(adj.) in dun˚; hard to check or keep back Mil 21 (+ durāvaraṇa).

grd. of nivāreti

Nivārita

(adj.) unobstructed, open Pv-a 202 (= anāvaṭa).

pp. of nivāreti

Nivāretar

one who holds back or refuses (entrance) (opp. pavesetar) DN ii.83 = SN iv.194; AN v.194 (dovāriko aññātānaṃ nivāretā ñātānam pavesetā).

n. agent to nivāreti

Nivāreti

to keep back, to hold back from (c. abl.), to restrain; to refuse, obstruct, forbid warn Vin i.46; Vin ii.220; SN i.7 (cittaṃ nivāreyya), 14 (yato mano nivāraye); iv.195 (cittaṃ); Dhp 77, Dhp 116 (pāpā cittaṃ nivāraye); Ja i.263; Pv iii.74; Vv-a 69; Pv-a 79 Pv-a 102; Dhp-a i.41.

Caus. of nivarati

Nivāsa

stopping, dwelling, resting-place, abode; living, sheltering Ja i.115 (˚ṃ kappeti to put up) ii.110; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 78. Usually in phrase pubbe-nivāsaṃ anussarati “to remember one’s former abode or place of existence (in a former life),” characterising the faculty of remembering one’s former birth DN i.13, DN i.15, DN i.16 DN i.81; SN i.167, SN i.175, SN i.196; SN ii.122, SN ii.213; SN v.265, SN v.305; AN i.25 AN i.164; AN ii.183; AN iii.323, AN iii.418 sq.; AN iv.141 sq.; AN v.211, AN v.339 Also in pubbenivāsaṃ vedi Iti 100; Snp 647 = Dhp 423 p-n-paṭisaṃyuttā dhammikathā DN ii.1; p-n-anussatiñāṇa DN iii.110, DN iii.220, DN iii.275; AN iv.177. Cp. nevāsika.

fr. nivasati2

Nivāsana1

(adj.-n..) dressed, clothed; dressing, clothing, undergarment (opp. pārupana) Vin i.46; Vin ii.228; Ja i.182 (manāpa˚), 421; iii.82; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 74, Pv-a 76 Pv-a 173 (pilotikakkhaṇḍa˚ dressed in rags).

fr. nivāseti

Nivāsana2

(nt.) dwelling, abode Pv-a 44 (˚ṭṭhāna place of abode), 76 (id.).

fr. nivasati2

Nivāsika

(adj.) staying, living, dwelling Ja ii.435 (= nibaddha-vasanaka C.).

fr. nivāsa

Nivāsin

(adj.-n.) dwelling, staying; (n.) an inhabitant Dāvs v.45.

to nivasati

Nivāseti

to dress oneself, to put on (the undergarment), to get clothed or dressed. Freq in ster. phrase “ pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā patta- cīvaram ādāya…, ” describing the setting out on his round of the bhikkhu; e.g. DN i.109, DN i.178, DN i.205, DN i.226. Vin i.46; Vin ii.137, Vin ii.194; DN ii.127; Ja i.265; Pp 56; Pv i.103; Pv-a 49, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 127 (nivāsessati + pārupissati) 147 (= pārupāmi) ■ Caus. II. nivāsāpeti to cause or order to be dressed (with 2 acc.) Ja i.50; Ja iv.142; Dhp-a i.223.

Caus. of nivasati1

Nivicikicchā

see nibbicikicchā; MN i.260.

Nivijjha

see vi˚.

Niviṭṭha

(adj.) settled, established (in); confirmed, sure; fixed on, bent on, devoted to (loc. Snp 57 (= satta allīna etc. Nd ii.364), 756, 774, 781 (ruciyā) 824 (saccesu), 892; Nd i.38, Nd i.65, Nd i.162; Iti 35, Iti 77; Ja i.89 Ja i.259 (adhammasmiṃ); Mil 361; Vv-a 97 (˚gāma, built situated); DN-a i.90 (su˚ & dun˚ of a street = well & badly built or situate). Cp. abhi˚.;

pp. of nivisati

Nivisati

to enter, stop, settle down on (loc.), to resort to, establish oneself Vin i.207; Ja i.309 = Ja iv.217 (yasmiṃ mano nivisati) ■ pp. niviṭṭha ger nivissa (q.v.). Caus. niveseti. Nivissa-vadin

ni + visati

Nivissa-vādin

(adj.-n.) “speaking in the manner of being settled or sure,” a dogmatist Snp 910, Snp 913, expld at Nd i.326 as “sassato loko idam eva saccaṃ, mogham aññan ti”; at Snp-a 560 as “jānāmi passāmi tath’ eva etan ti.”

nivissa (ger. of nivisati) + vādin

Nivuta

(adj.) surrounded, hemmed in, obstructed, enveloped DN i.246; SN ii.24; SN iv.127; Snp 348 (tamo˚), 1032, 1082; Iti 8; Nd ii.365 (= ophuṭa, paṭicchanna, paṭikujjita); Mil 161; Snp-a 596 (= pariyonaddha).

pp. of nivarati (nivāreti) cp. nivārita

Nivutta1

(pp.) called, termed, designated Pv-a 73 (dasavassa-satāni, vassa-sahassaṃ n. hoti).

pp. of ni + vac

Nivutta2

(pp.) shorn, shaved, trimmed Snp 456 (˚kesa = apagatakesa ohāritakesamassu Snp-a 403).

Sk. *nyupta, pp. of vapati1 to shear

Nivutta3

(pp.) sown, thrown (of food), offered, given MN i.152; Ja iii.272.

Sk. *nyupta, pp. of vapati2 to sow

Nivuttha

(pp. of nivasati) inhabited; dwelling, living; see san˚.

Niveṭha

in pañhe dunniveṭha at Mil 90 see nibbedha.

Niveṭhana

see vi˚.

Niveṭheti

see nibbeṭheti.

Nivedaka

(adj.) relating, admonishing Ja vi.21.

to nivedeti

Nivedeti

to communicate, make known, tell, report, announce Ja i.60, Ja i.307; Pv-a 53, Pv-a 66 (attānaṃ reveal oneself); Dāvs v.42.

ni + vedeti, Caus. of vid.

Nivesa

1. entering, stopping, settling down; house, abode Vv 82 (= nivesanāni kacchantarāni Vv-a 50).

2. = nivesana 2, in diṭṭhi˚; Snp 785 (= idaṃ-sacchâbhinivesa-sankhātāni diṭṭhi-nivesanāni Snp-a 522).

Vedic niveśa, fr. ni + viś

Nivesana

(nt.) 1. entering, entrance, settling; settlement, abode, house home DN i.205, DN i.226; DN ii.127; Ja i.294; Ja ii.160 (˚ṭṭhāna) Pv-a 22, Pv-a 81, Pv-a 112.

2. (fig.) (also nivesanā f.: Nd ii.366 settling on, attachment, clinging to (in diṭṭhi˚ clinging to a view = dogmatism cp. nivissa-vādin) Snp 1055 (nandi + ; = taṇhā Nd ii.366); Dhp 40 (diṭṭhi˚); Nd i.76 Nd i.110. See also nivesa.

Vedic niveśana, fr. nivesati, cp. niviṭṭha

Nivesita

(adj.) settled, arranged, designed, built Vv-a 82 (= sumāpita).

pp. of nivesati

Niveseti

to cause to enter, to establish; to found, build, fix, settle; (fig.) to establish in, exhort to (c. loc.), plead for, entreat, admonish DN i.206; SN v.189; Dhp 158, Dhp 282 (attānaṃ); Iti 78 (brahmacariye); Thig 391 (manaṃ); Ja v.99; Pv iii.77 (saṃyame nivesayi); DN-a i.273 (gāmaṃ); Pv-a 206.

Caus. of nivesati

Nivyaggha

(adj.) free from tigers Ja ii.358 (v.l. nibbyaggha).

nis + vyaggha

Nisagga

(& Nissagga) giving forth, bestowing; natural state, nature SN i.54 (˚ss˚). Cp. nisaṭṭha.

ni or nis + sṛj

Nisaṅkhiti

(f.) deposit (of merit or demerit), accumulation, effect (of kamma Snp 953 (= Nd i.442 abhisankhārā).

Sk. ni-saṃskṛti, ni + saṃ + kṛ;

Nisajjā

(f.) sitting down, opportunity for sitting, seat Pv iv.12 (seyyā + ); Ja i.217; Pv-a 24 (˚ādipaṭikkhepa-ṭṭhāna), 219 (pallankâbhujanādi-lakkhaṇā nisajjā). Cp. nesajjika.

Sk. *niṣadyā of ni sad

Nisajjeti

to spend, bestow, give, give up Pv-a 105 (dānûpakaraṇā nisajjesi read better as ˚karaṇǡni sajjesi). See also nissajjati.

sic MSS. for niss˚; Sk. niḥsarjayati, nis + sajjeti, Caus. of sṛj

Nisaṭṭha

(pp.) given up, spent, lost Thig 484 (v.l. ˚ss˚); Thag-a 286 (= pariccatta). Cp nisajjeti & nisagga.; Nisada & Nisada

nis + saṭṭha of sṛj

Nisada & Nisadā

(f.) a grindstone, esp. the understone of a millstone Vin i.201; (˚pota id.); Mil 149; Vism 252 (˚pota, where Kp-a at id. p. reads ˚putta). Cp. ā˚.

Sk. dṛṣad f.; for n: d cp. P. nijjuha = Sk. dātyūha etc.

Nisanti

(f.) careful attention or observation AN ii.97; AN iii.201; AN iv.15 (dhamma˚), 36 (id.) 296; v.166 (dhamma˚); Dpvs i.53 (˚kāra). Cp. nisamma & nisāmeti.;

Sk. *niśānti, ni + śam

Nisabha

“bull among men,” i.e. prince, leader; “princeps,” best of men Ep. of the Buddha SN i.28, SN i.48, SN i.91; MN i.386; Ja v.70 Ja vi.526; Vv 167 (isi˚), cp. Vv-a 83 for expln; Vv 637 (isi˚ = ājānīya Vv-a 262).

Sk. nṛ + ṛṣabha, cp. usabha. On relation of usabha: vasabha: nisabha see Snp-a 40

Nisamma

(adv.) carefully, considerately, observing Snp 54; Nd ii.367 Nd ii.481 b (= sutvā). Esp. in phrase n ■ kārin acting considerately Dhp 24 (= Dhp-a i.238); Ja iii.106; Ja vi.375; Mil 3; cp. n. kiriyāya Mil 59. Cp. nisanti.

orig. ger. of nisāmeti, Sk. niśamya, śam

Nisā

(f.) night Vv 352 (loc. nise); Vv-a 161 (loc. nisati, v.l. nisi = rattiyaṃ); Mil 388 (loc. nisāya) Dāvs ii.6; Dāvs v.2 (nisāyaṃ). See also nisītha.

Sk. niś & niśā, prob. with niśītha (midnight) to ni + ; śi = lying down

Nisātaka

in koka˚; Ja vi.538, a certain wild animal; the meaning is not clear, etymologically it is to be derived fr. Sk. niśātayati to strike, to fell. See Kern, Toev. 1. p. 152, s. v. koka. The v.l. is ˚nisādaka, evidently influenced by nisāda.

Nisāda

a robber Ja iv.364. Cp. nesāda.

cp. Sk. niṣāda, a Non-Aryan or barbarian

Nisādana

grinding Dhp-a i.308.

= ni + śātana

Nisādika

(adj.) fit for lying down, suitable for resting Vin i.239 (go˚).

cp. Sk. niṣādin, ni + sad

Nisādin

(adj.) lying down DN iii.44, DN iii.47.

fr. ni + sad

Nisāna

a hone on which to sharpen a knife Mil 282.

ni + śā to sharpen, to whet, cp. nisita

Nisāmaka

(adj.) observant, listening to, attending to, careful of AN v.166, AN v.168 (dhammānaṃ).

cp. Sk. niśāmana

Nisāmeti

to attend to, listen to, observe, be careful of, mind Ja iv.29 (anisāmetvā by not being careful); v.486; Dhp-a i.239 (+ upadhāneti); Pv-a 1 (imper nisāmayatha). Cp. nisanti, nisamma.

ni + sāmeti

Nisāra

(adj.-n.) full of sap, excellent, strong (of a tree) Vv 631 (= niratisaya sārassa nisiṭṭhasārassa rukkhassa Vv-a 261).

ni + sāra

Nisiñcati

to besprinkle Mvu vii.8.

ni + siñcati

Nisita

(adj.) sharp MN i.281 (āvudhajāta pīta˚?); Ja iv.118 (su˚); Vv-a 233; Pv-a 155, Pv-a 192, Pv-a 213.

Sk. niśita, ni + pp. of śā to whet

Nisinna

(adj.) sitting down, seated Ja i.50, Ja i.255; Ja iii.126; Kp-a 250; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 39 passim ■ Often comb;d & contrasted with; tiṭṭhaṃ (standing), caraṃ (walking) & sayaṃ (sayāna; lying down), e.g. at Snp 151, Snp 193; Iti 82.

Sk. niṣanna, pp. of nisīdati

Nisinnaka

(adj.) = nisinna; MN i.333; Ja i.163; Dhp-a iii.175.

Nisītha

midnight, night Thag 3 (aggi yathā pajjalito nisīthe; v.l. BB nisive), 524 (v.l. nisive); Ja iv.432; Ja v.330, Ja v.331 (v.l. BB nisive), 506 (= rattibhāga Com.).

Sk. niśītha, see nisā

Nisīdati

to sit down, to be seated, to sit, to dwell Nd ii.433; Ja iii.392; Ja vi.367; Pv ii.93 (nisīdeyya Pot.); Pv-a 74. aor. nisīdi Vin i.1; Ja ii.153; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 44; Pv-a 3rd pl. nisīdiṃsu (Ja i.307) nisīdisuṃ (Mvu vii.40); ger. nisīditvā (J ii.160; Pv-a 5 Pv-a 74), nisajja DN ii.127) and nisīditvāna (Snp 1031); grd nisīditabba Vin i.47. pp. nisinna (q.v.) ■ Caus. II nisīdāpeti [cp. Sk. niṣādayati] to cause to sit down, to make one be seated, to invite to a seat Ja iii.392; Ja vi.367; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 35 (there āsane); Mil 20. Cp. abhi˚, san˚.

Sk. niṣīdati, ni + sīdati

Nisīdana

(nt.) sitting down, occasion or opportunity to sit, a mat to sit on Vin i.295 Vin ii.123 (˚ena vippavasati); SN v.259 (˚ṃ gaṇhāti). ˚paccattharaṇa a mat for sitting on Vin i.47, Vin i.295; Vin ii.209 Vin ii.218.

Sk. niṣadana, fr. nisīdati

Nisumbhati

to knock down Thig 302 (= pāteti Thag-a 227).

ni + sumbh (subhnāti)

Nisūdana

(nt.) destroying, slaughtering Mil 242.

ni + sūd

Nisedha

(adj.-n.) holding back, restraining; prevention, prohibition Dhp 389; Dhp-a iv.148; hirī˚ restrained by shame SN i.168 = Snp 462; Dhp 143.

fr. ni + sedh

Nisedhaka

(adj.) prohibiting, restraining; one who prohibits, an obstructer Ja ii.220.

fr. nisedha

Nisedhanatā

(f.) refusing, refusal, prohibition Mil 180 (a˚).

abstr. to nisedheti

Nisedheti

to keep off, restrain, prohibit, prevent SN i.121 (nisedha, imper.); Ja iii.83, Ja iii.442; Thag-a 250; Vv-a 105 (nirayûpapattiṃ) ■ Cp. nisedha.

Caus. of ni + sedh

Nisevati

to resort to, practise, pursue, follow, indulge in Ja ii.106; Snp 821 (= Nd i.157); Pv ii.319 (= karoti Pv-a 87); Mil 359 ■ pp. nisevita.

ni + sev

Nisevana

(nt. also f.) practising, enjoying; pursuit Pp 20, Pp 24; Sdhp 406.

Sk. niṣevana, cp. nisevati

Nisevita

(adj.) frequented, practised, enjoyed, indulged in MN i.178; Sdhp 373.

pp. of nisevati

Nissaṃsaya

(adj.) having no doubt, free from doubt Mil 237 ■ acc. as adv. without doubt undoubtedly Pv iv.81; Dhp-a i.106; Pv-a 95.

nis + saṃsaya

Nissakka

“going out from,” ttg. a name of the ablative case Ja v.498; Vv-a 152, Vv-a 154, Vv-a 180 Vv-a 311; Pv-a 147, Pv-a 221.

fr. nis + sakkati = sakk

Nissakkana

(nt.) going out, creeping out; only in biḷāra˚; at DN ii.83 (v.l. BB as gloss nikkhamana) + S iv.194; AN v.195.

Sk. *niḥsarpana, nis + sakk, confused with sṛp, see Trenckner, Notes p. 60 & cp. apassakkati o˚, pari˚

Nissaggiya

(adj.) to be given up, what ought to be rejected or abandoned Vin i.196, Vin i.254; Vin iii.195 sq.

Sk. *niḥsārgya grd. of nis + sajjeti, not = Sk. naisargika

Nissaṅga

(adj.) unattached, unobstructed, disinterested, unselfish Sdhp 371, Sdhp 398, Sdhp 411 etc.; Tikp 10 f. abstr. ˚tā disinterestedness Ja i.46.

nis + sanga

Nissajjati

to let loose, give up, hand over, give, pour out Vin ii.188 ger. nissajja [Sk. niḥsṛjya] Snp 839 (v.l. nisajja); Nd i.189 (id.); Snp-a 545. pp. nisaṭṭha & nissaṭṭha; (q.v.) Cp. nissaggiya & paṭi˚.;

nis + sajjati, sṛj. See also nisajjeti

Nissaṭa

(adj.) flown or come out from, appeared; let loose, free, escaped from SN iii.31 SN iv.11 sq.; AN i.260; AN iv.430 (a˚); v.151 sq.; Ja iii.530 Ja vi.269; Nd ii.under nissita; Pts ii.10 sq.; Mil 95, Mil 225 (bhava˚). See also nissaraṇa. Cp. abhi˚.

pp. of nis + sarati, sṛ;

Nissaṭṭha

(adj.) dismissed, given up, left, granted, handed over, given Vin iii.197 (˚cīvara) MN i.295; MN ii.203; Vv-a 341. See also nisaṭṭha & paṭi˚.;

pp. of nissajjati

Nissatta

(adj.) powerless, unsubstantial; f. abstr. ˚tā absence of essence, unsubstantiality (see dhamma A) Dhs-a 38, Dhs-a 139, Dhs-a 263; cp. Dhs trsl. pp. xxxiii..& 26.;

Sk. *niḥsattva, nis + satta

Nissadda

(adj.) noiseless, soundless, silent Ja i.17 (v.94); Dhp-a iii.173.

nis + sadda

Nissantāpa

(adj.) without grief or selfmortification Pv-a 62.

nis + santāpa

Nissanda

flowing or trickling down; discharge, dropping issue; result, outcome, esp. effect of Kamma AN iii.32; Ja i.31, Ja i.205, Ja i.426 (sarīra˚); Dhp-a i.395; Dhp-a ii.36, Dhp-a ii.86; Vv-a 14 (puñña-kammassa n-phala); Pv-a 47 (puññakammassa), 58 (id.); Mil 20. 117; Pgdp 102.

Sk. nisyanda & niṣyanda, ni + ; syand (syad), see sandati

Nissama

exertion, endeavour Ja v.243.

ni + sama

Nissaya

that on which anything depends, support help, protection; endowment, resource, requisite, supply foundation, reliance on (acc. or-˚) Vin i.58 (the four resources of bhikkhu, viz. piṇḍiyālopa-bhojanaṃ, paṃsukūla-cīvaraṃ, rukkhamūla-senāsanaṃ, pūtimuttabhesajjaṃ); ii.274, 278; DN iii.137, DN iii.141; AN i.117; AN iii.271 AN iv.353; AN v.73; Snp 753, Snp 877; Nd i.108 (two n.: taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚), 190, cp. Nd;2 s. v.; Nd ii.397A (the requisites of a bhikkhu in diff. enumeration); Pts ii.49 sq., 58 sq. 73 sq.; ii.220; Ne 7, Ne 65; Vism 12, Vism 535. nissayaṃ karoti to rely on, to be founded on to take one’s stand in Snp 800 ■ Cp. nissāya & nissita.;

-kamma giving assistance or help, an (ecclesiastical act of help or protection Vin i.49, Vin i.143, Vin i.325; Vin ii.226; AN i.99; Pv iv.11 (so to be read at the 2 latter passages for niyassa˚). -sampanna finding one’s strength in AN iv.353.

Sk. niśraya, of ni + śri, corresp. in meaning to Sk. āśraya

Nissayatā

(f.) dependence, requirement, resource Snp 856; Nd i.245.

abstr. to nissaya

Nissayati

to lean on, a foundation on, rely on, trust, pursue Snp 798 (sīlabbataṃ; Snp-a 530 = abhinivisati); Vv-a 83 (katapuññaṃ). Pass. nissīyati Vv-a 83. pp. nissita ger. nissāya (q.v.).

Sk. niśrayati, but in meaning = āśrayati, ni + śri

Nissaraṇa

(nt.) going out, departure; issue, outcome, result; giving up, leaving behind being freed, escape (fr. saṃsāra), salvation Vin i.104; DN iii.240, DN iii.248 sq.; SN i.128, SN i.142; SN ii.5; SN iii.170 (catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ); iv.7 sq. (id.); v.121 sq.; AN i.258, AN i.260; AN ii.10 (kāmānaṃ etc.); iii.245 sq.; iv.76 (uttariṃ); v.188; MN i.87 (kāmānaṃ), 326 (uttariṃ); iii.25; Iti 37, Iti 61; Pts ii.180, Pts ii.244; Vb 247; Vism 116; Thag-a 233; Dhs-a 164; Sdhp 579. Cp. nissaṭa & nissaraṇīya.;

-dassin wise in knowing results, prescient, able to find a way to salvation SN iv.205; -pañña (adj.) = ˚dassin DN i.245 (a˚); iii.46; SN ii.194; SN iv.332; AN v.178 (a˚), 181 sq.; Mil 401.

Sk. niḥsaraṇa, to nis + sarati, cp. BSk. nissaraṇa giving up (?) Avs ii.193

Nissaraṇīya

(adj.) connected with deliverance, leading to salvation able to be freed. The 3 n. dhātuyo (elements of deliverance) are nekkhamma (escape from cravings) āruppa (from existence with form), nirodha (from all existence), in detail at Iti 61 (kāmānaṃ n. nekkhammaṃ rūpānaṃ n. āruppaṃ, yaṃ kiñci bhūtaṃ sankhataṃ n nirodho). The 5 n-dh. are escape fr. kāma, vyāpāda vihesā, rūpa, sakkāya: AN iii.245; cp. AN i.99 AN iii.290.

Note. The spelling is often nissāraṇīya, thus at Vin iv.225; DN iii.239 (the five n-dhātuyo), 247, 275.

grd. of nissarati, with relation to nissaraṇa

Nissarati

to depart, escape from, be freed from (c. abl.) AN i.260 (yasmā atthi loke nissaraṇaṃ tasmā sattā lokamhā nissaranti) ■ pp. nissaṭa, grd nissaraṇīya (q.v.); cp. also nissaraṇa & paṭi˚.;

nis + sarati

Nissāya

(prep. c, acc.) leaning on (in all fig. meanings) Nd ii.368 (= upanissāya, ārammaṇaṃ ālambanaṃ karitvā). 1. near, near by, on, at Ja i.167 (pāsānapiṭṭhaṃ), 221 (padumasaraṃ); Pv-a 24 (bāhā), 134 (taṃ = with him). 2. by means of, through, by one’s support, by way of Ja i.140 (rājānaṃ: under the patronage of the k.); iv.137 (id.); ii.154 (tumhe); Mil 40 (kāyaṃ), 253 (id.); Pv-a 27 (ye = yesaṃ hetu), 154 (nadī˚ alongside of).

3. because of, on account of, by reason of, for the sake of Ja i.203 (amhe), 255 (dhanaṃ), 263 (maṃ); Pv-a 17 (kiṃ), 67 (namaṃ), 130 (taṃ) ■ Cp. nissaya, nissita.

ger. of nissayati, Sk. *niśrāya, BSk niśritya, ni + śri

Nissāra

(adj.) sapless, worthless, unsubstantial Ja i.393; Sdhp 51, Sdhp 608, Sdhp 612.

nis + sāra

Nissārajja

(adj.) without diffidence, not diffident, confident Ja i.274 (+ nibbhaya).

Sk. niḥ + śārada + ya

Nissāraṇa

(nt.) going or driving out, expulsion Mil 344 (osāraṇa-n ■ paṭisāraṇa), 357.

fr. nissarati

Nissita

(adj.) hanging on, dependent on, inhabiting; attached to, supported by, living by means of, relying on, being founded or rooted in, bent on As-˚ often in sense of a prep. = by means of, on account of, through, esp. with pron. kiṃ˚ (= why, through what Snp 458; taṃ˚ (therefore, on acct. of this) SN iv.102. For combn with var. synonyms see Nd ii.s. v. & cp. Nd;1 75, 106 ■ SN ii.17 (dvayaṃ; cp. iii.134); iv.59, 365 v.2 sq., 63 sq.; AN iii.128; Dhp 339 (rāga˚); Snp 752, Snp 798 Snp 910; Ja i.145; Nd i.283; Pv i.86 (sokaṃ hadaya˚ lying in) ii.66 (paṭhavi˚ supported by); Vb 229; Ne 39 (˚citta) Mil 314 (inhabiting); Pv-a 86 (māna˚) ■ anissita unsupported not attached, free, emancipated Snp 66, Snp 363 Snp 753, Snp 849, Snp 1069 (unaided); Ja i.158; Mil 320, Mil 351 ■ Cp apassita.

Sk. niśrita, pp. of nissayati, corresp. in meaning to Sk. āśrita

Nissitaka

(adj.-n.) adherent, supporter (orig. one who is supported by), pupil Ja i.142, Ja i.186; Dhp-a i.54.

fr. prec.

Nissitatta

(nt.) dependence on, i.e. interference by, being too near, nearness Vism 118 (pantha˚). Cp san˚.

fr. nissita

Nissirīka

(adj.) having lost his (or its) splendour or prosperity Ja vi.225 (ājīvika), 456 (rājabhavana).

nis + sirī

Nissīma

(adj.) outside the boundary Vin i.255 (˚ṭṭha), 298 (˚ṃ gantuṃ); ii.167 (˚e ṭhito).

cp. Sk. niḥsīman with diff. meanings (“boundless”), nis + sīma

Nissuta

(adj.) flown out or away, vanished, disappeared MN i.280.

fr. nis + sru, see savati

Nisseṇi

(f.) a ladder, a flight of stairs DN i.194, DN i.198; Ja i.53; Ja ii.315; Ja iii.505; Mil 263; Vism 244, Vism 340 (in simile); Dhp-a i.259.

fr. nis + śri, orig. that which leans against, or leads to something, cp. Sk. śreṇī a row

Nissesa

(adj.) whole, entire; nt. acc. as adv. nissesaṃ entirely, completely Nd ii.533.

nis + sesa

Nissoka

(adj.) free from sorrow, without grief, not mourning Pv-a 62; Kp-a 153.

nis + soka

Nihata

(adj.) “slain”; put down, settled; destroyed; dejected, humiliated; humble Vin ii.307 (settled); Ja v.435 (˚bhoga one whose fortunes are destroyed).

-māna “with slain pride,” humiliated, humble SN iv.203; Thig 413 (= apanīta-māna Thag-a 267); Ja ii.300 Ja vi.367.

pp. of nihanti, ni + han

Niharati

see nīharati.

Nihita

(adj.) put down, put into, applied, settled; laid down, given up renounced. As ˚-often in the sense of a prep. without, e.g. ˚daṇḍa ˚sattha without stick & sword (see daṇḍa… ) DN i.70 (˚paccāmitta); Pv iv.326 (su˚ well applied); Pv-a 252 (bhasma-nihita thrown into the ashes); Sdhp 311.

Sk. nihita, pp. of ni + dhā, see dahati

Nihīna

(adj.) lost; degraded, low, vile, base; inferior, little, insignificant SN i.12; Snp 890; Nd i.105, Nd i.194; Pv-a 198 (jāti˚ low-born) Sdhp 86. Opp. to seyya Ja vi.356 sq.

-attha one who has lost his fortune, poor Pv iv.15 -kamma of low action Snp 661 = Iti 43; Dhp 306; Ja ii.417 -citta low-minded Pv-a 107 (= dīna); -jātika of inferior birth or caste Pv-a 175; -pañña of inferior wisdom Snp 890 (= paritta-pañña Nd i.299); -sevin of vile pursuit AN i.126.

Sk. nihīna, pp. of nihīyati or nihāyati

Nihīnatā

(f.) lowness, inferiority; vileness, baseness DN i.98, DN i.99.

abstr. to nihīna

Nihīyati

to be left, to come to ruin, to be destroyed AN i.126 = Ja iii.324 (= vināsaṃ pāpuṇāti). pp. nihīna (q.v.).

ni + hīyati, Pass. of , see jahāti

Nihuhuṅka

(adj.) one who does not confide in the sound huṃ Vin i.3 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1901 42).

fr. nī˚; = nis + huhunka

Nīka

a kind of deer (or pig) Ja v.406 (vv.ll. nika, ninga).

Sk. nyanku? Doubtful reading

Nīgha

(in anīgha ) see nigha1.

Nīca

(adj.) low, inferior, humble (opp. ucca high, fr. adv. ud˚) Vin i.46, Vin i.47; Vin ii.194; DN i.109, DN i.179 DN i.194; AN v.82; Snp-a 424 (nīcaṃ karoti to degrade); passim.;

-kula of low clan Ja i.106; Snp 411 ■ (˚ā) kulīna belonging to low caste Snp 462; -cittatā being humble-hearted Dhs 1340; Dhs-a 395; -pīṭhaka a low stool Dhp-a iv.177 -mano humble Snp 252 (= nīcacitto Snp-a 293); -seyyā a low bed AN i.212 (opp. uccâsayana).

Vedic nīca, adj ■ formation fr. adv. ni˚, cp. Sk. nyañc downward

Nīceyya

(adj.) lower inferior, rather low MN i.329; Snp 855, Snp 918; Nd i.244, Nd i.351.

compar. of nīca (for ˚īya?), in function of ˚eyya as “of the kind of,” sort of, rather

Nīta

(pp.) led, guided; ascertained, inferred AN i.60 (˚attha); Ja i.262; Ja ii.215 (kāma˚); Ne 21 (˚attha natural meaning, i.e. the primarily inferred sense, opp neyyattha); Sdhp 366 (dun˚). Cp. vi˚.

pp. of neti

Nīti

(f.) guidance, practice, conduct, esp. right conduct, propriety; statesmanship, polity Pv-a 114 (˚mangala commonsense), 129 (˚sattha science of statecraft, or of prudent behaviour), 130 (˚cintaka a lawgiver), 131 (˚naya polity & law), 132 (˚kusala versed in the wisdom of life); Mil 3 (here meaning the Nyāyaphilosophy cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 58).

Sk. nīti, fr. nīta

Nīdha

= nu idha, see nu.

Nīdhura

(?) bracelet, bangle Ja vi.64, (= valaya; v.l. BB nivara). Also given as nīyura (cp Prk. neura & P. nūpura).;

Sk. ? Cp. keyura

Nīpa

(adj.) lit. lying low, deep, Name of the tree Nauclea cadamba, a species of Asoka tree Ja i.13 (v. 61) = Bv ii.51; Ja v.6 (so read for nipa).

Vedic nīpa, contr. fr. ni + āpa “low water”

Nībhata

bought out Ja iii.471.

cp. Sk. nirbhṛta, pp. of nis + bhṛ;

Nīyati

to be led or guided, to go, to be moved SN i.39 (cittena nīyati loko); Dhp 175; Pv i.111 (= vahīyati Pv-a 56); Ja i.264 (ppr. nīyamāna) Pv-a 4 (id.); Dhp-a iii.177; Sdhp 292, Sdhp 302. Also found in spelling niyyati at Snp 851; Nd i.223 (= yāyati vuyhati), 395 ■ In the sense of a Med. in imper nīyāmase (let us take) Pv ii.91 (= nayissāma Pv-a 113).

Sk. nīyati, Pass. of neti

Nīyāti

see niyyāti. Niyadita, Niyadeti

Nīyādita, Nīyādeti

see niyy˚.

Nīyānika

see niyy˚.

Nīraja

(adj.) free from passion Sdhp 370.

Sk. nīraja, nis + raja

Nīrava

(adj.) soundless, noiseless, silent DN-a i.153 (tuṇhī + ).

Sk. nīrava, nis + rava

Nīrasa

(adj.) sapless, dried up, withered, tasteless, insipid Ja iii.111.

Sk. nīrasa, nis + rasa

Nīruja

(adj.) = nīroga Sdhp 496.

Sk. nīruja, nis + rujā

Nīroga

(adj.) free from disease, healthy, well, unhurt Ja i.421; Ja iii.26; Ja iv.31; Pv-a 198 (ni˚). Cp. nīruja.

Sk. nīroga, nis + roga

Nīla

(adj.) dark-blue, blue-black blue-green. Nīla serves as a general term to designate the “coloured-black,” as opposed to the “colouredwhite” (pīta yellow), which pairs (nīla-pīta) are both set off against the “pure” colour-sensations of red (lohitaka) & white (odāta), besides the distinct black or dark (see kaṇha). Therefore n. has a fluctuating connotation (cp. Mrs. Rh. D.; Buddh. Psych. p. 49; Dhs. trsl. p. 62), its only standard combn being that with pīta, e.g. in the enumn of the ten kasiṇa practices (see kasiṇa): nīla pīta lohita odāta; in the description of the 5 colours of the Buddha’s eye: nīla pītaka lohitaka kaṇha odāta (Nd ii.235, Ia under cakkhumā); which goes even so far as to be used simply in the sense of “black & white,” e.g. Vv-a 320. Applied to hair (lomāni DN ii.144; MN ii.136. See further enumn at Vv-a 111 & under kaṇha ■ AN iii.239; AN iv.263 sq., 305, 349 v.61; Vism 110, Vism 156, Vism 173; Thag-a 42 (mahā˚ great blue lotus); Dhs 617; Pv ii.25; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 158; Sdhp 246 Sdhp 270, Sdhp 360.

-abbha a black cloud Pv iv.39. -abhijāti a dark (unfortunate) birth (cp. kaṇh˚) AN iii.383; -uppala blue lotus Ja iii.394; Vv 454 (= kuvalaya); Dhp-a i.384 -kasiṇa the “blue” kasiṇa (q.v.) DN iii.248; Dhs 203 (Vam 172 etc.; -gīva “blue neck,” a peacock Snp 221 = maṇi-daṇḍa-sadisāya gīvāya n. ti Snp-a 277); -pupphī Name of plant (“blue-blossom”) Ja vi.53; -bījaka a waterplant (“blue-seed”) Bdhgh at Vin iii.276; -maṇi a sapphire (“blue-stone”) Ja ii.112; Ja iv.140; Dhp-a iii.254 -vaṇṇa blue colour, coloured blue or green Ja iv.140 (of the ocean); Dhs 246.

Vedic nīla, perhaps conn. with Lat. nites to shine, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.

Nīlaka

(adj.) for nīla MN ii.201; see vi˚.

Nīliya

an (indigo) hair dye Ja iii.138 (Com. nīliyaka).

fr. nīlī

Nīlī

(f.) the indigo plant, indigo colour AN iii.230, AN iii.233.

Sk. nīlī

Nīḷa

a nest (Ja v.92): see niḍḍha: cp. ˚pacchi bird cage Ja ii.361; roga˚ Iti 37; vadharoga˚ Th i.1093.

Vedic nīḍa

Nīvaraṇa

(nt. occasionally m.) an obstacle, hindrance, only as tt. applied to obstacles in an ethical sense & usually enum;d or referred to in a set of 5 (as pañca nīvaraṇāni and p. āvaraṇāni), viz. kāmacchanda, (abhijjhā-)vyāpāda, thīna-middha, uddhaccakukkucca vicikicchā i.e. sensuality, ill-will, torpor of mind or body, worry, wavering (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 310) DN i.73 (˚e, acc. pl.), 246; ii.83, 300; iii.49 sq., 101, 234 278; SN ii.23; SN iii.149; SN v.60, SN v.84 sq., 93 sq., 145, 160, 226 327, 439; MN i.60, MN i.144, MN i.276; MN iii.4, MN iii.295; AN i.3, AN i.161 AN iii.16, AN iii.63, AN iii.230 sq.; 386; iv.457; v.16, 195, 322; Snp 17 Nd i.13; Nd ii.379; Pts i.31, Pts i.129, Pts i.163; Pp 68; Dhs 1059 Dhs 1136, Dhs 1495; Vb 199, Vb 244, Vb 378; Ne 11, Ne 13, Ne 94; Vism 146, Vism 189; DN-a i.213; Sdhp 459, Sdhp 493 and passim. Other enumns are occasionally found e.g. 10 at SN v.110 SN v.8 at MN i.360 sq.; 6 at Dhs 1152.

Sk. *nivāraṇa, nis + varaṇa of vṛ; (vṛṇoti), see nibbuta & cp. nivāraṇa

Nīvaraṇiya

(adj.) belonging to an obstacle, forming a hindrance, obstructing Dhs 584, Dhs 1164, Dhs 1488 Vb 12, Vb 30, Vb 66, Vb 130 etc.

fr. nīvaraṇa

Nīvāra

raw rice, paddy DN i.166; AN i.241, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55; Ja iii.144 (˚yāgu).

Sk. nīvāra, unexplained

Nīhaṭa

thrown out, removed; in f. abstr. ˚tā ejection, removal [cp. Sk. nirhṛti] Dhp-a iii.336 (malānaṃ n. the extirpation of impurity or removal of stain).

pp. of nīharati = Sk. nirhṛta

Nīharaṇa

(nt.) taking out, carrying away, removing DN-a i.296; Pv-a 7.

fr. nīharati

Nīharati

to take out, to throw out, drive out Ja i.150, Ja i.157; Ja iii.52; Ja vi.336; Nd ii.1997 (ni˚); Vv-a 222 Vv-a 256; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 254; Mil 8, Mil 219. aor. nīhari DN i.92; Ja i.293; Ja ii.154; Pv-a 41, Pv-a 178 (gehato taṃ n.). grd nīharitabba Dhp-a i.397 (opp. pavesetabba) ■ pp. nīhaṭa -Caus. nīharāpeti to have thrown out, to order to be ejected Vv-a 141.

nis + hṛ;

Nīhāra

way, manner Vin i.13; Ja i.127; Dhp-a iv.7. At Vin i.13 also in nīhāra-bhatta (= nīhāraka).

cp. Sk. nirhāra

Nīhāraka

(adj.-n.) one who carries away Vin i.13 (nīhāra-bhatta); SN v.12, SN v.320, SN v.325 (piṇḍapāta).

fr. nīhāra, cp. nīharaṇa

Nu

(indecl.) affirm ■ indef part. “then, now.”

1. most freq. combd with interr pron. and followed by kho, as kin nu kho Ja ii.159 kacci Ja i.279; kaccin nu (for kaccid nu) Ja ii.133 kathan nu (kho) Vin i.83; kattha Pv-a 22; etc.

2. as interr. part. (= Lat. ne, num) in enclitic position Vin i.17; Ja iii.52; Snp 866, Snp 871, Snp 1071; etc. As such also combd with na = nanu (Lat. nonne), which begins the sentence: Vin ii.303. (nanu tvaṃ vuḍḍho vīsativasso ‘sī ti?) Pv i.84; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 136 etc ■ Often combd with other emphatic or dubitative particles, like api nu Vin ii.303; DN i.97; nu idha, contr. to nīdha Vv 836 or with sandhi as nu-v-idha DN i.108 (v.l. nu khv idha). Cp. na1 nūna, no.

Ved. nu, Idg. *nu, orig. adv. of time = now; cp. Lat. num (to nunc, now), see nūna

Nuṭṭhubhati

see niṭṭhubhati. (aor. nuṭṭhubhi, e.g. Ja ii.105).

Nuda

(-˚) (adj.) expelling, casting out, dispelling; in tamo˚; dispelling darkness Snp 1133; Vv 352 (= viddhaṃsana Vv-a 161).

Sk. ˚nud & ˚nuda, to nudati

Nudaka

or Nūdaka (-˚) = nuda Ja v.401 (āsa-nūdaka).

Nudati

to push, impel; expel, drive away, reject Dhp 28; Ja iv.443; Dhp-a i.259. aor. nudi Nd ii.281. Cp apa˚, pa˚, vi˚ ■ pp. nunna (nuṇṇa). Nunna (nunna)

Vedic nudati; Idg. *(s)neu to push, cp. Sk. navate, Gr. νεύω & νύσσω, Lat. nuo; Ags. neosian, Low Ger. nucken

Nunna (nuṇṇa)

thrust, pushed, driven away, removed Nd ii.220 (ṇṇ) = khitta, cp. panuṇṇa AN ii.41.

pp. of nudati

Nūtana

(adj.) “of now,” i.e. recent, fresh, new Dāvs iv.47.

Vedic nūtana, adj ■ formation fr. adv. nū, cp. nūna. In formation cp. Sk. śvastana (of to-morrow) Lat. crastinus etc.

Nūna

(& nūnaṃ Dhs-a 164) (indecl.) affirmative-dubitative particle with Pot or Ind., viz. 1. (dubit ■ interrog.) is it then, now, shall I etc. (= Lat. subjunctive, hortative & dubitative DN i.155 (= Lat. num, cp. nu). Esp. freq. with rel pron. yaṃ = yaṃ nūna what if, shall I, let me (Lat. age Snp p.80 (yaṃ nūn’ âhaṃ puccheyyaṃ let me ask, I will ask); Ja i.150, Ja i.255; Ja iii.393; Pv-a 5 (y. n. âhaṃ imassa avassayo bhaveyyaṃ = let me help him).

2. (affirm. surely, certainly, indeed Snp 1058 (api nūna pajaheyyuṃ); AN v.194; Ja i.60; Ja v.90; Pv ii.924 (nuna) Mil 20; Dhs-a 164; Pv-a 95 (nuna as v.l.; text reads nanda).

Ved. nūnaṃ = Gr.; νύν, Lat. nunc (cp. num); Goth. nu, Ger. nun, cp. E. now See also nu

Nūpura

an ornament for the feet, an anklet Thig 268; DN-a i.50.

Sk. nūpura; Non-Aryan. Cp. Prk. ṇeura & nīdhura (nīyura)

Ne, Nesan

see na3.

Neka

(adj.) not one, several, many Snp 308; Vv 536 (˚citta variegated = nānāvidhacitta Vv-a 236), 641 (id. = anekacitta Vv-a 275); Tikp 366.

Sk. naika = na eka, cp. aneka

Nekatika

(adj.) deceitful, fraudulent; a cheat DN iii.183; Thag 940; Mil 290; Pv-a 209; Ja iv.184.

fr. nikati

Nekada

= anekadā (frequently).

Nekāyika

(adj.) versed in the 4 (or 5) Nikāyas Mil 22; cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut 142, 52.

fr. nikāya

Nekkha

a golden ornament, a certain coin of gold SN i.65; AN i.181; AN ii.8, AN ii.29; Dhp 230 (= Dhp-a iii.329 jambonada nikkha); Vism 48; v.l. at Vv 208, 438.

Vedic niṣka; cp. nikkha

Nekkhamma

(nt.) giving up the world leading a holy life, renunciation of, or emancipation from worldliness, freedom from lust, craving & desires, dispassionateness self-abnegation, Nibbāna Vin i.18 (˚e ānisaṃsa); DN i.110 (id.), iii.239, 275, 283; MN iii.129; AN i.147 (= khema, i.e. nibbāna); iii.245; iv.186 (ānisaṃsa), 439 sq.; Snp 424 (˚ṃ daṭṭhu khemato); Dhp 181; Pts i.107 sq.; Pts ii.169 sq.; Nd ii.370; Vism 116, Vism 325; Ja i.19; Ja i.137; Vv 8442 (= nibbāna Vv-a 348); Ne 53, Ne 87 Ne 106 sq.; Mil 285 (˚ṃ abhinikkhanta); Dhp-a iii.227 Thag-a 266.

-ādhimutta bent on self-abnegation (enumd with 5 other ideals of Arahantship: paviveka, avyāpajjha upādānakkhaya, taṇhakkhaya, asammoha) Vin i.183; AN iii.376; -ābhirata fond of renunciation AN iv.224 AN v.175; Pts ii.173; -dhātu the sphere or element of dispassionateness SN ii.152; Vb 86; Ne 97; Vism 487 -ninna merging into or bent on a holy life SN iii.233 -vitakka a thought of self-abnegation SN ii.152; AN i.275 AN ii.252; Iti 82; -saṅkappa = prec. SN ii.152; AN iii.146 Vb 104, Vb 235; -sita based or bent on a holy life (opp geha˚; q.v.) SN iv.232; -sukha the joy or happiness of Arahantship MN iii.110; AN i.80; Dhp 267, Dhp 272; Dhp-a iii.400.

formally a derivation fr. nikkhamma (ger. of nikkhamati) = Sk. *naiṣkramya, as shown also by its semantic affinity to nikkhanta, in which the metaphorical sense has entirely superseded the literal one. On the other hand, it may be a bastard derivation fr. nikkāma = Sk. *naiṣkāmya, although the adj. nikkāma does not show the prevailing meaning & the wide range of nikkhanta, moreover formally we should expect nekkamma. In any case the connection with; kāma is pre-eminently felt in the connotation of n., as shown by var. passages where a play of word exists between n & kāma (cp. kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yad idaṃ nekkhammaṃ Iti 61, cp. Vin i.104; AN iii.245; also MN i.115). The use of the similar term abhinikkhamana further warrants its derivation fr. nikkhamati

Negama

(adj.-n.) the inhabitant of a (small) town; citizen; also collect. = jana, people Vin i.268, Vin i.273; DN i.136, DN i.139; Ja iv.121; Ja vi.493; Dāvs iii.3; DN-a i.297 Often combd with ˚jānapadā (pl.) “townsmen & countryfolk” SN i.89; DN iii.148, DN iii.172; Ja 149.

fr. nigama

Necayika

(adj.) rich, wealthy DN i.136, DN i.142 (read nevāsika cp. naivasika Mvu iii.38); AN v.149 (v.l. BB nerayika, Com. nevāsiko ti nivāsakaro).

fr. nicaya

Netar

a leader, guide, forerunner Snp 86, Snp 213; Nd i.446.

Vedic netṛ, n. ag. of neti

Neti (nayati)

to lead, guide, conduct; to take, carry (away); fig. to draw a conclusion, to understand, to take as Dhp 80, Dhp 145, Dhp 240, Dhp 257; Ja i.228 Ja iv.241 (nayaṃ n. to draw a proper conclusion); Vv-a 42 (narati = nayati); imper. naya Pv ii.113, & nehi Ja ii.160; Pv-a 147; poetic imper. nayāhi see in paṭi˚; pot. naye Dhp 256 (to lead a cause = vinicchineyya Dhp-a iii.381) fut. nessāmi Ja ii.159; Pv ii.45; aor. nayi Ja iv.137. ger netvā Pv-a 5, Pv-a 6, etc. inf. netuṃ Pv-a 123, Pv-a 145 (˚kāma) & netave; Ja i.79 = Dhp 180. grd. neyya (see sep.), pp nīta. Pass. nīyati (q.v.). Cp. naya, nīti, netta etc. also ā˚, upa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚.

Vedic nayati,

Netta1

a guide Ja iii.111; Nett. 130.

Sk. netra, fr. neti

Netta2

(nt.) guidance, anything that guides, a conductor, fig. the eye. SN i.26 (sārathī nettāni gahetvā = the reins); Vin i.204 (dhūma˚ for smoke); Ja iv.363 (id.); DN i.12 (˚tappana, set t. & cp. DN-a i.98); Snp 550 (pasanna˚), 1120; Nd ii.371 (= cakkhu), 669; Ja vi.290 (tamba˚ with red eyes); Pv i.83 (eyes = nayanāni Com.) Dhs 597; Vb 71 sq.

Sk. netra

Netti

(f.) a guide, conductor; support (= nettika2) Iti 37 (āhāra˚-pabhava), 38 (bhava˚) 94 (netticchinna bhikkhu = Arahant). Cp. nettika2 dhamma˚, bhava˚.;

Vedic netrī, f. to netṛ

Nettiṃsa

a sword Ja ii.77 (˚vara-dhārin; C. nettiṃsā vuccanti khaggā); iv.118 (C. gives it as adj. = nikkaruṇa merciless; & says “khaggassa nāmaṃ”); vi.188 (˚varadhārin).

cp. Sk. nistriṃśa, Halāyudha 2, 317; very doubtful, whether nis + triṃśa (thirty), prob. a dial distortion

Nettika

(adj.-n.) 1. having as guide or forerunner, in Bhagavaṃ˚’ dhamma MN i.310; AN i.199 AN iv.158, AN iv.351; AN v.355.

2. a conduit for irrigation; one who makes conduits for watering Dhp 80 (= udakaṃ nenti nettikā), 145; fig. that which supplies with food or water, in bhava˚; (“the roots of existence, clinging to existence”) DN i.46 (ucchinna˚ with the roots of existence cut); sanettika clinging to existence, a bad man AN ii.54. Cp. netti.

netta + ika

Netthar

only in phrase netthāraṃ vattati to behave in such a way as to get rid of blame or fault Vin ii.5; Vin iii.183; MN i.442 ■ Bdhgh on Vin ii.5 (p. 309) explains: nittharantānaṃ etan ti netthāraṃ yena sakkā nissāraṇā nittharituṃ taṃ aṭṭhārasa-vidhaṃ sammāvattuṃ vattantī ti attho.

see nittharati; does any connection exist with Vedic neṣṭṛ?

Nepakka

(nt.) prudence, discrimination, carefulness; usually as sati˚; SN v.197 sq.; MN i.356; AN iii.11 AN iv.15; Nd ii.629 B; Vb 244, Vb 249; Vism 3 (= paññā) Dhp-a iv.29.

fr. nipaka

Nepuñña

(nt.) experience, skill, cleverness Pp 25, Pp 35; Dhs 16, Dhs 292; Dhs-a 147.

fr. nipuṇa

Nema

edge, point; root SN v.445; AN iv.404; gambhīra˚; (adj.) with deeply rooted point, firmly established SN v.444; AN iv.106.

cp. nemi

Nemantaṇika

(adj.) one who lives by invitations MN i.31.

fr. nimantana

Nemi

(f.) the circumference of a wheel, circumference, rim, edge (cp. nema AN i.112; Vv 645; Mil 238, Mil 285; Vism 198 (fig. jarāmaraṇa˚ the rim of old age & death, which belongs to the wheel of Saṃsāra of the chariot of existence, bhavaratha); Dhp-a ii.124 (˚vaṭṭi); Vv-a 277.

Vedic nemi, perhaps to namati

Nemitta

a fortune-teller, astrologer DN ii.16, DN ii.19; AN iii.243.

Sk. naimitta, fr. nimitti

Nemittaka & Nemittika

an astrologer, fortune-teller, soothsayer DN i.8 (i) = DN-a i.91; AN iii.111; Ja iv.124; Mil 19 (i), 229; Vism 210 (i); Dhp-a ii.241 (a).

Sk. naimittika, fr. nimitta

Nemittikatā

(f.) = nimitta-kammaṃ, i.e. prognostication; inquisitiveness, insinuation Vb 352 = Vism 23; expld at Vism 28.

abstr. fr. nemittika

Nemiya

(adj.) (-˚) having a circumference etc. Ja vi.252.

= nemika

Neyya

(adj.) to be led, carried etc.; fig. to be instructed; to be inferred, guessed or understood Snp 55, Snp 803, Snp 846, Snp 1113; Nd i.114, Nd i.206; Nd ii.372; Pp 41; Ne 9 sq., 125; -attha the meaning which is to be inferred (opp. nītattha) AN i.60; Ne 21.

grd. of neti; Sk. neya

Nerayika

(adj.) belonging to niraya or purgatory, hellish; one doomed to suffering in purgatory (n. satta = inhabitant of n. Vin ii.205 (āpāyiko n. kappaṭṭho); iv.7; DN iii.6, DN iii.9, DN iii.12; AN i.265; AN ii.231 (vedanaṃ vediyati… seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); iii.402 sq.; Snp 664; Nd i.97 (gati) Vv 521, Ja iv.3 (sattā); Pp 51; Vb 412 sq.; Vism 415 (˚sattā), 424; Mil 148 (sattā); Pv-a 27 (id.), 52 (˚bhāva) 255; Vv-a 23; Sdhp 193, Sdhp 198.

fr. niraya, cp. BSk. nairayika Divy 165

Nerutta

(adj.-n.) based on etymology; an etymologist or philologist Thag-a 153; Ne 8, Ne 9, Ne 32, Ne 33.

fr. nirutti

Neḷa

(& Nela) (adj.) 1. without fault or sin blameless, faultless; not hurting, humane, gentle merciful, innocuous DN i.4 (Bdhgh explains: elaṃ vuccati doso; n’ assā (i.e. vācāya) elan ti nelā; niddosā ti attho. “Nelango setapacchādo” ti ettha vuttanelaṃ viya; DN-a i.75); AN ii.209; AN v.205; Ja v.156; Vv 5018, 636 (= niddosa Vv-a 262); Pp 29, Pp 57; Dhs 1343 (vācā) = niddosa Dhs-a 397.

2. (somewhat doubtful “clean,” with ref. to big cats (mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṃ vuccati), whereas young ones are called “elephants, cubs” (something like “pigs”) (taruṇā bhinka-cchāpamaṇḍalaṃ) Ja v.418.

-aṅga of faultless limbs or parts, of a chariot (ratha = running perfectly SN iv.291 = Ud 76 (nelagga text nelanga v.l.) = DN-a i.75 = Dhs-a 397. -patī (f.) = neḷavatī (of vācā) humane, gentle Ja vi.558 (na elapatī elapāta-rahitā madhurā Com.).

na + eḷa = Sk. anenas, of enas fault, sin. The other negated form, also in meaning “pure clean,” is aneḷa (& aneḷaka), q.v. On ḷ: n. cp. lāngala nangala; tulā: tūṇa etc.

Neva

(indecl.) see na2 ■ nevasaññā-nâsañña (being) neither perception nor non-perception, only in cpd. ˚āyatana & in nevasaññī-nâsaññin: see saññā.;

na + eva

Nevāpika

(adj.-n.) a deer-feeder MN i.150 sq.

fr. nivāpa

Nevāsika

(adj.) one who inhabits, an inmate; living in a place, local Ja i.236 sq.; Dhp-a ii.53 sq. Cp. necayika.

fr. nivāsa, cp. BSk. naivāsika AvS i.286, 287

Nesajjika

(adj.) being & remaining in a sitting position (as an ascetic practice) AN iii.220; Thag 904 Thag 1120; Nd ii.587; Ja iv.8; Pp 69; Vism 79; Mil 20, Mil 342. The n-˚aṅga is one of the dhūtanga-precepts, enjoining the sitting posture also for sleeping, see Vin v.193, Vism 61, & dhūtanga.;

fr. nisajjā

Nesāda

a hunter; also a low caste Vin iv.7 (+ veṇa & rathakāra); SN i.93 (˚kula); AN i.107; AN ii.85; Ja ii.36 Ja iii.330; Ja iv.397, Ja iv.413; Ja v.110, Ja v.337; Ja vi.71; Pp 51 (˚kula) Mil 311; Dhp-a iii.24; Pv-a 176.

fr. nisāda; cp. Sk. niṣāda & naiṣāda = one who lies in wait

No1

(indecl.) affirm. & emphatic part. = ; nu (cp. na1): indeed, then, now Snp 457, Snp 875, Snp 1077; Ja v.343 (api no api nu), 435 (= nipātamattaṃ p. 437).

No2

(indecl.) [Sk. no = na + u, a stronger na; cp. na2) negative & adversative particle = neither, nor, but not surely not, indeed not ■ (a) in neg. sentences: Snp 852, Snp 855, Snp 1040; Iti 103 (but not); Pv ii.313 (but not) as answer: no hi etaṃ “indeed not, no indeed” Vin i.17; DN i.3; no hi idaṃ DN i.105 ■ no ca kho “but surely not” DN i.34, DN i.36; AN v.195 ■ Often emphasized by na, as no na not at all Ja i.64; na no Snp 224 (= “avadhāraṇe” Kp-a 170); disjunctively na hi… no neither-nor Snp 813; na no… na neither-nor (notnor) Snp 455 ■ (b) in disjunctive questions: “or not”, as evaṃ hoti vā… no vā (is it so-or not) DN i.61, DN i.227 kacci… no (is it so-or not; Lat. ne-annon) DN i.107 nu kho… no udāhu (is it that-or not; or rather DN i.152 ■ (c) noce (no ce = Sk. no ced) if not (opp sace) Snp 348, Snp 691, Snp 840; Ja i.222; Ja vi.365; Vv-a 69. Also in sense of “I hope not” Ja v.378.

No3

enclitic form, gen. dat. acc. pl. of pron. 1st (we) = amhākaṃ, see vayaṃ; cp. na3.

Sk. naḥ

Nodeti

see vi˚.

fr. nud

Nonīta

see navanīta.

Nhāru

see nahāru. Found e.g. at Vin i.25.

P.

P

Pa˚

(indecl.) directional prefix of forward motion, in applied sense often emphasising the action as carried on in a marked degree or even beyond its mark (cp. Ger. ver-in its function of Goth. fra Ger. vor). Thus the sphere of pa-may be characterised in foll. applications: 1. forth, forward, out: papatati fall forward, i.e. down; ˚neti bring forth (to); ˚gaṇhāti hold out; ˚tharati spread forth; ˚dhāvati run out ˚bajati go forth; ˚sāreti stretch out; etc.

2. (intensive in a marked degree, more than ordinarily (cp. E. up in cut up, heap up, fill up; thus often to be trsld by “up,” or “out,” or “about”): pakopeti up-set ˚chindati cut up; ˚bhañjati break up; ˚cinati heap up ˚kiṇṇaka scattered about; ˚nāda shouting out; ˚bhāti shine forth; ˚bhavati grow up, prevail; ˚dūseti spoil entirely; ˚jahati give up entirely; ˚tapeti make shine exceedingly (C. ativiya dīpeti); ˚jalati blaze up; ˚jānāti know well ■ In this meaning often with adjectives like patanu very thin; ˚thaddha quite stiff; ˚dakkhiṇa right in pre-eminence; ˚bala very strong.

3. “onward”

paṭṭhāya from… onward; pavattati move on; fig “further, later”: paputta a later (secondary) son, i.e. grandson.

4. “in front of,” “before”: padvāra before the door.

5. Sometimes in trs. (reflexive) use like pakūjin singing out to (each other, cp Ger. besingen an-rufen) ■ The most frequent combination with other (modifying) prefixes is sam-ppa; its closest relatives (in meaning 2 especially) are ā and pari. The double (assimilation) p is restored after short vowels, like appadhaṃsiya (a + pa˚).

Ved. pra, Idg. *pro, cp. Gr. πρό, Lat. pro, Goth. fra, Lith. pra, prō, Oir. ro-

˚Pa

(adj.) drinking; only in foll. cpds. dhenu˚ drinking of the cow, suckling calf MN i.79; Snp 26 (= dhenuṃ pivanto Snp-a 39);- pāda˚; a tree (lit. drinking with its feet, cp. expln at Pv-a 251 “pādasadisehi mūl âvayavehi udakassa pivanato pādapo ti”) Pv iv.39- majja˚; drinking intoxicants Snp 400; Pv iv.177 (a˚).

Cp. Ved. ˚pa, adj. base of to drink, as ˚ga fr. gam or ˚ṭha fr. sthā

Paṃsu

dust, dirt, soil SN v.459; AN i.253; Pv ii.37paṃsvāgārakā playmates SN iii.190; saha paṃsukīḷitā id. (lit. playing together with mud, making mud pies) AN ii.186; Ja i.364; Pv-a 30. Cp. BSk sahapāṃśukrīḍita Mvu iii.450.

-kūla rags from a dust heap (cp. Vin. Texts ii.156; Vin i.58; MN i.78; SN ii.202; AN i.240, AN i.295; AN ii.206; AN iv.230; Iti 102 = AN ii.26; Dhp 395; Pp 69; Pv-a 141, Pv-a 144. A quâsi definition of p ■ k. is to be found at Vism 60 -kūlika one who wears clothes made of rags taken from a dust heap MN i.30; SN ii.187; AN iii.187, AN iii.219, AN iii.371 sq. Vin iii.15; Vin iv.360; Ud 42; Pp 55; Dhp-a iv.157 ˚attan (nt. abstr.) the habit of wearing rags MN i.214 MN iii.41; AN i.38; AN iii.108. -guṇṭhita (vv.ll. ˚kuṇḍita ˚kuṇṭhita) covered with dust or dirt SN i.197; Ja vi.559; Pv ii.35pisācaka a mud sprite (some sort of demon) Ja iii.147; Ja iv.380; Dhp-a ii.26. -muṭṭhi a handful of soil Ja vi.405. -vappa sowing on light soil (opp. kalalavappa sowing on heavy soil or mud Snp-a 137.

cp. Ved. pāṃsu

Paṃsuka

(adj.) dusty; (m.) a dusty robe Kp-a 171 (v.l. paṃsukūla).

Epic Sk. pāṃśuka; Ved. pāṃsura

Pakaṭṭhaka

(adj.) troublesome, annoying; (m.) a troubler worrier SN i.174 (v.l. pagaṇḍaka; C. rasagiddha; trsl “pertinacious”).

pa + kaṭṭha + ka; kaṭṭha pp. of kṛṣ, cp. Sk. prakarṣaka of same root in same meaning, but cp. also kaṭṭha2

Pakaṭṭhita

see pakk˚.

Pakata

done, made; as-˚ by nature (cp. pakati) Snp 286; Ja iv.38; Pv i.68; ii.316; iii.105 (pāpaṃ samācaritaṃ Pv-a 214); Mil 218; Dhp-a ii.11 (pāpaṃ) Pv-a 31, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 103 (ṭ), 124 ■ icchāpakata covetous by nature AN iii.119, AN iii.219 sq.; Pp 69; Vism 24 (here however taken by Bdhgh as “icchāya apakata” or “upadduta”) issāpakata envious by nature SN ii.260; Pv-a 46, cp macchariyā pakata afflicted with selfishness Pv-a 124 On pakata at Iti 89 see apakatapakatatta (pakata attan) natural, of a natural self, of good behaviour incorrupt, “integer” Vin ii.6, Vin ii.33, Vin ii.204; Ja i.236 (bhikkhu, + sīlavā, etc.). At Vin ii.32 the pakatatta bhikkhu as the regular, ordained monk is contrasted with the pārivāsika bh. or probationer.

pp. of pa + kṛ;

Pakati

(f.) 1. original or natural form, natural state or condition (lit. make-up); as ˚- = primary original, real Vin. i.189; ii.113; Ja i.146 (˚vesena in her usual dress); Kp-a 173 (˚kammakara, ˚jeṭṭhaputta) Vv-a 12 (˚pabhassara), 109 (˚bhaddatā) ■ instr. pakatiyā by nature, ordinarily, as usual Pts ii.208; Vv-a 78; Pv-a 215, Pv-a 263.

2. occasion, happening, opportunity (common) occurrence DN i.168 (trsl. “common saying”) Pv ii.89 (= ˚pavutti Pv-a 110) ■ Der. pakatika pākatika.;

-upanissaya sufficing condition in nature: see Cpd. 194 n. 3 ■ gamana natural or usual walk Dhp-a i.389 -citta ordinary or normal consciousness Kv 615 (cp Kvu trsl. 359 n. 5, and BSk. prakṛti-nirvāṇatva Bodhicary at Poussin 256). -yānaka ordinary vehicle Dhp-a i.391. -sīla natural or proper virtue DN-a i.290.

cp. Ved. prakṛti

Pakatika

(adj.) being by nature, of a certain nature Ja ii.30; Mil 220; DN-a i.198; Pv-a 242 (= rūpa) Dhs-a 404.

fr. pakati

Pakattheti

talk out against, denounce Ja v.7 (mā ˚katthāsi; C. akkosi garahi nindi; gloss paccakkhāsi). Should it be ‘pakaḍḍhāsi?

pa + kattheti

Pakappanā

(f.) fixing one’s attention on, planning, designing, scheme, arrangement Snp 945 (cp Nd i.72 Nd i.186, where two pakappanā’s, viz. taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚; at Nd i.429 it is synonymous with taṇhā Bdhgh has reading pakampana for ˚kapp˚ and expld by kampa-karaṇa Snp-a 568).

fr. pakappeti

Pakappita

arranged, planned, attended to, designed, made Snp 648 (= kata Snp-a 471). 784, 786 (diṭṭhi “prejudiced view” Fausböll; cp. Nd i.72 and pakappanā), 802, 838 (= kappita abhisankhata saṇṭhapita Nd i.186), 902, 910.

pp. of pakappeti

Pakappeṭi

to arrange, fix, settle, prepare, determine, plan SN ii.65 (ceteti p. anuseti); Snp 886 (pakappayitvā = takkayitvā vitakkayitvā saṃkappayitvā Nd i.295) ■ pp. pakappita (q.v.).

pra + Caus. of kḷp, cp. Ved. prakalpayitar

Pakampati

to shake, quake, tremble Ja i.47 (v. 269); Pv-a 199 ■ Caus. pakampeti SN i.107.

pa + kampati. Cp. BSk. prakampati Jtm 220; Mptp. 151 = kampati.

Pakampana

see pakappanā.

Pakampita

shaken, trembling SN i.133 = Thig 200.

pp. of pa + kamp

Pakaraṇa

(nt.) 1. performance, undertaking paragraph (of the law) DN i.98 (“offence”? see Dial. i.120); SN iii.91; Mil 189.

2. occasion Vin i.44 Vin ii.75; Vin iii.20.

3. exposition, arrangement, literary work, composition, book; usually in titles only, viz Abhidhamma˚ Ja i.312; Dpvs v.37; Kathāvatthu Paṭṭhāna˚ Mil 12; Netti˚ one of the Canonical books (see netti).

fr. pa + kṛ;

Pakaroti

to effect, perform, prepare, make, do SN i.24 (pakubbati); Snp 254 (id.) 781, 790 (ppr. med. pakubbamāna; cp. Nd i.65); Iti 21 (puññaṃ); Snp-a 169 (pakurute, corresponding with sevati) ■ pp. pakata (q.v.).

pa + kṛ; Ved. prakaroti

Pakāra

1. make-up, getting up, fixing, arrangement, preparation mode, way, manner Ja ii.222; DN-a i.132; Pv-a 26 Pv-a 109, Pv-a 123, Pv-a 135, Pv-a 178, Pv-a 199; Sdhp 94, Sdhp 466.

2. ingredient flavour, way of making (a food) tasty Snp 241 (kathappakāro tava āmagandho); Mil 63.

3. (-˚) of a kind by way of, in nānā˚; (adj.) various, manifold Ja i.52 (sakuṇā), 278 (phalāni); Pv-a 50; vutta˚; as said, the said Vism 42, Vism 44; Pv-a 136.

pa + kṛ; cp. last; but Sk. prakāra “similarity”

Pakāraka

(-˚) (adj.) of that kind SN ii.81; Ja vi.259.

fr. pakāra

Pakāreti

to direct one’s thought towards (dat.) Ja vi.307.

Denom. fr. pakāra

Pakāsati

to shine forth, to be visible, to become known Snp 445, Snp 1032 (= bhāsati tapati virocati Nd ii.373) ■ Caus. pakāseti to show up, illustrate, explain make known, give information about Vin ii.189; SN i.105; Iti 111 (brahmacariyaṃ); Dhp 304; Snp 578, Snp 1021 Pp 57; Ja vi.281 (atthaṃ to explain the meaning or matter); Dhp-a ii.11 (id.); Pv-a 1, Pv-a 12 (ānisaṃsaṃ) 29 (atthaṃ upamāhi), 32 (attānaṃ), 40 (adhippāyaṃ), 42 (saccāni) 72 etc ■ grd. pakāsaniya to be made known or announced in ˚kamma explanation, information annunciation Vin ii.189 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.239) ■ pp pakāsita (q.v.).

pa + kāś

Pakāsana

(nt.) explaining, making known; information, evidence, explanation, publicity Pts i.104 (dhamma˚); Mil 95; Snp-a 445; Pv-a 2, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 103 (expln of āvi).

pa + kāś, cp. pakāsati

Pakāsita

explained, manifested, made known SN i.161, SN i.171 sq.; SN ii.107 (su˚); Pv-a 53, Pv-a 63.

pp. of pakāseti

Pakiṇāti

to deal in Vin ii.267 (grd. ˚kiṇitabba).

pa + kiṇāti

Pakiṇṇaka

(adj.) scattered about; fig. miscellaneous, particular, opp. to sādhāraṇa Kp-a 74; cp. Cpd. 13, 952; Vism 175 (˚kathā) 317 sq. (id.) ■ As Np. name of the xivth book of the Jātakas.

pa + kiṇṇa (pp. of kirati) + ka

Pakitteti

to proclaim Ja i.17 (v. 85).

pa + kitteti

Pakirati

1. to let down (the hair), scatter, let fall DN ii.139 = DN ii.148 (ger. pakiriya); Ja v.203 (so read for parikati); vi.207 (aor ˚kiriṃsu) ■ ger. pakira (= pakiritvā) Ja vi.100 (read pakira-cārī, cp. C. on p. 102), 198 (read p ■ parī) ■ Caus. pakireti 1. to throw down upset Vin iv.308 (thūpaṃ); SN i.100; Iti 90 (v.l. kīrati)

2. to scatter SN i.100 = Iti 66; Pp 23 ■ pp. pakiṇṇa (see ˚ka).

pa + kirati

Pakiledeti

to make wet, moisten (with hot water) Ja vi.109 (= temetvā khipati C.).

Caus of pa + kliś, cp. kelideti

Pakujjhati

to be angry SN i.221, SN i.223 (˚eyyaṃ).

pa + krudh

Pakuṭa

(?) an inner verandah Vin ii.153; cp. Vin. Texts iii.175 ■ Kern. Toev. s. v. expld it as miswriting for pakuṭṭha (= Sk. prakoṣṭha an inner court in a building, Prk. paoṭṭha, cp. P. koṭṭha1 & koṭṭhaka;1) Spelling pakulla at Nd ii.485 B (for magga, v.l. makula).

v.l. pakuṭṭa

Pakuppati

to be angry Ja iv.241.

pa + kup

Pakubb˚

see pakaroti.

Pakūjin

(adj.) to sing out to (each other) (aññamaññaṃ) Ja vi.538.

pa + kūj

Pakopa

agitation, effervescence, anger, fury Dhs 1060; Vism 235, Vism 236.

pa + kopa

Pakopana

(adj.) shaking, upsetting, making turbulent Iti 84 (moho citta-pakopano).

pa + kopana, of kup

Pakka

(adj.) [Ved. pakva, a pp. formation of pac to cook, Idg. *peqṷo = Lat. coquo “cook,” Av. pac-, Obulg pekaͅ, Lith. kepû, Gr. πέσσω, ἀρτοκόπος baker, πέπων ripe; also pp. of pacati pakta = Gr. πεπτός, Lat. coctus 1. ripe (opp. āma raw, as Vedic,; and apakka) and also “cooked, boiled, baked” SN i.97 (opp. āmaka); iv.324 (˚bhikkhā); Snp 576; Ja v.286 ■ nt. pakkaṃ that which is ripe, i.e. a fruit, ripe fruit Pp 44, Pp 45; often in connection with amba˚ i.e. a (ripe) mango fruit Ja ii.104 Ja ii.394; Pv iv.123; Dhp-a iii.207; Pv-a 187 ■ apakka unripe PugA 225; Sdhp 102.

2. ripe for destruction overripe, decaying, in phrase ˚gatta (adj.) having a decaying body, with putrid body [BSk. pakvagātra Divy 82], combd with arugatta at MN i.506; SN iv.198; Mil 357 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.262), 395.

3. heated, glowing Dpvs i.62.

-āsaya receptacle for digested food, i.e. the abdomen (opp. āmāsaya) Vism 260, Vism 358; Kp-a 59. -odana (adj. having cooked one’s rice Snp 18 (= siddhabhatta Snp-a 27), cp. Ja iii.425. -jjhāna “guessing at ripeness,” i.e. foretelling the number of years a man has yet to live in list of forbidden crafts at DN i.9, expld at DN-a i.94 as “paripāka-gata-cintā.” -pakka ripe fruit Kp-a 59 -pūva baked cake Ja iii.10. -vaṇṇin of ripe appearance Pp 44, Pp 45, cp. PugA 225. -sadisa ripe-like, appearing ripe PugA 225.

Pakkaṭhati

to cook, boil up; only in Caus. II. pakkaṭṭhāpeti (with unexpld ṭṭh for ṭh to cause to be boiled up Ja i.472 (v.l. pakkuṭṭh˚, cp J.P.T.S. 1884, 84) ■ pp. pakkaṭhita (q.v.). Pakkathita (pakkuthita)

pa + kaṭhati of kvath

Pakkaṭhita (pakkuthita)

cooked up, boiled, boiling hot, hot Thūpavaṃsa 4833; Ja v.268 (pakaṭṭh˚ vv.ll. pakkudh & jakankaṭhi); vi.112 (˚kaṭṭh˚), 114 (id.; v.l. BB ˚kuṭhita); Dhp-a i.126 (kaṭṭh˚, v.l. pakkanta), 179 (kaṭṭh˚, v.l. pakuṭṭh˚); ii.5 (kaṭṭh˚, vv.ll. pakuṭṭh & pakkuth˚); iii.310 (1st passage kaṭṭh˚, v.l. pakuṭṭh˚ pakkuṭṭh˚, pakkuthita; = pakkuṭṭhita at id. p. Vv-a 67 in 2nd passage kaṭṭh˚, v.l. pakuṭṭh˚ & pakkuthita, left out at id. p. Vv-a 68); Thag-a 292 (pakkuthita).

also spelt with ṭṭh instead of ṭh or th, perhaps through popular etym. pakka + ṭṭhita for pa + kaṭhita. To kvath, P. kuthati & kaṭhati, appearing in pp. as kaṭhita, kuthita, kaṭṭhita and kuṭṭhita, cp Geiger,; P.Gr. § 42

Pakkaṭṭhī

(f.) a boiling (-hot) mixture (of oil?) MN i.87, expld by C. as katita-(= kaṭh˚ gomaya, boiling cow-dung, v.l. chakaṇakā see p. 537. The id. p. at Nd ii.199 reads chakaṇaṭī, evidently a bona fide reading. The interpretation as “cow-dung” is more likely than “boiling oil.”

fr. pa + kvat, evidently as abstr. to pakkaṭṭhita; reading uncertain

Pakkanta

gone, gone away, departed SN i.153; Snp p.124; Ja i.202 (spelt kkh); Pv-a 78.

pp. of pakkamati

Pakkandati

to cry out, shout out, wail Snp 310 (3rd pret. pakkanduṃ ) Ja vi.55 (id.), 188 (id.), 301 (id.).

Ved. prakrandati, pra + krand

Pakkama

going to, undertaking, beginning DN i.168 (tapo˚; trsl. “all kinds of penance”).

fr. pa + kram

Pakkamati

1. to step forward, set out, go on, go away, go forth MN i.105 Pp 58; DN-a i.94; Pv-a 13 ■ pret. 3 sg. pakkāmi SN i.92, SN i.120; Snp p.. 93, 124; Pv-a 5 (uṭṭhāy’āsanā), 19 (id.); 3rd pl. pakkamuṃ Snp 1010, and pakkamiṃsu SN i.199 ■ pp. pakkanta (q.v.).

2. to go beyond (in archery), to overshoot the mark, miss the aim Mil 250.

Ved. prakramati, pra + kram

Pakkava

a kind of medicinal plant Vin i.201 (cp. paggava).

etym. ?

Pakkula

see pākula.

Pakkosati

to call, summon Ja i.50; Ja ii.69, Ja ii.252 (= avheti); v.297; vi.420; Dhp-a i.50; Pv-a 81 (v.l. ˚āpeti) ■ Caus. II. pakkosāpeti to call, send for order to come Ja i.207; Pv-a 141, Pv-a 153; Dhp-a i.185.

pa + kosati, kruś

Pakkha1

1. side of the body, flank wing, feathers (cp. pakkhin), in cpds. ˚biḷāla a flying fox (sort of bat) Bdhgh on ulūka-camma at Vin i.186 (MV. v.2, 4; cp. Vin. Texts ii.16 where read ulūka˚ for lūka?); Ja vi.538; and ˚hata one who is struck on (one side, i.e. paralysed on one side, a cripple (cp. Sk pakṣāghāta) Vin ii.90; MN iii.169; AN iii.385; Pp 51 (= hatapakkho pīṭhasappi PugA 227); Mil 245, Mil 276 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.62, 117)-also as wing of a house at Dhs-a 107; and wing of a bird at SN ii.231; Snp-a 465 (in expln of pakkhin).

2. side, party, faction; adj (-˚ associated with, a partisan, adherent Vin ii.299; Snp 347 (aññāṇa˚), 967 (kaṇhassa p. = Māra˚ etc., see Nd i.489; Ne 53 (taṇhā˚ & diṭṭhi˚) 88 (id.), 160 (id.) DN-a i.281; Dhp-a i.54; Pv-a 114 (paṭiloma˚). pakkhasankanta gone over to a (schismatic) faction Vin i.60 Vin iv.230, Vin iv.313 ■ pakkhaṃ dāpeti to give a side, to adhere to (loc.) Ja i.343.

3. one half of the (lunar) month, a fortnight. The light or moon-lit fortnight is called sukka-pakkha (or juṇha˚), the dark or moonless one kāḷa˚ (or kaṇha˚) MN i.20 (cātuddasī pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca pakkhassa 14th, 15th & 8;th day of the fortnight) Snp 402; AN i.142 (aṭṭhamī pakkhassa), 144 = Vv 156 (cātuddasī etc.; cp. Vv-a 71): AN v.123 sq. (kāḷa˚, juṇha˚) Thig 423 (= aḍḍhamāsa-mattaṃ Thag-a 269); Pv ii.955 (bahumāse ca pakkhe ca = kaṇha-sukka-bheda p. Pv-a 135); Vism 101 (dasâhaṃ vā pakkhaṃ vā); Vv-a 314 (sukka˚); Pv-a 55 (kāḷa˚).

4. alternative, statement loc. pakkhe (-˚) with regard or reference to Kp-a 80 (tassa pañhassa vyākaraṇapakkhe); Snp-a 168 (id.).

Ved. pakṣa in meanings 1 and 3; to Lat. pectus, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.

Pakkha2

(adj.) visible, clear ■ ˚ resembling, like Mil 75 (mātu˚ and pitu˚).

cp. Ved. prakhya clear, & Sk. (-˚) prakhya like, of pra + ; khyā

Pakkha3

a cripple. Cp iii.6, Cp iii.10; Ja vi.12 (= pīṭha-sappī C.). Note BSk. phakka is enumd at Mpt. 271120 with jātyaṇḍa, kuṇḍa pangu, reminding of the comb;n kāṇo vā kuṇi vā khañjo vā pakkhahato vā Vin ii.90 = SN i.94 = AN ii.85 AN iii.385. = Pp 51.

cp. Sk. phakka (?)

Pakkhaka

(& ˚ika) (nt.?) a dress made of wings or feathers, in cpd. ulūka˚ of owl’s wings (see ulūka˚) Vin iii.34 (˚ṃ nivāsetvā); AN ii.206 ≈ (˚ika).

fr. pakkha1

Pakkhatta

(nt.) being a partner of, siding in with Vism 129, Vism 130.

fr. pakkha1

Pakkhanta

at DN-a i.38 read as pakkanta.

Pakkhandaka

(adj.) = pakkhandin Snp-a 164 ■ f. pakkhandikā [Ved. (?) praskandikā, BR. without refs. diarrhoea, dysentery DN ii.127 (lohita˚); Ja iii.143; Ja v.441 (lohita˚); Mil 134.

Pakkhandati

to spring forward, to jump on to MN i.86; Ja i.461; Vv 8412 (ger. pakkhandiyāna = pakkhanditvā anupavisitvā Vv-a 338); to be after someone in pursuit Dhp-a i.198; usually fig. to rejoice in, find pleasure or satisfaction in (loc.), to take to, in phrases cittaṃ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati MN i.186; SN iii.133; cp. Mil 326 (nibbāne); AN ii.165 AN iii.245 (avyāpāde); iv.442 (adukkha-m-asukhe); Iti 43 (dhamme); and na me tattha mānasaṃ p. Mil 135. pp. pakkhanna (q.v.).

pa + khandati, of skand

Pakkhandana

(nt.) 1. leaping, springing Ja ii.32; Pts 1. 194 (pariccāga-& pakkh˚-nissagga).; 2. attack, assault, chasing Dhp-a i.198.

fr. pakkhandati

Pakkhandin

(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) bold, braggart, lit. jumping on or forth Dhp 244; Snp 89 (= pakkhandaka Snp-a 164).

2. a military scout, lit an onrusher, a bravo DN i.51 (cp. Dial. i.68); DN-a i.157; Ja ii.32, Ja ii.281.

fr. pakkhandati

Pakkhanna

jumped on, fallen on to or into, chanced upon, acquired MN i.39; Thag 342 (diṭṭhigahanā˚) Ja v.471; Mil 144 (saṃsaya˚), 156, 390 (kupatha˚).

pp. of pakkhandati; often wrongly spelt pakkhanta

Pakkhara

bordering, trimming Ja vi.223 (of a carriage).

cp. Sk. prakṣara & prakhara “ein Panzer für Pferde” BR.

Pakkhalati1

to wash, cleanse Ja v.71 (ger. pakkhalya = dhovitvā C. p. 74). Caus. pakkhāleti (q.v.).

pa + kṣal

Pakkhalati2

to stumble, trip, stagger Ja iii.433; Ja vi.332; DN-a i.37; Dhs-a 334.

pa + khalati, of skhal

Pakkhāyati

to appear, shine forth, to be clearly visible DN ii.99 (cp. Thag 1034, where pakkhanti for pakkhāyanti metri causâ); MN ii.32; SN iv.144; SN v.153, SN v.162; AN iii.69 sq.

pa + khyā, Ved. prakhyāyate; cp. khāyati & pakkha;2

Pakkhāleti

to wash, cleanse Vin i.9 (pāde); DN ii.85 (id.); MN i.205; SN i.107; Ja vi.24 (pāde); Vv-a 261.

Caus. of pa + ksal, cp. khaleti

Pakkhika

(adj.) 1. belonging or referring to the (2) lunar fortnights fortnightly, for a fortnight or in the (specified) fortnight of the month (cp. Vin. Texts iii.220). As one special provision of food mentioned in enumn of five bhojanāni, viz. niccabhatta, salākabhatta, pakkhika uposathika, pāṭipadika, Vin i.58 = Vin ii.175; Vin iv.75; Ja ii.210; Vism 66.

2. (cp. pakkha 2 & pakkhin 2) contributing to, leading to, associated with, siding with (-˚) Vism 130, in phrase vighāta˚ anibbāna-saṃvattanika associated with destruction, etc. MN i.115; Dhs-a 382 Also in mūga˚ leading to deafness Ja i.45 (v.254). Dhp-a i.82 (paramattha-sacca˚).

for pakkhiya = Ved. pakṣya of pakkha1 3

Pakkhitta

put down into, thrown into (loc.) Snp p.15 (pāyāso udake p.); Pv-a 58 (ātave p naḷo is perhaps better read ātāpe paditto), 153 (pokkharaṇiyaṃ p.).

pp. of pakkhipati

Pakkhin

(adj. n.) 1. winged the winged one, a bird DN i.71 (+ sakuṇa = pakkhayutto sakuṇo DN-a i.208) = AN ii.209 = AN v.206 = Pp 58; SN ii.231; Snp 606 (= sakuṇo Snp-a 465); Pv iii.53 (˚gaṇā = sakuṇagaṇā Pv-a 198).

2. (cp. pakkha 2) participating in, contributing to SN v.97 (vighāta˚ for the usual ˚pakkhika).

fr. pakkha1 = pakkhānaṃ atthitāya pakkhī ti vuccati Snp-a 465; Ved. pakṣin bird

Pakkhipati

1. to put down into (with loc. of receptacle), place into, enclose in (often used for ceremony of putting a corpse into a shell or mount) DN ii.162 (tela-doṇiyā Bhagavato sarīraṃ p.); SN ii.85; Ja ii.210 (mukhe); Mil 247 (Amat’ osadhaṃ); Pv-a 41 (atthikāni thūpe p.) Dhp-a i.71 (the corpse into the fire).

2. to throw into hurl into, in Niraya-passage at MN iii.183 = AN i.141 Nd ii.304iii; cp. nikkhipati.

3. (fig.) to include in insert, arrange, interpolate Mil 13 (Abhidhammapiṭakaṃ kusalā dhammā, akusalā dh., avyākatā dh. ti tīsu padesu p.) ■ Caus. II. pakkhipāpeti Ja i.467; DN-a i.136 ■ pp. pakkhitta (q.v.).

pa + kṣip, in sense of putting down carefully cp. nikkhipati & BSk. prakṣipati to start a ship Divy 334

Pakkhima

a bird Thag 139 (read ˚me for ˚maṃ); Ja v.339.

= pakkhin

Pakkhiya

(adj. n.) siding with, associating with; m. part, side; only in phrase (satta-tiṃsa-) bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā the 37 parts of enlightenment Iti 75 (satta only); Ja i.275; Vism 678 sq.; Snp-a 164; Vv-a 95; see Cpd. 179 and note 1. pakkhiya at Thig 425 is not clear (expld at Thag-a 269 by vaccha, v.l. sacca).

fr. pakkha1 2; cp. pakkhikā

Pakkhepa

(m.) & ˚na (nt.) throwing, hurling; being thrown into (loc.) Pv-a 221 (lohakumbhi˚ in passage of ordeals in Niraya); Dhp-a i.357 (nadiyaṃ visa-pakkhepana).

fr. pa + kṣip

Pakhuma

an eyelash unsally as adj.: having eyelashes (-˚) DN ii.18 (go˚) SN i.132 (˚antarikāyaṃ between the lashes); Ja v.216 (visāla˚ for alārapamha T.); Thag-a 255 (dīgha˚ for āyatapamha Thig 383); Vv-a 162, Vv-a 279.

Ved. pakṣman, diaeretic form for the contracted form pamha, the latter prepondering in poetry while pakhuma is mostly found in prose. Similar doublets are sukhuma & saṇha; as regards etym. cp Av. pasnem eyelid, Gr. πέκτω to comb, πόκος fleece, Lat pecto to comb, pecten comb, Ohg. fahs hair

Pagaṇḍaka

see pakaṭṭhaka.

Pagabbha

(adj.) bold, daring, forward, reckless MN i.236; SN i.201 (sup˚); AN iii.433; Snp 89, Snp 852 (ap˚ = na pagabbha Kp-a 242, cp. also Nd i.228); Dhp 244 (= kāyapāgabbhiyâdīhi samannāgata Dhp-a iii.354); Ja ii.32, Ja ii.281, Ja ii.359; Ja v.448; Mil 389 Dāvs iii.26apagabbha at Vin. iii.3 is used in quite a diff. sense, viz. “one who has no more connection with a womb” (a + pa + *garbha)

cp. Epic Sk. pragalbha

Pagabbhatā

(f.) resoluteness, boldness, decision Ja vi.273. See also pāgabbhiya.

abstr. fr. pagabbha, cp. Sk. pragalbhatā

Pagabbhin

(adj.) bold Ja vi.238.

= pagabbha

Pagama

going forth from (-˚) Dhs-a 329.

fr. pra + gam

Pagāḷha

sunk into, immersed in (loc.) Snp 441, Snp 772 (= ogāḷha ajjhogāḷha nimugga Nd i.26).

pp. of pagāhati

Pagāhati

to dive into, sink into Snp 819 (≈ ajjhogāha Snp-a 537; = ogāhati ajjhogāhati pavisati Nd i.152) ■ pp. pagāḷha.

pa + gāhati

Pagiddha

(adj.) greedy after, clinging to, finding delight in (loc.) Ja v.269 (= gadhita mucchita C. on p. 274).

pa + giddha

Paguṇa

(adj.) learned, full of knowledge, clever, well-acquainted, familiar DN iii.170; Vv 532 (= nipuṇa Vv-a 232); Ja ii.243; Ja iv.130; Ja v.399; Vism 95 (Majjhimo me paguṇo: I am well versed in the M.), 242 (dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā); DN-a i.95; Snp-a 195; Kp-a 73paguṇaṃ karoti, to make oneself familiar with, to learn by heart, to master thoroughly Ja ii.166; Ja iii.537 (tayo vede); Mil 12 (Abhidhamma-piṭakaṃ).

-bhāva familiarity with, acquaintance, efficient state cleverness in, experience. knowledge (cp. pāguñña Ja iii.537; Dhs 48, Dhs 49.

pa + guṇa cp. Sk. praguṇa straight, der. “kind”

Paguṇatā

(f.) & Paguṇatta (nt.) (doubtful) abstr. to paguṇa in expln of pāguññatā at Dhs 48 & 49 (trsl. fitness competence).;

Pagumba

a thicket, bush, clump of trees Snp 233.

pa + gumba

Pageva

(adv.) (how) much more or much less, a fortiori, lit. “right at the earliest” Ja i.354; Ja v.242; Mil 91; Vism 93, Vism 259, Vism 322; Vv-a 258, Pv-a 115, Pv-a 116, Pv-a 117 ■ Compar. pagevataraṃ MN iii.145; atippage too early Ja iii.48; atippago id MN i.84; SN ii.32; AN v.48.

page = Sk. prage + eva, but BSk. prāgeva

Paggaṇhāti

1. to stretch forth, hold out or up, take up DN i.123 (sujaṃ the sacrificial ladle), 125 (añjaliṃ stretch out the hollow hands as a token of respectful greeting); SN i.141; SN ii.280; Ja i.89 (paveṇiṃ) Pv-a 74 (turiyāni). ger. paggayha taking up, raising up, stretching forth Snp 350 (= uttāretvā Snp-a 349) Dhp 268 (tulaṃ); Pv ii.917 (bāhuṃ); iv.74 (uccaṃ p.) Vv-a 7 (añjaliṃ). Often in phrase bāhā paggayha kandati to wail or lament with outstretched arms (a special pose of mourning) Ja v.267; Ja vi.188; Pv-a 92 (= pasāreti).

2. to take up, take care of, favour support, befriend (opp. niggaṇhāti) Ja i.511; Ja ii.21 Ja v.116, Ja v.369; Mil 185, Mil 186; Pv-a 114 (sappurisa-dhammaṃ).

3. to put to, exert, strain, apply vigorously (cittaṃ one’s mind) SN v.9; Pts ii.20 (paggaṇhanto viriyena carati) ■ pp. paggahita (q.v.) ■ Caus. paggaheti to exert Mil 390 (mānasaṃ) ■ Caus. II. paggaṇhāpeti to cause to hold up or out, to cause to uphold or support Mil 21 (dhamma-dhajaṃ); Ja v.248; Pv-a 74 (turiyāni).

pa + gaṇhāti

Paggalita

dripping Pv-a 56 (v.l. for T. vigalita).

pp. of pa + gal

Paggava

a medicinal plant with bitter fruit Ja ii.105 (v.l. pakkava). Paggaha & Paggaha;

etym?

Paggaha & Paggāha

1. exertion, energy; (a) paggaha: DN iii.213 (v.l. paggāha, also ˚nimitta) Pts ii.8 (˚cariyā), 20 (˚ṭṭha); DN-a i.63 (viriy-indriyassa ˚lakkhaṇa); (b) paggāha: AN i.83, AN i.256 (˚nimitta); Dhs 277 (trsl. “grasp”), 336, 1359 (˚nimitta); Dhs-a 406. 2. (paggaha ) favour, kindness, patronage [same meaning in Ep. Sk.] Vin iii.145 = AN iii.66; Ja v.116 (opp. niggaha); vi.371 (id.).

fr. paggaṇhāti

Paggahaṇa

(nt.) stretching forth, lifting, holding out; of the hands as sign of respectful salutation (cp. añjaliṃ paggaṇhāti) Ja iii.82-Abstr. ˚tā = paggaha 1. Vism 134.

fr. pa + gṛh, cp. paggaṇhāti

Paggahita

holding up, or (being) held up Vin ii.131 (chatta˚ holding up a parasol,) 207 (id.); Ja vi.235; Snp-a 175 (= Snp p.21).

pp. of paggaṇhāti, cp. BSk. pragṛhīta lofty Divy 7, Divy 102

Paggāha

see paggaha.

Paggāhika

(adj.) belonging to, receiving (or trading?) in cpd. ˚sālā a shop Vin ii.291 (cp. Vin Texts iii.383: “would he set up as a hawker in cloth or would he open a shop”).

paggāha + ika

Paggharaṇa

(adj.-n.) trickling, oozing, dripping Ja i.146; Ja vi.187 (a˚); f. ˚ī DN i.74 (= bindubinduṃ udakaṃ paggharati DN-a i.218); the ʻmarkʼ of liquid Dhs-a 332.

fr. paggharati

Paggharaṇaka

(adj.) flowing, trickling, oozing out Ja vi.187 (app˚-velā), 531; Dhp-a i.126 (lohitaṃ); Vism 262.

fr. paggharati

Paggharati

to flow forth or out, to ooze, trickle, drip SN i.150; Snp p.125 (pubbañ ca lohitañ ca. p.); Ja vi.328; Pv i.67 (gabbho pagghari = vissandi Pv-a 34); ii.911 (= vissandati Pv-a 119); ii.926 (akkhīni p. = vissandanti Pv-a 123, sic lege!); Mil 180; Vv-a 76 (navahi dvārehi puḷuvakā pagghariṃsu) ■ pp. paggharita (q.v.).

pa + gharati, which stands for kṣarati, also appearing as jharati, cp. Sk. nirjhara, Prk. pajjharati Mālatī-M. p. 51. BSk. pragharati Divy 57, Divy 409 Avs i.282

Paggharita

flowing, trickling SN ii.179; Thig 466; Pv-a 198 (khīra).

pp. of paggharati

Paghaṇa

(nt.) a covered terrace before a house Vin ii.153 (“paghanaṃ nāma yaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca pādehi hananti. tassa vihāra-dvāre ubhato kuṭṭaṃ niharitvā katapadesass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ” Bdhgh, quoted Vin. Texts iii.175).

cp. Sk. praghaṇa

Paṅka

mud mire; defilement, impurity SN i.35, SN i.60; SN iii.118; AN iii.311 AN iv.289; Snp 970 (˚danta rajassira with dirt between their teeth and dust on their heads, from travelling); iii.236 (id.); iv.362 (id.); Snp 535, Snp 845, Snp 945, Snp 1145 (Nd ii.374 kāma-panko kāma-kaddamo etc.); Dhp 141, Dhp 327; Nd i.203; Pv iii.33; iv.32; Mil 346; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136.

cp. Epic Sk. panka, with k suffix to root *pene for *pele, as in Lat. palus; cp. Goth. fani mire, excrements Ohg, fenna “fen,” bog; also Ital. fango mud Ohg. fūht wet. See Walde Lat. Wtb. under palus BSk. panka, e.g. Jtm 215 panka-nimagna

Paṅga

only in cpd. paṅgacīra (nt.) at DN i.6 “blowing through toy pipes made of leaves” (Dial. i.10, where is cpd. Sinhalese pat-kulal and Marathī pungī after Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 205). Bdhgh explns as “p vuccati paṇṇa-nāḷikā; taṃ dhamantā kīḷanti” DN-a i.86.

?

Paṅgu

(adj.) lame, crippled, see pakkha3 and next.

Sk. pangu; etym.?

Paṅgula

(adj.) lame Ja vi.12; Vism 280.

fr. pangu

Pacati

to cook, boil, roast Vin iv.264; fig. torment in purgatory (trs. and intrs.): Niraye pacitvā after roasting in N. SN ii.225, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 14 ■ ppr. pacanto tormenting, gen. pacato (+ Caus. pācayato) DN i.52 (expld at DN-a i.159, where read pacato for paccato, by pare daṇḍena pīḷentassa) ■ pp. pakka (q.v.). Caus. pacāpeti & pāceti; (q.v.) ■ Pass. paccati to be roasted or tormented (q.v.).

Ved. pacati, Idg. *peqṷō, Av. pac-; Obulg. peka to fry, roast, Lith, kepū bake, Gr. πέσσω cook, πέπων ripe

Pacana

(nt.) cooking J̄ iii.425 (˚thālikā); v.385 (˚bhājana); Thag-a 29 (bhatta˚); DN-a i.270; Pv-a 135.

fr. pac, su pacati

Pacarati

to go after, walk in; fig. practise, perform, observe Vv 329 (v.l. pavarati, cp. Vv-a 136).

pa + carati

Pacala

shaking, trembling, wavering Dhs-a 378.

fr. pa + cal

Pacalati

to dangle Vv-a 36 (v.l. BB paj˚).

pa + calati

Pacalāyati

to make (the eyelid) waver, to wink, to be sleepy, nod, begin to doze AN iii.343 AN iv.344; AN iv.85 (quot. at Dhs-a 236); Ja i.384 (˚āyituṃ ārabbhi); Vism 300.

quasi-denom. or caus. fr. pacala, pa + cal, cp. daṇḍāyati and pacāleti

Pacalāyikā

(f.) nodding, wavering (of the eyelids), blinking, being sleepy Dhs 1157 (= akkhidalādīnaṃ pacalabhāvaṃ karoti Dhs-a 378).

abstr. fr. pacalāyati

Pacalita

shaken, wavering, unstable Thag 260.

pp. of pacalati

Pacāpeti

to cause to be cooked, to cook Vin iv.264; Ja i.126 (āhāraṃ); ii.15 (bhattaṃ), 122.

Caus. of pacati

Pacāreti

to go about in (acc.), to frequent, to visit AN i.182, AN i.183 (pacārayāmi, gloss sañcarissāmi).

pa + cāreti, Caus. of car

Pacālaka

(adj.) swinging, shaking; nt. acc. as adv. in kāya- (& bāhu˚); ppacālakaṃ after the manner or in the style of swaying the body (or swinging the arms) Vin ii.213.

fr. pacāleti

Pacāleti

to swing, sway, move about Thag 200 (mā pacālesi “sway and nod” Trsln).

pa + Caus. of cal

Pacinati

1. to pick, pluck, gather, take up, collect, accumulate SN iii.89 SN iv.74 (dukkhaṃ = ācināti p. 73); Dhp 47, Dhp 48 (pupphāni ocinati Dhp-a i.366); Ja iii.22; fut. pacinissati Dhp-a i.361.

2. to pick out (mentally), to discern, distinguish, realise, know Snp 837 (ppr. pacinaṃ = pacinanto vicinanto tulayanto tīrayanto Nd i.185; = pavicinati Snp-a 545); fut. pacessati Dhp 44, Dhp 45 (sic F.; MSS vijessati, & vicessati the latter perhaps preferable to pac˚; expld at Dhp-a i.334 by vicinissati upaparikkhissati paṭivijjhissati sacchikarissati) ■ Pass. pacīyati to be heaped up, to increase, accumulate SN iv.74 (opp. khīyati).

or ˚cināti) [pa + cināti, cp, ācināti

Pacuṭa

is doubtful reading at DN-a i.164 (with vv.ll. pamuṭa, pamuca, papuṭa) for DN i.54, T. paṭuva (vv. ll pamuṭa, samudda) and is expld by gaṇṭhika, i.e. block or knot. The whole passage is corrupt; see discussed under pavuṭā.

Pacura

(adj.) general, various, any; abundant, many Ja v.40 (= bahu salabha C.); Mil 408 (˚jana) Dāvs iv.11, Dāvs iv.50; Vv-a 213 (˚jano for yādisakīdiso Vv 5011). See also pasura.

cp. late Sk. pracura

Pacessati

see pacinati.

Pacca˚

is contracted form of paṭi before a˚, like paccakampittha pret. fr. paṭikampati.

Paccakkosati

to curse in return SN i.162; AN ii.215.

paṭi + ā + kruś

Paccakkosana

(nt.) cursing in return Dhp-a iv.148 (a˚).

fr. paṭi + ā + kruś

Paccakkha

(adj.) “before the eye,” perceptible to the senses, evident clear, present Dhs-a 254; Pv-a 125; Sdhp 416. Often in obl. cases, viz. instr. ˚ena personally Ja i.377; abl ˚ato from personal experience Ja v.45, Ja v.195, Ja v.281; appaccakkhāya without seeing or direct perception, in expln of paccaya at Vism 532; also in phrase paccakkhato ñatvā having seen or found out for himself, knowing personally Ja i.262; Ja iii.168.

-kamma making clear, i.e. demonstration, realisation only neg. ; not realising etc. SN iii.262; Dhs 390 (trsl. “inability to demonstrate”; cp. Dhs-a 254).

paṭi + akkha3, cp. Ved. pratyakṣa

Paccakkhāta

rejected, given up, abandoned, repudiated Vin ii.244, Vin ii.245 (sikkhā); iii.25 (id.); Ja iv.108; Dhp-a i.12. Cp. Vin. Texts i.275.

pp. of paccakkhāti

Paccakkhāti

lit. to speak against, i.e. to reject, refuse, disavow, abandon, give up, usually in connection with Buddhaṃ, dhammaṃ sikkhaṃ or similar terms of a religious-moral nature Vin iii.25; SN ii.231, SN ii.271; AN iv.372 ■ ger. paccak- khāya, in foll. conns ācariyaṃ Ja iv.200; sikkhaṃ Vin iii.23, Vin iii.34 (a˚); SN ii.231; SN iv.190; Pp 66, Pp 67; sabbaṃ SN iv.15; ariyasaccaṃ SN v.428. paccakkhāsi at Ja v.8 is gloss for pakatthāsi ■ pp. paccakkhāta (q.v.). Intens. paccācikkhati (q.v.).

paṭi + akkhāti = ā + khyā

Paccakkhāna

(nt.) rejection, refusal Ja vi.422.

fr. paṭi + ā + khyā

Paccagū

(adj.-n.) “one who goes toward,” a pupil SN i.104 (Mārassa); vv.ll. baddhabhū, paṭṭhagū. Windisch, Māra & Buddha; trsls “unter M’s Herrschaft,” and refers paṭṭhagu to Sk. pātyagāḥ. Bdhgh (see Kindred Sayings, 1, p. 319) reads baddhagū and explns by bandhavara sissa antevāsika.

a difficult word, composed of pacca + gū, the latter a by-form of ˚ga, as in paṭṭhagū, vedagū pāragū. pacca may be praṭya, an adv. formn of prep praṭi, and paṭṭha its doublet. It is not certain whether we should read paṭṭhagū here as well (see paṭṭhagū) The form may also be expld as a substantivised pl 3rd pret. of praṭi + gacchati = paccaguṃ

Paccaggaḷa

(adj.) in phrase paccaggaḷe aṭṭhāsi “stuck in his throat” MN i.333.

pratyak + gaḷa

Paccaggha

(adj.) recent, new, beautiful, quite costly Vin i.4; Ja i.80; Ja ii.435; Pv ii.316 (= abhinava mahaggha vā Pv-a 87); iii.105 (= abhinava Pv-a 214); Dāvs v.25; Pv-a 44.

paṭi + aggha, cp. Sk. pratyagra of diff. derivation

Paccaṅga

(nt.) lit. “by-limb,” small limb, only in compd aṅgapaccaṅgāni limbs great and small all limbs: see anga.

paṭi + anga

Paccañjana

(nt.) anointing, ointment, unction DN i.12 = MN i.511; DN-a i.98 (= bhavanīya-sītalabhessajj’ añjanaṃ).

paṭi + añjana

Paccati

to be boiled, fig. to be formented or vexed, to suffer. Nearly always applied to the torture of boiling in Niraya, where it is meant literally ■ SN i.92; SN v.344 (kālena paccanti read for kāle na p.); AN i.141 (phenuddehakaṃ p. niraye) Snp 670, Snp 671; Dhp 69, Dhp 119, Dhp 120 (pāpaṃ suffer for sin, cp Dhp-a iii.14); Ja v.268; Pv iv.129 (= dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti Pv-a 228); iv.339 (niraye paccare janā = paccanti Pv-a 255); Dhp-a iii.64 (expln for tappati).

Pass. of pacati, cp. BSk. pacyate Divy 422

Paccatta

(adj.) separate, individual; usually acc. ˚ṃ adv. separately, individually, singly, by himself in his own heart DN i.24 (yeva nibbuti viditā); DA on DN ii.77 = attano attano abbhantare; MN i.251, MN i.337 (˚vedaniya Name of a purgatory), 422; SN ii.199; SN iii.54 sq., SN iv.23, SN iv.41 sq., 168, 539; Snp 611, Snp 906; Dhp 165; Pv iii.106 (˚vedanā separate sufferings, = visuṃ visuṃ attanā anubhūyamānā mahādukkhavedanā Pv-a 214) Dhs 1044 (ajjhatta + ; trsld “self referable”); Mil 96 (˚purisa-kāra); Dhs-a 169; Vv-a 9, Vv-a 13; Pv-a 232.

-vacana expression of separate relation, i.e. case of reference, or of the direct object, reflexive case, Name of the acc. case Snp-a 303; Vv-a 281; Pv-a 30, Pv-a 35; Kp-a 213 Kp-a 236; in lieu of karaṇa Kp-a 213, of sāmin Snp-a 594.

paṭi + attan

Paccatthata

spread out DN ii.211.

pp. of gaṭi + ā + stṛ;

Paccattharaṇa

(nt.) something spread against, i.e. under or over, a cover, spread, rug, cushion or carpet to sit on bedding of a couch (nisīdana˚) Vin i.47, Vin i.295, Vin i.296 Vin ii.208, Vin ii.218; DN i.7 (kadali-miga-pavara˚, cp. DN-a i.87) AN i.137 (id.); iii.50 (id.); Ja i.126; Ja iv.353 (uṇṇāmaya) Pv-a 141, Pv-a 137.

pati + ā + stṛ; cp. BSk. pratyāstaraṇa Divy 19

Paccatthika

(adj. n.) an opponent adversary, enemy Vin ii.94 sq. (atta˚ personal enemy) AN v.71 (id.; T. attha˚); DN i.50, DN i.70, DN i.137; Iti 83; Pv-a 62 Cp. paccāmitta.

paṭi + attha + ka, lit. opposite to useful, cp. Sk. pratyanīka & pratyarthin

Paccana

(nt.) being boiled, boiling. torture, torment Ja v.270; Snp-a 476 (˚okāsa). Paccanika, Paccaniya

fr. paccati, cp. pacana

Paccanika, Paccanīya

(adj. n.) 1. contrary, adverse, opposed; (1) m enemy, adversary, opponent MN i.378; SN i.179; SN iv.127; Snp 761; Pts ii.67 sq.; Snp-a 288. Cp. vi.˚

2. (in method reverse, negative, opp. to anuloma. Tikp 71 passim cp. paṭiloma.

-gāthā response, responding verse (cp. paṭigāthā Snp-a 39.

cp. Sk. pratyanīka & see paccatthika

Paccanubhāsati

to speak out or mention correspondingly, to enumerate Kp-a 78, Kp-a 79 sq.

paṭi + anubhāsati, cp. BSk. pratyavabhāṣate to call to Divy 9

Paccanubhoti

to experience, undergo, realise MN i.295; SN v.218, SN v.264 sq., 286 sq. 353; AN iii.425 sq.; Iti 38; Pv-a 26, Pv-a 44, Pv-a 107 (dukkhaṃ) ■ fut. paccanubhossati DN ii.213; SN i.133, SN i.227; Pv iii.56 ■ Pass. paccanubhavīyati Pv-a 146 (for upalabbhati) ■ pp. paccanubhūta MN ii.32; SN ii.178; Iti 15.

paṭi + anu + bhū, BSk. pratyanubhavati Divy 54, Divy 262 etc.

Paccanusiṭṭha

advised, admonished DN ii.209 = DN ii.225.

paṭi + anusiṭṭha

Paccanta

(adj. n.) adj. adjoining, bordering on, neighbouring, adjacent Dhp 315; Ja i.11 (v.47, ˚desa), 377 (˚vāsika); Pv-a 201 (˚nagara); Dhp-a iii.488 (id.); Sdhp 11 (˚visaya). (m.) the border, outskirts, neighbourhood Vin i.73; Ja i.126 (vihāra˚); ii.37; Mil 314 (˚e kupite in a border disturbance); Dhp-a i.101 (id.); Pv-a 20 (id.). ˚ṃ vūpasāmeti to appease the border Pv-a 20 ■ P. in sense of “heathen” at Vism 121.

paṭi + anta, cp. Sk. pratyanta

Paccantima

(adj.) bordering, adjoining, next to Vin. ii.166; Sdhp 5.

fr. paccanta, cp. BSk. pratyantima frontier Divy 21, Divy 426

Paccabhiññāṇa

(nt.) recognition Dhs-a 110.

paṭi + abhi + ñāṇa

Paccaya

lit. resting on, falling back on, foundation cause, motive etc. See on term as t.t. of philosophy Tikapaṭṭhāna I, foreword; J.P.T.S. 1916, 21 f.; Cpd. 42 sq. & esp. 259 sq.

1. (lit.) support, requisite means, stay. Usually with ref. to the 4 necessaries of the bhikkhu’s daily life, viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senāsana (gilānapaccaya-) bhesajja, i.e. clothing, food as alms a dwelling-place, medicine: see under; cīvara. Snp 339 (paccaya = gilāna-paccaya Snp-a 342); Mil 336; Mvu 3 Mvu 15.

2. (appld) reason, cause, ground, motive, means condition MN i.259 (yaṃ yad eva paccayaṃ paṭicca by whatever cause or by whichever means); SN ii.65; Ne 78 sq.; DN-a i.125; Pv-a 104. The fourfold cause (catubbidho paccayo) of rūpa (material form) consists of kamma, citta, utu, āhāra: Vism 600. Var. paccayas discussed at Vb-a 166 sq. (twofold, with ref. to paṭisandhi), 183 (eightfold), 202, 205 sq. 254 (4). sappaccaya founded, having a reason or cause SN v.213 sq. AN i.82; Nd ii.mūla; Dhs 1084, Dhs 1437 ■ yathā paccayaṃ karoti do as he likes Nd ii.p. 280 = SN iii.33. Often coupled with hetu, e.g. at SN iv.68 sq.; AN i.66; AN iv.151 sq. DN iii.284; Nd ii.under mūla; Pts ii.116 sq., paccaya came to be distinguished from hetu as the genus of which hetu was the typical, chief species. i.e. paccaya became synonymous with our “relation,” understood in a causal sense, hetu meaning condition, causal antecedent and 23 other relations being added as special modes of causality. Later still these 24 were held reducible to 4 Tikp 1 f. (and foreword); Cpd. 197 Cp. Paṭṭhāna ■ Abl. paccayā as adv. by means of through, by reason of, caused by DN i.45 (vedanā ˚taṇhā etc., see paṭicca-samuppāda); MN i.261 (jātippaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ); Pv i.52 (kamma˚; ); iv.150 (tap˚; ); Pv-a 147 (kamma˚).

3. ground for, belief, confidence trust, reliance Ja i.118, Ja i.169; apara˚ without relying on anyone else SN iii.83, SN iii.135; AN iv.186, AN iv.210; Pv-a 226.

-ākāra the mode of causes, i.e. the Paṭiccasamuppāda Dhs-a 2, Dhs-a 3; Vb-a 130 sq. (cp. Vism 522 sq.).

fr. paṭi + i, cp. Ved. pratyaya & P. pacceti, paṭicca

Paccayatā

(f.) the fact of having a cause, causation, causal relation, in phrase idappaccayatā (adv.) from an ascertained cause, by way of cause Vin i.5; DN i.185; SN i.136; SN ii.25.

abstr. fr. paccaya

Paccayika

(adj.) trustworthy DN i.4; SN i.150; AN ii.209; Ja vi.384 (paccāyika); Pp 57; DN-a i.73; Snp-a 475.

fr. paccaya

Paccaladdhaṃsu

see paṭilabhati. Paccavidhum & Paccavyadhim

Paccavidhuṃ & Paccavyādhiṃ

see paṭivijjhati.

Paccavekkhati

to look upon, consider, review, realise, contemplate, see M i.415; SN iii.103 SN iii.151 sq., SN iv.111, SN iv.236 sq.; Ja v.302; Vb 193, Vb 194 (cp AN iii.323); Mil 16; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 277; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 48.

paṭi + avekkhati

Paccavekkhana

(nt.) & ˚nā (f.) looking at, consideration regard, attention, reflection, contemplation, reviewing (cp.; Cpd. 58) MN i.415; DN iii.278; AN iii.27; Pp 21 (a˚) Dhs 390 (a˚ = dhammānaṃ sabhāvaṃ pati na apekkhati Dhs-a 254, trsl. “inability to consider”); Mil 388 Ne 85; Vb-a 140; Vism 43 (twofold); Sdhp 413.

paṭi + avekkhana, cp. late Sk. pratyaveksana & ˚nā

Paccavekkhā

(f.) imagination Mbhv 27.

cp. late Sk. pratyavekṣā

Paccasāri

see paṭisarati.

Paccassosi

see patissuṇāṭi.

Paccākata

rejected, disappointed Vin iv.237, Vin iv.238.

pp. of paṭi + a + kṛ;

Paccākoṭita

flattened or smoothed out, pressed, ironed (ākoṭita + of the robes) MN i.385; SN ii.281; Dhp-a i.37.

pp. of paṭi + ākoṭeti

Paccāgacchati

to fall back on, return again, to go back to (acc.), withdraw, slide back from (˚ to) Vin i.184; MN i.265; MN iii.114; Nd i.108, Nd i.312; Kv 624 (spelt wrongly pacchā˚); Pv-a 14, Pv-a 109, Pv-a 250. Cp pacceti.

paṭi + āgacchati

Paccāgata

gone back, withdrawn Ja v.120; Mil 125.

pp. of paccāgacchati

Paccāgamana

(nt.) return, going back, backsliding Mil 246.

fr. paṭi + ā + gam

Paccācamati

to swallow up, resorb SN v.48; AN v.337; Ja i.311; Mil 150; Caus. ˚camāpeti Mil 150.

paṭi + ā + camati; often spelt ˚vamati, but see Trenckner, Mil 425

Paccācikkhati

to reject, repudiate, disallow DN iii.3; MN i.245 MN i.428; Vin iv.235.

Intens. of paccakkhāti, paṭi + ā + cikkhati of khyā

Paccājāta

reborn, come to a new existence DN i.62; DN iii.264; MN i.93; Pp 51.

pp. of paccājāyati

Paccājāyati

to be reborn in a new existence MN iii.169; SN ii.263; SN v.466, SN v.474 ■ pp. paccājāta (q.v.).

paṭi + ā + jāyati

Paccāneti

to lead back to (acc.) Pv ii.116 (= punar āneti C.).

paṭi + ā + neti

Paccābhaṭṭha

recited, explained Ja ii.48.

pp. of paccābhāsati

Paccābhāsati

to retort, recite, explain, relate Pv-a 57 (sic lege for pacchā˚) ■ pp. paccābhaṭṭha.

paṭi + ābhāsati

Paccāmitta

lit. “back-friend,” adversary, enemy DN i.70; AN iv.106; Ja i.488: DN-a i.182; Pv-a 155.

paccā = Sk. pratyak, adv.; + mitta, cp. Ep. Sk. pratyamitra

Paccāropeti

to show in return, retort, explain MN i.96; AN iv.193. Cp. paccabhāsati.

paṭi + āropeti

Paccāsati

to ask, beg, pray Pv iv.56 (˚anto for ˚āsaṃsanto? C explnns by āsiṃsanto).

fr. paṭi + āśā or = paccāsaṃsati or ˚siṃsati?

Paccāsanne

(adv.) near by Pv-a 216 = Pv-a 280

paṭi + āsanne

Paccāsā

f. expectation Vin iv.286.

paṭi + āśā, cp. Sk. pratyāśā

Paccāsāreti

to make go (or turn) backward MN i.124 = AN iii.28 (= paṭinivatteti C.) Vism 308 (sāreti pi p. pi).

paṭi + ā + sāreti, Caus. of sṛ;

Paccāsiṃsati

to expect, wait for, desire, hope for, ask DN ii.100; AN iii.124; Ja i.346, Ja i.483; Ja iii.176 Ja v.214; Dhp-a i.14; Dhp-a ii.84; DN-a i.318; Vv-a 336, Vv-a 346; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 25, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 260.

paṭi + āsiṃsati

Paccāharati

to bring back, take back Vin ii.265; Vin iii.140; Ja iv.304.

paṭi + āharati

Paccukkaḍḍhati

to draw out again Vin ii.99.

paṭi + ukkaḍḍhati

Paccukkaḍḍhana

(nt.) drawing out again Vin v.222.

fr. preceding

Paccuggacchati

to go out, set out, go out to meet Vin ii.210; MN i.206; Snp 442 (= abhimukho upari gacchati Snp-a 392).

paṭi + ud + gam

Paccuggata

illustrious Ja vi.280.

pp. of paccuggacchati

Paccuggamana

(nt.) going out to, meeting, receiving Ja iv.321; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 141 (˚ṃ karoti).

fr. preceding

Paccuṭṭhapanā

(f.) putting against, resistance, opposition Snp 245 (= paccanīkaṭ ṭhapanā Snp-a 228).

paṭi + ud + Caus. of sthā

Paccuṭṭhāti

to rise, reappear, to rise from one’s seat as a token of respect; always combd with abhivadati DN i.61 (Pot. ˚uṭṭheyya), 110 (Fut ˚uṭṭhassati).

paṭi + ud + sthā

Paccuṭṭhāna

(nt.) rising from one’s seat, reverence DN i.125.

fr. preceding

Paccuttarati

to go out again, to withdraw SN i.8; AN iii.190. Cp. paccupadissati.

paṭi + uttarati, but cp. BSk. pratyavatarati to disembark Divy 229

Paccudāvattati

to return again to (acc.) SN i.224; SN ii.104; AN v.337.

paṭi + ud + ā + vattati

Paccudāvattana

(nt.) coming back, return Dhs-a 389.

fr. preceding

Paccudāharati

recite in reply Thig 40.

paṭi + ud + ā + hṛ;

Paccudeti

go out towards Ja vi.559.

paṭi + ud + i

Paccuddharati

to wipe off or down (with a cloth, colakena) Vin ii.122 (udakapuñchaniṃ trsl. Vin. Texts ii.152 “to wear out a robe”), 151 (gerukaṃ; trsl. Vin. Texts ii.151 “to wipe down”).

paṭi + uddharati

Paccuddhāra

taking up, casting (the lot) again Vin iv.121.

paṭi + uddhāra

Paccupaṭṭhahati

“to stand up before,” to be present; only in pp. paccupaṭṭhita and in Caus paccupaṭṭhāpeti (q.v.).

paṭi + upa + sthā

Paccupaṭṭhāna

(nt.) 1. (re)appearance, happening, coming on phenomenon Ja iii.524; Ne 28; Snp-a 509; Dhs-a 332 Thag-a 288. 2. tending DN iii.191. 3. vv.ll. gilānupaṭṭhāna.

fr. paṭi + upa + sthā; cp. Cpd. 13 & Lakkhaṇa

Paccupaṭṭhāpeti

1. to bring before or about, to arrange, provide, instal, fix SN iv.121; Ja iii.45; Ja iv.105; Ja v.211. 2. to minister to, wait upon DN iii.189 sq.

Caus. of paccupaṭṭhahati

Paccupaṭṭhita

(re)presented, offered, at one’s disposal, imminent, ready, present DN iii.218 (˚kāmā) Iti 95 (id.); Snp p.105; Iti 111; Kv 157, 280; Mil 123.

pp. of paccupaṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. pratyupasthita, Divy Index

Paccupadissati

to accept, receive; or: to show, point out Ja v.221 (v.l. paccuttarissati to go through, perhaps preferable; C. on p. 225 expls by sampaṭicchissati).

reading uncertain; either paṭi + upadissati, or fut. of paṭi + upadisati, cp. upadaṃseti. It is not to be derived fr. ˚upadadāti

Paccupalakkhaṇā

(f.) differentiation SN iii.261 (a˚) Dhs 16 = Pp 25; Dhs 292, Dhs 555, Dhs 1057.

paṭi + upalakkhaṇā

Paccupekkhaṇā

(f.) = paccavekkhaṇā SN iii.262 (a˚).

Paccupeti

to go up or near to, to approach, serve, beset Ja iii.214. fut. ˚upessati Ja iv.362 (gloss upasevati).

pati + upeti

Paccuppanna

what has arisen (just now), existing, present (as opposed to atīta past & anāgata future) MN i.307, MN i.310; MN iii.188 MN iii.190, MN iii.196; SN i.5; SN iv.97; AN i.264; AN iii.151, AN iii.400; DN iii.100 DN iii.220, DN iii.275; Iti 53; Nd i.340; Pv iv.62; Dhs 1040, Dhs 1043 Vb-a 157 sq.; Pv-a 100. See also atīta.

pp. of paṭi + uppajjati, cp. Sk.pratyutpanna

Paccuyyāti

to go out against, to go to meet somebody SN i.82, SN i.216.

paṭi + ud +

Paccūsa˚

“the time towards dawn,” morning, dawn; always. in compn with either ˚kāle (loc.) at morning Dhp-a iv.61; DN-a i.168; or ˚velāyaṃ (loc.) id. Vv-a 105, Vv-a 118, Vv-a 165; Pv-a 61 or ˚samaye (loc.) id. SN i.107; Ja i.81, Ja i.217; Snp-a 80; Pv-a 38.

paṭi + Ved. uṣas f.; later Sk. pratyūṣa nt.

Paccūha

an impediment, obstacle SN i.201 (bahū hi saddā paccūhā, trsl “Ay there is busy to-and-fro of words.” C. expls by paṭiloma-saddā); Ja vi.571.

cp. late Sk. pratyūha, prati + vah

Pacceka

(adj.) each one, single, by oneself, separate, various several DN i.49 (itthi); ii.261 (˚vasavattin, of the 10 issaras); SN i.26 (˚gāthā a stanza each), 146 (˚brahma an independent Brahma); AN ii.41 (˚sacca); v.29 (id.) Snp 824 (id.), 1009 (˚gaṇino each one having followers visuṃ visuṃ gaṇavanto Snp-a 583); Ja iv.114 (˚bodhiñāṇa) Nd i.58 (˚muni); DN-a i.148 (paccekā itthiyo); Snp-a 52 (˚bodhisatta one destined to become a Paccekabuddha) 67 (id.), 73 (˚sambodhi), 476 (niraya a separate or special purgatory); Pv-a 251 (id.), Sdhp 589 (˚bodhi)- paccekaṃ (adv.) singly, individually, to each one Vv-a 282. See also pāṭekka.

-buddha one enlightened by himself, i.e. one who has attained to the supreme and perfect insight, but dies without proclaiming the truth to the world. MN iii.68; SN i.92 (“Silent Buddha” trsln); Ja iii.470; Ja iv.114; Ud 50 (P. Tagarasikhi); Ne 190; Kp-a 178, Kp-a 199; Snp-a 47, Snp-a 58, Snp-a 63; Dhp-a i.80, Dhp-a i.171, Dhp-a i.224, Dhp-a i.230; Dhp-a iv.201; Pv-a 144, Pv-a 263, Pv-a 265 (= isi), 272, 283.

paṭi + eka, cp. BSk. pratyeka Divy 335, Divy 336

Pacceti

to come on to, come back to, fig. fall back on, realise, find one’s hold in DN i.186 (“take for granted,” cp. note Dial. i.252); MN i.309 (kaṃ hetuṃ) 445 (id.); SN i.182 (“believe in,” C. icchati pattheti) Snp 662, Snp 788, Snp 800, Snp 803, Snp 840 = Snp 908; Dhp 125 (= paṭieti Dhp-a iii.34); Nd i.85, Nd i.108 (= paccāgacchati), 114; Pv ii.320 (= avagacchati Pv-a 87); Ne 93; Mil 125 Mil 313; Pv-a 116 (bālaṃ), 241 (agree to = paṭijānāti). ger. paṭicca (q.v.). Cp. paccāgacchati-pp. paṭīta (q.v.).

paṭi + i

Paccoḍḍita

laid in return (of a snare) Ja ii.183 (v.l. paccoṭṭita).

paṭi + oḍḍita

Paccora

(adj.) lower, rt. lower part, hindquarter, bottom (?) AN iv.130; Dhp-a i.189.

paṭi + avara, cp. Sk. pratyavara

Paccorohaṇī

(f.) the ceremony of coming down again (?), approaching or descending to (acc.) esp. the holy fire AN v.234 sq., 249 sq., v. 251. Cp orohaṇa & Sk. pratyavarohaṇa “descent,” Name of a cert Gṛhya celebration (BR.).

fr. paccorohati

Paccorohati

to come down again, descend DN i.50; DN ii.73; AN v.65, AN v.234.

paṭi + orohati

Paccosakkati

to withdraw, retreat, go away again DN i.230; Ja i.383; Mvu 25, Mvu 84.

paṭi + osakkati which is either ava + sakkati (of ṣvaṣk Geiger, P.Gr. § 282 or sṛp Trenckner Notes 60) or apa + sakkati

Paccosakkanā

(f.) withdrawal, retreat, going back, shrinking from Dhs-a 151.

abstr. fr. paccosakkati

Pacchaḍḍana

(nt.) vomiting, throwing out Sdhp 137.

pa + chaḍḍana

Pacchato

(adv.) behind after Dhp 348 (= anāgatesu khandhesu Dhp-a iv.63; opp pure); Pv-a 56, Pv-a 74; Dhp-a iii.197 (˚vatti). Often doubled pacchato pacchato, i.e. always or close behind, Ja ii.123 (opp. purato purato) ■ Cp. pacchā & pacchima;.

abl. formation fr. *paccha = Ved. paścā & paścāt, fr. Idg. *pos as in Lith. pàs near by, pastaras the last; cp. Av. pasca behind, Lat. post, after

Pacchada

a cover, wrapper; girdle Thig 378 (= uracchada Thag-a253) Dhs-a 397 (v.l. for ˚cchāda).

fr. pa + chad, cp. Sk. pracchada

Pacchanna

covered, wrapped, hidden Thag 299; Ja iii.129.

pa + channa, of chad

Pacchā

(adv.) behind, aft, after, afterwards, back; westward DN i.205; Snp 645 Snp 773, Snp 949; Nd i.33 (= pacchā vuccati anāgataṃ, pure vuccati atītaṃ); Nd ii.395; Dhp 172, Dhp 314, Dhp 421; Pv i.111 115 (opp. purato); ii.99 (= aparabhāge Pv-a 116) Pv-a 4, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 88; Vv-a 71.

-ānutappati [fr. ânutāpa] to feel remorse Pv ii.712 Ja v.117ānutāpa [cp. Sk. paścattāpa] remorse repentance Sdhp 288. -āsa (nt.) [āsa2] “eating afterwards ” i.e. aftermath SN i.74- gacchati at Kvu 624 see paccā˚. -gataka going or coming behind Ja vi.30 -jāta (-paccaya), 11th of the 24 paccayas, q.v. causal relation of posteriority in time. -nipātin one who retires to rest later than another (opp. pubb’ uṭṭhāyin getting up before others) DN i.60; DN iii.191; AN iii.37 AN iv.265, AN iv.267 sq.; DN-a i.168bāhaṃ “arm behind, i.e. with arms (tied) behind one’s back DN i.245; Ja i.264; Dhp-a ii.39bhatta “after-meal,” i.e. after the midday meal, either as ˚ṃ (acc ■ adv.) in the afternoon after the main meal, usually combd with piṇḍapāta paṭikkanta “returning from the alms-round after dinner” AN iii.320; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 38 and passim (cp BSk. paścādbhakta-piṇḍapāta-pratikrānta, see Indexes to Avs. & Divy), or as ˚kicca the duties after the midday meal (opp. purebhatta˚) DN-a i.47 (in detail) Snp-a 133, Snp-a 134. -bhattika one who eats afterwards, i.e. afternoon, when it is improper to eat AN iii.220 (khalu˚ q.v.). -bhāga hind or after part Ja ii.91; Pv-a 114 -bhāsati see paccā˚. -bhūma belonging to the western country SN iii.5. -bhūmaka id. SN iv.312 = AN v.263 -mukha looking westward MN iii.5; DN ii.207; Thag 529; Dhp-a iii.155 (opp. pācīna eastern) ■ vāmanaka dwarfed in his hind part Ja iv.137samaṇa [BSk. paścācchramaṇa & opp. purahśramaṇa Avs ii.67, Avs ii.150; Divy 154 Divy 330, Divy 494] a junior Wanderer or bhikkhu (Thera) who walks behind a senior (Thera) on his rounds. The one accompanying Gotama Buddha is Ānanda Vin i.46 Vin iii.10 (Ānanda); iv.78 (id.); Ud 90 (Nāgasamāla) Ja iv.123; Mil 15 (Nāgasena); Pv-a 38, Pv-a 93 (Ānanda).

Vedic paścā & paścāt see pacchato

Pacchāda

cover, covering, wrapper, in phrase nelango setappacchādo SN iv.291 = Ud 76 = DN-a i.75; Dhs-a 397.

pa + chāda

Pacchānutappati

see under pacchā.

Pacchāyā

(f.) a place in the shade, shaded part Vin i.180; Vin ii.193; DN i.152 (= chāyā DN-a i.310) ii.205; AN iii.320.

pa + chāyā

Pacchāḷiyaṃ

at AN iii.76 is of uncertain reading & meaning; in phrase p. khipanti: either “throw into the lap” (? or (better) read pacchiyaṃ, loc. of pacchi “into the basket” (of the girls & women).;

Pacchāsa

aftermath SN i.74.

cp. pacchāli? perhaps fr. pacchā +

Pacchi

(f.) a basket Ja i.9, Ja i.243; Ja ii.68; Ja iii.21; Ja vi.369 (paṇṇa˚), 560 (phala˚); Dhp-a ii.3; Dhp-a iv.205 (˚pasibbaka).

etym. doubtful

Pacchijjati

to be cut short, to be interrupted Ja i.503 (lohitaṃ p.).

pa + chijjati, Pass. of chid

Pacchijjana

(nt.) stopping, interruption Ja iii.214 (read assu-pacchijjana-divaso? passage corrupt.).

fr. last

Pacchita

cut off, skinned Ja vi.249.

pa + chita, Sk. pracchita, pp. of chā, only in combn with prefixes

Pacchindati

1. to break up, cut short, put an end to Vin iv.272; Ja i.119 (kathaṃ ˚itvā), 148 (kathaṃ ˚ituṃ); iv.59; Pv-a 78 (dānavidhiṃ ˚i).

2. to bring up (food), to vomit Dhp-a i.183 (āhāraṃ).

pa + chindati

Pacchima

(adj.) 1. hindmost, hind-, back-, last (opp. purima), latest DN i.239; MN i.23 (˚yāma the last night watch); DN-a i.45 sq. (id. ˚kicca duties or performances in the 3rd watch, corresp. to purima˚ & majjhima˚) Snp 352; Ja iv.137 (˚pāda); vi.364 (˚dvāra); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 75–⁠2. western (opp. purima or puratthima) DN i.153 (disā); SN i.145.

3. lowest, meanest Vin ii.108; MN i.23; SN ii.203.

Sk. paścima, superl. formation fr. *paśca, cp. pacchato & pacchā

Pacchimaka

(adj.) 1. last, latest (opp. purimaka) Vin ii.9; Nd ii.284 D. = Thag 202; Dhs-a 262; Ja vi.151.

2. lowest, meanest Ja i.285 (pacchimakā itthiyo).

fr. pacchima

Pacchedana

(nt.) breaking, cutting DN-a i.141.

fr. pa + chid

Pajagghati

to laugh out loud Ja vi.475.

pa + jagghati

Pajappati

to yearn for, crave, to be greedy after SN i.5 = Ja vi.25 (anāgataṃ = pattheti C.).

pa + jappeti

Pajappā

(f.) desire, greed for, longing Ja vi.25 (anāgata˚); Snp 592; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136.

pa + jappā

Pajappita

desired, longed for SN i.181; Ja vi.359.

pp. of pajappeti

Pajaha

(adj.) only neg. ; not giving anything up, greedy AN iii.76.

pa + jaha, pres. base of jahati

Pajahati

(˚jahāti) to give up, renounce, forsake, abandon, eliminate, let go, get rid of; freq as synonym of jahati (see Nd ii.under jahati with all forms). Its wide range of application with reference to all evils of Buddhist ethics is seen from exhaustive Index at S vi.57 (Index vol.) ■ Pres. pajahati SN i.187 SN iii.33 = Nd ii.680, Q 3 (yaṃ na tumhākaṃ taṃ pajahatha) Iti 32 (kiṃ appahīnaṃ kiṃ pajahāma); 117; AN iv.109 sq (akusalaṃ, sāvajjaṃ); Snp 789 (dukkhaṃ), 1056, 1058; Pts i.63; Pts ii.244. ppr. pajahaṃ SN iii.27; fut. pahāssaṃ (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 1511) MN ii.100 ■ aor. pajahi pahāsi; Vin i.36; SN i.12 = SN i.23 (sankhaṃ); Snp 1057 ■ ger pahāya SN i.12 (kāme), 23 (vicikicchaṃ), 188 (nīvaraṇāni), Snp 17, Snp 209, Snp 520 & passim; Nd ii.430; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 122 (= hitvā), 211; pahatvāna Snp 639, and pajahitvā. fut pajahissati SN ii.226 ■ grd. pahātabba MN i.7; Snp 558; Vv-a 73, & pajahitabba -pp. pahīna (q.v.) ■ Pass pahīyati (q.v.).

pa + jahati of

Pajā

(f.) progeny, offspring, generation, beings, men, world (of men), mankind (cp. use of Bibl. Gr. γέννημα in same meaning) DN ii.55; SN v.346 SN v.362 sq.; AN ii.75 sq.; AN iv.290; AN v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Snp 298 Snp 545, Snp 654, Snp 684, Snp 776, Snp 936, Snp 1104 (= sattā Nd ii.377); Dhp 28 Dhp 85, Dhp 254, Dhp 343 (= sattā Dhp-a iv.49); Nd i.47, Nd i.292; Pv ii.117; iv.334; Pp 57; Vism 223 (= pajāyana-vasena sattā); Dhp-a i.174; Pv-a 150, Pv-a 161 ■ Very freq. in formula sassamana-brāhmaṇī pajā “this world with its samaṇas and brāhmans” DN i.250; SN i.160, SN i.168, SN i.207 SN ii.170; SN iii.28, SN iii.59; SN iv.158; SN v.204, SN v.352; AN ii.130; AN v.204 Snp p.15; Iti 121 etc.

Ved. prajā, pra + jan

Pajānanā

(f.) knowledge, understanding, discernment; used in exegetical literature as syName of paññā Nd ii.380 = Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 555; Pp 25; Ne 28 Ne 54. As nt. ˚a at Vism 436.

fr. pajānāti

Pajānāti

to know, find out, come to know, understand, distinguish DN i.45 (yathābhūtaṃ really truly), 79 (ceto paricca), 162, 249; Snp 626, Snp 726 sq., 987; Iti 12 (ceto paricca); Dhp 402; Pv i.1112 (= jānāti Pv-a 60); Ja v.445; Pp 64 ■ ppr. pajānaṃ Snp 884, Snp 1050 Snp 1104 (see expln at Nd i.292 = Nd ii.378); Iti 98; Pv iv.164; and pajānanto Snp 1051 ■ ger. paññāya (q.v ■ Caus. paññāpeti; pp. paññatta; Pass. paññāyati pp.; paññāta (q.v.). Cp. sampajāna.

pa + jānāti

Pajāpati

(˚ī ) 1. (adj.) together with his wife Vin i.23, Vin i.342; Vin iv.62; Ja i.345; Pv-a 20. (m.) Prajāpati (Np.), the supreme Lord of men, only mentioned in one formula together with Inda & Brahmā, viz devā saindakā sabrahmakā sapajāpatikā in sense of foll. Also at Vb-a 497 with Brahmā.

2.; prajāpati (f.) [of Ved. prajāvant, adj.-n. fr. prajā “having (or rich in) progeny,” with p for v, as pointed out by Trenckner Notes 6216] “one who has offspring,” a chief wife of a man of the higher class (like a king, in which case = “chief queen”) or a gahapati, in which case simply “wife”; cp. BSk. prajāpatī “lady” Divy 2 Divy 98Vin i.23; Vin iii.25; Vin iv.18, Vin iv.258; SN ii.243; AN i.137 (catasso ˚iyo); iv.210, 214; Vv 416 (= one of the 16,000 chief queens of Sakka Vv-a 183); Dhp-a i.73; Pv-a 21, Pv-a 31. sapajāpatika (adj.) together with his wife Vin i.23, Vin i.342; Vin iv.62; Ja i.345; Pv-a 20.

Ved. prajāpati, prajā + pati Lord of all created beings, Lord of Creation

Pajāyati

to be born or produced Ja v.386; Ja vi.14.

pa + jāyati

Pajāyana

(nt.) being born Vism 223.

fr. pa + jan

Pajja1

a path, road Snp 514; DN-a i.262.

cp. Sk. padya

Pajja2

(nt.) foot-oil, foot-salve Vin i.205; DN ii.240; Ja iii.120; Ja iv.396; Ja v.376 (= pādabbhañjana C.).

cp. Sk. padya & pādya belonging to the feet, Lat. acupedius swift-footed; Gr. πεζός foot-soldier see also pattika1

Pajjati

to go, go to; usually not in simplex, but only in compn with prefixes; as āpajjati, uppajjati, nipajjati etc ■ Alone only in one doubtful passage, viz. AN iv.362 (vv.ll. paccati, pabbati gacchati.) ■ pp. panna (q.v.).

pad, Vedic padyate only in meaning “to come to fall,” later Sk. also “to go to”

Pajjalati

to burn (forth), blaze up, go into flame Vin i.180; Snp 687 (sikhi pajjalanto); Ja i.215 Thag-a 62; Pv-a 38 ■ pp. pajjalita (q.v.).

pa + jalati of jval

Pajjalita

in flames, burning, blazing SN i.133; Snp p.21 (aggi); Dhp 146; Pv-a 43 (sāṭakā).

pp. of pajjalati

Pajjunna

rain-cloud Ja i.332 (p. vuccati megho); iv.253. Otherwise only as Np. of the Rain God DN ii.260; SN i.29; Ja i.331.

Ved. parjanya, for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under quercus & spargo

Pajjota

light, lustre, splendour, a lamp SN i.15, SN i.47; AN ii.140; Snp 349; Pp 25 Sdhp 590 ■ telapajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16 = DN i.85; AN i.56 ≈; Snp p.15 ■ dhammapajjota the lamp of the Dhamma Mil 21. paññā-pajjota the torch of knowledge Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 292, Dhs 555; Vb-a 115. pajjotassa nibbānaṃ the extinguishing of the lamp DN ii.157; SN i.159; AN iv.3.

cp. Ved. pradyota, pra + dyut

Pajjhāyati

to be in flames, to waste, decay, dry up; fig. to be consumed or overcome with grief disappointment or remorse Vin iii.19; Vin iv.5; AN ii.214 AN ii.216; AN iii.57; Ja iii.534 (pajjhāti metri causa; C = anusocati) = Mil 5 ■ ppr. pajjhāyanto downcast, in formula tuṇhībhūto mankubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho p. MN i.132, MN i.258 and passim.

pa + jhāyati2

Pañca

(adj.-n.m.) [Ved. pañca, Idg. *penqṷe; cp. Gr. πέντε, Lat. quīnque, Goth. fimf, Lith. penki, Oir. coic number 5 ■ Cases: gen. dat. pañcannaṃ, instr. abl pañcahi, loc. pañcasu; often used in compositional form pañca˚ (cp. Ved. pañcāra with 5 spokes i.16413; Gr.πεμπώβολος, Lat. quinqu-ennis etc.).

1. Characteristics of No. 5 in its use, with ref, to lit. & fig. application “Five” is the number of “comprehensive and yet simple” unity or a set; it is applied in all cases of a natural and handy comprehension of several items into a group, after the 5 fingers of the hand, which latter lies at the bottom of all primitive expressions of No. 5 (see also below pañc’ angulika. The word for 5 itself in its original form is identical with the word for hand *prəq cp. Lat. com˚, decem, centum etc.) -

A. No. 5, appld (a) with ref. to time: catupañcāhaṃ 4 or 5 days Ja ii.114 (cp. quinque diebus Horace Sat i.316); maraṇaṃ tuyhaṃ oraṃ māsehi pañcahi after 5 months Vv 6310, p. māse vasitvā DN-a i.319 (cp. qu menses Hor. Sat. ii.3289) ■ (b) of space: ˚yojanaṭṭhāna Ja iii.504; ˚yojan-ubbedho gajavaro Vv-a 33 ˚bhūmako pāsādo Ja i.58 (cp. the house of Death as 5 stories high in Grimm, Mārchen No. 42 ed. Reclam)-(c) of a group, set, company, etc. (cp. 5 peoples RV iii.379; vi.114; viii.92 etc.; gods x.553; priests ii.3414iii.77; leaders of the Greek ships Hom. Iliad 16, 171 ambassadors Genesis 472; quinque viri Hor. Sat. ii.555 Epist. ii.124): p. janā Ja v.230; p. amaccā Ja v.231; p hatthino Dhp-a i.164; pañca nāriyo agamiṃsu Vv 322 p. puttāni khādāmi Pv i.63Note. No. 5 in this appln is not so frequent in Pāli as in older literature (Vedas e.g. ); instead of the simple 5 we find more freq the higher decimals 50 and 500. See also below §§ 3, 4.

B. No. 15 in two forms: pañcadasa (f. ˚ī the 15th day of the month Vv 156 = AN i.144; Snp 402) Vv-a 67 (˚kahāpaṇa-sahassāni dāpesi), and paṇṇarasa (also as f ī of the 15th or full-moon day Pv iii.31; Dhp-a i.198 Dhp-a iii.92; Dhp-a iv.202; Vv-a 314; Snp-a 78) Snp 153 (pannaraso uposatho); Vv 642 (paṇṇarase va cando; expld as paṇṇarasiyaṃ Vv-a 276); Dhp-a i.388 (of age, 15 or 16 years) DN-a i.17 (˚bhedo Khuddaka-nikāyo); Snp-a 357 (pannarasahi bhikkhu-satehi = 1500, instead of the usual 500) Pv-a 154 (˚yojana). The appln is much the same as 5 and 50 (see below), although more rare, e.g. as measure of space: ˚yojana Dhp-a i.17 (next in sequence to paṇṇāsa-yojana); Ja i.315; Pv-a 154 (cp. 15 furlongs from Jerusalem to Bethany John 11, 18; 15 cubits above the mountains rose the flood Gen. 7. 20).

C. No. 25 in two forms: pañcavīsati (the usual) e.g. Dhs-a 185 sq.; Mil 289 (citta-dubbalī-karaṇā dhammā) paṇṇa-vīsati, e.g. Ja iv.352 (nāriyo); Thig 67, and paṇṇuvīsaṃ (only at Ja iii.138). Similarly to 15 and 25 the number 45 (pañca-cattāḷīsa) is favoured in giving distances with ˚yojana, e.g. at Ja i.147, Ja i.348; Dhp-a i.367Application: of 25: (1) time: years Ja iii.138; Dhp-a i.4; (2) space: miles high and wide Dhp-a ii.64 (ahipeto); Vv-a 236 (yojanāni pharitvā pabhā).

2. Remarks on the use of 50 and 500 (5000). Both 50 and 500 are found in stereotyped and always recurring combinations (not in Buddhist literature alone, but all over the Ancient World), and applied to any situation indiscriminately. They have thus lost their original numerical significance and their value equals an expression like our “thousands,” cp. the use of Lat. mille and 600, also similarly many other high numerals in Pāli literature, as mentioned under respective units (4, 6, 8 e.g. in 14, 16, 18, etc.). Psychologically 500 is to be expld as “a great hand,” i.e. the 5 fingers magnified to the 2nd decade, and is equivalent to an expression like “a lot (originally “only one,” cp. casting the lot, then the one as a mass or collection), or like heaps, tons, a great many, etc ■ Thus 50 (and 500) as the numbers of “comm-union” are especially freq. in recording a company of men, a host of servants, animals in a herd etc., wherever the single constituents form a larger (mostly impressive, important) whole, as an army, the king’s retinue, etc ■ A. No. 50 (paññāsa; the by-form paṇṇāsa only at Dhp-a iii.207), in foll. applns: (a) of time: does not occur, but see below under 55 ■ (b) of space (cp. 50 cubits the breadth of Noah’s ark Gen. 6. 15; the height of the gallows (Esther 5. 14 7. 9) Ja i.359 (yojanāni); Dhp-a iii.207 (˚hattho ubbedhena rukkho); Vism 417 (paripuṇṇa ˚yojana suriyamaṇḍala); Dhp-a i.17 (˚yojana) ■ (c) of a company or group (cp. 50 horses RV ii.185; v.185; wives viii.1936; men at the oars Hom. Il. 2. 719; 16. 170 servants Hom. Od. 7, 103, 22, 421) Ja iii.220 (corā) v.161 (pallankā), 421 (dijakaññāyo); Snp p.87; Snp-a 57 (bhikkhū) ■ Note. 55 (pañcapaññāsa) is used instead of 50 in time expressions (years) e.g. at Dhp-a i.125; Dhp-a ii.57; Pv-a 99, Pv-a 142; also in groups: Dhp-a i.99 (janā) ■ B. No. 500 (pañcasata˚, pañcasatā pañcasatāni) ■ (a) of time: years (as Peta or Petī) Vv 8434; Pv ii.15; Pv-a 152 (with additional 50). (b) of space: miles high Pv iv.328 Ja i.204 (˚yojana-satikā); Vism 72 (˚dhanu-satika, 500 bows in distance) ■ (C) of groups of men, servants, or a herd, etc. (cp. 500 horses RV x.9314; witnesses of the rising of Christ 1 Cor. 15

6; men armed Vergil Aen 10. 204; men as representatives Hom. Od. 3. 7; 500 knights or warriors very frequently in Nibelungenlied where it is only meant to denote a “goodly company 500 or more”) Arahants Kp-a 98; Bhikkhus very frequent, e.g. DN i.1; Vin ii.199; Ja i.116, Ja i.227; Dhp-a ii.109, Dhp-a ii.153; Dhp-a iii.262, Dhp-a iii.295; Dhp-a iv.184, Dhp-a iv.186; Sāvakas Ja i.95 Upāsakas Ja ii.95; Pv-a 151; Paccekabuddhas Dhp-a iv.201; Pv-a 76; Vighāsâdā Ja ii.95; Dhp-a ii.154; Sons Pv-a 75; Thieves Dhp-a ii.204; Pv-a 54; Relatives Pv-a 179; Women-servants (parivārikā itthiyo) Pv ii.126 Vv-a 69, Vv-a 78, Vv-a 187; Pv-a 152; Oxen AN iv.41; Monkeys Ja iii.355; Horses Vin iii.6 ■ Money etc. as present reward or fine representing a “round-sum” (cp. Nibelungen 314: horses with gold, 317: mark; dollars as reward Grimm No. 7; drachms as pay Hor. Sat. ii.743 kahāpaṇas Snp 980, Snp 982; Pv-a 273; blows with stick as fine Vin i.247Various: a caravan usually consists of 500 loaded wagons, e.g. Ja i.101; Dhp-a ii.79; Pv-a 100, Pv-a 112; chariots Vv-a 78; ploughs Snp p.13. Cp SN i.148 (vyagghī-nisā); Vin ii.285 (ūna-pañcasatāni) Ja ii.93 (accharā); v.75 (vāṇijā); Dhp-a i.89 (suvaṇṇasivikā), 352 (rāja-satāni); iv.182 (jāti˚) Kp-a 176 (paritta-dīpā). Also BSk. pañ’opasthāyikā-śatāni Divy 529; pañca-mātrāṇi strī-śatāni Divy 533Note. When Gotama said that his “religion” would last 500 years he meant that it would last a very long time, practically for ever. The later change of 500 to 5,000 is immaterial to the meaning of the expression, it only indicates a later period (cp. 5,000 in Nibelungeniled for 500, also 5,000 men in ambush Joshua 8. 12; converted by Peter Acts 4. 4; fed by Christ with 5 loaves Matthew 14. 21). Still more impressive than 500 is the expression 5 Koṭis (5 times 100,000 or 10 million), which belongs to a comparatively later period, e.g. at Dhp-a i.62 (ariya-sāvaka-koṭiyo), 256 (˚mattā-ariyasāvakā) iv.190 (p. koti-mattā ariya-sāvakā).

3. Typical sets of 5 in the Pali Canon. ˚aggaṃ first fruits of 5 (kinds), viz. khett˚, rās˚, koṭṭh˚, kumbhi˚ bhojan˚ i.e. of the standing crop, the threshing floor the granary, the pottery, the larder Snp-a 270. ˚aṅgā 5 gentlemanly qualities (of king or brahmin): sujāta, ajjhāyaka abhirūpa, sīlavā, paṇḍita (see anga; on another combn with anga see below). The phrase pañc’ angasamannāgata & ˚vippahīna (SN i.99; AN v.16) refers to the 5 nīvaraṇāni: see expld at Vism 146. ˚aṅgikaturiya 5 kinds of music: ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana susira. ˚abhiññā 5 psychic powers (see Cpd. 209) ˚ānantarika-kammāni 5 acts that have immediate retribution (Mil 25), either 5 of the 6 abhiṭhānas (q.v. or (usually) murder, theft, impurity, lying, intemperance (the 5 sīlas) cp. Dhs trsl. 267. ˚indriyāni 5 faculties, viz. saddhā, viriya, sati, samādhi, paññā (see indriya B. 15

19). ˚vidhaṃ (rāja-) kakudhabhaṇḍaṃ insignia regis viz. vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta pādukā. ˚kalyāṇāni, beauty-marks: kesa˚, maṃsa˚ aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚. ˚kāmaguṇā pleasures of the 5 senses (= taggocarāni pañc’ āyatanāni gahitāni honti Snp-a 211). ˚gorasā 5 products of the cow: khīra, dadhi takka, navanīta, sappi. ˚cakkhūni, sorts of vision (of a Buddha): maṃsa˚ dibba˚ paññā˚ buddha˚ samanta˚ ˚taṇhā cravings, specified in 4 sets of 5 each: see Nd ii.271v. ˚nikāyā 5 collections (of Suttantas) in the Buddh. Canon, viz. Dīgha˚ Majjhima˚ Saṃyutta˚, Anguttara˚ Khuddaka˚, e.g. Vin ii.287. ˚nīvaraṇāni or obstacles: kāmacchanda, abhijjhā-vyāpāda, thīnamiddha uddhacca-kukkucca, vicikicchā. ˚patiṭṭhitaṃ 5 fold prostration or veneration, viz. with forehead waist, elbows, knees, feet (Childers) in phrase ˚ena vandati (sometimes ˚ṃ vandati, e.g. Snp-a 78, Snp-a 267; Ja v.502; Snp-a 267, Snp-a 271, Snp-a 293, Snp-a 328, Snp-a 436; Vv-a 6; Dhp-a i.197; Dhp-a iv.178, etc. ˚bandhana either 5 ways of binding or pinioning or 5 fold bondage Ja iv.3 (as “ure pañcangika-bandhanaṃ” cp. kaṇṭhe pañcamehi bandhanehi bandhitvā SN iv.201); Nda 304iii.b2 (rājā bandhāpeti andhu-bandhanena vā rajju˚, sankhalika˚, latā˚, parikkhepa˚), with which cp. Śikṣāsamucc. 165: rājñā pañcapāśakena bandhanena baddhaḥ ■ There is a diff kind of bandhana which has nothing to do with binding but which is the 5 fold ordeal (obligation: pañcavidhabandhana-kāraṇaṃ) in Niraya, and consists of the piercing of a red hot iron stake through both hands both feet and the chest; it is a sort of crucifixion. We may conjecture that this “bandhana” is a corruption of “vaddhana” (of vyadh, or viddhana?), and that the expression originally was pañcaviddhana-kāraṇa (instead of pañca-vidha-bandhana-k˚). See passages under bandhana & cp. MN iii.182; AN i.141; Kv 597; Snp-a 479. ˚balāni 5 forces: saddhā˚ viriya˚ sati samādhi˚ paññā˚ DN ii.120; MN ii.12; SN iii.96; AN iii.12 (see also bala). ˚bhojanāni 5 kinds of food: odāna kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṃsa Vin iv.176. ˚macchariyāni 5 kinds of selfishness: āvāsa˚ kula˚ lābha vaṇṇa˚ dhamma˚. ˚rajāni defilements: rūpa˚, sadda etc. (of the 5 senses) Nd i.505; Snp-a 574. ˚vaṇṇā 5 colours (see ref. for colours under pīta and others), viz nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, kaṇha, odāta (of B’s eye) Nd ii.235I.a; others with ref. to paduma-puṇḍarīka Vv-a 41; to paduma Dhp-a iii.443; to kusumāni DN-a i.140; Dhp-a iv.203. ˚vaṇṇa in another meaning (fivefold) in connection with pīti (q.v.). ˚saṃyojanāni fetters (q.v.) ˚saṅgā impurities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha, māna, diṭṭhi (cp. taṇhā) Dhp-a iv.109. ˚sīla the 5 moral precepts as sub-division of the 10 (see dasasīla and Nd ii.under sīla on p. 277).

4. Other (not detailed) passages with 5: Snp 660 (abbudāni), 677 (nahutāni koṭiyo pañca); Thig 503 (˚kaṭuka = pañcakāmaguṇa-rasa Thag-a 291); Dhp-a ii.25 (˚mahānidhi); Snp-a 39 (˚pakāra-gomaṇḍala-puṇṇabhāva). Cp. further: guṇā Mil 249; paṇṇāni Vin i.201 (nimba˚, kuṭaja˚, paṭola˚, sulasi˚, kappāsika˚); Paṇḍu-rāja-puttā Ja v.426; pabbagaṇṭhiyo Mil 103; pucchā Dhs-a 55; mahā -pariccāgā Dhp-a iii.441 mahā -vilokanāni Dhp-a i.84; vatthūni Vin ii.196 sq. vāhanāni (of King Pajjota) Dhp-a i.196; suddhāvāsā Dhs A 14. In general see Vin v.128

133 (var. sets of 5).

-aṅga five (bad) qualities (see anga 3 and above 3), in phrase vippahīna free from the 5 sins DN iii.269; Nd ii.284 C; cp. BSk. pañcānga-viprahīna. Ep. of the Buddha Divy 95, Divy 264 & ˚samannāgata endowed with the 5 good qualities AN v.15 (of senāsana, expld at Vism 122): see also above. -aṅgika consisting of 5 parts fivefold, in foll. combns: ˚jhāna (viz. vitakka, vicāra pīti, sukha, cittass’ ekaggatā) Dhs 83; ˚turiya orchestra SN i.131; Thag 398; Thag 2, Thag 139; Vv 364; Dhp-a i.274, Dhp-a i.394 ˚bandhana bond Ja iv.3. -aṅgula = ˚angulika Ja iv.153 (gandha˚); Snp-a 39 (usabhaṃ nahāpetvā bhojetvā ˚ṃ datvā mālaṃ bandhitvā). -aṅgulika (also ˚aka) the 5 finger-mark, palm-mark, the magic mark of the spread hand with the fingers extended (made after the hand 5 fingers have been immersed in some liquid, preferably a solution of sandal wood, gandha; but also blood) See Vogel, the 5 finger-token in Pāli Literature, Amsterdam Akademie 1919 (with plates showing ornaments on Bharhut Tope), cp. also J.P.T,S. 1884, 84 sq. It is supposed to provide magical protection (esp. against the Evil Eye). Vin ii.123 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.116) Ja i.166, Ja i.192; Ja ii.104 (gandha ˚ṃ deti), 256 (gandhaā appld to a cetiya); iii.23, 160 (lohita˚); Vv 3318 (gandha˚ṃ adāsiṃ Kassapassa thūpasmiṃ); Mvu 32, Mvu 4 (see trsl p. 220); Dhp-a iii.374 (goṇānaṃ gandha-˚āni datvā) Snp-a 137 (setamālāhi sabba-gandha-sugandhehi p˚akehi ca alankatā paripuṇṇa-angapaccangā, of oxen). Cp Mvu i.269 (stūpeṣu pañcangulāni; see note on p 579). Quotations of similar use in brahmanical literature see at Vogel p. 6 sq. -āvudha (āyudha) set of 5 weapons (sword, spear, bow, battle-axe, shield, after Childers) Mil 339 (see Mil trsl. ii.227), cp. p˚ sannaddha Ja iii.436, Ja iii.467; Ja iv.283, Ja iv.437; Ja v.431; Ja vi.75 sannaddha-p˚ Ja iv.160 (of sailors). They seem to be different ones at diff. passages. -āhaṃ 5 days Vin iv.281; Ja ii.114. -cūḷaka with 5 topknots Ja v.250 (of a boy). -nakha with 5 claws, Name of a five-toed animal Ja v.489 (so read for pañca na khā, misunderstood by C.). -paṭṭhika at Vin ii.117, Vin ii.121, Vin ii.152; is not clear (v.l. paṭika). Vin. Texts iii.97 trsl. “cupboards” and connect it with Sk. paṭṭikā, as celapattikaṃ Vin ii.128 undoubtedly is (“strip of cloth laid down for ceremonial purposes,” trsl. iii.128). It also occurs at Vin iv.47 -patikā (f.) having had 5 husbands Ja v.424, Ja v.427. -mālin of a wild animal Ja vi.497 (= pancangika-turiya-saddo viya C., not clear). -māsakamattaṃ a sum of 5 māsakas Dhp-a ii.29. -vaggiya (or ˚ika Snp-a 198) belonging to a group of five. The 5 brahmins who accompanied Gotama when he became an ascetic are called p. bhikkhū Their names are Aññākondañña, Bhaddiya Vappa, Assaji, Mahānāma. MN i.170; MN ii.94; SN iii.66; Pv-a 21 (˚e ādiṃ katvā); Snp-a 351; cp. chabbaggiya -vidha fivefold Ja i.204 (˚ā abhirakkhā); vi.341 (˚paduma), ˚bandhana: see this. -sādhāraṇa-bhāva fivefold connection Ja iv.7. -seṭṭha (Bhagavā) “the most excellent in the five” Snp 355 (= pañcannaṃ paṭhamasissānaṃ pañcavaggiyānaṃ seṭṭho, pañcahi vā saddhādīhi indriyehi sīlādīhi vā dhamma-khandhehi ativisiṭṭhehi cakkhūhi ca seṭṭho Snp-a 351). -hattha having 5 hands Ja v.431.

Pañcaka

(adj.) fivefold, consisting of five Ja i.116 (˚kammaṭṭhāna); Dhs. chapters 167–⁠175 (˚naya fivefold system of jhāna, cp. Dhs. trsln 52); Snp-a 318 (˚nipāta of Anguttara) ■ nt. pañcakaṃ a pentad, five Vin i.255 (the 5 parts of the kaṭhina robe, see Vin Texts ii.155), cp. p. 287; pl. pañcakā sets of five Vism 242. The 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body are divided into 4 pañcaka’s (i.e. sets of 5 more closely related parts), viz. taca˚; “skin-pentad,” the 5 dermatoid constituents: kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco vakka˚; the next five, ending with the kidneys; papphāsa˚; id. ending with the lungs & comprising the inner organs proper; matthaluṅga˚; id. ending with the brain and 2 chakka’s (sets of 6), viz. meda˚ & mutta˚;. See e.g. Vb-a 249, Vb-a 258.

fr. pañca

Pañcakkhattuṃ

(adv.) five times.

Pañcadhā

(adv.) in five ways, fivefold Dhs-a 351.

Pañcama

(adj.) num. ord the fifth DN i.88; Snp 84, Snp 99, Snp 101; Vv-a 102; Pv-a 52 (˚e māse in the 5th month the Petī has to die); Dhp-a iii.195 (˚e sattāhe in the 5th week) ■ f. pañcamā Pv-a 78 (ito ˚āya jātiyā) and pañcamī Snp 437 (senā); Pv-a 79 (jāti).

compar ■ superl. formation fr. pañca, with ˚ma as in Lat. supremus, for the usual ˚to as in Gr. πέμπτος, Lat. quintus, also Sk. pañcathaḥ

Pañcamaka

(adj.) = pañcama Ja i.55.

Pañcaso

(adv.) by fives.

Pañja

heap, pile AN ii.75 (meaning different?); Cp i.1016.

is it to be puñja?

Pañjara

(m. & nt.) a cage, Ja i.436; Ja ii.141; Ja iii.305 (sīha˚); iv.213; v.232 (sīha), 365; vi.385 (sīha˚), 391; Mil 23 (˚antaragata gone into the c.); 27; Dhp-a i.164 (nakha˚), where meaning is “frame”; Vb-a 238; + sīha˚ meaning window.

cp. Epic Sk. pañjara, which probably belongs to Lat. pango, q.v. Walde,; Lat. Wtb. s. v.

Pañjali

(adj.) with outstretched hands, as token of reverence Snp 1031; in cpd. pañjalī-kata (cp. añjalīkata; añjali + pp. of kṛ; raising one’s folded hands Snp 566, Snp 573; Thag 460; Ja vi.501. Cp. BSk. prāñjalīkṛta MV astu ii.257, 287, 301.

pa + añjali. Cp. Ep. Sk. prāñjali

Pañjalika

(adj.) holding up the clasped hands as token of respectful salutation SN i.226; Snp 485, Snp 598.

fr. pañjali

Pañjasa

(adj.) in the right order, straight AN ii.15.

pa + añjasa

Pañña

(-˚) (adj.) of wisdom, endowed with knowledge or insight, possessed of the highest cognition, in foll. cpds.: anissaraṇa˚ DN i.245; SN ii.194; SN iv.332; anoma˚ Snp 343; appa˚ SN i.198; Ja ii.166 Ja iii.223, Ja iii.263; avakujja˚ AN i.130; gambhīra˚ SN i.190 javana˚ SN i.63; Nd ii.235; tikkha˚; dup˚ DN iii.252, DN iii.282; SN i.78, SN i.191; SN ii.159 sq.; MN iii.25; AN ii.187 sq.; Dhp 111 Dhp 140; Pp 13; Dhp-a ii.255; nibbedhika˚ SN i.63; AN ii.178 Nd ii.235; puṭhu˚ ibid.; bhāvita˚ SN iv.111; AN v.42 sq. bhūri˚ SN iii.143; SN iv.205; manda˚ Vb-a 239; mahā SN i.63, SN i.121; SN ii.155; AN i.23, AN i.25; AN ii.178 sq.; Nd ii.235; Snp-a 347; sap˚ SN i.13, SN i.22, SN i.212; SN iv.210; AN iv.245; Pv i.88 115; Pv-a 60 (= paṇḍita), 131 (+ buddhimant); suvimutta˚ AN v.29 sq.; hāsa˚ SN i.63, SN i.191; SN v.376; Nd ii.235 By itself (i.e. not in cpd.) only at Dhp 208 (= lokiyalokuttara-paññāya sampanna Dhp-a iii.172) and 375 (= paṇḍita Dhp-a iv.111).

the adj. form of paññā

Paññatā

(f.) having sense, wisdom AN iii.421 (dup˚ = foolishness) v.159 (id.); mahā˚, puthu˚ vipula˚ AN i.45. See also paññatta2.

secondary abstract formation fr. paññā, in meaning equal to paññāṇa

Paññatta1

pointed out, made known, ordered, designed, appointed ordained SN ii.218; AN i.98, AN i.151; AN iv.16, AN iv.19; AN v.74 sq.; Pv iv.135; Dhp-a i.274; Vv-a 9 (su˚ mañca-pītha), 92 (niccabhatta); Pv-a 78. Esp. freq. in ster. formula paññatte āsane nisīdi he sat down on the appointed (i.e. special) chair (seat) DN i.109, DN i.125, DN i.148; SN i.212; Dhp 148; Snp-a 267; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 61.

pp. of paññāpeti, cp. BSk. prajñapta

Paññatta2

(nt.) wisdom, sense etc. SN v.412 (v.l. paññatā). See also paññatā.

abstr. fr. paññā

Paññatti

(f.) making known, manifestation, description, designation, name, idea notion, concept. On term see Cpd. 3 sq., 198, 199 Kvu trsln 1; Dhs trsln 340 ■ MN iii.68; SN iii.71; SN iv.38 (māra˚), 39 (satta˚, dukkha˚, loka˚); AN ii.17; AN v.190; Pts ii.171, Pts ii.176; Pp 1; Dhs i.309; Ne 1 sq., 38, 188 Kp-a 102, Kp-a 107; DN-a i.139; Snp-a 445, Snp-a 470; Pv-a 200. The spelling also occurs as paṇṇatti, e.g. at Ja ii.65 (˚vahāra); Mil 173 (loka˚); Kp-a 28; adj. paṇṇattika (q.v.).

fr. paññāpeti, cp. paññatta1

Paññavant

(adj.) possessed of insight, wise, intelligent sensible Vin i.60; DN iii.237, DN iii.252, DN iii.265, DN iii.282, DN iii.287; MN i.292 MN iii.23; SN i.53, SN i.79; SN ii.159 sq., 207, 279 (daharo ce pi p.) iv.243; v.100, 199, 392, 401; AN ii.76, AN ii.187, AN ii.230; AN iii.2 sq. 127, 183; iv.85, 217, 271, 357; v.25, 124 sq.; Snp 174 Nd ii.259; Dhp 84; Ja i.116; Pp 13; Dhp-a ii.255; Kp-a 54 Vb-a 239, Vb-a 278; Pv-a 40. Cp. paññāṇavant.

paññā + vant, with reduction of ā to a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 23

Paññā

(f.) intelligence, comprising all the higher faculties of cognition, “intellect as conversant with general truths” (Dial. ii.68), reason wisdom, insight, knowledge, recognition. See on term Mrs. Rh. D. “Buddhism” (1914) pp. 94, 130, 201; also Cpd. 40, 41, 102 and discussion of term at Dhs. trsl. 17 339, cp. scholastic definition with all the synonyms of intellectual attainment at Nd ii.380 = Dhs 16 (paññā pajānanā vicayo etc.). As tt. in Buddhist Psych Ethics it comprises the highest and last stage as 3rd division in the standard “Code of religious practice which leads to Arahantship or Final Emancipation These 3 stages are: (1) sīla-kkhandha (or ˚sampadā) code of moral duties; (2) samādhi-kkhandha (or cittasampadā) code of emotional duties or practice of con centration & meditation; (3) paññā-kkhandha (or ˚sampadā) code of intellectual duties or practice of the attainment of highest knowledge. (See also jhāna1. They are referred to in almost every Suttanta of Dīgha 1 (given in extenso at DN i.62–⁠85) and frequently mentioned elsewhere, cp. DN ii.81, DN ii.84, DN ii.91 (see khandha, citta sīla) ■ DN i.26 = DN i.162 (˚gatena caranti diṭṭhigatāni) 174 (˚vāda), 195 (˚pāripūrin); ii.122 (ariyā); iii.101 158, 164, 183, 230, 237, 242, 284 sq.; SN i.13 = SN i.165 (sīla citta, paññā), 17, 34, 55; ii.185 (sammā˚), 277; v.222 (ariyā); MN i.144 (id.); iii.99 (id.), 245 (paramā), 272 (sammā˚); AN i.61, AN i.216; AN ii.1 (ariyā); iv.105 (id.) iii.106 (sīla, citta, p.), 352 (kusalesu dhammesu); iv.11 (id.); v.123 sq.; Iti 35, Iti 40 (˚uttara), 51 (sīlaṃ samādhi p. ca), 112 (ariyā˚); Snp 77, Snp 329, Snp 432, Snp 881, Snp 1036 and passim; Dhp 38, Dhp 152, Dhp 372; Nd i.77; Nd ii.380; Pts i.53 Pts i.64 sq., 71 sq., 102 sq., 119; ii.150 sq., 162, 185 sq. Pp 25, Pp 35, Pp 54 (˚sampadā); Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 555; Ne 8, Ne 15 Ne 17, Ne 28, Ne 54, Ne 191; Vb-a 140, Vb-a 396; Pv-a 40 (paññāya abhāvato for lack of reason); Sdhp 343. On paññāya see sep. article. See also adhipanna (adhisīla, adhicitta + ).

-ādhipateyya the supremacy of wisdom AN ii.137 -indriya the faculty of reason (with sati˚ & samādhi˚ DN iii.239, DN iii.278; Dhs 16, Dhs 20 etc.; Nett. 7, 15 sq; 191 -obhāsa the lustre of wisdom Pts i.119; Dhs 16, Dhs 20 etc -kkhandha the code of cognition (see above) Vin i.62; DN iii.229, DN iii.279; Iti 51; Nd i.21; Ne 70, Ne 90, Ne 128. It is always combd with sīla˚ & samādhi-kkhandha.; -cakkhu the eye of wisdom (one of the 5 kinds of extraordinary sight of a Buddha: see under cakkhumant) DN iii.219; SN v.467; Iti 52; Nd i.354; Nd ii.235. -dada giving or bestowing wisdom SN i.33; Snp 177. -dhana the treasure of perfect knowledge (one of the 7 treasures, see dhana DN iii.163, DN iii.251; AN iii.53; Vv-a 113. -nirodhika tending to the destruction of reason SN v.97; Iti 82. -paṭilābha acquisition of wisdom SN v.411; AN i.45; Pts ii.189 -pāsāda the stronghold of supreme knowledge Dhp 28 (= dibba-cakkhuṃ sankhātaṃ ˚ṃ). -bala the power of reason or insight, one of the 5 powers DN iii.229, DN iii.253; MN iii.72; AN iv.363; Snp 212; Dhs 16, Dhs 20 etc.; Ne 54 Ne 191; Vv-a 7. -bāhulla wealth or plenty of wisdom SN v.411; AN i.45. -bhūmi ground or stage of wisdom; a name given to the Paṭicca-samuppāda by Bdhgh at Vism xvii, pp. 517 sq. (˚niddesa). -ratana the gem of reason or knowledge Dhs 16, Dhs 20 etc. -vimutta freed by reason DN ii.70; DN iii.105, DN iii.254; MN i.35, MN i.477; AN i.61 AN ii.6; AN iv.452; Snp 847; Nd i.207; Kv 58; Ne 199 -vimutti emancipation through insight or knowledge (always paired with ceto-vimutti) DN i.156, DN i.167; DN iii.78 DN iii.102, DN iii.108, DN iii.132, DN iii.281; Iti 75, Iti 91; Snp 725, Snp 727; Ne 7, Ne 40 Ne 81, Ne 127; DN-a i.313; Vb-a 464. -visuddhi purity of insight DN iii.288. -vuddhi increase of knowledge SN v.97, SN v.411; AN i.15, AN i.45; AN ii.245. -sampadā the blessing of higher knowledge (see above) AN i.62; AN ii.66; AN iii.12 sq. 182 sq.; iv.284, 322. -sīla conduct and (higher) intelligence Dhp 229 (˚samāhita = lokuttarapaññāya c’ eva pārisuddhisīlena ca samannāgata Dhp-a iii.329); Vv 3423 id. = ariyāya diṭṭhiyā ariyena sīlena ca sāmannāgata Vv-a 155). Often used with yathābhūtaṃ q.v. Cp paññāya.

cp. Vedic prajñā, pa + jñā

Paññāṇa

(nt.) 1. wisdom, knowledge, intelligence DN i.124 (sīla + ); SN i.41; AN iv.342; Snp 96, Snp 1136; DN-a i.171, DN-a i.290.

2. mark, sign, token Ja v.195.

pa + ñāṇa, cp. Vedic prajñāno in both meanings & paññā

Paññāṇavant

(adj.) reasonable, sensible, wise Snp 202, Snp 1090; Ja v.222; Ja vi.361; Nd ii.382.

paññāṇa + vant

Paññāta

known, renowned DN-a i.143; ap˚ unknown, defamed Vin iv.231; SN iv.46; AN iii.134 (where also der. appaññātika).

pp. of pajānāti

Paññāpaka

(adj. n.) one who advises, assigns or appoints Vin ii.305 (āsana˚).

fr. paññāpeti

Paññāpana

(nt.) disclosure, discovering MN iii.17; SN iii.59; declaration Dhs-a 11.

fr. paññāpeti

Paññāpetar

one who imparts knowledge, discloser of truths, discoverer DN ii.223.

n. ag. of paññāpeti

Paññāpeti

1. to make known, declare, point out, appoint, assign, recognise, define DN i.119 (brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṃ), 180, 185, 237; Iti 98 (tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ), Pp 37, Pp 38; Pv-a 61 (āsanaṃ).

2. to lay down, fold out, spread Pv-a 43 (sanghāṭiṃ) ■ pp paññatta (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. paññāpāpeti Ja iii.371.

Caus. of pajānāti

Paññāya

(indecl.) understanding fully, knowing well, realising, in full recognition, in thorough realisation or understanding. Used most frequently with yathābhūtaṃ (q.v. SN i.13 (bhāveti), 44 (lokasmiṃ pajjoto), 214 (parisujjhati); ii.7 sq. (uppajjati), 68 (suppaṭividdho); iii.6 (id.); v.324 (ajjhupekkhati); AN i.125 (anuggahissati) iii.44 (vaḍḍhati); iv.13 sq. (pariyogāhamāna); v.39 (disvā) Snp 1035 (see Nd ii.380ii); Iti 93 (moh’aggiṃ, v.l. saññāya); Pv-a 60 (upaparikkhitvā, as expln of ñatvā) 140 = viceyya.

ger. of pajānāti, in relation ˚ñāya: ñatvā as uṭṭhāya: ṭhatvā; so expld by P. Commentators whereas modern interpreters have taken it as instr. of paññā

Paññāyati

to be (well) known, to be clear or evident, to be perceived, seen or taken for, to appear Iti 89; Dhp-a i.14, Dhp-a i.95 (fut. paññāyissatha you will be well known); ii.75; Pv-a 83 (pālito eva), 166 (dissati + ); ppr. paññāyamāna Dhp-a i.29; Pv-a 96 (= perceivable) ■ aor. paññāyi Pv-a 172 (paccakkhato).

Pass. of pajānāti

Pañha

mode of asking, inquiry, investigation, question DN i.11 (deva˚) MN i.83; MN iii.30; AN i.103, AN i.288; AN iii.81, AN iii.191 sq. 419 sq.; v.50 sq.; Snp 512, Snp 957, Snp 1005, Snp 1024, Snp 1148 etc. Nd i.464; Mil 28, Mil 340; DN-a i.97. pañhaṃ pucchati to ask a question Nd ii.under pucchā (q.v.).

-paṭibhāna an answer to a question MN i.83; Mil 28 -vīmaṃsaka one who tests a question Snp 827; Nd i.166; Snp-a 538. -vyākaraṇa mode of answering questions, of which there are 4, viz. ekaṃsa “direct,” vibhajja “qualified,” paṭipucchā “after further questioning, ṭhapanīya “not to be answered or left undecided,” thus enumd at DN iii.229; AN i.197 sq.; AN ii.46; Mil 339.

Ved. praśna, for details of etym. see pucchati

Paṭa

cloth; cloak, garment SN ii.219 (˚pilotika); Thag 1092 (bhinna-paṭan-dhara “wearing the patchwork cloak” trsl.); Ja iv.494; Kp-a 45, Kp-a 58 (˚tantu); DN-a i.198; Dhp-a ii.45 (puppha˚); iii.295 ˚kañcuka, v.l. kaṭak˚) Vism 16 (bhinna-paṭa-dhara in defn of bhikkhu); Vb-a 327 (id.); Dhs-a 81 (paṭa-paṭa sadda); Vv-a 73, Vv-a 201; Pv-a 185. Cp. paṭikā & paṭalikā; also kappaṭa.

cp. Epic Sk. paṭa, etym. unknown, prob. dialectical

Paṭaggi

counter-fire Vin ii.138; Ja i.212; kacc. 31.

paṭi + aggi

Paṭaṅga

a grasshopper Snp 602; Ja vi.234 Ja vi.506; Mil 272, Mil 407; Dhp-a iv.58; Pv-a 67; Pgdp 59.

cp. *Sk. phaḍingā, but influenced by Sk. pataga a winged animal, bird

Paṭaccarin

(adj.) poor (lit. dressed in old clothes): so read perhaps at Ja vi.227 (vv. ll paḷaccari paṭiccari).;

paṭa + carin but cp. Sk. pāṭaccara a shoplifter Halāyudha 2, 185

Paṭala

(nt.) 1. a covering, membrane, lining, envelope, skin film Vism 257 (maṃsa˚ of the liver, where Kp-a 54 reads maṃsa-piṇḍa), 359 (phaṇa˚); Dhs-a 307 (7 akkhi˚ membranes of the eye); Kp-a 21 (samuppaṭana), 55 (udara mucous membrane of the stomach), 61 (id.); Dhs-a 330 (id.); Snp-a 248 (id.); Pv-a 186 (eka˚ upāhanā, singlelined cp. paṭalika & palāsika & see Morris; J.P.T.S. 1887 165); Vism 446 (kappāsa˚ film of cotton seed); Bdhd 66 (id.).

2. roof, ceiling Pv-a 52 (ayo˚ of iron). 3. a heap, mass (esp. of clouds) Ja i.73 (megha˚); Dhs-a 239 (abbha˚) ■ madhu˚ honey comb Ja i.262; Dhp-a i.59; Dhp-a iii.323.

4. cataract of the eye Dāvs v.27.

connected with paṭa, cp. Sk. paṭala in meaning “section” Vedic, in all other meanings later Sk.

Paṭalika

(adj.) belonging to a cover or lining, having or forming a cover or lining, as adj. said of sandals (eka˚ with single lining) Ja ii.277 (v.l. for ekatalika); iii.80, 81 (id.) ■ as n. f. paṭalikā a woven cloth, a woollen coverlet (embroidered with flowers) usually combd with paṭikā Vin i.192; Vin ii.162; DN i.7 (= ghana-puppho uṇṇāmayo attharako. So āmilākapaṭṭo ti pi vuccati DN-a i.87); AN i.137, AN i.181; AN iii.50, AN iv.94 AN iv.231, AN iv.394.

fr. paṭala

Paṭaha

a kettle-drum, war drum, one of the 2 kinds of drums (bheri) mentioned at Dhs-a 319, viz. mahā-bheri & p ■ bheri; Ja i.355; Dpvs 16, 14; Pv-a 4.

cp. Epic Sk. paṭaha, dial.

Paṭāka

(nt.) a flag MN i.379; Mil 87; Vism 469; Thag-a 70.

cp. Sk. paṭāka, connected with paṭa

Paṭāṇi

at Vin iv.46 (paṭāṇi dinnā hoti) is not clear, it is expld by Bdhgh as “mañcapidhānaṃ (for ˚pīṭhānaṃ pādasikhāsu āṇi dinno hoti.” At DN-a i.77 we find the foll.. “visūkaṃ paṭāni (sic.)-bhūtaṃ dassanan ti visūkadassanaṃ ” and at Dhs-a 393: “paṭāni-gahaṇaṃ gahetvā ekapaden’ eva taṃ nissaddaṃ akāsiṃ.”

Paṭi

(indecl.) directional prefix in well-defined meaning of “back (to), against towards, in opposition to, opposite.” As preposition (with acc. and usually postponed) towards, near by, at usually spelt pati (cp. sampati & sampaṭika) Snp 291 (?), 425 (Nerañjaram (pati); Thag 628 (suriyass’ uggamanam p.); 2, 258 (abhiyobbanam p.), 306 (Nerañjaram p.); Ja i.457 (paṭi suriyaṃ thatvā standing facing the sun); iv.93; vi.491; Pv ii.941 (suriy’ uggamanam p.); Mil 116 (dānam p.); Pv-a 154 (paṭi Gangaṃ against the G.) ■ Most freq. combns are: paṭi + ā (patiyā˚) patisaṃ˚; vi + paṭi˚, sampaṭi˚. The composition (assimilation-) form before vowels is pacc˚; (b. v.) ■ Meanings. I. (lit.) “back,” in the sense of: (1) against, in opposition (opp. anu, see below III.), contrary: viz (a) often with the implication of a hostile attack (anti-against): ˚kaṇṭaka, ˚kosati (re-ject), ˚kūla, ˚khipati (re-fuse, op-pose), ˚gha, ˚codeti (re-prove), thambhati ˚disā, ˚deseti, ˚pakkha, ˚patha, ˚piṃsati, ˚pīḷita, ˚magga ˚manteti, ˚yodha (at-tack), ˚vacana (re-ply), ˚vadati ˚vedeti, ˚sattu (enemy), ˚suṇāti, ˚hata ■ (b) warding off, protecting against (counter-, anti-): ˚kara (antidote), ˚sedhati (ward-off) ■ (c) putting against, setting off in a comparison (counter-, rival): ˚puggala (one’s equal), ˚purisa (rival), ˚bala (adequate), ˚bimba (counterpart), ˚bhāga (id.); ˚malla (rival wrestler) ˚sama, ˚sāsana, ˚sūra, ˚seṭṭha ■ (d) close contact (against, be-): ˚kujjita (covered), ˚gādha, ˚channa (“be-deckt”) ˚vijjhana ■ (2) in return, in exchange (in revenge) ˚akkosati, ˚āneti, ˚katheti, ˚karoti, ˚kūṭa1 ˚kkamati, ˚khamāpeti, ˚gāti (sing in response), ˚gīta ˚daṇḍa (retribution), ˚dadāti, ˚dāna, ˚nivāsana, ˚paṇṇa (in reply), ˚pasaṃsati, ˚piṇḍa, ˚pucchati (ask in return) ˚māreti (kill in revenge), ˚bhaṇḍa (goods in exchange) ˚bhaṇḍati (abuse in return) ˚rodana, ˚roseti, ˚vera (revenge), ˚sammodeti, ˚sātheyya ■ (3) (temporal again, a second time (re-): ˚dasseti (re-appear), ˚nijjhatta, ˚nivattati, ˚pavesati, ˚pākatika (re-stored) ˚bujjhati, ˚vinicchinati, ˚sañjīvita (re-suscitated) ˚sandhi (re-incarnation), ˚sammajjati ■ (4) away from back to (esp. in compn paṭivi˚): ˚kuṭati (shrink back) ˚ghāta (repulsion), ˚dhāvati, ˚neti, ˚paṇāmeti (send away), ˚bandhati (hold back), ˚bāhati (id.), ˚vijacchati ˚vineti, ˚vinodeti (drive out), ˚virata, ˚saṃharati, ˚sallīna, ˚sutta, ˚sumbhita ■ II. (applied, in reflexive sense): (1) to, on to, up to, towards, at-: ˚oloketi (look at), ˚gijjha (hankering after) ˚ggaha, ˚jānāti ˚pūjeti ˚peseti (send out to), ˚baddha (bound to), ˚bhaya ˚yatta, ˚rūpa, ˚laddha, ˚labhati (at-tain), ˚lābha ˚lobheti, ˚sāmeti, ˚sevati (go after), ˚ssata. (2) together (con-, com-), esp. combd with ˚saṃ˚; ; ˚saṃyujati ˚passaddha, ˚maṇḍita, ˚sankharoti, ˚santhāra ■ (3 asunder, apart (“up”): ˚kopeti (shake up), ˚viṃsa (part), ˚vibhatta (divided up). (4) secondary, complementary by-, sham (developed out of meaning I 1 c.): ˚nāsikā (a false nose), ˚sīsaka (sham top knot) esp. freq. in redupl. (iterative) cpds., like anga-paccanga (limb & by-limb, i.e. all kinds of limbs), vata-paṭivatta (duties & secondary duties, all duties). In the latter application paṭi resembles the use of ā, which is more frequent (see ā;5) ■ III. The opposite of pati in directional meaning is anu, with which it is freq. combd either (a) in neg. contrast or (b) in positive emphasis e.g. (a) anuvātaṃ paṭivātaṃ with and against the wind anuloma + paṭiloma with and against the grain; ˚sotaṃ w. & against the stream; (b) anumasati paṭimasati to touch cloesly (lit. up & down) ■; Note. The spelling pati for paṭi occurs frequently without discrimination it is established in the combn with st (as patiṭṭhāti patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are enumd under the respective form of paṭi˚, with the exception of patiṭṭh˚ Pati-aneti

Ved, prati, to Idg. *preti as in Lat. pretium (fr. *pretios)” price” (cp. precious), i.e. equivalent; Gr. πρές (aeol.), προτί against

Paṭi-āneti

to lead or bring back, in duppaṭi-ānaya difficult to bring back Ja iv.43. Pati-orohati

paṭi + ā +

Paṭi-orohati

to descend from DN-a i.251 (˚itvā).

paṭi + ava + ruh

Paṭikaṅkhati

to wish for, long for SN i.227. adj. ˚kankhin MN i.21. See also pāṭikankhin.

paṭi + kānkṣ

Paṭikacca

(indecl.) 1. previously (lit. as cautioned) Vin iv.44; Mil 48 (v.l. ˚kacca) usually as paṭigacc’ eva, e.g. Vin i.342; DN ii.118-(2) providing for (the future), preparing for, with caution, cautiously Vin ii.256; SN i.57; SN v.162; AN ii.25; DN ii.144; Thag 547; Ja iii.208; Ja iv.166 (in expln of paṭikata & paṭikaroti); v.235.

so read for ˚gacca as given at all passages mentioned, see Trenckner Mil p.421, Geiger; Pr. § 381 ■ ger. fr. paṭikaroti (q.v.), cp. Sk pratikāra in same meaning “caution, remedy”

Paṭikaṇṭaka

an enemy, adversary, robber, highwayman Ja i.186; Ja ii.239; Dhp-a iii.456 (v.l. ˚kaṇḍaka).

paṭi + kantaka4

Paṭikata

“done against,” i.e. provided or guarded against Ja iv.166.

pp. of paṭikaroti

Paṭikatheti

to answer, reply Ja vi.224; DN-a i.263.

paṭi + katheti

Paṭikampati

to shake; pret. paccakampittha Ja v.340.

paṭi + kampati

Paṭikamma

(nt.) redress, atonement AN i.21 (sa˚ & a˚ āpatti) Mil 29; DN-a i.96.

paṭi + kamma, cp. paṭikaroti

Paṭikara

counteracting; requital, compensation Vin iv.218 (a˚); DN i.137 (ovāda˚ giving advice or providing for? v.l. pari˚); iii.154.

fr. paṭi + kṛ;

Paṭikaroti

1. to redress, repair, make amends for a sin, expiate (āpattiṃ) Vin i.98, Vin i.164; Vin ii.259 Vin iv.19; SN ii.128 = SN ii.205; AN v.324; Dhp-a i.54.

2. to act against, provide for, beware, be cautious Ja iv.166. 3. to imitate Ja ii.406 ■ ger. paṭikacca (q.v.) ■ pp paṭikata (q.v.).

paṭi + karoti

Paṭikassana

(nt.) drawing back, in phrase mūlāya p. “throwing back to the beginning, causing to begin over & over again” Vin ii.7, Vin ii.162; AN i.99.

paṭi + kṛṣ

Paṭikassati

to draw back, remove, throw back Vin i.320 (mūlāya); ii.7 (id.).

paṭi + kassati

Paṭikā

(f.) a (white) woollen cloth (: uṇṇāmayo set’ attharako DN-a i.86; DN i.7; AN i.137, AN i.181; AN iii.50; AN iv.94, AN iv.231, AN iv.394; Dāvs v.36 See also paṭiya.

Sk. paṭikā dial. fr. paṭa cloth

Paṭikāra

counteraction, remedy, requital Sdhp 201, Sdhp 498; usually neg. app˚; adj. not making good or which cannot be made good, which cannot be helped Vin iv.218 (= anosārita p. 219); Pv-a 274 (maraṇa Cp. foll.

paṭi + kṛ;

Paṭikārika

(adj.) of the nature of an amendment; app˚; not making amends, not making good Ja v.418.

fr. preceding

Paṭikiṭṭha

inferior, low, vile AN i.286 = Dhp i.144; in meaning “miserable” at Dhp-a ii.3 is perhaps better to be read with v.l. as pakkiliṭṭha, or should it be paṭikuṭṭha?

Paṭikibbisa

(nt.) wrong doing in return, retaliation Ja iii.135.

paṭi + kibbisa

Paṭikirati

to strew about, to sprawl Pv iv.108 (uttānā paṭikirāma = vikirīyamān’angā viya vattāma Pv-a 271).

paṭi + kirati

Paṭikiliṭṭha

(adj.) very miserable Pv-a 268 (v.l.); and perhaps at Dhp-a ii.3 for paṭikiṭṭha (q.v.).

paṭi + kiliṭṭha

Paṭikujjati

to bend over, in or against, to cover over, to enclose DN ii.162; MN i.30; AN iii.58. Caus. ˚eti Ja i.50, Ja i.69 ■ pp. paṭikujjita (q.v.).

paṭi + kubj, see kujja & cp. patikuṭati

Paṭikujjana

(nt.) covering, in ˚phalaka covering board, seat Kp-a 62 (vacca-kuṭiyā).

fr. paṭi + kubj

Paṭikujjita

covered over, enclosed AN i.141; Thag 681; Ja i.50, Ja i.69; Ja v.266; Pv i.1013 (= upari pidahita Pv-a 52); Dhs-a 349.

pp. of paṭikujjeti

Paṭikujjhati

to be angry in return SN i.162 = Thag 442.

paṭi + krudh

Paṭikuṭati

to turn in or over, to bend, cramp or get cramped; fig to shrink from, to refuse AN iv.47 sq. (v.l. ˚kujjati) Mil 297 (pati˚; cp. Mil trslnii.156); Vism 347 (v.l. BB; T. ˚kuṭṭati); Dhp-a i.71; Dhp-a ii.42 ■ Caus. patikoṭṭeti (q.v.) ■ pp. paṭikuṭita (q.v.). See also paṭilīyati.

paṭi + kuṭ; as in kuṭila, cp. kuc & paṭikujjati

Paṭikuṭita

bent back, turned over (?) Vin ii.195 (reading uncertain, vv.ll. paṭikuṭṭiya paṭikuṭiya).;

pp. of paṭikuṭati

Paṭikuṭṭha

scolded, scorned, defamed blameworthy, miserable, vile Vin i.317; Pv-a 268 (v.l. paṭikiliṭṭha); as neg. app˚; blameless, faultless SN iii.71 SN iii.73; AN iv.246; Kv 141, 341. See also paṭikiṭṭha.

pp. of paṭi + kruś, see paṭikkosati & cp. BSk. pratikruṣṭa poor Divy 500

Paṭikuṇika

(adj.) bent, crooked Pv-a 123 (v.l. kuṇita & kuṇḍita).;

for ˚kuṭita?

Paṭikuṇṭhita

= pariguṇṭhita (q.v.); covered, surrounded Ja vi.89.

cp. kuṇṭhita

Paṭikuttaka

a sort of bird Ja vi.538.

or uncertain etym.; paṭi + kuttaka?

Paṭikubbara

the part of the carriage-pole nearest to the horse(?) AN iv.191.

paṭi + kubbara

Paṭikulyatā

(f.) reluctance, loathsomeness MN i.30; AN v.64 Other forms are paṭikūlatā, pāṭikkūlyatā, & pāṭikulyā (q.v.).;

fr. paṭikūla, perhaps better to write patikkulyatā

Paṭikūṭa

(nt.) cheating in return Ja ii.183.

paṭi + kūṭa1

Paṭikūlatā

(f.) disgustiveness Vism 343 sq.

fr. paṭikkūla

Paṭikeḷanā

see parikeḷanā; i.e. counter-playing Dhp i.286.

Paṭikoṭṭeti

to bend away, to make refrain from MN i.115; SN ii.265 (cp. id. p. AN iv.47 with trs. ˚kuṭati & v.l. ˚kujjati which may be a legitimate variant). The T. prints pati˚.;

paṭi + koṭṭeti as Caus. of kuṭati

Paṭikopeti

to shake, disturb, break (fig.) Ja v.173 (uposathaṃ).

paṭi + kopeti

Paṭikkanta

gone back from (-˚), returned (opp. abhi˚) DN i.70 (abhikkanta + ); AN ii.104 AN ii.106 sq., 210; Pv iv.143 (cp. Pv-a 240); DN-a i.183 (= nivattana); Vv-a 6 (opp. abhi˚) Pv-a 11 (piṇḍapāta˚), 16 (id.). For opp. of paṭikkanta in conn. with piṇḍāya see paviṭṭha.

pp. of paṭikkamati

Paṭikkantaka

one who has come or is coming back Dhp-a i.307.

fr. last

Paṭikkama

going back Pv iv.12 (+ abhikkama = “going forward and backward”; cp. Pv-a 219).

fr. paṭi + kram

Paṭikkamati

to step backwards, to return (opp. abhi˚) Vin ii.110, Vin ii.208; MN i.78; SN i.200, SN i.226 SN ii.282; Snp 388 (ger. ˚kkamma = nivattitvā Snp-a 374) Snp-a 53 ■ Caus. paṭikkamāpeti to cause to retreat Ja i.214; Mil 121 ■ pp. paṭikkanta (q.v.).

paṭi + kram

Paṭikkamana

(nt.) returning, retiring, going back Dhp i.95; in ˚sālā meaning “a hall with seats of distinction” Snp-a 53.

fr. paṭikkamati

Paṭikkūla

(adj.) lit. against the slope; averse, objectionable, contrary, disagreeable Vin i.58 (˚kūla) DN iii.112, DN iii.113; MN i.341 (dukkha˚); SN iv.172 (id.) Ja i.393; Vv-a 92 (K.); Pv-a 77; Vb-a 250 sq ■ app˚ without objection, pleasant, agreeable Vv 532 (K.) Vism 70 (k) ■ nt. ˚ṃ loathsomeness, impurity Vv-a 232. See also abstr. pāṭikkūlyatā (paṭi˚).

-gāhitā as neg. a˚ “refraining from contradiction (Dhs trsln) Pp 24 (k.); Dhs 1327 (k.). -manasikāra realisation of the impurity of the body Dhp-a ii.87 (˚kkula); Vb-a 251. -saññā (āhāre) the consciousness of the impurity of material food DN iii.289, DN iii.291; SN v.132; AN iv.49; adj. ˚saññin SN i.227; SN v.119, SN v.317; AN iii.169.

paṭi + kūla

Paṭikkosati

to blame, reject, revile, scorn Vin i.115; Vin ii.93; MN iii.29; DN i.53 (= paṭibāhati DN-a i.160); SN iv.118 (+ apavadati); Snp 878; Dhp 164; Ja iv.163; Mil 131, Mil 256; Dhp-a iii.194 (opp. abhinandati)-pp. paṭikuṭṭha (q.v.).

paṭi + kruś

Paṭikkosana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) protest Vin i.321; Vin ii.102 (a˚).

fr. paṭikkosati

Paṭikkhati

to look forward to, to expect Snp 697 (paṭikkhaṃ sic ppr. = āgamayanā Snp-a 490).

paṭi + īks

Paṭikkhitta

refused, rejected DN i.142; MN i.78, MN i.93; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Ja ii.436; Ne 161, Ne 185 sq. Dhp-a ii.71.

pp. of paṭikkhipati

Paṭikkhipati

to reject, refuse, object to, oppose Ja i.67; Ja iv.105; Mil 195; DN-a i.290; Dhp-a i.45 Dhp-a ii.75; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 114, Pv-a 151, Pv-a 214 (aor. ˚khipi = vāresi)- appaṭikkhippa (grd.) not to be rejected Ja ii.370. Contrasted to samādiyati Vism 62, Vism 64 & passim.;

paṭi + khipati

Paṭikkhepa

opposition, negation, contrary Snp-a 228 for “na”), 502; Pv-a 189 (˚vacana the opp expression). ˚to (abl.) in opposition or contrast to Pv-a 24.

fr. paṭi + kṣip

Paṭikhamāpita

forgiven Dhp-a ii.78.

pp. of paṭi + khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati

Paṭigacca

see paṭikacca.

Paṭigacchati

to give up, leave behind Ja iv.482 (gehaṃ); cp. paccagū.

Paṭigandhiya

only as neg. appaṭi˚; (q.v.).

Paṭigāthā

(f.) counter-stanza, response Snp-a 340. Cp. paccanīka-gāthā.

paṭi + gāthā

Paṭigādha

a firm stand or foothold AN iii.297 sq.; Pp 72 = Kv 389. Patigayati (gati)

paṭi + gādha2

Paṭigāyati (˚gāti)

to sing in response, to reply by a song Ja iv.395 (imper. ˚gāhi ).

paṭi + gāyati

Paṭigijjha

(adj.) greedy; hankering after Snp 675 (Snp-a 482 reads ˚giddha and explns by mahāgijjha).

paṭi + gijjha, a doublet of giddha, see gijjha2

Paṭigīta

(nt.) a song in response, counter song Ja iv.393. Patiguhati (guhati)

paṭi + gīta

Paṭiguhati (˚gūhati)

to concert, keep back Cp i.918.

paṭi + gūhati

Paṭiggaṇhanaka

(adj.-n.) receiving, receiver Pv-a 175. Patigganhati (patiganhati)

paṭiggaṇhana (= paṭiggahaṇa) + ka

Paṭiggaṇhāti (paṭigaṇhāti)

to receive, accept, take (up) DN i.110 (vatthaṃ), 142; Vin i.200 Vin ii.109, Vin ii.116 (a sewing-needle); SN iv.326 (jātarūpa-rajataṃ); Snp 479, Snp 689, Snp 690; Dhp 220; Ja i.56, Ja i.65; DN-a i.236; Pv-a 47. In special phrase accayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) a sin, to pardon a sin Vin ii.192; DN i.85; MN i.438; Ja v.379 ■ pp. paṭiggahita (q.v.) ■ Caus. ˚ggaheti Vin ii.213; MN i.32.

paṭi + gaṇhāti

Paṭiggaha

1. receiving, acceptance; one who receives, recipient Ja i.146; Ja ii.9; Ja vi.474; Pv iii.111

2. friendly reception Ja vi.526.

3. receptacle (for water etc.) Vin ii.115, Vin ii.213 (udaka˚).

4. a thimble Vin ii.116.

fr. paṭiggaṇhāti

Paṭiggahaṇa

(nt.) acceptance, receiving, taking MN iii.34; SN v.472; Snp-a 341 ■ accaya˚ acceptance of a sin, i.e. pardon, absolution Ja v.380.

fr. paṭigganhāti

Paṭiggahita

received, got, accepted, appropriated, taken Vin i.206, Vin i.214; Ja vi.231 ■ As appaṭiggahitaka (nt.) “that which is not received” at Vin iv.90.

pp. of paṭigganhāti

Paṭiggahītar

one who receives, recipient DN i.89.

n. ag. of paṭiggaṇhāti

Paṭiggāha

see patiṭṭhāha.

Paṭiggāhaka

(adj.-n.) receiving, accepting; one who receives, recipient Vin ii.213; DN i.138; AN i.161; AN ii.80 sq.; AN iii.42, AN iii.336; Ja i.56; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 128, Pv-a 175 (opp. dāyaka); Vv-a 195; Sdhp 268.

fr. paṭiggaṇhāti

Paṭiggāhaṇa

(nt.) reception, taking in Ja vi.527.

fr. paṭiggaṇhāti

Paṭigha

(m. & nt.) 1. (ethically) repulsion, repugnance anger DN i.25, DN i.34; DN iii.254, DN iii.282; SN i.13; SN iv.71, SN iv.195, SN iv.205 SN iv.208 sq.; SN v.315; AN i.3, AN i.87, AN i.200; Snp 371, Snp 536; Dhs 1060; Mil 44; DN-a i.22.

2. (psychologically) sensory reaction DN iii.224, DN iii.253, DN iii.262; SN i.165, SN i.186; AN i.41, AN i.267 AN ii.184; Dhs 265, Dhs 501, Dhs 513, Dhs 579; Vb-a 19. See on term Dhs trsln 72, 204, 276 and passim ■ appaṭigha see separately s. v. Note. How shall we read paṭighaṭṭha nānighaṃso at Dhs-a 308? (paṭigha-ṭṭhāna-nighaṃso or paṭighaṭṭana-nighaṃso?)

paṭi + gha, adj. suffix of; ghan = han, lit. striking against

Paṭighavant

(adj.) full of repugnance, showing anger SN iv.208, SN iv.209.

fr. paṭigha

Paṭighāta

1. (lit.) warding off, staying, repulsion, beating off DN iii.130; MN i.10; AN i.98; AN iv.106 sq.; Ja i.344; Vism 31 (= paṭihanana); Mil 121; Dhp-a ii.8; Pv-a 33.

2. (psych. resentment Dhs 1060, cp. Dhs trsl. 282.

paṭi + ghāta, of same root as paṭigha

Paṭighosa

echo Vism 554.

paṭi + ghosa

Paṭicamma

in ˚gataṃ sallaṃ at Ja vi.78 to be expld not with C. as from paṭi + camati (cam to wash, cp. ācamati) which does not agree with the actual meaning, but according to Kern, Toev. ii.29, s. v. as elliptical for paṭibhinna-camma, i.e. piercing the skin so as to go right through (to the opp. side) which falls in with the C. expln “vāmapassena pavisitvā dakkhiṇapassena viniggatan ti.”

Paṭicaya

& (paṭiccaya) adding to, heaping up, accumulation, increase Vin ii.74; Vin iii.158 (pati˚) SN iii.169; AN iii.376 sq. (v.l. pati˚); iv.355; v.336 sq. Thag 642; Ud 35 (pati˚); Mil 138.

paṭi + caya

Paṭicarati

1. to wander about, to deal with Mil 94.

2. to go about or evade (a question), to obscure a matter of discussion, in phrase aññena aññaṃ p. “to be saved by another in another way,” or to from one (thing) to another, i.e. to receive a diff, answer to what is asked DN i.94; Vin iv.35; MN i.96, MN i.250, MN i.442; AN iv.168 (v.l. paṭivadati); expld at DN-a i.264 by ajjhottharati paṭicchādeti “to cover over,” i.e. to conceal (a question). See on expression Dialogues i.116.

paṭi + carati

Paṭicaleti

to nudge Ja v.434.

Caus. of paṭicalati

Paṭicāra

intercourse, visit, dealing with Mil 94.

fr. paṭi + car

Paṭicodana

(nt.) rebuking, scolding (back) Dhs-a 393.

abstr. fr. paṭicodeti

Paṭicodeti

to blame, reprove MN i.72; Vin iv.217; Ud 45.

paṭi + codeti

Paṭicca

grounded on, on account of, concerning, because (with acc.) MN i.265 (etaṃ on these grounds); SN iii.93 = Iti 89 (atthavasaṃ); Ja ii.386 (= abhisandhāya); Snp 680, Snp 784 Snp 872, Snp 1046; Snp-a 357; Dhp-a i.4; Pv-a 64 (maraṇaṃ), 164 181 (kammaṃ), 207 (anuddayaṃ). See also foll.

-vinīta trained to look for causality MN iii.19. Paticca-samuppanna

ger. of pacceti, paṭi + i; cp. BSk. pratītya

Paṭicca-samuppanna

evolved by reason of the law of causation DN iii.275; MN i.500; SN ii.26; AN v.187; Pts i.51 sq., 76 sq.; Vb 340, Vb 362. Cp. BSk pratitya samutpanna Mvu iii.61. Paticca-samuppada

p. + samuppana

Paṭicca-samuppāda

“arising on the grounds of (a preceding cause)” happening by way of cause working of cause & effect, causal chain of causation causal genesis, dependent origination, theory of the twelve causes ■ See on this Mrs. Rh. D. in Buddhism 90 f., Ency. Rel. & Ethics,; s. v. & KS ii., preface Cpd. p. 260 sq. with diagram of the “Wheel of Life” Pts. of Controversy, 390 f ■ The general formula runs thus: Imasmiṃ sati, idaṃ hoti, imass’ uppādā, idaṃ uppajjati; imasmiṃ asati, idaṃ na hoti; imassa nirodhā, idaṃ nirujjhati. This being, that becomes from the arising of this, that arises; this not becoming, that does not become: from the ceasing of this, that ceases MN ii.32; SN ii.28 etc. The term usually occurs applied to dukkha in a famous formula which expresses the Buddhist doctrine of evolution, the respective stages of which are conditioned by a preceding cause & constitute themselves the cause of resulting effect, as working out the next state of the evolving (shall we say) “individual” or “being,” in short the bearer of evolution. The respective links in this chain which to study & learn is the first condition for a “Buddhist” to an understanding of life, and the cause of life, and which to know forward and backward (anuloma-paṭilomaṃ manas’ âkāsi Vin i.1) is indispensable for the student, are as follows. The root of all primary cause of all existence, is avijjā ignorance; this produces saṅkhārā: karma, dimly conscious elements capacity of impression or predisposition (will, action Cpd.; synergies Mrs. Rh. D.), which in their turn give rise to viññāṇa thinking substance (consciousness Cpd.; cognition Mrs. Rh. D.), then follow in succession the foll. stages: nāmarūpa individuality (mind & body animated organism Cpd.; name & form Mrs. Rh. D.); saḷāyatana the senses (6 organs of sense Cpd.; the sixfold sphere Mrs. Rh. D.), phassa contact, vedanā feeling, taṇhā thirst for life (craving), upādāna clinging to existence or attachment (dominant idea Cpd.; grasping Mrs. Rh. D.), bhava (action or character Cpd.; renewed existence Mrs. Rh. D.), jāti birth (rebirth conception Cpd.), jarāmaraṇa (+ soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass’ ûpayāsā) old age & death (+ tribulation grief, sorrow, distress & despair). The BSk. form is pratītya-samutpāda, e.g. at Divy 300, Divy 547.;

The Paṭicca-samuppāda is also called the Nidāna (“basis,” or “ground,” i.e. cause) doctrine, or the Paccay’ ākāra (“related-condition”), and is referred to in the Suttas as Ariya-ñāya (“the noble method or system”). The term paccay’ ākāra is late and occurs only in Abhidhamma-literature ■ The oldest account is found in the Mahāpadāna Suttanta of the Dīgha Nikāya (D ii.30 sq.; cp. Dial. ii.24 sq.), where 10 items form the constituents of the chain, and are given in backward order, reasoning from the appearance of dukkha in this world of old age and death towards the original cause of it in viññāṇa. The same chain occurs again at SN ii.104 sq ■ A later development shows 12 links, viz. avijjā and saṅkhārā added to precede viññāṇa (as above). Thus at SN ii.5 sq ■ A detailed exposition of the P ■ s. in Abhidhamma literature is the exegesis given by Bdhgh at Vism xvii. (pp. 517–⁠586 under the title of Paññā-bhūmi-niddesa), and at Vb-a 130

213 under the title of Paccayākāra-vibhanga. Some passages selected for ref.: Vin i.1 sq.; MN i.190 MN i.257; SN i.136; SN ii.1 sq., 26 sq., 42 sq., 70, 92 sq., 113 sq. Ai.177; v.184; Sn. 653; Ud 1 sq.; Pts i.50 sq.; 144 Ne 22, Ne 24, Ne 32, Ne 64 sq.; DN-a i.125, DN-a i.126.

-kusala skilled in the (knowledge of the) chain of causation MN iii.63; Nd i.171; f. abstr. ˚kusalatā DN iii.212.

p. + samuppāda, BSk. prātītyasamutpāda, e.g. Divy 300, Divy 547

Paṭicchaka

(adj.) [fr. paṭicchati) receiving Ja vi.287.

Paṭicchati

to accept, receive, take AN iii.243 (udakaṃ); Vin iv.18; Thig 421; Ja i.233; Ja ii.432 Ja iii.171; Ja iv.137; Ja v.197; Dhp-a iii.271 ■ pp. paṭicchita (q.v.). Caus. II. paṭicchāpeti to entrust, dedicate, give Ja i.64, Ja i.143, Ja i.159, Ja i.383, Ja i.506; Ja ii.133; Pv-a 81.

paṭi + icchati of iṣ2; cp. BSk. pratīcchati Divy 238 and sampaṭicchati

Paṭicchanna

covered, concealed, hidden Vin ii.40; AN i.282; Snp 126, Snp 194; Pv i.102 (kesehi = paṭicchādita Pv-a 48); ii.102 (kesehi); DN-a i.276, DN-a i.228; Snp-a 155; Kp-a 53; Vb-a 94 (˚dukkha) Pv-a 43, Pv-a 103. -appaṭicchanna unconcealed, open, unrestrained Vin ii.38; Ja i.207.

-kammanta of secret doing, one who acts underhand or conceals his actions AN ii.239; Snp 127.

pp. of paṭicchādeti

Paṭicchavi

in appaṭicchavi at Pv ii.113 read with v.l. as sampatitacchavi.

Paṭicchāda

1. covering, clothes, clothing Pv ii.116 (= vattha Pv-a 76).

2. deceiving, hiding concealment, deception Snp 232.

fr. paṭi + chad

Paṭicchādaka

= prec. Dhs-a 51.

Paṭicchādana

(nt.) covering, hiding, concealment MN i.10; AN iii.352; Vb 357 = Snp-a 180.

fr. paṭicchādeti

Paṭicchādaniya

(nt.) the flavour of meat, flavouring, meat broth or gravy Vin i.206, Vin i.217; Mil 291.

fr. paṭicchādeti

Paṭicchādita

covered, concealed, hidden Ja vi.23 (= paṭisanthata Pv-a 48.

pp. of paṭicchādeti, cp. paṭicchanna

Paṭicchādī

(f.) 1. covering, protection Vin ii.122.

2. antidote, remedy, medicine (or a cloth to protect the itch) Vin i.296; Vin iv.171.

fr. paṭicchādeti

Paṭicchādeti

1. to cover over, conceal, hide SN i.70, SN i.161; DN-a i.264; Vv-a 65 (dhanaṃ); Kp-a 191; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 88, Pv-a 142 (kesehi), 194 (= parigūhati).

2. to clothe oneself Vin i.46.

3. to dress (surgically), to treat (a wound) MN i.220.

4. to conceal or evade (a question) DN-a i.264 ■ pp. paṭicchādita & paṭicchanna; (q.v.).

paṭi + chādeti, Caus. of chad

Paṭicchita

accepted, taken up Snp 803 (pl. ˚tāse, cp. Nd i.113 & Snp-a 531).;

pp. of paṭicchati

Paṭijaggaka

(adj.) fostering, nursing, taking care of Ja v.111.

fr. paṭijaggati

Paṭijaggati

lit. to watch over, i.e. to nourish, tend, feed look after, take care of, nurse Dhp 157; Ja i.235, Ja i.375 Ja ii.132, Ja ii.200, Ja ii.436; Vism 119; Dhp-a i.8, Dhp-a i.45, Dhp-a i.99, Dhp-a i.392; Dhp-a iv.154; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 43 ■ pp. paṭijaggita (q.v.) ■ Caus. ˚jaggāpeti.

paṭi + jaggati, cp. BSk. pratijāgarti Divy 124, Divy 306

Paṭijaggana

(nt.) rearing, fostering, tending; attention, care Ja i.148; Mil 366; Dhp-a i.27 Dhp-a ii.96.

fr. paṭijaggati

Paṭijagganaka

(adj.) to be reared or brought up Ja vi.73 (putta).

fr. paṭijaggana

Paṭijaggāpeti

to make look after or tend Vism 74.

Caus. II. of paṭijaggati

Paṭijaggita

reared, cared for, looked after, brought up Ja v.274, Ja v.331.

pp. of paṭijaggati

Paṭijaggiya

(adj.) to be nursed Dhp-a i.319.

grd. of paṭijaggati

Paṭijānāti

to acknowledge, agree to, approve, promise, consent DN i.3, DN i.192; SN i.68, SN i.172; SN ii.170; SN iii.28 SN v.204, SN v.423; Snp 76, Snp 135, Snp 555, Snp 601, Snp 1148; Ja i.169; Dhp-a i.21; Pv-a 223 (pot. paṭiññeyya), 226 (id.), 241; ger paṭiññāya Vin ii.83 (a˚) ■ pp. paṭiññāta (q.v.).

paṭi + jānāti

Patijīvan

(-˚) in phrase jīva-paṭijīvaṃ at Ja ii.15 is to be taken as a sort of redupl. cpd. of jīva, the imper. of jīvati “live,” as greeting. We might translate “the greeting with ʻjīvaʼ and reciprocating it.”

Paṭiñña

(adj.) acknowledged; making belief, quâsi-; in phrase samaṇa˚; a quâsi-Samaṇa, pretending to be a Samaṇa AN i.126; AN ii.239; cp. Sakyaputtiya˚ SN ii.272; sacca˚ Ja iv.384, Ja iv.463; Ja v.499.

= paṭiññā

Paṭiññā

(f.) acknowledgment, agreement, promise, vow, consent, permission DN iii.254; Ja i.153; Pv iv.112, 144; Mil 7; Dhp-a ii.93; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 123; Snp-a 397, Snp-a 539 ■ patiññaṃ moceti to keep one’s promise Dhp-a i.93.

fr. paṭi + jñā; cp. later Sk. pratijñā

Paṭiññāta

agreed, acknowledged, promised Vin ii.83, Vin ii.102; DN i.88; AN i.99; AN iv.144; Pv-a 55.

pp. of paṭijānāti

Paṭita

(adj.) satisfied, happy Dhp-a ii.269 (˚ācāra) Patititthati (patitthahati)

Paṭitiṭṭhati (paṭiṭṭhahati)

etc. see pati˚.

Paṭitittha

(nt.) opposite bank (of a river) Ja v.443.

paṭi + tittha

Paṭitthambhati

to stand firm (against) Mil 372.

paṭi + thambhati

Paṭidaṇḍa

retribution Dhp 133, cp. Dhp-a iii.57, Dhp-a iii.58.

paṭi + daṇḍa

Paṭidadāti

to give back, to restore Ja i.177; Ja iv.411 (˚diyyare); Pv-a 276 (ger. ˚datvā).

paṭi + dadāti

Paṭidasseti

to show oneself or to appear again, to reappear Pv iii.227.

paṭi + dasseti

Paṭidāna

(nt.) reward, restitution, gift Pv-a 80.

paṭi + dāna

Paṭidisā

(f.) an opposite (counter-) point of the compass, opposite quarter DN iii.176 (disā ca p. ca vidisā ca).

paṭi + disā

Paṭidissati

to be seen, to appear Ja iii.47 = Pv-a 281; Snp 123; Ja iv.139; Snp-a 172.

paṭi + dissati; usually spelt pati˚

Paṭidukkhāpanatā

(f.) the fact of being afflicted again with súffering Mil 180.

paṭi + abstr. of dukkhāpeti, Caus ■ Denom. fr. dukkha

Paṭideseti

to confess Vin ii.102. See also pāṭidesaniya.

paṭi + deseti

Paṭidhāvati

to run back to (acc.) MN i.265SN ii.26 (pubbanṭaṃ; opp. aparantaṃ ādhāvati M, upadhāvati S); Sdhp 167.

paṭi + dhāvati

Paṭinandati

to accept gladly, to greet in return SN i.189.

paṭi + nandati

Paṭinandita

rejoicing or rejoiced; greeted, welcomed Snp 452 (pati˚); Ja vi.14, Ja vi.412.

pp. of paṭi + nand

Paṭināsikā

(f.) a false nose Ja i.455, Ja i.457.

paṭi + nāsikā

Paṭinijjhatta

(adj.) appeased again Ja vi.414.

paṭi + nijjhatta

Paṭiniddesa

coming back upon a subject Ne 5.

paṭi + niddesa

Paṭinivattati

to turn back again Vin i.216; Ja i.225; Mil 120, Mil 152 (of disease), 246; Pv-a 100, Pv-a 126 ■ Caus. ˚nivatteti to make turn back Pv-a 141; C. on AN iii.28 (see paccāsāreti).

paṭi + nivattati

Paṭinivāsana

(nt.) a dress given in return Vin i.46 = Vin ii.223.

paṭi + nivāsana1

Paṭinissagga

giving up, forsaking; rejection, renunciation Vin iii.173; MN iii.31; SN v.421 sq.; AN i.100, AN i.299; AN iv.148, AN iv.350; Pts i.194 (two p., viz. pariccāga˚ and pakkhandana˚) Pp 19, Pp 21, Pp 22 ■ ādāna˚ SN v.24; AN v.233, AN v.253 sq.; upadhi˚ Iti 46, Iti 62; sabbûpadhi˚ SN i.136; SN iii.133 SN v.226; AN i.49; AN v.8, AN v.110, AN v.320 sq.; ˚ânupassanā Pts ii.44 sq.; ˚ânupassin MN iii.83; SN iv.211; SN v.329; AN iv.88, AN iv.146 sq.; AN v.112, AN v.359.

paṭi + nissagga of nissajjati, nis + sṛj, Cp. BSk. pratinisarga Avs ii.118, pratiniḥsarga ib. ii.194 Mvu ii.549; pratinissagga Mvu iii.314, Mvu iii.322.

Paṭinissaggin

(adj.) giving up, renouncing, or being given up, to be renounced, only in cpd. duppaṭi˚; (sup˚) hard (easy) to renounce DN iii.45; MN i.96; AN iii.335; AN v.150.

fr. paṭinissagga

Paṭinissajjati

to give up, renounce, forsake Vin iii.173 sq. Vin iv.294; SN ii.110; AN v.191 sq ■ ger. paṭinissajja SN i.179; AN iv.374 sq.; Snp 745, Snp 946 (cp. Nd i.430) ■ pp. paṭinissaṭṭha (q.v.).

paṭi + nissajjati, cp. BSk. pratinisṛjati Avs ii.190

Paṭinissaṭṭha

given up, forsaken (act & pass.), renouncing or having renounced Vin iii.95 Vin iv.27, Vin iv.137; MN i.37; SN ii.283; AN ii.41; Iti 49; Nd i.430 Nd i.431 (vanta pahīna p.); Pv-a 256.

pp. of paṭinissajjati, BSk. pratiniḥsṛṣṭa Divy 44 and ˚nisṛṣṭa Divy 275

Paṭinissarati

to depart, escape from, to be freed from Ne 113 (= niyyāti vimuccati C.).

paṭi + nissarati

Paṭineti

to lead back to (acc.) Vv 5217; Thig 419; Pv ii.1221 (imper. ˚nayāhi); Pv-a 145, Pv-a 160.

paṭi + neti

Paṭipakkha

(adj.-n.) opposed, opposite; (m.) an enemy, opponent (cp. pratipakṣa obstacle Divy 352) Nd i.397; Ja i.4, Ja i.224; Ne 3, Ne 112, Ne 124; Vism 4; Dhp-a i.92; Snp-a 12, Snp-a 21, Snp-a 65, Snp-a 168, Snp-a 234, Snp-a 257, Snp-a 545; Pv-a 98; Dhs-a 164; Sdhp 211, Sdhp 452.

paṭi + pakkha

Paṭipakkhika

(adj.) opposed, inimical Sdhp 216.

fr. paṭipakkha

Paṭipajjati

to enter upon (a path), to go along, follow out (a way or plan) to go by; fig. to take a line of action, to follow a method to be intent on, to regulate one’s life DN i.70 (saṃvarāya) 175 (tathattāya); SN ii.98 (kantāramaggaṃ); iv.63 (dhammass’ anudhammaṃ); v.346 (id.); iv.194 (maggaṃ); AN i.36 (dhammânudhammaṃ); ii.4; Snp 317, Snp 323 Snp 706, Snp 815, Snp 1129 (cp. Nd ii.384); Dhp 274 (maggaṃ); Pp 20 (saṃvarāya); Pv-a 43 (maggaṃ), 44 (ummaggaṃ), 196 (dhanaṃ); Sdhp 30.

3rd sg. aor. paccāpādi Ja iv.314-ger. pajjitabba to be followed Pv-a 126 (vidhi), 131 (id.), 281 ■ pp. paṭipanna (q.v.) ■ Caus. paṭipādeti (q.v.).

paṭi + pad, cp. BSk. pratipadyate

Paṭipajjana

(nt.) a way or plan to be followed, procedure, in ˚vidhi method, line of action Pv-a 131 (v.l. BB), 133.

fr. paṭipajjati

Paṭipaṇāmeti

to make turn back, to send back, ward off, chase away MN i.327 (siriṃ) SN iv.152 (ābādhaṃ); Mil 17 (sakaṭāni).

paṭi + pa + Caus. of nam

Paṭipaṇṇa

(nt.) a letter in return, a written reply Ja i.409.

paṭi + paṇṇa

Paṭipatti

(f.) “way,” method, conduct, practice, performance, behaviour, example AN i.69 AN v.126 (dhammânudhamma˚), 136; Pts ii.15; Nd i.143 Nd ii.s. v.; Mil 131, Mil 242; Dhp-a ii.30; Dhp-a iv.34 (sammā good or proper behaviour); Pv-a 16 (parahita˚), 54, 67; DN-a i.270; Sdhp 28, Sdhp 29, Sdhp 37, Sdhp 40, Sdhp 213, Sdhp 521.

fr. paṭi + pad

Paṭipatha

a confronting road, opposite way Vin ii.193 (˚ṃ gacchati to go to meet); iii.131; iv.268; Mil 9; Vism 92; Dhp-a ii.88.

paṭi + patha

Paṭipadā

(f.) means of reaching a goal or destination, path, way, means, method, mode of progress (cp. Dhs. trsln 53, 82, 92, 143), course, practice (cp. BSk. pratipad in meaning of pratipatti “line of conduct” Avs ii.140 with note) DN i.54 (dvatti p.), 249 (way to); SN ii.81 (nirodhasāruppa-gāminī p.); iv.251 (bhaddikā), 330 (majjhimā) v.304 (sabbattha-gāminī) 361 (udaya-gāminī sotāpatti˚), 421; DN iii.288 (ñāṇadassana-visuddhi˚); AN i.113, AN i.168 (puñña˚) ii.76, 79, 152 (akkhamā); Vb 99, Vb 104 sq., 211 sq., 229 sq., 331 sq-In pregnant sense The path (of the Buddha), leading to the destruction of all ill & to the bliss of Nibbāna (see specified under magga, ariyamagga, sacca), thus a quâsi synonym of magga with which freq. comb;d (e.g DN i.156) Vin i.10; DN i.157; DN iii.219 (anuttariya); MN ii.11; MN iii.251, MN iii.284; SN i.24 (daḷhā yāya dhīrā pamuccanti); AN i.295 sq. (āgālhā nijjhāmā majjhimā); Snp 714 (cp. Snp-a 497), 921; Pts ii.147 (majjhimā); Ne 95 sq. Pp 15, Pp 68; Vv-a 84 (˚sankhāta ariyamagga). Specified in various ways as follows: āsava-nirodha-gāminī p DN i.84; dukkha-nirodha-g˚. DN i.84, DN i.189; DN iii.136; SN v.426 sq.; AN i.177; Pts i.86, Pts i.119; Dhs 1057; lokanirodha-g˚ AN ii.23; Iti 121; with the epithets sammā anuloma˚ apaccanīka˚ anvattha˚ dhammânudhamma Nd i.32, Nd i.143, Nd i.365; Nd ii.384 etc. (see detail under sammā˚)-There are several groups of 4 paṭipadā mentioned, viz (a) dukkhā dandhâbhiññā, sukhā & khippâbhiññā dandh˚ & khipp˚, i.e. painful practice resulting in knowledge slowly acquired & quickly acquired, pleasant practice resulting in the same way DN iii.106; AN ii.149 sq., 154; v.63; Snp-a 497; (b) akkhamā, khamā damā & samā p. i.e. want of endurance, endurance self-control, equanimity.;

fr. paṭi + pad

Paṭipanna

(having) followed or following up, reaching, going along or by (i.e. practising), entering on, obtaining SN ii.69; SN iv.252; AN i.120 (arahattāya); iv.292 sq. (id.), 372 sq.; Iti 81 (dhammânudhamma˚); Snp 736; Dhp 275 (maggaṃ); Vv 3423 (= maggaṭṭha one who has entered the path Vv-a 154) = Pv iv.349 Pp 63; Mil 17; DN-a i.26; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 112 (maggaṃ), 130 174 (sammā˚), 242; (dhammiyaṃ paṭipadaṃ); Dhp-a i.233 (magga˚ on the road, wandering).

pp. of paṭipajjati

Paṭipannaka

(adj. n.) one who has entered upon the Path (ariyamagga) Pp 13 (= maggaṭṭhaka phalatthāya paṭipannattā p. nāma PugA 186); Mil 342 Mil 344; Ne 50; Dhs-a 164. See also Mil trsl. ii.231, 237.

fr. paṭipanna

Paṭiparivatteti

to turn back or round once more MN i.133.

paṭi + p.

Paṭipaviṭṭha

gone inside again Snp 979.

pp. of paṭipavisati

Paṭipavisati

to go in(to) again; Caus. ˚paveseti to make go in again, to put back (inside again Vin i.276 ■ pp. paṭipaviṭṭha (q.v.).

paṭi + pavisati

Paṭipasaṃsati

to praise back or in return Ja ii.439.

paṭi + pasaṃsati

Paṭipaharati

to strike in return Dhp-a i.51.

paṭi + paharati

Paṭipahiṇati

to send back (in return) Dhp-a i.216.

paṭi + pahinati

Paṭipākatika

(adj.) restored, set right again, safe and sound Ja iii.167 (= pākatika at Pv-a 66) iv.407; vi.372; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 284.

paṭi + pākatika

Paṭipāṭi

(f.) order, succession Vin i.248 (bhatta˚); Vism 411 (khandha˚); usually in abl. paṭipāṭiyā adv. successively, in succession, alongside of, in order Vism 343 = Ja v.253 (ghara˚ from house to house) Thag-a 80 (magga˚); Dhp-a i.156; Dhp-a ii.89; Dhp-a iii.361; Snp-a 23 Snp-a 506; Pv-a 54; Vv-a 76, Vv-a 137.

paṭi + pāṭi

Paṭipāṭika

(adj.) being in conformity with the (right) order Thag-a 41.

fr. last

Paṭipādaka

the supporter (of a bed) Vin i.48; Vin ii.208.

fr. paṭi + pad

Paṭipādeti

to impart, bring into give to, offer, present MN i.339; Ja v.453, Ja v.497; Pv ii.81 (vittaṃ).

Caus. of paṭipajjati, cp. BSk. pratipādayati in same meaning Avs i.262, Avs i.315

Paṭipiṃsati

to beat against SN ii.98 (ure); Ja vi.87; Vism 504 (urāni).

paṭi + piṃsati

Paṭipiṇḍa

alms in return Ja ii.307; Ja v.390 (piṇḍa˚ giving & taking of alms); Mil 370.

paṭi + piṇḍa

Paṭipīta

in asuci˚; at AN iii.226 is not clear (v.l. ˚pīḷita perhaps to be preferred).

Paṭipīḷana

(nt.) oppression Mil 313, Mil 352.

fr. paṭipīḷeti

Paṭipīḷita

(adj.) pressed against, oppressed, hard pressed Mil 262, Mil 354.

paṭi + pp. of pīḍ

Paṭipuggala

a person equal to another, compeer, match, rival MN i.171 = Mil 235; SN i.158; Snp 544; Iti 123 (natthi te paṭipuggala) ■ appaṭipuggala without a rival, unrivalled, without compare SN i.158 SN iii.86; Thig 185; Ja i.40; Mil 239 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.43).

paṭi + puggala

Paṭipuggalika

(adj.) belonging to one’s equal, individual Dhs 1044. Perhaps read pāṭi˚ (q.v.).

fr. paṭipuggala

Paṭipucchati

to ask (in return), to put a question to, to inquire DN i.60; MN i.27; SN iii.2; Snp p.92; Ja i.170; Ja iv.194; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 56, Pv-a 81; AN i.197; AN ii.46; also neg. appaṭipucchā (abl. adv.) without inquiry Vin i.325.

paṭi + pucchati

Paṭipucchā

(f.) a question in return, inquiry; only ˚-(as abl.) by question, by inquiry, by means of question & answer in foll. cpds.: ˚karaṇīya Vin i.325 ˚vinīta AN i.72; ˚vyākaraṇīya (pañha) DN iii.229.

paṭi + pucchā

Paṭipurisa

a rival, opponent Nd i.172.

paṭi + purisa

Paṭipūjana

(nt.) or ˚ā (f.) worship, reverence, honour Mil 241.

fr. paṭi + pūj

Paṭipūjeti

to honour, worship, revere Snp 128; Pv i.13; Mil 241.

paṭi + pūjeti

Paṭipeseti

to send out to Pv-a 20.

paṭi + peseti

Paṭippaṇāmeti

to bend (back), stretch out Dhs-a 324.

paṭi + paṇāmeti

Paṭippassaddha

allayed, calmed, quieted, subsided SN iv.217, SN iv.294; SN v.272; AN i.254 AN ii.41; Ja iii.37, Ja iii.148; Ja iv.430; Pts ii.2; Pp 27; Kp-a 185; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 245, Pv-a 274. Note. The BSk. form is pratiprasrabdha Divy 265.

pp. of paṭippassambhati

Paṭippassaddhi

(f.) subsidence, calming, allaying, quieting down, repose, complete ease Vin i.331 (kammassa suppression of an act); Pts ii.3 Pts ii.71, Pts ii.180; Ne 89; Dhs 40, Dhs 41, Dhs 320; Snp-a 9. Esp frequent in the Niddesas in stock phrase expressing the complete calm attained to in emancipation, viz. vūpasama paṭinissagga p. amata nibbāna, e.g. Nd ii.429.

fr. paṭippassaddha

Paṭippassambhati

to subside, to be eased, calmed, or abated to pass away, to be allayed SN i.211; SN v.51; aor. ˚ssambhi Dhp-a ii.86 (dohaḷo); iv.133 (ābādho) ■ pp. paṭippassaddha (q.v.) ■ Caus. paṭippassambheti to quiet down, hush up, suppress, bring to a standstill, put to rest, appease Vin i.49 (kammaṃ), 144 (id.), 331 (id.) ii.5 (id.), 226 (id.); MN i.76; Ja iii.28 (dohaḷaṃ).

paṭi + ppa + sambhati of śrambh. Note however that the BSk. is ˚praśrambhyati as well as ˚srambhyati, e.g. Mvu i.253, Mvu i.254; Divy 68, Divy 138 Divy 494, Divy 549, Divy 568

Paṭipassambhanā

(f.) & ˚ppassambhitatta (nt.) are exegetical (philosophical) synonyms of paṭippassaddhi at Dhs 40, Dhs 41, Dhs 320.

Paṭippharati

to effulge, shine forth, stream out, emit, fig. splurt out, bring against, object MN i.95 sq. AN iv.193 (codakaṃ); Ja i.123, Ja i.163; Nd i.196 (vādaṃ start a word-fight); Mil 372; Dhp-a iv.4 (vacanaṃ).

paṭi + pharati

Paṭibaddha

(adj.) bound to, in fetters or bonds, attracted to or by, dependent on DN i.76; Vin iv.302 (kāya˚); AN v.87 (para˚); Dhp 284; Mil 102 (āvajjana˚); Pv-a 134 (˚jīvika dependent on him for a living) ■ Freq. in cpd. ˚citta affected enamoured, one’s heart bound in love Vin iii.128 Vin iv.18; Snp 37 (see Nd ii.385), 65; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 145 (˚tā f abstr.), 151, 159 (rañño with the king).

paṭi + baddha, pp. of bandh

Paṭibandha

(adj.) bound to, connected with, referring to Pts i.172, Pts i.184.

paṭi + bandha

Paṭibandhati

to hold back, refuse Ja iv.134 (vetanaṃ na p. = aparihāpetvā dadāti).

paṭi + bandhati

Paṭibandhu

a connection, a relation, relative Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136, Dhs 1230; Dhs-a 365.

paṭi + bandhu

Paṭibala

(adj.) able, adequate, competent Vin i.56, Vin i.342; Vin ii.103, Vin ii.300; Vin iii.158; AN v.71; Mil 6.

paṭi + bala

Paṭibāḷha

(op)pressed, forced, urged Vb 338 = Mil 301.

pp. of paṭibāhati, though more likely to paṭi + vah2

Paṭibāhaka

antidote Mil 335; repelling, preventing Ja vi.571.

of paṭi + bādh

Paṭibāhati

to ward off, keep off, shut out, hold back, refuse, withhold, keep out, evade Vin i.356; Vin ii.162, Vin ii.166 sq., 274; iv.288; Ja i.64, Ja i.217; Dhp-a ii.2 (rañño āṇaṃ), 89 (sītaṃ); Vv-a 68; Pv-a 96 (maraṇaṃ), 252, 286 (grd. appaṭibāhanīya) Caus. ˚bāheti in same meaning Ja iv.194; Dhp-a ii.71; Pv-a 54 ■ pp. paṭibāḷha (q.v.).

paṭi + *bāh of bahis adv. outside

Paṭibāhana

exclusion, warding off, prevention Mil 81; Vism 244.

Paṭibāhiya

(adj.) to be kept off or averted, neg. ap˚; Ja iv.152.

grd. of paṭibāhati

Paṭibāhira

(adj.) outside, excluded Vin ii.168.

paṭi + bāhira

Paṭibimba

(nt.) counterpart, image, reflection Vism 190; Vv-a 50; Vb-a 164.

paṭi + bimba

Paṭibujjhati

to wake up, to understand, know, AN iii.105 sq.; Thag-a 74; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 128 ■ pp paṭibuddha (q.v.).

paṭi + bujjhati

Paṭibuddha

awakened, awake Snp 807.

pp. of paṭibujjhati

Paṭibodha

awaking, waking up Vv 5024.

fr. paṭi + budh, cp. paṭibujjhati

Paṭibhajati

to divide MN iii.91.

paṭi + bhaj

Paṭibhaṇḍa

merchandise in exchange, barter Ja i.377; Pv-a 277.

paṭi + bhaṇḍa, cp. BSk. pratipanya Divy 173, Divy 271, Divy 564

Paṭibhaṇḍati

to abuse in return SN i.162 (bhaṇḍantaṃ p.); AN ii.215 (id.); Nd i.397 (id.).

paṭi + bhaṇḍati

Paṭibhaya

fear, terror, fright SN iv.195; Pv-a 90; Dāvs iv.35. Freq. in cpd. ap˚ & sap˚, e.g. Vin iv.63; MN i.134; MN iii.61.

paṭi + bhaya

Paṭibhāga

1. counterpart, likeness, resemblance Nd ii.s. v.; Vism 125 (˚nimitta, imitative mental reflex, memory-image); Snp-a 65, Snp-a 76, Snp-a 83, Snp-a 114, Snp-a 265; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 178, Pv-a 279.

2. rejoinder Ja vi.341 (pañha˚).

3 counterpart, opposite, contrary MN i.304appaṭibhāga (adj.) unequalled, incomparable, matchless Mil 357 (+ appaṭiseṭṭha); Dhp-a i.423 (= anuttara).

paṭi + bhāga

Paṭibhāti

to appear, to be evident, to come into one’s mind, to occur to one, to be clear (cp. Vin Texts ii.30) SN i.155 (˚tu taṃ dhammikathā); v.153 (T reads patibbāti); Snp 450 (p. maṃ = mama bhāgo pakāsati Sna 399); Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386 (also fut. ˚bhāyissati); Ja v.410; Vv-a 78 = Vv-a 159 (maṃ p. ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchituṃ “I should like to ask a question”).

paṭi + bhā

Paṭibhāna

(nt.) understanding, illumination, intelligence readiness or confidence of speech, promptitude, wit (see on term Vin. Texts iii.13, 172; Pts. of Controversy, 378 f. DN i.16, DN i.21, DN i.23; SN i.187; AN ii.135, AN ii.177, AN ii.230; AN iii.42 AN iv.163; AN v.96; Pts ii.150, Pts ii.157; Ja vi.150; Pp 42; Vb 293 sq.; Vb-a 338, Vb-a 394, Vb-a 467; Mil 21; DN-a i.106- appaṭibhāna (adj.) bewildered, not confident, cowed down Vin ii.78 = Vin iii.162; MN i.258; AN iii.57; Ja v.238 Ja v.369; Ja vi.362.

paṭi + bhāna. Cp. late Sk. pratibhāna, fr. Pali

Paṭibhānavant

(adj.) possessed of intelligence or ready wit AN i.24; Snp 58, Snp 853, Snp 1147; Nd i.234 Nd ii.386; Snp-a 111 (pariyatti˚ & paṭivedha˚).;

fr. paṭibhāna

Paṭibhāneyyaka

(adj.) = paṭibhānavant Vin i.249 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.140) AN i.25.

ger. formation + ka fr. paṭibhāna

Paṭibhāsati

to address in return or in reply SN i.134; Snp 1024.

paṭi + bhās

Paṭimaṃsa

(adj.) as neg. app˚; not to be touched, untouched; faultless Vin ii.248 (acchidda + ); AN v.79.

for paṭimassa = Sk. *pratimṛśya, ger. of prati + mṛś, cp. in consonants haṃsa for harṣa etc.

Paṭimagga

the way against, a confronting road; ˚ṃ gacchati to go to meet somebody Ja iv.133; Ja vi.127.

paṭi + magga, cp. similarly paṭipatha

Paṭimaṇḍita

decorated, adorned with Ja i.8, Ja i.41, Ja i.509; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 66, Pv-a 211.

pp. of paṭi + maṇḍ

Paṭimantaka

one who speaks to or who is spoken to, i.e. (1) an interlocutor Ja iv.18 (= paṭivacana-dayaka C.) ■ (2) an amiable person (cp. Lat affabilis = affable) MN i.386.

fr. paṭi + mant

Paṭimanteti

to discuss in argument, to reply to, answer, refute; as pati˚; at Vin ii.1; DN i.93 (vacane), 94; Dhp i.263; Ja vi.82, Ja vi.294.

paṭi + manteti

Paṭimalla

a rival wrestler SN i.110; Nd i.172.

paṭi + malla

Paṭimasati

to touch (at) DN i.106; Snp p.108 (anumasati + ) ■ Caus. paṭimāseti (q.v.).

paṭi + masati of mṛś, cp. paṭimaṃsa

Paṭimā

(f.) counterpart, image, figure Ja vi.125; Dāvs v.27; Vv-a 168 (= bimba); Dhs-a 334 - appaṭima (adj.) without a counterpart, matchless incomparable Thag 614; Mil 239.

fr. paṭi +

Paṭimānita

honoured, revered, served Pv-a 18.

pp. of paṭimāneti

Paṭimāneti

to wait on, or wait for, look after, honour, serve Vin ii.169; Vin iv.112; DN i.106; Ja iv.2, Ja iv.203; Ja v.314; Mil 8; Pv-a 12; DN-a i.280 ■ pp paṭimānita (q.v.).

paṭi + Caus. of man

Paṭimāreti

to kill in revenge Ja iii.135.

paṭi + Caus. of mṛ;

Paṭimāseti

to hold on to, to restrain, keep under control; imper. paṭimāse (for ˚māsaya Dhp 379 (opp. codaya; expld by ˚parivīmaṃse “watch Dhp-a iv.117).

Caus. of patimasati

Paṭimukka

(adj.) fastened on, tied to, wound round, clothed in SN iv.91; MN i.383; Iti 56 Thig 500 (? v.l. paripuṇṇa, cp. Thag-a 290); Ja i.384 Ja vi.64; Mil 390; Dhp-a i.394 (sīse); Vv-a 167 (so read for ˚mukkha), 296.

pp. of paṭimuñcati; cp. also paṭimutta & ummukka, see Geiger,; P.Gr. § 197

Paṭimukha

(adj.) facing, opposite; nt. ˚ṃ adv. opposite Snp-a 399 (gacchati).

paṭi + mukha

Paṭimuñcati

1. to fasten, to bind (in lit. as well as appld sense), to tie, put on Vin i.46; SN i.24 (veraṃ ˚muñcati for ˚muccati!); Ja i.384; Ja ii.22, Ja ii.88, Ja ii.197 iv. 380 (ger. ˚mucca, v.l. ˚muñca), 395; v.25 (attain) 49; vi.525; Dhp-a iii.295 ■ Pass. paṭimuccati to be fastened, aor. ˚mucci Ja iii.239; Ja vi.176.

2. to attain obtain, find Ja iv.285 = Ja vi.148.

paṭi + muc

Paṭimutta

(& ˚ka) (adj.) in sup˚ well purified, cleansed, pure Ja iv.18 (˚kambu = paṭimutta-suvaṇṇ’ ālankāra C.); v.400; Pv iv.133 (˚ka-suṭṭhu paṭimuttabhāṇin Pv-a 230).

pp. of paṭimuñcati, cp. paṭimukka

Paṭimokkha

1. a sort of remedy, purgative DN i.12 osadhīnaṃ p. expld at DN-a i.98 as “khārâdīni datvā tad-anurūpo khaṇe gate tesaṃ apanayanaṃ.” Cp Dial. 26.

2. binding, obligatory Ja v.25 (sangaraṃ p a binding promise). Cp. pāṭimokkha.

fr. paṭi + muc

Paṭiya

(nt.) a white woollen counterpane Ja iv.352 (= uṇṇāmaya-paccattharaṇāni setakambalāni pi vadanti yeva C.).

= paṭikā

Paṭiyatta

prepared, got ready, made, dressed Vin iv.18 (alankata˚); Ja iv.380 (C. for pakata) Pv-a 25 (C. for upaṭṭhita), 75 (alankata˚), 135 (id.), 232 (id.), 279 (id.); Kp-a 118 (alankata˚).

pp. of paṭi + yat

Paṭiyāti

to go back to, reach Ja vi.149 (C. for paṭimuñcati).

paṭi + , cp. pacceti

Paṭiyādita

given, prepared, arranged, dedicated Mil 9; Dhp-a ii.75.

pp. of paṭiyādeti

Paṭiyādeti

to prepare, arrange, give, dedicate Snp-a 447 ■ pp. paṭiyādita (q.v.) ■ Caus.II. paṭiyādāpeti to cause to be presented or got ready, to assign, advise, give over Vin i.249 (yāguṃ); Snp p.110 (bhojaniyaṃ); P.vA 22, 141. Pati-y-alokam

for *paṭiyāteti = Sk. pratiyātayati, Caus. of paṭi + yat, like P. niyyādeti = Sk. niryātayati

Paṭi-y-ālokaṃ

gacchati “to go to the South” Vin iv.131, Vin iv.161.

Paṭiyodha

counterfight Ja iii.3.

paṭi + yodha

Paṭiyoloketi

(T. paṭi-oloketi) to look at, to keep an eye on, observe Ja ii.406.

paṭi + oloketi

Paṭirava

shouting out, roar Dāvs iv.52.

paṭi + rava

Paṭirājā

hostile king, royal adversary Ja vi.472; Dhp-a i.193.

paṭi + rājā

Paṭiruddha

obstructed, hindered, held back, caged Ja iv.4 (oruddha-paṭiruddha sic.).

pp. paṭi + rudh

Paṭirūpa

(adj.) fit, proper, suitable, befitting, seeming DN i.91; Vin ii.166 (seyyā); MN i.123; SN i.214 SN ii.194 (ap˚); Thig 341; Pv ii.1215; Ja v.99; Pp 27; Dhp-a iii.142; Pv-a 26, Pv-a 122 (= yutta), 124. -˚desavāsa living in a suitable region DN iii.276 = AN ii.32; Ne 29, Ne 50 ■ Spelt pati˚; at Dhp 158; Snp 89, Snp 187, Snp 667; Snp-a 390. Cp. pāṭirūpika.

paṭi + rūpa

Paṭirūpaka

(adj.) (-˚) like, resembling, disguised as, in the appearance of, having the form of SN i.230; Dhp-a i.29 (putta˚); Pv-a 15 (samaṇa˚). As pati˚ at Snp-a 302, Snp-a 348, Snp-a 390 ■ nt. an optical delusion Dhp-a iii.56.

fr. paṭirūpa

Paṭirūpatā

(f.) likeness, semblance, appearance, pretence Pv-a 268 (= vaṇṇa).

abstr. fr. paṭirūpa

Paṭirodati

to cry in return, to reply by crying Ja iii.80; pp. paṭirodita = paṭirodana.

paṭi + rodati of rud

Paṭirodana

(nt.) replying through crying Ja iii.80.

paṭi + rodana

Paṭirodeti

to scold back SN i.162.

paṭi + Caus. of rud

Paṭirosati

to annoy in return, to tease back SN i.162; AN ii.215; Nd i.397.

paṭi + rosati

Paṭiladdha

received, got, obtained Pv-a 15 (= laddha), 88.

pp. of paṭilabhati

Paṭilabhati

to obtain, receive, get Iti 77; Ja i.91; Nd ii.427 (pariyesati p. paribhuñjati); Pp 57; Vv-a 115; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 7, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 67 etc ■ pret. 3rd pl paccaladdhaṃsu SN i.48 (so v.l. & C. T. ˚latthaṃsu) expl;d by paṭilabhiṃsu cp. K. S. 319 ■ aor. 1st sg paṭilacchiṃ Ja v.71 ■ Caus. paṭilābheti to cause to take or get, to rob Ja v.76 (paṭilābhayanti naṃ “rob me of him”).

paṭi + labhati

Paṭilābha

obtaining, receiving, taking up, acquisition, assumption, attainment DN i.195; MN i.50; AN ii.93, AN ii.143; Pts ii.182, Pts ii.189; Nd i.262; Dhp 333; Pp 57; Vv-a 113; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 74 ■ attabhāva˚ obtaining a reincarnation, coming into existence SN ii.256; SN iii.144; AN ii.159, AN ii.188; AN iii.122 sq ■ See also paribhoga.

fr. paṭi + labh

Paṭilika

v.l. BB together with paṭalika for talika at Ja iii.80 (cp. AN iii.36?).

Paṭilīna

having withdrawn, keeping away SN i.48 (˚nisabha “expert to eliminate”; reading pati˚); with reading pati also; AN ii.41; AN iv.449; Snp 810 Snp 852; Nd i.130, Nd i.224 (rāgassa etc. pahīnattā patilīno).

pp. of paṭilīyati

Paṭilīyati

to withdraw, draw back, keep away from, not to stick to AN iv.47 = Mil 297 (+ paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati; Mil & id. p. at SN ii.265 print pati˚) Vism 347 (+ paṭikuṭṭati pativaṭṭati) ■ pp. paṭilīna Caus. paṭileṇeti (q.v.).

paṭi + līyati of

Paṭileṇeti

to withdraw, to make keep away not to touch SN ii.265 (pati˚, as at Mil 297 patilīyati).

Sec. dern fr. pp. paṭilīna in sense of Caus.; cp. Sk. ˚lāpayati of

Paṭilobheti

to fill with desire, to entice Ja v.96.

paṭi + Caus. of lubh

Paṭiloma

(adj.) “against the hair,” in reverse order, opposite, contrary, backward; usually combd with anuloma i.e. forward & backward Vin i.1; AN iv.448 etc (see paṭiccasamuppāda); Ja ii.307. -˚pakkha opposition Pv-a 114 (cp. paṭipakkha ).

paṭi + loma

Paṭivacana

(nt.) answer, reply, rejoinder Ja iv.18; Mil 120; Pv-a 83 (opp. vacana); Thag-a 285.

paṭi + vacana

Paṭivaṭṭati

(& ˚vattati) (intrs.) to roll or move back, to turn away from AN iv.47 = Mil 297 (paṭilīyati paṭikutati p.); Caus. paṭivaṭṭeti in same meaning trs (but cp. Childers s. v. “to knock, strike”) SN ii.265 (T spells pati˚, as also at Mil 297) ■ grd. paṭivattiya only in neg. ap˚ (q.v.) ■ pp. paṭivatta (q.v.).

paṭi + vr̥t

Paṭivatta

(nt.) moving backwards, only in cpd. vatta-paṭivatta-karaṇa “moving forth or backwards ” performance of different kinds of duties; doing this, that & the other Dhp-a i.157.

pp. of paṭivattati

Paṭivattar

one who contradicts SN i.222.

paṭi + vattar, n. ag. of vac

Paṭivadati

to answer, reply AN iv.168 (v.l. for paṭicarati); Snp 932; Dhp 133; Nd i.397; Pv-a 39.

paṭi + vadati

Paṭivasati

to live, dwell (at) DN i.129; Vin ii.299; SN i.177; Ja i.202; Snp-a 462; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 67. Pativana, Pativanita, Pativani

paṭi + vasati

Paṭivāṇa, Paṭivāṇitā, Paṭivāṇī

etc. occur only in neg. form app˚, q.v.

Paṭivātaṃ

(adv.) against the wind (opp. anuvātaṃ) Vin ii.218; SN i.13; Snp 622; Dhp 54, Dhp 125; Pv-a 116; Sdhp 425.

paṭi + vātaṃ, acc. cp. Sk. prativāta & prativātaṃ

Paṭivāda

retort, recrimination Mil 18 (vāda˚ talk and counter-talk).

paṭi + vāda

Paṭivāpeti

to turn away from, to free from, cleanse MN i.435 = AN iv.423; Dhs-a 407.

Caus. of paṭi + vap

Paṭivāmeti

to throw out again DN-a i.39.

Cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, p. 160, suggesting paṭivādh˚, or paṭibādhayamāno and referring to Thag 744.

paṭi + Caus. vam

Paṭiviṃsa

lit. “divided part,” sub-part, share, bit portion, part Vin i.28; Vin iii.60 (T. reads paṭivisa); Ja ii.286; Dhs-a 135; Dhp-a i.189; Dhp-a iii.304; Vv-a 61 (˚vīsa), 64 (v.l. ˚vīsa), 120 (id.).

paṭi-aṃsa with euphonic consonant v instead of y (paṭi-y-aṃsa) and assimilation of a to i (paṭiyiṃsa → paṭiviṃsa)

Paṭiviṃsaka

part share, portion Dhp-a ii.85.

prec. + ka

Paṭivigacchati

to go apart again, to go away or asunder AN iii.243; Mil 51.

paṭi + vi + gacchati

Paṭivijānāti

to recognise Vin iii.130; Nd ii.378 (ājānāti vijānāti p. paṭivijjhati); Mil 299.

paṭi + vi + jānāti

Paṭivijjha

(adj.) in cpd. dup˚; hard to penetrate (lit. & fig.) S; v.454.

grd. of paṭivijjhati

Paṭivijjhati

to pierce through, penetrate (lit. & fig.), intuit, to acquire, master, comprehend Vin i.183; SN ii.56; SN v.119, SN v.278, SN v.387, SN v.454; AN iv.228, AN iv.469; Nd ii.378; Ja i.67, Ja i.75; Pts i.180 sq.; Mil 344; Dhp-a i.334 ■ aor. paṭivijjha Snp 90 (= aññāsi sacchākāsi Snp-a 166), and paccavyādhi Thag 26 = Thag 1161 (˚byādhi); also 3rd pl. paccavidhuṃ AN iv.228 ■ pp paṭividdha (q.v.). On phrase uttariṃ appaṭivijjhanto See uttari.

paṭi + vijjhati of vyadh

Paṭivijjhanaka

(adj.) only in neg. ap˚; impenetrable Dhp-a iv.194.

paṭi + vijjhana + ka,of vyadh

Paṭividita

known, ascertained DN i.2; Pts i.188.

pp. of paṭi + vid

Paṭividdha

being or having penetrated or pierced; having acquired, mastering, knowing MN i.438; SN ii.56 (sup˚); Pts ii.19, Pts ii.20; Ja i.214; Vv-a 73 (˚catusacca = saccānaṃ kovida) ■ appaṭividdha not pierced, not hurt Ja vi.446.

pp. of paṭivijjhati

Paṭivinaya

repression, subdual, only in cpd. āghāta˚; DN iii.262, DN iii.289; AN iii.185 sq. See āghāta.

paṭi + vi +

Paṭivinicchinati

to try or judge a case again, to reconsider Ja ii.187.

paṭi + vinicchinati

Paṭivinīta

removed, dispelled, subdued SN ii.283; SN v.76, SN v.315.

pp. of paṭivineti

Paṭivineti

to drive out, keep away, repress, subdue SN i.228; MN i.13; AN iii.185 sq.; Ja vi.551; Pv-a 104 (pipāsaṃ). Cp. BSk. prativineti Mvu ii.121 ■ pp paṭivinīta (q.v.).

paṭi + vi +

Paṭivinodana

(nt.) removal, driving out, explusion AN ii.48, AN ii.50; Mil 320.

fr. paṭivinodeti

Paṭivinodaya

(adj.-n.) dispelling, subduing, riddance, removal; dup˚ hard to dispel AN iii.184 sq.

fr. paṭivinodeti

Paṭivinodeti

to remove, dispel, drive out, get rid of DN i.138; MN i.48; Pv iii.58; Pp 64; Vv-a 305; Pv-a 60.

paṭi + vi + Caus. of nud, Cp. BSk. prativinudati Divy 34, Divy 371 etc.

Paṭivibhajati

to divide off, to divide into (equal) parts MN i.58 (cp. iii.91; paṭibhaj˚ & v.l. vibhaj˚).;

paṭi + vibhajati

Paṭivibhatta

(adj.) (equally) divided MN i.372; AN iv.211; Vv-a 50. On neg. ap˚; in cpd ˚bhogin see appaṭivibhatta.

paṭi + vibhatta

Paṭivirata

(adj.) [pp. of paṭiviramati, cp. BSk. prativiramati Divy ii, 302, 585].abstaining from, shrinking from (with abl.) DN i.5; MN iii.23; SN v.468; Iti 63; Pp 39 Pp 58; DN-a i.70; Pv-a 28, Pv-a 260app˚; not abstaining from Vin ii.296; SN v.468; Iti 64.

Paṭivirati

(f.) abstinence from Dhs 299; MN iii.74; Pv-a 206.

fr. paṭivirata

Paṭiviramati

to absṭain from MN i.152.

paṭi + viramati

Paṭivirujjhati

to act hostile, to fall out with somebody, to quarrel (saddhiṃ) Ja iv.104 ■ pp paṭiviruddha (q.v.).

paṭi + vi + rudh

Paṭiviruddha

obstructed or obstructing, an adversary, opponent Ja vi.12; DN-a i.51 (˚ā satta = pare) Mil 203, Mil 403.

pp. of paṭivirujjhati, cp. BSk. prativiruddha rebellious Divy 445

Paṭivirūhati

to grow again Vism 419.

paṭi + virūhati

Paṭivirodha

hostility, enmity, opposition Dhs 418, Dhs 1060; Pp 18; Mil 203.

paṭi + virodha

Paṭivisiṭṭha

peculiar MN i.372.

paṭi + visiṭṭha

Paṭivisesa

sub-discrimination Ja ii.9.

paṭi + visesa

Paṭivissaka

(adj.) dwelling near, neighbouring MN i.126; Ja i.114, Ja i.483; Ja iii.163 Ja iv.49; Ja v.434; Dhp-a i.47 (˚itthi), 155, 235 (˚dārakā).

fr. paṭi + *veśman or *veśya

Paṭivutta

(paṭi + vutta, pp. of vac ] said against, replied Vin iii.131, Vin iii.274.

Paṭivekkhiya

see ap˚.

Paṭivedeti

to make known, declare, announce Vin i.180; SN i.101, SN i.234; Snp 415 (aor ˚vedayi); DN-a i.227; Pv-a 6 (pītisomanassaṃ).

paṭi + vedeti, Caus. of vid

Paṭivedha

lit. piercing, i.e. penetration comprehension, attainment, insight, knowledge AN i.22 AN i.44; DN iii.253; Pts i.105; Pts ii.50, Pts ii.57, Pts ii.105, Pts ii.112, Pts ii.148, Pts ii.182 Vb 330; Mil 18; Snp-a 110, Snp-a 111; Sdhp 65appaṭivedha non-intelligence, ignorance Vin i.230; SN ii.92 SN iii.261; SN v.431; AN ii.1; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162; Pug 21- duppaṭivedha (adj.) hard to pierce or penetrate; flg difficult to master Mil 250maggaphala˚; realisation of the fruit of the Path Dhp-a i.110.

fr. paṭi + vyadhī cp. paṭivijjhati & BSk. prativedha Mvu i.86

Paṭivera

revenge Dhp-a i.50.

paṭi + vera

Paṭivellati

to embrace, cling to Ja v.449.

paṭi + vellati

Paṭivyāharati

to desist from, aor. paccavyāhāsi DN ii.232.

paṭi + vyāharati

Paṭivyūhati

(pati˚) to heap up against (?) Snp-a 554.

paṭi + vyūhati

Paṭisaṃyamati

to restrain, to exercise self-control Ja iv.396.

paṭi + saṃyamati

Paṭisaṃyujati

to connect with, fig. to start, begin (vādaṃ a discussion or argument) SN i.221 (bālena paṭisaṃyuje = paṭipphareyya C.; “engage himself to bandy with a fool” K.S. 284); Snp 843 (vādaṃ p. paṭipphareyya kalahaṃ kareyya Nd i.196) ■ pp. paṭisaṃyutta (q.v.).

paṭi + saṃ + yuj

Paṭisaṃyutta

connected with, coupled, belonging to Vin iv.6; SN i.210 (nibbāna ˚dhammikathā); Thag 598; Iti 73; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 87; Pv-a 12.

pp. of paṭisaṃyujati

Paṭisaṃvidita

apperceived, known, recognised, in phrase “pubbe appaṭisaṃvidita pañho” SN ii.54.

pp. of paṭi + saṃ + vid; same (prati) at Mvu iii.256

Paṭisaṃvedin

(adj.) experiencing, feeling, enjoying or suffering MN i.56; SN i.196; SN ii.122; SN iv.41; SN v.310 sq. AN i.164 (sukhadukkha˚); iv.303 (id.); v.35 (id.); Iti 99; Pts i.95, Pts i.114 (evaṃsukhadukkha˚), 184, 186 sq.; Pp 57 Pp 58.

fr. paṭisaṃvedeti; BSk. pratisaṃvedin Divy 567

Paṭisaṃvedeti

to feel, experience, undergo, perceive DN i.43, DN i.45; AN i.157 (domanassaṃ); iv.406 (id.); Pp 59; Pv-a 192 (mahādukkhaṃ). There is also a by-form, viz. paṭisaṃvediyati SN ii.18, SN ii.75, SN ii.256 (attabhāva-paṭilābhaṃ); Iti 38 (sukkha-dukkhaṃ; v.l. ˚vedeti).

paṭi + saṃ + vedeti, Caus. of vid

Paṭisaṃharaṇa

(nt.) removing Ne 27, Ne 41.

fr. paṭisaṃharati

Paṭisaṃharati

to draw back, withdraw, remove, take away, give up Vin ii.185 (sakavaṇṇaṃ); DN i.96; SN v.156; Pv-a 92 (devarūpaṃ).

paṭi + saṃ + hṛ; cp. BSk. pratisaṃharati Mvu i.82

Paṭisakkati

to run back Vin ii.195; AN iv.190.

paṭi + sakkati

Paṭisaṅkhayanto

is ppr. of paṭi + saṃ + kṣi, to be pacified Thag 371.

Paṭisaṅkharoti

to restore, repair, mend Vin ii.160; AN ii.249; Ja iii.159 (nagaraṃ). Caus. II paṭisaṅkhārāpeti to cause to repair or build up again MN iii.7; Ja vi.390 (gehāni).

paṭi + saṃ + kṛ;

Paṭisaṅkhā

(f.) reflection, judgment, consideration Vin i.213; SN iv.104 (˚yoniso) Pts i.33, Pts i.45, Pts i.57, Pts i.60, Pts i.64; Pp 25, Pp 57; Dhs 1349. appaṭisaṅkhā (see also ˚sankhāti) want of judgment, inconsideration Pts i.33, Pts i.45; Dhs 1346 = Pp 21Note. In combn paṭisaṅkhā yoniso “carefully, with proper care or intention” p. is to be taken as ger. of paṭisankhāti (q.v.). This connection is frequent, e.g. SN iv.104; AN ii.40; Nd i.496; Nd ii.540.

paṭi + sankhā of khyā

Paṭisaṅkhāti

to be careful, to think over, reflect, discriminate, consider; only in ger. paṭisaṅkhā (as adv.) carefully, intently, with discrimination Vin i.213; MN i.273; MN iii.2; Ja i.304; Nd ii.540; Pp 25 cp. paṭisankhā (+ yoniso); also ger. paṭisaṅkhāya Sddp 394 ■ Opp. appaṭisaṅkhā inconsiderately, in phrase sahasā app˚ rashly & without a thought MN i.94; SN ii.110, SN ii.219 ■ Cp. paṭisañcikkhati.

paṭi + saṃ + khyā

Paṭisaṅkhāna

(nt.) carefulness, mindfulness, consideration Ja i.502; Vv-a 327; Dhs-a 402 (˚paññā); Sdhp 397. -˚bala power of computation AN i.52, AN i.94; AN ii.142; DN iii.213, DN iii.244; Pts ii.169, Pts ii.176; Dhs 1354 (cp. Dhs trsln 354); Ne 15, Ne 16, Ne 38. Patisankharika & ya;

fr. paṭisankhāti

Paṭisaṅkhārika & ˚ya

(adj.) serving for repair Vin iii.43 (dārūni); Pv-a 141 (id.; ˚ya).

fr. paṭisankharoti

Paṭisañcikkhati

to think over, to discriminate, consider, reflect Vin i.5; DN i.63; MN i.267, MN i.499; MN iii.33; SN i.137; AN i.205; Pp 25 Vism 283.

paṭi + saṃ + cikkhati of khyā; cp. paṭisankhāti & BSk. pratisañcikṣati Mvu ii.314

Paṭisañjīvita

revived, resurrected MN i.333.

pp. of paṭi + saṃ + jīv

Paṭisatena

(adv.) by the hundred, i.e. in front of a hundred (people) Vin i.269.

paṭi + instr. of sataṃ

Paṭisattu

an enemy (in retaliation) Ja ii.406; Nd i.172, Nd i.173; Mil 293.

paṭi + sattu

Paṭisanthata

kindly received (covered, concealed? C.) Ja vi.23 (= paṭicchāditaṃ guttaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ vā C.).

pp. of paṭisantharati

Paṭisantharati

to receive kindly, to welcome, Mil 409; Dhs-a 397. ger. ˚santhāya Ja vi.351 ■ pp. paṭisanthata (q.v.).

paṭi + saṃ + tharati of stṛ;

Paṭisanthāra

lit. spreading before, i.e. friendly welcome, kind reception, honour, goodwill favour, friendship DN iii.213, DN iii.244; AN i.93; AN iii.303 sq. AN iv.28, AN iv.120; AN v.166, AN v.168 (˚aka adj. one who welcomes) Ja ii.57; Dhp 376 (expld as āmisa˚ and dhamma˚ at Dhp-a iv.111, see also Dhs-a 397 sq. & Dhs trsl. 350); Dhs 1344 Vb 360; Mil 409. paṭisanthāraṃ karoti to make friends, to receive friendly Pv-a 12, Pv-a 44, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 187.

fr. paṭi + saṃ + stṛ;

Paṭisandahati

to undergo reunion (see next) Mil 32.

paṭi + sandahati

Paṭisandhi

reunion (of vital principle with a body), reincarnation, metempsychosis Pts i.11 sq. 52, 59 sq.; ii.72 sq.; Ne 79, Ne 80; Mil 140; Dhp-a ii.85; Vv-a 53; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 79, Pv-a 136, Pv-a 168. A detailed discussion of p. is to be found at Vb-a 155–⁠160 ■ appaṭisandhika see sep.

fr. paṭi + saṃ + dhā

Paṭisama

(adj.) equal, forming, a counterpart Mil 205 (rāja˚); neg. appaṭisama not having one’s equal, incomparable Ja i.94; Mil 331.

paṭi + sama

Paṭisambhidā

(f.) lit. “resolving continuous breaking up,” i.e. analysis, analytic insight discriminating knowledge. See full discussion expl;n of term at Kvu trsln 377–⁠382. Always referred to as “the four branches of logical analysis” (catasso or catupaṭisambhidā), viz. attha˚; analysis of meanings “in extension”; dhamma˚; of reasons, conditions, or causal relations; nirutti˚; of [meanings “in intension as given in] definitions paṭibhāna˚ or intellect to which things knowable by the foregoing processes are presented (after Kvu trsln). In detail at AN ii.160; AN iii.113 AN iii.120; Pts i.88, Pts i.119; Pts ii.150, Pts ii.157, Pts ii.185, Pts ii.193; Vb 293

305 Vb-a 386 sq. (cp. Vism 440 sq.), 391 sq ■ See further AN i.22; AN iv.31; Nd ii.386 under paṭibhānavant; Pts i.84 Pts i.132, Pts i.134; Pts ii.32, Pts ii.56, Pts ii.116, Pts ii.189; Mil 22 (attha-dh˚nirutti-paṭibhāna-pāramippatta), 359; Vv-a 2; Dhp-a iv.70 (catūsu p-˚ āsu cheka). p˚-patta one who has attained mastership in analysis AN i.24; AN iii.120; Pts ii.202 ■ Often included in the attainment of Arahantship in formula “saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpunāti,” viz. Mil 18; Dhp-a ii.58, Dhp-a ii.78, Dhp-a ii.93.

paṭi + saṃ + bhid; the BSk. pratisaṃvid is a new formation resting on confusion between bhid & vid;, favoured by use & meaning of latter root in P paṭisaṃvidita. In BSk. we find pratisaṃvid in same application as in P., viz. as fourfold artha˚ dharma nirukti˚ pratibhāna˚ (?). Mvu iii.321

Paṭisammajjati

to sweep over again Mil 15.

paṭi + sammajjati

Paṭisammodeti

to greet friendly in return Ja vi.224 (= sammodanīya-kathāya paṭikatheti C.).

paṭi + saṃ + Caus. of mud

Paṭisaraṇa

(nt.) refuge in (-˚), shelter, help, protection MN i.295 (mano as p. of the other 5 senses) iii.9; SN iv.221; SN v.218; AN i.199 (Bhagavaṃ˚); ii.148 (sa˚ able to be restored); iii.186 (kamma˚); iv.158 351; v.355; Ja i.213; Ja vi.398appaṭisaraṇa (adj. without shelter, unprotected Vin ii.153 (so read for appaṭiss˚) ■ Note. In meaning “restoration” the derivation is prob. fr paṭi + sṛ; to move (Sk. saraṇa and not saraṇa protection). Cp. paṭisāraṇiya.

paṭi + saraṇa1

Paṭisarati1

to run back, stay back, lag behind Snp 8 sq. (opp. atisarati; aor. paccasāri expld by ohiyyi Snp-a 21).

paṭi + sṛ;

Paṭisarati2

to think back upon, to mention DN-a i.267.

paṭi + smṛ;

Paṭisallāna

(& ˚āṇa, e.g. S; v.320) (nt.) retirement for the purpose of meditation, solitude, privacy, seclusion DN iii.252; MN i.526; SN i.77; SN iii.15; SN iv.80, SN iv.144; SN v.12 SN v.398, SN v.414; AN ii.51, AN ii.176; AN iii.86 sq., 116 sq., 195; iv.15 36, 88; v.166, 168; Snp 69 (cp. Nd ii.s. v.); Ja ii.77 (pati˚) Vb 244, Vb 252; Mil 138, Mil 412.

-ārāma fond(ness) of solitude or seclusion (also ˚rata AN iii.261 sq.; Iti 39; Nd ii.433. -sāruppa very suitable for seclusion Vism 90.

for *paṭisallayana, fr. paṭi + saṃ + , cp. paṭilīna & paṭilīyati, also BSk pratisaṃlayana Divy 156, Divy 194, Divy 494

Paṭisalliyati

(˚līyati) to be in seclusion (for the purpose of meditation) Vin iii.39 (inf. ˚salliyituṃ); DN ii.237; SN v.12 (id.), 320, 325; Mil 139 ■ pp. paṭisallīna (q.v.).

fr. paṭi + saṃ + , cp. paṭilīyati

Paṭisallīna

secluded, retired, gone into solitude abstracted, plunged in meditation, separated Vin i.101 (rahogata + ); DN i.134, DN i.151; SN i.71, SN i.146 sq. (divāvihāragata + ), 225; ii.74 (rahogata + ); iv.80, 90, 144 v.415; AN ii.20; Snp-a 346 (pati˚); Ja i.349; Mil 10, Mil 138 sq.; Vv-a 3; DN-a i.309 (pati˚).

pp. of paṭisalliyati; cp. BSk. pratisaṃlīna Divy 196, Divy 291.

Paṭisāṭheyya

(nt.) a deceit in return (cp. paṭikūṭa) Ja ii.183.

paṭi + sāṭheyya

Paṭisāmita

arranged, got ready Vism 91.

pp. of paṭisāmeti

Paṭisāmeti

to set in order arrange, get ready Vin ii.113, Vin ii.211, Vin ii.216; MN i.456; Ja iii.72; Mil 15 (pattacīvaraṃ); Vv-a 118 (v.l. ˚yāpeti) 157 (v.l. ˚nameti).

paṭi + Caus. of śam, samati to make ready; cp. BSk. pratiśāmayati Divy passim

Paṭisāyati

to taste, eat, partake of food Vin ii.177.

paṭi + sāyati

Paṭisāra

see vi˚.

paṭi + smṛ;

Paṭisārana

(nt.) act of protection, expiation, atonement Mil 344 (in law); appld.

fr. paṭi + sāreti

Paṭisāraṇiya

(adj. nt.) only as t.t. in combn with kamma (official act, chapter), i.e. a formal proceeding by which a bhikkhu expiates an offence which he has committed against someone, reconciliation (cp. Vin. Texts ii.364; Vin i.49 (one of the 5 Sangha-kammas, viz. tajjaniya˚ nissaya˚, pabbājaniya˚, p.˚, ukkhepaniya˚), 143 (id.) 326; ii.15–⁠20, 295; AN i.99; AN iv.346; Dhp-a ii.75.

a grd. formation fr. paṭi + sāreti, Caus. of sṛ; to move

Paṭisārin

(adj.) falling back upon, going back to, trusting in leaning on (-˚) DN i.99 (gotta˚); SN i.153 (id.); ii.284 (id.).

fr. paṭi + sṛ; cp. paṭisāraniya & paṭisaraṇa Note

Paṭisāsana

(nt.) counter-message, reply Dhp-a i.392.

paṭi + sāsana

Paṭisibbita

sewn, embroidered Vv-a 167 (pati˚).

pp. of paṭi + sibbati

Paṭisīsaka

a false top-knot, “chignon” (?) Ja ii.197 (˚ṃ paṭimuñcitvā); v.49 (id.); Mil 90 (muṇḍaka˚).

paṭi + sīsaka

Paṭisutta

sunk into sleep Thag 203.

pp. of paṭi + svap

Paṭisumbhita

fallen down Pv iii.18 (= patita Pv-a 174).

pp. of paṭi + śumbh

Paṭisūra

a rival hero or fighter, an opponent in fight Snp 831 (= paṭipurisa paṭisattu paṭimalla Nd i.172); Nd i.173 (id.).

paṭi + sūra

Paṭiseṭṭha

(adj.) having a superior; neg. app˚; incomparable, unsurpassed Mil 357 (appaṭibhāga + ).

paṭi + seṭṭha

Paṭisedha

warding off, prohibition Mil 314 (“resubjugation”); Snp-a 402 (with ref. to part “na”); Kp-a 170 (id.); Pv-a 11 (˚nipāta = “mā”); Vv-a 224.

fr. paṭi + sidh1, sedhati drive off

Paṭisedhaka

(adj. n.) warding off, one who prevents or puts a stop to SN i.221; Mil 344.

fr. paṭisedha

Paṭisedhati

& (Caus.); ˚sedheti to ward off, prohibit, prevent, refuse SN iv.341; Pv-a 11.

paṭi + sedhati

Paṭisedhana

(nt.) warding off, refusal, prohibition, stopping SN i.221, SN i.223; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 25; Sdhp 397.

cp. paṭisedha

Paṭisedhitar

one who prohibits or refuses Ja ii.123. = v.91.

n. ag. fr. paṭisedhati

Paṭisena

repulsion, opposition, enmity, retaliation; only in compn with kṛ; as ˚senikaroti to make opposition, to oppose, retaliate Snp 932, cp. Nd i.397; -˚senikattar (n ag.), one who repulses, fighter, retaliator, arguer Snp 832 cp. Nd i.173.

paṭi + sena, of either or śri, cp. usseneti

Paṭiseneti

to repel, push away, be inimical towards, retaliate (opp. usseneti) AN ii.215 (paṭisseneti); Snp 390 (˚seniyati).

paṭi + seneti, see usseneti

Paṭisevati

to follow, pursue, indulge in (acc.) practise Vin ii.296 (methunaṃ dhammaṃ); MN i.10; AN ii.54 (methunaṃ); Ja i.437; Ja vi.73, Ja vi.505; Dhp 67; Nd i.496 Pp 62; Mil 224; Dhp-a ii.40; Pv-a 130; Sdhp 396. Note. paṭisevati is spelt pati˚; at Dhp 67, Dhp 68; Ja iii.275 Ja iii.278.

paṭi + sevati, cp. BSk. pratisevate Divy 258 in same meaning

Paṭisevana

(nt.) going after, indulging in, practice MN i.10.

fr. paṭisevati

Paṭisevitar

one who practises, pursues or indulges in (acc.) AN iii.143 sq. (bhesajjaṃ).

n. ag. of paṭisevati

Paṭisotaṃ

(adv.) against the stream (opp. anusotaṃ) Iti 114; Ja i.70; Pv-a 154. paṭisotagāmin going against the stream, toiling, doing hard work SN i.136; AN ii.6 (opp. anu˚), 214 sq.

paṭi + sotaṃ, acc. of sota

Paṭissata

recollecting, thoughtful, mindful, minding Snp 283 = Mil 411; Dhp 144 (t); Vv 2110; and with spelling pati˚; at SN iii.143; SN iv.74, SN iv.322, SN iv.351; AN iii.24; Iti 10, Iti 21, Iti 81; Snp 283, Snp 413.

paṭi + sata, pp. of smṛ;

Paṭissati

(f.) mindfulness, remembrance, memory MN i.36 sq.; Dhs 23; Pp 25. app˚ lapse of memory Dhs 1349.

paṭi + sati of smṛ;

Paṭissatika

(adj.) mindful, thoughtful Thag 42.

fr. paṭissati

Paṭissava

assent, promise, obedience Ja vi.220; Vv-a 351 (cp. paṭissaya Vv-a 347).

fr. paṭi + śru

Paṭissavatā

(f.) obedience; neg. appaṭissavatā want of deference Dhs 1325 = Pp 20. Patissa & Patissa

abstr. fr. paṭissava

Paṭissā & Patissā

(f.) [paṭi + śru, cp. paṭissuṇāti & paṭissāvin; in BSk. we find pratīsā which if legitimate would refer the word to a basis different than śru. The form occurs in cpd. sapratīśa respectful Divy; also Mvu i.516; Mvu ii.258; besides as sapratisa Mvu iii.345 deference, obedience, only in cpd. sappaṭissa (q.v. obedient, deferential Iti 10 (sappatissa); Vv 8441 (cp Vv-a 347), & appaṭissa disobedient, not attached to SN i.139; SN ii.224 sq.; AN ii.20; AN iii.7, AN iii.247, AN iii.439; Ja ii.352 (˚vāsa anarchy; reading t); Pv-a 89.

Paṭissāvin

(adj.) assenting, ready, obedient, willing DN i.60; SN iii.113 (kinkāra-paṭi˚).

fr. paṭi + śru

Paṭissuṇāti

to assent, promise, agree aor. paccassosi Vin i.73; DN i.236; SN i.147, SN i.155; Snp p.50, and paṭisuṇi Snp-a 314; ger. ˚suṇitvā freq. in formula “sādhū ti patissuṇitvā” asserting his agreement, saying yes SN i.119; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 55; & passim; also paṭissutvā SN i.155 ■ f. abstr. paṭissutavatā Snp-a 314.

paṭi + śru

Paṭisseneti

see paṭiseneti.

Paṭihaṃsati

to beat, knock against Pv-a 271 (for ghaṭṭeti Pv iv.108; v.l. paṭipisati).

for ghaṃsati?

Paṭihaṅkhati

only in one stock phrase viz. purāṇañ ca vedanaṃ paṭihankhāmi navañ ca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmi “I shall destroy any old feeling and not produce any new” SN iv.104 = AN ii.40 AN iii.388 = AN iv.167 = Nd i.496 = Nd ii.5402; Vism 32, Vism 33.

fut. of paṭihanti

Paṭihata

stricken, smitten, corrupted Pv iii.79; Pv-a 20 (˚citta), 207 (id.) ■ app˚ unobstructed Dhp-a ii.8; Vv-a 14.

pp. of paṭihanti

Paṭihanana

(nt.) repulsion, warding off Vism 31.

fr. paṭi + han

Paṭihananaka

(adj.) one who offers resistance Dhp-a i.217.

fr. paṭi + han

Paṭihanati

to strike against, ward off, keep away, destroy MN i.273; Mil 367; ppr. paṭihanamāna meeting, impinging on, striking against Vism 343. ger. paṭihacca SN v.69, SN v.237, SN v.285; fut. paṭihaṅkhati; pp paṭihata (q.v.) ■ Pass. paṭihaññati Iti 103; Ja i.7; Dhs-a 72.

paṭi + han

Paṭiharati

to strike in return Vin ii.265; DN i.142; SN iv.299 ■ Caus. paṭihāreti to repel, avoid Ja vi.266, Ja vi.295 ■ Cp. pāṭihāriya etc.

paṭi + hṛ;

Paṭu

(adj.) sharp, pungent; fig. keen, wise, clever, skilful Vism 337 (˚saññākicca), 338. Cp paddha1 & pāṭava.;

cp. Epic. Sk. paṭu

Paṭuppādana

(nt.) subtraction (opp. sankalana) DN-a i.95. The word is not clear (cp. Dial. i.22).

paṭa (?) + upp˚

Paṭuva

at DN i.54 is read as pacuṭa by Bdhgh. & trsl;n (see Dial. i.72). See under pavuṭā.

Paṭola

a kind of cucumber, Trichosanthes Dioeca Vin i.201 (˚paṇṇa).

dial.?

Paṭṭa

1. slab, tablet, plate, in cpds. ayo˚; iron plate AN iv.130, AN iv.131; Ja iv.7 (suvaṇṇa˚); Pv-a 43 (ayomaya˚); loha˚; brass plate Pv-a 44; silā˚ stone slab Ja i.59 etc. When written on it is placed into a casket (mañjūsā) Ja ii.36; Ja iv.335. 2. a bandage, strip (of cloth) Vv 3341 (āyoga˚) = Vv-a 142.

3. fine cloth, woven silk, cotton cloth, turban (-cloth) Vin ii.266 (dussa˚ = setavattha-paṭṭa Bdhgh see Vin. Texts iii.341); SN ii.102 (id.) Ja i.62 (sumana cloth with a jasmine pattern); vi.191 (˚sāṭaka), 370 (nāḷi˚); Kp-a 51 (˚bandhana); DN-a i.87 (āmilāka); Dhp-a i.395 (˚vattha); ii.42 (rajata˚) ■ dupaṭṭa “double cloth, see under dvi B ii.

cp. late Sk. paṭṭa, doubtful etym.

Paṭṭaka

(adj. n.) made of or forming a strip of cloth; a bandage, strip (of cloth), girdle Vin ii.136 (paṭṭikā); AN i.254 (= paṭṭikā C.); Ja v.359 (aya˚ an iron girdle), Vb-a 230 (paṭṭikā).

fr. paṭṭa

Pattana

(nt.) a place, city, port Ja i.121; Ja iv.16, Ja iv.137, Ja v.75; Pv-a 53˚ka a sort of village Ja vi.456.

*Sk. paṭṭana

Paṭṭikā

see paṭṭaka.

Paṭṭoli

in yāna˚ at Vism 328 is doubtful. It might be read as yāna-kaḷopi (on account of combn with kumbhimukha), or (preferably) as putoḷi (with v.l. BB), which is a regular variant for mutoli. The trsln would be “provision bag for a carriage.” See further discussed under mutoḷi.

Paṭṭha

(adj.) “standing out,” setting out or forth, undertaking, able (clever? Vin iii.210 (dhammiṃ kathaṃ kātuṃ); iv.60 (cīvarakammaṃ kātuṃ), 254 (dhammiṃ kathaṃ kātuṃ) 285 290; Nd ii.p. 46 (for Snp p.ose part puṭṭha; v.l. seṭṭha) Nd ii.no. 388 (in expln of paṭṭhagū Snp 1095; here it clearly means “being near, attending on, a pupil or follower of”). See also paddha1 and paddhagu.

fr. pa + sthā, see patthahati

Paṭṭhapita

established, or given Pv-a 119 (cp. patiṭṭhāpitatta).

pp. of paṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. prasthapita Divy 514

Paṭṭhahati

to put down, set down, provide; ppr. paṭṭhayamāna Pv-a 128 (varamāna + ; v.l. paṭṭhap˚); aor. paṭṭhayi Pv ii.934 (dānaṃ; v.l. paṭṭhapayi, expld by paṭṭhapesi Pv-a 126) ger. paṭṭhāya see sep ■ Caus. II. paṭṭhapeti to put out or up, to furnish, establish, give SN ii.25; Pv ii.924 (fut. ˚ayissati dānaṃ, v.l. paṭṭhayissati; expld by pavattessati Pv-a 123); Ja i.117; Pv-a 54 (bhattaṃ), 126 (dānaṃ) ■ pp. paṭṭhapita (q.v.).

pa + sthā = P. tiṭṭhati, with short base *ṭṭha for *tiṭṭha in trs. meaning, see patiṭṭhahati

Paṭṭhāna

(nt.) setting forth, putting forward; only in cpd. sati˚; setting up of mindfulness (q.v. and see discussion of term at Dial ii.324) Besides in later lit. meaning “origin,” starting point cause, in title of the 7th book of the Abhidhamma, also called Mahāpakaraṇa. See Ledi, J.P.T.S. 1915–⁠16 p. 26; Mrs. Rh. D., Tika p. 1, vi ■ At Sdhp 321 it has the Sk. meaning of “setting out” (?).

fr. pa + sthā, cp. paṭṭhahati

Paṭṭhāya

(indecl.) putting down, starting out from, used as prep. (with abl.) from… onward, beginning with, henceforth, from the time of e.g. ajjato p. from to-day Vv-a 246; ito p. from here henceforth Ja i.60, Ja i.63, Ja i.150; cp. Ja i.52 (mūlato); vi.336 (sīsato); Pv-a 11 (galato), 13 (gihīkālato). paṭṭhāyayāva (with acc.) from-up to Vism 374.

ger. fr. paṭṭhahati

Paṭṭhika

in pañca˚ see under pañca.

Paṭhati

to read (of a text) Vv-a 72; Pv-a 58, Pv-a 59, Pv-a 70 etc.; see also pāṭha.

paṭh to read, Sk. paṭhati

Paṭhana

(nt.) reading (textual) Mil 344.

fr. paṭhati

Paṭhama

(adj.) num. ord. “the first,” in foll. meanings: (1) the first, foremost, former Snp 93, Snp 436, Snp 1031; Ja ii.110; Kp-a i.192; Dhp-a iii.5, Dhp-a iii.196 (˚vaya, contrasted with majjhima & pacchima); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 56. nt. acc. paṭhamaṃ at first, for the first time Vin i.16; DN ii.14; Dhp 158; Ja i.222; Ja ii.103, Ja ii.153; often as first part of cpd. ˚-, meaning either “first” or “recently, newly, just” Vin i.1 (˚âbhisambuddha having just attained Buddhaship); DN iii.253 (˚âbhinibbatta), Snp 420 (˚uppattika “in his first youth”) Ja iii.394 (˚uggata newly sprung up) ■ A second compar formation is paṭhamatara, only as adv. ˚ṃ at the (very) first, as early as possible, first of all Vin i.30; Ja vi.510; Dhp-a i.138; Vv-a 230; Pv-a 93.

Ved. prathama, cp. Av. fratəma; also Ved. prataraṃ further, Gr. πρότερος superl. formation fr. prep. *pro, Sk. pra etc. see pa˚

Paṭhavatta

(nt.) earthliness MN i.329.

abstr. fr. paṭhavī

Paṭhavant

(adj.-n.) a wayfarer SN i.37.

fr. paṭhavī

Paṭhavī

(f.) the earth. Acc to Nd ii.389 syn. with jagati. It figures as the first element in enumn of the 4 elements (see dhātu 1), viz p., āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind or the elements of the extension, cohesion, heat and motion Cpd. 155). At DN iii.87 sq.≈ Vism 418 rasa˚ is opposed to bhūmi-pappaṭaka. Otherwise it is very frequent in representing the earth as solid, firm, spacious ground See DN ii.14, DN ii.16; MN i.327 sq.; SN i.113 (p. udrīyati) 119 (id.), 186; ii.133, 169 sq.; v.45, 78, 246, 456 sq. AN ii.50; AN iv.89, AN iv.374, AN v.263 sq.; Snp 307, Snp 1097; Iti 21; Dhp 41, Dhp 44, Dhp 178 (pathavyā); Pv ii.66; Mil 418; Pv-a 57, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 174 ■ mahā˚ MN i.127; SN ii.179, SN ii.263; SN iii.150; Ja i.25, Ja i.74; Ja iii.42; Mil 187; aya˚ iron soil (of Avīci Dhp-a i.148. In compn both paṭhavī˚ & pathavi˚.;

-ojā (paṭhavojā) sap or essence of the earth Dhp-a ii.154. -kampa shaking the earth, an earthquake DN-a i.130. -kampana = kampa Ja i.47. -kasiṇa the earth artifice (see Dhs trsl 43) DN iii.286. -dhātu the earth element (see above) DN i.215; DN ii.294; DN iii.228, DN iii.247; MN i.185; MN i.421; SN ii.170; Dhs 588, Dhs 648, Dhs 962 (cp. Dhs trsln 241); Ne 73, Ne 74; Vb-a 55; -maṇḍala the circle of the E. DN i.134; SN i.101; AN iv.90. -rasa taste of earth SN i.134; Snp-a 5. -lekha writing on (or in) carth AN i.283 Pp 32. -saññā earth consciousness MN ii.105; AN iv.312; AN v.7 sq., 318 sq. 353 sq. -sama like the earth MN i.127, MN i.423; Dhp 95.

Ved. pṛthivī, doublets in Pāli pathavī, puthavī, puthuvī, puṭhuvī, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 124, 17n. To ad. pṛthu: see puthu, prath to expand, thus lit. the broad one, breadth, expansion. Not (as Bdhgh at Vism 364 patthaṭattā pathavī, cp. Cpd. 155 even modern linguists!) to be derived fr. pattharati

Paḍayhati

v.l. at Pv-a 60 for T. pariḍayhati.

Paṇa

a shop Ja iv.488 [v.l. pana].

in this meaning unknown in Sk; only in one faulty var. lect. as “house”; see BR s. v. paṇa. Usual meaning “wager”

Paṇaka

see paṇṇaka ■ paṇaka (comb) see phaṇaka.

Paṇati

to sell, barter, bargain, risk, bet Ja v.24 (= voharati attānaṃ vikkiṇati C.) ■ See also paṇitaka & paṇiya.;

cp. Sk. paṇati

Paṇamati

to bend, to be bent or inclined Pts i.165, Pts i.167 ■ pp. paṇata ibid ■ Caus. panāmeti (q.v.).

pa + nam

Paṇaya

affection Ja vi.102.

classical Sk. praṇaya, fr pra +

Paṇava

a small drum or cymbal DN i.79; SN ii.128; SN iv.344; AN ii.117, AN ii.241; Ja iii.59 (of an executioner; Pv-a 4 in id. p. has paṭaha); Thag 467; Bv i.32; Vv 8110; Dhs 621 (˚sadda); Dhp-a i.18.

cp. Ep. Sk. paṇava, dial; accord. to BR a corruption of praṇava

Paṇāma

bending, salutation, obeisance (cp. paṇāmeti 1) Vv-a 321 (˚ṃ karoti = añjaliṃ karoti) ■ As paṇāmana nt. at Ja iv.307.

fr. pa + nam, see paṇamati

Paṇāma

bowing, bow, obeisance Thig 407 (˚ṃ karoti).

fr. pa + nam, see paṇamati

Paṇāmita

1. (= paṇāmeti 1) raised, bent or stretched out Snp 352 (añjalī sup˚).

2. (= paṇāmeti 3) dismissed, given leave Vin i.54; MN i.457 (bhikkhusangho); Mil 209 (id.), 187.

pp. of paṇāmeti

Paṇāmeti

1. to bend forth or over, stretch out, raise, in phrase añjaliṃ p. to raise the hands in respectful salutation Vin ii.188; DN i.118; Snp p.79. 2. to bend to or over, to shut, in kavāṭaṃ p. to shut the door Vin i.87; Vin ii.114, Vin ii.207; pattaṃ Vin ii.216. 3. to make go away, to turn someone away, give leave dismiss Vin i.54; Vin ii.303; SN i.7; Thag 511, Thag 557; Ja v.314; Mil 187 (parisaṃ); Pass. paṇāmīyati (ibid.)-pp paṇāmita (q.v.).

Caus. of paṇamati

Paṇitaka

(adj. nt.) staked, wagered, bet, wager, stake at play Ja vi.192 (so read for paṇīta˚).

fr. paṇita-pp. of paṇati

Paṇidahati

to put forth, put down to, apply, direct, intend; aspire to, long for, pray for SN v.156 (atthāya cittaṃ paṇidahiṃ). ger. paṇidhāya SN i.42 = Snp 660 (vācaṃ manañ ca pāpakaṃ); SN i.170 (ujuṃ kāyaṃ); AN iii.249 (deva-nikāyaṃ p.); iv.461 sq (id.); Vb 244 (ujuṃ kāyaṃ p.) = DN-a i.210. Also lit (as prep with acc.) “in the direction of, towards MN i.74 (angārā-kāsuṃ) ■ pp. paṇihita (q.v.).

pa + ni + dhā

Paṇidhāna

(nt.) aspiration, longing, prayer Vv-a 270; Sdhp 344.

fr. paṇidahati; cp. philosophical literature & BSk. praṇidhāna

Paṇidhi

(f.) aspiration, request, prayer, resolve DN iii.29 DN iii.276; SN ii.99, SN ii.154; SN iii.256 (ceto˚); iv.303; AN ii.32 AN iv.239 sq. (ceto˚); v.212 sq.; Snp 801; Vv 4712; Nd i.109; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1126; Snp-a 132 (= paṇidhāna); Dhp-a ii.172; Dhs-a 222 (rāga-dosa-moha˚).

-kamma (in deva cult) payment of a vow DN i.12 cp. DN-a i.97 (which Kern, however, Toev. s. v., interprets as “application of an enema,” comparing Sk pranidheya to be injected as a clyster).

fr. paṇidahati; cp. BSk. praṇidhi Divy 102, Divy 134, in same meaning. The usual Sk. meaning is “spy”

Paṇipatati

to fall down before Thag 375.

pa + ni + pat

Paṇipāta

prostration, adoration Dāvs v.53.

fr. pa + ni + pat

Paṇipātika

(adj.) consisting of a footfall, humbling or humble, devotional Snp-a 157.

fr. paṇipāta

Paṇiya

(adj.) to be sold or bought, vendible, nt. article of trade, ware AN ii.199; Vv 847 (= bhaṇḍa Vv-a 337); Ja iv.363 (= bhaṇḍa C 366).

ger. formation fr. paṇ, see paṇati & cp. BSk. paṇya in tara-paṇya fare Avs i.148

Paṇihita

applied, directed, intent, bent on, well directed, controlled SN iv.309 (dup˚); AN i.8 AN v.87; Dhp 43; (sammā ˚ṃ cittaṃ); Snp 154 (su˚ mano suṭṭhu ṭhapito acalo Snp-a 200); Pts ii.41 (vimokkha) Mil 204, Mil 333; Mil 413appaṇihita in connection with samādhi & vimokkha seems to mean “free from all longings,” see Vin iii.93 = Vin iv.25; SN iv.295, SN iv.309, SN iv.360; Pts ii.43 sq., 100; Mil 337.

pp. of paṇidahati

Paṇīta

(adj.) 1. (lit.) brought out or to, applied executed; used with ref. to punishment (see paṇeti daṇḍaṃ) Pv iv.166 (˚daṇḍa receiving punishment ṭhapita-sarīra-daṇḍa Pv-a 242).

2. (appld) brought out or forth, (made) high, raised, exalted, lofty, excellent with ref. to food (very often used in this sense) “heaped up, plentiful, abundant.” Synonymous with uttama (DN-a i.109, DN-a i.171), uḷāra (Pv-a 25, Pv-a 228), atuḷa (Pv-a 110) opp. hīna (D iii.215; AN iii.349; AN v.140; Vism 11) lūkha (S ii.153; Vv-a 64) ■ DN i.12 (dhammā gambhīrā… paṇītā… ), 109 (khādaniya); ii.127 (id. iii.215 (with hīna & majjhima-dhātu); SN i.136 (dhammo gambhīro etc.); ii.153 (dhātu), 154 (paṇidhi); iii.47 iv.360; v.66 (dhammā), 226 (etaṃ padaṃ), 266 (sattā) AN i.284; AN ii.171, AN ii.190; AN iv.10, AN iv.332, AN iv.423; AN v.8, AN v.36 and passim; Snp 240, Snp 389; Iti 44; Pv i.53; iv.127; Pp 28 (˚âdhimutta having high aspirations), 30, 60; Dhs 269 Dhs 1027, Dhs 1411; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 35 (āhāra), 42 (id.); Dhp-a ii.154 (bhojana). Compar. paṇītatara, often combd with abhikkantatara, e.g. DN i.62, DN i.74, DN i.216; SN i.80; AN i.119 AN i.171; AN v.37, AN v.140, AN v.203 sq.

pp. of pa + neti in same application BSk.; cp. Divy 385

Paṇītaka

a gambler’s stake Ja vi.192 See paṇitaka. Panudati, Panunna

perhaps = Sk. paṇita, or paṇ (see paṇa), as P. formation it may be taken as pa + nīta + ka, viz. that which has been produced

Paṇudati, Paṇunna

see panudati etc.

Paṇeti

to lead on to, bring out, adduce, apply, fig. decree (a fine or punishment), only used in phrase daṇḍaṃ paṇeti to give a punishment DN ii.339 = Mil 110; MN ii.88; Dhp 310; Ja ii.207; Ja iii.441; Ja iv.192; Mil 29; Dhp-a iii.482 ■ pp. paṇīta (q.v.).

pa +

Paṇḍa

see bhaṇḍati.

Paṇḍaka

a eunuch, weakling Vin i.86, Vin i.135, Vin i.168, Vin i.320; Vin iv.20, Vin iv.269; AN iii.128; AN v.71 Sdhp 79 ■ With ref. to the female sex as paṇḍikā at Vin ii.271 (itthi˚).

cp late (dial.) Sk. paṇḍa & paṇḍaka; for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under pello

Paṇḍara

(adj) white, pale, yellowish Ja ii.365; v. 340; Nd i.3; Dhs 6 Vb 88 (Dhs trsl. “that which is clear”? in def. of citta & mano) Dhs 17, Dhs 293, Dhs 597; Mil 226; Dhp-a iv.8; Vv-a 40; Pv-a 56 (= seta); Sdhp 430.

Ved. pāṇḍara; cp. paṇḍu, q.v. for etym.

Paṇḍicca

(nt.) erudition, cleverness, skill, wisdom Ja i.383; Pts ii.185; Pp 25; Dhs 16 (= paṇḍitassa bhāvo Dhs-a 147), 292, 555. As pandicciya Ja vi.4.

fr. paṇḍita

Paṇḍita

(adj.) wise, clever, skilled, circumspect, intelligent Vin ii.190 (+ buddhimanto) DN i.12 (˚vedaniya comprehensible only by the wise) 120 (opp. duppañña); iii.192; MN i.342; MN iii.61, MN iii.163, MN iii.178; SN iv.375 (+ viyatta medhāvin); v.151 (+ vyatta kusala) AN i.59, AN i.68, AN i.84, AN i.101 sq., 162 (paṇḍitā nibbānaṃ adhigacchanti); ii.3 sq., 118, 178, 228; iii.48 = Iti 16; Snp 115 Snp 254, Snp 335, Snp 523, Snp 721, Snp 820, Snp 1007, Snp 1125 (Ep. of Jatukaṇṇī) Iti 86; Dhp 22, Dhp 28, Dhp 63 (˚mānin), 79, 88, 157, 186, 238 289; Ja iii.52 (sasa˚); Nd i.124; Pv iv.332 (opp. bāla = sappañña Pv-a 254); Dhs 1302; Mil 3, Mil 22; DN-a i.117; Dhp-a iv.111; Vv-a 257; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 41, Pv-a 60 (= pañña), 93 99.

cp. Ved. paṇḍita

Paṇḍitaka

(adj.) a pedant DN i.107.

paṇḍita + ka

Paṇḍu

(adj.) [cp. Ved. pāṇḍu, palita, pāṭala (pale-red); Gr. πελιτνός, πελλός, πόλιος (grey); Lat. palleo (to be pale), pullus (grey); Lith. patvas (pale-yellow), pilkas (grey); Ohg. falo (pale, yellowish, withered); E. pale pale-red or yellow, reddish, light yellow, grey; only at Thig 79 (kisā paṇḍu vivaṇṇā), where paṇḍu represents the usual up-paṇḍ’-uppaṇḍuka-jātā: “thin, pale and colourless” see Thag-a 80). Otherwise only in cpds. e.g.

-kambala a light red blanket, orange-coloured cloth SN i.64 (= ratta-kambala C.); AN i.181; Snp 689 (= ratta Snp-a 487); also a kind of ornamental stone, Sakka’s throne (p ■ k ■ silā) is made of it Ja i.330; Ja ii.93; Ja ii.53 (˚silāsana); v.92 (id.); Pv ii.960 (˚silā = p ■ k-nāmaka sīlāsana Pv-a 138); Vv-a 110 (id.); Kp-a 122 (˚varāsana); Dhp-a i.17 (˚silāsana). -palāsa a withered leaf Vin i.96 = Vin iii.47; Vin iv.217; Dhp 233, Vb-a 244; Kp-a 62 on ˚palāsika (DN-a i.270) see J.P.T.S. 1893, 37. -mattikā yellow loam, clay soil Kp-a. 59. -roga jaundice Vin i.206 (˚ābādha) 276 (id.); Ja i.431; Ja ii.102; Dhp-a i.25 -rogin suffering from jaundice Ja ii.285; Ja iii.401. -vīṇā yellow flute (of Pañcasikha): see beluva ■ sīha yellow lion, one of the 4 kinds Snp-a 125 (cp. Manor ■ pūr. on AN ii.33). -sutta orange-coloured string DN i.76.

Paṇḍuka

(-roga) perhaps to be read with v.l. at MN ii.121 for bandhuka˚.

Paṇṇa

(nt.) 1. a leaf (esp. betel leaf) Vin i.201 (5 kinds of leaves recommended for medicinal purposes, viz. nimba˚; Azadirachta Indica kuṭaja˚; Wrightia antidysenterica, paṭola˚; Trichosanthes dioeca, sulasi˚; or tulasi˚ basil, kappāsika˚ cotton, see Vin. Texts ii.46) AN i.183 (tiṇa + ) Snp 811 (p. vuccati paduma-pattaṃ Nd i.135); Ja i.167; Ja ii.105 (nimba)˚; Kp-a 46 (khitta-p ■ kosa-saṇṭhāna); Pv-a 115 (= patta) tālapaṇṇa a fan of palm leaves Vv 3343 (= tālapattehi kata-maṇḍala-vījanī Vv-a 147); haritapaṇṇa greens, vegetable Snp-a 283; sūpeyyapaṇṇa curry leaf Ja i.98.

2. a leaf for writing upon, written leaf, letter; donation, bequest (see below paṇṇākāra Ja i.409 (cp. paṭipaṇṇa); ii.104; iv.151 (ucchangato p ˚ṃ nīharati); Dhp-a i.180; Pv-a 20 (likhā˚ written message). paṇṇaṃ āropeti to send a letter Ja i.227; pahiṇati id. Ja iv.145; Ja v.458; peseti id. Ja i.178; Ja iv.169. paṇṇaṃ likhati to write a letter Ja ii.174; Ja vi.369 (paṇṇe wrote on a leaf), 385 iṇa˚ a promissory note Ja i.230; Ja iv.256-p. as ticket or label at Dhs-a 110.

3. a feather wing see su˚.

-ākāra “state or condition of writing” (see ākāra 1) i.e. object of writing; that which is connected or sent with a letter, a special message, donation, present, gift Ja i.377; Ja ii.166; Ja iii.10; Ja iv.316, Ja iv.368; vi. 68, 390; Snp-a 78; Dhp-a. 184 326, 392, 339: ii.80; iii.292 (dasavidha dibba˚ viz. āyu etc.: see ṭhāna); iv.11. -kuṭi a hut of leaves DN iii.94; SN i.226; Ja ii.44; Pv iii.220; DN-a i.318. -chatta a fan of leaves Ja ii.277. -chattaka a leaf-awning SN i.90 SN i.92. -dhāra a holder made of leaves Ja v.205. -pacchi leaf-basket, a b. for greens Ja vi.369. -puṭa a palm-leaf basket Pv-a 168. -saññā a mark of leaves (tied up to mark the boundary of a field) Ja i.153. -santhāra a spreading leaf, leaf cover, adj. spread with leaves AN i.136; Ja vi.24. -sālā a hut of leaves, a hermitage Ja i.6, Ja i.7, Ja i.138; Ja ii.101 sq.; Ja vi.30, Ja vi.318 (nala-bhittikaṃ ˚ṃ katvā); vi.24. -susa (& sosa); drying the leaves (said of the wind) Kp-a 15.

Ved. parṇa, cp. Ags. fearn, E. fern

Paṇṇaka

1. green leaves (collectively), vegetable, greens Ja vi.24 (kāra˚ vegetable as homage or oblation); Pv iii.33 (panko paṇṇako ca, expld as “kaddamo vā udakacchikkhalo vā” Pv-a 189, but evidently misunderstood for “withered leaves”); Pv-a 256 (tiṇakaṭṭha-paṇṇaka-sala, is reading correct?).

2. Name of a water plant, most likely a kind of fern (see Kern Toev. ii.16 q.v.). Often combd with sevāla (Blyxa Octandra), e.g. at Ja ii.324; Ja v.37 ■ The spelling is also paṇaka, even more frequent than paṇṇaka and also combd with sevāla, e.g. Vin iii.177 (in combn saṇkha-sevāla˚, where Bdhgh explains “sankho ti dīghamūlako paṇṇasevālo vuccati, sevālo ti nīlasevālo, avaseso udaka-pappaṭaka-nīla-bījak’ ādi sabbo ‘ti paṇako ti sankhaṃ gacchati”); SN v.122; AN iii.187, AN iii.232, AN iii.235; Ja iv.71 (sevāla˚); Mil 35 (sankha-sevāla-p. which the Manor-pūṛ explns by udaka-pappaṭaka, and also as “nīlamaṇḍūkapiṭṭhivaṇṇena udakapiṭṭhiṃ chādetvā nibattapaṇakaṃ” see Trenckner, Mil 421 and cp Miln. trsln i.302), 210 (suvaṇṇa˚), 401 (cakkavāko sevāla paṇaka-bhakkho); Kp-a 61 (sevāla˚; cp. Schubring’s kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.).

3. (see paṇṇa 2) a written leaf, a ticket Dhs-a 110.

paṇṇa + ka

Paṇṇatti

see paññatti.

Paṇṇattika

(adj.) having a manifestation or name, in a˚-bhāva state without designation, state of non-manifestation, indefinite or unknown state (with ref to the passing nature of the phenomenal world) Dhp-a i.89; Dhp-a ii.163. Pannarasa & Pannavisati;

fr. paṇṇatti

Paṇṇarasa & Paṇṇavīsati

see pañca 1. B, & C.;

Paṇṇāsa

see pañca 2. A.

Paṇṇi

(f.) a leaf Vin i.202 (taka˚).

= paṇṇa

Paṇṇika

one who deals with greens, a florist or greengrocer Ja i.411; Ja ii.180; Ja iii.21 (˚dhītā); Mil 331.

paṇṇa + ika

Paṇṇikā

(f.) greens, green leaves vegetable Vin ii.267 (na harītaka ˚ṃ pakinitabbaṃ trsl. at Vin. Texts iii.343 by “carry on the business of florist and seedsman,” thus taken as paṇṇika, cp. also Vin. Texts iii.112); Ja i.445 (paṇṇikāya saññaṃ adāsi is faulty; reading should be saṇṇikāya “with the goad, of saṇ(ṇ)ikā = Sk. sṛṇi elephant-driver’s hook).

to paṇṇaka; cp. Sk. parṇikā; meaning uncertain, cp. Kern, Toev. p. 17 s. v.

Paṇhi

(m. & f.) the heel Vin ii.280 (˚samphassa); Ja ii.240; Ja v.145; Sdhp 147, Sdhp 153. See next.

Ved. pārṣṇi, Av. paṣṇā, Lat. perna, Gr.; πτέρνα, Goth. fairzna, Ohg. fersana = Ger. ferse

Paṇhikā

(f.) the heel Ja i.491; Kp-a 49 (˚aṭṭhi); Vism 253 (id.); Pv-a 185.

fr. paṇhi

Paṇhin

(adj.) having heels DN ii.17 (āyata˚ having projecting heels, the 3rd of the 32 characteristics of a Mahāpurisa).

fr. paṇhi

Patati

to fall, jump, fall down on (loc. acc. & instr.), to alight Ja i.278 (dīpake); Snp 248 (nirayaṃ); Pv iv.108 (1st pl. patāmase); Mil 187; Pv-a 45 ppr. patanto Ja i.263 (asaniyā); iii.188 (nāvāya); fut patissati Ja iii.277; aor. pati Snp 1027 (sirasā); Ja iii.55; Pv i.78; ger. patitvā Ja i.291; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 16; Dhp-a iii.196 (vv.ll. papāta & papatā the latter aor. of papatati q.v.); ger. patitvā Ja i.291; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 16. pp. patita (q.v.) ■ Caus. pāteti (q.v.). Pass. (Caus. patīyati is brought to fall also intrs. rush away Ja iv.415 (= palāyati C.); Mil 187.

Ved. patati, Idg. *pet “to fly” as well as “to fall.” Cp. Av. pataiti fly, hurry; Gr. πέτομαι fly, ὠκυπέτης quick, πίπτω fall; Lat. praepes quick, peto to go for, impetus, attack etc.

Patatthi

at Ja vi.276 is misprint for pathaddhi (q.v.).

Patana

(nt. adj.) falling, falling out, ruin, destruction Ja i.293 (akkhīni); ii.154; iii.188 (geha˚) vi.85 (usu˚ range of his arrow).

fr. patati

Patanaka

(adj.) on the point of falling, going to fall, falling Ja vi.358.

fr. patana

Patanu

(adj.) very thin Ja vi.578 (˚kesa); Dhs 362 (˚bhāva) = Dhs-a 238; Kv 299 (id.).

pa + tanu

Patara

a split a slit Ja iv.32.

Vedic pradara, pa + dṛ; with t. for d.; see Trenckner, Notes 6216; Geiger, P.Gr. § 39, 4

Patarati

1. to go through or forth, to run out, to cross over DN i.248; Ja iii.91 (aor. patari).

2. to overflow, boil over (of water) Mil 260 ■ Caus patāreti (q.v.).

pa + tarati

Patākā

(f.) a flag, banner (cp. dhaja) Ja i.52; Vv-a 31, Vv-a 173.

cp. later Sk. patākā

Patāpa

splendour, majesty Vv 408 (= tejas, ānubhāvo Vv-a 180).

fr. pa + tap

Patāpavant

(adj.) splendid, majestic Snp 550 (= jutimantatāya p. Snp-a 453); Thag 820.

fr. patāpa

Patāpeti

scorch, burn fiercely Vv 795 (= ativiya dīpeti Vv-a 307). Sdhp 573.

pa + tāpeti, Caus. of tap

Patāyati

to be spread out, intrs. to spread (?) AN iv.97 (kodho p., as if fr. pat ); Ja iii.283 (C. nikkhamati as if fr. tṛ; Kern. trsls “to be for sale”).

in form = pa + tāyati, diff. in meaning; not sufficiently expld, see Kern, Toev. p. 29 s. v. It is probably a distorted *sphāṭayati: see under pharati phalaka and phāteti

Patāreti

to make go forth, to bring over or through MN i.225; AN iii.432 (v.l. M. pakaroti)-aor. patārayi in meaning “strive” at Ja iii.210 (= patarati vāyamati C. but Rhys Davids. “to get away from”); as “assert” at Ja v.117.

Caus. of patarati

Pati1

lord, master, owner, leader.

1. in general DN iii.93 (khettānaṃ p. gloss adhipati). Mostly-˚; see under gavam˚, gaha˚, dāna˚, yūtha˚, senā˚.

2. husband SN i.210; Snp 314; Ja iii.138; Pv-a 161. See also sapatika (with her husband), patibbatā & patika.;

-kula her husband’s clan Thag-a 283; Vv-a 206; -devatā a devoted wife Ja iii.406; Vv-a 128.

Ved. pati, Av. paitis lord, husband; Gr. πόσις husband, Lat. potis, potens, possum, hos-pes; Goth brūp-faps bridegroom, hunda faps centurion, Lith. pāts husband

Pati2

(indecl.) [Vedic prati etc.) a doublet of paṭi; both often found side by side; pati alone always as prep (with acc.) and as prefix with sthā (paṭiṭṭhāti, patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are referred to the form with paṭi˚, except in the case of patiṭṭh˚. The more frequent cases are the foll.: patikāra, ˚kuṭati, ˚caya ˚dissati, ˚nandati, ˚manteti, ˚māneti, ˚ruddha, ˚rūpa ˚līna, ˚sallāna, etc. ˚sibbati, ˚sevati, ˚ssata, ˚ssaya ˚ssava.

Patika

(adj.) having a husband in mata˚ “with husband dead,” a widow Thig 221 (= vidhuva Thag-a 179); Ja v.103 (ap˚ without husband, v.l. for appatīta, C. explns by assāmika) pavuttha˚ (a woman) whose husband lives abroad Vin ii.268; Vin iii.83; Mil 205 (pavuttha˚). See also pañcapatika & sapatika.;

only f. patikā and only as-˚

Patika

at Vism 28 is to be read pātika (vessel, bowl, dish).

Patiṭṭhahati

(& Patiṭṭhāti) to stand fast or firmly, to find a support in (loc.), to be established (intrs.), to fix oneself, to be set up, to stay; aor. patiṭṭhahi Dhp-a iii.175 (sotāpattiphale), Pv-a 42 (id.), 66 (id.); Vv-a 69 (sakadāgāmiphale); and patiṭṭhāsi Mil 16 ■ fut. ˚ṭṭhahissati Ja v.458 (˚hessati); Dhp-a iii.171-ger. patiṭṭhāya Snp 506; Ja ii.2 (rajje); iii.52; v.458 (rajje); Mil 33; Pv-a 142 ■ pp. patiṭṭhita (q.v.). Caus. patiṭṭhāpeti (q.v.).

paṭi + sthā

Patiṭṭhā

(f.) support, resting place, stay, ground, help also (spiritual) helper, support for salvation SN i.1 (ap˚) ii.65; iii.53; Snp 173; Dhp 332; Ja i.149; Ja iv.20; Mil 302; Dhs-a 261; Vv-a 138; Pv-a 53, Pv-a 60 (= dīpa), 87 (= dīpa), 141 (su˚), 174 (su˚ = dīpa).

fr. pati + sthā. Cp. Ved. pratiṣṭhā support, foundation

Patiṭṭhāna

(nt.) fixing, setting up, support, help, ground (for salvation Snp 1011: Pv-a 123.

fr. paṭi + sthā cp. late Sk. pratiṣṭhāna

Patiṭṭhāpita

put down, set down, established Pv-a 139.

pp. of patiṭṭhāpeti

Patiṭṭhāpitar

one who establishes AN v.66.

n. ag. of patiṭṭhāpeti

Patiṭṭhāpeti

to establish, set up, fix, put into, instal DN i.206; SN i.90; Ja i.152; Ja i.168, Ja i.349 (sotāpatti-phale) Pv-a 22 (id.), 38 (id.) 50 (saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca), 223 (id.), 76 (ceṭiyaṃ), 78 (upāsakabhāve), 131, 132 (hatthe)-aor. patiṭṭhāpesi Ja i.138 ■ pp. patiṭṭhāpita (q.v.).

Caus. of patiṭṭhahati, cp. BSk. praṭiṣṭhāpayati Jtm 224

Patiṭṭhāha

having one’s footing in, hold on, tenacity Dhs 381 = Nd ii.271iii Dhs-a 253. The v.l. at Nd ii.is paṭiggāha which is also read by Dhs.

fr. patiṭṭhahati

Patiṭṭhita

established in (loc.), settled, fixed, arrayed, stayed, standing, supported founded in DN iii.101 (supatiṭṭhita-citta); MN i.478; SN i.40 SN i.45, SN i.185 (dhammesu); Iti 77; Snp 409, Snp 453; Ja i.51 (kucchimhi), 262 (rajje); Pv i.44; ii.969 (dussīlesu); Mil 282; Vv-a 110 (˚gabbhā), 259 (˚saddha); Pv-a 34 (jāta + -nt. ˚ṃ arrangement, settling, in pañca˚; the fivefold array, a form of respectful greeting, see under pañca.

pp. of patiṭṭhahati

Patiṭṭhīyati

to be obdurate, to offer resistance AN i.124; AN ii.203; AN iii.181 sq. Ja iv.22 (aor. ˚ṭṭhīya); Pp 36; Kp-a 226.

only apparently (Pass.) to patiṭṭhahati, of sthā, but in reality = Sk. prati-sthyāyate, of sthyā, see thīna. Ought to be paṭitthīyati; but was by popular analogy with patiṭṭhāya changed to patiṭṭhīyati

Patita

fallen Dhp 68, Dhp 320; Ja i.167; Mil 187; Pv-a 31 (read pātita), 56.

pp. of patati

Patitaka

(adj.) thrown or fallen into (loc.), dropped Vism 62.

fr. last

Patitiṭṭhati

to stand up again Thag 173.

paṭi + titthati

Patittha

a bank of a river or lake, su˚ (adj.) with beautiful banks SN i.90; Pv ii.120 (= sundaratittha Pv-a 77).

pa + tittha

Patibbatā

(f.) a devoted wife (cp. patidevatā) Ja ii.121; Ja vi.533; Vv-a 56, Vv-a 110.

pati + vatā

Patissata

see paṭi˚.

Patīta

pleased, delighted Dhp 68; Snp 379, Snp 679; Vv 8410 (= pahaṭṭha Vv-a 337) ■ neg. appatīta displeased MN i.27; Ja v.103 (v.l. appatika, C explns by assāmika, i.e. without husband).

pp. of pacceti

Patīyati

see patati.

Pateyya

in phrase alam-pateyya at DN iii.71 (kumārikā alam-pateyyā), 75 (id.) means “surely fit to have husbands, ripe for marriage” (?)

Patoda

a goad, driving stick, prick, spur MN i.124; MN iii.97; SN iv.176; AN ii.114 AN iii.28; AN iv.91; AN v.324; Thag 210; Ja i.57, Ja i.192; Dhs 16 Dhs 20, Dhs 292; Pp 25; Snp-a 147; Thag-a 174; Sdhp 367.

-laṭṭhi a driver’s stick, goad-stick [cp. BSk. pratodayaṣṭi Divy 7, Divy 76, Divy 463, Divy 465] DN i.105, DN i.126; Ja vi.249; Mil 27; Dhp-a i.302; Dhp-a ii.38; Dhp-a iv.216; Vv-a 64. As ˚yaṭṭhi at Dpvs xi.30.

fr. pa + tud cp. Ved. pratoda

Patodaka

(adj. n.) lit. pushing, spurring; only in phrase aṅguli˚; nudging with one’s fingers Vin iii.84 = Vin iv.110 (here to be taken as “tickling”); DN i.91 (cp Dial. i.113); AN iv.343.

fr. pa + tud

Patta1

(nt.) 1. the wing of a bird, a feather Vin iv.259; DN i.71. kukkuṭa˚ a hen’s quill (for sewing) Vin ii.215–⁠2. a leaf MN i.429; Snp 44 = Snp 64 (sañchinna˚, see Nd ii.625); 625 (pokkhara˚ lotus l.); Dhp 401 (id.); Nd i.135 (paduma˚); Pv ii.95 (= paṇṇa Pv-a 15); Vv-a 147 (tāla˚); Thag-a 71; Pv-a 283 (nigrodha˚). asi-patta-vana “sword-leaf-forest” (a forest in Niraya) Snp 673; Pv-a 221.

3. a small thin strip of metal at the lute Mil 53; Vv-a 281.

-āḷhalka a toy measure made of palm-leaves Vin ii.10 Vin iii.180; DN i.6 (cp. DN-a i.86); MN i.266; AN v.203; Mil 229. -gandha odour of leaves Dhs 625. -nāḷī rib of a feather Dhp-a i.394. -phala leaf-fruit, a leaf and fruit vegetables Snp 239 (= yaṃ kiñci harita-pannaṃ Snp-a 283); Pv-a 86. -yāna having wings as vehicle, “winggoer,” i.e. a bird Snp 606 (= pattehi yantī ti pattayānā Snp-a 465); Ja ii.443. -rasa taste of leaves Dhs 629 juice of leaves Vin i.246 (+ puppharasa & ucchurasa); -salākā leaf-ticket Dhp-a iv.65.

Ved. patra, to *pet as in patati (q.v. & see also paṇṇa); cp. Gr. πτερόν wing, πτέρυς id.; Lat penna feather = Ger. fittig.; acci-piter; Ohg. fedara = E feather etc.

Patta2

(m. & nt.) a bowl, esp the alms-bowl of a bhikkhu Vin i.46, Vin i.50, Vin i.51, Vin i.61, Vin i.224 (patte pūresuṃ); ii.111, 126, 224, 269; SN i.112; AN iv.344; Snp 413, Snp 443; Ja i.52, Ja i.55 (pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipati), 69; iii.535 (puṇṇa ˚ṃ deti to give a full bowl, i.e. plenty); v.389 (pl. pattāni); Vism 108 (āṇigaṇṭhik’ āhato ayopatto); Dhp-a iv.220 (˚ṃ pūreti) Pv-a 35, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 76, Pv-a 88, Pv-a 141 ■ Two kinds of bowls are mentioned at Vin iii.243, viz. ayo˚ of iron & mattikā˚ of clay, dāru˚ a wooden bowl Vin ii.112, Vin ii.143. uda˚ a bowl of water or a water-bowl MN i.100; SN v.121; AN iii.230 sq. cp. odapattakinī ■ pattassa mukhavaṭṭi Ja v.38 ■ fut. pātī (q.v.).

-ādhāraka bowl support, bowl-hold Vin ii.113 -kaṇḍolikā a wicker-work stand for a bowl Vin ii.114 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.86). -gata gone into the bowl alms given Thag 155; Pv iv.73. -gāhāpaka one who is going to take a bowl, a receiver of a b. Vin ii.177 (+ sāṭiya˚ etc.); AN iii.275. -cīvara bowl and robe (see note in Dial ii.162) Vin i.46; Vin ii.78, Vin ii.194; SN i.76; Ja iii.379; Pv ii.1316; DN-a i.45, DN-a i.186; Pv-a 61. -tthavikā a bag to carry a bowl in Vin ii.114; Ja iii.364; Vv-a 40, Vv-a 63 Kp-a 45. -dhovana “bowl-washing,” (the water used for) washing the bowl Vin ii.214. -pāṇin hand on bowl, bowl in hand Snp 713; Iti 89 = SN iii.93≈; onīta˚ removing the hand from the bowl: see onīta. -piṇḍika “eating from one vessel only” AN iii.220. -maṇḍala a circular artificial bottom of a bowl Vin ii.112. -māḷaka a raised parapet (?) on which to put the bowl Vin ii.114 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.86). -mūla the bottom of the bowl Vin ii.269. -vaṭṭi the brim of a bowl SN iv.168. -saññin paying attention to one’s bowl Vin ii.214.

Ved. pātra, fr. Idg. *pōtlom = Lat. poculum beaker, Oir. ōl. See pāna & pibati

Patta3

obtained, attained, got, reached (pass. & med.) Snp 55, Snp 138, Snp 478, Snp 517, Snp 542, Snp 992; Dhp 134 (nibbānaṃ) 423; Ja i.255 (vināsaṃ); iv.139 (samuddaṃ) Pv-a 4 (anayavyasanaṃ), 5 (sīsacchedaṃ), 71 (manussabhāvaṃ). Very frequent as-˚ and in meaning equal to finite verb or other phrase, when spelling ˚ppatta is restored (Sk. prāpta), e.g. ummādappatta out of mind Pv-a 6; jara˚ old Ja iii.394; dukkha˚ afflicted with pain Ja vi.336; domanassa˚ dejected Ja ii.155; patti˚ attained one’s (possible) share Iti 32; bala˚ (become) strong DN ii.157; vaya˚ (become) old, come of age Ja ii.421 (+ soḷasa-vassa-kāle); Pv-a 68; somanassa˚ pleased Ja iii.74; haritu˚ covered with green MN i.343; Ja i.50 Ja i.399. Also as ˚-, but less frequent, meaning often equal to prep. “with,” “after,” etc., as pattâbhiseka after consecration Dhp-a iv.84; Snp-a 484; pattuṇṇa with wool Snp-a 263; ˚dhamma mastering the Dh. Vin i.16; the same at Dhp-a iv.200 in meaning of patti˚, i.e. “merit attained”; ˚mānasa (?) Iti 76 (v.l. satta˚); ˚sambodhi Iti 97 (v.l. satta˚) ■ Opp. appatta not obtained (see also patti 2), i.e. without Dhp 272 (cp. Dhp-a iii.58); Pp 51 (˚pānabhojana, so read for appanna˚) ■ Cp. sam

pp. of pāpuṇāti

Patta4

at Dpvs xi.18 for pattin or pattika, foot-man, infantry.

Patta-kkhandha

downcast, dejected, disappointed Vin ii.77 = Vin iii.162 (trsld “with fallen hearts,” expld as patita, see Vin. Texts iii.13); SN i.124; MN i.132, MN i.258; MN iii.298; AN iii.57; Ja v.17; Mil 5.

perhaps patta1 + khandha, thus “leaf- shouldered,” i.e. with shoulders drooping like leaves; the Commentators explain patta as contracted form of patita fallen, thus “with shoulders falling.” We may have to deal with an old misspelling for panna (= pa + nam bent down, put down), which expln would suit the sense better than any other

Pattaka

(nt.) a (little) bowl Thig 28.

fr. patta2

Pattatta

(nt.) (-˚) the fact of being furnished or possessed with Vism 524.

abstr. fr. patta3

Pattabba

(adj.) to be gained or attained; nt. that which can be attained or won Snp-a 443. See also pattiya2.

grd. of pāpuṇāti

Pattali

(˚lī) (f.) plantain Thig 260 (= kadali Thag-a 211).

according to Kern, Toev. s. v. to be read as either sattali or sattalā

Patti1

on foot, one who is on foot, a foot-soldier Vin iv.105 (as one of the 4 constituents of a senā or army, viz. hatthī elephants, assā horses, rathā chariots, pattī infantry); Ja iv.494 (hatthī assā, rathā, pattī); 463 (hatthī assā rathā, pattī senā padissate mahā); Vism 19. Cp. pattika1.

-kāya a body of foot soldiers, infantry SN i.72 (cp BSk. same, at Jtm 215 with hasty-aśva-ratha˚). -kārika (for ˚kārika, of prec.) a foot soldier, lit. one of a body of infantry Ja iv.134; Ja v.100; Ja vi.15 (hatthāruhā anīkaṭṭhā rathikā pattikārikā), 21, 463 (hatthī assā rathikā p.).

Ved. patti, *pad (of pada) + ti

Patti2

(f.) 1. (-˚) obtaining, acquiring, getting, entering into, state of SN i.189 = Thag 1230 (nibbāna˚); Snp 68 (paramattha˚) 186 (nibbāna˚); Pv-a 5 (vyasana), 112 (id.); Sdhp 379.

2. attainment, acquisition SN ii.29 (aggassa) Snp 425 (yogakkhemassa); Nd ii.390 (= lābhā paṭilābhā adhigamo phusanaṃ sacchikiriyā); esp. in phrase apattassa patti “attt of the unattained” DN iii.255; AN iv.332; SN i.217; SN ii.29; AN ii.148; AN iii.179; Kv 581. 3. gaining, gain, profit, advantage SN i.169 (brahma “best vantage ground”).

4. merit, profit, in special sense of a gift given for the benefit of someone else (as a “dakkhiṇǡ”), accrediting, advising, transference of merit, a gift of merit Ja ii.423, Ja ii.425 (= dakkhiṇā); iv.21; Dhp-a i.270 (opp. to mūla price); ii.4; iv.200 sq. (opp. to mūla). See also cpds. ˚dāna & ˚dhamma.

5. that which obtains (as a rule), occasion, happening, state place, as gram. t. t. loc. pattiyaṃ or pattiyā (-˚) in lieu of Snp-a 310, Snp-a 317 ■ See sam˚.;

-dāna an assigned or accredited gift, giving of merit (as permanent acquisition), transference of merit Vv-a 188, Vv-a 190; Pv-a 9 (˚vasena dānadhamma-pariccāgo), 49 (= dakkhiṇā) 88 (id.); Sdhp 229. -dhamma the practice of transferred merit, see Kvu trsln 1611, 170, & cp pattadhamma.; -patta, one who has obtained what can be obtained, or the highest gain (i.e. Nibbāna) Snp 536 (= pattabbaṃ patto pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ patto ti vuttaṃ hoti Snp-a 433), 537, 540.

Classical Sk. prāpti fr. pa + āp, cp. patta3

Patti3

(f.) leaf, leafy part of a plant Vin i.201 (taka, taka-patti, taka-paṇṇi).

for patta1?

Pattika1

on foot, a pedestrian or soldier on foot, DN i.50, DN i.89, DN i.106, DN i.108; DN ii.73; AN ii.117 (hatth’-āruha, assāruha, rathika, p.); Ja vi.145; Vism 396 (manussā pattikā gacchanti); Snp 418; a form pattikārika is found, e.g. at Ja iv.134; Ja v.100; Ja vi.15 Ja vi.463; Ap. 316.

fr. patti1 cp. pajja2

Pattika2

having a share, gain or profit; a partner, donor Dhp-a i.270, Dhp-a i.271.

fr. patti2

Pattika3

(adj.-n.) in dāru˚; (collecting alms) with a wooden bowl, man with a wooden bowl DN i.157 (cp. DN-a i.319).

fr. patta2

Pattikā

(f.) a leaf, in tāla˚; palm-leaf SN ii.217, SN ii.222.

fr. patta1 or patti3

Pattin

(adj. n.) attaining, one who obtains or gains Snp 513 (kiṃ˚ = kiṃ patta, adhigata Snp-a 425).

fr. patta3, Sk. *prāptin

Pattiya1

(adj. n.) believing, trusting, relying Ja v.414 (para˚) (m.) belief, trust Ja v.231 (parapattiyena by relying on others), 233 (id.), 414 (id.).

for *pratyaya = paccaya, cp. Trenckner, Notes 73, 9

Pattiya2

(adj.) to be attained, to be shared or profited Pv ii.931 (para˚ profitable to others, see expln at Pv-a 125).

grd. of pāpuṇāti; cp. pattabba

Pattiyāyati

to believe, trust, rely on Ja i.426; Ja v.403; DN-a i.73.

denom. fr. pattiya1

Pattiyāyana

(nt.) belief Ja v.402.

fr. pattiyāyati

Pattīyati

to gain, to profit from (acc.) Mil 240 (attānaṃ na p. does not profit from himself).

denom. fr. patti2

Pattha1

a lonely place, in cpd. vana˚; DN i.71; Pp 59 etc., a wilderness in the forest, expld by Bdhgh as “gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāra-ṭṭhānaṃ yattha na kasanti na vapanti” DN-a i.210; Ud 43 (patthañ ca sayan’ āsanaṃ, ed.; but better with id. p. Dhp 185 as pantañ, which is expld at Dhp-a iii.238 by “vivittaṃ, i, e. separately). Cp. with this Sk. vana-prastha a forest situated on elevated land.

fr. pa + sthā. Cp. Epic Sk. prastha plateau

Pattha2

a Prastha (certain measure of capacity) = 1/4 of an Āḷhaka; a cooking utensil containing one Prastha Dhp-a ii.154; Snp-a 476 (cattāro patthā āḷhakaṃ).

cp. late Sk. prastha

Patthaṭa

stretched, spread out Ja i.336; Vism 364; DN-a i.311.

pp. of pattharati

Patthaṇḍila

hermitage MN ii.155.

pa + thandila

Patthaddha

(quite) stiff Vin ii.192; Thag 1074.

pa + thaddha

Patthanā

(f.) aiming at, wish, desire, request aspiration, prayer SN ii.99, SN ii.154; AN i.224; AN iii.47; AN v.212 Nd i.316, Nd i.337 (p. vuccati taṇhā); Nd ii.112; Ne 18, Ne 27; Dhs 1059; Mil 3; Snp-a 47, Snp-a 50; Dhp-a ii.36; Pv-a 47-patthanaṃ karoti to make a wish Ja i.68; Dhp-a i.48 ˚ṃ ṭhapeti id. Dhp-a i.47; Dhp-a ii.83; Dhp-a iv.200.

of ap + arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati & prārthana nt., prārthanā f.

Patthara

1. stone, rock SN i.32.

2. stoneware Mil 2.

cp. late Sk. prastara. The ord. meaning of Sk. pr. is “stramentum”

Pattharati

to spread, spread out, extend Ja i.62; Ja iv.212; Ja vi.279; Dhp-a i.26; Dhp-a iii.61 (so read at Ja vi.549 in cpd ˚pāda with spreading feet, v.l. patthaṭa˚)-pp. patthaṭa (q.v.) ■ Caus. patthāreti with pp patthārita probably also to be read at Thag 842 for padhārita.

pa + tharati

Pattharika

a merchant Vin ii.135 (kaṃsa˚).

fr. patthara

Patthita

wished for, desired, requested, sought after Snp 836; Mil 227, Mil 361; Dhp-a iv.201; Pv-a 47 (˚ākāra of the desired kind, as wished for) Sdhp 79 (a˚).

pp. of pattheti

Patthīna

stiff DN ii.335; Dhs-a 307. Also as patthinna at Vin i.286 (= atirajitattā thaddha Bdhgh on p. 391); Vism 361 (= thīna p. 262); Vb-a 67 (˚sneha).

pa + thīna

Pattheti

to wish for, desire, pray for, request, long for SN iv.125; SN v.145; Snp 114 Snp 899; Thig 341; Nd i.312, Nd i.316; PugA 208 (āsaṃsati + ) Pv-a 148; Sdhp 66, Sdhp 319; ppr. patthento Pv-a 107 patthayanto Ja i.66 (paramâbhisaṃbodhiṃ); patthayaṃ Snp 70 (= icchanto patthayanto abhijappanto Nd ii.392) patthayamāna MN i.4; Snp 902; Ja i.259; Dhp-a iii.193; Pv-a 226 (= āsiṃsamāna); & patthayāno; Snp 900; Iti 67 Iti 115 ■ grd. patthetabba Pv-a 96, patthayitabba Pv-a 95, and patthiya which only occurs in neg. form apatthiya what ought not to be wished Ja iv.61; Pv ii.67 (= apatthayitabbaṃ Pv-a 95); Dhp-a i.29; also as napatthiya (med.) one who does not wish for himself Snp 914 (cp. Nd ii.337) ■ pp. patthita (q.v.).

pa + arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati

Patvā

see pāpuṇāti.

Patha

1 path, road, way DN i.63; Snp 176 (loc. pathe), 385, 540 868; Nd ii.485 B (+ pantha, in expln of magga); Ja i.308 (loc. pathe); ii.39; vi.525 (abl. pathā); Thag 64; Pp 22, Pp 57; Mvu 21, Mvu 24 (pathe); 36, 93 (loc. pathi, see Geiger, Gr. § 89); Sdhp 241.

2. Very frequent as-˚, where it is sometimes pleonastic, and acts in the function of an abstract formation in ˚tā or ˚ttaṃ (cp similar use of anta: see anta1 5; and pada: see pada 3), e.g. anila˚ (air) Ja iv.119; anupariyāya˚ AN iv.107 ādicca˚ (path of the sun, sky) Dhp-a iii.177; ummagga SN i.193; kamma˚ Dhp-a i.36; gaṇana˚ (range of) calculation Mil 20; cakkhu˚ Ja iv.403 (= cakkhūnaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ C.); catummahā˚ AN iii.28, AN iii.42, AN iii.394; dve˚ Vv 5317; nakkhatta˚ Dhp 208; yañña˚ (= yañña) Nd ii.524 yogga˚ AN iii.122; rajā˚ SN ii.219; rāga˚ (sensuality SN iv.70; vacana˚ (way of saying, speech) Vv 6317 (= vacana Vv-a 262), etc. See also cakkhu˚, ñeyya˚ dveḷhā˚, manussa˚, yañña˚, vāda˚, sagga˚, hattha˚ der. pātheyya ■ See also byappatha ■ apatha where there is no way or road, wrong way Ja ii.287; Thag-a 255; Vv-a 337.

-addhan “the journey or stretch of the path”: see under addhan. -addhi (?) so perhaps to be read for patatthi, according to Fausböll Ja vi.276. Unclear in meaning, expld by nibbiddha vīthi (frequented road? -gamana “going on their course,” of the stars DN i.10 (see Dial. i.20 “their usual course”).

of path, Ved. pathi with the 3 bases pathi, path˚ and panth˚, of which only the last two have formed independent nouns, viz. patha and pantha (q.v.)

Pathabya

belonging to the earth, ruler of the earth (?) AN iv.90 (reading uncertain).

fr. pathavi = paṭhavi

Pathavi

see paṭhavi.

Pathāvin

a traveller Vin iv.108; Ja vi.65; DN-a i.298.

fr. patha

Pada

(nt.) 1. foot Dhp 273 = Snp-a 366 (? saccānaṃ caturo padā); DN-a i.85; usually -˚, like hatthipadaṃ elephant’s foot MN i.176, MN i.184; SN i.86; SN v.43, SN v.231; and with numerals dvi˚ & di˚, catup˚, aṭṭha˚ (q.v.). In aṭṭha˚ also meaning “square of a chessboard.”

2. step, footstep track Dhp 179 (of a Buddha, cp. Dhp-a iii.194 & 197; Ja i.170 (footmark) ii.154; in redupl ■ iterative formation padāpadaṃ step by step Snp 446 (v.l. padânupadaṃ), and pade padaṃ Snp p.107 (cp. Snp-a 451).

3 (Often synonymous with ˚patha i.e. way, kind, & sometimes untranslatable) (a) lit. way, path, position, place Vin ii.217 (nakkhatta˚ constellation); Ja i.315 (assama = assama); v.75 (id.), 321 (id.); vi.76 (id.); vi.180 (v.l. patha; C. mahāmagga); mantapada = manta DN i.104 (cp. DN-a i.273). See also janapada, saggapada-(b) in appld meaning (modal): case, lot, principle part, constituent, characteristic, ingredient, item, thing element MN i.176 (cattāri padāni 4 characteristics) SN i.7 (pade pade “now in this thing, now in that C. ārammaṇe ārammaṇe), 212 (amataṃ p. = nibbāna) ii.280 (id.); AN ii.51 (id.), Iti 39 (p. asankhataṃ = nibbāna); Snp 88 (dhammapade sudesite; expld as nibbānadhamma Snp-a 164; dhammapada = Dhamma), ibid (anavajja-padāni sevamāna = principles), 700 (moneyyaṃ uttamaṃ padaṃ, thing; but Snp-a 491 expls as uttama-paṭipadaṃ), 765; Dhp 21, Dhp 93, Dhp 114 (amataṃ) 254, 368 (santaṃ = nibbānass’ etaṃ nāmaṃ, santakoṭṭhāsaṃ Dhp-a iv.108); Pv iv.348 (amataṃ); Ne 2 Ne 192 (nava padāni kusalāni); Snp-a 397 (nāmādi p.) Sdhp 47 (accutaṃ santaṃ p.), 615 (paramaṃ). See further dhamma˚, nibbāna˚, santi˚, sikkhā˚.

4. a word, verse (or a quarter of a verse), stanza, line, sentence SN ii.36 (ekena padena sabbo attho vutto); SN iv.379 = AN v.320 (agga˚); AN ii.182 (+ vyañjana desanā); 189 (attha˚ text, motto); iii.356 (id.); Snp 252 (= dhamma-desanā Snp-a 293), 374; Dhp 273; Ja i.72 (atireka-pada-satena); Ne 4 (akkharaṃ padaṃ vyañjanaṃ cp. nāmādīhi padehi at Snp-a 397, which is to be understood as nāma, pada & vyañjana, i.e. word, sentence & letter, cp. Mptp. 104, 74

76); Mil 148 (āhacca˚); Kp-a 169; Snp-a 409 (ubhaya˚), 444; Vv-a 3, Vv-a 13; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 117 (word, term). abl. padaso (adv.) sentence by stce or word by word Vin iv.14 (dhammaṃ vāceti = anupadaṃ C.; cp. Kp-a 190 p ˚dhamma). At MN-a i.2 pada (sentence or division of a sentence) is contrasted with akkhara (word), when it is said that the Majjhima Nikāya consists of 80,523 padas and 740,053 akkharas ■ Neg. apada (1) without feet footless AN iv.434 (Māra; v.l. apara); Iti 87 (sattā, dvipada etc.) ■ (2) trackless, leaving no footprint, fig having no desires (i.e. signs of worldliness) Dhp 179 (rāga, etc., as padāni Dhp-a iii.197, but cp. also p. 194.)

-attha meaning of a word Kp-a 81, Kp-a 84; Snp-a 91 -ānupadaṃ (adv.) on the track Dhp-a ii.38. -ānupadika following one’s footsteps Ja ii.78; Dhp-a ii.94 (therānaṃ) nt. adv. ˚ṃ close behind Dhp-a i.290. -ānupubbatā (or ˚ta) succession of words Nd i.140 (in expln of “iti” cp. Snp-a 28); Nd ii.137 (id.; reading ˚ka). -uddhāra synopsis of a verse Snp-a 237 (atthuddhāra + ). -kusala clever at following a trail Ja iii.501, Ja iii.505. -cārikā a female (foot-) servant Ja iv.35. -cetiya “step-shrine,” a holy footprint, a miraculous footprint left on the ground by a holy man Dhp-a iii.194. -ccheda separation of words parsing Snp-a 150. -jāta (nt.) pedal character SN i.86 -ṭṭhāna [cp. Sk. padasthāna footprint] “proximate cause” (Cpd. 13, 23) Ne 1 sq., 27 sq., 40 sq., 104 Vism 84. -dvaya twofold part (of a phrase), i.e. antecedent and subsequent Dhs-a 164. -parama one whose highest attainment is the word (of the text, and not the sense of it) AN ii.135; Ja vi.131; Pp 41 (“vyañjanapadam eva paramaṃ assā ti” PugA 223. -pāripūrī (f.) expletive particle Nd ii.137; Snp-a 28. -pūraṇa filling out a verse; as tt. g. expletive particle Snp-a 590 (a) 139 (kho), 137 (kho pana), 378 (tato), 536 (pi), 230 (su) 416 (ha), 377 (hi); Kp-a 219 (tam), 188 (su); Vv-a 10 (maya). -bhājana dividing of words, i.e. treating each word (of a phrase) separately Dhs-a 234. -bhājaniya division of a phrase Dhs-a 54. -bhāṇa reciting or preaching (the words of the Scriptures) Dhp-a ii.95 Dhp-a iii.345; Dhp-a iv.18. -vaṇṇanā expln of a pada or single verse Snp-a 65, Snp-a 237; Kp-a 125, Kp-a 132, Kp-a 228. -valañja a footprint track Ja vi.560; Dhp-a ii.38; Dhp-a iii.194. -viggaha separation of words, resolution of a compound into its components Vv-a 326. -vibhāga separation of words parsing Snp-a 269; Pv-a 34. -saṃsagga contact of words Nd i.139; Nd ii.137; Snp-a 28. -sadda sound of footsteps Snp p.80; Ja iv.409. -sandhi euphonic combination of words Nd i.445; Nd ii.137; Kp-a 155, Kp-a 224; Snp-a 28, Snp-a 40 Snp-a 157 etc.; Pv-a 52. -silā a stone for stepping on, flag Vin ii.121 = Vin ii.154.

Ved. pad, pād (m.) foot, and also pāda; pada (nt.) step. Cp. Gr. πώς (πούς) = Lat. pēs, Goth. fōtus = Ohg fuoz = E. foot; further Arm. het track, Gr. πεδά after, πέδον field, πεζός on foot, etc.; Lith. péda track; Ags. fetvan = E. fetch ■ The decl. in Pāli is vocalic (a), viz. pada; a trace of the consonant (root decl. is instr. sg. padā (Thag 457; Snp 768), of cons. (s decl. instr. padasā with the foot, on foot (DN i.107; Ja iii.371; Dhp-a i.391) ■ Gender is nt., but nom. pl. is frequently found as padā, e.g. at Dhp 273; Ne 192 (mūla˚)

Padaka1

(adj.) one who knows the padas (words or lines), versed in the padapāṭha of the Veda (Ep. of an educated Brahmin) DN i.88 = Snp p.105 (where Avs ii.19 in id. p. has padaśo = P. padaso word by word, but Divy 620 reads padako; ajjheti vedeti cā ti padako) MN i.386; AN i.163, AN i.166; Snp 595; Mil 10, Mil 236.

fr. pada4

Padaka2

(nt.) = pada 3, viz. basis, principle or pada 4, viz. stanza, line Ja v.116 (= kāraṇa-padāni C.).

Padaka2

(nt.) in cpd. aṭṭha˚; an “eight-foot,” i.e. a small inset square (cp. aṭṭha-pada chess-board) a patch (?) Vin i.297. See also padika.

fr. pada1

Padakkhiṇa

(adj.) 1. “to the right,” in phrase padakkhiṇaṃ karoti (with acc. of object) to hold (a person, etc.) to one’s right side, i.e. to go round so as to keep the right side turned to a person, a mode of reverential salutation Vin i.17; SN i.138; AN i.294 AN ii.21, AN ii.182; AN iii.198; Snp 1010; Ja i.50, Ja i.60; Ja iii.392. 2. “(prominent) with the right,” i.e. skilful, clever quick in learning Ja iv.469 (= susikkhita C.).

3. lucky auspicious, turning out well or favourable Ja v.353 (= sukha-nipphattin vuddhi-yutta C.).

-ggāhin “right-handed,” i.e. cleverly taking up (what is taught), good at grasping or understanding AN iii.79, AN iii.180, AN v.24 sq., 90, 338; Dhp-a ii.105 ■ Opp appadakkhiṇaggāhin “left-handed,” unskilled, untrained (cp. Ger. “linkisch”) SN ii.204 sq.; Ja iii.483 -ggāhitā skilfulness, quick grasp, cleverness Kp-a 148.

pa + dakkhiṇa

Padatta

(nt.) being or constituting a lot, part or element Snp-a 164.

abstr. fr. pada

Padara

(nt.) 1. a cleft, split, fissure, crevice MN i.469; SN ii.32; Snp 720 (= darī Snp-a 500); combd with kandara at Mil 36, Mil 296 Mil 411; Pv-a 29.

2. a board, plank Ja ii.10 Ja ii.91 (˚sakaṭa 112; iii.181; v.47 sq.; vi.432 (˚cchanna); Snp-a 330 (dabba˚ oar), 355; Dhp-a ii.55; Dhp-a iii.296.

3. Wrong spelling for badara at Ja iv.363 (beluvā p˚āni ca); vi.529.

-sañcita filled with clefts (?) Vin iv.46. -samācāra refractiousness, disobedience (?) MN i.469.

pa + dara of dṛ; cp. dabba, darati, dāru

Padahati

1. to strive, exert DN iii.221 (cittaṃ paggaṇhāti p.); Pv-a 31 (yoniso p.).

2. to confront take up, fight against, stand Ja vi.508 (usīraṃ muñjapubbajaṃ urasā padahessāmi “I shall stand against the grasses with my chest”; C. expls by dvedhā katvā purato gamissāmi, i.e. break and go forward). Note. padahasi at Ja iv.383 read pade hasi (see Windisch Māra & B.; p. 124 & Morris,; J.P.T.S. 1893, 51. Windisch takes padahasi as pa + dah to burn, & translates “du willst das Feuer brennen,” i.e. you attempt something impossible, because the fire will burn you) ■ pp pahita (q.v.).

pa + dhā

Padahana

see padhāna.

Padātar

extravagant, a squanderer Pdgp. 65, 68.

n. ag. of padāti

Padāti

(padadāti, padeti) 1. to give, bestow Pv i.116 (ger. padatvā, perhaps better to read ca datvā as v.l. BB); Ja iii.279 (fut. padassati); v.394 (id.). 2. to acquire, take, get Ja i.190 (inf. padātave, C. gahetuṃ) ■ Pass padīyati (q.v.).

pa +

Padāna

(nt.) giving, bestowing; but appears to have also the meaning of “attainment, characteristic attribute” AN i.102 (bāla˚ & paṇḍita˚); Ja i.97 (sotāpattimagg’ ādi˚); Pv-a 71 (anubala˚); Thag-a 35 (anupattidhammatā˚) ■ At Thag 47 Kern (Toev. ii.138) proposes to read tuyhaṃ padāne for T. tuyh’ âpadāne, and translates padāna by “footstep, footprint.” See also sampadāna.

fr. pa +

Padāraṇa

(nt.) splitting, tearing Thag 752.

pa + dṛ;

Padālana

(nt.) cleaving, bursting open, breaking Ne 61, Ne 112 (mohajāla˚); Thag-a 34 (mohakkhandha˚).

fr. padāleti

Padālita

broken, pierced, destroyed SN i.130; SN iii.83; AN v.88 (appadālita-pubbaṃ lobhakkhandhaṃ); Snp 546 (āsavā te p.; quoted at Vv-a 9); Thag-a 34 (as AN v.88 with moha˚).

pp. of padāleti

Padālitatta

(nt.) the fact of having (med.) or being (pass.) pierced or broken, abl. padālitattā on account of having broken Mil 287.

abstr. fr. padālita

Padāletar

one who pierces or destroys, a destroyer, breaker, in phrase mahato kāyassa padāletā the destroyer of a great body (or bulk) AN i.284 sq. (in sequence dūre-pātin, akkhaṇavedhin, m. k. p.); ii.170 sq., 202; cp. padāleti1.

n. ag. to padāleti

Padāleti

1. to cleave, break, pierce, destroy, in combn ˚khandhaṃ padāleti to destroy the great mass of…, e.g. tamo˚ Iti 8 (padālayuṃ); Thig 28 (ger. padāliya = moha˚ padālitvā Thag-a 34); lobha SN v.88; avijjā˚ AN i.285.

2. to break, break down tear down, burst open Ja i.73 (pabbata-kūṭāni); iv.173 (matthakaṃ p˚etvā uṭṭhita-singā); v.68 (silāya matthakaṃ); Mil 332 (diṭṭhi-jālaṃ); DN-a i.37 (Sineruṃ) See also sam˚-pp. padālita (q.v.).

Caus. of pa + dal

Padika

(adj.) consisting of feet or parts,-fold; dvādasa˚ twelve fold Ja i.75 (paccayākāra).

fr. pada 1; cp. padaka3

Paditta

kindled, set on fire, blazing SN iii.93 ≈ (chav’ âlataṃ ubhato padittaṃ) Ja vi.108; Sdhp 208 (˚angārakāsuṃ).

pp. of pa + dīp, cp. Sk. pradīpta

Padippati

to flame forth, to blaze Cp iii.93 (davaḍāho p.) ■ pp. paditta (q.v.) ■ Caus. padīpeti (q.v.).

pa + dippati

Padissa

(adj.) being seen, to be seen, appearing DN ii.205 (upasantappa˚).

grd. of padissati

Padissati

to be seen Snp 108 (doubtful; v.l. padussati; expld at Snp-a 172 by paṭidissati v.l. padussati, cp. p. 192); Cp i.102 Ja vi.89 Sdhp 427.

pa + dissati, Pass. of dṛś

Padīpa

1. a light Dhp 146; Vv 462 (jalati blazes); Tikp 14; Mil 40; Vv-a 51 (padīpaṃ ujjāletvā lighting a lamp, making a light); Pv-a 38 Sdhp 250.

2. a lamp Snp 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yath âyaṃ p.); Dhp-a ii.163 (anupādāno viya p.). ˚ṃ karoti to make a light, to light up Vin i.118; ˚ṃ ujjāleti see under 1. Usually as tela-padīpa an oil lamp Vin i.15; SN ii.86 (telañ ca vaṭṭiñ ca telapadīpo jhāyati) = iv.213 v.319; AN i.137; Vv-a 198appadīpa where there is no light, obscure Vin iv.268.

-kāla lighting time Vv 96.

cp. Epic Sk. pradīpa

Padīpita

lit, burning, shining Mil 40. Padipiya & Padipeyya;

pp. of padīpeti

Padīpiya & Padīpeyya

(nt.) that which is connected with lighting, material for lighting a lamp lamps & accessories; one of the gifts forming the stock of requisites of a Buddhist mendicant (see Nd ii.523 yañña as deyyadhamma). The form in ˚eyya is the older and more usual one, thus at AN ii.85, AN ii.203; AN iv.239; Iti 65; Pp 51; Vv-a 51 ■ The form in ˚iya at Vv 225 266, 376; Ja vi.315; Vv-a 295.

padīpa + (i) ya

Padīpeti

to light a light or a lamp Vin i.118 (padīpeyya, padīpetabba); Mil 40; Thag-a 72 (Ap. v. 46); Sdhp 63, Sdhp 332, Sdhp 428 ■ pp. padīpita (q.v.).

Caus. of padippati

Padīyati

to be given out or presented; Pv ii.916; Sdhp 502, Sdhp 523.

Pass. of padāti

Paduṭṭha

made bad, spoilt, corrupt, wicked, bad (opp. pasanna, e.g. at AN i.8; Iti 12, Iti 13; DN iii.32 (˚citta); MN iii.49; AN ii.30; Snp 662; Dhp 1; Ja ii.401; Dhp-a i.23 (opp. pasanna); Pv-a 34, Pv-a 43 (˚manasa) ■ appaduṭṭha good, not corrupt DN i.20; DN iii.32; MN iii.50; SN i.13; Pv iv.710.

pp. of padussati

Padubbhati

to do wrong, offend, plot against Ja i.262 (ger. ˚dubbhitvā).

pa + dubbhati

Paduma

(nt.) the lotus Nelumbium speciosum. It is usually mentioned in two varieties, viz. ratta˚; and seta˚; i.e. red and white lotus so at Ja v.37; Snp-a 125; as ratta˚ at Vv-a 191; Pv-a 157. The latter seems to be the more prominent variety; but paduma also includes the 3 other colours (blue, yellow pink?), since it frequently has the designation of pañcavaṇṇa-paduma (the 5 colours however are nowhere specified), e.g. at Ja i.222; Ja v.337; Ja vi.341; Vv-a 41. It is further classified as satapatta and sahassapatta- p., viz lotus with 100 & with 1,000 leaves: Vv-a 191. Compared with other species at Ja v.37, where 7 kinds are enumd as uppala (blue, red & white),; paduma (red white),; kumuda (white) and kallahāra. See further kamala and kuvalaya ■ (1) the lotus or lotus flower MN iii.93; SN i.138, SN i.204; AN i.145; AN ii.86 sq.; AN iii.26, AN iii.239; Snp 71, Snp 213; Ja i.51 (daṇḍa˚ Name of a plant, cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala), 76 (khandha˚, latā˚, daṇḍaka˚, olambaka˚) iv.3; vi.564; Dhp 458; Nd i.135; Vv 354 (= puṇḍarīka Vv-a 161); 4412 (nānā-paduma-sañchanna); Pv ii.120 (id.); ii.122 (id.); Pp 63; Vism 256 (ratta˚); DN-a i.219 Kp-a 53; Snp-a 97; Sdhp 359 ■ (2) Name of a purgatory (˚niraya) SN i.151–⁠152; Snp 677; p. 126; Snp-a 475 sq.

-acchara (heavenly) lotus-maiden Snp-a 469 ■ uttara Name of Buddha Snp-a 341, Snp-a 455 etc. -kaṇṇikā a peak in the shape of a lotus Vv-a 181. -kalāpa a bunch of lotuses Vv-a 191. -gabbha the calyx of a l. Thag-a 68 (˚vaṇṇa). -patta a l. leaf Nd i.135 (= pokkhara); Dhp-a iv.166 (= pokkhara-patta). -puñja a l. cluster Ja iii.55. -puppha a lotus flower Nd ii.393; Snp-a 78. -rāga “lotus hued,” a ruby Vv-a 276. -vyūha one of the 3 kinds of fighting, viz. p.˚; cakka˚, sakaṭa˚ Ja ii.406 Ja iv.343 (cp. Sk. p ■ vyūha-samādhi a kind of concentration & see Ja trsl;nii.275). -sara a lotus pond Ja i.221 Ja v.337; Snp-a 141.

cp. Epic Sk. padma, not in RV.

Padumaka

1. the Paduma purgatory SN i.152.

2. a lotus Ja ii.325.

fr. paduma

Padumin

(adj.-n.) having a lotus, belonging to a lotus, lotus-like; Name of (the spotted) elephant Snp 53 (expld at Snp-a 103 as “padumasadisa-gattatāya vā Padumakule uppannatāya vā padumī,” cp. Nd ii.p. 164) ■ f. paduminī [cp. Sk padminī lotus plant] 1. a lotus pond or pool of lotuses DN i.75; DN ii.38; MN iii.93; SN i.138; AN iii.26.

2. the lotus plant Nelumbium speciosum Ja i.128 (˚paṇṇa); iv.419 (˚patta); Snp-a 369; Kp-a 67 (˚patta); Pv-a 189.

cp. Sk. padmin, spotted elephant

Padulla

in cpd. padulla-gāhin is perhaps misreading; trsl. “clutching at blown straws (of vain opinion), expld by C. as duṭṭhullagāhin; at id. p. SN i.187 we find duṭṭhullabhāṇin “whose speech is never lewd” (see Psalms of Brethren 399, n. 3).

?

Padussati

to do wrong, offend against (with loc.), make bad, corrupt DN-a i.211 (see padosa); Snp 108 (v.l. for padissati); aor. padussi Ja ii.125, Ja ii.401 ■ pp paduṭṭha; Caus. padūseti (q.v.).

pa + dussati

Padūsita

made bad, corrupted, spoilt Iti 13 (v.l. padussita). Paduseti & Padoseti;

pp. of padūseti

Padūseti & Padoseti

to defile, pollute, spoil make bad or corrupt [cp. BSk. pradūṣyati cittaṃ Divy 197, Divy 286] DN i.20; MN i.129; Iti 86; DN-a i.211 (see padosa1) Thag-a 72 (Ap. v. 40; to be read for paduse, Pot. = padoseyya); Ja v.273 (manaṃ p., for upahacca) ■ padusseti read also at AN iv.97 for padasseti (dummanku ‘yam padusseti dhūm’ aggimhi va pāvako) ■ As padoseti at Pv-a 212 (cittāni padosetvā) and in stock phrase manaṃ padosaye (Pot.) in sense of “to set upon anger” (cp padosa2) SN i.149 (“sets his heart at enmity”) = AN ii.3 AN v.171, AN v.174 = Snp 659 (= manaṃ padoseyya Snp-a 477) Ne 132; SN iv.70; Snp-a 11 (mano padoseyya) ■ pp padūsita (q.v.).

Caus. of padussati, but the latter probably Denom. fr. padosa2

Padesa

indication, location, range, district; region, spot, place SN ii.227, SN ii.254 SN v.201; AN ii.167 (cattāro mahā˚); Dhp 127 (jagati˚), 303; Ja ii.3, Ja ii.158 (Himavanta˚); iii.25 (id.), 191 (jāti-gottakula˚); Snp-a 355; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 33 (hadaya˚), 36 (so read for padase), 43, 47; Sdhp 252.

-kārin effecting a limited extent SN v.201. -ñāṇa knowledge within a certain range, limited knowledge SN v.457. -bodhisatta a limited Bodhisatta Kv 283 (cp. Kvu trsln 1393, 1662). -rajja principality over a district, local government Iti 15; Thag-a 26 (Ap. v. 10) -rājā a local or sub-king Vism 301 (cakkavatti + ). -lakkhaṇa regional or limited characteristics Kv 283 -vassin raining or shedding rain only locally or over a (limited) district Iti 64–⁠66.

fr. pa + diś, cp. late Sk. pradeśa

Padesika

(adj.) (-˚) belonging to a place of indication, indicating, regional, reaching the index of only with numerals in reference to age (usually soḷasavassa˚ at the time of 16 years) Ja i.259 (id.) 262 (id. ii.277 (id.) ■ See also uddesika in same application.

fr. padesa

Padosa1

defect, fault, blemish, badness, corruption, sin DN i.71 (= padussati paraṃ vā padūseti vināsetī ti padoso DN-a i.211); MN iii.3; SN iv.322 (vyāpāda˚); AN i.8 (ceto˚); iii.92 (vyāpāda); Iti 12; Ja v.99; Pp 59, Pp 68; Dhs 1060Note. At Thag-a 72 we find reading “apace paduse (padose?) pi ca” as uncertain conjecture for v.l. BB “amacce manase pi ca.”

pa + dosa1, Sk. pradoṣa

Padosa2

anger, hatred, ill-will; always as mano˚; “anger in mind” MN i.377; Snp 328 (= khāṇu-kaṇṭak’ ādimhi p Snp-a 334), 702; Ja iv.29; Mil 130; Vism 304; Snp-a 477.

pa + dosa2, Sk. pradveṣa, see remarks to dosa2

Padosika

(adj.) sinful, spoiling or spoilt, full of fault or corruption, only in 2 phrases, viz. khiḍḍā˚ “debauched by pleasure” DN i.19; and mano˚; “debauched in mind” DN i.20, DN i.21.

fr. padosa1

Padosin

(adj.) abusing, damaging, spoiling, injuring SN i.13 (appaduttha˚); Pv iv.710.

fr. padosa1

Padoseti

see padūseti.

Paddha1

(adj.) 1. expert in (loc. Ja vi.476 (v.l. patha = paṭṭha; C. cheko paṭibalo). 2. subject to, serving, attending Ja iv.35 (p. carāmi, so read for baḍḍha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.; C. padacārikā).

cp. Sk. prādhva (?) in diff. meaning “being on a journey,” but rather prahva

Paddha2

(adj.) half (?) Ja iii.95 (probably = paddha1, but C. explns as aḍḍha upaḍḍha).

cp. Sk. prārdha

Paddhagu

(adj. n.) 1. going, walking Ja iii.95 (T. na p’ addhaguṃ, but C. reads paddhaguṃ)

2. humble, ready to serve, servant, attendant, slave SN i.104 (so read for paccagu); Snp 1095 (T. for paṭṭhagu q.v ■ Nd ii.reads paṭṭhagu but Snp-a 597 paddhagu and explns by paddhacara paricārika); Ja vi.380 (hadayassa) Thag 632.

cp. Sk. prādhvaga

Paddhacara

(adj.-n.) ready to serve, subject to ministering; a servant SN i.144 (T. baddhacara, v.l. paṭṭha˚; trsl. “pupil”); Ja iv.35 (read paddhacarā ‘smi tuyhaṃ for T. baddha carāmi t., as pointed out by Kern Toev. s. v. baddha. The Cy. misunderstood the wrong text reading and expld as “tuyhaṃ baddha carāmi, but adds “veyyāvaccakārikā padacārikā”); v.327 (as baddhañcara; C. veyyāvacca-kara); vi.268 (˚ā female servant = C. pāda-paricārikā); Nd i.464 (+ paricārika) Snp-a 597 (+ paricāraka, for paddhagū).

paddha1 + cara, cp. Sk. prādhva and prahva humble

Padma

see paduma.

Padmaka

(m. & nt.) Name of a tree, Costus speciosus or arabicus Ja v.405, Ja v.420; Ja vi.497 (reading uncertain), 537.

Sk. padmaka

Padvāra

(nt.) a place before a door or gate Ja v.433; Ja vi.327.

-gāma suburb Dāvs v.3.

pa + dvāra

Padhaṃsa

see appadhaṃsa.

Padhaṃsati

to fall from (abl.), to be deprived of Vin ii.205 (yogakkhemā p.; so read for paddh˚) ■ Caus. padhaṃseti to destroy, assault, violate offend Ja iv.494. (= jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpeti); Pv-a 117. grd. padhaṃsiya in cpds. su˚ & dup˚ easily (or with difficulty) overwhelmed or assaulted Vin ii.256; SN ii.264. Also neg. appadhaṃsiya (& ˚ka); (q.v.). pp. padhaṃsita (q.v.).

pa + dhaṃsati

Padhansita

offended, assaulted Ja ii.422. See also app˚.

pp. of padhaṃseti

Padhāna

(nt.) exertion, energetic effort, striving, concentration of mind DN iii.30 DN iii.77, DN iii.104, DN iii.108, DN iii.214, DN iii.238; MN ii.174, MN ii.218; SN i.47; SN ii.268 SN iv.360; SN v.244 sq.; AN iii.65–⁠67 (5 samayā and 5 asamayā for padhāna), 249; iv.355; v.17 sq.; Snp 424, Snp 428; Iti 30; Dhp 141; Ja i.90; Nd ii.394 (= viriya); Vb 218 (citta-samādhi p˚ etc.); Ne 16; DN-a i.104; Dhp-a i.85 (mahā-padhānaṃ padahitvā); Thag-a 174; Pv-a 134 Padhāna is fourfold, viz. saṃvara˚, pahāna˚, bhāvana˚ anurakkhaṇā˚ or exertion consisting in the restraint of one’s senses, the abandonment of sinful thoughts, practice of meditation & guarding one’s character. These 4 are mentioned at DN iii.225; AN ii.16; Pts i.84; Pts ii.14 sq. 56, 86, 166, 174; Ud 34; Nd i.45, Nd i.340; Sdhp 594. Very frequently termed sammappadhāna [cp. BSk samyak-pradhāna Mvu iii.120; but also samyakprahāṇa e.g. Divy 208] or “right exertion,” thus at Vin i.22; SN i.105; SN iii.96 (the four); AN ii.15 (id.); iii.12 iv.125; Nd i.14; Pts i.21, Pts i.85, Pts i.90, Pts i.161; Snp-a 124; Pv-a 98 ■ As padahana at Pts i.17, Pts i.21, Pts i.181.

fr. pa + dhā, cp. padahati

Padhānavant

(adj.) gifted with energy, full of strength (of meditation etc.), rightly concentrated SN i.188, SN i.197; Snp 70 (cp. Nd ii.394), 531.

fr. padhāna

Padhānika

(adj.) making efforts, exerting oneself in meditation, practising “padhāna” DN-a i.251.

fr. padhāna

Padhāniya

(adj.) belonging to or connected with exertion, worthy of being pursued in cpd. ˚aṅga (nt.) a quality to be striven after, of which there are 5 expressed in the attributes of one who attains them as saddho, appābādho, asaṭho, āraddha-viriyo, paññavā DN iii.237 = MN ii.95, MN ii.128 = AN iii.65; referred to at Mil trsln i.188. Besides these there is the set called pārisuddhi-padhāniy’ angāni and consisting either of 4 qualities (sīla˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚, vimutti˚) AN ii.194, or of 9 (the four + kankhā-vitaraṇa˚, maggâmagga-ñāṇa paṭipadāñāṇa-dassana˚, ñāṇa-dassana˚ paññā˚) DN iii.288; Pts i.28.

fr. padhāna

Padhārita

(“born in mind”) read patthārita at Thag 842 (see pattharati) ■ padhārehi (v.l. F.) at Snp 1149 read dhārehi ■ padhārita in meaning of “considered, understood” in cpd. su˚ at SN iii.6; SN v.278.

Padhāvati

to run out or forth Pv iii.17 (ger. ˚itvā = upadhāvitvā Pv-a 173).

pa + dhāvati

Padhāvin

(adj.) rushing or running out or forth MN ii.98.

fr. padhāvati

Padhūpāti

(= padhūpāyati) to blow forth smoke or flames Vin i.25 (aor. padhūpāsi); iv.109 (id.); Vism 400 (id.), (so read for padhūmāsi T., v.l. SS padhūpāyi & padhūmāyi) ■ pp.; padhūpita (q.v.).

pa + dhūpāyati

Padhūpita

fumigated, reeking, smoked out SN i.133 (trsld “racked [wrapt] in flames”; C. santāpita) Vv-a 237 (so read with v.l. SS. for T. pavūsita; meaning scented, filled with scent).

pa + dhūpita, latter only in meaning “incensed,” cp. dhūpa etc.

Padhota

(adj.) cleansed, in cpd. sup˚ well cleansed DN ii.324.

pa + dhota

Pana

(indecl.) adversative & interrogative particle, sometimes (originally, cp. puna “again, further”) merely connecting & continuing the story ■ (1) (adversative) but, on the contrary Ja i.222; Ja ii.159; Vv-a 79 (correl. with tāva). ca pana “but” Ja i.152; atha ca pana “and yet” DN i.139; Ja i.279; na kho pana “certainly not” Ja i.151; vā pana “or else” Vin i.83; Dhp 42; Snp 376, Snp 829 ■ (2) (in questions) then, now Ja ii.4 (kiṃ p.), 159 (kahaṃ p.) Vv-a 21 (kena p.); Pv-a 27 (katamaṃ p.) ■ (3) (conclusive or copulative) and, and now, further, moreover DN i.139 (siyā kho p. be it now that… ); Snp 23, Snp 393 Snp 396, Snp 670; Ja i.278; Pv-a 3.

doublet of Sk. puna(ḥ) wiṭh diff. meaning (see puna), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34

Panaccati

to dance (forth), to dance Thag-a 257 (ppr. panaccanta) ■ pp. panaccita (q.v.).

pa + naccati

Panaccita

dancing, made to dance Thig 390.

pp. of panaccati

Panasa

the Jack or bread-fruit tree (Artocarpus integrifolia) and its fruit Ja i.450; Ja ii.160 Ja v.205, Ja v.465; Vv 4413; Kp-a 49, Kp-a 50, Kp-a 58 (˚phala, where Vism 258 reads panasa-taca); Snp-a 475; Vv-a 147.

cp. late Sk. panasa, Lat. penus stores, Lith. pẽnas fodder, perhaps Goth. fenea

Panassati

to be lost, to disappear, to go to ruin, to cease to be MN i.177; SN ii.272 (read panassissati with BB); Ja v.401 Ja vi.239; Thag 143.

pa + nassati, cp. also BSk praṇāśa Divy 626

Panāda

shouting out, shrieks of joy Ja vi.282.

pa + nāda

Panādeti

to shout out, to utter a sound Thag 310.

Caus. of pa + nad

Panāḷikā

(f.) a pipe, tube, channel, water course DN-a i.244.

fr. panāḷī

Panāḷī

(f.) a tube, pipe AN iv.171 (udapāna˚).

pa + nāḷī

Panigghosa

in cpd. appanigghosa is wrongly registered as such in A Index (for AN iv.88); it is to be separated appa + nigghosa (see nigghosa).

Panudati

to dispel, repel, remove, push away SN i.167 sq., 173; Dhp 383; Snp 81, Snp 928 (pot. panudeyya or metri causa panūdeyya = pajaheyya etc. Nd i.385) Ja vi.491 (1. pl. panudāmase) ■ ger. panuditvā Snp-a 591, & panujja Snp 359, Snp 535, Snp 1055 (expld at Nd ii.395 as imper. pres. = pajaha, cp. Snp-a 591 = panudehi); Ja iii.14; Ja v.198 (= pātetvā C.) ■ Fut. panudahissati Thag 27, Thag 233 ■ Pass. panujjati, ppr. panujjamāna in phrase “api panujjamānena pi” even if repulsed MN i.108, cp. AN iv.32 & Ne 164 (v.l. to be substituted for T. pamajjamānena) ■ pp.; panunna & panudita; (q.v.).

pa + nudati

Panudita

dispelled, driven out Snp 483 (panūdita metri causa, v.l. panudita). See also panunna. Panunna (Panunna & Panunna);

pp. of panudati

Panunna (Paṇunna & Panuṇṇa)

(med. & pass.) put away, rejected or rejecting, dispelled driven away, sent AN ii.29; AN v.31; Snp 469 (˚kodha) Ja vi.247, Ja vi.285; Kv 597 (ito p., trsld “ending here”).

-paccekasacca one who has rejected each of the four false truths (the 5th of the 10 noble states ariyavāsā: see Vin. Texts i.141) DN iii.269, DN iii.270; AN ii.41 AN v.29 sq.

pp. of panudati

Panūdana

(nt.) removal, dispelling, rejection Snp 252 (sabba-dukkhâpanūdana Snp-a 293 should be read as sabba-dukkha-apanūdana, as at Vin ii.148 = Ja i.94) 1106 (= pahānaṃ etc. Nd ii.396).

fr. panudati

Panta

(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. prānta edge, margin, border, pra + anta; also BSk. prānta in meaning of Pali, e.g. Mvu iii.200; Divy 312 (prānta-śayan-āsana-sevin) distant, remote, solitary, secluded; only in phrase pantaṃ senāsanaṃ (sayanāsanaṃ) or pantāni senāsanāni “solitary bed & chair” MN i.17, MN i.30; AN i.60; AN ii.137 AN iii.103; AN v.10, AN v.202; Snp 72 (cp. Nd ii.93), 338, 960 (˚amhi sayanāsane), 969 (sayanamhi pante); Dhp 185 (= vivitta Dhp-a iii.238); Ud 43 (so read for patthañ); Ja iii.524 (˚amhi sayanāsane); Vism 73 (panta-senāsane rata) Snp-a 263 (v.l. pattha).

-sena (adj.) one who has his resting place far away from men, Ep. of the Buddha MN i.386.

Panti

(f.) a row, range, line Vism 392 (tisso sopāna-pantiyo) Dhp-a iii.219 (uddhana˚); Thag-a 72 (satta pantiyo) Vv-a 198 (amba˚).

Ved. pankti set or row of five, group in general

Pantha

to come or go (by) a road, roadway, path SN i.18 (gen. pl. panthānaṃ kantāramagga C; “jungle road” trsl.); Snp 121 (loc panthasmiṃ); Nd ii.485 B (+ patha in expln of magga) Mil 157 (see panthaṃ)

-gū a traveller (lit. going by road) SN i.212 (v.l. addhagū, as at id. p. Thig 55); Ja iii.95 (v.l.). -ghāta highway robbery Ja i.253; Ja iv.184. -duhana waylaying robbery; m. a robber DN i.135 (see DA i.296); Ja ii.281 Ja ii.388; DN iii.68, and Tikp 280 (˚dūhana). -dūbhin a highwayman Ja ii.327. -dūsaka a robber Mil 20. -devatā a way spirit, a spirit presiding over a road, road-goddess Ja vi.527. -makkaṭaka a (road) spider Mil 364, Mil 407 -sakuṇa a “road-bird,” i.e. a bird offered (as a sacrifice) to the goddess presiding over the roads, propitiation; it is here to be understood as a human sacrifice Ja vi.527 (vv.ll. pattha˚ & bandha˚).;

base panthan˚, Ved. panthāḥ, with bases path˚ panth˚ and pathi. Same as patha (q.v.). For etym cp. Gr. πόντος sea(-path), πάτος path, Av. pantā˚, also Goth. finpan = E. find, of Idg *pent.

Panthāna

(for saṇṭhāna) at Snp-a 20: see saṇṭhāna 3.

Panthika

a traveller Mil 20.

fr. pantha, formation panthika: panthan = addhika: addhan

Panna

fallen, gone, gone down; also: creeping only in foll. cpds.:

-ga a snake Thag 429 (˚inda chief of snake-demons) Ja v.166; Mil 23. -gandha with gone down (i.e. deteriorated) smell, ill-smelling, or having lost its smell Ja v.198 (= thokaṃ duggandha C.). -dhaja one whose flag gone or is lost, i.e. whose fight is over (Ep of the Buddha), cp. BSk. prapātito māna-dhvajaḥ Lal. V. 448 (with derivation from pat instead of pad cp. papātana) MN i.139 sq., 386; AN iii.84 sq.; in eulogy on the Buddha (see exegesis to mahesi Nd i.343; Nd ii.503) reference is made to mānadhaja (˚papātanaṃ which is opposed to dhamma-dhaja (-ussapana); thus we should explain as “one who has put down the flag of pride.” -bhāra one who has put down his burden, one whose load has gone, who is delivered or saved MN i.139; AN iii.84; SN i.233; Dhp 402 (= ohitakhandha-bhāra Dhp-a iv.168); Snp 626, Snp 914 (cp Nd i.334) Thag 1021. -bhūmi state of one who has fallen DN-a i.103 (opp. to jina-bhūmi, one of the 8 purisa-bhūmiyo-cp. DN i.54 & Dial. i.722). -loma one whose hairs have fallen or are put down (flat, i.e. do not stand erect in consequence of excitement), subdued, pacified (opp. haṭṭha loma) Vin ii.184 (cp. Vin ii.5 & Bdhgh on p. 309 lomaṃ pāteti, Bdhgh pādeti; also Vin. Texts ii.339); iii.266; MN i.450; Ja i.377. Another form is palloma (q.v. & cp.; J.P.T.S. 1889, 206). See also remarks on parada-vutta.

pp. of pajjati but not satisfactorily expld as such, for pajjati & panna never occur by themselves, but only in cpds. like āpajjati, āpanna, upp˚, upa˚, sam˚ etc. Besides, the word is only given in lexic. literature as pp. of pajjati, although a tendency prevails to regard it as pp. of patati. The meaning points more to the latter, but in form it cannot belong to; pat. A more satisfactory expln (in meaning and form) is to regard panna as pp. of pa + nam, with der. fr. short base. Thus panna would stand for panata (paṇata) as unna for unnata, ninna for ninnata, the double nn to be accounted for on analogy. The meaning would thus be “bent down, laid down,” as panna-ga going bent, panna-dhaja = flag bent or laid down etc. Perhaps patta of patta-kkhandha should belong here as panna˚

Pannaka

(adj.) silent (?) DN-a i.163.

fr. panna

Pannarasa

(adj. num.) fifteen (and fifteenth), usually referring to the 15th day of the lunar month, i.e. the full-moon day Snp 153 (pannaraso uposatho); pannarase on the 15th day SN i.191 = Thag 1234; MN iii.20; Snp 502, Snp 1016 f. loc. pannarasāya id. SN i.233. See also paṇṇarasa.

see pañcadasa & paṇṇarasa under pañca

Pannarasama

(num. ord.) the 15th Snp-a 366 (gāthā).

fr. pannarasa

Pannarasika

(adj.) belonging to the 15th day (of the lunar month) Vin iv.315.

fr. pannarasa

Papa

(nt.) water Ja i.109 (āpaṃ papaṃ mahodakan ti attho). The word is evidently an etym. construction. See also papā.

see pibati, pānīya etc. of

Papaccati

to be cooked, to become ripe Pv-a 55 (˚itvā).

Pass. of pa + pacati

Papañca

1. obstacle, impediment, a burden which causes delay hindrance, delay Dhp-a i.18; Dhp-a ii.91 (kathā˚). ˚ṃ karoti to delay, to tarry Ja iv.145; ˚ṃ akatvā without delay Ja i.260; Ja vi.392 ■ ati˚ too great a delay Ja i.64; Ja ii.92–⁠2. illusion, obsession, hindrance to spiritual progress MN i.65; SN i.100; SN iv.52, SN iv.71; AN ii.161 sq.; AN iii.393 sq. Snp 530 (= taṇhā-diṭṭhi-mānabheda-p. Snp-a 431; and generally in Commentaries so resolved, without verbal analysis); Ud 77 (as f. papañcā); Thag 519, Thag 902, Thag 989 (cp. Brethren 344, 345 & J.R.A.S. 1906, 246 sq.; Neumann trsls “Sonderheit,” see Lieder p. 210, 211; Mittlere Sammlung i.119 in trsl. of MN i.65 nippapañca) Dhp 195, Dhp 254 (˚âbhiratā pajā, nippapañcā Tathāgatā = taṇhādisu p˚ esu abhiratā Dhp-a iii.378); Ja i.9; Pv iv.134 (= taṇh’-ādi-p. Pv-a 230); Ne 37, Ne 38; Snp-a 495 (gihi) ■ nippapañca (q.v.) without obsession. 3. diffuseness, copiousness Snp-a 40.

-saṅkhā sign or characteristic of obsession Snp 874 (cp. Snp-a 553; = taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚ and māna˚ Nd i.280), 916 (= avijjādayo kilesā mūlaṃ Snp-a 562) -saññā (˚sankhā) idea of obsession, idée fixe, illusion DN ii.277 (cp. Dial ii.312); MN i.109, MN i.112, MN i.271, MN i.383; SN iv.71.

in its P. meaning uncertain whether identical with Sk. prapañca (pra + pañc to spread out; meaning “expansion, diffuseness, manifoldedness”; cp. papañceti & papañca 3) more likely, as suggested by etym & meaning of Lat. im-ped-iment-um, connected with; pada, thus perhaps originally “pa-pad-ya,” i.e. what is in front of (i.e. in the way of) the feet (as an obstacle)

Papañcita

obsessed, illusioned Snp-a 495 (a˚ gihipapañ-cena) ■ nt. obsession, vain imagination illusion SN iv.203≈Vbh 390.

pp. of papañceti

Papañceti

1. to have illusions, to imagine, to be obsessed MN i.112; Dhp-a i.198 (tesaṃ suvaṇṇa-lobhena papañcentānaṃ).

2. to be profuse. to talk much, to delay on Snp-a 136 ■ pp. papañcita.

Denom. fr. papañca

Papaṭā

(papatā) (f.) a broken-off piece, splinter, fragment; also proclivity precipice, pit (?) SN ii.227 (papatā ti kho lābha-sakkāra-silokass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; cp. SN iii.109: sobbho papāto kodh’ ûpāyāsass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ); So 665 (= sobbha Snp-a 479; gloss papada). See also pappaṭaka.

fr. papāta? Cp. papaṭikā

Papaṭikā

(f.) 1. a splinter piece, fragment, chip Vin ii.193 (read tato pap.˚) AN iv.70 sq. (of ayophāla); Ja v.333 (same as Vin passage); Mil 179.

2. the outer dry bark or crust of a tree, falling off in shreads; also shoots, sprouts MN i.78 MN i.192 sq., 488; AN i.152; AN iii.19 sq., 44, 200, 360; iv.99 336; v.4 sq., 314 sq.; Ja iii.491. Cp. pheggu.

cp. Sk. prapāṭikā (lexic. & gram.) young shoot, sprout; and parpharīka (RV.) one who tears to pieces; also Sk. parpaṭa Name of a plant

Papatati

to fall forward, to fall down, off or from, to fall into (acc.) Vin ii.284; MN i.79, MN i.80; SN i.48 (visame magge), 187 (= Thag 1220 patanti) 100, ii.114; v.47; Dhp 336; Ja v.31; Pv i.1012 (nirayaṃ papatiss’ ahaṃ, cp. Pv-a 52; v.l. SS niray’ ûpapatiss âhaṃ) ■ aor. papatā Vin iii.17, cp. ii.126; Ja vi.566 See also patati.

pa + patati

Papatana

(nt.) falling down Snp 576 = Ja iv.127 (abl. papatanā papatanato C.).

fr. pa + pat

Papada

(or Papadā ?) tip of the foot. toes; but in diff. meaning (for papaṭā or papāta to pat ) “falling down, abyss, pit” at Snp 665 (gloss for papaṭa; expld at Snp-a 479 by “mahāniraya”).

pa + pada

Papā

(f.) a place for supplying water, a shed by the roadside to provide travellers with water a well, cistern DN iii.185; SN i.33 = Kv 345 (= pānīyadāna-sālā SA); SN i.100 (read papañ ca vivane); Ja i.109; Dhp-a iii.349 = Ja i.302 (= pānīya-cāṭī C.); Vv 5222 (+ udapāna); Pv ii.78 (n. pl. papāyo = pānīya-sālā Pv-a 102); ii.925 (+ udapāna).

Ved. prapā, pa +

Papāta

1. falling down, a fall Vin ii.284 (chinna-papātaṃ papatanti); SN v.47. 2. a cliff, precipice, steep rock MN i.11; SN iii.109 (sobbho p. kodh’ upāyāsass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; cp. papaṭā) AN iii.389 (sobbho p.); Ja iii.5; Ja iii.530; Ja v.70; Ja vi.306, Ja vi.309 Vism 116; Pv-a 174; Sdhp 208, Sdhp 282, Sdhp 353 ■ adj. falling off steeply, having an abrupt end Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198 AN iv.200 (samuddo na āyatakena p.).

-taṭa a rocky or steep declivity Dhp-a i.73.

cp. Epic. Sk. prapāta, of pra + pat

Papātin

(adj.) falling or flying forward, flying up Ja iii.484 (uccā˚ flying away).

fr. papatati

Papitāmaha

a paternal great-grandfather Dāvs iii.29.

pa + pitāmaha

Papīyana

(nt.) drinkable, to be drunk, drinking Ja i.109 (udakaṃ papīyana-bhāvena papā ti).

fr. , ger. pa-pīya

Papīliṭa

worn out, rubbed through (of the sole of sandals) Ja ii.223.

pa + pīḷita

Paputta

a grandson Ja vi.477.

pa + putta, cp. Sk. praputra (BR.: “doubtful”) Inscr.

Papupphaka

(adj.) “with flowers in front,” flower-tipped (of the arrows of Māra) Dhp 46 (but expld at Dhp-a i.337 as “p.˚ sankhātāni tebhūmakāni vaṭṭāni,” i.e. existence in the 3 stages of being).

pa + pupphaka

Pappaṭaka

1. a broken bit, splinter, small stone (?) (Rh. D. in Dial. iii.83 “outgrowth” DN iii.87 (bhūmi ˚ṃ paribhuñjati); Vism 418 (≈) Ne 227 (Com.) (˚ojaṃ khādāpento).

2. a water plant see paṇṇaka 2; cp, also papaṭikā2 & Sk. parpaṭa Name of medicinal plant.;

etym. uncertain

Pappoṭheti

to strike, knock, beat, flap (of wings) Vin i.48; Vin ii.208, Vin ii.217; MN i.333 (papph˚); Ja ii.153 (pakkhe); iii.175 (papoṭh˚ sañcuṇṇeti C.); Mil 368 (papph˚); DN-a i.7; Vism 283 (pph).

pa + poṭheti; sometimes spelt papphoṭeti

Pappoti

to obtain, get, gain, receive, attain DN iii.159, DN iii.165; Snp 185, Snp 187, Snp 584; Dhp 27; Dhp-a i.395 ■ Pot. 1st pl pappomu Ja v.57 (= pāpuṇeyyāma C.) ■ ger. pappuyya SN i.48; Snp 482 (or pot?), 593, 829 (= pāpuṇitvā Nd i.170) ■ For further ref. see pāpuṇāti.

the contracted form of pāpuṇāti, Sk. prāpnoti

Papphāsa

(nt.) the lungs DN ii.293; MN i.185, MN i.421 MN iii.90; Snp 195 = Ja i.146; Kp iii. (cp. Kp-a 56); Mil 26.

fr. sound-root* phu, not corresponding directly to Sk. pupphusa (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34), to which it stands in a similar relation as *ghur (P.) to *ghar (Sk.) or phurati → pharati. From same root Gr. φυσάω to blow and Lat. pustula bubble, blister; see Walde under pustula

Pabandha

(adj.) (˚-) continuous Vism 32.

pa + bandha

Pabala

(adj.) very strong, mighty Sdhp 75.

cp. Sk. prabala

Pabāḷha1

pulled out, drawn forth DN i.77 (T. reads pavāḷha). See pavāḷha.

pp. of pabāhati

Pabāḷha2

(adj.) strong, sharp (of pain) DN ii.128; Ja v.422, Mil 174.

pa + bāḷha

Pabāhati

to pull out, draw forth DN i.77 (T. reads pavāhati, v.l. pabbāḷhati, evidently fr. pabāḷha); cp. Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa iv.3, 3 16 ■ pp. pabāḷha1 (q.v.).

pa + bṛh to pull, see abbahati

Pabujjhati

to wake up (intrs.), awake SN i.4, SN i.209; Dhp 296 sq.; Iti 41 (suttā p.); Ja i.61; Ja ii.103 Ja iv.431 (opp. niddāyati); DN-a i.140 ■ pp. pabuddha (q.v.).

pa + bujjhati

Pabuddha

awakened SN i.143 (sutta˚ from sleep awakened), Ja i.50; Vv-a 65.

pp. of pabujjhati

Pabodhati

to awake, also trs. awaken, stir up, give rise to (or: to recognise, realise?); only in one phrase (perhaps corrupt), viz. yo nindaṃ appabodhati SN i.7 = Dhp 143 (= nindaṃ apaharanto bujjhati Dhp-a iii.86; trsl. KS 13 “forestalleth blame”). Caus. pabodheti (1) to enlighten, instruct, give a sign Ja i.142; Ja iii.511 ■ (2) to set going, arouse Ja i.298 Ja v.390 ■ (3) to render oneself conspicuous Ja v.8.

pa + bodhati

Pabodhana

(adj.-n..) 1. (nt.) awakening waking, arising Dhp-a i.232 (˚codana-kamma).

2. (adj. arousing (or realising?) Vv 6422 (= kata-pīti-pabodhano Vv-a 282); awaking Thag 893 (samma-tāḷa˚).

fr. pabodhati

Pabba

(nt.) 1. a knot (of a stalk), joint, section Vin iv.35; MN i.80; Ja i.245 (veḷu˚); Vism 358 (id.; but nāḷika p. 260); Vb-a 63 (id.); Thag 243-angula˚ finger joint Vin iv.262, MN i.187; DN-a i.285-pabba-pabbaṃ knot for knot Dhs-a 11.

2. the elbow SN iv.171.

3. section, division, part Vism 240 (14 sections of contemplation of the body or kāyagatāsati); Vb-a 275, Vb-a 286.

-gaṇṭhi a knot Mil 103. -valli a species of Dūrvā Ja v.69; -vāta intermittent ague Vin i.205.

Ved. parvan

Pabbaja

a species of reed. bulrush Vin i.190 (T. reads babbaja); SN i.77 SN ii.92; SN iii.137 (v.l. babbaja), 155 (˚lāyaka); Thag 27; Ja ii.140, Ja ii.141; Ja v.202; Ja vi.508. For further refs. see babbaja.

Sk. balbaja, cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 39. 6

Pabbajati

to go forth, to leave home and wander about as a mendicant, to give up the world, to take up the ascetic life (as bhikkhu samaṇa, tapassin, isi etc.). SN i.140, SN i.141; Snp 157, Snp 1003 imper. pabbaja Dhp-a i.133. Pot. pabbajeyya Ja i.56 Pp 57 ■ Fut. pabbajissati Snp 564; Dhp-a i.133 Dhp-a iv.55. Aor. pabbaji MN iii.33; SN i.196 = Thag 1255; Snp 405; Vv 826; Pv-a 76; ger. pabbajitvā Ja i.303; Pv-a 21 and ˚vāna Snp 407(agārasmā) anagāriyaṃ pabbajati to go forth into the homeless state Vin iii.12; MN iii.33; SN i.196; AN v.204; Pv ii.1316. sāsane p. to become an ascetic in (Buddhas) religion, to embrace the religion (& practice) of the Buddha Ja i.56; Pv-a 12 pabbajjaṃ pabbajati to go into the holy life (of an ascetic friar, wanderer etc.): see pabbajjā ■ Caus pabbājeti (q.v.) ■ pp. pabbajita.

cp. Sk. pravrajati, pra + vraj

Pabbajana

(nt.) going into an ascetic life Ja iii.393 (a˚).

fr. pabbajati

Pabbajita

one who has gone out from home, one who has given up worldly life & undertaken the life of a bhikkhu recluse or ascetic, (one) ordained (as a Buddhist friar) gone forth (into the holy life or pabbajjā) Vin iii.40 (vuḍḍha-pabbajito bhikkhu); iv.159; DN i.131 (agārasmā anagāriyaṃ p.), 157; iii.31 sq., 147 sq.; MN i.200 MN i.267, MN i.345, MN i.459; MN ii.66, MN ii.181; MN iii.261; SN i.119 (dhammavinaye p.); iv.260, 330; v.118 sq., 421; AN i.69, AN i.107 AN i.147, AN i.168; AN ii.78, AN ii.143; AN iii.33, AN iii.78 (vuḍḍha˚), 244, 403 (acira˚); iv.21 (cira˚); v.82, 348 sq.; Snp 43 (see Nd ii.397), 274, 385, 423; Dhp 74, Dhp 174, Dhp 388; Ja i.56; Pv ii.81 (= samaṇa Pv-a 106); ii.111 (bhikkhu = kāmādimalānaṃ pabbajitattā paramatthato pabbajito Pv-a 146); ii.1317 (= pabbajjaṃ upagata Pv-a 167); Mil 11; DN-a i.270; Dhp-a i.133; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 55.

pp. of pabbajati, cp. BSk. pravrājita Divy 236

Pabbajjā

(f.) leaving the world, adopting the ascetic life state of being a Buddhist friar, taking the (yellow) robe ordination ■ (1) ordination or admission into the Buddha’s Order in particular: Vin iii.13; SN i.161 etc-sāmanera˚ ordination of a Novice, described in full at Vin i.82 ■ pabbajjaṃ yācati to beg admission Vin iv.129; labhati to gain admission to the Order Vin i.12, Vin i.17, Vin i.32; DN i.176; SN iv.181 ■ (2) ascetic or homeless life in general DN iii.147 sq.; MN iii.33 (abbhokāso p.); SN v.350 (id.; read pabbajjā); AN v.204 (id.); SN ii.128 (read ˚jjā for ˚jā); iv.260; AN i.151, AN i.168; AN iv.274 sq.; Snp 405, Snp 406, Snp 567; Iti 75 (pabbajjāya ceteti) Mil 19 (dhamma-cariya-samacariy’ atthā p.); Dhp-a i.6; Snp-a 49, Snp-a 327, Snp-a 423; Thag-a 251 ■ pabbajjaṃ upagata gone into the homeless state Pv-a 167 (for pabbajita) agārasmā anagāriyaṃ p. the going forth from home into the homeless state Vin ii.253; MN ii.56; pabbajjaṃ pabbajati to undertake or go into the ascetic life, in foll. varieties: isi˚ of a Saint or Sage Ja i.298, Ja i.303; Dhp-a iv.55; Pv-a 162 (of the Buddha); tāpasa˚ of a Hermit Ja iii.119; DN-a i.270 (described in detail); Dhp-a iv.29; Pv-a 21; samaṇa˚ of a Wanderer Pv-a 76. Note. The ceremony of admission to the priesthood is called pabbajjā (or pabbajana), if viewed as the act of the candidate of orders, and pabbājana (q.v.) if viewed as the act of the priest conferring orders; the latter term however does not occur in this meaning in the Canon.

fr. pa + vraj, cp. pabbajati, Epic & BSk. pravrajyā

Pabbata

(1) a mountain (-range), hill, rock SN i.101 SN i.102, SN i.127, SN i.137; SN ii.32, SN ii.185, SN ii.190; AN i.243; AN ii.140; AN iv.102 (dhūpāyati); Snp 413, Snp 417, Snp 543, Snp 958, Snp 1014; Nd i.466; Dhp 8, Dhp 127 (˚ānaṃ vivaro) = Pv-a 104; Dhp 188 (n. pl ˚āni), 304; DN-a i.209; Mil 346 (dhamma˚); Pv-a 221 (angāra˚) Sdhp 352, Sdhp 545, Sdhp 574 ■ The 7 mountains round Veḷuvana are enumd at Ja v.38 ■ Names of some (real or fictitious) mountains, as found in the Jātaka literature: Cakkavāḷa Ja vi.282; Caṇḍoraṇa Ja iv.90 Canda Ja iv.283; Ja v.38, Ja v.162; Daṇḍaka-hirañña Ja ii.33 Daddara Ja ii.8; Ja iii.16; Nemindhara Ja vi.125; Neru Ja iii.247; Ja v.425; Paṇḍava Snp 417; Snp-a 382 sq.; Mahāneru Ja iv.462; Mahindhara Vv 3210 (cp. Vv-a 136) Meru Ja i.25; Ja iv.498; Yugandhara Pv-a 137; Rajata Ja i.50; Vipula Ja vi.518; Sineru SN ii.139; Ja i.48 passim; Suvaṇṇa Ja i.50; Ja vi.514 (˚giritāla) ■ (2) [cp Sk. pārvata mountainous] a mountaineer Mil 191.

-utu the time (aspect) of the mountain (in prognostications as to horoscope) Dhp-a i.165 (megha-utu, p. utu, aruṇa-utu). -kaccha a mountain meadow (opp nadī-kaccḥa) Snp-a 33. -kandara a m. cave SN ii.32 SN v.396, SN v.457 sq.; AN v.114 sq.; -kūṭa m. peak Vin ii.193; Ja i.73. -gahaṇa m. thicket or jungle Pv-a 5. -ṭṭha standing on a m. Dhp 28. -pāda the foot of a m. Ja iii.51; Dhp-a iv.187; Pv-a 10. -muddhā mountain top Vin i.5. -raṭṭha m ■ kingdom Snp-a 26. -rājā “king of the mountain,” Ep. of Himavā SN i.116; SN ii.137 sq., 276 iii.149; v.47, 63, 148; AN i.152; AN iii.240; AN iv.102; Pv-a 143. -saṅkhepa top of a m. DN i.84 (= p ■ matthaka DN-a i.226). -sānu m ■ glen Vv 3210 (cp. Vv-a 136) -sikhara mountain-crest Ja v.421.

Vedic parvata, fr. parvan, orig. knotty, rugged, massive

Pabbataka

a mountain Ja i.303.

fr. pabbata

Pabbateyya

(adj.) belonging to mountains, mountain-born (of a river) AN iii.64 (nadī p˚ā sīghasotā hārahārinī); iv.137 (id.); Vism 231 (id.), 285 (nadī).

fr. pabbata

Pabbaniya

(adj.) forming a division or section, consisting of, belonging to Kp-a 114 (khaya˚) (?).

fr. pabba

Pabbājana

(nt.) keeping out or away, removing, banishment exiling DN i.135; DN iii.93; Mil 357; Dhp i.296 (= nīharaṇa); Dhp-a iv.145.

fr. pa + Caus. of vraj, see pabbajati & pabbājeti

Pabbājaniya

(adj.) belonging to banishment, deserving to be exiled Mil 186; also in cpd. ˚kamma excommunication, one of the 5 ecclesiastical acts enumd at Vin i.49, Vin i.143. See also AN i.79; Dhp-a ii.109.

fr. pabbājana

Pabbājita

taken into the order, made a bhikkhu MN ii.62.

pp. of pabbājeti

Pabbājeti

1. to make go out or away, drive out, banish, exile DN i.92 (raṭṭhasmā out of the kingdom; = nīharati DN-a i.258); MN ii.122; Dhp 388 (attano malaṃ pabbājayaṃ, tasmā pabbajito ti vuccati) Dhp-a iv.145 (explns as “attano rāgādimalaṃ pabbājento vinodento”) Ja i.262 (raṭṭhā); iii.168 (id.) vi.350, 351; Dhp-a ii.41; Pv-a 54 (core).

2. to make go forth (into the homeless state), to make somebody take up the life of an ascetic or a bhikkhu, to take into the (Buddha’s) order, to ordain Vin i.82 (description of ordination of a novice), 97; iii.12; iv.129; Dhp-a i.19 Dhp-a i.133 ■ pp. pabbājita (q.v.).

Caus. of pabbajati

Pabbedha

piercing through (measuring) an arrow shot Thag 164-J ii.334 (soḷasa˚ = soḷasa-kaṇḍa-pāta-vitthāro C.) ■ Note. pabbedha owes its bb to analogy with ubbedha. It also corresponds to the latter in meaning: whereas ubbedha refers to the height, pabbedha is applied to the breadth or width.

pa + vedha of vyadh, cp. BSk. pravedha in same phrase at Divy 56, viz. ṣoḍaśa-pravedho

Pabbhamati

to roam forth or about Ja v.106 (= bhamati C.).

pa + bhamati

Pabbhāra

1. (m.) a decline, incline, slope Ja i.348; adj. (usually -˚) bending inclining, sloping; fig. tending or leading to (cp. E “bearing on”) MN i.493 (samudda˚); SN i.110 (id.) v.38, 216, 219; AN iv.198 (anupubba˚), 224 (viveka˚) Mil 38 (samādhi˚). Very frequent in combn with similar expressions, e.g. ninna, poṇa (cp. Pv-a ninnapoṇa-pabbhāraṃ cittaṃ): see further ref. under ninna with adhimutta & garuka at Vism 117 (Nibbāna˚)-; apabbhara (sic.) not slanting or sloping Ja v.405 (= samatittha C.).

2. (m. & nt.) a cave in a mountain Mil 151; Ja v.440; Dhp-a ii.59 (nt.), 98.

-ṭṭhāna a slope Ja i.348; Dhs-a 261. -dasaka the decade (period) of decline (in life), which in the enum of the 10 decades (vassadasā) at Ja iv.397 is given as the seventh.

cp. BSk. prāg-bhāra Divy 80 etc.

Pabrūṭi

to speak out, proclaim, declare (publicly) Snp 131, Snp 649, Snp 870, Snp 952 and passim (cp. Nd i.211, Nd i.273; Nd ii.398, Nd ii.465).

pa + brūti

Pabha

is adj. form (-˚) of pabhā (q.v.).

Pabhaṃsana

(adj.-n..) causing to fall or disappear depriving, taking away, theft, in maṇi˚ jewel-theft Ja vi.383. (Rh. D. “polishing”?) Kern in Toev. s. v takes pabhaṃsana as a der. fr. pa + bhrās to shine, i.e. making bright, polishing (as Rh. D.).

fr. pa + bhraṃś, cp. nāva-prabhraṃśana Npl. A.V.

Pabhagga

broken up, destroyed, defeated Vin iii.108.

pp. of pabhañjati, cp. Sk prabhagna

Pabhaṅkara

one who makes light, one who lights up, light-bringer (often as Ep. of the Buddha) SN i.51 (quoted at Vv-a 116), 210; AN ii.51 sq.; Iti 80; Ja iii.128; Snp 991, Snp 1136 (= ālokakara obhāsakara etc. Nd ii.399); Vv 214 (= ñāṇ’ obhāsa-kara Vv-a 106); 3425 (= lokassa ñāṇ’ āloka-kara Vv-a 115).

pabhaṃ, acc. of pabhā, + kara

Pabhaṅga

destruction, breaking up, brittleness Pts ii.238 (calato pabhangato addhuvato) but id. p. at Nd ii.214ii and Mil 418 read “calato pabhanguto addhuvato.” Pabhangu, Pabhanguna & gura;

fr. pa + bhañj

Pabhaṅgu, Pabhaṅguṇa & ˚gura

(adj.) brittle, easily destroyed, perishable frail. (a) pabhaṅgu: SN iii.32; SN v.92; AN i.254, AN i.257 sq. AN iii.16; Dhs-a 380; Sdhp 51, Sdhp 553 ■ (b) ˚guṇa: Iti 37; Ja i.393 (ittarā addhuvā pabhanguno calitā; reading may be pabhanguṇā); Dhp 139 (as n.; = pabhangubhāva, pūtibhāva, Dhp-a iii.71), 148 (= pūtikāya ibid 111) ■ (c) ˚gura Dhp 148 (v.l.); Thag-a 95; Sdhp 562 Sdhp 605 ■ See also pabhaṅga.

fr. pa + bhanj, cp. BSk. prabhanguṇatā destruction, perishableness Mvu iii.338

Pabhañjati

to break up, destroy Ja iv.494. - pp. pabhagga (q.v.).

pa + bhañj

Pabhava

(m. & nt.) production, origin, source, cause MN i.67; SN i.181; SN ii.12; Iti 37 (āhāra-netti˚); Snp 728, Snp 1050; Nd ii.under mūla (with syName of sambhava & samuṭṭhāna etc.); Ja iii.402 Ja vi.518.

fr. pa + ; bhu, cp. Ved. prabhava

Pabhavati

see pahoti.

Pabhassati

to fall down or off, drop, disappear Vin ii.135 (pret. pabhassittha); iv.159 (id.) ■ Cp. pabhaṃsana.

pa + bhraṃś; cp. Sk. prabhraśyate

Pabhassara

(adj.) shining, very bright, resplendent SN i.145; SN v.92, SN v.283; AN i.10, AN i.254, AN i.257 sq., AN iii.16; Snp 48 (= parisuddha pariyodāta Nd ii.402); Ja v.202 Ja v.170; Vv 171 (rucira + ); Pv iii.31 (rucira + ); Vism 223 Vism 377; Dhp-a i.28; Vv-a 12 (pakati˚ bright by nature).

fr. bhās

Pabhā

(f.) light, radiance, shine AN ii.139; AN v.22; Iti 19, Iti 20; Pv-a 56 (sarīra˚), 137 (id.), 71, 176; Sdhp 250 ■ canda-ppabhā moonshine Iti 20; Dhs-a 14 ■ adj. pabha (-˚), radiating lucid, in cpd. sayam˚; self-lucid or self-radiant DN i.17 (= attano attano va tesaṃ pabhā ti DN-a i.110); AN v.60; Snp 404.

fr. pa + bhā, cp. Epic Sk. prabhā

Pabhāṇin

at Kern, Toev. s. v. is wrongly given with quot. Ja v.421 (in meaning “speaking”) where it should be read manāpa-bhāṇin, and not manā-p˚.

Pabhāta

become clear or light, shining, dawning Snp 178 (sup˚); esp. in phrase pabhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i.e. given way to dawn, at daybreak Ja i.81, Ja i.500 ■ (nt.) daybreak morning SN i.211; Snp-a 519 (pabhāte); atipabhāte in broad daylight Ja i.436.

pp. of pabhāti

Pabhāti

to shine forth, to become light, gleam, glitter Ja v.199 (said of a river; = pavattati C.) ■ pp pabhāta.

pa + bhā

Pabhāva

might, power, strength, majesty, dignity Ja v.36; Ja vi.449.

fr. pa + bhū

Pabhāvita

increased, furthered, promoted Thag 767 (bhava-netti˚); expld by samuṭṭhita C.

pp. of pabhāveti

Pabhāveti

to increase, augment, foster Pv ii.964 = Dhp-a iii.220 (dakkhiṇeyyaṃ) ■ pp pabhāvita.

Caus. of pabhavati

Pabhāsa

shining, splendour, beauty SN i.67; sap˚ with beauty SN v.263; Mil 223; ap˚ without beauty Mil 299.

fr. pa + bhās

Pabhāsati

to tell, declare, talk Thag 582.

pa + bhaṣ

Pabhāseti

to illumine, pervade with light, enlighten Dhp 172 (= obhāseti Dhp-a iii.169), 382 (= obhāseti ekālokaṃ karoti Dhp-a iv.137); Ja i.87; Pv i.109 (so read for ca bh˚); ii.112; Pts i.174; Mil 336; Pv-a 10 (= obhāseti).

Caus. of pa + bhās

Pabhindati

to split asunder (trs.), break, destroy Snp 973 (= bhindati sambhindati Nd i.503) ger. pabhijja SN i.193 = Thag 1242 ■ Pass. pabhijjati to be broken, to burst (open), to split asunder (intrs.) to open SN i.150 (aor. pabhijjiṃsu); Snp p.125 (id.) Vv 413 (break forth = pabhedaṃ gacchanti Vv-a 183 gloss pavajjare for pabhijjare); Snp-a 475 (= bhijjati) Also “to open, to be developed” (like a flower) Mil 93 (buddhi p.) ■ pp. pabhinna.

pa + bhindati

Pabhinna

1. to burst open, broken (like a flower or fruit), flowing with juice; usually appld to an elephant in rut, mad, furious MN i.236 (hatthi˚); Dhp 326 (hatthi˚ = mattahatthi Dhp-a iv.24) Thag 77; Ja iv.494; Ja vi.488; Pv i.112 (read chinnapabhinna-gatta); Mil 261, Mil 312 (hatthināgaṃ tidhāpabhinnaṃ); DN-a i.37 (˚madaṃ caṇḍa-hatthiṃ).

2 developed, growing Mil 90 (˚buddhi).

pp. of pabhindati

Pabhuti

(adj.) (-˚) beginning, in meaning of: since, after, subsequently; tato p. from that time henceforth Vv-a 158.

Vedic prabhṛti

Pabhutika

(adj.) dating from, derived or coming from (abl.) DN i.94 (kuto p.).

fr. pabhuti

Pabhu

iord, master, ruler, owner DN-a i.250.

fr. pa + bhū

Pabheda

breaking or splitting up, breaking, opening Vv-a 183; akkhara˚ breaking up of letters, word-analysis, phonology DN i.88 (= sikkhā ca nirutti ca DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 447) ■ adj (-˚) breaking up into, i.e. consisting of, comprising, of various kinds Ja i.84; Pv-a 8 (paṭisandhi-ādi˚), 130 (saviññāṇak’ âviññāṇaka˚).

fr. pa + bhid, cp. pabhindati

Pabhedana

(nt.) breaking up, destruction Snp 1105 (avijjāya˚ = bhedanaṃ pahānaṃ etc. Nd ii.403).

cp. pabheda

Pabhoti

etc. see pahoti.

Pamajjati1

1. to become intoxicated SN i.73.

2. to be careless, slothful, negligent; to neglect waste one’s time SN iv.125, SN iv.133; Snp 676, Snp 925, Snp 933; cp Nd i.376 & Nd;2 70; Dhp 168, Dhp 172, Dhp 259; Ja iii.264 (with acc.); iv.396 (with gen.); Pv i.1112 (dāne na p.); iv.13 (jāgaratha mā p.); Sdhp 16, Sdhp 620 ■ aor. 2 pl. pamādattha MN i.46; AN iii.87; AN iv.139. Other noteworthy forms are aor. or precative (mā) pamādo SN iv.263 Thag 119; Dhp 371 (see Geiger P.Gr. § 161 b), and cond or aor. pamādassaṃ MN iii.179; AN i.139 (see Geiger l. c 170 & Trenckner; Notes 752) ■ appamajjanto (ppr. diligent, eager, zealous Pv-a 7 ■ pp. pamatta (q.v.).

pa + mad

Pamajjati2

1. to wipe off, rub off, sweep, scour Vin i.47; Vin ii.209 (bhūmi˚ itabbā); MN i.383.

2. to rub along, stroke, grope, feel along (with one’s hands) Vin ii.209 (cīvara-rajjuṃ ˚itvā; cp. Vin. Texts iii.279). Note. pamajjamāna in phrase gale pi p˚ ānena at Ne 164 is after the example of similar passages MN i.108 and AN iv.32 and as indicated by v.l. preferably to be read as “api panujjamānena pi” (see panudati).

pa + mṛj

Pamajjanā

(f.) & ˚itatta (nt.) are abstr. formations fr. pa + mad, in the sense of pamāda carelessness etc., occur as philological synonyms in exegesis of pamāda at Vb 350 = Nd;1 423; Nd ii.405. Also at Dhp-a i.228 (˚bhāva = pamāda).

Pamaññā

(f.) only neg. ap˚; immeasurableness Vb 272 sq. (catasso appamaññāyo viz. mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekhā). See appamaññā.

abstr. fr. pamāṇa, for *pamānyā, grd. form. of pa + for the usual pameyya

Pamaṭṭa

in cpd. luñcita-pamaṭṭā kapotī viya (simile for a woman who has lost all her hair) at Pv-a 47 is doubtful it should probably be read as luñcita-pakkhikā k. viya i.e. like a pigeon whose feathers have been pulled out (v.l. ˚patthaka).

Pamatta

slothful, indolent, indifferent, careless, negligent DN iii.190; SN i.61 = SN i.204; AN i.11, AN i.139 AN iv.319; AN v.146; Snp 57, Snp 70, Snp 329 sq., 399, 1121; Dhp 19, Dhp 21 Dhp 29, Dhp 292, Dhp 309 (= sati-vossaggena samannāgata Dhp-a iii.482), 371; Nd ii.404; Pv-a 276 (quot. ˚ṃ ativattati) appamatta diligent, careful, eager, mindful SN i.4, SN i.140 SN i.157; AN v.148; Thag 1245; Pv iv.138; Pv-a 66 (dānaṃ detha etc.), 219, 278. See also appamatta2.

-cārin acting carelessly Dhp 334 (= sati-vossagga-lakkhaṇena pamādena p ■ c. Dhp-a iv.43). -bandhu friend of the careless (Ep. of Māra) SN i.123, SN i.128; Snp 430 Nd ii.507.

pp. of pamajjati

Pamattaka

(adj.) = pamatta, only in neg. form ap˚ careful, mindful Pv-a 201.

Pamathita

crushed, only in cpd. sam˚ (q.v.).

pp. of pa + mathati to crush

Pamadā

(f.) a young (wanton) woman, a woman Snp 156 Snp 157 (gloss for pamāda cp. Snp-a 203); Ja iii.442 (marapamadānaṃ issaro; v.l. samuddā), 530 (v.l. pamuda pamoda).

Classical Sk. pramadā, fr. pra + mad, cp. pamāda

Pamaddati

to crush down, destroy, overcome, defeat; pp. pamaddita Ja vi.189 (mālutena p. corresponding with vāta-pahaṭa).

pa + mṛd

Pamaddana

(adj. nt.) crushing, defeating, overcoming DN i.89 (˚parasena˚); Snp p.106 (id. = maddituṃ samattho Snp-a 450); Snp 561 (Mārasena˚); DN-a i.250.

fr. pamaddati

Pamaddin

(adj.) crushing, able to crush, powerful, mighty Ja iv.26 (= maddana-samattha C.).

fr. pa + mṛd

Pamāṇa

(nt.) 1. measure, size, amount SN ii.235; AN i.88; AN iii.52, AN iii.356 sq.; AN v.140 sq. Mil 285 (cp. trsl. ii.133, n. 2); Snp-a 137; Vv-a 16; Pv-a 55 (ghaṭa˚), 70 (ekahattha˚), 99 (tālakkhandha˚; ) 268 (sīla˚).

2. measure of time, compass, length duration Pv-a 136 (jīvitaṃ paricchinna ˚ṃ); esp. in cpd. āyu˚ age SN i.151; AN i.213; AN ii.126 sq. and passim (cp. āyu).

3. age (often by Com. taken as “worldly characteristic,” see below rūpa˚ and cp. Nd ii.406 on Snp 1076); Dhp-a i.38.

4. limit Pv-a 123, Pv-a 130 (dhanassa).

5. (appld meaning) standard, definition description, dimension SN iv.158Snp 1076 (perhaps (“age”). pamāṇaṃ karoti set an example Dhp-a iii.300 (maṃ p. katvā) ■ adj. (-˚) of characteristic of the character of, measuring or measured by, taking the standard of, only in cpd. rūpa˚ measuring by (appearance or) form, or held in the sphere of form (defined or Pp A 229 as “rūpa-ppamāṇ’ ādisu sampattiyuttaṃ rūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ karotī ti”) AN ii.71 = Pp 53 Nd ii.406appamāṇa without a measure, unlimited immeasurable, incomparable DN i.31; DN ii.12 (+ uḷāra) MN iii.145 (ceto-vimutti); AN i.183, AN i.192; AN ii.73; AN iii.52 AN v.299 sq., 344 sq.; Snp 507; Pv-a 110 (= atula). See also appamāṇa.

-kata taken as standard, set as example, being the measure, in phrase p ■ kataṃ kammaṃ DN i.251; SN iv.322.

of pa + , Vedic pramāṇa

Pamāṇavant

(adj. n.) having a measure, finite; or: to be described, able to be defined Vin ii.110; AN ii.73.

fr. pamāṇa

Pamāṇika

(adj. n.) 1. forming or taking a measure or standard, measuring by (-˚) Dhp-a iii.113 (rūpa˚ etc., see A ii.71); (n.) one who measures, a critic, judge AN iii.349 sq.; AN v.140; Sdhp 441 (as pamāṇaka).

2. according to measure, by measure Vin iii.149; Vin iv.279.

fr. pamāṇa

Pamāda

carelessness, negligence, indolence, remissness DN i.6 (jūta˚, see DA i.85) iii.42 sq., 236; MN i.151; SN i.18, SN i.20, SN i.25, SN i.146, SN i.216; SN ii.43 SN ii.193; SN iv.78, SN iv.263; SN v.170, SN v.397; AN i.212 (surāmerayamajja˚) = SN ii.69; AN i.16 sq.; AN ii.40; AN iii.6, AN iii.421, AN iii.449 AN iv.195, AN iv.294, AN iv.350; AN v.310, AN v.361; Snp 156, Snp 157 (gloss pamadā cp. Snp-a 203), 334, 942, 1033; Dhp 21, Dhp 30 sq., 167 (= satiossagga-lakkhaṇa p. Dhp-a iii.163), 241, 371; Thag 1245 = SN i.193; Iti 86; Nd i.423 = Nd ii.405; Pts ii.8 sq. 169 sq., 197; Pp 11, Pp 12; Ne 13, Ne 41; Mil 289 (māna atimāna mada + ); Snp-a 339 (= sati-vippavāsa); Dhp-a i.228; Pv-a 16 (pamādena out of carelessness); Sdhp 600appamāda earnestness, vigilance, zeal DN iii.236; SN i.158; SN ii.29; Dhp 21.

-pāṭha careless reading (in the text) Nett Ṭ. (see introd. xi. n. 1); Kp-a 207; Pv-a 25.

cp. Vedic pramāda, pa + mad

Pamādavatā

(f.) remissness AN i.139.

abstr. fr. pamāda + vant, adj.

Pamādin

(adj.) infatuating, exciting, in phrase citta˚ Thig 357 (trsln “leading to ferment of the mind”; vv.ll. ˚pamaddin & ˚pamāthin, thus “crushing the heart,” cp. Thag-a 243).

fr. pamāda

Pamāya1

having measured, measuring Snp 894 (sayaṃ p. = paminitvā Nd i.303) Ja iii.114.

ger. of pamināti i.e. pa +

Pamāya2

crushing, destroying Snp 209 (bījaṃ; = hiṃsitva vadhitvā Snp-a 257). See on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 45.

ger. of pamināti i.e. pa + mṛ; Sk. pramārya of pramṛṇāti

Pamāyin

(adj.) measuring, estimating, defining SN i.148 (appameyyaṃ p. “who to th’ illimitable limit lays” trsl.; corresponds with paminanto).

fr. pa +

Pamāreti

to strike dead, maltreat, hurt Dhp-a iii.172.

pa + māreti, Caus. of mṛ; marati to die

Pamināti

to measure estimate, define AN iii.349, AN iii.351; AN v.140, AN v.143; Sdhp 537-ppr. paminanto SN i.148; inf. paminituṃ Vv-a 154 ger. paminitvā Nd i.303, and pamāya (q.v.); grd paminitabba Vv-a 278; aor. 3rd sg. pāmesi Ja v.299 Ja v.3rd pl. pamiṃsu AN ii.71; Thag 469 (pāmiṃsu).

pa + mināti to with pres. formation fr. mi, after Sk. minoti; see also anumināti

Pamilāta

faded, withered, languished Mil 303.

pp. of pa + mlā

Pamukha1

(adj.) lit. “in front of the face,” fore-part, first, foremost, chief prominent SN i.234, SN i.235; Snp 791 (v.l. BB and Nd i.92 for pamuñca); Ja v.5, Ja v.169. loc. pamukhe as adv. or prep. “before” SN i.227 (asurindassa p.; v.l. sammukhe); Vism 120. As-˚ having as chief, headed by with NN at the head DN ii.97; SN i.79 (Pasenadi˚ rājāno) Pv-a 74 (setacchatta˚ rājakakudhabhaṇḍa); freq. in phrase Buddha˚ bhikkhusangha, e.g. Vin i.213; Snp p.111; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 20. Cp. pāmokkha.

pa + mukha, cp. late Sk. pramukha

Pamukha2

(nt.) 1. eyebrow (?) only in phrase alāra˚ with thick eyebrows or lashes Ja vi.503 (but expld by C. as “visāl’ akkhigaṇḍa); Pv-a 189 (for aḷāra-pamha Pv iii.35). Perhaps we should read pakhuma instead.

identical with pamukha1, lit. “in front of the face,” i.e. frontside, front

Pamuccati

Pass. of pamuñcati (q.v.).

Pamucchita

1. swooning, in a faint, fainting (with hunger) Pv iii.18 (= khuppipāsādidukkhena sañjāta-mucchā Pv-a 174); iv.108.

2. infatuated SN i.187 (v.l.; T. samucchita) = Thag 1219; Ja iii.441.

pa + mucchita

Pamuñca

loosening, setting free or loose, in cpd. ˚kara deliverer SN i.193 = Thag 1242 (bandhana˚)-adj. dup˚; difficult to be freed SN i.77;Snp 773; Dhp 346; Ja ii.140.

fr. pa + muc

Pamuñcati

1. to let loose, give out, emit Snp 973 (vācaṃ; = sampamuñcati Nd i.504) Ja i.216 (aggiṃ).

2. to shake off, give up, shed Dhp 377 (pupphāni). Perhaps also in phrase saddhaṃ p. to renounce one’s faith, although the interpretation is doubtful (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 46 sq. & cp; Dial. ii.33) Vin i.7 = DN ii.39 = SN i.138 (C. vissajjati, as quoted KS p. 174).

3. to deliver, free Snp 1063 (kathan kathāhi = mocehi uddhara etc. Nd ii.407a), 1146 (pamuñcassu = okappehi etc. Nd ii.407b) ■ Pass. pamuccati to be delivered or freed SN i.24, SN i.173; Snp 80 Snp 170 sq. (dukkhā); Dhp 189 (sabbadukkhā), 276 (fut pamokkhati), 291 (dukkhā), 361 ■ pp. pamutta (q.v.)-Caus. pamoceti to remove, liberate, deliver, set free SN i.143, SN i.154, SN i.210; Thig 157 (dukkhā); Cp ii.75; iii.103 sq. Caus. II. pamuñcāpeti to cause to get loose DN-a i.138.

pa + muñcati of muc

Pamuṭṭha

being or having forgotten Vin i.213; Pts i.173 (a˚); Ja iii.511 (T. spells pamm˚) iv.307 (id.); Mil 77. Cp. parimuṭṭha.

pp. of pamussati

Pamutta

1. let loose, hurled Ja vi.360 (papātasmiṃ).

2. liberated, set free SN i.154; Snp 465 Snp 524 sq.

pp. of pamuñcati

Pamutti

(f.) setting free, release SN i.209; Thig 248; Ja iv.478; Ne 131 (= SN i.209; but read pamutty atthi); Pv-a 103 (dukkhato).

fr. pa + muc

Pamudita

(& ˚modita) greatly delighted, very pleased MN i.37; SN i.64; AN iii.21 sq.; Snp 512; Ja iii.55; DN-a i.217, Thag-a 71; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 132 ■ Spelt pamodita at Snp 681, Ja i.75; Ja v.45 (āmodita + ).

pp. of pamodati

Pamuyhati

to become bewildered or infatuated Ja vi.73 ■ pp. pamūḷha (q.v.).

pa + muyhati of muh

Pamussati

to forget Ja iii.132, Ja iii.264 (pamajjati + ); iv.147, 251 ■ pamuṭṭha (q.v.).

pa + mṛṣ, Sk. mṛṣyati = P. *mussati

Pamūḷha

bewildered, infatuated Snp 774; Nd i.36 (= sammūḷha), 193 (+ sammūḷha).

pp. of pamuyhati

Pameyya

(-˚) (adj.) to be measured, measurable, only in foll. cpd appameyya not to be measured, illimitable, unfathomable SN i.148; SN v.400; MN iii.71, MN iii.127; AN i.266; Vv 3419 (= paminituṃ asakkhuṇeyya Vv-a 154); 377 (expld as before at Vv-a 169); duppameyya hard to be gauged or measured AN i.266; Pp 35; opp. suppameyya ibid.

grd. of pamināti, like Epic Sk. prameya

Pamokkha

1. discharging, launching, letting loose, gushing out; in phrases itivāda˚ pouring out gossip MN i.133; SN v.73; AN ii.26; DN-a i.21; and caravāda˚ id. SN iii.12; SN v.419.

2. release deliverance SN i.2; Pv-a 103 (pamutti + ); abl pamokkhā for the release of, i.e. instead of (gen. Ja v.30 (pituno p. = pamokkha-hetu C.).

fr. pa + muc, see pamuñcati

Pamocana

(adj. n.) loosening, setting free; deliverance, emancipation SN i.172 = Snp 78; AN ii.24, AN ii.37 AN ii.49 sq.; Snp 166 (maccupāsā, abl. = from), 1064 (pamocanāya dat. = pamocetuṃ Nd2); Iti 104 (Nibbānaṃ sabbagantha ˚ṃ). At Dhp 274 we should read pamohanaṃ for pamocanaṃ.

fr. pa + muc

Pamoceti

Caus. of pamuñcati (q.v.).

Pamoda

joy, delight Sdhp 528, Sdhp 563. See also pāmojja.

fr. pa + mud, cp. Vedic pramoda

Pamodati

to rejoice, enjoy, to be delighted, to be glad or satisfied SN i.182; AN iii.34 (so read for ca modati); Dhp 16, Dhp 22; Pv i.113, 115; Vv-a 278 (= āmodati)-Caus. pamodeti id. Sdhp 248 ■ pp. pamudita (pamodita); (q.v.). Cp. abhippamodati.

pa + mud

Pamodanā

(f.) delight, joy, satisfaction Dhs 9, Dhs 86, Dhs 285 (āmodanā + ).

fr. pa + mud

Pamoha

bewilderment, infatuation, fascination Snp 841 (v.l. Nd i.sammoha) Nd i.193 (+ sammoha andhakāra); Ja vi.358; Ja vi.358 Pp 21; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061.

pa + muh, cp. Epic Sk. pramoha

Pamohana

deceiving, deception, delusion Dhp 274 (T. reads pamocana; Dhp-a iii.403 expls by vañcana).

fr. pa + muh

Pampaka

a loris (Abhp. 618) i.e. an ape; but probably meant for a kind of bird (cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.) Ja vi.538 (C. reads pampuka & expl;s by pampaṭaka).

etym? Cp. Sk. pampā Name of a river (or lake), but cp. ref. in BR. under pampā varaṇ-ādi

Pamha

(nt.) [the syncope form of pakhuma = Sk. pakṣman used in poetry and always expld in C. by pakhuma eye-lash, usually in cpd. aḷāra˚; having thick eyelashes e.g. at Ja v.215; Vv 357; 6411; Pv iii.35; asāyata˚ at Thig 383.

Pamhayati

to laugh; Caus. pamhāpeti to make somebody laugh Ja v.297 (= parihaseti C.), where it is syn. with the preceding umhāpeti.

pa + smi, Sk. prasmayate

Paya

(nt.) milk, juice Ja i.204; Ja vi.572.

Ved. payas, nt, of

Payacchati

to offer, present, give Dpvs xi.28; Pgdp 63, Pgdp 72, Pgdp 77 sq ■ pp. payata (q.v.).

pa + yacchati of yam

Payata

restrained, composed, purified, pure DN i.103 (= abhiharitvā dinna); AN iii.313; Thag 348, Thag 359 (˚atta); Iti 101 (˚pāṇin) = Mil 215; Snp 240 (= sakkāra-karaṇena p. alankata Snp-a 284); Vism 224 (˚pāṇin = parisuddha-hattha); Sdhp 100.

pp. of payacchati

Payatana

(nt.) striving after, effort, endeavour Kp-a 108.

cp. Sk. prayatna, of yat

Payatta

making effort, taking care, being on one’s guard, careful Mil 373.

pp. of pa + yat

Payāta

gone forth, set out, proceeded Pv iv.56 (= gantuṃ āraddha Pv-a 260); Ja iii.188, Ja iii.190 Strange is “evaṃ nānappayātamhi” at Thag 945 (Mrs Rh. D. “thus when so much is fallen away”; Neumann “in solcher Drangsal, solcher Not”) ■ duppayāta going or gone wrong, strayed Vv 849 (= duṭṭhu payātha apathe gata Vv-a 337).

pp. of payāti

Payāti

to go forward, set out, proceed, step out, advance, only aor pāyāsi Ja i.146, Ja i.223, Ja i.255; Ja i.3rd pl pāyiṃsu Ja i.253 and pāyesuṃ Ja iv.220 ■ pp. payāta (q.v.). See also pāyāti.

pa +

Payirudāharati

to speak out, to proclaim aor payirudāhāsi DN ii.222 (vaṇṇe); Ja i.454 (vyañjanaṃ).

pari + ud + āharati with metathesis payir˚ for pariy˚

Payirupāsati

1. “to sit close round,” i.e. to attend on (acc.), to honour, pay homage, worship DN i.47; DN ii.257; MN ii.117, SN i.146; AN i.124, AN i.126, AN i.142; AN iv.337; Dhp 64 Dhp 65; Thag 1236; Ja vi.222 (imper. ˚upāsaya); Pv ii.961 Pp 26, Pp 33; Snp-a 401; Vb-a 457 (here defd by Bdhgh as “punappunaṃ upasankamati”) ■ ppr. ˚upāsanto SN v.67 = Iti 107; Pv-a 44; and upāsamāna Dhp-a ii.32-aor. ˚upāsiṃ AN iv.213 (Bhagavantaṃ); Pv-a 50. ger. ˚upāsiya DN ii.287.

2. to visit Vin i.214 (ger ˚upāsitvā ); iv.98 ■ pp. payirupāsiṭa (q.v.).

pari + upa + ās, with metathesis as in payirudāharati

Payirupāsana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) attending to, worshipping: worship, homage MN ii.176; SN v.67; Iti 107; DN-a i.142; Pv-a 138.

fr. payirupāsati

Payirupāsika

a worshipper Thag-a 200.

fr. payirupāsati

Payirupāsita

worshipped Pv-a 116 (= upaṭṭhita), 205 (= purakkhata).

pp. of payirupāsati

Payuñjati

to harness, yoke, employ, apply; Pass. payujjati to be applied to Sdhp 400 (ppr. ˚māna )-pp. payutta (q.v.) ■ Caus. payojeti (q.v.).

pa + yuj

Payuta

(wrongly) applied, at random, careless “misdirected” AN i.199; Snp 711 (˚ṃ vācaṃ = obhāsaparikathā-nimitta-viññatti-payuttaṃ ghāsesana-vācaṃ Snp-a 497), 930 (= cīvarādīhi sampayutta tadatthaṃ vā payojita Snp-a 565; Nd i.389 however reads payutta and expls as “cīvarapayutta” etc.).

pp. of pa + yu, cp. Sk. pra + yuta united, fastened to, increased

Payutta

1. yoked Snp p.13 (= yottehi yojita Snp-a 137).

2. applied, intent on, devoted to busy in (acc., loc., or-˚) Ja v.121 (ajjhattaṃ); Pv iii.710 (sāsane); Snp-a 497 (viññatti˚).

3. applicable (either rightly or wrongly); as su˚ well-behaved, acting well Mil 328; by itself (in bad sense), wrongly applied wasted (cp. payuta) AN ii.81 sq.; Snp 930 (see Nd i.389)

4. planned, schemed, undertaken Vin ii.194 (Deva dattena Bhagavato vadho p.).

pp. of payuñjati

Payuttaka

(adj. n.) one who is applied or put to a (bad) task, as spy, hireling; bribed Ja i.262 (˚cora), 291 (˚dhutta).

payutta + ka

Payoga

1. means, instrument Ja vi.116 (= karaṇa ); Snp-a 7; Dhs-a 215 (sa˚).

2. preparation, undertaking, occupation exercise, business, action, practice Vin iv.278; Pts ii.213 (sammā˚); Mil 328 (sammā˚); Kp-a 23, Kp-a 29 sq. Pv-a 8 (vapana˚), 96 (manta˚), 103, 146 (viññatti˚ cp. payutta 2), 285 (sakkhara-kkhipana˚). payogaṃ karoti to exert oneself, to undertake, to try Pv-a 184 (= parakkamati).

-karaṇa exertion, pursuit, occupation Dhp-a iii.238 -vipatti failure of means, wrong application Pv-a 117 Pv-a 136. -sampatti success of means Vv-a 30, Vv-a 32. -suddhi excellency of means, purity in application Dhs-a 165; Vv-a 60. -hīna deficient in exertion or application Mil 288.

Vedic prayoga, fr. pa + yuj, see payuñjati

Payogatā

(f.) application (to) Vism 134 (majjhatta˚).

fr. payoga

Payojana

(nt.) 1. undertaking, business Pv-a 201.

2. appointment Ja i.143.

3. prescript injunction Dhs-a 403.

4. purpose, application, use Sdhp 395.

fr. pa + yuj

Payojita

1 connected with, directed to, applied Snp-a 565.

2. instigated, directed Mil 3.

pp. of payojeti

Payojeti

1. to undertake, engage in, begin DN i.71 (kammante “set a business on foot”) AN ii.82 (kammantaṃ); Snp 404 (vaṇijjaṃ); Ja i.61; Pv-a 130 (kammaṃ).

2. to prepare, apply, use, put to, employ Pv-a 46 (bhesajjaṃ cuṇṇena saddhiṃ). 3. to engage, take into service, set to, hire Ja i.173 Ja ii.417.

4. to engage with, come to close quarters J. ii.10.

5. to put out at interest (vaḍḍhiyā) DN-a i.270 ■ pp. payojita (q.v.).

Caus. of payuñjati

Payyaka

(paternal) great-grandfather Ja i.2 (ayyaka˚); Pv-a 107 (id.).

pa + ayyaka

Para

(adv ■ adj.) 1. (adv. & prep.) beyond, on the further side of (with abl. or loc.), over Pv-a 168 (para Gangāya, v.l. ˚āyaṃ). See in same meaning & application paraṃ, paro and parā & cp. cpds. like paraloka

2. (adj.) para follows the pron. declension; cases sg. nom. paro Snp 879, acc. paraṃ Snp 132, Snp 185, gen. dat parassa Snp 634; Pv ii.919, instr. parena Pv-a 116, loc paramhi Snp 634, and pare Pv ii.943; pl. nom. pare Dhp 6, acc. pare Dhp 257; Pv-a 15, gen. dat. paresaṃ DN i.3 Thag 743; Ja i.256; Snp 818, instr. parehi Snp 240, Snp 255; Pv-a 17 ■ Meanings: (a) beyond, i.e. “higher” in space (like Ved. para as opp. to avara lower), as well as “further” in time (i.e. future, to come, or also remote past: see loc. pare under c.), freq. in phrase paro loko the world beyond, the world (i.e. life) to come, the beyond or future life (opp. ayaṃ loko) Snp 185 (asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ na socati), 634 (asmiṃ loke paramhi ca); Dhp 168 (paramhi loke); Pv ii.83 (id. = paraloke Pv-a 107); but also in other combn, like santi-para (adj. higher than calm Dhp 202. Cp. paraloka, paraṃ and paro ■ (b) another, other, adj. as well as n., pl. others Snp 396 (parassa dāraṃ nâtikkameyya), 818 (paresaṃ cp. Nd i.150); Dhp 160 (ko paro who else), 257 (pare others); Pv ii.919 (parassa dānaṃ); ii.943 (pare, loc. paramhi parassa Pv-a 130); Dhp-a iv.182 (gen. pl.); Pv-a 15, Pv-a 60 (paresaṃ dat.), 103, 116, 253 (parassa purisassa & paraṃ purisaṃ). Often contrasted with and opposed to attano (one’s own, oneself), e.g. at MN i.200 (paraṃ vambheti attānaṃ ukkaṃseti); Snp 132 (attānaṃ samukkaṃse paraṃ avajānāti); Ja i.256 (paresaṃ, opp. attanā) Nd ii.26 (att-attha opp. par-attha, see cpds. ˚ajjhāsaya & ˚attha) ■ paro… paro “the one… the other” DN i.224 (kiṃ hi paro parassa karissati); paro paraṃ one another Snp 148 (paro paraṃ nikubbetha). In a special sense we find pare pl. in the meaning of “the others,” i.e. outsiders, aliens (to the religion of the Buddha), enemies, opponents (like Vedic pare DN i.2 (= paṭiviruddhā sattā DN-a i.51); Vin i.349; Dhp 6 ■ (c) some oblique cases in special meaning and used as adv.: paraṃ acc. sg. m. see under cpds., like parantapa; as nt. adv. see sep. In phrase puna ca paraṃ would be better read puna c’ aparaṃ (see apara)- parena (instr.) later on, afterwards Ja iii.395 (= aparena samayena C.) ■ pare (loc.); cp. Gr. παραί at; Lat prae before; Goth. faúra = E, for, old dat. of *per) in the past, before, yet earlier Ja ii.279 (where it continues ajja and hiyyo, i.e. to-day and yesterday, and refers to the day before yesterday. Similarly at Vin iv.63 pare is contrasted with ajja & hiyyo; and may mean “in future,” or “the day before yesterday.” It is of interest to notice the Ved. use of pare as “in the future opp. to adya & śvas); Ja iii.423 (the day before yesterday). At Dhp-a i.253 (sve vā pare vā) and iv.170 in the sense of “on the day after tomorrow.”- parā (only apparently abl., in reality either para + a˚ which represents the vocalic beginning of the second part of the cpd., or para + ā which is the directional prefix ā emphasizing para. The latter expln is more in the spirit of the Pali language): see separately. -paro (old abl. as adv. = Sk. paras) beyond further: see sep- parato (abl.) in a variety of expressions and shades of meaning, viz. (1) from another, as regards others AN iii.337 (attano parato ca); Ne 8 (ghosa), 50 (id.)-(2) from the point of view of “otherness,” i.e. as strange or something alien, as an enemy MN i.435 (in “anicca”-passage); AN iv.423; Nd ii.214ii; Pts ii.238 Kv 400; Mil 418 and passim; in phrase parato disvā “seen as not myself” Thag 1160; Thag 2, Thag 101; SN i.188 (sankhāre parato passa, dukkhato mā ca attato). (3) on the other side of, away from, beyond Ja ii.128; Pv-a 24 (kuḍḍānaṃ) ■ (4) further, afterwards, later on SN i.34; Ja i.255; Ja iv.139; Snp-a 119, Snp-a 482Note. The compounds with para˚ are combinations either with para 1 (adv. prep.), or para 2 (adj. n.). Those containing para in form parā and in meaning “further on to” see separately under parā˚. See also pāra, pārima etc.

-ajjhāsaya intent on others (opp. att˚) Snp-a 46 -attha (parattha, to be distinguished from adv. parattha q.v. sep.) the profit or welfare of another (opp. attattha) SN ii.29; AN iii.63; Dhp 166; Nd ii.26. -ādhīna dependent on others DN i.72 (= paresu adhīno parass’ eva ruciyā pavattati DN-a i.212); Ja vi.99; Thag-a 15 (˚vuttika) Vv-a 23 (˚vutti, paresaṃ bhāraṃ vahanto). -ūpakkama aggression of an enemy, violence Vin ii.194. -ūpaghāta injuring others, cruelty Vv 8440. -ūpaghātin killing others Dhp 184 (= paraṃ upahananto p. Dhp-a iii.237). -ūpavāda reproaching others Snp 389. -kata see paraṅkata ■ kamma service of others, ˚kārin serving others Vv 3322. -kāra see below under parankāra. -kula clan of another, strange or alien clan Snp 128; Dhp 73 -kkanta [para˚ or parā˚ *krānta?] walked (by another or gone over?) Ja vi.559 (better to be read with v.l. on p. 560 as pada˚ i.e. walked by feet, footprint) -kkama (parā + kram ] exertion, endeavour, effort strife DN i.53; DN iii.113; SN i.166 (daḷha˚); ii.28 (purisa˚) v.66, 104 sq.; AN i.4, AN i.50 (purisa˚); iv.190; Snp 293; Dhp 313; Nd i.487; Ja i.256; Ja ii.153; Dhs 13, Dhs 12, Dhs 289, Dhs 571; Mil 244; Dhp-a iv.139; Sdhp 253; adj. (-˚) sacca˚ one who strives after the truth Ja iv.383. -kkamati [*parakramati] to advance, go forward, exert oneself, undertake show courage Snp 966 (ger. parakkamma); Dhp 383 (id.); Pv iii.213 (imper. parakkāma, v.l. parakkama) Pp 19, Pp 23; Pv-a 184 (= payogaṃ karoti); Sdhp 439 -kkaroti [either for parā + kṛ; or more likely paras + kṛ; cp. paro] lit. “to put on the opposite side,” i.e. to remove, do away with Ja iv.26 (corresponding to apaneti C. explns as “parato kāreti,” taking parato in the sense of para 2 c 3), 404 (mā parākari = mā pariccaji C.) -gatta alien body, trsl. “limbs that are not thou Thag 1150. -gavacaṇḍa violent against the cows of another AN ii.109 = Pp 47 (opp. sakagavacaṇḍa, cp PugA 226: yo attano gogaṇaṃ ghaṭṭeti, paragogaṇe pana so rato sukhasīlo hoti etc.). -(n)kata made by something or somebody else, extra-self, extraneous, alien SN i.134 (nayidaṃ attakataṃ bimbaṃ nayidaṃ parakataṃ aghaṃ); with ref. to loka & dukkha and opposed to; sayankata DN iii.137 sq.; SN ii.19 sq., 33 sq., 38 sq. Ud 69 sq. -(n)kāra condition of otherness, other people, alienity Ud 70 (opp. ahankara selfhood). -citta the mind or heart of others AN v.160. -jana a stranger enemy, demon, fig. devil (cp. Sk. itarajana) MN i.153, MN i.210 -tthaddha [parā + tthaddha] propped against, founded on, relying on (with loc.) Ja vi.181 (= upatthadda C.) -tthabbha is to be read for ˚tthambha at Ja iv.313, in meaning = ˚tthaddha (kismiṃ). -dattūpajīvin living on what is given by others, dependent on another’s gift Snp 217; Mil 294. -davutta see sep. under parada -dāra the wife of another, somebody else’s wife MN i.87; AN ii.71 AN ii.191; Snp 108, Snp 242 (˚sevanā); Dhp 246, Dhp 309 (˚upasevin, cp Dhp-a iii.482); Ja vi.240; Dhp-a iii.481 (˚kamma). -dārika (better to be read as pāra˚) an adulterer SN ii.188, SN ii.259; Ja iii.43. -dhammika “of someone else’s norm,” one who follows the teaching of another, i.e. of an heretic teacher Snp 965 (Nd i.485: p˚ ā vuccanti satta sahadhammika ṭhapetvā ye keci Buddhe appasannā dhamme appa nnā, sanghe appasannā). -niṭṭhita made ready by others SN i.236. -nimmita “created by another,” in ˚vasavattin having power under control of another, Name of a class of Devas (see deva) DN i.216 sq. AN i.210; Iti 94; Pp 51; DN-a i.114, DN-a i.121; Kp-a 128; Vv-a 79. -neyya to be led by another, under another’s rule Snp 907 Nd i.321 (= parapattiya parapaccaya) -(n)tapa worrying or molesting another person (opp attantapa) DN iii.232; MN i.341, MN i.411; MN ii.159; Pp 56 -paccaya resting, relying, or dependent on someone else Nd i.321; usually neg. a˚ independent of another Vin i.12, Vin i.181 and passim. -pattiya = prec. Nd i.321. -pāṇa other living beings Snp 220. -puggala other people DN iii.108. -putta somebody else’s son AN iv.169; Snp 43 -pessa serving others, being a servant Snp 615 (= paresaṃ veyyāvacca Snp-a 466). -pessiyā a female servant or messenger, lit. to be sent by others Ja iii.413 (= parehi pesitabbā pesanakārikā C.). -ppavāda [cp. BSk. parapravādin “false teacher” Divy 202] disputation with another, challenge, opposition in teaching (appld to Non-Buddhistic systems) SN v.261; AN ii.238; Mil 170 Mil 175. -bhāga outer part, precinct part beyond Pv-a 24 -bhuta [Sk. parabhṛta] the Indian cuckoo (lit. brought up by another) Ja v.416 (so read for parābhūta). -bhojana food given by others Snp 366 (= parehi dinnaṃ saddhādeyyaṃ Snp-a 364). -loka [cpd. either with para 1. or para 2. It is hardly justified to assume a metaphysical sense, or to take para as temporal in the sense of paraṃ (cp. paraṃmaraṇā after death), i.e. the future world or the world to come] the other world, the world beyond (opp. ayaṃ loko this world or idhaloka the world here, see on term Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 29 sq. DN i.27, DN i.58, DN i.187; DN ii.319; SN i.72, SN i.138; Snp 579, Snp 666, Snp 1117 Nd i.60; Nd ii.214 (v.l. for paloka in anicca-passage) 410 (= manussalokaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbo paraloko); Pts i.121; Vv 845 (= narakaṃ hi sattānaṃ ekantânatthatāya parabhūto paṭisattubhūto loko ti visesato paraloko ti Vv-a 335); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 60 (= pettivisaya parattha), 64, 107, 253 (idhalokato p. natthi); Snp-a 478 (= parattha); Sdhp 316, Sdhp 326, Sdhp 327. -vambhitā contempt of others MN i.19 (a˚). -vambhin contempting others MN i.19, MN i.527 -vasatta power (over others) Dāvs iv.19. -vāda (1 talk of others, public rumour SN i.4; Snp 819 (cp. Nd i.151) Snp-a 475. (2) opposition Mil 94 sq. -vādin opponent Mil 348. visaya the other world, realm of the Dead Hades Pv iv.87 (= pettivisaya Pv-a 268). -vediya to be known by others, i.e. heterodox DN ii.241; Snp 474 (= parehi ñāpetabba Snp-a 410). -sattā (pl.) other beings AN i.255 = AN iii.17 (+ parapuggalā). -suve on the day after tomorrow Dhp-a iv.170 (v.l. SS for pare, see para 2 c.). -sena a hostile army DN i.89 = DN ii.16 DN iii.59 = Snp p.106 ≈ (cp. DN-a i.250 = Snp-a 450). -hattha the hand of the enemy Ja i.179. -hiṃsā hurting others Pv iii.73. -hita the good or welfare of others (opp. attahita) DN iii.233; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 163. -hetu on account of others, through others Snp 122 (attahetu + ) Pp 54.

fr. Idg. *per, *peri (cp. pari); Ved. para, parā, paraṃ; Lat. per through, Gr. πέρα & πέραν beyond; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under per & also pari pubba, pura, purāṇa

Paraṃ

(param˚) (adv.) further, away (from); as prep. (w. abl.) after, beyond; absolute only in phrase ito paraṃ from here, after this, further, e.g. Kp-a 131; Snp-a 160, Snp-a 178, Snp-a 412, Snp-a 512, Snp-a 549; Pv-a 83, Pv-a 90 also in tato paraṃ Ja iii.281.

-parā (f.) [adv. converted into a noun paraṃ + abl. of para] lit. “after the other,” i.e. succession, series Vin ii.110; Vin iv.77, Vin iv.78 (parampara-bhojana “taking food in succession,” successive feeding, see under bhojana, and cp. C. at Vin iv.77, Vin iv.78 and Vin Texts i.38); DN i.239; MN i.520; AN ii.191 (paramparāya in phrase anussavena p. itikirāya, as at Nd ii.151); Bv i.79; Ja i.194; Ja iv.35 (expld by C. as purisa˚, viz. a series of husbands, but probably misunderstood, Kern, Toev. s. v. interperts as “defamation, ravishing”); Ne 79 (˚parahetu); Mil 191, Mil 276; Dhs-a 314; Snp-a 352; Dhp-a i.49 (sīsa˚). -maraṇā (adv.) after death; usually in combn with kāyassa bhedā p. after the dissolution of the body, i.e. after death SN i.231; DN i.245; Pv-a 27 Pv-a 133; absolutely only in phrase hoti Tathāgato p. DN i.188 DN i.192; AN v.193. -mukhā (adv.) in one’s absence, lit with face turned away (opp. sammukhā in presence, thus at Ja iii.263 where parammukhā corresponds to raho and sam˚ to āvi; Pv-a 13) DN i.230 (parammukhin?) Dhp-a ii.109.

orig. nt. of para

Parajjhati

see parājeti.

Parattha

(adv.) elsewhere, hereafter, in the Beyond, in the other world SN i.20; Snp 661 = Iti 42 = Dhp 306; Dhp 177; Ja ii.417; Pv i.1110 (= paraloke Pv-a 60); iii.120 (= samparāye Pv-a 177) Snp-a 478 (= paraloke).

Vedic parastāt beyond

Parada

(adj.) finding pleasure in, fond of, only in two (doubtful cpds. viz. ˚vutta [unexpld, perhaps v for y, as daya → dava through influence of d in parada˚; thus = parata yutta?] “fond of being prepared,” adapted, apt, active alert; only in one stock phrase (which points to this form as being archaic and probably popular etymology, thus distorting its real derivation), viz. appossukka pannaloma + Vin ii.184 (Vin. Texts iii.232 trsl. “secure,” cp. Vin ii.363); MN i.450; MN ii.121 (v.l. BB paradatta˚),-and ˚samācāra living a good (active) life MN i.469.

for uparada (?) = uparata, pp. of upa + ram

Parama

(adj.) highest, most excellent, superior, best paraphrased by agga seṭṭha visiṭṭha at Nd ii.502 A Nd i.84, Nd i.102 (the latter reading viseṭṭha for visiṭṭha); by uttama at Dhp-a iii.237; Vv-a 78DN i.124 (ettaka˚) MN ii.120 (˚nipacca); SN i.166; SN ii.277; SN v.230; AN v.64 (˚diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna); Snp 138 (yasaṃ paramaṃ patto), 296 (˚ā mittā), 788 (suddhaṃ ˚ṃ arogaṃ), 1071 (saññāvimokhe ˚e vimutto); Dhp 184 (nibbānaṃ ˚ṃ vadanti Buddhā). 203, 243; Vv 161 (˚alankata paramaṃ ativiya visesato Vv-a 78) Pv ii.910 (˚iddhi) Pp 15, Pp 16, Pp 66; Snp-a 453 (˚issara); Pv-a 12 (˚nipacca) 15 (˚duggandha), 46 ■ At the end of a cpd. (-˚) “at the outmost, at the highest, at most; as a minimum at least” Vin iv.263 (dvangula-pabba˚); esp. freq. in phrase sattakkhattu˚; one who will be reborn seven times at the outmost, i.e. at the end of the 7 rebirthinterval SN ii.185 (sa˚); v.205; AN i.233; AN iv.381; AN v.120; Iti 18; Kv 469. See pāramī & pāramitā.;

-attha [cp. class. Sk. paramārtha] the highest good ideal; truth in the ultimate sense, philosophical truth (cp. Kvu trsl. 180; J.P.T.S. 1914, 129 sq.; Cpd. 6, 81) Arahantship Snp 68 (= vuccati Amataṃ Nibbānaṃ etc Nd ii.409), 219 (˚dassin); Nd ii.26; Mil 19, Mil 31; ˚dīpanī Exposition of the Highest Truth, Name of the Commentary on Th, Vv and Pv; mentioned e.g. at Pv-a 71 ˚jotikā id., Name of the C. on Kp and Sn, mentioned e.g. at Kp-a 11 ■ As ˚-, in instr. and abl. used adverbially in meaning of “in the highest sense, absolutely κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν, primarily, ideally, in an absolute sense, like ˚pāramī Bv i.77 ˚visuddhi AN v.64; ˚saññita Thig 210; ˚suñña Pts ii.184; ˚suddhi Snp-a 528; abl. paramatthato Mil 28; Vv-a 24 (manusso), 30 (bhikkhu), 72 (jīvitindriyaṃ); Pv-a 146 (pabbajito, corresponding to anavasesato), 253 (na koci kiñci hanati = not at all) instr. paramatthena Mil 71 (vedagū), 268 (sattûpaladdhi). -gati the highest or best course of life or future exsitence Vv 3512 (= anupādisesa-nibbāna Vv-a 164).

Vedic parama; superl. formation of para, lit. “farthest,” cp. similarly, although fr. diff. base Lat. prīmus

paramajja-dhamma

the most influential or ruling doctrine MN iii.7.

cp. Vedic parama-jyā

Paramatā

(f.) the highest quantity, measure on the outside minimum or maximum DN i.60 (ghāsa-cchādana-paramatāya santuṭṭho contented with a minimum of food & clothing; DN-a i.169 expls by uttamatāya); MN i.10 (abyābajjha˚); SN i.82 (nāḷik’ odana-paramatāya on a nāḷi of boiled rice at the most); freq. in phrase sattakkhattuṃ p. interval of seven rebirths at the outside (cp. parama), being reborn seven times at the most SN ii.134 sq.; SN v.458; Kv 469 (cp. Kvu trsl. 2683).

fr. parama, Vedic paramatā highest position

Parasupahāra

at SN v.441 is to be corrected to pharasu˚.

Parā˚

(prefix) prep meaning “on to,” “over” (with the idea of mastering) also “through, throughout.” The ā is shortened before double consonant, like parā + kṛ; = parakkaroti, parā kram = parakkamati (see under cpds. of para).

para + ā, not instr. of para: see para 2 c; in some cases it may also correspond to paraṃ˚

Parākaroti

see parakkaroti (paraṃ˚? or parā?).

Parājaya

1. defeat DN i.10; Ja vi.209; Vv-a 139.

2. defeat in game, loss, losing at play SN i.149 (dhana˚) = AN v.171 = Snp 659; Ja vi.234 (˚gāha sustainment of a loss).

parā + ji, opp. of jaya

Parājita

defeated, having suffered a loss Vin iv.5; SN i.224; AN iv.432; Snp 440, Snp 681; Dhp 201 (= parena parājito Dhp-a iii.259, where Bdhgh takes it evidently as instr. of para = parā); Ja i.293; Ja ii.160 (sahassaṃ), 403.

pp. of parājeti

Parājeti

to defeat, conquer; in gambling: to make lose, beat Pv-a 151 (sahassaṃ p by 1,000 coins) ■ aor. parāji in 3rd pl. ˚jiṃsu, only in one stock phrase referring to the battle of the Gods Titans, viz. at DN ii.285 = MN i.253 (˚jiniṃsu) = SN i.221 SN i.224 (v.l. ˚jiniṃsu) = AN iv.432 (˚jiyiṃsu, with v.l. ˚jiniṃsu), where a Pass. is required (“were defeated lost”) in opp. to jiniṃsu, and the reading ˚jiyiṃsu as aor. pass. is to be preferred ■ Pass. ˚jīyati to be defeated, to suffer defeat SN i.221 (Pot. parājeyya, but form is Active); Ja i.290; and parajjhati (1st pl. parajjhāma) Ja ii.403; aor. parājiyi: see above parāji ■ pp parājita (q.v.).

parā + jeti of ji, cp. jayati

Parābhava

defeat, destruction, ruin, disgrace SN ii.241; AN ii.73; AN iv.26; Snp 91–⁠115; Ja iii.331; Snp-a 167.

fr. parā + bhu Vedic parābhava

Parābhavati

1. to go to ruin Snp 91 (= parihāyati vinassati).

2. to win through, to surpass Thag 1144 (cp. trsl. 3814) ■ pp. parābhūta (q.v.) See also parābhetvā.

parā + bhū

Parābhūta

ruined, fallen into disgrace MN ii.210 (avabhūta + ) ■ Note. parābhūta at Ja v.416 is to be read parabhuta (q.v.).

pp. of parābhavati

Parābhetvā

at Ja v.153 is not clear (C.: hadayaṃ bhinditvā olokento viya… ); perhaps we have here a reading parābh˚ for parāg˚ (as bheṇḍuka wrongly for geṇḍuka) which in its turn stands for parādhetvā (cp. similarly BSk. ārāgeti for ārādheti), thus meaning “propitiating.”

Parāmaṭṭha

touched, grasped, usually in bad sense: succumbing to, defiled, corrupted DN i.17 for a different, commentarial interpretation see Parāmāsa (evaṃ˚ so acquired or taken up; cp. DN-a i.107 nirāsanka-cittatāya punappuna āmaṭṭha); SN ii.94 Nd ii.152 (gahita p. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. gahessasi No 227); Dhs 584, Dhs 1177, Dhs 1500; Sdhp 332 ■ dup˚ wrongly grasped, misused SN i.49apparāmaṭṭha [cp. BSk aparāmṛṣta not affected Mptp. p. 84] untarnished incorrupt DN ii.80 (cp. Dial ii.85); iii.245; SN ii.70; AN iii.36.

pp. of parāmasati

Parāmasa

touching, seizing, taking hold of MN i.130 (v.l. ˚māsa which reading is probably to be preferred, cp. Trenckner on p. 541) SN iii.46 (v.l. ˚māsa) ■ neg. aparāmasa not leading astray, not enticing DN i.17 (˚to), 202 ■ Perhaps we should read parāmāsa altogether.

parā + mṛś, but see parāmāsa

Parāmasati

to touch, hold on to, deal with, take up, to be attached or fall a victim to (acc.) Vin ii.47, Vin ii.195, Vin ii.209; DN i.17; MN i.257; SN iii.110; Ja iv.138; in combn with gaṇhāti & nandati (abhiniveseti) at Nd;2 227 ■ ger. parāmassa DN ii.282; MN i.130, MN i.498 (but cp. p. 541); grd. parāmasitabba Ja i.188-pp. parāmaṭṭha (q.v.).

para + masati of mṛś

Parāmasana

(nt.) touching, seizing, taking up Nd ii.576 (daṇḍa-sattha˚); Dhs-a 239 (angapaccanga˚); Pv-a 159 (kiriyā˚).

fr. parāmasati

Parāmāsa

touching contact, being attached to, hanging on, being under the influence of, contagion (Dhs. trsl. 316). In Asl. 49, Bdhgh analyses as parato āmasantīti parāmāsā: p. means “they handle dhamma’s as other” (than what they really are e.g. they transgress the real meaning of anicca etc and say nicca). Hence the renderings in Asl. trs “Reversion,” in Dialogues iii.28, 43, etc. “perverted (parāmasāmi parāmaṭṭha)-S iii.46, 110; AN ii.42 (sacca˚); iii.377 (sīlabbata˚), 438 (id.); v.150 (sandiṭṭhi˚) DN iii.48; Thag 342; Iti 48 (itisacca˚, cp. idaṃsaccabhinivesa under kāyagantha); Pp 22; Dhs 381, Dhs 1003 Dhs 1175 (diṭṭhi˚ contagion of speculative opinion), 1498 (id.) It is almost synonymous with abhinivesa; see kāyagantha (under gantha), and cp. Nd ii.227 (gāha p abhinivesa) and Nd ii.under taṇhā iii. 1 C ■ See also parāmasa.

parā + mṛś, cp. Epic Sk. parāmarśa being affected by; as philos. term “reflection”

Parāmāsin

(adj.) grasping, seizing, perverting DN iii.48; MN i.43, MN i.96 (sandiṭṭhi˚). Parayana (Parayana)

fr. parāmāsa

Parāyana (Parāyaṇa)

(nt.) 1. (n.) final end, i.e. support, rest, relief SN i.38; AN i.155, AN i.156 (tāṇa lena dīpa etc.); Ja v.501 = Ja vi.375 (dīpañ ca p.).

2. (adj ■ ˚) (a) going through to, ending in, aiming at, given to, attached to, having one’s end or goal in; also: finding one’s support in (as daṇḍa leaning on a stick MN i.88; AN i.138), in foll. phrases prevalent: Amata˚ SN v.217 sq.; tama˚ Pp 51; Nibbāna SN iv.373; SN v.218; brahmacariya˚ SN i.234; Maccu˚ SN v.217; sambodhi˚ DN i.156; DN ii.155; Pp 16. Cp. also Snp 1114 (tap˚ = tad˚, see Nd ii.411); Mil 148 (ekantasoka˚); Dhp-a i.28 (rodana, i.e. constantly weeping). (b) destined to, having one’s next birth in., e.g. Avīci Ja iii.454; Ja iv.159; duggati˚ Pv-a 32; devaloka˚ Ja i.218 brahmaloka˚ Ja iii.396; Mil 234; sagga˚ Ja vi.329; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 160; sugati˚ Pv-a 89 similarly nīlamañca˚ Pv ii.25. See also pārāyana.

fr. parā + i, cp. Vedic parāyaṇa highest instance, also BSk. parāyaṇa e.g. Divy 57, Divy 327

Parāyika

see sam˚.

Parāyin

(adj.) having one’s refuge or resort (in), being supported, only neg. aparāyinī (f.) without support Ja iii.386.

fr. parāyana

Pari˚

(indecl.) prefix, signifying (lit. around, round about; (fig.) all round, i.e. completely altogether. The use as prep. (with acc. = against, w abl. = from) has entirely disappeared in Pāli (but see below 1a). As adv. “all round” it is only found at Ja vi.198 (parī metri causa; combd with samantato). The composition form before vowels is pariy˚; which in combn with ud and upa undergoes metathesis, scil payir˚. Frequent combns with other preps. are pari + ā (pariyā˚) and pari + ava (pariyo˚); sampari˚; Close affinities of p. are the preps. adhi (cp. ajjhesati → pariyesati, ajjhogāhati → pariyogāhati) and abhi (cp abhirādheti → paritoseti, abhitāpa → paritāpa, abhipīḷita → pari˚, abhipūreti → pari˚, abhirakkhati → pari˚), cp also its relation to ā in var. combnsMeanings. 1. (lit. (a) away from, off (cp. Vedic pari as prep. c. abl.: ˚kaḍḍhati to draw over, seduce, ˚cheda cutting off restriction, ˚puñchati wipe off ■ (b) all round, round (expld by samantato, e.g. at Vism 271 in pallanka) ˚anta surrounded, ˚esati search round, ˚kiṇṇa covered all round (i.e. completely, cp. expln as “samantato ākiṇṇa”), ˚carati move round, ˚jana surrounding people ˚dhāvati run about, ˚dhovati wash all round, ˚paleti watch all round, fig. guard carefully, ˚bhamati roam about, ˚maṇḍala circular (round), ˚sā assembly (lit sitting round, of sad ).

2. (fig.) (a) quite, completely very much, κα ̓τ εςοξήν: ˚ādāna consummation, ˚āpanna gone completely into, ˚odāta very pure, ˚osāna complete end, ˚gūhati to hide well, ˚toseti satisfy very much ˚pūreti fulfil, ˚bhutta thoroughly enjoyed, ˚yañña supreme sacrifice, ˚suddha extremely clean ■ (b) too much, excessively (cp. ati˚ and adhi˚): ˚tāpeti torment excessively, ˚pakka over-ripe ■ A derivation (adv. from pari is parito (q.v.). On its relation to Sk. pariṣ see parikkhāra. A frequently occurring dialectical variant of pari˚ is pali˚; (q.v.) ■ Note. The expln of P Commentators as regards pari is “pariggahaṭṭho Pts i.176; “paricca” Snp-a 88; “parito” Vv-a 316; Pv-a 33.

Idg. *peri to verbal root *per, denoting completion of a forward movement (as in Sk. pṛ2 piparti. to bring across, promote; cp. Vedic pṛc to satisfy, pṛṇāti to fill, fulfill. See also P. para). Cp Vedic pari, Av. pairi, Gr. πέρι, Lat. per (also in adj per-magnus very great); Obulg. pariy round about Lith. per̃ through, Oir er-(intensifying prefix), Goth faír, Ohg. fir, far = Ger. ver-

Parikaḍḍhati

to draw over or towards oneself, to win over seduce DN ii.283 (purisaṃ); Mil 143 (janapadaṃ). Cp parikassati and samparikaḍḍhati.

pari + k˚, cp. BSk. parikaḍḍhati Mvu ii.255

Parikaḍḍhana

(nt.) drawing, dragging along Ja ii.78; Mil 154.

fr. prec.

Parikati

arrangement, preparation, getting up Ja v.203.

*parikṛti of kṛ; (?)

Parikatta

cut round, cut off Mil 188.

pp. of pari + kantati2; corresponds to Sk, kṛtta, which is usually represented in P. by kanta2

Parikathā

(f.) 1. “round-about tale,” exposition, story, esp religious tale DN ii.204; Vism 41 (= pariyāya-kathā

2. talk about, remark, hint Vin i.254 (cp. Vin Texts ii.154); Vb 353 = Vism 23 (with obhāsa nimitta); Snp-a 497.

3. continuous or excessive talk Vism 29.

pari + kathā, cp. BSk. parikathā Divy 225, Divy 235

Parikanta1

cut open Vin iii.89 (kucchi p.). See also parikatta & cp. Kern,; Toev. s. v (misreading for ˚katta?) ■ Note. Reading parikantaṃ upāhanaṃ at Ja vi.51 is with v.l. to be changed to pariyantaṃ.

pari + kanta2 of kantati2

Parikanta2

at Vin ii.80 (bhāsita˚) is probably to be read as pārikata. Bdhgh explns as parik kametvā kata, but it is difficult to derive it fr. parikkamati Vin. Texts iii.18 trsl. “as well in speech as in act” and identify it with parikanta1, hardly justified Cp. also Kern. Toev. s. v. The passage is evidently faulty.

pp. of parikaroti

Parikantati1

to wind round, twist Ja iii.185 (pāso pādaṃ p.; but taken by C. as parikantati2 expld as “cammādīni chindanto samantā kantati”).

pari + kantati1

Parikantati2

to cut (round), cut through, pierce MN i.244 (vātā kucchiṃ p.); Ja iii.185 (see parikantati1).

pari + kantati2

Parikappa

1. preparation, intention, stratagem Thag 940.

2. assumption, supposition, surmise AN i.197; AN v.271; Dhs-a 308.

fr. pari + kalp

Parikappita

inclined, determined, decided, fixed upon Sdhp. 362, 602.

pp. of parikappati

Parikamma

(nt.) “doing round,” i.e. doing up, viz (1.) arrangement, getting up, preparation Vin ii.106 (˚ṃ kārāpeti), 117 (geruka˚ plastering with red chalk) 151 (id.). parikammaṃ karoti to make (the necessary) preparation, to set to work Vism 395 and passim (with ref. to iddhi). Usually in form parikammakata arranged, prepared Vin ii.175 (bhūmi), as “with,” viz. geruka˚ plastered with red chalk Vin i.48 Vin ii.209; lākhā˚ Ja iii.183; Ja iv.256; su˚; beautifully arranged or prepared, fitful, well worked Mil 62 (dāru), 282 (maṇiratana); Vv-a 188. In special sense used with ref. to jhāna, as kasiṇa˚; processes whereby jhāna is introduced, preparations for meditation Ja i.141 Ja iv.306; Ja v.162, Ja v.193; Dhs-a 168; cp. Cpd. 54; Dhp-a i.105 (2.) service, attention, attending Vin i.47; Vin ii.106, Vin ii.220; SN i.76; Thig 376 (= veyyāvacca Thag-a 253); Pp 56; Dhp-a i.96, Dhp-a i.333, chiefly by way of administering ointments etc. to a person, cp. Ja v.89; Dhp-a i.250. sarīra˚ attending the body DN-a i.45, DN-a i.186; Snp-a 52.

-kāraka one who ministers to or looks after a person attendant; one who makes preparations Thig 411 (f-ikā = paricārikā Thag-a 267); Ja i.232.

pari + kamma

Parikara

“doing round,” i.e. girdle, loincloth Ja iv.149; Dhp-a i.352 ■ In cpd. ovāda˚ it is v.l. SS at DN i.137 for paṭikara (q.v.).

fr. pari + kṛ; a similar formation belonging to same root, but with fig. meaning is to be found in parikkhāra, which is also expld by parivara cp. parikaroti = parivāreti

Parikaroti

to surround, serve, wait upon, do service for J. iv.405 (= parivāreti C.); v. 353 (id.), 381 vi.592. Cp. parikara & parikkhāra.;

pari + kṛ;

Parikassati

1. to drag about SN i.44, cp. Dhs-a 68.

2. sweep away, carry away Dhp-a ii.275 (mah’ ogho viya parikassamāno, v.l. ˚kaḍḍhamāno) ■ Pass. parikissati (q.v.).

pari + kṛṣ, cp BSk. parikarṣayati to carry about Divy 475, and parikaḍḍhati

Parikiṇṇa

scattered or strewn about, surrounded Ja iv.400; Ja vi.89, Ja vi.559; Pv i.61 (makkhikā˚ samantato ākiṇṇa Pv-a 32); Mil 168, Mil 285; DN-a i.45 (spelt parikkhiṇṇa). Cp. sampari˚.

pp. of parikirati

Parikittita

declared, announced, made public Sdhp 601.

pp. of parikutteti

Parikitteti

to declare, praise, make public Mil 131, Mil 141, Mil 230, Mil 383 ■ pp. parikittita (q.v.).

pari + kitteti

Parikirati

to strew or scatter about, to surround SN i.185 = Thag 1210; aor. parikiri Ja vi.592 (v.l. for parikari, see parikaroti) ■ pp. parikiṇṇa (q.v.).

pari + kirati

Parikiraṇa

strewing about, trsld “consecrating sites” DN i.12 (vatthu-kamma + vatthu˚; v.l. paṭi˚; expld at DN-a i.98 as “idañ c’ idañ ca āharathā ti vatvā tattha balikamma-karaṇaṃ”). The BSk. form appears to be parīkṣā, as seen in phrase vatthuparīkṣā at Divy 3 & 16. See under parikkhā.;

fr. pari + kirati

Parikilanta

tired out, exhausted Mil 303.

pp. of parikilamati

Parikilamati

to get tired out, fatigued or exhausted Ja v.417, Ja v.421 ■ pp. parikilanta (q.v.).

pari + kilamati

Parikilissati

to get stained or soiled; fig. get into trouble or misery (?) see parikissati ■ pp parikiliṭṭha see parikkiliṭṭha.

pari + kilissati

Parikilesa

misery, calamity, punishment Thag-a 241 (for ˚klesa, q.v.).

pari + kilesa

Parikissati

to be dragged about or worried, to be harassed, to get into trouble SN i.39 (trsl. “plagues itself”); AN ii.177 AN iv.186; Snp 820 (v.l. Nd i.˚kilissati; expld at Nd i.154 as kissati parikissati parikilissati, with vv.ll. kilissati pakirissati).

most likely Pass. of parikassati; maybe Pass. of kisa (= Sk. kṛśa) to become emaciated. Mrs. Rh. D at K.S. 319 takes it as contracted form of kilissati

Parikujati

at Sdhp 145, meaning? Cp. palikujjati.

Parikupita

greatly excited, very much agitated AN ii.75; Mil 253.

pp. of pari + kup

Parikeḷanā

(f.) adornment, adorning oneself, being fond of ornaments Nd ii.5852 (v.l. parilepanā); DN-a i.286 has paṭikelanā instead, but Vb id p. 351 parikeḷanā with v.l. parikelāsanā.

pari + keḷanā

Parikopeti

to excite violently Mil 253.

Caus. of pari + kup

Parikkamana

(nt.) walking about MN i.43, MN i.44; adj. sa˚; having (opportunity for) walking about i.e. accessible, good for rambling in, pleasant, said of the Dhamma AN v.262 (opp. a˚).

pari + kram

Parikkita

at Ja v.74 is probably to be read parikkhita (pari + ukṣ ): see okkhita “sprinkled, strewn,” unless it is misreading for parikiṇṇa.

Parikkiliṭṭha

soiled, stained Vin ii.296 (for parikiliṭṭha, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.); id. p at AN ii.56 has paṭikiliṭṭha, cp. upakkiliṭṭha Vin ii.295.

pp. of parikilissati

Parikkha

(-˚) see parikkhā.

Parikkhaka

(adj.) investigating, examining, experienced, shrewd Pv-a 131 (lokiya˚ experienced in the ways of the world, for agarahita).

fr. parikkhati

Parikkhaṇa

(nt.) putting to the test, trying Sdhp 403 (sarīra˚, or should we read parirakkhaṇa? Cp. parirakkhati).

fr. parikkhati; cp. Class. Sk. parīkṣaṇa

Parikkhata1

wounded, hurt, grazed Ja iii.431; Pv-a 272 (a˚).

pp. of pari + kṣan

Parikkhata2

made up, prepared, endowed with, equipped, adorned DN ii.217; MN iii.71; Mil 328.

pp. of *parikkharoti; cp. Sk. pariṣkṛta

Parikkhatatā

(f.) “making up,” pretence, posing, sham Pp 19 (23) = Vb 351 (358).

abstr. fr. parikkhata2

Parikkhati

to look round, to inspect, investigate, examine AN i.162 (vaṇṇaṃ parikkhare 3rd pl.) See also parikkhaka, parikkhavant & parikkhā.;

pari + īkṣ

Parikkhattiya

read pāri˚ (= parikkhatatā) q.v.

*Parikkharoti

lit. to do all round, i.e. to make up, equip, adorn (cp. parikaroti); pp. parikkhata2 (q.v.); see also parikkhāra.

pariṣ + kṛ;

Parikkhaya

exhaustion, waste, diminution, decay, loss, end DN i.156; MN i.453; MN iii.37 sq.; SN i.2, SN i.90, SN i.152; SN v.461; AN i.100, AN i.299 AN ii.68; AN iii.46 (bhogā ˚ṃ gacchanti); iv.148, 350; Thag 929; Snp 374, Snp 749, Snp 1094 (= pahānaṃ etc. Nd ii.412); Dhp 139; Ja i.290; Pv ii.615; Pp 16, Pp 17, Pp 63; Mil 102; Dhp-a iv.140 (˚ṃ gacchati to come to waste, to disappear atthaṃ gacchati of Dhp 384); Thag-a 285; Pv-a 3 (dhanasannicayo ˚ṃ na gamissati). In the latter phrase freq combd with pariyādāna (q.v.).

fr. pari + kṣi2, cp. Epic Sk. parikṣaya

Parikkhavant

(adj.) circumspect, elever, experienced Ja iii.114.

fr. parikkhati

Parikkhā

(f.) examination, investigation, circumspection prudence Ja iii.115; Ne 3, Ne 4, Ne 126 (cp. Index p. 276) Sdhp. 532 (attha˚).

fr. pari + īkṣ, cp. BSk. parīksā Divy 3 & 16 in vastu˚, ratna˚ etc. with which cp. P. vatthu-parikirana

Parikkhāra

“all that belongs to anything,” make-up, adornment (so Nd ii.585 bāhirā p. of the body) ■ (a) requisite, accessory equipment, utensil, apparatus Vin i.50, Vin i.296 (˚colaka cloth required for water-strainers & bags, cp; Vin. Texts ii.229); ii.150 (senāsana˚-dussa clothrequirement of seat & bed); iv.249 sq., 284; DN i.128 DN i.137 (yaññassa p. = parivāra DN-a i.297); MN i.104 (jīvita˚) iii.11; SN ii.29; AN iv.62 (citt’ ālankāraṃ citta-parikkhār atthaṃ dānaṃ), 236 (id.); Ja iii.470 (sabba˚-sampannaṃ dānaṃ with all that belongs to it); v.232; Snp 307 Nd ii.585; Ne 1 sq.; 4, 108; DN-a i.294, DN-a i.299; Dhp-a i.38 Dhp-a i.240 (geha˚), 352 (v.l. for parikara); Pv-a 81 (sabba˚)- saparikkhāra together with the (other) requisites, i.e. full of resources; used with reference to the samādhiparikkhārā (see below) DN ii.217; MN iii.71 ■ (b) In a special sense and in very early use it refers to the “set of necessaries” of a Buddhist monk & comprises the 4 indispensable instruments of a mendicant, enum;d in stock phrase “cīvara-piṇḍapāta-senāsana-gilānapaccayabhesajja-p.” i.e. robe, alms-bowl, seat & bed medicine as help in illness. Thus freq. found in Canon e.g. at Vin iii.132; DN iii.268; SN iv.288, SN iv.291; Nd ii.523 (as 1st part of “yañña”); also unspecified, but to be understood as these 4 (different Vin Texts iii.343 which take it to mean the 8 requisites: see below) at Vin ii.267 ■ Later we find another set of mendicants requisites designated as “aṭṭha parikkhārā,” the 8 requirements. They are enumd in verse at Ja i.65; DN-a i.206, viz. ticīvaraṃ, patto, vāsi, sūci, (kāya-bandhanaṃ, parissāvana, i.e. the 3 robes, the bowl, a razor, a needle, the girdle, a water-strainer. They are expld in detail DN-a i.206 sq. Cp. also Ja iv.342 (aṭṭhaparikkhāra-dhara); v.254 (kāyabandhana-parissāvanasūci-vāsi-satthakāni; the last-named article being “scissors” instead of a razor); Dhp-a ii.61 (˚dhara thera) ■ (c) In other combns: satta nagara˚; AN iv.106 sq. (cp. nagarûpakārikā DN i.105); satta samādhi˚ DN ii.216; MN iii.71; AN iv.40; soḷasa˚ (adj.) of yañña having sixteen accessories DN i.134 (cp. Dial. i.174, 177) bahu˚ having a full equipment, i.e. being well-off Vin iii.138; Ja i.126Note. A set of 12 requisites (1–⁠8 as under b and 4 additional) see detailed at DN-a i.207.

fr. *parikkharoti, cp. late Sk. pariṣkāra

Parikkhārika

(-˚) (adj.) one who has the parikkhāras (of the mendicant). Usually the 8 p. are understood, but occasionally 12 are given as in the detailed enumn of p. at DN-a i.204–⁠207.

fr. parikkhāra

Parikkhiṇṇa

at DN-a i.45 is to be read parikiṇṇa (q.v.).

Parikkhitta

thrown round, overspread, overlaid, enclosed, fenced in, encircling, surrounded by (-˚) MN iii.46; AN iv.106 (su˚); SN i.331 (read valligahana˚); Pv iv.336 (v.l. for pariyanta as in i.1013) Vism 71 (of gāma); Thag-a 70; Dhp-a i.42 (pākāra˚); Pv-a 52 (= pariyanta i.1013), 283 (sāṇī-pākāra˚; ); Sdhp 596.

pp. of parikkhipati

Parikkhipati

to throw round, encircle, surround Vin ii.154; Ja i.52 (sāṇiṃ), 63, 150, 166; ii.104 iii.371; Dhp-a i.73 ■ pp. parikkhitta (q.v.) ■ Caus II. parikkhipāpeti Ja i.148 (sāṇiṃ); ii.88 (sāṇi-pākāraṃ).

pari + kṣip

Parikkhīṇa

exhausted, wasted, decayed, extinct Vin iv.258; MN iii.80; SN i.92; SN ii.24 SN v.145, SN v.461; DN iii.97, DN iii.133 (˚bhava-saṃyojana); Iti 79 (id.); AN iv.418, AN iv.434 (āsavā); Snp 175, Snp 639, Snp 640; Dhp 93 Pp 11, Pp 14; Mil 23 (˚āyuka); Pv-a 112 (˚tiṇodak’ āhāra).

pp. of parikkhīyati

Parikkhīṇatta

(nt.) the fact of being exhausted, exhaustion, extinction, destruction DN-a i.128 (jīvitassa); Pv-a 63 (kammassa), 148 (id.).

abstr. of parikkhīṇa

Parikkhīyati

to go to ruin, to be wasted or exhausted Thig 347 (= parikkhayaṃ gacchati Thag-a 242) ■ pp. parikkhīṇa (q.v.).

pari + khīyati of kṣi2

Parikkhepa

1. closing round, surrounding, neighbourhood, enclosure Vin iv.304; Ja i.338; Ja iv.266; Snp-a 29 (˚dāru etc.).

2. circumference Ja i.89; Ja v.37 Vism 205; Kp-a 133; Snp-a 194.

3. “closing in on, i.e. fight, quarrel Iti 11, Iti 12.

fr. pari + kṣip

Pariklesa

hardship, misery, calamity SN i.132 = Thig 191; Thig 345 (= parikilesa Thag-a 241).

pari + klesa

Parikhā

(f.) a ditch, trench, moat Vin ii.154; DN i.105 (ukkiṇṇa-parikha adj with trenches dug deep, combd with okkhittapaligha expld by khāta-parikha ṭhapita-paligha at DN-a i.274) MN i.139 (sankiṇṇa˚ adj. with trenches filled, Ep. of an Arahant, combd with ukkhittapaligha) = AN iii.84 sq. Nd ii.284 C (spelt kkh); AN iv.106 (nagara˚); Ja i.240, Ja i.490 Ja iv.106 (ukkiṇṇ’ antaraparikha); vi.276, 432; Cp II.13 (spelt kkh); Mil 1 (gambhīra˚); Snp-a 519 (˚taṭa); Pv-a 201 (˚piṭṭhe), 261 (id.), 278 (id., v.l. ˚parikkhāṭa-tīre).

fr. pari + khan, cp. Epic Sk. parikhā

Parigaṇhana

(nt.) comprehension Ja ii.7 (˚paññā comprehensive wisdom).

fr. parigaṇhāti

Parigaṇhāti

(& Pariggaheti Caus.) 1. to embrace, seize, take possession of, hold, take up MN i.80 MN i.137; Ja iii.189; DN-a i.45.

2. to catch, grasp Dhp-a i.68.

3. to go all round Dhp-a i.91 (sakala-jambudīpaṃ) ■ Caus. ˚ggaheti (aor. ˚esi, ger. ˚etvā, inf. ˚etuṃ 1. to embrace, comprehend, fig. master Vin ii.213; Ja ii.28; Ja iii.332; Snp-a 549 (mantāya); Dhp-a iii.242; Pv-a 68 (hattesu), 93; Vv-a 75.

2. to explore, examine find out, search Ja i.162; Ja ii.3; Ja iii.85, Ja iii.268 (˚ggahetuṃ), 533; v.93, 101; Dhp-a ii.56 ■ Caus. II. parigaṇhāpeti Ja i.290.

3. to comprise, summarise Kp-a 166, Kp-a 167 ■ pp. pariggahita (q.v.).

pari + gṛh

Parigalati

to sink down, slip or glide off Ja iv.229, Ja iv.250; Ja v.68.

pari + galati, see gaḷati

Parigilati

to swallow Ja i.346.

pari + gilati

Parigūhati

to hide, conceal AN i.149; AN iv.10, AN iv.31; Pv iii.43 (= paṭicchādeti Pv-a 194).

pari + gūhati

Parigūhanā

(f.) hiding, concealment, deception Pp 19, Pp 23.

fr. patigūhati

Pariggaha

1. wrapping round, enclosing Thag 419 (? cp. Brethren 217 n. 6).

2. taking up seizing on, acquiring, acquisition, also in bad sense of “grasping” Snp 779 (= taṇhā and diṭṭhi˚ Nd i.57) Pts i.172; Pts ii.182 (nekkhamma˚ etc.); Nd i.11 (itthi acquiring a wife); Ja vi.259; Mil 244 (āhara˚ abstinence in food), 313 (id.).

3. belongings, property possessions DN ii.58; DN iii.289 = AN iv.400; MN i.137 (quoted at Nd i.122); SN i.93; Snp 805; Ja iv.371; Ja vi.259; Pv-a 76 (˚bhūta belonging to, the property of); Vv-a 213, Vv-a 321 sa˚; with all (its) belongings SN i.32.

4. a wife Thag-a 271; Pv-a 161 (kata˚ wedded), 282; Thag-a 271. sapariggaha → apariggaha married → unmarried (in general with ref. to the man as well as the woman) DN i.247; Ja iv.190; Ja vi.348, Ja vi.364.

5. grace, favour DN-a i.241 (āmisa˚ material grace).

fr. pari + gṛh

Pariggahita

taken, seized, taken up, haunted, occupied Vin iii.51 (manussānaṃ p. by men) iv.31, 278; Dhp-a i.13 (amanussa˚ by ghosts); Pv-a 87 Pv-a 133; Sdhp 64 ■ f. abstr, ˚tā being possessed (Vism 121 (amanussa˚).

pp. of parigaṇhāti

Pariggāhaka

(adj.) including, occupying Ne 79 (= upathambhaka C. as quoted in Index p. 276).

fr. pariggaha

Parigha

a cross-bar Thag-a 211 (˚daṇḍa).

Vedic parigha, of which the usual P. representative is paligha (q.v.)

Parighaṃsati

to rub (too) hard, scrub, scratch, only in ppr. aparighaṃsanto Vin i.46; Vin ii.208.

pari + ghaṃsati1

Paricakkhitar

one who looks round or enquires, neg. a˚ Ja v.77.

n. ag. fr. pari + cakṣ, cp. akkhi & cakkhu

Paricaya

familiarity, acquaintance Ja vi.337; Vism 153; Pv-a 74 ■ adj. (-˚) acquainted with, versed in (loc.) Ja ii.249 (jāta˚), Vv-a 24 (kata˚); Pv-a 4 (id.) 129 (id.).

fr. pari + ci

Paricaraṇa

(nt.) 1. going about, mode of life Dhp-a i.382 (gihīnaṃ ˚ṭṭhānaṃ, v.l. for vicaraṇa˚). 2. attending to, looking after, worshipping Dhp-a i.199 (aggi-p˚-ṭṭhāna fire-place).

3. enjoyment, pleasure (indriyānaṃ) Pv-a 16. See also paricāraṇā.

fr. pari + car

Paricaraṇaka

servant, attendant DN-a i.269.

fr. paricaraṇa

Paricarati

to move about, in var. senses, viz. 1. to go about, look after AN iii.94 (upaṭṭhahati + Ja v.421; Pv-a 175.

2. to worship (only in connection aggin p. to worship the fire) DN i.101; SN i.166; Dhp 107; Ja i.494; Snp p.79 (= payirupāsati Snp-a 401).

3. to roam about, to feast one’s senses, to amuse oneself play, sport Pv-a 77 (indriyāni = kīḷāmi Pv ii.121) ■ We often find reading pariharati for paricarati, e.g. at Dhp-a ii.232; cp. paricāreti for ˚hāreti Pv-a 175; paricaraṇā for ˚haraṇā Pv-a 219 ■ pp. pariciṇṇa; Caus paricāreti (q.v.).

pari + carati

Paricariyā

(f.) going about, service, ministration, worship SN i.182; AN i.132; Dhp-a ii.232 (aggi˚; ) Occurs also as pāricariyā (q.v.), e.g. at Ja v.154. See also paricārikā.

fr. paricarati

Paricāra

fr. serving, attendance; (m.) servant, attendant Thag 632 (C. on this stanza for paddhagū).

paricāreti

Paricāraka

(adj.-n.) attending, serving honouring; (m.) attendant, worshipper, follower (cp BSk. paricāraka attendant Avs i.170; Avs ii.167] DN i.101 DN ii.200; Thag 475; Snp p.218 (Nd ii.reads ˚cārika) Ja i.84; Ja iv.362; Pv iv.87 (not ˚vāraka); DN-a i.137, DN-a i.269 See also paricārika.

fr. paricāreti

Paricāraṇā

(f.) care, attention, looking after; pleasure, feasting, satisfaction Pv ii.12 (gloss for ˚cārika); Pv-a 219.

fr. paricāreti

Paricārika

(adj.-n.) = paricāraka (servant, attendant) AN v.263 (aggi˚ fire-worshipper); Pv ii.620 (amacca minister & attendant); Thag-a 267; Snp-a 597 ■ f. ˚carikā (1) a maid-servant, handmaiden, nurse, (personal attendant MN i.253; cp. SN i.125; Ja i.204 (pāda˚; ), 291 ii.395; iv.35 (veyyāvacca-kārikā p.), 79; v.420; Pv ii.126 (= veyyāvacca-kārinī Pv-a 157); Pv-a 46 ■ (2 care, attention; pleasure, pastime (so here, probably another form of paricāriyā) Pv iv.12 (= indriyānaṃ pariharaṇā Pv-a 219; gloss ˚cāraṇā ).

Paricārita

served by; delighted by, indulging in MN i.504.

pp. of paricāreti

Paricārin

(adj. n.) serving, attending, f. a maid-servant Ja ii.395.

fr. paricāreti

Paricāreti

1. to serve, wait on, attend upon, honour, worship [cp. BSk. paricārayati Divy 114 sq., 421] SN i.124 (pāde); Dhp-a iii.196 (id.); Ja i.81 (˚cāritabba-ṭṭhāna place of worship); iv.274; v.9. Pass. paricāriyati, ppr. ˚iyamāna MN i.46, MN i.504; Ja i.58 In this sense it may also be taken as “being delighted or entertained by.”

2. to amuse oneself, gratify one’s senses, to have recreation, find pleasure [cp. BSk paricārayati Divy 1, and freq. phrase pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samarpitā samangibhūtā p. e.g. Mvu i.32; Vin ii.290; Vin iii.72 (pañcahi kamaguṇehi samappitā etc.) DN i.36 (id.), 104 (id.); MN i.504 (id.); Thag 96 (saggesu) Pv i.116 (= yathā sukkhaṃ cārenti indriyāni Pv-a 58) iv.129 (read ˚cārayanti for ˚vārayanti, cp. Pv-a 228 indriyāni p.) ■ pp. paricārita q.v. See also parivāreti.

Caus. of paricarati

Pariciṇṇa

1. surrounded, attended Ja v.90.

2. worshipped MN i.497; SN iv.57 (me Satthā p.), cp. Thag 178 (Satthā ca p. me) & 891 (p. mayā Satthā).

3. practised, performed Mil 360.;

pari + ciṇṇa, pp. of carati

Paricita1

gathered, accumulated, collected, increased, augmented MN iii.97; SN i.116; SN ii.264; SN iv.200; AN ii.67 sq., 185; iii.45, 152 iv.282, 300; v.23; Thag 647; Pts i.172 (expld); Pv-a 67 Sdhp 409.

pp. of pari + ci, cinoti, P. cināti

Paricita2

known, scrutinized, accustomed acquainted or familiar with, constantly practised Vin ii.95 (vācasā p.), 109 (aggi˚ etc. read aggiparijita); Thag-a 52; Mil 140 (iddhipādā p.); Dāvs iv.19aparicita unfamiliar Dhp-a i.71.

pp. of pari + ci, ciketi, P. cināti; but perhaps identical with paricita1

Paricumbati

to kiss (all round, i.e. from all sides), to cover with kisses MN ii.120; SN i.178, SN i.193; AN iv.438; Dhp-a i.330.

pari + cumbati

Paricca

(indecl.) lit. “going round,” i.e. having encircled grasped, understood; grasping, finding out, perceiving freq. in phrase cetasā ceto paricca (pajānāti) grasping fully with one’s mind, e.g. at DN i.79; MN i.445; MN iii.12; SN ii.121, SN ii.233; Iti 12; Vb 329; Vism 409 (= paricchinditvā). See pariyeti.

ger. of pari + i, cp. Sk. (Gr.) parītya & P. pariyeti

Pariccajati

to give up, abandon, leave behind, reject SN i.44; Iti 94; Ja ii.335; Ja vi.259 (= chaḍḍeti) Mil 207; Dhp-a iv.204; Pv-a 121, Pv-a 132, Pv-a 221 (read jīvitaṃ pariccajati for parivajjati; cp. BSk. jīvitaṃ parityakṣyāmi Avs i.210); Sdhp 539 ■ pp. pariccatta (q.v.).

pari + cajati of tyaj

Pariccajana

(nt.) & ˚nā (f.) 1. giving up, rejection, leaving Iti 11, Iti 12.

2. giving out, bestowing giving a donation Pv-a 124.

fr. pariccajati

Pariccajanaka

one who gives (up) or spends, a giver, donor Pv-a 7.

fr. prec.

Pariccatta

given up abandoned, thrown out, left behind Ja i.69, Ja i.174, Ja i.477; Mil 280; Pv-a 178, Pv-a 219 (= virādhita); Sdhp 374.

pp. of pariccajati; cp. BSk. parityakta in meaning “given to the poor” Avs i.3

Pariccāga

1. giving up, abandonment, sacrifice, renunciation AN i.92 (āmisa˚ & dhamma material & spiritual); Pts ii.98; Ja i.12 (jīvita˚); Dhp-a iii.441 (pañca mahāpariccāgā the five great sacrifices i.e. the giving up of the most valuable treasures of wife of children, of kingdom, of life and limb).

2. expense Dhp-a ii.231 (sahassa˚; expenditure of a thousand coins)

3. giving (to the poor), liberality Dhs-a 157; Snp-a 295 (mahā˚, corresponding to mahādāna); Pv-a 7 sq. 27, 120 sq., 124.

fr. pariccajati

Paricchada

a cover, covering Ja i.341, Ja i.466.

fr. pari + chad

Paricchanna

enveloped, covered, wrapped round Vin iv.17.

pari + channa, pp. of chad

Paricchāta

very much seared, scorched (?) Sdhp 102 (˚odara-ttaca).

pari + chāta

Paricchādanā

(f.) covering, hiding, concealing Pp 19 = Pp 23 = Vb 358.

fr. pari + chad

Paricchindati

1. to mark out Vv-a 291 (vasana-ṭṭhānaṃ).

2. to determine, to fix accurately to decide Ja i.170 (padaṃ the track), 194 (nivāsavetanaṃ); iii.371; iv.77; Mil 272; Vism 184, Vism 409; Snp-a 434 (paññāya p.).

3. to limit, restrict, define Mil 131; DN-a i.132 ■ pp. paricchinna (q.v.).

pari + chindati

Paricchindana

(nt.) “cutting up,” definition, analysis Vv-a 114.

fr. paricchindati

Paricchindanaka

(adj.) marking out, defining, analysing, Dhs-a 157 (ñāṇa).

fr. pari + chind

Paricchinna

1. restricted, limited, small Dhp-a i.58; Pv-a 136 (˚ppamāṇa).

2. divided measured Vism 184; Pv-a 185 (= mita).

pp. of paricchindati

Pariccheda

1. exact determination, circumscription range, definition, connotation, measure Ja iii.371; Vism 184 (as one of the nimittas of the body), 236 (referring to the 5 nimittas of the life-principle); Snp-a 160, Snp-a 229 Snp-a 231, Snp-a 376, Snp-a 408, Snp-a 503; Kp-a 182 (gaṇana˚); Vv-a 194 (id.) Dhs-a 3; Dhp-a ii.73 (avadhi˚); Pv-a 254 (kāla˚), 255 (āyuno p.); Vb-a 417 (citta˚, for citta-paricce ñãṇa Vb 330).

2. limit, boundary Mil 131, Mil 405; Ja iii.504 (˚nadī-tīra).

3. limitation, restriction Dhp-a ii.88, Dhp-a ii.98; Pv-a 20 (˚ṃ karoti to restrict).

4. division (of time), in ratti˚ & divā˚;, night-& day-division Vism 416.

5. (town)-planning, designing Vb-a 331.;

fr. pari + chid; late Sk: (philos.) in same meaning

Paricchedaka

(adj.) determining, fixing Vb-a 346 (uṭṭhāna-velā ˚ā saññā).

fr. pariccheda

Parijana

“the people round,” i.e. attendants, servants, retinue, suite Vin i.15; Ja i.72, Ja i.90; Dhp-a iii.188; Vv-a 63; Pv-a 58, Pv-a 62saparijana with one’s servants Cp ii.82 (T. saparijjana metri causâ).

pari + jana

Parijapati

to mutter (spells), to practise divination Ja iii.530; Mil 200 (vijjaṃ).

pari + japati, cp. BSk. parijapta enchanted Divy 397

Parijapana

(nt.) mumbling, uttering spells Mil 356 (mantaṃ).

fr. parijapati

Parijānanā

(f.) cognition, recognition, knowledge Ne 20 (as paraphrase of pariññā).

pari + jānanā = jānana

Parijānāti

to know accurately or for certain, to comprehend, to recognise, find out MN i.293; SN i.11, SN i.24; SN ii.45, SN ii.99, SN iii.26, SN iii.40, SN iii.159; SN iv.50; SN v.52, SN v.422; AN iii.400 sq.; Snp 202, Snp 254, Snp 943; Nd i.426; Ja iv.174 Thag 226; Mil 69; Dhp-a iv.233 ˚jānitvā) ■ ppr. parijānaṃ SN iii.27; SN iv.89; Iti 3 sq ■ pp. pariññāta (q.v.) ger. pariññāya see under pariññā1.

pari + jānāti

Parijiṇṇa

worn out, gone down, decayed, reduced Ja i.111 (seṭṭhi-kulaṃ p.); v.99, 100 (bhoga˚); vi.364; Dhp 148; Dhp-a ii.272 (˚kula).

pp. of pari + jar, i.e. decayed; Kern Toev. s. v. proposes reading ˚jīna of ji, i.e. wasted, see parijīyati

Parijita

overpowered, injured, damaged Vin ii.109 (so read for paricita).

pp. of pari + ji, jayati; Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading parijīta, Sk. form of P. parijīna, pp. of pari jīyati, but hardly necessary, see also Vin. Texts iii.75.

Parijīyati

to become worn out, to decay, fade, SN i.186; Ja iv.111. Spelt ˚jiyyati at Thag 1215. pp. parijīna (see parijiṇṇa).

pari + jīyati

Parijegucchā

(f.) intense dislike of, disgust with (-˚) DN i.25, cp. DN-a i.115.

pari + jegucchā

Parijjanā

is doubtful reading at AN iii.38 (v.l. parivajjanā) = iv.266 (T. reads parijjana, cp. parijana; vv. ll parivajjanā & parijanā); meaning?.

Pariñña

(-˚) knowing, recognising, understanding Iti 44 (bhūta˚ so, or should we read bhūtapariññāya?); also in cpd. pariññacārin (to be expd as shortened gr. pariññā?) Snp 537 (= paññāya paricchinditvā caranto living in full knowledge i.e. rightly determining); also (abstr.) pariññatthaṃ at Iti 29 (abhiññatthaṃ + ), cp. SN iv.253.

the adj. form of pariññā, cp. abhiñña

Pariññā1

(f.) accurate or exact knowledge, comprehension full understanding MN i.66, MN i.84; SN iii.26 (yo rāgakkhayo dosā˚ moha˚ ayaṃ vuccati p.), 159 sq., 191; iv.16, 51 138, 206, 253 sq.; v.21, 55 sq., 145, 236, 251, 292; AN i.277 (kāmānaṃ rūpānaṃ vedanānaṃ), 299; v.64 Pp 37; Ne 19, Ne 20, Ne 31; Kp-a 87; Snp-a 251 ■ In exegetical literature three pariññās are distinguished viz. ñāta˚, tīraṇa˚ pahāna˚, which are differently interpreted & applied according to the various contexts See e.g. the detailed interpretation at Nd;1 52 sq. Nd ii.413; Ja vi.259 (where ñāṇa˚ for ñāta˚); Dhp-a ii.172 (in ref. to food); mentioned at Snp-a 517 ■ adj. pariñña -The form pariññāya is an apparent instr., but in reality (in form & meaning) the ger. of parijānāti (like abhiññāya → abhijānitvā) for the usual parijānitvā It is freq. found in poetry & in formulas (like yathābhūtaṃ p.); its meaning is “knowing well in right knowledge”: SN v.182; Snp 455, Snp 737, Snp 778 (= parijānitvā Nd i.51 sq.), 1082 (corresp. with pahāya, cp. similar phrase pahāya parijānitvā Dhp-a iv.232); Iti 62; Ja vi.259.

cp. Epic Sk. parijñāna; the form parijñā given by BR only with the one ref. Vyutp. 160; fr pari + jñā

Pariññā2

(indecl.) having full knowledge or understanding of Snp 779 (= parijānitvā Nd;1 56 & Snp-a 518); Iti 4 (perhaps to be read pariññāya for pariññā so).

ger. of parijānāti for *parijñāya, cp. same short forms of ādā & abhiññā

Pariññāta

well understood, thoroughly known Thig 106; MN i.1 sq.; SN ii.99; SN v.182; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 287 With ref. to food (˚bhojana & ˚āhāra) it means food understood according to the three pariññās (q.v.) Dhp 92 (˚bhojano adj. one who lives on recognised food or takes the right view of the food he eats, cp. Dhp-a ii.172); Mil 352 (˚āhāro); contrasted with bhāvita consciousness is to be well studied, insight is to be made to grow MN i.293.

pp. of parijānāti

Pariññātatta

(nt.) the fact of having full or exact knowledge SN v.182.

abstr. fr. pariññāta

Pariññātāvin

(adj.) one who has correct knowledge SN iii.159 sq., 191 (puggala).

fr. pariññāta

Pariññeyya

(adj.) knowable, perceivable, to be known (accurately) MN i.4; SN iii.26; SN iv.29; Dhp-a iv.233 (cp. Nd ii.under abhiññeyya).

grd. of parijānāti

Pariḍahati

to burn: Pass. pariḍayhati to be burnt or scorched MN i.422; SN i.188 = Thag 1224; AN i.137; AN iii.95, AN iii.98; Snp 63; Pts i.128 (ḷ); Pv i.64 (= parito jhāyati Pv-a 33); Mil 303; Pv-a 60. Cp. pariḷāha.

pari + ḍadati

Pariṇata

1. bent down, crooked Vv-a 222 (˚dāṭhā fangs, or does it mean “long”?).

2 changed SN iii.40.

3. ripened, matured, hatched, ripe Ja iii.174, Ja iii.286, Ja iii.431, Vv-a 288; Dhp-a i.47 (gabbha).

pp. of pariṇamati

Pariṇamati

1. to change (trs. & intrs.), lit. to bend round, to turn (round), to be transformed into (acc.) SN iii.3 (reading pariṇamati once, at other passages vi˚, cp. p. 40); Mil 136 (bhojanaṃ visamaṃ p food changes, i.e. turns bad), 277 (id.); Vv-a 13; Pv-a 144 (for parivattati Pv ii.105), 194 (id. iii.44).

2. to change into a diff. state, to ripen, mature (often said of the foetus) Mil 93, Mil 358 ■ pp. pariṇata (q.v.). Caus. pariṇāmeti (q.v.).

pari + namati

Pariṇāma

“bending round,” i.e. 1. change, alteration in utu˚; (sudden) change of season, unseasonable weather, with ref. to illnesses caused by such (˚ja ābādhā) = illness arising from the change of season AN ii.87; AN iii.131; AN v.110; Nd ii.3041; Mil 112, Mil 135 sq. 304; Vism 31.

2. alteration of food, digestion, in phrase sammā-pariṇāmaṃ gacchati MN i.188; SN i.168; AN iii.30; cp. Mvu i.211.

3. ripening Mil 93. 4. course, development, fulfilment, in special sense dispensation, destiny Ja v.171; Pv iv.325; Pv-a 252, Pv-a 254-Cp. vi˚.

fr. pari + nam, cp. class Sk. pariṇāma in all meanings

Pariṇāmana

(nt.) diverting to somebody’s use Vin iv.157.

fr. parinamati

Pariṇāmita

1. bent down Ja vi.269 (of trees, overladen with fruit, C. expls as “entangled”)

2. issued, apportioned, destined Ja v.171; Pv-a 254.

pp. of pariṇāmeti

Pariṇāmitar

one who destines or makes develop, fate, destiny Ja vi.189.

n. ag. of pariṇāmeti

Pariṇāmin

(adj.) ending in, resulting in (-˚) MN i.11, MN i.526; MN iii.88.

fr. pariṇāma

Pariṇāmeti

to bend to, to change into, to turn to use for somebody, to procure for, obtain appropriate DN i.92; Vin iii.259 (puttassa rajjaṃ p. for his son); iv.156; Pv-a 281 ■ ppr. ˚ṇāmayamāna Ja v.424. See also āvajjeti ■ pp. pariṇāmita (q.v.).

Caus. of parinamati

Pariṇāyaka

a leader, guide, adviser; one of the 7 treasures (ratanāni) of a great king or Cakkavattin (according to Bdhgh on DN ii.177 the eldest son; in the Lal. Vist. a general cp. Divy 211 Divy 217; Senart, Lég. de Buddha p. 42), i.e. a wonderful Adviser DN i.89; DN ii.17, DN ii.177; MN i.220; MN ii.175; AN iii.151 Snp p.106 (cp. Snp-a 450 = DN-a i.250); Ja i.155; Ja iv.93; Mil 38, Mil 314 ■ f. pariṇāyikā. Ep. of wisdom, synonymous with paññā, i.e. insight, cleverness Dhs 1057 Pp 25; Vism 3; Dhs-a 148.

fr. pari + ni, cp. pariṇeti

Pariṇāha

compass, circumference, breadth, extent, girth SN ii.206 (of the moon) = AN v.19; Ja iii.192 Ja iii.277, Ja iii.370; Ja v.299; Pp 53; Mil 282, Mil 311; Snp-a 382 (āroha + ).

fr. pari + nah

Pariṇeti

to lead round or about SN ii.128.

pari + neti

Paritajjita

scared (exceedingly), frightened Sdhp 147.

pari + tajjita

Paritatta

tormented, worried, vexed, grieved Mil 313.

pp. of paritappati

Paritappati

to be vexed, to grieve, worry, sorrow Thig 313 (= santappati Thag-a 233) Mil 313 ■ pp. paritatta (q.v.).

Pass. of pari + tap

Paritasita

(nt.) worry, excitement DN i.40 (v.l. ˚tassita, cp. Dial i.53). Paritassati (tasati)

pari + tasita1 or tasita2

Paritassati (˚tasati)

to be excited, to be tormented, to show a longing after, to be worried DN ii.68; MN i.36, MN i.67, MN i.151; SN ii.82, SN ii.194; SN iii.43, SN iii.55; SN iv.23, SN iv.65, SN iv.168; AN ii.27; AN iii.133 sq.; Snp 621 (= taṇhāya na bhāyati Snp-a 467, thus combining tasati1 & tasati;2), 924 (Pot. parittase, interpreted by Nd i.373 as taseyya, uttaseyya, bhāyeyya thus taken as tasati2); Mil 253, Mil 400; Dhp 397 (= taṇhāya na bhāyati Dhp-a iv.159); Sdhp 476 ■ ppr aparitassaṃ DN ii.68; MN i.67; SN ii.82; SN iii.55; Iti 94. pp. paritasita (q.v.).

pari + tasati1, in form clearly = Sk. paritṛṣyati, but freq. confused with tasati2, cp. tasa Snp 924 is the only example of paritasati representing tasati2

Paritassanā

(f.) trembling, fear; nervousness, worry; excitement, longing DN i.17 (= ubbijjanā phandanā etc. DN-a i.111); MN i.136 MN iii.227; SN iii.15 sq., 133; Mil 253, Mil 400 ■ neg. SN iii.15; MN i.136.

fr. paritassati, q.v. for meaning

Paritassin

(adj.) trembling, excited, worrying, only neg. ; AN iv.108, AN iv.111, AN iv.230 sq.

fr. paritassati

Paritāpa

= foll. Mil 313 (ātāpa + ).

Paritāpana

(nt.) tormenting, torture, affliction, mortification MN i.78, MN i.341–⁠344; AN i.151, AN i.296 AN ii.205 sq. (atta˚ self-mortification, opp. para˚); Pp 55 Pp 56, Pp 61; Pv-a 18 (atta˚), 30 (id.). Often combd with ātāpana (q.v.).

pari + tāpana, of tap

Paritāpeti

to burn, scorch, molest, trouble, torture, torment MN i.341 (ātāpeti + ), 506; SN iv.337; AN iii.54, AN iii.380; Ja v.420 (mā paritāpi).

pari + tapeti

Parituleti

to weigh, consider, estimate, think Vism 522Vb-a 130.

pari + tuleti

Parito

(adv.) round about, around, on every side, everywhere, wholly Vin ii.194; Snp-a 393; Vv-a 316; Pv-a 33.

fr. pari, cp. Sk. paritaḥ

Paritoseti

to please, appease, satisfy, make happy Ja i.262; Ja iii.386; Ja v.216; Pv-a 213 (v.l. SS āsiñcati).

pari + toseti

Paritta1

(adj.) small, little, inferior, insignificant limited, of no account, trifling Vin i.270; DN i.45; MN iii.148 (˚ābha of limited splendour, opp. appamāṇ’ ābha); SN ii.98; SN iv.160 (opp. adhimatta); AN iv.241 AN v.63; Iti 71; Snp 61, Snp 390 (˚pañña of inferior wisdom, cp Nd ii.415), 1097 (id.); Ja i.221; Dhs 181, Dhs 584, Dhs 1018, Dhs 1034 (cp. Dhs trsl.265, Dhs trsl.269); DN-a i.119; Kp-a 133 (˚dīpā the 2,000 inferior islands), 176 (500 do.); Pv-a 198; Sdhp 251, Sdhp 261. Synonyms: appaka, omaka, lāmaka, dukkha Nd ii.414; catukka Nd ii.415 (opp. mahā); appaka Pv-a 48, Pv-a 60; appama taka Pv-a 262; ittara Pv-a 60; oma Snp-a 347; oraka Snp-a 489; lāmaka Snp-a 347.

BSk. parītta, pari + pp. of in short form *tta, like ātta for ādatta. The development of meaning however causes difficulties, paridatta meaning given up, transmitted, cp. Divy 388, whereas P. paritta means trifling. The BSk. form parītta (e.g. Divy 204 Divy 498, Divy 504; Avs i.329; Avs ii.137) may be a re-translation of P. paritta, which may correspond to Sk, prarikta, pp of pra + ric, meaning “that which is exceeded,” i.e. left (over or behind)

Paritta2

(nt.) & Parittā (f.) protection, safeguard; (protective charm, palliative, amulet Vin ii.110 (atta˚ f. personal protection) iv.305 (gutt’ atthāya ˚ṃ pariyāpuṇāti); AN ii.73 (rakkhā + parittā); Ja i.200 (manto + parittaṃ vaḍḍhiṃ), 396 (paccekabuddhehi ˚ṃ kārāpeti makes them find a safeguard through the P.); iv.31 (osadhaṃ vā ˚ṃ vā); Mil 150 (f. & nt.) ■ Var. parittās in the way of Suttantas are mentioned at Vism 414 (Khandha˚ Dhajagga˚: SN i.218 sq.; Āṭānāṭiya˚: DN iii.195 sq. Mora˚: Ja ii.33). Cf. Dialogues iii.185.

-vālikā sand worn on the head as an amulet Ja i.396 Ja i.399. -suttaka a thread worn round the head as a charm Ja i.396, Ja i.399.

fr. pari + trā, cp. tāṇa, tāyati & also parittāna

Parittaka

small, insignificant, little Nd i.306 (for appaka etc. as at Nd ii.414); Pv i.1011; ii.967 Mil 121 (a˚), 253; DN-a i.170 (for appa); Pv-a 51 Sdhp 42 ■ f. parittikā Thag 377.

paritta1 + ka

Parittāṇa

(nt.) protection, shelter, refuge, safeguard, safety DN i.9 (sara from an arrow, i.e. a shield); iii.189; Ja vi.455; Pv-a 284; Sdhp 396.

-kitikā a protecting arrangement Vin ii.152, cp. Vin Texts iii.174.

pari + tāṇa. Cp. Epic Sk. paritrāṇa

Parittāyaka

(adj.) safeguarding against, sheltering against, keeping away from Vism 376 (angāra-vassaṃ p. thero).

fr. pari + tāyati

Parittāsin

(adj.) being in dread of (-˚) SN i.201.

pari + tāsin, fr. tāsa of tasati2

Paridaṇḍa

(adj.) “with a stick around,” i.e. surrounded by a stick; only in one phrase viz. “saparidaṇḍā iṭṭhi” a woman protected by a stick, or liable to punishment (?), in stock phrase enumerating 10 kinds of women MN i.286 = MN iii.46 = Vin iii.139 = AN v.264; Vv-a 73.

pari + daṇḍa

Paridamana

(nt.) controlling, taming Vism 375.

pari + damana

Paridameti

to control, tame, keep under Vism 376.

pari + dameti

Paridahati

to put round, put on, clothe Dhp 9 (fut. ˚dahessati); Ja ii.197; Ja v.434 (ger ˚dahitvā); vi.500; Pv ii.118; Pv-a 76 (vatthāni), 77 127 (˚dahissati for paridhassati Pv ii.936, which read for T. parivassati). ger also paridayha Ja v.400 (= nivāsetvā cp pārupitvā ca C.) ■ pp. paridahita (q.v.). Caus. II. paridahāpeti to cause to be clothed Pv-a 49 (= acchādeti).

pari + dahati, of dhā

Paridahita

put round, put on (of clothing) Pv-a 43.

pp. of paridahati

Paridīpaka

(adj.) illuminating, explaining, explanatory Snp-a 40

fr. paridīpeti, cp, dīpaka1

Paridīpana

(nt.) illuminating, elucidating, explanation Mil 318; Kp-a 111; Snp-a 394 sq.

pari + dīpana

Paridīpanā

(f.) explanation, illustration Mil 131.

fr. paridīpeti, cp. paridīpana

Paridīpita

1. in flames, set ablaze Thig 200 (= punappunaṃ ādīpitatāya p. Thag-a 170),

2. explained made clear, illuminated Vism 58; KvuA 8 Sdhp 305.

pp. of paridīpeti

Paridīpeti

to make bright, to illustrate, to explain Mil 131; Sdhp 491 ■ pp. paridīpita (q.v.).

pari + dīpeti

Paridūseti

to spoil altogether, to ruin, corrupt, defile Sdhp 409.

pari + dūseti

Parideva

lamentation, wailing MN i.200; SN ii.1; SN iii.3 sq. AN i.144; AN ii.195; Snp 328, Snp 592, Snp 811, Snp 923, Snp 969; Ja i.146; Ja vi.188, Ja vi.498; Nd i.128, Nd i.134, Nd i.370, Nd i.492; Pts i.11 sq., 38 59, 65; Vb 100, Vb 137; Ne 29. It is exegetically paraphrased at DN ii.306 = Nd ii.416 (under pariddava) with synonyms ādeva p. ādevanā paridevanā ādevitattaṃ paridevitattaṃ; often combd with soka grief, e.g. at DN i.36; Snp 862; Iti 89; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 61 ■ Bdhgh at DN-a i.121 explns it as “sokaṃ nissita-lālappana-lakkhaṇo p.”

pari + deva of div, devati; only in one passage of Epic Sk. (Mbhār. vii.3014); otherwise paridevana nt.

Paridevati

to wail, lament DN ii.158 (mā socittha mā paridevittha); Snp 582, Snp 774 = Nd i.38 (as ˚devayati), 166; Ja vi.188, Ja vi.498; Pv-a 18 (socati + ); ger ˚devamāna SN i.199, SN i.208; Ja v.106; Pv-a 38, & ˚devayamāna Snp 583 ■ grd. ˚devaniya Nd;1 492; Snp-a 573, ˚devaneyya Snp 970 (= ādevaneyya Nd;1 493) ■ pp paridevita (q.v.).

pari + devati, div

Paridevanā

(f.) = parideva, Snp 585; Nd ii.416 (see under parideva) Pv i.43 (= vācā-vippalāpa Pv-a 18); i.123 Pv-a 41.

Paridevita

(nt.) lamentation, wailing Snp 590; Pv i.123 (= ruditaṃ Pv-a 63); Mil 148 (kanditap.˚-lālappita-mukha).

pp. of paridevati

Paridevitatta

(nt.) lamentation etc.; only exegetical construction in expln of parideva at DN ii.306 = Nd ii.416.

abstr. fr. paridevita

Pariddava

= parideva MN i.56 (soka˚); AN i.221; Thig 345 (soka˚); Snp 1052, cp. Nd ii.416 (see parideva).

according to Trenckner MN i.532 (on MN i.56, where SS read p., whereas BB have parideva) the metrical substitute for parideva; therefore not = Sk paridrava, which is only a late re-translation of the P word

Paridhaṃsaka

(adj.) destructive, ruinous Pv-a 15 (˚vacano speaking destructively, scandalmonger).

fr. paridhaṃsati

Paridhaṃsati

to be deprived, to lose, to come to ruin Iti 90; Mil 249, Mil 265 ■ Caus. paridhaṃseti in same meaning at Nd i.5. It is almost synonymous with paripatati & parihāyati.;

pari + dhaṃsati

Paridhāvati

to run about Ja i.127 (ādhāvati + ), 134 (id.), 158 (id.); ii.68 (id.) = Thag-a 54; v.106.

pari + dhāvati

Paridhota

washed, rinsed, cleansed, purified DN i.124.

pp. of paridhovati

Paridhovati

to wash (all round), cleanse, clean Vin i.302 ■ pp. paridhota.

pari + dhovati

Pariniṭṭhāna

(nt.) 1. end Pv-a 287. - 2. accomplishment Ja v.400.

pari + niṭṭhāna

Pariniṭṭhāpeti

to bring to an end, attain, accomplish Dhs-a 363.

pari + niṭṭhāpeti

Pariniṭṭhita

(adj.) accomplished MN iii.53; Thig 283; Dhp-a ii.78.

pari + niṭṭhita

Parininna

(adj.) deeply hollowed, sunken Sdhp 103.

pari + ninna

Parinipphanna

(adj.) predetermined Kv 459 (v.l. ˚nibbāna), 626 (a˚); cp. Kvu trsl. 2616 3681.

pari + nipphanna

Parinibbāna

(nt.) “complete Nibbāna” in two meanings: 1. complete extinction of khandhalife; i.e. all possibility of such life & its rebirth, final release from (the misery of) rebirth and transmigration death (after the last life-span of an Arahant). This is the so-called “an-upādi-sesa Parinibbāna,” or “extinction with no rebirth-substratum left.”

2. release from cravings & attachment to life, emancipation (in this life) with the assurance of final death; freedom of spirit, calm, perfect well-being or peace of soul. This is the so-called “sa-upādisesa-P.,” or “extinction (of passion) with some substratum left.”-The two kinds are distinguished by Bdhgh at Dhp-a ii.163 as follows “arahatta-pattito paṭṭhāya kilesa-vaṭṭassa khepitattā sa-upādi-sesena, carima-citta-nirodhena khandhavaṭṭassa khepitattā an-upādi-sesena cā ti dvīhi pi parinibbānehi parinibbutā, an-upādāno viya padīpo apaṇṇattika-bhāvaṃ gatā.”

1. DN ii.72 sq. (the famous Mahā-parinibbāna-suttanta or “Book of the Great Decease”); MN iii.127, MN iii.128; AN ii.79 (˚samaye) iii.409 (˚dhamma, contrasted with āpāyika nerayika cp. Dhp-a iv.42); Mvu 7, Mvu 1 (˚mañcamhi nipanna); Vv-a 158; Pv-a 244.

2. DN iii.55; AN v.64; Snp 514 (˚gata vitiṇṇa-kankho); Vv 5324 (˚gata + sītibhūta). This state of final emancipation (during life) has also received the determination of anupādā-parinibbāna, i.e. emancipation without ground. for further clinging (lit without fuel), which corresponds to Bdhgh’s term “kilesavaṭṭassa khepitattā sa-upādi-sesa p.” (see above) thus at MN i.148; SN iv.48; SN v.29; AN i.44; AN v.65 (nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto etc).; AN v.233 = AN v.253 = Dhp 89 (+ khīṇāsava).

pari + nibbāna

Parinibbānika

(adj.) one who is destined to or that which leads to complete extinction DN iii.264 DN iii.265 (opasamika + ).

fr. parinibbāna

Parinibbāpana

(nt.) refreshing, cooling, quenching; controlling, subduing, training Pts i.174 (atta-damatha, atta-samatha, atta-p.).

pari + nibbāpana

Parinibbāpetar

one who pacifies, a calmer, trainer MN ii.102 (dametar sametar p.).

n. ag. fr. parinibbāpeti

Parinibbāpeti

to bring to complete coolness, or training (see next), emancipation or cessation of the life-impulse, to make calm, lead to Nibbāna to exercise self-control, to extinguish fever of craving or fire of rāga, dosa, moha. Always coupled with the quâsi synonyms sameti & dameti (cp. damatha samatha parinibbāpana) DN iii.61 = AN iii.46 (attānaṃ dameti, sameti p.); MN i.45 (fut. ˚bbapessati); AN ii.68 (attānaṃ d. s. p.) ■ pp. parinibbuta (see p. No. 3) & parinibbāpita (only in n. ag. ˚āpetar, q.v.).

pari + nibbāpeti

Parinibbāyati

(& ˚nibbāti) 1. to be completed, perfected in any work or art, e.g. of a trained horse MN i.446. Cp. τελειόω.

2. to die without being reborn to reach complete extinction of existence Vin ii.194 (Tathāgathā ˚āyanti); MN iii.128 (aor ˚nibbāyi); SN v.152 (˚nibbāyeyyaṃ), 261 (˚nibbāyissāmi); AN ii.120 (anupādisesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā p.); iv.202 (id.), 313 (id.), Mil 175 (id.); Ja i.28 (id.), 55 (id.); Vv-a 158 (fut ˚nibbāyissāmi); Pv-a 21, Pv-a 283 (of a Paccekabuddha). 2. to become emancipated from all desire of life DN ii.68 (cp. Dial. ii.65 & Brethren 417); SN iv.102 (diṭṭh eva dhamme), ibid. (sa-upādāno devānaṃ indo na parinibbāyati), 168; AN iii.41 = Vin ii.148, Vin ii.164 (parinibbāti anāsavo); AN iv.98 (aor. ˚nibbiṃsu anāsavā Thag 100 (fut. ˚nibbissati anāsavo), 364; Iti 93 (˚nibbanti), cp. 95; Dhp 126 (˚nibbanti anāsavā perhaps better taken to No. 1!); Vb 426 (sabbāsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā); Sdhp 584 (˚nibbanti mahoghen’ eva aggino) ■ pp. parinibbuto (q.v.). Caus. parinibbāpeti (q.v.).

pari + nibb˚ cp. BSk. parinirvāti Divy 150 (Buddhā Bhagavantaḥ parinirvānti & ger. parinirvātavya ibid. 402

Parinibbāyana

(nt.) passing away, see parinibbāyin 2 b.

abstr. fr. parinibbāyin

Parinibbāyin

one who attains Parinibbāna. Of the 2 meanings registered under parinibbāna we find No. 1 only in a very restricted use when taken in both senses of sa-and an-upādisesa parinibbāna; e.g. at AN ii.155 sq., where the distinction is made between a sa-sankhāra p. and an a-sankhāra p., as these two terms also occur in the fivefold classification of “Never-returners” (i.e. those who are not reborn) viz. antarā-parinibbāyin, upahacca˚, sasankhāra˚ uddhaṃsota, akaniṭṭhagāmin. Thus at DN iii.237; SN v.201, SN v.237; AN i.233; AN iv.14, AN iv.71 sq., 146, 380 v.120; Pp 16, Pp 17.

2. In the sense of Parinibbāna No. 2 (i.e. sa-upādisesa p.) we find parinibbāyin almost as an equivalent of arahant in two combns, viz. (a tattha˚; (always combd with opapātika, i.e. above the ordinary cause of birth) [cp. BSk. tatra-parinirvāyin anāgāmin Divy 533]. It is also invariably combd with anāvattidhamma, e.g. at DN i.156; DN iii.108, DN iii.132; MN ii.56, MN ii.146; AN i.232; AN i.245, AN i.290; AN ii.5, AN ii.89, AN ii.238; AN iv.12, AN iv.399 AN iv.423; AN v.343; SN v.346 (cp. 406), 357; Pp 16, Pp 62, Pp 83. See also Kvu trsl. 742 ■ (b) antara˚; [cp. BSk. antarāparinirvāyin Mvu i.33] one who passes away in the middle of his term of life in a particular heaven; an Anāgāmin (cp. Bdhgh’s expln at PugA 198 as “āyuvemajjhassa antarā yeva parinibbāyanato a. p.” SN v.69 = AN iv.70; SN v.201 = SN v.204, SN v.237, SN v.285, SN v.314, SN v.378; AN ii.134; Pts i.161; Pp 16; Ne 190 (cp. AN iv.380).

fr. parinibbāyati

Parinibbuta

(adj.) completely calmed, at peace, at rest (as to the distinction of the twofold application see parinibbāna and cp., Mrs. Rh.D. Buddhism p. 191; Cpd. p. 168), viz.

1. gone out, or passed away without any remaining cause of rebirth anywhere completely extinct, finally released (fr. rebirth & trans migration), quite dead or at rest [cp. BSk. parinirvṛta Divy 79]. It is usually applied to the Buddha, or the Tathāgata, but also to Theras & Arahants who have by means of moral & intellectual perfection destroyed all germs of further existence. With ref. to Gotama Buddha: Vin ii.284 (atikkhippaṃ Bhagavā p.), 294 (vassasata˚ e Bhagavati); v.119, 120; DN i.204 (acira-˚e Bhagavati); SN i.158 (Tathāgato p. ii.191); v.172 (˚e Tathāgate); Vv iii.97 (˚e Gotame = anupādisesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā parinibbuto Vv-a 169); Pv-a 140 (Satthari p.), 212 (Bhagavati). Of others: SN i.121, SN i.122 (Godhika); iii.124 (Vakkali); iv.63 (Puṇṇa); Snp p.59 Snp p.60 (a Thera); Mil 390 (Arahant); Vv-a 158; Pv-a 76; Dhp-a ii.163; Dhp-a iv.42.

2. emancipated, quite free (from earthly bonds), calm, serene, at peace, perfected Vin ii.156 = AN i.138 “spiritually free” Vin. Texts iii.182) DN ii.123 (cp. Dial. ii.132); iii.55; MN i.235; MN ii.102; SN i.1 (+ tiṇṇo loke visattikaṃ), 7 = iv.179 (aheṭhayāno + ); i.54 (+ tiṇṇo loke visattikaṃ); 187 (p. kankhati kālaṃ); Snp 359 (+ ṭhitatta), 370 (id.), 467 (p udaka-rahado va sīto); Thag 5 (cp. Brethren 113); Ja iv.303, Ja iv.453; Ud 85 (rāga-dosa-moha-kkhayā p.); Mil 50 (˚atta), Freq. in combn with kindred terms like sītibhūta (cooled), e.g. Vin ii.156 = AN i.138; Vv 5324 or nicchāta (without hunger), e.g. SN iii.26; SN iv.204; Iti 46; Snp 735 sq.; Iti 48 (esanānaṃ khayā), 49 (āsavānaṃ khayā).

3. (to be understood as pp. of parinibbāpeti) calmed, well trained, domesticated MN i.446 (of a horse).

pari + nibbuta

Parinimmita

at Dhs 1280 read para˚.

Paripakka

(adj.) 1. (quite) ripe, ripened, matured, developed DN i.54; SN iv.105 = DN-a i.50; AN iv.357; Dhp 260; Ja i.91, Ja i.231; Ja vi.1 (ap˚); Ud 36 (id.) Mil 194, Mil 288; Dhp-a iii.338; Kp-a 56; Thag-a 273; Pv-a 274 (su˚).

2. overripe, rotten Mil 223.

pari + pakka

Paripakkata

scattered Thig 391 (reading doubtful).

pp. of pari + pakkirati

Paripaccati

to become ripe, to heal (of a wound) Mil 112.

pari + paccati

Paripaccana

(nt.) ripening, healing (of a wound) Mil 112.

pari + paccana

Paripañhati

to question AN v.16.

denom. fr. pari + pañha

Paripaṭati

to go to ruin, to come to fall, to come to naught Mil 91 (opp. sambhavati) combd with paridhaṃsati at Nd i.5; Mil 249, Mil 265.

doublet of paripatati

Paripatati

to fall down, to fall off from (abl.) Vin ii.152 sq.; Ja v.417, Ja v.420; Pv iv.53 (bhūmiyaṃ) DN-a i.132; Pv-a 37, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 62 ■ Caus paripāteti (q.v.) ■ See also paripaṭati.

pari + patati, cp. nipatati

Paripantha

1. “way round,” edge, border; paripanthe in ambush (near a road) MN i.87; Ja iii.65. 2. obstacle, hindrance, danger. It refers esp. to danger arising out of mishaps to or bad conditions of roads in the forests. DN i.52; SN i.43; AN i.153; AN iii.252; AN v.136; Pts i.162; Ja i.395; Ja iii.268; Ja iv.17; Ja vi.57 (n. pl. ˚ayo = kilesaparipanthā C.), 75; Dhp-a i.14 (magga˚), 16 (id.), 51, 69 migānaṃ p. danger to the crops from (the nuisance of deer Ja i.143, Ja i.154saparipantha full of danger Dhp-a i.63. See also palipatha.

pari + pantha

Paripanthika

(adj.) forming or causing an obstacle AN i.161. The usual form is pāri˚; (q.v.).

fr. paripantha

Paripanna

see palipanna.

Paripāka

1. ripeness, maturity, development, perfection DN i.9 (cp. DN-a i.94); Ud 36 (pañca dhammā paripākāya saṃvattanti); Ja i.142, Ja i.148 Ja vi.236; Mil 288; Vism 116 (bodhi˚), 199; Dhp-a i.89 (˚gatatta nt. state of perfection); Thag-a 79; Pv-a 276–⁠2. overripeness, decay, collapse, only in phrase “indriyānaṃ p.,” i.e. decay of the (mental) faculties in formula defining jarā (old age) at DN ii.305; MN i.49; SN ii.2, SN ii.42 sq.; AN v.203; Nd ii.252; Dhs 644; cp. BSk indriyaparipāka Avs ii.110.

fr. pari + pac

Paripācana

(nt.) ripening, maturing, digestion Vims 351, 363, 365.

pari + pācana1

Paripācaniya

(adj.) bringing to maturity, leading to perfection, accomplishing, only in phrase vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā (5) things achieving emancipation (see Ud 36) SN iv.105 = DN-a i.50; Thag-a 273.

fr. paripācana

Paripāceti

to bring to maturity, to cause to ripen, to develop, prepare Ja vi.373 (atthaṃ p. ˚ācayitvā = vaḍḍhetvā C.); Mil 232 Mil 285, Mil 288, Mil 296 ■ pp. paripācita Vism 365.

pari + pāceti, Caus. of pacati

Paripātita

attacked, pursued, brought into difficulty Vv-a 336.

pp. of paripāteti

Paripāteti

(or ˚pāṭeti ) to cause to fall down, to bring to ruin, to attack, pursue Vin iv.115; Ja ii.208 Ja iii.380; Mil 279, Mil 367; Kp-a 73 (see App. II. p. 353 n. 9) ■ pp. paripātita (q.v.).

Caus. of paripatati. Cp. BSk. paripāṭayati to destroy Divy 417

Paripālita

guarded Vism 74.

pp. of paripāleti

Paripāleti

to watch, guard (carefully) Pv-a 130 (= rakkhati) ■ pp. paripālita (q.v.) ■ Pass ˚pāliyati Ne 105 (= rakkhitaṃ).

pari + pāleti

Paripīta

(adj.) very dear, highly valued Sdhp 571.

pari + pīta

Paripīḷita

(adj.) oppressed, vexed, injured Mil 97 (aggi-santāpa-pariḷāha˚), 303 jighacchāya).

pari + pīlita, pp. of pīḍ

Paripuochaka

(adj.) asking a question, enquiring Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386; Sdhp 90 ■ f. abstr paripucchakatā questioning Vism 132 (one of the 7 constituents of dhamma-vicaya-sambojjhanga).

fr. pari + prc̣h

Paripucchati

to ask a question, to interrogate, inquire Vin i.47 = Vin i.224; Vin ii.125; SN i.98; AN v.16; Snp 380, Snp 696 (˚iyāna ger.), 1025; Pp 41; Mil 257, Mil 408; Snp-a 111.

pari + pucchati

Paripucchā

(f.) question, interrogation Vin i.190 (uddesa + ); ii.219 (id.); AN i.285; Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386 (cp. Snp-a iii). See also uddesa.

pari + pucchā

Paripuñchati

to wipe off, stroke down Vin iii.14 (pāṇinā gattāni p.).

pari + puñchati

Paripuṇṇa

(adj.) 1. (quite) full, fulfilled, complete, finished, satisfied MN i.200 (˚sankappa), iii.276; SN ii.283; SN iv.104; SN v.315; Pts i.172 (= pariggah’ aṭṭhena parivār’ aṭṭhena, paripūr’ aṭṭhena p., i.e. acquiring keeping, fulfilling); Snp 889 (˚mānin = samatta-mānin Nd i.298), 904; Iti 40 (˚sekha); Pv iv.163; Vism 45 (˚sankappa): Pv-a 13, Pv-a 54 (˚vassa whose years are completed i.e. old enough for ordination), 68 (˚gabbha ready to be delivered), 77 (vārinā).

2, complete, i.e. not defective, perfect, sound, healthy Snp 548 (˚kāya lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya ahīn’ anga-paccangatāya ca paripuṇṇa-sarīro Snp-a 452); Mil 249.

pp. of paripūrati

Paripuṇṇatā

(f.) fullness, completeness Snp-a 452.

abstr. fr. paripuṇṇa

Paripūra

(adj.) full, complete, perfected, accomplished DN i.75; DN i.133; DN iii.94; SN ii.32; SN iv.247; SN v.269 (f. ˚ī); AN ii.77; AN v.10 sq.; Snp 205, Snp 1017; Pts i.15, Pts i.18, Pts i.49 Pts i.172; Pts ii.122; Pp 35, Pp 36. -aparipūra not completed imperfect, incomplete AN ii.77; AN iv.314 sq.; AN v.10 sq Iti 107; Pp 35, Pp 36.

-kāritā completion MN i.64, MN i.66 sq. -kārin completing fulfilling, making complete, doing to the full MN i.33 sq. 64; SN v.201; AN ii.136; AN iii.215; AN iv.380; AN v.131 sq.; Pp 37; Mil 243.

pari + pṛ;

Paripūraka

(adj.((-˚) one who fills, filling Vism 300 (niraya˚).

Paripūraṇa

(nt.) fulfilment, completion Vism 3 (sīla˚). See pāripūraṇa.

fr. paripūreti

Paripūrati

to become full or perfect Dhp 38; Ja iv.273 (devaloko p.); Mil 395 (sāmaññaṃ); fut paripūrissati Dhp-a i.309 ■ Pass. paripūriyati to be fulfilled or perfected Dhp-a i.309 ■ pp. paripuṇṇa (q.v.) ■ Caus. paripūreti (q.v.).

pari + pūrati

Paripūratta

(nt.) fullness, completeness, completion SN v.200 sq. (+ samatta).

abstr. fr. paripūra

Paripūrita

filled (to overflowing), full Pv-a 216.

pp. of paripūreti

Paripūrī

(f.) fulfilment, completion SN i.139.

fr. paripūra, but better spelt pāripūrī, q.v.

Paripūreti

to fulfil; to fill (up), make more full, supplement, fill out, add to DN i.74 (parisandeti p. parippharati; DN-a i.217 explns as “vāyunā bhastaṃ viya pūreti”); ii.221; MN iii.92; SN i.27 (devakāyaṃ) = 30; ii.29, 32; iii.93 (sāmaññatthaṃ) = AN ii.95; Iti 90; Pv ii.945 (ppr. ˚ayanto); Pp 31, Pp 35; Mil 349 (lekhaṃ); Pv-a 29 (sāgaraṃ), 30 (ñātidhammo ˚pūretabbo), 136 (vassasahassāni); Sdhp 371 ■ ppr. med ˚pūramāna DN i.103 ■ pp. paripūrita (q.v.).

Caus. of paripūrati

Paripothita

beaten, whipped Mil 188 (laguḷehi).

pp. of paripotheti

Parippharati

to pervade DN i.74 (= samantato phusati DN-a i.217); MN iii.92 sq. See also paripūreti pp. paripphuta & ˚pphuṭṭha; (q.v.).

pari + sphur

Paripphuṭṭha

filled, pervaded DN i.75; MN iii.94 (spelt here paripphuta). Cp. BSk. parisphuṭa Mvu ii.349; Mvu iii.274; Lal 33, Lal 385.

pp. of parippharati

Paripphosakaṃ

(adv.) sprinkled all round DN i.74; MN i.276; MN ii.15; MN iii.92; expld as “siñcitvā” at DN-a i.218.

either with Kern. Toev, s. v. ger. of paripphoseti (i.e. paripphosa) + kaṃ or preferably with Trenckner, Notes 80 absolutive in ˚aka (i.e. nt. formation fr. adj. paripphosa, as phenuddeha + kaṃ etc.). Cp also Geiger P.Gr. § 62. 1

Paripphosita

sprinkled all round Ja vi.51, Ja vi.481 (candana sāra˚).

pp. of paripphoseti

Paripphoseti

to sprinkle over, Vin ii.209 (udakena ˚pphositvā; so read for ˚ppositvā) AN i.257; Ja vi.566; Pv iii.102 (˚itvā = āsiñcitvā Pv-a 231) ■ pp. paripphosita (q.v.).

pari + Caus. of pruṣ

Pariplava

unsteady, wavering, swerving about Dhp 38 (= upplavana Dhp-a i.309).

fr. pari + plu

Pariplavati

to quiver, roam about, swerve Ja iii.484 (ppr. pariplavanto = upplavamāna C ■ pp paripluta (q.v.).

pari + plu

Paripluta

immersed, drenched Ja vi.78 (= nimugga C.); Dāvs iii.34.

pp. of pariplavati

Pariphandati

to tremble, quiver, throb, waver Snp 776 (cp. Nd i.46 sq.), 1145; Dhp 34 (= saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkoti Dhp-a i.289); Ja iv.93; Mil 91, Mil 249. pp. pariphandita (q.v.).

pari + spand

Pariphandita

wavered, trembled, quivered Ja iii.24.

pp. of pariphandati

Paribandha

at Thag-a 242 is C. reading for paripantha at Thig 352; also at Vism 147, Vism 152.

Paribādheti

to oppress, attack Pv-a 193 (= hiṃsati).

pari + bādh

Paribāhati

to keep out, keep away from, hinder Ja i.204 (ger ˚bāhiya); Pv-a 214 (˚bāhire).

pari + bāhati or preferably bāheti: see bahati3

Paribāhira

(adj.) external, alien to; an outsider Vin ii.140; Vin iv.283; SN i.126; Ja i.482; Ja iii.213 Nd i.144; (parimussati p. hoti, in expln of mussati Vism 54; Pv-a 131; Thag-a 204; DN-a i.30.

pari + bāhira

Paribbajati

to wander about (as a religious mendicant) Snp 74, Snp 639; Iti 109; Dhp 346, Dhp 415; Ja iv.452.

pari + vraj

Paribbaya

1. earned money, earnings, wages Ja i.156 (˚ṃ datvā), 296 (id.), 433 iv.170; Dhp-a iv.196.

2, expense, expenditure Ja ii.213 (nivāsa˚ expense for a lodging), 249, 368; iii.287 (˚ṃ karoti to invest); vi.383; Vv-a 75; Pv-a 3 (sahassaṃ sahassaṃ ˚ṃ karoti), 97 (nicca˚); Dāvs v.66.

pari + vaya, i.e. *vyaya

Paribbasāna

(adj.) abiding, staying by Snp 796 (= vasamāna Snp-a 529; sakāya diṭṭhiyā vasanti Nd i.102), 878, 880, 895.

ppr. med. of pari + vas

Paribbāja

= paribbājaka SN i.49; Snp 134; Dhp 313; Dhp-a iii.485. ˚vata the vow of a p. Thag-a 73.

Paribbājaka

a wandering man, a Wanderer, wandering religious mendicant, not necessarily Buddhist (cp. Muir, J.R.A.S. 1866, 321; Lassen, Ind. Alt ii.114, 277, 468; Vin. Texts i.41) Vin i.342; Vin iv.285 (bhikkhuñ ca sāmaṇerañ ca ṭhapetvā yo koci paribbājaka-samāpanno); DN i.157; DN iii.1 sq., 35 sq., 53 sq. 130 sq.; MN i.64, MN i.84; SN i.78; SN ii.22, SN ii.119, SN ii.139; SN iii.257 sq. SN iv.230, SN iv.251, SN iv.391 sq.; AN i.115, AN i.157, AN i.185, AN i.215; AN ii.29 sq. 176; iv.35 sq., 338, 378; v.48 sq.; Snp 537, Snp 553; Ja i.85; Ud 14, Ud 65; DN-a i.35; Pv-a 31 ■ f. paribbājikā Vin iv.285; MN i.305; SN iii.238 sq.; Ud 13, Ud 43 sq.

fr. pari + vraj

Paribbājana

(nt.) wandering about or practising the customs of a mendicant Snp-a 434.

fr. paribbajati

Paribbājayitar

one who indulges in the practice of a Wanderer, fig. one who leads a virtuous ascetic life Snp 537 (T. ˚vajjayitā). Perhaps we should read ˚bājayitvā for ˚bājayitā, cp. Snp-a 434 nikkhamet[v]ā niddhamet[v]ā.

n. ag. of paribbajati

Paribbūḷha

(adj.) encompassed, provided with, surrounded AN iii.34; Snp 301 (= parikiṇṇa Snp-a 320); Ja iv.120; Ja v.68, Ja v.322, Ja v.417; Ja vi.452.

pp. of paribrūhati

Paribbhamati

1. to walk or roam about Pv-a 6, Pv-a 47 (ito c’ ito), 63 (saṃsāre), 100, 166 (saṃsare). 2. to reel about Ja iii.288; Ja iv.407 ■ Caus. ˚bbhameti to make reel round Ja vi.155.

pari + bhamati

Paribyattatā

(f.) great distinction, clearness; wide experience, learnedness Mil 349.

pari + vyatta + tā

Paribrahaṇa

(nt.) growth, increase, promotion Thag p.2;n Cp. paribrūhana.

to bṛh, see paribrūhati & cp. late Sk. paribarhaṇā

Paribrūhati

to augment, increase, do with zest Vv-a 115 ■ Caus. ˚brūheti [cp. Sk. paribṛnhayati] to make strong, increase Ja v.361 (aparibrūhayi aor. med. with a˚ neg., i.e. was weakened, lost his strength; but expld by C. as “atibrūhesi mahāsaddaṃ nicchāresi,” thus taking it to brū to speak which is evidently a confusion) ■ pp. paribbūḷha paribrūhita; (q.v.).

pari + brūhati of bṛh2

Paribrūhana

(nt.) augmentation, increase Ne 79.

fr. paribrūhati, cp. upabrūhana

Paribrūhita

increased, furthered, strengthened Thag-a 245.

pp. of paribrūheti

Paribhaṭṭha1

fallen, dropped Ja i.482; Thag p.12n.

pp. of paribhassati of bhraś

Paribhaṭṭha2

abused, censured, scolded Ja vi.187.

pp. of paribhāsati

Paribhaṇḍa

1. a binding along the back Vin i.254, Vin i.297; Vin ii.116; Ja v.254 (v.l. ˚daṇḍa).

2. a girdle, belt Ja vi.125; Dhp-a ii.174. 3. a plastered flooring Vin ii.113, Vin ii.172, Vin ii.220; Ja iii.384 Ja iv.92; Ja v.437, Ja v.440.

4. slough of a serpent (?) Ja vi.339

5. (˚-) adj. encircling, comprehensive, in ˚ñāṇa Vism 429.

for paribandha, dialectical, see Kern, Toev. i.36, who compares Tamil panda “a surrounding wall = P. bandha. The meaning is rather uncertain, cp notes in Vin. Texts ii.154; iii.85, 213

Paribhata

nurtured, nourished MN ii.56 (sukha˚). Also in expln of pāribhaṭyatā (q.v.).

pp. of pari + bhṛ;

Paribhava

contempt, disrespect Vin iv.241; AN iii.191; Ja v.436; Ja vi.164; Vb 353 sq.; Pv-a 257.

pari + bhū

Paribhavana

(nt.) = paribhava DN-a i.255.

Paribhavati

, also paribhoti to treat with contempt, to neglect, despise SN i.69; AN iii.174 sq (˚bhoti); Ja iii.16; Ja v.442; Mil 23, Mil 259; Pv-a 266. grd. paribhotabba SN i.69; Snp p.93. (= paribhavitabba Snp-a 424) ■ Caus. paribhāveti; pp. paribhūta (q.v.).

pari + bhū

Paribhāvanā

(f.) permeation, penetration Dhs-a 163 (= vāsanā ).

fr. paribhāveti

Paribhāvita

1. penetrated, supplied, filled with, trained, set DN ii.81 (saddhā-p. cittaṃ, sīla etc.; trsl. “set round with,” cp. Dial. ii.86), cp. SN v.369; Snp 23 (cittaṃ p.; Snp-a 37 saṃvāsiya); Mil 361; Pv-a 139 (˚aya bhāvanāya codito).

2. compounded of, mixed with Ja i.380, cp. iv.407; Pv-a 191.

3. fostered treated, practised Mil 394 (bhesajjena kāyaṃ) Pv-a 257.

4. sat on (said of eggs), being hatched MN i.104; SN iii.153; AN iv.125 sq., 176.

pp. of paribhāveti

Paribhāveti

to cause to be pervaded or penetrated, to treat, supply Vin i.279 (uppalahatthāni bhesajjehi p.); Ja iv.407 ■ pp. paribhāvita (q.v.).

Caus. of paribhavati

Paribhāsa

censure, abuse, blame Ja v.373; Pv-a 175.

fr. pari + bhāṣ

Paribhāsaka

(adj.) reviling, abusing, abusive SN i.34; AN iv.79; Pv i.116 (= akkosaka Pv-a 58); iv.84; Vv-a 69. See also akkosaka.

fr. paribhāsa, cp. BSk. paribhāṣaka Divy 38

Paribhāsati

to abuse, scold, revile, censure, deiame SN i.221; SN iv.61; Vin iv.265; Snp 134, Snp 663; Ja i.112, Ja i.384 (for ˚hāsiṃsu) 469 iii.421; iv.285 (read paribhāsentī for aribhāsentī) v.294; vi.523; Pv ii.108; Pp 37; Mil 186; Pv-a 43-aor. ˚bhāsissaṃ Pv iv.85, pl. ˚bhāsimhase Pv iii.111 grd. ˚bhāsaniya Mil 186 ■ Very frequently combd with akkosati (+ p.), e.g. at Vin ii.14, Vin ii.296; Ud 44; Pv i.93; Pv-a 10 ■ pp. paribhaṭṭha2 (q.v.) ■ Caus II. ˚bhāsāpeti id. Pv i.67.

pari + bhāṣ, cp. BSk. paribhāṣate Divy 38

Paribhindati

1. to break up, split, create dissension, to set at variance Ja i.439; Ja iv.196; Ja v.229 Ja vi.368; Pv-a 13.

2. to break (see ˚bhinna) ■ pp paribhinna.

pari + bhid

Paribhinna

1. broken, broken up MN i.190 (a˚); Vv-a 184 (˚vaṇṇa of broken up appearance i.e. crumbly.).

2. set at variance, disconcerted split Vin iii.161; Ja ii.193; Dhs-a 308; Pv-a 13 ■ Cp. vi˚

pp. of paribhindati

Paribhuñjati

1. to enjoy, to use, to enjoy the use of Vin ii.109; MN i.153 (nivāpaṃ p.), 207, SN ii.29; Snp 240, Snp 241, Snp 423; Pv i.12; i.94; iv.52 (= khādituṃ Pv-a 259); Nd ii.427 (pariyesati paṭilabhati paribhuñjati) Mil 366, Mil 395 (ālopaṃ ˚bhuñjisaṃ); Pv 3, Pv 5 (modake eat up), 8, 13, 23, 47; Sdhp 394 ■ grd. ˚bhuñjiya Ja i.243 (dup˚); & ˚bhuñjitabba Pv-a 71 (with nt. abstr ˚tabbatta) ■ Pass. ˚bhuñjiyati, ppr. ˚iyamāna SN i.90–⁠2. [see bhuñjatī2] to purify, clean, cleanse MN i.25; Ja vi.75 ■ pp. paribhutta (q.v.).

pari + bhuj

Paribhuñjana

(nt.) eating Pv-a 35.

fr. paribhuñjati

Paribhutta

used, employed, made use of Vin ii.109 (su˚) Ja iii.257 (a˚); DN-a i.261 (sayaṃ ˚bhesajja); Snp-a 19.

pp. of paribhuñjati, cp. BSk. paribhukta Divy 277

Paribhūta

treated with contempt, disregarded, despised Vin iv.6; SN ii.279; Mil 229, Mil 288.

pp. of paribhavati

Paribheda

1. breaking, breaking up, falling to pieces Dhs 738, Dhs 874.

2. bursting, breaking open Pv-a 55.

fr. pari + bhid, see paribhindati

Paribhedaka

(adj.) breaking; a disturber of peace, breedbate Ja ii.173 Ja iii.168; Ja v.245; Ja vi.437.

fr. paribheda in sense of paribhindati

Paribhoga

1. material for enjoyment, food, feeding Ja i.243; Ja ii.432; Mil 156, Mil 403; Dhp-a ii.66; Snp-a 342.

2. enjoyment, use Vin iv.267; SN i.90 Nd i.262; Vism 33 (with pariyesana & paṭiggahana) Dhp-a i.60; Pv-a 25, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 220 ■ Four paribhogas are distinguished at Ja v.253 and at Vism 43, viz. theyya˚ iṇa,˚ dāyajja˚, sāmi˚. Paribhoga discussed in relation to paṭilābha at Vism 43.

-cetiya a tree, shrine etc., used by the Buddha, consequently sacred Kp-a 222.; -dhātu a relic consisting of something used by the dead Saint (opp. sarīradhātu remains of the body) Mvu 15, Mvu 163. (cp. pāribhogika-dhātu); Snp-a 579.

fr. pari + bhuj

Paribhojaniya

(or ˚īya ) (nt.) that which is used for cleaning, water for washing Vin ii.76, Vin ii.208, Vin ii.216 (˚ghaṭa), 226 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.8); iii.119 (pāniyaṃ); Ja i.416; Ja vi.75; Dhp-a i.58.

orig. grd. of paribhunjati 2

Parima

= parama (cp. Geiger P.Gr. 191) MN iii.112.

Parimajjaka

(adj.) touching, reaching (up to) Mil 343 (candasuriya˚, cp. Mvu II, candramasūrya-parimārjako maharddhiko etc.).

fr. pari + marj

Parimajjati

1. to wipe away, wipe off or out MN i.78.

2. to touch, stroke DN i.78; MN iii.12; SN ii.121; Dhp 394; Ja i.192, Ja i.305; Ja ii.395 (piṭṭhiṃ).

3. to rub, polish, groom (a horse) AN v.166, AN v.168 ■ pp. parimaṭṭha (q.v.).

pari + majjati

Parimajjana

(nt.) 1. wiping off or out Pp 33 (ukkhali˚).

2. rubbing, grooming (a horse AN v.166, AN v.168 (ājānīya˚).

fr. parimajjati

Parimaṭṭha

rubbed, stroked, polished, in su˚ well polished SN ii.102. See also palimaṭṭha.

pp. of parimajjati

Parimaṇḍala

(adj.) 1. round, circular Ja i.441; Ja ii.406 (āvāṭa); vi.42; Pv iv.328 (guḷa˚); Dhs 617 (expld at Dhs-a 317 as “egg-shaped,” kukkuṭ-aṇḍasaṇṭhāna) ■ nt. as adv. in phrase ˚ṃ nivāseti to dress or cover oneself all round Vin i.46; Vin ii.213; Vin iv.185 (nābhimaṇḍalaṃ jānu-maṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentena C.; cp timaṇḍala).

2. rounded off, i.e. complete, correct pleasant, in phrase ˚āni padavyañjanāni well sounding words and letters, correct speech Vin ii.316; MN i.216; AN i.103; DN-a i.282; Snp-a 177, Snp-a 370.

pari + maṇḍala

Parimaddati

1. to rub, crush, rub off, treat, shampoo, massage Ja iv.137 (sarīraṃ examine the body) Mil 241 ■ Of leather (i.e. treat) MN i.128.

2. to go together with, to frequent Dhp-a i.90 (samayaṃ p.) ■ pp parimaddita (q.v.).

pari + mṛd

Parimaddana

(nt.) rubbing, kneading, shampooing, massage; usually in stock phrase (kāyo anicc’-ucchādana-parimaddana-bhedana-viddhaṃsanadhammo DN i.76 (cp. DN-a i.88, but trsld at Dial. i.87 as “subject to erasion, abrasion, dissolution and disintegration”); MN i.500; SN iv.83; Ja i.416. See further DN i.7; AN i.62; AN iv.54 (ucchādana-p ■ nahāpana-sambāhana); Mil 241 (ucchādana˚); Sdhp 578.

fr. pari + mṛd

Parimaddita

crushed, rubbed, treated MN i.129 (su˚ well-treated).

pp. of parimaddati

Parimaddhita

brought to an end or standstill, destroyed Ja i.145 (˚sankhāra).

pp. of pari + maddheti, Caus. of mṛdh to neglect

Parimasati

to touch, stroke, grasp (usually combd with parimajjati), DN i.78; DN ii.17; MN i.34, MN i.80 MN iii.12; SN ii.121; SN iv.173; AN iii.70 ■ pp. parimaṭṭha (same as pp. of parimajjati ), q.v.

pari + mṛś

Parimāṇa

(nt.) measure, extent, limit, as adj. (-˚) measuring, extending over, comprising Ja i.45; Snp-a 1 (pariyatti˚); Pv-a 113 (yojana˚), 102 (anekabhāra˚) ■ neg. aparimāṇa without limit, immeasurable very great Vin ii.62, Vin ii.70; SN v.430; AN ii.182 Kp-a 248; DN-a i.288 (˚vaṇṇa); Pv-a 110, Pv-a 129.

of pari +

Parimārita

mortified, only in phrase ˚indriya Ja i.361; Ja iii.515; Ja iv.9, Ja iv.306 Ja v.152; Dāvs i.16.

pp. of pari + māreti, Caus. of mṛ;

Parimita

measured, restricted, limited, only in neg. ; measureless Pv ii.811; Mil 287, Mil 343.

pp. of parimināti

Parimitatta

(nt.) the condition of being measured Pv-a 254.

fr. parimita

Parimināti

to measure, mete out, estimate, limit, restrict; inf. ˚metuṃ Mil 192; Thag-a 26; and ˚minituṃ Mil 316; grd. ˚meyya (q.v.) ■ pp. parimita (q.v.).

pari +

Parimeyya

(adj.) to be measured, neg. a˚ countless, immeasurable Mil 331, Mil 388; Pv-a 212.

grd. of parimināti

Parimukha

(adj.) facing, in front; only as nt. adv. ˚ṃ in front, before, in phrase parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapeti “set up his memory in front” (i.e. of the object of thought), to set one’s mindfulness alert Vin i.24; DN ii.291; MN i.56, MN i.421; SN i.170; AN iii.92; Iti 80; Pts i.176 (expld); Pp 68; DN-a i.210. Also in phrase ˚ṃ kārāpeti (of hair) Vin ii.134 “to cut off (? the hair in front” (i.e. on the breast) Vin. Texts iii.138 where is quoted Bdhgh’s expln “ure loma-saṃharaṇaṃ.”

pari + mukha

Parimuccati

to be released, to be set free, to escape Vin ii.87; MN i.8; SN i.88, SN i.208; SN ii.24, SN ii.109 SN iii.40, SN iii.150, SN iii.179; Mil 213, Mil 335 (jātiyā etc.) aor. ˚mucci MN i.153 ■ pp. parimutta; Caus. parimoceti (q.v.).

Pass. of pari + muc

Parimuṭṭha

forgetful, bewildered Vin i.349 = Ja iii.488 (= muṭṭhassati C.); cp. Vin. Texts ii.307.

pari + muṭṭha, pp. of mussati, cp. pamuṭṭha

Parimutta

released, set free, delivered SN iii.31.

pp. of parimuccati

Parimutti

(f.) release Ja i.4 (v. 20); Mil 112, Mil 227; Pv-a 109.

fr. pari + muc

Parimussati

to become bewildered or disturbed, to vanish, fall off Nd i.144.

pari + mussati

Parimoceti

to set free, deliver, release DN i.96; Ja i.28 (v. 203); Mil 334; DN-a i.263; Dhp-a i.39.

Caus. of parimuccati

Parimohita

(adj.) very confused, muddled, dulled, bewildered, infatuated Sdhp 206.

pp. of pari + Caus. of muh

Pariya

encompassing, fathoming, comprehending (as ger.); penetration, understanding (as n.) Only in phrase ceto-pariya-ñāṇa knowledge encompassing heart or mind (cp. phrase cetasā ceto paricca DN ii.82 sq. (v.l. ˚āya); iii.100 (v.l. ˚āye); DN-a i.223 (corresp. with pubbe-nivāsa-ñāṇa); with which alternates the phrase indriya-paro-pariya-ñāṇa in same meaning (see indriya cpds. & remark on paropariya Ja i.78 ■ See also pariyatta1 pariyatti, pariyāya 3 and cpds. of ceto.

either short form of pariyāya, or ger. of pari + ī substantivised (for the regular form paricca) representing an ending -ya instead of -tya.-Bdhgh at Vism 409 takes pariya as nt., but seems to mix it with the idea of a ppr. by defining it as “pariyātī ti pariyaṃ paricchindatī ti attho”

Pariyañña

supreme or extraordinary offering or sacrifice Snp-a 321, Snp-a 322.

pari + yañña

Pariyatta1

(nt.) learning understanding, comprehension, only in phrase indriyaparo pariyatta (-ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the intentions of others AN v.34, AN v.38; Pts i.121 sq.; Vb 340.

abstr. fr. pariya (pari + i ) but confused with pariyatta2 & pariyatti fr. pari + ; āp

Pariyatta2

(adj.) (a) capable of, mastered, kept in mind learned by heart; only in phrase dhammo ca vinayo ca p. Vin ii.285 = Kp-a 92; DN iii.241 sq. (yathā sutaṃ yathā p˚ṃ dhammaṃ) ■ (b) sufficient, enough Pv-a 33 (= alaṃ)

cp. Sk. paryāpta. pp. of pari + āp, see pāpuṇāti

Pariyatti

(f.) adequacy, accomplishment, sufficiency capability, competency; indriya-paro˚; efficiency in the (knowledge of) thoughts of others SN v.205; Ne 101 Three accomplishments are distinguished at DN-a i.21 sq. viz. alagadd-ûpamā (like a serpent), nissaraṇatthā (on account of salvation) and bhaṇḍâgārika˚ (of a treasurer) apariyatti-kara bringing no advantage Dhp-a i.71.

2 accomplishment in the Scriptures, study (learning by heart) of the holy texts Vism 95. Also the Scriptures themselves as a body which is handed down through oral tradition. In this meaning the word is only found in later, dogmatic literature; -tīsu piṭakesu tividho pariyatti-bhedo DN-a i.21. At Snp-a 494 it is classed with paccaya dhutaṅga & adhigama; as a part of paṭibhāna at Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386. pariyattiṃ uggaṇhāti to undertake the learning (of the Scriptures) Dhp-a ii.30; cp Kp-a 91 (tipiṭaka-sabba-p ■ pabheda- dhara ); Ja ii.48 (˚ṃ ṭhapetvā leaving the learning aside); Mil 115, Mil 215 Mil 345, Mil 411 (āgama˚)abl. pariyattito through learning by heart Snp-a 195 (opp. to atthato according to the meaning).

-dhamma that which belongs to the holy study, part or contents of the Scriptures, the Tipiṭaka comprising the nine divisions (see navanga Buddha-sāsana) Kp-a 191, Kp-a 193; Snp-a 328; Pv-a 2; cp. ˚sāsana. -dhara knowing the Scriptures by heart Mil 21. -dhura (= ganthadhura): see vāsadhura. -paṭibhānavant possessed of intelligence as regards learning the Scriptures Snp-a 111. -parimāṇa extent of study Snp-a 1, Snp-a 608 -bahula clever in the study of the Dhamma AN iii.86 -bahussuta versed in the Scriptures Snp-a 110. -sāsana object, instruction of the Scriptures, code of the holy Texts (cp. ˚dhamma) Nd i.143; Dhp-a iv.39.

fr. pari + āp, cp. Epic Sk. paryāpti & P. pariyāpuṇāti

Pariyanta

1. limit, end, climax, border SN i.80 (manāpa˚ “limit-point in enjoyment”; cp. C. nipphattikaṃ koṭikaṃ K.S. 320) Ja i.149 (hattha-pāda˚ hoofs), 221 (udaka˚), 223 (sara˚) ii.200 (angana˚); Pv ii.1312; Dhp-a iii.172 (parisa˚). 2. limit, boundary, restriction, limitation Vin ii.59, Vin ii.60 (āpatti˚); Nd i.483 (distinguishes between 4 pariyantā with ref. to one’s character, viz. sīlasaṃvara˚ indriyasaṃvara˚ bhojane mattaññutā˚, jāgariyânuyoga˚). 3. (adj ■ ˚) bounded by, limited by, surrounded, ending in Vin iv.31; MN iii.90; SN ii.122 (āyu˚); AN i.164 (id.) Snp 577 (bhedana˚); Pv i.1013 (parikkhitta Pv-a 52)- apariyanta (adj.) boundless, limitless Pv-a 58, Pv-a 166.

-kata restricted, limited, bounded Nd ii.taṇhāiii (with sīmakata & odhikata; v.l. pariyanti˚, cp. BSk. paryantīkṛta “finished” Divy 97, Divy 236). -cārin living in selfrestriction Snp 964 (cp. Nd i.483). -dassāvin seeing the limit AN v.50. -rahita without limits Dhp-a iii.252.

pari + anta, cp. Sk. paryanta

Pariyantavant

(adj.) having a limit, having a set or well-defined purpose; f. ˚vatī (vācā) discriminating speech DN i.4 = MN iii.49 = Pp 58; expld as “paricchedaṃ dassetvā yatha ‘ssa paricchedo paññāyati, evaṃ bhāsatī ti attho” DN-a i.76 = PugA 238.

fr. pariyanta

Pariyantika

(adj.) (-˚) ending in, bounded or limited by SN ii.83 = AN ii.198 (kāya-p. ˚ā & jīvita-p ˚ā vedanā); Vism 69 (bhojana˚, udaka˚, āsana˚) Sdhp 440 (kāla˚ sīla).

fr. pariyanta

Pariyaya

revolution, lapse of time, period term Ja iii.460 (= kālapariyāya C.); v.367 (kāla˚).

cp. Epic Sk. paryaya, pari + i; the usual P. form is pariyāya, but at the foll. passages the short a is required metri causa

Pariyā

(f.) winding round, turning round; of a tree, branch Ja vi.528 (duma˚; read ˚pariyāsu with v.l. instead of T. pariyāyesu; C. expls by sākhā).

fr. pari +

Pariyāgata

having come to, reached, attained Ja vi.237 (phalaṃ; C = upagata), 238 (kusalaṃ C. = pariyāyena attano vārena āgata).

pari + ā + gata

Pariyāgāra

(adj.) having the house all round, entirely surrounded by the house Vin iii.119 (of gabbha).

pari + āgāra

Pariyāti

1. to go round (acc.) Ja i.307.

2. to come near Ja ii.440.

pari +

Pariyādāti

to take up in an excessive degree, to exhaust. Only in secondary forms of med-pass ādiyati, pp. ˚ādinna, ger. ādāya (q.v.).

pari + ādāti

Pariyādāna

(nt.) “taking up completely,” i.e. using up, consummation, consumption finishing, end MN i.487 (kaṭṭha˚, opp. to upādāna) SN i.152; SN iii.16 sq. (cetaso p., cp. pariyādāya & ˚dinna) iv.33 (sabb’ upādāna˚) AN ii.139; Ja v.186. Cp. BSk paryādāna Divy 4, Divy 55, Divy 100 ■ Esp. in foll. phrases āsava˚ & jīvita˚; DN i.46 (jīvita-pariyādānā abl., expld at Dhp i.128 as “jīvitassa sabbaso pariyādinnattā parikkhīṇattā puna appaṭisandhika-bhāvā ti attho”) SN ii.83 = AN ii.198; SN iii.126; SN iv.213; AN iv.13, AN iv.146 Pp 13; Mil 397; and combd with parikkhaya in ˚ṃ gacchati to be exhausted or consummated AN v.173 Snp p.126; Mil 102; Pv-a 147, cp. BSk. parikṣayaṃ paryādānaṃ gacchati Divy 567; Avs i.48; Avs ii.193.

pari + ādāna, opp. upādāna

Pariyādāya

(indecl.) 1. taking all round, summing up, completely Nd ii.533 (in expln of ye keci, as synonymous with sabbato, i.e. for completeness exhaustively).

2. exhausting, overpowering, enticing, taking hold of, as cittaṃ p. “taking hold of the mind” MN i.91; Iti 19; Dhp-a i.15.

3. losing control over, giving out (cittaṃ ) SN iii.16; SN iv.125. In absolute sense perhaps at SN v.51 = AN iv.127 (with vv. ll pariyenāya & pariyāya).;

ger. of pariyādati

Pariyādinna

1. (Pass. exhausted, finished, put an end to, consummated Vin i.25 (tejo); DN ii.8 = MN iii.118; SN ii.133 sq. (dukkhaṃ parikkhīṇaṃ + ); v.461 sq ■ neg. apariyādinna not finished, not exhausted MN i.79 (muttakarīsaṃ ˚ādiṇṇaṃ), 83 (dhammadesanā ādiṇṇā); SN ii.178 sq.

2 (Med.) having exhausted, lost control over, being overcome (usually ˚citta adj.) Vin ii.185; MN ii.172; SN ii.228 Nd ii.32; Pv-a 279.

often spelt ˚diṇṇa, e.g. in vv.ll. at DN ii.8; MN ii.172; MN iii.118 ■ pp. of pariyādiyati

Pariyādinnatta

(nt.) exhaustion, consummation DN-a i.128.

abstr. fr. pariyādinna

Pariyādiyati

1. to put an end to exhaust, overpower, destroy, master, control SN iii.155 (rāgaṃ); Nd ii.under parisahati ■ Pot. ˚ādiyeyyaṃ Vin i.25 (tejaṃ) ■ ger. ˚adiyitvā Vin i.25 (tejaṃ) iv.109 (id.); SN i.84 (trsl. “confiscate”).

2. to become exhausted, give out Ja v.186 (udakaṃ); Mil 297 (cittaṃ p.; opp. to parivaḍḍhati) ■ pp. pariyādinna (q.v.).

sometimes spelt ˚diyyati, e.g. Nd ii.s. v.; pari + ādiyati, q.v. for etym. ref.

Pariyāpajjati

to be finished AN iv.339. - pp. pariyāpanna (q.v.) ■ Caus. pariyāpādeti (q.v.).

pari + āpajjati

Pariyāpadāna

(nt.) good advice, application trick, artfulness, artifice Ja v.361, Ja v.369. (C. explns as parisuddha after v.l. pariyodāta which was prob misread for pariyodāna), 370.

pari + apadāna, the latter for ava˚, and metrical lengthening of a

Pariyāpanna

1. “gone completely into,” included in, belonging to, got into Vin i.46 (patta˚ that which has been put into the bowl); DN i.45 (= ābaddha DN-a i.127); Snp-a 397 (milakkhabhāsa˚ etc.); Kp-a 136 (vinaya˚), 191 (sangha˚) Dhp-a i.158 (idhaloka-paraloka˚); Pv-a 14, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 59, Pv-a 129 (devaloka˚), 150.

2. accomplished (i.e. gone into the matter), thorough, mastering (said of vācā ) SN ii.280 = AN ii.51.

3. (˚ā dhammā) the Included, viz. all that is contained in the threefold cycle of existence (i.e. the worlds of sense, form & formless) Dhs 1268 Vb 12, Vb 15, Vb 19 & passim; Dhs-a 50. Opp. apariyāpannā (dhammā) the Unincluded (viz. all that is exempt from this cycle) Pts i.101; Dhs 583 (cp. Dhs trsln 165, 254, 329, 332), 992, 1242; Kv 507.

pari + āpanna, cp. adhipanna

Pariyāpannatta

(nt.) includedness Snp-a 174.

abstr. fr. pariyāpanna

Pariyāpādeti

to finish off, i.e. put to death completely SN iv.308 sq. = AN iii.94.

Caus. of pariyāpajjati

Pariyāpuṇana

(nt.) mastery over, accomplishment in (gen.) Vism 442 (Buddhavacanassa).

abstr. formn fr. pariyāpuṇāti

Pariyāpuṇāti

1. to learn (by heart), to master, to gain mastership over, to learn thoroughly Vin iv.305 (parittaṃ a charm) DN i.117 (= jānāti DN-a i.117); AN iii.86 (dhammaṃ); fut pariyāpuṇissati Dhp-a i.382 (dhammaṃ); ger. pariyāpuṇitvā SN i.176; SN ii.120; Snp-a 195 (nikāyaṃ).

2. (with inf.) to know (to do something), to be able to Vin ii.109 (aor. ˚iṃsu), 121 ■ pp. pariyāputa and pariyatta (q.v.).

pari + āp, cp. BSk. paryavāpnoti Divy 613

Pariyāputa

1. learned by heart, known Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386 (Buddhavacana).

2 learned, accomplished DN-a i.21 ■ See also pariyatta2.

pp. of pariyāpuṇāti

Pariyāya

lit. “going round” analysed by Bdhgh in 3 diff. meanings, viz. vāra (turn, course) desanā (instruction, presentation), and kāraṇa (cause reason, also case, matter), see DA i.36 and cp. Kindred Sayings i.320.

1. arrangement, disposition, in phrase ˚ṃ karoti to arrange DN i.179 (trsln takes it literally “departure,” i.e. going out of one’s way, détour; or change of habit, see Dial i.245); MN i.252, MN i.326; MN iii.7 MN iii.62; SN i.142 (trsl. “make occasion” [for coming]). 2. order, succession, turn, course (= vāra) DN i.166 (˚bhatta i.e. feeding in turn or at regular intervals expld as vāra -bhatta PugA 232); MN i.78, MN i.282, MN i.481; SN ii.51 sq.; AN ii.206; Ja v.153 (= vāra); Pv-a 242 (aparā˚)

3. what goes on, way, habit, quality, property SN i.146 (ceto˚; habits of mind, thoughts, but see also pariya ); AN v.160 (citta˚, see ceto).

4. discussion instruction, method (of teaching), discourse on (-˚) representation of (-˚) (= desanā); thus āditta˚ (of Vin i.34) Dhp-a i.88; esp. in cpd. dhamma˚; disquisition on the Dhamma DN i.46; DN ii.93; MN i.83; MN iii.67; SN ii.74 SN v.357; AN iii.62; AN iv.166, AN iv.381; Snp p.218; also in foll. vitakka˚ MN i.122; deva˚ AN iii.402 sq.; peta˚ Pv-a 92 cp. Vism 41 (˚kathā).

5. in Abhidhamma terminology specifically: pariyāyena, the mode of teaching in the Suttanta, ad hominem, discursively, applied method, illustrated discourse, figurative language as opposed to the abstract, general statements of Abhidhamma = nippariyāyena, nippariyāyato Vism 473 Vism 499; cp. Dhs-a 317 (figuratively).

6. mode, manner reason, cause, way (= kāraṇa ) DN i.185 (iminā ˚ena), 186 (id.); ii.339 (ayaṃ p. yena ˚ena); DN-a i.106 (tena tena ˚ena in some way or other); Dhs-a 366 (iminā ˚ena for this reason); esp. in phrase aneka -pariyāyena in many (or various) ways Vin i.16, Vin i.45; DN i.1 (cp. DN-a i.36), 174; MN i.24; AN i.56; Snp p.15.

7. winding round (of a tree: branch), in doubtful reading at Ja vi.528 (see pariyā ) ■ See also nippariyāya.

fr. pari + i, cp. Class. Sk. paryāya in all meanings, already Vedic in meaning of “formula,” in liturgy, cp. below 4

Pariyāhata

struck out, affected with (-˚), only in phrase takka˚; “beaten out by argumentations” DN i.16 (cp. DN-a i.106); MN i.520.

pari + āhata

Pariyāhanana

(nt.) striking, beating Vism 142 (āhanana˚; in exposition of vitakka) = Dhs-a 114 (“circumimpinging” Expos. 151).

fr. pari + ā + han

Pariyiṭṭha

sought, desired, looked for SN iv.62 (a˚); Mil 134; Vism 344 (˚āhāra).

pp. of pariyesati

Pariyiṭṭhi

= pariyeṭṭhi Snp 289 (Snp-a 316 reads pariyeṭṭhi). Perhaps we should read pariyeṭṭhuṃ (see pariyesati).

Pariyukkhaṇṭhati

to have great longing, to be distressed Ja v.417, Ja v.421 (mā ˚kaṇṭhi).

pari + ukkaṇṭhati

Pariyuṭṭhati

to arise, pervade; intrs. to become prepossessed, to be pervaded Dhs-a 366 (cittaṃ p.; corā magge pariyuṭṭhiṃsu) ■ pp. pariyuṭṭhita (q.v.).

pari + uṭṭhāti

Pariyuṭṭhāna

(nt.) state of being possessed (or hindered) by (-˚), prepossession bias, outburst MN i.18, Kvu xiv.6 (thīnamiddha˚), 136; AN i.66 (˚ajjhosāna); v.198 (adhiṭṭhāna-˚samuṭṭhāna) Nd ii.under taṇhāii (= Dhs 1059, where trsln is “pervading,” based on expln at Dhs-a 366: uppajjamānā [scil. taṇhā] cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāti, and allegorical interpretation ibid.: the heart becomes possessed by lust as a road by highwaymen); Pp 21 (avijjā˚); Vb 383 (where 7 pariyuṭṭhānā [sic! pl. m.] are enumd in the same set as under headings of anusaya & saṃyojana; thus placing p. into the same category as these two) Dhs 390, Dhs 1061 (avijjā˚), 1162 (id.); Ne 13, Ne 14, Ne 18, Ne 37 Ne 79 sq.; Dhs-a 238; Thag-a 80; Vism 5 (with vītikkama & anusaya). Cp. also; adhiṭṭhāna.

pari + uṭṭhāna, it is doubtful whether this connection is correct, in this case the meaning would be “over-exertion.” BSk. paryavasthāna points to another connection, see Divy 185

Pariyuṭṭhita

possessed by (the C. expln as given K.S. 320 is “abhibhūta”) biassed, taken up by, full of (-˚) MN i.18; MN iii.14; SN iv.240 (maccheramala˚ ceto); AN i.281; AN ii.58; Iti 43 (diṭṭhigatehi); Kvu i.91 (kāma-rāga˚); Thag-a 78 Sdhp 581.

-citta whose heart is possessed by (-˚) DN ii.104 (Mārena); Pv-a 142 (maccheramala˚), 195 (id.), 279 (kilesasamudācārena). -ṭṭhāyin being rooted in prepossession affected by bias, SN iii.3 sq. (so read for pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin ).

pari + uṭṭhita, with v.l. at DN ii.104 parivuṭṭhita and BSk. rendering paryavasthita: see remarks on pariyuṭṭhāna and Dial. ii.111

Pariyudāharati

to utter solemnly, to proclaim aloud Dhs-a 1 (aor. ˚āhāsi).

pari + udāharati

Pariyeṭṭhi

search for DN i.222; AN i.93 (āmisa˚ & dhamma˚); iii.416; Snp 289 (vijjācaraṇa˚) Ja i.14; Ne 1, Ne 5; DN-a i.271.

pari + eṭṭhi of esati, ā + iṣ

Pariyeti

to go about, to go round, encircle, encompass; ger. paricca (q.v.). The pp. is represented by pareta, see also pareti which seems to stand for pariyeti.

pari + i

Pariyena

going round, walking round; of a ship: sailing round, tour, voyage SN v.51 (pariyenāya, v.l. pariyādāya) = AN iv.127 (reads pariyādāya v.l. pariyāya). Reading is doubtful.

fr. pari + i, cp. Sk. *paryayana

Pariyesati

to seek for, look, search, desire DN i.223 (˚esamāna ppr.); Snp 482 (id.); SN i.177, SN i.181 SN iv.62; AN ii.23, AN ii.25, AN ii.247; Nd i.262; Nd ii.427 (+ paṭilabhati and paribhuñjati); Ja i.3, Ja i.138; Mil 109, Mil 313; Dhp-a iii.263 (ppr. ˚esanto); Pv-a 31; Sdhp 506 ■ grd ˚esitabba SN ii.130; inf. ˚esituṃ Snp-a 316; and ˚eṭṭhuṃ (conj. ˚iṭṭhuṃ?) Snp 289 (cp. Snp-a 316 which gives reading ˚eṭṭhuṃ as gloss); ger. ˚esitvā Snp-a 317, Snp-a 414-pp. pariyesita & pariyiṭṭha; (q.v.). Cp. for similar formation & meaning; ajjhesati with pp. ajjhesita ajjhiṭṭha ■ Cp. vi˚.;

pari + esati, cp. BSk. paryeṣate to investigate Avs i.339. The P. word shows confusion between esati & icchati, as shown by double forms ˚iṭṭhuṃ etc See also anvesati

Pariyesanā

(f.) & ˚na (nt.) search, quest, inquiry (a) (˚nā ) DN ii.58, DN ii.61, DN ii.280 (twofold, viz. sevitabbā and asevitabbā); iii.289; MN i.161 (twofold, viz ariyā & anariyā); AN ii.247 (id.); SN i.143; SN ii.144, SN ii.171 SN iii.29; SN iv.8 sq. (assāda˚ & ādīnava˚); AN i.68 (kāma˚) 93 ■ (b) (˚na) Nd i.262 (˚chanda, + paṭilābha˚ & paribhoga˚); Dhp-a iii.256 (kāmaguṇe ˚ussukka). With paṭiggahaṇa & paribhoga at Dhp-a i.75.

fr. pariyesati

Pariyesita

searched, sought for, desired Iti 121. See also pariyiṭṭha.

pp. of pariyesati

Pariyoga

cauldron (see Kern, Toev. s. v.) Mil 118.

fr. pari + yuj

Pariyogāya

at MN i.480 is contracted form (ger.) of pariyogāhitvā (so expld by C.).

Pariyogāḷha

dived into, penetrated into, immersed in (loc.) Vin i.181; DN i.110; MN i.380; SN ii.58; SN iv.328; Vb 329; Mil 283.

-dhamma one who has penetrated into the Dhamma Vin i.16; AN iv.186, AN iv.210; Ud 49.

pp. of pariyogāhati, see also ogādha1

Pariyogāha

diving into, penetration; only in cpd. dup˚; hard to penetrate, unfathomable SN iv.376; Mil 70. Pariyogahati & gaheti;

pari + ogāha

Pariyogāhati & ˚gāheti

to penetrate, fathom, scrutinise AN ii.84; AN iv.13, AN iv.145 sq. (paññāya) Ja i.341; Pp 33 (a˚), 48 sq. Cp. ajjhogāhati.

pari + ogāhati

Pariyogāhana

(nt.) & ā (f.) plunging into, penetration Pts i.106, Pts i.112; Pts ii.183; Dhs 390 (a˚) 425 (a˚); Pp 21 (a˚); Dhs-a 260.

pari + ogāhana

Pariyottharati

to spread all over (intrs.) Mil 197.

pari + ottharati

Pariyodapana

(nt.) & ā (f.), cleansing, purification AN i.207 (cittassa); Dhp 183 (= vodāpana Dhp-a iii.237); Ne 44. In BSk. distorted to paryādapana Mvu iii.12 (= Dhp 183).

fr. pariyodapeti

Pariyodapita

cleansed, purified Ne 44 (cittaṃ).

pp. of pariyodapeti

Pariyodapeti

to cleanse, purify MN i.25; Dhp 88 (= vodapeti parisodheti Dhp-a ii.162; Ne 44; Thag-a 237 (indriyāni) ■ pp. pariyodāta & pariyodapita; (q.v.).

pari + odapeti, of Caus. of 4 to clean

Pariyodāta

(adj.) 1. very clean, pure, cleansed, mostly combd with parisuddha (+ ) DN i.75, DN i.76 (+ ); MN i.26; SN i.198; SN iii.235 (+ ) v.301; AN iii.27 (+ ); iv.120 sq.; Ja v.369 (+ ; see pariyāpadāna); Pp 60; DN-a i.219; Dhp-a iv.72 (+ ); Vv-a 138.

2. very clever, accomplished, excellent [cp BSk. paryavadāta in same meaning at Divy 100; Ja iii.281 (˚sippa); Vism 136 (id.).

pari + odāta, cp. pariyodapeti

Pariyodāpaka

(adj.) cleansing, purifying Vism 149 (ñāṇa).

fr. pariyodapeti

Pariyodha

defence AN i.154.

pari + yodha

Pariyonaddha

covered over, enveloped DN i.246; DN iii.223 (a˚); MN i.25; SN v.263; AN ii.211 (uddhasta + ); iv.86; Ja i.30; Mil 161; Snp-a 596 (= nivuta); Dhp-a iii.199; Pv-a 172 (taca˚).

pp. of pariyonandhati, cp. onaddha & BSk. paryavanaddha “overgrown” Divy, 120, 125.

Pariyonandhati

to tie down, put over, envelop, cover up Vin ii.137; SN v.122; Ja iii.398; Dhp-a iii.153 ■ pp. pariyonaddha (q.v.).

pari + avanandhati

Pariyonandhana

(nt.) covering DN-a i.135; Dhp-a iii.198.

fr. above

Pariyonāha

enveloping, covering DN i.246 (= nīvaraṇa); Dhs 1157 (cp. Dhs trsl. 311); Mil 300.

pari + onāha

Pariyosāna

(nt.) 1. end, finish, conclusion Ja i.106 (sacca˚ = desanā˚); Pv-a 9 (desanā and passim), 136 (āyūha˚), 162 (id.), 281 (= anta) Often contracted with ādi beginning & majjha middle (see e.g. Snp-a 327), esp. in phrase ādi-kalyāṇa majjhe; kalyāṇa ˚kalyāṇa with reference to the Dhamma (expld as “ekagāthā pi hi samanta-bhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapadena ādik˚ dutiyatatiya-padehi majjhe k pacchima-padena pariyosānak˚” etc. at Snp-a 444), e.g. DN i.62; Iti 111 & passim.

2. end, i.e. perfection, ideal Arahantship (see on these fig. meanings and its appl;n to Nibbāna DN-a i.175, DN-a i.176) DN i.203 (brahmacariya + ) ii.283 (cp. Dial. ii.316); iii.55 (brahmacariya + ) SN v.230; AN iii.363 (nibbāna˚), 376 (brahmacariya˚) Vism 5.

pari + osāna of ava +

Pariyosāpeti

1. to make fulfil Vin iii.155; DN-a i.241; Thag-a 159 (for khepeti Thig 168).

2. to bring to an end, to finish Vism 244.

Caus. of pari + ava + , Sk. syati, of which pp. pariyosita cp. osāpeti

Pariyosita

1. finished, concluded, satisfied, DN ii.224; MN i.12 (paripuṇṇa + ).

2. [pp. of pari + ava + śri, cp. ajjhosita] fixed on, bent on Mil 140 (˚sankappa).

pp. of pari + ava +

Parirakkhaṇa

(nt.) guarding, preserving, keeping Mil 356, Mil 402; Pv-a 130.

fr. pari + rakṣ

Parirakkhati

to guard, protect; preserve, maintain Snp 678 (pot. ˚rakkhe) Mil 410; Sdhp 413, Sdhp 553 (sīlaṃ).

pari + rakṣ, cp. abhirakkhati

Parirañjita

dyed, coloured; fig. marked or distinguished by (instr.) Mil 75.

pari + rañjita

Pariḷāha

burning, fever; fig fever of passion, consumption, distress, pain DN iii.238 (avigata˚), 289 (˚nānatta); MN i.101 (kāme); SN ii.143 sq (˚nānatta), 151 (kāma˚; vyāpāda˚, vihiṃsā˚); iii.7 sq (taṇhā, pipāsā, p.), 190 (vigata˚); iv.387; v.156 (kāyasmiṃ), 451 (jāti˚, jarā˚); AN i.68 (kāma˚), 137 (rāgaja mohaja etc.); ii.197 (vighāta); iii.3, 245 sq., 388 sq. iv.461 sq.; Snp 715 (= rāgajo vā dosajo vā appamattako pi p. Snp-a 498); Dhp 90 (cp. Dhp-a ii.166: duvidho p kāyiko cetasiko ca); Nd ii.374 (kāma˚); Ja ii.220; Mil 97, Mil 165, Mil 318; Thag-a 41, Thag-a 292; Vv-a 44; Pv-a 230.

pari + ḍāha of ḍah, cp. pariḍahati. On change of ḍ and ḷ see Geiger, P.Gr. § 423

Parillaka

Name of a bird (C. on Thag 49).

cp. Sk. pirilī, pirillī Bṛh. Saṃh. 86, 44

Parivaccha

(nt.) being active, preparation, outfit Ja v.46; Ja vi.21 (gamana˚); Dhp-a i.207 (gloss & v.l. gamana-parisajja), 395 (v.l. parisajja).;

Note. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. parivaccha is wrong spelling for parivacca which is abstr. from pariyatta (*pariyatya), with va for ya as in pavacchati pavecchati = Sk. prayacchati.

formation from ger. of pari + vrt, corresp. to *parivṛtyaṃ (?)

Parivajjana

(nt.) avoiding, avoidance MN i.7, MN i.10; AN iii.387, AN iii.389; Mil 408; Vism 33. As f ˚ā at Vism 132, and ibid. as abstr. parivajjanatā.

fr. pari + vṛj

Parivajjeti

to shun, avoid, keep away from (acc.) MN i.10; SN i.69, SN i.102, SN i.188, SN i.224; Snp 57 (= vivajjeti Nd ii.419), 395 sq., 768 (kāme, cp Nd i.6), 771; Iti 71; Dhp 123 (pāpāni), 269; Ja iv.378 (fut. ˚essati); Pv iv.146 (nivesanaṃ); iv.177 (loke adinnaṃ ˚ayassu); Mil 91 (grd. ˚ajjayitabba), 300, 408; Pv-a 150 (v.l. ˚ajjati), 221 (jīvitaṃ, for vijahati, better read with v.l. pariccajati ).

pari + vajjeti, Caus. of vṛj

Parivaṭuma

(?) (adj.) forming a circle, circular DN i.22 (trsld “a path could be traced round it” Dial. i.36). Can it be misspelling for pariyanta? Kern, Toev. s. v. equals it to Sk. parivartman, and adds reference ˚kata “bounded (syn. paricchinna) Mil 132.

doubtful spelling & expl;n; perhaps “parivaṭṭin?

Parivaṭṭa

round, circle, succession, mainly in two phrases, viz. catu˚; fourfold circle MN iii.67; SN iii.59 (pañcupādāna-kkhandhe, cp aṭṭha-parivaṭṭa-adhideva-ñāṇadassana AN iv.304); and ñāti˚; circle of relatives DN i.61 (= ñāti DN-a i.170; cp expln ābandhan’ atthena ñāti yeva ñāti-parivaṭṭo DN-a i.181 = PugA 236); ii.241; MN iii.33; Pp 57; Thag-a 68; Vv-a 87 ■ See further at DN-a i.143 (rāja˚), 283 (id., but spelt ˚vatta); Snp-a 210.

fr. pari + vṛt, cp. parivattana

Parivaḍḍhati

to increase, to be happy or prosperous Mil 297 (cittaṃ p.; opp. pariyādiyati).

pari + vṛdh

Parivaṇṇita

extolled, praised Sdhp 557.

pp. of parivaṇṇeti

Parivaṇṇeti

to describe, praise, extol Ja vi.213 (ppr. ˚vaṇṇayanto) ■ pp. ˚vaṇṇita.

pari + vaṇṇeti

Parivatta

(adj.) changing round, twisting, turning; f. pl. ˚āyo Ja v.431.

fr. pari + vṛt

Parivattaka

circle (lit. turning round) Ja i.101; cp. parivattika in phrase paligha˚ (q.v.).

fr. parivatta

Parivattati

1. to turn round, twist (trs. & intrs.), go about Vin ii.220; Ja v.431 (singaṃ); Pv iv.53 (= pariyāti Pv-a 260); Mil 118; DN-a i.265.

2. (intrs. to change about, move, change, turn to Pv ii.105 (= pariṇamati Pv-a 144); iii.44 (id. 194); iii.65; Pv-a 178 ■ Caus. parivatteti (q.v.). Cp. vipari˚.

pari + vṛt

Parivattana

(nt.) setting going, keeping up, propounding Ja i.200 (˚manta adj. one who knows a charm); Ne 1 sq., 106.

fr. parivattati

Parivattita

1. turned round, twisted Ja iv.384.

2. recited Vism 96.

pp. of parivatteti

Parivatteti

1. to turn round (trs.), to turn over Ja i.202; Ja ii.275 (sarīraṃ); v.217; DN-a i.244–⁠2. to deal with, handle, set going, put forth, recite Vism 96, in phrase mantaṃ p. to recite, practise a charm Ja i.200, Ja i.253; Pv ii.613 (= sajjhāyati vāceti Pv-a 97) cp. mantaṃ pavatteti & pavattar; saraṃ p. to make a sound Ja i.405; adhippāyaṃ speak out, propound, discuss Pv-a 131.

3. to change, exchange Vin ii.174; Ja iii.437 ■ pp. parivattita (q.v.).

Caus. of parivattati

Parivadentikā

(f.) making resound, resounding, in cpd godhā˚; “string-resounding,” i.e. a string instrument lute Ja vi.580 (cp. Sk *parivāda an instrument with which the lute is played) ■ Another parivadentikā we find at Ja vi.540 (C. reading for T. ˚vadantikā, with v.l. ˚devantikā) denoting a kind of bird (ekā sakuṇajāti).

pari + vadento + ikā; vadento being ppr. Caus. of vad

Parivasati

to stay, dwell, to live under probation Vin iii.186 (grd. ˚vatthabba); iv.30, 127; DN i.176; MN i.391; SN ii.21; Snp 697 (= pabbajitvā tāpasavesena vasati Snp-a 490) ■ ppr. med. paribbasāna; pp parivuṭṭha & parivuttha; (q.v.).

pari + vas2

Parivassati

at Pv ii.936 is to be read as paridhassati (see paridahati).

Parivahati

to carry about Thig 439 (dārake).

pari + vahati

Parivāta

(-˚) blown round or through, i.e. filled with, stirred by Mil 19 (isi-vāta˚).

pp. of pari +

Parivādinī

(f.) a lute of seven strings Abhp. 138 ■ See parivadentikā.

fr. pari + vad, late Sk. the same

Parivāra

1. surrounding, suite, retinue, followers, entourage, pomp Ja i.151; Ja iv.38; Ja vi.75; Pv-a 21, Pv-a 30 (˚cāga-cetana, read pariccāga-cetana?); usually as adj.-˚ surrounded by, in company of Vin i.38 (dasasata˚); AN ii.91 (deva˚ & asura˚); Ja i.92 (mahā-bhikkhusangha˚); Pp 52 (pheggu sāra˚; with expln PugA 229 rukkho sayaṃ-pheggu hoti, parivāra-rukkhā pan’ assa sārā honti); Mil 285 (dvisahassa-paritta-dīpa-p˚ ā cattāro mahā dīpā); Vism 37; Dhp-a iii.262 (pañcasatabhikkhu˚); Pv-a 53 (accharā-sahassa˚), 74 (dvisahassadīpa˚); sa˚; with a retinue (of… ) Ja i.49 (cattāro dīpe) Pv-a 20.

2. followers, accompaniment or possession as a sign of honour, and therefore meaning “respect, attendance, homage, fame (cp. paricāra) AN i.38 ˚sampadā) Pts i.172 (pariggaha, p., paripūra); Dhp-a ii.77 Thag-a 241 (dhana + , riches and fame); Vb-a 466; Pv-a 137 (sampatti = yaso); Vv-a 122 (= yaso).

3. ingredient accessories (pl.), requisite Ja i.266 (pañca-sugandhika˚) Mil 290 (sa˚ dāna); DN-a i.297 (= parikkhārā).

4. as N. it is the name of the last book of the Vinaya Piṭaka (“The Accessory”), the Appendix,a sort of résumé and index of the preceding books Snp-a 97 (sa-parivāraka Vinaya-piṭaka); Vb-a 432.

fr. pari + vṛ;

Parivāraka

(adj.) accompanying, forming a retinue Ja v.234. See also parivāra 4 and paricāraka.

parivāra + ka

Parivāraṇa

(nt.) 1. covering, drapery (so trsl. at K.S. p. 45) SN i.33.

2. (adj.) (-˚) surrounded by Ja v.195 (= parikkhitta C.).

fr. pari + vṛ;

Parivārita

surrounded, fig. honoured SN i.166, SN i.192 = Th1,1235; Ja ii.48; purakkhata + ); Dhp-a iv.49 (= purakkhata Dhp 343); Dhs-a 1 (devānaṃ gaṇena); Dāvs i.16 (v.l. for parimārita).

pp. of parivāreti

Parivāreti

to cover, encompass, surround Ja i.181 (nagaraṃ ˚ayiṃsu); ii.102 (fut. ˚essati) iii.371 (rukkhaṃ); iv.405 (for parikaroti); vi.179. ger. parivāretvā used as prep. “round” Ja i.172 (pokkharaṇiṃ) ■ In meaning “to serve, attend upon,” also “to attend upon oneself, to amuse oneself,” parivāreti is often erroneously read for paricāreti, e.g. at DN ii.13; Pv iv.129 (v.l. ˚cāreti); Pv-a 228; in ppr. med. ˚vāriyamāna (with v.l. ˚cāriyamāna) at DN ii.21; AN i.145; Ja i.58; Vv-a 92 ■ See also anuparivāreti ■ pp. parivārita (q.v.).

Caus. of pari + vṛ;

Parivāsa

1. sojourn; stay, in phrase vipassanā˚; Dhp-a iii.118; Dhs-a 215.

2. period under probation, (living under) probation Vin iii.186 (˚ṃ vasati, cp. parivuttha) iv.30; SN ii.21 (˚ṃ vasati). ˚ṃ deti to allow probation Vin i.49; Vin ii.7; Vin iv.30, Vin iv.127; ˚ṃ yācati to ask for probation Vin iv.30, Vin iv.127samodhāna˚; inclusive probation Vin ii.48 sq.; suddhanta˚ probation of complete purification Vin ii.59 sq.

3. period, time (lit. stay) interval, duration Ud 7 (eka-ratti˚).

-dāna the allowance of probation AN i.99.

fr. pari + vas2, cp. Epic Sk. parivāsa only in meaning 1

Parivāsika

(adj.) 1. “staying,” i.e. usual, accustomed, common Snp-a 35 (˚bhatta; or is it “fermented,” and thus to be taken to No. 3?) a˚ unusual, new, uncommon Ja ii.435 (where it is combd with abhinava, which should be substituted for readings accuṇha, abbhuṇha & abhiṇha according to similar expl;n of paccaggha at Pv-a 87), with v.l. samparivāsita (well-seasoned?).

2. a probationer Vin ii.162. In this meaning usually spelt pāri˚ (q.v.).

3. in combn cira˚ (with ref. to food) it may be interpreted either as “staying long, being in use for a long time,” i.e. stale or it may be derived fr. vāsa3 (odour, perfume or seasoning) and translated (so Mrs. Rh. D. in Expositor 63, 64) “long-fermented” (better “seasoned”?) Dhs-a 48 (˚vāsika & vāsiya); Thag-a 29.

fr. pari + vas2, see parivasati

Parivāsita

(adj.) perfumed (all round) Ja i.51 (v.l. ˚vārita); cp. samparivāsita (well-seasoned?), which is perhaps to be read at Ja ii.435 for aparivāsika.

pari + pp. of vāseti fr. vāsa3

Parivitakka

reflection, meditation, thought, consideration MN ii.170 (ākāra˚), Vin ii.74; SN ii.115 (id.); AN ii.193 (id.); Mil 13; Dhp-a ii.62; Dhs-a 74; Vv-a 3; Pv-a 282 (vutta-˚e nipāta in expln of nūna ). Usually in phrase cetasā ceto- parivitakka mental reflection, e.g. DN i.117; DN ii.218; SN i.121, SN i.178; SN iii.96; SN v.294; AN iii.374; and cetasoparivitakka, e.g. DN i.134; SN i.71, SN i.103, SN i.139; SN ii.273 SN iii.96, SN iii.103; SN iv.105; SN v.167; AN ii.20.

pari + vitakka, cp. BSk. parivitarka Divy 291

Parivitakkita

reflected, meditated, thought over MN i.32; SN i.193 ■ nt. ˚ṃ reflection, thinking over Pv-a 123 (˚e with ref. to nūna, i.e. particle of reflection).

pp. of parivitakketi

Parivitakketi

to consider, reflect, meditate upon Ja iii.277 ■ pp. ˚vitakkita (q.v.).

pari + vitakketi

Parivitthiṇṇa

spread out wide Mil 99.

pari + vitthiṇṇa, Sk. vīstīrṇa, pp., of vi + stṛ;

Parivisaka

(adj.) providing, serving food Vism 108.

fr. parisati

Parivisati

to serve (with food = instr.), wait upon present, offer Vin i.240 (bhatṭena); ii.77 (kaṇājakena bilangadutiyena); DN ii.127; Ja i.87, Ja i.90; Ja ii.277; Ja iv.116; Pv ii.84 (= bhojeti Pv-a 107); ii.88 (id. 109); Vism 108 Vism 150 (sūdo bhattāraṃ p.); Vv-a 6; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 78.

pari + viṣ, viveṣti; same use of parivise (inf.) in R. V. x.6110

Parivīmaṃsati

to think over, consider thoroughly examine, search SN ii.80 sq.; Iti 42 = Snp 975 (ppr dhammaṃ ˚vīmaṃsamāna, cp. Nd i.508); DN-a i.134; Dhp-a iv.117 (attānaṃ).

pari + vīmaṃsati, Desid. of pari + man, cp. vīmaṃsā for mīmāṃsā

Parivīmaṃsā

(f.) complete inquiry, thorough search or examination MN iii.85; SN iii.331; SN v.68; Snp-a 173. Parivuttha & vuttha;

pari + vīmaṃsā

Parivuṭṭha & ˚vuttha

staying (a period), living (for a time), spending (or having spent) one’s probation (cp. BSk. paryuṣita-parivāsa Avs i.259; Vin iii.186 (tth); SN ii.21 (ṭṭh).

pp. of parivasati

Parivuta

surrounded by (-˚ or instr.) SN i.177; Ja i.152 (miga-gaṇa˚), 203 (devagaṇena); ii.127 (dāsi-gaṇa˚); iii.371 (mahā-jana˚); vi.75; Vv 165 (= samantato p. Vv-a 81); Pv-a 3 (dhutta-jana˚), 62 (parijana˚), 140 (deva-gaṇa˚).

pp. of pari + vṛ;

Pariveṭhita

enveloped, covered Mil 22. Opp. nibbeṭṭhita (q.v.).

pp. of pari + veṣṭ;

Pariveṇa

(nt.) 1. all that belongs to a castle, a mansion and its constituents Vv 8453 (expld at Vv-a 351 as follows: veṇiyato pekkhitabbato pariveṇaṃ pāsāda-kūtâgāra-ratti-ṭṭhān’ ādisampannaṃ pākāraparikkhittaṃ dvārakoṭṭhaka-yuttaṃ āvāsaṃ); Dhp-a i.260 (pāsāda˚).

2. a cell or private chamber for a bhikkhu (cp. Vin. Texts iii.109, 203) Vin i.49 = Vin ii.210 (p. koṭṭhaka upaṭṭhāna-sālā); i.216 (vihārena vihāraṃ pariveṇena pariveṇaṃ upasankamitvā), 247 (id.); ii.167 (vihāra + ); iii.69, 119 (susammaṭṭhaṃ); iv.52, 252 (˚vāsika); Ja i.126; Mil 15 (˚ṃ sammajjati), 19; Vism 90; Dhp-a ii.179 (˚dvāra); iv.204; Vb-a 13.

etym.?

Pariveṇi

(f.) = pariveṇa 2; Vin i.80 (anu pariveṇiyaṃ each in their own cell), 106 (id.).

Parivesaka

(adj.) waiting, serving up meals Vism 109 ■ f. ˚ikā Thag-a 17.

fr. pari + viṣ

Parivesanā

(f.) distribution of food, feeding, serving meals Vin i.229; SN i.172; Snp p.13 (= bhattavissagga Snp-a 140); Mil 247, Mil 249; Dhp-a iv.162; Pv-a 109 (˚ṭṭhāna), 135 (id.).

fr. pari + vis

Parivyatta

(adj.) quite conspicuous or clear Vism 162.

pari + vyatta

Parisaṃsibbita

sewn together, entwined Dhp-a iii.198 (v.l. for saṃsibbita + ).

pari + pp. of saṃsibbati

Parisakkati

to go about to (with inf. or dat.), to endeavour, undertake try Vin ii.18 = AN iv.345 (alābhāya); Ja i.173 (vadhāya); ii.394; Pv iv.52 (= payogaṃ karoti Pv-a 259).

pari + sakkati

Parisaṅkati

to suspect, fear, have apprehension Ja iii.210, Ja iii.541; Dhp-a i.81 ■ pp. ˚saṅkita (q.v.). Cp. āsaṅkati.

pari + sankati

Parisaṅkā

(f.) suspicion, misgiving Vin iv.314; DN iii.218. Cp. āsaṅkā.

fr. pari + śaṅk

Parisaṅkita

suspecting or suspected, having apprehensions, fearing Vin ii.243 (diṭṭha-suta˚) AN iii.128; Ja iv.214; Ja v.80; Mil 372; Dhp-a i.223 (āsankita˚) ■ Cp. āsaṅkita & ussaṅkita;.

pp. of parisankati

Parisaṅku

in ˚patha the region round the path of stakes & sticks, Name of a path leading up to Gijjha-pabbata (see expl;n at Ja iii.485) Ja iii.484.

Parisaṅgāhāpeti

to induce someone to mention or relate something Ja vi.328.

pari + Caus. of sangaṇhāti

Parisaṭha

(adj.) very fraudulent or crafty Pp 23 (saṭha + ).

pari + saṭha

Parisaṇṭhāti

to return into the former state, to be restored; aor. ˚saṇṭhāsi Ja iii.341.

pari + saṇṭhāti

Parisaṇha

(adj,.) very smooth or soft Mil 198.

pari + saṇha

Parisandeti

to make flow round, to make overflow, to fill, in phrase kāyaṃ abhisandeti p DN i.75, DN i.214; MN iii.92 sq. etc. expld as “samantato sandeti” at DN-a i.217 ■ pp. parisanna (q.v.).

pari + Caus. of syad

Parisanna

surrounded or filled with water, drenched, well-watered DN i.75; MN iii.94.

pp. of parisandati, cp. parisandeti

Parisappati

to run about, crawl about, to be frightened Dhp 342, Dhp 343 (= saṃsappati bhāyati Dhp-a iv.49).

pari + sṛp

Parisappanā

(f.) running about, fear, hesitation, doubt, always combd with āsappanā and only found with ref. to the exegesis of “doubt” (vicikicchā or kankhā) Nd ii.1; Dhs 425 (cp. Dhs trsl.116 and Dhs-a 260); DN-a i.69.

fr. parisappati

Parisamantato

(adv.) from all sides Vv-a 236.

pari + samantato

Parisambāhati

to stroke, to rub from all sides MN ii.120; SN i.178, SN i.194; AN v.65.

pari + sambāhati

Parisarati

to remember, recollect Ja vi.199 (read parissaraṃ).

pari + smr, but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. pari here fr. Prk. paḍi = Sk. prati, thus for pratismarati.

Parisahati

to overcome, conquer, master, get the better of SN iv.112; exegetically in formula sahati p. abhibhavati ajjhottharati etc. Nd i.12, Nd i.361 = Nd ii.420.

pari + sahati

Parisā

(f.) surrounding people, group collection, company, assembly, association, multitude Var. typical sets of assemblies are found in the Canon viz, eight assemblies (khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚ samaṇa˚, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiṃsa˚, Māra˚, Brahma˚ or the assemblies of nobles, brahmins, householders wanderers, of the angel hosts of the Guardian Kings, of the Great Thirty-Three, of the Māras, and of the Brahmās) DN ii.109; DN iii.260; MN i.72; AN iv.307. four assemblies (the first four of the above) at DN iii.236 Nd i.163; other four, representing the Buddha’s Order (bhikkhu˚, bhikkhunī˚, upāsaka˚, upāsikā˚, or the ass of bhikkhus, nuns, laymen and female devotees; cp same enumn at Divy 299) SN ii.218; AN v.10; cp. Ja i.40 (catu-parisa-majjhe), 85 (id.), 148 (id.) ■ two assemblies (viz. Brahma˚, Māra˚) at DN iii.260; allegorically two groups of people (viz. sāratta-rattā & asāratta-rattā MN ii.160 = AN i.70 sq ■ For var. uses of the word see the foll. passages: Vin ii.188, Vin ii.296 (rājaparisā); iii.12 (Bhagavā mahatiyā parisāya parivuto surrounded by a great multitude); iv.153 (gen. parisāya); MN i.153 (nevāpika˚); ii.160; iii.47; SN i.155 (brahma˚), 162 sarājikā p.), 177; AN i.25 (mahā˚), 70 (uttānā p.), 71 (ariya˚), 242 (tisso p.); ii.19 (˚āya mando), 133, 183, 185 (deva˚) iii.253 (khattiya˚); iv.80, 114; Iti 64 (upāsakā ˚sāsu virocare); Snp 349, Snp 825 sq.; Ja i.151, Ja i.264; Ja vi.224 (omissaka˚); Pv iii.96; Mil 187, Mil 249, Mil 359 (38 rāja-parisā, or divisions of the royal retinue); Pv-a 2, Pv-a 6, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 78 and passim; Sdhp 277. saparisa together with the assembly Vin iv.71; adv. ˚ṃ Thag-a 69Note. The form of parisā as first part of a cpd. is parisa˚ (= *parisad, which laṭter is restored in cpd. parisaggata = *parisad-gata) ■ See also pārisagga.

-antare within the assembly Ja iii.61. -āvacara one who moves in the society, i.e. the Brotherhood of the Bhikkhus AN iv.314; AN v.10. -gata (ggata) having entered a company Snp 397 (= pūga-majjha-gata Snp-a 377); Pp 29. -ññū knowing the assembly AN iii.148; AN iv.113 (+ kālaññū puggalaññū), cp. DN iii.252. -dussana defilement of the Assembly AN ii.225 (opp. ˚sobhaṇā) -pariyanta the outer circle of the congregation Dhp-a i.67 Dhp-a iii.172. -majjhe in the midst of the assembly Ja i.267 Ja ii.352; Pv-a 11. -sārajja being afraid of the a. Mil 196 = Nd ii.470 (so read for parisārajja).

cp. Vedic pariṣad; in R. V. also pariṣad as adj. surrounding, lit. “sitting round,” fr. pari + sad ■ In Pāli the cons. stem has passed into a vocalic ā-stem with the only preservation of cons. loc. sg. parisati Vin iv.285; AN ii.180 (ī); Ja v.61; DN-a i.141 and parisatiṃ MN i.68; AN ii.180 (v.l.); Ja v.332, besides the regular forms parisāyaṃ (loc. sg.) Vin ii.296; AN v.70; and parisāsu (loc. pl.) SN ii.27; Iti 64

Parisiñcati

to sprinkle all over, to bathe MN i.161; SN i.8 (gattāni); Sdhp 595.

pari + siñcati

Parisibbita

sewn round, bordered Vin i.186; Ja v.377.

pp. of pari + sibbati

Parisukkha

(adj.) dried up, very dry Ja i.215 (of fields); Mil 302 (of the heart); Pv-a 64 (˚sarīra).

pari + sukkha

Parisukkhita

dried up, withered Mil 303 (˚hadaya).

pp. of pari + ṡukṣ. Intens. of śuṣ

Parisujjhati

to become clear or clean, to be purified SN i.214; Snp 183, Snp 184 ■ pp. parisuddha (q.v.).

Pass. of pari + śudh

Parisuddha

(adj.) clean, clear, pure, perfect Vin ii.237; MN i.26; MN iii.11; SN ii.199 (˚dhammadesanā); iii.235; v.301, 354; AN iii.125 (˚ñāṇa-dassana) iv.120 sq.; Ja i.265; Vism 2 (accanta˚); Pp 68 (samāhite citte parisuddha); Mil 106; DN-a i.177, DN-a i.219; Snp-a 445 (apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosa-bhāvena p.) Pv-a 44, Pv-a 70. Very freq. combd with pariyodāta (q.v.)- aparisuddha unclean Vin ii.236, MN i.17.

-ājīva (adj.) of pure livelihood DN i.63 (see DA i.181) AN iii.124 (cp. pārisuddhi).

pari + pp. of śudh

Parisuddhatta

(nt.) purity, cleanliness, perfection MN i.36; Mil 103 sq.; Vism 168 ■ As f. pari-suddhatā at Vism 30.

abstr. fr. parisuddha

Parisuddhi

(f.) purity, purification SN i.169. The usual spelling is pārisuddhi (q.v.).

fr. pari + śudh

Parisumbhati

to strike, hit, throw down Ja iii.347 (= paharati C.); vi.370, 376 (id. C.).

pari + sumbhati

Parisumbhana

(nt.) throwing down Ja vi.508 (bhūmiyā p.).

fr. pari + śumbh

Parisussati

to dry quite up, waste quite away Ja ii.5, Ja ii.339, Ja ii.437 ■ Caus. parisoseti (q.v.).

pari + sussati

Parisussana

(nt.) drying up completely, withering Ja v.97.

fr. pari + śuṣ

Parisedita

heated, hatched, made ripe MN i.104 (bījāni); SN iii.153; Vin iii.3; Aiv. 125 (aṇḍāni), 176.

pp. of pari + Caus. of svid, Sk. parisvedita in slightly diff. use

Parisesa

remnant, remainder, rest; only neg. aparisesa (adj.) without remainder, complete, entire MN i.92, MN i.110; AN iii.166 = Pp 64; AN iv.428 (˚ñāṇadassana).

pari + sesa

Parisoka

great grief, severe mourning Pts i.38 (anto˚ in def. of soka).

pari + soka

Parisodhana

(nt.) cleansing, purification Mil 215.

fr. parisodheti

Parisodhita

cleaned, cleansed, purified Mil 415; Sdhp 414.

pp. of parisodheti

Parisodheti

to cleanse, clean, purify MN iii.3, MN iii.35 (aor. ˚sodhesi); Snp 407 (aor. ˚sodhayi) Dhp-a ii.162 (vodapeti + ) ■ Freq. in phrase cittaṃ p to cleanse one’s heart (from = abl.) DN iii.49; SN iv.104; AN ii.211; AN iii.92; Nd i.484; Pp 68 ■ pp. parisodhita (q.v.).

pari + Caus. of śudh

Parisosa

becoming dried up, dryness, withering away SN i.91.

fr. pari + śuṣ

Parisosita

dried up, withered away Sdhp 9.

pp. of parisoseti

Parisoseti

to make dry up, to exhaust, make evaporate (water) Mil 389 ■ pp. parisosita (q.v.).

Caus. of parisussati

Parissañjati

(˚ssajati?) to embrace, enfold, Ja i.466; Ja vi.156 (˚itvā, v.l. ˚ssajitvā & palisajjitvā).;

pari + svaj

Parissanta

tired, fatigued, exhausted Pv ii.936; Vv-a 305; Sdhp 9, Sdhp 101.

pp. of parissamati

Parissama

fatigue, toil, exhaustion, Vv-a 289, Vv-a 305 (addhāna˚ from journeying); Pv-a 3, Pv-a 43, Pv-a 113 Pv-a 127.

fr. pari + śram

Parissaya

(m. & nt.) danger, risk, trouble MN i.10 (utu˚); AN iii.388 (id.); Snp 42, Snp 45, Snp 770, Snp 921, Snp 960 sq.; Dhp 328 (˚ayāni sīha-vyaggh’-ādayo pākaṭa-parissaye, rāga-bhaya-dosabhay’ ādayo paṭicchanna-parissaye Dhp-a iv.29); Nd i.12 = Nd ii.420 (where same division into pākaṭa˚ & paṭicchanna˚); Nd i.360, Nd i.365; Ja i.418; Ja ii.405; Ja v.315, Ja v.441 (antarāmagga p. cp. paripantha in same use); Vism 34 (utu˚); Snp-a 88 (expld as paricca sayantī ti p.); Dhp-a iii.199 (˚mocana); Pv-a 216, Dhs-a 330.

fr. pari + ; śri? Etym. doubtful, cp. Weber, Ind. Streifen iii.395 and Andersen, Pāli Reader ii.167, 168

Parissāvana

(nt.) a water strainer, filter (one of the requisites of a bhikkhu) Vin i.209 Vin ii.119 and passim; Ja i.198; Ja iii.377; Nd i.226; Dhp-a iii.260 (udaka˚); Vv-a 40, Vv-a 63; Sdhp 593.

fr. pari + Caus. of sru

Parissāvanaka

(adj.-n.) only neg. ;: 1. one who has no strainer Vin ii.119; Ja i.198.

2. not to be filtered, i.e. so that there is nothing left to be filtered Ja i.400 (so read for ˚ssavanaka). Or is it “not overflowing”?

fr. parissāvana

Parissāvita

strained, filtered Ja i.198 (udaka).

pp. of parissāveti

Parissāveti

to strain or filter Ja i.198 (pānīyaṃ); DN-a i.206 (udakaṃ); iii.207 (pānīyaṃ) ■ pp parissāvita (q.v.).

Caus. of pari + sru

Parissuta

overflowing Ja vi.328 (= atipuṇṇattā pagharamāna).

pp. of pari + sru

Parihaṭa

(˚hata) surrounded by (-˚) encircled; only in phrase sukha-parihaṭa (+ sukhe ṭhita) steeped in good fortune Vin iii.13 (corr. sukhedhita accordingly!); Ja ii.190 (pariharaka v.l. BB); vi.219 (= sukhe ṭhita).

pp. of pariharati

Parihaṭṭha

gladdened, very pleased Pv-a 13.

pp. of pari + hṛṣ

Pariharaka

(adj. n.) 1. surrounding or surrounded, having on one’s hands Ja ii.190 (sukha˚, v.l. for ˚parihaṭa).

2. an armlet, bracelet Vv-a 167 (v.l. ˚haraṇa; expld as hatthālaṅkāra. ) See also parihāraka.

fr. pari + hṛ;

Pariharaṇa

(nt.) 1. protection, care Vism 500 (gabbha˚); Kp-a 235; DN-a i.207 (kāya˚); Dhp-a ii.179 (kāyassa).

2. keeping up, preservation, keeping in existence; in phrase khandha˚; Dhp-a iii.261, Dhp-a iii.405. Cp foll.

fr. pari + hṛ;

Pariharaṇā

(f.) 1. keeping up, preserving, care, attention, pleasure Pv-a 219 (with v.l. ˚caraṇā for paricārikā Pv iv.12).

2. keeping secret, guarding hiding, deceiving Vb 358 = Pp 23.

= pariharaṇa

Pariharati

1. to take care of, to attend to (acc.), shelter, protect, keep up, preserve, look after Vin i.42 Vin ii.188; DN ii.100 (sanghaṃ); DN ii.14 (gabbhaṃ kucchinā) MN i.124, MN i.459; SN iii.1; AN iii.123; Ja i.52 (kucchiyā), 143 170; Mil 392, Mil 410 (attānaṃ) 418; Snp-a 78; Dhp-a ii.232 (aggiṃ, v.l. paricarati, which is the usual); Pv-a 63 (kucchiyā), 177. Cp. BSk. pariharati in same meaning e.g. Avs i.193, Avs i.205.

2. to carry about DN ii.19 (ankena); MN i.83; Snp 440 (muñjaṃ parihare, 1 sg. pres med.; Snp-a 390 takes it as parihareyya); Mil 418 (āḷakaṃ p.).

3. (intrs.) to move round, go round circle, revolve MN i.328; AN i.277 (candima-suriyā p. cp. AN v.59) = Vism 205; Ja i.395; Ja iv.378; Ja vi.519; DN-a i.85; Pv-a 204.

4. to conceal Vin iii.52 (sunkaṃ). 5. to set out, take up, put forward, propose, only in phrase (Com. style) uttān’ atthāni padāni p. to take up the words in more explicit meaning Snp-a 178, Snp-a 419, Snp-a 437 Snp-a 462 ■ pp. parihaṭa. Pass. parihīrati (q.v.) ■ See also anupariharati.

pari + hṛ;

Pariharitabbatta

(nt.) necessity of guarding Vism 98.

abstr. fr. grd. of pariharati

Parihasati

to laugh at, mock, deride Ja i.457. - Caus. parihāseti to make laugh Ja v.297.

pari + has

Parihāna

(nt.) diminution, decrease, wasting away, decay SN ii.206 sq.; AN ii.40 (abhabbo parihānāya) iii.173, 309, 329 sq., 404 sq. (˚dhamma); v.103 (id.) 156 sq.; Iti 71 (˚āya saṃvattati); Dhp 32 (abhabbo p ˚āyo); Pp 12, Pp 14.

fr. pari +

Parihāni

(f.) loss, diminution (opp. vuddhi) SN ii.206; SN iv.76, SN iv.79; SN v.143, SN v.173; AN i.15; AN iii.76 sq. AN iv.288; AN v.19 sq., 96, 124 sq.; Ja ii.233; Dhp-a iii.335 Dhp-a iv.185.

fr. pari +

Parihāniya

(adj.) connected with or causing decay or loss DN ii.75 sq. (˚ā dhammā conditions leading to ruin); AN iv.16 sq.; Vb 381; Vb-a 507 sq- ; SN v.85.

parihāna + ya

Parihāpeti

1. to let fall away, to lose, to waste SN ii.29; Ja iv.214 (vegaṃ); Mil 244 (cittaṃ to lose heart, to despair); Pv-a 78.

2. to set aside, abandon, neglect, omit Vin i.72 (rājakiccaṃ) Ja ii.438; Ja iv.132 (vaṭṭaṃ); v.46; Mil 404 (mūḷakammaṃ) ■ Neg. ger. aparihāpetvā without omission Dhs-a 168; ppr. aparihāpento not slackening or neglecting Vism 122.

Caus. of parihāyati

Parihāyati

to decay, dwindle or waste away, come to ruin; to decrease, fall away from, lack; to be inferior, deteriorate Vin i.5; MN iii.46 sq. (opp. abhivaḍḍhati); SN i.120, SN i.137; SN iii.125; SN iv.76 sq.; AN iii.252; Dhp 364; Snp 767; Ja ii.197; Ja iv.108; Nd i.5 (paridhaṃsati + Mil 249 (id.); Pp 12 (read ˚hāyeyya for ˚hāreyya) Snp-a 167 (+ vinassati); PugA 181 (nassati + ); Pv-a 5 Pv-a 76 (v.l.), 125 (˚hāyeyyuṃ) ■ pp. parihīna, Pass. parihiyyati, Caus. parihāpeti (q.v.).

pari +

Parihāra

1. attention, care (esp ■ ˚), in cpds. like gabbha˚; care of the foetus Dhp-a i.4; dāraka˚; care of the infant Ja ii.20; kumāra˚; looking after the prince Ja i.148, Ja ii.48; Dhp-a i.346; dup˚; hard to protect Ja i.437; Vism 95 (Majjhimo d. hard to study?

2. honour, privilege, dignity Vin i.71; Ja iv.306 (gārava˚; ).

3. surrounding (lit.), circuit of land Ja iv.461.

4. surrounding (fig.), attack; in cpd visama˚; being attacked by adversities AN ii.87; Nd ii.304ic; Mil 112, Mil 135.

5. avoidance, keeping away from Ja i.186.

-patha “circle road,” i.e. (1) a roundabout way Dhp-a ii.192. (2) encircling game DN i.6 = Vin ii.10 (expld as “bhūmiyaṃ nānāpathaṃ maṇḍalaṃ katvā tattha pariharitabbaṃ pariharantānaṃ kīḷanaṃ” DN-a i.85 trsld as “keeping going over diagrams” Dial. i.10 with remark “a kind of primitive hop-scotch”).

fr. pari + hṛ; cp. pariharati

Parihāraka

(adj.-n.) surrounding, encircling; a guard AN ii.180.

fr. pari + hṛ;

Parihārika

keeping, preserving, protecting, sustaining DN i.71 (kāya˚ cīvara, kucchi˚ piṇḍapāta; expld as kāya-pariharaṇa-mattakena & kucchi˚ at DN-a i.207 correct reading accordingly); MN i.180; MN iii.34; Pp 58 Vism 65 (kāya˚, of āvara).

fr. parihāra

Parihārin

(adj.) taking care of, (worth) keeping SN iv.316 (udaka-maṇika).

fr. parihāra

Parihāsa

laughter, laughing at, mockery Ja i.116 (˚keḷi), 377; Dhp-a i.244.

fr. pari + has, cp. parihasati

Parihāsiṃsu

at Ja i.384 is to be read ˚bhāsiṃsu.

Parihiyyati

to be left, to be deserted, to come to ruin (= dhaṃsati) Ja iii.260.

Pass. of parihāyati, Sk. ˚hīyate

Parihīna

fallen away from, decayed; deficient, wanting; dejected, destitute SN i.121; AN iii.123; Snp 827, Snp 881 (˚pañña); Ja i.112, Ja i.242; Ja iv.200 Nd i.166, Nd i.289; Mil 249, Mil 281 (a˚); Pv-a 220 (= nihīna).

pp. of parihāyati

Parihīnaka

(adj.) one who has fallen short of, neglected in, done out of (abl. or instr.) DN i.103.

parihīna + ka

Parihīrati

to be carried about (or better “taken care of,” according to Bdhgh’s expln Snp-a 253; see also Brethren 226) Snp 205 = Thag 453.

Pass. of pariharati, Sk. parihriyate in development ˚hriyate → *hiriyati → *hiyirati → ˚hīrati

Parīta

see vi˚.

Parūpa˚

as para + upa˚ (in parūpakkama, parūpaghāta etc.) see under para.

Parūḷha

(adj.) grown, grown long, mostly in phrase ˚kaccha-nakha-loma having long nails, & long hair in the armpit, e.g. at SN i.78; Ud 65; Ja iv.362, Ja iv.371; Ja vi.488; Mil 163 (so read for p ■ kaccha-loma); Sdhp 104. Kern, Toev. ii.139 s. v. points out awkwardness of this phrase and suspects a distortion of kaccha either from kesa or kaca, i.e. with long hairs (of the head), nails & other hair ■ Further in foll. phrases: mukhaṃ p bearded face Ja iv.387; ˚kesa-nakha-loma Ja i.303 ˚kesa-massu with hair & beard grown long Ja iv.159 ˚kaccha with long grass Ja vi.100; ˚massu-dāṭhika having grown a beard and tooth DN-a i.263.

pp. of pa + ruh, cp. BSk. prarūḍha (-śmaśru) Jtm 210

Pare

(adv.) see para 2 c.

Pareta

gone on to, affected with, overcome by (-˚), syn. with abhibhūta (e.g. Pv-a 41, Pv-a 80). Very frequent in combn with terms of suffering, misadventure and passion, e.g. khudā˚, ghamma˚, jighacchā˚ dukkha˚, dosa˚, rāga˚, soka˚, sneha˚, Vin i.5; DN ii.36; MN i.13, MN i.114, MN i.364, MN i.460; MN iii.14, MN iii.92; SN ii.110; SN iii.93 SN iv.28; AN i.147 = Iti 89; AN iii.25, AN iii.96; Snp 449, Snp 736, Snp 818 (= samohita samannāgata pihita Nd i.149) 1092, 1123; Ja iii.157; Pv i.86; ii.24; Mil 248; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 93.

pp. of pareti, more likely para + i than pari + i, although BSk. correspondent is parīta, e.g. śokaparīta Jtm 3194

Pareti

to set out for, go on to, come to (acc.) SN ii.20; AN v.2, AN v.139 sq., 312; Ja v.401 (= pakkhandati C.). pp pareta (q.v.).

in form = parā + i but more likely pari + i, thus = pariyeti

Paro

(adv.) beyond, further, above, more than, upwards of; only ˚-in connection with numerals (cp. Vedic use of paras with acc. of numerals) e.g. paropaññāsa more than 50; DN ii.93; parosataṃ more than 100; Ja v.203, Ja v.497; parosahassaṃ over 1,000; DN ii.16; SN i.192 = Thag 1238; Snp p.106 (= atireka-sahassaṃ Snp-a 450). See also parakkaroti.

cp. Vedic paras; to para

Parokkha

(adj.) beyond the eye, out of sight, invisible, imperceptible Mil 291 ■ abl. parokkhā (adv.) behind one’s back, in the absence of Ja iii.89 (parammukhā C.; opp. sammukhā).

paro + akkha = Vedic parokṣa (paraḥ + akṣa)

Parodati

to cry out (for) Ja i.166; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 257.

pa + rud

Paropariya

(˚ñāṇa) see under indriya˚. The form is paro + pariya, paro heŕe taking the place of para. Yet it would be more reasonable to explain the word as para apara (upara?) + ya, i.e. that which belongs to this world & the beyond, or everything that comes within the range of the faculties. Cp.; parovara.

Parovara

(adj.-n.) high & low, far & near; pl. in sense of “all kinds” (cp. uccâvaca). The word is found only in the Sutta Nipāta, viz. Snp 353 (v.l. BB varāvaraṃ, varovaraṃ; expld as “lokuttara-lokiya-vasena su̇ndar âsundaraṃ dūre-santikaṃ vā” Snp-a 350), 475 (˚ā dhammā; v.l. BB paroparā; expld as “parâvarā sundar’ âsundarā, parā vā bāhirā aparā ajjhattikā Snp-a 410), 704 (kāme parovare; v.l. BB paropare expld as sundare ca asundare ca pañca kāmaguṇe Snp-a 493), 1048 (reading paroparāni Nd2; see expln Nd ii.422b; expld as “parāni ca orāni ca, par’ attabhāva-sak’ attabhāv’ ādīni parāni ca orāni ca” Snp-a 590), 1148 (paroparaṃ Nd2; see Nd ii.422a; expld as “hīna-ppaṇītaṃ” Snp-a 607) ■ Note. Already in RV we find para contrasted with avara or upara; para denoting the farther, higher or heavenly sphere, avara or upara the lower or earthly sphere: see e.g. RV i.128, 3; i.164, 12 ■ On paropara see further Wackernagel Altind. Gr. ii.121 d.

para + avara, sometimes through substitution of apa for ava also paropara. We should expect a form *parora as result of contraction: see Nd ii.p. 13

Pala

(-˚) a certain weight (or measure), spelt also phala (see phala2), only in cpd. sata˚; a hundred (carat) in weight Thag 97 (of kaṃsa); Ja vi.510 (sataphala kaṃsa = phalasatena katā kañcana-pātī C.). Also in combn catuppala-tippala-dvipala-ekapala-sāṭikā Vism 339.

classical Sk. pala

Palaka

a species of plant Ja vi.564.

cp. late Sk. pala, flesh, meat

Palagaṇḍa

a mason, bricklayer, plasterer MN i.119; SN iii.154 (the reading phala˚ is authentic, see Geiger, P.G. § 40) AN iv.127.

cp. Sk. palagaṇḍa Halāyudha ii.436; BSk. palagaṇḍa Avs i.339; Aṣṭas. Pār. 231; Avad. Kalp ii.113

Palaṇḍuka

an onion Vin iv.259.

cp. Epic Sk. palāṇḍu, pala (white) + aṇḍu (= aṇḍa? egg)

Paladdha

taken over, “had,” overcome, deceived MN i.511 (nikata vañcita p. where v.l. and id p. SN iv.307 however reads paluddha ); Ja iii.260 (dava˚ abhibhūta C.).

pp. of pa + labh

Palapati

to talk nonsense Ja ii.322. Cp. vi˚.

pa + lapati

Palambati

to hang down Thag-a 210; Sdhp 110 ■ pp. palambita (q.v.). See also abhi˚.

pa + lambati

Palambita

hanging down Thig 256, Thig 259; Thag-a 211.

pp. of palambati

Palambheti

to deceive DN i.50, cp. DN-a i.151.

pa + lambheti

Palaḷita

led astray SN iv.197 (v.l. ˚lāḷita). At AN iii.5 we read palāḷita, in phrase kāmesu p. (“sporting in pleasures”? Or should we read palolita?).

pa + laḷita

Palavati

to float, swim Vin iv.112; Dhp 334; Thag 399; Ja iii.190.

Vedic plavati, plu

Palasata

a rhinoceros Ja vi.277 (v.l. phalasata expld as “khagga-miga,” with gloss “balasata”); as phalasata at Ja vi.454 (expld as phalasata-camma C.) See palāsata.

according to Trenckner, Notes p. 59, possibly fr. Sk. parasvant

Palahati

to lick Pv iii.52 = Pv-a 198.

pa + lahati

Palāta

run away Ja vi.369; Vism 326; Vv-a 100; Dhp-a ii.21.

contracted form of palāyita, pp. of palāyati, cp. Prk. palāa (= *palāta) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 567

Palātatta

(nt.) running away, escape Ja i.72.

abstr. fr. palāta

Palāpa1

chaff of corn, pollard AN iv.169 (yava˚); Ja i.467, Ja i.468; Ja iv.34; Snp-a 165 (in exegesis of palāpa2 v.l. BB palāsa), 312 (id.); Ja iv.34, Ja iv.35 (perhaps better to read kula-palāso & palāsa-bhūta for palāpa).;

Vedic palāva, cp. Lat. palea, Russ pelëva; see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 396, where pralāva is to be corr. to palāva

Palāpa2

prattling, prattle, nonsense; adj talking idly, chaffing, idle, void MN iii.80 (a˚); SN i.166 (not palapaṃ), 192 = Thag 1237; AN iv.169 (samaṇa in allegory with yava˚ of palāpa1); Snp 89 (māyāvin asaṃyata palāpa = palāpa-sadisattā Snp-a 165), 282; Mil 414 (here also expld as palāpa1 by Snp-a 312) Vb-a 104. In phrase tuccha palāpa empty and void at Mil 5, Mil 10.

Vedic pralāpa, pa + lap; taken by P. Com. as identical with palāpa1, their example followed by Trenckner, Notes 63, cp. also Miln. trsl. ii.363 “chaff as frivolous talk”

Palāpin

in apalāpin “not neglectful” see palāsin.

Palāpeti1

to cause to run away, to put to flight, drive away Ja ii.433; Dhp-a i.164, Dhp-a i.192 Dhp-a iii.206.

Caus. of palāyati

Palāpeti2

to prattle, talk Ja i.73, Ja i.195.

Caus. of pa + lap, cp. palāpa to which it may be referred as Denom.

Palāyati

to run (away) Vin iii.145 (ubbijjati uttasati p.); AN ii.33 (yena vā tena vā palayanti); Snp 120; Ja ii.10; Dhp-a i.193; Pv-a 253 Pv-a 284 (= dhāvati) ■ ppr. palāyanto SN i.209 = Thig 248 = Pv ii.717 = Ne 131 = Dhp-a iv.21; aor. palāyi SN i.219; Ja i.208; Ja ii.209, Ja ii.219, Ja ii.257; Ja iv.420; Dhp-a iii.208; DN-a i.142; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 274; ger. palāyitvā Ja i.174; Pv-a 154; inf palāyituṃ Ja i.202; Ja vi.420 ■ Contracted forms are pres. paleti (see also the analogy-form pāleti under pāleti, to guard) DN i.54 (spelt phaleti, expld DN-a i.165 by gacchati); Snp 1074, Snp 1144 (= vajati gacchati Nd ii.423); Dhp 49; Nd i.172; Ja v.173, Ja v.241; Vv 8436 (= gacchati Vv-a 345); Pv i.111 (gacchati Pv-a 56); aor. palittha Ja v.255; fut. palehiti Thag 307; imper. palehi Snp 831 (= gaccha Snp-a 542)-pp. palāta & palāyita; Caus palāpeti1 (q.v.).

cp. Vedic palāyati, palāy

Palāyana

(nt.) running away Dhp-a i.164. See also pālana.

fr. palāy

Palāyanaka

(adj.) running away Ja ii.210 (˚ṃ karoti to put to flight).

fr. palāy

Palāyin

(adj.) running away, taking to flight SN i.221 = SN i.223 ■ Usually neg. apalāyin SN i.185, and in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin SN i.99; Thag 864; Ja iv.296 and passim. See apalāyin & apalāsin;.

fr. palāy

Palāla

(m. & nt.) straw Ja i.488; Dhp-a i.69.

-channaka a roof of thatch Thag 208. -piṇḍa a bundle of straw Vism 257 = Kp-a 56. -pīṭhaka “straw foot-stool,” a kind of punishment or torture MN i.87; AN ii.122 = Mil 197 (see Mil trsl. i.277 “Straw Seat, i.e. being so beaten with clubs, that the bones are broken, and the body becomes like a heap of straw) Nd i.154; Nd ii.604; Ja v.273. -puñja a heap of straw DN i.71; MN iii.3; AN i.241; AN ii.210; Pp 68; Vb-a 367 -puñjaka same as puñja Mil 342.

cp. Ved. & Epic Sk. palāla

Palāḷita

see palaḷita.

Palāsa1

(m. & nt.) 1. the tree Butea frondosa or Judas tree Ja iii.23 (in Palāsa Jātaka).

2. a leaf; collectively (nt.) foliage, pl. (nt.) leaves SN ii.178; Ja i.120 (nt.); iii.210, 344; Pv-a 63 (˚antare; so read for pās’ antare), 113 (ghana˚), 191 (sāli˚). puppha˚ blossoms & leaves Dhp-a i.75; sākhā˚; branches & leaves MN i.111; Ja i.164; Mil 254; paṇḍu˚; a sear leaf Vin i.96; Vin iii.47; Vin iv.217; bahala˚; (adj.) thick with leaves Ja i.57palāsāni (pl.) leaves Ja iii.185 (= palāsapaṇṇāni C.); Pv-a 192 (= bhūsāni).

Vedic palāśa

Palāsa2

& (more commonly); Paḷāsa unmercifulness, malice, spite. Its nearest synonym is yuga-ggāha (so Vb 357; Pp 18, where yuddhaggāha is read; Ja iii.259; Vv-a 71); it is often combd with macchera (Vv 155) and makkha (Mil 289). MN i.15, MN i.36, MN i.488; AN i.79; Ja ii.198; Vb 357; Pp 18 (+ paḷāsāyanā, etc.) ■ apaḷāsa mercifulness MN i.44.

according to Trenckner, Notes 83, from ras, but BSk. pradāśa points to pa dāśa = dāsa “enemy” this form evidently a Sanskritisation

Palāsata

a rhinoceros Ja v.206 Ja v.408; Ja vi.277.

so read for palasata & palasada; cp. Vedic parasvant given by BR. in meaning “a certain large animal, perhaps the wild ass”

Palāsika

(adj.) 1. in cpd. paṇḍu˚; one who lives by eating withered leaves DN-a i.270, DN-a i.271.

2. in cpd. eka˚; (upāhanā) (a shoe) with one lining (i.e. of leaves) Vin i.185 (= eka paṭala Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts ii.13).

fr. palāsa1

Palāsin

(paḷāsin) (adj.) spiteful, unmerciful, malicious MN i.43 sq., 96; AN iii.111; combd with makkhin at Vin ii.89 (cp. Vin Texts iii.38); Ja iii.259 apaḷāsin DN iii.47 (amakkhin + ); MN i.43; AN iii.111 Pp 22; see also separately.

fr. palāsa2

Pali˚

round, around (= pari) only as prefix in cpds (q.v.). Often we find both pari˚ & pali˚ in the same word.;

a variant of pari˚, to be referred to the Māgadhī dialect in which it is found most frequently, esp. in the older language, see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 257; Geiger P.Gr. § 44

Palikujjati

to bend oneself over, to go crooked MN i.387.

pali + kujjati

Palikuṇṭhita

covered, enveloped, smeared with Ja ii.92 (lohita˚).

a var. of paliguṇṭhita, q.v. & cp. Geiger,; P.Gr. § 391

Palikha

a bar Ja vi.276 (with palighā as gloss).

a variant of paligha on kh for gh see Geiger, P.Gr. § 392

Palikhaṇati

to dig up, root out SN i.123; SN ii.88 (so read for paliṃ˚ & phali˚) = AN i.204 ger. palikhañña Snp 968 (= uddharitvā Nd i.490); palikhāya SN i.123 (cp. KS 320); & palikhaṇitvā SN ii.88; Snp-a 573 ■ pp. palikhata (q.v.).

pali + khaṇ, cp. parikhā

Palikhata

dug round or out SN iv.83 (so read with v.l. for T. palikhita).

pp. of palikhaṇati

Palikhati

to scratch, in phrase oṭṭhaṃ p. to bite one’s lip Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197.

pa + likh

Palikhādati

to bite all round, to gnaw or peck off MN i.364 (kukkuro aṭṭhikankalaṃ p.).

pali + khādati

Paligijjhati

to be greedy Nd ii.77 (abhigijjhati + ).

pali + gijjhati

Paliguṇṭhita

entangled, covered enveloped Snp 131 (mohena; v.l. BB ˚kuṇṭhita) Ja ii.150 = Dhp-a i.144 (v.l. ˚kuṇṭh˚); iv.56; Mil ii. Expld by pariyonaddha Ja ii.150, by paṭicchādita Ja iv.56. Cp. pāliguṇṭhima.

pali + guṇṭhita, variant palikuṇṭhita, as kuṇṭhita & guṇḍhita are found

Paligedha

greed, conceit, selfishness AN i.66; Nd ii.taṇhā ii.(gedha + ); Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136.

pali + gedha but acc. to Geiger, P.Gr. § 10 = parigṛddha

Paligedhin

(adj.) conceited, greedy selfish AN iii.265.

fr. paligedha, but Geiger, P.Gr. § 10 takes it as *parigṛddhin, cp. giddhin

Paligha

1. a cross-bar Vin ii.154; Thig 263 (vaṭṭa˚ = parighadaṇḍa Thag-a 211); Ja ii.95; Ja vi.276.

2. an obstacle hindrance DN ii.254 = SN i.27 ■ (adj) (-˚) in two phrases okkhitta˚; with cross-bars erected or put up DN i.105 (= ṭhapita˚ DN-a i.274), opp. ukkhitta˚; with cross-bars (i.e. obstacles) withdrawn or removed MN i.139 = AN iii.84 = Nd ii.284 C.; Snp 622 (= avijjā-palighassa ukkhittattā Snp-a 467); cp. parikhā.

-parivattika turning round of the bar the “Bar Turn,” a kind of punishment or torture (consisting in “a spike being driven from ear to ear he is pinned to the ground” Hardy, E.M. 32, cp. Mil trsl. i.277; MN i.87 = AN i.47 = AN ii.122 = Nd i.154 = Nd ii.604 B (reads palingha, v.l. paligha) = Mil 197.

pari + gha of (g)han, cp. P. & Sk. parigha

Palita

(adj.) grey, in cpd. ˚kesa with grey (i.e. white hair MN i.88 (f. ˚kesī); AN i.138; Ja i.59, Ja i.79; abs. only at Ja vi.524. The spelling phalita also occurs (e.g. Pv-a 153) ■ Der. pālicca.

cp. Vedic palita; Gr. πελιτνός, πελιός black-grey; Lith. pilkas grey; Ags. fealu = Ohg. falo E. fallow, Ger. fahl; also Sk. pāṇḍu whitish; P. paṇḍu pāṭala pink

Palitta

smeared Thig 467 (= upalitta Thag-a 284).

pp. of palippati

Palipa

fr. sloppiness, mud, marsh MN i.45; Thag 89; Thag 2, Thag 291 (= panka Thag-a 224); Ja iii.241 (read palipo cp. C. = mahākaddamo ibid.) = iv.480.

pa + lip

Palipatha

danger, obstacle (or is it “mud, mire” = palipa?) AN iv.290; Snp 34 = Snp 638 (rāga˚ Snp-a 469) = Dhp 414 (= rāga˚ Dhp-a iv.194).

for paripatha = ˚pantha (q.v.), the bases path˚ & panth˚ frequently interchanging. Trenckner (;Notes 80) derives it fr. pa + lip

Palipadaka

see pāli˚.

Palipanna

fallen, got or sunk into (-˚ or loc.) Vin i.301 (muttakarīse); DN ii.24 (id.); MN i.45 (palipa˚) = Nd ii.651 B; MN i.88; Ja vi.8 Vism 49 (muttakarīse).

for paripanna, pp. of paripajjati

Palippati

to be smeared; to stick, to adhere to Pv iv.15 (˚amāna read for palimpamāna) ■ pp. palitta (q.v.).

Med ■ Pass. of pa + lip; often spelt palimpati

Palibujjhati

see palibuddhati.

Palibujjhana

(nt.) obstruction Dhp-a iii.258.

fr. palibujjhati

Palibuddha

obstructed, hindered, stopped; being kept back or delayed, tarrying Ja ii.417 Nd ii.107 (paliveṭhita + ); Mil 388 (ākāso a˚) 404; Dhp-a iii.198. Often in phrase lagga laggita p. Nd ii.88 Nd ii.107, Nd ii.332, Nd ii.596, Nd ii.597, Nd ii.657.

pp. of palibujjhati

Palibuddhati

1. to obstruct refuse, keep back, hinder, withhold Vin ii.166; Vin iv.42 Vin iv.131; Ja i.217 (cp. paṭibāhati ibid.); iii.138 (aor. ˚buddhi.) iv.159; Mil 263.

2. to delay Mil 404 (or should we read ˚bujjhati i.e. sticks, tarries, is prevented?). Pass. palibujjhati [this word occurs only in Commentary style & late works. In the Niddesa the nearest synonym is; lag, as seen from the freq. combn palibuddha + lagga, palibodha + laggana: see Nd ii.p. 188 under nissita] to be obstructed or hindered, to be kept by (instr. or loc.) to stick or adhere to, to trouble about attend to Nd ii.74, Nd ii.77 (paligijjhati + ), 88, 107, 597, 657; Mil 263 ■ pp. palibuddha (q.v.).

the etym. offered by Andersen, Pāli Reader s. v. palibuddha, viz. dissimilation for pari + ruddhati (rudh) is most plausible, other explns like Trenckner’s (Notes 66 for pari + bādh, med-pass. bajjhati = *bādhyate, seemingly confirmed by v.l. Nd ii.74 & 77 ˚bajjhati for ˚bujjhati) and Kern’s (;Toev. s. v. = Ogh firbiotan, Ger. verbieten) are semantically not satisfactory Cp. avaruddhati & avaruddha;

Palibodha

obstruction, hindrance, obstacle, impediment, drawback Ja i.148; Ja iii.241 (a non-obstruction), 381 (id.); Ne 80; also in var. phrases viz. kāma˚ Nd ii.374 (+ kāmapariḷāha); kula˚ cīvara Nd ii.68, cp. Mil 388 (kule p.); ghar’āvāsa˚, putta-dāro etc. Nd i.136; Nd ii.172a B, 205, cp. Ja ii.95 (ghara˚); Kp-a 39 (enumd as set of dasa palibodhā which are also given and expld in detail at Vism 90 sq.); cp. Dhs-a 168, and in combn laggana bandhana p. Nd ii.332, Nd ii.620. Two palibodhas are referred to at Vin i.265, viz. āvāsa˚ and cīvara˚ (cp. Vin. Texts ii.157) and sixteen at Mil 11. Cp. Cpd. 53 ■ The minor obstacles (to the practice of kammaṭṭhāna) are described as khuddaka˚ at Vism 122 & referred to at Dhs-a 168 ■ See also sam˚.;

see palibuddhati

Palibhañjana

(nt.) breaking up Nd ii.576 (sambhañjana + ; v.l. pari˚). See also sam˚. The spelling phali˚; occurs at Thag-a 288.

pari + bhañjana

Palimaṭṭha

polished Ja v.4. Cp. parimaṭṭha. See also sam˚.

pp. of pari + mṛj

Paliveṭhana

(adj. nt.) wrapping, surrounding, encircling, encumbrance Ja iv.436; Pp 34; Vism 353 (˚camma); Dhs-a 366.

fr. pari + veṣṭ;

Paliveṭhita

wrapped round, entwined, encircled, fettered Nd ii.107 (˚veṭṭh˚, combd with laggita & palibuddha); Ja iv.436; Ja vi.89. Cp. sam˚.

pp. of paliveṭheti

Paliveṭheti

to wrap up, cover, entwine, encircle MN i.134; Ja i.192; Ja ii.95; Dhp-a i.269; Dhs-a 366 ■ Pass. paliveṭhīyati Mil 74 ■ pp. paliveṭhita (q.v.). See also sam˚.

pari + veṣṭ;

Palisajjati

to loosen, make loose SN ii.89 (mūlāni).

pari + sṛj

Palissajati

to embrace DN ii.266; Ja v.158 (aor. palissaji = ālingi C). 204, 215; vi.325.

pari + svaj

Palissuta

flowing over Ja vi.328.

pp. of pari + sru

Palugga

broken up, crushed, crumbled Bv ii.24; Mil 217.

pp. of palujjati, Sk. *prarugṇa

Palujjati

to break (intrs.) to fall down, crumble, to be dissolved Vin ii.284; DN ii.181; MN i.488; SN ii.218; SN iii.137; SN iv.52 = Nd ii.550 (in exegesis of “loka”); Mil 8; Vism 416 ■ pp. palugga (q.v.) Cp. BSk. pralujyati Mvu ii.370.

Pass. of palujati = pa + ruj

Palujjana

(nt.) breaking up, destruction Snp-a 506.

fr. palujjati

Paluddha

seduced, enticed SN iv.307 (where id. p. MN i.511 reads paladdha); Ja i.158; Ja vi.255 Ja vi.262. See also palobheti & palobhita;.

pp. of pa + lubh

Palumpati

to rob, plunder, deprive of AN i.48.

pa + lup

Paleti

see palāyati.

Palepa

smearing; plaster, mortar Thig 270; Thag-a 213.

fr. pa + lip

Palepana

(nt.) smearing, anointing; adj. (-˚) smeared or coated with MN i.429 (gāḷha˚ thickly smeared).

fr. pa + lip

Paloka

breaking off or in two, dissolution, decay Vin ii.284; MN i.435 = Mil 418 (in formula aniccato dukkhato rogato etc., with freq.v.l. paralokato; cp AN iv.423; Nd ii.214; Pts ii.238); SN iii.167 (id.) iv.53 v. 163.

fr. pa + *luj = ruj, thus standing for *paloga, cp. roga

Palokin

(adj.) destined for decay or destruction SN iv.205 = Snp 739 (acc. palokinaṃ = jarā-maraṇehi palujjana-dhamma Snp-a 506); Thig 101 (acc. pl palokine, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 952).

fr. paloka

Palobha

desire, greed Pv-a 265.

fr. pa + lubh

Palobhana

(nt.) = palobha Ja i.196, Ja i.210; Ja ii.183; Mil 286.

Palobhita

desired Pv-a 154.

pp. of palobheti

Palobheti

to desire, to be greedy Snp 703; Ja i.79, Ja i.157, Ja i.298; Ja vi.215; Snp-a 492; Dhp-a i.123 Dhp-a i.125; Pv-a 55 ■ pp. palobhita (q.v.).

Caus. of pa + lubh

Pallaṅka

1. sitting cross-legged, in instr.; pallaṅkena upon the hams SN i.124, SN i.144; and in phrase pallaṅkaṃ ābhujati “to bend (the legs) in crosswise” DN i.71; MN i.56; AN iii.320; Ja i.17, Ja i.71; Pts i.176; Pp 68; Mil 289; Dhp-a ii.201 ■ This phrase is expld at Vism 271 and Vb-a 368 as “samantato ūru-baddh’ āsanaṃ bandhati.”

2. a divan, sofa, couch Vin ii.163, Vin ii.170 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.209, which is to be corrected after Dial. i.12); DN i.7; SN i.95; Ja i.268; Ja iv.396; Ja v.161; Vv 311; Pv ii.127; iii.32; Dhp-a i.19; Pv-a 189, Pv-a 219.

pary + anka, cp. Class Sk. palyanka & Māgadhī paliyanka

Pallati

(pallate), is guarded or kept, contracted (poetical) form of pālayate (so Cy.) Ja v.242.

Pallattha

the posture of sitting or squatting or lolling Ja i.163 (here in expln of tipallattha: pallatthaṃ vuccati sayanaṃ, ubhohi passehi ujukam eva ca go-nisinnaka-vasenā ti tīh’ākārehi pallatthaṃ etc.; see under ti˚). Cp. ti˚, vi˚.

Sk. *paryasta, pari + pp. of as to throw, cp. Prk pallattha Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 285

Pallatthikā

(f.) same meaning as pallattha Vin ii.213; Vin iii.162 (cp. Vin. Texts i.62; iii.141); Vism 79 (dussa˚).

fr. pallattha

Pallatthita

perverse Ja v.79.

doubtful, perhaps we should read paliyattha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.

Pallala

(nt.) 1. marshy ground MN i.117; SN iii.108 sq.

2. a small pond or lake Vin i.230; DN ii.89; Ja ii.129; Ja v.346.

cp. Class Sk. palvala = Lat. palus; Ohg. felawa = Ger. felber willow; Lith. pélkè moor; BSk. also palvala, e.g. Divy 56

Pallava

(nt.) a sprout Ja i.250; Ja ii.161. See also phallava.

cp. Class Sk. pallaka

Pallavita

(adj.) having sprouts, burgeoning, budding Mil 151; Vv-a 288 (sa˚ full of sprouts).

fr. pallava

Pallāsa

see vi˚.

Palloma

security, confidence DN i.96; MN i.17; cp. DN-a i.266 “loma-haṃsa-mattam pi ‘ssa na bhavissati.”

a contraction of pannaloma, see J.P.T.S. 1889, 206

Pavakkhati

only in 1st sq. pavakkhāmi “I will declare or explain” Snp 701, Snp 963 = Snp 1050 (cp Nd i.482 & Nd;2 under brūmi).

fut. of pa + vac

Pavacchati

see anu˚, & cp.; pavecchati.

Sk. prayacchati

Pavajati

to wander forth, go about, perambulate; ppr. pavajamāna SN i.42 (but may be pavajjamāna “being predicated” in play of word with act pavadanto in same verse).

pa + vraj

Pavajjati

to sound forth to be played (of music) Ja i.64 (pavajjayiṃsu, 3rd pl. aor.); Vv-a 96 (pavajjamāna ppr. med.).

Pass. of pavadati

Pavajjana

(nt.) sounding, playing of music Vv-a 210.

fr. pavajjati, Pass. of pavadati

Pavaḍḍha

grown up, increased, big, strong Ja v.340 (˚kāya of huge stature; so read for pavaddha˚; expld as vaḍḍhita-kāya).

pp. of pavaḍḍhati

Pavaḍḍhati

to grow up, to increase MN i.7; SN ii.84, SN ii.92; Snp 306 (3rd sg. praet. ˚atha); Dhp 282, Dhp 335 Dhp 349; Pp 64; Pv-a 8 (puññaṃ) ■ pp. pavaḍḍha pavuddha;.

pa + vṛdh

Pavati1

to blow forth, to yield a scent Thag 528 (= gandhaṃ vissajjati C.). See pavāti.

pa +

Pavati2

to hurry on, to rush Vv-a 42 (but better read with v.l. patati as syName of gacchati).

of plu, cp. Vedic plavate to swim & Epic Sk.; pravate to jump

Pavatta

(adj.) 1. (adj.) happening, going on, procedure, resulting Thig 220 (assu ca pavattaṃ taken by Mrs. Rh. D. as “tears shed”); Thag-a 179; Pv-a 35, Pv-a 83 (gāthāyo), 120, esp. with ref. to natural products as “that which comes,” i.e. normal, natural raw; ˚phala ready or natural, wild fruit (gained without exertion of picking), in cpds. ˚phalika Snp-a 295 sq. ˚bhojana (adj.) Ja i.6; Ja iii.365; Vism 422, and, ˚bhojin one who lives on wild fruit (a certain class of ascetics tāpasā) DN i.101; MN i.78, MN i.343; AN i.241; AN ii.206; cp DN-a i.269 sq. & Snp-a 295, Snp-a 296.; ˚maṃsa fresh or raw meat (flesh) Vin i.217 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.81).

2. (nt. “that which goes on,” i.e. the circle or whirl of existence Mil 197, Mil 326 (cp. Mil trsln ii.200 “starting afresh in innumerable births,” quot. fr. C.), opp appavatta freedom from Saṃsāra, i.e. Nibbāna ibid

3. founded on, dealing with, relating to, being in SN iv.115 (kuraraghare p. pabbata); DN-a i.92 (ādinaya˚), 217 (˚pīti-sukha being in a state of happiness).

pp. of pavattati

Pavattati

(intrs.) 1. to move on, go forward, proceed Pv i.57; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 131; of water: to flow SN ii.31; Ja ii.104; Pv-a 143, Pv-a 154, Pv-a 198.

2. to exist to be, continue in existence Ja i.64; Pv-a 130 (opp ucchijjati).

3. to result, to go on Pv-a 45 (phalaṃ) 60 (vippaṭisār’ aggi) ■ pp. pavatta; Caus. pavatteti (q.v.).

pa + vattati, vṛt

Pavattana

(adj. nt.) 1. moving forward, doing good, beneficial, useful; f. ˚i MN i.214; Pp 35 (spelt pavattinī in T. as well as Pp A 218).

2. execution performance, carrying out Mil 277 (āṇā,˚ cp pavatti).

fr. pavattati

Pavattayitar

one who sets into motion or keeps up DN-a i.273 (see foll.).

n. ag. to pavatteti

Pavattar

one who keeps up or keeps going, one who hands on (the tradition) an expounder, teacher DN i.104 (mantānaṃ p. = pavattayitar DN-a i.273); SN iv.94; Dhp 76 (nidhīnaṃ p. = ācikkhitar Dhp-a ii.107).

n. ag. of either pa + vac or pa + vṛt, the latter more probable considering similar use of parivatteti The P. commentators take it as either

Pavattāpanatta

(nt.) making continue, keeping going, preservation upkeep Vism 32 (T. ˚attha).

fr. Caus. II. of pavatteti = pavattāpeti

Pavatti

(f.) 1. manifestation, wielding, execution, giving, in āṇā˚; royal authority Ja iii.504 Ja iv.145; Thag-a 283.

2. happening, incident, news Ja i.125, Ja i.150; Ja ii.416; Vism 91; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 17, Pv-a 29, Pv-a 35 Pv-a 92, Pv-a 152, Pv-a 242, etc.; Dhp-a i.80 (v.l. pavutti). Cp pavutti.

fr. pa + vṛt

Pavattita

set going, inaugurated, established Vin i.11 (dhammacakka); MN iii.29, MN iii.77; SN i.191; Snp 556, Snp 557 (dhammacakka); Pv-a 67 (id.) 140 (sangīti); Snp-a 454.

pp. of pavatteti

Pavattin

(adj.) 1. advancing, moving forward, proceeding, effective, beneficial; only in phrase dhammā pavattino AN i.279; DN-a i.4 = Pv-a 2; and in suppavattin (good-flowing, i.e. well-recited?) AN iv.140 (of pātimokkha; trsld as “thoroughly mastered J.P.T.S. 1909, 199, v.71 (id.).

2. going on, procedure (in f. ˚inī) Vin ii.271 sq., 277.

fr. pa + vṛt

Pavatteti

(trs.) 1. to send forth, set going Vin i.87 (assūni); SN ii.282 (id.) Ja i.147 (selagulaṃ pavaṭṭ˚); esp. in phrase dhammacakkaṃ p. to inaugurate the reign of righteousness Vin i.8, Vin i.11; MN i.171; SN iii.86; Snp 693; Mil 20, Mil 343; Vv-a 165; Pv-a 21, etc.

2. to cause, produce, make arise Ja ii.102 (mah’ oghaṃ); Mil 219.

3. to give forth bestow, give (dānaṃ a gift) Vin iv.5 (spelt ṭṭ); Pv-a 19 Pv-a 123, Pv-a 139.

4. to continue, keep on, practise, go on with Dhp-a i.257; Pv-a 29 (attabhāvaṃ), 42 (kammante)

5. to move about, behave, linger Dhp-a i.14 (ṭṭ). 6. to display, execute, wield, enforce Mil 189 (āṇaṃ cp. āṇāpavatti) ■ pp. pavattita (q.v.).

Caus. of pavattati

Pavadati

to speak out, speak to, talk, dispute; ppr. pavadanto SN i.42 (trsl. “predicate”); Nd i.293-aor. pāvādi Thag-a 71 ■ Cp. pāvadati.

pa + vad

Pavana1

(nt.) winnowing of grain Mil 201 (read pavanena ṭṭhāyiko who earned his living by winnowing gṛain).

cp. Sk. pavana & pāvana, of;

Pavana2

(nt.) side of a mountain, declivity DN ii.254; MN i.117; SN i.26; SN ii.95 SN ii.105; Thag 1092; Ja i.28; Ja ii.180; Ja vi.513; Cp i.15, 101iii.131; Mil 91, Mil 198 sq., 364, 408; Vism 345. Cp Pavananagara Snp-a 583 (v.l. BB for Tumbavanagara = Vanasavhaya). Note. Kern, Toev. s. v defends Müller’s (after Subhūti) interpretation as “wood, woodland,” and compares BSk. pavana Mvu ii.272, Mvu ii.382.

cp. Vedic pravaṇa; not with Müller, P.Gr. 24 = upavana; perhaps = Lat. pronus “prone”

Pavana3

at Vin ii.136 in cpd. pavan-anta refers to the end of the girdle (kāyabandhana), where it is tied into a loop or knot. Bdhgh on p. 319 (on C.V. v.29, 2 expls it by pās’ anta.

Pavapati

to sow out Thig 112.

pa + vap

Pavayha

(adv.) carrying on, pressing, urgently, constantly, always repeated as pavayha pavayha MN iii.118 = Dhp-a ii.108; MN i.442, MN i.444.

ger. of pavahati

Pavara

(adj.) most excellent, noble, distinguished SN iii.264; Snp 83, Snp 646, Snp 698 (muni˚); Dhp 422 Pp 69; Mil 246; Pv-a 2 (˚dhamma-cakka), 67 (id.) 39 (˚buddh’āsana); Sdhp 421.

pa + vara

Pavasati

to “live forth,” i.e. to be away from home, to dwell abroad Snp 899; Ja ii.123 (= pavasaṃ gacchati); v.91 ■ pp. pavuttha (q.v.). Cp. vi˚.

pa + vas

Pavassati

to “rain forth,” to begin to rain, shed rain SN i.100; Snp 18 sq. (imper. pavassa), 353 (v.l.) Ja vi.500 (“cry”), 587 (aor. pāvassi) ■ pp. pavaṭṭha pavuṭṭha;: see abhi˚.

pa + vṛṣ

Pavassana

(nt.) beginning to rain, raining Mil 120.

fr. pa + vṛṣ

Pavāta

(nt.) a draught of air, breeze Vin ii.79 (opp. nivāta).

pa + vāta, cp. Vedic pravāta

Pavāti

to diffuse a scent Dhp 54; Thag 528; Ja v.63 (disā bhāti p. ca). See also pavāyati.

pa +

Pavāda

talk, disputation, discussion DN i.26, DN i.162; MN i.63; Snp 538.

pa + vad, cp. Epic Sk. pravāda talk, saying

Pavādaka

(adj.) 1. belonging to a discussion, intended for disputation DN i.178 (samaya˚ “debating hall”).

2. fond of discussing Mil 4 (bhassa˚ “fond of wordy disputation”). Cp. pavādiya.

fr. pavāda

Pavādiya

(adj.) belonging to a disputation, disputing, arguing, talking Snp 885 (n. pl ˚āse, taken by Nd i.293 as pavadanti, by Snp-a 555 as vādino).

fr. pavāda, cp. pavādaka

Pavāyati

to blow forth, to permeate (of a scent), to diffuse Ja i.18 (dibba-gandho p.); Vism 58 (dasa disā sīla-gandho p.). Cp. pavāti.

pa +

Pavāraṇā

(f.) 1. the Pavāraṇā, a ceremony at the termination of the Vassa Vin i.155, Vin i.160 (where 2 kinds cātuddasikā & pannarasikā),; ii.32. 167; DN ii.220; SN i.190. pavāraṇaṃ ṭhapeti to fix or determine the (date of) P. Vin ii.32, Vin ii.276. Later two kinds of this ceremony (festival) are distinguished, viz. mahā˚; the great P. and ˚saṅgaha, an abridged P. (see DA i.241; Ja i.29, Ja i.82, Ja i.193 (mahā˚); Vism 391 (id.); Snp-a 57 (id.) Vv-a 67 (id.); Pv-a 140 (id.);

2. satisfaction Vism 71.

pa + vṛ; cp. BSk. pravāraṇā Divy 91, Divy 93; whereas Epic Sk. pravāraṇa, nt., only in sense of “satisfaction”

Pavārita

1. satisfied MN i.12 (+ paripuṇṇa pariyosita); Mil 231; Vism 71.

2. having come to the end of the rainy season Vin i.175 ■ Freq in formula bhuttāvin pavārita having eaten & being satisfied Vin i.213 (cp. Vin. Texts i.39); ii.300; iv.82; Pv-a 23.

pp. of pavāreti

Pavāreti

1. to invite, offer, present, satisfy SN i.190; AN iv.79; Ja iii.352.

2. to celebrate the Pavāraṇā (i.e. to come to the end of the Vassa) Vin i.160 sq.; Vin ii.255; Dhp-a i.87; Ja i.29, Ja i.215; Ja iv.243 (vuttha-vassa p.); Vism 90; Snp-a 57 ■ pp. pavārita (q.v.) See also sam˚. Pavala & Pavala;

Caus. of pa + vṛ; cp. BSk. pravārayati Divy 116, Divy 283, etc.

Pavāla & Pavāḷa

(m. & nt.) 1. coral Ja i.394 (˚ratta-kambala) ii.88; iv.142; Mil 267 (with other jewels), 380 (id.) Snp-a 117; Vv-a 112 (˚ratana).

2. a sprout, young branch, shoot Ja iii.389, Ja iii.395 (kāḷa-valli˚); v.207; Ne 14 (˚ankura); Snp-a 91 (id.).

cp. Class Sk. prabāla, pravāḍa & pravāla

Pavāḷha

1. carried away (?), turned away, distracted, dismissed SN iii.91 (bhikkhu-sangho p.).

2. drawn forth, pulled out taken out DN i.77 = Pts ii.211 = Vism 406 (muñjamhā isīkā p.); Ja vi.67 (muñjā v’isikā p.).

apparently pp. of pavahati (pavāheti), but in reality pp. of pa + bṛh1, corresp. to Sk. prabṛdha (pravṛdha), cp. abbūlha & ubbahati (ud + ; bṛh1 ), but cp also ubbāḷha which is pp. of ud + bādh. At DN i.77 (where v.l. pabbāḷha = pabūḷha, unexpld by Bdhgh it is synonymous with uddharati = ubbahati

Pavāsa

sojourning abroad, being away from home Ja ii.123 Ja v.434; Ja vi.150; Mil 314 ■ Cp. vi˚.

fr. pa + vas, cp. Vedic pravāsa in same meaning

Pavāsita

1. (perhaps we should read pavārita?) given as present, honoured Ja v.377 (= pesita C.).

2. (so perhaps to be read for pavūsita T.) scented, permeated with scent Vv-a 237 (v.l. padhūpita preferable).

pp. of pavāseti

Pavāsin

(adj.) living abroad or from home, in cira˚; long absent Dhp 219 (= cirappavuttha Dhp-a iii.293).

fr. pavāsa

Pavāhaka

(adj.) carrying or driving away Thag 758.

fr. pa + vah

Pavāhati

1. to cause to be carried away, to remove; freq. with ref. to water: to wash away cleanse MN i.39; SN i.79, SN i.183 (pāpakammaṃ nahānena) ii.88; Thag 349; Ja i.24; Ja iii.176, Ja iii.225, Ja iii.289; Ja iv.367 Ja v.134; Ja vi.197; Ja vi.588; Mil 247; Dāvs ii.59; Pv-a 256. 2. to pull out, draw out DN i.77 (better to be read as pabāhati).

Caus. fr. pa + vah

Pavāhitatta

(nt.) the fact of being removed or cleansed Ja v.134.

abstr. fr. pavāhita, pp. of pavāheti

Pavāhana

(adj. & nt.) 1. carrying off, putting away, Thag 751.

2. wiping off Ja iii.290.

fr. pa + ; vah

Pavikatthita

boasted Ja i.359.

pp. of pa + vi + katthati

Pavicaya

investigation Snp 1021; Thag 593; Pp 25; Ne 3, Ne 87.

fr. pa + vicinati

Pavicarati

to investigate thoroughly MN iii.85; SN v.68.

pa + vicarati

Pavicinati

to investigate, to examine MN iii.85; SN v.68, SN v.262; Ne 21; Snp-a 545. grd. paviceyya Ja iv.164, & pavicetabba Ne 21.

pa + vicinati

Pavijjhati

to throw forth or down Vin ii.193 (silaṃ cp. Ja i.173 & v.333); iii.82, 178, 415; DN-a i.138 DN-a i.154 ■ pp. paviddha (q.v.).

pa + vyadh

Pavijjhana

(nt.) hurling, throwing Ja v.67 (Devadattassa silā˚, cp. Vin ii.193); Ja i.173; Ja v.333.

fr. pavijjhati

Paviṭṭha

entered, gone into (acc.), visited SN i.197; SN ii.19; Dhp 373; DN-a i.288; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13.

pp. of pavisati

Pavitakka

scepticism, speculation, controversy Snp 834; Nd i.176.

pa + vitakka

Pavidaṃseti

to make clear, to reveal Ja v.326 (aor. pavidaṃsayi).

pa + vi + Caus. of dṛś; daṃseti = dasseti

Paviddha

thrown down, fig. given up, abandoned Thag 350 (˚gocara).

pp. of pavijjhati

Pavineti

to lead or drive away, expel Snp 507 = Ja v.148.

pa + vineti

Pavibhajati

to distribute, to apportion SN i.193 (˚bhajjaṃ, ppr., with jj metri causa) = Thag 1242 (˚bhajja ger.).

pa + vi + bhaj. Cp. Class Sk. pravibhāga division, distribution

Pavilīyati

to be dissolved, to melt or fade away SN iv.289 (pavilīyamānena kāyena with their body melting from heat; so read for paveliyamānena).

pa + vi +

Paviloketi

to look forward or ahead Ja vi.559.

pa + viloketi

Pavivitta

separated, detached, secluded, singled MN i.14, MN i.77, MN i.386; MN ii.6; SN ii.29; Vism 73; Pv-a 127; Dhp-a ii.77. Often in phrase appiccha santuṭṭha pavivitta referring to an ascetic enjoying the satisfaction of seclusion Nd ii.225 = Nd i.3421b = Vism 25; Ja i.107; Mil 244, Mil 358, Mil 371 (with appa-sadda appanigghosa).

pp. of pa + vi + vic

Paviveka

retirement, solitude, seclusion Vin i.104; Vin ii.258 (appicchatā santuṭṭhi + ; cp. pavivitta); DN i.60; MN i.14 sq.; SN ii.202; SN v.398; AN i.240; Snp 257; Dhp 205 (˚rasa, cp. Dhp-a iii.268); Thag 597; Ja i.9; Pts ii.244; Vism 41, Vism 73 (˚sukha-rasa); Sdhp 476; DN-a i.169.

fr. pa + vi + vic

Pavivekatā

(f.) = paviveka Vism 81 (appicchatā etc. in enumn of the 5 dhuta-dhammas).

abstr. fr. paviveka

Pavivekiya

(adj.) springing from solitude Thag 669.

fr. paviveka

Pavisati

to go in, to enter (acc.) Snp 668, Snp 673; Dhp-a ii.72 (opp. nikkhamati); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 47 (nagaraṃ). Pot. ˚vise Snp 387 imper. pavisa MN i.383; SN i.213 fut. pavisissati Vin i.87; Ja iii.86; pavissati (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 652) Ja ii.68; Cp i.956, and pavekkhati SN iv.199; Ja vi.76 (nāgo bhūmiyaṃ p.); Dāvs iii.26; aor. pāvisi Vin ii.79 (vihāraṃ); MN i.381; Ja i.76 (3rd pl. pāvisuṃ) 213; Ja ii.238; Vism 42 (gāmaṃ) Pv-a 22, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 161, Pv-a 256 and pavisi Ja ii.238; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 35; ger. pavisitvā SN i.107; Ja i.9 (araññaṃ); Vism 22; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 79 & pavissa SN i.200; Dhp 127 = Pv-a 104 ■ pp. paviṭṭha (q.v.). Caus. paveseti (q.v.).

pa + viś

Pavisana

(nt.) going in, entering, entrance Ja i.294; Ja ii.416; Ja vi.383; Dhp-a i.83. Cp. pavesana.

fr. pa + viś

Pavīṇa

(adj.) clever, skilful Dāvs v.33; Vv-a 168 (v.l. kusala).

cp. Class. Sk. pravīṇa

Pavīnati

to look up to, respect, honour Ja iii.387 (T. reading sure, but v.l. C. pavīrati).

pa + to seek, Sk. veti, but with diff. formation in P. cp. Trenckner, Notes 78 (who derives it fr. veṇ) apaviṇāti. The form is doubtful; probably we should read pacināti

Pavīhi

in pl. diff. kinds of rice Ja v.405 (= nānappakārā vīhayo).

pa + vīhi

Pavuccati

to be called, said, or pronounced Snp 436, Snp 513, Snp 611 & passim; Dhp 257; Pv iv.347 Pv-a 102. The form pavuccate also occurs, e.g. at Snp 519 sq ■ pp. pavutta1 (q.v.).

Pass. of pavacati

Pavuṭā

at MN i.518 is unexplained. The reading of this word is extremely doubtful at all passages. The vv ll. at MN i.518 are pavudhā, pavujā, paṭuvā, *phutā, and the C. expln is pavuṭā = gaṇṭhikā (knot or block?). The identical passage at DN i.54 reads paṭuvā (q.v.), with vv.ll. pamuṭā, pamuvucā, while DN-a i.164 expls pacuṭā = gaṇṭhikā (vv.ll. pamuṭā, pamucā, papuṭā). Dial. i.72 reads pacuṭa, but leaves the word untranslated Franke, Dīgha, p. 58 ditto.

Pavuṭṭha

(pavaṭṭha) see abhi˚.

pp. of pavassati

Pavutta1

said, declared, pronounced DN i.104 (mantapada p.; v.l. ˚vatta which is more likely; but DN-a i.273 expls by vutta & vācita) SN i.52; Snp 383 (su˚ = sudesita Snp-a 373), 868 (= ācikkhita desita, etc. Nd i.271).

pp. of pa + vac, but sometimes confounded with pavatta, pp. of pa + vṛt, cp. pavutti

Pavutta2

scattered forth, strewn, sown SN i.227.

pp. of pa + vap

Pavutti

happening, proceeding, fate, event Pv-a 31 (v.l. pavatti), 46, 53 61, 78, 81 and passim (perhaps should be read pavatti at all passages).

fr. pa + vṛt, cp. Class. Sk. pravṛtti

Pavuttha

dwelling or living abroad, staying away from home DN ii.261 (˚jāti one who dwells away from his caste, i.e. who no longer belongs to any caste); Ja v.434; Dhp-a iii.293. Freq. in phrase pavutthapatikā itthi a woman whose husband dwells abroad Vin ii.268; Vin iii.83; Mil 205.

pp. of pavasati

Pavūsita

at Vv-a 237 is misreading either for pavāsita or (more likely) for padhūpita (as v.l. SS.), in meaning “blown” i.e. scented, filled with scent.

Pavekkhati

is fut. pavisati.

Pavecchati

to give, bestow SN i.18; Snp 463 sq., 490 sq. Thig 272; Ja i.28; Ja iii.12 (v.l. pavacchati), 172; iv.363 vi.502, 587 (vuṭṭhi-dhāraṃ pavecchanto devo pāvassi tāvade; v.l. pavattento); Pv ii.943 (= deti Pv-a 130) ii.970 (= pavatteti ibid. 139); ii.107 (= deti ibid. 144) Mil 375.

another dern suggested by Dr. Barnett in J.R.A.S. 1924, 186 is = Sk pra-vṛścati.

most likely (as suggested by Trenckner, Notes 61) a distortion of payacchati (pa + yam ) by way of *payecchati → pavecchati (cp. sa-yathā → seyyathā) Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 43 fr. pa + vṛṣ, nor with Müller P.Gr. 120 fr. pa + viṣ (who with this derivation follows the P. Commentators, e.g. Ja iii.12 pavesati, deti; Snp-a 407 (pavesati paṭipādeti); Geiger P.Gr. § 152, note 3 suggests (doubtfully) a Fut. stem (of viś ?)

Paveṇi

(f.) 1. a braid of hair, i.e. the hair twisted & unadorned AN iii.56–⁠2. a mat, cover DN i.7 ≈ (see ajina˚).

3. custom, usage, wont, tradition Ja i.89 Ja ii.353; Ja v.285; Ja vi.380 (kula-tanti, kula-paveṇi); Dpvs xviii.1; Mil 134 (˚upaccheda break of tradition) 190, 226 (+ vaṃsa), 227; Dhp-a i.284 (tanti + ); Pv-a 131.

4. succession, lineage, breed, race Snp 26 (cp Snp-a 39); Dhp-a i.174.

-pālaka guardian of tradition Vism 99 (tanti-dhara vaṃsanurakkhaka + ); Dhp-a iii.386.

pa + veṇi; cp. late Sk. praveṇi in meanings 1 & 2

Pavedana

(nt.) making known, telling, proclamation, announcement only in stanza “nisīd ambavane ramme yāva kālappavedanā,” until the announcement of the time (of death) Thag 563 (trsln “until the hour should be revealed”) = Ja i.118 = Vism 389 = Dhp-a i.248.

fr. pa + vid

Pavedita

made known, declared, taught MN i.67 (su˚ & du˚); SN i.231; Dhp 79, Dhp 281; Snp 171, Snp 330 Snp 838; Nd i.186.

pp. of pavedeti

Pavedeti

to make known, to declare, communicate, relate SN i.24; SN iv.348; Dhp 151; Snp p.103 (= bodheti ñāpeti Snp-a 444); Pv-a 33, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 68 (attānaṃ make oneself known), 120 ■ pp. pavedita (q.v.).

Caus. of pa + vid

Pavedhati

to be afflicted, to be frightened, to be agitated, quiver, tremble, fear Snp 928 (= tasati etc. Nd i.384); Vism 180 (reads pavedheti) Thag-a 203 (allavatthaṃ allakesaṃ pavedhanto misreading for pavesento); Dhp-a ii.249 ■ Freq in ppr. med. pavedhamāna trembling MN i.88; Pv iii.55 (= pakampamāna Pv-a 199); Ja i.58; Ja iii.395 ■ pp pavedhita & pavyadhita; (q.v.).

pa + vyath, cp. pavyatheti

Pavellati

to shake, move to & fro, undulate SN iv.289 (paveliyamānena kāyena); Ja iii.395 ■ pp pavellita (q.v.).

pa + vell

Pavellita

shaken about, moving to & fro, swinging, trembling Ja vi.456.

pp. of pavellati

Pavesa

(-˚) entrance Thag-a 66 (Rājagaha˚); Dhp-a iv.150.

fr. pa + viś

Pavesana

(nt.) 1. going in, entering, entrance Ja i.142; Pv-a 79 (v.l. for T. ˚vesa), 217, 221 (asipattavana˚).

2. beginning Vv-a 71 (opp. nikkhamana). 3. putting in, application Ja ii.102 (daṇḍe p.).

4. means of entry, as adj. able to enter Ja vi.383.

fr. paveseti

Pavesetar

one who lets in or allows to enter, an usher in SN iv.194; AN v.195.

n. ag. of paveseti

Paveseti

1. to make enter, allow to enter, usher in MN i.79; Ja i.150 (miga-gaṇaṃ uyyānaṃ) 291; vi.179; Vism 39; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 44, Pv-a 61 (gehaṃ), 141 (id.); Dhp-a i.397.

2. to furnish, provide, introduce procure, apply to (acc. or loc.) Ja iii.52 (rajjukaṃ gīvāya) vi.383 (siriṃ); Mil 39 (gehe padīpaṃ), 360 (udakaṃ) DN-a i.218. Perhaps at Thag-a 203 for pavedheti. Caus. II. pavesāpeti Ja i.294 (mātugāmaṃ aggiṃ).

Caus. of pavisati

Pavyatheti

to cause to tremble, to shake Ja v.409. Cp. pavedhati ■ pp. pavyadhita (q.v.).

Caus. of pa + vyath

Pavyadhita

afflicted, frightened, afraid Ja vi.61 Ja vi.166.

pp. of pa + vyath; the dh through analogy with pavedhita

Pasaṃsaka

flatterer MN i.327; Ja ii.439; Sdhp 565.

fr. pasaṃsati

Pasaṃsati

to speak out, praise, commend, agree DN i.163; SN i.102, SN i.149, SN i.161; Ja i.143; Ja ii.439; Ja v.331; Iti 16; Snp 47, Snp 163, Snp 390, Snp 658, Snp 906; Dhp 30; Pv ii.942 DN-a i.149; Pv-a 25, Pv-a 131 (= vaṇṇeti) ■ pp. pasattha pasaṃsita; (q.v.). Cp. paṭipasaṃsita.

pa + saṃs

Pasaṃsana

(nt.) praising, commendation Pp 53; Sdhp 213; Pv-a 30.

fr. pa + śaṃs

Pasaṃsā

(f.) praise, applause DN iii.260; SN i.202; Thag 609; Snp 213, Snp 826 Snp 895; Mil 377; Snp-a 155. In composition the form is pasaṃsa˚; e.g. ˚āvahana bringing applause Snp 256 ˚kāma desirous of praise Snp 825, cp. Nd i.163; ˚lābha gain of praise Snp 828. As adj. pasaṃsa “laudable praiseworthy” it is better taken as grd. of pasaṃsati (= pasaṃsiya); thus at Pv iv.713 (pāsaṃsa Minayeff) Pv-a 8, Pv-a 89 (= anindita).

fr. pa + śaṃs; cp. Vedic praśaṃsā

Pasaṃsita

praised SN i.232; Snp 829, Snp 928; Dhp 228, Dhp 230; Nd i.169; Pv-a 116 (= vaṇṇita) 130.

pp. of pasaṃsati, cp. pasattha

Pasaṃsiya

(adj.) laudable, praiseworthy SN i.149; SN iii.83; AN ii.19; Snp 658; Ja i.202; Sdhp 563. Cp. pasaṃsā.

grd. of pasaṃsati, cp. Vedic praśaṃsia

Pasakkati

to go forth or out to; ger. pasakkiya SN i.199 = Thag 119; Thag 125.

pa + sakkati

Pasakkhita

at Ja iv.365 is doubtful; perhaps we should read pasakkita (pp. of pasakkati); the C. expls as “lying down” (nipanna acchati, p. 367); Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes change to pamakkhita on ground of vv.ll. vamakkhita & malakita.;

Pasaṅkanta

gone out to, gone forth Pv-a 22.

pp. of pa + sankamati, of kram

Pasaṅkamati

to go out or forth to (acc.) Sdhp 277 ■ pp. pasaṅkanta.

pa + saṃ + kram

Pasaṅga

1. hanging on, inclination, attachment to Kp-a 18; Pv-a 130.

2. occasion, event; loc. pasaṅge at the occasion of (-˚), instead of Kp-a 213 (karaṇavacana˚, where Pv-a 30 in id. p. reads karaṇ’ atthe).

fr. pa + sanj. Class Sk. prasanga in both meanings

Pasajati

to let loose, produce; to be attached to Snp 390 (= allīyati Snp-a 375).

pa + sṛj

Pasaṭa

let out, produced DN iii.167; Snp-a 109 (conj. for pasava in expln of pasuta).

pp. of pa + sṛ;

Pasata1

(adj.) spotted, only in cpd. ˚miga spotted antelope Ja v.418 (v.l. pasada˚) The more freq. P. form is pasada˚; e.g. SN ii.279 (gloss pasata˚); Ja v.24, Ja v.416; Ja vi.537; Snp-a 82.

Vedic pṛṣant, f. pṛṣatī

Pasata2

(nt.) a small measure of capacity, a handful (seems to be applied to water only) Ja i.101 (˚mattaṃ udakaṃ); iv.201 (udaka˚); v.382 (˚mattaṃ pānīyaṃ). Often redupl. pasataṃ pasataṃ “by handfuls” MN i.245, Ja v.164. At DN-a i.298 it is closely connected with sarāva (cup), as denoting the amount of a small gift.

etym.? Late Sk. pṛṣat or pṛṣad a drop; cp. phusita1 rain-drop = pṛṣata; BR. under pṛṣant pasata1, but probably dialectical & Non-Aryan

Pasattha

(& Pasaṭṭha) praised, extolled, commended SN i.169; Ja iii.234; Vv 4421; Mil 212, Mil 361 As pasaṭṭha at Pv ii.973 (so to be read for paseṭṭha) iv.152 (= vaṇṇita Pv-a 241); Dhs-a 124.

pp. of pasaṃsati

Pasada

. See pasata1.

Pasanna1

(adj) 1. clear, bright Snp 550 (˚netta); Kp-a 64 & 65 (˚tilatelavaṇṇa, where Vism 262 reads vippasanna˚); Vism 409 (id.).

2. happy gladdened, reconciled, pleased Ja i.151, Ja i.307; Vism 129 (muddha˚).

3. pleased in one’s conscience, reconciled believing, trusting in (loc.), pious, good, virtuous AN iii.35 (Satthari, dhamme sanghe); SN i.34 (Buddhe) v.374; Vv 59; Snp 698; Dhp 368 (Buddha-sāsane) Ja ii.111; Dhp-a i.60 (Satthari). Often combd with saddha (having faith) Vin ii.190; Pv-a 20, Pv-a 42 (a˚), and in cpd. ˚citta devotion in one’s heart Vin i.16; A vi.209; Snp 316, Snp 403, Snp 690; Pv ii.16; Snp-a 490; Pv-a 129 or ˚mānasa Snp 402; Vv-a 39; Pv-a 67; cp. pasannena manasā SN i.206; Dhp 2. See also abhippasanna vippasanna;.

pp. of pasīdati

Pasanna2

flowing out, streaming, issuing forth; in assu-pasannaṃ shedding of tears SN ii.179.

pp. of pa + syad

Pasannā

(f.) a kind of spirituous liquor (made from rice) Ja i.360.

late Sk. prasannā

Pasammati

to become allayed, to cease, to fade away Thag 702.

pa + Śam

Pasayha

is ger. of pasahati (q.v.).

Pasaraṇa

(nt.) stretching, spreading, being stretched out Pv-a 219 (piṭṭhi˚). See also pasāraṇa.

fr. pa + sṛ;

Pasava

bringing forth, offspring SN i.69.

fr. pa + su

Pasavati

to bring forth, give birth to, beget, produce; mostly fig. in combn with the foll. nouns kibbisaṃ to commit sin Vin ii.204; AN v.75; pāpaṃ id Pv iv.150; puññaṃ to produce merit SN i.182, SN i.213; AN v.76; Pv-a 121; opp. apuññaṃ Vin ii.26; SN i.114 veraṃ to beget hatred SN ii.68; Dhp 201 ■ Caus. pasaveti in same meaning Ja vi.106 (pāpaṃ)-pp. pasūta (q.v.).

pa + su

Pasavana

(nt.) 1. giving birth Pv-a 35. - 2. producing, generating, effecting Pv-a 31 (puñña˚).

fr. pa + su

Pasaha

overcoming, mastering, in dup˚; (adj.) hard to overcome Ja ii.219; Mil 21.

fr. pa + sah

Pasahati

to use force, subdue, oppress, overcome MN ii.99; Snp 443; Dhp 7, Dhp 128; Dhp-a iii.46; Ja iv.126 Ja iv.494; Ja v.27 ■ ger. pasayha using force, forcibly, by force DN ii.74 (okkassa + ); AN iv.16 (id.); SN i.143; Snp 72; Ja i.143; Pv ii.92; ii.910; (read appasayha for suppasayha); Mil 210 (okassa + ; for okkassa?). Also in cpd. pasayha-kārin using force Ja iv.309; Ja v.425.

pa + sah

Pasākha

(m. & nt.) 1. a smaller branch Ja vi.324 (sākha˚; ).

2. branch-like wood, i.e. hard wood Thag 72.

3. the body where it branches off from the trunk, i.e. abdomen & thighs the lower part of the body Vin iv.316 (= adho-nābhi ubbha-jānu-maṇḍalaṃ C.). Cp. Suśruta ii.31, 10. 4. the extremities (being the 5th stage in the formation of the embryo) SN i.206.

pa + sākhā; Epic Sk. praśākhā branch

Pasāda

1. clearness, brightness, purity; referring to the colours (“visibility”) of the eye Ja i.319 (akkhīni maṇiguḷa-sadisāni paññāyamāna pañca-ppasādāni ahesuṃ); Snp-a 453 (pasanna-netto i.e. pañca-vaṇṇa-ppasāda-sampattiyā) In this sense also, in Abhidhamma, with ref. to the eye in function of “sentient organ, sense agency” sensitive surface (so Mrs Rh. D. in Dhs. tsrl. 174) at Dhs-a 306, Dhs-a 307.

2. joy, satisfaction, happy or good mind virtue, faith MN i.64 (Satthari); SN i.202; AN i.98, AN i.222 (Buddhe etc.); ii.84; iii.270 (puggala˚); iv.346; Snp-a 155, Pv-a 5, Pv-a 35.

3. repose, composure, allayment serenity Ne 28, Ne 50; Vism 107, Vism 135; Thag-a 258Note. pasāda at Thig 411 is to be read pāsaka (see J.P.T.S. 1893 pp. 45, 46). Cp. abhi˚.

fr. pa + sad, cp. Vedic prasāda

Pasādaka

(adj.) 1. making bright Mil 35 (udaka˚ maṇi).

2. worthy, good, pious Pv-a 129 (a˚). Cp. pāsādika.

fr. pasāda

Pasādana

(nt.) 1. happy state, reconciliation, purity Pv-a 132.

2. granting graces, gratification Dhp-a iii.3 (brahmaṇo mama p. ˚ṭṭhāne pasīdati he is gracious instead of me giving graces) ■ Cp. sam˚.

fr. pa + sad

Pasādaniya

(adj.) inspiring confidence, giving faith SN v.156; Pp 49, Pp 50; Vb-a 282 (˚suttanta); Sdhp 543; the 10 pāsādaniyā dhammā at MN iii.11 sq. Cp. sam˚.

fr. pasāda

Pasādiyā

at Ja vi.530 is doubtful; it is expld in C. together with saṃsādiyā (a certain kind of rice: sūkara-sāli), yet the C. seems to take it as “bhūmiyaṃ patita”; v.l. pasāriya. Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as rice plant compares Sk.; *prasātikā.

Pasādeti

to render calm, appease, make peaceful, reconcile, gladden, incline one’s heart (cittaṃ) towards (loc.) DN i.110, DN i.139; SN i.149; AN v.71; Pv ii.942 (cittaṃ); Mil 210; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 123 (khamāpento p.) ■ Cp. vi˚.

Caus. of pa + sad, see pasīdati

Pasādhana

(nt.) ornament, decoration, parure Ja ii.186 (rañño sīsa ˚kappaka King’s headdress-maker i.e. barber); iii.437; iv.3 (ura-cchada˚); Dhp-a i.227 (˚peḷikā), 342 (˚kappaka), 393; Thag-a 267; Vv-a 165, Vv-a 187; Pv-a 155.

fr. pa + sādh; cp. Class. Sk. prasādhana in same meaning

Pasādhita

adorned, arrayed with ornaments, embellished, dressed up Ja i.489 (maṇḍita˚) ii.48 (id.); iv.219 (id.); v.510 (nahāta˚).

pp. of pasādheti

Pasādheti

to adorn, decorate, array Mvu vii.38; Dhp-a i.398 ■ pp. pasādhita (q.v.).

Caus. of pa + sādh

Pasāraṇa

(nt.) stretching out DN-a i.196 (opp. sammiñjana); Dhp-a i.298 (hattha˚).

fr. pa + sṛ; cp. pasaraṇa

Pasārita

1. stretched out, usually in contrast with sammiñjita, e.g. at DN i.222; Vin i.230; MN iii.35, MN iii.90; SN i.137; Vism 19; Vv-a 6.

2. put forth laid out, offered for sale Mil i.336.

pp. of pasāreti

Pasāreti

1. to cause to move forwards, to let or make go, to give up Ja vi.58 (pasāraya, imper.)-Pass. pasāriyati Vism 318; Pv-a 240 (are turned out of doors).

2. to stretch out, hold out or forth, usually with ref. to either arm (bāhuṃ, bāhaṃ, bāhā) SN i.137 (opp. sammiñjeti ); DN-a i.196; Pv-a 112, Pv-a 121; or hand (hatthaṃ) Ja v.41; Ja vi.282; Pv-a 113; or feet (pāde pādaṃ) Thig 44, Thig 49, cp. Thag-a 52; Dhs-a 324 (= sandhiyo paṭippanāmeti).

3. to lay out, put forth, offer for sale Vin ii.291; Dhp-a ii.89 ■ pp. pasārita (q.v.) Cp. abhi˚

Caus. of pa + sṛ;

Pasāsati

1. to teach, instruct SN i.38; Ja iii.367, Ja iii.443.

2. to rule, reign, govern DN ii.257; Cp iii.141 Pv-a 287.

pa + śās

Pasāsana

(nt.) teaching, instruction Ja iii.367.

fr. pa + śās

Pasibbaka

(m. nt.) a sack, Vin iii.17; Ja i.112, Ja i.351; Ja ii.88, Ja ii.154; Ja iii.10, Ja iii.116 Ja iii.343 (camma˚ leather bag); iv.52, 361; v.46 (pūpa˚) 483; vi.432 (spelling pasippaka); DN-a i.41; Dhp-a iv.205.

fr. pa + siv, late Sk. prasevaka → P. pasebbaka → pasibbaka, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. 151

Pasibbita

sewn up, enveloped by (-˚) Thag 1150 (maṃsa-nahāru˚).

pp. of pa + siv

Pasīdati

1. to become bright, to brighten up Pv-a 132 (mukha-vaṇṇo p.).

2. to be purified, reconciled or pleased; to be clear & calm, to become of peaceful heart (; mano or cittaṃ p. ); to find one’s satisfaction in (loc.), to have faith DN ii.202; SN i.98; SN ii.199 (sutvā dhammaṃ p.); AN iii.248; Snp 356, Snp 434, Snp 563; Nd ii.426 (= saddahati, adhimuccati okappeti); Vv 5014 (mano me pasīdi, aor.); Vism 129; Mil 9; Dhp-a iii.3 (= he is gracious, i.e. good); Vv-a 6 (better v.l. passitvā) Pv-a 141 ■ pp. pasanna (q.v.). See also pasādeti vippasīdati;.

pa + sad

Pasīdana

(nt.) calming, happiness, purification Pts ii.121 (SS passādana).

fr. pasīdati

Pasu

cattle MN i.79; Ja v.105; Pv ii.1312 (˚yoni); Mil 100; Pv-a 166 (˚bhāva); n. pl pasavo SN i.69; Snp 858; gen. pl. pasūnaṃ Snp 311; Pv ii.25 ■ dupasu bad cattle Thag 446.

Vedic paśu, cp. Lat. pecu & pecunia, Gr.; πέκος fleece, Goth. vieh, E. fee

Pasuka

= pasu Vin ii.154 (ajaka + ).

Pasuta

attached to (acc. or loc.), intent upon (-˚), pursuing, doing DN i.135 (kamma˚); Snp 57 (see Nd ii.427), 709, 774, 940, Dhp 166, Dhp 181; Vism 135 (doing a hundred & one things: aneka-kicca˚); Dhp-a iii.160; Pv-a 151 (puñña-kammesu), 175 (kīḷanaka˚) 195, 228 (pāpa˚).

pp. of pa + or si, Sk. prasita, on change of i to u see Geiger, P.Gr. § 193. In meaning confounded with pasavate of pa + su

Pasura

(adj.) many, abundant Ja vi.134 (= rāsi, heap C.). We should probably read pacura as at Ja v.40 (= bahu C.).

reading doubtful

Pasūta

produced; having born, delivered Pv-a 80.

pp. of pasavati

Pasūti

(f.) bringing forth, birth, in ˚ghara lying-in chamber Nd i.120; Vism 235; Kp-a 58 (where Vism 259 reads sūtighara).

fr. pa + su

Paseṭṭha

at Pv ii.973 is to be read pasaṭṭha (see pasattha).

Pasodheti

to cleanse, clean, purity DN i.71 (cittaṃ).

pa + Caus. of śudh

Passa1

seeing, one who sees Thag 61 (see Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1885, 48).

cp. Sk. paśya, fr. passati

Passa2

(m. & nt.) 1. side, flank MN i.102; MN iii.3; AN v.18; Snp 422; Ja i.264; Ja iii.26. Pleonastic in piṭṭhi˚ (cp. E. backside) the back, loc. behind Ja i.292; Pv-a 55.

2. (mountain-) slope, in Himavanta˚; Ja i.218; Ja v.396 (loc pasmani = passe C.).

Vedic pārśva to parśu & pṛṣṭi rib, perhaps also connected with pārṣṇi side of leg, see under paṇhi

Passati

1. to see-Pres. passati Vin i.322; SN i.69 SN i.132, SN i.198; SN ii.29; Snp 313, Snp 647, Snp 953, Snp 1063, Snp 1142 (cp. Nd ii.428); Pv i.23; Mil 218; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 102; Pv-a 1st pl. passāma Snp 76, Snp 153, Snp 164; Pv i.101 (as future); imper. sg. passa Snp 435, Snp 580, Snp 588, Snp 756; Ja i.223; Ja ii.159; Pv ii.116, 119 Pv-a 38; pl. passatha SN ii.25; Snp 176 sq., 777, & passavho (cp. Sk. paśyadhvaṃ) Snp 998 ■ ppr. passaṃ (see Geiger, P.Gr. 972) MN ii.9; Snp 739, Snp 837, Snp 909;; passanto Ja iii.52; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 6; f. passantī SN i.199 ■ grd passitabba Ja iv.390 (a˚) ■ fut. passissati Pv ii.46 Pv-a 6 ■ aor. passi Ja ii.103, Ja ii.111; Ja iii.278, Ja iii.341.

2. to recognise, realise, know: only in combn with jānāti (pres. jānāti passati; ppr. jānaṃ passaṃ): see jānāti 11.

3. to find Snp 1118 (= vindati paṭilabhati Nd ii.428b); Ja iii.55; Pv ii.99 ■ Cp. vi˚.

Vedic paśyati & *spaśati (aor. aspaṣṭa, Caus. spāśayati etc.); cp. Av. spasyeiti, Gr. σκέπτομαι, (E “scepsis”); Lat. species etc.; Ohg. spehon = Ger spāhen (E. spy) ■ The paradigm pass˚, which in literary Sk. is restricted to the pres. stem (paś) interchanges with the paradigm dakkh˚ & dass˚; (dṛś): see dassati1

Passaddha

calmed down, allayed, quieted, composed, aṭ ease. Almost exclusively with ref. to the body (kāya) e.g. at Vin i.294; DN iii.241, DN iii.288; MN i.37; MN iii.86; SN i.126 SN iv.125; AN i.148; AN v.30; Vism 134; Vb-a 283 (˚kāyapuggala) ■ In lit. appln ˚ratha when the car had slowed down Ja iii.239. See also paṭi˚.

pp. of passambhati, cp. BSk. praśrabdha Divy 48

Passaddhatā

(f.) calmness, repose Nd ii.166.

abstr. fr. passaddha

Passaddhi

(f.) calmness, tranquillity, repose, serenity MN iii.86; SN ii.30; SN iv.78; SN v.66; AN iv.455 sq.; Pts ii.244; Dhs 40 (kāya˚), 41 (citta˚), cp. Dhs trsl. 23; Vism 129; Vb-a 314 (kāya˚, citta˚); Dhs-a 150 (= samassāsa-ppatta). Often combd with pāmujja pīti;, e.g. DN i.72, DN i.73, DN i.196; Ne 29, Ne 66. Six passaddhis at SN iv.217 (with ref. to vācā, vitakka-vicārā, pīti assāsa-passāsā, saññā-vedanā, rāga-dosa-moha, through the 4 jhānas etc.). Passaddhi is one of the 7 sambojjhaṅgas (constituents of enlightenment): see this & cp. MN iii.86; Vism 130, Vism 134 = Vb-a 282 (where 7 conditions of this state are enumd).

fr. pa + śrambh

Passanā

see anu˚, vi˚.

Passambhati

to calm down, to be quiet Vin i.294 (fut ˚issati); DN i.73; MN iii.86; SN v.333; AN iii.21 ■ pp. passaddha; Caus. passambheti (q.v.).

pa + śrambh

Passambhati

to calm down, quiet, allay MN i.56, MN i.425; SN iii.125; Vism 288 (= nirodheti) ppr. passambhayaṃ MN i.56; MN iii.82, MN iii.89.

Caus. of passambhati

Passambhanā

(f.) allayment, calmness, composure Dhs 40, Dhs 41, Dhs 320.

fr. passambhati

Passaya

refuge Cp iii.104Note. ˚passaya in kaṇṭakapassaya Ja iii.74, & kaṇṭakāpassayika DN i.167 (kaṇṭh˚); Ja iv.299 (kaṇṭaka˚) is to be read as ˚apassaya (apa + śri ).

fr. pa + śri, cp. Class. Sk. praśraya reverence

Passavati

to flow forth, to pour out Mil 180.

pa + sru

Passasati

to breathe in DN ii.291; MN i.56; MN iii.82; Ja iii.296; Ja v.43; Vism 271; Dhp-a 1.215. See also assasati & remarks under ā;1 3.

pa + śvas

Passāva

urine (lit. flowing out) Vin ii.141; Vin iv.266 (p. muttaṃ vuccati); DN i.70 (uccāra + ); MN iii.3, MN iii.90; Ja i.164 (uccāra-passāvaṃ vissajjeti), 338 v.164, 389; Vism 235 (uccāra˚).

-doṇikā a trough for urine Vin ii.221; Vism 235.

fr. passavati

Passāsa

inhaled breath, inhalation SN i.106, SN i.159; Pts i.95, Pts i.164 sq., 182 sq. Usually in combn assāsapassāsa (q.v.). At Vism 272 passāsa is expl1 as “ingoing wind” and assāsa as “outgoing wind.”

fr. pa + śvas

Passāsin

(adj.) breathing; in ghuru-ghuru˚ snoring SN i.117.

fr. passāsa

Passika

(adj.) (-˚) only in cpd. ehipassika (q.v.).

fr. imper. passa of passati, + ka

Passupati

to sleep, rest, aor. passupi; fut. passupissati Ja v.70. 71.

pa + svap

Paha1

(nt.) flight of steps from which to step down into the water, a ghat (= tittha Bdhgh) DN i.223. The meaning is uncertain, it is trsld as “accessible” at Dial. i.283 (q.v. for further detail). Neumann (Majjhima trsln i.513) trsls “ganz und gar erloschen (pabhā?). It is not at all improbable to take pahaṃ as ppr. of pajahati (as contracted fr. pajahaṃ like pahatvāna for pajahitvāna at Snp 639), thus meaning “giving up entirely.” The same form in the latter meaning occurs at Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.3).

?

Paha2

(adj.) = pahu, i.e. able to (with inf.) Ja v.198 (C. pahū samattho).

Pahaṃsati1

to strike, beat (a metal), rub, sharpen (a cutting instrument, as knife, hatchet, razor etc.) Ja i.278 Ja ii.102 (pharasuṃ); Dhp-a i.253 (khuraṃ pahaṃsi sharpened the razor; corresponds to ghaṭṭeti in preceding context) ■ pp. pahaṭṭha1 & pahaṃsita;1 (q.v.).

pa + haṃsati1 = ghaṃsati1, of ghṛṣ to rub, grind

Pahaṃsati2

to be pleased, to rejoice; only in pp. pahaṭṭha2 & pahaṃsita;2 (q.v.), and in Pass. pahaṃsīyati to be gladdened, to exult Mil 326 (+ kuhīyati). See also sam˚.

pa + haṃsati2 = hassati, of hṛṣ to be glad, cp. ghaṃsati2

Pahaṃsita1

struck, beaten (of metal), refined Ja vi.218 (ukkā-mukha˚), 574 (id.).

pp. of pahaṃsati

Pahaṃsita2

gladdened, delighted, happy Dhp-a i.230 (˚mukha); Vv-a 279 (˚mukha SS pahasita at Mil 297 is better to be taken as pp. of pahasati, because of combn haṭṭha pahaṭṭha hasita pahasita.

pp. of pahaṃsati2

Pahaṭa

assailed, struck, beaten (of musical instruments) Ja ii.102, Ja ii.182; Ja vi.189; Vv-a 161 (so for pahata); Pv-a 253. Of a ball: driven, impelled Vism 143 (˚citra-geṇḍuka) = Dhs-a 116 (so read for pahaṭṭha-citta-bheṇḍuka and correct Expositor 153 accordingly). The reading pahaṭa at Pv-a 4 is to be corrected to paṭaha.

pp. of paharati

Pahaṭṭha1

struck, beaten (of metal) Ja vi.217 (suvaṇṇa).

pp. of pahaṃsati1

Pahaṭṭha2

gladdened, happy, cheerful, delighted Vin iii.14; Ja i.278 (twice; once as ˚mānasa which is wrongly taken by C. as pahaṭṭha1), 443 ii.240 (tuṭṭha˚); Vism 346 (haṭṭha˚); Dhp-a i.230 (tuṭṭha˚); Vv-a 337. In its original sense of “bristling (with excitement or joy), with ref. to ear & hair of an elephant in phrase; pahaṭṭha-kaṇṇa-vāla at Vin ii.195; Ja v.335 (cp. Sk. prahṛṣṭa-roman, Name of an Asura at Kathāsaritsāgara 47, 30).

pp. of pahaṃsati2

Pahata

killed, overcome MN iii.46; SN ii.54; Ja vi.512.

pp. of pa + han

Paharaṇa

(nt.) striking, beating Snp-a 224; Pv-a 285.

fr. paharati

Paharaṇaka

(adj.) striking, hitting Ja i.418.

fr. paharaṇa

Paharati

to strike, hit, beat Ja iii.26, Ja iii.347; Ja vi.376; Vv-a 65; Pv-a 4; freq. in phrase accharaṃ p. to snap one’s finger, e.g. Ja ii.447; see accharā1. aor. pahāsi (cp. pariyudāhāsi) Vv 292 (= pahari Vv-a 123) ■ pp pahaṭa (q.v.). Caus. paharāpeti.

1. to cause to be assailed Ja iv.150.

2. to put on or join on to Ja vi.32 (˚hārāpesi).

pa + hṛ;

Pahasati

to laugh, giggle Ja v.452 (ūhasati + ). See also pahassati & pahāsati ■ pp.; pahasita (q.v.).

pa + has

Pahasita

laughing, smiling, joyful, pleased Mil 297; Ja i.411 (nicca˚ mukha) ii.179.

pp. of pahasati or ˚hassati

Pahassati

to laugh, be joyful or cheerful Snp 887 (= haṭṭha pahaṭṭha Nd i.296; cp. Snp-a 555 hāsajāta) The pp. pahasita (q.v.) is derived fr. pres. pahasati which makes the equation pahassati = pahaṃsati2 all the more likely.

pa + has, perhaps pa + hṛṣ, Sk. harṣati, cp. pahaṃsati2

Pahāna

(nt.) giving up, leaving, abandoning, rejection MN i.60, MN iii.4, MN iii.72; SN i.13, SN i.132 (dukkha˚); ii.170; iii.53; iv.7 sq.; DN iii.225, DN iii.246; AN i.82, AN i.134; AN ii.26, AN ii.232 (kaṇhassa kammassa ˚āya). iii.431; Snp 374, Snp 1106 (= vūpasama paṭinissagga etc Nd ii.429); Dhp 331; Ja i.79; Pts i.26; Pts ii.98, Pts ii.156; Pp 16; Dhs 165, Dhs 174, Dhs 339; Ne 15 sq., 24, 192; Vism 194 (nīvaraṇa-santāpa˚); Dhs-a 166, Dhs-a 345; Vv-a 73. -˚pariññā see pariññā; -˚vinaya avoidance consisting in giving up (coupled with saṃvara-vinaya avoidance by protection, prophylaxis), based on the 5 qualities tadanga-pahāna, vikkhambhana˚, samuccheda˚, paṭippassaddhi˚ nissaraṇa˚ Dhs-a 351; Snp-a 8.

fr. pa + , see pajahati

Pahāya

is ger. of pajahati (q.v.).

Pahāyin

(adj.) giving up, abandoning Snp 1113, Snp 1132, cp. Nd ii.431; Sdhp 500.

fr. pa + , see pajahati

Pahāra

1. a blow, stroke, hit DN i.144 (daṇḍa˚); MN i.123, MN i.126; Pv iv.167 (sālittaka˚); MN i.123; Dhp-a iii.48 (˚dāna-sikkhāpada the precepts concerning those guilty of giving blows cp. Vin iv.146); Pv-a 4 (ekappahārena with one stroke) 56 (muggara˚), 66 (id.) 253 ■ ekappahārena at Vism 418 as adv. “all at once.” pahāraṃ deti to give a blow Vin iv.146; SN iv.62; AN iii.121; Vism 314 (pahārasatāni); Pv-a 191 (sīse).

2. a wound Ja iv.89; Ja v.459 (˚mukha).

fr. pa + hṛ; Class. Sk. prahāra, see paharati

Pahāraṇa

see abhi˚.

Pahārin

(adj.) striking, assaulting Ja ii.211.

fr. paharati

Pahāsa

laughing, mirth Dhs 9, Dhs 86, Dhs 285; Vv-a 132; Sdhp 223.

fr. pa + has, cp. Class. Sk. prahāsa

Pahāsati

in pahāsanto saparisaṃ at Thag-a 69 should preferably be read as pahāsayanto parisaṃ, thus taken as Caus. of pa + has, i.e. making one smile, gladdening.

Pahāsi

is 3rd sg. aor. of paharati; found at Vv 298 (musalena = pahari Vv-a 113); and also 3rd sg. aor of pajahati e.g. at Snp 1057 (= pajahi Nd ii.under jahati)

Pahāseti

to make laugh, to gladden, to make joyful Vism 289 (cittaṃ pamodeti hāseti pahāseti).

Caus. of pahasati

Pahiṇa

(adj.-n.) sending; being sent; a messenger, in ˚gamaṇa going as messenger, doing messages DN i.5; MN i.345; Ja ii.82; Mil 370; DN-a i.78 See also pahana.

fr. pa + hi

Pahiṇaka

(nt.) a sweetmeat AN iii.76 (v.l. pahenaka). See also paheṇaka. The (late) Sk. form is prahelaka.

fr. pahiṇati?

Pahiṇati

to send; Pres. pahiṇati. Vin iii.140 sq.; Vin iv.18; Dhp-a ii.243; aor. pahiṇi Ja i.60 (sāsanaṃ); v.458 (paṇṇāni); Vv-a 67; Dhp-a i.72 Dhp-a ii.56, Dhp-a ii.243; ger. pahiṇitva Vv-a 65 ■ pp. pahita2 (q.v.). There is another aor. pāhesi (Sk. prāhaiṣīt) in analogy to which a new pres. pāheti has been formed, so that pāhesi is now felt to be a der. fr. pāheti & accordingly is grouped with the latter. All other forms with he˚ (pahetuṃ e.g. ) are to be found under pāheti.;

pa + hi, Sk. hinoti

Pahiṇana

(nt.) sending, dispatch Dhp-a ii.243.

fr. pahiṇati

Pahita1

resolute, intent, energetic; only in cpd. pahitatta of resolute will (cp. BSk. prahitātman Divy 37) MN i.114; SN i.53 (expld by Bdhgh with wrong derivation fr. peseti as “pesit-atta” thus identifying pahita1 & pahita;2, see K.S. 320); ii.21, 239; iii.73 sq. iv.60, 145, v.187, AN ii.14, AN iii.21, AN iv.302 sq.; AN v.84; Snp 425, Snp 432 sq., 961; Iti 71; Nd i.477; Thig 161 (expld at Thag-a 143, with the same mistake as above, as pesita citta); Nd i.477 (id.; pesit-atta); Mil 358, Mil 366, Mil 406.

pp. of padahati

Pahita2

sent Ja i.86 (sāsana); Dhp-a ii.242; Dhp-a iii.191 (interchanging with pesita).

pp. of pahiṇati

Pahīna

given up, abandoned, left, eliminated Vin iii.97 = Vin iv.27; SN ii.24; SN iii.33; SN iv.305; Snp 351 (˚jāti-maraṇa), 370, 564, 1132 (˚mala-moha) Iti 32; Nd ii.s. v.; Pts i.63; Pts ii.244; Pp 12, Pp 22.

pp. of pajahati

Pahīyati

to be abandoned, to pass away, vanish MN i.7; SN i.219 (fut. ˚issati); ii.196 (ppr ˚īyamāna); v.152; Snp 806; Nd i.124; Vb-a 271. Spelt pahiyyati at SN v.150.

Pass. of pajahati

Pahū

(adj.) able Snp 98; Ja v.198; Nd ii.615˚.

cp. Vedic prabhū, fr. pa + bhū

Pahūta

(adj.) sufficient, abundant, much, considerable Snp 428, Snp 862 sq. Pv i.52 (= anappaka, bahu, yāvadattha C.; Dhp at Pv-a 25 gives bahuka as inferior variant); i.117 (= apariyanta, uḷāra; v.l. bahū); ii.75 (v.l. bahūta); Pv-a 145 (dhana; v.l. bahuta); Snp-a 294 (id.), 321 (id.) See also bahūta.

-jivha large tongued DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.173. -jivhatā the characteristic of a large tongue Snp p.107. -dhañña having many riches Ja iv.309. -dhana id. Thig 406 (C. reading for T. bahuta-ratana). -pañña rich in wisdom Snp 359, Snp 539, Snp 996. -bhakkha eating much, said of the fire SN i.69. -vitta = ˚dhañña DN i.134; Snp 102; Pv-a 3.

pp. of pa + bhū, cp. Vedic prabhūta

Pahūtika

(adj.) = pahuta Pv-a 135 (v.l. BB bahuta; in expln of bahu).

Paheṇaka

(nt.) a present Ja vi.369 (so here, whereas the same word as pahiṇaka at AN iii.76 clearly means “sweetmeat”).

cp. BSk. praheṇaka in sense of “sweetmeat” at Divy 13, Divy 258; the *Sk. form is prahelaka

Pahena

(nt.) same as pahiṇa in ˚gamana going on errands Ja ii.82.

paheṇa?

Pahoti

& (in verse) pabhavati 1. to proceed from (with gen.), rise, originate DN ii.217; MN iii.76; SN ii.184; as pabhavati at Snp 728 = Snp 1050 (cp. Nd ii.401) (perf. med.) pahottha it has arisen from (gen.), i.e. it was the fault of Ja v.102.

2. to be sufficient, adequate or able (with inf.) DN i.240; MN i.94; SN i.102; Snp 36, Snp 867; Ja v.305; DN-a i.192; DN-a iii.254 (fut. pahossati); Vv-a 75 Dāvs iv.18. Neg. both with na˚ & a˚ viz. nappahoti Ja vi.204; Dhp-a iii.408; nappahosi Ja i.84; appahoti Dhp-a iv.177; appabhonto Pv-a 73; in verse appabhavaṃ Ja iii.373 (= appahonto C.) ■ pp. pahūta (q.v.).

pa + ; bhu, cp. Vedic prabhavati in meaning “to be helpful”

Pahona

in ˚kāla at Ja iii.17 read as pahonaka˚.

Pahonaka

(adj.) sufficient, enough Ja i.346; Ja ii.122; Ja iii.17 (so read for pahona˚); iv.277; Vism 404; Dhp-a i.78, Dhp-a i.219; Vv-a 264; Pv-a 81.

fr. pahoti

Pāka

that which is cooked, cooking, quantity cooked Ja vi.161 (tīhi pākehi pacitvā); Vv-a 186. Esp. in foll. combn tela˚; “oil cooking,” an oil decoction Vin ii.105; thāli˚; a th. full of cooking Ja i.186; doṇa˚; a d. full SN i.81; Dhp-a ii.8; sosāna˚ Dhātumañjūsā 132 (under kaṭh). On pāka in appld meaning of “effect, result” see Cpd. 883 ■ As nt. in stanza “pākaṃ pākassa paccayo; apākaṃ avipākassa” at Vb-a 175 ■ Cp. vi˚.

-tela an oil concoction or mixture, used for rubbing the body; usually given with its price worth 100 or 1,000 pieces, e.g. sata˚ Ja ii.397; Ja v.376; Vv-a 68; Dhp-a iii.311; sahassa˚; Ja iii.372. -vaṭṭa subsistence livelihood, maintenance Mvu 35, Mvu 120; Dhp-a ii.29; Vv-a 220. -haṃsa a species of water bird Ja v.356 Ja vi.539; Snp-a 277.

Vedic pāka, see pacati

Pākata

(adj.) 1. common, vulgar, uncontrolled in phrase pākat-indriya of uncontrolled mind SN i.61 (= saṃvarâbhāvena gihikāle viya vivaṭa-indriya K.S. 320), 204; iii.93; v.269; AN i.70, AN i.266, AN i.280; AN iii.355, AN iii.391 Thag 109 (C. asaṃvuta, see Brethren 99); Pp 35 ■ At Mil 251 pākatā is to be read pāpakā.

2. open common, unconcealed Ja i.262 (pākaṭo jāto was found out); Snp-a 343; Pv-a 103 (for āvi).

3. commonly known, familiar Vism 279; Pv-a 17 (devā), 23, 78 (su˚) 128; Vv-a 109 (+ paññāta); ˚ṃ karoti to make manifest Vism 287; ˚bhāva being known Dhs-a 243; Pv-a 103

4. renowned, well-known DN-a i.143; Pv-a 107.

= pakata; on ā for a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 331. Cp. Sk. prakaṭa Halāyudha. The spelling is sometimes pākaṭa

Pākatika

(adj.) natural, in its original or natural state Ja v.274; Mil 218 (maṇiratana); Dhp-a i.20; Vv-a 288; Pv-a 66 (where id. p Ja iii.167 reads paṭipākatika), 206; pākatikaṃ karoti to restore to its former condition, to repair, rebuild Ja i.354, also fig. to restore a dismissed officer, to reinstate Ja v.134.

fr. pakati, cp. BSk. prākṛtaka (loka) Bodhicaryâvatāra v. 3, ed. Poussin

Pākāra

an encircling wall, put up for obstruction and protection, a fence rampart Vin ii.121 (3 kinds: made of bricks, of stone or of wood, viz. iṭṭhakā˚, silā, dāru˚); iv.266 (id.) MN iii.11; SN iv.194 (˚toraṇa); AN iv.107; AN v.195; Ja i.63 Ja ii.50; Ja vi.330 (mahā˚), 341 (+ parikhā & aṭṭāla); Pv i.1013 (ayo˚); Mil 1; Vism 394 (= parikkhepa-pākāra) Dhp-a iii.441 (tiṇṇaṃ pākārānaṃ antare); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 52 sāṇi˚; screen-fencing Ja ii.88; Pv-a 283.

-iṭṭhakā brick or tile of a wall Ja iii.446 (T. iṭṭhikā) -parikkhitta surrounded by a wall DN-a i.42. -parikkhepa a fencing Vism 74.

cp. Epic Sk. prākāra, pa + ā + kṛ;

Pākāsiya

(adj.) evident, manifest, open, clear Ja vi.230 (opp. guyha; C. pākāsika).

fr. pa + ā + kāś, cp. pakāsati & Class. Sk. prākāśya

Pākula

(adj.) read at Ud 5 in combn akkulapakkula (= ākula-pākula) “in great confusion”; read also in gāthā 7 pākula for bakkula. Cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 94 sq.

pa + ākula

Pāgabbhiya

(nt.) boldness, impudence, forwardness Snp 930; Nd i.228 sq. (3 kinds, viz. kāyika vācasika, cetasika), 390 sq.; Ja ii.32; Ja v.449 (pagabbhiya); Snp-a 165; Kp-a 242; Dhp-a iii.354 (pa˚) Vv-a 121.

fr. pagabbha

Pāguññatā

(f.) being familiar with, experience Dhs 48, Dhs 49; Vism 463 sq. 466.

abstr. of pāguñña, which is der. fr. paguna

Pāgusa

a certain kind of fish Ja iv.70 (as gloss, T. reads pāvusa, SS puṭusa, BB pātusa & pāvuma; C. explns as mahā-mukha-maccha).

cp. Sk. vāgusa, a sort of large fish Halāyudha 3, 37

Pācaka

(adj.-n.) one who cooks, a cook; f. ˚ikā Ja i.318.

fr. pac, cp. pāceti

Pācana1

(nt.) bringing to boil, cooking Ja i.318 (yāgu˚). Cp. pari˚.

fr. pac, Caus. pāceti

Pācana2

(nt.) a goad, stick SN i.172; Snp p.13; Snp v.77; Ja iii.281; Ja iv.310.

-yaṭṭhi driving stick, goad stick SN i.115.

for pājana, cp. pāceti2 & Snp-a 147

Pācariya

(-˚) only as 2nd part of a (redupl.) compound ācariya-pācariya in the nature of combns mentioned under a1 3 b: “teacher upon teacher (expld by Cs as “teacher of teachers”) DN i.90 (cp DN-a i.254); ii.237, etc. (see ācariya).

pa + ācariya

Pācittiya

(adj.) requiring expiation, expiatory Vin i.172, Vin i.176; Vin ii.242, Vin ii.306 sq.; Vin iv.1 sq., 258 sq.; AN ii.242 (dhamma); Vism 22 ■ It is also the name of one of the books of the Vinaya (ed. Oldenberg, vol. iv.). See on term Vin. Texts i.18, 32, 245.

most likely prāk + citta + ika, i.e. of the nature of directing one’s mind upon, cp. pabbhāra *prāg + bhāra. So expld also by S. Lévi J.As. x.20 p. 506. Geiger, P.Gr. § 27, n. 1 inclines to etym prāyaś + cittaka

Pācīna

(adj.) eastern i.e. facing the (rising) sun (opp. pacchā) Ja i.50 (˚sīsaka, of Māyādevī’s couch), 212 (˚lokadhātu) Mil 6; DN-a i.311 (˚mukha facing east); Dhp-a iii.155 (id.); Vv-a 190; Pv-a 74, Pv-a 256. The opposite apācīna (e.g. SN iii.84) is only apparently a neg. pācīna, in reality a der. fr. apa (apa + ac ), as pācīna is a der. fr pra + ac. See apācīna.

Vedic prācīna, fr. adv. prāc bent forward

Pāceti1

to cause to boil, fig. to cause to torment DN i.52 (ppr. pācayato, gen., also pācento) Cp. vi˚.

Caus. of pacati

Pāceti2

to drive, urge on Dhp 135 (āyuṃ p. gopālako viya… peseti Dhp-a iii.60).

for pājeti, with c. for j (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 393); pra + aj: see aja

Pājana

(nt.) a goad Snp-a 147.

fr. pa + aj, cp. pācana2

Pājāpeti

to cause to drive or go on Ja ii.296 (sakaṭāni); iii.51 (so read for pajāpeti; BB pāceti & pājeti).;

Caus. of pājeti

Pājeti

1. to drive (cp. pāceti2) Ja ii.122, Ja ii.143, Ja iii.51 (BB for T. pājāpeti); v.443 (nāvaṃ) vi.32 (yoggaṃ); Snp-a 147; Dhp-a iv.160 (goṇe).

2. to throw (the dice) Ja vi.281 ■ Caus. II. pājāpeti (q.v.).

Caus. of pa + aj, cp. aja

Pāṭaṅkī

(f.) “sedan chair” (?) in phrase sivikaṃ pāṭaṅkiṃ at Vin i.192 (MV v.10, 3) is not clear. The vv. ll (p. 380) are pāṭangin, pāṭangan pāṭakan. Perhaps pallankaṃ?

Pāṭala

(adj.) pale red, pink Ja iv.114.

cp. Class. Sk. pāṭala, to same root as palita & pāṇḍu: see Walde,; Lat. Wtb. under palleo & cp paṇḍu

Pāṭalī

(f.) the trumpet flower, Bignonia Suaveolens DN ii.4 (Vipassī pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho); Vv 359; Ja i.41 (˚rukkha as the Bodhi tree); ii.162 (pāṭali-bhaddaka sic. v.l. for phālibhaddaka); iv.440; v.189; vi.537; Mil 338; Vv-a 42, Vv-a 164; Thag-a 211, Thag-a 226.

cp. Class. Sk. pāṭalī, to pāṭala

Pāṭava

(nt.) skill Kp-a 156.

cp. late Sk. pāṭava, fr. paṭu

Pāṭikaṅkha

(adj.) to be desired or expected MN i.25; MN iii.97; SN i.88 SN ii.152; AN iii.143 = Snp p.140 (= icchitabba Snp-a 504) Ud 36; Dhp-a iv.2 (gati ˚ā) Pv-a 63 (id.).

grd. of paṭikankhati, Sk. *pratikānkṣya

Pāṭikaṅkhin

(-˚) (adj.-n.) hoping for, one who expects or desires DN i.4; MN iii.33; AN ii.209; Ja iii.409.

fr. paṭi + kāṅka, cp. patikankhin

Pāṭikā

(f.) half-moon stone, the semicircular slab under the staircase Vin i.180 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.3). As pāṭiya at Ja vi.278 (= piṭṭhi-pāsāṇa C.).

etym. unknown; with pāṭiya cp. Sk. pāṣya?

Pāṭikulyā

(f.) = pātikkūlyatā (perhaps to be read as such) Ja v.253 (nava, cp. Vism 341 sq.).

fr. paṭi(k)kūla

Pāṭikkulyatā

(f.) loathsomeness, objectionableness AN iii.32; AN iv.47 sq.; AN v.64. Cp. paṭikulyatā paṭikūlatā & pāṭikulyā.;

abstr. fr. paṭikkūla

Pāṭidesanīya

(adj.) belonging to confession, (a sin) which ought to be confessed Vin i.172; Vin ii.242; AN ii.243 (as ˚desanīyaka).

grd. of paṭideseti with pāṭi for pāṭi in der.

Pāṭipada1

(adj.) following the (right) Path MN i.354 = Iti 80 (+ sekha).

the adj. form of paṭipadā

Pāṭipada2

lit, “entering, beginning”; the first day of the lunar fortnight Vin i.132; Ja iv.100; Vv-a 72 (˚sattamī).

fr. paṭi + pad, see patipajjati & cp. paṭipadā

Pāṭipadaka

(adj.) belonging to the 1st day of the lunar fortnight; only with ref. to bhatta (food & in comb;n with pakkhika & uposathika, i.e. food given on the half-moon days, on the 7;th day of the week & on the first day of the fortnight Vin i.58 Vin ii.175; Vin iv.75; (f. ˚ikā), 78.

fr. pāṭipada2

Pāṭipuggalika

(adj.) belonging to one’s equal MN iii.254 sq. (dakkhiṇā).

fr. paṭipuggala

Pāṭibhoga

a sponsor AN ii.172; Ud 17; Iti 1 sq.; Ja ii.93; Vism 555 sq.; Dhp-a i.398; Vb-a 165. Patimokkha (pati)

for paṭibhoga (?); difficult to explain, we should suspect a ger. formation *prati-bhogya for *bhujya i.e. “counter-enjoyable,” i.e. one who has to be made use of in place of someone else; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 24.

Pātimokkha (pāti)˚

(nt.) a name given to a collection of various precepts contained in the Vinaya (forming the foundation of the Suttavibhanga, Vin vols. iii & iv. ed. Oldenberg), as they were recited on Uposatha days for the purpose of confession. See Geiger, P. Lit. c. 7, where literature is given; & cp.; Vin. Texts i.27 sq. Franke, Dighanikāya p. 66 sq.;- pāṭimokkhaṃ uddisati to recite the P. Vin i.102, Vin i.112, Vin i.175; Vin ii.259; Vin iii.8 Vin iv.143; Ud 51; opp. ˚ṃ ṭhapeti to suspend the (recital of the) P. Vin ii.240 sq ■ See Vin i.65, Vin i.68; Vin ii.95 Vin ii.240 sq. 249; SN v.187; Snp 340; Dhp 185, Dhp 375; Nd i.365 Vism 7, Vism 11, Vism 16 sq., 36, 292; Dhp-a iii.237 (= jeṭṭhakasīla); iv.111 (id.); Sdhp 342, Sdhp 355, Sdhp 449. -uddesa recitation of the P. Vin i.102; DN ii.46; MN ii.8; Snp-a 199 -uddesaka one who recites the P. Vin i.115, cp. Vin Texts i.242. -ṭhapana suspension of the P. Vin ii.241 sq.; AN v.70. -saṃvara “restraint that is binding on a recluse” (Dial. i.79), moral control under the P Vin iv.51; DN i.62; DN ii.279; DN iii.77, DN iii.266, DN iii.285; AN iii.113 AN iii.135, AN iii.151; AN iv.140; AN v.71, AN v.198; Iti 96, Iti 118; Ud 36; Vism 16 (where expld in detail); Vb-a 323; cp. saṃvuta-pāṭimokkha (adj.) Pv iv.132.

with Childers plausibly as paṭi + mokkha, grd. of muc (Caus. mokṣ˚) with lengthening of paṭi as in other grd. like pāṭidesaniya. Thus in reality the same as paṭimokkha 2 in sense of binding, obligatory obligation, cp. Ja v.25. The spelling is freq. pāti (BB pāṭi˚). The Sk. prāṭimokṣa is a wrong adaptation fr. P. pātimokkha, it should really be pratimokṣya “that which should be made binding.” An expln of the word after the style of a popular etym. is to be found at Vism 16

Pāṭiyekka

see pāṭekka.

Pāṭirūpika

(adj.) assuming a disguise, deceitful, false Snp 246.

fr. paṭirūpa, cp. paṭirūpaka

Pāṭihāra

striking, that which strikes (with ref. to marking the time) Ja i.121, Ja i.122 (v.l. SS pāṭihāriya)

= pāṭihāra, with pāṭi after analogy of pāṭihāriya

Pāṭihārika

special, extraordinary; only in cpd. ˚pakkha an extra holiday AN i.144; Vv 156 (cp. Vv-a 71, Vv-a 109) Thag-a 38.

= pāṭihāriya or der. fr. pātihāra in meaning of ˚hāriya

Pāṭihāriya

(adj.) striking surprising, extraordinary, special; nt. wonder, miracle Usually in stock phrase iddhi˚, ādesanā˚, anusāsanī˚ as the 3 marvels which characterise a Buddha with regard to his teaching (i.e. superhuman power, mind reading giving instruction) DN i.212; DN iii.3 sq.; SN iv.290; AN i.170 AN v.327; Pts ii.227 ■ Further: Vin i.34 (aḍḍhuḍḍha sahassāni); Vism 378, Vism 390 (yamaka˚); Vv-a 158 (id.) Pv-a 137 (id.). For yamaka-pāṭihāriya (or ˚hīra) see yamaka ■ Two kinds of p. are given at Vism 393 viz. pākaṭa˚ and apākaṭa˚ ■ sappāṭihāriya (with ref to the Dhamma) wonderful, extraordinary, sublime as opposed to appāṭi˚ plain, ordinary, stupid MN ii.9 (where Neumann, Majjhima Nikāya ii.318 trsls sa˚ “intelligible” and a˚ “incomprehensible,” referring to Chāndogyopaniṣat i.11, 1); DN ii.104; cp. also Windisch Māra 71.

-pakkha an extra holiday, an ancient festival, not now kept SN i.208 (cp. Thig 31); Snp 402 (cp. expln at Snp-a 378, where var. opinions are given); Ja iv.320 Ja vi.118. See also Kern’s discussion of the term at Toev. ii.30.

grd. formation fr. paṭi + hṛ; (paṭihāra) with usual lengthening of paṭi to pāṭi, as in ˚desanīya ˚mokkha etc. Cp. pāṭihīra; BSk. prātihārya

Pāṭihīra

(adj.) wonderful nt. a wonderful thing, marvel, miracle Pts i.125 (yamaka˚); ii.158 (id.); Mvu 5, Mvu 118; Mil 106; Dāvs i.50; Dhp-a iii.213appātihīrakathā stupid talk DN i.193 DN i.239; Kv 561 (diff. Kern. Toev. ii.30); opp. sa˚; ibid.

contracted form of pāṭihāriya viâ metathesis *pāṭihāriya → *pāṭihēra → paṭihīra

Pāṭī

(f.) at Vv-a 321 in phrase sukka-pakkha-pāṭiyaṃ “in the moonlight half” is doubtful. Hardy in Index registers it as “part, half-,” but pakkha already means “half” and is enough by itself. We should probably read paṭipāṭiyaṃ “successively.” Note that the similar passage Vv-a 314 reads sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṃ Patuka & Patubha;

?

Pāṭuka & Pāṭubha

only neg. ; (q.v.).

Pāṭukamyatā

: see pātu˚. Patekka (Patiyekka)

Pāṭekka (Pāṭiyekka)

(adj.) several, distinct single Vin i.134; Vin iv.15; Ja i.92 (T. pāṭiekka, SS pāṭiyekka); Vism 249 (pāṭiyekka, SS pāṭiekka), 353, 356 443, 473; Dhp-a iv.7 (pāṭiy˚ SS pāṭieka) ■ nt. ˚ṃ (adv.) singly, separately, individually Vism 409 (pāṭiy˚) Vv-a 141.

paṭi + eka; the diaeretic form of pacceka: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 24

Pāṭeti

to remove; Pass. pāṭiyati Pv iv.147 (turned out of doors); v.l. pātayati (bring to fall) Prob, in sense of Med. at Mil 152 in phrase visaṃ pāṭiyamāno (doubtful, cp. Kern, Toev. ii.139, & Morris; J.P.T.S. 1884, 87).

Caus. of paṭ;

Pāṭha

reading, text-reading; passage of a text, text. Very freq. in Commentaries with phrase “ti pi pāṭho,” i.e. “so is another reading,” e.g. Kp-a 78 Kp-a 223; Snp-a 43 (˚ṃ vikappeti), 178, 192, 477; Pv-a 25 (pamāda˚ careless text), 48, 58, 86 and passim.

fr. paṭh

Pāṭhaka

(-˚) reciter; one who knows, expert Nd i.382 (nakkhatta˚); Ja i.455 (asi-lakkhaṇa˚); ii.21 (angavijjā˚), 250 (id.); v.211 (lakkhaṇa˚ fortune-teller wise man).

fr. pāṭha

Pāṭhīna

the fish Silurus Boalis, a kind of shad Ja iv.70 (C pāṭhīna-nāmakaṃ pāsāṇa-macchaṃ); v.405; vi.449.

cp. Sk. pāṭhīna Manu 5, 16; Halāyudha 3, 36

Pāṇa

living being, life, creature DN iii.48, DN iii.63, DN iii.133; SN i.209, SN i.224; SN v.43, SN v.227, SN v.441 (mahā-samudde); AN i.161 AN ii.73, AN ii.176, AN ii.192; Snp 117, Snp 247, Snp 394, Snp 704; Dhp 246; DN-a i.69 DN-a i.161; Kp-a 26; Thag-a 253; Pv-a 9, Pv-a 28, Pv-a 35; Vv-a 72; Dhp-a ii.19 ■ pl. also pāṇāni, e.g. Snp 117; Dhp 270. Bdhgh’s defn of pāṇa is “pāṇanatāya pāṇā; assāsapassās’ āyatta-vuttitāyā ti attho” Vism 310.

-ātipāta destruction of life, murder Vin i.83 (in “dasa sikkhāpadāni,” see also sīla), 85, 193; DN iii.68, DN iii.70, DN iii.149 DN iii.182, DN iii.235; MN i.361; MN iii.23; Snp 242; Iti 63; Ja iii.181 Pp 39 sq.; Ne 27; Vb-a 383 (var. degrees of murder) Dhp-a ii.19; Dhp-a iii.355; DN-a i.69; Pv-a 27. -ātipātin one who takes the life of a living being, destroying life DN iii.82; MN iii.22; SN ii.167; Iti 92; Dhp-a ii.19. -upeta possessed or endowed with life, alive [cp. BSk. prāṇopeta Divy 72, Divy 462 etc.] SN i.173; Snp 157; DN-a i.236 -ghāta slaying life, killing, murder DN-a i.69; -ghātin âtipātin Dhp-a ii.19. -bhu a living being Ja iv.494 -bhūta = ˚bhu MN iii.5; AN ii.210; AN iii.92; AN iv.249 sq. Ja iv.498. -vadha = âtipāta DN-a i.69. -sama equal to or as dear as life Ja ii.343; Dpvs xi.26; Dhp-a i.5. -hara taking away life, destructive MN i.10 = MN iii.97; SN iv.206; AN ii.116, AN ii.143, AN ii.153; AN iii.163.

fr. pa + an, cp. Vedic prāṇa breath of life; P. apāna, etc.

Pāṇaka

(adj.-n.) (usually -˚) a living being, endowed with (the breath of) life SN iv.198 (chap˚) Dhp-a i.20 (v.l. BB mata˚); sap˚; with life, containing living creatures Ja i.198 (udaka); ap˚; without living beings, lifeless Vin ii.216; MN i.13, MN i.243; SN i.169; Snp p.15 (udaka); Ja i.67 (jhāna).

fr. pāṇa

Pāṇana

(nt.) breathing Vism 310 (see pāṇa); Dhātupāṭha 273 (“baḷa” pāṇane).

fr. pāṇa

Pāṇi

the hand Vin iii.14 (pāṇinā paripuñchati); MN i.78 (pāṇinā parimajjati) SN i.178, SN i.194; Snp 713; Dhp 124; Ja i.126 (˚ṃ paharati) PugA 249 (id.); Pv-a 56; Sdhp 147, Sdhp 238. As adj. (-˚) “handed,” with a hand, e.g. alla˚; with clean hand Pv ii.99; payata˚; with outstretched hand, open-handed liberal SN v.351; AN iii.287; AN iv.266 sq.; AN v.331.

-tala the palm of the hand DN ii.17. -bhāga handshare division by hands Vv-a 96. -matta of the size of a hand, a handful Pv-a 70, Pv-a 116, Pv-a 119. -ssara hand sound hand music, a cert. kind of musical instrument DN i.6 DN iii.183; DN-a i.84 (cp. Dial i.8), 231; Ja v.390, Ja v.506; cp BSk. pāṇisvara Mvu ii.52. Also adj. one who plays this instrument Ja vi.276; cp. BSk. pāṇisvarika Mvu iii.113.

Vedic pāṇi, cp. Av. pərənā hand, with n-suffix, where we find m-suffix in Gr. παλάμη, Lat. palma, Oir lām, Ohg. folma = Ags. folm

Pāṇikā

(f.) a sort of spoon Vin ii.151. Cp. puthu-pāṇikā (˚pāṇiyā?) Vin ii.106.

fr. pāṇi; Sk. *pāṇikā

Pāṇin

(adj.-n.) having life, a living being SN i.210, SN i.226, Snp 220 (acc. pl. pāṇine, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 952) 587 (id.), 201, 575; Pv-a 287; Dhp-a ii.19.

fr. pāṇa

Pāta

(-˚) 1. fall DN-a i.95 (ukkā˚); Pv-a 45 (asani˚). The reading “anatthato pātato rakkhito” at Pv-a 61 is faulty we should prefer to read apagato (apāyato? rakkhito.

2. throwing, a throw Snp 987 (muddha˚) Pv-a 57 (akkhi˚). See also piṇḍa.

fr. pat

Pātana

(nt.) bringing to fall, destroying, killing, only in gabbha˚; destroying the foetus, abortion (q.v. Dhp-a i.47 and passim.

fr. pāteti

Pātar

(adv.) early in the morning, in foll forms: (1) pātar (before vowels), only in cpd. ˚āsa morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. prātar-aśana Divy 631] DN iii.94; Snp 387; Ja i.232; Vv-a 294, Vv-a 308; Snp-a 374 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍa-pātass’ etaṃ nāmaṃ)-katapātarāsa (adj.) after breakfast Ja i.227; Ja vi.349 (˚bhetta); Vism 391 ■ (2) pāto (abs.) DN iii.94; Dhp-a ii.60; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 126, Pv-a 128; pāto va right early Ja i.226 Ja vi.180 ■ (3) pātaṃ SN i.183; SN ii.242; Thig 407. Note. Should piṇḍa-pāta belong here, as suggested by Bdhgh at Snp-a 374 (see above)? See detail under piṇḍa.

Vedic prātar, der. fr. *prō, *prā, cp. Lat. prandium (fr. prām-edi̯om = pātar-āsa); Gr. πρωί early Ohg. fruo = Ger. früh

Pātavyatā

(f.) downfall, bringing to fall, felling MN i.305; AN i.266; Vin iv.34 (˚by˚); Vb-a 499.

fr. pāt, see pāteti

Pātāpeti

to cause to fall, to cause an abortus Vin ii.108; DN-a i.134.

Caus. II. of pāteti

Pātāla

proclivity, cliff, abyss SN i.32, SN i.127, SN i.197; SN iv.206; Thag 1104 (see Brethren 418 for fuller expln); Ja iii.530 (here expld as a cliff in the ocean).

cp. Epic Sk. pātāla an underground cave

Pāti

to watch, keep watch, keep Ja iii.95 (to keep the eyes open, C. ummisati; opp nimisati); Vism 16 (= rakkhati in def. of pāṭimokkha).

Vedic pāti of , cp. Gr. π ̈ωυ herd, ποιμήν shepherd, Lat. pāsco to tend sheep

Pātika

= pātī, read at Vism 28 for patika.

Pātita

brought to fall, felled, destroyed Snp 631; Dhp 407; Ja iii.176; Pv-a 31 (so read for patita).

pp. of pāteti

Pātin

(-˚) (adj.) throwing, shooting, only in cpd. dūre˚; throwing far AN i.284; AN ii.170. See akkhaṇa-vedhin.

fr. pāta

Pātimokkha

see pāṭi˚. Pati & Pati;

Pātī & Pāti

(f.) a bowl, vessel, dish Vin i.157 (avakkāra˚), 352 (id.); ii.216 (id.); MN i.25 (kaṃsa˚), 207; SN ii.233; AN iv.393 (suvaṇṇa˚, rūpiya˚ kaṃsa˚); Ja i.347, Ja i.501; Ja ii.90; Ja v.377 (suvaṇṇa˚) vi.510 (kañcana˚); Vv-a 65; Pv-a 274.

the femin. of patta, which is Vedic pātra (nt.); to this the f. Ved. pātrī

Pātukamyatā

is frequent v.l. for cāṭu-kamyatā, which is probably the correct reading (see this). The meaning (according to Vism 27 = Vb-a 483) is “putting oneself low,” i.e. flattery, “fawning” (Vism trsl. 32). A still more explicit defn is found at Vb-a 338. The diff spellings are as follows: cāṭukamyatā Vism 17, Vism 27 Kp-a 236; Vb-a 338, Vb-a 483; cāṭukammatā Mil 370 pāṭukamyatā Vb 246; pātukamyatā Nd ii.39. See standing phrase under mugga-sūpyatā.

Pātur

(-˚) (˚pātu) (indecl.) visible open, manifest; only in compn with kṛ; and bhū, and with the rule that pātu˚ appears before cons., whereas pātur˚ stands before vowels. (1) with kṛ; (to make appear): pres. pātukaroti Snp 316; Ja iv.7; Pp 30; Snp-a 423; aor. pātvākāsi SN ii.254; Dhp-a ii.64; pp pātukata Vv 8441 ■ (2) with bhū (to become manifest to appear): pres. pātubhavati DN i.220; DN ii.12, DN ii.15, DN ii.20 DN ii.226; MN i.445; SN iv.78; Pv ii.941 (pot. ˚bhaveyyuṃ) aor. pāturahosi [cp. BSk. prādurabhūt Jtm. 211; Vin i.5; DN i.215; DN ii.20; SN i.137; Pv ii.86; Mil 10, Mil 18; Vv-a 188; pl. pāturahaṃsu Ja i.11, & ˚ahiṃsu Ja i.54. pp. pātubhūta SN iii.39; Dhs 1035; Pv-a 44.

-kamma making visible, manifestation SN ii.254; Dhp-a iv.198. -bhāva appearance, coming into manifestation MN i.50; SN ii.3; SN iv.78; AN i.266; AN ii.130; Snp 560 Snp 998; Ja i.63; Nd ii.s. v.; Vism 437.

cp. Vedic prāduḥ in prādur + bhu; on t for d see Geiger, P.Gr. § 394. As regards etym. Monier Williams suggests prā = pra + dur, door thus “before the door, openly”; cp. dvāra

Pāteti

1. to make fall, drop, throw off SN i.197 (sakuṇo rajaṃ); Ja i.93 (udakaṃ); Mil 305 (sāraṃ).

2. to bring to fall Ja v.198; Mil 187.

3. to kill, destroy, cut off (the head) Ja i.393; Ja iii.177; Pv-a 31 Pv-a 115 ■ pp. pātita. Caus. II. pātāpeti (q.v.) ■ Cp abhi˚. Note. In meaning 3 it would be better to assume confusion with pāṭeti (for phāṭeti = Sk. sphāṭayati to split [ sphuṭ = (s)phal ], see phāleti & phāṭeti In the same sense we find the phrase; kaṭṭhaṃ pāteti to split firewood MN i.21 (MA ereti), besides phāleti.

Caus. of pat

Pātheyya

(nt.) “what is necessary for the road,” provisions for a journey, viaticum Vin i.244; SN i.44; Dhp 235, Dhp 237; Ja v.46, Ja v.241; DN-a i.288; Dhp-a i.180; Dhp-a iii.335; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 154.

grd. form. fr. patha

Pātheyyaka

(nt.) = patheyya Pv-a 126.

Pāda

1. the foot, usually pl. pādā both feet, e.g. Vin i.9, Vin i.34, Vin i.188; Iti 111; Snp 309, Snp 547, Snp 768, Snp 835, Snp 1028; Ja ii.114; Ja iv.137; Dhp-a iii.196; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 40, Pv-a 68; Vv-a 105. In sg. scarce and then specified as eka˚ & dutiya˚, e.g. at Nd;2 304iii Ja vi.354.

2. foot or base of a mountain Vism 399 (Sineru˚); Dhp-a i.108 (pabbata˚).

3. the fourth part (“foot”) of a verse (cp. pada 4) Snp-a 239, Snp-a 273 Snp-a 343, Snp-a 363; Thag-a 23.

4. a coin Vin iii.47; Vv-a 77 (worth here 1/4 of a kahāpaṇa and double the value of māsaka; see also kākaṇikā).

-aṅguṭṭha a toe MN i.337. -aṅguṭṭhaka same Ja ii.447 Vism 233. -aṅguli same Pv-a 125 (opp. to hatth anguli finger). -aṭṭhika bone of the foot MN i.58, MN i.89 MN iii.92; Kp-a 49. -āpacca offspring fr. the foot (of Brahmā): see bandhu. -ūdara “(using) the belly as feet,” i.e. a snake Snp 604. -odaka water for washing the feet Vin i.9. -kathalika (˚iya) acc. to Bdhgh either a foot stool or a towel (adhota-pāda-ṭhapanakaṃ pāda-ghaṃsanaṃ vā, see Vin. Texts i.92; ii.373) Vin i.9, Vin i.46; Vin ii.22; Vin iv.310; Kv 440; Vv-a 8; Dhp-a i.321 -kudārikā holding the feet like an axe (?) Pv iv.147 (expld at Pv-a 240 by pādasankhātā kudārikā; does k. here represent kuṭhārikā? The reading & meaning is uncertain).; -khīla a corn in the foot Vin i.188 (as ˚ālādha, cp. Vin Texts ii.19). -ghaṃsanī a towel for rubbing the feet (dry) Vin ii.130. -cāra moving about on feet Ja iv.104. -tala the sole of the foot Vin i.179; MN iii.90; DN iii.143, DN iii.148; Pv-a 74. -dhovana cleaning or washing one’s feet Dhp-a ii.9. -pa “drinking with the foot,” N. for tree Pv iv.39 (cp. Pv-a 251); Mil 117 Mil 376; Vism 533; Vv-a 212; Sdhp 270. -paricārikā “serving on one’s feet,” i.e. a wife (cp. SN i.125) Ja iii.95 Ja vi.268; Dhp-a iii.194. -pīṭha a foot-stool Vin i.9 (cp Vin. Texts i.92); iv.310; Dhp-a iii.120 = Dhp-a iii.186; Vv-a 291 -puñchana(ka) wiping one’s feet (with a towel) Vism 358 (˚rajju-maṇḍalaka, in comparison = Vb-a 62) Vb-a 285 (˚coḷaka); Kp-a 144; Snp-a 333; Dhp-a i.415 (˚ka). -puñchanī a towel for the feet Vin ii.174 -bbhañjana ointment for the feet, foot-salve Vin i.205; Ja v.197, Ja v.376; Pv-a 44, Pv-a 78; anointing the feet Vv-a 44 (˚tėla), 295 (id.). -mūla the sole of the foot, the foot Ja iv.131. Cp. mūla. -mūlika “one who sits at one’s feet,” a foot-servant, lackey Ja i.122, Ja i.438; Ja ii.300 sq (Gāmaṇicaṇḍa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30. -lola loafing about, one who lingers after a thing, a greedy person Snp 63, Snp 972; Nd i.374; Nd ii.433; abstr. f. ˚lolatā Snp-a 36 & ˚loliya Nd ii.433. -visāṇa “a horn on the foot,” i.e. an impossibility Ja vi.340. -sambāhana massaging the feet Dhp-a i.38.

Vedic pāda, see etym. under pada

Pādaka

(adj. n.) 1. having a foot or basis Vin ii.110 (a˚); Snp 205; Thag-a 78.

2. fundamental pādakaṃ karoti to take as a base or foundation Vism 667.

3. (nt.) basis, foundation, base Pv-a 167. pādaka-jjhāna meditation forming a basis (for further introspective development) Vism 390, Vism 397, Vism 412 sq., 428 667 ■ Cp. āhacca˚.

fr. pāda

Pādāsi

is aor. of padāti.

Pāduka

a little foot Ja vi.554.

= pādaka

Pādukā

(f.) a shoe, slipper, clog Vin i.190; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.222; Ja iii.327; Ja iv.129, Ja iv.379 Ja v.298; Ja vi.23; Mil 330; DN-a i.136; Dhp-a iii.451 (muñja˚)-At Vin ii.143 (according to Rh. D.) pādukā (dāru˚) is a kind of stool or stand in a privy.

cp. Epic Sk. pāduka & pādukā

Pāna

, cp. Gr. πίνω to drink, πότος drink; Obulg piti to drink, pivo drink; Lith. penas milk; Lat. potus drink, poculum drinking vessel (= Sk. pātra, P. patta) drink, including water as well as any other liquid Often combd with anna˚; (food), e.g. Snp 485, Snp 487; Pv i.52; and ˚bhojana (id.) e.g. Dhp 249; Ja i.204. Two sets of 8 drinks are given in detail at Nd i.372Vin i.245, Vin i.249 (yāgu˚); SN v.375 (majja˚); Snp 82, Snp 398, Snp 924; Ja i.202 (dibba˚); Pp 51; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 8, Pv-a 50.

-āgāra a drinking booth, a tavern Vin ii.267; Vin iii.151; Ja i.302 (= surā-geha C.); Vb 247; Vb-a 339.

Vedic pāna, fr. , pibati = Lat. bibo, pp. pīta, Idg. *po[i

Pānaka

(nt.) a drink Ja ii.285; Ja iv.30; Dāvs v.2; Dhp-a iii.207 (amba˚); Vv-a 99, Vv-a 291 ■ Der. pānakatta (abstr. nt.) being provided with drink Ja v.243 (a˚).

fr. pāna

Pānada

in cpd. pānad’ ûpama at Ja ii.223 is faulty. The meaning is “a badly made sandal,” and the reading should probably be (with v.l. & C.) “dupāhan’ ûpama, i.e. du(ḥ) + upāhanā. The C. expls as “dukkatupāhan’ ûpama.”

Pānīya

(adj. nt.) 1. drinkable SN ii.111.

2. drink, be erage, usually water for drinking Vin ii.207; Vin iv.263; Ja i.198, Ja i.450; Ja iii.491 Ja v.106, Ja v.382; Pv i.107; ii.119, 710; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 5. A reduced form pāniya (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23) is also found, e.g. Vin ii.153; DN i.148; Pv ii.102.

-ghata a pot for drinking water Vin ii.216; Ja vi.76 Ja vi.85. -cāṭika drinking vessel Dhp-a iv.129. -cāṭī id Ja i.302. -ṭhālika drinking cup Vin ii.214; Vin iv.263 -bhājana id. Vin ii.153. -maṇḍapa water reservoir (BSk. id. e.g. Avs ii.86) Vin ii.153. -māḷaka (? Ja vi.85 (Hardy: Flacourtia cataphracta). -sālā a hall where drinking water is given Vin ii.153; Pv-a 102 cp. papā.

Vedic pānīya, fr. pāna

Pānudi

see panudati.

Pāpa

(adj. nt.) 1. (adj.) evil, bad, wicked, sinful AN ii.222 sq. (and compar. pāpatara); Snp 57; Dhp 119 (opp. bhadra) Other compar-superl. forms are pāpiṭṭha SN v.96 pāpiṭṭhatara Vin ii.5; pāpiyyasika DN iii.254. See pāpiya.

2. unfertile (of soil) SN iv.315.

3. (nt. evil, wrong doing, sin Snp 23, Snp 662; Dhp 117 (opp. puñña 183; Pv i.66; 112; iv.150; Dhp-a ii.11 ■ pp. pāpāni Snp 399, Snp 452, Snp 674; Dhp 119, Dhp 265.

-iccha having bad wishes or intentions Vin i.97; DN iii.246; SN i.50; SN ii.156; AN iii.119, AN iii.191, AN iii.219 sq.; AN iv.1 AN iv.22, AN iv.155; AN v.123 sq.; Snp 133, Snp 280; Iti 85; Nd ii.342 Vism 24 (def.); Vb-a 476; -icchatā evil intention AN iv.160, AN iv.165; Dhp-a ii.77. -kamma evil doing, wickedness sin, crime DN iii.182; Iti 86; Snp 407; Dhp 127 Vism 502; Vb-a 440 sq.; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 25, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 51, Pv-a 84 -kammanta evil-doer, villain SN i.97. -kammin id MN i.39; Dhp 126. -kara id. Snp 674. -karin id. Dhp 15 Dhp 17. -dassana sinful view Pv iv.355. -dhamma wickedness evil habit Dhp 248, Dhp 307; Pp 37; Dhp-a iii.4; Pv-a 98; as adj. at Pv-a. 58. -dhammin one of evil character or habits Pv i.117. -parikkhaya decay or destruction of demerit (opp. puñña˚) Pv ii.615. -mitta an evil associate, a bad companion (opp. kalyāṇa˚ MN i.43, MN i.470; DN iii.182. -mittatā bad company, association with wicked people AN i.13 sq., 83; iv.160, 165; DN iii.212; Dhs 13, Dhs 27; Vb 359, Vb 369, Vb 371. -saṅkappa evil thought Snp 280. -sīla bad morals Snp 246. -supina an evil dream (opp. bhaddaka) Vism 312; Dhp-a iii.4.

Vedic pāpa, cp. Lat. patior≈E. passion etc.; Gr. π ̈ημα suffering, evil; ταλαίπωρος suffering evil

Pāpaka

(adj.) bad, wicked, wretched, sinful Vin i.8; SN i.149, SN i.207; SN v.418 (p. akusala citta); Snp 127 Snp 215, Snp 664; Dhp 66, Dhp 78, Dhp 211, Dhp 242; Ja i.128; Pv ii.716 (= lāmaka C.); ii.93; Pp 19; Dhs 30, Dhs 101; Mil 204 (opp kalyāṇa); Vism 268 (= lāmaka), 312 (of dreams, opp bhaddaka) ■ f. pāpikā Dhp 164, Dhp 310; ; without sin innocent, of a young maiden (daharā) Thig 370; Vv 314; 326 (so expld by Vv-a, but Thag-a explns as faultless, i.e. beautiful).

fr. pāpa

Pāpaṇika

(adj. n.) belonging to a shop, i.e. 1. a shopkeeper AN i.115 sq.

2. laid out in the shop (of cīvara) Vin i.255; Vism 62 (= āpaṇa-dvāre patitaka). See also Vin. Texts ii.156.

pa + āpaṇa + ika

Pāpika

= pāpaka DN i.90 (cp. DN-a i.256); AN iv.197.

Pāpita

one who has done wrong, sinful, evil MN ii.43 (where DN i.90 at id. p has pāpika); DN-a i.256 (for pāpika, v.l. vāpita).

pp. of pāpeti1, in meaning = pāpika

Pāpimant

(adj. n.) sinful; a sinner, esp. used as Ep. of Māra, i.e. the Evil, the wicked one SN i.103; AN iv.434; Ud 64; Snp 430; Thag 1213; Mil 155 sq.; Dhp-a iv.32.

fr. pāpa, cp. Vedic pāpman

Pāpiyo

(adj.) worse, more evil or wicked SN i.162, SN i.202; Snp 275; Dhp 42, Dhp 76; Ja i.158; Ja iv.303; Mil 155; Dhp-a ii.108.

compar. of pāpa, cp. Sk. pāpīyas

Pāpuṇana

(nt.) attainment Ja iv.306.

fr. pāpuṇāti

Pāpuṇāti

to reach, attain, arrive at, obtain, get to learn ■ pres. pāpuṇāti Vin ii.208; Ja iv.285; Ja vi.149; Pp 70; DA 21; Pv-a 74, Pv-a 98 Pv-a 125, Pv-a 195; and pappoti SN i.25; Dhp 27; Vism 501; Dhp-a i.395; pot. pāpuṇe Snp 324; Dhp 138; Ja v.57 (1st pl pāpuṇeyyāma for T. pappomu); Dhp-a iv.200. aor apāpuṇi Thag-a 64, and pāpuṇi Ja ii.229. pret. apattha Ja v.391 (proh. mā a.). fut. pāpuṇissati Ja i.260. ger pāpuṇitvā SN ii.28; patvā Snp 347, Snp 575, and pappuyya SN i.7 (cp. Vin ii.56; AN i.138), 181, 212. inf. pappotuṃ Si. 129 = Thig 60, and pāpuṇituṃ Vb-a 223 ■ grd pattabba SN i.129; SN ii.28; Snp-a 433 ■ pp. patta; Caus pāpeti2 (q.v.).

pa + āp; cp. Sk. prāpnoti

Pāpuraṇa

(nt.) cover, dress, cloak SN i.175; Mil 279; Dhp-a iii.1. See also pārupana.

through *pāvuraṇa fr. pra + vṛ; cp. Sk. prāvaraṇa

Pāpurati

to cover, veil; shut, hide; only neg. ; and only in phrase apāpurati Amatassa dvāraṃ to open the door of Nibbāna Vin i.5; Vv 6427 (= vivarati Vv-a 284).

fr. pa + ā + vṛ; cp. Vedic pravṛṇoti

Pāpeti1

to make bad, bring into disgrace Vin iv.5 ■ pp. pāpita.

Denom. fr. pāpa

Pāpeti2

to make attain, to let go to, to cause to reach, to bring to Ja iv.494; Ja v.205, Ja v.260; DN-a i.136. imper. pāpaya SN i.217, and pāpayassu Ja iv.20. fut. pāpessati Ja i.260 and pāpayissati Ja v.8.

Caus. of pāpuṇāti

Pābhata

brought, conveyed DN-a i.262; Snp-a 356 (kathā˚).

pa + ābhata

Pābhati

(nt.) “that which has been brought here,” viz. 1. a present, bribe DN-a i.262. 2. money, price Ja i.122; Ja v.401, Ja v.452kathā˚; “a tale brought,” occasion for something to tell, news, story Ja i.252, Ja i.364, Ja i.378; Snp-a 356.

pa + ā + pp. of bhṛ;

Pāmaṅga

(nt.) a band or chain Vin ii.106; Vin iii.48; Mvu 11, Mvu 28; Dpvs xii.1; Dhp-a iv.216. See on this Vin. Texts iii.69 & Mvu trsl. 797.

etym.?

Pāmujja

(nt.) delight, joy, happiness; often combd with pītiDN i.72, DN i.196; SN iii.134; SN iv.78 = SN iv.351; SN v.156 SN v.398; AN iii.21; AN v.1 sq., 311 sq., 339, 349; Snp 256; Ne 29; DN-a i.217; Sdhp 167. See also pāmojja.

grd. form. tr. pa + mud, see similar forms under pāmokkha

Pāmokkha

(adj.) 1. chief, first, excellent eminent, (m.) a leader ■ AN ii.168 (sanga sa˚); Pp 69 Pp 70; Mil 75 (hatthi˚ state elephant). disā˚ worldfamed Ja i.166, Ja i.285; Ja ii.278; Ja vi.347 ■ Freq. in series agga seṭṭha pāmokkha attama, in exegesis of mahā (at Nd ii.502 A e.g. , when AN ii.95 reads mokkha for p.). See mahā. Defd as “pamukhe sādhū ti” at Vb-a 332.

2. facing east Pv iv.353 (= pācīna-dis âbhimukha).

a grd. form. fr. pamukha, with lengthening of a as frequently in similar forms like pāṭidesanīya pāṭimokkha, pāmojja

Pāmojja

= pāmujja DN ii.214; DN iii.288; MN i.37, MN i.98; SN i.203; SN ii.30 SN v.157; Dhp 376, Dhp 381; Pts i.177; Dhs 9, Dhs 86; Mil 84 Vism 2, Vism 107, Vism 177 (T. pa˚); Dhp-a iv.111 (˚bahula).

Cp. BSk. prāmodya Divy 13, Divy 82, Divy 239

Pāya

setting out, starting SN ii.218 (nava˚ newly setting out); instr. pāyena (adv.) for the most part, commonly, usually Ja v.490; DN-a i.275 (so read for pāṭhena).

fr. pa + ā +

Pāyaka

(-˚) drinking Ja i.252 (vāruṇi˚)

fr. to drink

Pāyāta

gone forth, set out, started Ja i.146.

pp of pāyāti

Pāyāti

to set out, start, go forth Dhp-a ii.42; aor. 3rd sg. pāyāsi DN ii.73; Ja i.64, Ja i.223; Ja iii.333; Vv-a 64; Pv-a 272; Pv-a 3rd pl. pāyesuṃ Ja iv.220, and pāyiṃsu DN ii.96; Ja i.253; Dhp-a iii.257 ■ pp. pāyāta (q.v.) See also the quasi synonymous abhiyāti.

pra + ā +

Pāyāsa

rice boiled in milk, milk-rice, rice porridge SN i.166; Snp p.15; Ja i.50, Ja i.68 Ja iv.391; Ja v.211; Vism 41; Snp-a 151; Dhp-a i.171; Dhp-a ii.88; Vv-a 32.

cp. Class. Sk. pāyāsa

Pāyin

(adj. n.) drinking Ja iii.338.

fr. , see pivati

Pāyeti

1. to give to drink, to make drink DN ii.19; Snp 398 (Pot. pāyaye); Mil 43 Mil 229; Dhp-a i.87 (amataṃ); Vv-a 75 (yāguṃ); Pv-a 63 aor. apāyesi SN i.143; ger. pāyetvā Ja i.202 (dibba-pānaṃ) ii.115 (lohitaṃ); iii.372 (phāṇīt’ odakaṃ); iv.30 (pānakaṃ); vi.392 (suraṃ).

2. to irrigate Ja i.215 ■ ppr f. pāyamānā a woman giving suck, a nursing woman DN i.166; MN i.77; AN i.295; AN ii.206; AN iii.227; Pp 55; Dhp-a i.49 ■ Caus. II. pāyāpeti Ja v.422.

Caus. fr. , see pibati

Pāra

(adj.-n..) 1. as adv. (˚-) beyond, over, across, used as prep. with abl., e.g. pāra-Gangāya beyond the G. SN i.207, SN i.214; Snp-a 228. See under cpds

2. as nt. the other side, the opposite shore SN i.169 SN i.183; Snp 1059; Nd i.20 (= amataṃ nibbānaṃ); Dhp 385; Dhp-a iv.141 aparā pāraṃ gacchati to go from this side to the other (used with ref. to this world & the world beyond) SN iv.174; AN v.4; Snp 1130; pāraṃ gavesino MN ii.64 = Thag 771

3. Cases adverbially: acc. pāraṃ see sep.; abl. pārato from the other side Vin ii.209

3. the guṇa form of para, another: see cpds.:

-atthika (pār’) wishing to cross beyond DN i.244 -ga “going beyond,” traversing, crossing, surmounting SN iv.71 (jātimaraṇassa); Snp 32, Snp 997. -gata one who has reached the opposite shore SN i.34; SN ii.277 SN iv.157; AN iv.411; Snp 21, Snp 210, Snp 359; Dhp 414; Vv 531 (cp. Vv-a 231); one who has gone over to another party Thag 209. -gavesin looking for the other shore Dhp 355; Dhp-a iv.80. -gāmin = gata SN i.123; AN v.232 sq. 253 sq.; Dhp-a ii.160. -gū (a) gone beyond, i.e. passed transcended, crossed SN i.195 = Nd ii.136a (dukkhassa) iv.210 (bhavassa); AN ii.9 (id.); iii.223; Iti 33 (jarāya) Dhp 348. (b) gone to the end of (gen. or ■ ˚), reached perfection in, well-versed in, familiar with, an authority on Snp 992 (sabbadhammānaṃ), 1105 (cp. Nd ii.435) DN i.88 (tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ); Dhp-a iii.361 (id.). -dārika an adulterer, lit. one of another’s wife SN ii.259; Ja iii.43 (so read for para˚); Dhp-a ii.10.

fr. para

Pāraṃ

(adv ■ prep.) beyond, to the other side DN i.244; MN i.135; Snp 1146 (Maccu-dheyya˚, vv. ll ˚dheyassa & ˚dheyya˚), expl;d by Nd ii.487 as amataṃ nibbānaṃ; Vv-a 42.

-gata (cp. pāragata) gone to the other side, gone beyond, traversed, transcended MN i.135; SN ii.277; Snp 803; Nd i.114; Nd ii.435; Pp 72; Vism 234. -gamana crossing over, going beyond SN v.24, SN v.81; AN v.4 AN v.313; Snp 1130.

acc. of pāra

Pāramitā

(f.) = pāramī Ne 87.

pāramī + tā

Pāramī

(f.) completeness, perfection, highest state Snp 1018, Snp 1020; Pp 70; Dhp-a i.5; Vv-a 2 (sāvakañāṇa˚); Pv-a 139; Sdhp 328. In later literature there is mentioned a group of 10 perfections (dasa pāramiyo as the perfect exercise of the 10 principal virtues by a Bodhisatta, viz. dāna˚, sīla˚, nekkhamma˚, paññā˚ viriya˚, khanti˚, sacca˚, adhiṭṭhāna˚, mettā˚, upekhā Ja i.73; Dhp-a i.84.

-ppatta (pārami˚) having attained perfection MN iii.28; Nd ii.435; Mil 21 Mil 22; cp. Mil trsl. i.34.

abstr. fr. parama, cp. BSk. mantrāṇāṃ pāramiṃ gata Divy 637

Pārājika

one who has committed a grave transgression of the rules for bhikkhus; one who merits expulsion (see on term Vin. Texts i.3 Mil trsln i.268; ii.78) Vin i.172; Vin ii.101, Vin ii.242; AN ii.241 AN iii.252; AN v.70; Ja vi.70, Ja vi.112; Mil 255; Vism 22; Kp-a 97, Dhp-a i.76 (as one of the divisions of the Suttavibhanga see also Vin iii.1 sq.).

etym. doubtful; suggested are parā + aj (Burnouf); para + ji; pārācika (S. Lévi, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 38, n. 3; also Childers s. v.)

Pārāpata

a dove, pigeon Ja i.242; Ja v.215; Vv-a 167 (˚akkhi); Pgdp 45. See the doublet pārevata.

Epic Sk. pārāvata

Pārāyana

(nt.) the highest (farthest) point, final aim, chief object, ideal; title of the last Vagga of the Sutta Nipāta AN iii.401; Snp 1130; Nd ii.438; Snp-a 163, Snp-a 370 Snp-a 604.

late Sk. pārāyaṇa, the metric form of parāyana

Pārikkhattiya

= parikkhattatā, Pp 19 = Vb-a 358.

Pāricariyā

(f.) same as paricariya serving, waiting on, service, ministration, honour (for = loc.) DN iii.189, DN iii.250 DN iii.281; MN ii.177; SN iv.239; AN ii.70; AN iii.284, AN iii.325, AN iii.328; Ja iii.408; Ja iv.490; Ja v.154, Ja v.158 (kilesa˚); Pv-a 7, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 128 Cp. BSk. pāricāryā Mvu ii.225.

Pāricchatta

= pāricchattaka, Snp 64 (˚ka Nd ii.439; expld as koviḷāra); Ja v.393.

Pāricchattaka

the coral tree Erythmia Indica, a tree in Indra’s heaven Vin i.30; AN iv.117 sq.; Vv 381 (expld as Māgadhism at Vv-a 174 for pārijāta, which is also the BSk. form) Ja i.40; Ja ii.20; Kp-a i.122; Snp-a 485; Dhp-a i.273; Dhp-a iii.211; Dhs-a 1; Vv-a 12, Vv-a 110; Pv-a 137.

Epic Sk. pārijāta, but P. fr. pari + chatta + ka, in pop. etym. “shading all round”

Pārijāta

= pāricchattaka, Vv-a 174.

Pārijuñña

(nt.) 1. decay, loss MN ii.66; Dhp-a i.238; Vv-a 101 (bhoga˚)

2. loss of property, poverty Pv-a 3.

abstr. fr. parijuṇṇa, pp. of pari + jur

Pāripanthika

1. highwayman, robber SN ii.188; Ja v.253.

2. connected with danger, threatening dangerous to (-˚) Vism 152; PugA 181 (samādhi˚ vipassanā˚).

fr. paripantha

Pāripūrī

(f.) fulfilment, completion, consummation SN i.139; AN v.114 sq.; Snp 1016; Ja vi.298; Nd ii.137 (pada˚) Snp-a 28 (id.); Pp 53; Dhs 1367; Dhp-a i.36; Pv-a 132 Pv-a 133; Vb-a 468 (˚mada conceit of perfection).

abstr. fr. pari + pūr, cp. BSk. pāripūri Avs ii.107

Pārima

(adj.) yonder, farther, only combd with ˚tīra the farther shore DN i.244; MN i.134 MN i.135; SN iv.174; Mil 269; Dhp-a ii.100. Cp. BSk pārimaṃ tīraṃ Avs i.148.

superl. form. fr. pāra

Pāribhaṭya

(nt.) (& der.) “petting (or spoiling) the children” (Mil trsl. ii.287) but perhaps more likely “fondness of being petted” or “nurture (as Vism trsl. 32) (being carried about like on the lap or the back of a nurse, as expln at Vism 28 = Vb-a 483) The readings are different, thus we find ˚bhaṭyatā at Vb 240; Vb-a 338, Vb-a 483; ˚bhatyatā at Vism 17, Vism 23 Vism 27 (vv.ll. ˚bhaṭṭatā & ˚bbhaṭṭatā); ˚bhaṭṭakatā at Mil 370; ˚bhaṭṭatā at Vb 352; Kp-a 236; Nd ii.39. The more det. expln at Vb-a 338 is “alankāra-karaṇ ādīhi dāraka-kīḷāpanaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.”-See stock phrase under mugga-sūpyatā.

fr. pari + ; bhṛ;

Pāribhogika

(adj.) belonging to use or enjoyment, with ref. to relics of personal use Ja iv.228 (one of the 3 cetiyas, viz. sarīrika, pāribhogika, uddesika); Mil 341 (id.).

fr. paribhoga

Pārivattaka

(adj.) = pari˚; changing, turning round (of cīvara) Vin iv.59, Vin iv.60. Parivasika = pari

Pārivāsika = pari˚

(a probationer), Vin i.136; Vin ii.31 sq., where distinguished from a pakatatta bhikkhu, a regular, ordained bh. to whom a pārivāsika is inferior in rank.

Pārisajja

belonging to an assembly, pl. the members of an assembly, esp. those who sit in council councillors (cp. BSk. pāriṣadya councillor Divy 291; Vin i.348; DN i.136; DN iii.64, DN iii.65; MN i.326; SN i.145, SN i.222; AN i.142; Mil 234; DN-a i.297.

fr. parisā

Pārisuddhi

(f.) purity Vin i.102, Vin i.136 (cp. Vin. Texts i.242, 280); MN iii.4; AN ii.194 sq. (˚padhāniy’ angāni, the four, viz. sīlapārisuddhi, citta˚ diṭṭhi˚, vimutti˚); Nd i.475; Pts i.42 (˚sīla); Dhs 165; Mil 336 (ājīva˚, and in 4th jhāna); Vism 30 (= parisuddhatā), 46 (˚sīla), 278; Dhp-a iii.399 (catu˚-sīla) iv.111 (ājīva˚); Sdhp 342.

fr. parisuddha

Pārihāriya

(adj.) connected with preservation or attention, fostering, keeping Vism 3 (˚paññā) 98 (˚kammaṭṭhāna); Snp-a 54 (id.).

fr. parihāra

Pāruta

covered, dressed SN i.167, SN i.175; Thag 153; Ja i.59, Ja i.347; Snp-a 401; Pv-a 48, Pv-a 161duppāruta not properly dressed (without the upper robe Vin i.44; Vin ii.212; SN ii.231, SN ii.271. See also abhipāruta Note. The form apāruta is apparently only a neg. pāruta in reality it is apa + ā + vṛta.

pp. of pārupati

Pārupati

to cover, dress, hide, veil DN i.246; Vin iv.283; MN iii.94; SN ii.281; Ja ii.24, Ja ii.109; Pv ii.112 (= nivāseti Pv-a 147); Mvu 22, Mvu 67; Vism 18; Dhp-a iii.325; Vv-a 44, Vv-a 127; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 74, Pv-a 77 ■ pp pāruta (q.v.).

metathesis fr. pāpurati = Sk. prāvṛṇoti, pra + vṛ; see also pāpurati etc.

Pārupana

(nt.) covering, clothing; dress Ja i.126, Ja i.378; Ja iii.82; Mil 279; Dhp-a i.70, Dhp-a i.164; Pv-a 74 Pv-a 76.

fr. pārupati

Pāreti

to make go through, to bore through, pierce, break (?) Ja iii.185 (reading uncertain).

Denom. fr. pāra; cp. Lat. portare

Pārevata

1. a dove, pigeon AN i.162 (dove-coloured); Vv 363 (˚akkhi pārāpat’ akkhi Vv-a 167); Ja vi.456.

2. a species of tree, Diospyros embryopteris Ja vi.529, Ja vi.539.

the Prk. form (cp. Māgadhi pārevaya) of the Sk. pārāpata, which appears also as such in P.

Pāroha

1. a small (side) branch, new twig (of a Nigrodha tree) Ja v.8, Ja v.38, Ja v.472 Ja vi.199; Snp-a 304; Pv-a 113.

2. a shoot, sprout (from the root of a tree, tillering) SN i.69 (see C. expln at K.S. 320); Ja vi.15; Dhp-a ii.70; Vb-a 475; Vb-a 476.

fr. pra + ruh, cp. Sk. *prāroha

Pāla

(-˚) a guard, keeper, guardian, protector SN i.185 (vihāra˚); Ja v.222 (dhamma˚); Vv-a 288 (ārāma˚); Sdhp 285. See also go˚, loka˚.

fr. , see pāleti

Pālaka

(-˚) a guardian, herdsman MN i.79; SN iii.154; AN iv.127; Ja iii.444.

fr.

Pālana

(nt.) (& pālanā? ) moving running, keeping going, living, in phrase vutti pālana yapana etc. at Vism 145; Dhs-a 149 Dhs-a 167; also in defn of bhuñjati1 as “pālan’ ajjhohāresu” by eating drinking for purposes of living, at Dhtp 379. As; pālanā at the Dhs passages of same context as above (see under yapana ).

fr. pāleti 2, to all likelihood for palāyana through *pālāna, with false analogy

Pālanā

(f.) guarding, keeping Ja i.158; Dhs 19, Dhs 82,295. Pali (Pali)

fr. pāleti cp. Ep. Sk. pālana nt.

Pāli (Pāḷi)

(f.) 1. a line, row Dāvs iii.61; Dāvs iv.3; Vism 242 (dvattiṃs’ ākāra˚), 251 (danta˚); Snp-a 87.

2. a line, norm thus the canon of Buddhist writings; the text of the Pāli Canon, i.e. the original text (opp. to the Commentary; thus “pāliyaṃ” is opposed to “aṭṭhakathāyaṃ” at Vism 107, Vism 450, etc). It is the literary language of the early Buddhists, closely related to Māgadhī. See Grierson, The Home of Lit. Pāli (Bhandarkar Commemoration vol. p. 117 sq.), and literature given by Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt., ii.10; iii.606, 635. The word is only found in Commentaries, not in the Piṭaka See also Hardy, Introd. to Nett, p. xi ■ Ja iv.447 (˚nayena accord. to the Pāli Text); Vism 376 (˚nay’ anusārena id.), 394, 401, 565 (˚anusārato accord. to the text of the Canon); 607, 630, 660 sq., 693, 712; Kp-a 41; Snp-a 333, Snp-a 424, Snp-a 519, Snp-a 604; Dhs-a 157, Dhs-a 168; Dhp-a iv.93; Vv-a 117, Vv-a 203 (pālito + aṭṭhuppattito); Pv-a 83, Pv-a 87, Pv-a 92 Pv-a 287; and freq. elsewhere.

-vaṇṇanā is explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual criticism, as opposed to vinicchaya-kathā analysis, exegesis, interpretation of sense Vb 291; Vism 240 (contrasted to bhāvanāniddesa).

cp. Sk. pālī a causeway, bridge Halāyudha iii.54

Pāliguṇṭhima

(adj.) covered round (of sandals Vin i.186 (Vin. Texts ii.15: laced boots); v.l. BB ˚gunṭhika.

doubtful, fr pali + guṇṭh, see paliguṇṭhita; hapax legomenon

Pālicca

(nt.) greyness of hair MN i.49; SN ii.2, SN ii.42; AN iii.196; Dhs 644, Dhs 736, Dhs 869; Vb-a 98.

fr. palita

Pālibhaddaka

the tree Butea frondosa Ja iv.205; Nd ii.680Aii Vism 256 (˚aṭṭhi); Vb-a 239 (id.); Kp-a 46, Kp-a 53; Dhs-a 14; Dhp-a i.383. As phālibhaddaka (-vana) at Ja ii.162 (v.l. pātali˚).

fr. palibhadda = pari + bhadda, very auspicious

Pāleti

1. to protect, guard, watch, keep Snp 585; Ja i.55; Ja iv.127; Ja vi.589; Mil 4 (paṭhavī lokaṃ pāleti, perhaps in meaning “keeps holds, encircles,” similar to meaning 2); Sdhp 33. 2. (lit. perhaps “to see through safely”; for palāyati by false analogy) to go on, to move, to keep going in defn of carati as viharati, iriyati, vattati, pāleti yapeti, yāpeti at Nd ii.237; Vb 252; Dhs-a 167. Cp pālana. So also in phrase atthaṃ pāleti (so read for paleti?) “to come home” i.e. to disappear Snp 1074 (see expld Nd ii.28). See other refs. under palāyati. pp. pālita. See also abhi˚ & pari˚. A contracted (poetical) form is found as; pallate at Ja v.242, expld by C. as pālayati (pālayate), used as Med ■ Pass.

cp. (Epic) Sk. pālayati, fr.

Pāvaka

(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) pure, bright, clear, shining Ja v.419.

2. (m.) the fire SN i.69; AN iv.97; Dhp 71, Dhp 140; Ja iv.26; Ja v.63 (= kaṇha-vattanin vi.236 (= aggi C.); Pv i.85; Vism 170 (= aggi).

fr. pu, Vedic pāvaka

Pāvacana

(nt.) a word, esp. the word of the Buddha DN i.88; SN ii.259; Thag 587; Thag 2, Thag 457.

pa + vacana, with lengthening of first a (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 331)

Pāvadati

to speak out, to tell, show Ja ii.439; Pv iv.148; Pv-a 118.

= pavadati

Pāvassi

see pavassati.

Pāvāra

1. a cloak, mantle Vin i.281; Ja v.409 (expld as pavara-dibba-vattha!).

2. the mango tree Kp-a 58 (˚puppha; Vism 258 at id. p. has pāvāraka˚).

fr. pa + vṛ;

Pāvārika

a cloak-seller (?) Vin iv.250.

fr. pāvāra

Pāvāḷa

hair; only in cpd. ˚nipphoṭanā pulling out one’s hair SN iv.300. Pavisa & Pavekkhi;

see pavāḷa

Pāvisa & Pāvekkhi

see pavisati.

Pāvuraṇa

(nt.) cloak, mantle MN i.359; Vin iv.255, Vin iv.289; Thag-a 22.

fr. pa + ā + vṛ; see pāpuraṇa & pārupana

Pāvusa

1. rain, the rainy season (its first 2 months) Thag 597; Ja v.202 Ja v.206.

2. a sort of fish Ja iv.70 (gloss pāgusa, q.v.).

pa + vṛṣ, cp. Vedic prāvṛṣa & pravarṣa

Pāvussaka

(adj.) raining, shedding rain MN i.306; SN v.51; AN iv.127; Ja i.95, Ja i.96; Mil 114.

fr. pāvusa

Pāsa1

a sling, snare, tie, fetter SN i.105, SN i.111; AN ii.182; AN iv.197; Vin iv.153 (? hattha˚); Snp 166; Iti 36 (Māra˚); Ja iii.184; Ja iv.414; Pv-a 206. On its frequent use in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 111.

Vedic pāśa

Pāsa2

a spear, a throw Snp 303; AN iv.171 (kuṭhāri˚ throw of an axe) ■ asi˚; a class of deities Mil 191.

Class. Sk. prāsa fr. pra + as

Pāsa3

(a stone?) at Pv-a 63 (pās’ antare) is probably a misreading and to be corrected to palāsa (palās’ antare similarly to rukkh’ antare, kaṭṭh’-and mūl’ antare) foliage.

Pāsaṃsa

(adj.) to be praised praiseworthy MN i.15, MN i.404; MN ii.227 (dasa ˚ṭṭhānāni) AN v.129 (id.); Ja iii.493; Pv iv.713; Ne 52.

grd. fr. pasaṃsati with pā for pa as in similar formations (see pāmokkha)

Pāsaka1

a bow, for the dress Vin ii.136; for the hair Thig 411 (if Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 45, 46, is right to be corr. fr. pasāda).

fr. pāsa1

Pāsaka2

a throw, a die Ja vi.281.

fr. pāsa2

Pāsaka3

lintel Vin ii.120 = Vin ii.148 (see Vin. Texts iii.144).

Pāsaṇḍa

heresy, sect SN i.133, AN ii.466; Thig 183; Mil 359; Thag-a 164. -˚ika heretic sectarian Vin iv.74.

cp. late Sk. pāṣaṇḍa

Pāsati

(?) only in “sammaṃ pāsanti” at Snp-a 321 as expln of sammāpāsa (q.v.).

Pāsāṇa

a rock, stone AN i.283; Snp 447; Ja i.109, Ja i.199; Ja v.295; Vism 28, Vism 182, Vism 183; Vb-a 64 (its size as cpd with pabbata); Dhp-a iii.151; Dhs-a 389; Vv-a 157; Sdhp 328.

-guḷa a ball of (soft) stone, used for washing (pumice stone?) AN ii.200 (sāla-laṭṭhiṃ… taccheyya… likheyya… pāsāṇaguḷena dhopeyya… nadiṃ patāreyya), cp. MN i.233; and Vism 28 “bhājane ṭhapitaṃ guḷapiṇḍaṃ viya pāsāṇaṃ.” -cetiya a stone Caitya Dhp-a iii.253. -tala a natural plateau Ja i.207. -piṭṭhe at the back of a rock Vism 116. -pokkharaṇī a natural tank Vism 119. -phalaka a slab of stone Ja iv.328 -macchaka a kind of fish (stone-fish) Ja iv.70; Ja vi.450 -lekha writing on a stone Pp 32. -sakkharā a little stone, fragment of rock SN ii.137; AN iv.237. -sevāla stone Vallisneria Ja v.462. -vassa rain of stones Snp-a 224.

Epic Sk. pāṣāṇa

Pāsāṇaka

= pāsāṇa Vin ii.211.

Pāsāda

a lofty platform, a building on high foundations, a terrace, palace Vin i.58, Vin i.96, Vin i.107, Vin i.239; Vin ii.128, Vin ii.146, Vin ii.236 (cp. Vin. Texts i.174; iii.178); DN ii.21; SN i.137; AN i.64; Snp 409; Iti 33; Pv ii.125; Ja ii.447; Ja iv.153 (pillars); v.217; Vism 339 (˚tala); Dhs-a 107; Snp-a 502; Thag-a 253, Thag-a 286; Vv-a 197; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 279 (cp. upari˚); Sdhp 299satta-bhū- maka˚; a tower with 7 platforms Ja i.227, Ja i.346; Ja iv.323 Ja iv.378; Ja v.426, Ja v.577. The Buddha’s 3 castles at DN ii.21; AN i.145; Ja vi.289. See also J.P.T.S. 1907, 112 (p. in similes).

pa + ā + sad, cp. Class. Sk. prāsāda

Pāsādika

(adj.) 1. pleasing, pleasant, lovely, amiable Vin iv.18; DN iii.141; SN i.95; SN ii.279; AN ii.104 sq. 203; iii.255 sq.; Dhp-a i.119; Thag-a 266, Thag-a 281; DN-a i.141 DN-a i.281; Vv-a 6; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 186, Pv-a 187, Pv-a 261samanta˚; lovely throughout AN i.24; AN v.11.

2. comfortable Vism 105.

fr. pasāda

Pāsāvin

(adj.) bringing forth SN v.170; Ja i.394.

fr. pasavati

Pāsuka

a rib Vin ii.266. (loop? Rh.D.).

for the usual phāsuka

Pāsuḷa

a rib Vin iii.105.

for phāsuka

Pāssati

fat. of pibati (for pivissati).

Pāhuna

(m. nt.) 1. (m.) a guest AN iii.260; Ja vi.24, Ja vi.516.

2. (nt.) meal for a guest DN i.97 = MN ii.154; Vism 220; DN-a i.267.

fr. pa + ā + hu, see also āhuna & der.

Pāhunaka

(m ■ nt.) 1. (m.) a guest Ja i.197; Ja iv.274; Mil 107; DN-a i.267, DN-a i.288; Dhp-a ii.17.

2. (nt. meal for a guest SN i.114.

fr. pāhuna

Pāhuṇeyya

(adj.) worthy of hospitality, deserving to be a guest DN iii.5; SN i.220 SN ii.70; AN ii.56; AN iii.36, AN iii.134, AN iii.248, AN iii.387; AN iv.13 sq.; AN v.67 AN v.198; Iti 88; Vism 220.

fr. pāhuna, see also āhuneyya

Pāhuneyyaka

= pāhuṇeyya Ja iii.440.

Pāheti

to send Ja i.447; Mil 8; Pv-a 133.

secondary form. after aor. pāhesi fr. pahiṇati

Pi

(indecl.) emphatic particle, as prefix only in pidahati and pilandhati where api˚ also is found (cp. api 1b).

1. also, and also, even so DN i.1; Vin iv.139 (cara pi re get away with you: see re); Ja i.151, Ja i.278.

2. even, just so; with numbers or num. expressions “altogether, in all, just that many” Ja i.151; Ja iii.275; Ja iv.142 ■ cattāro pi Ja iii.51; ubho pi Ja i.223; sabbe pi Snp 52; Ja i.280. 3. but, however, on the other hand, now (continuing a story) Ja i.208; Ja iv.2.

4. although, even if Ja ii.110 (ciram pi kho… ca although for a long time… yet).

5. perhaps, it is time that, probably Snp 43; Ja i.151; Ja ii.103.

6. pi… pi in correlation (like api… api ): (a) both… and; very often untranslatable Snp 681 (yadā pi… tadā pi when… then), 808 (diṭṭhā pi sutā pi); Ja i.222 (jale pi thale pi) (b) either… or Ja i.150; Ja ii.102.

the enclitic form of api (cp. api 2a); on similarities in Prk. see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 143

Piṃsa

crushed, ground, pounded Dhp-a iii.184 (v.l. piṭṭha, perhaps preferable).

pp. of piṃsati2

Piṃsati1 [piś

or piṃś, cp. Vedic piṃśati, with two bases viz. Idg. *peig, as in P. piñjara & pingala; Lat. pingo to paint, embroider; and *peik, as in Sk. piṃśati, peśaḥ Av. paes-to embellish; Gr. ποικίλος many-coloured Goth. fēh, Ags. fāh id. See detail in Walde, Lat Wtb. under pingo] to adorn, form, embellish; orig. to prick, cut. Perhaps piṃsare (3. pl. med.) Ja v.202 belongs here, in meaning “tinkle, sound” (lit. prick) expld in C. by viravati. Other der. see under pingala piñjara, pesakāra.

Piṃsati2 [piṣ

or piṃṣ, Vedic pinaṣṭi, cp. Lat. pinso to grind, pīla = pestle, pistillum = pistil; Lith. paisýti to pound barley; Gr. πτίσσω id.; Ohg. fesa = Nhg. fese] 1. to grind, crush, pound Ja i.452; Ja ii.363; Ja iv.3 (matthakaṃ) 440 (akaluñ candanañ ca silāya p.); Mil 43; Dhp-a iii.184 (gandhe piṃsissati; BB pisissati).

2. to knock against each other, make a sound Ja v.202: see piṃsati1 ■ pp. piṃsa & piṭṭha;1. See also pisati and paṭi˚.

Piṅka

a young shoot, sprout Ja iii.389 (v.l. singa, which also points to pinga expld by pavāla).

for pinga yellow, brownish, tawny

Piṅga

see pinka.

Piṅgala

(adj.) 1. reddishyellow, brown, tawny SN i.170; Ja vi.199 (= pingiya). 2. red-eyed, as sign of ugliness Ja iv.245 (as Np. combd with nikkhanta-dāṭha); v.42 (tamba-dāṭhika nibbiddha-pingala); Pv ii.41 (= ˚locana Pv-a 90 + kaḷāra-danta).

-kipillaka the red ant Dhp-a iii.206. -cakkhutā redeyedness Pv-a 250. -makkhikā the gadfly Ja iii.263 (= ḍaṃsa) Nd ii.268 = Snp-a 101 (id.); Snp-a 33 (where a distinction is made between kāṇa-makkhikā and pingala˚), 572 (= ḍaṃsa).

see piṃsati1, cp. Vedic pingala

Piṅgiya

(adj.) reddish-brown, yellow Ja vi.199.

fr. Vedic pinga

Piṅgulā

(f.) a species of bird Ja vi.538.

a var. of Sk. piṅgalā, a kind of owl

Picu1

cotton Vin i.271; usually in cpds, either as kappāsa˚; SN v.284, SN v.443, or tūla˚; SN v.284 SN v.351 (T. thula˚), 443; Ja v.480 (T. tula˚).

-paṭala membrane or film of cotton Vism 445 -manda the Nimb or Neem tree Azadizachta Indica Pv iv.16 (cp. Pv-a 220); the usual P. form is pucimanda (q.v.).

cp. Class. Sk. picu

Picu2

a wild animal, said to be a kind of monkey Ja vi.537.

etym. unknown, prob. Non-Aryan

Piccha

(nt.) tail-feather, esp. of the peacock Vin i.186 (mora˚) ■ dve˚; (& de˚) having two tail-feathers Ja v.339, Ja v.341 (perhaps to be taken as “wing” here, cp. Halāyudha 2, 84 = pakṣa). Cp piñcha & piñja.;

cp. Epic Sk. piccha & puccha tail, to Lat. pinna, E. fin. Ger. finne

Picchita

in su˚ Ja v.197 is not clear, C. expl5 by suphassita, i.e. pleasing, beautiful, desirable, thus dividing su-picch˚.

Picchila

(adj.) slippery Vism 264; Vb-a 247 (lasikā = p-kuṇapaṃ); Dhp-a iii.4 (˚magga).

cp. Class. Sk. picchila

Piñcha

= piccha, i.e. tail-feather, tail Vin ii.130 (mora˚). Cp. piñja.

Piñja

(nt.) a (peacock’s) tail-feather Ja i.38 (mora˚ kalāpa), 207 (= pekkhuṇa); iii.226 (BB piccha & miccha); DN-a i.41 (mora˚); Dhp-a i.394 (id.); Vv-a 147 (mayūra˚; BB piñcha, SS pakkha); Pv-a 142 (mora˚ kalāpa).

= piccha

Piñjara

of a reddish colour, tawny Ja i.93; DN-a i.245; Vv-a 165 Vv-a 288.

-odaka fruit of the esculent water plant Trapa Bispinosa Ja vi.563 (v.l. ciñcarodaka), expld by singhāṭaka.

cp. Class. Sk. piñjara; for etym. see piṃsati1

Piñjita

(adj.) tinged, dyed Mil 240. On expression see Kern, Toev. s. v.

fr. piṃsati1, cp. Sk. piñjana

Piññāka

(nt.) ground sesamum, flour of oil-seeds MN i.78, MN i.342; Vin iv.341 (p. nāma tilapiṭṭhaṃ vuccati); Vv-a 142 (tila˚ seed cake); Pv-a 48.

-bhakkha feeding on flour of oil-seeds DN i.166; AN i.241, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Nd i.417; Pp 55.

to piṃsati2, cp. Class. Sk. piṇyāka

Piṭaka

1. basket Vin i.225 (ghaṭa p. ucchanga), 240 (catudoṇika p.); Pv iv.333; Vism 28 (piṭake nikkhitta-loṇa-maccha-phāla-sadisaṃ phaṇaṃ); dhañña˚ a grain-basket Dhp-a iii.370; vīhi˚; a rice basket Dhp-a iii.374. Usually in combn kuddāḷa-piṭaka “hoe and basket,” wherever the act of digging is referred to e.g. Vin iii.47; DN i.101; MN i.127; SN ii.88; SN v.53; AN i.204; AN ii.199; Ja i.225, Ja i.336; DN-a i.269.

2. (fig.) t.t for the 3 main divisions of the Pāli Canon “the three baskets (basket as container of tradition Winternitz Ind. Lit. ii.8; cp. peḷā 2) of oral tradition,” viz. Vinaya˚ Suttanta˚, Abhidhamma˚; ; thus mentioned by name at Pv-a 2; referred to as “tayo piṭakā” at Ja i.118 Vism 96 (pañca-nikāya-maṇḍale tīṇi piṭakāni parivatteti), 384 (tiṇṇaṃ Vedānaṃ uggahaṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ Piṭakānaṃ uggahaṇaṃ); Snp-a 110, Snp-a 403; Dhp-a iii.262 Dhp-a iv.38; cp. Divy 18, Divy 253, Divy 488. With ref. to the Vinaya mentioned at Vin v.3Piṭaka is a later collective appellation of the Scriptures; the first division of the Canon (based on oral tradition entirely) being into Sutta and Vinaya (i.e. the stock paragraphs learnt by heart, and the rules of the Order). Thus described at DN ii.124; cp. the expression bhikkhu suttantika vinayadhara Vin ii.75 (earlier than tepiṭaka or piṭakadhara ) Independently of this division we find the designation “Dhamma” applied to the doctrinal portions; and out of this developed the 3rd Piṭaka, the Abhidhammap. See also Dhamma C. 1 ■ The Canon as we have it comes very near in language and contents to the canon as established at the 3rd Council in the time of King Asoka. The latter was in Māgadhī ■ The knowledge of the 3 Piṭakas as an accomplishment of the bhikkhu is stated in the term tepīṭaka “one who is familiar with the 3 P.” (thus at Mil 18; Dāvs v.22; Kp-a 41 with v.l. ti˚; Snp-a 306 id.; Dhp-a iii.385). tipetakī (Vin v.3 Khemanāma t.), tipeṭaka (Mil 90), and tipiṭaka-dhara Kp-a 91. See also below ˚ttaya. In BSk. we find the term trepiṭaka in early inscriptions (1st century a.d., see e.g. Vogel, Epigraphical discoveries at Sārnāth, Epigraphia Indica viii. p. 173, 196; Bloch, J. As. Soc Bengal 1898, 274, 280); the term tripiṭaka in literary documents (e.g. Divy 54), as also tripiṭa (e.g. Avs i.334; Divy 261, Divy 505) ■ On the Piṭakas in general the origin of the P. Canon see Oldenberg, in ed. of Vin 1; and Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt. 1913, ii.1 sq. iii.606, 635 ■ Cp. peṭaka.

-ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas or holy Scriptures Snp-a 328. -dhara one who knows (either one or two or all three) the Piṭaka by heart, as eka˚, dvi˚, ti˚; at Vism 62, Vism 99. -sampadāya according to the P. tradition or on the ground of the authority of the P. MN i.520 (itihītiha etc.); ii.169 (id.); and in exegesis of itikirā (hearsay-tradition) at AN i.189 = AN ii.191 = Nd ii.151.

cp. Epic Sk. piṭaka, etym. not clear. See also P. peḷā & peḷikā

Piṭṭha1

(nt.) what is ground, grindings, crushed seeds, flour. Vin i.201, Vin i.203; Vin iv.261 Vin iv.341 (tila˚ = piññāka); Ja ii.244 (māsa˚). As piṭṭhi at Ja i.347.

-khādaniya “flour-eatables,” i.e. pastry Vin i.248 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.139). -dhītalikā a flour-doll, i.e. made of paste or a lump of flour Pv-a 16, Pv-a 19 (cp. uddāna to the 1st vagga p. 67 piṭṭhi & reading piṇḍa˚ on p. 17); -piṇḍi a lump of flour Vism 500 (in comp.). -madda flour paste Vin ii.151 (expld in C. by piṭṭha-khali; cp piṭṭhi-madda Ja iii.226, which would correspond to piṣṭī). -surā (intoxicating) extract or spirits of flour Vv-a 73.

pp. of piṃsati2. cp. Sk. piṣṭa

Piṭṭha2

(nt.) a lintel (of a door) Vin i.47 (kavāṭa˚); ii.120 (˚sanghāṭa, cp. Vin Texts iii.105), 148, 207.

identical in form with piṭṭha3

Piṭṭha3

(nt.) back, hind part; also surface, top Ja i.167 (pāsāṇa˚ top of a rock). Usually in oblique cases as adv., viz. instr. piṭṭhena along, over beside, by way of, on Ja ii.111 (udaka˚); iv.3 (samudda˚) loc. piṭṭhe by the side of, near, at: parikhā˚ at a ditch Pv-a 201; on, on top of, on the back of (animals) ammaṇassa p. Ja vi.381 (cp. piṭṭhiyaṃ); tiṇa˚ Ja iv.444 panka˚ Ja i.223; samudda˚ Ja i.202 ■ assa˚ on horseback DN i.103; similarly: vāraṇassa p. Ja i.358; sīha˚ Ja ii.244 haṭṭhi˚ Ja ii.244; Ja iii.392. See also following. Pitthi & Pitthi

cp. Vedic pṛṣṭha, expld by Grassmann as pra-stha, i.e. what stands out

Piṭṭhi & Piṭṭhī

(f.) 1. the back Vin ii.200 (piṭṭhī); MN i.354; Ja i.207; Ja ii.159, Ja ii.279. piṭṭhiṃ (paccāmittassa) passati to see the (enemy’s) back, i.e. to see the last of somebody Ja i.296, Ja i.488; Ja iv.208. piṭṭhi as opposed to ura (breast) at Vin ii.105; Snp 609; as opposed to tala (palm) with ref. to hand & foot: hattha (or pada-) tala & ˚piṭṭhi: Ja iv.188; Vism 361 ■ abl. piṭṭhito as adv (from) behind, at the back of Snp 412 (+ anubandhati to follow closely); Vv-a 256; Pv-a 78 (geha˚). piṭṭhito karoti to leave behind, to turn one’s back on Ja i.71 (cp. pṛṣṭhato-mukha Divy 333). piṭṭhito piṭṭhito right on one’s heels, very closely Vin i.47; DN i.1, DN i.226–⁠2. top, upper side (in which meaning usually piṭṭha3) only in cpd. ˚pāsāṇa and loc. piṭṭhiyaṃ as adv. on top of Ja v.297 (ammaṇa˚) piṭṭhi at Vv-a 101 is evidently faulty reading.

-ācariya teacher’s understudy, pupil-teacher, tutor Ja ii.100; Ja v.458, Ja v.473, Ja v.501. -kaṇṭaka spina dorsi, backbone MN i.58, MN i.80, MN i.89; MN iii.92; Vism 271; Vb-a 243 Kp-a 49 sq.; Sdhp 102. -koṭṭhaka an upper room (bath room?) Dhp-a ii.19, Dhp-a ii.20. -gata following behind foll. one’s example Vism 47. -paṇṇasālā a leaf-hut at the back Ja vi.545. -parikamma treating one’s back (by rubbing) Vin ii.106. -passe (loc.) at the back of behind Ja i.292; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 83, Pv-a 106. -pāda the back of the foot, lit. foot-back, i.e. the heel Vism 251; Kp-a 51 (˚aṭṭhika); DN-a i.254. -pāsāṇa a flat stone or rock plateau, ridge Ja i.278; Ja ii.352; Ja vi.279; Dhp-a ii.58 Vb-a 5, Vb-a 266. -bāha the back of the arm, i.e. elbow (cp. ˚pāda) Kp-a 49, Kp-a 50 (˚aṭṭhi): -maṃsa the flesh of the back Pv-a 210; Snp-a 287. -maṃsika backbiting, one who talks behind a person’s back Snp 244 (= ˚maṃsakhādaka C.); Ja ii.186 (of an unfair judge); v.1; Pv iii.97 (BB; T. ˚aka). As ˚maṃsiya at Ja v.10. -maṃsikȧtā backbiting Nd ii.39. -roga back-ache Snp-a 111 -vaṃsa back bone, a certain beam in a building Dhp-a i.52.

= piṭṭha3, of which it has taken over the main function as noun. On relation piṭṭha → piṭṭhi cp. Trenckner, Notes 55; Franke, Bezzenberger’s Beiträge xx.287. Cp. also the Prk. forms piṭṭha piṭṭhī & piṣṭī, all representing Sk. prṣṭḥa: Pischel; Prk. Gram. §53

Piṭṭhika

(adj.) (-˚) having a back, in dīgha˚; with a long back or ridge Snp 604; mudu˚; having a flexible back Vin iii.35.

fr. piṭṭhi

Piṭṭhikā

(f.) = piṭṭhi; loc. piṭṭhikāya at the back of, behind Ja i.456 (maṇḍala˚).

Piṭṭhimant

(adj.) having a back, in f. piṭṭhimatī (senā) (an army) having troops on (horse-or elephant-) back Ja vi.396.

fr. piṭṭhi

Piṭhara

(m. & nt.) a pot, a pan Mil 107 (spelt pīthara). As; piṭharaka [cp. BSk piṭharikā Divy 496; so read for T. piparikā] at Kp-a 54 to be read for T. pivaraka according to App. Snp-a 869.

cp. Epic Sk. piṭhara

Piṇḍa

1. a lump, ball, thick (& round mass SN i.206 (aṭṭhīyaka˚); Pv iii.55 (nonīta˚); Vv-a 62 (kummāsa˚), 65; Sdhp 529 (ayo˚).

2. a lump of food esp. of alms, alms given as food SN i.76; Snp 217, Snp 388 Snp 391; Ja i.7 (nibbuta˚ cooled); Mil 243 (para ˚ṃ ajjhupagata living on food given by others). piṇḍāya (dat. for alms, freq. in combn with carati, paṭikkamati (gāmaṃ) pavisati, e.g. Vin ii.195; Vin iii.15; MN iii.157; Snp 386; Snp-a 141, Snp-a 175; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 81, Pv-a 136 and passim.

3. a conglomeration, accumulation, compressed form, heap, in akkhara˚; sequence of letters or syllables, context Dhp-a iv.70.

-attha condensed meaning, résumé Ja i.233, Ja i.275, Ja i.306 Kp-a 124, Kp-a 192. Cp. sampiṇḍanattha. -ukkhepakaṃ in the manner of taking up lumps (of food), a forbidden way of eating Vin ii.214 = Vin iv.195, cp. Vin. Texts i.64 (= piṇḍaṃ piṇḍaṃ ukkhipitvā C.). -gaṇanā counting in a lump, summing up DN-a i.95. -cāra alms-round wandering for alms Snp 414. -cārika one who goes for alms, begging Vin ii.215; Vin iii.34, Vin iii.80; Vin iv.79; Ja i.116; Vv-a 6. -dāyika (& ˚dāvika) one who deals out food (as occupation of a certain class of soldiers) DN i.51 (˚dāvika); AN iv.107 (v.l. ˚dāyaka); Mil 331; cp DN-a i.156. See also Geiger, P.Gr. 46, 1; Rh. D. Dial. i.68 (trsl. “camp-follower”); Franke, Dīgha trsl. 531 trsl. “Vorkämpfer” but recommends trsl. “Klossverteiler” as well). -dhītalikā a doll made of a lump of dough, or of pastry Pv-a 17; cp. piṭṭha˚. -paṭipiṇḍa (kamma) giving lump after lump, alms for alms i.e. reciprocatory begging Ja ii.82 (piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṃ kappesuṃ), 307 (piṇḍapāta-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṃ kappenti); v.390 (mayaṃ piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍa-kammaṃ na karoma). -pāta food received in the alms-bowl (of the bhikkhu), alms-gathering (on term see Vism 31 yo hi koci āhāro bhikkhuno piṇḍolyena patte patitattā piṇḍapāto ti vuccati, and cp. BSk. piṇḍapāta-praviṣṭha Avs i.359; piṇḍapāta-nirhāraka Divy 239; Vin i.46; Vin ii.32 (˚ṃ nīharāpeti), 77, 198, 223; iii.80, 99 iv.66 sq., 77; MN iii.297; SN i.76, SN i.92; AN i.240; AN ii.27, AN ii.143 AN iii.109, AN iii.145 sq.; AN v.100; Snp 339; Ja i.7, Ja i.149, Ja i.212, Ja i.233 Pp 59; Vism 31, Vism 60; Vb-a 279 (˚âpacāyana); Snp-a 374; Pv-a 11 sq., 16, 38, 240. -pātika one who eats only food received in the alms-bowl; ˚anga is one of the dhutanga ordinances (see dhutanga) Vin i.253; Vin ii.32 (˚anga), 299 (+ paṃsukūlika); iii.15 (id.); MN i.30 MN iii.41; AN iii.391; Pp 59, Pp 69; Snp-a 57 (˚dhutanga) -piṇḍapātika bhikkhu a bh. on his alms-round Vism 246 (in simile); Vb-a 229 (id.). Cp. BSk. piṇḍapātika Avs i.248. -pātikatta (abstr. to prec.) the state of eating alms-food, a characteristic of the Buddhist bhikkhu MN iii.41; SN ii.202, SN ii.208 sq.; AN i.38; AN iii.109.

cp. Vedic piṇḍa; probably connected with piṣ i.e. crush, grind, make into a lump; Grassmann compares pīḍ to press; on other attempts at etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v. puls

Piṇḍaka

(alms)-food AN iv.185 (SS piṇḍapāta); in phrase na piṇḍakena kilamati not go short of food Vin iii.15, Vin iii.87; Vin iv.23, in ukka-piṇḍaka meaning a cluster of msects or vermin Vin i.211 = Vin i.239 (v.l. piṇḍuka).

fr. piṇḍa

Piṇḍi

(f.) a lump, round mass, ball, cluster DN i.74 = AN iii.25 (nahāniya˚ ball of fragrant soap; DN-a i.218: piṇḍa); MN iii.92; Ja i.76 (phala˚) ii.393; iii.53 (amba˚); Mil 107; Vism 500 (piṭṭha˚) Dhp-a iii.207 (amba˚).

cp. piṇḍa & Sk. piṇḍī

Piṇḍika

(-˚) in chatta˚-vivara is a little doubtful, the phrase prob. means “a crevice in the covering (i.e. the round mass) of the canopy or sunshade” Ja vi.376. Dutoit (J. trsln vi.457) translates “opening at the back of the sunshade,” thus evidently reading “ piṭṭhika. ”

Piṇḍita

(adj.) 1. made into a lump, massed together, conglomerated, thick Thig 395.

2. “ball-like,” close, compact; of sound: Ja ii.439; Ja vi.519.

pp. of piṇḍeti, cp. BSk. piṇḍitamūlya lump-sum Divy 500

Pindiyālopa

a morsel of food Vin i.58 (˚bhojana), 96 (id.); AN ii.27; Iti 102.

piṇḍi + ālopa

Piṇḍeti

to ball together, mix, put together Pv ii.952 (= pisana-vasena yojeti Pv-a 135). pp. piṇḍita.

Denom. fr. pinḍa

Piṇḍola

one who seeks alms SN iii.93 = Iti 89; cp. Np. ˚bhāradvāja Snp-a 346, Snp-a 514, Snp-a 570.

etym. unclear

Piṇḍolya

(nt.) asking for alms, alms-round SN iii.93 = Iti 89; Vism 31.

fr. piṇḍola

Pitar

father ■; Cases: sg. nom. pitā SN i.182; Dhp 43; Ja v.379; Snp-a 423; acc. pitaraṃ Dhp 294;; pituṃ Cp ii.93; instr. pitarā Ja iii.37, pitunā, petyā Ja v.214; dat. gen. pitu MN iii.176; Ja iv.137; Ja vi.365 Ja vi.589; & pituno Vin i.17 (cp. Prk. piuṇo); abl. pitarā Ja v.214; loc. pitari ■ pl. nom. pitaro Snp 404; Ja iv.1; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 54 (mātā˚); acc. pitaro Pv-a 17, pitare, pitū Thig 433; instr. pitarehi & pitūhi; dat. gen pitunnaṃ Ja iii.83; (mātā˚); vi.389 (id.); Pv ii.84 pitūnaṃ Iti 110; loc. pitusu Thig 499; Ja i.152 (mātā˚) and pitūsu Pv-a 3 (mātā˚). Further: abl. sg. pitito by the father’s side DN i.113 (+ mātito); AN iii.151; Ja v.214AN i.62, AN i.132, AN i.138 sq.; Snp 296, Snp 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaṃ); Nd ii.441 (= yo so janako) Ja i.412 (= tāta); v.20; Vb-a 108 (where pretty popular etym. is given with “piyāyatī ti pitā”), 154 (in simile). Of Brahmā: DN i.18, cp. DN-a i.112; of Inda Ja v.153. There is sometimes a distinction made between the father as such and the grandfather (or ancestors in gen.) with culla˚; (cūḷa˚), i.e. little and mahā˚; i.e. grand-father e.g. at Ja i.115 (+ ayyaka); Pv-a 107. The collective term for “parents” is mātāpitaro (pl. not dual), e.g. Snp 404; Ja i.152; Ja iii.83; Ja iv.1; Pv-a 107. On similes of father and son op. J.P.T.S. 1907, 112. In cpds. there are the 3 bases pitā, piti˚ & pitu˚. (a); pitā˚ ˚putta father & son Ja i.253; pl. ˚puttā fathers & sons or parents & children Ja iv.115; Ja vi.84. ˚mahā grandfather Pv ii.84; Ja ii.263; DN-a i.281; Pv-a 41; ˚mahāyuga age of a grandfather (i.e. a generation of ancestors DN i.113 (see det. expln DN-a i.281 = Snp-a 462); Snp p.115 Kp-a 141; petti-pitā-mahā great-grandfathers, all kinds of ancestors Ja ii.48 (= pitu-vitā mahā C.). (b.) piti˚: ˚kicca duty of a father Ja v.153; ˚ghāta parricide Ja iv.45 (BB pitu˚); ˚pakkha father’s side Dhp-a i.4; ˚pitāmahā (pl.) fathers & grandfathers ancestors Ja v.383; ˚vadha parricide DN-a i.135 ■ (c) pitu˚ ˚ja originating from the father Ja vi.589 (+ mātuja) ˚ghātaka parricide (+ mātughātaka) Vin i.88, Vin i.136 Vin i.168, Vin i.320; ˚nāma fathers name Snp-a 423; ˚pitāmahā (pl.) ancestors (cp. piti˚) AN iv.61; Ja i.2; Ja ii.48. ˚rakkhita guarded by a father MN iii.46. ˚santaka father’s possession Ja i.2. ˚hadaya father’s heart Ja i.61.

Vedic pitṛ, pitar-; cp. Gr. πατήρ; Lat. pater, Juppiter, Dies-piter = *Ζε*Ζευς πατήρ; Goth. fadar = Ger. vater E. father; Oir. athir etc. to onomat. syllable *pa-pa cp. tāta & mātā

Pitika

(-˚) (adj.) one who has a father, having a father Vv-a 68 (sa˚ together with the f.); Pv-a 38 (mata˚ whose f. was dead): cp. dve˚ with 2 fathers Ja v.424.

fr. pitā

Pitucchā

(f.) father’s sister, aunt; decl. similarly to pitā & mātā Dhp-a i.37 acc. sg. pitucchasaṃ [Sk. *svasaṃ instead of *svasāraṃ] Ja iv.184.

-dhītā aunt’s daughter, i.e. (girl) cousin Dhp-a i.85 -putta aunt’s son, i.e. (boy) cousin SN ii.282 (Tisso Bhagavato p.); iii.106 (id.); Ja ii.119, Ja ii.324.

pitu + svasā, cp. Sk. pitṛ-ṣvasṛ

Pitta

(nt.) 1. the bile, gall; the bile also as seat of the bilious temperament, excitement or anger. Two kinds are distinguished at Kp-a 60 Vism 260, viz. baddha˚ & abaddha˚;, bile as organ bile as fluid. See also in detail Vism 359; Vb-a 65 Vb-a 243 ■ In enumerations of the parts or affections of the body pitta is as a rule combd with semha (cp Vin ii.137; Kh 111; Vism 260, Vism 344; Mil 298) ■ Vin ii.137; MN iii.90; SN iv.230, SN iv.231 (+ semha); AN ii.87 AN iii.101, AN iii.131; Snp 198 (+ semha), 434 (id., expld as the two kinds at Snp-a 388); Nd i.370; Ja i.146 (+ semha) ii.114 (pittan te kupitaṃ your bile is upset or out of order, i.e. you are in a bad mood); Mil 112 (vāta-pittasemha… ), 304 (roga, + semha), 382 (+ semha) Dhs-a 190 (as blue-green); Dhp-a iii.15 (cittaṃ n’ atthi pittaṃ n’ atthi has no heart and no bile, i.e. does not feel & get excited; vv.ll. vitta & nimitta).

2. [according to Morris,; J.P.T.S. 1893, 4 for *phitta = phīta Sk. sphīta] swelling, a gathering Vin ii.188 (Vin. Texts iii.237 “a burst gall, i.e. bladder”); SN ii.242. The passage is not clear, in C. on Ud i.7 we read cittaṃ, see Morris loc. cit. May the meaning be “muzzle”?

-kosaka gall-bladder Kp-a 61; Vism 263; Vb-a 246.

cp. Vedic pitta

Pittika

(adj.) one who has bile or a bilious humoui, bilious Mil 298 (+ semhika).

fr. pitta

Pittivisaya

the realm of the departed spirits MN i.73; Ja i.51; Nd i.489.

Sporadic reading for the usual petti˚

Pittivisayika

(adj.) belonging to the realm of the departed Nd i.97 (gati; v.l. petti˚).

fr. pittivisaya

Pithīyatī

(pithiyyati) to be covered, obscured or obstructed to close, shut MN ii.104; MN iii.184; Snp 1034, Snp 1035; Nd ii.442 (BB pidhiyyati; expld by pacchijjati); Thag 872; Dhp 173; Ja i.279 (akkhīni pithīyiṃsu the eyes shut) ii.158 (= paticchādiyati); vi.432. The spelling of the BB manuscripts is pidhīyati (cp. Trenckner, Notes 62).

Pass. of pidahati, cp. api-dahati, Sk. apidhīyate

Pidalaka

a small stick skewer Vin ii.116, cp. Bdhgh on p. 317: “daṇḍakathina-ppamāṇena kaṭasārakassa pariyante paṭisaṃharitvā duguṇa-karaṇa.” See also Vin Texts iii.94.

etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests diminutiveformation fr. Sk. bidala split bamboo

Pidahati

to cover, to close, conceal, shut MN i.117, MN i.380 (dvāraṃ); Ja i.292; Ja iii.26; Ja v.389; Mil 139 (vajjaṃ); Dhp-a i.396; Dhp-a ii.4, Dhp-a ii.85; Dhp-a iv.197 (ūruṃ); Sdhp 321 aor. pidahi Ja iv.308 (kaṇṇe); ger. pidahitvā Pv ii.76 (dvāraṃ); Vism 182 (nāsaṃ); DN-a i.136, pidhatvā Thig 480, & pidhāya Ja i.150 (dvāraṃ), 243 (id.); Thag-a 286; Dhp-a ii.199 (dvārāni) ■ Pass. pithīyati; pp. pihita (q.v.). The opp. of p. is vivarati.

api + dhā, cp. apidahati & Prk. piṇidhattae = Sk. apinidhātave

Pidahana

(nt.) covering up, shutting, closing Vism 20; Dhp-a iv.85 (= thakana).

fr. api + dhā, cp. apidahana

Pidhara

a stick (or rag?) for scraping (or wiping?) Vin ii.141 (avalekhana˚), 221 (id.). Meaning doubtful.

fr. api + dhṛ;

Pidhāna

(nt.) cover Ja vi.349. -˚phalaka covering board Vism 261 (where Kp-a in same passage reads paṭikujjana-phalaka) = Vb-a 244.

= pidahana

Pināsa

cold in the head, catarrh, in enumn of illnesses under dukkha, at Nd ii.3041 ≈ (kāsa, sāsa pināsa, etc.).

cp. Sk. pīnasa

Pipati

to drink, only in imper. pres. pipa MN i.316; SN i.459, and ppr. pipaṃ Ja v.255, gen. pl. pipataṃ Snp 398.

dial. form for pibati, pivati, usually restricted to Gāthā Dial., cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 132

Pipāsā

(f.) 1. thirst Nd ii.443 (= udaka-pipāsā); Mil 318 Vb-a 196 (in comparison); Pv-a 23, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 67 sq.; Sdhp 288. Often combd with khudā (hunger) e.g. Snp 52 Snp 436 (khup˚); Pv-a 67; or jighacchā (id.), e.g. MN i.10; SN i.18; AN ii.143, AN ii.153; Mil 304.

2. longing (for food) hunger Ja ii.319.

3. desire, craving, longing DN iii.238 (avigata˚); SN iii.7, SN iii.108, SN iii.190; SN iv.387; AN ii.34 (pipāsavinaya; expld at Vism 293); iv.461 sq.

Desid. form. fr. , pibati → pipati, lit. desire to drink

Pipāsita

(adj.) thirsty SN i.143; SN ii.110 (surā˚); Ja vi.399; Mil 318 (kilantatasita-p.); Vism 262; Pv-a 127; Sdhp 151.

pp. of pipāsati, Desid. fr. , cp. pipāsā

Pipāsin

(adj.) thirsty DN ii.265.

fr. pipāsā

Pipi

(adj.) drinking (?) in su˚ good to drink (?) Ja vi.326 (v.l. BB sucimant). Or is it “flowing” (cp. Vedic pipiṣvat overflowing)?

fr. , see pivati

Pipīlikā

(f.) & pipillika ant Ja iii.276 (BB kipillikā); Sdhp 23; as pipillikā at Ja i.202.

cp. Vedic pipīlikā, pipīlaka & pipīlika; BSk. pipīlaka Avs ii.130 (kunta˚). See also kipillikā

Pippala

pepper Vin i.201, cp. Vin. Texts ii.46.

for the usual P. pipphalī, Sk. pippalī

Pipphala

the fruit of Ficus religiosa, the holy fig tree Ja vi.518 (Kern’s reading, Toev. s. v. for T. maddhu-vipphala C. reads madhuvipphala & expl;ns by madhuraphala).

cp. Epic Sk. pippala, on ph for p see pipphalī

Pipphalaka

(nt.?) scissors (? so ed.) DN-a i.70.

etym.? BR give Sk. *pippalaka in meaning “thread for sewing”

Pipphalī

(f.) long pepper SN v.79; Ja iii.85; Vv 436; Dhp-a i.258 (˚guhā Npl.); iv.155.

with aspirate ph for p, as in Sk. pippalī, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 62. See also pippala. Etym. loan words are Gr. πέπερι = Lat. piper = E. pepper, Ger pfeffer

Piya1

(adj.) dear, in two applications (as stated Nd i.133 = Nd ii.444, viz dve piyā: sattā vā piyā sankhārā vā piyā, with ref. to living beings, to sensations): 1. dear, beloved (as father mother, husband, etc.) SN i.210 (also compar. ˚tara) Dhp 130, Dhp 157, Dhp 220; Vism 296, Vism 314 sq.; often combd with manāpa (pleasing, also in 2), e.g. DN ii.19; DN iii.167; Ja ii.155; Ja iv.132.

2. pleasant, agreeable, liked Snp 452, Snp 863: Dhp 77, Dhp 211; often combd (contrasted) with appiya, e.g. Snp 363, Snp 450 (see also below). nt. piyaṃ a pleasant thing, pleasantry, pleasure SN i.189; Snp 450 Snp 811; Dhp-a iii.275appiya unpleasant MN i.86; Kp viii.5. appiyatā unpleasantness Ja iv.32. See also pīti & pema.;

-āpāya separation from what is dear to one, absence of the beloved AN iii.57; Dhp 211. -āppiya pleasant unpleasant DN ii.277 (origin of it); Dhp 211. -kamya friendly disposition Vin iv.12. -ggāhin grasping after pleasure Dhp 209, cp. Dhp-a iii.275. -cakkhu a loving eye DN iii.167. -dassana lovely to behold, goodlooking DN iii.167. -bhāṇin speaking pleasantly, flattering Ja v.348. -manāpatā belovedness MN i.66. -rūpa pleasant form, an enticing object of sight DN i.152 (cp. DN-a i.311); SN ii.109 sq.; AN ii.54; Iti 95, Iti 114; Snp 337, Snp 1086 (cp. Nd ii.445); Vb 103; Ne 27. -vacana term of endearment or esteem, used with ref. to āyasmā Nd ii.130; Snp-a 536, etc.; or mārisa Snp-a 536. -vācā pleasant speech SN i.189; Snp 452. -vādin speaking pleasantly, affable DN i.60 (manāpacārin + ); AN iii.37 AN iv.265 sq. -vippayoga separation from the beloved object Snp 41 (cp. Nd ii.444); Pv-a 161 (here with ref to the husband); syn. with appiya-sampayoga, e.g. at Vism 504 sq.

Vedic priya, prī, cp. Gr. προπροών; Goth. frijōn to love, frijonds loving = E. friend; Ger. frei freund; Ohg. Frīa = Sk. priyā, E. Friday, etc.

Piya2

oar; usually so in cpd. piyāritta (nt.) oar & rudder SN i.103; AN ii.201; Ja iv.164.

sporadic for phiya, q.v.

Piyaka

a plant going under various names, viz. Nauclea cadamba; Terminalia tomentosa Vitex trifolia Ja v.420 (= setapuppha C.); vi.269.

cp. Class. Sk. priyaka

Piyaṅgu

(f.) 1. panic seed, Panicum Italicum Vv 537; Ja i.39; Pv-a 283. Mixed with water and made into a kind of gruel (piyangûdaka) it is used as an emetic Ja i.419. See also kaṅgu.

2. a medicinal plant, Priyangu Ja v.420.

cp. Vedio priyangu

Piyatta

(nt.) belovedness, pleasantness AN v.164 sq.; Sdhp 66.

abstr. fr. piya1

Piyāyati

to hold dear, to like, to be fond of (acc.), to be devoted to SN i.210; Ja i.156; Ja ii.246 Ja vi.5; Vb-a 108 (in etym. of pitā, q.v.); Dhp-a iv.125; Snp-a 78; Vv-a 349; Pv-a 71 ■ pp. piyāyita. Note. A ppr. piyaṃ is found at Snp-a 169 for Snp 94 adj. piya, and is expld by pīyamāna tussamāna modamāna.

Denom. fr. piya1

Piyāyanā

(f.) love, fondness for (loc.) SN i.210.

fr. piyāyati

Piyāyita

held dear, fondled, loved, liked Snp 807; Nd i.126.

pp. of piyāyati

Piyāla

the Piyal tree, Buchanania latifolia Ja v.415 ■ (nt.) the fruit of this tree, used as food Ja iv.344; Ja v.324.

cp. Class. Sk. priyāla

Pire

at Vin iv.139 is to be separated (cara pi re get away with you), both pi and re acting as part. of exclamation The C. expln (p. 362) by “pire (voc.?) = para amāmaka” is an artificial construction.

Pilaka

a boil Snp p.124 (piḷaka, v.l. pilaka); Vism 35 (pīḷaka); Dhp-a i.319 (v.l. piḷaka). See also piḷakā.

cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā

Pilakkha

the wave-leaved fig tree, Ficus infectoria Vin iv.35; DN-a i.81. As pilakkhu [cp. Prk. pilakkhu Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 105] at SN v.96; Ja iii.24, Ja iii.398.

cp. Vedic plakṣa

Pilandha

(adj.) (-˚) adorning or adorned Mil 336, Mil 337. Cp. apiḷandha.

fr. pilandhati

Pilandhati

to adorn, put on, bedeck Mil 337; Ja v.400. Caus. II. pilandhāpeti Ja i.386. Pilandhana & Pilandhana;

see apilandhati, api + nah

Pilandhana & Piḷandhana

(nt.) putting on ornaments, embellishment, ornament, trinkets AN i.254 AN i.257; AN iii.16; Thig 74; Vv 6417 (ḷ); Ja i.386 (ḷ); v.205 Vb-a 230 (˚vikati; ḷ); Vv-a 157 (ḷ), 167 (ḷ); Pv-a (ḷ) Sdhp 243.

= apilandhana

Pilava & Plava

1. swimming, flowing, floating Ja v.408 (suplav-atthaṃ in order to swim through well = plavana C.).

2. a kind of duck [so Epic Sk.] Vv 358 (cp Vv-a 163); Ja v.420.

fr. plu, cp. Vedic plava boat, Russ. plov ship

Pilavati & Plavati

to move quickly (of water), to swim, float, sway to & fro Thag 104; Mil 377; Vv-a 163; Dhs-a 76. As plavati at Ja i.336 (verse) Dhp 334 (v.l. SS; T. palavati). As palavati at Thag 399 ■ See also uppalavati (uppluta), opilāpeti, paripalavati

cp. Vedic plavati; plu, as in Lat. pluo to rain, pluvius rain, Gr. πλέω swim, πλύνω wash; Ohg flouwen etc. to rinse = E. flow

Pilavana & Palavana

(nt.) swimming, plunging Ja v.409 (pl˚).

fr. plu

Pilāpanatā

(f.) superficiality Dhs 1349, cp. Dhs-a 405.

fr. plu, see pilavati

Pilāla

at Ja i.382 (˚piṇḍa + mattikā-piṇḍa) is doubtful. Fausböll suggests mistake for palala straw, so also Ed. Müller, P.Gr. 6.

Pilotikā

(f.) a small piece of cloth, a rag, a bandage Vin i.255, Vin i.296 (khoma˚ cp. Vin. Texts ii.156); MN i.141 (chinna-˚o-dhammo laid bare or open); SN ii.28 (id.) 219 (paṭa˚); Ja i.220; Ja ii.145; Ja iii.22 (jiṇṇa˚), 511; vi.383; Mil 282; Vism 328; Kp-a 55; Dhp-a i.221 (tela˚ rags dipped in oil); Vv-a 5; Pv-a 185 ■ As m. at Ja iv.365. The BSk. forms vary; we read chinna-pilotika at Avs i.198; Mvu iii.63; pilotikā (or ˚ka) at Mvu iii.50, Mvu iii.54. Besides we have ploti in karmaploti (pūrvikā k.) Divy 150 etc. Avs i.421.

-khaṇḍa a piece of rag Dhp-a iv.115; Thag-a 269; Pv-a 171.

cp. Class. Sk. plota (BR = prota), Suśr. i.15, 3; 16, 7 & passim

Pillaka

the young of an animal, sometimes used as term for a child Ja ii.406 (sūkara˚); Dhp-a iv.134 (as an abusive term; vv.ll. SS kipillaka; gloss K pitucūḷaka, BB cūḷakaniṭṭha); Sdhp 164, Sdhp 165 ■ As pillika at Ja i.487 (godha˚, v.l. BB godha-kippillika).

cp. Sk. *pillaka

Piḷakā

(f.) 1. a small boil, pustule, pimple Vin i.202; SN i.150; Ja v.207, Ja v.303; Nd i.370; Mil 298; DN-a i.138.

2. knob (of a sword) Ja vi.218-Cp. pilaka.

cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā

Piḷayhati

to fasten on, put on, cover, dress, adorn Ja v.393 (piḷayhatha 3rd sg imper. = pilandhatu C.).

api + nayhati, cp. Sk. pinahyate

Piḷhaka

(v.l. miḷhakā ) at SN ii.228 is to be read as mīḷhakā “cesspool” (q.v.). The C. quoted on p. 228 expls incorrectly by “kaṃsalak’ ādi gūthapāṇakā,” which would mean “a low insect breeding in excrements (thus perhaps = paṭanga?). The trsl. (K.S. ii.155) has “dung-beetle.”

Pivati & Pibati

to drink ■ pres. pivati DN i.166; DN iii.184; Ja iv.380; Ja v.106; Pv-a 55.

1st pl. pivāma Pv i.118 2nd pl. pivatha Pv-a 78 & pivātha Pv i.112; 3rd pl. med piyyare Ja iv.380 ■ imper. piva Pv-a 39, & pivatu Vin iv.109 ■ ppr. pivaṃ Snp 257; Dhp 205, & pivanto Snp-a 39 ■ fut. pivissati Ja vi.365; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 59; pissāmi Ja iii.432; pāssati Ja iv.527 ■ aor. pivi Ja i.198; apivi Mvu 6, Mvu 21; pivāsiṃ Ud 42; apāyiṃha Ja i.362 (or ˚siṃha?); apaṃsu AN i.205 ■ ger. pivitvā Ja i.419 Ja iii.491; Ja vi.518; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 23; pītvā Snp 257; Dhp 205; Ja i.297; pītvāna Ja ii.71; pitvā Pv i.118 ■ grd. pātabba Vin ii.208; peyya; see kāka.˚-inf. pātuṃ Ja ii.210; Pv i.64 ■ pp. pīta (q.v.) ■ Of forms with p for v we mention the foll.: pipati MN i.32; Dhs-a 403 (as v.l.) imper. pipa Ja i.459; ppr. pipaṃ MN i.316, MN i.317 ■ Caus pāyeti & pāyāpeti; (q.v.).

Vedic pāti & pibati, redupl. pres. to root Idg.; *poi & pī, cp. Lat. bibo (for * pibo); Gr. πϊυω to drink, πότος drink; Obulg. piti to drink, also Lat pōtus drink, pōculum beaker (= pātra, P. patta). See also pāyeti to give drink, pāna, pānīya drink, pīta having drunk

Pivana

(nt.) drinking Pv-a 251.

fr. pivati

Pivaraka

see piṭharaka.

Pisati

to grind, crush, destroy; Pass. pisīyati to perish Vv-a 335 (+ vināseti) ■ pp. pisita.

= piṃsati

Pisana

(nt.) grinding, powder see upa˚.

fr. piṃsati?

Pisāca

1. a demon goblin, sprite DN i.54 (T. pesācā, v.l. pisācā, expld at DN-a i.164 as “pisācā mahanta-mahantā sattā ti vadati”), 93; SN i.209; AN iii.69; Ud 5; Ja i.235; Ja iv.495 (yakkha p. peta); Mil 23; Vv-a 335; Pv-a 198; Sdhp 313 ■ f. pisācī Ja v.442.

2. [like pisāca-loha referring to the Paiśāca district, hailing from that tribe, cp the term malla in same meaning and origin] a sort of acrobat, as pl. pisācā “tumblers” Mil 191.

-nagara town of goblins (cp. yakkha-nagara) Vism 531. -loha [connected with the tribe of the Paiśāca’s Mhbh vii.4819; cp. Paiśācī as one of the Prākrit dialects: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 3] a kind of copper Vb-a 63 (eight varieties). Pisacaka = pisaca

cp. Sk. piśāca & Vedic piśāci; to same root as pisuna = Vedic piśuna, & Lat. piget, Ohg. fēhida enmity = Ags. faehp (“feud”), connected with root of Goth. fijan to hate; thus pisāca = fiend

Pisācaka = pisāca

, only in cpd. paṃsu˚; mud-sprite Ja iv.380, Ja iv.496; DN-a i.287; Dhp-a ii.26.

Pisācin

(adj. n.) only f. pisācinī a witch (= pisācī) Thag 1151.

fr. pisāca, lit. having a demon

Pisācillikā

(f.) a tree-goblin Vin i.152; Vin ii.115, Vin ii.134; Snp-a 357; cp. Vin. Texts i.318.

fr. pisāca

Pista

crushed, ground Vism 260 (= piṭṭha Kp-a id. p.); Vb-a 243.

pp. of pisati

Pisīyati

Pass. of pisati (q.v.).

Pisīla

(nt.) a dial. expression for pātī or patta “bowl” MN iii.235 (passage quite misunderstood by Neumann in his trslniii.414).

Sk. piśāla

Pisuṇa

(adj.) backbiting, calumnious, malicious MN iii.33, MN iii.49; Ja i.297 Pp 57; Pv-a 15, Pv-a 16. Usually combd with vācā malicious speech, slander, pisuṇavācā and pisuṇāvācā DN i.4 DN i.138; DN iii.70 sq., 171, 232, 269; MN i.362; MN iii.23; adj pisuṇāvāca & MN iii.22, MN iii.48; SN ii.167; Pp 39 ■ Cp pesuna.

Vedic piśuṇa, see etym. under pisāca

Pisodara

having a spotted belly Kp-a 107 (ed. compares pṛṣodarādi Pāṇini vi.3, 109).

pṛṣa, i.e. pṛṣant + udara, see pasata1

Pihaka

(nt.) the spleen MN iii.90; Snp 195; Ja v.49 In detail at Vism 257; Vb-a 240.

cp. Sk. plihaṇaka & plīhan (also Vedic plāśi?), Av. spərəƶan; Gr. σπλήν, σπλάγξνα entrails Lat. lien spleen

Pihana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) envying Dhs 1059; Snp-a 459 (˚sīla).

fr. piheti

Pihayati & Piheti

1. to desire, long for (with acc.) Vin ii.187; SN ii.242 (pihāyittha 2nd pl. aor.); Ja i.401; Ja iv.198 (pattheti + ); Thig 454; Vv 8445 (= piyāyati Vv-a 349).

2. to envy (with gen of person & object), covet MN i.504; SN i.202, SN i.236; Thag 62; Snp 823, Snp 947; Iti 36; Dhp 94 (= pattheti Dhp-a 177), 181 (id. iii.227), 365 (ppr. pihayaṃ = labhaṃ patthento Dhp-a iv.97); Ja i.197 (aor. mā pihayi); Mil 336 ■ pp pihayita.

cp. Vedic spṛhayati, spṛh

Pihayita

desired, envied, always combd with patthita Mil 182, Mil 351.

pp. of pihayati

Pihā

(f.) envy, desire MN i.304; Ja i.197; Vism 392 (Bhagavantaṃ disvā Buddha-bhāvāya pihaṃ anuppādetvā thita-satto nāma n’ atthi) ■ adj apiha without desire SN i.181.

fr. spṛh, cp. Sk. spṛhā

Pihāyanā

(f.) = pihanā Ne 18.

Pihālu

(adj.) covetous, only neg. ; SN i.187 = Thag 1218; Snp 852; Nd i.227.

cp. Sk. spṛhālu, fr. spṛh, but perhaps = Ved. piyāru malevolent. On y → h cp. P. paṭṭhayati for paṭṭhahati

Pihita

covered, closed, shut, obstructed (opp. vivaṭa) MN i.118; MN iii.61; SN i.40; AN ii.104; Nd i.149; Ja i.266; Mil 102 (dvāra), 161; Vism 185; DN-a i.182 (˚dvāra).

pp. of pidahati

Pīṭha

(nt.) a seat, chair, stool, bench.

4. kinds are given at Vin iv.40 = Vin iv.168, viz. masāraka bundikābaddha, kuḷirapādaka, āhaccapādaka (same categories as given under mañca) ■ Vin i.47, Vin i.180 Vin ii.114, Vin ii.149, Vin ii.225; AN iii.51 (mañca˚, Dvandva); iv.133 (ayo˚); Pts i.176; Vv 11 (see discussed in detail at Vv-a 8); Vv-a 295 (mañca˚) ■ pāda˚; footstool Ja iv.378; Vv-a 291; bhadda˚; state-chair, throne Ja iii.410.

-sappin “one who crawls by means of a chair or bench,” i.e. one who walks on a sort of crutch or support, a cripple (pīṭha here in sense of “hatthena gahana-yogga” Vv-a 8; exlpd by Bdhgh as “chinn’ iriyāpatha” Vin. Texts i.225) Ja i.76, Ja i.418; Ja v.426 (khujja + vi.4, 10; Mil 205, Mil 245, Mil 276; Vism 596 (& jaccandha, in simile); Dhp-a i.194; Dhp-a ii.69; PugA 227; Pv-a 282.

cp. Fpic Sk. pīṭha

Pīṭhaka

a chair, stool Vv-a 8, Vv-a 124. See also palāla˚.

fr. pīṭha

Pīṭhikā

(f.) a bench, stool Vin ii.149 (“cushioned chair” Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts iii.165); Ja iv.349; DN-a i.41; Vv-a 8.

fr. pīṭha

Pīṇana

(nt.) 1. gladdening, thrill, satisfaction Vism 143 = Dhs-a 115.

2. embellishment Vism 32 (= maṇḍana).

fr. prī, cp. pīti

Pīṇita

pleased, gladdened, satisfied Vv 1613 (= tuṭṭha Vv-a 84); Mil 238, Mil 249, Mil 361; usually in phrase pīṇitindriya with satisfied senses, with joyful heart MN ii.121; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 70.

pp. of pīṇeti

Pīṇeti

to gladden please, satisfy, cheer; to invigorate, make strong, often in phrase (attānaṃ) sukheti pīṇeti “makes happy and pleases” DN i.51; DN iii.130 sq.; SN i.90; SN iv.331; Pv-a 283 cp. Dhs-a 403 (sarīraṃ p.). It also occurs in def. of pīti (pīṇayatī ti pīti) at Vism 143 = Dhs-a 115 ■ pp pīṇita.

cp. Vedic prīṇāti, prī, see piya. The meaning in Pāli however has been partly confused with , pinvati (see pīna), as suggested by Bdhgh in DN-a i.157: “pīṇentī ti pīṇitaṃ thāma- bal’ ûpetaṃ karonti”

Pīta1

1. having drunk or (pred.) being drunk (as liquid) SN i.212 (madhu˚); Ja i.198; Pv-a 25 (with asita, khāyita & sāyita as fourfold food).; 2. soaked or saturated with (-˚), in kasāyarasa˚; Ja ii.98 (or = pīta2?) and visapīta (of an arrow) Ja v.36; Vism 303, Vism 381; which may however be read (on acct. of v.l. visappīta) as visappita “poison-applied” (see appita) Does MN i.281 pīta-nisita belong here (= visapīta)? 3. (nt.) drink MN i.220 sq. = AN v.347 sq.; AN v.359; Thag 503; Pv ii.710; Ne 29, Ne 80.

pp. of pivati

Pīta2

(adj.) yellow, goldencoloured Vin i.217 (virecana); DN i.76 (nīla p. lohita odāta); iii.268 (˚kasiṇa); MN i.281 (pīta-nisita, belonging here or under pīta1?), cp. 385 (below); AN iii.239 AN iv.263, AN iv.305, AN iv.349; AN v.61; Ja vi.185 (nīla p. lohita odāta mañjeṭṭhaka), 449 (˚alankāra, ˚vasana ˚uttara, cp 503); Dhs 203 (˚kasiṇa), 246, 247 (nīla p. lohitaka odāta); Vism 173 (˚kasiṇa) ■ pīta is prominent (in the sense of golden) in the description of Vimānas or other heavenly abodes. A typical example is Vv 47 (Pītavimāna v.1 & 2), where everything is characterised as pīta, viz. vattha, dhaja, alankāra, candana, uppala pāsāda, āsana, bhojana, chatta, ratha, assa, bījanī the C. expln of pīta at this passage is “suvaṇṇa”; cp Vv 361 (= parisuddha, hemamaya Vv-a 166); 784 (= suvaṇṇamaya C. 304).

-antara a yellow dress or mantle Vv 36 (= pītavaṇṇā uttarīyā C. 166). -aruṇa yellowish red Thig 479 -āvalepana “golden-daubed” MN i.385.

Epic Sk. pīta, etym. unclear

Pītaka

(adj.) yellow Vin iv.159; Thig 260; Ja ii.274; Pv iii.13 (= suvaṇṇavaṇṇa Pv-a 170); Dhs 617 (nīla p. lohitaka odāta kāḷaka mañjeṭṭhaka); Thag-a 211 -pītakā (f.) saffron, turmeric MN i.36.

fr. pīta

Pīti

(f.) emotion of joy, delight, zest exuberance. On term see Dhs. trsl. 11 and Cpd. 243 Classed under sankhārakkhandha, not vedanā˚-D i.37, 75; iii.241, 265, 288; MN i.37; SN ii.30; SN iv.236; AN iii.26, AN iii.285 sq.; AN iv.411, AN iv.450; AN v.1 sq., 135, 311 sq. 333 sq.; Snp 257, Snp 687, Snp 695, Snp 969, Snp 1143 (= Bhagavantaṃ ārabbha p. pāmujjaṃ modanā pamodanā citti-odagyaṃ etc. Nd ii.446); Nd i.3, Nd i.491; Pp 68; Dhs 9, Dhs 62, Dhs 86, Dhs 172 Dhs 584, Dhs 999; Ne 29; Vism 145 (& sukha in contrasted relation), 212, 287 (in detail); DN-a i.53 (characterised by ānanda); Dhp-a i.32; Sdhp 247, Sdhp 461. On relation to jhāna see the latter. In series pīti passaddhi samādhi upekkhā under sambojjhaṅga (with eleven means of cultivation: see Vism 132 & Vb-a 282) ■ Phrase; pītiyā sarīraṃ pharati “to pervade or thrill the body with joy” (aor. phari), at Ja i.33; Ja v.494; Dhp-a ii.118 Dhp-a iv.102; all passages refer to pīti as the fivefold pīti pañcavaṇṇā pīti, or joy of the 5 grades (see Dhs. trsl. 11, 12, and Cpd. 56), viz. khuddikā (slight sense of interest), khaṇikā (momentary joy), okkantikā (oscillating interest, flood of joy), ubbegā (ecstasy, thrilling emotion), and pharaṇā pīti (interest amounting to rapture, suffusing joy). Thus given at Dhs-a 115 Vism 143, referred to at Dhs-a 166 ■ pīti as; nirāmisa (pure) and sāmisa (material) at MN iii.85; SN iv.235.

-gamanīya pleasant or enjoyable to walk MN i.117 -pāmojja joy and gladness AN iii.181. 307 (˚pāmujja) Dhp 374; Dhp-a iv.110; Kp-a 82. -pharaṇatā state of being pervaded with joy, joyous rapture, ecstasy DN iii.277; Pts i.48; Vb 334; Ne 89. -bhakkha feeding on joy (Ep. of the Ābhassara Devas) DN i.17; DN iii.28, DN iii.84, DN iii.90; AN v.60; Dhp 200; AN i.110; Dhp-a iii.258; Sdhp 255 -mana joyful-hearted, exhilarated, glad of heart or mind MN i.37; MN iii.86; SN i.181; AN iii.21; AN v.3; Snp 766 Nd i.3; Ja iii.411; Vb 227. -rasa taste or emotion of joy Vv-a 86. -sambojjhaṅga the joy-constituent of enlightenment MN iii.86; DN iii.106, DN iii.226, DN iii.252, DN iii.282 Eleven results of such a state are enumd at Dhs-a 75 viz. the 6 anussatis, upam’ ânussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā siniddha-pug ■ sevanatā, pasādanīyasuttanta-paccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatā (cp. Vism 132 & Vb-a 282).; -sahagata followed or accompanied by joy, bringing joy Dhs 1578 (dhammā, various things or states); Vism 86 (samādhi). -sukha zest and happiness intrinsic joy (cp. Cpd. 56, 243) SN i.203; DN iii.131 DN iii.222; Dhs 160; Vism 158; Thag-a 160. According to Dhs-a 166 “rapture and bliss,” cp. Expositor 222. -somanassa joy and satisfaction Ja v.371; Snp 512; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 27, Pv-a 132.

cp. Class. Sk. prīti & Vedic prīta pp. of; prī, see pīneti & piya

Pītika

(-˚) (adj.) belonging to joy; only as sappītika & nippītika; bringing joy & devoid of joy, with without exuberance (of sukha) AN iii.26; AN iv.300, AN iv.441.

fr. pīti

Pītin

(adj.) [fr. pīta1) drinking, only at Dhp 79 in cpd. dhamma˚; drinking in the Truth, expld as dhammapāyako dhammaṃ pivanto at Dhp-a ii.126.

Pīna

(adj.) fat swollen Thig 265 (of breasts).;

cp. Epic Sk. pīna of to swell up (with fat); to which also Vedic pīvan & pīvara fat, Gr.; πιμελή & ππιμελή & πιον fat, Lat. opīmus fat, Ger. feist & fett = E. fat

Pīḷaka

a (sort of) boil Vism 35; see pilaka.

fr. pīd ?

Pīḷana

(nt.) oppression, injury, suffering (from dukkha) Vism 212 = Vism 494; also in nakkhatta˚ harm to a constellation, i.e. occultation Dhp-a i.166 sq.

fr. pīḍ, cp. pīḷā

Pīḷā

(f.) 1. pain, suffering Ja i.421; Mil 278; Vism 42.

2. oppression, damage injury Snp-a 353; DN-a i.259.

cp. Class. Sk. pīḍā fr. pīḍ

Pīlikoḷikā

(f.) eyesecretion Thig 395 (= akkhigūthaka Thag-a 259, q.v. for fuller expln; see also J.P.T.S. 1884, 88).

reading not quite sure, cp. koḷikā

Pīḷita

crushed, oppressed, molested, harassed Vin iv.261; Vism 415 (dubbhikkha˚); Dhp-a iv.70 Thag-a 271. Cp. abhi˚, pa˚.

pp. of pīḷeti

Pīḷeti

1. to press, press down Vin ii.225 (coḷakaṃ).

2. to weigh down heavily Ja i.25 (ppr. pīḷiyamāna), 138.

3. to press, clench Mil 418 (muṭṭhiṃ pīḷayati); Dhp-a iv.69 (anguliyā pīḷiyamānāya).

4. to crush, keep under, subjugate Mil 277 (janaṃ).

5. to molest Vv-a 348 (pīḷanto ppr for pīḷento?) ■ pp. pīḷita.

cp. Vedic pīḍayati, pīḍ, cp. Gr. πιέζω (*πισεδιω?) to press, oppress (lit. sit upon?)

Puṃ

as a term for Purgatory (niraya): see Bdhgh’s etym. of puggala Vism 310, as quoted under puggala.

Puṃs

Of the simplex no forms are found in Pāli proper. The base; puṃ occurs in pukusa (?), puggala (?), pungava pullinga; puṃs in napuṃsaka (cp. Prk. napuṃsaveya Pischel, Gram. § 412). The role of puṃs as contrast to itthi has in Pāli been taken over by purisa, except in itthi-pumā at the old passage DN iii.85. The strong base is in P. puman (q.v.). See also posa1.

Vedic puṃs (weak base) and pumāṃs (strong base), often opp. to strī (woman, female); cp. putra & potaka

Pukkusa

Name of a (Non-Aryan) tribe, hence designation of a low social class, the members of which are said (in the Jātakas) to earn their living by means of refuseclearing On the subject see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 206, 207 ■ Found in foll. enumerations: khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā caṇḍāla-pukkusā AN i.162 AN iii.214; Ja iii.194 (expld by C. chava-chaḍḍaka-caṇḍālā ca puppha-chaḍḍaka-pukkusā ca); iv.303; Pv ii.612 Mil 5. Further as pukkusakula as the last one of the despised clans (caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚, rathakāra˚ p.˚) at MN iii.169; SN i.94; AN ii.85; Vin iv.6 Pp 51. With nesāda at Pv-a 176 ■ Cp. MN iii.169.

non-Aryan; cp. Epic Sk. pukkuśa, pukkaśa pulkasa. The “ Paulkāsa ” are mentioned as a mixed caste at Vājasaneya Saṃhitā 30, 17 (cp. Zimmer, Altind Leben 217)

Puggala

1. an individual, as opposed to a group (sangha or parisā), person, man; in later philosophical (Abhidhamma) literature = character, soul (= attan). DN i.176; MN iii.58; SN i.93 sq.; SN iii.25; AN i.8, AN i.197; AN ii.126 sq.; Snp 544, Snp 685; Dhp 344; Pts i.180 sq.; Pts ii.1 sq., 52; Pv ii.325 (cp. Pv-a 88); ii.97; Pv-a 40, Pv-a 132 ■ pl. puggalā people Vv-a 86 (= sattā), 149 ■ para-puggala another man DN i.213; SN ii.121; SN v.265; Vism 409- purisa-puggala individual man, being, person SN ii.206 SN iv.307; AN i.173 = MN ii.217. Characterised as an individual in var. ways, e.g. as agga˚ Sdhp 92, Sdhp 558 abhabba˚ Ja i.106; ariya˚ Vin v.117; asura-parivāra AN ii.91; kodhagaru˚ AN ii.46; gūtha˚, puppha˚ madhubhāṇī˚ AN i.128; dakkhiṇeyya˚ Vv-a 5; diṭṭhisampanna AN i.26 sq.; AN iii.439 sq.; AN iv.136; nibbiriya kusīta˚ Ja iv.131 pāsāṇalekh’ ûpama˚ etc. AN i.283; valāhak’ ûpama AN ii.102 sq.; saddha, asaddha Pts i.121; Pts ii.33; sivāthik upama AN iii.268; suppameyya etc. AN i.266 sq. [a]sevitabba AN iv.365; AN v.102, AN v.247, AN v.281; hīna majjhima paṇīta SN ii.154Groups of characters: (2) AN i.76, AN i.87 (3) gilān’ ûpama etc. AN i.121 sq.; avuṭṭhika-sama padesa-vassin, sabbatth’ âbhivassin Iti 64 sq.; satthar sāvaka, sekha Iti 78; sekha asekha n’ eva-sekha-nāsekha DN iii.218; (4) DN iii.232, DN iii.233; SN i.93; Ja iv.131; (5) Ne 191; (6) rāga-carita, dosa˚, moha˚, saddhā˚, buddha˚ vitakka˚ Vism 102; (7) ubhato-bhāga-vimutta, paññāvimutta etc. DN iii.105; (8) AN iii.212; SN v.343 (19) Ne 190; (26) Ne 189, Ne 190 ■ See also paṭipuggala. 2. (in general) being, creature Mil 310 (including Petas & animals).;

-ñū knowing individuals DN iii.252, DN iii.283. -paññatti descriptions of persons, classification of individuals DN iii.105 (cp. Dial. iii.101); also Name of one of the canonical books of the Abhidhamma-piṭaka. -vemattatā difference between individuals SN ii.21; SN v.200 Snp p.102 (= ˚nānatta Snp-a 436).

cp. Class. Sk. pudgala, etym. connected with puṃs, although the fantastic expln of native Commentators refers it to puṃ “a hell” and gal; so at Vism 310: “pun ti vuccati nirayo, tasmiṃ galantī ti puggalā”

Puggalika

(adj.) belonging to a single person, individual, separate Vin i.250; Vin ii.270. The BSk paudgalika at Divy 342 is used in a sense similar to the Vin passages. Divy Index gives, not quite correctly “selfish.”

fr. puggala

Puṅkha

the feathered part of an arrow Ja ii.89. Cp. ponkha.

cp. Epic Sk. punkha, etym. puṃ (base of puṃs) + kha (of khan ), thus “man-digging”?

Puṅgava

a bull, lit “male-cow,” AN i.162; AN ii.75 sq.; Snp 690; Ja iii.81, Ja iii.111; Ja v.222, Ja v.242, Ja v.259, Ja v.433; Snp-a 323. As-˚ in meaning “best, chief” Vism 78 (muni˚) Thag-a 69 (Ap v.5) (nara˚).

puṃ + gava (see go), cp. Class. Sk. pungava in both meanings

Pucimanda

the Nimba tree, Azadirachta Indica Ja iii.34; Ja iv.205; Ja vi.269 (˚thanī, of a woman nimba-phala-saṇṭhāna-thana-yuggalā C.).

fr. picumanda

Puccaṇḍatā

(f.) state of a rotten egg MN i.357.

pūti + aṇḍa + tā, viâ *pūtyaṇḍatā

Puccha

(nt.) a tail Dhs-a 365 (dog’s tail) See puñcikata.;

cp. Vedic puccha (belonging with punar to Lat. puppis) & P. piccha

Pucchaka

(adj.) asking, questioning Dhs-a 2, Dhs-a 3 (pañha˚).

fr. pṛch

Pucchati

1. to ask, to question SN i.207, SN i.214; Vin ii.207; Snp 995; Nd i.341 etc-Pres. 1st sg. pucchāmi Snp 83, Snp 241, Snp 682, Snp 1043, Snp 1049 Nd ii.447: Pv ii.112.

1st pl. pucchāma Snp 1052 Imper. puccha Snp 460; DN-a i.155; pucchatha DN ii.154 pucchassu Snp 189, Snp 993; Pot. puccheyyāmi DN i.51 puccheyya AN i.199; Pv-a 6; ppr. pucchanto Snp 1126; aor. 1st sg. apucchissaṃ Snp 1116, pucchisaṃ Vv 3011, apucchiṃ Vv-a 127; Vv-a 2nd sg. apucchasi Snp 1050; Snp 3rd sg. apucchi Snp 1037, apucchasi Nd ii.447; pucchi Snp 981, Snp 1031; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 68 apucchatha Snp 1017; Snp 1st. pl. apucchimha Snp 1052. 3rd pl. pucchiṃsu Ja i.221; pucchisuṃ Mvu 10, Mvu 2. Fut. pucchissāmi Ja vi.364. Inf pucchituṃ Vin i.93; Snp 510; puṭṭhuṃ Snp 1096, Snp 1110 pucchitāye Ja v.137. Grd. pucchavho Snp 1030; Pass pucchiyati Dhp-a i.10 ■ Caus. II. pucchāpeti Mvu 10 Mvu 75 ■ pp. puṭṭha & pucchita; (q.v.).

2. to invite to (instr.), to offer, to present to somebody (acc.), lit. to ask with Vin ii.208, Vin ii.210 (pāniyena); iii.161 (odanena sūpena etc.); DN ii.240 ■ See also anu˚, abhi˚, sam˚.

pṛcch, cp. Vedic pṛcchati = Lat. posco, postulo, with which connected also Lat. precor = Goth. fraihnan Ohg. frāgōn; Vedic praśna = P. pañha

Pucchana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) asking, enquiring, questioning Snp 504 (ā); Pv-a 121, Pv-a 223.

fr. pṛch

Pucchā

(f.) a question Snp 1023; Snp-a 46, Snp-a 200, Snp-a 230. A system of questions (“questionnaire”) is given in the Niddesa (and Commentaries), consisting of 12 groups of three questions each. In full at Nd i.339, Nd i.340 = Nd ii.under pucchā (p. 208). The first group comprises the three adiṭṭha-jotanā pucchā, diṭṭha-saṃsandanā p., vimaticchedanā p. These three with addition of anumati p and kathetu-kamyatā p. also at DN-a i.68 = Dhs-a 55. The complete list is referred to at Snp-a 159apuccha (adj.) that which is not a question, i.e. that which should not be asked Mil 316puccha-vissajjanā question and answer Pv-a 2 ■ At Ne 18 p. occurs as quâsi synonym of icchā and patthanā.

cp. Class. Sk. pṛcchā = Ohg. forsca question

Pucchita

asked Snp 76, Snp 126, Snp 383, Snp 988, Snp 1005; Nd i.211; Kp-a 125 (˚kathā); Pv-a 2, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 51. Cp. puṭṭha.

pp. of pucchati

Pucchitar

one who asks, a questioner MN i.472; SN iii.6 sq.; Snp p.140.

n. ag. to pucchita

Pujja

(adj.) to be honoured MN iii.38 sq., 77 sq.; AN iii.78 (v.l.); Ne 52, Ne 56 (= pūjaniya C.). Compar. pujjatara MN i.13; & see; pūja.

grd. of pūj, cp. Sk. pūjya

Puñcikatā

is wrong reading at Dhs 1059 in taṇhā paraphrase (pattern 1 Nd ii.taṇhā) for mucchañcikatā. The readings of id. p. are puñcikatā Dhs 1136, Dhs 1230; Vb 351, Vb 361 (v.l. pucchañji˚); mucchañci˚; at Nd i.8 (v.l. BB mucchañji˚, SS suvañci˚); Nd ii.p. 152 (v.l. BB pucchiñci˚, SS pupañci˚); pucchañjikatā Vb-a 477. The translation of Dhs gives “agitation” as meaning The C. (Dhs-a 365) reads puñcikạtā (vv.ll. puñcaṃ vikatā; pucañcikaka; pucchakatā) and connects it with pucchaṃ cāleti (wagging of a dog’s tail, hence “agitation”); Expositor ii.470 gives “fluster.” The C. on Vb (VbhA 477) expls as “lābhan’ âlābhanaka-ṭṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā,” thus “agitation.”

Puñchati

to wipe off, clean Vin ii.208 (upāhanā), 210; AN iv.376 (rajoharaṇaṃ suciṃ p., asuciṃ p. etc.); Ja i.392 (akkhīni); Vism 63 (gabbha-malaṃ), 415 = Kp-a 120; Ja i.47 (assūni hatthehi p.); Kp-a 136 (paṃsukaṃ). The reading puñjati occurs at Ja i.318 (akkhīni); v.182 vi.514, also as v.l. at AN iv.376 (v.l. also muñcati: cp puñcikatā) ■ Caus. II. puñchāpeti Vism 63. Cp pari˚.

cp. Sk. *proñchati, but BSk. poñcchate (v.l. puñchati & pocchate) Divy 491: upânahān mūlāc ca p.

Puñchana

(adj. nt.) wiping Vin i.297 (mukha˚colaka); ii.208 (upāhana˚-colaka), 210. Cp. puñchanī.

fr. proñch

Puñchanī

(f.) a cloth for wiping, a towel Vin ii.122; Thag 560 (pāda˚ napkin for the feet). See Vin. Texts iii.114.

see puñchana

Puñja

(usually -˚) a heap, pile, mass, multitude Vin ii.211; Ja i.146 (sabba-rogānaṃ). As-in foll. cpds.: aṭṭhi˚; Iti 17 (+ aṭṭhikandala); kaṭṭha˚ AN iii.408; AN iv.72; Ja ii.327; gūtha˚; Ja ii.211; tiṇa˚; AN iii.408; palāla˚; DN i.71; MN iii.3; AN i.241; AN ii.210 maṃsa˚; DN i.52; vālika˚; Ja vi.560; saṅkhāra˚; SN i.135.

-kata (& ˚kita) for; puñjikata; cf. Sk. puñjīkṛta with i for a in compn with kṛ & bhū heaped up, heaped together Vin ii.208 (puñjakita); MN i.58, MN i.89 (id. but id p. MN iii.92 puñjakajāta); AN iii.324 (puñjakata; v.l. puñjakita & puñjanika); Ja ii.408 (puñjakata, v.l. pancalikata); vi.111 (id., v.l. puñca˚).

cp. Epic Sk. puñja

Puñjaka

= puñja MN iii.92 (˚jātāni aṭṭhikāni, where MN i.89 at id. p. reads puñjakitāni); Mil 342 (palāla˚).

Puñjati

is a variant of puñchati (q.v.).

Puñña

(nt.) merit meritorious action, virtue. Always represented as foundation and condition of heavenly rebirth & a future blissful state, the enjoyment (& duration) of which depends on the amount of merit accumulated in a former existence. With ref. to this life there are esp. 3 qualities contributing to merit, viz., dāna, sīla & bhāvanā or liberality, good conduct & contemplation These are the puñña-kiriya-vatthūni (see below) Another set of; ten consists of these 3 and apaciti, veyyāvacca patti-anuppadāna, abbhanumodanā, desanā savana, diṭṭh’ ujjuka-kamma. The opp. of puñña is either apuñña (D iii.119; SN i.114; SN ii.82; AN i.154; AN iii.412 Sdhp 54, Sdhp 75) or pāpa (Snp 520; Dhp 39; Ne 96; Pv-a 5) The true Arahant is above both (Pv ii.615). See on term also Kvu trsl. 201 ■ (a) Passages (selected): DN iii.58, DN iii.120; MN i.404; MN ii.191, MN ii.199; SN i.72; SN ii.82 SN iv.190; SN iv.190; SN v.53; AN i.151, AN i.155 sq.; AN iii.412; Snp 427 sq., 547, 569, 790; Dhp 18, Dhp 116 sq., 196, 220, 267, 331 412; Nd i.90; Pv 1.2; i.512; Pp 55; Vism 541 (puññānaṃ paccayo duvidhā); Dhp-a iv.34; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 8 Pv-a 30 Pv-a 69 sq.; Sdhp 4, Sdhp 19 sq ■ (b) Var. phrases & characterisations:; Merit is represented as great (uḷāra DN-a i.110; Pv-a 5; anappaka Pv i.512) or little (paritta DN-a i.110; appa SN ii.229); as adj. (-˚) mahā˚ SN i.191 opp. appa˚ MN ii.5. puñña is defined at Nd i.90 as follows: “puññaṃ vuccati yaṃ kiñci tedhātukaṃ kusal’ âbhisankhāraṃ; apuññaṃ vuccati sabbaṃ akusalaṃ ” It is defined as “dāna-sīl’-ādi-pabheda” “sucaritaṃ kusala-kammaṃ” at Vv-a 19; considered as leading to future happiness: Vv 13; Pv-a 58; consisting mainly in dāna (dānamayaṃ p.) Pv-a 8, Pv-a 51, Pv-a 60 Pv-a 66, Pv-a 73, but also in vandana Pv-a 1. To do good puññaṃ (puññāni) karoti DN i.137; SN iv.331; AN v.177; Pv i.119; or pasavati SN i.182, SN i.213; AN i.89; AN ii.3 sq. AN iii.244; AN v.249, AN v.282; Pv-a 121, cp. puññaṃ pasutaṃ Pv i.512; Vv-a 289. Other phrases: ˚ṃ ākankhati SN i.18, SN i.20; pavaḍḍhati SN i.33; corehi duharaṃ SN i.36 puññānaṃ vipāko AN iv.89; āgamo SN iii.209 SN iv.349 opadhikaṃ SN i.233; Iti 78; purāṇaṃ & navaṃ SN i.92 sayaṃ katāni puññāni SN i.37; puññassa dhārā SN i.100 SN v.400.

-atthika desirous of merit Snp 487 sq. -ānubhāva the majesty of merit Pv-a 58. -ābhisaṅkhāra accumulation of merit DN iii.217; SN ii.82; Nd i.90, Nd i.206, Nd i.442 Vism 557 sq., 571; Vb-a 142 sq., 166, 184. -ābhisanda (+ kusalâbhisanda) meritorious results AN ii.54 sq. AN iii.51, AN iii.337; AN iv.245. -assaya seat of merit DN-a i.67 -iddhi the magic power of m. Pv-a 117. -kata one who has done a deed of m. AN ii.32. -kamma good works righteousness, merit SN i.97, SN i.143; DN-a i.10; Vv-a 32; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 87; Sdhp 32. -kāma (adj.) desirous of doing good works SN v.462. -kiriyā a good or meritorious action SN i.87 (˚kriyā), 101; Pv-a 54; usually as ˚kiriyavatthu item of m. action (of which 3 are usually enumd see above) DN iii.218; AN iv.241; Iti 51; Ne 50, Ne 128 -kkhandha mass of merit (only as mahā˚) SN v.400; AN iii.337. -kkhaya decay (or waning of the effect) of merit DN i.18 (cp. āyukkhaya & DN-a i.110). -kkhetta field of m., Ep. of the Sangha or any holy personalities doing good (lit. planting seeds of merit) to whom is a source of future compensation to the benefactor Usually with adj. anuttara unsurpassed field of m. (see also sangha) DN iii.5, DN iii.227; MN i.446; MN iii.80; SN i.167, SN i.220 SN v.343, SN v.363, SN v.382; AN i.244; AN ii.34 sq., 56, 113; iii.158, 248 279 sq., 387; iv.10 sq., 292; Iti 88; Snp 486; Vv 5031 (cp. Vv-a 216); Pv iv.133 (of a bhikkhu); Vism 220; Vv-a 286; Pv-a 1 (ariyasangha), 5 (Moggallāna), 6 (arahanto), 132, 140, 214 and passim. Cp. BSk puṇyakṣetra Divy 63, Divy 395 (+ udāra). -paṭipadā the meritorious path, path of m. AN i.168; Ne 96. -pasavana creation of m. Pv-a 31. -pekkha looking for merit (i.e. reward), intent upon m. SN i.167; Snp 463 sq. 487 sq.; Dhp 108 (cp. Dhp-a ii.234). -phala the fruit (or result) of m. action SN i.217; Pp 51; Dhp-a ii.4; Pv-a 8 Pv-a 50, Pv-a 52. -bala the power of m. Pv-a 195. -bhāga taking part in meritorious action SN i.154. -bhāgiya having share in m. MN iii.72 sq.; Ne 48. -maya = puñña Ja iv.232 (˚iddhi); cp. BSk. puñyamaya Avs i.183.

cp. (late) Vedic puṇya favourable, good; etym. not clear, it may be dialectical. The word is expld by Dhammapāla as “santānaṃ punāti visodheti, i.e. cleaning the continuation (of life) Vv-a 19, thus taken to pu. The expln is of course fanciful

Puññavant

(adj.) possessing merit, meritorious, virtuous Pts ii.213; Vism 382; Dhp-a i.340; Pv-a 75.

fr. puñña

Puṭa

orig. meaning “tube,” container, hollow pocket.

1. a container, usually made of leaves (cp Ja iv.436; Ja v.441; Ja vi.236), to carry fruit or other viands a pocket, basket: ucchu˚; basket for sugar Ja iv.363 paṇṇa˚; leaf-basket Pv-a 168; phala˚; fruit basket Ja iv.436 = Ja vi.236; phānita(ssa)˚; basket of molasses sugar-basket SN i.175 (KS.: jar); Ja iv.366; Dhp-a iv.232 mālā˚; basket for garlands or flowers Dhp-a iii.212 (baddha made, lit. bound). In puṭa-baddha-kummāsa Vv-a 308 perhaps meaning “cup.”

2. a bag or sack, usually referring to food carried for a journey, thus “knapsack” (or directly “provisions,” taking the container for what it contains DN-a i.288 puts puṭaṃsa pātheyya), in bhatta˚; bag with provisions Ja ii.82 (with bandhati), 203; iii.200; DN-a i.270. Also at Ja iv.375 “bag” (tamba-kipillaka˚). See below ˚aṃsa ˚bhatta.

3. a tube, hollow, in; nāsā˚; (nāsa˚) nostril Ja vi.74; Vism 195, Vism 263, Vism 362; Kp-a 65; hattha˚; the hollow of the hand Mil 87; vatthi˚; bladder(-bag Vism 264; sippi- puṭa oyster shell Ja v.197, Ja v.206. puṭaṃ karoti to form a hollow Vb-a 34.

4. box, container see ˚bheda & ˚bhedana, in pāṭali-puṭa seed box for the P. flower.;

-aṃsa “bag-shoulder” (for “shoulder-bag,” cp aṃsapuṭa (assapuṭa) & Ger. rucksack = knapsack Rightly expl;d by Bdhgh at DN-a i.288), a bag carrying provisions on journeys, hence “provision,” in phrase puṭaṃsena with provisions (v.l. at all places puṭosena DN i.117; MN iii.80; AN ii.183; cp. Dialogues i.150; see also mutoḷī ■ pāka something cooked in a bag (like a meal-pudding) Vism 500. -baddha kind of moccasins Vin i.186, see Vin. Texts ii.15. Spelt puṭa-bandha at Vism 251 = Vb-a 234. -bhatta “bag-food,” viaticum provisions for journey Ja ii.423; Kp-a 46. -bheda the breaking of the container (i.e. seed boxes of the Sirīsa plant) Vv-a 344 (in vatthu where Sirīsa refers to Pāṭaliputta cp. Vv 8452, 53). -bhedana breaking of the (seed-) boxes of the Pāṭali plant, referring primarily to the Name of Pāṭali-putta, where putta represents a secondary Pālisation of Sk. ˚putra which again represents P (or Non-Aryan) puṭa (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 238 292). Through popular etym. a wrong conception of the expression arose, which took puṭa in the sense of “wares, provisions, merchandise” (perhaps influenced by puṭaṃsa) and, based on C. on Ud 88 (bhaṇḍakānaṃ mocara-ṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti) gave rise to the (wrong trslnDial. ii.92 “a centre for interchange of all kinds of wares.” See also Mil trsln i.2; Buddh. Suttas xvi ■ Vin i.229 = DN ii.87 = Ud 88. After the example of Pāṭaliputta applied to the city of Sāgala at Mil 1 (nānā-puṭa-bhedanaṃ S˚ nagaraṃ). Here clearly meant for “merchandise.”-Rh. D. in a note on puṭabhedana gives expln “a town at the confluence or bend of a river” (cp. Jaina Sūtras 2, 451).

etym. unknown, prob. dialectical, as shown by Name of Pāṭaliputta, where putta = puṭa since unfamiliar in origin

Puṭaka

(nt.) a bag, pocket, knapsack or basket Ja ii.83 (˚bhatta = provisions); DN-a i.263; Dhp-a ii.82 (v.l. piṭaka & kutaka); iv.132 (pockets of a serpent’s hood). Cp. bhatta.

fr. puṭa

Puṭṭha1

nourished, fed, strengthened, brought up Snp 831; Ja iii.467.

pp. of puṣ (see poseti), Vedic puṣṭa

Puṭṭha2

asked SN ii.36; Snp 84, Snp 122, Snp 510 sq., 1036; Dhp-a iv.132; Pv-a 10 (after acc.) 68, 72 with samāno AN i.197. See also pucchita.

pp. of pucchati, Vedic pṛsṭa

Puṭṭha3

see phuṭṭha.

= Sk. spṛṣṭa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 311

Puṭṭhatta

(nt.) the fact of being fed or brought up by Ja ii.405 (vaḍḍhakinā ˚ā).

abstr. fr. puṭṭha1

Puṭṭhavant

one who has touched or come in direct contact with Thag-a 284.

fr. puṭṭha3, cp. same form in Prk. AMg. puṭṭhavaṃ = Sk. spṛṣṭavān: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 569

Puṇḍarīka

(nt.) the white lotus DN i.75 = AN iii.26 (in sequence uppala padụma, p.); DN ii.4 (Sikhī puṇḍarīkassa mūle abhisambuddho); MN iii.93; SN i.138, SN i.204 = Ja iii.309; AN i.145 (uppala paduma p.); ii.86 sq. (samaṇa˚ adj.); Snp 547; Ja v.45, Ja v.215 (˚ttac’ angī = ratta-paduma-patta-vaṇṇasarīrā); Vv 4412 (= seta-kamala Vv-a 191); Pv ii.122iii.33 (pokkharaṇī bahu ˚ā); Pp 63; DN-a i.219, DN-a i.284 (sankho elo uppalo puṇḍarīko ti cattāro nidhayo). N of a hell SN i.152; Snp p.126 (here in sq. Uppalaka, Puṇḍ˚ Paduma).

Non-Aryan (?). Cp. Vedic puṇḍarīka

Puṇḍarīkinī

(f.) a pool or pond of white lotuses DN i.75≈(M iii.93; SN i.138).

adj. pundarīkin, of puṇḍarīka

Puṇṇa

full seldom by itself (only passage so far pannarase puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā DN i.47 = Snp p.139). nor-(only Snp 835 muttakarīsa˚), usually in cpds., and there mostly restricted to phrases relating to the full moon.

-ghaṭa a full pitcher (for feeding the bhikkhus, as offering on festive days, cp. J.P.T.S. 1884) Dhp-a i.147 Kp-a 118 (v.l. suvaṇṇaghaṭa); DN-a i.140 (˚paṭimaṇḍita ghara). -canda the full moon Ja i.149, Ja i.267; Ja v.215 -patta a full bowl (as gift, ˚ṃ deti to give an ample gift Ja iii.535. -baddha at Mil 191 should be read as ˚bhadda. -bala at DN-a i.110 read puñña-bala. -bhadda worshipper of Puṇṇabhadda, perhaps a Yakkha (father of the Yakkha Harikesa) Nd i.92 (Vāsuvadeva, Baladeva P. and Maṇibhadda, cp. p. 89); Mil 191 (pisācā maṇibhaddā p.). -mā the full moon (night) DN i.47 (komudiyā cātumāsiniyā puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā cp. DN-a i.140); Snp p.139 (similar); MN iii.21; Ja v.215 (dve p-māyo); Vism 292 (puṇṇa-m-uposatha = puṇṇa-māuposatha), 418 (Phagguṇa-puṇṇama-divase); Vv-a 66 (āsāḷhi p.); Pv-a 137 (id.); DN-a i.140; Dhp-a iii.461 (komudi). -māsa = ˚mā only in loc. puṇṇamāse Vv 811 (= puṇṇa-māsiyaṃ sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṃ Vv-a 314; the similar pass. at Vv-a 321 reads, prob. by mistake, sukka-pakkha-pāṭiyaṃ: see pāṭī); Ja v.215 (= puṇṇa candāya rattiyā C.). -māsī (f.; fr. ˚māsa) mā Ja i.86 (Phagguṇi p.); Vv-a 314; cp. BSk. pūrṇamāsī Avs i.182.

pp. of pṛ; Vedic pṛṇāti, Pass. pūryate, *pelē to fill; cp. Sk. prāṇa & pūrṇa = Av. pərəna; Lith. pílnas Lat. plēnus; Goth fulls = E. full = Ger voll

Puṇṇatā

(f.) fulness DN-a i.140 (māsa˚ full-moon).

abstr. to puṇṇa

Puṇṇatta

(nt.) fulness Snp-a 502.

abstr. ro puṇṇa

Putolī

see muṭolī.

Putta

1. a son SN i.210; Snp 35, Snp 38, Snp 60, Snp 557, Snp 858; Dhp 62, Dhp 84 Dhp 228, Dhp 345; Ja iv.309; Vism 645 (simile of 3 sons); Pv-a 25, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 73 sq.; DN-a i.157 (dāsaka˚). Four kinds of sons are distinguished in the old Cy. viz. atraja p., khettaja dinnaka, antevāsika, or born of oneself, born on one’s land, given to one, i.e. adopted, one living with one as a pupil. Thus at Nd i.247; Nd ii.448; Ja i.135. Good and bad sons in regard to lineage are represented at Ja vi.380 ■ Metaph. “sons of the Buddha” SN i.192 Thag 1237 (sabbe Bhagavato puttā); Iti 101 (me tumhe puttā orasā mukhato jātā dhammajā), Ja iii.211-The parable of a woman eating her sons is given as a punishment in the Peta condition at Pv i.6 (& 7).; pl. puttāni Pv i.63 ■ aputta-bhāvaṃ karoti to disinherit formally Ja v.468.

2. (in general) child, descendant sometimes pleonastic like E. ˚man, ˚son in names see putta-dāra; so esp. in later literature, like ludda hunter’s son = hunter Ja ii.154; ayya˚ = ayya, i.e. gentleman, lord Ja v.94; Pv-a 66. See also rāja˚ ■ Of a girl Thig 464 ■ mātucchā˚ & mātula˚ cousin (from mother’s side), pitucchā˚ id (fr. father’s side). On putta in N. Pāṭali˚ see puṭa ■ f. puttī see rāja˚.;

-jīva Name of a tree: Putranjiva Roxburghii Ja vi.530 -dāra child & wife (i.e. wife & children, family) DN iii.66 DN iii.189, DN iii.192; SN i.92; AN ii.67; Pv iv.348 (sa˚ together with his family); Ja iii.467 (kiṃ ˚ena what shall I do with a family?); v.478. They are hindrances to the development of spiritual life: see Nd ii.under āsiṃsanti & palibodha; -phala a son as fruit (of the womb) Ja v.330 -maṃsa the flesh of one’s children (sons) a metaphor probably distorted fr. pūta˚; rotten flesh. The metaphor is often alluded to in the kasiṇa-kammaṭṭhāna, and usually coupled with the akkha-bbhañjana (& vaṇapaticchādana)-simile, e.g. Vism 32, Vism 45; Dhp-a i.375; Snp-a 58, Snp-a 342. Besides at SN ii.98 (in full); Thag 445 (˚ūpamā); 2, 221. -mata a woman whose sons (children are dead MN i.524.

Vedic putra, Idg. *putlo = Lat. pullus (*putslos) young of an animal, fr. pōu, cp. Gr. παυς, παίς child Lat. puer, pubes, Av. pupra, Lith. putýtis (young animal or bird), Cymr. wyr grandchild; also Sk. pota(ka young animal and base pu-in pumaṃs, puṃs “man”.

Puttaka

1. a little son SN i.209, SN i.210.

2. a little child Thig 462 (of a girl).

3. a young bird (= potaka Ja ii.154.

fr. putta

Puttatta

(nt.) sonship Dhp-a i.89.

fr. putta

Puttavant

(adj.) having sons SN iv.249. Trenckner, Notes 6216 gives a f. *puttapatī for puttavatī, but without ref.

fr. putta

Puttimant

(adj.) having sons SN i.6; Snp 33.

fr. *puttamant

Puttiya

(-˚) in Sakya˚; is compound Sakyaputta + iya “belonging to the son of the Sakyas” (i.e. to the Sakya prince) Pv-a 43 ■ asakyaputtiya dhamma Vin ii.297. Puthavi & Puthuvi

Puthavī & Puthuvī

(f.) the earth; as puthavi at SN i.186; Ja i.14 (v.l. puthuvi); iv.233, in cpds.; ˚nābhi the navel of the earth (of the bodhimaṇḍa the Buddha’s seat under the holy fig tree Ja iv.232; ˚maṇḍala the round of the earth Snp 990-As puthuvī at AN ii.21, and in cpd. puthuvi-agga Snp-a 353.

doublets of paṭhavī

Puthu

(adj.) 1. (= pṛthak) separated, individual adv. separated, individual, adv. separately, each (also given as puthag eva Kacc. 29) SN i.75 (puthu attā individual self); Thag 86; Ja iv.346 (= visuṃ visuṃ C.) Mil 4. See further under cpds.

2. (= pṛthu) The forms (pl.) are both puthu & puthū, both as adj & n.; puthū more freq. found in metre ■ numerous various, several, more, many, most DN i.185 (puthu saññaggā; opp. ekaṃ); SN i.181 (puthū), 207 (id.); Snp 769 (puthū kāme = bahū Nd i.11); 1043, 1044 (puthū bahukā Nd ii.449b); Thig 344 (puthu = puthu sattā Thag-a 241); Ja vi.205 (puthū). nt. adv. puthu & puthuṃ greatly, much, in many ways Snp 580 (= aneka-ppakāraṃ Snp-a 460); Vv 624 (= mahantaṃ Vv-a 258).

-gumba experienced in many crafts Ja vi.448 (= aneka-sippa-ññu C.). -jja (puthu 1, but see remarks on puthujjana) common, ordinary Snp 897, Snp 911 (= puthujjanehi janita Nd i.308). -titthakara a common sectarian DN i.116 (thus to puthu 1, but DN-a i.287 bahū t.) -ddisā (puthu 1) each separate quarter “all the diverse quarters” SN i.234. -pañña (adj.) of wide wisdom (p. 2) AN i.130; AN ii.67 (v.l. hāsa˚). -paññatā wide wisdom AN i.45. -pāṇiya ordinary (p. 1) mode of shampooing with the hand Vin ii.106 (Bdhgh on p. 316 explns pudhu-pāṇikan ti hattha parikammaṃ vuccati “manual performance,” thus not identical with pāṇikā on p. 151). -bhūta (p. 2) widely spread SN ii.107; but cp. BSk pṛṭhag bhavati to be peculiar to Divy 58, Divy 100 -mati wide understanding SN i.236. -loma “flat fin, N of a fish “the finny carp” (Mrs. Rh. D.) Vv 4411 (= dibba-maccha Vv-a 191); Thig 508 (= so-called fish Thag-a 292); Ja iv.466. -vacana “speaking in many (bad) ways,” or “people of various speech” (so expld Nd i.397) Snp 932 (prob. better “speaking ordinary talk” = puthu 1). -sattā (pl.) = puthujjanā, common people, the masses SN i.44; Pv iii.73.

both Vedic pṛthak & pṛthu, lit. spread out, far & wide, flat, of Idg. *plēt broad, Sk.; prath to expand pṛthaḥ palm of hand Av. frapah breadth, cp. Gr. πλατύς broad, πλάτανος plane tree, Lith. platùs broad Lat. planta sole of foot, Ohg. flado pancake, Ags. flet ground, E. flat

Puthuka

rice in the ear Dhp-a i.98 (˚agga as first gift of the field).

fr. puthu, cp. (late) Vedic pṛthuka “flat corn,” also “young of an animal,” with which cp. perhaps Gr. παρχένος: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under virgo

Puthujjana

an ordinary, average person (4 classes of ordinary people are discussed at Cpd. 49, 50) a common worldling, a man of the people, an ordinary man MN i.1, MN i.7, MN i.135, MN i.239, MN i.323; MN iii.64, MN iii.227; SN i.148; SN ii.94 sq (assutạvā), 151 (id.); iii.46, 108, 162; iv.157, 196, 201 (assutavā), 206 sq.; v.362 (opp. to sotāpanna); AN i.27 AN i.147 (maraṇa-dhammin), 178, 267; ii.129, 163; iii.54 iv.68, 97, 157, 372; Snp 351, Snp 455, Snp 706, Snp 816, Snp 859; Dhp 59 Dhp 272; Vv 826 (= anariya Vv-a 321, + anavabodha) Nd i.146, Nd i.248; Pts i.61 sq., 143, 156; ii.27; Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs-a 248 sq.); Vism 311 (= anariya); Vb-a 133 (avijj’ âbhikhūta, bhava-taṇh’ âbhibhūta), 186 (ummat taka, opposed to upabrūhita-ñāṇa-purisa, exemplifying upādāna and kamma); Dhp-a i.5 (opp. ariyasāvaka), 445 Sdhp 363.

-kalyāṇaka (cp. BSk. pṛthagjana-kalyāṇaka Divy 419, Divy 429) an ordinary man striving after his spiritual good Nd i.477; Pts i.176; Pts ii.190, Pts ii.193. -bhikkhu a bh of the common sort DN-a i.269; Vb-a 383. -sukha ordinary happiness MN i.454.

*prthag-jana, thus puthu 1 + jana, but from the point of Pali identical in form and meaning with puthu 2, as shown by use of puthu in similar cpds. and by C. explns. One may even say that puthu 1 = pṛthak is not felt at all in the P. word. Trenckner (Notes 76 already hinted at this by saying “puthujjana, partly confounded with puthu”; a connection which also underlies its expln as “one-of-the-many-folk” at Kvu trsln 807 & 291;3. It is felt to belong to puthu 2 in the same sense as Ger. “die breite Masse,” or Gr. οἱ πολλοί. The expln at Nd i.308 = Nd i.328 is puthu-nānā-janā. A long and detailed etym ■ speculation expln of the term is found at DN-a i.59, trsld at Dhs trsln 258. The BSk. form is pṛthagjana Divy 133 etc.

Puthujjanatā

(f.) common-place character SN i.187 = Thag 1217.

abstr. fr. puthujjana

Puthujjanika

(adj.) common, ordinary Ja i.360 (of iddhi).

fr. puthujjana

Puthutta (Puthatta)

(nt.) being at variance, diversity SN ii.77 (opp ekatta; v.l. SS puthatta). At AN iv.97 we have to read puth’ attānaṃ for puthuttānaṃ which has nothing to do with puthutta, but is puthu + attānaṃ as borne out by v.l. puthujj’ attānaṃ, and by AA: puthu nānākāraṇehi attānaṃ hanti.

fr. puthu, cp. Sk. *pṛthutva; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. pṛthaktva, speciality peculiarity

Puthula

(adj.) broad, large, flat Ja iii.16 (˚sīsa flat-headed); vi.171 (˚antaraṃsa flat-chested); Mil 121 (of a river); Vv-a 301 (˚gambhīra) ■ abl. puthulato (as adv.) across Dhp-a i.396.

fr. puthu

Puthuso

(adv.) broadly, i.e. diversely, at variance Snp 891, Snp 892 (= puthu-diṭṭhi-gata Nd i.301).

abl. of puthu

Pudava (poddava?)

see gāma˚; (Vin ii.105 with Bdhgh note on p. 315).

Puna

(indecl.) again. There are several forms of this adv., but puna has to be considered as the orig. Pali form. The form puno is doubtful; if authentic, a Sanskritisation; only found at Thag-a 71 (Ap. v. 38; v.l. puna) & 72 (Ap. v. 41, v.l. puna). The sandhi; r is preserved only in metre and in compn.. That it is out of fashion even in metre is shown by a form punā where ā is the regular metrical lengthening instead of ar (J iii.437: na hi dāni punā atthi; v.l. puna). Besides this the r is apparent in the doubling of the first consonants of cpds. (punappunaṃ, punabbhava); it is quite lost in the enclitic form pana ■ We find r in punar āgami Snp 339; punar āgato Ja i.403 (= puna āgato Ja i.403 (= puna āgato, ra-kāro sandhivasena vutto C.); in cpds.: punar- abhiseka see J.P.T.S. 1885 49; a-punar -āvattitā the fact of not turning back Mil 276 (cp. Prk. apuṇar-avatti Pischel, § 343). Otherwise r stands on the same level as other sandhi (euphonic) consonants (like m. & d., see below), as in; puna-r-eva Dhp 338; Pv ii.87; ii.116. We have m in puna-m-upāgamuṃ Snp 306; puna by itself is rarely found, it is usually combd with other emphatic part like eva and api. The meaning is “again,” but in enclitic function (puna still found Snp 677, Snp 876, otherwise pana ); it represents “however, but, now” (cp same relation in Ger. abermals: aber), similar to the development in Prk. puṇo vi & puṇar avi “again” puna “now” (Pischel Gr. § 342) ■ puna by itself at Snp-a 597; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 45; Mvu 14, Mvu 12. doubled as punappunaṃ SN i.174; Thag 531, Thag 532; Snp 728, Snp 1051; Dhp 117 Dhp 118, Dhp 325, Dhp 337; Ja v.208; Snp-a 107; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 47; punappuna at Dhp-a ii.75; as puna-d-eva at DN i.60, DN i.142; Pv ii.113 (v.l.); Vism 163; Dhp-a ii.76; puna-m-eva Pv ii.113; puna pi once more Ja i.279; Pv-a 67, Pv-a 74 puna-p-pi Ja v.208. The phrase puna c’ aparaṃ “and again something else” stands on the same level as the phrase aparo pi (apare pi), with which one may compare the parallel expressions puna-divase: aparadivase all of which show the close relation between pi puna, apara, but we never find para in these connections Trenckner’s (& following him Oldenberg in Vin and Hardy in A etc.) way of writing; puna ca paraṃ (e.g. Mil 201, Mil 388, Mil 418 etc.) is to be corrected to puna c’ aparaṃ, cp. punâpara Snp 1004; Cp iii.61.

-āgamana coming again, return SN i.22 (a˚). -āvāsa rebirth SN i.200. -divase on the following day Ja i.278; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 38. -nivattati to turn back again SN i.177 -bbhava renewed existence, new birth DN ii.15; SN i.133; Iti 62; SN iv.201 (āyati˚); Snp 162, Snp 273, Snp 502, Snp 514, Snp 733 Nd ii.s. v.; Ne 28, Ne 79 sq.; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 200; cp. ponobhavika; ; no more rebirth SN i.174, SN i.208; Nd ii.64; ˚ābhinibbatti birth in a new existence MN i.294; SN ii.65; AN i.223; Vin iii.3; Pv-a 35. -vacana repetition Snp-a 487. -vāre (loc.) another time Ja v.21.

cp. Vedic punar, punaḥ, to base *pŭ (related to *apo: see apa), as in puccha tail, Lat puppis, poop, Gr. πύματος the last; orig. meaning “behind”

Punāti

1. to clean, cleanse Vv-a 19 (+ visodheti, in def. of puñña).

2. to sift Ja vi.108 (angāraṃ p. = attano sīse angāre p. okirati C. so read with v.l. for phunati T.); DN-a i.268 (bhusaṃ pumanto viya like sifting the chaff, winnowing). Cp puneti.

cp. Vedic pavate, punāti, to cleanse, as in Lat. purus clean, purgo, Ohg. fowen to sift also Gr. πϋρ (cp. P. pāvaka) = Ohg. fūir = E. fire, Armen. hur, lit “cleansing,” see also puñña

Puneti

to experience (over & over) again: in this meaning at Iti 1 sq. & Nd;1 202 Nd ii.337 (kilese na p. na pacceti etc.); perhaps also at Thag 533 (sattayugaṃ), although Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it = punāti and Mrs. Rh. D. translates “lifts to lustrous purity.”

Caus. fr. puna? or = punāti?

Punnāga

a species of tree Ja i.9 (˚puppha); vi.530; Kp-a 50 (aggacchinna˚-phala), 53 (id.).

dial.?

Puppha1

(nt.) a flower Vin ii.123; SN i.204 = Ja iii.308; Snp 2, Snp 5; Dhp 47 sq.; 377; Vism 430; Snp-a 78 (paduma˚); Vv-a 73; Pv-a 127; Sdhp 550- pupphāni (pl.) Vb-a 255 (of 32 colours, in simile) 292 sq. (for Cetiya-worship) ■ adj. ˚puppha in ghana thick with flowers DN-a i.87 ■ Cp. pokkharatā.

-ābhikiṇṇa decked with flowers Vv 6429; Pv ii.112 -ādhāna “a ledge (on a Tope) where offerings of flowers are laid down” (Geiger, Mvu p.355; cp. Mvu trsl. p. 2022) Mvu 30, Mvu 51, Mvu 56, Mvu 60; Mvu 33, Mvu 22 Reading uncertain -āveḷā flower-garland Vv-a 125. -āsava wine made from flowers, flower-liquor Ja iv.117; Kp-a 26. -gandha odour of flowers Dhp 54; Dhs 625. -cumbaṭaka a fl cushion. -chaḍḍaka a remover of (dead) flowers, a rubbish-remover, a low occupation, including cleaning of privies & bins etc. Vin iv.6; Thag 620; Ja v.449 (= vacca-ṭṭhāna-sodhaka C.); Mil 331; Vism 194 (in simile). Cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 89 and Mil trsl. ii.211 -cchatta a parasol with flowers Dhp-a i.110. -dāna offering of flowers Vb-a 336. -dāma a wreath or garland of fls. Ja i.397; Vv-a 198. -dhara bearing flowers Pv ii.124 (so read for T. ˚dada). -pañjara a cage (ornamented) with flowers Ja v.365. -paṭa a cloth (embroidered) with flowers Ja iv.283; Dhp-a ii.45 -palāsa a fl. heap Dhp-a i.75. -bhāṇin “speaking flowers,” i.e. speaking the truth Pp 29. -mālā garland of fls. Snp-a 78. -muṭṭhi a handful of fl. Vism 432 (in simile). -rasa (wine-) juice made of fls., flower-liquor Vin i.246; taste of fls. Dhs 629. -rāsi a heap of fls. Dhp 53.

Vedic puṣpa according to Grassmann for *puṣka fr. puṣ (?) see poseti

Puppha2

(nt.) blood: see pupphaka pupphavatī. With ref. to the menses at Ja v.331.

cp. Class. Sk. puṣpa “les fleurs” in strī˚; the menses Am. Kośa 3, 4, 30, 233 and Mārk. Pur. 51 42. Similarly phala is used in the sense of “menstruation”: see BR s. v. phala 12

Pupphaka

(nt.) blood Ja iii.541 (v.l. pubbaka; C. = lohita); Mil 216 (tiṇa˚-roga, a disease, Kern “hay-fever”). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls the Ja passage with “vuil, uitwerpsel.”

fr. puppha2

Pupphati

to flower Ja i.76 (aor. ˚iṃsu); Pv-a 185 (= phalati) ■ pp. pupphita.

puṣp

Pupphavatī

(f.) a menstruous woman Mil 126.

fr. puppha2, but cp. Vedic puṣpavat flowering

Pupphita

flowering, in blossom SN i.131 = Thig 230 (su˚); Vv 354; Ja i.18; Mil 347; Thag-a 69 (Ap. v. 12); Dhp-a i.280; Dhp-a ii.250 (su˚).

pp. of pupphati

Pupphin

(adj.) bearing flowers; in nīlapupphī (f.) Name of a plant (“with blue flowers”) Ja vi.53.

fr. puppha1 cp. Vedic puṣpin

Pubba1

pus, matter, corruption MN i.57; MN iii.90; SN i.150; SN ii.157; AN i.34; Ja ii.18; Mil 382; Pv-a 80 ■ In detail discussed (as one of the 32 ākāras ) at Vism 261, Vism 360; Kp-a 62; Vb-a 244 ■ Often in combn pubba-lohita matter & blood, e.g. Snp p.125; Snp 671; Ja v.71; Dhp-a i.319; as food of the Petas Pv i.69; i.91 (lohita-pubba); i.118; ii.26. pubba-vaṭṭi a lump of matter Dhp-a iii.117.

Vedic pūya → *pūva → *puvva → pubba (Geiger, P.Gr. § 461); cp. pūyati to smell rotten, Lat. pūs = E pus, Gr. πύχω to rot, πύον matter; Vedic pūti smelling foul; Goth. fūls = E. foul

Pubba2

(adj.) previous, former, before. The adj. never occurs in abs. forms by itself (for which see pubbaka), it is found either as-˚ or ˚-or in cases as adv. The phrase pubbam antam anissita Snp 849 is poetical for pubbantam.

1. (-˚) having been before Ja iii.200; na diṭṭha˚ not seen before Nd i.445; mātabhūta˚ formerly (been) his mother Pv-a 79; vuttha (gāma) formerly inhabited Dhp-a i.15; as adv. bhūtapubbaṃ before any beings (existed) Vin i.342; Dhp-a i.102 and passim (see bhūta).

2. (neg.) apubba (nt. what has not been before, something new Vv-a 117, Vv-a 287 acc. as adv. in phrase apubbaṃ acarimaṃ not earlier not after, i.e. simultaneously MN iii.65; Pp 13 (= apure apacchā, ekappahāren’ evâti attho PugA 186). 3. (cases adverbially) instr. pubbena in ˚âpara gradual MN iii.79; acc. pubbaṃ see 1, 2, with abl. as prep. before Snp-a 549 (= purā); loc. pubbe in earlier times (also referring to previous births, cp. pure), in the past before SN iv.307; Snp 831, Snp 949 (with pacchā & majjhe i.e. future & present); Pv i.31; ii.22; Snp-a 290, Snp-a 385 Snp-a 453; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 40, Pv-a 100. With abl. as prep. before SN ii.104. In compn with ˚nivāsa see sep. An old acc. f. *pūrvīṃ (cp. Prk. puvviṃ Pischel, Gr. § 103 we find in Cpd. anupubbikathā (q.v.). The compar pubbatara (“quite early”) occurs abs. at SN iv.117 as nom. pl. “ancestors” (cp. Gr. οἱ πρότεροι), as loc. adv. at SN i.22.

-aṅgin in f. ˚angī (cāru˚) at Ja v.4 & vi.481 read sabbangin. -aṇṇa “first grain,” a name given to the 7 kinds of grain, as distinguished from aparaṇṇa, the 7 sorts of vegetables, with which it is usually combined; Vin iii.151; Vin iv.267; Nd i.248 (where the 7 are enumd); Nd ii.314; Ja ii.185; Mil 106; DN-a i.78, DN-a i.270; Dhp-a iv.81 etc. (see aparaṇṇa). See also bīja-bīja -aṇha the former part of the day, forenoon, morning (as contrasted with majjhaṇha & sāyaṇha) DN i.109, DN i.226; AN i.294; AN iii.344; SN i.76 (˚samayaṃ); Snp-a 139 (id.) Dhp-a iii.98; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 216. The spelling pubbanha MN i.528 (cp. Trenckner, Notes 80). -anta (1) the East Ja i.98 (˚ato aparantaṃ aparantato pubbantaṃ gacchati from E. to W. from W. to E.); v.471 ■ (2) the Past (opp. aparanta the Future) DN i.12 sq.; SN ii.26; Nd i.212; Dhs 1004. pubbam antaṃ for pubbantaṃ is poetical at Snp 849. -˚ânudiṭṭhi theory concerning the past or the beginning of things DN i.13 (cp. DN-a i.103); MN ii.233; SN iii.45; Dhs 1320. -aḷha(ka) (āḷhaka) at Thig 395 is doubtful. T. reads bubbuḷaka, Mrs. Rh. D. translates “bubble of film”; Thag-a 259 explns by “ṭhita-jalapubbaḷha-sadisa.” -ācariya (1) an ancient teacher, a scholar of previous times AN i.132; AN ii.70; Iti 110; Vism 523 = Vb-a 130; Kp-a 11, Kp-a 64, Kp-a 65 ■ (2) a former teacher Snp-a 318. -āciṇṇa (-vasena) by way of former practice, from habit Snp-a 413. -āpara (1) what precedes and what follows, what comes first and what last (with ref. to the successive order of syllables and words in the text of the Scriptures) AN iii.201 (˚kusala) Dhp 352; Ne 3 (˚ânusandhi); cp. BSk. pūrvāpareṇa vyākhyānaṃ karoti “expld in due order” Avs ii.20-(2) ˚rattaṃ “as in the former, so in the foll. night, i.e. without ceasing, continuous Thag 413. cp. pub baratt-âparattaṃ Dhp-a iv.129. -āpariya former future, first & last Ud 61 (˚vivesa); -ābhoga previous reflection Thag-a 30. -ārāma “Eastern Park,” Name of a locality east of Sāvatthi AN iii.344; Snp p.139 (cp. Snp-a 502). -āsava former intoxication Snp 913, cp. Nd i.331. -uṭṭhāna getting up before (someone else) either applied to a servant getting up before the master, or to a wife rising before her husband Vv-a 71, Vv-a 136. -uṭṭnāyin “getting up earlier” (with complementary Ep pacchā-nipātin “lying down later”), see above DN i.60 DN iii.191; AN iii.37; AN iv.265 sq.; DN-a i.168 ■ abstr. ˚uṭṭhāyitā Ja iii.406 (˚ādīhi pañcahi kalyāṇa dhammehi samannāgatā patidevatā) = v.88; Kp-a 173. -uttara (1) preceding and following Kacc. 44. 47 ■ (2) “eastnorthern,” i.e. north-eastern Ja v.38 (˚kaṇṇa N.E corner); vi.519 (id.). -kamma a former deed, a deed done in a former existence Cp iii.113. -kārin “doing before,” i.e. looking after, obliging, doing a favour AN i.87; Pp 26 (= paṭhamaṃ eva kāraka PugA 204; Pv-a 114. -kicca preiiminary function Vin v.127 (cattāro pubbakiccā); cp. Cpd. 53. -koṭṭhaka “Eastern Barn,” Npl. AN iii.345. -(n)gama (1) going before preceding AN iii.108 (okkamane p.); MN iii.71 sq. (2) “allowing to go before”; controlled or directed by giving precedence Dhp 2 (mano˚ dhammā = tena paṭhama-gāminā hutvā samannāgatā Dhp-a i.35); Nd ii.318 Pp 15 (paññā˚ ariyamagga = paññaṃ pure-cārikaṃ katṿā PugA 194); Sdhp 547 (paññā˚). Cp. BSk pūrvangama Divy 333 (“obedient” Index). -carita former life Snp-a 382, Snp-a 385. -ja born earlier, i.e. preceding in age Pv-a 57 (= jeṭṭhaka). -ñāti former relative Pv-a 24. -deva a former god, a god of old, pl the ancient gods (viz. the Asuras) SN i.224. -devatā an ancient deity AN ii.70; Iti 110 (v.l. ˚deva). -nimitta “previous sign,” a foregoing sign, prognostic, portent forecast Iti 76 (the 5 signs of decay of a god); Ja i.11 (the 32 signs at the conception of a Buddha, given in detail on p. 51), 48; Mil 298 (of prophetic dreams cp. Cpd. p. 48); Vb-a 407 (in dreams); Dhp-a ii.85 -pada the former, or antecedent, part (of a phrase Dhs-a 164. -parikamma a former action Snp-a 284 (opp. to pacchā-parikamma). -purisa ancestor DN i.93, DN i.94. -peta a deceased spirit, a ghost (= peta DN i.8 (˚kathā, cp. DN-a i.90 & Dial. i.14). pubbe pete is poetical at Pv i.41 for pubbapete. Cp. BSk. pūrvapreta Avs i.149 (see Index p. 230); Divy 47, Divy 97 -bhāga “former part,” i.e. previous Pv-a 133 (˚cetanā opp. apara-bhāga-cetanā. SS omit bhāga). -bhāsin speaking obligingly (cp. pubbakārin) DN i.116 (trsl “not backward in conversation”), DN-a i.287 (bhāsanto va paṭhamataraṃ bhāsati etc.). -yoga “former connection ” i.e. connection with a former body or deed former action (and its result) Ja v.476; Ja vi.480; Mil 2 (pubbayogo ti tesaṃ pubba-kammaṃ). Kern, Toev. s. v. remarks that it is frequent in BSk. as pūrvayoga (yoga = yuga; syn. with pūrvakalpa), e.g. Saddh. Puṇḍ ch. vii.; Mvu ii.287; Mvu iii.175; and refers to Ind Studien 16, 298; J.R.A.S. 1875, 5. -rattāparattaṃ the past and future time, the whole time, always AN iii.70; Dhp-a iv.129. -vāsana an impression remaining in the mind from former actions Snp 1009 Thag-a 31 (Ap. v. 8). -videha Eastern Videha Kp-a 123 Kp-a 176; Snp-a 443. -sadisa an old (former) friend Dhp-a i.57

Vedic pūrva, to Idg. *per, see pari & cp. Goth. fram = from; Gr. πρόμος first, Goth. fruma = As formo first, Av. pourvō, also Sk. pūrvya = Goth. frauja = Ohg. frō Lord, frouwa = Ger. frau. See also Lat prandium, provincia

Pubbaka

(adj.) 1. former, ancient, living in former times DN i.104 (isayo), 238 (id.); Snp 284 (id.) SN ii.105; SN iv.307 (ācariya-pācariyā); Thag 947. 2. (-˚; cp. pubba2 1) having formerly been, previous Ja i.182 (suvaṇṇakāra˚ bhikkhu), cp. BSk. ˚pūrvaka in same use at Avs i.259, Avs i.296, Avs i.322.

3. (-˚) accompanied or preceded by Thag-a 74 (guṇ’ âbhitthavana udāna); Pv-a 122 (puññânumodana˚ maggācikkhana) cp. āśvāsana-pūrvaka Jtm 210.

fr. pubba2

Pubbāpeti

occurs only in one phrase (gattāni pubbāpayamāno) at MN i.161 & AN iii.345≈402 in meaning “drying again”; at both A pass. the vv. ll (glosses) are “sukkhāpayamāno” and “pubba-sadisāni kurumāno”; to the M. pass. cp. Trenckner’s notes on p. 543, with the BB expln of the word (= pubbabhāvaṃ gamayamāno), also Neumann, Majjh. trsln i.260. The similar passage at SN i.8, SN i.10 has “gattāni sukkhāpayamāno” as T. reading and “pubbāpayamāno” as v.l. BB.

Denom. fr. pubba2

Pubbe

(˚-) in cpds.: “in a former existence”: ˚kata (nt.) deeds done in a past life MN ii.217 = AN i.173 (˚hetu); Ja v.228 (˚vādin fatalist) Ne 29 (˚punnata). ˚nivāsa [cp. BSk. pūrve-nivāsasaṃprayuktaṃ Mvu iii.224, otherwise as pūrvanivāsa Divy 619] abode in a former life, one’s former state of existence DN ii.1, DN ii.2; DN iii.31 sq., 50 sq., 108 sq 230, 281; MN i.278; MN ii.21; MN iii.12; SN i.167; AN i.164 sq. Iti 100; Snp 647; Dhp 423; Pp 61; Vism 411 (remembered by 6 classes of individuals); Thag-a 74, Thag-a 197. pubbe-nivās’ ānussati (-ñāṇa) (knowledge of) remembrance of one’s former state of existence, one of the faculties of an Arahant (cp. AN i.164 sq., and Cpd. 64; DN iii.110, DN iii.220; MN i.35, MN i.182, MN i.248, MN i.278, MN i.496; Dhs 1367 Ne 28, Ne 103; Vism 433; Vb-a 373 sq., 401, 422 Tikp. 321 ■ See also under nivāsa and cp. Vism ch. xiii, pp. 410 sq.

loc. of pubba2, see pubba2 3

Pumati

to blow, aor. pumi Ja i.171; ger. pumitvā Ja i.172. See J.P.T.S. 1889 207 (?).

onomat. *pu to blow, cp. Gr. φυσα blowing, bubble, φυσάω blow, Lat. pustula = pustule, Sk. *pupphusa = P. papphasa lung, phutkaroti blow, etc., see Uhlenbeck Ai. Wtb. s. v. pupphusa

Puman

(Pumā) a male, a man, nom sg. pumo D n.273; Cp ii.62; instr. pumunā Ja vi.550. nom. pl pumā DN iii.85 (itthi-pumā men & women; v.l. K ˚purisā); Ja iii.459; acc. sg. pumaṃ Ja v.154 (gata, cp purisantara-gata) ■ On decl. cp. Müller, P.Gr. p. 79 Greiger, P.Gr. § 935.

see puṃs

*Pura

base of adv. & prep. denoting “before”; abl. purato (adv. & prep. in front of (with gen.), before (only local) Vin i.179 Vin ii.32; DN ii.14 (mātu); SN i.137; Pv i.111, 113 (opp pacchā); ii.86 (janâdhipassa); DN-a i.152; Pv-a 5 (purisassa), 22, 39 (tassa). Often repeated (distributively purato purato each time in front, or in front of each, or continuously in front Vin ii.213; Vism 18; cp. pacchato pacchato ■ Otherwise *pura occurs only in foll der.: (1) adverbial: *puraḥ in purakkharoti, purekkhāra purohita; purā, pure, puratthaṃ, puratthato. (2) adjectival: purāṇa, puratthima, purima.

on etym. see purā, purāṇa, pure

Pura

(nt.) 1. a town, fortress, city Vin i.8 = MN i.171 (Kāsinaṃ puraṃ); Ja i.196, Ja i.215; Snp 976, Snp 991, Snp 1012 (˚uttama),1013; Ja vi.276 (= nagara C); Mvu 14, Mvu 29avapure below the fortress MN i.68devapura city of the Gods SN iv.202; Vv 6430 (= Sudassana-mahā-nagara Vv-a 285). See also purindada.

2. dwelling, house or (divided) part of a house (= antepura), a meaning restricted to the Jātakas, e.g. v.65 (= nivesana C.); vi.251, 492 (= antepura). Cp. thīpura lady’s room, harem, also “lady Ja v.296, and antepura.

3. the body [cp. Sk. pura body as given by Halāyudha 2, 355, see Aufrecht p. 273] Thag 279 Thag 1150 (so read for pūra, cp. Kern Toev. s. v. & under sarīradeha) ■ Cp. porin.;

Vedic pur. f., later Sk. puraṃ nt. & purī f.

Purakkhata

honoured, esteemed, preferred DN i.50; MN i.85; SN i.192, SN i.200; Snp 199, Snp 421 Snp 1015; Nd i.154; Dhp 343 (= parivārita Dhp-a iv.49) Ja ii.48 (˚parivārita); Pv iii.71 (= payirupāsita Pv-a 205); DN-a i.152 (= purato nisinna); Thag-a 170. Cp purekkhata.

pp. of purakkharoti

Purakkharoti

to put in front, to revere, follow, honour; only in foll sporadic forms: ppr. purakkharāna holding before oneself, i.e. looking at SN iii.9 sq.; aor. 3rd pl. purakkharuṃ Mil 22; ger. purakkhatvā MN i.28; Snp 969 Nd i.491; Ja v.45 (= purato katvā C.); Pv-a 21, Pv-a 141. purakkhata pp. (q.v.). See also purekkhāra.

fr. puraḥ, cp. Ved. puras-karoti, see pure

Puratthaṃ

(adv.) 1. before SN i.141 (na pacchā na puratthaṃ = no after, no before).

2. east DN i.50 (˚âbhimukha looking eastward.)

for Vedic purastāt, fr. puraḥ, see *pura

Puratthato

(adv.) in front, coram Snp 416 (sic, v.l. BB purakkhato); Ja vi.242.

fr. puratthaṃ, cp. BSk. purastataḥ Mvu ii.198

Puratthima

(adj.) eastern DN i.153; SN i.144; Ja i.71 (˚âbhimukha: Gotama facing E. under the Bo tree).

fr. *pura, cp. Prk. (AMg.) puratthima, acc. to Pischel, Gr. § 602 a der. fr. purastāt (= P puratthaṃ) as *purastima, like *pratyastima (= paccatthima) fr. *pratyastaṃ

Purā

(indecl.) prep. c. abl. “before” (only temporal) Vin iv.17 (purāruṇā = purā aruṇā before dawn); Snp 849 (purā bhedā before dissolution (of the body), after which the Suttanta is named Purābhedasutta, cp. Nd i.210 sq. expld by sarīra-bhedā pubbaṃ at Snp-a 549).

Vedic purā; to Idg. *per, cp. Goth. faúr = Ags. for = E. (be-) fore; also Lat. prae = Gr. παραί = Sk pare

Purāṇa

(adj.) 1. ancient, past Snp 312, Snp 944 (= Nd i.428 atītaṃ opp. nava = paccuppannaṃ); Dhp 156 (= pubbe katāni C.); with ref. to former births or previous existences p. kammaṃ SN ii.64 = Nd i.437 = Nd ii.680 Q. 2; puññaṃ SN i.92.

2. old (of age), worn out, used (opp. nava recent) DN i.224 (bandhanaṃ, opp. navaṃ); Vin ii.123 (udakaṃ p.˚ṃ stale water); SN ii.106 (magga); Snp 1 (tacaṃ); Ja ii.114 (f. purāṇī, of an old bow string, applied jokingly to a former wife); iv.201 (˚paṇṇa old leaf, opp nava); v.202 (a˚ not old, of years); vi.45 (apurāṇaṃ adv. recently); Vb-a 363 (udaka stale water). 3. former, late, old in cpds. as ˚dutiyikā the former wife (of a bhikkhu) Vin i.18, Vin i.96; Vin iv.263; SN i.200; Ud 5; Ja i.210; ˚rājorodhā former lady of the harem Vin iv.261 ˚sālohita former blood-relation Snp p.91; Ud 7; Dhp-a ii.210. Cp. porāṇa.

Venic purāṇa, fr. *per, cp. Sk. parut in former years, Gr. πέρυσι = Lith. pernai, Goth. fairneis Ohg. firni = Ger. firn (last year’s snow), forn formerly ferro far

Purātana

(adj.) belonging to the past, former, old Ne-a 194.

fr. purā, cp. sanātana in formation

Purindada

“townbreaker,” a name of Sakka (Indra) DN ii.260; SN i.230; Vv 374, 622; Pv-a 247.

distorted fr. Vedic puraṃ-dara, pura + dṛ; to break, see darī, thus “breaker of fortresses,” Ep. of Indra (& Agni). The P. Commentator (Vv-a 171) of course takes it popularly as “pure dānaṃ dadātī ti Purindado ti vuccati,” thus pure + ; see also Trenckner, Notes 596; Geiger, P.Gr. § 443

Purima

(adj.) preceding, former, earlier, before (opp pacchima) DN i.179; Snp 773, Snp 791, Snp 1011; Nd i.91; Ja i.110; Snp-a 149 (˚dhura); Pv-a 1, Pv-a 26. In sequence p. majjhima pacchima; past, present, future (or first, second last) DN i.239 sq.; DN-a i.45 sq. and passim ■ purimatara = purima Ja i.345 (˚divase the day before).

-attabhāva a former existence Vv-a 78; Pv-a 83, Pv-a 103 Pv-a 119. -jāti a previous birth Pv-a 45, Pv-a 62, Pv-a 79, Pv-a 90.

compar ■ superl. formation fr. *pura, cp. Sk. purima

Purimaka

(adj.) previous, first Vin ii.167 (opp. pacchimaka). f. ˚ika Vin i.153.

fr. purima

Purisa

man (as representative of the male sex, contrasted to itthi woman, e.g. at AN iii.209; AN iv.197; Ja i.90; Ja v.72; Pv-a 51). Definitions of the C. are “puriso nāma manussa-puriso na yakkho na peto etc.” (i.e. man κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν) Vin iv.269 (the same expln for purisa-puggala at Vin iv.214); “seṭṭh’ aṭṭhena puri setī ti puriso ti satto vuccati” Vv-a 42–⁠1. man DN i.61 (p. kassaka “free man”); ii.13; SN i.225; AN i.28 AN i.126; AN ii.115; AN iii.156; Snp 102, Snp 112, Snp 316, Snp 740, Snp 806 and passim; Dhp 117, Dhp 152, Dhp 248; Nd i.124; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 4, Pv-a 165 Pv-a 187; Vv-a 13 (majjhima˚, paṭhama˚, as t.t. g.?) uttama˚; SN ii.278; SN iii.61, SN iii.166; SN iv.380; Iti 97; mahā˚ SN v.158; AN ii.35; AN iii.223; AN iv.229 (see also under mahā) sappurisa (q.v.). Var. epithets of the Buddha e.g. at SN i.28 sq ■ Kāpurisa a contemptible man; kimpurisa a wild man of the woods (“whatever man”), f. kimpurisī Ja v.215purisa as “a man, some one, somebody” as character or hero in var. similes, e.g. angārakāsuyaṃ khipanaka˚ Vism 489; asucimhi patita Vism 465; āgantuka˚ Vb-a 23; dubbala Vism 533; papāte patanto Vb-a 23 (cannot be a help to others; similarly with patita at Vb-a 170 = Vism 559); bhikkhusanghaṃ disvā Vism 333; maṇḍapa-lagga Vism 339 sq. lakuṇṭaka-pāda & dīghapāda Vb-a 26; cp. the foll. of a man pleasing the king Vb-a 442 sq.; a man wishing to perform a long journey in one day Vism 244; a man breathing when exhausted Vism 274. Frequently elsewhere

2. an attendant, servant, waiter Vin ii.297; DN i.60 (dāsa + ), 72 (id.); Ja i.385 (dāsa˚); vi.462. Cp porisa, posa.

-atthika one who seeks a servant Vin ii.297. -anta = purisādhama Snp 664 (anta = Sk. antya; Snp-a 479 explns by antimapurisa). -antaragatā touched by a man (lit. gone in by… ), a woman who has sexual intercourse, a woman in intercourse with a man DN i.166 (cp. Dial. i.228); MN i.77; AN i.295; AN ii.206; Vin iv.322 Pp 55 (= he does not accept food, lest their intercourse should be broken: rati antarāyo hoti PugA 231); DN-a i.79 (= itthi, as opp. to kumārikā). Cp. pumaṃ gata Ja v.154. -allu (& ālu) Name of certain monstrous beings living in the wilderness Ja v.416 (= vaḷavā-mukhayakkhinī, a y. with the face of a mare), 418; vi.537 (˚ālu = vaḷavā-m ■ pekkhī C.). -ājañña “a noble steed of a man,” a thorough-bred or remarkable man SN iii.91; AN v.325 sq., Snp 544; Dhp 193; as -ājāneyya at Dhp-a i.310 -ājāniya at AN i.290; AN ii.115; AN iv.397 sq.; AN v.324. -āda a bad man (“man-eater”) a wild man, cannibal Ja v.25 (cp. puruṣāda Jtm 3141); ˚ādaka Ja v.30. -ādhama a wicked man Dhp 78; Ja v.268. -indriya male faculty masculinity SN v.204; AN iv.57; Dhs 634, Dhs 715, Dhs 839, Dhs 972 Vism 447, Vism 492. -uttama “the highest of men,” an excellent man AN v.16, AN v.325 sq.; Snp 544; Dhp 78; Dhp-a ii.188. -usabha (purisusabha) “a bull of a man,” a very strong man Vin iii.39. -kathā talk about men DN i.8. -kāra manliness DN i.53 (cp. DN-a i.161); Mil 96 -thāma manly strength DN i.53; SN ii.28; AN ii.118 AN iv.190. -dammasārathi guide of men who have to be restrained, Ep. of the Buddha [cp. BSk. puruṣa-damyasārathi Divy 54 and passim] SN ii.69; AN i.168, AN i.207 AN ii.56, AN ii.112, AN ii.147; Snp p.103 (= vicitrehi vinayan’ ûpāyehi purisadamme sāretī ti Snp-a 443); Iti 79; Pp 57; Vism 207; Thag-a 178. -dosā (pl.) faults or defects in a man eight are discussed in detail at AN iv.190 sq.; Pts i.130 eighteen at Ja vi.542, Ja vi.548. -dhorayha a human beast of burden SN i.29. -parakkama manly energy DN i.53; SN ii.28. -puggala a man, a human character DN iii.5 DN iii.227 (eight); SN i.220 (8); ii.69, 82, 206; iv.272 sq. Iti 88 (8) (expld at Vism 219); AN i.32, AN i.130, AN i.173, AN i.189 AN ii.34, AN ii.56; AN iii.36, AN iii.349; AN iv.407 (8); v.139, 183 (8), 330 (8); Vin iv.212 sq. (= male); Vb-a 497; -bhava state of being a man, manhood, virility Ja iii.124; Dhs 634 Dhs 415, Dhs 839; Pv-a 63. -bhūmi man’s stage, as “eight stages of a prophet’s existence” (Dial. i.72) at DN i.54 in detail at DN-a i.162, DN-a i.163. -medha man-sacrifice human sacrifice SN i.76; AN ii.42; AN iv.151; Iti 21; Snp 303 -yugāni (pl.) (4) pairs of men SN iv.272 sq.; AN i.208 AN ii.34, AN ii.56; AN iii.36; AN iv.407; AN v.330; DN iii.5, DN iii.227; Iti 88; in verse Vv 4421; expld Vism 219 (see under yuga). -lakkhaṇa (lucky) marks on a man DN i.9. -liṅga (see also pullinga) a man’s characteristic, membrum virile Vin iii.35; Dhs 634, Dhs 715, Dhs 839; Tikp 50; Vism 184. -viriya manly vigour SN ii.28. -vyañjana the membrum virile (= ˚linga) Vin ii.269.

according to Geiger, Gr. § 303 the base is *pūrṣa, from which the Vedic form puruṣa, and the Prk ■ P. form purisa. The further contraction *pussa *possa yielded posa (q.v.). From the Prk. form puliśa (Māgadhī) we get pulla

Purisaka

(n ■ adj.) 1. a (little) man, only in ˚tiṇa doll effigy made of grass (straw), scarecrow Mil 352; Vism 462; Dhs-a 111.

2. (adj.) having a man f. ˚ikā in eka˚ (a woman) having intercourse with only one man Ja i.290.

fr. purisa

Purisatta

(nt.) manhood, virility Dhs 634, Dhs 715, Dhs 839.

abstr. fr. purisa

Purisattana

(nt.) manhood Mil 171.

= purisatta, cp. Trenckner, Notes 7037

Pure

(indecl.) before (both local & temporal), thus either “before, in front or “before, formerly, earlier.” In both meanings the opp. is pacchā -(a) local SN i.176 (pure hoti to lead) Ja ii.153 (opp. pacchima)-(b) temporal SN i.200; Snp 289, Snp 311, Snp 541, Snp 645, Snp 773 (= atītaṃ Nd i.33; opp pacchā); Dhp 348 (opp. pacchato); Ja i.50 (with abl. pure puṇṇamāya). Often meaning “in a former life, e.g. Vv 348, 3413; Pv i.21 (= pubbe atītajātiyaṃ Pv-a 10); ii.32 (cp. purima); ii.42; ii.74 (= atītabhāve Pv-a 101); ii.913apure apacchā neither before nor after i.e. simultaneously PugA 186 (see apubbaṃ):- puretaraṃ (adv.) first, ahead, before any one else Dhp-a i.13 Dhp-a i.40 ■ (c) modal, meaning “lest” DN-a i.4; cp. purā in same sense Jtm. 28.

-cārika going before, guiding, leading, only in phrase ˚n katvā putting before everything else, taking as a guide or ideal Ja i.176 (mettā-bhāvanaṃ); iii.45 (id.), 180 (khantiñ ca mettañ ca); vi.127 (Indaṃ); PugA 194 (paññaṃ). -java [cp. BSk. purojava attendant Divy 211, Divy 214, Divy 379; also Vedic puroyāva preceding] preceding, preceded by, controlled by (= pubbangama SN i.33 (sammādiṭṭhi˚); Snp 1107 (dhamma-takka˚, cp Nd ii.318). -jāta happening before, as logical category (˚paccaya) “antecedence”; Vism 537 (elevenfold) Tikp. 17; freq. in Dukp. & Tikp. (as ārammaṇa˚ vatthu˚), cp. Vb-a 403 (˚ārammaṇa & ˚vatthuka); -dvāra front door Ja ii.153. -bhatta the early meal morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. purobhaktakā Divy 307] Vv-a 120; Pv-a 109; ˚ṃ in the morning Vv-a 51; Pv-a 78; ˚kicca duties after the morning meal DN-a i.45 sq.; Snp-a 131 sq. -bhava “being in front,” i.e. superior DN-a i.75 (in exegesis of porī). -samaṇa one who wanders ahead of someone else Vin ii.32 (opp pacchā˚).

is the genuine representative (with Māgadhī e) of Vedic puraḥ, which also appears as *puro in purohita, as *pura in purakkharoti. It belongs to base Idg. *per (cp. pari), as in Cr. πάρος before, earlier πρέσβυς “preceding in life,” i.e. older; Ohg. first

Purekkhata

= purakkhata Snp 849, Snp 859, (a˚); Nd i.73, Nd i.214.

Purekkharoti

to honour etc. Snp 794 = Snp 803; ppr. purekkharāna Snp 844 Snp 910.

for purakkharoti, pure = Sk. puraḥ

Purekkhāra

deference, devotion, honour; usually -˚ (adj.) devoted to honouring DN i.115; Vin iii.130; Vin iv.2, Vin iv.277; Nd i.73, Nd i.214; Dhp 73 (= parivāra Dhp-a ii.77); Vv 3414 (attha˚ hitesin Vv-a 152); Vb-a 466 (˚mada); Vv-a 72.

for purakkhāra, puraḥ + kṛ; see pure

Purekkhāratā

(f.) deference to (-˚) Dhp-a iv.181 (attha˚).

abstr. fr. purekkhāra

Purohita

1. placed in front, i.e. foremost or at the top, in phrase devā Inda-purohitā the gods with Inda at their head Ja vi.127 (= Indaṃ pure-cārikaṃ katvā C.).

2. the king’s headpriest (brahmanic), or domestic chaplain, acting at the same time as a sort of Prime Minister DN i.138; Ja i.210 Ja v.127 (his wife as brāhmaṇī); Pp 56 (brāhmaṇa p.) Mil 241, Mil 343 (dhamma-nagare p.); Pv-a 74.

purah + pp. of dhā, ch. Vedic purohita

Pulaka

shrivelled grain Mil 232 (sukka-yava˚ of dried barley); Dhp-a ii.154 (SS; T. reads mūlakaṃ which is expld by Bdhgh as “nitthusaṃ katvā ussedetvā gahita-yava-taṇḍula vuccanti” ibid). Here belongs pulasa-patta of Ja iii.478. (vv.ll. pulā˚, mūlā˚ mulā˚; expld by C. as “saṇhāṇi pulasa-gaccha-paṇṇāni, thus taking pulasa as a kind of shrub, prob. because the word was not properly understood).

cp. Sk. pulāka, Halāyudha 5, 43; not Sk. pulaka, as Kern, Toev. s. v. for which see also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. pilus

Puḷava

a worm, maggot MN iii.168; Snp 672; Ja iii.177; Ja vi.73; Mil 331, Mil 357 Vism 179 (= kimi) Dhp-a iii.106, Dhp-a iii.411. See next.

etym.? dial; cp. Class. Sk. pulaka erection of the hairs of the body, also given by lexicographers (Hemachandra 1202) in meaning “vermin”

Puḷavaka

(BB puḷuvaka) = puḷava Dhp-a iv.46; Vv-a 76; Pv-a 14. One of the (asubha) kammaṭṭhānas is called p. “the contemplation (˚saññā idea) of the worminfested corpse” SN v.131; Dhs 264; Vism 110, Vism 179 (puḷu˚), 194 (id.; as asubha-lakkhaṇa); Dhp-a iv.47 See also asubha.

Pulasa

see pulaka.

Pulina

(& Puḷina) (nt.) 1. a sandy bank or mound in the middle of a river Ja ii.366 (vālika˚); iii.389 (id.); v.414; Mil 297 (ḷ); Dāvs iv.29; Vism 263 (nadī˚); Vv-a 40 (paṇḍara˚).

2. a grain of sand Mil 180 (l).

cp. Epic Sk. pulina, also Halāyudha 3, 48

Pulla

man, only in cpd. pulliṅga (= purisa-linga) membrum virile, penis Ja v.143 (where expld by C. as uṇha-chārikā pl. “hot embers”; the pass. is evidently misunderstood; v.l. BB phull˚).

a contracted form of purisa (q.v.)

Pussa˚

at Nd i.90 in cpds. ˚tila, ˚tela, dantakaṭṭha, mattikā, etc. is probably to be read with v.l. phussa˚ meaning not quite clear (“natural, raw”?).

Pussaka

at AN i.188 is to be read as phussaka (see phussa3) cuckoo.

Pussaratha

at Ja vi.39 read phussa˚; (q.v.).

Pūga1

(nt.) heap, quantity; either as n. with gen or as adj. = many, a lot Snp 1073 (pūgaṃ vassānaṃ bahūni vassāni Nd ii.452); Pv iv.79 (pūgāni vassāni) Vb-a 2 (khandhaṭṭha, piṇḍ˚, pūg˚).

etym.? cp. Vedic pūga in meaning of both pūga1 & pūga;2

Pūga2

(m.) corporation, guild Vin ii.109, Vin ii.212; Vin iv.30, Vin iv.78, Vin iv.226, Vin iv.252; MN iii.48; AN iii.300; Ud 71 Pp 29 (= seṇi PugA 210).

-āyatana guild’s property Ja vi.108 (= pūga-santaka dhana C.). -gāmaṇika superintendant of a guild guildmaster AN iii.76. -majjhagata gone into a guild AN i.128 = Pp 29; Snp-a 377.

see preceding

Pūga3

the betel-palm, betel nut tree Ja v.37 (˚rukkha-ppamāṇaṃ ucchu-vanaṃ).

Class. Sk. pūga

Pūja

(adj.) to be honoured, honourable AN iii.78 (v.l.; T. pūjja); Ja iii.83 (apūja apūjanīya C.); pūjaṃ karoti to do homage Vism 312. See also pūjiya.

Epic Sk. pūjya, cp. pujja

Pūjanā

(f.) veneration, worship AN ii.203 sq.; Dhp 106, Dhp 107; Pp 19; Dhs 1121; Mil 162. Pujaneyya & Pujaniya;

fr. pūjeti

Pūjaneyya & Pūjanīya

to be honoured, entitled to homage SN i.175; Snp-a 277; -īya Ja iii.83 Sdhp 230, Sdhp 551.

grd. of pūjeti

Pūjā

(f.) honour, worship, devotional attention AN i.93 (āmisa˚, dhamma˚); v.347 sq.; Snp 906; Dhp 73, Dhp 104; Pv i.55; i.512; Dpvs vii.12 (cetiya˚); Snp-a 350; Pv-a 8; Sdhp 213, Sdhp 230, Sdhp 542, Sdhp 551.

-āraha worthy of veneration, deserving attention Dhp 194; Dhp-a iii.251. -karaṇa doing service, paying homage Pv-a 30. -kāra = karaṇa Dhp-a ii.44.

fr. pūj, see pūjeti

Pūjita

honoured, revered, done a service SN i.175, SN i.178; SN ii.119; Thag 186; Snp 316; Ud 73 (sakkata mānita p. apacita); Pv i.42 (= paṭimānita C.); ii.810.

pp. of pūjeti

Pūjiya

worthy to be honoured Snp 527; Ja v.405; Sdhp 542.

= pūja, Sk. pūjya

Pūjetar

one who shows attention or care AN v.347 sq., 350 sq.

n. ag. fr. pūjeti

Pūjeti

to honour, respect, worship, revere Snp 316 (Pot. pūjayeyya), 485 (imper. pūjetha); Dhp 106 Dhp 195; DN-a i.256; Pv-a 54 (aor. sakkariṃsu garukkariṃsu mānesuṃ pūjesuṃ); Sdhp 538 ■ pp. pūjita (q.v.).

pūj, occurring in Rigveda only in śācipūjana RV viii.16, 12

Pūti

(adj.) putrid, stinking, rotten, fetid DN ii.353 (khaṇḍāni pūtīni); MN i.73, MN i.89 = MN iii.92 (aṭṭhikāni pūtīni); Vin iii.236 (anto˚); SN iii.54; Pv i.32; i.61 (= kuṇapagandha Pv-a 32); Vism 261 (= pūtika at Kp-a 61), 645 (˚pajā itthi, in simile); Pv-a 67; Sdhp 258 ■ See also puccaṇḍatā.

-kāya foul body, mass of corruption, Ep. of the human body MN ii.65; SN i.131; SN iii.120; Thig 466 Thag-a 283; Snp-a 40; Dhp-a iii.111. -kummāsa rotten junket Vism 343. -gandha bad smell, ill-smelling Pv i.31 (= kuṇapa˚ Pv-a 15); Ja v.72. -dadhi rancid curds Vism 362; Vb-a 68; cp. pūti-takka Vism 108 -deha = ˚kāya SN i.236. -maccha stinking fish MN iii.168 (+ ˚kuṇapa & ˚kummāsa); in simile at Iti 68 = Ja iv.435 = Ja vi.236 = Kp-a 127. -mukha having a putrid mouth Snp-a 458 (āsīvisa); Pv-a 12, Pv-a 14. -mutta strong-smelling urine, usually urine of cattle used as medicine by the bhikkhu Vin i.58 = Vin i.96 (˚bhesajja); MN i.316; Iti 103; Vv-a 5 (˚harītaka). -mūla having fetid roots MN i.80 -latā “stinking creeper,” a sort of creeper or shrub (Coccolus cordifolius, otherwise gaḷoci) Snp 29 = Mil 369; Vism 36, Vism 183; Kp-a 47 (˚saṇṭhāna); Dhp-a iii.110 Dhp-a iii.111 (taruṇā galoci-latā pūtilatā ti vuccati). -lohitaka with putrid blood Pv i.78 (= kuṇapa˚ Pv-a 37). -sandeha = ˚kāya Dhp 148.

cp. Sk. pūti, pūyati to fester; Gr. πύχω, πϋον = pus; Lat. pūtidus putrid; Goth. fūls = Ger. faul, E foul

Pūtika

(adj.) = pūti MN i.449; SN v.51; AN i.261; Ja i.164; Ja ii.275; Mil 252; Dhp-a i.321; Dhp-a iii.111; Vv-a 76apūtika not rotten, fresh MN i.449; AN i.261; Ja v.198; Mil 252.

Pūpa

a special kind of cake, baked or boiled in a bag Ja v.46 (˚pasibbaka cake-bag); Dhp-a i.319 (jāla˚ net-cake v.l. pūva). See also pūva.

cp. Epic Sk. pūpa; “a rich cake of wheaten flour” Hȧlāyudha, 2, 164; and BSk. pūpalikā Av.Ś ii.116

Pūra

(adj.) full; full of (with gen.) DN i.244 (nadī); MN i.215; MN iii.90, MN iii.96; AN iv.230; Snp 195, Snp 721; Ud 90 (nadī); Ja i.146; Pv iv.313 (= pānīyena puṇṇa Pv-a 251); Pp 45, Pp 46; Pv-a 29dup˚; difficult to fill Ja v.425pūraṃ (-˚) nt. as adv. in kucchi-pūraṃ to his belly’s fill Ja iii.268; Vism 108 (udara-pūra-mattaṃ).

cp. Class. Sk. pūra; fr. pṛ; see pūreti

Pūraka

(adj.) filling (-˚) Vism 106 (mukha˚).

= pāra + ka

Pūraṇa

(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) filling Snp 312 (? better read purāṇa with Snp-a 324); Pv-a 70 (eka-thālaka˚) 77 (id.). As Np. in Pūraṇa Kassapa, which however seems to be distorted from Purāṇa K. (DN i.47; Snp p.92, cp. Kp-a 126, Kp-a 175; Snp-a 200, Snp-a 237, Snp-a 372). The expln (popular etym.) of the name at DN-a i.142 refers it to pūreti (“kulassa ekūnaṃ dāsa-sataṃ pūrayamāno jāto” i.e. making the hundred of servants full). 2. (nt.) an expletive particle (pada˚ “verse-filler”), so in C. style of “a” Snp-a 590; “kho” ib. 139; “kho pana” ib. 137; “taṃ” Kp-a 219; “tato” Snp-a 378 “pi” ib. 536; “su” ib. 230; “ha” ib. 416; “hi” ib 377. See pada˚.

fr. pūreti

Pūratta

(nt.) getting or being full, fulness Vin ii.239 (opp. unattaṃ).

abstr. fr. pūra

Pūraḷāsa

sacrificial cake (brahmanic), oblation Snp 459 (= carukañ ca pūvañ ca Snp-a 405), 467 479 (= havyasesa C.), 486.

cp. Vedic puroḍāśa

Pūrita

filled with (-˚), full Pv ii.120 (= paripuṇṇa Pv-a 77); Pv-a 134.

pp. of pūreti

Pūreti

1. to fill (with = gen. or instr.) SN i.173; Snp 30, Snp 305; Ja i.50 (pāyāsassa), 347 ii.112 (pret. pūrayittha); iv.272 (sagga-padaṃ pūrayiṃsu filled with deva world); Dhp-a ii.82 (sakaṭāni ratanehi); iv.200 (pattaṃ); Pv-a 100 (bhaṇḍassa), 145 (suvaṇṇassa).

2. to fulfil Dhp-a i.68.

3. (Caus.) to make fill Vism i.37 (lakāraṃ) ■ pp. puṇṇa. See also pari˚. Caus. II. pūrāpeti to cause to fill SN ii.259; Ja i.99.

Caus. of pṛ; pṛṇāti to fill, intrs. pūryate, cp. Lat. pleo; Gr. πίμ πλημι, πλήχω, πολύς much, Goth. filu Ger. viel; Ohg. folc = folk

Pūva

a cake, baked in a pan (kapalla) AN iii.76; Ja i.345 (kapalla˚ pan-cake), 347 iii.10 (pakka˚); Vv 136; 296 (= kapalla-pūva Vv-a 123); Pv iv.313 (= khajjaka Pv-a 251); Vism 108 (jāla net-cake, cp. jāla-pūpa), 359 (pūvaṃ vyāpetvā, in comp.); Vb-a 65, Vb-a 255 (simile of woman going to bake a cake); Kp-a 56; DN-a i.142; Vv-a 67, Vv-a 73 (˚surā, one of the 5 kinds of intoxication liquors, see surā); Pv-a 244 See also Vin. Texts i.39 (sweetmeats, sent as presents).

cp. Sk. pūpa; with v for p

Pūvika

a cake-seller, confectioner Mil 331.

fr. pūva

Pe

is abbreviation of peyyāla (q.v.); cp. la.

Pekkha1

(adj.) (-˚) looking out for, i.e. intent upon, wishing usually in puñña˚; desirous of merit SN i.167; Dhp 108 (= puññaṃ icchanto Dhp-a ii.234); Vv 3421 (= puññaphalaṃ ākankhanto Vv-a 154); Pv-a 134.

cp. Sk. prekṣā f. & prekṣaka adj.; fr. pa + īks

Pekkha2

(adj.) to be looked for, to be expected, desirable Ja vi.213.

grd. of pekkhati, Sk. prekṣya

Pekkhaka

(adj.) (-˚) seeing, looking at; wishing to see Thag-a 73 (Ap. v.59), f. ˚ikā SN i.185 (vihāra˚).

fr. pekkha1

Pekkhaṇa

(nt.) seeing, sight, look DN-a i.185, DN-a i.193; Kp-a 148 (= dassana).

fr. pa + īkṣ

Pekkhati

to behold, regard, observe, look at DN ii.20; SN iv.291; Ja vi.420 ■ ppr. pekkhamāna Vin i.180; Snp 36 sq. (= dakkhamāna Nd ii.453), 1070, 1104; Pv ii.37; Vism 19 (disā-vidisaṃ). gen. pl. pekkhataṃ Snp 580 (cp. Snp-a 460) ■ Caus. pekkheti to cause one to behold, to make one see or consider Vin ii.73; AN v.71 ■ Cp. anu˚.

pa + īkṣ

Pek(k)havant

desirous of (loc.) Ja v.403. Pek(k)ha

fr. pekkhā

Pek(k)hā

(f.) 1. consideration, view Vb 325, Vb 328.

2. desire Ja v.403 (p. vuccati taṇhā).

3. (or (pekkhaṃ?) show at a fair DN i.6 (= naṭa-samajjā DN-a i.84); see Dial. i.7, n. 4 and cp. J.R.A.S. 1903, 186.

fr. pa + īkṣ

Pekkhin

(adj.) looking (in front), in phrase yugamattaṃ p. “looking only the distance of a plough Mil 398.

fr. pekkhati

Pekhuṇa

(pekkh˚) (nt.) 1. a wing Thag 211 (su˚ with beautiful feathers), 1136; Ja i.207–⁠2. a peacock’s tail-feathers Ja vi.218 (= morapiñja C.), 497 (citrapekkhuṇaṃ moraṃ).

not with Childers fr. *pakṣman, but with Pischel, Gr. § 89 fr. Sk. prenkhaṇa a swing Vedic prenkha, fr. pra + īṅkh, that which swings through *prenkhuṇa → prekhuṇa → pekhuṇa

Pecca

“after having gone past,” i.e. after death, having departed SN i.182; SN iii.98; AN ii.174 sq.; AN iii.34, AN iii.46, AN iii.78; Snp 185, Snp 188 Snp 248, Snp 598, Snp 661; Iti 111; Dhp 15, Dhp 131 (= paraloke Dhp-a hi.51); Ja i.169; Ja v.489, Pv i.119; iii.75 (v.l. pacca) The form peccaṃ under influence of Prk. (AMg.) peccā (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. 587) at Ja vi.360.

ger. of pa + i, cp. BSk. pretya Jtm 3154

Peṭaka

(adj.) “what belongs to the Piṭaka,” as title of a non-canonical book for the usual Peṭak’ opadesa “instruction in the Piṭaka.” dating from the beginning of our era (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. p. 18), mentioned at Vism 141; Dhs-a 165. Cp. tipeṭaka, see also piṭaka.

fr. piṭaka

Peṇāhikā

(f.) a species of bird (crane?) Mil 364, Mil 402; shortened to peṇāhi at Mil 407 (in the uddāna). Cp. Mil trsl. ii.343.

dial.; etym. uncertain

Peṇṇakata

is v.l. for paṇṇakata Npl. at Vv 455 sq. (see Vv-a 197).

Peta

dead, departed, the departed spirit. The Buddhistic peta represents the Vedic pitaraḥ (manes, cp. pitṛyajña), as well as the Brāhmaṇic preta. The first are souls of the “fathers,” the second ghosts, leading usually a miserable existence as the result (kammaphala) or punishment of some former misdeed (usually avarice) They may be raised in this existence by means of the dakkhiṇā (sacrificial gift) to a higher category of mahiddhikā petā (alias yakkhas), or after their period of expiation shift into another form of existence (manussa, deva, tiracchāna). The punishment in the Nirayas is included in the peta existence. Modes of suffering are given SN ii.255; cp K.S. ii, 170 p. On the whole subject see Stede, Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914; in the Peta Vatthu the unhappy ghosts are represented, whereas the Vimāna Vatthu deals with the happy ones.

1. (souls of the departed, manes) DN iii.189 (petānaṃ kālakatānaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ anupadassati); AN iii.43 (id.); i.155 sq.v.132 (p. ñātisalohita); MN i.33; SN i.61 = SN i.204; Snp 585 Snp 590, Snp 807 (petā-kālakatā = matā Nd i.126); Ja v.7 (= mata C.); Pv i.57; i.121; ii.610. As pubba-peta (“deceased-before”) at AN ii.68; AN iii.45; AN iv.244; Ja ii.360.

2. (unhappy ghosts) SN ii.255 sq.; Vin iv.269 (contrasted with purisa, yakkha & tiracchāna-gata) AN v.269 (dānaṃ petānaṃ upakappati); Ja iv.495 sq (yakkhā pisācā petā, cp. preta-piśācayoḥ MBhār. 13 732); Vb 412 sq.; Sdhp 96 sq ■ manussapeta a ghost in human form Ja iii.72; Ja v.68; Vv-a 23. The later tradition on Petas in their var. classes and states is reflected in Mil 294 (4 classes: vantāsikā, khuppipāsā nijjhāma-taṇhikā, paradatt’ ûpajīvino) & 357 (appearance and fate); Vism 501 = Vb-a 97 (as state of suffering with narakā, tiracchā, asurā); Vb-a 455 (as nijjhāmataṇhikā, khuppipāsikā, paradatt’ upajīvino). 3. (happy ghosts) mahiddhikā petī Pv i.101; yakkha mahiddhika Pv iv.154; Vimānapeta mahiddhika Pv-a 145; peta mahiddhika Pv-a 217. [Cp. BSk. pretamahardhika Divy 14] ■ f. petī Vin iv.20; Ja i.240; Pv i.62; Pv-a 67 and passim. Vimānapetī Pv-a 47, Pv-a 50 Pv-a 53 and in Vimāna-vatthu passim.

-upapattika born as a peta Pv-a 119. -katha (pubba˚ tales (or talk) about the dead (not considered orthodox DN i.8, cp. DN-a i.90; AN v.128. -kicca duty towards the deceased (i.e. death-rites) Ja ii.5; Dhp-a i.328. -rājā king of the Petas (i.e. Yama) Ja v.453 (˚visayaṃ na muñcati “does not leave behind the realm of the Petaking”); C. expls by petayoni and divides the realm into petavisaya and kālakañjaka-asura-visaya ■ yoni the peta realm Pv-a 9, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 103 and passim -loka the peta world Sdhp 96. -vatthu a peta or ghost-story; Name of one (perhaps the latest) of the canonical books belonging to the Suttanta-Piṭaka Kp-a 12; DN-a i.178 (Ankura˚).

pp of pa + ī, lit. gone past, gone before

Petattana

(nt.) state or condition of a Peta Thag 1128.

abstr. fr. peta

Pettanika

one who lives on the fortune or power inherited from his father AN iii.76 = AN iii.300.

fr. pitar

Pettāpiya

fatḥer’s brother, paternal uncle AN iii.348 AN v.138 (gloss pitāmaho).

for pettāviya (Epic Sk. pitṛvya), cp. Trenckner, Notes 6216, 75

Pettika

(adj.) paternal Vin iii.16; Vin iv.223; DN ii.232; SN v.146 = Mil 368 (p. gocara); (sake p. visaye ʻyour own home-groundsʼ) DN iii.58; SN v.146; Ja ii.59; Ja vi.193 (iṇa). Also in cpd. mātā-pettika maternal & paternal DN i.34, DN i.92; Ja i.146.

fr. pitar, for pētika, cp. Epic Sk. paitṛka & P. petteyya

Pettivisaya

(& Pitti˚) the world of the manes, the realm of the petas (synonymous with petavisaya & petayoni) DN iii.234; Iti 93; Ja v.186; Pv ii.22; ii.79; Mil 310; Dhp-a i.102; Dhp-a iv.226; Vism 427; Vb-a 4, Vb-a 455; Pv-a 25 sq., 29, 59 sq., 214, 268 Sdhp 9.

Sk. *paitrya-viṣaya & *pitryaviṣaya, der. fr. pitar, but influenced by peta

Petteyya

(adj.) father-loving, showing filial piety towards one’s father DN iii.72, DN iii.74; SN v.467; AN i.138; Ja iii.456; Ja v.35; Pv ii.718. See also matteyya.

fr. pitar; cp. Vedic pitrya

Petteyyatā

(f.) reverence towards one’s father DN iii.70 (a˚), 145, 169; Dhp 332 (= pitari sammāpaṭipatta Dhp-a iv.34); Nd ii.294. Cp. matteyyatā.

abstr. fr. petteyya

Petyā

(adv.) from the father’s side Ja v.214 (= pitito).

fr. pitar, for Sk. pitrā; cp. Trenckner, Notes 564

Pema

(nt.) love, affection DN i.50; DN iii.284 sq.; MN i.101 sq.; SN iii.122; SN iv.72, SN iv.329 SN v.89, SN v.379; AN ii.213; AN iii.326 sq.; Snp 41; Dhp 321; DN-a i.75. -(a)vigata-pema with(out) love or affection DN iii.238, DN iii.252; SN iii.7 sq., 107 sq., 170; iv.387; AN ii.174 sq.; AN iv.15, AN iv.36, AN iv.461 sq.

fr. prī, see pīṇeti & piya & cp. BSk. prema Jtm 221; Vedic preman cons. stem

Pemaka

(m. or nt.) = pema Ja iv.371.

fr. pema

Pemanīya

(adj.) affectionate, kind, loving amiable, agreeable DN i.4 (cp. DN-a i.75); ii.20 (˚ssara) AN ii.209; Pp 57; Ja iv.470.

fr. pema as grd. formation, cp. BSk., premaṇīya Mvu iii.343

Peyya1

to be drunk, drinkable, only in compn or neg. apeyya undrinkable AN iii.188; Ja iv.205 Ja iv.213 (apo apeyyo). maṇḍa˚; to be drunk like cream, i.e. of the best quality SN ii.29. manāpika˚; sweet to drink Mil 313. duppeyya difficult to drink Sdhp 158. See also kākapeyya.

grd. of pibati

Peyya2

= piya, only in cpds. vajja˚; kindness of language, kind speech, one of the 4 sangaha-vatthus (grounds of popularity) AN ii.32, AN ii.248; AN iv.219, AN iv.364; DN iii.190, DN iii.192, DN iii.232; Ja v.330. Cp. BSk. priya-vādya Mvu i.3; and ˚vācā kind language DN iii.152; Vv 8436 (= piyavacana Vv-a 345) ■ It is doubtful whether vāca-peyya at Snp 303 (Ep. of sacrifice) is the same as ˚vācā (as adj.), or whether it represents vāja-peyya [Vedic vāja sacrificial food] as Bdhgh expls it at Snp-a 322 (= vājam ettha pivanti; v.l. vāja˚), thus peyya peyya1.

*priya-vadya

Peyyāla

(nt.?) repetition, succession, formula way of saying, phrase (= pariyāya 5) Vism 46 (˚mukha beginning of discourse), 351 (id. and bahu˚-tanti having many discourses or repetitions), 411 (˚pāḷi a row of successions or etceteras); Vv-a 117 (pāḷi˚ vasena “because of the successive Pāli text”) ■ Very freq. in abridged form, where we would say “etc.,” to indicate that a passage has be to repeated (either from preceding context, or to be supplied from memory, if well known) The literal meaning would be “here (follows) the formula (pariyāya).” We often find pa for pe, e.g. AN v.242, AN v.270, AN v.338, AN v.339, AN v.355; sometimes pa + pe combd e.g. SN v.466 ■ As pe is the first syllable of peyyāla so la is the last and is used in the same sense; the variance is according to predilection of certain MSS.; la is found e.g. SN v.448, SN v.267 sq.; or as v.l. of pe: AN v.242, AN v.243 AN v.354; or la + pe combd: SN v.464, SN v.466 ■ On syllable pe Trenckner, Notes 66, says: “The sign of abridgment pe, or as it is written in Burmese copies, pa, means peyyāla which is not an imperative ʻinsert, fill up the gap,ʼ but a substantive, peyyālo or peyyālaṃ, signifying a phrase to be repeated over & over again. I consider it a popular corruption of the synonymous pariyāya, passing through *payyāya, with-eyy-for-ayy-, like seyyā, Sk. śayyā.” See also Vin. Texts i.291; Oldenberg, K.Z. 35, 324.

a Māgadhism for pariyāya, so Kern, Toev. s. v. after Trenckner, cp. BSk. piyāla and peyāla Mvu iii.202, Mvu iii.219

Perita

is Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading for what he considered a faulty spelling in bhaya-merita (p for m Ja iv.424 = Ja v.359. This however is bhaya-m-erita with the hiatus-m, and to supplant perita (= Sk. prerita) is unjustified.

Pelaka

a hare Ja vi.538 (= sasa C.).

etym.?

Peḷa

a lump, only in yaka˚; the liver (-lump) Snp 195 (= yakana-piṇḍa Snp-a 247) = Ja i.146.

a Prk. form for piṇḍa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 122 peḍhāla

Peḷā

1. a (large) basket Ja iv.458; Ja vi.185; Cp ii.25 Mil 23, Mil 282; Vism 304; Kp-a 46 (peḷāghata, wrong reading, see p. 68 App.); Thag-a 29.

2. a chest (for holding jewelry etc.) Pv iv.142; Mvu 36, Mvu 20; Dhs-a 242 (peḷ-opamā, of the 4 treasure-boxes) ■ Cp. piṭaka.

cp. Class. & B. Sk. peṭa, f. peṭī & peṭā, peḍā Divy 251, Divy 365; and the BSk. var. phelā Divy 503; Mvu ii.465

Peḷikā

(f.) a basket Dhp-a i.227 (pasādhana˚, v.l. pelakā).

cp. peḷā

Pesa

is spurious spelling for pessa (q.v.).

Pesaka

employer, controller, one who attends or looks after Vin ii.177 (ārāmika˚ etc.); AN iii.275 (id.).

fr. pa + iṣ, cp. Vedic preṣa order, command

Pesakāra

weaver DN i.52; Vin iii.259; Vin iv.7; Ja iv.475; Dhp-a i.424 (˚vīthi); iii.170 sq.; Vb-a 294 sq. (˚dhītā the weaver’s daughter; story of-) Pv-a 42 sq., 67.

pesa + kāra, epsa = Vedic peśaḥ, fr. piś: see piṃsati1

Pesana

(nt.) sending out, message; service Ja iv.362 (pesanāni gacchanti); v.17 (pesane pesiyanto.)

-kāraka a servant Ja vi.448; Vv-a 349. -kārikā (a girl) doing service, a messenger, servant Ja iii.414; Dhp-a i.227.

fr. pa + iṣ, see peseti

Pesanaka

(adj.) “message sender,” employing for service, in ˚corā robbers making (others) servants Ja i.253. Pesanika (iya)

fr. pesana

Pesanika (˚iya)

(adj.) connected with messages, going messages, only in phrase jaṅgha˚; messenger on foot Vin iii.185; Ja ii.82; Mil 370 (˚iya).

fr. pesana

Pesala

(adj.) lovable, pleasant, well-behaved amiable SN i.149; SN ii.387; AN iv.22; AN v.170; Snp 678; Snp p.124; Mil 373; Sdhp 621. Often as Ep. of a good bhikkhu, e.g. at SN i.187; Vin i.170; Vin ii.241; Ja iv.70; Vv-a 206; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 268.

cp. Epic Sk. peśala; Bdhgh’s pop. etym. at Snp-a 475 is “piya-sīla”

Pesāca

is reading at DN i.54 for pisāca (so v.l.). Pesi (pesi)

Pesi (pesī)

(f.) 1. a lump, usually a mass of flesh Ja iii.223 = Dhp-a iv.67 (pesi = maṃsapesi C.). Thus maṃsapesi, muscle Vin ii.25 ≈ (maṃsapes ûpamā kāmā); iii.105; MN i.143, MN i.364; SN ii.256; SN iv.193 (in characteristic of lohitaka); Vism 356; Pv-a 199. 2. the foetus in the third stage after conception (between abbuda & ghana; ) SN i.206; Ja iv.496; Nd i.120; Mil 40 Vism 236.

3. a piece, bit (for pesikā), in veḷu˚ Ja iv.205.

cp. Epic Sk. peśī

Pesikā

(f.) (-˚) rind, shell (of fruit) only in cpds. amba˚; Vin ii.109; vaṃsa˚; Ja i.352; veḷu˚; (a bit of bamboo) DN ii.324; Ja ii.267, Ja ii.279; Ja iii.276; Ja iv.382.

cp. Sk. *peśikā

Pesita

1. sent out or forth Snp 412 (rājadūta p.) Vv 217 (= uyyojita Vv-a 108); Dhp-a iii.191 pesit-atta is the C. expln at SN i.53 (as given at K.S. 320) of pahit-atta (trsln “puts forth all his strength”) Bdhgh incorrectly taking pahita as pp. of pahiṇati to send whereas it is pp. of padahati.

2. ordered, what has been ordered, in pesit-āpesitaṃ order and prohibition Vin ii.177.

pp. of peseti

Pesuṇa

(nt.) = pesuñña SN i.240; Snp 362, Snp 389, Snp 862 sq., 941; Ja v.397; Pv i.33 Pv-a 16; Sdhp 55, Sdhp 66, Sdhp 81.

-kāraka one who incites to slander Ja i.200, Ja i.267.

fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśuna

Pesuṇika

(adj.) slanderous, calumnious Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13. Pesuniya & Pesuneyya;

fr. pesuṇa

Pesuṇiya & Pesuṇeyya

(nt.) = pesuñña; 1. (pesuṇiya) Snp 663, Snp 928; Pv i.32.

2. (pesuṇeyya) SN i.228, SN i.230; Snp 852; Nd i.232.

Pesuñña

(nt.) [abstr. fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśunya. The other (diaeretic) forms are pesuṇiya & pesuṇeyya backbiting, calumny, slander MN i.110; DN iii.69; AN iv.401; Vin iv.12; Nd i.232, Nd i.260; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 15.

Peseti

to send forth or out, esp. on a message or to a special purpose, i.e. to employ as a servant or (intrs.) to do service (so in many derivations 1. to send out Ja i.86, Ja i.178, Ja i.253; Ja iv.169 (paṇṇaṃ) v.399; vi.448; Mvu 14, Mvu 29 (rathaṃ); Dhp-a iii.190; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 53.

2. to employ or order (cp. pesaka) in Pass. pesiyati to be ordered or to be in service Vin ii.177 (ppr. pesiyamāna); Ja v.17 (ppr. pesiyanto)-pp. pesita. See also pessa & derivations.;

pa + iṣ to send

Pessa

a messenger, a servant often in combn dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā, e.g. DN i.141; SN i.76, SN i.93 (slightly diff. in verse); AN ii.208 (spelt pesā); iv.45; Dhp-a ii.7. See also AN iii.37; AN iv.266, AN iv.270; Ja v.351; Pp 56; DN-a i.300 At Snp 615 pessa is used in the sense of an abstr. n. pessitā service (= veyyavacca Snp-a 466). So also in cpds.

-kamma service Ja vi.374; -kāra a servant Ja vi.356.

grd. formn fr. peseti, Vedic preṣya, f. preṣyā. This is the contracted form, whilst the diaeretic form is pesiya, for which also pesika

Pessitā

(f.) being a servant, doing service Ja vi.208 (para˚ to someone else). Pessiya & ka;

abstr. fr. pessa, Sk. *preṣyatā

Pessiya & ˚ka

servant; m. either pessiya Vv 8446 (spelt pesiya, expld by pesana-kāraka, veyyāvaccakara Vv-a 349); Ja vi.448 (= pesana-kāraka C.), or pessika Snp 615, Snp 651; Ja vi.552; f. either pessiyā (para˚ Vv 185 (spelt pesiyā, but v.l. SS pessiyā, expld as pesaniyā paresaṃ veyyāvacca-kārī Vv-a 94); Ja iii.413 (= parehi pesitabbā pesana-kārikā C. 414), or pessikā Ja vi.65.

see pessa

Pehi

is imper. 2nd sg. of pa + i, “go on,” said to a horse AN iv.190 sq., cp. SN i.123.

Pokkhara

(nt.) 1. a lotus plant, primarily the leaf of it, figuring in poetry and metaphor as not being able to be wetted by water Snp 392, Snp 812 (vuccati paduma-pattaṃ Nd i.135); Dhp 336; Iti 84.

2. the skin of a drum (from its resemblance to the lotus-leaf SN ii.267; Mil 261 (bheri˚). As Np. of an angel (Gandhabba) “Drum” at Vv 189.

3. a species of waterbird (crane): see cpd. ˚sataka.

-ṭṭha standing in water (?) Vin i.215 (vanaṭṭha + ) 238 (id.). -patta a lotus leaf Snp 625; Dhp 401 (= paduma-patta Dhp-a iv.166); Mil 250. -madhu the honey sap of Costus speciosus (a lotus) Ja v.39, Ja v.466. -vassa “lotus-leaf rain,” a portentous shower of rain, serving as special kind of test shower in which certain objects are wetted, but those showing a disinclination towards moisture are left untouched, like a lotus-leaf Ja i.88; Ja vi.586; Kp-a 164; Dhp-a iii.163. -sātaka a species of crane, Ardea Siberica Ja vi.539 (koṭṭha + ) Snp-a 359. Cp. Np. Pokkharasāti Snp 594; Snp p.115; Snp-a 372.

cp. Vedic puṣkara, fr. pus, though a certain relation to puṣpa seems to exist, cp. Sk. puṣpapattra a kind of arrow (lit. lotus-leaf) Halāyudha 2 314, and P. pokkhara-patta

Pokkharaṇī

(f.) a lotuspond an artificial pool or small lake for water-plants (see note in Dial. ii.210) Vin i.140, Vin i.268; Vin ii.123; DN ii.178 sq.; SN i.123, SN i.204; SN ii.106; SN v.460; AN i.35, AN i.145; AN iii.187 AN iii.238; Ja ii.126; Ja v.374 (Khemī), 388 (Doṇa); Pv iii.33iv.121; Snp-a 354 (here in meaning of a dry pit or dugout); Vv-a 160; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 77, Pv-a 152. pokkharaññā gen Pv ii.129; instr. SN i.233; loc. Vin ii.123. pokkharaṇiyāyaṃ loc. AN iii.309 ■ pl. pokkharaṇiyo Vin i.268; Vv-a 191; Pv-a 77; metric pokkharañño Vv 4411 Pv ii.119: ii.78.

fr. puṣkara lotus; Vedic puṣkariṇī, BSk. has puskiriṇī, e.g. Avs i.76; Avs ii.201 sq.

Pokkharatā

(f.) splendidness “flower-likeness,” only in cpd. vaṇṇa-pokkharatā beauty of complexion DN i.114; Vin i.268; SN i.95 SN ii.279; AN i.38, AN i.86; AN ii.203; AN iii.90; DN-a i.282; Kp-a 179; Vv-a 14; Pv-a 46. The BSk. passage at Avs ii.202 reads “śobhāṃ varṇaṃ puṣkalatāṃ ca.”

is it fr. pokkhara lotus (cp. Sk. pauṣkara), thus “lotus-ness,” or founded on Vedic puṣpa blossom The BSk. puṣkalatā (Avs ii.201) is certainly a misconstruction if it is constructed fr. the Pali

Poṅkha

arrow, only in redupl. (iterative) cpd. poṅkh’ ānupoṅkhaṃ (adv. arrow after arrow, shot after shot, i.e. constantly continuously SN v.453, SN v.454; Nd ii.631 (in def. of sadā) DN-a i.188; Vv-ah 351. The expln is problematic.

increment form of punkha

Poṭa

a bubble Ja iv.457 (v.l. poṭha). See also phoṭa. Potaki (i?)

fr. sphuṭ;

Poṭaki (˚ī?)

(m. f.?) a kind of grass, in ˚tūla a kind of cotton, “grass-tuft, thistle-down (?) Vin ii.150; Vin iv.170 (id., 3 kinds of cotton spelt potaki here).

etym. uncertain, prob. Non-Aryan

Poṭakila

a kind of grass, Saccharum spontaneum Thag 27 = Thag 233; Ja vi.508 (= p.˚-tiṇaṃ nāma C.).

etym. unknown, cp. poṭaki & (lexic.) Sk. poṭagala a kind of reed; the variant is poṭagala

Poṭṭhabba

is spurious reading for phoṭṭhabba (q.v.).

Poṭha

is; aṅguli˚; snapping of one’s fingers (as sign of applause) Ja v.67. Cp poṭhana & phoṭeti.;

fr. puth, cp. poṭhana & poṭheti

Poṭhana

(& Pothana) (nt.) 1. striking, beating Ja ii.169 (tajjana˚); v.72 (udaka˚); vi.41 (kappāsa˚dhanuka). At all Ja passages th.

2. (th) snapping one’s fingers Ja i.394 (anguli˚, + celukkhepa); Thag-a 76 (anguli˚, for accharā-sanghāta Thig 67). Cp nippothana.

fr. poṭheti

Poṭhita

(& Pothita) beaten, struck Mil 240 (of cloth, see Kern, Toev. s. poṭheti); Ja iii.423 (mañca; v.l. BB pappoṭ˚) Kp-a 173 (˚tulapicu cotton beaten seven times, i.e. very soft; v.l. pothita, see App. p. 877); Dhp-a i.48 (su˚); Pv-a 174 ■ Cp. paripothita.

pp. of poṭheti

Poṭheti

(& Potheti) 1. to beat, strike Snp 682 (bhujāni = appoṭheti Snp-a 485); Ja i.188, Ja i.483 (th) ii.394; vi.548 (= ākoṭeti); Dhp-a i.48; Dhp-a ii.27 (th) 67 (th); Vv-a 68 (th); Pv-a 65 (th).

2. to snap one’s fingers as a token of annoyance DN ii.96; or of pleasure Ja iii.285 (anguliyo poṭhesi) ■ pp. poṭhita ■ Caus. II poṭhāpeti (poth˚) to cause to be beaten or flogged Mil 221; Dhp-a i.399 ■ Cp. pappoṭheti.

fr. puth = sphuṭ;

Poṇa1

(nt.) only in cpd. danta˚; a tooth pick Vin iv.90; Ja iv.69; Mil 15; Snp-a 272. As dantapoṇaka at Dāvs i.57 ■ kūṭa-poṇa at Vism 268 read ˚goṇa.

= poṇa2?

Poṇa2

(adj.) 1. sloping down, prone, in; anupubba˚; gradually sloping (of the ocean) Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198 sq. = Ud 53–⁠2. (-˚) sloping towards, going to, converging or leading to Nibbāna; besides in var. phrases, in general as tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra, “leading to that end.” As nibbāna˚; e.g. at MN i.493; SN v.38 sq.; AN iii.443; cp. Vv 8442 (nekkhamma˚-nibbāna-ninna Vv-a 348); taṃ˚; Pts ii.197; ṭhāne Pv-a 190; viveka˚ AN iv.224, AN iv.233; AN v.175; samādhi˚; Mil 38; kiṃ˚ MN i.302.

fr. pa + ava + nam, cp. ninna & Vedic pravaṇa

Poṇika

(adj.) that which is prone, going prone; DN-a i.23 where the passage is “tiracchāna-gata-pāṇāpoṇika-nikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti,” quoted from SN iii.152, where it runs thus: “tiracchāna-gata pāṇā te pi bhikkhave tiracchānagatā pāṇā citten’ eva cittatā. The passage is referred to with poṇika at Kp-a 12 where we read “tiracchāna-gatā pāṇā poṇika-nikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti.” Thus we may take poṇikanikāya as “the kingdom of those which go prone (i.e. the animals).

fr. poṇa2

Pota1

the young of an animal Ja ii.406 (˚sūkara); Cp i.102 (udda˚) Snp-a 125 (sīha˚).

cp. Epic Sk. pota, see putta for etym.

Pota2

a boat Dāvs v.58; Vv-a 42.

Epic Sk. pota; dial. form for plota (?), of plu

Pota3

a millstone, grindstone, only as nisada˚; Vin i.201; Vism 252.

etym.?

Potaka

(-˚) 1. the young of an animal MN i.104 (kukkuṭa˚); Ja i.202 (supaṇṇa˚), 218 (hatthi˚); ii.288 (assa˚ colt); iii.174 (sakuṇa˚); Pv-a 152 (gaja˚) ■ f potikā Ja i.207 (haṃsa˚); iv.188 (mūsika˚).

2. a small branch, offshoot, twig; in twig; in amba˚; young mango sprout Dhp-a iii.206 sq.; araṇi˚; small firewood Mil 53.

fr. pota1

Pottha1

poor, indigent, miserable Ja ii.432 (= potthakapilotikāya nivatthatā pottho C.; v.l. poṭha). See also *ponti, with which ultimately identical.

?

Pottha2

modelling, only in cpd. ˚kamma plastering (i.e. using a mixture of earth, lime, cowdung & water as mortar Ja vi.459; carving Dhs-a 334; and ˚kara a modeller in clay Ja i.71. Cp. potthaka1.

later Sk. pusta, etym. uncertain; loan-word?

Potthaka1

1. a book Ja i.2 (aya˚ ledger); iii.235, 292; iv.299, 487; Vv-a 117.

2 anything made or modelled in clay (or wood etc.), in rūpa˚ a modelled figure Ja vi.342; Thag-a 257; DN-a i.198; Sdhp 363, Sdhp 383. Cp. pottha2.

cp. Class. Sk. pustaka

Potthaka2

(nt.) cloth made of makaci fibre Vin i.306 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.247); AN i.246 sq.; Ja iv.251 (= ghana-sāṭaka C.; v.l. saṇa˚); Pp 33.

etym.?

Potthanikā

(f.) a dagger (= potthanī) Vin ii.190 = DN-a i.135 (so read here with v.l. for T. ˚iyā).

fr. puth ?

Potthanī

(f.) a butcher’s knife Ja vi.86 (maṃsakoṭṭhana˚), 111 (id.).

fr. puth ?

Pothujjanika

(adj.) belonging to ordinary man, common, ordinary, in 2 combns viz. (1) phrase hīna gamma p. anariya Vin i.10; SN iv.330; AN v.216 (2) with ref. to iddhi Vin ii.183; Ja i.360; Vism 97. Cp. Vin. Texts iii.230. The BSk. forms are either pārthag-janika Lal. Vist 540, or prāthug-janika Mvu iii.331.

fr. puthujjana

Pothetvā

at Ja ii.404 (ummukkāni p.) is doubtful. The vv.ll. are yodhetvā & sodhetvā (the latter a preferable reading).

Poddava

see gāma˚.

Ponobhavika

(adj.) leading to rebirth MN i.48, MN i.299, MN i.464, MN i.532; SN iii.26; SN iv.186; DN iii.57; AN ii.11 sq., 172; iii.84, 86; v.88; Ne 72; Vism 506 Vb-a 110.

fr. punabbhava, with preservation of the second o (puno → punaḥ) see puna

Ponti

(vv.ll. poṭhi, sonti) Thig 422, Thig 423 is doubtful; the expln at Thag-a 269 is “pilotikākhaṇḍa,” thus “rags (of an ascetic),” cp. J.P.T.S. 1884. See also pottha1, with which evidently identical, though misread.

Porāṇa

(adj.) old, ancient, former DN i.71, DN i.238; SN ii.267; Snp 313; Dhp 227 (cp. Dhp-a iii.328); Ja ii.15 (˚kāle in the past); Vb-a 1 (˚aṭṭhakathā), 523 (id.); Kp-a 247 (˚pāṭha); Snp-a 131 (id.); Dhp-a i.17; Pv-a 1 (˚aṭṭhakathā), 63 ■ Porāṇā (pl.) the ancients, ancient authorities or writers Vism passim esp. Note, 764; Kp-a 123, Kp-a 158; Snp-a 291, Snp-a 352 Snp-a 604; Vb-a 130, Vb-a 254, Vb-a 299, Vb-a 397, Vb-a 513.

= purāṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paurāṇa

Porāṇaka

(adj.) 1. ancient, former, of old (cp. purāṇa 1) Ja iii.16 (˚paṇḍitā); Pv-a 93 (id.), 99 (id.); Dhp-a i.346 (kula-santaka).

2. old, worn, much used (cp. purāṇa 2) Ja iv.471 (magga).

fr. porāṇa

Porin

(adj.) [fr. pora = Epic Sk. paura citizen, see pura. Semantically cp. urbane → urbanus → urbs; polite πολίτησ ̓πόλις. For pop. etym. see DA i.73 & 282 belonging to a citizen, i.e. citizenlike, urbane, polite usually in phrase; porī vācā polite speech DN i.4, DN i.114; SN i.189; SN ii.280 = AN ii.51; AN iii.114; Pp 57; Dhs 1344; DN-a i.75, DN-a i.282; Dhs-a 397. Cp. BSk. paurī vācā Mvu iii.322.

Porisa1

(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) human, fit for a man Snp 256 (porisa dhura), cp. porisiya & poroseyya.

2. (m.) = purisa esp. in sense of purisa 2, i.e. servant, used collectively (abstract form;n like Ger. dienerschaft, E. service servants) “servants” esp. in phrase dāsa-kammakaraporisa Vin i.240; AN i.145, AN i.206; AN ii.78; AN iii.45, AN iii.76, AN iii.260; Dhp-a iv.1; dāsa˚ a servant Snp 769 (three kinds mentioned at Nd i.11, viz. bhaṭakā kammakarā upajīvino); rāja king’s service, servant of the king DN i.135; AN iv.286 AN iv.322; sata˚ a hundred servants Vism 121. For purisa in uttama˚ (= mahāpurisa) Dhp 97 (cp. Dhp-a ii.188). Cp posa.

abstr. fr. purisa, for *pauruṣa or *puruṣya)

Porisa2

(nt.) 1. business, doing of a man (or servant cp. purisa 2), service, occupation; human doing, activity MN i.85 (rāja˚); Vv 6311 (= purisa-kicca Vv-a 263); Pv iv.324 (uṭṭhāna˚ = purisa-viriya, purisa-kāra Pv-a 252)

2. height of a man MN i.74, MN i.187, MN i.365.

abstr. fr. purisa, *pauruṣyaṃ, cp. porisiya and poroseyya

Porisatā

(f.), only in neg. a˚ inhuman or superhuman state, or: not served by any men (or servants) Vv-a 275. The reading is uncertain.

abstr. fr. porisa

Porisāda

man-eater, cannibal Ja v.34 sq., 471 sq., 486, 488 sq., 499, 510.

fr. purisa + ad to eat

Porisādaka

= porisāda Ja v.489. Cp. pursādaka Ja v.91.

Porisiya

(adj.) 1. of human nature, human Ja iv.213.

2. Of the height of man Vin ii.138.

fr. purisa, cp. porisa & poroseyya

Poroseyya

= porisiya (cp. porisa1 1) fit for man, human MN i.366. The word is somewhat doubtful, but in all likelihood it is a derivation fr. pura (cp. porin; Sk *paura), thus to be understood as *paurasya → *porasya → *poraseyya → *poroseyya with assimilation. The meaning is clearly “very fine, urbane, fashionable” thus not derived from purisa, although C. expls by “puris’ ânucchavikaṃ yānaṃ” (M. i.561). The passage runs “yānaṃ poroseyyaṃ pavara-maṇi-kuṇḍalaṃ” with vv.ll. voropeyya & oropeyya;. Neumann accepts oropeyya as reading & translates (wrongly) “belüde” see Mittl. Slg. 21921; vol. ii. pp. 45 & 666. The reading; poroseyya seems to be established as lectio difficilior On form see also Trenckner, Notes 75.

Porohita = purohita

Dhp-a i.174 (v.l. BB pur˚).

Porohacca

(nt.) the character or office of a family priest DN ii.243. As porohicca at Snp 618 (= purohita-kamma Snp-a 466). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 75.

fr. purohita

Posa1

= purisa, man (poetical form, only found in verse) Vin i.230; SN i.13, SN i.205; Ja iii.309; AN iv.266; Snp 110, Snp 662; Dhp 104, Dhp 125 (cp Dhp-a iii.34); Ja v.306; Ja vi.246, Ja vi.361poso at Ja iii.331 is gen. sg. of puṃs = Sk. puṃsaḥ.

contraction of purisa fr. *pūrṣa → *pussa → *possa → posa. So Geiger, P.Gr. 303

Posa2

(adj.) to be fed or nourished, only in dup˚; difficult to nourish SN i.61.

= *poṣya, grd. of poseti, puṣ

Posaka

(adj.) nourishing, feeding AN i.62, AN i.132 = Iti 110 (āpādaka + ); f. ˚ikā a nurse, a female attendant Vin ii.289 (āpādikā + ).

fr. posa2

Posatā

(f.) only-˚, in su˚ & dup˚; easy & difficult support Vin ii.2.

abstr. fr. posa2

Posatha

= uposatha Ja iv.329; Ja vi.119.

cp. BSk. poṣadha Divy 116, Divy 121, and Prk. posaha (posahiya = posathika) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 141

Posathika

= uposathika Ja iv.329. Cp. anuposathika & anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ.;

Posana

(nt.) nourishing, feeding, support Vv-a 137. Posapeti & Posaveti;

fr. puṣ

Posāpeti & Posāveti

to have brought up, to give into the care of, to cause to be nourished Vin i.269 (pp. posāpita) ≈ DN-a i.133 (posāvita, v.l. posāp˚). Posavanika & ya;

Caus. II. fr. poseti

Posāvanika & ˚ya

(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) to be brought up, being reared fed Vin i.272; Ja iii.134, Ja iii.432. -˚iya Dhp-a iii.35; Ja iii.35; Ja iii.429 (& ˚iyaka).

2. (nt.) fee for bringing somebody up, allowance, money for food, sustenance Ja ii.289; Dhp-a iv.40; Vv-a 158 (˚mūla). -˚iya Ja i.191.

fr. posāvana = posāpana of Caus. posāpeti

Posita

nourished, fed Cp iii.32; Vv-a 173 (udaka˚).

pp. of poseti

Posituṃ

at Vin ii.151 stands for phusituṃ “to sprinkle,” cp. Vin. Texts iii.169. See phusati2.

Posin

(-˚) (adj.) thriving (on), nourished by Vin i.6; DN i.75; SN i.138; Snp 65 (anañña˚; cp. Nd ii.36) 220 (dāra˚; ); DN-a i.219.

fr. poseti

Poseti

to nourish, support, look after, bring up, take care of, feed, keep Vin i.269; SN i.181; AN i.117; Ja i.134 Ja iii.467; Nd ii.36; Vism 305; Vv-a 138, Vv-a 299 ■ pp. posita -Caus. posāpeti.

Ph.

puṣ

Ph

Phaggu

a special period of fasting MN i.39; DN-a i.139. See also pheggu.

in forṃ = Vedic phalgu (small, feeble), but in meaning different

Phagguṇa

& Phagguṇī (f.) Name of a month (Feb. 15;th-March 15th), marking the beginning of Spring; always with ref. to the spring full moon, as phagguṇa-puṇṇamā at Vism 418; phagguṇi˚ Ja i.86.

cp. Vedic phālguna & ˚ī

Phaṇa

the hood of a snake Vin i.91 (˚hatthaka, with hands like a snake’s hood); Ja iii.347 (patthaṭa˚); Dhp-a iii.231 (˚ṃ ukkhipitvā); iv.133 Freq. as phaṇaṃ katvā (only thus, in ger.) raising or spreading its hood, with spread hood Ja ii.274; Ja vi.6 Vism 399; Dhp-a ii.257.

cp. Epic Sk. phaṇa

Phaṇaka

an instrument shaped like a snake’s hood, used to smooth the hair Vin ii.107.

fr. phaṇa

Phaṇijjaka

a kind of plant, which is enumd at Vin iv.35 = DN-a i.81 as one of the aggabīja, i.e. plants propagated by slips or cuttings, together with ajjuka & hirivera. At Ja vi.536 the C. gives bhūtanaka as expln. According to Childers it is the plant Samīraṇa.

etym.?

Phandati

1. to throb, palpitate DN i.52 = MN i.404, cp. DN-a i.159; Nd i.46–⁠2. to twitch, tremble, move, stir Ja ii.234; Ja vi.113 (of fish wriggling when thrown on land) ■ Caus. II phandāpeti to make throb DN i.52 = MN i.404 ■ pp phandita (q.v.). Cp. pari˚, vi˚, sam˚. The nearest synonym is calati.

spand, cp. Gr. σφαδάςω to twitch, σφοδρός violent; Lat. pendeo “pend” i.e. hang down, cp pendulum; Ags. finta tail, lit. mover, throbber

Phandana

1. (adj.) throbbing, trembling, wavering Dhp 33 (phandanaṃ capalaṃ); Ja vi.528 (˚māluvā trembling creeper) Dhp-a i.50 (issa˚ throbbing with envy).

2. (m.) Name of a tree Dalbergia (aspen?) AN i.202; Ja iv.208 sq.; Mil 173.

3. (nt.) throb, trembling, agitation, quivering Ja vi.7 (˚mattaṃ not even one throb; cp. phandita) Nd i.46 (taṇhā etc.).

fr. phandati, cp. Sk. spandana

Phandanā

(f.) throbbing, agitation, movement, motion Snp-a 245 (calanā + ); DN-a i.111; Ne 88 C. cp. iñjanā.

fr. phandati

Phandita

(nt.) throbbing, flashing; throb MN ii.24 (˚mattā “by his throbbings only”); pl phanditāni “vapourings,” imaginings Vb 390 (where Vb-a 513 only says “phandanato phanditaṃ”) cp Brethren 344.

pp. of phandati

Phanditatta

(nt.) = phandanā SN v.315 (= iñjitatta).

abstr. fr. phandita

Pharaṇa

(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) pervading, suffused (with), quite full (of) Mil 345.

2. (nt. pervasion, suffusion, thrill Ja i.82 (˚samattha mettacitta); Ne 89 (pīti˚ etc., as m., cp. pharaṇatā); Dhs-a

166 (˚pīti all-pervading rapture, permeating zest; cp pīti pharaṇatā) ■ Cp. anu˚.

fr. pharati

Pharaṇaka

(adj.) thrilling, suffusing, pervading, filling with rapture Vv-a 16 (dvādasa yojanāni ˚pabho sarīra-vaṇṇo).

fr. pharaṇa

Pharaṇatā

(f.) suffusion, state of being pervaded (with), only-˚ in set of 4-fold suffusion, viz pīti˚; of rapture, sukha˚; of restful bliss, ceto˚; of [telepathic] consciousnss, āloka˚; of light, DN iii.277; Pts i.48 Vb 334; Ne 89.

abstr. fr. pharaṇa

Pharati

1. (trs.) to pervade permeate, fill, suffuse Pv i.1014 (= vyāpetvā tiṭṭhati Pv-a 52); Ja iii.371 (sakala-sarīraṃ); v.64 (C. for pavāti) Pv-a 14 (okāsaṃ), 276 (obhāsaṃ). To excite or stimulate the nerves Ja v.293 (rasa-haraṇiyo khobhetvā phari: see under rasa ) ■ Often in standard phrase mettā-sahagatena cetasā ekaṃ (dutiyaṃ etc.) disaṃ pharitvā viharati DN ii.186; SN v.115 and passim where pharitvā at Vism 308 = Vb-a 377 is expld by phusitvā ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Cp. BSk. ekaṃ disāṃ spharitvopasampadya viharati Mvu iii.213. Also in phrase pītiyā sarīraṃ pharati (aor. phari ) to thrill the body with rapture, e.g. Ja i.33; Ja v.494; Dhp-a ii.118 Dhp-a iv.102.

2. [in this meaning better to be derived from sphar to spread, expand, cp. pharita & phālita] to spread make expand Ja i.82 (metta-cittaṃ phari).

3. [prob of quite a diff. origin and only taken to pharati by pop analogy, perhaps to phal = sphaṭ; to split; thus kaṭṭh’atthaṃ pharati = to be split up for fuel] to serve as, only with ˚atthaṃ in phrases āhāratthaṃ ph. (after next phrase) to serve as food Mil 152; kaṭṭhatthaṃ ph. to serve as fuel AN ii.95 = SN iii.93 = Iti 90 = Ja i.482; khādaniyatthaṃ & bhojaniyatthaṃ ph. to serve as eatables Vin i.201 (so to be read in preference to ˚attaṃ) ■ pp pharita, phurita & phuṭa; cp. also phuṭṭha; see further anu˚, pari˚.

sphur & sphar;, same root as in Gr. σπαίρω to twitch; Lat. sperno “spurn” lit. kick away; Ags speornan to kick; spurnan = spur

Pharasu

hatchet, axe AN iii.162; Ja i.199, Ja i.399; Ja ii.409 Ja v.500; Dhp-a ii.204; Pv-a 277. The spelling parasu occurs at SN v.441 & Ja iii.179.

cp. Vedic paraśu = Gr. πέλεκυς; on p → ph cp. Prk. pharasu & parasu, Pischel Gr. § 208; Geiger, Gr. § 40

Pharita

1. being pervaded or permeated (by) Vv-a 68 (mettāya).

2. spread (out) Ja vi.284 (kittisaddo sakala-loke ph.) ■ Cp. phuṭṭha & phālita;.

pp. of pharati

Pharusa

(adj.) [cp. Vedic paruṣa, on ph. → p see pharasu, on attempt at etym. cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fario 1. (lit.) rough Pv ii.41.

2. (fig.) harsh, unkind, rough (of speech) Vin ii.290 (caṇḍa + ); Pv ii.34; iii.57 Ja v.296; Kv 619. In combn with vācā we find both pharusa- vācā and pharusā- vācā DN i.4, DN i.138; DN iii.69 sq., 173, 232; MN i.42 (on this and the same uncertainty as regards pisuṇā-vācā see Trenckner, at MN i.530) pharusa vacana rough speech Pv-a 15, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 83.

3. cruel Pv iv.76 (kamma = daruṇa Pv-a 265).

Phala1

(nt.) to burst, thus lit. “bursting,” i.e. ripe fruit; see phalati] 1. (lit. fruit (of trees etc.) Vv 8414 (dumā nicca-phal’ ûpapannā not to phalu, as Kern, Toev. s. v. phalu); Vism 120- amba˚; mango-fruit Pv-a 273 sq.; dussa˚; (adj.) having clothes as their fruit (of magic trees) Vv 462 (cp. Vv-a 199); patta˚; leaves & fruits, vegetables Snp 239; Pv-a 86 pavatta˚; wild fruit DN i.101; puppha˚; flower & fruit Ja iii.40. rukkha˚-ūpama Thag 490 (in simile of kāmā taken fr. MN i.130) lit. “like the fruit of trees is expld by Thag-a 288 as “anga-paccangānaṃ p(h)alibhañjan’ aṭṭhena, and trsld according to this interpretation by Mrs. Rh. D. as “fruit that brings the climber to a fall.”-Seven kinds of medicinal fruits are given at Vin i.201 scil. vilanga, pippala, marica, harītaka vibhītaka, āmalaka, goṭhaphala. At Mil 333 a set of 7 fruits is used metaphorically in simile of the Buddha’s fruit-shop, viz. sotāpatti˚, sakadāgāmi˚, anāgāmi˚ arahatta˚, suññata˚ samāpatti (cp. Cpd. 70), animitta˚ samāpatti, appaṇihita˚ samāpatti.

2. a testicle Ja iii.124 (dantehi ˚ṃ chindati = purisabhāvaṃ nāseti to castrate); vi.237 (uddhita-pphalo, adj., = uddhaṭa-bījo C.), 238 (dantehi phalāni uppāṭeti, like above). 3. (fig.) fruit, result, consequence, fruition, blessing As t.t. with ref. to the Path and the progressive attainment (enjoyment, fruition) of Arahantship it is used to denote the realization of having attained each stage of the sotāpatti, sakadāgāmi etc. (see the Mil quot under 1 and cp. Cpd. 45, 116). So freq. in exegetical literature magga, phala, nibbāna, e.g. Tikp 155, 158 Vb-a 43 & passim ■ In general it immediately precedes Nibbāna (see Nd;2 no 645b and under satipaṭṭhāna) and as agga-phala it is almost identical with Arahantship Frequently it is combd with vipāka to denote the stringent conception of “consequence,” e.g. at DN i.27, DN i.58; DN iii.160. Almost synonymous in the sense of “fruition, benefit, profit” is ānisaṃsā DN iii.132 phala at Pv i.125 = ānisaṃsa Pv-a 64-Vin i.293 (anāgāmi˚); ii.240 (id.); iii.73 (arahatta˚); DN i.51 DN i.57 sq. (sāmañña˚); iii.147, 170 (sucaritassa); MN i.477 (appamāda˚); SN i.173 (Amata˚); Pv i.1110 (kaṭuka˚) ii.83 (dāna˚); iv.188 (mahap˚ & agga˚); Vism 345 (of food, being digested); Pv-a 8 (puñña˚ & dāna˚), 22 (sotāpatti˚), 24 (issā-macchariya˚).;

-atthika one who is looking for fruit Vism 120 -āpaṇa fruit shop Mil 333. -āphala [phala + aphala see ā4; but cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 331] all sorts of fruit, lit what is not (i.e. unripe), fruit without discrimination; a phrase very freq. in Jātaka style, e.g. Ja i.416 Ja ii.160; Ja iii.127; Ja iv.220; Ja iv.307, Ja iv.449, Ja v.313; Ja vi.520; Dhp-a i.106. -āsava extract of fruit Vv-a 73. -uppatti ripening Pv-a 29. -esin yielding fruit Ja i.87 = Thag 527 cp. phalesin Mvu iii.93. -gaṇḍa see palagaṇḍa -ṭṭha “stationed in fruition,” i.e. enjoying the result or fruition of the Path (cp. Cpd. 50) Mil 342. -dāna gift of fruit Vb-a 337. -dāyin giver of fruit Vv 676 -pacchi fruit-basket Ja vi.560. -pañcaka fivefold fruit Vism 580; Vb-a 191. -puṭa fruit-basket Ja vi.236 -bhājana one who distributes fruit, an official term in the vihāra Vin iv.38, cp. BSk. phalacāraka. -maya see sep. -ruha fruit tree Mbvs 82. -sata see palasata.

cp. Vedic phala, to phal [sphal

Phala2

is spelling for pala (a certain weight) at Ja vi.510. See pala & cp. Geiger,; P.Gr. § 40.

Phala3

the point of a spear or sword SN ii.265 (tiṇha˚). Cp. phāla2.

etym.? Sk. *phala

Phalaka

1. a flat piece of wood, a slab, board, plank Ja i.451 (a writing board school slate); v.155 (akkhassa ph. axle board); vi.281 (dice-board). pidhāna˚; covering board Vb-a 244 Vism 261; sopāna˚; staircase, landing Ja i.330 (maṇi˚) Vism 313; cp. Mvu i.249; ˚āsana a bench Ja i.199 ˚kāya a great mass of planks Ja ii.91. ˚atthara -sayana a bed covered with a board (instead of a mattress Ja i.304, Ja i.317; Ja ii.68. ˚seyya id. DN i.167 (“plank-bed”)

2. a shield Ja iii.237, Ja iii.271; Mil 355; Dhp-a ii.2. 3. a slip of wood or bark, used for making an ascetic’s dress (˚cīra) DN i.167, cp. Vin i.305. ditto for a weight to hang on the robe Vin ii.136.

4. a post MN iii.95 (aggaḷa˚ doorpost); Thag-a 70 (Ap. v.17).

fr. phal = *sphal or *sphaṭ; (see phalati), lit. that which is split or cut off (cp. in same meaning “slab”); cp Sk. sphaṭika rock-crystal; on Prk. forms see Pischel Prk. Gr. §206. Ved. phalaka board, phāla ploughshare Gr. α ̓́σπαλον, σπολάς, ψαλίς scissors; Lat. pellis spolium; Ohg. spaltan = split, Goth, spilda writing board, tablet; Oicel. spjald board

Phalagaṇḍa

is spurious writing for palagaṇḍa (q.v.).

Phalatā

(f.) the fact or condition of bearing fruit Pv-a 139 (appa˚).

abstr. fr. phala

Phalati

to split, burst open (intrs.) AN i.77 (asaniyā phalantiyā); usually in phrase “ muddhā sattadhā phaleyya, as a formula of threat or warning “your (or my) head shall split into 7 pieces,” e.g. DN i.95; SN i.50; Snp 983; Ja i.54; Ja iv.320 (me); v.92 (= bhijjetha C.); Mil 157 (satadhā for satta˚); Dhp-a i.41 (m. te phalatu s.) Vv-a 68; whereas a similar phrase in Snp 988 sq. has adhipāteti (for *adhiphāṭeti = phalati) ■ Caus. phāleti (& phāṭeti) ■ pp.; phalita & phulla;.

2. to become ripe, to ripen Vin ii.108; Ja iii.251; Pv-a 185.

phal to split, break open = *sphal or *sphaṭ; cp. phāṭeti. On etym. see also Lüders, K.Z. xlii, 198 sq. 1.

Phalamaya

stands in all probability for phalika-maya, made of crystal, as is suggested by context, which gives it in line with kaṭṭha-maya & loha-maya (& aṭṭhi˚ danta˚, veḷu˚ etc.). It occurs in same phrase at all passages mentioned, and refers to material of which boxes, vessels, holders etc. are made. Thus at Vin i.203 (of añjani, box), 205 (tumba, vessel); ii.115 (sattha-daṇḍa, scissors-handle), 136 (gaṇṭhikā, block at dress). The trsln “made of fruits” seems out of place (so Kern, Toev. s. v.), one should rather expect “made of crystal” by the side of made of wood, copper bone, ivory, etc.

Phalavant

(adj.) bearing or having fruit Ja iii.251.

fr. phala

Phalasata

see palasata ■ At Ja vi.510 it means “goldbronze” (as material of which a “sovaṇṇa-kaṃsa” is made).

Phalika1

a fruit vendor Mil 331.

fr. phala

Phalika2 & ˚kā

(f.) crystal quartz Vin ii.112; Ja vi.119 (˚kā = phaḷika-bhittiyo C.); Vv 351 (= phalika-maṇi-mayā bhittiyo Vv-a 160) 783 (˚kā); Mil 267 (ḷ), 380 (ḷ).

also spelt with ḷ; cp. Sk. sphaṭika; on change ṭ → ḷ see Geiger, P.Gr. § 386. The Prk. forms are phaḷiha & phāḷiya, see Pischel,; Gr. § 206

Phalita1

(adj.) grey-haired Pv-a 153.

sporadic spelling for palita

Phalita2

broken, only in phrase hadayaṃ phalitaṃ his heart broke Dhp-a i.173; hadayena phalitena with broken heart Ja i.65.

pp. of phal to burst, for the usual phulla, after analogy with phalita3

Phalita3

fruit bearing, having fruit, covered with fruit (of trees) Vin ii.108; Ja i.18; Mil 107, Mil 280.

pp. of phal to bear fruit

Phalin

(adj.) bearing fruit Ja v.242.

fr. phala

Phalina

(adj.) at Ja v.92 is of doubtful meaning. It cannot very well mean “bearing fruit, since it is used as Ep. of a bird (˚sakuṇī). The Cy expln is sakuṇa-potakānaṃ phalinattā (being a source of nourishment?) phalina-sakuṇī.” The v.l. SS is phalīna & palīna.;

fr. phala, phalin?

Phalima

(adj.) bearing fruit, full of fruit Ja iii.493.

fr. phala

Phalu

a knot or joint in a reed, only in cpd. ˚bīja (plants) springing (or propagated) from a joint DN i.5; Vin iv.34, Vin iv.35.

cp. Vedic paru

Phaleti

at DN i.54 is spurious reading for paleti (see palāyati), expld by gacchati DN-a i.165; meaning “runs, not with trsln “spreads out”.

to sphar

Phallava

is spelling for pallava sprout, at Ja iii.40.

Phassa1

contact, touch (as sense or sense-impression, for which usually phoṭṭhabbaṃ ). It is the fundamental fact in a senseimpression and consists of a combination of the sense the object, and perception, as expld at MN i.111: tiṇṇaṃ (i.e. cakkhu, rūpā, cakkhu-viññāṇa) sangati phasso and gives rise to feeling: phassa-paccayā vedanā. (See paṭicca-samuppāda & for expl;n Vism 567; Vb-a 178 sq.) ■ Cp. DN i.42 sq.; DN iii.228, DN iii.272, DN iii.276; Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso); Snp 737, Snp 778 (as fundamental of attachment, cp. Snp-a 517); Ja v.441 (rājā dibba-phassena puṭṭho touched by the divine touch, i.e. fascinated by her beauty; puṭṭho = phutto); Vb-a 177 sq. (in detail) 193, 265; Pv-a 86 (dup˚ of bad touch, bad to the touch i.e. rough, unpleasant); poet. for trouble Thag 783 See on phassa: Dhs. trsl. 5 & introd. (lv.) lxiii.; Cpd. 12, 14, 94.

-āyatana organ of contact (6, referring to the several senses) Pv-a 52. -āhāra “touch-food,” acquisition by touch, nutriment of contact, one of the 3 āhāras, viz phass˚, mano-sañcetanā˚ (Name of representative cogitation) and viññāṇ˚ (of intellection) Dhs 71–⁠73; one of the 4 kinds of āhāra, or “food,” with ref. to the 3 vedanās Vism 341. -kāyā (6) groups of touch or contact vîz. cakkhu-samphasso, sota˚, ghāna˚, kāya˚ mano˚ DN iii.243. -sampanna endowed with (lovely touch, soft, beautiful to feel Ja v.441 (cp. phassita).

cp. Ved. sparśa, of spṛś: see phusati

Phassa2

(adj.) to be felt, esp. as a pleasing sensation; pleasant, beautiful Ja iv.450 (gandhehi ph.).

grd. fr. phusati, corresp. to Sk. spṛśya

Phassati

stands for phusati at Vism 527 in def. of phassa (“phassatī ti phasso”).

Phassanā

(f.) touch, contact with Dhs-a 167 (jhānassa lābho… patti… phassanā sacchikiriyā).

abstr. fr. phassa

Phassita

(adj.) made to touch, brought into contact, only in cpd. suphassita of pleasant contact, beautiful to the touch, pleasant, perfect, symmetrical Ja i.220 (cīvara) 394 (dantā); iv.188 (dant’ āvaraṇaṃ); v.197 (of the membrum muliebre), 206 (read ˚phassita for ˚phussita) 216 (˚cheka-karaṇa); Vv-a 275 (as expln of atīva sangata Vv 642) ■ Note. Another (doubtful) phassita is found at Ja v.252 (dhammo phassito; touched, attained where vv.ll. give passita & phussita.;

pp. of phasseti = Sk. sparśayati to bring into contact

Phasseti

to touch, attain Ja v.251 (rājā dhammaṃ phassayaṃ = C. phassayanto; vv.ll. pa˚ phu˚); Mil 338 (amataṃ, cp. phusati), 340 (phassayeyya Pot.) ■ Pass. phassīyati Vin ii.148 (kavāṭā na ph.; v.l. phussiy˚) ■ pp. phassita & phussita;3. *Phateti

Caus. of phusati1

*Phāṭeti

is conjectured reading for pāteti in phrase kaṭṭhaṃ pāteti MN i.21, and in adhipāteti to split (see adhipāta & vipāta). The derivation of these expressions from; pat is out of place, where close relation to phāleti (phalati) is evident, and a derivation from phaṭ = sphat, as in Sk. sphāṭayati to split, is the only right expln of meaning. In that case we should put phal = sphaṭ; where l = ṭ, as in many Pali words, cp phalika<spha geiger P.Gr. § 386). The Prk correspondent is phāḍei (Pischel, Gr. § 208).

Phāṇita

(nt.) 1. juice of the sugar cane, raw sugar, molasses (ucchu-rasaṃ gahetvā kataphāṇitaṃ Vv-a 180) Vin ii.177; DN i.141; Vv 3525; 404 Ja i.33, Ja i.120, Ja i.227; Mil 107; Dhp-a ii.57. phāṇitassa puṭaṃ a basket of sugar SN i.175; Ja iv.366; Dhp-a iv.232–⁠2. (by confusion or rightly?) salt Ja iii.409 (in expln of aloṇika = phāṇita-virahita).

-odaka sugar water Ja iii.372, -puṭa sugar basket Ja iv.363.

cp. Epic Sk. phāṇita

Phāti

(f.) swelling, increase Ja ii.426 (= vaḍḍhi); Vism 271 (vuddhi + ). Usually combd with kṛ; as phāti-kamma increase, profit, advantage Vin ii.174 Vb-a 334 & phāti-karoti to make fat, to increase, to use to advantage MN i.220 = AN v.347; AN iii.432.

cp. Sk. sphāti, fr. sphāy, sphāyate to swell, increase (Idg. *spē(i), as in Lat. spatium, Ohg. spuot Ags. spēd = E. speed; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. spatium) pp. sphīta = P. phīta

Phāruka

(adj.) at Vv-a 288 is not clear; meaning something like “bitter,” combd with kasaṭa; v.l. pāru˚. Probably = phārusaka.

Phāruliya

at Vb 350 (in thambha-exegesis) is faulty spelling for phārusiya (nt.) harshness, unkindness, as evidence of id. passage at Vb-a 469 shows (with expln “pharusassa puggalassa bhāvo phārusiyaṃ”).

Phārusaka

1. a certain flower, the (bitter) fruit of which is used for making a drink Vin i.246; Vv 3331 = Dhp-a iii.316. 2. Name of one of Indra’s groves Ja vi.278, similarly Vism 424; Vb-a 439.

fr. pharusa, cp. Sk. *pāruṣaka Mpt 103, Mpt 143

Phāla1

(m. & nt.) ploughshare SN i.169; Snp p.13 & v.77 (expld as “phāletī ti ph.” Snp-a 147) Ja i.94; Ja iv.118; Ja v.104; Ud 69 (as m.); Dhp-a i.395.

cp. Vedic phāla

Phāla2

an (iron) board, slab (or ball?), maybe spear or rod. The word is of doubtful origin & meaning, it occurs always in the same context of a heated iron instrument, several times in correlation with an iron ball (ayogula). It has been misunderstood at an early time, as is shown by kapāla AN iv.70 for phāla Kern comments on the word at Toev. ii.139. See Vin i.225 (phālo divasantatto, so read; v.l. balo corr. to bālo; corresp. with guḷa); AN iv.70 (divasa-santatte ayokapāle, gloss ayogule); Ja v.268; Ja v.109 (phāle ciraratta-tāpite, v.l. pāle, hale, thāle; corresp. with pakaṭṭhita ayogula), id. v.113 (ayomayehi phālehi pīḷeti v.l. vālehi).

to phala3

Phāla3

in loṇa-maccha˚; a string (?) or cluster of salted fish Vism 28.

Phālaka

(adj.) splitting; one who splits Vism 413 (kaṭṭha˚).

fr. phāleti

Phālana

(nt.) splitting Ja i.432 (dāru˚); Vism 500 (vijjhana˚).

fr. phāleti

Phālita

1. made open, expanded, spread Ja iii.320 (+ vikasita).

2. split [fr. phāleti phal ], split open Vism 262 = Vb-a 245 (˚haliddi-vaṇṇa).

= Sk. sphārita, sphar

Phāliphulla

in full blossom MN i.218; Ja i.52.

either Intensive of phulla, or Der. fr. pariphulla in form phaliphulla

Phālibhaddaka

is spurious spelling for pāli˚ at Ja ii.162 (v.l. pātali-bhaddaka). Cp. Prk. phālihadda (= pāribhadra Pischel, Gr. § 208).

Phālima

(adj.) [either fr. Caus. of phal1 (phāleti), or fr. sphar (cp. phārita, i.e. expanded), or fr. sphāy (swell increase, cp. sphāra & sphārī bhavati to open, expand) expanding, opening, blossoming in cpd. aggi-nikāsi-phālima paduma Ja iii.320 (where Cy. explns by phālita vikasita).

Phāleti

to split, break chop, in phrases 1. kaṭṭhaṃ phāleti to chop sticks (for firewood) Vin i.31; Ja ii.144; Pv ii.951, besides which the phrase kaṭṭhaṃ *phāṭeti. 2. sīsaṃ (muddhā sattadhā phāleti (cp. adhipāteti & phalati) Dhp-a i.17 (perhaps better with v.l. phal˚), 134.

3. (various: AN i.204 = SN ii.88; Ja ii.398; Nd ii.483; Vism 379 (kucchiṃ; Dhp-a iv.133 (hadayaṃ) ■ pp. phālita. Caus. II phālāpeti to cause to split open Ja iii.121; Mil 157 (v.l. phāḷāp˚).

Caus. of phalati, phal; a variant is phāṭeti fr. sphaṭ; which is identical with *(s)phal

Phāsu

(adj.) pleasant, comfortable; only neg. ; in phrase aphāsu-karoti to cause discomfort to (dat.) Vin iv.290; and in cpds. ˚kāma anxious for comfort, desirous of (others) welfare DN iii.164; ˚vihāra comfort, ease Vin ii.127; DN i.204; Dhs 1348 = Mil 367 (cp. Dhs-a 404); Mil 14; Vism 33; Vb-a 270; Pv-a 12.

etym.? Trenckner, Notes 82 (on Mil 1417: corr. J.P.T.S. 1908, 136 which refers it to Mil 1315 suggests connection with Vedic prāśu enjoying, one who enjoys, i.e. a guest, but this etym. is doubtful; cp phāsuka. A key to its etym. may be found in the fact that it never occurs by itself in form phāsu, but either in composition or as ˚ka

Phāsu

at Mil 146 (cp. p. 425) “bhaggā phāsū” is un certain reading, it is not phāsuka; it may represent a pāsa snare, sling. The likeness with phāsukā bhaggā (lit.) of Ja i.493 is only accidental.

Phāsuka

(adj.) pleasant, convenient, comfortable Ja iii.343 Ja iv.30; Dhp-a ii.92; Pv-a 42aphāsuka unpleasant uncomfortable, not well Ja ii.275, Ja ii.395; Dhp-a i.28; Dhp-a ii.21-Note. It seems probable that phāsuka represents a Sk. *sparśuka (cp. Pischel § 62), which would be a der fr. spṛś in same meaning as phassa2 (“lovely”). This would confirm the suggestion of phāsu being a secondary formation.

fr. phāsu. Cp. Prk. phāsuya; acc. to Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 208; Jain Sk. prāsuka is a distortion of P. phāsuka. Perhaps phāsu is abstracted from phāsuka

Phāsukā

(f.) a rib, only in pl. phāsukā Vin i.74 (upaḍḍha˚ bhañjitabbā), in phrase sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā Ja i.493 (lit.), which is fig. applied at Dhp 154 (expld as “sabbā avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā” at Dhp-a iii.128), with which cp. bhaggā phāsū at Mil 146; both the latter phrases prob. of diff. origin ■ (adj.) (-˚) in phrase mahā˚passa the flank (lit. the side of the great ribs Ja i.164, Ja i.179; Ja iii.273; abs. mahā˚; with great ribs Ja v.42; uggata˚; with prominent ribs Pv-a 68 (for upphāsulika adj. Pv ii.11) ■ in cpds. as phāsuka˚; e.g. ˚aṭṭhīni the rib-bones (of which there are 24) Vism 254 (v.l. pāsuka˚); Vb-a 237; ˚dvaya pair of ribs Vism 252 Vb-a 235 ■ See also pāsuka, pāsuḷa & the foll.;

cp. Sk *pārśukā & Ved. pārśva, see passa;2

Phāsulikā

(f.) rib, only in cpd. upphāsulika (adj.) Pv ii.11.

fr. phāsuḷi

Phāsuḷā

rib SN ii.255 (phāsuḷ-antarikā).

for phāsukā

Phāsuḷī

a rib MN i.80.

cp. phāsukā & phāsuḷā

Phiya

oar Snp 321 (+ aritta rudder, expld by dabbi-padara Snp-a 330); Ja iv.21 (˚ârittaṃ) See also piya2 which is the more freq. spelling of phiya.

etym. unknown

Phīta

opulent, prosperous, rich; in the older texts only in stock phrase iddha ph. bahujana (rich & prosperous & well-populated) DN i.211 (of the town Nālandā); ii.146 (of Kusāvatī); MN i.377; (of Nālandā) ii.71 (of country); SN ii.107 (fig. of brahmacariyaṃ; with bahujañña for ˚jana) AN iii.215 (of town). By itself & in other comb;n in the Jātakas, e.g. Ja iv.135 (= samiddha); vi.355 (v.l. pīta) With iddha & detailed description of all classes of the population (instead of bahujana) of a town Mil 330.;

pp. of sphāy, cp. Sk. sphīta & see phāti

Phuṭa1

1. (cp. pharati1) pervaded, permeated, thrilled (cp. pari˚) DN i.73, DN i.74 (pītisukhena T. prints phuta; v.l. phuṭa; v.l. at DN-a i.217 p(h)uṭṭha) MN i.276; Ja i.33 (sarīraṃ pītiyā ph.); Dhp-a ii.118 (pītiyā phuṭa-sarīro); Snp-a 107 (referring to the nerves of taste).

2. (cp. pharati2) expanded, spread out, spread with (instr.) Vin i.182 (lohitena); Ja v.266 (in nirayapassage T. reads bhūmi yojana-sataṃ phuṭā tiṭṭhanti i.e. the beings fill or are spread out over such a space; C. 272 explns by “ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ anupharitvā tiṭṭhanti.” The id. p. at Nd i.405 = Nd ii.304iii d reads bh. yojana-sataṃ pharitvā (intrs.: expanding, wide tiṭṭhati, which is the more correct reading) ■ See also ophuṭa & cp.; phuta3.

pp. of pharati

Phuṭa2

blossoming out, opened, in full bloom Dāvs iv.49 (˚kumuda). Cp phuṭita.

pp. of sphuṭ; to expand, blossom

Phuṭa3

at MN i.377 (sabba-vāri˚, in sequence with vārita, yuta, dhuta) is unnecessarily changed by Kern, Toev. s. v. into pūta. The meaning is “filled with, spread with,” thus = phuṭa1, cp. sequence under ophuṭa. The v.l. at MN i.377 is puṭṭha. On miswriting of phuṭṭa puṭṭha for phuṭa cp. remark by Trenckner, MN i.553 A similar meaning (“full of, occupied by, overflowing with”) is attached to phuṭa in Avīci passage AN i.159 (Avīci maññe phuṭo ahosi), cp. Anāgata Vaṃsa (J.P.T.S. 1886, v.39) & remarks of Morris’s; J.P.T.S. 1887, 165-The same passage as MN i.377 is found at DN i.57 where T. reads phuṭṭa (as also at DN-a i.168), with vv. ll puṭṭha & phuṭa.;

Phuṭita

1. shaken, tossed about, burst, rent asunder, abstr. nt. phutitattaṃ being tossed about Mil 116 (v.l. put ˚). 2. cracked open, chapped, torn (of feet) Thig 269 (so read for T. phuṭika, Thag-a 212 explns by bāhita has v.l. niphuṭita).;

for phoṭita, pp. of *sphoṭayati, sphuṭ;

Phuṭṭha

touched, affected by, influenced by; in specific sense (cp. phusati1 2) “thrilled, permeated” Vin i.200 (ābādhena); AN ii.174 (rogena) Ja i.82 (mettacittena, v.l. puṭṭha); v.441 (dibbaphassena); Vism 31 (˚samphassa contact by touch), 49 (byādhinā); Vv-a 6 (in both meanings, scil. pītiyā rogena). On phuṭṭha at DN i.57 see phuṭa3. Cp. sam˚.

pp. of phusati1

Phunati

to shake, sprinkle, of doubtful spelling, at Ja vi.108 (angārakāsuṃ ph.; v.l. punanti perhaps better; C. explns by vidhunati & okirati). Perhaps we should read; dhunati.

?

Phulaka

(= pulaka) a kind of gem Vv-a 111.

Phulla1

blossoming, in blossom Ja v.203. Also as Intensive phāliphulla “one mass of flowers” MN i.218; Ja i.52. Note. phulla1 may stand for phuṭa2.

pp. of phalati, or root formation fr. phull, cp. phalita3

Phulla2

broken, in phrase akhaṇḍa-phulla unbroken (q.v.), Pv iv.176 and passim.

pp. of phalati, cp. phalita2

Phullita

in flower, blossoming Ja v.214 (for phīta = rich), 216 (su˚-vana).

pp. of phullati

Phusati1 [spṛś

, fr. which sparśa = phassa; cp. also phassati] 1. (lit.) to touch Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso) DN-a i.61 (aor. phusī = metri causa for phusi); Mil 157 (grd. aphusa not to be touched).

2. (fig.) [see on this term of Buddhist ecstatic phraseology Cpd. 1332. In this meaning it is very closely related to pharati, as appears e.g. from the foll. explns of Cys.: DN i.74 parippharati = samantato phusati DN-a i.217; DN ii.186 pharitvā = phusitvā ārammaṇaṃ katvā Vism 308] to attain, to reach, only in specific sense of attaining to the highest ideal of religious aspiration, in foll. phrases ceto-samādhiṃ ph. DN i.13 = DN iii.30, DN iii.108 etc.; nirodhaṃ DN i.184; samatha-samādhiṃ Vv 169 (reads āphusiṃ but should prob. be aphusiṃ as Vv-a 84, expld by adhigacchiṃ); phalaṃ aphussayi (aor. med.) Pv iv.188; cp Pv-a 243; amataṃ padaṃ Pv iv.348; amataṃ Mil 338 (but T. reads khippaṃ phasseti a.); in bad sense kappaṭṭhitikaṃ kammaṃ Mil 108 (of Devadatta) ■ pp phuṭṭha. Cp. upa˚.

Phusati2

this is a specific Pali form and represents two Sk. roots, which are closely related to each other and go back to the foll. 2 Idg. roots: 1. Idg. *sp(h)ṛj, burst out, burst (forth), spring, sprinkle, as in Sk. sphūrjati burst forth, parjanya rain cloud; Gr. σφαραγέω; Ags spearca = E. spark, E. spring, sprinkle. This is an enlargement of sphur (cp. pharati, phuṭṭha, phuta). 2. Idg. *spṛk to sprinkle, speckle, as in Sk. pruṣ, pṛśni speckled, pṛṣan, pṛṣatī spotted antelope, pṛṣata raindrop; Gr. περκνός of dark (lit. spotted) colour; Lat spargere = Ger. sprengen. To this root belong P pasata, phoseti, paripphosaka, phussa, phusita ■ Inf phusituṃ, conjectured reading at Vin i.205 for T phosituṃ (vv.ll. posituṃ & dhovituṃ), & Vin ii.151 for T. posituṃ; Vin. Texts iii.169 translate “bespatter.”

Phusana

(nt.) touch Vism 463.

abstr. fr. phusati1 1

Phusanā

(f.) attainment, gaining, reaching Vism 278 (= phuṭṭha-ṭṭhāna); Dhp-a i.230 (ñāṇa˚); Vv-a 85 (samādhi˚).

abstr. fr. phusati1 2

Phusāyati

to sprinkle (rain), to rain gently, drizzle SN i.104 sq., 154 184 (devo ekaṃ ekaṃ ph. “drop by drop”). See also anuphusāyati (so read for ˚phusīyati).

Caus. of pruṣ, but formed fr. P. phusati2

Phusita1

(nt.) rain-drop MN iii.300; SN ii.135; Dhp-a iii.243. The Prk. equivalent is phusiya (Pischel, Gr. § 208), cp. Ger. sprenkeln → E. sprinkle.

either pp. of phusati2 or direct correspondent of Sk. pṛṣata (see pasata2)

Phusita2

spotted, coloured variegated (with flowers) Snp 233 (˚agga = supupphit agga-sākha Kp-a 192).

pp. of phusati2 2. i.e. pruṣ, cp. Sk. pruṣita sprinkled, pṛṣatī spotted antelope

Phus(s)ita3

touched, put on, in ˚aggaḷa with fastened (clinched) bolts (or better: door-wings) MN i.76 (reads phassit˚; cp. v.l. on p. 535 phussit˚); AN i.101; Thag 385; Ja vi.510.

= phassita2, Kern. Toev. s. v. takes it as pp. of *puṃsayati

Phusitaka

(adj.) (-˚) [fr. phusita1) having raindrops, only in phrase thulla˚ deva (the sky) shedding big drops of rain SN ii.32 (reads phulla-phusitaka); iii.141; AN i.243 AN ii.140; AN v.114; Vism 259.

Phussa1

1. see phussa3 2.

2. Name of a month (Dec ■ Jan. Ja i.86. Name of a lunar mansion or constellation Vv 534 (= phussa-tārakā Vv-a 236) ■ Frequent as Np., cp Vism 422, and combns like ˚deva, ˚mitta.

fr. puṣ to blossom, nourish, etc. cp. Ved. puṣya

Phussa2

touching, feeling, realising; doubled at DN i.45, DN i.54.

ger. of phusati1

Phussa3

(adj.-n.) 1. speckled gaily-coloured, ˚kokila the spotted cuckoo [Kern Toev. s. v. phussa however takes it as “male-cuckoo, Sk. puṃs-kokila] Ja v.419, Ja v.423; Vv-a 57 ■ As phussaka at AN i.188 (so read for pussaka).

2. in sense of “clear, excellent, exquisite” (or it is puṣya in sense of “substance, essence” of anything, as Geiger, P. Gr. § 40 1a?) in ˚ratha [cp. Sk, puṣpa˚, but prob. to be read puṣya˚?] a wonderful state carriage running of its own accord Ja ii.39; Ja iii.238; Ja iv.34; Ja v.248; Ja vi.39 sq.) v.l. pussa˚); Pv-a 74. -rāga [cp. Sk. puṣpa-rāga] topaz Mil 118; Vv-a 111 ■ At Nd i.90 as v.l. to be preferred to pussa˚; in ˚tila, ˚tela, ˚dantakaṭṭha, etc with ref. to their use by Brahmins.

grd. formation fr. phusati2 2; scarcely fr. Sk. puṣya (to puṣ nourish, cp. poseti), but meaning rather “speckled” in all senses. The Sk. puṣyaratha is Sanskritisation of P. phussa˚

Pheggu

accessory wood, wood surrounding the pith of a tree, always with ref. to trees (freq. in similes), in sequence; mūla sāra, pheggu, taca, papaṭikā etc. It is represented as next to the pith, but inferior and worthless. At all passages contrasted with sāra (pith, substance). Thus at MN i.192 sq., 488; DN iii.51; SN iv.168; AN i.152 (pheggu sāra, v.l. phaggu); ii.110 = Pp 52; AN iii.20; Ja iii.431 (opp. sāra); Mil 267, Mil 413 (tacchako phegguṃ apaharitvā sāraṃ ādiyati).

cp. Vedic phalgu & P. phaggu in form

Phegguka

(-˚) (adj.) having worthless wood, weak, inferior MN i.488 (apagata˚, where ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd.); Ja iii.318 (a˚ + sāramaya).

fr. pheggu

Pheggutā

(f.) state of dry wood; lack of substance, worthlessness Pp A 229.

abstr. fr. pheggu

Pheṇa

scum, foam, froth, only in cpds. viz.:

-uddehakaṃ (adv.) (paccamāna, boiling) with scum on top, throwing up foam MN iii.167; AN i.141; Nd ii.304iii c; Ja iii.46; Mil 357. -paṭala a film of scum Vism 359; Vb-a 65. -piṇḍa a lump or heap of foam SN iii.140 sq. = Vism 479 (in simile of rūpa); Nd ii.680 Aii Vism 40 (in comp); Vb-a 32 sq. bubbuḷaka a bubble of scum Vism 171, Vism 259, Vism 345; Vb-a 242. -mālā a wreath or garland of scum Mil 117. -mālin with a wreath of scum Mil 260. -missa mixed with froth Vism 263. -vaṇṇa colour of scum Vism 263.

cp. Vedic phena, with *ph fr. sp˚, connected with Lat. spūma, scum, Ags. fām = Ger. feim = E. foam.

Pheṇaka

= pheṇa Vism 254; Vb-a 237.

Phoṭa

swelling, boil, blister Ja iv.457; Ja vi.8 (v.l. pota & poṭha); cp. poṭa bubble. Photaka = phota

fr. sphuṭ; cp. Sk. sphoṭa

Phoṭaka = phoṭa

Vism 258; Vb-a 242.

Phoṭana

“applause,” in brahma-pphoṭana at Dhp-a iii.210 should be taken as ā + phoṭana (= apphoṭana).

Phoṭeti

to shake, toss (or thunder?) only at two places in similar formula, viz. devatā sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu, brahmāno apphoṭesuṃ (v.l. appoṭh˚) Mil 13 Mil 18; Sakko devarājā appoṭhesi (v.l. appoṭesi), Mahābrahmā sādhukāraṃ adāsi Ja vi.486. Perhaps we should read poṭheti (q.v.), to snap one’s fingers (clap hands) as sign of applause. At Dhp-a iii.210 we read fut. apphoṭessāmi (i.e. ā + phoṭ).

Caus. of sphuṭ; if correct. Maybe mixed with sphūrj. The form apphoṭesi seems to be ā + phoṭeti Sk. āsphoṭayati

Phoṭṭhabba

(nt.) tangible, touch, contact; it is synonymous with phassa, which it replaces in psychol. terminology. Phoṭṭhabbaṃ is the senseobject of kāya (or taca ) touch (“kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā” DN iii.226, DN iii.250, DN iii.269; Nd ii.p. 238 under rūpa) See also āyatanaDN iii.102 (in list of ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni: kāyo c’ eva phoṭṭhabbā ca; with pl. like m.); Vb-a 79 (˚dhātu).

grd. of phusati

Phosita

sprinkled Ja vi.47 (candana˚, v.l. pusita).

pp. of phoseti, cp. Sk. pruṣita

Phoseti

to sprinkle (over) Vin ii.205 (inf. phosituṃ). pp. phosita. Cp. pari˚.

B.

Caus. of phusati2, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati = P. phusayati

B

Ba

(indecl.) the sound (& letter); b, often substituted for or replaced by p (& ph):; so is e.g. in Bdhgh’s view pahuta the word bahuta, with p for b (Kp-a 207), cp. bakkula badara, badālatā, baddhacara, bandhuka 2, bala, balīyati bahuka, bahūta, billa, bella; also paribandha for paripantha; phāla2. Also substituted for v, cp. bajjayitvā v.l. vajjetvā DAI, 4, and see under Nibb-.

Baka

1. a crane, heron Cp iii.102; Ja i.205 (˚suṇikā), 221, 476; ii.234; iii.252.

2. Name of a dweller in the Brahma world MN i.326; SN i.142.

cp. Epic Sk. baka

Bakula

in milāta˚-puppha is v.l. Kp-a 60 (see App. p. 870 Pj.) for ˚ākuli˚; which latter is also read at Vism 260.

cp. Class. Sk. bakula, Name of the tree Mimusops elengi, and its (fragrant) flower

Bakkula

a demon, uttering horrible cries, a form assumed by the Yakkha Ajakalāpaka, to terrify the Buddha Ud 5 (see also ākulī, where pākula is proposed for bakkula).

= vyākula? Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 94

Bajjha

see bandhati.

Bajjhati

Pass. of bandhati (q.v.).

Battiṃsa

(num. card.) thirty-two Ja iii.207.

for dvat-tiṃsa

Badara

(m. & nt.) the fruit of the jujube tree (Zizyphus jujuba), not unlike a crabapple in appearance & taste, very astringent, used for medicine AN i.130 = Pp 32; AN iii.76; Vin iv.76; Ja iii.21; Dhs-a 320 (cited among examples of acrid flavours) Vv-a 186. Spelling padara for b˚ at Ja iv.363; Ja vi.529.

-aṭṭhi kernel of the j. Snp-a 247. -paṇḍu light yellow (fresh) jujube-fruit AN i.181 (so read for bhadara˚) -missa mixture or addition of the juice of jujube-fruits Vin iv.76. -yūsa juice of the j. fruit Vv-a 185.

cp. Ved. badara & badarī

Badarī

(f.) the jujube tree Ja ii.260.

cp. Sk. badarī

Badālatā

(f.) a creeper (with thorns Kern, Toev. s. v.) DN iii.87 = Vism 418; Bdhgh says (see Dial. iii.84) “a beautiful creeper of sweet taste.”

etym. uncertain, may it be *padālatā, pa + n. ag. of dal Caus., lit. “destroyer”?

Baddha1

1. bound, in bondage MN i.275; SN i.133; SN iv.91; Snp 957 (interpreted as “baddhacara by Nd i.464); Dhp 324.

2. snared, trapped Ja ii.153 Ja iii.184; Ja iv.251, Ja iv.414.

3. made firm, settled, fastened bound (to a cert. place) Kp-a 60 (˚pitta, opp. abaddha˚)

4. contracted, acquired Vin iii.96.

5. bound to addicted or attached to Snp 773 (bhavasāta˚, cp. Nd i.30)

6. put together, kneaded, made into cakes (of meal Ja iii.343; Ja v.46; Ja vi.524.

7. bound together, linked clustered Dhp-a i.304 kaṇṇika˚ (of thoughts).

9. set made up (of the mind) Dhp-a i.11 (mānasaṃ te b.). Cp. ati˚, anu˚, a˚, ni˚, paṭi˚, vini˚, sam˚.

-añjalika keeping the hands reverently extended Dāvs iii.30. -rāva the cry of the bound (or trapped Ja iv.279, Ja iv.415 (v.l. bandhana˚). -vera having contracted an enmity, hostile, bearing a grudge Dhp-a i.324.

pp. of bandhati

Baddha2

(nt.) a leather strap, a thong Vin i.287 (T. bandha perhaps right, cp. ābandhana 3) Pv-a 127.

fr. bandhati

Baddhacara

see paddhacara.

Badhira

(adj.) deaf Vin i.91, Vin i.322; Thag 501 = Mil 367; Ja i.76 (jāti˚); v.387; vi.7; Dhp-a i.312. See also mūga.

-dhātuka deaf by nature Ja ii.63; Ja iv.146; Dhp-a i.346.

cp. Vedic badhira, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fatuus, comparing Goth. baups and M Irish bodar

Bandha

(adj.) 1. bond, fetter Iti 56 (abandho Mārassa, not a victim of M.) Nd i.328 (taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚); Thag-a 241.

2. one who binds or ties together, in assa˚; horsekeeper, groom Ja ii.98; Ja v.441, Ja v.449; Dhp-a i.392.

3. a sort of binding maṇḍala˚; with a circular b. (parasol) Vin iv.338 salāka˚; with a notched b. ibid.

4. a halter, tether Dpvs i.76 ■ Cp. vinibandha.

cp. Vedic bandha, fr. bandh

Bandhaka

as v.l. of vaṭṭaka see aṃsa˚.

Bandhakī

(f.) an unchaste woman (lit. binder) Vin iv.224 (pl. bandhakiniyo), 265 (id.); Ja v.425, Ja v.431 (va˚).

fr. bandhaka, cp. Epic Sp. bandhukī a low woman = pāṃśukā & svairinī Halāy 2, 341

Bandhati

to bind etc.

1. Forms: Imper. bandha DN ii.350; pl. bandhantu Ja i.153. Pot. bandheyya SN iv.198; Vin iii.45 Fut. bandhayissati Mvu 24. 6; Aor. abandhi Ja iii.232 & bandhi Ja i.292; Dhp-a i.182. Ger. bandhitvā Vin i.46; SN iv.200; Ja i.253, Ja i.428, & bandhiya Thig 81. Inf bandhituṃ Thig 299. Caus. bandheti (see above Fut. & bandhāpeti (see below) ■ II. Meanings

1. to bind SN iv.200 (rajjuyā). fig. combine, unite Dhp-a ii.189 (gharāvāsena b. to give in marriage).

2. to tie on bind or put on to (loc.) Dhp-a i.182 (dasante). fig. to apply to, put to, settle on Dhp-a ii.12 (mānasaṃ paradāre)

3. to fix, prepare, get up, put together Ja iv.290 (ukkā); also in phrase cakk’ āticakkaṃ mañc’ ātimañcaṃ b. to put wheels upon wheels & couches upon couches Ja ii.331. iv.81; Dhp-a iv.61. fig. to start, undertake begin, make, in phrases āghātaṃ b. to bear malice Dhp-a ii.21; and veraṃ b. to make enmity against (loc. Ja ii.353.

4. to acquire, get Ja iii.232 (atthaṃ b. nibbatteti C.).

5. to compose Mil 272 (suttaṃ) Ja ii.33; Ja v.39 ■ Caus. II. bandhāpeti to cause to be bound (or fettered) Vin iv.224, Vin iv.316 (opp. mocāpeti) Nd ii.304iii. b (bandhanena); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 113 ■ Pass. bajjhati Nd ii.74 (for bujjhati, as in palābujjhati to be obstructed: see palibuddhati). I. Forms Ind. 3rd pl bajjhare Thag 137; pret. 3rd pl. abajjhare Ja i.428 Imper. bajjhantu SN iv.309; AN v.284. Pot. bajjheyya SN ii.228. Aor. bajjhi Ja ii.37; Ja iv.414. Ger. bajjha Ja iv.441, Ja iv.498, & bajjhitvā Ja ii.153; Ja iv.259; Ja v.442. II. Meanings.

1. to be bound, to be imprisoned Snp 508 (cp. Snp-a 418); Ja iv.278.

2. to be caught (in a sling or trap) Ja iii.330; Ja iv.414.

3. to incur a penalty (with loc., e.g. bahudaṇḍe) Ja iv.116.

4. to be captivated by, struck or taken by, either with loc. Ja i.368 (bajjhitvā & bandhitvā in Pass. sense); v.465; or with instr. Ja i.428; Ja iv.259 ■ pp. baddha (q.v.) ■ Cp. ati˚ anu˚, ā, o˚, paṭi˚, sam˚.

Vedic badhnāti, later Sk. bandhati, Idg. *bhendh, cp. Lat. offendimentum i.e. band; Goth bindan = Ohg, bintan, E. bind; Sk. bandhu relation Gr. πενχερός father-in-law, πεϊσμα bond, etc.

Bandhana

(nt.) 1. binding, bond, fetter Vin i.21; DN i.226, DN i.245 (pañca kāmaguṇā); iii.176; MN ii.44; SN i.8, SN i.24 (Māra˚), 35, 40 iv.201 sq. (5 fold) to bind the king of the Devas or Asuras, 291; Snp 532, Snp 948; Thag 414; Thag 2, Thag 356 (Māra˚ Dhp 345 sq.; Ja ii.139, Ja ii.140; Ja iii.59 = Pv-a 4; v.285; Nd ii.304iii. b (var. bonds, andhu˚, rajju˚ etc. cp. Nd i.433) DN-a i.121 (with ref. to kāmā).

2. binding, tying band, ligature; tie (also fig.) Vin i.204 (˚suttaka thread for tying) ii.135 (kāya˚ waistband); ii.117 (˚rajju for robes); SN iii.155 (vetta˚ ligatures of bamboo; cp. v.51) Snp 44 (gihi˚, cp. Nd ii.228: puttā ca dāsī ca); Dhp-a i.4 (ghara˚ tie of the house); Kp-a 51 (paṭṭa˚).

3. holding together, composition, constitution Vin i.96 (sarīra˚) cp. iii.28 ■ fig. composition (of literature) Ja ii.224 (gāthā˚).

4. joining together, union, company Dhp-a ii.160 (gaṇa˚ joining in companies).

5. handle Vin ii.135.

6. piecing together Vin i.254 (˚mattena when it, i.e. the stuff, has only been pieced together, see Vin. Texts ii.153 n.).

7. strap (?) doubtful reading in aṃsa˚; (q.v.) Vv 3340, where we should prefer to read with v.l. ˚vaṭṭaka.

8. doubtful in meaning in cpd paṃca-vidha-bandhana “the fivefold fixing,” as one of the torments in Niraya. It is a sort of crucifixion (see for detail pañca 3) Nd ii.304iii. c = Nd i.404; Ja i.174; Pv-a 221; Vb-a 278. In this connection it may mean “set,” cp. mūla˚ ■ On use of bandhana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 115. Cp. vini˚.

-āgāra “fetter-house,” prison DN i.72; MN i.75; Vin iii.151; Ja iii.326; Dhp-a ii.152; Vv-a 66; Pv-a 153 -āgārika prison-keeper, head-jailer AN ii.207.

fr. bandh, cp. Vedic bandhana

Bandhanīya

(adj.) 1. to be bound or fettered Mil 186.

2. apt to bind, binding, constraining DN ii.337 (cp. Dial. ii.361); Thig 356.

grd. of bandhati

Bandhava

1. kinsman, member of a clan or family, relative AN iii.44; Snp 60 (pl. bandhavāni in poetry; cp. Nd ii.455); Dhp 288 (pl. bandhavā) Ja ii.316; Ja v.81; DN-a i.243.

2. (-˚) one who is connected with or belongs to Snp 140 (manta˚, well-acquainted with Mantras; cp. Snp-a 192; vedabandhū veda-paṭisaraṇā ti vuttaṃ hoti); Ja v.335 (bodhaneyya˚) cp. bandhu 3.

cp. Class. Sk. bāndhava

Bandhu

1. a relation, relative, kinsman; pl. bandhū Ja iv.301; Pv-a 86 (= ñātī) & bandhavo Nd ii.455 (where Nd i.11 in id. p. reads bandhū) ■ Ādicca˚; kinsman of the Sun an Ep. of the Buddha Vin ii.296; AN ii.17; Snp 54, Snp 915 Snp 1128, cp. Nd ii.152b; Vv 2413; 7810, cp. Vv-a 116. Four kinds of relations enumd at Nd i.11. viz. ñāti˚ gotta˚, manta˚ (where Nd ii.455 reads mitta˚), sippa˚

2. Ep. of Brahmā, as ancestor of the brahmins DN-a i.254: see below ˚pāda.

3. (˚-) connected with related to, dealing with [cp. Vedic amṛta-bandhu RV x.725] SN i.123 (pamatta˚); 128; Snp 241, Snp 315 Snp 430, Snp 911; Ja iv.525; Mil 65 (kamma˚); Snp-a 192 (veda˚.) ■ f. bandhunī Ja vi.47 (said of the town of Mithilā (rāja˚); expld by C. as “rāja-ñātakeh’eva puṇṇā”).

-pāda the foot of Brahma, from which the Śūdras are said to have originated (cp. Sk. pādaja), in cpd bandhupād’apacca “offering from the foot of our kinsman,” applied as contemptuous epithet to the Samaṇas by a Brahmin DN i.90; MN i.334; SN iv.117.

Vedic bandhu, see bandhati & cp. bandhava

Bandhuka

(adj.) 1. the plant Pentapetes phoenicea Ja iv.279 (˚puppha, evidently only a contraction of bandhu-jīvaka, cp. C. bandhujīvaka puppha; although Sk. bandhūka is given as syName of bandhujīva at Halāyudha 2, 53).

2. in bandhukaroga MN ii.121 prob. to be read paṇḍuka˚, as v.l. BB see paṇḍuroga.

fr. bandhu

Bandhujīvaka

the plant Pentapetes phoenicea MN ii.14 (˚puppha); DN ii.111 (id.) Ja iv.279; Vism 174; Dhs-a 14; Vv-a 43, Vv-a 161.

cp. Class. Sk. bandhujīva

Bandhumant

(adj.) having relatives, rich in kinsmen; only as Np. m bandhumā Name of father of the Buddha Vipassin DN ii.11 = Vism 433; f. bandhumatī Name of mother of the Buddha Vipassin ibid.; also Name of a town DN ii.12 (capital of king Bandhumā); Snp-a 190 = Ja iv.388 (where the latter has Vettavatī), and a river Snp-a 190; Ja iv.388 (: Vettavatī).

fr. bandhu, cp. Vedic bandhumant

Bandhuvant

(adj.) having relatives, rich in relatives Ja vi.357.

bandhu + vant

Babbaja

a sort of coarse grass or reed, used to make slippers, etc. Vin i.190; DN ii.55; SN ii.92; SN iii.137 SN iv.158; AN ii.211; Dhp 345; Dhp-a iv.55.

-pādukā a slipper out of b. grass Dhp-a iii.451 -lāyaka cutter or reaper of grass SN iii.155; AN iii.365.

cp. Vedic balbaja, doubtful whether it belongs to Lat. bulbus; for the initial b. very often p. is found see pabbaja

Babbu

(& ˚ka) Epic a cat Ja i.480 (= biḷāra C.) = Dhp-a ii.152.

Sk. babhruka a kind of ichneumon; Vedic babhru brown, cp. Lat. fiber = beaver, further connection “bear,” see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fiber

Babbhara

imitation of a confused rumbling noise MN i.128 ■ Cp. also P. mammana and sarasara.

onomat., cp. Sk. balbalā-karoti to stammer or stutter, barbara = Gr. βάρβαρος stuttering, people of an unknown tongue, balbūtha Np. “stammerer”; also Lat. balbas, Ger. plappern, E. blab; babbhara is a redupl. formation fr. *bhara-bhara = barbara, cp J.P.T.S. 1889, 209; Geiger, P.Gr. § 20

Barihin

a peacock Ja iv.497.

cp. Sk. barhin

Barihisa

(nt.) the sacrificial grass DN i.141; MN i.344; AN ii.207; Pp 56.

Vedic barhis

Bala1

(nt.) 1. strength power, force DN ii.73; AN i.244; Thag 188; Dhp 109 (one of the 4 blessings, viz. āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, bala; cp Dhp-a ii.239); Pv i.512 (= kāya-bala Pv-a 30); i.76 Vv-a 4 (iddhi˚); Pv-a 71 (id.), 82 (kamma˚) ■ Of cases used as adv. balasā (instr.) is mentioned by Trenckner at Mil 430 (notes), cp. Prk. balasā (Pischel, Gr. § 364) yathā balaṃ according to one’s power, i.e. as much as possible Pv-a 1, Pv-a 54. The compn form of bala in conn with kṛ; is balī˚; e.g. dubbalīkaraṇa making weak MN iii.4; Pp 59, Pp 68; ˚karaṇin id. DN iii.183adj. bala strong Ja v.268, abala weak Snp 770, Snp 1120, dubbala id SN i.222; Ja ii.154; Nd i.12; Pv-a 55; compar. ˚tara MN i.244, nt. n. abalaṃ weakness SN i.222.

2. an army military force Mvu 25, Mvu 57; Snp-a 357. See cpds. below-Eight balāni or strong points are 1. of young children (ruṇṇa-balaṃ).

2. of womanhood (kodha˚)

3. of robbers (āvudha˚).

4. of kings (issariya˚)

5. of fools (ujjhatti˚).

6. of wise men (nijjhatti˚)

7. of the deeply learned (paṭisankhāna˚).

8. of samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (khanti˚) AN iv.223 (where used as adj ■ ˚ strong in… ); cp. Snp 212, Snp 623 ■ Five balāni of women are: rūpabalaṃ, bhoga˚, ñāti˚, putta˚, sīla˚ SN iv.246

8. The five-fold force (balaṃ pañca-vidhaṃ of a king Ja v.120, Ja v.121 consists of bāhābalaṃ strength of arms, bhoga˚ of wealth, amacca˚ of counsellors, abhijacca˚ of high birth, paññā˚ the force of wisdom; in the religious sense five balāni or powers are commonly enumd: saddhābalaṃ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚ AN iii.12; DN ii.120; MN ii.12, MN iii.296; SN iii.96, SN iii.153 SN iv.366, SN v.219, SN v.249; Pts ii.56, Pts ii.86, Pts ii.166, Pts ii.174, Pts ii.223; Pts ii.84 Pts ii.133, Pts ii.168 etc. They correspond to the 5 indriyāni and are developed with them. SN v.219, SN v.220; Ne 31; they are cultivated to destroy the five uddhambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni SN v.251. They are freq. referred to in instructions of the Buddha about the constituents of the “Dhamma,” culminating in the eightfold Path, viz cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, samappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā pañcindriyani, p. balāni, sattabojjhangāni, ariyo aṭṭhangiko maggo e.g. SN iii.96; Pts ii.56; Nd i.13 = Nd i.360 = Nd ii.420; Nd ii.s. v. satipaṭṭhāna; and passim. [Cp BSk. catvāra ṛddhipādāḥ pañc’ endriyāni p. balāni sapta bodhyangāni etc. Divy 208.] Two balāni are specially mentioned AN i.52 (paṭisankhānabalaṃ and bhāvanā˚), also DN iii.213, followed here by the other “pair” satibalaṃ and samādhi˚. There are four balāni of the ariyasāvaka, by which he overcomes the five fears (pañca bhayāni q.v.); the four are paññābalaṃ viriya˚, anavajja˚ saṅgāha˚; AN iv.363 sq., as given at AN ii.141, also the foll. 3 groups of cattāri balāni: (1) saddhābalaṃ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚; cp. DN iii.229-(2) sati˚ samādhi, anavajja˚, sangāha˚. (3) paṭisankhāna˚ bhāvanā˚, anavajja˚; sangāha˚ ■ For 4 balāni see also D iii.229 note, and for paṭisankhānabala (power of computation) see Dhs. trsl. 1353. The ten balāni of the Tathāgata consist of his perfect comprehension in ten fields of knowledge AN v.32 sq. MN i.69; Nd ii.466; Mil 105, Mil 285; Vb-a 397 ■ In a similar setting 10 powers are given as consisting in the knowledge of the Paṭiccasamuppāda at SN ii.27, SN ii.28. The balāni of the sāvaka are distinct from those of the Tathāgata: Kv 228 sq ■ There are seven balāni DN iii.253, and seven khīṇāsava-balāni 283 i.e. saddhābalaṃ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, hiri˚; and ottappa˚; The same group is repeated in the Abhidhamma; Dhs 58, Dhs 95, Dhs 102; Dhs-a 126. The Ps. also enumerates seven khīṇāsavabalāni i.35; and sixty-eight balāni ii.168 sq.

-agga front of an army, troops in array DN i.6; Vin iv.107, cp. DN-a i.85. -ānīka (adj.) with strong array Snp 623; Dhp 399 (cp. Dhp-a iv.164). -kāya a body of troops, an army cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 52 note (also in BSk. e.g. Divy 63, Divy 315) AN i.109; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; SN i.58; Ja i.437 (˚ṃ saṃharati to draw up troops); ii.76 iii.319; v.124; vi.224, 451; Dhp-a i.393; PugA 249 -koṭṭhaka fortress, camp Ja i.179; Mvu 25, Mvu 29. -(k)kāra application of force, violence Ja i.476; Ja ii.421; Ja iii.447 instr. ˚ena by force Pv-a 68, Pv-a 113. -gumba a serried troop Ja ii.406. -cakka wheel of power, of sovereignty Dpvs vi.2. -ṭṭha a military official, palace guard royal messenger Mil 234, Mil 241, Mil 264, Mil 314; Mvu 34, Mvu 17 -da strength-giving SN i.32; Snp 297. -dāyin id. AN ii.64 -deva “God of strength” Name of the elder brother of Kaṇha Ja iv.82; Nd i.89, Nd i.92 (Vāsudeva + ); Vism 233 (id). -(p)patta gṙown-strong Dhs-a 118 (v.l. phala˚) -vāhana troops, an army Ja ii.319, Ja iv.170, Ja iv.433 Ja vi.391, Ja vi.458. -vīra a hero in strength Vv 531, cp Vv-a 231. -sata for palāsata, q.v. (cp. J.P.T.S. 1908 108 note).

Vedic bala, most likely to Lat. de-bilis “without strength” (cp. E. debility, P. dubbala), and Gr. βέλτιστος (superl.) = Sk. baliṣṭha the strongest. The Dhātupāṭha (273) defines b. with pāṇane. At Dhs-a 124 bala is understood as “na kampati”

Bala2

a species of carrion crow Ja v.268; also in cpd. bal’aṅkapāda having crow’s feet, i.e. spreading feet (perhaps for balāka˚?) Ja vi.548 (C. explns by pattharita-pāda read patthārita˚).

cp. *Sk. bala: Halāyudha 5, 23; & P. balākā

Balaka

(adj.) strong; only in kisa˚; of meagre strength, weakly MN i.226; and dub˚; weak MN i.435 Cp. balika.

fr. bala

Balatā

(f.) strength, lit. strength-quality MN i.325.

abstr. fr. bala

Balati

to live Kp-a 124 (in def. of bālā as “balanti anantī ti bālā”).

fr. bal, as in bala

Balatta

(nt.) strength, only in cpd. dubbalatta weakness Ja ii.154.

abstr. fr. bala, cp. balatā

Balavatā

(f.) strength, force (also in military sense) Ja ii.369 (ārakkhassa b.); Mil 101 (kusalassa & akusalassa kammassa b.).;

abstr. fr. balavant; cp. Epic Sk. balavattā

Balavant

(adj.) strong, powerful, sturdy MN i.244 (purisa) SN i.222; Ja ii.406; Dhp-a ii.208; Vv-a 35; Pv-a 94. Comparative balavatara Mil 131; f. ˚a(n)tarī Sdhp 452. In compn balava˚; e.g. ˚gavā sturdy oxen MN i.226; ˚vippaṭisāra deep remorse Pv-a 14, ˚balava very strong Ja ii.406. -balavaṃ as nt. adv. “exceedingly,” in cpd. balav’ ābalavaṃ very (loud and) strong Vin ii.1 (= suṭṭhu balavaṃ C.), and ˚paccūse very early in the morning Vism 93, and ˚paccūsa-samaye id. Ja i.92; Dhp-a i.26.

fr. bala

Balasata

see palasata.

Balākā

(f.) a crane Thag 307; Ja ii.363; Ja iii.226; Mil 128 (˚ānaṃ megha-saddena gabbhâvakkanti hoti); Vism 126 (in simile, megha-mukhe b. viya); DN-a i.91 (v.l. baka).

cp. Vedic balākā, perhaps to Lat. fulica, Gr. φαλαρίς a water fowl, Ohg. pelicha = Ger. belche

Bali

1. religious offering, oblation DN ii.74 (dhammika); AN iv.17, AN iv.19; Snp 223; Mvu 36, Mvu 88 (particularly to subordinate divinities, cp. Mvu. trsln 263) Dhp-a ii.14 (v.l. ˚kamma) ■ pañca˚; the fivefold offering i.e. ñāti˚, atithi˚, pubbapeta˚, rāja˚, devatā˚, offering to kinsfolk, guests, the departed, the king, the gods AN ii.68; AN iii.45.

2. tax, revenue (cp. Zimmer Altind. Leben 166 & Fick,; Sociale Gliederung 75; DN i.135, DN i.142; Ja i.199 (daṇḍa˚ fines & taxes), 339; Dhp-a i.251 (daṇḍa˚).

3. Np. of an Asura DN ii.259.

-kamma offering of food to bhūtas, devas & others Ja i.169, Ja i.260; Ja ii.149, Ja ii.215; Ja iv.246 (offering to tutelary genii of a city. In this passage the sacrifice of a human being is recommended); v.99, 473; Snp-a 138; Mhbv 28 -karaṇa oblation, offering of food Pv-a 81; Vv-a 8 (˚pīṭha, reading doubtful, v.l. valli˚). -kāraka offering oblations Ja i.384. -˚ṅkatā one who offers (the five oblations AN ii.68. -paṭiggāhaka receiving offerings worthy of oblations Ja ii.17 (yakkha; interpreted by Fick, Sociale Gliederung 79 as “tax-collector,” hardly justified); f. ˚ikā AN iii.77 (devatā), 260 (id.), cp. BSk balipratigrāhikā devatā Divy 1. -pīḷita crushed with taxes Ja v.98. -puṭṭha a crow (cp. Sk. balipuṣṭa “fed by oblations”) Abhp 638. -vadda (cp. Sk. balivarda after the Pali?) an ox, esp. an ox yoked to the plough or used in ploughing (on similes with b. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 349) SN i.115, SN i.170; SN iv.163 sq., 282 sq.; AN ii.108 sq. Snp p.13 (cp. Snp-a 137); Dhp 152 = Thag 1025; Ja i.57 Ja v.104 (Sāliyo b. phālena pahaṭo); Vism 284 (in simile of their escape from the ploughman); Dhp-a i.24 (dhuraṃ vahanto balivaddassa, v.l. balibaddassa); Vv-a 258 (vv.ll. ˚baddha & ˚bandha). The spelling; balibadda occurs at Vin iv.312. -sādhaka tax collector, tax gatherer Ja iv.366; Ja v.103 sq. -haraṇa taking oblations AN v.79 (˚vanasaṇḍa).

cp. Vedic bali; regarding etym. Grassmann connects it with bhṛ;

Balika

(adj.) strong; only in der. balikataraṃ (compar.) adv. in a stronger degree, more intensely more Mil 84; & dubbalika weak Thag-a 211. Cp balaka.

fr. bala

Balin

(adj.) strong Thag 12 (paññā˚); Vv 647; Dhp 280; Ja iii.484; Ja vi.147. Balisa & Balisa;

fr. bala

Balisa & Baḷisa

(m. & nt.) a fish-hook SN ii.226 = SN iv.158 (āmisa-gataṃ b.); Nd ii.374 (kāma˚ v.l. palisa); Ja i.482 sq.; Ja iii.283; Ja iv.195; Ja v.273 sq. 389; vi.416; Mil 412; Snp-a 114 (in expln of gaḷa Snp 61); Thag-a 280, Thag-a 292; Vb-a 196 (in comparison); Sdhp 610. On use in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 115.

-maṃsikā (f.) “flesh-hooking,” a kind of torture MN i.87; MN iii.164; AN i.47; AN ii.122; Nd i.154; Nd ii.604; Mil 197. -yaṭṭhi angling rod Dhp-a iii.397.

cp. Sk. baḍiśa

Balī˚

= bala˚ in combn with bhū & kṛ;, see bala.

Balīyati

to have strength, to grow strong, to gain power, to overpower Snp 770 (= sahati parisahati abhibhavati Nd i.12, cp. 361); Ja iv.84 (vv.ll. khalī˚ & paliyy˚; C expls by avattharati) = Pv ii.61 (= balavanto honti vaḍḍhanti abhibhavanti Pv-a 94); Ja vi.224 (3rd pl balīyare; C. abhibhavati, kuppati, of the border provinces); Ne 6 (vv.ll. bali˚, pali˚; C. abhibhavati).

Denom. fr. bala, cp. BSk. balīyati Mvu i.275

Balya1

(nt.) belonging to strength, only in cpd. dub˚; weakness MN i.364; Pp 66; also spelt dubballa MN i.13 ■ abl. dubbalyā as adv. groundlessly without strong evidence Vin iv.241 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1886 129).

der. fr. bala

Balya2

foolishness, stupidity Dhp 63 (v.l. bālya); Ja iii.278 (C. bālya); Dhp-a ii.30.

fr. bāla, cp. P. & Sk. bālya

Baḷavā

(f.) a mare, only in cpd. ˚mukha the mare’s mouth, i.e. an entrance to Niraya (cp. Vedic vaḍavâgni & vaḍavāmukha) Thag 1104 (trsl. “abyss-discharged mouth,” cp. Brethren, p. 418).

cp. Vedic vaḍavā

Baḷīyakkha

a species of birds Ja vi.539.

etym.?

Bahati1 [bṛh1]

to pull, see ab˚, ub˚, nib˚, & cp. udabbahe, pavāḷha.;

Bahati2 [baṃh

doublet of bṛh2 ] to strengthen, increase, see brūhana (upa˚); otherwise only in pp. bāḷha (q.v.) The Dhtp (344, cp. Dhtm 506) explns “baha braha brūha: vuddhiyaṃ.”

Bahati3

only in Caus. formations: to keep outside, lit. to make stay outside or away. See bāhā 2; bāheti, paribāhati.

a Pali root, to be postulated as der. fr. bahi in sense of “to keep out”

Bahala

(adj.) dense, thick Vin ii.112; Ja i.467 (˚palāpa-tumba a measure thickly filled with chaff); ii.91; Mil 282; Vism 257 (˚pūva, where Kp-a 56 omits bahala), 263 (opp. tanuka) Kp-a 62 (˚kuthita-lākhā thickly boiled, where in id. p Vism 261 has accha-lākhā, i.e. clear); Dhp-a iv.68; Vv-a 162 (= aḷāra) ■ subahala very thick Mil 258 (rajojalla).

cp. Class. Sk. bahala & Ved. bahula

Bahalatta

(nt.) thickness, swollen condition, swelling Ja i.147.

abstr. fr. above

Bahi

(adv.) outside 1. (adv.) Ja i.361 (˚dvāre-gāma a village outside the city gates); Pv i.102; Dhp-a iii.118; Pv-a 24, Pv-a 61. 2. (prep.) with acc. (direction to) Ja i.298 (˚gāmaṃ) with loc. (place where) ˚dvāra-koṭṭhake outside the gate MN ii.92; AN iii.31; ˚nagare outside the city Ja ii.2; Pv-a 39. 47; ˚vihāre outside the monastery Dhp-a i.315.

-gata gone outside (i.e. into worldly affairs, or according to Vv-a 213 engaged with the bahiddh’ ārammaṇāni) Vv 5015 (abahiggata-mānasa with his mind not gone outside himself). -nikkhamana going outside of (abl.), leaving Vism 500 (mātukucchito bahinikkhamanaṃ mūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ).

cp. Vedic bahis & bahir; the s(ḥ) is restored in doubling of cons. in compn like bahig-gata Vv 5015, in bahiddhā and in lengthening of i as bahī Ja v.65

Bahiddhā

(adv.) outside (adv. & prep.) DN i.16; DN ii.110; SN i.169; SN iii.47, SN iii.103 SN iv.205; SN v.157; Vin iii.113 (˚rūpa opp. ajjhatta-rūpa Snp 203; Vb-a 260 (kāye); Dhp-a i.211 (c. gen); iii.378 (sāsanato b.); Dhs-a 189ajjhatta˚; inside & outside personal-external see ajjhatta ■ The; bahiddh’ ārammaṇāni (objects of thought concerning that which is external) are the outward sense-objects in the same meaning as bāhirāni āyatanāni are distinguished fr ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (see āyatana 3 and ārammaṇa 3). They are discussed at Vism 430 sq.; cp. Dhs 1049-The phrase “ito bahiddhā” refers to those outside the teaching of the Buddha (“outside this our doctrine”), e.g. at DN i.157; SN i.133; AN iv.25; Dhs 1005.

fr. bahi, cp. Vedic bahirdhā, formation in ˚dhā, like ekadhā, sattadhā etc. of numerals

Bahu

(adj.) [Vedic bahu, doubtful whether to Gr. παξύς; fr. bṛh2 to strengthen, cp. upabrūhana, paribbūḷha much, many, large, abundant; plenty; in compn also very, greatly (˚-) instr. sg. bahunā Dhp 166; nom. pl bahavo Vin iii.90; Dhp 307, & bahū Dhp 53; Ja iv.366 Ja v.40; Ja vi.472; Bv 2, Bv 47; Pv iv.14; Mvu 35, Mvu 98; Pv-a 67; nt. pl. bahūni Snp 665, Snp 885; gen. dat. bahunnaṃ SN i.196; Snp 503, Snp 957, & bahūnaṃ Ja v.446; Kv 528 (where id. p. MN i.447 reads bahunnaṃ); instr. bahūhi Pv-a 241; loc. bahūsu Pv-a 58 ■ nt. nom. bahu Dhp 258; bahuṃ Pv-a 166, & bahud in compn bahud-eva (d may be euphonic) Ja i.170; Bv 20, Bv 32. As nt. n. bahuṃ a large quantity AN ii.183 (opp. appaṃ); abl. bahumhā Ja v.387. As adv. bahu so much Pv ii.1311 ■ Compar bahutara greater, more, in greater number AN i.36 (pl bahutarā, opp. appakā); ii.183; SN v.457, SN v.466; Ja ii.293 Ja vi.472; Pv ii.117; Mil 84; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 76 ■ In composition with words beginning with a vowel (in sandhi bahu as a rule appears as bavh˚; (for bahv˚, see Geiger P.Gr. § 49, 1), but the hiatus form bahu is also found as in bahu-itthiyo Ja i.398 (besides bahutthika); bahuamaccā Ja i.125; bahu-āyāsa (see below). Besides we have the contracted form bahū as in bahûpakāra, etc.).

-ābādha (bavh˚) great suffering or illness, adj. full of sickness, ailing much MN ii.94; AN i.107; AN ii.75, AN ii.85; Mil 65; Sdhp 89 (cp. 77). -āyāsa (bahu˚) great trouble Thig 343(i)tthika (bahutthika) having many women Vin ii.256; SN ii.264. -ūdaka containing much water Ja iii.430 (f. bahūdikā & bahodikā).; -ūpakāra of great service, very helpful, very useful SN iv.295; SN v.32; MN iii.253; Iti 9; Vin v.191; Ja i.121; Pv iv.156; Pv-a 114. -odaka (bavh˚) = ˚ûdaka Thag 390. -kata (a. benevolent, doing service Vin iv.57, Vin iv.212. (b) much moved or impressed by (instr.), paying much attention to Vin i.247. -karaṇīya having much to do, busy DN ii.76; Vin i.71; SN ii.215; AN iii.116; DN-a i.237. -kāra (a) favour Dāvs iv.39 (b) doing much, of great service very helpful MN i.43, MN i.170; AN i.123, AN i.132; AN ii.126; SN v.67; Pv ii.1219; Ja iv.422; Mil 264. -kāratta service, usefulness Kp-a 91. -kicca having many duties, very busy Vin i.71; DN i.106; DN ii.76; SN ii.215; AN iii.116; DN-a i.237 -khāra a kind of alkali (product of vegetable ash Ja vi.454. -jañña see bāhu˚ ■ jana a mass of people a great multitude, a crowd, a great many people DN i.4; Iti 78; Ja vi.358; Pp 30, Pp 57; Pv ii.77; Pv-a 30. At some passages interpreted by Bdhgh as “the unconverted the masses,” e.g. DN i.47, expld at DN-a i.143 by “assutavā andha-bāla puthujjana”; Dhp 320 (bahujjana), expld at Dhp-a iv.3 by “lokiya-mahājana. -jāgara very watchful Dhp 29 (= mahante sativepulle jāgariye ṭhita Dhp-a i.262); Snp 972 (cp. Nd i.501). -jāta growing much, abundant Ja vi.536. -ṭhāna (-cintin) of far-reaching knowledge, whose thoughts embrace many subjects Ja iii.306; Ja iv.467; Ja v.176. -dhana with many riches Pv-a 97. -patta having obtained much, loaded with gifts Vin iv.243. -pada many-footed, a certain order of creatures, such as centipedes, etc. Vin ii.110 Vin iii.52; AN ii.34; Iti 87. -(p)phala rich in fruit Snp 1134 cp. Nd ii.456. -(b)bīhi t.t.g., name of cpds. with adj sense, indicating possession. -bhaṇḍa having an abundance of goods, well-to-do Vin iii.138; Kp-a 241. -bhāṇika = ˚bhāṇin Pv-a 283. -bhāṇitā garrulousness Pv-a 283. -bhāṇin garrulous AN iii.254, AN iii.257; Dhp 227. -bhāva largeness, richness, abundance Dhp-a ii.175. -bherava very terrible AN ii.55. -maccha rich in fish Ja iii.430 -mata much esteemed, venerable Cp vi.7; Pv-a 117 -manta very tricky Dhp-a ii.4 (v.l. māya). -māna respect, esteem, veneration Ja i.90; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 155, Pv-a 274 -māya full of deceit, full of tricks Ja v.357 (cp. ˚manta) -vacana (tt.g.) the plural number Ja iv.173; Pv-a 163 -vāraka the tree Cordia myxa Abhp 558. -vighāta fraught with great pain Thig 450. -vidha various multiform Cp xv.7; Pgdp 37. -sacca see bāhu˚-(s)suta having great knowledge, very learned, well-taught DN i.93, DN i.137; DN iii.252, DN iii.282; Ja i.199; Ja iv.244; AN i.24; AN ii.22, AN ii.147, AN ii.170, AN ii.178; AN iii.114; Snp 58 (see Nd ii.457); Iti 60, Iti 80; Thag 1026; Dhp 208; Vin ii.95; Ja i.93; Mil 19; Thag-a 274, Thag-a 281; Snp-a 109, Snp-a 110. -(s)sutaka of great knowledge (ironical) DN i.107 (see Dial. i.132).

Bahuka

(adj.) great, much, many, abundant J. iii.368 (b. jano most people, the majority of p.) v.388; iv.536; Mvu 36, Mvu 49; Pv-a 25 (gloss for pahūta Pv i.52); Dhp-a ii.175 ■ nt. bahukaṃ plenty, abundance AN ii.7 = Pp 63; Vism 403 (opp. thokaṃ). Compar bahukataraṃ more Ja ii.88 (v.l. bahutaraṃ).

fr. bahu

Bahukkhattuṃ

(adv.) many times Mil 215.

bahu + khattuṃ, like sattakkhattuṃ, ti˚ etc.

Bahutta

(nt.) multiplicity, manifoldedness Vb-a 320 (cetanā˚).

cp. Sk. bahutvaṃ

Bahudhā

(adv.) in many ways or forms SN v.264 (hoti he becomes many), 288; MN i.34; Snp 966; Pv iv.152 (= bahūhi pakārehi Pv-a 241) Mvu 31, Mvu 73; Dāvs v.68.

fr. bahu, cp. Vedic bahudhā

Bahula

(adj.) much, abundant, nt. abundance (˚-); full of, rich in, fig. given to, intent on, devoted to DN ii.73; SN i.199, SN i.202; AN iii.86 (pariyatti˚), 432 (āloka˚); iv.35; Iti 27, Iti 30; Ja iv.5 (vināsa˚), 22; Pv-a 80 (chārik’ angāra˚) ■ sayana˚ as much as “particular in one’s choice of resting place Mil 365 nt. bahulaṃ (-˚) in the fullness of, full of SN iii.40 (nibbidā˚). The compn form with karoti (kamma) is bahulī˚ (q.v.). Cp.; bāhulla.

-ājīva living in abundance (opp. lūkh’ ājīvin) DN iii.44, DN iii.47.

usually -˚, as ˚-only in cpd. ˚ājīva

Bahula

(nt.) Name of a lucky die Ja vi.281.

= preceding

Bahulī˚

in compn with kar = bahula (adj.) + kar, lit. “to make much of,” i.e. to practise, in foll. words: ˚kata (pp. practised (frequently), usually combd with bhāvita SN ii.264; SN iv.200, SN iv.322; SN v.259; AN i.6; Vism 267 (= punappunaṃ kata); ˚katatta (nt.) practice DN ii.214; ˚kamma continuous practice, an act often repeated MN i.301; Dhs-a 406 (= punappuna-karaṇa); ˚karoti to take up seriously, to practise, devote oneself to (acc.) MN i.454; AN i.275; AN iii.79; SN iv.322; Dhp-a iii.356 (sevati + ) Vb-a 291; ˚kāra zealous exercise, practice MN iii.25 sq (tab-bahulī˚ to this end).

rare in Ep. Sk.; when found, diff. in meaning

Bahuso

(adv.) repeatedly Pv-a 107.

cp. Sk. bahuśaḥ

Bahūta

(adj.) abundant, much Thig 406 (˚ratana, so read for bahuta˚), 435 (for bahutadhana); Ja iii.425 (bahūtam ajjaṃ “plenty of food”; ajja = Sk. ādya, with Kern, Toev. s. v. bahūta for T. bahūtamajjā, which introd. story takes as bahūtaṃ = balaṃ ajja, with ajjā metri causâ. C. expls however as mataka-bhattaṃ); vi.173 (˚tagarā mahī); Pv ii.75 (v.l. for pahūta, cp. pahūtika).

for pahūta = Sk. prabhūta

Bahūtaso

(adv.) in abundance Ja iii.484 (where C. expln with bahūtaso is faulty and should perhaps be read pahūtaso) vi.538.

der. fr. bahūta, cp. Sk. prabhūtaśaḥ

Bākucī

(f.) the plant Vernonia anthelminthica Abhp 586.

cp. *Sk. bākucī

Bāṇa

an arrow Mbhv 19.

cp. Vedic bāṇa

Bādha

lit. pressing (together), oppression, hindrance, annoyance Ja vi.224. Cp. sam˚.

fr. bādh

Bādhaka

(adj.) oppressing, harassing, injurious Vism 496 (dukkhā aññaṃ na ˚ṃ); Vv-a 214; Pv-a 175.

fr. bādh

Bādhakatta

(nt.) the fact of being oppressive or injurious Vism 496.

abstr. fr. bādhaka

Bādhati

to press, weigh on; oppress, hinder afflict, harm DN ii.19; Ja i.211; Ja iv.124; Vism 400; Dhp-a i.24. grd. bādhitabba Thag-a 65; Pass. bādhiyati to be afflicted, to become sore, to suffer Snp-a 481; Thag-a 282; ppr. bādhiyamāna Pv-a 33 (so read for ˚ayamāna) 69 ■ Caus. bādheti; pp. bādhita (q.v.). Cp. vi˚.

Vedic bādhate, bādh; Idg. *bheidh to force, cp. Goth. baidjan, Ohg. beitten. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fido. In Pali there seems to have taken place a confusion of roots bādh and bandh, see bādheti & other derivations

Bādhana

(nt.) 1. snaring, catching (of animals etc.) SN v.148; Ja i.211.

2. hindrance DN-a i.132. 3. affliction, injury, hurting Vism 495; Pv-a 116.

fr. bādh

Bādhita

oppressed, pressed hard, harassed Dhp 342 (but taken by C. as “trapped, snared,” baddha Dhp-a iv.49); Thag-a 65.

pp. of bādhati

Bādhin

(adj.) (-˚) (lit. oppressing), snaring; as n. a trainer Vin ii.26 (Ariṭṭha gaddha˚-pubba); iv.218 (id.).

fr. bādh

Bādheti

1. to oppress, afflict, hurt, injure Ja vi.224; Pv-a 198 (bādheyya = heṭhayeyya). grd. bādhanīya Pv-a 175. Cp. paribādheti in same sense.

2. to bind, catch, snare Thag 454; Thag 2, Thag 299; Ja ii.51 (aor bādhayiṃsu); iv.342; v.295, 445 (pot. bādhaye bādheyya C. on p. 447; vv.ll. baddh˚, bandh˚). grd bādhetabba SN iv.298.

Caus. of bādhati; the confusion with bandhati is even more pronounced in the Caus. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. we find bādhayati for bandhayati in Sk. as well

Bārāṇaseyyaka

(adj.) of Benares, coming fr. B. (a kind of muslin) DN ii.110; DN iii.260.

fr. Bārāṇasī

Bāla1

(adj.) 1. ignorant (often with ref. to ignorance in a moral sense, of the common people, the puthujjana) foolish (as contrasted with paṇḍita cp. the Bālapaṇḍita-sutta MN iii.163 sq.; DN ii.305 sq.; Vism 499 and contrasts at Snp 578; Dhp 63, Dhp 64; Pv iv.332; Dhs 1300), lacking in reason, devoid of the power to think & act right. In the latter sense sometimes coupled with; andha (spiritually blind), as andhabāla stupid ignorant, mentally dull, e.g. at Dhp-a i.143; Dhp-a ii.89; Pv-a 254 ■ A fanciful etym. of b. at Kp-a 124 is “balanti ananti ti bālā.” Other refs.: DN i.59, DN i.108; SN i.23; AN i.59, AN i.68, AN i.84; AN ii.51, AN ii.180; Snp 199, Snp 259, Snp 318, Snp 578, Snp 879; Iti 68; Dhp 28, Dhp 60 sq., 71 sq., 206 sq., 330; Ja i.124 (lola greedy-foolish); v.366 (bālo āmaka-pakkaṃ va); Vv 835; Pv i.82; iv.129; Pp 33; Nd i.163, Nd i.286 sq., 290; Snp-a 509 (= aviddasu); Pv-a 193. Compar. bālatara Ja iii.278, Ja iii.279; Vv-a 326.

2. young, new; newly risen (of the sun): ˚ātāpa the morning sun DN-a i.287; Dhp-a i.164; Mhbv 25; ˚vasanta “early spring” (= Citramāsa), Name of the first one of the 4 summer months (gimha-māsā) Kp-a 192; -suriya the newly risen sun Ja v.284; Pv-a 137, Pv-a 211.

3. a child; in wider application meaning a youth under 16 years of age (cp. Abhp 251) DN-a i.134. Cp. bālaka.

-nakkhatta Name of a certain “feast of fools,” i.e. carnival Dhp-a i.256. -saṅgatacārin one who keeps company with a fool Dhp 207.

cp. Sk. bāla (rarely Vedic, more freq. in Ep. & Class. Sk.); its orig. meaning is “young, unable to speak,” cp. Lat. infans, hence “like a child, childish infantile”

Bāla2

the hair of the head Pv-a 285 (˚koṭimatta not even one tip of the hair; gloss BB vālagga˚).

for vāla

Bālaka

1. boy, child, youth SN i.176; Thag-a 146 (Ap. v.44: spelt ˚akka); Sdhp 351 ■ f. bālikā young girl Thag-a 54 (Ap. v.1).

2. fool Dhs-a 51 (˚rata fond of fools).

fr. bāla

Bālakin

(adj.) having fools, consisting of fools; f. ˚inī MN i.373 (parisā).

fr. bālaka

Bālatā

(f.) foolishness Ja i.101, Ja i.223.

abstr. to bāla

Bālisika

a fisherman SN ii.226; SN iv.158; Ja i.482; Ja iii.52 (cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 194); Mil 364 Mil 412; Dhp-a iii.397.

fr. balisa

Bālya

(nt.) 1. childhood, youth SN iii.1.

2. ignorance, folly Dhp 63; Ja ii.220 (= bāla-bhāva); iii.278 (balya); Pv-a 40. Also used as adj. in compar. bālyatara more foolish, extremely foolish Vv 836 sq. = Dhp-a i.30 (= bālatara, atisayena bāla Vv-a 326).

3. weakness (?) Ja vi.295 (balya, but C. bālya = dubbala-bhāva).

fr. bāla

Bāḷha

(adj.) strong; only as adv. ˚ṃ and ˚-, viz.

1. bāḷhaṃ strongly, very much, excessively, too much, to satiety Ja ii.293 Ja vi.291 (i.e. too often, C. punappunaṃ); Mil 407; Pv-a 274. Comparative bāḷhataraṃ in a higher degree even more, too much Vin ii.270, Vin ii.276; Mil 125.

2 (˚-) in bāḷha-gilāna very ill, grievously sick DN i.72; AN ii.144; SN v.303; DN-a i.212.

Vedic bāḍha, orig. pp. of bahati2

Bāḷhika

(adj.), only in su˚; having excess of good things, very prosperous Ja v.214 (C. expls by suṭṭhu aḍḍha).

fr. bāḷha

Bāvīsati

(num.) twenty-two Kv 218; Mil 419; Dhs-a 2.

bā = dvā, + vīsati

Bāhati

see bāheti.

Bāhā

(f.) 1. the arm AN ii.67 = AN iii.45 (˚bala); Vin ii.105; Ja iii.62; Ja v.215 (˚mudu). pacchā-bāhaṃ arm(s) behind (his back) DN i.245 (gāḷhabandhanaṃ baddha). bāhaṃ pasāreti to stretch out the arm DN i.222 = MN i.252≈. bāhāyaṃ gahetvā taking (him or her) by the arm DN i.221 sq.; MN i.365 (nānā-bāhāsu g.); Pv-a 148. bāhā paggayha reaching or stretching out one’s arms (as sign of supplication) DN ii.139; Ja v.267; Pv-a 92 and passim.

2. not quite certain whether “post” of a door or a “screen” (from bahati3) the former more likely. Only-˚ in ālambana˚; post to hold on to, a balustrade Vin ii.120, Vin ii.152; dvāra˚; doorpost DN ii.190; Pv i.51. Cp. bāhitikā.

-aṭṭhi (bāh˚) arm-bone Kp-a 50. -paramparāya arm in arm Vin iii.126.

a specific Pali doublet of bāhu, q.v. It is on the whole restricted to certain phrases, but occurs side by side of bāhu in others, like pacchā-bāhaṃ & ˚bāhuṃ bāhaṃ & bāhuṃ pasāreti

Bāhika

(adj.) foreign in ˚raṭṭha-vāsin living in a foreign country Ja iii.432 (or is it N.? Cp. Ja vii. p. 94).

= bāhiya

Bāhitatta

(nt.) keeping out, exclusion Nd ii.464 (in expln of word brāhmaṇa).

abstr. fr. bāhita

Bāhitikā

(f.) a mantle, wrapper (lit. “that which keeps out,” i.e. the cold or wind MN ii.116, MN ii.117.

fr. bāhita, pp. of bāheti1

Bāhiteyya

to be kept out (?) MN i.328. The reading seems to be corrupt; meaning is very doubtful; Neumann trsls “musst (mir) weichen.”

unclear; grd. of bāheti1, but formed fr. pp.?

Bāhiya

(adj.) foreign Ja i.421; Ja iii.432.

fr. bahi, cp. bāhira and Vedic bāhya

Bāhira

(adj.) 1. external, outside (opp. abbhantara inside) outer, foreign DN ii.75; AN iv.16; Dhp 394 (fig. in meaning of 2); Ja i.125 (antara˚ inside & outside); 337 (out of office, out of favour, of ministers); vi.384 (bāhiraṃ karoti to turn out, turn inside out); Pv iv.11 (nagarassa b.); Mil 281 (˚abbhantara dhana); Vv-a 68 (˚kittibhāva fact of becoming known outside) ■ santara˚ (adj.) [ = sa-antara] including the inward & outward parts DN i.74; AN iii.25; Thag 172; Ja i.125.

2. external to the individual, objective (opp. ajjhattika subjective MN iii.274 (cha āyatanā); Ja iv.402 (˚vatthuṃ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṃ gaṇhāti); Dhs 674 (cp. trsl. p. 207) Vb 13; Mil 215; Vism 450.

3. heretical, outsider in religious sense, non-Buddhist, freq. applied to the Brahmanic religion & their practice (samaya) Kv 251 (+ puthujjana-pakkhe ṭhita); Dhp-a iii.378 (= mana i.e. Bhagavato sāsanato bahiddhā) ■ Cases as adv. bāhirato from outside, from a foreign country Ja i.121 bāhire outside (the Buddhist order) Dhp 254.

-assāda finding his enjoyment in outward things AN i.280 (Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests “inclined towards heretic views”). -āsa one whose wishes are directed outwards, whose desires are turned to things external Thag 634. -kathā non-religious discourse, profane story Mil 24 (applied to the introductory chapter, thus “outside story” may be translated). -tittha doctrine of outsiders Ja iii.473. -dāna gift of externals, gift of property as opposed to gift of the person Ja iv.401 Ja vi.486; Dāvs iii.33. -pabbajjā the ascetic life outside the community of the Buddha; Brahmanic saintly life (thus equal to isi-pabbajjā. cp. bāhiraka˚). Ja iii.352 Ja iv.305. -bhaṇḍa property, material things, objects Ja iv.401. -mantā ritualistic texts (or charms) of religions other than the Buddha’s Ja iii.27. -rakkhā protection of external means SN i.73. -lomi with the fleece outside (of a rug) Vin ii.108. -samaya doctrine of the outsiders, i.e. Brahmins Dhp-a iii.392.

fr. bahi, as Sk. bāhya fr. bahis, cp. also bāhiya

Bāhiraka

(adj.) outsider, non-religious, non-Buddhist, heretic profane SN ii.267; AN i.73; AN iii.107; Kv 172 (isayo) Vv-a 67 (itthi).

-kathā unreligious discussion, profane story Kp-a 118 (cp. bāhirakathā). -tapa = foll. Ja i.390. -pabbajjā the ascetic life as led by disciples of other teachers than the Buddha, esp. Brahmanic (cp. bāhira˚ and BSk. bāhirako mārgaḥ, e.g. Mvu i.284; Mvu ii.210; Mvu ii.223) Ja iii.364; Dhp-a i.311.

= bāhira, but specialised in meaning bāhira 3

Bāhiratta

(nt.) being outside (of the individual), externality Vism 450.

abstr. fr. bāhira

Bāhirima

(adj.) outer, external, outside Vin iii.149 (b. māna external measure; opp. abbhantarima); Ja v.38 (opp. abbhantarima).

fr. bāhira, compar ■ adversative formation

Bāhu

the arm Ja iii.271 (bāhumā bāhuṃ pīḷentā shoulder to shoulder); Vism 192. -˚ṃ pasāreti to stretch out the arm (cp. bāhaṃ) Pv-a 112 pacchā-bāhuṃ (cp. bāhaṃ) Pv-a 4 (gāḷha-bandhanaṃ bandhāpetvā).

-(p)pacālakaṃ (adv.) after the manner of one who swings his arms about Vin ii.213 (see expln at Vin iv.188).

cp. Vedic bāhu, prob. to bahati2; cp. Gr. π ̈ηξυς in same meaning, Ohg. buoc. It seems that bāhu is more frequent in later literature, whereas the by-form bāhā belongs to the older period

Bāhujañña

(adj.) belonging to the mass of people, property of many people or of the masses DN ii.106, DN ii.219; SN ii.107 SN v.262; Ja i.29 (v.212). Note. The expression occurs only in stock phrase iddha phīta vitthārika bāhujañña.

fr. bahu + jana, cp. sāmañña fr. samaṇa

Bāhulya

(nt.) abundance Sdhp 77.

fr. bahula, the Sk. form for P. bāhulla

Bāhulla

(nt.) 1. abundance, superfluity, great quantity MN i.171; AN iv.87 (˚kathā) AN iv.87; Pts i.197; Ja i.81.

2. luxurious living, swaggering, puffed up frame of mind Vin i.9, Vin i.59, Vin i.209; Vin ii.197; Vin iii.251 ■ See also bāhulya & bāhullika;.

fr. bahula

Bāhullika

(adj.) living in abundance, swaggering, luxurious, spendthrift Vin i.9 (+ padhāna-vibbhanto, as also Ja i.68, with which Kern, Toev. s. v compares Mvu ii.241 & iii.329); ii.197; iii.250; MN i.14; MN iii.6; AN i.71; AN iii.108, AN iii.179 sq.; Ja i.68; Ja iii.363. The reading is often bāhulika.

fr. bāhulla

Bāhusacca

(nt.) great learning, profound knowledge MN i.445; AN i.38 (so read for bahu˚); ii.218; Vin iii.10; Dhp 271; Vv 639.

fr. bahu + sacca, which latter corresponds to a Sk. śrautya fr. śru, thus b. is the abstract to bahussuta See on expln of word Kern, Toev. s. v.

Bāheti1

to keep away, to keep outside, to ward off; only with ref. to pāpa (pāpaka) to keep away (from) sin SN i.141 (bāhetvā pāpāni); Snp 519 = Nd ii.464a (bāhetvā pāpakāni); Dhp 267; a popular etymology of brāhmaṇa (pāpaṃ bahenti) DN iii.94 (bāhitvā, better bāhetvā, expld by panuditvā Dhp-a iii.393; v.l. K vāh˚) ■ pp. bāhita (q.v.). See also nib˚, pari˚.

Caus. of bahati3 or Denom. fr. bahi

Bāheti2

to carry, see sam˚; (sambāhana, meaning rubbing, stroking). Whether atibāheti belongs here, is doubtful.

Caus. of bahati4, cp. Sk. vāhayati

Bidala

(adj. n.) 1. a kind of pulse, split pea Ja iv.353 (= mugga) in ˚sūpa haricot soup Ja iv.352.

2. a split bamboo cane, in ˚mañcaka a bedstead made of laths of split bamboo, the use of which is given as one of the characteristic features of the ascetic life Vin ii.149; Ja i.9; Dhp-a i.135.

cp. Sk. vidala in same meaning, fr. vi + dal

Bindu

1. a drop, usually a drop of water Snp 392, Snp 812 (uda˚); Ja i.100; Vism 531 (madhu˚) Thag-a 281; Pv-a 98 (udaka˚).

2. a spot (cp. SBE xvii.155) Vism 222 (˚vicitvā gāvī a spotted cow). 3. (as adj.) one of the eight qualities of perfect sound (brahma-ssara, with ref. to the voice of Brahmā and of Buddha, cp. aṭṭhanga), which are given at DN ii.211 DN ii.227 as (saro hoti) vissaṭṭho ca viññeyyo ca mañjū ca savanīyo ca bindu [vv.ll. bandu & bhindu] ca avisārī ca gambhīro ca ninnādī ca. We may translate by “full, close, compact” (Dial. ii.245 “continuous”) See also below ˚ssara.

-tthanī having breasts round as a bubble Ja v.215 -bindu(ṃ) drop by drop DN-a i.218. -matī (f.) Np. of a courtesan of Pāṭaliputta in the time of Asoka Mil 121 sq. -matta measuring a drop, even a drop Pv-a 100, Pv-a 104 (eka ˚ṃ). -sāra Np. of king of India, father of Asoka Dpvs v.101; vi.15; Mvu v.18, Mvu v.19. -ssara a full rounded voice Snp 350 (referred by Snp-a to a Mahāpurisa); adj. having a full voice (see above bindu 3; Pv iii.34 (T. vindu˚, BB bindu˚; Pv-a explns by avissaṭṭha-ssara sampiṇḍita-ssara, i.e. “continuous”) Ja ii.439 (= bindhunā avisaṭena piṇḍitena sarena samannāgata C.); v.204, 299 (= sampiṇḍita-ghana-ssara) vi.518 = 581 (= piṇḍita-ssara C.).

cp. Vedic bindu & vindu

Bimba

(nt.) 1. shape, image (= paṭimā Vv-a 168) SN i.134 (trsl. “puppet”); v.217 (vimba) Ja v.452. In phrase cittakataṃ bimbaṃ it refers to the human body (“the tricked-out puppet-shape” Brethren 303): MN ii.64 = Thag 769 = Dhp 147 = Vv-a 47, cp Dhp-a iii.109 (= attabhāva).

2. the red fruit of Momordica monadelpha, a species of Amaranth [cp. Sk bimba & bimbī, a kind of gourd] Ja iii.478; Ja vi.457, Ja vi.591; Vv 366 (kañcana˚-vaṇṇa of the colour of the golden Bimba Dhp. at Vv-a 168 takes it as bimba1 = paṭimā Dhp-a i.387 (˚phala, with ref. to red lips). bimboṭṭha (f. ˚ī) (having) red lips Ja iii.477; Ja vi.590 (nigrodhapatta-bimb’ oṭṭhī) Thag-a 133 (Ap. v.57). The Sk. vimbī according to Halāyudha 2, 48 is equal to oṣṭhī, a plant (Bryonia grandis?).

-oṭṭhi see above 2. -ohana [second part either *ūhana vāhana “carrying,” or contracted form of odahana fr. ava + dhā, i.e. *odhana *ohana “putting down,” or still more likely for ūhana as seen in ūhanati2 2 fr. ud + hṛ; raising, lifting up] a pillow Vin i.47 (bhisi˚); ii.76, 150, 208, 200, 218; iii.90, 119 (bhisi˚) iv.279; SN ii.268; AN iii.240; Vb-a 365; Vism 79. See also bhisi1. -jāla [BR. bimbajā?] the Bimba tree Momordica monadelpha (lit. net of b. fruits) Ja i.39 Ja vi.497 (cp. p. 498 ratt’ ankura-rukkhaṃ probably with v.l. to be read ratta-kuravaka˚, see bimbi-jāla) Bv xvi.19.

cp. Class. Sk. bimba

Bimbaka

= bimba 2; Vv-a 168.

Bimbi

(or bimbī ) gold, of golden colour DN-a i.280 = Snp-a 448 (in Bdhgh’s fanciful etym of king Bimbisāra, viz. bimbī ti suvaṇṇaṃ, sārasuvaṇṇa-sadisa-vaṇṇatāya B.).

-jāla the red amaranth tree, the Bodhi tree of the former Buddha Dhammadassin Ja i.39; Ja v.155. At Ja vi.497, Ja vi.498 the form is bimbajāla. The C. expln gives ratta-kuravaka as a synonym.

= Sk. bimbī, see bimba

Bila1

(nt.) a hole, den, cave AN ii.33 = SN iii.85; Thag 189 Nd i.362; Ja i.480; Ja ii.53; Ja vi.574 (= guhā C.); Mil 151 Sdhp 23kaṇṇa˚; orifice of the ear Vism 195; vammīka˚; ant’s nest Ja iv.30; sota˚; = kaṇṇa˚ Dhs-a 310.

-āsaya (adj.) living in holes, a cave-dweller, one of the four classes of animals (bil˚, dak˚, van˚, rukkh˚ SN iii.85 = AN ii.33; Nd i.362; Bv ii.97; Ja i.18.

Vedic bila, perhaps fr. bhid to break, cp. K.Z. 12, 123. Thus already expld by Dhtp 489: bila bhedane

Bila2

(nt.) a part, bit Ja vi.153 (˚sataṃ 100 pieces); abl. bilaso (adv.) bit by bit MN i.58 = MN iii.91 (v.l. vilaso). At Ja v.90 in cpd. migābilaṃ (maṃsaṃ it is doubtful whether we should read mig’ābilaṃ (thus as we have done, taking ābila = āvila), or migā-bilaṃ with a lengthened metri causâ, as the C. seems to take it (migehi khādita-maṃsato atirittaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ).

-kata cut into pieces, made into bits Ja v.266 (read macchā bilakatā yathā for macchābhīlā katā y.). The C. here (p. 272) expls as koṭṭhāsa-kata; at Ja vi.111 however the same phrase is interpreted as puñja-kata i.e. thrown into a heap (like fish caught by a fisherman in nets). Both passages are applied to fish and refer to tortures in Niraya.

identical with bila1

Bila3

a kind of salt Vin i.202; MN ii.178, MN ii.181.

cp. Sk. viḍa

Bilaṅga

sour gruel Ja vi.365 (= kañjiya); usually in stock phrase kaṇājaka bilaṅga-dutiya (seed-cake? accompanied by sour gruel Vin ii.77, Vin ii.78; SN i.90; AN i.145; AN iv.392; Ja i.228; Ja iii.299; Snp-a 94; Dhp-a iii.10 (v.l. pilanka-˚akaṃ); iv.77; Vv-a 222, Vv-a 298 (bilanka˚).

-thālika a certain torture, called “gruel-pot (should there be any relation to bila-kata under bila2? AN i.47; AN ii.122; Nd ii.604 (v.l. khil˚); Mil 197, Mil 290, Mil 358 (all passages in standard setting).

etym. doubtful; one compares both Sk. viḍanga the plant Embelia ribes, and vilanga the plant Erycibe paniculata

Bilaṅgika

(adj.) living on sour gruel; Name of a class of brāhmaṇas at Rājagaha SN i.164.

Billa

fruit of the Bilva tree, Aegle marmelos or Bengal quince, only in one stock phrase where its size is compared with sizes of smaller fruits, and where it is preceded by āmalaka SN i.150 = AN iv.170 (vv.ll. villa, bila, beḷu, bilāla) = Snp p.125 (vv.ll. pillā billā, billa; T. reading after SS billi ). Cp. derivations bella & beluva;.

cp. Ved. bilva

Biḷāra

a cat DN ii.83; MN i.128, MN i.334; SN ii.270; AN iii.122 (viḷāra); v.202, 289; Thag 1138; Ja i.461 (as representing deceit), 480; v.406, 416, 418; Mil 118; Dhp-a ii.152; PugA 225. On biḷāra in similes cp J.P.T.S. 1907, 116.

-nissakkana (-matta) (large enough) for a cat to creep through AN v.195. -bhastā (a bag of) catskin MN i.128 (expld by Bdhgh as “biḷāra-camma-pasibbako”); Thag 1138. At both passages in similes.

etym. uncertain, prob. a loan-word; cp. late Sk. biḍāla & see also P. biḷāla. The Prk. forms are birāla & virāla, f. birālī

Biḷārikā

(f.) a she-cat Ja iii.265.

cp. Sk. biḍālikā

Biḷāla1

a cat Ja i.110; Ja ii.244; Ja vi.593. pakkha a flying fox Ja vi.538.

see biḷāra

Biḷāla2

a kind of salt Abhp 461.

see bila3

Biḷālī

(f.) a bulbous plant, a tuber Ja iv.46 (= ˚vallīkanda, cp. gloss latātanta on kalamba), 371 (= ˚kanda Com. p. 373); vi.578. Cp. takkaḷa.

f. of biḷāla = biḷāra, cp. Sk. biḍālī, also Name of a plant, see on Prk. chira-birālī = Sk. kṣīra-biḍālī Pischel Gr. § 241

Biḷibiḷikā

(f.) tittle-tattle SN i.200 = Thag 119. Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren 106 n.) trsl “finglefangle,” noting the commentator’s paraphrase “vilivilikriyā” (lit. sticky-sticky-action?).

onomat. cp. E. babble

Bīja

(nt.) 1. seed, germ, semen, spawn. Used very frequently in figurative sense: see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 116 ■ DN i.135 (˚bhatta seed-corn food); iii.44 (the five kinds: see below under ˚gāma) MN i.457; SN i.21, SN i.134, SN i.172, SN i.227; SN iii.54, SN iii.91; SN iv.315; AN i.32 (ucchu˚), 135, 223, 229, 239; iii.404; iv.237 v.213 (ucchu˚); Snp 77 (saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhi, cp Snp-a 142 sq., where a detailed discussion on bīja is found), 209, 235 (khīṇa˚ adj. fig.); Ja i.242 (tiṇa˚-ādīni grass and other seeds), 281; Pv i.11; Vism 555 (in simile); Kp-a 194 (on Snp 235, in another comparison) Sdhp 24, Sdhp 270 sq., 318. nibbatta˚; (or nivatta˚) (adj.) that which has dropped its seed (hence a lawful food) Vin i.215, cp. ii.109; iv.35.

2. element, in udaka˚; whose element is the water Ja vi.160.

-gāma seed-group, seed-kingdom, seed-creation (opp bhūta-gāma). There are 5 kinds of seeds usually enumd, e.g. at DN i.5 (expld at DN-a i.77, trsln at Dial. i.6 and passim), viz. mūla˚, khandha˚, phalu˚, agga˚ bija˚, or plants propagated by roots, cuttings, joints buddings, shoots, seeds (Dial. iii.40: tubers, shoots berries, joints, seeds). The same set occurs at DN iii.44 DN iii.47; Vin iv.34; Snp-a 144 ■ Without ref. to the 5 kinds at MN iii.34; SN v.46; Mil 33. -jāta species of seed SN iii.54. -bīja one of the 5 groups of edible or useful plants, falling under bījagāma. It is expld at Vin iv.35 & DN-a i.81 by the terms pubbaṇṇa (i.e. the seven dhaññāni or grains, sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu varaka, kudrūsa) and aparaṇṇa (i.e. beans and other leguminous plants, and gourds such as mugga, māsa tila, kulattha, alābu, kumbhaṇḍa). -sakaṭa a cart (-load) of seeds Snp-a 137.

cp. Vedic bīja

Bījaka

scion, offspring Vin iii.18nīla˚; a waterplant Vin iii.276 (C. on Vin iii.177). Bijati & Bijani

fr. bīja

Bījati & Bījanī

are by-forms of vījati & vījanī (q.v.).

Bījin

(-˚) (adj.) having seed, only in cpd. eka˚; having one seed (for only one future life) left AN i.233; SN v.205; Ne 189, cp. AN iv.380; Kvu ii.471, see also KvuA in J.P.T.S. 1889, 137.

fr. bīja

Bībhaccha

(adj.) disgusting, awful, horrible, dreadful Ja ii.276; Ja iv.71 (˚vaṇṇa), Sdhp 603. ˚dassana a disgusting sight, horrible to behold Ja i.171; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 56 Pv-a 68, Pv-a 99 (: all with ref. to Petas) ■ The spelling bhībhaccha (after bhī ) is sometimes found, e.g. at Ja i.61 Ja iv.491; Ja v.42.

cp. Epic Sk. bībhatsa, bībhatsate to feel disgust. Not a des. fr. bādhate: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fastidium

Bīraṇa

a fragrant grass, Andropogon muricatum SN iii.137; (here represented as larger than the kusa babbaja grasses, smaller than a tree).;

cp. Sk. vīraṇa & vīraṇī-mūla = uśīra Halāyudha 2, 467

Bujjhaka

(adj.) intelligent, prudent, judicicus, in ; Dpvs ix.17, foolish, imprudent, unmindful of their own interest (trsln suggested by E. Hardy as preferable to Oldenberg’s “unnoticed”). Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893 69 suggests “not fighting,” thus making abujjhaka avujjh˚ = ayujjh˚ (of yudh ).

fr. budh

Bujjhati

to be awake, to be enlightened in (acc.), to perceive, to know, recognise, understand DN ii.249; SN i.74, SN i.198; Dhp 136, Dhp 286; Thag 146; Ja iii.331; Ja iv.49 Ja iv.425; Mil 165, Mil 348 (pot. bujjheyya); Dpvs i.14 (with gen.) Kp-a 219 (so attho sukhaṃ b.). 3rd pl. bujjhare Thig 453; Bv ii.183. imper. bujjhassu Bv ii.183. fut. bujjhissati Bv ii.65; aor. abujjhi Bv ii.211, and bujjhi Ja iv.425; Vism 209; pret. 3rd sg. abujjhatha Bv vii.22 ■ ppr. bujjhamāna Snp 395; Bv vii.22; Dhp-a i.93 ■ pp. buddha (q.v.) ■ Caus. I. bodheti (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. bujjhāpeti to lead to knowledge or recognition Ja i.407. Two infinitives formed fr. bodh but belonging to budh are bodhuṃ Ja v.341, and boddhuṃ Thag 167.

budh, y-formation, corresp. to Sk. budhyate for the usual bodhate. The sense is that of a Med., but is also used as Act. with acc. of object, e.g. saccāni bujjhi he recognised the truths Vism 209 ■ The Dhtp (414) and Dhtm (652) explain budh by “avagamane (understanding, see ogamana), Dhtm (242) also by “bodhane” (awakening). Bdhgh’s expln of the meaning is “kilesa-santāna-niddāya uṭṭhahati cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati Nibbānam eva vā sacchikaroti” Dhs-a 217, cp. trsln at Expos. 294 “to rise from the slumber of the continuum of the lower nature, or a penetrating the Ariyan Truths, or a realizing Nibbāna”

Bujjhana

(nt.) awakening, attaining to knowledge, recognition Pts i.18; Mil 194; DN-a i.51.

fr. budh

Bujjhanaka

(adj.) endowed with knowledge, having the elements of bodhi, being enlightened Dhs-a 217.

fr. bujjhana

Bujjhitar

one who becomes enlightened or recognises Nd i.457 = Pts i.174 = Vism 209 (bujjhitā saccāni, of the Buddha).

n. ag. of bujjhati

Buḍḍha

aged, old DN ii.162; Ja i.164 (˚pabbajita one who has become an ascetic in his old age). Compar. buḍḍhatara Dhp-a ii.239 (v.l. K.B.S. vuḍḍhatara).

for vuḍḍha, pp. of vṛdh, see vaḍḍhati

Buddha1

(adj.) (a) understood SN i.35 = SN i.60 (su-dub-buddha very difficult to understand) ■ (b) having attained enlightenment, wise AN iv.449; Pv-a 16 (buddh’ ādayo) 60 (= ariya). Usually appld to the Bhagavant (Gotama) MN i.386 (one of the adj. describing Gotama to Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta); Snp 993. The true brāhmaṇa is buddha, e.g. Snp 622, Snp 643, Snp 646.

med ■ pass. pp. of bujjhati, cp. Epic Sk. buddha

Buddha2

A. one who has attained enlightenment; a man superior to all other beings, human divine, by his knowledge of the truth, a Buddha. At AN ii.38 the Buddha declares himself to be neither a god (deva) nor a Gandharva, nor a Yakṣa nor a man. The word Buddha is an appellative, not a proper name (na mātarā kataṃ etc., vimokkh’ antikaṃ etaṃ buddhānaṃ Bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle… paññatti Nd i.458 & Ps; i.174 ■ There are 2 sorts of B’s, viz Pacceka-buddhas or Buddhas who attain to complete enlightenment, but do not preach the way of deliverance to the world, and Sammāsambuddhas, who are omniscient and endowed with the 10 powers (see bala) and whose mission is to proclaim the saving truth to all beings (cp. Mil 106). In this function the B’s are Satthāro or teachers, Masters. In his rôle of a preeminent man a Buddha is styled Bhagavā or Lord Buddho so Bhagavā MN i.235; Pv ii.960 = Dhp-a iii.219-Besides the 18 dhammā and the 10 balāni they are gifted with the 4 vesārajjāni (A ii.9, cp. Mil 106) These teachers appear upon the earth from time to time; the approach of the birth of a B. (buddh’-uppāda) is hailed by the acclamation of the worlds, they live the houseless life and found an Order (Buddha-pamukha bhikkhu-sangha Snp p.111; Snp 81, Snp 386; Mil 212; DN-a i.242; Pv-a 19). The news that a B. has appeared upon earth is a cause of the greatest rejoicing: opportunity to see him is eagerly sought (Vin ii.155; SN i.210; DN-a i.248). The B. is always born in a brāhmaṇa or khattiya family. It is impossible here to give all the references for the Buddhas or Buddhahood in general see e.g. Vin iii.24 sq.; Dhp 182 sq., 194, 195 (= sammā sambuddhā Dhp-a iii.252), 387; Ja i.51; Ja iii.128; Vism 442 (pubba-buddhā); Pv-a 20 ■ The remembrance of former births a B. shares with other classes of privileged beings, only in a different (higher) degree. This faculty (in an ascending scale) is possessed by the foll. 6 classes titthiyā, pakati-sāvakā, mahā-sāvaka, agga-sāvakā pacceka-buddhā, buddhā (see Vism 411) ■ B. The word Buddha is specially applied to the Buddha of the present world-age, Gotama by family-name. He is said to be the 25th of the series of former Buddhas (pubbā buddhā) SN i.109, SN i.140; SN iv.52Seven Buddhas are mentioned in the earlier texts & frequently referred to (cp. the 7 Rishis of the Vedic period, see also under satta, No. 7). They are Vipassī, Sikhī, Vessabhū Kakusandha, Konāgamana, Kassapa and Gotama (D ii.5–⁠7; SN ii.5

11; cp. Thag 491; Ja ii.147). They are also mentioned in an old formula against snake-bites (Vin ii.110). The (allegorical) names of the predecessors of these in former ages are Dīpankara, Kondañña, Mangala Sumana, Revata, Sobhita, Anomadassī, Paduma Narada, Padumuttara, Sumedha, Sujāta, Piyadassī Atthadassī, Dhammadassī, Siddhattha, Tissa, Phussa-The typical career of a Buddha is illustrated in the life of Gotama and the legends connected with his birth, as they appear in later tradition. Before his last existence he practised the 10 perfections (pāramitā q.v.) for many ages, & finally descended from the Tusita Heaven (see Buddhavaṃsa). He was born in a khattiya family and was distinguished by the 32 signs of a great man (Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni see D; ii.17 sq and similar passages; cp. Ud 48). His mother Māyā bore him painlessly and died seven days after his birth MN iii.118 sq ■ The story of each of the 25 Buddhas is given in the Buddhavaṃsa, quoted in the introductory chapters of the Jātak’ aṭṭhakathā ■ Convinced that asceticism was not the way to enlightenment, he renounced austerities. He became enlightened when seated in meditation under an Assattha tree (Ficus religiosa, hence called Bodhi or Bo tree). At the supreme moment he was tempted by Māra, but vanquished the evil one. He was then ready to depart but resolved to remain in the world and preach the truth (MN i.169; Vin i.6; a rather diff. account AN ii.20) That day he knew and proclaimed himself to be the Buddha and his career as a teacher began (MN i.171; Vin i.9; Snp 558) ■ Like all the other Sammā-sambuddhas he founded an Order, converting and gladdening men by his discourses. After a long life of teaching he attained Nibbāna (nibbānaṃ adhigacchi), and passed utterly away: SN i.210; DN ii.156; Snp 83, Snp 513 Snp 1133 sq.; Mil 96 ■ The Epithets attributed to all the Buddhas are naturally assigned also to Gotama Buddha Out of the almost endless series of these we only give a few. He is adored as the highest and holiest of men (SN i.47; SN iii.84; loke anuttaro, lokassa aggo; Mil 70) He is the supremely wise, the conqueror of the powers of darkness, the teacher of gods (devas and yakkhas and men SN i.50, SN i.132, SN i.206. 301; AN i.142; AN ii.33; AN iii.65; Snp 157 sq. He is the ādicca-bandhu kinsman of the sun SN i.186; and compared to a universal monarch (rājā cakkavattī) AN i.76; AN iii.150 and to the lion (sīha) the king of the animals AN iii.122. He is buddha-vīra Thag 47; the refuge of all beings MN ii.305; DN-a i.233; Mil 95; further appaṭipuggala SN i.134; his teaching leads to enlightenment, to self-conquest, to security deliverance MN i.235; Snp 454, Snp 993; DN-a i.230. He himself is not to be reborn (antima-sarīro with his last body) SN i.210; he is vimutto, freed & has come to the end of sorrow AN iv.258; SN iii.65; full of compassion for all beings SN i.25, SN i.51; MN ii.100; he is bhisakko the physician AN iv.340; magga-ññu, magga-vidū, maggakovido SN iii.66 ■ Under Buddh’ anussati (Vism 198 sq. we find the famous formula Bhagavā Arahaṃ Sammāsambuddho vijjā-caraṇa-sampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisa-damma-sārathi Satthā devamanussānaṃ buddho Bhagavā (DN i.49≈), analysed & exegetically discussed. Here (p. 209) “Buddha” is expld with the formula as found at Pts i.174; Nd i.457. More explicitly with var. epithets at the latter passage. This formula is one of the highest & most comprehensive characterisations of a Buddha, & occurs frequently in the Canon e.g. MN i.179; SN ii.69; SN v.343 ■ A khattiya by birth he is called a brāhmaṇa because he carries on the sacred tradition, and because he excels in wisdom, self-control and virtue Mil 225.

-ānubuddha enlightened after the Enlightened one Thag 679, Thag 1246 (trsld “who next to our Great Waked one was awoke”). -ānubhāva the majestic power of the B. Pv-a 38, Pv-a 171. -ānussati mindfulness of the B., one of the 6 anussatis (B.˚, dhamma˚, sangha˚, sīla˚ cāga˚, devatā˚) DN iii.250, DN iii.280; Vism 132 (where followed by upasamânussati and 4 other qualities making up the pīti-sambojjh’anga; see anussati), 197 sq. (the 10, as mentioned under anussati). -aṅkura a nascent (lit sprouting) Buddha, one who is destined to be a B Dhp-a i.83. -antara a Buddha-interval, the period between the appearance of one Buddha & the next Mil 3; Dhp-a i.201 (the 4 last ones); iv.201; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 14 Pv-a 21, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 191. -ārammaṇa having its foundation or cause in the B., in ˚pīti joy, caused by contemplation of a B Ja iii.405; Vism 143 (here as ubbegā-pīti). -ūpaṭṭhāna B ■ worship Dhp-a i.101; Pv-a 93. -uppāda the coming into existence of a Buddha, time or age in which a B was born (opp. buddh’ antara), a Buddha-period Ja i.59 Mhbv 12; Vb-a 50; Thag-a 28. -kara making a B. bringing about Buddhahood Ja i.20. -kāraka = ˚kara Mhbv 9. -kāla the time of a B. Vism 91 (Buddhakālo viya pavattati it is like the time of the B.) -kula Buddha-clan Snp-a 532 (B ■ pitā, ˚mātā ibid.). -kolāhala the announcement of a Buddha, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q.v.) Kp-a 121, cp. Ja i.48. -khetta field or region of (or for the existence of) a Buddha Vism 414 (divided into 3 spheres: jātikkhetta, āṇākkhetta visayakkhetta, see khetta). -gata directed or referring to the B. SN i.211 (sati); Dhp 296. -guṇa quality of a B., virtue, character of a Buddha Ja i.27; Ja ii.147 Bv ii.177; Mbhv 80; Kp-a 121 (cp. App.). -cakkhu the eye of a Buddha, i.e. an eye (or the faculty) of complete intuition Vin i.6; Thag-a 2; see discussed in detail at Nd i.359 = Nd ii.2354; cp. cakkhu. -ñāṇa knowledge of a B., which is boundless (cp. Saddh. 73 J.P.T.S. 1887, 40) Bv i.64 (appameyya); x.5 (cuddasa) -dhamma Buddhahood Mil 276; pl. condition or attributes of a B. Ja i.20; referred to as 6 at Nd i.143 Nd ii.466 (bhāgī channaṃ ˚ānan ti Bhagavā), as 18 at Mil 105, Mil 285. Kern (Manual & Grundriss; iii.8, p. 63 gives (after Lal 183, Lal 343) the foll. 18 āveṇikadharmas (“extraordinary qualities”) as such: (1) seeing all things past, (2) present, (3) future, (4) propriety of actions of the body, (5) of speech, (6) of thought, (7 firmness of intuition, (8) of memory, (9) of samādhi (10) of energy, (11) of emancipation, (12) of wisdom (13) freedom from fickleness, (14) noisiness, (15) confusedness (16) hastiness, (17) heedlessness, (18) inconsiderateness -pañha the name given to one question asked by Sāriputta, which the paribbājikā Kuṇḍalakesī was unable to answer Dhp-a ii.225. -pasanna finding one’s happiness, or believing in the B. Vin iv.39. -putta son of the B. said of bhikkhus or arahants Mil 143 cp. SN iii.83: puttā Buddhassa orasā. -bala the force of a B. (iddibala & paññā˚) Bu; i.3. -bījaṅkura a future B. Bv ii.71. -bhāva condition of a B. enlightenment Ja i.14, Ja i.147 (abuddhabhāva un-buddhahood, of Devadatta); DN-a i.1. -bhūmi the ground of Buddhahood Bv ii.175. -manta mystic verses of a B. DN-a i.248 -māmaka devotedly attached to the B. Dhp-a i.206 (+ Dhamma˚, Sangha˚). -rakkhita saved by the B (Np.) Snp-a 534 (+ Dhamma˚). -rasmi (pl. ˚iyo) rays shining forth from the person of the Buddha; they are of 6 colours Ja i.501; Snp-a 132; Mhbv 6, 15, 38; Vv-a 207; Dhs-a 13. -rūpa form or figure of the B. Vism 228 (Mārena nimmita, cp. Divy 162, Divy 166; Buddha-nirmāṇa the magic figure of the B.). -līḷha (& ˚līḷhā); deportment ease, grace of a Buddha Ja i.54; Mhbv 39; Dhp-a i.33; Dhp-a ii.41. -vacana the word (teaching) of the Buddha Mil 17; Kp-a 13; Snp-a 274, Snp-a 331. -visaya the sphere (of wonder), the range, scope or power of a Buddha (cp. buddha-khetta) Dhp-a i.33; Dhp-a ii.199; Snp-a 154, Snp-a 228 -veneyya one able to be led to enlightenment, accessible to Buddha’s teaching Snp-a 15, Snp-a 331. -sāsana the teaching (instructions) of the B. Dhp 368, Dhp 381 -sukumāla delicate, sensitive (to fatigue), as Buddhas are Dhp-a i.5.

= buddha1

Buddhaka

(-˚) (adj.) in cpd. dvangula-buddhikā (f.) possessing insight as much as 2 finger-breadths Vv-a 96 ■ The ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd.

fr. buddha

Buddhatā

(f.) enlightenment, wisdom Dhp-a iv.228; Thag-a 4 (Buddha-subuddhatā) ■ Cp. buddhatta.

abstr. fr. buddha

Buddhati

to obstruct, withhold etc.: see pali˚.

Buddhatta

(nt.) state of (perfect) enlightenment, (attainment of) Buddhahood Ja iii.363 (sabbadhammānaṃ b.); Vism 209 (buddhattā Buddho) Mhbv 12. Cp. buddhatā and abhisambuddhatta.

abstr. fr. buddha

Buddhi

(f.) wisdom, intelligence DN iii.165 (in sequence saddhā sīla suta b cāga etc.); Ja iii.369; Ja v.257; Mil 349; Sdhp 263. The ref. Vism 439 should be read vuddhi for b˚.

-carita one whose behaviour or character is wisdom Vism 104 (= paññavā). -sampanna endowed with (highest) wisdom Pv-a 39.

fr. budh; cp. Class. Sk. buddhi

Buddhika

(adj.) intelligent, in cpds ; unintelligent & sa˚; possessed of wisdom Mil 76.

-˚) [fr. buddhi

Buddhimant

(adj.) possessing insight, full of right knowledge Vin ii.195; Ja v.257; Mil 21, Mil 294; Pv-a 131 (paṇḍita, b., sappañña-jātika).

fr. buddhi

Bunda

the root of a tree Abhp 549.

Vedic budhna

Bundika

in cpd. ˚ābaddha is of uncertain origin; the whole means a sort of seat or bedstead (fixed up or tied together with slats?) Vin ii.149; Vin iv.40, Vin iv.357.

Bubbuḷa

(& Bubbula) a bubble. On similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 117 ■ Usually of a waterbubble udaka˚; SN iii.141; AN iv.137; Ja v.216; Mil 117 Vism 109; Dhp-a iii.209; Vb-a 33 (as unsubstantial to which vedanā are likened). In other connection at Ja i.68 (of cooking gruel).

cp. Epic Sk. budbuda

Bubbuḷaka

= bubbuḷa, viz. 1. a bubble Dhp-a iii.166; Mil 118.

2. the iris of the eye Thig 395 (cp. Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1884, 89, but according to Thag-a 259 the reading pubbaḷhaka is to be preferred.)

Bubhukkhita

wishing to eat, hungry Ja ii.14; Ja v.70; Mil 66; Dāvs iii.32.

pp. of bubhukkhati, Desid. of bhuñjati

Būḷha

array of troops Ja i.387.

for vūḷha, cp. Sk. vyūḍha for the usual vyūha, q.v.

Būha

see vyūha. Beluva & Beluva;

Beluva & Beḷuva

1. the Vilva tree Aegle marmelos MN i.108; MN ii.6; Ja iv.363, Ja iv.368; Ja vi.525 Ja vi.560.

2. wood of the Vilva tree SN i.22; DN ii.264 Mhbv 31.

-pakka ripe fruit of the Vilva Ja v.74. -paṇḍu(-vīṇā) a yellow flute made of Vilva wood, representing a kind of magic flute which according to Snp-a 393 first belonged to Māra, and was then given to Pañcasikha, one of the Heavenly Musicians, by Sakka. See Vism 392 (attributed to Pañcasikha); Dhp-a i.433 (of Māra; v.l. veḷuvadaṇḍa-vīṇā); iii.225 (of P.); Snp-a 393 (v.l. veluva˚) -laṭṭhi a young sprout of the Vilva tree Kp-a 118 -salāṭuka the unripe fruit of the Vilva, next in size to the smaller kola, surpassed in size by the ripe billa or billi SN i.150 = AN iv.170 = Snp p.125.

the guṇa-form of billa, in like meaning. It is the diaeretic form of Sk. *bailva or *vailva, of which the contracted form is P. bella

Bella

(m. & nt.) the fruit of the Vilva tree (a kind of citron?) Ja iii.77 (C. beluva); vi.578. Also in doubtful passage at Ja iii.319 (v.l. mella, phella).

= beluva, q.v.

Bojjha

(nt.) a matter to be known or understood, subject of knowledge or understanding Ne 20.

orig. grd. of bujjhati or bodheti

Bojjhaṅga

a factor or constituent of knowledge or wisdom. There are 7 bojjhangas usually referred to or understood from the context. There are enumd at several places, e.g. at DN iii.106, where they are mentioned in a list of qualities (dhammā) which contribute to the greatest happiness of gods and man, viz. the 4 satipaṭṭhānā, 4 sammapadhānā 4 iddhipādā, 5 indriyāni, 5 balāni & the 7 bojjhangas and ariya aṭṭhangika magga, 37 in all The same list we find at Divy 208 ■ The 7 b. (frequently also called; sambojjhaṅgā ) are sati, dhamma-vicaya viriya, pīti, passaddhi, samādhi, upekhā or mindfulness investigation of the Law, energy, rapture, repose, concentration and equanimity (Dhs-a 217, cp. Expositor ii.294) ■ DN ii.79, DN ii.83, DN ii.120, DN ii.303; DN iii.101, DN iii.128, DN iii.284; MN i.11, MN i.61; MN ii.12; MN iii.85, MN iii.275; SN i.54; SN v.82, SN v.110; AN i.14 AN iv.23; Nd i.14, Nd i.45, Nd i.171 (˚kusala), 341; Kvu i.158; Dhs 358, Dhs 528, Dhs 1354; Vb 199 sq., 227 sq.; Vism 160; Mil 340; Dhp-a i.230; Vb-a 120, Vb-a 310; Thag-a 27, Thag-a 50, Thag-a 160 They are counted among the 37 constituents of Arahantship viz. the 30 above-mentioned qualities (counting magga as one), with addition of sīlesu paripūrikāritā indriyesu gutta-dvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā jāgariy’ ânuyoga, sati-sampajaññaṃ (see e.g. Nd i.14 Nd ii.s. v. satipaṭṭhāna & sīla); cp. Thag 161, Thag 162 Thig 21 (maggā nibbāna-pattiyā); Dhs-a 217 (bodhāya saṃvattantī ti bojjhangā etc.; also def. as “bodhissa ango ti pi bojjhango sen’ angarath’ ang’ ādayo viya) They are also called the paribhoga-bhaṇḍāni or “insignia” of the Buddha Mil 330.

-kosalla proficiency in the constituents of wisdom Vism 248.

bodhi + anga; cp. BSk. bodhyanga, e.g. Lal 37, where the 7 are given at Divy 208

Bodha1

form is sambodha = bodhi, viz. knowledge, wisdom, enlightenment, Buddhaship DN iii.54 (v.l. sam˚); Dhs-a 217; in phrase bodhāya maggo Ja i.67; Mil 244, Mil 289; and in bodha-pakkhiyadhammā (for which usually bodhi˚) Snp-a 164 (where given as 37); complementary to santi (arousing soothing) Thag 342. bodhaṅgama leading to enlightenment (dhammā) Ne 31, Ne 83 (v.l. bojjh˚).

fr. budh; the usual

Bodha2

see pali˚.

Bodhana

(nt.) 1. knowing Mil 168 (cp. SN v.83).

2. (adj.) enlightening, teaching Bv 26, Bv 22 (pacchima-jana˚).

fr. bodheti

Bodhanīya

(adj.) capable of being enlightened, worthy to be taught Bv 5, Bv 31. See also bodhaneyya.

grd. fr. bodheti

Bodhaneyya

(adj.) capable of being enlightened, to be taught the truth Bv 2, Bv 195 (jana); Mil 169 (yena yogena bodhaneyyā sattā bujjhanti tena y. bodheti); otherwise in combn bodhaneyya-bandhavo the (Buddha’s) relations (or fellowmen) who are able to be enlightened Ja i.345 = Dhp-a i.367; Ja v.335.

fr. bodheti, see bodhanīya

Bodhi1

(f.) (supreme knowledge, enlightenment, the knowledge possessed by a Buddha (see also sambodhi & sammā-sambodhi) MN i.356; MN ii.95 = DN iii.237 (saddho hoti, saddahati Tathāgatassa bodhiṃ); DN iii.159 (anuttaraṃ pappoti bodhiṃ) 165 (id.); SN i.103, SN i.196; SN v.197 sq.; AN ii.66; Vb-a 310 (def.). Bodhi consists of 7 elements called bojjhaṅgā or sambojjhaṅgā, and is attained by the accomplishment of the perfections called bodhi-pācanā dhammā (see under cpds. & cp. bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā). The Buddha is said to have found the Path followed by former Buddhas, who “catusu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā satta-bojjhange yathābhūtaṃ bhāvetvā anuttaraṃ sammā-sambodhiṃ abhisambujjhiṃsu” SN v.160. The moment of supreme enlightenment is the moment when the Four Truths (ariya-saccāni) are grasped SN v.423 Bodhi is used to express the lofty knowledge of an ascetic (Bodhi-paribbājaka Np. Ja v.229 sq.), and the stage of enlightenment of the Paccekabuddha (paccekabodhi Ja iii.348; pacceka-bodhi-ñāṇa Ja iv.114; paccekasambodhi Snp-a 73), as distinguished from sammāsambodhi

-ṭṭhāna the state of Bodhi, state of enlightenment Dpvs 2.61. -pakkhika = pakkhiya (& pakkhika;, e.g. AN iii.70 = AN iii.300; Thag 900; cp. bodha˚) belonging to enlightenment, usually referred to as the 37 bodhipakkhiyā dhammā qualities or items constituting or contributing to Bodhi, which are the same as enumd under bojjhanga (q.v.). They are enumd & discussed at Vism 678 sq. and mentioned at many other passages of the Abhidhamma, e.g. Vb 244, Vb 249; Ne 31, Ne 197 Ne 240, Ne 261; and in the Commentaries, e.g. Ja i.275 Ja iii.290; Ja v.483; Dhp-a i.230. When they are increased to 43 they include the above with the addition of aniccasaññā; dukkha˚, anatta˚, pahāna˚, virāga˚, nirodhasaññā thus at Ne 112, Ne 237. In the older texts we do not find any numbered lists of the b ■ p ■ dhammā At AN iii.70 only indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā and jāgariy’ ânuyoga are mentioned in connection with bodhipakkhikā dhammā in general At SN v.227, SN v.239 sq. (so read in Vb preface xiv. for 327 337!) the term is applied to the 5 indriyas: saddh indriyaṃ, viriy˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññ˚. A more detailed discussion of the bodhi-p-dhammā and their mention in the Piṭakas is found in Mrs. Rh. D.’s preface to the Vb edition, pp. xiv ■ xvi. Of BSk. passage may be mentioned Divy 350 (saptatriṃśad-bodhi-pakṣān dharmān amukhī-kṛtya pratyekāṃ bodhiṃ sākṣātkṛtavantah) & 616 (bodhipakṣāṃs tān dharmān Bhagavān saṃprakāśayati sma).; -paripāka the maturing of enlightenment Vism 116. -pācana ripening of knowledge (of a Buddha); adj. leading to enlightenment Bv ii.121 sq.; Cp i.11 (cp. Ja i.22). It is a late term The b. dhammā are the 10 perfections (pāramiyo), i.e. dāna˚, sīla˚, nekkhamma˚, paññā˚, viriya˚, khanti˚; sacca˚, adhiṭṭhāna˚, mettā˚, upekhā˚. -satta (1) a “bodhi-being,” i.e. a being destined to attain fullest enlightenment or Buddhaship. A Bodhisatta passes through many existences & many stages of progress before the last birth in which he fulfils his great destiny The “amhākaṃ Bodhisatto,” or “our Bodhisatta” of the Buddhist Texts (e.g. Vism 419 (imasmiṃ kappe ayam eva Bhagavā Bodhisatta-bhūto); DN-a i.259 refers to Gotama, whose previous existences are related in the Jātaka collection. These tales illustrate the wisdom & goodness of the future Buddha, whether as an animal, a god, or a human being. In his last existence before attaining Buddhahood he is a man. Reference is made to a Bodhisatta or; the B. at very many places throughout the Canon. See e.g. MN i.17, MN i.163 MN i.240; SN ii.5; SN iii.27; SN iv.233; SN v.263, SN v.281, SN v.317; AN ii.130 AN iii.240; AN iv.302, AN iv.439; Vism 15, Vism 116, Vism 499; Snp-a 52 (pacceka˚), 67, 72 ■ (2) Name of the author of a Pali grammar used by Kaccāyana (not extant): see Windisch, Proceedings of XIVth Or. Congress, Vol. i.290. -sambhāra (pl.) conditions (lit. materials) necessary for the attainment of bodhi Ja i.1; Ja vi.595; Mbvs 12.

fr. budh, cp. Vedic bodhin-manas having an attentive mind; RV v.75, 5; viii.82, 18

Bodhi2

the tree of wisdom, the sacred Bo tree, the fig tree (Assattha, Ficus religiosa) under which Gotama Buddha arrived at perfect knowledge. The tree is near the spot where Buddhagāya is now, about 60 miles fr. Patna. It is regarded by pilgrims as the centre of the world (cp. pathavī-nābhi mahā-bodhimaṇḍo Mbvs 79). It is also spoken of as Mahābodhi (e.g. Ja iv.228; Vism 403) ■ Vism 72, Vism 299, Vism 342; Dhp-a i.105; Thag-a 62; Vb-a 473.

-aṅgaṇa the courtyard in which the Bo tree stands DN-a i.191; Vism 188 (˚vatta); Vb-a 349. -tala “Bodhifoundation,” i.e. the place or ground of the B. tree otherwise bodhi-maṇḍa Ja i.105; Mhbv 9; Dhp-a i.117 -pakka fruit of the Bo tree Ja iv.229. -pādapa the Bodhi tree Mbhv 1. -pūjā veneration of, or offerings to the Bo tree Mhbv 81. -maṇḍa (for ˚maṇḍala) the ground under the Bodhi tree, hence the spot (or “throne”), on which the Buddha was seated at the time of attaining highest enlightenment. The term is only found in very late canonical and post-canonical literature. Bv ii.65, Bv ii.183; Vism 203; Ja iv.228, Ja iv.232 Mhbv 79; Snp-a 2, Snp-a 30, Snp-a 225, Snp-a 258, Snp-a 281, Snp-a 340, Snp-a 391, Snp-a 441; Dhp-a i.86; Dhp-a ii.69; Dhp-a iv.72; Thag-a 2. Cp. BSk. bodhimaṇḍa Divy 392. -maha feast in honour of the Bo tree Ja iv.229 -mūla the root or foot of the Bo tree Snp-a 32, Snp-a 391; cp Bodhiyā mūle Nd i.172, Nd i.458 = Pts i.174. -rukkha the Bodhi tree Vin i.1.

= bodhi1

Bodhetar

awakener, enlightener Nd i.457; Pts i.174; Vism 209.

n. ag. fr. bodheti

Bodheti

1. to awaken to the truth, to enlighten SN i.170; Bv ii.195. aor. bodhesi Vism 209 abodhayi Bv ii.196 & bodhayi Bv v.31; Bv xxv.6 inf bodhuṃ: see bujjhati, & bodhetuṃ Ja iv.393. grd bodhabba DN ii.246; AN iv.136.

2. to make aware (of), to make known Ja vi.412; Snp-a 444.

Caus. of bujjhati

Bondi

body Pv iv.332; Ja i.503; Ja ii.160; Ja iii.117; Pv-a 254.

etym. doubtful, one proposed by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 207 derives it fr. bandh = bundh to bind, which is an erroneous comparison; on his hint “probably cognate with E. body” cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fidelia. The orig. meaning may have been, as Morris suggests, “trunk.” It certainly is a dial. word

Bya˚

etc. (byā˚, byu˚) words not found under these initials are to be looked up under vya˚; etc.

Byagā

3rd sg. aor. of vi + gam, to depart, to be lost, perish Thag 170.

Byaggha

a tiger Ja ii.110; Sdhp 388. f. byagghinī Mil 67.

cp. Sk. vyāghra

Byañjana

(nt.) 1. sign, mark: see vyañjana.

2. the letter, as compared with attha the spirit or meaning; thus in phrase atthato byañjanato ca according to the meaning & the letter Mil 18, Mil 345; Ne 23. As vyañjana is the more usual (classical) form, other refs. will be found under vyañjana;

cp. Sk. vyañjana

Byatta

(adj.) experienced, learned Mil 21.

cp. P. vyatta; Sk. vyakta

Byattatā

(f.) experience, learning Mil 349. See also pari˚.

fr. byatta

Byanti˚

in ˚bhavati, bhāva etc. see vyanti˚.

Byapagata

departed, dispelled Mil 225.

= vy-apa-gata

Byappatha

busy, active. Thus Kern, but the trsln is not satisfactory. It occurs only at 2 passages; Vin iv.2 where combd with vācā, girā, vacībheda, and meaning “mode of speech,” and at Snp 961, where it has the same meaning & is referred by Nd;1 472 to a mode of speech & expl;d by Snp-a 572 by vacana. Thus the derivation fr. pṛ; with vyā˚ can hardly be claimed to be correct for Bdhgh’s conception of the word; to him it sounded more likely like vy + ā + patha (cp. cpds vacana-patha & vāda-patha), thus “way of speaking.”

so for byappattha; according to Kern, Toev. s. v. the word is a distortion fr. *vyāpṛta (for which usually P. vyāvaṭa ) of vy + ā + pṛ3, pṛṇoti to be busy or active

Byamha

a celestial mansion, a Vimāna Vv 523. As vyamha at Ja iv.464.

cp. vyamha

Byasana

see vyasana.

Byā

(indecl.) intensive particle: “just so, certainly, indeed” only in phrase “evaṃ byā kho” Vin ii.26; Vin iv.134 = DN-a i.27; MN i.130 (evaṃ vyā kho ti evaṃ viya kho C.), 257.

distorted fr. iva = eva, with metathesis & diaeresis *veyya → *veyyā → *vyā → byā

Byādhi

sickness, disease AN i.146; Kvu ii.457; Mil 351.

cp. Sk. vyādhi; lit. “upset” fr. vy + ā + dhā

Byādhita

afflicted with disease Thag 73; Mil 168.

pp. fr. byādheti

Byādheti

to cause to waver, unsettle, agitate, trouble SN i.120; Thag 46, Thag 1211. Pass. byādhiyati Kvu ii.457 (aor. byādhiyiṃsu) ■ pp. byādhita.

Caus. fr. byādhi

Byāpajjha

1. trouble, opp. ; relief MN i.10.

2. malevolence; neg. ; benevolence Vin i.3; MN i.38; cp. avyāpajjha SN iv.296, SN iv.371.

fr. vy-ā- pad

Byāpanna

malevolent Sdhp 70; otherwise vy˚; e.g. SN ii.168 (˚citta).

fr. vyāpajjati

Byāpāda

ill-will, malevolence, one of the 5 “obstructions” (āvaraṇāni, see e.g. SN v.94 Nd ii.379); and of the 4 “bonds” (kāya-ganthā see e.g. Nd i.98) ■ MN i.434; SN i.99; Iti 119; Pts i.31; Pts ii.12 Nd i.149, Nd i.207, Nd i.386.

-vitakka a malevolent or angry thought MN i.11; SN i.203; SN ii.151; SN iii.93; SN v.417; Nd i.501; Kv 113.

fr. vy + ā + pad

Byābādha

evil, wrong, hurt; usually referred to as 3 fold: atta˚, para˚, ubhaya˚, or against oneself against others, & both-M i.416; SN iv.159 (vyā˚), 339.

vy + ā + bādh

Byābādheti

to injure, hurt, oppress SN v.393 (na kiñci byābādhemi tasaṃ vā thāvaraṃ vā).

Denom. fr. byābādha

Byābhaṅgī

(f.) 1. a pole for carrying burdens Thag 623.

2. a flail SN iv.201.

vy + ā + bhañj

Byāma

a fathom, measured by both hands being extended to their full length, only in phrase ˚ppabhā a halo extending for a fathom around the Buddha Ja i.12, Ja i.90; Bv i.45; Mil 75; Vv-a 213.

cp. Vedic & P. vyāma cp. Śatap. Br.; i.2, 5, 14.

Byāruddha

obstructed, opposed, hindered Snp 936 (aññam-aññehi b. in enmity with each other; = paṭiviruddha Nd i.408), 938 (412 id.; Snp-a 566 = āhata-citta).

pp. of vy + ā + rundh; reading by˚ in Nd1; vy˚ in Sn & Snp-a; v.l. BB

Byāvaṭa

covered, adorned with Vv-a 213 (rūpakāya byāvaṭa jana; v.l. byāgata).

the meaning (wrongly given as “adorned”) is to be deleted. The reading at Vv-a 213 is doubtful. It may be kāyavyāvaṭa, but dassana-vyāvaṭa is to be preferred (see under vyāvaṭa ).

vy + ā + vṛ;

Byāsatta

attached to, clinging to, in cpd. ˚mānasa possessed with longing Dhp 47 (= sampatte vā asampatte vā lagga-mānasa Dhp-a i.361), 287 (cp. Dhp-a iii.433; lagganatāya sattamānasa).

pp. of vy + ā + sañj, cp. āsatta1

Byūha

1. the array or arrangement of troops in particular positions, order of parade or battle DN-a i.85. Three formations of troops are mentioned at Ja ii.404 & 406, viz. paduma-vyūha (lotus formation), cakka˚ (wheel form;n), sakaṭa˚ (cart formn).

2. a heap, collection, in byūhaṃ karoti to put into a (well-arranged) heap Mil 2 (kacavaraṃ). 3. a (blind) alley, cul-de-sac Vin iv.271 (byūhan nāma yen’ eva pavisanti ten’ eva nikkhamanti).

cp. Sk. & P. vyūha fr. vi + ; vah

Byūhati

to stand in array (like a troop) Vv-a 104 (byūhanto, v.l. brahmanto).

Denom. fr. byūha

Brahant

(adj.) very great, vast, high, lofty, gigantic; nom sg. brahā Snp 410, Snp 550; Thag 31; Ja iii.117 (= dīgha C.); iv.111 (su˚); 647; Pv iv.310 (of a huge tree), acc sg. brahantaṃ AN iii.346; Vv-a 182; nom. pl. also brahantā Vv 524 (= mahantā Vv-a 224; of the Yama-dūtā or Death’s giant messengers) ■ f. brahatl Ja v.215 (= uḷārā C.); also given as Name of a plant Abhp 588 ■ Superl. brahaṭṭha (= Sk. barhiṣṭha; on inversion bar → bra cp. Sk. paribarhanā → P. paribrahaṇa) in ˚puppha a large or fully developed blossom Ja v.416.

-arañña woodlands, vast forest AN i.187. -vana the wild wood, immense forest AN i.152; AN iii.44; Vv 633 Ja v.215. -sukha (-vihāra- jjhāna-jhāyin) (a thinker enjoying his meditations in) immense happiness Mil 226 (in characterisation of the term “brāhmaṇa”). Brahma & Brahma

cp. Vedic bṛhant, of bṛh2 to increase, to be great or strong; paribṛdha solid (cp. brūha, paribrahaṇa & paribrūhana), Av. bərəƶat high; Arm. barjr high; Oir. brī, Cymr. bre mountain; Goth. baurgs “borough,” Ohg. etc. burg “burgh,” i.e. fortress Ger. berg mountain ■ The fundamental notion is that of an increase above normal or the ordinary: vuddhi (of vṛdh ) is used in explns of the term; thus Dhtp 344 (Dhtm 506) baha braha brūha = vuddhiyaṃ; Vv-a 278 brahā = vuddhā. Its use is almost entirely restricted to poetry

Brahma & Brahmā

I. Brahman (nt.) [cp. Vedic bráhman nt. prayer; nom. sg bráhma] 1. the supreme good; as a buddhistic term used in a sense different from the brahmanic (save in controversy with Brahmans); a state like that of Brahmā (or Brahman) AN ii.184 (brahmappatta). In cpds. brahma˚.

2. Vedic text, mystic formula prayer DN-a i.244 (brahmaṃ aṇatī ti brāhmaṇo).

II. Brahmā [cp. Vedic brahmán, m., one who prays or chants hymns, nom. sg. Brahmā] 1. the god Brahmā chief of the gods, often represented as the creator of the Universe (vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā) DN i.18 DN iii.30, also called Mahābrahmā (DN i.235 sq., 244 sq. iii.30; Iti 15; Vism 578; Dhp-a ii.60); and Sahampati (Vin i.5; DN ii.157; SN i.136 sq.; Vism 201; Kp-a 171; Snp-a 56) and Sanaṅkumāra (D ii.226; iii.97). The duration of his life is given as being 1 kalpa (see Kv 207, 208) ■ nom. Brahmā Vin i.5; DN ii.46; Ja vi.486; Mil 224; Vism 2 (brahmānaṃ atibrahmā, Ep. of Buddha Bhagavā); Snp-a 229 (B. mahānubhāvo); gen abl. Brahmano DN ii.209; Vism 205; Snp-a 177; instr Brahmanā DN i.252; DN ii.239; Dhp 105, Dhp 230; Vism 48, Vism 405; Dhp-a ii.60; acc. Brahmānaṃ DN ii.37; voc. Brahme SN i.138.

2. a brahma god, a happy & blameless celestial being, an inhabitant of the higher heavens (brahma-loka; in which to be reborn is a reward of great merit); nom. sg. brahmā SN i.142 (Baka br.) MN i.327 (id.); AN iv.83; Pv-a 138 (˚devatā for brahma˚?) gen. abl. brahmuno SN i.142, SN i.155; instr. brahmunā DN iii.147, DN iii.150 & brahmanā Pv-a 98; voc. sg. brahme MN i.328. pl. nom. brahmāno Mil 13, Mil 18 (where Ja vi.486 has Mahā-brahmā in id. p.); Dhs-a 195; gen brahmānaṃ Vism 2; Mhbv 151 ■ paccekabrahmā a br. by himself SN i.149 (of the name of Tudu; cp. paccekabuddha) ■ sabrahmaka (adj.) including the brahma gods DN i.62; AN ii.70; Vin i.11; DN-a i.174.

III. brahma (adj.-n.) [cp. brahmā II. 2; Vedic brahma˚ & Sk. brāhma] 1. holy, pious, brahmanic (m.) a holy person, a brahmin-(adj.) Ja ii.14 (br vaṇṇa = seṭṭha vaṇṇa C.); Kp-a 151 (brahma-cariyaṃ brahmaṃ cariyaṃ) ■ (m.) acc. brahmaṃ Snp 285; voc brahme (frequent) Snp 1065 (= brahmā ti seṭṭhavacanaṃ Snp-a 592); Ja ii.346; Ja iv.288; Ja vi.524, Ja vi.532; Pv i.129 (= brāhmaṇa Pv-a 66).

2. divine, as incorporating the highest & best qualities, sublime, ideal best, very great (see esp. in cpds.), AN i.132 (brahmā ti mātāpitaro etc.), 182; iv.76.

3. holy, sacred, divinely inspired (of the rites, charms, hymns etc.) DN i.96 (brahme mante adhiyitvā); Pv ii.613 (mantaṃ brahmacintitaṃ) = brāhmaṇānaṃ atthāya brahmaṇā cintitaṃ Pv-a 97, Pv-a 98) ■ Note. The compn form of all specified bases (I. II. III.) is brahma˚; and with regard to meaning it is often not to be decided to which of the 3 categories the cpd. in question belongs.

-attabhāva existence as a brahma god Dhp-a iii.210 -ujjugatta having the most divinely straight limbs (one of the 32 marks of a Great Man) DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.155 -uttama sublime Dhs-a 192. -uppatti birth in the brahma heaven SN i.143. -ūposatha the highest religious observance with meditation on the Buddha practice of the uposatha abstinence AN i.207. -kappa like Brahmā Thag 909. -kāya divine body DN iii.84; Ja i.95. -kāyika belonging to the company of Brahmā, N of a high order of Devas in the retinue of Br (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie pp. 191, 193, 197) DN i.220 DN ii.69; AN iii.287, AN iii.314; AN iv.40, AN iv.76, AN iv.240, AN iv.401; Thag 1082 Vism 225, Vism 559; Kp-a 86. -kutta a work of Brahmā DN iii.28, DN iii.30 (cp. similarly yaṃ mama, pitrā kṛtaṃ devakṛtaṃ na tu brahmakṛtaṃ tat Divy 22). See also under kutta. -giriya (pl.) name of a certain class of beings possibly those seated on Brahmagiri (or is it a certain class of performers, actors or dancers?) Mil 191 -ghaṭa (= ghaṭa2) company or assembly of Brahmans Ja vi.99. -cakka the excellent wheel, i.e. the doctrine of the Buddha MN i.69; AN ii.9, AN ii.24; AN iii.417; AN v.33; Iti 123; Pts ii.174; Vb-a 399 (in detail); -cariya see separate article. -cārin leading a holy or pure life, chaste, pious Vin ii.236; Vin iii.44; SN i.5, SN i.60; SN ii.210; SN iii.13; SN iv.93, AN ii.44; MN iii.117; Snp 695, Snp 973; Ja v.107, Ja v.382; Vv 3411 (acc. pl. brahmacāraye for ˚cārino); Dhp 142; Mil 75; DN-a i.72 (brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ caratī ti br. c.) Dhp-a iii.83; SN iv.181; Pp 27, Pp 36. -cintita divinely inspired Pvi i.613 = Vv 6316 (of manta); expln at Pv-a 97 as given above III.3, differs from that at Vv-a 265 where it runs: brahmehi Aṭṭhak’ ādīhi cintitaṃ paññācakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ, i.e. thought out by the divine (seer Aṭṭhaka and the others (viz. composers of the Vedic hymns: v. s. brāhmaṇa1, seen with insight). -ja sprung from Brahmā (said of the Brāhmaṇas) DN iii.81 DN iii.83; MN ii.148. Cp. dhammaja. -jacca belonging to a brahman family Thag 689. -jāla divine, excellent net Name of a Suttanta (D No. 1) Vism 30; Vb-a 432, Vb-a 516 Kp-a 12, Kp-a 36, Kp-a 97; Snp-a 362, Snp-a 434. -daṇḍa “the highest penalty,” a kind of severe punishment (temporary deathsentence ) Vin ii.290; DN ii.154; Dhp-a ii.112; cp. Kern Manual p. 87. -dāyāda kinsman or heir of Brahmā DN iii.81, DN iii.83. -deyya a most excellent gift, a royal gift, a gift given with full powers (said of land granted by the King) DN i.87 (= seṭṭha-deyyaṃ DN-a i.246; cp. Dial. i.108 note: the first part of the cpd. (brahma) has always been interpreted by Brahmans as referring to themselves But brahma as the first part of a cpd. never has that meaning in Pali; and the word in our passage means literally “a full gift.”-Cp. id. p. Divy 620 where it does not need to mean “gift to brahmans,” as Index suggests); DN i.114; Ja ii.166 = Dhp-a iii.125 (here a gift to a br., it is true, but not with that meaning) Ja vi.486 (sudinnaṃ + ); Mhbv 123. We think that both Kern (who at Toev. s. v. unjustly remarks of Bdhgh’s expln as “unjust”) and Fick (who at “Sociale Gliederung” p. 126 trsls it as “gift to a Brahman”) are wrong, at least their (and others’) interpretation is doubtful. -devatā a deity of the Brahmaloka Pv-a 138 (so read for brahmā˚). -nimantanika “addressing an invitation to a brahma-god,” title of a Suttanta MN i.326 sq., quoted at Vism 393. -nimmita created by Brahmā DN iii.81, DN iii.83. -patta arrived at the highest state, above the devas, a state like the Br. gods MN i.386; AN ii.184. -patti attainment of the highest good SN i.169 SN i.181; SN iv.118. -patha the way to the Br. world or the way to the highest good SN i.141; AN iii.346; Thag 689 Cp. Geiger, Dhamma 77. -parāyana devoted to Brahmā Mil 234. -parisā an assembly of the Brahma gods DN iii.260; MN i.330; SN i.155; AN iv.307. -pārisajja belonging to the retinue of Br., Name of the gods of the lowest Rūpa-brahmaloka SN i.145, SN i.155; MN i.330; Kv 207; cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 191, 194. -purohita minister or priest to Mahābrahmā; ˚deva gods inhabiting the next heaven above the Br ■ pārisajjā devā (cp. Kirfel loc. cit.) Kv 207 (read ˚purohita for ˚parohita!). -pphoṭana [a-pphoṭana; ā + ph.] a Brahmaapplause divine or greatest applause Dhp-a iii.210 (cp Mil 13; Ja vi.486). -bandhu “brahma-kinsman,” a brāhmaṇa in descent, or by name; but in reality an unworthy brahman, Thig 251; Ja vi.532; Thag-a 206 cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 140. -bhakkha ideal or divine food SN i.141. -bhatta a worshipper of Br Ja iv.377 sq. -bhavana Br ■ world or abode of Br. Nd i.448. -bhūta divine being, most excellent being, said of the Buddha DN iii.84; MN i.111; MN iii.195, MN iii.224; SN iv.94; AN v.226; Iti 57; said of Arahants AN ii.206; SN iii.83 -yāna way of the highest good, path of goodness (cp brahma-patha) SN v.5; Ja vi.57 (C. ariyabhūmi: so read for arāya˚). -yāniya leading to Brahmā DN i.220 -loka the Br. world, the highest world, the world of the Celestials (which is like all other creation subject to change & destruction: see e.g. Vism 415 = Kp-a 121) the abode of the Br. devas; Heaven ■ It consists of 20 heavens, sixteen being worlds of form (rūpa-brahmaloka) and four, inhabited by devas who are incorporeal (arūpa˚). The devas of the Br. l. are free from kāma or sensual desires. Rebirth in this heaven is the reward of great virtue accompanied with meditation (jhāna) AN i.227 sq.; AN v.59 (as included in the sphere called sahassī cūḷanikā lokadhātu) ■ The brahmās like other gods are not necessarily sotāpannā or on the way to full knowledge (sambodhi-parāyaṇā); their attainments depend on the degree of their faith in the Buddha Dhamma, & Sangha, and their observance of the precepts ■ See e.g. DN iii.112; SN i.141, SN i.155, SN i.282; AN iii.332; AN iv.75, AN iv.103; Snp 508, Snp 1117; Ja ii.61; Pts i.84; Pv ii.1317; Dhs 1282; Vb 421; Vism 199, Vism 314, Vism 367 Vism 372, Vism 390, Vism 401, Vism 405, Vism 408, Vism 415 sq., 421, 557; Mhbv 54 83, 103 sq., 160; Vb-a 68; Pv-a 76; Vb-a 167, Vb-a 433 Vb-a 437, Vb-a 510. See also Cpd. 57, 141 sq.; Kirfel, Kosmographie 26, 191, 197, 207, and cp. in BSk. literature Lal 171. The Br ■ l. is said to be the one place where there are no women: Dhp-a i.270 ■ yāva Brahmalokā pi even unto Br.’s heaven, expression like “as far as the end of the world” MN i.34; SN v.265, SN v.288 -˚ûpaga attaining to the highest heaven DN ii.196; AN v.342; Snp 139; Ja ii.61; Kv 114. -˚ûpapatti rebirth in Heaven Snp 139. -˚parāyana the Br ■ loka as ultimate goal Ja ii.61; Ja iii.396. -˚sahavyatā the company of the Br. gods AN iv.135 sq. -yāna the best vehicle SN v.5 (+ dhammayāna). -vaccasin with a body like that of Mahābrahmā, combd with -vaṇṇin of most excellent complexion, in ster. passage at DN i.114, DN i.115; MN ii.167, cp. DN-a i.282: ˚vaccasī ti Mahābrahmuṇo sarīra-sadisena sarīrena samannāgato; ˚vaṇṇī ti seṭṭhavaṇṇī -vāda most excellent speech Vin i.3. -vimāna a palace of Brahmā in the highest heaven DN iii.28, DN iii.29; Iti 15; Vism 108. -vihāra sublime or divine state of mind, blissful meditation (exercises on a, altruistic concepts; b, equanimity; see on these meditations Dial i.298). There are 4 such “divine states,” viz. mettā karuṇā, muditā, upekkhā (see Vism 111; Dhs-a 192 and cp. Expositor 258; Dhs trsl. 65; BSk. same, e.g. Divy 224); DN ii.196; DN iii.220 (one of the 3 vihāra’s dibba˚, brahma˚, ariya˚); Thag 649; Ja i.139 (˚vihāre bhāvetvā… brahmalok’ ûpaga), ii.61; Dhs 262 Vism 295 sq. (˚niddesa), 319. -veṭhana the head-dress of a brahmin Snp-a 138 (one of the rare passages where brahma˚ = brahma III. 1). -sama like Brahmā Snp 508; Snp-a 318, Snp-a 325; Dhs-a 195. -ssara “heavenly sound, a divine voice, a beautiful and deep voice (with 8 fine qualities: see enumd under bindu) DN ii.211 = DN ii.227; Ja i.96; Ja v.336.

fr. bṛh, see brahant. Perhaps less with regard to the greatness of the divine principle than with ref. to the greatness or power of prayer or the ecstatic mind (i.e. holy enthusiasm). On etym. see Osthoff, “Bezzenberger’s Beiträge” xxiv.142 sq. (= Mir bricht charm, spell: Oicel. bragr poetry)

Brahmaka

(adj.) only in cpd. sa˚; with Brahmā (or the Br. world). q.v.

Brahmacariya

(nt.) a term (not in the strictly Buddhist sense) for observance of vows of holiness, particularly of chastity: good & moral living (brahmaṃ cariyaṃ brahmāṇaṃ vā cariyaṃ = brahmacariyaṃ Kp-a 151); esp. in Buddh. sense the moral life, holy life, religious life, as way to end suffering Vin i.12, Vin i.19, renouncing the world, study of the Dhamma DN i.84, DN i.155; DN ii.106; DN iii.122 sq., 211; MN i.77 MN i.147, MN i.193, MN i.205, MN i.426, MN i.463, MN i.492, MN i.514; MN ii.38; MN iii.36, MN iii.116; SN i.38, SN i.43, SN i.87, SN i.105, SN i.154, SN i.209; SN ii.24, SN ii.29, SN ii.120, SN ii.219, SN ii.278 SN ii.284 (˚pariyosāna); iii.83, 189; iv.51, 104, 110, 126 136 sq., 163, 253, v.7 sq., 15 sq., 26 sq., 54 sq., 233 262, 272, 352; AN i.50, AN i.168, AN i.225; AN ii.26, AN ii.44, AN ii.185; AN iii.250 AN iii.346; AN iv.311; AN v.18, AN v.71, AN v.136; Snp 267, Snp 274 (vas-uttama) 566, 655, 1128; Thag 1027, Thag 1079; Iti 28, Iti 48, Iti 78, Iti 111; Dhp 155, Dhp 156, Dhp 312; Ja iii.396; Ja iv.52; Pv ii.913; Dhp-a iv.42 (vasuttamaṃ); Vb-a 504 ■ brahmacariyaṃ vussati to live the religious life AN i.115 (cp. ˚ṃ vusitaṃ in formula under Arahant II. A); ˚assa kevalin wholly given up to a good life AN i.162; ˚ṃ santānetuṃ to continue the good life AN iii.90; Dhp-a i.119; komāra˚; the religious training of a well-bred youth AN iii.224; Snp 289abrahmacariya unchastity, an immoral life sinful living MN i.514; DN i.4; Snp 396; Kp-a 26.

-antarāya raping Dhp-a ii.52. -ānuggaha a help to purity AN i.167; AN iv.167; Dhs 1348. -ūpaddava a disaster to religious life, succumbing to worldly desires MN iii.116. -vāsa state of chastity, holy & pure life adj. living a pure life AN i.253; Ja iii.393; Kv 93; Dhp-a i.225.

brahma + cariya

Brahmacariyaka

(adj.) only in phrase ādi˚ leading to the highest purity of life DN i.189, DN i.191 DN iii.284; AN iv.166.

fr. brahmacariya

Brahmacariyavant

(adj.) leading the religious life, pure, chaste SN i.182; Dhp 267.

fr. brahmacariya

Brahmañña

(adj.) brahman, of the brahman rank; brahmanhood, of higher conduct, leading a pure life DN i.115 (at which passage DN-a i.286 includes Sāriputta, Moggallāna & Mahākassapa in this rank) MN ii.167; AN i.143 ■ abstr. der. brāhmaññā (nt.) higher or holy state, excellency of a virtuous life DN i.166; Vin iii.44; Ja iv.362 (= brāhmaṇa dhamma C.); brahmañña (nt.) DN ii.248; brahmaññā (f.) DN iii.72, DN iii.74; AN i.142; brahmaññattha (nt.) SN iii.192; SN v.25 sq., 195; AN i.260 (brāhmaññattha).

fr. brāhmaṇa

Brahmaññatā

(& brāh˚) state of a brahman DN iii.145, DN iii.169; Dhp 332, cp. Dhp-a iv.33-Neg. ; DN iii.70, DN iii.71.

fr. brahma or brāhmaṇa

Brahmaññattha

see brahmañña.

Brahmatta

(nt.) state of a Brahma god, existence in the Br. world Vb 337; Vism 301 Vb-a 437; Dhp-a i.110. brahmattabhāva is to be read as brahm’ attabhāva (see under brahma).

abstr. fr. brahma

Brahmattara

at Ja iii.207 (of a castle) is probably to be read brahmuttara “even higher than Brahmā,” i.e. unsurpassed, magnificent. C. explns by suvaṇṇa- pāsāda.

Brahmavant

(adj.) “having Brahmā,” possessed or full of Brahmā; f. brahmavatī Np. Vism 434. Brahmanna. brahmannata & brahmannattha;

fr. brahma

Brāhmañña. brāhmaññatā & brāhmaññattha

see brahmañ˚.

Brāhmaṇa1

a member of the Brahman caste; a Br teacher. In the Buddhist terminology also used for a man leading a pure, sinless & ascetic life, often even syn. with arahant ■ On brāhmaṇas as a caste & their representation in the Jātaka collection see Fick; Sociale Gliederung; esp. ch. 8, pp. 117–⁠162 ■ Var fanciful etymologies, consisting of a word-play, in P definitions are e.g. “sattannaṃ dhammānaṃ bāhitattā br.” (like def. of bhikkhu) Nd i.86 = Nd ii.464a (cp Snp 519); ye keci bho-vādikā Nd i.249 = Nd ii.464b brahā-sukhavihāra-jhāna-jhāyin Mil 226; pāpaṃ bāhesuṃ DN iii.94; bāhita-pāpattā br. Dhp-a iii.84 ariyā bāhita-pāpattā br. DN-a i.244 ■ pl. brāhmaṇāse Snp 1079 sq ■ Var. ref8 in the Canon to all meanings of the term: DN i.90, DN i.94, DN i.104, DN i.119 sq., 136 (mahāsālā) 150 (˚dūta), 247; iii.44 sq., 61, 83 sq., 94 sq. (origin of) 147, 170, 258 (˚mahāsālā), 270; MN i.271 (˚karaṇā dhammā), 280; ii.84, 148, 177; iii.60, 270 (a bhikkhu addressed as br.); SN i.47, SN i.54, SN i.94 sq., 99 (˚kumāra), 117 125, 160 sq.; ii.77, 259; iv.157; v.194; AN i.66, AN i.110, AN i.163 (tevijjā); 166; ii.176; iii.221 sq. (brāhmaṇa-vagga) Iti 57 sq., 60, 98, 101; Ja iii.194; Ja iv.9; Ja vi.521 sq.; Vb 393 sq. For br. with the meaning “arahant” see also: Vin i.3; Vin ii.156 (br. parinibbuta); Thag 140, Thag 221 (brahma-bandhu pure āsiṃ, idāni kho ‘mhi brāhmaṇo) Dhp 383 sq.; Snp p.ssim (e.g. v. 142 kammanā hoti brāhmaṇo; 284 sq.); Ja iv.302 sq.; Mil 225. Ten kinds of Br. are pronounced to be apetā brahmaññā degraded fr. brahmanship Ja iv.361 sq. Diff. schools of br. teachers are enumd at DN i.237 sq. (Tevijja Sutta) ■ brāhmaṇānaṃ pubbakā isayo mantānaṃ kattāro “the ten inspired Seers of old times, who composed the Vedic hymns”; their names are Aṭṭhaka Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi, Angirasa Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu Vin i.245; DN i.104; AN iii.224; AN iv.61; cp. Vv-a 265 ■ f. brāhmaṇī (n. or adj.) the wife of a brāhmaṇa DN i.193; Ja v.127 (of a purohita or high priest); Dhp-a i.33; Dhp-a iv.176; Pv-a 55 Pv-a 61, Pv-a 64. Freq. in combn brāhmaṇī pajā this generation of brāhmaṇas, e.g. DN i.249; AN i.260; AN ii.23 (see pajā).

-ibbhā Brahmins & Vaiśyas Ja vi.228 sq. -kumārikā a brahmin young girl Ja iii.93. -kula a br. clan or family Ja ii.85, Ja ii.394, Ja ii.411; Ja iii.147, Ja iii.352; Pv-a 21, Pv-a 61 -gahapatikā priests & laymen (“clerk & yeoman Rh. D. in S.B.E. xi.258) DN ii.178; DN iii.148, DN iii.153, DN iii.170 sq. SN i.59, SN i.184; AN i.110; Vin i.35; Ja i.83. -gāma a br village Vin i.197; DN i.87, DN i.127; SN i.111; Ja ii.368; Ja iii.293 Ja iv.276. -dhamma duty of a br.; see on contrast between Brahmaṇic & Buddhist view Ja iv.301 sq., cp also Snp-a 312

325 (br ■ dhammika-suta) & Fick, l. c. 124; -putta son of a br. Pv-a 62. -bhojana giving food (alms) to brahmans Vin i.44. -māṇava a young brahmin Ja iv.391. -rūpa (in) form of a br. Pv-a 63. -vaḍḍhakī a br. carpenter Ja iv.207. -vaṇṇin having the appearance of a brahmin Cp x.10. -vācanaka a br. disputation some sort of elocution show Ja i.318; Ja iv.391 -vāṭaka circle of brahmins Dhp-a iv.177 (v.l. ˚vādaka) -vāṇija a br. merchant Pv-a 113. -sacca a brahmanic (i.e. standard, holy) truth AN ii.176 (where the Buddha sets forth 4 such br ■ saccāni, diff. from the usual 4 ariyasaccāni).

fr. brahma; cp. Vedic brāhmaṇa, der. fr. brahmán

Brāhmaṇa2

(nt.) state of a true brahman, “holiness supreme” Thag 631.

for brahmañña

Brūti

to say, tell, call; show explain DN i.95; Snp 308 sq.; Dhp 383 sq.; Cp vi.8; Mil 314, Mil 327 ■ Constructed with double acc. or with dat of person & acc. of thing said (cp. Mil 233) ■; Forms: Pres. 1st sg. brūmi Iti 33, Iti 40; S 1033, 1042 sq. (expld as ācikkhāmi desemi paññāpemi etc. by Nd.); Pv i.23 (= kathemi Pv-a 11); Thag 214; Thag 2nd sg. brūsi Snp 457 Snp 1032, Snp 1081; Ja ii.48; Thig 58; Thig 3rd sg. brūti Snp 122 imper. brūhi Thag 1266; Snp 1018, Snp 1034, Snp 1043; Mil 318 ■ pret. abravi Snp 981; Thag 1275; Ja vi.269; Pv ii.964 (v.l. abruvi); Pv-a 264; abruvi Ja iii.62, and bravi Ja v.204; Ja v.3rd sg. med. bravittha Vv 5310 (= kathesi Vv-a 240); 1st sg. also abraviṃ Cp ii.68; 3rd pl. abravuṃ Ja v.112.

brū, Sk. bravīti, Med. brūte; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 1412. Expld by Dhtp 366 as “vacane,” by Dhtm 593 as “vācāyaṃ, viyattiyaṃ”

Brūmeti

to say DN i.95 (expld as “brūmetū ti vadatu” DN-a i.265).

possible Caus. fr. brūti, but as Geiger, P.Gr. 1412, rightly remarks “not critically sound”

Brūhana

(nt.) expansion, increasing, spreading; cultivation, development (trs. & intrs.) Mil 313 (Kern,; Toev. s. v. “amusement”); Dhs-a 332; Vv-a 20 (sukha˚). Cp. upa˚.

fr. brūheti

Brūhetar

increaser; one who practises, is devoted to; in phrase brūhetā suññāgārānaṃ frequenter of solitary places; given up to solitary meditation MN i.33, MN i.213.

n. ag. of brūheti

Brūheti

to cause to grow, increase; hence: to promote, develop, practise, to put or devote oneself to; to look after, to foster, make enjoy; practically syn. with sevati; SN i.198 (saddhaṃ) Snp 324 (kammāni); Dhp 285 (imper. brūhaya = vaḍḍhaya Dhp-a iii.429); Ud 72; Ja i.289; Mil 313 (saddena sotaṃ br.); Pv-a 168 (vaḍḍheti + , for ābhāveti) ■ Cp anu˚, pari˚.

Bh.

cp. Sk. bṛṃhayati; fr. brh2 to increase; Dhtp 346 & Dhtm 505: vuddhiyaṃ. Cp. brahant

Bh

Bha

(indecl.) the letter or sound (syllable) bh; figuring in Bdhgh’s exegesis of the N. Bhagavā as representing bhava, whereas ga stands for gamana, va for vanta Kp-a 109 ■ Like ba˚; we often find bha˚; mixed up with pa˚ ■ see e.g. bhaṇḍa bhaṇḍati; bh represents b. in bhasta = Sk. basta, bhisa = Sk. bisa, bhusa = Sk buśa ■ bha-kāra the sound (or ending) ˚bha, which at Vin iv.7 is given as implying contempt or abuse among other low terms (hīnā akkosā). This refers also to the sound (ending) ˚ya (see ya-kāra). The expln for this probably is that ˚bha is abstracted from words ending thus, where the word itself meant something inferior or contemptible, and this shade of meaning was regarded as inhering in the ending, not in the root of the word, as e.g. in ibbha (menial).

Bhakuṭi

(f.) superciliousness Snp 485. Ja iii.99; Vism 26 (˚karaṇa); Snp-a 412. Der. bhākuṭika (q.v.). See also bhūkuṭi.

cp. Epic Sk. bhrakuṭi from older bhṛkuti, bhrukuṭi or bhrūkuṭi

Bhakkha

(-˚) (adj.) 1. eating, feeding on DN iii.41 (sāka˚ etc.); SN i.69 (pahūta˚ voracious, of fire) 238 (kodha˚); Pv i.91 (lohita-pubba˚); Pp 55 (tiṇa˚) Sdhp 388 (tiṇa˚).

2. eatable, to be eaten; nt. ˚ṃ food, prey, in cpd. appa-bhakkha offering no food Vv 843 (appodaka + ) ■ pl. also bhakkhā (eatables Ja ii.14; Ja iv.241 (similar context; = bhojana C.); Pv ii.941 (= āhārā Pv-a 129). It is to be pointed out that bhakkhā occurs in poetry, in stock phrase “dibbā bhakkhā pātubhavanti”; cp. Vedic bhakṣa (m) feeding partaking of food, esp. drink (of Soma), thus something extraordinary.

fr. bhakṣ

Bhakkhati

to eat, to feed upon Pv ii.25 (pubba-lohitaṃ); Dhp-a ii.57 (vātaṃ). inf. bhakkhituṃ Ja ii.14 ■ Caus. bhakkheti in same meaning Ja iv.349 (aor. bhakkhesuṃ); cp. BSk. bhakṣayati Divy 276.

bhakṣ fr. bhaj, cp. Sk. bhakṣati & bhakṣayati; Dhtp 17 & 537 expl;ns by “adana”

Bhaga

luck, lot, fortune, only in cpd. dub˚; (adj.) unhappy, unpleasant uncomfortable Iti 90; DN-a i.96 (˚karaṇa) ■ bhaga (in verse “bhagehi ca vibhattavā” in exegesis of word “Bhagava”) at DN-a i.34 read bhava, as read at id. p Vism 210.

Vedic bhaga, bhaj, see bhagavant etc.

Bhagandala

(& ā) an ulcer, fistula Vin i.216, Vin i.272; Nd i.370. Has expln at Dhtm 204 “bhaganda secane hoti” (“comes from sprinkling” anything to do with our word?

cp. late Sk. bhagandara

Bhagalavant

Name of a mountain Snp-a 197 (loc. Bhagalavati pabbate). Occurs also as an assembly-hall under the Name of Bhagalavatī at DN iii.201 Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 196.

of uncertain origin

Bhagavant

(adj. n.) fortunate, illustrious, sublime, as Ep. and title “Lord.” Thus applied to the Buddha (amhākaṃ Bh. and his predecessors. Occurs with extreme frequency of fanciful exegetic explns of the term & its meaning we mention e.g. those at Nd;1 142 = Nd ii.466; Vism 210 sq. DN-a i.33 sq. Usual trs. Blessed One, Exalted One.

cp. Vedic bhagavant, fr. bhaga

Bhaginī

(f.) a sister Ja vi.32. The popular etym. of bh. as given at Vb-a 108 is the same as that for bhātar, viz. “ bhagatī ti bh.”-Cpd bhagini-māla a “sister garland” (?) Name of a tree Ja vi.270 (= upari-bhaddaka).

Epic Sk. bhaginī

Bhagga1

broken, in phrases “sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā” Ja i.493, which is applied metaphorically at Dhp 154 (phāsukā = pāpakā?), expld Dhp-a iii.128 (artificially) by “avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā”; further “bhaggā pāpakā dhammā” Vism 211; bhaggā kilesā Mil 44; and bhagga -rāga, ˚dosa etc. (in def. of Bhagavā) at Nd i.142 = Nd ii.466 B, quoted at Vism 211.

pp. of bhañj, Sk. bhagna

Bhagga2

(nt.) fortune, good luck, welfare, happiness Vism 210 (akāsi ˚ṃ ti garū ti Bhāgyavā etc.).;

fr. bhaga; cp. Sk. & P. bhāgya

Bhaggava

potter (?) Ja iii.381, Ja iii.382 in voc. bhaggava (m.) & bhaggavī (f.). The terms are not expld in C., evidently because somewhat obscure According to Kern, Toev. s. v. the Sk. form in this meaning occurs at MBh. i.190, 47; Saddhp. 191 sq. Mvu iii.347.

cp. Sk. *bhārgava, a der. fr. bhṛgu, & bhargaḥ, of same root as Lat. fulgur lightning; Gr. φλός light Ger. blitzen, blank; Ags. blanca white horse, all of the idea of “shining, bright, radiant.”-How the meaning “potter” is connected with this meaning, is still a problem, perhaps we have to take the word merely as an Epithet at the one passage where it occurs, which happens to be in the Kumbhakāra-jātaka, v. 6, 7. i.e. the “Jātaka of the potter”

Bhaggavant

(adj. n.) having good luck or auspices, fortunate; in def of “Bhagavā” at Vism 210 = DN-a i.34 (“bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto”); with ref. to the 4 qualities implied in the word “bhagavā,” which passage is alluded to at Vv-a 231 by remark “bhāgyavantat’ ādīhi catūhi kāraṇehi Bhagavā.”

fr. bhagga2, cp. Sk. & P. bhāgyavant

Bhaṅga1

(nt.) hemp coarse hempen cloth Vin i.58 (where combd with sāṇa).

cp. Sk. bhanga, which occurs already Atharva-veda xi. 6. 15 (see Zimmer. Altind. Leben 68) also Av. baṃha, Polish pienka hemp. On its possible etym. connection with Vedic śaṇa (Ath. Veda ii. 4. 5 = P. saṇa & sāṇa hemp (= Gr.; κάνναβις, Ger. hanf E. hemp) see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. cannabis

Bhaṅga2

(nt.) 1. (lit.) breaking, breaking off, in sākhā˚; a layer of broken-off branches Ja iii.407.

2. (fig.) breaking up, dissolution, disruption (see on form Cpd. 25, 66; Pts i.57 sq. (˚ânupassanā insight into disruption), quoted & expl;d at Vism 640 sq.; Vb-a 27 (˚khaṇa); Sdhp 48 Sdhp 78 (āsā˚). Cp. vi˚. Bhangana & Bhangaloka;

cp. Class. Sk. bhanga, fr. bhañj: see bhañjati

Bhaṅgana & Bhaṅgaloka

are vv.ll. of Npl. at Nd i.155 for Gaṅgaṇa & Aṅgaṇeka; respectively With misspelling bh → g, cp. bheṇḍaka → geṇḍaka.

to bhanga1?

Bhacca

(adj.) to be carried, kept or sustained AN iii.46 (= a dependant) Ja iv.301 (C. bharitabba). As Kern. Toev. s. v. bhacca points out this gāthā “bhaccā mātā pitā bandhū, yena jāto sa yeva so” is a distortion of MBh i.74, 110, where it runs “bhastrā mātā, pituḥ putro, yena jāto sa eva saḥ (or is it bhrastā?).

grd. fr. bhṛ; cp. Sk. bhṛtya

Bhajati

to associate with (acc.), keep companionship with, follow, resort to; to be attached to (acc.), to love Freq. syName of sevati. The Dhtp & Dhtm mark the fig. meaning (bhaj;2) by sevāyaṃ (Dhtp 61), sevāputhakkare (Dhtm 523) & saṃsevane (ib. 76), whilst the lit. (bhaj;1) is expressed by vibhājane ■ Snp 958 (bhajato rittaṃ āsanaṃ; gen. sq. ppr. = sevato etc Nd i.466); Dhp 76, Dhp 303; Pp 26, Pp 33; Ja i.216 = Ja iii.510 (disā bh.) vi.358; Sdhp 275 ■ Pot. bhaje Dhp 76, Dhp 78 and bhajetha Dhp 78 (= payirupāsetha), 208 in sense of imper.; hence 2nd sg. formed like Caus. as bhajehi Ja iii.148 (C. bhajeyyāsi; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 1392). -grd. bhajitabba Nd ii.s. v. kāmaguṇā B (sevitabba bh., bhāvetabba).

bhaj to divide, partake etc.: see Caus. bhājeti & cp. vi˚

Bhajanā

(f.) resorting to, familiarity with Pp 20 = Dhs 1326, cp. sam˚ & Dhs trsl. 345.

fer. bhaj

Bhajin

(adj.) loving, attached to, worshipping Nd i.142 (in expln of “Bhagavā”).

fr. bhajati

Bhajjati

to roast, toast Vin iv.264; Dhtp 79 & Dhtm 94, expl;d by “pāke.” Caus. bhajjāpeti to have, or get roasted Vin iv.264; Dhp-a i.224 (v.l. K. paccāpeti).

Vedic bhṛjjati, cp. Gr. φρύγω to roast, φρύγανον dry wood; Lat. frīgo to make dry

Bhañjaka

(adj.) breaking, spoiling, destroying (attha˚ ■ visaṃvāda; cp. bhañjanaka) Ja iii.499.

fr. bhañjati

Bhañjati

1. (trs. & intrs.) to break Vin i.74 (phāsukā bhañjitabbā ribs to be broken); Dhp 337 (mā bhañji = mā bhañjatu C.). Pv ii.93 (sākhaṃ bhañjeyya = chindeyya Pv-a 114); Pv-a 277 (akkho bhañji the axle broke, intrs.).

2. to fold or furl (the lip) oṭṭhaṃ bh. Ja ii.264.

3. (fig.) to break up, spoil destroy, in atthaṃ bh. to destroy the good SN iv.347 (cp bhañjanaka) ■ pp. bhagga1 (q.v.).

bhañj, cp. Vedic bhañjati & bhanakti, roots with & without r, as Lat. frango = Goth. brikan = Ohg brehhan, E. break, Sk. giri-bhraj breaking forth from the mountain; and Sk. bhanga, bhañji wave ■ The Dhtp. 68 paraphrases by “omaddana,” Dhtm 73 by “avamaddana”

Bhañjana1

(nt.) breakage, breaking down, break, only in cpd. akkha˚; break of the axle Vism 32 Vism 45; Dhp-a i.375; Pv-a 277.

fr. bhañjati

Bhañjana2

(nt.) anointing, smearing, oiling, in gatta˚ and pāda˚ ■ bbhañjana-tela oil for rubbing the body and the feet Vism 100; Vv-a 295.

for byañjana, in composition; maybe graphical mistake

Bhañjanaka

(nt.) destroying, hurting, spoiling, in phrase attha˚; destroying the welfare (with ref. to the telling of lies) Dhp-a iii.356; Vv-a 72; cp bhañjaka.

fr. bhañjana1

Bhañjanin

(adj.) breaking, destroying, in cakka˚; breaking the wheel, fig. breaking the state of harmony Ja v.112.

fr. bhañj

Bhaññam

(Ja v.317) see bhā.

Bhaṭa

to hire; originally the same as bhṛtya fr. bhṛta & bhṛti of; bhṛ Dhtp 94, Dhtm 114 ■ bhaṭa = bhatyaṃ i.e. bhṛtyaṃ servant, hireling, soldier Mil 240; Vv-a 305 (bhattavetana˚). As to suggestion of bhaṭa occurring in phrase yathā-bhaṭaṃ (Kern. Toev. s. v. yathābhaṭaṃ see discussion under yathā bhataṃ.

-patha service, employment, salary Vin iv.265; Snp-a 542.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaṭa, fr, dial.; bhaṭ

Bhaṭṭha1

dropped, fallen down Ja i.482; Ja iv.222, Ja iv.382; Ja v.444. Cp. pari˚.

pp. of bhraṃś, see bhassati

Bhaṭṭha2

spoken, said Vv 6319 (su˚ = subhāsita Vv-a 265). See also paccā˚ & pari˚ cp. also next.

pp. of bhaṇ, for bhaṇita

Bhaṭṭha3

(?) wages, tip, donation Ja iv.261 (by C. expld as kathita, thus same as bhattha2) v.l. bhatta. Cp. Sk. bhāṭa & BSk. bhāṭaka Mvu iii.37.

perhaps for bhatta?

Bhaṇati

to speak, tell, proclaim (the nearest synonym is katheti: see Nd ii.s. v. katheti Dhp 264; Pp 33, Pp 56; Dhp-a ii.95 ■ ppr. bhaṇanto Snp 397. Pot. bhaṇe Snp 1131 (= bhaṇeyya Nd ii.469); Dhp 224 (saccaṃ; = dīpeyya vohareyya Dhp-a iii.316). Also bhaṇeyya Snp 397. An old subjunctive form is bhaṇā- mase SN i.209 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126). Prohib. mā bhāṇi. A Caus. form is bhāṇaye (Pot.) Snp 397.

bhaṇ; cp. Sk. bhaṇati; Ohg. ban = E. ban etc. “proclamation.” See connections in Walde, Lat Wtb. under fabula ■ Expld by Dhtp 111 as “bhaṇana. by Dhtm 162 as “bhāsana”

Bhaṇana

(nt.) telling, speaking Dhp-a iv.93 (˚sīla, adj. wont to speak); Dhtp 111.

fr. bhaṇati

Bhaṇe

(indecl.) “I say,” used as an interjection of emphasis, like “to be sure,” “look here.” It is a familiar term of address often used by a king to his subjects Vin i.240 (amhākaṃ kira bhaṇe vijite Bhaddiya-nagare), 241 (gaccha bhaṇe jānāhi… ) Mil 21 (atthi bhaṇe añño koci paṇḍito… ).

orig. 1st sg. pres. Med. of bhaṇati

Bhaṇḍa

(nt.) 1. stock in trade; collectively goods, wares, property, possessions, also “object” SN i.43 (itthi bhaṇḍānaṃ uttamaṃ woman is the highest property), Nd ii.38; Ja iii.353 (yācita˚ object asked, = yāca); Thag-a 288 (id.); Vism 22 ■ bhaṇḍaṃ kiṇāti to buy goods Vb-a 165 ■ bhaṇḍaṃ vikkiṇati to sell goods Ja i.377 (+ paṭibhaṇḍaṃ dāpeti to receive goods in return); vikkiṇiya-bh. goods for sale Dhp-a i.390assāmika˚; ownerless goods, unclaimed property Ja vi.348; ābharaṇa˚; trinkets, jewelry Ja iii.221; piya˚; best goods, treasure Ja iii.279; bahu˚ having many goods, rich in possessions Vin iii.138 Kp-a 241 (of a bhikkhu); vara˚; best property or belongings Vin iv.225.

2. implement, article, instrument Vin ii.142, Vin ii.143 (where 3 kinds are distinguished of wood, copper, & of earthenware), 170 (id.); Dāvs iv.50 (turiya˚) ■ In assa (hatthi˚) -bhaṇḍa Vin i.85 sq. the meaning “horse (elephant-) trader (or owner) does not seem clear; should we read paṇḍaka? Cp. bhaṇḍa = paṇḍa under bhaṇḍati.

-āgāra store house, warehouse, only in der. -āgārika keeper of stores Vin i.284; Vin ii.176; surveyor of the (royal) warehouses, royal treasurer (a higher court office: cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 101 sq.) Ja iii.293 Ja iv.43; Ja v.117; Mil 37; DN-a i.21; Pv-a 2, Pv-a 20. -āhāraka (trader) taking up goods Dhp-a iv.60.

cp. Epic Sk. bhāṇḍa

Bhaṇḍaka

(adj. in sense of collect. nt.) 1. article, implement; kīḷā˚; toys Ja vi.6.

2. belongings property Vin iv.225.

3. trappings, in assa˚; horsetrappings Ja ii.113.

fr. bhaṇḍa

Bhaṇḍati

to quarrel, abuse Vin i.76 (saddhiṃ) iv.277; Thag 933; Snp-a 357 (aññamaññaṃ).

bhaṇḍ, cp. “paṇḍa bhaṇḍa paribhāse” Dhtp 568; Dhtm 798

Bhaṇḍana

(nt.) quarrel, quarrelling, strife Iti 11; Ja iii.149; Nd i.196; Dhp-a i.55, Dhp-a i.64.

fr. bhaṇḍ, cp. BSk. bhāṇḍana Divy 164

Bhaṇḍi

a certain plant or flower Ja v.420. Reading uncertain.

?

Bhaṇḍikā

(f.) collection of goods, heap, bundle; bhaṇḍikaṃ karoti to make into a heap Ja iii.221, Ja iii.437; or bhaṇḍikaṃ bandhati to tie into a bundle Dhp-a ii.254; Vv-a 187. sahassa˚; a heap of 1,000 kahāpaṇas Ja ii.424; Ja iii.60; Ja iv.2Note. bhaṇḍika is v.l. at Ja iii.41 for gaṇḍikā.

fr. bhaṇḍaka, in collect. sense

Bhaṇḍu

(adj.) bald-headed, close shaven Vin i.71 (˚kamma shaving), 76 (kammāra˚); Ja iii.22; Ja vi.538 (+ tittira); Mil 11, Mil 128.

etym. uncertain, dialectical or = paṇḍu?

Bhata

(adj.) 1. supported, fed, reared, maintained AN iii.46 (bhatā bhaccā “maintained are my dependents”); Ja v.330 (kicchā bh.), given by Kern, Toev. s. v. in meaning “full” with wrong ref Ja vi.14. Cp. bharita.

cp. Epic Sk. bhṛta

Bhataka

a hired servant, hireling, servant Thag 606, Thag 685, Thag 1003; Ja iii.446; Mil 379; Dhp-a i.119, Dhp-a i.233 (˚vīthi servant street). See also Fick Sociale Gliederung 158, 195, 196.

cp. Epic Sk. bhṛtaka

Bhati

(f.) wages, fee, pay Ja i.475; Ja iii.325, Ja iii.446; Dhp-a i.21, Dhp-a i.70; Dhtp 94 (in expln of root bhaṭ; see bhaṭa).

cp. Vedic bhṛti, fr. bhṛ;

Bhatikā

(f.) fee Ja iv.184.

fr. bhati

Bhatta

(nt.) feeding, food, nourishment, meal Dhp 185; Pp 28, Pp 55; Ja ii.15; Ja v.170 (bhatta-manuñña-rūpaṃ for bhattaṃ-); Vism 66 (where 14 kinds enumd, i.e. sangha˚ uddesa˚ etc.); Sdhp 118 ■ ucchiṭṭha˚ food thrown away Pv-a 173; uddesa˚ special food Vin i.58 = Vin i.96, cp ii.175; devasika˚ daily food (as fee or wages) DN-a i.296 (= bhatta-vetana); dhura˚ a meal to which a bhikkhu is invited as leader of others, i.e. a responsible meal Ja i.449; Ja iii.97 (v.l. dhuva˚); dhuva˚ constant supply of food Vin i.25, Vin i.243.

-agga [cp. BSk. bhaktāgra Divy 335; Mvu ii.478 a refectory Vin i.44; MN i.28; Ja v.334. -ammaṇa food trough Ja vi.381. -ābhihāra gift of food SN i.82. -uddesaka (thera) (an elder) who supervises the distribution of food, a superintendent of meals Vism 388, Dhp-a i.244. -kāraka one who prepares the meal or food, a cook, butler Ja i.150 sq.; Ja v.296; Ja vi.349; DN-a i.157 -kicca “meal-performance,” meal (cp. BSk. bhaktakṛtya Divy 185) Ja i.87; Mil 9; Vism 278 (kata˚ after the meal, cp. kata ii.1. a); Pv-a 76. -kilamatha fatigue after eating Snp-a 58 (cp. ˚sammada). -gāma a village giving tribute or service Dhp-a i.398. -dāna gift of a meal Pv-a 54. -puṭa a bag with food Ja ii.82, Ja ii.203 Ja iii.200; DN-a i.270. Cp. puṭabhatta. -puṭaka same Kp-a 44; Vb-a 234; Vism 251. -bhoga enjoyment of food SN i.92. -randhaka a cook Ja iv.431. -vissagga serving a meal, meal-function, participation at a meal Vin iv.263; Pv iii.29 (so read for vissatta; expld at Pv-a 184 by bhattakicca & bhuñjana); Mil 9; Snp-a 19 Snp-a 140. -vetana service for food, food as wages (cp bhaktā-dāsa a slave working for food Manu viii.415 see Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 197), in general “hire wages,” also “professional fee” DN iii.191; Vin iii.222 (rañño bh-v ■ āhāro “in the King’s pay”); Ja iv.132 sq. Mil 379; Dhp-a i.25 (to a physician); Vv-a 305. -velā meal-time Snp-a 111. -sammada drowsiness after a meal SN i.7; Ja vi.57; Vb 352; Vism 278, Vism 295. -sālā hall for meals, refectory Vism 72.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhakta, orig. pp. of bhajati

Bhattar

a husband; nom. sg. bhattā Thig 413; Ja v.104, Ja v.260 (here in meaning “supporter”); vi.492; gen. bhattu Ja v.169, Ja v.170; acc bhattāraṃ Thig 412.

Vedic bhartṛ to bhṛ;

Bhattavant

(adj.) possessing reverence or worship(pers), worshipful, adored; in a (late) verse analysing fancifully the word “Bhagavant, at DN-a i.34 = Vism 210 sq. Expld at Vism 212 by “bhaji-sevi-bahulaṃ karoti.”

fr. *bhakta, pp. of bhajati

Bhatti

(f.) 1. devotion, attachment, fondness Pp 20; Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs trsl. 345); Pp 65; Ja v.340 (= sineha C.); vi.349; Vv-a 353, Vv-a 354.

2. in bhatti-kata Thig 413 it means “service,” thus “doing service” (or “rendered a servant”?).

3. of uncertain meaning in bhatti-kamma, probably “making lines, decoration ornamentation” Vin ii.113 (˚kamma-kata decorated) i.51. The reading is uncertain, may be bhati˚ (? Kern Toev. s. v. trsls “patchwork”?). Cp. vi˚.

cp. Vedic & Class. Sk. bhakti, fr.; bhaj: see bhajati

Bhattika

(adj.) (-˚) in dhuva˚; being in constant supply of food, being a regular attendant (servant) or adviser Vin ii.15. Also at Thag-a 267 in meaning “being a servant, working for food” in expln of bhattikatā (= kata-sāmi-bhattikā), said of a toiling housewife.

fr. bhatta

Bhattimant

(adj.) 1. devoted? 2. discerning, analytical, perspicacious? Thag 370; Com. has: yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattiyā tattha bhattimā nāma.

from bhatti

Bhadanta (Bhaddanta)

venerable, reverend mostly in voc. as address “Sir, holy father” etc., to men of the Order. voc. sg. bhadante SN i.216 (v.l. bhaddante); voc. pl. bhadantā Dhp-a iii.414 ■ A contracted form of bhadante is bhante (q.v.). Note. In case of bhadanta being the corresp. of Sk. *bhavanta (for bhavān) we would suppose the change v → d and account for dd on grounds of pop. analogy after bhadda See bhante. The pl. nom. from bhadantā is formed after bhadante, which was felt as a voc. of an a-stem with-e for-a as in Prk. Māgadhī.

a secondary adj. formation from address bhaddaṃ (= bhadraṃ) te “hail to thee,” cp “bhaddaṃ vo” under bhadda 1

Bhadantika

(adj.) (-˚) only in cpd. ehi˚; lit. “one belonging to the (greeting) ʻcome hail to thee,ʼ i.e. one who accepts an invitation DN iii.40, MN ii.161; AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55. See also under ehi.

fr. bhadanta

Bhadara

in ˚paṇḍu at AN i.181 is to be read as badara˚.

Bhadda(a) & Bhadra;(b)

(adj.) 1. auspicious lucky, high, lofty, august, of good omen reverend (in address to people of esteem), good, happy fortunate DN ii.95(a); SN i.117(b); Dhp 143 sq.(b) (of a good, well-trained horse), 380(b) (id.); Ja vi.281(b) (24 bhadrā pāsakā or lucky throws of the dice); Dhp-a i.33(a) (voc. bhadde = ayye) ■ bhadraṃ (nt.) something bringing luck, a good state, welfare; a good deed (= kalyāṇaṃ) Dhp 120 (= bhadra-kamma, viz. kāyasucarita etc. Dhp-a iii.14); Pv-a 116 (= iṭṭhaṃ). Also as form of address “hail to thee,” bhaddaṃ vo Ja v.260–⁠2. a kind of arrow (cp. Sk. bhalla) Ja ii.275 (v.l. bhadra; so Kern, Toev. s. v.; but C. takes it as bhadda lucky, in neg. sense “unlucky, sinister,” & expl;s by bībhaccha = awful).

3. bull (cp. Sk. bhadra, Halāyudha 5, 21) Thag 16, Thag 173, Thag 659.

-mukha one whose face brings blessings, a complimentary address, like “my noble & c friend!” [cp BSk. bhadramukha; Divy frequent: see Index], MN ii.53; SN i.74 (cp. K.S. i.100n) Ja ii.261 (v.l. bhadda˚); Vism 92 (v.l. SS bhadda˚). -muttaka [cp. Sk. bhadramusta] a kind of fragrant grass (Cyperus rotundus) DN-a i.81 Abhp 599. -yuga a noble pair Dhp-a i.95 (Kolita Upatissa),; -vāhana the auspicious (royal) vehicle (or carriage) Mil 4.

cp. Vedic bhadra, on diff. forms see Geiger, P.Gr. § 532. Dhtp 143, Dhtp 589 expls bhadd by “kalyāṇe”; whereas Dhtm 205 & 823 gives; bhad (bhadd) with expln “kalyāṇa kammāni”

Bhaddaka(a) & Bhadraka;(b)

1. good, of good quality (opp. pāpaka) AN iv.169(a).

2. honoured of high repute Ja iii.269(a) (= sambhāvita C.).

3. (m nt.) a good thing, lucky or auspicious possession, a valuable. Appld to the 8 requisites (parikkhārā) of a Samaṇa at Ja v.254(b) ■ On upari-bhaddaka (Name of a tree Ja vi.269; C. = bhagini-mālā) see upari ■ At AN iv.255 bhaddaka is given as one of the eight ingredients of the sun & moon; it may be gold (? cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 190), or simply a term for a very valuable quality.

fr. bhadda

Bhanta

swerving, swaying, staggering, deviating; always used of an uncontrolled car (ratha or yāna) Dhp 222 (ratha = ativegena dhāvanta Dhp-a iii.301); (yāna = adanta akārita aviṇīta Nd i.145) Dhs-a 260 (˚yāna). Cp. vi˚.

pp. of bham

Bhantatta

(nt.) turmoil, confusion Dhs 429 (= vibhanti-bhāva Dhs-a 260, so read for vibhatti˚) cp. Dhs trsl. 120.

fr. bhanta

Bhante

voc. of polite address: Sir, venerable Sir, used like bhadante. Either abs. as voc.: Vin i.76; DN ii.154, DN ii.283; Ja ii.111; Ja iii.46; Mil 19; or with another voc.: Mil 25; or with other oblique cases, as with nom. DN i.179; Dhp-a i.62. with gen. DN i.179.

would correspond either to Sk. *bhavantaḥ (with ending ˚e as Māgadhism for ˚aḥ) = bhavān, or to P bhadanta. In both cases we have a contraction. The expln bhante = bhadante (bhadantaḥ) is advocated by Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 165, 366b, intimated also by Weber Bhagavatī 156 n. 3 (unable to explain-e); the expln bhante = bhavantah (see bhavaṃ) by Geiger, P.Gr. 983 hinted at by Weber loc. cit. (bhavantaḥ = bhagavantaḥ).

Bhabba

(adj.) 1. able, capable, fit for (-˚ or with dat. or inf.); abhabba unfit, incapable Vin i.17; SN iii.27 (dukkha-kkhayāya); iv.89 (id.) Pp 12, Pp 13; Vism 116 (bhikkhu), neg. Iti 106 (antakiriyāya), 117 (phuṭṭhuṃ sambodhiṃ); Ja i.106 (˚puggala a person unfit for the higher truths & salvation); bhabbābhabba nt & unfit people Nd;2 2353 = Vism 205 expld at Vb 341, Vb 342 by “bhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ.”

2. possible (abhabba impossible) MN iii.215 (kammaṃ bhabbaābhāsa apparently possible) ■ See also abhabba.

grd of bhū, Sk. bhavya

Bhabbatā

(f.) possibility; neg. ; impossibility Snp 232; Kp-a 191; Vv-a 208.

abstr. fr. bhabba

Bhamati

to spin (of a wheel), to whirl about, to roam Dhp 371 (mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ); Ja i.414; Ja iii.206 Ja iv.4 (cakkaṃ matthake); iv.6 (kumbha-kāra-cakkaṃ iva bh.); v.478 ■ pp. bhanta ■ Caus. bhameti to make whirl Vism 142 (cakkaṃ).

bhram; on etym. see K.Z. iv.443; vi.152. Expld at Dhtp 219 by “anavaṭṭhāne,” i.e. unsettledness

Bhamara

1. a bee Ja v.205 (˚vaṇṇa bee-coloured, i.e. of black colour, in expln of kaṇha); Thig 252. Usually in similes, e.g. at Dhp 49 (cp. Dhp-a i.374 sq.); Vism 142, Vism 152; Snp-a 139.

2. in bhamara-tanti “the string that sounds,” one of the seven strings of the lute Ja ii.253, cp. Vv-a 140.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhramara; either to bhram (semantically quick, unsteady motion = confused noise), cp. Gr. φόρμιγς zither; or perhaps for *bramara to Ohg. bremo = Ger. bremse gadfly, bremen = brummen to hum; Gr. βρόμος thunder, Lat. fremo to growl roar: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fremo

Bhamarikā

(f.) a humming top Ja v.478.

fr. bhamara

Bhamu

(f.) eyebrow Ja vi.476 (ṭhita˚), 482 (nīla˚).

secondary formation after bhamuka

Bhamuka

(& Bhamukha) (f.) eyebrow Th 11, 232 = SN i.132 pamukh-J iv.18 (in expln of su-bbhū = su-bhamukhā in C. Fausböll puts “bhamuka”? Kern on this passage quotes BSk. bhrūmukha, see Toev. s. v.); vi.503 (aḷāra˚ for pamukha); Dhp-a iii.102; Dhp-a iv.90, Dhp-a iv.197 = Ja v.434; Snp-a 285.

cp. Vedic bhrū; the Pali word is possibly a compn of bhrū + mukha with dissimilation of first u to a

Bhaya

(nt.) fear, fright, dread AN ii.15 (jāti-maraṇa˚); DN iii.148, DN iii.182; Dhp 39, Dhp 123, Dhp 212 sq., 283; Nd i.371, Nd i.409; Pp 56; Vism 512; Kp-a 108; Snp-a 155; Dhp-a iii.23. There are some lengthy enumns of objects causing fear (sometimes under term mahabbhaya, mahā-bhaya), e.g. one of 17 at Mil 196, one of 16 (four times four) at AN ii.121 sq. the same in essence, but in different order at Nd ii.470 and at Vb-a 502; one of 16 (with remark “ādi,” and so on) at Vism 645. Shorter combns are to be found at Snp 964 (5, viz. ḍaṃsā, adhipātā, siriṃsapā, manussaphassā catuppādā); Vb 379 (5, viz. ājīvika˚, asiloka˚ parisa-sārajja˚, maraṇa˚, duggati˚, expld at Vb-a 505 sq.), 376 (4: jāti˚, jarā˚, vyādhi˚, maraṇa˚) 367 (3: jāti˚, jarā˚, maraṇ˚); Nd i.402 (2: diṭṭha-dhammikaṃ & samparāyikaṃ bh.) ■; abhaya absence of fear safety Vin i.75 (abhay-ûvara for abhaya-vara?) Dhp 317; Ja i.150; Dhp-a iii.491.

-ñāṇa insight into what is to be feared: see Cpd. 66 -dassāvin seeing or realising an object of fear, i.e. danger Vb 244, Vb 247 and passim. -dassin id. Dhp 31, Dhp 317 -bherava fear & dismay MN i.17 (= citt’ uttrasassa ca bhayānak’ ārammaṇassa adhivacanaṃ MA 113), Name of Suttanta No. 4 in Majjhima (pp. 16 sq.), quoted at Vism 202; Snp-a 206.

fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhaya, P. bhāyati

Bhayānaka

(adj.) frightful, horrible Ja iii.428; MA 113; Pv-a 24 (as ˚ika); Sdhp 7, Sdhp 208 ■ nt. ˚ṃ something awful Nd ii.470 (in def. of bhaya).

fr. bhaya, cp. Epic Sk. bhayānaka

Bhara-bhara

, a word imitating a confused sound MN i.128; otherwise contracted to babbhara (q.v.).

Bhara

(adj.) (-˚) “bearing” in act. & pass. meaning, i.e. supporting or being supported; only in cpd. dubbhara hard to support AN v.159, AN v.161 (v.l. dubhara), and subhara easy to support Thag 926 (trsl. “of frugal ways”).

fr. bhṛ;

Bharaṇa

(nt.) bearing, supporting, maintenance Dhtm 346 (in expln of bhṛ; ) Abhp 1053.

fr. bhṛ; Epic Sk. bharaṇa

Bharatā

(f.) only in cpd. dub˚; difficulty to support, state of being hard to maintain, synonymous with kosajja at AN iv.280, and kuhanā at AN v.159, AN v.161-opp. subharatā AN iv.280.

abstr. fr. bhara

Bharati

to bear, support, feed maintain Ja v.260 (mama bharatha, ahaṃ bhattā bhavāmi vo; C. explns as “maṃ icchatha”) ■ pp. bhata See also bhaṭa, bhara, bharita, and Der. fr. bhār˚. A curious Passive form is anu-bhīramāna (ppr.) MN iii.123 (chatta: a parasol being spread out), on which see Geiger, P.Gr. § 52, 5; 175 n. 3, 191.

bhṛ; cp. Lat. fero, Gr. φέρω, Av. baraiti, Oir. berim, Goth. bairan = to bear, Ger. gebāren. Dhtm expls simply by “bharena”

Bharita

(adj.) filled with (-˚) Ja i.2 (suvaṇṇa-rajata˚ gabbha); iv.489 (udaka˚); v.275 (kimi˚); Snp-a 494 (vāta˚); Thag-a 283 (kuṇapa˚).

lit. made to bear, i.e. heavy with etc. Cp. formations bhār˚, fr. bharati

Bhariyā

(f.) a wife (lit. one who is supported) DN iii.190; Iti 36; Ja iii.511; Dhp-a i.329.

fr. bhṛ; Vedic bhāryā

Bharu

sea, in two names for a town and a kingdom viz. Bharukaccha Nd i.155; Ja ii.188; Ja iv.137, and Bharu-raṭṭha Ja ii.169 sq., a kingdom which is said to have been swallowed up by the sea ■ Also in Name of the King of that country Bharu -rājā Ja ii.171 (v.l. Kuru˚) ■ Der Bhārukacchaka an inhabitant of Bharukaccha Dhs-a 305 (so read at Expos. ii.401).

a dial. (inscription) word, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.

Bhallaka

a kind of copper, enumd under the eight pisāca-lohāni, or copper coming from the Piśāca country Vb-a 63 (is reading correct?) It is doubtful whether we should not read mallaka, cp malla.

lit. from the Bhalla people

Bhallāṭaka

the marking nut plant Semicarpus anacardium Ja vi.578.

cp. Epic Sk. bhallātaka

Bhava

“becoming, (form of) rebirth, (state of) existence, a “life.” There are 3 states of existence conventionally enumd as kāma˚ rūpa˚, arūpa˚; or sensual existence, deva-corporeal, formless existence (cp. rūpa) DN ii.57; DN iii.216; SN ii.3 SN iv.258; AN ii.223; AN iii.444; Nd i.48; Nd ii.s. v. dhātu B. Vism 210 = DN-a i.34; Vism 529; Vb-a 204 ■ Another view is represented by the division of bhava into kamma˚; and upapatti˚; (uppatti˚), or the active functioning of a life in relation to the fruitional, or resultant way of the next life (cp. Cpd. 43) Vb 137 Vism 571; Vb-a 183; also in def. of bhava at Nd ii.471 (kamma˚ and paṭisandhika punabbhava) ■ In the “causal chain” (Paṭicca-samuppāda, q.v.) bhava is represented as condition of birth (jāti), or resultant force for new birth ■ See Snp 361, Snp 514, Snp 742, Snp 839, Snp 923 Snp 1055, Snp 1133; Dhp 348; Nd i.274; Vb 294, Vb 358; Vism 556 sq.; Dhp-a iv.221; Sdhp 33, Sdhp 333, Sdhp 335 ■ On itibhav’ ābhava see iti, and add ref. Vb 375 ■ A remarkable use of bhava as nt. (obstr.) to bhū (in cpd.) is to be noted in the def. given by Bdhgh. of divya = divi bhavaṃ (for divi-bhū) Kp-a 227; Snp-a 199; and mānasaṃ = manasi bhavaṃ (for manasi-bhū) Kp-a 248, cp. Pāṇini iv.3, 53 Similarly āroga bhava health Dhp-a i.328 for ˚bhava-Cp. anu˚, vi˚, sam˚.

-agga the best (state of) existence, the highest point of existence (among the gods) Ja iii.84; Vb 426; Mil 132; Kp-a 179, Kp-a 249; Snp-a 17, Snp-a 41, Snp-a 507; often as highest “heaven” as opposed to Avīci, the lowest hell; thus at Ja iv.182; Ja vi.354; Mil 336. -aṅga constituent of becoming, function of being, functional state of subconsciousness i.e. subliminal consciousness or subconscious life-continuum, the vital continuum in the absence of any process [of mind, or attention] (thus Mrs Rh. D. in Expos. 185 n.), subconscious individual life See on term Cpd. 26 sq., 265–⁠267; & cp.; Dhs trsl. 134-J vi.82; Mil 299 sq.; Vism 164, Vism 676; Dhs-a 72, Dhs-a 140 Dhs-a 269; Dhp-a i.23; Vb-a 81, Vb-a 156 sq., 406. -antaga “gone to the ends of existence,” past existence, Ep. of the Bhagavan Buddha Vism 210. -antara an existence interval, i.e. transition fr. one life to another, a previous or subsequent life Vism 553 sq. -ābhava this or that life, any form of existence some sort of existence Snp 1060, Snp 1068; Nd i.48, Nd i.109, Nd i.284; Nd ii.472, Nd ii.664 A Thag 784 (Thag-a mahantāmahanta bh.) Thag-a 71 (Ap. v 30); Vb-a 501. -āsava the intoxicant of existence DN iii.216; Vb 364, Vb 373. -uppatti coming into (a new ex ■ Four such bh ■ uppattis lead to rebirth among the foll. gods: the paritt’-ābhā devā, the appamāṇ’ābhā d., the sankiliṭṭh’-ābhā d., the parisuddh’-ābhā d MN iii.147. -esanā longing for rebirth DN iii.216, DN iii.270 -ogha the flood of rebirth (see ogha) Nd i.57, Nd i.159 Vism 480. -cakka the wheel or round of rebirth equivalent to the Paṭicca-samuppāda Vism 529 Vism 576 sq.; in the same context at Vb-a 138, Vb-a 194 sq -carimakā the last rebirth Vism 291. -taṇhā craving for rebirth DN iii.212, DN iii.216, DN iii.274; SN v.432; Snp 746; Vb 101, Vb 358, Vb 365; Thig 458; Thag-a 282; Vb-a iii.133 -netti [cp. BSk. bhava-netrī M. Vastu ii.307; ˚netrika iii.337] leader to renewed ex., guide to ex. Vin i.231; Iti 38; Dhs 1059≈ (cp. Dhs-a 364 = bhava-rajju). -saṃyojana the fetter of rebirth: see arahant II. C. -salla the sting or dart of rebirth Dhp 351 (= sabbāni bhavagāmīni sallāni Dhp-a iv.70). -sāta (pl. sātāni) the pleasures of ex., variously enumd in sets of from one to six at Nd i.30. -ssita at Ja v.371 read with v.l. as ghaṭa-ssita.

cp. Sk. bhava, as philosophical term late, but as Name of a deity Vedic; of bhū, see bhavati

Bhavati

to become, to be, exist, behave etc. (cp. Nd ii.474 sambhavati jāyati nibbattati pātu-bhavati) ■ I Forms. There are two bases used side by side, viz bhav˚; and (contracted) ho˚; the latter especially in the (later) Gāthā style and poetry in general, also as archaic in prose, whereas bhav˚ forms are older. On compounds with prepositions, as regards inflection, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 1312, 1513; and cp. anubhavati, abhibhavati abhisaṃ˚, pa˚ (also pahoti, pahūta), pari˚ vi˚, saṃ˚.

1. Pres. ind. bhavāmi Snp 511 & homi Ja iii.260; Ja iii.2nd bhavasi & hosī MN iii.140; Vv 8420; 3rd bhavati freq.; Snp 36 (where Nd ii.474 with v.l. BB of Sn reads bhavanti; Divy p.294 also reads bhavanti snehāḥ as conjecture of Cowell’s for MSS. bhavati) Dhp 249, Dhp 375; & hoti freq.; 1st pl. homa Pv i.118 2nd hotha Ja i.307; Ja i.3rd bhavanti & honti; freq ■ imper 2nd sg. bhava Snp 337, Snp 340, Snp 701; Dhp 236; Thig 8 bhavāhi Snp 510; hohi Snp 31; MN iii.134; Ja i.32; Pv-a 89 Pv-a 3rd sg. hotu Snp 224; Ja iii.150; Pv-a 13; Mil 18. pl 1st med. bhavāmase Thag 1128; Snp 32; Snp 2nd pl. bhavatha Ja ii.218, bhavātha Snp 692; Dhp 144; hotha Dhp 243; Dhp ii.141; Ja ii.302; Dhp-a i.57; Dhp-a i.3rd pl. bhavantu Snp 145; hontu Ja ii.4. Pot. 1st sg. bhaveyyaṃ Ja vi.364 Ja vi.2nd bhaveyyāsi Ud 91; Pv-a 11; Pv-a 3rd bhave Snp 716 bhaveyya Ja ii.159; Dhp-a i.329, & hupeyya Vin i.8 (for huveyya: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 396 & 131;2); pl. 1st bhaveyyāma; 2nd bhavetha Snp 1073, Snp 3rd bhaveyyuṃ Snp 906 ■ ppr. bhavaṃ Snp 92, & bhavanto Snp 968; f hontī Pv-a 79 ■ fut. 1st sg. bhavissāmi Pv-a 49 hessāmi Thig 460 (Thag-a 283 reads bhavissāmi),; hessaṃ Thag 1100; Ja iii.224; Pv i.105; 2nd bhavissasi Pv-a 16, hohisi Pv i.33; 3rd bhavissati Dhp 228, Dhp 264; Dhp-a ii.82, hessati Ja iii.279 & med.; hessate Mvu 25 Mvu 97, hehitī Bv ii.10 = AN i.4; Vv 6332; & hossati (in pahossati fr. pahoti Dhp-a iii.254); 1st pl. bhavissāma Dhp 200; Dhp 2nd hessatha SN iv.179; SN iv.3rd bhavissanti freq-Cond. 1st sg. abhavissaṃ Ja i.470; Ja i.2nd abhavissa Ja ii.11; Ja iii.30; Ja iii.3rd abhavissa Iti 37; Vin i.13; DN ii.57; MN iii.163; Ja i.267; Ja ii.112 (na bhavissa = nābhavissa?) 3rd pl. abhavissaṃsu Vin i.13. 1st aor. (orig. pret. of *huvati, cp. hupeyya Pot.; see Geiger P.Gr. 1312, 1622) 1st sg. ahuvā SN i.36, with by-form (see aor.) ahuvāsiṃ Vv 826; 2nd ahuvā ibid., 3rd ahuvā Vv 8124; Ja ii.106 Ja iii.131; Ja iii.1st pl. ahuvāma MN i.93; MN ii.214, & ahuvamha ibid.; 2nd ahuvattha SN iv.112; MN i.445; Dhp-a i.57. 2nd aor. (simple aor., with pret. endings): 1st sg. ahuṃ Pv ii.32 (v.l. BB ahu) (= ahosiṃ Pv-a 83); 2nd ahu (sk abhūḥ) Pv ii.35; 3rd ahū (Sk. abhūt) Snp 139, Snp 312, Snp 504 and passim; Pv i.23, & ahu Pv i.93; i.113; & bhavi Dhp-a i.329 (pātubhavi); 1st pl. ahumhā (Sk. abhūma Pv i.116, & ahumha Ja i.362; Dhp-a i.57.

3rd aor. (s aor.) 1st sg. ahosiṃ Thag 620; Ja i.106; Vv-a 321; Pv-a 10 (= āsiṃ); 2nd ahosi Ja i.107; Ja i.3rd ahosi Snp 835; Vin i.23; Vin i.1st pl. ahesumha MN i.265; MN i.3rd ahesuṃ DN ii.5; Vv 744; Ja i.149; Dhp-a i.327; & bhaviṃsu (Sk abhāviṣuḥ) Dhp-a iv.15 ■ Of medial forms we mention the 1st pl. pres. bhavāmahe Mvu i.65, and the 3rd sg pret. ahuvattha Vv-a 103 ■ Inf. bhavituṃ Snp 552,; hetuye Bv ii.10 ■ ger. bhavitvā Snp 56, hutvā Snp 43 & hutvāna Snp 281 ■ grd. bhavitabba Ja i.440; Ja vi.368 hotabba Vin i.46; bhabba (Sk. bhavya); see sep. bhuyya see cpd. abhibhuyya ■ Caus. bhāveti see sep-pp. bhūta. Note. In compn with nouns or adjectives the final vowel of these is changed into ī, as in combn of the same with the root kṛ; e.g. bhasmībhavati to be reduced to ashes, cp. bhasmī-karaṇa s. v. bhasma, etc-II. Meanings. In general the meaning “to become to get” prevails, but many shades of it are possible according to context & combinations. It is impossible & unnecessary to enumerate all shades of meaning, only a few idiomatic uses may be pointed out.

1. to happen, to occur, to befall Ja vi.368.

2. The fut bhavissati “is certainly,” “must be” Dhp-a iii.171 (sātthikā desanā bh.); Mil 40 (mātā ti pi na bh.). 3. Imper. hotu as adv. “very well” Mil 18 (hotu bhante very well, sir).

4. aor. in meaning and as substitute of āsiṃ, pret. of as to be; etad ahosi this occurred to him Dhp-a i.399 (assā etad ahosi “this thought struck her”).

bhū to become, cp. Sk. bhūmi earth; Gr. φύσις nature (physical), φύομαι to grow; Lat. fui I have been futurus = future; Oir. buith to be; Ags. būan = Goth bauan to live, Ger. bauen, also Ags. bȳldan = to build Lith. búti to be, būtas house Dhtp 1: bhū sattāyaṃ.

Bhavatta

(nt.) the fact of being, state, condition Kp-a 227.

abstr. fr. bhū

Bhavana

(nt.) dwelling, sphere, world, realm SN i.206, Snp 810 (see expln Nd i.132: nerayikānaṃ nirayo bh. etc. & Snp-a 534: niray’ ādi-bhede bhavane); Nd i.448 (Inda˚ the realm of Indra); Ja iii.275 (nāga˚ the world of the Nāgas).

fr. bhū

Bhavant

proName of polite address “Sir, Lord, or “venerable, honourable,” or simply “you.” Cases as follows (after Geiger, P.Gr. § 983): sg. nom. bhavaṃ Snp 486; DN i.249; MN i.484. nt. bhavaṃ MN iii.172 acc. bhavantaṃ Snp 597; DN ii.231; instr. bhotā DN i.93 DN i.110; SN iv.120. gen. bhoto Snp 565; MN i.486; voc bhavaṃ DN i.93 & bho DN i.93; MN i.484; Ja ii.26. See bho also sep ■ pl. nom. bhavanto Snp p.107 (only as v.l.; T. bhagavanto), & bhonto; ibid.; MN ii.2; Mil 25 acc. bhavante MN ii.3; instr. bhavantehi MN iii.13; gen bhavataṃ MN ii.3; voc. bhonto Thag 832; MN ii.2 ■ f bhotī: sg. nom. bhotī Snp 988; Ja iii.95; acc. bhotiṃ Ja vi.523; loc. bhotiyā ibid. voc. bhoti ibid.; DN ii.249-On form bhante see this.

cp. Sk. (& Vedic) bhavant, used as proName of the 2;nd; but constructed with 3rd person of the verb Probably a contraction fr. bhagavant, see Whitney Altind. Gr. 456

Bhaveyya

a sort of tree, perhaps Averrhoa carambola Ja vi.529.

cp. Class. Sk. bhavya

Bhasati

to bark (of dogs) Ja iv.182 (aor. bhasi; so read for T. bhusi) ■ pp. bhasitaṃ (as n.) bark ibid. (mahā-bhasitaṃ bhasi, read for bhusita) See also bhusati.

cp. Epic Sk. bhaṣate

Bhasita

1. see bhasati.

2. pp. of bhas “crumbled to ashes” see bhasma.

Bhasta

a he-goat Ja iii.278.

cp. Vedic basta

Bhastā

(f.) & bhasta (nt.) 1. a bellows Thag 1134; Ja vi.12 (vāta-puṇṇa-bhasta-camma, skin of bellows full of wind); Snp-a 171 (vāta-pūrita-bhastrā viya), 494 (vātabharita˚); Dhp-a i.442 (bhastaṃ dhamāpeti); Vism 287–⁠2. a sack Thag 1151; Thag 2, Thag 466 (T. reads gatta, but Thag-a 283 reads bhasta & expl;s as “camma-pasibbaka”) Ja iii.346 (sattu˚ = sattu pasibbaka flour sack); v.45 Thag-a 212 (udaka˚). biḷāra-bhastā a bag of catskin MN i.128 (= biḷāra-camma-pasibbaka Bdhgh); Thag 1138.

cp. Class. Sk. bhastrā (also one MBh. passage), orig. n. ag. fr. bhas (to bark?), lit bellower, blower

Bhasma(n)

(nt.) ashes SN i.169 = Nd ii.576 (loc bhasmani); Vv 8444; Ja iii.426; Vism 469 (in comparison).

-antāhuti (bhasm’ ant’ āhuti) “whose sacrifice ends in ashes” DN i.55 (so read for bhassant˚, according to DN-a i.166, & cp. Franke,; Dīgha Nikāya p. 60); MN i.515; SN iii.207. -ācchanna covered by ashes Dhp 71 (= chārikāya paṭichanna Dhp-a ii.68); Ja vi.236 (.… va pāvaka)-puṭa a sack for ashes DN-a i.267 (as expln for assa-puṭa of DN i.98; fanciful; see assa1). -bhāva “ashy” state state of being crumbled to dust Vv-a 348.

cp. Vedic bhasman (adj.); Sk. bhasman (n.), originally ppr. of bhas to chew & thus n-stem. It has passed into the a-decl. in Pali, except in the loc; bhasmani (SN i.169). Etymologically & semantically bhasman is either “chewing” or “anything chewed (small),” thus meaning particle, dust, sand, etc. and bhas is another form of psā (cp. Sk. psā morsel of food, psāta hungry = P. chāta). Idg *bhsā & *bhsam, represented in Gr.; ψώξω to grind ψάμμος & ψ ̈ωξος sand; Lat. sabulum sand. The Dhtp 326 & Dhtm 452 explain; bhas by bhasmīkaraṇa “reduce to ashes,” a pp. of it is bhasita; it also occurs in Sk. loc. bhasi

Bhassa

(nt.) speech, conversation, way of talking, disputation Snp 328 (v.l. for hassa); Iti 71; Mil 90; Vism 127 (grouped into fit talk as the 10 kathā-vatthus, and unfit talk or gossip, as the 32 tiracchāna-kathā).

-kāraka one who makes talk, i.e. invites disputation or one who gossips Vin i.1; Nd i.142; f. ˚kārikā Vin iv.230. -pavādaka one who proposes disputation one who is fond of debate & discussions MN i.161, MN i.227 (˚ika); Mil 4. -pavedin one experienced in debating Mil 90. -samācāra (good) conduct in speech, proficiency in disputation DN iii.106. -samussaya grandiloquence proud talk Snp 245 (cp. Snp-a 288 = att’ukkaṃsanatā ti vuttaṃ hoti).

cp. Class. Sk. bhāṣya, of bhāṣ

Bhassati

to fall down, drop, to droop (Dhtp 455 & Dhtm 695: adho-patane & adhopāte) Ja iv.223; Ja vi.530. ppr. bhassamāna Mil 82 pret. 3rd sg. bhassittha Ja ii.274 (cp. pabhassittha Vin ii.135), & abhassittha SN i.122 (so read for abhassatha)-pp. bhaṭṭha1.

bhranś, Sk. bhraśyate

Bhassara

(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) shining, resplendent Ja v.169 (C. pabhassara).

2. Name of a bird Ja vi.538 (= sata-haṃsa C.) ■ Cp. ā˚, pa˚.

fr. bhās

Bhā

(f.) light, splendour; given as name of a jewel at an extremely doubtful passage Ja v.317, Ja v.318, where T. reads “vara taṃ bhañ ñam icchasi,” & C. expl;s.: “bhā ti ratanass’ etaṃ nāmaṃ.” The v.l. for bhaññaṃ is bhuñjaṃ; the passage may be corrupt from “varatu bhavaṃ yam icchasi.”

cp. Vedic bhā & bhāḥ nt.

Bhākuṭika

(adj.) knitting the eyebrows, frowning, only in redupl. cpd. bhākuṭika- bhākuṭiko frowning continually, supercilious Vin ii.11 = Vin iii.181 (manda-mando + ); Nd ii.342 (korajika-korajiko + ) Vism 26 (id.) ■ f. bhākuṭikā a frown, frowning, superciliousness def. at Vism 26 as “padhāna-parimathitabhāva-dassanena bhākuṭi [read bhakuṭi]-karaṇaṃ mukha-saṅkoco ti vuttaṃ hoti.” It occurs in stock phrase bhākuṭikā bhākuṭiyaṃ kuhanā kuhāyanā in def. of kuhanā at Vb 352 = Vism 23, Vism 25 (cp. Nd i.225) and at Nd ii.342 D. See also Vb-a 482 (bhākuṭikaraṇaṃ sīlam assā ti bhākuṭiko). The form bhākuṭiyaṃ (nt.) is originally the same as bhākuṭikā, only differentiated in C ■ style. The def. at Vism 26 is “bhākuṭikassa bhāvo bhākuṭiyaṃ.” The v.l. ibid. is bhākuṭitā ■ bhākuṭikaṃ karoti to make a frowning face, to act superciliously Vism 105 (as a quality of one “dosa-carita”).

fr. bhakuṭi

Bhāga

1. part, portion, fraction, share Vin i.285; Snp 427 (sahassa-bhāgo maraṇassa = sahassaṃ bhāgānaṃ assā ti Snp-a 387; a thousand times a share of death, i.e. very near death, almost quite dead), 702 (v.l. Snp-a 492 for Sn samāna-bhāva, evenness proportionate-ness); Vv 146 (= kummāsa-koṭṭhāsa Vv-a 62); Pv i.115 (aḍḍhi˚ one half); Vin iv.264 ■ Cp vi˚ ■ bhāgaso (abl ■ adv.) in parts, by parts, by portions esp. in even portions, i.e. evenly, in proportion SN i.193 (according to each one’s share; cp. Thag 1242); MN iii.183; Vv 72; Mil 330, Mil 415 (aneka˚ hundredfold or more). bhāgaso mita (of cities or dwelling-places etc. evenly planned, well laid out, i.e. in squares Snp 300, Snp 305 (nivesanāni suvibhattāni bhāgaso); Ja v.266 (cp. C. on p. 272) = Nd ii.304iii. d; Pv i.1013 (= bhāgato mita Pv-a 52) ■ bhāgabhatta apportioned food, ration Dhp-a i.134 ■ Cp. dobbhagga “disproportionateness,” i.e. bad luck.

2. apportioned share (of money), fee remuneration, always in term ācariya˚; (ācariyassa) the teacher’s fee (usually consisting in 1,000 kahāpaṇas Ja i.273; Ja v.457; Ja vi.178; Mil 10; Dhp-a i.253.

3. division of space, quarter, side, place, region: disā˚; quarter of the compass Vin ii.217; para˚; outside part Kp-a 206 = Pv-a 24 (kuḍḍānaṃ parabhāgā = tiro-kuḍḍā); pacchābhāgaṃ (acc. adv.) at the back part, behind Pv-a 114-fig. way, respect, in ubhato-bhāga -vimutta “free in both ways” DN ii.71; MN i.477 (see Dial ii.70; i.e. free both by insight and by the intellectual discipline of the 8 stages of Deliverance, the aṭṭha vimokkhā).

4. division of time, time, always-˚, e.g. pubba˚; the past apara˚; the future Pv-a 133; obl. cases adverbially: tena divasa-bhāgena (+ ratti bhāgena) at that day (& that very night) Mil 18; apara-bhāge (loc.) in future Ja i.34; Pv-a 116.

cp. Vedic bhāga, fr. bhaj, bhajati

Bhāgavant

(adj.) sharing in, partaking of (gen.) Dhp 19, Dhp 20 (sāmaññassa).

fr. bhāga, equal to bhāgin

Bhāgin

(adj.) sharing in, partaking of (with gen.), endowed with; getting, receiving AN ii.80; AN iii.42 (āyussa vaṇṇassa etc.); Ja i.87 (rasānaṃ) Mil 18 (sāmaññassa); Vism 150 (lābhassa); Dhp-a ii.90 Vb-a 418 sq. (paññā as hāna-bhāginī, ṭhiti˚, visesa & nibbedha˚; ) ■ Also in def. of term Bhagavā at Nd i.142 = Nd ii.466 = Vism 210 ■ pl. bhāgino Pv iii.112 (dukkhassa); Pv-a 18 (dānaphalassa), 175 ■ Cp bhāgavant, bhāgimant, bhāgiya.

fr. bhāga. Cp. Vedic bhāgin

Bhāgineyya

sister’s son, nephew Snp 695; Ja i.207; Ja ii.237; Dhp-a i.14; Pv-a 215.

fr. bhaginī, Cp. Epic Sk. bhāgineya

Bhāgimant

(adj.) partaking in, sharing, possessing (with gen. Thig 204 (dukkhassa); Thag-a 171 (= bhāgin).

a double adj. formation bhāgin + mant

Bhāgiya

(adj.) (-˚) connected with, conducive to, procuring; in foll. philos. terms: kusala AN i.11; hāna˚, visesa˚ DN iii.274 sq.; hāna˚, ṭhiti˚ visesa˚, nibbedha˚ Vism 15 (in verse), 88 = Pts i.35. Cp. BSk. mokṣa bhāgīya, nirvedha˚ Divy 50; mokṣa ibid. 363.

fr. bhāga, cp. bhāgin

Bhāgya

(nt.) good luck, fortune Ja v.484.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhāgya; fr. bhaga, see also contracted form bhagga2

Bhāgyavant

(adj.) having good luck, auspicious fortunate, in def. of term “Bhagavā” at DN-a i.34 = Vism 210; also at Vv-a 231, where the abstr. bhāgyavantatā is formed as expln of the term bhāgyavatā (f.) at Vism 211.

same as bhaggavant, only differentiated as being the Sk. form and thus distinguished as sep. word by Commentators

Bhājaka

(adj.) (-˚) distributing, one who distributes or one charged with the office of distributing clothes, food etc. among the Bhikkhus Vin i.285 (cīvara˚); AN iii.275 (cīvara˚, phala˚, khajjaka˚).

fr. bhajeti

Bhājana1

(nt.) a bowl, vessel, dish, usually earthenware, but also of other metal, e.g. gold (suvaṇṇa˚) DN-a i.295; copper (tamba˚ Dhp-a i.395; bronze (kaṃsa˚) Vism 142 (in simile). Vin i.46; Snp 577 (pl. mattika-bhājanā); Ja ii.272 (bhikkhā˚); iii.366 (id.), 471; v.293 (bhatta˚); Mil 107; Vv-a 40, Vv-a 292 (v.l. bhojana); Pv-a 104, Pv-a 145, Pv-a 251 Sdhp 571.

-vikati a special bowl Ja v.292 (so read for T. bhojana˚) Vism 376.

cp. Epic Sk. bhājana, fr. bhāj

Bhājana2

(nt.) division, dividing up, in pada˚; dividing of words, treating of words separately Dhs-a 343; similarly bhājaniyaṃ that which should be classed or divided Dhs-a 2, also in pada˚; division of a phrase Dhs-a 54.

fr. bhāj

Bhājita

divided, distributed; nt. that which has been dealt out or allotted, in cpd. bhājit-ābhājita AN iii.275.

pp. of bhājeti

Bhājeti

to divide, distribute deal out Vin iv.223 (ppr. bhājiyamāna); Ja i.265; Dhs-a 4 (fut. bhājessati) grd. bhājetabba Vin i.285 ■ pp. bhājita.

Caus. of bhajati, but to be taken as root by itself; cp. Dhtm 777 bhāja = puthakkare

Bhāṇa

reciting or preaching, in pada˚; reciting the verses of the Scriptures Dhp-a ii.95 (v.l. paṭibhāna) iii.345; iv.18.

-vāra a section of the Scriptures, divided into such for purposes of recitation, “a recital” Vin i.14; Vin ii.247 DA 13; MA 2 (concerning the Bh. of Majjhima Nikāya) Snp-a 2 (of Sutta Nipāta), 608 (id.); Dhs-a 6 (of Dhammasangaṇī, cp. Expos. 8 n. 3), and frequently in other Commentaries & Expositionary Works.;

fr. bhaṇati

Bhāṇaka1

(adj.-n.) speaking; (n.) a reciter, repeater, preacher (of sections of the Scriptures), like Aṅguttara˚; Vism 74 sq.; Dīgha˚; DN-a i.15, DN-a i.131; Ja i.59 Vism 36, Vism 266; Jātaka˚; etc. Mil 341 sq.; Majjhima˚ Vism 95 (Revatthera), 275, 286, 431; Saṃyutta˚; Vism 313 (Cūḷa-Sivatthera). Unspecified at Snp-a 70 (Kalyāṇavihāravāsi-bhāṇaka-dahara-bhikkhu; reading doubtful) ■ f. bhāṇikā Vin iv.285 (Thullanandā bahussutā bhāṇikā); also in cpd. mañju-bhāṇikā sweet-voiced uttering sweet words Ja vi.422.

fr. bhaṇati

Bhāṇaka2

a jar Vin ii.170 (loha˚) iii.90.

cp. Sk. bhāṇḍaka a small box: Kathāsarits. 24, 163; & see Müller,; P.Gr. p. 48

Bhāṇin

(adj.) (-˚) speaking, reciting Snp 850 (manta˚; a reciter of the Mantras, one who knows the M. and speaks accordingly, i.e. speaking wisely, expld by Snp-a 549 as “mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṃ bhāsitā”); Dhp 363 (id.; expld as “mantā vuccati paññā tāya pana bhaṇana-sīlo” Dhp-a iv.93) ■ ativela˚ speaking for an excessively long time, talking in excess Ja iv.247, Ja iv.248.

fr. bhaṇati

Bhāṇeti

Caus. of bhaṇati (q.v.) with 3rd praet. bhāṇi & pot.; bhāṇaye.

Bhātar

brother, nom. sg. bhātā Snp 296; Ja i.307; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 64 gen. sg. bhātuno Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.36), & bhātussa Mvu 8, Mvu 9; instr. bhātarā Ja i.308; acc. bhātaraṃ Snp 125; Ja i.307; loc. bhātari Ja iii.56 ■ nom. pl. bhātaro Ja i.307, & bhātuno Thig 408; acc. bhāte Dpvs vi.21. In cpds. both bhāti˚; (. bhātisadisa like a brother Ja v.263), and bhātu˚; (: bhātu-jāyā brother’s wife, sister-in-law Ja v.288; Vism 95). Cp. bhātika & bhātuka; On pop. etym. see bhaginī.

cp. Vedic bhrātar = Av. bratar, Gr. φράτωρ, Lat. frater, Goth. brōpar = Ohg. bruoder, E. brother

Bhāti

to shine (forth), to appear DN ii.205; Vv 352; Ja ii.313 ■ pp. bhāta: see vi˚.

bhā Dhtp 367, Dhtm 594: dittiyaṃ; Idg. *bhé, cp. Sk. bhāḥ nt. splendour, radiance, bhāsati to shine forth; Gr. φάος light, φαίνω to show etc.; Ags. bonian to polish = Ger. bohnen; also Sk. bhāla shine, splendour = Ags. bael funeral pile

Bhātika

(& Bhātiya) lit. brotherly, i.e. a brother, often˚- ■ “brother”-(a bhātika: Ja i.253 (jeṭṭhaka˚); vi.32; Dhp-a i.14 (˚thera my Thera-brother or br ■ thera), 101, 245; Pv-a 75. (b) bhātiya: Vism 292 (dve ˚therā two Th. brothers)-Cp. bhātuka.

fr. bhātar, cp. Class. Sk. bhrātṛka

Bhātuka

brother, usually -˚, viz. pati˚; brother-in-law, husband’s brother Ja vi.152 putta˚; son & brother Dhp-a i.314; sa˚; with the brother Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.36).

= bhātika, fr. Sk. bhrātṛka

Bhānu

(adj.) light, bright red Ja iii.62 (of the kaṇavera flower); Vv-a 175 (˚raṃsi).

cp. Vedic bhānu (m.) shine, light, ray; Epic Sk. also “sun”

Bhānumant

(adj.) luminous brilliant; mostly of the sun; nom. bhānumā SN i.196 Thag 1252; Vv 6417, 787 (= ādicca Vv-a 304); Ja i.183 acc. bhānumaṃ Snp 1016 ■ The spelling is sometimes bhāṇumā.

fr. bhānu, ray of light Vedic bhānumant, Ep. of Agni; also Epic Sk. the sun

Bhāyati

to be afraid. Pres, Ind. 1st sg. bhāyāmi Thag 21; Snp p.48; Snp p.2nd sg. bhāyasi Thig 248; Thig 1st pl. bhāyāma Ja ii.21; Ja ii.3rd pl. bhāyanto Dhp 129; Imper. 2nd pl bhāyatha Ud 51; Ja iii.4; Pot. 3rd sg. bhāye Snp 964; bhāyeyya Mil 208; Mil 3rd pl. bhāyeyyuṃ Mil 208. Aor. 1st sg. bhāyiṃ Dhp-a iii.187; Dhp-a iii.2nd sg. bhāyi Thag 764; Dhp-a iii.187; & usually in Prohib.; mā bhāyi do not be afraid SN v.369; Ja i.222; Dhp-a i.253 ■ grd bhāyitabba Nd ii.s.v. kāmaguṇā B; Dhp-a iii.23. Caus. I. bhāyayate to frighten Ja iii.99 (C.: utraseti) Caus. II. bhāyāpeti Ja iii.99, Ja iii.210 ■ pp. bhīta.

cp. Sk. bhayate, bhī, pres. redupl. bibheti; Idg. *bhei, cp. Av. bayente they frighten; Lith. bijotis to be afraid; Ohg. bibēn = Ger. beben. Nearest synonym is tras

Bhāyitabbaka

(adj.) to be feared, dreadful, fearful, Sdhp 95.

grd. of bhāyati + ka

Bhāra

1. anything to carry, a load Vin iii.278 (Bdhgh; dāru˚ a load of wood) bhāraṃ vahati to carry a load AN i.84; Vv-a 23garu˚ a heavy load, as “adj.” “carrying a heavy load Ja v.439 (of a woman, = pregnant) ■ bhāratara (adj. compar.) forming a heavier load Mil 155 ■ Cp. ati˚; sam˚.

2. a load, cartload (as measure of quantity Vv-a 12 (saṭṭhi-sakaṭa˚-parimāṇa); Pv-a 102 (aneka˚parimāṇa).

3. (fig.) a difficult thing, a burden or duty i.e. a charge, business, office, task, affair Vism. 375; Ja i.292; Ja ii.399; Ja iv.427; Ja vi.413; Dhp-a i.6, Dhp-a i.111. Several bhārā or great tasks are mentioned exemplifying the meaning of “gambhīra” & “duddasa” (saccāni) at Vb-a 141, viz. mahā-samuddaṃ manthetvā ojāya nīharaṇaṃ; Sineru-pādato vālikāya uddharaṇaṃ; pabbataṃ pīḷetvā rasassa nīharaṇaṃ.

4. (fig.) in metaphors for the burden of (the factors of renewed) existence (the khandhas and similar agents). Esp. in phrase panna-bhāra “one whose load (or burden) has been laid down,” one who has attained Arahantship MN i.139; AN iii.84; SN i.233; Dhp 402 (= ohita-khandha-bhāra Dhp-a iv.168); Snp 626 (same expln at Snp-a 467), 914 (expld as patita-bhāra, oropita˚, nikkhitta˚ Nd i.334 where 3 bhāras in this sense are distinguished, viz khandha˚, kilesa˚, abhisankhāra˚); Thag 1021. So at Vism 512 with ref. to the ariya-saccāni, viz. bhāro dukkha-saccaṃ, bhār’ ādānaṃ = samuda-saccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanaṃ = nirodha-s., bhāra-nikkhepan’upāya magga-s ■ On bhāra in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 118.

-ādāna the taking up of a burden SN iii.25 -(m)oropana “laying down the load,” i.e. delivery of a pregnant woman Bv ii.115. -ṭṭha contained in a load carried as a burden Vin iii.47. -nikkhepana the laying down or taking off of a burden SN iii.25. -mocana delivery (of a pregnant woman) Ja i.19. -vāhin “burdenbearer,” one who carries an office or has a responsibility AN iv.24 (said of a bhikkhu). -hāra load-carrier, burdenbearer SN iii.25 sq.

fr. bhṛ; Vedic bhāra; cp. bhara

Bhāraka

(-˚) a load, only in cpd. gadrabha˚; a donkey-load (of goods) Ja ii.109; Dhp-a i.123.

fr. bhāra

Bhārataka

“the petty descendants of Bhārata” or: load-carrier, porter (?) Ś iv.117 (indignantly applied to apprentices and other low class young men who honour the Mahā-Kaccāna).

fr. bhara

Bhārika

(adj.) 1. loaded, heavy Ja v.84, Ja v.477; Mil 261.

2. full of, loaded down with (-˚) Vv-a 314 (sineha˚ hadaya).

3. grievous, serious, sorrowful Pv-a 82 (hadaya).

4. important Mil 240, Mil 311 ■ See bhāriya.

fr. bhāra

Bhārin

(adj.) carrying, wearing, only in cpd. mālā˚; (māla˚), wearing a garland (of flowers Ja iv.60, Ja iv.82; Ja v.45; where it interchanges with ˚dhārin (e.g. Vv.323; v.l. at Pv-a 211; cp. BSk. ˚dhārin Mvu i.124) ■ f. ˚bhārinī Ja iii.530; Vv-a 12; and ˚bhārī Thag 459 (as v.l.; T. ˚dhārī). See also under mālā.

fr. bhṛ; cp. bhāra

Bhāriya

(adj.) 1. heavy, weighty, grave serious; always fig. with ref. to a serious offence, either as bhāriyaṃ pāpaṃ a terrible sin Pv-a 195, or bh kammaṃ a grave deed, a sin Dhp-a i.298, Dhp-a i.329; Dhp-a ii.56 Dhp-a iii.120; Vv-a 68; or bhāriyaṃ alone (as nt.), something grave, a sin Dhp-a i.64. Similarly with ati˚; as atibhāriyaṃ kammaṃ a very grave deed Dhp-a i.70, or atibhāriyaṃ id. Dhp-a i.186.

2. bhāriyā (= bhārikā, f. of bhāraka) carrying, fetching, bringing Ja vi.563 (phala˚).

fr. bhāra Vedic bhārya to be nourished or supported; bhāryā wife

Bhārukacchaka

see bharu˚.

Bhāva

1. being, becoming, condition, nature; very rarely by itself (only in later & C. literature, as e.g. Ja i.295 thīnaṃ bhāvo, perhaps best to be translated as “women’s character,” taking bhāva = attabhāva); usually -˚, denoting state or condition of, and representing an abstr. der. from the first part of the cpd. e.g. gadrabha˚ ʻasininityʼ Ja ii.109 Thus in connection with (a) adjectives: atthika˚; state of need Pv-a 120; ūna˚; depletion Snp-a 463; ekī˚; loneliness Vism 34; sithill˚; (for sithila˚ in conn. with kṛ bhū ) relaxation Vism 502 ■ (b) adverbs. upari˚; high condition MN i.45; pātu˚; appearance Snp 560; vinā˚ difference Snp 588. (c) nouns & noun-derivations:; atta˚ individual state, life, character Snp 388 (= citta Snp-a 374) asaraṇa˚; state of not remembering Dhp-a iii.121; samaṇa˚ condition of a recluse Snp 551 ■ (d) forms of verbs: nibbatta˚; fact of being reborn Dhp-a iii.121; magg ārūḷha˚; the condition of having started on one’s way Vv-a 64; baddha˚; that he was bound; suhita˚; that they were well Ja iv.279. The translation can give either a full sentence with “that it was” etc. (Vv-a 64 “that he had started on his way”), or a phrase like “the fact or state of,” or use as an English abstract noun ending in -ness (atthika-bhāva needfulness, eki loneliness), -ion (ūna˚ depletion, pātu˚ manifestation) -hood (atta˚ selfhood), or -ship (samaṇa˚ recluseship). Similarly in Com. style: sampayutta- bhāvo (m.) Dhp-a iii.94, for *sampayuttattaṃ (abstr.); bhākuṭikassa bhāvo = bhakuṭiyaṃ Vism 26; sovacassassa bhāvo sovacassatā Kp-a 148; mittassa bh. = mettaṃ Kp-a 248 Here sometimes bhava for bhāva.

2. (in pregnant specifically Buddhistic sense) cultivation or production by thought, mental condition, esp. a set mental condition (see der. bhāvanā). Sometimes (restricted to Vin J) in sense “thinking of someone,” i.e. affection, love sentiment ■ (a) in combn khanti, diṭṭhi, ruci, bhāva at Vin ii.205; Vin iii.93; Vin iv.3, Vin iv.4 ■ (b) in Jātaka passages Ja v.237; Ja vi.293 (bhāvaṃ karoti, with loc., to love)- abhāva (late, only in C. style) not being, absence want Pv-a 25; abl. abhāvato through not being, in want of Pv-a 9, Pv-a 17sabhāva (sva + bhāva) see sep.

fr. bhū, cp. Vedic bhāva

Bhāvanā

(f.) producing, dwelling on something, putting one’s thoughts to, application developing by means of thought or meditation, cultivation by mind, culture ■ See on term Dhs translation 261 (= 2 240); Expos. i.217 (= Dhs-a 163); Cpd. 207 n. 2. Cp. pari˚, vi˚, sam˚ ■ Vin i.294 (indriya˚); DN iii.219 (three: kāya˚, citta˚, paññā˚), 221, 225, 285, 291; SN i.48; Dhp 73, Dhp 301; Ja i.196 (mettā˚); iii.45 (id.); Nd i.143 (saññā˚); Ne 91 (samatha-vipassanaṃ); Vb 12 Vb 16 sq., 199, 325; Vism 130 (karaṇa, bhāvanā, rakkhaṇa; here bh. = bringing out, keeping in existence) 314 (karuṇā˚), 317 (upekkhā˚); Mil 25 (˚ṃ anuyuñjati); Sdhp 15, Sdhp 216, Sdhp 233, Sdhp 451.

-ānuyoga application to meditation Vb 244, Vb 249 -ārāma joy of or pleasure in self culture AN ii.28. -bala power to increase the effect of meditation, power of self-culture AN i.52; DN iii.213. -maya accomplished by culture practice; brought into existence by practice (of cultured thought), cp. Cpd. 207. DN iii.218, DN iii.219 Ne 8; with dānamaya & sīlamaya; at Iti 19, Iti 51; Vb 135, Vb 325. -vidhāna arrangement of process of culture Dhs-a 168 = Vism 122.

fr. bhāveti, or fr. bhāva in meaning of bhāva 2, cp. Class. Sk. bhāvanā

Bhāvanīya

(adj.) “being as ought to be, to be cultivated, to be respected, in a self-composed state (cp. bhāvitatta) MN i.33 (garu + ; expld by Bdhgh as “addhā ‘yam āyasmā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passatī ti evaṃ sambhāvanīyo” MA 156); SN v.164; AN iii.110; Mil 373; Pv-a 9. See also under manobhāvanīya.

grd. fr. bhāveti, but taken by Bdhgh as grd. formation fr. bhāvanā

Bhāvita

developed, made to become by means of thought, cultured, well-balanced AN v.299 (cittaṃ parittaṃ abhāvitaṃ; opp. cittaṃ appamāṇaṃ subhāvitaṃ); Snp 516, Snp 558.

pp. of bhāveti

Bhāvitatta1

(adj.) one whose attan (ātman) is bhāvita, i.e. well trained or composed Attan here = citta (as Pv-a 139), thus “self-composed well-balanced” AN iv.26; Snp 277, Snp 322, Snp 1049; Dhp 106 Dhp 107; Nd ii.142; Nd ii.475 B (indriyāni bh.); Ja ii.112 (˚bhāvanāya when the training of thought is perfect) Vism 185 (˚bhāvana, adj. one of well-trained character) 267, 400 (+ bahulī-kata); Dhp-a i.122 (a˚); Thag-a 164 (indriya˚). See foll.

bhāvita + attan

Bhāvitatta2

(nt.) only neg. a˚ the fact of not developing or cultivating SN iii.153 SN iii.475; Pv ii.966.

abstr. fr. bhāvita = *bhāvitattvaṃ

Bhāvin

(adj.) “having a being,” going to be, as-˚ in avassa˚; sure to come to pass, inevitable Ja i.19 ■ f. bhāvinī future Vv-a 314 (or is it bhāvanīya? cp. v.l. S bhāvaniyā).

fr. bhāva, Epic Sk. bhāvin “imminent”

Bhāveti

to beget, produce, increase, cultivate, develop (by means of thought meditation), The Buddhist equivalent for mind-work as creative in idea, MN i.293; cp. B.Psy p. 132 ■ DN ii.79; MN ii.11 (cattāro sammappadhāne & iddhipāde); SN i.188 (cittaṃ ekaggaṃ), Thag 83, Thag 166 (ppr. bhāvayanto); Snp 341 (cittaṃ ekaggaṃ), 507 (ppr. bhāvayaṃ), 558 (grd. bhāvetabba), 1130 (ppr. bhāvento = āsevanto bahulī-karonto Nd ii.476); Dhp 87, Dhp 350, Dhp 370; Ja i.264 (mettaṃ), 415, ii.22 Nd ii.s. v. kāmaguṇā (p. 121) (where grd. in sequence “sevitabba, bhajitabba, bhāvetabba, bahulī-kātabba”) Pp 15, Dhp-a iii.171; Sdhp 48, Sdhp 495 ■ Pass. ppr bhāviyamāna AN ii.140; Kp-a 148 ■ pp. bhāvita.

Caus. of bhū, bhavati

Bhāsa

-sakuṇa a bird of prey, a vulture [Abhp. 645, 1049]; as one of the lucky omens enumd (under the so-called mangala-kathā) at Kp-a 118 (with v.l. SS. cāta˚ & vāca˚, BB cāba˚) = Nd;1 87 (on Snp 790) (T. reads vāta˚; v.l. SS vāpa˚, BB chapa˚).

cp. Epic Sk. bhāsa

Bhāsaka

(adj.) (-˚) speaking DN-a i.52 (avaṇṇa˚; uttering words of blame).

fr. bhāṣ

Bhāsati1

to speak, to say, to speak to, to call MN i.227, Snp 158 Snp 562, Snp 722; Dhp 1, Dhp 246, Dhp 258; also bhāsate Snp 452 ■ Pot bhāseyya Vin ii.189; Snp 451, Snp 930; Snp-a 468 (for udīraye Dhp 408); bhāse Dhp 102; Snp 400; & bhāsaye AN ii.51; Ja v.509 (with gloss katheyya for joteyya = bhāseyya)-Aor. abhāsi Vin iv.54; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 17, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 69; Pv-a 1st sg also abhāsissaṃ (Cond.) Pv i.68 (= abhāsiṃ Pv-a 34) imper. pres. bhāsa Snp 346; ppr. bhāsamāne AN ii.51; Ja v.509; Snp 426; Dhp 19; Ja iv.281 (perhaps better with v.l. as hasamāna); v.63; & bhāsanto Snp 543 ■ grd bhāsitabba AN iv.115; Vism 127 ■ Med. ind. pres 2nd sg. bhāsase Vv 342; imper. pres. 2nd sg. bhāsassu MN ii.199 ■ An apparent ger. form abhāsiya Iti 59, Iti 60 (micchā vācaṃ abhāsiya) is problematic. It may be an old misspelling for ca bhāsiya, as a positive form is required by the sense. The vv.ll. however do not suggest anything else but abhāsiya; the editor of It suggests pa˚ ■ Cp. anu, o˚, samanu˚.

bhāṣ; Dhtp 317: vacane; Dhtm 467; vācāya

Bhāsati2

to shine, shine forth, fill with splendour Snp 719 (2nd sg. fut. bhāsihi = bhāsissasi pakāsessasi Snp-a 499). Usually with prep prefix pa˚; (so read at Pv i.109 for ca bh.). Cp. o˚, vi˚.

bhās Dhtm 467: dittiyaṃ

Bhāsana

(nt.) speaking, speech Dhtm 162; Sdhp 68.

fr. bhāṣ

Bhāsā

(f.) speech, language, esp. vernacular, dialect Ja iv.279 (manussa˚ human speech) 392 (caṇḍāla˚); Kp-a 101 (saka-saka˚-anurūpa); Snp-a 397 (Milakkha˚); DN-a i.176 (Kirātā-Yavanâdi-Millakkhānaṃ bhāsā); MN-a i.1 (Sīhaḷa˚); Vb-a 388 (18 dialects of which 5 are mentioned; besides the Māgadhabhāsā).

cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣā

Bhāsita

spoken, said, uttered AN v.194; Mil 28; Dhp-a iv.93 ■ (nt.) speech, word Dhp 363; MN i.432. Usually as su˚ & dub˚; (both adj. & nt.) well & badly spoken, or good & bad speech Vin i.172; MN ii.250; AN i.102; AN ii.51 (su˚; read bhāsita for bāsita) vi.226; Snp 252, Snp 451, Snp 657; Ja iv.247, Ja iv.281 (su˚, well spoken or good words); Pv ii.620 (su˚); Pv-a 83 (dub˚).

pp. of bhāsati1

Bhāsitar

one who speaks, utters; a speaker SN i.156; Pp 56; Snp-a 549.

n. ag. fr. bhāṣ

Bhāsin

(adj.) (-˚) speaking AN i.102 (dubbhāsita-bhāsin).

cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣin

Bhāsura

(adj.) bright, shining, resplendent Thag-a 139, Thag-a 212; Vv-a 12.

cp. Epic Sk. bhāsura fr. bhas

Bhiṃsa

(adj.) terrible; only in cpd. ˚rūpa (nt. & adj.) an awful sight; (of) terrific appearance, terrible, awful Ja iii.242, Ja iii.339; Ja iv.271, Ja iv.494. Bhimsana & ka;

= Vedic bhīṣma, of which there are 4 P. forms, viz. the metathetic bhiṃsa, the shortened bhisma, the lengthened bhesma, and the contracted bhīsa (see bhīsana). Cp. also Sk ■ P. bhīma; all of bhī

Bhiṃsana & ˚ka

(adj.) horrible, dreadful, awe-inspiring, causing fear. (a) bhiṃsanaka (usually combd with lomahaṃsa DN ii.106 = AN iv.311; DN ii.157; Vin iii.8; Pv-a 22 Thag-a 242 (˚sabhāva = bhīmarūpa); Ja v.43 ■ (b) bhiṃsana Pv iv.35 (+ lomahaṃsa).

the form with ˚ka is the canonic form, whereas bhiṃsana is younger. See bhiṃsa on connections

Bhiṃsā

(f.) terror, fright; mahā-bhiṃsa (adj.) inspiring great terror DN ii.259. Cp. bhismā.

fr. bhiṃsa

Bhiṃsikā

(f.) frightful thing, terror, terrifying omen Mvu 12, Mvu 12 (vividhā bhiṃsikā kari he brought divers terrors to pass).

fr. bhiṃsa

Bhikkhaka

a beggar, mendicant SN i.182 (bh. brāhmaṇa) Ja vi.59 (v.l. BB. ˚uka); Vb-a 327.

fr. bhikkhu, Cp. Epic Sk. bhikṣuka & f. bhikṣukī

Bhikkhati

to beg alms, to beg, to ask for SN i.176, SN i.182 (so read for T. bhikkhavo); Dhp 266 Vb-a 327 ■ ppr. med. bhikkhamāna Thig 123.

cp. Vedic bhikṣate, old desid. to bhaj; def. Dhtp 13 “yācane”

Bhikkhā

(f.) begged food, alms, alms-begging; food Vin iv.94; Cp i.14; Vv 704 (ekāhā bh. food for one day) Mil 16; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 131 (kaṭacchu˚); bhikkhāya carati to go out begging food [cp. Sk. bhaikṣaṃ carati] Ja iii.82 Ja v.75; Pv-a 51 & passim ■; subhikkha (nt.) abundance of food DN i.11. dubbhikkha (nt.) (& ˚ā f.) scantiness of alms, famine, scarcity of food, adj. famine-stricken (cp. Sk. durbhikṣaṃ) Vin ii.175; Vin iii.87 (adj.); iv.23 (adj.); SN iv.323, SN iv.324 (dvīhitikaṃ); AN i.160; AN iii.41; Ja ii.149, Ja ii.367; Ja v.193; Ja vi.487; Cp i.33 (adj.); Vism 415 (˚pīḷita), 512 (f. in simile); Kp-a 218; Dhp-a i.169 Dhp-a ii.153 (f.); iii.437 (˚bhaya).

-āhāra food received by a mendicant Ja i.237 (= bhikkhu-āhāra?). -cariyā going about for alms, begging round Snp 700; Pv-a 146. -cāra = ˚cariyā Mhbv 28 -paññatti declaration of alms, announcement that food is to be given to the Sangha, a dedication of food Vin i.309.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaikṣa of; bhikṣ, adj. & nt.

Bhikkhu

an almsman, a mendicant, a Buddhist monk or priest, a bhikkhu. nom. sg. bhikkhu freq. passim; Vin iii.40 (vuḍḍhapabbajita); AN i.78 (thera bh., an elder bh.; and nava bh. a young bh.); iii.299 (id.); iv.25 (id.); Snp 276, Snp 360 Snp 411 sq., 915 sq., 1041, 1104; Dhp 31, Dhp 266 sq., 364 sq. 378; Vv 801; acc. bhikkhuṃ Vin iii.174; Dhp 362,; bhikkhunaṃ Snp 87, Snp 88, Snp 513; gen. dat. bhikkhuno AN i.274; Snp 221, Snp 810, Snp 961; Dhp 373; Pv i.1010; & bhikkhussa AN i.230; Vin iii.175; instr. bhikkhunā Snp 389 pl. nom. bhikkhū Vin ii.150; Vin iii.175; DN iii.123; Vism 152 (in sim.); Vb-a 305 (compared with amaccaputtā) & bhikkhavo Snp 384, Snp 573; Dhp 243, Dhp 283; acc bhikkhu Snp p.78; MN i.84; Vv 2210; & bhikkhavo Snp 384, Snp 573; gen. dat. bhikkhūnaṃ Vin iii.285; DN iii.264; Snp 1015; Pv ii.17; & bhikkhunaṃ SN i.190; Thag 1231 instr. bhikkhūhi Vin iii.175; loc. bhikkhūsu AN iv.25 & bhikkhusu Thag 241, Thag 1207; Dhp 73; voc. bhikkhave (a Māgadhī form of nom. bhikkhavaḥ) Vin iii.175; Snp p.78; Vv-a 127; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 166; & bhikkhavo Snp 280 Snp 385.

There are several allegorical etymologies (definitions of the word bhikkhu, which occur frequently in the commentaries. All are fanciful interpretations of the idea of what a bhikkhu is or should be, and these qualities were sought and found in the word itself Thus we mention here the foll. (a) bhikkhu = bhinnakilesa (“one who has broken the stains” i.e. of bad character) Vb-a 328; Vv-a 29, Vv-a 114, Vv-a 310; Pv-a 51. (b) Another more explicit expln is “sattannaṃ dhammānaṃ bhinnattā bhikkhu” (because of the breaking or destroying of 7 things, viz. the 7 bad qualities leading to rebirth, consisting of sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā sīlabbata-parāmāsa, rāga, dosa, moha, māna) This def. at Nd i.70 = Nd ii.477a ■ (c) Whereas in a & b the first syllable; bhi(-kkhu) is referred to bhid, in this def. it is referred to bhī (to fear), with the further reference of (bh-) ikkh(u) to īkṣ (to see) and bhikkhu defined as “saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhati ti bh.” Vism 3, Vism 16 (saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhaṇatāya vā bhinna-paṭa-dharaditāya vā) ■ A very comprehensive def. of the term is found at Vb 245–⁠246, where bhikkhu-ship is established on the ground of 18 qualities (beginning with samaññāya bhikkhu, paṭiññāya bh., bhikkhatī ti bh., bhikkhako ti bh., bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagato ti bh., bhinna-paṭa-dharo ti bh., bhindati pāpake dhamme ti bh., bhinnattā pāpakānaṃ dhammānan ti bh. etc. etc.) ■ This passage is expld in detail at Vb-a 327, Vb-a 328 ■ Two kinds of bhikkhus are distinguished at Pts i.176; Nd i.465 = Nd ii.477b, viz kalyāṇa[-ka-]puthujjana (a layman of good character and sekkha (one in training), for which latter the term paṭilīnacara (one who lives in elimination, i.e. in keeping away from the dangers of worldly life) is given at Nd i.130 (on Snp 810).

-gatika a person who associates with the bhikkhus (in the Vihāra) Vin i.148. -bhāva state of being a monk, monkhood, bhikkhuship DN i.176; Snp p.102 -saṅgha the community of bhikkhus, the Order of friars DN iii.208; Snp 403, Snp 1015; Snp p.101, Snp p.102; Mil 209; Pv-a 19 sq. & passim.;

cp. later Sk. bhikṣu, fr. bhikṣ

Bhikkhuka

(-˚) (adj.) belonging to a Buddhist mendicant, a bhikkhu-, a monk’s, or of monks, in sa˚; with monks, inhabited by bhikkhus Vin iv.307, Vin iv.308 opp. ; without bhikkhus, ibid.

fr. bhikkhu

Bhikkhunī

(f.) an almswoman, a female mendicant a Buddhist nun DN iii.123 sq., 148, 168 sq., 264; Vin iv.224 sq., 258 sq. (˚sangha); SN i.128; SN ii.215 sq. SN iv.159 sq.; AN i.88, AN i.113, AN i.279; AN ii.132 (˚parisā), 144 iii.109; iv.75; Mil 28; Vb-a 498 (dahara˚, story of) Vv-a 77.

fr. bhikkhu, cp. BSk. bhiksuṇī, but classical Sk. bhikṣukī

Bhiṅka

the young of an animal, esp. of an elephant, in its property of being dirty (cp. pigs) Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269 (bhinka-cchāpa) Ja v.418 (with ref. to young cats: “mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṃ vuccati taruṇā bhinka-cchāpa-maṇḍalaṃ, T. ˚cchāca˚, vv.ll. bhiñjaka-cchāca; taruṇa-bhiga-cchāpa; bhinga-cchāja).

cp. Vedic bhṛnga large bee

Bhiṅkāra1

(& ˚gāra) a water jar, a (nearly always golden) vase, ceremonial vessel (in donations) Vin i.39 (sovaṇṇa-maya); DN ii.172; AN iv.210 = AN iv.214 (T. ˚gāra, v.l. ˚kāra); Cp i.35; Ja i.85 Ja i.93; Ja ii.371; Ja iii.10 (suvaṇṇa˚); Dpvs xi.32; Pv-a 75 Kp-a 175 (suvaṇṇa˚; v.l. BB ˚gāra), Sdhp 513 (soṇṇa˚).

cp. late Sk. bhṛngāra

Bhiṅkāra2

cheers, cries of delight (?) Bv i.35 (+ sādhu kāra).

?

Bhiṅkāra3

a bird: Lanius caerulescens Ja v.416.

cp. Sk. bhṛnga bee, bhṛngaka & bhṛnga-rājā

Bhijjati

to be broken, to be destroyed; to break (instr.); pres. bhijjati Dhp 148, ppr. bhijjamāna: see phrase abhijjamāne udake under abhijj˚, with which cp. phrase abhejjantyā pathavyā Ja vi.508, which is difficult to explain (not breaking? for abhijjantī after abhejja & abhedi, and *abhijjanto for abhijjamāna, intrs.?). imper. bhijjatu Thag 312 ■ praet. 2;nd pl. bhijjittha Ja i.468 aor. abhedi Ud 93 (abhedi kāyo) ■ fut. bhijjhissati DN-a i.266; grd. bhijjitabba Ja iii.56; on grd. ˚bhijja see pabhindati; grd. bhejja in abhejja not to be broken (q.v.).

Pass. of bhindati, cp. Sk. bhidyate

Bhijjana

(nt.) breaking up, splitting, perishing; destruction Ja i.392; Ja v.284; Ja vi.11; Dhp-a i.257 (kaṇṇā bhijjan’ ākāra-pattā); Thag-a 43 (bhijjana-sabhāva of perishable nature; expln of bhidura Thig 35); Pv-a 41 (˚dhammā destructible, of sankhārā) ■ Der. abhijjanaka see sep.

fr. bhijjati

Bhitti

(f.) a wall Vin i.48; DN ii.85; SN ii.103; SN iv.183 SN v.218; Ja i.491; Vism 354 = Vb-a 58 (in comparison) Thag-a 258; Vv-a 42, Vv-a 160, Vv-a 271, Vv-a 302; Pv-a 24.

-khīla a pin (peg) in the wall Vin ii.114, Vin ii.152. -pāda the support or lower part of a wall Ja iv.318.

fr. bhid, cp. *Sk. bhitta fragment, & Class. Sk. bhitti wall

Bhittika

(adj.) having a wall or walls Ja iv.318 (naḷa ˚ā paṇṇasālā ); vi.10 (catu˚ with 4 walls).

fr. bhitti

Bhidura

(adj.) fragile, perishable, transitory Thig 35 (= bhijjana-sabhāva Thag-a 43).

fr. bhid

Bhindati

to split, break, sever destroy, ruin. In two bases: *bhid (with der. *bhed) *bhind; ■ (a) *bhid: aor. 3rd sg. abhida (= Sk abhidat) DN ii.107; Ja iii.29 (see also under abhida) abbhidā Ja i.247; Ja ii.163, Ja ii.164 ■ fut. bhecchati (Sk bhetsyati) AN i.8 ■ ger. bhetvā (Sk. bhittvā) Thag 753; Snp 62 (v.l. BB bhitvā) ■ grd. bhejja: only neg abhejja (q.v.). See also der. bheda, bhedana ■ pp bhinna & Pass.; bhijjati ■ (b) *bhind: pres. bhindati Nd i.503; Dhp-a i.125 (kathaṃ bh. to break a promise) Sdhp 47 ■ ppr. bhindanto Mvu 5, Mvu 185 ■ Pot bhinde Vism 36 (sīlasaṃvaran) ■ fut. bhindissati Vin ii.198 ■ aor. bhindi Ja i.467 (mitta-bhāvaṃ),; abhindi AN iv.312 (atta-sambhavaṃ) ■ ger. bhinditvā Ja i.425, Ja i.490; Pv-a 12; also in phrase indriyāni bhinditvā breaking in one’s senses, i.e. mastering, controlling them Ja ii.274; Ja iv.104, Ja iv.114, Ja iv.190 ■ Caus. I. bhedeti see vi˚. Caus. II. bhindāpeti to cause to be broken Ja i.290 (sīlaṃ); vi.345 (pokkharaṇiṃ) and bhedāpeti Vin iii.42 ■ See also bhindana.

bhid, Sk. bhinatti; cp. Lat. findo to split, Goth. beitan = Ger. beissen. Def. at Dhtp 381, Dhtp 405 by “vidāraṇe” i.e. splitting

Bhindana

(adj.) breaking up, brittle, falling into ruin SN i.131 (kāya).

fr. bhindati

Bhindivāla

a sort of spear Ja vi.105, Ja vi.248 Abhp 394.

Non-Aryan; Epic Sk. bhindipāla spear, but cp Prk bhiṇḍi-māla & ˚vāla, Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 248 see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 38

Bhinna

1. broken, broken up (lit. & fig.) Snp 770 (nāvā); Ja i.98 (abhinna magga an unbroken path); iii.167 (uda-kumbha); Pv-a 72 (˚sarīra-cchavi)

2. (fig.) split, fallen into dissension, not agreeing DN iii.117 = DN iii.210, DN iii.171 ■ Usually in cpds., & often to be translated by prep. “without,” e.g. bhinnahirottappa without shame ■ Cp. sam˚.

-ājīva without subsistence, one who has little means to live on, one who leads a poor mode of living Mil 229 sq. (opp. parisuddh’ ājīva); Vism 306 -nāva ship-wreeked Ja iv.159. -paṭa a torn cloth, in cpd. ˚dhara “wearing a patchwork cloth,” i.e. a bhikkhu (see also s. v. bhikkhu) Thag 1092. -plava ship-wrecked Ja iii.158. -manta disobeying (i.e. breaking) a counsel Ja vi.437. -sira with a broken head Ja iv.251. -sīmā (f.) one who has broken the bounds (of decency) Mil 122. -sīla one who has broken the norm of good conduct Vism 56. -hirottappa without shame, shameless Ja i.207.

pp. of bhindati

Bhinnatta

(nt.) state of being broken or destroyed, destruction AN iv.144.

fr. bhinna

Bhiyyo

(Bhīyo, Bhīyyo) [Vedic bhūyas, compar. form fr. bhū, functioning as compar. to bhūri. On relation Sk bhūyaḥ: P. bhiyyo cp. Sk. jugupsate: P. jigucchati 1. (adj.) more Snp 61 (dukkham ettha bhiyyo), 584 (id.) 306 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhatha); Dhp 313 (bh. rajan ākirate), 349 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhati).

2. (adv.) in a higher degree, more, repeatedly, further SN i.108 (appaṃ vā bhīyo less or more); Snp 434 (bh. cittaṃ pasīdati) Dhp 18 (bh. nandati = ativiya n. C.); Mil 40 ■ See also bhiyyoso, yebhuyyena.

-kamyatā desire for more, greed Vin ii.214. -bhāva getting more, increase, multiplication DN iii.221; Vin iii.45; SN v.9, SN v.198, SN v.244; AN i.98; AN v.70; Vb-a 289.

Bhiyyoso

(adv.) still more, more and more, only in cpd. ˚mattāya [cp. BSk. bhūyasyā mātrāya Mvu ii.345; Divy 263 & passim exceedingly, abundantly AN i.124 = Pp 30 (expld at PugA 212 by “bhiyyoso-mattāya uddhumāyana-bhāvo daṭṭhabbo”); Ja i.61; Pv-a 50.

abl. formation fr. bhiyyo 1

Bhisa

(nt.) the sprout (fr. the root) of a lotus the lotus fibres, lotus plant SN i.204; SN ii.268; Ja i.100 Ja iv.308.

-puppha the lotus flower Snp 2 (= paduma-puppha Snp-a 16). -muḷāla fibres & stalk of the lotus Ja v.39 Vism 361.

cp. Vedic bisa, with bh for b: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 40 1a

Bhisakka

a physician MN i.429; AN iii.238 AN iv.340; Iti 101; Mil 169, Mil 215, Mil 229, Mil 247 sq., 302; Vism 598 (in simile); DN-a i.67, DN-a i.255.

cp. Vedic bhiṣaj physician, P. bhesajja medicine & see Geiger,; P.Gr. § 631

Bhisi1

(f.) a bolster, cushion pad, roll Vin i.287 sq. (cīvara˚ a robe rolled up); ii.150 170; iii.90; iv.279. Five kinds are allowed in a Vihāra, viz. uṇṇa-bhisi, cola˚, vāka˚, tiṇu˚, paṇṇa˚, i.e. bolsters stuffed with wool, cotton-cloth, bark, grass or talipot leaves, Vin ii.150 = Vb-a 365 (tiṇa˚).

-bimbohana bolster & pillow Vin i.47; Vin ii.208; Dhp-a i.416; Vb-a 365.

cp. Epic Sk. bṛṣī & bṛsī, with bh for b, as in Prk. bhisī, cp. Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 209

Bhisi2

a raft Snp 21 ■ Andersen, Pali Reader, Glossary s. v. identifies it with bhisi1 and asks: “Could it also mean a sort of cushion, made of twisted grass used instead of a swimming girdle?”

etym.?

Bhisikā

(f.) a small bolster Vin ii.148 (vātapāna˚ a roll to keep out draughts); Kp-a 50 (tāpasa˚ v.l. Kk kapala-bhitti, see Appendix to Indexes on Sutta Nipāta & Pj.).;

fr. bhisi1

Bhismā

(f.) terror, fright DN ii.261 (˚kāya adj. terrific).

= bhiṃsā

Bhīta

frightened, terrified, afraid Dhp 310; Ja i.168 (niraya-bhaya˚); ii.110 (maraṇa-bhaya˚), 129 iv.141 (+ tasita); Pv-a 154, Pv-a 280 (+ tasita). Cp. sam˚.

pp. of bhāyati

Bhībhaccha

see bībhaccha.

Bhīma

(adj.) dreadful, horrible, cruel, awful Ja iv.26; Mil 275.

-kāya of horrible body, terrific Ja v.165. -rūpa of terrifying appearance Thig 353. -sena having a terrifying army Ja iv.26; Ja vi.201. Also Np. of one of the 5 sons of King Paṇḍu Ja v.426; Vism 233.

fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhīma

Bhīmala

(adj.) terrifying, horrible, awful Ja v.43 (T. bhīmūla, but read bhīmala; C. expls by bhiṃsanaka-mahāsadda).

fr. bhīma

Bhīrati

Pass. to bharati, only in cpd. ppr. anubhīramāna MN iii.123 (chatta: being brought up,or carried behind) Neumann, M. trsl.2iii.248 translates “über ihm schwebt,” & proposes reading (on p. 563); anu-hīramāna (fr. hṛ; ). This reading is to be preferred, & is also found at DN ii.15.

Bhīru

(adj. n.) 1. fearful, i.e. having fear, timid, afraid, shy, cowardly Sdhp 207 (dukkha˚); usually in neg. abhīru not afraid, without fear, combd with anutrāsin: see utrāsin.

2. fearful i.e. causing fear, awful, dreadful, terrible Pv ii.41 (˚dassana terrible to look at).

3. (m.) fear, cowardice Snp 437 (= utrāsa Snp-a 390).

-ttāṇa refuge for the fearful, adj. one who protects those who are in fear AN ii.174; Iti 25; Sdhp 300.

fr. bhī; cp. Vedic bhīru

Bhīruka

(adj.) afraid, shy, cowardly, shunning (-˚) Vism 7 (pāpa˚), 645 (jīvitu-kāma bhīruka-purisa).

fr. bhīru

Bhīsana

(adj.) = bhiṃsana (q.v.) Pv iv.35 (v.l. in Pv-a 251), expld by bhayajanana Pv-a 251, where C. reading also bhīsana.

Bhukka

(adj.) barking, n a barker, i.e. dog; only in redupl. intens. formation bho-bhu-kka (cp. E. bow-wow), lit. bhu-bhu-maker (: kka fr. kṛ; ?) Ja vi.354 (C.: bhun-karaṇa). See also bhussati.

fr. onomat. root *bhukk, dialectical, cp. Prk. bhukkai to bark, bhukkiya barking, bhukkana dog (Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 209); the root bhukk (bukk) is given by Hemacandra 4, 98 in meaning “garjati (see P. gajjati), cp. also Prk. bukkaṇa crow

Bhuṅkaraṇa

(adj.-n..) making “bhu,” i.e. bow-wow, barking Ja vi.355 (˚sunakha) v.l. bhu-bhukka-sadda-karaṇa.

bhu + kṛ; see bhukka

Bhucca

(adj.) only in cpd. yathā-bhuccaṃ (nt. adv.) as it is, that which really is, really (= yathā bhūtaṃ) Thig 143. See under yathā.

ger. of bhū in composition, corresponding to *bhūtya → *bhutya, like pecca (*pretya) fr. pra + i In function equal to bhūta

Bhuja1

(m. & nt.) the arm Snp 48 (expld by Nd ii.478 as hattha, hand); 682 (pl. bhujāni); Ja v.91, Ja v.309; Ja vi.64 Bv i.36; Vv 6418.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhuja m. & bhujā; bhuj, bhujate to bend, lit. “the bender”; the root is expld by koṭilya (koṭilla) at Dhtp 470 (Dhtm 521). See also bhuja3. Idg. *bheṅg, fr. which also Lat. fugio to flee = Gr. φεύγω, Lat. fuga flight = Sk bhoga ring, Ohg. bouc; Goth. biugan to bend = Ger beugen & biegen; Ohg. bogo = E. bow. Semantically cp. Lat. lacertus the arm, i.e. the bend, fr. *leq to bend to which P. laguḷa a club (q.v. for etym.), with which cp. Lat. lacerta = lizard, similar in connotation to P bhujaga snake

Bhuja2

clean, pure, bright, beautiful Ja vi.88 (˚dassana beautiful to look at; C. explns by kalyāṇa dassana).

fr. bhuñjati2

Bhuja3

(adj.) bending, crooked, in bhuja-laṭṭhi betel-pepper tree Ja vi.456 (C.: bhujangalatā perhaps identical with bhujaka?), also in cpd bhuja-ga going crooked, i.e. snake Mil 420 (bhujaginda king of snakes, the cobra); Dāvs. 2, 17; also as bhujaṅga Dāvs 2, Dāvs 56, & in der.; bhujaṅga-latā “snakecreeper,” i.e. name of the betel-pepper Ja vi.457; and bhujaṅgama SN i.69 ■ Cp. bhogin2.

fr. bhuj to bend

Bhujaka

a fragrant tree growing (according to Dhpāla) only in the Gandhamādana grove of the Devaloka Vv 355; Vv-a 162.

fr. bhuj, as in bhuñjati2; or does it belong to bhuja3 and equal to bhuja-laṭṭhi?

Bhujissa

1. (n. m.) a freed slave freeman; a servant as distinguished from a slave Vin i.93; Ja ii.313; Pv-a 112bhujissaṃ karoti to grant freedom to a slave Ja v.313; Ja vi.389, Ja vi.546; Dhp-a i.19 Thag-a 200 ■ f. bhujissā Vin ii.271 (in same sequence as bhujissa at Vin i.93).

2. (adj.) freeing fr. slavery productive of freedom DN ii.80 (cp. Dial. ii.80); iii.245; SN ii.70; SN iv.272; AN iii.36, AN iii.132, AN iii.213; Vism 222 (with exegesis). Cp. bhoja & bhojaka.;

-bhāva state of being freed fr. slavery, freedom Thag-a 200.

cp. BSk. bhujiṣya Divy 302, according to Mhvyut § 84 meaning “clean”; thus fr. bhuj (see bhuñjati2) to purify, sort out

Bhuñjaka

(adj.) eating, one who eats or enjoys, in ˚sammuti definition of “eater,” speaking of an eater, declaration or statement of eating Vb-a 164.

fr. bhuñjati1

Bhuñjati1 [bhuj

to Lat. fruor, frūx = E. fruit, frugal etc.; Goth. brūkjan = As. brūkan = Ger. brauchen. The Dhtp 379 (& Dhtm 613) expl;ns bhuj by “pālan ajjhohāresu,” i.e. eating & drinking for the purpose of living] to eat (in general), to enjoy, make use of, take advantage of, use Snp 102, Snp 240, Snp 259, Snp 619; Dhp 324 Pp 55. Pot. bhuñjeyya Snp 400; Dhp 308, Dhp 2nd pl bhuñjetha Dhp 70; Mvu 25, Mvu 113. Imper. 2nd med bhuñjassa SN v.53; SN v.3rd act. bhuñjatu SN i.141; Snp 479 bhuñjassu Snp 421; ppr. bhuñjanto Ja iii.277: bhuñjamāna Thag 12; Snp 240. Fut. 1st sg. bhokkhaṃ [Sk bhoksyāmi] Ja iv.117. Aor. 1st sg. bhuñjiṃ Miln 47 3rd sg. bhuñji Ja iv.370; Ja iv.3rd pl. abhuñjiṃsu Thag 922 abhuñjisuṃ Mvu 7, Mvu 25. Ger. bhutvā Ja iii.53 (= bhuñjitvā C.); Dhp-a i.182; bhutvāna Snp 128. Grd bhuñjitabba Mvu 5, Mvu 127. Inf. bhottuñ: see ava˚. pp. bhutta ■ Caus. bhojeti (q.v.). Cp. bhoga bhojana, bhojanīya, bhojja; also Desid. pp. bubbhukkhita; & ābhuñjati.;

Bhuñjati2 [bhuj

to purify, cleanse, sift, not given in this meaning by the Dhātupāṭha. Cp. Av. buxti purification buj to clean, also Lat. fungor (to get through or rid of, cp. E. function), Goth. us-baugjan to sweep; P paribhuñjati 2, paribhojaniya & vinibbhujati. See Kern,; Toev. p. 104, s. v. bhujissa] to clean, purify cleanse: see bhuja2 and bhujissa, also bhoja & bhojaka.;

Bhuñjana

(nt.) [fr. bhuñjati1] taking food, act of eating, feasting Ja iv.371 (˚kāraṇa); Pv-a 184.

-kāla meal-time Dhp-a i.346.

Bhutta

1. (Pass.) eaten, being eaten Snp p.15; Dhp 308; impers. eating Vin iv.82 (bhuttaṃ hoti). Also ˚geha eating house Ja v.290, and in phrase yathā-bhuttaṃ bhuñjatha “eat according to eating,” i.e. as ought to be eaten, eating in moderation DN ii.173 (where Rh. D., Dial. ii.203, trsls “ye shall eat as ye have eaten”) = iii.62, 63 (where Rh. D., Dial. iii.64 trsls “enjoy your possessions as you have been wont to do”; see note ibid.). We should favour a translation in the first sense ■ dubbhuttaṃ, indigestible

2. (Med. cp. bhuttar) having eaten, one who has eaten Mil 370 (sace bhutto bhaveyy’ âhaṃ); also in phrase bhutta-pātar-āsa after having eaten breakfast Ja ii.273; Dhp-a iv.226.

-āvasesa the remainder of a meal Vin ii.216.

pp. of bhuñjati1; Sk. bhukta

Bhuttar

one who eats or has eaten, or enjoys (cp. bhutta 2) Ja v.465 (ahaṃ bhuttā bhakkhaṃ ras’ uttamaṃ).

n. ag. fr. bhuj, cp. Sk. bhoktṛ already Vedic & Epic

Bhuttavant

(adj.) having eaten, one who has eaten Ja v.170 (= kata-bhatta-kicca); Vv-a 244.

bhutta + vant

Bhuttāvin

(adj.) having eaten, one who has had a meal nom. sg. bhuttāvī Vin iv.82; Mil 15 (+ onīta-pattapāṇi); Pv-a 23 (+ pavārita); Snp-a 58; instr. bhuttāvinā Vin iv.82; gen. dat. bhuttavissa DN ii.195. acc. bhuttāviṃ Vin i.213; Snp p.111 (+ onīta-pattapāṇiṃ) Ja v.170; nom. pl. bhuttāvī Vin iv.81, & bhuttāvino SN iv.289.

bhutta + suffix ˚āvin, corresponding to Vedic ˚āyin

Bhumma

(adj.-n.) 1. belonging to the earth, earthly, terrestrial; nt. soil, ground, floor Snp 222 (bhūtāni bhummāni earthly creatures contrasted with creatures in the air, antalikkhe), 236 (id.); Sdhp 420 (sabba-bhummā khattiyā). pl. bhummā the earthly ones, i.e. the gods inhabiting the earth, esp tree gods (Yakkhas) Vv 842 (= bhumma-deva Vv-a 334)-nt. ground: Pv ii.102 (yāva bhummā down to the ground); v.l. BB bhūm(i).

2. the locative case Kp-a 106, Kp-a 111, Kp-a 224; Snp-a 140, Snp-a 210, Snp-a 321, Snp-a 433; Pv-a 33.

-attharaṇa “earth-spread,” a ground covering, mat carpet Vin i.48; Vin ii.208; Vin iv.279. -antara “earth-occasion,” i.e. (1) sphere of the earth, plane of existence Mil 163; Dhs-a 296 ■ (2) in ˚pariccheda discussion concerning the earth, i.e. cosmogony Dhs-a 3. -antalikkha earthly and celestial, over earth & sky (of portents) Mil 178. The form would correspond to Sk. *bhaum-āntarīkṣa.; -jāla “terrestrial net (of insight) gift of clear sight extending over the globe (perhaps to find hidden treasures) Snp-a 353 (term of a vijjā, science or magic art). Cp. bhūrikamma bhūrivijjā ■; ṭṭha (a) put into the earth, being in the earth, found on or in the earth, earthly Vin iii.47 (b) standing on the earth Dhp 28 ■ (c) resting on the earth Mil 181. Also as ˚ka living on earth, earthly (of gods) Ja iii.87. -deva a terrestrial deva or fairy AN iv.118; Pts ii.149; Vb-a 12; Dhp-a i.156; Vv-a 334; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 43, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 215, Pv-a 277. -devatā = ˚deva Ja iv.287 (= yakkha); Kp-a 120.

fr. bhūmi, Vedic bhūmya

Bhummi1

(f.) that which belongs to the ground, i.e. a plane (of existence), soil, stage (as t.t. in philosophy) Dhs-a 277 (˚y-āpatti), 339 (id.), 985 (dukkha˚), 1368, 1374 sq. (see Dhs trsl.2 231).

fr. bhumma

Bhummi2

a voc. of friendly address “my (dear) man” (lit. terrestrial) Vin ii.304 (= piyavacanaṃ Bdhgh).

old voc. of bhumma

Bhuyya

the regular P. representative of Sk. bhūyas (compar.); for which usually bhiyya (q.v.). Only in cpd. yebhuyyena (q.v.).

Bhuvi

see bhū.

Bhusa1

chaff, husks AN i.241 (˚āgāra chaff-house); Dhp 252 (opuṇāti bhusaṃ to sift husks); Ud 78; Pv iii.41; iii.107; Vv-a 47 (tiṇa litter).

cp. Vedic busa (nt.) & buśa (m.)

Bhusa2

(adj.) strong, mighty, great Dhp 339 (taṇhā = balavā Dhp-a iv.48); Ja v.361 (daṇḍa daḷha, balavā C.) ■ nt. bhusaṃ (adv.) much, exceedingly, greatly, vehemently. In cpds. bhusaṃ˚ & bhusa˚-S i.69; Ja iii.441; Ja iv.11; Ja v.203 (bhusa-dassaneyya) vi.192; Vv 69; Pv 338; iv.77; Mil 346; Snp-a 107 (“verbum intensivum”); Sdhp 289.

cp. Vedic bhṛśa

Bhusati, Bhussati

to bark DN-a i.317 (bhusati vv.ll. bhussati & bhūsati); Dhp-a i.171, Dhp-a i.172 ■ See also bhasati & bhukka; -pp. bhusita.

perhaps a legitimate form for Sk. bhaṣate (see P. bhasati), with u for a, so that the suggested correction of bhusati to bhasati (see under bhasati) is unfounded

Bhusikā

(f.) chaff AN i.242; Vin ii.181.

fr. bhusa1

Bhusita

barking Ja iv.182 (˚sadda, barking, noise). See also bhasita.

pp. of bhusati

Bhuseti

to make strong, to cause to grow (?) Ja v.218 (C. explns by “bhusaṃ karoti, vaḍḍheti” p. 224).

Denom. fr. bhusa2 = *bhṛśayati; but not certain, may have to be read bhūseti, to endeavour, cp. Sk bhūṣati

Bhū1

(adj.) being, (n.) creature, living being in pāṇa-bhū a living being (a breathing being) Ja v.79 (= pāṇa-bhūta C.).

fr. bhū

Bhū2

(f.) the earth; loc. bhuvi according to Kaccāyana; otherwise bhuvi is aor. 3rd sg. of bhū: see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 516; Geiger, Pali Gr. § 865.

fr. bhū, otherwise bhūmi

Bhūkuṭi

(f.) frown, anger, superciliousness MN i.125 (v.l. bhakuṭi & bhā˚); Ja v.296.

a different spelling of bhakuṭi, q.v ■ Cp. Sk. bhṛkuti & bhrukuṭi

Bhūja

the Bhūrja tree, i.e. a kind of willow Ja v.195, Ja v.405 (in both places = ābhujī), 420.

cp. late Sk. bhūrja, with which related Lat. fraxinus ash, Ags. beorc = E. birch, Ger. birke

Bhūta

grown, become; born, produced; nature as the result of becoming. The (exegetical) definition by Bdhgh of the word bhūta is interesting. He (at MN-a i.31) distinguishes the foll. 7 meanings of the term: (1) animate Nature as principle or the vital aggregates (the 5 Khandhas), with ref. MN i.260; (2) ghosts (amanussā) Snp 222; (3) inanimate Nature as principle, or the Elements (the 4 dhātus SN iii.101 (mahābhūtā); (4) all that exists, physical existence in general (vijjamānaṃ) Vin iv.25 (bhūtaṃ) (5) what we should call a simple predicative use, is exemplified by a typical dogmatic example, viz. “kālaghaso bhūto,” where bhūta is given as meaning khīṇāsava (Arahant) Ja ii.260; (6) all beings or specified existence, animal kingdom (sattā) DN ii.157; (7) the vegetable kingdom, plants, vegetation (rukkh’ ādayo Vin iv.34 (as bhūta-gāma) ■ Meanings: 1. bhūtā bhūtāni; (pl.) beings, living beings, animate Nature Snp 35 (expld at Nd ii.479 as 2 kinds, viz. tasā & thāvarā movable & immovable; SN ii.47 (K.S. ii.36) mind and body as come-to-be; Dhp 131 (bhūtāni), 405; MN i.2 sq (paṭhavī, āpo etc., bhūtā, devā, Pajāpatī etc.), 4; MN-a i.32. The pl. nt. bhūtāni is used as pl. to meaning 2; viz. inanimate Nature, elements, usually enumd under term mahā- bhūtāni.

2. (nt.) nature, creation world MN i.2 (bhūte bhūtato sañjānāti recognises the beings from nature, i.e. from the fact of being nature) Dhs-a 312 (˚pasāda-lakkhaṇa, see Expos. 409). See cpds. ˚gāma, ˚pubba (?).

3. (nt. adj.) that which is i.e. natural, genuine, true; nt. truth; neg. abhūta falsehood, lie Snp 397; Pv-a 34. See cpds. ˚bhāva ˚vacana, ˚vāda.

4. a supernatural being, ghost demon, Yakkha; pl. bhūtā guardian genii (of a city Ja iv.245. See cpds. ˚vijja, ˚vejja.

5. (-˚) pp. in predicative use (cp. on this meaning Bdhgh’s meaning No. 5, above): (a) what has been or happened; viz mātu-bhūtā having been his mother Pv-a 78; abhūtapubbaṃ bhūtaṃ what has never happened before happened (now) DN-a i.43 (in expln of abbhuta) ■ (b having become such & such, being like, acting as, being quâsi (as it were), consisting of, e.g. andha˚ blind, as it were Ja vi.139; aru˚ consisting of wounds Dhp-a iii.109; udapāna˚ being a well, a well so to speak Pv-a 78; opāna˚ acting as a spring AN iv.185; hetu as reason, being the reason Pv-a 58; cp. cakkhu˚ having become an eye of wisdom. Sometimes bhūta in this use hardly needs to be translated at all.

-kāya body of truth Dhp-a i.11 ■ gāma vegetation, as trees, plants, grass, etc. Under bhūtagāma Bdhgh understands the 5 bīja-jātāni (5 groups of plants springing from a germinative power: see bīja), viz mūla-bījaṃ, khandha˚, phala˚, agga˚, bīja˚. Thus in C. on Vin iv.34 (the so-called bhūtagāma-sikkhāpada quoted at Dhp-a iii.302 & Snp-a 3); cp. MN iii.34; Ja v.46; Mil 3, Mil 244. -gāha possession by a demon Mil 168 (cp. Divy 235). -ṭṭhāna place of a ghost Kp-a 170 -pati (a) lord of beings Ja v.113 (of Inda); vi.362 (id.) Vv 641 (id.). (b) lord of ghosts, or Yakkhas Ja vi.269 (of Kuvera). -pubba (a) as adj. (-˚) having formerly been so & so, as mātā bhūtapubbo satto, pitā etc., in untraced quotation at Vism 305; also at Snp-a 359 (Bhagavā kuṇāla-rājā bhūtapubbo) ■ (b) as adv (bhūtapubbaṃ) meaning: before all happening, before creation, at a very remote stage of the world, in old times, formerly Vin ii.201; DN i.92; DN ii.167, DN ii.285, DN ii.337; MN i.253; MN iii.176; SN i.216, SN i.222, SN i.227; SN iv.201; SN v.447; AN iv.136 = Vism 237; AN iv.432; Ja i.394; Dhp-a i.56 -bhavya past and future DN i.18. -bhāva truthful character, neg. a˚ Pv-a 14. -vacana statement of reality or of the truth Snp-a 336. -vādin truthful speaking the truth MN i.180; DN iii.175; Pp 58; untruthful Dhp 306; Ja ii.416. -vikāra a natural blemish fault of growth, deformity Snp-a 189 (opp. nibbikāra) -vijjā knowledge of demons, exorcism DN i.9; Dhp i.93 cp. Dial. i.17). -vejja a healer of harm caused by demons, an exorcist Vin iv.84; Ja ii.215; Ja iii.511; Mil 23.

pp. of bhavati, Vedic etc. bhūta

Bhūtatta

(nt.) the fact of having grown, become or being created (i.e. being creatures or part of creation) Vism 310 (in def. of bhūtā); MN-a i.32 (id.).

abstr. fr. bhūta

Bhūtanaka

a fragrant grass; Andropogon schoenanthus Ja vi.36 (= phanijjaka); Vism 543 (so v.l. for T. bhūtinaka).

cp. *Sk. bhūtṛna

Bhūtika

(adj.) (-˚) in cpd. cātummahā˚ belongs to the whole expression, viz. composed of the 4 great elements MN i.515.

Bhūnaha

a destroyer of beings Snp 664 (voc. bhūnahu, expld by Snp-a 479 as “bhūti-hanaka vuddhi-nāsaka”; vv.ll. bhūnahaṭa bhūnahoṭa, bhūhata, all showing the difficulty of the archaic word); Ja v.266 (pl. bhūnahuno, expld by C 272 as “isīnaṃ ativattāro attano vaḍḍhiyā hatattā bh.”). Cp. MN i.502 (“puritanical” suggested by Lord Chalmers).

difficult to expln; is it an old misspelling for bhūta + gha? The latter of han ?

Bhūma

(-˚) 1. (lit.) ground, country, district SN iii.5 (pacchā˚ the western district).

2. (fig. ground, reason for, occasion; stage, step Snp 896 (avivāda˚ ground of harmony; according to Snp-a 557 Ep. of Nibbāna).

= bhūmi

Bhūmaka

(& ˚ika) (adj.) (only-˚) 1. having floors or stories (of buildings) as dve˚ pāsāda Dhp-a i.414; pañca˚; pāsāda a palace with 5 stories Ja i.58, Ja i.89; satta˚; with 7 stories (pāsāda) Dhp-a ii.1, Dhp-a ii.260. The form ˚ika at Dhp-a i.182 (dve˚ geha). 2. belonging to a place or district, as jāti˚ from the land of (their) birth MN i.147; pacchā˚; from the western country SN iv.312 (brāhmaṇā).

3. being on a certain plane or in a certain state, as paritta˚ & mahā˚; Vb 340 te˚; in 3 planes Snp-a 4 (of the 5 Khandhas), 510 (˚vaṭṭa); Dhp-a i.36 (kusala), 305 (˚vaṭṭa); iv.69 (tebhūmaka-vaṭṭa-sankhātaṃ Māra-bandhanaṃ), 72 (dhammā) catu˚; in 4 planes Dhs-a 296 (kusala); Dhp-a i.35 (citta) The form ˚ika at Dhp-a i.288 (with ref. to citta).

from bhūma, or bhūmi

Bhūmi

(f.) [cp. Vedic bhūmi, Av. būmiš soil, ground, to bhū, as in bhavati, cp. Gr. φύσις etc. See bhavati 1. (lit.) ground, soil, earth Vin ii.175; Snp 418 (yāna carriage road); Pv i.1014≈; Snp-a 353 (heṭṭhā-bhūmiyaṃ under the earth); Dhp-a i.414 (id., opp. upari-bhūmiyaṃ)

2. place, quarter, district, region MN i.145 (jāti district of one’s birth); Snp 830 (vighāta˚); Nd ii.475 (danta˚); Dhp-a i.213 (āpāna˚); Pv-a 80 (susāna˚)- uyyāna˚; garden (-place or locality) Vv 6419; Pv ii.129 Ja i.58.

3. (fig.) ground, plane, stage, level; state of consciousness, Vin. i.17; Vb 322 sq.; Vism 126, Vism 442 (with ref. to the 4 Paṭisambhidā, as sekha-bhūmi asekha-bhūmi), 517 (paññā˚-niddesa). usually -˚ indriya˚ Ne 192; dassana˚ plane of insight Ne 8, Ne 14 Ne 50; sukha˚ ground for happiness Dhs 984 (cp Dhs-a 214) ■ bhūmi-ttaya the 3 stages, viz kāmâvacara, rūpâvacara, lokuttara Vism 493 ■ pl bhūmiyo Pts ii.205 = Vism 384 (appld to the 4 jhānas) purisa˚ (aṭṭha p. bh. eight stages of the individual viz. manda-bhūmi, khiḍḍā˚, vīmaṃsana˚, ujugata˚ sekha˚, samaṇa˚, jina˚, panna˚, or as trsld by Rh. D in Dial. i.72, under “eight stages of a prophet’s existence”; babyhood, playtime, trial time, erect time learning time, ascetic time, prophet time & prostrate time. Cp. the 10 decades of man’s life, as given by Bdhgh at Vism 619) ■ Bdhgh, when defining the 2 meanings of bhūmi as “mahā-paṭhavī” and as “cittuppāda” (rise of thought) had in view the distinction between its literal & figurative meaning. But this def (at Dhs-a 214) is vague & only popular ■ An old loc of bhūmi is; bhumyā, e.g. Ja i.507; Ja v.84. Another form of bhūmi at end of cpds. is bhūma (q.v.).

-kampa shaking of the ground, earthquake Mil 178 -gata “gone into the soil,” i.e. hiding, stored away Ja i.375. -ghana thick soil Snp-a 149, cp. paṭhavi-ghana ibid. 146. -tala ground (-surface) Pv-a 186. -padesa place or region upon the earth Ja vi.95. -pappaṭaka outgrowths in the soil DN iii.87 = Vism 418. -pothana beating the ground Dhp-a i.171. -bhāga division of the earth, district Ja i.109; Ja v.200; Vv-a 125; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 154 -laddh’ (uppanna) acquired on a certain stage of existence Snp-a 4. -saya lying or sleeping on the ground Dhp-a ii.61.

Bhūri1

(f.) the earth; given as name for the earth (paṭhavi) at Pts ii.197; see also def. at Dhs-a 147. Besides these only in 2 doubtful cpds., both resting on demonology, viz. bhūrikamma DN i.12, expld as “practices to be observed by one living in a bhūrighara or earth-house” (?) DN-a i.97, but cp. Vedic bhūri-karman “much effecting”; and bhūrivijjā DN i.9, expld as “knowledge of charms to be pronounced by one living in an earth-house” (?) DN-a i.93. See Dial. i.18, 25. The meaning of the terms is obscure there may have been (as Kern rightly suggests: see Toev. s. v.) quite a diff. popular practice behind them which was unknown to the later Commentator. Kern suggests that bhūri-vijjā might be a secret science to find gold (digging for it: science of hidden treasures) and ˚kamma might be “making gold” (alchemistic science). Perhaps the term bhumma-jāla is to be connected with these two.

cp. late Sk. bhūr

Bhūri2

(adj.) wide, extensive, much, abundant, Dhs-a 147 (in def. of the term bhūri1, i.e. earth); otherwise only in cpds.: ˚pañña (adj.) of extensive wisdom, very wise SN iv.205; Snp 346, Snp 792, Snp 1097 Snp 1143; Pv iii.55; Pts ii.197 (“paṭhavī-samāya vitthatāya vipulāya paññāya samannāgato ti bhūripañño, with other definitions); Nd i.95 (same expln as under Pts ii.197); Nd ii.415 C. (id.). ˚paññāṇa (adj.) same as ˚pañña Snp 1136 ≈ (cp. Nd ii.480). ˚medhasa (adj.) very intelligent SN i.42, SN i.174; SN iii.143; AN iv.449; Snp 1131, Snp 1136 Thag 1266; Pv iii.77.

cp. Vedic bhūri

Bhūrī

(f.) knowledge, understanding intelligence Dhp 282, quoted at Dhs-a 76 (expld as termed so because it is as widespread as the earth; Dhs 16; Dhp-a iii.421; same expln at Dhs-a 148) Ja vi.415.

is it original? Cp. BSk. bhūri in same sense at Lal. V. 444, 541; Mvu iii.332

Bhūsana

(nt.) ornament, decoration Vism 10 (yatino-sīla-bhūsana-bhūsitā contrasted to rājāno muttāmaṇi-vibhūsitā).

fr. bhūṣ

Bhūsā

(f.) ornament, decoration, only in cpd. bhūsa-(read bhūsā-)dassaneyya beautiful as an ornament Pv iii.32.

fr. bhūṣ

Bhūseti

to adorn, embellish, beautify. Only in pp. bhūsita adorned with (-˚) Pv ii.952, 127; iii.35; Ja vi.53. Cp. vi˚.

Caus. of bhūṣ, to be busy; in meaning “to adorn” etc. Expld at Dhtp. 315, 623 by “alaṅkāra”

Bheka

a frog Thag 310; Ja iii.430; Ja iv.247; Ja vi.208.

cp. Vedic bheka, onomat.

Bhecchati

is fut. of bhindati (q.v.).

Bhejja

(adj.) to be split, only in neg. form abhejja not to be split or sundered Snp 255; Ja i.263; Ja iii.318; Pp 30; Mil 160, Mil 199.

grd. of bhindati

Bhejjanaka

(adj.) breakable; like bhejja only in neg. form abhejjanaka indestructible Ja i.393.

fr. bhejja

Bheṇḍi

a kind of missile used as a weapon arrow Vin iii.77 (where enumd with asi, satti & laguḷa in expl;n of upanikkhipana).

perhaps identical with & only wrong spelling; for bheṇḍu = kaṇḍu2

Bheṇḍu

a ball, bead; also a ball-shaped ornament or turret, cupola Thag 164 (see kaṇḍu2) Ja i.386 (also ˚maya ball-shaped); iii.184 (v.l. geṇḍu).

with v.l. geṇḍu, of uncertain reading & meaning. Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 107 gives giṇḍu & remarks that this cannot be derived fr. kaṇḍuka (although; kaṇḍu may be considered as gloss of bheṇḍu at Thag 164: see kaṇḍu2), but belongs with Prk. geṇḍui play & P geṇḍuka and the originally Sk. words genduka, ginduka geṇḍu, geṇḍuka to a root; gid, giḍ, Prk. giṇḍai to play Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 90 says: “I am inclined to read geṇḍu in all cases & to compare it with geḍuka & geṇḍuka a ball”

Bheṇḍuka1

a ball for playing Ja iv.30, Ja iv.256; Ja v.196; Ja vi.471; Dhs-a 116 See also geṇḍuka.

in all probability misreading for geṇḍuka. The v.l. is found at all passages. Besides this occur the vv.ll. keṇḍuka (= kaṇḍuka?) & kuṇḍika

Bheṇḍuka2

a knob, cupola, round tower Ja i.2 (mahā-bh˚-pamāṇa).

fr. bheṇḍu, identical with bheṇḍuka1

Bhettar

a breaker, divider AN v.283.

n. ag. fr. bhid

Bheda

1. breaking, rending, breach, disunion, dissension Vism 64 sq. (contrasted with ānisaṃsa), 572 sq (with ref. to upādāna & bhava); Vb-a 185 (id.); Sdhp 66, Sdhp 457, Sdhp 463mithu˚; breaking of alliance DN ii.76; Ja iv.184; Kv 314vacī˚; breaking of [the rule as to speech Mil 231saṅgha˚; disunion in the Sangha Vin ii.203sīla˚; breach of morality Ja v.163 ■ abl bhedā after the destruction or dissolution in phrase kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā, i.e. after the breaking up of the body & after death: see kāya i.e. & cp. DN iii.52, DN iii.146 sq., 258; Dhp 140; Pp 51.

2. (-˚) sort kind, as adj. consisting of, like Ja ii.438; Ja vi.3 (kaṭuk ādi˚); Dhp-a iii.14 (kāya-sucarit’-ādi˚-bhadra-kammāni) Snp-a 290 (Avīci-ādi-˚ niraya).

-kara causing division or dissension Vin ii.7; Vin iii.173 Vin v.93 (cp. Vin i.354 & Vin. Texts iii.266 for the 18 errors in which the Sangha is brought into division by bhikkhus who are in the wrong); Dhs-a 29 (aṭṭhārasa bheda-kara-vatthūni the 18 causes of dissension).

fr. bhid, cp. Ved. & Class. Sk. bheda in same meanings

Bhedaka

(adj. n.) breaking, dividing, causing disunion; (m.) divider Vin ii.205; Ja vi.382 ■ nt. adv bhedakaṃ, as in ˚nakha in such a way as to break a nail DN-a i.37.

fr. bheda

Bhedana

(nt.) 1. breaking (open), in puṭa˚; breaking of the seed-boxes (of the Pāṭali plant), idiomatic for “merchandise” Mil 1 See under puṭa.

2. (fig.) breach, division, destruction AN iv.247; Dhp 138; Bv ii.7; Ja i.467 (mittabhāva˚).

-dhamma subject to destruction, fragile, perishable AN iv.386; Ja i.146, Ja i.392; Thag-a 254. -saṃvattanika leading to division or dissension Vin iii.173. Bhedapeti & Bhedeti;

fr. bhid, as in Caus. bhedeti

Bhedāpeti & Bhedeti

are Causatives of bhindati (q.v.).

Bheraṇḍaka

a jackal Ja v.270; the nom. probably formed after the acc. in phrase bheraṇḍakaṃ nadati to cry after the fashion of, or like a jackal AN i.187.

cp. *Sk. bheruṇḍa

Bherava

(adj.) fearful, terrible, frightful Thag 189; Snp 959, Snp 965, Snp 984; Nd i.370 Nd i.467; Ja vi.520; Dpvs 17, 100; Pgdp 26, Pgdp 31bahu˚ very terrible AN iii.52; stricken with terror Ja vi.587-(n) terror, combd with bhaya fear & dismay MN i.17; AN iv.291; AN v.132; Thag 367, Thag 1059pahīna-bhayabherava having left behind (i.e. free from) fear terror SN iii.83.

-rāva cry of terror Mil 254.

fr. bhīru, cp. Epic Sk. bhairava

Bheri

(f.) a kettle-drum (of large size; Dhs-a 319 distinguishes 2 kinds: mahā˚ & paṭaha˚ DN i.79; AN ii.185; Vv 8110; Ja vi.465; Dhp-a i.396; Sdhp 429issara˚; the drum of the ruler or lord Ja i.283 paṭaha˚; kettle-drum Dpvs 16, 14; Dhs-a 319; Pv-a 4 yāma˚; (-velāya) (at the time) when the drum sounds the watch Ja v.459 ■ bheriṃ vādeti to sound the drum Ja i.283 ■ bheriyo vādentā (pl.) beating (lit. making sound) the drums Ja ii.110. bheriñ carāpeti to make the drum go round, i.e. to proclaim by beat of drum Ja v.41; Ja vi.10.

-caraṇa the carrying round of the drum (in proclamations), in cpds. ˚magga the proclamation road Dhp-a ii.43; & ˚vīthi id. Dhp-a ii.45. -tala the head of the drum Vism 489 (in comparison); Vb-a 80 (id.) -paṇava drum & tabor (in battle) AN ii.117. -vāda drum-sound, fig. for a loud voice Pv-a 89 (bherivādena akkosati rails like drum). -vādaka a drummer Ja i.283 -saññā sign of the drum Dhp-a i.396. -sadda sound of the drum Ja i.283.

cp. Epic Sk. bherī

Bhesajja

(nt.) a remedy, medicament, medicine Vin i.278; DN ii.266; MN i.30; Snp-a 154, Snp-a 446; Sdhp 393-bhesajjaṃ karoti to treat with a medicine Dhp-a i.25 mūla-bhesajjāni the principal medicines Mil 43; pañca bhesajjāni the 5 remedies (allowed to bhikkhus) Dhp-a i.5.

-kapālaka medicine bowl Vb-a 361. -sikkhāpada the medicine precepts Vb-a 69.

cp. Vedic bhaiṣajya = bheṣaja, fr. bhiṣaj; see also P. bhisakka

Bhesma

(adj.) terrible, awful Vin ii.203 = Iti 86 (“bhesmā hi udadhī mahā,” so read for Vin. bhasmā with v.l. bhesmā, and for It tasmā, with v.l. BB bhesmā, misunderstood by ed ■ Bdhgh Vin ii.325 on Vin. passage expls by bhayānaka); Ja v.266; Ja vi.133 (v.l. bhasma).

cp. Vedic bhīṣma of which the regular P. form is bhiṃsa, of bhī; bhesma would correspond to a form *bhaiṣma

Bho

(indecl.) a familiar term of address (in speaking to equals or inferiors): sir friend, you, my dear; pl. sirs DN i.88, DN i.90, DN i.93, DN i.111; MN i.484; Snp 427, Snp 457, Snp 487; with voc. of noun: bho purisa my dear man Ja i.423; bho brahmaṇā oh ye brahmans Ja ii.369. Double bho bho Dhp-a iv.158.

-vādika = ˚vādin Nd i.249. -vādin a brahman, i.e. one who addresses others with the word “bho,” implying some superiority of the speaker; name given to the brahman, as proud of his birth, in contrast to brāhmaṇa, the true brahman Snp 620; Dhp 396; Ja vi.211 Ja vi.214; Dhp-a iv.158.

voc. of bhavant, cp. Sk. bhoḥ which is the shortened voc. bhagoḥ of Vedic bhagavant; cp. as to form P. āvuso → Sk. āyuṣmaḥ of āyuṣmant

Bhokkhaṃ

is fut. of bhuñjati (q.v.).

Bhokkhi

at Vb-a 424, in phrase sucikāmo bh. brāhmaṇo is a kind of Desider, formation fr. bhuj˚ (bhuñj), appearing as *bhukṣ = bhokkh (cp. bhokkhaṃ), with ending ˚in; meaning “wishing to eat.” It corresponds to Sk bhoktu-kāma. Cp. also n. ag. bhoktṛ of *bhukṣ enjoyer, eater. P. bhokkhi might be Sk. bhoktrī, if it was not for the latter being f. The word is a curiosity.

Bhoga1

1. enjoyment AN iv.392 (kāmaguṇesu bh.).

2. possession, wealth DN iii.77; Snp 301, Snp 421; Dhp 139, Dhp 355; Pp 30, Pp 57; Sdhp 86, Sdhp 228 Sdhp 264appa˚; little or no possession Snp 114.

-khandha a mass of wealth, great possessions DN ii.86 (one of the 5 profits accruing from virtue). -gāma “village of revenue,” a tributary village, i.e. a village which has to pay tribute or contributions (in food etc.) to the owner of its ground. The latter is called gāmabhojaka or gāmapati “landlord” Ja ii.135 Cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 71, 112. -cāgin giving riches, liberal AN iii.128.. -pārijuñña loss of property or possessions Vv-a 101. -mada pride or conceit of wealth Vb-a 466. -vāsin, as f. vāsinī “living in property, i.e. to be enjoyed or made use of occasionally, one of the 10 kinds of wives: a kept woman Vin iii.139, Vin iii.140 cp. MN i.286.

fr. bhuñj: see bhuñjati

Bhoga2

the coil of a snake Ja iii.58. See also nib˚.

fr. bhuj to bend, cp. bhuja3 & Sk. bhoga id. Hālayudha 3, 20

Bhogatā

(-˚) (f.) condition of prosperity, having wealth or riches, in uḷāra˚; being very rich MN iii.38.

abstr. fr. bhoga

Bhogavant

(adj.) one who has possessions or supplies, wealthy Ja v.399; Mvu 10, Mvu 20; Sdhp 511.

fr. bhoga

Bhogika

(-˚) (adj.) having wealth or power, in antara˚; an intermediate aristocrat Vin iii.47.

fr. bhoga

Bhogin1

(-˚) (adj.-n.) enjoying, owning, abounding in, partaking in or devoted to (e.g. to pleasure, kāma˚; ) DN ii.80; DN iii.124; SN i.78; SN iv.331, SN iv.333; AN iii.289 AN v.177 ■ m. owner, wealthy man MN i.366.

fr. bhoga

Bhogin2

(adj.) having coils, of a snake Ja iii.57; Ja vi.317.

fr. bhuj, see bhuja3

Bhogiya

is diaeretic form of Sk. bhogya = P. bhogga2 with which identical in meaning 2, similar also to bhogika.

Bhogga1

(adj.) bent, crooked MN i.88; DN ii.22; AN i.138; Ja iii.395.

fr. bhuj to bend, pp. corresp. to Sk. bhugna

Bhogga2

(adj.) 1. to be enjoyed or possessed, n. property, possession in cpd. rāja˚; (of an elephant) to be possessed by a king, serviceable to a king, royal DN i.87; AN i.244, AN i.284 AN ii.113, AN ii.170; Ja ii.370; Dhp-a i.313 (royal possessions in general); DN-a i.245. Cp. BSk. rājabhogya Mvu i.287. See in detail under rāja-bhogga ■ naggabhogga one who possesses nothing but nakedness, i.e. an ascetic Ja iv.160; Ja v.75; Ja vi.225.

2. (identical with bhogika & bhogiya & similar in meaning to bhojarājā) royal, of royal power, entitled to the throne, as a designation of “class” at Vin iii.221 in sequence rājā rāja-bhoggā brāhmaṇā, etc., where it takes the place of the usual khattiya “royal noble.”

grd. of bhuñj to enjoy, thus = Sk. bhogya

Bhoja

one who is getting trained, dependent, a freed slave, villager subject. Only in cpds. like bhojisiyaṃ [bhoja + isi ya = issariya] mastery over dependence, i.e. independence SN i.44, SN i.45; bhojājānīya a well-trained horse, a thoroughbred Ja i.178, Ja i.179; bhojaputta son of a villager Ja v.165; bhojarājā head of a village (-district) a subordinate king Snp 553 = Thag 823 ■ In the latter phrase however it may mean “wealthy” kings, or “titled kings (khattiyā bh-r., who are next in power to and serve on a rājā cakkavatti). The phrase is best taken as one, viz. “the nobles, royal kings.” It may be a term for “vice-kings” or substitute-kings, or those who are successors of the king. The expln at Snp-a 453 takes the three words as three diff. terms and places bhojā bhogiyā as a designation of a class or rank (= bhogga) Neumann in his trsln of Sn has “Königstämme, kühn and stolz,” free but according to the sense. The phrase may in bhoja contain a local designation of the Bhoja princes (Name of a tribe), which was then taken as a special name for “king” (cp. Kaiser → Caesar, or Gr. βασιλεύς) With the wording “khattiyā bhoja-rājāno anuyuttā bhavanti te” cp. MN iii.173: “ paṭirājāno te rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti,” and AN v.22: “ kuḍḍarājāno ” in same phrase ■ Mrs. Rh. D. at Brethren, p. 311, trsls “nobles and wealthy lords.”

lit. grd. of bhuñjati2, to be sorted out, to be raised from slavery; thus also meaning “dependence, “training,” from bhuj, to which belongs bhujissa

Bhojan

is ppr. of bhojeti, feeding Ja vi.207.

Bhojaka

1. one who provides food, attendant at meals Ja v.413.

2. (is this from bhuñjati2 & bhujissa?) one who draws the benefit of something, owner, holder, in; gāma˚; landholder, village headman (see Dial. i.108 n. & Fick,; Sociale Gliederung 104 sq.) Ja i.199, Ja i.354, Ja i.483; Ja ii.135 (= gāmapati, gāmajeṭṭhaka); v.413; Dhp-a i.69. Cp. bhojanaka.

fr. bhuj, bhojeti

Bhojana

(nt.) food, meal, nourishment in general Ja ii.218; Ja iv.103, Ja iv.173; Ja i.178; Ja iv.223; Snp 102 Snp 128, Snp 242, Snp 366, Snp 667; Dhp 7, Dhp 70; Pp 21, Pp 55; Mil 370 Vism 69, Vism 106; Sdhp 52, Sdhp 388, Sdhp 407. Some similes with bhojana see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119 ■ tika˚; food allowed for a triad (of reasons) Vin ii.196. dub˚ having little or bad food Ja ii.368; Dhp-a iv.8. paṇīta˚; choice plentiful meals Vin iv.88. sabhojane kule in the family in which a bhikkhu has received food Vin iv.94bhojane mattaññu(tā) knowing proper measure in eating (& abstr.); eating within bounds, one of the 4 restricttions of moral life SN ii.218; AN i.113 sq.; Nd i.483. 5 bhojanāni or meals are given at Vin iv.75, viz niccabhatta˚, salākabhatta˚, pakkhikaṃ, uposathikaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ ■ As part of the regulations concerning food, hours of eating etc. in the Sangha there is a distinction ascribed to the Buddha between gaṇabhojanaṃ, parampara-bhojanaṃ, atirittabhojanaṃ, anatirittabhojanaṃ mentioned at Kvu ii.552; see Vin iv.71 Vin iv.77. All these ways of taking food are forbidden under ordinary circumstances, but allowed in the case of illness (gilāna-samaye), when robes are given to the Bhikkhus (cīvarasamaye) and several other occasions as enumd at Vin iv.74 ■ The distinction is made as follows: gaṇabhojanaṃ said when 4 bhikkhus are invited to partake together of one of the five foods; or food prepared as a joint meal Vin iv.74; cp. ii.196 v.128, 135; paramparabhojanaṃ said when a bhikkhu invited to partake of one of the 5 foods, first takes one and then another Vin iv.78; atirittabhojanaṃ is food left over from that provided for a sick person, or too great a quantity offered on one occasion to bhikkhus (in this case permitted to be eaten) Vin iv.82; anatirittabhojanaṃ is food that is not left over & is accepted & eaten by a bhikkhu without inquiry Vin iv.84.

-aggadāna gift of the best of food Snp-a 270. -atthika in need of food, hungry Pv ii.929. -pariyantika restricting one’s feeding Vism 69. -vikati at Ja v.292 is to be read as bhājana˚; (q.v.).

fr. bhuñjati

Bhojanaka

= bhojaka, in ˚gāma owner or headman of the village Ja ii.134. Bhojaniya, Bhojaniya, Bhojaneyya

Bhojaniya, Bhojanīya, Bhojaneyya

what may be eaten, eatable food; fit or proper to eat ■ bhojaniya: food Vin iv.92 (five foods: odana rice, kummāsa gruel, sattu meal flour, maccha fish, maṃsa meat). Soft food, as distinguished from khādaniya hard food Ja i.90. See also khādaniya. bhojanīya: eatable SN i.167, cp. pari˚. bhojaneyya: fit to eat DN-a i.28; a˚ unfit to be eaten Snp 81; Ja v.15.

grd. of bhuj, Caus. bhojeti. Cp. bhuñjitabba

Bhojin

(-˚) (adj.) feeding on, enjoying AN iii.43; MN i.343; Snp 47; Ja ii.150; Pp 55.

fr. bhuj

Bhojeti

to cause to eat, to feed, entertain, treat, regale Vin i.243; Vin iv.71; Ja vi.577; Dhp-a i.101.

Caus. of bhuñjati

Bhojja

(adj.) to be eaten, eatable; khajja˚; what can be chewed & eaten DN-a i.85. ˚yāgu “eatable rice-gruel,” i.e. soft gruel, prepared in a certain way Vin i.223, Vin i.224.

grd. of bhuñjati

Bhojjha

a good horse, a Sindh horse Ja i.180.

Bhoti

f. of bhavant (q.v.) Dhp-a iii.194. Bhottabba & Bhottum

Bhottabba & Bhottuṃ

are grd. & inf. of bhuñjati (q.v.); bhottabba to be eaten Ja v.252, Ja v.253; bhottuṃ to eat Ja ii.14.

Bhobhukka

one making a barking sound, barker, i.e. dog Ja vi.345 (= bhunkaraṇa C.).

M.

intens-redupl. of bhukk = bukk, to bark: see bhukka & cp. Sk. bukkati, bukkana

M

-M-

euphonic consonant inserted between two vowels to avoid hiatus, as agga-m-agga the best of all Vin iv.232 aṅga-m-aṅgāni limb by limb Vin iii.119; Vv 382, etc See also SN iii.254 (yena-m-idh’ ekacco); Dhp 34 (oka-mokata ubbhato); Snp 765 (aññatra-m-ariyehi); Nd i.269 (dvaye-m-eva); Ja i.29 (asīti-hattha-m-ubbedha, for hatth’ ubbedha); iii.387 (katattho-m-anubujjhati); v.72 (orena-m-āgama); vi.266 (pacchā-m-anutappati); Snp-a 309 (rāg’ ādi-m-anekappakāraṃ) ■ On wrong syllable division through Sandhi-m-, and thus origin of specific Pali forms see māsati.

Ma

(-kāra) the letter or sound m Ja iii.273 (sandhi-vasena vutta put in for the sake of euphony); v.375 (ma-kāro sandhikaro); Kp-a 155, Kp-a 224; Snp-a 181, Snp-a 383, Snp-a 404.

Maṃsa

(nt.) flesh, meat SN ii.97 (putta˚); Dhp 152; Ja iii.184; Pp 55; Vism 258 Vism 357 (in compar.); Dhp-a i.375 (putta˚); ii.51 (alla˚ living flesh); Vb-a 58, Vb-a 61 (pilotika-paliveṭhita). Described and defined in detail as one of the 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body at Vism 252, Vism 354; Kp-a 46 Vb-a 235.

-ūpasecana sauce for meat Ja iii.144 = Ja vi.24; Dhp-a i.344. -kalyāṇa beauty of flesh, one of the 5 beauties of a girl (see kalyāṇa) Ja i.394; Dhp-a i.387. -khādaka flesh-eater Ja vi.530. -cakkhu the bodily eye, one of the 5 kinds of the sense of sight (see cakkhu III) DN iii.219; Nd i.100, Nd i.354. -dhovanī odaka water for washing meat Kp-a 54. -piṇḍika a meat-ball, lump of flesh Vism 256. -puñja a heap of flesh Vism 361 (in comp.) Vb-a 67. -pesi a piece of flesh or meat (see on simile J.P.T.S. 1907, 122) Vin ii.25; Vin iii.105 (˚ṃ vehāsaṃ gacchantiṃ addasaṃ); MN i.143; AN iii.97; Mil 280 Vism 195, Vism 252, Vism 468; Dhp-a i.164; Vb-a 235; -lohita flesh & blood Dhp 150.;

cp. Vedic māṃsa, fr. Idg. *memsro-, as in Gr. μηρός thigh, Lat. membrum limb (“member”); Goth mims flesh; Oir mīr bite, bit (of flesh)

Maṃsi

(f.) a certain plant Nardostychus jatamansi Ja vi.535.

cp. Sk. māṃsī

Maṃsika

1. a dealer in meat, meat-seller Mil 331.

2. in piṭṭhi˚; the ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd., thus: one who is a backbiter a slanderer Snp 244 (= piṭṭhi-maṃsa-khādaka Snp-a 287). Similarly piṭṭhi-maṃsikatā (q.v.) Nd ii.391.

fr. maṃsa; cp. *Sk. māṃsika

Makaci

a kind of cloth, material, fibre Dhp-a iii.68 (vākakhaṇḍa).

-pilotikā rough cloth (used for straining) Ja ii.96; Dhp-a ii.155. Cp. makkhi-vāla. -vāka m. bark Vism 249 (+ akkavāka); Vb-a 232.

etym.?

Makara

a mythical fish or sea monster, Leviathan (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 97; Ja ii.442; Ja iii.188; Mil 131, Mil 377; Thag-a 204 ■ f. makarinī Mil 67.

-dantaka the tooth of a sword fish, used as a pin Vin ii.113, cp. p. 315 ■ as a design in painting or carving Vin ii.117. 121, 152; iv.47. In these

latter passages it occurs combd with latākamma & pañcapaṭṭhika (q.v.). The meaning is not quite clear.;

cp. Epic Sk. makara

Makaranda

the nectar of a flower Ja vi.530.

cp. Class. Sk. makaranda

Makasa

mosquito Vin ii.119; SN i.52 (a˚ free from m.); AN ii.117; Snp 20; Ja i.246; Sdhp 50. See also cpd. ḍaṃsa˚.

-kuṭikā mosquito net or curtain Vin ii.119, Vin ii.130 -vījanī mosquito fan Vin ii.130.

fr. Vedic maśaka viâ *masaka → makasa: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 472

Makuṭa

(f.) a crest Abhp 283 (kirīṭa + , i.e. adornment).

cp. BSk. makuṭa Divy 411

Makula

1. a bud (Hardy in Index to Vv-a gives “Mimusops elengi” after BR) Thig 260; Vv 4526; Ja i.273; Ja ii.33; Ja iv.333; Ja v.207 (makuḷa), 416 Vism 230 (ḷ); 256 (paduma˚); Vv-a 177 (kaṇavīra˚) 194 (makuḷa), 197 (id.); Vb-a 228, Vb-a 239 (where Vism 256 has makulita, & Kp-a 53 mukulita).

2. a knob Ja i.31; Ja ii.90; Vism 253 (kandala˚).

3. v.l. at Nd ii.485 B for pakulla (= pakuṭa).

cp. Sk. makula

Makkaṭa

1. a monkey Ja i.385; Ja ii.267; Dhp-a ii.22; Vb-a 408 (˚niddā, a m.’s sleep, said to be quickly changing); Kp-a 73 (in simile); Snp-a 522 (cp. Snp 791). Names of monkeys famous in Jātaka tales: Sālaka Ja ii.268; Kālabāhu Ja iii.98 sq.; on the monkey as a figure in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119, to which add Vb-a 228 & 259 (tālavana˚), cp. Vism 245–⁠2. a spider: see ˚sutta.;

-chāpaka the young of a monkey MN i.385; Ja i.218 -sutta spider’s thread Ja v.47; Vism 136 (in simile) Dhp-a i.304.

cp. Epic Sk. markaṭa

Makkaṭaka

a spider (see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 119) Dhp 347 (cp. Dhp-a iv.58); Ja ii.147 (= uṇṇanābhi); iv.484 (aptly called Uṇṇanābhi); v.47, 469; Mil 364, Mil 407 (pantha˚ road spider, at both passages). -˚sutta spider’s thread Vism 285.

cp. Sk. markaṭaka; der. fr. markaṭa = makkaṭa

Makkaṭiya

(nt.) monkey grimace Ja ii.448 (mukha˚). The same as mukha-makkaṭika at Ja ii.70.

fr. makkhaṭa + ya

Makkaṭī

(f.) a female monkey Vin iii.33, Vin iii.34; Ja i.385; Dhp-a i.119.

of makkaṭa

Makkha1

hypocrisy; usually combd with paḷāsa (see also palāsa MN i.15; AN i.95, AN i.100, AN i.299; AN iv.148, AN iv.456; AN v.39, AN v.156, AN v.209 AN v.310, AN v.361; Iti 3; Snp 56, Snp 437, Snp 631, Snp 1132 (cp. Nd ii.484 makkhāyanā makkhāyitattaṃ niṭṭhuriya-kammaṃ, i.e. hardness, mercilessness); Dhp 150, Dhp 407; Ja v.141; Vb 357, Vb 380, Vb 389; Pp 18, Pp 22; Mil 289, Mil 380; Dhp-a iii.118 Dhp-a vi.181.

-vinaya restraining fr. hypocrisy SN ii.282; AN v.165 sq.

fr. mṛkṣ, lit. smearing over. Cp. BSk. mrakṣa Śikṣ 198. 8, in cpd. māna-mada-mrakṣa-paridāha etc.

Makkha2

anger rage Vin i.25.

probably = makkha1, but BSk. differentiates with mrakṣya Divy 622, trsl. Index “ill-feeling” Böhtlingk-Roth have: mrakṣya “wohlgefühl”

Makkhaṇa

(nt.) smearing, oil Ja iii.120; Mil 11 (tela˚); Dhtp 538.

fr. mṛkṣ, cp. *Sk. mrakṣaṇa

Makkhāyanā

(f.) & Makkhāyitatta (nt.) the fact of concealment, hypocrisy: in exegesis of makkha at Nd ii.484; Pp 18, Pp 22.

abstr. fr. makkha

Makkhikā

(f.) a fly MN iii.148; Nd i.484; Ja ii.275 (nīla˚); iii.263 (pingala gadfly), 402; Snp-a 33 (pingala˚), 572 (id.); Dhp-a iv.58 Sdhp 396, Sdhp 529.

cp. Vedic makṣika & makṣikā

Makkhita

smeared with (-˚), soiled; anointed MN i.364 (lohita˚); Ja i.158 (madhu˚); iii.226 (piṭṭhi-maddena); v.71 (ruhira˚); vi.391.

pp. of makkheti

Makkhin

(adj.) concealing, hypocritical; harsh, merciless; often combd with palāsin (e.g. at Vin ii.89; Ja iii.259) DN iii.45, DN iii.246. a˚ (+ apalāsin) DN iii.47; AN iii.111; Snp 116; Pp 22. Makkhi-vala

fr. makkha

Makkhi-vāla

a cloth of hair for straining Ja ii.97.

cp. makaci-pilotikā

Makkheti

to smear, paste, soil, anoint Ja iii.225, Ja iii.314; Pp 36; Mil 268; Vism 344; Dhp-a ii.65 ■ Pass makkhīyati Mil 74. Caus. II. makkhāpeti to cause to be anointed Ja i.486; Dhp-a i.400 ■ pp. makkhita.

Caus. of mṛkṣ; Dhtp 538: makkhaṇa

Maga

1. animal for hunting, deer, antelope MN i.173 (in simile); SN i.199 (id.); AN i.70; AN ii.23; Thag 958 Thag 989; Snp 275, Snp 763, Snp 880; Ja v.267.

2. a stupid person Ja vi.206, Ja vi.371.

another form of miga = Sk. mṛga, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 124

Magga

1. a road (usually high road), way, foot-path Vism 708 (maggaṃ agata-pubba-purisa, simile of); Vb-a 256 (tiyojana˚, simile of a man travelling); Dhp-a i.229- addhāna˚; high road Vin iv.62; MN iii.158; see under addhāna; antāra- magge on the road Mil 16; ujuka˚ a straight way SN i.33; Dhp-a i.18; ummagga (a) a conduit; (b) a devious way: see ummagga, to which add refs. Ja v.260; Thig 94; kummagga a wrong path: see kum˚, to which add SN iv.195; Thag 1174. passāva & vacca˚; defecation & urination Vin iii.127 visama˚; a bad road SN i.48.

2. the road of moral good living, the path of righteousness, with ref. to the moral standard (cp. the 10 commandments) & the way to salvation. The exegetic (edifying) etym. of magga in this meaning is “nibbān’ atthikehi maggīyati (traced by those who are looking for N.), nibbānaṃ vā maggeti kilese vā mārento gacchatī ti maggo” (VbhA 114). Usually designated (a) the “ ariya aṭṭhaṅgika magga or the “Noble Eightfold Path” (see aṭṭhangika ). It is mentioned at many places, & forms the corner-stone of the Buddha’s teaching as to the means of escaping “dukkha” or the ills of life. It consists of 8 constituents viz. sammā-diṭṭhi, sammā-sankappa, ˚vācā ˚kammanta, ˚ājīva, ˚vāyāma, ˚sati, ˚samādhi, or right views, right aspirations, right speech, right conduct right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right rapture. The 7 first constituents are at DN ii.216; MN iii.71 enumd as requisites for sammā-samādhi. The name of this table of ethical injunctions is given as “maggam uttamaṃ” at Snp 1130, i.e. the Highest Path. See for ref. e.g. Vin iii.93; Vin iv.26; DN ii.353 DN iii.102, DN iii.128, DN iii.284, DN iii.286; Iti 18; Nd i.292; Nd ii.485; Vb 104 sq. 235 sq., Vb-a 114 sq. (its constituents in detail) 121, 216; Vism 509 sq. (where the 8 constituents are discussed) ■ (b) as ariya magga: MN iii.72; Pp 17; DN-a i.176 sq., 225 sq., 233; Vb-a 373 sq.; Thag-a 205. (c) as pañcaṅgika or the Path of 5 constituents (the above first 2 and last 3): Dhs 89; Vb 110 sq., 237 sq-(d) other expressions of same import: dhamma˚ Mil 21; magga alone; SN i.191 (Bhagavā maggassa uppādetā etc.) = MN iii.9 = SN iii.66; Snp 429, Snp 441, Snp 724 sq. 1130; Dhp 57, Dhp 273 sq., Iti 106; Vb-a 53, Vb-a 73. As the first condition & initial stage to the attainment of Arahantship (Nibbāna) it is often found in sequence of either; magga-phala-nirodha (e.g. Vism 217, cp. Nd ii.under dukkha II. p. 168), or magga, phala, nibbāna (e.g. Tikp. 155 sq., 158; Vb-a 43, Vb-a 316, Vb-a 488) ■ magga as entrance to Arahantship is the final stage in the recognition (ñāṇa, pariññā, paññā) of the truth of the causal chain, which realises the origin of “ill,” the possibility of its removal & the “way” to the removal These stages are described as dukkhe ñāṇaṃ, samudaye ñāṇaṃ nirodhe ñāṇaṃ and magge ñāṇaṃ at DN iii.227; Pts i.118. At the latter passage the foll. chapter (i.49 gives dukkha-nirodha gāminī paṭipadā as identical with maggaNote. On the term see Cpd. 41 sq., 66 sq., 175 186; Dhs trsl.2 58, 299 sq., 362 sq.; Expos. 216, 354n. On passages with aṭṭhaṅgika magga & others where magga is used in similes see Mrs. Rh. D. in; J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 119 120.

3. Stage of righteousness, with ref. to the var conditions of Arahantship divided into 4 stages, viz sotāpatti- magga, sakadāgāmi˚, anāgāmi˚, arahatta˚; or the stage of entering the stream (of salvation), that of returning once, that of the never-returner, that of Arahantship ■ At Dhp-a i.110 magga-phala “the fruit of the Path” (i.e. the attainment of the foundation or first step of Arahantship) is identical with sotāpattiphala on p. 113 (a) in general: arahatta˚; SN i.78; AN iii.391; DN-a i.224 ■ (b) in particular as the 4 paths Nd ii.612 A; Vb 322 sq., 328, 335; Vism 453, Vism 672 Vism 678; Dhp-a iv.30; Vb-a 301.

4. In the Tikapaṭṭhāna (under magga-paccaya-niddesa p. 52) 12 constituents of magga are enumd; viz. paññā, vitakka, sammāvācā s-kammanta, s-ājīva, viriya, sati, samādhi micchā-diṭṭhi, micchā-vācā, m-kammanta, m-ājīva.

-aṅgāni the constituents of the Ariyan Path Vb-a 120. -āmagga which is the (right) road and which is not MN i.147; Vism ch. xx (˚ssa kovida) = Snp 627; SN iii.108 (id.); Dhp-a iv.169 (id.); AN v.47 (˚ssa ñāṇadassana); Dhp 403. -udaka water found on the road Vism 338 (simile). -kilanta wearied by the road Ja i.129. -kusala one who is clever as regards the road one who knows the road well SN iii.108; Nd i.171 Vb-a 332 (in simile); Kp-a 70, Kp-a 126. -kovida = ˚kusala Nd i.446. -kkhāyin (should be ˚akkhāyin) one who tells the (right) way MN iii.5; Nd i.33. -jina Conqueror of the paths Snp 84 sq. -jīvin who lives in the right path Snp 88. -jjhāyin reflecting over the Path Snp 85 -ñāṇa knowledge of the Path Vb-a 416. -ññū knows the Path Nd i.446. -ṭṭhāna one who stands in the Path, attains the P. see Cpd. 23, 50. -ttaya the triad of the paths (i.e. the first 3 of the 4 Paths as given above under 3) Dhp-a iv.109. -dūsin highway robber Snp 84. -desaka one who points out the way, a guide Snp 84; Ja iv.257; as ˚desika at Dhp-a ii.246. -desin = ˚desaka Snp 87. -dhamma the rule of the Path, i.e. righteous living Snp 763. -dhīra wise as regards the Path Nd i.45 -paṭipanna

1. one on the road, i.e. wandering, tramping Dhp-a i.233.

2. one who has entered the Path Pv iv.349. -parissaya danger of the road Vv-a 200. -bhāvanā cultivation of the Path (i.e. righteousness) Nd i.323. -mūḷha one who has lost the way Vv-a 332 -vaṇṇa praise of the Path Dhp-a i.115. -vidū one who knows the Path Nd i.446. -sacca the truth concerning the Path Vb-a 114, Vb-a 124. -sira Name of a month DN-a i.241.

cp. Epic Sk. mārga, fr. mṛg to track, trace

Maggana

(nt.) & magganā (f.) tracking, search for, covetousness Vism 29 (syn. for nijigiṃsanatā gaveṭṭhi); Dhtp 298 (& gavesana).;

fr. magg

Maggika

wayfarer, tramp Dhp-a i.233.

fr. magga

Maggati

& (spurious); mageti to track, hunt for, trace out follow, seek MN i.334 (ppr. magayamana); SN ii.270 (pp maggayamāna); Thig 384 (cp. Thag-a 255 = pattheti) Ja v.102 (where T. reads maggheyya, which is expld by C. as vijjheyya to pierce, hurt, & which is doubtful in meaning, although Kern,; Toev. s. v. defends it. The v.l. reads magg˚. Same on p. 265 where one ought to read phasseyya in C. instead of passeyya. The form pp. magga (?) on p. 102 must belong to the same root) Dhs-a 162 (= gavesati) ■ Caus. II. maggāpeti Pv-a 112 ■ Pass. maggīyati Vb-a 114.

Denom. fr. magga, cp. Sk. margayati. The Dhtp. gives both mag & magg; in meaning “anvesana,” i.e. tracking, following up; see Dhtp Nos. 21, 540, 541

Magghati

see maggeti.

Maghavant

Name of Indra, or another angel (devaputta) SN i.221 (voc. maghavā; so read for mathavā), 229; Dhp 30. Cp. māgha.

cp. Epic Sk. maghavā, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. Maia

Maghā

(f.) Name of a nakkhatta, in cpd. ˚deva Snp-a 352 (cp. MN ii.74, n. 6, where spelling Makkādeva; we also find Makhadeva at Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa xiv. i..1).

cp. *Sk. maghā

Maṅkati

is given as root maṅk (aor. maki) at Dhtm 13, in meaning maṇḍana, i.e. adornment. It is meant to be an expln of mankato?

Maṅkato

(adv.) on my account, for me Mil 384.

for Sk. mat-kṛte, Cp. E. Müller, P.Gr. 12

Maṅku

(adj.) staggering, confused troubled, discontented Vin ii.118; SN v.74; Dhp 249 Nd i.150; Dhp-a iii.41, Dhp-a iii.359 (with loc.) ■ f. pl. maṅkū Vin i.93dummaṅku “staggering in a disagreeable manner,” evil-minded AN i.98; AN iv.97 (read line as “dummanku’ yaṃ padusseti dhūm’ aggamhi va pāvako” he, staggering badly, is spoilt like the fire on the crest of smoke); v.70; Vin ii.196; Vin iii.21; Vin iv.213; SN ii.218; Ne 50.

-bhāva discontent, moral weakness Ja iv.49; Mil 227; Dhp-a iii.359. -bhūta discontented, troubled confused Vin ii.19; DN ii.85; AN i.186; Dhp 263; Ja v.211 Ja vi.362; Dhp-a ii.76; ; self-possessed AN iii.40; Mil 21 Mil 339.

cp. Vedic manku; see on meaning Hardy in preface to Anguttara v. p. vi

Maṅkuna

(& ˚ṇa ) an insect, bug or flea Ja i.10; Ja iii.423; Vism 109 (where kīla-mankula ought to be read as kīṭamankuna); Dhp-a ii.12.

cp. late Sk. matkuṇa, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 63

Maṅgala

(adj.) auspicious prosperous, lucky, festive Nd i.87, Nd i.88; Kp-a 118 sq. Snp-a 273, Snp-a 595; Sdhp 551 ■ nt. maṅgalaṃ good omen auspices, festivity Snp 258; Vin ii.129; Pv-a 17. A curious popular etymology is put forth by Bdhgh at Kp-a 123, viz. “maṃ galanti imehi sattā ti” mangalāni- maṅgalaṃ karoti lit. to make an auspicious ceremony i.e. to besprinkle with grains etc. for luck (see on this Pv-a 198), to get married Dhp-a i.182; maṅgalaṃ vadati to bless one Ja iv.299; Dhp-a i.115. Three (auspicious wedding-ceremonies at Dhp-a i.115 viz. abhiseka˚ consecration geha-ppavesana˚ entering the house, vivāha wedding ■ Certain other general signs of good luck or omina κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν are given at Ja iv.72, Ja iv.73 and Kp-a 118 sq. (see also mangalika) ■ Several ceremonious festivities are mentioned at Dhp-a ii.87 with regard to the bringing up of a child, viz. nāma-karaṇa-mangala the ceremony of giving a name; āhāra-paribhoga˚ of taking solid food; kaṇṇa-vijjhana˚ of piercing the ears dussa-gahaṇa˚ of taking up the robe: cūḷā-karaṇa˚ of making the top-knot ■ Cp. abhi˚.

-usabha an auspicious bull Snp-a 323. -chaṇa a merry time, fair Ja ii.48; Dhp-a i.392. -kicca auspicious function festivity Snp-a 175, Snp-a 323. -kiriyā festivity, wedding Snp-a 69; finding good omens Ja iv.72. -kolāhala the lucky, or most auspicious, foreboding, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q.v.) Kp-a 121. -pañha see mangalika -divasa a lucky day Ja iv.210; Dhp-a iii.467. -vappa ploughing festival Snp-a 137. Cp. vappa-mangala -sindhava state horse Ja i.59. -silāpaṭṭa auspicious slab (of stone) Ja i.59; Ja vi.37; Pv-a 74. -supina lucky dream Ja vi.330. -hatthi state elephant Mvu 35, Mvu 21; Dhp-a i.389.

cp. Vedic mangala. Expld by Dhtp 24 with root maṅg, i.e. lucky; see also mañju

Maṅgalika

(adj.) (-˚) 1. one who is feasting in, one whose auspices are such & such; fond of; only in kotūhala˚; fond of excitement Ja i.372; Mil 94 (apagata˚, without passion for excitement).

2. superstitious looking out for lucky signs Vin ii.129 (gihī) 140 (id.). At Ja iv.72, Ja iv.73; three sets of people are exemplified, who believe in omina as either diṭṭhaṃ (seen) or sutaṃ (heard) or mutaṃ (sensed); they are called diṭṭha-maṅgalikā, suta˚ & muta˚; respectively The same group is more explicitly dealt with in the Mangala-sutta Kp-a 118 sq. (cp. Nd i.89); diṭṭhamaṅgalika pañha “a question concerning visible omina” Ja iv.73 (correct meaning given under diṭṭha1 vol. ii.1561!), 390 (?). The Np. diṭṭha-mangalikā at Ja iv.376 sq.

fr. mangala

Maṅgalya

(nt.) auspiciousness, good luck, fortune Dhtp 24.

fr. mangala

Maṅgura

(adj.) golden; in cpd. ˚cchavi of golden colour, f cchavī DN i.193, DN i.242; MN i.246, MN i.429; MN ii.33; Vism 184.

etym.? or = mangula? See J.R.A.S. 1903, 186 the corresponding passage to MN i.246 in Lal. v. 320 has madgura.

Maṅgula

(adj.) sallow; f. maṅgulī woman of sallow complexion SN ii.260 = Vin iii.107; Vin iii.100.

cp. mangura

Macca

(adj.-n.) [orig. grd. of marati, mṛ; corresponding to Sk. martya. A diaeretic form exists in P. mātiya (q.v.) mortal; (m.) man, a mortal SN i.55; Snp 249, Snp 577, Snp 580 Snp 766; Ja iii.154; Ja iv.248; Ja v.393; Dhp 53, Dhp 141, Dhp 182; Vv 6312 Kv 351 ■ See also refs. under jāta.

Maccu

the God of Death, the Buddhist Māra, or sometimes equivalent to Yama SN i.156; Snp 357 (gen. maccuno), 581 (instr maccunā), 587; Thag 411; Dhp 21, Dhp 47, Dhp 128, Dhp 135, Dhp 150 Dhp 287; Vb-a 100; Snp-a 397; Dhp-a iii.49; Sdhp 295, 304.

-tara one who crosses or overcomes death Snp 1119 (= maraṇaṃ tareyya Nd ii.486). -dheyya the realm of Māra, the sphere of Death SN i.4; adj. belonging to death or subject to death (= Māradheyya, maraṇadheyya Nd ii.487b) ■ Snp 358, Snp 1104 (with expln “m vuccanti kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd ii.487a), 1146 (˚pāra-maccudheyyassa pāraṃ vuccati amataṃ nibbānaṃ Nd ii.487); Thig 10 (= maccu ettha dhīyati Thag-a 13); Dhp 86; Dhp-a ii.161. -parāyaṇa surmounting death Snp 578; pareta id. Snp 579. -pāsa the sling or snare of Māra Snp 166; Ja v.367. -bhaya the fear of death Mvu 32, Mvu 68. -maraṇa dying in death MN i.49 (cp. C on p. 532: maccu-maraṇan ti maccu-sankhātaṃ maraṇaṃ tena samuccheda-maraṇ’ ādīni nisedheti ■ See also def. of maraṇa s.v.). -mukha the mouth of death Snp 776; Nd i.48. -rājā the king of death Snp 332, Snp 1118 (= Maro pi Maccurājā maraṇaṃ pi Nd ii.488); Dhp 46 Dhp 170; Kp-a 83. -vasa the power of death 3 i.52: Snp 587, Snp 1100 (where maccu is expld by maraṇa & Māra;) -hāyin leaving death behind, victorious over death Iti 46 = Snp 755; Thag 129.

in form = Vedic mṛtyu, fr. mṛ; in meaning differentiated, the Ved ■ Sk. meaning “death” only

Maccha

fish AN iii.301; Snp 605, Snp 777, Snp 936; Ja i.210, Ja i.211; Ja v.266 (in simile); vi.113 (phandanti macchā, on dry land); Pp 55; Sdhp 610 ■ maccha is given at Nd ii.91 as syName of ambucārin ■ pūti˚; rotten fish MN iii.168; & in simile at Iti 68 = Ja iv.435 = Ja vi.236 = Kp-a 127. Cp. J.P.T.S. 1906, 201. bahu˚; rich in fish Ja iii.430. loṇa˚; salt fish Vism 28. rohita˚; the species Cyprinus rohita Ja ii.433; Ja iii.333; Dhp-a ii.132 On maccha in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. Of names of fishes several are given in the Jātaka tales; viz. Ānanda (as the king of the fishes or a Leviathan) Ja i.207; Ja ii.352; Ja v.462; Timanda & Timirapiṅgala; Ja v.462 Mitacintin Ja i.427; Bahucintin Ja i.427.

-maṃsa the flesh of fishes Snp 249. -bandha one who sets net to catch fish, a fisherman AN iii.301; Vism 379 -bhatta food for fishes, devoured by fishes Ja v.75 -vālaka a garment made in a particular fashion (forbidden to bhikkhus) Vin ii.137. -sakalika “a bit of fish” (fish-bone?) in description of constitution of the finger nails at Vism 250 = Kp-a 43 = Vb-a 233.

cp. Vedic matsya

Macchara

(adj.) niggardly envious, selfish Pgdp ii.49maccharaṃ (nt.) avarice envy AN iv.285; Snp 811, Snp 862, Snp 954 (vīta-macchara, adj.).

Vedic matsara & matsarin enjoyable; later period also “envious,” cp. maccharin

Maccharāyati

to be selfish, greedy or envious Ja vi.334; Dhp-a ii.45, Dhp-a ii.89.

Demon. fr. macchariya

Maccharāyanā

(f.) & Maccharāyitatta (nt.) the condition of selfishness, both expressions in defn of macchariya at Dhs 1122; Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhs-a 375.

Maccharin

(adj.) selfish, envious, greedy (cp. Dhs trsl.2 p. 320); AN ii.82; AN iii.139, AN iii.258, AN iii.265; DN iii.45, DN iii.246; Dhp 263; Snp 136, Snp 663; Nd i.36; Ja i.345; Ja v.391; Vv 5226 Pp 20; Dhs-a 394; Dhp-a ii.89; Sdhp 89, Sdhp 97 ■ a unselfish DN iii.47; AN iv.2; Snp 852, Snp 860; Iti 102.

cp. Vedic matsarin, fr. mat + sṛ; i.e. “reflecting to me”

Macchariya & Macchera

(nt.) avarice, stinginess, selfishness, envy; one of the principal evil passions & the maịn cause of rebirth in the Petaloka

1.; macchariya: AN i.95, AN i.299; AN iii.272; Dhp iii.44 (issā˚), 289; Snp 863 (˚yutta), 928; Pp 19, Pp 23; Vb 357, Vb 389, Vb 391 ■ Five sorts of selfishness are mentioned āvāsa˚, kula˚, lābha˚, vaṇṇa˚, dhamma˚; DN iii.234 Nd i.118, Nd i.227; AN iv.456; Dhs 1122 (cp. Dhs tsrl.2 p. 276) Vism 683; Dhs-a 373, Dhs-a 374. Selfishness is one of the evil conditions which have to be renounced as habits of mind by force of intelligence AN v.40, AN v.209; Mil 289; Pv-a 87, Pv-a 124.

2. macchera AN i.105 (˚mala), 281; Dhp 242; Iti 18; Nd i.260; Sdhp 313, Sdhp 510. At AN ii.58 and elsewhere the state called vigata-mala-macchera “with the stain of avarice vanished,” is freq. mentioned as a feature of the blameless life and a preparation for Arahantship ■ Note. The (etym.) expln of macchariya at Vb-a 513 is rather interesting: “idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhaṃ eva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṃ hotū ti pavattattā macchariyan ti vuccati” (from the Purāṇas ).

cp. Epic Sk. mātsarya

Macchika

a fish-catcher, fisherman AN iii.301; Ja v.270; Ja vi.111; Mil 331.

fr. maccha

Macchī

(f.) a female fish Ja ii.178.

of maccha

Macchera

see macchariya.

Majja

(nt.) 1. intoxicant, intoxicating drink, wine, spirits Vin i.205; DN iii.62, DN iii.63; Snp 398 (+ pāna = majjapāna); Vv-a 73 (= surā ca merayañ ca); Sdhp 267.

2. drinking place Ja iv.223 (= pān’ āgāra).

-pa one who drinks strong drink, a drunkard AN iv.261; Snp 400; Pv iv.176 (a˚); Thag-a 38. -pāna drinking of intoxicating liquors Vv 158; Vv-a 73; Sdhp 87. -pāyaka = majjapa Ja ii.192 (a˚). -pāyin = ˚pāyaka Sdhp 88 -vikkaya sale of spirits Ja iv.115.

fr. mad, cp. Vedic mada & madya

Majjati1

is represented in Pali by mujjati, as found esp. in cpds ummujjati & nimujjati.;

majj to immerse, submerge, cp. Lat. mergo

Majjati2

to wipe, polish, clean Vv-a 165. Cp. sam˚ ■ pp. majjita & maṭṭha;.

mṛj to clean, polish; connected with either Lat. mergo (cp. Gr. ἀμέργω) or Lat. mulgeo to wipe, stroke milk (cp. Gr. ἀμέλγω, Mir. mlich = milk etc.) Dhtp 71 gives root majj with meaning “saṃsuddhiyaṃ”

Majjati3

to be intoxicated; to be exultant, to be immensely enjoyed or elated SN i.73, SN i.203; AN iv.294; Snp 366 (Pot. majje = majjeyya Snp-a 364), 676 (id., T reads na ca majje, Snp-a 482 reads na pamajje); Ja ii.97 Ja iii.87 (majjeyya). aor. majji in cpd. pamajji Mvu 17, Mvu 15 ■ pp. matta.

mad, Sk. mādyati; Vedic madati; see mada for etym.

Majjāra

a cat Mil 23 ■ f. majjārī (majjāri˚) Vin i.186 (˚camma cat’s skin) Dhp-a i.48; Pgdp 49.

cp. Epic Sk. mārjāra; dialectical

Majjika

a dealer in strong drink. a tavernkeeper Mil 331.

fr. majja

Majjita

cleaned, polished Vv-a 340 (suṭṭhu m. for sumaṭṭha Vv 8417). See also maṭṭha.

pp. of majjati2

Majjha

(adj.) middle, viz 1. of space: of moderate height DN i.243 (contrasted with ucca & nīca).

2. of; time: of middle age Snp 216 (contrasted with dahara young & thera old).

3. often used adv. in loc.; majjhe in the middle; i.e. (a) as prep in between, among (-˚ or with gen.) Pv i.111, 114 Ja i.207 (sakuṇānaṃ); Dhp-a i.182 (vasana-gāmassa) Pv-a 11 (parisā˚). majjhe chetvā cutting in half Ja v.387 ■ (b) in special dogmatic sense “in the present state of existence,” contrasted with past future existences (the latter comb;d as “ubho antā” at Snp 1040). The expln of majjhe in this sense is at Nd i.434: “majjhaṃ vuccati paccuppannā rūpā” etc (similarly at Nd ii.490) ■ Snp 949 (in sequence pubbe majjhe pacchā), 1099 (id.); Dhp 348 (pure majjhe pacchato; i.e. paccuppannesu khandhesu Dhp-a iv.63)

4. (nt.) majjhaṃ the middle Dhp-a i.184 (tassa uramajjhaṃ ghaṃsentī).

Vedic madhya, cp. Lat. medius, Gr. μέσσος, Goth. midjis = Ohg. mitti, E. middle

Majjhaka

(adj.) (-˚) lying or being in the midst of…, in pācīna-yava˚ (dakkhiṇa˚, pacchima˚ uttara˚) nigama, a market-place lying in the midst of the eastern corn-fields (the southern etc.): designation of 4 nigamas situated near Mithilā Ja vi.330.

fr. majjha

Majjhatta

(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) “standing in the middle,” umpire neutral, impartial, indifferent Ja i.300; Ja ii.359 (parama˚ + upekkhā-pārāmī); vi.8; Mil 403; Vism 230; Mvu 21, Mvu 14.

2. indifference, balance of mind, equanimity almost synonymous with upekkhā: Vism 134, Vism 296 Vb-a 283 (˚payogatā); Dhp-a ii.214 (˚upekkhā); Pv-a 38 (so read for majjhattha). See also following. Note. A similar term is found in BSk. as mṛdu-madhyā kṣānti “state of spiritual calm” Divy 271; see Yoga Sūtra ii.34.

for majjha-ṭṭha, which we find in Prk. as majjhattha: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 214; majjha sthā

Majjhattatā

(f.) impartiality, indifference, balance of mind Nd ii.166 (in expln of upekkhā with syn. passaddhatā); Vb 230; Vism 134; Vb-a 285 (satta˚ & sankhāra˚), 317 (def.); Dhs-a 133.

abstr. from prec.

Majjhantika

midday, noon; used either absolutely Vin iv.273; SN iv.240; Ja v.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha-majjhantikā); v.291 (read majjhantik âtikamm’ āgami); Vism 236; Mil 3; or as apposition with kāla & samaya; SN i.7 (kāla); Pv iv.32 (id.); Nd ii.977 (samaya); DN-a i.251 (id.).

majjha + anta + ika

Majjhāru

a certain kind of plant Vin i.196 (v.l. majjāru); doubtful whether designation (like Sk. mārjāra) of Plumbago rosea.

etym. doubtful

Majjhima

(adj.) 1. middle medium, mediocre, secondary, moderate ■ Applied almost exclusively in contrast pairs with terms of more or less, in triplets like “small-medium-big,” or “first-middle-last” (cp. majjha 3b); viz. (a) of degree: hīna- m -paṇīta DN iii.215 (tisso dhātuyo); Dhs 1205, Dhs 1027 (dhammā); Vism 11 (sīlaṃ); h. m. ukkaṭṭha Vism 308; omaka m. ukkaṭṭha Vin iv.243; khuddaka m mahā Vism 100; lāmaka m. paṇīta (i.e. lokuttara Dhs-a 45 (dhammā); paritta -m- uḷāra Sdhp 260. (b) of time: paṭhame yāme majjhima˚ pacchima˚; Ja i.75; id. with vaye Pv-a 5.

2. (nt.) majjhimaṃ the waist, in cpd. su-majjhimā (f.) a woman with beautiful waist Ja v.4.

Vedic madhyama, with sound change ˚ama → ˚ima after Geiger, P.Gr. 191, or after analogy with pacchima, with which often contrasted

Mañca

a couch, bed Vin iv.39, Vin iv.40 (where 4 kinds are mentioned which also apply to the defn of pīṭha, viz. masāraka bundikābaddha, kuḷīra-pādaka, āhacca-pādaka; same defn at Vb-a 365); Snp 401; Ja iii.423; Dhp-a i.89 (˚ṃ bandhati to tie a bed or two together), 130; iv.16 Vb-a 20; Vv-a 291; Pv-a 93 ■ heṭṭhā mañce underneath the bed Ja i.197 (as place where domestic pigs lie) ii.419 (id.); ii.275 (where a love-sick youth lies down in the park).

-atimañca bed upon bed, i.e. beds placed on top of each other serving as grand stands at a fair or festival Ja iii.456; Ja vi.277; Dhp-a iv.59. -parāyaṇa ending in bed, kept in bed Pv ii.25 (nīla˚, fig. for being buried) Dhp-a i.183 (with v.l. maccu˚, just as likely, but see maccuparāyaṇa). -pīṭha couch and chair Vin ii.270 sq.; AN iii.51; Vv-a 9, Vv-a 220, Vv-a 295. -vāna stuffing of a couch Dhp-a i.234.

cp. Epic Sk. mañca stand, scaffolding, platform

Mañcaka

bed, couch, bedstead Vin i.271; SN i.121 = SN iii.123; Ja i.91; Ja iii.423; Thig 115; Mil 10; Dhp-a ii.53.

fr. mañca

Mañjari

(f.) a branching flower-stalk, a sprout Ja v.400, Ja v.416.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. mañjarī

Mañjarikā

(f.) = mañjari, Vin iii.180.

Mañjarita

(adj.) with (full-grown) pedicles, i.e. in open flower Mil 308 (˚patta in full bloom).

fr. mañjari

Mañjīra

an anklet, foot-bangle Abhp 228.

cp. late Sk. mañjīra nt.

Mañju

(adj.) pleasant, charming sweet, lovely (only with ref. to the voice) DN ii.211, DN ii.227 (one of the 8 characteristics of Brahmā’s & the Buddha’s voice: see bindu & aṭṭhanga); Ja ii.150 ■ (nt. a sweet note Ja vi.591 (of the deer in the forest); Vv-a 219 (karavīka ruta˚).

-bhāṇaka sweet-voiced, speaking sweetly Ja ii.150; Dhp-a i.144; f. bhāṇikā Ja vi.418, Ja vi.420. -bhāṇin id Ja ii.150.

cp. Class Sk. mañju, also mangala, cp. Gr. μάγγανον means of deceiving, Lat. mango a dealer making up his wares for sale. See further cognates at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mango

Mañjuka

(adj.) sweet voiced Vin i.249; Ja ii.350; Ja iii.266; Ja vi.412, Ja vi.496.

mañju + ka

Mañjūsaka

(-rukkha) Name of a celestial tree, famed for its fragrancy Vv 386; Snp-a 52, Snp-a 66, Snp-a 95, Snp-a 98; Vv-a 175.

fr. mañjūsa

Mañjūsā

(f.) a casket; used for keeping important documents in Ja ii.36 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ mañjūsāya nikkhipāpesi); iv.335 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ sāra-mañjūsāyaṃ ṭhapetvā kālam akāsi).

cp. Epic Sk. mañjūṣā

Mañjeṭṭha

(adj.) light (bright) red, crimson, usually enumd in set of 5 principal colours with nīla, pīta, lohitaka, odāta; e.g. at Vin i.25; SN ii.101 (f. mañjeṭṭhā); Vv 221 (Hardy in T. reads mañjaṭṭha, as twice at Vv-a 111, with vv.ll. ˚jiṭṭha ˚jeṭṭha, cp. Corrections & Add;ns on p. 372); Mil 61.

cp. *Sk. mañjiṣṭhā Indian madder

Mañjeṭṭhaka

(adj.) crimson, bright red, fig. shining Vv 391 (cp. defn at Vv-a 177: like the tree Vitex negundo, sindhavāra, or the colour of the Kaṇavīra-bud; same defn at Dhs-a 317, with Sinduvāra for Sindha˚); usually in sequence nīla, pīta, mañjeṭṭhaka, lohitaka, odāta as the 5 fundamental colours: MN i.509 (has ˚eṭṭhika in T. but v.l. ˚eṭṭhaka); Ja vi.185; Dhs 617 ■ f. mañjeṭṭhikā a disease of sugar cane Vin ii.256.

fr. mañjeṭṭha, after lohita + ka

Mañjeṭṭhī

(f.) Bengal madder DN-a i.85.

= Sk. mañjiṣṭhā

Maññati

1. to think, to be of opinion, to imagine, to deem Snp 199 (sīsaṃ… subhato naṃ maññati bālo) 588 (yena yena hi maññanti, tato taṃ hoti aññathā) Ja ii.258 (maññāmi ciraṃ carissati: I imagine he will have to wander a long time) ■ With (double) acc.: to take for, to consider as; na taṃ maññāmi mānusiṃ I deem you are not human Pv ii.41; yassa dāni kālaṃ maññati for this now may he think it time (in a phrase of departure), let him do what he thinks fit, we wait the Buddha’s pleasure, i.e. let it be time to go [so also BSk. manyate kālaṃ, e.g. Divy 50, Divy 64 etc.] DN i.189. Esp. in phrase taṃ kiṃ maññasi (maññatha 2. pl.) what do you think of this? (the foll.), what is your opinion about this? DN i.60; SN iii.104 & passim ■ Pot. 1;st sg maññeyyaṃ I should think Pv-a 40; Pv-a 3rd sg. maññeyya SN iii.103, and maññe Snp 206. The short form 1st sg maññe is used like an adv. as affirmative particle is inserted without influencing the grammatical or syntactical construction of the sentence; meaning methinks, for certain, surely, indeed, I guess, presumably. E. g. DN i.137 (patapati m. paccatthike yasasā); SN i.181 (m. ‘haṃ); iv.289 (paveliyamānena m kāyena); Ja ii.275; Mil 21; Vism 90, Vism 92 (mato me m putto); Dhp-a i.107; Dhp-a ii.51; Pv-a 40 (m. goṇo samuṭṭhahe) 65 (tasmā m. sumuttā) ■ na maññe surely not Dhp-a ii.84; Pv-a 75 (n. m. puññavā rājā).

2. to know, to be convinced, to be sure Snp 840 (= jānāti Nd i.192) 1049, 1142; Nd ii.491 (= jānāti); Dhp-a i.29 (maññāmi tuvaṃ marissasi).

3. to imagine, to be proud (of) to be conceited, to boast Snp 382 (ppr. maññamāna) 806, 813, 855 (maññate); Ja iii.530 (aor. maññi ‘haṃ perhaps maññe ‘haṃ? C. explns by maññāmi) ■ pp mataNote. Another Present form is munāti (q.v.) of which the pp. is muta.

man, Vedic manyate & manute, Av. mainyeite; Idg. *men, cp. Gr. μένος mood, anger = Sk. manah mind; μέμονα to think of, wish to, Lat. memini to think of, mens → mind, meneo; Goth. munan to think muns opinion; Oisl. man, Ags. mon; Ohg. minna love Ags, myne intention. Dhtp 427: man = ñāṇe, 524 bodhane

Maññanā

(f.) conceit Nd i.124 (taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚, māna˚, kilesa˚ etc.); Dhs 1116 Dhs 1233; Ne 24; Vism 265 (for mañcanā?).

fr. man

Maññita

(nt.) illusion, imagination MN i.486. Nine maññitāni (the same list is applied to the phanditāni, the papañcitāni & sankhatāni) at Vb 390: asmi, ayam aham asmi, bhavissaṃ, na bhavissaṃ rūpī bhavissaṃ, arūpī bh., saññī bh., asaññī bh., nevasaññī-nâsaññī-bh.;

pp. of maññati

Maññitatta

(nt.) self-conceit, pride Dhs 1116; Dhs-a 372.

fr. maññita

Maṭaja

(nt.) a certain weapon MN i.281 (˚ṃ nāma āvudhajātaṃ; Neumann trsls “Mordwaffe”).

doubtful

Maṭāhaka

(adj.) short (?) Vin ii.138 (ati˚ = atikhuddaka C.). Matta & Mattha;

doubtful spelling & meaning

Maṭṭa & Maṭṭha

wiped, polished, clean, pure ■ (a) maṭṭa: DN ii.133 (yugaṃ maṭṭaṃ dhāraṇīyaṃ: “pair of robes of burnished cloth of gold and ready for wear” trsl.); Vism 258 (v.l. maṭṭha) Cp. sam.˚-(b) maṭṭha: Vv 8417 (su˚); Mil 248; Dhp-a i.25 (˚kuṇḍalī having burnished earrings); Vv-a 6 (˚vattha). Cp. vi˚.

-sāṭaka a tunic of fine cloth Ja i.304; Ja ii.274; Ja iii.498 Vism 284 (ṭṭh).

pp. of mṛj, see majjati2

Maṇi

1. a gem, jewel At several places one may interpret as “crystal.” DN i.7 (as ornament); Dhp 161; Ja vi.265 (agghiya, precious). In simile at DN i.76 (maṇi veḷuriyo). On maṇi in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121 ■ udaka-pasādaka maṇi a precious stone (crystal?) having the property of making water clear Mil 35 (cp. below Vism 366 passage); cintā˚; a “thought-jewel,” magic stone (crystal?) Ja iii.504; Vv-a 32; cūḷā˚; a jewelled crest or diadem, the crown-jewel Ja v.441 sq.; jāti˚; a genuine precious stone Ja ii.417; Vism 216 (in comparison); tārā˚; (-vitāna) (canopy) of jewelled stars Vism 76; nīla˚; a dark blue jewel Ja ii.112; Ja iv.140; Dhp-a iii.254. The passage “amaṇiṃ udakaṃ maṇiṃ katvā” at Vism 366 (+ asuvaṇṇaṃ leḍḍuṃ suvaṇṇaṃ katvā) refers clearly to meaning “jewel” (that the water is without a jewel or crystal, but is made as clear as crystal; a conjuror’s trick, cp. Mil 35). Whether meaning “waterpot” (as given at Abhp 1113 & found in der. maṇika) is referred to here, is not to be decided

2. a crystal used as burning-glass Mil 54.;

-kāra a jeweller Mil 331; Dhp-a ii.152. -kuṇḍala a jewelled earring, adj. wearing an (ear) ornament of jewels Vin ii.156 (āmutta˚ adorned with… ); Vv 208 (id.); 438 (id.); Pv ii.951 (id.); Th i.187; Dhp 345 (maṇi-kuṇḍalesu = manīsu ca kuṇḍalesu ca maṇicittesu vā kuṇḍalesu, i.e. with gem-studded earrings Dhp-a iv.56). -kuṭṭima at Vv-a 188 is probably to be read as ˚kuṇḍala (v.l. ˚kundima). -khandha “jewelbulk,” i.e. a tremendous jewel, large gem, functioning in tales almost like a magic jewel Ja iii.187; Ja v.37 (˚vaṇṇaṃ udakaṃ water as clear as a large block of crystal), 183 (˚pilandhana). -guhā a jewelled cave cave of crystal Ja ii.417 (where pigs live); Snp-a 66 (one of three, viz. suvaṇṇa-guhā, m.˚, rajata˚. At the entrance of it there grows the Mañjūsaka tree). -canda “the jewelled moon,” i.e. with a crest like the (glittering moon Vv 646 (= maṇi-maya-maṇḍalânuviddha-candamaṇḍala-sadisa maṇi Vb-a 277). -cchāyā reflection of a jewel Ja vi.345. -thūṇā, a jewelled pillar, adj. with jewelled pillars Vv 541, 671. -pabbata mountain of gems Snp-a 358. -pallaṅka a jewelled pallanquin Dhp-a i.274. -bandha (place for) binding the jewel(led bracelet, the wrist Vism 255 = Vb-a 238 = Kp-a 50 (˚aṭṭhi). -bhadda Name of one of 20 classes of people mentioned Mil 191; trsld by Rh. D. Mil trsl. i.266 by “tumblers.” The term occurs also at Nd i.89 Nd i.92. Cp. Sk. Maṇibhadra, Name of a brother of Kuvera & prince of the Yakṣas.; -maya made of, consisting of or caused by jewels Pv ii.64; Vv-a 280; Dhp-a i.29 -ratana a precious stone or mineral, which is a gem (jewel); i.e. maṇi as a kind of ratana, of which there are seven Vism 189 (in sim.); Mil 218. -rūpaka a jewelled image Dhp-a i.370; -lakkhaṇa fortune-telling from jewels DN i.9; Snp-a 564.

-vaṇṇa the colour or appearance of crystal; i.e. as clear as crystal (of water) Ja ii.304 (pasanna + ). -sappa a kind of poisonous snake (i.e. a mysterious, magic snake) DN-a i.197.

cp. Vedic maṇi. The connection with Lat. monile (pendant), proposed by Fick & Grassmann, is doubted by Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. monile, where see other suggestions For further characterisation of maṇi cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben pp. 53, 263

Maṇika

a waterpot MN ii.39. Usually in cpd. udaka˚; Vin i.277; MN i.354; SN iv.316; AN iii.27; Mil 28; Dhp-a i.79. Whether this is an original meaning of the word remains doubtful; the connection with maṇi jewel must have been prevalent at one time.

cp. Class. Sk. maṇika

Maṇīkā

(f.) Name of a charm, the Jewel-charm, by means of which one can read other people’s minds DN i.214 (m. iddhi-vijjā), cp. Dial. i.278 n. 3.).

f. of maṇika, adj. fr. maṇi

Maṇila

a kind of tree Vism 313.

cp. *Sk. maṇila dewlap?

Maṇḍa

the top part, best part of milk or butter, etc. i.e. cream scum; fig. essence of, the pick of, finest part of anything parisā˚; the cream of a gathering, the pick of the congregation, excellent congregation AN i.72 (or for ˚maṇḍala?); bodhi˚; essence of enlightenment, highest state of enlightenment; in later literature objectively “the best place of enlightenment, the Throne of Enlightenment or of the Buddha” (does it stand for ˚maṇḍala in this meaning?) Ja iv.233 (cp. puthavi-maṇḍa ibid. & puthavi-maṇḍala Snp 990); Dhp-a i.86; Dhp-a ii.69 Dhp-a iv.72. sappi˚; “cream of butter,” the finest ghee (cp Avs i.1513 sarpimaṇḍa) DN i.201; AN ii.95; Pp 70; Mil 322maṇḍaṃ karoti to put into the best condition to make pleasant Snp-a 81 ■ manda at Dhs-a 100 is to be read baddha (v.l. BB). Cp. Expos. 132n.

-khetta best soil, fertile ground Mil 255. -peyya to be drunk like cream, i.e. of the finest quality first-class SN ii.20 (˚ṃ idaṃ brahmacariyaṃ).

later Sk. maṇḍa, perhaps dial. from *mranda, cp. Sk. vi-mradati to soften. Attempts at etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mollis. Cp. also mattikā

Maṇḍaka

1. the cream of the milk, whey, in dadhi˚; whey SN ii.111.

2. the scum of stagnant water i.e. anything that floats on the surface & dirties the water, water-weeds, moss etc. Ja ii.304 (gloss sevāla).

fr. maṇḍa

Maṇḍana

(nt.) ornament, adornment, finery DN i.5, DN i.7; Ja vi.64; Pp 21, Pp 58; Vb 351; Vb-a 477 Dhtm 13. See under mada.

-ānuyoga practice of ornamenting, fondness of finery Vin i.190. -jātika of an ornament (-loving) nature fond of dressing DN i.80 = Vin ii.255 = MN ii.19, MN ii.32.

fr. maṇḍ

Maṇḍapa

a temporary shed or hall erected on special or festive occasions, an awning, tent Vin i.125; Vism 96, Vism 300 (dhamma-savaṇa˚), 339 sq (in simile); Dhp-a i.112; Dhp-a ii.45; Dhp-a iii.206 (˚kāraka); Pv-a 74, Pv-a 171, Pv-a 194; Vv-a 173.

cp. late Sk. maṇḍapa

Maṇḍala

1. circle DN i.134 (paṭhavi˚, cp. puthavi˚ Snp 990); Vism 143 (˚ṃ karoti to draw a circle, in simile), 174 (tipu˚ & rajata˚ lead-& silver circle, in kasiṇa practice); Vv-a 147 (of a fan = tālapattehi kata˚-vījanī).

2. the disk of the sun or moon; suriya˚; Vv-a 224, Vv-a 271 (divasa-kara˚); canda˚ Vism 174; Pv-a 65.

3. a round, flat surface, e.g. jānu˚ the disk of the knee, i.e. the knee Pv-a 179 naḷāta˚ the (whole of the) forehead DN i.106; Snp p.108

4. an enclosed part of space in which something happens, a circus ring; e.g. MN i.446 (circus, race-ring) assa˚; horse-circus, raceground, Vism 308; āpāna˚ drinking circle, i.e. hall; kīḷa˚; play-circle, i.e. games Ja vi.332, Ja vi.333; Dhp-a iii.146; keḷi˚; dice board (?) Ja i.379; gā˚; Th i.1143, cp. trs. ib. n. 3; go˚; ox-round Snp 301; jūta˚; dicing table Ja i.293; yuddha˚; fighting-ring Vism 190; raṅga˚; play-house Vv-a 139; vāta˚ tornado Ja i.73.

5. anything comprised within certain limits or boundaries, a group Ja v.418 (chāpa˚ litter of young animals).

6. border as part of a bhikkhu’s dress, hem, gusset Vin i.287; Vin ii.177.

-agga [cp. Sk. maṇḍal’ āgra Halāyudha 2, 317 at Aufrecht p. 301] a circular sword or sabre Mil 339 -māla (sometimes māḷa ) a circular hall with a peaked roof, a pavilion DN i.2, DN i.50 (ḷ); Mil 16 (ḷ); Snp p.104; Snp-a 132 (Npl.); Vv-a 175.

cp. Vedic maṇḍala

Maṇḍalika

(adj.-n.) a district officer king’s deputy Vin iii.47 f. maṇḍalikā = maṇḍala 4 i.e. circus, ring, round, in assa˚; race court Vin iii.6.

fr. maṇḍala, cp. maṇḍalaka-rājā “the king of a small country” Mpt 94

Maṇḍalin

(adj.) 1. circular Thag 863 (maṇḍali-pākāra).

2. having a disk, orbed (of the sun) SN i.51 = Vv-a 116.

fr. maṇḍala

Maṇḍita

adorned, embellished, dressed up Sdhp 244, Sdhp 540. In cpd. ˚pasādhita beautifully adorned at Ja i.489; Ja ii.48; Ja vi.219 ■ Cp. abhi˚.

pp. of maṇḍeti

Maṇḍūka

a frog Vv 512; Ja iv.247; Ja v.307; Ja vi.164; Kp-a 46; Vv-a 217, Vv-a 218; Sdhp 292 f. mandūkī Ja i.341Mandūka is the name of an angel (devaputta) at Vism 208.

-chāpī a young (female) frog Ja vi.192. -bhakkha eating frogs, frog eater (i.e. a snake) Ja iii.16.

Vedic maṇḍūka

Maṇḍeti

to adorn, embellish, beautify Ja iii.138; Dhp-a ii.86 ■ pp. maṇḍita.

maṇḍ to adorn, related to Lat. mundus world, cp. in meaning Gr. κόσμος = ornament Dhtp 103 bhūsane, 566: bhūsāyaṃ

Mata1

thought, understood, considered (as = -˚), only late in use Vb 2 (hīna˚ paṇīta˚, doubtful reading); Sdhp 55; Mvu 25, Mvu 55 (tassā matena according to her opinion); 25, 110 (pasu-samā matā, pl. considered like beasts). Cp. sam˚ ■ Note. Does mata-sāyika at Thag 501 (= Mil 367) belong under this mata? Then mata would have to be taken as nt. meaning “thought thinking,” but the phrase is not without objection both semantically & syntactically. Mrs. Rh. D (;Brethren, p. 240) trsls “nesting-place of thought.”

pp. of maññati

Mata2

dead MN i.88 (ekāha˚ dead one day); iii.159 (matam eyya would go to die); Snp 200, Snp 440; Ja v.480. Neg. amata see separate article ■ Note. mata at Pv-a 110 is to be corrected into cuta.

-kicca duty towards the dead, rites for the dead Pv-a 274.

pp. of marati, mṛ;

Mataka

dead, one who is dead Dhp-a ii.274.

-ākāra condition of one who is dead Ja i.164 (˚ṃ dassati pretends to be dead). -bhatta a meal for the dead, food offered to the manes Ja iv.151; Dhp-a i.326 (= petakicca p. 328); iii.25.

fr. mata2

Mati

(f.) mind, opinion, thought thinking of, hankering after, love or wish for Vin iii.138 (purisa˚ thought of a man); Mvu 3, Mvu 42 (padīpa lamp of knowledge); 15, 214 (amala˚ pure-minded); Pv-a 151 (kāma + ) ■ su˚; (adj.) wise, clever Mvu 15, Mvu 214; opp du˚; (adj.) foolish Ja iii.83 (= duppañña C.); Pv i.82 (= nippañña Pv-a 40); Sdhp 292.

Vedic mati, fr. man: cp. Av. maitiš, Lat. mens, mentem (cp. E. mental); Goth. ga-munds, gaminpi Ohg. gi-munt, E. mind

Matikata

(adj.) in su˚; well-harrowed (field) AN i.229, AN i.239 (khetta).

cp. Sk. matī-kṛta, fr. matya, nt., harrow = Lat. mateola, Ohg. medela plough

Matimant

(adj.) sensible, intelligent, wise, metri causâ as matīmā (fr. matimanto, pl.) at Snp 881 (= matimā paṇḍitā Nd i.289).

mati + mant

Matta1

(-˚) (adj.) “by measure,” measured, as far as the measure goes, i.e ■ (1) consisting of, measuring (with numerals or similar expressions): appamatto kali Snp 659; pañcamattā sata 500; DN-a i.35; saṭṭhimatte saṭṭhimatte katvā Snp-a 510 māsamattaṃ Pv-a 55; ekādasa˚ ib. 20; dvādasa˚ 42 satta˚ 47; tiṃsamattehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ 53 ■ (2 (negative) as much as, i.e. only, a mere, even as little as, the mere fact (of), not even (one), not any: aṇumattena pi puññena Snp 431; kaṭacchumattaṃ (not even a spoonful Mil 8; ekapaṇṇa˚ Pv-a 115; citta ˚ṃ pi (not) even as much as one thought ib. 3; nāma˚ a mere name Mil 25; phandana ˚ṃ not even one throb Ja vi.7; phandita˚ the mere fact of… MN ii.24, bindu only one drop Pv-a 100; rodita˚ MN ii.24 ■ (3) (positive as much as, so much, some, enough (of); vibhava riches enough Ja v.40; kā pi assāsa-mattā laddhā found some relief? Pv-a 104 (may be = mattā f.) ■ (4) like just as what is called, one may say (often untranslateable): sita˚-kāraṇā just because he smiled Vv-a 68 bhesajja-mattā pītā I have taken medicine DN i.205 (= mattā f.?) okāsa-˚ṃ (nt.) permission Snp p.94 putta˚ like children AN ii.124; maraṇa˚ (almost) dead MN i.86; attano nattumatte vandanto Dha iv.178. f mattī (= mattin?) see mātu˚ ■ (5) as adv. (usually in oblique cases): even at, as soon as, because of, often with other particles, like api, eva, pi, yeva: vuttamatte eva as soon as said Dhp-a i.330; cintitamatte at the mere thought Dhp-a i.326; naṃ jātamattaṃ yeva as soon as he was born Pv-a 195; anumodana-mattena because of being pleased Pv-a 121; upanītamattam eva as soon as it was bought Pv-a 192; nimujjana-matte yeva as soon as she ducked her head under Pv-a 47-na mattena… eva not only… but even Pv-a 18 (n. m. nipphalā, attano dānaphalassa bhāgino eva honti).

i.e. mattā used as adj.

Matta2

intoxicated (with), full of joy about (-˚), proud of, conceited Snp 889 (mānena m.); Ja iv.4 (vedanā˚, full of pain, perhaps better with v.l. ˚patta for ˚matta); Vv-a 158 (hatthi matto elephant in rut) Dhp-a iv.24 (id.); Pv-a 47 (surā˚), 86 (māna-mada˚), 280 (bhoga-mada˚).

-kāsinī see matthak’ āsinī.

pp. of madati

Mattaka

(adj.) 1. of the size of Sdhp 238 (pāṇi˚).

2. only as much as, mere DN i.12 (appa˚ ora˚, sīla˚); Ja iv.228 (mana˚); Dhp-a iv.178 (pitumattakaṃ gahetvā).

fr. matta1

Mattatta

(nt.) (the fact of) consisting of, or being only… Pv-a 199 (maṃsa-pesi˚).

abstr. fr. matta

Mattā

(f.) measure, quantity, right measure, moderation Snp 971 (mattaṃ so jaññā); Dhp i.35 (mattā ti pamāṇaṃ vuccati) ■ Abl. mattaso in ˚kārin doing in moderation, doing moderately Pp 37 (= pamānena padesa-mattam eva karontī ti) ■ In cpds shortened to matta˚.

-aṭṭhiya (mattaṭṭhiya = ˚atthika) desirous of moderation moderate Thag 922. -ññu knowing the right measure, moderate, temperate (bhojane or bhojanamhi in eating) AN ii.40; Snp 338; Pp 25; Dhp 8. Cp. jāgariyā -ññutā moderation (in eating) DN iii.213; Nd i.483; Dhp 185; Pp 25; Vb 249, Vb 360; Dhs 1348; Dhp-a ii.238. -sukha (metri causâ: mattā-sukha) measured happiness, i.e. small happiness Dhp 290 (cp. Dhp-a iii.449).

Vedic mātrā, of

Matti

(-sambhava) born (from a mother) Snp 620 (= mātari sambhūta Snp-a 466) = Dhp 396 (= mātu santike udarasmiṃ sambhūta Dhp-a iv.158).

for *māti˚ = mātu˚ = *mātṛ, after pitti˚ = pitu˚ = *pitṛ

Mattika

(adj.) (˚-) made of clay, clay-; only in cpds.:

-kuṇḍala clay earring SN i.79 (v.l. mattikā˚). -bhājana clay or earthenware vessel Snp 577; Vism 231 (in comparison); Dhp-a i.130. -vāka clay fibre Dhs-a 321 (v.l. ˚takka, perhaps gloss = takku spindle, see takka1).

fr. mattikā

Mattikā

(f.) 1. clay Ja vi.372; Mvu 29, Mvu 5 sq ■ tamba˚; red clay Dhp-a iv.106; Pv-a 191. mattikā pl. kinds of clay (used in cosmetics, like Fuller’s earth) Ja v.89 (nānā-cunṇāni mattikā; see also cuṇṇa).

2. loam, mud MN iii.94 (alla˚ fresh loam or mud); Vism 123 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā) Kp-a 59 (paṇḍu); Vv-a 65; Pv-a 216 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā).

-thāla bowl of clay Dhp-a iv.67. -piṇḍa a lump of clay or loam DN-a i.289; same trope at Pv-a 175.

cp. Vedic mṛttikā, der. fr. Vedic mṛt (mṛd) soil, earth, clay; with P. maṇḍa, Sk, vimradati. Gr. βλαδαρός soft, Osil. mylsna dust, Goth. mulda, Ags molde (E. mould, mole = mouldwarp), to same root mṛd as in Sk. mṛdu = Lat. mollis soft, Gr. ἀμαλδύνω to weaken, Sk. mardati & mṛdnāti to crush, powder, Caus mardayati; also in cognate ˚mḷd as appearing in Gr. μέλδω to melt = Ags meltan, Ohg. smëlzan

Matteyya

(& metteyya) (adj.) reverential towards one’s mother, motherloving DN iii.74; Pv ii.718 (= mātu hita Pv-a 104 v.l. mett˚). Spelling at DN iii.72 is metteyya. It is difficult to decide about correct spelling, as metteyya is no doubt influenced by the foll. petteyya, with which it is always combined.

fr. mātā, *mātreyya → *matteyya

Matteyyatā

(& mett˚) (f.) filial love towards one’s mother; always combd with petteyyatā DN iii.145 (v.l. mett˚); Nd ii.294 (mett˚), Dhp 332; Dhp-a iv.33.

abstr. fr. matteyya

Mattha

the head, etc. Only in cpd. mattha-luṅga [cp. Sk. mastulunga] the brain Vin i.274; Snp 199; Kp iii.; Ja i.493; Kp-a 60; Vism 260 (in detail) 264, 359; Vb-a 63, Vb-a 243, Vb-a 249; Dhp-a ii.68; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 80 ■ See also matthaka.

cp. Vedic masta(ka) skull, head, Vedic mastiṣka brains; perhaps to Lat. mentum chin, Cymr. mant jawbone; indirectly also to Lat. mons mountain

Matthaka

the head, fig. top, summit Ja iii.206 = Ja iv.4; Ja iv.173, Ja iv.457; Ja v.478; DN-a i.226 (pabbata˚); Pv iv.163; Dhp-a i.184. matthaka-matthakena (from end to end) Ja i.202; Ja iii.304. Loc. matthake as adv. (1) at the head Dhp-a i.109; (2) at the distance of (-˚) Dhp-a i.367; (3) on top of (-˚) Ja v.163 (vammīka˚); Mvu 23, Mvu 80 (sīsa˚); Yugandhara˚ Mil 6; Dhp-a ii.3 (uddhana˚).

-āsin sitting on top (of the mountain) Ja vi.497 (= pabbata-matthake nisinna C.; gloss matta-kāsin i.e. wildly in love, expld by kāma-mada-matta). The reading is not clear. -tela oil for the head Kp-a 64 (= muddhani tela Vism 262).

cp. mattha

Mathati

to churn, to shake, disturb, upset. Only in Caus. matheti to agitate, crush, harass, upset (cittaṃ SN iv.210; Snp 50 (= tāseti hāpeti Nd ii.492); Pv iv.71 (kammānaṃ vipāko mathaye manaṃ; C 264: abhibhaveyya); Mil 385 (vāyu pādape mathayati;… kilesā mathayitabbā) ■ pp. mathita. See also abhimatthati (sic) & nimmatheti.

Vedic math, manth to twirl, shake about, stir etc.; cp. Lat. mamphur part of the lathe = Ger. mandel (“mangle”), E. mandrel; Lith. mentùris churning stick, Gr. μόχος tumult μόχουρα shaft of rudder. The Dhtp (126) gives both roots (math & manth) and expl;s by “viḷolana,” as does Dhtm (183) by “viḷoṭana”

Mathana

(adj. nt.) shaking up, crushing, harassing, confusing Mil 21 (+ maddana); Dhp-a i.312; Pv-a 265.

fr. math

Mathita

. 1. (churned) buttermilk Vin ii.301 (amathita-kappa).

2. upset, mentally unbalanced state, disturbance of mind through passion conceit, etc. MN i.486 (maññita + ). Neumann trsls “Vermutung” i.e. speculation, guessing (v.l. matth˚).

pp. of matheti

Mada

1. intoxication sensual excess, in formula davāya madāya maṇḍanāya (for purposes of sport, excess, personal charm etc. MN i.355 = AN ii.40 = Nd i.496 = Nd ii.540 = Pp 21 = Dhs 1346, Dhs 1348. The commentator’s explns bearing directly or indirectly on this passage distinguish several kinds of mada, viz. māna-mada & purisa-; mada (at Dhs-a 403 Vism 293), or muṭṭhika-mall’ ādayo viya madatthaṃ bala- mada-nimittaṃ porisa- mada-nimittañ cā ti vuttaṃ (at Vism 31). Snp 218 (mada-pamāda on which passage Snp-a 273 comments on mada with jāti-mad’ ādi-bhedā madā).

2. (as mental state or habit) pride, conceit Mil 289 (māna, m., pamāda); Vb 345 (where 27 such states are given, beginning with jāti˚, gotta˚, ārogya˚ yobbana˚, jīvita-mada), 350 (where mada is paraphrased by majjanā majjitattaṃ māno… uṇṇati… dhajo sampaggāho ketukamyatā cittassa: same formula, as concluding exegesis of māna at Nd ii.505; Dhs 1116); sometimes more def. characterised with phrase mada-matta elated with the pride or intoxication of… (-˚). e.g. AN i.147 (yobbana˚, ārogya˚ jīvita˚); Pv-a 86 (māna˚), 280 (bhoga˚) ■ The traditional exegesis distinguishes only 3 mada’s, viz. ārogya- mada the pride of health, yobbana˚; of youth, jīvita˚; of life: DN iii.220; AN i.146.

-nimmadana “disintoxication from intoxication, freedom from pride or conceit AN ii.34; Bv i.81; Vism 293.

Vedic mada, mad (see majjati), Idg. *mad, as in Av. mata intoxication, drink, mad, to get intoxicated orig. meaning “drip, be full of liquid or fat”; cp. Gr. μαδάω dissolve, μαστός breast (μαζός → Amazone), Lat madeo to be wet, Ohg. mast fattening, Sk. meda grease fat, Gr. μέζεα· μεστός full; Goth. mats eatables, Ags mōs, Ohg. muos = gemüse, etc. Perhaps connected with *med in Lat. medeor to heal. For further relations see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. madeo ■ The Dhtp (412) Dhtm (642) explain; mad by “ ummādeDhtm 210 also by “muda, mada = santose”

Madana

(nt.) lit. making drunk, intoxication Nd ii.540 C. (in formula davāya madāya madanāya instead of maṇḍanāya: see under mada 1); in cpd ˚yuta intoxicated, a name for the Yakkhas Ja i.204. Cp. nimmadana.

fr. mad

Madanīya

(adj. nt.) 1. intoxicating DN ii.185 (sadda vaggu rajanīya kāmanīya m.).

2. intoxication Vv-a 73.

orig. grd. of madati

Madirā

(f.) intoxicating drink, spirit Ja v.425; Dhs-a 48.

of adj. Vedic madira intoxicating

Madda

1. crushing etc.; kneading, paste, in piṭṭha paste of flower Vin ii.151; Ja iii.226 (piṭṭhi˚).

2. [dialectical, cp. Sk. madra] Name of a country & its inhabitants, in; ˚raṭṭha Snp-a 68 sq. ˚rājakula Kp-a 73.

-viṇā a sort of girdle Vin ii.136.

fr. mṛd, Sk. marda

Maddati

1. to tread on, trample on (acc.), crush Ja iii.245 Ja iii.372 (ppr. maddamāna); Dhp-a ii.66.

2. to defeat destroy Snp 770 (= abhibhavati Nd i.12); Nd ii.85 (madditvā = abhibhuyya); Snp-a 450; Mvu 1, Mvu 41 ■ fig. to crush a heresy: vādaṃ m. Mvu 36, Mvu 41.

3. to neglect (an advice), spurn Ja iii.211 (ovādaṃ).

4. to mix up knead, jumble together Dhp-a ii.155.

5. to thresh Ja i.215.

6. to break down, upset Ja i.500 (vatiṃ, a fence).

7. to draw together (a net) Ja i.208 ■ Caus. I maddeti to cause to be trampled on Mvu 29. 4 (aor maddayi) ■ Caus. II. maddāpeti to cause to be threshed Vin ii.180 ■ pp. maddita. See also pari˚.

cp. Vedic mṛd to crush: see etym. under mattikā

Maddana

(nt.) 1. crushing, grinding, destroying Ja iv.26; Mil 21 (adj., + mathana) Sdhp 449; Dhtp 156.

2. threshing Mil 360 ■ See also nimmaddana, pamaddana, parimaddana.

cp. Epic Sk. mardana, fr. mṛd

Maddarī

(f.) a species of bird, in cpd. ambaka˚; AN i.188.

?

Maddava

(adj. nt.) 1. mild, gentle, soft, suave Dhs 1340; Vb 359; Mil 229 (cittaṃ mudukaṃ m. siniddhaṃ), 313 (mudu˚), 361 (among the 30 best virtues, with siniddha & mudu).; 2. (fr. madda) as Np. name of a king, reigning in Sāgala, the capital of Madda.

3. withered Dhp 377 (= milāta Dhp-a iv.112) ■ nt. maddavaṃ mildness softness, gentleness Snp 250 (ajjava + ), 292 (id.); Ja iii.274 (as one of the 10 rāja-dhammā); v.347 (= mettacittaṃ); Dhs-a 151. See also sūkara˚.

fr. mṛdu, cp. Epic Sk. mārdava

Maddavatā

(f.) gentleness, softness, suavity Dhs 44, Dhs 1340; Dhs-a 151.

abstr. fr. maddava

Maddālaka

a kind of bird Ja vi.538.

etym.?

Maddita

1. kneaded, mixed, in su˚; Vism 124.

2. crushed, defeated, in su˚; Mil 284 ■ Cp. pa˚, pari˚.

pp. of maddeti, see maddati

Maddin

(adj.) crushing, destroying Sdhp 218. Cp. pamaddin.

fr. mṛd, cp. Sk. mardin = mardana

Maddhita

see pari˚.

of mṛdh

Madhu

dripping with honey, full of honey Ja iii.493 (so read for madh-atthika); vi.529 (= madhuṃ paggharanto C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. unnecessarily reads as ˚atthika which he takes = ˚aṭṭhika. -da giving honey liberal Mvu 5, Mvu 60 (Asoka). -paṭala honey-comb Ja i.262; Dhp-a i.59; Dhp-a iii.323. -piṇḍikā a ball of honey (to eat), honey-food, a meal with honey Vin i.4; MN i.114. -pīta having drunk honey, drunk with honey SN i.212. -(b)bata “courting honey,” a bee Dāvs iii.65 -bindu a drop of honey Vism 531; Vb-a 146 (˚giddha in comparison). -makkhitā smeared with honey Ja i.158. -madhuka dripping with honey, full of honey Ja vi.529. -mehika referring to a particular disease madhumeha (“honey-urine,” diabetes?) Vin iv.8 -laṭṭhikā liquorice (no ref.?); cp. Laṭṭhi-madhukavana Ja i.68. -lāja sweet corn Ja iv.214, Ja iv.281. -vāṇija honey seller Mvu 5, Mvu 49. -ssava flowing with honey Pv ii.911.

cp. Vedic madhu, Gr. μέχυ wine, Lith. medùs honey, midùs wine, Ohg. metu = Ger. met wine. Most likely to root *med to be full of juice: see under madati honey Ja i.157 sq.; Ja iv.117; Dhp 69 (madhū vā read as madhuvā); Mvu 5, Mvu 53; Dhs-a 330; Dhp-a ii.197 (alla fresh honey) ■ pl. madhūni Mvu 5, Mvu 31 ■ The Abhp (533) also gives “wine from the blossom of Bassia latifolia” as meaning ■ On madhu in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. -atthika (madh˚) at Ja iii.493 is with v.l. to be read madhu-tthika (q.v. below). The proposal of Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) to read madh’ aṭṭhika “with sweet kernels cannot be accepted. The C. explns rightly by “madhura-phalesu pakkhitta-madhu viya, madhura-phalo hutvā.” -atthika (madhu˚) desirous of honey, seeking honey Ja iv.205; Mvu 5, Mvu 50. -āpaṇa (madhv˚) honey shop Mvu 5, Mvu 52. -āsava (madhv˚) honey extract wine from the flower of Bassia latifolia Vv-a 73 (as one of the 5 kinds of intoxicating liquors). -kara “honey-maker,” bee Ja iv.265; Vism 136 (in simile) Dhp-a i.374. -gaṇḍa honey-comb Mvu 22, Mvu 42; Mvu 34, Mvu 52 -tthika [madhu + thika, which latter stands for thīya fr. styā to congeal, drip; see thika, thīna, thīya and theva

Madhuka

(adj. n.) connected with honey. 1. (n.) the tree Bassia latifolia (lit. honey tree) Vin i.246; Ja v.324, Ja v.405; Ja vi.529; Mil 165.

2. the fruit of that tree Ja iv.434.

3. (adj.) (-˚) full of honey Ja vi.529 (madhu˚ containing honey).

4. connected with an intoxicating drink, given to the drink of (-˚ Ja iv.117 (surā-meraya˚).

-aṭṭhika the kernel (of the fruit) of Bassia latifolia Vism 353 = Kp-a 43 (which latter reads madhukaphal’ aṭṭhi; in the description of the finger nails) -puppha the flower of Bassia latifolia from which honey is extracted for liquor Vin i.246 (˚rasa liquorice juice) Ja i.430.

fr. madhu

Madhukā

(f.) honey drink, sweet drink, liquor Mvu 5, Mvu 52.

fr. madhuka

Madhura

(adj.) 1. sweet Snp 50; Ja iii.493; Ja v.324; Pv ii.67; Pv-a 119, Pv-a 147.

2. of intoxicating sweetness, liquor-like, intoxicating Ja iv.117.

3. (nt. sweetness, sweet drink Dhp 363; Ja i.271 (catu˚ the 4 sweet drinks, used as cure after poison); Dhs 629; Dhs-a 320.

4. (nt.) flattery, praise Snp-a 287 (opp avaṇṇa).

-rasa sweet (i.e. honey-) juice, sweet liquor Dhp-a ii.50; Pv-a 119. -ssara sweet-sounding Vv-a 57; Pv-a 151; Mvu 5, Mvu 32.

fr. madhu

Madhuraka

(adj.) full of sweet drink, intoxicated, in phrase madhuraka-jātokāyo viya “like an intoxicated body, i.e. without control, weak. The usual translation has been “become languid or weak” (“erschlafft” Ger.) Franke, Dīgha Übs. 202 (where more literature) translates: “Ich fūhlte mich schwach, wie ein zartes Pflänzchen,” hardly justifiable ■ DN ii.99; MN i.334; SN iii.106; AN iii.69. The description refers to a state of swooning like one in a condition of losing consciousness through intoxication. Rh. D. (Dial. ii.107) translates “my body became weak as a creeper,” hardly correct.

taken as noun also by Winternitz (Rel. gesch. Lesebuch 301) “wohl eine zarte Pflanze mit schwachen Stengel.” F. L. Woodward follows me in discarding trsln “creeper” and assuming one like “intoxicated” (so also UdA, 246): see his note on SN iii.106 trsln (K.S. iii.90).

fr. madhura, cp. similarly madhuka → madhu

Madhuratā

(f.) sweetness Ja i.68.

abstr. fr. madhura

Madhuratta

(nt.) sweetness Mvu 2, Mvu 13.

abstr. fr. madhura

Manaṃ

(adv.) “by a certain weight,” i.e. a little, somewhat, almost, well-nigh, nearly. Combd with vata in exclamation: MN ii.123 (m. v. bho anassāma); Dhp-a iii.147 (m. v. therī nāsitā). Often in phrase man amhi (with pp.). “I nearly was so & so,” e.g. Vin i.109 (vuḷho); Ja i.405 (upakūḷito); iii.435 (matā) 531 (mārāpito). Cp. BSk. manāsmi khāditā Mvu ii.450.

cp. Class. Sk. manāk, “a little (of something)” prob. derived from Vedic manā f. a. gold weight = Gr. μν ̈α

Manatā

(f.) mentality Dhs-a 143 (in expln of attamanatā).

abstr. fr. mano

Manasa

(adj.) having a mind with such & such a mind Snp 942 (nibbāna˚ “a nibbāna mind,” one who is intent upon N., cp. expln at Snp-a 567); Pv i.66 (paduṭṭha-manasā f., maybe ˚mānasā but Pv-a 34 explns “paduṭṭha-cittā paduṭṭhena vā manasā). See also adhimanasa under adhimana.

the-˚ form of mano, an enlarged form, for which usually either ˚mana or ˚mānasa

Manassa

(nt.) of a mind, only in cpds. do˚ & so˚ (q.v.).;

*manasyaṃ, abstr. der. fr. mana(s)

Manāti

to crush, destroy; only in Commentator’s fanciful etymological analysis of veramaṇī at Dhs-a 218 (veraṃ manāti (sic.) vināsetī ti v. and Kp-a 24 (veraṃ maṇātī ti v., veraṃ pajahati vinodeti etc.).

cp. Sk. mṛṇāti, mṛ2

Manāpa

(adj.) pleasing, pleasant, charming Snp 22, Snp 759; Dhp 339 (˚ssavana); Vv-a 71; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 9. Often in combn piya manāpa, e.g. DN ii.19 DN iii.167; Ja ii.155; Ja iv.132 ■ Opp. ; e.g. Pp 32.

cp. BSk. manāpa

Manāpika

= manāpa, Vb 380; Mil 362.

Manuja

human being; man AN iv.159; Snp 458 Snp 661, Snp 1043 sq.; Dhp 306, Dhp 334. Nd ii.496 (explns as “manussa” & “satta”).

-ādhipa lord of men Mvu 19, Mvu 32. -inda king of men great king Snp 553; Ja vi.98.

manu + ja, i.e. sprung from Manu, cp. etym. of manussa s. v.

Manuñña

(adj.) pleasing, delightful, beautiful Vv 8417 (= manorama Vv-a 340); Ja i.207 Ja ii.331; Pv ii.122; iv.121; Mil 175, Mil 398; Vv-a 11, Vv-a 36; Pv-a 251; adv. ˚ṃ pleasantly, delightfully Ja iv.252. Opp. ; unpleasant Ja vi.207.

cp. Class. Sk. manojña

Manute

to think, discern, understand Dhs-a 123.

Med. form of maññati

Manussa

a human being, man The popular etym. connects m. with Manu(s), the ancestor of men, e.g. Kp-a 123: “Manuno apaccā ti manussā, porāṇā pana bhaṇanti ʻmana-ussannatāya manussaʼ; te Jambudīpakā, Aparagoyānikā, Uttarakurukā Pubbavidehakā ti catubbidhā.” Similarly with the other view of connecting it with “mind Vv-a 18: “manassa ussannatāya manussā” etc. Cp also Vv-a 23, where manussa-nerayika, ˚peta, ˚tiracchāna are distinguished ■ Snp 75, Snp 307, Snp 333 sq., 611 sq. Dhp 85, Dhp 188, Dhp 197 sq., 321; Nd i.97 (as gati), 340, 484 (˚phassa of Snp 964); Vism 312; Vb-a 455 (var. clans) Dhp-a i.364amanussa not human, a deva, a ghost a spirit; in cpds. “haunted,” like ˚kantāra Ja i.395 ˚ṭṭhāna Vv 843 (cp. Vv-a 334 where expld); ˚sadda Dhp-a i.315. See also separately amanussa.

-attabhāva human existence Pv-a 71, Pv-a 87, Pv-a 122. -itthi a human woman Pv-a 48, Pv-a 154. -inda lord of men SN i.69; Mvu 19, Mvu 33. -khādaka man eater, cannibal (usually appld to Yakkhas) Vb-a 451. -deva (a) “god of men,” i.e. king Pv ii.811; (b) men & gods (?) Vv-a 321 (Hardy, in note takes it as “gods of men,” i.e. brāhmaṇā). -dhamma condition of man, human state Vv-a 24. See also uttari-manussa dhamma. -bhūta as a human, in human form Pv i.112; ii.112. -loka the world of men Snp 683.

fr. manus, cp. Vedic manuṣya. Connected etym. with Goth. manna = man

Manussatta

(nt.) human existence, state of men Iti 19; Vv 3416; Snp-a 48, Snp-a 51; Sdhp 17 sq.

abstr. fr, manussa

Manussika

(adj.) see under a˚.

fr. manussa

Manesikā

(f.) “mind-searching,” i.e. guessing the thoughts of others, mind-reading; a practice forbidden to bhikkhus DN i.7 (= m. nāma manasā cintita-jānana-kīḷā DN-a i.86); Vin ii.10.

mano + esikā2

Mano & Mana(s)

(nt.) I. Declension. Like all other nouns of old s-stems mano has partly retained the s forms (cp cetah → ceto) & partly follows the a-declension. The form mano is found throughout in cpds. as; mano˚; the other mana at the end of cpds. as ˚mana. From stem manas an adj. manasa is formed and the der. mānasa & manassa; (-˚) ■ nom. mano freq.; & manaṃ Dhp 96 acc. mano Snp 270, Snp 388; Snp-a 11, and freq.; also manaṃ Snp 659 = AN ii.3; AN v.171 = Ne 132; Snp 678; Cp i.85 Vism 466; gen. dat. manaso Snp 470, Snp 967; Dhp 390 (manaso piya); Pv ii.111 (manaso piya = manasā piya Pv-a 71); instr. manasā Snp 330, Snp 365, Snp 834 (m. cintayanto) 1030; MN iii.179; Dhp 1; Pv ii.97 (m. pi cetaye); also manena Dhp-a i.42; Dhs-a 72; abl. manato SN iv.65; Dhp-a i.23; Vism 466; loc. manasmiṃ SN iv.65; manamhi Vism 466; also mane Dhp-a i.23, & manasi (see this in compn manasi karoti, below) ■ II. Meaning: mind thought DN iii.96, DN iii.102, DN iii.206, DN iii.226, DN iii.244, DN iii.269, DN iii.281; SN i.16 SN i.172; SN ii.94; MN iii.55; AN iii.443; AN v.171; Snp 77, Snp 424, Snp 829 Snp 873; Dhp 116, Dhp 300; Sdhp 369.

1. Mano represents the intellectual functioning of consciousness, while viñnāṇa represents the field of sense and sense-reaction (“perception”), and citta the subjective aspect of consciousness (cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhist Psychology p. 19-The rendering with “mind” covers most of the connotation; sometimes it may be translated “thought. As “mind” it embodies the rational faculty of man which, as the subjective side in our relation to the objective world, may be regarded as a special sense, acting on the world, a sense adapted to the rationality (reasonableness, dhamma) of the phenomena, as our eye is adapted to the visibility of the latter. Thus it ranges as the 6th sense in the classification of the senses and their respective spheres (the āyatanāni or relations of subject and object, the ajjhattikāni & the bāhirāni see āyatana 3). These are: (1); cakkhu (eye) which deals with the sight of form (rūpa); (2) sota (ear dealing with the hearing of sound (sadda); (3) ghāna (nose) with the smelling of smells (gandha); (4) jivhā (tongue), with the tasting of tastes (rasa); (5) kāya (touch), with the touching of tangible objects (phoṭṭhabba); (6) mano, with the sensing (viññāya) of rational objects or cognisables (dhamma). Thus it is the sensus communis (Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. 140 163) which recognises the world as a “mundus sensibilis” (dhamma). Both sides are an inseparable unity: the mind fits the world as the eye fits the light or in other words: mano is the counterpart of dhammā the subjective dh. Dhamma in this sense is the rationality or lawfulness of the Universe (see dhamma B. 1), Cosmic Order, Natural Law. It may even be taken quite generally as the “empirical. world” (as Geiger, e.g. interprets it in his Pali Dhamma p. 80

82 pointing out the substitution of vatthu for dhamma at Kv 126 sq. i.e. the material world), as the world of “things,” of phenomena in general without specification as regards sound, sight, smell, etc ■ Dhamma as counterpart of mano is rather an abstract (pluralistic representation of the world, i.e. the phenomena as such with a certain inherent rationality; manas is the receiver of these phenomena in their abstract meaning, it is the abstract sense, so to speak. Of course, to explain manas and its function one has to resort to terms of materiality, and thus it happens that the term vijānāti used of manas, is also used of the 5th sense, that of touch (to which mano is closely related, cp. our E expressions of touch as denoting rational, abstract processes: warm & cold; used figuratively; to grasp anything; terror-stricken; deeply moved feeling → Lat palpare to palpitate, etc.). We might say of the mind “sensing,” that manas “senses” (as a refined sense of touch) the “sensibility” (dhamma) of the objects, or as Cpd. 183 expresses it “cognizable objects.” See also kāya II.; and phassa.

2. In Buddhist Psychological Logic the concept mano is often more definitely circumscribed by the addition of the terms (man-) āyatana (man-) indriya and (mano-) dhātu, which are practically all the same as mano (and its objective correspondent dhammā). Cp. also below No. 3. The additional terms try to give it the rank of a category of thought On mano-dhātu and m-āyatana see also the discourse by S. Z. Aung. Cpd. 256

59, with Mrs. Rh. D.’s apt remarks on p. 259 ■ The position of manas among the 6 āyatanas (or indriyas ) is one of control over the other 5 (pure and simple senses). This is expressed e.g. at MN i.295 (commented on at Dhs-a 72) and SN v.217 (mano nesaṃ gocara-visayaṃ paccanubhoti: mano enjoys the function-spheres of the other senses; cp. Geiger Dhamma 81; as in the Sānkhya: Garbe, Sānkhya Philosophie 252 sq.). Cp. Vin i.36; “ettha ca te mano na ramittha rūpesu saddesu atho rasesu.”

3. As regards the relation of manas to citta, it may be stated that citta is more substantial (as indicated by translation “heart”), more elemental as the seat of emotion, whereas manas is the finer element, a subtler feeling or thinking as such. See also citta2 I., and on rel. to viññāṇa & citta see citta;2 IV. 2b. In the more popular opinion and general phraseology however manas is almost synonymous with citta as opposed to body cittaṃ iti pi mano iti pi SN ii.94. So in the triad “thought (i.e. intention) speech and action” manas interchanges with citta: see kāya III ■ The formula runs kāyena vācāya manasā, e.g. MN iii.178 (sucaritaṃ caritvā) Dhp 391 (natthi dukkaṭaṃ), cp. Dhp 96; santaṃ tassa manaṃ, santā vācā ca kamma ca. Besides with citta kāyena vācāya uda cetasā SN i.93, SN i.102; AN i.63. rakkhitena k. vācāya cittena SN ii.231; SN iv.112 ■ It is further combd with citta in the scholastic (popular) definition of manas, found in identical words at all Cy. passages “mano” is “cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ hadayaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ man-āyatanaṃ… mano-viññāna-dhātu” (mind sensibility). Thus e.g. at Nd i.3 (for mano), 176 (id.) Nd ii.494 (which however leaves out cittaṃ in exegesis of Snp 1142, Snp 1413, but has it in No. 495 in exegesis of Snp 1039); Dhs 6 (in defn of citta), 17 (of man’ indriyaṃ) 65 (of man-āyatanaṃ), 68 (of mano-viññṇa-dhātu). The close relation between the two appears further from their combn in the formula of the ādesanā-pāṭihāriyaṃ (wonder of manifestation, i.e. the discovery of other peoples’ thoughts & intentions), viz. evam pi te; mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṃ: “so & so is in your mind… so & so are your emotions”; DN i.213 DN iii.103 = AN i.170 ■ At SN i.53 both are mutually influenced in their state of unsteadiness and fear: niccaṃ utrastaṃ idaṃ cittaṃ (heart), niccaṃ ubbiggaṃ idaṃ mano (mind). The same relation (citta as instrument or manifestation of mano) is evident from Ja i.36, where the passage runs: sīho cittaṃ pasādesi. Satthā tassa manaṃ oloketva vyākāsi… At Pv-a 264 mano (of Pv iv.71) is expld by cittaṃ; pīti mano of Snp 766 (glad of heart) expld at Snp-a 512 by santuṭṭha-citto; nibbānamanaso of Snp 942 at Snp-a 567 by nibbāna-ninna- citto In the phrase yathā-manena “from his heart,” i.e. sincerely, voluntarily Dhp-a i.42, mano clearly acts as citta.

4. Phrases: manaṃ uppādeti to make up one’s mind, to resolve Dhp-a ii.140 (cp. citt’ uppāda); manaṃ karoti: (a) to fix one’s mind upon, to give thought to find pleasure or to delight in (loc.) Ja iv.223 (rūpe na manaṃ kare = itthi-rūpe nimittaṃ na gaṇheyyāsi C Cp. the similar & usual manasi-karoti in same sense) vi.45 (Pass. gīte karute mano); (b) to make up one’s mind Dhp-a ii.87; manaṃ gaṃhāti to “take the mind, take the fancy, to please, to win approval Ja iv.132; Dhp-a ii.48 ■ III. ˚mana: dhamm-uddhacca-viggahita AN ii.157 (read ˚mano for ˚manā); sankiliṭṭha-manā narā Thig 344; atta˚ pleased; gedhita˚; greedy Pv ii.82 dum˚; depressed in mind, sad or sick at heart DN ii.148; SN i.103; Vin i.21; AN ii.59, AN ii.61, AN ii.198; Thig 484; Ja i.189 opp. sumana elated, joyful Pv ii.948 (= somanassajāta Pv-a 132); pīti˚; glad or joyful of heart Snp 766 (expld by tuṭṭha-mano, haṭṭha-mano, attamano etc at Nd i.3; by santuṭṭha-citto at Snp-a 512) ■ IV. manasi-karoti (etc.) to fix the mind intently, to bear in mind, take to heart, ponder, think upon, consider recognise.

1. (v.) pres. 1st pl. ˚karoma Vin i.103 imper. 2nd sg. ˚karohi, often in formula “suṇāhi sādhukaṃ m ■ k.” “harken and pay attention” DN i.124, DN i.157, DN i.249 cp. MN i.7; AN i.227; pl. 2nd ˚karotha AN i.171; DN i.214 (+ vitakketha); Pot. ˚kareyyātha DN i.90 (taṃ atthaṃ sādhukaṃ k.); ppr. ˚karonto Dhs-a 207; ger. ˚katvā AN ii.116 (aṭṭhikatvā + .… ohitasoto suṇāti); Pv iii.25 (a˚ = anāvajjetvā Pv-a 181); Vv-a 87, Vv-a 92; Pv-a 62; grd. ˚kātabba Vism 244, Vism 278; Dhs-a 205; aor manas-ākāsi MN ii.61; MN ii.2nd pl. (Prohib.) (mā) manasākattha DN i.214; AN i.171. Pass. manasi -karīyati Vism 284.

2. (n.) manasikāra attention, pondering, fixed thought (cp. Cpd. 12, 28, 40, 282) DN iii.104, DN iii.108 sq. 112, 227 (yoniso), 273 (ayoniso); MN i.296; SN ii.3 (cetanā phasso m.); iv.297 (sabba-nimittānaṃ a˚ inattention to all outward signs of allurement); Nd i.501 (ayoniso) Vb 320, Vb 325, Vb 373 (yoniso), 425; Vism 241 (paṭikūla˚) Vb-a 148 (ayoniso), 248 sq. (as regards the 32 ākāras) 251 (paṭikkūla˚), 255 (n’âtisīghato etc.), 270 (ayoniso) 500; Dhp-a ii.87 (paṭikkula˚); Dhs-a 133sammā manasikāraṃ anvāya by careful pondering DN i.13, DN i.18≈ As adj. (thoughtful) at Thag-a 273 ■ The defn of m. at Vism 466 runs as follows: “kiriyā-kāro, manamhi kāro m. purima-manato visadisaṃ manaṃ karotī ti pi m Svāyaṃ: ārammaṇa-paṭipādako vīthi-paṭipādako javana-p.˚ ti ti-ppakāro.”-Cpds.: -kusalatā proficiency in attention DN iii.211; -kosalla id. Vb-a 56 (in detail), 224, 226 sq.; Vism 241 (tenfold), 243 (id., viz anupubbato, nâtisīghato, nâtisāṇikato etc.); Pv-a 63 (yoniso˚); -vidhāna arrangement of attention Vb-a 69, Vb-a 71; -vidhi rule or form of attention Vism 278 (eightfold, viz. gaṇanā, anubandhanā, phusanā, ṭhapanā sallakhaṇā, vivaṭṭanā, pārisuddhi, tesañ ca paṭipassanā ti) ■ The composition form of manas is mano˚ except before vowels, when man’ takes its place (as man-āyatana Vb-a 46 sq.).

-aṅgaṇa (man˚) sphere of ideation (Dhs. trsl. § 58; DN iii.243, DN iii.280 and passim. -āvajjana representative cognition: Cpd. 59. -indriya (man˚) mind-faculty category of mind, faculty of ideation (cp. Dhs. trs. § 17; Cpd. pp. 183, 184) DN i.70 (with other senses cakkh-undriyaṃ etc.) iii.226, and passim. -kamma work of the mind, mental action, associated with kāyakamma (bodily action) and vacī˚ (vocal action) AN i.32 AN i.104; Pp 41; Dhs 981 (where omitted in text). -java [cp. Vedic manojava] swift as thought Vv 6329; Pv-a 216 (assājāniya). -daṇḍa “mind-punishment” (? corresponding to kāya˚ & vacī-daṇḍa, MN i.372 sq (Neumann, trsls “Streich in Gedanken”). -duccarita sin of the mind or thoughts Dhp 233; Nd i.386; Pp 60 -dosa blemish of mind AN i.112. -dvāra door of the mind, threshold of consciousness Vb-a 41; Dhs-a 425 cp. Dhs. trsl. 3 (2p. 2); Cpd. 10. -dhātu element of apprehension, the ideational faculty (cp. Dhs. trsl. 129 2p. 119, 120; and p. 2lxxxv sq.) Dhs 457 sq.; Vb 14, Vb 71, Vb 87 sq., 144, 302; Vism 488; Vb-a 80, Vb-a 81, Vb-a 239 (physiological foundation), 405; Dhs-a 263, Dhs-a 425 Kp-a 53. -padosa anger in mind, ill-will DN iii.72; MN i.377; Snp 702; Ja iv.29; Dhs 1060 (cp. Dhs-a 367 manaṃ padussayamāno uppajjatī ti, i.e. to set one’s heart at anger). -padosika (adj.) debauched in mind (by envy & ill-will), Name of a class of gods DN i.20; Vb-a 498, Vb-a 519. Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 193 & Kern (;Toev. i.163), slightly different: from looking at each other too long. -pasāda tranquillity of the mind devotional feeling (towards the Buddha) Dhp-a i.28 -pubbaṅgama directed by mind, dominated by thought (see pubba2) Dhp 1, Dhp 2; cp. Dhp-a i.21, Dhp-a i.35. -bhāvanīya of right mind-culture, self-composed SN iii.1; MN iii.261; Vv 3413 (cp. Vv-a 152: mana-vaḍḍhanaka); Mil 129 Kern, Toev. i.163 trsls “to be kept in mind with honour.” -mattaka, in phrase mana-mattakena (adv. “by mere mind,” consisting of mind only, i.e. memorial as a matter of mind Ja iv.228. -maya made of mind consisting of mind, i.e. formed by the magic power of the mind, magically formed, expld at Vism 405 as “adhiṭṭhāna-manena nimmitattā m.”; at DN-a i.120 as “jhāna-manena nibbatta”; at Dhp-a i.23 as “manato nipphanna”; at Vv-a 10 as “bāhirena paccayena vinā manasā va nibbatta.”-Dhp 1, Dhp 2; Ja vi.265 (manomayaṃ sindhavaṃ abhiruyha); Sdhp 259; as quality of iddhi: Vism 379, Vism 406 ■ Sometimes a body of this matter can be created by great holiness or knowledge human beings or gods may be endowed with this power DN i.17 (+ pītibhakkha, of the Ābhassaras), 34 (attā dibbo rūpī m. sabbanga-paccangī etc.), 77 (id.) 186 (id.); Vin ii.185 (Koliya-putto kālaṃ kato aññataraṃ mano-mayaṃ kāyaṃ upapanno); MN i.410 (devā rūpino m.); SN iv.71; AN i.24; AN iii.122, AN iii.192; AN iv.235 AN v.60. -ratha desired object (lit. what pleases the mind), wish Vism 506 (˚vighāta + icchā- vighāta); ˚ṃ pūreti to fulfil one’s wish Mvu 8, Mvu 27 (puṇṇa-sabbamanoratha). Manoratha-pūraṇī (f.) “the wish fulfiller” is the name of the Commentary on the Anguttara Nikāya. -rama pleasing to the mind, lovely, delightful Snp 50, Snp 337, Snp 1013; Dhp 58; Pv ii.958 (phoṭṭhabba), Mvu 18, Mvu 48; Vv-a 340. -viññāṇa representative cognition rationality Vism 489; Vb-a 150 (22 fold); Dhs-a 304 cp. Dhs. trsl. 170 (2p. 157); -dhātu (element of) representative intellection, mind cognition, the 6th of the viññāṇadhātus or series of cognitional elements corresponding to and based on the 12 simple dhātus, which are the external & internal sense-relations (= āyatanāni) Dhs 58; Vb 14, Vb 71, Vb 87, Vb 89, Vb 144, Vb 176 and passim. See also above II. 3 and discussions at Dhs. trsl. 132 (2p. 122); introd. p. 53 sq.; Cpd. 1232, 184. -viññeyya to be comprehended by the mind (cp. Dialogues ii.281n) DN ii.281; MN iii.55, MN iii.57; Ja iv.195. -vitakka a thought (of mind SN i.207 = Snp 270 (mano is in C. on this passage expld as “kusala-citta” Snp-a 303). -sañcetan’ āhāra “nutriment of representative cogitation” (Dhs. trsl. 31; SN ii.11, SN ii.13, SN ii.99; Dhs 72; Vism 341. -satta “with mind attached,” Name of certain gods, among whom are reborn those who died with minds absorbed in some attachment MN i.376. -samācāra conduct, observance, habit of thought or mind (associated with kāya˚ & vacī˚ MN ii.114; MN iii.45, MN iii.49. -silā (cp. Sk. manaḥ-śila) red arsenic, often used as a powder for dying and other purposes; the red colour is frequently found in later (Cy.) literature, e.g. Ja v.416 (+ haritāla yellow ointment); Vism 485; Dhp-a iv.113 (id. as cuṇṇa); Thag-a 70 (Ap. v.20); Mvu 29, Mvu 12; Snp-a 59 (˚piṇḍa in simile) Dhp-a ii.43 (˚rasa); Vv-a 288 (˚cuṇṇa-pịñjara-vaṇṇa of ripe mango fruit); Pv-a 274 (˚vaṇṇāni ambaphalāni) -tala a flat rock, platform (= silātala) Snp-a 93, Snp-a 104; as the platform on which the seat of the Buddha is placed & whence he sends forth the lion’s roar: Ja ii.219 Ja vi.399; Vv-a 217; as a district of the Himavant Ja vi.432; Snp-a 358. -hara charming, captivating beautiful Mvu 18, Mvu 49; Name of a special gem (the wishing gem?) Mil 118, Mil 354.

Vedic manaḥ, see etym. under maññati

Manta

orig. a divine saying or decision, hence a secret plan [cp. def. of mant at Dhtp 578 by “gutta-bhāsane”], counsel hence magic charm, spell. In particular a secret religious code or doctrine, esp. the Brahmanic texts or the Vedas, regarded as such (i.e. as the code of a sect) by the Buddhists.

1. with ref. to the Vedas usually in the pl. mantā (the Scriptures, Hymns, Incantations) DN i.96; MN ii.166 (brahme mante adhiyitvā; mante vāceti); Snp 249 (= devā Snp-a 291), 302 (mante ganthetvā criticised by Bdhgh as brahmanic (: heretic) work in contrast with the ancient Vedas as follows “vede bhinditvā dhammayutte porāṇa-mante nāsetvā adhamma-yutte kūṭa-mante ganthetvā” Snp-a 320) 1000 (with ref. to the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa), 1018; Dhp 241 (holy studies); Ja ii.100; Ja iii.28 (maybe to be classed under 2), 537 ■ Sometimes in sg.: mantaṃ parivattenti brahma-cintitaṃ Pv ii.613 (= veda Pv-a 97) = Vv 6316 (= veda Vv-a 265) ■ n. pl. also mantāni meaning “Vedas”: Mil 10.

2 (doubtful, perhaps as sub group to No. 3) holy scriptures in general, sacred text, secret doctrine SN i.57 (mantā dhīra “firm in doctrine” K.S. thus taking mantā as instr.; it may better be taken as mantar ); Snp 1042 (where Nd ii.497 expls as paññā etc.); Mvu 5, Mvu 109 (Buddha˚ the “mantra” of the B.), 147 (id.).

3. divine utterance a word with supernatural power, a charm, spell, magic art, witchcraft Mil 11 (see about manta in the Jātakas: Fick, Sociale Gliederung 152, 153). At Pv-a 117 m. is combined with yoga and ascribed to the devas while y. is referred to men ■ Ja i.200 (+ paritta) iii.511 (˚ṃ karoti to utter a charm, cast a spell); Dhp-a iv.227. There are several special charms mentioned at var. places of the Jātakas, e.g. one called Vedabbha by means of which under a certain constellation one is able to produce a shower of gems from the air Ja i.253 (nakkhatta-yoge laddhe taṃ mantaṃ parivattetvā ākāse ulloki, tato ākāsato satta-ratana-vassaṃ vassati) Others are: paṭhavī-jaya m. (by means of which one conquers the earth) Ja ii.243; sabba-rāva-jānana˚ (of knowing all sounds, of animals) iii.415; nidhi-uddharana˚ (of finding secret treasures) iii.116; catukaṇṇa (four-cornered) vi.392, etc.

4. advice, counsel, plan design Vin iv.308 (˚ṃ saṃharati to foil a plan); Ja vi.438

5. (adj.) (-˚) parivattana˚; a charm that can be said an effective charm Ja i.200; bahu˚; knowing many charms very tricky Dhp-a ii.4; bhinna˚; one who has neglected an advice Ja vi.437, Ja vi.438.

-ajjhāyaka one who studies the Mantras or Holy Scriptures (of the Brahmins) Ja i.167; Dhp-a iii.361 (tinnaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū m ■ a. brāhmaṇo). -ajjhena study of the Vedas Snp-a 314. -pada = manta 1. DN i.104 (= veda-sankhāta m. DN-a i.273. -pāraga one who masters the Vedas; in buddh. sense: one who excels in wisdom Snp 997. manta in this sense is by the Cys always expld by paññā, e.g. , Nd ii.497 (as mantā f.) Dhp-a iv.93 (id.), Snp-a 549 (mantāya pariggahetvā) -pāragū one who is accomplished in the Vedas Snp 251 (= vedapāragū Snp-a 293), 690 (= vedānaṃ pāragata Snp-a 488), 976. -bandhava one acquainted with the Mantras Snp 140 (= vedabandhū Snp-a 192); Nd i.11 (where Nd ii.455 in same connection reads mitta˚ for manta˚: see under bandhu). -bhāṇin reciter of the Holy Texts (or charms) Th ii.281; fig. a clever speaker Snp 850 (but Nd i.219 reads manta˚; see mantar) Dhp 363 (cp. Dhp-a iv.93; paññāya bhaṇana-sīla) Thag 2 -yuddka a weird fight, a bewitched battle Mvu 25, Mvu 49 (“cunningly planned b.” trsl. Geiger; “diplomatic stratagem,” Turnour).

cp. Vedic mantra, fr. mantray

Mantanaka

(adj.) plotting Ja v.437.

fr. mantanā

Mantanā

f. (& ˚ṇā) counsel, consultation, deliberation, advice, command DN i.104; AN i.199; Vin v.164; Ja vi.437, Ja vi.438; Mil 3 (ṇ); DN-a i.273.

fr.; mant

Mantar

a sage, seer, wise man, usually appositionally nom. mantā “as a sage,” “like a thinker,” a form which looks like a fem. and is mostly expld as such by the Commentaries Mantā has also erroneously been taken as instr. of manta, or as a so-called ger. of manteti, in which latter two functions it has been expld at “jānitvā.” The form has evidently puzzled the old commentators as early as the Niddesa; through the Abhp (153 979) it has come down at mantāwisdom” to Childers Kern, Toev. s. v. hesitates and only comes half near the truth. The Index to Pj. marks the word with? SN i.57 (+ dhīra; trsln “firm in doctrine”); Snp 159 (“in truth,” opp. to musā; Snp-a 204 explns m. = paññā; tāya paricchinditvā bhāsati), 916 (mantā asmī ti, expld at Snp-a 562 by “mantāya”), 1040 = 1042 (= Nd ii.497 mantā vuccati paññā etc.); Vv 636 (expld as jānitvā paññāya paricchinditvā Vv-a 262) ■ Besides this form we have a shortened manta (nom.) at Snp 455 (akiñcano + ), which is expld at Snp-a 402 as mantā jānitvā It is to be noted that for manta-bhāṇin at Snp 850 the Nd i.219 reads mantā and expls customarily by “mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṃ bhāsati.”

n. ag. of mant, cp. Sk. *mantṛ a thinker

Mantita

1. considered Thag 9; Mil 91.

2. advised, given as counsel Ja vi.438; DN-a i.273.

pp. of manteti

Mantin

(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) giving or observing counsel SN i.236.

2. (n.) counsellor, minister Ja vi.437 (paṇḍita m.).

fr. manta

Manteti

to pronounce in an important (because secret) manner (like a mantra), i.e. 1. to take counsel (with = instr. or saddhiṃ) DN i.94, DN i.104 (mantanaṃ manteyya to discuss 122 (2nd pl. imper. mantavho, as compared with mantayavho Ja ii.107 besides mantavho ibid. Cp Geiger, P.Gr. § 126); ii.87, 239; Vin iv.308 (mantesuṃ aor.; perhaps “plotted”); Snp p.107 (= talk privately to); Snp 379; Ja i.144; Ja vi.525 (mantayitvāna ger.) DN-a i.263 (imper. mantayatha ); Pv-a 74 (aor. mantayiṃsu).

2. to consider, to think over, to be of opinion AN i.199 (Pot. mantaye); Mil 91 (grd. mantayitabba & inf.; mantayituṃ ).

3. to announce, advise; pronounce advise Snp 126; Pv iv.120 (= kathemi kittayāmi Pv-a 225); Snp-a 169 ■ pp. mantita ■ Cp. ā˚.

cp. Vedic mantrayati; mant is given at Dhtp in meaning of gutta-bhāsana, i.e. “secret talk”

Mantha

a churning stick, a sort of rice-cake (= satthu) Vin i.4, [cp. Vedic mantha “Rührtrank” homeric κυκεών “Gerstenmehl in Milch verrührt, Zimmer, Altind. Leben 268].

fr. math

Manda

(adj.) 1. slow, lazy, indolent; mostly with ref. to the intellectual faculties, therefore: dull, stupid, slow of grasp, ignorant foolish MN i.520 (+ momuha); Snp 666, Snp 820 (= momūha Nd i.153), 1051 (= mohā avidvā etc. Nd ii.498); Dhp 325 (= amanasikārā manda-pañña Dhp-a iv.17); Ja iv.221; Pp 65, Pp 69; Kp-a 53, Kp-a 54.

2. slow, yielding little result unprofitable (of udaka, water, with respect to fish; and gocara, feeding on fishes) Ja i.221.

3. [in this meaning probably = Vedic mandra “pleasant, pleasing,” although Halāyudha gives mandākṣa as “bashful” soft, tender (with ref. to eyes), lovely, in cpds. ˚akkhin having lovely (soft) eyes Ja iii.190; and ˚locana id Thig 375 (kinnari-manda˚ = manda-puthu-vilocana Thag-a 253); Pv i.115 (miga-manda˚ = migī viya mand akkhī Pv-a 57); Vv 6411 (miga-m˚ = miga-cchāpikānaṃ viya mudu siniddha-diṭṭhi-nipāta).

4. In cpd. picu (or puci˚) manda the Nimb tree, it means “tree” (? see picu-manda & puci-manda.

5. In composition with; bhū it assumes the form mandī˚; e.g. mandībhūta slowed down, enfeebled, diminished Ja i.228 Vb-a 157.

-valāhakā a class of fairies or demi-gods DN ii.259 (“fragile spirits of the clouds” trsl.).

cp. late-Vedic & Epic manda

Mandaka

according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = *mandra (of sound: deep, bass) + ka; a sort of drum Ja vi.580.

?

Mandatā

(f.) = mandatta Sdhp 19.

Mandatta

(nt.) stupidity MN i.520; Pp 69.

fr. manda

Mandākinī

(f.) Name of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant, enumd at AN iv.101; Ja v.415; Vism 416; Snp-a 407; DN-a i.164. (Halāyudha 3, 51 gives m. as a name for the Ganges.)

Mandāmukhi

(f.) a coal-pan, a vessel for holding embers for the sake of heating Vin i.32 (= aggi-bhājana C.); Vv-a 147 (mandamukhī, stands for angara-kapalla p. 142 in expln of hattha-patāpaka Vv 3332).

dialectical? reading a little doubtful

Mandārava

the coral tree, Erythrina fulgens (considered also as one of the 5 celestial trees) The blossoms mentioned DN ii.137 fall from the next world ■ DN ii.137; Vv 222 (cp. Vv-a 111); Ja i.13, Ja i.39; Mil 13, Mil 18 (dibbāni m ■ pupphāni abhippavassiṃsu).

cp. Sk. mandāra

Mandālaka

a water-plant (kind of lotus) Ja iv.539; Ja vi.47, Ja vi.279, Ja vi.564.

etym.?

Mandiya

(nt.) 1. laziness, slackness SN i.110.

2. dullness of mind, stupidity Ja iii.38 (= manda-bhāva).

cp. Sk. māndya

Mandira

(nt.) a house, edifice, palace Snp 996, Snp 1012; Ja v.480; Ja vi.269, Ja vi.270; Dāvs ii.67 (dhātu˚ shrine).

cp. late Sk. mandira

Mandī˚

see manda 5.

Mama

gen. dat. of pers. pron. ahaṃ (q.v.) used quasi independently (as substitute for our “self-”) in phrase mama-y-idaṃ Snp 806 thought of “this is mine,” cp SN i.14, i.e. egoism, belief in a real personal entity expld at Nd i.124 by maññanā conceit, illusion. Also in var. phrases with kṛ; in form mamaṃ˚; viz. mamankāra etc ■ As adj. “self-like, selfish” only neg amama unselfish Snp 220 (= mamatta-virahita Snp-a 276); Pv iv.134 (= mamankāra-virahita Pv-a 230) Ja iv.372; Ja vi.259. See also amama, cp. māmaka.

Mamaṅkāra

selfish attachment, self-interest, selfishness Pv-a 230 In canonic books only in combn with ahaṅkāra mān’ ānusaya; (belief in an ego and bias of conceit) e.g. at MN iii.18, MN iii.32; SN iii.80, SN iii.103, SN iii.136, SN iii.169; SN iv.41, SN iv.197 SN iv.202; AN i.132 sq.; AN iii.444. See also mamiṅkāra.

mamaṃ (= mama) + kāra, cp. ahaṃ + kāra

Mamaṅkāraṇa

(nt.) treating with tenderness, solicitude, fondness Ja v.331.

fr. mamaṃ + kṛ;

Mamatta

(nt.) selfishness, self-love, egoism; conceit, pride in (-˚), attachment to (-˚). Snp 806, Snp 871 Snp 951; Thag 717; Nd i.49 (two: taṇhā & diṭṭhi˚); Nd ii.499 (id. but as masc.); Snp-a 276; Dhs-a 199; Pv-a 19.

fr. mama

Mamāyati

to be attached to, to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster, love MN i.260; SN iii.190; Thag 1150; Snp 922 (mamāyetha); Nd i.125 (Bhagavantaṃ); Ja iv.359 (= piyāyati C.); Mil 73 Vb-a 107 (mamāyatī ti mātā: in pop. etym. of mātā) Dhp-a i.11; Snp-a 534; Mvu 20, Mvu 4 ■ pp. mamāyita.

Denom. fr. mama, cp. Sk. mamāyate in same meaning (not with Böhtlingk & Roth: envy) at MBh; xii.8051 and Aṣṭas Prajñā Pāramitā 254

Mamāyanā

(f.) = mamatta (selfishness) Ja vi.259 (˚taṇhārahita in expln of amama).

Mamāyita

cherished, beloved; as n. nt. attachment, fondness of, pride ■ (adj. or pp. SN ii.94 (etaṃ ajjhositaṃ, m., parāmaṭṭhaṃ); Snp 119; Dhp-a i.11 ■ (nt.:) Snp 466, Snp 777, Snp 805, Snp 950 = Dhp 367 (expld as: yassa “ahan” ti vā “maman” ti vā gāho n’ atthi Dhp-a iv.100); Snp 1056 (cp. Nd ii.499).

pp. of mamāyati

Mamiṅkaroti

to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster Ja v.330.

mama(ṃ) + kṛ; “to make one’s own”

Mamiṅkāra

self-love, self-interest, egoism MN i.486; MN iii.32 (at both places also ahiṅkāra for ahaṅkāra ).

for maman˚, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 19

Mamma

(nt.) soft spot of the body, a vital spot (in the Vedas chiefly between the ribs near the heart), joint. A popular etym. and expln of the word is given at Expos. 132n3 (on Dhs-a 100) ■ Ja ii.228; Ja iii.209; Dhs-a 396.

-ghaṭṭana hitting a vital spot (of speech, i.e. backbiting Cp. piṭṭhi-maṃsika) Dhp-a iv.182. -chedaka breaking the joints (or ribs), violent (fig. of hard speech Dhp-a i.75; Dhs-a 100.

Vedic marman, fr. mṛd

Mammana

(adj.) [onomat. cp. babbhara. With Sk. marmara rustling to Lat. fremo to roar = Gr. βρέμω to thud, βροντή thunder, Ger. brummen. Cp. also Sk murmura = P. mummura & muramurā, Lat. murmur stammering, stuttering Vin ii.90 (one of the properties of bad or faulty speech, combd with dubbaca & eḷagalavāca).;

Maya

(adj.) (-˚ only) made of, consisting of ■ An interesting analysis (interesting for judging the views and sense of etymology of an ancient commentator) of maya is given by Dhammapāla at Vv-a 10 where he distinguishes 6 meanings of the word, viz 1. asma -d-atthe, i.e. “myself” (as representing mayaṃ!).

2. paññatti “regulation” (same as 1 according to example given, but constructed syntectically quite diff. by Dhp.).

3. nibbatti “origin (arising from, with example mano-maya “produced by mind”).

4. manomaya “spiritually” (same as 3)

5. vikār’ atthe “alteration” (? more like product consistency, substance), with example “sabbe-maṭṭikāmaya-kuṭikā.”

6. pada-pūraṇa matte to make up a foot of the verse (or add a syllable for the sake of completeness with example “dānamaya, sīlamaya (= dana; sīla).

1. made of: aṭṭhi˚; of bone Vin ii.115; ayo˚; of iron Snp 669; Pv i.104; Ja iv.492; udum- bara˚; of Ud. wood Mvu 23, Mvu 87; dāru˚; of wood, Vv-a 8; loha˚; of copper Snp 670; veḷuriya˚ of jewels Vv 21

2. consisting in: dāna˚; giving alms Pv-a 8, Pv-a 9; dussa˚ clothes Vv 467; dhamma˚; righteousness SN i.137.

3 (more as apposition, in the sense as given by Dhp above under 6) something like, a likeness of, i.e. ingredient, substance, stuff; in āhāra˚; food-stuff, food Ja iii.523; utu˚; something like a (change in) season Vism 395; sīla˚; character, having sīla as substance (or simply-consisting of) Iti 51 (dāna˚, sīla˚, bhāvanā˚).

Vedic maya

Mayaṃ

we Vin ii.270; Snp 31, Snp 91, Snp 167; Dhp 6; Kp-a 210.

1st pl. of ahaṃ, for vayaṃ after mayā etc. See ahaṃ

Mayūkha

a ray of light Abhp. 64; Dhp. A 426 (old citation unverified).

Vedic mayūkha in diff. meaning, viz. a peg for fastening a weft etc., Zimmer Altind. Leben 254

Mayūra

a peacock DN iii.201; SN ii.279; Thag 1113; Ja ii.144, Ja ii.150 (˚gīva) = Dhp-a i.144; Ja iv.211 (˚nacca); v.304; vi.172, 272, 483; Vv 111, 358 (= sikhaṇḍin Vv-a 163); Vv-a 27 (˚gīva-vaṇṇa); Sdhp 92. The form mayūra occurs nearly always in the Gāthās and is the older form of the two m. and mora. The latter contracted form is found in Prose only and is often used to explain the old form, e, g. at Vv-a 57. See also mora.

Vedic mayūra

Mara

(adj.) dying; only neg. amara not dying, immortal, in phrase ajarāmara free from decay death Th; ii.512; Pv ii.611. See also amara.

fr. mṛ;

Maraṇa

(nt.) death, as ending this (visible) existence, physical death, in a narrower meaning than kālakiriyā; dying, in cpds. death ■ The customary stock definition of maraṇa runs; yaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhā tamhā satta-nikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṃ maccu maraṇaṃ kālakiriyā, khandhānaṃ bhedo, kaḷebarassa nikkhepo MN i.49; Nd i.123, Nd i.124 (adds “jīvit’ indriyass’ upacchedo”). Cp. similar defns of birth and old age under jāti and jarāSN i.121; DN iii.52, DN iii.111 sq., 135 sq., 146 sq., 235, 258 sq. Snp 32, Snp 318, Snp 426 sq., 575 sq., 742, 806; Nd ii.254 (= maccu) Pp 60; Vb 99 sq.; Vb-a 100 (defn and exegesis in det., cp. Vism 502), 101 (var. kinds of, cp. Vism 229) 156 (lahuka), 157; Dhp-a iii.434; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 18, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 64, Pv-a 76 Pv-a 96; Sdhp 292, Sdhp 293kāla˚; timely death (opp. akāla˚) khaṇika˚; sudden death Vism 229.

-anta having death as its end (of jīvita) Dhp 148 (cp Dhp-a ii.366: maraṇa-sankhāto antako). -ānussati mindfulness of death Vism 197, Vism 230 sq. (under 8 aspects) -cetanā intention of death Dhp-a i.20. -dhamma subject to death Pv-a 41. -pariyosana ending in death (of jīvita, life) Dhp-a iii.111, Dhp-a iii.170. -pāra “the other side of death,” Np. at Nd i.154 (vv.ll. BB purāpuraṃ; SS parammukhaṃ). -bhaya the fear of death Ja i.203 Ja vi.398; Vb 367. -bhojana food given before death the last meal Ja i.197; Ja ii.420. -mañca death-bed Vism 47, Vism 549; ˚ka Ja iv.132. -mukha the mouth of d. Pv-a 97 (or should we read ˚dukkha?). -sati the thought (or mindfulness) of death, meditation on death Snp-a 54; Dhp-a iii.171; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 66. -samaya the time of death Vb-a 157–⁠159 (in var. conditions as regards paṭisandhi).

fr. mṛ;

Marati

to die ■ pres. marati Mvu v. spur. after 5, 27; 36, 83; Pot. mareyyaṃ Ja vi.498; Ja vi.2nd mareyyāsi Ja iii.276. ppr. maramāna Mvu 36, Mvu 76 ■ aor. amarā Ja iii.389 (= mata C.; with gloss amari) ■ amari Mvu 36, Mvu 96 ■ Fut. marissati Ja iii.214 ■ ppr. (= fut. marissaṃ Ja iii.214 (for *mariṣyanta) ■ Inf. marituṃ DN ii.330 (amaritu-kāma not willing to die); Vism 297 (id.); Vv-a 207 (positive); and marituye Thig 426. The form miyyati (mīyati) see separately ■ Caus I māreti to kill, murder Mvu 37, Mvu 27; Pv-a 4. Pass māriyati Pv-a 5 (ppr. māriyamāna); Sdhp 139 (read mār˚ for marīy˚) ■ Caus. II. mārāpeti to cause to be killed Ja iii.178; Mvu 37, Mvu 28. Cp. pamāreti.

mṛ; = Idg. *mer, Vedic mriyate & marate; cp. Av. miryeite, Sk. marta = Gr. βροτός mortal, man; māra death; Goth. maurpr = Ags. mort = Ger. mord; Lith mir̃ti to die; Lat. morior to die, mors death. The root is identical with that of mṛṇāti to crush: see maṇāti and mṛdnāti (mardati) same: see mattikā ■ The Dhtp (No. 245) defines mṛ; by “pāṇa-cāge,” i.e. giving up breathing

Marica

(nt.) black pepper Vin i.201 (allowed as medicine to the bhikkhus); Mil 63.

-gaccha the M ■ shrub Ja v.12. -cuṇṇa powdered pepper, fine pepper Ja i.455.

cp. scientific Sk. marica

Mariyādā

(f.) 1. boundary limit, shore, embankment Vin iii.50; AN iii.227 (brāhmaṇānaṃ); DN iii.92 = Vism 419; Ja v.325; Ja vi.536 (tīra˚) Mvu 34, Mvu 70; Mvu 36, Mvu 59 (vāpi˚); Mil 416.

2. strictly defined relation, rule, control Ja ii.215; Vism 15 ■ adj keeping to the lines (or boundaries), observing strict rules AN iii.227 (quoted Snp-a 318, Snp-a 325). ˚bandha keeping in control Vin i.287 ■ Cp. vimariyādi.

cp. Vedic maryādā; perhaps related to Lat. mare sea; s. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under mare

Marīci

(f.) [Vedic marīci; cp. Gr. μαρμαίρω to shimmer, glitter, μαϊρα dog star, ἀμαρύσσω sparkle; Lat. merus clear, pure; perhaps also mariyādā to be taken here 1. a ray of light Vv-a 166.

2. a mirage Ja vi.209 Vism 496; Vb-a 34, Vb-a 85; often combd with māyā (q.v.) e.g. Nd ii.680 Aii; Ja ii.330.

-kammaṭṭhāna the “mirage” station of exercise Dhp-a iii.165. -dhamma like a mirage, unsubstantial Ja vi.206; Dhp 46; Dhp-a i.337.

Marīcikā

(f.) = marīci 2; SN iii.141; Vism 479 (in comp.); Dhp 170 (= māyā Dhp-a iii.166).

Maru1

a region destitute of water, a desert. Always combd with ˚kantāra: Nd i.155 (as Name); Ja i.107; Vb-a 6; Vv-a 332; Pv-a 99, Pv-a 112.

cp. Epic Sk. maru

Maru2

1. pl. marū the genii, spirits of the air Snp 681, Snp 688; Mil 278 (nāga-yakkha-nara-marū perhaps in meaning 2); Mvu 5, Mvu 27.

2. gods in general (˚-) Mvu 15, Mvu 211 (˚gaṇā hosts of gods); 18, 68 (˚narā gods and men) ■ Cp. māruta & māluta;.

Vedic marut, always in pl. marutaḥ, the gods of the thunder-storm

Marumba

a sort of (sweet-scented) earth or sand Vin ii.121, Vin ii.142, Vin ii.153 (at these passages used for besprinkling a damp living-cell); iv.33 (pāsāṇā, sakkharā kaṭhalā, marumbā, vālikā); Mvu 29, Mvu 8; Dpvs 19, 2; Mil 197 (pāsāṇa, sakkhara, khara, m.).

etym.?

Maruvā

(f.) a species of hemp (Sanseveria roxburghiana MN i.429. At Ja ii.115 we find reading marūdvā marucavāka; (C.), of uncertain meaning?

cp. Sk. mūrvā, perhaps connected with Lat. malva

Mala

(nt.) anything impure, stain (lit. & fig.), dirt. In the Canon mostly fig. of impurities. On mala in similes see J.P.T.S., 1907, 122 ■ SN i.38 (itthi malaṃ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); AN i.105 (issā˚); Snp 378 Snp 469, Snp 962, Snp 1132 (= rāgo malaṃ etc. Nd ii.500); Nd i.15 Nd i.478 sq.; Dhp 239 sq.; Vb 368 (tīṇi malāni), 389 (nava purisa-malāni); Pv ii.334 (macchera˚); Pv-a 45 (id.) 80 (id.), 17 (citta˚); Sdhp 220 ■ Compar. malatara a greater stain AN iv.195 = Dhp 243 ■ See also māla.

-ābhibhū overcoming one’s sordidness SN i.18; Ja iv.64. -majjana “dirt wiper,” a barber Vin iv.308 (kasāvaṭa m. nihīnajacca); Ja iii.452; Ja iv.365.

Vedic mala, see etym. under malina. The Dhtm (395) only knows of one root mal or mall in meaning “dhāraṇa” supporting, thus thinking of māḷaka

Malina

(adj.) dirty, stained impure, usually lit ■ Ja i.467; Mil 324; Dhp-a i.233; Vv-a 156; Pv-a 226; Vb-a 498.

fr. mal, *mel to make dirty, to which belongs mala ■ Cp. Lat. mulleus reddish, purple; Gr. μέλας black, μολύνω to stain, μέλτος reddish; Lith. mulvas yellowish, mélynas blue; Ohg. māl stain

Malinaka

(adj.) dirty; with ref. to loha, a kind of copper, in the group of copper belonging to Pisāca Vb-a 63.

malina + ka

Malya

(nt.) flower, garland of flowers Vv 11 (-dhara); 21; Ja v.188 (puppha˚), 420. The reading at Pv iii.33 (pahūta˚, adj. having many rows of flowers) is mālya.

for *mālya, fr. māla

Malla

a wrestler Vin ii.105 (˚muṭṭhika) Ja iv.81 (two, named Cānura and Muṭṭhika “fister”); Vism 31 (muṭṭhika + i.e. boxing & wrestling as amusements: see mada 1) Perhaps as “porter” Bdhgh on CV v.29. 5 (see Vin ii.319). At Mil 191 the mallā are mentioned as a group or company; their designation might here refer to the Mallas, a tribe, as other tribes are given at the same passage (e.g. Atoṇā, Pisācā). Cp. Bhallaka.

-gaṇa troop of professional wrestlers Mil 331 -muṭṭhika boxer Vin ii.105. -yuddha wrestling contest Mil 232; Dhp-a ii.154; DN-a i.85. -yuddhaka a professional wrestler Ja iv.81.

cp. Sk. malla, perhaps a local term, cp. Cānura

Mallaka

1. a bowl, a vessel (?) used in bathing Vin ii.106 (mallakena nahāyati; or is it a kind of scrubber? Bdhgh’s expln of this passage (CV v. i.4) on p. 315 is not quite clear mallakaṃ nāma makara-dantike chinditvā mūllakamūla-saṇṭhānena kata-mallakaṃ vuccati; akata˚ danta achinditvā kataṃ). It may bear some ref. to malla on p. 105 (see malla) & to mallika-makula (see below mallikā).

2. a cup, drinking vessel AN i.250 (udaka˚)

3. a bowl Ja iii.21 (kaṃsa˚ = taṭṭaka).

4. in kheḷa a spittoon Vin i.48; Vin ii.175Note. W. Printz in “Bhāsa’s Prākrit.” p. 45, compares Śaurasenī maḷḷaa Hindī maḷḷ(a) “cup,” maliyā “a small vessel (of wood or cocoanut-shell) for holding the oil used in unction, mālā “cocoanut-shell,” and adds: probably a Dravidian word.

cp. Sk. mallaka & mallika

Mallikā

(f.) Arabian jasmine Dhp 54 (tagara˚) Ja i.62; Ja iii.291; Ja v.420; Mil 333, Mil 338; Dhs-a 14; Kp-a 44. mallika-makula opening bud of the jasmine Visni 251 = Vb-a 234 (˚saṇṭhāna, in descr, of shape of the 4 canine teeth) ■ See also mālikā.

cp. Epic Sk. mallikā, Halāyudha 2, 51; Daṇḍin 2, 214

Maḷorikā

(f.) a stand, (tripod) for a bowl, formed of sticks Vin ii.124 (= daṇḍ’ ādhāraka Bdhgh on p. 318).

prob. dialectical for māḷaka: cp. mallaka

Masa

in line “āsadañ ca masañ jaṭaṃ” at Ja vi.328 is to be combd with ca, and read as camasañ, i.e. a ladle for sacrificing (C.: aggi-dahanaṃ).

Masati

to touch: only in cpd. āmasati. The root is expld at Dhtp 305 as “āmasana.” Another root masu [ mṛś ?] is at Dhtm 444 given in meaning “macchera.” Does this refer to Sk. mṛṣā (= P. micchā) Cp. māsati, māsana etc.

mṛś

Masāṇa

(nt.) a coarse cloth of interwoven hemp and other materials DN i.166; MN i.308, MN i.345; AN i.241, AN i.295; Pp 55. At all passages as a dress worn by certain ascetics.

etym.? prob. provincial & local

Masāraka

a kind of couch (mañca) or longchair; enumd under the 4 kinds of mañcā at Vin iv.40-See also Vin ii.149; Vin iv.357 (where expld as: mañcapāde vijjhitvā tattha aṭṭaniyo pavesetvā kato: made by boring a hole into the feet of the bed & putting through a notched end); Vv-a 8, Vv-a 9.

fr. masāra?

Masāragalla

(m. & nt.) a precious stone, cat’s eye; also called kabara-maṇi (e.g. Vv-a 304). It occurs in stereotyped enumn of gems at Vin ii.238 (where it is said to be found in the Ocean) = Mil 267; and at Mil 118, where it always stands next to lohitaṅka. The same combn (with lohit.) is found at Vv 363; 783 = 813 8415.

cp. Sk. masāra emerald + galva crystal & musāragalva

Masi

. 1. the fine particles of ashes, in; aṅgara˚; charcoal-dust Vv-a 67 = Dhp-a iii.309 (agginā) masiṃ karoti to reduce to powder (by fire), to burn to ashes, turn to dust SN ii.88 = SN iv.197 = AN i.204 AN ii.199.

2. soot Ja i.483 (ukkhali˚; soot on a pot).

cp. Class. Sk. maṣi & masi

Masūraka

a bolster Ja iv.87; Ja vi.185.

connected with masāraka

Massu

the beard DN ii.42; Pp 55; Ja iv.159 ■ parūḷha˚ with long-grown beard DN-a i.263; bahala thick-bearded Ja v.42.

-kamma beard-dressing Ja iii.114; Dhp-a i.253. -karaṇa shaving Dhp-a i.253; DN-a i.137. -kutti [m. *kḷpti] beard-trimming Ja iii.314 (C. = ˚kiriyā).

Vedic śmaśru

Massuka

(adj.) bearded; ; beardless (of a woman) Ja ii.185.

fr. massu

Maha

(m. & nt.) 1. worthiness, venerableness Mil 357.

2. a (religious) festival (in honour of a Saint, as an act of worship) Mvu 33, Mvu 26 (vihārassa mahamhi, loc.); Vv-a 170 (thūpe ca mahe kate), 200 (id.). mahā˚; a great festival Mvu 5, Mvu 94. bodhi˚; festival of the Bo tree Ja iv.229. vihāra˚; festival held on the building of a monastery Ja i.94; Vv-a 188. hatthi˚; a festival called the elephant f. Ja iv.95.

fr.; mah, see mahati & cp. Vedic nt. mahas

Mahati

to honour, revere Vv 4711 (pot. med. 1 pl. mahemase, cp Geiger, P.Gr. § 129; expld as “mahāmase pūjāmase at Vv-a 203). Caus. mahāyati in same sense: ger mahāyitvāna (poetical) Ja iv.236 ■ Pass. mahīyati Vv 621 (= pūjīyati Vv-a 258); 6422 (ppr. mahīyamāna pūjiyamāna Vv-a 282). pp. mahita.

mah; expld by Dhtp 331 as “pūjāyaṃ”

Mahatta

(nt.) greatness Ja v.331 (= seṭṭhatta C.); Vism 132, Vism 232 sq.; Vb-a 278 (Satthu˚, jāti˚, sabrahmacārī˚); DN-a i.35; Vv-a 191.

fr. mahat˚ cp. Sk. mahattva

Mahant

(adj.) great, extensive, big important, venerable ■ nom. mahā Snp 1008; Mvu 22, Mvu 27. Shortened to maha in cpd. pitāmaha (following a-decl.) (paternal) grandfather Pv-a 41; & mātāmaha (maternal) grandfather (q.v.) ■ instr. mahatā Snp 1027-pl. nom. mahantā Snp 578 (opp. daharā) ■ loc mahati Mil 254 ■ f. mahī

1. one of the 5 great rivers (Np.).

2. the earth. See separately ■ nt mahantaṃ used as adv., meaning “very much, greatly Ja v.170; Dhp-a iv.232. Also in cpd. mahantabhāva greatness, loftiness, sublimity Dhs-a 44 ■ Compar mahantatara Dhp-a ii.63, and with dimin. suffix ˚ka Ja iii.237 ■ The regular paraphrase of mahā in the Niddesa is “agga, seṭṭha, visiṭṭha, pāmokkha, uttama pavara,” see Nd ii.502.

Note on mahā & cpds ■ A. In certain cpds. the comb;n with mahā (mah˚) has become so established & customary (often through politeness in using mahā for the simple term), that the cpd. is felt as an inseparable unity and a sort of “antique” word, in which the 2nd part either does not occur any more by itself or only very rarely, as mah’ aṇṇava, which is more freq. than aṇṇava; mah’ ābhisakka, where abhisakka does not occur by itself; cp. mahānubhāva, mahiddhika mahaggha; or is obscured in its derivation through constant use with mahā, like mahesī [mah + esī, or īsī] mahesakkha [mah + esakkha]; mahallaka [mah + *ariyaka]; mahāmatta. Cp. E. great-coat, Gr. ἀρξ˚ in ἀρξ ιατρός = Ger. arzt. Only a limited selection of cpd ■ words is given, consisting of more frequent or idiomatic terms. Practically any word may be enlarged & emphasized in meaning by prefixing; mahā. Sometimes a mahā˚ lends to special events a standard (historical) significance, so changing the common word into a noun proper, e.g. Mah-âbhinikkhammana, Mahāpavāraṇa-B. Mahā occurs in cpds. in (a) an elided form mah before a & i; (b) shortened to maha˚; before g, d p, b with doubling of these consonants; (c) in the regular form mahā˚;: usually before consonants, sometimes before vowels. This form is contracted with foll. i to e and foll. u to o. In the foll. list of cpds. we have arranged the material according to these bases.

mah˚:-aggha very costly, precious Pp 34; Mvu 27, Mvu 35; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 87; Sdhp 18. -agghatā costliness great value Pp 34, Sdhp 26. -aṇṇava the (great ocean Mvu 19, Mvu 17. -atthiya (for ˚atthika) of great importance or use, very useful, profitable Ja iii.368 -andhakāra deep darkness Vism 417. -assāsin fully refreshed, very comfortable SN i.81.

maha˚:-ggata “become great,” enlarged, extensive fig. lofty, very great MN i.263; MN ii.122; AN ii.63, AN ii.184 AN iii.18; Vv-a 155; Ja v.113; Dhs 1020 (trsln: “having a wider scope”) Vb 16, Vb 24, Vb 62, Vb 74, Vb 126, Vb 270, Vb 326; Tikp 45; Vism 410, Vism 430 sq. (˚ārammaṇa); Vb-a 154 (id.) 159 (˚citta); Dhs-a 44. See on term Cpd. 4, 12, 55 1014; [cp. BSk. mahadgata Divy 227]. -gghasa eating much, greedy, gluttonous AN iv.92; P iii.111 (= bahubhojana Pv-a 175); Mil 288; Dhp 325 (cp. Dhp-a iv.16) -ddhana having great riches (often combd with mahābhoga) Dhp 123; Ja iv.15, Ja iv.22. -pphala much fruit; adj bearing much fruit, rich in result AN iv.60, AN iv.237 sq. Snp 191, Snp 486; Dhp 312, Dhp 356 sq. -bbala (a) a strong force a great army Mvu 10, Mvu 68 (v.l., T. has mahā-bala) (b) of great strength, mighty, powerful Ja iii.114; Mvu 23, Mvu 92; Mvu 25, Mvu 9. -bbhaya great fear, terror SN i.37; Snp 753 Snp 1032, Snp 1092, ep. Nd ii.501.

mahā˚:-anas kitchen Mvu 5, Mvu 27 (spurious stanza) -anasa kitchen Ja ii.361; Ja iii.314; Ja v.368; Ja vi.349; Dhp-a iii.309; Thag-a 5. -anila a gale Mvu 3, Mvu 42. -ānisaṃsa deserving great praise (see s. v.), [cp. BSk. mahānuśaṃsa Mvu iii.221]. -ānubhāva majesty, adj. wonderful splendid Ja i.194; Ja vi.331; Pv iii.31; Pv-a 117, Pv-a 136 Pv-a 145, Pv-a 272. -aparādhika very guilty Ja i.114. -abhinikkhamaṇa the great renunciation Dhp-a i.85. -abhisakka [abhi + śak ] very powerful Thag 1111. -amacca chief minister Mvu 19, Mvu 12. -araha costly Mvu 3, Mvu 21 Mvu 5, Mvu 75; Mvu 27, Mvu 39; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 160.

mahā˚:-alasa great sloth Dhp-a iii.410. -avīci the great Purgatory Avīci, freq. -isi in poetry for mahesi at Ja v.321. -upaṭṭhāna great state room (of a king Snp-a 84. -upāsikā a great female follower (of the Buddha) Vv-a 5. -karuṇā great compassion Dhp-a i.106 Dhp-a i.367. -kāya a great body Mil 16. -gaṇa a great crowd or community Dhp-a i.154. -gaṇḍa a large tumour Vb-a 104. -gedha great greed Snp 819; Nd i.151. -cāga great liberality, adj. munificent Mvu 27 Mvu 47. As ˚paricāga at Snp-a 295 (= mahādāna). -jana a great crowd, collectively for “the people,” a multitude Pv-a 6, Pv-a 19, Pv-a 78; Mvu 3, Mvu 13. -taṇha (adj.) very thirsty Ja ii.441. -tala “great surface,” the large flat roof on the top of a palace (= upari-pāsāda-tala) Ja vi.40. -dāna (see under dāna) the great gift (to the bhikkhus) a special great offering of food & presents given by laymen to the Buddha & his followers as a meritorious deed usually lasting for a week or more Mvu 27, Mvu 46; Pv-a 111, Pv-a 112. -dhana (having) great wealth Pv-a 3, Pv-a 78 -naraka (a) great Hell, see naraka. -nāga a great elephant Dhp 312; Dhp-a iv.4. -nāma Name of a plant Vin i.185; Vin ii.267. -niddā deep sleep Pv-a 47 -nibbāna the great N. Dhp-a iv.110. -niraya (a) great hell Snp-a 309, Snp-a 480; Pv-a 52. See Niraya & cp. Kirfel; Kosmographie 199, 200. -nīla sapphire Vv-a 111 -pañña very wise DN iii.158; AN iii.244; Dhp 352; Dhp-a iv.71. -patha high road DN i.102; Snp 139; Dhp 58 Vism 235; Dhp-a i.445. -paduma a great lotus Ja v.39 also a vast number & hence a name of a purgatory, cp Divy 67; Kirfel, Kosmographie 205. -pitā grandfather Pv-a 107. -purisa a great man, a hero, a man born to greatness, a man destined by fate to be a Ruler or a Saviour of the World. A being thus favoured by fate possesses (32) marks (lakkhaṇāni) by which people recognise his vocation or prophesy his greatness. A detailed list of these 32 marks (which probably date back to mythological origin & were originally attributed to Devas) is found at DN ii.17, DN ii.19, passim ■ DN iii.287; Snp 1040 sq.; Dhp 352; Mil 10; Snp-a 184, Snp-a 187 sq., 223 258, 357, 384 sq.; ˚lakkhaṇāni: DN i.88, DN i.105, DN i.116; Snp 549, Snp 1000 sq.; Vism 234; Vv-a 315; Dhp-a ii.41. -bhūta usually in pl. ˚bhūta(ni) (cattāro & cattā) the 4 great elements (see bhūta), being paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo DN i.76; Nd i.266; Vb 13, Vb 70 sq.; Vism 366 sq.; Tikp 39, 56 sq., 74 sq., 248 sq.; Vb-a 42, Vb-a 169, Vb-a 253 ■ See Cpd. 154, 268 sq., & cp. dhātu 1.; -bhoga great wealth adj. wealthy Pv-a 3, Pv-a 78. -maccha a great fish, seamonster Ja i.483. -mati very wise, clever Mvu 14, Mvu 22 Mvu 19, Mvu 84 (f. ˚ī); 33, 100 (pl. ˚ī). -matta [cp. Sk. mahāmātra] a king’s chief minister, alias Prime Minister, “who was the highest Officer-of-State and real Head of the Executive” (Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India, 1916). His position is of such importance, that he even ranges as a rājā or king: Vin iii.47 (rājā… akkhadassā mahāmattā ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsanti ete rājāno nāma) ■ Note. An acc. sg mahā-mattānaṃ we find at AN i.154 (formed after the prec. rājānaṃ) ■ Vin i.74 (where two ranks are given senā-nāyakā m ■ mattā the m. of defence, and vohārikā m ■ m. those of law); DN i.7; DN iii.88; DN iii.64 (here with Ep. khattiya); AN i.154, AN i.252, AN i.279; AN iii.128; Vin iv.224 Vism 121; Vb-a 312 (in simile of two m.), 340; Pv-a 169. Cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 92, 99, 101. -muni great seer Snp 31. -megha a big cloud, thunder cloud MN ii.117; Snp 30; Vism 417. -yañña the great sacrifice DN i.138 sq., 141 (cp. AN ii.207≈). -yasa great fame Vv 216; Mhys 5, 22. -raṅga [cp. Sk. m ■ rajana] safflower, used for dyeing Vin i.185 (sandals); ii.267 (cloaks). -rājā great king, king, very freq.: see rājā-rukkha a great tree Vism 413 (literally); Mil 254 (id.) otherwise the plant euphorbia tortilis (cp. Zimmer Altind. Leben 129). -lātā (-pasādhana) a lady’s parure called “great creeper” Dhp-a i.392; Vv-a 165 (-pilandhana); same Snp-a 520. -vātapāna main window Dhp-a iv.203. -vīṇā a great lute Vism 354; Vb-a 58. -vīra (great) hero Snp 543, Snp 562. -satta “the great being or a Bodhisatta Vv-a 137 (v.l. SS. bodhisatta). [Cp BSk. mahāsattva, e.g. Jtm 32]. -samudda the sea the occean Mvu 19, Mvu 18; Vism 403; Snp-a 30, Snp-a 371; Pv-a 47. -sara a great lake; usually as satta-mahāsarā the 7 great lakes of the Himavant (see sara), enumd e.g. at Vism 416. -sāra (of) great sap, i.e. great wealth adj. very rich Ja i.463 (˚kula, perhaps to be read mahāsāla-kula). -sāla (adj.) having great halls, Ep. of rich people (especially brāhmaṇas) DN i.136, DN i.235; DN iii.16, DN iii.20; Ja ii.272 (˚kula); iv.237 (id.), 325 (id.); v.227 (id.) Pp 56; Vb-a 519; Dhp-a iii.193. -sāvaka [cp. BSk mahāśrāvaka Divy 489] a great disciple Vism 98 (asīti ˚ā); Dhp-a ii.93. -senagutta title of a high official (Chancellor of the Exchequer?) Ja v.115; Ja vi.2. -hatthi a large elephant MN i.184 (˚pada elephant’s foot, as the largest of all animal feet), referred to as simile (˚opama at Vism 243, Vism 347, Vism 348.

mahi˚; [mah’ i˚]: -iccha full of desire, lustful, greedy AN iv.229; Thag 898; Iti 91; Ja i.8; Ja ii.441. -icchatā arrogance, ostentatiousness AN iv.280; Vb-a 472 -iddhika [mahā + iddhi + ka] of great power, always combd with mah-ānubhāva to denote great influence high position & majesty Vin i.31; Vin ii.193; Vin iii.101; DN i.78, DN i.180 (devatā), 213; SN i.145 sq.; SN ii.155, SN ii.274 sq. 284 sq.; iv.323; v.265, 271 sq., 288 sq.; AN v.129; Ja vi.483 (said of the Ocean); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 136, Pv-a 145. -inda (ghosa) lit. the roar of the Great Indra, Indra here to be taken in his function as sky (rain) god, thus: the thunder of the rain-god Thag 1108. [Cp. BSk. māhendra in ˚bhavana “the abode of the Great Indra,” and vaṛṣa “the rain of the Gr. I.” (here as rain-god), both at Avs i.210]. -issāsa [Sk. maheṣvāsa] great in the art of the bow, a great archer SN i.185; Dhp-a i.358.

mahe˚; [mahā + i]: -esakkha [mahā + īsa + khyaṃ fr. īś ] possessing great power or authority AN ii.204 AN iii.244; Nd ii.5032; Vism 419; Sdhp 511. The BSk form is maheṣākhya evidently differing in its etymology The P. etym. rests on the same grounds as esitatta in mahesi Dhp-a iv.232. -esi [mahā + isi; Sk. maharṣi] a great Sage AN ii.26; Snp 208, Snp 481, Snp 646, Snp 915, Snp 1057, Snp 1061 Thag 1132; Thag 2, Thag 149; Dhp 422 (expld at Dhp-a iv.232 as “mahantaṃ sīla-kkhandh’ ādīnaṃ esitattā m.” cp. the similar expln at Nd ii.503); Nd i.343; Vism 505; Vb-a 110; Pv-a 1. -esiyā = mahesī Ja vi.483. -esī [in P. to be taken as mah + , as f. to īsa, but in Sk. (Vedic) as f. of mahiṣa, buffalo] chief queen, king’s first wife, king’s consort; also the wife of a great personage Ja ii.410 Ja v.45; Ja vi.425; Pp 56; Mvu 2, Mvu 22 (pl. mahesiyo) Vv-a 184 (sixteen). Usually as agga-mahesī, e.g. Ja i.262; Ja iii.187, Ja iii.393; Ja v.88. -esitta state of chief consort, queenship Ja v.443; Pv ii.1310; Thag-a 37; Vv-a 102. -eseyya = ˚esitta Ja v.91.

-maho [mahā + u, or + o]: -ogha the great flood (see ogha) Snp 4, Snp 945; Dhp 47, Dhp 287; Dhp-a iii.433. -odadhi the (great) ocean, the sea Snp 720, Snp 1134; Mil 224; Mvu 18, Mvu 8. -odara big belly Ja vi.358 (addressing a king’s minister). -odika full of water, having much water deep, full (of a river) Snp 319; Ja ii.159; Mil 346 -oraga [m + uraga] a great snake Ja v.165.

Vedic mahant, which by Grassmann is taken as ppr. to mah, but in all probability the n is an original suffix ■ cp. Av. mazant, Sk. compar. mahīyān Gr. μέγας (compar. μείζων), Lat. magnus, Goth mikils = Ohg. mihhil = E. much

Mahantatā

(f.) greatness Dhp-a ii.62. At MN iii.24 the spelling is mahattatā (tt misread for nt?) at MN i.184 however mahantatta (nt.).

fr. mahant˚

Mahallaka

(adj. n.) old, venerable, of great age an old man DN i.90 (opp. taruṇa), 94, 114, 247; Snp 313, Snp 603; Nd ii.261 (vuḍḍha m. andhagata etc. Ja iv.482 (opp. dahara young); Vv 461 (= mahanto Vv-a 199); Dhp-a i.7, Dhp-a i.278; Dhp-a ii.4, Dhp-a ii.55, Dhp-a ii.91; Snp-a 313. Compar mahallakatara Dhp-a ii.18 ■ f. mahallikā an old woman Mil 16; Mvu 21, Mvu 27; Vv-a 105; Pv-a 149 (= addhagata) ■ [The BSk. form is mahalla, e.g. Divy 329, Divy 520.]

a distorted mah-ariyaka → ayyaka → allaka; cp. ayyaka

Mahikā

(f.) fog, frost, cold (= himaṃ Dhs-a 317) Vin ii.295 = Mil 273; Snp 669; Mil 299; Vv-a 134 (fog) ■ As mahiyā at AN ii.53.

cp. *Sk. mahikā

Mahita

honoured, revered MN ii.110; Mil 278; Sdhp 276.

pp. of mahati or mahīyati

Mahanīya

(adj.) praiseworthy Vv-a 97.

grd. of mahati

Mahilā

(f.) woman, female Vin ii.281 (˚titthe at the women’s bathing place); Ja i.188; Dpvs ix.4 Thag-a 271. Mahisa, Mahisa, Mahimsa

*Sk. mahilā

Mahisa, Mahīsa, Mahiṃsa

a buffalo- mahisa: DN i.6 (˚yuddha b ■ fight), 9; Ja iii.26 (vana wild b.); Mvu 25, Mvu 36 (T. māhisaṃ) ■ mahīsa Ja vi.110- mahiṃsa Vism 191, & in Np.; mahiṃsaka-maṇḍala the Andhra country Ja i.356, cp. Mahiṃsaka-raṭṭha Vb-a 4; as Mahisa-maṇḍala at Mvu 12, Mvu 29Note. The P. pop. etym. is propounded by Bdhgh as “mahiyaṃ setī ti mahiso” (he lies on the ground, that is why he is a buffalo) Dhs-a 62.

cp. Vedic mahiṣa, an enlarged form of mahā; the P. etym. evidently to be connected with mahā + īś, because of mahīsa → mahiṃsa

Mahī

(f.) the earth (lit. Great One) Mvu 5, Mvu 266; Sdhp 424, Sdhp 472; loc mahiyā Mil 128; mahiyaṃ Dhs-a 62Note. As mahī is only found in very late P. literature, it must have been re-introduced from Sk. sources, and is note a direct correspondent of Vedic mahī.

-tala the ground (of the earth) Mvu 5, Mvu 54. -dhara mountain Mil 343; Mvu 14, Mvu 3; Mvu 28, Mvu 22 (v.l. mahin˚) -pa king (of the earth) Mvu 14, Mvu 22. -pati king Mvu 5 Mvu 48; Mvu 33, Mvu 32. -pāla king Mvu 4, Mvu 38; Mvu 5, Mvu 265. -ruha tree (“growing out of the earth”) Mvu 14, Mvu 18, Mvu 18, Mvu 19.

f. of mah, base of mahant, Vedic mahī

(indecl.) prohibition particle: not, do not, let us hope not, I wish that… not [cp Lat. utinam & ne]. Constructed with various tenses e.g. 1. with; aor. (prohibitive tense): mā evaṃ akattha do not thus Dhp-a i.7; mā abhaṇi speak not Pv i.33; mā cintayittha do not worry Dhp-a i.12; mā parihāyi I hope he will not go short (or be deprived) of… MN i.444bhāyi fear not Ja ii.159; mā mariṃsu I hope they will not die Ja iii.55; mā (te) rucci may it not please (you), i.e. please do not Vin ii.198; mā evaṃ ruccittha id. Dhp-a i.13.

2. with imper.:gaccha Ja i.152detha Ja iii.275. mā ghāta do not kill: see māghāta

3. with pot.:anuyuñjetha Dhp 27; mā bhuñjetha let him not eat Mvu 25, Mvu 113; mā vadetha Ja vi.364. 4. with indic. pres.:paṭilabhati AN v.194 ■ A peculiar use is found in phrase ānemi mā ānemi shall I bring it or not? Ja vi.334.

5. mā = na (simple negation in māsakkhimhā we could not Vin iii.23. -Ma

cp. Vedic mā, Gr. μή

-Mā

see puṇṇa-mā.

the short form of māsa, direct dern fr. : see mināti

Māgadha

scent-seller, (lit. “from Magadha”) Pv ii.937 (= gandhin Pv-a 127).

fr. Magadha

Māgadhaka

(nt.) garlic Vin iv.259 (lasuṇaṃ nāma māgadhakaṃ vuccati).

māgadha + ka, lit. “from Magadha”

Māgavika

a deerstalker, huntsman AN ii.207; Pp 56; Mil 364, Mil 412; Pv-a 207.

guṇa-form to *mṛga = P. miga; Sk. mārgavika

Māghāta

(nt.) the injunction not to kill, non-killing order (with ref. to the killing of animals Ja iii.428 (˚bheri, the drum announcing this order); iv.115; vi.346 (uposatha˚).

lit. mā ghāta “kill not”

Māṅgalya

(adj.) auspicious, fortunate, bringing about fulfilment of wishes Ja vi.179.

fr. mangala

Māṇava

a youth, young man, esp. a young Brahmin Snp 1022, Snp 1027, Snp 1028; Ja iv.391 (brāhmaṇa˚); DN-a i.36 = satto pi coro pi taruṇo pi; Dhp-a i.89 pl. māṇavā men Thig 112 ■ The spelling mānava occurs at Snp 456, Snp 589, & Pv i.87 (= men Th ii.112; kumāra Pv-a 41).

cp. Sk. māṇava

Māṇavaka

a young man, youth a Brahmin Mil 101; in general: young, e.g. nāga˚; a young serpent Ja iii.276; f. ˚ikā a Brahmin girl Ja i.290; Mil 101 nāga˚; a young female serpent Ja iii.275; Dhp-a iii.232.

fr. māṇava

Mātaṅga

an elephant Dhp 329, Dhp 330 (here as Ep. of nāga); Ja iii.389; Ja vi.47; Vv 439; Mil 368.

2. a man of a low class [cp. BSk mātangī Divy 397] Snp-a 185 sq. (as Np.).

cp. Epic Sk. mātanga, dial.

Mātar

(f.) mother ■ Cases: nom. sg mātā Snp 296; Dhp 43; Ja iv.463; Ja v.83; Ja vi.117; Nd ii.504 (def. as janikā); gen. mātu Thag 473; Vin i.17; Ja i.52 mātuyā Ja i.53; Mvu 10, Mvu 80; Pv-a 31; and mātāya Ja i.62; dat. mātu Mvu 9, Mvu 19; acc. mātaraṃ Snp 60, Snp 124; Dhp 294; instr. mātarā Thig 212; loc. mātari Dhp 284-pl. does not occur. In combn with pitā father, mātā always precedes the former, thus mātā-pitaro (pl. “mother & father” (see below) ■ mātito (abl ■ adv. from the mother’s side (cp. pitito) DN i.113; AN iii.151; Pv-a 29 ■ On mātā in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122 cp. Vism 321 (simile of a mother’s solicitude for her children). Similarly the pop. etym. of mātā is given with “mamāyatī ti mātā” at Vb-a 107 ■ The 4 bases of m. in compn are: mātā˚, māti˚, mātu˚, matti˚;.

1. mātā˚:- pitaro mother & father DN iii.66 DN iii.188 sq.; Snp 404; Mil 12. See also pitā ■ pitika having mother & father Dhp-a ii.2. -pitiṭṭhāna place of m. & f. Dhp-a ii.95. -pettika having m. & f., of m. f. Nd;2 385 (nāma-gotta). -petti-bhāra supporting one’s m. & f. SN i.228; Ja i.202; Ja vi.498. -maha maternal grandfather Ja iv.146; Dhp-a i.346.

2. māti˚:-devatā protector or guardian of one’s mother Ja iii.422 (gloss mātu-devatā viya). -pakkha the mother’s side Dhp-a i.4 (+ pitipakkha). -posaka supporting one’s m Ja iii.422 (v.l. mātu˚).

3. mātu˚:-upaṭṭhāna (spelt mātupaṭṭh˚) reverence towards one’s m. Dhp-a iv.14 -kucchi m’s womb DN ii.12; Vism 560 (˚gata); Vb-a 96; Dhp-a i.127. -gāma “genex feminarum,” womanfolk women (collectively cp. Ger, frauen-zimmer) AN ii.126; Vin iv.175; MN i.448, MN i.462; MN iii.126; SN iv.239 sq. Ja i.201; Ja iii.90, Ja iii.530. (pl. ˚gāmā p. 531); Pp 68; Snp-a 355; Pv-a 271; Vv-a 77. -ghāta & (usually); ˚ka a matricide (+ pitu- ghātaka; see abhiṭhāna) Vin i.168, Vin i.320; Mil 310; Tikp 167 sq.; Vb-a 425. -ghātikamma matricide Tikp. 281. -bhūta having been his mother Pv-a 78 -mattin (see matta1 4) whatever is a mother SN iv.110 (˚īsu mātucittaṃ upaṭṭhapeti foster the thought of mother towards whatever is a mother, where in sequence with bhaginī-mattin & dhītumattin).; -hadaya a mother’s heart Pv-a 63.

4. matti˚;: see matti-sambhava. -Matika

Vedic mātā, stem mātar˚, Av. mātar-, Gr. μήτηρ (Doric μάτηρ) Lat. māter, Oir. māthir, Ohg muoter, Ags. modor = mother; Cp. further Gr. μήτρα uterus, Lat. mātrix id., Sk. mātṛkā mother, grandmother Ger. mieder corset. From Idg. *ma, onomat part., cp. “mamma”

-Mātika

(adj.) -mother; in mata˚; one whose mother is dead, lit. a “dead-mother-ed, Ja ii.131; Ja iii.213. Also neg. amātika without a mother Ja v.251.

fr. mātā, Sk. mātṛka

Mātikā

(f.) 1. a water course Vism 554 (˚âtikkamaka); Mvu 35, Mvu 96; Mvu 37, Mvu 50; Snp-a 500 (= sobbha); Dhp-a ii.141 (its purpose: “ito c’ ito ca udakaṃ haritvā attano sassa-kammaṃ sampādenti”); Vv-a 301–⁠2. tabulation, register, tabulated summary, condensed contents, esp. of philosophical parts of the Canonical books in the Abhidhamma; used in Vinaya in place of Abhidhamma Piṭaka; probably the original form of that (later) Piṭaka Vin i.119, Vin i.337; Vin ii.8 [cp semantically in similar sense Lat. mātrix = E. matric i.e. register. In BSḳ. mātrikā Divy 18, Divy 333] AN i.117 (Dhamma-dhara, Vinaya-dhara, Mātikā-dhara; here equivalent to Abhidhamma); Vism 312 (so pañcavasso hutvā dve mātikā paguṇaṃ katvā pavāretvā) Snp-a 15; Kp-a 37, Kp-a 99, Kp-a 117.

-nikkhepa putting down of a summary, tabulation Vism 536, Vism 540. The summary itself is sometimes called nikkhepa, e.g. the 4th part of the Atthasālinī (Dhs-a pp.343

409) is called nikkhepa-kaṇḍa or chapter of the summary; similarly m ■ nikkhepa vāra at Tikp. 11.

*Sk. mātṛkā

Mātiya

(adj. n.) (a) mortal Ja vi.100 (C. macca; gloss māṇava).

the diaeretic form of macca, used in verse, cp. Sk. martya & Vedic (poetical) martia

Mātu˚

see mātā.

Mātuka

(nt.) “genetrix,” matrix, origin, cause Thag 612.

cp. Sk. māṭṛka, fr. mātṛ = mātar

Mātucchā

(f.) mother’s sister, maternal aunt Vin ii.254, Vin ii.256; Ja iv.390; Mil 240. -putta aunt’s son, male first cousin (from mother’s sister’s side SN ii.281; Ud 24; Dhp-a i.119. Cp. mātula-dhītā.

Sk. mātṛ-ṣvasā

Mātula

a mother’s brother an uncle Ja i.225; Dhp-a i.15; Pv-a 58, Pv-a 60.

-dhītā (the complement of mātucchā-putta) uncle’s daughter, female first cousin (from mother’s brother’s side) Ja ii.119; Dhp-a iii.290; Pv-a 55.

cp. Epic Sk. mātula & semantically Lat. matruus, i.e. one who belongs to the mother

Mātulaka

= mātula Dhp-a i.182.

Mātulānī

(f.) a mother’s brother’s wife, an aunt Ja i.387; Ja iv.184; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 58.

Sk. mātulānī, semantically cp. Lat. mater tera

Mātuluṅga

(nt.) a citron Ja iii.319 (= mella; v.l. bella).

cp. Class. Sk. mātulunga; dialectical?

Mādisa

(adj.) one like me Snp 482; Mvu 5, Mvu 193; Vv-a 207; Dhp-a i.284; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 123.

Epic & Class. Sk. mādṛś & mādṛśa, maṃ + ; dṛś

Māna

1. pride, conceit, arrogance (cittassa uṇṇati Nd i.80; Vb 350). Māna is one of the Saññojanas It is one of the principal obstacles to Arahantship A detailed analysis of māna in tenfold aspect is given at Nd i.80 = Nd ii.505; ending with defn “māno maññanā… ketukamyatā” etc. (cp. Vb 350 & see under; mada ). On term see also Dhs § 1116; Dhs trsl. 298 (= 2275) sq ■ DN iii.234; SN i.4; Snp 132, Snp 370; Snp 469 Snp 537, Snp 786, Snp 889, Snp 943, Dhp 74, Dhp 150, Dhp 407; Nd i.298; Pp 18 Vb 345 sq., 353 sq., 383 (7 fold), 389 (9 fold); Vb-a 486 sq. (“seyyo ‘ham asmī ti” etc.); Tikp 166, 278; Dhp-a iii.118, Dhp-a iii.252; Sdhp 500, Sdhp 539asmi˚; pride of self as real egoism DN iii.273.

2. honour, respect Ja v.331 (+ pūjā). Usually in cpd. bahumāna great respect Mvu 20, Mvu 46; Pv-a 50. Also as māni˚; in compn with karoti: see mānikata. Cp. vi˚, sam˚

-ātimāna pride & conceit, very great (self-) pride or all kinds of conceit (see 10 fold māna at Nd;1 80 Nd ii.505) DN iii.86; Snp 245, Snp 830, Snp 862; Nd i.170, Nd i.257 -atthe at Thag 214 read mânatthe = mā anatthe -ānusaya the predisposition or bad tendency of pride MN i.486; DN iii.254, DN iii.282; Snp 342. Cp. mamankāra -ābhisamaya full grasp (i.e. understanding) of pride (with sammā˚) MN i.122 (which Kern. Toev. s. v. interprets wrongly as “waanvoorstelling”); SN iv.205 sq. 399; Snp 342 (= mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaṃ Snp-a 344). -jātika proud by nature Ja i.88 -thaddha stubborn in pride, stiff-necked Ja i.88, Ja i.224 -da inspiring respect Mvu 33, Mvu 82. -mada (-matta (drunk with) the intoxicating draught of pride Ja ii.259; Pv-a 86. -saññojana the fetter of pride or arrogance DN iii.254; Dhs 1116 = Dhs 1233. See under saññojana cp. formulae under; mada 2. -satta cleaving to conceit Snp 473. -salla the sting or dart of pride Nd i.59 (one of the 7 sallāni, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc., expld in detail on p. 413. See other series with similar terms & māna at Nd;2 p. 237 s. v. rāga).

late Vedic & Epic Sk. māna, fr.; man, orig. meaning perhaps “high opinions” (i.e. No. 2); hence “pride (No. 1). Def. of root see partly under māneti, partly under mināti

Māna2

(nt.) 1. measure Vin iii.149 (abbhantarima inner, bāhirima outer); DN-a i.140. -˚kūṭa cheating in measure, false measure Pp 58; Pv-a 278.

2. a certain measure, a Māna (cp. mānikā & manaṃ) Ja i.468 (aḍḍha˚ half a M. according to C. equal to 8 nāḷis).

fr. : see mināti; Vedic māna has 2 meanings, viz. “measure,” and “building” (cp. māpeti)

Mānatta

(nt.) a sort of penance, attached to the commission of a sanghādisesa offence Dhs-a 399 (+ parivāsa). ˚ṃ deti to inflict penance on somebody Vin ii.7 (+ parivāsaṃ deti); iv.225. mānatt’ āraha deserving penance Vin ii.55, Vin ii.162 (parivāsika + ). See on term Vin. Texts ii.397.

a doubtful word, prob. corrupted out of something else, maybe omānatta, if taken as der. fr māna1. If however taken as belonging to māna2 as an abstr. der., it might be expld as “measuring, taking measures,” which suits the context better. The BSk form is still more puzzling, viz. mānāpya “something pleasant”: Mpt § 265

Mānana

(nt.) & Mānanā (f.) paying honour or respect; reverence, respect SN i.66; Ja ii.138; Pp 19, Pp 22; Mil 377 (with sakkāra, vandana, pūjana & apaciti) Dhs 1121; Dhs-a 373 ■ Cp. vi˚, sam˚.

fr. māna1

Mānava

see Māṇava.

Mānavant

(adj.) possessed of pride, full of conceit; neg. ; not proud Thag 1222.

fr. māna1

Mānasa

(nt.) intention purpose, mind (as active force), mental action. Almost equivalent to mano Dhs § 6. In later language mānasa is quite synonymous with hadaya. The word, used absolutely, is more a t. t. in philosophy than a living part of the language. It is more frequent as-˚ in adj use, where its connection with mano is still more felt Its absolute use probably originated from the latter use ■ Dhs-a 140 (= mano); Vb 144 sq. (in definition of viññāṇa as cittaṃ, mano, mānasaṃ, hadayaṃ etc. see mano ii.3); Dhp-a ii.12 (paradāre mānasaṃ na bandhissāmi “shall have no intention towards another’s wife,” i.e. shall not desire another’s wife); Mvu 4, Mvu 6 (sabbesaṃ hita-mānasā with the intention of common welfare); 32, 56 (rañño hāsesi mānasaṃ gladdened the heart of the king) ■ As adj. (-˚): being of such & such a mind, having a… mind, with a… heart; like ādīna˚; with his mind in danger SN v.74 (+ apatiṭṭhitacitta); uggata˚; lofty-minded Vv-a 217; pasanna˚; with settled (peaceful) mind Snp 402 and frequently; mūḷha˚ infatuated Mvu 5, Mvu 239; rata˚; Pv-a 19; sañcodita˚; urged (in her heart) Pv-a 68; soka-santatta˚; with a heart burning with grief Pv-a 38.

a secondary formation fr. manas = mano, already Vedic lit. “belonging to mind”

Mānasāna

(adj.) = mānasa in adj. use Snp 63 (rakkhita˚).

fr. mānasa, secondary formation

Mānassin

(adj. n.) [prob. fr. manassin (*manasvin) under influence of māna. Cp. similar formation mānavant proud Vin ii.183 (expld by Bdhgh in a popular way as “mana-ssayino māna-nissitā”). The corresponding passage at Ja i.88 reads māna-jātikā māna-tthaddhā.

Mānikata

lit. “held in high opinion,” i.e. honoured, worshipped SN ii.119 (garukata m. pūjita).

pp. of a verb māni-karoti, which stands for māna-karoti, and is substituted for mānita after analogy of purakkhata, of same meaning

Mānikā

(f.) a weight, equal to 4 Doṇas Snp-a 476 (catudoṇaṃ mānikā). Cp. BSk. mānikā, e.g. Divy 293 sq.

cp. māna2 2

Mānita

revered, honoured Ud 73 (sakkata m. pūjita apacita) ■ A rather singular by-form is mānikata (q.v.).

pp. of māneti

Mānin

(adj.) (-˚) proud (of) Snp 282 (samaṇa˚), 889 (paripuṇṇa˚); Dhp 63 (paṇḍita˚ proud of his cleverness cp. Dhp-a ii.30); Ja i.454 (atireka˚); iii.357 (paṇḍita˚); Sdhp 389, Sdhp 417 ■ f. māninī Mvu 20, Mvu 4 (rūpa˚ proud of her beauty).

fr. mana1

Mānusa

(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) human Snp 301 (bhoga); Iti 94 (kāmā dibbā ca mānusā); Pv ii.921 (m. deha); 956 (id.)- amānusa divine Vv 356; Pv ii.1220; ghostly (= superhuman) Pv iv.36; f. amānusī Pv iii.7.9

2. (n. m.) a human being, a man Mvu 15, Mvu 64; f. mānusī a (human woman Ja iv.231; Pv ii.41amānusa a superhuman being Pv iv.157 ■ pl. mānusā men Snp 361, Snp 644; Pv ii.117. As nt. in collective sense = mankind Pv ii.113 (v.l. mānussaṃ; C. = manussaloka). Manusaka = manusa

cp. Vedic mānuṣa; fr. same base (manus) as manussa

Mānusaka = mānusa

, viz. 1. (adj.) human: AN i.213 (sukhaṃ); Snp 524 (brahma-khettaṃ); Dhp 417 (yogaṃ m. kāyaṃ Dhp-a iv.225); Vv 356; Ja i.138 (kāmā) ■ f manusikā Vism 407.

2. a human being, man Pv iv.157. Also nt. (collectively) pl. mānusakāni human beings, men Dhp-a i.233.

Māneti

to honour revere, think highly of Pv-a 54 (aor. mānesuṃ, + garukariṃsu + pūjesuṃ) ■ pp. mānita.

Caus. of man, cp. Sk. mānayati, Lat. moneo to admonish. Ger. mahnen, Ags. manian. The Dhtp 593 gives root as mān in meaning “pūjā”

Māpaka

(-˚) (adj. n.) one who measures, only in doṇa˚; (a minister) measuring the d. revenue (of rice Ja ii.367, Ja ii.381; Dhp-a iv.88; and in dhañña˚; measuring corn or grain Ja iii.542 (˚kamma, the process of… ) Vism 278 (in comparison).

fr. māpeti

Māpeti

1. to build, construct SN ii.106 (nagaraṃ); Mvu 6, Mvu 35 (id.); Vv 8453; Vv-a 260.

2. to create, bring about make or cause to appear by supernatural power (in folkoristic literature, cp. nimmināti in same sense Ja ii.111 (sarīraṃ nāvaṃ katvā māpesi transformed into a ship); iv.274; Mvu 28, Mvu 31 (maggaṃ caused a road to appear).

3. to measure out (?), to declare (?), in a doubtful passage Ja iv.302, where a misreading is probable as indicated by v.l. BB (samāpassiṃsu for T tena amāpayiṃsu). Perhaps we should read tena-māsayiṃsu.

Caus. of , see mināti. The simplex mimīte has the meaning of “erect, build” already in Vedic Sk.

Māmaka

(adj.) lit. “mine,” one who shows affection (not only for himself), making one’s own, i.e devoted to, loving Snp 806 (= Buddha˚, Dhamma˚ Sangha˚ Nd i.125; = mamāyamāna Snp-a 534), 927 (same expln at Nd i.382); Mil 184 (ahiṃsayaṃ paraṃ loke piyo hohisi māmako ti),- Buddha˚; devoted to the B. Ja i.299; Dhp-a i.206. f. ˚māmikā Ja iii.182. In voc. f. māmike at Thig 207 (cp. Thag-a 172) “mother, we may perhaps have an allusion to “mother [cp. Sk. māma uncle, Lat. mamma mother, and mātā]-amāmaka see sep.; this may also be taken as “not loving.”

fr. mama

Māyā

(f.) 1. deceptive appearance fraud, deceit, hypocrisy Snp 245, Snp 328 (˚kata deceit), 469, 537, 786, 941 (: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā Nd i.422); Vb 357, Vb 361, Vb 389; Mil 289; Vism 106 (+ sātheyya, māna, pāpicchatā etc.), 479 (māyā viya viññāṇaṃ); Vb-a 34 (in detail), 85, 493 (def.). Is not used in Pali Abhidhamma in a philosophical sense. 2. mystic formula, magic, trick MN i.381 (āvaṭṭanī m.) khattiya˚; the mystic formula of a kh. Ja vi.375; Mil 190; Dhp-a i.166. In the sense of “illusion” often combd with marīci, e.g. at Ja ii.330; Ja v.367; Nd ii.680a ii

3. jugglery, conjuring Mil 3 ■ On māyā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122; on term in general Dhs trsl.2 255 (“ilḷusion”); Expos. 333, 468n ■ As adj. in amāya (q.v. & in; bahu-māye rich in deceit Snp-a 351Note. In the word maṃ at Kp-a 123 (in pop. etym. of man-gala) the ed. of the text sees an acc. of which he takes to be a contracted form of māyā (= iddhi).

-kāra a conjurer, magician SN iii.142; Vism 366 (in comparison); Vb-a 196.

cp. Vedic māyā. Suggestions as to etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. manticulor

Māyāvin

(adj.) deceitful, hypocritical DN iii.45, DN iii.246; Snp 89, Snp 116, Snp 357; Pp 19 Pp 23; Pv-a 13. See also amāyāvin.

fr. māyā, cp. Vedic māyāvin

Māyu

bile, gall Abhp 281.

*Sk. māyu

Māra

death; usually personified as Np. Death, the Evil one, the Tempter (the Buddhist Devil or Principle of Destruction) Sometimes the term māra is applied to the whole of the worldly existence, or the realm of rebirth, as opposed to Nibbāna. Thus the defn of m. at Nd ii.506 gives “kammâbhisankhāra-vasena paṭisandhiko khandha- māro, dhātu˚, āyatana˚ ■ Other general epithets of M (quasi twin-embodiments) are given with Kaṇha Adhipati, Antaka, Namuci, Pamattabandhu at Nd i.489 = Nd ii.507; the two last ones also at Nd i.455. The usual standing epithet is pāpimā “the evil one,” e.g. SN i.103 sq. (the famous Māra-Saṃyutta: see Windisch Māra & Buddha;); Nd i.439; Dhp-a iv.71 (Māravatthu & freq ■ See e.g. Snp 32, Snp 422, Snp 429 sq., 1095, 1103; Dhp 7, Dhp 40, Dhp 46, Dhp 57, Dhp 105, Dhp 175, Dhp 274; Nd i.475; Vism 79, Vism 228 Vism 376; Kp-a 105; Snp-a 37, Snp-a 44 sq., 225, 350 sq., 386 sq. Sdhp 318, Sdhp 449, Sdhp 609. Further refs. & details see under Proper Names.;

-ābhibhū overcoming M. or death Snp 545 = Snp 571 -kāyika a class of gods Mil 285; KvuA 54. -dhītaro the daughters of M. Snp-a 544. -dheyya being under the sway of M.; the realm or kingdom of Māra AN iv.228; Snp 764; Dhp 34 (= kilesa-vaṭṭa Dhp-a i.289). -bandhana the fetter of death Dhp 37, Dhp 276, Dhp 350 (= tebhūmaka-vaṭṭasankhātaṃ Dhp-a iv.69). -senā the army of M. Snp 561 Snp 563; Snp-a 528.

fr. mṛ; later Vedic, māra killing, destroying, bringing death, pestilence, cp. Lat. mors death, morbus illness, Lith. māras death, pestilence

Māraka

(-˚) one who kills or destroys, as manussa˚; man-killer Ja ii.182; hatthi˚; elephant-killer Dhp-a i.80 ■ m. in phrase samāraka (where the-ka belongs to the whole cpd.) see under samāraka.

fr. māreti

Māraṇa

(nt.) killing, slaughter, death DN ii.128; Sdhp 295, Sdhp 569.

fr. Caus. māreti

Māratta

(nt.) state of, or existence as a Māra god, Māraship Vb 337.

*Māra-tvaṃ

Mārāpita

killed Ja ii.417; Ja iii.531.

pp. of mārāpeti

Mārāpitatta

(nt.) being incited to kill Dhp-a i.141.

abstr. fr. mārāpita

Mārāpeti

: see marati ■ pp. mārāpita.

Caus. II. of mṛ;

Mārita

killed SN i.66; Vin iii.72; Ja ii.417 (aññehi m ■ bhāvaṃ jānātha).

pp. of māreti

Mārisa

(adj.) only in voc. as respectful term of address, something like “Sir,” pl “Sirs.” In sg. mārisa MN i.327; AN iii.332; Snp 814, Snp 1036 Snp 1038, Snp 1045 etc.; Nd i.140 = Nd ii.508 (here expld by same formula as āyasmā, viz. piya-vacanaṃ garu-vacanaṃ etc.); Ja v.140; Pv ii.133; Mvu 1, Mvu 27 ■ pl. mārisā Snp 682; Ja i.47, Ja i.49; Vism 415; Pv-a 75. Explained by Buddhaghosa to mean niddukkha K.S. i.2 n.

perhaps identical with mādisa

Māruta

the wind SN i.127; Mhbv 8.

for the usual māluta

Māretar

one who kills, slayer, destroyer SN iii.189.

n. ag. to māreti

Māreti

to kill: see under marati ■ pp. mārita. Mala (mala)

Caus. of mṛ;

Māla (māḷa)

1. mud [is it mis-spelling of mala?], in pakka-m˚-kalala (boiling mud) Ja vi.400. Kern, Toev. s. v. believes to see the same word in phrase mālā-kacavara at Ja ii.416 (but very doubtful).

2. perhaps froth, dirty surface, in pheṇa˚; Mil 117 (cp. mālin 2) where it may however be māla (“wreaths of foam”). 3. in asi˚; the interpretation given under asi (as “dirt see above p. 88) has been changed into “sword-garland, thus taking it as mālā. Malaka (Malaka)

?

Mālaka (Māḷaka)

a circular (consecrated) enclosure, round, yard (cp. Geiger, Mvu. trsl. 99: “m. is a space marked off and usually terraced within which sacred functions were carried out. In the Mahāvihāra (Tiss’ ārāma) at Anurādhapura there were 32 mālakas; Dpvs xiv.78; Mvu 15, Mvu 192. The sacred Bodhi-tree e.g. was surrounded by a malaka”)-The word is peculiar to the late (Jātaka-) literature & is not found in the older texts ■ Ja i.449 (vikkama˚) iv.306; v.49 (visāla˚), 138 (id., spelling maḷaka) Mvu 15, Mvu 36 (Mahā-mucala˚); 16, 15; 32, 58 (sanghassa kamma˚, encl. for ceremonial acts of the S., cp. 15, 29) Dhp-a iv.115 (˚sīmā); Vism 342 (vitakka˚).

fr. māla or māḷa

Mālatī

(f.) the great-flowered jasmine Abhp 576. Cp. mālikā.

fr. mālā

Mālā

(f.) garland, wreath, chaplet; collectively = flowers; fig. row, line Snp 401; Pp 56 Vism 265 (in simile); Pv ii.316 (gandha, m., vilepana as a “lady’s” toilet outfit); ii.49 (as one of the 8 or 10 standard gifts to a bhikkhu: see dāna, deyyadhamma & yañña); Pv-a 4 = Ja iii.59 (ratta- kaṇavera˚ a wreath of red K. flowers on his head: apparel of a criminal to be executed. Cp. ratta-māla-dhara wearing a red garland Ja iii.179, an ensign of the executioner); Pv-a 51 Pv-a 62asi ˚-kamma the sword-garland torture (so correct under asi!) Ja iii.178; Dāvs iii.35; dīpa˚; festoons of lamps Mvu 5, Mvu 181; Mvu 34, Mvu 77 (˚samujjota); nakkhatta˚; the garland of stars Vv-a 167; puppha˚; a garland or wreath of flowers Mvu 5, Mvu 181 ■ On mālā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123. In compn māla˚; sometimes stands for mālā˚.

-kamma garland-work, garlands, festoons Vv-a 188 -kāra garland-maker, florist, gardener (cp. Fick, Sociale Gleiderung 38, 182) Ja v.292; Mil 331; Dhp-a i.208, Dhp-a i.334; Vv-a 170, Vv-a 253 (˚vīthi). -kita adorned with garlands wreathed Vin i.208. -guṇa “garland-string,” garlands a cluster of garlands Dhp 53 (= mālā-nikaṭi “makeup” garlands Dhp-a i.419; i.e. a whole line of garlands made as “ekato-vaṇṭika-mālā” and “ubhato-v ■ m., one & two stalked g., cp. Vin iii.180). mālā guṇaparikkhittā one adorned with a string of gs., i.e. a marriageable woman or a courtesan MN i.286 = AN v.264 -guḷa a cluster of gs., a bouquet Vin iii.139; Snp-a 224; Vv-a 32, Vv-a 111 (v.l. guṇa). -cumbaṭaka a cushion of garlands, a chaplet of flowers Dhp-a i.72. -dāma a wreath of flowers Ja ii.104. -dhara wearing a wreath Ja iii.179 (ratta˚, see also above). -dhārin wearing a garland or wreath (on the head) Pv iii.11 (kusuma˚; v.l. BB ˚bhārin); Pv-a 169 (v.l. ˚bhārin); f. dhārinī Vv 323 (uppala˚, of a Petī. See also bhārin). -puṭa a basket for flowers Dhp-a iii.212. -bhārin wearing a wreath (chaplet) [the reading changes between ˚bhārin ˚dhārin; the BSk. prefers ˚dhārin, e.g. Mvu i.124 & ˚dhāra at Divy 218] Ja iv.60, Ja iv.82; Ja v.45; Pv-a 211 (v.l. ˚dhārin); f. ˚bhārinī Ja iii.530; Vv-a 12; & bhārī Thag 459 (as v.l.; T. reads ˚dhārī). Cp. ˚dhārin -vaccha [vaccha here = vṛḳṣa] a small flowering tree or plant, an ornamental plant Vin ii.12; Vin iii.179; Vism 172 (v.l. ˚gaccha); Dhp-a ii.109 (q.v. for expln: taruṇarukkha-puppha).

cp. Epic Sk. mālā

Mālika1

(nt.) name of a dice Ja vi.281.

fr. mālā or mala?

Mālika2

a gardener, florist Abhp 507.

fr. mālā

Mālikā

(f.) double jasmine Dāvs 5, Dāvs 49.

fr. mālā

Mālin

(adj.) 1. wearing a garland (or row) of flowers (etc.) Pv iii.91 (= mālābhārin Pv-a 211); f mālinī Vv 362 (nānā-ratana˚); Mvu 18, Mvu 30 (vividhadhaja˚ mahābodhi).

2. (perhaps to māla) bearing a stain of, muddy, in pheṇa˚; with a surface (or is it garland ) of scum Mil 260.

3. what does it mean in pañca˚; said at Ja vi.497 of a wild animal? (C. not clear with expln “pañcangika-turiya-saddo viya”).

fr. mālā

Māluka

(m. or f.?) a kind of vessel, only in camma˚; leather bag (?) Ja vi.431 (where v.l. reads camma-pasibbakāhi vālukādīhi), 432 (gloss c. pasibbaka).

of uncertain origin

Māluta

wind, air, breeze SN iv.218; Th i.2; ii.372; Ja i.167; Ja iv.222; Ja v.328 Ja vi.189; Mil 319; Vism 172 (= vāyu); Vv-a 174, Vv-a 178.

-īrita (contracted to māluterita ) moved by the wind fanned by the breeze Thag 754; ii.372; Vv 4412 = 816 Pv ii.123. See similar expressions under īrita.

the proper Pali form for māruta, the a-stem form of maru2 = Vedic marut or māruta

Māluvā

(f.) a (long) creeper MN i.306; SN i.207; AN i.202 sq.; Snp 272; Dhp 162, Dhp 334; Ja iii.389 Ja v.205, Ja v.215, Ja v.389; Ja v.205, Ja v.215, Ja v.389; Ja vi.528 (phandana˚) Dhp-a iii.152; Dhp-a iv.43 ■ On maluvā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123.

cp. BSk. mālu

Mālūra

the tree Aegle marmelos Abhp 556.

late Sk.

Mālya

see malya.

Māḷa

(& Māla) a sort of pavilion, a hall DN i.2 (maṇḍala˚, same at Snp p.104, which passage Snp-a 447 explns as “savitānaṃ maṇḍapaṃ”); Vin i.140 (aṭṭa, māla, pāsāda expld at Vin iii.201. In the same sequence of Vb 251 expld at Vb-a 366 as “bhojana-sālā-sadiso maṇḍala-māḷo; Vinay’ aṭṭha-kathāyaṃ pana eka-kūṭasangahito caturassa-pāsādo ti vuttaṃ”); Mil 46, Mil 47-Cp. mālaka[The BSk. form is either māla, e.g. Mvu ii.274, or māḍa, e.g. Mpt 226, Mpt 43.]

Non-Aryan, cp. Tamil māḍam house, hall

Māḷaka

a stand, viz. for alms-bowl (patta˚) Vin ii.114, or for drinking vessel (pānīya˚ Ja vi.85.

a Non-Aryan word, although the Dhtm 395 gives roots mal & mall; in meaning “dhāraṇa” (see under mala). Cp. malorika

Māsa1

a month, as the 12th part of the year. The 12 months are (beginning with what chronologically corresponds to our middle of March) Citta (Citra), Vesākha, Jeṭṭha, Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Poṭṭhapāda Assayuja, Kattika, Māgasira, Phussa, Māgha Phagguna. As to the names cp. nakkhatta. Usually in acc., used adverbially; nom. rare, e.g. aḍḍha-māso half-month Vv-a 66; Āsāḷhi-māsa Vv-a 307 (= gimhānaṃ pacchima māsa); pl. dve māsā Pv-a 34 (read māse) cattāro gimhāna-māsā Kp-a 192 (of which the 1st is Citra, otherwise called Paṭhama-gimha “1st summer and Bāla-vasanta “premature spring”) ■ Instr. pl catūhi māsehi Miln. 82; Pv-a i.1012acc. pl. as adv. dasamāse 10 months Ja i.52; bahu-māse Pv-a 135; also nt. chammāsāni 6 months SN iii.155. Freq. acc. sg. collectively: a period of…, e.g. temāsaṃ 3 months Dhs-a 15; Pv-a 20; catu˚; DN-a i.83; Pv-a 96; satta˚; Pv-a 20 dasa˚; Pv-a 63; aḍḍha˚; a fortnight Vin iv.117 ■ On māsa (& f.; māsī ), as well as shortened form ˚ma see puṇṇa.

-puṇṇatā fullness or completion of the month DN-a i.140; -mattaṃ (adv.) for the duration of a month Pv-a 19.

cp. Vedic māsa, & mās; Gr. μήν (Ionic μείς); Av. māh (moon & month); Lat. mensis; Oir. mī Goth. mēna = moon; Ohg. māno, mānōt month. Fr *mé to measure: see mināti

Māsa2

a bean (Phaseolus indica or radiata); usually combd with mugga, e.g. Vin iii.64; Mil 267, Mil 341; DN-a i.83. Also used as a weight (or measure?) in dhañña-māsa, which is said to be equal to 7 lice: Vb-a 343 ■ pl. māse Vv 806 (= māsa-sassāni Vv-a 310).

-odaka bean-water Kp-a 237. -khetta a field of beans Vv-a 808; Vv-a 308. -bīja bean-seed Dhp-a iii.212 -vana plantation Ja v.37 (+ mugga˚).

Vedic māṣa, Phaseolus indica, closely related to another species: mudga Phaseolus mungo

Māsa3

a small coin (= māsaka) Ja ii.425 (satta māsā = s. māsakā C.).

identical with māsa2

Māsaka

lit. a small bean, used as a standard of weight & value; hence a small coin of very low value. Of copper, wood & lac (Dhs-a 318 cp. Kp-a 37; jatu˚, dāru˚, loha˚); the suvaṇṇa˚ (golden m.) at Ja iv.107 reminds of the “gold” in fairy tales That its worth is next to nothing is seen from the descending progression of coins at Dhp-a iii.108 = Vv-a 77, which, beginning with kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha-pāda, places māsaka & kāhaṇikā next to mudhā “gratis.” It only “counts” when it amounts to 5 māsakas ■ Vin iii.47 Vin iii.67; Vin iv.226 (pañca˚); Ja i.112 (aḍḍha-māsakaṃ na agghati is worth nothing); iv.107; v.135 (first a rain of flowers, then of māsakas, then kahāpaṇas); Dhp-a ii.29 (pañca-m ■ mattaṃ a sum of 5 m.); Pv-a 282 (m + aḍḍha˚ half-pennies & farthings, as children’s pocket-money).;

fr. māsa2 + ka = māsa3

Māsakkhimhā

at Vin iii.23 is for mā asakkhimhā “we could not”; here stands for na. Masati, Masana, Masin

Māsati, Māsana, Māsin

■ dumapakkāni -māsita Ja ii.446 (C. reads māsita & expl;ns by asita, dhāta); visa-māsita Milo 302 (T. reads visamāsita) having taken in poison; visa- māsan- ûpatāpa (id.) Vism 166; tiṇa -māsin eating grass Ja vi.354 (= tiṇakhādaka C.) ■ A similar case where Sandhi-m-has led to a wrong partition of syllables and has thus been lost through syncope may be P. eḷaka1, as compd with Sk. methi (cp. Prk. meḍhi), pillar, post.

fr. mṛṣ, for massati etc.; see masati| touch, touching, etc. in sense of eating or taking in. So is probably to be read for āsati etc. in the foll. passages, where m precedes this ā in all cases Otherwise we have to refer them to a root ās = as (to eat) and consider the m as partly euphonic.

Māsalu

only instr. māsalunā Mil 292, Trenckner says (note p. 428): “m. is otherwise unknown it must mean a period shorter than 5 months Cp. Sk. māsala.”-Rh. D. (trsl. ii.148) translates “got in a month,” following the Sinhalese gloss. The period seems to be only a little shorter than 5 months; there may be a connection with catu in the word.

reading uncertain

Māsācita

filled by the (say 6 or more) month(s), i.e. heavy (alluding to the womb in advanced pregnancy), heaped full MN i.332 (kucchi garu-garu viya māsācitaṃ maññe ti; Neumann trsls “wie ein Sack voll Bohnen,” thus taking m. = māsa2, and ācita as “heap” which however is not justified). This passage has given rise to a gloss at Vb 386, where māsācitaṃ maññe was added to kāyo garuko akammañño, in meaning “heavy, languid.” The other enumns of the 8 kusīta-vatthūni (A iv.332; DN iii.255) do not give m. m. It may be that the resemblance between akam mañño and maññe has played a part in reminding the Commentator of this phrase. The fact that Bdhgh comments on this passage in the Vb-a (p. 510) shows that the reading of Vb 386 is a very old one. Bdhgh takes māsa in the sense of māsa2 & expl;s māsācita as “wet bean” (tinta māso), thus omitting expln of ācita The passage at Vb-a 510 runs: “ettha pana māsācitaṃ nāma tintamāso, yathā tintamāso garuko hoti, evaṃ garuko ti adhippāyo.”

māsa1 + ācita

Māsika

(adj.) 1. of a month, i.e. a month old Mil 302.

2. of a month, i.e. consisting of months so many months (old) (-˚), as aḍḍha˚; at intervals of half a month DN i.166; MN i.238, MN i.343; Pp 55; dve˚; two months old Pv i.67.

3. monthly, i.e. once a month Thag 283 (bhatta) ■ Cp. māsiya.

fr. māsa1

Māsiya

(adj.) consisting of months DN ii.327 (dvādasa˚ saṃvacchara the year of 12 months).

= māsika

Miga

1. a wild animal, an animal in its natural state (see cpds.).

2. a deer, antelope, gazelle Various kinds are mentioned at Ja v.416; two are given at Nd ii.509, viz. eṇi (antelope) & sarabha (red deer) see under eṇi & sarabha ■ Snp 39, Snp 72; Ja i.154; Ja iii.270 (called Nandiya); Pv-a 62, Pv-a 157. On miga in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123, where more refs. are given.

-ādhibhū king of beasts (i.e. the lion) Snp 684. -inda king of beasts (id.) Sdhp 593. -chāpaka young of a deer Vv-a 279. -dāya deer park Ja iv.430 (Maddakucchi); Vv-a 86 (Isipatana). -dhenu a hind Ja i.152; Dhp-a iii.148. -bhūta (having become) like a wild animal, MN i.450 (˚bhūtena cetasā). -mandalocana the soft eye of the deer Vv 6411; Pv i.115. See under manda -rājā king of the beasts (the lion) DN iii.23 sq. -luddaka deer-hunter Ja i.372; Ja iii.49, Ja iii.184; Dhp-a ii.82; Vb-a 266 (in simile). -vadha deer-slaying Ja i.149. -vittaka amateur of hunting Ja iv.267. -visāna a deer’s horn Pp 56. -vīthi deer-road Ja i.372.

Vedic mṛga, to mṛj, cp. magga, meaning, when characterised by another attribute “wild animal” in general, animal of the forest; when uncharacterised usually antelope

Migavā

(f.) hunt, hunting, deer-stalking Pv-a 154 (˚padesa). Usually in devasikaṃ migavaṃ gacchati to go out for a day’s hunting Ja iv.267; or as pp. ekadivasaṃ migavaṃ gata Vv-a 260; ekāhaṃ m. g. Mvu 5, Mvu 154.

= Sk. mṛgayā, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 461

Migī

(f.) a doe Thag 109; Ja v.215; Ja vi.549; Dhp-a i.48.

f. of miga, cp. Epic Sk. mṛgī

Micchatta

(nt.) item of wrong, wrongness. There are 8 items of wrong, viz. the 8 wrong qualities as enumd under (an-) ariya-magga (see micchā) forming the contrary to the sammatta or righteousness of the Ariyan Path. These 8 at DN ii.353; DN iii.254; AN ii.221; AN iv.237; Vb 387; Vism 683. Besides these there is a set of 10, consisting of the above 8 plus micchā -ñāṇa and ˚vimutti wrong knowledge & wrong emancipation: DN iii.290; Vb 391; Vism 683 (where ˚ñāṇa & ˚viratti for vimutti ) ■ See further DN iii.217 (˚niyata); Pp 22; Dhs 1028 (cp. Dhs. trsl. §1028) Vb 145; Tikp. 32 (˚niyata-citta), 325 (˚tika), 354 (id.).

abstr. fr. micchā

Micchā

(adv.) wrongly, in a wrong way, wrong-, false Snp 438 (laddho yaso), 815 (paṭipajjati leads a wrong course of life, almost syn with anariyaṃ. Illustrated by “pāṇaṃ hanati, adinnaṃ ādiyati, sandhiṃ chindati, nillopaṃ harati, ekāgārikaṃ karoti, paripanthe tiṭṭhati, paradāraṃ gacchati, musā bhaṇati” at Nd i.144); Vb-a 513 (˚ñāṇa, ˚vimutti) -micchā˚; often in same combns as sammā˚; with which contrasted, e.g. with the 8 parts of (an-) ariya-magga viz. ˚diṭṭhi (wrong) views (D iii.52, 70 sq., 76, 111 246, 269, 287, 290, Dhp 167, Dhp 316 sq.; Pp 39; Vism 469 (def.) Pv-a 27, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67; cp. ˚ka one who holds wrong views DN iii.45, DN iii.48, DN iii.264; Vism 426); ˚saṅkappa aspiration (D iii.254, 287, 290 sq., Dhp 11); ˚vācā speech (ibid.); ˚kammanta conduct (ibid.); ˚ājīva living (D iii.176 sq., 254, 290; AN ii.53, AN ii.240, AN ii.270, AN iv.82); ˚vāyāma effort (D iii.254, 287, 290 sq.); ˚sati mindfulness (ibid.) ˚samādhi concentration (ibid.); see magga 2, and cp the following:

-gahaṇa wrong conception, mistake Ja iii.304. -cāra wrong behaviour Pp 39 (& adj. cārin); Vb-a 383 (var degrees). -paṭipadā wrong path (of life) Pp 49 (adj.: ˚paṭipanna, living wrongly).; -paṇihita (citta wrongly directed mind Dhp 42 = Ud 39 [cp. BSk. mithyāpraṇidhāna Divy 14]. -patha wrong road, wrong course Vb 145 (lit. & fig.; in exegesis of diṭṭhi, cp Nd ii.taṇhā iii.; Dhs 381; Dhs-a 253).

Sk. mithyā, cp. Vedic mithaḥ interchanging, separate, opposite, contrary (opp. saṃyak together: see samma); mithū wrongly; see also mithu

Miñja

(nt.) & miñjā (f.) marrow, pith, kernel Vin i.25 (in sequence chavi, camma, maṃsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, miñjā); Vism 235 (id.); Kp iii. (aṭṭhi˚, f. cp. Kp-a 52, nt.); Ja iv.402 (tāla˚ pith of the palm); Mvu 28. 28 (panasa˚, f. kernels of the seeds of the jak-fruit).

-rāsi heap of marrow Vism 260 (= matthalunga).

Vedic majjan (fr. majj ?); on form see Geiger. P.Gr. § 91, & cp. Pischel,; Prk. Gr. §§ 74, 101

Miñjaka

= miñja, only in tela˚; inner kernels of tila-seed, made into a cake Pv-a 51. See doṇī2.

Mita

measured, in measure DN i.54 (doṇa˚ a doṇa measure full); Snp 300 (bhāgaso m. measured in harmonious proportions, i.e. stately); Pv i.1013 (id.) Ja iii.541amita unlimited, without measure, boundless in Ep. amit-ābha of boundless lustre Sdhp 255 Also Name of a Buddha.

-āhāra measured, i.e. limited food Snp 707. -bhāṇin speaking measuredly, i.e. in moderation Dhp 227; Ja iv.252.

Vedic mita, pp. of , mināti, to measure; also in meaning “moderate, measured,” cp. in same sense Gr. μέτριος

Mitta

(m. nt.) friend. Usually m., although nt. occurs in meaning “friend,” in sg. (Ne 164) & pl. (Snp 185 Snp 187); in meaning “friendship” at Ja vi.375 (= mittabhāva C.). The half-scientific, half-popular etym. of mitta, as given at Vb-a 108, is “mettāyantī ti mittā minantī ti vā m.; sabba-guyhesu anto pakkhipantī ti attho” (the latter: “they enclose in all that is hidden”)-Two kinds of friends are distinguished at Nd ii.510 (in exegesis of Snp 37 & 75), viz.; āgārika˚; (a house-or lay-friend) and anāgārika˚; (a homeless-or clericalfriend). The former is possessed of all ordinary qualities of kindness and love, the latter of special virtues of mind & heart ■ A friend who acts as a sort of Mentor or spiritual adviser, is called a; kalyāṇa-mitta (see under kalyāṇa) ■ Mitta is often combd with similar terms devoting relationship or friendship, e.g. with amaccā colleagues and ñāti-sālohita˚; blood-relations, in ster phrase at Vin ii.126; AN i.222; Snp p.104; Pv-a 28; cp ñāti-mittā relatives & friends Pv i.59; suhada (“dear heart”) DN iii.187 (four types, cp. m. paṭirūpaka) suhajja one who is dear to one’s heart Pv-a 191; sahāya companion Pv-a 86. The neut. form occurs for kind things DN iii.188; SN i.37 ■ Opp. sapatta enemy Pv-a 13; amitta a sham friend or enemy Snp 561 (= paccatthika Snp-a 455); DN iii.185. pāpa-mitta bad friend Pv-a 5 ■ For refs. see e.g. Snp 58, Snp 255, Snp 296, Snp 338; Dhp 78, Dhp 375.

-ābhirādhin one who pleases his friends Ja iv.274 (= mittesu adubbhamāno C.) -ddu [cp. Sk. mitra-druha one who injures or betrays his friends SN i.225; Snp 244; Ja iv.260; also in foll. forms: ˚dubbha Pv ii.93 (same passage at Ja iv.352; Ja v.240; Ja vi.310, Ja vi.375); ˚dūbha Ja iv.352; Ja vi.310; ˚dūbhin [cp. Sk. ˚drohin] Ja iv.257 Ja v.97 (˚kamma); vi.375; Dhp-a ii.23. -paṭirūpaka a false friend, one pretending to be a friend DN iii.185 (four types: añña-d-atthu-hara, vacī-parama, anuppiyabhāṇin apāya-sahāya, i.e. one who takes anything one who is a great talker, one who flatters, one who is a spendthrift companion.) -bandhava a relation in friendship, one who is one’s relative as a friend Nd ii.455 (where Nd i.11 has manta-bandhava). -bheda see mithu-bheda -vaṇṇa pretence of friendship, a sham friendship Pv iv.86 (= mitta-rūpa, m ■ paṭirūpatā Pv-a 268).

cp. Vedic mitra, m. & nt., friend; Av. mipro, friend

Mittatā

(f.)-(˚) state of being a friend, friendship, in kalyāṇa˚; being a good friend, friendship as a helper (see kalyāṇa) DN iii.274; Vism 107.

abstr. fr. mitta

Mitti

(f.) friendship Ja i.468 (= metti C.).

a by-form of metti

Mithu

(adv.) opposite reciprocally, contrary Snp 825, Snp 882 (taken by Nd i.163 Nd i.290, on both passages identically, as n. pl. of adj. instead of adv., & expl;d by “dve janā dve kalaha-kāraka” etc.).

-bheda [evidently in meaning of mitta-bheda “break of friendship,” although mithu means “adversary, thus perhaps “breaking, so as to cause opposition” breaking of alliance, enmity DN ii.76; Ja iv.184 (here with v.l. mitta˚); Kv 314.

cp. Vedic mithū & P. micchā; mith, cp. mithaḥ alternately, Av. miχō wrongly; Goth. misso one another, missa-leiks different; Ger. E. prefix mis-i.e. wrongly: Ger. missetat wrong doing = misdeed; Lat mūto to change, mutuus reciprocal; Goth. maipms present = Ags. mapum; mith in Vedic Sk. is “to be opposed to each other,” whereas in Vedic mithuna the notion of “pair” prevails. See also methuna

Middha

(nt.) torpor, stupidity, sluggishness DN i.71 (thīna˚) Snp 437; AN v.18; Dhs 1157; Mil 299, Mil 412 (appa˚ not slothful, i.e. diligent, alert); Vism 450 (˚rūpa; + rogarūpa, jātirūpa, etc., in def. of rūpa); DN-a i.211 (expld as cetasika gelañña: see on this passage Dhs trsl. §1155) Sdhp 459 ■ See thīna.

orig. pp. perhaps to Vedic mid (?) to be fat = medh, as Dhs-a 378 gives “medhatī ti middhaṃ ■ More likely however connected with Sk. methi (pillar = Lat. meta), cp. Prk. medhi. The meaning is more to the point too, viz. “stiff.” Thus semantically identical with thīna ■ BSk. also middha, e.g. Divy 555

Middhin

(adj.) torpid, drowsy, sluggish Dhp 325 (= thīnamiddh’ âbhibhūta Dhp-a iv.16).

fr. middha

Midha

is given as root in meaning “hiṃsana,” to hurt at Dhtm 536 (with var. v.v ll.), not sure.

does it refer to 2 as in mināti2, or to middha ?

Minana

(nt.) measuring, surveying DN-a i.79; Dhs-a 123.

fr. mi to measure, fix, construct

Mināti1

to measure Vb-a 108 (see etym. of mitta); Pot. mine Ja v.468 (= mineyya C.) fut. minissati Sdhp 585. ger. minitvā Vism 72; grd minitabba Ja v.90 ■ Pass. mīyati: see anu˚,-pp mita ■ Cp. anu˚, abhi˚, ni˚, pa˚, vi˚. Caus. māpeti (q.v.).

roots (Vedic) mā & mi; pres. minūte & minoti; Idg. *me, cp. Sk. mātra measure, māna; Av. mā-mitiḥ measure; Gr. μάτιον small measure, μ ̈ητις counsel Lat.; metior, mensis, modus; Goth. mēla bushel; Ags. maed measure (cp. E. mete, meet fitting); Lith. mẽtas year ■ The Dhtm 726 gives mi in meaning “pamāṇa”

Mināti2

to diminish; also: to hurt injure. Very rare, only in some prep. combns ■ See also mīyati.

Vedic mināti, (or mi), to diminish; cp. Gr. μινύω diminish; Lat. minor = E. minor; Goth. mins (little), compar, minniza, superl. minnists = Ger mindest ■ The Dhtp 502 gives mi with “hiṃsā,” the Dhtm 725 with “hiṃsana.” It applies the same interpretation to a root midh (Dhtm 536), which is probably abstracted fr. Pass. mīyati

Miyyati

(& Mīyati) to die ■ (a miyyati: Snp 804; Ne 23. med. 3rd pl. miyyare Snp 575; pot. miyye Ja vi.498; ppr. miyyamāna MN iii.246 Vism 49; fut. miyyissati MN iii.246 ■ (b) mīyati (influenced in form by jīyati & mīyati of mināti;2) MN iii.168 (jāyati jīyati mīyati); Ja iii.189; Dhp 21 pot. mīyetha DN ii.63. ppr. mīyamāna SN i.96 ■ pp mata.

corresponding to Vedic mriyate, fr. mr, viâ *mīryate → miyyati. See marati

Milakkha

a barbarian, foreigner, outcaste hillman S; v.466; Ja vi.207; DN-a i.176; Snp-a 236 (˚mahātissa-thera Np.), 397 (˚bhāsā foreign dialect) The word occurs also in form milakkhu (q.v.).

cp. Ved. Sk. mleccha barbarian, root mlecch, onomat. after the strange sounds of a foreign tongue cp. babbhara & mammana

Milakkhu

a non-Aryan DN iii.264 Thag 965 (˚rajana “of foreign dye” trsl.; Kern, Toev. s. v. translates “vermiljoen kleurig”). As milakkhuka at Vin iii.28, where Bdhgh expls by “Andha-Damil’ ādi.”

the Prk. form (A-Māgadhī, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. 105, 233) for P. milakkha

Milāca

a wild man of the woods, non-Aryan, barbarian Ja iv.291 (not with C. = janapadā), cp. luddā m. ibid., and milāca-puttā Ja v.165 (where C. also expls by bhojaputta, i.e. son of a villager).

by-form to milakkha, viâ *milaccha → *milacca → milāca: Geiger, P.Gr. 622; Kern, Toev. s. v.

Milāta

faded, withered, dried up Ja i.479; Ja v.473; Vism 254 (˚sappa-piṭṭhi, where Kp-a 49 in same passage reads “milāta-dham(m)ani-piṭṭhi”); Dhp-a i.335 Dhp-a iv.8 (sarīra), 112; Snp-a 69 (˚mālā, in simile); Mvu 22 Mvu 46 (a˚); Sdhp 161.

pp. of milāyati

Milātatā

(f.) only neg. ; the (fact of) not being withered Ja v.156.

abstr. fr. milāta

Milāyati

to relax, languish, fade wither SN i.126; Iti 76; Ja i.329; Ja v.90 ■ Caus. milāpeti [Sk. mlāpayati] to make dry, to cause to wither Ja i.340 (sassaṃ); fig. to assuage, suppress, stifle Ja iii.414 (taṇhaṃ) ■ pp. milāta.

Vedic mlā, to become soft; ldg. *melā & *mlei;, as in Gr. βλας, βλακεύω to languish; Lat. flaccus withered (= flaccid); Lith. blakà weak spot; also Gr. βληξρός weak ■ Dhtp 440: “milā = gatta-vimāne” (i.e. from the bent limbs); Dhtm 679 id.

Millikā

at Pv-a 144 in passage paṃsukūlaṃ dhovitv-âbhisiñcimillikañ ca katvā adāsi is to be read either as “abhisiñci cimillikañ ca k.” or “abhisiñcitvā mudukañ ca k.”

Miḷhakā

at SN ii.228 is to be read mīḷhakā (q.v.).

Misati

to wink (one’s eyes): see ni˚.

miṣ, Vedic miṣati, root given as misa at Dhtm 479, with expln “mīlane”

Missa

(adj.) 1. mixed (with:-˚); various Vin i.33 (kesa˚, jatā˚ etc. = a mixture of, various); Thag 143; Ja iii.95, Ja iii.144 (udaka-paṇṇa˚ yāgu); Pv i.92 (missā kiṭakā). nt. missaṃ as adv. “in a mixed way” Vism 552 = Vb-a 161 (+ dvidhā).

2. accompanied by (-˚), having company or a retinue, a title of honour in names, also as polite address [cp. Sk. miśra & āraya miśra] Ja v.153 (voc. f. misse), 154 (f. missā).

3. missa is changed to missī in compn with kṛ; and bhū (like Sk.) thus in missī-bhāva (sexual) intercourse, lit. mixed state, union Ja ii.330; Ja iv.471; Ja v.86; Vb-a 107; and missī-bhūta mixed, coupled, united Ja v.86 (= hatthena hatthaṃ gahetvā kāya-missībhāvaṃ upagata C.). Cp sam.˚;

-kesī (f.) “mixed hair,” Ep. of a heavenly maiden or Apsaras Vv 6014 (expld at Vv-a 280 as “ratta-mālādīhi missita-kesavaṭṭī”). The m. missa-kesa occurs as a term for ascetics (with muṇḍa) at Vism 389.

orig. pp. of miś, cp. Vedic miśra. Sk. miśrayati, mekṣayati; Gr. μίγνυμι & μίσγω; Lat. misceo mixtus; Ags. miscian = mix; Ohg. miskan ■ Dhtp 631 “sammissa”

Missaka

(adj. n.) 1. mixed, combined Ja ii.8 (phalika˚ rajata-pabbata mountain of silver mixed with crystal); Vb-a 16 (lokiya-lokuttara˚); usually ˚-, like ˚āhāra mixed food Dhp-a ii.101; ˚uppāda mixed portents, a main chapter of the art of prognosticating (cp. Bṛhat-Saṃhitā ch. 86: miśrak’ âdhyāya) Mil 178 ˚bhatta = ˚āhāra Snp-a 97; Mhbv 27.

2. (m.) an attendant follower; f. missikā Dhp-a i.211 (Sāmāvati˚). 3. (nt.) Name of a pleasure grove in heaven (lit. the grove of bodily union), one of the 3: Nandana, M., Phārusaka Ja vi.278; Vism 424.

4. (pl. missakā) a group of devas mentioned at DN ii.260 in list of popular gods (cp. missa 2 and missakesī).

fr. missa

Missakatta

(nt.) mixing, mixture, combination with (-˚) Tikp 291.

abstr. fr. missaka

Missana

(nt.) mixing Dhtp 338.

fr. misseti

Missita

mixed, intermingled Snp 243; Ja v.460; Pv-a 198 (dhañña sāsapa-tela˚); Vv-a 280 (see under missa-kesī).

pp. of misseti

Misseti

1. to mix Mil 126 (mayaṃ missayissāma); Pv-a 191 (palāse sālīhi saddhiṃ).

2. to bring together in cohabitation, to couple Ja v.154 (C.: kilesana misseti) ■ pp. missita.

Caus. of miś, Vedic miśrayati

Mihati

is given as root mih in 2 meanings at Dhtp, viz. (1) īsa-hasana (No. 328), i.e. a kind of laugh, for smi as in mihita. (2) secana (No. 342).

Mihita

(nt.) a smile Ja iii.419; Ja v.452; Ja vi.504- mihita-pubba with smiles Thag 460 (spelt mhita˚) Ja vi.221 (= sita C.) ■ Cp. vimhaya, vimhāpaka vimhita.

pp. of smi; this is the inverted-diaeretic (Pāli) form (smita → *hmita → *mhita → mihita) for the other (Sk.) form smita (q.v.). The Dhtp (328) puts root down as mih

Mīyati

see miyyati (Pass. of marati ).

Mīlati

to wink, only in cpd. nimīlati to close the eyes (opp um˚).

mīl, given at Dhtp 267 & 614 with “nimīlane”

Mīḷha

excrement MN i.454 = MN iii.236 (˚sukhaṃ vile pleasure); AN iii.241, AN iii.242; Thag 1152; Ja ii.11; Ja vi.112; Vv 5211 (with ref. to the gūthaniraya); Pv iii.45 (= gūtha Pv-a 194); Dhp-a ii.53 (˚ṃ khādituṃ).

-kūpa pit of excr., cesspool Pgdp 22.

pp. of mih, Vedic mehati to excrete water, i.e. urine, only with ref. to the liquid; Sk. mīḍha = Lat. mictus pp. of mingo, to urinate. Cp. Av. maēƶaiti to urinate meƶ urine; Gr. ὀμιξεϊν & ο ̓́μιξμα id.; Ags. mīgan to ur.; in Ohg. mist & Ags. miox the notion refers more to the solid excrement, as in Pāli ■ A related root; *meigh to shed water is found in megha, cloud (watershedder), q.v. for further cognates

Mīḷhakā

(f.) cesspool SN ii.228 (so read for T. piḷhakā; v.l. BB miḷhakā) See also piḷhakā. The trsl. (K.S. ii.155) gives “dungbeetle.”

fr. mīḷha; cp. BSk. mīḍha-ghaṭa

Mukula

a bud; see makula (where also see mukulita ) ■ Abhp 811, Abhp 1116.

cp. Sk. mukula

Mukka

only in um & paṭi˚; (q.v.), and as v.l. at MN iii.61.

pp. of muc, Sk. mukta, for the usual P. mutta; cp. Prk. mukka, Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 566

Mukkhaka

at Ja i.441 should be read as mokkhaka, meaning “first, principal, foremost”; cp. mokkha2.

Mukha

(nt.) 1. the mouth Snp 608, Snp 1022 (with ref. to the long tongue, pahūta-jivha, of the Buddha or Mahāpurisa) Ja ii.7; DN-a i.287 (uttāna˚ clear mouthed, i.e. easy to understand, cp. DN i.116); Pv-a 11, Pv-a 12 (pūti˚), 264 (mukhena).

2. the face Ja vi.218 (uṇṇaja m.); Pv-a 74, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 77; ˚ṃ karoti to make a face (i.e. grimace Vism 343adho˚; face downward Vin ii.78; opp upari˚; (q.v.); assu˚; with tearful face Dhp 67; Pv-a 39 see assudum˚; (adj.) sad or unfriendly looking Ja ii.393; Ja vi.343; scurrilous Ja v.78; bhadra˚; brightfaced Pv-a 149; ruda˚; crying Pv i.112.

3. entrance mouth (of a river) Mvu 8, Mvu 12; āya˚; entrance (lit opening), i.e. cause or means of income DN-a i.218 ukkā˚; the opening of a furnace, a goldsmith’s smelting pot AN i.257; Snp 686; Ja vi.217; Ja vi.574. ubhato-mukha having 2 openings MN i.57. sandhi˚; opening of the cleft Pv-a 4. Hence:

4. cause, ways, means reason, by way of Ja iii.55 by way of a gift (dānamukhe) iv.266 (bahūhi mukhehi) ■ apāya˚; cause of ruin or loss AN ii.166; AN iv.283.

5. front part, front, top, in īsā˚; of the carriage pole SN i.224 = Ja i.203. Hence

6. the top of anything, front, head, best part; adj topmost, foremost Snp 568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaññā) 569 (nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando; cp. Vin i.246) Vb-a 332 (= uttamaṃ, mukha-bhūtaṃ vā) ■ Der. adj mokkha & pāmokkha; (q.v.). Note. A poetical instr sg. mukhasā is found at Pv i.23 & i.32, as if the nom were mukho (s-stem) ■ The abl. mukhā is used as adv. “in front of, before,” in cpd. sam˚ & param˚;, e.g. Pv-a 13. See each sep.

-ādhāna (1) the bit of a bridle MN i.446; (2) setting of the mouth, i.e. mouth-enclosure, rim of the m.; in m siliṭṭhaṃ a well-connected, well-defined mouth-contour Dhs-a 15 (not with trsl. “opens lightly,” but better with note “is well adjusted,” see Expos. 19, where write ˚ādhāna for ˚ādāna). -āsiya (? cp. āsita1) to be eaten by the mouth Dhs-a 330 (mukhena asitabba) -ullokana looking into a person’s face, i.e. cheerful bright, perhaps also flattering Dhp-a ii.193 (as ˚olokana) -ullokika flattering (cp. above) Nd i.249 (puthu Satthārānaṃ m. puthujjana); Pv-a 219. -odaka water for rinsing the mouth Nd ii.391 = Mil 370; Vv-a 65; Dhp-a ii.19; Dhp-a iv.28. -ja born in (or from) the mouth, i.e. a tooth Ja vi.219. -tuṇḍa a beak Vv-a 227 [cp. BSk mukhatuṇḍaka Divy 387]. -dugga one whose mouth is a difficult road, i.e. one who uses his mouth (speech badly Snp 664 (v.l. ˚dukkha). -dūsi blemishes of the face, a rash on the face DN-a i.223 (m ■ dosa ibid.) -dvāra mouth opening Pv-a 180. -dhovana-ṭṭhāna place for rinsing the mouth, “lavatory” Dhp-a ii.184 -puñchana wiping one’s mouth Vin i.297. -pūra filling the mouth, a mouthful, i.e. as much as to fill the mouth Ja vi.350. -pūraka mouth-filling Vism 106 -bheri a musical instrument, “mouth-drum,” mouthorgan (?) Nd ii.219 B; Snp-a 86. -makkaṭika a grimace (like that of a monkey) of the face Ja ii.70, Ja ii.448 (T makkaṭiya). -vaṭṭi “opening-circumference,” i.e. brim, edge, rim Dhp-a ii.5 (of the Lohakumbhi purgatory cp. Ja iii.43 lohakumbha-mukhavaṭṭi); Dhp-a iii.58 (of a gong). -vaṇṇa the features Pv-a 122, Pv-a 124. -vikāra contortion of the mouth Ja ii.448. -vikūṇa (= vikāra grimace Snp-a 30. -saṅkocana distortion or contraction of the mouth, as a sign of displeasure Dhp-a ii.270 cp. mukha-sankoca Vism 26. -saññata controlling one’s mouth (i.e. speech) Dhp 363, cp. Dhp-a iv.93.

Vedic mukha, fr. Idg. *mu, onomat., cp. Lat. mu facere, Gr. μυκάομαι, Mhg. mūgen, Lat. mūgio to moo (of cows), to make the sound “moo”; Ohg māwen to cry, muckazzen to talk softly; also Gr. μϋχος word, “myth”; Ohg. mūla = Ger. maul; Ags. mule snout, etc. Vedic mūka silent, dumb = Lat. mutus = E mute

Mukhara

(adj.) garrulous, noisy, scurrilous SN i.203; SN v.269; AN i.70; AN iii.199, AN iii.355 Thag 955; Snp 275; Ja iii.103; Dhp-a ii.70 (ati˚); Pv-a 11-opp. amukhara MN i.470; Thag 926; Pp 35; Mil 414.

cp. Sk. mukhara; fr. mukha

Mukharatā

(f.) talkativeness, garrulousness, noisiness Dhp-a ii.70.

fr. mukhara

Mugga

a kind of kidney-bean, Phaseolus mungo, freq. combd with māsa2 (q.v.). On its size (larger than sāsapa smaller than kalāya) see A v.170 & cp. kalāya ■ DN ii.293; MN i.57 (+ māsa); SN i.150; Ja i.274, Ja i.429; Ja iii.55 Ja vi.355 (˚māsā); Mil 267, Mil 341; Snp-a 283.

-sūpa bean-soup Vism 27. -sūpyatā “bean-soupcharacter,” or as Vism trsl. 32 has it “bean-currytalk”; fig. denoting a faulty character, i.e. a man who behaves like bean-soup. The metaphor is not quite transparent; it is expld by Bdhgh as meaning a man speaking half-truths, as in a soup of beans some are only half-boiled. The expln is forced, & is stereotype; as well as is the combn in which it occurs. Its origin remains to be elucidated. Anyhow it refers to an unevenness in character, a flaw of character. The passage (with var. spellings) is always the foll.: cāṭukamyatā (pātu˚ Nd2; ˚kammatā Miln; pāṭu˚ Vb mugga-sūpyatā (˚sūpatā Nd2; ˚suppatā Mil & Kp-a 236; ˚sūpatā and suppatā Vb & Vb-a 338; supyatā Vism) pāribhaṭṭatā (˚bhatyatā Vism.; ˚bhaṭṭakatā Miln; ˚bhaṭyatā & ˚bbhaṭṭatā Vb). At Nd;2 391 it is used to explain sāvajja- bhogin, at Vism 17 & Vb 246; anācāra; at Vb 352 lapanā; at Mil 370 it is used generally (cp. Mil trsl. ii.287). The C. expln of the Vb passage, as given at (VbhA 483 & ) Vism 17 runs as follows: “mugga-sūpa-samānāya sacc’ âlikena jīvita kappanatāy’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathā hi muggasūpe paccante bahū muggā pākaṃ gacchanti, thokā na gacchanti, evam eva saccâlikena jīvitakappake puggale bahuṃ alikaṃ hoti, appakaṃ saccaṃ.” The text at Vb-a 483 is slightly different, although the sense is the same. Similarly at Vism 27.

Vedic mudga, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 240

Muggatiya

(nt.?) a plant, according to C. a species of bean Ja vi.536.

fr. mugga?

Muggara

a club, hammer, mallet Ja i.113; Ja ii.196, Ja ii.382; Ja v.47; Ja vi.358; Mil 351; Vism 231; Dhp-a i.126; Dhp-a ii.21; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 55 (ayo˚), 56 (˚pahāra), 66 192. The word is specifically peculiar to the so-called Jātaka style.

cp. Sk. mudgara

Mucala

occurs as simplex only in Np. Mahā- mucala -mālaka Mvu 15, Mvu 36. It refers to the tree mucalinda, of which it may be a short form. On the other hand mucal-inda appears to the speaker of Pāli a cp. noun, viz. king of the mucala(s) (trees). Its (late?) Sk. correspondent is mucilinda, of which the P. form may be the regular representative (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 34).

1. the tree Barringtonia acutangula (Nicula*, of which it may be a dialectical distortion: *Abhp 563 nicula → *mucula → *mucala) Vin i.3; Ja v.405 (˚ketakā, Dvandva); vi.269 (id.).

2. Name of a nāga (serpent) king Vin i.3.

3. N of a great lake Ja vi.534, Ja vi.535.

Mucchati

1. (spelt muccati to become stiff, congeal, coagulate, curdle Dhp 71; Dhp-a ii.67.

2. to become infatuated DN iii.43 (majjati + )

3. only in Caus. muccheti to make sound, to increase in tone Ja ii.249 (vīṇaṃ); iii.188 (id.) ■ pp. mucchita.

murch, an enlargement of Vedic mūr to get stiff (as in mūra stupid, dull, cp. Gr. μωρός; Sk. mūrakha foolish). Used in 2 senses, viz. (a) to become stiff (b) (Caus.) to harden, increase in tone, make louder From (a) a fig. meaning is derived in the sense of to become dulled or stupid, viz. infatuated, possessed.; See also Lüders in K.Z. xlii.194 a. How far we are justified to connect Dhtp 216 & 503; mu (“bandhane”) with this root is a different question. These 2 roots seem to be without connections ■ mūrch itself is at Dhtp 50 defined with “mohe”

Mucchanā

(f.) swelling or rising in tone, increase of sound Ja ii.249 (vīṇaṃ uttama-mucchanāya mucchetvā vādesi).

fr. mucchati 2

Mucchañcikatā

(˚añji˚) is probably the correct reading for puñcikatā ■ We find puñcikatā at Dhs 1136, Dhs 1230 Vb 351, Vb 361 (v.l. pucchañji˚); Dhs-a 365; mucchañci˚ at Nd i.8 & Nd;2 p. 152; pucchañji˚; at Vb-a 477. The meaning is “agitation,” as seen from expln of term at Dhs-a 365 (“wagging of a dog’s tail,” pucchaṃ cāleti) and Vb-a 477 (“lābhan’ âlābhanaka-ṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā”) ■ The etym. expln is difficult we may take it as a (misunderstood) corruption of *mucch-aṅgi-kata i.e. mucchā + anga + kṛ; “being made stiff-of-limbs,” or “swoon.” Psychologically we may take “swoon” as the climax of agitation, almost like “hysterics.” A similar case of a similar term of swooning being interpreted by Bdhgh as “wavering (cal ) is chambhitatta “paralysis,” expld as “sakalasarīra calanaṃ ” at DN-a i.50 ■ The expression mucchañcikatā reminds us of the term kaṭukañcukatā.

Mucchā

1. fainting, swoon Pv-a 174.

2. infatuation AN ii.10 (kāma˚). Snp 328; Dhs 1059.

fr. mūrch

Mucchita

1. fainted, swooning, in a faint Ja i.243; Dhp-a ii.112; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 174, Pv-a 258.

2. distraught infatuated SN i.61, SN i.204; AN i.274; DN iii.46 (a˚) Iti 92; Ja iii.432; Ja v.274 (C. for pagiddha & gadhita).; Cp. pa˚.

pp. of mucchati

Mujjati

to sink, dive, be submerged Dhtp 70 (mujja = mujjana). Only in cpds um˚ & ni˚;.

The P. form of the Sk. majj

Muñcati

I. Forms. The 2 bases muñc˚ & mucc˚; are differentiated in such a way, that muñc˚; is the active base, and mucc˚; the passive. There are however cases where the active forms (muñc˚) are used for the passive ones (mucc˚), which may be due simply to a misspelling ñc & cc being very similar ■ A.; Active. pres. muñcati Ja i.375; Ja iv.272; Ja v.453; Vv 6418; pot. muñcetha Dhp 389; imper. muñca Dhp 348; ppr. muñcanto Snp 791 aor. muñci Ja v.289; Mvu 19, Mvu 44; pl. muñciṃsu Ja iv.142 ger. muñciya Mvu 25, Mvu 67; mutvā Ja i.375; & muñcitvā ibid.; Pv-a 43; inf. muñcituṃ DN i.96 ■ Caus. II muñcāpeti DN i.148 ■ B. Passive. pres. muccati Snp 508 ppr. muccanto Ja i.118; imper, sg. muccassu Thig 2 pl. muccatha Dhp-a ii.92; pot. muñceyya Pv ii.26 Pv-a 104; Dhp 127; fut. muccissati Ja i.434 (where also muñcissati in same sense); Dhp-a i.105; Dhp-a iii.242; Pv-a 53 Pv-a 105; also mokkhasi Vin i.21 = SN i.111; pl. mokkhanti Dhp 37; aor. mucci(ṃsu) SN iii.132; SN iv.20; Ja ii.66; inf muccituṃ Thag 253; Dhp-a i.297 ■ Caus. moceti mocāpeti; (q.v.) ■ pp. mutta ■ II. Meanings. 1. to release, deliver (from = abl.), set free (opp. bandhati Snp 508 (sujjhati, m., bajjhati); SN iii.132 (cittāni mucciṃsu their hearts were cleansed), Thig 2 (muccassu) Dhp 127 (pāpakammā, quoted at Pv-a 104); Pv ii.26 Pv-a 53 (niray’ ûpapattito muccissati), 105; Dhp-a i.297 (dukkhā muccitu-kāma desirous of being delivered from unpleasantness; v.l. muñc˚); ii.92 (dukkhā). 2. to send off, let loose, drop, give Ja iv.272 (saraṃ an arrow); Vism 313 (dhenu vacchakassa khīra-dhāraṃ m.); Mvu 25, Mvu 63 (phalakaṃ).

3. to let out of the yoke, to unharness, set free DN i.148 (satta usabhasatāni muñcāpeti); Pv-a 43 (yoggāni muñcitvā). 4. to let go, emit, send forth (light) Ja v.289 (obhāsaṃ muñci); Mvu 19, Mvu 44 (rasmiyo).

5. to send forth (sound); to utter, emit (words etc.) Ja i.375 (vācaṃ) Vv 6418 (mālā m. ghosaṃ = vissajjenti Vv-a 281). 6. (from 4 & 5 in general) to undertake, to bestow, send forth, let loose on Dhp 389: “na brāhmaṇassa pahareyya nâssa muñcetha brāhmaṇo,” where Dhp-a iv.148 supplements veran na muñcetha (i.e. kopaṃ na kareyya) In this case veraṃ muñcati would be the same as the usual veraṃ bandhati, thus opposite notions being used complementarily. The interpretation “give up (enmity) instead of “undertake” is possible from a mere grammatical point of view. L. v. Sohroeder (Worte der Wahrheil) trsls “noch stürzt der Priester auf den Feind”!

7. to abandon, give up, leave behind Dhp 348 (muñca, viz. taṇhaṃ Dhp-a iv.63); Ja v.453 (peta-rāja-visayaṃ).

8. An idiomatic (late) use of the ger. muñciya (with acc.) is in the sense of an adv. (or prep.), meaning “except, besides,” e.g. maṃ m Mvu 25, Mvu 67; imaṃ m. (besides this Mvu 14, Mvu 17) ■ Cp pa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚. Note. At Dhp 71 muccati stands for muccheti (= Sk. mūrchati) to become stiff, coagulate curdle; cp. Dhp-a ii.67. Muncana & Muccana;

Vedic muñcati; muc, to release, loosen; with orig. meaning “strip off, get rid of,” hence also “glide as in Lith. mūkti to escape, Ags. smūgan to creep Ger. schmiegen to rub against. See further connections in Walde, Lat. Wtb., s. v. emungo. The Dhtp 376 expls by mocane, Dhtm 609 id.; 631: moce; 765 pamocane

Muñcana & Muccana

(nt.) 1. release, being freed, deliverance Ja iv.478 (mucc˚); ˚ākāra (muñc˚) means of deliverance (dukkhato from ill) Dhp-a i.267; ˚kāla time of release (dukkhā from suffering Dhp-a ii.11 (mucc˚, v.l. muñc˚).

2. letting loose emitting, giving, bestowing Vb-a 249 (speaking shouting out; Vism reading p. 265 is to be corrected fr mañcana!); Pv-a 132 (v.l. dāna).

abstr. fr. muc

Muñcanaka

(adj.) sending out or forth, emitting Vv-a 303 (pabhā˚).

fr. muñcana

Muñja

1. a sort of grass (reed) Saccharum munja Roxb. Snp 440 ˚kesa having a dark mane (like m. grass) DN ii.174 ˚pādukā slipper made of m. grass Dhp-a iii.451. ˚maya made of m. grass Snp 28 ■ The reed itself is called isīkā (q.v.).

2. a sort of fish Ja iv.70 (+ rohita, taken as Dvandva by C.); vi.278 (id.).

Vedic muñja, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 72

Muṭa

see mutoḷī. Otherwise occurring in Np. Muṭa-siva at Mvu 11, Mvu 4.

Muṭṭha

having forgotten, one who forgets; only in two cpds., viz. ˚sacca [der. fr. foll. muṭṭha + sati + ya] forgetfulness, lit. forgotten-mindedness, usually combd with asampajañña, DN iii.213; AN v.149; Pp 21; Dhs 1349 (where read: yā asati ananussati… adhāraṇatā pilāpanatā sammussanatā) Vb 360, Vb 373; Vism 21; Dhp-a iv.85; & ˚sati(n) (adj. “forgetful in mindfulness,” i.e. forgetful, careless bewildered [cp. BSk. amuṣitasmṛti Lal. V. 562, to all appearance (wrongly) derived from P. musati to rob mus, muṣṇāti] DN iii.252, DN iii.282; SN i.61 (+ asampajāna) Pp 21, Pp 35 (neither passage expld in PugA!); Ja iii.488 Vb-a 275. As ˚satika at Mil 79Note. muṭṭhasati with var. (unsuccessful) etym. is discussed in detail also by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, pp. 92–⁠94.

pp. of mussati, mṛṣ

Muṭṭhi

(f.) the fist Vv-a 206 muṭṭhī katvā gaṇhāti to take by making a fist, i.e. clutch tightly, clenching one’s fist Ja vi.331muṭṭhiṃ akāsi he made a fist (as sign) Ja vi.364. As-˚ often meaning “handful.”- ācariya- muṭṭhi close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back from the pupil DN ii.100; SN v.153; Ja ii.221, Ja ii.250; Vv-a 138; Snp-a 180, Snp-a 368. kuṇḍaka˚; handful of rice powder Vv-a 5; Dhp-a i.425 taṇḍula˚; handful of rice Pv-a 131. tila˚; do. of tilaseeds Ja ii.278. paṃsu˚; do. of soil Ja vi.405. ritta˚ an empty fist Snp-a 306 = Dhp-a iv.38 (˚sadisa alluding to ignorance).

-yuddha fist-fight, boxing DN i.6. -sammuñjanī “fistbroom” a short broom Dhp-a ii.184.

Vedic muṣṭi, m. f. Does defnmuṭ; = maddane” at Dhtm 125 refer to muṭṭhi?

Muṭṭhika

1. a fist-fighter, wrestler, boxer Vin ii.105 (malla˚); Ja iv.81 (Np.); vi.277; Vism 31 (+ malla).

2. a sort of hammer Ja v.45.

fr. muṭṭhi

Muṇḍa

(adj.) bald, shaven; a shaven, (bald-headed) ascetic, either a samaṇa, or a bhikkhu or (f.) bhikkhunī SN i.175 (m. sanghāṭi-pāruta); Vin iv.265 (f.); Snp p.80 (= muṇḍita-sīsa Snp-a 402) ■ kaṇṇa˚; with cropped or shorn ears (appld to a dog) Pv ii.1210, cp muṇḍaka.

-pabbataka a bare mountain Ja i.303 (Hatthimatta) Vv-a 302 (v.l. for T. muṇḍika-pabbata). -vaṭṭin “shaven hireling” (?), a king’s servant, probably porter Vin ii.137. The expln given by Bdhgh on p. 319 (on CV. v. 29. 5) is twofold, viz. malla-kammakar’ ādayo viya kacchaṃ banditvā nivāsenti; and muṇḍa-veṭṭhī (sic) ti yathā rañño kuhiñci gacchanto parikkhāra-bhaṇḍavahana-manussā ti adhippāyo. Maybe that reading veṭi is more correct. -sira shaven head Dhp-a ii.125.

cp. BSk. muṇḍa

Muṇḍaka

= muṇḍa; cp. BSk. muṇḍaka Divy 13Snp p.80; Dhp 264 (= sīsa-muṇḍana-matta Dhp-a iii.391 qualification of a shaveling); Vv-a 67 (˚samaṇā, Dvandva) ■ aḍḍha˚; shaven over one half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mvu 6, Mvu 42kaṇṇa˚; “with blunt corners,” Name of one of the 7 great lakes: see under kaṇṇa. -paṭisīsaka the chignon of a shaveling, in phrase: kāsāyaṃ nivāsetvā muṇḍaka-paṭisīsakaṃ sīse paṭimuñcitvā fastening the (imitation) top-knot of a shaveling to his head Mil 90; cp. Ja ii.197 (paccekabuddha-vesaṃ gaṇhitvā paṭisīsakaṃ paṭimuñcitvā) similarly Ja v.49.

Muṇḍatta

(nt.) the fact of being shaven or shorn Pv-a 106.

abstr. fr. muṇḍa

Muṇḍana

(nt.) shaving, tonsure Dhp-a iii.391

fr. muṇḍa

Muṇḍika

(-pabbata) bare (mountain), uncertain T. reading at Vv-a 302 for v.l. SS muṇḍa- pabbata (q.v.).

Muṇḍita

shaven Snp-a 402 (˚sīsa).

pp. of muṇḍeti

Muṇḍiya

baldness, shaven condition (of ascetics & bhikkhus) MN i.515; Snp 249; Kvu i.95 Sdhp 374.

abstr. fr. muṇḍa

Muṇḍeti

to shave Mhbv 103 ■ pp. muṇḍita ■ The BSk. has only Caus. II muṇḍāpayati, at Divy 261. Should Dhtp 106 “muṇḍ khaṇḍha” be the defn of muṇḍati?-At Ja iii.368 we find muṇḍati for muṇḍeti (kuṇṭha-satthena muṇḍanto viya), which should prob. be read muṇḍento.

Denom ■ Caus. from muṇḍa

Muta

thought, supposed, imagined (i.e. received by other vaguer sense impressions than by sight & hearing) MN i.3; Snp 714 (= phusan’ arahaṃ Snp-a 498), 812; Ja v.398 (= anumata C.) Vb 14, Vb 429 sq ■ Often in set diṭṭha suta muta what is seen, heard & thought (? more likely “felt,” cp Nd ii.298: diṭṭha = cakkhunā d., sutaṃ = sotena s. mutaṃ = ghānena ghāyitaṃ, jivhāya sāyitaṃ, kāyena phuṭṭaṃ, and viññātaṃ = manasā v.; so that from the interpretation it follows that d. s. m. v. refer to the action (perception) of the 6 senses, where muta covers the 3 of taste, smell & touch, and viññāta the function of the manas) SN i.186 (K.S. i.237 note); iv.73; Th i.1216. Similarly the psychol. analysis of the senses at Dhs 961: rūp’ āyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ; sadd-āyat. sutaṃ gandh˚, ras˚, phoṭṭhabb˚ mutaṃ; sabbaṃ rūpaṃ manasā viññātaṃ. See on this passage Dhs trsl. § 961 note. In the same sense Dhs-a 388 (see Expositor, ii.439) ■ DN iii.232; Snp 790 (cp. Nd i.87 sq. in extenso 793, 798, 812, 887, 901, 914, 1086, 1122. Thus quite a main tenet of the old (popular) psychology.

-maṅgalika one who prophesies from, or derives lucky auspices from impressions (of sense; as compd with diṭṭha-mangalika visible-omen-hunter, and suta-m sound-augur) Ja iv.73 (where C. clearly expls by “touch”); Kp-a 119 (the same expln more in detail) -visuddhika of great purity, i.e. orthodox, successful, in matters of touch Nd i.89, Nd i.90. -suddhi purity in matter of touch Nd i.104, Nd i.105.

for mata, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. § 18

Muti

(f.) sense-perception, experience, understanding, intelligence Snp 864; Nd i.205 (on Snp 846 = hearsay, what is thought); Vb 325 (diṭṭhi, ruci muti, where muti is expld at Vb-a 412 as “mudatī ti muti”!) 328; Sdhp 221. Cp. sam˚.

for mati, cp. muta

Mutiṅga

a small drum, tabour DN i.79; Vin i.15; SN ii.266 sq. (a famous mythological drum, called Ānaka; same also at Ja ii.344); Ja iv.395 (bheri + ); Kp-a 49. Spelling mudiṅga at SN ii.266; Ja iv.395; Vism 250; Vb-a 232; Vv-a 210 (v.l. SS mutinga), 340 (id.).

-sadda sound of the drum Ja i.3 (one of the 10 sounds hatthi˚, assa˚ etc.).

Sk. mṛdanga on d → t. cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23

Mutimant

(adj.) sensible, intelligent, wise Snp 539; as mutīmā at Snp 61, Snp 321, Snp 385; pl. 881; Ja iv.76 (as mutīmā & mutimā); Nd ii.511 = Nd ii.259. Cp matimant.

fr. muti

Mutoḷī

a doubtful word occurring only in one stock phrase, viz. “ubhato-mukhā m. pūrā nānā-vihitassa dhaññassa” at MN i.57 (vv.ll. putoḷi, mūṭolī) = iii.90 (mūtoḷī) = DN ii.293 (T. mutoli, v.l. muṭoli; gloss K pūtolī). The Dial. ii.330 trsl. “sample bag” (see note on this passage; with remark “spelling uncertain”) Neumann, Mittlere Sammlung i.101 trsls “Sack.” Kern, Toev. s. v. mutoḷī tries to connect it with BSk moṭa (Hindi moṭh), bundle, which (with vv.ll. mūḍha muṭa, mūṭa) occurs only in one stock phrase “bharaiḥ motaiḥ piṭakaiḥ” at Divy 5, Divy 332, Divy 501, Divy 524. The more likely solution, however, is that mutoḷī is a distortion of puṭosā (puṭosa), which is found as v.l. to puṭaṃsa at all passages concerned (see puṭaṃsa). Thus the meaning is “bag, provision-bag.” The BSk. moṭa (muṭa) remains to be elucidated. The same meaning “provision-bag” fits at Vism 328 in cpd. yāna˚; where spelling is T. ˚paṭṭoli, v.l. BB ˚putoḷi, but which is clearly identical with our term. We should thus prefer to read yāna-puṭosi “carriage-bag for provisions.”

?

Mutta1

1. released, set free, freed; as-˚ free from Snp 687 (abbhā˚ free from the stain of a cloud); Dhp 172 (id.), 382 (id.) ■ Dhp 344; Pv iv.134; Pv-a 65 (su˚).

2. given up or out, emitted sacrificed Vin iii.97 = Vin iv.27 (catta, vanta, m.) AN iii.50 (catta + ). Cp. vi˚.

3. unsystematised. Comp. 9, 137 (vīthi˚).

-ācāra of loose habits DN i.166 = DN iii.40 = Pp 55 (where expld at PugA 231, as follows: vissatth’ ācāro. Uccārakamm’ ādīsu lokiya-kulaputt’ ācārena virahito ṭhitako va uccāraṃ karoti passāvaṃ karoti khādati bhuñjati) -paṭibhāna of loose intelligence, or immoderate promptitude (opp. yutta˚), quick-tempered Pp 42 (cp. PugA 223); Snp-a 110, Snp-a 111; -saddha given up to faith Snp 1146 (= saddhâdhimutta Nd ii.512). -sirā (pl.) with loose (i.e. confused) heads Kp-a 120 = Vism 415.

pp. of muñcati; Sk. mukta

Mutta2

(nt.) urine Vin iv.266 (passāvo muttaṃ vuccati); Pv i.91 (gūthañ ca m.); Pv-a 43, Pv-a 78 Enumd under the 32 constituents of the body (the dvattiṃs-ākāraṃ) at Kp iii. (cp. Kp-a 68 in detail on mutta; do. Vism 264, Vism 362; Vb-a 68, Vb-a 225, Vb-a 248 sq. = MN iii.90 = DN ii.293 etc.

-ācāra see mutta1. -karaṇa “urine-making,” i.e. pudendum muliebre, cunnus Vin iv.260. -karīsa urine & faeces, i.e. excrements Vin i.301; SN iii.85; AN ii.33; Snp 835; Nd i.181; Ja vi.111; Vism 259, Vism 305 Vism 342, Vism 418 (origin of). -gata what has become urine Dhs-a 247 (gūtha˚ + ). -vatthi the bladder Vism 345.

cp. Vedic mūtra; Idg. *meud to be wet, as in Gr. μύζω to suck, μυδάω to be wet; Mhg. smuz (= Ger schmutz), E. smut & mud, Oir. muad cloud (= Sk mudira cloud); Av. muprem impurity, Mir. mūn urine Gr. μιαίνω to make dirty

Muttaka

(adj.) only in cpd. antarā˚; one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167.

mutta1 + ka

Muttakā

(f.) = muttā; ˚maya made of pearls Mvu 27, Mvu 33.

Muttatā

(f.) state of being liberated, freedom Ja v.480.

abstr. fr. mutta1

Muttā

(f.) a pearl Vv 377 (˚ācita); Pv ii.75 (+ veḷuriya); Mvu 30, Mvu 66. Eight sorts of pearls are enumd at Mvu. 11, 14, viz. haya-gaja-rath’ āmalakā valay’anguli-veṭhakā kakudha-phala-pākatikā, i.e horse-, elephant-, waggon-, myrobalan-, bracelet-, ring-kakudha fruit-, and common pearls.

-āhāra a string or necklace of pearls Ja i.383; Ja vi.489; Dhp-a i.85; Snp-a 78 (simile); Vism 312. -jāla a string (net) of pearls Ja iv.120; Mvu 27, Mvu 31; Vv-a 198. -dāma garland or wreath of p. Mvu 30, Mvu 67 (so T. for v.l. ˚maya). -vali string of pearls Vv-a 169. -sikkā string of pearls Vv-a 244.

cp. Sk. muktā

Mutti

(f.) release, freedom, emancipation Snp 344 (muty-apekho); Nd i.88, Nd i.89 (+ vimutti & parimutti); Pv-a 35, Pv-a 46; Sdhp 492 ■ Cp vi˚.

fr. muc, cp. Sk. mukti

Muttika

a pearl vendor, dealer in pearls Mil 262.

fr. muttā

Mudati

in exegetical expln of “ muti ” at Vb-a 412: mudatī ti muti. See muti.

for modati?

Mudayantī

(f.) a certain plant, perhaps Ptychotis ajowan Ja vi.536.

cp. Sk. modayantī

Mudā

(f.) joy, pleasure DN ii.214 (v.l. pamudā); Sdhp 306, Sdhp 308.

fr. mud, see modati

Mudiṅga

see mutinga.

Mudita

pleased, glad, satisfied, only in cpd. ˚mana (adj.) with gladdened heart, pleased in mind Snp 680 (+ udagga); Vv 8315 (+ pasanna-citta) Cp. pa˚.

pp. of mud, modati

Muditā

(f.) soft-heartedness, kindliness sympathy. Often in triad mettā (“active love” Snp-a 128), karuṇā (“preventive love,” ibid.), muditā (“disinterested love”: modanti vata bho sattā modanti sādhu sutthū ti ādinā mayena hita-sukh’ âvippayogakāmatā muditā Snp-a 128); e.g. at DN i.251; SN v.118; AN i.196 etc. (see karuṇā) ■ Cp. also Snp 73; DN iii.50 DN iii.224, DN iii.248; Mil 332 (˚saññā; + mettā˚, karuṇā˚); Vism 318 (where defined as “modanti tāya, taṃ-samangino sayaṃ vā modati etc.”); Dhs-a 192. See on term Dhs trsl. §251 (where equalled to συγξαιροσύνη); Cpd. 24 (called sympathetic & appreciative), 97 (called “congratulatory & benevolent attitude”); Expos. 200 (interpretation here refers to mudutā Dhs-a 151 “plasticity”).

abstr. fr. mudu, for the usual mudutā, which in P. is only used in ord. sense, whilst muditā is in pregnant sense. Its semantic relation to mudita (pp of mud ) has led to an etym. relation in the same sense in the opinion of P. Commentators and the feeling of the Buddhist teachers. That is why Childers also derivers it from mud, as does Bdhgh ■ BSk. after the Pali: muditā Divy 483

Mudu

(adj.) soft, mild, weak, tender DN ii.17 = DN iii.143 (+ taluṇa); AN ii.151 (pañcindriyāni mudūni, soft, blunt weak: opp. tikkha); SN ii.268 (˚taluṇa-hatthapādā) Snp 447 (= muduka Snp-a 393); Thag 460 (= loving) Pv i.92; Vism 64; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 230. Compar. mudutara SN v.201.

-indriya (mud˚) weak, slow minded, of dull senses Pts i.121 = Pts ii.195; Vism 87. -citta a tender heart Pv-a 54. -cittatā kind (soft) heartedness Dhp-a i.234. -piṭṭhika having a soft (i.e. pliable) back Vin iii.35 -bhūta supple, malleable DN i.76 (+ kammaniya); Pp 68. -maddava soft & tender (said of food taken by young women to preserve their good looks) Dhs-a 403; -hadaya tender-hearted Dhp-a ii.5.

Vedic mṛdu, fr. mṛd: see maddati; cp. Lat. mollis (fr. *moldṷis); Gr. ἀμαλδύνω to weaken, Cymr blydd soft

Muduka

(adj.) = mudu.

1. flexible, pliable, soft SN ii.221 (sanghāṭi); Vism 66 (giving in easily, cpd with ukkaṭṭha & majjhima); Kp-a 49 (˚aṭṭhikāni soft bones); Mvu 25, Mvu 102 (sayana); bhūmi Mil 34.

2. soft mild, gentle, kindly, tender-hearted Ja v.83 (m. hadaya) 155; Mil 229 (cittaṃ m.); Snp-a 84 (˚jātika), 393; Dhp-a i.249 (citta); Pv-a 243.

3. soft, weak, pampered spoilt SN ii.268 (of the Licchavi princes) ■ See also maddava, & cp. ati˚.;

fr. mudu

Mudutā

(f.) softness, impressibility, plasticity AN i.9; DN iii.153 (trsln “loveliness”); Dhs 44 (+ maddavatā) 1340 (id.); Vism 463 sq.; Dhs-a 151 (= mudubhāva) cp. Dhs. trsl. §1340.

cp. Sk. mṛdutā; abstr. fr. mudu. See also muditā

Muddā

(f.) 1. a seal, stamp, impression;- rāja˚; the royal seal Dhp-a i.21. Also with ref. to the State Seal at Mil 280, Mil 281 in cpds. muddakāma (amacca) & mudda-paṭilābha.

2. the art of calculation mentioned as a noble craft (ukkaṭṭhaṃ sippaṃ) at Vin iv.7 (with gaṇanā & lekhā), as the first of the sippāni (with gaṇanā) at MN i.85 = Nd ii.199 Further at Mil 3, Mil 59, Mil 78 sq., 178. Cp. BSk. mudrā in same sense (e.g. at Divy 3, Divy 26, Divy 58 in set lipyā, sankhyā gaṇanā, m.). Bdhgh’s expln of muddā DN i.11 m. + gaṇanā (see DA i.95) as “hattha-muddā-gaṇanā is doubtful; since at Mil 78 sq. muddā & gaṇanā are two quite diff. things. See also Franke,; Dīgha trsl. p. 18, with note (he marks muddā “Finger-Rechnen with?); and cp. Kern, Toev. i.166 s. v. muddā. The Dial. i.21 trsl. “counting on the fingers” (see Dial. i.21 22 with literature & more refs.) ■; hattha˚; is signlanguage gesture (lit. hand-arithmetic), a means of communicating (question & answer) by signs, as clearly evident fr. Ja vi.364 (hattha-muddāya naṃ pucchissāmi… muṭṭhiṃ akāsi, sā “ayaṃ me… pucchati” ti ñatvā hatthaṃ vikāsesi, so ñatvā… ; he then asks by word of mouth) ■ hattha-muddaṃ karoti to make a sign, to beckon Ja iii.528; cp. Vin v.163: na hatthavikāro kātabbo, na hattha-muddā dassetabbā.

-ādhikaraṇa the office of the keeper of the Privy Seal Chancellorship Mil 281.

cp. (late?) Sk. mudrā

Muddika

(adj. n.) one who practises muddā (i.e. knowledge of signs) DN i.51 (in list of occupations combd with gaṇaka & trsl;dDial. i.68 by “accountant” cp. Franke, Dīgha p. 53, “Finger-rechner”?) Vin iv.8 (m., gaṇaka, lekhaka); SN iv.376 (gaṇaka, m., sankhāyaka).

fr. muddā

Muddikā1

(f.) a seal ring, signet-ring, fingerring Ja i.134; Ja iii.416; Ja iv.439; Dhp-a i.394; Dhp-a ii.4 (a ring given by the king to the keeper of the city gates as a sign of authority, and withdrawn when the gates are closed at night); iv.222. aṅguli˚; finger-ring, signetring Vin ii.106; Ja iv.498; Ja v.467 ■ Similarly as at Dhp-a ii.4 (muddikaṃ āharāpeti ) muddikā is fig. used in meaning of “authority,” command; in phrase muddikaṃ deti to give the order, to command Mil 379 (with ref. to the captain of a ship).

fr. muddā

Muddikā2

(f.) a vine or bunch of grapes, grape, grape wine Vin i.246 (˚pāna) Ja iv.529; Dhp-a ii.155.

fr. mudu, cp. *Sk. mṛdvīkā

Muddha1

infatuated, bewildered, foolish Ja v.436.

-dhātuka bewildered in one’s nature, foolish(ly Ja iv.391 (v.l. luddha˚); Dhp-a iii.120 (v.l. danta˚ mūḷa˚).;

pp. of muh, for the usual mūḷha, corresp. to Sk. mugdha. Not = mṛddha (of mṛdh to neglect which in P. is maddhita: see pari˚; nor = mṛdhra disdained

Muddha2 & Muddhā

the head; top, summit. m. sg. muddhā Snp 983, Snp 1026, & muddhaṃ Snp 989; acc muddhaṃ DN i.95; Snp 987 sq., 1004, 1025; Dhp 72 (= paññāy’ etaṃ nāmaṃ Dhp-a ii.73); & muddhānaṃ MN i.243 MN iii.259 = SN iv.56; instr. muddhanā Mvu 19, Mvu 30; loc muddhani Snp 689, Snp 987; MN i.168; Vism 262; Mvu 36 Mvu 66, in meaning “on the top of (a mountain)”: Vin i.5 (here spelt pabbata-muddhini) = SN i.137; Ja iv.265 (Yugandhara˚); Pv ii.961 (Naga˚ = Sineru˚ Pv-a 138) Vism 304 (vammika˚ on top of an ant-hill) ■ Freq in phrase muddhā (me, or no, or te) sattadhā phaleyya as an oath or exclamn of desecration or warning “(your) head shall split into 7 pieces,” intrs. spelt both phal˚ & phāl˚ at Ja v.92 (te s. phal˚); Mil 157; Dhp-a i.17 (me… phāl˚), 41 (te phalatu s.), 42 (ācariyassa m s. phalissati); iv.125 (no… phāleyya); Vv-a 68 (me s. phal˚) ■ In compn muddha˚.

-(n)aṭṭhi (muddhan-aṭṭhi) bone of the head Kp-a 51 -ādhipāta head- splitting, battering of the head Snp 988 sq., 1004, 1025; -ādhipātin head-splitting (adj.) Snp 1026. -āra head (top) spoke Kp-a 172. -āvasitta “head-anointed” a properly anointed or crowned king DN iii.60 sq., 69; Pp 56; Mil 234. -pāta = ˚âdhipāta.

Vedic mūrdhan, the P. word shows a mixture of a-and n-stem

Muddhatā

(f.) foolishness, stupidity, infatuation Ja v.433 (v.l. muṭhatā, muddatā).

fr. muddha1

Mudhā

(adv.) for nothing, gratis Vv-a 77.

Class. Sk. mudhā

Munana

(nt.) fathoming, recognising, knowing; a C. word to explain “muni,” used by Dhpāla at Vv-a 114 (mahā-isibhūtaṃ… mahanten’ eva ñāṇena munanato paricchindanato mahā muniṃ), & 231 (anavasesassa ñeyyassa munanato muni).;

fr. munāti, almost equal to mona

Munāti

to be a wise man or muni, to think, ponder, to know Dhp 269 (yo munāti ubho loke munī tena pavuccati), which is expl;d at Dhp-a iii.396 as follows: “yo puggalo… tulaṃ āropetvā minanto viya ime ajjhattikā khandhā ime bāhirā ti ādinā nayena ime ubho pi atthe mināti munī tena pavuccati.” Note. The word occurs also in Māgadhī (Prk.) as muṇaï which as Pischel (Prk. Gr. § 489) remarks, is usually taken to man, but against this speaks its meaning “to know” & Pāli munāti. He compares maṇaï with Vedic mūta in kāma-mūta (driven by kāma; mūta = pp. of mū = mīv ) and Sk. muni. Cp animo movere.

= manyate, prob. corresponding to Sk. med. manute, with inversion *munati and analogy formation after jānāti as munāti, may be in allusion to Sk. mṛṇāti of mṛ; to crush, or also mināti to measure out or fathom. The Dhtm 589 gives as root mun in meaning “ñāṇa.” The word is more a Com. word than anything else, formed from muni & in order to explain it

Muni

a holy man, a sage, wise man. I. The term which was specialised in Brahmanism has acquired a general meaning in Buddhism & is applied by the Buddha to any man attaining perfection in self-restraint and insight. So the word is capable of many-sided application and occurs frequently in the oldest poetic anthologies, e.g. Snp 207–⁠221 (the famous Muni-sutta mentioned Divy 20, Divy 35; Snp-a 518; expld Snp-a 254

277) 414, 462, 523 sq., 708 sq., 811 sq., 838, 844 sq., 912 sq. 946, 1074 & passim (see Pj. Index p. 749); Dhp 49, Dhp 225 Dhp 268 sq., 423 ■ Cp. general passages & expl;ns at Pv ii.113; ii.133 (expld at Pv-a 163 by “attahitañ ca parahitañ ca munāti jānātī ti muni”); Mil 90 (munibhāva “munihood,” meditation, self-denial, abrogation) Dhp-a iii.521 (munayo = moneyya-paṭipadāya maggaphalaṃ pattā asekha-munayo), 395 (here expld with ref. to orig. meaning tuṇhībhāva “state of silence = mona) ■ II. The Com. & Abhidhamma literature have produced several schedules of muni-qualities, esp based on the 3 fold division of character as revealed in action, speech & thought (kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚). Just as these 3 are in general exhibited in good or bad ways of living (˚sucaritaṃ & ˚duccaritaṃ), they are applied to a deeper quality of saintship in kāya-moneyya, vacīmoneyya mano-moneyya; or Muni-hood in action speech & thought; and the muni himself is characterised as a kāya-muni, vacī˚ & mano˚. Thus runs the long exegesis of muni at Nd;2 514a = Nd i.57. Besides this the same chapter (514b) gives a division of 6 munis viz. agāra- muni, anagāra˚; (the bhikkhus), sekha˚; asekha˚; (the Arahants), pacceka˚; (the Paccekabuddhas) muni˚; (the Tathāgatas) ■ The parallel passage to Nd ii.514a at AN i.273 gives a muni as kāya-muni, vācā & ceto˚ (under the 3 moneyyāni).;

cp. Vedic muni, originally one who has made the vow of silence. Cp. Chh. Up. viii.5, 2; Pss. of the Br. 132 note. Connected with mūka: see under mukha. This etym. preferred by Aufrecht: Halāyudha p. 311 Another, as favoured by Pischel (see under munāti) is “inspired, moved by the spirit.” Pāli explns (popular etym.) are given by Dhammapāla at Vv-a 114 & 231 see munana

Mummura

crackling fire, hot ashes, burning chaff Ja ii.134.

*Sk. murmura, lit. crackling, rustling; cp. Lat. murmur = E. murmur, Gr. μορμύρω to rustle, Ohg murmurōn & murmulōn = Ger. murmeln; all to Idg *mrem, to which Sk. marmara: see P. mammara & cp murumurā

Muyhati

to get bewildered to be infatuated, to become dull in one’s senses, to be stupified. Just as rāga, dosa & moha form a set, so do the verbs rajjati, dussati, muyhati, e.g. Mil 386 (rajjasi rajjanīyesu, dussanīyesu dussasi muyhase mohaniyesu). Otherwise rare as finite verb only Dhs-a 254 (in defn of moha) & Sdhp 282, Sdhp 605 (so read for mayhate) ■ pp.; mūḷha & muddha;1.

Vedic muhyati, muh; defn Dhtp 343: mucchāyaṃ; 460: vecitte; cp. moha & momuha

Muyhana

(nt.) bewilderment, stupefaction, infatuation DN-a i.195 (rajjana-dussana-m.).

fr. muyhati

Muraja

1. a small drum, tambourine Ja v.390; Vv 353 (= bheri Vv-a 161); 8418 (= mudinga Vv-a 340); Snp-a 370.

2. a kind of girdle Vin ii.136.

cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. muraja, Prk. murava: Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 254

Murumurā

(indecl.) the grinding, crackling sound of the teeth when biting bones, “crack”; in phrase m ti khādati to eat or bite up to bits Ja i.342; Ja v.21 (of a Yakkhinī, eating a baby).

onomat. to sound root mṛ; see mammara & mummura

Murumurāpeti

= murumurāyati Ja ii.127; Ja iii.134; Ja v.196 (˚etvā khādati).

Murumurāyati

to munch, chew, bite up with a cracking sound Ja iv.491. Mulala & Mulali

Denom. fr. murumurā

Muḷāla & Muḷālī

(f.) the stalk of the lotus:; muḷālī Vin i.215 (bhisa + ); muḷāli Ja vi.530 (= muḷālaka C.); muḷālikā Vin i.215 (bhisa + ); bhisa-muḷālaṃ (nt.) (collective cpd. fibre & stalks Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269; SN iv.94; SN v.39; Vism 361; Vb-a 66muḷāli-puppha a lotus Thag 1089.

cp. Vedic mulālin. Zimmer, Altind Leben 70 mentions Bisa, Śāluka & Mulālin as edible roots of lotus kinds ■ Geiger,; P.Gr. 12 & 43 puts muḷāla = Sk. mṛṇāla

Musati

to betray, beguile bewilder, dazzle, in cakkhūni m. DN ii.183 (but trsln “destructive to the eyes”); musati ‘va nayanaṃ Vv 353 (cp. Vv-a 161).

in this connection = mṛṣ in an active sense, as quâsi Denom. fr. musā. Not to muṣ to steal, which is given at Dhtp 491 with “theyya”

Musala

(m. nt.) 1. a pestle (whilst udukkhala is “mortar,” cp. Ja ii.428 & see udukkhala) DN i.166 = Pp 55; Dhp-a ii.131 (+ suppa). 2. a club AN ii.241; Vv-a 121.

3. a crowbar Ja i.199; Pv-a 258 (˚daṇḍa).

cp. Vedic musala. The etym. is probably to be connected with mṛd (see maddati)

Musalaka

(nt.) a little pestle, a toy for little girls Dhs-a 321.

fr. musala

Musalika

only in cpd. danta˚; (an ascetic) who uses his teeth as a pestle Ja iv.8 (an aggi-pakkaṃ khādati, eats food uncooked, only crushed by his teeth).

Musā

(adv.) falsely, wrongly; uṣually with verbs vadati, bhanati bhāsati & brūti; to speak falsely, to tell a lie ■ AN i.149 (opp. saccaṃ); Snp 122, Snp 158, Snp 397, Snp 400, Snp 757, Snp 883, Snp 967 Snp 1131; Nd i.291; Pv i.33; Vv-a 72 (= abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ) Snp-a 19; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 152.

-vāda lying, a falsehood, a lie DN i.4, DN i.25; DN iii.68 sq. 92 sq., 106, 170, 195, 232, 269; MN i.414; Snp 129, Snp 242 (cp. DN ii.174); Dhp 246; Pp 57; Nd i.268; Vv 158 Pv i.68; Vb-a 383 (var. degrees); Pv-a 16; Sdhp 65 explicitly at Nd i.152, Nd i.394; Nd ii.515. Cp. mosavajja -vādin speaking falsely, lying DN i.138; DN iii.15, DN iii.82; Dhp 176; Pp 29, Pp 38.

Vedic mṛṣā, fr. mṛṣ, lit. “neglectfully”

Mussati

v. intrs. to forget, to pass into oblivion, to become bewildered to become careless DN i.19 (sati m.); Ja v.369 (id.); Snp 815 (= nassati Snp-a 536; = parimussati, paribāhiro hoti Nd i.144) ■ pp. muṭṭha. Cpp. pa˚, pari˚.

= mṛṣ, mṛṣyati; to which musā “wrongly,” quite diff. in origin fr. micchā: mṛṣā → mithyā. Dhtm 437 defines by “sammose,” i.e. forgetfulness

Muhutta

(m. & nt.) a moment, a very short period of time, an inkling, as we should say “a second.”-Its duration may be seen from descending series of time-connotations at Pv-a 198 (under jātakamma, prophesy by astrologers at the birth of a child): rāsi, nakkhatta, tithi, m.; and from defn at Nd ii.516 by “khaṇaṃ, layaṃ, vassaṃ, atthaṃ.” Usually in oblique cases: muhuttena in a short time in a twinkling of an eye Pv-a 55; muhuttaṃ (acc.) a moment, even a second Snp 1138 (m. api); Dhp 65 (id.) 106; Pv-a 43.

Vedic muhūrta, fr. muhur suddenly

Muhuttika

(adj.) only for a moment; ˚ā (f.) a temporary wife, in enumn of several kinds of wives at Vin iii.139 & Vv-a 73. Syn. tan-khaṇikā.;

fr. muhutta

is given as root as Dhtp 216 in meaning “bandhana.”

Mūga

(adj.) dumb Vin i.91 (andha, m., badhira); Snp 713; Dhp-a ii.102 (andha, m., badhira); Snp-a 51 (in simile); Sdhp 12 Freq. combd with eḷa, deaf (q.v.).

Vedic mūka; see etym. under mukha

Mūla

(nt.) 1. (lit.) root AN ii.200; MN i.233; Dhp-a i.270; Dhp-a iv.200 (opp. patti); Vism 270 (rukkha˚; = rukkha-samīpaṃ); Pv ii.96 (sa˚ with the root); Pv-a 43 (rukkhassa mūle at the foot of).

2. foot bottom Vin ii.269 (patta˚); Pv-a 73 (pāda˚), 76 (id.) rukkha˚; foot of a tree: see under rukkha for special meaning.

3. (appld) ground for, reason, cause, condition defd as “hetu, nidāna, sambhava” etc. at Nd ii.s. v.; Snp 14 = Snp 369 (akusalā mũlā n. pl. = ākāra or patiṭṭhā Snp-a 23); Pv ii.333 (sa˚ with its cause); Dukp 272, 297 312, 320; Mil 12 (& khandha-yamaka, with ref. to the Yamaka). Very freq. in this sense as referring to the three lobha, dosa, moha as conditioning; akusala (absence of them = kusala), e.g. at DN iii.214, DN iii.275; AN i.201; AN i.203; Vb 106 sq., 169, 361; Yam i.1; Vism 454 cp. Nd ii.517; Vb-a 382.

4. origin, source, foundation root (fig.) Vin i.231 = DN ii.91 (dukkhassa); Vin ii.304; Snp 916, Snp 968 (cp. Nd i.344, Nd i.490); Thag 1027 (brahmacariyassa); Dhp 247, Dhp 337. Freq. in formula (may be taken to no. 1) [pahīna] ucchinna-mūla tālâvatthukata etc. with ref. to the origin of saṃsāra, e.g. at SN ii.62, SN ii.88 SN iii.10, SN iii.27, SN iii.161, SN iii.193; SN iv.253, SN iv.292, SN iv.376. See Nd ii.p. 205 s. v. pahīna, in extenso.

5. beginning, base, in mūladivasa the initial day DN-a i.311; also in phrase mūlakāraṇato right from the beginning Vv-a 132 (cp. BSk mūlaṃ kramataś ca id. Divy 491).

6. “substance, foundation, i.e. worth, money, capital, price, remuneration Mil 334 (kamma˚); Dhp-a i.270 (?); Pv-a 273 Mvu 27, Mvu 23. amūla unpaid Mvu 30, Mvu 17 (kamma labour) ■ iṇa˚; borrowed capital DN i.71.

-kanda eatable tuber Dhp-a iii.130; Dhp-a iv.78 (mūlaka˚) See also kanda. -kammaṭṭhāna fundamental k. or k of causes Snp-a 54. -ghacca radically extirpated Dhp 250, Dhp 263. -ṭṭha one who is the cause of something, an instigator Vin iii.75. -dassāvin knowing the cause or reason Snp 1043, cp. Nd ii.517. -phala (eatable) fruit consisting of roots; roots as fruit Snp 239. -bandhana fundamental bond (?) or set of causes (?) Snp 524 sq. 530 sq., cp. Snp-a 429

431. -bīja having seeds in roots i.e. propagated by roots, one of the classes of plants enumd under bījagāma (q.v.). -rasa taste of roots, or juice made fr. roots Vb-a 69; see under rasa.

Vedic mūra & mūla. The root is given as; mūl in 2 meanings, viz. lit. “rohane” Dhtm 859, and fig. “patiṭṭhāyaṃ” Dhtm 391

Mūlaka

(adj. nt.) 1. (adj.) (a) (-˚) being caused by, having its reason through or from, conditioned by originating in Vb 390 (taṇhā˚ dhammā); Tikp. 233 sq. 252 sq., 288 sq. & passim; Vb-a 200 sq., 207 sq (sankhāra˚, avijjā˚ etc. with ref. to the constituents of the Paṭicca-samuppāda); Pv-a 19 ■ (b) having a certain worth, price, being paid so much, dear Mvu 27, Mvu 23 (a ˚ṃ kammaṃ unpaid labour); Dhp-a i.398 (nahāna-cuṇṇa ˚ṃ catu-paṇṇāsa-koṭi dhanaṃ, as price) ii.154 (pattha-pattha-mūlakā bhikkhā); iii.296 (kiṃ mūlakaṃ how dear?).

2. (nt.) = mūla, i.e. root bulb, radish, only in cpd. mūlaka-kanda radish (-root Ja iv.88, Ja iv.491; Dhp-a iv.78 ■ See also pulaka.

fr. mūla

Mūlika

(adj. n.) 1. (m.) root-vendor Mil 331.

2. (adj ■ ˚) belonging to the feet (pāda˚), a footman lackey Ja i.122, Ja i.438; Ja ii.300 sq. (Name of the king of Janasandha Gāmaṇi-caṇḍa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30.

3. in rukkha˚; one who lives at the foot of a tree: see under rukkha, where also ˚mūlikatta.

fr. mūla

Mūḷha

1. gone astray, erring, having lost one’s way (magga˚) DN i.85 ≈ (˚ssa maggaṃ ācikkhati); Pv iv.148 (id. with pāvadati); Pv-a 112 (magga˚).

2. confused infatuated, blinded, erring, foolish DN i.59; Pv iv.334 (sa˚, better to be written sam˚).

-gabbhā (f.) a woman whose “foetus in utero” has gone astray, i.e. cannot be delivered properly, a woman difficult to be delivered Ja i.407 = Dhp-a iv.192; Mil 169 Vb-a 96. -rūpa foolish Dhp 268; Dhp-a iii.395.

Vedic mūḍha, pp. of muh; cp. also muddha1 = Vedic mugdha

Mūsika

(m.) & mūsikā (f.) a mouse DN ii.107 = Pp 43 (f.); Vism 109 (m.), 252 Kp-a 46 (m.); Mvu 5, Mvu 30 (m.); Vb-a 235.

-cchinna (auguries from the marks on cloth (gnawed by mice) DN i.9 (mūsikā˚; DN-a i.92 mūsika˚ = undurakhāyitaṃ; cp. Dial. i.17). -darī a mouse-hole Ja i.462 (mūsikā˚, so read for musikā˚). -patha “Mouseroad” Name of a road Nd i.155, Nd i.415 (here mūsikā˚) -potikā the young of a mouse Ja iv.188 (mūsika˚). -vijjā mouse craft DN i.9 (cp. DN-a i.93).

Vedic mūṣikā, fr. mūṣ

Mūsī

(f.) a mouse SN ii.270 (mudu˚ a tender, little m.).

Venic mūṣ & mūḥ mouse or rat; cp. Lat. mūs Gr. μϋς, Ohg. mūs = E. mouse. Not to muṣ to steal but to same root as Lat. moveo, to move

Me

is enclitic form of ahaṃ in var. cases of the sg. See under ahaṃ.

Mekhalā

(f.) a girdle Ja v.202, Ja v.294 (su˚, adj.); vi.456; Thag-a 35; Kp-a 109; Dhp-a i.39; Pv-a 46.

cp. Vedic mekhalā

Mekhalikā

(f.) a girdle Vin ii.185 (ahi˚, consisting of a snake).

fr. mekhalā

Megha

a cloud Pv ii.945; Vism 126; esp. a thundercloud storm, SN i.100 (thaneti), 154; Th i.307 (as kāḷa) Iti 66; Ja i.332 (pajjunna vuccati megha); Dhp-a i.19; Snp-a 27 (˚thanita-sadda). In this capacity often called mahā-megha, e.g. Snp 30; Dhp-a i.165; Kp-a 21; Pv-a 132 ■ On megha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907 124, 125.

-nātha having clouds as protectors (said with ref. to grass-eating animals) Ja iv.253. -maṇḍala cloud-circle a circle of clouds Snp-a 27. -vaṇṇa cloud-coloured Ja v.321 (C. for megha-sannibha); ˚pāsāṇa a sort of ornamental building stone Mvu 30, Mvu 59 (v.l., T. meda˚ trsl. fat-coloured stones). See meda˚.

Vedic megha; not to mih, mehati (see mīḷha), but to Idg. *meigh-, fog, rain; cp. Sk. miḥ mist; Av maēga cloud; Gr. ὀμίξλη fog, Lith. mighá fog, Dutch miggelen to drizzle, also Ags. mist = Oicel mistr “mist”

Mecaka

(adj.) black, dark blue Dhs-a 13.

cp. Vedic mecaka

Mejjati

to be fat, to be full of fat; fig. to be in love with or attracted by, to feel affection (this meaning only as a “petitio principii” to explain mettā) Dhs-a 192 (v.l. mijjati = siniyhati).

cp. Vedic midyati, to mid, see meda Dhtp 160, Dhtp 413 & Dhtm 641 give; mid with meaning “snehane”

Mejjha

(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) [to medha1] fit for sacrifice, pure; neg. ; impure Sdhp 363 Sdhp 2. (nt.) [to medha2 & medhāvin] in; dum˚; foolishness Pp 21 = Dhs 390 (expld at Dhs-a 254 by “yaṃ… citta-santānaṃ mejjhaṃ bhaveyya suci-vodānaṃ taṃ duṭṭhaṃ mejjhaṃ iminā ti dummejjhaṃ”).

*medhya; fr. medha

Meṇḍa

1. a ram DN i.9; Ja iv.250 Ja iv.353 (˚visāṇa-dhanu, a bow consisting of a ram’s horn) -˚patha Npl. “ram’s road” Nd i.155 = Nd i.415. -˚yuddha ram fight DN i.6.

2. a groom, elephant-driver in cpd hatthi˚; elephants’ keeper Ja iii.431; Ja v.287; Ja vi.489.

dial., cp. Prk. měṇṭha & miṇṭha: Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 293. The Dhtm (156) gives a root meṇḍ (meḍ) in meaning of “koṭilla,” i.e. crookedness. The Ved (Sk.) word for ram is meṣa

Meṇḍaka

(adj.) 1. made of ram(s) horn, said of a (very strong) bow Ja ii.88 (˚dhanu); v.128 (˚singadhanu).

2. belonging to a ram, in meṇḍaka-pañha “question about the ram” Mil 90 alluding to the story of a ram in the Ummagga-jātaka (J vi.353

55), which is told in form of a question, so difficult & puzzling that nobody “from hell to heaven” (J vi.354) can answer it except the Bodhisatta. Cp. Trenckner’s remark Mil 422.

fr. meṇḍa

Metta

(adj. nt.) friendly, benevolent kind as adj. at DN iii.191 (mettena kāya-kammena etc.), 245 (˚ṃ vacī-kammaṃ); as nt. for mettā in cpds. of mettā (cp. mettaṃsa) and by itself at DN i.227 (mettaṃ + cittaṃ), perhaps also at Snp 507.

cp. Vedic maitra “belonging to Mitra”; Epic Sk. maitra “friendly,” fr. mitra

Mettā

(f.) [abstr. fr. mitra = mitta, cp. Vedic maitraṃ. According to Asl. 192 (cp. Expos. 258) derived fr. mid to love, to be fat: “mejjati mettā siniyhatī ti attho” love, amity, sympathy, friendliness, active interest in others. There are var. defns & expl;ns of mettā: the stereotype “ metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ mettā cetovimutti” Vb 86 = Vb 272; occurring as “ metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ anudā anudāyana anudāyitattaṃ hitesitā anukampā abyāpādo… kusalamūlaṃ” at Nd i.488 & Dhs 1056 (where T. mettaṃ for metti, but see Dhs trsl.2 253). By Bdhgh at Snp-a 128 expld in distinction fr. karuṇā (which is “ahita-dukkh-âpanayakāmatā”) as “hita-sukh-ûpanaya-kāmatā,” i.e. desire of bringing welfare & good to one’s fellow-men. Cp def;n of mettā at Vism 317Snp 73 (see Nd ii.p. 232) 967; DN iii.247 sq., 279; Vism 111, Vism 321 sq.; Snp-a 54; Pv-a 66 (khanti, m., anudaya); Sdhp 484, Sdhp 487. Phrases occurring frequently: mettā ceto-vimutti DN i.251; SN ii.265; AN iv.150; Iti 20; Vb 86 and passim mettā-sahagatena cetasā with a heart full of love DN i.250; DN ii.186; DN iii.49 sq., 78, 223 sq.; SN v.115; AN i.183 AN ii.129; AN iv.390; AN v.299, AN v.344; expld in detail at Vism 308 mettaṃ karoti (loc.) to be friendly or sympathize with Mvu 12, Mvu 23 ■ In cpds. usually mettā˚, but shortened to metta˚; in metta- cittaṃ kindly thought, a heart full of love DN i.167; DN iii.237; Snp 507; Pv ii.1317; Ja vi.71 and metta- jhāna love-meditation, as expln of m ■ citta at Snp-a 417; Pv-a 167.

-aṃsa (mettaṃsa) sympathetic, showing love towards Iti 22 (v.l. ˚āsa); Ja iv.71 (= metta-koṭṭhāsa mettacitta C.). -kammaṭṭhāna the k. of sympathy Dhp-a iv.108. -bhāvanā cultivation or development of friendliness (towards all living beings) Ja i.176; Ja iii.45; Mil 199; Vism 295. -vihārin abiding in kindliness Dhp 368; Dhp-a iv.108; Ne 25; Vism 324; Pv-a 230.

Mettāyati

to feel friendly, to show love, to be benevolent AN iv.151; Dhs-a 194; Vb-a 75. With loc. to show friendship or be affectionate towards Ja i.365; Ja iii.96; Dāvs iii.34.

Denom. fr. mettā

Mettāyanā

(f.) & Mettāyitatta (nt.): see defn of mettā. Metti & Metti

abstr. formations fr. mettā

Metti & Mettī

(f.) love, friendship Ja iii.79; Ja v.208; Vb-a 75. See also defn of mettā.

cp. Epic Sk. maitrī

Metteyyattā

(f.) is occasional spelling for matteyyatā (q.v.), in analogy to petteyyatā; e.g. Nd ii.294.

Methuna

(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) relating to sexual intercourse sexual, usually with dhamma, sex intercourse, in phrase ˚ṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati to cohabit Vin i.96; DN ii.133; Snp 291, Snp 704; Nd i.139; Vism 418; Snp-a 536 ■ (m.) an associate Ja vi.294 (na rājā hoti methuno).

2. (nt. sexual intercourse [Vedic maithuna] DN i.4; DN iii.9, DN iii.88 sq. 133; Snp 400, Snp 609, Snp 814, Snp 835 = Dhp-a i.202; Nd i.139, Nd i.145 Pp 67; Vism 51.

fr. Vedic mithuna pair, der. fr. mithu. Cp. micchā

Methunaka

1. one concerned with (illicit) sexual intercourse, a fornicator Nd i.139 (in a wider sense).

2. an associate Vin iii.66.

3. (nt.) coitus Ja ii.360 (= methuna-dhamma C.).

fr. methuna

Meda

fat SN i.124; Snp 196; Ja iii.484 (ajakaraṃ medaṃ = ajakara-medaṃ C.); Kp iii. (expld at Vism 262 as “thīnasineha” thick or coagulated fluid or gelatine); Vism 361 Vb-a 66, Vb-a 225, Vb-a 245, Vb-a 249.

-kathālika a cooking pot or saucepan for frying fat AN iv.377 (in simile with kāya); Dhp-a ii.179 (similar) Vism 195 (in compar.). -gaṇṭhi (as medo-gaṇṭhi, Sk influence!) an abscess of fat, fatty knot or tumour mentioned as a disease at Mil 149. -vaṇṇa fatcoloured; in cpd. ˚pāsāna a stone of the (golden) colour of fat found in the Himālaya mountains Snp 447 (= medapiṇḍa-sadisa Snp-a 393); Mvu 1, Mvu 39; Mvu 30, Mvu 57 sq., 96 31, 121; see Geiger’s note Mvu (P.T.S. ed.) p. 355, who puts it beyond doubt, that meda˚ is the correct reading for the v.l. megha˚ at all places.

Vedic medas (nt.) fr. mid, see etym. under mada

Medaka

in go˚; a precious stone of light-red (or golden) colour (cp. meda-vaṇṇa-pāsāṇa) Vv-a 111.

meda + ka

Medinī

(f.) the earth (also later Sk.) Mvu 5, Mvu 185; Mvu 15 Mvu 47; Vism 125.

of adj. medin, fr. meda fat, but cp. Vedic medin an associate or companion fr. mid in meaning to be friendly

Medeti

to become fat MN i.238.

Denom. fr. meda

Medha

sacrifice only in assa˚; horse-sacrifice & purisa˚; human s. (q.v.) e.g. at AN iv.151; Snp 303 ■ Cp. mejjha.

Vedic medha, in aśva, go˚, puruṣa˚ etc.

Medhaga

(& ˚ka) quarrel, strife Vin ii.88 (˚ka) Thig 344; Snp 893, Snp 894 (= kalaha, bhaṇḍana, viggaha vivāda Nd i.302, Nd i.303), 935 (T. ˚ka; Nd i.402 & 406 ˚ga with v.l. SS ˚ka); Dhp 6; Ja iii.334 (˚ka; C. = kalaha) 488 (˚ga; C. ˚ka expln kalaha); Dhp-a i.65.

cp. Sk. methana abusive speech; Vedic methati fr. mith to scold

Medhasa

(adj.) having wisdom or intelligence, wise, only in cpds. bhūri˚; of great wisdom Snp 1131; & su˚; [Ved. sumedhas] very wise Vv 222 (= sundara-pañña Vv-a 111); Pv iii.77 (both combd as bhūri-su-medhasa, hardly correct; v.l. M bhūrimedhasa Pv-a 205).

= Vedic medhas, as a- base

Medhā

(f.) wisdom, intelligence sagacity Nd i.s. v. (m. vuccati paññā); Pp 25; Dhs 16; Dhs-a 148; Pv-a 40 (= paññā) ■ adj. sumedha wise clever, intelligent Snp 177; opp. dum˚; stupid Pv i.82- khīṇa-medha one whose intelligence has been impaired stupefied Ja vi.295 (= khīṇa-pañña).

Vedic medhā & medhas, perhaps to Gr.; μαχ˚ in μανχάνω (“mathematics”)

Medhāvitā

(f.) cleverness, intelligence Vv-a 229.

abstr. fr. medhāvin

Medhāvin

(adj.) intelligent, wise, often combd with paṇḍita & bahussuta;: DN i.120; SN iv.375; AN iv.244; Vin iv.10, Vin iv.13, Vin iv.141; Snp 323 (acc. medhāvinaṃ + bahussutaṃ) 627, 1008 (Ep. of Mogharājā), 1125 (id.) Nd ii.259 (s. v. jātimā, with var. other synonyms) Dhp 36; Ja vi.294; Mil 21; Dhp-a i.257; Dhp-a ii.108; Dhp-a iv.169; Vv-a 131; Pv-a 41.

medhā + in = *medhāyin → medhāvin; already Vedic, cp. medhasa

Medhi

(f.) pillar, part of a stūpa [not in the Canon?].

Vedic methī pillar, post (to bind cattle to); BSk. medhi Divy 244; Prk. meḍhi Pischel Gr. § 221 See for etym. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. meta

Medhin

(adj.-n.) = medha in adj. use; only in cpd. dummedhin (= dum-medha) foolish, ignorant Dhp 26 (bālā dummedhino janā; = nippaññā Dhp-a i.257).

Meraya

(nt.) a sort of intoxicating liquor, spirits, rum, usually combd with surā. DN i.146 DN i.166; MN i.238; Pp 55; Dhp 247; Ja iv.117 (pupphāsav-ādi, i.e. made fr. flowers, cp. defn dhātakī-puṣpaguḍa-dhāny-āmla-sanskṛtaṃ by Mādhava, Halāy. p 314). Five kinds are given by Dhpāla at Vv-a 73 viz. pupph-āsava, phal’ āsava, madhv˚, guḷ˚, sambhārasaṃyutta

Epic Sk. maireya, cp. Halāyudha 2, 175 (Aufrecht p. 314); prob. dial.

Merita

in bhayamerita Ja iv.424 = Ja v.359 is to be read as bhaya-m-erita driven by fear; there is no need to change it with Kern, Toev. to perita.

Mella

citron (= mātulunga) Ja iii.319 (gloss bella ).

dial. or uncertain reading?

Mokkha1

1. (lit.) release, freedom from, in bandhanā m DN i.73 = MN i.276.

2. (fig.) release, deliverance, salvation Vb 426 (jarā-maraṇa˚ from old age & death) Dhp-a i.4 (˚magga + sagga-magga, the way to heaven & salvation), 89, 90 (˚dhamma = salvation) Mvu 5, Mvu 61

3. (lit.) (act.) letting loose, emission, uttering (of speech) Ja i.375.

4. it may (& prob. ought to) be taken as adj. (= *mokṣya, grd. of Caus. of; muc ) at Snp 773 (añña˚, either = 1, as “deliverance for others, or = 4, as “to be delivered by others.” Bdhgh at Snp-a 516 gives both explns: aññe mocetuṃ (na) sakkonti kāraṇa-vacanaṃ vā etaṃ: aññena mocetabbā (na) honti).

late Vedic & Epic Sk. mokṣa, fr.; muc, see muñcati. Dhtp 539 mokkha = mocana; Dhtm 751 moca

Mokkha2

(adj.) the headmost, first, foremost, in series aggo seṭṭho m uttamo AN ii.95, where the customary tradition reads pāmokkha (see under mahā & cp. Nd;2 502A).

fr. mukha 6; Vṛddhi form = *maukhya

Mokkhaka

= mokkha2; thus we should read at Ja i.441 for mukkhaka.

Mokkhacika

(m. or ˚ā f.) tumbling, turning somersaults, an acrobatic feat; in list of forbidden amusements at DN i.6 (cp. DN-a i.86; samparivattaka-kīḷanaṃ, i.e. playing with something that rolls along, continuously turning The foll. sentence however seems to imply turning head over heels: “ākāse vā daṇḍaṃ gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ vā sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā heṭṭh-upariya (so read!)-bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṃ”; i.e. trapeze-performing. Cp Dial. i.10 & Vin. Texts ii.184). The list re-occurs at Vin ii.10 (˚āya: f.! kīḷanti); iii.180; MN i.266≈and AN v.203 (with important v.l. mokkhaṭika, which would imply mokkha & ending; tiya, and not ˚cika at all The Cy. on this passage expls as: daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā heṭṭh-uppariya (sic. as DN-a i.86; correct to upariya?-bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṃ). The word is found also at Vin i.275, where the boy of a Seṭṭhi in Bārāṇasī contracts injuries to his intestines by “mokkhacikāya kīḷanto,” playing (with a) m ■ According to its use with kīḷati & in instr.; mokkhacikena (Nd ii.219 may be either a sort of game or an instrument (toy) with which children play.

see on attempt at etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1885, 49 who takes mokkha as fr. muc “tumbling” & cika = “turning” fr. cak = cik. The word remains obscure, it must be a dialectical expression distorted by popular analogy & taken perhaps; from a designation of a place where these feats or toys had their origin. More probable than Morris’ etym is an analysis of the word (if it is Aryan) as mokkha mokkha2, in meaning “head, top,” so that it may mean “head over,” top-first” & we have to separate *mokkhac-ika the ˚ika representing ˚iya “in the manner of like” & -ac being the adv. of direction as contained in Sk. prāñc = pra-añc.

Mokkhati

see under muñcati.

Mogha

(adj.) empty, vain useless, stupid, foolish DN i.187 (opp. to sacca), 199; Snp 354; Dhp 260 (˚jiṇṇa grown old in vain; C. expls as tuccha-jiṇṇa Dhp-a iii.388); Dhp-a i.110 (patthanā a futile wish); Pv-a 194 ■ Opp. amogha SN i.232; Ja vi.26; Dhp-a ii.34 (˚ṃ tassa jīvitaṃ: not in vain).

-purisa a stupid or dense fellow Vin iv.126, Vin iv.144.

the Vedic mogha for the later Sk. moha, which is the P. noun moha; fr. muh. BSk. mohapuruṣa e.g. at Avs ii.177; Mvu iii.440

Moca1

the plantain or banana tree’ Musa, sapientum Vin i.246 (˚pāna drink made fr. M. s. one of the 8 permitted drinks); Ja iv.181; Ja v.405, Ja v.465.

cp. *Sk. moca & mocā

Moca2

delivery, setting free Dhtm 631, Dhtm 751, where Dhtp in same context reads mocana.

root-noun of moc, Caus. of muc

Mocana

(nt.) 1. setting free, delivering Dhp-a iii.199 (parissayā˚); Dhtp 376, Dhtp 539; Dhtm 609. Cp moca2.

2. letting loose, discharging, in assu˚; shedding tears Pv-a 18. Cp. vi˚.

fr. moceti

Mocaya

(adj.) to be freed, able to escape, in dum˚; difficult to obtain freedom Ja vi.234.

quâsi grd. formation fr. moceti

Mocāpana

(nt.) causing one’s freedom, deliverance Ja vi.134.

fr. Caus. II. mocāpeti

Mocetar

one who sets free, a deliverer Nd i.32.

M. ag. fr. moceti

Moceti

1. to deliver, set free, release, cause one’s release or deliverance from (abl.). imper praes. mocehi Pv ii.16 (duggatiyā); Pv-a 12; aor. mocesi Pv-a 112 (dāsavyato); ger. mocetvā Pv-a 8, Pv-a 77; inf mocetuṃ Pv-a 45 (petalokato).

2. to discharge, emit (semen in coitu) Vin iii.36, Vin iii.39 (as Caus II.), 110.

3. to let loose, set into motion, stir: padaṃ m. to run Ja iii.33

4. to discharge, fulfil: paṭiññaṃ one’s promise Dhp-a i.93.

5. to unharness Dhp-a i.67.

6. to detach SN i.44 ■ Caus. II. mocāpeti to cause to be freed, to give freedom, to let loose Vin iv.316 (opp. bandhāpeti).

Caus. of muñcati

Moṭa

see mutoḷī.

BSk. moṭa, Prk. mrḍa: Pischel § 166, 238

Motar

one who feels (or senses) that which can be felt (or sensed), in phrase “mutaṃ na maññati motabbaṃ (so read) na maññati motāraṃ” he does not identify what is sensed with that which is not sensed nor with what is to be sensed (motabba ) nor with him who senses AN ii.25; where motar & motabba correspond to sotar & sotabba & daṭṭhar & daṭṭhabba. The word does not occur in the similar passage MN i.3.

n. ag. fr. munāti, more likely direct der. fr. muta, pp. of man, q.v.

Modaka

1. a sort of sweetmeat SN i.148; AN i.130; AN iii.76; Pp 32; Pv-a 4. 2. receptacle for a letter, an envelope, wrapper or such like Ja vi.385 (paṇṇaṃ ˚assa anto pakkhipitvā). May however, be same ạs 1.

cp. Epic. Sk. modaka in meaning 1

Modati

to rejoice, to enjoy oneself, to be happy AN iii.40; Snp 561; Pv i.54; ii.121 ■ pp. mudita (q.v.). For mohayamāna at Dhp-a i.275 the better reading is modayamāna rejoicing, a ppr. med.

mud, cp. Vedic moda joy Dhtp 146: tose

Modana

(nt.) satisfaction, rejoicing Sdhp 229. Cp. sam˚.

fr. mud

Modanā

(f.) blending (?); Cy. expln at Dhs-a 143 of term āmodanā.

fr. mud

Modara

: In modara at Ja v.54 (of elephant’s teeth) Kern, Toev. s. v. sees a miswriting for medura (full of, beset with), which however does not occur in Pali. The C expln is “samantato obhāsento,” i.e. shining.

Mona

(nt.) wisdom, character, self-possession Snp 540 (˚patha = ñāṇa-patha Snp-a 435), 718, 723; Nd i.57 Nd ii.514 A (= ñāṇa & paññā); Thag 168 (what is monissaṃ? fut. 1st sg. of ?).

fr. muni, equal to *maunya taken by Nd as root of moneyya

Moneyya

(nt.) state of a muni, muni-hood; good character, moral perfection This is always represented as 3 fold, viz. kāya˚, vacī˚ mano˚ (see under muni), e.g. at DN iii.220; AN i.273 Nd i.57; Nd ii.514 A (where also used as adj.: moneyyā dhammā properties of a perfect character). Cp. also Snp 484, Snp 698, Snp 700 sq. On moneyya-kolāhala (forebodings of the highest wisdom) see the latter.

fr. muni, cp. Vedic moneya

Momūha

(adj.) dull, silly, stupid, infatuated, bewildered (cp Cpd. 833) DN i.27; AN iii.164 sq.; Snp 840, Snp 841, Snp 1120 Nd i.153 (= manda), 192; Nd ii.521 (= avidvā etc.) Pp 65.

intens ■ redupl. formation fr. moha & muh

Momūhatta

(nt.) silliness, foolishness, bewilderment of the mind MN i.520; AN iii.119, AN iii.191, AN iii.219 (= mandatta); Pp 69.

abstr. fr. momūha

Mora

f. pea-hen a peacock Ja ii.275 (˚upasevin, see C. on this passage) vi.218, 497; Pv-a 142; Dhp-a i.394. A peacock’s tail (sometimes used as a fan) is denoted in var. terms in cpds., as mora-kalāpa Dhp-a i.387; -piccha Vin i.186 -piñcha Vin ii.130; -pīñja Pv-a 142, Pv-a 176; Vv-a 147 -sikali (?) Kp-a 49; -hattha Vv 3344 (= mayūra-piñjehi kataṃ makasa-vījaniṃ); Pv iii.117. Perhaps also as morakkha “a peacock’s eye” at Vb-a 63 (morakkhaka loha, a kind of copper, grouped with pisācaloha). It is more likely however that morakkha is distorted fr. *mauryaka, patronymic of mura, a local (tribal) designation (cp. murala), then by pop. etym connected with mora peacock. With this cp. Sk moraka “a kind of steel” BR.

the contracted, regular P. form of *Sk. mayūra, viâ *ma-ūra → mora. See also Geiger, P.Gr. § 27 Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 166. Vedic only mayūrī

Moragu

a tender grass (Achyranthes aspera) Vin i.196.

cp. (scientific) Sk. mayūraka

Morinī

(f.) a peahen Mil 67.

fr. mora

Moli

(m. & f.) a chignon; crest, turban Ja i.64; Ja v.431; Mvu 11, Mvu 28; DN-a i.136 (v.l. moḷi). Also found (as molin, adj.?) in Np Yama-moli: see under yakkha 5.

-galla (?) fat Vin i.85 (expld by thūla-sarīra; vv. ll moḷi˚ & mukalla).; -baddha one who has his hair tied into a top-knot 128, 243, 348.

cp. Epic Sk. mauli, fr. mūla

Mosa

(˚-) (adj.-n..) belonging to or untruth, false-; only in cpds. -dhamma of a deceitful nature, false, AN v.84 (kāma); Snp 739, Snp 757 & -vajja [fr. musā-vāda] false-speaking, lie, untruth SN i.169; Snp 819, Snp 866, Snp 943; Nd i.152, Nd i.265; Nd ii.515; Vv 126.

the guṇa (compn) form of musā

Mosalla

(adj.) worthy of being slain (with clubs), punishable AN ii.241.

fr. musala

Moha

stupidity, dullness of mind & soul, delusion bewilderment, infatuation DN iii.146, DN iii.175, DN iii.182, DN iii.214, DN iii.270; Vin iv.144, Vin iv.145; Snp 56, Snp 74, Snp 160, Snp 638, Snp 847; Vb 208, Vb 341 Vb 391, Vb 402; Pp 16; Tikp 108, 122, 259 ■ Defd as “dukkhe aññāṇaṃ etc., moha pamoha, sammoha avijj’ ogha etc.,” by Nd ii.99 & Vb 362; as “muyhanti tena, sayaṃ vā muyhati, muyhana-mattaṃ eva vā tan ti moho” and “cittassa andha-bhāva-lakkhaṇo, aññāṇalakkhaṇo vā” at Vism 468 ■ Often coupled with rāga & dosa; as one of the 3 cardinal affects of citta, making a man unable to grasp the higher truths and to enter the Path: see under rāga (& Nd;2 p. 237, s. v. rāga where the wide range of application of this set is to be seen). Cp. the 3 fires: rāg-aggi, dos-aggi, moh-aggi Iti 92; DN iii.217 also rāga-kkhaya, dosa˚, moha˚ Vb-a 31 sq ■ On combn with rāga, lobha & dosa see dosa;2 and lobha ■ On term see also Dhs trsl. §§ 33, 362, 441 Cpd 16, 18, 41, 113, 146 ■ See further DN i.80 (samoha-cittaṃ); Nd i.15, Nd i.16 (with lobha & dosa); Vv-a 14; Pv-a 3amoha absence of bewilderment Vb 210 (+ alobha, adosa; as the 3 kusala-mūlāni: cp. mūla 3) 402 (id., as kusala-hetu) ■ Cp. pa˚, sam˚.

-antara (personal) quality of bewilderment (lit having m. inside) Snp 478 (taken by C. as “cause of m.,” i.e. ˚kāraṇa, ˚paccaya Snp-a 411; cp. antara = kāraṇa under antara I 2 b.). -ussada quality of dullness Nd i.72, Nd i.413. -kkhaya destruction of infatuation Vb 73; Vb-a 51. -carita one whose habit is infatuation Ne 90 (+ rāgacarita & dosacarita).; -tama the darkness of bewilderment MA 1. -dhamma anything that is bewildering or infatuating Snp 276. -pāruta covered or obstructed by delusion Pv iv.334. -magga being on the road of infatuation Snp 347. -salla the sting of bewilderment Nd i.59.

fr. muh, see muyhati; cp. Sk. moha & Vedic mogha

Mohatta

(nt.) infatuation, bewilderment AN ii.120; AN iii.376.

abstr. fr. moha

Mohana

(nt.) making dull or stupid, infatuation, enticement, allurement Snp 399, Snp 772 (= mohanā vuccanti pañca kāmaguṇā Nd i.26). The Sk. meaning is also “sexual intercourse” (cp. Halāyudha p. 315), which may apply to the Snp p.ssages Snp-a 517 (on Snp 772) expls “mohanaṃ vuccati kāmaguṇā, ettha hi deva-manussā muyhanti.”

fr. muh as Caus. formn

Mohanaka

(adj.) leading astray, bewildering, leading into error Vin iv.144. Mohaneyya & Mohaniya;

fr. mohana

Mohaneyya & Mohanīya

(adj.) leading to infatuation AN ii.120; AN iii.110; Ja iii.499.

grd. formn fr. moha

Moheti

to deceive, to befool, to take in, surprise, delude, aor 2;nd sg. amohayi Snp 352; Snp 3rd sg. amohayi SN iv.158; Iti 58 (maccu-rājan; vv.ll. asamohayi & asamohari) reading somewhat doubtful, cp. similar context Snp 1076 with “sabbesu dhammesu samūhatesu ” (v.l. samoha˚).

3rd sg. (poet.) also amohayittha Snp 332 (mā vo pamatte viññāya maccurājā amohayittha vasānuge cp. Sn ed. p. 58) ■ On mohayamāna Dhp-a i.275 see modati.

Y.

Caus. fr. muh, see muyhati & cp. moha

Y

-Y-

combn consonant (sandhi), inserted (euphonically) between 2 vowels for the avoidance of hiatus. It has arisen purely phonetically from i as a sort of “gliding or semi-vowel within a word, where the syllable division was in regular speech more openly felt than in the written language, e.g. pari-y-āpanna (Pāli) corresponds to Sk. pary-āpanna, similarly pari-y-osāna = Sk paryosāna. Thus inserted after a before i or e: chay-imā disā DN iii.188; ta-y-idaṃ Snp 1077; Pv i.33 tava-y-idaṃ Snp 352; na-y-idaṃ SN ii.278; mama-y-idaṃ Snp 806; na-y-idha Snp 790; mā-y-idha Vin i.54; yassay-etādisī pajā DN ii.267 (v.l. ss for T yassa-s-etādisī) satiyā-y-etaṃ adhivacanaṃ MN ii.260; na-y-imassa Pv iv.12 ■ After i before a: pāvisi-y-assamaṃ Ja v.405 khaṇi-y-asmani Ja iii.433; yā-y-aññaṃ Ja i.429 (where C. expls: ya-kāro paṭisandhi-karo) ■ Cp. yeva for eva ■ Note. At Ja vi.106 ya-y-ime jane is to be taken as ye ime jane; the spelling ay for e being found elsewhere as well. Cp. the following ta-y-ime jane.

Ya˚

I. Forms. (See inflection also at Geiger, P.Gr. § 110.) The decl. is similar to that of ta˚ among the more rarely found forms we only mention

the foll.: sg. nom. m. yo with by-form (in hiatus) yv- as yv’āyaṃ = yo ayaṃ MN i.258; yv’āssa = yo assa MN i.137 Notice the lengthening of the subsequent vowel. An unsettled ya is to be found at Ja v.424 (Fausböll remarks “for yassā”?; perhaps to be combd with preceding pañcapatikā; C. on p. 427 expls ya-kāro nipātamatto)-abl. yasmā in adv. use; yamhā Dhp 392 ■ loc. yamhi Dhp 261, Dhp 372, Dhp 393 ■ f. loc. yassaṃ AN iii.151 (see below). See further adv. use of cases (below ii.5) ■ At Pv ii.16 yāhi is doubtful (perhaps imper. = yajahi, of yajati; C. leaves it unexpld).

Special mention must be made of the nt. n. acc. sg. where both yaṃ and yad are found. The (Vedic) form yad (Ved. yat) has been felt more like ya + expletive (Sandhi-) d, and is principally found in adv. use and certain archaic phrases, whereas yaṃ represents the usual (Pali) form (like tad and taṃ ). See more under II ■ A Māgadhized form is ye (after se = taṃ), found at DN ii.278 (see Geiger § 1052 & 110;2. Cp. Trenckner Notes 75.). The expression ye-bhuyyena may belong under this category, if we explain it as yad + bhuyyena (bhuyyena equivalent to bhiyyoso). It would then correspond to seyyathā (= sad + yathā, cp. sayathā sace, taṃyathā). See refs. under yebhuyyena ■ The expression yevāpanaka is an adj. formn from the phrase ye-vā-pana (= yaṃ vā pana “whatever else there is”) i.e. belonging to something of the same kind, i.e. corresponding, reciprocal, as far as concerned, respective (See s. v.)-In adv. use it often corresponds to E. as; see e.g. yad-icchakaṃ, yad-idaṃ (under ii.2 b ii.4 b.).

II. Meaning: “which,” in correspondence to a following demonstr. pron. (ta˚); whichever (generalizing); nt. what, whatever. In immediate combn with the demonstr. pron. it is qualifying and specifying the person, thing or subject in discussion or question (see below 4).

1. Regular use as correl. pron., when ya˚; (+ noun) is followed by ta˚; (+ noun). Sometimes (in poetry) the reverse is the case, e.g. at Iti 84 where ta˚; (m. sa) is elliptically omitted: atthaṃ na jānāti yaṃ lobho sahate naraṃ “he does not know good, whom greed overcomes ■ Otherwise regular, e.g. : yassa jātarūparajataṃ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti SN iv.326 In a generalizing sense (cp. below ii.3): yo so “der erste beste,” some or other, whoever, any Ja iv.38 Ja v.362; yaṃ vā taṃ vā karotu let her do whatever she likes Vv-a 208; yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā on every occasion SN i.160 na yoso vā yakkho not this or that yakkha i.e. not any (ordinary) kind of Yakkha (but Inda DN-a i.264 ■ The same use (ordinary correlative) applies to the nt. forms yaṃ & yad; in correl. to taṃ and tad (See sep. under II. 2.)

2. Use of nt. forms.-(a) nt. yaṃ (a) as pronoun SN iii.44 (yaṃ dukkhaṃ… tad anattā); Iti 78 (yañ c’ aññaṃ whatever else); Vb-a 54 (yaṃ labbhati yañ ca na labbhati taṃ sabbaṃ pucchitvā). See also under 3 a (yaṃ kiñci, yaṃ yaṃ) ■ (b) as adj. adv.: yaṃmukha facing what, turned where (?) Ja v.475 (but C reads & expl;s sammukha!); yaṃ-vipāka having what or which kind of fruit DN ii.209. yaṃ vā… yaṃ vā whether… or SN ii.179; yaṃ no… na tv’ eva neither… nor SN ii.179–⁠180 ■ yaṃ with pot.: “so that,” that (corresp. to Lat. ut consecutivum) SN iii.41 (yaṃ rūpe anatt’ ânupassī vihareyya). Ja v.339 (n’ esa dhammo yaṃ taṃ jahe that I should leave you) ■ In the function of other conjunctions e.g. as temporal when, since, after: Ja iv.319 (yaṃ maṃ Suruci-m-ānayi that, or since, S. married me). As conditional or causal = if, even if, because: Vin i.276 (yaṃ te sakkā… arogaṃ kātuṃ, taṃ karohi if it is possible… do it; or may be taken in sense of “in whatever way you can do it, do”); Ja iii.206 = Ja iv.4 (yaṃ me sirasmiṃ ūhacca cakkaṃ bhamati matthake = because; C.: yena pāpena) ■ (c) as adv. deictive “so,” in combn with var other (emphatic) particles as e.g. yaṃ nūna used in an exhortative sense “well, now”; or “rather, let me” or “so now,” always in phrase yaṃ nūn’ āhaṃ “now then let me” (do this or that) very freq., either with foll. pot., e.g. “y. n. âhaṃ araññaṃ paviseyyaṃ Dhp-a ii.91. “y. n. â. katakammaṃ puccheyyaṃ Vv-a 132; dasseyyaṃ Vv-a 138; pabbajjeyyaṃ MN ii.55 āneyyaṃ Dhp-a i.46, vihareyyaṃ ibid. 56; etc. cp. Ja i.14 Ja i.150, Ja i.255; Ja iii.393; Dhp-a i.91; Pv-a 5 (avassayo bhaveyyaṃ) ■ Similarly yañ hi “well then, now then (with Pot.) SN ii.210, SN ii.221 (taṃ vadeyya). Cp. yagghe yañ ca & yañ ce; [Sk. yac ca, or cet, ca here = ce see ca & cp. sace = sa + ce] (rather) than that: yañ ca Thig 80; Ja i.210; yañce (with Pot.) SN i.176; Iti 43; Thag 666 sangāme me mataṃ seyyo yañ ce jīve parājito (than that I live vanquished) Snp 440 (cp. the intricate expln at Snp-a 390); similarly Ja iv.495: me maraṇaṃ seyyo yañ ce jīve tayā vinā ■ (b) nt. yad: (a) as pron in regular relative use e.g. SN iii.44 (yad aniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ); Iti 59 (yad eva diṭṭhaṃ tad ev’ âhaṃ vadāmi). (b) as adv., e.g. yad-agge (loc.) from what on, i.e. from which time, since what time DN i.152 (= mūladivasato paṭṭhāya yaṃ divasaṃ aggaṃ patvā DN-a i.311); Vv 8433 (= yato paṭṭhāya Vv-a 344) Also as yad-aggena (instr.) Vin ii.257 (y. Mahāpajāpati-gotamiyā aṭṭha garudhammā paṭiggahitā tad eva sā upasampannā); Vb-a 387yad-atthaṃ for what, why Thig 163. yad-atthiya as much as necessary, as required, sufficient, proper Thag 12 Thag 1274 (“which, for the goal desirous, he led” trsl. refers to brahmacariyaṃ). The same verse occurs at Snp 354. The latter passage is mentioned in P.D under atthiya with meaning “on account of what (cp. kim-atthiyaṃ SN iii.189). The Snp p.ssage is not expld in Snp-a ■ yad-icchakaṃ whatever is pleasant i.e. according to liking, as he pleases AN iii.28; Pp 11 Pp 12; Ja i.141 (y. bhutta eaten heartily); Vism 154 (+ yavadicchaka); Vv-a 341. Cp. yen’ icchakaṃ below II. 5- yad-icchita see under yathā-icchita! -yadidaṃ: see below II. 4 b.

3. Generalizing (or distributive) use of ya: There are two modes of generalization, viz. (a) by repeating ya˚; yassa yass’ eva sālassa mūle tiṭṭhasi, so so muñcati pupphāni; “at the foot of whichever tree you stand he (in all cases concerned) sheds flowers” Vv 393; yaṃ yaṃ hi manaso piyaṃ “whatever is pleasant to the senses” Pv ii.118; yaṃ yaṃ passati taṃ taṃ pucchati “whomsoever he sees, him he asks” Ja iii.155; yassaṃ yassaṃ disāyaṃ viharati, sakasmiṃ yeva vijite viharati” in whichever region he lives, he lives in his own realm” AN iii.151; yo yo yaṃ yaṃ icchati tassa tassa adāsi “whatever anybody wished he gave to him Pv-a 113; yaṃ yaṃ padesaṃ bhajati tattha tatth’ eva assa lābhasakkāro nibbattati “whichever region he visits, there (in each) will he have success” Dhp-a ii.82-(b) by combination with ko-ci (cp. the identical Lat qui-cun-que): yassa kassaci rāgo pahīno ayaṃ vuccati… “the lust of whosoever is abandoned he is called so & so” Iti 56. yāni kānici vatthūni… sabbāni tāni… Iti 19; ye keci ārabbha “with ref. to whosoever” Pv-a 17; yaṃ kiñci whatever Pv i.41.

4. Dependent & elliptic; use of ya (with pron demonstr.). This represents a sort of deictic (emphatic) use, with ref. to what is coming next or what forms the necessary compliment to what is just being said. Thus it introduces a general truth or definition as we would say “just this, namely, i.e.,” or Ger. “so wie, und zwar.”-(a) The usual combns are those of ya + sa (nt. taṃ) and of ya + ayaṃ (nt. idaṃ), but such with amu (nt. aduṃ) also occur: yaṃ aduṃ khettaṃ aggaṃ evam eva mayhaṃ bhikkhu-bhikkhuniyo “as there is one field which is the best, thus to me the bh & bhikkhunīs” SN iv.315. Cp. the foll.: ya + sa e.g. at MN i.366 (yo so puriso paṭhamaṃ rukkhaṃ ārūḷho sace so na khippam eva oroheyya “just that man, who climbed up the tree first, if he does not come down very quickly”); Ja ii.159 (yena tena upāyena with every possible means); Pv i.91 (yā tā [so read for yā ca! “just she over there; who as such, i.e. such as she is”) cp. also the foll.: yā sā sīmā… taṃ sīmaṃ Vin i.109 ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā etc.… sātthaṃ brahmacariyaṃ abhivadanti tathā rūpā ‘ssa dhammā honti… MN iii.11; yāni etāni yānāni (just) these Dhp-a iv.6- ya + ayaṃ e.g. at MN i.258 (yv’ āyaṃ vado vedeyyo tatra tatra… vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti); Iti 35 = Iti 93 (nibbāpenti moh’aggiṃ paññāya yā ‘yaṃ nibbedha-gāminī “as it is also penetrating, which as such, or in this quality, or as we know, is penetrating”); Vin iv.134 (ye ‘me antarāyikā dhammā vuttā… te paṭisevato n’ âlaṃ antarāyāya “just those which, or whichever”) Thag 124 (panko ti hi naṃ avedayuṃ yâyaṃ vandanapūjanā; here = yā ayaṃ); Dhp 56 (appamatto ayaṃ gandho yâyaṃ tagara-candanī; here = yo ayaṃ); MN ii.220 (yaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ… taṃ) ■ (b) nt. yadidaṃ lit. “as that,” which is this (i.e. the following) may be translated by “viz.,” that is, “i.e.” in other words, so to speak, just this, “I mean”; e.g. kāmānaṃ etaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yad idaṃ nekkhammaṃ “there is an escape from the lusts, viz. lustlessness”; or: “this is the abandoning of lusts, in other words lustlessness Iti 61; dve dānāni āmisa˚ dhamm˚, etad aggaṃ imesaṃ yad idaṃ dhamma˚ “this is the best of them, I mean dh-d.” Iti 98 = Iti 100; supaṭipanno sāvaka-sangho, y. i cattāri purisa-yugāni etc. MN i.37. Instead of yadidaṃ we also find yāvañ c’ idaṃ. See also examples given under yāvatā.

5. Cases used adverbially: Either locally or modally with regards to the local adverbs it is to be remarked that their connotation is fluctuating, inasmuch as direction and place (where) are not always distinguished (cp. E. where both meanings = where & where-to), but must be guessed from the context. (a) instr.; yena: (local where (i.e. at which place) DN i.71 (yena yena wherever) 220 (yattha yena yahiṃ = whence, where, whither; not with trslnDial. I. 281: where, why, whence!), 238 (id.) yenatena where (he was)-there (he went) DN i.88, DN i.106 DN i.112 & passim; cp. DN ii.85 (yena âvasath’ âgāraṃ ten upasankami); AN ii.33 (yena vā tena vā here & there or “hither & thither”) ■ (modal) Dhp 326 (yen’ icchakaṃ ii. 2 b.); Pv i.112 (kiṃ akattha pāpaṃ yena pivātha lohitaṃ: so that) ■ loc. yahiṃ where (or whither) Vv 8429 (yahiṃ yahiṃ gacchati tahiṃ tahiṃ modati); & yasmiṃ yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā on every occasion SN i.160 ■ abl yasmā (only modal) because AN i.260; Iti 37 (corresp. to tasmā). On yasmā-t-iha see Geiger, P.Gr. 735.

pron. rel. base; Vedic yaḥ = Gr. ο ̔́ς who; cp. Goth. jabai if,-ei rel. part. An amplification of the dem pron. base *i-, *ei-(cp. ayaṃ). See on detail Brugmann “Die indogerm. Pronomina” in Ber. d. sächs Ges. LX. 41 sq.

Yakana

(nt.) the liver Kp iii. MN i.57, MN i.421; DN ii.293; AN v.109; Mil 26; Vism 257 Vism 356; Vb-a 60, Vb-a 240. The old n-stem is to be seen in cpd yaka-peḷa (q.v.). Yaka-pela

fr. gen. yaknaḥ or sec. stem yakan-of Vedic yakṛt; cp. Av. yākars; Gr. ἡπαρ, Lat. jecur. In formation cp. P. chakana fr. Ved. śakṛt.

Yaka-peḷa

the lump of the liver Snp 195 (= yakana-piṇḍa Snp-a 247) = Ja i.146. Dines Andersen suggests: “Could y ■ p. possibly be an old error for sakapeḷa cp. Sk. śaka-piṇḍa & śakṛt-piṇḍa?” Cp. paṭala (ref. Vism 257). Ya-kara

see peḷa

Ya-kāra

1. the letter (or sound) y: Ja i.430 (padasandhikara); iii.433 (vyañjana-sandhi-vasena gahita).

2. the letter (or syllable) ya: Ja v.427 (nipāta-matta). It is referred to at Vin iv.7 as an ending implying ridiculing or insult, together with the ending ˚bha. The Cy. means words like dāsiya gumbiya, bālya etc. where-ya either denotes descendency or property, or stands for-ka as diminutive (i.e. (disparaging) ending. The same applies to ˚bha Here at Vin iv.7 this way of calling a person by means of adding -ya- or -bha to his name (cp. E ■ y in kid → kiddy etc.) is grouped with a series of other terms of insult (hīnā akkosā).

ya + kāra

Yakkha

1. name of certain non-human beings, as spirits, ogres, dryads, ghosts spooks. Their usual epithet and category of being is amanussa, i.e. not a human being (but not a sublime god either); a being half deified and of great power as regards influencing people (partly helping, partly hurting). They range in appearance immediately above the Petas; many “successful” or happy Petas are in fact Yakkhas (see also below). They correspond to our “genii” or fairies of the fairy-tales and show all their qualities. In many respects they correspond to the Vedic Piśācas, though different in many others and of diff. origin. Historically they are remnants of an ancient demonology and of considerable folkloristic interest, as in them old animistic beliefs are incorporated and as they represent creatures of the wilds and forests, some of them based on ethnological features See on term e.g. Dial. iii.188; on their history and identity Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu chap. v.; pp. 39–⁠44 ■ They are sometimes called devatā: SN i.205; or devaputtā: Pv-a 113, Pv-a 139. A female Yakkha is called yakkhinī (q.v.).

2. Their usual capacity is one of kindness to men (cp. Ger. Rūbezahl). They are also interested in the spiritual welfare of those humans with whom they come into contact, and are something like “tutelary genii” or even “angels” (i.e. messengers from another world) who will save prospective sinners from doing evil (cp. Pv iv.1). They also act as guides in the “inferno”: Pv iv.11, cp. iv.3. A somewhat dangerous “Mentor” is represented at DN i.95, where the y Vajirapāṇī threatens to slay Ambaṭṭha with an iron hammer, if he does not answer the Bhagavā. He is represented as hovering in the air; Bdhgh. (DN-a i.264 says on this: na yo vā so vā yakkho, Sakko devarājā ti veditabbo: it is to be understood not as this or that y. but as Sakka the king of devas ■ Whole cities stand under the protection of, or are inhabited by yakkhas DN ii.147 (ākiṇṇa-yakkha full of y.; thus Āḷakamandā may here mean all kinds of supra-mundane beings), cp Lankā (Ceylon) as inhabited by y.: Mvu 7, Mvu 33 ■ Often however, they are cruel and dangerous. The female yakkhas seem on the whole more fearful and evil-natured than the male (see under yakkhinī). They eat flesh and blood: Ja iv.549; devour even men: DN ii.346; Ja ii.15

17, or corpses: Ja i.265; mentioned under the 5 ādīnavā (dangers) at AN iii.256. A yakkha wants to kill Sāriputta: Ud 4.

3. Var. classes of y. are enumd at DN ii.256, DN ii.257; in a progressive order they rank between manussa and gandhabba at AN ii.38; they are mentioned with devas rakkhasas, dānavas, gandhabbas, kinnaras and mah’oragas at Ja v.420. According to Vv-a 333 Sakka, the 4 great kings (lokapālā), the followers of Vessavaṇa (alias Yama, the yakkhas proper) and men (see below 7) go by the name of yakkha ■ Sakka, the king of the devas, is often named yakkha: Ja iv.4; DN-a i.264 Some are spirits of trees (rukkha-devatā): Ja iii.309 Ja iii.345; Pv i.9; Pv ii.9; Pv-a 5; are also called bhumma-devā (earthly deities) Pv-a 45, Pv-a 55. Their cult seems to originate primarily from the woods (thus in trees Pv ii.9; Pv iv.3), and secondarily from the legends of sea-faring merchants (cp. the story of the flyingDutchman). To the latter origin point the original descriptions of a Vimāna or fairy-palace, which is due to a sort of mirage. These are usually found in or at the sea, or in the neighbourhood of silent lakes, where the sense of hauntedness has given rise to the fear of demons or supernatural witchcraft. Cp. the entrances to a Vimāna by means of a dried-up river bed (Pv i.9 Pv ii.12) and the many descriptions of the Vimānas in the Lake-districts of the Himavant in Vv. (See Stede Peta Vatthu trsln p. 104 sq.)

4. Their names too give us a clue as to their origin and function. These are taken from (a) their bodily appearance, which possesses many of the attributes of Petas, e.g. Khara “Rough-skin” or “Shaggy” Snp p.48 (= khara-samphassaṃ cammaṃ Snp-a 302), also as Khara-loma “Rough-hair” Vism 208; Khara- dāṭhika “Rough-tooth” Ja i.31. Citta “Speckled” Mvu 9 Mvu 22; Mvu 10, Mvu 4; also as Citta-rājā Ja ii.372; Mvu 10, Mvu 84 Silesa-loma “Sticky-hair” Ja i.273. Sūci-loma “Needlehair” Snp p.47, Snp p.48; SN i.207; Vism 208; Snp-a 302 ■ (b places of inhabitance, attributes of their realm, animals and plants, e.g. Ajakalāpaka “Goat-bundle” Ud 1 Āḷavaka “Forest-dweller” Ja iv.180; Ja vi.329; Mvu 30, Mvu 84: Vism 208. Uppala “Lotus” Dhp-a iv.209 Kakudha “K ■ tree” (Terminalia arjuna) SN i.54 Kumbhīra “Crocodile” Ja vi.272. Gumbiya either “One of a troop” (soldier of Yama) or “Thicket-er (fr. gumba thicket) Ja iii.200, Ja iii.201. Disāmukha “Sky-facer” Dhp-a iv.209. Yamamoli “Yamachignon Dhp-a iv.208. Vajira “Thunderbolt” Dhp-a iv.209 alias Vajira-pāṇī DN i.95, or Vajira-bāhu Dhp-a iv.209 Sātāgira “Pleasant-mount” DN ii.256; Snp 153; Ja iv.314 Ja vi.440. Serīsaka “Acacia-dweller” Vv-a 341 (the messenger of Vessavaṇa) ■ (c) qualities of character, e.g. Adhamma “Unrighteous” Mil 202 (formerly Devadatta). Katattha “Well-wisher” Dhp-a iv.209 Dhamma “Righteous” Mil 202 (= Bodhisatta) Puṇṇaka “Full(-moon?)” Ja vi.255 sq. (a leader of soldiers, nephew of Vessavaṇa). Māra the “Tempter Snp 449; SN i.122; MN i.338. Sakata “Waggon-load (of riches) Dhp-a iv.209-(d) embodiments of former persons, e.g. Janavasabha “Lord of men” DN ii.205 Dīgha MN i.210. Naradeva Ja vi.383, Ja vi.387. Paṇḍaka “Eunuch” Mvu 12, Mvu 21. Sīvaka SN i.241 = Vin ii.156 Serī “Self-willed” SN i.57 ■ Cp. the similar names of yakkhinīs.

5. They stand in a close relationship to and under the authority of Vessavaṇa (Kuvera), one of the 4 lokapālas They are often the direct servants (messengers of Yama himself, the Lord of the Underworld (and the Peta-realm especially). Cp. DN ii.257; DN iii.194 sq. Ja iv.492 (yakkhinī fetches water for Vessavaṇa) vi.255 sq. (Puṇṇaka, the nephew of V.); Vv-a 341 (Serīsaka, his messenger). In relation to Yama: dve yakkhā Yamassa dūtā Vv 522; cp. Np. Yamamolī Dhp-a iv.208 ■ In harmony with tradition they share the rôle of their master Kuvera as lord of riches (cp Pv ii.922) and are the keepers (and liberal spenders) of underground riches, hidden treasures etc., with which they delight men: see e.g. the frame story to Pv ii.11 (Pv-a 145), and to iv.12 (Pv-a 274). They enjoy every kind of splendour & enjoyment, hence their attribute; kāma-kāmin Pv i.33. Hence they possess supernatural powers, can transfer themselves to any place with their palaces and work miracles; a frequent attribute of theirs is mah’ iddhika (Pv ii.910; Ja vi.118) Their appearance is splendid, as a result of former merit: cp. Pv i.2; Pv i.9; Pv ii.11; Pv iv.317. At the same time they are possessed of odd qualities (as result of former demerit); they are shy, and afraid of palmyra leaf & iron: Ja iv.492; their eyes are red & do not wink Ja v.34; Ja vi.336, Ja vi.337 ■ Their abode is their self-created palace (Vimāna ), which is anywhere in the air, or in trees etc. (see under vimāna). Sometimes we find a communion of yakkhas grouped in a town, e.g. Āḷakamandā DN ii.147; Sirīsa-vatthu (in Ceylon) Mvu 7 Mvu 32.

6. Their essential human character is evident also from their attitude towards the “Dhamma.” In this respect many of them are “fallen angels” and take up the word of the Buddha, thus being converted and able to rise to a higher sphere of existence in saṃsāra Cp. DN iii.194, DN iii.195; Ja ii.17; Vv-a 333; Pv ii.810 (where “yakkha” is expld by Dhpāla as “pet-attabhāvato cuto (so read for mato!) yakkho ataṃ jāto dev-attabhāvaṃ patto” Pv-a 110); Snp-a 301 (both Sūciloma Khara converted) ■ See in general also the foll passages: Snp 153, Snp 179, Snp 273, Snp 449; SN i.206

15; AN i.160 Vism 366 (in simile); Mil 23.

7. Exceptionally the term “yakkha” is used as a philosophical term denoting the “individual soul [cp. similar Vedic meaning “das lebendige Ding (B.R.) at several AV. passages]; hence probably the old phrase: ettāvatā yakkhassa suddhi (purification of heart) Snp 478, quoted Vv-a 333 (ettāvat’ aggaṃ no vadanti h’ eke yakkhassa sudhiṃ idha paṇḍitāse) Snp 875 (cp. Nd i.282: yakkha = satta, nara, puggala manussa).

-ānubhāva the potency of a yakkha Ja i.240. -āviṭṭha possessed by a y. Ja vi.586. -iddhi (yakkh˚) magic power of a y. Pv-a 117, Pv-a 241. -gaṇa the multitude of ys. Ja vi.287. -gaha = following Dhp-a iii.362. -gāha “yakkha-grip,” being seized by a y. SN i.208; Pv-a 144 -ṭṭhāna the dwelling-place of a y. -dāsī “a female temple slave,” or perhaps “possessed by a demon (?) Ja vi.501 (v.l. BB devatā-paviṭṭhā cp. p. 586 yakkh’ āviṭṭhā.) -nagara city of ys. Ja ii.127 (= Sirīsavatthu); cp. pisāca-nagara. -pura id. Mvu 7.32 -bhavana the realm or abode of the y. Nd i.448. -bhūta a yakkha-being, a ghost Pv iii.52 (= pisāca-bhūta vā yakkha-bh. vā Pv-a 198); iv.135. -mahiddhi = ˚iddhi Pv iv.154. -yoni the y ■ world, realm of the y. Snp-a 301 -samāgama meeting of the y. Pv-a 55 (where also devaputtā join). -sūkara a y. in the form of a pig Vb-a 494. -senā army of ys. DN iii.194; Snp-a 209 -senāpati chief-commander of the yakkha-army Ja iv.478; Snp-a 197.

Vedic yakṣa, quick ray of light, but also “ghost”; fr. yaks to move quickly; perhaps: swift creatures changing their abode quickly and at will ■ The customary (popular) etym. of Pali Commentators is y. as quâsi grd. of yaj, to sacrifice, thus: a being to whom a sacrifice (of expiation or propitiation) is given. See e.g. Vv-a 224: yajanti tattha baliṃ upaharantī ti yakkhā; or Vv-a 333: pūjanīya-bhavato yakkho ti vuccati ■ The term yakṣa as attendants of Kubera occurs already in the Upanishads.

Yakkhatta

(nt.) condition of a higher demon or yakkha DN ii.57; AN ii.39; Pv-a 117.

fr. yakkha

Yakkhinī

(f.) a female yakkha, a vampire. Their character is usually fierce & full of spite & vengeance, addicted to man-& beast-murder (cp. yakkha 2). They are very much like Petīs in habits. With their names cp. those of the yakkhas, as enum;d under yakkha 4 ■ Vin iii.37 Vin iv.20 (where sexual intercourse with y. is forbidden to the bhikkhus); SN i.209 (Piyankara-mātā); Ja i.240 (as a goat), 395 sq.; ii.127; iii.511; v.21 (eating a baby) 209 (eaten by a y.); vi.336 (desirous of eating a child) Vism 121 (singing), 382 (four: Piyankara-mātā, Uttaramātā Phussa-mittā, Dhammaguttā), 665 (in simile) Mvu 7, Mvu 11 (Kuvaṇṇā, i.e. bad-coloured); 10, 53 (Cetiyā); 12, 21 (Hāritā “Charming” or fr. harita “green” (?)); Dhp-a i.47; Dhp-a ii.35, Dhp-a ii.36 (a y. in the form of a cow, eating 4 people in successive births). Note. A by-form of yakkhinī is yakkhī.

-bhāva the state of being a yakkhinī Ja i.240; Ja ii.128 (yakkhini˚).

fr. yakkha, perhaps corresponding directly to Vedic yakṣiṇī, f. of yakṣin; adj. persecuting, taking vengeance, appld to Varuṇa at RV. vii.884

Yakkhī

(f.) = yakkhinī SN i.11; Vin iii.121; Vin iv.20; Ja iv.492; Mvu 7, Mvu 26.

direct formation fr. yakkha, like petī fr. peta; form older than yakkhinī (?)

Yagghe

(indecl.) hortative part, used in addressing a (superior) person in the voc., followed by Pot. of jānāti, either 2;nd jāneyyāsi, or 3rd sg. jāneyya; to be trsld somewhat like “look here, don’t you know, surely, you ought to know; now then; similarly to part. yaṃ nu, yaṃ nūna & yaṃ hi;. The part. is found in the language of the Nikāyas only, thus indicating part of the oldest & original dialect. E. g.: y. bhante jāneyyāsi Vin i.237; yagghe deva jāneyyāsi yo te puriso dāso… so… pabbajito do you know, Oh king DN i.60 (trsl.: “if it please your majesty, do you know…”; DN-a i.169 expls as “codan’ atthe nipāto”) y. ayye jāneyyāsi MN ii.62; mahārāja j. MN ii.71; id SN i.101; y. bhavan jāneyya SN i.180 ■ The passage MN ii.157 is somewhat doubtful where we find y. with the ind. and in var. forms (see v. l.) of yagghi & taggha “jānanti pana bhonto yagghe…, ” with reply “na jānāma yagghe…” Perhaps the reading taggha would be preferable.

similar in formation & meaning to tagghe (q.v.). It is yaṃ (yad) + gha, the latter in a Māgadhised form ghe, whereas taggha (= tad + gha only occurs as such

Yajati

to sacrifice, to make an offering (yaññaṃ); to give alms or gifts-In the P. literature it refers (with yañña, sacrifice) either (when critical) to the Brahmanic rites of sacrificing to the gods according to the rules initiated in the Vedas & Vedic literature; or (when dogmatical) to the giving of alms to the bhikkhu. In the latter sense it implies liberal donation of all the necessities of a bhikkhu (see enumd under yañña). The latter use is by far the more frequent ■ The construction is with the acc. of the deity honoured and the instr. of the gift ■ Pres yajati DN i.139; AN i.168; AN ii.43, AN ii.44; Snp 505, Snp 509; DN-a i.160 ■ ppr. yajanto DN i.52; MN i.404; Mil 21; gen pl. yajataṃ Snp 569 (= Vin i.246, where reading is jayataṃ) ■ ppr. med. yajamāna DN i.138 (mahayaññaṃ); Snp 506; SN i.233; Ja vi.502, Ja vi.505 ■ imper 3rd sg. yajatu DN-a i.297; med. yajataṃ DN i.138 (= detu bhavaṃ DN-a i.300). 2nd sg. yajāhi Ja iii.519; Pv-a 280 and perhaps at Pv ii.16 (for T. yāhi). 2nd med. yajassu Snp 302, Snp 506; Ja v.488 (yaññaṃ), 490 (id.)-Pot. 1st sg yajeyyaṃ DN i.134; DN i.3rd pl. yajeyyuṃ Ja vi.211, Ja vi.215 Ja vi.3rd sg. med. yajetha Dhp 106 (māse māse sahassena yo y. = dānaṃ dadeyya Dhp-a ii.231), 108; Iti 98; AN ii.43; Snp 463 ■ Fut. 2nd sg. yajissasi Ja iii.515; Ja iii.1st sg yajissāmi Ja vi.527 (pantha-sakuṇaṃ tuyhaṃ maṃsena) 3rd pl. yajissanti Ja iv.184; Ja iv.1st pl. yajissāma Ja vi.132. aor. 1st sg. yajiṃ Thag 341; Thag 3rd sg. ayajī Iti 102; yaji Mil 219, Mil 221 ■ inf. yajituṃ Mil 220; yiṭṭhuṃ DN i.138 (yiṭṭhu-kāma wishing to sacrifice), and yaṭṭhuṃ in ˚kāma DN ii.244; Snp 461 ■ ger. yajitvā DN i.143; AN ii.44; Snp 509; Ja vi.137 (puttehi), 202; Pv ii.956 (datvā + , i.e. spending liberally; cp. Pv-a 136); yajitvāna Snp 303, Snp 979 ■ grd. yajitabba Ja vi.133 (sabbacatukkena) ■ pp. yajita & yiṭṭha; ■ Caus. I. yājeti Caus. II. yajāpeti (q.v.).

yaj, cp. Vedic yajati, yajus, Yajur-veda. To Av. yaƶaitē to sacrifice, Gr. α ̔́ζομαι to revere, worship On etym. cp. also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. aestimo ■ The Dhtp (62) defines root by “deva-pūjā, sangati-karaṇa dānesu,” i.e. “said of deva-worship, of assembling and of gifts.” Similarly Dhtm 79

Yajana

(nt.) the act of sacrificing Ja iii.518; Ja vi.133; Cp. I. 72 Vism 224; Pv-a 135.

late formation fr. yaj, yajati, for the earlier yañña

Yajanaka

(adj.) one who sacrifices Ja vi.133.

fr. yajana

Yajāpeti

to cause a sacrifice to be held AN i.168 (yajati + ).

Caus. II. of yajati

Yajita

sacrificed Mil 219; Ja iv.19.

pp. of yajati

Yajubbeda

the Yajurveda, the 2nd of the Vedas, dealing with sacrifice Mil 178; DN-a i.247; Snp-a 447. As yajuveda at Dpvs v.62, where the 3 Vedas are enumd as iruveda yaju˚ and sāma˚.

fr. Vedic yajus the sacrificial formula, + veda

Yañña

1. a brahmanic sacrifice.

2. almsgiving charity, a gift to the Sangha or a bhikkhu. The brahmanic ritual of Vedic times has been given a changed and deeper meaning. Buddhism has discarded the outward and cruel form and has widened its sphere by changing its participant, its object as well as the means and ways of “offering,” so that the yañña now consists entirely in a worthy application of a worthy gift to a worthy applicant. Thus the direct and as it were self-understood definition of yañña is at Nd ii.523 given with “yañño vuccati deyyadhammo, ” and as this the 14 constituents of the latter are enumd; consisting of the 4 paccayas, and of anna, pāna, vattha yāna, mālā, gandhā, vilepana, seyya, avasatha, padīpeyya Cp. Nd i.373 ■ The term parikkhāra, which refers to the requisites of the bhikkhu as well (see DA i.204

207), is also used in the meaning of “accessory instrument” concerning the brahmanic sacrifice: see D i.129 sq., 137 sq. They are there given as 16 parikkhāras as follows: (4) cattāro anumati-pakkhā viz the 4 groups khattiyas, ministers, brahmans and householders, as colleagues by consent; (8) aṭṭhangāni of a king-sacrificer; (4) cattār’ angāni of a purohita. The term mahāyañña refers to the brahmanic ritual (so at MN ii.204; Dhs-a 145, cp. Expositor 193); its equivalent in Buddhist literature is mahādāna, for which yañña is also used at Pv ii.950 (cp. Pv-a 134). The Jātakas are full of passages referring to the ineffectiveness and cruelty of the Brahmanic sacrifice e.g. Ja iii.518 sq.; Ja vi.211 sq., & cp. Fick,; Sociale Gliederung p. 146 sq. One special kind of sacrifice is the sabba-catukkayañña or the sacrifice of tetrads, where four of each kind of gifts, as elephants, horses, bulls and even men were offered: Ja i.335; Ja iii.44, Ja iii.45; Pv-a 280. The number 4 here has the meaning of evenness completeness, or harmony, as we find it freq., in the notion of the square with ref. to Vimānas & lotus ponds (in J., Vv & Pv etc.); often also implying awfulness magic, as attached e.g. to cross-roads. Cp. the Ep of niraya (Purgatory) “catu-dvāra” (esp. at Pv i.10) See cpds. of catur ■ It may also refer to the 4 quarters of the sky, as belonging to the 4 Guardians of the World (lokapālā) who were specially worth offering to, as their influence was demonic (cp. Pv i.4).

The prevailing meaning of yañña in the Suttapiṭaka is that of “gift, oblation to the bhikkhu, alms-giving.” Cp. Snp 295, Snp 461, Snp 484, Snp 1043. At Vv 3426 the epithets “su-dinna, su-huta, su-yiṭṭha” are attributed to dāna ■ The 3 constituents which occur under dāna & deyyadhamma as the gift, the giver and the recipient of the gift (i.e. the Sangha: cp. opening stanza Pv; i1 are similarly enumd under yañña (or yaññapatha) as “ye yaññaṃ (viz. cīvaraṃ etc.) esanti” those who wish for a gift, “ye yaññaṃ abhisankharonti” those who get it ready, and “ye yaññaṃ denti” those who give it, at Nd ii.70 (under appamatta). Similarly we find the threefold division of “yañña” (= cīvara etc.), “yaññayājaka” (= khattiyā, brāhmaṇā etc., including all 8 classes of men: see Nd ii.p. 129 s. v. khattiya, quoted under janab), and “dakkhiṇeyya” (the recipient of the gift, viz. samaṇa-brāhmaṇā, kapaṇ’addhikā vanibbakā yācakā) at Nd ii.449b (under puthū) ■ Cp. the foll. (mixed) passages: DN i.97, DN i.128

144 (brahmanic criticised); ii.353, 354 (profitable and unprofitable criticised); MN i.82 (brahm.); SN i.76, SN i.160; SN ii.42 sq., 63 207; iii.337; iv.41; AN i.166; AN ii.43 (nirārambhaṃ yaññaṃ upasankamanti arahanto, cp. Dhs-a 145); Snp 308 (brahm.), 568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaññā: the sacrifices to Agni are the best; brahm.); Thag 341; Ja i.83, Ja i.343; Ja iii.517 (˚ṃ yajati; brahm.); iv.66; v.491 492; vi.200 (yañña-kāraka-brāhmaṇa), 211 sq.; DN-a i.267; Dhp-a ii.6.

-āgāra a hall for sacrifices Pp 56 (= yañña-sālā PugA 233). -āvāṭa the sacrificial pit DN i.142, DN i.148; Ja i.335; Ja iii.45, Ja iii.517; Ja vi.215 (where reading yaññavāṭa cp. yaññavāṭaka at Cp i.72). It has been suggested by Kern, Toev, s. v., and it seems more to the sense to read yañña- vāṭa for yanñ’ āvāṭa, i.e. enclosed place for sacrifice. Thus at all passages for ˚āvāṭa. -kāla a suitable (or the proper) time for sacrifice DN i.137; Snp 458, Snp 482; DN-a i.297. -upanīta one who has been brought to the sacrifice SN i.168 (trsl. K.S. 211 not quite to the point: “the oblation is brought.” Reading is uncertain; v.l. ˚opanīta which may be read as opavīta “wearing the sacrificial cord”: see foll.). -opavīta (?) [see upavīta] in phrase yaññ’ opavīta-kaṇṭhā “having the (sacrificial, i.e.) alms-cord wound round their necks” Snp-a 92 (v.l. BB yaññ-opacita-kammā). Cp yañña-suttaka. -patha [cp. patha2] (way of) sacrificing, sacrifice Snp 1045; Nd ii.524 (yañño y’ eva vuccati yañña-patho); Ja vi.212, Ja vi.215. -vaṇṇa praise of sacrifice Ja vi.200. -vidhāna the arrangement or celebration of a sacrifice Ja vi.202. -sampadā success of the sacrifice DN i.128 sq. (in its threefold mode), 134, 143, 144; Snp 505, Snp 509. -sāmin lord or giver of a sacrifice DN i.143 -suttaka “sacrificial string,” i.e. alms-cord (the sign of a mendicant) Dhp-a ii.59. Cp. above: ˚opavīta.

Vedic yajña, fr. yaj: see yajati. The metric reading in the Veda is sometimes yajana, which we are inclined to look upon as not being the source of the P. yajana

Yaññatā

(f.) “sacrificiality,” the function or ceremony of a sacrifice Ja vi.202 (= yañña-vidhāna C.).

abstr. fr. yañña

Yaṭṭhi

(f.) 1. a staff, stick, pole MN iii.133 (tomara˚ goad); SN i.115 (pācana˚ driving stick, goad); Mil 2; Dhp-a iii.140 (kattara˚ a mendicant’s staff); Pv-a 241; Vb-a 241 (yantacakka˚); Mvu 11, Mvu 10 (veḷu˚ a bamboo pole). 2. a stem, stalk (of a plant), cane in ucchu˚; sugarstick sugar-cane Dhp-a iii.315 (= ucchu-khaṇḍika at Vv 3326); iv.199.

3. a measure of length (= 7 ratanas) Vb-a 343.

-koṭi the end of the stick or staff Dhp-a i.15. -madhukā (“cane-sweetness”) liquorice Mvu 32, Mvu 46 -luddaka “stick-hunter” at Ja iv.392 means a hunter with a lasso.

cp. Vedic yaṣṭi. Another Pali form is laṭṭhi

Yata

held, checked, controlled, restrained, careful SN ii.15, SN ii.50; Snp 78, Snp 220, Snp 1079 (= yatta, paṭiyatta gutta etc. Nd ii.525); Ja vi.294 (C. appamatta; Kern Toev. s. v. proposes reading yatta for yata Vism 201 (?). Esp. in two phrases: yat-atta (yata + attan) selfcontrolled one whose heart is kept down DN i.57 (cp Dial. i.75); Snp 216, Snp 490, Snp 723; DN-a i.168yata-cārin living in self-restraint, living or behaving carefully Snp 971 (= yatta paṭiyatta gutta etc. Nd i.498); Mil 300 (+ samāhita-citta, where Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes to read yatta-cārin for yata˚). A similar passage at Thag 981 reads yathā-cārin (q.v. for further expln). Cp. saṃyata & see also; yatta.

pp. of yam

Yatati1

to exert oneself, strive endeavour, to be cautious or careful; ppr. yataṃ Iti 120 (care, tiṭṭhe, acche etc.; Seidenstūcker trsls “gezügelt,” thus taking it in meaning of yata) ■ pp. yatta.

yat, given by Dhtp 121 in meaning “yatana,” by Dhtm 175 as “paṭiyatana”

Yatati2

is given in meaning of “lead out” (?) at Dhtp 580 (“niyyātane”) and Dhtm 813 (id.).

unidentified, perhaps as expln of yati?

Yatana

(nt.) endeavour, undertaking Ja v.346 (C. expls samosaraṇa-ṭṭhāna?); Dhtp 121 (in expln of yatati1).

fr. yat, cp. Epic Sk. yatna

Yati

a Buddhist monk Mvu 5, Mvu 37 (racchāgataṃ yatiṃ); 25, 4; 30, 26 (mattikā-dāyakaṃ yatiṃ); 32, 32 (khīṇāsavassa yatino) Dāvs iv.33 (yatī); Vism 79 (vikampeti Mārassa hadayaṃ yatī); Pv-a 287 (instr. muni-vara-yatinā).

fr. yat, cp. Vedic yati leader, guide

Yato

(adv.) [the abl. case of ya˚, used as conjunction, Cp. Vedic yataḥ wherefrom, by which, out of which 1. (local) from where DN i.240 (uggacchanti candima-suriyā; opp. yattha where).

2. (temporal) whence since, when, from which time Vv-a 344 (yato paṭṭhāya).

3. (modal) from which, out of what cause because, in as far as DN i.36 sq. (yato… ettāvatā because… therefore); Snp p.113 (id.) Dhp 374, Dhp 390 (doubled = from whichever source) ■ Freq. in two combns: yatvādhi-karaṇaṃ (yato + adhikaraṇaṃ) because (lit. by reason of which; cp. kim-ādhikaraṇaṃ, see adhik.) DN i.70; DN i.113; MN i.269; Dhs 1346; cp. similarly BSk. yato adhikaraṇaṃ Mvu iii.52; and yato-nidānaṃ on account of which, from which (or what) reason, because MN i.109; Snp 273, Snp 869; Pv iv.161 (cp. Pv-a 242) ■ Note. yaticchita at Pv-a 265 is to be read yadicchita.

Yatta

strenuous, making an effort, watchful Nd ii.525 (+ paṭiyatta, in exegesis of yata); Ja iv.222 (+ paṭiyatta); vi.294 (Kern’s reading for yata; vv. ll saṃyata & sata, thus warranting yata); Mil 373 (˚payatta), 378 (id. = in keen effort) ■ Note. Kern Toev. s. v. would like to equal yatta = Sk. yatna effort.

pp. of yatati1

Yattaka

(adj.) however much, whatever, as many (in correlation with ta˚; or tattaka ) Ja v.74 (= yāvant); Vism 184 (yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti… tattakaṃ… ), 293 (yattakā = yāvatā); DN-a i.118 (yattaka… tattaka as long as); Dhp-a ii.50 (˚ṃ kālaṃ as long), 128 Vb-a 73 (yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ… tattakaṃ), 391 (yattakāni kusala-cittāni… tesaṃ sabbesaṃ); Vv-a 175 (yattakāni… tāni as many… so many, i.e. whatever), 285 (yattakā āhuneyyā nāma… tesu sabbesu… ) ■ instr. yattakena as adv. “because on account of” Dhp-a iii.383, Dhp-a iii.393.

fr. yāvant, a late formation; cp. Trenckner, Notes, 80

Yattha

(adv.) rel. adv. of place “where,” at which spot occasionally “at which time,” when; with verbs of motion = “whereto.”-D i.240 (whither); Snp 79, Snp 170 (here closely resembling yatra in meaning = “so that”) 191, 313, 445, 995, 1037; Dhp 87, Dhp 127 (yattha ṭhita, cp Pv-a 104) 150, 171, 193, Pv-a 27yattha vā tattha vā wherever (or whenever) Dhp-a iv.162; similarly yattha yattha wherever (he likes) AN ii.64. yattha kāmaṃ (cp. yathākāmaṃ in same meaning) where to one’s liking, i.e. wherever Dhp 35 (= yattha katthaci or yattha yattha icchati Dhp-a i.295, Dhp-a i.299), 326. Similarly we find yatth-icchakaṃ, almost identical (originally variant?) with yadicchakaṃ and yāvadicchakaṃ at Vism 154.

the regular P. form of Ved. yatra. See also P. yatra

Yatra

(adv.) in which, where, since; only in phrase yatra hi nāma (in emphatic exclamations) with Fut. “as indeed, inasmuch as, that” SN ii.255 (ñāṇabhūtā vata sāvakā y. h. n. savako ñassati etc.); Ja i.59 (dhir-atthu vata bho jātiyā y. h. n. jātassa jarā paññāyissati “woe to birth that old age is to be noticed in that which is born!”); Mil 13 (acchariyaṃ vata bho… y. h. n. me upajjhāyo ceto-parivitakkaṃ jānissati).

the (older?) reconstituted Sk. form of P. yattha, cp. Vedic yatra in which, where. The P. form is younger than the Vedic, as the P. meaning is doubtful for the V. period. It is merely a differentiation of forms to mark a special meaning in the sense of a causal conjunction, whereas yattha is adv. (of place or time) only

Yathā

(adv.) as, like, in relation to, after (the manner of) ■ As prep. (with acc.): according (to some condition, norm or rule): yathā kāmaṃ (already Vedic) according to his desire, after his liking Pv-a 113, Pv-a 136; y. kālaṃ in time timely Pv-a 78; matiṃ to his own mind or intention Pv iv.167; ruciṃ to his satisfaction, amply, satisfactorily Pv-a 88, Pv-a 126, Pv-a 242; vibhavaṃ acc. to their wealth i.e. plentifully Pv-a 53; sukhaṃ as they liked or pleased Pv-a 133. Sometimes with loc.: yathā padese “according to place,” in the right place Ja iii.391. Or instr.: y. sattiyā as much as you can Dhp-a i.92; y. manena from his heart, sincerely, voluntarily Dhp-a i.42 ■ Also with ger. yathā haritvā according to his taking (or reward: see under cpd. ˚bhata) Iti 14 (y. h. nikkhipeyya which Seidenstücker, not doing justice to context translates “so wie man etwas nimmt und dann wegwirft”). With foll. adj. expressing something like “as it were” and often untranslateable (see cpds.)-As conjunction: “as if,” or “so that” yathā mata like dead Dhp 21; yathā na “in order that not”: Vism 31 (y. sarīre ābādhaṃ na uppādeti, evaṃ tassa vinodan’ atthaṃ); Dhp-a i.311 (y. assa patitaṭthānaṃ na passāmi, tathā naṃ chaḍḍessāmi: so that I shall not see…, thus shall I throw him) ■ As adv. just, as, so, even; in combn with other particles yathā kathaṃ pana how so then, how is it then that SN ii.283 (cp. yathā tathaṃ under cpds.); yathā kiṃ viya somewhat like this Mil 91; yathā pana like as Dhp-a i.158; yatha-r-iva (for yathā-iva) just as DN i.90; yathā pi… evaṃ just as… so Dhp 51–⁠52 ■ yatha -yidaṃ (for yathā-idaṃ) positive: “as just this,” “so that,” “e.g. ,” “like,” “i.e.”; after negation “but Iti 8, Iti 9 (na aññaṃ… yathayidaṃ); Snp 1092 (tvañ ca me dīpam akkhāhi, yathayidaṃ n’ âparaṃ siyā “so that there be no further ill”; cp. Snp-a 597). See also the enlarged forms seyyathā & seyyathīdaṃ ■ In correlation with; tathā: the same… as, like… as, as… so; Pv i.123 (yath’ āgato tathā-gato as he has come so has he gone). Often elliptically in direct juxtaposition: yathā tathā in whatever way, in such & such a manner; so and so, according to the occasion; also “correctly, truly, in reality” Snp 504 (tvaṃ h’ ettha jānāsi y. t. idaṃ ); Pv-a 199 (y. t. vyākāsi). See yathā-tathaṃ under cpds. About phrase yathā taṃ see yathātaṃ ■ For further refs. on the use of yathā see Indexes to Saṃyutta (S vi.81 s. v. yathābhūtaṃ) Anguttara (A. vi.91 ibid.); Sutta-Nipāta (Index p. 751) & Dhammapada.;

-ānudhammaṃ according to the rules (leading to enlightenment) Snp 963, cp. Nd i.481. -ānurūpa suitable proper Mvu 28, Mvu 42. -ānusiṭṭhaṃ in accordance with what has been taught Dhp-a i.158. -ābhirantaṃ (adv nt. of ppr.) to (their) heart’s content, as much (or as long) as one likes Vin iii.145; Snp 53; Dhp-a i.385; Vv-a 181. -āraddha [ = ālabdha] as much as was to be had, sufficient Vin iii.160. -ārahaṃ (nt. adv.) as is fit or proper, seeming, fitful, appropriately, duly (cp Cpd. 1111, 1182) SN i.226; Snp 403; Pv ii.923; Pv-a 78 Pv-a 132 (yathā codanaṃ v.l. SS), 287; Vv-a 139. So to be read at all Pv & Pv-a passages for T. yathā rahaṃ Very freq. in Mvu. e.g. 3, 27; 5, 148; 7, 70; 14, 54 20, 8; 22, 58. -ālaṅkata dressed as he was, in full (state-) dress Dhp-a iii.79. -āvajjaṃ “as if to be blamed,” i.e. (imitating) whatever is faulty, mimicry of deformities (as a forbidden pastime) DN i.7 (= kāṇakuṇi-khañj’ ādīnaṃ yaṃ yaṃ vajjaṃ taṃ taṃ payojetvā dassana-kīḷā DN-a i.86); Vin ii.10. -icchitaṃ according to one’s wish, as he liked, after his heart’s content Ja i.27 (v. 188) = Bv ii.179; is preferably to be read as yad- icchitaṃ at all Pv-a passages, e.g. Pv-a 3 (˚ṃ dento) 110 (˚ṭhāna whichever place I like), 265 (where T. has yat˚). The ed. of Mvu however reads yath˚; throughout; e.g. 7, 22; 22, 50. -odhi as far as the limit, final utmost MN i.37; Ja iii.302. -odhika to (its or their) full extent, altogether, only in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Snp 60 (cp. Nd ii.526); Ja iii.381 (C. not quite to the point with expln “attano odhivasena ṭhitāni,” giving variant yatodhikāni, with expln “yato uparato odhi etesan ti yatodhikāni uparata-koṭṭhāsāni”); iv.487 (with better C. expln: “yena yena odhinā thitāni tena tena ṭhitān eva jahissāmi, na kiñce avasissāmī ti attho”); v.392 (C.: “yathāṭhita-koṭṭhasāni”). -kamma (ṃ) according to one’s karma or action Ja i.57, Ja i.109; Ja iv.1. Freq in phrase yathā-kamm-ūpage satte (pajānāti) “(he recognises) the beings passing away (or undergoing future retribution) acc. to their deeds” DN i.82; MN i.482 MN ii.21; MN iii.178; SN ii.122; AN iv.141, AN iv.178, AN iv.422; AN v.35; Snp 587; Iti 99; and yathā-kamm-ūpaga-ñāṇa “the knowledge of specific retribution” Vism 433 sq.; Tikp 321 Vb-a 373 sq. (˚catuttha). -kāmaṃ according to wish at random (see above); ˚ -karaṇiya to be done or dealt with ad lib., i.e. a victim, prey SN ii.226; SN iv.91, SN iv.159; Iti 56. -kārin as he does Iti 122 (corresp. to tathāvādin). -kālaṃ according to time, in one time Mvu 5 Mvu 180. -kkamaṃ acc. to order, in one order or succession Mvu 4, Mvu 54; Sdhp 269. -cārin virtuous (for the usual yatacārin as indicated by C. explnyata kāyādīhi sanyati: see Brethren, p. 342!) Thag 981 (trsl. “Whoso according to his powers is virtuous”). -ṭhita so-being, such such, as they are, as they were Ja v.392; Vv-a 256 -tathaṃ according to truth, true & real (corresponding to yathā tathā adv.: see above) Iti 122 (here as nom. sg. as he is in one respect, so in the other, i.e. perfect) Snp 1127 (= yathā ācikkhitabbaṃ tathā ācikkhi Nd ii.527); Thag 708 (diṭṭhe dhamme yathātathe: is reading correct? perhaps better as yathātathā, cp. trslnBrethren 292: “the truths are seen e’en as they really are”) Dpvs iii.2 (so read for yathā-kathaṃ; v.l. has ˚tathaṃ) v.64 (pañhaṃ byākarohi yathātathaṃ). -dhamma (used as adj. & adv.; ˚ṃ ) “one according to the law,” i.e. as the rule prescribes; nt. according to the rule put down See Vin. Texts i.203; Geiger, Dhamma, p. 19, 67. Vin i.135 (yo uddiseyya, yathā-dhammo kāretabbo) 168 (yo pavāreyya, y ■ dhammo kāretabbo), 191 (yo māreyya y ■ dh. k.); ii.67 (ubho pi yathādhammaṃ kārāpetabbā), 132 (yo ajjhohareyya, y ■ dhammo kāretabbo); iv.126 (yo jānaṃ (i.e. knowing) yathādhammaṃ nihat’ âdhikaraṇaṃ punakammāya ukkoṭeyya pācittiyan ti i.e. a dispute settled in proper form; with expln: y ■ dhammaṃ nāma dhammena vinayena satthu sāsanena kataṃ), 144 (na tassa… mutti atthi yañ ca tattha āpattiṃ āpanno tañ ca yathādhammo kāretabbo, uttari c’ assa moho āropetabbo) Cp. the foll. passages; as adj.: Vin i.205; Vin ii.132, Vin ii.142 Vin ii.263; MN iii.10; Mil 195; as adv.: with paṭikaroti (to atone, make amends) Vin i.173, Vin i.315; Vin ii.126; Vin iv.19; DN i.85; DN iii.55; MN iii.247; SN ii.128, SN ii.205; AN i.103, AN i.238 AN ii.146; AN iv.377; cp. yathādhammaṃ paṭigaṇhāti SN i.239; AN i.59, AN i.103. At SN iii.171 yathādhammaṃ is used in the sense of “according to the truth, or reality,” where yathā-bhūtaṃ takes its place; similarly at Thag 188 -dhota as if it were washed (so to speak), clean, unsoiled Dhp-a i.196; cp. Mvu i.301 yathā-dhauta -pasādhanaṃ according to a clear state of mind, to one’s gratification Dhp 249 (= attano pasād’ ânurūpaṃ Dhp-a iii.359). -puggalaṃ according to the individual individually Pv iii.51 (read yathāpu˚). -pūrita as full as could be, quite full Ja i.101. -phāsuka comfortable pleasant Dhp-a i.8. -balaṃ according to one’s power or means Dhp-a i.107 (v.l. ˚satti); Sdhp 97; Mvu 5, Mvu 180 -buḍḍha see ˚vuḍḍha ■ bhataṃ; is an unexpldα ̔́πας λεγομένον, difficult of analysis because occurring in only one ster. phrase, viz. yathā bhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ niraye (& sagge) at MN i.71; SN iv.325 (where T. has yathāhataṃ, v.l. bhataṃ); AN i.8, AN i.105, AN i.292, AN i.297; AN ii.71 AN ii.83; Iti 12, Iti 14, Iti 26. We have analyzed it as y. bhataṃ in Corr. to pt. 3; vol. ii.100 (“according to his upbringing”), but we should rather deviate from this expln because the P. usage in this case would prefer the nom instead of the (adv.) acc. nt. It remains doubtful whether we should separate yathā or yath’ ābhataṃ Suggestions of a trsln are the foll. (1) “as soon as brought or taken” (see Dict. s. v. ābhata); (2) “as one has brought” (merit or demerit); thus taking ābhataṃ as irregular ger. of ā + bhar, trsln suggested by the reading āharitvā (yathâharitvā) in the complementary stanzas at Iti 12 & 14; (3) “according to merit or reward,” after Kern’s suggestion, Toev. s. v. to read yathā bhaṭaṃ, the difficulty being that bhaṭa is nowhere found as v.l. of bhata in this phrase; nor that bhaṭa occurs in the meaning of “reward.”-There is a strong likelihood of (ā)bhata resembling āhata (āhaṭa? in meaning “as brought,” on account of, cp. It context and reading at SN iv.325; still the phrase remains not sufficiently cleared up ■ Seidenstūcker’s trsln has been referred to above (under haritvā) as unbefitting-The suspicion of yathābhataṃ being a veiled (corrupted) yathābhūtaṃ has presented itself to us before (see vol. I. under ābhata). The meaning may suggest something like the latter, in as far as “in truth, “surely” is not far off the point. Anyhow we shall have to settle on a meaning like “according to merit, without being able to elucidate the phrase in all its details ■ There is another yathābhataṃ in passage… ussavo hoti, yathābhataṃ lasuṇaṃ parikkhayaṃ agamāsi “the garlic diminished as soon as it was brought” Vin iv.258. Here ābhata stands in rel. to harāpeti (to have it fetched & brought) and is clearly pp. of; ābharati ■ bhucca as is the case, i.e. as one might expect, evident, real, in conformity with the truth DN i.12; DN ii.222; Mil 183, Mil 351; Thig 159 (= yathābhūtaṃ Thag-a 142); Pv-a 30, Pv-a 31 (˚guṇā). -bhutta see bhutta. -bhūta(ṃ) in reality, in truth, really, definitely absolutely; as ought to be, truthfully, in its real essence Very freq. in var. combnns which see collected & classified as regards Saṃyutta & Anguttara-Nikāyas in Index vols to these texts. E. g. SN iv.195 (vacanaṃ, Ep. of Nibbāna); v.440 (abhisamaya); Snp 194, Snp 202, Snp 653; Dhp 203; Pv-a 215 (guṇa). yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti he knows as an absolute truth or in reality DN i.83, DN i.162; SN iv.188 SN v.304 & passim; ditto yathābhūtaṃ jānāti passati Pts ii.62. Similarly with noun: yathābhūta-ñāṇa absolute knowledge SN v.144; Pts ii.63 = Vism 605 (+ sammādassana); Vism 438, Vism 629, Vism 695; Vb-a 459 (= maggañāṇa); also as ˚ñāṇa-dassana in same meaning: AN iii.19, AN iii.200; AN iv.99, AN iv.336; AN v.2 sq., 311 sq.; Pts i.33, Pts i.43 sq. Pts ii.11 sq.; Ne 29. -mano according to (his) mind Snp 829; Nd i.170 (expld as nom. = yathācitto, yathāsankappo yathāviññāṇo). -ruciṃ according to pleasure or liking Mvu 4, Mvu 43 (ruci T.; ruciṃ v.l.; thus generally in Mvu.); 5, 230 (˚ruci); 22, 58 (˚ruci). -vādin as speaking, as he speaks (followed by tathā-kārin so doing) DN ii.224, DN ii.229; Snp 357; Iti 122. -vidhi(ṃ) duly fitly Mvu 10, Mvu 79. -vihita as appointed or arranged Mvu 10, Mvu 93. -vuḍḍhaṃ according to seniority Vin ii.221; Mhbv 90 (T. reads ˚buḍḍhaṃ). -vutta(ṃ) as is said, i.e. as mentioned, aforesaid, of this kind Mvu 34, Mvu 57; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 116 (˚o puggalo). -saka(ṃ) each his own, according to his (or her) own, respective(ly) Vism 525; Snp-a 8, Snp-a 9; Vv-a 7; Mvu 5, Mvu 230 (here simply “their own”). -sata saintly (?), mindful Thag 981 (cp. yathā cārin & Brethren p. 342). -satti(ṃ) according to one’s power SN iv.348 (+ yathābalaṃ); Dhp-a i.107 (v.l. for ˚balaṃ); Sdhp 97. -satthaṃ according to the precepts as law ordains MN iii.10 (perhaps an error for yathāsaddha ). -saddhaṃ acc. to faith, as is one’s faith Dhp 249. -santhatika accepting whatever seat is offered DN i.167; AN iii.220; Pp 69; Thag 855 -˚anga one of the 13 dhutangas Mil 342, Mil 359; Vism 61, Vism 78. -sukhaṃ according to ease, at ease, at will Thag 77; Dhp 326.

fr. ya˚; Vedic yathā; cp. kathā, tathā

Yathātaṃ

(adv.) as it is, as, as if Vin iii.5; SN i.124; MN i.253. The spelling in our books is yathā taṃ (in two words).

yathā + taṃ

Yathāva

(adj.) having the character of being in accordance with (the truth or the occasion), real, true, just Iti 44 (santaṃ paṇītaṃ yathāvaṃ, nt.); Thag 188, Thag 422 (˚āloka-dassana seeing the real light); Mil 171 (˚lakkhaṇa true characteristics); Vism 588 (as yāthāvasarasa), 639 (id.) ■ abl. yathāvato (also found as yāthāvato, probably more correctly, being felt as a der fr. yathā) according to fitness, fitfully, duly, truly sufficiently Pv-a 60 (so read for yathā vato), 128 (all MSS. yāthāvato!); Thag-a 256 (yā˚; the expln given by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 208 is not correct).

der. fr. yathā, as yathā + vant, after analogy of yāvant, but following the a-decl., cp. Epic Sk. yathāvat

Yathāvaka

(adj.) being according to reality or sufficiency, essential, true, real, sufficient Thag 347 Vb-a 409 (˚vatthu, referring to the “māna”-division of the Khuddaka-vatthu Vb 353 sq., cp. Nd ii.505≈ Should we read yāthāvaka˚? Yad, Yad-idam

fr. yathāva

Yad, Yad-idaṃ

etc., see ya˚; 4b.

Yadā

(adv.) when Snp 200 (y. ca so mato seti), 681, 696 (here as yada, expld as yadā), 923; Dhp 28, Dhp 69, Dhp 277 sq., 325, 384, 390; Iti 77 (y devo devakāyā cavati); Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67. Cp. kadā & tadā.;

Vedic yadā; old instr. of ya˚

Yadi

(indecl.) 1. as conjunction: if; constructed either with pres. indic., as: Snp 189; “yadi bodhiṃ pattuṃ icchasi” Ja i.24 (v. 167); “yadi dāyako dānaṃ deti… etaṃ bījaṃ hoti” Pv-a 8; or pot.; or with a participle, as: “yadi evaṃ sante” that being so, if this is so DN i.61; “gahito yadi sīho te” if the lion is caught by you Mvu 6, Mvu 27 ■ With other particles, e.g. yādi āsanamattaṃ pi even if only a seat Vv-a 39; yadi… atha kasmā if… how then Mil 4. yadi evaṃ… (tu) even if… yet (but) Pv-a 63 (y. e. pitā na rodati mātu nāma hadayaṃ mudukaṃ) ■ yadi va “or” (cp Vedic yadi vā “or be it that”) Dhp 195 (= yadi vā athavā Dhp-a iii.252). So yadi vā at Ja i.18 (v. 97: latā vā yadi vā rukkhā etc. Snp 119 (gāme vā yadi vâraññe)

2. as a strong particle of exhortation: yadi evaṃ if so, in that case, let it be that, alright, now then Pv-a 54 (y. e. yaṃ mayhaṃ desitaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno dehi), 217 (y. e. yāvadatthaṃ gaṇhāhi: take as much as you like).

adv. formation, orig. loc., fr. ya˚; cp. Vedic yadi

Yanta

(nt.) a means for holding, contrivance, artifice, instrument machine, mechanism; fig. instrumentality (as perhaps in, kamma˚ at Th passages) ■ Referring to the machinery (outfit) of a ship (as oars, helm, etc.) Ja iv.163 (sabbayant’ ûpapanna = piy’-ârittā etc. C.); Mil 379. To mechanism in general (mechanical force Ja v.333 (˚vegena = with the swiftness of machinery) To a sugar-mill Mil 166; usually as ucchu-yanta Ja i.25, Ja i.339 (˚yante gaṇṭhikā), cp. ucchūnaṃ yanta Dhp-a iv.199tela-yanta (-cakka) (the wheel of) an oil mill Ja i.25dāru-yanta a wooden machine (i.e. a mechanical man with hands & feet moved by pulling of strings) DN-a i.197; Vism 595 (quoted as simile)- kamma-yanta the machinery of Kamma Thag 419 (i.e. its instrumentality, not, as trsln “car”; cp Brethren 217: “it breaks in pieces K’s living car, evidently influenced by C. expln “attabhāva-yanta”) 574 (similarly: see discussed under yantita). Note. yantāni at Nd ii.529 (on Snp 48 sanghaṭṭa-yantām) is expld as “dhuvarāni.” The spelling & meaning of the latter is not clear. It must refer to bracelets.; Cp. Snp-a 96 valayāni.

-ākaḍḍhana pulling the machine Vism 258 = Vb-a 241. -cakkha-yaṭṭhi the stick of the wheel of a (sugar-mill Vb-a 60. -nāḷi a mechanical tube Dhp-a iii.215 -pāsāṇa an aerolite (?) Ja iii.258 (read ˚pāsāṇo). -phalakāni the boards of a machine Vism 258. -yutta combined by machinery Ja vi.432. -sutta the string of a machine (or mill). Vism 258 (as ˚ka) = Vb-a 241 -hatthi a mechanical (automatic) elephant Dhp-a i.192 (of King Caṇḍa-pajjota; cp. the horse of Troy).

Vedic yantra, a kind of n. ag. formation fr. yam to hold by means of a string or bridle, etc. Idg *em & *i̯em;, as in Lat. emo to take & red-imio.

Yantaka

(nt.) a bolt Vin ii.148 (vihārā aguttā honti… anujānāmi yantakaṃ sūcikan ti), cp. Vin Texts iii.162; DN-a i.200 (kuñcikā + ); Dhp-a i.220 (yantakaṃ deti to put the bolt to, to lock up).

fr. yanta

Yanti

is 3rd pl. pres. of : see yātiNote. At DN ii.269 we should combine yanti with preceding visamā sambādhā, thus forming denom. verbs: visamāyanti “become uneven” and sambādhāyanti “become oppressed or tight.” The trslnDial ii.305 gives just the opposite by reading incorrectly.

Yantita

made to go, set into motion, impelled Thag 574: evâyaṃ vattati kāyo kamma-yantena yantito “impelled by the machinery of Karma” trslnBrethren 261 not quite to the point “carried about on Karma’s car.” Kern, Toev. s, v. quite out of place with “fettered, held, restrained,” in analogy to his trsln of yanta id. loc. with “fetter.” He may have been misled by Dhtm defn of yant as “sankocana (see yanteti).

pp. of yanteti

Yanteti

to set into motion, to make go, impel, hurl Ja i.418 (sakkharaṃ anguliyā yantetvā); pp. yantita.

denom. fr. yanta. Dhtm 809 gives a root yant in meaning of “sankocane,” i.e. contraction

Yannūna

see ya˚; 2˚.

Yapana

see yāpana.

Yapeti

see yāpeti.

Yabhati

to cohabit, futuere, only given as root yabh with defn “methune” at Dhtp 215 & Dhtm 308.;

one passage in Atharva Veda; cp. Gr. οι ̓́φω “futuo,” Lat. ibex (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)

Yama1

restraint Pv-a 98 (+ niyama).

fr. yam

Yama2

the ruler of the kingdom of the dead. See details in Dicty. of Names. In cpds. often in general sense of “death” or “manes,” or “petā” e.g.

-dūta Death’s messenger Sdhp 287; cp. Yamassa dūtā Vv 522 (see Vv-a 224), or deva-dūta AN i.138 (see under dūta), alias niraya-pāla AN i.138 and passim -purisa (a) = ˚dūta Dhp 235 (cp. Dhp-a iii.335); Vv-a 223 (b) ˚purisā Yama-people, i.e. Petas Pv iv.38 (cp. Pv-a 251). -loka the yama-world or world of the Petas Dhp 44, Dhp 45; Pv-a 107 & freq.; -visaya = ˚loka Pv ii.82 & passim.; -sādana Y’s kingdom, or the realm of the dead Ja vi.267, Ja vi.304; Ja vi.457, Ja vi.505.

Vedic Yama

Yama3

(m. nt.) (nt. a pair, (m.) a twin Abhp 628. See der. yamaka.

Vedic yama = yama2; fr. yam in meaning “to combine,” cp. Av. yə̄ma twin, Mir. emuin id.

Yamaka

1. (adj.) double, twin; only in foll. combns: ˚pāṭihāriya (& ˚hīra); the miracle of the double appearances, a miracle performed by the Buddha in Sāvatthī to refute the heretical teachers (cp. Vin iii.332 Samanta-pāsādika; and in detail DN-a i.57). It consisted in the appearance of phenomena of opposite character in pairs, as e.g. streaming forth of fire water. (Cp.; Mvu trsln 120). The miracle was repeatedly performed by the Buddha & is often referred to, e.g. at Ps; i.125 (˚hīra); Ja i.77, Ja i.88, Ja i.193; Mil 106 (˚hīraṃ), 349 (˚hāriyaṃ); Mvu 17, Mvu 44, Mvu 50; Mvu 30, Mvu 82; Mvu 31 Mvu 99; Dāvs i.50 (˚hīraṃ); Dhp-a iii.213 (id.); Snp-a 36 Vism 390; Pv-a 137. -sālā the pair of Sal willows in between of which the Buddha passed away Vv-a 165; Pv-a 212.

2. (adj. or m.) a twin, twin child Mvu 6 Mvu 9 (yamake duve puttaṃ ca dhītaraṃ janesi), 37 (soḷasakkhattuṃ yamake duve duve putte janayi); Dhp-a i.353 (same, with vijāyi).

3. (nt.) a pair, couple Name of one of the Abhidhamma canonical books, also called Yamaka-ppakaraṇa; Tikp 8 ■ The Yamakasutta refers to the conversion of the bhikkhu Yamaka and is given at SN iii.109 sq.; mentioned at Vism 479 & Vb-a 32. The phrase; yamakato sammasana at Vism 626 may mean “in pairs” (like kalāpato “in a bundle” ibid.), or may refer to the Yamaka-sutta with its discussion of anicca, dukkha, anatta.

fr. yama3

Yamataṃ

at SN i.14 (sa vītivatto yamataṃ sumedho) we should read (with Mrs. Rh. D.’s emendation K.S. p. 320) as yaṃ mataṃ (Cy.: maññanaṃ; trsl. “he rich in wisdom hath escaped beyond conceits and deemings of the errant mind”).

Yamati

to restrain, suppress, to become tranquil; only in stanza Dhp 6 = Th i.275 = Ja iii.488 as 1st pl. med yamāmase in imper. sense: “pare ca na vijānanti mayaṃ ettha yamāmase,” which is expld both at Dhp-a i.65, Th 1 A, & Ja iii.489 in connection with yama,2 viz. “yamāmase: uparamāma nassāma satataṃ samitaṃ maccu-santikaṃ gacchāmā ti na jānanti,” i.e. let us go continually into the presence of death. A little further at Dhp-a i.66 the expln of it is “bhaṇḍ’ ādīnaṃ vuddhiyā vāyamāmā ti na vijānanti.” The meaning is “to control oneself,” cp. saṃyamāmase SN i.209. Leop. v. Schroeder however trsls. “Und mancher Mann bedenket nicht: wir alle müssen sterben hier” (Worte der Wahrheit, p. 2.) ■ yameyyātha at SN i.217 is wrongly separated from the preceding vā which ought to be read as vāyameyyātha (so K.S. i.281).

yam, given in meaning “uparame” i.e. cessation, quieting at Dhtp 226 & Dhtm 322, at the latter with additional “nāse.” On etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. redimio and emo: cp. yanta.

Yamala

a pair Abhp 628yamalī occurs in BSk. only as a kind of dress, at Divy 276; Avs i.265.

fr. yama3

Yava

corn (in general), barley (in particular) Vin iv.264; SN iv.220; AN iv.169.

-karaṇa the preparation of corn AN iv.169. -kalāpī (or ˚inī) a sheaf of barley SN iv.201. -kāraṇḍava chaff of corn (or barley) AN iv.169. -kummāsa barley-gruel Vv-a 62. -khetta corn-field Vin iv.47, Vin iv.266; Vv-a 294 -dūsin spoiling the corn AN iv.169. -majjhaka lying in the midst of a corn-field, in pācīna˚ of the c ■ f. on the E. side (+ dakkhiṇa˚ S.; pacchima˚ W.; uttara˚ N.) names of 4 market-places near Mithilā Ja vi.330. -sūka the awn or beard of corn (barley) AN i.8; SN v.10, SN v.48.

Vedic yava, corn; see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 239. Cp. Gr. ζεά spelt; Lith. javaī corn; Oir. eorna barley.

Yavaka

(nt.) in cpd. sāli˚; (whatever there is of) rice & corn (i.e. rice-and cornfields C.) Ja iv.172. Cp. yāvaka.

yava + collect. ending ˚ka

Yavasa

(nt.) grass, hay, fodder Ja i.338.

fr. yava; Vedic yavasa

Yasavant

(adj.) famous, having renown AN ii.64 (dīghāyu + ).

cp. Vedic yaśasvat

Yasassin

(adj.) glorious, famous, renowned, having all endowments or comforts of life (as expld at Nd ii.530: yasappatta, sakkata, lābhī etc.) DN i.48 (ñāta + ) AN ii.34; Snp 179, Snp 298, Snp 343, Snp 1117; Pv i.41; iii.117; iii.35iii.108; Vv 159 (= kittimant parivāravant Vv-a 73) DN-a i.143; Pv-a 10; Sdhp 420 ■ f. yasassinī shining resplendent Ja v.64.

Vedic yaśasvin

Yasassimant

(adj.) splendid, glorious, full of splendour Ja v.63 (pāvako yasassimā = teja-sampattiyā yassassinīhi accīhi yutto C.).

double adj. ending; yasas + vin + mant

Yaso & Yasa

(nt.) glory, fame, repute success, high position. On term as used with ref. to the brahmin see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 128, 129. The prevailing idea of Dhammapāla is that yaso consists of a great retinue, & company of servants, followers etc. This idea is already to be found at DN i.118 = DN i.126 where y. is founded on parisā (cp. DN-a i.143 on DN i.48; DN-a i.298: yasasā ti āṇā-ṭhapana-samatthatāya). See e.g. Vv-a 122 (yaso = parivāra); Pv-a 137 (yasasā mahati parivāra-sampattiyā); cp. Ja i.134 (rājā mahantena yasena uppanaṃ gacchati) ■ DN i.137 (as quality of a king); iii.260, 286; Ja iv.275 sq. (dibba y. as one of the 10 qualities of greatness, viz. divine duration of life, complexion, happiness, fame, power, and the 5 sense-objects rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba The same 10 are found at Pv ii.958, 59); AN i.15; AN ii.32 AN ii.66, AN ii.188; AN iii.31, AN iii.47 sq.; AN iv.95, AN iv.195 sq.; Dhp 24, Dhp 303 (+ bhoga); Thag 554; Nd i.147; Pv iii.35 (= dev’ iddhi Pv-a 189); Vv 291; Ja i.134; Ja vi.468; Mil 291 (bhoga + ) Vism 393; Sdhp 306, Sdhp 518yasaṃ deti to give credit Ja i.180. mahā-yaso great fame Ja i.46 (v. 266), cp yas-agga the highest (of) fame Ja i.51, where coupled with lābh-agga the greatest gain. The latter combn is stereotype in the Niddesa (see e.g. Nd ii.55), where the 4 worldly ideals are given in sequence lābha, yaso pasaṃsā, sukha ■ With kitti we find yaso at Snp 817 (see defn & exegesis at Nd;1 147) ■ Opp. ayasa DN iii.260, DN iii.286; AN ii.188; AN iv.157 sq.

-dāyika giving (or a giver of) repute Ja vi.285. -mada pride of fame Vb-a 467. -mahatta greatness of fame Vism 233. -lābha the gain of fame Ja iii.516 (+ dhanalābha).

Vedic yaśaḥ (nt.). The word follows the ; declension, but preserves & favours the instr; yasasā after the ; decl. (like mano, ceto etc,), e.g. at Ja i.134 ■ In the nom. & acc. sg. both forms; yaso yasa(ṃ); occur; in cpds. the form yasa˚; is the usual yaso as masc. is found at Snp 438

Yahiṃ

(adv.) where, wherever Mvu 15, Mvu 209 (corresp. to yattha in v. 210).

after kuhiṃ

Yāga

1. a; (brahmanic) sacrifice, known otherwise as mahāyāga (or pl ˚yāgā), and consisting of the 4: assamedha, purisamedha sammāpāsa, vāja-peyya. Thus mentioned at SN i.76 & Snp 303.

2. In; Buddhistic sense: gift alms-giving, charity; expense or expenditure of giving (almost syn. with cāga) AN i.91 (here given in line with dāna & cāga, with distinction of; āmisa˚ & dhamma˚; i.e. the material sacrifice, as under 1, and the spiritual sacrifice or help); with the same contrast of ā˚ & dh. at DN iii.155; Iti 98, Iti 102; Ja v.57, Ja v.65; Dhp-a i.27Ja iv.66 (sahassena yāgaṃ yajanto); Mil 21 (dhamma˚) Vv-a 155; Pv-a 135 (mahā˚-saññita yañña), 136 (mahā˚)- suyiṭṭha yāga sampadā “well-given is the perfection of charity” Thag-a 40 (Ap. v. 7) = 230 (id.).

-piṇḍa the sacrificial oblation consisting in a ball of meat or flour (cp. piṇḍa-pitṛ-yajña) Ja vi.522 (with v.l. yāgu˚).

fr. yaj, *Sk. yāga, cp. yañña & yaja

Yāgin

(adj.) (-˚) sacrificing, giving, spending SN i.19 = Ja iv.66 (sahassa˚ giving the worth of a thousand pieces).

fr. yāga

Yāgu

(f.) rice-gruel, rice-milk (to drink). See Vin. Texts ii.89. Vin i.46 = Vin ii.223 (sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaṃ dhovitvā yāgu upanametabbā; yāguṃ pītassa udakaṃ datvā… ) 51 (id.), 61 (id.), 84, 210 (Bhagavato udara-vāt-ābādho tekaṭulāya yāguyā dhuva-yāguṃ dātuṃ; i.e. a constant supply of rice-gruel), 339 (na mayaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ yāgupāne nisīdissāma); iv.311; AN iii.250 (ānisaṃsā: 5 good qualities: it is good for hunger, for thirst, allays wind, cleans the bladder, helps to digest any undigested food); Ja i.186; Ja ii.128 (for drink) Pv-a 12, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 274 ■ Often combd (and eaten) with cakes (khajjaka) & other soft food (bhojja), e.g. ; yāgukhajjaka Ja i.270; Ja iii.20; Dhp-a iv.20; Mvu 14, Mvu 55 (˚khajja -bhojja ); 36, 100 (+ khajja -bhojja ).

-pāna a drink of rice-milk Vin i.84. -piṇḍa see yāga˚. -bhājaka one who distributes the rice-gruel Vin ii.176 (pañcah’ angehi samannāgataṃ; together with cīvarabhājaka, phala-bhājaka & khajja-bhājaka) iv.38 (yāgu˚, phala˚, khajja˚), 155 (id.); AN iii.275.

cp. Vedic yavāgū; on form see Geiger, P.Gr. § 274

Yāca

(nt.) anything asked for, donation, alms, begging Ja iii.353; Ja v.233, Ja v.234.

-yoga (y. + *yogga; perhaps yāja˚ the original. The variant yājayoga is old & well established: cp. Vism 224) accessible to begging, one ready to comply with another’s request, devoted to liberality, open-handed Freq. in ster. phrase mutta-cāga payata-pāṇī vossaggarata yāca-yoga dāna-saṃvibhāga-rata to denote great love of liberality, e.g. at AN i.226; AN ii.66; AN iii.313. See also AN iii.53, AN iii.313 = Vism 223, Vism 224 (where expld as follows: yaṃ yaṃ pare yācanti tassa tassa dānato yācanayogo ti attho; yājayogo ti pi pāṭho; yājana-sankhātena yājena yutto ti attho); AN iv.6, AN iv.266 sq., 271, 284 v.331, 336; Snp p.87 (cp. expln Snp-a 414: “yācituṃ yutto, yo hi yācake disvā bhakuṭiṃ katvā pharusavacan’ ādīni bhanati, so na yācayogo hoti” etc.) Snp 487, Snp 488, Snp 489, Snp 509; Ja iii.307 (expld in C. as “yaṃ yaṃ āgantukā yācanti tassa tassa yutto anucchaviko bhavitvā, sabbaṃ tehi yācita-yācitaṃ dadamāno ti attho”); iv.274 (“yācitabba-yuttaka” C.); vi.98 (= yācana-yuttaka or yañña-yuttaka; “ubhayath’ âpi dāyakass’ ev’ etaṃ nāma” C.); Mil 215, Mil 225 ■ The form yājayoga at Snp 1046 (expld at Nd ii.531 as “yāje yutta”); and mentioned at Vism 224 (see above). On diff. meaning of yācayoga see Kern, Toev. s. v with unidentified ref. Cp. also Mpt. 140, 4.

fr. yāc

Yācaka

(adj. n.) requesting, one who begs, a recipient of alms, a beggar Ja iii.353; Pv ii.938; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 102 (= yācanaka); Sdhp 324, Sdhp 331. Freq. in combn with similar terms of wayfaring people in phrase samaṇa-brāhmaṇa-kapaṇ iddhika-vaṇibbaka-yācakā e.g. at DN i.137; Iti 64. See single terms ■ yācaka at Snp 618 (as Fick, Soc.Gliederung 144 quotes yācaka) is to be read yājaka.

fr. yāca, cp. Epic & later Sk. yācaka

Yācati

to beg, ask for, entreat Vin iv.129 (pabbajjaṃ) Snp 566, Snp 980, Snp 983; Ja iii.49, Ja iii.353; Ja v.233, Ja v.404 ■ aor. 3rd pl. yāciṃsu Pv-a 13, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 42; ayācisuṃ Mvu 33, Mvu 76 (v.l. ayācayuṃ) ■ inf. yācituṃ Pv-a 29, Pv-a 120 ■ ger. yāciya Snp 295; yācitvā MN i.365; yācitvāna Mvu 17, Mvu 58. pp. yācita.

Vedic yācati; yāc, with which cp. Lat. jocus (dial. juca “prayer”); Ohg. jehan to confess, etc.: see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v. jocus ■ Dhtp (38) only expls yāca yācane

Yācana

(dt.) begging, asking, entreaty Ja iii.353; Snp-a 161 (inghā ti yācan’ atthe nipāto) 551 (id.); Pv-a 113 (= sādhuka).

-jīvāna living by begging Ja iii.353.

fr. yāc

Yācanaka

= yācaka AN iii.136 (ati˚); Pv ii.76; 916; 946; Ja iii.49; DN-a i.298.

cp. BSk. yācanaka Divy 470, Divy 585

Yācanā

(f.) = yācana; Ja iii.354 = Mil 230; Ja v.233, Ja v.404.

Yācita

begged, entreated, asked (for) AN iii.33; Dhp 224; Ja iii.307; Pv-a 39 ■ Cp. yācitaka.

pp. of yācati

Yācitaka

(adj.) asked, begged, borrowed MN i.365 (˚ṃ bhogaṃ) Ja iv.358 = Ja vi.127 (˚ṃ yānaṃ and ˚ṃ dhanaṃ, alluding to MN i.365–⁠366), with expln Ja iv.358: “yaṃ parena dinnattā labbhati taṃ yācita-sadisam eva hoti.”-(nt.) anything borrowed, borrowed goods: yācitak’ ūpamā kāmā (in app’ assādā kāmā passage) “the pleasures of the senses are like borrowed goods” Vin ii.25 = MN i.130; AN iii.97 = Thig 490 = Nd ii.71 (correct yācitan’); expld in detail at MN i.365 ■ See also Dhp-a i.403 (ye y. gahetvā na paṭidenti); Thag-a 288 (kāmā = yācitaka-bhaṇḍasadisā tāvakālik’ aṭṭhena).

yācita + diminutive (disparaging) ending ˚ka

Yāja

sacrificing, giving alms, liberality (felt as synonymous with; cāga, thus influenced by tyaj, cp. Sk. tyājana): see yācayoga ■ Nd ii.531 (yāye yutta); Vism 224.

fr. yaj; cp. yāja & yājeti

Yājaka

(adj.) sacrificing, one who sacrifices, a priest Snp 312, Snp 313 (= yanna-yājino janā Snp-a 324), 618 (of a purohita; v.l. BB yācaka).

fr. yaj in its Caus. form yājeti

Yājana

(nt) = yāja; Vism 224: see yācayoga.

Yājin

(adj.) sacrificing Snp-a 324 (yañña˚).

fr. yāja

Yājetar

one who superintends a sacrifice or causes it to be performed DN i.143.

n. ag. to yājeti

Yājeti

to cause to sacrifice, to make a priest give an offering (to the gods or otherwise) Ja vi.211, Ja vi.215; ppr. yājento MN i.404; Pot. 2nd sg. yājeyya Ja iii.515; Ja iii.3rd pl. yājeyyuṃ Ja vi.215 (aññaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ) also yājayeyyuṃ Ja vi.211 ■ ger. yājetvā DN i.143.

Caus. I. of yajati

Yāta

going, gone, proceeded; habit, custom; only in cpd. yāt’ānuyāyin going on according to what (or as it) has gone, i.e. following old habits Ja vi.309 Ja vi.310; expld by C. as “pubba-kārinā yātassa puggalassa anuyāyī, paṭhamaṃ karonto yāti nāma pacchā karonto anuyāyati.” The usual Sk. phrase is gat-ânugatika Cp. yātrā, yānikata.

pp. of yāti

Yāti

to go, go on to proceed, to go away ■ pres. 1st yāmi Pv ii.88 (= gacchāmi Pv-a 107), Mvu 10, Mvu 3; Mvu 2nd yāsi Ja i.291 Mvu 10, Mvu 2 (kuhiṃ yāsi?); 3rd yāti Snp 720 (tuṇhī y mahodadhi); Dhp 29, Dhp 179, Dhp 294, Dhp 295; Ja vi.311; Mvu 5 Mvu 47; Dhp-a i.18; Dhp-a i.1st pl. yāma Mvu 6, Mvu 12 (kiṃ na y. v.l. kiṃ nu y.); 2nd yātha = imper.; 3rd yanti Snp 179 Snp 578, Snp 714; Dhp 126, Dhp 175, Dhp 225 (see also note s. v. yanti ) Pv ii.916 (= gacchanti Pv-a 120) ■ imper. 2nd sg yāhi Pv ii.16 (read yajāhi?); Mvu 13, Mvu 15; Mvu 3rd sg. yātu Mvu 29, Mvu 17; Mvu 2nd pl. yātha Mvu 14, Mvu 29; Dhp-a i.93. ppr. yanto Mvu 36, Mvu 60 (pacchā y. walking behind gen. yantassa Mvu 22, Mvu 57 (assavegena y.) ■ inf yātave Snp 834 ■ Another formation fr. is yāyati (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 138), in an intensive meaning of “to drive, to move on quickly or by special means, e.g. in phrase yānena yāyati to drive in a carriage Vin i.191 (Pot. yāyeyya); ii.276; Snp 654 (ppr.: rathass āṇī va yāyato) 418 (ger.: yānabhūmiṃ yāyitvā yānā oruyha); Ja vi.125. As “march” at Ja vi.449. In special meaning “to drive,” i.e. “to be driven or affected by” in expln of the ending of ppr. med kāma yamāne Snp 767 (or kāma-yāna) at Nd i.4, viz. “taṇhāya yāyati niyyati vuyhati saṃhariyati.” Cp. yāna as ending ■ pp. yāta. Caus. yapeti & yāpeti; (q.v.). See also anupari˚, ā˚, upa˚, uy˚, pa˚ (aor. pāyāsi) paccuy˚ pari˚; and anuyāyati.

Vedic yāti, or , which represents Idg *i̯ā, an amplified as in eti (q.v.). Cp. Lat. janua door the Np. Janus (= January); Lith. jóti to ride, Mir. āth ford ■ The Dhtp 368 expls more in appld meaning as “papuṇane,” cp. Dhtm 596: pāpuṇe

Yātrā

(f.) 1. travel, going on, proceeding, good habit (like yāta; cp. yātrā = anuvṛtti Halāyudha 5, 33; SN i.33; SN i.16 = SN i.63 (trslnK.S., perhaps wrongly “egress”: it is more a question of going on through life!). Perhaps to be classed under foll. meaning as well.

2. going on, livelihood, support of life, maintenance in stock phrase occurring at many places of the Canon, viz. “purāṇaṃ vedanaṃ paṭihankhāmi, navañ ca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati etc.” where Dhs-a 404 explains yātrā by yāpanā, as may be inferred also from context. Thus at MN i.10 (where Neumann translates: “ein Fortkommen haben, i.e. progress), 355; SN iv.104; AN ii.40; AN iii.388; Nd i.496 Nd ii.540 (correct devanaṃ into vedanaṃ!); Pp 25; Dhs 1348; Mil 367: all passages identical. The whole passage is expld in detail at Vism 31 sq. where yātrā is given with “cira-kāla-gamana-sankhātā yātrā, Bdhgh. thus taking it as “keeping going,” or “continued subsistence” (longevity trsḷn) ■ In one other passage yātrā is conjectured for sātrā, viz. at Snp-a 322 in reading y ■ yāga for sātrā yāga, where meaning y might be taken as “customary.” The ed. compares Sk. yātsattra, a certain ceremony.

fr. , Class. Sk. yātrā, a n. ag. formation like nettī, meaning something like “vehicle,” that which keeps going

Yāthāva

(adj.) sufficient (lit “just as much”; i.e. such as it is), sufficiently founded logical, consistent, exact, definite, true Nd ii.275 (where tatha is expld by taccha, bhūta, yāthāva, aviparīta) Dhs-a 248 (where micchā-diṭṭhi is expld as incorrect or illogical view ■ yāthāvato (abl.) exactly, truly consistently DN-a i.65; Thag-a 256; Vv-a 232. See also yathāvato ■ The nearest synonyms of yāthāva are aviparīta (i.e. definite) and yathābhūtaṃ. See also yathāva and yathāvaka.

-nāma having the name of exactitude Pv-a 231 (+ aviparīta-nāma). -māna pride of sufficiency or consistency Vb-a 487 sq. (and a˚). -lakkhaṇa possessing the characteristic of definiteness or logic Mil 171 Ne 27 (where avijjā is called “sabba dhammayāthāva-asampaṭivedha-lakkhaṇā”). -vacana exact logical or true speech Mil 214 (taccha-vacana, yāthāvav, aviparīta-v.). -sarasa logical and with its essential (sa + rasa) properties Vism 588, Vism 639.

see yathāva. It is a combn of a guṇader. fr. yathā and an adj ■ der. of ˚vant

Yādicchakaṃ

at Vv-a 341 read as yadicchakaṃ (see ya˚).

Yādisa

(adj.) which like, what like, whichever, how much; in neg. sentence any, whatever little ■ Pv. ii.119 (= yāva mahanto Pv-a 77) ■ Often combd with kīdisa in meaning “any one, this or that, whoever,” e.g. Vv 5014 (= yo vā so vā pacura-jano ti attho Vv-a 213). As adj.: yādisi (sic! = Sk. yādṛśī) -kīdisā jīvikā (no livelihood, whatever little) Ja vi.584 (v.728; Trenckner, Mil p.423 gives v. 732!), expld by C as “yā vā sā vā, lāmakā ti attho” yādisaṃ kīdisaṃ dānaṃ a gift of whatever kind Mil 278 So also with tādisa: yādisā vā tādisā vā (viz. kāmā of whichever kind AN iii.5.

Vedic yādṛś & yādṛsa, yad + dṛśa

Yādisaka

= yādisa; in correlation (generalising sense) yādisaka-tādisaka whatsoever… such, any whatsoever AN iv.308; SN v.96.

Yāna

(nt.) 1. going, proceeding Ja vi.415 (+ ayāna, opposed to ṭhāna).

2. means of motion, carriage, vehicle Different kinds of carriages are enumd at Nd i.145 (on Snp 816) with hatthi˚; (elephant-), go˚; (cow-), aja˚ (goat-), meṇḍaka˚; (ram-), oṭṭha˚; (camel-?), khara˚ (donkey-). Cp. Mil 276yāna is one of the requisites (carriage or other means of locomotion) of the bhikkhu & as such included in the deyya-dhamma or 14 gifts (see yañña & deyya-dh.). Thus mentioned with; anna pāna vattha etc. at SN i.94; AN ii.85; Pp 51 ■ Cp. the defn & application of the term yāna as given below under yāna-sannidhi ■ See e.g. the foll. passages Vin i.191 (bhikkhū yānena yāyanti… na bhikkhave yānena yāyitabbaṃ; yo yāyeyya etc.: here a “carriage is expressly forbidden to the bhikkhu!), 231 (Ambapālī bhadrāni-bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṃ yānaṃ abhirūhitvā… ), 242 (same phrase with Meṇḍaka gahapati); DN i.7, DN i.89, DN i.106; MN i.366 (yānaṃ poroseyyaṃ pavara-maṇi-kuṇḍalaṃ, where vv.ll. on p. 561 read voropeyya and oropeyya, which Neumann (unwarrantedly) adopts in his trsln: Mittl. Sammlung2 1921 ii.666; the C. accepts reading poroseyya with expln “puris -anucchavikaṃ yānaṃ”); Dhp 323 (= hatthiyānādīni Dhp-a iv.6); Ja iii.525 sq.; Ja v.59; Ja vi.223 (= ratha) Kv 599 (Erāvaṇo hatthināgo sahassa-yuttaṃ dibbaṃ yānaṃ; trsld as “the wondrous elephant E., the thousand-wise yoked celestial mount.” trsl. p. 347 (lit vehicle) Pv iii.228 (= ratha or vayha etc. Pv-a 186) Pv-a 113iddhi-yāna carriage of magic power Mil 276; deva˚; godly carriage Mil 276; applied to the 8 fold Aryan Path at Snp 139 (= devalokaṃ yāpetuṃ samatthatā… aṭṭha-samāpatti-yānaṃ Snp-a 184). Similarly of the Path: magg’ aṭṭhangika-yāna (-yāyinī) Thig 389 (= aṭṭhangika-magga-sankhāta ariya-yāna Thag-a 257); and brahma-yāna dhamma-yāna “the very best & excellent carriage” as Ep. of magga SN v.5, cp. Ja iv.100 Cp. the later terms mahā and hīna- yāna. See also yānikata.

-ugghata shaking or jolting of the carriage Vin ii.276; Dhp-a iii.283. -gata having ascended the carriage DN i.126. -puṭosā (˚puṭoḷī) provision bag on a carriage (provision for the journey?) Vism 328 (so read for paṭṭoli). -bhūmi carriage-ground, i.e. the road as far as accessible to a carriage DN i.89; Snp 418. -sannidhi storing up of carriages or means of locomotion DN i.6 (with expln at DN-a i.82 as follows: yānaṃ nāma vayhaṃ ratho sakaṭaṃ sandamānikā patankī ti. Na pan’ etaṃ pabbajitassa yānaṃ, upāhanā yānaṃ pana); Snp 924 (= anna-pāna-vattha-yāna-sannidhi Nd i.372). -sukha pleasures of riding and driving Kv 209; cp. Kvu trsl. 127.

fr. , as in yāti. Cp. Vedic yāna and Lat. Janus

Yānaka

(nt.) a (small) cart, carriage, waggon, vehicle Ja iii.49 (˚ṃ pūretvā, or a hunter’s cart); iv.45; Dhp-a i.325 (sukha˚), 391 (pakati˚, an ordinary waggon) -˚ṃ pājeti to drive a cart Ja ii.112, Ja ii.143; Ja iii.51.

-upatthambha(na) waggon-prop Kp-a 44 (˚ni v.l. see Appendix to Index Pj.); Vb-a 234 (˚nika; illustrating the shape of the teeth). Yanika & Yaniya;

fr. yāna

Yānika & Yāniya

(adj.) (-˚) 1. (lit.) leading to, conducive to, as ˚yāniya in deva˚ magga DN i.215, Brahma˚ magga the way leading to the Brahma-world DN i.220.

2. (in appld meaning, cp. yānikata) ˚yānika one who has become used to, whose habit it is…, in vipassanā˚ & samatha˚ at Vism 588.;

fr. yāna

Yānikata

made a habit of, indulged in, acquired, mastered (cp. expln Pts i.172 “yattha yattha ākankhati tattha tattha vasippatto hoti balappatto etc.”). The expression is to be compared with yatānuyāgin & yātrā, similarly to which it is used only in one stock phrase. It comes very near yātrā in meaning “that which keeps one going,” i.e. an acquired & thoroughly mastered habit, an “altera natura.” It is not quite to the point when Dial ii.110 (following Childers?) translate as “to use as a vehicle ■ Occurring with identical phraseology, viz. bahulīkata yāni-kata vatthu-kata anuṭṭhita paricita susamāraddha in application to the 4 iddhipādā at DN ii.103; AN iv.309; SN v.260; Mil 140; to mettā at MN iii.97; SN i.116; SN ii.264; SN iv.200; SN v.259; AN v.342; Ja ii.61; Mil 198. Expld at Pts i.172, cp. ii.122, 130.

yāna + kata, with i for a in compn with kṛ; perhaps also in analogy with bahulī-kata

Yānin

(adj.) one who drives in a carriage Ja iii.525 = Ja iv.223 (where read yānī va for yān iva). At the latter passage the C. somewhat obscurely expls as “sappi-tela-yānena gacchanto viya”; at iii.526 the expln is simply “yānena gacchanto viya.”

fr. yāna

Yāpana

(& yapana) (nt.) keeping going, sustenance, feeding, nourishment existence, living. Esp. in one standing comb;n respecting the feeding and keeping of the body “ kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya etc.” (for the maintenance of the body) in yātrā passage: see yātrā 2; in which it is expld at Vism 32 by “pavattiyā avicched’ atthaṃ cira-kāla-ṭṭhit’ atthaṃ” i.e. for the preservation of life ■ Further at Ja i.66 (alam me ettakaṃ yāpanāya) v.387 (thokaṃ mama yāpana-mattaṃ eva); Dhp-a iv.210 (yāpana-mattaṃ dhanaṃ); Pv-a 28 ■ Used more freq together with shortened form yapana; in standard phrase vutti pālana, yapana yāpana cāra (cp. yapeti at Vism 145; Dhs-a 149, Dhs-a 167. Or similarly as f. with spelling yapanā & yāpanā: yapanā yāpanā iriyanā vattanā pālanā at Dhs 19, Dhs 82, Dhs 295, Dhs 380, Dhs 441, Dhs 716. At Dhs-a 404 yāpanā is used as syName of yātrā.

fr. yāpeti. Cp. Epic & Class. Sk. yāpana

Yāpanīya

(adj.) fit or sufficient for supporting one’s life Vin i.59, Vin i.212, Vin i.253 ■ Cp. BSk yāpanīyatara a more healthy state Divy 110.

grd. formation fr. yāpeti

Yāpeti

(& yapeti) 1. (lit.)-(a) in caus.intensive as well as intrs. sense; in the latter also with short ă; as yapeti and then combd with yāpeti, in stock phrase defining carati “to go,” “to be” (or viharati with synonyms iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti at Nd ii.237; Vb 252; Dhs-a 167. Besides singly (yapeti at Dhs-a 149 ■ (b) to cause to go, to make someone go (to), to bring to, lead to (acc.) Ja vi.458 (sasenāvāhanaṃ yāpesi); Snp-a 184 (devalokaṃ yāpetuṃ samattha fit to bring one to the d-world) ■ (c) to get on, move to be active Dhp-a i.10 (sarīre yāpente); iv.17 (iriyāpathena).

2. (fig.) to keep going (both trs. & intrs.;) to keep up, esp. to keep oneself going or alive, to live by (instr.) [cp. BSk. yāpayati Divy 93, Divy 150, Divy 196, Divy 292 Divy 293, Divy 471, Divy 488, Avs i.209] DN i.166 (ekissā dattiyā on only one alms); Pp 56; Ja ii.204; Ja iii.67; Ja iv.125 Ja vi.532 (uñchena); Pv i.57 (ito dinnena yāpenti petā) i.117; iii.28 (tava dinnena yāpessanti kurūrino); Pv-a 27, Pv-a 29 (= attabhāvaṃ yāpeti = upajīvati).

Caus. of yāti

Yāpya

(adj.) 1. (lit.) fit for movement or locomotion: in ˚yāna sedan-chair, palanquin Abhp. 373.

2. (fig.) concerning the preservation of life, vital, in ˚rogin one who suffers from a vital disease lit. a disease concerning the upkeep of the body Vism 33 (trslnPath of Purity 39: “patient of long-suffering, from a different point of view, viz. of time only, like Bdhgh.).

shortened grd ■ formation for yāpanīya. *Sk. yāpya in slightly diff. meaning

Yāma

1. restraint, only as cpd. cātu-yāma 4-fold restraint DN i.57; DN iii.48; SN i.66; MN i.377; Vism 416. Cp. Dial. i.751.

2. a watch of the night. There are 3 watches given as paṭhama, majjhima & pacchima; (first, middle & last) Nd;1 377 sq.; or purima, m. & pacchima; Nd ii.631 (under sadā) ■ AN i.114; AN iv.168; Dhp 157 (one of the 3; interpreted as the 3 vayas at Dhp-a iii.138); Ja i.243 (tīsu yāmesu ekasmiṃ yāme); Mvu 21, Mvu 33; Pv-a 217 Pv-a 280.

3. (usually pl. Yāmā devā) one who belongs to Yama or the ruler of the Underworld; a subject of Yama the realm of Yama ■ pl. inhabitants of Yamaloka AN i.210 (yāmā devā); Snp-a 244 (˚bhavana the abode of the Y.); Kp-a 166 (Yāmato yāva Akaniṭṭhaṃ from the Underworld to the Highest Heaven); Vism 225 (Yāmā); Vb-a 519 (Yāmā); Vv-a 246 (id.); Thag-a 169 (Y. devā).

-kālika of a restricted time, for a (relatively) short period (lit.) only for one watch of the night, but longer than yāva-kālika temporary. It is one of the three regulation-terms for specified food, viz. y ■ k., sattāhakālika & yāvajīvika;, or short period, of a week’s duration and life-long food Vin iv.83, Vin iv.86, Vin iv.176, Vin iv.311; to which is added yāva-kālika, temporary at Vin i.251 (where mutual relations of the 4 are discussed). -gaṇḍika(ṃ) koṭṭeti to beat the block of restraint (?), i.e. exercise self-control (?) (or does it belong to yāma 3?) Kp-a 233.

fr. yam in both meanings of yamati & yama;3

Yāyati

see yāti.

Yāyin

(adj.) (-˚) going, going on to; in yāna-yāyinī (f.) Thig 389 (maggaṭṭhangika˚ having ascended the carriage of the 8-fold Path; expld by “ariya-yāyena nibbāna-puraṃ yāyinī upagatā” Thag-a 257).

fr. , see yāti

Yāva

(adv.). 1 (as prep.) up to (a point), as far as, how far so far that (cp. tāva I), both temporal and local, used either with absolute form of noun or adj. (base), or nom., or abl. or acc.-(a) absolute: y. sahassa up to 1000; Pv-a 21; y. sattama up to the seventh DN i.238. (b) nom.: y. deva-bhava-sampatti up to the attainment of a deva existence Pv-a 167; y. satta divasā up to 7 days, as long as 7 days Pv-a 31. (c) with abl.: y brahmalokā up to the highest heaven AN iii.17; y mekhalā down to her girdle Pv-a 46; yāva āyu-pariyosānā up to the end of life Pv-a 200; y. ajjadivasā till the present day Mvu 32, Mvu 23; y. kapp’ âvasānā up to the end of the world Vism 688 (where Snp-a 5 in same passage reads acc. ˚âvasānaṃ); y. kāla-ppavedanā Ja i.118 + Dhp-a i.248; y. mukhasmā up to the brim Mil 238; yāva bhumm’ âvalambare hang down to the ground Pv ii.102 ■ (d) with acc. y. Bodhimaṇḍaṃ as far as the Bodhimaṇḍa Mvu 30, Mvu 88; y. tatiyakaṃ for the 3rd time (i.e. the last time; ascending scale! DN i.95; y. tatiyaṃ id. Vin iv.236 samanubhāsitabba) Snp 1116; Ja iv.126 ■ Freq. in phrase yāva jīvaṃ (see under cpds.). Sattamāsaṃ cha pañca cattāro ti vatvā yāva temāsaṃ yāciṃsu “after having said 7, 6, 5, 4, months they begged down to 3 months” Pv-a 20 ■ With startingpoint local: pādatalato… yāvakesaggaṃ from the sole of the foot to the tip of the hair (“from tip to toe”) Dhp-a i.70; (in modal sense:) paṭhavī-kasiṇato paṭṭhāya yāva odāta-kasiṇaṃ “from the one to the other” Vism 374. Similarly in correlation yāva-tāva (see tāva 1.) as far-so far, until-so long: y. rājā āgacchati tāva ubho ramissāma Ja iv.190; heṭṭhā pi yāva Avīci upari yāva Akaniṭṭha-bhavanaṃ, tāva addasa Vism 392; yāva naṃ ānemi tāva idh’ eva tiṭṭha Dhp-a iii.194.

2. (as adv.) how, how much, to which or what extent, as great or as much (as) (cp. tāva ii.2) usually in combn yāva mahā (mahantaṃ), e.g. yāva mahantaṃ how big Pv-a 77 (= yādisaṃ of Pv ii.119) Vv-a 325 = Dhp-a i.29 (yāva mahantaṃ). Also in other combns, like yāva dukkhā nirayā how (or as) many painful purgatories Snp 678; yāva dukkhā tiracchānayoni MN iii.169; yāva pāpo ayaṃ Devadatto alakkhiko… “how very wicked is this D.” Vin ii.196 Further in combn with attha(ṃ), and eva, in which cases the final d is restored, or may be regarded as euphonic Thus yāvad-atthaṃ as far as need be, as much as you like (with imper.) Pv iv.57 (khādassu y.); UbhA 504 (= yattakaṃ icchati tattakaṃ); Ja v.338; Pv-a 217 (gaṇhāhi) Cp. Vin iii.37 (yāvadatthaṃ katvā “pleasing herself”)-As adj. sufficient, plenty MN i.12 (paripuṇṇa… suhita y.); Pv-a 24 (= pahūta). yāvad-eva [cp. the similar tāva-d ■ eva] “as much as it is (in extent)” i.e. with limitation as far as is necessary, up to (i.e. not further or more than), ever so much, as much as you like, at least; (then:) as far as, in short, altogether indeed ■ The same idea as our defn is conveyed by Bdhgh’s at Snp-a 503 (on Snp p.140) “paricched âvadhāraṇa-vacanaṃ,” and at Dhp-a ii.73 “avadhiparicchedana”: giving a limitation, or saying up to the limit. SN ii.276; Snp p.140; Dhp 72; and in stock phrase “n’eva davāya… yāvad eva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā…” (“in short”); see passages under yātrā. The expln of yāvad eva in this phrase as given at Dhs-a 403 runs: “āhār’ āharaṇe payojanassa pariccheda-niyamadassanaṃ,” of which the trslnExpos. ii.512 is “so as to suffice signifies the limit of the result of taking food. Ṉeumann’s trsln at MN i.10 is “but only.”-Note. In the stock phrase of the Buddha’s refusal to die until his teaching has been fully proclaimed (Mahāparinibbānasutta) “among gods and men” DN ii.106 (= 114, 219 iii.122; AN iv.311) “yāva-deva-manussehi suppakāsitaṃ” (trslnDial. ii.113: “until, in a word, it shall have been well proclaimed among men”) we are inclined to consider the reading yāva deva˚; as original and better than yāvad-eva, although Rhys Davids (Dial. ii.236) is in favour of the latter being the original. Cf K.S. ii.75 n. The phrase seems to require yāva only as continuation of the preceding yāva’s; moreover the spirit of the message is for the whole of the worlds Cp. BSk. yāvad-deva manusyebhaḥ Divy 201. It is not a restriction or special definition of meaning at this passage. But may it not be taken as a summing up “in short”? It is left doubtful. If it is = yāva, then we should expect yāva na, as in the preceding sentence if it is yāvad eva the meaning “not more than made known by men” seems out of place; in this case the meaning “at least” is preferable. A similar case of insertion of a euphonic consonant m (or is it the a-stem nt in ˚ṃ instead of ˚t as in yāvat?) we find in the phrase yāvam pi at Ja v.508 (with Pot. tiṭṭheyya; see below 3 C. expln by yattakaṃ kālaṃ) ■ The form yāvade (for yāvad eva) also occurs (like tāvade for tāvad eva) at MN ii.207 ■ For yad-idaṃ we find yāvañ c’ idaṃ at AN iii.34; MN iii.169 ■ The latter form (yāvaṃ, as above Ja v.508) is better to be grouped directly under yāvant where more & similar cases are given.

3. (as; conj. so long as, whilst, until (cp. tāva ii.3, 4; iii.); either with Fut. or Pot. or Prohibitive. E.g. ‘S i.202 (ahu pure dhammapadesu chando y. virāgena samāgamimha trsln “until I met with that Pure thing and Holy”) Ja vi.266 (y. āmantaye); Pv-a 4 (tāva ayyo āgametu yāva ayaṃ puriso… pānīyaṃ pivissati or: “you shall wait please, until he shall drink”). Neg. yāvana not until, unless, as long as not DN ii.106 (na paribbāyissāmi… yāva… na bhavissati); SN i.47 (y na gādhaṃ labhati); Dhp 69 (yattakaṃ kālaṃ na… Dhp-a ii.50).

-kālika (cp. tāva ii.1) “as far as the time or occasion goes,” occasional, temporary, at Vin i.251 in foll context (cp. yāmakālika): “kappati… yāvakālikena yāmakālikaṃ na kappati, kappati yāvakālikena sattāha kālikaṃ na k. etc. with foll. yāvajīvikaṃ & the same with kappati yāma-kālikena, sattāha-kālikenana k.; kappati satt˚, yāvajīv, na k.” The reply of the Buddha is: yāvakālikena yāmakālikaṃ tadahu paṭiggahitaṃ kāle kappati vikāle na kappati (same with sattāhakālikaṃ & yāvajīvikaṃ); followed by yāmakālikena… sattāhakālikaṃ & yāvajīvikaṃ; sattāhakālikena… jāvajīvikaṃ.” -jivaṃ (adv.) for the length of one’s life, life-long, all one’s life, for life (-time) Vin i.80 Vin ii.197; Vin iii.23; Iti 78; Dhp 64, Dhp 284; Vism 94; Dhp-a i.45; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 110 (= satataṃ). Cp. BSk. yāvajīva-sukhya Avs ii.37. -tajjanī (-vinīta) led only as long as kept under a threat AN i.285 (one of the 3 parisā’s; so read with v.l. for T. yāvatajjhā˚). -tatiyaka “as much as 3 times,” name of the last 4 Sanghādisesa offences because before the punishment is inflicted warning must have been given 3 times: see passage of Vin iii.186 under yāva t-ihaṃ ■ tihaṃ (read as yāvat-ihaṃ, the latter = aha2 day) as many days as… ; in foll. passage: uddiṭṭhā… terasa sanghādisesā dhammā, nava patham-āpattikā cattāro yāvatatiyakā, yesaṃ bhikkhu aññataraṃ vā aññataraṃ vā āpajjitvā yāvatihaṃ jānaṃ paṭicchādeti tāvatihaṃ tena bhikkhunā akāmā parivatthabbaṃ (for as many days as he knowingly conceals his sin, for so many days… ), parivuttha-parivāsena bhikkhunā uttariṃ chārattaṃ bhikkhumānattāya paṭipajjitabbaṃ Vin iii.186.

Vedic yāvat as nt. of yāvant used as adv. in meanings 1 & 2. The final t is lost in Pāli, but restored as; d in certain combinations: see below 2 ■ Cp. tāva kīva;

Yāvaka

a dish prepared of barley Ja vi.373 (= yavataṇḍula-bhatta C.).

= yavaka

Yāvataka

(adj.) as much as, as many as, as far as, whatever; usually in correl with tāvataka e.g. Vin i.83 (yāvataka… t.); DN ii.18 (y. kāyo t. vyāmo); Nd ii.2353 (y ˚ṃ ñeyyaṃ t ˚ṃ ñāṇaṃ); or similarly MN i.397 (y. kathā-sallāpo… sabbaṃ taṃ… ); Pv-a 103 (yāvatakā = yāvanto). f. yāvatikā: yāvatikā gati tāvatikaṃ gantvā AN i.112 y. nāgassa bhūmi as far as there was ground for the elephant DN i.50; similarly: y. yānassa bh. as far as the carriage-road DN i.89, DN i.106, DN i.108; y. ñāṇassa bh Ne 25.

fr. yāva, as tāvataka fr. tāva

Yāvatā

(indecl.) lokasmiṃ yad idam arahanto “as far as the abodes of beings, as far as heaven, these are the highest these are the best, I mean the Arahants.” SN iii.84 yāvatā dhammā sankhatā vā asankhatā vā virāgo… aggam akkhāyati, yad-idaṃ mada-nimmadano… AN ii.34 = Iti 88; “of all the things definite or indefinite passionlessness deserves the highest praise, I mean the disintoxication of pride etc.” The expln at Vism 293 takes yāvatā (grammatically incorrectly) as n. pl. yattakā ■ yāvatā jagato gati as far as (like as) the course of the world Iti 120.

abl. of yāvant in adv. use cp. tāvatā ) as far as, like as, in comparison with, regarding, because Dhp 258 (na tena paṇḍito hoti y. bahu bhāsati = yattakena kāraṇena Dhp-a iii.383), 259, 266 (similarly, C. yattakena); Snp 759 (yāvat’ atthī ti vuccati; expld at Snp-a 509 as “yāvatā ete cha ārammaṇā ʻatthīʼ ti vuccanti vacana-vyattayo veditabbo”); yāvatā ariyaṃ paramaṃ sīlaṃ, nâhaṃ tattha attano sama-samaṃ samanupassāmi kuto bhiyyo “compared with this sīla I do not see anyone quite equal to myself, much less greater.” DN i.74 yāvatā ariyaṃ āyatanaṃ yavatā vanippatho idaṃ agga-nagaraṃ bhavissati Pātaliputtaṃ puṭa-bhedanaṃ Vin i.229 = Ud 88 = DN ii.87 (concerning a most splendid site, and a condition for trade, this Pāṭ will be the greatest town; trsln Dial. as far as Aryan people resort, as far as merchants travel… ). yāvatā satt’ āvāsā yāvatā bhavaggaṃ ete aggā ete saṭṭhā [read seṭṭhā

Yāvant

(pron. rel.) 1. yāvant as adj.: as many (as) Dhp 337 (hāvant’ ettha samāgatā as many as are assembled here); Ja v.72 (yāvanto uda-bindūni… tāvanto gaṇḍū jāyetha; C. on p. 74 expls by yattakāni; yāvatā pl. as many as Pv ii.116; yāvanto Pv ii.716 (= yāvatakā Pv-a 103); Ja v.370 (detha vatthāni… yavanto eva icchati as many as he wants).

2. yāvat (nt.) used adverbially. The examples and meanings given here are really to be combined with those given under yāva2 (yāvad˚). It is hardly possible to distinguish clearly between the 2 categories; the t may well have been reduced to d or been replaced by another sandhi consonant. However, the specific Pāli use of yāva (like tāva ) justifies a separate treatment of yāva in that form only ■ yāvat occurs only in combn with ca (where we may assume either a peculiar nt. form yāvaṃ: see yāva 2; or an assimilation of t to ñ before c ■ The form yāva mahantaṃ may originally have been a yāvaṃ m.) as yāvañ ca “and that,” “i.e.,” how much, however much, so great SN i.149 (passa yāvañ ca te idaṃ aparaddhaṃ: see how great a mistake you have made in this); Iti 91, Iti 92 (passa yāvañ ca ārakā santike: see how far and near). yāvañ c’ idaṃ stands for; yad-idaṃ (see ya˚ 4) in peculiar use of restriction at M. III.169; SN ii.178; AN iii.34.

3. The nt. form yāvat further occurs in foll. cpds.: ˚āyukaṃ (better as yāvat˚ than yāvatā˚) as long as life lasts, for a lifetime Mvu 3, Mvu 41; Vv-a 196 (as adj. ˚āyukā dibba-sampatti) Pv-a 66, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 133; ˚icchakaṃ as much as is desired, according to one’s wishes Pp 12, Pp 25; Vism 154 (here spelt yāvad -icchakaṃ); ˚ihaṃ see under yāva (cpds ■ instr. yavatā: see sep.

cp. Sk. yāvant; same formation as demonstr. pron. tāvant, of which the P. uses the adv. nt tāva (t) form more frequently than the adj. tāvant The only case so far ascertained where tāvant occurs as adj. is Ja v.72 (see below)

Yāvetadohi

at MN ii.47 is an obscure expression. The reading is established; otherwise one might think of a corrupted yāv(a) etad ahosī(pi) or yāva-d-ev’-ahosi “was it really so?” or: “did you really have that thought?” Neumann, Mittl. Sammlung2 1921; ii.381 trsls “gar so sehr drängt es dich” (are you in such a hurry?), and proposes reading (on p. 686, note) yāv etado hi pi, leaving us wondering what etado might be-Could it be a distorted yāyetar (n. ag. of yāyeti Caus. )?

Yiṭṭha

med.: having sacrificed DN i.138 (mahā-yaññaṃ y. rājā)-pass.: sacrificed, (nt.) sacrifice DN i.55 (dinna, y huta); expld at DN-a i.165 by “ mahāyāgaVb 328 (id.); Ja i.83 (y. + huta); iv.19 (= yajita C.); v.49 vi.527 ■ duyyiṭṭha not properly sacrificed, a sacrifice not according to rites Ja vi.522. In specific Buddhistic sense “given, offered as alms, spent as liberal gift Vin i.36; Ja i.168 = AN ii.44; MN i.82. Dhp 108 (yaṃ kiñci yiṭṭhaṃ va hutaṃ va; Dhp-a ii.234 = yebhuyyena mangalakiriya-divasesu dinna-dānaṃ) ■ suyiṭṭha well given or spent AN ii.44; Thag-a 40; Vv 3426 (in both senses; Vv-a 155 expls “mahā-yāga-vasena yiṭṭhaṃ”).

pp. of yajati with a petrified sandhi y.; Vedic iṣṭa

Yidha

in mā yidha at Vin i.54 is to be read mā-y-idha, the y being an euphonic consonant (see y.).

Yuga

(nt.) 1. the yoke of a plough (usually) or a carriage Dhp-a i.24 (yugaṃ gīvaṃ bādhati presses on the neck); Pv-a 127 (ratha˚); Sdhp 468 (of a carriage) Also at Snp 834 in phrase dhonena yugaṃ samāgamā which Bdhgh. (Snp-a 542) expls as “dhuta-kilesena buddhena saddhiṃ yugaggāhaṃ samāpanno,” i.e. having attained mastery together with the pure Buddha. Neumann Sn trsln not exactly: “weil abgeschüttelt ist das Joch” (but dhona means “pure”). See also below ˚nangala.

2. (what is yoked or fits under one yoke) a pair, couple; appld to objects, as-˚: dussa˚; a pair of robes SN v.71.; Dhp-a iv.11; Pv-a 53; sāṭaka˚; id Ja i.8, Ja i.9; Pv-a 46; vattha˚; id. Ja iv.172tapassi˚; a pair of ascetics Vv 2210; dūta˚; a pair of messengers SN iv.194; sāvaka˚; of disciples DN ii.4; SN i.155; SN ii.191 SN v.164; in general: purisa˚; (cattāri p ■ yugāni) (4) pairs of men SN iv.272 sq. = Iti 88; in verse at Vv 4421 and 533 expld at Vism 219 as follows: yugaḷa-vasena paṭhamamagga-ṭṭho phala-ṭṭho ti idam ekaṃ yugaḷan ti evaṃ cattāri purisa -yugaḷāni honti. Practically the same as “aṭṭha purisa-puggalā.” Referring to “pairs of sins (so the C.) in a somewhat doubtful passage at Ja i.374 sa mangala-dosa-vītivatto yuga-yog’ âdhigato na jātum eti; where C. expls yugā as kilesā mentioned in pairs (like kodho ca upanāho, or makkho ca paḷāso), and yoga as the 4 yojanas or yogas (oghas?), viz. kāma˚ bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ ■ Also used like an adj. num in meaning “two,” e.g. yugaṃ vā nāvaṃ two boats Dpvs i.76.

3. (connected by descent) generation, an age DN i.113 (yāva sattamā pitāmahā-yugā “back through seven generations.” Cp. DN-a i.281: āyuppamāṇa); Kp-a 141 (id.); Ja i.345 (purisa˚). There are also 5 ages (or stages) in the [life of the] sāsana (see Brethren, p. 339): vimutti, samādhi, sīla, suta dāna.

-anta (-vāta) (storm at) the end of an age (of men or the world), whirlwind Ja i.26. -ādhāna putting the yoke on, harnessing MN i.446. -ggāha “holding the yoke,” i.e. control, dominance, domineering, imperiousness; used as syn. for palāsa at Vb 357 = Pp 19 (so read for yuddha˚), expld by sama-dhura-ggahaṇaṃ “taking the leadership altogether” at Vb-a 492. See further Nd i.177; Vv-a 71 (yugaggāha-lakkhaṇo paḷāso); Snp-a 542; Dhp-a iii.57 (˚kathā = sārambhakathā). -˚ṃ ganhāti to take the lead, to play the usurper or lord Ja iii.259 (C. for T. palāsin); Dhp-a iii.346 -ggāhin trying to outdo somebody else, domineering imperious Vv-a 140. -cchidda the hole of a yoke Thig 500 (in famous simile of blind turtle). -naṅgala yoke and plough (so taken by Bdhgh. at Snp-a 135) Snp 77; SN i.172 (“plough fitted with yoke” Mrs. Rh.D.) -nandha (with v.l. ˚naddha, e.g. at Pts ii.92 sq.; Kp-a 27 in T.) putting a yoke on, yoking together; as adj. congruous harmonious; as nt. congruity, association common cause Pts ii.98 = Vism 682; Pts ii.92 sq. (˚vagga & ˚kathā); Kp-a 27 (nt.); Vism 149 (˚dhammā things fitting under one yoke, integral parts, constituents) -mattaṃ (adv.) “only the distance of a plough,” i.e. only a little (viz. the most necessary) distance ahead with expressions of sight: pekkhati Snp 410 (“no more than a fathom’s length” Rh.D. in Early Buddhism 32) pekkhin Mil 398; ˚dassāvin Vism 19 (okkhitta-cakkhu + ) pekkhamāna Snp-a 116 (as expln of okkhittacakkhu). -sāṭaka (= s ■ yuga) a pair of robes, two robes Dpvs vi.82. Yugala & Yugala;

fr. yuj; Vedic yuga (to which also yoga) = Gr. ζυγόν; Lat. jugum = Goth. juk; Ohg. juh; E. yoke Lith. jungas

Yugala & Yugaḷa

(nt.) a pair couple Ja i.12 (yugaḷa-yugaḷa-bhūtā in pairs), 500 (bāhu˚); vi.270 (thana˚ the 2 breasts); Vism 219; Vb-a 51 (yugaḷato jointly, in pairs); the six “pairs of adaptabilities” or “words,” Yog. 18–⁠23, Mystic 30 sq. cp. Dhs 40 sq. Also used as adj. (like yuga) in phrase yugalaṃ karoti to couple, join, unite Dpvs i.77; Vv-a 233.

Class. Sk. yugala; in relation to yuga the same as Lat. jugulum (“yoke-bone”) to jugum. Cp. also Gr. ζεύγλη yoking strap

Yugalaka

(nt.) a pair Tikp 66; Vb-a 73.

fr. yugala

Yuja

(adj.) (-˚) yoked or to be yoked applicable, to be studied, only in cpd. duyyuja hard to be mastered, difficult Ja v.368 (atthe yuñjati duyyuje he engages in a difficult matter; C. reads duyyuñja ).

either a direct root-derivation fr. yuj, corresponding to Sk. yuj (or yuk, cp. Lat. con-jux “conjugal,” Gr. ὁμό ζυς companion, σύ ζυς = conjux Goth. ga-juka companion); or a simplified form of the grd. *yujya → *yujja → yuja

Yujjha

(adj.) to be fought; neg. ; not to be fought, invincible MN ii.24 (so read for ayojjha).

grd. of yujjhati

Yujjhati

to fight, make war. Rare in older literature our refs. only from the Mahāvaṃsa; e.g. 22, 82 (fut yujjhissāma, with instr.: Damiḷehi); 25, 23 (aor ayujjhi); 25, 58 (ppr. yujjhamāna); 33, 41 (aor. yujjhi) To which add Dhp-a ii.154 (mallayuddhaṃ yujjhanto) iii.259 (Ajātasattunā saddhiṃ yujjhanto) ■ pp. yuddha -Caus. yodheti (q.v.).

cp. Vedic yudhyate, yudh, given in meaning “sampahāra” at Dhtp 415 ■ Etymologically to Idg *ieudh to shake, fr. which in var. meanings Lat. jubeo to command, juba horse’s mane; Gr. ὑσμίνη battle Lith. jundù, jùdra whirlwind; cp. also Av. yaošti agility

Yujjhana

(nt.) fighting, making war Ja iii.6, Ja iii.82.

fr. yujjhati

Yujjhāpana

(nt.) making somebody fight, inciting to war Mil 178.

fr. yujjhati Caus.

Yuñjati

(lit.) to yoke; (fig.) to join with (instr. or loc.), to engage in (loc.), to exert oneself, to endeavour. All our passages show the applied meaning, while the lit. meaning is only found in the Caus. yojeti ■ Often expld by and coupled with the syn. ghaṭati & vāyamati;, e.g. at Ja iv.131 Ja v.369; Dhp-a iv.137Forms: pres. yuñjati Dhp 382; Ja v.369; Ja v.2nd pl. yuñjatha Thig 346 (kāmesu; = niyojetha Thag-a 241); ppr. yuñjanto Ja iv.131 (kammaṭṭhāne) imper. yuñja SN i.52 (sāsane); Thag-a 12; med. imper yuñjassu Thig 5 ■ Pass. yujjati (in grammar or logic is constructed or applied, fits (in), is meant Kp-a 168; Snp-a 148, Snp-a 403, Snp-a 456 ■ Caus. I. yojeti & II.; yojāpeti (q.v.) ■ pp. yutta.

Vedic yunakti, yuñjati & yuñkte,; yuj; cp. Gr. ζεύγνυμι, Lat, jungo to unite, put together (pp junctus = Sk. yukta, cp. E. junct-ion); Lith. jùngin The Idg. root *i̯eug is an enlarged form of *i̯eṷe “to unite,” as in Sk. yanti, yuvati, pp. yuta; f. yuti, to which also Lat. jūs = P. yūsa. The Dhtp gives several (lit. & fig.) meanings of; yuj, viz. “yoge” (No. 378) “samādhimhi” (399), “saṃgamane” (550)

Yuta

fastened to (loc.), attracted by, bent on, engaged in DN i.57 (sabba-vārī˚); Snp 842 (pesuṇeyye; Nd i.233 reads yutta in exegesis, do. at p. 234, with further expln āyutta, payutta etc.), 853 (atimāne); Dāvs v.18 (dhiti˚)-Note. yuta is doubtful in phrase tejasā-yuta in Niraya passage at AN i.142 = MN iii.183 = Nd i.405 = Nd ii.304iii = Ja v.266. The more likely reading is either tejas’ āyuta (so BSk. M.Vastu 9), or tejasā yutta (so Nd ii.& Pv-a 52), i.e. endowed with, furnished with full of heat ■ We find a similar confusion between; uyyuta & uyyutta;.

pp. of yu, yauti to fasten but Dhtp 338: “missane”

Yutta

1. (lit.) yoked, harnessed (to loc.) Pv i.114 (catubbhi yutta ratha); Mvu 35, Mvu 42 (goṇā rathe yattā); Dhp-a i.24 (dhure yuttā balivaddā)

2. coupled; connected with; (appld) devoted to applied to, given to, engaged in (-˚, instr. or loc.) Snp 820 (methune), 863 (macchiriya˚), 1144 (tena, cp. Nd ii.532); Iti 93 (Buddha-sāsane); Ja vi.206 (yoga˚).

3. furnished; fixed, prepared, in order, ready Snp 442 (Māra = uyyutta Snp-a 392); Pv-a 53.

4. able, fit (to or for = inf.), suitable, sufficient Snp 826 (cp. Nd i.164) Ja v.219; DN-a i.141 (dassituṃ yutta = dassanīya); Vv-a 191 (= alaṃ); Pv-a 74.

5. proper, right Pv-a 159

6. due to (-˚, with a grd., apparently superfluous Ja iii.208 (āsankitabba˚); cp. yuttaka.

7. (nt.) conjunction i.e. of the moon with one or other constellation Vin ii.217ayutta not fit, not right, improper Pv-a 6 (perhaps delete), 64 ■ suyutta well fit, right proper, opp. duyutta unbefitting, in phrase suyuttaṃ duyuttaṃ ācikkhati Ja i.296 (here perhaps for dur-utta?) du˚ also lit. “badly fixed, not in proper condition, in a bad state” at Ja iv.245 (of a gate).

-kāra acting properly Pv-a 66. -kārin acting rightly Mil 49. -paṭibhāṇa knowledge of fitness Pp 42 (cp PugA 223). -payutta intent on etc. Pv-a 150. -rūpa one who is able or fit (to = inf.) Ja i.64. -vāha justified Vv-a 15.

pp. of yuñjati; Vedic yukta, cp. Lat. junctus, Gr. ζευκτός, Lith. jùnktas

Yuttaka

(adj.) (-˚) proper, fit (for); nt. what is proper, fitness: dhamma-yuttakaṃ katheti to speak righteous speech Ja iv.356 ■ Usually combd with a grd., seemingly pleonastically (like yutta), e.g. kātabba˚ what had to be done Pv-a 81; Dhp-a i.13 (as kattabba˚) āpucchitabba˚; fit to be asked Dhp-a i.6.

fr. yutta

Yutti

“fitting,” i.e. 1. application, use Mil 3 (opamma˚).

2. fitness vāda˚, KVA 37; in instr. yuttiyā in accordance with Mvu 10, Mvu 66 (vacana˚); Sdhp 340 (sutti˚); and abl yuttito Sdhp 505.

3. (logical) fitness, right construction correctness of meaning; one of the 16 categories (hārā), appld to the exposition of texts, enumd in the 1st section of the Netti; e.g. at Ne 1

3, 103; Kp-a 18; Snp-a 551, Snp-a 552. Thus abl. yuttito by way of correctness or fitness (contrasted to suttato ) Vb-a 173 = Vism 562; and yutti-vasena by means of correctness (of meaning) Snp-a 103 (contrasted to anussava ).

4. trick device, practice Ja vi.215.

-kata combined with; (nt.) union, alloy Vv-a 13.

cp. Vedic yukti connection, fr. yuj

Yuddha

(nt.) war, battle, fight DN i.6 (daṇḍa˚ fighting with sticks or weapons); Ja iii.541 (id.) Snp 442 (dat. yuddhāya); Ja vi.222; Mil 245 (kilesa˚ as pp.: one who fights sin); Mvu 10, Mvu 45 (˚atthaṃ for the sake of fighting); 10, 69 (yuddhāya in order to fight) 25, 52 (yuddhāy’ āgata); 32, 12 (yuddhaṃ yujjhati) 32, 13 (maccu˚ fight with death); 33, 42; Dhp-a ii.154 (malla˚ fist-fight) ■ The form yudhāya at Snp 831 is to be taken as (archaic) dat. of Vedic yudh (f.), used in sense of an inf. & equal to yuddhāya. Nd;1 172 expls as “yuddh’ atthāya.”

-kāla time for the battle Mvu 10, Mvu 63. -ṭṭha eṅgaged in war SN i.100 (so read for ˚ttha). -maṇḍala fightingring arena Ja iv.81; Vism 190; Vb-a 356 (in comparison).

orig. pp. of yujjhati; cp. Vedic yuddha (pp.) and yudh (f.) the fight

Yuddhaka

a fighter, in malla˚; fist-fighter, pugilist Ja iv.81.

fr. yuddha, for the usual yodha (ka)

Yudhikā

(f.) Name of a tree Ja v.422 (for T. yodhi, which appears as yodhikā in C. reading). The legitimate reading is yūthikā (q.v.), as is also given in vv.ll.

doubtful

Yuvan

a youth-nom. sg.; yuvā DN i.80 = yobbanena samannāgata DN-a i.223; Snp 420; Dhp 280 (= paṭhama-yobbane ṭhita Dhp-a iii.409); Pv iii.71 (= taruṇa Pv-a 205) ■ Cp yava, yuvin & yobbana;.

Vedic yuvan; cp. Av. yavan = Lat. juvenis, Lith. jáunas young; Lat. juvencus “calf”; juventus youth Goth. junda, Ohg. jugund & jung, E. young ■ The n ■ stem is the usual, but later Pāli shows also decl after a-stem, e.g. gen. yuvassa Mvu 18, Mvu 28

Yuvin

(adj.-n.) young Ja iv.106, Ja iv.222.

= yuvan with diff-adj. ending

Yūtha

(nt.) a flock, herd of animals Snp 53 (of elephants); Ja i.170 (monkeys), 280 (id.); Snp-a 322 (go˚, of oxen).

-pa the leader of a herd Thig 437 (elephants). -pati same Ja iii.174 (elephant); Dhp-a i.81 (id.).

Vedic yūtha

Yūthikā

(f.) a kind of jasmine, Jasminum auriculatum Ja vi.537; Mil 338. So is also to be read at Ja v.420 (for yodhi) & 422 (yodhikā yudhikā). See also; yodhikā.

cp. later Sk. yūthikā

Yūpa

1. a sacrificial post DN i.141; AN iv.41; Ja iv.302; Ja vi.211; Mil 21 (dhamma˚); Snp-a 321, Snp-a 322; DN-a i.294.

2. a pāsāda, or palace Thag 163 = Ja ii.334.

-ussāpana the erection of the sacr. post Dhs-a 145 (cp. Mil 21).

Vedic yūpa

Yūsa

1. juice Vin i.206 (akaṭa˚ natural juice); Mvu 28, Mvu 26; Vv-a 185 (badara˚ of the jujube); Vism 195 (seda sweaty fluid).

2. soup, broth. Four kinds of broths are enumd at MN i.245, viz. mugga˚; bean soup, kulattha˚ of vetch (also at Vism 256), kaḷāya˚; (chick-) pea soup hareṇuka˚; pea soup; Mil 63 (rañño sūdo yūsaṃ vā rasaṃ vā kareyya).

Vedic yūṣan, later Sk. yūṣa; fr. base Idg. *i̯ūs, cp. Lat. jūs soup, Gr. ζύμη yeast, ferment, ζωμός soup Obulg. jucha = Ger. jauche manure; Swedish ōst cheese an enlargement of base *i̯eu to mix, as in Sk. yu to mix: see yuta, to which further *i̯eṷe, as in yuñjati.

Yebhuyya

(adj.) sattā Ābhassarasaṃvaṭṭanikā honti; expld by half allegorical, half popular etym. at DN-a i.110 as follows: “ye upari Brahma-lokesu vā Āruppesu vā nibbattanti, tadavasese sandhāya vuttaṃ”); DN ii.139: yebhuyyena dasasu loka-dhātusu devatā sannipatitā (as a rule) Snp p.107 (= bahukāni Snp-a 451); Mil 6 (y. Himavantam eva gacchanti: usually); DN-a i.280 (ordinarily) Vv-a 234 (occasionally), 246 (pihita-dvāram eva hoti usually); Pv-a 2 (Sattari tattha tattha viharante y tāya tāya atth’ uppattiyā), 46 (tassā kesa-sobhaṃ disvā taruṇa-janā y. tattha paṭibaddha-cittā adesuṃ invariably) ■ na yebhuyyena not as a rule, usually not (at all): nâpi y. ruditena kāci attha-siddhi Pv-a 63.

ye = yad in Māgadhī form; thus yad bhūya = yad bhiyya “what is more or most(ly)” abundant, numerous, most. Not found as adj. by itself, except in phrase yebhuyya-vasena mostly, as a rule Thag-a 51 and Pv-a 136, which is identical with the usual instr. yebhuyyena occurring as adv. “as according to most,” i.e. (1) almost all, altogether, practically (as in our phrase “practically dead”), mostly DN i.105 (addasā dvattiṃsa lakkhanāṇi y. ṭhapetvā dve: all except two) = 109; Vin iii.29 sq.; Ja i.246 (gāmako y andha-bāla-manussehi yeva ussanno the village was peopled by mostly foolish folk); v.335 (y. asīti-mahātherā, altogether) ■ (2) as it happens (or happened) usually, occasionally, as a rule, ordinarily DN i.17 (saṃvaṭṭamāne loke y. [as a rule

Yebhuyyasikā

(f.) lit. “according to the majority,” i.e. a vote of majority of the Chapter; name of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathas, or means of settling a dispute ■ Vin ii.84 (anujānāmi bh. adhikaraṇaṃ yebhuyyasikāya vūpasametuṃ), 93 (vivād’ âdhikaraṇaṃ dvīhi samathehi sammati: sammukhā-vinayena ca yebhuyyasịkāya ca). As one of the 7 methods of settling a dispute mentioned at Vin iv.207 = Vin iv.351 (the seven are: sammukhā-vinaya, sati-vinaya, amūḷha˚, paṭiññā, yebhuyyasikā tassa-pāpiyyasikā, tīṇ’ avatthāraka). Expld in detail at MN ii.247: if the bhikkhus cannot settle a dispute in their abode, they have to go to a place where there are more bh., in order to come to a vote by majority. Cp. DN iii.254 (the seven enumd); AN i.99 AN iv.144.

formation fr. yebhuyya like tassapāpiyya-sikā. Originally adj., with kiriyā to be understood

Yeva

(indecl.) emphatic particle meaning “even, just, also”; occurring most frequently (for eva) after palatal sounds, as : Snp 580 (pekkhataṃ yeva), 822 (vivekaṃ); Dhp-a ii.20 (saddhiṃ); Pv-a 3 (tasmiṃ), 4 (imasmiṃ), 13 (tumhākaṃ) ■ further after o: Pv-a 39 (apanīto yeva) ■ after ā: Snp 1004 (manasā yeva) ■ after i: SN ii.206 (vuddhi yeva); Pv-a 11 (ahosi) ■ after e: Ja i.82 (vihāre yeva; pubbaṇhe y.); Vb-a 135 (na kevalaṃ ete yeva, aññe pi “not only these, but also others”). Cp. Mvu 22, Mvu 56; Vv-a 222; Pv-a 47. Yevapana(ka)

= eva with accrudescent y from Sandhi. On form and relation between eva & yeva cp. Geiger; P.Gr. § 66, 1. See also eva 2 ■ The same form in Prākrit: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 336

Yevāpana(ka)

(adj.) corresponding reciprocal, respective, in corresponding proportion, as far as concerned; lit. “whatever else.” The expression is peculiar to exegetical (logical) literature on the Abhidhamma. See e.g. Dhs-a 152 (yevāpanā, pl. and ˚kā); Vism 468, Vism 271 sq.; Vb-a 63, Vb-a 70 sq.; cp. Dhs trsl.1 p. 5 and introd. p. 56 ■ Note. The expression occurring as phrase shows ye as nom. pl., e.g. Dhs 1 Dhs 58, Dhs 151–⁠161 & passim: ye vā pana tasmiṃ samaye aññe pi dhammā; but cp. in § 1: yaṃ yaṃ vā pan’ ārabbha, in same sense.

not connected with yeva, but an adj. formation from phrase ye vā pana; ye here standing (as Māgadhism) for yaṃ: cp. yebhuyya

Yoga

lit. “yoking, or being yoked,” i.e. connection bond, means; fig. application, endeavour, device

1. yoke, yoking (rare?) Ja vi.206 (meant here the yoke of the churning-sticks; cp. Ja vi.209).

2 connection with (-˚), application to; (natural) relation (i.e. body, living connection), association; also conjunction (of stars). mānusaka yoga the relation to the world of men (the human body), opp. dibba yoga: SN i.35 = SN i.60; Snp 641; Dhp 417; expld at Dhp-a iv.225 as “ kāya. ” association with: DN iii.176; application: Vism 520 (+ uppāda). yogato (abl.) from being connected with by association with Pv-a 40 (bālya˚), 98 (sammappadhāna˚) ■ pubba˚; connection with a former body, one’s former action or life-history Ja v.476; Ja vi.480; Mil 2 See pubbe1aḍḍhayoga a “half-connected” building, i.e. a half-roofed monastery Vin i.239; Vism 34- nakkhatta˚; a conjunction of planets, peculiar constellation (in astrology) Ja i.82, Ja i.253 (dhana-vassāpanaka suitable for a shower of wealth); iii.98; Dhp-a i.174; Dhs-a 232 (in simile).

3. (fig.) bond, tie; attachment (to the world and its lusts), or what yokes to rebirth (Cpd. 1712). There are 4 yogas, which are identical with the 4 oghas viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ or the bonds of craving, existence, false views, and ignorance; enumd in detail at AN ii.10; DN iii.230, DN iii.276; Ja i.374; cp. Pts i.129 (catūhi yogehi yutto lokasannivāso catu-yoga-yojito); Vb-a 35. Mentioned or referred to at SN v.59; Dhs 1059 (ogha + , in defn of taṇhā), cp, Dhs trsln 308; Ne 31 (with ogha), 114 (id.); as sabba- (or sabbe) yogā at Thig 4; Thig 76; SN i.213; Dhp-a iii.233; severally at Iti 95 (bhava-yoga-yutta āgāmī hoti, + kāma˚); ogha + yoga: Pp 21 (avijjā˚) Vism 211, Vism 684; cp. also DN ii.274 (pāpima-yogāni the ties of the Evil one); Iti 80 (yogā pamocenti bahujanaṃ)

4. application, endeavour, undertaking, effort Dhp-a iii.233, Dhp-a iii.234 (= samma-ppadhāna). yogaṃ karoti to make an effort, to strive after (dat.) SN ii.131; AN ii.93 (āsavānaṃ khayāya y. karaṇīya); Mil 35. yogaṃ āpajjati to show (earnest) endeavour, to be active SN iii.11 sq.; Vb 356 (attanā) ■ dhamma˚; one who is devoted to the Dhamma AN iii.355; yutta˚; (bent on, i.e. earnest in endeavour Ja i.65; yāca˚; given to making offerings: see yāca.

5. pondering (over), concentration devotion MN i.472; Dhp 209 (= yoniso manasikāra Dhp-a iii.275), 282 (same expln at Dhp-a iii.421); Mil 3 Vb 324 (yoga-vihitesu kamm’ & sipp’-āyatanesu Vb-a 410 expls: y. vuccati paññā ■ perhaps better to above 4?).

6. (magic) power, influence, device scheme Ja vi.212 (yoga-yogena practice of spells etc = tāya tāya yuttiyā C.); Pv-a 117 (combd with manta ascribed to devas).

7. means, instrument, remedy Ja i.380 (vamana˚ an emetic); vi.74 (ekaṃ yogaṃ datvā but we better read bhesajjaṃ tassa datvā for vatvā and ekaṃ yogaṃ vatvā for datvā; taking yoga in meaning of “charm, incantation”); Mil 109 (yena yogena sattānaṃ guṇa-vaḍḍhi… tena hitaṃ upadahati).

-ātiga one who has conquered the yoke, i.e. bond of the body or rebirth Iti 61 (muni), 81 (id.). -ātigāmin ˚âtiga; AN ii.12 (same as sabba-yoga-visaṃyutta) -āvacara “one at home in endeavour,” or in spiritual (esp. jhāna-) exercises; one who practises “yoga” an earnest student. The term is peculiar to the Abhidhamma literature ■ Ja i.303, Ja i.394, Ja i.400; Ja iii.241 (saṃsārasāgaraṃ taranto y.); Pts ii.26; KvuA 32; Mil 33 sq., 43 366, 378 sq.; Vism 245 (as hunter) 246 (as begging bhikkhu), 375 (iddhi-study), 587, 637, 666, 708; Dhp-a ii.12 (padhānaṃ padahanto y.); iii.241 (˚bhikkhu) Dhs-a 187 (ādhikammika), 246 (˚kulayutta); Vb-a 115, Vb-a 220, Vb-a 228 (as bhikkhu on alms-round), 229 (as hunter), 258, 331; Kp-a 74; Snp-a 20, Snp-a 374. -kkhema [already Vedic yoga-kṣema exertion & rest, acquisition & possession] rest from work or exertion, or fig. in scholastic interpretation “peace from bondage,” i.e. perfect peace or “uttermost safety” (K.S. ii.132); a freq. epithet of nibbāna [same in BSk.: yogakṣema e.g. Divy 98, Divy 123, Divy 303, Divy 498] MN i.117 (˚kāma), 349, 357 (anuttara); SN i.173 (˚adhivāhana); ii.195 (anuttara) 226; iii.112 (˚kāma, neg.); iv.125; v.130 sq.; AN i.50 (anuttara); ii.40, 52 (a˚), 87, 247; iii.21, 294 sq., 353; DN iii.123, DN iii.125, DN iii.164 (˚kāma); Vin ii.205 = Iti 11 (˚ato dhaṃsati, whereas Vin ˚ā padhaṃsati); Iti 9, Iti 27 (abhabbo ˚ssa adhigamāya); Thig 6; Snp 79 (˚adhivāhana), 425; Dhp 23 (anuttara, cp. Dhp-a i.231); Pts i.39; Pts ii.81; Vb 247 (kulāni y-kh-kāmāni, which Vb-a 341 expls catūhi yogehi khemaṃ nibbhayaṃ icchanti); Thag-a 13-kkhemin finding one’s rest, peace, or salvation; emancipated free, an Arahant SN iii.13 (accanta˚); iv.85; AN ii.12; AN iv.310 (patta˚); v.326 (accanta˚); Dhp-a iii.233 Dhp-a iii.234 (= sabba-yoga-visaṃyutta); neg. ; not finding one’s salvation AN ii.52 (in verse) = Pts ii.80; Iti 50-ññu knowing the (right) means Mil 169 sq. -bahula strong in exertion AN iii.432. -yutta (Mārassa) one who is tied in the bonds (of Māra) AN ii.52 (so read for ˚gutta the verse also at Pts ii.80, Pts ii.81, and Iti 50). -vibhāga dividing (division) of the relation (in grammar: to yoga 2) Snp-a 266.

Vedic yoga, see etym. under yuga & yuñjati. Usually m.; pl. nt. yogāni occurs at DN ii.274 in meaning “bonds”

Yoganīya

(adj.) of the nature of trying, acting as a bond, fetter-ish Dhs 584; Dhs-a 49 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 301). The spelling is also yoganiya, cp oghaniya.

fr. yoga; grd. formation

Yogin

(adj.-n.) 1. (-˚) applying oneself (to), working (by means of), using Vism 70 (hattha˚ & patta˚ using the hand or the bowl but trsln p. 80: “hand-ascetic” & “bowl-ascetic”). 2. one who devotes himself to spiritual things, an earnest student, one who shows effort (in contemplation), a philosopher, wise man. The word does not occur in the four Nikāyas. In the older verses it is nearly synonymous with muni. The oldest ref. is Thag 947 (pubbake yogī “Saints of other days” Mrs Rh. D.). Freq. in Miln, e.g. pp. 2, 356 (yogi-jana) at pp. 366, 393, 404, 417, 418 in old verses. Combd with yogâvacara Mil 366, Mil 404 ■ Further passages are Ne 3, Ne 10, Ne 61; Vism 2, Vism 14, Vism 66, Vism 71 (in verse), 150, 320 373, 509, 620, 651, 696; Dhs-a 195, Dhs-a 327.

fr. yoga, cp. Class. Sk. yogin

Yogga1

(nt.) “what may be yoked,” i.e. 1. a coach, carriage, waggon (usually large & covered, drawn by bullocks) Ja vi.31 sq. (paṭicchanna), 368 (mahā˚) Dhp-a ii.151 (mahā˚ & paṭicchanna).

2. a draughtbullock ox Vv 84;8; Pv ii.936 (= ratha-yuga-vāhana Pv-a 127); Ja vi.221. yoggāni muñcati to unharness the oxen Pv-a 43, Pv-a 100.

Vedic yogya; a grd. formation fr. yoga in meaning of yoga 1

Yogga2

(nt. & adj.) 1. (nt.) a contrivance Ja iv.269 (yoggaṃ karoti, may be in meaning “training, practice” here: see yoggā) Vv-a 8 (gahaṇa˚).

2. (adj.) fit for (= yutta), adapted to, suitable; either-˚ or with inf.: Vv-a 291; Pv-a 25 (here spelt yogya), 135 (bhojana˚), 152 (kamma-vipāk ânubhavana˚), 154 (gamana˚ passable, v.l. yogya), 228 (anubhavana˚).

same as last, in meaning of yoga 7

Yoggā

(f.) training, practice Ja ii.165 (yoggaṃ karoti to practise); iv.269 (id.); Dhp-a i.52 (lakkha-yoggaṃ karoti to practise shooting) ■ adj. (-˚) katayogga well-practised, trained SN i.62, SN i.98 (neg.). Only at these passages, missing at the other daḷha-dhamma- passages e.g. at SN ii.266; MN i.82; AN ii.48.

-ācariya a groom, trainer SN iv.176 = MN i.124; MN iii.97 MN iii.222; Thag 1140; Ja i.505.

Vedic and Epic Sk. yogyā; same as yogga2, fr. yoga

Yojana

(nt.) 1. the yoke of a carriage Ja vi.38, Ja vi.42 (= ratha-yuga).

2. a measure of length as much as can be travelled with one yoke (of oxen) a distance of about 7 miles, which is given by Bdhgh as equal to 4 gāvutas (Dhp-a ii.13). It occurs in descending scale of yojana-tigāvuta-usabha at Dhp-a i.108. Dhp 60; Ja v.37 (yojana-yojana-vitthatā each a mile square); Snp-a 194. More favoured combns of yojana with numbers are the foll.: 1/2 (aḍḍha˚): DN-a i.35; Dhs-a 142.

3: Dhp-a ii.41.

4: Pv-a 113.

5: Vv-a 33

15: Dhp-a i.17; Ja i.315; Pv-a 154.

18: Ja i.81, Ja i.348

20: Dhp-a iv.112 (20 X 110, of a wilderness).

25; Vv-a 236.

45: Ja i.147, Ja i.348; Dhp-a i.367.

50: Vism 417.

100: DN i.117; Iti 91; Pv i.1014.

500: Ja i.204

1,000: Ja i.203 ■ Cp. yojanika.

Vedic yojana

Yojanā

(f.) (grammatical) construction; exegesis, interpretation; meaning Kp-a 156 Kp-a 218, Kp-a 243; Snp-a 20, Snp-a 90, Snp-a 122 sq., 131 sq., 148, 166, 177 248, 255, 313; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 69, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 139 (attha˚), and passim in Commentaries.

*Sk. yojanā, fr. yojeti

Yojanika

(adj.) a yojana in extent Ja i.92 (vihāra); Dpvs 17, 108 (ārāma); Dhp-a i.274 (maṇipallanka).

fr. yojana

Yojita

yoked, tied, bound Pts i.129 (catuyoga˚ fettered by the four bonds); Snp-a 137 (yottehi y.).

pp. of yojeti

Yojitaka

(adj.) connected with, mixed; neg. a˚ not mixed (with poison), unadulterated Ja i.269.

fr. yojita

Yojeti

1. to yoke, harness, tie, bind Pv ii.936 (vāhana, the draught-bullock); Mvu 35, Mvu 40 (yojayi aor.; v.l. for yojāpayi); Pv-a 74 (sindhave). 2. to furnish (with), combine, unite, mix, apply Ja i.252 (suraṃ), 269 (id.); Mvu 22, Mvu 4 (ambaṃ visena y. to poison a mango); 36, 71 (visaṃ phalesu poison the fruit). 3. to prepare, provide, set in order, arrange, fix, fit up Mvu 30, Mvu 39 (pāde upānāhi fitted the feet with slippers) dvāraṃ to put a door right, to fix it properly Ja i.201 iv. 245 (cp. yojāpeti).

4. to engage, incite, urge commission, put up to, admonish Mvu 17, Mvu 38 (manusse) 37, 9 (vihāraṃ nāsetuṃ y. incited to destroy the v.) Pv-a 69.

5. to construct, understand, interpret, take a meaning Snp-a 148 (yojetabba); Pv-a 98 (id.), 278 (id.) ■ Caus. II. yojāpeti to cause some one to yoke etc.: DN ii.95 (yānāni, to harness); Ja i.150 (dvāraṃ, to set right); Mvu 35, Mvu 40 (rathe, to harness) ■ Pass yojīyati to become yoked or harnessed Ja i.57 (nangalasahassaṃ y.) ■ pp. yojita.

Caus. of yuñjati

Yojjha

in ; MN ii.24 read yujjha (of yudh ).

Yotta

(nt.) the tie of the yoke of a plough or cart SN i.172 = Snp 77; SN iv.163 SN iv.282; Ja i.464; Ja ii.247 (camma˚); iv.82; v.45 (cammay ■ varatta), 47; Vism 269; Dhp-a i.205; Snp-a 137. As dhura-yotta at Ja i.192; Ja vi.253.

Vedic yoktra, cp. Lat. junctor, Gr. ζευκτ ̈ηρες yoke-straps; Epic Sk. yoktṛ one who yokes

Yottaka

(nt.) a tie, band, halter, rope Ja vi.252; Mil 53; Vism 254, Vism 255; Dhp-a iii.208.

yatta + ka

Yodha

a warrior, soldier, fighter, champion Vin i.73 (yodhā yuddh’ âbhinandino… pabbajjaṃ yāciṃsu); Ja i.180; Mil 293.

-ājīva one who lives by battle or war, a soldier SN iv.308 = AN iii.94; AN i.284; AN ii.170, AN ii.202; AN iii.89 sq. (five kinds); Snp 617, Snp 652; Pp 65, Pp 69. -hatthin a war elephant Dhp-a i.168.

cp. Vedic yodha; fr. yudh

Yodhi

= yodhikā Ja v.420.

Yodhikā

(f.) a special kind of jasmine Vv 354; Ja iv.440 (yoth˚), 442; v.422; Vv-a 162 (as thalaja and a tree).

a var. reading of yūthikā (q.v.)

Yodhin

a warrior; camma˚; a warrior in cuirass, a certain army grade DN i.51; AN iv.107.

= yodha

Yodheti

to attack, to fight against (acc.) Dhp 40 (yodhetha = pahareyya Dhp-a i.317) Ja v.183.

Caus. of yujjhati

Yoni

(f.) 1. the womb.

2. origin, way of birth, place of birth, realm of existence; nature, matrix There are four yonis or ways of being born or generation viz. aṇḍaja oviparous creation, jalābuja viviparous saṃsedaja moisture-sprung, opapātika spontaneous MN i.73; DN iii.230; Mil 146; Vism 552, Vism 557 sq.; cp Vb-a 203 sq ■ Freq. in foll. combns: tiracchāna˚; the class of animals, the brute creation AN i.37, AN i.60; AN v.269; Iti 92; Pv iv.111; Vism 103, Vism 427; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 166; nāga˚ birth among the Nāgas SN iii.240 sq. (in ref. to which the 4 kinds of birth, as mentioned above, are also applied) Vism 102 (niraya-nāga-yoni); pasu˚; = tiracchāna˚ Pv ii.1312; pisāca˚; world of the Pisācas SN i.209; peta˚ the realm of the Petas Pv-a 68 (cp. peta) ■ kamma˚ K. as origin AN iii.186 ■ yoni upaparikkhitabba (= kiṃjātikā etc.) SN iii.42ayoni unclean origin Thag 219

3. thoroughness, knowledge, insight Ne 40ayoni superficiality in thought SN i.203 (“muddled ways Mrs. Rh. D.) ■ yoniso (abl.) “down to its origin or foundation,” i.e. thoroughly, orderly, wisely, properly judiciously SN i.203 (“in ordered governance” K.S. i.259); DN i.118 (wisely); Iti 30 (āraddha āsavānaṃ khayāya); Pp 25; Vism 30, Vism 132, Vism 599; PpA 31. Opp ayoniso disorderly improperly Pp 21; Dhp-a i.327; Pv-a 113, Pv-a 278 ■ Esp. frequent in phrase yoniso manasikāra “fixing one’s attention with a purpose or thoroughly,” proper attention, “having thorough method in one’s thought” (K.S. i.259) Pts i.85 sq.; Iti 9; Ja i.116; Mil 32; Ne 8, Ne 40, Ne 50, Ne 127; Vism 132; Pv-a 63. See also manasikāra ■ Opp. ayoniso manasikāra disorderly or distracted attention DN iii.273; Vb-a 148 Thag-a 79. In BSk. the same phrase: yoniśo manasikāraḥ Divy 488; Avs i.122; Avs ii.112 (Speyer: “the right & true insight, as the object of consideration really is”). See further on term Dial. iii.218 (“systematized attention”); K.S. i.131; ii.6 (“radical grasp”).

-ja born from the womb Snp 620; Dhp 396. -pamukha principal sort of birth DN i.54; MN i.517.

Vedic yoni

Yobbana

(nf.) youth DN i.115; AN i.68; AN iii.5, AN iii.66, AN iii.103; Dhp 155 Dhp 156; Snp 98, Snp 110, Snp 218; Pv i.76; Dhp-a iii.409; Pv-a 3.

-mada pride of youth DN iii.220; AN i.146; AN iii.72 Vb-a 466.

R.

cp. late Vedic & Epic Sk. yauvana, fr. yuvan

R

-R-

the letter (or sound) r, used as euphonic consonant to avoid hiatus. The sandhi-r-originates from the final r of nouns in ˚ir & ˚ur of the Vedic period. In Pali it is felt as euphonic consonant only, like other sandhi consonants (y for instance) which in the older language were part of the noun itself. Thus r even where it is legitimate in a word may interchange with other sandhi-consonants in the same word, as we find punam-eva and puna-d-eva besides the original puna-r-eva (= Vedic punar eva). At Ja i.403 we read “punar āgata,” where the C. expls “puna āgata, ra-kāro sandhivasena vutto.” Similarly: Snp 81 (vutti-r-esā) 214 (thambho-r ■ iva), 625 = Dhp 401 (āragge-r-iva), 679 (ati-r-iva), 687 (sarada-r-iva), 1134 (haṃsa-r-iva) Vv 6422 (Vajir’ āvudho-r-iva); Pv ii.87 (puna-r-eva ii.116 (id.); Pv-a 77 (su-r-abhigandha). In the latter cause the r has no historical origin, as little as in the phrase dhir atthu (for *dhig-atthu) Snp 440; Ja i.59. Ramsi & Rasmi;

Raṃsi & Rasmi

a rein, a ray.

1. In meaning “rein only as rasmi, viz. at MN i.124; Dhp 222; Ja i.57; Ja iv.149

2. In meaning “ray” both raṃsi and rasmi: (a raṃsi (in poetry) Snp 1016 (vīta˚? perhaps pīta˚? See note in P.T.S. ed.); Vv 535 (pl. raṃsī = rasmiyo Vv-a 236); 6327 (sahassa˚ having a thousand rays; = suriya Vv-a 268); Sdhp 124. Also in cpd. raṃsi-jāla a blaze of rays Ja i.89; Pv-a 154; Vv-a 12 (˚sammujjala) 14 (id.), 166 (id.) ■ (b) rasmi (in prose, late) Dhp-a i.27 (˚ṃ vissajjesi); Dhs-a 13 (nīla-rasmiyo); Vv-a 125 (candima-suriya˚). Also in cpd. buddha-rasmi the ray of enlightenment, the halo around a Buddha, consisting of 6 colours (chabbaṇṇa) Ja i.444, Ja i.501 (˚rasmiyo vissajjento); Snp-a 132; Vv-a 207, Vv-a 234, Vv-a 323; Mhbv 6 15, 38.

Vedic raśmi. The form raṃsi is the proper Pali form, originating fr. raśmi through metathesis like amhi for asmi, tamhā for tasmā etc. Cp Geiger P.Gr. § 502. The form rasmi is a Sanskritism and later

Raṃsika

(adj.) having rays, radiant, in sahassa˚; having 1000 rays Vv 645 (= suriya-maṇḍala viya Vv-a 277).

raṃsi + ka

Raṃsimant

(adj.) having rays, radiant; n. sg. raṃsimā the sun Vv 812 (= suriya Vv-a 314).

fr. raṃsi

Rakkha

(adj.) (-˚) guarding or to be guarded ■ (a) act.: dhamma˚; guardian of righteousness or truth Mil 344 ■ (b) pass.: in cpd. dū˚; v.l. du

hard to guard Dhp-a i.295. ˚kathā, s. l. rukkha-˚ warding talk Thag-a 1, in Brethren, 185, cp. note 416.

fr. base rakkh

Rakkhaka

(adj. n.) 1. guarding, protecting, watching, taking care Pv-a 7; f. ˚ikā (dāsī) Dhp-a iv.103 (a servant watching the house).

2. observing, keeping Ja i.205 (sīla˚).

3. a cultivator Ja ii.110.

4. a sentry Ja i.332.

fr. rakkha

Rakkhati

1. to protect, shelter, save, preserve Snp 220; Ja iv.255 (maṃ rakkheyyātha); vi.589 (= pāleti); Pv ii.943 (dhanaṃ); Mil 166 (rukkhaṃ), 280 (attānaṃ rakkheyya save himself); Pv-a 7 ■ grd. rakkhiya to be protected Mvu 33, Mvu 45. Neg. arakkhiya & arakkheyya; (in meaning 3) see separately ■ Pass. ppr. rakkhiyamāna Ja i.140.

2. to observe, guard, take care of, control (with ref. to cittaṃ the heart, and sīlaṃ good character or morals) Iti 67 (sīlaṃ); Dhp-a i.295 (cittaṃ rakkha equivalent with cittaṃ dama), 397 (ācāraṃ); Ja iv.255 (vācaṃ); Vv-a 59 (sīlāni rakkhi); Pv-a 66 (sīlaṃ rakkhatha uposathaṃ karotha).

3. to keep (a) secret, to put away, to guard against (i.e. to keep away from Snp 702 (mano-padosaṃ rakkheyya); Mil 170 (vacīduccaritaṃ rakkheyya) ■ pp. rakkhita. See also parīpāleti & parirakkhati;.

Vedic raksati, rakṣ to Idg. *ark (cp. Lat. arceo etc.) in enlarged form *aleq = Gr. ἀλέςω to protect (Alexander!); ἀλκή strength; Ags. ealgian to protect Goth. alhs = Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also base *areq in P. aggala. The Dhtp 18 expls rakkh by “pālana”.

Rakkhana

(nt.) 1. keeping, protection, guarding Ne 41; Mvu 35, Mvu 72 (rahassa˚-atthāya so that he should keep the secret); Pv-a 7.

2. observance keeping Vv-a 71 (uposatha-sīla˚); Pv-a 102 (sīla˚), 210 (uposatha˚).

fr. rakkh

Rakkhanaka

(adj.) observing, keeping; one who observes Ja i.228 (pañca-sīla˚; so read for rakkhānaka).

fr. rakkhana

Rakkhasa

a kind of harmful (nocturnal) demon, usually making the water its haunt and devouring men Thag 931; Snp 310 (Asura˚) Ja i.127 (daka˚ = udaka˚), 170 (id.); vi.469 (id.); Dhp-a i.367 (˚pariggahita-pokkharaṇī); iii.74 (udaka˚); Sdhp 189, Sdhp 313, Sdhp 366 ■ f. rakkhasī Ja iii.147 (r. pajā); Mvu 12, Mvu 45 (rudda˚, coming out of the ocean).

cp. Vedic rakṣa, either fr. rakṣ to injure, or more likely fr. rakṣ to protect or ward off (see details at Macdonell, Vedic Mythology pp. 162

-164)

Rakkhā

(f.) shelter, protection, care AN ii.73 (+ parittā); Mvu 25, Mvu 3; Ja i.140 (bahūhi rakkhāhi rakkhiyamāna ); Pv-a 198 (˚ṃ saṃvidahati) Often in combn rakkhā + āvaraṇa (+ gutti) shelter defence, e.g. at Vin ii.194; DN i.61 (dhammikaṃ r ■ v. guttiṃ saṃvidaheyyāma); MN ii.101; Ja iv.292 ■ Cp gorakkhāNote. rakkhā at Ja iii.144 is an old misreading for rukkhā.

verb-noun fr. rakkh

Rakkhita

guarded, protected, saved SN iv.112 (rakkhitena kāyena, rakkhitāya vācāya etc.) AN i.7 (cittaṃ r.); Snp 288 (dhamma˚), 315 (gottā˚) Vv-a 72 (mātu˚, pitu˚ etc.); Pv-a 61, Pv-a 130Note. rakkhitaṃ karoti at Mvu 28, Mvu 43 Childers trsls “take under protection,” but Geiger reads rakkhike and trsls “appoint as watchers.”

-atta one who guards his character SN i.154; Ja i.412; Snp-a 324. -indriya guarding one’s senses Snp 697 -mānasāna guarding one’s mind Snp 63 (= gopitamānasāno-rakkhita-citto Nd ii.535).

pp. of rakkhati

Raṅga1

colour, paint Mil 11 (˚palibodha).

-kāra dyer Mil 331. -jāta colour MN i.385; Vb-a 331. -ratta dyed crimson Vin i.185 = Vin i.306.

fr. raj1, rajati, to be coloured or to have colour

Raṅga2

a stage, theatre, dancing place, playhouse Vv 331; Ja ii.252raṅgaṃ karoti to play theatre Dhp-a iv.62raṅgamajjha the stage, the theatre usually in loc. ˚majjhe, on the stage, SN iv.306; Ja iv.495; Dhp-a iii.79; same with ˚maṇḍale Ja ii.253.

fr. raj2, irajyati, to straighten, order, direct etc.: see uju. The Dhtp (27) only gives one raj in meaning “gamana”

Racati

to arrange, prepare, compose. The root is defined at Dhtp 546 by “paṭiyattane” (with v.l. car ), and given at No. 542 as v.l. of pac in meaning “vitthāre.”-pp. racita.

rac, later Sk.

Racanā

(f.) 1. arrangement (of flowers in a garland) Vv-a 354.

-2. composition (of a book) Sdhp 619.

fr. rac

Racita

1. arranged Ja v.157 (su˚ in C. for samocita; v.l. sucarita).

-2. strung (of flowers Mvu 34, Mvu 54 ■ Cp. vi˚.

pp. of racati

Racchā

(f.) a carriage road Vin ii.194; Vin iii.151; Vin iv.271 (= rathiyā); v.205 (raccha-gata); Ja i.425; Ja v.335; Ja vi.276 (in its relation to vīthi); Dāvs v.48; Pv-a 24 (koṇa˚).

Sk. rathyā. This the contracted form. The diaeretic forms are rathiyā & rathikā (q.v.)

Rajaka

a dyer (& “washerman” in the same function), more correctly “bleacher.” See remarks of Kern’s at Toev. ii.45 on distinction of washerman dyer ■ DN i.51 (in list of occupations); Vin iii.45; SN ii.101 = SN iii.152 (in simile; combd with cittakāra, here perhaps “painter”?); SN iii.131; Ja v.186; Vb-a 331 (in simile).

fr. rajati

Rajakkha

(-˚) (adj.) only in combn with appa˚ and mahā˚; i.e. having little (or no) and much defilement (or blemish of character) MN i.169; SN i.137 (here further combd with ˚jātika; cp. BSk. alpa-rajaskajātīya Mvu iii.322); Vin i.5 (id.); Pts i.121; Pts ii.33 Pts ii.195; Nd i.358; Nd ii.235 No. 3 p2; Vb 341; Mil 263 Vism 205; Vb-a 458.

rajo + ending ka, in combn *rajas-ka = rajakkha, like *puras-kata = purakkhata. The ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd.

Rajakkhatā

(f.) is Kern’s (problematic) proposed reading (Toev. s. v.) for rājakhāda at Snp 831 (rājakhādāya phuṭṭho), which is however unjustified as the original reading is well-attested and expld in the Niddesa as such. The term as proposed would not occur by itself either (like rajakkha, only-˚).

abstr. fr. rajakkha

Rajata

(nt.) silver DN i.5 (expld at DN-a i.78 as a general name for all coins except gold: kahāpaṇas etc.); SN i.92; Snp 962 (in simile expld at Nd i.478 as jātarūpa), Ja v.50; Ja v.416 (hema˚ gold & silver); Vv 351 (˚hema-jāla); Dhp-a ii.42 (˚paṭṭa silver tablet or salver); iv.105 (˚gabbha silver money box or cabinet for silver, alongside of kahāpaṇa-gabbha and suvaṇṇa˚); Vb-a 64 (expld as “kahāpaṇa”); Pv-a 95 (for rūpiya).

Vedic rajata; see etym. under rajati

Rajati

usually intrs. rajjati (q.v.). As rajitabba (grd.) in meaning “to be bleached” (dhovitabba + ) only in meaning “bleach” (as compared with dhovati clean, & vijaṭeti to disentangle, smoothe) Vin iii.235 (ppr. fr. pl. dhovantiyo rajantiyo etc.); Ja i.8 (rajitabba, grd.; dhovitabba + ) ■ Somehow it is difficult to distinguish between the meanings “bleach” and “dye” (cp rajaka), in some combns with dhovati it clearly means “dye,” as at Vin i.50 (forms: rajati, rajitabba, rajiyetha 3 sg. Pot. Med.); Vism 65 (forms: rajitvā, rajitabba rajituṃ) ■ Another grd. rajanīya in diff. meaning (see sep.). Caus. rajeti to paint, colour Thag 1155 (inf rajetave: (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 204, 1. a). Caus. also rañjeti (see under rañjati). Med. Pass. rajjati (q.v.)-Caus. II. rajāpeti to cause to be bleached Vin iii.206 (dhovāpeyya rajāpeyya ākoṭāpeyya), 235 (dhovapeti r. vijaṭāpeti); Ja ii.197 (ovaṭṭikaṃ sibbāpetvā rajāpetvā).

raj & rañj; to shine, to be coloured or light (-red); to Idg. *areg to be bright, as in Lat. argus, Gr. ἀργής & ἀργός light; Sk. arjuna (see ajjuna); to which also rajati silver = Lat. argentum, Gr. α ̓́ργυρος; Gallic Argento-ratum (Name of Strassburg); Oir argat.

Rajana

(nt.) colouring, dye DN i.110 (suddhaṃ vatthaṃ… sammadeva rajanaṃ paṭigaṇheyya); Vin i.50 = Vin i.53 Vin ii.227; Vin i.286 (6 dyes allowed to the bhikkhus: mūla˚, khandha˚, taca˚, patta˚, puppha˚, phala˚ or made of the root, the trunk, bark, leaf, flower, fruit of trees) Thag 965; SN ii.101 (here either as f. or adj.) Ja i.220 (washing?).

-kamma (the job of) dyeing Ja i.118; Vism 65. -pacana boiling the dye Vism 389 (cp. rajana-pakka Vin. Texts ii.49). -bhājana dye-vessel Vin i.286. -sālā colouringworkshop dyeing-hall Vism 65.

fr. raj

Rajani

(f.) the night Dāvs i.39; Abhp 69; Pv-a 205.

fr. raj, cp. rajanīya 2

Rajanīya

(adj.) of the nature of rajas, i.e. leading to lust, apt to rouse excitement, enticing lustful.

1. As Ep. of rūpa (vedanā saññā etc.) SN iii.79; also at DN i.152 sq. (dibbāni rupāni passāmi piya-rūpāni kām’ ûpasaṃhitāni rajanīyāni; & the same with; saddāni). In another formula (relating to the 5 kāmaguṇā): rūpā (saddā etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kām’ ûpasaṃhitā rajanīyā DN i.245; MN i.85. The expln of this passage at DN-a i.311 is: r. = rāgajanaka ■ The expression rajanīyā dhammā “things (or thoughts) causing excitement” is contrasted with vimocaniyā dh. “that which leads to emancipation at AN ii.196. The same takes the places of lobhanīyā dhammā in combn with dosanīyā & mohanīyā dh. at SN iv.307; AN ii.120; AN iii.169. Another pair is mentioned at Ne 18, viz. r. dhammā and pariyuṭṭhāniyā dh. 2. In diff. connections it means simply “delightful lovely” and is e.g. an Ep. of the night. So at Pv iii.71, where the passage runs “yuvā rajanīye kāmaguṇehi sobhasi”: youthful thou shinest with the qualities of enjoyment in the enjoyable (night), which at Pv-a 205 is expld in a twofold manner viz. first as “ramaṇīyehi rāguppatti-hetu-bhūtehi” (viz. kāmagunehi), referring to aN v.l. rajanīyehi, and then as “rajanī ti vā rattīsu, ye ti nipātamattaṃ” and “virocasi rattiyaṃ.” Thus rajanī is here taken directly as “night” (cp. Abhp 69) ■ At Pv iv.62 the passage runs “pamattā rajaniyesu kām’ assād’ âbhinandhino” i.e. not heeding the enjoyment of the taste of craving at nights; here as m. & not f ■ The meaning “lovely is appld to sounds at Thag 1233 (sarena rajanīyena) Vv-a 37 (r. nigghosa).

grd. of rajati

Rajo

(rajas) & Raja (nt.). A Forms. Both rajo & rajaṃ occur as noun & acc. sg., e.g. rajo at DN ii.19; Snp 207, Snp 334; Dhs 617; rajaṃ at Snp 275; Iti 83; once (in verse) rajo occurs as m, viz. Snp 662. The other cases are formed from the a-stem only, e.g. rajassa Snp 406; pl. rajāni Snp 517, Snp 974. In compn we find both forms, viz. (1) rajas either in visarga form rajah, as (a) rajo-, (b) raja- and (c) rajā- (stressed), or in s-form (d) rajas-; (2) raja-, appearing apostrophied as (e) raj-. B Meanings. (1) (lit.) dust, dirt; usually wet, staining dust DN ii.19 (tiṇa + ); Snp 662 = Pv-a 116 (sukhumo rajo paṭivātaṃ khitto); Iti 83; Dhs 617 (dhūmo + ). adj. rāja˚;: in sa˚ & a˚ vāta Vin ii.209 Vism 31. The meaning “pollen” [Sk. raja, m.] may be seen in “raja-missakaṃ rasaṃ” at Dhp-a i.375. 2. (fig.) stain, dirt, defilement, impurity. Thus taken conventionally by the P. commentators as the 3-fold blemish of man’s character: rāga, dosa, moha, e.g. Nd i.505; Snp-a 255; Dhp-a iii.485; or as kilesa-raja at Snp-a 479Snp 207 (niketā jāyate rajo), 334, 665 (rajaṃ ākirasi, metaph.), 974 (pañca rajāni loke, viz. the excitement caused by the 5 bāhirāni āyatanāni Nd i.505 Also in stanza rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati (with dosa & moha; the same) Nd i.505 = Nd ii.590 (slightly diff.) = Ja i.117 = Vism 388, cp. Divy 491 with interesting variation ■ adj. raja˚; in two phrases apagata˚; Vv-a 236 & vigata˚; Nd i.505 ≈ free from defilement ■ On raja in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 126. Cp. vi˚ ■ C Compounds. (a) rajo-: ˚jalla dust and (wet) dirt, muddy dirt DN ii.18; Vin iii.70; Ja iv.322; Ja v.241; Mil 133, Mil 195 Mil 258, Mil 410; Snp-a 248, Snp-a 291. -jallika living in dirty mud designation of a class of ascetics MN i.281; Ja i.390 -dhātu “dust-element” (doubtful trsln) DN i.54, which DN-a i.163 explns as “raja-okiṇṇa-ṭṭhānāni,” i.e. dusty places. Dial. trsl. “places where dust accumulates, Franke, Dīgha p. 57 as “Staubiges” but rightly sees a deeper, speculative meaning in the expression (Sānkhya doctrine of rajas?). -mala dust & dirt Ja i.24 -vajalla [this expression is difficult to explain. It may simply be a condensed phrase rajo ‘va jalla, or a redupl cpd. rajo + avajalla, which was spelt raj-ovajalla for ava˚ because of rajo, or represents a contamination of raj-avajalla and raj- ojalla, or it is a metric diaeresis of rajo-jalla] dust and dirt Dhp 141 (= kaddama-limpan ākārena sarīre sannicita-rajo Dhp-a iii.77). -haraṇa dirt-taking, cleaning; wet rag, floor-cloth, duster Vin ii.291; AN iv.376; Ja i.117; Dhp-a i.245 ■ (b) raja--reṇu dirt and dust Ja iv.362; -vaḍḍhana indulgence in or increase of defilement Thig 343 (“fleshly lusts” trsl.) Thag-a 240 (= rāga-raj’ ādi-saṃvaḍḍhana) ■ (c) rajā-˚patha dusty place, dustiness, dust-hole DN i.62, DN i.250; SN ii.219; DN-a i.180 (here taken metaphorically: rāga-raj ādīnaṃ uṭṭhāna-ṭṭhānaṃ) ■ (d) rajas-: ˚sira with dusty head Snp 980; Ja iv.184, Ja iv.362, Ja iv.371. See pankadanta ■ (e raj-:-˚agga a heap of dust, dirt Ja v.187 (= rajakkhandha C.); fig. = kilesa Pp 65, Pp 68 (here perhaps nt of a distorted rajakkha? So Kern, Toev. s. v.). -˚upavāhana taking away the dust (or dirt) Snp 391, Snp 392.

raj, see rajati & rañjati. Vedic rajaḥ meaning: (a) space, as region of mist & cloud similar to antarīksa, (b) a kind of (shiny) metal (cp rajata); see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 55

Rajja

(nt.) kingship, royalty, kingdom, empire; reign, throne; (fig.) sovereignty AN iii.300 (˚ṃ kāreti); Snp 114, Snp 553 (˚ṃ kāreti to reign); Ja i.57; Ja i.64 (ekarattena tīṇi rajjāni atikkamma; 3 kingdoms) iii.170 (˚ṃ amaccānaṃ niyyādetvā), 199 (dukkhaseyyaṃ api rajjaṃ pi kāraye); iv.96, 105, 393 (nava rajja new kingship, newly (or lately) crowned king); vi.4 (rajjato me sussitvā maraṇam eva seyyo: death by withering is better than kingship); Vv-a 314 (= Ja i.64 as above); Pv-a 73 sq.; Mvu 10, Mvu 52 (rājā rajjaṃ akārayi) ■ cakkavatti˚; rule of a universal king Dhp-a iii.191; deva˚; reign amongst gods Kp-a 227; padesa˚ local sovereignty Iti 15; Kp viii.12 (cp. Kp-a 227).

-siri-dāyikā (devatā) (goddess) giving success to the empire Dhp-a ii.17. -sīma border of the empire Vism 121.

Sk. rājya, fr. rāj

Rajjati

to be excited, attached to (loc.), to find pleasure in SN iv.74 (na so rajjati rūpesu; = viratta-citta); Snp 160, Snp 813 (contrasted with virajjati); Pts i.58, Pts i.77 sq., 130, 178 Nd i.138; Mil 386 (rajjasi rajanīyesu etc.: in combn with dosa & moha or derivations, representing rāga or lobha, cp. lobhanīya); Vb-a 11 ■ ppr. rajjamāna Pv-a 3; Pot. rajjeyya Mil 280 (kampeyya + ); grd rajjitabba Mil 386 (rajanīyesu r.; with dussanīyesu and muyhanīyesu; followed by kampitabba); fut rajjissati Dhs-a 194; aor. arañji Vin i.36 = Ja i.83 (na yiṭṭhe na hute arañjiṃ) ■ pp. ratta.

cp. Sk. rajyati, raj or rañj, Med. of rajati

Rajjana

(nt.) defilement DN-a i.195. Cp. muyhana.

fr. rajjati

Rajju

(f.) a cord, line, rope SN ii.128; Vin ii.120 Vin ii.148 (āviñchana˚); Nd ii.304; Ja i.464, Ja i.483 (fisherman’s line); v.173; Mvu 10, Mvu 61; Dhp-a iv.54; Vb-a 163 Kp-a 57; Vv-a 207; Sdhp 148, Sdhp 153.

-kāra rope-maker Mil 331. -gāhaka “rope-holder, (king’s) land-surveyor Ja ii.367 = Dhp-a iv.88 (see Fick Sociale Gliederung 97).

Vedic rajju, cp. Lat. restis rope, Lith. rẽƶgis wicker, basket

Rajjuka

1. a rope, line Ja i.164 (bandhana˚); Thag-a 257.

2. = rajjugāhaka, king’s land surveyor Ja ii.367.

rajju + ka

Rañjati

1. to colour, dye Ja i.220. 2. (= rajjati) to find delight in, to be excited Snp 424 (ettha me r. mano; v.l. BB rajjati) ■ Caus. rañjeti to delight or make glad DN iii.93 (in etym. of rājā (q.v.)-pp rañjita ■ Caus. II. rañjāpeti to cause to be coloured or dyed Dhp-a iv.106 (v.l. raj˚).

rañj = raj: see rajati & rajjati-Dhtp 66 & 398 defines rañja = rāge

Rañjana

(nt.) delighting, finding pleasure, excitement Dhs-a 363 (rañjan’ aṭṭhena rāgo; v.l. rajano˚; perhaps better to be read rajjana˚).

fr. rañjati

Rañjita

coloured, soiled, in raja˚; affected with stain, defiled Ja i.117 ■ See also anu˚ & pari˚;.

pp. of rañjeti

Raṭati

to yell, cry; shout (at), scold, revile: not found in the texts.

raṭ; Dhtp 86: “paribhāsane”

Raṭṭha

(nt.) reign, kingdom, empire; country, realm Snp 46 (expld at Nd ii.536 as “raṭṭhañ ca janapadañ ca koṭṭhāgārañ ca… nagarañ ca”), 287 444, 619; Ja iv.389 (˚ṃ araṭṭhaṃ karoti); Pv-a 19 (˚ṃ kāreti to reign, govern). Pabbata˚ mountain-kingdom Snp-a 26; Magadha˚ the kingdom of Magadha Pv-a 67.

-piṇḍa the country’s alms-food (˚ṃ bhuñjati) Dhp 308 (saddhāya dinnaṃ); AN i.10; SN ii.221; MN iii.127; Thig 110; Iti 43, Iti 90. -vāsin inhabitant of the realm, subject Dhp-a iii.481

Vedic rāṣṭra

Raṭṭhaka

(adj.) belonging to the kingdom, royal, sovereign Ja iv.91 (senāvāhana) ■ Cp. raṭṭhika.

Sk. rāṣṭraka

Raṭṭhavant

(adj.) possessing a kingdom or kingship Pv ii.611 (˚nto khattiyā).

raṭṭha + vant

Raṭṭhika

1. one belonging to a kingdom, subject in general, inhabitant Ja ii.241 (brāhmaṇa gahapati-r ■ do ārik’ ādayo).

2. an official of the kingdom [op Sk. rāṣṭriya a pretender; also king’s brother in-law] AN iii.76 = AN iii.300 (r. pettanika senāya senāpatika).

fr. raṭṭha, cp. Sk. rāṣṭrika

Raṇa

1. fight, battle; only in Thig 360 (raṇaṃ karitvā kāmānaṃ): see discussed below; also late at Mvu 35, Mvu 69 (Subharājaṃ raṇe hantvā).

2. intoxication, desire, sin, fault. This meaning is the Buddhist development of Vedic raṇa enjoyment. Various influences have played a part in determining the meaning & its expl;n in the scholastic terms of the dogmatists and exegetics. It is often expld as pāpa or rāga. The Ṭīkā on Dhs-a 50 (see Expos. 67) gives the foll. explns (late & speculative) (a) = reṇu, dust or mist of lust etc.; (b) fight, war (against the Paths); (c) pain, anguish & distress ■ The trsl;n (Expos. 67) takes raṇa as “cause of grief,” or “harm, hence araṇa “harmless” and saraṇa “harmful” (the latter trsld as “concomitant with war” by Dhs. trsl. of Dhs 1294; and asaraṇa as opp. “not concomitant” doubtful). At SN i.148 (rūpe raṇaṃ disvā) it is almost syn. with raja. Bdhgh. expls this passage (see K.S. 320) as “rūpamhi jāti-jarā-bhanga-sankhātaṃ dosaṃ, trsln (K.S. 186): “discerning canker in visible objects material.”

The term is not sufficiently cleared yet. At Thig 358 we read “(kāmā) appassādā raṇakarā sukkapakkha-visosanā,” and v. 360 reads “raṇaṃ karitvā kāmānaṃ.” Thag-a 244 expls v 358 by “rāg’ ādi sambandhanato”; v. 360 by “kāmānaṃ raṇaṃ te ca mayā kātabbaṃ ariyamaggaṃ sampahāraṃ katvā.” The first is evidently “grief,” the second “fight,” but the trsln (Sisters 145) gives “stirring strife” for v. 358, and “fight with worldly lusts” for v. 360; whereas Kern Toev. s. v. raṇakara gives “causing sinful desire” as trsl.

The word araṇa (see araṇa2) was regarded as neg of raṇa in both meanings (1 & 2); thus either “freedom fr. passion” or “not fighting.” The trsln of Dhs-a 50 (Expos. 67) takes it in a slightly diff. sense as “harmless” (i.e. having no grievous causes)-At MN iii.235 araṇa is a quâsi summing up of “adukkha an-upaghāta anupāyāsa etc.,” and saraṇa of their positives. Here a meaning like “harmfulness” & “harmlessness seems to be fitting. Other passages of araṇa see under araṇa.

-jaha (raṇañjaha) giving up desires or sin, leaving causes of harmfulness behind. The expression is old and stereotype. It has caused trouble among interpreters: Trenckner would like to read raṇañjaya “victorious in battle” (Notes 83). It is also BSk. e.g. Lal 50; Avs ii.131 (see Speyer’s note 3 on this page. He justifies trsln “pacifier, peace-maker”) At foll. passages: SN i.52 (trsln “quitting corruption”) Iti 108 (Seidenstücker trsls: “dem Kampfgewühl entronnen”); Mil 21; Ne 54; Sdhp 493, Sdhp 569.

Vedic raṇa, both “enjoyment,” and “battle.” The Dhtp (115) only knows of ran as a sound-base saddatthā (= Sk. ran2 to tinkle)

Rata

delighting in (loc. or-˚), intent on, devoted to SN iv.117 (dhamme jhāne), 389 sq. (bhava etc.); Snp 54 (sangaṇika˚) 212, 250, 327, 330 (dhamme) 461 (yaññe), 737 (upasame); Mvu. 1, 44 (mahākāruṇiko Satthā sabba-loka-hite rato); 32, 84 (rato puññe) Pv-a 3, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 19 (˚mānasa).

pp. of ramati

Ratana1

(nt.) 1. (lit. a gem, jewel Vv-a 321 (not = ratana2, as Hardy in Index) Pv-a 53 (nānāvidhāni) ■ The 7 ratanas are enumd under veḷuriya (Mil 267). They are (the precious minerals) suvaṇṇa, rajata, muttā, maṇi, veḷuriya vajira, pavāḷa. (So at Abhp 490.) These 7 are said to be used in the outfit of a ship to give it more splendour: Ja ii.112. The 7 (unspecified) are mentioned at Thig 487 (satta ratanāni vasseyya vuṭṭhimā “all seven kinds of gems”); and at Dhp-a i.274, where it is said of a ratana-maṇḍapa that in it there were raised flags “sattaratana-mayā.” On ratana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1909, 127.

2. (fig.) treasure, gem of (-˚) Snp 836 (etādisaṃ r. = dibb’ itthi-ratana Snp-a 544); Mil 262 (dussa˚ a very fine garment) ■ Usually as a set of 7 valuables, belonging to the throne (the empire) of a (world-) king. Thus at DN ii.16 sq.; of Mahā-Sudassana DN ii.172 sq. They are enumd singly as follows: the wheel (cakka) DN ii.172 sq., the elephant (hatthi, called Uposatha) DN ii.174, DN ii.187, DN ii.197; the horse (assa, Valāhaka) ibid.; the gem (maṇi) DN ii.175, DN ii.187; the woman (itthi) ibid.; the treasurer (gahapati) DN ii.176, DN ii.188 the adviser (pariṇāyaka) ibid. The same 7 are enumd at DN i.89; Snp p.106; DN-a i.250; also at Ja iv.232, where their origins (homes) are given as: cakka˚ out of Cakkadaha; hatthi from the Uposatha-race; assa˚ from the clan of Valāhassarāja, maṇi˚ from Vepulla, and the last 3 without specification. See also remarks on gahapati. Kern, Toev. s. v. ratana suspects the latter to be originally “major domus” (cp. his attributes as “wealthy” at Mvu i.108). As to the exact meaning of pariṇāyaka he is doubtful, which mythical tradition has obscured ■ The 7 (moral) ratanas at SN ii.217; SN iii.83 are probably the same as are given in detail at Mil 336, viz. the 5: sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚ vimutti-ñāṇadassana (also given under the collective name sīla-kkhandha or dhamma-kkhandha), to which are added the 2: paṭisambhidā˚ & bojjhanga˚. These 7 are probably meant at Pv-a 66, where it is said that Sakka “endowed their house with the 7 jewels” (sattar ■ bharitaṃ katvā) ■ Very frequent is a Triad of Gems (ratana-ttaya), consisting of Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha or the Doctrine, the Church and the Buddha [cp. BSk ratna-traya Divy 481], e.g. Mvu 5, Mvu 81; Vb-a 284; Vv-a 123; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 49, Pv-a 141.

-ākara a pearl-mine, a mine of precious metals Thag 1049; Ja ii.414; Ja vi.459; Dpvs i.18. -kūṭa a jewelled top Dhp-a i.159. -paliveṭhana a wrapper for a gem or jewel Pp 34. -vara the best of gems Snp 683 (= vararatana-bhūta Snp-a 486). -sutta the Suttanta of the (3) Treasures (viz. Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha), representing Sutta Nipāta ii.1 (P.T.S. ed. pp. 39

42), mentioned as a parittā at Vism 414 (with 4 others) and at Mil 150 (with 5 others), cp. Kp-a 63; Snp-a 201.

cp. Vedic ratna, gift; the BSk. form is ratna (Divy 26) as well as ratana (Avs ii.199)

Ratana2

a linear measure (which Abhp p.23 gives as equal to 12 angula or 7 ratanas = 1 yaṭṭhi: see Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 335. The same is given by Bdhgh. at Vb-a 343 dve vidatthiyo ratanaṃ; satta r. yaṭṭhi) Ja v.36 (vīsaṃr-sataṃ); vi.401 (˚mattaṃ); Vv-a 321 (so given by Hardy in Index as “measure of length,” but to be taken as ratana1, as indicated clearly by context & C.); Mil 282 (satta-patiṭṭhito aṭṭha-ratan’ ubbedho nava-ratan āyāma-pariṇāho pāsādiko dassanīyo Uposatho nāgarājā: alluding to ratana1 2!).

most likely = Sk. aratni: see ratani

Ratanaka

(-˚) (adj.) characteristic of a gem, or a king’s treasure; in phrase aniggata-ratanake “When the treasure has not gone out” Vin iv.160, where the chief queen is meant with “treasure.”

ratana + ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.

Ratani

a cubit Mil 85 (aṭṭha rataniyo).

Sk. aratni “elbow” with apocope and diaeresis; given at Halāyudha 2, 381 as “a cubit, or measure from the elbow to the tip of the little finger.” The form ratni also occurs in Sk. The etym. is fr. Idg *ole (to bend), cp. Av. arəpna elbow; Sk. arāla bent of which enlarged bases *olen in Lat. ulna, ond *oleq in Lat. lacertus, Sk. lakutaḥ = P. laguḷa. See cognates in Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lacertus

Ratanika

(adj.) a ratana in length Ja i.7 (aḍḍha˚); Mil 312 (aṭṭha˚).

fr. ratana

Rati

(f.) love, attachment, pleasure, liking for (loc.), fondness of SN i.133 (˚ṃ paccanubhavati), 207; iii.256; Snp 41 (= anukkhaṇṭhit adhivacanaṃ Nd ii.537), 59 (id.), 270, 642, 956 (= nekkhamma-rati paviveka˚, upasama˚ Nd i.457); Ja iii.277 (kilesa˚); Dhp-a iv.225; Pv-a 77arati dislike, aversion SN i.7, SN i.54, SN i.128, SN i.180, SN i.197; SN v.64; Snp 270 (+ rati), 642 (id.); Dhp 418 (rati + ); Thig 339; Dhs-a 193; Pv-a 64 Sdhp 476ratiṃ karoti to delight in, to make love Vism 195 (purisā itthīsu).

Classic Sk. rati, fr. ram

Ratin

(adj.) (-˚) fond of, devoted to, keen on, fostering; f. ratinī Ja iv.320 (ahiṃsā˚).

fr. rati

Ratta1

1. dyed, coloured MN i.36 (dūratta-vaṇṇa difficult to dye or badly dyed MA 167 reads duratta and expls as durañjita-vaṇṇa opp. suratta ibid.); Snp 287 (nānā-rattehi vatthehi) Vism 415 (˚vattha-nivattha, as sign of mourning) Dhp-a iv.226 (˚vattha).

2. red. This is used of a high red colour, more like crimson. Sometimes it comes near a meaning like “shiny, shining, glittering (as in ratta-suvaṇṇa the glittering gold), cp. etym. meaning of; rajati and rajana. It may also be taken as “bleached” in ratta-kambala. In ratta-phalika (crystal) it approaches the meaning of “white,” as also in expln of puṇḍarīka at Ja v.216 with ratta-paduma “white lotus.”-It is most commonly found in foll combns at foll. passages: Mil 191 (˚lohita-candana) Vism 172 (˚kambala), 174 (˚koraṇḍaka), 191 (˚paṭākā) Ja i.394 (pavāla-ratta-kambala); iii.30 (˚puppha-dāma) v.37 (˚sālivana), 216 (˚paduma); 372 (˚suvaṇṇa) Dhp-a i.393 (id.), 248 (˚kambala); iv.189 (˚candanarukkha red-sandal tree); Snp-a 125 (where paduma is given as “ratta-set’ ādivasena”); Vv-a 4 (˚dupaṭṭa) 65 (˚suvaṇṇa), 177 (˚phalika); Pv-a 4 (˚virala-mālā garland of red flowers for the convict to be executed cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104), 157 (˚paduma), 191 (˚sāli); Mvu 30, Mvu 36 (˚kambala); 36, 82 (rattāni akkhīni bloodshot eyes). With the latter cp. cpd. rattakkha “with red eyes” (fr. crying) at Pv-a 39 (v.l. BB.), and Np. rattakkhin “Red-eye” (Ep. of a Yakkha). 3. (fig.) excited, infatuated, impassioned SN iv.339; Snp 795 (virāga˚); Iti 92 (maccā rattā); Mil 220. Also in combn ratta duṭṭha mūḷha: see Nd ii.s. v. chanda; cp bhava-rāga-ratta.

pp. of rañjati, cp. Sk. rakta

Ratta2

(nt.) & (poet.); rattā (f.) (rarely) night; (usually time in general. Occurs only-˚, with expressions giving a definite time. Independently (besides cpds. mentioned below) only at one (doubtful) passage, viz. Snp 1071 where BB MSS. read rattam-ahā for rattaṃ aho, which corresponds to the Vedic phrase aho-rātraṃ (= P. ahorattaṃ). The P.T.S. ed. reads nattaṃ; Snp-a 593 reads nattaṃ, but expls as rattin-divaṃ, whereas Nd ii.538 reads rattaṃ & expl;s: “rattaṃ vuccati ratti, ahā (sic lege!) ti divaso, rattiñ ca divañ ca.”-Otherwise only in foll. adv. expressions (meaning either “time” or “night”): instr. eka-rattena in one night Ja i.64; satta after one week (lit. a seven-night) Snp 570acc. sg. cira-rattaṃ a long time Snp 665; dīgha˚ id. [cp. BSk dīrgha-rātraṃ freq.] Snp 22; MN i.445; aḍḍha˚ at “halfnight,” i.e. midnight AN iii.407; pubba-ratt’ âpararattaṃ one night after the other (lit. the last one and the next) Dhp-a iv.129acc. pl. cira rattāni a long time Ja v.268loc. in var. forms, viz. vassa- ratte in the rainy season Ja v.38 (Kern, Toev. s. v. gives wrongly iii.37, 143; aḍḍha- ratte at midnight Pv-a 152; aḍḍha rattāyaṃ at midnight Vv 8116 (= aḍḍharattiyaṃ Vv-a 315); divā ca ratto ca day & night Vv 31;5 (= rattiyaṃ Vv-a 130); cira- rattāya a long time Ja v.267; Pv i.94.

-andhakāra the dark of night, nightly darkness Vin iv.268 (oggate suriye); MN i.448. -ūparata abstaining from food at night DN i.5 (cp. DN-a i.77). -ññu of long standing, recognised DN i.48 (in phrase: r. cira-pabbajito addhagato etc.; expld at DN-a i.143 as “pabbajjato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātī ti r.”) AN ii.27 (here the pl. rattaññā, as if fr. sg. ratta-ñña) Snp p.92 (therā r. cira-pabbajitā; the expln at Snp-a 423 is rather fanciful with the choice of either = ratana-ññu i.e. knowing the gem of Nibbāna, or = bahu-ratti-vidū i.e. knowing many nights); Thag-a 141. A f. abstr ˚ññutā “recognition” is found at MN i.445 (spelt rataññūtā but v.l. ˚utā). -samaye (loc., adv.) at the time of (night) Ja i.63 (aḍḍha-ratta˚ at midnight), 264 (id.) iv.74 (vassa˚ in the rainy season); Pv-a 216 (aḍḍha˚).

Epic Sk. rātra; Vedic rātra only in cpd. aho-rātraṃ. Semantically an abstr formation in collect. meaning “the space of a night’s time,” hence “interval of time” in general. Otherwise rātri: see under ratti

Ratti

(f.) night DN i.47 (dosinā). gen. sg. ratyā (for *rattiyā) Thag 517; Snp 710 (vivasane = ratti-samatikkame Snp-a 496); Ja vi.491. abl. sg. rattiyā in phrases abhikkantāya r. at the waning of night DN ii.220; Vin i.26; SN i.16; MN i.143; & pabhātāya r. when night grew light, i.e. dawn Ja i.81, Ja i.500. instr. pl. rattīsu Vin i.288 (hemantikāsu r.). A loc. ratyā (for *rātryām) and a nom. pl. ratyo (for *rātryaḥ) is given by Geiger, P.Gr. § 583 ■ Very often combd with and opp. to diva in foll. combns: rattin-diva [cp. BSk. rātrindiva = Gr. νυξχήμερον, Avs i.274, Avs i.278; Avs ii.176; Divy 124] a day & a night (something like our “24 hours”), in phrase dasa rattindivā a decade of n. & d. (i.e. a 10-day week A; v.85 sq.; adverbially satta-rattin-divaṃ a week Dhp-a i.108. As adv. in acc. sg.: rattin-divaṃ night and day AN iii.57; Snp 507, Snp 1142; Iti 93; Ja i.30; or rattiñ ca divañ ca Nd ii.538, or rattiṃ opposed to adv. divā by night-by day MN i.143; Pv-a 43 ■ Other cases as adv. acc. eka rattiṃ one night Ja i.62; Pv ii.97; Pv-a 42; taṃ rattiṃ that night Mvu 4, Mvu 38; imaṃ r. this night MN i.143 yañ car.… yañ car.… etasmiṃ antare in between yon night and yon night Iti 121; rattiṃ at night Mil 42; rattiṃ rattiṃ night after night Mvu 30, Mvu 16gen. rattiyā ca divasassa ca by n. & by day SN ii.95loc. rattiyañ by night Vv-a 130, Vv-a 315 (aḍḍha˚ at midnight) Pv-a 22; and ratto in phrase divā ca ratto ca Snp 223 Thig 312; Dhp 296; Vv 315; 8432; SN i.33.

-khaya the wane of night Ja i.19. -cāra (sabba˚) allnight wandering SN i.201 (trsl. “festival”). -cheda interruption of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin ii.34 (three such: sahavāsa, vippavāsa, anārocanā). -dhūmāyanā smouldering at night Vism 107 (v.l. dhūp˚) combd with divā-pajjalanā, cp. MN i.143: ayaṃ vammīko rattiṃ dhūmāyati divā pajjalati. -pariyanta limitation of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin ii.59 -bhāga night-time Ja iii.43 (˚bhāge); Mil 18 (˚bhāgena). -bhojana eating at night MN i.473; DN-a i.77 -samaya night-time, only in loc. aḍḍha-ratti-samaye at midnight Vv-a 255; Pv-a 155.

Vedic rātrī & later Sk. rātri ■ Idg; *lādh as in Gr. λήχω = Lat. lateo to hide; Sk rāhu dark demon also Gr. *Λητώ (= Lat. Latona) Goddess of night; Mhg luoder insidiousness; cp. further Gr. λανχάνω to be hidden, λήχη oblivion (E. lethargy) ■ The by-form of ratti is ratta2

Ratha1

a two-wheeled carriage, chariot (for riding driving or fighting SN i.33 (ethically); AN iv.191 (horse cart; diff. parts of a ratha); MN i.396; Snp 300, Snp 654 Vism 593 (in its compn of akkha, cakka, pañjara, īsā etc.); Ja iii.239 (passaddha˚ carriage slowing up); Thig 229 (caturassaṃ rathaṃ, i.e. a Vimāna); Mvu 35, Mvu 42 (goṇā rathe yuttā); Vv-a 78 (500), 104, 267 (= Vimāna) Pv-a 74assatarī˚; a chariot drawn by a she-mule Vv 208 = 438; Pv i.111; Ja vi.355Phussa-ratha state carriage Ja iii.238; Ja vi.30 sq. See under ph ■ On ratha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127.

-atthara (rathatthara) a rug for a chariot DN i.7; Vin i.192; Vin ii.163. -anīka array of chariots Vin iv.108 -īsā carriage pole AN iv.191. -ūpatthara chariot or carriage cover DN i.103; DN-a i.273. -esabha (ratha ṛṣabha, Sk. rathārṣabha) lord of charioteers. Ratha here in meaning of “charioteer”; Childers sees rathin in this cpd.; Trenckner, Notes 59, suggests distortion from rathe śubha. Dhpāla at Pv-a 163 clearly understands it as ratha- = charioteer explaining “rathesu usabha-sadiso mahā-ratho ti attho”; as does Bdhgh at Snp-a 321 (on Snp 303): “mahā-rathesu khattiyesu akampiy’ aṭṭhena usabha-sadiso.”-Snp 303–⁠308, 552; Pv ii.131; Mvu 5, Mvu 246; Mvu 15, Mvu 11; Mvu 29, Mvu 12. -kāra carriagebuilder chariot-maker, considered as a class of very low social standing, rebirth in which is a punishment (cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 56, 207, 209 sq.) SN i.93; Vin iv.9 (as term of abuse, enumd with other low grades: caṇḍāla veṇa nesāda r. pukkusa), 12 (˚jāti) MN ii.152, MN ii.183 f.; as kārin at Pv iii.113 (expld as cammakārin Pv-a 175). As Npl. name of one of the 7 Great Lakes in the Himālaya (Rathakāradaha), e.g. at Vism 416; Snp-a 407. -cakka wheel of a chariot or carriage Vism 238 (in simile, concerning its circumference); Pv-a 65. -pañjara the body (lit. “cage” or “frame”) of a carriage Vv 831 (= rath’ ûpattha Vv-a 326); Ja ii.172; Ja iv.60; Dhp-a i.28. -yuga a chariot yoke Ja vi.42. -reṇu “chariot-dust,” a very minute quantity (as a measure), a mite. Childers compares Sk. trasareṇu a mote of dust, atom. It is said to consist of 36 tajjāri’s, and 36 ratha-reṇu’s are equal to one likkhā Vb-a 343. -vinīta “led by a chariot,” a chariot-drive (Neumann, “Eilpost”), name of the 24th Suttanta of Majjhima (MN i.145 sq.), quoted at Vism 93, Vism 671 and Snp-a 446. -sālā chariot shed Dhp-a iii.121.

Vedic ratha, Av. rapa, Lat. rota wheel, rotundus (“rotund” & round), Oir. roth = Ohg rad wheel, Lith rãtas id.

Ratha2

pleasure, joy, delight: see mano˚.

fr. ram, cp. Sk. ratha

Rathaka1

(nt.) a little carriage, a toy cart DN i.6 (cp. DN-a i.86: khuddakarathaṃ); Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; MN i.226; Mil 229.

fr. ratha, cp. Sk. rathaka m.

Rathaka2

(adj.) having a chariot, neg. a˚ without a chariot Ja vi.515.

ratha + ka

Rathika

fighter fr. a chariot, charioteer MN i.397 (saññāto kusalo rathassa anga-paccangānaṃ); DN i.51 (in list of var. occupations, cp. DN-a i.156); Ja vi.15 (+ patti-kārika), 463 (id.). Rathika & Rathiya

fr. ratha

Rathikā & Rathiyā

(f.) a carriage-road ■ (a) rathikā: Vin ii.268; Vism 60; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 67 ■ (b) rathiyā: DN i.83; Vin i.237, Vin i.344; MN ii.108; MN iii.163; SN i.201; SN ii.128; SN iv.344. In compn rathiya˚; e.g. rathiya-coḷa “street-rag” Vism 62 (expld as rathikāya chaḍḍita-coḷaka).

Vedic rathya belonging to the chariot, later Sk. rathyā road. See also racchā

Rada

at Thag-a 257 in cpd. “sannivesa-visiṭṭha-rada-visesayutta” is not quite clear (“splitting”?).

Radati

to scratch Dhtp 159 cp. rada & radana; tooth Abhp 261.

rad: see etym. at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rado (“rase”). Given in meaning “vilekhana” at Dhtp 159 & Dhtm 220. Besides this it is given at Dhtm 224 in meaning “bhakkhana”

Randha1

cooked Ja v.505; Ja vi.24; Mil 107.

for Sk. raddha, pp. of randhati 2

Randha2

opening, cleft, open spot; flaw, defect, weak spot AN iv.25; Snp 255, Snp 826 randhamesin looking for somebody’s weak spot cp. Nd i.165 (“virandham˚ aparandham˚ khalitam gaḷitam˚ vivaram-esī ti”); Ja ii.53; Ja iii.192; Snp-a 393 (+ vivara); Dhp-a iii.376, Dhp-a iii.377 (˚gavesita).

Sk. randhra, fr. randhati 1; the P. form viâ *randdha: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 581

Randhaka

(-˚) (adj.) one who cooks, cooking, a cook Ja iv.431 (bhatta˚).

fr. randhati 2

Randhati

to be or make subject to, (intrs.) to be in one’s power; (trs.) to harass oppress, vex, hurt (mostly Caus. randheti = Sk. randhayati). Only in Imper. randhehi Ja i.332, and in Prohib. mā randhayi Ja v.121, and pl. mā randhayuṃ Dhp 248 (= mā randhantu mā mathantu Dhp-a iii.357) See also randha2.

2. to cook (cp. Sk. randhi randhana) Mil 107 (bhojanaṃ randheyya) ■ pp; randha1.

radh or randh, differentiated in Pāli to 2 meanings & 2 verbs according to Dhtm: “hiṃsāyaṃ” (148), and “pāke” (827). In the former sense given as raṇḍ, in the latter randh. The root is freq. in the Vedas, in meaning 1. It belongs perhaps to Ags. rendan to rend: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s, v. lumbus

Rapati

to chatter, whisper Dhtp 187 (“vacane”); Dhtm 266 (“akkose”). See also lapati.

rap

Rabhasa

wild, terrible, violent DN i.91 expld by “bahu-bhāṇin” at DN-a i.256. There are several vv.ll. at this passage.

rabh = labh, which see for etym. Cp. also Lat rabies ■ Dhtp 205 expls rabh (correctly) by ārambha & Dhtm 301 by rābhassa

Rama

(-˚) (adj.) delighting, enjoyable; only in cpd. dū˚; (= duḥ) difficult to enjoy, not fit for pleasures as nt. absence of enjoyment Dhp 87 = SN v.24; and mano˚ gladdening the mind (q.v.).

fr. ram

Ramaṇa

(adj.) pleasing, charming, delightful Dhp-a ii.202 (˚ṭṭhāna).

fr. ramati; cp. Sk. ramaṇa

Ramaṇaka

(adj.) = ramaṇa Ja iii.207.

Ramaṇīya

(& ˚nīya) (adj.) delightful, pleasing, charming, pleasant, beautiful DN i.47 (˚ṇīyā dosinā ratti, cp. DN-a i.141); Snp 1013; Mvu 15, Mvu 69 (ṇ) Pv-a 42, Pv-a 51 (expln for rucira). As ramaṇeyya at SN i.233. Cp. rāmaṇeyya(ka).

grd. of ramati

Ramati

1. to enjoy oneself, to delight in; to sport, find amusement in (loc.) SN i.179; Vin 197 (ariyo na r. pāpe) Snp 985 (jhāne); Dhp 79 (ariya-ppavedite dhamme sadā r. paṇḍito); subj. 1st pl. ramāmase Thig 370 (cp Geiger, P.Gr. 126); med. 1st sg. rame Ja v.363; imper rama Pv ii.1220 (r. deva mayā saha; better with v.l. as ramma) ■ fut. ramissati Pv-a 153 ■ ger. ramma Pv ii.1220 (v.l. for rama). grd. ramma & ramanīya; (q.v.) ■ pp. rata ■ Caus. I. rameti to give pleasure to, to please, to fondle Thag 13; Ja v.204; Ja vi.3 (pp ramayamāna); Mil 313 ■ pp. ramita (q.v.). Caus. II. ramāpeti to enjoy oneself Ja vi.114.

ram; defd by Dhtp 224 & Dhtm 318 by “kīḷāyaṃ”

Ramita

having enjoyed, enjoying, taking delight in, amusing oneself with (loc. or saha) Snp 709 (vanante r. siyā); Dhp 305 (id. = abhirata Dhp-a iii.472) Pv ii.1221 (’mhi tayā saha).

pp. of rameti

Rambati

(& lambati); to hang down. Both forms are given with meaning “avasaṃsane” at Dhtp 198 and Dhtm 283.

lamb

Rambhā

(f.) a plantain or banana tree Abhp 589.

Sk. rambhā

Ramma

(adj.) enjoyable, charming, beautiful Snp 305; Thag-a 71 (v. 30); Mvu 1, Mvu 73; Mvu 14, Mvu 47 Sdhp 248, Sdhp 512.

grd. of ramati

Rammaka

(adj.) Name of the month Chaitra Ja v.63.

Sk ramyaka

Raya

speed, lit. current Abhp 40. See rava1.

fr. ri, riṇāti to let loose or flow, which is taken as ray at Dhtp 234, defd as “gamana,” and at Dhtm 336 as “gati.” The root ri itself is given at Dhtm 351 in meaning “santati,” i.e. continuation ■ On etym. cp Vedic retaḥ; Lat. rivus river = Gall, Rēnos “Rhine. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rivus

Rava1

speed, exceeding swiftness, galloping, in combn with dava running at Vin ii.101; Vin iv.4; MN i.446 (better reading here dav’ atthe rav’ atthe for dhāve ravatthe, cp. vv.ll. on p. 567 & Neumann,; Mittl Sammlg. ii.672 n. 49). Note. At the Vin passages it refers to speaking & making blunders by over-hurrying oneself in speaking ■ The Dhtm (No. 871) gives rava as a synonym of; rasa (with assāda & sneha). It is not clear what the connection is between those two meanings.;

for raya, with v. for y as freq. in Pāli, Dhtm 352: ru “gate”

Rava2

loud sound, roar, shout, cry; any noise uttered by animals Ja ii.110; Ja iii.277; Dhp-a i.232 (sabba-rava-ññu knowing all sounds of animals); Mil 357 (kāruñña˚). See also rāva ruta;.

fr. ru, cp. Vedic rava

Ravaka

= rava, in go˚; a cow’s bellowing MN i.225.

Ravaṇa

(adj.-n..) roaring, howling, singing, only in cpd. ˚ghaṭa a certain kind of pitcher, where meaning of ravaṇa is uncertain. Only at identical passages (in illustration) Vism 264 = Vism 362 = Kp-a 68 (reading peḷā-ghaṭa, but see App. p. 870 ravaṇa˚) Vb-a 68 (where v.l. yavana˚, with?).

fr. ravati

Ravati

to shout cry, make a (loud) noise Mil 254 ■ aor. ravi Ja i.162 (baddha-rāvaṃ ravi); ii.110; iii.102; Pv-a 100; arāvi Mvu 10, Mvu 69 (mahā-rāvaṃ); and aravi Mvu 32, Mvu 79. pp. ravita & ruta; ■ Cp. abhi˚, vi˚.

ru: Idg. *re & *reu;, cp. Lat. ravus “raw, hoarse,” raucus, rūmor “rumour”; Gr. ὠρυόμαι to shout ὠρυδόν roaring, etc.; Dhtp 240: ru “sadde”

Ravi

the sun Ja ii.375 (taruṇa˚-vaṇṇaratha).

-inda “king of the sun,” Name of the lotus Dāvs iii.37 -haṃsa “sun-swan,” Name of a bird Ja vi.539.

cp. Sk. ravi

Ravita

shouted, cried, uttered Mil 178 (sakuṇa-ruta˚).

pp. of ravati

Rasa1

that which is connected with the sense of taste. The defn given at Vism 447 is as follows “jivhā-paṭihanana-lakkhaṇo raso, jivhā-viññāṇassa visaya-bhāvo raso, tass’ eva gocara-paccupaṭṭhāno mūla-raso khandha-raso ti ādinā nayena anekavidho, i.e. rasa is physiologically & psychologically peculiar to the tongue (sense-object & sense-perception), and also consists as a manifold object in extractions from roots, trunk etc. (see next) ■ The conventional encyclopaedic def;n of rasa at Nd i.240; Nd ii.540, Dhs 629 gives taste according to: (a) the 6-fold objective source as mūla- rasa, khandha˚, taca˚, patta˚, puppha˚, phala˚; or taste (i.e. juice, liquid) of root, trunk, bark, leaf flower & fruit; and-(b) the 12-fold subjective (physiological) sense-perception as ambila, madhura, tittika kaṭuka loṇika, khārika, lambila (Mil 56: ambila) kasāva; sādu, asādu, sīta, uṇha, or sour, sweet, bitter pungent, salt, alkaline, sour, astringent; pleasant, unpleasant cold & hot. Mil 56 has the foll.:; ambila lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura.

1. juice [as applied in the Veda to the Soma juice], e.g. in the foll. combns: ucchu˚; of sugar cane, extract of sugar cane syrup Vin i.246; Vv-a 180; patta˚ & puppha˚; of leaf & flower Vin i.246; madhura˚; of honey Pv-a 119

2. taste as (objective) quality, the sense-object of taste (cp. above defns). In the list of the āyatanas or senses with their complementary sense-objects (sentient and sensed) rasa occupies the 4th place following upon gandha. It is stated that one tastes (or “senses”) taste with the tongue (no reference to palate) jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā (or viññeyya ). See also āyatana 3 and rūpa ■ MN iii.55 (jivhā-viññeyya r.), 267; DN iii.244, DN iii.250; Snp 387; Dhs 609; Pv-a 50 (vaṇṇagandha-rasa-sampanna bhojana: see below 5).

3 sense of taste, as quality & personal accomplishment Thus in the list of senses marking superiority (the 10 ādhipateyyas or ṭhāṇas), similar to rasa as special distinction of the Mahāpurisa (see cpd. ras-agga) SN iv.275 = Pv ii.958; AN iv.242.

4. object or act of enjoyment sensual stimulus, material enjoyment, pleasure (usually in pl.) Snp 65 (rasesu gedha, see materialistic exegesis at Nd ii.540), 854 (rase na anugijjhati; perhaps better rasesu, as Snp-a); AN iii.237 (puriso agga˚-parititto perhaps to No. 2).

5. flavour and its substance (or substratum), e.g. soup Vv-a 243 (kakkaṭaka˚ crabsoup), cp. SN v.149, where 8 soup flavours are given (ambila, tittaka, kaṭuka, madhura, khārika, akhārika loṇika, aloṇika); Pv ii.115 (aneka-rasa-vyañjana “with exceptionally flavoured sauce”); Ja v.459, Ja v.465. gorasa “flavour of cow, i.e. produce of cow: see under go. Also metaphorically: “flavour, relish, pleasure” Snp 257 (pariveka˚, dhamma-pīṭi˚, cp. Snp-a 299 “assād aṭṭhena” i.e. tastiness); Pv-a 287 (vimutti˚ relish of salvation). So also as attha˚, dhamma˚, vimutti˚ Pts ii.89.

6. (in grammar & style) essential property elegance, brightness; in dramatic art “sentiment (flavour) (see Childers s. v. naṭya-rasa) Mil 340 (with opamma and lakkhaṇa: perhaps to No. 7); Pv-a 122 (˚rasa as ending in Np. Angīrasa, expld as jutiyā adhivacanaṃ ” i.e. brightness, excellency).

7. at t. t. in philosophy “essential property” (Expos. 84), combd with lakkhaṇa etc. (cp. Cpd. 13, 213), either kicca˚ function or sampatti˚; property Dhs-a 63, Dhs-a 249; Vism 8 Vism 448; Mil 148.

8. fine substance, semi-solid semiliquid substance, extract, delicacy, fineness, dust Thus in paṭhavī˚; “essence of earth,” humus SN i.134 (trsln “taste of earth,” rather abstract); or rasapaṭhavī earth as dust or in great fineness, “primitive earth” (before taking solid shape) DN iii.86 sq. (trsl “savoury earth,” not quite clear), opp. to bhūmipappaṭaka; Vism 418; pabbata-rasa mountain extract rock-substance Ja iii.55; suvaṇṇa˚; gold dust Ja i.93. 9. (adj ■ ˚) tasting Vv 1611 (Amatarasā f. = nibbānarasāvinī Vv-a 85).

-agga finest quality (of taste), only in further compn with ˚aggita (ras-agga-s-aggita) most delicate sense trslnDial.) DN iii.167, and ˚aggin (ras-agga-s-aggin, cp Mvu ii.306: rasa-ras’ âgrin) of the best quality (of taste, cp. above 2), said of the Mahāpurisa DN ii.18 DN iii.144 (cp. trslnDial. ii.15 “his taste is supremely acute”). The phrase & its wording are still a little doubtful. Childers gives etym. of rasaggas-aggin as rasa-ggas-aggin, ggas representing; gras to swallow (not otherwise found in Pāli!), and expls the BSk. ras’âgrin as a distortion of the P. form. -añjana a sort of ointment (among 5 kinds), “vitriol” (Rh. D.) Vin i.203. -āda enjoying the objects of taste MN iii.168 -āyatana the sphere of taste DN iii.243, DN iii.290; Dhs 629 Dhs 653, Dhs 1195 (insert after gandha˚, see Dhs. trsl. 319) -ārammaṇa object of taste Dhs 12, Dhs 147, Dhs 157. -āsā craving for tastes Dhs 1059. -garuka bent on enjoyment Snp-a 107. -taṇhā thirst for taste, lust of sensual enjoyment DN iii.244, DN iii.280; Ja v.293; Dhs 1059; Dhp-a iv.196. -saññā perception of tastes DN iii.244 (where also ˚sañcetanā). -haraṇī (f.) [ph. ˚haraṇiyo, in compn haraṇi˚] taste-conductor, taste-receiver; the salivary canals of the mouth or the nerves of sensation; these are in later literature given as numbering 7000, e.g. at Ja v.293 (khobhetvā phari); Dhp-a i.134 (anuphari) Kp-a 51 (only as 7!); Snp-a 107 (paṭhama-kabaḷe mukhe pakkhitta-matte satta rasa-haraṇi-sahassāni amaten eva phutāni ahesuṃ). Older passages are: Vin ii.137; DN iii.167 (referring to the Mahāpurisa: “sampajjasā r-haranī susaṇṭhitā,” trsln: erect taste-bearers planted well [in throat]).

Vedic rasa; with Lat. ros “dew,” Lith. rasā id., and Av Ranhā Name of a river, to Idg. *eres to flow, as in Sk. arṣati, Gr. α ̓́ψορρος (to ῥέω); also Sk. ṛṣabha: see usabha1Dhtp 325 defines as “ assādane ” 629 as “assāda-snehanesu”; Dhtm 451 as “assāde.”-The decl. is usually as regular a-stem, but a secondary instr fr. an s-stem is to be found in rasasā by taste AN ii.63; Ja iii.328

Rasa2

(-˚) is a dial. form of ˚dasa ten, and occurs in Classic Pāli only in the numerals for 13 (terasa), 15 (paṇṇa-rasa, pannarasa), 17 (sattarasa) & 18 (aṭṭhārasa, late). The Prk. has gone further: see Pischel; Prk. Gr. § 245.

Rasaka

a cook Ja v.460, Ja v.461, Ja v.507.

fr. rasa, cp. Classic Sk. rasaka

Rasati

to shout, howl Ja ii.407 (vv.ll. rayati, vasati; C. expls as “nadati”) = iv.346 (v.l. sarati).

ras

Rasatta

(nt.) taste, sweetness Snp-a 299.

fr. rasa

Rasavatī

(f.) “possessing flavours” i.e. a kitchen Vin i.140.

rasa + vant

Rasāvin

(adj. tasting Vv-a 85 (nibbāna˚).

fr. rasa

Rasīyati

to find taste or satisfaction in (gen.), to delight in, to be pleased AN iv.387 (bhāsitassa), 388 (C.: tussati, see p. 470).

Pass ■ Demon ■ formation fr. rasa

Rasmi

see raṃsi.

Rassa

(adj.) short (opp dīgha) DN i.193 (dīghā vā r. vā majjhimā ti vā), 223 (in contrast with d.); Snp 633; Dhp 409; Ja i.356; Dhs 617 Vism 272 (def.); Dhp-a iv.184 ■ Cp. ati˚.

-ādesa reduction of the determination (here of vowel in ending) Ja iii.489. -sarīra (adj.) dwarfish, stunted Ja i.356.

cp. Sk. hrasva: Geiger, P.Gr. § 492. The Prk. forms are rahassa & hassa: Pischel § 354

Rassatta

(nt.) shortness, reduction (of vowel) Dhs-a 149.

fr. rassa

Rahati

to leave, desert: see pp. rahita & der.; rahas rahassa.

rah, defd at Dhtp 339 & 632 by “cāga,” giving up, also at Dhtm 490 by “cāgasmiṃ,” 876 by cāga and gata

Rahada

a (deep) pond, a lake DN i.50 (˚ṃ iva vippasannaṃ udānaṃ); SN i.169 = SN i.183 (dhammo rahado sīla-tittho); Snp 721 = Mil 414 (rahado pūro va paṇḍito) Iti 92 (rahado va nivāto), 114 (r. sa-ummi sāvaṭṭo sagaho); Dhp-a ii.152 ■ As udaka˚; at DN i.74, DN i.84; AN iii.25 (ubbhid-odako); Pp 47 ■ On r. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127.

Vedic hrada, with diaeresis & metathesis *harada → rahada; the other metathetic form of the same hrada is *draha → daha

Rahas & Raho

(nt.) lonely place, solitude, loneliness; secrecy, privacy.

1. raho: occurring only as adv. “secretly, lonely, in secret,” either absolutely, e.g. SN i.46; Snp 388; Pv ii.716 (opp. āvi openly); iv.140 (raho nisinna); Vism 201 (na raho karoti pāpāni arahaṃ tena vuccati); or in cpds. e.g. ˚gata being in private, being alone DN i.134 (+ paṭisallīna); Snp p.60 See also under paṭisallīna; ˚gama “secret convention secret intercourse,” fig. a secret adviser Ja vi.369 (after Kern, not found!); ˚vāda secret talk MN iii.230. See also anu˚.

2. rahā˚; only in cpd. rahā-bhāva secrecy in defn of arahant at DN-a i.146 = Vism 201 (rahābhāvena ten’ esa arahan ti). See also der. rāha-seyyaka. Note. Hardy’s reading yathā rahaṃ at Pv ii.923 & Pv-a 78 is not correct, it should be yath’ ârahaṃ (cp. similarly pūj-âraha). In the same sense we would preferably read agg’ āsan’ ādi-arahānaṃ “of those who merit the first seat etc.” at Ja i.217, although all MSS. have aggāsanādi-rahānaṃ, thus postulating a form raha = araha.

Vedic rahas. The Pāli word is restricted to the forms raho and rahā˚; (= *rahaḥ); a loc. rahasi is mentioned by Childers, but not found in the Canon ■ To rahati

Rahassa

(adj. nt.) secret, private; nt. secrecy, secret Mvu 35, Mvu 64 (vatvā rahassaṃ); instr. rahassena (as adv.) secretly Mvu 36, Mvu 80; acc. rahassaṃ id. Pv iv.165.

-kathā secret speech, whispered words Ja i.411; Ja ii.6.

Sk. rahasya

Rahassaka

(adj.) secret Mil 91 (guyhaṃ na kātabbaṃ na rahassakaṃ).

fr. rahassa

Rahāyati

to be lonely, to wish to be alone MN ii.119.

Denom. fr. rahas; not corresponding to Sk. rahayati, C. of rahati to cause to leave

Rahita

1. lonely, forsaken Thig 373 (gantum icchasi rahitaṃ bhiṃsanakaṃ mahāvanaṃ).

2. deprived of, without (-˚) Ja iii.369 (buddhiyā rahitā sattā); DN-a i.36 (avaṇṇa˚); Pv-a 63 (bhoga˚), 67 (ācāra˚), 77 (gandha˚). Note. samantarahita is to be divided as sam-antarahita.

pp. of rah

Rāga

1. colour, hue; colouring, dye Vin ii.107 (anga˚ “rougeing” the body bhikkhū angarāgaṃ karonti); Thag-a 78; Snp-a 315 (nānāvidha˚).

2 (as t. t. in philosophy & ethics) excitement passion; seldom by itself, mostly in combn with dosa, & moha;, as the three fundamental blemishes of character: passion or lust (uncontrolled excitement) ill-will (anger) and infatuation (bewilderment): see dosa2 & moha; cp. sarāga ■ These three again appear in manifold combns with similar terms, all giving var shades of the “craving for existence” or “lust of life (taṇhā etc.), or all that which is an obstacle to nibbāna Therefore the giving up of rāga is one of the steps towards attaining the desired goal of emancipation (vimutti) ■ Some of the combns are e.g. the 3 (r. d m.) + kilesa; + kodha; very often fourfold r. d. m. with māna, these again with diṭṭhi: see in full Nd ii.s. v. rāga (p. 237), cp. below ussada ■ Of the many passages illustrating the contrast rāga → nibbāna the foll. may be mentioned: chandarāga vinodanaṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ Snp 1086; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṃ vuccati amataṃ SN v.8; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ SN iv.251; ye ‘dha pajahanti kāmarāgaṃ bhavararāganu-sayañ ca pahāya… parinibbāna-gatā Vv 5324; kusalo jahati pāpakaṃ… rāga dosa-mohakkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85 ■ Personified, Rāga (v.l. Ragā), Taṇhā & Arati; are called the “daughters of Māra” (Māradhītā): Snp 835; Dhp-a iii.199; Nd i.181 ■ For further detail of meaning & application see e.g ■ (1) with; dosa & moha;: DN i.79, DN i.156 DN iii.107, DN iii.108, DN iii.132; SN i.184; SN iv.139, SN iv.195, SN iv.250, SN iv.305 SN v.84, SN v.357 sq.; MN ii.138 (rasa˚ the excitement of taste) AN i.52, AN i.156 sq., 230 sq.; ii.256; iii.169, 451 sq. iv.144; Iti 56, Iti 57; Vism 421; Vb-a 268, Vb-a 269 (sa & vīta˚) ■ (2) in other connection: DN iii.70, DN iii.74, DN iii.146 DN iii.175, DN iii.217, DN iii.234 (arūpa˚), 249 (cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati) SN ii.231 = SN ii.271 (cittaṃ anuddhaṃseti); iii.10; iv.72, 329 v.74 (na rāgaṃ jāneti etc.); AN ii.149 (tibba-rāga-jātiko rāgajaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti); iii.233, 371 (kāmesu vīta˚); iv.423 (dhamma˚); Snp 2, Snp 74, Snp 139, Snp 270 = SN i.207 (+ dosa); Snp 361, Snp 493, Snp 764, Snp 974, Snp 1046; Dhp 349 (tibba˚ bahala-rāga Dhp-a iv.68); Pts i.80 sq.; Pts ii.37 (rūpa˚), 95 (id.); Vb 145 sq. (= taṇhā), 368 (= kiñcana), 390 Tikp 155, 167; DN-a i.116 ■ Opp. virāga.

-aggi the fire of passion DN iii.217; SN iv.19; Iti 92 (r dahati macce ratte kāmesu mucchite; + dosaggi mohaggi); Ja i.61 (˚imhi nibbute nibbutaṃ nāma hoti) -ānusaya latent bias of passion (for = dat.) SN iv.205 (the 3 anusayas: rāga˚, paṭigha˚, avijjā˚); Iti 80 (yo subhāya dhātuyā rāgo so padūyati). -ussada conceit of lust, one of the 7 ussadas (r. d. m., māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa kamma) Nd i.72. -kkhaya the decay (waning) of p SN iii.51, SN iii.160: iv.142, 250, 261; v.8, 16, 25; Vb-a 51 sq. -carita one whose habit is passion, of passionate behaviour Mil 92; Vism 105 sq. (in det.), 114 (+ dosa˚ moha˚), 193; Kp-a 54 (colour of the blood of his heart cp. Vism 409) -ṭṭhānīya founded on passion AN i.264 AA 32. -patha way of lust, lustfulness, passion, sensuality SN iv.70; Snp 370, Snp 476 (with expln “rāgo pi hi duggatīnaṃ pathattā rāgapatho ti vuccati” Snp-a 410) -rati passionate or lustful delight Dhp-a iii.112; -ratta affected with passion SN i.136; Snp 795 (as ˚rāgin, cp Nd i.100 = kāma-guṇesu ratta).

cp. Sk. rāga, fr. raj: see rajati

Rāgin

(-˚) one who shows passion for, possessed of lust, affected with passion Snp 795 (cp. Nd i.100) SN i.136; Vism 193, Vism 194 (with var. characterisations).

fr. rāga

Rājaka

(adj.) (-˚) characteristic of the king, king-; in cpds arājaka without a king Ja vi.39 (raṭṭhe); sarājaka including the king Tikp 26; f. sarājikā Vin i.209 (parisā) Also in phrase anikkhanta-rājake (loc. abs.) when the king has not gone out Vin iv.160.

rāja + ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.

Rājañña

“royalty”; a high courtier, a khattiya (= rājabhogga, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 100) DN i.103 (Pasenadi rājā… uggehi vā rājaniyehi vā kañcid eva mantanaṃ manteyya) DN-a i.273 (= anabhisittā kumārā, i.e. uncrowned princes); Mil 234; Vv-a 297 (Pāyāsi r.).

fr. rājā, cp, Vedic rājanya

Rājatā

(f.) state of being a king, kingship, sovereignty Ja i.119 (anuttara-dhamma˚ being a most righteous king).

abstr. fr. rājā

Rājati

to shine Vv-a 134 (= vijjotati). Cp.; vi˚. Raja (Rajan)

rāj, cp. rajati & rañjati

Rājā (Rājan)

king, a ruling potentate. The defn at Vin iii.222 is “yo koci rajjaṃ kāreti.” The fanciful etym. at DN iii.93 Vism 419 is “dhammena pare rañjetī ti rājā” i.e. he gladdens others with his righteousness ■ At the latter passage the origin of kingly government is given as the third stage in the constitution of a people, the 2 preceding being mahā-sammata (general consent) and khattiya (the land-aristocrats) ■ Cases. We find 3 systems of cases for the original Sk. forms, viz. the contracted, the diaeretic and (in the pl.) a new formation with-ū-. Thus gen. & dat. sg.; rañño [Sk. rājñaḥ Vin iii.107; Vin iv.157; Ja ii.378; Ja iii.5; Vv 744; and rājino Snp 299, Snp 415; Thig 463; Ja iv.495; Mvu 2, Mvu 14; instr. sg. raññā Vin iii.43; Ja v.444; Dhp-a i.164; Pv-a 22; Vb-a 106; and rājinā [Sk. rajña] Mvu 6, Mvu 2; acc. sg. rājānaṃ Vin iv.157; loc. raññe Pv-a 76; voc. rāja Snp 422, Snp 423 pl. nom. rājāno AN i.68; gen. dat. raññaṃ [Sk. rājñaṃ DN ii.87; Mvu 18, Mvu 32; and rājūnaṃ Vin i.228; Ud 11; Ja ii.104; Ja iii.487; Snp-a 484; Pv-a 101, Pv-a 133; instr. raññāhi AN i.279 rājūhi Ud 41; MN ii.120; Ja i.179; Ja iii.45 Mvu 5, Mvu 80; Mvu 8, Mvu 21; and rājubhi DN ii.258. Cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 921.

1. rājā is a term of sovereignship. The term rājā as used in Buddhist India does not admit of a uniform interpretation and translation. It is primarily an appellative (or title) of a khattiya, and often the two are used promiscuously. Besides, it has a far wider sphere of meaning than we convey by any trsln like “king” or even “sovereign,” or “prince.” We find it used as a designation of “king” in the sense of an elected or successory (crowned) monarch, but also in the meaning of a distinguished nobleman, or a local chieftain, or a prince with var. attributes characterizing his position according to special functions. From this we get the foll. scheme: (a) [based on mythological views: the king as representing the deity, cp. deva king. Note that rājā never takes the place of deva in the meaning king, but that mahārāja is used in voc equivalent to deva ] a world-king, over-lord, a so-called cakkavatti rājā. This is an office (as “Universal King”) peculiar to the Mahāpurisa or the (mythol. “Great Man,” who may become either the Saviour of men in the religious sense, a Sammā-sambuddha, or a just Ruler of the earth in the worldly sense, a King of Righteousness. These are the 2 gatis of such a being as described at var. places of the Canon (e.g. Snp p.106; Snp 1002, Snp 1003; DN iii.142; AN i.76). His power is absolute, and is described in the standard phrase “c dhammiko dhamma-rājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariya-ppatto satta-ratana-samannāgato,” e.g. DN iii.59. Dhammapāla gives the dignity of a C. as the first “human sovereign powers” (Pv-a 117). The four iddhi’s of a C. are given (quite crudely) at MN iii.176: he is beautiful, lives longer than others, is of a healthier constitution than others, he is beloved by the brahmins and householders. Other qualities: how his remains should be treated = DN ii.141; deserves a thūpa DN ii.142 sq.; his four qualities DN ii.145 (the 4 assemblies of khattiyas, brāhmaṇas, gahapatis samaṇas are pleased with him). See under cakkavatti & ratana ■ In a similar sense the term; dhamma-rājā is used as Ep. of the Buddha Snp 554 (rāj’ âham asmi dh-.r. anuttaro); Ja i.262; and a reflection of the higher sphere is seen in the title of politeness (only used in voc.) mahārāja, e.g. Snp 416 (addressed to Bimbisāra Pv-a 22 (id.); Ja vi.515 ■ (b) [in a larger constitutional state] the crowned (muddhâvasitta) monarch (i.e. khattiya) as the head of the principality or kingdom The defn of this (general) rājā at Nd ii.542 is significant of the idea of a king prevalent in early Buddhist times It is: “khattiyo muddh’ âbhisitto vijita-sangāmo nihata-paccāmitto laddh’ adhippāyo paripuṇṇa-koṭthāgāro,” i.e. “a crowned noble, victorious in battle slaying his foes, fulfilling his desires, having his storehouses full.” This king is “the top of men” (mukhaṃ manussānaṃ) Vin i.246 = Snp 568. Cp. DN i.7; Snp 46 (raṭṭhaṃ vijitam pahāya); Ja v.448 and passim. See also below 3. 4 & 6 ■ In similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907 128; & cp. Vism 152 (r. va saddh’ antagato), 336 (wishing to become an artisan). Here belongs the title of the king of the devas (Sakka) “ deva-rājā, ” e.g. Dhp-a iii.269, Dhp-a iii.441; Pv-a 62 ■ (c) [in an oligarchic sense member of a kula of khattiyas, e.g. the kumāras of the Sakiyans and Koliyans are all called rājāno of the rājakulānaṃ in Ja v.413 sq., or at least the heads of those kulas. Cp. B. Ind. p. 19 ■ (d) [in a smaller, autocratic state] a chieftain, prince, ruler; usually (collectively as a group: rājāno, thus indicating their lesser importance e.g. AN v.22 (kuḍḍa-rājāno rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti: so read for anuyantā); Snp 553 (bhoja˚ similar to rāja-bhoggā or bhogiyā as given at Snp-a 453); AN ii.74 sq. (dhammikā & a˚); Ja iv.495 Similarly at Vin i.228 we find the division into the 3 ranks: mahesakkhā rājāno, majjhimā r., nīcā r. Here also belongs the designation of the 4 lokapālā (or Guardians of the World) at cattāro mahā-rājāno, the mahā˚ being added for sake of politeness (cp. Note A on mahā ), e.g. AN iv.242. See also paṭirājā & cp. below 4 c ■ (e) A wider range of meaning is attached to several sub-divisions (with rājā or without): officials and men who occasionally take the place of the king (royal functionaries), but are by public opinion considered almost equal to the king. Here belongs the def;n of what is termed “ rājāno ” (pl. like d) at Vin iii.47, viz. rājā, padesa-rājā, maṇḍalikā, antarabhogikā akkhadassā, mahāmattā, ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsanti (i.e. those who have juridical power). See also below 4 b, and ˚putta, ˚bhogga [ other cpds.].

2. It would fill a separate book, if we were to give a full monograph of kingship in and after the Buddha’s time; we therefore content ourselves with a few principal remarks. The office of king was hereditary: kula-santakaṃ rajjaṃ Ja i.395; Ja ii.116; Ja iv.124 but we sometimes read of a king being elected with great pomp: Ja i.470; Pv-a 74. He had the political and military power in his hand, also the jurisdiction although in this he is often represented by the mahāmatta, the active head of the state. His 10 duties are mentioned at several places (see below under ˚dhammā) Others are mentioned e.g. at DN i.135, where it is said he gives food and seed-corn to the farmer, capital to the trader, wages to the people in government service. His qualifications are 8 fold (see D i.137): well-born (“gentleman,” khattiya), handsome, wealthy, powerful (with his army), a believer, learned, clever, intelligent. His wealth is proverbial and is characterized in a stock phrase, which is also used of other ranks, like seṭṭhi’s & brāhmaṇa’s, viz. “aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga pahūta-jātarūpa-rajata pahūta-vitt’ ûpakaraṇa pahūtadhana-dhañña paripuṇṇa-kosa-koṭṭhāgāra,” e.g. DN i.134. For a late description of a king’s quality and distinction see Mil 226, Mil 227 ■ His disciplinary authority is emphasized; he spares no tortures in punishing adversaries or malefactors, esp. the cora (see below 4 c). A summary example of these punishments inflicted on criminals is the long passage illustrating dukkha (bodily pain) at Nd ii.304iii cp. MN iii.163 (here also on a cora ).

3. The king (rājā or khattiya) in the popular opinion, as reflected in language, heads several lists, which have often been taken as enumerating “castes,” but which are simply inclusive statements of var. prominent ranks as playing a rôle in the social life of the state, and which were formulated according to diff. occasions. Thus some show a more political, some a more religious aspect. e.g. khattiya amacca brāhmaṇa gahapati DN i.136; rājā brāhmaṇa gahapatika AN i.68, where another formula has khattiya br. g. AN i.66; Ja i.217; and the foll. with an intermediate “rank” (something like “royalty, “the royal household”) between the king and the brahmins: rājā rājaputtā brāhmaṇā gahapatikā negama-jānapadā AN ii.74 sq.; rājāno rāja-mahāmattā khattiyā br., gah., titthiyā DN iii.44 (trslnDialogues too weak “rājas & their officials”); rājā rājabhogga br. gah. Vin iii.221.

4. Var. aspects illustrating the position of the king in relation to other prominent groups of the court or populace: (a) rājā & khattiya; All kings were khattiyas. The kh. is a noble κα ̓τἐςοξήν (cp. Gr. ἡγεμών) as seen fr. defn jāti-khattiya at Snp-a 453 and var. contexts. Already in the Rig Veda the kṣatriya is a person belonging to a royal family (RV x.109, 3), and rājanya is an Ep. of kṣatriya (see Zimmer Altindisches Leben 213) ■ rājā khattiyo muddhâvassito “a crowned king” DN i.69; DN iii.61 sq.; Vin iv.160; AN i.106 sq.; AN ii.207 (contrasted with brāhmaṇa mahāsāla); iii.299 (if lazy, he is not liked by the people) MN iii.172 sq. (how he becomes a cakkavatti through the appearance of the cakka-ratana) ■ Without muddhāvasitta: rājāno khattiyā Dhp 294 = Ne 165. Cp khattiyā bhoja-rājāno the khattiyas, the (noble or lesser?) kings (as followers of the cakkavatti) Snp 553 (see bhoja). At Ja vi.515. rājāno corresponds directly to khattiyā on p. 517 (saṭṭhisahassa˚); cp. expression khattiya-kula Ja i.217 as equivalent to rāja-kula (b) rājā & mahāmatta;. The latter occupies the position of “Premier,” but is a rank equal to the king hence often called rājā himself: Vin iii.47 where styled “akkhadassa mahāmatta.” Otherwise he is always termed rāja-mahāmatta “royal minister,” or “H.R.H the Premier,” e.g. Vin i.172; AN i.279; Vin i.228 (also as Magadha-mahāmatta), and called himself a khattiya DN iii.44 ■ (c) rājā & cora;. A prominent figure in the affairs of State is the “robber-chief” (mahā-cora) The contrast-pair rajāno (so always pl.) & cora is very frequent, and in this connection we have to think of rājāno as either smaller kings, knights or royals (royalists), i.e. officers of the kings or “the king’s Guards. Thus at Ja iii.34 the C. expln as rāja-purisā. It is here used as a term of warning or frightening “get up robber, so that the kings (alias ʻpolicemanʼ) won’t catch you”: uṭṭhehi cora mā taṃ gahesuṃ rājāno Other passages are e.g. : DN i.7 (rāja-kathā & corakathā) = Vin i.188; MN iii.163 (rājāno coraṃ āgucāriṃ gahetvā); AN i.68, AN i.154; Iti 89 (rāj’ âbhinīta + cor˚); in sequence; rājāno corā dhuttā (as being dangerous to the bhikkhus) at Vin i.150, Vin i.161.

5. On the question of kingship in Ancient India see Zimmer Altind. Leben pp. 162

175, 212 sq.; Macdonell & Keith; Vedic Index ii.210 sq.; Fick, Soc. Gl. 63

90; Foy, Die Königl. Gewalt nach den altind. Rechtsbüchern (Leipzig 1895); Rh. Davids, Buddhist India pp. 1

16; Hopkins E. W., The social and military position of the ruling caste in A. I. in J.A.O.S. 13, 179 sq.; Banerjea Public Administration in A. I. 1916, pp. 63

93.

6 Kings mentioned by name [a very limited & casual list only, for detailed refs. see DPPN] Ajātasattu; Udena (Dhp-a i.185); Okkāka; Dīghī (of Kosala; Vin i.342); Parantapa (of Kosambī; Dhp-a i.164;) Pasenadi (of Kosala; DN i.87, DN i.103; Vin iv.112 Vin iv.157); Bimbisāra (of Magadha; Vin iv.116 sq.; Snp 419) Bhaddiya; etc.

7. (fig.) king as sign of distinction (“princeps”), as the lion is called rājā migānaṃ Snp 72; Vism 650; the Himavant is pabbata -rājā AN i.152; AN iii.44; and Gotama’s horse Kaṇthaka is called assa -rājā Ja i.62 = Vv-a 314Note. The compn form of rājā is rāja˚.

-āgāra a king’s (garden-or pleasure-) house DN i.7 (˚ka); DN-a i.42. -aṅga royal mark, characteristic or qualification; king’s property Vin i.219 (rājangaṃ hatthī: the elephants belong to the king), cp. AN i.244 assājāniyo rañño angan t’ eva sankhaṃ gacchati is called king’s property. -aṅgana royal court Pv-a 74. -āṇatti king’s permission Tikp 26 (in simile). -āṇā (1) the king’s command Ja iii.180; cp. Pv-a 217 “rañño āṇā” (2) the king’s fine or punishment, i.e. a punishment inflicted by the king (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. 74), synonymous with rāja-daṇḍa: Ja i.369, Ja i.433 (rājāṇaṃ karoti to inflict) ii.197; iii.18, 232, 351; iv.42; vi.18; Pv-a 242. -ānubhāva king’s power, majesty, authority, pomp Ja iv.247; Pv-a 279. -antepura the royal harem AN v.81, AN v.82 (the 10 risks which a bhikkhu is running when visiting it for alms). -ābhinīta brought by a king Iti 89 (+ corâbhinīta). -ābhirājā “king of kings” Snp 553; Dhs-a 20. -āmacca royal minister Ja v.444 (˚majjhe). -āyatana Name of a tree: “Kingstead tree,” the royal tree (as residence of a king of fairies), Buchanania latifolia Vin i.3 sq. (where Mvu iii.303 reads kṣīrikā, i.e. milk-giving tree); Ja i.80; Ja iv.361 sq.; Dhs-a 35; Vb-a 433 (˚cetiya). -iddhi royal power Pv-a 279. -isi a royal seer, a king who gives up his throne & becomes an ascetic (cp. Sk. rājarṣi, freq. in Mhbhārata & Rāmā yana) Thag 1127 (read rāja-d-isi); Iti 21 (rājīsayo, with var vv.ll. not quite the same meaning); Ja vi.116, Ja vi.124 Ja vi.127, Ja vi.518; Dhp-a iv.29. Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading rājīsi ■ upaṭṭhāna attendance on the king, royal audience Vin i.269; Ja i.269, Ja i.349; Ja iii.119, Ja iii.299; Ja iv.63 -ūpabhoga fit for use by the king Mil 252. -uyyāna royal garden or pleasure ground Ja iii.143; Mvu 15, Mvu 2 -orodhā a lady from the king’s harem, a royal concubine Vin iv.261. -kakudha-bhaṇḍa an ensign of royalty (5: khagga, chatta, uṇhīsa, pādukā, vālavījanī) Dhp-a i.356. See under kakudha. -kathā talk about kings (as tiracchānakathā in disgrace), combd with corakathā (see above 4 c) DN i.7; DN iii.36, DN iii.54; Vin i.188. -kammika a royal official, one employed by the king Ja i.439 Ja iv.169. -kuṭumba the king’s property Ja i.439. -kuṇḍa a “crook of a king” Dhp-a iii.56. -kumāra a (royal prince (cp. khattiya-kumāra) Vin i.269; Ja iii.122 Vb-a 196 (in comparison). -kumbhakāra a “royal potter,” i.e. a potter being “purveyor to the king Ja v.290. -kula the king’s court or palace AN i.128 AN ii.205; Vin iv.265; Ja ii.301; Dhp-a ii.44, Dhp-a ii.46; Dhp-a iii.124 -khādāya puṭṭha at Snp 831 is according to Kern Toev. to be read as rajakkhatāya ph. (fr. rajakkha) The old Niddesa, however, reads ˚khādāya & expl;ns the word (Nd i.171) by rājabhojanīyena, i.e. the king’s food, which is alright without being changed. -guṇa “virtue of a king” MN i.446 (trick of a circus horse + rāja-vaṃsa). -daṇḍa punishment ordered by the king Pv-a 216, Pv-a 217. -dāya a royal gift DN i.127; DN-a i.246 -dūta king’s messenger Snp 411, Snp 412; in meaning of “message,” i.e. calling somebody to court, summons at Ja ii.101, Ja ii.305. -dhamma “king’s rule,” i.e. rule of governing, norm of kingship; usually given as a set of 10, which are enumd at Ja iii.274 as “dāna, sīla, pariccāga ajjava, maddava, tapo, akkodha, avihiṃsā, khanti avirodhana,” i.e. alms-giving, morality, liberality straightness, gentleness, self-restriction, non-anger non-hurtfulness, forbearance non-opposition. These are referred to as dasa rājadhammā at Ja i.260, Ja i.399 Ja ii.400; Ja iii.320; Ja v.119, Ja v.378; usually in phrase “dasa rāja-dhamme akopetvā dhammena rajjan kāresi” he ruled in righteousness, not shaking the tenfold code of the king. Another set of 3 are mentioned at Ja v.112, viz. “vitathaṃ kodhaṃ hāsaṃ nivāraye” (expld as giving up musāvāda, kodha & adhamma-hāsa); -dhānī a royal city (usually combd with gāma & nigama AN i.159; AN ii.33; AN iii.108; Vin iii.89; Ja v.453; Pv 1318 -dhītā king’s daughter, princess Ja i.207; Pv-a 74 -nivesana the king’s abode, i.e. palace Dhp-a iv.92 -parisā royal assembly Vin ii.296. -pīla (?) Dhp-a i.323 -putta lit. “king’s son,” prince, one belonging to the royal clan (cp. similarly kulaputta), one of royal descent, Rājput Snp 455; Mil 331; Vb-a 312, Vb-a 319 (in simile); Pv-a 20. f. ˚puttī princess Ja iv.108; Ja v.94 -purisa “king’s man,” only in pl. ˚purisā the men of the king, those in the king’s service (as soldiers, body-guard policeman etc.) Ja iii.34; Vb-a 80 (˚ânubandha-corā) 109. -porisa (m. & nt.) servant of the king, collectively: king’s service, those who devote themselves to Govt. service DN i.135; MN i.85 = Nd ii.199; AN iv.281, AN iv.286 See also porisa ■ bali royal tax Ja i.354. -bhaṭa king’s hireling or soldier Vin i.74, Vin i.88; Snp-a 38 (in simile -bhaya fear of the king’s punishment) Vism 121 -bhāga the king’s share Ja ii.378. -bhogga 1. royal in the service of the king, in foll. phrases: rāja-bhoggaṃ raññā dinnaṃ rāja-dāyaṃ brahma-deyyaṃ DN i.87, of a flourishing place. Dial. i.108 trsls “with power over it as if he were king,” and expls with: “where the king has proprietary rights.” The C. rather unmeaningly expls as “rāja-laddha” (DN-a i.245). The BSk. has a curious version of this phrase: “rājñā-agni- dattena brahmadeyyaṃ dattaṃ” (given by the king in the place of agni?) Divy 620 ■ Further at Vin iii.221 in sequence rājā r-bhogga, brāhmaṇa, gahapatika where the C. expls (on p. 222) as “yo koci rañño bhatta-vetan’ āhāro.” (We should be inclined to take this as No. 2.)-Thirdly, in stock phrase “rājâraha rājabhogga rañño angan t’ eva sankhaṃ gacchati,” i.e. worthy of a king, imperial, he justifies the royal qualification said of a thoroughbred horse at AN i.244 AN ii.113; of a soldier (yodh’ ājīva) at AN i.284; of an elephant at Ja ii.370 (where it is expld as “rāja paribhoga”) Also as “royal possessions” in general at Dhp-a i.312 Dhp-a i.13 ■ Fick, Soc. Gl. 99 does not help much, he takes it as “king’s official.”

2. royal, of royal power, one entitled to the throne. Either as bhogga, bhogiya (Snp-a 453) or (khattiyā) bhoja-rājāno (Snp 553). Thus at Vin iii.221, where it takes the place of the usual khattiya “royal noble” & Snp 553, where it is comb;d (as bhoja rājano) with khattiyā. See also bhoja & cp (antara); bhogika and rājañña ■ mahāmatta king’s prime minister (see above 4 b, to which add: DN iii.44; AN i.154, AN i.252, AN i.279; AN iii.128; Vb-a 312 (simile of 2), 340. -mālakāra royal gardener Ja v.292 -muddā the royal seal Dhp-a i.21. -muddikā id. Snp-a 577. -ratha the king’s chariot Dhp-a iii.122. -rukkha “royal tree,” Cathartocarpus fistula Vv-a 43. -vara the best king, famous king Vv 321 (= Sakka Vv-a 134) -vallabha the king’s favourite, or overseer Mvu 37, Mvu 10; Vb-a 501 (in simile). -vibhūti royal splendour or dignity Pv-a 216, Pv-a 279. -haṃsa “royal swan,” a sort of swan or flamingo Vism 650 (suvaṇṇa˚, in simile).

cp. Vedic rājā, n-stem. To root *reg, as in Lat. rego (to lead, di-rect, cp. in meaning Gr. ἡγεμών): see etym. under uju. Cp. Oir. rī king, Gallic Catu-rīx battle king, Goth reiks = Ohg. rīhhi = rich or Ger. reich. Besides we have *reig in Ags. rāēcean reach; Ger. reichen ■ The Dhtp only knows of one root rāj in meaning “ditti” i.e. splendour

Rāji1

a streak, line, row Snp p.107 (nīla-vana˚ = dark line of trees, expld as nīla-vana rukkha-panti Snp-a 451); Vv 644 (nabhyo sata-rāji-cittita “coloured with 100 streaks”; Vv-a = lekhā); 646 (veḷuriya˚) pabbata˚; a mountain range Ja ii.417; dīgha˚; (adj.) of long lineage Pv-a 68; dvaṅgula˚; a band 2 inches broad Dāvs v.49; roma˚; a row of hair (on the body) Ja v.430.

cp. Sk. rāji

Rāji2

dissension, quarrel, in phrase saṅgha˚; (+ sanghabheda) Vin ii.203 (quoted at Vb-a 428) iv.217.

fr. rāga?

Rājikā

(f.) a certain (gold) weight (a seedcorn of Sinapis ramosa) Thag 97 = Thag 862 (kaṃsa sata 100 mustard seeds in weight, i.e. very costly); Ja vi.510 (kaṃse sovaṇṇe satarājike).

cp. Sk. rājikā

Rājita

: see vi˚.

Rājin

(adj.) having streaks or stripes, in uddhagga˚; having prominent stripes (of a lion) Ja iv.345.

fr. rāji

Rājimant

(adj.) having streaks or stripes; f. rājimatī shining, radiant Vv 321 (v.l. rājāputti), expld at Vv-a 134 as follows: “rājati vijjotatī ti rājī: rājī ti matā paññātā rājimatī” (thus connecting ˚mant with man ).

fr. rāji1

Rājula

a certain reptile Abhp 651.

cp. Sk. rājila

Rāti

to take up no refs.

Sk. to give, bestow; given at Dhtp 369 & Dhtm 597 in meaning “ādāne,” with doublet

Rādheti1

to please: see cpds. abhi˚ apa˚, ā˚ vi˚.

Caus. of rādh to succeed, rādhyate. The root is given at Dhtp 420 & Dhtm 656 in meaning “saṃsiddhiyaṃ,” i.e. of success. See etym. at Walde, Lat Wtb. s. v. reor.

Rādheti2

no refs.

rādh? Given at Dhtp 424 & Dhtm 656 in meaning “hiṃsāyaṃ,” i.e. of hurting

Rāma

pleasure, sport, amusement; ˚kara having pleasure, sporting, making love Ja v.448.

fr. ram; cp. Vedic rāma

Rāmaṇeyyaka

(adj. nt.) pleasant agreeable, lovely AN i.35, AN i.37; Dhp 98 (= ramaṇīya Dhp-a iii.195); nt. delightfulness, lovely scenery MN i.365 (four seen in a dream: ārāma˚, vana˚, bhūmi pokkharaṇī˚).

orig. grd. of rāmeti, ram, cp. Sk. rāmaṇīya. On e for ī see Geiger, P.Gr. § 10

Rāva

crying, howling; shout, noise Ja i.162 (baddha˚ the cry of one who is caught); iv.415 (id.); vi.475 (of the cries of animals, known to an expert); Mil 254 (bherava-rāvaṃ abhiravati); Mvu 10, Mvu 69 (mahā-rāvaṃ arāvi).

fr. ravati, cp. rava

Rāsi

1. heap, quantity, mass Iti 17; usually -˚, e.g. aṅgāra˚; heap of cinders Ja i.107; kaṇikārapuppha˚; of k. flowers Vv-a 65; kahāpaṇa˚; of money Pv-a 162, tila˚; of seeds Vv-a 54; dhañña˚; of corn AN iv.163, AN iv.170; etc ■ rāsiṃ karoti to make a heap, to pile up Mvu 29, Mvu 28; Vv-a 157.

2. (store of) wealth riches; in ˚agga-dāna gift of the best treasures (of one’s property), one of the 5 “donations of the best,” viz khett˚, rās˚, koṭṭh˚, kumbhi˚, bhojan˚: Snp-a 270 See also ˚vaḍḍhaka

3. a sign of the Zodiac (the 12 as given at Abhp 61 are: mesa, usabha, methuna kakkata, sīha, kaññā, tulā, vicchikā, dhanu, makara kumbha, mīna; or the ram, bull, twins, crab, lion, virgin balance, scorpion bow, capricorn, waterpot, fish) Pv-a 198.

4. (fig.) at t. t. in logic: group, aggregate category, congery; freq. in Abhidhamma-literature where 3 “accumulations” are spoken of, viz. micchatta-niyato rāsi, sammatta-niyato r., anivato r. or “wrong doing entailing immutable evil results, that of well-doing entailing immutable good results, and that of everything not so determined” (Dialogues iii.210) DN iii.217; Kv 611; Ne 96; cp. Kvu trsl. 356 Dhs trsl. 26, 253. In the 5 factors of individuality (body and mind) khandhā are explained as meaning rāsi e.g. Asl. 141; B. Psy. 42. In other connections SN v.146 (kusala˚, akusala˚), 186; AN iii.65 (akusala˚) Tikp 45. -Note. In BSk. we find only 2 of the 3 categories mentioned at Mvu i.175, viz. mithyātvaniyato & aniyato rāśih.;

-vaḍḍhaka one who increases wealth, i.e. a treasurer DN i.61 (trsln: “increases the king’s wealth”; DN-a i.170 simply defines “dhañña-rāsiñ ca dhana-rāsiñ ca vaḍḍhetī ti r. v.”); Ja i.2; Mhbv 78.

Vedic r̄āśi

Rāsika

(nt.) revenue, fisc DN i.135.

fr. rāsi

Rāhaseyyaka

(adj.) “having one’s bed in loneliness, living in seclusion or secrecy, in manussa˚; “fit to lie undisturbed by men” Vin i.39 (+ paṭisallāna-sāruppa) MN ii.118.

rahas + seyya + ka or rāha (for rahā˚) + seyyaka

Rāhu

Name of an Asura: see under Proper Names ■ rāhumukha “mouth of Rāhu,” designation of a certain punishment for criminals (MN i.87; MN iii.164 Nd i.154 (in list of tortures) = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197.

Vedic rāhu

Riṇāti

see under raya.

Riñcati

to leave, abandon leave behind, give up, neglect Vin i.190 (also fut riñcissati); MN i.155 (riñcissati), 403; SN iv.206; AN iii.86 sq., 108 sq., 343 sq., 366 sq., 437; Thag 1052; Snp 156; Mil 419; Ja v.403 ■ ppr. med. with neg.: ariñcamāna Snp 69; ger. riñcitvā (for Sk. riktvā) Thig 93 ■ pp. ritta -Pass. riccati [Sk. ricyate] to be left: see ati˚.

ric, in Vedic & Sk. rinakti; cp. Av. irinaxti to leave; Gr. λείπω id., λοιπός left; Lat. linquo id. Goth. leihwan = Ohg. līhan to lend; Ags lāēn = loan cp. E. leave etc ■ The defn of the root at Dhtp is given in two forms, viz. ric as “virecane” (No. 396; cp Dhtm 517 “kharaṇe,” i.e. flowing; 610 “recane”) and riñc as “riñcane” (No. 44)

Riñcana

(nt.) leaving behind, giving up Dhtp 44.

fr. riñc

Ritta

devoid, empty, free, rid (of) MN i.207 (+ tuccha), 414; Vin i.157 = Vin ii.216; Snp 823 (emancipated: ritto muni = vivitta etc. Nd i.158), 844 (opp. to aritta); Thig 265 (see rindi); Ja i.29 (v. 222); iii.492; Mil 383.

-assāda finding one’s taste in empty things AN i.280 (+ bāhir-assāda. Kern, Toev. s. v. reads rittāsa and trsls “impure (of food),” not according to the sense at all). -āsana an empty seat Snp 963 (expld at Nd i.481 as “opportunity for sitting down which is free from unbefitting sights”). -pesuṇa free fr. slander Snp 941 (expld at Nd i.422: “yassa pesuññaṃ pahīnaṃ” etc.) -muṭṭhi an empty fist (˚sadisa: comparing someone as regards ignorance) Snp-a 306 = Dhp-a iv.38. -hattha (adj.) empty-handed Ja v.46; Sdhp 309.

pp. of riñcati; cp. atireka

Rittaka

(adj.) empty, void, without reality Thag 41; Thag 2, Thag 394 (= tucchaka anto-sāra-rahita Thag-a 258) Pv iii.65 (of a river = tuccha Pv-a 202); Pv-a 139 (= suñña, virahita). Usually in combn with tucchaka as a standing phrase denoting absolute emptiness worthlessness, e.g. at DN i.240; MN i.329; SN iii.141.

ritta + ka

Rindī

at Thig 265 is doubtful. The T. reading is “te rindī va lambante ‘nodaka,” said of breasts hanging down in old age. The C. compares them with leather water bottles without water (udaka-bhastā viya). We have to read either with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 94 “ rittī va ” (= rittā iva), “as it were, empty,” or (preferably) with Thag-a 212therī ti va ” (“like an old woman”). The trsln (Sisters, p. 124) takes the C expln of udaka-bhastā as equivalent to T. reading rindi, in saying “shrunken as skins without water”; but rindī is altogether doubtful & it is better to read; therī which is according to the context. We find the same meaning of therī (“old woman”) at Pv ii.116.

Rissati

to be hurt, to suffer harm MN i.85 (ḍāṃsa-makasa-vāt’ ātapa-siriṃsapa-samphassehi rissamāno; where Nd ii.199 in same passage reads samphassamāna).

Vedic riṣ, riṣyati

Ruka

in cpd. aḍḍha˚; at Vin ii.134, referring to the shape of a beard, is doubtful. The v.l. is “ duka. ” Could it correspond to Vedic rukma (a certain ornament worn on the chest)?

Rukkha

a tree. In the rukkha-mūlik’ anga (see below Bdhgh at Vism 74 gives a list of trees which are not to be selected for the practice of “living at the root of a tree.” These are sīmantarika-rukkha, cetiya˚, niyyāsa˚ phala˚, vagguli˚, susira˚, vihāra-majjhe ṭhita˚, or a tree standing right on the border, a sacred tree, a resinous tree, a fruit t., a tree on which bats live, a hollow tree a tree growing in the middle of a monastery. The only one which is to be chosen is a tree “vihāra-paccante ṭhita,” or one standing on the outskirt of the Vihāra He then gives further advice as to the condition of the tree ■ Various kinds of trees are given in the defn of r. at Vism 183, viz. assattha, nigrodha, kacchaka kapitthaka; ucca, nīca, khuddaka, mahanto; kāḷa seta ■ A very complete list of trees mentioned in the Saṃyutta Nikāya is to be found in the Index to that Nikāya (vol. vi. p. 84, 85). On rukkha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 128–⁠130 ■ See also the foll. refs. AN i.137; AN ii.109, AN ii.207; AN iii.19, AN iii.200, AN iii.360; AN iv.99, AN iv.336 AN v.4 sq., 314 sq.; Snp 603, Snp 712; Ja i.35 (nāga˚); Vism 688 (in simile: mahārukkhe yāva kapp’ âvasānā bījaparamparāya rukkha-paveṇiṃ santāyamāne ṭhite) Vb-a 165 = Vism 555 (rukkha phalita); Vb-a 196 (in compn: jātassa avassaṃ jarā-maraṇaṃ, uppannassa rukkhassa patanaṃ viya), 334 sq. (as garu-bhaṇḍa) Snp-a 5 (“pathavi-ras’ ādim iva rukkhe”: with same simile as at Vism 688, with reading kappâvasānaṃ and santānente); Dhp-a iii.207 (amba˚); Vv-a 43 (rāja˚), 198 (amba˚); Dhp-a iv.120 (dīpa˚); Pv-a 43.

-antara the inside of a tree Pv-a 63. -koṭṭaka (-sakuṇa) the wood-pecker Ja iii.327 (= java sakuṇa) -gahana tree-thicket or entanglement AN i.154 (so for ˚gahaṇa). -devatā a tree spirit, dryad, a yakkha inhabiting a tree (rukkhe adhivatthā d. Vin iv.34; Ja ii.385; kakudhe adhivatthā d. Vin i.28) Ja i.168, Ja i.322 Ja ii.405, Ja ii.438 sq. (eraṇḍa˚), 445; iii.23; iv.308 (vanajeṭṭhaka-rukkhe nibbatta-devatā); Dhp-a ii.16; Pv-a 5 (in a Nigrodha tree), 43 (in the Vindhya forest). They live in a Nigrodha tree at the entrance of the village (Ja i.169), where they receive offerings at the foot of the tree (cp. iv.474), and occasionally one threatens them with discontinuance of the offerings if they do not fulfil one’s request. The trees are their vimānas (Ja i.328, Ja i.442; Ja iv.154), occasionally they live in hollow trees (Ja i.405; Ja iii.343) or in tree tops (Ja i.423) They have to rely on the food given to them (ibid.) for which they help the people (J iii.24; v.511). They assume various forms when they appear to the people (Ja i.423; Ja ii.357, Ja ii.439; Ja iii.23); they also have children (Vin iv.34; Ja i.442). -paveṇi lineage of the tree Vism 688. -pāṇikā a wooden spoon Vism 124 (opp. to pāsāṇa˚). -mūla the foot of a tree (taken as a dwelling by the ascetics for meditation: DN i.71, where several such lonely places are recommended, as arañña, r-m. pabbata, kandara, etc ■ DN-a i.209 specifies as “yaṃ kiñci sanda-cchāyaṃ vivittaṃ rukkha-mūlaṃ”); AN ii.38 AN iv.139, AN iv.392; SN i.199 (˚gahana); Iti 102; Snp 708, Snp 958 Nd i.466; Pp 68; Pv-a 100 (v.l. sukkha-nadī), 137 (Gaṇḍamba˚, with ref. to the Buddha). -˚gata one who undertakes living at the foot of a tree (as an ascetic) AN iii.353; AN v.109 sq., 207, 323 sq.; Pp 68 -˚senāsana having one’s bed & seat at the foot of a tree for meditative practices as a recluse Vin i.58 (as one of the 4 nissayas: piṇḍiy’ ālopa-bhojana, paṃsukūla-cīvara, r ■ m. s., pūti-mutta bhesajja), 96 (id.) AN iv.231. -mūlika (a) one who lives at the foot of a tree, an open air recluse MN i.282; MN iii.41; AN iii.219; Ja iv.8 (āraññaka, paṇṇasālaṃ akatvā r., abbhokāsika) (b) belonging to the practice of a recluse living under a tree “tree rootman’s practice” (Vism trsln 84); as ˚anga one of the (13) dhutaṅga -practices; i.e. practices for a scrupulous way of living Vism 59, Vism 74, Vism 75 (mentioned between the ārannik’ anga & the; abbhokāsik’- anga). -mūlikatta the practice of living (alone) under a tree MN iii.41 (mentioned with paṃsukūlikatta piṇḍapātikatta); AN iii.109 (id.). -sunakha “tree dog, a cert. animal Ja vi.538 (C. in expln of naḷa-sannibha “reed-coloured”). -susira a hollow tree Pv-a 62.

Vedic vṛkṣa. See Geiger, P.Gr. § 13, with note. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 320 puts rukkha to Sk. rukṣa (shining which as Pischel, following Roth. says has also the meaning “tree” in Ṛgveda). The Prk. form is rukkha Cp. Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. 1, § 184 b. We find a byform rakkha at Ja iii.144. Cp. Brethren, pp. 185, 416 where the Bn MS. has rukkha kathā the meaning being rakkha˚

Ruca

(-rukkha) & Rucā (f.) Name of a plant, or tree, alias “mukkhaka” (read mokkhaka ) “principal Ja i.441, Ja i.443 (gloss mangala-rukkha).

fr. ruc

Rucaka

(nt.) (gold) sand Vv 351; Vv-a 160 (= suvaṇṇa-vālikā).

cp. Sk. rucaka a golden ornament

Ruci

(f.) 1. splendour, light, brightness Snp 548 (su˚ very splendid; Snp-a 453 = sundara-sarīrappabha).

2. inclination, liking, pleasure Pv-a 59 (˚ṃ uppādeti to find pleasure, to be satisfied) ■ aruci aversion, dislike Thig 472ruci object of pleasure Ja v.371ruciyā (abl.) in the pleasure (of), by the liking (of) (cp. No. 3), in phrases attano ruciyā (attano citta-ruciyā: so read for ˚ruciyaṃ!); as one pleases, by one’s own free will, ad lib. Ja i.106; Ja iv.281; Pv-a 59 parassa r. pavattati to live by the pleasure (gratiâ) of somebody else, i.e. to be dependent on others DN-a i.212yathā ruciṃ according to liking or satisfaction fully, amply Mvu 4, Mvu 43; Mvu 5, Mvu 230; Pv-a 88, Pv-a 126, Pv-a 242. 3. In dogmatic language used in the sense of “will” or “influence” in combn diṭṭhi, khanti, ruci one’s views indulgence & pleasure (= will), i.e. one’s intellectual emotional & volitional sphere, e.g. Vin i.70; Snp 781 (without khanti, but see defn at Nd i.65); also with saddhā, anussavo, ākāraparivitakke, diṭṭhinijjhānakhanti MN ii.170, MN ii.218; MN ii.234; contrasted with dhamma DN iii.40; Vb 245 (in defn of “ idha ”: cp. same at Pts i.176 and Nd ii.145), 325, 328. aññatra ruciyā under the influence of someone else’s will SN ii.115; SN iv.138 See also bhāva 2a.

fr. ruc, cp. Vedic ruc (f.) light, Classic Sk. ruci in meaning “pleasure”

Rucika

(-˚) (adj.) belonging to the pleasure (of); only in phrase añña˚; being dependent on someone else’s will or under another’s influence, together with aññadiṭṭhika and añña-khantika characterizing the various sides of personality (see ruci 3) with ref. to one’s intellect feeling & will DN i.187 = MN i.487. Rhys Davids (Dial. i.254) trsls: “holding different views, other things approving themselves to you, setting diff. aims before yourself”; thus differing in interpretation of añña taking it subjectively. Neumann (Majjhima Übs. ii.250) quite wrongly: “ohne Deutung, ohne Geduld ohne Hingabe” (without explanation, patience, devotion).

fr. ruci 3

Rucira

(adj.) brilliant, beautiful, pleasant, agreeable Pv i.109 (= ramaṇīya dassanīya Pv-a 51); Ja i.207; Ja v.299; Vv 402 (so read for rurira) Mvu 11, Mvu 11; Mvu 18, Mvu 68; Dāvs iv.29; Mil 2, Mil 398; Dhp-a i.383 (= sobhana); Vv-a 12; Pv-a 156 (= vaggu).

fr. ruc, cp. Sk. rucira

Ruccati

to find delight or pleasure in (loc.), to please to indulge in, set one’s mind on Snp 565 (etañ ce r. bhoto buddha-sāsanaṃ); with khamati to be pleased and to approve of, MN ii.132; often used by Bdhgh in C. style yathā r. tathā paṭhitabbaṃ Kp-a 78; “yaṃ r. taṃ gahetabbaṃ Snp-a 23, Snp-a 43, Snp-a 136, Snp-a 378” “to take, whichever one pleases” (in giving the choice of 2 readings or interpretations) ■ ger. ruccitvā Vv-a 282 (r. pūresi “to find thorough delight in,” expln for abhirocesi). pret. 1st pl. ruccādimhase Pv i.118 (= ruccāma ruciṃ uppādema, taṃ attano ruciyā pivissāmā ti attho Pv-a 59) ■ Prohibitive mā rucci (pl. mā rucittha ) as an entreaty not to pursue an aim (= please do not do that, please don’t) Vin ii.198 (alaṃ Devadatta mā te rucci sangha-bhedo); Dhp-a i.13 (mā vo āvuso evaṃ ruccittha).

*rucyati Med. of ruc: see rocati. Same in Prk ■ Originally Caus. formation like Epic Sk. rocyate for rocayate

Ruccana

(& ā˚ f.) (nt.) choice, pleasure Dhp-a i.387 (tava ˚ṭṭhāne according to your own liking) DN-a i.106 (˚ā).

fr. ruccati

Ruccanaka

(adj.) pleasing, satisfying; nt. satisfaction Ja i.211 (˚maccha the fish you like); ii.182 (tava ˚ṃ karosi you do whatever you like). ; unpleasant, distasteful Dhp-a i.251 (attano aruccanakaṃ kiñci kammaṃ adisvā).

fr. ruccana, cp. Sk. rucya

Rujaka

a lute-player Ja vi.51, Ja vi.52, given by Kern, Toev. s. v. as conjecture (vīṇaṃ) va rujaka for virujaka The conjecture is based on C. reading “rujaka = vīṇāvādaka.”

fr. ruj ?

Rujati

to break crush; lit. to (cause) pain, to afflict, hurt (trs. & intrs. Ja i.7 (pādā rujanti), 396 (pādā me rujanti my feet ache) iv.208 (khandhena rujantena with hurting back); vi.3 (ūrū rujanti); Mvu 10, Mvu 15 (pādā me r.); Mil 26 (pādā r.); Dhp-a i.10, Dhp-a i.21 (akkhīni me rujiṃsu); ii.3 ■ fut rucchiti [cp. Sk. roḳsyate] Ja vi.80 (v.l. B.B. rujjati; C takes wrongly as “rodissati,” of rodati) ■ pp. lugga -Cp. lujjati & comb;ns.

ruj, representing an Idg. *leug, as in Gr. λευγαλέος, λυγρός sad, awful; Lat. lugeo to mourn; Lith. lúžti to break; German lücke, loch etc ■ A specific Pāli l-form is lujjati. A der. fr. ruj is roga illness ■ The Dhtp (469) defines ruj by “bhanga” i.e. breaking

Rujana

(nt.) hurting, feeling pain Ja ii.437 (roga = rujana-sabhāvattaṃ); Ja iv.147 (yāva piṭṭhiyā rujana-ppamāṇaṃ until his back ached).

fr. ruj, cp. rujā

Rujanaka

(adj.) aching, hurting Dhp-a iv.69 (anguli).

fr. rujana

Rujā

(f.) disease, pain Mil 172 (rujaṃ na karoti); Vism 69; Dhp-a iv.163 (accha˚ a bad pain).

fr. ruj, see rujati; cp. Sk. rujā

Rujjhati

to be broken up, to be destroyed Ja iii.181 (pāṇā rujjhanti; C. expls by nirujjhati). Cp. upa˚, vi˚.

Pass. of rundhati

Ruṭṭha

vexed, cross, enraged Ja iv.358 (opp. to tuṭṭha v.l. atuṭṭha) v.211 (gloss kuddha); Dāvs iii.37.

pp. of ruṣ; Sk. ruṣṭa

Ruṭhati

see luṭhati & cp.; rudda.

Ruṇ

a sound-particle, denoting a heavy fall, something like “thud” Ja i.418. Runna & Ronna;

Ruṇṇa & Roṇṇa

1. (pp. crying, in comb;n ruṇṇa-mukha with tearful face Ja vi.525 (C. rudam˚); Mil 148.

2. (nt.) weeping, crying lamentation Thag 554; AN i.261; Snp 584 (+ soka); Pv i.43; Milo 357. As roṇṇa at AN iv.197, AN iv.223; Thag 555; Ja iii.166.

pp. of rudati for Sk. rudita, after analogy of other roots in-d, as tud → tunna, pad → panna, nud → nunna. The BSk. forms are both ruṇḍa (Mvu ii.218, Mvu ii.224) and ruṇṇa (Mvu iii.116); Prk. ruṇṇa (Pischel § 566). See rudati & cp. āruṇṇa

Ruta

(nt.) noise, sound(ing); cry, singing Thag 1103; Ja i.207 (T. reading ruda is expld in C. as ruta with ˚da for ˚ta: ta-kārassa dakāro kato); iii.276 (sabba-ruta-jānana-manta: spell of knowing all animal-sounds; T. reads rūta; cp. sabbarāva-jānana Ja iii.415); vi.475 (rudaññu = ruta-jña C. same meaning); Mil 178 (sakuṇa-ruta-ravita); Vv-a (karavīka˚).

pp. of ravati: see rava & ravati

Rutta

in du˚ & su˚; at Dhs-a 396 is to be read as dur- and su(r)- utta (see utta).

Ruda

stands for ruta (cry) at 2 Jātaka passages, viz. Ja i.207; Ja vi.475 (ruda-ññu knowing the cries of all animals, expld as “ruta-jña, sabba-rāvaṃ jānāti” C.).

Rudati & Rodati

to cry, lament weep, wail ■ Forms I. rud˚; (the older form): pres rudati (not yet found); ppr. rudanto DN i.115; Snp 675 Snp 691; rudamāna MN i.341; AN ii.95; Pp 62; Mil 275 Sdhp 281; and rudaṃ Pv i.84; also in cpd. rudam-mukha with weeping face Ja vi.518 (assu-netta + ); Pv i.112 ger. ruditvāna Mvu 35, Mvu 24; fut. rucchati Ja v.366 and rucchiti Ja vi.550 (= rodissati C.; see also rujati). II. rod˚; (the younger form & the one peculiar to; prose) pres. rodati Ja i.55; Ja iii.169 (socati + ); Pv i.87 (socati + ) i.124; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 18; Pot. rode Pv i.85 (= rodeyyaṃ Pv-a 64); ppr. rodanto Ja i.65; f. rodantī Pv-a 16; med rodamāna Pv-a 6; DN-a i.284 ■ aor. rodi Ja i.167; Dhp-a ii.17 (+ hasi); fut. rodissati Ja vi.550; ger. roditvā Mvu 9, Mvu 7; inf. rodituṃ Ja i.55 ■ Caus. ii. rodāpeti to make someone cry Dhp-a ii.86 ■ pp. ruṇṇa, rudita rodita;.

rud, the usual Sk. pres. being rodati, but forms fr. base rud˚; are Vedic and are later found also in Prk. (cp. Pischel Prk. Gr. § 495): ruyai besides royai & rodasi ■ The Idg. root is; *reud, being an enlargement of *reu, as in ravati (q.v.). Cp. cognates Lat. rudo to cry, shout, bray; Lith. raudà wailing; Ohg. riozan Ags. reotan ■ The Dhtp expls rud by “rodane” (144) the Dhtm by “assu-vimocane” (206)

Rudita

(nt.) crying, weeping Pv-a 18 (+ assu-mocana, in expln of ruṇṇa), 63 (= paridevita).

pp. of rudati, equivalent to ruṇṇa

Rudda

(adj.) fierce, awful, terrible Ja iv.416 (so luddako rudda-rūpo; v.l. ludda˚); v.425, 431 (su-ruddho spelling for su-ruddo, very fierce, expld as su-luddo supharuso); Mvu 12, Mvu 45 (rudda-rakkhasī, prob. with ref to the demon Rudra; trsln “fearsome female demon” vv.ll. ruda˚, ruddha˚, dudda˚).

cp. Sk. raudra & Vedic rudra (a fierce demon or storm-deity; “the red one,” with Pischel from rud to be ruddy. See Macdonell, Vedic Mythology 74

-77) The usual Pāli form is ludda. At Dhtp 473 & Dhtm 135 a root; ruṭh (or luṭh ) is given in meaning “upaghāte” i.e. killing, which may represent this rud: see luṭhati

Ruddha

1. obstructed, disturbed Dāvs 4, Dāvs 46.

-2. at Ja v.425 & 431 in cpd. su-ruddha it stands for; rudda (q.v.) ■ Cp. upa˚, ni˚, paṭi˚ paṭivi˚, vi˚.

pp. of rundhati

Rudhira

(nt.) blood Dhp-a i.140; Pv-a 34 (for lohita; v.l. ruhira). See the more freq words rohita & lohita; a form ruhira (q.v.) occurs e.g. at Pv i.91.

late Vedic rudhira. Etym. connected with Lat. ruber red; Gr. ἐρυχρός red; Oicel. rodra blood Goth. raups = Ger. rot = E. red

Rundhati

1. to restrain, hinder, prevent, obstruct, keep out Cp iii.107; Mil 313 (+ upa˚).

2. to conceal, hide cover up Thig 238 (ppr. rundhanto); Pv-a 88 (ppr rundhamāna).

3. in phrase nagaraṃ r. to surround or besiege a town Ja i.409 (aor. rundhi); iii.159 (˚itvā) iv.230 (˚iṃsu) ■ Pass rujjhati; pp. ruddha & rūḷha;. See also upa˚, paṭi˚ paṭivā, vi˚, Note. The roots rudh & rundh; are also found in Prk. (see Pischel § 507) besides we have a by-form rubh in Prk. as well as in Pāli: see Pischel, § 266, 507, and P. rumbhati.

rundh or rudh, both roots in Vedic Sk ■ Dhtp (375, 425) expls by “āvaraṇe”; id. Dhtm (608, 662).

Ruppa

in ruppa-rūpakaṃ (nt.) Thig 394 is not clear. It refers to something which is not rūpa, yet pretends to be rūpa, i.e. a sham performance or show. Thus ruppa may correspond to *rūpya & with rūpaka mean “having the form (i.e. the appearance) of form, i.e. substantiality ” The Cy. (Thag-a 259) interprets as “rūpiya-rūpasadisaṃ sāraṃ sāraṃ upaṭṭhahantaṃ asāran ti attho” and Mrs. Rh. D. (Sisters, p. 154) trsls: “deluded by puppet shows (seen in the midst of the crowd).”

Ruppati

to be vexed, oppressed hurt, molested (always with ref. to an illness or pain Snp 767 (salla-viddho va r.) 1121; Nd i.5 (= kuppati ghaṭṭiyati, pīḷiyati); Nd ii.543 (= kuppati pīḷayati ghaṭayati) ■ ppr. gen. ruppato SN i.198 (salla-viddhassa r.; expld at K.S. 320 by “ghaṭṭan-atthena”) Snp 331 (reads salla-viddhāna ruppataṃ, i.e. pl. instead of sg.); Thag 967 (salla-viddhassa ruppato (C. sarīravikāraṃ āpajjato, Brethren, 338); Ja ii.437 (C. ghaṭṭiyamāna pīḷiyamāna) = Vism 49 (dukkhitassa r.); Ja iii.169 (salla-viddhassa r. = ghaṭṭiyamāna C.) ■ ruppati to Pāli exegesis with its fondness of allegorical (“orthodox”) interpretation, is the etym. base of rūpa, thus at SN iii.86: “ruppatī ti tasmā rūpan ti vuccati kena r. sītena, uṇhena etc. (all kinds of material dukkha dukkha ii.3b) ruppati.”-Or at Snp 1121 (ruppanti rūpena), & at other passages given under rūpa (A) See also; ruppana.

rup = lup, one of the rare cases of P. r. representing a Sk. 1., whereas the opposite is frequent. The same sound change Idg., as Lat. rumpo to break corresponds to Sk. lumpati. Besides we find the Sk. form ropayati to break off ■ The root has nothing to do with rūpa, although the P. Commentators combine these two-Cp. also Sk. ropa hole; Ags. rēofan to break, rēaf (theft) = Ger. raub, rauben, and many other cognates (see Walde s. v. rumpo) ■ The root rup is defd at Dhtm by nās, i.e. to destroy; another rup is given at Dhtm 837 in meaning “ropana”

Ruppana

(nt.) [fr. rup ) molestation, vexation, trouble Ja iii.368 (= ghaṭṭana dūsana kuppana C.). Frequent in allegorical exegesis of rūpa, e.g. at Dhs-a 52 (naman aṭṭhena nāmaṃ ruppan’ aṭṭhena rūpaṃ), 303 (rūp’ ādīhi ruppana-bhāva-dīpana); Vb-a 4 (ruppan’ aṭṭhena rūpaṃ in expln of passage SN iii.86 (mentioned under ruppati); Kp-a 78, Kp-a 79 (ruppan’ aṭṭhena… rūpaṃ rūpaṃ ti vuccati).

Rumbhati

to obstruct surround, besiege (= rundhati 3) Ja vi.391 (where spelling rumhati; in phrase nagaraṃ r.). See also ni˚, sanni˚-pp. rūḷha.

so read for rumhati (Trenckner, Notes 599; the root is another form of rudh (as in Prk.): see rundhati The Dhtm (547) defines by “uppīḷana”

Rumma

(adj.) miserable, dirty, poorly, in cpds. ˚rūpin Ja iv.387 (= lūkhavesa C.), with v.l. duma˚; and ˚vāsin poorly dressed Ja iv.380.

put down (rightly) by Geiger, P.Gr. § 53 as different fr. Sk. rukma (shining); Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893 12 tried the etym. rumma = Sk. rumra “tawny,” oṛ rukma (rukmin) shiny. It is still an unsolved problem It may not be far off to trace a relation (by miswriting dissimilation or false analogy) to ruppa in sense of ruppati, or to ruj, or even rudda. The C. expln of all the rumma-& rummin passages is; anañjita, i.e. unkempt

Rummin = rumma

(dirty-soiled) Ja iv.322 (v.l. dummi); vi.194 (do.).

Rumhaniya

at MN i.480 is doubtful in spelling. The meaning is clearly “furthering growth, making or being prosperous, bringing luck” (combd with ojavant ), as also indicated by v.l. ruḷh˚. Thus it cannot belong to rumbh, but must represent either rup, as given under ruppati in meaning “ropana” (Dhtm 837), or ruh (see rūhati). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls “tot groei geschikt (i.e. able to grow), Neumann, “erquickend” (i.e. refreshing).

Ruyhati

is Med. of rūhati (rohati), q.v.

Rurira

at Vv 402 is misprint for rucira.

Ruru

a sort of deer, a stag; usually called ruru-miga Ja iv.256, Ja iv.261; Ja v.406 (pl rohitā rurū), 416. Cp. ruruva.

Vedic ruru: RV vi.75, 15

Rusita

annoyed, irritated, offended Snp 932, Snp 971 (expld by Nd i.498 as “khuṃsita, vambhita ghaṭṭita” etc.). See rosa, roseti etc.

pp. of ruṣ to be vexed. The Dhtp defines by “rose” (306, 450), “pārusiye” (626); Dhtm has 2 roots viz. one with “ālepe” (442), the other with “hiṃsāyaṃ” (443)

Rusṣati

at Snp-a 121 for dussati.

Ruha1

(adj.) (-˚) growing, a tree, in cpds.: jagati˚, dharaṇi˚, mahī˚, etc.

fr. ruh: see rūhati

Ruha2

blood, in cpd. ruhaṅghasa blood-eater, a name for panther Ja iii.481 (= ruhira-bhakkha lohita-pāyin C.).

poetical for ruhira (rohita) = lohita

Ruhira

(nt.) blood MN iii.122; Thag 568; Vin ii.193; Mil 125, Mil 220; Sdhp 38.

-akkhita (ruhir’ akkhita) “besmeared with blood Ja iv.331, is to be read as ruhir’ ukkhita of ukṣ ).

fr. rudhira

Rūta

at Ja iii.276 read ruta (q.v.).

Rūpa

(nt.) [cp. Vedic rūpa, connected etymologically with varpa (Grassmann) ■ The nom. pl. is rūpā & rūpāni form, figure, appearance, principle of form, etc ■ A; Definitions. According to P. expositors rūpa takes its designation fr. ruppati, e.g. “ruppanato rūpaṃ” Vism 588; “ruppan’ aṭṭhena r.” Vb-a 3; “rūpa-rūpaṃ ruppana sabhāvena yuttaṃ” Cpd. 1567 (where ruppati is, not quite correctly, given as “change”), “ruppatī ti: tasmā rūpan ti vuccati” SN iii.86; other defns are “rūpayatī ti rūpaṃ” (with cakkhu & the other 10 āyatanas) Vb-a 45; and more scientifically: “paresu rūp’ ādisu cakkhu-paṭihanana lakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ Vism 446 ■ Of modern interpretations & discussions see e.g. ; Dhs. trsl. introd. ch. vi. (pp. 41–⁠63, or 248

71) Dial. ii.244; Expos. 67n; Cpd. 270 sq. (where objections are raised to trsln “form,” and as better (philosophical) terms “matter,” “material quality” are recommended). See also loka for similar etym ■ B (lit.) appearance, form, figure Dhs 597 sq. (= form either contrasted with what is unseen, or taken for both seen and unseen), 751; Mvu 27, Mvu 30 (sīha-vyagghādirūpāni representations of lions, tigers etc.); 30, 68 (ravicanda-tāra-rūpāni id.); 36, 31 (loha˚ bronze statue) Thag-a 257 ■ Esp. beautiful form, beauty SN iv.275; Pv ii.958 (as one of the 10 attributes, with sadda etc. of distinction: see also below DN ii.a); Mil 285; Mvu 20, Mvu 4 (rūpa-māninī proud of her beauty); Pv-a 89- surūpa very beautiful Thag-a 72; durūpa of evil form ugly AN ii.203 sq. (dubbaṇṇa + ) ■ In phrase rūpaṃ sikkhati Vin i.77 = Vin iv.129 the meaning is doubtful; it may be “to study drawing, or arts & craft,” or (with Mrs. Rh. D.) “weights & measures,” or (w. Hardy “money changing.” It is said that through this occupation the eyes become bad; it is opposed to gaṇanā -C. (-˚) of such & such a form, like, kind, of a certain condition or appearance. In this appl;n very frequent & similar to E ■ hood, or Ger ■ heit, i.e. an abstract formation Often untranslatable because of the latter character. It is similar to; kāya (cp. expln of ātura rūpa Vv 8314 by abhitunna -kāya Vva 328), but not so much with ref. to life & feeling as to appearance and looks. E. g. aneka˚ Snp 1079 (= anekavidha Nd;2 54) adissamāna˚ invisible Pv-a 6 (lit. with invisible form) ummatta˚ as if mad, under the appearance of madness like a madman Pv i.81; ii.63; eva˚ in such a condition Pv ii.15; tapassī˚ appearing to be an ascetic Pv i.32 tāraka˚ the (shapes of the) stars Dhs 617; deva˚ as a deva Pv-a 92. Pleonastically e.g. in: anupatta˚ attaining Pv iv.166; taramāna˚ quickly Pv ii.62; yutta˚ fit Pv-a 157; sucitta˚ variegated Pv i.109 ■ Cases ad verbially: citta -rūpaṃ according to intention Vin iii.161 Vin iv.177; cetabba-rūpaṃ fit to be thought upon Ja iv.157 (= ˚yuttakaṃ C.) ■ atta -rūpena on my own account SN iv.97; godha- rūpena as an iguana Mvu 28, Mvu 9 ■ D (as philos. t. t.) principle of (material) form, materiality visibility ■ There are var. groups of psychological and metaphysical systematizations, in which rūpa functions as the material, gross factor, by the side of other, more subtle factors. In all these representations of rūpa we find that an element of moral psychology overshadows the purely philosophical & speculative aspect. A detailed (Abhidhammatic) discussion of rūpa in var. aspects is to be found at Dhs § 585

980. 1. rūpa as āyatana or sense object. It is the object of the activity or sphere of the organ of sight (cakkhu) As such it heads the list of the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see e.g. Nd ii.p. 238 A-E & āyatana;3) with “cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā” (the others: sota → sadda, ghāna → gandha jivhā → rasa, kāya → phoṭṭhabba, mano → dhamma), cp. cakkhu-viññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā etc. DN i.245; MN i.266 cakkhunā rūpaṃ passati iṭṭha-rūpaṃ kanta-rūpaṃ etc SN iv.126 ■ see further: Vin i.34 (sabbaṃ ādittaṃ cakkhuṃ ādittaṃ, rūpa ādittā etc. with sequence of other āyatanas); DN ii.308 sq., 336 sq.; MN iii.18 (yaṃ kho rūpaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ rūpe assādo; cp. Pts ii.109 sq.), 291 (ye te cakkhu-viññeyyesu rūpesu avīta-rāgā etc.); Pts i.79; Pts ii.38 (rūpī rūpāni passatī ti vimokkho); Dhs 617, Dhs 653, Dhs 878; Tikp 28. 2. (metaphysically) as the representative of sensory or material existence: (a) universally as forming the corporeal stratum in the world of appearance or form (rūpa- bhava) as compared with the incorporeal (arūpa -bhava) being itself above, and yet including the kāma- bhava (The kāmabhava is a subdivision of rūpabhava, which has got raised into a third main division.) This triad is also found in combns with loka or dhātu (see dhātu 2 a & d), or; avacara. See e.g. DN i.17; DN iii.215 (˚dhātu) 216 (˚bhava); Kv 370 sq. (˚dhātu); Dhs 499 (˚âvacara) 585 (˚dhātu); Vb 17 (˚āvacara), 25 (as garu-pariṇāma & dandha-nirodha comp;d with arūpa). A similar sequence rūpa arūpa & nirodha; (i.e. nibbāna) in old verses at Snp 755; Iti 45, Iti 62 (rūpehi arūpā santatarā arūpehi nirodho santataro). On indriya-rūpa “faculty as form” see indriya B ■ (b) individually in the sphere of saṃsāra as one (i.e. the material quality) of the substrata of sensory individual existence or the khandhas They are the 5: rūpa-kkhandha, vedanā˚ saññā˚, sankhārā˚, viññāṇa˚; otherwise called rūp ūpādāna-kkhandha etc. (e.g. DN iii.223, DN iii.278; Vism 443) See khandha ii. B ■ In this property rūpa consists of 28 subdivisions, viz. the 4 (great) dhātūs (mahābhūtāni or else bhūta-rūpa primary matter) and 24 upādārūpāni (i.e. derivative forms or accidentals). These are given in extenso in the rūpakkhandha section of the Vism (pp. 443

450), also at Dhs 585; the 24 consist of cakkhu, sota, ghāna, jivhā, kāya, rūpa, sadda, gandha rasa, itthindriya, purisindriya, jīvitindriya, hadaya vatthu, kāya -viññatti, vacī-viññatti, ākāsa-dhātu (rūpassa) lahutā mudutā kammaññatā, upacaya santati jaratā aniccatā, kabaḷinkār’-āhāra; cp. defn at Ne 73: cātu-mahābhūtikaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ ca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpassa paññatti. The rūpakkhandha shares with the others the qualities of soullessness, evanescence and ill (anattā, anicca dukkha); e.g. rūpañ ca h’ idaṃ attā abhavissa, na y’ idaṃ rūpaṃ ābadhāya saṃvatteyya Vin i.13, cp similarly MN iii.282 sq.; SN iii.66; quoted and expld in detail at Vism 610; rūpaṃ aniccaṃ Vin i.14; MN i.228 MN iii.18 (also expld at Vism 610); SN iii.48, SN iii.66, SN iii.88; rūpe anicc’ ânupassanā Pts ii.186 sq ■ See also DN ii.301 DN iii.233; Pts i.23, Pts i.53, Pts i.104; Pts ii.96, Pts ii.102, Pts ii.109 (rūpassa ādīnavo); Vb 1. sq., 12 sq. (in detail); Kv 11 sq. Vism 443 sq.; Tikp 33; Vb-a 2, Vb-a 3, Vb-a 32 sq. = SN iii.142 (with var. similes); Dhp-a iv.100 ■ (c) in the making up of the individuality as such (nāma-rūpa ), where in contrast with nāma (as abstract, logical, invisible or mind-factor) rūpa represents the visible (material factor, resembling kāya (cp. phrase nāma-kāya in same sense). The foll. are current defns of nāma-rūpa nāma-(kāya) = vedanā, saññā, cetanā, phassa, manasikāra (otherwise citta-sankhārā), rūpa(-kāya) = cattāro mahā-bhūtā catunnaṃ m-bhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpaṃ (otherwise kāya-sankhārā) SN ii.4; SN iii.59 sq.; Pts i.183 with explns at Vism 558 & Vb-a 169. Defined at Ne 15: “ye phassa-pañcamakā dhammā: idaṃ nāmaṃ yāni pañc’ indriyāni rūpāni: idaṃ rūpaṃ, tad ubhayaṃ nāmarūpaṃ viññāṇa-sampayuttaṃ.” Discussed in detail also at Vism 562 (= Vb-a 173, Vb-a 174), 587

597; cp Dhs-a 392 (Expos. 500, where “mind-matter” is given as corresp. couple in trsln, do. Cpd. 271 sq. “mind and body”). See also under paṭicca-samuppāda.

3 various references: DN iii.102, DN iii.212, DN iii.225, DN iii.244, DN iii.273; MN i.84 (Gotamo kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññāpeti, rūpānaṃ vedanānaṃ); SN ii.198; SN iii.11 (evaṃ-rūpo siyaṃ, evaṃ vedano etc.), 101 (id., & the khandhas); Snp 867, Snp 874 Snp 943, Snp 1037, Snp 1121; Nd i.425; Tikp 36, 38, 54, 262; Vism 625 (uppajjanaka˚).

-ārammaṇa a visible thing as object Dhs 146, Dhs 365; Dhs-a 310 (cp. Expos. 407). -āvacara world of form sphere of matter (cp. Expos. 67, 216n, 264) Pv-a 163 -ūpaga (satta) (a being) living in (bodily) form Iti 62; Snp 754. -ūpajīvinī f. a woman living on her beauty i.e. a harlot Pv-a 46, Pv-a 201. -ññu knowing (var.) bodily forms MN i.220 = AN v.347. -taṇhā craving after form DN ii.309; DN iii.216, DN iii.244, DN iii.280; Vb-a 179 (in det.). -dakkha one clever in forms, viz. an artist (accountant?) Mil 344 (in the Dhamma-nagara). -dhātu the element of form, material element Vism 486; Ne 32, Ne 97. See above D 2. -nimitta sign of form Pts i.92. -patta beautiful Ja i.61. -pamāṇika measuring by form (outward appearance), one of the 4 kinds of measurements which the world takes of the Tathāgata (see A ii.71 Pp 53), viz. rūpa˚, ghosa˚, lūkha˚, dhamma˚ Dhp-a iii.113; the same four similarly at Snp-a 242. -pātubhāva appearance of form (also as ˚antara˚ intermediate form) Snp-a 245. -bhava material existence: see above D 2. -rāga lust after rebirth in rūpa DN iii.234 (+ arūpa˚); Ne 28 (pañc’ indriyāni rūpīni rūpa-rāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. -rūpa material form (mutable material quality?) Cpd. 156, doubtful trsln & expl;n -saññā perception of material qualities, notion of form DN i.34 DN ii.112 (expld in det. at Vism 328); iii.224, 244, 253 Nd ii.545; Dhs-a 200 (cp. Expos. 269). -saññin perceiving form DN iii.260; Pts ii.38; Snp 1113. -santati duration of material form Vism 431; Vb-a 21. -samussaya accumulation of form, complex form Thag-a 98 -samāpatti attainment of beauty Ja i.406. -sampatti beauty Ja iii.187. -siri personal splendour Ja i.60.

Rūpaka

(nt.) form, figure; likeness of, image (-˚); representation Vin ii.113 (rūpak’ okiṇṇāni pattāni of painted bowls); Thig 394 (see ruppa˚); Dhp-a i.370 (maṇi˚ jewelled image); ii.69 (assa˚ toy horse); Mvu 25, Mvu 26 (rāja˚); 27, 30 (devatā˚ shape of devas); Vv-a 213 -dūrūpaka of squalid appearance Ja ii.167; cp. durūpa.

fr. rupa

Rūpatā

(f.) (being) shape(d), appearance; accordance, conformity, in phrase bhavya-rūpatāya “by appearance of likelihood” AN ii.191 (in hearsay formula, where it is missing in id. passage at Nd ii.151).

abstr. fr. rūpa

Rūpatta

(nt.) lit. “form-hood,” i.e. shaping (being) shape(d) SN iii.87 (rūpaṃ rūpattāya sankhātaṃ).

abstr. fr. rūpa

Rūpavant

(adj.) 1. having bodily form SN iii.16 & passim (in formula of sakkāya-diṭṭhi); Dhs 1003.

2. having the form of (-˚) Mvu 14, Mvu 3 (gokaṇṇa˚).

3. beautiful Mvu 10, Mvu 30 (f. rūpavatī).

rūpa + vant

Rūpika

(adj.) having shape; neg. ; formless Sdhp 236 (rūp’ ârūpika).

fr. rūpa

Rūpin

(adj.) 1. having material qualities, possessed of form or shape or body or matter, belonging to the realm of form. rūpī is nearly always combd contrasted with; arūpī formless, incorporeal (see rūpa D 2 a), cp. combn rūpī arūpī saññī asaññī nevasaññinâsaññī Nd ii.617 and similarly Iti 87 = Mil 217DN i.34 (attā dibbo rūpī), 77 (kāyo r. manomayo), 186 (attā etc.), 195 (attapaṭilābho r. manomayo); iii.111 139; MN ii.229; SN iii.46 (r. arūpī saññī etc.); iv.202, 402; AN ii.34; Nd i.97, Nd i.137; Pts ii.38 (rūpī rūpāni passati) Dhs 635, Dhs 1091, Dhs 1444; Vb 123, Vb 342 (read rūpī); Ne 28 (pañc’ indriyāni rūpīni), 69 (five rūpīni indriyāni & five arūpīni); DN-a i.119 (attā); Dhs-a 304 (rūpino dhammā) Vb-a 511 sq. (attā).

2. (-˚) having the appearance of, resembling: see rumma˚.

fr. rūpa

Rūpiya1

(nt.) silver Vin iii.239 (here collectively for any transactions in “specie,” as expld by C. p. 240: rūpiyaṃ nāma satthu-vaṇṇo kahāpaṇo lohamāsako dārumāsako jatumāsako; i.e. copper wood & lac); SN i.104 (suddhaṃ r.); ii.233; Dhs 584.

-maya made of silver Vin ii.112; SN iii.144 (sovaṇṇamaya + ); Pv ii.64 (where in sequence sovaṇṇa˚, maṇi˚ loha˚ r.; expld as “rajatamaya” Pv-a 95); Dhp-a i.29.

cp. Sk. rūpya, lit. of splendid appearance, cp. name for gold jātarūpa

Rūpiya2

see ruppa.

Rūpeti

1. to put into shape, to make appear, to make grow (?) Snp-a 132, Snp-a 143 (v.l. ropeti).

2. to be formed, to appear, to come to notice in defn of rūpa at Vb-a 45: “rūpayatī ti rūpaṃ.”

Caus. Denom. fr. rūpa

Rūḷa

awful, terrible Mil 275 (synonymous with bhīma).

doubtful spelling; perhaps for rūḷha, evidently identical with rudda, as Trenckner suggests in Notes 6319

Rūḷha1

1. grown Snp 20 (˚tiṇa).

2. (see rūhati) healed up Mil 291 (˚vaṇa one whose wound has healed): cp. rūhanā.

pp. of rohati; of ruh; Sk. rūḍha

Rūḷha2

at Mil 217 & 218 is a by-form of; ruddha, pp. of rundhati (rumbhati) to obstruct; thus meaning “obstructed, difficult” (of a road, together with lugga palugga). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls (as rūḷha1) by “overgrown.”

Rūḷhi

(f.) lit. ascent, growth see vi˚ ■ fig. what has grown by custom tradition, popular meaning of a word (˚sadda). The fig. meaning is the one usually found in Pāli, esp. in Abhidhamma and Commentary literature; e.g. rūḷhiyaṃ by tradition, usually, commonly, Vb-a 1 (as category with the 3 other: rāsi, guṇa, paṇṇatti) rūḷhito id. Vb-a 2; rūḷhiyā id. Snp-a 430; Pv-a 163; also rūḷhi-vasena Vv-a 42; or with sadda: rūḷhi-sadda usual meaning Vism 333; Dhs-a 205; ˚saddena in popular language, in ordinary speech, customarily, commonly speaking Tikp 253; Vism 310; DN-a i.239, DN-a i.294: Snp-a 135 Snp-a 400.

fr. rūḷha, pp. of rohati, cp. Sk. rūḍhi

Rūhati1

1. to grow, spread Iti 67; Ja iv.408 (akkhīni rūhiṃsu; also ppr. med. ruyhamāna ) v.368; vi.360.

2. to heal (of a wound), close up Vin i.206 (vaṇo na rūhati);

3. to have effect in (loc.), to be effective Vin ii.203 = Iti 87 (vādo tamhi na rūhati) ■ pp. rūḷha2. See also rūhita (pp. of Caus rūheti = roheti).

the specific P. form of the usual Sk. P. rohati (q.v.). The root ruh is given at Dhtp 334 with meaning “janana” i.e. causing, which refers more to the compounds with prefixes

Rūhati2

to be broken or (fig.) to be suspended Vin ii.55 (dhammattā rūhati the liability is cancelled) ■ pp. rūḷha1.

for rundh (rumbh, rudh) or Pass. rujjh˚; see also rumbhati & ropeti;2

Rūhanā

(f.) 1. growth Ja ii.322 (virūhanā C.).

2. healing (of a wound) Mil 112.

cp. Sk. rohaṇa, fr. ruh: rūhati1

Rūhita

(nt.) a boil, a diseased growth (lit. “healed”) Vin iv.316 (expld as “yaṃ kiñci vaṇo” v.l. rudhita).

fr. rūhati1

Re

(indecl.) a part. of exclamation, mostly implying contempt, or deprecation (DN-a i.276) “hīḷanavasena āmantanaṃ” i.e. address of disdain: heigh, go on, get away, hallo ■ DN i.96, DN i.107; Ja iii.184 (C. = āmantaṇe nipāto); often combd with similar particles of exhortation, like cara pi re get away with you! MN ii.108; Vin iv.139 (so read for cara pire which the C. takes as “ para, ” amamaka); or ehi re come on then! Ja i.225; ha re look out! here they are Pv-a 4; aho vata re wish I would! Pv ii.945 (re ti ālapanaṃ Pv-a 131); no ca vata re vattabbe but indeed good sir… (Kv 1).

shortened for are, q.v.

Rekhā

(f.) line, streak Abhp 539. See lekhā.

fr. rikh, for which the Pāli form is likh, cp. Sk. rekhā, Lat. rīma, Ohg. rīga row

Recana

(nt.) letting loose, emission Dhtm 610. Cp. vi˚.

fr. ric

Reṇu

1. dust; pl. reṇū particles of dust ■ Vin i.32 (˚hatā bhūmi); Vism 338 = Nd i.505 = Ja i.117 (rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati); Ja iv.362 (okiṇṇā raja-reṇūhi; C. expls by “paṃsūhi”); Mil 274 (pl.) Snp-a 132 (reṇuṃ vūpasāmeti allays).

2. pollen (in this meaning found only in the so-called Jātaka-style Ja i.233 (mahā-tumba-matta), 349 (pupphato reṇuṃ gaṇhāti); iii.320; v.39 (puppha˚); vi.530 (padumakinjakkha˚); Dhp-a iv.203 (˚vaṭṭhi).

cp. Vedic reṇu

Reruka

“elephant’s tooth,” ivory Ja ii.230 (= hatthi-danta C.).

etym.? Probably dialectical

Roga

illness, disease ■ The defn of roga at Ja ii.437 is “roga rujana-sabhāvattaṃ.” There are many diff enumerations of rogas and sets of standard combns, of which the foll. may be mentioned. At sn 311 (cp DN iii.75) it is said that in old times there were only 3 diseases, viz. icchā, anasanaṃ, jarā, which gradually through slaughtering of animals, increased to 98 Bdhgh at Snp-a 324 hints at these 98 with “cakkhu-rog adinā-bhedena.” Beginning with this (cakkhuroga affection of the eye) we have a list of 34 rogas at Nd i.13 (under pākaṭa-parissayā or open dangers = Nd i.360 Nd ii.420) & Nd;2 3041 B, viz. cakkhu˚ & the other 4 senses, sīsa˚, kaṇṇa˚, mukha˚, danta˚; kāsa, sāsa pināsa, ḍāha, jara; kucchiroga, mucchā, pakkhandikā sūlā, visūcikā; kuṭṭhaṃ, gaṇḍo, kilāso, soso, apamāro daddu, kaṇḍu, kacchu, rakhasā, vitacchikā, lohita pittaṃ, madhumeho, aṃsā, piḷakā, bhagandalā. This list is followed by list of 10 ābādhas & under “dukkha goes on with var. other “ills,” which however do not make up the number 98. The same list is found at AN v.110. The 10 ābādhas (Nd ii.3041 C.) occur at AN ii.87 & Mil 308 (as āgantuka-rogā). The 4 “rogas of the Sun (miln 273, cp. Vin ii.295) are: abbha, mahikā megha, Rāhu ■ Another mention of roga together with plagues which attack the corn in the field is given at Ja v.401, viz. visa-vāta; mūsika-salabha-suka-pāṇaka setaṭṭhika-roga etc., i.e. hurtful winds, mice, moths parrots, mildew ■ The comb;n roga, gaṇḍa, salla is sometimes found, e.g. MN ii.230; Vism 335. Of other single rogas we mention: kucchi˚ (stomach-ache) Ja i.243 ahivātaka˚ Vin i.78; Ja ii.79; Ja iv.200; Dhp-a i.231 paṇḍu˚ jaundice Vin i.206; Ja ii.102; Dhp-a i.25; tiṇapupphaka˚ hay-fever Mil 216 ■ See also ātaṅka ābādha;. On roga in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 130. DN i.11, DN i.73; DN iii.182; SN iii.32; SN iv.64; AN ii.128, AN ii.142 sq. AN iv.289,; Nd i.486; Vism 236 (as cause of death), 512 (in simile); Vb-a 88 (in sim. of dukkha etc.); Thag-a 288; Vv-a 6 (rogena phuṭṭha), 75 (sarīre r. uppajji); Pv-a 86 (kacchu˚), 212 (rogena abhibhūta) ■ Opp. aroga health: see sep.

-ātaṅka affliction by illness AN ii.174 sq.; AN v.169, AN v.318 -niḍḍha the nest or seat of disease Dhp 148 (cp. Dhp-a iii.110); as ˚nīḷa at Iti 37. -mūla the root of disease Snp 530. -vyasana distress or misfortune of disease DN iii.235 (one of the 5 vyasanāni: ñāti˚, bhoga˚, roga˚ sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚); Mil 196 (id.).

Vedic roga: ruj (see rujati), cp. Sk. rujā breakage, illness

Rogin

(adj.) having a disease, suffering from (-˚); one who has a disease Vism 194 (ussanna-vyādhi dukkhassa); Sdhp 86paṇḍu˚; one who has the jaundice Ja ii.285; Ja iii.401.

fr roga

Rocati

1. to please, i.e. it pleases (with dat. of person) Thig 415 (rocate); Mvu 15, Mvu 9 (nivāso rocatu). Cp. BSk. rocyate Avs ii.158.

2. to find pleasure in (loc.) Mil 338 (bhave) ■ Caus. roceti: 1. to be pleased, to give one’s consent Dhp-a i.387 (gloss K rucitha ruceyyātha). 2. (with acc. of object) to find pleasing, to find delight in, to be attached to, to approve of, to choose SN i.41 (vadhaṃ); Ja i.142 (Devadattassa laddhiṃ r.); v.178 (pabbajjaṃ roc’ ahaṃ = rocemi C.), 226 (kammaṃ). Freq. with dhammaṃ to approve of a doctrine or scheme e.g. at Vin ii.199 (Devadattassa dhammaṃ); SN i.133; Snp 94 (asataṃ dh.), 398 (dhammaṃ imaṃ rocaye) Ja iv.53 (dh. asataṃ na rocayāma) ■ Cp. abhi˚, ā˚, vi˚.

Vedic rocate, ruc, Idg. *leuq, as in Lat. luceo to be bright (cp. lūx light, lūmen, lūna etc.); Sk. rocana splendid, ruci light, roka & rukṣa light; Av. raocantshining; Gr. αμφι λύκη twi-light, λευκός white; also with 1: Sk. loka world, locate to perceive, locana eye Lith. laukti to await; Goth. liuhap light = Ohg. lioht E. light; Oir lōche lightning ■ The Dhtp (& Dhtm gives 2 roots; ruc, viz. the one with meaning “ ditti (Dhtp 37), the other as “ rocana ” (Dhtp 395), both signifying “light” or “splendour,” but the second probably to be taken in sense of “pleasing”

Roṇṇa

see ruṇṇa.

Rodati

see rudati.

Rodana

(nt.) crying, weeping Dhp-a i.28; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 64; Dhtp 144.

fr. rud

Rodha1

obstruction, stopping, in cpd. parapāṇa˚; stopping the life of somebody else; life-slaughter murder Snp 220; Ja ii.450. Cp. anu˚, ni˚, vi˚.

fr. rudh

Rodha2

(nt.) bank, dam AN iii.128 (where id. p. at AN i.154 reads gedha, cave; v.l. also gedha, cp. v.l. rodhi˚ for gedhi˚ at Nd ii.585).

fr. rudh

Rodhana

(nt.) obstructing Ja v.346; Sdhp 57.

fr. rudh

Ropa

(-˚) plantation; in vana˚ & ārāma˚; SN i.33.

fr. rop = Caus. of ruh

Ropaka

sapling Ja ii.346 (rukkha˚).

ropa + ka

Ropana

(nt.) & ropanā (f.) 1. planting Pv-a 151 (ārāma˚); Mvu 15, Mvu 41.

2. healing SN iv.177 (vaṇa˚)

3. furthering, making grow Pts ii.115 (buddhi˚). 4. (f.) accusation Vin iv.36.

fr. ropeti1

Ropaya

(adj.) (-˚) to be healed, only in cpd. du˚; hard to heal (of a wound) Vin i.216 (vaṇa).

for *ropya, fr. ropeti1

Ropāpeti

see ropeti1.

Ropita

1. planted Pv ii.78.

2. growing up Pv 970 (read “pi ropitaṃ” for viropitaṃ).

3. furnished with, powdered with (-˚) Vv 6415 (Ed. vosita Vv-a 280 expls by ullitta, vicchurita).

4. accused brought forward (of a charge) Vin iv.36.

pp. of ropeti1

Ropima

(nt.) 1. what has been planted Vin iv.267.

2. a kind of arrow MN i.429 (contrasted with kaccha; Neumann trsls ropima by “aus Binsen”). 3. (adj.) at Vv 4413 aropima (“not planted”?) is an attribute of trees. It is not expld in Vv-a.

fr. ropeti1

Ropeti1

1. to plant or sow Ja i.150 (nivāpatiṇaṃ); Mvu 15, Mvu 42 (amb’ aṭṭhikaṃ); 19, 56; Dhp-a ii.109.

2. to put up, fix Ja i.143 (sūlāni).

3. to further, increase, make grow Snp 208 (Pot. ropayeyya)

4. (fig.) to fix, direct towards, bring up against: see ropeti2 2 ■ pp. ropita. Caus. II. ropāpeti to cause to be planted DN ii.179; Ja vi.333; Mvu 34, Mvu 40; Dhp-a ii.109-Cp. abhi˚, abhini˚, ā˚.

Caus. of rūhati1

Ropeti2

1.to cause to break off, to cause to suspend or cancel; to pass off refuse Vin ii.261 (bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnaṃ kammaṃ ropetvā bhikkhunīnaṃ niyyādetuṃ, i.e. by the bhikkhus is an act of the nuns to be passed off and to be referred to the nuns).

2. to make confess or accuse of (acc. āpattiṃ a guilt) Vin ii.2 (first codeti, then sāreti, then ropeti & lastly (sanghaṃ) ñāpeti), 85 (id.); iv.36, (aññavādakaṃ ropeti to bring the charge of heresy against someone). No. 2 perhaps better to ropeti1. Cp. Vin Texts ii.334 ■ To ropeti2 belong the cpds. oropeti (cut off) & voropeti (deprive). They are better to be taken here than to ava + ; ruh.

Caus. of rūhati2. See lumpati

Roma

(nt.) the hair of the body Ja v.430 (where in roma-rājiyā maṇḍita-udarā as expln of loma-sundarī); Sdhp 119 (˚kūpa),

Vedic roman; the usual P. form is loma (q.v.)

Romaka

(adj.) feathered (?) Ja ii.383 (C. wrong!).

fr. roma

Romañca

(?) hairy (?) Dāvs v.14 (˚kancuka).

fr. roma, cp. Vedic romaśa

Romanthaka

(adj.) chewing the cud, ruminating Vin ii.132.

fr. romanthati

Romanthati & Romantheti

to chew the cud, to ruminate Vin ii.132 (˚ati); Ja iv.392 (˚eti).

to romantha; cp. Lat. rumen & ruminare = E. ruminate

Romanthana

(nt.) ruminating Vin ii.321.

fr. romanthati

Rorava

1. a sort of hart (i.e. ruru) MN i.429.

2. Name of a naraka (purgatory): see Dictionary of Names. E.g Ja iii.299; Dāvs iii.12; Sdhp 195. Cp. BSk. raurava Divy 67.

fr. ru, cp. Sk. raurava, Name of a purgatory

Rosa

1. anger, angry feeling MN i.360.

2. quarrel Ja iv.316.

cp. Sk. roṣa, of ruṣ

Rosaka

(adj.) angry, wrathful SN i.85, SN i.96; Snp 133; Vv 528 (= paresaṃ ros uppādanena r. Vv-a 226); Ja ii.270.

fr. rosa; cp. BSk. roṣaka Divy 38

Rosanā

(f.) making angry, causing anger, being angry Vb 86 (hiṃsanā + ), expld at Vb-a 75 by ghaṭṭanā. Cp. BSk. roṣaṇī Avs i.178.

abstr. fr. rosati

Rosaneyya

(adj.) apt to be angry or cause anger; neg. a˚ not to be angered, not irritable Snp 216.

grd. formation fr. rosa

Rosita

smeared (with) anointed Ja iv.440 (= vilitta C.).

pp. of rus, to smear: Sk. rūṣita; given as root rus at Dhtm 442 with meaning “ālepa”

Roseti

to make angry, to annoy, to irritate SN i.162; AN ii.215 (so read for rosati) iii.38; Snp 125, Snp 130, Snp 216; Ja i.432; Ja iv.491.

Caus. of rosati, ruṣ; see rusita

Rohañña

(adj.) red Ja v.259 (rohaññā pungav’ūsabhā; C. expls by ratta-vaṇṇā). Kern Toev. s. v. proposes rohiñño = *rohiṇyah, (cp. pokkharaṇī for ˚iṇī) red cows.

fr. roha = rohita

Rohati

: for the Sk. rohati of ruh to grow we find the regular P. correspondent rūhati: see rūhati1. The Caus. of this verb is ropeti (to make grow): see ropeti-Another root, restricted to the Pāli, is seen in rūhati2 (with pp. rūḷha) and is equal to rundh (rudh rumbh) to break. The Caus. of this root (ropeti2 is either an indirect formation from it or (more likely) a direct representative of rup = lup as in P lumpati. To the latter belong the prep. cpds. oropeti & voropeti.;

Rohicca

a kind of deer Ja vi.537 (˚sarabhā migā).

fr. rohita, perhaps directly fr. Vedic rohita ewe, lit. the red one

Rohiṇī

(f.) 1. a red cow AN i.162 = AN iii.214.

2. Name of a nakkhatta or constellation (“red cow”) Snp-a 456; Mvu 19, Mvu 47.

3. Name of a river Snp-a 357.

cp. Vedic rohiṇī red cow or mare

Rohita

(adj.) red, as attribute of fishes at Ja v.405 (i.e. a special kind of fish), and of deer at Ja v.406 in same passage (i.e. a special kind of deer). Otherwise only in standing term rohita-maccha the “red fish,” viz. Cyprinus Rohita, which is freq. mentioned in the “Jātaka literature, e.g. Ja ii.433; Ja iii.333; Dhp-a ii.132 (four) 140; Kp-a 118.

L.

Vedic rohita; cp. the usual P. word lohita red & blood. See also rudhira & ruhira

L

La

syllable of abbreviation, corresponding to our “etc.”: see peyyāla. Lak-atthika

Lak-aṭṭhika

at Vv-a 222 is doubtful; aṭṭhika means “kernel,” lak˚; may be a misspelling for labujak˚ (?).

Lakanaka

(nt.?) ship’s anchor (nāvā˚ Mil 377 (v.l. lagganaka), 378.

fr. lag, with k for g, as lakuṭa: laguḷa etc. Would correspond to Sk. *lagnaka, cp. Trenckner Notes 62; Geiger, P.Gr. § 391

Lakāra

a sail Ja ii.112; Mil 378; Dāvs iv.42; Vism 137 (v.l. BB. lankāra).

for alankāra, lit. “fitting up,” cp. Hindī & Marāthī langara, Tamil ilankaran “in meaning anchor.”

Lakuṭa

a club, cudgel Mil 255 (in sequence daṇḍa-leḍḍu-lakuṭa-muggara), 301, 367, 368 See also laguḷa.

see laguḷa for etym.

Lakuṇṭaka

a dwarf Mvu 23, Mvu 50 (˚sarīratta); Vb-a 26 (˚pāda-purisa, cpd. with arūpa); PugA 227; C. on SN i.237.

dialectical

Lakuṇṭakatta

(nt.) dwarfishness Ja vi.337.

fr. lakuṇṭaka

Laketi

to hold fast (lit. to make adhere) Mil 377.

for laggeti, see lakanaka

Lakkha

(nt.) 1. a mark Mil 102.

2. a target Mil 418; Dhp-a i.52 (˚yoggā target practice, i.e. shooting).

3. a stake at gambling Ja vi.271.

4. a high numeral, a lac or 100,000 (but cp. Pv-a 255, where lakkha of Pv iv.338 is taken as a “period of time,” equal to 100 koṭis); Dāvs v.66.

fr. lakṣ (see lakkhaṇa), or (after Grassmann) lag “to fix,” i.e. to mark. Cp. Vedic lakṣa price at gambling (Zimmer, Altind. Leben 287)

Lakkhañña

(adj.) connected with auspices, auspicious, in phrase “lakkhaññā vata bho dosinā ratti” (how grand a sign friends, is the moonlight night! trsln) DN i.47 = Ja i.509 (expld at DN-a i.141 as “divasa-mās’-ādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttā”); Ja v.370 (˚sammata considered auspicious).

fr. lakkhaṇa, cp. BSk. lakṣaṇya diviner Divy 474

Lakkhaṇa

(nt.) 1. sign, characteristic mark; esp. a sign as implying something extraordinary or pointing to the future, therefore a prognosticative mark (cp. talisman), a distinguishing mark or salient feature, property, quality (as Rh. D. in Dial. i.19 somewhat lengthily, after Bdhgh, trsls lakkhaṇa by “signs of good & bad qualities in the foll. things and of the marks in them denoting the health or luck of their owners”) DN i.9 (a long list, as forbidden practice of fortune-telling, like maṇi˚ from jewels, daṇḍa˚ from

sticks, asi˚ from marks on swords etc.); Snp 360 (pl lakkhanā, here as fortune-telling together with supina telling fr. dreams, cp. Snp-a 362: daṇḍa˚, vattha˚ etc referring to DN i.9), 927 (with Āthabbana, supina nakkhatta, all kinds of secret sciences; expld at Snp-a 564 as “maṇi-lakkhaṇâdi”) 1018 (gottaṃ brūhi sa “with its distinguishing marks”); Ja vi.364 (sign of beauty); Mil 171 (yathāva˚ just characterization) Mvu 35, Mvu 109 (itthi˚ auspicious signs in women); Pv-a 161, Pv-a 219; Snp-a 386. A long enumn of all sorts of (perfect) marks (tatha-lakkhaṇāni) is found at DN-a i.62 sq. Cp. tādi-lakkhaṇa marks of such (a being) with ref. to good luck etc. Ja iii.98; Snp-a 200; Vv-a 95–⁠2. mark on the body, esp. when serving a def purpose, e.g. as the branding (of slaves), or the marks of a fortunate being, pointing towards his future greatness: (a) brand Ja i.451, cp. cpd. ˚āhata ■ (b) the (32 marks of a mahā-purisa or a great being, either destined to be a rājā cakkavatti, or a sammā-sambuddha. These are given at Snp 1019 (pl. lakkhanā), 1021, 1022 as only 3 (viz. mukhaṃ jivhāya chādeti, uṇṇ’ assa bhamuk antare, kos’ ohitaṃ vattha-guyhaṃ with ref. to his tongue, the hair between the eyebrows & the sexual organ); more completely as 32 at DN ii.16 sq.; DN iii.142 sq (the Lakkhaṇa Suttanta); referred to at DN i.88, DN i.105; Ja i.56; Mvu 5, Mvu 91; cp. paripuṇṇa-kāya Snp 548 (with expln lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya at Snp-a 452).

3. (in spec. sense:) pudendum Ja v.197 (subha˚, the male member), 366.

4. (adj.) (-˚) having the marks (of) characterized by, of such & such character AN i.102 (kamma˚; bāla˚ & paṇḍita˚, together with bāla-paṇḍitanimitta); Mil 111 (sata-puñña˚, of the Buddha); Vv-a 71 (para-sampatti-usuyyā-lakkhaṇā issā); Pv-a 17, Pv-a 120.

5. (as t. t. in philosophy specific attribute, characteristic (mark). In contrast to nimitta more a substantial attribute or primary characteristic (cp. Vb-a 261). Compared with other terms of definition we get the foll.: rasa essential property, paccupaṭṭhāna recurring phenomenon, padatṭhāna immediate occasion Dhs-a 63 (trslnExpos. i.84) cp. Cpd. 13 (where padaṭṭhāna is trsld as “proximate cause”) ■ Pts i.54 sq. (khandhānaṃ); ii.108 (saccānaṃ) Vb-a 85, Vb-a 136 (with ref. to the Paṭiccasamuppāda, cp Vism 528), 261 (fourfold, of kesā etc.); Vism 278 (with ref. to kammaṭṭhāna) 351 (4, of the dhātus: thaddha˚ ābandhana˚, paripācana˚, vitthambhana˚), 363 sq (id.), 495 (ariya-saccānaṃ); Vv-a 38 (compd with ārammaṇa with ref. to jhāna) ■ The 3 properties (tilakkhaṇaṃ) of existing things or of the phenomenal world are anicca, dukkha, anatta, or impermanence, suffering unreality: thus at Ja i.48 (dhamma-desanā ti-l-˚muttā) 275; iii.377 (through contemplating them arises vipassanā & pacceka-bodhi-ñāṇa) ■ abl.; lakkhaṇato “by or qua characteristic,” “in its essential qualification,” often found in exegetical analysis in Commentary style combd with var. similar terms (atthato, kamato, nimittato etc.), e.g. Vism 351, Vism 363, Vism 495, Vism 528; Vb-a 46 Vb-a 76, Vb-a 83, Vb-a 131, Vb-a 261 (where Vism 351 has paripācana for uṇhatta); Snp-a 343 ■ Cp. upa˚, vi˚, sa˚.

-āhata affected with a mark (of punishment or disgrace), branded Vin i.76; Vv-a 66. -kusala clever at interpreting bodily marks or at fortune-telling from signs (cp. nemittaka) MN i.220; Ja i.272. -kusalatā cleverness at (telling people’s fortune by) signs Vv-a 138. -paṭiggāhaka one who reads the signs, a soothsayer wise man Ja i.56. -pāṭhaka an expert in (interpreting) signs, fortune-teller Ja i.455; Ja ii.194; Ja v.211 -manta the secret science of (bodily) marks Snp 690 (but expld at Snp-a 488 as “lakkhaṇāni ca vedā ca,” thus taking it as Dvandva); Dhp-a iii.194. -sampatti excellency of marks Ja i.54. -sampanna endowed with (auspicious) signs Snp 409; Ja i.455.

the 3 lakkhaṇas at Snp 1022 refer to the brahmin Bāvari. Lakkhika & ya;

Vedic lakṣman nt. sign; adj. lakṣmaṇa; later Sk. lakṣmaṇa nt. In the defn of grammarians syn with aṅka brand, e.g. Dhtp 536 “anka lakkhaṇe lakkha dassane,” or Dhtm 748 “lakkha = dassanaanke”; cp. Ja i.451 lakkhaṇena anketi to brand. The Sk. Np. Lakṣmaṇa appears also in Prk. as Lakkhaṇa: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 312

Lakkhika & ˚ya

(adj.) belonging to auspices, favoured by good luck Sdhp 105 (˚ya); usually neg alakkhika unlucky, unfortunate, ill-fated; either with appa-puñña of no merit, e.g. SN v.146 = Ja ii.59; Vv 508 (= nissirīka, kālakaṇṇi Vv-a 212); or pāpa wicked Vin ii.192 (of Devadatta).

fr. lakkhī

Lakkhita

see abhi˚.

pp. of lakkheti

Lakkhī

(f.) 1. luck, good fortune, success, personal welfare Ja iii.443 (combd with sirī splendour expld by parivāra-sampatti & paññā respectively) iv.281 (expld as “sirī pi puññam pi paññā pi”). 2. splendour, power Dāvs i.6 (rajja˚ royal splendour) iv.38 (id.).

3. prosperity Dāvs v.35 (˚nidhāna Anurādhapura).

Sk. lakṣmī

Lakkheti

to mark, distinguish, characterize Ne 30 ■ pp. lakkhita ■ Cp. upa˚.

Denom. fr. lakkha

Lagati & Laggati

to adhere to, stick (fast) to (loc.), to hang from Vin i.202; Ja iii.120; Dhp-a i.131; Dhp-a iii.298 (ppr. alaggamāna); DN-a i.257 (for abhisajjati); aor. laggi Pv-a 153 (tīre); ger laggitva Ja iii.19; Dhp-a iv.25; Pv-a 280 (but better to be read laggetvā making fast; as v.l.) ■ pp. lagga & laggita; -Caus. laggeti to make stick to, to fasten, tie, hang up Vin i.209; Vin ii.117, Vin ii.152; Ja iii.107; Ja v.164, Ja v.175; Mvu 7, Mvu 9 (suttañ ca tesaṃ hatthesu laggetvā); Dhp-a i.138. Caus. II. laggāpeti to cause to fasten or stick, to make stick, to obstruct Ja iii.241; Mvu 33, Mvu 11; Mvu 34, Mvu 48 (kalāpaṃ); Dhp-a iv.183 ■ Cp. ālaggeti.

with variant langati; the spelling with gg is the usual one. Root lag, as in Vedic lakṣa etc. Sk. lagati, pp. lagna (from the pp. lagga the double g has been generalized in P.: but see Geiger, P.Gr. § 136) perhaps to Lat. langueo, E. languid, from meaning “to lag,” but doubtful: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. langueo. The Dhtp 23 gives lag in meaning “sanga,” which is the customary syn. in the commentaries. Cp. langī

Lagana & Laggana

(nt.) 1. adhering Ja i.46 (g.; v.281); with gg: Ja iii.202 (= sanga); Nd ii.p. 188 (s. v nissita, in sequence l., bandhana, palibodha); Mil 105; Dhp-a iii.433.

2. slinging round, making fast Vv-a 212.

fr. lag

Laguḷa

a club, cudgel Vin iii.77 (enumd with var. weapons of murder, like asi, satti, bheṇḍi pāsāṇa etc.); Mil 152, Mil 351 (kodaṇḍa-laguḷa-muggara) 355 (kilesa˚); Ja vi.394; Vism 525 (˚abhighāta).

cp. Sk. laguḍa, Marāthī lākūḍa, Hindī lakuṭa stick. The word is really a dialect word (Prk.) and as such taken into Sk. where it ought to be *lakṛta = lakuṭa Other etym. connections are Lat. lacertus (arm), Gr. λέκρανα, λάς; Old Prussian alkunis elbow; and distantly related E. leg. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lacertus Cp. P. bhuja1 & ratana

Lagga

(adj.) sticking; stuck, attached; obstructed, hindered Nd ii.107; Mil 346 (laggaṃ disvā mahiṃ); Dhs-a 127 (alagga-bhāva); Dhp-a i.361 (˚mānasa) Neg. alagga unobstructed (lit. not sticking or being stuck to), in phrase ākāso alaggo asatto apatiṭṭhito apalibuddho Mil 388 and elsewhere ■ Cp. olagga.

pp. of lag(g)ati

Laggāpana

(nt.) making stick, causing obstruction Ja iii.241.

fr. laggāpeti: see lagati

Laggita

stuck, adhering; obstructed Ja iv.11. Often in exegetical style in sequence lagga laggita, palibuddha, e.g. Nd ii.p. 188 (s. v. nissita) cp. No. 107.

pp. of lag(g)ati

Laghima

(langhima) in phrase aṇima-laghim’ ādikaṃ is doubtful in reading & meaning at Kp-a 108 = Vism 211 (spelt langh˚ here).;

Laṅkāra

see lakāra.

Laṅgī

(f.) bolt, bar, barrier, obstruction, only metaphorically with ref. to avijjā MN i.142, MN i.144; Pp 21; Dhs 390; Vb-a 141.

fr. lag

Laṅgula

(nt.) the tail of an animal Mvu 6, Mvu 6 (lāḷento langulaṃ; v.l. nangulaṃ) See also naṅgula & (concerning l → n); landhati (= nandhati); nalāṭa (for laḷāta).

cp. Sk. lāngula & lāngūla; also the ordinary P. forms nangula & nanguṭṭha, to; lag

Laṅghaka

a jumper, tumbler, acrobat Ja ii.142; Mil 34, Mil 191, Mil 331. f. laṅghikā Vin iv.285 (with naṭakā & sokajjhāyikā).;

fr. laṅgh

Laṅghati

1. to jump over (acc.) step over, to hop Ja iii.272; Ja v.472 (langhamāno yāti); Mil 85.

2. to make light of, disregard neglect, transgress Pv-a 15; Vv-a 138 ■ Cp. abhilaṅghati, ullaṅghati ■ Caus. laṅgheti (= laṅghati) to jump over (acc.), lit. to make jump Ja v.472 (vatiṃ) Thig 384 (Meruṃ langhetuṃ icchasi); Mil 85 ■ ger laṅghayitvā Thag-a 255, & (poet.); laṅghayitvāna Ja i.431 (= attānaṃ langhitvā C.); Mvu 25, Mvu 44 (pākāraṃ). Cp. olaṅgheti.

laṅgh, a by-form of lagh, as in laghu (see lahu) light, quick; Idg. *legh & *leṅgh;, with meanings of both “quick” & “light” (or “little”) from the movement of jumping. Here belong Gr. ελαξύς little ἐλαφρός quick; Lat. levis (fr. *leghṷis), Goth. leihto E. light; Ohg. lungar quick, Ger. ge-lingen to succeed Further Lat. limen threshold. Perhaps also the words for “lungs,” viz. Ger. lunge, E. lights etc ■ The Dhtp 33 defines lagh (laṅgh) by “gati-sosanesu”

Laṅghana

(nt.) jumping, hopping Ja i.430 (˚naṭaka a tumbler, jumper, acrobat, cp. Fick, Soc Gliederung 188, 190, 192); ii.363, 431. Cp. ullaṅghanā olaṅghanā.

fr. laṅgh

Laṅghamayā

(pl.) at Ja v.408 is problematic. We should expect something like laṅghiyo or laṅghimayā in meaning “deer,” as it is combd with eneyyaka. The C. reads laṅghimayā (“like deer; jumping”?) & expl;s by nānā-ratana-mayā “made of var. jewels,” rather strange.

Laṅghāpana

(nt.) making jump, raising, lifting Vism 143 (“launching”). Langhi (Langhi)

fr. Caus. of laṅgh

Laṅghi (Laṅghī)

(f.) 1. a kind of deer (?) Ja vi.537.

2. doubtful of meaning & origin in phrase; laṅghī-pitāmahā at Ja ii.363 = Ja iii.226: “whose grandfather was a deer, or a jumper” (?); used in disparagingly addressing a crane. The C. to Ja ii.363 expls rather strangely as follows: laṅghī vuccati ākāse langhanato megho “(a) jumping deer is called the cloud because of its jumping in the air,” balākā ca nāma megha-saddena gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī ti “the cranes conceive by the sound of the cloud,” meghasaddo balākānaṃ pitā megho pitāmaho ti “the sound of the cloud is the father of the cranes & the cloud the grandfather ”

fr. laṅgh

Lajjati

1. to be ashamed or abashed, to be modest or bashful Pv-a 48 (for harāyati) ppr. lajjamāna Dhp-a i.188; Pv-a 88; fut. lajjissati Ja iii.218; inf. lajjituṃ Dhp-a i.72; ger. lajjitvā Ja i.208 grd. lajjitabba (nt.) what one has to be ashamed of something disgraceful Ja vi.395; also (an odd form lajjitāya (so read: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 203 against Trenckner, Notes, 6627) Dhp 316.

2. to have regard of (gen.), to consider, to respect Ja iv.128 ■ Caus. II lajjāpeti to cause to be ashamed, to put to the blush Ja iii.137; Ja v.296 ■ pp. lajjita.

lajj; Dhtp 72: lajjane

Lajjana

(nt.) being ashamed Dhtp 72.

fr. lajj

Lajjanaka

(nt.) causing shame, humiliating, disgraceful Ja vi.395.

fr. lajjana

Lajjava

(nt.) shamefacedness DN iii.213 (where Dhs 1340 has maddava); cp. AN i.94.

fr. lajj

Lajjā

(f.) shame, bashfulness, modesty MN i.414; DN-a i.70; Dhp-a ii.90; instr. lajjāya out of shame Pv-a 47, Pv-a 112, Pv-a 283. Cp. nillajja.

fr. lajj

Lajjāpanikā

(f.) making ashamed, putting to shame, disgracing Ja v.284 (kula bringing disgrace on the clan).

fr. lajjāpeti, Caus. II. of lajjati

Lajjita

ashamed, bashful Sdhp 35 ■ f. lajjitā as n. abstr. “bashfulness” Dhp-a i.188.

pp. of lajjati

Lajjitabbaka

(nt.) something to be ashamed of, a cause of shame, disgrace Ja vi.395.

grd. of lajjati + ka

Lajjin

(adj.) feeling shame, modest, afraid, shy, conscientious (expld as “one who has hiri & ottappa; by C. on SN i.73: see K.S. 320 & cp.; Dhs. trstln p. 18; DN i.4, DN i.63; DN iii.15; SN i.73; AN ii.208; AN iv.249 sq.; Pp 57; Pv ii.915 (expld as one who is afraid of sin); Mil 373; DN-a i.70 ■ pl. lajjino Vin i.44.

-dhamma (lajji˚) modesty, feeling of shame Vin ii.53 sq.

fr. lajj

Lacchati

fut. of labhati (q.v.).

Lañca

a present, a bribe Ja i.201; Ja ii.186; Ja v.184; Ja vi.408 (gahita, bribes received); Dhp-a i.269 (˚ṃ adāsi); iv.1; Pv-a 209. The word is a word peculiar to the “Jātaka” literature.

-khādaka “eater of bribes,” one who feeds on bribes Ja ii.196; Ja v.1. -ggāha taking of bribes Ja v.109. -daṇḍaka a staff given as a present (?) Ja vi.450 (v.l. volañjanaka˚). -dāna gift of bribes, bribery Ja iii.205 -vittaka one who gets rich through bribes Ja i.339.

cp. Sk. lañca

Lañcaka

: Hardy in ed. of Netti, p. 278 suggests writing lañjaka & trsl;d “making known,” “exposition” (cp Sk. lañj to declare], found only at Mil 137 & 217 in cpd. Saṃyutta-nikāya-vara-lañcaka (trl;n Rh. D. “most excellent”); at Mil 242 & 258 in Majjhimanikāya vara˚; at Mil 362 in Ekuttara-nikāya-vara˚ and at Ne 2 in cpd. nayalañjaka. Trenckner (Mil ed. p. 424) translates it as “excellent gift (to mankind).”

Lañcana

in “kārāpesi tilañcanaṃ ” at Dpvs 20, 10 is not clear. We may have to correct reading into lañchanaṃ or lañchakaṃ. Oldenberg in his trsln (p. 211) leaves the word out and remarks: “Probably this passage refers to the three pupphayāna mentioned in the Mahāvaṃsa (33, 22, where Geiger reads “pupphādhānāni tīṇi, with trsln “3 stone terraces for offerings of flowers”) though I do not know how to explain or to correct the word used here (tilañcanaṃ).

Lañcha

a mark, an imprint Ja ii.425; Vb-a 52.

fr. lañch

Lañchaka

one who makes marks (expld by Cy. as “lakkhaṇa-kāraka”) Ja iv.364, Ja iv.366 (ti˚ so expld by Cy. v.l. ni˚). See nillañchaka & cp; lañcana (ti˚).

fr. lañcha; doubtful

Lañchati

to stamp, to seal Dhp-a i.35 (sāsanaṃ rāja-muddāya lañchanto) ■ Caus lañcheti.

1. to seal Ja i.452 (spelt lañjetvā); ii.326 vi.385; Snp-a 577 (rāja-muddikāya); Dhp-a i.21.

2. to mark, paint, smear Vin ii.107 = Vin ii.266 (mukhaṃ). Caus. II. lañchāpeti to have marked or sealed (by king’s command) Vism 38 (“had his seal put to this order”; trsl.) ■ Cp. nillaccheti.

lañch Dhtp 54 “lakkhaṇe”

Lañchana

(nt.) 1. stamp, mark, imprint Vv-a 89 (sasa˚, of the moon); Dāvs ii.23 (pada˚).

2. the seal (of a letter or edict) Snp-a 172 ■ Cp. lañcana.

fr. lañch

Lañchita

sealed Ja i.227 (pihita-lañchitā vā loha-cātiyo).

pp. of lañcheti

Lañjaka

in dīpa˚; stands as equivalent of dīpavaṃsa thus “story of the island” Dpvs 18, 2 Oldenberg (trsln p. 204) translates “the island of Lankā.

see lañcaka

Lañjeti

see lañchati and valañjeti.

Laṭukikā

(f.) the Indian quail, Perdix chinensis DN i.91; MN i.449 (l. sakuṇikā); Ja iii.44 Ja iii.174 sq. (quoted at Snp-a 358 & Dhp-a i.55); v.121; Mil 202; DN-a i.257 ■ Cp. Cunningham, Bharhut Tope, p. 58.

Dimin. fr. laṭvāka; dial.

Laṭṭhaka

(adj.) beautiful, auspicious, lovely Ja iii.464 Ja iii.493; Ja iv.1, Ja iv.477; DN-a i.284.

Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Sk. laṭaha, laḍaha, dialectical

Laṭṭhi

(f.) 1. a staff, stick DN i.105 (patoda goad), 126 (id.); Vv-a 64 (id.); Ja iv.310 (laṭṭhī hata laṭṭhiyā hata G.); v.280; Mil 27.

2. stick of sugar cane (ucchu˚) Pv-a 257.

3. sprout of a plant, offshoot Ja iii.161 (in simile); usually -˚, as in aṅga˚; sprout Thag-a 226; dālika˚; of the d. creeper Thig 297; beḷuva˚; of the Vilva tree Kp-a 118; sala˚; of the Sal tree AN ii.200 Found also in names of places, as Laṭṭhivana (Ja i.83 etc.).

-madhu(ka) “cane-honey,” i.e. liquorice Ja iv.537; Dhp-a iv.171 (˚ka).

Sk. yaṣṭi, with l for y; also in Prk. see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 255 & cp. Geiger,; P. Gr. § 462. The doublet yaṭṭhi also in Pāli

Laṭṭhikā

(f.) = laṭṭhi, only in Npl. as-˚ (cp. laṭṭhi 3), e.g. Amba˚; the grove of mango sprouts DN-a i.41.

Laṇḍa

(nt.) [cp. Sk. laṇḍa (dial.). The Dhtm under No. 155 gives a root laḍ in meaning “jigucchana,” i.e. disgust excrement, dung of animals, dirt; mostly used with ref to elephants (haṭṭhi˚), e.g. at Ja ii.19; Dhp-a i.163, Dhp-a i.192 Dhp-a iv.156 (here also as assa˚; horse dung.) Cp. laṇḍikā.

Laṇḍikā

(f.), only in aja˚; goat’s dirt, pellet of goat’s dung Ja i.419; Pv-a 283.

fr. laṇḍa

Latā

(f.) 1. a slender tree, a creeping plant creeper AN i.202 (māluvā˚); Vv 355 (= vallī Vv-a 162) 474 (kosātakī l.); Ja i.464 (rukkha˚, here perhaps better “branch”); Dhp-a i.392 (˚pasādhana: see under mahā˚) Mil 253, Mil 351; Vv-a 12 (kappa˚); Pv-a 51, Pv-a 121; Vism 183 (where the foll. kinds are given: lābu, kumbhaṇḍī sāmā, kāḷavallī, pūtilatā) ■ nāga˚; the iron wood tree see under nāga; pūti˚; a sort of creeper (q.v.). On latā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 130.

2. (fig.) an epithet of taṇhā (greed), as much as it strangles its victim Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; Ne 24, Ne 121.

3. (fig.) streak flash, in vijjul-latā flash of lightning Ja i.103.

-kamma creeper-work (combd with mālā-kamma Vin ii.117, Vin ii.152.

cp. Sk. latā, connected with Lat. lentus flexible; Ohg. lindi soft, E. lithe; also Ohg. lintea lime tree; Gr. ἐλάτη fir tree

Laddha

(having) obtained, taken, received Snp 106, Snp 239; Ja v.171; Mvu 5, Mvu 133 (kiñci laddhaṃ); 10 37 (kaññā laddhā); Pv-a 5laddhatvaṃ at Ja iv.406 is to be corrected to uddhatvā ■ Cp. upa˚, pa˚.

-adhippāya one who obtains his wishes Nd ii.542 -assāsa getting one’s breath again, coming to (out of a swoon) Ja iv.126. -upasampada one who has obtained ordination Pv-a 54. -jaya victorious Mvu 25, Mvu 98 -jīvika revived Pv-a 40. -nāma so-called Thag-a 292 (puthulomo laddhanāmo maccho); Pv-a 33 (yamaloka l-n. petaloka), 52 (niraya l-n. naraka), 57 (kuñjara l-n hatthi), 107 (sūcikā jighacchā), 119 (Purindada Sakka), 143 (Himavanto = pabbata-rājā), etc.

pp. of labhati

Laddhā

is ger. and 3rd sg. aor.; laddhāna ger. of labhati (q.v.).

Laddhi

(f.) religious belief, view, theory, esp. heretical view; a later term for the earlier diṭṭhi (cp Kvu trsl. introd. p. 47) Ja i.142 (Devadattassa), 425 iii.487; v.411; Dāvs ii.86 (dulladdhi wrong view) DN-a i.117; Pv-a 254; Sdhp 65. Cp. upa˚.

fr. labh

Laddhika

(-˚) having a (wrong) view or belief, schismatic Ja i.373 (evaṃ˚); Dpvs vii.35 (puthu˚).

fr. laddhi

Landhati

see nandhati & pilandhana. Concerning l → n cp.; laṅgula.

Lapa

(adj. n.) talkative, talking, prattling; a talker, tattler, prattler, chatterer AN ii.26 Thag 959 = Iti 112; Vism 26 (doubled: lapa-lapa) Nd i.226 (as lapaka-lapaka).

fr. lap: see lapati

Lapaka

one who mutters, a droner out (of holy words for pay) DN i.8 (cp. Dial. i.15); AN iii.111; Ja iii.349; Mil 228; DN-a i.91.

fr. lap

Lapati

to talk prattle, mutter Snp 776; Iti 122; Pv i.81; ii.63 ■ Cp ullapati, palapati, samullapati ■ Caus. lapeti (and lāpeti, metri causâ) to talk to, to accost, beg SN i.31 (here meaning “declare”); Snp 929 (janaṃ na lāpayeyya = na lapayeyya lapanaṃ pajaheyya Nd i.389); Dhp-a ii.157. Infin. lapetave (only in Gāthā language cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 204) Ud 21 ■ pp. lapita ■ Caus. II. lapāpeti Dhp-a ii.157.

lap, cp. Russ. lépet talk, Cymr. llêf voice. The Dhtp 188 & 599 defines; lap with “vacana”

Lapana

(nt.) & lapanā (f.) 1. talking, muttering; esp. prattling or uttering indistinct words for the sake of begging, patter DN i.8; AN ii.26; AN iii.430; Nd i.389; Ne 94; Mil 383. As f. lapanā at Vb 352; Vism 23 & 27 (def.); Vb-a 482.

2. the mouth, in cpd. lapana-ja “mouth born,” i.e. tooth Ja vi.218 (= mukhaja C.). Cp. ālapana ālapanatā, ullapana.

Lapāpana

(nt.) causing to speak, speaking Thag-a 78.

fr. Caus. II. lapāpeti of lap

Lapita

talked, uttered, muttered Iti 98.

pp. of lapati

Lapila

see lambila.

Labuja

the bread-fruit tree, Artocarpus lacucha or incisa DN i.53; Ja iv.363; Ja v.6, Ja v.417; Pv-a 153 (sa˚, read as salaḷa˚, like Vv 355, expld at Vv-a 162).

cp. Sk. labuja

Labbhamanatta

(nt.) the fact of being taken Pv-a 56.

abstr. fr. ppr. med. of labhati

Labbhā

(indecl.) allowable, possible (with inf.); usually neg (thus = Prohibitive!) Snp 393 na l. phassetuṃ; Snp-a p.376 expls by “sakkā”), 590; Pv ii.610; Ja i.64 (na l. tayā pabbajituṃ), 145 (id.), Pv-a 96 (= laddhuṃ sakkā).

best to be taken, with Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 465, as an old Opt. 3rd sg., like sakkā which corresponds to Vedic śakyāt. Thus labbhā = *labhyāt, as in Māgadhī

Labha

(-˚) (adj.) receiving, to be received, to get; only in dul˚; hard to get Snp 75; SN i.101; Ja i.307; Pp 26; Mil 16; Sdhp 17, Sdhp 27; and su˚ easy to obtain Pv ii.319.

a base-formation fr. labh

Labhati

1. (the very freq. & ordinary meaning) to get, to receive, obtain, acquire.

2. (fig.) to obtain permission to receive an opportunity, etc., as “pabbajituṃ sace lacchāmi” if I am allowed to receive the pabbajjā Mvu 18, Mvu 5; or “labhamāno niccam pi khāditu-kāmo ‘mhi” if I get the chance I should always like to eat Ja i.478; and passim (cp. Pass. labbhati below). The paradigma of labhati shows a great variety of forms owing to its frequent occurrence (cp. E. “get”). We have selected the most interesting ones. Pres. Ind. labhati rare (late, e.g. Vism 136); usually med labhate Thag 35; Snp 185, Snp 439; Snp 1st sg. labhe Pv i.64; 2nd sg labhase Ja ii.220; Ja ii.3rd pl. labhare SN i.110 ■ ppr. med labhamāna SN i.122 (otāraṃ a˚, cp. iv.178; MN i.334) also in Pass. sense “getting taken” Pv-a 71Opt. 3rd sg. labhe Snp 458, & (med.); labhetha Snp 45, Snp 46, Snp 217; Pv ii.97; also (usual form) labheyya Pv-a 115. 2nd sg med. labhetho (= Sk. ˚thāh) Snp 833Imper. 2nd sg labha Iti 77; Iti 3rd labhatu Pv-a 112; med. 2nd sg. labhassu Thig 432; Thig 3rd sg. labhataṃ DN ii.150; DN ii.1st pl. (as Hortative) labhāmase Pv i.55 (= labhāma Pv-a 27); & labhāmhase Pv iii.224Fut. 3rd sg. lacchasi (Sk. lapsyati SN i.114; Pv ii.46; iii.37; Ja ii.60 (Māro otāraṃ l.), 258; Mil 126; Dhp-a i.29; Snp-a 405; Thag-a 69 (Ap.); 1st sg lacchāmi MN ii.71; MN ii.2nd sg. lacchasi Vv 835; Pv iv.160 1st pl. lacchāma Ja i.54; Ja iv.292; & lacchāmase (med. Vv 329. Also (the Com. form) labhissati Pv-a 190; Vv-a 136Cond. 1st pl. alabhissāma Ja iii.35; med 3rd sg. alabhissatha DN ii.63Pret. (& aor.); (a) 3rd sg alattha DN i.176 (alattha pabbajjaṃ); MN ii.49; SN iv.302; Ja iv.310; Vv-a 66, Vv-a 69; Vv-a 1st sg. alatthaṃ DN ii.268; Vv 8122; Thag 747; Dhp-a iii.313; Dhp-a iii.2nd sg. alattha SN i.114 SN i.1st pl. alatthamha MN ii.63; MN ii.3rd pl. alatthuṃ DN ii.274 & alatthaṃsu SN i.48 ■ (b) (Prohib.) mā laddhā (3rd sg. med.) shall not receive (Sk. alabdha) Ja iii.138. (c) labhi Snp 994; Snp 1st sg. labhiṃ Thag 218; Thag 2, Thag 78; Ja ii.154; Vv-a 68; & alabhitthaṃ Thag 217; Thag 3rd sg. alabhittha Pv i.77 (spelt bbh); 1st pl. labhimhā (for labhimha DN ii.147Inf. laddhuṃ Ja ii.352; Dhp-a iii.117; Pv-a 96Ger. laddhā (poet.) Snp 306, Snp 388, Snp 766, Snp 924; laddhāna (poet.) Snp 67 (= laddhā, labhitvā Nd ii.546) Iti 65; and (ord.) labhitva Ja i.150; Ja iii.332; Pv-a 95. Grd. (a): labbhiya (only neg. alabbhiya what cannot be got) Ja iv.86; Pv ii.69; labbhaneyya (a˚) (in Com style as expln of labbhanīya) Ja iv.86 (˚ṭhāna); Pv-a 65 (˚vatthu), 96 (id.); and labbhanīya (as a˚-ṭṭhānāni impossible things) AN iii.54 sq. (five such items), 60 sq (id.); Ja iv.59 ■ (b): laddhabba Ja iii.332; Pv-a 112 Pv-a 252 ■ (c): laddheyya Pv iv.325Caus. labbheti (for *lābheti, a diff. formn fr. Sk. lambhayati, which is found in P. pa-lambheti) to make someone get, to procure, in 1st sg. aor. alabbhesi Vin iv.5 = Ja i.193; Dhp-a iii.213 (v.l. labh˚); and in pres. 3rd sg. labbheti Ja iii.353 (= adhigameti C.) ■ Pass. labbhati (fig.) to be permitted to be possible or proper; (or simply:) it is to be Mvu 30, Mvu 43; Kp-a 192 (vattuṃ), 207 (id.) ■ pp laddha ■ Cp. upa˚, pati˚, vi˚.

later Vedic labh for older rabh, cp. rabhate, rabha, rabhasa. Related are Gr. λαμβάνω to get λάφυρον booty; Lat. rabies = E. rabies; Lith. lõbis wealth ■ The Dhtp (204) simply defines as “lābhe. On the Prk. forms see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 484 ■ See also rabhasa

Labhana

(nt.) taking, receiving, gift, acquisition Dhp-a iii.271 (˚bhāva); Pv-a 73 (˚ṭṭhāna), 121 (id.).

fr. labh

Lamba

(adj.) (-˚) hanging down, drooping, pendulous SN iv.341, SN iv.342 (˚cūḷakā bhaṭa hirelings with large or drooping top-knots); Ja ii.185 (˚tthana with hanging breasts); iii.265 (˚cūla-vihangama); Dāvs ii.61alamba not drooping, thick, short Ja v.302 Ja vi.3 (˚tthaniyo) ■ Cp. ā˚, vi˚ & ālambana;.

fr. lamb

Lambati

to hang down, to droop, fall Mvu 32, Mvu 70 (laggāni lambiṃsu), 71 (ākāse lambamānāni). Fut. lambahīti (poet.) Ja v.302 (= lambissati) ■ Caus lambeti to cause to hang up or to be suspended, to hang up Mvu 34, Mvu 48 ■ Caus. II. lambāpeti id. Mvu 21, Mvu 15-pp. lambita ■ Cp. abhi˚, pa˚, vi˚.

lamb; cp. Lat. limbus “limb,” which may be also in E. limp, lit. “hanging down.”-The Dhtp defines the root as “ramba lamba avasaṃsane” (No. 199) as does Dhtm 284

Lambita

hanging down, suspended Mvu 27, Mvu 38; Mvu 30, Mvu 67.

pp. of lambeti

Lambin

(adj.) hanging down, able to hang or bend down (with ref. to the membrum virile) Vin iii.35 (“tassa bhikkhussa angajātaṃ dīghaṃ hoti lambati tasmā lambī ti vutto” Sam. Pās. i.278).

fr. lamb

Lambila

(adj.) sour, acrid, astringent (of taste) Nd i.240; Nd ii.540; Dhs 629; Dhs-a 320 (reads lapila, v.l. lampila; expld as “badara-sāḷava-kapiṭṭha-sāḷav’ ādi”); Mil 56 (reads ambila ).

reading not quite certain, cp. ambila

Lambheti

see palambheti (to deceive, dupe) It may be possibie that reading lampetvā at AN ii.77 (v.l. lambitvā) is to be corrected to lambhetvā (combd with hāpetvā) ■ alambhavissa at SN v.146 is to be read alam abhavissa, as at Ja ii.59.

Caus. of labh, for which usually labbheti (q.v. under labhati). The Sk. form is lambhayati ■ The Dhtm. (840) puts it down as a special root, although it occurs only in cpd. pa˚ in this special meaning “labhi vañcane”

Laya

1. a brief measure of time, usually combd with other expressions denoting a short moment, esp. frequent as khaṇa laya muhutta Vin i.12 Vin iii.92; AN iv.137; cp. Dpvs i.16 (khaṇe khaṇe laye Buddho sabbalokaṃ avekkhati) ■ Vism 136 (īsakam pi layaṃ yantaṃ paggaṇheth’ eva mānasaṃ).

2. time in music, equal time, rhythm Dāvs iv.50; Vv-a 183 (dvādasannaṃ laya-bhedānaṃ vasena pabheda).

cp. Sk. laya: see līyati

Laḷati

to dally, sport, sing Ja ii.121 (ppr. laḷamānā); Vv-a 41 (laḷantī; with kīḷati), 57 (id.) ■ Caus laḷeti Ja i.362 (ppr. lāḷentā); Vism 365; cp. upa˚ ■ pp laḷita: see pa˚.

lal, onomat. cp. Lat. lallo “lull”; Sk. lalallā; Gr. λάλος talkative; λαλέω talk; Ger. lallen. The Dhtp distinguishes 2 roots: lal (= icchā) & laḷ (= vilāsa & upasevā)

Lalāṭa

see nalāṭa (cp. langula).

Lava

a small particle, a drop Vv-a 253 (lavanka a small mark); Sdhp 105 (˚odaka).

fr.

Lavaka

a cutter, reaper Snp-a 148 (v.l. lāvaka). See lāvaka.

fr.

Lavaṇa

(nt.) salt, lotion Mil 112; Sdhp 158. See loṇa.

cp. late Vedic lavaṇa, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 54

Lavana

(nt.) cutting, reaping Mil 360.

fr. lunāti

Lavāpeti

Caus. of lunāti (q.v.).

Lasagata

(hattha) at AN ii.165 is to be read (with v.l.) as lepagata, i.e. sticky (opp. suddha).

Lasati

to desire, long; to dance, play sport; to shine; to sound forth. See lāsana, abhilāsa upaḷāseti, alasa, vilāsa ■ Caus. lāseti to sport, to amuse (oneself) Vin ii.10 (with vādeti, gāyati, naccati).

represents las to gleam, shine; sport, play; as well as laṣ to desire, long for. Cp. Lat. lascivus; Gr. λιλαίομαι; Goth. lustus = E., Ger. lust etc ■ The Dhtp 324 defs. las as “kanti”

Lasikā

(f.) the fluid which lubricates the joints, synovic fluid Vin i.202; DN ii.293; MN iii.90; SN iv.111; Snp 196; Ja i.146; Mil 382. In detail at Vism 264, Vism 362; Vb-a 247.

cp. Sk. *lasikā

Lasī

(f.) brains Ja i.493 (= matthalunga C.) = Dhp-a i.145. Lasuna & Lasuna;

etym.?

Lasuṇa & Lasuna

(nt.) garlic Vin ii.140; Vin iv.258; Ja i.474; Vv 436; Vv-a 186.

cp. Sk. laśuna

Lahati

to lick: see ullahaka, palahati, & lehati.;

Lahu

(adj.) light, quick AN i.10, AN i.45lahuṃ karoti to make light, to be frivolous Ja ii.451 ■ nt. lahuṃ (adv.) quickly Pv iv.160; Dpvs i.53; Mvu 4, Mvu 17 ■ Usually as lahuka (q.v.).

-citta light-minded SN i.201; Ja iii.73. -ṭṭhāna lightness of body, bodily vigour, good health MN i.437, MN i.473; DN i.204; Ud 15; Mil 14. [Cp. BSk. laghūtthānatā Divy 156.] -parivatta quickly or easily changing Vb-a 408.

Sk. laghu & raghu: see etym. under langhati

Lahukā

(adj.) 1. light (opp. garuka ); trifling Vin i.49; AN ii.48 (āpatti); iv.137 (jīvitaṃ parittaṃ l.) Mil 344 (āpatti).

2. light, buoyant Thag 104 (kāyo) Dhs 648; Mil 105; Pv-a 280. atilahukaṃ (adv.) too soon Vin ii.215.

3 (as tt. in grammar) light (of letters or syllables), opp. garuka DN-a i.177 (with ref. to the 10 fold vyañjana of the dhamma).

lahu + ka

Lahutā

(f.) lightness, buoyancy Dhs 42, Dhs 322, Dhs 585; Vism 448.

fr. lahu

Lahusa

(adj.) easily offended, touchy DN i.90; expld by DN-a i.256 as follows: “lahusā ti lahukā appaken’ eva tussanti vā russanti vā udaka-piṭṭhe lābukaṭāhaṃ viya appakena pi uppilavanti.” Cp rabhasa.

fr. lahu

Lahuso

(adv.) quickly AN iv.247 (sabba˚); Vism 238.

orig. abl. of lahu

Lākhā

(f.) lac; lac-dye; enumd with other colourings at MN i.127 = SN ii.101 = AN iii.230Snp-a 577 Vism 261 (as colour of blood).

-ācariya expert in lac-dyeing Snp-a 577. -guḷaka a ball of lac Snp-a 80. -goḷaka id. Snp-a 577. -tamba copper coloured with lac Thig 440 (= lākhā-rasarattehi viya tambehi lomehi samannāgata Thag-a 270) -rasa essence of lac, used for dyeing; lac-colouring Ja v.215 (˚ratta-succhavi); vi.269 (id.); Kp-a 62, Kp-a 63 Thag-a 270. Laja & Laja

cp. Sk. dākṣā

Lāja & Lājā

(f.) 1. fried grain, parched corn: occurring only in combn madhu-lāja fried grain with honey, sweet corn Ja iii.538; Ja iv.214, Ja iv.281.

2. the flower of Dalbergia arborea, used for scattering in bunches (with other flowers making 5 kinds or colours) as a sign of welcome & greeting, usually in phrase; lāja-pañcamāni pupphāni (“a cluster of flowers with lāja as the fifth”) Dhp-a i.112; Vv-a 31; Ja i.55 (˚pañcamakāni p.); cp. Ja ii.240 (vippakiṇṇa-lāja-kusuma-maṇḍita-talā); vi.42 (vippakiṇṇa-lāja-kusuma-vāsa-dhūp’ andhakāra); Dhp-a i.140 (vippakiṇṇa-valikaṃ pañcavaṇṇa-kusuma-lāja-puṇṇaghaṭa-paṭimaṇḍita).

cp. Vedic lāja: Zimmer, Altind. Leben 269

Lājeti

to fry or have fried Ja vi.341 (v.l. lañc˚, lañj˚), 385 (lañchetvā; v.l. lañci˚, lañje˚).

fr. lāja

Lāpa1

talk: see cpds. abhi˚, pa˚, sal˚.

fr. lap

Lāpa2

a sort of quail, Perdix chinensis SN v.146 = Ja ii.59. As lāpaka-sakuṇa also at Ja ii.59-Another name for quail is vaṭṭaka.

also fr. lap, lit. “talker,” cp. similar semantics of E. quail → Ger. quaken, quicken; E. quack. The P form rests on pop. etym., as in Sk. we find corresponding name as lāba

Lāpana

(nt.) muttering, utterance, speech Iti 98; AN i.165 (lapita˚). Perhaps also to be read at Thig 73 ■ Cp. upa˚.

fr. lāpeti, Caus. of lap

Lāpin

(-˚) (adj.) talking (silly) SN iii.143 (bāla˚).

fr. lap

Lāpu

(f.) a kind of cucumber Ja i.336, Ja i.341. See also lābuka.

-latā the cucumber creeper or plant Mil 374.

short for alāpu or ālābu, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 396

Lāpeti

: see lapati & cp. upalāpeti.;

Lābu

(f.) & Lābuka = lāpu (alābu) gourd or pumpkin, often used as receptacle Ja i.158 (˚ka), 411 (˚kumbhaṇḍa vesseḷ made of the gourd); v.37 (˚ka), 155 (addha-lābu-samā thanā); Dhp-a ii.59 (˚ka); Snp-a 227 (lābumhi catumadhuraṃ pūretukāmo).

-kaṭāha a gourd as receptacle Vism 255, Vism 359; Vb-a 63.

Lābha

receiving, getting, acquisition, gain, possession; pl. possessions DN i.8; DN ii.58, DN ii.61; MN i.508 (ārogya-paramā lābhā); iii.39; AN i.74; AN iv.157 sq., 160 (lābhena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto Devadatto, cp Ja i.185 sq.); Snp 31, Snp 438, Snp 828, Snp 854, Snp 1014, Snp 1046 (cp. Nd ii.548); Iti 67 (vitta˚); Ja iii.516 (yasa˚, dhana˚); Vism 93 Vism 136 (˚ṃ labhati), 150 (˚assa bhāgin getting riches) Pv-a 113, Pv-a 280 ■ A dat. sg. lābhā (for lābhāya) is used adverbially with foll. genitive in meaning of “for my (our) gain,” “it is profitable,” “good for me that” etc.; e.g. Mil 17 (lābhā no tāta, suladdhaṃ no tāta), 232 (lābhā vata tāsaṃ devatānaṃ); AN iii.313 (lābhā vata me suladdhaṃ vata me), expld at Vism 223; Dhp-a i.98 (lābhā vata me, elliptically); ii.95 (l. vata no ye mayaṃ… upaṭṭhahimha).

-agga highest gain Ja iii.125; Mil 21. -āsā desire for gain AN i.86. -kamyā (abl. out of desire for gain Snp 854 Snp 929 (= lābha-hetu Nd i.389). -taṇhā craving for possession Dhp-a iv.38. -macchariya selfishness in acquisitions AN iii.273; DN iii.234; Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhs 1122 -mada pride of gain Vb-a 466. -sakkāra gain and honour, usually combd with ˚siloka fame; the two first e.g. at Vin ii.196; Iti 73; Ja i.185, Ja i.186; Ja v.75; the three combd e.g. at MN i.192; SN ii.227, SN ii.237; AN ii.73; AN iii.343 sq., 377; Vb 352 sq.; lābha -siloka alone at Vism 67.

fr. labh

Lābhaka

(adj. nt.) one who receives; reception; ; not getting, non-receiving Vin iii.77.

fr. lābha

Lābhā

see under lābha.

Lābhin

(adj.) (-˚) receiving, getting, having, possessed of MN iii.39 (as n. “a receiver, recipient”) AN i.24; AN ii.85; AN iv.400; Pp 51; Vb 332 (nikāma˚) Ja i.140.

2. one who has intuition either in reasoning (or logical argument) or psychically, and who may therefore take certain premises for granted (opp alābhin a denier) DN-a i.106, DN-a i.120.

fr. labha

Lāmaka

(adj.) insignificant, poor inferior, bad, sinful. The usual syn. is pāpaVin ii.76; Vism 268 (= pāpaka); Dhs-a 45; Kp-a 243 (= khudda); PugA 229 (nīca lāmaka = oṇata); Kp-a 150 (˚desanā, cp. ukkaṭṭha); Dhp-a ii.77; Dhp-a iv.44 (˚bhāva) Vv-a 116; Pv-a 15 (for pāpa); 103 (= pāpaka), 125 (˚purisa = kāpurisa); Sdhp 28, Sdhp 253, Sdhp 426, Sdhp 526 (opp ukkaṭṭha) ■ f. lāmikā Ja i.285; Ja ii.346 (for itarā) Dhp-a ii.61 (pāpikā l. diṭṭhi) ■ Cp. Dhs. trsl.2 § 1025.

seems to be a specific Pāli word. It is essentially a C. word & probably of dialectical origin Has it anything to do with; omaka ?

Lāmajjaka

(lāmañjaka) (nt.) the root of Andropogon muricatus Vv 436 (v.l. ˚añc˚); Vv-a 186, (˚añj˚) 187.

cp. Sk. lāmajjaka

Lāyaka

(-˚) cutter, reaper AN iii.365 = SN iii.155 (read babbaja˚).

fr. lāyati

Lāyati

. to cut (off), mow, reap; ger. lāyitvā AN iii.365; Ja i.215; Ja iii.226; Vin iii.64; Pv i.81 (= lāvitvā Pv-a 40)-pp. lāyita.

for. *lāvati, , for which the ordinary form is lunāti (q.v.), y for v as freq. in Pāli: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 462 ■ The Dhtp. has a root in meaning “ādāna (No. 370)

Lāyana

(nt.) cutting Ja v.45 (tiṇa-lāyana asi, sickle); Dhp-a iii.285 (v.l. for dāyana).

fr. lāyati

Lāyita

cut, reaped Ja iii.130 (tiṇaṃ na lāyita-pubbaṃ); Vism 419 (˚ṭṭhāna place where one has reaped).

pp. of lāyati, lāyeti

Lāla

(adj.) talking without sense, silly, foolish Ja vi.360, Ja vi.417 (ḷ). Cp. alālā.

fr. lal, see laḷati

Lālaka

a wag, silly person, fool Ja i.205; Ja iv.210. Lalapati & Lalappati;

lala + ka

Lālapati & Lālappati

to talk much, to talk silly, to lament, wail Snp 580; Pv iv.52 (= vilapati Pv-a 260); Ja iii.217; Mil 148, Mil 275; Mvu 32, Mvu 68. pp. lālappita.

Intens. of lapati

Lālappa

talking much, excited or empty talk, wailing Vb 100, Vb 138; Pts i.38; Ne 29; Vb-a 104 (= punappunaṃ lapanaṃ). Lala(p)pana

fr. lālappati

Lāla(p)pana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) = lālappa, together with lāla(p)pitatta (nt.) in exegesis of parideva at Nd ii.416; Vb 100, Vb 138; Vb-a 104; DN-a i.121.

Lālappita

1. talking much, wailing Mil 148 (paridevita-l ■ mukha).

2. (nt.) much talk, excited talk, talking Ja vi.498.

pp. of lālappati

Lālā

(f.) saliva Ja i.61, Ja i.248; Ja vi.357; Vism 259; Dhp-a i.307 (mukhato lālā galati).

cp. laḷati

Lāḷana

(nt.) swaying, dalliance, sport DN-a i.197; Sdhp 387; as lāḷanā at Thag-a 243.

fr. lal

Lāḷeti

see laḷati.

Lāvaka

a cutter, reaper Mil 33 (yava˚); Mvu 10, Mvu 31; Snp-a 148 (v.l. BB. for lavaka). Lavati & Laveti;

fr. lāvati

Lāvati & Lāveti

to cut, to mow Pv-a 40 (lāvitvā), Mvu 10, Mvu 30 (lāvayati).

the latter the usual form, as Caus. of lunāti. lāvati is the simple Pāli formation fr. Another Caus. II. is lavāpati (q.v.). See also lāyati.

Lāsa

sporting, dancing: see abhi˚, vi˚.

of las

Lāsikā

(f.) a dancer, Mil 331.

fr. las

Lāseti

see lasati.

Likkhā

(f.) a kind of measure Vb-a 343 (36 rattareṇus equal to one likkhā 7 likkhās equal to 1 ūkā); Kp-a 43 (˚matta).

*Sk. likṣā egg of a louse, as measure equal to 8 trasareṇu (BR.) ■ Connected with Lat. ricinus a kind of vermin (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)

Likhati

1. to scratch; to cut carve; write, inscribe MN i.127 (rūpāni); Ja ii.372 (suvaṇṇa-patte); iv.257 (id.), 488, 489 (jāti-hingulakena); Dhp-a i.182; Pv-a 145 (nāmaṃ likhi wrote his name) ■ paṇṇaṃ l. to write a letter Ja ii.174; Ja vi.369 (paṇṇe on a leaf).

2. to shave (off), plane Vin ii.112 (inf. likhituṃ) ■ pp. likhita ■ Cp. vi.˚-Caus. I lekheti (q.v.). Caus. II. likhāpeti to cause to be cut or carved [cp. BSk. likhāpayati Divy 547] Vin ii.110; Snp-a 577; to cause to be written Mil 42.

likh; Vedic likhati, also rikh in Ved. ārikhati (R.V. vi.53, 7), cp. with palatal riśati, liśati. Connected with Gr. ἐρείκω to tear; Lith. rë̃kti to cut bread, to plough; Ohg. rīga = Ags. rāw = E. row ■ Dhtp 467 simply expls by “lekhane”

Likhana

(nt.) scratching, cutting, writing Ja v.59 (a golden tablet for writing on) Cp. ullikhana.

cp. late Sk. likhana; fr. likh

Likhā

in likhā-paṇṇa at Pv-a 20 is faulty for lekhā˚; (lekha˚) letter, cp. lekha-pattra letter Mālatīm 172, 7.

Likhita

1. carved, cut, worked (in ivory etc.), in cpd. saṅkha˚ brahmacariya the moral life, like a polished shell DN i.63; SN ii.219, expld at DN-a i.181 as “likhita-sankha-sadisa dhota-sankha-sappaṭibhāga.” 2. written, inscribed Ja iv.7 (likhitāni akkharāni); Mil 42 (lekha l.).

3. made smooth, shaved Ja vi.482 (cāpa)

4. marked, proscribed, made an outlaw Vin i.75. Cp. ullikhita.

pp. of likhati

Likhitaka

(adj.) one who has been proscribed, an outlaw Vin i.75 (cora).

likhita + qualifying ending ka

Liṅga

(nt.) 1. characteristic, sign, attribute, mark feature MN i.360; SN v.278; Snp 601 sq. (= saṇṭhāna Snp-a 464); Vin iv.7 (two: hīna & ukkaṭṭha); Ja i.18; Ja iv.114 (gihi˚), 130; Mil 133 (sāsana˚), 162 (dve samaṇassa lingāni), 405 (lingato ca nimittato ca etc.); Vism 184; Dhs-a 64 (= saṇṭhāna Tīkā: Expos. 86).

2. mark of sex, sexual characteristic, pudendum (male as well as female, as neither m. nor f.) Vin iii.35 (purisa˚); Ja v.197 (˚saṇṭhāna); Kp-a 110 (itthi˚); Snp-a 48 (˚sampatti), 51 (id.), 300 (itthi˚); Dhs-a 321 sq. (itthi˚).

3. (in grammar) mark of sex, (characteristic) ending, gender Snp-a 397. ˚vipallāsa change or substitution of gender Pv-a 7, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 87, Pv-a 157.

fr. liṅg; late Vedic & (pre-eminently) Class. Sk. linga

Liṅgāla

antelope (?) Pgdp 10.

cp. Sk. lingālikā a kind of mouse

Liṅgika

(adj.) having or being a characteristic Vism 210 (of nāma); Kp-a 107 (id.).

fr. linga

Liṅgeti

1. to embrace, in poet. ger. liṅgiya (as if fr. lingati) Thig 398 (= ālingetvā Thag-a 260). See ā˚.

2. to characterize: see ul˚.

Denom. fr. liṅg

Lipi

the alphabet; a letter of the alphabet; writing Mil 79.

fr. lip; late Sk. lipi

Limpati

to stay behind, to stay, E. leave & live, Ger leben. The Dhtp (385) simply expl;s by “limpana” to smear, plaster, stain; usually in pass. (or med.) sense “to get soiled, to dirty oneself” Thig 388; Pv-a 215 Doubtful in Snp p.ssages, where both limpati & lippati; are found as readings, e.g. Snp 778 in Text lippati, but Niddesa reading limpati (Nd i.55); Snp 811 lipp˚, Nd i.133 limp˚; Snp 1040, Snp 1042 lipp˚, Nd ii.549 limp.˚-Pass lippati to be soiled (by), to get stained (in character Snp 250, Snp 547, Snp 625, Snp 778, Snp 913, Snp 1040; cp. Snp 71 (alippamāna ppr.) ■ pp. litta: see ava˚, ul˚, vi.˚-Cp. also ālimpeti, palimpeti, vilimpati ■ Caus. I. lepeti to cause to be plastered Ja vi.432 ■ Caus. II. limpāpeti to cause to be plastered or anointed Mvu 34, Mvu 42 (cetiyaṃ ˚āpetvāna).

lip, cp. repa stain, lepa ointment, stain; Gr. λίπος grease, fat, λιπαρός fat, ἀλείφω to anoint; Lat lippus; Lith. limpû to stick, Goth. bi-leiban, Ohg bilīban.

Limpana

(nt.) soiling, smearing Dhtp 385.

fr. lip

Lisati

to break off, tear off, pull; only at Dhtp 444 expld by “lesa.”

cp. dial. Sk. liśate = Vedic riśate

Lihati

to lick; pres. lehati Ja ii.44; aor. lehayiṃsu Pv-a 198 (v.l. for palahiṃsu). Cp. parilehisaṃ Vv 8121 Vv-a 316; ger. lehitvā DN-a i.136 (sarīraṃ); Vv-a 314. pp. līḷha (?). Cp. leyya.

lih, Sk. leḍhi or līḍhe, also lihati. Cp. Lat. lingo, Gr. λείξω; Goth. bilaigōn, Ags. liccian = E. lick, Ger lecken ■ The Dhtp 335 expls lih by “assādane,” i.e. taste

Līna

clinging, sticking; slow, sluggish; shy, reserved, dull, AN i.3; Vism 125. Definitions at Vb 352, Vb 373; Dhs 1156, Dhs 1236; SN v.277, SN v.279 (ati˚). Often combd with uddhata as “sluggish or shy” and “unbalanced,” e.g. at SN v.112; Vism 136; Vb-a 310 alīna active, open, sincere Snp 68 (˚citta), 717 (id.) Ja i.22 (v. 148; ˚viriya sīha).

pp. of līyati

Līnatā

(f.) = līyanā Vism 469. alīnatā open-mindedness, sincerity Ja i.366; Snp-a 122.

abstr. formation fr. līna instead of līy˚

Līnatta

(nt.) sluggishness, shyness; only in phrase cetaso līnattaṃ immobility of mind SN v.64 SN v.103; AN i.3 = AN iv.32; AN v.145 sq.; Ne 86, Ne 108; Vb-a 272 (= cittassa līn’ ākāra).

abstr. fr. līna

Līyati

to stick. The Dhtp evidently favours the separation when interpreting by “silesana-dravīkaraṇa,” i.e. to make slip or run (Dhtp 441; Dhtm 681)] 1. to stick, adhere, cling to see cpds. all˚, o˚, ni˚, paṭisal˚.

2. to melt, slip: see cpd. pavi˚ (to dissolve) ■ pp. līna.

, Vedic līyati; *lei to stick to or cleave: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lino, which he separates in meaning fr. *lei to smear, polish

Līyana

(nt.) sticking to, adhering, resting Sdhp 190 (˚ṭṭhāna resting-place).

fr. līyati

Līyanā

(f.) = līyana; cleaving to, sluggishness, shyness Dhs 1156.

Līyitatta

(nt.) = līyanā Dhs 1156.

abstr. formation after similar synonymical chains, like bhāvitatta

Līlā

(līḷā) (f.) play, sport, dalliance; probably for līḷhā at Ja v.5 & 157, both times comb;d with vilāsa.

-aravinda a lotus serviceable for sport Vv-a 43 (līḷ˚).

cp. Epic Sk. līlā or *līḍā

Līḷhā

(f.) grace, ease, charm adroitness; always used with ref. to the Buddha (Buddhalīḷhā), e.g. Ja i.155; Dhp-a i.33; Dhp-a iii.79. So in phrase Buddhalīḷhāya dhammaṃ deseti “to expound the doctrine with the Buddha’s mastery” Ja i.152, Ja i.155 Ja iii.289; Vv-a 217 (spelling wrongly līḷāya). Of the B’s gait: Ja i.93, Ja i.149; Dhp-a ii.41. The combn with vilāsa, as mentioned by Childers, applies to līlā (q.v.) which may stand for līḷhā at the passages mentioned although not used of the Buddha.

abstr. of līḷha, Sk. līḍha, pp. of lih, lit. being polished, cp. ullīḍha polished

Lugga

broken (up), rugged (of a path) Mil 217, Mil 218. Cp. vi˚.

pp. of rujati; corresponding to Sk. rugṇa

Lujjati

to be broken up, to break (up), to be destroyed to go asunder, to fall apart AN i.283 = Pp 32 (here equal to “be wiped out,” but it is unnecessary to assume as Kern, Toev. s. v. lujjati does, a by-form of luc, luñcati The Pp C. 215 expls by “nassati”); Vin i.297; Vin ii.123; SN iv.52 (in etymologizing interpretation of loka: “lujjati kho loko ti vuccati”; quoted at Nd ii.550 on Snp 1119); Thag 929 ■ Cp. olujjati, palujjati ■ pp. lugga.

Pass. of ruj, corresponding to Sk. rujyate. Dhtp 400 gives luj as sep. root with meaning vināsa. See rujati

Lujjana

(nt.) breaking up, crumbling away, dissolution Dhs-a 47 (in etym. of loka = lujjana-palujjan’ aṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ), 308 (id.); Vism 427 (id.).

fr. lujjati; a word peculiar to Pali dogmatics

Luñcati

to pull out, pluck (a bird), tear, peel Ja i.244, Ja i.476; Ja ii.97, Ja ii.363; Ja iii.314; Ja iv.191; Ja v.463; Mvu 23, Mvu 46 (aor. aluñci ); 28, 26 (ger. luñcitvā ); Vism 248 (kese) ■ Caus. II. luñcāpeti Dhp-a ii.53 (kese), and loceti Thag 283 (kesamassuṃ alocayiṃ) ■ pp. luñcita.

Vedic luñcati, luc or luñc, to Lat. runco to pull up weeds; Gr. ῥυκάνη plane. The Dhtp 43 expls by apanayana

Luñcita

plucked, pulled Mil 240 (i.e. combed, of wool; Rh. D. trsls “pressed”; Nyānatiloka “cut”); Pv-a 47 (vilūna-kesa + ).

pp. of luñcati

Luṭhati

to rob, plunder.

cp. later Sk. luṭhati to plunder, which is one of the dial. variants luṭh, lunṭh, loṭh of lul to shake. The Dhtp (474) & Dhtm (136) both give; ruṭh & luṭh; with meaning “upaghāte”

Luta

seems to be a legitimate spelling representing either lutta or lūna, in meaning “cut, cut off”. Thus at SN i.5 (nalo va harito luto) 126 = Ja vi.25; and at Snp 532 (lutāni bandhanāni; vv. ll lūtāni & lunāni; expld as “chinnāni padālitāni” at Snp-a 432).

cp. lu for under lunāti

Lutta

broken, cut off; as t. t. in grammar “elided” Vv-a 13 (of ca), 111 (of iti), 122 (id.).

cp. Epic Sk. lupta; pp. of lumpati

Ludda

(adj.) 1. fierce, terrible; cruel, gruesome SN i.143; AN ii.174 (pāpa, l., kibbisa); v.149; Pp 56; Vv 845 (= dāruṇā pisāc’-ādino Vv-a 335); Ja v.243 (ṭhānaṃ niraya); Sdhp 286. The spelling ludra occurs at Ja iv.46 = Ja vi.306, which is ludda at Ja v.146.

2. a hunter, sportsman Snp 247 (dussīla˚; Snp-a 289: luddā ca kurūra-kammantā lohita-pāṇitāya, macchaghātakamigabandhaka-sākuṇik’ādayo idha adhippetā); Vv 631 Ja ii.154 (˚putta = luddaka); iii.432 (Bharata by name) Pp 56 (māgavika, sākuṇika, l., macchaghātaka etc. expld by dāruṇa kakkhaḷa at Pp A 233); Vism 245 Vb-a 259; Vb-a 228.

the usual P. form of rudda, corresponding to Sk. raudra

Luddaka

= ludda 2, i.e. hunter Vin i.220; Ja iv.416; Pv iii.72 (miga˚; expld as “dāruṇa” Pv-a 206); Mil 222; Vb-a 266 (miga˚, in simile); Pv-a 34, Pv-a 168. Cp Fick, Sociale Gliederung 143, 207. Note. The expression sunakha-luddako at Dhs-a 273 is not quite clear (“doghunter”?). It applies to a female & Maung Tin (;Expositor ii.361) reads “ luddhikā ” (sic), with trsln “dog-mistress,” remarking that Pyī reads luddako “hunter-dog” (?).

Luddha

greedy, covetous AN iii.433 (with pharusa-vāca & samphappalāpin); Iti 84; Mil 92 (duṭṭha, mūḷha, l.); Ja i.124.

pp. of lubbhati

Lunana

(nt.) cutting, severing Snp-a 148 (niddānan ti chedanaṃ lunanaṃ uppāṭanaṃ).

for lūna(na), cp. lavana

Lunāti

to cut, cut off, mow, reap Mil 33 (yavalāvakā yavaṃ lunanti); Dhs-a 39 ■ pp. lūna (& luta); -Caus I. lāvayati Mvu 10, Mvu 30; Caus. II. lavāpeti to cause to mow Vin ii.180 ■ A Pass. lūyati [fr. lu ] is found at DN i.141 (aor. lūyiṃsu) and at corresponding passage Pp 56 (imper. lūyantu, where dubbā is to be corrected to dabbhā ) ■ See lava, lavaka, lavana lāyati, lavati.

, given as lu at Dhtp 504 (“chedana”) & Dhtm 728 (“paccheda”). For etym. cp. Gr. λύω to loosen Lat. luo to pay a fine, Goth. fraliusan to lose; Ger. los E. lose & loose

Lubbhati

to be lustful or greedy, to covet, long for, desire Iti 84 (lobhaneyye na lubbhati); Vism 465, Vism 468 ■ ger. lubbha (?) in olubbha is to be referred to lamb rather than lubh. A grd formation in lobhaneyya or lobhanīya (q.v.) ■ pp luddha.

Vedic lubhyate, lubh, cp. Lat. lubet & libet it pleases, libido longing; Goth. liufs = Ger. lieb & lob E. love, etc ■ Dhtp 434: lobhe

Lubbhana

(nt.) being greedy, greediness, a scholastic word, only found in exegesis of word lobha, e.g. at Dhs 32 (where also the enlarged abstr. formation lubbhitatta ) & Vism 465, Vism 468 (lubbhana-mattaṃ lobha).;

fr. lubh

Lumpati

to break, harm, injure; to attack plunder; with a strong touch of affection (sympathy or desire) lubh in it [cp. lup: Gr. λύπη; ruj: roga], which is still more evident in Intens. loluppa (q.v.) ■ Dhs-a 365 (in expln of loluppa) ■ pp. lutta ■ Cp. ullumpana ullopa, lopa, vilumpati, vilopa. Lulati & Lutati;

lup, Epic Sk. lumpati, found also as rup in Pali: see ruppati. Connected with Lat. lugeo to be sorry (cp. rujati, roga; Gr. λύπη sorrow) and rumpo to break Defns at Dhtp 386 & 433 (chedana) and at Dhtm 618 & 669 (cheda, vināsa)

Luḷati & Luṭati

to stir, shake, agitate, upset; intrs. to be in motion, to be stirred Mil 259 (calati khubbhati l. āvilati) ■ pp. luḷita.

cp. Ep. Sk. loṭh to move & dial.; luḍ, loḍayati, to stir, agitate, which is a by-form of lul lolati to move, Caus. lolayati to set in motion. Etym connected with Slavonic ljuljati to rock, Ags. lāēl a (flexible) rod, rood; root due to onomat. formation. Another form is luṭhati. The Dhtm (117) expls luṭ; by “loṭane” (cp. viloṭana & viloḷana), and; luḷ (510) by “manthane”

Luḷita

stirred, moved, disturbed; lively; turbid (of water) SN v.123 = AN iii.233; (udapatta āvila l.); DN ii.128 = Ud 83 (udakaṃ parittaṃ luḷitaṃ āvilaṃ) Ja vi.63; Nd i.488 (āvila + ); Mil 35, Mil 177, Mil 220 (˚citta) 383 (a˚); Dhs-a 328 (indriyāni paripakkāni alulitāni avisadāni).

pp. of luḷati

Lūka

owl Ja vi.497 (= ulūka C.).

apocope form of ulūka, arisen through wrong syllable-division

Lūkha

(adj.) [Vedic rūkṣa; Prk. lūha & lukkha; BSk. lūha, e.g. Divy 13 (praheṇaka), 81 (˚cīvara), 425, 427 1. rough, coarse, unpleasant; poor, bad (usually appld to dress or food); mediocre, meȧgre, wretched. Opp paṇīta (e.g. Vin i.212; SN ii.153; AN iv.10; Ja i.228; Vv-a 64) ■ SN iv.337 sq.; AN iv.232 sq.; Vin i.55; Thag 923; Ja i.228 (cittasmiṃ paṇīte… dānaṃ lūkhaṃ na hoti); Nd ii.342 (p. 182, in exegesis of nikkuha, where practices of ascetics are referred to as “lūkhaṃ cīvaraṃ dhāreti, l. piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjati, l. senāsanaṃ paṭisevati etc.); Vv-a 298, Vv-a 335 sq.; Pv-a 180.

2. (of men) low wretched, rough, miserable, offensive Vin i.199; Vin iii.110 (kisa l. dubbaṇṇa); SN i.175 (= jiṇṇa C, see K.S. 320 trsln “looking worn”); MN i.77 = Ja i.390lūkhapuggala a miserable, offensive character (opp. siniddhapuggala) Vism 132; Vb-a 282.

-ājīvin leading a hard or rough life DN i.161; DN iii.44, DN iii.47; SN ii.200; AN v.190. -cīvara (adj.) wearing a shabby robe, badly clad Vin iii.263; Mil 342 (cp. cīvara lūkha bad condition of clothes AN ii.71 = Pp 53; lūkhacīvara-dhara AN i.25). -ppamāṇa (& ˚ika); taking unpleasantness or misery as one’s standard AN ii.71 Pp 53 (cp. PugA 229); Dhp-a iii.114; Snp-a 242; cp rūpa-ppamāṇa. -ppasanna believing in shabbiness or mediocrity, having (bodily) wretchedness as one’s faith Vin ii.197; AN ii.71 = Pp 53. -pāpuraṇa miserably clad SN i.175; Dhp-a iv.8, Dhp-a iv.9.

Lūkhatā

(f.) unpleasantness, wretchedness, poorness, misery PugA 229.

fr. lūkha

Lūkhasa

(adj.) rough, harsh; miserable, selfmortifying Snp 244 (= nīrasa atta-kilamath’ ânuyutta Snp-a 287).

fr. lūkha

Lūtā

(f.) spider Abhp 621.

*Sk. lūtā

Lūna

cut, mowed, reaped Thig 107 (˚kesī); Ja ii.365; Dāvs i.32. Cp. vi˚.

pp. of lunāti

Lūyati

: Pass. of lunāti (q.v.).

Lekha

1. writing, inscription, letter, epistle Ja vi.595 (silā˚ inscription on rock) Mvu 5, Mvu 177 (lekhe sutvā); 27, 6; 33, 40 (˚ṃ vissajjayi) Dāvs 5, Dāvs 67 (cāritta˚); Mil 42; Snp-a 164 (˚vācāka reciting), 577.

2. chips, shavings Vin ii.110 (v.l. likha).

fr. likh, cp. Sk. lekha & lekhā

Lekhaka

one who knows the art of writing, a scribe, secretary Vin iv.8 (as a profession); iv.10 (= muddikā & gaṇakā, pl.); Mil 42.

fr. lekha

Lekhaṇī

(f.) an instrument for scratching lines or writing, a stencil, pencil AN ii.200; Ja i.230.

fr. likh; cp. Epic Sk. lekhaṇī stencil Mbh 1, 78

Lekhana

(nt.) scratching, drawing, writing Dhtp 467.

fr. likh

Lekhā

(f.) 1. streak, line Vv-a 277 (= rāji); canda˚; crescent moon [cp. Epic candralekhā Mbh 3, 1831] Vism 168; Dhs-a 151.

2. a scratch, line AN i.283; Pp 32; Ja vi.56 (lekhaṃ kaḍḍhati).

3. writing, inscription, letter Vin iii.76 (˚ṃ chindati destroy the letter); Ja i.451 (on a phalaka); Mil 349 (˚ācariya teacher of writing); Pv-a 20 (˚paṇṇa, letter so read for likhā˚).

4. the art of writing or drawing [ = lipi Hemacandra], writing as an art. It is classed as a respectable (ukkaṭṭha) profession (sippa) Vin iv.7; and mentioned by the side of muddā and gaṇanā Vin iv.7, Vin iv.128 = Vin i.77; cp. Vin iv.305.

fr. likh; Vedic lekhā. See also rekhā & lekha

Lekhita

drawn (of lines), pencilled Thig 256.

pp. of lekheti

Lekheti

to (make a) scratch Ja iv.402 ■ pp. lekhita.

Caus. of likhati or Denom. of lekha

Leḍḍu

a clod of earth SN v.146 = Ja ii.59 (˚ṭṭhāna); Ja i.19, Ja i.175 Ja iii.16; Ja vi.405; Mil 255; Snp-a 222 (ākāse khitta, in simile); Vism 28 (trsln “stone”), 360 (˚khaṇḍ’ādīni) 366 (containing gold), 419; Vb-a 66 (˚khaṇḍā); Vv-a 141; Pv-a 284 ■ The throwing of clods (stones?) is a standing item in the infliction of punishments, where it is grouped with daṇḍa (stick) and sattha (sword), or as leḍḍu-daṇḍ’ādi, e.g. at MN i.123; DN ii.336, DN ii.338 (v.l. leṇḍu); Ja ii.77; Ja iii.16; Ja vi.350; Vism 419; Dhp-a i.399 (v.l. leṇḍu); iii.41; iv.77; Vv-a 141Note. leḍḍūpaka in cuṇṇaṃ vā telaṃ vā leḍḍūpakena etc. at Dhs-a 115 read as vālaṇḍupakena, as at Vism 142.

-pāta “throw of a clod,” a certain measure of (not too far) a distance Vin iv.40; Vism 72; Dhs-a 315 (trsln “a stone’s throw”).

dial. Sk. leṣṭu → *leṭṭhu → *leṭṭu → leḍḍu; also Prk. leḍu & leṭṭhu: Pischel, § 304; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 62

Leḍḍuka

= leḍḍu; Vism 28.

Leṇa

(& lena) (nt.) 1. a cave (in a rock), a mountain cave, used by ascetics (or bhikkhus) as a hermitage or place of shelter, a rock cell. Often enumd with kuṭi guhā, e.g. Vin iv.48; Mil 151; Vb 251 (n.). At Vin ii.146 it is given as collective name for 5 kinds of hermitages, viz. vihāra, aḍḍhayoga, pāsāda, hammiya guhā. The expln of leṇa at Vb-a 366 runs as follows “pabbataṃ khaṇitvā vā pabbhārassa appahonakaṭṭhāne kuḍḍaṃ uṭṭhāpetvā vā katasenāsanaṃ,” i.e. opportunity for sitting & lying made by digging (a cave in a mountain or by erecting a wall where the cave is insufficient (so as to make the rest of it habitable) Cp. Vin i.206 = Vin iii.248 (pabbhāraṃ sodhāpeti leṇaṃ kattukāmo) Mvu 16, Mvu 12; Mvu 28, Mvu 31 sq. (n); Mil 200 (mahā˚).

2. refuge, shelter, (fig.) salvation (sometimes in sense of nibbāna ). In this meaning often combd with tāṇa & saraṇa;, e.g. at DN i.95; SN iv.315 (maṃ-leṇa refuge with me; + maṃtāṇa ); iv.372 (= nibbāna); AN i.155 sq. (n); Ja ii.253; DN-a i.232. Cp. Vin iii.155. leṇ’atthaṃ for refuge Vin ii.164 (n); Ja i.94- aleṇa without a refuge Pts i.127; Pts ii.238; Pv ii.25 (= asaraṇa Pv-a 80).

-gavesin seeking shelter or refuge Ja ii.407 = Ja iv.346 -guhā a mountain cave Ja iii.511. -dvāra the door of the (rock) hermitage Vism 38; Dhp-a iii.39. -pabbhāra “cave-slope,” cave in a mountain Dhp-a iv.170.

*Sk. layana, fr.; in meaning “to hide,” cp. Prk. leṇa

Lepa

1. smearing, plastering, coating over Vin iv.303 (bāhira˚); Ja ii.25 (mattikā˚).

2. (fig.) plaster, i.e. that which sticks, affection, attachment, etc., in taṇhā˚ the stain of craving, & diṭṭhi˚; of speculation Nd i.55 Nd ii.271iiiNote. lasagata at AN ii.165 read with v.l. as lepa-gata, i.e. sticky ■ Cp. ā˚, pa˚;

fr. lip, see limpati; cp. Classic Sk. lepa stain, dirt

Lepana

(nt.) smearing, plastering, anointing Vin ii.172 (kuḍḍa˚); AN iv.107 (vāsana˚), 111 (id.); Ja ii.117 Cp. abhi˚, ā˚, pa˚

fr. lip

Lepeti

see limpati.

Leyya

(adj. nt.) to be licked or sipped; nt. mucilaginous food (opp. peyya liquid) AN iv.394 (+ peyya); Mil 2 (id.).

grd. of lih: see lihati

Lesa

sham, pretext, trick Vin iii.169 (where ten lesas are enumd, viz. jāti˚, nāma˚ gotta˚, linga˚, āpatti˚, patta˚, cīvara˚, upajjhāya˚ ācariya˚, senāsana˚); Ja ii.11; Ja vi.402lesa-kappa pretext Vin ii.166; Vv 8443 (= kappiya-lesa Vv-a 348) Thag 941; DN-a i.103.

cp. Sk. leśa particle; as Kern, Toev. s. v. points out, it occurs in Sk. also in the P. meaning at Mbh v.33, 5 although this is not given in BR ■ As “particle only at Dhtp 444 in defn of lisati

Lehati

see lihati.

Loka

world, primarily “visible world,” then in general as “space or sphere of creation, with var. degrees of substantiality. Often (unspecified in the comprehensive sense of “universe.” Sometimes the term is applied collectively to the creatures inhabiting this or var. other worlds, thus, “man, mankind people, beings.”- Loka is not a fixed & def term. It comprises immateriality as well as materiality and emphasizes either one or the other meaning according to the view applied to the object or category in question Thus a trsl;n of “sphere, plane, division, order” interchanges with “world.” Whenever the spatial element prevails we speak of its “regional” meaning as contrasted with “applied” meaning. The fundamental notion however is that of substantiality, to which is closely related the specific Buddhist notion of impermanence (loka = lujjati).

1. Universe: the distinctions between the universe (cp. cakkavāḷa) as a larger whole and the world as a smaller unit are fluctuating & not definite. A somewhat wider sphere is perhaps indicated by; sabba-loka (e.g. SN i.12; SN iv.127, SN iv.312; SN v.132; Iti 122 Mvu 1, Mvu 44; cp. sabbāvanta loka DN i.251; DN iii.224) otherwise even the smaller loka comprises var. realms of creation. Another larger division is that of loka as sadevaka, samāraka, sabrahmaka, or the world with its devas, its Māra and its Brahmā, e.g. SN i.160, SN i.168 SN i.207; SN ii.170; SN iii.28, SN iii.59; SN iv.158; SN v.204; AN i.259 sq. AN ii.24 sq.; AN iii.341; AN iv.56, AN iv.173; AN v.50; Iti 121; Nd i.447 (on Snp 956), to which is usually added sassamaṇa-brāhmaṇī pajā (e.g. DN i.250, see loci s. v. pajā). With this cp. Dhp 45, where the divisions are paṭhavī, Yamaloka sadevaka (loka), which are expld at Dhp-a i.334 by paṭhavī = attabhāva; Yamaloka = catubbidha apāyaloka; sadevaka = manussaloka devalokena saddhiṃ-The universe has its evolutional periods: saṃvaṭṭati and vivaṭṭati DN ii.109 sq. The Buddha has mastered it by his enlightenment: loko Tathāgatena abhisambuddho Iti 121. On loka, lokadhātu (= cosmos) and cakkavāḷa cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie p. 180, 181. 2. Regional meaning.-(a) in general. Referring to this world, the character of evanescence is inherent in it; referring to the universe in a wider sense, it implies infinity, though not in definite terms. There is mention of the different metaphysical theories as regards cosmogony at many places of the Canon. The antānantikā (contending for the finitude or otherwise of the world) are mentioned as a sect at DN i.22 sq Discussions as to whether loka is sassata or antavā are found e.g. at MN i.426, MN i.484; MN ii.233; SN iii.182, SN iii.204; SN iv.286 sq. AN ii.41; AN v.31, AN v.186 sq.; Pts i.123, Pts i.151 sq.; Vb 340; Dhs 1117. Views on consistency of the world (eternal or finite; created or evolved etc.) at DN iii.137; cp SN ii.19 sq. Cp. also the long and interesting discussion of loka as suñña at SN iv.54 sq.; Pts ii.177 sq.; Nd ii.680-as well as MN ii.68 (upanīyati loko addhuvo, and “attāṇo loko, assakoloko” etc.); “lokassa anto” is lit unattainable: AN ii.50 = SN i.62; SN iv.93; but the Arahant is “lok’antagū,” cp. AN iv.430 ■ As regards their order in space (or “plane”) there are var. groupings of var worlds, the evidently popular one being that the world of the devas is above and the nirayas below the world of man (which is “tiriyaṃ vâpi majjhe”): Nd ii.550. The world of men is as ayaṃ loko contrasted with the beyond or paro loko: DN iii.181; SN iv.348 sq.; AN i.269; AN iv.226; Snp 779 (n’āsiṃsati lokaṃ imaṃ parañ ca); or as idhaloka DN iii.105. The defn of ayaṃ loko at Nd i.60 is given as: sak’attabhāva, saka-rūpa-vedanā etc., ajjhatt āyatanāni, manussa-loka, kāmadhātu; with which is contrasted paro loko as: parattabhāva, para-rūpavedanā, bāhir’āyatanāni, devaloka, rūpa-& arūpadhātu-The rise and decay of this world is referred to as; samudaya and atthaṅgama at SN ii.73; SN iii.135 SN iv.86; AN v.107 ■ Cp. DN iii.33 (attā ca loko ca); Mvu 1, Mvu 5 (lokaṃ dukkhā pamocetuṃ); 28, 4 (loko ‘yaṃ pīḷito) Pv-a 1 (vijjā-caraṇa-sampannaṃ yena nīyanti lokato)-Other divisions of var. kinds of “planes” are e.g. deva˚; AN i.115, AN i.153; AN iii.414 sq.; Brahma˚; Vb 421 Mvu 19, Mvu 45; Yama˚; Dhp 44; SN i.34; nara˚; Mvu 5, Mvu 282 See also each sep. head-word, also peta˚ & manussa˚;. The division at Nd i.550 is as follows: niraya˚, tiracchāna˚, pittivisaya˚, manussa˚, deva˚ (= material) upon which follow khandha˚, dhātu˚, āyatana˚ (= immaterial). Similarly at Nd i.29, where apāya˚; takes the place of niraya˚, tiracchāna˚, pittivisaya˚ ■ Another threefold division is saṅkhāra˚, satta˚, okāsa˚; at Vism 204, with explns: “sabbe sattā āhāra-ṭṭhitikā” ti sankhāraloka; “sassato loko ti vā asassato loko” ti sattaloka; “yāvatā candima-suriyā pariharanti disā ‘bhanti virocamānā” etc. (= MN i.328; AN i.227; cp Ja i.132) = okāsaloka. The same expln in detail at Snp-a 442 ■ Another as kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚;: see under rūpa; another as kilesa˚, bhava˚, indriya˚; at Ne 11, Ne 19. Cp. sankhāra-loka Vb-a 456; dasa lokadhātuyo (see below) SN i.26.

3. Ordinary & applied meaning.;-(a) division of the world, worldly things SN i.1, SN i.24 (loke visattikā attachment to this world; opp sabba-loke anabhirati SN v.132) ■ loke in this world among men, here DN iii.196 (ye nibbutā loke); Iti 78 (loke uppajjati); DN-a i.173 (id.); Vb 101 (yaṃ loke piya-rūpaṃ etc.); Pv ii.113 (= idaṃ C.); Kp-a 15, Kp-a 215 See also the diff. defns of loke at Nd ii.552loka collectively “one, man”: kicchaṃ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca, etc. DN ii.30. Also “people”: Lanka-loka people of Ceylon Mvu 19, Mvu 85; cp. jana in similar meaning. Derived from this meaning is the use in cpds. (˚-as “usual, every day, popular, common”: see e.g. ˚āyata, ˚vajja, ˚vohāra ■ (b) “thing of the world, material element, physical or worldly quality, sphere or category (of “materiality”). This category of loka is referred to at Vb 193, which is expld at Vb-a 220 as follows: “ettha yo ayaṃ ajjhatt’ ādi bhedo kāyo pariggahīto so eva idha-loko nāma.” In this sense 13 groups are classified according to the number of constituents in each group (1

12 and No. 18); they are given at Nd ii.551 (under lokantagū Snp 1133) as follows (1) bhavaloka; (2) sampatti bhavaloka, vipatti bhavaloka; (3) vedanā; (4) āhārā; (5) upādāna-kkhandhā (6) ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (their rise & decay as “lokassa samudaya & atthangama” at SN iv.87); (7 viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo; (8) loka-dhammā; (9) satt’āvāsā (10) upakkilesā; (11) kāmabhavā; (12) āyatanāni (18) dhātuyo. They are repeated at Pts i.122 = Pts i.174 with (1) as “sabbe sattā āhāra-ṭṭhitikā; (2) nāmañ ca rūpañ ca; and the remainder the same. Also at Vism 205 and at Snp-a 442 as at Pts i.122. Cp. the similar view at SN iv.95: one perceives the world (“materiality” loka-saññin and loka-mānin, proud of the world) with the six senses. This is called the “loka” in the logic (vinaya) of the ariyā ■ A few similes with loka see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

-akkhāyikā (f., scil. kathā ) talk or speculation about (origin etc. of) the world, popular philosophy (see lokāyata and cp. Dialogues i.14) Vin i.188; DN i.8; MN i.513; Mil 316; DN-a i.90. -agga chief of the world Ep. of the Buddha Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.11). -anta the end (spatial) of the world AN ii.49 (na ca appatvā lokantaṃ dukkhā atthi pamocanaṃ). -antagū one who has reached the end of the world (and of all things worldly) Ep. of an Arahant AN ii.6, AN ii.49 sq.; Iti 115, Snp 1133; Nd ii.551. -antara the space between the single worlds Ja i.44 (v.253: Avīcimhi na uppajjanti, tathā lokantaresu ca). -antarika (scil. Niraya) a group of Nirayas or Purgatories situated in the lokantara (i.e. cakkavāl antaresu Ja i.76), 8,000 yojanas in extent, pitch dark which were filled with light when Gotama became the Buddha Ja i.76; Vb-a 4; Vism 207 (lokantariya˚) Snp-a 59 (˚vāsa life in the l. niraya); cp. BSk. lokântarikā Divy 204 (andhās tamaso ‘ndhakāra-tamisrā) -ādhipa lord or ruler of the world AN i.150. -ādhipateyya “rule of the world,” dependence on public opinion, influence of material things on man, one of the 3 ādhipateyyas (atta˚, loka˚, dhamma˚) DN iii.220 Vism 14. -ānukampā sympathy with the world of men [cp. BSk. lokânugraha Divy 124 sq.] DN iii.211; Iti 79 -āmisa worldly gain, bait of the flesh MN i.156; MN ii.253 Thig 356. -āyata what pertains to the ordinary view (of the world), common or popular philosophy, or as Rhys Davids (Dial. i.171) puts it: “name of a branch of Brahman learning, probably Nature-lore”; later worked into a quâsi system of “casuistry, sophistry. Franke, Dīgha trsln 19, trsls as “logisch beweisende Naturerklärung” (see the long note on this page, and cp. Dial. i.166

172 for detail of lokāyata). It is much the same as lok-akkhāy(ika) or popular philosophy. DN i.11, DN i.88; Vin ii.139; Snp p.105 (= vitaṇḍa-vādasattha Snp-a 447, as at DN-a i.247); Mil 4, Mil 10, Mil 178; AN i.163, AN i.166; AN iii.223. Cp. BSk. lokāyata Divy 630, Divy 633 and lokāyatika ibid. 619. See also Kern’s remarks at Toev. s. v. -āyatika (brāhmaṇa) one who holds the view of lokāyata or popular philosophy SN ii.77 (trslnK.S. 53: a Brahmin “wise in world-lore”); Mil 178; Ja vi.486 (na seve lokāyatikaṃ; expld as “anatthanissitaṃ… vitaṇḍa-sallāpaṃ lokāyatika-vādaṃ na seveyya,” thus more like “sophistry” or casuistry) -issara lord of the world Sdhp 348. -uttara see under lokiya. -cintā thinking about the world, worldphilosophy or speculation SN v.447; AN ii.80 (as one of the 4 acinteyyāni or thoughts not to be thought out buddha-visaya, jhāna-visaya, kamma-vipāka, l-c.). Cp BSk. laukika citta Divy 63, Divy 77 etc. -dhammā (pl. common practice, things of the world, worldly conditions SN iii.139 sq.; Snp 268 (expln loke dhammā; yāva lokappavatti tāva-anivattikā dhammā ti vuttaṃ hoti Kp-a 153, cp. Ja iii.468); Mil 146. Usually comprising a set of eight, viz. lābha, alābha, yaso, ayaso, nindā pasaṃsā, sukhaṃ, dukkhaṃ DN iii.260; AN iv.156 sq.v.53; Nd ii.55; Pts i.22, Pts i.122; Vb 387; Ne 162; Dhp-a ii.157. -dhātu constituent or unit of the Universe “world-element”; a world, sphere; another name for cakkavāla. Dasa-sahassi-lokadhātu the system of the 10,000 worlds Vin i.12; AN i.227DN iii.114; Pv ii.961 Kv 476; Vism 206 sq.; Vb 336; Nd i.356 (with the stages from one to fifty lokadhātu’s, upon which follow sahassī cūḷanikā l-dh.; dvisahassī majjhimikā; tisahassī; mahāsahassī); Ja i.63, Ja i.212; Mil 237; Vb-a 430 Vb-a 436. See also cūḷanikā. -nātha saviour of the world Ep. of the Buddha Snp 995; Vism 201, Vism 234; Vv-a 165; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 287. -nāyaka guide or leader of the world (said of the Buddha) Snp 991; Ap 20; Mvu 7, Mvu 1; Mil 222 -nirodha destruction of the world Iti 121 (opp. ˚samudaya). -pāla (˚devatā) guardian (governor) of the world, which are usually sepcified as four, viz. Kuvera (= Vessavaṇa), Dhataraṭṭha, Virūpakkha, Virūḷhaka alias the 4 mahārājāno Pv i.42; Ja i.48 (announce the future birth of a Buddha). -byūha “world-array, pl. byūhā (devā) Name of a class of devas Ja i.47; Vism 415 (kāmâvacara-deva’s). -mariyādā the boundary of the world Vv-a 72. -vajja common sins Mil 266; Kp-a 190. -vaṭṭa “world-round,” i.e. saṃsāra (opp. vivaṭṭa = nibbāna) Ne 113, Ne 119. See also vaṭṭa. -vidu knowing the universe, Lp. of the Buddha DN iii.76; SN i.62; SN v.197, SN v.343; AN ii.48; Snp p.103; Vv 3426; Pp 57; expld in full at Snp-a 442 and Vism 204 sq. -vivaraṇa unveiling of the universe, apocalypse, revelation Vism 392 (when humans see the devas etc.). -vohāra common or general distinction, popular logic, ordinary way of speaking Snp-a 383, Snp-a 466; Vb-a 164.

cp. Vedic loka in its oldest meaning “space, open space.” For etym. see rocati. To the etym. feeling of the Pāli hearer loka is closely related in quality to ruppati (as in pop. etym. of rūpa ) and rujati. As regards the latter the etym. runs “lujjati kho loko ti vuccati” SN iv.52, cp. Nd ii.550, and loka = lujjana Dhs-a 47, Dhs-a 308: see lujjana. The Dhtp 531 gives root lok (loc) in sense of dassana

Lokiya

(& lokika) (adj.) 1. (ordinarily) “belonging to the world,” i.e ■ (a) world-wide, covering the whole world, famed, widely known Thag 554; Ja vi.198. (b) (-˚) belonging to the world of, an inhabitant of (as lokika ) Pv i.62 (Yama˚) ■ (c) common, general worldly Vism 89 (samādhi); Dhp-a iv.3 (˚mahājana Pv-a 131 (˚parikkhaka), 207 (sukha), 220 (˚sabhāva) See also below 3.

2. (special meaning) worldly mundane, when opposed to lokuttara. The term lokuttara has two meanings-viz. (a) in ordinary sense the highest of the world, best, sublime (like lokagga etc.), often applied to Arahantship, e.g. lokuttaradāyajja inheritance of Arahantship Ja i.91; Dhp-a i.117 ideal: lokuttara dhamma (like parama dhamma) the ideal state, viz. Nibbāna MN ii.181; pl. l. dhammā MN iii.115 ■ (b) (in later canonical literature) beyond these worlds, supra-mundane, transcendental, spiritual In this meaning it is applied to the group of nava lokuttarā dhammā (viz. the 4 stages of the Path sotāpatti etc., with the 4 phala’s, and the addition of nibbāna), e.g. Dhs 1094. Mrs. Rh. D. tries to compromise between the two meanings by giving lokuttara the trsln “engaged upon the higher ideal” (Dhs. tsrl. Introd. p. 98), since meaning (b) has too much of a one-sided philosophical appearance. On term cp Cpd. 913.

3. lokiya (in meaning “mundane”) is contrasted with lokuttara (“transcendental”) at many passages of the Abhidhamma, e.g. at Pts ii.166; Dhs 505, Dhs 1093, Dhs 1446; Vb 17 sq., 93, 106, 128, 229 sq., 271 322; Kv 222, 515, 602; Pp 62; Tikp 41 sq., 52 sq. 275; Dukp 304, 324; Ne 10, Ne 54, Ne 67, Ne 77, Ne 111, Ne 161 sq. 189 sq.; Mil 236, Mil 294 (lokika), 390; Vism 10, Vism 85, Vism 438; DN-a i.331; Dhs-a 47 sq., 213; Vb-a 128, Vb-a 373; Dhp-a i.76 (lokika); ii.150; iii.272; iv.35.

fr. loka; cp. Vedic laukika in meaning “worldly, usual”

Locaka

(adj.) one who pulls out DN i.167 (kesa-massu˚, habit of cert ascetics); MN i.308 (id.).

fr. loc. Caus. of luñc; cp. Sk. luñcaka

Locana1

the eye; adj. (-˚) having eyes. (of… ) Pv i.115 (miga-manda˚); Pv-a 57, Pv-a 90 (pingala˚).

fr. loc or lok to see; Dhtp 532 & Dhtm 766:; loc = dassana

Locana2

(nt.) pulling, tearing out DN i.167 (kesa-massu˚); AN i.296; Pp 55.

fr. loc. Caus. of luñcati

Loceti

see luñcati.

Loṭana

(nt.) shaking, upsetting Dhtm 117. Cp. vi˚.;

luṭ; cp. *Sk. lolana & viloḷana

Loṇa

(nt.) salt; as adj., salty, of salt, alkaline-Vin i.202 (loṇāni bhesajjāni alkaline medicine among which are given sāmuddaṃ kāḷaloṇaṃ sindhavaṃ ubbhidaṃ bilaṃ as var. kinds of salt), 220 = 243 (as flavouring, with tela, taṇḍula & khādaniya); AN i.210 AN i.250; AN iv.108; Mil 63; Dhp-a iv.176 (in simile see below) Vv-a 98, Vv-a 100, Vv-a 184 (aloṇa sukkha-kummāsa, unsalted) On loṇa in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

-ambila acid and salt Ja i.505; Ja ii.171, Ja ii.394. -odaka salt water Ja vi.37; Vv-a 99 (˚udaka). -kāra salt-maker Vin i.350 (˚gāma); AN ii.182 (˚dāraka); Ja vi.206 (kara) Mil 331. -ghaṭa a pitcher with salt SN ii.276. See also App. to Kp-a 68 (in Sn Index 870, 871) on Vism passage with loṇaghaṭaka. -dhūpana salt-spicing Vb-a 311 (viya sabba vyañjanesu; i.e. the strongest among all flavourings). -phala a crystal of (natural salt [phala for phaṭa = *sphaṭa, cp. phalaka] AN i.250 (in simile). -rasa alkaline taste AN iv.199, AN iv.203. -sakkhara a salt crystal (cp. ˚phala), a (solid) piece of (natural) salt SN ii.276 (in simile, cp. AN i.250); Snp-a 222 (aggimhi pakkhitta l-s., in the same simile at Dhp-a iv.176: uddhane pakkhitta-loṇa). -sakkharikā a piece of salt-crystal, used as a caustic for healing wounds Vin i.206. -sovīraka salted sour gruel Vin i.210; Vv-a 99. Lonika & Loniya;

cp. Sk. lavaṇa, for which see also lavaṇa. The Prk. form is loṇa

Loṇika & Loṇiya

(adj.) salty, alkaline Dhs 629loṇiya-teliya prepared with salt & oil Ja iii.522 Ja iv.71aloṇika unsalted 426 (˚aka); Vv-a 184; Ja i.228 Ja iii.409.

fr. loṇa

Lodda

Name of a tree Ja v.405; Ja vi.497.

cp. *Sk. rodhra; on sound changes see Geiger, P.Gr. 44, 622

Lopa

taking away, cutting off; as tt. g. apocope, elision (of the final letter) Vb-a 164 (sabba-loka-vohāra˚); Snp-a 12, Snp-a 303, Snp-a 508; Vv-a 79 often in anunāsika˚; dropping of (final) Snp-a 410; Vv-a 154, Vv-a 275. At SN v.342 read piṇḍiy ‘ālopena for piṇḍiyā lopena ■ Cp. ālopa, nillopa, vilopa vilopiya.

fr. lup: see lumpati

Lobha

covetousness, greed. Defined at Vism 468 as “lubbhanti tena, sayaṃ vā lubbhati, lubbhana-mattam eva vā taṃ,” with several comparisons following. Often found in triad of lobha, dosa, moha (greed, anger bewilderment, forming the three principles of demerit see kusala-mūla), e.g. at AN iv.96; Iti 83, Iti 84; Vism 116 Dukp 9, 18 sq. See dosa & moha;DN iii.214, DN iii.275; SN i.16, SN i.43, SN i.63, SN i.123 (bhava˚); v.88; AN i.64 (˚kkhaya) 160 (visama˚), cp. DN iii.70 sq.; DN ii.67; Snp 367, Snp 371, Snp 537 (˚kodha), 663, 706, 864, 941 (˚pāpa); Nd i.15, Nd i.16, Nd i.261; Ja iv.11 (kodha, dosa, l.); Dhs 982, Dhs 1059; Vb 208, Vb 341 Vb 381, Vb 402; Ne 13, Ne 27; Vism 103; Vb-a 18; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 13 Pv-a 17, Pv-a 89 (+ dosa), 102; Vv-a 14; Sdhp 52 (˚moha), 266- alobha disinterestedness DN iii.214; Dhs 32.

-dhammā (pl.) affection of greed, things belonging to greed; (adj.) (of) greedy character MN i.91; MN iii.37; DN i.224, DN i.230; SN iv.111; AN iii.350; Ja iv.11. -mūla the root of greed Vism 454 (eightfold; with dosa-mūla moha-mūla).;

cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. lobha; fr. lubh: see lubbhati

Lobhana

(nt.) being greedy Thig 343 (= lobh’ uppāda Thag-a 240). Lobhaniya (iya, eyya)

fr. lobha

Lobhaniya (˚īya, ˚eyya)

(adj.) 1. belonging to greed “of the nature of greed” causing greed Iti 84 (˚eyya). See rajaniya.

2. desirable Mil 361 (paduma).

grd. formation fr. lobha

Loma

(nt.) Vin ii.5 (= pannalomo hoti C.); iii.183; MN i.442. Cp. anu˚, paṭi˚, vi˚.

-kūpa a pore of the skin Ja i.67; Kp-a 51, Kp-a 63; Snp-a 155 (where given as 99,000) Vism 195 (id.). -padmaka a kind of plant Ja vi.497 (reading uncertain; v.l. lodda˚) -sundarī (f.) beautiful with hairs (on her body) Ja v.424 (Kurangavī l.; expld on p. 430 as “roma-rājiyā maṇḍita udarā”). -haṃsa horripilation, excitement with fear or wonder, thrill DN i.49; AN iv.311 sq. (sa˚); Snp 270 Vb 367; Mil 22; Vism 143; DN-a i.150. -haṃsana causing horripilation, astounding, stupendous Snp 681; Ja iv.355 (abbhuta + ); Pv iii.93; iv.35; Mil 1; Mvu 17, Mvu 55 (abbhuta + ). -haṭṭha having the hair standing on end, horrified, thunderstruck, astounded DN i.95; SN v.270; Snp p.15; Mil 23; Snp-a 155; cp. haṭṭha-loma above.

cp. Vedic roman. The (restituted) late P. form roma only at Ja v.430; Abhp 175, Abhp 259; Sdhp 119 the hair of the body (whereas kesa is the hair of the head only) DN ii.18 (ekeka˚, uddhagga˚, in characteristics of a Mahāpurisa); SN ii.257 (asi˚, usu˚, satti˚ etc.) AN ii.114; Vin iii.106 (usu˚ etc.); Snp 385; Ja i.273 (khaggo lomesu allīyi); Vb-a 57; Dhp-a i.126; Dhp-a ii.17 (˚gaṇanā); Thag-a 199; Vv-a 324 (sūkara˚); Pv-a 152 Pv-a 157; Sdhp 104. A detailed description of loma as one of the 32 ākāras of the body (Kp iii.; pl. lomā) is found at Vism 250, Vism 353; Vb-a 233; Kp-a 42, Kp-a 43aloma hairless Ja vi.457; puthu˚ having broad hair or fins name of a fish Ja iv.466; Vv 4411. haṭṭha˚; with hairs erect, excited Mvu 15, Mvu 33 ■ On loma in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131 ■ lomaṃ pāteti to let one’s hair drop, as a sign of subduedness or modesty, opp. to horripilation [pāteti formed fr. pat after wrong etym of panna in panna-loma “with drooping hairs,” which was taken as a by-form of patita: see panna-loma

Lomaka

(-˚) (adj.) having hair, in cpd. caturaṅga˚; having fourfold hair (i.e. on the diff. parts of the body? Vin iv.173. It may refer to the 5 dermatoid constituents of the body (see pañcaka) & thus be characteristic of outward appearance. We do not exactly see how the term; caturaṅga is used here ■ Cp. anulomika.

fr. loma

Lomasa

(adj.) hairy, covered with hair, downy, soft MN i.305; Pv i.92. At Ja iv.296 lomasā is expld as pakkhino, i.e. birds; reading however doubtful (vv.ll. lomahaṃsa & lomassā).;

cp. Vedic romaśa

Lomin

(-˚) (adj.) having hair, in cpds. ekanta˚ & uddha˚;, of (couch-) covers or (bed) spreads: being made of hair altogether or having hair only on top Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163; DN i.7; cp. DN-a i.87. Lola (Lola)

fr. loma

Lola (Loḷa)

(adj.) wavering, unsteady, agitated; longing, eager greedy SN iv.111; Snp 22, Snp 922; Ja i.49 (Buddha-mātā lolā na hoti), 111, 210, 339 (dhana-loḷa); ii.319 (˚manussa) iii.7; Pp 65; Nd i.366; Dāvs iv.44; Mil 300alola not greedy, not distracted (by desire), self-controlled SN v.148; Snp 65.

-bhava greediness, covetousness Thag-a 16.

fr. luḷ: see luḷati; cp. Epic & Classic Sk. lola

Lolatā

(f.) longing, eagerness, greed Mil 93; Snp-a 35 (āhāra˚).

fr. lola

Lolita

agitated, shaken Thig 373 (= ālolita Thag-a 252).

pp. of loleti

Lolupa

(adj.) covetous greedy, self-indulgent Dāvs ii.73. ; not greedy, temperate Snp 165. Cp. nil˚ ■ f. lolupā as Name of a plant at Ja vi.537.

fr. lup, a base of lumpati but influenced by lubh, probably also by lola. See lumpati

Loluppa

(nt.) greediness, covetousness, self-indulgence, desire; in the language of the Abhidhamma often syn. with jappā or taṇhā. At Dhs-a 365 loluppa is treated as an adj. & expl;d at “punappuna visaye lumpati ākaḍḍhatī ti,” i.e. one who tears again & again at the object (or as; Expos. ii.470: repeated plundering, hauling along in the fields of sense)-Ja i.340, Ja i.429; Dhs-a 365; Vism 61; & with exegetical synonyms; loluppāyanā & loluppāyitattaṃ at Dhs 1059 Dhs 1136.

abstr. fr. lolupa

Loleti

to make shake or unsteady AN iii.188 (khobheti + ) ■ pp. lolita.

Caus. fr. luḷ, see luḷati

Loḷī

see āloḷi.

Loha

(nt.) metal, esp. copper, brass or bronze It is often used as a general term & the individual application is not always sharply defined. Its comprehensiveness is evident from the classification of; loha at Vb-a 63, where it is said lohan ti jātilohaṃ, vijāti˚ kittima˚, pisāca˚; or natural metal, produced metal artificial (i.e. alloys), & metal from the Pisāca district Each is subdivided as follows:; jāti˚; = ayo, sajjhaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ, tipu, sīsaṃ, tambalohaṃ, vekantakalohaṃ vijāti˚; = nāga-nāsika˚; kittima˚; = kaṃsalohaṃ, vaṭṭa˚ ārakūṭaṃ; pisāca˚; = morakkhakaṃ, puthukaṃ, malinakaṃ capalakaṃ, selakaṃ, āṭakaṃ, bhallakaṃ, dūsilohaṃ The description ends “Tesu pañca jātilohāni pāḷiyaṃ visuṃ vuttān’ eva (i.e. the first category are severally spoken of in the Canon). Tambalohaṃ vekantakan ti imehi pana dvīhi jātilohehi saddhiṃ sesaṃ sabbam pi idha lohan ti veditabbaṃ.”-On loha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131. Cp. AN iii.16 = SN v.92 (five alloys of gold: ayo, loha, tipu, sīsaṃ, sajjhaṃ); Ja v.45 (asi˚) Mil 161 (suvaṇṇam pi jātivantaṃ lohena bhijjati) Pv-a 44, Pv-a 95 (tamba˚ = loha), 221 (tatta-loha-secanaṃ pouring out of boiling metal, one of the five ordeals in Niraya).

-kaṭāha a copper (brass) receptacle Vin ii.170. -kāra a metal worker, coppersmith, blacksmith Mil 331 -kumbhī an iron cauldron Vin ii.170. Also Name of a purgatory Ja iii.22, Ja iii.43; Ja iv.493; Ja v.268; Snp-a 59, Snp-a 480 Sdhp 195. -guḷa an iron (or metal) ball AN iv.131; Dhp 371 (mā ˚ṃ gilī pamatto; cp. Dhp-a iv.109). -jāla a copper (i.e. wire) netting Pv-a 153. -thālaka a copper bowl Nd i.226. -thāli a bronze kettle Dhp-a i.126 -pāsāda “copper terrace,” brazen palace, Name of a famous monastery at Anurādhapura in Ceylon Vism 97; DN-a i.131; Mvu passim. -piṇḍa an iron ball Snp-a 225. -bhaṇḍa copper (brass) ware Vin ii.135. -maya made of copper, brazen Snp 670; Pv ii.64. -māsa a copper bean Nd i.448 (suvaṇṇa-channa). -māsaka a small copper coin Kp-a 37 (jatu-māsaka, dāru-māsaka + ) Dhs-a 318. -rūpa a bronze statue Mvu 36, Mvu 31. -salākā a bronze gong-stick Vism 283.

Cp. Vedic loha, of Idg. *(e)reudh “red”; see also rohita & lohita

Lohatā

(f.) being a metal, in (suvaṇṇassa) aggalohatā the fact of gold being the best metal Vv-a 13.

abstr. fr. loha

Lohita

(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) red: rarely by itself (e.g. MN ii.17), usually in cpds. e.g. ˚abhijāti the red species (q.v.) AN iii.383; ˚kasiṇa the artifice of red DN iii.268; AN i.41; Dhs 203; Vism 173; ˚candana red sandal (unguent) Mil 191. Otherwise rohita.

2. (nt. blood; described in detail as one of the 32 ākāras at Kp-a 54 sq.; Vism 261, Vism 360; Vb-a 245Vin i.203 (āmaka˚), 205 (˚ṃ mocetuṃ); AN iv.135 (saṭṭhi-mattānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ uṇhaṃ l. mukhato uggañchi; cp. the similar passage at Mil 165); Snp 433; Pv i.67; i.91 (expld as ruhira Pv-a 44); Vism 261 (two kinds; sannicita˚; and saṃsaraṇa˚; ), 409 (the colour of the heartblood in relation to states of mind); Vb-a 66; Pv-a 56 Pv-a 78, Pv-a 110.

-akkha having red (blood-shot) eyes (of snakes yakkhas) Vv 52;2 (cp. Vv-a 224: ratta-nayanā; yakkhānaṃ hi nettāni ati-lohitāni honti); Ja vi.180. -uppāda (the crime of) wounding A Tathāgata, one of the anantariya-kammas Vb-a 427; cp. Tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeti Mil 214. -uppādaka one who sheds the blood of an Arahant Vin i.89, Vin i.136, Vin i.320; Vin v.222 -kumbhi a receptacle for blood Ud 17 (with ref. to the womb). -doṇi a bloody trough Vism 358; Vb-a 62 -pakkhandikā (or ˚pakkhandik’ ābādha) bloody diarrhoea dysentery MN i.316; DN ii.127; Ud 82; Ja ii.213; Mil 134, Mil 175; Dhp-a iii.269. -homa a sacrifice of blood DN i.9; DN-a i.93.

cp. Vedic lohita & rohita; see also P. rohita “red”

Lohitaka

(adj.) 1. red MN ii.14; AN iv.306, AN iv.349; Ap. 1; Dhs 247, Dhs 617. -˚upadhāna a red pillow DN i.7; AN i.137; AN iii.50; AN iv.94, AN iv.231, AN iv.394; ˚sāli red rice Mil 252.

2. bloody Pv i.78 (pūti˚ gabbha) Vism 179, Vism 194.

fr. lohita

Lohitaṅka

a ruby AN iv.199, AN iv.203; Ap 2; Vv 363; Vv-a 304. See masāragalla for further refs. Note. The word is not found in Vedic and Class. Sk. a later term for “ruby” is lohitaka. In the older language lohitāṅga denotes the planet Mars.

lohita + anka

Ḷīyati

is given at Dhtp 361 as a variant of ḍī to fly (see ḍeti), and expld as “ākāsa-gamana.” Similarly at Dhtm 586 as “vehāsa-gamana.”

V.

V

-V-

euphonic (sandhi-) consonant, historically justified after u (uv from older v), as in su-v-ānaya easy to bring (SN i.124); hence transferred to i, as in ti-v-aṅgika threefold (Dhs 161), and ti-v-aṅgula three inches wide (Vism 152, Vism 408); perhaps also in anu-v-icca (see anuvicca).

Va1

the syllable “va” Kp-a 109 (with ref. to ending ˚vā in Bhagavā, which Bdhgh expls as “va-kāraṃ dīghaṃ katvā,” i.e. a lengthening of va); Snp-a 76 (see below va3).

Va2

(indecl.) like, like as, as if; only in poetry (as already pointed out by Trenckner, Mil 422): Iti 84 (tālapakkaṃ va bandhanā), 90 (chavālātaṃ va nassati); Dhp 28; Snp 38 (vaṃso visālo va: see C. expln under va3); Pv i.81 (ummatta-rūpo va; = viya Pv-a 39); i.116 (naḷo va chinno); Mil 72 (chāyā va anapāyinī); Ja iii.189 (kusamuddo va ghosavā); iv.139 (aggîva suriyo va); Dhp-a iii.175.

the enclitic, shortened form of iva after long vowels. Already to be found for iva in RV metri causâ

Va3

(indecl.) even, just (so), only; for sure, certainly Dhp 136 (aggi-daḍḍho va tappati); Ja i.138, Ja i.149 (so pi suvaṇṇa-vaṇṇo va ahosi) 207; Snp-a 76 (vakāro avadhāraṇ’ attho eva -kāro vā ayaṃ, sandhi-vasen’ ettha e-kāro naṭṭho: wrong at this passage Snp 38 for va2 = iva!); Pv-a 3 (eko va putto), 4 (ñātamattā va).

for eva, after long vowels

Va4

is (metrically) shortened form of , as found e.g. Dhp 195 (yadi va for yadi vā); or in correlation va-va either-or: Dhp 108 (yiṭṭhaṃ va hutaṃ va), 138 (ābādhaṃ va cittakkhepaṃ va pāpuṇe).

Vaṃsa

1. a bamboo Snp 38 (vaṃso visālo va; vaṃso expld at Nd ii.556 as “veḷugumba,” at Snp-a 76 as “veḷu”), ibid. (˚kaḷīra)

J vi.57; Vism 255 (˚kaḷīra); Kp-a 50 (id.).

2. race lineage, family AN ii.27 (ariya˚ of noble family); SN v.168 (caṇḍāla˚); Ja i.89, Ja i.139; Ja iv.390 (caṇḍāla˚); v.251 (uju˚); Mvu 4, Mvu 5 (pitu-ghātaka-vaṃso a parricidal race)

3. tradition, hereditary custom, usage, reputation Mil 148 (ācariya˚), 190 (Tathāgatānaṃ); Kp-a 12 (Buddha˚); Dpvs 18, 3 (saddhamma˚-kovidā therā)- vaṃsaṃ nāseti to break family tradition Ja v.383 vaṃsaṃ ucchindati id. Ja v.383; or upacchindati Ja iv.63 opp. patiṭṭhāpeti to establish the reputation Ja v.386

4. dynasty Mvu 36, Mvu 61 (kassa v. ṭhassati).

5. a bamboo flute, fife Mil 31; Vv-a 210.

6. a certain game, at DN i.6 in enumn of pastimes and tricks (caṇḍālavaṃsa-dhopana), a passage which shows an old corruption Bdhgh at DN-a i.84 takes each word separately and expls vaṃsa as “veṇuṃ ussāpetvā kīḷanaṃ” (i.e. a game consisting in raising a bamboo; is it climbing a pole? Cp. vaṃsa-ghatikā “a kind of game” Divy 475) against Dial. i.9 “acrobatic feats by Caṇḍālas.” Cp Ja iv.390 in same passage. Franke (Dīgha trsln) has “bamboo-tricks”; his conjecture as “vaṃsa-dhamanaṃ,” playing the bamboo pipe (cp. Mil 31: “vaṃsadhamaka”), as oldest reading is to be pointed out. On vaṃsa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 134.

-āgata come down fr. father to son, hereditary Mvu 23, Mvu 85. -ānupālaka guarding tradition Sdhp 474 (ariya˚). -ānurakkhaka preserving the lineage, carrying on the tradition Ja iv.444; Vism 99 (+ paveṇi-pālaka) Dhp-a iii.386. -coraka Name of a certain kind of reed (cp coraka: plant used for perfume) Ja v.406 (C. for veḷuka) -ja belonging to a race Mvu 1, Mvu 1 (suddha˚). -ñña born of good family AN ii.27. -dhara upholding tradition Mil 164. -dharaṇa id. Mil 226. -nalaka bamboo reed Kp-a 52, Kp-a 59 (with note Sn Index p. 870: naḷaka)-nāḷa id. Mil 102. -rāga the colour of bamboo, a term for the veḷuriya gem Ja iv.141. -vaṇṇa the veḷuriya gem Abhp 491.

Vedic vaṃśa reed, bamboo (R.V.)

Vaṃsika

(-˚) (adj.) descended from, belonging to a family (of) SN v.168 (caṇḍāla˚).

fr. vaṃsa

Vaka1

wolf, only in poetry Snp 201; Ja i.336; Ja ii.450; Ja v.241, Ja v.302.

Vedic vṛka, Idg. *ṷI̊qṷo = Lat. lupus, Gr. λύκος, Lith. vilkas, Goth. wulfs = E. wolf etc.

Vaka2

(indecl.): a root vak is given at Dhtp 7 & Dhtm 8 in meaning “ādāne,” i.e. grasping, together with a root kuk as synonym. It may refer to vaka1 wolf, whereas kuk would explain koka wolf. The notion of voraciousness is prevalent in the characterization of the wolf (see all passages of vaka1, e.g. Ja v.302).

Vakula

a tree (Mimusops elengi) Ja v.420.

cp. *Sk. vakula

Vakka1

(adj.) crooked Ja i.216.

Vedic vakra; the usual P. form is vanka

Vakka2

(nt.) the kidney Snp 195; Kp iii.; Mil 26; Dhs-a 140. In detail described as one of the 32 ākāras at Vism 255, Vism 356; Vb-a 60, Vb-a 239, Vb-a 356.

-pañcaka the series of five (constituents of the body beginning with the kidney. These are vakka, hadaya yakana, kilomaka, pihaka: Vb-a 249.

Vedic vṛkka

Vakkaṅga

a term for bird, poetically for sakuṇa Ja i.216 (tesaṃ ubhosu passesu pakkhā vankā jātā ti vakkangā C.).

vakkaṃ + ga

Vakkhati

is fut. of vac: he will say, e.g. at Vin ii.190; Vin iv.238. See vatti.

Vakkala

1. the bark of a tree Ja ii.13 (˚antara); iii.522.

2. a bark garment (worn by ascetics): see vakkali.

cp. BSk. valkala (e.g. Jtm 210): see vāka

Vakkalaka

(“bark-like,” or “tuft”?) is at Kp-a 50 as the Vism reading, where Kp-a reads daṇḍa. The P.T.S. ed. of Vism (p. 255) reads wrongly cakkalaka.

Vakkali

wearing a garment of bark, an ascetic, lit. “barker” Ja ii.274 (˚sadda the sound of the bark-garment-wearer). See also Np. Vakkali.

in compn for in

Vakkalika

(adj.) (-˚) in danta˚; peeling bark with one’s teeth, designation of a cert. kind of ascetics DN-a i.271.

fr. vakkala

Vagga1

1. a company, section group, party Vin i.58 (du˚, ti˚), 195 (dasa˚ a chapter of 10 bhikkhus).

2. a section or chapter of a canonical book Dhp-a i.158 (eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam pi) Dhs-a 27.

-uposatha celebration (of the uposatha) in groups “incomplete congregation” (trsln Oldenberg) Dpvs 7 36. More likely to vagga2! -gata following a (sectarian) party (Bdhgh identifies this with the 62 diṭṭhigatikā Snp-a 365) SN i.187; Snp 371. -bandha, in instr ˚ena group by group Mvu 32, Mvu 11. -bandhana banded together, forming groups Dhp-a iv.93, Dhp-a iv.94. -vagga in crowds, confused, heaped up Ja vi.224; Pv-a 54. -vādaka taking somebody’s part Vin iii.175. -sārin conforming to a (heretic) party Snp 371, Snp 800, Snp 912; Nd i.108, Nd i.329.

Vedic varga, fr. vṛj; cp. Lat. volgus & vulgus (= E. vulgar) crowd, people

Vagga2

(adj.-n..) dissociated, separated; incomplete; at difference dissentious Vin i.111 sq., 129, 160; iv.53 (sangha) AN i.70 (parisā); ii.240 ■ instr. vaggena separately secessionally, sectariously Vin i.161; Vin iv.37, Vin iv.126.

-ārāma fond of dissociation or causing separation MN i.286; Iti 11 (+ adhamma-ṭṭha; trsln Seidenstücker not quite to the point: rejoicing in parties, i.e. vagga1 = Vin ii.205. -kamma (ecclesiastical) act of an incomplete chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.315 sq. (opp. sam agga-kamma) ■ rata = ˚ārāma.

vi + agga, Sk. vyagra; opposed to samagga

Vaggati

to jump Vv 649 (expld at Vv-a 278 as “kadāci pade padaṃ” [better: padāpadaṃ?] nikkhipantā vagganena gamane [read: vagga-gamanena gacchanti); Ja ii.335, Ja ii.404; Ja iv.81, Ja iv.343; Ja v.473.

valg, to which belong Oicel. valka to roll; Ags. wealkan = E. walk

Vaggatta

(nt.) distraction, dissension, secession, sectarianism Vin i.316 (opp. samaggatta).

abstr. fr. vagga2

Vaggana

see vaggati (ref. of Vv 649).

Vaggiya

(-˚) (adj.) belonging to a group, forming a company, a party of (-˚), e.g. pañcavaggiyā therā Ja i.57, Ja i.82; bhikkhū MN i.70; MN ii.94; chabbaggiyā bhikkhū (the group of 6 bh.) Vin i.111 sq., 316 sq. & passim sattarasa-vaggiyā bhikkhū (group of 17) Vin iv.112.

fr. vagga1

Vaggu

(adj.) lovely, beautiful pleasant, usually of sound (sara) DN ii.20 (˚ssara); SN i.180 SN i.190; Snp 350, Snp 668; Vv 53, 361, 364 (˚rūpa), 5018 (girā) 636, 6410 (ghoso suvaggu), 6420, 672, 8417; Pv i.113ii.121; iii.34; Ja ii.439; Ja iii.21; Ja v.215; Sdhp 245. The foll. synonyms are frequently given in Vv-a & Pv-a as expl;ns of vaggu: abhirūpa, cāru, madhura, rucira savanīya, siniddha, sundara, sobhaṇa.

-vada of lovely speech or enunciation Snp 955 (= madhura-vada, pemaniya-vada, hadayangama˚, karavīkaruda-mañju-ssara Nd i.446). Vagguli & i

cp. Vedic valgu, fr. valg; freq. in combn with vadati “to speak lovely words”

Vagguli & ˚ī

(m. & f.) a bat Vin ii.148; Mil 364, Mil 404; Vism 663 (in simile) Dhp-a iii.223.

-rukkha a tree on which bats live Vism 74. -vata “bat-practice,” a certain practice of ascetics Ja i.493 Ja iii.235; Ja iv.299.

cp. Sk. valgulī, of; valg to flutter

Vaṅka

(adj.-n.), I. (adj.).

1. crooked, bent, curved MN i.31 (+ jimha); SN iv.118 (read v-daṇḍā); Vin ii.116 (suttā vankā honti); Ja i.9 (of kāja); iv.362 (˚daṇḍa), Pv-a 51 With ref. to a kind of vīṇā at Vv-a 281.

2. (fig. crooked, deceitful, dishonest Ja iii.313 (of crows: kākānaṃ nāmaṃ C.); vi.524; Pv iv.134 (a˚); Snp 270 (probably to be read dhaṅka as Snp-a 303, = kāka).

3. doubtful deceitful, deceptive, i.e. haunted Vv 843, cp. Vv-a 334-II. (m.)

1. a bend, nook, curve (of ponds) Ja ii.189 Ja vi.333 (sahassa˚).

2. a hook Ja v.269.

3. a fishhook DN ii.266; Thag 749; Ja vi.437 ■ On vaṅka in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

-aṅgula a crooked finger AN iii.6. -ātivaṅkin having curves upon curves (in its horns), with very crooked antlers Ja i.160 (said of a deer). -gata running in bends or crooked (of a river) Ja i.289. -ghasta (a fish) having swallowed the hook DN ii.266; Ja vi.113. -chidda a crooked hole DN-a i.112. -dāṭha having a bent fang (of a boar) Ja ii.405.

cp. Vedic vanka & vakra bending; also Ved. vanku moving, fluttering, walking slant; vañcati to waver, walk crooked. Cp. Lat. con-vexus “convex, Ags. wōh “wrong,” Goth. wāhs; Ohg. wanga cheek and others ■ The Dhtp 5 gives “koṭilya” as meaning of vaṅk. Another Pāli form is vakka (q.v.). The Prk. forms are both vakka & vanka: Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 74

Vaṅkaka

(nt.) a sort of toy: Rh. D. “toyplough” (Dial. i.10); Kern “miniature fish-hook (Toev. s. v.). Rh. D. derives it fr. Sk. vṛka (see P vaka1). Bdhgh at DN-a i.86 takes it as “toy-plough. See DN i.6; Vin ii.10 (v.l. vangaka & vankata); iii.180 (v.l. cangaka); AN v.203 (T. vanka; v.l. vankaka); Mil 229. At Thag-a 15 vaṅkaka is used in general meaning of “something crooked” (to explain Thig 11 khujja ) which is specified at Thag 43 as sickle, plough and spade.

fr. vanka

Vaṅkatā

(f.) & Vaṅkatta (nt.) crookedness A 1 112 (tt); Dhs 1339; Vb-a 494.

abstr. fr. vanka

Vaṅkeyya

(adj.) “of a crooked kind,” crooked-like; nt. twisting, crookedness, dishonesty MN i.340; AN iv.189; AN v.167.

grd. formation fr. vanka

Vaṅga

at DN-a i.223 is syn. with kaṇa and means some kind of fault or flaw. It is probably a wrong spelling for vaṅka.

Vaṅgati

to go, walk, waver; found only in Dhtp (No. 29) as root vaṅg in meaning “gamana. Perhaps confused with valg; see vaggati.

cp. *Sk. vangati, to which belongs vañjula. Idg. *ṷag to bend; cp. Lat. vagor to roam, vagus = vague Ohg. wankon to waver

Vaca

(nt.) a kind of root Vin i.201 = Vin iv.35. Cp. vacattha.

Vacatā

(f.) is found only in cpd. dubbacatā surliness Ja i.159.

abstr. fr. vaco

*Vacati

see vatti.

vac

Vacattha

(nt.) a kind of root Vin i.201 = Vin iv.35.

Vacana

(nt.) 1. speaking, utterance, word, bidding SN ii.18 (alaṃ vacanāya one says rightly); iv.195 (yathā bhūtaṃ); AN ii.168; Snp 417, Snp 699 Snp 932, Snp 984, Snp 997; Mil 235; Pv ii.27; Snp-a 343, Snp-a 386-mama vacanena in my name Pv-a 53dubbacana a bad word Thig 418 (= dur-utta-vacana Thag-a 268)- vacanaṃ karoti to do one’s bidding Ja i.222, Ja i.253. 2. (t. t. g.) what is said with regard to its grammatical syntactical or semantic relation, way of speech, term expression, as: āmantana˚; term of address Kp-a 167; Snp-a 435; paccatta˚; expression of sep. relation, i.e. the accusative case Snp-a 303; piya˚; term of endearment Nd ii.130; Snp-a 536; puna˚; repetition Snp-a 487; vattamāna˚; the present tense Snp-a 16, Snp-a 23; visesitabba˚ qualifying (predicative) expression Vv-a 13; sampadāna˚ the dative relation Snp-a 317. At Snp-a 397 (combd with linga and other terms) it refers to the “number,” i.e. singular & plural.;

-attha word-analysis or meaning of words Vism 364; Snp-a 24. -kara one who does one’s bidding, obedient a servant Vv 165; 8421; Ja ii.129; Ja iv.41 (vacanaṃ-kara) v.98; Pv-a 134. -khama gentle in words SN ii.282; AN iv.32. -paṭivacana speech and counterspeech (i.e. reply), conversation Dhp-a ii.35; Pv-a 83, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 117 -patha way of saying, speech MN i.126 (five ways, by which a person is judged: kālena vā akālena vā, bhūtena & a˚, saṇhena & pharusena, attha-saṃhitena an˚, mettacittā & dosantarā); AN ii.117, AN ii.153; AN iii.163 AN iv.277, cp. DN iii.236; Vv 6317 (= vacana Vv-a 262) Snp-a 159, Snp-a 375. -bheda variance in expression, different words, kind of speech Snp-a 169, cp. vacanamatte bhedo Snp-a 471. -vyattaya distinction or specification of expression Snp-a 509. -sampaṭiggaha “taking up together,” summing up (what has been said), résumé Kp-a 100. -sesa the rest of the words Pv-a 14, Pv-a 18, Pv-a 103.

fr. vac; Vedic vacana

Vacanīya

(adj.) to be spoken to, or to be answered DN i.175; Snp p.140.

grd. formation fr. vacana

Vacasa

(adj.) (-˚) having speech, speaking, in cpd. saddheyya˚; of credible speech trustworthy Vin iii.188.

the adj. form of vaco = vacas

Vacī

(˚-) speech, words; rare by itself (and in this case re-established from cpds. and poetical, as at Snp 472 (yassa vacī kharā; expld at Snp-a 409 by “vācā”), 973 (cudito vacīhi = vācāhi Snp-a 574). Otherwise in cpds, like: -gutta controlled in speech Snp 78. -para one who excels in words (not in actions), i.e. a man of words Ja ii.390. -parama id. DN iii.185. -bheda “kind of words,” what is like speech, i.e. talk or language Vin iv.2; Mil 231 (meaning here: break of the vow of speech?); various saying detailed speech, specification Kp-a 13; Snp-a 464, Snp-a 466 See also vākya-bheda & vācaṃ bhindati. -viññatti intimation by language Vism 448; Mil 370; Dhs 637 -vipphāra dilating in talk Mil 230, Mil 370. -samācāsa good conduct in speech MN ii.114; MN iii.45; DN iii.217. Often coupled (as triad) with kāya˚ & mano˚; (= in deed & in mind; where vācā is used when not compounded) e.g. in (vacī) -kamma (+ kāya˚ & mano˚) deed by word MN i.373, MN i.417; MN iii.207; DN iii.191, DN iii.245; ˚duccarita misbehaviour in words (four of these, viz. musāvāda pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpa AN ii.141; DN iii.52, DN iii.96, DN iii.111, DN iii.214, DN iii.217; Nd i.386; Pp 60; Dhp-a i.23 Dhp-a iii.417; ˚saṅkhāra antecedent or requisite for speech MN i.301; AN iii.350; SN iv.293; Vb-a 167; Vism 531 ˚sañcetanā intention by word Vb-a 144; ˚sucarita good conduct in speech AN ii.141 (the 4: sacca-vācā, apisuṇā vācā, saṇhā vācā, mantā bhāsā).

the composition form of vaco

Vaco

(& vaca ) (nt.) speech, words, saying; nom. & acc.; vaco Snp 54, Snp 356, Snp 988, Snp 994, Snp 1006 Snp 1057, Snp 1110, Snp 1147; Ja i.188; Nd i.553 (= vacana byāpatha desanā anusandhi); Pv i.1112. instr. vacasā Vin ii.95 (dhammā bahussutā honti dhatā v. paricitā); iii.189; SN i.12 (+ manasā); Snp 365, Snp 663, Snp 890 (= vacanena Nd i.299); Vism 241; Mvu 19, Mvu 42 ■ As adj. (-˚) vaca in combn with du˚; as dubbaca having bad speech, using bad language, foul-mouthed MN i.95; SN ii.204; AN ii.147 AN iii.178; AN v.152 sq.; Ja i.159; Pp 20; Sdhp 95, Sdhp 197. Opp suvaca of nice speech MN i.126; AN v.24 sq.; Pv iv.133 (= subbaca Pv-a 230) ■ Cp. vacī & vācā.;

Vedic vacas, of vac

Vacca

(nt.) excrement, faeces Vin ii.212; Vin iv.229, Vin iv.265; Vism 250 (a baby’s); Vb-a 232 (id.), 243; Pv-a 268vaccaṃ osajjati, or karoti to ease oneself Ja i.3; Pv-a 268.

-kuṭī (& kuṭi); a privy Vin ii.221; Ja i.161; Ja ii.10 Vism 235, Vism 259, Vism 261; Vb-a 242; Dhp-a ii.55, Dhp-a ii.56; Pv-a 266, Pv-a 268. -kūpa a cesspool Vin ii.221; Ja v.231; Vism 344 sq.; Dhp-a i.180. -ghaṭa a pot for excrements chamber utensil, commode Vin i.157 = Vin ii.216; MN i.207 -doṇikā id. Vin ii.221. -magga “the way of faeces, excrementary canal, opening of the rectum Vin ii.221 Vin iii.28 sq., 35; Ja i.502; Ja iv.30. -sodhaka a privy-cleaner night-man Mvu 10, Mvu 91.

cp. BSk. vaccaḥ Avs i.254

Vaccasin

(adj.) energetic imposing DN i.114 (brahma˚; Dial. i.146 “fine in presence ” cp. DN-a i.282). See also under brahma. Note. The P. root vacc is given at Dhtm 59 in meaning of “ditti,” i.e. splendour.

cp. Sk. varcasvin & Ved. varcin, having splendour, might or energy, fr. Vedic varcas

Vaccita

wanting to ease oneself, oppressed with vacca Vin ii.212, Vin ii.221.

pp. of vacceti, Denom. of vacca

Vaccha1

a calf Dhp 284; Ja v.101; Vism 163 (in simile) 269 (id.; kūṭa˚ a maimed calf); Dhs-a 62 (with popular etym. “vadatī ti vaccho”); Vv-a 100, Vv-a 200 (taruṇa˚). On vaccha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

-giddhinī longing for her calf SN iv.181. -gopālaka a cow-herd Vism 28. -danta “calf-tooth,” a kind of arrow or javelin MN i.429; Ja vi.448. -pālaka cow-herd Vv 512.

Vedic vatsa, lit. “one year old, a yearling”; cp. Gr. ε ̓́τος year, Sk. vatsara id., Lat vetus old, vitulus calf; Goth. wiprus a year old lamb = Ohg. widar = E wether

Vaccha2

a tree; only in mālā˚; an ornamental plant Vin ii.12; Vin iii.179; Vism 172; Dhp-a ii.109.

= rukkha, fr. vṛkṣa

Vacchaka

a (little) calf Ja iii.444; Ja v.93, Ja v.433; Mil 282 (as go-vacchaka).

-pālaka a cow-herd Ja iii.444. -sālā cow-shed, cowpen Ja v.93; Mil 282.

Demin. fr. vaccha1

Vacchatara

a weaned calf bullock DN i.127, DN i.148; SN i.75; AN ii.207; AN iv.41 sq.; Pp 56; DN-a i.294 ■ f. vacchatarī DN i.127; SN i.75; Vin i.191; Pp 56.

fr. vaccha; the compar. suffix in meaning “sort of,-like.” Cp. Sk. vatsatara

Vacchati

is fut. of vasati to dwell.

Vacchara

year Sdhp 239. See the usual saṃvacchara.

cp. Class. Sk. vatsara

Vacchala

(adj.) affectionate, lit. “loving her calf” Thag-a 148 (Ap v.64).

cp. Sk. vatsala

Vaja

a cattle-fold, cow-pen AN iii.393; Ja ii.300; Ja iii.270, Ja iii.379; Vism 166, Vism 279; Dhp-a i.126, Dhp-a i.396giribbaja a (cattle or sheep) run on the mountain Ja iii.479; as Npl. at Snp 408.

Vedic vraja: see vajati

Vajati

to go, proceed, get to (acc.), lit. to turn to (cp. vṛj, vṛṇakti, pp. vṛkta, which latter coincides with vṛtta of vṛt in P. vatta: see vatta1 & cp. vajjeti to avoid, vajjita, vajjana etc.) Snp 121, Snp 381, Snp 729 (jātimaraṇa-saṃsāraṃ), 1143; Ja iii.401; Ja iv.103 (nirayaṃ) Pv iv.172 (Pot. vajeyya); Nd ii.423 (= gacchati kamati) Mvu 11, Mvu 35 (imper. vaja as v.l.; T. reads bhaja). See cpds. anubbajati, upabb˚, pabb˚, paribb˚.

Vedic vraj, cp. Ved. vraja (= P. vaja) & vṛjana enclosure = Av. vərəƶə̄na-, with which cp. Gr.; ει ̓́ργνυμι to enclose, εἱργμός, Lat. vergo to turn; Gaelic fraigh hurdle; Ags. wringan = E. wring = Ger. ringen, E. wrinkle = Ger. renken, and many others, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. vergo ■ The Dhtp (59) defines vaj (together with aj ) by “gamana”

Vajalla

see rajo-vajalla.

Vajira1

a thunderbolt; usually with ref. to Sakka’s (= Indra’s) weapon DN i.95 = MN i.231 (ayasa); Thag 419; Ja i.134 (vajira-pūritā viya garukā kucchi “as if filled with Sakka’s thunderbolt.” Dutoit takes it in meaning vajira2 and trsls “with diamonds”) Snp-a 225 (˚āvudha the weapon of Sakka).

-pāṇin having a thunderbolt in his hand (Name of a yakkha) DN i.95 = MN i.231.

cp. Vedic vajira, Indra’s thunderbolt; Idg. *ṷeĝ = Sk. vaj, cp. Lat. vegeo to thrive, vigeo → vigour Av. vaƶra; Oicel. vakr = Ags. wacor = Ger. wacker; also E. wake etc. See also vājeti

Vajira2

(m. & nt.) a diamond AN i.124 (˚ûpamacitta) = Pp 30; Dhp 161; Ja iv.234; Mil 118, Mil 267, Mil 278; Mvu 30, Mvu 95; Kp-a 110 (˚sankhāta-kāya) Dhp-a i.387 (˚panti row of diamonds), 392 sq.

cp. Sk. vajra = vajira;1

Vajuḷa

Name of several plants, a tree (the ratan: Halāyudha 2 46) Ja v.420. See also vaṅgati.

cp. Sk. vañjula. Given as vañjula at Abhp 553

Vajja1

(nt.) that which should be avoided, a fault, sin DN ii.38; SN i.221; Vin ii.87 (thūla˚ a grave sin); AN i.47, AN i.98; AN iv.140; Pts i.122; Dhp 252; Vb-a 342 (syn. with dosa and garahitabba) Kp-a 23 (paṇṇatti˚ & pakati˚), 24 (id.), 190 (loka˚) DN-a i.181 (= akusala-dhamma). Freq. in phrase aṇumattesu vajjesu bhaya-dassāvin “seeing a source of fear even in the slightest sins” DN i.63; SN v.187 and passim. -˚dassin finding fault Dhp 76 (expld in detail at Dhp-a ii.107) ■ anavajja & sāvajja;, the relation of which to vajja is doubtful, see avajja.

grd. of vajjati, cp. Sk. varjya

Vajja2

(adj.-n..) 1. “to be said,” i.e. speaking DN i.53 (sacca˚ = sacca-vacana DN-a i.160). See also mosa-vajja.

2. “to be sounded, i.e. musical instrument Ja i.500 (˚bheri). Vajja, vajja, vajjum

cp. Sk. vādya, grd. of vad

Vajja, vajjā, vajjuṃ

: Pot. of vad, see vadati.

Vajjati1

to turn etc.; only as Pass. form vajjati [in form = Ved. vṛjyate to be avoided, to be excluded from (abl.) Mil 227 Kp-a 160 (˚itabba, in pop. etym. of Vajjī ) ■ Caus vajjeti (*varjayati) to avoid, to abstain from, renounce Sdhp 10, Sdhp 11, Sdhp 200. Cp. pari˚, vi˚.

vṛj, Vedic vṛṇakti & varjati to turn; in etym. related to vajati. Dhtp 547: “vajjane”

Vajjati2

Pass of vad, see vadati.

Vajjana

(nt.) avoidance, shunning Vism 5 (opp. sevana); Dhp-a iii.417.

fr. vajjati

Vajjanīya

(adj.) to be avoided, to be shunned; improper Mil 166 (i.e. bad or uneven parts of the wood), 224.

grd. formation fr. vajjati1

Vajjavant

(adj.) sinful SN iii.194.

vajja1 + vant

Vajjha

(adj.) to be killed, slaughtered or executed; object of execution; meriting death Vin iv.226; Snp 580 (go vajjho viya); Ja ii.402 (cora) vi.483 (= vajjhappatta cora C.); Vism 314; Kp-a 27- avajjha not to be slain, scathless Snp 288 (brāhmaṇa) Mil 221 = Ja v.49; Mil 257 (˚kavaca invulnerable armour).

-ghāta a slaughterer, executioner Thig 242 (cp Thag-a 204) ■ cora a robber (i.e. criminal) waiting to be executed Pv-a 153. -paṭaha-bheri the execution drum Pv-a 4. -bhāvapatta condemned to death Ja i.439 -sūkariyo (pl.) sows which had no young, barren sows (read vañjha˚!) Ja ii.406.

grd. of vadhati

Vajjhaka

(adj.) (-˚) = vajjha Dhs-a 239.

Vajjhā

(f.) execution; only in cpd. (as vajjha˚) ˚ppatta condemned to death, about to be executed Vin iv.226; Ja ii.119, Ja ii.264; Ja vi.483.

cp. Sk. vadhyā

Vajjheti

to destroy, kill Ja vi.527 (siro vajjhayitvāna). Kern, Toev. s. v. vaddh˚ proposes reading vaddhayitvāna (of a root vardh to cut), cutting off is perhaps better. The expression is hapax legomenon.

Denom. fr. vajjha

Vañcati

1. to walk about Ja i.214 (inf. ˚ituṃ = pādacāra-gamanena gantuṃ C.).

2. Caus. vañceti to cheat, deceive, delude, elude DN i.50; Snp 100, Snp 129, Snp 356; Ja iii.420 (aor. avañci = vañcesi C.); vi.403 (˚etu-kāma) Pv iii.42; Mil 396; Mvu 25, Mvu 69 (tomaraṃ avañcayi). pp. vañcita.

vañc: see etym. under vanka ■ The Dhtp distinguishes two roots vañc, viz. “gamane” (46) and “palambhane” (543), thus giving the lit. & the fig meanings

Vañcana

(nt.) deception, delusion, cheating, fraud, illusion DN i.5; DN iii.176; AN ii.209; Snp 242; Pv iii.95; Pp 19; Ja iv.435; Dhs-a 363 (for māyā Dhs 1059); DN-a i.79; Dhp-a iii.403; Pv-a 193-vañcana in lit. meaning of vañcati 1 is found in avañcana not tottering Ja i.214.

fr. vañc, cp. Epic Sk. vañcana

Vañcanika

(adj.) deceiving; a cheat DN iii.183; Thag 940; Mil 290.

fr. vañcana

Vañcaniya

(adj.) deceiving, deluding Thig 490.

grd. formation fr. vañcana, cp. Mvu ii.145: vañcanīya

Vañcita

deceived, cheated Ja i.287 (vañcit’ ammi = vañcitā amhi).

pp. of vañceti

Vañjula

see vajuḷa.

Vañjha

(adj.) barren, sterile DN i.14, DN i.56; MN i.271; SN ii.29 (a˚); iv.169; v.202 (a˚) Pv iii.45 (a˚ = anipphala C.); Ja ii.406 (˚sūkariyo: so read for vajjha˚); Mil 95; Vism 508 (˚bhāva); Dhp-a i.45 (˚itthi); DN-a i.105; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 82; Vv-a 149; Sdhp 345 (a˚).

cp. Epic & later Sk. bandhya

Vaṭa

the Indian fig tree Ja i.259 (˚rukkha); iii.325; Mvu 6, Mvu 16; Dhp-a i.167 (˚rukkha) Pv-a 113.

cp. Epic Sk. vaṭa. A root vaṭ; not connected with this vaṭa is given at Dhtm 106 in meaning “veṭhana”: see vaṭaṃsa

Vaṭa

at Pp 45, Pp 46 (tuccho pi hito pūro pi vaṭo) read ti pihito pūro vivaṭo. See vivaṭa.

Vaṭaṃsa

a kind of head ornament perhaps ear-ring or garland worn round the forehead Mvu 11, Mvu 28 (C. expls as “kaṇṇapilandhanaṃ vaṭaṃsakan ti vuttaṃ hoti”). Usually as vaṭaṃsaka Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; Thag 523; Vv 385 (expld as “ratanamayā kaṇṇikā” (pl.) at Vv-a 174); Ja vi.488; Vv-a 178 Vv-a 189, Vv-a 209Note. The root vaṭ; given as “veṭhana” at Dhtm 106 probably refers to vaṭaṃsa.

for avaṭaṃsa: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 661; cp. Sk. avataṃsa with t; Prk. vaaṃsa

Vaṭaka

a small ball or thickening, bulb, tuber; in muḷāla˚; the (edible) tuber of the lotus Ja vi.563 (C. kaṇḍaka).

cp. *Sk. vaṭaka, fr. vaṭa rope

Vaṭākara

a rope, cable Ja iii.478 (nāvā sa-vaṭākarā).

probably distorted by metathesis from Sk. vaṭārakā. Fr. vaṭa rope. On etym. of the latter see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. volvo

Vaṭuma

(nt.) a road, path DN ii.8; SN iv.52 (chinna˚); Ja iii.412; Vism 123 (sa˚ a˚). Cp.; ubbaṭuma & parivaṭuma;.

cp. Vedic vartman, fr. vṛt

Vaṭṭa1

(adj.-n..) 1. round circular; (nt.) circle Pv-a 185 (āyata + ); Kp-a 50 (˚nāli). See cpd. ˚aṅguli.

2. (fig.) “rolling on,” the “round” of existences, cycle of transmigrations, saṃsāra evolution (= involution) (as forward or ascending circle of existences, without implying a teleological idea in contrast to vivaṭṭa “rolling back” or devolution, i.e. a new (descending) cycle of existence in a new aeon with inverted [vi-] motion, so to speak) SN iii.63; SN iv.53 (pariyādiṇṇa˚), cp. MN iii.118; Thag 417 (sabba˚: “all constant rolling on” trsln); Snp-a 351 (= upādāna) Dhs-a 238 ■ There are 3 vaṭṭas, (te-bhūmaka vaṭṭa see also tivaṭṭa) embracing existence in the stages of kamma- vaṭṭa, kilesa˚; and vipāka˚; or circle of deed sin & result (found only in Commentarial literature) Kp-a 189; Snp-a 510 (tebhūmaka˚); Dhp-a i.289 (kilesa˚) iv.69 (tebhūmaka˚). See also Māra; and ˚dukkha ˚vivaṭṭa below.

3. “what has been proffered, expenditure, alms (as t. t.) Ja vi.333 (dāna˚ alms-gift) Dhp-a ii.29 (pāka˚ cooked food as alms); Vv-a 222 (id.) Mvu 32, Mvu 61 (alms-pension); 34, 64 (salāka-vaṭṭabhatta) ■ Cp. vi˚.

-aṅguli a rounded (i.e. well-formed) finger; adj. having round fingers Vv 6413 (= anupubbato v., i.e. regularly formed, Vv-a 280); Ja v.207, Ja v.215. -aṅgulika same as last Ja v.204. -ānugata accompanied by (or affected with) saṃsāra Ja i.91 (dhana). -ūpaccheda destruction of the cycle of rebirths AN ii.34 = Iti 88; AN iii.35; Vism 293. -kathā discussion about saṃsāra Vism 525; DN-a i.126; Vb-a 133. -kāra a worker in brass. The meaning of vaṭṭa in this connection is not clear; the same vaṭṭa occurs in ˚loha (“round” metal?). Kern Toev. s. v. compares it with Sk. vardhra leather strap taking vaṭṭa as a corruption of vaḍḍha, but the connection brass → leather seems far-fetched. It is only found at Mil 331. -dukkha the “ill” of transmigration (a Commentary expression) Vism 315; Dhp-a iv.149; Vv-a 116. -paṭighātaka (ṃ) (vivaṭṭaṃ) (a devolution destroying evolution, i.e. salvation from saṃsāra Snp-a 106. -bhaya fear of saṃsāra Vb-a 256. -mūla the root of saṃsāra Dhp-a iii.278. -vivaṭṭa (1) evolving and devolving; going round and back again, i.e. all round (a formation after the manner of reduplicative cpds like cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa in intensive-iterative meaning) ˚vasena in direct and inverse succession, all round completely Ja i.75. Cp. also vatta-paṭivatta ■ (2 saṃsāra in ascending and descending lines, evolution (“involution”) and devolution, or one round of transmigration and the other. It is dogmatically defined at Ne 113 as “vaṭṭaṃ saṃsāro vivaṭṭaṃ nibbānaṃ (similarly, opposed to vaṭṭa at DN-a i.126) which is however not the general meaning, the vivaṭṭa not necessarily meaning a nibbāna stage. See Snp-a 106 (quoted above); Vv-a 68. We have so far not found any passage where it might be interpreted in the comprehensive sense as meaning “the total round of existences ” after the fashion of cpds. like bhavâbhava -loha “round metal” (?), one of the 3 kittima-lohāni mentioned at Vb-a 63 (kaṃsa˚, vaṭṭa˚, ārakūṭa); also at Mil 267 (with kāḷa˚, tamba˚ & kaṃsa˚, where in the trsl;n Rh. D. does not give a def. expln of the word).

pp. of vṛt, Sk. vṛtta in meaning of “round” as well as “happened, become” etc. The two meanings have become differentiated in Pāli vaṭṭa is not found in meaning of “happened.” All three Pāli meanings are specialized, just as the pres vaṭṭati is specialized in meaning “behoves”

Vaṭṭa2

(“rained”): see abhivaṭṭa and vaṭṭha (vuṭṭha); otherwise only at Dhp-a ii.265.

Vaṭṭaka

(nt.) a cart, in haṭṭha˚; handcart Vin ii.276.

fr. vṛt, or P. vaṭṭa

Vaṭṭakā

(f.) (& vaṭṭaka˚; ) the quail MN iii.159 sq.; Ja i.172, Ja i.208 (vaṭṭaka-luddaka) iii.312; Dhp-a iii.175 (loc. pl. vaṭṭakesu) ■ The Vaṭṭaka-jātaka at Ja i.208 sq. (cp. Ja v.414).

cp. Sk. vartakā & Ved. vartikā

Vaṭṭati

1. to turn round to move on: doubtful in “kattha vaṭṭaṃ na vaṭṭati SN i.15; preferably with v.l. as vaḍḍhati ■ Caus. I vaṭṭeti to turn or twist Ja i.338 (rajjuṃ); to cause to move or go on (in weaving; tasaraṃ v. to speed the shuttle) Snp-a 265, Snp-a 266. Should we read vaḍḍheti Cp. āvaṭṭeti ■ Caus. II. vaṭṭāpeti to cause to turn Ja i.422.

2. to be right or fit or proper, to behove it ought to (with infin.); with instr. of person who ought to do this or that, e.g. sīlācāra-sampannena bhavituṃ vaṭṭati Ja i.188; kataññunā bhavituṃ v. Ja i.122 ■ See e.g. Ja i.376; Ja ii.352, Ja ii.406; Mil 9; Vism 184; Dhp-a ii.38, Dhp-a ii.90, Dhp-a ii.168; Snp-a 414 (vattuṃ to say); Vv-a 63, Vv-a 69 Vv-a 75; Pv-a 38 (dātuṃ). The noun to vaṭṭati is vatta (not vaṭṭa!).

Vedic vṛt. The representative of vattati (= Sk. vartate) in specialized meaning. The regular meaning of *vartate (with vaṭṭana), viz. “turning round,” is attached to vaṭṭati only in later Pāli & sometimes doubtful. It is found also in the Caus.; vaṭṭeti The defn of vaṭṭ; (literal meaning) at Dhtp 89 is “vaṭṭana,” and at Dhtm 107 “āvattana”

Vaṭṭana

(nt.) turning round Dhtp 89 (in defn of vaṭṭati). Cp. āvaṭṭana.

fr. vṛt, vaṭṭati

Vaṭṭanā

(f.) in ˚valī is a line or chain of balls (“rounds,” i.e. rings or spindles). Reading somewhat doubtful. It occurs at MN i.80, MN i.81 (seyyathā v. evaṃ me piṭṭhi-kaṇṭako unnat’ âvanato hoti; Neumann trsls “wie eine Kugelkette wurde mein Rückgrat mit den hervor-und zurücktretenden Wirbeln”) and at Ja v.69 (spelt “vaṭṭhanā-vali-sankāsā piṭṭhi te ninnat’ unnatā, with C. expln “piṭṭhika-ṭṭhāne āvuṇitvā ṭhāpitā vaṭṭhanā-vali-sadisā”). The Ja trsln by Dutoit gives “einer Reihe von Spinnwirteln dein Rücken gleicht im Auf und Nieder”; the E. tsrln has “Thy back like spindles in a row, a long unequal curve doth show.”

fr. vṛt

Vaṭṭani

(f.) a ring, round, globe, ball Thig 395 (vaṭṭani-riva; expld at Thag-a 259 as “lākhāya guḷikā viya,” trslnSisters 154: “but a little ball”).

cp. Vedic vartani circumference of a wheel, course

Vaṭṭi

(f.) 1. a wick SN ii.86 = SN iii.126 = SN iv.213; Ja i.243 (dīpa˚); Dhp-a 393; Thag-a 72 (Ap. v.45: nom. pl. vaṭṭīni); Mvu 32, Mvu 37 Mvu 34, Mvu 35.

2. enclosure, lining, film, skin Vism 258 (anta˚ entrails), 262 (udara˚); Ja i.260 (anta˚, so read for ˚vaddhi).

3. edge, rim, brim, cireumference Vin ii.120 (aggala˚; of the door), 148 (id.); SN iii.141 (patta of a vase or bowl); iv.168 (id.); Dhp-a ii.124 (nemi˚) Often as mukha-vaṭṭi outer rim, border, lining, e.g. cakkavāḷa˚ Ja i.64, Ja i.72; Dhp-a i.319; Dhp-a iii.209; patt˚ Ja v.38 pāsāda˚ Dhs-a 107.

4. strip, fringe Vin ii.266 (dussa˚) Ja v.73 (camma˚); Mvu 11, Mvu 15.

5. a sheath, bag, pod Ja iii.366 (tiṇa˚); Mvu 26, Mvu 17 (marica˚ red pepper pod) Dhp-a iv.203 (reṇu˚).

6. a lump, ball Dhp-a iii.117 (pubba˚, of matter).

7. rolling forth or along, a gush (of water), pour Ja i.109 (or to vṛṣ ?).

represents both Epic Sk. varti and vṛtti, differentiated derivations from vṛt, combining the meanings of “turning, rolling” and “encircling, round”

Vaṭṭikā

(f.) 1. a wick Mvu 30, Mvu 94.

2. a brim Mvu 18, Mvu 28.

3. a pod Mvu 26, Mvu 16 (marica˚).

vaṭṭi + kā, cp. Class. Sk. vartikā

Vaṭṭin

(-˚) (adj.) in muṇḍa˚; porter (?) is not clear. It is a dern fr. vaṭṭi in one or the other of its meanings. Found only at Vin ii.137, where it is expld by Bdhgh as “veṭṭhin.” It may belong to vaṭaṃsa or vaṭa (rope) cp. Dhtm 106 “veṭhana” for vaṭaṃsa.

Vaṭṭula

(adj.) circular Abhp 707.

fr. vṛt, cp. late Sk. vartula

Vaṭṭha

rained, in nava˚; newly rained upon Dhp-a i.19 (bhūmi).

pp. of vassati, for the usual vuṭṭha

Vaṭhara

(adj.) bulky, gross Abhp 701.

cp. BSk. vaṭhara Mvu ii.65. A root vaṭh is given at Dhtm 133 in meaning “thūlattane bhave” i.e. bulkiness

Vaḍḍha

(nt.) wealth, riches Ja iii.131 (vaḍḍhaṃ vaḍḍhataṃ, imper.). Or should we read vaṭṭa? Vaḍḍha is used as Np. at Kp-a 119, perhaps in meaning “prosperous.”

fr. vṛdh

Vaḍḍhaka

1. augmenting, increasing, i.e. looking after the welfare of somebody or something one who superintends Ja i.2 (rāsi˚ the steward of an estate).

2. a maker of, in special sense (cīvara˚; robecutter perhaps fr. vardh to cut: see vaddheti ) a tailor Ja i.220.

fr. vaḍḍheti

Vaḍḍhaki

(& ˚ī ) a carpenter builder, architect, mason. On their craft and guilds see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 181 sq.; Mrs. Rh. D Cambridge Hist. Ind. i.206 ■ The word is specially characteristic of the Jātakas and other popular (later literature Ja i.32, Ja i.201, Ja i.247; Ja ii.170; Ja vi.332 sq., 432 Ap. 51; Dhp-a i.269; Dhp-a iv.207; Vism 94; Pv-a 141; Mhbv 154iṭṭha˚; a stonemason Mvu 35, Mvu 102; nagara˚; the city architect Mil 331, Mil 345; brāhmaṇa˚; a brahmin carpenter Ja iv.207; mahā˚; chief carpenter, master builder Vism 463. In metaphor taṇhā the artificer lust Dhp-a iii.128.

-gāma a carpenter village Ja ii.18, Ja ii.405; Ja iv.159.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vardhaki & vardhakin; perhaps from vardh to cut: see vaddheti

Vaḍḍhati

primary meaning “to increase” (trs. intrs.); hence: to keep on, to prosper, to multiply, to grow SN i.15 (read vaḍḍh˚ for vaṭṭ˚); ii.206 (vaṇṇena) iv.73, 250; AN v.249 (paññāya); Snp 329 (paññā ca sutañ ca); Ja iii.131 (porāṇaṃ vaḍḍhaṃ vaḍḍhataṃ, imper. med 3rd sg.); v.66 (sadā so vaḍḍhate rājā sukka-pakkhe va candimā); Pv i.12 (dātā puññena v.); Pp 71; Mil 9 Mvu 7, Mvu 68 (putta-dhītāhi vaḍḍhitvā having numerous sons & daughters); 22, 73 (ubho vaḍḍhiṃsu dārakā grew up); Snp-a 319; Pv-a 94 ■ ppr. vaḍḍhamāna (1 thriving Kp-a 119 (read as Vaḍḍh˚, Np.) ■ (2) increasing Ja i.199 (putta-dhītāhi); Mvu 23, Mvu 34 (˚chāyāyaṃ as the shadows increased) ■ See also pari˚ ■ pp vaḍḍha, vaddha, vuḍḍha, vuddha, buḍḍha ■ Caus. I vaḍḍheti, in many shades of meaning, all based upon the notion of progressive motion. Thus to be translated in any of the foll. senses: to increase, to make move on (cp. vv.ll. vaṭṭeti), to bring on to, to further; to take an interest in, to indulge in, practise; to be busy with cause to prosper; to arrange; to make for; and in a general sense “to make” (cp. derivation vaḍḍhaka “maker,” i.e. tailor; vaḍḍhaki id., i.e. carpenter vaḍḍhana, etc.). The latter development into “make is late.

1. to increase, to raise Snp 275 (rajaṃ); DN-a i.115; Mvu 29, Mvu 66 (mangalaṃ to raise the chant); Pv-a 168 (+ brūheti).

2. to cultivate (vipassanaṃ insight Ja i.117 (aor. ˚esi); Pv-a 14.

3. to rear, to bring up Mvu 35, Mvu 103 (aor. vaḍḍhesi).

4. (with ref. to food to get ready, arrange, serve in (loc.) Ja iii.445 (pātiyā on the dish); iv.67 (karoṭiyaṃ), 391.

5. to exalt Ja i.338 (akulīne vaḍḍhessati).

6. to participate in, to practise, attend to, to serve (acc.) SN ii.109 (tanhaṃ) AN ii.54 (kaṭasiṃ to serve the cemetery, i.e. to die again and again: see refs. under kaṭasi); Vism 111 (kasiṇaṃ) 152.

7. to make move on, to set into motion (for vaṭṭeti?), in tasaraṃ v. Snp-a 265, Snp-a 266.

8. to take up Mvu 26, Mvu 10 (kuntaṃ) ■ pp. vaḍḍhita ■ Caus. II vaḍḍhāpeti: 1. to cause to be enlarged Mvu 35, Mvu 119. 2. to cause to be brought up or reared Ja i.455.

3. to have attended to Vin ii.134 (massuṃ).

4. to cause to be made up (of food) Ja iv.68.

Vedic vardhati, vṛdh, cp. Av. vərədaiti to increase. To this root belongs P. uddha “high up (= Gr. ορχός straight). Defd at Dhtp 109 simply as “vaḍḍhane”

Vaḍḍhana

(nt. & adj.) 1. increasing, augmenting, fostering; increase, enlargement prolongation MN i.518 (hāyana˚ decrease increase); Ja iii.422 (kula˚, spelling ddh); Mvu 35, Mvu 73 (āyussa); Dhs-a 406; Pv-a 31; Mil 320 (bala˚ strengthincreasing); Dhtp 109; Sdhp 361.

2. indulgence in attachment; serving, practising Snp 1084 (takka˚) Ja i.146 (kaṭasi˚, q.v. & cp. vaḍḍheti 6); Vism 111 (˚âvaḍḍhana), 152, 320. Here belong the phrases raja & loka˚.

3. arrangement Ja vi.11 (paṭhavi-vaḍḍhanaka-kamma the act of attending to, i.e. smoothing the ground).

4. serving for, enhancing, favouring Pv iii.36 (rati-nandi˚).

5. potsherd [connected with vardh ? See vaddheti] Ja iii.226 (C. kaṭhalika; uncertain).

6. a kind of garment, as puṇṇa˚; (full of costliness? but perhaps not connected with vaḍḍh˚ at all) Mvu 23, Mvu 33 & 37 (where C. expl;s: anagghāni evaṃnāmikāni vattha-yugāni). Cp. vaḍḍhamāna.

fr. vaḍḍheti; see also vaddhana

Vaḍḍhanaka

(adj.) serving, in f. ˚ikā a serving (of food), a dish (bhatta˚) Dhp-a 188 (so read for vaḍḍhinikā).

fr. vaḍḍhana, cp. vaḍḍheti 4

Vaḍḍhamāna

(nt.) at Dpvs xi.33 is probably equivalent to vaḍḍhana (6) in special sense at Mvu 23, Mvu 33, and designates a (pair of) special (ly costly) garment(s). One might think of meaning vaḍḍheti “to bid higher (at a sale),” as in Divy 403; Avs i.36, and explain as “that which causes higher bidding,” i.e. very precious. The passage is doubtful. It may simply mean “costly” (belonging to nandiyāvaṭṭaṃ); or is it to be read as vaṭṭamāna ?

BSk. vardhate

Vaḍḍhamānaka

(adj.) growing, increasing, getting bigger; only in phrase vaḍḍhamānaka-cchāyāya (loc.) with growing shade, as the shadows lengthened, when evening drew near Dhp-a i.96 Dhp-a i.416; Dhp-a ii.79; Mvu 19, Mvu 40.

ppr. of vaḍḍheti + ka

Vaḍḍhi

(f.) 1. increase growth (cp.; Cpd. 251 sq.) SN iv.250 (ariya˚); Ja ii.426 (= phāti); Mil 109 (guṇa˚); Dhs-a 327; Dhp-a iii.335 (avaḍḍhi = parihāni).

2. welfare, good fortune, happiness Ja v.101; Ja vi.330.

3. (as t. t.) profit, interest (on money, esp. loans) Thig 444 (= iṇa-vaḍḍhi Thag-a 271) DN-a i.212, DN-a i.270; Vb-a 256 (in simile); Snp-a 179 (˚gahaṇa).

fr. vṛdh, Vedic vṛddhi refreshment etc., which is differentiated in Pāli into vuddhi & vaḍḍhi

Vaḍḍhika

(adj.) leading to increase, augmenting, prosperous Mil 351 (ekanta˚, equal to aparihāniya).

fr. vaḍḍhi

Vaḍḍhita

1. increased, augmented; raised, enlarged; big Thag 72 (su-su˚); DN-a i.115; Dhs-a 188 Dhs-a 364; Ja v.340 (˚kāya).

2. grown up Dhp-a i.126. 3. brought up, reared Ja i.455.

4. served, indulged supplied: see kaṭasi˚; (S ii.178 e.g. ).

pp. of vaḍḍheti

Vaṇa

(nt. & m.) a wound, sore Vin i.205 (m.), 218 (vaṇo rūḷho); iii.36 (m; angajāte), 117 (angajāte) SN iv.177 (vaṇaṃ ālimpeti); AN v.347 sq., 350 sq.; 359 Nd ii.540; PugA 212 (purāṇa-vaṇa-sadisa-citto); Dhp-a ii.165 (˚ṃ bandhati to bandage); Vv-a 77; Pv-a 80 Sdhp 395. On vaṇa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 132.

-ālepana putting ointment on a sore Snp-a 58 (in sim.) -coḷaka a rag for dressing a wound Vism 342; Vb-a 361 -paṭikamma restoration or healing of a wound Dhp-a ii.164. -paṭicchādana dressing of a wound Dhp-a i.375 -paṭṭa id., bandage Snp-a 100. -bandhana id. Vin i.205 -mukha the opening of a sore AN iv.386 (nava ˚āni) Vv-a 77 (id.).

cp. Vedic vraṇa; Serbian rana; Obulg. var̄e, both “wound”

Vaṇi

(f.) wish, request Ud 53; Ja iv.404 (= yācana C.); cp. J.P.T.S. 1891, 18 See vana2 & cp vaṇeti.;

fr. van to desire

Vaṇijjā

(f.) trade, trading MN ii.198; Snp 404 (payojaye dhammikaṃ so vaṇijjaṃ); AN ii.81 sq.; Pv i.56 (no trade among the Petas); Ja i.169; Pv-a 47 (tela˚) Sdhp 332, Sdhp 390Five trades must not be carried on by lay followers of the Buddha, viz. sattha˚; trade in swords satta˚; in living beings, maṃsa˚; in meat, majja˚; in intoxicants, visa˚; in poisons AN iii.208, quoted at DN-a i.235 and Snp-a 379.

Vedic vaṇijyā, fr. vaṇij˚ (vaṇik) merchant, cp. vāṇija & vaṇibbaka

Vaṇita

wounded, bruised Pv ii.24; Ja i.150; Sdhp 395.

pp. of *vaṇeti, Denom. fr. vaṇa

Vaṇippattha

trading, trade Vin i.229 = DN ii.87 = Ud 88 (with ref. to Pāṭaliputta).

vaṇik + patha, in meaning patha 2

Vaṇibbaka

a wayfarer, beggar, pauper Snp 100 (ṇ); Ja iv.403, Ja iv.406 (n); v.172 (= bhojaputta C.; n) vi.232 (n); DN-a i.298 (ṇ); Pv-a 78 (n), 112 (n); Vv-a 5 (n). Often combd with similar terms in phrase kapaṇ addhika [iddhika] vaṇibbaka-yācakā indigents, tramps wayfarers & beggars, e.g. DN i.137 (ṇ); Mil 204 (ṇ) Dhp-a i.105 (ṇ). Other spurious forms are vaṇidīpaka Pv-a 120; vanīpaka Cp i.49.

vaṇibba + ka. The form *vaṇibba, according to Geiger, P.Gr. § 461, distorted fr. vaṇiya, thus “travelling merchant, wayfarer.” Spelling wavers between vaṇibb˚; & vanibb˚. The BSk. form is; vanīpaka, e.g. at Avs i.248; Avs ii.37; Divy 83; occurring also as vaṇīyaka at Divy 83

Vaṇibbin

(adj.-n.) begging, a beggar, tramp Ja iii.312; Ja iv.410 (= yācanto C.). Spelling at both places n. See also vanin.

fr. *vaṇibba

Vaṇīyati

see vanīyati.

Vaṇeti

to wish, desire, ask, beg Ja v.27 (spelt vaṇṇeti C. expls as vāreti icchati); pres. med. 1st pl. vaṇimhase (= Sk. vṛṇīmahe) Ja ii.137 (= icchāma C.). As vanayati at Kp-a 111 (vanayatī ti vanaṃ).

Caus. of van (see etym. under vana2), cp. vaṇi (vani). It may be derived directly fr. vṛ; vṛṇāti = P vuṇāti, as shown by vaṇimhase. A Denom. fr. vani is vanīyati

Vaṇṭa

(nt.) a stalk SN iii.155 = DN i.73 (˚chinna with its stalk cut); Ja i.70; Ap 62; Vism 356 (in comparison); Snp-a 296; Vb-a 60; Dhp-a ii.42 Dhp-a iv.112; Vv-a 44. avaṇṭa (of thana, the breast of a woman) not on a stalk (i.e. well-formed, plump) Ja v.155. So to be trsld here, although vaṇṭa as medical term is given in BR with meaning “nipple.”-See also tālavaṇṭa

Epic Sk. vṛnta

Vaṇṭaka

(adj:) (-˚) having a stalk; ; not fastened on stalks Ja v.203.

vaṇṭa + ka

Vaṇṭati

to partition, share; is given as root vaṇṭ; at Dhtp 92, Dhtp 561 and Dhtm 787 in meaning “vibhājana.”-Another root vaṇṭ; is found at Dhtm 108 with unmeaning expln “vaṇṭ’ atthe.”

dial. Sk. vaṇṭ

Vaṇṭika

(adj.) (-˚) having a stalk; only in phrase ekato˚ & ubhato˚; having a stalk on one or on both sides (of a wreath) Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; Dhp-a i.419.

vaṇṭa + ika

Vaṇṇa

appearance etc (lit. “cover, coating”). There is a considerable fluctuation of meaning, especially between meanings 2, 3, 4. One may group as follows.

1. colour Snp 447 (meda˚); SN v.216 (chavi˚ of the skin); AN iii.324 (sankha˚); Thag 13 (nīl’abbha˚); Vv 4510 (danta˚ = ivory white); Pv iv.39; Dhp-a ii.3 (aruṇa˚); Snp-a 319 (chavi˚) Vv-a 2 (vicitta˚); Pv-a 215. Six colours are usually enumd as vaṇṇā, viz. nīla pīta lohitaka odāta mañjeṭṭha pabhassara Pts i.126; cp. the 6 colours under rūpa at Dhs 617 (where kāḷaka for pabbassara); Ja i.12 (chabbaṇṇa-buddha-rasmiyo). Groups of five see under pañca 3 (cp. Ja i.222) ■ dubbaṇṇa of bad colour, ugly SN i.94; AN v.61; Ud 76; Snp 426; Iti 99; Pp 33; Vv-a 9; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 68. Opp. suvaṇṇa of beautiful colour, lovely AN v.61; Iti 99. Also as term for “silver.”-As t. t. in descriptions or analyses (perhaps better in meaning “appearance”) in abl. vaṇṇato by colour, with saṇṭhānato and others: Vism 184 (“kāḷa vā odāta vā manguracchavi vā”), 243 = Vb-a 225; Ne 27.

2. appearance SN i.115 (kassaka-vaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā); Ja i.84 (id. with māṇavaka˚); Pv ii.110 (= chavi-vaṇṇa Pv-a 71); iii.32 (kanakassa sannibha); Vv-a 16; cp. ˚dhātu

3. lustre, splendour (cp. next meaning) DN iii.143 (suvaṇṇa˚, or = 1); Pv ii.962 (na koci devo vaṇṇena sambuddhaṃ atirocati); iii.91 (suriya˚); Vv 291 (= sarīr obhāsa Vv-a 122); Pv-a 10 (suvaṇṇa˚), 44.

4. beauty (cp. vaṇṇavant) DN ii.220 (abhikkanta˚); MN i.142 (id.) DN iii.68 (āyu + ); Pv ii.910 (= rūpa-sampatti Pv-a 117) Sometimes combd with other ideals, as (in set of 5) āyu, sukha, yasa, sagga AN iii.47; or āyu, yasa, sukha ādhipacca Ja iv.275, or (4): āyu, sukha, bala AN iii.63

5. expression, look, specified as mukha˚; e.g. SN iii.2, SN iii.235; SN iv.275 sq.; AN v.342; Pv iii.91; Pv-a 122. 6. colour of skin, appearance of body, complexion MN ii.32 (parama), 84 (seṭṭha); AN iii.33 (dibba); iv.396 (id.); Snp 610 (doubtful, more likely because of its combn with sara to below 8!), 686 (anoma˚); Vism 422 (evaṃ˚ = odato vā sāmo vā). Cp. ˚pokkharatā. In special sense applied as distinguishing mark of race or species, thus also constituting a mark of class (caste distinction & translatable as “(social) grade, rank caste” (see on term Dial. i.27, 99 sq.; cp. Vedic ārya varṇa and dāsa varṇa RV ii.12, 9; iii.34, 9: see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 113 and in greater detail Macdonell & Keith,; Vedic Index ii.247 sq.). The customary enumn is of 4 such grades, viz. khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā Vin ii.239; AN iv.202; MN ii.128, but cp. Dial. i.99 sq ■ See also Vin iv.243 (here applied as general term of “grade” to the alms-bowls: tayo pattassa vaṇṇā, viz. ukkaṭṭha, majjhima, omaka; cp below 7); DN i.13, DN i.91; Ja vi.334; Mil 225 (khattiya˚ brāhmaṇa˚).

7. kind, sort Mil 128 (nānā˚), cp. Vin iv.243, as mentioned under 6.

8. timbre (i.e. appearance) of voice, contrasted to sara intonation, accent may occasionally be taken as “vowel.” See AN i.229 (+ sara); iv.307 (id.); Snp 610 (id., but may mean “colour of skin”: see 6), 1132 (giraṃ vaṇṇ’ upasaṃhitaṃ, better than meaning “comment”); Mil 340 (+ sara). 9. constitution, likeness, property; adj. (-˚) “like” aggi˚; like fire Pv iii.66 (= aggi-sadisa Pv-a 203).

10 (“good impression”) praise Dhp-a i.115 (magga˚) usually combd and contrasted with avaṇṇa blame, e.g. DN i.1, DN i.117, DN i.174; AN i.89; AN ii.3; AN iii.264; AN iv.179, AN iv.345; DN-a i.37.

11. reason (“outward appearance”) SN i.206 (= kāraṇa K.S. i.320); Vv 846 (= kāraṇa Vv-a 336) Pv iv.16 (id. Pv-a 220); iv.148.

-āroha (large) extent of beauty Snp 420. -kasiṇa the colour circle in the practice of meditation Vb-a 251 -kāraka (avaṇṇe) one who makes something (unsightly appear beautiful Ja v.270. -da giving colour, i.e. beauty Snp 297. -dada giving beauty AN ii.64. -dasaka the ten (years) of complexion or beauty (the 3rd decade in the life of man) Vism 619; Ja iv.497. -dāsī “slave of beauty,” courtezan, prostitute Ja i.156 sq., 385; ii.367 380; iii.463; vi.300; Dhp-a i.395; Dhp-a iv.88. -dhātu composition or condition of appearance, specific form material form, natural beauty SN i.131; Pv i.31; Pv-a 137 (= chavivaṇṇa); Dhs-a 15. -patha see vaṇṇu˚ -pokkharatā beauty of complexion DN i.114, DN i.115; AN i.38 AN ii.203; Pp 66; Vb-a 486 (defd); Dhp-a iii.389; Pv-a 46 -bhū place of praise Ja i.84 (for ˚bhūmi: see bhū2) -bhūta being of a (natural) species Pv-a 97. -vādin saying praise, praising DN i.179, DN i.206; AN ii.27; V.164 sq. Vin ii.197. -sampanna endowed with beauty AN i.244 sq., 288; ii.250 sq.

cp. Vedic varṇa, of vṛ;: see vuṇāti. Customary definition as “vaṇṇane” at Dhtp 572

Vaṇṇaka

(nt.) paint, rouge DN ii.142; Thag 960; Dpvs vi.70.

fr. vaṇṇa

Vaṇṇatā

(f.) having colour, complexion AN i.246 (dubbaṇṇatā bad c.); Vv-a 9.

abstr. fr. vaṇṇa

Vaṇṇanā

(f.) 1. explanation, commentary, exposition Kp-a 11, Kp-a 145, Kp-a 227; Snp-a 65 (pada˚); Pv-a 2- pāḷi˚; explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual analysis (opp. vinicchayakathā Vb-a 291.

2. praise Dhp-a ii.100 (vana˚).

fr. vaṇṇeti

Vaṇṇanīya

(adj.) to be described; ; indescribable Ja v.282.

grd. formation fr. vaṇṇeti

Vaṇṇavant

(adj.) beautiful AN iv.240 (cātummahārājikā devā dīgh’āyukā vaṇṇavanto; v.l. ˚vantā) Pp 34; Pv iii.212 (= rūpasampanna Pv-a 184); Dhp-a i.383.

fr. vaṇṇa

Vaṇṇita

1. explained, commented on Snp-a 368.

2. praised, extolled Pp 69; Ja i.9; Mil 278 (+ thuta & pasattha); Pv-a 116 (= pasaṃsita), 241; Vv-a 156 (= pasaṃsita).

pp. of vaṇṇeti

Vaṇṇin

(-˚) (adj.) 1. having colour Thag 1190 (accharā nānattavaṇṇiyo “in divers hues”).

2. belonging to a caste, in cātu˚; (suddhi) (purity of) the fourfold castes MN ii.132.

3. having beauty Snp 551 (uttama˚).

4. having the appearance of AN ii.106 Pp 44 (āma˚, pakka˚); Ja v.322 (vijju˚).

fr. vaṇṇa

Vaṇṇiya

(nt.) colouring; having or giving colour, complexion MN i.446 (in phrase assaṃ assa-damako vaṇṇiyañ ca valiyañ ca anuppavecchati, trsld by Neumann as “lässt der Rossebändiger noch die letzte Strählung und Striegelung angedeihen”; still doubtful) AN iii.54 (dubbaṇṇiyaṃ bad complexion); Iti 76 (dub˚ evil colour).

fr. vaṇṇeti

Vaṇṇu

(f.) is given at Abhp 663 in meaning of “sand.” Occurs only in cpd. vaṇṇupatha a sandy place, quicksand, swamp Ja i.109; Vv 843 (= vālu-kantāra Vv-a 334); Pv iv.32 (= petena nimmitaṃ mudu-bhūmi-magga Pv-a 250, so read for vaṇṇapatha); shortened to vaṇṇu at Vv 8411 (where MSS vaṇṇa).

cp. late Sk. varṇu, Name of a river (-district)

Vaṇṇeti

1. to describe, explain, comment on Ja i.2, Ja i.222; Kp-a 168; Snp-a 23, Snp-a 160, Snp-a 368. 2. to praise, applaud, extol Ja i.59, Ja i.84; Pv-a 131 (+ pasaṃsati) ■ pp. vaṇṇita.

Denom. fr. vaṇṇa

Vata1

(indecl.) part of exclamation: surely, certainly, indeed, alas! Vin iii.39 (puris’ usabho vat’ âyaṃ “for sure he is a human bull”) Thig 316 (abbhutaṃ vata vācaṃ bhāsasi); Snp 178, Snp 191 Snp 358; Vv 4713; Pv i.85; Ja iv.355; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 121 Often combd with other emphatic particles, like aho vata Pv ii.945 (= sādhu vata Pv-a 131); lābhā vata no it is surely a gain that Snp 31; Dhp-a ii.95; vata bho Ja i.81.

Vedic bata, post-Vedic vata

Vata2

(m. & nt.) 1. a religious duty, observance, rite, practice custom SN i.143, SN i.201; SN iv.180; AN iv.461 (sīla, vata, tapas brahmacariya); v.18; Snp 792, Snp 898; Vv 8424; Ja iii.75; Vv-a 9; Pv-a 60subbata of good practice Vv 346 Cp. patibbata, sīlabbata.

2. manner of (behaving like) a certain animal (as a practice of ascetics), e.g. aja˚; like a goat Ja iv.318; go˚; like a cow MN i.387; Ja iv.318; vagguli˚; bat practice Ja i.493; Ja iii.235; Ja iv.299 hatthi˚; elephant behaviour Nd i.92 (here as vatta; see under vatta1).

-pada an item of good practice, virtue (otherwise called guṇa at Mil 90) Ja i.202 (where 7 are enumd, viz devotion to one’s mother & father, reverence towards elder people, speaking the truth, gentle speech, open speech, unselfishness); Mil 90 (where 8 are given in detail, differing from the above). See also vatta1 2 where other sets of 7 & 8 are quoted.; -samādāna taking up a (good) practice, observance of a vow Ja i.157.

cp. Vedic vrata vow. fr.; vṛt, meaning later “milk” (see Macdonell & Keith,; Vedic Index ii.341)

Vatavant

(adj.) observant of religious duties, devout Snp 624 (= dhuta-vatena samannāgata Snp-a 467); Dhp 400 (with same expln at Dhp-a iv.165 as as Snp-a 467).

vata2 + vant

Vati1

(f.) a fence Ja i.153; Ja iii.272; Ja v.472; Vism 186 (vatī, v.l. vati); Snp-a 98 (v.l. for gutti), 148 (v.l. for ˚vatikā).

later Sk. vṛti, fr. vṛ;

Vati2

(f.) a choice, boon Dhp-a i.190 (pubbe Sāmā nāma vatiyā pana kāritattā Sāmāvatī nāma jātā).

fr. vṛ; cp. Sk. vṛti

Vatika

(adj.) (-˚) having the habit (of), acting like MN i.387 (kukkura˚).

vata2 + ika

Vatikā

(f.) a fence Snp-a 148 (kaṇṭaka˚ & rukkha˚).;

fr. vati1

Vatta1

(nt.) 1. that which is done, which goes on or is customary, i.e. duty, service custom, function Vin ii.31; Snp 294, Snp 393 (gahaṭṭha˚) Vism 188 (cetiy’ angaṇa˚ etc.); Dhp-a i.92 (ācariya˚) Vb-a 354 (gata-paccāgata˚); Vv-a 47 (gāma˚).

2. (for vata2) observance, vow, virtue DN iii.9 (the 7 vattapadāni diff. from those enumd under vata-pada) Nd i.66 (sīlañ ca vattañ ca), 92 (hatthi˚ etc.: see vata2 2) 104 (˚suddhi), 106 (id.), 188 (giving 8 dhutangas as vattas).

-paṭivatta all kinds of practices or duties Ja i.67 Ja ii.103; Ja iii.339; Ja iv.298; Mil 416 (sucarita˚); Dhp-a i.13 sq.; Dhp-a ii.277; Dhp-a iv.28. -bbata the usual custom Dhp-a iv.44; C on SN i.36 § 2 and on SN ii.18 § 4 sq. -sampanna one who keeps all observances Vb-a 297 (where the foll. vattāni are enumd: 82 khuddaka-vattāni. 14 mahā˚, cetiyangaṇa˚, bodhiyangaṇa˚, pānīyamāḷa˚ uposathāgāra˚, āgantuka˚, gamika˚).

orig. pp. of vattati

Vatta2

(nt.) the mouth (lit. “speaker”) Pgdp 55 (sūci-vatto mah’odaro peto).

cp. Sk. vaktra & P. vattar

Vatta3

opened wide Vin iii.37; Ja v.268 (vatte mukhe).

vyatta, Sk. vyātta, of vi + ā +

Vatta4

at Ja v.443 is corrupt for vaṇṭha cripple.

Vattaka

(adj.) doing, exercising, influencing; in vasa˚; having power, neg. avasa˚; having no free will involuntary Pv-a 64.

fr. vatta1

Vattati

to move, go on, proceed to happen, take place, to be; to be in existence; to fare to do Snp p.13 (parivesanā vattati distribution of food was in progress); Snp 654 (kammanā vattati loko keeps up, goes on); Pv ii.944 (vatteyya); Mil 338 (na ciraṃ vattate bhavo) ■ grd. vattabba to be proceeded, or simply “to be” Vin ii.8 (so read for vatth˚): nissāya te v. “thou must remain under the superintendence of others” (Vin. Texts, ii.344) ■ Often equal to atthi or (pl.) santi, i.e. is (are), e.g. Ja vi.504; Snp-a 100 (bāḷhā vedanā vattanti); Pv-a 40 ■ ppr. med. vattamāna see sep ■ pp. vatta ■ Caus. vatteti to make go on, to keep up, practise, pursue Snp 404 (etaṃ vattayaṃ pursuing this); freq. in phrases vasaṃ vatteti to exercise power, e.g. Pv-a 89; and cakkaṃ vatteti to wield royal power, to govern (cp. expression cakkavattin & see pavatteti) Snp 554, Snp 684 (vattessati) 693 (dhamma-cakkaṃ); Ja iii.412 ■ grd. vattitabba to be practised Vin ii.32 ■ pp. vattita.

Vedic vartate; vṛt. A differentiated P. form is vaṭṭati ■ Cp. Av. varət to turn, Sk. vartana turning vartulā = Lat. vertellum = E. whorl (Ger. wirtel) & vertil Gr. ῥατάνη; Goth. waírpan = Ger. werden (to become, E “turn”); Goth ■ waírps = E ■ wards; Obulg. vrěteno spindle; and many others (e.g. Lat. vertex, vortex), q. v Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. verto

Vattana

(nt.) moving on, upkeep, existence, continuance Snp 698 (cakka˚ continuance of royal power); Mvu 3, Mvu 38.

fr. vattati

Vattanī

(& ˚i) (f.) a track, a road Ja i.196, Ja i.395, Ja i.429; Ja iii.200kaṇha˚; leaving a black trail, Ep. of the fire Ja iii.140.

cp. Sk. vartanī, fr. vṛt

Vattamāna

(adj.-n..) being in existence, going on, happening at the time; nt. process progress, (as ˚-) in progress Snp-a 4 (˚uppanna); Pv-a 55 -˚vacana the present tense Snp-a 16, Snp-a 23.

ppr. med. of vattati

Vattamānaka

(adj.) going on, being, existing; ˚bhave in the present existence or period Mil 291.

fr. last

Vattar

one who speaks, a sayer, speaker MN i.470; SN i.63; SN ii.182; SN vi.94, SN vi.198; DN i.139; AN iv.32; AN v.79 sq., 226 sq.; Thag 334 (read ariya-vattā for ˚ vatā); Ja i.134; Snp-a 272; Pv-a 15.

n. ag. of vatti, vac

Vatti

to speak, say, call; pres. not found (for which vadati); fut. 1st sg. vakkhāmi Ja i.346 Ja i.3rd vakkhati SN i.142; Ja i.356; Ja ii.40; Ja vi.352; Vb-a 51 Vb-a 1st pl. vakkhāma SN iv.72; MN iii.207; Vism 170, Vism 446 Vism 3rd vakkhanti Vin ii.1; pte. fut. vakkhamāna Pv-a 18-aor. 1st sg. avacaṃ Ja iii.280; Dhp-a iii.194, & avocaṃ Thig 124; Vv 797; SN i.10; Dhp-a iii.285; Dhp-a iii.2nd avaca Thig 415, avoca Dhp 133, & avacāsi Vv 357; 539; 3rd avaca Ja i.294; Pv ii.319; Pv-a 65 (mā a.); avoca Thig 494; SN i.150; Snp p.78; Ja ii.160; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 49,; avacāsi Ja vi.525; Ja vi.1st pl. avacumha & avocumha; MN ii.91; MN iii.15; MN iii.2nd avacuttha Vin i.75 (mā a.); ii.297; Ja ii.48; Dhp-a i.73; Dhp-a iv.228, & avocuttha Ja i.176; Mil 9 Mil 3rd pl. avacuṃ Ja v.260, & avocuṃ MN ii.147inf. vattuṃ Snp 431; Ja vi.351; Vism 522 = Vb-a 130 (vattukāma); Snp-a 414; DN-a i.109; Dhp-a i.329; Dhp-a ii.5ger. vatvā Snp-a 398; Pv-a 68, Pv-a 73, & vatvāna Snp p.78. grd. vattabba Mil 276 (kiṃ vattabbaṃ what is there to be said about it? i.e. it goes without saying); Snp-a 123 Snp-a 174, Snp-a 178; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 27, Pv-a 92ppr. med. vuccamāna Vin i.60; Vin iii.221; Pv-a 13 ■ Pass. vuccati DN i.168, DN i.245; Dhp 63; Mvu 9, Mvu 9; Mvu 34, Mvu 81 (vuccate, v.l. uccate); Ja i.129 (vuccare, 3rd pl.); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 34, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 76 ■ pp. vutta (q.v.) ■ Caus. vāceti to make speak, i.e. to read out to cause to read; also to teach, to instruct Snp 1018 Snp 1020; Ja i.452 (read); Pv-a 97 ■ pp. vācita (q.v.). Desid. vavakkhati (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 184 = Sk. vivakṣati) to wish to call DN ii.256.

Vedic vakti, vac

Vattika = vatika

Nd i.89 (having the habit of horses, elephants etc.).

Vattita

(nt.) that which goes on, round (of existence), revolution Mil 226.

fr. vatteti

Vattin

(adj.) (-˚) engaged in, having power over, making, doing; only in cpds. cakka˚ & vasa˚; (q.v.).

fr. vṛt

Vattha1

(nt.) 1. cloth; clothing, garment raiment; also collectively: clothes; MN i.36 sq. AN i.132, AN i.209, AN i.286; AN ii.85, AN ii.241; AN iii.27 (odātaṃ), 50 (kāsikaṃ), 386 (kāsāyaṃ); iv.60, 186, 210; v.61 sq. (ubhatobhāga-vimaṭṭhaṃ = MN ii.13, reading vimaddha; with the expression cp. ubhato-bhāga-vimutta); Snp 295 Snp 304; Kp-a 237 (˚ṃ pariyodāyati, simile); Pv-a 43, Pv-a 50 Pv-a 70; Sdhp 217alla˚; fresh, clean clothes Dhp-a iv.220 ahata˚; new clothes Ja i.50; Dāvs ii.39; dibba˚; heavenly i.e. exquisite dresses Pv-a 23, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 53 ■ pl. vatthāni garments, clothes Snp 64, Snp 287, Snp 924; Pp 57 (kāsāyāni) Dhp-a i.219 (their uses, from a new dress down to a bit of rag).

2. hangings, tapestry Ja iv.304 ■ On vattha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 132.

-guyha “that which is concealed by a cloth,” i.e. the pudendum DN i.106; Snp 1022; DN-a i.275 (= angajātaṃ Bhagavato ti vāraṇass’ eva kosohitaṃ vatthaguyhaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ paduma-gabbha-samānaṃ). -yuga a pair of garments Ja iv.172; Dāvs i.34. -lakkhaṇa fortune telling from clothes Snp-a 362. -sannidhi storing up of clothes DN i.6; Nd i.372; DN-a i.82. -sutta the Suttanta on clothes (i.e. with the parable of the clothes vatth’ upama-sutta) MN i.36 sq., quoted at Vism 377 and Snp-a 119.

Vedic vastra, fr. vas, vaste to clothe; Idg. *ṷes, enlargement of *eu (: Lat. ex-uo); cp. Lat. vestis “vest(-ment),” Gr. ε ̔́ννυμι to clothe, ε ̔ϊμα dress; Goth wasjan to clothe; wasti dress

Vattha2

as pp. of vasati1 occurs only in cpd. nivattha. The two passages in Pv-a where vattha is printed as pp (vatthāni vattha) are to be read as vattha-nivattha (Pv-a 46, Pv-a 62).

Vatthabba

at Vin ii.8 is to be spelt vattabba (see vattati).

Vatthi

(m. & f.) 1. the bladder Vin iii.117; Ja i.146; Snp 195; Vism 144 = Dhs-a 117; Vism 264, Vism 345 (mutta˚) 362; DN-a i.161; Vb-a 248.

2. the pudendum: see ˚kosa.

3. a clyster (-bag): see ˚kamma.

-kamma (ṃ karoti) to use a clyster Vin i.216. -kosa a membranous sheath enveloping the sexual organ of a male DN-a i.275 (˚kosena paṭicchanna vatthaguyha: so read for ˚kesena); Vv-a 252 (˚mukha orifice of the pudendum of an elephant).

Vedic vasti in meaning 1; the other meanings later

Vatthu1

(nt.) lit. “ground,” hence 1. (lit.) object, real thing, property, thing, substance (cp. vatthu2!) AN ii.209 (khetta˚, where khetta in lit. sense, cp. No. 2). Here belongs the defn of kāma as twofold: vatthu-kāma and kilesa-kāma, or desire for realities, objective kāma, and desire as property of stained character, i.e. subjective kāma, e.g. Nd i.1; Snp-a 99, Snp-a 112; Dhs-a 62 ■ On vatthu as general philos term cp. Dhs. trsln2§§ 455, 679, 1229, also introd. p. 86 Cpd. 15, 31, 1741.

2. (appld meaning) object, item Vin i.121 (antima-vatthuṃ ajjhāpannaka guilty of an extreme offence?); v.138 (the 10 āghāta-vatthūni, as at Vb 86); DN iii.252 (seven niddesa˚), 255 (eight kusīta˚) 258 (eight dāna˚); SN ii.41, SN ii.56 sq.; Vb 71 (cakkhu˚ etc.) 306 sq., 353; Ne 114 (ten); Snp-a 172; Dhp-a iv.2 (akkosa˚); Pv-a 8, Pv-a 20 (dāna˚), 26 (left out in id. p. Kp-a 209) 29, 65 (alabbhaneyya˚), 96 (id.), 119, 121 (iṭṭha˚), 177 220. Cp. ˚bhūta.

3. occasion for, reason, ground AN ii.158 (+ khetta [in fig. sense!], āyatana & adhikaraṇa); iv.334; DN i.13 sq. (aṭṭhādasahi vatthūhi etc.) Ja ii.5 (avatthumhi chandaṃ mâkari do not set your heart on what is unreasonable); vatthunā (instr.) because Pv-a 118; vatthuto (abl.) on account of Pv-a 241. 4. basis, foundation, seat, (objective) substratum, substance element Ja i.146 (kāyo paridevānaṃ v.); Vb-a 404 (+ ārammaṇa). See most of the cpds.

5. subjectmatter subject, story, account Snp-a 4; Dhp-a ii.66; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 263, Pv-a 269. Cp. ˚gāthā & titles like Petavatthu Vimānavatthu.;

-kata made a foundation or basis of, practised thoroughly Ja ii.61; Ja v.14 and passim (+ bhāvita etc.). In phrase tālāvatthukata (= tāla avatthu kata) vatthu means foundation, basis, ground to feed and live on, thus “a palm deprived of its foundation”: see refs. under tāla ■ gāthā the stanzas of the story, the introductory (explanatory, essential to its understanding) stanzas something like “prologue” Snp-a 483, Snp-a 575 (preceding Snp 699 & 976).; -dasaka tenfold substance or material basis Vb-a 22. -bhūta being an object, i.e. subject to Ja v.210. -rūpa substance or substratum of matter material form Vism 561, Vism 564; Vb-a 22, Vb-a 172. -visadakiriyā clearing of the foundation or fundamentals purification of the elements Vb-a 283 = Dhs-a 76 (˚kiriyatā; trslnExpos. 101 “cleansing of things or substance”); Vism 128; Vb-a 276.

Class. Sk. vastu, fr. vas1

Vatthu2

site, ground, field, plot Vin iii.50 (ārāma˚ & vihāra˚), 90 (id.); Snp 209, Snp 473 (sakhetta˚, cp. vatthu1 4), 769 (khetta + ), 858 (id.); Thag 957 (khetta + vatthu, cp. Brethren p. 3371 & Vin Texts iii.389 sq.); Mil 279 (khetta˚ a plot of arable land); DN-a i.78 (contrasted with khetta, see khetta 1 and cp. vatthu1 1); Pv-a 88 (gehassa the back yard of the house); haunted by fairies (parigaṇhanti) DN ii.87.

-kamma “act concerning sites,” i.e. preparing the ground for building DN i.12 (trsln: fixing on lucky sites for dwellings), cp. DN-a i.98: akaṭa-vatthumhi gehapatiṭṭhāpanaṃ -devatā the gods protecting the grounds field-gods, house-gods Pv i.41 (= ghara-vatthuṃ adhivatthā devatā Pv-a 17). -parikiraṇa offerings over the site of a house (“consecrating sites” trsln) DN i.12 (cp DN-a i.98 = balikamma-karaṇaṃ). -vijjā the science of (building-) sites, the art of determining a suitable (i.e. lucky) site for a house DN i.9 (see expln at DN-a i.93) SN iii.239; Nd i.372; Vism 269 (in comparison); Kp-a 237 See also Dial ii.92 & Fick,; Sociale Gliederung 152.

Vedic vāstu; fr. vas

Vatthuka

(adj.) (-˚) 1. having a site or foundation or ground, in ucca˚; (high) and nīca˚; (low) Vin ii.117, Vin ii.120; Mvu 33, Mvu 87.

2. having its ground in founded on, being of such & such a nature or composition SN iv.67 (vācā˚); Pts i.130 (micchādiṭṭhi˚, correct in Index J.P.T.S. 1908!); Vb 319 (uppanna˚; + ārammaṇa), 392 (micchādiṭṭhi˚); Vb-a 403 (uppanna˚ etc.).

fr. vatthu1

Vada

(adj.) (-˚) speaking, in cpd. vaggu˚; speaking pleasantly Snp 955 (cp. Nd i.446; Snp-a 571 = sundaravada); suddhiṃ˚; of clean speech Snp 910.

fr. vad

Vadaññu

(adj.) lit. “(easily) spoken to,” addressable, i.e. liberal bountiful, kind SN i.43; AN ii.59, AN ii.61 sq.; AN iv.271 sq., 285 289, 322; Snp 487; Pv iv.133, 342, 1011, 154; Vv-a 281.

cp. Sk. vadāniya, which also in P. avadāniya

Vadaññutā

(f.) bounty, kindness, liberality; neg. ; stinginess AN v.146, AN v.148 sq.; Vb 371.

abstr. fr. vadaññu

Vadati

to speak, say, tell AN iv.79; Snp 1037, Snp 1077 sq.; Pp 42; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 39; Pot. 1st sg. vade (so read for vado? MN i.258; MN i.3rd sg. vadeyya Pv i.33; aor. 3rd pl. vadiṃsu Pv-a 4 ■ Cp. abhi˚, upa˚, pa˚, vi˚ ■ Another form (not Caus.: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 1392) is vadeti DN i.36; Vin ii.1; Snp 825; Snp p.140 (kiṃ vadetha); Ja i.294 imper. vadehi Pv-a 62; Pot. med. 1st pl. vademase DN iii.197; fut. vadessati Snp 351; aor. vadesi Dhp-a iii.174 ■ A specific Pāli formation is a Caus. vādiyati in act. and med. sense (all forms only in Gāthā style) e.g. indic. vādiyati Snp 824 = Snp 892, Snp 832; expld as vadati Snp-a 541, Snp-a 542, or katheti bhaṇati etc. (the typical Niddesa expln of vadati: see Nd ii.555) Nd i.161. In contracted (& shortened) form Pot. 2;nd sg. vajjesi (*vādiyesi you might tell, i.e. please tell Pv ii.116 (= vadeyyāsi Pv-a 149); iii.67 (same expln p. 203). The other Pot forms from the same base are the foll.: 1st sg. vajjaṃ Thig 308; Thig 2nd sg. vajjāsi Thig 307; Ja iii.272; Ja vi.19 and vajja Thig 323; Thig 3rd sg. vajjā Snp 971 (cp. Nd i.498) Ja vi.526 (= vadeyya C.); 3rd pl. vajjuṃ Snp 859 (= vadeyyuṃ katheyyuṃ etc. Nd ii.555); Ja v.221 ■ Caus. vādeti to make sound, to play (a musical instrument) Ja i.293 Ja ii.110, Ja ii.254 (vādeyyāma we might play); Ap 31 (aor vādesuṃ); Pv-a 151 (vīṇaṃ vādento) ■ Pass. vajjati (*vādiyati) to be played or sounded Ja i.13 (vajjanti bheriyo); Ap 31 (ppr. vajjamāna & aor. vajjiṃsu).; Another form of ppr. med. (or Pass.) is vadāna (being called, so-called) which is found in poetry only (contracted fr. vadamāna) at Vin i.36 = Ja i.83 ■ pp. udita2 & vādita; (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. vādāpeti to cause to be played Mvu 25, Mvu 74 (tūriyaṃ).

vad, Ved. vadati; Dhtp 134 vada = vacana

Vadana

(nt.) speech, utterance Vv-a 345 (+ kathana).

fr. vad

Vadāna

see vadati.

Vadāniya

see a˚.

another form of vadaññu

Vadāpana

(nt.) making somebody speak or something sound Dhs-a 333 (we should better read vād˚; ).

fr. vādāpeti, Caus. II. of vadati

Vaddalikā

(f.) rainy weather Vin i.3; Ja vi.52 (loc. vaddalike); Dhp-a iii.339; Vb-a 109.

cp. late Sk. vārdala & BSk. vardalikā Mvu iii.301; Divy 500

Vaddha1

(adj.-n.) 1. grown, old; an Elder; venerable, respectable; one who has authority At Ja i.219 three kinds of vaddha are distinguished: one by nature (jāti˚), one by age (vayo˚), one by virtue (guṇa˚); Ja v.140 (= paññāya vuddha C.). Usually combd with apacāyati to respect the aged, e.g. Ja i.219 and in cpd. vaddh-apacāyika respecting the elders or those in authority Ja iv.94; and ˚apacāyin id. Snp 325 (= vaddhānaṃ apaciti-karaṇa Snp-a 332); Dhp 109; Dhp-a ii.239 (= buḍḍhatare guṇavuddhe apacāyamāna) Cp. jeṭṭh’ apacāyin.

2. glad, joyful; in cpd. ˚bhūta gladdened, cheerful Ja v.6.

pp. of vaḍḍhati; see also vaḍḍha, vuḍḍha & vuddha. The root given by Dhtp (166) for; vṛdh is vadh in meaning “vuddhi”

Vaddha2

(m. & nt.) a (leather) strap, thong Ja ii.154 (vv.ll. baddha, bandhana bandha, vaṭṭa). Occurs as aṃsa˚; shoulder strap at Ap 310, where ed. prints baddha (= baddha2).

-maya consisting of a strap, made of leather Ja ii.153.

cp. Vedic vardhra in meaning “tape”

Vaddhaka

in cpd. aṃsa˚; “shoulder strap” should be the uniform reading for a series of diff. spellings (˚vaṭṭaka, ˚baddhaka, ˚bandhaka) at Vin i.204 Vin ii.114; Vin iv.170. Cp. Geiger, Zeitschrift fur Buddhismus iv.107.

vaddha + ka

Vaddhana

(nt.) increase, furthering Ja iii.422 (kula˚); Sdhp 247 (pīti˚), 307 (id.).

fr. vṛdh; see the usual vaḍḍhana

Vaddhava

(nt.) joy, pleasure Ja v.6 (but C. = paṇḍita-bhāva).

fr. vaddha1 2

Vaddhavya

(nt.) (old) age Ja ii.137 (= vuddhabhāva, mahallakatā C.).

fr. vaddha1 1

Vaddhi

in anta˚; at Ja i.260 is to be read as vaṭṭi.

Vaddheti

to cut off, is Kern’s proposed reading (see Toev. s. v.) at Ja vi.527 (siro vaddhayitvāna) for vajjheti (T. reading vajjhayitvāna ).

fr. vardh to cut, cp. vaḍḍhaka & vaḍḍhakī

Vadha

striking, killing; slaughter, destruction, execution DN iii.176; AN ii.113; Pp 58; Ja ii.347; Mil 419 (˚kata); Dhp-a i.69 (pāṇa˚ + pāṇa-ghāta), 80, 296; Dhp-a ii.39; Vb-a 382vadhaṃ dadāti to flog Ja iv.382- atta˚; self-destruction SN ii.241; piti˚; parricide DN-a i.153; miga˚; hunting Ja i.149.

-bandhana flogging and binding (imprisoning). In this connection vadh is given as a separate root at Dhtp 172 & 384 in meaning “bandhana.” See AN ii.209 AN v.206; Snp 242 (vadha-cheda-bandhana; v. is expld at Snp-a 285 as “sattānaṃ daṇḍ’ ādīhi ākoṭanan” i.e. beating) 623 (= poṭhana Snp-a 467); Ja i.435; Ja iv.11 Vb-a 97.

fr. vadh

Vadhaka

slaying, killing; murderous; a murderer SN iii.112 (in simile); iv.173 (id.); AN iv.92 (id.); Thig 347; DN iii.72 (˚citta); Kp-a 27; Vv-a 72 (˚cetanā murderous intention); Vism 230, Vism 231 (in sim.); Sdhp 58. f. vadhikā Ja v.425 (pl. ˚āyo).

fr. vadh

Vadhati

to strike, punish; kill, slaughter slay; imper. 2nd pl. vadhetha Vism 314; ger. vadhitvā MN i.159; DN i.98; Ja i.12; Ja iv.67; Snp-a 257 (hiṃsitvā + ) fut. vadhissati Mvu 25, Mvu 62; aor. vadhi Ja i.18 (cp. ud-abbadhi); cond. 1st sg. vadhissaṃ Mil 221 ■ grd vajjha: see a˚ ■ Caus. vadheti Ja i.168; Mil 109. pp. vadhita.

Vedic vadh; the root is given at Dhtp 169 in meaning of “hiṃsā”

Vadhita

smitten Thag 783 = MN ii.73 (not with Kern, Toev. s. v. = vyathita).

pp. of vadheti

Vadhukā

(f.) a daughter-in-law, a young wife AN ii.78; Dhp-a iii.260.

fr. vadhū

Vadhū

(f.) a daughter-in-law Vv-a 123.

Ved. vadhū; to Lith. vedù to lead into one’s house

Vana1

(nt.) the forest; wood; as a place of pleasure sport (“wood”), as well as of danger & frightfulness (“jungle”), also as resort of ascetics, noted for its loneliness (“forest”). Of (fanciful) defns of vana may be mentioned: Snp-a 24 (vanute vanotī ti vanaṃ); Kp-a 111 (vanayatī ti vanaṃ); Dhs-a 364 (taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vanati bhajati allīyatī ti vanaṃ, yācati vā ti vanaṃ [i.e. vana2]. vanatho ti vyañjanena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ… balava-taṇhāy’etaṃ nāma); Dhp-a iii.424 (mahantā rukkhā vanaṃ nāma, khuddakā tasmiṃ vane ṭhitattā vanathā nāma etc., with further distinguishing detail concerning the allegorical meanings) ■ DN ii.256 (bhikkhūṇaṃ samitiṃ vanaṃ); AN i.35, AN i.37; Dhp 283 (also as vana2); Snp 272, Snp 562 (sīho nadati vane), 1015 (id.), 684 (Isivhaya v.); Snp p.18 (Jetavana), p. 115 (Icchānangala); Thig 147 (Añjanavana; a wood near Sāketa with a vihāra); Ja v.37 (here meaning beds of lotuses) Mil 219 (vanaṃ sodheti to clear a jungle); Dhs 1059 (“jungle” = taṇhā); Pv ii.65 (arañña˚-gocara); Vism 424 (Nandana˚ etc.); Dhp-a iv.53 (taṇhā˚ the jungle of lust). Characterized as amba˚; mango grove DN ii.126 and passim; ambāṭaka˚; plum grove Vin ii.17; udumbara of figs Dhp-a i.284; tapo˚; forest of ascetics Thag-a 136; Dhp-a iv.53; nāga˚; elephant forest MN i.175; brahā wild forest AN i.152; AN iii.44; Vv 633; Ja v.215; mahā˚; great forest Thig 373 (rahitaṃ & bhiṃsanakaṃ) ■; vanataraṃ (with compar. suffix) thicker jungle, denser forest Mil 269 (vanato vanataraṃ pavisāma) ■ On similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 133. Cp. vi˚.

-anta the border of the forest, the forest itself Snp 708 Snp 709; Pv ii.310 (= vana C.). -kammika one who works in the woods Ja iv.210 (˚purisa); v.427, 429. -gahana jungle thicket Vism 647 (in simile). -gumba a dense cluster of trees Vv 817 (cp. Vv-a 315). -caraka a forester Snp-a 51 (in simile). -cetya a shrine in the wood Ja v.255 -timira forest darkness; in metaphor ˚matt-akkhin at Ja iv.285 = Ja v.284, which Kern (Toev. s. v.) changes into ˚patt-akkhin, i.e. with eyes like the leaves of the forest darkness. Kern compares Sk. vanajapattr’ākṣī Mbh i.171, 43, and vanaja-locanā Avad. Kalp. 3, 137. The Cy. explns are “vana-timira-puppha-samān’ akkhī, and “giri-kaṇṇika-samāna-nettā”; thus taking it as name of the plant Clitoria ternatea. -dahaka (& ˚dahana ) burning the forest (aggi) Kp-a 21 (in simile) -devatā forest deva SN iv.302. -ppagumba a forest grove Vb-a 196. -ppati (& vanaspati); [cp. Vedic vanaspati Prk. vaṇapphai] “lord of the forest,” a forest tree; as vanappati only at Vin iii.47; otherwise vanaspati, e.g. SN iv.302 (osadhī + tiṇa + v.; opposed to herbs, as in R.V.); AN i.152; Ja i.329; Ja iv.233 (tiṇa-latā-vanaspatiyo) Dhp-a i.3. -pattha a forest jungle DN i.71; DN iii.38, DN iii.49, DN iii.195; MN i.16, MN i.104; Vin ii.146; AN i.60; AN iii.138 (arañña˚) Pp 59, Pp 68; DN-a i.210. -pantha a jungle road AN i.241 -bhaṅga gleanings of the wood, i.e. presents of wild fruit & flowers AN iv.197. -mūla a wild root DN i.166 (+ phala); AN i.241 (id.); Mil 278. -rati delight in the forest Dhp-a ii.100. -vaṇṇanā praise of the jungle Dhp-a ii.100. -vāsin forest-dweller Snp-a 56 (Mahā-tissatthera). -saṇḍa jungle-thicket, dense jungle DN i.87 DN i.117; SN iii.109 (tibba v. avijjāya adhivacana); AN iii.30; Ja i.82, Ja i.170; Dhp-a i.313; Dhp-a ii.100.

Ved. vana ■ The P. (edifying) etymology clearly takes vana as belonging to van, and, dogmatically equals it with vana2 as an allegorical expression (“jungle”) to taṇhā (e.g. Dhs-a 364 on Dhs 1059; Dhp-a iii.424 on Dhp 283) ■ The Dhtp (174) & Dhtm (254) define it “sambhattiyaṃ,” i.e. as meaning companionship

Vana2

(nt.) lust, desire. In exegetical literature mixed up with vana1 (see definitions of vana1) ■ The word to the Pāli Buddhist forms a connection between vana and nibbāna, which is felt as a quâsi derivation fr. nibbana nis + vana: see nibbana & cp. nibbāna II. B 1 ■ SN i.180 (so ‘haṃ vane nibbanatho visallo); Snp 1131 (nibbana) Dhp 334; Thag 691 (vanā nibbanaṃ āgataṃ) ■ A Denom. fr. vana2 is vanāyati (like vanīyati fr. vaṇi).

van; vanati & vanoti to desire = Av. vanaiti Lat. venus, Ohg. wini friend (: E. winsome, attractive wunsc = E. wish, giwon = E. wont; also “to win.” The spelling sometimes is vaṇ: see vaṇi ■ The defn at Dhtp 523 is “yācane” (i.e. from begging), at Dhtm 736 “yācāyaṃ”

Vanaka

(-) (adj.) belonging to the forest, forestlike; adj. in cpd. ku˚; (kubbanaka, q.v.) brushwood Snp 1134.

fr. vana1

Vanati, Vanute, Vanoti

to desire, love, wish, aim at ask for Snp-a 24 (vanute & vanoti); Dhs-a 364 (vanati bhajati, allīyati). Caus. vanayati Kp-a 111.

van; Sk. vanoti & vanute. See also vana;2, vaṇi, vaṇeti

Vanatha

underwood, brushwood, thicket. Does not occur in lit meaning, except in exegesis of Dhp 283 at Dhp-a iii.424 q.v. under vana1. Another defn is given at Snp-a 24 “taṇhā pariyuṭṭhāna-vasena vanaṃ tanotī ti vanatho taṇh’ ānusayass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.”-The fig. meaning is “lust, desire,” see e.g. SN i.186; Thag 338; Dhp 344; Snp 16 (˚ja); Dhs 1059 (as epithet of taṇhā); Ja ii.205 (vanathaṃ na kayirā); Ne 81, Ne 82nibbanatha free from desire SN i.180; Dhs-a 364.

vana + tha; same in BSk. e.g. Mvu i.204

Vanāyati

to desire, wish, covet, to hanker after MN i.260; SN iii.190. See also allīyati.

Denom. fr. vana2, cp, vanāyati

Vanika

= vanaka; only in cpd. nāga˚; one belonging to the elephant forest, i e. an elephant-hunter MN i.175; MN iii.132.

Vanin

(adj.-n.) poor begging; one who asks (for alms) or begs, a mendicant Ja vi.232 (= vanibbaka C.).

either fr. Sk. vani (= P. vaṇi) in meaning “begging,” or poetical abbreviation of vaṇibbin

Vanibbaka see vaṇibbaka

.

Vanīyati

to desire Ja vi.264 C.: (pattheti), 270 (hadayaṃ vanīyati, v.l. dhanīyati: cp allīyati) ■ See also vanati & vaṇeti;.

Denom. fr. vani = P. vaṇi

Vaneja

born in the woods Ja ii.446.

vane (loc. of vana1) + ja

Vanta

1. vomited, or one who has vomited Mil 214; Pv-a 80. As nt. vomit at Vin i.303.

2. (fig. given up, thrown up, left behind, renounced MN i.37 (+ catta, mutta & pahīna). Cp. BSk. vāntī-bhāva, syn with prahāna Avs ii.188.

-āda refuse-feeder, crow Ja ii.439. -āsa one who has given up all wishes, an Arahant Dhp 97 (= sabbā āsā iminā vantā Dhp-a i.187). -āsika eating what has been vomited, a certain class of Petas Mil 294. -kasāva one who has left behind all fault Dhp 10 (= chaḍḍita˚ Dhp-a i.82). -gamana at Vism 210 = DN-a i.34 read either as v’ antagamana or c’ anta˚. -mala stainless Dhp 261 -lokāmisa renouncing worldly profit Dhp 378.

pp. of vamati

Vandaka

(adj.) disposed to veneration; f. ˚ikā Thig 337.

fr. vand

Vandati

to greet respectfully, salute, to pay homage, to honour, respect to revere, venerate, adore Snp 366, Snp 547, Snp 573, Snp 1028; Pv ii.16; Mvu 15, Mvu 14 (+ pūjeti); Mil 14; Snp-a 191; Pv-a 53 (sirasā with the head, a very respectful way of greeting), 67; Vv-a 71. imper. vanda Vv 211 (= abhivādaya Vv-a 105); pl. vandantu Snp 573; ppr. vandamāna Snp 598; aor. vandi Snp 252; Ja i.88; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 61 Pv-a 81, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 275; inf. vandituṃ Pv-a 77; grd. vandiya (neg ; ) Vin ii.162 ■ Caus. II. vandāpeti to cause somebody to pay homage Ja i.88; Ja iii.11 ■ pp. vandita.

vand, originally identical with vad; the defn at Dhtp (135 & 588) is “abhivādana & thuti”

Vandana

(nt.) & Vandanā (f.) salutation, respect, paying homage; veneration, adoration AN i.294 (ā); ii.203 (+ pūjā); Ja i.88; Pp 19, Pp 24 Mvu 15, Mvu 18; Mil 377; Pv-a i.53; Snp-a 492; Thag-a 256 Sdhp 221, Sdhp 540.

fr. vand, cp. Vedic vandana

Vandāpana

(nt.) causing to do homage Ja i.67.

fr. vandāpeti; Caus. of vandati

Vandita

saluted, revered, honoured, paid homage to; as nt. homage, respect, veneration Snp 702 (akkuṭṭha + ); Thig 388 (id.); Ja i.88.

pp. of vandati

Vanditar

one who venerates or adores, a worshipper Ja vi.207 (vandit’ assa = vanditā bhaveyya C.).

n. ag. fr. vandita

Vapakassati

see vavakassati.

Vapati1

to sow Snp p.13 (kasati + ); Ja i.150 (nivāpaṃ vapitvā); Pv-a 139 ■ Pass. vappate SN i.227 (yādisaṃ v. bījaṃ tādisaṃ harate phalaṃ), and vuppati [Vedic upyate] Thag 530 ■ pp. vutta ■ Caus. I. vāpeti: see pp. vāpita1 ■ Caus. II. vapāpeti to cause to be sown Vin iii.131 (khettaṃ); Ja iv.276 (sāliṃ).

vap, Vedic vapate. Defn at Dhtp 192; bījanikkhepe

Vapati2

to shear, mow, to cut, shave: only in pp. of Caus. vāpita2 (q.v.).

vap, probably identical with vapati1

Vapana

(nt.) sowing Snp-a 137; Dhp-a iii.220 (˚kassaka); Pv-a 8.

fr. vap

Vapayāti

to go away, to disappear, only at Vin. i.2 = Kv 186 (kankhā vapayanti sabbā; cp. id p. Mvu ii.416 vyapananti, to be read as vyapayanti).

vi + apa + yā

Vappa1

(m. or nt.) to be sown, sowing; or soil to be sown on, in paṃsu˚; sowing on light soil & kalala˚; on heavy soil Snp-a 137Note. The defn of a root vapp at Dhtm 541 with “vāraṇe refers to P. vappa bank of a river (Abhp 1133) = Sk vapra, which is not found in our texts.

-kamma the act or occupation of sowing Ja i.340 (+ kasi-kamma). -kāla sowing time Snp p.13; SN i.172 (= vapanakāla, bīja-nikkhepa-kāla Snp-a 137). -maṅgala ploughing festival Ja i.57; Dhp-a ii.113; Snp-a 141.

orig. grd. fr. vap = Sk. vāpya

Vappa2

a tear, tears Vin i.345 (vappaṃ puñchitvā wiping the tears).

cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. bāṣpa

Vabbhācitaṃ

is a α ̔́πας λεγομένον at MN i.172; read perhaps better as vambhayitaṃ: see p. 545. Neumann trsls only “thus spoken” (i.e. bhāsitam etaṃ).

Vamati

to vomit, eject, throw out, discharge Snp 198 = Ja i.146; Ja v.255 (fut. vamissati); Pv iv.354 (= uḍḍayati chaḍḍayati Pv-a 256) ■ Caus. vameti Mil 169 ■ pp. vanta.

vam, Idg. *ṷemo, cp. Lat. vomo, vomitus = vamathu; Gr. ἐμέω (E. emetic); Oicel. vaema seasickness-The defn at Dhtp 221 & Dhtm 315 is “uggiraṇa”.

Vamathu

vomiting; discharged food Pv-a 173 (˚bhatta; + ucchiṭṭha˚).

fr. vam

Vamana

(nt.) an emetic DN i.12; AN v.219; cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 452.

fr. vam

Vamanīya

one who has to take an emetic Mil 169.;

grd. of vamati; cp. Sk. vāmanīya; ā often interchanges with a before 1 & m, like Caus. vameti vāmeti

Vambhanā

(f.) contempt, despite Vin iv.6; MN i.402 (att’ukkaṃsana: para-vambhana) Nd ii.505; Vism 29; Vb-a 484; Pgdp 100 ■ Spelt vamhanā at Ja i.454 (vamhana-vacana) & at Dhs-a 396 (khuṃsana˚).;

abstr. fr. vambheti

Vambhanīya

(adj.) to be despised, wretched, miserable Pv-a 175, Pv-a 176.

grd. of vambheti

Vambhayita

(nt.) being despised or reviled MN i.172; Snp 905; Nd i.319 (= nindita, garahita, upavādita).

pp. of vambheti

Vambhin

(adj.) (-˚) despising, treating with contempt, disparaging MN i.95 (para˚, opp. to att’ ukkaṃ- saka).

fr. vambh

Vambheti

(& Vamheti) to treat with contempt despise, revile, scold; usually either combd with khuṃseti or opposed to ukkaṃseti, e.g. Vin ii.18; Vin iv.4; MN i.200 (= Snp 132 avajānāti), 402 sq.; DN i.90; AN ii.27 sq. Thag 621; DN-a i.256 (= hīḷeti); Dhp-a iv.38; Vv-a 348-pp. vambhayita ■ vamheti is found at Ja i.191, Ja i.356 cp. vamhanaNote. The spelling bh interchanges with that of h (vamheti), as ambho shows var. amho Trenckner (introd. to M 1. p. 1) gives vambheti (as BB reading) the preference over vamheti (as SS reading) Morris’ note on vambheti in J.P.T.S. 1884, 96 does not throw any light on its etymology.

Caus. of vambh, a root of uncertain origin (connected with vam ?). There is a form vambha given by Sk. lexicographers as a dial. word for vaṃśa Could it be a contraction fr. vyambheti = vi + Denom fr. ambho 2, part. of contempt?-The Dhtp (602 defines vambh as “garahāyaṃ”

Vamma

(nt.) armour Ja ii.22.

Vedic varman, fr. vṛ; to cover, enclose

Vammika

(adj.) = vammin Vin i.342.

fr. vamma

Vammita

armoured, clad in armour Ja i.179 (assa); ii.315 (hatthi); iii.8 v.301, 322; DN-a i.40.

pp. of vammeti, cp. Sk. varmita

Vammin

(adj.) wearing armour, armoured Ja iv.353 (= keṭaka-phalaka-hattha C.); v.259 373; vi.25; Mil 331. Vammika & vammika;

fr. vamma; Vedic varmin

Vammīka & vammika

(m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic valmīka; Idg. *ṷorm(āi); cp. Av. maoiris, Sk. vamraḥ, Gr. μύρμηζ, Lat. formica, Cymr. mor; all of same origin & meaning ant-hill: (a); ˚ika: MN i.142 sq.; Ja iii.85; Ja iv.30 (˚bila the ant’s hole); v.163 ■ (b) ˚ika: Ja i.432; Ja iv.30; Vism 183 (described), 304 (˚muddani), 446; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iii.208 Dhp-a iv.154.

Vammeti

to dress in armour, to armour Ja i.180; Ja ii.94 (mangala-hatthiṃ) ■ pp. vammita.

Denom. fr. vamma

Vamha

bragging, boasting, despising Ja i.319 (˚vacana).

for vambha: see vambheti

Vaya1

(& vayo) (nt.) age, especially young age, prime youth; meaning “old age” when characterized as such or contrasted to youth (the ord. term for old age being jarā ). Three “ages” or “periods of life” are usually distinguished, viz. paṭhama˚; youth, majjhima˚; middle age, pacchima˚; old age, e.g. at Ja i.79; Vism 619; Dhp-a iii.133vayo anuppatta one who has attained old age old DN i.48 (= pacchima-vayaṃ anuppatta DN-a i.143) Snp p.. 50, 92 ■ Cp. Dhp 260; Ja i.138 (vayo-harā kesā) Vism 619 (the 3 vayas with subdivisions into dasakas or decades of life); Mvu 2, Mvu 26 (ekūnatiṃso vayasā 29 years of age); Pv-a 5 (paṭhama-vaye when quite young) 36 (id.; just grown up). In cpds. vaya˚.

-kalyāṇa charm of youth Dhp-a i.387. -ppatta come of age, fit to marry (at 16) Vv-a 120; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 112; Thag-a 266.

Vedic vayas vitality, age; to be distinguished from another vayas meaning “fowl.” The latter is probably meant at Dhtp 232 (& Dhtm 332) with def;n “gamane.” The etym. of vayo (age) is connected with Sk. vīra = Lat. vir. man, hero, vīs strength; Gr. ι ̓́ς sinew, ι ̓́φιος strong; Sk. vīḍayati to make fast, also veśati; whereas vayas (fowl) corresponds with Sk vayasa (bird) & viḥ to Gr.; αἰετός eagle, οἰωνός bird of prey, Lat. avis bird

Vaya2

1. loss, want, expense (opp. āya) AN iv.282 (bhogānaṃ); Snp 739; Pv-a 130avyayena safely DN i.72. 2. decay (opp. uppāda) DN ii.157 = Ja i.392 (aniccā vata sankhārā uppāda-vaya-dhammino); SN iv.28; AN i.152 AN i.299.

-karaṇa expense, expenditure Ja iv.355; Vin ii.321 (Sam. Pās on C. V. vi.4, 6, explaining veyyāsika or veyyāyika of Vin ii.157).

Sk. vyaya, vi + i; occasionally as vyaya in Pāli as well

Vayaṃ

is the Sk. form of the nom. pl. of pers. pron. ahaṃ, represented in Pāli by mayaṃ (q.v.). The form vayaṃ only in grammarians, mentioned also by Müller, P.Gr. p. 87 as occurring in Dhp (?). The enclitic form for acc gen. & dat. is no, found e.g. at Pv i.53 (gloss for vo C. amhākaṃ); Ja ii.153, Ja ii.352; Dhp-a i.101; Pv-a 20, Pv-a 73.

Vayassa

a friend Ja ii.31; Ja iii.140; Ja v.157.

cp. Sk. vayasya

Vayha

(nt.) & Vayhā (f.) a vehicle, portable bed, litter Vin iv.339 (enumd under yāna together with ratha sakaṭa sandamānikā sivikā & pāṭankī); Ja vi.500 (f.), with sivikā ratha.;

grd. formation fr. vah; cp. Sk. vahya (nt.)

Vara1

(adj.) excellent, splendid, best, noble. As attribute it either precedes or follows the noun which it characterizes, e.g. ˚pañña of supreme wisdom Snp 391, Snp 1128 (= agga-pañña Nd ii.557); ˚bhatta excellent food (opp. lāmaka˚) Ja i.123; ˚lañcaka excellent gift (?) (Trenckner, Mil p.424): see under lañcaka. dhamma˚; the best norm Snp 233; nagara˚; the noble city Vv 166 (= uttama˚, Rājagahaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ Vv-a 82); ratana˚; the best of gems Snp 683; rāja˚; famous king Vv 321 (= Sakka Vv-a 134); or inserted between noun and apposition (or predicate), e.g. ākiṇṇa -vara- lakkhaṇa full of the best marks Snp 408; narī -vara- gaṇa a crowd of most lovely women Snp 301; esp. frequent in combn with predicate gata: “gone on to the best of, i.e. riding the most stately (horse or elephant), or walking on the royal (palace) etc., e.g. upari-pāsādavara -gata Pv-a 105; sindha-piṭṭhi -vara- gata Ja i.179 hatthi-khandha vara -gata Pv-a 75, Pv-a 216, Pv-a 279 ■ nt varaṃ in compar. or superl. function: better than (instr.) the best, the most excellent thing AN iv.128 (katamaṃ nu kho varaṃ: yaṃ… yaṃ); Dhp 178 (ādhipaccena sotāpattiphalaṃ v.), 322 (varaṃ assatarā dantā… attadanto tato varaṃ).

-aṅganā a noble or beautiful woman Mvu 33, Mvu 84 -ādāyin acquiring the best SN iv.250; AN iii.80. -āroha (1) state elephant Vv 51 (= varo aggo seṭṭho āroho ti varāroho Vv-a 35); (2) (f.) a noble lady Ja vi.562 (Maddī varārohā rājaputtī).

fr. vṛ; to wish; Vedic vara

Vara2

(m. & nt.) wish, boon, favour Mil 110, Mil 139. Usually in phrases ilke varaṃ dadāti to grant a wish or a boon Ja iv.10; Vv-a 260; Pv-a 20. varaṃ gaṇhāti to take a wish or a vow Ja v.382; varaṃ vuṇāti (varati) id. Ja iii.493 (varaṃ varassu, imper.); Pv ii.940, 42 Mil 227varaṃ yācati to ask a favour Ja iii.315 (varāni yācāmi).

fr.; vṛ; to wish

Varaka1

the bean Phaseolus trilobus Ja ii.75 (where equal to kalāya); Mil 267; Dhp-a i.311.

cp. *Sk. varaka

Varaka2

(adj.) wishing or asking (in marriage) Thig 406.

fr. vṛ;

Varaṇa

the tree Crataeva roxburghii Ja i.222, Ja i.317 (˚rukkha ), 319 = Dhp-a iii.409 (˚kaṭṭhabhañja); Ja vi.535.

cp. Sk. varaṇa rampart, causeway, wall

*Varati

& der. (“to choose” as well as “to obstruct”) see vuṇāti.

vṛ

Varatta

(nt.) & Varattā (f.) a strap, thong, strip of leather SN i.63; AN ii.33; Snp 622; Dhp 398 (fig. for taṇhā); Ja ii.153; Ja v.45. As “harness at Ja i.175; as straps on a ship’s mast (to hold the sails Mil 378 ■ Cp. vārattika.

-khaṇḍa strip of leather, a strap MN i.244 = MN ii.193 MN iii.259 = SN iv.56 = AN iii.380.

cp. Vedic varatrā, given also in meaning “elephant’s girth” at Halāyudha ii.66

Varāka

(adj.) wretched, miserable SN i.231; Ja iv.285; Vism 315; Vv-a 101; Pv-a 120 (syn for kapaṇa), 175 (id.).

cp. Epic Sk. varāka

Varāha

a boar, wild hog Dhp 325 = Thag 17; Ja v.406 = Ja vi.277; Mil 364 Sdhp 378.

Vedic varāha & varāhu, freq. in Rigveda

Valañja

(-˚) 1. track, line, trace, in pada˚; track, footprint Ja i.8; Ja ii.153 (v.l. lañca & lañcha) iv.221 (valañcha T.), 383; Dhp-a ii.38.

2. that which is spent or secreted, i.e. outflow, faeces, excrement, in sarīra˚; faeces Ja i.70, Ja i.80, Ja i.421 (˚ṃ muñcati to ease oneself) iii.486; Dhp-a ii.55.

2. design, use; only neg. avalañja useless, superfluous Vin iv.266; Vv-a 46 (˚ṃ akaṃsu rendered useless); Dhp-a iv.116.

see valañjeti

Valañjana

(nt.) 1. resorting, acting as, behaviour Vv-a 248.

2. giving off, evacuation, easing the body Ja i.161 (˚vacca-kuṭi privy); Dhp-a iii.270 (sarīra˚).

fr. valañjeti

Valañjanaka

(adj.) (-˚) being marked off, being traced, belonging to, behaving, living (anto˚ in the inner precincts, bahi˚; outside the bounds) Ja i.382, Ja i.385 Ja i.398.

fr. valañjana

Valañjita

traced, tracked, practised, travelled Ja iii.542 (magga).

pp. of valañjeti; cp. BSk. valañjita used, Mvu iii.276

Valañjeti

1. to trace, track travel (a road); practise, achieve, resort to Mil 359; Vv-a 58.

2. to use, use up, spend Ja i.102; Ja iii.342 Ja vi.369, Ja vi.382, Ja vi.521 ■ ppr. Pass. (a-)valañjiyamāna (not any longer) in use Ja i.111 ■ pp. valañjita.

customarily expld as ava + lañj (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 661), the root lañj being given as a Sk. root in meaning “to fry,” “to be strong,” and a variety of others (see Mon. Williams s. v. lañj ). But the root & its derivations are only found in lexicographical and grammatical works, therefore it is doubtful whether it is genuine.; lañja is given as “pada,” i.e. track, place foot, and also “tail.” We are inclined to see in lañj a by-form of lañch, which is a variant of lakṣ “to mark etc. (cp. lañcha, lañchaka, ˚ana, ˚ita). Thus the meaning would range from originally “trace,” mark off enclose, to: “being enclosed,” assigned or belonging to i.e. moving (in), frequenting etc., as given in C. explns There seems to be a Singhalese word at the root of it as it is certainly dialectical ■ The Dhtm (522) laconically defines valañj as “valañjane”

Valaya

(m. & nt.) a bracelet Vin ii.106; Ja ii.197 (dantakāre valay’-ādīni karonte disvā); iii.377; vi.64, 65; DN-a i.50; Dhp-a i.226 (danta˚ ivory bangle); Pv-a 157 (sankha˚) Mvu 11, Mvu 14 (˚anguli-veṭhakā).

Epic Sk. valaya, fr. Idg.; *ṷel to turn; see Sk. roots vṛ; to enclose, and val to turn, to which belong the foll.: varutra upper robe, ūrmi wave, fold valita bent, vālayati to make roll, valli creeper, vaṭa rope, vāṇa cane. Cp. also Lat. volvo to roll, Gr. ἐλύω to wind, ε ̓́λις round, ε ̓́λυτρον cover; Goth. walwjan to roll on, Ohg. welzan & walzan = Ags. wealtan (E. waltz) Ags. wylm wave, and many others, q.v. in Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v. volvo ■ The Dhtp (274) gives root val in meaning saṃvaraṇa, i.e. obstruct, cover. See further vuṇāti

Valāhaka

1. a cloud, dark cloud, thundercloud SN i.212 Thig 55; AN ii.102; AN v.22; Thag 760; Pp 42, Pp 43; Vv 681 Ja iii.245; Ja iii.270 (ghana˚); Vism 285 (˚paṭala); Mil 274; Dhs-a 317; Vv-a 12 (= abbhā).

2. Name of mythical horses SN iii.145.

-kāyikā (devā) groups of cloud gods (viz. sīta˚, uṇha˚ abbha˚, vāta˚, vassa˚) SN iii.254.

valāha + ka; of dial. origin; cp. Epic Sk. balāhaka

Valāhassa

cloud-horse Ja ii.129 (the Valāhassajātaka, pp. 127 sq.); cp. BSk. Bālāh’āśva (-rājā Divy 120 sq. (see Index Divy). Vali & Vali

valāha + assa

Vali & Valī

(f.) a line, fold, wrinkle, a streak, row Vin ii.112 (read valiyo for valiṃ?); Thig 256; Ja iv.109 Shhp 104 ■ muttā-vali a string of pearls Vv-a 169 For vaṭṭanā-valī see vaṭṭanā. See also āvali.

cp. Epic Sk. vali; fr val. Spelling occasionally with

Valika

(adj.) having folds Ja i.499.

fr. vali

Valita

wrinkled AN i.138 (acc. khaṇḍadantaṃ palita-kesaṃ vilūnaṃ khalitaṃ siro-valitaṃ tilak’āhata-gattaṃ: cp. valin with passage MN i.88 MN iii.180, one of the two evidehtly misread); Pv-a 56, Pv-a 153 In compn with taca contracted to valittaca (for valitattaca) “with wrinkled skin” Dhp-a ii.190 (phalitakesa + ); with abstr. valittacatā the fact of having a wrinkled skin MN i.49 (pālicca + ; cp. MA 215); AN ii.196 (khaṇḍicca pālicca + ).

pp. of val: see valeti

Valin

(adj.) having wrinkles MN i.88 (acc. palitakesiṃ vilūnaṃ khalita-siraṃ valinaṃ) = iii.180 (palitakesaṃ vilūnaṃ khalitaṃ-siraṃ valīnaṃ etc.) See valita for this passage ■ In compn vali-mukha “wrinkled face,” i.e. monkey Ja ii.298.

fr. vali

Valiya

at MN i.446 is not clear. It is combd with vaṇṇiya (q.v.). See also note on p. 567; v.l. pāṇiya; C. silent.

Valīkaṃ

read for valikaṃ at Thig 403, in meaning “wrong, fault”; Thag-a 266 expls as “vyālikaṃ dosaṃ.” So Kern, Toev. s. v.

cp. Sk. vyalīkaṃ

Vaḷīmant

(adj.) having wrinkles Thig 269 (pl. valīmatā).

fr. vali

Valeti

1. to twist, turn, in gīvaṃ to wring (a fowl’s neck Ja i.436; Ja iii.178 (gīvaṃ valitvā: read ˚etvā).

2. to twist or wind round, to put (a garment) on, to dress Ja i.452 (sāṭake valetuṃ; v.l. valañcetuṃ) ■ pp. valita.

cp. Sk. vāleti, Caus. of val to turn: see valaya

Vallakī

(f.) cp. Epic Sk. vallakī, BSk. vallikī Divy 108; Mvu i.227] the Indian lute Abhp 138.

Vallabha

a favourite Ja iv.404 Ja vi.38, Ja vi.371; rāja˚; a king’s favourite, an overseer Ja i.342 Mvu 37, Mvu 10; Vb-a 501 ■ f. vallabhā (a) beloved (woman), a favourite Ja iii.40; Vv-a 92, Vv-a 135, Vv-a 181.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vallabha & BSk. vallabhaka a sea monster Divy 231

Vallabhatta

(nt.) being a favourite Dāvs v.7.

abstr. fr. vallabha

Vallarī

(f.) a branching footstalk, a compound pedicle Abhp 550. The word is found in BSk. in meaning of “musical instrument” at Divy 315 and passim.

cp. Class. Sk. vallarī, Halāyudha ii.30

Vallikā

(f.) 1. an ornament for the ear Vin ii.106 (cp. Bdhgh’s expln on p. 316).

2. a jungle rope Vin ii.122.

cp. Sk. vālikā?

Vallibha

the plant kumbhaṇḍa i.e. a kind of gourd Abhp 597 (no other ref.?).

cp. late Sk. valibha wrinkled

Vallī

(f.) 1. a climbing plant, a creeper Vin iii.144; Ja v.37; Ja vi.536; Vv-a 147 Vv-a 335 (here as a root?) ■ santānaka˚; a long, spreading creeper Vv-a 94, Vv-a 162.

2. a reed or rush used as a string or rope for binding or tying (esp. in building), bast (? MN i.190 (Neumann, “Binse”); Ja iii.52 (satta rohita macche uddharitvā valliyā āvuṇitvā netvā etc.), 333 (in similar connection); Dhp-a iii.118.

3. in kaṇṇa˚; the lobe of the ear Mvu 25, Mvu 94 ■ The compn form of vallī is valli˚.

-koṭī the tips of a creeper Ja vi.548. -pakka the fruit of a creeper Vv 3330. -phala = ˚pakka Ja iv.445. -santāna spreadings or shoots of a creeper Kp-a 48. -hāraka carrying a (garland of) creeper Vism 523 = Vb-a 131 (in comparison illustrating the paṭicca-samuppāda).

cp. Sk. vallī; for etym. see valaya

Vallura

(nt.) dried flesh SN ii.98; Ja ii.245.

cp. Class. Sk. vallūra

Vaḷa

at Vism 312 is to be read vāḷa (snake), in phrase vāḷehi upadduta “molested by snakes.”

Vaḷabhā

is not clear; it occurs only in the expression (is it found in the Canon?) vaḷabhā-mukha a submarine fire or a purgatory Abhp 889. The Epic Sk. form is vaḍavā-mukha (Halāyudha i.70; iii.1).

= vaḷavā?

Vaḷabhī

(f.) a roof; only in cpd. ˚ratha a large covered van (cp. yogga1) MN i.175 (sabba-setena vaḷabhī-rathena Sāvatthiyā niyyāti divā divaṃ); ii.208 (id.), but vaḷavābhi-rathena); Ja vi.266 (vaḷabhiyo = bhaṇḍa-sakaṭiyo C.). The expression reminds of vaḷavā-ratha.

cp. late (dial.) Sk. vaḍabhī

Vaḷavā

(f.) a mare, a common horse DN i.5; Pp 58; Mvu 10, Mvu 54; Ja i.180; Ja vi.343; Dhp-a i.399; Dhp-a iv.4 (assatarā vaḷavāya gadrabhena jātā).

-ratha a carriage drawn by a mare DN i.89, DN i.105, DN i.106. The expression reminds of vaḷabhī-ratha.

cp. Vedic vaḍavā

Vaḷīna

at Ja vi.90 is not clear (in phrase jaṭaṃ vaḷīnaṃ pankagataṃ). The C. reads valinaṃ, paraphrased by ākulaṃ. Fausböll suggests malinaṃ. Should we accept reading valinaṃ? It would then be acc. sg. of valin (q.v.).

Vavakaṭṭha

drawn away, alienated; withdrawn, secluded Dhp-a ii.103 (˚kāya).

pp. of vavakassati

Vavakassati

to be drawn away, to be distracted or alienated (from); so is to be read at all passages, where it is either combd with avakassati or stands by itself The readings are: Vin ii.204 (apakāsanti avapakāsanti = AN v.74 (avakassanti vavakassanti); AN iii.145 (bhikkhu n’ âlaṃ sanghamhā ‘vapakāsituṃ: read vavakāsituṃ or ˚kassituṃ), 393 (vapakassat’ eva Satthārā, vapakassati garuṭṭhāniyehi). See also apakāsati, avakassati, avapakāsati-pp. vavakaṭṭha.

v + ava + kṛṣ, would correspond to Sk. vyavakṛṣyate, Pass.

Vavakkhati

see vatti. Vavatthapeti & tthapeti;

Vavatthapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti

to determine, fix, settle, define, designate, point out Ja iv.17 (disaṃ ˚tthapetvā getting his bearings); Vb 193 sq. Vism 182; Snp-a 67; Kp-a 11, Kp-a 42, Kp-a 89; Vv-a 220 ■ ppr Pass. vavatthāpiyamāna Dhp-a i.21, Dhp-a i.35 ■ pp. vavatthita & vavatthāpita;.

Caus. of vi + ava + sthā

Vavatthāna

(nt.) [fr. vi + ava + sthā; cp. late Sk. vyavasthāna which occurs in Ep. Sk. in meaning “stay” determination, resolution, arrangement, fixing, analysis Pts i.53; Vin iv.289; Vism 111, Vism 236 (= nimitta), 347 (defn); Mil 136; Kp-a 23.

Vavatthāpita

arranged, settled, established Mil 345 (su˚).

pp. of vavatthāpeti

Vavatthita

1. entered on arranged, fixed, determined, settled MN iii.25; Dhs-a 36–⁠2. separated (opp. sambhinna) Vin ii.67 sq.

pp. of vi + ava + sthā, cp. vavatthapeti & late Sk. vyavasthita “determination”

Vavattheti

to be determined or analysed Pts i.53, Pts i.76, Pts i.84.

unusual pres. (Med ■ Pass.) formation fr. vi + ava + sthā, formed perhaps after vavatthita

Vavassagga

“letting go,” i.e. starting on something, endeavouring, resolution AN i.36; Ja vi.188 (handā ti vavassagg’ atthe nipāto); DN-a i.237 (here handa is expld as vavasāy’ atthe nipato). Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly “consent.”

vi + ava + srj; Sk. vyavasarga

Vasa

(m. & nt.) power, authority, control, influence SN i.43, SN i.240 (kodho vo vasam āyātu: shall be in your power; vasa = āṇāpavattana K.S. i.320); MN i.214 (bhikkhu cittaṃ vasaṃ vatteti, no ca cittassa vasena vattati: he brings the heart under his control, but is not under the influence of the heart); Snp 297, Snp 315, Snp 578, Snp 586, Snp 968; Sdhp 264 ■ The instr. vasena is used as an adv. in meaning “on account of, because” e.g. mahaggha-vasena mahāraha “costly on account of its great worth” Pv-a 77; cp. Ja i.94; Pv-a 36 (putta˚); Mvu 33, Mvu 92 (paṭisanthāra˚) ■ Freq in phrase vase (loc.) vattati to be in somebody’s power Ja v.316 (te vase vattati), cp. MN i.214 (cittassa vasena vattati) & 231 (vatteti te tasmiṃ; vaso have you power over that?); trs. vase vatteti to get under control, to get into one’s power Ja iv.415 (attano vase vattetvā) v.316 (rājāno attano v. v.); Dhp-a ii.14 (rājānaṃ attano v. v.), cp. MN i.214 (vasan vatteti) & Pv-a 89 (;vasaṃ vattento) ■ Note. The compn form in connection with kṛ; and bhū is vasī˚; (q.v.).

-ānuga being in somebody’s power, dependent, subjected obedient Snp 332, Snp 1095; Ja iii.224 (= vasavattin C.); Thig 375 (= kinkāra- paṭissāvin Thag-a 252); Sdhp 249. -ānuvattin id.; f. ˚inī obedient, obliging (to one’s husband) Vv 313. -uttama highest authority, greatest ideal Snp 274. -gata being in someone’s power Ja v.453 (narīnaṃ); cp. vasī-kata. -vattaka wielding power Sdhp 483 (˚ika); ; having no free will Pv-a 64. -vattana wielding power, (having) authority Mil 356 -vattin

1. (act., i.e. vatteti) having highest power domineering, autocrat, (all-)mighty; fig. having self-mastery, controlling one’s senses DN i.247; DN ii.261; AN ii.24; Iti 122; Th 2. 37; Pv ii.333; Mil 253; DN-a i.111 DN-a i.114, DN-a i.121; Snp-a 133 (˚bhavana).

2. (pass.; i.e. vattati being in one’s power, dependent, subject Ja iii.224 Ja v.316; Thag-a 226 (read vattino for ˚vattito!).

cp. Vedic vaśa; vaś to be eager, to desire

Vasati1

to clothe. pp.; vuttha1. Caus. vāseti: see ni˚ See also vāsana1 & vāsana;1.

vas1; to Idg. *ṷes, cp. Gr. ε ̓́ννυμι to clothe, Sk. vasman cover, Goth. wasjan clothe, wasti dress; Lat vestis = E. vest etc.; Dhtp 628 (& Dhtm 870): acchādane

Vasati2

to live, dwell, stay, abide; to spend time (esp. with vassaṃ the rainy season); trs. to keep, observe live, practise Snp 469 sq., 1088 (= saṃvasati āvasati parivasati Nd ii.558); Pv-a 3, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 78 (imper. vasatha). uposathaṃ vasaṃ (ppr.) keeping the Sunday Ja vi.232 brahmacariyaṃ v. to live a chaste life MN i.515 (cp. same expression Ait. Br. 5, 13; Śat. Br. 12, 2, 2; 13, 8. 22)-ppr. vasanto Pv-a 75, Pv-a 76; ppr. med. vasamāna Ja i.21, Ja i.236, Ja i.291; Pv-a 117; Pot. vaseyya MN i.515; Pv ii.97 (ghare), & vase Mil 372 ■ aor. vasi Snp 977; Ja iv.317 (piya-saṃvāsaṃ); Pv-a 111; Mvu 1, Mvu 13 (vasī vasi); 5, 229 ■ ger. vasitvā Ja i.278; Ja iv.317; Pv-a 13 grd. vasitabba Snp 678; Pv-a 42; & vatthabba Mvu 3 Mvu 12; inf. vatthuṃ Thig 414, & vasituṃ Pv-a 12, Pv-a 112. Fut vasissati [ = Sk. vasiṣyati] Mvu 14, Mvu 26; Pv-a 12; and (older) vacchati [ = Sk. vatsyati] Vin i.60; Thig 294; Ja iv.217; Ja iv.1st sg. vacchāmi Ja v.467 (na te v. santike) vi.523, 524, & vacchaṃ Thig 414 ■ Pass. vussati [Sk uṣyate] MN i.147 (brahmacariyaṃ v.) ■ pp. vasita vusita [ = vi + uṣita], vuttha [perhaps = vi + uṣṭa], q. v-Caus. I. vāseti to cause to live, stay or dwell; to make live; to preserve (opp. nāseti at SN iv.248) Vin iii.140; SN iv.248; Mil 211; Pv-a 160 (inf. vāsetuṃ); see also vāseti2 ■ Caus. II. vasāpeti (cp. adhivāsāpeti) to make live or spend, to cause to dwell, to detain Ja i.290; Ja ii.27; Pv-a 20 (vassaṃ) ■ pp. vāsita ■ See also adhi˚, ā˚ ni˚, pari˚.

vas2; Idg. *ṷes to stay, abide; cp. Av. varəhaiti; Lat. Vesta the goddess of the hearth = Gr. ἑστία hearth Goth. wisan to stay, remain, be (= Ohg. wesan, E. was were); Oicel. vist to stay, Oir. foss rest ■ Dhtm 470 kanti-nivāsesu

Vasati3

(f.) a dwelling, abode, residence Ja vi.292 (rāja˚ = rāja-paricariyā C.); Mil 372 (rājavasatiṃ vase); Dāvs iv.27 (saka˚).

fr. vas2, cp. Vedic vasati

Vasana1

(nt.) clothing, clothes Snp 971; Thig 374; DN iii.118 (odāta˚), 124 (id.); Nd i.495 (the six cīvarāni); Pv-a 49vasanāni clothing Mvu 22, Mvu 30- vasana (-˚) as adj. “clothed,” e.g. odāta˚; wearing white robes Vin i.187; kāsāya˚; clad in yellow robes Mvu 18, Mvu 10; pilotika˚; in rags Ja iv.380; suci˚; in bright garments Snp 679; Pv i.108.

fr. vasati1

Vasana2

(nt.) dwelling (-place), abode; usually in cpds. like ˚gāma the village where (he) lived Ja ii.153 ˚ṭṭhāna residence, dwelling place Pv-a 12, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 92; Dhp-a i.323 and passim.

fr. vasati2

Vasanaka

(adj.) (-˚) living (in) Ja ii.435 (nibaddha˚, i.e. of continuous abode).

fr. vasana2

Vasanta

spring Ja i.86; Ja v.206; Kp-a 192 (bāla˚ = Citra); DN-a i.132 (˚vana); Pv-a 135.

Vedic vasanta; Idg. *ṷēr, cp. Av. varehar spring, Gr. εἄρ, Lat. vēr, Oicel. vār spring, Lith. vasarā summer.

Vasabha

a bull Mil 115 (rāja˚); Snp-a 40 (relation between usabha, vasabha & nisabha) Vv-a 83 (id.).

the Sanskritic-Pāli form (*vṛṣabha) of the proper Pāli usabha (q.v. for etym.). Only in later (Com. style under Sk. influence

Vasala

an outcaste; a low person, wretch; adj. vile, foul Vin ii.221; Snp 116–⁠136; Ja iv.388; Snp-a 183,-f. vasalī outcaste wretched woman SN i.160; Ja iv.121, Ja iv.375; Dhp-a i.189; Dhp-a iii.119; Dhp-a iv.162; Vv-a 260.

-ādhama = ˚dhamma Snp 135. -dhamma vile conduct Ja ii.180. -vāda foul talk Ud 28; Snp-a 347. -sutta the suttanta on outcasts Snp 116 sq. (p, 21 sq.), commented on at Snp-a 174 sq., 289.

Vedic vṛṣala, DimiName of vṛṣan, lit. “little man”

Vasalaka

= vasala Snp p.21.

vasala + ka in more disparaging sense

Vasā1

(f.) a cow (neither in calf nor giving suck) Snp 26, Snp 27; Snp-a 49 (= adamita-vuddha-vacchakā).

Vedic vaśā; cp. vāśitā; Lat. vacca cow

Vasā2

(f.) fat, tallow, grease Snp 196; Kp iii.; Pv ii.23; Ja iii.356; Ja v.489; Pv-a 80; Vb-a 67 In detail at Vism 263, Vism 361; Vb-a 246.

cp. Vedic vasā

Vasi˚

is the shortened form of vasī˚; (= vasa) in combns ˚ppatta one who has attained power, mastering: only in phrase ceto-vasippatta AN ii.6; AN iii.340; Mil 82; cp BSk. vaśiprāpta Divy 210, Divy 546 ■ and ˚ppatti mastership mastery Vism 190 (appanā + ).

Vasika

(adj.) (-˚) being in the power of, subject to, as in kodha˚; a victim of anger Ja iii.135; taṇhā under the influence of craving Ja iv.3 mātugāma˚; fond of women Ja iii.277.

fr. vasa, cp. Sk. vaśika

Vasita

dwelled, lived, spent Mvu 20, Mvu 14.

pp. of vasati2

Vasitar

one who abides, stays or lives (in), a dweller; fig. one who has a (regular) habit AN ii.107 Pp 43, cp. PugA 225 ■ vasitā is given as “habit” at Cpd. 58 sq., 207.

n. ag. fr. vasita

Vasin

(adj.) having power (over), mastering, esp. one’s senses; a master (over) Vin iii.93; DN i.18 (= ciṇṇavasitattā vasī DN-a i.112); iii.29; Snp 372; Vism 154 (fivefold); Mvu 1, Mvu 13 (vasī vasi); Dāvs i.16.

fr. vasa

Vasima

= vasin Iti 32 (acc. vasimaṃ; v.l. vasīmaṃ).

Vasī˚

is the composition form of vasa in combn with roots kṛ; and bhū, e.g. ˚kata made dependent, brought into somebody’s power, subject(ed) Thig 295 (= vasavattino katvā, pl.); Snp 154; cp. BSk. vaśīkṛta Jtm 213. See also vasagata ■ ˚katvā having overcome or subjected Snp 561 (= attano vase vattetvā Snp-a 455). Metricausâ as vasiṃ karitvā at Snp 444˚bhāva state of having power mastery Nd ii.466 (balesu); Pp 14 (in same passage, but reading phalesu), expld at PugA 189 (with v.l. SS balesu!) as “ciṇṇa-vasī-bhāva”; Kv 608 (implies balesu); Mil 170. Cp. BSk. bala-vaśī-bhāva Mvu iii.379. See also ciṇṇa ■ ˚bhūta having become a master (over), mastering SN i.132; Mil 319; cp. Mvu i.47 & 399 vaśībhūta ■ The same change of vasa˚ to vasī˚ we find in comb;n vasippatta (vasī + ppatta), q. v under vasi˚.

Vasu

(nt.) wealth; only in cpds. ˚deva the god of wealth, i.e. Kṛṣṇa (Kaṇha) Mil 191 (as ˚devā followers of K.); Ja v.326 (here in T. as ādicco vāsudevo pabhankaro, expld in C. as vasudevo vasujotano, i.e. an Ep. of the sun); Vism 233 (Vāsudevo baladevo) -˚dharā (f.) (as vasun-dharā) the bearer of wealth, i.e. the earth SN i.100; AN iii.34; Ja v.425; Vism 205, Vism 366; DN-a i.61. -˚dhā id. Ja i.25; Ap 53; Vism 125.

Vedic vasu good, cp. Gr. ἐύς good, Oir. fīu worthy, Goth. iusiza better

Vasumant

(adj.) having wealth, rich Ja vi.192.

fr. vasu

Vassa

(m. & nt.) 1. rain, shower Ja iv.284; Ja vi.486 (khaṇika sudden rain); Mil 307; Mvu 21, Mvu 31; Dhp-a iii.163 (pokkhara˚ portentous); Snp-a 224 (mahā˚ deluge of rain); Pv-a 55 (vāta˚ wind & rain) ■ fig. shower, downpour fall MN i.130 = Vin ii.25 (kahāpaṇa˚); Dhp-a ii.83 (kusuma˚) ■ Esp. the rainy season, lasting roughly from June to October (Āsāḷha-Kattika), often called “Lent,” though the term does not strictly correspond Usually in pl. vassā (A iv.138), also termed vassā-ratta “time of rains” (J iv.74; v.38). Cp. BSk. varṣā, e.g. Divy 401, Divy 509 ■ Keeping Lent (i.e. spending the rainy season) is expressed by vassaṃ vasati Vin iii.10; Mvu 16, Mvu 8; or by vassa-vāsaṃ (vass’ āvāsaṃ) vasati (see below) vassaṃ upeti SN v.152, vassaṃ upagacchati SN v.152; Pv-a 42. One who has kept Lent or finished the residence of the rains is a vuttha-vassa Ja i.82; Mvu 17, Mvu 1; or vassaṃ vuttha Vin iii.11; SN i.199; SN v.405; Pv-a 43. Cp BSk. varṣ’ oṣita Divy 92, Divy 489 ■ Vassa-residence is vassa-vāsa (see below) ■ vassaṃ vasāpeti (Caus.) to induce someone to spend the rainy season Pv-a 20- anto-vassaṃ during Lent; cp. antovass’ eka-divasaṃ one day during Lent Mvu 18, Mvu 2; antara-vassaṃ id SN iv.63.

2. (nt.) a year AN iv.252 (mānusakāni paññāsa vassāni); Snp 289, Snp 446, Snp 1073. satta˚; (adj.) seven years old Mvu 5, Mvu 61; satta-aṭṭha˚ 7 or 8 years old Pv-a 67 ■ See cpd. ˚sata.

3. semen virile, virility see cpds. ˚kamma & ˚vara;.

-agga shelter from the rain, a shed (agga = agāra Ja i.123; Dhp-a iii.105 = Vv-a 75. -āvāsa vassa-residence AN iii.67. -āvāsika belonging to the spending of the rainy season, said of food (bhatta) given for that purpose Ja vi.71; Dhp-a i.129 (as one of the 4 kinds: salāka˚ pakkhika˚, navacanda˚, vass’-āvāsika˚), 298; iv.129 (˚lābha a gift for the r. s.). -upagamana entering on the vassa-residence Pv-a 42. -upanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, commencement of Vassa residence [BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, Divy 489; Avs i.182, where Ep. of the full moon of Āsāḷha]. Two such terms for taking up the residence: purimikā & pacchimikā AN i.51 i.e. the day after the full moon of Ā. or a month after that date. See upanāyika ■ vass’ ûpanāyika-divasa the first day of Lent Vism 92; Dhp-a iv.118; ˚ûpanāyikaṃ khandhakaṃ the section of the Vinaya dealing with the entrance upon Lent (i.e. Vin i.137 sq.) Mvu 16, Mvu 9. -odaka rain-water Vism 260 = Vb-a 243 -kamma causing virility DN i.12 (= vasso ti puriso, vosso ti paṇḍako iti; vossassa vassa-karaṇaṃ vassa-kammaṃ vassassa vossa-karaṇaṃ vossa-kammaṃ DN-a i.97). -kāla time for rain Ja iv.55. -dasa (& ˚dasaka) a decade of years: see enum;d at Ja iv.397. -pūgāni innumerable years Ja vi.532, cp. Snp 1073. -vara a eunuch Ja vi.502 -valāhaka a rain cloud AN iii.243 (˚devā). -vassana shedding of rain, raining Dhp-a ii.83. -vāsa Vassa residence SN v.326; Pv-a 20. -vuṭṭhi rainfall Snp-a 34, cp 224. -sata a century Snp 589, Snp 804; AN iv.138; Pv ii.115 Pv-a 3, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 69. -satika centenarian Mil 301.

cp. Vedic varṣa (nt.) rain. For etym. see vassati;1

Vassati1

to rain (intrs.), fig to shower, pour(down) Vin i.32 (mahāmegho vassi) SN iii.141 (deve vassante); v.396 (id.); Snp 30 (devassa vassato, gen. sg. ppr.); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 139, Pv-a 287; Mvu 21, Mvu 33; Dhp-a ii.83 (vassatu, imper.; vassi, aor.); 265 (devo vassanto nom. sg.) ■ Cp. kālena kālaṃ devo vṛṣyate Divy 71 ■ Caus. II. vassāpeti to cause to rain Ja v.201 (Sakko devaṃ v. let the sky shed rain) ■ pp. vaṭṭa vaṭṭha, vuṭṭha. Another pp. of the Caus. *vasseti is vassita.

vṛṣ, varṣati, vṛṣate; Idg. *ṷers to wet, cp. Vedic vṛṣa bull, varṣa rain, vṛṣabha (P. usabha), Av. varšna virile, Lat. verres boar; Gr. α ̓́ρρην virile, ε ̓́ρση dew with which root is connected *eres to flow: Sk. arṣati ṛṣabha bull, Lat. ros dew = Sk. rasa essence etc. Dhtm 471 gives “secana” as defn

Vassati2

to utter a cry (of animals), to bellow, bark, to bleat, to crow etc. SN ii.230; Ja i.436 (of a cock); ii.37 153, 307; iii.127; vi.497 (ppr. vassamāna = vāsamāna C.) ■ pp. vassita2.

vāś to bellow, Vedic vāśyate; Dhtm 471: “saddane”

Vassana1

(nt.) raining, shedding (water) Dhp-a ii.83 (vassa˚).

fr. vassati1

Vassana2

(nt.) bleating; neg. ; Ja iv.251.

fr. vassati2

Vassāna

(belonging to) the rainy season Vin iv.286; AN iv.138; Ja ii.445 Ja v.177.

gen. pl. formation fr. vassa, like gimhāna fr. gimha (q.v.). Kern, Toev. s. v. sees in it a contraction of varṣāyaṇa. Cp. Trenckner, Mil p.428

Vassāpanaka

(adj.) shedding, pouring out Ja i.253 (dhana˚).

fr. vassāpeti; Caus. of vassati1

Vassika

(adj.) 1. (cp. vassa1) for the rainy season DN ii.21 (palace); cp. Avs i.269 varṣaka (id.).

2. (-˚ of years, in gaṇa˚; for many years Snp 279; Snp-a 339 tero˚; more than one year (old): see under tero; satta˚ seven years old Pv-a 53.

fr. vassa

Vassikā

(f.) & Vassika (nt.) = vassikī, i.e. Jasminum Sambac; cp. BSk. varṣika Lal 366, Lal 431; Divy 628; Avs i.163. (a) f. (the plant) Dhp 377 (= sumanā Dhp-a iv.112); Mil 251. (b) nt. (the flower, said to be the most fragrant of all flowers) AN v.22; SN v.44; Dhp-a iv.112 (˚puppha).

Vassikī

(f.) the great-flowered jasmine, Jasminum Sambac (cp. vassikā) Dhp 55 = Ja iii.291 = Mil 333; Mil 181, Mil 338; Dhp-a i.422.

Vassita1

sprinkled with, wet with, endowed with, i.e. full of Ja iv.494 (balena vassita).

pp. of *vasseti, Caus. of vassati1

Vassita2

(nt.) a cry Ja i.432; Ja iv.217, Ja iv.225.

pp. of vassati2

Vassitar

a shedder of rain AN ii.102 = Pp 42.

n. ag. fr. vassita1

Vassin

(adj. n.) raining; in padesa˚; shedding local showers Iti 64.

fr. vassati1

Vaha

(-˚) 1. bringing, carrying, leading Pv i.58 (vāri˚ river = mahānadī Pv-a 29); SN i.103; Pv-a 13 (anattha˚). Doubtful in hetu- vahe Pv ii.85, better with v.l. ˚vaco, expld by sakāraṇa-vacana Pv-a 109.

2. a current Ja iv.260 (Gangā˚); v.388 (mahā˚) ■ Cp. vāha.

fr. vah

Vahati

1. to carry, bear, transport Ja iv.260; Pv-a 14 (= dhāreti); Mil 415 (of iron: carry weight) ■ imper. vaha Vv 8117; inf. vahituṃ Pv-a 122 (perhaps superfluous); grd. vahitabba Mvu 23, Mvu 93. 2. to proceed, to do one’s work MN i.444; Mvu 34, Mvu 4 guḷayantaṃ vahitvāna, old var. reading for P.T.S. ed T. reading guḷayantamhi katvāna.

3. to work, to be able, to have power AN i.282 ■ Pass. vuyhati (Sk uhyate) to be carried (along) Vin i.106; Thag 88; ppr vuyhamāna SN iv.179; Thag 88; Ja iv.260; Pv-a 153 pass. also vahīyati Pv-a 56 (= nīyati); ppr. vahīyamāna Mil 397 ■ pp. ūḷha (see soḍha), vuḷha & vūḷha; (būḷha)-Caus. vāheti to cause to go, to carry, to drive away Vin ii.237; Snp 282; Ja vi.443 ■ ppr. vāhiyamāna (in med. pass. sense) Ja vi.125 ■ pp. vahita (for vāh˚) Mil 346. Cp. ubbahati2.

vah, Idg. *ṷeĝh to drive, lead, cp. Sk. vahitra = Lat. vehiculum = E. vehicle; Gr. ο ̓́ξος waggon, Av vaƶaiti to lead, Lat. veho to drive etc.; Goth. ga-wigan = Ohg. wegan = Ger. bewegen; Goth. wēgs = Ger. weg E. way; Ohg. wagan = E. waggon, etc ■ Dhtp 333 Dhtm 498: vaha; pāpuṇane

Vahana

(adj. nt.) 1. carrying Vv-a 316; Dhp-a iii.472 (dhura˚).

2. a current Ja iv.260.

fr. vah

Vahanaka

(adj.) (-˚) carrying, bearing Ja ii.97 (dhura˚).

vahana + ka

(indecl.) part. of disjunction: “or”; always enclitic Kp viii. (itthiyā purisassa vā; mātari pitari vā pi). Usually repeated vā-vā (is it so-) or, either-or, e.g. Snp 1024 (Brahmā vā Indo vā pi); Dhp 1 (bhāsati vā karoti vā); Pv-a 74 (putto vā dhītā vā natthi?) ■ with negation in second place: whether-or not, or not, e.g. hoti no vā is there or is there not DN i.61; taṃ patthehi mā vā Vv-a 226 ■ Combined with other emphatic particles (na) vā pana not even Pv ii.69 (manussena amanussena vā pana); vā pi or even Snp 382 (ye vā pi ca); Pv ii.614 (isayo pi ye santā etc.); iti vā Nd ii.420; athaDhp 83 (sukhena atha vā dukhena); uda… vā Snp 232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā) ■ In verse vā is sometimes shortened to va, e.g. devo va Brahmā vā Snp 1024: see va4.

Ved. vā, Av. vā, Gr. η ̓́, Lat ■ ve

Vāk

(˚-) speech, voice, talk; only in cpd. ˚karaṇa talk, speaking conversation, as kālyāṇa-vāk-karaṇa good speech AN ii.97; AN iii.195, AN iii.261; AN iv.296 sq.; 328; v.155; abstr ˚ta AN i.38. Cp. vākya.

Vedic vāc, for which the usual P. form is vācā

Vāka

(nt.) the bark of a tree DN i.167; Vin iii.34; Ja i.304; Ja ii.141; Vism 249 = Vb-a 232 (akka˚ & makaci˚); Mil 128avāka without bark Ja iii.522.

-cīra (= cīvara) a bark garment worn by an ascetic Vin iii.34; AN i.240, AN i.295; Ja i.8, Ja i.304; Ja v.132; Pp 55 -maya made of bark Vin ii.130. Vakara = vagula

late Sk. valka, cp. P. vakka

Vākarā = vāgulā

net, snare MN i.153 (daṇḍa˚, Dvandva); ii.65 ■ As vākara at Ja iii.541; as vākura at Thag 774.

Vākya

(nt.) saying, speech, sentence, usually found in poetry only, e.g. DN ii.166 (suṇantu bhonto mama eka-vākyaṃ); AN ii.34 (sutvā arahato vākyaṃ); iii.40 (katvāna vākyaṃ Asitassa tādino); Snp 1102 (= vacana Nd ii.559); Ja iv.5 Ja v.78; Ap 25; Kp-a 166 (˚opādāna resumption of the sentence); Dhs-a 324 (˚bheda “significant sentence trsln).

fr. vac: see vāk & vācā; Vedic vākya

Vāgamā

at Mvu 19, Mvu 28 (tadahe v. rājā) is to be read (tadah’ ev) āgamā, i.e. came on the same day. The passage is corrupt: see trsln p. 130. Vagura & a

Vāgura & ˚ā

(f.) a net; as ˚a Ja vi.170 Kp-a 47 (sūkara˚); Thag-a 78; as ˚ā Ja vi.582. Another P. form is vākarā.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vāgurā; to Idg. *ṷeg to weave, as in Lat. velum sail, Ags. wecca = E wick; Ohg. waba = Ger. wabe

Vācaka

(adj.) reciting, speaking, expressing Snp-a 164 (lekha˚); sotthi˚; an utterer of blessings, a herald Mil 359 ■ f. ˚ikā speech Sdhp 55.

fr. vācā

Vācanaka

(nt.) talk, recitation, disputation; invitation (?), in brāhmaṇa˚; Ja i.318 (karoti); iii.171 iv.391 (karoti); regarded as a kind of festival. At Ja iii.238 vācanaka is used by itself (two brahmins receiving it). It refers to the treating of brāhmaṇas (br. teachers) on special occasions (on behalf of their pupils: a sort of farewell-dinner?) ■ It is not quite sure how we have to interpret vācanaka. Under brāhmaṇa (cpds.) we have trsld it as “elocution show (cp. our “speech day”). The E. trsln gives “brahmin feast”; Prof. Dutoit “Brahmanen-backwerk” (i.e. special cakes for br.). vācana may be a distortion of vājana, although the latter is never found as v.l. It is at all events a singular expression. BR give vācanaka as α ̔́πας λεγομένον in meaning of “sweetmeat,” with the only ref. Hārāvalī 152 (Calc. ed.), where it is expld as “prahelaka” (see P. paheṇaka ). On the subject see also Fick, Soc. Glied. 137, 205.

fr. vāceti

Vācanā

(f.) recitation, reading; ˚magga way of recitation, help for reading, division of text (into chapters or paragraphs) Tikp 239; Kp-a 12, Kp-a 14, Kp-a 24.

fr. vāceti

Vācapeyya

(1) amiable speech (vācā + peyya = piya) Ja vi.575 (= piyavacana C.) ■ (2) spelling for vājapeyya (q.v.).

Vācasika

(adj.) connected with speech, verbal (contrasted with kāyika & cetasika; ) Vin iv.2; Pp 21; Mil 91; Vism 18; Dhs-a 324 ■ As nt. noun at Mil 352 in meaning “behaviour in speech.”

fr. vācā

Vācā

(f.) word, saying, speech; also as adj. (-˚) vaca speaking, of such a speech (e.g. duṭṭha˚ Pv i.32, so to be read for dukkha˚) ■ DN iii.69 sq., 96 sq., 171 sq. SN iv.132 (in triad kāyena vācāya manasā: see kāya iii. and mano ii.3); Snp 232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā) 397, 451 sq., 660, 973, 1061 (= vacana Nd ii.560); Nd i.504; Dhs-a 324 (vuccatī ti vācā) ■ In sequence vācā girā byappatha vacībheda vācasikā viññatti, as a defn of speech Vin iv.2, expld at Dhs-a 324: see byappatha- vācaṃ bhindati: (1) to modify the speech or expression Snp-a 216 (cp. vākya-bheda Dhs-a 324) ■ (2) to use a word, so say something Vin i.157; MN i.207 (Neumann “das Schweigen brechen”); Mil 231 (i.e. to break silence? So Rh. D. trsln). Cp. the English expression “to break the news.”- vācā is mostly applied with some moral characterization, as the foll., frequently found: atthasaṃhitā AN iii.244; kalyāṇa˚; AN iii.195, AN iii.261 AN iv.296; AN v.155; pisuṇā & pharusā AN i.128, AN i.174, AN i.268 sq. AN iii.433; AN iv.247 sq.; DN-a i.74, DN-a i.75; Nd i.220, and passim rakkhita˚; SN iv.112; vikiṇṇa˚; SN i.61, SN i.204; AN i.70 AN iii.199, AN iii.391 sq.; sacca˚; AN ii.141, AN ii.228; saṇhā AN ii.141 AN ii.228; AN iii.244; AN iv.172; see also vacī-sucarita; sammā˚ Vb 105, Vb 106, Vb 235; Vb-a 119; see also magga; hīnā etc. SN ii.54.

-ānurakkhin guarding one’s speech Dhp 281 (cp vācāya saṃvara Dhp-a iv.86). -ābhilāpa “speechjabbering,” forbidden talk Snp 49 (i.e. the 32 tiracchānakathā Nd ii.561). -uggata with well intoned speech Mil 10. -yata restrained in speech Snp 850 (= yatta gutta rakkhita Nd i.221). -vikkhepa confusion of speech equivocation DN i.24 sq.; DN-a i.115.

vac, vakti & vivakti; cp. vacaḥ (P. vaco); Vedic vāk (vāc˚) voice, word, vākya; Av. vacah & vaxs word Gr. ε ̓́πος word, ο ̓́ψ voice, Lat. vox = voice, voco to call Ohg. gi-wahan to mention etc. The P. form vācā is a remodelling of the nom. vāc after the oblique cases, thus transforming it from the cons. decl. to a vowel (˚ā decl. Of the old inflexion we only find the instr. vācā Snp 130, Snp 232. The compn forms are both vācā˚; and vacī˚;

Vācetar

one who teaches or instructs DN i.123.

n. ag. fr. vāceti

Vāceti

to make speak or recite, to teach: see vatti ■ pp. vācita.

Caus. of vac

Vāja

vigeo to be strong [“vigour”]; Av. vaƶra; Oicel wakr = Ags. wacor = Ger. wacker; E. wake, etc.] 1 strength, a strength-giving drink, Soma Snp-a 322. 2. the feather of an arrow Ja iv.260; Ja v.130.

cp. Vedic vāja strength; Idg. *ṷeġ, cp. vājeti, vajra (P. vajira); Lat. vegeo to be alert [“vegetation”

Vājapeyya

the vājapeya sacrifice, a soma offering. Spelling often vāca˚; (mostly as v.l.); see S i.76; AN ii.42; AN iv.151; Snp 303; Iti 21; Mil 219; Ja iii.518. Cp. peyya2.

cp. Vedic vājapeya; see Macdonell, Vedic Mythology pp. 131 sq., 155, quoting Weber, Vājapeya; Banerjea, Public Administration etc. 92

Vājita

(adj.) feathered (of an arrow) MN i.429.

pp. of vājeti: see vāja

Vājin

(adj.-n.) possessed of strength or swiftness; a horse, stallion Dāvs i.31; Dāvs v.35 (sita˚), 53 (sasi-paṇḍara˚) Vv-a 278.

fr. vāja

Vāṭa

enclosure, enclosed place Vin ii.154. See also yañña˚.

cp. Class. Sk. vāṭa; on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. vallus

Vāṭaka

(-˚) enclosure, circle, ring; in gala˚; the throat circle, i.e. the bottom of the throat Vism 258; Dhs-a 316; Dhp-a i.394; caṇḍāla˚; circle of Caṇḍālas Ja vi.156; brāhmaṇa˚; of Brahmins Dhp-a iv.177.

fr. vāṭa

Vāṇija

a merchant, trader Vin iii.6 (assa˚; ) Snp 614, Snp 651, Snp 1014; Ja v.156 (so read for va˚); Pv i.106 Dāvs i.58; Kp-a 224; Snp-a 251; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 48, Pv-a 100, Pv-a 191 Pv-a 215, Pv-a 271. On similes with v. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 134. Vanijaka = vanija

fr. vaṇij (vaṇik): see vaṇijjā; lit. son of a merchant; Vedic vāṇija

Vāṇijaka = vāṇijā

S ii.215 (sūci˚); Ja iii.540.

Vāṇijjā

(f.) trade, trading Vin iv.6 (as one of the exalted professions); Pv-a 111, Pv-a 201 Pv-a 273, Pv-a 277.

fr. vāṇija, cp. vaṇijjā

Vāta

wind. There exists a common distinction of winds into 2 groups: “internal and “external” winds, or the ajjhattikā vāyo-dhātu (wind category), and the bāhirā. They are discussed at Vb 84, quoted at MA 30, 31, and expld in detail at Vb-a 70 sq.; Vism 350. The bāhirā also at Nd ii.562 and in poetical form at SN iv.218 ■ The internal winds (see below 2) comprise the foll.: uddhangamā vātā adhogamā, kucchisayā, koṭṭhāsasayā, angam-ang’ ânusārino, satthakā, khurakā, uppalakā, assāso, passāso i.e. all kinds of winds (air) or drawing pains (rheumatic?) in the body, from hiccup, stitch and stomach-ache up to breathing. Their complement are the external winds (see below 1), viz. puratthimā vātā pacchimā, uttarā, dakkhiṇā (from the 4 quarters of the sky), sarajā arajā, sītā uṇhā, parittā adhimattā, kāḷā verambha˚, pakkha˚, supaṇṇa˚, tālavanta˚, vidhūpana ˚ These are characterized according to direction dust, temperature, force, height & other causes (like fanning etc.).

1. wind (of the air) SN iv.218 (vātā ākāse vāyanti); Snp 71, Snp 348, Snp 591 (vāto tūlaṃ va dhaṃsaye), 622, 1074; Ja i.72; Pp 32; Vism 31. adhimatta v. SN iv.56; mahā˚; SN ii.88; AN i.136, AN i.205; AN ii.199; AN iv.312 veramba˚; (winds blowing in high regions: upari ākāse SN ii.231) AN i.137; Thag 598; Ja vi.326.

2. “winds” of the body, i.e. pains caused by (bad) circulation, sometimes simply (uncontrolled) movements in the body, sometimes rheumatic pains, or sharp & dragging pains in var. parts of the body Nett. 74. Also applied to certain; humours, supposed to be caused by derangements of the “winds of the body (cp. Gr. χυμός; or E. slang “get the wind up”), whereas normal “winds” condition normal health: Pv ii.61 (tassa vātā balīyanti: bad winds become strong, i.e. he is losing his senses, cp. Pv-a 94: ummāda-vātā) ■ aṅga˚; pain in the limbs (or joints) rheumatism Vin i.205; udara˚; belly ache Ja i.393, Ja i.433; Dhp-a iv.129; kammaja˚; birth-pains Vism 500; kucchi˚ pains in the abdomen (stomach) Vb-a 5; piṭṭhi˚; pains in the back ibid.

3. (fig.) atmosphere, condition, state or as pp. (of vāyati) scented (with), full of, pervaded (by), at Vin i.39 (vijana˚; pervaded by loneliness, having an atmosphere of loneliness; Kern. Toev. s. v. vāta wrongly “troop, crowd.” The same passage occurs at DN iii.38, where Rh. D., Dial. iii.35, trsls “where the breezes from the pastures blow”; with expln vijana vṛjana [see vajati], hardly justified. In same connection at AN iv.88); Mil 19 (isi˚-parivāta scented with an atmosphere of Sages; Rh. D. differently: “bringing down the breezes from the heights where the Sages dwell”; forced) ■ On vāta in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 135.

-ātapa (Dvandva) wind and heat. In this phrase Bdhgh. takes vāta as wind (above 1) at Vism 31 (saraja & araja v.), but as (bodily); pain (above 2) at Vb-a 5 See DN iii.353; SN ii.88; SN iii.54; SN v.379; AN i.204; AN ii.117 AN ii.143, AN ii.199; AN iii.394 sq., 404; v.15, 127; Snp 52; Ja i.93; Mil 259, Mil 314, Mil 416; Dhp-a iii.112. -ābādha “wind disease,” internal pains (not rheumatism) Vin i.205; Mil 134; Vism 41. -āyana air hole, window Mvu 5 Mvu 37; Dāva v.57. -āhata struck by the wind Vism 63; Dhp-a iii.328. -erita moved by the wind (of trees SN v.123; AN iii.232; Vv-a 175. -kkhandha “wind bulk,” mass of wind, region of the wind Ja vi.326 -ghāta (“wind-struck”) the tree Cassia (or Cathartocarpus) fistula, a syName of uddāla(ka) Ja iv.298; Vv-a 197 also as ˚ka at Ja v.199, Ja v.407; Vv-a 43. -java swiftness of the wind Ja vi.274. -dhuta shaken by the wind, swaying in the w. Vv 385, cp. Vv-a 174. -passa the wind side Dhp-a ii.17. -pāna lattice, window Vin i.209; Vin ii.148 Vin ii.211; AN i.101, AN i.137; AN iv.231; Ja ii.325; Ja v.214; Ja vi.349 (read vātapān˚; for dvārapān˚); Kp-a 54; Dhp-a i.211, Dhp-a i.370; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 216, Pv-a 279. -bhakkha living on air Dhp-a ii.57. -maṇḍala a whirlwind, gust of wind, storm tornado [cp. BSk. vāyu-maṇḍala at Avs i.256 with note] Ja i.72; Snp-a 224. -maṇḍalikā id. Vin ii.113 iv. 345; Ja iv.430. -yoga direction of the wind Ja ii.11 -roga “wind disease,” upset of the body, disturbance of the intestines, colic Snp-a 69; Vv-a 185. -vassā (pl. wind and rain Pv-a 55. -vuṭṭhi id. Snp-a 34. -vega force of the wind Snp 1074; Pv-a 47. -sakuṇa a certain kind of bird (“wind-bird”) Nd i.87, where Kp-a 118 reads bhāsa˚.

Vedic vāta, of ; cp. Sk. vāti & vāyati to blow, vāyu wind; Lat. ventus, Goth. winds = wind; Ohg wājan to blow, Oir. feth air; Gr. αἤμι to blow, ἀήτης wind, Lith. áudra storm etc.

Vātaka

(adj.) (-˚) belonging to or connected with the winds (of the body) in ahi-vātaka-roga a cert (intestinal) disease (lit. “snake-pain”), pestilence plague; dysentery (caused by a famine and attacking men and beasts alike) Dhp-a i.169, Dhp-a i.187, Dhp-a i.231; Dhp-a iii.437.

fr. vāta 2

Vāti

see vāyati (in meaning “weave,” as well as “blow”).

Vātika

(adj.) connected with the winds (humours) of the body having bad circulation, suffering from internal trouble rheumatic (?) Mil 135, Mil 298.

fr. vāta 2, cp. *Sk. vātakin Halāyudha ii.451

Vātiṅgaṇa

the egg plant, Solanum melongena Ja v.131; Dhs-a 320.

cp. *Sk. vātingaṇa

Vāda

1. speaking, speech, talk, nearly always-˚, e.g. iti˚; hearsay, general talk MN i.133; SN v.73; AN ii.26; kumāraka˚; child-talk or childish talk i.e. in the manner of talking to a child SN ii.218 sq. cori˚; deceitful talk Pv-a 89 (so read with v.l. for T bheri˚); dhammika˚; righteous speech AN v.230; musā˚ telling lies, false speech AN i.129; AN ii.141; AN iv.401; Pv-a 15 See under musā ■ adj. (-˚) speaking up for, proclaiming, advertising DN i.174 (sīla˚, paññā˚ etc.); Snp 913 (nivissa˚ dogmatist); AN i.287 (kamma˚, kiriya˚, viriya˚)- vādaṃ bhindati to refute a speech, to make a view discrepant (cp. bhinna-vāda under 4!) Snp-a 45 (Māravādaṃ bh.).

2. what is said, reputation, attribute characteristic Snp 859 (but Snp-a 550 = nindā-vacana) Ja i.2 (jāti˚ genealogy, cp. DN i.137). See also cpd. ˚patha

3. discussion, disputation, argument, controversy dispute Snp 390, Snp 827 (also as adj. hīna˚); Dhp-a iii.390; Vin iv.1; Mvu 4, Mvu 42 (sutvā ubhinnaṃ vādaṃ).

4 doctrine, theory put forth, creed, belief, school, sect Snp-a 539 sq.; in cpds.: ācariya˚; traditional teaching Mil 148; also “heterodoxy” Mhbv 96, cp. Dpvs v.30 uccheda˚; annihilistic doctrine Nd i.282: see under uccheda; thera˚; the tradition of the Theras, i.e. the orthodox doctrine or word of Gotama Buddha Mvu 5, Mvu 2; Mvu 33, Mvu 97 sq.; Dpvs v.10, 14 (theravādo aggavādo ti vuccati), 51 (17 heretical sects, one orthodox, altogether 18 schools); dhuta˚; (adj.) expounding punctiliousness Vism 81 (= aññe dhutangena ovadati anusāsati). See under dhuta; bhinna˚; heretical sect (lit. discrepant talk or view) Dpvs v.39, 51 (opp. abhinnaka vāda) sassata˚; an eternalist Pts i.155.

-ānuvāda the trsln of this phrase (used as adj.) at SN iii.6 (see K.S. iii.7) is “one who is of his way of thinking.” all kinds of sectarian doctrines or doctrinal theses DN i.161; DN iii.115; SN iii.6; SN iv.51, SN iv.340, SN iv.381; SN v.7; AN iii.4; Ne 52. -kāma desirous of disputation Snp 825 -khitta upset in disputation, thrown out of his belief Vin iv.1 = Dhp-a iii.390. -patha “way of speech,” i.e. signs of recognition, attribute, definition Snp 1076 (expld dogmatically at Nd ii.563); AN ii.9. -sattha the science of disputation, true doctrine Snp-a 540. -sīla having the habit of, or used, to disputes Snp 381.

fr. vad: see vadati; Vedic vāda (not in RV!), in meaning of “theory, disputation” only in Class. Sk. The relation of roots vac: vad is like E. speak: say but vāda as t. t. has developed quite distinctly the specified meaning of an emphatic or formulated speech assertion or doctrine

Vādaka

(adj. n.) doctrinal, sectarian, heretical; vagga˚; (either vagga1 or vagga2) professing somebody’s party, sectarian, schismatic Vin iii.175 (anu-vattaka + ) vādaka-sammuti doctrinal (sectarian) statement AN iv.347.

fr. vāda

Vādana

(nt.) playing on a musical instrument, music Vv-a 276.

fr. vādeti

Vādika1

(adj.) (-˚) speaking, talking (of) Mvu 5, Mvu 60 (pāra˚ speaking of the farther shore, i.e. wishing him across the sea).

fr. vāda

Vādika2

a species of bird Ja vi.538 (v.l. vāj˚).

?

Vādita

(nt.) (instrumental) music DN i.6; DN iii.183; AN i.212; AN ii.209; Dhp-a iv.75; DN-a i.77.

pp. of vādeti

Vāditar

a speaker, one who professes or has a doctrine DN iii.232; AN ii.246; AN iv.307.

n. ag. fr. vādeti

Vādin

(adj.) (-˚) speaking (of), saying, asserting, talking; professing, holding a view or doctrine; arguing. Abs. only at AN ii.138 (cattāro vādī four kinds of disputants); Snp 382 (ye vā pi c’aññe vādino professing their view). Otherwise-˚, e.g. in agga˚; “teacher of things supreme” Thag 1142; uccheda˚; professing the doctrine of annihilation Ne 111 (see uccheda); kāla˚; bhūta˚ attha˚; etc. speaking in time, the truth & good etc. DN i.4, DN i.165; AN i.202; V. 205, 265, 328; caṇḍāla˚ uttering the word C. Mvu 5, Mvu 60; tathā˚; speaking thus consistent or true speaker DN iii.135; Snp 430; dhamma˚ professing the true doctrine SN iii.138; in combn with vinaya-vādin as much as “orthodox” Vin iii.175 mahā˚; a great doctrinaire or scholar Snp-a 540; yatha˚; cp tathā˚-; sacca˚; speaking the truth AN ii.212; the Buddha so-called Th ii.252 f.; vaṇṇa˚; singing the praises (of Vin ii.197.

fr. vāda

Vāna1

(nt.) sewing, stuffing (of a couch) DN-a i.86; Dhp-a i.234 (mañca˚).

fr. 2: see vāyati1

Vāna2

(nt.) lit. “jungle” (cp. vana1 etym.), fig. desire, lust (= taṇhā craving) Dhs-a 409 Kp-a 151, Kp-a 152.

fr. vana, both in meaning 1 & 2 but lit. meaning overshadowed by fig.

Vānaya

in combn suvānaya (SN i.124, SN i.238) is to be separated su-v-ānaya (see ānaya).

Vānara

monkey, lit. “forester” Thag 399 = Dhp 334; Thag 454; Ja ii.78 (Senaka), 199 sq. (Nandiya) iii.429; iv.308; v.445; Mil 201; Dhp-a ii.22.

-inda monkey king Ja i.279; Ja ii.159.

fr. vana

Vāpi

(f.) a pond; ˚jala water from a pond Mvu 25, Mvu 66.

cp. Epic & Classic Sk. vāpī

Vāpita1

sown Ja i.6 (+ ropita, of dhañña).

pp. of vāpeti

Vapita2

mown Dhs-a 238.

pp. of vāpeti

Vāpeti

to cause to sow [cp. Divy 213 vāpayituṃ] or to mow ■ pp. vāpita. *Vabhi

Caus. fr. vap, representing vapati1 as well as vapati2

*Vābhi

appears in P. as nābhi in uṇṇanābhi (q.v.).

fr. to weave

Vāma

(adj.) 1. left, the left side (always opposed to dakkhiṇa) Ja iv.407 (˚akkhi); Pv iv.78 Mil 295 (˚gāhin left-handed); Pv-a 178 (˚passa left side). As “northern” at Ja v.416. vāmaṃ karoti to upset Ja iv.101 ■ instr. vāmena on the left Snp p.80. abl. vāmato from or on the left Ja iii.340; Pv ii.320 (as much as “reverse”; Pv-a 87 = vilomato).

2. beautiful; only in cpd. vām-ūru having beautiful thighs DN ii.266; Ja ii.443. So read at both places for vāmuru.

Vedic vāma

Vāmana

(adj.) dwarfish; m. dwarf Vin i.91; DN-a i.148.

fr. vāma1, cp. Ger. linkisch = uncouth

Vāmanaka

(adj.-n.) dwarfish, crippled Ja ii.226; Ja iv.137; Ja v.424, Ja v.427 ■ f. ˚ikā Name of certain elephants MN i.178.

fr. vāmana

Vāya

weaving Pv-a 112 (tunna˚). See tanta˚.

fr. , vāyati1

Vāyati1

to weave, only in pp. vāyita ■ Pass. viyyati Vin iii.259. pp. also vīta ■ Caus. II. vāyāpeti to cause to be woven Vin iii.259 (= vināpeti); Vv-a 181-See also vināti.

Vedic vayati, , cp. Sk. veman loom, vāṭikā band, Gr. ι ̓́τυς willow, Ohg. wīda id.; Lat. vieo to bind or plait

Vāyati2

1. to blow (only as vāyati) Vin i.48; DN ii.107 (mahāvātā vāyanti); SN iv.218 (vātā ākāse v.); Ja i.18; Ja vi.530 Mvu 12, Mvu 12 ■ aor. vāyi SN iv.290; Ja i.51. Cp. abhi˚ upa˚, pa˚.

2. to breathe forth, to emit an odour, to smell Pv i.61; Pv-a 14; as vāti (2nd sg. vāsi) at Ja ii.11 (= vāyasi C.) ■ pp. vāta only as noun “wind” (q.v.).

Vedic vāti & vāyati. See etym. under vāta

Vāyana

(nt.) blowing Vb-a 71 (upari˚vāta).

fr. , vāyati2

Vāyamati

to struggle, strive, endeavour; to exert oneself SN iv.308; SN v.398; AN iv.462 sq. (chandaṃ janeti v. viriyaṃ ārabhati cittaṃ paggaṇhāti); Pv iv.52 Vb 208 sq.; Pp 51; Vism 2; Dhp-a iii.336; Dhp-a iv.137; Pv-a 185.

vi + ā + yam

Vāyasa

a crow DN i.9 (˚vijjā: see DA i.93); SN i.124; Snp 447, Snp 675; Ja i.500; Ja ii.440; Mil 373; Dhp-a iii.206; Vv-a 27.

cp. Vedic vāyasa a large bird, Epic Sk. vāyasa crow

Vāyāma

striving, effort, exertion, endeavour SN ii.168; SN iv.197; SN v.440; AN i.174 (chando + ) 219; ii.93; iii.307; iv.320; v.93 sq.; Ja i.72; Vb 123 Vb 211, Vb 235; Vb-a 91; Dhp-a iv.109; Pv-a 259. On vāyāma as a constituent of the “Path” (sammā˚) see magga 2.a ■ vāyāmaṃ karoti to exert oneself Dhp-a iv.26; Pv-a 259.

fr. vi + ā + yam

Vāyita

woven MN iii.253 (sāma˚), where Mil 240 in id. p. reads sayaṃ˚ Vin iii.259. Cp. vīta.

pp. of vāyati1, cp. Divy 276 vāyita

Vāyin

(adj.) blowing (forth), emitting an odour, smelling Pv-a 87.

fr. vāyati2

Vāyima

(adj.) weaving, woven; ; not woven Vin iii.224 (of a rug or cover).

fr. : vāyati1

Vāyu

wind Mil 385; Pv-a 156. See next.

Vedic vāya, fr. : vāyati2

Vāyo

(nt.) wind DN iii.268 (˚kasiṇa) MN i.1, MN i.424 = AN iv.375; AN v.7, AN v.318, AN v.353 sq. (˚saññā) SN iii.207; Vism 172 (˚kasiṇa), 350 (def.). On vāyo as t. t. for mobility, mobile principle (one of the 4 elements) see Cpd. 3, 270; Dhs trsln § 962.

-dhātu the wind element, wind as one of the four great elements, wind as a general principle (consisting of var. kinds: see enumd under vāta) Vb 84; Vism 363; Ne 74; Vb-a 55; Vv-a 15; DN-a i.194.

for vāyu, in analogy to āpo & tejo;, with which frequently enumerated

Vāra

1. turn, occasion, time, opportunity Ja i.58 (utu-vārena utuvārena according to the turn of the seasons), 150 vi.294; Vism 431 (santati˚ interval); DN-a i.36; Dhp-a i.47 (dve vāre twice); Dhs-a 215; Vv-a 47 (tatiyavāraṃ for the 3rd & last time); Pv-a 109, Pv-a 135.

2. In pada˚; “track-occasion,” i.e. foot-track, walk(ing) step Ja i.62, Ja i.213 (˚vārena) by walking (here spelt pāda˚; ) 506 (pādavāre pādavāre at every step).

3. In udaka˚ v. stands for vāraka (i.e. bucket), the phrase udakavāraṃ gacchati means “to go for water,” to fetch water (in a bucket) Ja iv.492; Dhp-a i.49. Dutoit (J. trsln iv.594) trsls “Wunsch nach Wasser.”

4. bhāṇa˚ “turn for recitation,” i.e. a portion for recital, a chapter Snp-a 194. See bhāṇa.

fr. vṛ; in meaning “turn,” cp. vuṇāti

Vāraka

a pot, jar Vin ii.122 (three kinds: loha˚, dāru˚ and cammakhaṇḍa˚); Ja i.349 Ja ii.70; Ja iii.52 (dadhi˚); Mil 260; Dhs-a 377 (phānita˚).

cp. Sk. vāra & vāraka

Vāraṇa1

(nt.) warding off, obstruction, resistance Vb-a 194, Vb-a 195 (= nivāraṇa) ■ ātapa˚; sunshade Dāvs i.28; Dāvs v.35.

fr. vṛ; to obstruct

Vāraṇa2

1. elephant Ja i.358; Ja iv.137; Ja v.50, Ja v.416; DN-a i.275; Dhp-a i.389 (˚līḷhā elephant’s grace); Vv-a 36, Vv-a 257.

2. the Hatthilinga bird Thag 1064.

cp. Vedic vāraṇa strong

Vāraṇa3

spirituous liquor Ja v.505.

for vāruṇī?

Vāraṇika

at Thag 1129 read cāraṇika (a little play): see Brethren 419 note.

Vārattika

(adj.) consisting of leather or a strap Ja iii.185.

fr. varatta

Vāri

(nt.) [Vedic vāri, cp. Av. vār rain, vairi-sea; Lat. ūrīna = urine; Ags. waer sea; Oicel. ūr spray, etc. water DN ii.266; MN iii.300; AN iii.26 (in lotus simile) Thag 1273; Snp 353, Snp 591, Snp 625, Snp 811; Vv 7910; Ja iv.19 Nd i.135, Nd i.203 (= udaka); Mil 121; Pv-a 77.

-gocara living or life (lit. feeding) in water Snp 605 -ja “water-born,” i.e. (1) a lotus Snp 845, cp. Nd i.203-(2) a fish Dhp 34 (= maccha Dhp-a i.289); Ja v.464 (= Ānanda-maccha C.), 507. -da “water-giver,” i.e. cloud Dāvs iii.40. -dhara water-holder, water jug Ja v.4. -bindu a drop of water Snp 392. -vāha “watercarrier,” i.e. cloud AN ii.56; AN iii.53; SN v.400; Ja vi.26 Ja vi.543, Ja vi.569; Kp vii.8 ■ vārita,-yuta,-dhuta,-phuṭa (Jain practice) DN i.57; MN i.377.

Vārita

obstructed, hindered Ja iv.264; restrained (sabbavāri) see vāri.

-vata (so read for cārita˚) “having the habit of selfdenial” (trsln) SN i.28 (cp. K.S. i.39 & 320 with note Bdhgh’s expl;n: “kilesānaṃ pana chinnattā vataṃ phala-samādhinā samāhitaṃ”), cp. bhāvanā-balena vāritattā dhammā etc. at Tikp. 14.

pp. of vāreti, Caus. of vṛ1

Vāritta

(nt.) avoidance, abstinence Thag 591; Mil 133 (cārittañ ca vārittañ ca); Vism 11.

fr. vṛ; on the analogy of cāritta. The BSk. is vāritra: Mpt 84

Vāruṇī

(f.) 1. spirituous liquor AN iii.213; Ja i.251 (˚vāṇija spirit merchant), 268; vi.502.

2. an intoxicated woman; term for a female fortune-teller Ja vi.500 (Vāruṇī ‘va pavedhati; C. devatā-bhūta-paviṭṭhā yakkha-dāsī viya gahitā, i.e. possessed), 587 (vāruṇī ‘va pavedhentī; C. yakkh’ āviṭṭhā ikkhaṇikā viya).

cp. Sk. vāruṇī, with only ref. in BR.: Harivaṃśa 8432

Vāreti

1. to prevent obstruct, hinder Pv ii.77 (vārayissaṃ I had the habit of obstructing; = nivāresiṃ Pv-a 102); Vv-a 68; Sdhp 364–⁠2. to ask in marriage Thag-a 266; Pv-a 55 ■ Caus. II vārāpeti to induce somebody to choose a wife Ja iv.289-Note. vāriyamāna (kālakaṇṇi-salākā) at Ja iv.2 read cār˚; (cp. Pv-a 272 vicāresuṃ id.) ■ pp. vārita.

Caus. of vuṇāti, representing vṛ1 (to enclose, obstruct), as well as vṛ1 (to choose)

Vāreyya

(nt.) marriage, wedding Thig 464, Thig 472, Thig 479; Snp-a 19.

grd. of vāreti

Vāla1

1. the hair of the tail horse-hair, tail Vin ii.195 = Ja v.335 (pahaṭṭha-kaṇṇavāla with bristling ears & tail, of an elephant); Ja v.274 (so read for phāla, cp. p. 268, v. 113); Pv-a 285 (˚koṭi so read for bāla˚; ); Sdhp 139 ■ pallankassa vāle bhinditvā destroying the hair (-stuffing) of a couch Vin ii.170 = DN-a i.88; cp. Vin iv.299: pallanko āharimehi vālehi kato ■ On v. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 136–⁠2. a hair-sieve [also Vedic] MN i.229.

-agga the tip of a hair AN iii.403; Mil 250 (˚vedha hitting the tip of a hair, of an archer); DN-a i.66. -aṇḍupaka a cert. material, head dress (?) AN i.209 (so read for vālanduka); Vism 142; Dhs-a 115 (reads leḍḍūpaka)-kambala a blanket made of horse-tails DN i.167; AN i.240 AN i.296; Pp 55. -koṭi the tip of the hair Pv-a 285. -rajju a cord made of hair SN ii.238; AN iv.129; Ja ii.161. -vījanī a fan made of a Yak’s tail, a chowrie DN i.7. -vedhin (an archer) who can hit a hair Ja i.58 (akkhaṇa-vedhin + ) Vism 150; Mvu 23, Mvu 86 (sadda-vedhin vijju-vedhin + ) The abstr. ˚vedhā hitting a hair, at Vism 150 ■ fig. an acute arguer, a hair-splitter; in standing phrase paṇḍitā nipuṇā kata-para-ppavādā vālavedhi-rūpā at DN i.26; MN i.176; MN ii.122; see expln at DN-a i.117.

Vedic vāla; connected with Lat. adūlāre (ad + ūlāre) to flatter (lit. wag the tail, like a dog), cp. E adulation; Lith. valaī horse hair

Vāla2

(adj.) malicious, troublesome, difficult Vin ii.299 (adhikaraṇa).

cp. Sk. vyāla

Vāla3

(nt.) water; only in cpd. ˚ja a fish (cp. vārija).

= vāri, cp. late Sk. vāla

Vālatta

(nt.) trouble, difficulty Vin ii.86 (in same context as vāla2); AN i.54.

abstr. fr. vāla2

Vāladhi

a tail (usually of a large animal) Thag 695; Ja i.63, Ja i.149; Ja vi.302; Pv i.83; Mvu 10, Mvu 59; Vv-a 252, Sdhp 621; Vism 36 quoting Ap.

cp. Epic Sk. vāladhi

Vālikā

(f.) sand (often sprinkled in connection with festivities to make the place look neat AN i.253; Ja i.210; Ja iii.52, Ja iii.407; Ja vi.64; Vism 420; Dhp-a i.3, Dhp-a i.111; Vv-a 160, Vv-a 305; Pv-a 189paritta˚; sand (on the head) as an amulet Ja i.396, Ja i.399 ■ In cpds. usually vālika˚. Cp. vālukā.

-puñja a heap of sand Ja vi.560. -pulina sand bed or bank Ja ii.366; Ja iii.389. -vassa a shower of sand Snp-a 224.

a by-form of vālukā

Vālin

(adj.) having a hairy tail Vv 647, cp. Vv-a 277.

fr. vāla1

Vālukantāra

at Vv-a 332 probably for vāluka-kantāra, i.e. sandy desert. See vaṇṇu.

Vālukā

(f.) sand. In comp;n usually vāluka˚SN iv.376; Vv 391; 441; Ap. 23 Nd ii.p. 72 (Gangāya v.); Ja ii.258; Ja iv.16; Pv ii.121 Mvu 23, Mvu 86; Dhp-a iii.243, Dhp-a iii.445; Vv-a 31, Vv-a 177; Sdhp 244 See also vālika.

cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. vālukā

Vāḷa1

1. a snake Vism 312 (so read for vaḷa ).

2. a beast of prey AN iii.102 (amanussa); Ja i.295; Ja iii.345 (˚macchā predaceous fishes); Mil 23 (˚vana forest of wild beasts).

-miga a beast of prey, predaceous animal, like tiger leopard, etc. Ja vi.569; Dhp-a i.171 (˚ṭṭhāna); iii.348 (˚rocanā); Vism 180, Vism 239.

cp. late Sk. vyāḍa, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 546

Vāḷa2

music (?) Pgdp 83.

misspelt for vāda?

Vāvatteti

(vi + ā + vṛt ] to turn away (trs.), to do away with, remove MN i.12 (aor. vāvattayi saṃyojanaṃ, expld at MA 87 as “parivattayi, nimmūlaṃ akāsi”) = 122 (with v.l. vi˚, see p. 526); AN ii.249 (v.l. vi˚).

Vāsa1

clothing; adj. (-˚) clothed in Ja vi.47 (hema-kappana-vāsase).

vas to clothe, see vasati1

Vāsa2

1. living, sojourn, life Snp 191; Mvu 17, Mvu 2 (anātha-vāsaṃ vasati to lead a helpless life); Pv-a 12 (saraagga-vāsaṃ v. live a life of concord); Snp-a 59 (lokantarika˚). Cp. pari˚, saṃ˚. 2. home, house, habitation Snp 40. vāsaṃ kappeti to live (at a place), to make one’s home Ja i.242; Pv-a 47 Pv-a 100. vāsaṃ upagacchati to enter a habitation (for spending the rainy season) Pv-a 32. In special sense “bed”: see cpd. ˚ūpagata.

2. state, condition (-˚) in ariya˚ holy state AN v.29 sq.; brahmacariya˚; chastity Pv-a 61.

4. (adj.) (-˚) staying, living, abiding, spending time Snp 19 (ekaratti˚), 414 (ettha˚). vassa˚; spending Lent Pv-a 20; vuttha˚; having spent Lent Ja i.183. Cp ante-vāsika-vāsa.

-attha home success, luck in the house, prosperity AN ii.59, AN ii.61 sq. -āgāra bedroom Ja iii.317. -ūpagata (a) having entered one’s hut or abode (for the rainy season) Snp 415 ■ (b) gone to bed Pv ii.128; Pv-a 280 -ghara living room, bedroom Snp-a 28 (= kuṭī). -dhura ordinary duty (lit. burden) or responsibility of living or the elementary stages of saintliness Snp-a 194, Snp-a 195 (contrasted to pariyatta-dhura), 306 (: ganthadhura).

vas to dwell, see vasati2

Vāsa3

perfume Ja i.242; Ja vi.42. Vasaka, vasika

cp. Class. Sk. vāsa, e.g. Mālatīm. 148, 4; fr. : see vāta

Vāsaka, vāsika

(adj.) (-˚) living, dwelling; vāsaka: see saṃ˚. vāsika: gāma˚; villager Mvu 28 Mvu 15; Bārāṇasi˚; living in Benares Ja iii.49. See also ante˚.

fr. vāsa2

Vāsati

to cry (of animals) Ja vi.497.

vāś, see vassati2

Vāsana1

(adj.-n..) clothing, clothed in (-˚) Pv-a 173.

= vasana1

Vāsana2

(adj.-n..) dwelling Dpvs v.18.

= vasana2

Vāsanā

(f.) that which remains in the mind, tendencies of the past, impression usually as pubba˚; former impression (Snp 1009; Mil 10, Mil 263) ■ Cp. Ne 4, Ne 21, Ne 48, Ne 128, Ne 133 sq., 153, 158 sq. 189 sq ■ Cp. BSk. vāsanā, e.g. Mvu i.345.

fr. vasati2 = vāsa2, but by Rh. D., following the P. Com̄. connected with vāseti & vāsa;3

Vāsara

day (opp. night), a day Dāvs i.55; Dāvs v.66.

cp. Vedic vāsara matutinal, vasaḥ early

Vāsi

(f.) 1. a sharp knife, axe, hatchet, adze (often combd with pharasu ) Ja i.32, Ja i.199; Ja ii.274; Ja iii.281 Ja iv.344; Mil 383; Mil 413; Dhp-a i.178 (tikhiṇā vāsiyā khaṇḍâkhaṇḍikaṃ chinditvā: cutting him up piecemeal with a sharp knife); Kp-a 49. -˚jaṭa handle of a mason’s adze Vin iv.168; SN iii.154; AN iv.127.

2. a razor Ja i.65; Ja ii.103; Ja iii.186, Ja iii.377.

cp. Sk. vāśī

Vāsita

1. scented Ja i.65; Ja ii.235 (su˚); iii.299; v.89; Vism 345.

2. [preferably fr. vāseti1 = vasati2 established, made to be or live, preserved Mvu 8, Mvu 2 So also in phrase vāsita-vāsana (adj.) or vāsana-vāsita one who is impressed with (or has retained) a former impression Snp 1009 (pubba˚, = vāsanāya vāsita-citta Snp-a 583); Mil 263 (id.); Vism 185 (+ bhāvita-bhāvana). If taken as vāseti2, then to be trsld as “scented filled, permeated,” but preferably as vāseti1 ■ Cp pari˚.

fr. vāseti2

Vāsitaka

(adj.) scented, perfumed Vin iv.341 (vāsitakena piññākena nhāyeyya: should bathe with perfumed soap) ■ f. vāsitikā (scil. mattikā) scented clay Vin ii.280 (id.).

fr. vāsita

Vāsin1

(adj.) (-˚) clothed in, clad Snp 456 (sanghāṭi˚), 487 (kāsāya˚); Pv iii.16 (sāhunda˚); Ja iii.22 (nantaka˚); iv.380 (rumma˚); f. vāsinī Vin iii.139 (chanda˚, paṭa˚ etc.) = Vv-a 73.

fr. vas1

Vāsin2

(adj.) (-˚) liking, dwelling (in) Snp 682 (Mern-muddha˚), 754 (āruppa˚); Pv-a 1 (Mahāvihāra˚) 22 (Anga-Magadha˚), 47 (Sāvatthi˚), 73 (Bārāṇasi˚)

fr. vas2

Vāseti1

: Caus. of vasati2 (q.v.).

Vāseti2

to perfume, to clean or preserve by means of perfumes, to disinfect (?) Vin i.211 (here in the sense of “preserve, cure,” probably as vāseti of vasati2); ii.120; Ja iv.52 (aṭṭhīni, for the sake of preservation); v.33 (saso avāsesi sake sarīre expld as “sake sarīre attano sarīraṃ dātuṃ avāsesi vāsāpesī ti attho, sarīrañ c’ assa bhakkh’ atthāya adāsi. In this passage vāseti is by Kern, Toev. s. v. taken as Caus. of vas to eat, thus “he made eat, feasted, entertained by or on his own body”), 321 (kusumehi vāsetvā perfume). See also vasati2 (Caus.) ■ pp. vāsita. Caus. II. vāsāpeti Ja v.33.

Denom. fr. vāsa perfume

Vāha

(adj.-n.) 1. carrying, leading; a leader, as in sattha˚; a caravan leader, merchant Ja i.271; Vv 847 8420; Vv-a 337.

2. a cart, vehicle; also cartload Snp p.126 (tila˚ = tila-sakaṭa Snp-a 476); Ja iv.236 (saṭṭhi˚sahassāni 60,000 cartloads); Mil 80 (˚sataṃ).

fr. vah

Vāhaka

that which carries (or causes to carry) away, i.e. a current, torrent, flow; only in combn with udaka˚; a flood of water AN i.178; Vin i.32; Mil 176.

fr. vāheti

Vāhana

1. (adj.) carrying, pulling, drawing Vin ii.122 (udaka˚-rajju); Ja i.136 (kaṭṭha˚ gathering fire-wood); Pv-a 127 (ratha-yuga˚).

2. (nt.) conveyance beast of burden, monture Vin i.277 (˚āgāra stable garage); Snp 442 (Māra sa˚ with his elephant); Pv ii.926 Dhp-a i.192 (hatthi˚, elephant-mount; cp. p. 196 where five. vāhanāni, belonging to King Pajjota, are enumd, viz. kaṇeru, dāsa, dve assā, hatthi) ■ bala˚ army & elephants, i.e. army in general, forces Ja i.262.

fr. vāheti

Vāhanaka

= vāha 1; Vv-a 337.

Vāhasā

(indecl.) owing to, by dint of, on account of, through Vin iv.158; Thag 218, Thag 1127; Mil 379; Vv-a 100.

an instr. of vāha, formed after the manner of balasā, thāmasā, used adverbially

Vāhin

(adj.-n.) carrying, conveying Ja vi.125 (haya˚ running by means of horses, i.e. drawn by horses) also as poetical expression for “horse” Ja vi.252 (= sindhava C.). The reading vāhin at Mvu 22, Mvu 52 is given as v.l. for T. vājin in P.T.S. ed ■ f. vāhinī, an army Ja iii.77 (miga˚; expld as “aneka-sahassa-sankhā migasenā”); vi.581.

fr. vāha

Vāheti

is Caus. of vahati (q.v.).

Vi

(indecl.) 1. (a) inseparable prefix of separation and expansion, in original meaning of “asunder,” semantically closely related to Lat. dis-& Ger ver-. Often as base-prefix in var meanings (see below 1–⁠4), also very frequent as modifying prefix (in comb;n with other primary prefixes like ā ni, pa, paṭi, saṃ), where its prevailing character is one of emphasis ■ (b) The native grammarians define vi- either as “ vividha ” (i.e. our meaning 2): see Bdhgh at Snp-a 136 (viharati = vividhaṃ hitaṃ harati); and Vism 179 vividhaṃ khittaṃ = vikkhittaṃ; see also under viggaṇhati; or “ prātilomya ” (i.e. meaning 3) Nirukta (ed. Roth) i.3; or paraphrase it by su˚; or suṭṭhu (i.e. meaning 4): see under vimāna & vippasanna The latter meaning also in Hemacandra’s Anek’ ārtha-sangraha (ed. Calc.) 7, 15: “śreṣṭhe ’tīte nānārthe” (i.e. Nos. 4 & 2) ■ (c); vi˚; occurs also as distributive (repetitional) prefix in reduplication compounds (here closely resembling paṭi˚ and the negative a˚), like cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa piecemeal, chidda-vicchidda holes upon holes, vaṭṭa-vivaṭṭa, etc ■ Contracted forms are vy˚; (= viy˚ before vowels) and vo˚; (= vi ava); the guṇa & vriddhi form is; ve˚ ■ II. Meanings.

1. denoting expansion, spreading out; fig. variety or detail, to be trsld by expressions with over or about (cp Lat. e-), as: ˚kampati shake about, ˚kāseti open out, ˚kirati scatter about, ˚kūjati sing out (= upa-nadati C), ˚carati move about (= ā-hiṇḍati), ˚churita sprinkled about, ˚jāyati bring forth, ˚tāna “spread out,” ˚tthāra ex-tension, de-tail, ˚dāleti break open, ˚dhammati whirl about, ˚dhāyaka providing, ˚pakirati strew all over, ˚pphāra pervading, ˚pphārika ef-fulgence, ˚bhajati ex-plain, ˚bhatta dis-tributed, ˚bhāga division, distribution ˚ravati shout out, ˚rūhana growing up, ˚rocati shine out, ˚ssajjati give out, ˚ssaṭṭha sent out, ˚ssara shouting out, ˚ssuta far-famed.

2. denoting disturbance separation, mixing up (opp. saṃ˚), as given with “away” or “down,” or the prefixes de- and dis-, e.g. ˚kasita burst asunder, ˚kubbana change, i.e. miracle (meta-morphosis), ˚kkaya sell (“ver-kaufen”), ˚kkhambhati de-stroy, ˚kkhāleti wash off (= ācameti), ˚kkhepa de-rangement, ˚gata dis-appeared (used as defn of vi at Thag-a 80), ˚galita dripping down, ˚ggaha separation ˚cinati dis-criminate, ˚jahati dis-miss, ˚desa foreign country (cp. verajjaka), ˚naṭṭha destroyed, ˚nata bending down, ˚nāsa de-struction, ˚nicchaya dis-crimination ˚nodaka driving out, ˚pāteti to be destroyed, ˚ppalapati to talk confusedly, ˚rājeti discard as rāga, ˚rodha destruction, ˚lumpati break up, ˚vitta separated, ˚vidha mixed, ˚veka separation, ˚vāha carrying away, i.e. wedding.

3. denoting the reverse of the simple verb or loss, difference, opposite, reverse, as expressed by un- or dis-, e.g. ˚asana mis-fortune, ˚kaṭika unclean ˚kappa change round, ˚kāra per-turbation, dis-tortion ˚kāla wrong time, ˚tatha un-truth, ˚dhūma smoke-less, ˚patti corruption, ˚parīta dubious, ˚ppaṭipanna on the wrong track, ˚bhava non-existence (or as 4 “more bhava, i.e. wealth), ˚mati doubt, ˚mānana dis-respect ˚yoga separation, ˚raja fault-less, ˚rata abs-taining ˚rūpa un-sightly, ˚vaṭa unveiled, ˚vaṇṇeti defame ˚vāda dis-pute, ˚sama uneven, ˚ssandati overflow ˚ssarita for-gotten, ˚siṭṭha distinguished, ˚sesa difference distinction.

4. in intensifying sense (developed fr. 1 & 2), mostly with terms expressing; per se one or the other of shades of meanings given under 1

3; to be trsld by “away,” out, all over, “up,” or similarly (completely), e.g. ˚ākula quite confused, ˚katta cut up ˚kopeti shake up, ˚garahati scold intensely, ˚chindati cut off, ˚jita conquered altogether, ˚jjotita resplendent ˚tarati come quite through, ˚niyoga close connection ˚nivatteti turn off completely, ˚pariṇāma intense change ˚ppamutta quite released, ˚ppasanna quite purified ˚pphalita crumpled up, ˚bandhana (close) fetter, ˚ramati cease altogether, ˚sahati have sufficient strength ˚sukkha dried up, ˚suddha very bright, ˚ssamati rest fully (Ger. aus-ruhen), ˚haññati to get slain.

prefix, resting on Idg. *ṷi “two,” as connotation of duality or separation (Ger. “ent-zwei”), which is contained in viṃśati, num. for “twenty” (see vīsati) cp. Sk. viṣu apart, Gr. ι ̓́διος private (lit. separate); also Sk. u-bhau both; and *ṷidh, as in Lat. dīvido = divide A secondary (compar.) formation in Sk. vitara further farther, Goth. wipra against, Ger. wider

Vikaca

(adj.) blossoming DN-a i.40.

Vikaṭa

changed, altered, distorted; disgusting, foul, filthy Pgdp 63 (˚ānana with filthy mouth)-nt. filth, dirt; four mahā-vikaṭāni applied against snake-bite, viz., gūtha, mutta, chārikā, mattikā Vin i.206 ■ Cp. vekaṭika.

-bhojana filthy food DN i.167; MN i.79.

vi + kata, of kṛ;

Vikaṇṇa

(adj.) having deranged or bent corners, frayed Vin i.297; Vin ii.116.

vi + kaṇṇa

Vikaṇṇaka

a kind of arrow (barbed?) Ja ii.227, Ja ii.228.

fr. vikaṇṇa

Vikata

changed, altered Vin i.194 (gihi-vikata changed by the g.)

Vikati

(f.) “what is made of something,” make, i.e. 1. sort, kind Ja i.59 (ābharaṇa˚ kind of ornament) 243 (maccha-maṃsa˚); Mil 403 (bhojana˚ all kinds of material things); Vism 376 (bhājana˚ special bowl) Vb-a 230 (pilandhana˚); Dhp-a ii.10 (khajja˚).

2. product make; vessel: danta˚; “ivory make,” i.e. vessels of ivory MN ii.18; DN i.78; Ja i.320.

3. arrangement get up, assortment; form, shape Ja v.292 (mālā˚ garlandarrangement).

-phala an assortment of fruit Ja v.417.

fr. vi + kṛ;

Vikatika

(f.) a woollen coverlet (embroidered with figures of lions, tigers etc.) DN i.7 (cp. DN-a i.87) AN i.181; Vin i.192; Thag-a 55 (Ap v.10: tūlikā˚; ).

fr. vikati

Vikatta

(adj.) cut open Ja vi.111 (v.l. ˚kanta).

pp. of vi + kantati2

Vikattana

(nt.) cutter, knife Vin iii.89 (tiṇha go˚) MN i.449; Ja vi.441.

fr. vi + kantati2

Vikatthati

to boast, show off SN ii.229; Ja i.454 (= vañcana-vacanaṃ vadati C.) ■ pp. vikatthita.

vi + katthati

Vikatthana

(nt.) boasting Snp-a 549.

fr. vi + katth

Vikatthita

(nt.) boasting Ja i.359.

fr. vikatthati

Vikatthin

(adj.) boasting; only neg. ; not boasting, modest AN v.157; Snp 850; Mil 414.

fr. vi + katth

Vikanta

= vikatta; cut open, cut into pieces Ja ii.420.

Vikantati

to cut Ja v.368 (= chindati C.). - pp. vikatta & vikanta;.

vi + kantati2

Vikantana

(nt.) knife MN i.244. Cp. vikattana.

fr. vikantati

Vikappa

1. thinking over, considering, thought, intention Nd 97, Nd 351.

2. doubtfulness, indecision, alternative, appld to the part. Snp-a 202, Snp-a 266 Kp-a 166; DN-a i.51; Pv-a 18attha˚; consideration or application of meaning, exposition, statement, sentence Ja iii.521; Snp-a 433, Snp-a 591 ■ Cp. nibbikappa.

vi + kappa

Vikappana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) 1. assignment, apportioning Vin iv.60 = Vin iv.123 = Vin iv.283. At Vin iv.122 two ways of assigning a gift are distinguished: sammukhāvikappanā & parammukhā˚. All these passages refer to the cīvara.

2. alternative, indecision, indefiniteness (= vikappa), as t. t. g. applied to part.; ca and e.g. Snp-a 179 (“ca”); Kp-a 166 (“vā”).

fr. vikappeti

Vikappita

prepared, put in order, arranged, made; in combn su˚; well prepared, beautifully set Snp 7; Vv-a 188 (manohara + ) ■ Bdhgh. at Snp-a 21 interprets ˚kappita as chinna “cut,” saying it has that meaning from “kappita-kesa-massu” (with trimmed hair & beard), which he interprets; ad sensum, but not etymologically correctly. Cp. vikappeti 5.

pp. of vikappeti

Vikappin

(adj.) having intentions upon (-˚), designing AN iii.136 (an-issara˚ intentioning unruliness).

fr. vikappa

Vikappiya

(adj.) to be designed or intended Sdhp 358.

grd. of vikappeti

Vikappeti

1. to distinguish, design, intend, to have intentions or preferences, to fix one’s mind on (loc. or acc.) Snp 793 = Snp 802 (= vikappaṃ āpajjati Nd i.97) 918 (id. Nd i.351).

2. to detail, describe, state Kp-a 166; Snp-a 43.

3. to assign, apportion, give Vin i.289 (cīvaraṃ); iv.121 (id.).

4. to arrange, put on, get ready Vin i.297.

5. to change, alter, shape, form Ja v.4 (ambapakkaṃ satthena v.; C. not quite correctly = vicchindati) ■ pp. vikappita.

vi + kappeti

Vikampati

to shake; fig. to be unsettled, to waver, to be in doubt SN iv.71 (cittaṃ na vikampate) Thag 1076 (vidhāsu na v.; trslnBrethren p. 366: “who is not exercised about himself in this way or in that”) Nd i.195 (tīsu vidhāsu, as at Thag 1076; as comment on Snp 843); Ja vi.488 ■ ppr. med. vikampamāna, only neg. ; not hesitating, settled, well balanced, resolved Snp 842; Ja iv.310; Ja v.495 (C. anolīyamāna); vi.175 (C nirāsanka) ■ pp. vikampita.

vi + kamp

Vikampin

(adj.) shaking; only neg. ; not shaking, steadfast, steady, settled Snp 952; Vv 5022.

fr. vikampati

Vikaroti

to alter, change, disturb; aor. vyakāsi Ja ii.166 (= vikāraṃ akāsi parivattayi C.); so read for T. vyākāsi ■ Imper. Pass. 3 sg. vikiriyyatu “let him be disturbed” Ja iii.368 (after Kern, Toev. s. v. One may take it to vikirati, q.v.) ■ pp. vikaṭa & vikata; See also vikubbati, etc.

vi + kṛ;

Vikala

(adj.) defective, in want of, deprived, (being) without Thig 391; Pv iv.1 (bhoga˚); Ja iv.278 Ja vi.232; Mil 106, Mil 307 (udakena); DN-a i.222; Pv-a 4 (hattha˚). Cp. vekalla.

Sk. vikala

Vikalaka

(adj.) being short of, wanting Vin i.285.

vikala + ka

Vikasati1

to open (out), to expand, to blossom fully (of flowers) ■ pp. vikasita. Caus. vikāseti to open Ja vi.364 (hatthaṃ).

vi + kas

Vikasati2

to shine; Caus. vikāseti to illuminate Davs v.47 (mukh’ ambuja-vanāni vikāsayanto).

vi + kāś, cp. okāsa

Vikasita

burst asunder, blossoming, opened (wide), expanded, usually appld to flowers Ja iii.320 (= phālita C.); iv.407; Vv-a 40, Vv-a 206 (of eyes) Snp-a i.39; DN-a i.40.

pp. of vikasati1

Vikāra

1. change, alteration, in mahā˚; great change Vism 366, Vism 367 (of two kinds: anupādiṇṇa upādiṇṇa, or primary & secondary, i.e. the first caused by kappa-vuṭṭhāna, the second by dhātu-kkhobha) Kp-a 107 (vaṇṇa˚).

2. distortion, reversion, contortion, in var. connections, as kucchi˚; stomach-ache Vin i.301; bhamuka˚; frowning Dhp-a iv.90; raukha˚ grimace, contortion of the face, Ja ii.448; Pv-a 123 hattha˚; hand-figuring, signs with the hand, gesture Vin i.157 (+ hattha-vilanghaka) = MN i.207 (reads vilangaka); Vin v.163 (with other similaṛ gestures); Ja iv.491 Ja v.287; Ja vi.400, Ja vi.489 ■ Kern. Toev. s. v. vikāra is hardly correct in translating hattha-vikārena at Vin i.157 by “eigenhandig,” i.e. with his own hand. It has to be combd with hattha-vilanghakena.

3. perturbation disturbance, inconvenience, deformity Vin i.271, Vin i.272 (˚ṃ sallakkheti observe the uneasiness); Mil 224 (tāvataka v. temporary inconvenience), 254 (˚vipphāra disturbing influence); Snp-a 189 (bhūta˚ natural blemish)

4. constitution, property, quality (cp. Cpd. 1572 1681) Vism 449 (rūpa˚ material quality); Vv-a 10 (so correct under maya in P.D. vol. iii. p. 147).

5. deception fraud Pv-a 211 (= nikati) ■ Cp. nibbikāra.

fr. vi + kṛ;

Vikāla

“wrong time,” i.e. not the proper time, which usually means “afternoon” or “evening,” and therefore often “too late.”-Vin iv.274 (= time from sunset to sunrise); Ja v.131 (ajja vikālo to-day it is too late); Vv-a 230 (id.) ■ loc. vikāle (opp. kāle) as adv., meaning: (1) at the wrong time Vin i.200; Snp 386; Pv-a 12 ■ (2) too late Vv 84 (= akāle Vv-a 337); Dhp-a i.356; Dhp-a iv.69 ■ (3) very late (at night Ja v.458.

-bhojana taking a meal at the wrong time, i, e. in the afternoon Vin i.83; DN i.5; AN i.212; AN ii.209; Snp 400; DN-a i.77.

vi + kāla

Vikāsa

opening, expansion Ja vi.497 (vana˚ opening of the forest); Dhtp 265.

vi + kas: see vikasati1

Vikāsika

a linen bandage (Kern: “pluksel”) Vin i.206 (for wound-dressing). May be a dern fr. kāsika, i.e. Benares cloth, the vi˚ denoting as much as “a kind of.”

fr. vi + kṛṣ: see kasati

Vikāsitar

one who plucks or pulls, bender of a bow, archer Ja vi.201.

fr. vi + kṛṣ, kasati

Vikāsin

(adj.) (-˚) illumining, delighting Mvu 18, Mvu 68.

fr. vi + kāś: see vikasati2

Vikāseti

see vikasati.

Vikiṇṇa

scattered about, strewn all over, loose Vin i.209 (undurehi okiṇṇa˚; overrun); Ja v.82.

-kesa with dishevelled hair Ja i.47; Vism 415. -vāca (adj.) of loose talk SN i.61 (= asaññata-vacana K.S. i.320) Pp 35 (same expln PugA 217): Ja v.77 (= patthaṭavacana C.).

pp. of vikirati

Vikitteti

to slander Mil 276 (opp. pakitteti).

vi + kitteti

Vikiraṇa

(nt. & adj.) 1. scattering, dispersing; being scattered or dispersed DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.96) ■ Vb 358 (T. reads vikī˚; v.l. vikāraṇa & vikkir˚) = Pp 23 (which reads nikaraṇā; trsl. “guilefulness”). In this connection Vb-a 493 interprets vikiraṇa (or ˚ā) as “denial, abnegation” (pretext?), by saying “nâhaṃ eva karomī ti pāpānaṃ vikkhipanato vikiraṇā.”-With ref. to Arahantship (the dissolution of the body) at Dhp-a iii.109 in formula bhedana-vikiraṇa-viddhaṃsanadhamma i.e. “of the nature of total destruction. Cp. BSk. formula śatana-patana-vikiraṇa-vidhvaṃsana (-dharmatā) Avs i.96 (where S. Speyer in Index considers vikaraṇa the correct form) = Divy 299 (reading cyavanapatana˚) = Lal. V. 242. See also SN iii.190 (under vikirati).

2. (adj.) scattering, spending, squandering f. ˚ī Sn. 112.

fr. vikirati

Vikirati

to scatter about, sprinkle, spread, mix up (trs. & intrs.) MN i.127; SN iii.190 (in simile of playing children: paṃsv’ āgārakāni hatthehi ca pādehi ca vikiranti [mix up] vidhamanti [fall about] viddhaṃsenti [tumble over] vikīḷanikaṃ karonti, describing the scrambling and crowding about. In quite a diff. interpretation appld to Arahantship: see under vikiraṇa, as also in the same chapter (S iii.190 § 11 sq.) in phrase rūpaṃ vikirati vidhamati etc. where it is meant in trs sense of “destroy”; thus vi˚ in the same verb in meaning (vi˚ 1 & 2); SN iv.41 (kāyo vikiri [came to pieces] seyyathâpi bhusa-muṭṭhi); Ja i.226; Pv ii.38 (vikiri, v.l. for okiri); Mil 101, Mil 237 (lokadhātu vikireyya, would fall to pieces; combd with vidhameyya & viddhaṃseyya; “drop & tumble,” denoting total confusion and destruction Similarly on p. 250 = 337 “vāri pokkhara-patte vikirati vidhamati viddhaṃsati”: the water scatters, drops falls off; appld figuratively to bad qualities at same passage); Snp-a 172 ■ Pass. vikiriyyati & vikirīyati; may be taken either to vikirati or vikaroti (cp. kiriyati) Dhs-a 19 (suttena sangahitāni pupphāni na vikirīyanti na viddhaṃsiyanti: get scattered and fall off); ppr vikirīyamāna Pv-a 271 (with sprawling or confused limbs); imper. vikiriyyatu Ja iii.368 ■ pp. vikiṇṇa.

vi + kirati

Vikīlanika

(adj. & nt.) playing about; in phrase vikīḷanikaṃ karoti (intrs.) to play all over or excitedly (lit. to make play; vi˚ in meaning vi˚ 1) SN iii.190; as trs. to put out of play, to discard (vi˚ 3) ibid (rūpaṃ etc. v. karoti).

fr. vi + kīḷana

Vikujjhita

made angry, angered, annoyed, vexed MN ii.24 (so read for vikujjita).

vi + pp. of kujjheti

Vikuṇita

(adj.) distorted, deformed Vism 346 (˚mukha); Pv-a 123 (id.). Cp. vikūṇa.

vi + kuṇita

Vikuddha

(adj.) free fr. anger Ja v.308.

vi + kuddha

Vikubbati

to change round, transform, do magic Ja iii.114 (= parivatteti); Dpvs i.40 (vikubbeyya); also in phrase iddhi-vikubbati to work transformation by magic (psychic) potency Kv 55 ■ ppr. f. vikubbantī Vv 112 (iddhiṃ working magic = vikubban’ iddhiyo vaḷañjentī Vv-a 58), and vikubbamānā (iddhi˚) Vv 311 ■ pp. *vikubbita miracle: see vikubbana.

vi + kubbati, med. of karoti

Vikubbana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) miraculous transformation, change; assuming a diff. form by supernatural power; miracle Thag 1183; Pts ii.174, Pts ii.210 Dpvs viii.6 (˚esu kovida); Mvu 19, Mvu 19; Mil 343 Vism 309, Vism 316 sq. More specific as iddhi-vikubbana (or ˚ā ), i.e. by psychic powers, e.g. DN ii.213; Vism 373 sq.; or vikubbanā iddhi Vism 378, Vism 406; Vv-a 58; Dhs-a 91 (the var. forms of iddhi). Cp. Kvu trsl. 50 Cpd. 61 ■ The BSk. form is represented by the pp. of vikubbati, i.e. vikurvita, e.g. Avs i.258; Divy 269 etc. Vikulava(ka)

fr. vikubbati

Vikulāva(ka)

(adj.) having no nest, without a nest SN i.224 (ka); Ja i.203.

vi + kulāva

Vikūjati

to sing (like a bird), warble, chirp, coo Pv-a 189 (= upanadati) ■ ppr. med. vikūjamāna Vin iv.15; Ja v.12.

vi + kūjati

Vikūṇa

distortion, grimace (mukha˚) Snp-a 30.;

cp. vikuṇita & vikāra

Vikūla

(adj.) sloping down, low-lying AN i.35 (contrasted with ukkūla). We should expect ni˚; for vi˚; as in BSk. (see ukkūla).

vi + kūla

Vikūlaka

(adj.) contrary, disgusting Thig 467 (= paṭikūla Thag-a 284).

fr. vikūla

Vikesikā

(adj ■ f.) with loose or dishevelled hair Vin i.15.

vi + kesa + ika

Vikoṭṭita

beaten, cut, slain, killed Mil 304 (koṭṭita + ).

vi + koṭṭita

Vikopana

(nt.) upsetting, injuring, doing harm Ja ii.330 = Ja iv.471; Mil 185, Mil 266; Dhs-a 145.

fr. vi + kup

Vikopin

(adj.) shaking, disturbed; neg. ; Ja vi.226.

vi + kup

Vikopeti

1. to shake up Pv-a 253.

2. to upset, spoil, to do harm Vin iii.47; Mil 276 (vikitteti + )

3. to destroy Ja vi.68 (padaṃ a track).

vi + kopeti

Vikkanta

heroic Ja i.119; Ja ii.211; Ja iv.271; Mil 400 (˚cārin, of a lion).

pp. of vi + kram

Vikkandati

to cry out, lament, wail Ja vi.525.

vi + kandati

Vikkama

1. walking about, stepping; in ˚malaka walking-enclosure, “περιπατεϊον“, corridor Ja i.449.

2. strength, heroism Ja ii.211, Ja ii.398; Ja iii.386 (˚porisa).

fr. vi + kram

Vikkamati

to have or show strength, to exert oneself Ja iii.184 (= parakkamati); Mil 400 ■ pp vikkanta.

vi + kamati

Vikkaya

selling, sale AN ii.209; Snp 929 (kaya + ); Ja i.121; Ja ii.200; Ja iv.115 (majja˚); Mil 194 (˚bhaṇḍa goods for sale, merchandise); Pv-a 29, Pv-a 113 (˚bhaṇḍa). Vikkayika & kayika;

vi + kaya

Vikkayika & ˚kāyika

(adj.-n.) 1. a salesman, vendor Dhp-a iv.50 (ā).

2. for sale Ja i.201 (ā); Dhp-a i.269 (a).

fr. vikiṇāti

Vikkiṇāti

to sell Ja i.227, Ja i.377 (ger. vikkiṇitvā); Pv-a 100 (id.), 191 (aor. vikkiṇi) ■ inf. vikketu ṃ Ja iii.283 ■ grd. vikkiṇiya = for sale Dhp-a i.390 (˚bhaṇḍa merchandise).

vi + kiṇāti

Vikkīḷita

(nt.) sporting, amusement, pastime Ne 124 (in appld meaning).

vi + kīḷita

Vikkuthita

(adj.) boiled, ˚duddha boiled milk Kp-a 60 (T. reads vikkuthita-duṭṭha-vaṇṇa, but App. Snp-a Index p. 870: vikkuṭṭhita-duddha˚). The corresp. passage at Vism 260 has duṭṭha-khīra- vaṇṇa which seems faulty.

vi + kuthita

Vikkhaṇḍati

to break (up), destroy, spoil Sdhp 450 (ger. ˚iya) ■ pp. vikkhaṇḍita.

vi + khaṇḍati

Vikkhaṇḍita

broken, ruined, spoilt Sdhp 436.

pp. of vikkhaṇḍati

Vikkhambha

diameter (lit. support) Ja v.268, Ja v.271; Mvu 18, Mvu 27.

vi + khambha 1

Vikkhambhati

(intrs.) to become stiff (with fear), to be scared or frightened Ap. 50.

fr. vi + khambha 2

Vikkhambhana

(nt.) withdrawal of support, stopping (the nīvaraṇas or any evil influences or corruptions: kilesa˚), arresting, paralysing; elimination discarding Pts ii.179; Nd i.6; Nd ii.338, Nd ii.606b Ja iii.15 (kilesa˚ + metta-bhāvana-jhān’ uppatti); iv.17 Vism320; Sdhp 455 ■ Usually in foll. cpds.: ˚pahāna elimination (of character-blemishes) by discarding Ja ii.230; Nd ii.203; Vism 5; Dhs-a 352; Snp-a 19; ˚vimutti emancipation by elimination Ja ii.35; ˚viveka arrest by aloofness Dhs-a 12, Dhs-a 164; Vism 140, Vism 141.

vi + khambha + na

Vikkhambhanatā

(f.) state of having undone or discarded, removal, destruction, paralysis Ne 15, Ne 16.

vikkhambhana + tā

Vikkhambhika

(adj.) leading to arrest (of passions), conducive to discarding (the blemishes of character) Vism 114.

fr. vikkhambheti

Vikkhambhita

arrested, stopped, paralysed, destroyed Pts ii.179; Tikp 155, 320 sq. Dukp 10.

pp. of vikkhambheti

Vikkhambhiya

(adj.) in neg. a˚ not to be obstructed or overcome DN iii.146.

grd. of vikkhambheti

Vikkhambheti

(trs.) to “unprop,” unsettle, discard; to destroy, extirpate, paralyse (cp khambha 2 and chambheti), give up, reject Snp 969 (= abhibhavati etc. Nd i.492); Vism 268; Ja i.303 (jhānabalena kilese v.); Mil 34 (nīvaraṇe); Dhp-a iv.119 (pītiṃ vikkhambhetvā: here in meaning “set up, establish” Or to produce such pīti as to be called pharaṇā pīti, thus vikkhambheti = pharati 2? Or as Denom. fr. vikkhambha “diameter” = to establish etc.?); Vv-a 156 (read ˚etvā.)-pp. vikkhambhita.

vi + khambheti

Vikkhalita

(nt.) stumbling, fault, faux pas AN i.199.

vi + khalita2

Vikkhāyitaka

(adj.-n..) “pertaining (or: of the nature of) to being eaten up, i.e. a (mental) representation obtained by contemplation of a corpse gnawed by animals, one of the asubhakammaṭṭhānas Vism 110 = Mil 332 (˚saññā); Vism 179, Vism 194.

vi + khāyati(= khādita) + ka

Vikkhālita

washed off, cleansed Vin ii.201; Vism 59.

pp. of vikkhāleti

Vikkhāleti

to wash off, to wash one’s face (mukhaṃ) rinse one’s mouth Vin ii.201; SN ii.269; Ja i.266, Ja i.459; Pv-a 75, Pv-a 209, Pv-a 241 (= ācameti) ■ pp vikkhālita

vi + khāḷeti

Vikkhitta

(adj.) 1. upset, perplexed, mentally upset, confused SN ii.122 (˚citta); v.157, 263 sq.; AN iii.174 (˚citta); v.147 (id.); Vism 410 (= uddhacc ânugata) ■ ; undisturbed, composed, collected AN v.149; Iti 94; Pv-a 26.

vi + khitta

Vikkhittaka

(adj.) 1. scattered all over, deranged, dismembered; of a dead body with respect to its limbs (as one of the asubha-kammaṭṭhāna’s: cp vikkhāyika & vicchiddaka) Vism 110 (˚saññā) = Mil 332; Vism 179 (with defn vividhaṃ khittaṃ vikkhittaṃ aññena hatthaṃ aññena pādaṃ aññena sīsan ti evaṃ tato tato khittassa chava-sarīrassa adhivacanaṃ), 194- hata˚; killed & cut up Vism 179.

2.; citta˚; of unbalanced or deranged mind Mil 308.

vi + khitta + ka

Vikkhipana

(nt.) refusal, denial Vb-a 493 (see vikiraṇa 1).

cp. BSk. viksepa refusal Avs i.94

Vikkhipatti

to be disturbed Ja i.400 (gocare, in… ); Mil 337 (cittaṃ) ■ pp. vikkhitta.

Pass. of vikkhipati

Vikkhīṇa

totally destroyed, finished, gone Thig 22.

vi + khīṇa

Vikkhīyati

to go to ruin, to be destroyed, to be lost Ja v.392 (fut. ˚īyissati) ■ pp. vikkhīṇa.

vi + khīyati

Vikkhepa

1. disturbance, derangement Ja vi.139.

2. perplexity, confusion DN i.59vācā˚ equivocation, senseless talk DN i.24.

3. in citta˚ cetaso; v. upset of mind, unbalanced mind, mental derangement: citta˚; SN i.126; Pp 69; cetaso AN iii.448; Dhs 429; Vb 373avikkhepa equanimity, balance DN iii.213; AN i.83; Pts i.94; Dhs 160, Dhs 430; Vb 178 sq. 231 sq., 266 sq., 279 sq., 285 sq.

-paṭibāhana exclusion or warding off of confusion (of mind) or disturbance Vism 244; Vb-a 227.

vi + khepa

Vikkhepika

(adj.), in phrase amarā˚;: see under amarā; another suggestion as to explanation may be: khipa = eel-basket, thus vikhep-ika one who upsets the eel-basket, i.e. causes confusion.

fr. vikkhepa

Vikkheḷikā

(adj ■ f.) having saliva dropping from the mouth (of sleeping women), slobbering Vin i.15.

vi + kheḷa + ikā

Vikkhobhita

thoroughly shaken up or disturbed Mil 377.

pp. of vikkhobheti: see khobha

Vikhādana

(nt.) biting, chewing Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; Dhs-a 330.

vi + khādana

Vigacchati

to depart, disappear; to decrease DN i.138 (bhogakkhandha vigacchissati); Sdhp 523. pp. vigata.

vi + gacchati

Vigata

(˚-) gone away, disappeared, ceased; having lost or foregone (for-gone = vi-gata), deprived of, being without; often to be trsld simply as prep. “without. It nearly always occurs in compn, where it precedes the noun. By itself rare, e.g. Snp 483 (sārambhā yassa vigatā); Vv-a 33 (padumā mā vigatā hotu). Otherwise as follows: ˚āsa Pp 27; ˚āsava Snp-a 51; ˚icchā Dhp 359; ˚khila Snp 19; ˚cāpalla DN i.115; DN-a i.286; ˚chavivaṇṇa Thag-a 80 (= vivaṇṇa); ˚jīvita Pv-a 40; ˚paccaya Vism 541; Tikp 7, 21, 59; ˚paṭighāta Dhp-a iv.176 ˚mada Mvu 34, Mvu 94; ˚raja Snp 517; Ja i.117; ˚valita Pv-a 153. Cp. vīta˚; in similar application and meaning.

pp. of vigacchati, in act. (reflexive) & medpass. function

Vigama

(-˚) going away, disappearance, departing, departure Dāvs v.68 (sabb’ āsava˚); Dhs-a 166; Sdhp 388 (jighacchā˚), 503 (sandeha˚).

fr. vi + gam

Vigayha

see vigāhati.

Vigarahati

to scold (intensely), to abuse Vin ii.161 (dhammiṃ kathaṃ); iii.46; SN i.30 (ariyadhammaṃ); Mil 227.

vi + garahati

Vigaḷati

to drop Mil 250 ■ pp. vigaḷita. Cp. vinigaḷati.

vi + galati

Vigaḷita

dropping, dripping (down) Pv-a 56.

pp. of vigaḷati

Vigāhati

to plunge into, to enter SN i.180 (ger. vigāhiya); Ja v.381 (˚gāhisuṃ, aor.); Mvu 19, Mvu 29 (here as ˚gāhetvā). The ger. is also vigayha at Snp 2, Snp 825; cp Nd i.163 (= ogayha pavisitvā). At Vin ii.106 we should prefer to read viggayha for vigayha.

vi + gāhati

Viggaṇhati

1. to take hold of, to quarrel, to be in disharmony with; only in ger. viggayha disputing quarrelling, fighting Vin ii.106 (read gg for g Bdhgh on p. 315: rubbing against each other); Ud 69; Snp 844, Snp 878; Nd i.285 (= uggahetvā parāmasitvā). 2. to stretch out, disperse, divide, spread; ger. viggayha Vv 501 (hattha-pāde v.; expld as “vividhehi ākārehi gahetvā” Vv-a 209).

vi + gaṇhati

Viggaha

1. dispute, quarrel Ja i.208 (ñātakānaṃ aññamaññaṃ viggaho); Mil 90 often combd with kalaha, e.g. Vin ii.88; AN iv.401 Nd i.302; Mil 383.

2. taking up form (lit. seizing on), “incorporation,” form, body DN ii.210 = DN ii.226 (sovaṇṇo viggaho mānusaṃ viggahaṃ atirocati); Vin i.97 (manussa˚); ii.286 (id.); iv.215 (tiracchānagata-manussa˚), 269 (id.); Ja v.398 = Ja v.405 (= sarīra C); vi.188 (rucira˚); Dāvs i.42 (uju-somma˚).

3. (t.t.g.) resolution of words into their elements, analysis, separation of words Mil 381; Vv-a 226 (pada˚); Snp-a 168 Thag-a 202 (pada˚).

fr. vi + gah: see gaṇhati 3

Viggahita

taken hold of, seized; prejudiced against, seduced by (-), in phrase dhamm’ uddhacca- viggahita-mānasa AN ii.157; Pts ii.101. Cp BSk. vigrāhita, e.g. Avs i.83 = Avs i.308 (Ajātaśatru Devadatta˚); Divy 419, Divy 557, Divy 571; Jtm 143, 146.

pp. of viggaṇhati

Viggāhika

(adj.) of the nature of dispute or quarrel; only in cpd. ˚kathā quarrelsome speech, dispute DN i.8; SN v.419; Snp 930; DN-a i.91.

fr. viggaha

Vighaṭṭita

struck, knocked, beaten Ja v.203 (a˚).

vi + ghaṭṭita

Vighāṭana

(adj.) unfastening, breaking up, overthrowing Thag 419.

fr. vighāṭeti

Vighāṭita

overthrown, destroyed Sdhp 314.

pp. of vighāṭeti, Denom. fr. vi + ghāṭa, cp. gantheti

Vighāta

1. destruction, killing, slaughter Pv-a 150 (vighātaṃ āpajjati = vihaññati) ■ as adj slain, beaten Pv iv.53 (= vighātavā vihata-bala). 2. distress, annoyance, upset of mind, trouble, vexation DN iii.249; MN i.510; AN ii.197 sq.; AN iv.161 (˚pariḷāha) Snp 814 (= ugghāta pīḷana ghaṭṭana upaddava Nd i.140 = Nd i.170); Thig 450 (bahu˚ full of annoyance) ■ sa˚ connected with, or bringing vexation, with opp. ; free of annoyance: SN iii.8; SN v.97; AN i.202 sq.; AN iii.3, AN iii.429 Thig 352; Thag-a 242.

3. opposition MN i.499.

-pakkhika having its part in adversity, associated with trouble MN i.115; SN v.97; Dhs-a 382. -bhūmi ground for vexation Snp 830 (cp. Nd i.170 with expln as above).

vi + ghata

Vighātavant

(adj.) full of annoyance or vexation SN iii.16 sq.; AN ii.143 (= discontented); Thag 899 (in same connection, neg.); Pv-a 260 (= distressed).

vighāta + vant

Vighāsa

(& ˚ghasa) remains of food, broken meat, scraps Vin iv.265, Vin iv.266; Ja ii.288; Ja iii.113 Ja iii.191, Ja iii.311 (read ˚ghasa for metre); v.268 (do.); Sdhp 389.

-āda one who eats the remains of food Vin i.200 (panca˚-satāni) Ja i.348; Ja ii.96; Ja iii.191; Dhp-a ii.128 Also Name of an animal Ja vi.538.

fr. vi + ghasati

Vicakka

(adj.) without wheels Ja i.378 (sakaṭa). Doubtful in phrase asani˚; where used as a noun, probably in diff. meaning altogether (= asani-pāta?): see S ii.229 (= “falling of a thunderbolt” K.S. ii.155) DN iii.44, DN iii.47.

vi + cakka

Vicakkhaṇa

(adj.-n..) [vi + cakkhaṇa, of cakṣ to see, attentive, watchful, sensible, skilful; (nt.) application attention, wit SN i.214 = Snp 186 (appamatta + ; trslnK.S. i.277 “discerning wit”); Snp 583; Ja iv.58; Ja vi.286; Mil 216; Vism 43; Snp-a 238; Sdhp 200, Sdhp 293.

Vicakkhu

(adj.) eyeless, blind, in phrase ˚kamma making blind or perplexed SN i.111, SN i.118 (“darkening their intelligence” trsln) [cp. BSk. vicakṣu-karma Mvu iii.416; Lal V. 490].

vi + cakkhu

Vicakkhuka

(adj.) not seeing, blinded, dulled in sight, half-blind Mil 295 (Rh. D. “squinting”).

vicakkhu + ka

Vicaya

search, investigation, examination SN iii.96 (vicayaso, i.e. thoroughly); Pp 25; Mil 340 (dhamma˚); Ne 1, Ne 2, Ne 10; Dhs-a 147; Sdhp 466. For dhamma˚ see sambojjhanga.

fr. vi + ci: see vicinati

Vicaraṇa

(adj.-n..) going about, circulating, moving, travelling Ja v.484 (˚bhaṇḍa travelling merchandise).

fr. vicarati

Vicarati

to go or move about in (loc.), to walk (a road = acc.), to wander Snp 444 (raṭṭhā raṭṭhaṃ vicarissaṃ, fut.), 696 (dhamma-maggaṃ); Nd i.201, Nd i.263; Pv iii.73 (aor. vicari); Dhp-a i.66; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 22, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 69 Pv-a 120, Pv-a 185 (= āhiṇḍati); Sdhp 133 ■ In Sn often with loke (in this world), e.g. Snp 466, Snp 501, Snp 845, Snp 846, Snp 864. Caus. vicāreti; pp. vicarita, vicārita & viciṇṇa. Cp anu˚.;

vi + carati

Vicarita

occupied by (-˚), haunted, frequented Vv-a 163.

pp. of vicarati

Vicāra

investigation, examination, consideration, deliberation ■ Defd as “vicaraṇaṃ vicāro, anusañcaraṇan ti vuttaṃ hoti” Vism 142 (see in def. under vitakka) ■ Hardly ever by itself (as at Thag 1117 mano˚), usually in close connection or direct combn with vitakka (q.v.).

vi + cāra

Vicāraka

(adj.) 1. looking after something; watching Ja i.364 (ghara˚).

2. investigating; (n.) a judge Mvu 35, Mvu 18.

fr. vicāreti

Vicāraṇā

(f.) & ; (nt.) 1. investigation, search, attention Snp 1108, Snp 1109 (f. & nt.); Ja iii.73 (˚paññā).

2. arranging, planning, looking after scheme Ja i.220; Ja ii.404 (yuddha˚); vi.333 sq.

fr. vicāreti

Vicārita

thought out, considered; thought DN i.37 (vitakkita + , like vitakka- vicāra, cp. DN-a i.122) 213 (id.); Snp-a 385.

pp. of vicāreti

Vicāreti

1. to make go round, to pass round, to distribute Pv-a 272 (salākaṃ).

2. to think (over) SN v.156 (vitakketi + ).

3. to investigate examine, test Ja ii.413; Ja iii.258; Vv-a 336 (a˚ to omit examining).

4. to plan, consider, construct Ja ii.404 Ja vi.333.

5. to go about (some business), to look after administer, provide Ja ii.287; Ja iii.378; Mvu 35, Mvu 19 (rajjaṃ); Pv-a 93 (kammante) ■ pp. vicārita & viciṇṇa;.

Caus. of vicarati

Vicāliya

(adj.) in neg. ; not to be shaken, not wavering Sdhp 444.

grd. of vi + cāleti

Vicikicchati

lit. “dis-reflect,” to be distracted in thought, i.e. to doubt, hesitate DN i.106; SN ii.17, SN ii.50, SN ii.54; SN iii.122, SN iii.135; Ja iv.272 (2 sg. vicikicchase) Snp-a 451; DN-a i.275 ■ pp. vicikicchita.

vi + cikicchati

Vicikicchā

(f.) doubt, perplexity, uncertainty (one of the nīvaraṇas) DN i.246; DN iii.49, DN iii.216, DN iii.234 DN iii.269; SN i.99; SN iii.106 sq. (dhammesu v. doubt about the precepts); iv.350; AN iii.292, AN iii.438; AN iv.68, AN iv.144 sq.; AN v.144; Snp 343, Snp 437, Snp 540; Vv 81 (= soḷasa-vatthuka-vicikicchā Vv-a 317); Ja ii.266; Pp 59; Vb 168, Vb 341, Vb 364; Dhs 425; Ne 11; Tikp 108, 122, 152 sq., 171, 255, 275 Dukp 170 sq., 265 sq., 289 sq.; Vism 471 (= vigatā cikicchā ti v. etc.), 599 sq.; Vb-a 209; Vv-a 156; MA 116; Sdhp 459 ■ As adj. (-˚) vicikiccha, e.g. tiṇṇa˚; one who has overcome all doubt DN i.71, DN i.110; MN i.18; AN ii.211; AN iii.92; AN iii.297 sq.; AN iv.186; AN iv.210 ■ See also Cpd. 242; Dhs. trsl. § 425 n. 1; and cp. kathankathā, kicchati vecikicchin.

fr. vicikicchati

Vicikicchita

(nt.) doubt Pv iv.137.

pp. of vicikicchati

Vicikicchin

see ve˚.

Viciṇṇa

thought out; in neg. ; not thought out; reading however doubtful, better to be taken as adhiciṇṇa, i.e. procedure, method DN i.8; MN ii.3 = SN iii.12 (vi˚ as v.l.) ■ DN-a i.91 reads āciṇṇa (cp. MN i.372).

pp. of vicāreti

Vicita

in phrase ˚kāḷaka bhatta rice from which the black grains have been separated DN i.105; MN ii.8; DN-a i.274; as vicita-bhatta in same sense at Ja iv.371.

pp. of vi + ci to gather

Vicitta

(& ˚citra) (adj.) various, variegated, coloured, ornamented, etc. Ja i.18, Ja i.83; Pv ii.19; Vv 6410 (citra); Mil 338, Mil 349; Vv-a 2, Vv-a 77; Sdhp 92, Sdhp 245- vicitra-kathika eloquent Mil 196.

vi + citta;1

Vicinati

(˚cināti) 1. to investigate, examine, discriminate SN i.34 (yoniso vicine dhammaṃ); AN iv.3 sq (id.); Snp 658, Snp 933; Ap 42; Ja vi.373; Nd i.398; Ne 10 Ne 22 (grd. vicetabba), 25 sq.; Mil 298; Dpvs iv.2; Dhs-a 147; Pv-a 140; Sdhp 344 ■ ger. viceyya discriminating; with discrimination DN ii.21 (doubled: with careful discrimn); iii.167 (˚pekkhitar); Snp 524 sq.; usually in phrase viceyya-dāna a gift given with discrimination SN i.21; AN iv.244; Ja iv.361; Ja v.395; Pv ii.972; Dhp-a iii.221; Mvu 5, Mvu 35.

2. to look for, to seek, to linger to choose Pv iii.64 (aor. vicini = gavesi C.); iv.142 (ger viceyya = vicinitvā Pv-a 240); Ja i.419 ■ See also pacinati.

vi + cināti

Vicinana

(nt.) discrimination Vism 162.

fr. vicinati

Vicinteti

to think, consider Snp 1023; Mvu 4, Mvu 28 (vicintiya, ger.); 17, 38.

vi + cinteti

Vicuṇṇa

crushed up, only in redupl ■ iter. formation cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa crushed to bits, piecemeal Ja i.26; Ja iii.438 etc. See under cuṇṇa.

vi + cuṇṇa

Vicuṇṇita

crushed up Ja i.203 (viddhasta + ).

pp. of vi + cuṇṇeti

Viccuta

fallen down Ja v.403 (expld as viyutta C.); Dhp i.140.

vi + cuta

Vicchaḍḍeti

to throw out, to vomit; in late (Sanskritic) Pāli at Sdhp 121 (pp. vicchaḍḍita) and 136 (nt. vicchaḍḍana throwing out).

vi + chaḍḍeti

Vicchandanika

(& ˚ya ) (adj.) fit to disinterest, “disengrossing,” in ˚kathā sermon to rid of the desire for the body Vin iii.271 (Sam. Pās. on Pār iii.3, 1); & ˚sutta the Suttanta having disillusionment for its subject (another name given by Bdhgh to the Vijayasutta Snp 193–⁠206) Snp-a 241 sq. (˚ya). Cp. vicchindati.

vi + chanda + na + ika

Vicchādanā

(f.) concealment Pp 19, Pp 23.

vi + chādanā

Vicchika

a scorpion DN i.9 (˚vijjā scorpion craft); Vin ii.110; AN ii.73; AN iii.101, AN iii.306; AN iv.320; AN v.289 sq.; Ja ii.146; Mil 272 Mil 394; Vism 235; DN-a i.93.

cp. Vedic vṛścīka: Zimmer, Altind. Leben 98

Vicchita

in phrase balavicchita-kārin at Mil 110 is to be read balav’ icchita-kārin “a man strong to do what he likes,” i.e. a man of influence.

Vicchidda

(adj.) only in (redupl.) combin. chidda˚; full of little holes, perforated all over Ja i.419.

vi + chidda

Vicchiddaka

“having holes all over,” referring to one of the asubha-kammaṭṭhānas, obtained by the contemplation of a corpse fissured from decay AN ii.17 (˚saññā); v.106, 310; Mil 332; Vism 110, Vism 178 Vism 194.

vi + chidda + ka

Vicchinda

breaking off, cutting off Ja ii.436, Ja ii.438 (kāya˚; ). Kern, Toev. s. v considers it as a corruption of vicchanda. See vicchandanika.

fr. vi + chind as in vicchindati

Vicchindati

to cut off, to interrupt, to prevent Pv-a 129 (˚itu-kāma). The BSk. form is vicchandayati [ = vi + Denom. of chando] e.g. Divy 10, Divy 11, Divy 383, Divy 590 ■ pp. vicchinna.

vi + chindati

Vicchinna

cut off, destroyed Sdhp 34, Sdhp 117, Sdhp 370, Sdhp 585.

pp. of vicchindati

Vicchurita

besprinkled, sprinkled about Vv-a 4, Vv-a 280 (= ullitta).

vi + churita

Viccheda

cutting off, destruction Ja iv.284 (santati˚). ; uninterruptedness Vv-a 16.

vi + cheda

Vijaṭana

(nt.) disentangling Mil 11.

fr. vijaṭeti

Vijaṭita

disentangled SN i.165.

pp. of vijaṭeti

Vijaṭeti

1. to disentangle, to comb out; fig. to unravel, explain Vin ii.150 (bimbohanaṃ kātuṃ tūlāni v.); Mil 3; Vism 1, Vism 2.

2. to plunder Ja iii.523 ■ pp. vijaṭita.

vi + Caus. of jaṭ;: see jaṭita

Vijana

(adj.) deserted of people, lonely SN i.180; Thag-a 252. -˚vāta: see vāta.

vi + jana

Vijambhati

to rouse oneself, to display activity, often appld to the awakening of a lion SN iii.84; AN ii.33; Ja i.12, Ja i.493; Ja v.215 (˚amāna, ppr., getting roused) 433, 487; vi.173; Vism 311.

vi + jambhati

Vijambhanā

(f.) arousing, activity, energy Ja vi.457.

vi + jambhanā

Vijambhikā

(f.) yawning (before rising) i.e. drowsiness, laziness, in ster. combn with arati tandī SN i.7 (trsln “the lanquid frame”); AN i.3; Vb 352 Vism 33. As vijambhitā at SN v.64; Ja i.506 (here in meaning “activity, alertness,” but sarcastically as sīha˚); Vb-a 272 (= kāya-vināmanā).

fr. vijambhati

Vijaya

victory; conquering, mastering; triumph over (-˚) DN i.46; AN iv.272 (idha-loka˚); Snp-a 241 sq. (˚sutta, another name for the Kāya-vicchandanika-sutta).

fr. vi + ji

Vijayati

(& vijinati ) to conquer, master, triumph over DN-a i.250 (vijeti); fut. vijessati Ja iv.102. ger. vijeyya Snp 524, Snp 1002; and vijetvā Ja iii.523 ■ pp vijita. Cp. abhi˚.

vi + jayati

Vijahati

to abandon, forsake, leave; to give up, dismiss Pv iii.615 (sarīraṃ); Vv-a 119; Pot. vijaheyya Pv iv.110; fut. vijahissati SN ii.220; Pv ii.67 (jīvitaṃ) ■ ger. vihāya Mvu 12, Mvu 55; & vijahitvā Vin iv.269; Ja i.117; Ja iii.361 (iddh’ ânubhāvena attabhāvaṃ )-grd. vihātabba AN iii.307 sq.; Mil 371 ■ Pass vihīyati Ja vi.499 (eko v. = kilamissati C.) ■ pp. vijahita & vihīna;.

vi + jahati

Vijahana

(nt.) abandoning, relinquishing DN-a i.197.

fr. vijahati

Vijahita

left, given up, relinquished; only in neg. ; Ja i.71, Ja i.76, Ja i.94, Ja i.178.

pp. of vijahati

Vijātā

(f.) (a woman) having borne Ja ii.140; Pv ii.23 (= pasūtā Pv-a 80).

-kāla time of birth Ja ii.140. -ghara birth-chamber Mil 301.

pp. of vijāyati

Vijāti

in ˚loha a kind of copper Vb-a 63.

Vijāna

(nt ■ adj.) understanding; as adj. (-˚) in cpds. du˚; (dubbijāna) hard to understand SN i.60; Ja iv.217; and su˚; easy to perceive Snp 92; Ja iv.217.

fr. vijānāti

Vijānana

(nt.) recognition, knowing, knowledge, discrimination Vian 452; Dhs-a 141.

the diaeretic form of Sk. vijñāna: cp. jānana = ñāṇa

Vijānāti

to have discriminative (dis = vi˚) knowledge, to recognize, apprehend, ascertain, to become aware of, to understand, notice, perceive, distinguish learn, know Snp 93 sq., 763; Dhp 64, Dhp 65; Nd i.442. See also viññāṇa 2a ■ imper. 2nd sg. vijāna Snp 1091 (= ājāna Nd ii.565b); Pv iv.55 (= vijānāhi Pv-a 260) ppr. vijānanto Snp 656, Snp 953; Pv iv.188; Pv-a 41; and vijānaṃ neg. ; ignorant Dhp 38, Dhp 60; Iti 103. Pot. 1st sg (poet.) vijaññaṃ Ja iii.360 (= vijāneyyaṃ C.); Snp 1065 Snp 1090, Snp 1097 (= jāneyyaṃ Nd ii.565a); & vijāniyaṃ Vv 415 (paṭivijjhiṃ C.); 3rd sg. vijañña Snp 253, Snp 316, Snp 967 (cp Nd i.489) ■ ger. vijāniya Mvu 8, Mvu 16; viññāya Snp 232 & viññitvā Vin iv.264 ■ aor. (3rd pl.) vijāniṃsu Mvu 10, Mvu 18 ■ Pass. viññāyati Pv-a 197; fut. viññissati Thag 703 ■ inf. viññātuṃ SN iii.134 ■ grd. viññātabba (to be understood) Vb-a 46; & viññeyya (q.v.) ■ pp viññāta ■ Caus. II. viññāpeti (q.v.).

vi + jñā

Vijāyana

(nt.) bringing forth, birth, delivery AN i.78; Ja iii.342; Ja vi.333; Vism 500; Vb-a 97.

fr. vijāyati

Vijāyati

to bring forth, to bear, to give birth to Sdhp 133; aor. vijāyi Vv-a 220; Pv-a 82 (puttaṃ) ger. vijāyitvā Mvu 5, Mvu 43 (puttaṃ); and vijāyitvāna Pv i.63 ■ pp. vijāta ■ Caus. II. vijāyāpeti to cause to bring forth Ja vi.340.

vi + jāyati

Vijāyin

(adj.-n.) in f. ˚inī able to bear a child, fertile Ja iv.77 (opp. vañjhā); Dhp-a i.46 (id.).

fr. vijāyati

Vijigucchati

to loathe Snp 41 (˚amāna = aṭṭiyamāna harāyamāna Nd ii.566), 253, 958 (˚ato = aṭṭiyato harāyato Nd i.466), 963; Nd i.479.

vi + j.

Vijita

1. conquered, subdued, gained, won Snp 46; Snp-a 352; DN-a i.160; Pv-a 75, Pv-a 76, Pv-a 161. Cp. nijjita.

2. (nt.) conquered land, realm, territory kingdom Ja i.262; Vv 8120 (= desa Vv-a 316); Dhp-a i.386.

-aṅga at Pv iii.117 (Pv-a 176) read vījit.˚-indriya one who has conquered his senses Snp 250. -saṅgāma by whom the battle has been won, victorious DN ii.39; Iti 76; Nd ii.542; Pp 68.

pp. of vijayati

Vijitāvin

(adj.) victorious DN i.88 (caturanta + ); ii.146; SN iii.83; Snp 552, Snp 646; DN-a i.249; Dhp-a iv.232; Snp-a 162.

vijita + āvin; see Geiger, P.Gr. 1983

Vijina

distress (?), in stock phrase at AN v.156, AN v.158, AN v.160, AN v.162 (v.l. at all pass. vicina).

doubtful

Vijīyati

at Ja iii.374 is to be read as vījiyati (Pass. of vījati ).

Vijja

(adj.) (-˚) having vijjā, possessed of wisdom; in vatthu˚, tiracchāna˚, nakkhatta˚ etc. (referring to the lower arts condemned as heretic: vijjā c.) SN iii.239 te˚; possessed of threefold wisdom: see vijjā b.

= vijjā

Vijjaṭipatti

(f.) adultery Pv-a 151. Vijjati, vijjamana

? doubtful spelling

Vijjati, vijjamāna

etc.: see vindati.

Vijjantarikā

(f.) is not clear; according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = vīthi + antarikā, i.e. space in between two streets or midstreet MN i.448; AN i.124. Neumann (Mittl. Slg. ii.182) translates “Rinnstein” (i.e. gutter). Under antarikā we have given the trsln “interval of lightning, thus taking it as vijju + antarikā. Quoted DN-a i.34.

a very bold assumption: vīthy contracted to vijj˚!

Vijjā

(f.) one of the dogmatic terms of Buddhist teaching varying in meaning in diff. sections of the Canon. It is not always the positive to avijjā (which has quite a well-defined meaning from its first appearance in Buddhist psych. ethics), but has been taken into the terminology of Buddhism from Brahmanic and popular philosophy The opposite of avijjā is usually ñāṇa (but cp. SN iii.162 f. 171; v.429). Although certain vijjās pertain to the recognition of the “truth” and the destruction of avijjā, yet they are only secondary factors in achieving “vimutti” (cp. abhiññā, ñāṇa-dassana & paññā) That; vijjā at MN i.22 is contrasted with avijjā is to be expld as a word-play in a stereotype phrase ■ A diff side of “knowledge” again is given by “bodhi.” (a) Vijjā is a general, popular term for lore in the old sense, science, study, esp. study as a practice of some art (something like the secret science of the medicine man: cp. vejja!); hence appld in special, “dogmatic sense as “secret science,” revelation (put into a sort of magic formula), higher knowledge (of the learned man), knowledge which may be applied and used as an art (cp. magister artium!), practical knowledge; but also mysterious knowledge: “charm.”-(b) vijjā having a varying content in its connotation, is applied to a series of diff. achievements. A rather old tabulation of the stages leading by degrees to the attainment of the highest knowledge is given in the Sāmañña-phala-sutta (DN i.63–⁠86), repeated in nearly every Suttanta of D 1 It is composed of the 3 sampadās, viz. sīla˚, citta˚ paññā˚. Under the first group belong sīla(-kkhandha) indriya-saṃvara, sati-sampajañña, santuṭṭhi; the second is composed (1) of the overcoming of the nīvaraṇas, (2) of the 4 jhānas; the third consists of 8 items, viz (1) ñāṇa-dassana, (2) manomaya-kāya, (3) iddhi (4) dibba-sota, (5) ceto-pariyañāṇa, (6) pubbe-nivās ânussatiñāṇa, (7) cut’ ûpapatti-ñāṇa, (8) āsavānaṃ khaya-ñāṇa. Other terms used are: for the 2nd sampadā: caraṇa (D. i.100), and for the 3rd: vijjā (ibid.). The discussion at DN i.100 is represented as contradicting the (brahmaṇic) opinion of Ambaṭṭha, who thought that “vijjā nāma tayo Vedā, caraṇaṃ pañca sīlāni” (DN-a i.267 sq.) ■ In the enumn of 3 vijjās at MN i.22 sq. only Nos. 6

8 of the 3rd sampadā (said to have been attained by the Buddha in the 3 night watches) with the verbs anussarati (No. 6), pajānāti (7), abhijānāti (8), each signifying a higher stage of (“saving”) knowledge, yet all called “vijjā.” Quoted at Vism 202, where all 8 stages are given as “aṭṭha vijjā, ” and caraṇa with 15 qualities (sīla-saṃvara, indriyesu guttadvāra etc.). The same 3 vijjās (No. 6, 7, 8) are given at DN iii.220, DN iii.275, and poetically at AN ii.165 as the characteristics of a proper (ariya, Buddhist) monk (or brāhmaṇa): “etāhi tīhi vijjāhi tevijjo hoti brāhmaṇo,” opposing the threeVeda -knowledge of the Brahmins ■ Tevijja (adj.) in same meaning at SN i.146 (where it refers to Nos. 3, 5, 8 of above enumn), 192, 194. In brahmanic sense at Snp 594 (= tiveda Snp-a 463). Both meanings compared contrasted at AN i.163 (aññathā brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṃ tevijjaṃ paññāpenti, aññathā ca pana ariyassa vinaye tevijjo hoti “different in the Brahmanic and diff. in the Buddhist sense”) ■ Tisso vijjā (without specification but referring to above 6, 7, 8) further at Vin ii.183; Snp 656; Pts i.34; Pts ii.56; Pv iv.134; Mil 359 (+ chaḷabhiññā); Dhp-a iv.30 (id.). It is doubtful whether the defn of ñāṇa as “tisso vijjā” at Vin iii.91 is genuine. On vijjā-caraṇa see also D iii.97, 98, 237; SN i.153, SN i.166 SN ii.284; SN v.197; AN ii.163; AN iv.238; AN v.327; Snp 163, Snp 289, Snp 442-On vijjā in the doctrinal appln see: D iii.156, 214 274; SN ii.7 sq. (cakkhu, ñāṇa, paññā, vijjā, āloka) iii.47; 163; 171; iv.31, 49 sq. AN i.83; AN ii.247; Snp 334 (simply meaning “wisdom,” craft, care, but Bdhgh Snp-a 339 takes it as “āsavānaṃ-khaya-ñāṇa”), 1026 (opposed to avijjā); Pp 14, Pp 57; Vb 324; Ne 76, Ne 191 ■ (c) popular meanings & usage of; vijjā: science, craft, art, charm spell DN i.213 (Gandhārī nāma v., also mentioned at Ja iv.498 as practised by physicians), 214 (Maṇika n. v.); Ja iii.504 (Cintāmaṇi v.); iv.323 (vatthu˚: see under vatthu), 498 (ghora˚); v.458 (anga˚ palmistry) Mil 200; Dhp i.259 (bhūmicala n. v. “earthquake charm), 265 (dhanu-agamanīyaṃ Ambaṭṭha n. v.); Kp-a 237 (vatthu˚, khetta˚, anga˚); and see the list of forbidden crafts at DN i.9 (anga˚, vatthu˚, khetta˚; etc. cp. Dial. i.18, 19).

-gata having attained wisdom Snp 730 (opp. avijjā the playful expln at Snp-a 505 is “ye arahatta-maggavijjāya kilese vijjhitvā gatā khīṇāsava-sattā”). -caraṇa (-sampanna) (endowed with) special craft (wisdom) virtue: see above, b.; -ṭṭhāna branch of study; there are 18 vijja-ṭṭhānāni or “arts & sciences,” subjects of study referred to at Ja i.259. -dhara a knower of charms, a sorcerer Ja iii.303, Ja iii.529; Ja iv.496; Ja v.94; Mil 153, Mil 200, Mil 267 -bhāgiyā (dhammā) (states) conducive to wisdom (6 kinds of saññā) AN iii.334; cp. DN iii.243; SN v.395; AN iv.52 sq. -mayā (iddhi) (potency) accomplished by art or knowledge (Expos. i.122) Vism 383; see iddhi. -vimutti wisdom (higher knowledge) as salvation SN v.28 SN v.335 sq.; Pts ii.243 (in detail). Vijju & vijjuta

cp. Vedic vidyā knowledge: etym. see under vindati

Vijju & vijjutā

(f.) lightning ■ (a) vijju: SN i.100 (˚māli); AN i.124 (˚ūpamacitta); Ja v.322 (˚vaṇṇin); Pp 30; Mil 22 (˚jāla); Vv-a 12; Sdhp 244, Sdhp 598 ■ (b) vijjutā: Thag 1167; Ja ii.217 ■ On similes with v. see J.P.T.S. 1907 136 ■ Cp. next.

cp. Vedic vidyut; fr. vi + dyut: see juti

Vijjullatā

(f.) a flash or streak of lightning, forked lightning SN i.106; Ja i.103, Ja i.279, Ja i.501.

vijju(t) + latā

Vijjotati

to shine (forth) Pv-a 56; Caus. ˚eti to illumine Pv-a 10 ■ pp. vijjotita.

vi + jotati

Vijjotalati

to flicker Vin ii.131; MN i.86.

Freq. of vijjotati? Or = vijjotayati = vijjoteti?

Vijjotita

resplendent Pv-a 154.

pp. of vijjotati

Vijjhati

to pierce, perforate; to shoot with an arrow; to strike, hit, split; fut. ˚issati Ja iv.272; inf ˚ituṃ ibid.; ger. ˚itvā Vin ii.150; Ja i.201 (boring through timber); Snp-a 505 (kilese); Pv-a 155; & viddhā Ja vi.77-Pass. vijjhati: ger. ˚itvā having been hit Ja iii.323 ppr. vijjhamāna Pv-a 107; grd. viddheyya Ja vi.77 ■ pp viddha ■ Caus. vijjheti Ja i.45 (sūlehi vijjhayanto); and vedheti to cause to be pierced Ja vi.453 (fut. vedhayissati)-pp. vedhita.

vyadh

Vijjhana

(nt.) piercing or getting pierced DN-a i.75; DN-a ii.87 (kaṇṇa˚-mangala, ear-piercing ceremony) Pv-a 107.

fr. vijjhati

Vijjhāpeti

to extinguish Vin i.31; Vin ii.219, Vin ii.221; Ja iv.292; Mil 42.

vi + jhāpeti

Vijjhāyati

to be extinguished, to go out (of fire) Vin i.31 (imper. ˚āyatu & fut. ˚āyissati); Dhp-a i.21 (akkhīni dīpa-sikhā viya vijjhāyiṃsu).

vi + jhāyati2

Viññatti

(f.) intimation, giving to understand, information; begging or asking by intimation or hinting (a practice forbidden to the bhikkhu) Vin i.72 (˚bahula, intent on… ); iii.144 sq. (id.); iv.290; Ja iii.72 (v. nāma na vaṭṭati, is improper); Vb 13 Vism 41 (threefold: nimitta˚, obhāsa˚, parikathā; as t. t., cp. Cpd. 1201: medium of communication); Mil 343, Mil 370; Dhp-a ii.21 (viññattiṃ katvā bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati); Pv-a 146Two kinds of viññatti are generally distinguished, viz. kāya˚; and vacī˚; or intimation by body (gesture) and by voice: Dhs 665, Dhs 718; Mil 229 sq.; Vism 448, Vism 530, Vism 531. Cp. Cpd. 22, 264.

fr. viññāpeti

Viññāṇa

(nt.) (as special term in Buddhist metaphysics) a mental quality as a constituent of individuality, the bearer of (individual) life, life-force (as extending also over rebirths), principle of conscious life, general consciousness (as function of mind and matter), regenerative force animation, mind as transmigrant, as transforming (according to individual kamma) one individual life (after death) into the next. (See also below, c & d). In this (fundamental) application it may be characterized as the sensory and perceptive activity commonly expressed by “mind.” It is difficult to give any one word for v., because there is much difference between the old Buddhist and our modern points of view, and there is a varying use of the term in the Canon itself. In what may be a very old Sutta SN ii.95 v. is given as a synonym of citta (q.v.) and mano (q.v.), in opposition to kāya used to mean body. This simpler unecclesiastical unscholastic popular meaning is met with in other suttas. E. g. the body (kāya) is when animated called sa-viññāṇaka (q.v. and cp. viññāṇatta). Again v. was supposed, at the body’s death, to pass over into another body (SN i.122; SN iii.124) and so find a support or platform (patiṭṭhā). It was also held to be an immutable persistent substance, a view strongly condemned (MN i.258). Since, however, the persistence of v. from life to life is declared (D ii.68; SN iii.54), we must judge that it is only the immutable persistence that is condemned. V. was justly conceived more as “minding” than as “mind.” Its form is participial. For later variants of the foregoing cp. Mil 86; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 219.

Ecclesiastical scholastic dogmatic considers v. under the categories of (a) khandha; (b) dhātu; (c) paṭiccasamuppāda; (d) āhāra; (e) kāya. (a) V. as fifth of the five khandhas (q.v.) is never properly described or defined. It is an ultimate. But as a factor of animate existence it is said to be the discriminating (vijānāti) of e.g. tastes or sapid things (S iii.87), or, again, of pleasant or painful feeling (MN i.292). It is in no wise considered as a condition, or a climax of the other incorporeal khandhās. It is just one phase among others of mental life. In mediaeval dogmatic it appears rather as the bare phenomenon of aroused attention, the other khandhās having been reduced to adjuncts or concomitants brought to pass by the arousing of v. (Cpd. 13), and as such classed under cetasikā, the older sankhārakkhandha-(b) as dhātu, v. occurs only in the category of the four elements with space as a sixth element, and also where dhātu is substituted for khandha (S iii.10) ■ (c) In the chain of causation (Paṭicca-samuppāda ) v. is conditioned by the saṅkhāras and is itself a necessary condition of nāma-rūpa (individuality). See e.g. SN ii.4, SN ii.6, SN ii.8, SN ii.12 etc.; Vin i.1; Vism 545 sq. = Vb-a 150 Vism 558 sq.; Vb-a 169 sq.; 192 ■ At SN ii.4 = SN iii.61 viññāṇa (in the Paṭicca-samuppāda) is defined in a similar way to the defn under v ■ ṭṭhiti (see c), viz. as a quality peculiar to (& underlying) each of the 6 senses: “katamaṃ viññāṇaṃ? cha-y-ime viññāṇa-kāyā (groups of v.), viz. cakkhu˚ sota˚ etc.,” which means that viññāṇa is the apperceptional or energizing principle so to speak the soul or life (substratum, animator, lifepotency) of the sensory side of individuality. It arises through the mutual relation of sense and sense-object (M iii.281, where also the 6 v ■ kāyā). As such it forms a factor of rebirth, as it is grouped under upadhi (q.v.) Translations of SN ii.4: Mrs. Rh. D. (K.S. ii.4) “consciousness”; Geiger (in Z. f. B. iv.62) “Erkennen.” (d) As one of the four āhāras (q.v.) v. is considered as the material, food or cause, through which comes rebirth (S ii.13; cp. B.Psy. p. 62). As such it is likened to seed in the field of action (kamma) AN i.223, and as entering (a body) at rebirth the phrase viññāṇassa avakkanti is used (D ii.63; SN ii.91). In this connection the expression paṭisandhi-viññāṇa first appears in Pts i.52, and then in the Commentaries (VbhA 192; cf. Vism 548 Vism 659 paṭisandhicitta); in Vism 554 = Vb-a 163, the v. here said to be located in the heart, is made out, at bodily death, “to quit its former ʻsupportʼ and proceed (pavattati) to another by way of its mental object and other conditions.” Another scholastic expression both early and late, is abhisaṅkhāra-v., or “endowment consciousness,” viz. the individual transmigrant or transmitted function (viññāṇa) which supplies the next life with the accumulation of individual merit or demerit or indifference, as it is expressed at Nd ii.569a in defn of v. (on Snp 1055: yaṃ kiñci sampajānāsi… panujja viññāṇaṃ bhave na tiṭṭhe): puññ’ âbhisankhāra-sahagata-viññāṇaṃ, apuññ’…, ānejj’… ■ Under the same heading at Nd ii.569b we find abhisankhāra v with ref. to the sotāpatti-stage, i.e. the beginning of salvation, where it is said that by the gradual disappearance of abhis ■ v. there are still 7 existences left before nāma-rūpa (individuality) entirely disappears The climax of this development is “anupādi-sesa nibbāna-dhatu,” or the nibbāna stage without a remainder (parinibbāna), which is characterized not by an abhisankhāra-v., but by the carimaka-v., or the final vital spark, which is now going to be extinct This passage is referred to at Dhs-a 357, where the first half is quoted literally ■ (e) As kāya i.e. group, v. is considered psycho-physically, as a factor in senseperception (D iii.243, MN iii.281, etc.), namely, the contact between sense-organ and object (medium, μεταζύ was not taken into account) produces v. of sight, hearing etc. The three factors constitute the v ■ kāya of the given sense. And the v. is thus bound to bodily process as a catseye is threaded on a string (D ii.76). Cp. above c.

Other applications of the term v., both Canonical and mediaeval: on details as to attributes and functions, see Vin i.13 (as one of the khandhas in its quality of anattā cp. SN iv.166 sq.); DN iii.223 (as khandha); SN ii.101 sq (˚assa avakkanti); iii.53 sq. (˚assa gati, āgati, cuti etc.); AN i.223 sq.; AN iii.40; Snp 734 (yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti, sabbaṃ viññāṇa-paccayā), 1037 (nāma-rūpa destroyed in consequence of v. destruction), 1073 (cavetha v. [so read for bhavetha]; v. at this passage expld as “punappaṭisandhi-v.” at Nd ii.569c); 1110 (uparujjhati); Pts i.53 sq., 153 sq.; ii.102; Vb 9 sq. 53 sq., 86; Ne 15 (nāma-rūpa v ■ sampayutta), 16 (v ■ hetuka n ■ r.), 17 (nirodha), 28, 79, 116 (as khandha) Vism 529 (as simple, twofold, fourfold etc.), 545 = Vb-a 150 sq. (in detail as product of sankhāras & in 32 groups); Vb-a 172 (twofold: vipāka & avipāka) Dhp-a iv.100.

-ānañc’āyatana infinitude (-sphere) of life-force or mind-matter DN i.35, DN i.184, DN i.223; DN iii.224, DN iii.262, DN iii.265; Ne 26 Ne 39. It is the second of the Āruppa-jhānas; see jhāna-āhāra consciousness (i.e. vital principle) sustenance see above d and cp. Dhs 70, Dhs 126; Ne 114 sq.; Vism 341 -kāya: see above e. -khandha life-force as one of the aggregates of physical life DN iii.233; Tikp 61; Dhs-a 141 Vb-a 21, Vb-a 42. -ṭṭhiti viññāṇa-duration, phase of mental life. The emphasis is on duration or continuation rather than place, which would be ṭṭhāna. There are (α) 4 v ■ durations with regard to their “storing (abhisankhāra) quality, viz. combinations of v. (as the governing, mind-principle) with each of the 4 other khandhas or aggregates of material life (rūpa vedanā, saññā, sankhārā), v. animating or bringing them to consciousness in any kind of life-appearance and (β) 7 v ■ durations with regard to their “regenerating” (new-life combn or rebirth = paṭisandhi) quality viz. the 4 planes of var. beings (from men to devas) followed by the 3 super-dimensional stages (the ānañc’ āyatanas) of ākāsa-infinitude, viññāṇa-infin. ākiñ-cañña-infin ■ Passages in the Canon: (;α) as 4: D 1 i.262 sq.; SN iii.53 sq. (“standing for consciousness” & “platform,” ˚patiṭṭhā SN iii.54; K.S. iii.45) (β) the 7: DN ii.68 sq.; DN iii.253 (trsln “station of consciousness”), 282; = AN iv.39. Both the 4 and the 7 at Nd ii.570. Cp. under a slightly diff. view SN ii.65 (yaṃ ceteti… ārammaṇaṃ… hoti viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā)-See also Pts i.22, Pts i.122; Snp 1114; Ne 31, Ne 83 sq. Vism 552; Vb-a 169. -dhātu mind-element, which is the 6th dhātu after the 4 great elements (the mahābhūtāni) and ākāsa-dhātu as fifth (this expld as “asamphuṭṭha-dhātu” at Vb-a 55, whereas v ■ dhātu as “vijānana-dhātu”) DN iii.247; Vb 85, Vb 87; Vb-a 55 cp. AN i.176; MN iii.31, MN iii.62, MN iii.240; SN ii.248. -vīthi the road of mind (fig.), a mediaeval t. t. for process in sense perception Kp-a 102.

fr. vi + jñā; cp. Vedic vijñāna cognition

Viññāṇaka

(adj.) having life or consciousness or sense, endowed with vitality. Found in the four Nikāyas only in one standard passage in the same connection, viz. sa-viññāṇaka kāya “the body with its viññāṇa” (i.e. life-force or mind): SN ii.253; SN iii.80, SN iii.169 SN v.311; AN i.132; AN iv.53. Thus (sa˚) should be read at all passages ■ Later in contrast pair sa˚; and ; i.e. with life & without, alive & lifeless, animate & inanimate, e.g. Ja i.466, Ja i.468; Dhp-a i.6; Pv-a 130.

viññāṇa + ka

Viññāṇatta

(nt.) the fact of being endowed with viññāṇa SN iii.87; Pv-a 63.

abstr. formation fr. viññāṇa

Viññāta

apperceived, (re)cognized, understood, cogitated (Cpd. 37), learned Snp 323 (˚dhamma, one who has recognized or understood the Dhamma); Vv 4418 (= viññāta-sāsana-dhamma Vv-a 192); Ja i.2 Sdhp 429 ■ Often in sequence diṭṭha suta muta viññāta to denote the whole range of the cognitional & apperceptional faculties (see; muta ), e.g. DN iii.232; Snp 1086, Snp 1122.

pp. of vijānāti

Viññātar

a perceiver, one who apperceives or takes to heart, a learner DN i.56; AN iii.169 AN iv.196 (sotar, uggahetar, v.).

n. ag. of viññāta

Viññāpaka

(adj.) clever in instruction, able to instruct SN v.162 = Mil 373; Iti 107.

fn. viññāpeti

Viññāpana

(adj.) instructing, informing AN ii.51, AN ii.97 ■ f. viññāpanī instructive, making clear (of speech) DN i.114 (atthassa viññāpaniyā = viññāpanasamatthāya DN-a i.282); AN iii.114; Dhp 408 (= attha Dhp-a iv.182); Snp 632.

fr. viññāpeti

Viññāpaya

(adj.) accessible to instruction; only in cpds du˚ & su˚; indocile docile SN i.138; DN ii.38; Nd ii.2353; Pts i.121; Pts ii.195 Vb 341.

grd. of viññāpeti, = *viññāpya

Viññāpita

instructed, informed; su˚; well taught Mil 101.

pp. of viññāpeti

Viññāpetar

an instructor, teacher DN i.56; AN iv.196.

n. ag. of viññāpita

Viññāpeti

to address, inform, teach, instruct; to give to understand; to appeal to, to beg Vin i.54; Vin iv.264; DN i.251; Ja iii.72 (to intimate); Mil 229; Vv-a 72, Vv-a 181 ■ pp. viññāpita. Vinnaya & vinnayati;

Caus. II. of vijānāti

Viññāya & viññāyati

see vijānāti. Vinnuta & vinnuta

Viññutā & viññūtā

(f.) discretion; in phrase viññutaṃ pāpuṇāti to reach the years of discretion or puberty Vin i.269; Vin ii.278; Ja i.231; Ja iii.437: Pv-a 3.

fr. viññu

Viññupasaṭṭha

unattacked, not deficient, unmolested, undisturbed: is Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading for viññū-pasattha (“extolled by the wise”) at SN ii.70 (reads ṭṭh); v.343; DN ii.80; DN iii.245: all identical passages. We consider Kern’s change unnecessary: anupasaṭṭha would have been the most natural expression if it had been meant in the sense suggested by Kern.

vi + ni + upassaṭṭha, pp. of sṛj (?)

Viññū

(adj.) intelligent, learned, wise DN i.163; SN i.9; SN iii.134; SN iv.41 sq., 93, 339; AN ii.228 AN v.15; Iti 98; Snp 39, Snp 294, Snp 313, Snp 396, Snp 403; Pts ii.19, Pts ii.21; Mil 21; DN-a i.18; Vv-a 87; Pv-a 130, Pv-a 226; Sdhp 45. ; Dhp-a iii.395.

cp. Sk. vijña

Viññeyya

(adj.) to be recognized or apperceived (of the sense objects: cakkhu-viññeyya rūpa, etc.) DN i.245; MN iii.291; AN iii.377; AN iv.404 sq., 415 430; Nd i.24su˚; easily understood Vv-a 258.

grd. of vijānāti

Viṭapa

the fork of a tree, a branch Ja i.169, Ja i.215, Ja i.222; Ja iii.28; Ja vi.177 (nigrodha˚).

cp. Epic Sk. viṭapa

Viṭapin

a tree, lit. “having branches” Ja vi.178.

viṭapa + in

Viṭabhī

(f.) the fork of a tree MN i.306; Ja ii.107; Ja iii.203.

= Sk. viṭapin

Vitakka

reflection, thought, thinking; “initial application” (Cpd. 282) ■ Defd as “vitakkanaṃ vitakko, ūhanan ti vuttaṃ hoti” at Vism 142 (with simile on p. 143, comparing vitakka with vicāra kumbhakārassa daṇḍa-ppahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa uppīḷana-hattho viya vitakko (like the hand holding the wheel tight), ito c’ ito sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro: giving vitakka the characteristic of fixity & steadiness,; vicāra that of movement display) ■ DN ii.277 (“pre-occupation” trsln: see note Dial. ii.311); iii.104, 222, 287 (eight Mahāpurisa˚) MN i.114 (dvidhā-kato v.), 377; SN i.39, SN i.126, SN i.186, SN i.203 SN ii.153; SN iv.69, SN iv.216; AN ii.36; AN iii.87 (dhamma˚); iv.229 (Mahāpurisa˚), 353 (˚upaccheda); Snp 7, Snp 270 sq., 970 1109; Ja i.407 (Buddha˚, Sangha˚, Nibbāna˚); Nd i.386 Nd i.493, Nd i.501 (nine); Nd ii.s. v. takka; Pts i.36, Pts i.136, Pts i.178; Pv iii.58; Pp 59, Pp 68; Vb 86, Vb 104 (rūpa˚, sadda˚ etc.) 228 (sa˚), 362 (akusala˚); Dhs 7, Dhs 160, Dhs 1268; Tikp 61 333, 353; Vism 291 (˚upaccheda); Mil 82, Mil 309; Dhs-a 142; Dhp-a iv.68; Vb-a 490; Pv-a 226, Pv-a 230kāma˚ vihiṃsā˚, vyāpāda˚; (sensual, malign, cruel thought) DN iii.226; SN ii.151 sq.; SN iii.93; AN i.148, AN i.274 sq.; AN ii.16, AN ii.117 AN ii.252; AN iii.390, AN iii.428. Opp. nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚ avihiṃsā˚; AN i.275; AN ii.76; AN iii.429vitakka is often combd with vicāra or “initial & sustained application Mrs. Rh. D.; Cpd. 282; “reflection & investigation Rh. D.; to denote the whole of the mental process of thinking (viz. fixing one’s attention and reasoning out or as Cpd. 17 expls it “ vitakka is the directing of concomitant properties towards the object; vicāra is the continued exercise of the mind on that object.” See also above defn at Vism 142). Both are properties of the first jhāna (called sa-vitakka sa-vicāra) but are discarded in the second jhāna (called a˚). See e.g. DN i.37; SN iv.360 sq.; AN iv.300; Vin iii.4; Vism 85 and formula of jhāna. The same of pīti & samādhi at Vb 228, of; paññā at Vb 323. The same combn (vitakka + vicāra) at foll. passages: DN iii.219 (of samādhi which is either sa˚, or a˚, or avitakka vicāra-matta) SN iv.193; SN v.111; AN iv.409 sq., 450; Ne 16; Mil 60 Mil 62; Vism 453. Cp. rūpa- (sadda-etc.) vitakka + rūpa (sadda-etc.) vicāra AN iv.147; AN v.360; Vb 103 ■ On term (also with vicāra ) see further: Cpd. 40, 56, 98 238 sq., 282 (on difference between v. & manasikāra) Expos. i.188n; Kvu trsln 2381 ■ Cp. pa˚, pari˚.

Note. Looking at the combn vitakka + vicāra in earlier and later works one comes to the conclusion that they were once used to denote one & the same thing: just thought, thinking, only in an emphatic way (as they are also semantically synonymous), and that one has to take them as; one expression, like jānāti passati, without being able to state their difference. With the advance in the Sangha of intensive study of terminology they became distinguished mutually. Vitakka became the inception of mind, or attending, and was no longer applied, as in the Suttas, to thinking in general. The explns of Commentators are mostly of an edifying nature and based more on popular etymology than on natural psychological grounds.

vi + takka

Vitakkana

(nt.) = vitakka Vism 142.

Vitakkita

reflected, reasoned, argued DN-a i.121. Cp. pari˚.

pp. of vitakketi

Vitakketi

to reflect, reason, consider SN i.197, SN i.202; SN iv.169; SN v.156; AN ii.36; Mil 311 ■ pp vitakkita.

Denom. fr. vitakka

Vitacchika

at SN ii.99 = SN iv.188 read vītaccika (q.v.).

Vitacchikā

(f.) scabies Nd ii.3041 (as roga).

cp. *Sk. (medical) vicarcikā

Vitacchita

planed, smoothed; su˚; well carded (of a cīvara) Vin iii.259.

pp. of vitaccheti

Vitaccheti

1. tear, pluck, pick to pieces; in simile MN i.364 (+ virājeti) = SN ii.255 (reads vibhajeti for virājeti) = Vin iii.105 (id.).

2. to smoothe: see pp vitacchita.

vi + taccheti

Vitaṇḍā

(f.) tricky disputation, frivolous or captious discussion; in cpds. vitaṇḍa˚: ˚vāda sophistry Snp-a 447; DN-a i.247; ˚vādin a sophist, arguer Dhs-a 3 (so read for vidaḍḍha); Vb-a 9, Vb-a 51, Vb-a 319, Vb-a 459. See lokāyata.

cp. Epic Sk. vitaṇḍā, e.g. Mbh 2, 1310; 7, 3022

Vitata

stretched, extended, diffused SN i.207; Snp 272, Snp 669 (v.l. vitthata); Ja i.356 (tanta where the strings were stretched); Mil 102, Mil 307; Mvu 17, Mvu 31 (vallīhi v.)-nt. vitata a drum (with leather on both sides) Vv-a 37.

pp. of vitanoti

Vitatha

(adj.) untrue; nt. untruth DN ii.73 (na hi Tathāgatā vitathaṃ bhaṇanti); Snp 9 sq.; Vv 5315 (= atatha, musā ti attho Vv-a 240); Ja v.112; Ja vi.207; Pts 104; DN-a i.62avitatha true SN ii.26; SN v.430; Mil 184; Sdhp 530; DN-a i.65.

vi + tatha; cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vitatha

Vitanoti

(*vitanati) to stretch out, spread out; poet. ger. vitanitvāna Ja vi.453 ■ Pass. vitaniyyati ibid ■ pp. vitata. Cp. vitāna.

vi + tanoti

Vitaraṇa

(nt.) overcoming, getting through MN i.147 (kankhā˚); Mil 233 (id.), 351; Sdhp 569.

fr. vitarati

Vitarati

1. to go through, come through, overcome Snp 495, Snp 779 (ger. ˚eyya, taken as Pot. at Nd i.57 oghaṃ samatikkameyya), 941, 1052; Pv iii.24 (vitaritvā = vitiṇṇo hutvā Pv-a 181, q.v. for detail).

2. to perform Ja ii.14 (bubhukkhito no vitarāsi bhottuṃ; v.l. visahāmi) ■ pp. vitiṇṇa.

vi + tarati

Vitāna

(m. & nt.) spread-out, canopy, awning Vin iv.279; Ja i.40, Ja i.62, Ja i.83; Dhp-a ii.42; Snp-a 447; Vv-a 32 Vv-a 173; Pv-a 154. See also cela˚.

fr. vi + ; tan

Vitiṇṇa

1. overcome or having overcome, gone through, conquered Dhp 141 (˚kankha); Snp 514 (id.) 746; Pv-a 181.

2. given up, rejected, abandoned Dhp 176 (˚paraloka); Ja iv.447 (= pariccatta C.).

pp. of vitarati

Vitudati

to strike, prick, nudge, knock, push, attack DN i.105; SN iv.225; AN iii.366; Snp 675; Ud 67; Ja ii.163, Ja ii.185 ■ Pass. vitujjati Vism 505; Vb-a 104 Vb-a 108 ■ pp. vitunna.

vi + tudati

Vitunna

struck, pricked, pushed Ja iii.380.

pp. of vitudati

Vitureyyati

at Ja v.47 is not clear. The v.l. is vitariyati; the C. expls by tuleti tīreti, i.e. contemplates, examines Kern, Toev. s. v. discusses it in detail & proposes writing; vituriyata (3rd sg. praet. med.), & expl;s at “get over Dutoit trsls “überstieg.”

cp. Vedic tūryati overcome, fr. tur or tvar = P. tarati2

Vitta1

property, wealth, possessions, luxuries SN i.42; Snp 181 sq., 302; Ja v.350, Ja v.445; Ja vi.308; Pv ii.81 (= vittiyā upakaraṇa-bhūtaṃ vittaṃ Pv-a 106) ■ Often in phrase ˚ūpakaraṇa possessions & means, i.e. wealth; e.g. DN i.134; SN i.71; SN iv.324; Pp 52; Dhp i.295; Pv-a 3 Pv-a 71. Vittaṃ is probably the right reading SN i.126 (15) for cittaṃ. Cf. p. 123 (3); K.S. i.153, n. 3.

orig. pp. of vindati = Av. vista, Gr. αἴστος, Lat. vīsus; lit. one who has found, acquired or recognized but already in Vedic meaning (as nt.) “acquired possessions”

Vitta2

(adj.) gladdened, joyful, happy Ja iii.413 (= tuṭṭha); iv.103; Vv 414 (= tuṭṭha C.); 4414 (id.), 495 (id.).

identical with vitta1

Vitta3

see vi˚.

pp. of vic to sift, cp. Sk. vikta

Vittaka

(adj.) possessing riches, becoming rich by (-˚) Ja i.339 (lañca˚); iv.267 (miga˚), vi.256 (jūta˚).

fr. vitta1

Vittakatā

(f.) in suta˚; “the fact of getting rich through learning” as an expln of the name Sutasoma Ja v.457 (for auspiciousness). Dutoit trsls quite differently: “weil er am Keltern des Somatrankes seine Freude hatte,” hardly correct.

vittaka + tā

Vitti

(f.) prosperity, happiness, joy, felicity AN iii.78; Ja iv.103; Ja vi.117; Kv 484; Thag 609; Dhs 9 (cp. Dhs-a 143); Pv-a 106.

cp. Sk. vitti, fr. vid

Vittha

(nt.) a bowl, in surā˚; for drinking spirits Ja v.427; Dhp-a iii.66.

vi + sthā ?

Vitthaka

(nt.) a small bowl, as receptacle (āvesana˚) for needles, scissors & thimbles Vin ii.117.

fr. vittha

Vitthata1

1. extended, spread out, wide MN i.178; Vin i.297; Ja v.319; Mil 311; Snp-a 214; Pv-a 68 (doubtful!).

2. wide, spacious (of a robe Vin iii.259.

3. flat Snp-a 301.

pp. of vi + stṛ;

Vitthata2

perplexed, confused, hesitating Mil 36 (bhīta + ). Ed Müller, P.Gr. 102 considers it as pp. of vi + tras to tremble together with vitthāyati & vitthāyi.;

pp. of vitthāyati (?). A difficult form!

Vitthambhana

(nt.) making firm, strengthening, supporting Vism 351 (cp. Dhs-a 335).

fr. vi + thambhati

Vitthambheti

to make firm, strengthen Dhs-a 335.

vi + thambheti

Vitthāyati

to be embarrassed or confused (lit. to become quite stiff), to be at a loss, to hesitate Vin i.94 = Vin ii.272; aor. vitthāsi (vitthāyi? ibid. [the latter taken as aor. of tras by Geiger, P.Gr. § 166] ■ pp. vitthata2 & vitthāyita;.

vi + styā: see under thīna

Vitthāyitatta

(nt.) perplexity, hesitation DN i.249.

abstr. fr. vitthāyita, pp. of vitthāyati

Vitthāra

1. expansion, breadth; instr. vitthārena in breadth Mil 17; same abl. vitthārato Ja i.49–⁠2. extension, detail; often in C. style, introducing detailed explanation of the subject in question, either with simple statement “ vitthāro ” (i.e. here the foll detail; opp. saṅkhepa ), e.g. DN-a i.65, DN-a i.229; Snp-a 325 [cp. same in BSk. “vistaraḥ,” e.g. Divy 428], or with cpds. ˚kathā Snp-a 464; Pv-a 19; ˚desanā Snp-a 163 ˚vacana Snp-a 416. Thus in general often in instr. or abl. as adv. “in detail,” in extenso (opp. sankhittena in short): vitthārena DN iii.241; SN iv.93; AN ii.77, AN ii.177 AN ii.189; AN iii.177; Pp 41; Pv-a 53, Pv-a 113; vitthārato Vism 351, Vism 479; Pv-a 71, Pv-a 77, Pv-a 81. Cp. similarly BSk. vistarena kāryaṃ Divy 377.

fr, vi + stṛ;

Vitthāratā

(f.) explicitness, detail Ne 2. As vitthāraṇā at Ne 9.

fr. vitthāra

Vitthārika

(adj.) 1. wide-spread Mil 272.

2. widely famed, renowned Snp 693; Ja iv.262. See also bahujañña.

vitthāra + ika

Vitthārita

detailed, told in full Vism 351; Mvu 1, Mvu 2 (ati˚ with too much detail; opp. sankhitta).

pp. of vitthāreti

Vitthāriyati

to expand, to go into detail Ne 9.

Denom. fr. vitthāra

Vitthāreti

1. to spread out AN iii.187.

2. to expand, detail give in full Vism 351; Snp-a 94, Snp-a 117, Snp-a 127 Snp-a 274 and passim ■ pp. vitthārita; f.pp. vithāretabba.

fr. vitthāra

Vitthiṇṇa

“spread out,” wide, large, extensive, roomy Ja ii.159 (so read for vittiṇṇa); Mil 102, Mil 283 Mil 311, Mil 382; Dhs-a 307; Snp-a 76; Vv-a 88; Sdhp 391, Sdhp 617 Cp. pari˚.

vi + thiṇṇa

Vidaṃsaka

(ad.) showing; danta˚; showing one’s teeth (referring to laughter) AN i.261; Ja iii.222.

fr. vidaṃseti

Vidanseti

to make appear, to show AN i.261; Thig 74; Ja v.196; Mil 39. Cp. pa˚.

vi + daṃseti = dasseti

Vidaḍḍha

in redupl ■ iter. cpd. daḍḍhavidaḍḍha-gatta “with limbs all on fire” Mil 303.

vi + daḍḍha

*Vidati

see vindati.

Vidatthi

(f.) a span (of 12 angulas or finger-breadths) Vin iii.149 (dīghaso dvādasa vidatthiyo sugata-vidatthiyā); iv.279; Ja i.337; Ja iii.318; Mil 85; Vism 65, Vism 124, Vism 171, Vism 175, Vism 408; Dhp-a iii.172; Dhp-a iv.220; Vb-a 343 (dvādas’ angulāni vidatthi; dve vidatthiyo ratanaṃ, etc.).

cp. Vedic vitasti; see Geiger, P.Gr. 383

Vidahati

to arrange, appoint, assign; to provide; to practise ■ Pres. vidahati: see saṃ˚ vidadhāti Ja vi.537; vidheti Ja v.107. Pot. vidahe Snp 927 (= vidaheyya Nd i.382); aor. vidahi Ja v.347. Perf. 3rd pl. vidadhu [Sk. vidadhuḥ] Ja vi.284. inf. vidhātuṃ Vin i.303 (bhesajjaṃ); ger. vidhāya Mvu 26, Mvu 12 (ārakkhaṃ, posting a guard) ■ grd vidheyya in meaning “obedient,” tractable Ja vi.291-pp. vihita.

vi + dahati; dhā

Vidāraṇa

(nt.) splitting, rending Dhtp 247 (in expln of dar ), 381 (do of bhid ).

fr. vidāreti

Vidārita

split, rent Sdhp 381.

pp. of vidāreti

Vidāreti

to split, rend Ja i.340 ■ pp. vidārita.

vi + dāreti: see under darī

Vidālana

(nt.) breaking open, bursting, splitting Mil 1.

fr. vidāleti

Vidālita

split, broken, burst Ja i.493; Pv-a 220.

pp. of vidāleti

Vidāleti

to break open, split, burst Thag 184; Pv-a 135, Pv-a 185 ■ pp. vidālita.

vi + dāleti; see dalati

Vidita

known, found (out) DN iii.100; SN v.180; Snp 436, Snp 1052; Mvu 17, Mvu 4; DN-a i.135 (a˚).

pp. of vindati

Viditatta

(nt.) the fact of having found or known, experience Ja ii.53.

abstr. fr. vidita

Vidisā

(f.) an intermediate point of the compass SN i.224; SN iii.239; Snp 1122; Ja i.20, Ja i.101; Ja vi.6, Ja vi.531.

vi + disā

Vidugga

(adj.-n.) hard to walk; troublesome, difficult, painful ■ (m.) difficult passage; difficulty distress DN iii.27; AN iii.128; Ja iii.269; Ja iv.271.

vi + dugga

Vidura

(adj.) wise, clever Ja v.399 (= paṇḍita C.). Cp. vidhura 2.

fr. vid, cp. Sk. vidura

Vidū

(adj.) clever, wise, knowing, skilled in (-˚) SN i.62 (loka˚); v.197; Vin ii.241 (pl. paracittaviduno); Snp 677 (vidūhi), 996; Ja v.222 (dhamma˚) Vv 3011 (= sappañña Vv-a 127); Mil 276; Mvu 15, Mvu 51 (ṭhān’ âṭhāṇa˚ knowing right & wrong sites) ■ In Pass sense in; dubbidū hard to know Ja v.446 ■ For vidū (vidu) “they knew” see vindati.

Vedic vidu

Vidūpita

at Ud 71 (vitakkā vidūpitā) is to be read as vidhūpita.

Vidūra

(adj.) far, remote, distant AN ii.50 (su˚). Mostly neg. ; not far, i.e. near Snp 147; Pv-a 14, Pv-a 31 Pv-a 78, Pv-a 81.

vi + dūra

Vidūsita

(adj.) corrupted, depraved Pv-a 178 (˚citta).

vi + dūsita

Videsa

foreign country Mil 326; Vv-a 338.

vi + desa; cp. disā at Vin i.50

Vidomanassā

(f.) absence of dejection Vism 504 = Vb-a 105.

vi + domanassa

Viddasu

(adj.) skilled, wise MN i.65 (gen. sg. & nom. pl viddasuno), 310 (id.). Usually in neg. form; aviddasu foolish Vin ii.296 = AN ii.56 (pl. aviddasū); SN v.1; Thig 164 (pl. aviddasū); Snp 762 (= bāla C.); Dhp 268 = Nd ii.514 (= aviññū Dhp-a iii.395); Pv-a 18.

another form of vidvā = Sk. vidvān: see under vindati

Viddesa

enmity, hatred Ja iii.353; Thag-a 268.

fr. vi + disa

Viddesanā

(f.) enmity Thig 446; Ja iii.353.

abstr. formation fr. viddesa, cp. disatā2

Viddesin

(adj.-n.) hating; an enemy Thag 547.

vi + desin; see dessin

Viddessati

to hate Thig 418 ■ grd. viddesanīya to be hated, hateful Sdhp 82.

vi + dessati

Viddha1

pierced, perforated; hit, struck, hurt Snp 331; Nd i.414 (sallena); Mil 251 (eaten through by worms); Sdhp 201 (kaṇṭakena).

pp. of vijjhati

Viddha2

(adj.) clear; only in phrase viddha vigata-valāhaka deva a clear sky without a cloud Vin i.3; MN i.317 = SN i.65 = SN iii.156 = SN v.44 = Iti 20.

cp. *Sk. vīdhra clear sky

Viddhaṃsa

demolition, destruction Ja iv.58 (˚kārin).

fr. vidhaṃsati

Viddhaṃsati

to fall down, to be shattered, to be ruined Mil 237; Pv-a 125 (Pot. ˚eyya) ■ Caus viddhaṃseti to shatter, to destroy SN iii.190 (both trs. intrs., the latter for ˚ati); Ja ii.298; Ja iii.431; Ja v.100; DN-a i.265; Nd i.5 (vikirati vidhameti viddhaṃseti: see also under vikirati) ■ pp. viddhasta & viddhaṃsita;. Pass. viddhaṃsīyati to drop or to be destroyed, to come to ruin DN-a i.18 = Dhs-a 19 (suttena sangahitāni pupphāni na vikirīyanti na v.).

vi + dhaṃsati

Viddhaṃsana

(adj.-n..) shattering, destruction (trs. & intrs.) undoing, making disappear; adj. destroying SN iv.83; Mil 351 (kosajja˚); Ja i.322; Ja v.267 (adj.); Vism 85 (vikkhepa + ); Vv-a 58, Vv-a 161 (adj.) ■ Often in phrase (denoting complete destruction): anicc-ucchādana-parimaddana-bhedana-viddhaṃsana-dhamma, e.g. DN i.76; MN i.500; AN iv.386; Ja i.146 [cp. Divy 180: śatanapatana-vikiraṇa-vidhvaṃsana-dharmatā; see also under vikiraṇa].

fr. viddhaṃseti; cp. BSk. vidhvaṃsana Divy 180

Viddhaṃsaka

(adj.) destroying Dhs-a 165.

fr. viddhaṃsana

Viddhaṃsanatā

(f.) quality of destruction, ability to destroy Vism 8.

abstr. formation fr. viddhaṃsana

Viddhaṃsita

shattered, destroyed Dhp-a iii.129.

pp. of viddhaṃseti

Viddhasta

fallen to pieces, broken, destroyed MN i.227; AN ii.50; Snp 542; Ja i.203; Ja v.69, Ja v.401; Vv 6314 (= vinaṭṭha Vv-a 265).

pp. of viddhaṃsati

Viddhā

poet. ger. of vijjhati Ja vi.77.

Vidvā

see under vindati.

Vidha1

(adj. (-˚) of a kind, consisting of,-fold, e.g. aneka˚; manifold DN-a i.103; tathā˚; of such-kind such-like Snp 772; ti˚; threefold DN i.134; Snp 509; nānā˚ various Pv-a 53, Pv-a 96, Pv-a 113; bahu˚; manifold Thag-a 197; etc.

= vidhā

Vidha2

form, kind Thag 428 (māna˚) ■ There are several other meanings of vidha, which are however, uncertain & rest on doubtful readings. Thus it occurs at Vin ii.136 in meaning of “buckle” (v.l. pīṭha; C. silent); at Vin iv.168 in meaning “little box (?); at DN-a i.269 as “carrying pole” (= kāca2, but text DN i.101 has “vividha”).

= vidha1 as noun

Vidhamaka

(adj.) one who throws away or does away with; destroying, clearing away Mil 344 (kilesa-mala-duggandha˚).

fr. vidhamati

Vidhamati

& ˚eti (trs.) to destroy, ruin; do away with, scatter ■ (intrs.) to drop off, fall away, to be scattered, to roll or whirl about. Both vidhamati & ˚eti; are used indiscriminately although the Caus. ˚eti occurs mostly in meaning of “destroy.” (1) vidhamati: SN iii.190; Ja i.284 (in play of words with dhamati to blow; aor. vidhami = viddhaṃsesi C.); vi.490 (vidhamaṃ te raṭṭhaṃ, is ruined) Mil 91, Mil 226 (Mārasenaṃ), 237, 337 (intrs., with vikirati & viddhaṃsati) ■ (2); vidhameti: Nd i.5; Ja iii.261 (poet. vidhamemasi [write ˚se!] = vidhamema, nāsema C.); v.309; Mil 39; Pv-a 168 ■ pp. vidhamita.

vi + dhmā in particular meaning of blowing i.e. driving asunder, cp. dhamati

Vidhamana

(nt.) destroying, scattering, dispersing Mil 244 (Maccu-sena˚).

fr. vidhamati

Vidhamita

destroyed Nd ii.576a.

pp. of vidhamati

Vidhavā

(f.) a widow SN i.170; AN iii.128; Ja vi.33; Mil 288; Vism 17; Pv-a 65, Pv-a 161 Vb-a 339.

Vedic vidhavā widow, vidhu lonely, vidhura separaṭed, Av. vidavā = Goth. widuwō = Ohg. wituwa (Ger. Witwe = E. widow); Gr. ἠίχεος unmarried; Lat vidua widow, etc., in all Idg. languages

Vidhā

(f.) 1. mode, manner, sort, kind; proportion, form, variety DN iii.103 (ādesana˚); Thig 395 (cakkhu˚ “shape of an eye” trsln); Vb-a 496 (in expln of kathaṃ-vidha: “ākāra-saṇṭhānaṃ vidhā nāma”) DN-a i.222 (iddhi˚), 294 (in expln of tividha-yañña “ettha vidhā vuccati ṭhapanā” i.e. performance arrangement), 299 (similarly tisso vidhā = tīṇi ṭhapanāni of yañña) ■ Used as (abl.) adv. vidhā in meaning “variously” at Pv ii.952 (C. expln = vidhātabba, not quite correctly; Pv-a 135). Perhaps the phrase vidhāsamatikkanta is to be explained in this way, viz “excelling in a variety of ways, higher than a variety (of things)” or perhaps better: “going beyond all distinctions” (i.e. of personality); free from prejudice [i.e. No. 2] SN ii.253; SN iii.80, SN iii.136, SN iii.170; AN iv.53. 2. (ethically) in special sense: a distinctive feature (of a person as diff. from others), a “mode” of pride or delusion, a “form” of conceit. As such specified as three kinds of conceit (tisso vidhā ), viz. “seyyo ‘ham asmi,” “sadiso ‘ham asmi,” & “hīno ‘ham asmi (i.e. I am better than somebody else, equal to, & worse than somebody else). See e.g. DN iii.216; SN i.12; SN iii.48 SN iii.80, SN iii.127; SN v.56, SN v.98; Nd i.195; Vb 367; Snp 842; Vb-a 496 (māno va vidhā nāma) ■ The adj. form is vidha: see sep.

cp. Sk. vidhā

Vidhātar

provider, disposer Ja v.221 (dhātā vidhātā, as of Viśvakarman: cp. Macdonell Vedic Mythology p. 118).

n. ag. of vidahati

Vidhāna

(nt.) 1. arrangement, get up, performance, process Ja iii.178 (attano vidhānena “in his robes of office”); Vism 66 sq.; Dhs-a 168 = Vism 122 (bhāvanā˚); Vb-a 69, Vb-a 71 (manasikāra˚) Thag-a 273 (id.).

2. ceremony, rite Ja vi.202 (yañña˚) Mil 3.

3. assignment, disposition, provision Ja ii.208 (vidhi-vidhāna-ññū; C. expld v. as “koṭṭhāso vā saṃvidahanaṃ vā”); Pv-a 30.

4. succession (as much as “supplement”) Kp-a 216; Snp-a 23 (note 2) ■ Cp saṃvidahana & saṃvidhāna.;

fr. vi + dhā; Vedic vidhāna

Vidhānavant

(adj.) making dispositions, careful in providing, circumspect, considerable Ja vi.287.

vidhāna + vant

Vidhāyaka

providing Pv-a 60.

fr. vi + dhā

Vidhāvati

to run about, roam, cover space (acc.), stray SN i.37; Snp 411, Snp 939; Nd i.414; DN-a i.39.

vi + dhāvati

Vidhi

(f.) 1. form, way; rule, direction, disposition, method, motto Vism 278 (manasikāra˚, eightfold); Pv-a 78 (dāna˚ = dāna), 126; Vv-a 82 ■ instr. vidhinā in due form Mvu 14, Mvu 52; Pv-a 130 Sdhp 336.

2. luck, destiny Ja ii.243 (˚rahita unlucky).

fr. vi + dhā, cp. Ved. vidhi

Vidhutika

a wreath Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180.

etym.?

Vidhunāti

to shake SN i.197; Mil 399; Vism 71.

2. to remove, to skin (an animal) Vin i.193.

vi + dhunāti

Vidhura

(adj.) 1. destitute, lonely; miserable, wretched Ja v.399 (so read for vidura; according to Kern, Toev. s. v., but doubtful). 2. [vi + dhura] “burdenless,” unequalled Snp 996 (= vigata-dhura, appaṭima Snp-a 583); AN i.116 (here in meaning “clever,” perhaps = vidura; spelt vidhūra) Cp. Np. Vidhura Kp-a 128; Snp-a 201 (as Vidhūra at Ja iv.361).

Vedic vidhura: see vidhavā

Vidhūpana

(adj.-n..) fanning, a fan Vin ii.130; Vin iv.263; AN ii.130; Nd ii.562; Vv 3342 (= caturassa vījani) Vv-a 147; Vb-a 71.

fr. vidhūpeti

Vidhūpita

scattered, destroyed Snp 472 (= daḍḍha Snp-a 409); Ud 71 (so read for vidūpita).

pp. of vidhūpeti

Vidhūpeti

(˚dhūpayati) 1. to fumigate, perfume, diffuse Mil 252.

2. to scatter, destroy Vin i.2 (vidhūpayaṃ Māra-senaṃ); SN i.14; SN iii.90 = AN v.325; SN iv.210; Pts ii.167 ■ pp. vidhūpita.

vi + dhūpayati

Vidhūma

(& vidhuma) (adj.) “without smoke,” i.e. passionless, quiet, emancipated SN i.141 (K.S.: “no fume of vice is his”); Snp 460 (= kodhadhūma-vigamena v. Snp-a 405), 1048 (cp. Nd ii.576 with long exegesis); Pv iv.134 (= vigata-micchā-vitakkadhūma Pv-a 230).

vi + dhūma

Vinaṭṭha

destroyed Vv-a 265; Pv-a 55.

pp. of vinassati

Vinata

bent, bending Pv-a 154 (˚sākhā).

pp. of vi + nam

Vinadati

to cry or shout out, to scold Ja iii.147 (kāmaṃ vinadantu let them shout!). Cp. BSk. vinādita “reviled” Divy 540.

vi + nadati

Vinaddha

covered, bound, intertwined Vin i.194 (camma˚, onaddha + ); Ja v.416; Ja vi.589 (kañcanalatā˚ bheri); Vism 1 (= jaṭita saṃsibbita).

pp. of vinandhati

Vinandhati

to close, encircle, cover Mvu 19, Mvu 48; Vism 253 (ppr. vinandhamāna: so read for vinaddh˚) ■ pp. vinaddha.

vi + nandhati

Vinandhana

(nt.) tying, binding Vin ii.116 (˚rajju rope for binding).

fr. vi + nandhati

Vinaya

1. driving out, abolishing destruction, removal Vin i.3 (asmi-mānassa), 235 iii.3 (akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ vinayāya dhammaṃ desemi); SN i.40; Snp 921; AN i.91 (kodha˚, upanāha˚) ii.34 (pipāsa˚); iv.15 (icchā˚); v.165 (id.); Snp-a 12; Pv-a 114 (atthassa mūlaṃ nikati˚). Often in phrase rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚; e.g. SN iv.7 sq.; SN v.137 sq., 241; AN iv.175; Ne 22.

2. rule (in logic), way of saying or judging, sense, terminology (cp. iminā nayena SN iv.95 (ariyassa vinaye vuccati loko); AN i.163 (ariyassa vinaye tevijjo one called a threefold wise in the nomenclature of the Buddhist); ii.166 (ariyassa v.); Snp-a 403

3. norm of conduct, ethics, morality, good behaviour Snp 916, Snp 974; Ja iv.241 (= ācāra-vinaya C.); AN ii.112 AN iii.353 sq. (ariya-vinaye saddhā yassa patiṭṭhitā etc faith established in Buddhist ethics).

4. code of ethics, monastic discipline, rule, rules of morality or of canon law. In this sense applied to the large collection of rules which grew up in the monastic life and habits of the bhikkhus and which form the ecclesiastical introduction to the “Dhamma,” the “doctrine,” or theoretical, philosophical part of the Buddhist Canon The history & importance of the Vinaya Piṭaka will be dealt with under the title “Vinaya” in the Dictionary of Names. Only a few refs. must suffice here to give a general idea. See also under Dhamma C., and in detail Geiger, Dhamma pp. 55

58 ■ Often combd with dhamma: dhammato vinayato ca on the ground of Dh. and V. Vin i.337; cp. ii.247 ■ dhammo ca vinayo ca Vin i.356; Vin ii.285, Vin ii.302; or (as (Dvandva) dhammavinaya (i.e. the teaching of the Buddha in its completeness) DN i.229; Vin ii.237 sq.; MN i.284; MN ii.181 sq. AN i.283; AN iii.297, AN iii.327; SN i.9; SN iii.65; Ud 53; Vv-a 3 Often approaches the meaning of “Buddhist order, e.g. Vin i.69; DN i.176; MN i.68, MN i.459, MN i.480; MN iii.127; SN ii.120; AN i.185; AN ii.123; AN v.122See further Vin ii.96 (vinaye cheko hoti); AN ii.168 (ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ v. idaṃ Satthu-sāsanaṃ); Vism 522; Vb-a 273; Kp-a 106 Kp-a 151; Snp-a 4, Snp-a 195, Snp-a 310a-vinaya one who sins against the V. (like a-dhamma one who neglects the Dh. Vin ii.295 sq.; Vin iii.174; AN i.18; AN v.73 sq ■ The division of the books of the Vinaya is given at Dhs-a 18. Its character (as shown by its name) is given in the foll verse at Dhs-a 19: “(vividha-visesa-) nayattā vinayanato c’ eva kāya-vācānaṃ vinayy’ attha-vidūhi ayaṃ vinayo Vinayo ti akkhāto,” i.e. “Because it shows precepts & principles, and governs both deed and word, therefore men call this scripture V., for so is V interpreted” (Expos. i. 23).

-aṭṭhakathā the (old) commentary on the Vinaya Vism 72, Vism 272; Vb-a 334; Kp-a 97. -ānuggaha taking up (i.e. following the rules) of the Vinaya Vin iii.21; AN i.98, AN i.100; AN v.70. -kathā exposition of the Vinaya Vin iv.142. -dhara one who knows or masters the V by heart, an expert in the V. Vin i.169; Vin ii.299 (with dhamma-dhara & mātikā-dhara); AN i.25; AN ii.147 AN iii.78 sq., 179, 361; iv.140 sq.; v.10 sq.; Ja iii.486 Ja iv.219; Vism 41, Vism 72; Kp-a 151; Dhp-a ii.30 (with dhamma-kathika & dhuta-vāda) [cp. BSk. vinayadhara Divy 21].; -piṭaka the V. Piṭaka Kp-a1 2, 97; Vb-a 431 -vatthu chapter of the V. Vin ii.307. -vādin one who professes the V. (or “speaking in accordance with the rules of conduct”), aN V ■ follower DN i.4 (here expld by Bdhgh as “saṃvara-vinaya-pahāna-vinaya sannissitaṃ katvā vadatī ti” v. DN-a i.76, thus taking it as vinaya 3 = MN iii.49 = Pp 58 (trsln here: “speaking according to self-control”); DN iii.135, DN iii.175.

fr. vi + , cp. vineti

Vinayati

see vineti.

Vinayana

(nt.) 1. removing, removal Mil 318 (pipāsā˚); Pv-a 39 (soka˚).

2. instruction, discipline setting an example Ja v.457 (conversion); Mil 220.

fr. vi +

Vinaḷīkata

(adj.) lit. “having the reed or stem removed, rendered useless, destroyed MN i.227; AN ii.39; Snp 542 (= ucchinna Snp-a 435); Thag 216; Ja vi.60 (viddhasta + as at Snp 542).

vi + naḷa + kata, with naḷī for naḷa in combn with kṛ;

Vinassati

to be lost; to perish, to be destroyed SN iv.309; MN ii.108 (imper. vinassa “away with you”) Ja iii.351; Ja v.468; Pv iii.45; Vism 427 ■ pp. vinaṭṭha Caus. vināseti.

vi + nassati

Vinā

(indecl.) without, used as prep. (or post-position) with (usually) instr., e.g. Vin ii.132 (vinā daṇḍena without a support); Pv-a 152 (purisehi vinā without men); or abl., e.g. Snp 589 (ñāti sanghā vinā hoti is separated from his relatives; cp BSk. vinābhavati Mvu i.243); or acc., e.g. Mvu 3, Mvu 10 (na sakkā hi taṃ vinā). In compn vinā-bhāva separation [cp. BSk. vinābhāva Mvu ii.141] Snp 588 Snp 805; Nd i.122; Ja iii.95; Ja iv.155; Ja v.180; Ja vi.482 (= viyoga C.).

Vedic vinā = vi-nā (i.e. “not so”), of pron. base Idg. *no (cp. nānā “so & so”), as in Sk. ca-na Lat. ego-ne, pō-ne behind, etc. See na1

Vināti

to weave Ja ii.302; Dhp-a i.428 (tantaṃ); inf. vetuṃ Vin ii.150. Pass. viyyati. Cp. upavīyati ■ Caus. II. vināpeti to order to be woven Vin iii.259 (= vāyāpeti).

vi, by-form of to weave: see vāyati1

Vināma

(m.) & Vināmana (nt.) bending Mil 352 (˚na); Vb-a 272 (kāya-vināmanā, bending the body for the purpose of getting up; in expln of vijambhikā); Dhtp 208.

fr. vināmeti

Vināmeti

to bend, twist Mil 107, Mil 118.

vi + nāmeti; Caus. of namati

Vināyaka

1. a leader, guide, instructor MN ii.94; Vv 167 (= veneyya-satte vineti Vv-a 83); Thag-a 69. 2. a judge Ja iii.336.

fr. vi +

Vināsa

destruction, ruin, loss DN i.34 (+ uccheda & vibhava), 55; Pv ii.710; Vism 427 (so read for vinasa); DN-a i.120; Pv-a 102 (dhana˚), 133. Vinasaka (ika)

vi + nāsa, of naś

Vināsaka (˚ika)

(adj.) causing ruin; only neg. ; not causing destruction AN iii.38; AN iv.266, AN iv.270; Ja v.116.

fr. vināsa

Vināsana

(adj.), only neg. ; imperishable Dpvs iv.16.

fr. vināsa

Vināseti

1. to cause destruction, to destroy, ruin, spoil Thag 1027; Snp 106; Pv ii.78 DN-a i.211; Pv-a 3 (dhanaṃ), 116; Sdhp 59, Sdhp 314, Sdhp 546. 2. to drive out of the country, to expel, banish Ja iv.200.

Caus. of vinassati

Vinigaḷati

to drop down Mil 349.

vi + nigaḷati

Viniggata

coming (out) from Ja vi.78; DN-a i.140; Dhp-a iv.46; Sdhp 23.

vi + niggata

Viniggaha

checking, restraint Pts i.16; Pts ii.119.

vi + niggaha

Viniggilati

to throw out, to emit Kp-a 95.

vi + niggilati

Vinighātin

(adj.) afraid of defeat, anxious about the outcome (of a disputation), in phrase vinighāti-hoti (for ˚ī-hoti) Snp 826, cp. Nd i.164.

fr. vi + nighāta

Vinicchaya

1. discrimination, distinction, thought, (firm) opinion thorough knowledge of (-˚) AN iii.354 (pāpakamma˚) Snp 327 (dhamma˚), 838 (= dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhi-vinicchayā Nd i.186), 867 (˚ṃ kūrute; cp. Nd i.265); Ja iii.205 (attha˚) Pv-a 1, Pv-a 112, Pv-a 210 (kūṭa˚), 287.

2. decision; (as t. t. in law:) investigation, trial, judgment (given by the king or his ministers) DN ii.58 (with ref. to lābha, expld as deciding what to do with one’s gains) = iii.289 = AN iv.400 = Vb 390 (expld at Vb-a 512, where vinicchaya is said to be fourfold, viz. ñāṇa˚, taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚, vitakka˚); Ja ii.2.

3. court house, hall of judgment Ja i.176 Ja iii.105; Ja iv.122, Ja iv.370; Ja vi.333; Mil 332 (vinaya˚, i.e. having the Vinaya as the law court in the City of Righteousness).

4. (as t. t. in logic & psychology: (process of) judgment, detailed analysis, deliberation consideration, ascertainment Ja v.60 (˚ṃ vicāreti) Vb-a 46 sq. (according to attha, lakkhaṇa, etc.), 83 sq (id.); Kp-a 23, Kp-a 75.

-kathā analytical discussion, exegesis, interpretation Vism 16; Vb-a 291 (opp. pāḷi-vaṇṇanā). -ññū clever in deciding or giving judgment Ja iii.205; Ja v.367 (a˚) -ṭṭhāna place of judgment, law court Ja v.229; Dhp-a iii.141; Dhp-a iv.215. -dhamma law practice Ja v.125; Dhp-a iii.141. -vīthi process of judgment (in logic): see Cpd. 241. -sālā the law court(s) Ja iv.120; Dhp-a iii.380.

vi + nicchaya; cp. Vedic viniścaya

Viniccharati

to go out (in all directions) Ja iv.181.

vi + niccharati

Vinicchita

discerned, decided, distinguished, detailed Vin i.65 (su˚); Ja v.65 (a˚); Snp-a 477; Sdhp 508.

pp. of vinicchināti

Vinicchin

(adj.) discerning Thag 551.

fr. vinicchināti

Vinicchinana

(nt.) giving judgment Ja v.229.

fr. vinicchināti

Vinicchināti

(˚inati ) & vinicchati to investigate, try; to judge, determine, decide Ja v.229 fut. vinicchissati Vin iii.159; ger. vinicchinitvā Nd i.76 aor. vinicchini Ja ii.2; inf. vinicchituṃ Ja i.148; Dhp-a iv.215 ■ pp. vinicchita.

vi + nicchināti

Vinijjita

(adj.) unvanquished Sdhp 318.

vi + nijjita

Vinidhāya

(indecl.) lit. “misplacing,” i.e. asserting or representing wrongly giving a false notion of (acc.) Vin ii.205, expld at Vin iv.2; Snp-a 204.

vi + nidhāya, ger. of vinidahati

Vinindati

to censure, blame, reproach Ja ii.346; Ja vi.200.

vi + nindati

Vinipāta

ruin, destruction; a place of suffering, state of punishment, syn. with apāya duggati; (with which often combd, plus niraya, e.g. Vin i.227; DN i.82, DN i.162; MN i.73; AN iii.211; Iti 58; Pp 60): AN v.169; Snp 278; Ja iii.32; Mil 108; Vism 427 (where expld as “vināsā nipatanti tattha dukkaṭakārino ” together with duggati & niraya). The; sotāpanna is called “avinipāta-dhammo,” i.e. not liable to be punished in purgatory: see under sotāpanna, & cp sym. term; khīna-niraya AN iii.211.

fr. vi + nipāteti

Vinipātika

(adj.) destined to suffer in purgatory, liable to punishment after death DN ii.69; DN iii.253; MN i.73, MN i.390; AN i.123; AN ii.232 sq.; AN iv.39, AN iv.401; Ja v.117, Ja v.119.

fr. vinipāta

Vinipāteti

to bring to ruin, to destroy, to frustrate Vin i.298; Ja vi.71; Vv-a 208.

vi + nipāteti

Vinibaddha

(adj.) bound (to) SN i.20; SN iii.9; AN iii.311 (chanda-rāga˚); iv.289 (id.); Nd i.30 (+ lagga etc.).

vi + nibaddha

Vinibandha

bondage SN ii.17; SN iii.135, SN iii.186; AN i.66 (+ vinivesa); Snp 16 ■ The five cetaso vinibandhā (bondages of the mind) are: kāmesu rāgo, kāye rāgo, rūpe rāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udar’ âvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyya-sukhaṃ anuyogo, aññataraṃ deva-nikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ; thus at DN iii.238; MN i.103; AN iii.249; AN iv.461, AN iv.463 sq.; AN v.17; Vb 377.

vi + nibandha

Vinibbhujati

(or ˚bhuñjati ) 1. [to bhuj, to bend, as in bhuja1 & nibbhujati] to turn inside out Thig 471.

2. [to; bhuj or bhuñj as in bhuñjati2 and paribhuñjati2] to separate, cut off, remove MN i.233; SN iii.141; SN iv.168 (spells wrongly jj).

3. [id.] to cleanse fig. to sift out thoroughly, to distinguish, discriminate MN i.292; Ja v.121 (avinibbhujaṃ, ppr.); Mil 63 (doubled) Vism 438 (spelling wrongly jj); Dhs-a 311 ■ pp vinibbhutta.

vi + ni + bhujati

Vinibbhujana

(nt.) turning inside out Thag-a 284.

fr. vinibbhujati

Vinibbhutta

separated, distinguished, discriminated Vism 368.

pp. of vinibbhujati

Vinibbhoga1

(adj.) lacking, deprived of (-˚), deficient Thag-a 248 (viññāṇa˚).

vi + nibbhoga

Vinibbhoga2

sifting out, distinction, discrimination Vism 306 (dhātu˚), 368 (id.); neg. absence of discrimination, indistinction Dhs-a 47; used as adj. in sense of “not to be distinguished,” indistinct at Ja iii.428 (˚sadda).

fr. vinibbhujati 3

Vinibhindati

to break (right) through MN i.233.

vi + ni + bhid

Vinimaya

reciprocity, barter, exchange Ja ii.369.

fr. vi + nimināti

Vinimīleti

to shut one’s eyes Sdhp 189.

vi + nimīleti

Vinimutta

(Vinimmutta) 1. released, free from Ja i.375 (mm); Sdhp 1, Sdhp 4, Sdhp 16, Sdhp 225.

2. discharged (of an arrow) Dhp-a iii.132 (mm).

vi + nis + mutta

Vinimoceti

to free (oneself) from, to get rid of AN iii.92; Pp 68.

vi + nis + moceti, cp. nimmoka

Viniyujjati

to be connected with, to ensue, accrue Pv-a 29 (= upakappati).

vi + niyujjati

Viniyoga

possession, application, use Dhs-a 151; Vv-a 157; Pv-a 171, Pv-a 175.

vi + niyoga

Vinivaṭṭeti

(& ˚vatteti ) 1. to turn over, to repeat Ja i.25 (ṭṭ), 153 (ṭṭ), 190 (ṭṭ).

2. to turn (somebody) away from, to distract Pv i.88 (read ˚vattayi for ˚vattanti); ii.619 (˚vattayi; aor.); Ja iii.290 (ṭṭ). 3. to roll over, to glide off Ja iii.344 (ṭṭ); Dhp-a ii.51 (ṭṭ).

vi + nivatteti

Vinivijjha

(adj.) to be pierced; in dubbinivijjha difficult to pierce, hard to penetrate Ja v.46.

grd. of vinivijjhati

Vinivijjhati

to pierce through & through Ja ii.91; Mil 339; Dhs-a 253.

vi + ni + vijjhati

Vinivijjhana

(nt.) piercing, perforating, penetrating Dhs-a 253; Thag-a 197 (in expln of bahuvidha).

fr. vinivijjhati

Vinividdha

pierced (all through), perforated Ja v.269; Ja vi.105; Vism 222.

pp. of vinivijjhati

Viniveṭhana

(& ˚nibbeṭhana ) (nt.) unwrapping, unravelling; fig. explaining, making clear, explanation, refutation Nd ii.503 (diṭṭhi-sanghātassa vinibbeṭhana; where id. p. at Nd i.343 reads vinivedhana, cp, nibbedha); Mil 96; Vv-a 297 (diṭṭhi-gaṇṭhiviniveṭhana).

vi + nibbeṭhana

Viniveṭheti

1. to disentangle, to unwrap Vin i.3, Vin i.276 (anta-gaṇṭhiṃ, the intestines); Ja ii.283 (sarīraṃ); v.47.

2. to disentangle oneself, to free oneself (from) AN iii.92; Pp 68.

vi + nibbeṭheti

Vinivesa

tie, bond, attachment AN i.66 (+ vinibandha).

vi + nivesa

Vinīta

led, trained, educated SN v.261; AN iv.310 (viyatta + ); Dhp-a ii.66 (˚vatthu); Pv-a 38- avinīta not trained SN iv.287; Vv 297; Dhs 1003, Dhs 1217 suvinīta well trained SN iv.287; opp. dubbinīta badly trained Ja v.284, Ja v.287ratha-vinīta (nt.) a relay MN i.149.

pp. of vineti

Vinīlaka

(adj.) of a bluish-black (purple) colour, discoloured Ja ii.39 (of a cygnet, bastard of a swan & a crow, “resembling neither father nor mother, i.e. “black & white”). Usually applied to the colour of a corpse (purple, discoloured), the contemplation of which forms one of the 10 asubha-saññās: MN i.88 (uddhumātaka + ); Snp 200 (id.) ■ AN i.42; AN ii.17; SN v.129 sq.; Dhs 264; Ne 27; Mil 332; Vism 110, Vism 178 Vism 193.

vi + nīlaka

Vinīvaraṇa

(adj.) unobstructed, unbiassed, unprejudiced AN ii.71; Sdhp 458. Usually in phrase ˚citta of an unbiassed mind, combd with mudu-citta udagga-citta;: Vin i.16, Vin i.181; DN i.110, DN i.148; AN iv.186. Same in BSk., e.g. Mvu iii.225; Divy 616 sq.

vi + nīvaraṇa

Vinudati

is only found in Caus. form vinodeti.

Vinetar

teacher, instructor, guide Snp 484; Pts ii.194 (netar, vinetar, anunetar); Ja iv.320.

n. ag. fr. vineti

Vineti

1. to remove, put away, give up ■ ppr. vinayaṃ Ja vi.499; Pot. 3rd sg. vinayetha Snp 361, & vineyya Snp 590; imper. vinaya Snp 1098,; vinayassu Snp 559 ■ ger. vineyya Snp 58 (but taken as Pot. at Nd ii.577b); Pv ii.334 (macchera-malaṃ); vinetvā Ja v.403 (chandaṃ); vinayitvā Vv-a 156, & vinayitvāna Snp 485 (bhakuṭiṃ).

2. to lead, guide, instruct, train educate AN iii.106 (inf. vinetuṃ ); SN iv.105 (Pot. vineyyaṃ & fut.; vinessati ); aor. vinesi Mil 13 (Abhidhamme) ger. vinayitvāna Thag-a 69 (Ap. v. 10); grd. vinetabba Snp-a 464, & vineyya Mil 12; cp. veneyya ■ pp vinīta.

vi + neti; cp. vinaya

Vinodaka

(adj.) driving out, dispelling, allaying Pv-a 114 (parissama˚).;

fr. vinodeti, cp. nudaka & nūdaka

Vinodana

(adj.-n..) dispelling, removal AN iii.387, AN iii.390; Snp 1086 (chanda-rāga˚, = pahāna etc Nd ii.578); Mil 285; DN-a i.140 (niddā˚); Dhp-a i.41 (tama˚, adj.); Pv-a 38 (soka˚).

fr. vinodeti

Vinodeti

to drive out, dispel, remove, put away SN iv.70, SN iv.76, SN iv.190; AN ii.13, AN ii.117; Snp 273, Snp 956 (tamaṃ); 967; Nd i.454, Nd i.489; Ja i.183; Ja ii.63, Ja ii.283 (sinehaṃ); Vv 8426; Mil 259 (imper. vinodehi, + apanehi nicchārehi); Mvu 5, Mvu 245 (vimatiṃ); 31, 10 (kankhaṃ) Dhp-a iv.145; Pv-a 38 (sokaṃ).

Caus. of vi + nudati

Vindati

the Vedic differentiations vetti “to know” and vindati “to find” are both in Pāli, but only in sporadic forms, some of which are archaic and therefore only found in poetry. Of vid are more frequent the Pass. vijjati and derivations fr the Caus. ved˚. The root vind occurs only in the present tense and its derivations ■ A. vid to know, to ascertain: The old Vedic pres. vetti only at Thag 497 (spelt veti). Another old aor. is vedi [Sk. ayedīt] Dhp 419, Dhp 423; Ja iii.420 (= aññāsi); iv.35 (here perhaps as aor. to Caus. vedeti: to cause to know or feel). Remnants of the old perfect tense 3rd pl. [Sk. viduḥ] are vidū & viduṃ (appears as vidu in verse), e.g. at Thag 497; Snp 758; Pv ii.74 (= jānanti Pv-a 102); Ja v.62 (= vijānanti C.); Mvu 23, Mvu 78. The old participle of the same tense is vidvā [ = Sk. vidvān; cp. Geiger P.Gr. 1002] in meaning “wise” Snp 792, Snp 897, Snp 1056, Snp 1060 expld as vijjāgato ñāṇī vibhāvī medhāvī at Nd i.93, Nd i.308 Nd ii.575. Opp. avidvā Snp 535; MN i.311 ■ Younger forms are a reconstructed (grammatical) pres. vidati DN-a i.139; ger. viditvā SN v.193; Snp 353, Snp 365, Snp 581, Snp 1053 Snp 1068 and pp. vidita (q.v.) ■ Pass. vijjati to be found to be known, to exist; very frequent, e.g. Snp 20 (pl vijjare), 21, 431, 611, 856, 1001, 1026; Thag 132; DN i.18; Pv i.56; ii.318 (spelt vijjite!) ii.914 (= atthi C.) 3rd sg. pret. vijjittha Snp 1098 (mā v. = saṃvijjittha Nd ii.568). ppr. vijjamāna existing Ja i.214; Ja iii.127; Pv-a 25, Pv-a 87, Pv-a 103; Mil 216 (gen. pl. vijjamānataṃ). Caus. vedeti; Pass. Caus. vediyati; grd. vedanīya: see separately, with other derivations ■ B. vind to find possess, enjoy (cp. vitta1, vitta2, vitti) Snp 187 (vindate dhanaṃ), 658; Thag 551; Thag 2, Thag 79 (aor. vindi); Ja vi.508 (vindate, med. = look for, try to find for oneself); Mvu 1, Mvu 13 (ppr. vindaṃ); Dhp-a iii.128 (ppr. vindanto), 410; Pv-a 60, Pv-a 77 ■ inf. vindituṃ Mil 122; Ja 18; grd vindiya Vism 526 (as avindiya in expln of avijjā). Cp. nibbindati ■ pp. vitta1 (for which adhigata in lit meaning).

vid, both in meaning “to know” & “to find”; cp. Gr. ε ̓ϊδον I saw, ο ̓ϊδα I know = Sk. veda “Veda, ει ̓́δωλον “idol”; Vedic vindati to find, vetti to know vidyā knowledge; Goth. witan to observe & know Ger. wissen; Goth. weis = E. wise, etc., for which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. video

Vindussara

is v.l. of bindu˚; (q.v.).

Vipakka

(adj.) fully ripe Ja i.136.

vi + pakka

Vipakkha

(adj.) opposite, hostile; enemy; only in foll. cpds.:

-sevaka siding in or consorting with the enemy keeping bad company, a traitor Ja i.186; Ja iii.321; Dhp-a iv.95. -sevin id. Ja i.487; Ja ii.98.

vi + pakkha1 2

Vipakkhika

(adj.) 1. [vi + pakkha1 1] without wings Ja i.429.

2. [vi + pakkha1 2] opposite hostile Sdhp 71.

vipakkha + ika

Vipakkhin

(adj.) having no wings, without wings Ja v.255.

vi + pakkhin

Vipaccatā

(f.) at Vin ii.88 is perhaps a der. fr. vi + vac, and not pac, thus representing a Sk. *vivācyatā, meȧning “challenging in disputation,” quarrelsomeness, provocation See also vipāceti. If fr. vi + pac, the meaning would be something like “heatedness, exasperation.”

Vipaccati

1. to be cooked, i.e. to ripen Ja v.121; Pv-a 104.

2. to bear fruit DN ii.266; SN i.144; MN i.388; Ne 37; Vv-a 171.

vi + paccati

Vipaccanaka

(adj.) bearing fruit, ripening (fully) Mil 421 (Notes); Pv-a 190.

fr. vipaccati, cp. paccana

Vipaccanīka

(adj.) hostile MN i.402; AN iv.95; Ja iv.108; Pp 20; Vb 351, Vb 359, Vb 371; Vb-a 478; Pv-a 87.

vi + paccanīka

Vipajjati

to go wrong, to fail, to perish (opp. sampajjati) Dhp-a iii.357; Pv-a 34 ■ pp. vipanna. Vipancana & Vipanciyati;

vi + pajjati

Vipañcanā & Vipañciyati

: see under vipañcita.

Vipañcita

only in phrase ˚ññū either: knowing diffuseness or detail, or: of unillusioned understanding, clear-minded, unprejudiced combd with ugghaṭita-ññū at AN ii.135 = Pp 41 (trsld by B. C. Law as “learning by exposition”; PugA 223 expls as “vitthāritaṃ atthaṃ jānāti,” i.e. one who knows a matter expld in detail. The spelling at AN ii.135 is vipacita˚; at Pp 41 vipaccita˚ & at PugA vipaccita˚ with v.l. vipañcita˚); Ne 7 sq., 125; Snp-a 163 (where ugghaṭita-ññū is applied to those who understand by condensed instruction, sankhepa-desanāya, and vipañcita-ññū to those who need a detailed one, vitthāradesanā; thus “learning by diffuseness”) ■ At Ne 9 we have the var. terms vipañcanā, vipañcayati vipañciyati; (Denom.) used in the description of var ways of parsing and grammatical analysis. Here vipañcanā (resting clearly on Sk. papañca expansion means “expanding” (by letters & vowels) and stands midway between; ugghaṭanā & vitthāraṇā “condensing & detailing.” The term vipañcayati (= vipañciyati) is used in the same way ■ Note. The term is not sufficiently cleared up. It occurs in BSk. as vipañcika (e.g. Divy 319, Divy 391, Divy 475, where it is appld to “brāhmaṇā naimittikā” & trsl;d by Cowell as “sooth-sayer”), and vipañcanaka (Divy 548?), with which cp. vipañcitājña at Lal 520. See remark on vejjañjanika.

fr. vi + pañc, cp. papañcita

Vipaṇeti

to sell, to trade (with) Ja iv.363 (= vikkiṇati C.).

vi + Caus. of paṇati

Vipatati

see vipāṭeti 2.

Vipatti

(f.) wrong state, false manifestation, failure, misfortune (opp. sampatti ) Vin i.171 (ācāra failure of morality); AN i.270 (ājīva˚); iv.26, 160 (atta˚ para˚); Pts i.122; Ja vi.292; Ne 126 (the 3 vipattiyo sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚, ācāra˚); Dhp-a i.16 (sīla˚) DN-a i.235. Often in pair diṭṭhi˚; wrong view, heresy, & sīla˚; moral failure: DN ii.213; AN i.95, AN i.268, AN i.270; Vin v.98; Vb 361; Dhs 1361payoga˚; wrong application Pv-a 117, Pv-a 136 (opp. ˚sampatti).

vi + patti2

Vipatha

wrong way or course Vv 5010 (= apatha Vv-a 212).

vi + patha

Vipanna

gone wrong, having lost, failing in (-˚), opp. sampanna: AN iii.19 (rukkho sākhā-palāsa a tree which has lost branches and leaves); Snp 116 (˚diṭṭhi one who has wrong views, heretic; expld as “vinaṭṭha-sammādiṭṭhi” Snp-a 177); Mil 258 (su thoroughly fallen). -sīla˚; gone wrong in morals, lacking morality Vin i.63 (+ ācāra˚, diṭṭhi˚); ii.4 (id.); Ja iii.138 (vipanna-sīla).

pp. of vipajjati

Vipannatta

(nt.) failure, misfortune Dhs A 367.

fr. vipanna

Viparakkamma

(indecl.) endeavouring strongly, with all one’s might Snp 425

ger. of vi + parakkamati

Viparāmosa

(Viparāmāsa ) highway robbery DN i.5 (expld as twofold at DN-a i.80, viz. hima˚ & gumba˚ or hidden by the snow & a thicket; the pop. etym given here is “janaṃ musanti,” i.e. they steal, or beguile people); iii.176 (v.l. ˚māsa); AN ii.209; AN v.206; SN v.473; Pp 58.

vi + parāmāsa, the form ˚mosa probably a distortion of ˚māsa

Viparāvatta

reversed, changed DN i.8; MN ii.3; SN iii.12; SN v.419; DN-a i.91.

pp. of vi + parā + vṛt

Vipariṇata

changed, perverted Dhs 1038; Vb 1, Vb 3, Vb 5 sq.; Mil 50.

vi + pariṇata

Vipariṇāma

change (for the worse), reverse, vicissitude DN iii.216 (˚dukkhatā); MN i.457 (also as “disappointment”); SN ii.274; SN iii.8; SN iv.7 sq., 67 sq. AN ii.177 (˚dhamma subject to change); iii.32; v.59 sq. Vb 379 (˚dhamma); Vism 499 (˚dukkha), 629 sq. Vb-a 93 (id.); Pv-a 60 ■ a˚ absence of change, steadfastness DN i.18; DN iii.31, DN iii.33; Dhp-a i.121.

vi + pariṇāma

Vipariṇāmeti

to change, alter DN i.56 (T. ˚ṇamati; but DN-a i.167 ˚ṇāmeti: sic for ˚ṇāmati!) = SN iii.211; Pv-a 199.

Denom. fr. vipariṇāma

Viparibhinna

(entirely) broken up MN i.296; SN iv.294.

vi + paribhinna

Vipariyattha

in verse at Ja v.372 is the poet. form of vipallattha (so the C. expln).

Vipariyaya

& Vipariyāya change, reversal DN-a i.148 (ā); Snp-a 499; Dhs-a 253 (ā); Sdhp 124, Sdhp 333 Cp. vipariyesa & vipallāsa;.

vi + pariyaya

Vipariyādikata

(adj.) thrown out of its course upset, destroyed Thag 184 (cittaṃ; cp. similar phrase vipariyatthaṃ cittaṃ Ja v.372-The v.l. at Th passage is vimariyādi˚; ).

vipariyāya + kata, with sound change y → d, viz. ˚āyi → ˚ādi

Vipariyesa

reversal, contrariness, wrong state Kv 306 (;three reversals: saññā˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚; or of perception consciousness & views, cp.; Kvu trsln 176); Vb 376 (id.)- ˚gāha inverted grasp i.e. holding opposite views or “holding the contrary aim” (B. C. Law) Pp 22; Dhs-a 253 (= vipallattha-gāha).

a contamination form between ˚pariyaya & ˚pallāsa

Viparivatta

changing or turning round, upset Ja i.344 (lokassa ˚kāle).

vi + parivatta

Viparivattati

to turn round, to upset Ja iv.224 (nāvā ˚amānā capsizing); Mil 117; Thag-a 255.

vi + parivattati

Viparivattana

(nt.) changing, change. reverse Dhs-a 367.

fr. viparivattati

Viparīta

(adj.) reversed, changed; equivocal; wrong, upset AN iii.114 (˚dassana); iv.226 (id.); v.284; Thig 393; Ja i.334; Kv 307; Mil 285 Mil 324; Ne 85 (˚gāha), 126 (˚saññā); Pv-a 244aviparīta unequivocal, certain, distinct, definite AN v.268 (˚dassana); Mil 214 (˚vacana); Pv-a 231 (= sacca yāthāva).;

pp. of vi + pari + i

Viparītatā

(f.) contradistinction Vism 450 (tabbiparītatā).

abstr. fr. viparīta

Vipalāvita

made to float, floating, thrown out (into water) Ja iv.259 (reads viplāvitaṃ) = i.326 (reads vipalāvitaṃ, with reading nipalāvitaṃ in C.). The C. at Ja iv.259 expls as “ uttārita, ” so at Ja i.326 as “brought out of water,” fished out = thale ṭhapita, evidently incorrect.

vi + palāvita, pp. of Caus. of plu

Vipallattha

(adj.) changed, reversed, upset, deranged corrupt, perverted. Occurs in two forms: vipariyattha Ja v.372 (˚cittaṃ: in poetry); and vipallattha Vism 20 (˚citta: trsln “with corrupt thought”; T. spells vipallatta v.l. ˚attha); Dhs-a 253 (˚gāha); Pv-a 212.

= Sk. viparyasta, pp. of vi + pari + as: see vipallāsa

Vipallāsa

reversal change (esp. in a bad sense), inversion, perversion derangement, corruption, distortion ■ The form vipariyāsa occurs at Vin ii.80 (citta-˚kata, with deranged mind or wrong thoughts); Ja i.344 (where it is expld by vipallāsa). Otherwise vipallāsa, e.g. Snp 299; Pts ii.80 Vism 214 (attha˚); Ne 4, Ne 27, Ne 31, Ne 85 sq., 115 sq.; Dhp-a ii.228; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 70 ■ There are 3 kinds of vipallāsas viz. saññā˚; perversion of perception, citta˚; of thought diṭṭhi˚; of views; AN ii.52; Ne 85; Vism 683. See the same under vipariyesa!

cp. Sk. viparyāsa, vi + pari + as (to throw). The diaeretic P. form (founded on Sk. is vipariyāsa another bastard form is vipariyesa (q.v.)

Vipallāsayati

to be deceived (about), to distort, to have or give a wrong notion (of) Ne 85.

Denom. fr. vipallāsa

Vipassaka

(adj.) qualified to win insight, contemplating, gifted with introspection SN ii.232; Pts i.167; Mil 342, Mil 369; Mil 393, Vb-a 297.

fr. vipassati

Vipassati

to see clearly; to have intuition, to obtain spiritual insight DN iii.196 (ye nibbutā loke yathābhūtaṃ vipassisuṃ, aor.); Thag 471; Thag 2, Thag 271 (vipassi for ˚passasi); Snp 1115; Ja iii.183 (pabbajitvā vipassitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu).

vi + passati

Vipassanā

(f.) inward vision, insight, intuition, introspection DN iii.213, DN iii.273; SN iv.195, SN iv.360; SN v.52 (samatha + ) AN i.61 (id.), 95; ii.140, 157 (samatha + ); iv.360; v.99 131; Pts i.28, Pts i.57 sq., 181; ii.92 sq.; Pp 25; Ja i.106; Dhs 55, Dhs 1356; Ne 7, Ne 42 sq., 50, 82, 88 sq., 125 sq., 160, 191; Mil 16; Vism 2 (with jhāna etc.), 289 (+ samādhi) 628 sq. (the 18 mahā˚); Pv-a 14 (samāhita-citta˚), 167; Vv-a 77; Sdhp 457, Sdhp 466.

-aṅga constituent of intuition Snp-a 8 (given as “nāmarūpa-pariccheda etc.”). -upekkhā indifference by introspection Vism 162. -kammaṭṭhāna exercise for intuition Dhp-a iv.46. -ñāṇa ability or method of attaining insight Vism 629; Dhp-a iv.30; cp. Cpd. 65 sq., where 10 such modes. -dhura obligation of introspection Dhp-a i.8; Dhp-a iv.37 sq.

fr. vi + passati; BSk. vipaśyanā, e.g. Divy 44, Divy 95, Divy 264 etc.

Vipassin

(adj.) gifted with insight, wise AN iv.244; Snp 349; Iti 2 = Iti 7.

fr. vipassati

Vipāka

fruit, fruition, product; always in pregnant meaning of “result, effect, consequence (of one’s action),” either as good & meritorious (; kusala or bad & detrimental (; akusala ). Hence “retribution (kamma˚; ), reward or punishment. See on term e.g. Dhs. trsln introd.2xciii; Cpd. 43. 249 ■ DN iii.150, DN iii.160 DN iii.176 sq.; SN i.34, SN i.57, SN i.92 (kammassa); ii.128 (compar vipākatara), 255 (id.); iv.186 sq., 348 sq.; AN i.48, AN i.97 (sukha˚, dukkha˚), 134 (kamma˚), 263; ii.34 (agga), 80 112; iii.35, 172 (dānassa), 410 sq. (kāmānaṃ etc.), 436 iv. 303 (kamma˚); v.251; Snp 653 (kamma˚); Pts ii.79 (dukkha˚); Pv i.91; i.107 & passim; Pp 13, Pp 21; Dhs 431, Dhs 497, Dhs 987; Vb 16 sq., 73, 319, 326 sq., 334 (sukha˚) Kv 353 sq., 464 (kamma & vipāka); Ne 99, Ne 161 Ne 180 sq.; Tikp 27 (fourfold), 44, 48, 50, 292 (a˚ & sa˚) 328 sq. (˚tika), 350 sq.; Dukp 17; Vism 177, Vism 454 (fourfold), 456 (˚viññāṇa), 538 (˚paccaya), 545 sq.; Vb-a 17, Vb-a 150 sq. (kusala˚ & akusala), 144, 177, 391; Pv-a 50 Pv-a 73, Pv-a 77; Sdhp 12, Sdhp 73, Sdhp 197, Sdhp 235.

fr. vi + pac

Vipākatta

(nt.) state of being ripe Pv-a 52.

abstr. fr. vipāka

Vipāceti

to become annoyed, to get angry (lit. to get heated): this meaning as trsln of vi + pac, although not quite correct as pac means to “ripen” and is not ordinarily used of heated conditions. Since the word is not sufficiently cleared up, we refrain from a detailed discussion concerning possible explanations. It may suffice to point out that it occurs only in Vinaya (and in one sporadic passage SN i.232) in standing combn ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti, expressing annoyance or irritation about something; e.g. Vin i.191; Vin ii.85, Vin ii.291; Vin iv.64. The corresponding BSk. phrase is avadhyāyati dhriyati [to resist, dhṛ ] vivācayati, e.g. Divy 492. It is not quite clear which of the two versions is the older one. There may be underlying a misunderstood (dial.) phrase which was changed by popular analogy. The BSk phrase seems a priori the more intelligible one; if we take vipāceti = vivāceti, we should translate it as “to speak disparagingly.” Mrs. Rh. D at K.S. i.296 trsls as “were vexed and fretted and consumed with indignation “-See remarks under khīyati & cp.; vipaccatā.

Caus. of vi + pac, or distorted fr. vivāceti ?

Vipāṭeti

1. to rip or tear open Vin ii.115. - 2. to be destroyed, to fall to pieces (cp. pāṭeti & Pass pāṭiyati in sense of “destroy”) Pv iv.146 (sanghāṭiyo vipātayanti T.; vv.ll. vināsayati & vidālayati; Pv-a 240 expls as Pass. vipāḷiyati [ = vipaṭiyati?] with v.l. vidāliyati); Ja v.33 (reads: muddhā vipphaleyya sattadhā: perhaps the best reading), 493 (muddhā vipateyya [sic] sattadhā). See vipphalati.

vi + pāṭeti

Vipāḷiyati

see vipāṭeti 2.

Vipiṭṭhi

in phrase vipiṭṭhi-katvā(na) Snp 67 & 362, to turn one’s back on (acc.), to leave behind, to abandon; cp. piṭṭhito karoti. The expln at Nd ii.580 is pahāna etc.; at Snp-a 119 piṭṭhito katvā.

vi + piṭṭhi

Vipina

(nt.) wood, grove DN i.248 (doubtful; vv.ll. vijina, vivada, vivana) Ap 51 (vv.ll. vivana, vicina; C. vivana & vipina); Dāvs iv.39; Pv-a 81 (read vicitta! ).

cp. *Sk. vipina, Halāyudha 2, 55

Viputta

(adj.) without a son, bereft of his son Ja v.106.

vi + putta

Vipubbaka

(adj.) full of corruption or matter, festering (said of a dead body). The contemplation (saññā) of a festering corpse is one of the asubhakammaṭṭhānasMN i.58, MN i.88; MN iii.91; AN iii.324. As ˚saññā: AN ii.17; AN v.310; Dhs 264; Ne 27; Mil 102 Mil 332; Vism 110, Vism 178, Vism 193.

fr. vi + pubba1

Vipula

(adj.) large, extensive, great, abundant. The word is poetical.-D iii.150; AN i.45 (˚paññatā); Snp 41, Snp 675, Snp 687, Snp 978, Snp 994; Thag 588; Nd i.581 (= adhimatta); Vv 676 (= mahanta Vv-a 290) Ap 40; Pv ii.118; ii.49; ii.969 (= ulāra Pv-a 139); Mil 164, Mil 311, Mil 404; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 76; Sdhp 271.

cp. Sk. vipula

Vippakata

1. imperfectly executed, left unfinished, interrupted DN i.2 (cp Dhp i.49); Vin ii.172, Vin ii.243, Vin ii.304; Vin iv.279; AN ii.196; Ja i.120–⁠2. done wrongly Ja v.214 ■ At Vin iv.358 (in Bdhgh’s remarks on Pāc. 26, 1) we find vippagatamedhuna as inaccurate spelling for vippakata-methuna (“interrupted intercourse”).

pp. of vippakaroti; vi + pakata

Vippakaroti

to ill-treat, abuse Vin ii.133. - pp. vippakata.

vi + pa + kṛ;

Vippakāra

change, mutation, alteration Ja vi.370; Dhp-a i.28; Vv-a 46.

vi + pakāra

Vippakiṇṇa

strewn all over, beset with, sprinkled (with) Ja ii.240; Ja vi.42; Dhp-a i.140; DN-a i.40; Vv-a 36.

pp. of vippakirati

Vippakiṇṇatā

(f.) the fact of being beset or endowed (with) Vism 8.

abstr. fr. vippakiṇṇa

Vippakirati

1. to strew all over Pv-a 92. - 2. to confound, destroy Ja ii.398 ■ pp. vippakiṇṇa.

vi + pakirati

Vippakkamati

to part company, to go away Vin iv.284.

vi + pakkamati

Vippajahati

to give up, to abandon Snp 817 (inf. ˚pahātave), 926 (Pot. ˚pajahe); ger. ˚pahāya Snp 367, Snp 499, Snp 514; Ja i.87 ■ pp. vippahīna.

vi + pajahati

Vippaṭikkula

(adj.) contrary, antagonistic Dhs 1325 = Pp 20.

vi + paṭikkūla

Vippaṭipajjati

to go astray; fig. to err, fail; to commit sin Vin iii.166; SN i.73; Ja i.438 ■ pp. vippaṭipanna. Caus. vippaṭipādeti.

vi + paṭipajjati. Cp. BSk. vipratipadyate Divy 293

Vippaṭipatti

(f.) wrong way, error, sin Vism 511.

vi + paṭipatti

Vippaṭipanna

“on the wrong track,” going or gone astray, committing sin Pv iv.159 (˚citta = adhammiyaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipanna Pv-a 242).

pp. of vippaṭipajjati

Vippaṭipādeti

to cause to commit sin (esp. adultery) Vin iii.40.

Caus. of vippaṭipajjati

Vippaṭisāra

bad conscience, remorse, regret, repentance Vin ii.250; DN i.138; SN iii.120, SN iii.125; SN iv.46; AN iii.166, AN iii.197, AN iii.353; AN iv.69; Ja iv.12; Ja v.88; Pp 62; Dhp-a iv.42; Vv-a 116; Pv-a 14, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 105, Pv-a 152; no regret, no remorse AN iii.46.

vi + paṭisāra

Vippaṭisārin

(adj.) remorseful, regretful, repentant SN iii.125 SN iv.133, SN iv.320 sq., 359 sq.; AN iii.165 sq.; AN iv.244, AN iv.390; Ja i.200; Mil 10, Mil 285; Tikp 321, 346.

fr. vippaṭisāra; cp. BSk. vipratisārin Divy 322, Divy 638

Vippataccheti

to scratch open or apart MN i.506.

vi + pa + taccheti

Vippanaṭṭha

strayed, lost, perished Vv 849 = 8444 (= magga-sammūḷha Vv-a 337); Ja iv.139 Ja v.70; Ja vi.525; Mil 326.

vi + pp. of panassati

Vippamutta

released, set free, saved SN i.4, SN i.29, SN i.50; SN iii.31, SN iii.83; SN iv.11; AN i.10; AN ii.34; Snp 176 Snp 218, Snp 363, Snp 472, Snp 492, Snp 501, Snp 913; Ja i.84; Vv 204≈2910; Nd i.331, Nd i.336.

vi + pamutta

Vippamokkha

release, deliverance SN i.154; Ja v.27.

vi + pamokkha

Vippayutta

separated SN ii.173 (visaṃyutta + ); Snp 914 (or ˚mutta). -˚paccaya the relation of dissociation Tikp 6, 53 sq., 65; Vism 539.

vi + payutta

Vippayoga

separation Snp 41; Pv-a 161 (piya˚).

vi + payoga

Vippalapati

to talk confusedly (as in one’s sleep), to chatter, wail, lament Vin i.15; SN iv.303; Ja i.61; Ja iii.217; Ja iv.167; Dhp-a ii.100; Pv-a 40, Pv-a 93.

vi + palapati

Vippalambheti

to deceive, mock DN-a i.151; Thag-a 78.

vi + palambheti

Vippalāpa

confused talk, wailing Pts i.38; Pv-a 18.

vi + palāpa

Vippalujjati

to be broken up, to be destroyed Nd i.5.

vi + palujjati

Vippavadati

to dispute, disagree Ja iv.163; Ja vi.267.

vi + pavadati

Vippavasati

to go from home, to be away from (abl.), to be absent Snp 1138 (= apeti apagacchati vinā hoti Nd ii.582); Ja iv.51, Ja iv.439 ■ pp. vippavuttha.

vi + pavasati

Vippavāsa

absence; in sati˚; absence of mind, neglect, absentmindedness, thoughtlessness Ja i.410; Snp-a 339; ; thoughtfulness, mindfulness Vin v.216; Snp 1142; Ja iv.92.

vi + pavāsa

Vippaviddha

pierced through and through Ja i.61.

pp. of vippavijjhati, vi + pa + vyadh

Vippavuttha

absent; ˚sati neglectful Dhp-a i.239.

pp. of vippavasati

Vippasanna

(adj.) (quite) purified, clear; happy, bright, pure, sinless Vin iii.88 (˚chavivaṇṇa) SN i.32 (cetas); iii.2, 235; iv.118, 294; v.301; AN iii.41 AN iii.236; Snp 637; Dhp 82, Dhp 413 (= pasanna-citta Dhp-a iv.192) Pv i.1010 (= suṭṭhu pasanna); ii.935; Vism 262 (where Kp-a reads pasanna only); Dhp-a ii.127; DN-a i.221.

vi + pasanna

Vippasādeti

to purify, cleanse Snp 506.

Caus. of vippasīdati

Vippasīdati

to become bright; fig. to be reconciled or pleased, to be satisfied or happy Dhp 82; Ja i.51; Pv-a 122 (mukha-vaṇṇa). Caus. vippasādeti.

vi + pasīdati

Vippasukkhati

to dry up entirely Ja v.106.

vi + pa + sukkhati

Vippahāna

(nt.) leaving, abandoning, giving up SN i.39 = Snp 1109; Snp 1097; Ja vi.260; Mil 181.

vi + pahāna

Vippahita

(nt.) sending out in all directions, message Ja iii.386 (dūta˚).

vi + pahita2

Vippahīna

given up, abandoned SN i.99; AN v.16, AN v.29 sq.; Snp 360, Snp 362.

pp. of vippajahati

Vippita

at Ja vi.185 is to be read cipiṭa (“flat”).

Vipphandati

to twitch, writhe, struggle Vv 5216 (5214 Ha.); Ja iv.495-pp. vipphandita.

vi + phandati; cp. BSk. vispandati Jtm 11.

Vipphandita

(nt.) “writhing,” twitching, struggle MN i.446; SN ii.62 ■ (fig.) in diṭṭhi˚ combd with visūkāyita ) “scuffling of opinion” (Mrs Rh. D.), sceptical agitation, worry & writhing (cp; Dial. i.53) MN i.8, MN i.486; SN i.123 (here without diṭṭhi˚ the C. expln is “hatthirājavaṇṇa sappavaṇṇ’ ādidassa nāni” K.S. i.320); Dhs 381; Pp 22.

pp. of vipphandati

Vipphala

(or is it pipphala ?) = phala at Ja vi.518.

Vipphalati

(intrs.) to split open, to burst asunder: so read at Ja v.33, Ja v.493 (for vipatati); Pv iv.146 (for vipāteti); see detail under vipāṭeti.

vi + phalati

Vipphāra

diffusion, pervasion, (adj.) pervading, spreading out AN i.171 (vitakka-vip phāra-sadda, cp. Kvu trsln 241), 206 (mahājutika mahā vipphāra); iv.252; Pts i.112 sq.; Pts ii.174; Ja iii.12 (mahā + mahājutika); v.150 (id.); Mil 230 & 270 (vacī; dilating in talk), 130, 346; Vism 42; DN-a i.192; Vv-a 103 (mahā˚ + mahājutika); Pv-a 178 (karuṇā˚).

fr. vi + pharati 1 or 2

Vipphāravant

(adj.) possessing vibration Dhs-a 115 = Vism 142.;

fr. vipphāra, cp. pharati 1 & vipphurati

Vipphārika

(adj.) spreading out (in effulgence) Vv-a 5 (mahā˚).

fr. vi + pharati 2

Vipphārita

expanded Dāvs v.34 (˚akkhi-yugala, both eyes wide open).

pp. of Caus. vi + pharati

Vipphālita

(adj.) split open, cut to pieces Pv-a 152 (su˚; so read for vipphalita); Sdhp 188 (˚anga).

vi + phālita 2

Vipphāleti

to expand, to bend or draw the bow Ja vi.580.

vi + sphar: cp. phālita 1. It is not = vi + phāleti

Vipphuraṇa

(nt.) spreading out, effulgence, pervasion Vv-a 277.

vi + phuraṇa = pharaṇa

Vipphurati

to vibrate, tremble, quiver, fly asunder, diffuse Ja i.51; Snp-a 225; Vv-a 12 (vijjotamāna vipphurato).

vi + phurati: see pharati

Vipphoṭita

(adj.) burst open (of a boil) Thag 306.

vi + phoṭita: see phoṭa, cp. BSk. visphoṭa open Divy 603

Viphala

(adj.) fruitless, useless Sdhp 527.

vi + phala

Vibandha

fetter Pv-a 207.

vi + bandha

Vibandhana

(nt.) = vibandha Thag-a 243.

vi + bandhana

Vibādhaka

(adj.) doing harm to (-˚), injuring, preventing Dāvs ii.88.

fr. vibādha

Vibādhati

to oppress, harm Mil 135 (so read for ˚bhādati); Dhs-a 42 ■ Pass. vibādhiyati to be oppressed Pv-a 239.

vi + bādhati

Vibbedha

circumference Ja i.212.

fr. vi + vyadh after analogy of ubbedha; not vi + bheda

Vibbhanta

1. roaming, straying; strayed, confused MN i.171 (padhāna˚ giving up exertion), 247 (id.). Usually in phrase ˚citta with wandering (or confused) mind SN i.61 (see expln of C. at K.S. i.321) 204; iii.93; v.269; AN i.70; AN ii.30; AN iii.391; Iti 90; Ja iv.459 (+ kupit’ indriya); Mil 324 ■ At Dhs-a 260 we find the cpd. vibbhanti-bhāva [vibbhanta in compn with bhu! ] of citta, in meaning “wavering, roaming (of mind): so read for vibhatti-bhāva.

pp. of vibbhamati

Vibbhantaka

(adj.) 1. straying away from (-˚), confused Vism 187 (jhāna˚), 429.

2. (a bhikkhu) who has forsaken the Order, apostate Vin ii.60.

vibbhanta + ka

Vibbhamati

to wander about, to go astray, to forsake the Order Vin i.72; Vin ii.14; Vin iii.40 (may be taken in the sense of enjoying oneself or sporting, i.e. cohabiting, at this passage), iv.216; Ja i.117; Ja iii.462 (of a bhikkhu enticed by his former wife), 496 ■ pp. vibbhanta.

vi + bhamati

Vibhaṅga

distribution, division, distinction, classification Vin i.359; Snp 600 (jāti classification of species; expld as jāti -vitthāra at Snp-a 464); Ja iv.361 (+ vicaya; C. expls as vibhāga ); Mvu 30, Mvu 87 (dhātu˚ distribution of relics); Snp-a 422 (contrasted with uddesa ) ■ Vibhanga is the title of the second book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka (see Pāli Name Dictionary). Cp. Sutta-vibhanga.

vi + bhanga, of bhaj1

Vibhajati

(lit.) to distribute, divide; (fig.) to distinguish, dissect, divide up, classify; to deal with something in detail, to go into details MN iii.223; SN ii.2, SN ii.255 (vibhājeti) = MN i.364 (reads virājeti); SN iv.93 (atthaṃ); v.261 (dhammaṃ vivarati vibhajati uttāni-karoti); Snp 87; Pp 41; Vb 259; Mil 145; Snp-a 237; DN-a i.104; Pv-a 81, Pv-a 111. ger vibhajja (q.v.) ■ pp. vibhatta.

vi + bhajati, i.e. bhaj1, as in bhājeti

Vibhajana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) distinction, division, going into detail Ne 5, Ne 8 sq., 38 (+ vivaraṇā uttāni-kammatā); Tikp 10; Snp-a 445 (vivaraṇa, v. uttāni-karaṇa); Dhs-a 343, Dhs-a 344. Cp. vibhājana.

fr. vibhajati

Vibhajja

(adv.) dividing, analysing, detailing; in detail (˚-) DN iii.229 (˚vyākaraṇīya pañha “discriminating reply” trsln); AN ii.46 (˚vacana analysis)- ˚vāda the Vibhajja doctrine, i.e. the doctrine which analyses, or the “religion of logic or reason”; a term identical with theravāda, the doctrine of the Elders i.e. the original teaching of the Buddhist church -˚vādin one who teaches the V. doctrine, Ep. of the Buddha Mvu 5, Mvu 271; Tikp 366; Vb-a 130; cp. Kvu trsln introd. p. 38.

ger. of vibhajati

Vibhatta

(adj.) 1. (lit.) divided, distributed; parted, partitioned, having divisions, portioned off Snp 300; Pv i.1013 (of niraya); Ja v.266 (id.); Mil 316 (a˚ samudda) ■ su˚ well divided, well planned proportioned, regular Snp 305; Pv iii.221; Mil 330, Mil 345 Vism 108.

2. (fig.) detailed, explained, analysed Vism 187; Snp-a 288; Pv-a 104.

pp. of vibhajati

Vibhattavant

(adj.) full of details, giving all detail Vism 212; DN-a i.34.

fr. vibhatta

Vibhatti

(f.) 1. division, distinction, classification, detail, variety Ja vi.432 (of paintings); Ne 1 sq., 105; Mil 102, Mil 381; Vism 352 (contrasted with sankhepa); Pv-a 199, Pv-a 282 (rūpa˚ various forms, patterns)

2. (t. t. g.) inflection of nouns & verbs, declensions conjugation Snp-a 397; Vv-a 78, Vv-a 199. -˚lopa omission of inflection Vv-a 174, Vv-a 192; Pv-a 147Note. vibhattibhāva at Dhs-a 260 is to be read as vibbhanti˚; (see under vibbhanta).

fr. vibhajati

Vibhattika

(adj.) having divisions; (fig.) detailed. Neg. ; not giving details Vv-a 164.

fr. vibhatti

Vibhava

1. power, wealth, prosperity DN-a i.147; Ja i.56; Ja v.285; Mvu 26, Mvu 6; Dhp-a i.6; Dhp-a ii.9, Dhp-a ii.84 Dhp-a iv.7; Vv-a 5, Vv-a 302 (˚sampanna rich); Pv-a 122, Pv-a 130, Pv-a 176 Pv-a 196. Great wealth is expressed by asīti-koṭi-vibhava consisting in 80 koṭis, e.g. Dhp-a i.367; Dhp-a ii.25bahu˚ very rich Ja i.145; mahā˚; id. Pv-a 97, Pv-a 107yathā vibhavaṃ according to one’s means or power Pv-a 54 vibhav’ ānurūpaṃ id. Vv-a 254.

2. non-existence cessation of life, annihilation DN i.34; Snp 514 (+ bhava) 867 (id.); Nd i.274, Nd i.282; Ja iii.402 (˚ṃ gata = vināsaṃ patta C.); v.267 (id.); Dhs-a 392; DN-a i.120; Vb-a 505 (= bhava-vigama). See also taṇhā B 1.

-taṇhā “craving for life to end” (Dial. iii.208), desire for non-existence DN iii.216, DN iii.275; Vin i.10; Ud 33; Iti 50; Vb-a 111. -diṭṭhi the theory of non-becoming DN iii.212; AN i.83; Nd i.245, Nd i.274.

vi + bhava

Vibhavati

to cease to exist SN iii.56 (fut. ˚issati); Snp 873 (vibhoti); Nd i.279 (id.) ■ pp. vibhūta.

vi + bhavati

Vibhassikata

(nt.) gossip, lit. “made into talk” Vin iv.241.

vi + bhassa + kata

Vibhāga

distribution, division; detailing, classification Ja iv.361 Vism 494; Vb-a 83; Thag-a 100; Vv-a 37; Pv-a 122-attha˚ detailing of meaning Vism 569; dhātu˚; distribution of relics Vv-a 297; Pv-a 212; pada˚; division of words Snp-a 269; Pv-a 34 ■ Cp. saṃ˚.

fr. vibhajati, cp. vibhanga & vibhajana

Vibhājana

(nt.) distribution, division Dhtp 92, Dhtp 561; Dhtm 776, Dhtm 787.

vi + bhājana2

Vibhāta

shining, turned to light, bright; in phrase vibhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i.e. at daybreak or dawn (Dhp-a iv.105; Pv-a 13 Pv-a 22) ■ (nt.) daybreak, dawn Dhp-a ii.5 (˚khaṇe).

pp. of vibhāti

Vibhāti

to shine forth, to be or become light (said of the night turning into day); pres. also vibhāyati Vin i.78; fut. vibhāyissati DN ii.148; aor. vibhāyi Ja v.354 ■ pp. vibhāta.

vi + bhāti

Vibhādati

at Mil 135 should be read at vibādhati.

Vibhāyana

(nt.) shining forth, brightening Vv-a 148.

fr. vibhāti

Vibhāvana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) 1. making clear, ascertainment, explanation, exposition Ja iii.389; Vb 342, Vb 343 (ā); Snp-a 13, Snp-a 261 sq., 318; Vb-a 409 (ā) Thag-a 76 (ā), 230; Pv-a 137, Pv-a 140 (so read for vibhavanā in attha˚).

2. annihilation, disappearance, making non-existing (cp. vibhava 2) Dhs-a 163 (vibhāvanā nāma antara-dhāpanā ti attho).

fr. vibhāveti

Vibhāvaniya

(adj.) pertaining to ascertainment, making clear, explaining Pv-a 244 (paramattha˚).

fr. vibhāvana

Vibhāvita

made non-existing, annihilated Nd ii.584.

pp. of vibhāveti

Vibhāvin

(adj.) intelligent, wise Snp 317; Ja vi.304; Nd ii.259 (= medhāvin); Mil 21, Mil 276, Mil 346 Sdhp 382.

fr. vibhāveti

Vibhāveti

1. to understand clearly (lit. “to produce intensively or well”) Snp 318 (ger. a-vibhāvayitvā).

2. to make clear, to explain Kp-a 89; Snp-a 406, Snp-a 472; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 70, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 135.

3. to put out of existence to annihilate [as Caus. of vibhava 2] Dhs-a 163. pp. vibhāvita.

vi + bhāveti

Vibhāsita

illuminated, made bright, shining forth Sdhp 591.

pp. Caus. of vi + bhāsati2

Vibhinna

(adj.) scattered; divided, at variance Snp 314 (= aññam-aññaṃ bhinna Snp-a 324).

vi + bhinna

Vibhītaka

(& ˚ṭaka) the plant Terminalia belerica; beleric myrobolan. Dice were made from its fruits, which are also used as medicine (intoxicant); its flowers smell vilely ■ Vin i.201; Ja iii.161; Ja v.363; Ja vi.529.

cp. *Sk. vibhīta & ˚ka

Vibhūta

(adj.) 1. [cp. bhūta 1, & vibhava 2] destroyed, annihilated, being without Thag 715; Snp 871 sq., 1113 (= vibhāvita atikkanta vītivatta Nd ii.584).

2. [cp. bhūta 3] false Snp 664.

3. [cp. vibhāveti 2] clear, distinct AN v.325; Mil 311; Abdhs 16 (a˚ unclear); Vism 112 (& a˚); -˚ṃ karoti to explain Mil 308.

pp. of vibhavati, or vi + bhūta

Vibhūti

(f.) 1. [cp. vibhūta 2] destruction, ruin Thag 1018 (˚nandin = malign).

2. [cp vibhava 1] splendour, majesty, glory Ja v.305; Pv-a 133 (dāna˚), 216 (rāja˚).

fr. vi + bhavati

Vibhūsana

(nt.) adornment AN i.212; AN ii.40, AN ii.145, AN ii.209; Snp 59 (cp. Nd ii.585); Pp 21, Pp 58; Ja i.8; Dhs 1348; Mil 382.

vi + bhūsana

Vibhūsā

(f.) ornament, decoration, distinction, pride Snp 926; Nd i.380; Nd ii.585; Mil 224 (Rh. D trsls “dexterity,” hardly correct. Should we read “vibhūti”?).

vi + bhūsā

Vibhūsita

adorned, decorated Mvu 25, Mvu 102; Vism 10; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 157.

pp. of vibhūseti

Vibhūseti

to adorn, embellish, beautify Thig 411; Mvu 19, Mvu 25; Dhp-a i.77 ■ pp. vibhūsita.

vi + bhūseti

Vibheti

to be afraid, to stand in awe of Ja v.509 (= bhāyati C.). Should we read bibheti?

vi + bhāyati

Vibhedaka

one who disturbs friendship, a slanderer Ja iii.260.

vi + bhedaka

Vibhedika

(f.) the palmyra tree Ja vi.529.

fr. vi + bhid

Vibhedeti

to cause disruption, to slander AN v.345 sq.

vi + bhedeti

Vimajjana

(nt.) making smooth, polishing MN i.385.

fr. vi + majjati2

Vimaṭṭha

(adj.) smoothed, soft, smooth, polished Ja v.96 (˚ābharana), (C. expls as “visāla”) 204, 400 (of ornaments) ■ ubhato-bhāga˚; polished or smooth on both sides MN i.385; AN v.61 = MN ii.13 (has ˚maddha).

vi + maṭṭha

Vimata

(adj.) perplexed, in doubt Ja v.340.

fr. vi + man

Vimati

(f.) doubt, perplexity, consternation DN i.105; SN iv.327; AN ii.79, AN ii.185; Ap 29; Dhs 425; Ja iii.522; Mil 119, Mil 144, Mil 339; DN-a i.274.

vi + mati

Vimada

(adj.) disintoxicated, without conceit Ja v.158 (taken as “unconscious” by C.).

vi + mada

Vimaddana

(nt.) crushing, destroying Vv-a 232.

vi + maddana

Vimana

(adj.) 1. perplexed, consternated Mil 23, Mil 118; Pv-a 274.

2. infatuate Thig 380. 3. distracted, distressed Thag 1051; Ja vi.523.

vi + mano

Vimariyādikata

(adj.) lit. made unrestricted, i.e. delivered, set free SN ii.173; SN iii.31 (vippamutto ˚ena cetasā viharati); vi.11; AN v.151 sq-At Thag 184 v.l. for vipariyādi˚.

vi + mariyādā + kata

Vimala

(adj.) without stains, spotless, unstained, clean, pure AN iv.340; Snp 378, Snp 476, Snp 519, Snp 637, Snp 1131 (cp. Nd ii.586); Ja i.18; Mil 324; Dhp-a iv.192.

vi + mala

Vimalayaka

a certain precious stone of dark-blue colour Vv-a 111.

cp. Sk. vimalaka

Vimāna1

(nt.) lit. covering a certain space, measuring; the defns given by Dhpāla refer it to “without measure,” i.e. immeasurable. Thus = vigata-māne appamāṇe mahanta vara-pāsāda Vv-a 131; = visiṭṭhamānaṃ, pamāṇato mahantaṃ Vv-a 160 ■ Appld meaning: heavenly (magic) palace, a kind of paradise elysium.

1. General remarks: (a) The notion of the vimāna is peculiar to the later, fantastic parts of the Canon, based on popular superstition (Vimāna & Peta Vatthu, Apadāna, Jātaka and similar fairy tales). It shows distinct traces of foreign (Hellenic-Babylonian influence and rests partly on tales of sea-faring merchants (cp. location of V. in mid-ocean). On the other hand it represents the old (Vedic); ratha as chariot of the gods to be driven at will (cp. below 5, 7, 8). Thus at Vv 16 (here as 500 chariots!), 36, 63, 64; Ja i.59 (deva-vimānasadisa ratha) ■ (b) The vimānas are in remote parts of the world (cp. the island of the blessed), similar to the elysium in Homer’s Odyssey, e.g. iv.563 sq.: ̓σἐς ̓*Ηλύσιον πεδίον κα ̓σἐς ̓*Ηλύσιον πεδίον και πείρατα γαίης ἀχάνατοι πεμψουσιν etc. (trsln G. Chapman: “the immortal ends of all the earth, the fields Elysian Fate to thee will give; where Rhadamanthus rules, and where men live a nevertroubled life, where snow, nor show’rs, nor irksome winter spends his fruitless pow’rs, but from the ocean zephyr still resumes a constant breath, that all the fields perfume”). Cp. Ehni, Yama p. 206 sq ■ (c) In popular religion the influence of this eschatological literature has been very great, so great in fact as to make the Vimāna and Peta-vatthus & the Jātakastories exemplifying the theory of retribution as appealing to an ordinary mind by vivid examples of mythology, greater favourites than any other canonical; book. From this point of view we have to judge Mvu 14, Mvu 58: Petavatthuṃ Vimānañ ca sacca-saṃyuttaṃ eva ca desesi thero…

2. The descriptions of the Vimānas are in the most exuberant terms. The palaces (kingdoms in miniature) are of gold, crystal or exquisite jewels, their pillars are studded with gems their glittering roofs are peaked with 700 pinnacled turrets (Vv-a 244, Vv-a 289; also as “innumerable” Vv-a 188, or 18,000 Ap. 63). Surrounded are these towering (ucca) mansions by lovely, well-planned gardens, the paths of which are sprinkled with gold dust; they are full of wishing-trees, granting every desire. There is a variety of stately trees, bearing heavenly flowers fruit, swaying gently in delicious breezes. Lotus ponds with cool waters invite to refreshing baths; a host of birds mix their songs with the strains of cymbals and lutes, played by heavenly musicians. Angelic maidens perform their dances, filling the atmosphere with a radiant light which shines from their bodies. Peace and happiness reign everywhere, the joys of such a vimāna cannot be expressed in words. This elysium lasts for aeons (cira-ṭṭhitika Vv 801, kappa-ṭṭhāyin Thag 1190) in short it is the most heavenly paradise which can be imagined ■ For a monograph of vimāna the Vimāna Vatthu and its Commentary should in the first place be consulted.

3. The inhabitants of the Vimānas are usually happy persons (or yakkhas: see Stede, P. V. trsl. 39

41), called devatā, who have attained to such an exalted state through their own merit (puñña see foll 4) ■ Departed souls who have gone through the Petastage are frequently such devas (at Vv 172 called pubbadevatā). That these are liable to semi-punishment and semi-enjoyment is often emphasized, and is founded on the character of their respective kamma: Ja i.240 (vimāna-petiyo sattāhaṃ sukhaṃ anubhavanti, sattāhaṃ dukkhaṃ); Ja v.2 (vemānika-peta-bhavena-kammassa sarikkhako vipāko ahosi; i.e. by night pleasures; by day tortures); cp. Pv ii.12 (see Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu p. 106), iii. 78; Pv-a 204, Pv-a 210 & Divy p.9. Expressions for these “mixed” devatās who are partly blessed, partly cursed are e.g. : vimānapeta Pv-a 145, Pv-a 148, Pv-a 271, Pv-a 275; f. vimāna-petī Pv-a 152, Pv-a 160 Pv-a 186, Pv-a 190; vimāna devatā Pv-a 190; vemānika-peta Ja v.2; Pv-a 244; Dhp-a iii.192 (as powerful, by the side of nāgas & supaṇṇas) ■ In their appearance they are like beautiful human beings, dressed in yellowish (pīta, expl;d as “golden” robes (cp. the angels in the oldest Christian apocalyptic literature: on their relation to Hellenic ideas see e.g. A. Dieterich, Nekyia, Leipzig 1903, pp. 10

18, 29: red & white the colours of the land of the blessed), with gold and silver as complementary outfit in person and surroundings Thus throughout the Vimāna Vatthu, esp. Nos, 36 47 (pīta-vimāna). Their splendour is often likened to that of the moon or of the morning star.

4.; Origin of Vimānas. A vimāna arises in the “other world (paraloka) at the instant of somebody doing good (even during the lifetime of the doer) and waits for the entry of the owner: Dhp-a iii.291 sq. In the description of the vimāna of the nāga-king (J vi.315 = Vv 8422) it is said on this subject: a vimāna is obtained neither without a cause (adhicca), nor has it arisen in the change of the seasons, nor is it self-made (sayankata), nor given by the gods, but “sakehi kammehi apāpakehi puññehi laddha” (i.e. won by one’s own sinless & meritorious deeds) ■ Entering the Vimāna-paradise is, analogous to all semi-lethal passing over into enchanted conditions in fairy tales, compared with the awakening from sleep (as in a state of trance): sutta-ppabuddha Dhp-a iii.7 Of the Vimāna itself it is said that it appears (pātur ahosi), e.g. Vv-a 188; Dhp-a i.131; or arises (uggañchi Dhp-a iii.291; Vv-a 221.

5. Location of the Vimānas The “vimāna” is an individual paradisiacal state Therefore vimānas are not definitely located “Elysian Fields.” They are anywhere (in this world as well as in the Beyond), but certain places are more favourable for their establishment than others. Thus we may state that κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν they are found in the neighbourhood of water. Thus either in the Ocean (majjhe sāgarasmiṃ Thag 1190; samudda-majjhe Pv-a 47), where access is possible only through adventures after shipwreck or similar causes (J. iv.1 sq.; Pv iv.11); or at one or the other of the great lakes of the Himavant (Pv ii.12). They are in out-of-the-way places (“end of the world”); they are also found in the wilderness: Vv 84; Pv iv.32. As tree-vimānas with rukkha-devatā as inhabitants they occur e.g. at Ja iii.310; Ja v.502; Pv i.9; Pv ii.9; Pv-a 244. Very often they are phantasmagorical castles in the air. By special power of their inhabitants they may be transported to any place at will. This faculty of transference is combined with the ability of extremely swift motion (compared to the speed of thought: manojava). Thus a golden palanquin is suspended in mid-air above a palace at Vv-a 6 (ākāsa-cārin, sīgha-java). They are said to be ākāsaṭṭhānāni Ja vi.117; Snp-a 222, Snp-a 370 (but the palace of the Yakkha Āḷavaka is bhumma-ṭṭha, i.e. stands on the ground, and is described as fortified: Snp-a 222) The place of a (flying) vimāna may be taken by various conveyances: a chair, an elephant, ship, bed, litter etc. Or the location of it in the other world is in the Cittalatāvana (Vv 37), or the Pāricchattaka tree (Vv 38), or in the Cātummahārājika-bhavana (Vv-a 331)-Later on, when the theory of meritorious deities (or departed souls raised to special rank) as vemānikā devā was established, their abode was with their vimānas settled among the Tāvatiṃsa (e.g. Vv-a 188, Vv-a 217, Vv-a 221 Vv-a 244, Vv-a 289; Dhp-a iii.291), or in the Tusita heaven. Thus Tusita-pura interchanges with Tusita-vimāna at Dhp-a ii.208. The latter occurs e.g. at Dhp-a iii.173, Dhp-a iii.219. 6. The dimensions of the Vimānas are of course enormous but harmonious (being “divine”), i.e. either of equal extent in all directions, or specially proportioned with significant numbers. Of these the foll. may be mentioned. The typical numbers of greatest frequency are 12, 16, 30, 700, in connection with yojana. The dimensions, with ref. to which 12 & 16 are used, are length, width, height, & girth, whereas 700 applies usually to the height (Dhp-a iii.291 e.g. , where it is said to be “over 700”), and the number of turrets (see above 2). At Vv-a 267 (satta-yojana-pamāṇo ratho) No. 7 is used for 700; No. 30 (extent) is found e.g. at Dhp-a iii.7; Thag-a 55; No. 12 e.g. at Ja vi.116; Dhp-a iii.291; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 217, Vv-a 221, Vv-a 244, Vv-a 246, Vv-a 291 sq.; No. 16 at Vv-a 188 Vv-a 289.

7. Vimānas of sun and moon. A peculiar (late?) idea is that sun and moon have their vimānas (cp. Vedic ratha = sun). There are only very few passages in the post-canonical books mentioning these The idea that the celestial bodies are vimānas (“immense chariots in the shape of open hemispheres” Kirfel Kosmographie der Inder p. 282) is essentially Jainistic See on Jain Vimānas in general Kirfel, l. c. pp. 7

9 292

300 ■ In the Pāli Com. we find Snp-a 187, Snp-a 188 (canda-vimānaṃ bhinditvā = breaking up the moon’s palace, i.e. the moon itself); and Dhp-a iii.99 (candimasuriyā vimānāni gahetvā aṭṭhaṃsu).

8. Other terms for vimāna, and specifications. Var. other expressions are used more frequently for vimāna in general. Among these are ratha (see above 1 a); nagara (Pv ii.125) pura (see above 5, as tusita˚); pāsāda; either as dibba˚ (Dhp-a iii.291), or vara˚; (Vv-a 130), or vimāna˚; (Vv 3110) ■ The vimānas are specified as deva-vimāna “heavenly palace,” e.g. Ja i.59; Vism 342; Vv-a 173 or (in a still more superlative expression) brahmavimāna i.e. best or most excellent magic palace, highest paradise, e.g. DN i.17 (here perhaps “palace of Brahmā”) iii.28 (“abode of brahmās” Rh. D.); Iti 15; Vism 108. The latter expression is abbreviated to brahma (nt. “highest, best thing of all,” “summum bonum,” paradise magic palace: Thag-a 47 (Ap. v. 6) & 55 (Ap; v. 8), at both places as sukataṃ, i.e. well made ■ A rather odd expression for the paradisiacal state (in concrete form) is attabhāva (existence, cp. Gr. βιοτή Hom. Od. iv.365?) instead of vimāna, e.g. Dhp-a i.131 (tigāvuta-ppamāṇa); iii.7 (id.).

9. Various. Of innumerable passages in the books mentioned above (under 1) only the foll. may be given for ref.: Ja iii.310 Ja iii.398, Ja iii.405; Ja v.165, Ja v.171; Ja vi.117 sq., 120 sq.; Ap 35, 55 59; Dāvs iv.54 (acalaṃ v. antalikkhamhi nāvaṃ gativirahitaṃ ambhorāsi-majjhamhi disvā); and Vimāna Vatthu throughout. Of passages in the 4 older Nikāyas we have only AN ii.33 (ye devā dīgh’ āyukā uccesu vimānesu cira-ṭṭhitikā). At SN i.12 = SN i.23 we should read “na ca mānaṃ” for “na vimānaṃ” (K.S. i.18).

in the Pāli meaning not Vedic. Found in meaning “palace-chariot” in the Mbhārata and elsewhere in Epic Sk.

Vimāna2

disrespect, contempt Snp 887 (˚dassin showing contempt).

vi + māna

Vimānana

(nt.) disrespect, contempt DN iii.190 (a˚); Mil 377, Mil 386.

vi + mānana

Vimānita

treated with contempt AN iii.158, AN iii.160.

pp. of vimāneti

Vimāneti

to disrespect, to treat with contempt Vin ii.260; Snp 888; Nd i.297 ■ pp. vimānita.

vi + māneti

Vimukha

(adj.) turning away from, averted, neglectful Mvu 22, Mvu 80; Pv-a 3 (dhamma-saññā˚), 269 (carita˚).

vi + mukha

Vimuccati

to be released, to be free (of passion), to be emancipated MN i.352; SN ii.94, SN ii.124; SN iii.46, SN iii.189; SN iv.86; SN v.218; AN iv.126 sq. 135, 179; Snp 755; Pp 61, Pp 68; Sdhp 613 ■ aor. 3rd pl. vimucciṃsu Snp p.149 ■ pp. vimutta. See also (an)upādā & (an)upādāya; ■ Caus. vimoceti to cause to be released or emancipated, to set free AN ii.196 (cittaṃ); Vin iii.70 (id.) ■ grd. vimocanīya AN ii.196.

vi + muccati, Pass. of muñcati

Vimutta

freed, released, intellectually emancipated Vin i.8; AN iv.75, AN iv.179, AN iv.340; AN v.29; DN iii.97 DN iii.100, DN iii.133, DN iii.258; SN i.23, SN i.35; SN iii.13, SN iii.53, SN iii.137; Snp 354, Snp 475 Snp 522, Snp 877, Snp 1071 sq., 1101, 1114; Nd i.283; Nd ii.587; Pv iv.132 (arahā + ); Vism 410 ■ Often as cittaṃ v an emancipated heart, e.g. DN i.80; AN iii.21; SN i.46 SN i.141; SN iii.90; SN iv.164; SN v.157 (here taken by Mrs. Rh. D at S vi.93, Index, as “unregulated, distrait”); Snp 975 Nd i.284; Vb 197. ubhatobhāga˚; emancipated in both ways (see Dial ii. 70) DN ii.71; DN iii.105, DN iii.253; SN i.191; AN i.73; AN iv.10, AN iv.77, AN iv.453; AN v.23; MN i.439, MN i.477 sq ■ paññā˚; emancipated by insight, freed by reason (see Dial. ii.68) SN i.191; SN ii.123; DN ii.70; DN iii.105, DN iii.254; MN i.439, MN i.477- saddhā˚; freed by faith AN i.73; AN iv.10, AN iv.77; AN v.23; Pts ii.52; MN i.439, MN i.477anupādā vimutta freed without any further clinging to the world MN i.486; SN ii.18; SN iii.59 SN iv.83 and passim.

-atta having an emancipated self SN iii.46, SN iii.55, SN iii.58; AN iv.428. -āyatana point or occasion of emancipation of which there are 5, viz. hearing the Dhamma taught by the Master, teaching it oneself, reciting it, pondering over it, understanding it AN iii.21 sq.; DN iii.241, DN iii.279; Pts i.5.

pp. of vimuñcati

Vimutti

(f.) release, deliverance, emancipation DN i.174; DN iii.288; SN v.206 sq. (abhijānāti), 222 (ariya˚), 266, 356; AN ii.247, AN iii.165 (yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti), 242, Snp 54, Snp 73, Snp 725 sq.; Ja i.77, Ja i.78, Ja i.80; Pts i.22 Pts ii.143 sq.; Nd i.21; Pp 27, Pp 54 sq.; Vb 86, Vb 272 sq. 392 (micchā˚) Ne 29; Vism 410; Sdhp 614ceto (& paññā˚); emancipation of heart (and reason) DN i.156 DN iii.78, DN iii.108, DN iii.247 sq., 273; SN i.120; SN ii.214; SN iv.119 sq.v.118 sq., 289 sq.; AN i.123 sq., 220 sq.; 243; ii.36, 87 214; iii.20, 131, 400; iv.83, 314 sq.; v.10 sq.; Vb 344 Ne 40, Ne 43, Ne 81 sq., 127 ■ sammā˚; right or true emancipation AN ii.222 sq.; AN v.327; Pts i.107; Pts ii.173 ■ See also arahatta, upekkhā, khandha ii.A, dassana, phala mettā.

-rasa the essence of emancipation AN i.36; AN iv.203; Pv-a 287. -sāra substance or essence of emancipation AN ii.141, AN ii.243; AN iv.385.

fr. vimuccati

Vimokkha

(& Vimokha) deliverance, release, emancipation, dissociation from the things of the world, Arahantship DN ii.70, DN ii.111) iii.34, 35, 230, 288; MN i.196 (samaya˚ & asamaya˚) SN i.159 (cetaso v.); ii.53, 123; iii.121; iv.33; AN ii.87 AN iv.316; AN v.11; Vin v.164 (cittassa); Snp 1071 (which Nd ii.588 expls as “agga” etc., thus strangely taking it in meaning of mokkha2, perhaps as edifying etym.); Nd ii.466 (in expln of Bhagavā); Pts i.22; Pts ii.35 (as 68!), 243 Pp 11 sq.; Vb 342; Dhs 248; Ne 90, Ne 100, Ne 119, Ne 126 Vism 13, Vism 668 sq.; Mil 159; Pv-a 98; Sdhp 34, Sdhp 264. The three vimokkhas are: suññato v., animitto v. appaṇihito v. Pts ii.35; Vism 658. The eight vimokkhas or stages of emancipation, are: the condition of rūpī, arūpa-saññī, recognition of subha, realization of ākāsānañc’āyatana, of viññāṇ’ānañc’āyatana ākiñcaññ’āyatana, neva-saññā-n’āsaññ’āyatana, saññāvedayita-nirodha DN iii.262 (cp. Dial. iii.242), AN i.40 AN iv.306; Vb 342; expld in detail at Pts ii.38–⁠40. [cp BSk. aṣṭau vimokṣāḥ, e.g. Avs ii.69, Avs ii.153.]-In sequence jhāna vimokkha samādhi samāpatti (magga phala) at Vin i.97, Vin i.104; Vin iii.91; Vin iv.25; AN iii.417, AN iii.419 AN v.34, AN v.38; Vb 342 ■ See also jhāna.

fr. vi + muc, cp. mokkha1

Vimocana

(nt.) 1. letting loose, discharging Dhtm 216 (assu˚).

2. release from, doing away with Mvu 35, Mvu 73 (antarāya˚).

vi + mocana

Vimoceti

see vimuccati.

Vimohita

deluded, bewildered Sdhp 363.

pp. of vi + moheti

Vimba

is another spelling for bimba at SN v.217. Cp. BSk. vimbaka (form of face) Divy 172, Divy 525.

Vimhaya

astonishment, surprise, disappointment Ja v.69 (in expln of vyamhita) Mvu 5, Mvu 92; Snp-a 42 (explaining “vata”), 256 (do. for “ve” = aho); DN-a i.43; Vv-a 234, Vv-a 329.

cp. Sk. vismaya, vi + smi

Vimhāpaka

(adj.) deceiving, dismaying Snp-a 549 (= kuhaka).

fr. vimhāpati

Vimhāpana

(nt.) dismaying, deceiving, disappointing Vism 24 (in expln of kuhana); Dhtp 633 (id.).

fr. vimhāpeti

Vimhāpeti

to astonish, to cause dismay to, to deceive Mvu 17, Mvu 44; DN-a i.91 (in expln of kuhaka).

Caus. of *vimhayati = vi + smi

Vimhita

(adj.) astonished, discouraged, dismayed Ja vi.270 (su˚ very dismayed) Mil 122; Mvu 6, Mvu 19; Dāvs ii.80. See also vyamhita.

pp. of vi + smi, cp. mihita

Viya

(indecl.) 1. part of comparison: like, as; stands for iva (usually in verse after ā: Snp 420 (jātimā v.); Pv i.85 (vārinā v.); or o Snp 580 (vajjho v.), 818 (kapaṇo v.); or ṃ: Snp 381 (vajantaṃ v.), 689 (nekkhaṃ v.).

2. dubitative particle: na viya maññe I suppose not MN ii.121. Cp. byā.

another form of iva, viâ, *via (so some Prākrits: Pischel Prk. Gr., § 143, 336) → viya. Pischel Prk. Gr. § 336, 337 derives it fr. viva = v’ iva

Viya˚

the diaeretic form (for sake of metre) of vya˚;, which see generally. Cp. the identical veyya˚.

= vi + a˚

Viyatta

(adj.) determined, of settled opinion, learned, accomplished; only in stock phrase sāvakā viyattā vinītā visāradā (which Rh. D trsls “true hearers, wise and well-trained, ready etc. Dial. ii. 114) at DN ii.104 = AN iv.310 = SN v.260 = Ud 63. The BSk. (at Divy 202) has śrāvakāh (for bhikkhū!) paṇḍitā bhaviṣyanti vyaktā vinītā viśāradāh. 2. separated, split, dissenting, heretic Snp 800 (= vavatthita bhinna dvejjhāpanna etc. Nd ii.108; = bhinna Snp-a 530). Cp. the two meanings of vavatthita (= *vyakta), which quasi-correspond to viyatta 1 & 2 At this passage the v.l. (all SS of the Commentary); viyutta is perhaps to be perferred to viyatta.

Note. It is to be noted that viyatta in § 1 does not occur in poetry, but seems to have spelling viy˚ because of the foll. vinīta and visārada. Cp. vyatta & veyyatta;.

cp. Sk. vyakta, vi + pp. of añj

Viyatti

(f.) distinctness Dhtp 366 & Dhtm 593 (in def;n of brū ). Cp. veyyatti.

cp. Sk. vyakti

Viyākāra

preparation, display, distinction, splendour, majesty Snp 299 (= sampatti Snp-a 319).

vi + ākāra

Viyācikkhati

in verse at Snp 1090 for vyācikkhati, i.e. vi + ācikkhati, to tell, relate, explain; pp. vyākhyāta.

Viyāpanna

gone down, lost, destroyed Snp 314 (in verse; gloss viyāvatta. The former expld as “naṭṭha,” the latter as “viparivattitvā aññathā-bhūta” at Snp-a 324).

vi + āpanna, pp. of vi + āpajjati cp. vyāpajjati

Viyāyata

stretched out or across Ja iii.373 (in verse).

vi + āyata

Viyārambha

striving, endeavour, undertaking Snp 953 (expld as the 3 abhisankhāras, viz puñña˚, apuñña˚ & āneñja˚ at Nd;1 442).

vi + ārambha

Viyūḷha

massed heaped; thick, dense (of fighting) MN i.86 = Nd ii.1995 (ubhato viyūlḥaṃ sangāmaṃ massed battle on both sides); AN iii.94, AN iii.99 (sangāma, cp. SN iv.308); Ja vi.275 (balaggāni viyūḷhāni; C. = pabbūḷha-vasena ṭhitāni where pabbūḷha evidently in meaning “sambādha.” 2. put in array, prepared, imminent Ja ii.336 (maraṇe viyūḷhe = paccupaṭṭhite C.). Cp. saṃyūḷha.

apparently vi + ūḷha, pp. of viyūhati, but mixed in meaning with vi + ūha (of vah ) = vyūha

Viyūhati

to take away, carry off, remove Vin iii.48 (paṃsuṃ vyūhati) Ja i.177, Ja i.199 (paṃsuṃ), 238, 331 (kaddamaṃ dvidhā viyūhitvā); iii.52 (vālikaṃ); iv.265 (paṃsuṃ); vi.448 (vālukaṃ); Dhs-a 315; Dhp-a ii.38; Dhp-a iii.207 (paṃsuṃ). pp. viyūḷha. Cp. saṃyūhati.

vi + ūh, a differentiated form of vah

Viyūhana

(nt.) removing, removal Vism 302 (paṃsu˚).

fr. viyūhati

Viyoga

separation Ja vi.482; Mvu 19, Mvu 16 (Mahābodhi˚); Pv-a 160, Pv-a 161 (pati˚ from her husband) Sdhp 77, Sdhp 164.

vi + yoga 2

Viyyati

to be woven Vin iii.259 ■ pp. vīta2.

Pass. of vāyati1 or vināti. The Vedic is ūyate

Viracita

1. put together, composed, made Vv-a 14, Vv-a 183.

2. ornamented Thag-a 257; Vv-a 188.

vi + racita

Viraja

(adj.) free from defilement or passion, stainless, faultless Vin i.294 (āgamma maggaṃ virajaṃ) Snp 139, Snp 520, Snp 636, Snp 1105 (see exegesis at Nd ii.590); Pv iii.36 (= vigata-raja, niddosa Pv-a 189); Dhp-a iv.142 Dhp-a iv.187; DN-a i.237. Often in phrase virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhamma-cakkhuṃ udapādi “there arose in him the stainless eye of the Arahant,” e.g. Vin i.16; SN iv.47- virajaṃ (+ asokaṃ) padaṃ “the stainless (+ painless element” is another expression for Nibbāna, e.g. SN iv.210; AN iv.157, AN iv.160; Iti 37, Iti 46; Vv 169; similarly ṭhānaṃ (for padaṃ) Pv ii.333 (= sagga Pv-a 89).

vi + rajo

Virajjaka

(adj.) separated from one’s kingdom, living in a foreign country Vv-a 336.

vi + rajja + ka

Virajjati

to detach oneself, to free oneself of passion, to show lack of interest in (loc.). SN ii.94, SN ii.125 (nibbindaṃ [ppr.] virajjati); iii.46, 189; iv.2, 86; AN v.3; Snp 739 = SN iv.205 (tattha); Thag 247; Snp 813 (na rajjati na virajjati), 853; Nd i.138, Nd i.237; Mil 245 Sdhp 613 ■ pp. viratta ■ Caus. virājeti to put away to estrange (acc.) from (loc.), to cleanse (oneself) of passion (loc.), to purify, to discard as rāga DN ii.51; SN i.16 = Snp 171 (ettha chandaṃ v. = vinetvā viddhaṃsetvā Snp-a 213); SN iv.17 = Kv 178; AN ii.196 (rajanīyesu dhammesu cittaṃ v.); Snp 139, Snp 203; Thag 282; Pv ii.1319 (itthi-cittaṃ = viratta-citta Pv-a 168); Thag-a 49; Dhp-a i.327 (itthi-bhāve chandaṃ v. to give up desire for femininity) ■ pp. virājita.

vi + rajjati

Virajjana

(nt.) discolouring Ja iii.148 (rajjana + ).

fr. virajjati; cp. rajjana

Virajjhati

to fail, miss, lose SN iv.117; Ja i.17, Ja i.490 (aor. virajjhi) ii.432 (id.); Pv-a 59 ■ pp. viraddha ■ Caus. virādheti (q.v.).

vi + rādh; cp. Sk. virādhyati: see rādheti1

Viraṇa

(adj. nt.) without fight or harm, peace Sdhp 579.

vi + raṇa

Virata

abstaining from (abl.) Snp 59, Snp 531, Snp 704, Snp 900, Snp 1070; Nd i.314; Nd ii.591; Vv-a 72; Sdhp 338.

pp. of viramati

Virati

(f.) abstinence Mvu 20, Mvu 58. The three viratis given at DN-a i.305 (= veramaṇī) are sampatta˚ samādāna˚, setughāta˚ (q.v.). Cp. Dhs-a 154 (tisso viratiyo), 218; Sdhp 215, Sdhp 341 & Cpd. 244, n. 2.

vi + rati

Viratta

dispassioned, free from passion, detached, unattached to, displeased with (loc.) SN iii.45 (rūpadhātuyā cittaṃ virattaṃ vimuttaṃ); Snp 204 (chandarāga˚), 235 (˚citta āyatike bhavasmiṃ); AN v.3 AN v.313; Ja v.233 (mayi); Sdhp 613.

pp. of virajjati

Viraddha

failed, missed, neglecte SN v.23 (ariyo maggo v.), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā viraddhā 254, 294; Nd i.512; Ja i.174, Ja i.490; Ja ii.384; Ja iv.71, Ja iv.497 Ne 132.

pp. of virajjhati

Viraddhi

(f.) (missing, failure?) at Vin i.359 is uncertain reading. The vv.ll. are visuddhi, visandi & visandhi with expl;ns “viddhaṭṭhāna” & “viraddhaṭṭhāna” see p. 395.

Virandha

opening; defect, flaw Nd i.165.

vi + randha2

Viramaṇa

(nt.) (-˚) abstinence, abstaining from (-˚) Mvu 14, Mvu 48 (uccā-seyyā˚).

fr. viramati

Viramati

to stop, cease; to desist (abl.), abstain, refrain Snp 400 (Pot. ˚meyya), 828 (Pot. ˚me) 925; Nd i.168, Nd i.376; Thig 397 (aor. viramāsi, cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 1651); Pv iv.355 (pāpadassanaṃ, acc.); Mil 85; Pv-a 204.

vi + ramati

Virala

(& Viraḷa) (adj.) 1. sparse, rare, thin Thig 254 (of hair, expld as vilūna-kesa Thag-a 210, i.e. almost bald spelling ḷ); Dhs-a 238 (ḷ); Dhp-a i.122 (˚cchanna thinly covered); Pv-a 4 (in ratta-vaṇṇa-virala-mālā read better with v.l. as ratta-kaṇavīra-mālā, cp. Ja iii.59).

connected with Vedic ṛtē excluding, without, & nirṛti perishing; cp. also Gr. ε ̓́ρημος lonely; Lat. rarus = rare

Viralita

thin, sparse, rare Dāvs iv.24 (a˚), with v.l. viraḷita.

pp. of Denom. of virala = viraleti, cp. Sk. viralāyate to be rare

Virava

(& ˚rāva ) shouting out, roaring; crying (of animals) Ja i.25, Ja i.74 (ā), 203 (of elephants); v.9 (ā, of swans).

vi + rava & rāva; cp. Vedic virava

Viravati

1. to shout (out), to cry aloud; to utter a cry or sound (of animals) Ja ii.350 (kikī sakuṇo viravi); v.206; Mvu 12, Mvu 49 (mahārāvaṃ viraviṃsu mahājanā); Pv-a 154, Pv-a 217, Pv-a 245 (vissaraṃ), 279 (id.) Sdhp 179, Sdhp 188, Sdhp 291.

2. to rattle Ja i.51 ■ Caus virāveti to sound Mvu 21, Mvu 15 (ghaṇṭaṃ to ring a bell).

vi + ravati

Viraha

(adj.) empty, rid of, bar, without Pv-a 137, Pv-a 139 (sīla˚).

vi + raho

Virahita

(adj.) empty, exempt from, rid of, without Mil 330 (dosa˚); Pv-a 139.

vi + rahita

Virāga

1. absence of rāga, dispassionateness, indifference towards (abl. or loc.) disgust, absence of desire, destruction of passions; waning, fading away cleansing, purifying; emancipation, Arahantship. DN iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 222, 243, 251, 290; SN i.136 SN iii.19 sq., 59 sq., 163, 189; iv.33 sq., 47, 226, 365 v.226, 255, 361; AN i.100, AN i.299; AN ii.26; AN iii.35, AN iii.85, AN iii.325 sq. AN iv.146 sq., 423 sq.; v.112, 359; Thag 599; Snp 795; Pts ii.220 sq.; Nd i.100; Kv 600 = Dhp 273 = Ne 188 (virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṃ); Dhs 163; Ne 16, Ne 29 Vism 290 (khaya˚ & accanta˚) 293 ■ Often nearly synonymous with; nibbāna, in the description of which it occurs frequently in foll. formula: taṇhakkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna, e.g. SN i.136; Vin i.5; AN ii.118; Iti 88 ■ or combd with nibbidā virāga nirodha upasama… nibbāna, e.g. MN i.431; SN ii.223; cp. nibbāna ii.B1 & iii.8 ■ In other connection (more objectively as “destruction”): aniccatā sankhārānaṃ etc., vipariṇāma virāga nirodha, e.g. SN iii.43; (as “ceasing fading away”:) khaya (-dhamma liable to), vaya˚ virāga˚, nirodha˚; MN i.500; SN ii.26.

2. colouring diversity or display of colour, dye, hue (= rāga 1) Ja i.89 (nānā˚-samujjala blazing forth different colours); 395 (nānā˚ variously dyed); Pv-a 50 (nānā˚-vaṇṇa-samujjala).

vi + rāga

Virāgatā

(f.) disinterestedness, absence of lust Kv 212 = Ud 10.

abstr. fr. rāga

Virāgita

(adj.) at Ja v.96 is not clear. It is said of beautiful women expl;d by C. as vilagga-sarīrā, tanumajjhā, i.e. “having slender waists.” Could it be “excited with passion or “exciting passion”? Or could it be an old misreading for virājita2 ? It may also be a distorted vilāka (q.v.) or vilaggita.

fr. vi + *rāgeti, Denom. of rāga?

Virāgin

(adj.) 1. discoloured, fading in colour Ja iii.88 (fig. saddhā avirāginī), 148 (rāga fading in the original dye, of citta).

2. changing reversing AN iii.416 (of dukkha: dandha˚ & khippa˚ of slow & quick change; v.l. M6 is viparāgi, which may represent a vipariyāyi, i.e. changing).

fr. virāga 2, cp. rāgin

Virāguṇa

in meaning “fading away, waning” in verse at Iti 69 (of viññāṇa) is doubtful reading. It corresponds to virāgadhamma of the prose part (virāgudh˚ vv.ll.) The v.l. is pabhaṅguṇa (which might be preferable unless we regard it as an explanation of virāgin, if we should write it thus).

Virāgeti

to fail, miss; only at MN i.327 (puriso narakapapāte papatanto hatthehi ca pādehi ca paṭhaviṃ virāgeyya “would miss the earth”; differently Neumann “Boden zu fassen suchte,” i.e. tried to touch ground)-Perhaps also in virāgāya (either as ger. to virāgeti or as instr. to virāga in sense of virādha(na) ) Pv i.117 (sukhaṃ virāgāya, with gloss virāgena, i.e. spurning one’s good fortune; expld as virajjhitvā virādhetvā at Pv-a 59). Cp. virāye (= virāge?) at Thag 1113 (see virādheti).

for virādheti, as in BSk. virāgayati (e.g. Divy 131, Divy 133) to displease, estrange, the fig. meaning of virāgeti like BSk. ārāgeti for Pāli ārādheti in lit & fig meanings

Virājati

to shine Pv-a 189 (= virocati).

vi + rājati

Virājita1

cleansed, discarded as rāga, given up SN iv.158 (dosa); Ja iii.404 (= pahīna C.).

pp. of virājeti

Virājita2

shining out, resplendent Ja ii.33 (mora… suratta-rāji-virājita here perhaps = streaked?). Cp. virāgita.

pp. of Caus. of virājati

Virājeti

see virajjati.

Virādhanā

(f.) failing, failure DN ii.287; AN v.211 sq.

fr. virādheti

Virādhita

failed, missed, lost Ja v.400; Pv iv.13 (= pariccatta C.).

pp. of virādheti

Virādheti

to miss, omit, fail, transgress, sin Snp 899; Thag 37, Thag 1113 virāye for virādhaya C., may be virāge, cp. Brethren 3752 see; virāgeti ); Nd i.312; Ja i.113; Ap. 47; Pv-a 59 ■ Cp virageti ■ pp. virādhita.

vi + rādheti1, or Caus. of virajjhati

Virāva

see virava.

Viriccati

to get purged DN ii.128 (ppr. viriccamāna) ■ pp. viritta ■ Cp. vireka.

Pass. of vi + riñcati

Viritta

purged Mil 214.

pp. of viriccati

Viriya

(nt.) lit. “state of a strong man,” i.e. vigour, energy, effort, exertion On term see also Dhs. trsln § 13; Cpd. 242 ■ DN iii.113 DN iii.120 sq., 255 sq.; SN ii.132, SN ii.206 sq.; Snp 79, Snp 184, Snp 353, Snp 422 Snp 531, Snp 966, Snp 1026 (chanda˚); Nd i.476, Nd i.487; Nd ii.394; Ja i.178 (viriyaṃ karoti, with loc.); Pp 71; Vb 10 Ne 16, Ne 28; Tikp 60, 63; Mil 36; Vism 160 (˚upekkhā), 462; Kp-a 96; Snp-a 489; Dhp-a iv.231; DN-a i.63; Dhs-a 120; Vv-a 14; Pv-a 98, Pv-a 129; Sdhp 343, Sdhp 517. accāraddha˚; too much exertion MN iii.159; AN iii.375 opp. atilīna˚; too little ibid; uṭṭhāna˚; initiative or rousing energy SN i.21, SN i.217; AN iii.76; AN iv.282; Thag-a 267; Pv-a 129; nara˚; manly strength Ja iv.478, Ja iv.487. -viriyaṃ āra(m)bhati to put forth energy, to make an effort SN ii.28; SN iv.125; SN v.9, SN v.244 sq.; AN i.39, AN i.282, AN i.296; AN ii.15 AN iv.462 ■ As adj. (-˚) in alīna˚; alert, energetic Ja i.22 āraddha˚; full of energy, putting forth energy, strenuous SN i.53, SN i.166, SN i.198; SN ii.29, SN ii.207 sq.; SN iv.224; SN v.225; AN i.4 AN i.12; AN ii.76, AN ii.228 sq.; AN iii.65, AN iii.127; AN iv.85, AN iv.229, AN iv.291, AN iv.357 AN v.93, AN v.95, AN v.153, AN v.335; Ja i.110; ossaṭṭha˚; one who has given up effort Ja i.110; hīna˚; lacking in energy Iti 34 (here as vīriya, in metre) ■ v. is one of the indriyas, the balas & the; sambojjhaṅgas (q.v.).

-ārambha “putting forth of energy,” application of exertion, will, energy, resolution DN iii.252; SN ii.202 SN iv.175; AN i.12; AN iii.117; AN iv.15 sq., 280; v.123 sq.; Pts i.103 sq.; Vb 107, Vb 194, Vb 208; Dhs-a 145, Dhs-a 146. -indriya the faculty of energy DN iii.239, DN iii.278; SN v.196 sq.; Dhs 13 Vb 123; Ne 7, Ne 15, Ne 19; Vb-a 276. -bala the power of energy DN iii.229, DN iii.253; AN iv.363; Ja i.109. -saṃvara restraint by will Vism 7; Snp-a 8; Dhs-a 351.

fr. vīra; cp. Vedic vīrya & vīria

Viriyatā

(f.) manliness, energy, strength MN i.19; Vv-a 284.

abstr. fr. viriya

Viriyavant

(adj.) energetic AN i.236; Snp 528, Snp 531 (four-syllabic), 548 (three-syllabic); Vism 3 (= ātāpin); Sdhp 475.

viriya + vant

Virujaka

(vīṇā˚) lute-player Ja vi.51 (= vīṇā-vādaka C.). See rujaka.

Virujjhati

to be obstructed Snp 73 (avirujjhamāna unobstructed); Ja vi.12.

vi + rujjhati

Virujjhana

(nt.) obstructing or being obstructed, obstruction, Ja vi.448.

fr. virujjhati

Viruta

(nt.) noise, sound (of animals), cry Snp 927; expld as “virudaṃ [spelling with d, like ruda for ruta] vuccati-miga-cakkaṃ; miga-cakka-pāthakā [i.e. experts in the ways of animals; knowers of auspices migacakkaṃ ādisanti” at Nd i.382; and as “mig’ ādīnaṃ vassitaṃ” at Snp-a 564. The passage is a little doubtful when we compare the expression viruṭañ ca gabbhakaraṇaṃ at Snp 927 with the passage viruddha-gabbhakaraṇaṃ at DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.96), which seems more original.

vi + ruta

Viruddha

hindered, obstructed, disturbed SN i.236; Snp 248, Snp 630; Nd i.239; Mil 99, Mil 310; Ja i.97 ■ Often neg. a˚ unobstructed, free SN i.236 SN iv.71; AN iii.276 (˚ka); Dhp 406; Snp 365, Snp 704, Snp 854; Vb-a 148 = Vism 543.

-gabbha-karaṇa (using charms for) procuring abortion DN i.11; DN-a i.96 (expld here as first trying to destroy the foetus and afterwards giving medicine for its preservation). See also viruta.

pp. of virundhati

*Virundhati

to obstruct etc. Pass. virujjhati (q.v.) ■ pp. viruddha ■ Caus. virodheti. (q.v.).

vi + rundhati

Virūpa

(adj.) deformed, unsightly, ugly Snp 50; Ja i.47; Ja iv.379; Ja vi.31, Ja vi.114; Pv-a 24, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 47; Sdhp 85.

at Snp 50 virūpa is taken as “various” by Bdhgh (Snp-a 99), and virūpa-rūpa expld as vividha-rūpa, i.e. diversity, variety. So also the Niddesa.

vi + rūpa

Virūḷha

having grown, growing SN ii.65 (viññāṇe virūḷhe āyatiṃ punnabbhav’ âbhinibbatti hoti).

pp. of virūhati

Virūḷhi

(f.) growth MN i.250; SN iii.53; AN iii.8, AN iii.404 sq.; AN v.152 sq., 161, 350 sq.; Iti 113; Mil 33 Mvu 15, Mvu 42; Vb-a 196avirūḷhi-dhamma not liable to growth Snp 235; Dhp-a i.245.

vi + rūḷhi, of ruh

Virūhati

to grow, sprout Iti 113; Mil 386; DN-a i.120 ■ Cp. paṭi˚ ■ pp. virūḷha ■ Caus II. virūhāpeti to make grow, to foster Mil 386.

vi + rūhati1

Virūhanā

(f.) & ˚a (nt.) growing, growth Ja ii.323 (f.); Mil 354; Vism 220; DN-a i.161; Pv-a 7.

vi + rūhanā

Vireka = virecana

Mil 134 (cp. Vin i.279).

Virecana

(nt.) purging, a purgative Vin i.206 (˚ṃ pātuṃ to drink a p.), 279 (id.); DN i.12; AN v.218; Ja iii.48 (sineha˚ an oily or softening purgative); DN-a i.98.

vi + recana, ric

Virecaniya

(adj.) (one who is) to be treated with a purgative Mil 169.

grd. formation fr. virecana

Vireceti

to purge Mil 229, Mil 335.

vi + Caus. of riñcati

Virocati

to shine (forth), to be brilliant Vin ii.296 (tapati, bhāsati, v.); Snp 378, Snp 550; Iti 64 (virocare); Ja i.18, Ja i.89; Ja iv.233; Pv i.114; ii.962; iii.35 (= virājati Pv-a 189); Dhp-a i.446; Dhp-a iv.143; Dhs-a 14; Pv-a 110 (˚amāna = sobhamāna), 136 sq., 157. Cp. verocana. Caus. viroceti to illumine Mil 336.

vi + rocati

Virodha

obstruction, hindrance, opposition, enmity SN i.111; SN iv.71, SN iv.210; Snp 362; Pp 18, Pp 22; Kv 485; Mil 394; Dhs-a 39avirodha absence of obstruction, gentleness MN ii.105 = Thag 875; Pv iii.73.

vi + rodha1

Virodhana

(adj. nt.) opposing, obstruction, opposition, contradiction, only neg. a˚ absence of opposition, Ja iii.274, Ja iii.320, Ja iii.412; Ja v.378.

fr. virodheti

Virodhita

obstructed, rendered hostile Pgdp 90 (or is it virādhita ?).

pp. of virodheti

Virodheti

to cause obstruction, to render hostile, to be in disharmony, to exasperate SN iv.379 = AN v.320 (which latter passage reads viggaṇhati instead); Sdhp 45, Sdhp 496 ■ pp. virodhita.

Caus. of virundhati

Virosanā

(f.) causing anger Vb 86; Vb-a 75.

vi + rosanā

Vilakkhaṇa

(adj.-n..) wrong or false characteristic; (adj.) discharacteristic, i.e. inconsistent with characteristics, discrepant (opp. sa˚; in accordance with ch.) Mil 405; Ne 78; Vb-a 250 sq.

vi + lakkhaṇa

Vilagga

(adj.) 1. stuck Vin i.138; MN i.393. - 2. slender (of waist) Ja v.96 (see virāgita), 216 (see vilāka ).

vi + lagga

Vilaggita

(adj.) stretched or bending (?), slender Ja iv.20 (see under vilāka ).

vi + laggita

Vilaṅga

(nt.) the plant Erycibe paniculata Vin i.201 (v.l. viḷ˚) ■ ˚thālikā at Nd i.154 read as bilaṅga˚; (q.v.).

*Sk. viḍanga

Vilaṅghaka

in hattha˚; jerking of the hand beckoning (as a mode of making signs) Vin i.157; MN i.207 (has g for gh, cp. p. 547) ■ Cp. hattha-vikāra.

fr. vilangheti

Vilaṅghati

to jump about, to leap (over) Sdhp 168.

vi + langhati

Vilajjati

to be ashamed, to be bashful, to pretend bashfulness Ja v.433.

vi + lajjati

Vilapati

1. to talk idly Ja i.496.

2. to lament, wail Thag 705; Ja ii.156; Ja v.179; Mil 275; Thag-a 148 (Ap. v. 66).

vi + lapati

Vilamba

(adj.) hanging down; only in redupl ■ iter. cpd. olamba-vilamba dropping or falling off all round Ja iv.380.

vi + lamba

Vilambati

to loiter, to tarry, lit. “hang about” Ja i.413; Dhp-a i.81.

vi + lambati

Vilambin

(adj.) hanging down, drooping MN i.306 (f. ˚inī, of a creeper, i.e. growing tendrils all over).

vi + lambin

Vilaya

dissolution; ˚ṃ gacchati, as much as: “to be digested,” to be dissolved Mil 67. adj. dissolved, dispersed Dpvs i.65.

vi + laya, cp. līyati

Vilasati

to play, dally, sport; to shine forth, to unfold splendour Ja v.38 (of a tree “stand herrlich da” Dutoit), 433 (of woman); vi.44 (of a tree, vilāsamāna T.) ■ pp. vilasita.

vi + lasati

Vilasita

(adj.) shining; gay, playful, coquettish Ja v.420.

pp. of vilasati

Vilāka

(adj.) only in f ˚a: slender (of waist); the expln with vilagga may refer to a comparison with a creeper (cp. vilambin & Ja v.215 as “hanging” (“climbing”) i.e. slim, but seems forced See also virāgita which is expld in the same way. The word is peculiar to the “Jātaka” style ■ Ja iv.19 (= suṭṭhu- vilaggita -tanu-majjhā); v.155 (+ mudukā; C expls as sankhitta-majjhā), 215 (˚majjhā = vilaggasarīrā C.), 506 (velli-vilāka-majjhā = vilagga-majjhā tanu-dīgha-majjhā C.); Vv-a 280 (˚majjhā for sumajjhimā of Vv 6413; T. reads vilāta˚; ).

perhaps = vilagga (Geiger, P.Gr. § 612), although difficult to connect in meaning

Vilāpa

idle talk Ja i.496; Ja v.24. Cp. saṃ˚.

vi + lāpa

Vilāpanatā

(f.) = vilāpa Pp 21.

Vilāsa

1. charm, grace, beauty Ja i.470; Ja vi.43; Mil 201; Thag-a 78; Pv-a 3desanā˚; beauty of instruction DN-a i.67; Vism 524, Vism 541; Tikp 21.

2. dalliance sporting, coquetry Ja iii.408; Ja v.436. vilāsa is often coupled with līlā (q.v.).

fr. vilasati

Vilāsavant

(adj.) having splendour, grace or beauty Mvu 29, Mvu 25.

fr. vilāsa

Vilāsin

(adj.) shining forth, unfolding splendour, possessing charm or grace, charming DN-a i.40 (vyāmapabhā parikkhepa-vilāsinī splendour shining over a radius of a vyāma).

fr. vilāsa

Vilikhati

1. to scrape, scratch SN i.124 (bhūmiṃ); iv.198; Dhs-a 260 (fig. manaṃ v. ; in expln of vilekha ).

2. to scratch open Vin ii.175 ■ pp vilikhita.

vi + likhati

Vilikhita

scraped off Snp-a 207.

pp. of vilikhati

Vilitta

anointed DN i.104 (su-nahāta suvilitta kappita-kesa-massu); Ja iii.91; Ja iv.442.

pp. of vilimpati

Vilimpati

to smear, anoint AN iii.57; Ja i.265 (ger. ˚itvā); iii.277 (ppr. ˚anto): Pv i.106 (ger ˚itvāna) Pv-a 62 (˚itvā) ■ pp. vilitta ■ Caus. II. vilimpāpeti to cause to be anointed Ja i.50 (gandhehi), 254 (id.). Vilivili (-kriya)

vi + limpati

Vilivili (-kriyā)

see biḷibiḷikā.

Vilīna

(adj.) 1. clinging, sticking [cp. līyati 1] Vin i.209 (olīna˚ sticking all over). 2. matured (“digested”? cp. vilaya) Ja iv.72 (nava˚gosappi freshly matured ghee); Mil 301 (phalāni ripefruit).

3. [cp. līyati 2] molten, i.e. refined, purified Ja iv.118 (tamba-loha˚ molten or liquid-hot copper) v. 269 (tamba-loha˚, id.; cp. C. on p. 274; vilīnaṃ tambālohaṃ viya pakkaṭṭhitaṃ lohitaṃ pāyenti); Dhs-a 14 (˚suvaṇṇa) ■ Cp. uttatta in same sense and the expln of velli as “uttatta-ghana-suvaṇṇa-rāsi-ppabbā” at Ja v.506 C.

vi + līna, pp. of vilīyati

Vilīyati

to melt (intrs.), to be dissolved, to perish Ja iv.498; Vism 420 (pabbata, spelling here with ḷ; Warren wrong “are hidden from view,” i.e. nilīyati) Dhs-a 336 (phānita-piṇḍa; trsln not to the point “reduced or pounded”); Sdhp 383; Pgdp 21 ■ pp vilīna ■ Cp. pa˚.

vi + līyati 2

Vilīyana

(nt.) melting, dissolution Sdhp 201. Viliva & Viliva;

fr. vilīyati

Vilīva & Viliva

(adj.) [Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Sk, bilma slip, chip. Phonetically viliva = Sk. bilva: see billa 1. made of split bamboo Vin ii.266 (i).

2. (ī) a chip of bamboo or any other reed, a slip of reed MN i.566 (Bdhgh on MN i.429); Vism 310 (˚maya).

Vilīvakāra

a worker in bamboo, a basketmaker Vin iii.82; Mil 331; Vb-a 222 (˚ka in simile) Pv-a 175.

vilīva + kāra

Vilugga

(adj.) broken; only in redupl ■ iter. cpd. olugga-vilugga all broken up, tumbling to pieces MN i.80, MN i.450.

vi + lugga

Vilutta

plundered, stripped, robbed, ruined SN i.85 = Ja ii.239; Ja v.99; Ja vi.44; Mil 303; Mvu 33, Mvu 71 (corehi).

pp. of vilumpati

Vilumpaka

(adj.) (act. or pass.) plundering or being plundered Ja i.370 (˚cora); ii.239 (pass.).

fr. vi + lup

Vilumpati

to plunder, rob, steal, ruin SN i.85 = Ja ii.239; Ja v.99; Mil 193; Vv-a 100; Dhp-a iii.23-Pass. viluppati Ja v.254 (gloss for ˚lump˚ of p. 253)-pp. vilutta ■ Caus. II. vilumpāpeti to incite to plunder Mil 193; Ja i.263.

vi + lumpati

Vilumpana

(nt.) plundering Dhp-a iii.23. Vilumpamana(ka)

fr. vilumpati

Vilumpamāna(ka)

plundering, robbing Ja v.254; Pv-a 4 (˚ka cora).

orig. ppr. med. of vilumpati

Vilulita

(adj.) stirred, agitated, shaken, disturbed Dāvs iv.54 (bhaya˚citta). Cp. viloḷeti.

vi + luḷita; cp. BSk. vilulita Jtm 210

Vilūna

(adj.) cut off (always with ref. to the hair) MN iii.180 = AN i.138; Mil 11; Pv-a 47.

vi + lūna

Vilekha

perplexity, lit. “scratching” Vin iv.143 (here as f. ˚ā); Dhs 1256 (mano˚); Dhs-a 260. The more common word for “perplexity” is vikkhepa.

vi + lekha

Vilepana

(nt.) ointment, cosmetic, toilet perfume AN i.107, AN i.212; AN ii.209; Thag 616 (sīlaṃ v. seṭṭhaṃ Cp. Ja iii.290); Pp 51, Pp 58; Pv ii.316; DN-a i.77 DN-a i.88.

vi + lepana

Vilokana

(nt.) looking, reflection, investigation, prognostication usually as 5 objects of reflection as to when & where & how one shall be reborn (; pañca-mahā-˚āni ), consisting in kāla, desa, dīpa, kula, mātā (the latter as janetti-āyu i.e. mother and her time of delivery at Ja i.48) or time (right or wrong), continent, sky (orientation), family (or clan) and one’s (future) mother: Ja i.48, Ja i.49; Dhp-a i.84; as 8 at Mil 193, viz. kāla, dīpa, desa, kula, janetti āyu, māsa, nekkhamma (i.e. the 5 + period of gestation month of his birthday, and his renunciation). Without special meaning at DN-a i.194 (ālokana + ). Cp. volokana.

vi + lok (loc = roc ), see loka & rocati

Vilokita

(nt.) a look AN ii.104, AN ii.106 sq., 210; Pp 44, Pp 45; DN-a i.193; Vv-a 6 (ālokita + ).

pp. of viloketi

Viloketar

one who looks or inspects DN-a i.194 (āloketar + ).

n. ag. fr. viloketi

Viloketi

to examine, study, inspect, scrutinize, reflect on Thig 282; Ja i.48, Ja i.49; Dhp-a i.84; Mil 193; Mvu 22, Mvu 18 ■ pp. vilokita. Cp. pa˚; & vo˚.;

vi + loketi, of lok, as in loka

Vilocana

(nt.) the eye Dāvs i.41; Thag-a 253.

vi + locana

Vilopa

plunder, pillage MN i.456 (maccha˚ fishhaul); Ja i.7; Ja iii.8; Ja vi.409; Dpvs ix.7 (˚kamma). vilopaṃ khādati to live by plunder Ja vi.131.

vi + lopa

Vilopaka

(adj.) plundering, living by plundering Ja i.5; Mil 122 (f. ˚ikā).

fr. vilopa

Vilopiya

(adj.) to be plundered; neg. ; Sdhp 311.

grd. formation fr. vilopa

Vilomatā

(f.) unseemliness, repugnance Snp-a 106.

abstr. fr. viloma

Viloma

(adj.) against the grain (lit. against the hair), discrepant, reversed, wrong, unnatural Vin ii.115 (of cīvara: unsightly); Ja iii.113; Dpvs vii.55; Dhp-a i.379; Pv-a 87.

vi + loma

Vilomana

(nt.) discrepancy, disagreement, reverse Dhs-a 253.

fr. viloma

Vilometi

to dispute, disagree with, to find fault Ne 22; Mil 29, Mil 295; Dhs-a 253.

Denom. fr. viloma

Viloḷana

(nt.) & Viloṭana; [fr. vi + luḍ; cp. Whitney, Sanskrit Roots, 1885, p. 149, where themes & their forms are given by; luṭh1 to roll, luṭh2 & luṇṭh; to rob, luḍ to stir up (some forms of it having meaning of luṇṭh) = lul to be lively] shaking, stirring; only found in lexicogr. literature as defn of several roots, viz. of gāh Dhtp 349; Dhtm 504; math & manth; (see mathati Dhtp 126; Dhtm 183. See also luḷati.

fr. vi + luḷ

Viloḷeti

to stir, to move about Ja i.26; Dpvs vi.52.

vi + loḷeti or loleti, cp. vilulita

Viḷayhati

to burn (intrs.) Ja ii.220.

vi + dayhati

Viḷāra

at AN iii.122 read as biḷāra (sasa-biḷārā rabbits & cats).;

Vivajjita

1. abandoning, abstaining from Vv-a 75 (˚kiliṭṭha-kamma).

2. avoided Thig 459. 3. distant from (abl.) Mil 131.

pp. of vivajjeti

Vivajjeti

to avoid, abandon, forsake SN i.43; AN v.17; Snp 53 (= parivajj˚ abhivajj˚ Nd ii.592), 399 (˚jjaya), 407 (praet. ˚jjayi); Vv 8438 (˚jjayātha = parivajjetha Vv-a 346); Ja i.473; Ja iii.263, Ja iii.481 (˚jjayi); v.233 (Pot. ˚jjaye); Mil 129; Sdhp 210, Sdhp 353, Sdhp 395 ■ pp vivajjita ■ Pass. vivajjati Ja i.27.

vi + vajjeti

Vivaṭa

uncovered, open (lit. & fig.), laid bare, unveiled Snp 19 (lit.), 374 (fig. anāvaṭa Snp-a 366), 763, 793 (= open-minded); Nd i.96 Pp 45, Pp 46 (read vivaṭa for pi vaṭa; opp. pihita); Vism 185 (opp. pihita); Ja v.434; Dhp-a iii.79; Vv-a 27; Pv-a 283 (mukha unveiled) ■ vivaṭena cetasā “with mind awake & clear” DN iii.223; AN iv.86; SN v.263; cp. cetovivaraṇa ■ vivaṭa is freq.v.l. for vivatta (-cchada) e.g. at AN ii.44; Snp 372; Dhp-a iii.195; Snp-a 265 (in expln of term); sometimes the only reading in this phrase (q.v.), e.g. at Nd ii.593 ■ instr. vivaṭena as adv “openly” Vin ii.99; Vin iv.21.

-cakkhu open-minded, clear-sighted Snp 921; Nd i.354 -dvāra (having) an open door, an open house Ja v.293 (aḍḍha˚ half open); Dhp-a ii.74 -nakkhatta a yearly festival, “Public Day,” called after the fashion of the people going uncovered (appaṭicchannena sarīrena) bare-footed to the river Dhp-a i.388.

vi + vaṭa, pp. of vṛ;: see vuṇāti

Vivaṭaka

(adj.) open (i.e. not secret) Vin ii.99.

vivaṭa + ka

Vivaṭṭa

(m. & nt.) 1. “rolling back,” with ref. to the development of the world (or the aeons kappa) used to denote a devolving cycle (“devolution”) whereas vaṭṭa alone or saṃvaṭṭa denote the involving cycle (both either with or without kappa). Thus as “periods” of the world they practically mean the same thing & may both be interpreted in the sense of a; new beginning. As redupl ■ inter. cpds. they express only the idea of constant change. We sometimes find vivaṭṭa in the sense of “renewal” & saṃvaṭṭa in the sense of “destruction,” where we should expect the opposite meaning for each. See also vaṭṭa & saṃvaṭta; Dogmatically vivaṭṭa is used as “absence of vaṭṭa, i.e. nibbāna or salvation from saṃsāra (see vaṭṭa cp. citta-vivaṭṭa, ceto˚, ñāṇa˚, vimokkha˚ at Ps; i.108 & ii.70) ■ Fig. in kamma˚; “the rolling back of k., i.e. devolution or course of kamma at SN i.85 ■ Abs & comb;d with saṃvaṭṭa (i.e. devolution combd with evolution) e.g. at DN i.14, DN i.16 sq.; DN iii.109; AN ii.142 (where read vivaṭṭe for vivaṭṭo); Pp 60; Vism 419 (here as m. vivaṭṭo, compared with saṃvaṭṭo), 420 (˚ṭṭhāyin) In cpd. ˚kappa (i.e. descending aeon) at DN iii.51; Pp 60; Iti 15.

2. (nt.) part of a bhikkhu’s dress (rolling up of the binding?), combd with anu- vivaṭṭa at Vin i.287.

vi + vaṭṭa;1

Vivaṭṭati

1. to move back, to go back, to revolve, to begin again (of a new world-cycle), contrasted with saṃvaṭṭati to move in an ascending line (cp vivaṭṭa) DN i.17; DN iii.84, DN iii.109; Vism 327.

2. to be distracted or diverted from (abl.), to turn away; to turn over, to be upset Ne 131; Pp 32 (so read for vivattati); Pts ii.98 (ppr.) ■ pp. vivaṭṭa.

vi + vaṭṭati

Vivaṭṭana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f) turning away, moving on, moving back Ps; i.66; ii.98; Vism 278 (f. expld as “magga”).

fr. vivaṭṭati

Vivaṭṭeti

to turn down or away (perhaps in dogmatic sense to turn away from saṃsāra), to divert destroy: only in phrase vivaṭṭayi saṃyojanaṃ (in standard setting with acchecchi taṇhaṃ ), where the usual v.l. is vāvattayi (see vāvatteti ). Thus at MN i.12 MN i.122; SN i.127; SN iv.105, SN iv.205, SN iv.207, SN iv.399; AN i.134; AN iii.246 AN iii.444 sq.; AN iv.8 sq.; Iti 47 (T. vivattayi).

vi + vaṭṭeti

Vivaṇṇa

(adj.) discoloured, pale, wan Snp 585; Thig 79; Ja ii.418.

vi + vaṇṇa

Vivaṇṇaka

(nt.) dispraise, reviling Vin iv.143.

fr. vivaṇṇeti

Vivaṇṇeti

to dispraise, defame Pv iii.106 (thūpa-pūjaṃ); Pv-a 212.

vi + vaṇṇeti

Vivatta-cchada

(adj.) having the cover removed, with the veil lifted; one who draws away the veil (cp. vivaraṇa or reveals (the Universe etc.); or one who is freed of all (mental & spiritual) coverings (thus Bdhgh), Ep. of the Buddha ■ Spelling sometimes; chadda˚; (see chada)-D i.89; ii.16; iii.142 (dd; sammā-sambuddha loke vivatta-chadda; trsln “rolling back the veil from the world”), 177 (dd); AN ii.44 (v.l. dd); Snp 372 (expld as “vivaṭa-rāga-dosa-moha-chadana Snp-a 365), 378, 1003 (ed. Snp p.efers dd as T. reading); Nd ii.593 (with allegorical interpretation); Ja i.51; Ja iii.349; Ja iv.271 (dd) Dhp-a i.201 (v.l. dd); iii.195; DN-a i.250 ■ It occurs either as vivatta˚; or vivaṭa˚. In the first case (vivatta˚; the expln presents difficulties, as it is neither the opp of vatta (“duty”), nor the same as vivaṭṭa (“moving back” intrs.), nor a direct pp. of vivattati (like Sk vivṛtta) in which meaning it would come nearer to “stopped, reverted, ceased.” vivattati has not been found in Pāli. The only plausible expln would be taking it as an abs. pp. formation fr. vṛt in Caus. sense (vatteti) thus “moved back, stopped, discarded”, in meaning “uncovered, lifted, off,” referring to the covering (chada) as uncovered instead of the uncovered object. See vivaṭa. It is difficult to decide between the two meanings. On the principle of the “lectio difficilior” vivatta would have the preference whereas from a natural & simple point of view; vivaṭa seems more intelligible & more fitting. It is evidently an; old phrase. Note. -vivatta-kkhandha at SN i.121 is a curious expression (“with his shoulders twisted round”?). Is it an old misreading for pattakkhandha? Cp. however, S.A. quoted K.S. i.151 n. 5, explaining it as a dying monk’s effort to gain an orthodox posture.

cp. BSk vivartayati to cast off a garment, Divy 39). In the second case (vivaṭa˚; ) it is pp. of vivarati [vi + vṛ;: see vuṇāti

Vivattati

at Pp 32 is to be read as vivaṭṭati.

Vivadati

1. to dispute, quarrel Snp 842, Snp 884; Ja i.209; Mil 47.

2. (intrs.) to be quarrelled with SN iii.138.

vi + vadati

Vivadana

(nt.) causing separation, making discord DN i.11; DN-a i.96.

fr. vivadati

Vivadha

(carrying yoke) see khārī-vidha and vividha2.

Vivana

(nt.) wilderness, barren land SN i.100; Vv 776 (= arañña Vv-a 302); Ja ii.191, Ja ii.317.

vi + vana

Vivara

(nt.) 1. opening (lit. dis-covering), pore, cleft, leak, fissure Dhp 127 (pabbatānaṃ; cp Divy 532; Mil 150; Pv-a 104); Vism 192, Vism 262; Ja iv.16; Ja v.87; Dhp-a iv.46 (mukha˚); Snp-a 355; Pv-a 152, Pv-a 283. 2. interval, interstice DN i.56 (quoted at Pv iv.327) Vism 185.

3. fault, flaw, defect AN iii.186 sq.; Ja v.376.

fr. vi + vṛ;

Vivaraṇa

(nt.) 1. uncovering, unveiling, making open, revelation, in loka˚; laying open the worlds, unveiling of the Universe; referred to as a great miracle at Vism 392; Mil 350; Dāvs ii.120; Ja iv.266–⁠2. opening, unfolding, making accessible, purifying (fig.), in ceto˚; AN iii.117, AN iii.121; AN iv.352; AN v.67.

3. explanation making clear (cp. vibhajana ) Ne 8 (as f.) Snp-a 445.

fr. vivarati

Vivarati

1. to uncover, to open Vin ii.219 (windows, opp. thaketi); DN i.85 (paṭicchannaṃ v.); Ja i.63 (dvāraṃ), 69; iv.133 (nagaraṃ) Dhp-a i.328 (vātapānaṃ); DN-a i.228; Pv-a 74 (mukhaṃ) Vv-a 157, Vv-a 284.

2. (fig.) to open, make clear, reveal SN iv.166; SN v.261; Kp-a 12 (+ vibhajati etc.) ■ pp vivaṭa.

vi + varati vṛ; see vuṇāti

Vivasati

to live away from home, to be separated, to be distant Ja iv.217 ■ Cp. vippavasati.

vi + vasati2

Vivasana

(nt.) (gradually) getting light; turning into dawn (said of the night), only in phrase ratyā vivasane at the end of night, combd in stock phrase with suriy’ uggamanaṃ pati “towards sunrise” (evidently an old phrase) at Thag 517; Ja iv.241; Ja v.381, Ja v.461; Ja vi.491; Pv iii.82. Also at Snp 710.

vi + vas (uṣ) to shine, cp. vibhāti

Vivaseti

lit. to make [it] get light; rattiṃ v. to spend the night (till it gets light) Snp 1142 Nd ii.594 (= atināmeti)- vivasati is Kern’s proposed reading for vijahati (rattiṃ) at Thag 451. He founds his conjecture on aN v.l. vivasate & the C. expl;n “atināmeti khepeti.” Mrs. Rh. D. trsls “waste” (i.e. vijahati).

Caus. of vi + vas to shine

Vivāda

dispute, quarrel, contention DN i.236; DN iii.246; AN iv.401; Snp 596, Snp 863, Snp 877, Snp 912; Nd i.103, Nd i.167 Nd i.173, Nd i.260, Nd i.307; Pp 19, Pp 22; Ud 67; Ja i.165; Mil 413; Vv-a 131. There are 6 vivāda-mūlāni (roots of contention), viz. kodha, makkha, issā, sāṭheyya, pāpicchatā, sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsa or anger, selfishness, envy fraudulence, evil intention, worldliness: DN iii.246; AN iii.334 sq.; Vb 380; referred to at Pts i.130. There is another list of 10 at AN v.78 consisting in wrong representations regarding dhamma & vinaya.

fr. vi + vad

Vivādaka

a quarreller Ja i.209.

fr. vivāda

Vivādiyati

(vivādeti) to quarrel Snp 832 (= kalahaṃ karoti Nd i.173), 879, 895. Pot. 3rd sg vivādiyetha (= kolahaṃ kareyya Nd i.307), & vivādayetha Snp 830 (id. expln Nd i.170).

Denom. fr. vivāda

Vivāha

“carrying or sending away,” i.e. marriage, wedding DN i.99; Snp p.105; Pv-a 144; Snp-a 448 (where distinction āvāha = kaññā-gahaṇaṃ, vivāha kaññā-dānaṃ) ■ As nt. at Vin iii.135. Cp. āvāha & vevāhika.;

fr. vi + vah

Vivāhana

(nt.) giving in marriage or getting a husband for a girl (cp. āvāhana) DN i.11; DN-a i.96. Cp Vin iii.135.

fr. vi + vah

Vivicca

(indecl.) separating oneself from (instr.), aloof from DN i.37; AN iii.25; Ja vi.388; Dhs 160 Pp 68; Vism 139, Vism 140 (expld in detail) ■ Doubtful reading at Pv i.119 (for viricca?) ■ As viviccaṃ (& a˚ at Ja v.434 in meaning “secretly” (= raho paṭicchannaṃ C.).

ger. of viviccati

Viviccati

to separate oneself, to depart from, to be alone, to separate (intrs.) Vin iv.241; ger. viviccitvā Dhs-a 165, & vivicca (see sep.) ■ pp. vivitta ■ Cp viveceti.

vi + vic

Vivicchati

to desire, long for, want Ne 11.

Desid. of vindati

Vivicchā

(f.) manifold desire, greediness, avarice Dhs-a 375; Ne 11 (where expln “vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā ”). See also veviccha.

Desid. of vid, cp. Sk. vivitsā

Vivitta

(adj.) separated, secluded, aloof, solitary, separate, alone DN i.71; SN i.110; AN ii.210; AN iii.92; AN iv.436; AN v.207, AN v.270; Snp 221, Snp 338, Snp 810 Snp 845; Nd i.201; Kv 605; Mil 205; DN-a i.208; Dhs-a 166; Dhp-a iii.238; Dhp-a iv.157 (so read for vivivitta!); Vb-a 365; Pv-a 28, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 283. Cp. pa˚.

pp. of viviccati; vi + vitta3

Vivittaka

(adj.) solitary Ja iv.242 (˚āvāsa).

vivitta + ka

Vivittatā

(f.) seclusion (= viveka) Vb-a 316, cp. K.S. i.321.

abstr. fr. vivitta

Vivitti

(f.) separation Dhs-a 166 ■ Cp. viveka.

fr. viviccati

Vividha1

(adj.) divers, manifold, mixed; full of, gay with (-˚) DN ii.354; Pv ii.49; Vv 359; Mil 319 Mvu 25, Mvu 30; Snp-a 136 (in expln of vi˚: “viharati vividhaṃ hitaṃ harati”).

vi + vidha1

Vividha2

carrying-yoke DN i.101; SN i.78 (as v.l. khāri-vividhaṃ, see khāri); Ja iii.116 (parikkhāraṃ vividhaṃ ādāya, where v.l. reads khāriṃ vividhaṃ).

for Sk. vivadha; vi + vah

Viveka

detachment, loneliness, separation, seclusion; “singleness” (of heart), discrimination (of thought) DN i.37, DN i.182; DN iii.222, DN iii.226, DN iii.283 = SN iv.191 (˚ninna citta); SN i.2, SN i.194; SN iv.365 sq.; SN v.6, SN v.240 sq. AN i.53; AN iii.329; AN iv.224; Vin iv.241; Snp 474, Snp 772, Snp 822 Snp 851, Snp 915, Snp 1065; Nd i.158, Nd i.222; Ja i.79; Ja iii.31; Dhs 160 Pp 59, Pp 68; Ne 16, Ne 50; Dhs-a 164, Dhs-a 166; Thag-a 64; Pv-a 43; Sdhp 471viveka is given as fivefold at Pts ii.220 sq. and Vb-a 316, cp. K.S. i.321 (Bdhgh on SN iii.2, SN iii.8), viz. tadanga˚, vikkhambhana˚, samuccheda paṭippassaddhi˚, nissaraṇa˚; as threefold at Vism 140 viz. kāya˚, citta˚, vikkhambhana˚, i.e. physically mentally, ethically; which division amounts to the same as that given at Nd i.26 with kāya˚, citta˚, upadhi˚ the latter equivalent to “nibbāna.” Cp. on term Dial. i.84. See also jhāna. Cp. pa˚. Vivekatta = vivittata

fr. vi + vic

Vivekattā = vivittatā

VbhA 316.

Vivecitatta

(nt.) discrimination, specification Dhs-a 388.

abstr. fr. vivecita, pp. of viveceti

Viveceti

to cause separation, to separate, to keep back, dissuade Vin i.64; DN i.226; SN iii.110 MN i.256; Pv iii.107 (= paribāheti Pv-a 214); Mil 339; Dhs-a 311; Ne 113, Ne 164 (˚iyamāna).

Caus. of viviccati

Viveṭhiyati

to get entangled Vin ii.117.

vi + veṭhïyati

Vivesa

distinction DN i.229, DN i.233. We should read visesa, as printed on p. 233.

?

Visa

(nt.) poison, virus venom MN i.316 = SN ii.110; Thag 418; Thag 768; Snp 1 (sappa snake venom); AN ii.110; Ja i.271 (halāhala˚ deadly p.) iii.201; iv.222; Pp 48; Mil 302; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 256; Thag-a 489 ■ On visa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 137. Cp āsī˚.

-uggāra vomiting of poison Snp-a 176. -kaṇṭaka a poisoned thorn or arrow, also name of a sort of sugar Dhs-a 203. -kumbha a vessel filled with p. Iti 86 -pānaka a drink of p. Dhp-a ii.15. -pīta (an arrow dipped into poison (lit. which has drunk poison). At another place (see pīta1) we have suggested reading visappita (visa + appita), i.e. “poison-applied,” which was based on reading at Vism 303. See e.g. Ja v.36; Mil 198; Vism 303, Vism 381; Dhp-a i.216. -rukkha “poison tree,” a cert. tree Vism 512; Vb-a 89; DN-a i.39. -vaṇijjā trading with poison AN iii.208. -vijjā science of poison DN-a i.93vejja a physician who cures poison (ous snake-bites) Ja i.310. -salla a poisoned arrow Vism 503.

cp. Vedic viṣa; Av. viš poison, Gr. ἰός, Lat. vīrus, Oir. fī: all meaning “poison”

Visaṃ

is P. prefix corresponding to Sk. viṣu (or visva˚; in meaning “diverging, on opposite sides,” apart, against; only in cpd. ˚vādeti and derivations, lit to speak wrong, i.e. to deceive.

see vi˚;

Visaṃyutta

(& visaññutta ) (adj.) 1. (lit.) unharnessed, unyoked Thag 1021 (half-fig.).

2. detached from the world AN i.262 = AN iii.214; SN ii.279 (ññ) Thag 1022; Snp 621, Snp 626, Snp 634; Dhp-a iii.233 (sabba-yoga˚) iv.141, 159, 185.

vi + saṃyutta

Visaṃyoga

(& visaññoga ) disconnection, separation from (-˚), dissociation Vin ii.259 (ññ) = AN iv.280; DN iii.230 (kāma-yoga˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ cp. the 4 oghas), 276; AN ii.11; AN iii.156.

vi + saṃyoga

Visaṃvāda

deceiving; neg. ; Mil 354.

visaṃ + vāda

Visaṃvādaka

(adj.) deceiving, untrustworthy Vism 496; f. ˚ikā Ja v.401, Ja v.410; not deceiving DN iii.170; AN iv.249; MN iii.33; Pp 57.

visaṃ + vādaka

Visaṃvādana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) & ˚atā (f.) deceiving, disappointing AN v.136 (˚ā); Vin iv.2 honesty DN iii.190 (˚atā ).

fr. visaṃvādeti

Visaṃvādayitar

one who deceives another DN iii.171.

n. ag. fr. visaṃvādeti

Visaṃvādeti

to deceive with words, to break one’s word, to lie, deceive Vin iii.143; Vin iv.1 Ne 91 ■ Neg. ; Ja v.124.

visaṃ + vādeti; cp. BSk. visaṃvādayati Avs i.262, after the Pāli

Visaṃsaṭṭha

(adj.) separated, unconnected with (instr.) MN i.480; DN-a i.59.

vi + saṃsaṭṭha

Visaṃhata

removed, destroyed Thag 89.

vi + saṃhata2

Visakkiya

in ˚dūta is a special kind of messenger Vin iii.74.

vi + sakkiya?

Visaggatā

see a˚.

Visaṅka

(adj.) fearless, secure; ; Sdhp 176.

vi + sanka; Sk. viśanka

Visaṅkita

(adj.) suspicious, anxious Thag-a 134 (Ap. v. 78) ■ neg. ; not perturbed, trusting secure Sdhp 128.

pp. of vi + śaṅk

Visaṅkhāra

divestment of all material things Dhp 154 (= nibbāna Dhp-a iii.129). See sankhāra 3.

vi + sankhāra

Visaṅkhita

destroyed, annihilated Dhp 154; Ja i.493 (= viddhaṃsita Dhp-a iii.129).

vi + sankhata

Visajjati

to hang on, cling to, stick to, adhere (fig.) only in pp. visatta (q.v.) ■ The apparent ger. form visajja belongs to vissajjati.

vi + sajjati, Pass. of sañj; the regular Act. would be visajati

Visajjana & visajjeti

: see viss˚.

Visañña

(adj.) 1. having wrong perceptions Snp 874.

2. unconscious Ja v.159. In composition with bhū as visaññī-bhūta at Ja i.67.

vi + sañña = saññā

Visaññin

(adj.) unconscious, one who has lost consciousness; also in meaning “of unsound mind (= ummattaka Nd i.279) AN ii.52 (khitta-citta + ); Mil 220; Sdhp 117. Visata & visata;

vi + saññin

Visaṭa & visata

spread, diffused, wide, broad DN iii.167 (ṭ); Snp 1 (T. reads t, v.l. BB has ṭ); Ja ii.439; Ja iv.499 (t); Mil 221, Mil 354 (ṭ; + vitthata) 357. Cp. anu˚. Visata & visata

pp. of vi + sṛ; Sk. visṛta

Visaṭā & visatā

(f.) “hanging on,” clinging, attachment. The word seems to be a quasi-short form of visattikā. Thus at Snp 715 (= taṇhā C.; spelling t); Dhs 1059 (trsln “diffusion,” i.e. fr. vi + sṛ; spelling ṭ) = Nd ii.s. v. taṇhā (spelt with t).

abrh. formation fr. vi + sañj, spelling t for tt: see visatta. The writing of MSS. concerning t in these words is very confused

Visaṭṭha

see vissaṭṭha.

Visaṭṭhi

(f.) 1. emission; in sukka˚; emission of semen Vin ii.38; Vin iii.112; Kv 163–⁠2. visaṭṭhi at SN iii.133 and AN iv.52 (T. visaṭṭhi probably stands for visatti in meaning “longing, clinging to (cp. BSk. viṣakti Avs ii.191), or “love for (loc.).

for vissaṭṭhi, fr. vi + sṛj

Visati

to enter, only in combn with prefixes like upa˚, pa˚, pari˚, saṃ˚, abhisaṃ˚, etc.… See also vesma (house).

viś, cp. viś dwelling-place, veśa; Gr. οίκος house, οἰκέω to dwell; Lat. vīcus, Goth. weihs = E. ˚wick in Warwick, etc.

Visatta

hanging on (fig.), sticking or clinging to, entangled in (loc.) AN ii.25; Snp 38, Snp 272 Nd ii.597; Ja ii.146; Ja iii.241.

pp. of visajjati

Visattikā

(f.) clinging to, adhering, attachment (to = loc.), sinful bent, lust, desire-It is almost invariably found as a syName of taṇhā. P Commentators explain it with ref. either to visaṭa (diffused), or to visa (poison). These are of course only exegetical edifying etymologies. Cp. Dhs. trsln § 1059 Expositor ii.468: Brethren 213 n. 3, K.S. i.2, n. 6, and the varied exegesis of the term in the Niddesas. SN i.1, SN i.24, SN i.35, SN i.107, SN i.110; AN ii.211; AN iv.434; Snp 333, Snp 768 Snp 857, Snp 1053 sq.; Thag 519; Nd i.8 sq., 247; Nd ii.598; Dhp-a iii.198; Dhp-a iv.43; Dhs-a 364; Ne 24; Dhs 1059.

visatta + ikā, abstr. formation

Visada

(adj.) 1. clean, pure, white DN ii.14; Mil 93, Mil 247; Dāvs v.28.

2. clear, manifest Mil 93; Dhs-a 321, Dhs-a 328 (a˚); Vb-a 388 sq.

-kiriyā making clear: see under vatthu1 ■ bhāva clearness Vism 128; Tikp 59.

cp. Sk. viśada

Visadatā

(f.) purity, clearness Vism 134 (vatthu˚).

abstr. fr. visada

Visanna

sunk into (loc.), immersed Ja iv.399. The poetical form is vyasanna.

pp. of visīdati

Visappana

in ˚rasa at Vism 470 is not clear. Is it “spreading”, or misprint for visa-pāna?

vi + sṛp

Visabhāga

(adj.) different, unusual, extraordinary, uncommon Mil 78 sq.; DN-a i.212; Vism 180 (purisassa itthisarīraṃ, itthiyā purisa-sarīraṃ visabhāgaṃ), 516; Dhp-a iv.52; Pv-a 118. -˚ārammaṇa pudendum muliebre Ja ii.274 ≈ iii.498.

vi + sabhāga

Visama

(adj.) 1. uneven, unequal, disharmonious, contrary AN i.74; Pv-a 47 (vāta), 131 (a˚ = sama of the “middle” path).

2. (morally) discrepant lawless, wrong AN iii.285; AN v.329; Snp 57 (cp. Nd ii.599) Mil 250 (˚diṭṭhi).

3. odd, peculiar, petty, disagreeable AN ii.87; Mil 112, Mil 304, Mil 357; Ja i.391 (nagaraka). As nt. an uneven or dangerous or inaccessible place rough road; (fig.) unevenness, badness, misconduct disagreeableness AN i.35 (pabbata˚); SN iv.117; Vb 368 (two sets of 3 visamāni: rāga, etc.); Mil 136, Mil 157, Mil 277 Mil 351; Ja v.70; Vv-a 301visamena (instr.) in a wrong way Pv iv.14.

vi + sama3

Visamāyati

to be uneven DN ii.269 (so read for visamā yanti).

Denom. fr. visama

Visaya

1. locality, spot, region; world, realm, province, neighbourhood Snp 977. Often in foll. combns: petti˚; (or pitti˚) and pettika (a) the world of the manes or petas MN i.73; SN iii.224; SN v.342 SN v.356 sq.; AN i.37, AN i.267; AN ii.126 sq.; AN iii.211, AN iii.339, AN iii.414 sq. AN iv.405 sq.; AN v.182 sq.; Pv ii.22; ii.79; Ja i.51; Pv-a 25 sq. 59 sq., 214. (b) the way of the fathers, native or proper beat or range DN iii.58; SN v.146 sq.; AN iii.67; Ja ii.59 Yama˚; the realm of Yama or the Dead Pv ii.82 (= petaloka Pv-a 107).

2. reach, sphere (of the senses) range, scope; object, characteristic, attribute (cp. Cpd. 143 n. 2) SN v.218 (gocara˚); Ne 23 (iddhi˚); Mil 186 Mil 215, Mil 316; Vism 216 (visayī-bhūta), 570 = Vb-a 182 (mahā˚ & appa˚); Kp-a 17; Snp-a 22, Snp-a 154 (buddha˚) 228 (id.); Pv-a 72, Pv-a 89avisaya not forming an object a wrong object, indefinable AN v.50; Ja v.117 (so read for ˚ara); Pv-a 122, Pv-a 197.

3. object of sense, sensual pleasure Snp-a 100.

cp. Sk. viśaya, fr. vi + śī

Visayha

(adj.) possible Pv iv.112 (yathā ˚ṃ as far as possible); ; impossible MN i.207 = Vin i.157.

ger. of visahati

Visara

a multitude DN-a i.40.

vi + sara

Visalla

(adj.) free from pain or grief SN i.180; Snp 17, Snp 86 = Snp 367.

vi + salla

Visaritā

(f.) at DN ii.213 in phrase iddhi˚; is doubtful reading. The gloss (K) has “ visevitā. ” Trsln (Dial. ii.246) “proficiency.” It is combd with iddhi-pahutā & iddhivikubbanatā. Bdhgh’s expln is “ visavanā ”.

fr vi + sru ?

Visahati

to be able, to dare, to venture Snp 1069 (= ussahati sakkoti Nd ii.600); Ja i.152 ■ ppr neg. avisahanto unable Vv-a 69, Vv-a 112; and avisahamāna Ja i.91 ■ ger. visayha (q.v.).

vi + sahati

Visākha

(adj.) having branches, forked; in ti˚ three-branched SN i.118 = MN i.109.

visākhā as adj.

Visākhā

(f.) Name of a lunar mansion (nakkhatta) or month (see vesākha ), usually as visākha˚ (-puṇṇamā), e.g. Snp-a 391; Vv-a 165.

vi + sākhā, Sk. viśākhā

Visāṭita

cut in pieces, smashed, broken Ja ii.163 (= bhinna C.).

pp. of vi + sāṭeti

Visāṇa

(nt.) 1. the horn of an animal (as cow, ox, deer, rhinoceros) Vin i.191; AN ii.207; AN iv.376; Snp 35 (khagga˚, q.v.), 309; Pp 56 (miga˚); Ap 50 (usabha˚); Ja i.505; Mil 103.

2. (also as m.) the tusks of an elephant Ja iii.184; Ja v.41, Ja v.48.

-maya made of horn Vin ii.115.

cp. Sk. viṣāṇa

Visāta

(adj.) crushed to pieces, destroyed M 11 102 (˚gabbha, with mūḷha-gabbha; v.l. vighāta).

fr. vi + śat, cp. sāṭeti

Visāda

depression, dejection DN i.248; DN-a i.121; Sdhp 117. Cp. visīdati.

fr. vi + sad

Visāra

spreading, diffusion, scattering Dhs-a 118.

fr. vi + sṛ;

Visāraka

(adj.) spreading, extending, expanding Vin iii.97 (vattu˚ T.; vatthu˚ MSS.).

vi + sāraka, of sṛ;

Visārada

(adj.) self-possessed, confident; knowing how to conduct oneself, skilled, wise DN i.175; DN ii.86; SN i.181; SN iv.246; SN v.261; AN ii.8 (vyatta + ); iii.183, 203 iv.310, 314 sq.; v.10 sq.; MN i.386; Ap 23; Ja iii.342 Ja v.41; Mil 21; Sdhp 277avisārada diffident Mil 20 Mil 105.

cp. BSk. viśārada, e.g. AvS i.180. On etym. see sārada

Visāla

(adj.) wide, broad, extensive Snp 38; Ja v.49, Ja v.215 (˚pakhuma); Mil 102, Mil 311.

-akkhī (f.) having large eyes Ja v.40; Vv 371 (+ vipulalocanā; or a petī).

cp. Sk. viśāla

Visālatā

(f.) breadth, extensiveness Vv-a 104.

abstr. fr. visāla

Visāhaṭa

(adj.) only neg. ; imperturbed, balanced Dhs 11, Dhs 15, Dhs 24 etc.

visa + āhaṭa

Visāhāra

distractedness, perturbation; neg. ; balance Dhs 11, Dhs 15.

visa + āhāra, or vi + saṃ + āhāra

Visikhā

(f.) a street, road Vin iv.312; Ja i.338; Ja iv.310; Ja v.16, Ja v.434.

-kathā gossip at street corners DN i.179; MN i.513; Dhp i.90.

cp. *Sk. (lexicogr.) viśikhā

Visiṭṭha

(adj.) distinguished, prominent, superior, eminent DN iii.159; Vv 324; Ja i.441; Mil 203 Mil 239; Dhp-a ii.15; Vv-a 1 (˚māna = vimāna), 85, 261 Sdhp 260, Sdhp 269, Sdhp 332, Sdhp 489 ■ compar. ˚tara Vism 207 (= anuttara) ■ As visiṭṭhaka at Sdhp 334 ■ See also abhi˚, paṭi˚, and vissaṭṭha.

pp. of visissati

Visiṇṇa

broken, crushed, fallen to pieces Ja i.174.

pp. of viseyyati

Visineti

see usseneti.

Visibbita

(adj.) entwined, entangled Mil 102 (saṃsibbita˚ as redupl ■ iter cpd.).

pp. of vi + sibbeti, sīv to sew

Visibbeti

to unsew, to undo the stitches Vin iv.280 ■ Caus. II. visibbāpeti ibid ■ Another visibbeti see under visīveti.

vi + sibbeti, sīv

Visissati

to differ, to be distinguished or eminent Ne 188 ■ pp. visiṭṭha ■ Caus. viseseti (q.v.).

Pass. of vi + śiṣ

Visīdati

1. to sink down Ja iv.223.

2. to falter, to be dejected or displeased SN i.7; AN iii.158; Pp 65 ■ pp visanna.

vi + sad; cp. visāda & pp. BSk.; viṣaṇṇa Divy 44

Visīyati

to be dissolved; 3rd pl. imper. med. visīyaruṃ Thag 312 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126).

vi + sīyati; cp. Sk. śīyate, Pass. of śyā to coagulate

Visīvana

(nt.) warming oneself Ja i.326; Ja v.202. As visibbana at Vin iv.115.

fr. visīveti

Visīveti

to warm oneself Mil 47; Ja ii.68; Dhp-a i.225, Dhp-a i.261 Dhp-a ii.89. As visibbeti (in analogy to visibbeti to sew) at Vin iv.115 ■ Caus. II. visīvāpeti Ja ii.69.

vi + sīveti, which corresponds to Sk. vi-śyāpayati (lexicogr.!), Caus. of śyā, śyāyati to coagulate; lit. to dissolve, thaw. The v stands for p; śyā is contracted to

Visuṃ

(indecl.) separately, individually; separate, apart Dhp-a ii.26 (mātā-pitaro visuṃ honti). Usually repeated (distributively) visuṃ visuṃ each on his own, one by one, separately, e.g. Vism 250; Mvu 6, Mvu 44; Snp-a 583; Vv-a 38; Pv-a 214- visukaraṇa separation Thag-a 257.

cp. Sk. viṣu, a derivation fr. vi˚

Visukkha

(adj.) dried out or up Pv-a 58.

vi + sukkha

Visukkhita

(adj.) dried up Mil 303.

vi + sukkhita

Visujjhati

to be cleaned, to be cleansed, to be pure Vin ii.137; Ja i.75; Ja iii.472 ■ pp. visuddha. Caus. visodheti (q.v.).

vi + sujjhati

Visuddha

(adj.) clean, pure, bright; in appld meaning: purified, stainless, sanctified Vin i.105; DN iii.52 (cakkhu); SN ii.122 (id.); iv.47 (sīla); AN iv.304 (su˚); Snp 67, Snp 517, Snp 687; Nd ii.601; Pp 60; Pv-a 1 (su˚) Sdhp 269, Sdhp 383.

pp. of visujjhati

Visuddhatta

(nt.) purity, purification AN ii.239.

abstr. fr. visuddha

Visuddhi

(f.) brightness, splendour, excellency; (ethically) purity, holiness, sanctification virtue, rectitude Vin i.105 (visuddho paramāya visuddhiyā); DN i.53; DN iii.214 (diṭṭhi˚, sīla˚), 288; MN i.147; SN iii.69; AN i.95 (sīla˚ & diṭṭhi˚); ii.80 (catasso dakkhiṇā˚), 195; iii.315; v.64 (paramattha˚); Snp 813, Snp 824 Snp 840, Snp 892; Dhp 16 (kamma˚); Pts i.21 (sīla˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚) ii.85 (id.); Nd i.138, Nd i.162; Vism 2; Snp-a 188 (˚divasa) Pv-a 13 (˚cittatā); Sdhp 447. A class of divine beings (dogmatically the highest in the stages of development viz. gods by sanctification) is called visuddhi-devā Nd ii.307; Ja i.139; Vv-a 18. See under deva.

vi + suddhi

Visūka

(nt.) restless motion, wriggling, twisting, twitching (better than “show, although connection with sūc would give meaning “indication, show”), almost synonymous with vipphandita. Usually in cpd. diṭṭhi˚; scuffling or wriggling of opinion, wrong views, heresy MN i.8, MN i.486; Snp 55 (cp Nd ii.301); Pv iv.137.

-dassana visiting shows (as fairs) DN i.5 (cp. DN-a i.77 “visūkaṃ paṭani-bhūtaṃ dassanaṃ,” reading not clear) AN i.212; AN ii.209; Pp 58.

perhaps to sūc, sūcayati

Visūkāyita

(nt.) 1. restlessness, impatience MN i.446.

2. disorder twisting, distortion (of views); usually in phrase diṭṭhi˚ with ˚visevita & ˚vipphandita; e.g. MN i.234; SN i.123 (Bdhgh’s expln at K.S. i.321 is “vinivijjhan’ aṭṭhena viloman’ aṭṭhena”); ii.62 (in same combn; Bdhgh at K.S. ii.203: “sabbaṃ micchādiṭṭhi-vevacanaṃ”); Dhs 381 (“disorder of opinion” trsln); Nd ii.271iii; Vb 145; Dhs-a 253. Cp. v.l. SN i.12317 (K.S. i.155 “disorders”; n. p. 321).

pp. of visūkāyeti, denom. fr. visūka

Visūcikā

(f.) cholera Mil 153, Mil 167.

cp. *Sk. visūcikā

Viseni˚

“without an enemy,” in ˚katvā making armyless, i.e. disarming Snp 833, Snp 1078. Expld in the Niddesa as “keep away as enemies, conquering” Nd i.174 = Nd ii.602 (where Nd i.reads paṭisenikarā kilesā for visenikatvā kilesā). -˚bhūta disarmed, not acting as an enemy Snp 793 = Snp 914, where Nd i.96 = Nd i.334 has the same expln as for ˚katvā; SN i.141 (+ upasanta-citta; trsln “by all the hosts of evil unassailed” K.S. i.178). Kern Toev. s. v. differently “not opposing” for both expressions

vi + sena in combn with kṛ; and bhū; cp. paṭisena

Viseneti

to discard, dislike, get rid of (opp. usseneti) SN iii.89; Pts ii.167. See usseneti.

Viseyyati

to be broken, to fall to pieces Ja i.174 ■ pp. visiṇṇa.

vi + seyyati, cp. Sk. śīryati, of śṛ; to crush

Visevita

(nt.) 1. restlessness, trick, capers MN i.446 (of a horse; combd with visūkāyita ).

2. disagreement SN i.123 (= viruddha-sevita K.S. i.320). Bdhgh at K.S. ii.203 reads ˚sedhita. Cp. visūkāyita.

vi + sevita

Visesa

1. (mark of) distinction, characteristic, discrimination AN i.267; SN iv.210; Ja ii.9; Mil 29; Vv-a 58, Vv-a 131; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 60.

2. elegance splendour, excellence Ja v.151; Dhp-a i.399.

3. distinction peculiar merit or advantage, eminence, excellence extraordinary state DN i.233 (so for vivesa all through?); AN iii.349 (opp. hāna); Ja i.435; Vv-a 157 (puñña˚); Pv-a 71 (id.), 147 (sukha˚).

4. difference variety Snp-a 477, Snp-a 504; Vv-a 2; Pv-a 37, Pv-a 81, Pv-a 135 (pl. items). abl. visesato, distinctively, altogether Pv-a 1 Pv-a 259.

5. specific idea (in meditation), attainment Ja vi.69: see & cp.; Brethren 24, n. 1; 110 ■ Cp. paṭi˚.

-ādhigama specific attainment AN iv.22; MN ii.96 Ne 92; Mil 412; Dhp-a i.100. [Cp. BSk. viśeṣadhigama Divy 174]. -gāmin reaching distinction, gaining merit AN ii.185; AN iii.349 sq.; SN v.108. -gū reaching a higher state or attainment Ja vi.573. -paccaya ground for distinction Vv-a 20. -bhāgiya participating in, or leading to distinction or progress (spiritually) DN iii.272 sq., 277, 282; Ne 77; Vism 11, Vism 88 (abstr. ˚bhāgiyatā).

fr. vi + śiṣ, cp. Epic Sk. viśeṣa

Visesaka

(m. or nt.) 1. a (distinguishing) mark (on the forehead) Vin ii.267 (with apanga).

2. leading to distinction Vv-a 85. Visesata = visesa

fr. visesa

Visesatā = visesa

Sdhp 265.

Visesana

(nt.) distinguishing, distinction, qualification, attribute Vv 1610; Ja iii.11; Ja vi.63; Snp-a 181, Snp-a 365, Snp-a 399; Vv-a 13 ■ instr. avisesena (adv.) without distinction, at all events, anyhow Pv-a 116.

fr. viseseti

Visesikā

(f.) the Vaiśeṣika philosophy Mil 3.

fr. visesa

Visesita

distinguished, differentiated Mvu 11, Mvu 32; Kp-a 18; Pv-a 56.

pp. of viseseti

Visesin

(adj.) possessing distinction, distinguished from, better than others Snp 799, Snp 842, Snp 855, Snp 905 Nd i.244.

fr. visesa

Visesiya

(adj.) distinguished Vv 1610 (= visesaṃ patvā Vv-a 85); v.l. visesin (= visesavant C.).

grd. of viseseti

Viseseti

to make a distinction, to distinguish, define, specify Ja v.120, Ja v.451; Snp-a 343; grd. visesitabba (-vacana) qualifying (predicative) expression Vv-a 13 ■ pp. visesita.

Caus. of visissati

Visoka

(adj.) freed from grief Dhp 90; Dhp-a ii.166.

vi + soka

Visodha

cleaning, cleansing, in cpd. dubbisodha hard to clean Snp 279.

fr. vi + śudh

Visodhana

(nt.) cleansing, purifying, emending Pts ii.21, Pts ii.23; Pv-a 130.

fr. visodheti

Visodheti

to clean, cleanse, purify, sanctify Kv 551; Pv iv.325; Dhp-a iii.158; Sdhp 321.

Caus. of visujjhati

Visoseti

to cause to dry up, to make wither, to destroy AN i.204; Snp 949 = Snp 1099; Nd i.434 (= sukkhāpeti); Nd ii.603 (id.).

Caus. of vissussati

Vissa1

(adj.) all, every, entire; only in Np. Vissakamma. The word is antiquated in Pāli (for it sabba); a few cases in poetry are doubtful. Thus at Dhp 266 (dhamma), where Dhp-a iii.393 expls as “visama, vissagandha”; and at Iti 32 (vissantaraṃ “among all beings”? v.l. vessantaraṃ).

Vedic viśva, to vi˚

Vissa2

(nt.) a smell like raw flesh, as ˚gandha at Dhs 625; Dhs-a 319; Snp-a 286; Dhp-a iii.393.

cp. Sk. visra

Vissaka

dwelling: see paṭi˚.

of viś

Vissagga

dispensing, serving, donation, giving out, holding (a meal), only in phrases bhatta˚; the function of a meal Vin ii.153 Vin iv.263; Pv iii.29 (so read for vissatta); Mil 9; Snp-a 19, Snp-a 140; and dāna˚ bestowing a gift Pv ii.927 (= pariccāga-ṭṭhāne dān’agge Pv-a 124).

vi + sagga, vi + sṛj, cp. Sk. visarga

Vissajjaka

1. giving out, distributing Vin ii.177–⁠2. one who answers (a question) Mil 295.

fr. vissajjati

Vissajjati

. A. The pres.; vissajjati is not in use. The only forms of the simple verb system are the foll.: ger. vissajja, usually written visajja, in meaning “setting free,” giving up leaving behind Snp 522, Snp 794, Snp 912, Snp 1060; Nd i.98; Nd ii.596-grd. vissajjaniya [perhaps better to vissajjeti1] to be answered, answerable; nt. a reply Ne 161, Ne 175 sq. 191; and vissajjiya to be given away: see under a˚. pp. vissaṭṭha ■ B. Very frequent is the Caus. vissajjeti (also occasionally as visajj˚; ) in var. meanings, based on the idea of sending forth or away, viz. to emit, discharge Ja i.164 (uccāra-passāvaṃ) ■ to send Mvu 8 Mvu 3 (lekaṃ visajjayi) ■ to dismiss Pv-a 81 (there) ■ to let loose Pv-a 74 (rathaṃ) ■ to spend, give away, bestow hand over Pp 26 (visajj˚); Nd i.262 (dhanaṃ); Mil 41 (dhaññaṃ); Pv-a 111, Pv-a 119 ■ to get rid of Ja i.134 (muddikaṃ) ■ to answer (questions), to reply, retort Snp 1005 (˚essati, fut.); Vv-a 71; Pv-a 15, Pv-a 59, Pv-a 87 ■ pp. vissajjita -Caus. II. vissajjāpeti (in meanings of vissajjeti Ja iv.2 (hatthaṃ = to push away); Mil 143; Mvu 6, Mvu 43.

vi + sajjati, of sṛj. The ss after analogy of ussajjati & nissajjati, cp. ossajjati for osajjati

Vissajjana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) 1. giving out, bestowing Nd i.262 (dhana˚).

2. sending off, discharging Ja i.239 (nāvā˚ putting off to sea).

3. answer reply Vism 6, Vism 84; often in combn pucchā˚; question and answer, e.g. Mvu 4, Mvu 54; Pv-a 2.

fr. vissajjeti

Vissajjanaka

(adj.) (-˚) 1. giving out, bestowing Pv-a 121.

2. answering Ja i.166 (pañha˚).

fr. vissajjana

Vissajjāpetar

one who replies or causes to reply Dhp-a iv.199. Cp. vissajjetar.

n. ag. fr. vissajjāpeti

Vissajjita

1. spent, given away Snp 982–⁠2. let loose, sent off, discharged Mvu 23, Mvu 88.

pp. of vissajjeti

Vissajjetar

one who answers (a question) AN i.103 (pañhaṃ). Cp. vissajjāpetar.

n. ag. fr. vissajjeti

Vissaṭṭha

1. let loose; sent (out); released, dismissed; thrown; given out Mvu 10, Mvu 68; Ja i.370; Ja iii.373; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 64, Pv-a 123, Pv-a 174.

2. (of the voice.) distinct, well enunciated DN i.114 (= apalibuddha, i.e. unobstructed; sandiddha-vilambit’ ādi dosa-rahita DN-a i.282); ii.211; AN ii.51; AN iii.114; SN i.189; Ja vi.16 (here as vissattha -vacana).

3. vissaṭṭha at Ja iv.219 in phrase ˚indriya means something like “strong,” distinguished. The v.l. visatta˚; suggests a probable visaṭa˚; ; it may on the other hand be a corruption of visiṭṭha˚.

pp. of vissajjati

Vissaṭṭhi

see visaṭṭhi.

Vissattha

trusting or trusted; confident; being confided in or demanding confidence, intimate friendly AN iii.114; Vin i.87 (so read for ṭṭh); iv.21; Ja ii.305; Ja iii.343; Mil 109 (bahu˚ enjoying great confidence); Snp-a 188 (˚bhāva state of confidence); Sdhp 168, Sdhp 593vissaṭṭhena (instr.) in confidence Vin ii.99-Cp. abhi˚.

pp. of vissasati

Vissandaka

(adj.) overflowing Pv-a 119.

fr. vissandati

Vissandati

to flow out, to stream overflow Ja i.51; Ja v.274; Pv-a 34 (aor. ˚sandi = pagghari) 51 (ppr. ˚amāna), 80 (ger. ˚itvā), 119 (˚anto = paggharanto), 123 (for paggharati; T. ˚eti).

vi + sandati, of syand

Vissamati

to rest, repose; to recover from fatigue Ja i.485; Ja ii.70; Ja ii.128, Ja ii.133; Ja iii.208; Ja iv.93 Ja iv.293; Ja v.73; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 151 ■ Caus. vissameti to give a rest, to make repose Ja iii.36.

vi + samati, of śram

Vissamana

(nt.) resting, reposing Ja iii.435.

fr. vissamati

Vissametar

one who provides a rest, giver of repose, remover of fatigue Ja vi.526.

n. ag. fr. vissameti

Vissara

1. outcry, shout, cry of distress, scream Vin i.87; Vin ii.152, Vin ii.207; Vin iv.316; Pv-a 22 Pv-a 245 (s), 279, 284 (˚ṃ karoti); Sdhp 188.

2. distress Vin iv.212, Vin iv.229.

fr. vi + sarati, of svar

Vissarati

to forget Vin i.207; Vin iv.261; Mvu 26, Mvu 16 ■ pp. vissarita.

vi + sarati, of smṛ;

Vissarita

forgotten Pv-a 202.

opp. of vissarati

Vissavati

to flow, ooze Thag 453 = Snp 205 (v.l. SS vissasati).

vi + savati, of sru

Vissasati

& vissāseti to confide in, to put one’s trust in (loc. or gen.), to be friendly with SN i.79 (vissase); Ja i.461 (vissāsayitvā); iii.148 = 525 (vissāsaye); iv.56; vi.292 ■ pp. vissattha.

vi + sasati, of śvas

Vissāsa

trust, confidence, intimacy, mutual agreement Vin i.296; Vin i.308, AN ii.78; Ja i.189, Ja i.487; Mil 126; Vism 190; Vv-a 66; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 265dubbissāsa difficult to be trusted Ja iv.462.

vi + sāsa, of śvas

Vissāsaka

(& ˚ika ) (adj.) intimate, confidential; trustworthy AN i.26; Mil 146; DN-a i.289.

vissāsa

Vissāsaniya

(adj.) to be trusted, trustworthy Pv-a 9; Sdhp 306, Sdhp 441; neg. ; Ja iii.474; cp dubbissāsaniya hard to trust Ja iv.462.

grd. of vissāseti

Vissāsin

(adj.) intimate, confidential AN iii.136 (asanthava˚ intimate, although not acquainted).

fr. vissāsa

Vissuta

(adj.) widely famed, renowned, famous Snp 137, Snp 597, Snp 998, Snp 1009; Pv ii.74; Mvu 5, Mvu 19; Pv-a 107 (= dūra-ghuṭṭha).

vi + suta, of śru

Vissussati

to dry up, to wither SN i.126 (in combn ussussati vissussati, with ss from uss˚). Spelling here visuss˚, but ss at SN iii.149 ■ Caus. visoseti (q.v.).

vi + śuṣ

Vissota

(adj.) flowedaway, wasted Mil 294.

vi + sota, of sru

Vihaga

a bird (lit. going through the sky) DN-a i.46. -˚pati lord of birds, a garuḷa Dāvs iv.33, Dāvs iv.38 Dāvs iv.55.

viha, sky, + ga

Vihaṅga

= vihaga, Ja v.416; Pv-a 154, Pv-a 157; Sdhp 241.

Vihaṅgama

(adj.) going through the air, flying; (m.) a bird AN ii.39; AN iii.43; Snp 221, Snp 606; Thag 1108; Ja i.216; Ja iii.255; DN-a i.125 = Dhs-a 141.

viha + gam

Vihaññati

to be struck or slain; to be vexed or grieved, to get enraged, to be annoyed, suffer hardship; to be cast down Snp 168 sq.; Pv ii.117 (= vighātaṃ āpajjati Pv-a 150); iv.52 (with same expln); Ja i.73 Ja i.359; Ja ii.442; Ja v.330; DN-a i.289 ■ ppr. vihaññamāna Snp 1121 (with long and detailed exegesis at Nd ii.604) SN i.28 (a˚); Pv-a 150. pp. vihata DN-a i.231.

Pass. of vihanati

Vihata1

struck, killed, destroyed, impaired Iti 100 (where AN i.164 reads vigata); Ja vi.171; Sdhp 313 Sdhp 425.

pp. of vihanati

Vihata2

(adj.) broad, wide Ja vi.171 (= puthula C.).

cp. Sk. vihṛti

Vihanati

to strike, kill, put an end to, remove AN iii.248 (kankhaṃ; v.l. vitarati perhaps to be preferred); Snp 673; Pot. 3rd sg. vihane Snp 975 (cp. Nd i.509) & vihāne Snp 348 = Thag 1268 ■ ger. vihacca: see abhi˚-Pass. vihaññati (q.v.) ■ pp. vihata.

vi + hanati

Viharaṇa

(nt.) abiding, dwelling Dhs-a 164, Dhs-a 168.

fr. viharati

Viharati

to stay, abide, dwell, sojourn (in a certain place); in general: to be, to live; appld: to behave lead a life (as such expld with “iriyati” at Vism 16). Synonyms are given at Vb 194 with iriyati vattati, pāleti, yapeti, yāpeti, carati; cp. Vb-a 262. See e.g. DN i.251; Snp 136, Snp 301, Snp 925; Pp 68; Dhs-a 168; DN-a i.70, DN-a i.132; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 78Special Forms: aor 3rd sg. vihāsi Snp p.16; Pv ii.960; Mvu 5, Mvu 233; Pv-a 54 Pv-a 121; Pv-a 3rd pl. vihiṃsu Thag 925, & vihaṃsu AN ii.21; fut viharissati AN iii.70; vihessati Thag 257; vihissati Thig 181; and vihāhisi Ja i.298 (doubtful reading!), where C. expls as “vijahissati, parihāyissati”; with phrase sukhaṃ vihāhisi cp. dukkhaṃ viharati at AN i.95, and see also vihāhesi ■ pp. not found.

vi + harati

Vihaviha

a sort of bird Thag 49 (v.l. cihaciha). The C. expls by “parillaka.”

for vihaga

Vihāmi

at Ja vi.78 (lohitaṃ) is poetical for vijahāmi; C. expls as niṭṭhubhāmi, i.e. I spit out.

Vihāya

is ger. of vijahati (q.v.).

Vihāyasa

the air, sky Pv-a 14. Cases adverbially:; ˚yasā through the air Mvu 12, Mvu 10 & ˚yasaṃ id. Ja iv.47. Cp. vehāyasa & vehāsa;.

cp. Sk. viha & vihāyasa

Vihāra

1. (as m. & adj.) spending one’s time (sojourning or walking about), staying in a place, living place of living, stay, abode (in general) Vv-a 50 (jala˚) Pv-a 22, Pv-a 79; eka˚; living by oneself SN ii.282 sq.; jaṅghā˚ wandering on foot Pv-a 73; divā˚; passing the time of day Snp 679; Pv-a 142. See also below 3 a.

2. (appld meaning) state of life, condition, mode of life (in this meaning almost identical with that of vāsa2), e.g. ariya˚ best condition SN v.326; Snp-a 136; dibba˚; supreme condition (of heart) Mil 225; brahma˚; divine state SN v.326; Snp-a 136; Vism 295 sq. (ch. ix.); phāsu˚; comfort AN iii.119 AN iii.132; sukha˚; happiness SN iii.8; SN v.326; AN i.43; AN ii.23 AN iii.131 sq.; AN iv.111 sq., 230 sq.; v.10 sq. See further DN i.145, DN i.196; DN iii.220 (dibba, brahma, ariya), 250 (cha satata˚), 281; SN ii.273 (jhāna˚); iii.235 (id.); AN iii.294 (˚ṃ kappeti to live one’s life); Pts ii.20; Ne 119 sq. 3. (a) a habitation for a Buddhist mendicant, an abode in the forest (arañña˚), or a hut; a dwelling, habitation lodging (for a bhikkhu), a single room Vin ii.207 sq. DN ii.7; AN iii.51, AN iii.299 (yathāvihāraṃ each to his apartment); Snp 220 (dūra˚ a remote shelter for a bhikkhu) 391; Vism 118 (different kinds; may be taken as c.)-(b) place for convention of the bhikkhus, meeting place; place for rest & recreation (in garden or park DN-a i.133 ■ (c) (later) a larger building for housing bhikkhus, an organized monastery, a Vihāra Vin i.58 Vin iii.47; SN i.185 (˚pāla the guard of the monastery) Ja i.126; Mil 212; Vism 292; Dhp-a i.19 (˚cārikā visit to the monastery), 49 (˚pokkharaṇī), 416; Mvu 19, Mvu 77; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 141. 151; and passim. See also Dictionary of Names. The modern province Behar bears its name from the vihāras. Viharaka = vihara

fr. viharati

Vihāraka = vihāra

3 (room, hut) Thig 94 (= vasanakaovaraka Thag-a 90).

Vihārika

(adj.) = vihārin; in saddhi˚; co-resident AN iii.70.

Vihārin

(adj.) (-˚) dwelling, living; being in such & such a state or condition DN i.162 (appa-dukkha˚) 251 (evaṃ˚); AN i.24 (araṇa˚), 26 (mettā); Iti 74 (appamāda˚); Snp 45 (sādhu˚), 375; Pv iv.133 (araṇa˚); Pv-a 77, Pv-a 230 (mettā˚); Vv-a 71eka˚; living alone SN ii.282 sq.; SN iv.35; opp. saddhi˚; together with another; a coresident brother-bhikkhu SN ii.204; SN iv.103; AN ii.239.

fr. vihāra

Vihāhesi

“he banished” at Ja iv.471 is 3rd sg. aor. Caus. of vijahati ( ); expld in C. by pabbājesi ■ Another form vihāhisi see under viharati & cp.; viheti2.

Vihiṃsati

to hurt, injure, harass, annoy SN i.165; Iti 86; Snp 117, Snp 451; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 198.

vi + hiṃsati

Vihiṃsanā

(f.) a Commentary word for vihiṃsā Vb-a 75. A similar vihiṃsakā occurs at Pv-a 123.

Vihiṃsā

(f.) (& adj.; ˚a ) hurting, injuring, cruelty, injury DN iii.215; DN iii.226 (˚vitakka); SN i.202; SN ii.151 (˚dhātu); AN iii.448; Snp 292 Nd i.207 (˚saññā), 386, 501 (˚vitakka); Vb 86, Vb 363 (˚vitakka); Dhs 1348; Pp 25; Ne 97; Mil 337, Mil 367 Mil 390; Dhs-a 403; Vb-a 74 (˚dhātu), 118 (˚vitakka) Sdhp 510. Neg. avihiṃsā see sep ■ See also vihesā.

abstr. fr. vi + hiṃs, to injure

Vihita

(adj.) arranged, prepared, disposed, appointed; furnished, equipped Ja vi.201 (loka); Mil 345 (nagara); DN i.45, SN iii.46; Pp 55 (aneka˚); Mvu 10 Mvu 93; Pv-a 51 (suṭṭhu˚). añña˚; engaged upon something else Vin iv.269.

pp. of vidahati

Vihitaka

(adj.) = vihita; DN iii.28 sq. (kathaṃ v. aggaññaṃ how as the beginning of things appointed?);- añña˚ engaged upon something else Ja iv.389 (or does it belong to āhāra. in sense of “prepared by somebody else”?).

Vihitatā

(f.) in añña˚; being engaged upon something else Dhp-a i.181.

abstr. fr. vihita

Vihīna

(adj.) left, given up, abandoned Sdhp 579.

pp. of vijahati

Viheṭhaka

(adj.) harassing, oppressing, annoying Ja i.504; Ja v.143; Sdhp 89. Neg. a˚ see sep.

fr. viheṭheti

Viheṭhana

(nt.) harassing, hurting; oppression Vb-a 74; Vv-a 68; Pv-a 232.

fr. viheṭheti

Viheṭhanaka

(adj.) oppressing, hurting, doing harm Ja ii.123.

fr. viheṭhana

Viheṭheti

to oppress, to bring into difficulties, to vex, annoy, plague hurt DN i.116, DN i.135; DN ii.12; Snp 35; Ja i.187; Ja ii.267; Ja iv.375; Mil 6, Mil 14; Dhp-a 191; Vv-a 69 (Pass. ˚iyamāna).

vi + heṭheti, of hīḍ or heḷ to be hostile. Same in BSk., e.g. Mvu iii.360, Divy 42, Divy 145 etc.

Viheti1

to be afraid (of) Ja v.154 (= bhāyati C.). Cp. vibheti.

for bibheti?

Viheti2

to be given up, to disappear, to go awav Ja iv.216 Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly = vi + eti.

contracted Pass. of vijahāti = vihāyati, cp. vihāhesi

Vihesaka

(adj.) annoying, vexing, troubling Vin iv.36; Dpvs i.47 ■ f. ˚ikā Vin iv.239, Vin iv.241.

fr. viheseti

Vihesā

(f.) vexation, annoyance, injury; worry MN i.510; MN ii.241 sq.; SN i.136; SN iii.132; SN iv.73 SN v.357; DN iii.240 (a˚); Vin iv.143 (+ vilekhā); AN iii.245 AN iii.291; Snp 247, Snp 275, Snp 277; Vb 369; Ne 25; Mil 295; Dhp-a i.55.

for vihiṃsā

Vihesikā

(f.) fright Ja iii.147 (C. says “an expression of fearfullness”).

probably for Sk. *vibhīṣikā, fr. bhī, Epic Sk. bhīṣā, cp. bhīṣma = P. bhiṃsa (q.v.)

Viheseti

to harass, vex, annoy, insult SN iv.63; SN v.346; AN iii.194; Vin iv.36 sq.; Ud 44; Snp 277; Pv iv.147 (vihesaṃ, aor.); iv.149 (vihesayi, aor.).

vi + hiṃs, or Denom. fr. vihesā, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 102

Vīci

(m. & f.) 1. a wave Ja i.509; Mil 117 (jala˚), 319 (˚puppha wave-flower fig.); Vism 63 (samudda˚); Dāvs iv.46; Dhs-a 116 Vism 143.

2. interval, period of time (cp. “tide” time interval) Ja v.271 (˚antara, in Avīci definition as “uninterrupted state of suffering”). In contrast pair avīci (adj.) uninterrupted, without an interval,; savīci with periods, in defn of jarā at Vb-a 99 & Dhs-a 328, where; avīci means “not changing quickly,” and savīci “changing quickly.” Also in defn of sadā (continuously) as “avīci-santati” at Nd ii.631. Cp. avīci.

cp. late Sk. vīci wave; Vedic vīci only in meaning “deceit”; perhaps connected with Lat. vicis Ags. wīce = E. week, lit. “change,” cp. tide

Vījati

to fan Ja i.165; Snp-a 487; Vv-a 6 (T. bījati). - Caus. vījeti Dhp-a iv.213; Mvu 5, Mvu 161 ■ Pass. vījiyati: ppr. vījiyamāna getting fanned Ja iii.374 (so read for vijīy˚); Pv-a 176 (so for vijjamāna!) ■ pp. vījita.

vīj

Vījana

(nt.) a fan, fanning; in vījana-vāta a fanning wind, a breeze Snp-a 174.

fr. vīj, cp. Class. Sk. vījana

Vījanī

(f.) a fan Vv 472 (T. bījanī, v.l. vīj˚); Ja i.46; Vism 310; Dhp-a iv.39; Vv-a 147; Pv-a 176; Kp-a 95. There are 3 kinds of fans mentioned at Vin ii.130, viz. vākamaya˚, usīra˚, mora-piñcha˚; or fans made of bark, of a root (?), and of a peacock’s tail.

fr. vījana, of vīj

Vījita

fanned Pv iii.117 (˚anga). *Vinati

pp. of vījati

*Vīṇati

(?), doubtful: see apa˚ & pa˚;. Kern, Toev. s. v. wrong in treating it as a verb “to see.”

Vīṇā

(f.) the Indian lute, mandoline SN i.122 = Snp 449 (kacchā bhassati “let the lyre slide down from hollow of his arm” K.S. i.153); Thag 467; SN iv.196 (six parts); AN iii.375; Ja iii.91; Ja v.196, Ja v.281 (named Kokanada “wolf’s howl”); vi.465 = 580; Vv 6419; 8110; Mil 53 (all its var. parts); Vv-a 138 Vv-a 161, Vv-a 210; Pv-a 151vīṇaṃ vādeti to play the lute Mvu 31, Mvu 82; Thag-a 203.

-daṇḍaka the neck of a lute Ja ii.225. -doṇikā the sounding board of a lute (cp. doṇī1 4) Vism 251; Vb-a 234; Kp-a 45.

cp. Vedic vīṇā

Vīta1

(adj.) deprived of, free from, (being) without. In meaning and use cp. vigata˚. Very frequent as first part of a cpd., as e.g. the foll.:

-accika without a flame, i.e. glowing, aglow (of cinders), usually combd with ˚dhūma “without smoke MN i.365; SN ii.99 (so read for vītacchika ) = iv.188 = MN i.74; DN ii.134; Ja i.15, Ja i.153; Ja iii.447; Ja v.135; Dhp-a ii.68; Vism 301. -iccha free from desire Ja ii.258. -gedha without greed Snp 210, Snp 860, Snp 1100; Nd i.250; Nd ii.606. -taṇha without craving Snp 83, Snp 741, Snp 849, Snp 1041, Snp 1060; Nd i.211 Nd ii.607. -tapo without heat Ja ii.450 ■ (d)dara fearless Thag 525; Dhp 385. -dosa without anger Snp 12. -macchara without envy, unselfish Snp 954; Nd i.444; Ja v.398; Pv iii.115. -mada not conceited So 328 cp. AN ii.120. -mala stainless (cp. vimala) SN iv.47, SN iv.107; DN-a i.237; Mil 16. -moha without bewilderment Snp 13. I have to remark that the reading vīta˚; seems to be well established. It occurs very frequently in the Apadāna. Should we take it in meaning of “excessive”? And are we confronted with an attribute of osadhi, the morning star which points to Babylonian influence (star of the East)? As it occurs in the Vatthugāthās of the Pārāyanavagga, this does not seem improbable -raṃsi rayless (?) Snp 1016 (said of the sun; the expression is not clear. One MS. of Nd ii.at this passage reads pīta˚; i.e. with yellow, i.e. golden, rays; which is to be preferred). Cp. note in Index to Snp-a. -rāga passionless Snp 11, Snp 507, Snp 1071; Pp 32; Pv ii.47; Mil 76 and frequently elsewhere. -lobha without greed Snp 10 Snp 469, Snp 494. -vaṇṇa colourless Snp 1120. -salla without a sting SN iv.64. -sārada not fresh, not unexperienced i.e. wise Iti 123.

vi + ita, pp. of i

Vīta2

woven Vin iii.259 (su˚).

pp. of vāyati1, or vināti

Vītaṃsa

a bird-snare (BR.: “jedes zum Fangen von Wild & Vögeln dienende Gerät”), a decoy bird Thag 139. Kern, Toev. s. v. “vogelstrik.”

fr. vi + tan, according to BR. The word is found in late Sk. (lexicogr.) as vītaṃsa. BR compare Sk avataṃsa (garland: see P. vaṭaṃsa) & uttaṃsa. The etym. is not clear

Vīti˚

is the contracted prepositional combn vi + ati, representing an emphatic ati, e.g. in the foll.:

-(k)kama (1) going beyond, transgression, sin Vin iii.112; Vin iv.290; Ja i.412; Ja iv.376; Pp 21; Mil 380 Vism 11, Vism 17; Dhp-a iv.3 ■ (2) going on, course (of time) Pv-a 137 (˚ena by and by; v.l. anukkamena) -kiṇṇa sprinkled, speckled, gay with Ja v.188. -nāmeti to make pass (time), to spend the time, to live, pass wait Ja iii.63, Ja iii.381; Dhp-a ii.57; Vv-a 158; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 21 Pv-a 47, Pv-a 76. -patati to fly past, to flit by, to fly up & down Snp 688; AN v.88 = Mil 392. -missa mingled, mixed (with) MN i.318; DN iii.96; Ja vi.151. -vatta having passed or overcome, gone through; passed, spent SN i.14, SN i.145; SN iii.225; SN iv.52; AN ii.44; Snp 6, Snp 395, Snp 796; Ja i.374; Thag-a 170; Pv-a 21, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 83. -sāreti DN i.52, DN i.90, DN i.118, DN i.152; Snp 419; cp. Mil 19; Ja iv.98 (shortened to sārāṇīyaṃ vītisārimha; expld with sārayimha); v.264. -haraṇa passing (mutually), carrying in between Ja vi.355 (bhojanānaṃ). -harati to associate with (at a meal) SN i.162 -hāra, in pada˚; “taking over or exchange of steps,” a stride SN i.211; AN iv.429; Ja vi.354. Same in BSk. e.g. Mvu i.35; Mvu iii.162.

fr. vi + ati sṛ; not with Childers fr. smṛ; cp. BSk. vyatisārayati to make pass (between), to exchange (greeting), to address, converse (kathaṃ), greet. Often in phrase sārāṇīyaṃ sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ vītisāreti [for which BSk. sammodanīṃ saṃrañjanīṃ vividhāṃ kathāṃ vyatisārayati e.g. Avs ii.140

Vīthi

(f.) 1. street, way, road, path, track AN v.347, AN v.350 sq.; Vv 836; Ja i.158 (garden path); v.350 (dve vīthiyo gahetvā tiṭṭhati, of a house); vi.276 (v and raccha ); Dhp-a i.14; Vv-a 31; Pv-a 54. -antaravīthiyaṃ (loc.) in the middle of the road Ja i.373; Pv-a 96. -˚sabhāga share of road Ja i.422; -˚siṅghāṭaka crossroad Dhp-a iv.4 ■ Of the path of the stars and heavenly bodies Ja i.23; Vv-a 326 ■ Various streets (roads paths) are named either after the professions carried on in them, e.g. dantakāra˚; street of ivory-workers Ja i.320; pesakāra˚; weaver st. Dhp-a i.424; bhatakāra˚ soldier st. Dhp-a i.233 ■ or after the main kind of traffic frequenting these, e.g. nāga˚; elephant road Vv-a 316; miga˚; animal rd. Ja i.372 ■ or after special occasions (like distinguished people passing by this or that road), e.g. buddha˚; the road of the Buddha Dhp-a ii.80; rāja˚; King st. Thag-a 52; Mvu 20, Mvu 38.

2. (t.t in psychology) course, process (of judgment, senseperception or cognition, cp. Cpd. 25, 124, 241 (vinicchaya˚), 266 ■ Vism 187 (kammaṭṭhāna˚); Kp-a 102 (viññāṇa˚). -˚citta process of cognition (lit. processed cognition) Vism 22; Dhs-a 269.

cp. Epic Sk. vīthi, to Idg. *ṷei̯ā- to aim at, as in Lat. via way, Sk. veti to pursue; Lat. venor to hunt Gr. ει ̓́σατο he went

Vīthika

(adj.) (-˚) having (as) a road Mil 322 (satipaṭṭhāna˚, in the city of Righteousness).

fr. vīthi

Vīmaṃsaka

(adj.) testing, investigating, examining SN iii.6 sq.; Snp 827; Nd i.166; Ja i.369.

fr. vīmaṃsā

Vīmaṃsati

(& ˚eti ) “to try to think,” to consider, examine find out, investigate, test, trace, think over Snp 215 (˚amāna), 405; Ja i.128, Ja i.147, Ja i.200; Ja vi.334; Mil 143; Pv-a 145, Pv-a 215, Pv-a 272; Sdhp 91 ■ ger. ˚itvā Ja vi.368 Mvu 5, Mvu 36; Pv-a 155; inf. ˚ituṃ Mvu 37, Mvu 234; Pv-a 30 Pv-a 155, Pv-a 283 (sippaṃ) ■ Caus. II, vīmaṃsāpeti to cause to investigate Ja v.110 ■ Cp. pari˚.

Vedic mīmāṃsate, Desid. of man. The P. form arose through dissimilation m → v, cp. Geiger P.Gr. 46, 4

Vīmaṃsana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) trying, testing; finding out, experiment Vin iii.79; Ja iii.55; Mvu 22 Mvu 78; Pv-a 153.

fr. vīmaṃsati

Vīmaṃsā

(f.) consideration, examination, test, investigation, the fourth of the Iddhipādas, q.v. DN iii.77 (˚samādhi), 222; SN v.280; AN i.39, AN i.297; AN iii.37 AN iii.346; AN v.24, AN v.90, AN v.338; Pts i.19; Pts ii.123; Kv 508; Dhs 269 Vb 219 (˚samādhi), 222, 227; Tikp 2; Ne 16 (˚samādhi), 42; DN-a i.106; Snp-a 349 (vīmaṃsa-kāra = sankheyya-kāra) ■ Cp. pari˚.

fr. vīmaṃsati

Vīmaṃsin

= vīmaṃsaka Snp 877; Nd i.283; DN-a i.106.

Vīra

manly, mighty, heroic; a hero SN i.137; Snp 44 Snp 165 (not dhīra), 642, 1096, 1102; Thag 736 (nara˚ hero) Nd ii.609; Dhp-a iv.225mahā˚; a hero SN i.110, SN i.193 SN iii.83 (of the Arahant) ■ vīra is often an Ep. of the Buddha.

-aṅgarūpa built like a hero, heroic, divine DN i.89 DN ii.16; DN iii.59, DN iii.142, DN iii.145; SN i.89; Snp p.106; expld as “ devaputta-sadisa-kāya ” at DN-a i.250 & Snp-a 450.; The BSk. equivalent is var -anga-rūpin (distorted fr vīr˚), e.g. Mvu i.49; Mvu ii.158; Mvu iii.197.

Vedic vīra; cp. Av. vīra, Lat. vir, virtus “virtue”; Gotu. wair, Ohg, Ags wer; to vayas strength etc.; cp viriya

Vīyati

see viyyati.

Pass. of vināti

Vīvadāta

(adj.) clean, pure Snp 784, Snp 881. Visati & visam

vi + avadāta, the metric form of vodāta

Vīsati & vīsaṃ

(indecl.) [both for Vedic viṃśati; cp. Av. vīsaiti, Gr. ει ̓́κοσι, Lat. viginti, Oir. fiche, etc.; fr Idg. *ṷi + komt (decad), thus “two decads.” Cp. vi˚ number 20 ■ Both forms are used indiscriminately-(1) vīsati, e.g. Vin ii.271 (˚vassa, as minimum age of ordination); Snp 457 (catu-vīsat’akkharaṃ); Ja i.89 (˚sahassa bhikkhū); iii.360; Vb-a 191 sq.; Dhp-a i.4 (ekūna˚, 19); ii.9, 54; iii.62 (˚sahassa bhikkhū, as followers); as vīsatiṃ at Dhp-a ii.61 (vassa-sahassāni). (2) vīsaṃ; e.g. Snp 1019 (˚vassa-sata); Iti 99 (jātiyo) Ja i.395 (˚yojana-sata); v.36 (˚ratana-sata); Dhp-a i.8 Dhp-a ii.91 (˚yojana-sataṃ).

Vīhi

rice, paddy Vin iv.264 (as one of the 7 kinds of āmaka-dhañña); Ja i.429; Ja iii.356; Mil 102, Mil 267; Vism 383 (˚tumba); Dhp-a i.125; Dhp-a iii.374 (˚piṭaka).

cp. Vedic vrīhi

Vuccati

to be called DN i.168, DN i.245; Snp 436, Snp 759, Snp 848, Snp 861, Snp 946; Nd i.431; Nd ii.s. v. katheti; Snp-a 204; Dhp-a ii.35. See also vatti ■ pp. vutta.

Pass. of vac

Vuṭṭha

(water) shed, rained Pv i.56; Pv-a 29. See also vaṭṭa & vaṭṭha;.

pp. of vassati1

Vuṭṭhavant

= vusitavant, Nd ii.179, Nd ii.284, Nd ii.611. Vutthahati & vutthati;

Vuṭṭhahati & vuṭṭhāti

1. to rise, arise; to be produced Vin ii.278 (gabbha).

2. to rise out of (abl.), to emerge from, to come back SN iv.294; Vism 661 (vuṭṭhāti) ■ pp. vuṭṭhita ■ Caus. vuṭṭhāpeti (1) to ordain, rehabilitate Vin iv.226, Vin iv.317 sq. (= upasampādeti). (2) to rouse out of (abl.), to turn away from AN iii.115.

the sandhi form of uṭṭhahati (q.v.), with euphonic v, which however appears in BSk. as vyut˚ (i.e. vi + ud˚); vyuttisṭhate “to come back from sea” Divy 35, and freq. in Avs, e.g. i.242

Vuṭṭhāna

(nt.) 1. rise, origin Ja i.114 (gabbha˚).

2. ordination, rehabilitation (in the Order) Vin iv.320; Mil 344.

3. (cp. uṭṭhāna 3 rousing, rising out, emerging, emergence; appld as a religious term to revival from jhāna -abstraction (cp Cpd. 67, 215 n. 4; Dhs. trln, § 1332) MN i.302; SN iii.270 SN iv.294; AN iii.311, AN iii.418, AN iii.427 sq.; Vism 661 (in detail), 681 sq. (id.); Dhs 1332; Ne 100; Tikp 272, 346. -˚gāminī (-vipassanā-ñāṇa) “insight of discernment leading to uprising” (Cpd. 67) Vism 661, Vism 681 sq.

the sandhi form of uṭṭhāna

Vuṭṭhānatā

(f.) rehabilitation; in āpatti˚; forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250.

fr. vuṭṭhāna

Vuṭṭhānima

is an expression for a certain punishment (pain) in purgatory MN i.337 (vuṭṭhānimaṃ nāma vedanaṃ vediyamāna).

?

Vuṭṭhi

(f.) rain SN i.172 = Snp 77 (fig. = saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhi); AN iii.370, AN iii.378 (vāta˚); Iti 83; Dhp 14; Ja vi.587 (˚dhārā) Ap 38 (fig.), 52 (amata˚); Mil 416; Vism 37, Vism 234 (salila˚); Mvu 1, Mvu 24; Snp-a 34, Snp-a 224; Pv-a 139 (˚dhārā shower of rain) ■ dubbuṭṭhi lack of rain, drought (opp. suvuṭṭhi ) Ja ii.367 = Ja vi.487; Vism 512.

fr. vṛṣ, see vassati1 & cp. Vedic vṛṣṭi

Vuṭṭhikā

(f.) = vuṭṭhi; only in cpd. dubbuṭṭhikā time of drought, lack of rain DN i.11; DN-a i.95; Iti 64 sq. (as avuṭṭhika -sama resembling a drought); Dhp-a i.52.

Vuṭṭhita

risen (out of), aroused, having come back from (abl.) DN ii.9 (paṭisallāṇā); Snp p.59; SN iv.294.

pp. of vuṭṭhahati; cp. uṭṭhita

Vuṭṭhimant

(adj.) containing rain, full of rain; the rainy sky Thig 487 (= deva, i.e. rain-god or sky Thag-a 287) Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly = *vyuṣṭi˚, i.e. fr. vi + uṣ (vas) to shine, “luisterrijk,” i.e. lustrous, resplendent. Vuddha & vuddha;

fr. vuṭṭhi, cp. Vedic vṛṣṭimant in same meaning

Vuḍḍha & vuddha

old (fig. venerable) - 1. vuḍḍha Pv ii.114; Mvu 13, Mvu 2.

2. vuddha MN ii.168; Ja v.140; Snp p.108 (+ mahallaka); DN-a i.283.

pp. of vaḍḍhati

Vuḍḍhaka

(adj.) old; f. ˚ikā old woman Thig 16. Vuddhi & vuddhi;

vuḍḍha + ka

Vuḍḍhi & vuddhi

(f.) increase, growth, furtherance, prosperity.

1. vuḍḍhi Pv-a 22 Often in phrase vuḍḍhi virūḷhi vepulla (all three almost tautological) Mil 51; Vism 129.

2. vuddhi MN i.117 (+ virūḷhi etc.); SN ii.205 sq.; SN iii.53; SN v.94, SN v.97; AN iii.76 (opp. parihāni), 404 (+ virūḷhi), 434 (kusalesu dhammesu); v.123 sq.; Iti 108; Ja v.37 (˚ppatta grown up) Vism 271, Vism 439 (so read for buddhi); Dhp-a ii.82, Dhp-a ii.87 Sdhp 537. *Vunati

a by-form of vaḍḍhi

*Vuṇāti

. The two meanings of the root vṛ; as existing in Sk. are also found in Pāli but only peculiar to the Caus. vāreti (the form aor avari as given by Childers should be read avāriṃsu Mvu 36, Mvu 78). The present tense varati is only found in meaning “to wish” (except in prep. cpds. like saṃvarati to restrain) ■ Defns of vṛ;: Dhtp 255 var varaṇa-sambhattisu; 274 val = saṃvaraṇe (see valaya) 606 var = āvaraṇ’icchāsu.

1. to hinder, obstruct; to conceal, protect (on meanings “hinder” and “conceal” cp. rundhati ); Idg. *ṷer and *ṷel, cp. Gr. ε ̓́λυτρον Sk. varutra, Lat. volvo, aperio etc. See vivarati. The pp. *vuta only in combn with prefixes, like pari˚, saṃ˚ It also appears as *vaṭa in vivaṭa.

2. to wish, desire Idg. *ṷel, cp. Sk. varaṇa, varīyān “better,” Gr. ε ̓́λδομαι to long for, Lat. volo to intend, Goth. wiljan to “will, wilja = E. will ■ Pres. varati (cp. vaṇeti): imper varassu Ja iii.493 (varaṃ take a wish; Pot. vare Pv ii.940 (= vareyyāsi C.); ppr. varamāna Pv ii.940 (= patthayamāna Pv-a 128) ■ pp. does not occur.

we are giving this base as such only from analogy with the Sk. form vrṇāti (vṛṇoti); from the point of view of Pāli grammar we must consider a present tense varati as legitimate (cp. saṃ˚). There are no forms from the base vuṇāti found in the present tense; the Caus vāreti points directly to varati

Vuṇhi˚

(& instr.; vuṇhinā ) at Pgdp 13, Pgdp 15, Pgdp 19, Pgdp 35 must be meant for v-uṇha˚ (& v’uṇhena);, i.e. heat (see uṇha ).

Vutta1

said DN-a i.17 (˚ṃ hoti that is to say); Dhp-a ii.21, Dhp-a ii.75, Dhp-a ii.80; Snp-a 174.

-vādin one who speaks what is said (correctly), telling the truth MN i.369; SN ii.33; SN iii.6.

pp. of vatti, vac; cp. utta

Vutta2

sown SN i.134 (khetta); Ja i.340; Ja iii.12; Ja vi.14; Mil 375 (khetta); Pv-a 7, Pv-a 137, Pv-a 139.

pp. of vapati1

Vutta3

shaven MN ii.168 (˚siro). Cp. nivutta2. Vutta-vela

pp. of vapati2

Vutta-velā

at Ja iv.45 (tena vutta-velāyaṃ & ittarāya vutta-velāya) is by Kern,; Toev. s. v. vutta2 fancifully & wrongly taken as *vyuṣṭa (= vi + uṣṭa, pp. of; vas to shine), i.e. dawned; it is however simply vutta1 = at the time said by him (or her).

Vuttaka

(nt.) what has been said, saying; only in title of a canonical book “iti-vuttakaṃ” (“logia”): see under iti.

vutta1 + ka. The P. conneetion seems to be vac, although formally it may be derived fr. vṛt “to happen” etc. (cp. vuttin & vattin, both fr.; vṛt, & vutti) The BSk. equivalent is; vṛttaka “tale” (lit. happening) e.g. Divy 439

Vuttamāna

at SN i.129 read as vattamāna.

Vuttari

of Dhp 370 is pañca-v-uttari(ṃ), cp. Dhp-a iv.109.

Vutti

(f.) mode of being or acting, conduct, practice, usage, livelihood, habit SN i.100 (ariya˚; cp. ariya-vāsa); Snp 81 = Mil 228 (= jīvitavutti Snp-a 152); Snp 68, Snp 220, Snp 326, Snp 676; Ja vi.224 (= jīvita-vutti C.); Pv ii.914 (= jīvita Pv-a 120); iv.121 (= jīvikā Pv-a 229); Mil 224, Mil 253; Vv-a 23.

fr. vṛt, cp. vattati; Sk. vṛtti

Vuttika

(adj.) (-˚) living, behaving, acting AN iii.383 (kaṇḍaka˚); Pv-a 120 (dukkha˚); sabhāga˚ living in mutual courtesy or properly, always combd with sappatissa, e.g. Vin i.187; Vin ii.162; AN iii.14 sq.

vutti + ka

Vuttitā

(f.) (-˚) condition Vism 310 (āyatta˚).

abstr. formation fr. vutti

Vuttin

(adj.) = vuttika; in sabhāga˚; Vin i.45; Ja i.219. Cp. vattin.

cp. Sk. vṛttin

Vuttha1

clothed: not found. More usual nivattha.

pp. of vasati1

Vuttha2

having dwelt, lived or spent (time), only in connection with vassa (rainy season) or vāsa (id.: see vāsa2). See e.g. Dhp-a i.7; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 43; Ja i.183 (˚vāsa). With ref. to vassa “year” at Ja iv.317 ■ At Dhp-a i.327 vuttha stands most likely for vuddha (arisen, grown), as also in abstr. vutthattaṃ at Dhp-a i.330 ■ See also parivuttha, pavuttha & vusita;.

pp. of vasati2

Vutthaka

(adj.) (-˚) dwelt, lived, only in pubba˚; where he had lived before Mvu 1, Mvu 53 (so for ˚vuttaka ).

vuttha2 + ka

Vuddha & Vuddhi

: see vuḍḍha & vuḍḍhi;.

Vuppati

is Pass. of vapati.

Vuyhati

to be carried away: Pass. of vahati, q.v. and add refs.: Mil 69; Vism 603 (vuyhare) ■ ppr. vuyhamāna:

1. being drawn MN i.225 (of a calf following its mother’s voice).

2. being carried away (by the current of a river), in danger of drowning Snp 319. pp. vuḷha & vūḷha;.

Vuyhamānaka

(adj.) one who is getting drowned, “drownedling Ja iii.507. Vulha & Vulha;

vuyhemāna with disparaging suffix ˚ka

Vuḷha & Vūḷha

carried away.

1. vuḷha: Vin i.32, Vin i.109. 2. vūḷha: AN iii.69; Ja i.193; Dhp-a ii.265 (udakena). See also būḷha.

pp. of vahati, Pass. vuyhati; but may be vi + ūḷha

Vuvahyamāna

at AN iv.170 read with C. at opuniyamāna “sifting” (fr. opunāti ): see remark at AN iv.476.

Vusita

fulfilled accomplished; (or:) lived, spent (= vuttha); only in phrase vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ (trslnDial. i.93; “the higher life has been fulfilled”) DN i.84 (cp. Dhp i.225 vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ); Iti 115 (ed. vūsita˚); Snp 463 Snp 493; Pp 61 ■ Also at DN i.90 neg. a˚, with ref. to avusitavā, where Rh. D. (Dial. i.112) trsls “ill-bred and “rude,” hardly just. See also arahant ii.A.

Kern, Toev. s. v. vasati takes it as vi + uṣita (of vas2 ), against which speaks meaning of vivasati “to live from home.” Geiger, P.Gr. § 661 & 195 expl;d it as uṣita with prothetic v, as by-form of vuttha. Best fitting in meaning is assumption of vusita being a variant of vosita, with change of o to u in analogy to vuttha; thus = vi + osita “fulfilled, come to an end or to perfection”; cp. pariyosita. Geiger’s expln is supported by phrase brahmacariyaṃ vasati

Vusitatta

(nt.) state of perfection DN i.90 (vusitavā-mānin kiṃ aññatra avusitattā = he is proud of his perfection rather from imperfection).

abstr. fr. vusita

Vusitavant

(adj.) one who has reached perfection (in chaste living), Ep. of the arahant DN ii.223 (trsln “who has lived ʻthe lifeʼ”): MN i.4; SN iii.61; AN v.16; Snp 514; Nd i.611; Mil 104. On DN i.90 see vusita (end). See also arahant ii.C.

vusita + vant

Vusīmant

(adj.) = vusitavant AN iv.340; Snp 1115 (cp. Nd ii.611 = vuṭṭhavā ciṇṇa-caraṇo etc., thus “perfected,” cp. ciṇṇavasin in same meaning).

difficult to explain; perhaps for vasīmant (see vasīvasa) in sense of vasavattin

Vussati

is Pass. of vasati2 (q.v.).

Vūpakaṭṭha

alienated, withdrawn, drawn away (from), secluded often in phrase eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī etc (see arahant ii.B.), e.g. DN iii.76; SN i.117; SN ii.21, SN ii.244 SN iii.35, SN iii.73 sq.; SN iv.72; AN iv.299. Cp. also AN iv.435 (gaṇasmā v.).

doubtful, whether vi + upakaṭṭha (since the latter is only used of time), or = vavakaṭṭha, with which it is identical in meaning. Cp. also BSk. vyapakṛṣṭa AvS i.233; ii.194; of which it might be a re-translation.

Vūpakāsa

estrangement, alienation, separation, seclusion; always as twofold: kāya˚ citta˚; (of body & of mind), e.g. DN iii.285 (Dial. iii.260 not correctly “serenity”); SN v.67; AN iv.152.

formed fr. vūpakāseti

Vūpakāseti

to draw away, alienate, distract, exclude Vin iv.326; AN v.72 sq ■ Caus. II vūpakāsāpeti to cause to distract or draw away Vin i.49; Vin iv.326 ■ pp. vūpakaṭṭha.

Caus. of vavakassati

Vūparati

= uparati cessation Dhs-a 403.

vi + uparati

Vūpasanta

appeased, allayed, calmed SN iv.217, SN iv.294; AN i.4 (˚citta); iii.205; Snp 82 Pp 61 (˚citta); Pv-a 113.

pp. of vūpasammati

Vūpasama

1. allaying, relief, suppression, mastery, cessation calmness SN iii.32; SN iv.217; SN v.65 (cetaso); DN ii.157 (sankhārā); AN i.4 (id.); ii.162 (papañca˚); v.72; Pp 69; Ja i.392; Dhs-a 403.

2. quenching (of thirst Pv-a 104.

fr. vi + upa + śam; cp. BSk. vyupaśama Divy 578

Vūpasamana

(nt.) allayment, cessation Ja i.393; Mil 320; Pv-a 37, Pv-a 98.

fr. vi + upa + śam; cp. BSk. vyupaśamana Avs ii.114

Vūpasammati

1. to be assuaged or quieted SN iv.215.

2. to be suppressed or removed Ja iii.334.

3. to be subdued or extinguished, to go out (of light) Ap. 35 ■ pp. vūpasanta ■ Caus. vūpasāmeti to appease, allay, quiet, suppress, relieve SN v.50; Snp-a 132 (reṇuṃ); Pv-a 20, Pv-a 38 (sokaṃ), 200

vi + upasammati

Vūḷha

see vuḷha.

Ve1

(indecl.) part. of affirmation, emphasizing the preceding word: indeed, truly Vin i.3 (etaṃ ve sukhaṃ); Dhp 63 (sa ve bāḷo ti vuccati), 83 (sabbattha ve), 163 (yaṃ ve… taṃ ve); Snp 1050 Snp 1075, Snp 1082; Dhp-a iii.155 (= yeva). See also have.

cp. Vedic vē, vai

Ve2

may be enclitic form of tumhe, for the usual vo at Snp 333 (= tumhākaṃ Snp-a 339). See P.T.S. ed. of Sn; cp v.l. ve for vo at Snp 560 (here as particle!).

Ve˚

is the guṇa (increment) form of vi˚; found in many secondary (mostly f. & nt. abstr.) derivations from words with; vi˚; e.g. vekalla, vecikicchin, veneyya, vepulla vematta, vevicchā, veramaṇī, which Bdhgh expls simply as “vi-kārassa ve-kāraṃ katvā veramaṇī” Kp-a 24. Cp. veyy˚.

Vekaṭika

(adj.) one addicted to dirt, living on dirty food DN i.167; Mil 259 (doubled).

fr. vikaṭa

Vekaṇḍa

a kind of arrow MN i.429.

perhaps connected with vikaṇṇaka

Vekata

(adj.) changed Vv-a 10.

= vikata

Vekantaka

(VbhA 63) is a kind of copper: see loha.

Vekalla

(nt.) deficiency Ja v.400; Mil 107; Dhs 223; Dhp-a ii.26 (anga˚ deformity), 79; iii.22; Vv-a 193; Sdhp 5, Sdhp 17 ■ As vekalya at Kp-a 187 (where contrasted to sākalya) ■ jaṇṇū avekallaṃ karoti to keep one’s knees straight Mil 418 (Kern, Toev. s. v trsls “presses tightly together”). See also avekalla. Vekallata & vekalyata

fr. vikala

Vekallatā & vekalyatā

(f.) deficiency AN iii.441 (a˚); Vism 350 (indriya˚); Ja i.45 (v. 254 (˚lya˚).

abstr. fr. vekalla

Vekkhiya

is poetical for avekkhiya (= avekkhitvā: see avekkhati) in appaṭivekkhiya not considering Ja iv.4 See the usual paccavekkhati.

Vega

quick motion, impulse, force; speed, velocity SN iv.157; AN iii.158 (sara˚); Snp 1074; Mil 202, Mil 258, Mil 391; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 47 (vāta˚) 62 (visa˚), 67, 284 (kamma˚); Sdhp 295 ■ instr vegena (adv.) quickly Dhp-a i.49; another form in same meaning is vegasā, after analogy of thāmasā, balasā etc., e.g. Ja iii.6; v. 117 ■ Cp. saṃ˚.

cp. Vedic vega, fr. vij to tremble

Vegha

at DN ii.100 (˚missakena, trsln Rh. D. “with the help of thongs”) = SN v.153 (T. reads vedha˚), & Thag 143 (˚missena, trsl;n “violence”) may with Kern, Toev. s. v be taken as veggha = viggha (Sk. vighna), i.e. obstacle hindrance; cp. uparundhati Thag 143. It remains obscure & Kern’s expl;n problematic. Cp. Dial. ii.107.

Vecikicchin

(adj.) doubting, doubtful AN ii.174 (kankhin + ); SN iii.99 (id.); MN i.18; Snp 510.

fr. vicikicchā

Vecitta

(nt.) confusion, disturbed state of mind Dhtp 460 (in defn of root muh )

fr. vi + citta2

Vejja

a physician, doctor, medical man, surgeon Ja i.455 Ja iii.142; Kp-a 21; Snp-a 274 (in simile); Vv-a 185, Vv-a 322; Dhp-a i.8; Pv-a 36, Pv-a 86; Sdhp 279, Sdhp 351hatthi˚; elephantdoctor Ja vi.490; Mvu 25, Mvu 34; visa˚; a physician who cures poison(ous bites) Ja i.310; Ja iv.498.

-kamma medical practice or treatment Ja ii.421 Ja v.253; Vism 384; Dhp-a iii.257, Dhp-a iii.351; Dhp-a iv.172.

fr. vid, *Sk. vaidya, but to Pāli etym. feeling fr. vijjā

Vejjikā

(f.) medicine (?) Vin iii.185.

fr. vejja?

Veṭha

wrap, in sīsa˚; head-wrap, turban MN i.244; SN iv.56.

fr. viṣṭ, veṣṭ;

Veṭhaka

(adj.) surrounding, enveloping DN i.105 (“furbelow” see Dial. i.130); Mvu 11, Mvu 14 (valayanguli˚).

fr. veṭheti

Veṭhana

(nt.) 1. surrounding, enveloping Ja vi.489.

2. a turban head-dress DN i.126; AN i.145; AN iii.380 (sīsa˚); Ja v.187; Dhp-a iv.213; Pv-a 161.

3. wrapping, clothing, wrap shawl Ja vi.12 ■ Cp. pali˚.

fr. veṭheti, cp. Epic & Class. Sk. veṣṭhana

Veṭhita

enveloped, enclosed, surrounded, wrapped Sdhp 362. Cp. ni˚, pari˚.

pp. of veṭheti

Veṭheti

to twist round, envelope, wrap, surround Ja i.5, Ja i.422; Mil 282 ■ Pass. veṭhiyati: see vi˚ ■ pp veṭhita ■ Cp. pali˚.

Vedic veṣṭate, viṣṭ; or veṣṭ; to Lat. virga, branch, lit. twisting

Veṇa

1. a worker in bamboo Pv-a 175.

2. a member of a low & despised class (cp. pukkusa) Vin iv.6; SN i.93 (˚kula); AN ii.85 (id.); iii.385 Pp 51; f. veṇī Ja v.306 (= tacchikā C.); Pv iii.113 (read veṇī for veṇiṃ).

cp. *Sk. vaiṇa, dial.

Veṇi

(f.) a braid of hair, plaited hair, hair twisted into a single braid AN iii.295; Vin ii.266 (dussa˚) Thig 255; Vv 384 (= kesa-veṇi C.). fig. of a “string of people DN i.239 (andha˚). -˚kata plaited, having the hair plaited Ja ii.185; Ja v.431.

cp. Sk. veṇi

Veṇu

bamboo; occurs only in cpds., e.g. -˚gumba thicket of bamboo Dhp-a i.177; -˚tinduka the tree Diospyros Ja v.405 (= timbaru C.); -˚daṇḍaka jungle-rope Ja iii.204 -˚bali a tax to be paid in bamboo (by bamboo workers Dhp-a i.177; ˚-vana bamboo forest Ja v.38.

cp. Vedic veṇu. Another P, form is veḷu (q.v.)

Vetaṇḍin

(adj.) full of sophistry, skilled in vitaṇḍā Mil 90 (said of King Milinda).

fr. vitaṇḍā

Vetana

(nt.) wages, hire; payment, fee, remuneration; tip Ja i.194 (nivāsa˚ rent) Snp 24; Vv-a 141; Dhp-a i.25; Pv-a 112. Most frequently combd with bhatta˚; (q.v.). As vedana at Ja iii.349.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vetana

Vetabba

is grd. of *veti = vināti to weave (q, v.), thus “to be woven,” or what is left to be woven Ja vi.26. inf. vetuṃ Vin ii.150.

vi

Vetasa

the ratan reed, Calamus rotang Ja v.167; Snp-a 451.

Vedic vetasa

Vetāla

at DN i.6 (in the lists of forbidden crafts) refers to some magic art. The proper meaning of the word was already unknown when Bdhgh at DN-a i.84 explained it as “ghana-tāḷaṃ” (cymbal beating) with remark “mantena mata-sarīr’ uṭṭhāpanan ti eke” (some take it to be raising the dead by magic charms). Rh. D. at Dial. i.8 translates “chanting of bards” (cp. vetālika). It is of dialectical origin.

Vetālika

a certain office or occupation at court connected with music or other entertainment, a bard. With other terms in list at Mil 331, some of them obscure and regional. Also at Ja vi.277, where expld as “vetālā [read vettāya? uṭṭhāpake,” i.e. those whose duty it is [by vetāla or vetta] to make (people] rise. The expln is obscure, the uṭṭhāpaka reminds of Bdhgh’s uṭṭhāpana (under vetāla). Kern misunderstands the phrase by translating “chasing bards away.”

dial.; cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vaitālika

Veti

to go away, disappear, wane SN iii.135; AN ii.51; Ja iii.154; Dhs-a 329. Cp. vyavayāti.

vi + eti, of i; Sk. vyeti

Vetulla

(& vetulya) a certain dissenting sect (see Mvu. trsln 259, n. 2) in ˚vāda heretic doctrine Mvu 36, Mvu 41; Dpvs 22, 45; -˚vādin an adherent of this doctrine.

cp. *Sk. vaitulya; also called vaipulya, fr. vipula. The P. form is not clear; it probably rests on dial. trsln of a later term

Vetta

(nt.) twig, rod; creeper; junglerope (cp. veṇu-daṇḍa); cane (calamus). By itself only in standard list of punishments (tortures): vettehi tāḷeti to flog with canes, e.g. AN i.47; AN ii.122; Mil 196 Otherwise freq. in cpds.:

-agga cane-top, sprout of bamboo (cp. kaḷīra) Vism 255 (where Kp-a in id. p. reads ˚ankura); Vb-a 60, Vb-a 239 Vb-a 252. -aṅkura a shoot of bamboo Kp-a 52, Kp-a 67. -āsana cane chair Vv-a 8. -cāra (vettācāra) “stick-wandering” (?) Ja iii.541 (+ sankupatha; C.: vettehi sañcaritabba); Vv 8411 (vettācāraṃ sankupathañ ca maggaṃ expld as vettalatā bandhitvā ācaritabba magga Vv-a 338); better as “jungle-path.” -patha “a jungle full of sticks” (trsln Rh. D.) Mil 280 (+ sankupatha) jungle-path. -bandhana binding with twigs (rope?) creeper-bands SN iii.155; SN v.51 = AN iv.127. -latā cane creeper Ja i.342; Vv-a 8, Vv-a 338. -valli garland of creeper Dāvs iii.40.

cp. Epic Sk. vetra

Veda

1. (cp. vediyati & vedanā) (joyful) feeling, religious feeling, enthusiasm awe, emotion, excitement (something like; saṃvega ) DN ii.210 (˚paṭilābha + somanassa-paṭilābha) MN i.465 (uḷāra); Snp 1027 (= pīti Snp-a 585); Ja ii.336 Ja iii.266. attha-veda + dhamma-veda enthusiasm for the truth (for the letter & the spirit) of Buddha’s teaching MN i.37; AN v.329 sq., 333, 349, 352; veda here interpreted as “somanassaṃ” at MN-a i.173 ■ See also cpd ˚jāta.

2. (cp. vedeti & vijjā) (higher) knowledge (as “Buddhist” antithesis to the authority of the “Veda”) insight, revelation, wisdom: that which Bdhgh at MN-a i.173 defines with “ ñāṇa, ” and illustrates with vedagū of Snp 1059; or refers to at DN-a i.139 with defn “vidanti etenā ti vedo.” Thus at Snp 529 & 792 (= vedā vuccanti catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ paññā Nd;1 93), cp. Snp-a 403 ■ As adj. veda Ep. of the Buddha “the knower or the possessor of revelation, at MN i.386. See also vedagū.

3. the Veda(s), the brahmanic canon of authorized religious teaching (revelation) & practice otherwise given as “ gantha ” i.e. “text” at MN-a i.173 & illustrated with “tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū.” The latter formula is frequent in stock phrase describing the accomplishments of a Brahmin, e.g. at DN i.88; MN ii.133; Snp 1019; AN i.163; Dhp-a iii.361. In the older texts only the 3 Vedas (irubbeda = Rg; yaju˚ & sāma˚) are referred to, whereas later (in the Commentaries) we find the 4 mentioned (athabbana added), e.g. the; three at SN iv.118; Ja i.168; Ja ii.47; Ja iii.537; Mil 10; Vism 384; the four at DN-a i.247; Mil 178 ■ Unspecified (sg.): Snp-a 462 As adj. veda “knowing the Vedas” Snp-a 463 (ti˚), cp tevijja ■ The Vedas in this connection are not often mentioned, they are almost identical with the Mantras (see manta ) and are often (in Com.) mentioned either jointly with manta or promiscuously, e.g. Pv ii.613 (the Vedas with the 6 aṅgas, i.e. vedāngas, called manta ); Snp-a 293 (manta-pāragū + veda-pāragū), 322 448.

-antagu “one who has reached the end of knowledge, i.e. one who has obtained perfection in wisdom Vin i.3; Snp 463. -gū one who has attained to highest knowledge (said of the Buddha). Thus different from “tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū, ” which is brahmanic. The expln of vedagū is “catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ” Nd ii.612 & see above 2 ■ SN i.141, SN i.168; SN iv.83, SN iv.206; AN ii.6; AN iv.340; Snp 322, Snp 458, Snp 529, Snp 749, Snp 846, Snp 947, Snp 1049, Snp 1060; Nd i.93 Nd i.204, Nd i.299, Nd i.431. A peculiar meaning of vedagū is that of “soul” (lit. attainer of wisdom) at Mil 54 & 71; -jāta thrilled, filled with enthusiasm, overcome with awe, excited AN ii.63; Snp 995, Snp 1023; Kv 554 = Vv 3427 (= jāta-somanassa Vv-a 156); Ja i.11; Mil 297. -pāragū one who excels in the knowledge of the Vedas, perfected in the Veda Snp-a 293; cp. above 3. -bandhu one who is familiar with the Vedas Snp-a 192.

fr. vid, or more specifically ved as P. root

Vedaka

(adj.) knowing or studying the Vedas Snp-a 462 (brāhmaṇa).

fr. veda 3

Vedanaka

(adj.) having feeling, endowed with sensation Vb 419 (a˚ + asaññaka).

fr. vedanā

Vedanā

(f.) feeling, sensation (see on term, e.g. Cpd. 14 Mrs. Rh D. B. Psy., ch. iv.) DN i.45; DN ii.58 (cp. Dial. ii.54), 66 iii.58, 77, 221, 228, 238 (˚upādāna); SN iii.86 sq.; AN i.39, AN i.122, AN i.141; AN ii.79, AN ii.198, AN ii.256; AN iii.245 sq., 450; iv.301 385; Kp iii. (tisso v.); Snp 435, Snp 529, Snp 739, Snp 1111; Nd i.109 Nd ii.551 (tisso v.); Pts i.6, Pts i.50 sq., 145 sq., 153 sq. ii.109 sq., 181 sq.; Vb 135 sq., 294, 401, 403 sq. Dhs 3, Dhs 1348; Ne 27, Ne 65 sq.; 83, 123, 126; Tikp 246 317 sq., 345 sq.; Vism 460 sq.; DN-a i.125; Vb-a 13 sq. 39 sq., 80, 178, 193, 221 (˚ânupassanā, in detail), 263 sq. 382 (various) ■ Three modes of feeling (usually understood whenever mention is made of “ tisso vedanā ”) sukhā (pleasant), dukkhā (painful) adukkha-m-asukhā (indifferent) DN iii.275; SN ii.53, SN ii.82; SN iv.207; AN iii.400; Iti 46; Tikp 317 sq ■ or: kusalā, akusalā, avyākatā Vism 460Five vedanās: sukhaṃ, dukkhaṃ, somanassaṃ domanassaṃ, upekkhā Vism 461. Categories of 2 to 108 modes of Vedanā, SN iv.223 sq ■ vedanā is one of the 5 khandhas (see khandha ii.B) ■ On relation of old and new sensations (purāṇa˚ → nava˚) see e.g. AN ii.40; AN iii.388; AN iv.167; Vism 33; and see formula under yātrā ■ In the Paṭiccasamuppāda (q.v.) vedanā stands between phassa as condition and taṇhā as result; see e.g. Vism 567 sq.

2. (in special application) painful sensation, suffering, pain (i.e. dukkhavedanā) MN i.59; AN i.153 (sārīrikā bodily pain); ii.116 (id.); iii.143 (id.); Pv i.1015; Mil 253 (kāyikā & cetasikā); Vb-a 101 (maraṇ’ antikā v. agonies of death)- vedan’ aṭṭa afflicted by pain Vin ii.61; Vin iii.100; Ja i.293-As adj. vedana suffering or to be suffered Pv iii.106 (= anubhūyamāna Pv-a 214) ■ vedana at Ja iii.349 is to be read as vetana.

fr. ved˚;: see vedeti; cp. Epic Sk. vedanā

Vedayita

felt, experienced SN i.112; SN ii.65; SN iii.46; AN ii.198; AN iv.415; Vism 460.

pp. of vedeti

Vedalla

(nt.) Name of one of the 9 angas (see nava ) or divisions of the Canon according to matter AN ii.7, AN ii.103, AN ii.178; AN iii.88, AN iii.107, AN iii.361 sq.; AN iv.113; Vin iii.8 Pp 43; Dhs-a 26; DN-a i.24; Pv-a 22. The Dhs-a comprises under this aṅga the 2 suttas so-called in M (43, 44), the Sammādiṭṭhi, Sakkapañha, Sankhārābhājaniya Mahāpuṇṇama etc. Suttas, as catechetical Dhs-a 26 = DN-a i.24Note. The 2nd part of the word looks like a distortion fr. ariya (cp. mahalla → mah ariya). Or might it be = vedanga?

may be dialectical, obscure as to origin; Bdhgh refers it to Veda 1

Vedi

& Vedī (f.) ledge, cornice, rail Mvu 32, Mvu 5; Mvu 35, Mvu 2; Mvu 36, Mvu 52 (pāsāṇa˚); 36, 103; Vv 8416 (= vedikā Vv-a 346) ■ See on term Dial. ii.210 Mvu. tsrln 220, 296. Cp. vedikā & velli;.

Vedic vedi sacrificial bench

Vedikā

(f.) (& vediyā ) cornice, ledge, railing DN ii.179; Vin ii.120; Ja iv.229, Ja iv.266; Vv 786 (vediyā vedikā Vv-a 304); 8416 (= vedikā Vv-a 340); Vv-a 275.

fr. vedi

Vedita

experienced, felt SN iv.205 (sukha & dukkha) = Snp 738.;

pp. of vedeti

Vedisa

Name of a tree Ja v.405; Ja vi.550.

fr. vidisā?

Vedeti

“to sense,” usually in Denom. function (only one Caus. meaning: see aor. avedi ); meaning twofold either intellectually “to know” (cp. veda ), or with ref. to general feeling “to experience” (cp. vedanā ). For the present tense two bases are to be distinguished viz. ved˚; used in both meanings; and vediy˚; (= *vedy˚) a specific Pāli formation after the manner of the 4th (y) class of Sk. verbs, used only in meaning of “experience.” Thus vedeti: (a) to know (as = acc., equal to “to call”) Snp 211 sq. (taṃ muniṃ vedayanti); (b) to feel, to experience SN iv.68 (phuṭṭho vedeti, ceteti sañjānāti); MN i.37; Pv iv.150 (dukkhaṃ = anubhavati Pv-a 241) ■ vediyati: to feel, to experience a sensation or feeling (usually with vedanaṃ or pl. vedanā) MN i.59 MN ii.70 (also Pot. vediyeyya); SN ii.82; SN iii.86 sq.; SN iv.207; AN i.141; AN ii.198 (also ppr. vediyamāna); Ja ii.241; Mil 253 ■ aor. avedi he knew, recognized Ja iii.420 (= aññāsi C.); he made known, i.e. informed Ja iv.35 (= jānāpesi C.); vedi (recognized, knew) Snp 643, Snp 647, Snp 1148 (= aññāsi aphusi paṭivijjhi Nd ii.613); & vedayi Snp 251 (= aññāsi Snp-a 293) ■ Fut. vedissati (shall experience) Pv i.1015 (dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ v.) ■ grd. vediya (to be known Snp 474 (para˚ diṭṭhi held as view by others; expld as “ñāpetabba” Snp-a 410); vedanīya: (a) to be known, intelligible, comprehensible DN i.12; (dhammā nipuṇā… paṇḍita-vedanīyā); ii.36; MN i.487; MN ii.220; (b) to be experienced SN iv.114 (sukha˚ & dukkha˚); AN i.249 (diṭṭhadhamma˚); iv.382; Pv ii.117 (sukha˚-kamma sukha-vipāka Pv-a 150); iii.37 (kamma); iv.129 (of kamma-vipāka = anubhavana-yogga Pv-a 228); Pv-a 145 (kamma); & veditabba to be understood or known DN i.186; Pv-a 71, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 104 ■ pp. vedita & vedayita;.

Vedic vedayati; Denom. or Caus. fr. vid to know or feel

Vedeha

lit. from the Videha country; wise (see connection between Vedeha & ved, vedeti at DN-a i.139, resting on popular etymology) SN ii.215 sq (˚muni, of Ānanda; expld as “vedeha-muni = paṇḍitamuni,” cp. K.S. i.321; trslnK.S. ii.145 “the learned sage”); Mvu 3, Mvu 36 (same phrase; trsln “the sage of the Videha country”); Ap 7 (id.).

= Npl. Vedeha

Vedha

1. piercing, pricking, hitting AN ii.114 sq. (where it is said of a horse receiving pricks on var. parts, viz. on its hair: loma˚; its flesh: maṃsa˚; ; its bone: aṭṭhi˚) ■ avedha [to vyath! not to be shaken or disturbed, imperturbable Snp 322 (= akampana-sabhāva Snp-a 331).

2. a wound Ja ii.274 sq.

3. a flaw Mil 119 ■ Cp. ubbedha.

adj.-n.) [fr. vidh = vyadh, cp. vyādha

Vedhati

to tremble, quiver, quake, shake SN v.402; Thag 651; Thag 2, Thag 237 (˚amāna); Snp 899, Snp 902 (Pot. vedheyya); Nd i.312, Nd i.467; Ja ii.191 (kampati + ); Mil 254 (+ calati); Vv-a 76 (vedhamānena sarīrena); Dhp-a ii.249 (Pass. vedhiyamāna trembling; v.l. pa˚). Cp. vyadhati, ubbedhati & pavedhati.

for *vethati = vyathati, of vyath

Vedhana

(nt.) piercing Ja iv.29; DN-a i.221.

fr. vidh to pierce

Vedhabba

(nt.) widowhood Ja vi.508.

abstr. fr. vidhavā, = Epic Sk. vaidhavya

Vedhavera

son of a widow; in two diff. passages of the Jātaka, both times characterized as sukka-cchavī vedhaverā “sons of widows, with white skins,” and at both places misunderstood (or unintelligibly expld) by the Cy., viz. Ja iv.184 (+ thulla-bāhū; C.: vidhavā apatikā tehi vidhavā sarantī ti [ti]vidha-verā ca vedhaverā); vi.508 (C. vidhav’ itthakā; v.l. vidhav-ittikāmā purisā).

for *Sk. vaidhaveya, fr. vidhavā

Vedhitā

(f.) shooting, hitting Ja vi.448.

pp. of vedheti, Caus. of vijjhati

Vedhin

(adj.) piercing, shooting, hitting: see akkhaṇa˚.

fr. vidh = vyadh

Venateyya

descended from Vinatā, Ep. of a garuḷa Pts ii.196; Ja vi.260; Dāvs iv.45.

fr. vinata

Venayika1

a nihilist. The Buddha was accused of being aN v. MN i.140.

fr. vi 3 + naya

Venayika2

(adj.) versed in the Vinaya Vin i.235; Vin iii.3 (cp. Vin AN i.135); MN i.140; AN iv.175, AN iv.182 sq.v.190; Mil 341.

fr. vinaya

Veneyya

(adj.) to be instructed, accessible to; instruction, tractable, ready to receive the teaching (of the Buddha). The term is late (Jātaka style & Com. Ja i.182 (Buddha˚), 504; Snp-a 169, Snp-a 510; Dhp-a i.26 Vb-a 79; Vv-a 217; Thag-a 69 (Ap. v. 10). Cp. buddha˚.

= vineyya, grd. of vineti; cp. BSk. vaineya Divy 36, Divy 202 & passim

Veneyyatta

(nt.) tractableness Ne 99.

fr. veneyya

Vepakka

(nt.) ripening, ripeness, maturity. - (adj.) yielding fruit, resulting in (-˚) AN i.223 (kāmadhātu˚ kamma); iii.416 (sammoha˚ dukkha); Snp 537 (dukkha˚ kamma).

fr. vipakka

Vepurisikā

(f.) a woman resembling a man (sexually), a man-like woman, androgyn Vin ii.271; Vin iii.129.

vi + purisa + aka

Vepulla

(nt.) full development, abundance, plenty, fullness DN iii.70, DN iii.221, DN iii.285; SN iii.53; AN i.94 (āmisa˚, dhamma˚); iii.8, 404; v.152 sq., 350 sq.; Mil 33, Mil 251; Vism 212 (saddhā˚, sati˚, paññā˚, puñña˚), 619; Dhp-a i.262 (sati˚); Vb-a 290 ■ Often in phrase vuḍḍhi virūḷhi vepulla (see vuḍḍhi), e.g. Vin i.60; Iti 113. Cp. vetulla.

fr. vipula

Vepullatā

(f.) = vepulla; AN ii.144 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚); Ap 26, 39; Mil 252 As vepullataṃ (nt.) at AN iii.432.

abstr. formation fr. vepulla

Vebhaṅga

futility, failure Ja iv.451 (opp. sampatti; expld as vipatti C.).

fr. vibhanga

Vebhaṅgika

(& ˚iya) (adj.) see a˚.

Vebhavya

(& ˚ā) (nt. & f.) thinking over, criticism Dhs 16; Pts i.119; Pp 25; Ne 76.

fr. vibhāvin

Vebhassi

(f.) = vibhassikatā, i.e. gossiping Vin iv.241.

Vebhūtika

(& ˚ya) (adj.-n..) causing disaster or ruin; nt. calumnious speech, bad language DN iii.106 (˚ya); Snp 158 (˚ya); Vv 8440 (˚ka; expld as “sahitānaṃ vinābhāva-karaṇato vebhūtikaṃ,” i.e. pisuṇaṃ Vv-a 347).

fr. vibhūti 1

Vema

(nt.) loom or shuttle Dhp-a iii.175; Snp-a 268.

fr. vāyati2, cp. Sk. veman (nt.); Lat. vimen

Vemaka

(nt.) = vema Vin ii.135.

Vemajjha

(nt.) middle, centre Ja iv.250; Ja vi.485; Pp 16, Pp 17; Vism 182 (˚bhāga central part) Vv-a 241, Vv-a 277 ■ loc. vemajjhe: (a) in the present, or central interval of saṃsāra Snp 849 (cp. Nd i.213 and majjha 3 b); (b) in two, asunder Vism 178.

fr. vi + majjha

Vematika

(adj.) in doubt, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.126; Vin ii.65; Vin iv.220, Vin iv.259; Vism 14 (˚sīla). Opp nibbematika.

fr. vimati

Vematta

(nt.) difference, distinction Mil 410; Vism 195.

fr. vi + matta1

Vemattatā

(f.) difference, distinction, discrepancy, disproportion(ateness) MN i.453 MN i.494; SN ii.21; SN iii.101; SN v.200; AN iii.410 sq.; Snp p.102 (puggala˚); Ne 4, Ne 72 sq., 107 sq.; Mil 284, Mil 285. The 8 differences of the var. Buddhas are given at Snp-a 407 sq. as addhāna˚, āyu˚, kula˚, pamāṇa˚, nekkhamma˚ padhāna˚, bodhi˚, raṃsi˚.

abstr. formation fr. vematta

Vemātika

(adj.) having a different mother Ja iv.105 (˚bhāginī); vi.134 (˚bhātaro); Pv-a 19.

vi + ˚mātika

Vemānika

(adj.) having a fairy palace (see vimāna 3) Ja v.2; Dhp-a iii.192.

fr. vimāna1

Veyy˚

is a (purely phonetic) diaeretic form of vy˚; for which viy˚ & veyy˚; are used indiscriminately. There is as little difference between viy˚ & veyy˚; as between vi˚ & ve˚; in those cases where (double, as it were abstract nouns are formed from words with ve˚; (vepullatā, vemattatā, etc.), which shows that ve˚; was simply felt as vi˚. Cp. the use of e for i (esp. before y) in cases like alabbhaneyya → ˚iya; addhaneyya → ˚iya; pesuṇeyya → ˚iya, without any difference in meaning.

Veyyaggha

(adj.) belonging to a tiger Dhp 295 (here simply = vyaggha. i.e. with a tiger as fifth veyya˚ = vya˚ metri causâ; Bdhgh’s expln at Dhp-a iii.455 is forced) ■ (m). a car covered with a tiger’s skin Ja v.259, cp. 377.

fr. vyaggha

Veyyagghin = veyyaggha

(adj.) Ja iv.347.

Veyyañjanika

one who knows the signs, a fortune-teller, soothsayer Ja v.233, Ja v.235 ■ The BSk equivalent is vaipañcanika (Mvu i.207) etc.: see under vipañcita, which may have to be derived (as viyañcita = viyañjita) from vi + añj = vyañjana. See also Kern. Toev. p. 19.

= vyañjanika

Veyyatta

= viyatta, i.e. accomplished, clever Ja v.258.

Veyyatti

(f.) distinction, cleverness, accomplishment Ja v.258; Ja vi.305.

= viyatti

Veyyattiya

(nt.) distinction, lucidity; accomplishment DN iii.38 (paññā˚ in wisdom); MN i.82, MN i.175; MN ii.209.

abstr. form (˚ya = ˚ka) fr. veyyatti = viyatti

Veyyākaraṇa

(m. nt.) 1. (nt.) answer, explanation, exposition DN i.46, DN i.51, DN i.105, DN i.223; DN ii.202; AN iii.125; AN v.50 sq.; Snp 352, Snp 510, Snp 1127; Pp 43, Pp 50; Mil 347; DN-a i.247.

2. (m.) one who is expert in explanation or answer, a grammarian DN i.88; AN iii.125; Snp 595; Mil 236; Snp-a 447.

= vyākaraṇa

Veyyābādhika

(adj.) causing injury or oppression, oppressive, annoying (of pains) MN i.10; AN iii.388; Vism 35 (expld diff. by Bdhgh as “vyābādhato uppannattā veyyābādhikā”).

= vyābādhika

Veyyāyika

(nt.) money to defray expenses, means Vin ii.157.

fr. vyaya

Veyyāvacca

(nt.) service, attention rendering a service; work, labour, commission, duty Vin i.23; AN iii.41; Ja i.12 (kāya˚); vi.154; Snp-a 466; Vv-a 94; Thag-a 253. -˚kamma doing service, work Ja iii.422; -˚kara servant, agent, (f.) housekeeper Ja iii.327; Vv-a 349; ˚-kārikā (f.) id. Pv-a 65 ■ Cp vyappatha.

corresponds to (although doubtful in what relation) Sk. *vaiyā-pṛtya, abstr. fr. vyāpṛta active, busy (to pṛ; pṛṇoti) = P. vyāvaṭa; it was later retranslated into BSk. as vaiyāvṛtya (as if vi + ā + vṛt ) e.g. Divy 54, Divy 347; Mvu i.298

Veyyāvaṭika

(nt.) service, waiting on, attention Snp p.104 (kāya˚); Ja iv.463; Ja vi.154, Ja vi.418, Ja vi.503 (dāna˚); Dhp-a i.27 (kāya˚) iii.19 (dāna˚); Dpvs vi.61.

doublet of veyyāvacca; ˚ka = ˚ya

Vera

(nt.) hatred, revenge, hostile action, sin AN iv.247; Dhp 5; Ja iv.71; Dhp-a i.50. Pv-a 13avera absence of enmity, friendliness; (adj. friendly, peaceable, kind DN i.167, DN i.247 (sa˚ & a˚), 251; SN iv.296; AN iv.246; Snp 150. The pañca bhayāni verāni (or vera-bhayā ) or pañca verā (Vbh 378) “the fivefold guilty dread” are the fears connected with sins against the 5 first commandments (sīlāni); see S ii.68; AN iii.204 sq.; AN iv.405 sq.; AN v.182; Iti 57 = Snp 167 (vera-bhay’atīta). Veraka = vera; a

cp. Sk. vaira, der. fr. vīra

Veraka = vera; a˚

Pv iv.138. See also verika.

Verajja

(nt.) a variety of kingdoms or provinces SN iii.6 (nānā˚-gata bhikkhu a bh. who has travelled much).

fr. vi + rajja

Verajjaka

(adj.) belonging to var. kingdoms or provinces, coming from various countries (nānā˚) living in a different country, foreign, alien DN i.113; MN ii.165 (brāhmaṇā); AN iii.263 (bhikkhū); Thag 1037; Vv 8412 (= videsa-vasika Vv-a 338); Mil 359.

fr. verajja

Veramaṇī

(f.) abstaining from (-˚), absti nence AN ii.217, AN ii.253; AN v.252 sq., 304 sq.; Snp 291; Pp 39 Pp 43; Vism 11; Kp-a 24; Dhp-a i.235, Dhp-a i.305.

fr. viramaṇa; cp. the odd form BSk. vīramaṇī, e.g. Jtm. 213

Veramba

(& ˚bha) (adj.) attribute of the wind (vāta or pl. vātā ) a wind blowing in high altitudes [cp. BSk. vairambhaka Divy 90] SN ii.231; AN i.137; Th i.597; Ja iii.255, Ja iii.484 Ja vi.326; Nd ii.562; Vb-a 71.

etym.? Probably dialectical, i.e. regional

Verika

= vera i. e, inimical; enemy (cp. veraka ) Ja v.229, Ja v.505; Vism 48.

Verin

(adj.) bearing hostility, inimical, revengeful Ja iii.177; Pv iv.325 (= veravanto Pv-a 252); Mil 196 Vism 296 (˚puggala), 326 (˚purisa, in simile), 512 (in sim.); Vb-a 89 ■ Neg. averin Dhp 197, Dhp 258.

fr. vera

Verocana

the sun (lit. “shining forth”) SN i.51; AN ii.50.

= virocana, fr virocati

Velā

(f.)

1. time, point of time (often equal to; kāla Pp 13 (uḍḍahana˚); Ja iv.294; Mil 87; Kp-a 181 PugA 187; Snp-a 111 (bhatta˚ meal-time); Dhs-a 219; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 104, Pv-a 109 (aruṇ’ uggamana˚), 129, 155; Vv-a 165 (paccūsa˚ in the early morning).

2. shore, sea-shore Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198; Ja i.212; Mvu 19, Mvu 30.

3. limit boundary AN v.250 (between v. & agyāgāra); Thag 762; Mil 358; Dhs-a 219; in spec. sense as “measure, restriction, control (of character, sīla-velā ) at Dhs 299 (“not to trespass” trsln), and in dogmatic exegesis of ativelaṃ at Nd i.504; cp. Nd ii.462 & Dhs-a 219.

4 heap, multitude (?) Dhs-a 219 (in Npl. Uruvelā which is however *Uruvilvā).;

Vedic velā in meaning 1; Ep. Sk. in meanings 2 & 3

Velāmika

(adj.) “belonging to Velāma,” at DN ii.198 used as a clan-name (f. Velāmikānī), with vv.ll. Vessinī & Vessāyinī (cp. Velāma Np. comb;d with Vessantara at Vb-a 414), and at DN ii.333 classed with khujjā vāmanikā & komārikā (trsln “maidens”; Bdhgh “very young & childish”: see Dial. ii.359); v.l. celāvikā They are some sort of servants, esp. in demand for a noble’s retinue. See also Np. Velāma (the V. sutta at Ja i.228 sq.).

velāma + ika, the word velāma probably a district word

Velāyati

to destroy (?) Dhs-a 219 (cp. Expos. ii.297); expld by viddhaṃseti. More appropriate would be a meaning like “control,” bound restrict.

Denom. fr. velā

Vellāḷin

(adj.) flashing (of swords) Ja vi.449.

Is it a corruption fr. *veyyāyin = *vyāyin?

Velli

is a word peculiar to the Jātaka. At one passage it is expld by the Commentary as “vedi” (i.e. rail, cornice), where it is applied to the slender waist of a woman (cp. vilāka & vilaggita; ): Ja vi.456. At most of the other passages it is expld as “a heap of gold” thus at Ja v.506 (verse: velli-vilāka-majjhā; C.: “ettha vellī ti rāsi vilākamajjhā ti vilagga-majjhā uttattaghana-suvaṇṇa -rāsi -ppabhā c’ eva tanu-dīgha-majjhā ca”), and vi.269 (verse: kañcana-velli-viggaha; C. “suvaṇṇa -rāsi -sassirīka-sarīrā”). At v.398 in the same passage as vi.269 expld in C. as “kañcana-rūpakasadisa-sarīrā”). The idea of “golden” is connected with it throughout.

dial.?

Vellita

(adj.) crooked, bent; (of hair:) curly Pv-a 189. It is only used with ref. to hair.

-agga with bending (or crooked) tip (of hair), i.e. curled Thig 252 (cp. Thag-a 209); Ja v.203 (= kuñcit’ agga C.); vi.86 (sun-agga-vellita); Pv-a 46, Pv-a 142 ■ Cp kuñcita-kesa Ja i.89.

pp. of vellati, vell to stagger, cp. paṭivellati

Veḷu

a bamboo AN ii.73; Vin iv.35; Ja iv.382 (daṇḍa˚); v.71; Vism 1, Vism 17; Snp-a 76 (= vaṃsa); Vb-a 334.

-agga (veḷagga) the top of a bamboo Vin ii.110 -gumba a bamboo thicket Snp-a 49, Snp-a 75. -daṇḍa a bamboo stick Snp-a 330. -dāna a gift of bamboo Vb 246; Mil 369; Snp-a 311; Kp-a 236; Vb-a 333. -nāḷi (˚nalaka ˚nāḷika) a stalk or shaft of bamboo Vism 260; Kp-a 52 Thag-a 212. -pabba a stalk or section of the b. Ja i.245 Vism 358 = Vb-a 63.

= veṇu, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 433 & Prk. veḷu: Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 243

Veḷuka

a kind of tree Ja v.405 (= vaṃsa-coraka).

fr. veḷu

Veḷuriya

(nt.) a precious stone, lapis lazuli; cp. the same word “beryl” (with metathesis r → l; not fr. the Sk. form), which the Greeks brought to Europe from India ■ DN i.76; Vin ii.112; SN i.64; AN i.215; AN iv.199, AN iv.203 sq.; Ja iii.437; Pv ii.75 Mvu 11, Mvu 16; Dhp-a ii.220. Often in descriptions of Vimānas, e.g. Vv 21; 121; 171; cp. Vv-a 27, Vv-a 60 ■ Probably through a word-play with veḷu (bamboo; popular etymology) it is said to have the colour of bamboo: see vaṃsa-rāga & vaṃsa-vaṇṇa;. At Ja i.207 a peacock’s neck is described as having the colour of the veḷuriya At Mil 267 (in inventory of “loka”) we have the foll enumeration of precious stones: pavāḷa coral, lohitaṅka ruby, masāragalla cat’s eye, veḷuriya lapis lazuli, vajira diamend. See also under ratana1.

cp. dial. Sk. vaiḍūrya

Veḷuva

probably not to veḷu, but another spelling for beḷuva, in ˚laṭṭhikā SN iii.91, as sometimes v.l. veḷuva for beḷuva (q.v.).

cp. Vedic vainava (made of cane)?

Vevacana

(nt.) attribute, epithet; synonym Ne 1 sq., 24, 53 sq., 82, 106; Vism 427; Snp-a 24, Snp-a 447 Cp. adhivacana.

fr. vivacana

Vevaṇṇa

(nt.) discolouring Thag-a 85 (Ap. v. 42).

fr. vivaṇṇa

Vevaṇṇiya

(nt.) 1. state of having no caste, life of an outcast AN v.87≈200. [Cp. BSk. vaivarṇika outcast Divy 424].

2. discolouring, fading waning Ja iii.394.

abstr. fr. vivaṇṇa

Vevāhika

wedding-guest Ja ii.420.

fr. vivāha

Veviccha

(nt.) “multifarious wants,” greediness, selfishness, avarice Snp 941 (= pañca macchariyāni Nd i.422, as at Nd ii.614), 1033 (where Ne 11 reads vivicchā); Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhs 1059 Dhs 1122; Nd ii.s. v. taṇhā; Dhs-a 366, Dhs-a 375.

abstr. formation fr. vivicchā

Vesa

dress, apparel; (more frequently:) disguise, (assumed) appearance Ja i.146 (pakati˚ usual dress), 230 (āyuttaka˚); iii.418 (andha˚) Mil 12; Dhp-a ii.4; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 93 (ummattaka˚), 161 (tunnavāya˚); Sdhp 384; purisa˚ (of women) DN-a i.147.

cp. Sk. veṣa, fr. viṣ to be active

Vesama

= visama Vv-a 10.

Vesākha

Name of a month (April-May) Mvu 1, Mvu 73; Mvu 29, Mvu 1.

cp. Vedic vaiśākha

Vesārajja

(nt.) (the Buddha’s or an Arahant’s) perfect selfconfidence (which is of 4 kinds), self-satisfaction, subject of confidence. The four are given in full at MN i.71 sq. viz. highest knowledge, khīṇāsava state, recognition of the obstacles, recognition & preaching of the way to salvation. See also DN i.110; Ja ii.27; AN ii.13; AN iii.297 sq. AN iv.83, AN iv.210, AN iv.213; MN i.380; Pts ii.194; Nd ii.466b; Dhp-a i.86; DN-a i.278; Kp-a 104; Vv-a 213; Sdhp 593.

abstr. formation fr. visārada, i.e. *vaiśāradya

Vesiyāna

a Vaiśya (Vessa) Ja vi.15, Ja vi.21, Ja vi.328, Ja vi.490, Ja vi.492. As vessāyana at Snp 455 (where vesiyāna is required). Vesi & Vesiya

= vessa, with ˚na as in gimhāna, vassāna etc.

Vesī & Vesiyā

(f.) a woman of low caste, a harlot, prostitute ■ (a) vesī: Vin iii.138; Ja v.425; in cpd. vesi-dvāra a pleasure house Thig 73(b) vesiyā Vin iv.278; Snp 108; Vb 247; in cpd. vesiyā-gocara asking alms from a prostitute’s house Dhp-a iii.275; Dhs-a 151; Vb-a 339.

the f. of vessa

Vesma

(nt.) a house Ja v.84. A trace of the n-stem in loc. vesmani Ja v.60.

Vedic veśman, fr. viś to enter: see visati

Vessa

a Vaiśya, i.e. a member of the third social (i.e. lower) grade (see vaṇṇa 6), a man of the people DN iii.81, DN iii.95 (origin) SN i.102, SN i.166; SN iv.219; SN v.51; AN i.162; AN ii.194; AN iii.214, AN iii.242 Vb 394; DN-a i.254 (origin) ■ f. vesī (q.v.); vessī (as a member of that caste) DN i.193; AN iii.226, AN iii.229.

cp. Vedic vaiśya, a dial. (local) word

Vessikā

(f.) a Vaiśya woman Snp 314. Vehayasa = vihayasa

fr. vessa

Vehāyasa = vihāyasa

, i.e. air, sky; only used in acc. vehāyasaṃ in function of a loc. (cp. Vv-a 182: vehāyasaṃ = vehāyasa-bhūte hatthi-piṭṭhe), combd with ṭhita (standing in the air) Vv 41; Mvu 1, Mvu 24; Pv-a 14.

Vehāsa

the air, sky, heaven; only in the two cases (both used as loc. “in the air”) acc. vehāsaṃ DN iii.27; SN v.283; Vin iii.105; Vv-a 78 & loc.; vehāse Vin i.320.

-kuṭī “air hut” i.e. airy room, “a hut in which a middle-sized man can stand without knocking his head against the ceiling” (expln) Vin iv.46. -gamana going through the air Vism 382; Dhtm 586. -ṭṭha standing in the air DN i.115; DN-a i.284. -ṭṭhita id. DN i.95.

contraction of vehāyasa

Vehāsaya

occurs only in acc. (= loc.) vehāsayaṃ, equal to vihāyasaṃ at Ja iv.471.

= vehāyasa with metathesis y → s

Vo1

(indecl.) a particle of emphasis, perhaps = eva, or = vo2 (as dative of interest). The Commentaries explain it as “nipāta,” i.e. particle. Thus at Snp 560 Snp 760.

Vo2

is enclitic form of tumhe (see under tuvaṃ ), i.e. to you, of you but it is generally interpreted by the C. as “nipāta, i.e. particle (of emphasis or exclamation; i.e. vo1) Thus e.g. at Pv i.53 (cp. Pv-a 26).

cp. Vedic vaḥ, Av. vō, Lat. vos, Gr. υ ̓́μμε

Vo˚

is commonly regarded as the prefix combn vi + ava˚; (i.e. vi + o˚), but in many cases it simply represents ava˚; (= o˚) with v as euphonic (“vorschlag”), as in vonata (= onata), voloketi, vokkanti, vokiṇṇa, voropeti vosāpeti, vosāna, vossagga. In a few cases it corresponds to vi + ud˚; as in vokkamati, vocchijjati voyoga.

Vokāra

1. difference Snp 611. - 2. constituent of being (i.e. the khandhas), usually as eka˚, catu˚ & pañca˚-bhava;, e.g. Kv 261; Vb 137 Tikp 32, 36 sq.; Vism 572; Kp-a 245; Snp-a 19, Snp-a 158 In this meaning vokāra is peculiar to the Abhidhamma and is almost synonymous with vikāra 4, and in the Yamaka with khandha, e.g. pañca v., catu v. etc. 3. worthless thing, trifle SN ii.29.

4. inconvenience disadvantage (cp. vikāra 3) Pv-a 12 (line 1 read: anek ākāra-vokāraṃ).

v(i) + okāra; cp. vikāra

Vokiṇṇa

(adj.) covered with, drenched (with); mixed up, full of (instr.) MN i.390; SN ii.29; AN i.123, AN i.148; AN ii.232; Ja i.110; Dhs-a 69 ■ Cp. abbokiṇṇa.

v(i) + okiṇṇa

Vokiṇṇaka

(adj.) mixed up Mil 300 (kapiniddā-pareto vokiṇṇakaṃ jaggati a person with light sleep, so-called “monkey-doze,” lies confusedly awake i.e. is half asleep, half awake). Rh. D. not quite to the point: “a man still guards his scattered thoughts.”

vokiṇṇa + ka

Vokkanta

deviated from (abl.) Iti 36.

pp. of vokkamati

Vokkanti

(f.) descent (into the womb), conception Thag 790.

v(i) + akkanti

Vokkamati

to turn aside, deviate from (abl.); mostly in ger. vokkamma Vin ii.213; DN i.230; MN iii.117; SN iv.117; Snp 946; Ja i.23; Vism 18 ■ pp vokkanta.

vi + ukkamati

Vokkamana

(nt.) turning aside, deviation fr. (abl.) MN i.14; AN i.243.

fr. vokkamati

Vokkha

(adj) is at Ja iii.21 given as syName of vaggu (q.v.).

? doubtful reading

Vocarita

penetrated (into consciousness), investigated, apperceived MN i.478; AN iv.363 (= manodvāre samudācāra-ppatta).

pp. of vi + ocarati

Vocchādanā

(f.) covering up (entirely) Vb-a 493.

fr. vi + ava + chad

Vocchijjati

to be cut off SN iii.53 (so read) ■ pp. neg. abbocchinna: see abbhocchinna. (= *avyucch˚).

vi + ud + chijjati, Pass. of chid

Votthapana

(& ˚ṭṭhapana ) (nt.) establishing, synthesis, determination, a momentary stage in the unit called percept (cp. Cpd. 29), always with ˚kicca (or ˚kiriyā) “accomplishing the function of determination Vism 21; Dhs-a 401; DN-a i.194 (v.l. voṭṭhabb˚); Tikp 276 (˚kiriyā).

= vavatth˚

Votthāpeti

to establish, put up, arrange Ja vi.583.

= vavatthāpeti

Vodaka

(adj.) free from water Vin ii.113.

vi + odaka = udaka

Vodapeti

(or ˚dāpeti ) to cleanse, purify Dhp-a ii.162.

Caus. of vodāyati

Vodāta

(adj.) clean, pure MN i.319.

vi + odāta, cp. vīvadāta

Vodāna

(nt.) 1. cleansing, getting bright (of sun & moon) DN i.10 (= visuddhatā DN-a i.95)

2. purity (from the kilesas, or stains of sin), purification sanctification MN i.115 (opp. sankilesa); SN iii.151 (citta˚, adj.; opp. citta-sankilesa); AN iii.418 sq.; AN v.34; Pts i.166; Vb 343; Ne 96, Ne 100, Ne 125 sq.; Vism 51 sq. 89; Vb-a 401; Dhp-a iii.405.

fr. vi + ava + 4 to clean, cp. BSk. vyavadāna Divy 616; Avs ii.188

Vodāniya

(adj.) apt to purify, purifying DN i.195; DN iii.57. Opp. saṅkilesika.

grd. formn from vodāna

Vodāpana

(nt.) cleansing, purification Dhp-a iii.237 (= pariyodapana).

fr. vodapeti

Vodāya

at Ja iv.184 appears to be a misreading for codāya (ger. from codeti ) in meaning iṇaṃ codeti to undertake a loan, to lend money at interest (= vaḍḍhiyā inaṃ payojetvā C.), to demand payment for a loan. The v.l. at all places is codāya (= codetvā). See codeti.

Vodāyati

to become clean or clear, to be purified or cleansed AN v.169 (fig. saddhammassa) 317 (id.; expld by C. as “vodānaṃ gacchati”); Ja ii.418 (of a precious stone).

vi + ava + 4 to clean

Vodāsa

only at DN iii.43 in phrase ˚ṃ āpajjati in meaning of “making a distinction,” being particular (about food: bhojanesu), having a dainty appetite; expld by “dve bhāge karoti” Bdhgh. It seems to stand for vokāra, unless we take it to be a misspelling for vodāya “cutting off,” fr. vi + ava + , thus “separating the food” (?): Suggestive also is the likeness with vosānaṃ āpajjati.

?

Vodiṭṭha

defined, fully understood recognized MN i.478; AN iv.363 (= suṭṭhu diṭṭha C.).

pp. of vi + ava + diś, cp. odissa & the BSk. vyapadeśa pretext Divy 435

Vonata

(adj.) bent down Thag 662.

v(i) + onata

Vopeti

at DN-a i.277 (avopetvā) is to be read with v.l. as copeti, i.e. shake, move, disturb, violate (a rule).

Vobhindati

to split; ppr. ˚anto (fig.) hair-splitting DN i.162; MN i.176; aor. vobhindi (lit.) to break, split (one’s head, sīsaṃ) MN i.336.

vi + ava + bhindati

Vomādapeti

at DN-a i.300 is to be read as vodāpeti (cleanse, purify); v.l. BB vodāpeti; SS cāmāpeti, i.e. to cause to be rinsed, cleanse.

Vomissa(ka)

(adj.) miscellaneous, various Vism 87 (˚katā), 88 (˚ka), 104 (˚carita).

v(i) + omissa(ka)

Voyoga

effort (?), application Kp-a 243. Reading doubtful.

vi + uyyoga in sense of uyyutta?

Voropana

(nt.) depriving (jīvita˚ of life) Ja i.99.

abstr. fr. voropeti

Voropeti

to deprive of (abl.), to take away; only in phrase jīvitā voropeti [which shows that -v- is purely euphonic] to deprive of life, to kill DN i.85; Ja iv.454; DN-a i.236; Dhp-a iv.68; Pv-a 67, Pv-a 105, Pv-a 274.

= oropeti

Volokana

(nt.) looking at, examination Ja iv.237 (v.l. vi˚).

v(i) + olokana, but cp. BSk. vyavalokana “inspection” Divy 435

Voloketi

to examine, study, scrutinize MN i.213 (with gen.); Vin i.6 (lokaṃ); Kv 591; Dhp-a i.319 (lokaṃ) ii.96 (v.l. oloketi).

v(i) + oloketi; in meaning equal to viloketi & oloketi

Vosāṭitaka

(nt.) (food) put down (on cemeteries etc.) for (the spirits of) the departed Vin iv.89.

wrong spelling for *vossaṭṭhika = v(i) + ossaṭṭha + ika

Vosāna

(nt.) 1. (relative) achievement, perfection (in this world), accomplishment MN ii.211 (diṭṭhadhamm’ âbhiññāvosāna-pārami-ppatta); Dhp 423 (cp Dhp-a iv.233); Thag 784 (˚ṃ adhigacchati to reach perfection).

2. stopping, ceasing; in phrase ˚ṃ āpajjati (almost equal to pamāda ) to come to an end (with), to stop, to become careless, to flag MN i.193; Ja iii.5; Pv-a 29; antarā ˚ṃ āpajjati to produce half-way achievement to stop half-way AN v.157, AN v.164; Iti 85. Kern, Toev. s. v quite wrong “to arrive at a conclusion, to be convinced.”

v(i) + osāna

Vosāpeti

to make end, to bring to an end or a finish Snp-a 46 (desanaṃ).

v(i) + osāpeti

Vosāraṇiya

(adj. nt.) belonging to reinstatement AN i.99.

fr. v(i) + osāraṇā

Vosita

one who has attained (relative) achievement perfected, accomplished, mastering, in phrase abhiññā˚ one who masters special knowledge SN i.167; Dhp 423; Iti 47 = Iti 61 = Iti 81; AN i.165; cp. Dhp-a iv.233: “niṭṭhānaṃ patto vusita-vosānaṃ vā patto etc.”

vi + osita, pp. of ava + . See also vusita & vyosita;

Vossa (-kamma)

(nt.) making impotent (see under vassakamma) DN i.12; DN-a i.97.

Vossagga

relinquishing, relaxation; handing over, donation, gift (see on term as ethical Bdhgh at K.S. i.321) DN iii.190 (issariya˚ handing over of authority), 226; SN iv.365 sq.; SN v.63 sq., 351 (˚rata fond of giving); AN ii.66 (id.); iii.53 (id.); Pts i.109 Pts ii.24, Pts ii.117; Ja vi.213 (kamma˚); Ne 16; Vb 229 Vb 350; Vism 224; Vb-a 317. -sati-vossagga relaxation of attention, inattention, indifference Dhp-a i.228 Dhp-a iii.163, Dhp-a iii.482; Dhp-a iv.43. -pariṇāmi, maturity of surrender SN i.88.

= ossagga; ava + sṛj

Vossajjati

to give up, relinquish; to hand over, resign Snp 751 (ger. vossajja; Snp-a 508 reads oss˚; ) Ja v.124 (issariyaṃ vossajjanto; cp. DN iii.190).

= ossaj(j)ati

Voharati

1. to express, define, decide MN i.499; DN i.202; Mil 218.

2. to decide, govern over (a kingdom), give justice, administrate Ja iv.134 (Bārāṇasiṃ maṃsa-sur-odakaṃ, i.e. provide with; double acc.), 192 (inf. vohātuṃ = voharituṃ C.) ■ Pass. vohariyati to be called Snp-a 26; Pv-a 94; Thag-a 24.

vi + oharati

Vohāra

1. trade, business MN ii.360; Snp 614 (˚ṃ upajīvati); Ja i.495; Ja ii.133, Ja ii.202; Ja v.471; Pv-a 111 Pv-a 278.

2. current appellation, common use (of language), popular logic, common way of defining, usage designation, term, cognomen; (adj.) (-˚) so called Snp-a 383, Snp-a 466, Snp-a 483 (laddha˚ so-called); DN-a i.70; Pv-a 56, Pv-a 231 (laddha˚ padesa, with the name) Vv-a 8, Vv-a 72 (pāṇo ti vohārato satto), 108 (loka nirūḷhāya samaññāya v.)- ariya-vohāra proper (i.e. Buddhist) mode of speech (opp. anariya˚ unbuddhist or vulgar, common speech DN iii.232; AN ii.246; AN iv.307; Vin iv.2; Vb 376, Vb 387 lokiya-vohāra common definition, general way of speech Snp-a 382. On term see also Dhs. trsln § 1306.

3. lawsuit law, lawful obligation; juridical practice, jurisprudence (cp. vohārika) Snp 246 (˚kūṭa fraudulent lawyer); Ja ii.423 (˚ṃ sādheti to claim a debt by way of law, or a lawful debt); vi.229; Dhp-a iii.12 (˚ûpajīvin a lawyer); Snp-a 289.

4. name of a sea-monster, which gets hold of ships Ja v.259.

vi + avahāra

Vohārika

“decider,” one connected with a law-suit or with the law, magistrate, a higher official (mahāmatta) in the law-courts, a judge or justice. At Vin i.74 two classes of mahāmattā (ministers) are given senānāyakā those of defence, and vohārikā of justice cp. Vin ii.158; Vin iii.45 (purāṇa-vohāriko mahāmatto) iv.223.

fr. vohāra

Vy˚

is the semi-vowel (i.e. half-consonantic) form of vi˚; before following a & ā (vya˚, vyā), very rarely ū & o; The prefix vi˚ is very unstable, and a variety of forms are also attached to vy˚, which, after the manner of all consonant-combns in Pāḷi, may apart from its regular form vy˚; appear either as contracted to vv˚; (written ; ) like vagga (for vyagga), vaya (for vyaya), vosita (= vyosita), *vvūha (= vyūha, appearing as ˚bhūha), or diaeretic as viy˚; (in poetry) or veyy˚; (popular), e.g. viyañjana, viyārambha, viyāyata; or veyvañjanika veyyākaraṇa, veyyāyika. It further appears as by˚ (like byaggha, byañjana, byappatha, byamha, byāpanna byābādha etc.). In a few cases vya˚; represents (a diaeretic) vi˚; as in vyamhita & vyasanna; and vyā˚; = vi˚ in vyārosa.

Vyakkhissaṃ

at Snp 600 is fut. of vyācikkhati (see viyā˚; ).

Vyagga

(adj.) distracted, confused, bewildered; neg. ; SN i.96 (˚mānasa); v.66, 107.

vi + agga, of which the contracted form is vagga2

Vyaggha

a tiger DN iii.25; AN iii.101; Snp 416 (˚usabha); Ap 68 (˚rājā); Ja i.357; Ja iii.192 (Subāhu); v.14 (giri-sānuja) ■ f. viyagghinī (biy˚ Mil 67. See also byaggha.

cp. Vedic vyāghra

Vyagghīnasa

a hawk SN i.148 (as ˚nisa); Ja vi.538. Another word for “hawk” is sakuṇagghi.

?

Vyañjana

(nt.) 1. (accompanying) attribute, distinctive mark, sign characteristic (cp. anu˚) Snp 549, Snp 1017; Thag 819 (metric viyañjana); Ja v.86 (viyañjanena under the pretext) Dhs 1306. gihi˚; characteristic of a layman Snp 44 (cp Snp-a 91); Mil 11; purisa˚; membrum virile Vin ii.269–⁠2. letter (of a word) as opposed to attha (meaning sense, spirit), e, g. DN iii.127; SN iv.281, SN iv.296; SN v.430; AN ii.139 (Cp. savyañjana ); or pada (word), e.g. MN i.213; AN i.59; AN ii.147, AN ii.168, AN ii.182; AN iii.178 sq.; Vin ii.316; Ne 4; Snp-a 177vyañjanato according to the letter Mil 18 (opp. atthato).

3. condiment, curry Vin ii.214; AN iii.49 (odano anekasūpo aneka-vyañjano); Pv ii.115 (bhatta˚ rice with curry); Pv-a 50 ■ Cp. byañjana.

fr. vi + añj, cp. añjati2 & abbhañjati

Vyañjanaka

(adj.) see ubhato˚ & veyyañjanika;.

fr. vyañjana

Vyañjayati

to characterise, denote, express, indicate Snp-a 91; Ne 209 (Cy.).

vi + añjati, or añjeti

Vyatireka

what is left over, addition, surplus Pv-a 18 (of “ca”), 228 (˚to).

vi + atireka

Vyatta

(adj.) 1. experienced, accomplished, learned, wise, prudent, clever SN iv.174 (paṇḍita + ), 375; AN iii.117, AN iii.258; Ja vi.368; Vv-a 131 (paṇḍita + ); Pv-a 39 (id.) ■ ; unskilled foolish (+ bāla) SN iv.380; AN iii.258; Ja i.98.

2. evident manifest Pv-a 266 (˚pākaṭa-bhāva).

cp. viyatta, veyyatta & byatta

Vyattatā

(f.) experience, learning, cleverness Mil 349 (as by˚; ); Dhp-a ii.38 (avyattatā foolishness: so correct under avyattatā P.D. i.86).

abstr. fr. vyatta

Vyattaya

opposition, reversal; in purisa˚; change of person (gram.) Snp-a 545; vacana˚; reversal of number (i.e. sg. & pl.) DN-a i.141; Snp-a 509.

vi + ati + aya

Vyathana

(nt.) shaking, wavering Dhtp 465 (as defn of tud ).

fr. vyath

Vyadhati

to tremble, shake, waver; to be frightened Vin ii.202 (so for vyādhati ); Ja iii.398 (vyadhase; C vyadhasi = kampasi) ■ Caus. vyadheti (& vyādheti); to frighten, confuse Ja iv.166 (= vyādheti bādheti C.)-Fut. vyādhayissati SN i.120 = Thag 46 (by˚). Under byādheti we had given a different derivation (viz Caus. fr. vyādhi ).

in poetry for the usual vedhati of vyath, cp. Goth. wipōn

Vyanta

(adj. nt.) removed, remote; nt. end, finish; only as vyanti˚; in combn with kṛ; and bhū. The spelling is often byanti˚ ■ (1) vyantikaroti to abolish remove, get rid of, destroy MN i.115 (byant’ eva ekāsiṃ) 453 (by˚); DN i.71 (˚kareyya); SN iv.76, SN iv.190; AN iv.195; DN-a i.125, DN-a i.212 ■ Fut. vyantikāhiti Mil 391 (by˚) Dhp-a iv.69 ■ pp. vyantikata Thag 526 ■ (2) vyantibhavati to cease, stop; to come to an end, to be destroyed Kv 597 (by˚); or ˚hoti AN i.141; AN iii.74; Pts i.171 (by˚) Mil 67 (by˚), vyantibhāva destruction, annihilation MN i.93; AN v.292, AN v.297 sq.; Pv iv.173; Kv 544 (by˚) vyantibhuta come to an end Ja v.4.

vi + anta

Vyapagacchati

to depart, to be dispelled Ja ii.407 (ger. ˚gamma ) ■ pp. ˚gata.

vi + apagacchati

Vyapagata

departed Ja i.17; Mil 133, Mil 225.

pp. of vyapagacchati

Vyapanudati

to drive away, expel; ger ˚nujja Snp 66. aor. vyapānudi Thig 318.

vi + apanudati

Vyapahaññati

to be removed or destroyed Ja vi.565.

vi + apa + haññati

Vyappatha

(nt.) 1. duty, occupation, activity Snp 158 (khīṇa of the Arahant: having no more duties, cp. vyappathi)

2. way of speaking, speech, utterance Snp 163, Snp 164 (contrasted to citta & kamma; cp. kāya, vācā, mano in same use), expld at Snp-a 206 by vacīkamma; & in def;n of “speech” at Vin iv.2 (see under byappatha ) Dhs-a 324 (expld as vākya-bheda).

perhaps a distortion of *vyāpṛta, for which the usual P. (der.) veyyāvacca (q.v.) in meaning “duty”

Vyappathi

(f.) activity, occupation, duty (?) Snp 961. See remarks on byappatha.

cp. Sk. vyāpṛti

Vyappanā

(f.) application (of mind), focussing (of attention) Dhs 7.

vi + appanā

Vyamha

(nt.) palace; a celestial mansion, a vimāna, abode for fairies etc. Ja v.454; Ja vi.119, Ja vi.251 (= pura & rāja-nivesa C.); Vv 351 (= bhavana Vv-a 160). Cp. byamha.

etym.?

Vyamhita

(adj.) astounded, shocked, awed; dismayed, frightened Ja v.69 (= bhīta C.); vi.243 314.

metric for vimhita

Vyaya

expense, loss, decay SN iv.68, SN iv.140; Mil 393 (as abbaya) avyayena (instr.) safely DN i.72. Cp. veyyāyika vyāyika;.

vi + aya, of i; the assimilation form is vaya2

Vyavayāti

to go away, disappear Ja v.82.

vi + ava(= apa) + i, cp. apeti & veti;

Vyavasāna

(nt.) [somewhat doubtful. It has to be compared with vavassagga, although it should be derived fr. (cp. pp. vyavasita; or śri ?), thus mixture of sṛj & sā. Cp. a similar difficulty of under osāpeti decision, resolution; only used to explain part. handa (exhortation) at Snp-a 200, Snp-a 491 (v.l. vyavasāya: cp vavasāya at DN-a i.237), for which otherwise vavassagga.

Vyavasita

(adj.) decided, resolute Snp-a 200.

pp. of vi + ava + (or śri ?), cp. vyavasāna

Vyasana

(nt.) misfortune, misery, ruin, destruction, loss DN i.248; SN iii.137 (anaya˚); iv.159; AN i.33 AN v.156 sq., 317 (several); Snp 694 (˚gata ruined); Pv i.64 (= dukkha Pv-a 33); iii.56 (= anattha Pv-a 199); Vb 99 sq., 137; Vb-a 102 (several); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 103, Pv-a 112 Sdhp 499 ■ The 5 vyasanas are: ñāti˚, bhoga˚, roga˚ sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚ or misfortune concerning one’s relations wealth, health, character, views. Thus at DN iii.235; AN iii.147; Vin iv.277.

fr. vy + as

Vyasanin

(adj.) having misfortune, unlucky, faring ill Ja v.259.

fr. vyasana

Vyasanna

sunk into (loc.), immersed Ja iv.399; Ja v.16 (here doubtful; not, as C. vyasanāpanna; gloss visanna; vv.ll. in C.: vyaccanna viphanna, visatta).

metric (diaeretic) for visanna

Vyākata

1. answered, explained, declared, decided MN i.431 (by˚); AN i.119; SN ii.51, SN ii.223 SN iv.59, SN iv.194; SN v.177; Snp 1023avyākata unexplained undecided, not declared, indeterminate MN i.431 (by˚) DN i.187, DN i.189; SN ii.222; SN iv.375 sq., 384 sq., 391 sq. Pts ii.108 sq.; Dhs 431, Dhs 576.

2. predicted Ja i.26. 3. settled, determined Ja iii.529 (asinā v. brought to a decision by the sword).

pp. of vyākaroti

Vyākatatta

(nt.) explanation, definiteness Pv-a 27.

abstr. fr. vyākata

Vyākattar

expounder AN iii.81.

n. ag. of vyākaroti; cp. BSk. vyākartṛ Divy 620

Vyākaraṇa

(nt.) 1. answer (pañha˚), explanation, exposition AN i.197 AN ii.46; AN iii.119; Snp-a 63, Snp-a 99; Kp-a 75, Kp-a 76.

2. grammar (as one of the 6 angas) Snp-a 447; Pv-a 97.

3. prediction Ja i.34, Ja i.44; Dhp-a iv.120.

fr. vyākaroti; see also veyyākaraṇa

Vyākaroti

1. to explain, answer (in combn with puṭṭha, asked) DN i.25, DN i.58, DN i.175, DN i.200; Snp 510, Snp 513 sq. 1102, 1116; Mil 318 (byākareyya); Vv-a 71. Fut ˚karissati DN i.236; Snp 993; Pv-a 281. For vyākarissati we have vyakkhissati (of viyācikkhati) at Snp 600 ■ aor sg. vyākāsi Snp 541, Snp 1116, Snp 1127; Pv-a 212; pl. vyākaṃsu Snp 1084; Pv ii.135 ■ grd. vyākātabba DN i.94, DN i.118. 2. to prophesy, predict [cp. BSk. vyākaroti in same sense Divy 65, Divy 131] Ja i.140; Pv iii.55 (aor. ˚ākari) Mvu 6, Mvu 2 (aor. ˚ākaruṃ); Dhp-a iv.120 (˚ākāsi); Pv-a 196 Pv-a 199 (˚ākāsi) ■ pp. vyākata.

vi + ā + kṛ;

Vyākāra

see viy˚.

Vyākhyāta

told, announced, set forth, enumerated Snp 1,000.

pp. of v(i)yācikkhati

Vyākula

(adj.) perplexed Ja i.301; Pv-a 160; Vv-a 30; Sdhp 403.

vi + ākula

Vyādinna

at AN iii.64 (soto vikkhitto visato + ) is doubtful in reading & meaning (“split”?). It must mean something like “interrupted, diverted.” The vv.ll. are vicchinna & jiṇṇa;.

for vyādiṇṇa, vi + ādiṇṇa?

Vyādha

a huntsman, deer-hunter Mvu 10, Mvu 89 (read either; vyādha-deva god of the h.; or vyādhi˚; demon of maladies); 10, 95.

fr. vyadh: see vedha & vijjhati

Vyādhi1

sickness, malady, illness, disease AN i.139 (as devadūta), 146, 155 sq.; iii.66; Pts i.59 sq. Pts ii.147; Ja vi.224; Vism 236. Often in sequence jāti jarā vyādhi maraṇa, e.g. AN ii.172; AN iii.74 sq. Vism 232.

see byādhi

Vyādhi2

(camel) see oṭṭhi˚.

Vyādhita

1. affected with an illness, ill Ja v.497; Mil 168. See byādhita.

2. shaken, f. ˚ā as abstr, shakiness, trembling Vb-a 479.

pp. of vyādheti

Vyādhiyaka

(nt.) shaking up Vb 352; Vb-a 479 (uppannavyādhitā; i.e. kāya-pphandana).

fr. vyādheti

Vyādhati

see vyadhati ■ pp. vyādhita.

Vyāpaka

(adj.) filling or summing up, combining, completing Pv-a 71 (in expln of “ye keci” anavasesa˚ niddesa).

fr. vyāpeti

Vyāpajjati

(instr.) to go wrong, to fail, disagree; to be troubled; also (trs.) to do harm, to injure SN iii.119; SN iv.184 = Nd ii.40 (by˚); AN iii.101 (bhattaṃ me vyāpajjeyya disagrees with me, makes me ill); Snp 1065 (ākāso avyāpajjamāno not troubled, not getting upset) Nd ii.74 (by˚) ■ pp. vyāpanna ■ Caus. vyāpādeti.

vi + āpajjati

Vyāpajjanā

(f.) injuring, doing harm, ill-will Pp 18; Dhs 418 (“getting upset” trsln).

fr. vyāpajjati

Vyāpajjha

(adj.-n..) to be troubled or troubling, doing harm, injuring; only neg. avyāpajjha (& abyābajjha); (adj.) not hurting, peaceful, friendly; (nt.) kindness of heart Vin i.183; MN i.90 (abyābajjhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti) 526; DN i.167, DN i.247, DN i.251; SN iv.296, SN iv.371; AN i.98; AN ii.231 sq. AN iii.285, AN iii.329 sq., 376 sq. Cp. byāpajjha & vyābādha; etc.

perhaps grd. of vyāpajjati; but see also avyāpajjha

Vyāpatti

(f.) injury, harm; doing harm, malevolence AN v.292 sq.; Pp 18; Ja iv.137; Dhs 418 (“disordered temper” trsln)

fr. vyāpajjati

Vyāpanna

(adj.) spoilt, disagreeing, gone wrong; corrupt; only with citta, i.e. a corrupted heart, or a malevolent intention; adj. malevolent DN i.139; DN iii.82; AN i.262, AN i.299; opp. avyāpanna (q.v.) See also byāpanna & viyāpanna;.

pp. of vyāpajjati

Vyāpāda

making bad, doing harm: desire to injure, malevolence, ill-will DN i.71, DN i.246; DN iii.70 sq., 226, 234; SN i.99; SN ii.151; SN iv.343; AN i.194, AN i.280; AN ii.14, AN ii.210; AN iii.92, AN iii.231, AN iii.245; AN iv.437; Vb 86, Vb 363 sq., 391; Pp 17 sq.; Dhs 1137; Vism 7; DN-a i.211; Vb-a 74, Vb-a 118, Vb-a 369. ˚anusaya MN i.433. ˚dosa MN iii.3. ˚dhātu MN iii.62. ˚nīvaraṇa MN ii.203. See under each affix ■ Cp. avyāpāda.

fr. vyāpajjati. See also byāpāda

Vyāpādeti

to spoil Mil 92.

Caus. of vyāpajjati

Vyāpāra

occupation, business, service, work Ja i.341; Ja v.60; Vism 595. Cp. veyyāvacca, vyappatha (by˚), vyāvaṭa.

vi + ā + pṛ;

Vyāpāritar

one occupied with MN iii.126.

Vyāpin

(adj.) pervading, diffused Dhs-a 311.

fr. vi + āp

Vyāpeti

to make full, pervade, fill, comprise Dhs-a 307; Vv-a 17; Thag-a 287; Pv-a 52 (= pharati) 71 (in expln of “ye keci”).

vi + Caus. of āp

Vyābādha

(& byābādha) oppression, injury, harm, hurting; usually in phrase atta˚ & para˚; (disturbing the peace of others of oneself) MN i.89; SN iv.339; AN i.114, AN i.157, AN i.216; AN ii.179-Also at SN iv.159 (pāṇinaṃ vyābādhāya, with v.l. vadhāya). See also byābādha. The corresponding adjectives are (a)vyāpajjha & veyyābādhika; (q.v.).

fr. vi + ā + bādh, but semantically connected with vi + ā + pad, as in vyāpāda & vyāpajjha;

Vyābādheti

(& bya˚) to do harm, hurt, injure Vin ii.77/78; SN iv.351 sq.; DN-a i.167. The BSk. is vyābādhayate (e.g. Divy 105).

Caus. of vi + ā + badh or distortion fr. vyāpadeti, with which identical in meaning

Vyābāheti

lit. “to make an outsider,” to keep or to be kept out or away Vin ii.140 (˚bāhiṃsu in Pass. sense; so that they may not be kept away). Oldenberg (on p. 320) suggests reading vyābādhiṃsu, which may be better, viz. “may not be offended” (?). The form is difficult to explain.

vi + ā + bah: see bahati3

Vyābhaṅgī

(f.) 1. a carrying pole (or flail?) Thag 623; combd with asita (see asita4 in corr. to pt 2) “sickle & pole” MN ii.180; AN iii.5.

2. a flail SN iv.201.

see byā˚

Vyāma

see byāma & add ref. DN ii.18Vism 136 (catu˚pamāṇa).

Vyāyata

stretched; only neg. a˚ senseless, confused (should it be vyāyatta ?) Ja i.496 (= avyatta C.). See also viyāyata. Vyayama = vayama

vi + āyata

Vyāyāma = vāyāma

Dhs-a 146.

Vyāyika

(adj.) belonging to decay; only neg. ; not decaying, imperishable AN ii.51; Ja v.508.

fr. vyaya

Vyārambha

see viy˚.

Vyāruddha

(adj.) opposed, hostile Thig 344; Snp 936. See byāruddha.

pp. of vi + ā + rundh

Vyārosa

anger MN iii.78; SN iii.73.

vi + ā + rosa, cp. virosanā

Vyālika

(nt.) fault Thag-a 266.

for vy + alika

Vyāvaṭa

(adj.) doing service, active, busy; eager, keen intent on (loc.), busy with AN iv.195 (mayi = worrying about me); Ja iii.315 (su˚); iv.371 (kiccâkiccesu v. uyyatta C.); v.395 (= ussukka); vi.229 (= kāya-veyyāvacca-dān’ ādi-kamma-karaṇena vyāvaṭa C.) ■ dassana˚; keen on a sight, eager to see Ja i.89; Vv-a 213 (preferred to T. reading!) ■ dāna˚; serving in connection with a gift, busy with giving, a “commissioner of gifts,” i.e. a superintendent installed by a higher (rich person (as a king or seṭṭhi) to look after the distribution of all kinds of gifts in connection with a mahādāna. Rh Davids at Dial. ii.372 (following Childers) has quite misunderstood the term in referring it to a vyāvaṭa in meaning of “hindered,” and by translating it as “hindered at the largesse” or “objecting to the largesse. At none of the passages quoted by him has it that meaning. See e.g. DN ii.354; Ja iii.129; Pv ii.950 (dāne v. = ussukkaṃ āpanna Pv-a 135); Pv-a 112 (dāne), 124 (id.); DN-a i.296 (? not found). avyāvaṭa not busy, not bothering about (loc.), unconcerned with, not worrying DN ii.141 (Tathāgatassa sarīre; trsln not to the point “hinder not yourselves”); Vin iii.136. See also separately ■ Note. vyāvaṭa (& a˚); only occur in the meaning given above, and not in the sense of “covered obstructed” [wrongly fr. vṛ; ] as given by Childers Correct the trsln given under byāvaṭa accordingly!

= Sk. vyāpṛta, cp. vyāpāra, byappatha. & veyyāvacca

Vyāviddha

(adj.) whirling about, flitting (here & there), moving about, pell-mell Ja vi.530.

vi + āviddha

Vyāsa

separation, division; always contrasted with samāsa, e.g. Vism 82 (vyāsato separately distributively; opp. samāsato); Kp-a 187.

fr. vi + ās to sit

Vyāsatta

see byāsatta.

Vyāsiñcati

to defile, corrupt, tarnish SN iv.78 (cittaṃ) ■ pp. vyāsitta ibid.

vi + āsiñcati

Vyāseka

mixed; only neg. ; unmixed, untarnished, undefiled DN i.70; DN-a i.183; Pp 59; Thag 926.

fr. vi + ā + sic

Vyāharati

to utter, talk, speak Vin ii.214; Ja ii.177; Ja iv.225 (puṭṭho vyāhāsi, perhaps with v.l. as vyākāsi ). See also avyāharati ■ Cp. paṭi˚.

vi + āharati

Vyūha

1. heap, mass; massing or array, grouping of troops SN v.369 (sambādha˚ a dense crowd, or massed with troops (?); in phrase iddha phīta etc., as given under bāhujañña ); Ja ii.406 (battle array: paduma˚, cakka˚, sakaṭa˚; ).

2. a side street (?), in sandhibbūha Ja vi.276. See also byūha.

fr. vi + vah; see byūha

Vyūhati

at Vv-a 104 is not clear (see byūhati ). It looks more like a present tense to viyūḷha in sense “to be bulky,” than a Denom. fr. vyūha as “stand in array. For the regular verb vi + vah see viyūhati. Cp. paṭi˚ saṃyūhati;.

Vyosita

(adj.) perfected; neg. ; not perfected, imperfect Thag 784 (aby˚).

S.

= vosita

S

-S-

a euphonic-s-seems to occur in combn ras-agga-saggin (see rasa2). An apparent hiatus-s in ye s-idha Snp 1083, and evaṃ s- ahaṃ Snp 1134 (v.l.) may be an abbreviated su˚; (see su2), unless we take it as a misspelling for p.

Sa1

the letter s (sa-kāra) Snp-a 23; or the syllable sa Dhp-a ii.6; Pv-a 280.

Sa2

base of the nom. of the demonstr. pron. that, he she. The form sg. m. sa is rare (e.g. Dhp 142; Snp 89) According to Geiger (P.Gr. § 105) sa occurs in Snp 40 times but so 124 times. In later Pāli sa is almost extinct The final o of so is often changed into v before vowels and a short vowel is lengthened after this v: svājja Snp 998 = so ajja; svāhaṃ Ja i.167 = so ahaṃ; svāyaṃ Vin i.2 = so ayaṃ. The foll. vowel is dropped in so maṃ Iti 57 = so imaṃ ■ A form se is Māgadhism for nt. acc sg. taṃ, found e.g. at DN ii.278, DN ii.279; MN ii.254, MN ii.255, and in combn seyyathā, seyyathīdaṃ (for which taṃyathā Mil 1). An idiomatic use is that of so in meaning of “that (he or somebody),” e.g. “so vata… palipanno paraṃ palipannaṃ uddharissatī ti: n’ etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati” MN i.45; cp. “sā ‘haṃ dhammaṃ nâssosiṃ” that I did not hear the Dh. Vv 405. Or in the sense of a cond. (or causal) part. “if,” or “once,” e.g. sa kho so bhikkhu… upakkileso ti iti viditvā… upakkilesaṃ pajahati “once he has recognised…” MN i.37 Cp. ya˚; ii.2 b. On correl. use with ya˚; (yo so etc.) see ya˚; ii.1.

Idg. *so- (m.), *sā- (f.); nom. sg. to base *to- of the oblique cases; cp. Sk. sa (saḥ), sā; Av. hō, hā; Gr. ὁ, ἡ; Goth. sa, sō; Ags. sē “the” (= that one); pe-s = E thi-s

Sa3

prefix, used as first pt. of compounds, is the sense of “with,” possessed of, having same as; e.g. sadevaka with the devas Vin i.8; sadhammika having common faith DN ii.273; sajāti having the same origin Ja ii.108. Often opposed to a- and other neg. prefixes (like nir˚; ). Sometimes almost pleonastical (like sa-antara) ■ Of combinations we only mention a few of those in which a vocalic initial of the 2nd pt remains uncontracted. Other examples see under their heading in alph. order. E. g. sa -antara inside Dhp-a iii.788 (for santara Dhp 315); sa -Inda together with Indra DN ii.261, DN ii.274; AN v.325 sq.; ˚-uttara having something beyond, inferior (opp. an˚) DN i.80; DN ii.299 = MN i.59; Dhs 1292, Dhs 1596; Dhs-a 50; ˚-uttaracchada (& ˚chadana); a carpet with awnings above it DN i.7≈; ii.187 (˚ava) AN i.181; Vin i.192; DN-a i.87; -˚udaka with water, wet Vin i.46; -˚udariya born from the same womb, a brother Ja iv.417, cp. sodariya; -˚uddesa with explanation Iti 99 Vism 423 (nāma-gotta-vasena sa-udd.; vaṇṇ’ādi-vasena sākāra); -˚upanisa together with its cause, causally associated SN ii.30; -˚upavajja having a helper MN iii.266 -˚upādāna showing attachment MN ii.265; -˚upādisesa having the substratum of life remaining Snp 354; Iti 38 Ne 92. Opp. anupādisesa; -˚ummi roaring of the billows Iti 57, Iti 114Note. sa2 & sa;3 are differentiations

of one and the same sa, which is originally the deictic pronoun in the function of identity & close connection See etym. under; saṃ˚.

identical with saṃ˚

Sa4

(reflex. pron.) own MN i.366; DN ii.209; Snp 905; Ja ii.7 Ja iii.164, Ja iii.323 (loc. samhi lohite), 402 (acc. saṃ his own viz. kinsman; C = sakaṃ janaṃ); iv.249 (saṃ bhātaraṃ) Pv ii.121 = Dhp-a iii.277 (acc. san tanuṃ); instr. sena on one’s own, by oneself Ja v.24 (C. not quite to the point mama santakena). Often in composition, like sadesa one’s own country Dāvs i.10. Cp. saka.

Vedic sva & svayaṃ (= P. sayaṃ); Idg. *seṷo, *sṷe; cp. Av. hava & hva own; Gr. ἑός & ο ̔́ς his own; Lat. sui, suus; Goth. swēs own, sik = Ger. sich himself; etc.

Saṃ˚

(indecl.) prefix, implying conjunction & completeness; saṃ˚; is after vi˚; (19") the most frequent (16") of all Pāli prefixes. Its primary meaning is “together” (cp. Lat. con˚); hence arises that of a closer connection or a more accentuated action than that expressed by the simple verb (intensifying = thoroughly quite), or noun. Very often merely pleonastic, esp. in combn with other prefixes (e.g. sam-anu˚, sam-ā˚ sam-pa˚). In meaning of “near by, together” it is opposed to para˚; ; as modifying prefix it is contrary to abhi˚; and (more frequently) to vi˚; (e.g. saṃvadati → vivadati), whereas it often equals pa˚; (e.g. pamodati → sammodati), with which it is often combd as sampa˚ and also abhi˚; (e.g. abhivaḍḍhati → saṃvaḍḍhati), with which often combd as abhisaṃ˚ ■ Bdhgh & Dhpāla explain; saṃ˚; by sammā (Snp-a 151; Kp-a 209: so read for samā āgatā), suṭṭhu (see e.g. santasita, santusita) or samantā (= altogether; Snp-a 152, Snp-a 154), or (dogmatically) sakena santena samena (Kp-a 240), or as “ saṃyogaVism 495 ■ In combn with y we find both saṃy˚; and saññ˚. The usual conṭracted form before r is sā˚.

prefix; Idg. *sem one; one & the same, cp. Gr.; ὁμαλός even, α ̔́μα at one, ὁμός together; Sk. sama even, the same; samā in the same way; Av. hama same = Goth. sama, samap together; Lat. simul (= simultaneous), similis “re-sembling.” Also Sk. sa (= sa2 together = Gr. ἁ ἀ-(e.g. α ̓́κοιτις); Av. ha-; and samyak towards one point = P. sammā ■ Analogously to Lat semel “once,” simul, we find sa˚; as numeral base for “one” in Vedic sakṛt “once” = P. sakid (& sakad) sahasra 1000 = P.; sahassa, and in adv. sadā “always, lit. “in one”

Saṃyata

(& saññata) lit. drawn together; fig. restrained, self-controlled DN ii.88; SN i.79; Snp 88 Snp 156, Snp 716; Ja i.188; Vv 3411; Mil 213.

-atta having one’s self restrained, self-controlled SN i.14 (for saya˚); Snp 216, Snp 284 (ññ), 723; Pv ii.614 (ññ; = saññata-citta Pv-a 98). -ūru having the thighs pressed together, having firm thighs Ja v.89, Ja v.107 (ññ) 155 (ññ). -cārin living in self-control Dhp 104 (ññ) -pakhuma having the eyelashes close together Vv-a 162.

pp. of saṃyamati

Saṃyama

(& saññama) 1. restraint, selfcontrol, abstinence SN i.21, SN i.169; DN i.53; Vin i.3; AN i.155 sq. (kāyena, vācāya, manasā); DN iii.147; Iti 15 (ññ); Snp 264, Snp 655; MN ii.101 (sīla˚); Dhp 25 (saññama dama); DN-a i.160; Dhp-a ii.255 (= catu-pārisuddhi-sīla); Vb-a 332–⁠2. restraint in giving alms saving (of money etc.) stinginess Vin i.272; Pv ii.711 (= sankoca Pv-a 102).

fr. saṃ + yam

Saṃyamati

to practise self-control SN i.209 (pāṇesu ca saṃyamāmase, trsln “if we can keep our hands off living things”) ■ pp. saṃyata ■ Caus saññāmeti to restrain MN i.365, MN i.507; Dhp 37, Dhp 380. Cp paṭi˚.

saṃ + yamati

Saṃyamana

(nt.) fastening Ja v.202, Ja v.207.

fr. saṃ + yam

Saṃyamanī

(f.) a kind of ornament Ja v.202 (= maṇisuvaṇṇa-pavāḷa-rajata-mayāni pilandhanāni C.).

fr. last

Saṃyācikā

(f.) begging, what is begged; only in instr. ˚āya (adv.) by begging together by collecting voluntary offerings Vin iii.144 (so read for ˚āyo), 149 (expld incorrectly as “sayaṃ yācitvā”) Ja ii.282 (so read for ˚āyo).

collect. abstr. fr. saṃ + yāc

Saṃyuga

(nt.) harness Thag 659.

fr. saṃ + yuj

Saṃyuñjati

to connect, join with (instr.), unite SN i.72. Pass. saṃyujjati SN iii.70 ■ pp. saṃyutta ■ Caus. saṃyojeti (1) to put together, to endow with DN ii.355; SN v.354; Ja i.277 ■ (2) to couple, to wed someone to (instr.) Ja iii.512 (dārena); iv.7 (id.) ■ pp saṃyojita.

saṃ + yuñjati

Saṃyuta

(adj.) connected, combined Snp 574 (ññ), 1026.

saṃ + yuta, of yu

Saṃyutta

1. tied, bound, fettered MN iii.275 (cammena); SN iv.163; AN iv.216 (saṃyojanena s. by bonds to this world); Snp 194 (ññ), 300, 304; Iti 8 Sdhp 211.

2. connected with, mixed with (-˚) Ja i.269 (visa˚) ■ Cp. paṭi˚, vi˚.

pp. of saṃyuñjati

Saṃyūḷha

massed, collected, put together, composed or gathered (like a bunch of flowers DN ii.267 (gāthā); MN i.386; DN-a i.38 (spelt saṃvūḷha, i.e. saṃvyūḷha; v.l. sañaḷha i.e. sannaddha).

pp. of saṃyūhati, cp. in similar meaning viyūḷha

Saṃyūhati

to form into a mass, to ball together, to conglomerate AN iv.137 (kheḷapiṇḍaṃ). pp. saṃyūḷha.

saṃ + vyūhati

Saṃyoga

1. bond, fetter MN i.498; SN i.226; SN iii.70; SN iv.36; AN iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. vi˚); Snp 522 Snp 733; Dhp 384 (= kāmayog’ādayo saṃyogā Dhp-a iv.140)

2. union, association Ja iii.12 (ññ); Vism 495. 3. connection (within the sentence), construction Pv-a 73 (accanta˚), 135 (id.).

fr. saṃ + yuj

Saṃyojana

(nt.) bond, fetter SN iv.163 etc.; especially the fetters that bind man to the wheel of transmigration Vin i.183; SN i.23; SN v.241, SN v.251; AN i.264 AN iii.443; AN iv.7 sq. (diṭṭhi˚); MN i.483; Dhp 370; Iti 8 (taṇhā) Snp 62, Snp 74, Snp 621; Ja i.275; Ja ii.22; Ne 49; Dhp-a iii.298 Dhp-a iv.49.

The ten fetters are (1) sakkāyadiṭṭhi; (2) vicikicchā (3) sīlabbataparāmāso; (4) kāmacchando; (5) vyāpādo (6) rūparāgo; (7) arūparāgo; (8) māno; (9) uddhaccaṃ (10) avijjā. The first three are the tīṇi saṃyojanāni e.g. MN i.9; AN i.231, AN i.233; DN i.156; DN ii.92 sq., 252 iii.107, 132, 216; SN v.357, SN v.376, SN v.406; Pp 12, Pp 15 Ne 14; Dhs 1002; DN-a i.312. The seven last are the satta saṃyojanāni, Nett. 14. The first five are called orambhāgiyāni -e.g. AN i.232 sq.; AN ii.5, AN ii.133; AN v.17; DN i.156; DN ii.92, DN ii.252; MN i.432; SN v.61, SN v.69; Thig 165 Pp 17. The last five are called uddhambhāgiyāni e.g. AN v.17; SN v.61, SN v.69; Thig 167; Thag-a 159; Pp 22 Ne 14, Ne 49.

A different enumeration of the ten saṃyojanas, at Nd ii.657 = Dhs 1113, Dhs 1463 (kāmarāga, paṭigha, māna diṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāsa, bhavarāga, issā macchariya, avijjā); compare, however, Dhs 1002.

A diff. enumn of seven saṃyojanas at DN iii.254; AN iv.7, viz. anunaya˚, paṭigha˚, diṭṭhi˚, vicikicchā˚ māna˚, bhavarāga˚, avijjā˚. A list of eight is found at MN i.361 sq. Cp. also ajjhatta-saṃyojano & bahiddhāsaṃyojano; puggalo AN i.63 sq.; Pp 22; kiṃ-su-s˚; SN i.39; Snp 1108.

fr. saṃyuñjati

Saṃyojaniya

(saññ˚) (adj.) connected with the saṃyojanas, favourable to the saṃyojanas, AN i.50; SN ii.86; SN iii.166 sq.; SN iv.89, SN iv.107; Dhs 584, Dhs 1125, Dhs 1462; Dhs-a 49. Used as a noun, with dhammā understood Snp 363, Snp 375.

fr. saṃyojana

Saṃyojita

combined, connected with, mixed with Ja i.269 (bhesajja˚).

pp. of saṃyojeti, Caus. of saṃyuñjati

Saṃrakkhati

to guard, ward off Sdhp 364.

saṃ + rakkhati

Saṃrambha

impetuosity, rage Dāvs iv.34. This is the Sanskritic form for the usual P. sārambha.

saṃ + *rambha, fr. rabh, as in rabhasa (q.v.)

Saṃrāga

passion Ja iv.22. Cp. sārāga.

saṃ + rāga

Saṃrūḷha

grown together, healed Ja iii.216; Ja v.344.

pp. of saṃrūhati

Saṃrūhati

to grow Ja iv.429 (= vaḍḍhati).

saṃ + rūhati

Saṃroceti

to find pleasure in, only in aor. (poetical) samarocayi Snp 290, Snp 306, Snp 405; Ja iv.471.

saṃ + roceti

Saṃvacana

(nt.) sentence Dhs-a 52.

saṃ + vacana

Saṃvacchara

a year DN ii.327; AN ii.75; AN iv.139, AN iv.252 sq.; Dhp 108; Ja ii.80 Sdhp 239; nom. pl. saṃvaccharāni Ja ii.128.

saṃ + vacchara; cp. Vedic saṃvatsara

Saṃvaṭṭa

(m. & nt.) 1. “rolling on or forward” (opp. vivaṭṭa “rolling back”), with ref. to the development of the Universe & time (kappa) the; ascending aeon (vivaṭṭa the descending cycle), evolution Iti 99; Pp 60; Vism 419; Sdhp 484, Sdhp 485. -˚vivaṭṭa a period within which evolution & dissolution of the world takes place, a complete world-cycle (see also; vivaṭṭa DN i.14; AN ii.142; Iti 15, Iti 99; Pp 60.

saṃ + vaṭṭa;1

Saṃvaṭṭati

1. to be evolved, to be in a process of evolution (opp. vivaṭṭati in devolution) DN i.17 DN iii.84, DN iii.109; AN ii.142; DN-a i.110.

2. to fall to pieces, to come to an end (like the world’s destruction), to pass away, perish, dissolve (intrs.) Ja iii.75 (paṭhavī s.; v.l. saṃvaddh˚); Mil 287 (ākāso ˚eyya). For saṃvaṭṭ˚ at Ja i.189 read saṃvaddh˚.

saṃ + vaṭṭati

Saṃvaṭṭanika

(adj.) turning to, being reborn DN i.17.

fr. saṃvaṭṭa(na)

Saṃvaḍḍha

grown up, brought up DN i.75; DN ii.38; Pv-a 66.

pp. of saṃvaḍḍhati

Saṃvaḍḍhati

to grow up; ppr. ˚amāna (ddh.) growing up, subsisting Ja i.189 (so far ˚vaṭṭ˚). Caus. ˚vaḍḍheti to rear, nourish, bring up Ja i.231 (ppr pass. ˚vaḍḍhiyamāna).

saṃ + vaḍḍhati

Saṃvaṇṇana

(nt.) praising, praise Ja i.234.

saṃ + vaṇṇana

Saṃvaṇṇita

praised, combd with sambhāvita honoured MN i.110; MN iii.194, MN iii.223.

pp. of saṃvaṇṇeti

Saṃvaṇṇeti

to praise Vin iii.73 sq.; Ja v.292 (aor. 3rd pl. ˚vaṇṇayuṃ). Cp. BSk. saṃvarṇayati Divy 115 ■ pp. saṃvaṇṇita.

saṃ + vaṇṇeti

Saṃvattati

to lead (to), to be useful (for) AN i.54, AN i.58 (ahitāya dukkhāya); Vin i.10 = SN v.421; Iti 71 sq.; Ja i.97; Pot. saṃvatteyya Vin i.13 ■ Often in phrase nibbidāya, virāgāya… nibbānāya saṃvattati e.g. DN i.189; DN ii.251; DN iii.130; SN v.80, SN v.255; AN iii.83, AN iii.326.

saṃ + vattati

Saṃvattanika

(adj.) conducive to, involving AN ii.54, AN ii.65; Iti 82; Kv 618; Ja i.275; Ne 134 = SN v.371 As ˚iya at Pv-a 205.

fr. saṃvattati

Saṃvadati

to agree MN i.500 (opp. vivadati).

saṃ + vadati

Saṃvadana

(nt.) a certain magic act performed in order to procure harmony DN i.11; DN-a i.96 cp. Dial. i.23.

fr. saṃvadati

Saṃvaddhana

(nt.) increasing, causing to grow Ja iv.16.

fr. saṃ + vṛdh

Saṃvara

restraint DN i.57, DN i.70, DN i.89; DN ii.281 (indriya˚); iii.130, 225; AN ii.26; SN iv.189 sq.; Iti 28, Iti 96 Iti 118; Pp 59; Snp 1034; Vin ii.126, Vin ii.192 (āyatiṃ saṃvarāya “for restraint in the future,” in confession formula), Dhp 185; Ne 192; Vism 11, Vism 44; Dhp-a iii.238 Dhp-a iv.86 (˚dvārāni). The fivefold saṃvara: sīla˚, sati˚ ñāṇa˚, khanti˚, viriya˚; i.e. by virtue, mindfulness insight, patience, effort Dhs-a 351; as pātimokkha˚; etc at Vism 7; Vb-a 330 sq. -˚vinaya norm of self-control good conduct Snp-a 8. cātuyāma˚, Jain discipline M l.377.

fr. saṃ + vṛ;

Saṃvaraṇa

(nt.) covering; obstruction Dhtp 274 (as def. of root val, i.e. vṛ; ).

fr. saṃ + vṛ;

Saṃvarati

to restrain, hold; to restrain oneself Vin ii.102 (Pot. ˚vareyyāsi); Mil 152 (pāso na saṃvarati) ■ pp. saṃvuta.

saṃ + varati = vuṇāti 1

Saṃvarī

(f.) the night (poetical DN iii.196; Ja iv.441; Ja v.14, Ja v.269; Ja vi.243.

Vedic śarvarī fr. śarvara speckled; the P. form viâ sabbarī → sāvarī → saṃvarī

Saṃvasati

to live, to associate, cohabitate AN ii.57; Vin ii.237; Nd ii.423; Pp 65; Dhp 167; Dpvs x.8; Mil 250 ■ Caus. ˚vāseti same meaning Vin iv.137 ■ Cp. upa˚.

saṃ + vasati2

Saṃvāti

to be fragrant Ja v.206 (cp. vv.ll. on p. 203).

saṃ + vāyati2

Saṃvāsa

1. living with, co-residence Vin i.97; Vin ii.237; Vin iii.28; AN ii.57 sq., 187; iii.164 sq.; iv.172; Ja i.236; Ja iv.317 (piya-saṃvāsaṃ vasi lived together in harmony); Snp 283, Snp 290, Snp 335; Dhp 207, Dhp 302; Sdhp 435. 2. intimacy Ja ii.39.

3. cohabitation, sexual intercourse DN i.97; Ja i.134; Ja ii.108; Snp-a 355.

saṃ + vāsa2

Saṃvāsaka

(adj.) living together Vin ii.162; Vin iii.173.

fr. saṃvāsa

Saṃvāsiya

one who lives with somebody Snp 22; a˚-bhāva impossibility to co-reside Mil 249.

fr. saṃvāsa

Saṃvigga

agitated, moved by fear or awe, excited, stirred DN i.50; DN ii.240; AN ii.115; SN iv.290 SN v.270; Ja i.59; Mil 236; Pv-a 31 (˚hadaya).

pp. of saṃvijjati1

Saṃvijita

(med.) filled with fear or awe, made to tremble; (pass.) felt, realized Snp 935 (= saṃvejita ubbejita Nd i.406).

pp. of saṃvejeti

Saṃvijjati1

to be agitated or moved, to be stirred AN ii.114; Iti 30. pp. saṃvigga ■ Caus. saṃvejeti MN i.253; SN i.141; Vin i.32; imper. ˚vejehi SN v.270; aor. ˚vejesi Mil 236 inf. ˚vejetuṃ SN i.197; ger ˚vejetvā Ja i.327; grd. ˚vejanīya that which should cause awe, in ˚āni ṭhānāni places of pilgrimage DN ii.140; AN i.36; AN ii.120; Iti 30 ■ pp. saṃvijita & ˚vejita;.

Vedic vijate, vij; not as simple verb in P.

Saṃvijjati2

to be found, to exist, to be DN i.3; Vin ii.122; Ja i.214 (˚amāna); Pv-a 153.

Pass. of saṃvindati

Saṃvidati

to know; ger. ˚viditvā Ja iii.114; Ja v.172 ■ pp. saṃvidita.

saṃ + vidati: see vindati

Saṃvidahati

to arrange, appoint, fix, settle, provide, prepare DN i.61 (Pot. ˚eyyāma); aor. ˚vidahi Pv-a 198; inf. ˚vidhātuṃ AN ii.35, & ˚vidahituṃ Vin i.287; ger. ˚vidhāya Vin iv.62 sq., 133; Mvu 17, Mvu 37,; ˚vidahitvā Vin i.287; Vin iii.53, Vin iii.64; Ja i.59; Ja v.46; also as Caus. formn ˚vidahetvāna Ja vi.301 ■ pp. saṃvidahita & saṃvihita;.

saṃ + vidahati

Saṃvidahana

(nt.) arrangement, appointment, provision Ja ii.209; DN-a i.148; Dhs-a 111. The word is peculiar to the Commentary style.

for the usual ˚vidhāna

Saṃvidahita

arranged Vin iv.64; Dhp-a i.397.

pp. of saṃvidahati

Saṃvidita

known Snp 935.

pp. of saṃvidati

Saṃvidhātar

one who arranges or provides (cp. vidhātar) DN iii.148.

n. ag. fr. saṃvidahati

Saṃvidhāna

(nt.) arranging, providing, arrangement DN i.135; Ja i.140 (rakkhā˚).

fr. saṃvidahati

Saṃvidhāyaka

(adj.) providing, managing; f. ˚ikā Ja i.155.

saṃ + vidhāyaka

Saṃvidhāvahāra

taking by arrangement, i.e. theft committed in agreement with others Vin iii.53.

saṃvidhā (short ger. form) + avahāra

Saṃvindati

to find; ppr. (a)saṃvindaṃ Thag 717 ■ Pass. saṃvijjati (q.v.).

saṃ + vindati

Saṃvibhajati

to divide, to share, to communicate DN ii.233; Mil 94, Mil 344; inf. ˚vibhajituṃ Mil 295; Dāvs v.54 ■ pp. saṃvibhatta ■ Caus. ˚vibhājeti Iti 65.

saṃ + vibhajati

Saṃvibhatta

divided, shared Thag 9.

pp. of saṃvibhajati

Saṃvibhāga

distribution, sharing out DN iii.191; AN i.92, AN i.150; Iti 18 sq., 98, 102; Vv 375; Mil 94dāna˚; (of gifts) Ja v.331; Vism 306.

saṃ + vibhāga

Saṃvibhāgin

(adj.) generous, open-handed SN i.43 = Ja iv.110; Ja v.397 (a˚); Mil 207.

fr. saṃvibhāga

Saṃvirūḷha

(adj.) fully grown, healed up Ja ii.117.

pp. of saṃvirūhati

Saṃvirūhati

to germinate, to sprout Mil 99, Mil 125, Mil 130, Mil 375 ■ pp. saṃvirūḷha ■ Caus. ˚virūheti to cause to grow, to nourish Ja iv.429.

saṃ + virūhati

Saṃvilāpa

noisy talk; fig. for thundering SN iv.289 (abbha˚).

saṃ + vilāpa

Saṃvisati

to enter; Caus. saṃveseti (q.v.). Cp. -bhisaṃvisati.

saṃ + visati

Saṃvissajjetar

one who appoints or assigns DN-a i.112.

saṃ + vissajjetar

Saṃvissandati

to overflow MN ii.117; Mil 36.

saṃ + vissandati

Saṃvihita

arranged, prepared, provided Ja i.133 (˚ārakkha i.e. protected); in cpd. su˚; well arranged or appointed, fully provided DN ii.75; MN ii.75; DN-a i.147, DN-a i.182; ; unappointed Vin i.175; Vism 37.

pp. of saṃvidahati

Saṃvījita

fanned Dāvs v.18.

saṃ + vījita

Saṃvuta

1. closed DN i.81.

2. tied up Ja iv.361.

3. restrained, governed, (self-)controlled guarded DN i.250; DN iii.48, DN iii.97; SN ii.231; SN iv.351 sq.; AN i.7 (cittaṃ); ii.25; iii.387; Iti 96, Iti 118; Snp 340 (indriyesu) Dhp 340; DN-a i.181. asaṃvuta unrestrained SN iv.70; AN iii.387; Pp 20, Pp 24; in phrase asaṃvuṭā lokantarikā andhakārā (the world-spaces which are dark & ) ungoverned orderless, not supported, baseless DN ii.12 - su˚; well controlled Vin ii.213; Vin iv.186; SN iv.70; Snp 413; Dhp 8.

-atta self-controlled SN i.66. -indriya having the senses under control Iti 91; Pp 35. -kārin MN ii.260.

pp. of saṃvarati

Saṃvūḷha

see saṃyūḷha.

Saṃvega

agitation, fear, anxiety; thrill, religious emotion (caused by contemplation of the miseries of this world) DN iii.214; AN i.43; AN ii.33, AN ii.114; SN i.197; SN iii.85; SN v.130, SN v.133; Iti 30; Snp 935; Ja i.138 Nd i.406; Vism 135 = Kp-a 235 (eight objects inducing emotion: birth, old age, illness, death, misery in the apāyas, and the misery caused by saṃsāra in past, present & future stages); Mvu 1, Mvu 4; Mvu 23, Mvu 62; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 22, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 39 Pv-a 76.

fr. saṃ + vij

Saṃvejana

(adj.) agitating, moving Iti 30.

fr. saṃ + vij

Saṃvejaniya

(adj.) apt to cause emotion AN ii.120; Vism 238. See also saṃvijjati1.

fr. saṃvejana

Saṃvejita

stirred, moved, agitated SN i.197; Nd i.406.

pp. of saṃvejeti

Saṃvejeti

Caus. of saṃvijjati1 (q.v.).

Saṃveṭheti

to wrap, stuff, tuck in Vin iv.40.

saṃ + veṭheti

Saṃvedhita

shaken up, confused, trembling Snp 902.

saṃ + vyathita: see vyadhati

Saṃvelli

(f.) “that which is wound round,” a loin cloth Ja v.306. As saṃvelliya at Vin ii.137, Vin ii.271.

saṃ + velli, cp. vellita

Saṃvelleti

to gather up, bundle together, fold up Vism 327.

fr. saṃ + vell

Saṃvesanā

(f.) lying down, being in bed, sleeping Ja vi.551 sq., 557.

fr. saṃveseti

Saṃveseti

to lead, conduct AN i.141; Pass. saṃvesiyati to be put to bed (applied to a sick person) MN i.88 = iii. 181;D ii.24. Cp. abhi˚.

Caus. of saṃvisati

Saṃvossajjati

see samavossajjati.

Saṃvohāra

business, traffic Vin iii.239; AN ii.187 = SN i.78; AN iii.77; Snp-a 471.

saṃ + vohāra

Saṃvohārati

to trade (with); ppr. ˚vohāramāna [cp. BSk. saṃvyavahāramāna Divy 259; AN ii.188.

Denom. fr. saṃvohāra

Saṃsagga

contact, connection, association Vin iii.120; AN iii.293 sq. (˚ārāmatā); iv.87 sq., 331; Iti 70; Ja i.376; Ja iv.57; Mil 386; Nd ii.137; Vb-a 340 (an-anulomika˚); Pv-a 5 (pāpamitta˚) ■ Two kinds of contact at Nd ii.659: by sight (dassana˚) and by hearing (savaṇa˚) ■ pada˚; contact of two words, “sandhi Nd i.139; Nd ii.137 (for iti); Snp-a 28; SN ii.202; Mil 344. -˚jāta one who has come into contact Snp 36.

fr. saṃ + sṛj

Saṃsaṭṭha

1. mixed with (instr.), associating with, joined MN i.480 (opp. vi˚); AN iii.109, AN iii.116 AN iii.258 sq., 393; Pv-a 47.

2. living in society Vin i.200 Vin ii.4; Vin iv.239, Vin iv.294; DN ii.214; Kv 337 = Dhs-a 42; Dhs 1193; Ja ii.105; Dhs-a 49, Dhs-a 72; not given to society MN i.214; SN i.63; Mil 244; Vism 73.

pp. of saṃ + sṛj

Saṃsati

to proclaim, point out Ja v.77; Ja vi.533; Pot. saṃse Ja vi.181; aor. asaṃsi Ja iii.420; Ja iv.395; Ja v.66; & asāsī (Sk. aśaṃsīt) Ja iii.484 Cp. abhi˚.

Vedic śaṃsati, cp. Av. saṃhaiti to proclaim, Lat. censeo = censure; Obulg. χom to say

Saṃsatta

adhering, clinging DN i.239 (paramparā˚).

pp. of saṃ + sañj

Saṃsad

(f.) session, assembly; loc. saṃsati Ja iii.493 (= parisamajjhe C.), 495

fr. saṃ + sad

Saṃsaddati

to sound, in def. of root kitt at Dhtp 579; Dhtm 812.

saṃ + śabd

Saṃsandati

to run together, to associate DN i.248; DN ii.223; SN ii.158 = Iti 70; SN iv.379; Pp 32 ■ Caus. saṃsandeti to put together; unite, combine Ja i.403; Ja v.216; Mil 131; Dhp-a ii.12; Dhp-a iv.51.

saṃ + syand, cp. BSk. saṃsyandati Avs ii.142 sq., 188

Saṃsandanā

(f.) 1. (lit.) coming together Ja vi.414 (v.l. for T. saṃsandita).

2. (fig.) import application, reference, conclusion (lit. “flowing together”) Tikp 264. opamma˚; application of a simile “tertium comparationis” Vism 326; DN-a i.127. diṭṭha˚ (pucchā) a question with reference to observation Nd ii.s. v. pucchā; Dhs-a 55.

fr. saṃsandati

Saṃsanna

depressed, exhausted Dhp 280 (= osanna Dhp-a iii.410: see ossanna ).

pp. of saṃsīdati or saṃsandati

Saṃsappa

(adj.) creeping AN v.289.

fr. saṃ + sṛp

Saṃsappati

to creep along, to crawl, move AN v.289; Vv-a 278; Dhp-a iv.49.

saṃ + sappati

Saṃsappaniyapariyāya

, the creeping exposition, a discussion of the consequences of certain kinds of kamma AN v.288 sq.

Saṃsappin

(adj.) = saṃsappa AN iv.172.

Saṃsaya

doubt AN ii.24; Nd ii.660 (= vicikicchā etc.); Mil 94; Dhs 425.

cp. Vedic saṃśaya

Saṃsayita

(nt.) doubt Dāvs i.50.

pp. of saṃsayati = saṃ + seti of śi; in meaning = saṃsaya

Saṃsarati

to move about continuously, to come again and again Ja i.335.

2. to go through one life after the other, to transmigrate DN i.14; DN-a i.105; ppr. saṃsaranto (& saṃsaraṃ); SN iii.149; SN iv.439; Iti 109; Pv-a 166; med. saṃsaramāna Vv 197; ger ˚saritvā SN iii.212; Pp 16 ■ pp. saṃsarita & saṃsita;.

saṃ + sarati, of sṛ;

Saṃsaraṇa

(nt.) 1. moving about, running; ˚lohita blood in circulation (opp. sannicita˚; ) Vism 261 Kp-a 62; Vb-a 245.

2. a movable curtain, a blind that can be drawn aside Vin ii.153.

fr. saṃ + sṛ;

Saṃsarita

transmigrated DN ii.90; AN ii.1; Thig 496. a˚ MN i.82.

pp. of saṃsarati

Saṃsava

flowing Vv-a 227.

fr. saṃ + sru

Saṃsavaka

Name of a purgatory Vv 5212, cp. Vv-a 226 sq.

fr. saṃsava

Saṃsā̆veti

to cause to flow together, to pour into (loc.), to put in Ja v.268 (= pakkhipati C.).

fr. saṃ + sru

Saṃsādiyā

(f.) a kind of inferior rice Ja vi.530.

cp. *Sk. syavaṃ-sātikā, on which see Kern, Toev. ii.62, s. v.

Saṃsādeti

Caus. of saṃsīdati (q.v.).

Saṃsāmeti

lit. “to smoothe,” to fold up (one’s sleeping mat), to leave (one’s bed), in phrase senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā Vin ii.185; Vin iv.24; MN i.457; SN iii.95, SN iii.133; SN iv.288.

Caus. of saṃ + śam

Saṃsāyati

to taste, enjoy Ja iii.201 (aor. samasāyisuṃ: so read for samāsāsisuṃ).

saṃ + sāyati, which stands for sādati (of svad to sweeten). On y → d cp. khāyita → khādita & sankhāyita

Saṃsāra

1. transmigration, lit. faring on DN i.54; DN ii.206 (here = existence); MN i.81 (saṃsārena suddhi); SN ii.178 sq.; AN i.10; AN ii.12 = AN ii.52; Snp 517; Dhp 60; Ja i.115; Pv ii.1311; Vism 544 (in detail), 578, 603 (˚assa kāraka); Pv-a 63, Pv-a 243. For description of saṃsāra (its endlessness & inevitableness) see e.g. SN ii.178 SN ii.184 sq., 263; iii.149 sq.; Vb-a 134 (anta-virahita); anamatagga (to which add refs. Vb-a 45, Vb-a 182, Vb-a 259 Vb-a 260).

2. moving on, circulation: vacī˚; exchange of words AN i.79.

-cakka [cp. BSk. saṃsāra-cakra] the wheel of tr. Vism 198, Vism 201; Vv-a 105 = Pv-a 7. -dukkha the ill of tr Vism 531; Vb-a 145, Vb-a 149. -bhaya fear of tr. Vb-a 199. -sāgara the ocean of tr. Ja iii.241.

fr. saṃsarati

Saṃsijjhati

to be fulfilled Sdhp 451.

saṃ + sidh

Saṃsita1

= saṃsarita Ja v.56 (cira-ratta˚ = carita anuciṇṇa C.).

Saṃsita2

dependent Sdhp 306.

pp. of saṃ + śri

Saṃsiddhi

(f.) success Dhtp 420.

saṃ + siddhi

Saṃsibbita

entwined Vism 1; Mil 102, Mil 148; Dhp-a iii.198.

pp. of saṃ + sibbati

Saṃsīda

sinking (down) SN iv.180 (v.l. saṃsāda).

fr. saṃsīdati

Saṃsīdati

1. to sink down, to lose heart DN i.248; AN iii.89 = Pp 65; Thag 681; Ja ii.330.

2. to be at an end (said of a path, magga) Vin iii.131; SN i.1 ■ Caus saṃsādeti: 1. to get tired, give out MN i.214; AN i.288. 2. to drop, fail in AN iv.398 (pañhaṃ, i.e. not answer)

3. to place DN-a i.49.

saṃ + sad

Saṃsīdana

(nt.) = saṃsīda Thag 572 (ogha˚).

fr. saṃsīdati

Saṃsīna

fallen off, destroyed Snp 44 (˚patta without leaves = patita-patta C.).

saṃ + sīna, pp. of śṛ; to crush, Sk. śīrṇa

Saṃsuddha

(adj.) pure DN i.113; Snp 372, Snp 1107; Nd i.289; Nd ii.661; Ja i.2.

-gahaṇika of pure descent DN i.113; DN-a i.281.

saṃ + suddha

Saṃsuddhi

(f.) [saṃ + suddhi) purification Snp 788; Nd i.84.

Saṃsumbhati

to beat Ja vi.53, Ja vi.88 (˚amāna).

saṃ + sumbhati

Saṃsūcaka

(adj.) indicating Vv-a 244, Vv-a 302.

fr. saṃsūceti

Saṃsūceti

to indicate, show, betray Dāvs v.50; DN-a i.311.

saṃ + sūcay˚, Denom. fr. sūci

Saṃseda

sweat, moisture MN i.73; Thag-a 185.

-ja [cp. BSk saṃsvedaja Divy 627] born or arisen from moisture DN iii.230; Mil 128; Kp-a 247; Vb-a 161.

saṃ + seda

Saṃseva

(adj.) associating AN ii.245; AN v.113 sq. (sappurisa˚ & asappurisa˚); Mil 93.

fr. saṃ + sev

Saṃsevanā

(f.) associating Dhs 1326 = Pp 20.

fr. saṃsevati

Saṃsevā

(f.) worshipping, attending Mil 93 (sneha˚).

fr. saṃseva

Saṃsevita

frequented, inhabited Ja vi.539.

saṃ + sevita

Saṃsevin

(adj.) = saṃseva Ja i.488.

Saṃhata1

firm, compact Mil 416; Sdhp 388.

pp. of saṃ + han

Saṃhata2

DA i.280; see vi˚. Samhanati & samhanti;

pp. of saṃ + hṛ;

Saṃhanati & saṃhanti

1. to join together, reach to Ja v.372.

2. to suppress, allay, destroy AN iv.437 (kaṇḍuṃ) ■ pp. saṃhata.

saṃ + han

Saṃhanana

(nt.) joining together, closing DN i.11; Ja vi.65.

fr. saṃhanati

Saṃhara

collecting; dus˚; hard to collect Vin iii.148; Ja iv.36 (here as dussanghara, on which see Kern, Toev. i.121).

fr. saṃ + hṛ;

Saṃharaṇa

(nt.) collecting, gathering Dāvs v.33. Cp. upa˚; & sangharaṇa.;

fr. saṃharati

Saṃharati

1. to collect, fold up Vin i.46; Vin ii.117, Vin ii.150; MN iii.169; Ja i.66, Ja i.422; Dāvs iv.12; Pv-a 73–⁠2. to draw together Vin ii.217.

3. to gather up take up Snp-a 369 (rūpaṃ).

4. to heap up Pv iv.14 (saṃharimha = sañcinimha Pv-a 279) ■ asaṃhāriya (grd. which cannot be destroyed (see also saṃhīra ) SN v.219. Caus. II. ˚harāpeti to cause to collect, to make gather or grow Vin iv.259 (lomāni), 260 (id.) ■ Pass. saṃhīrati (q.v.) ■ pp. saṃhata. Cp. upa˚.

saṃ + harati

Saṃhasati

to laugh with MN ii.223.

san + hasati

Saṃhāni

(f.) shrinking, decrease, dwindling away DN ii.305 = MN i.49 = SN ii.2 = Dhs 644; Dhs-a 328 Cp. parihāni.

saṃ + hāni

Saṃhāra

abridgment, compilation Pv-a 114. Cp. upa˚.

fr. saṃ + hṛ;

Saṃhāraka

drawing together, a collector SN ii.185 = Iti 17. sabba˚; a kind of mixed perfume Ja vi.336.

saṃ + hāra + ka

Saṃhārima

(adj.) movable Vism 124; Snp 28, Snp 321. ; Vin iv.272.

fr. saṃ + hṛ;

Saṃhita

connected, equipped with, possessed of DN i.5; MN ii.202; SN i.103; Dhp 101 (gāthā anattha-pada˚). Often as attha˚; endowed with profit bringing advantage, profitable DN i.189; SN ii.223 SN iv.330; SN v.417; AN iii.196 sq.; AN v.81; Snp 722. Cp. upa˚.

pp. of sandahati

Saṃhīyati

see sandhīyati.

Saṃhīra

(& saṃhāriya) that which can be restrained, conquerable Thag 1248; Ja v.81. ; immovable unconquerable SN i.193; Vin ii.96; AN iv.141 sq. Thag 649; Snp 1149; Ja iv.283. See also asaṃhāriya.

grd. of saṃharati

Saṃhīrati

to be drawn away or caught in (loc.) MN iii.188 sq. (paccuppannesu dhammesu) Dhs-a 420 (id.); Ja iii.333.

Pass. of saṃharati

Saka

(adj.) own DN i.106, DN i.119, DN i.231; DN ii.173 (sakaṃ te “all be your own,” as greeting to the king); MN i.79; Vin i.3, Vin i.249 (ācariyaka); SN v.261 (id.); Snp 861; Iti 76 Nd i.252; Pv i.51 (ghara); ii.61 (bhātā) ■ Opp. assaka2-appassaka having little or nothing as one’s own (= daḷidda) AN i.261; AN ii.203; kamma-ssaka possessing one’s own kamma MN iii.203 sq.; AN v.288; Mil 65; Dhs 1366.

-gavacaṇḍa violent towards one’s own cows, harassing one’s own Pp 47.

sa4 + ka

Sakaṭa1

(m. & nt.) a cart, waggon; a cartload DN ii.110; Vin iii.114; Ja i.191; Mil 238; Pv-a 102; Vb-a 435 (simile of two carts); Snp-a 58 (udaka-bharita˚), 137 (bīja˚). sakaṭāni pajāpeti to cause the carts to go on Ja ii.296.

-gopaka the guardian of the waggon Dhp-a iv.60 -bhāra a cart-load Vv-a 79. -mukha the front or opening of the waggon, used as adj. “facing the waggon or the cart” (?) at DN ii.234, of the earth-that is, India as then known-and at DN ii.235 (comp. Mahāvastu iii.208), of six kingdoms in Northern India. At the second passage B. explains that the six kingdoms all debouched alike on the central kingdom, which was hexagonal in shape. This explanation does not fit the other passage. Could sakaṭa there be used of the constellation Rohinī, which in mediaeval times was called the Cart? Cp. Dial. ii.269. -vāha a cart-load Pv ii.75 -vyūha “the waggon array,” a wedge-shaped phalanx Ja ii.404; Ja iv.343; Vism 384.

cp. Sk. śakaṭa; Vedic śakaṭī

Sakaṭa2

see kasaṭa.

Sakaṇika

(adj.) having a mole DN i.80; DN-a i.223.

sa + kaṇa + ika

Sakaṇṭaka

(adj.) thorny, dangerous DN i.135; Thig 352; DN-a i.296.

sa + kaṇṭaka

Sakaṇṇajappaka

whispering in the ear, a method of (secretly) taking votes Vin ii.98 sq (salāka-gāha).

sa + kaṇṇa + jappa + ka

Sakatā

(f.) (-˚) one’s own nature, identity, peculiarity: see kamma-ssakatā; & adj.; ˚ssakata. It may also be considered as an abstr. formation fr kamma-ssaka.

abstr. fr. saka

Sakadāgāmin

“returning once,” one who will not be reborn on earth more than once; one who has attained the second grade of saving wisdom Vin i.293; DN i.156, DN i.229; DN iii.107; MN i.34; SN iii.168; AN i.120, AN i.232 sq.; AN ii.89, AN ii.134; AN iii.348; AN iv.292 sq., 380 v.138 sq., 372 sq.; Dhp-a iv.66.

sakad = sakid, + āgāmin

Sakadāgāmitā

(f.) the state of a “oncereturner” DN ii.206.

abstr. fr. last

Sakabala

(adj.) containing a mouthful Vin iv.195.

sa + kabala

Sakamana

is Bdhgh’s expln of attamana (q.v.), e.g. DN-a i.129, DN-a i.255.

saka + mana

Sakamma

(nt.) one’s own occupation DN i.135.

sa4 + kamma

Sakaraṇīya

(adj.) one who still has something to do (in order to attain perfection) DN ii.143; Thag 1045; Mil 138. Sakaruna-bhava

sa3 + karaṇīya

Sakaruṇa-bhāva

being full of compassion Snp-a 318.

sa3 + karuṇa + bhāva

Sakala

(adj.) all, whole, entire Vin ii.109; Vism 321; Snp-a 132; Pv-a 93, Pv-a 97, Pv-a 111. Cp. sākalya.

cp. Sk. sakala

Sakalikā

(f.) a potsherd; a splinter, bit DN ii.341; AN ii.199 = SN iv.197; SN i.27; Mil 179; MN i.259; AN v.9 (˚aggi); Ja iv.430; Mil 134 Kp-a 43 (maccha˚); Ne 23; Dhs-a 319sakalikaṃ sakalikaṃ in little pieces Vin ii.112sakalika-hīra a skewer Ja iv.29, Ja iv.30.

fr. sakala = Sk. śakala potsherd

Sakasaṭa

(adj.) faulty, wrong (lit. bitter) Mil 119 (vacana).

sa3 + k.

Sakāsa

presence; acc. sakāsaṃ towards, to Snp 326; Ja v.480; Pv-a 237; loc. sakāse in the presence of, before Ja iii.24; Ja iv.281; Ja v.394; Ja vi.282.

sa3 + k. = Sk. kāśa

Sakicca

(nt.) one’s own duty or business Vism 321 (˚pasuta).

sa4 + kicca

Sakiccaya

(nt.) = sakicca Mil 42; Dhs-a 196 (˚pasuta).

sa4 + kiccaya = kṛtya

Sakiñcana

(adj.) having something; (appld) with attachment, full of worldly attachment Snp 620; Dhp i.246; Dhp 396 (= rāg’ādīhi kiñcanehi sakiñcana Dhp-a iv.158). Sakid & Sakim

sa3 + kiñcana

Sakid & Sakiṃ

(adv.) once. (1) sakiṃ: DN ii.188; Ja i.397; Dhp-a iii.116 (sakiṃvijātā itthi primipara); once more: Mil 238; once for all: Thig 466; Dhp-a ii.44; Thag-a 284 ■ (2) sakid (in composition see also sakad -āgāmin): in sakid eva once only AN ii.238 AN iv.380; Pp 16; Pv-a 243; at once Vin i.31.

fr. sa˚ = saṃ

Sakiya

(adj.) own Ja ii.177 Ja iii.48, Ja iii.49; Ja iv.177.

fr. saka, cp. Sk. svakīya

Sakuṇa

a bird (esp. with ref. to augury) DN i.71 (pakkhin + ); Vin iii.147; SN i.197; AN ii.209 AN iii.241 sq., 368; Ja ii.111, Ja ii.162 (Kandagala); Kp-a 241 pantha˚; see under pantha ■ f. sakuṇī SN i.44. adj sakuṇa Ja v.503 (maṃsa).

-kulāvaka a bird’s nest Kp-a 56. -patha bird-course Npl. Nd i.155. -pāda bird foot Kp-a 47. -ruta the cry of birds Mil 178. -vatta the habit (i.e. life) of a bird Ja v.254. -vijjā bird craft, augury (i.e. understanding the cries of birds) DN i.9; DN-a i.93. Sakunaka = sakuna

Vedic śakuna

Sakuṇaka = sakuṇa

Snp-a 27 ■ f. sakuṇikā DN i.91; Mil 202; Ja i.171; Ja iv.290.

Sakuṇagghi

(f.) a kind of hawk (lit. “bird-killer”) SN v.146; Ja ii.59; Mil 365. Cp vyagghīnasa.

sakuṇa + ˚ghi, f. of ˚gha

Sakuṇita

at Pv-a 123 read saṅkucita.

Sakunta

a bird; a kind of vulture Snp 241; Dhp 92, Dhp 174; Ja iv.225; Ja vi.272.

cp. Sk. śakunta

Sakuntaka

= sakunta Vin i.137.

Sakumāra

(adj.) of the same age; a playmate Ja v.360, Ja v.366.

sa2 + kumāra

Sakula

a kind of fish Ja v.405.

cp. Epic Sk. śakula

Sakka

(adj.) able, possible Snp 143. sasakkaṃ (= sa3 + s.) as much as possible, as much as one is able to MN i.415, MN i.514. Sakkacca(m)

fr. śak, cp. Sk. śakya

Sakkacca(ṃ)

(adv.) respectfully, carefully, duly, thoroughly; often with uppaṭṭhahati to attend, serve with due honour ■ Vv 125; Mil 305; Ja iv.310. The form sakkaccaṃ is the older and more usual, e.g. at DN ii.356 sq.; SN iv.314; AN ii.147; AN iv.392; Vin iv.190, Vin iv.275; Thag 1054; Ja i.480; Dhp 392; Pv-a 26 Pv-a 121. The BSk. form is satkṛtya, e.g. Mvu i.10 -kārin zealous SN iii.267; Mil 94. -dāna MN iii.24.

orig. ger. of sakkaroti

Sakkata

honoured, duly attendo DN i.114, DN i.116; DN ii.167; Nd 73; Ja i.334; Mil 21; Snp-a 43 Usually combd with garukata, pūjita, mānita.

pp. of sakkaroti

Sakkati

to go; see osakkati & cp;. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 302. Other P. cpds. are ussakkati paṭisakkati;.

ṣvaṣk; Dhtp 9: gamana

Sakkatta

(nt.) Śakraship, the position as the ruler of the devas MN iii.65; Ja i.315; Vism 301 (brahmatta + ). ˚rajja a kingdom rivalling Sakka’s Ja i.315.

fr. Sakka = Indra

Sakkaroti

to honour, esteem, treat with respect, receive hospitably; often combd with garukaroti māneti, pūjeti, e.g. DN i.91, DN i.117; DN iii.84; MN i.126. ppr ˚karonto DN ii.159; Pot. ˚kareyya Iti 110; aor. ˚kari Pv-a 54; ger. ˚katvā Pp 35; Ja vi.14, & ˚kacca (q.v.) ■ pp sakkata ■ Caus. sakkāreti = sakkaroti; Mvu 32, Mvu 44 grd. sakkāreyya Thag 186 (so read for ˚kareyya).

sat + kṛ;

Sakkā

(indecl.) possible (lit. one might be able to); in the older language still used as a Pot., but later reduced to an adv. with infin. E. g. sakkā sāmaaññphalaṃpaññāpetuṃ would one be able to point out a result of samaṇaship DN i.51; khādituṃ na sakkā, one could not eat Ja ii.16; na sakkā maggo akkhātuṃ, the way cannot be shown, Mil 269; sakkā etaṃ mayā ñātuṃ? can I ascertain this? DN i.187; sakkā honti imāni aṭṭha sukhāni vindituṃ, these eight advantages are able to be enjoyed Ja i.8; sakkā etaṃ abhavissa kātuṃ, this would be possible to do, DN i.168; imaṃ sakkā gaṇhituṃ, this one we can take Ja iv.219. See also Snp-a 338, Snp-a 376 (= labbhā) Pv-a 12, Pv-a 69, Pv-a 96.

originally Pot. of sakkoti = Vedic śakyāt; cp. Prk. sakkā with Pischel’s expln in Prk. Gr. § 465. A corresponding formation, similar in meaning, is labbhā (q.v.)

Sakkāya

the body in being, the existing body or group (= -nikāya q.v.); as a t.t. in P. psychology almost equal to individuality; identified with the five khandhas MN i.299; SN iii.159; SN iv.259; AN ii.34; Thig 170, Thig 239; Dhs-a 348. See also DN iii.216 (cp. Dial. iii.2161); AN iii.293, AN iii.401; Nd i.109.

-diṭṭhi theory of soul, heresy of individuality, speculation as to the eternity or otherwise of one’s own individuality MN i.300 = MN iii.17 = DhS 1003, SN iii.16 sq In these passages this is explained as the belief that in one or other of the khandhas there is a permanent entity an attā. The same explanation, at greater length, in the Diṭṭhigata Sutta (Pts i.143–⁠151). As delusions about the soul or ghost can arise out of four sorts of bias (see abhinivesa ) concerning each of the five khandhas we have twenty kinds of s˚ diṭṭhi: fifteen of these are kinds of sakkāya-vatthukā sassata-diṭṭhi, and five are kinds of s˚-vatthukā uccheda-diṭṭhi (ibid. 149, 150) Gods as well as men are s˚ pariyāpannā SN iii.85; and so is the eye, Dhs-a 308. When the word diṭṭhi is not expressed it is often implied, Thig 199, Thig 339; Snp 231 S˚ diṭṭhi is the first Bond to be broken on entering the Path (see saṃyojana ); it is identical with the fourth kind of Grasping (see upādāna ); it is opposed to Nibbāna, SN iv.175; is extinguished by the Path, MN i.299; SN iii.159; SN iv.260; and is to be put away by insight Dhs-a 346 ■ See further: DN iii.234; AN iii.438; AN iv.144 sq.; Kv 81; Snp 950; Dhs 1003; and on term Dhs trsln § 1003; K.S. iii.80, n. 3. -nirodha the destruction of the existing body or of individuality AN ii.165 sq. AN iii.246; DN iii.216. -samudaya the rise of individuality DN iii.216; Nd i.109.

sat + kāya, cp. BSk. satkāya Divy 46; Avs i.85. See on expln of term Mrs. Rh. D. in J.R.A.S. 1894, 324; Franke Dīgha trsln p. 45; Geiger P.Gr. § 241; Kern. Toev. ii.52

Sakkāra

hospitality, honour, worship Vin i.27, Vin i.183; AN ii.203; Ja i.63; Ja ii.9, Ja ii.104; Dhp 75; Mil 386; Dhs 1121; Vism 270; Snp-a 284; Vb-a 466. ˚ṃ karoti to pay reverence, to say goodbye Dhp-a i.398. Cp. lābha.

fr. sat + kṛ;

Sakkāreti

is Caus. of sakkaroti (q.v.).

Sakkuṇeyyatta

(nt.) possibility; ; impossibility Pv-a 48.

abstr. fr. sakkuṇeyya, grd. of sakkoti

Sakkoti

to be able. Pres. sakkoti DN i.246; Vin i.31; Mil 4; Dhp-a i.200; sakkati [ = Class. Sk. śakyate] Ne 23 Pot. sakkuṇeyya Ja i.361; Pv-a 106; archaic 1st pl sakkuṇemu Ja v.24; Pv ii.81. ppr. sakkonto Mil 27-Fut. sakkhati Snp 319; sakkhīti [ = Sk. śakṣyati MN i.393; pl. 3rd sakkhinti Snp 28; Snp 2nd sg. sagghasi Snp 834; Snp 3rd sg. sakkhissati Dhp-a iv.87 ■ Aor. asakkhi DN i.96, DN i.236; Pv-a 38; sakkhi Mil 5; Ja v.116; Ja v.1st pl asakkhimha Pv-a 262, & asakkhimhā Vin iii.23; Vin iii.3rd sg also sakkuṇi Mvu 7, Mvu 13 ■ grd. sakkuṇeyya (neg. ; (im)possible Ja i.55; Pv-a 122sakka & sakkā see sep.

śak; def. Dhtp 508 etc. as “sattiyaṃ”: see satti

Sakkharā

(f.) 1. gravel, grit Vin iii.147 = Ja ii.284; Ja i.192; AN i.253; DN i.84; Pv iii.228; Dhp-a iv.87.

2. potsherd Vv-a 157; Pv-a 282 Pv-a 285.

3. grain, granule, crystal, in loṇa˚; a salt crystal SN ii.276; Dhp-a i.370; Snp-a 222.

4. (granulated) sugar Ja i.50.

cp. Vedic śarkarā gravel

Sakkharikā

(f.) in loṇa˚; a piece of salt crystal Vin i.206; Vin ii.237.

fr. sakkharā

Sakkharilla

(adj.) containing gravel, pebbly, stony AN iv.237.

= sakkharika, fr. sakkharā

Sakkhali

(& ˚ikā ) (f.) 1. the orifice of the ear: see kaṇṇa˚.

2. a sort of cake or sweetmeat (cp sanguḷikā) AN iii.76 (T. sakkhalakā; v.l. ˚likā & sankulikā); Vin iii.59; Ja ii.281.

cp. Sk. śaṣkulī

Sakkhi1

an eyewitness DN ii.237 (nom. sg. sakkhī = with his own eyes, as an eyewitness); Snp 479, Snp 921, Snp 934 (sakkhi dhammaṃ adassi where the corresp. Sk. form would be sākṣād); Ja i.74- kāya-sakkhī a bodily witness, i.e. one who has bodily experienced the 8 vimokkhas AN iv.451; Vism 93, Vism 387 Vism 659sakkhiṃ karoti [Sk. sākṣī karoti] (1) to see with one’s own eyes SN ii.255; (2) to call upon as a witness (with geName of person) Ja vi.280 (rājāno); Dhp-a ii.69 (Moggallānassa sakkhiṃ katvā); Pv-a 217 (but at 241 as “friendship”). Note. The P. form is rather to be taken as an adv. (“as present”) than adj.: sakkhiṃ sakkhi;, with reduced sakkhi˚; (cp. sakid & sakiṃ). See also; sacchi˚.

-diṭṭha seen face to face MN i.369; DN i.238; Ja vi.233 -puṭṭha asked as a witness Snp 84, Snp 122; Pp 29. -bhabbatā the state of becoming an eyewitness, of experiencing MN i.494; Dhs-a 141. -sāvaka a contemporaneous or personal disciple DN ii.153.

sa3 + akkhin; cp. Sk. sākṣin

Sakkhī

(f.) or sakkhi2 (nt.) friendship (with somebody = instr.) SN i.123 = AN v.46 (janena karoti sakkhiṃ make friends with people); Pv iv.157; iv.165 Ja iii.493; Ja iv.478. Cp. sakhya.

cp. Sk. sākhya

Sakya

: see Dictionary of Names. In cpd. ˚puttiya (belonging to the Sakya son) in general meaning of “a (true) follower of the Buddha,” AN iv.202; Vin i.44; Ud 44; ; not a follower of the B. Vin iii.25.

Sakhi

a companion, friend; nom. sakhā Ja ii.29; Ja ii.348; acc. sakhāraṃ Ja ii.348; Ja v.509;; sakhaṃ Ja ii.299; instr. sakhinā Ja iv.41; abl. sakhārasmā Ja iii.534; gen. sakhino Ja vi.478; voc. sakhā Ja iii.295; nom. pl. sakhā Ja iii.323; & sakhāro Ja iii.492 gen. sakhīnaṃ Ja iii.492; Ja iv.42; & sakhānaṃ Ja ii.228 In compn with bhū as sakhi˚ & sakhī˚;, e.g. sakhibhāva friendship Ja vi.424; Pv-a 241; & sakhībhāva Ja iii.493.

Vedic sakhi m. & f.

Sakhikā

(f.) a female friend Ja iii.533.

fr. sakhi

Sakhitā

(f.) friendship Thag 1018, Thag 1019.

abstr. fr. sakhi

Sakhila

(adj.) kindly in speech, congenial DN i.116; Vin ii.11; Ja i.202, Ja i.376; Mil 207; Pv iv.133 (= mudu Pv-a 230). Cp. sākhalya.

-vācatā use of friendly speech Dhs 1343.

fr. sakhi

Sakhī

(f.) a female friend Ja ii.27, Ja ii.348.

to sakhi

Sakhura

(adj.) with the hoofs Ja i.9; Bdhgh on MN i.78 (see M i.536).

sa3 + khura

Sakhya

(nt.) friendship Ja ii.409; Ja vi.353 sq.

Sk. sākhya; cp. sakkhī

Sagandhaka

(adj.) fragment Dhp 52.

sa3 + gandha + ka

Sagabbha

(adj.) with a foetus, pregnant Mvu 33, Mvu 46.

sa3 + gabbha

Sagaha

(adj.) full of crocodiles Iti 57, Iti 114. As sagāha at SN iv.157.

sa3 + gaha2

Sagāmeyya

(adj.) [grd. formation fr. gāma, + sa2 = saṃ˚) hailing from the same village SN i.36, SN i.60.

Sagārava

(adj.) respectful, usually combd with sappatissa & other syn., e.g. Vin i.45; Iti 10 Vism 19, Vism 221.

sa3 + gārava

Sagāravatā

(f.) respect Thag 589.

fr. sagārava

Saguṇa

(adj.) either “with the string,” or “in one”; Vin i.46 (saguṇaṃ karoti to put together, to fold up; C ekato katvā). This interpretation (as “put together”) is much to be preferred to the one given under guṇa1 1; saguṇaṃ katvā belongs to saṅghāṭiyo, and not to kāyabandhanaṃ, thus: “the upper robes are to be given, putting them into one (bundle).”

either sa3 + guṇa1 1, as given under guṇa1; or sa˚ = saṃ˚ once, as in sakṛt, + guṇa1 2

Saguḷa

a cake with sugar Ja vi.524. Cp. saṅguḷikā.

sa3 + guḷa2

Sagocara

companion, mate (lit. having the same activity) Ja ii.31.

sa2 = saṃ, + gocara

Sagotta

a kinsman Ja v.411; cp. vi.500.

sa2 = saṃ, + gotta

Sagga

1. heaven, the next world, popularly conceived as a place of happiness and long life (cp. the pop. etym. of “suṭṭhu-aggattā sagga” Pv-a 9 “rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggo ti saggo” Vism 427) usually the kām’āvacara-devaloka, sometimes also the 26 heavens (Thag-a 74). Sometimes as sagga ṭhāna (cp ˚loka ), e.g. Ja vi.210Vin i.223; DN ii.86; DN iii.52, DN iii.146 sq. MN i.22, MN i.483; SN i.12; AN i.55 sq., 292 sq.; ii.83 sq.; iii.244 253 sq.; iv.81; v.135 sq.; Snp 224 (loc. pl. saggesu); Iti 14; Pv i.13; Vism 103, Vism 199.

-āpāya heaven and hell Thig 63; Snp 647. -ārohaṇa (-sopāna) (the stairs) leading to heaven (something like Jacob’s ladder) Vism 10. -kathā discourse or talk about heaven Vin i.15 (cp. anupubbikathā) -kāya the heavenly assembly (of the gods) Ja vi.573. -dvāra heaven’s gate Vism 57. -patha = sagga Ja i.256. -pada heavenly region, heaven Ja ii.5; Ja iv.272 (= saggaloka). -magga the way to heaven Ja vi.287; Dhp-a i.4. -loka the heavenworld MN i.73; Ja iv.272. -saṃvattanika leading to heaven DN iii.66.

Vedic svarga, svar + ga

Sagguṇa

good quality, virtue Sdhp 313.

sat + guṇa

Saggh˚

see sakkoti.

Saghaccā

(f.) just or true killing Ja i.177.

sat + ghaccā

Saṅkacchā

(f.) part of a woman’s dress, bodice, girdle (?) Ja v.96 (suvaṇṇa˚).

saṃ + kacchā1

Saṅkacchika

(nt.) a part of clothing, belt, waist-cloth Vin ii.272; Vin iv.345. The C. expln is incorrect

fr. sankacchā

Saṅkaṭīra

(nt.) a dust heap DN ii.160; SN ii.270; MN i.334. Expld as “sankāra-ṭṭhāna” K.S. ii.203.

unexplained

Saṅkaḍḍhati

1. to collect MN i.135; Ja i.254; Ja iv.224; Dhp i.49; Pass. ˚khaḍḍiyati Vism 251 (ppr ˚iyamāna being collected, comprising).

2. to examine scrutinize Ja vi.351 (cintetvā ˚kaḍḍhituṃ).

saṃ + kaḍḍhati

Saṅkati

to doubt, hesitate, to be uncertain about pres. (med.) 1st sg. saṅke SN i.111; Ja iii.253 (= āsankāmi C.); vi.312 (na sanke maraṇ’āgamāya); Pot. saṅketha Ja ii.53 = Ja v.85. Pass. saṅkīyati SN iii. = Kv 141; AN iv.246.

śaṅk, Vedic śankate, cp. Lat. cunctor to hesitate; Goth. hāhan = Ags. hangon “to hang”; Oicel. hāētta danger

Saṅkathati

to name, explain. Pass. saṅkathīyati Dhs-a 390.

saṃ + kathati

Saṅkanta

gone together with (-˚), gone over to, joined Vin i.60; Vin iv.217.

pp. of sankamati

Saṅkantati

to cut all round, MN iii.275.

saṃ + kantati

Saṅkanti

(f.) transition, passage Kv 569; Vism 374 sq.

fr. sankamati

Saṅkantika

a school of thought (lit. gone over to a faction), a subdivision of the Sabbatthivādins SN v.14; Vism 374 sq.; Mvu 5, Mvu 6; Dpvs 5, 48; Mhbv 97.

fr. sankanta

Saṅkappa

thought, intention, purpose, plan DN iii.215; SN ii.143 sq.; AN i.281 AN ii.36; Dhp 74; Snp 154, Snp 1144; Nd i.616 (= vitakka ñāṇa paññā buddhi); Dhs 21; Dhp-a ii.78. As equivalent of vitakka also at DN iii.215; AN iv.385; Dhs 7kāma˚ a lustful thought AN iii.259; AN v.31. paripuṇṇa˚; having one’s intentions fulfilled MN i.192; MN iii.276; DN iii.42; AN v.92, AN v.97 sq.; sara˚; memories & hopes MN i.453; SN iv.76 vyāpāda˚, vihiṃsa˚, malicious, cruel purposes, MN ii.27 sq.; sammā˚; right thoughts or intentions, one of the angas of the 8-fold Path (ariya-magga) Vin i.10; DN ii.312; AN iii.140; Vb-a 117. Sankappa is defd at Dhs-a 124 as (cetaso) abhiniropanā, i.e. application of the mind See on term also Cpd. 238.

saṃ + kḷp, cp. kappeti fig. meaning

Saṅkappeti

1. to imagine; wish AN ii.36; MN i.402; Pp 19.

2. to determine, to think about, strive after Ja iii.449 sq.

Den. fr. sankappa

Saṅkamati

1. to go on, to pass over to (acc.), to join DN i.55 (ākāsaṃ indriyāni s.); Vin i.54 Vin ii.138 (bhikkhū rukkhā rukkhaṃ s., climb fr. tree to tree); Kv 565 sq. (jhānā jhānaṃ).

2. to transmigrate Mil 71 sq. (+ paṭisandahati) ■ grd. saṅkamanīya to be passed on or transferred Vin i.190; cīvara˚; a dress that should be handed over, which does not belong to one Vin iv.282 ■ pp. saṅkanta ■ Caus. saṅkāmeti (1) to pass over, to cause to go, to move, to shift Vin iii.49 Vin iii.58, Vin iii.59.

2. to come in together (sensations to the heart) Dhs-a 264 ■ Cp. upa˚.

saṃ + kamati

Saṅkama

a passage, bridge MN i.439; Vin iii.127; Ja iii.373 (attānaṃ ˚ṃ katvā yo sotthiṃ samatārayi); Mil 91, Mil 229.

fr. saṃ + kram

Saṅkamana

(nt.) lit. “going over,” i e. step; hence “bridge,” passage, path SN i.110; Vv 5222 775; Pv ii.78; ii.925; Ja vi.120 (papā˚). Cp. upa˚.

fr. sankamati

Saṅkampati

to tremble, shake Vin i.12; DN ii.12, DN ii.108; Ja i.25 ■ Caus. saṅkampeti id. DN ii.108.

saṃ + kampati

Saṅkara1

(fight, confusion) wrongly for saṅgara Ne 149, in quot. fr. MN iii.187.

Saṅkara2

(adj.) blissful Mhbv 4 (sabba˚).

cp. Sk. śankara

Saṅkalana

(nt.) addition DN-a i.95; MN-a i.2.

fr. saṃ + kal to produce

Saṅkalaha

inciting words, quarrel Ja v.393.

saṃ + kalaha

Saṅkasāyati

to become weak, to fail SN i.202 SN ii.277; SN iv.178; AN i.68.

fr. saṃ + kṛṣ, kasati? Or has it anything to do with kasāya?

Saṅkassara

(adj.) doubtful; wicked Vin ii.236 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.300); SN i.49 = Dhp 312 (expld as “sankāhi saritabba, āsankāhi sarita ussankita, parisankita” Dhp-a iii.485, thus taken as sankā + sṛ; by Bdhgh; of course not cogent); AN ii.239 AN iv.128, AN iv.201; SN i.66 (˚ācāra = “suspecting all” trsln) iv.180; Thag 277; Pp 27.

doubtful, if Vedic sankasuka

Saṅkā

(f.) doubt, uncertainty, fear (cp. visanka) Ja vi.158; Dhp-a iii.485.

fr. śaṅk: see sankati

Saṅkāpeti

to prepare, get ready, undertake Vin i.137 (vass’āvāsaṃ); SN iv.312.

fr. saṃ + kḷp

Saṅkāyati

to be uncertain about Vin ii.274. Cp pari˚.

Denom. fr. sankā; Dhtp 4 defines saṅk as “sankāyaṃ”

Saṅkāra

rubbish Vin i.48; Vin iv.265; Ja i.315; Ja ii.196.

-kūṭa rubbish heap, dust heap MN ii.7; Pp 33; Mil 365; Dhp-a i.174. Cp. kacavara & kattara.; -cola a rag picked up from a rubbish heap Ja iv.380. -ṭhāna dust heap Thag 1175, Ja i.244; Vism 250; Dhp-a ii.27. -dhāna id. Dhp 58. -yakkha a rubbish heap demon Ja iv.379.

fr. saṃ + kṛ;

Saṅkāsa

appearance; (-˚) having the appearance of, like, similar Ja ii.150; Ja v.71 Ja v.155, Ja v.370 (puñña˚ = sadisa C.); Bv 17, Bv 21; Mil 2.

saṃ + kāsa, of kāś, cp. okāsa

Saṅkāsana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) explanation, illustration SN v.430; Ne 5, Ne 8, Ne 38; Snp-a 445 (+ pakāsana).

fr. saṃ + kāś

Saṅkiṇṇa

mixed; impure SN iii.71; AN iv.246.

-parikha having the trenches filled; said of one who is free of saṃsāra MN i.139; AN iii.84; Nd ii.p. 161.

pp. of sankirati

Saṅkita

anxious, doubtful Ja v.85; Mvu 7, Mvu 15; Snp-a 60. Cp. pari˚, vi˚.

fr. śaṅk

Saṅkittana

(nt.) proclaiming, making known Pv-a 164.

saṃ + kittana

Saṅkitti

(f.) derivation & meaning very doubtful; Bdhgh’s expln at PugA 231 is not to be taken as reliable, viz. “sankittetvā katabhattesu hoti. dubbhikkha-samaye kira acela-kāsāvakā acelakānaṃ atthāya tato tato taṇḍul’ādīni samādapetvā bhattaṃ pacanti ukkaṭṭhâcelako tato na paṭigaṇhāti.” DN i.166 (trslnDial. i.229 “he will not accept food collected, i.e. by the faithful in time of drought”; Neumann “not from the dirty”; Franke “nichts von Mahlzeiten, für die die Mittel durch Aufruf beschafft sind”?); MN i.77; AN ii.206 Pp 55. It may be something like “convocation.”

perhaps saṃ + kitti

Saṅkin

(adj.) anxious Mvu 35, Mvu 101.

fr. śaṅk

Saṅkiya

(adj.) 1. apt to be suspected Iti 67.

2. anxious Ja i.334.

grd. fr. śankati

Saṅkiraṇa

(nt.) an astrological t.t., denoting the act of or time for collecting or calling in of debts (Bdhgh; doubtful) DN i.11; DN-a i.96; cp Dial. i.23.

fr. saṃ + kirati

Saṅkirati

to mix together; Pass. saṅkīyati (q.v.); pp. saṅkiṇṇa.

saṃ + kirati

Saṅkiliṭṭha

stained, tarnished, impure, corrupt, foul DN i.247; SN ii.271; AN iii.124; AN v.169; Dhp 244; Ja ii.418; Dhs 993, Dhs 1243; Pv iv.123 (kāyena vācāya ca) Dhs-a 319.

pp. of sankilissati

Saṅkilissati

to become soiled or impure DN i.53; SN iii.70; Dhp 165; Ja ii.33, Ja ii.271 ■ pp. saṅkiliṭṭha ■ Caus. saṅkileseti.

saṃ + kilissati, cp. BSk. sankliśyati Divy 57

Saṅkilissana

(nt.) staining, defiling; getting defiled Vv-a 329.

fr. sankilissati

Saṅkilesa

impurity, defilement, corruption, sinfulness Vin i.15; DN i.10, DN i.53, DN i.247 (opp. visuddhi) MN i.402; SN iii.69; AN ii.11; AN iii.418 sq.; AN v.34; Ja i.302; Dhs 993, Dhs 1229; Ne 100; Vism 6, Vism 51, Vism 89; Dhs-a 165.

saṃ + kilesa

Saṅkilesika

(adj.) baneful, sinful DN i.195; DN iii.57; AN ii.172; Dhs 993 (cp. Dhs-a 345); Tikp 333 353.

fr. sankilesa

Saṅkīyati

to become confused or impure SN iii.71; AN ii.29; AN iv.246.

Pass. of sankirati, saṃ + kīr; Sk. ˚kīryate → *kiyyati → P. ˚kīyati

Saṅkīḷati

to play or sport DN i.91; AN iv.55, AN iv.343; DN-a i.256.

saṃ + kīḷati

Saṅku

a stake, spike; javelin MN i.337; SN iv.168; Ja vi.112; Dhp-a i.69ayo˚; an iron stake AN iv.131.

-patha a path full of stakes & sticks Vv 84;11; Ja iii.485 Ja iii.541; Mil 280; Vism 305. -sata a hundred sticks hundreds of sticks Ja vi.112; Vism 153 (both passages same simile with the beating of an ox-hide). -samāhata set with iron spikes, Name of a purgatory MN i.337; Ja vi.453.

cp. Vedic śanku

Saṅkuka

a stake Vv-a 338. Cp. khāṇuka.

fr. sanku

Saṅkucati

to become contracted, to shrink Dhs-a 376 ■ pp. ˚kucita ■ Caus. ˚koceti.

saṃ + kucati: see kuñcita

Saṅkucita

shrunk, contracted, clenched (of the first: ˚hattha) Ja i.275; Ja vi.468 (˚hattha, opposed to pasārita-hattha); DN-a i.287; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 124.

pp. of sankucati

Saṅkuṭika

doubled up Ja ii.68; cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 102.

fr. saṃ + *kuṭ kuc, cp. kuṭila

Saṅkuṭita

doubled up, shrivelled, shrunk; Ja ii.225; Mil 251, Mil 362; Dhs-a 376; Vism 255 (where Kp-a reads bahala ); Vb-a 238.

= last

Saṅkuṭila

(adj.) curved, winding Mil 297.

saṃ + kuṭila

Saṅkuṇḍita

contorted, distorted Pv-a 123.

pp. of saṃ + kuṇḍ: see kuṇḍa

Saṅkuddha

angry DN ii.262.

saṃ + kuddha

Saṅkupita

shaken, enraged SN i.222.

saṃ + kupita

Saṅkuppa

(adj.) to be shaken, movable; ; immovable Thag 649; Snp 1149.

saṃ + kuppa

Saṅkula

(adj.) crowded, full Sdhp 603.

saṃ + kula

Saṅkuli

a kind of cake Ja vi.580.

cp. sakkhali 2 & sanguḷikā

Saṅkulya

(nt.) = saṅkuli Ja vi.524.

Saṅkusaka

(adj.) contrary; neg. ; Ja vi.297 (= appaṭiloma C.).

cp. Sk. sankasuka crumbling up

Saṅkusumita

(adj.) flowering, in blossom Ja v.420; Mil 319.

saṃ + kusumita

Saṅketa

intimation, agreement, engagement, appointed place, rendezvous Vin i.298; Mil 212; Ne 15, Ne 18; cp. Cpd. 6, 33. saṅketaṃ gacchati to keep an appointment, to come to the rendezvous Vin ii.265. asaṅketena without appointing a place Vin i.107. vassika˚; the appointed time for keeping the rainy season Vin i.298.

-kamma agreement Vin iii.47, Vin iii.53, Vin iii.78.

saṃ + keta: see ketu

Saṅketana

(nt.) = saṅketa, ˚ṭṭhāna place of rendezvous Dhp-a ii.261.

Saṅkeḷāyati

to amuse oneself (with) AN iv.55.

saṃ + keḷāyati

Saṅkoca

contraction (as a sign of anger or annoyance), grimace (mukha˚) Pv-a 103; also as hattha˚; etc. at Pv-a 124.

saṃ + koca, of kuñc: see kuñcita

Saṅkocana

(nt.) = saṅkoca Ja iii.57 (mukha˚); Dhp-a iii.270; Dhtp 809.

Saṅkoceti

to contract Ja i.228; Dhs-a 324.

Caus. of sankucati

Saṅkopa

see sankhepa.

Saṅkha1

a shell conch; mother-of-pearl; a chank, commonly used as a trumpet DN i.79; DN ii.297 = MN i.58; AN ii.117; AN iv.199; Vv 8110; Ja i.72; Ja ii.110; Ja vi.465, Ja vi.580; Mil 21 (dhamma˚) Dhp-a i.18. Combined with paṇava (small drum) Vism 408; Ja vi.21; or with bheri (large drum) Mil 21; Vism 408.

-ūpama like a shell, i.e. white Ja v.396, cp. vi.572 -kuṭṭhin a kind of leper; whose body becomes as white as mother-of-pearl Dhp-a i.194, Dhp-a i.195. -thāla mother ofpearl (shell-) plate Vism 126 (sudhota˚), 255. -dhama a trumpeter DN i.259 = MN ii.19; MN ii.207 = SN iv.322 -dhamaka a conch blower, trumpeter Ja i.284; Ja vi.7 -nābhi a kind of shell Vin i.203; Vin ii.117. -patta motherof-pearl Dhp-a i.387. -muṇḍika the shell-tonsure, a kind of torture MN i.87; AN i.47; AN ii.122. -mutta mother-ofpearl Ja v.380 (C expls as “shell-jewel & pearl-jewel”) vi.211, 230. -likhita polished like mother-of-pearl bright, perfect DN i.63, DN i.250; SN ii.219; AN v.204; Vin i.181 Pp 57; DN-a i.181; Dhp-a iv.195. See also under likhita & cp. Franke,; Wiener Zeitschrift 1893, 357. -vaṇṇa pearl-white Ja iii.477; MN i.58 = AN iii.324. -sadda the sound of a chank AN ii.186; Vism 408; Dhs 621. -silā “shell-stone,” a precious stone, mother-of-pearl (? Ud 54; Ja iv.85; Pv ii.64. Frequent in BSk., e.g. Avs i.184, Avs i.201, Avs i.205; Divy 291.

cp. Vedic śankha; Gr. κόγξος shell, measure of capacity, & κόξλος; Lat. congius a measure

Saṅkha2

a water plant (combd with sevāla ) Mil 35. See detail under paṇṇaka 2.

etym.?

Saṅkhata

1. put together, compound; conditioned, produced by a combination of causes, “created,” brought about as effect of actions in former births SN ii.26; SN iii.56; Vin ii.284; Iti 37, Iti 88; Ja ii.38; Ne 14; Dhs 1085; Dhs-a 47. As nt. that which is produced from a cause, i.e. the saṅkhāras SN i.112; AN i.83, AN i.152; Ne 22. asaṅkhata not put together, not proceeding from a cause Dhs 983 (so read for sankhata), 1086; Ep. of nibbāna “the Unconditioned” (& therefore unproductive of further life AN i.152; SN iv.359 sq.; Kv 317 sq.; Pv iii.710 (= laddhanāma amataṃ Pv-a 207); Mil 270; Dhs 583 (see trsln ibid.), 1439. The discernment of higher jhāna- states as saṅkhata is a preliminary to the attainment of Arahantship MN iii.244. Cp. abhi˚; visankhita; visankhāra

2. cooked, dressed Mvu 32, Mvu 39.

3. embellished Mvu 22, Mvu 29.

-lakkhaṇa properties of the sankhata, i.e. production decay and change AN i.152; Vv-a 29.

pp. of sankharoti; Sk. saṃskṛta

Saṅkhati

(f.) cookery MN i.448.

cp. Sk. saṃskṛti

Saṅkhaya

destruction, consumption, loss, end Vin i.42; DN ii.283; MN i.152; SN i.2, SN i.124; SN iv.391; Iti 38; Dhp 282 (= vināsa Dhp-a iii.421), 331; Ja ii.52 Ja v.465; Mil 205, Mil 304.

saṃ + khaya

Saṅkharoti

to put together, prepare, work Pv-a 287. a-saṅkhārāna SN i.126. Ger. saṅkharitvā SN ii.269 (v.l. sankhāditvā, as is read at id. p. Vin ii.201). Cp abhi˚ ■ pp. saṅkhata.

saṃ + kṛ;

Saṅkhalā

(f.) a chain Thig 509. aṭṭhi˚; a chain of bones, skeleton AN iii.97. As ˚kaṅkalā at Thig 488.

cp. Sk. śṛnkhalā

Saṅkhalikā

(f.) a chain SN i.76; Ja iii.168; Ja vi.3; Nd ii.304iii; Mil 149, Mil 279; Dhp-a iv.54; Pv-a 152 Sometimes saṅkhalika (esp. in composition), e.g. Ja iii.125 (˚bandhana); vi.3; Mil 279aṭṭhi˚; a chain of bones, a skeleton [cp. BSk. asthi-sankhalikā Mvu i.21] DN ii.296 = MN i.58; Vin iii.105; Ja i.433; Pv ii.1211 Dhp-a iii.479deva˚; a magic chain Ja ii.128; Ja v.92.

fr. sankhalā

Saṅkhā

(f.) & Saṅkhyā (f.) 1. enumeration, calculation, estimating DN ii.277; MN i.109; Mil 59 Mil 2. number Dāvs i.25.

3. denomination, definition word, name (cp. on term K.S. i.321) SN iii.71 sq.; SN iv.376 sq.; Nd ii.617 (= uddesa gaṇanā paññatti); Dhs 1306; Mil 25saṅkhaṃ gacchati to be styled, called or defined; to be put into words DN i.199, DN i.201; Vin ii.239; MN i.190, MN i.487; AN i.68, AN i.244 = AN ii.113; Pp 42; Ne 66 sq. Vism 212, Vism 225, Vism 235, Vism 294 (khy); Snp-a 167 (khy); Dhs-a 11 (khy). saṅkhaṃ gata (cp. sankhāta) is called DN-a i.41 (uyyānaṃ Ambalaṭṭhikā t’eva s. g.). saṅkhaṃ na upeti (nopeti) cannot be called by a name, does not count cannot be defined Iti 54; Snp 209, Snp 749, Snp 911, Snp 1074; Nd i.327; Nd ii.617.

fr. saṃ + khyā

Saṅkhāta

agreed on, reckoned; (-˚) so-called, named DN i.163 (akusala˚ dhammā); iii.65 133 = Vin iii.46 (theyya˚ what is called theft); DN-a i.313 (the sambodhi, by which is meant that of the three higher stages); Dhs-a 378 (khandha-ttaya˚ kāya, cp. Expos. ii.485); Pv-a 40 (medha˚ paññā), 56 (hattha˚ pāṇi), 131 (pariccāga˚ atidāna), 163 (caraṇa˚ guṇa).

-dhamma one who has examined or recognized the dhamma (“they who have mastered well the truth of things” K.S. ii.36), an Ep. of the arahant SN ii.47; SN iv.210; Snp 70 (˚dhammo, with expln Nd ii.618b: “vuccati ñāṇaṃ” etc.; “sankhāta-dh. = ñāta-dhammo,” of the paccekabuddha), 1038 (˚dhammā = vuccanti arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd ii.618a), Dhp 70 (T. sankhata˚, but Dhp-a ii.63 sankhāta˚).

pp. of sankhāyati

Saṅkhādati

to masticate Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269 (reads ˚kharitvā); AN iii.304 sq.; Ja i.507 ■ pp ˚khādita.

saṃ + khādati

Saṅkhādita

chewed, masticated Kp-a 56, Kp-a 257; Vb-a 241 (where Vism 257 reads ˚khāyita ).

pp. of sankhādati

Saṅkhāna1

(nt.) & Saṅkhyāna (nt.) calculation, counting DN i.11; MN i.85; DN-a i.95 Dhtp 613 (khy).

fr. saṃ + khyā, cp. sankhā

Saṅkhāna2

(nt.) a strong leash Thag-a 292 (where Thig 509 reads saṅkhalā ).

?

Saṅkhāyaka

a calculator SN iv.376.

fr. saṃ + khyā

Saṅkhāyati

& Saṅkhāti 1. to appear Ja v.203 (˚āti).

2. to calculate Snp p.126 (inf. ˚khātuṃ); Dhp 196. ger. saṅkhāya having considered, discriminately carefully, with open mind DN ii.227; DN iii.224 (paṭisevati etc.: with ref. to the 4 apassenāni); SN i.182; Snp 209, Snp 391 Snp 749, Snp 1048 (= jānitvā etc. Nd ii.619); Nd i.327; Dhp 267 (= ñāṇena Dhp-a iii.393); Iti 54. saṅkhā pi deliberately MN i.105 sq.

saṃ + khyā

Saṅkhāyita

= sankhādita; Vism 257.

Saṅkhāra

one of the most difficult terms in Buddhist metaphysics, in which the blending of the subjective-objective view of the world and of happening peculiar to the East, is so complete, that it is almost impossible for Occidental terminology to get at the root of its meaning in a translation. We can only convey an idea of its import by representing several sides of its application, without attempting to give a “word” as a def. trsln ■ An exhaustive discussion of the term is given by Franke in his Dīgha translation (pp. 307 sq. esp. 311 sq.); see also the analysis in Cpd. 273–⁠276 ■ Lit “preparation, get up”; appld: coefficient (of consciousness as well as of physical life, cp. viññāṇa), constituent constituent potentiality; (pl.) synergies, cause-combination, as in SN iii.87; discussed, B. Psy., p. 50 sq. (cp. Dhs-a 156, where paraphrased in defn of sa-saṅkhāra with “ussāha, payoga, upāya, paccaya-gahaṇa” ); composition aggregate. 1. Aggregate of the conditions or essential properties for a given process or result-e.g. (i.) the sum of the conditions or properties making up or resulting in life or existence; the essentials or “element” of anything (-˚), e.g. āyusaṅkhāra, life-element DN ii.106; SN ii.266; Pv-a 210; bhavasankhāra, jīvitasaṅkhāra DN ii.99, DN ii.107. (ii.) Essential conditions, antecedents or synergy (co-ordinated activity), mental coefficients requisite for act, speech, thought: kāya˚, vacī˚ citta˚, or mano˚, described respectively as “respiration,” “attention and consideration,” “percepts and feelings,” “because these are (respectively) bound up with,” or “precede” those MN i.301 (cp. 56); SN iv.293 Kv 395 (cp. trsln 227); Vism 530 sq.; Dhs-a 8; Vb-a 142 sq.

2. One of the five khandhas, or constitutional elements of physical life (see khandha), comprising all the citta-sampayutta-cetasikā dhammā-i.e. the mental concomitants, or adjuncts which come, or tend to come, into consciousness at the uprising of a citta or unit of cognition Dhs 1 (cp. MN iii.25). As thus classified, the saṅkhāra’s form the mental factor corresponding to the bodily aggregate or rūpakkhandha, and are in contrast to the three khandhas which represent a single mental function only. But just as kāya stands for both body and action, so do the concrete mental syntheses called saṅkhārā tend to take on the implication of synergies, of purposive intellection, connoted by the term abhisaṅkhāra, q.v ■ e.g. MN iii.99, where saṅkhārā are a purposive, aspiring state of mind to induce a specific rebirth; SN ii.82, where puññaṃ opuññaṃ, āṇeñjaṃ s. abhisankharoti, is, in DN iii.217 & Vb 135, catalogued as the three classes of abhisankhāra SN ii.39, SN ii.360; AN ii.157, where s. is tantamount to sañcetanā; Mil 61, where s., as khandha, is replaced by cetanā (purposive conception). Thus, too, the ss. in the Paṭiccasamuppāda formula are considered as the aggregate of mental conditions which, under the law of kamma, bring about the inception of the paṭisandhiviññāṇa, or first stirring of mental life in a newly begun individual. Lists of the psychologically, or logically distinguishable factors making up the composite saṅkhārakkhandha, with constants and variants, are given for each class of citta in Dhs 62, etc. (N.B ■ Read cetanā for vedanā, § 338. Phassa and cetanā are the two constant factors in the s-kkhandha. These lists may be compared with the later elaboration of the saṅkhāra-elements given at Vism 462 sq.

3. saṅkhārā (pl.) in popular meaning In the famous formula (and in many other connections as e.g. sabbe saṅkhārā ) “aniccā vata sankhārā uppādavaya-dhammino” (D ii.157; SN i.6, SN i.158, SN i.200; SN ii.193 Thag 1159; Ja i.392, cp. Vism 527), which is rendered by Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren, p 385 e.g. ) as “O, transient are our life’s experiences! Their nature ‘tis to rise and pass away,” we have the use of s. in quite a general popular sense of “life, physical or material life”; and sabbe saṅkhārā means “everything, all physical and visible life, all creation.” Taken with caution the term “creation” may be applied as t.t. in the Paṭiccasamuppāda, when we regard avijjā as creating, i.e. producing by spontaneous causality the saṅkhāras, and saṅkhārā as “natura genita atque genitura” (the latter with ref. to the foll. viññāṇa). If we render it by “formations” (cp. Oldenberg’s “Gestaltungen,” Buddha 71920, p. 254), we imply the mental “constitutional element as well as the physical, although the latter in customary materialistic popular philosophy is the predominant factor (cp. the discrepancies of “life eternal and “life is extinct” in one & the same European term) None of the “links” in the Paṭicca-samuppāda meant to the people that which it meant or was supposed to mean in the subtle and schematic philosophy (dhammā duddasā nipuṇā!) of the dogmatists ■ Thus saṅkhārā are in the widest sense the “world of phenomena” (cp below ˚loka), all things which have been made up by pre-existing causes ■ At Pv-a 71 we find saṅkhārā in lit. meaning as “things” (preparations) in defn of ye keci (bhogā) “whatever.” The sabbe s. at SN ii.178 (trsln “all the things of this world”) denote all 5 aggregates exhausting all conditioned things; cp. Kv 226 (trsln “things”); Mvu iv.66 (: the material and transitory world); Dhp 154 (vi-sankhāragataṃ cittaṃ = mind divested of all material things); Dhs-a 304 (trsln “kamma activities,” in connection avijjā-paccaya-s˚); Cpd. 211 n. 3 ■ The defn of saṅkhārā at Vism 526 (as result of avijjā & cause of viññāṇa in the P ■ S.) is: sankhataṃ abhisankharontī ti sankhārā. Api ca: avijjā-paccayā sankhārā sankhāra-saddena āgata-sankhārā ti duvidhā sankhārā; etc. with further def. of the 4 sankhāras. 4. Var. passages for sankhāra in general: DN ii.213 DN iii.221 sq., MN ii.223 (imassa dukkha-nidānassa sankhāraṃ padahato sankhāra-ppadhānā virāgo hoti); SN iii.69 (ekanta-dukkhā sankhārā); iv.216 sq. (sankhārāṇaṃ khaya-dhammatā; id. with vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha etc.); Snp 731 (yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti sabbaṃ sankhāra-paccayā; sankhārānaṃ nirodhena n’atthi dukkhassa sambhavo); Vism 453, Vism 462 sq. (the 51) 529 sq.; Dhp-a iii.264, Dhp-a iii.379; Vb-a 134 (4 fold), 149 (3 fold), 192 (āyūhanā); Pv-a 41 (bhijjana-dhammā). Of passages dealing with the sankhāras as aniccā vayadhammā, anattā, dukkhā etc. the foll. may be mentioned: Vin i.13; SN i.200; SN iii.24; SN iv.216, SN iv.259 SN v.56, SN v.345; MN iii.64, MN iii.108; AN i.286; AN ii.150 sq.; AN iii.83 AN iii.143; AN iv.13, AN iv.100; Iti 38; Dhp 277, Dhp 383; Pts i.37, Pts i.132 Pts ii.48; Pts ii.109 sq.; Nd ii.444, Nd ii.450; also Nd ii.p. 259 (s. v saṅkhārā ).

-upekkhā equanimity among “things” Vism 161 Vism 162. -ūpasama allayment of the constituents of life Dhp 368, Dhp 381; cp. Dhp-a iv.108. -khandha the aggregate of (mental) coefficients DN iii.233; Kv 578; Tikp 61; Dhs-a 345; Vb-a 20, Vb-a 42. -dukkha the evil of material life, constitutional or inherent ill Vb-a 93 (in the classification of the sevenfold sukkha). -paccayā (viññāṇaṃ conditioned by the synergies (is vital consciousness), the second linkage in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.) Vism 577; Vb-a 152 sq. -padhāna concentration on the sankhāras MN ii.223. -majjhattatā = ˚upekkhā Vb-a 283. -loka the material world, the world of formation (or phenomena), creation, loka “per se,” as contrasted to satta-loka, the world of (morally responsible beings, loka “per hominem” Vism 205; Vb-a 456; Snp-a 442.

fr. saṃ + kṛ; not Vedic, but as saṃskāra Epic & Class. Sk. meaning “preparation” and “sacrament, also in philosophical literature “former impression, disposition ” cp. vāsanā

Saṅkhāravant

(adj.) having sankhāras AN ii.214 = Dhs 1003.

fr. sankhāra

Saṅkhitta

1. concise, brief Mil 227; Dhs-a 344; instr. saṅkhittena in short, concisely (opp vitthārena) Vin i.10; DN ii.305; SN v.421; Pp 41 Cp. BSk. sankṣiptena Divy 37 etc.

2. concentrated attentive DN i.80 (which at Vism 410 however is expld as “thīna-middh’ ânugata”); SN ii.122; SN v.263; DN ii.299; MN i.59.

3. contracted, thin, slender: ˚majjhā of slender waist Ja v.155 ■ Cp. abhi˚.

pp. of sankhipati

Saṅkhipati

1. to collect, heap together Mvu 1, Mvu 31.

2. to withdraw, put off Dāvs iv.35. 3. to concentrate Ja i.82.

4. to abridge, shorten. pp. saṅkhitta.

saṃ + khipati

Saṅkhippa

(adj.) quick Ja vi.323. Sankhiya-dhamma

saṃ + khippa

Saṅkhiyā-dhamma

form of talk, the trend of talk DN i.2; DN-a i.43. Cp. saṅkhyā.

Saṅkhubhati

to be shaken, to be agitated, to stir Ja i.446 (ger. ˚khubhitvā); Dhp-a ii.43, Dhp-a ii.57; aor ˚khubhi Pv-a 93 ■ pp. saṅkhubhita ■ Caus. saṅkhobheti to shake, stir up, agitate Ja i.119, Ja i.350; Ja ii.119.

saṃ + khubbati

Saṅkhubhita

shaken, stirred Ja iii.443.

pp. of sankhubhati

Saṅkhepa

1. abridgment, abstract, condensed account (opp. vitthāra ), e.g. Vism 532, Vism 479; Dhp i.125 Kp-a 183; Dhs-a 344; Snp-a 150, Snp-a 160, Snp-a 314; Vb-a 47 Cp. ati˚.

2. the sum of, quintessence of; instr. ˚ena (adv.) by way of, as if, e.g. rāja˚ as if he were king DN-a i.246; bhūmi-ghara˚ in the shape of an earth house DN-a i.260.

3. group, heaping up, amassing, collection pabbata-saṅkhepe in a mountain glen (lit. in the midst of a group of mountains) DN i.84; AN iii.396. bhava˚ amassing of existences Ja i.165 sq., 366, 463; ii.137. 4. aṭavi˚; at AN i.178; AN iii.66 is probably a wrong reading for ˚saṅkopa “inroad of savage tribes.”

saṃ + khepa

Saṅkheyya1

(adj.) calculable; only neg. ; incalculable SN v.400; AN iii.366; Pv-a 212 -˚kāra acting with a set purpose Snp 351 ■ As grd. of saṅkharoti: see upa˚.

grd. of sankhāyati

Saṅkheyya2

(nt.) a hermitage, the residence of Thera Āyupāla Mil 19, Mil 22 etc.

Saṅkhobha

shaking, commotion, upsetting, disturbance Ja i.64; Sdhp 471.

san + khobha

Saṅkhobheti

see sankhubhati.

Saṅga

cleaving, clinging, attachment, bond SN i.25, SN i.117 sq.; AN iii.311; AN iv.289; Dhp 170 Dhp 342, etc.; Snp 61, Snp 212, Snp 386, Snp 390, Snp 475, etc.; Dhs 1059; Dhs-a 363; Ja iii.201; the five sangas are rāga, dosa moha, māna, and diṭṭhi, Thag. 633 = Dhp. 370; Dhp-a iv.187; seven sangas, It. 94; Nd i.91, Nd i.432; Nd ii.620.

-ātiga one who has overcome attachment, free from attachment, an Arahant MN i.386; SN i.3, SN i.23; SN iv.158; Iti 58; Snp 250, Snp 473, Snp 621; Dhp-a iv.159.

fr. sañj: see sajjati1

Saṅgacchati

to come together, to meet with; ger. ˚gamma Iti 123; & ˚gantva Snp 290 ■ pp saṅgata.

saṃ + gacchati

Saṅgaṇa

(adj.) [sa + angaṇa) sinful Snp 279. Cp. sāngaṇa.

Saṅgaṇikā

(f.) communication, association, society Vin i.45; AN iii.256; Ja i.106.

-ārāma delighting in society DN ii.78; MN iii.110 Vb-a 474. -ārāmatā delight in company DN ii.78; MN iii.110; AN iii.116, AN iii.293 sq., 310, 422. -rata fond of society DN ii.78; Snp 54; cp. sangaṇike rata Thag 84 -vihāra (sangaṇika˚) living in society AN iii.104; AN iv.342.

saṃ + gaṇa + ikā, cp. BSk. sangaṇikā Mvu ii.355; Divy 464

Saṅgaṇha

(adj.) showing kindness, helping Vv-a 59 (˚sīla).

fr. saṃ + grah

Saṅgaṇhāti

1. to comprise Pv-a 80, Pv-a 117; Snp-a 200 (ger. ˚gahetvā), 347 (˚gaṇhitvā).

2. to collect Mvu 10, Mvu 24.

3. to contain, include Mil 40.

4. to compile, abridge Mvu 37, Mvu 244.

5. to take up; to treat kindly, sympathize with, favour, help, protect Vin i.50; Ja ii.6; Ja iv.132; Ja v.426 (aor. ˚gaṇhi), 438 (to favour with one’s love), 510; Mil 234; Kp-a 160. aor. saṅgahesi Mvu 38, Mvu 31; fut. ˚gahissati Ja vi.392 ger. ˚gahetvā Mvu 37, Mvu 244; grd. ˚gahetabba Vin i.50 ppr. Pass. ˚gayhamāna Dhs-a 18 ■ pp. saṅgahita. Caus. II. saṅgaṇhāpeti: see pari˚ (e.g. Ja vi.328).

saṃ + gaṇhāti

Saṅgata

1. come together, met Snp 807, Snp 1102 (= samāgata samohita sannipātita Nd ii.621); nt saṅgataṃ association Dhp 207.

2. compact, tightly fastened or closed, well-joined Vv 642 (= nibbivara Vv-a 275).

pp. of sangacchati

Saṅgati

(f.) 1. meeting, intercourse Ja iv.98; Ja v.78, Ja v.483. In defn of yajati (= service?) at Dhtp 62 & Dhtm 79.

2. union, combination MN i.111; SN ii.72; SN iv.32 sq., 68 sq.; Vb 138 (= Vb-a 188). 3. accidental occurrence DN i.53; DN-a i.161.

fr. sangacchati

Saṅgatika

kalyāṇa˚, pāpa˚, united with, MN ii.222, MN ii.227.

adj.

Saṅgama

1. meeting, intercourse, association Snp 681; Ja ii.42; Ja iii.488; Ja v.483.

2. sexual intercourse MN i.407; Ja iv.106.

fr. saṃ + gam

Saṅgara

1. a promise, agreement Ja iv.105, Ja iv.111, Ja iv.473; Ja v.25, Ja v.479 saṅgaraṃ karoti to make a compact Vin i.247; Ja iv.105 Ja v.479.

2. (also nt.) a fight MN iii.187 = Ne 149; SN v.109.

fr. saṃ + gṛ1 to sing, proclaim, cp. gāyati & gīta

Saṅgaha1

1. collecting, gathering, accumulation Vin i.253; Mvu 35, Mvu 28.

2. comprising collection, inclusion, classification Kv 335 sq. (˚kathā) cp. Kvu. trsln 388 sq.; Vism 191, Vism 368 (eka˚); ˚ṃ gacchati to be comprised, included, or classified Snp-a 7, Snp-a 24, Snp-a 291

3. inclusion, i.e. constitution of consciousness, phase Mil 40.

4. recension, collection of the Scriptures Mvu 4, Mvu 61; Mvu 5, Mvu 95; Mvu 38, Mvu 44; DN-a i.131.

5. (appld) kind disposition, kindliness, sympathy, friendliness, help assistance, protection, favour DN iii.245; Snp 262, Snp 263; AN i.92; Ja i.86 sq.; Ja iii.471; Ja vi.574; DN-a i.318; Vv-a 63 Vv-a 64; Pv-a 196 (˚ṃ karoti). The 4 saṅgaha-vatthūni or objects (characteristics) of sympathy are: dāna, peyyavajja atthacariyā, samānattatā, or liberality, kindly speech, a life of usefulness (Rh. D. at Dial. iii.145 sagacious conduct; 223: justice), impartiality (? better as state of equality, i.e. sensus communis or feeling of common good). The BSk. equivalents (as sangrahavastūni) are dāna, priyavākya, tathārthacaryā, samānasukha-duḥkatā Mvu i.3; and d., p., arthakriyā samānārthatā (= samāna + artha + tā) Lal 30 Cp. Divy 95, Divy 124, Divy 264. The P. refs. are DN iii.152, DN iii.232; AN ii.32, AN ii.248; AN iv.219, AN iv.364; Ja v.330; Snp-a 236, Snp-a 240. See also Kern, Toev. ii.67 s. v.

fr. saṃ + grah

Saṅgaha2

(nt.) restraining, hindrance, bond Iti 73 (both reading & meaning very doubtful).;

fr. saṃ + grah

Saṅgahaṇa

(adj.) firm, well-supported Ja v.484.

fr. sangaṇhāti

Saṅgahita

(& ˚gahīta) 1. comprised, included Mil 40 (eka˚); Pv-a 80.

2. collected Mvu 10, Mvu 24.

3. grouped Kv 335 sq.

4. restrained Snp 388 (˚attabhāva); Snp-a 291 (˚atta).

5. kindly disposed Vv 116 = Pv iv.160 (˚attabhāva = paresaṃ sangaṇha-sīla Vv-a 59, i.e. of sympathetic nature).

pp. of sangaṇhāti

Saṅgāma

a fight, battle DN i.46; DN ii.285; MN i.86, MN i.253; SN i.98; SN iv.308 sq.; AN i.106; AN ii.116; AN iii.94; Vin i.6; Iti 75; Snp 440 Nd ii.199; Pp 68; Ja i.358; Ja ii.11; Mil 332; Vism 401 Cp. vijita˚.

-āvacara whose sphere is the battle, quite at home on the battlefield Ja ii.94, Ja ii.95; Vin v.163 sq., 183 (here said fig. of the bhikkhu) ■ ji (sangāma-j-uttama) victorious in battle Dhp 103 (cp. Dhp-a ii.227 = sangāma-sīsa-yodha) -bheri battle drum Dhp-a iii.298; Dhp-a iv.25. -yodha a warrior Ja i.358.

fr. saṃ + *gam: see grāma; lit. “collection”

Saṅgāmeti

to fight to come into conflict with Vin ii.195; Vin iii.108; Iti 75; Ja ii.11, Ja ii.212. aor. ˚gāmesi Ja v.417, Ja v.420 (C. = samāgami cp. sangacchati).

Denom. fr. sangāma; given as special root saṅgām˚; at Dhtp 605 with defn “yuddha”

Saṅgāyati

to chant, proclaim (cp. sangara), to rehearse, to establish the text of the B. scriptures Vin ii.285; DN-a i.25 (Buddha-vacanaṃ) ■ pp. saṅgīta.

saṃ + gāyati

Saṅgāyika

(adj.) connected with the proclamation; dhamma˚-therā the Elders gathered in the council for proclaiming the Doctrine Ja v.56.

fr. sangāyati

Saṅgāha

(adj.-n.) 1. collecting, collection, Mvu 10, Mvu 24.

2. restraining, self-restraint AN ii.142.

fr. saṃ + grah

Saṅgāhaka

(adj.-n.) 1. compiling, collection, making a recension Ja i.1; Mil 369; Vv-a 169 (dhamma˚)

2. treating kindly, compassionate, kind (cp. sangaha 5) AN iv.90; Ja i.203; Ja iii.262.

3. (m.) a charioteer DN ii.268; Ja i.203; Ja ii.257; Ja iv.63.

fr. sangāha

Saṅgāhika

(adj.) 1. comprising, including Ja i.160; Vism 6; DN-a i.94.

2. holding together MN i.322 = AN iii.10.

3. comprehensive, concise Ja ii.236.

= last

Saṅgīta

sung; uttered, proclaimed, established as the text Vin ii.290; Ja i.1; DN-a i.25 (of the Canon, said to have been rehearsed in seven months)-(nt.) a song, chant, chorus DN ii.138; Ja vi.529.

pp. of sangāyati

Saṅgīti

(f.) 1. a song, chorus, music Ja i.32 (dibba˚); vi.528 (of birds).

2. proclamation (cp. sangara), rehearsal, general convocation of the Buddhist clergy in order to settle questions of doctrine and to fix the text of the Scriptures. The first Council is alleged to have been held at Rājagaha, Vin ii.284 sq.; Dpvs iv.; Mvu iii.; DN-a i.2 sq.; Snp-a 67, Snp-a 483. The second Council at Vesāli Vin ii.294 sq.; Dpvs iv.27 sq.; Mvu iv.; the third at Pāṭaliputta, Dpvs vii.34 sq.; Mvu v.268 sq. A Council of heretics, the so-called Mahāsaṅgīti, is mentioned Dpvs v.31 sq. 3. text rehearsed, recension Vin ii.290; DN-a i.17; Mil 175 (dhamma˚); text, formula Vin i.95; Vin ii.274, Vin ii.278 On the question of the Councils see especially Franke J.P.T.S. 1908, 1 sq.

-kāra editor of a redaction of the Holy Scriptures Snp-a 42 sq., 292, 394, 413 sq., 504 and passim; Pv-a 49 Pv-a 70, etc. -kāraka id Ja i.345 -kāla the time of the redaction of the Pāli Canon, or of (one of them, probably the last) the Council Tikp 241; Snp-a 580; Vv-a 270 -pariyāya the discourse on the Holy Text DN iii.271 (Rh. D. “scheme of chanting together”).

fr. saṃgāyati; BSk. sangīti Divy 61

Saṅguḷikā

(f.) a cake Vin ii.17; Dhp-a ii.75; cp sankulikā AN iii.78.

either = Sk. śaṣkulikā, cp, sakkhali 2, or fr. saguḷa = sanguḷa

Saṅgopeti

to guard; to keep, preserve; to hold on to (acc.) Ja iv.351 (dhanaṃ).

saṃ + gopeti

Saṅgha

1. multitude, assemblage Mil 403 (kāka˚); Ja i.52 (sakuṇa˚); Snp 589 (ñāti˚); 680 (deva˚) DN iii.23 (miga˚); Vv 55 (accharā˚ = samūha Vv-a 37) bhikkhu˚; an assembly of Buddhist priests AN i.56, etc. DN i.1, etc.; SN i.236; Sum i.230, 280; Vin i.16; Vin ii.147 bhikkhunī˚; an assembly of nuns SN v.360; Vin i.140 sāvaka˚; an assembly of disciples AN i.208; DN ii.93; SN i.220; Pv-a 195, etc.; samaṇa˚; an assembly of ascetics Snp 550.

2. the Order, the priesthood, the clergy, the Buddhist church AN i.68, AN i.123, etc.; DN i.2, etc.; iii.102 126, 193, 246; SN iv.270 sq.; Snp 227, etc.; Ja ii.147, etc. Dhs 1004; Iti 11, Iti 12, Iti 88; Vin i.102, Vin i.326; Vin ii.164, etc. 3. a larger assemblage, a community AN ii.55 = Sv.400; MN i.231 (cp. gaṇa) ■ On the formula Buddha, Dhamma Sangha see dhamma C 2.

-ānussati meditation on the Order (a kammaṭṭhāna DN iii.250, DN iii.280; AN i.30; Ja i.97. -ārāma a residence for members of the Order Ja i.94; Vb-a 13. -kamma an act or ceremony performed by a chapter of bhikkhus assembled in solemn conclave Vin i.123 (cp. i.53, 143 & expl;n at S.B.E. xxii.7); iii.38 sq.; Ja i.341. -gata gone into the sangha, joining the community MN i.469. -thera senior of the congregation Vin ii.212, Vin ii.303. -bhatta food given to the community of bhikkhus Vin i.58; Vin ii.109 Vin ii.212. -bhinna schismatic Vin v.216. -bheda causing dissension among the Order Vin i.150; Vin ii.180 sq. AN ii.239 sq.; Iti 11; Tikp 167, 171; Ja vi.129; Vb-a 425 sq. -bhedaka causing dissension or divisions schismatic Vin i.89, Vin i.136, Vin i.168; Iti 11. -māmaka devoted to the Sangha Dhp-a i.206. -rāji [ = rāji2 dissension in the Order Vin i.339; Vin ii.203 = Vb-a 428; Vin iv.37.

fr. saṃ + hṛ; lit. “comprising.” The quâsi pop. etym. at Vv-a 233 is “diṭṭhi-sīla-sāmaññena sanghāṭabhāvena sangha”

Saṅghaṃsati

to rub together, to rub against Vin ii.315 (Bdhgh).

saṃ + ghaṃsati

Saṅghaṭita

1. struck, sounded, resounding with (-˚) Ja v.9 (v.l. ṭṭ); Mil 2.

2. pierced together, pegged together constructed Mil 161 (nāvā nānā-dāru˚).

saṃ + ghaṭita, for ˚ghaṭṭita, pp. of ghaṭṭeti

Saṅghaṭṭa1

(adj.) knocking against, offending, provoking, making angry Ja vi.295.

fr. saṃ + ghaṭṭ;

Saṅghaṭṭa2

(?) bangle Snp 48 (˚yanta ): thus Nd ii.reading for ˚māna (ppr. med. of sanghaṭṭeti).

Saṅghaṭṭana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) 1. rubbing or striking together, close contact, impact SN iv.215 SN v.212; Ja vi.65; Vism 112; DN-a i.256 (anguli˚). 2. bracelet (?) Snp-a 96 (on Snp 48).

fr. sanghaṭṭeti

Saṅghaṭṭeti

1. to knock against Vin ii.208.

2. to sound, to ring Mvu 21, Mvu 29 (˚aghaṭṭayi).

3 to knock together, to rub against each other Ja iv.98 (aṃsena aṃsaṃ samaghaṭṭayimha); Dāvs iii.87.

4. to provoke by scoffing, to make angry Ja vi.295 (paraṃ asanghaṭṭento, C. on asanghaṭṭa); Vv-a 139 (pres. pass ˚ghaṭṭiyati) ■ pp. saṅghaṭ(ṭ)ita.

saṃ + ghaṭṭeti

Saṅghara

= saghara one’s own house Ja v.222.

sa4 + ghara

Saṅgharaṇa

(nt.) accumulation Ja iii.319 (dhana˚).

= saṃharaṇa

Saṅgharati

1. to bring together, collect, accumulate Ja iii.261; Ja iv.36 (dhanaṃ), 371; v.383. 2. to crush, to pound Ja i.493.

= saṃharati

Saṅghāṭa

1. a raft Ja ii.20, Ja ii.332 (nāvā˚) iii.362 (id.), 371. Mil 376. dāru˚; (= nāvā˚) Ja v.194 Ja v.195.

2. junction, union Vv-a 233.

3. collection aggregate Ja iv.15 (upāhana˚); Thag 519 (papañca˚) Freq. as aṭṭhi˚; (cp. sankhalā etc.) a string of bones, i.e. a skeleton Thag 570; Dhp-a iii.112; Ja v.256.

4. a weft, tangle, mass (almost = “robe,” i.e. sanghāṭī), in taṇhā˚-paṭimukka MN i.271; vāda˚-paṭimukka MN i.383 (Neumann “defeat”); diṭṭhi˚-paṭimukka Mil 390. 5. a post, in piṭṭha˚; door-post, lintel Vin ii.120.

fr. saṃ + ghaṭeti, lit. “binding together”; on etym. see Kern, Toev. ii.68

Saṅghāṭika

(adj.) wearing a sanghāṭī MN i.281.

fr. sanghāṭī

Saṅghāṭī

(f.) one of the three robes of a Buddhist Vin i.46 Vin i.289; Vin ii.78, Vin ii.135, Vin ii.213; DN i.70; DN ii.65; MN i.281; MN ii.45; SN i.175; AN ii.104, AN ii.106 sq., 210; iv.169 sq.; v.123; Pv iv.146; Vb-a 359 (˚cīvara); Pv-a 43.

-cāra wandering about in a sanghāṭī, having deposited the cīvara Vin iv.281. -vāsin dressed in a s. Snp 456.

fr. sanghaṭeti; cp. BSk. sanghāṭī Divy 154, Divy 159, Divy 494

Saṅghāṇi

(f.) a loin-cloth Vin iv.339 sq.

Saṅghāta

1. striking, killing, murder Vin i.137; DN i.141; DN ii.354; MN i.78; AN ii.42 sq.

2. knocking together (cp. sanghaṭṭeti), snapping of the fingers (acchara˚) AN i.34, AN i.38; Ja vi.64.

3. accumulation aggregate, multitude Pv-a 206 (aṭṭhi˚ mass of bones, for the usual ˚sanghāṭa); Ne 28.

4. Name of one of the 8 principle purgatories Ja v.266, Ja v.270.

saṃ + ghāta

Saṅghātanika

(adj.) holding or binding together MN i.322 (+ agga-sangāhika); AN iii.10 (id.); Vin i.70 (“the decisive moment” Vin. Texts i.190).

fr. sanghāta or sanghāṭa

Saṅghādisesa

requiring suspension from the Order; a class of offences which can be decided only by a formal sangha-kamma Vin ii.38 sq.; Vin iii.112, Vin iii.186 Vin iv.110 sq., 225 (where explained); AN ii.242; Vism 22; Dhp-a iii.5.

unexplained as regards etym.; Geiger, P.Gr. § 383, after S. Lévi, = sangh’âtisesa; but atisesa does not occur in Pāli

Saṅghika

(adj.) belonging to, or connected with the Order Vin i.250.

fr. sangha

Saṅghin

(adj.) having a crowd (of followers), the head of an order DN i.47, DN i.116; SN i.68; Mil 4; DN-a i.143saṅghāsaṅghī (pl.) in crowds, with crowds (redupl. cpd.!), with gaṇi-bhūtā “crowd upon crowd at DN i.112, DN i.128; DN ii.317; DN-a i.280.

fr. sangha

Saṅghuṭṭha

(adj.) 1. resounding (with) Ja vi.60, Ja vi.277 (turiya-tāḷita˚); Mvu 15, Mvu 196; Mvu 29, Mvu 25 (turiya˚); Sdhp 298.

2. proclaimed, announced Pv-a 73.

saṃ + ghuṭṭha

Sacāca

(conj.) if indeed Vin i.88; see sace.

Sacitta1

(nt.) one’s own mind or heart DN ii.120; Dhp 183, Dhp 327 = Mil 379.

sa4 + citta

Sacitta2

(adj.) of the same mind Ja v.360.

sa2 + citta

Sacittaka

(adj.) endowed with mind, intelligent Dhs-a 295.

sa3 + citta + ka

Sace

(conj.) if DN i.8, DN i.51; Vin i.7; Dhp 134; Ja i.311sace… noce if… if not Ja vi.365.

sa2 + ce; cp. sacāca

Sacetana

(adj.) animate, conscious, rational Ja i.74; Mvu 38, Mvu 97.

sa3 + cetana

Sacetasa

(adj.) attentive, thoughtful AN i.254 (= citta-sampanna C.).

sa3 + cetasa

Sacca

(adj.) real, true DN i.182; MN ii.169; MN iii.207; Dhp 408; nt. saccaṃ truly, verily, certainly Mil 120; saccaṃ kira is it really true? DN i.113; Vin i.45, Vin i.60; Ja i.107; saccato truly SN iii.112 ■ (nt. as noun) saccaṃ the truth AN ii.25, AN ii.115 (parama˚); Dhp 393; also: a solemn asseveration Mvu 25, Mvu 18. Sacce patiṭṭhāya keeping to fact, MN i.376 ■ pl. (cattāri) saccāni the (four) truths MN ii.199; AN ii.41, AN ii.176; Snp 883 sq.; Dhs 358 ■ The 4 ariya-saccāni are the truth about dukkha, dukkhasamudaya dukkha-nirodha, and dukkha-nirodha-gāminipaṭipadā. Thus e.g. at Vin i.230; DN ii.304 sq.; DN iii.277; AN i.175 sq.; Vism 494 sq.; Vb-a 116 sq., 141 sq. A shortened statement as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha magga is freq. found, e.g. Vin i.16; see under dukkha B. 1 ■ See also ariyasacca & asacca ■ iminā saccena; in consequence of this truth, i.e. if this be true Ja i.294.

-avhaya deserving his name, Cp. of the Buddha Snp 1133, cp. Nd ii.624. -ādhitthāna determined on truth MN iii.245; DN iii.229. -ānupaṭṭi realization of truth MN ii.173 sq. -ānubodha awakening to truth MN ii.171 sq -ānurakkhaṇa warding of truth, MN ii.176. -ābhinivesa inclination to dogmatize, one of the kāya-ganthas SN v.59; Dhs 1139; Dhs-a 377. -ābhisamaya comprehension of the truth Snp 758; Thag 338; Thag-a 239. -kāra ratification pledge, payment in advance as guarantee Ja i.121. -kiriyā a solemn declaration, a declaration on oath Ja i.214, Ja i.294 Ja iv.31, Ja iv.142; Ja v.94; Mil 120; Mvu 18, Mvu 39 (see trsln p. 125 on term). -ñāṇa knowledge of the truth Vism 510; Dhp-a iv.152. -nāma doing justice to one’s name, bearing a true name, Ep. of the Buddha AN iii.346; AN iv.285, AN iv.289; Pv-a 231. -nikkhama truthful Snp 542. -paṭivedha penetration of the truth Pts ii.57. -vaṅka a certain kind of fish Ja v.405 (the Copenhagen MS. has [sa]sacca-vanka which has been given by Fausböll as sata-vanka) -vacana (1) veracity MN i.403; Dhp i.160; (2) = saccakiriyā Kp-a 169, Kp-a 180. -vajja truthfulness DN i.53; SN iv.349; Ja iv.320. -vācā id. AN ii.228; AN iii.244; Ja i.201 -vādin truthful, speaking the truth DN i.4; DN iii.170; AN ii.209; AN iv.249, AN iv.389; SN i.66; Snp 59; Dhp 217; Mil 120 Nd ii.623; Dhp-a iii.288. -vivaṭṭa revelation of truth Pts i.11. -sandha truthful, reliable DN i.4; DN iii.170; AN ii.209; AN iv.249; DN-a i.73. -sammatā popular truth maxim SN iv.230.

cp. Sk. satya

Saccāpeti

at AN iv.346 = Vin ii.19 is probably misreading or an old misspelling for sajjāpeti fr. sajjeti, the confusion sac: saj being frequent. Meaning: to undertake fulfil, realize.

Saccika

(adj.) real, true Mil 226 (the same passage at Pts i.174 & Nd;1 458 spells sacchika). saccik’ aṭṭha truth, reality, the highest truth Kv 1 sq. Dhs-a 4 (nearly = paramaṭṭha); Kp-a 102. Kern in a phantastic interpretation (Toev. ii.49, 50) takes it as sacci-kaṭṭha (= Sk. sāci-kṛṣta) “pulled sideways,” i.e. “misunderstood.”

cp. Sk. satyaka

Sacceti

in fut. saccessati at AN iv.343 is most likely an old mistake for ghaṭṭessati is the same passage at AN iii.343 the meaning is “to touch,” or to approach, disturb It is hardly = saśc “to accompany.”

Sacchanda

(adj.) self-willed, headstrong Ja i.421; as sacchandin ibid.

sa4 + chanda

Sacchavīni

(mūlāni) at AN iii.371 (opp. ummūla) means “roots taking to the soil again.” It is doubtful whether it belongs to chavi “skin.”

Sacchikata

seen with one’s own eyes, realized experienced DN i.250; SN v.422 = Vin i.11; Dhp-a iv.117.

pp. of sacchikaroti cp. BSk. sākṣātkṛtaḥ Avs i.210

Sacchikaraṇīya

(adj.) (able) to be realized SN iii.223 sq.; DN iii.230 = AN ii.182 (in four ways by kāya, sati, cakkhu, paññā).

grd: of sacchikaroti

Sacchikaroti

to see with one’s eyes, to realize, to experience for oneself. Pres. ˚karoti DN i.229; SN iv.337; SN v.11, SN v.49 ■ Fut. ˚karissati SN v.10; MN ii.201 (as sacchi vā k.) ■ Aor. sacch’ākāsi SN iv.63; Snp-a 166-Grd. ˚kātabba Vin i.11; SN v.422; & ˚karaṇīya (q.v.)-pp. sacchikata.

cp. Sk. sākṣāt kṛ; the P. form being *saccha˚ (= sa3 + akṣ, as in akkhi), with change of ˚a to ˚i before kṛ. See also sakkhiṃ karoti

Sacchikiriyā

(f.) realization, experiencing oath, ordeal, confirmation DN i.100 (etc.) DN i.100; DN iii.255; SN iv.254; AN i.22; AN ii.148; AN iii.101 AN iv.332 sq.; Snp 267; Vism 696 sq.; Dhs 296; Dhp-a iv.63.

fr. sacchikaroti

Sajati1

to let loose, send forth dismiss, give up Snp 386, Snp 390; Ja i.359; Ja v.218 (imper sajāhi); vi.185, 205 ■ infin. saṭṭhuṃ (q.v.); pp. saṭṭha (see vissaṭṭha) ■ Caus. sajjeti (q.v.) ■ For sajj˚ (Caus.) we find sañj˚; in sañjitar.

sṛj, cp. Av. hərəƶaiti to let loose; Sk. sarga pouring out, sṛṣṭi emanation, creation

Sajati2

to embrace DN ii.266 (imper. saja). udakaṃ sajati to embrace the water, poet. for “to descend into the water Ja iv.448 (T. sajāti); vi.198 (C. = abhisiñcati), 205 (C. attano upari sajati [i.e. sajati1] abbhukkirati). On C. readings cp. Kern, Toev ii.51.

svaj; Dhtp 74, Dhtp 549 = ajjana (?) or = sajati1?

Sajana

a kinsman Ja iv.11 (read ˚parijanaṃ).

sa4 + jana

Sajala

(adj.-n.) watery, wet; nt. water.

-da giving water, bringing rain (of wind) Vism 10 -dhara holding water, i, e. a cloud Vv-a 223.

sa3 + jala

Sajāti

(f.) (being of) the same class or caste Vin i.87; Ja ii.108 (˚putta).

sa2 + jāti

Sajitar

see sañjitar.

Sajīva1

(adj.) endowed with life Mvu 11, Mvu 13.

sa3 + jīva

Sajīva2

a minister Ja vi.307, Ja vi.318 (= amacca C.).

for saciva?

Sajīvāna

(nt.) at SN i.44 is metric spelling for sa-jīvana “same livelihood,” in phrase kiṃsu kamme s. “what is (of) the same livelihood in work, i.e. occupation?” The form is the same as jīvāna at Ja iii.353. Taken wrongly as gen. pl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln (K.S. i.63): “who in their work is mate to sons of men?” following Bdhgh’s wrong interpretation (see K.S. i.321) as “kammena saha jīvantānan; kammadutiyakā nāma honti.”

sa2 = saṃ, + jīvana

Sajotibhūta

(adj.) flaming, ablaze, aglow DN i.95; Vin i.25; AN i.141; Ja i.232; DN-a i.264.

sa3 + joti + bhūta; same BSk., e.g. Mvu i.5

Sajja

(adj.) prepared, ready Ja i.98 Ja ii.325; Ja iii.271; Mil 351; Pv-a 156, Pv-a 256. Of a bow furnished with a bow-string AN iii.75.

grd. formation fr. sajj = sañj Caus.; cp. the exact likeness of Ger. “fertig”

Sajjaka

(adj.) = sajja; Ja iv.45 (gamana˚ ready for going, “fertig”).

Sajjati

1. to cling, to, to be attached SN i.38, SN i.111 (aor. 2 sg. sajjittho); ii.228; AN ii.165; Ja i.376 (id. asajjittho); Snp 522, Snp 536. ppr. (a)sajjamāna (un)-attached Snp 28, Snp 466; Ja iii.352.

2. to hesitate Ja i.376 (asajjitvā without hesitation) ■ pp. satta1 ■ Cp. abhi˚ & vi˚;.

Pass. of sañj or saj to hang. Cp. sanga

Sajjana1

(nt.) decking, equipping Thag-a 241.

fr. sṛj

Sajjana2

a good man Mil 321.

sat(= sant) + jana

Sajjā

(f.) seat, couch Pv ii.128 (expln at Pv-a 157 doubtful).

orig. grd. of sad

Sajjita

issued, sent off; offered, prepared SN ii.186; Vin iii.137 (here in sense of “happy” sukhita ); Mil 244 (of an arrow: sent); Mvu 17, Mvu 7 Mvu 27, Mvu 16 ■ nt. offering (= upakkhaṭa) DN-a i.294; Pv-a 107.

pp. of sajjeti

Sajju

(adv.) 1. instantly, speedily, quickly Dāvs iii.37.

2. newly recently Dhp 71 (˚khīra; cp. Dhp-a ii.67). Sajjukam = sajju

Sk. sadyaḥ, sa + dyaḥ, lit. one the same day

Sajjukaṃ = sajju

: 1. quickly Mvu 7, Mvu 6; Mvu 14, Mvu 62.

2. newly Vv-a 197.

Sajjulasa

resin Vin i.202.

cp. Sk. sarjarasa; see Geiger, P.Gr. § 192

Sajjeti

to send out, prepare, give, equip; to fit up, decorate: dānaṃ to give a donation Dhp-a ii.88; pātheyyaṃ to prepare provisions Ja iii.343; gehe to construct houses Ja i.18; nāṭakāni to arrange ballets Ja i.59; yaññaṃ to set up a sacrifice Ja i.336; dhammasabhaṃ to equip a hall for a religious meeting Ja iii.342; nagaraṃ to decorate the town Ja v.212 paṇṇākāraṃ to send a present Ja iii.10 ■ Caus. II sajjāpeti to cause to be given or prepared Ja i.446; Pv-a 81. Cp. vissajjeti.

Caus. of sṛj (sajati1), Sk. sarjayati

Sajjha

(nt.) silver DN ii.351 (v.l.); SN v.92 (v.l.); AN iii.16. Cp. sajjhu.

-kāra silversmith Mil 331.

cp. Sk. sādhya

Sajjhāya

repetition, rehearsal study DN iii.241; Vin i.133; Vin ii.194; AN iv.136; SN v.121; Ja i.116, Ja i.436; Ja ii.48; Mil 12, Kp-a 24; Vb-a 250 sq. ˚ṃ karoti to study DN iii.241; AN iii.22; Ja v.54.

cp. Sk. svādhyāya, sva + adhyāya, i.e. sa4 + ajjhaya, cp. ajjhayana & ajjhāyaka

Sajjhāyati

to rehearse, to repeat (aloud or silently), to study Ja i.435; Ja ii.273; Ja iii.216; Ja iv.64; Mil 10 ■ ppr. ˚āyanto Dhp-a iii.347; ger. sajjhāya SN i.202,; sajjhāyitvā Ja iv.477; Ja v.450; Kp-a 97 ■ Caus. sajjhāpeti to cause to learn, to teach Ja iii.28 (of teacher, with adhīyati, of pupil). Caus. II. sajjhāyāpeti id. Mil 10.

Denom. fr. sajjhāya, cp. BSk. svādhyāyita Avs i.287; Avs ii.23

Sajjhu

(nt.) silver DN ii.351; SN v.92; Ja vi.48; Mvu 19, Mvu 4; Mvu 27, Mvu 26; Mvu 28, Mvu 33.

cp. sajjha

Sañcaya

accumulation, quantity Snp 697; Iti 17 (aṭṭhi˚); Mil 220.

fr. saṃ + ci

Sañcara

passage, way, medium DN-a i.289.

fr. saṃ + car

Sañcaraṇa

(nt.) wandering about, meeting meeting-place Ja i.163; Ja iv.335; Mil 359. ; impassable Mil 217.

fr. saṃ + car

Sañcarati

1. to go about, to wander DN i.83.

2. to meet, unite, come together Ja ii.36 (of the noose of a snare).

3. to move, to rock Ja i.265.

4. to pass Ja i.491 ■ Caus. ˚cāreti to cause to move about Mil 377, Mil 385 ■ Caus. II. ˚carāpeti to cause to go, to emit Ja i.164; to make one’s mind dwell on Vism 187.

saṃ + carati

Sañcaritta

(nt.) 1. going backwards & forwards, acting as go-between Vin iii.137.

2. intercourse Mil 266.

fr. saṃ + caritar

Sañcāra

1. going, movement, passing through Sdhp 244.

2. passages entrance, road Ja i.409; Ja ii.70 Ja ii.122.

saṃ + cāra

Sañcalati

to be unsteady or agitated Mil 117. Caus. ˚cāleti to shake Vin iii.127; Ja v.434 ■ pp ˚calita.

saṃ + calati

Sañcalita

shaken Mil 224 (a˚).

pp. of sañcalati

Sañcicca

(adv.) discriminately, purposely, with intention Vin ii.76; Vin iii.71, Vin iii.112; Vin iv.149, Vin iv.290; DN iii.133; Kv 593; Mil 380; Pv-a 103.

ger. of saṃ + cinteti; ch. BSk. sañcintya Divy 494

Sañcita

accumulated, filled (with) Ja vi.249; Thag-a 282; Sdhp 319.

pp. of sañcināti

Sañcināti

(& saṃcayati) to accumulate; ppr. ˚cayanto Mvu 21, Mvu 4; aor. cini˚; Pv-a 202 (puññaṃ), 279 (pl. ˚cinimha) ■ pp. sañcita ■ Cp. abhi˚.

saṃ + cināti

Sañcinteti

(& ˚ceteti ) to think, find out, plan, devise means DN ii.180, DN ii.245 (aor. samacintesuṃ); Thag 1103 (Pot. ˚cintaye); Ja iii.438 (aor. samacetayi).

saṃ + cinteti

Sañcuṇṇa

crushed, shattered Bv ii.170 = Ja i.26.

saṃ + cuṇṇa

Sañcuṇṇita

crushed Ja ii.41; Mil 188; Vism 259.

pp. of sañcuṇṇeti

Sañcuṇṇeti

to crush Ja ii.210, Ja ii.387 (aor. ˚esi); iii.175 (Pot. ˚eyya), 176 (ger. ˚etvā) ■ pp ˚cuṇṇita.

saṃ + cuṇṇeti

Sañcetanā

(f.) thought, cogitation, perception, intention AN ii.159 (atta˚, para˚); DN iii.231 (id.) SN ii.11, SN ii.40, SN ii.99 (mano˚); ii.39 sq., 247; iii.60, 227 sq. Vb 285; Dhs 70, Dhs 126. Sixfold (i.e. the 6 fold sensory perception, rūpa˚, sadda˚, etc.): DN ii.309; DN iii.244; Pts i.136. Threefold (viz. kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚): Vism 341, Vism 530; Vb-a 144, Vb-a 145.

saṃ + cetanā

Sañcetanika

(adj.) intentional Vin iii.112; MN iii.207; AN v.292 sq.; a˚ MN i.377.

fr. sañcetanā

Sañcetayitatta

(nt.) reflection Dhs 5, Dhs 72.

Sañceteti

see ˚cinteti.

Sañcodita

instigated, excited Pv-a 5, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 171, Pv-a 213; Thag-a 207.

saṃ + codita

Sañcopati

to move, to stir; a misunderstood term. Found in aor. samacopi (so read for T. samadhosi & v.l. samañcopi) mañcake “he stirred fr. his bed” SN iii.120, SN iii.125; and sañcopa (pret.) Ja v.340 (v.l. for T. sañcesuṃ āsanā; C. expls as “caliṃsu”).

cp. Sk. copati, as α ̔́πας in Mhbh. We should expect copeti in Pāli, fr. cup to stir

Sañcopana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) touching, handling Vin iii.121 (ā); iv.214 (a) (= parāmasanan nāma ito c’ ito ca).

saṃ + copana

Sañchanna

covered (with = -˚) MN i.124; Thag 13; Ja i.201; Snp-a 91 (˚patta full of leaves; puppha of flowers). Often in cpd. paduma˚; covered with lotuses (of ponds) Pv ii.120; ii.122; Vv 441; Ja i.222 Ja v.337.

saṃ + channa1

Sañchavin

, MN ii.217, MN ii.259.

Sañchādita

covered Pv-a 157.

pp. of sañchādeti

Sañchindati

to cut, destroy MN iii.275 (Pot. ˚chindeyya); AN ii.33 = SN iii.85 (ger. ˚chinditvā) ■ pp sañchinna.

saṃ + chindati

Sañchinna

Vin i.255 (of the kaṭhina, with samaṇḍalīkata “hemmed”). Also in cpd. ˚patta “with leaves destroyed” is Nd ii.reading at Snp 44 (where T. ed. & Snp-a 91 read; saṃsīna ), as well as at Snp 64 (in similar context, where T. ed. reads sañchinna ). The latter passage is expld (Nd ii.625) as “bahula-pattapalāsa saṇḍa-cchāya,” i.e. having thick & dense foliage The same meaning is attached to; sañchinna-patta at Vv-a 288 (with v.l. saṃsīna !), thus evidently in sense of sañchanna. The C. on Snp 64 (viz. Snp-a 117) takes it as sañchanna in introductory story.

pp. of sañchindati

Sañjagghati

to joke, to jest DN i.91; AN iv.55, AN iv.343; DN-a i.256.

saṃ + jagghati

Sañjati

is the P. correspondent of sajati1 (sṛj), but Sk. sañj = sajjati (to hang on, cling), which at Dhtp 67 Dhtp 397 def;d as saṅga. The Dhtp (64) & Dhtm (82) take; sañj in all meanings of āliṅgana (= sajati2), vissagga (= sajati1), & nimmāna (= sajjeti).

Sañjanati

to be born; only in Caus. ˚janeti to cause, produce; realize Pp 16; Sdhp 564 (ger. ˚janayitvāna) ■ pp. sañjāta. See also Pass. saṃjāyati.

saṃ + janati

Sañjanana

(nt.) producing; f. ˚ī progenetrix (identical with taṇhā) Dhs 1059; Dhs-a 363.

Sañjanetar

one who produces SN i.191; SN iii.66.

n. ag. fr. sañjaneti

Sañjambhari

in ˚ṃ karoti is not clear in dern & meaning; perhaps “to tease, abuse,” see D i.189 (˚riyaṃ); AN i.187; SN ii.282. Probably fr. bhṛ; (Intensive jarbhṛta Vedic! as *jarbhari. See on dern Konow, J.P.T.S. 1909, 42 Kern, Toev. ii.69. The C. on SN ii.282 (K.S. ii.203 expls as “sambharitaṃ nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ akaṃsu upari vijjhiṃsū ti,” i.e. continually touching (or nudging) (phuṭa = phuṭṭha or phoṭita).

Sañjāta1

having become, produced, arisen Dhs 1035 (+ bhūta & other syn.). ˚-full of, grown into being in a state of Snp 53 (˚khandha = susaṇṭhita˚ Snp-a 103); Vv-a 312, Vv-a 318 (˚gārava full of respect), 324 (˚pasāda).

pp. of sañjanati

Sañjāta2

(adj.) of the same origin (con-gener) Ja iv.134. Cp. sajāti.

sa2 + jāta

Sañjāti

(f.) birth, origin; outcome; produce DN i.227; DN ii.305.

saṃ + jāti

Sañjādiya

a grove, wood Ja v.417, Ja v.421 (v.l. sañcāriya).

Sañjānana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) knowing, perceiving, recognition Mil 61; DN-a i.211; characteristic, that by which one is distinguished Dhs-a 321. As f. at Dhs 4; Dhs-a 110, Dhs-a 140 (trslnExpos. 185: “the act of perceiving by noting”).

fr. sañjānāti

Sañjānāti

1. to recognize, perceive, know, to be aware of Vin iii.112; DN ii.12; MN i.111, MN i.473; SN iii.87; AN v.46, AN v.60, AN v.63; Ja i.135; Ja iv.194; Thag-a 110.

2. to think to suppose Ja ii.98.

3. to call, name, nickname DN i.93; Ja i.148 ■ Aor. sañjāni DN-a i.261; ger. saññāya Ja i.187 Ja ii.98; saññatvā MN i.1; and sañjānitvā Ja i.352 ■ Caus saññāpeti (q.v.) ■ pp. saññāta.

saṃ + jānāti

Sañjānitatta

(nt.) the state of having perceived Dhs 4.

fr. sañjānita, pp. Caus. of sañjānāti

Sañjānetar

at SN iii.66 read sañjanetā.

Sañjāyati

to be born or produced DN i.220; Ja ii.97; aor. sañjāyi DN ii.209; Vin i.32 ppr. ˚jāyamāna Ja v.384.

saṃ + jāyati, cp. sañjanati

Sañjiṇṇa

decayed Ja i.503 (v.l.).

saṃ + jiṇṇa

Sañjitar

creator, one who assigns to each his station DN i.18, DN i.221; MN i.327; DN-a i.111 (v.l. sajjitar, cp. Sk. sraṣṭar).

n. ag. fr. sajati1, cp. sañjati

Sañjīvana

(adj.) reviving Thag-a 181 (Ap. v. 23: putta˚).

fr. saṃ + jīv

Sañjhā

(f.) evening; only in cpds. ˚ātapa evening sun Vv-a 4, Vv-a 12; ˚ghana evening cloud Thag-a 146 (Ap. v.44); Dāvs v.60.

cp. Sk. sandhyā

Saññ˚

is frequent spelling for saṃy˚; (in saṃyojana = saññojana e.g. ), q.v.

Saññatta1

(nt.) the state of being a saññā, perceptibility SN iii.87.

abstr. formation fr. saññā

Saññatta2

induced, talked over Snp 303, Snp 308

pp. of saññāpeti

Saññatti

(f.) 1. informing, convincing AN i.75; SN i.199; Vin ii.98, Vin ii.199, Vin ii.307; Ja iii.402.

2. appeasing pacification MN i.320.

fr. saññāpeti

Saññā

(f.) (pl. saññāyo and saññā-e.g. MN i.108) 1. sense, consciousness, perception, being the third khandha Vin i.13; MN i.300; SN iii.3 sq.; Dhs 40 Dhs 58, Dhs 61, Dhs 113; Vb-a 42.

2. sense, perception, discernment recognition, assimilation of sensations, awareness MN i.293; AN iii.443 (nibbāna˚); SN iii.87; Snp 732 (saññāya uparodhanā dukkhakkhayo hoti; expld as “kāmasaññā” Snp-a); Mil 61; Dhs 4; Dhs-a 110, Dhs-a 200 (rūpa perception of material qualities).

3. consciousness DN i.180 sq.; MN i.108; Vb 369 (nānatta˚ c. of diversity see nānatta); Mil 159; Ja iv.391; is previous to ñāṇa DN i.185; a constituent part of nāma SN ii.3, cp. Snp 779 according to later teaching differs from viññāṇa and paññā only as a child’s perceiving differs from (a) an adult’s, (b) an expert’s Vism 436 sq.; Dhs. trsln 7 n 2, 17 n. 2 ■ nevasaññā-nāsaññā neither consciousness nor unconsciousness DN iii.224, DN iii.262 sq.; MN i.41, MN i.160 MN ii.255; MN iii.28, MN iii.44; Pts i.36; Dhs 268, Dhs 582, Dhs 1417; Kv 202 Ne 26, Ne 29; Vism 571.

4. conception, idea, notion DN i.28; DN iii.289 (cp. Dial. iii.263: “concept rather than percept”); MN iii.104; SN i.107; Snp 802, Snp 841; Ja i.368 (ambaphala saññāya in the notion or imagining of mango fruit); Vism 112 (rūpa˚ & aṭṭhika˚).; saññaṃ karoti to imagine, to think Ja ii.71; to take notice, to mind Ja i.117.

5. sign, gesture token, mark Ja i.287 Ja ii.18; paṇṇa˚ a mark of leaves Ja i.153; rajjusaññā a rope used as a mark, a guiding rope, Ja i.287; rukkha-saññaṃ pabbata-saññaṃ karonto, using trees and hills as guiding marks Ja iv.91; saññaṃ dadāti to give the sign (with the whip, for the horse to start) Ja vi.302.

6 saññā is twofold, paṭighasamphassajā and adhivacanasamphassajā i.e. sense impression and recognition (impression of something similar, “association by similarity,” as when a seen person calls up some one we know), Vb 6; Vb-a 19 sq.; threefold, rūpasaññā, paṭighasaññā and nānattasaññā AN ii.184; SN ii.211; cp. Snp 535 or kāma˚, vyāpāda˚, vihiṃsā˚ (as nānatta˚) Vb 369, cp Vb-a 499; fivefold (pañca vimutti-paripācaniyā saññā) anicca˚, anicce dukkha˚, dukkhe anatta˚, pahāna˚ virāga˚ DN iii.243, cp. AN iii.334; there are six perceptions of rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba, and dhamma DN ii.309; SN iii.60; the sevenfold perception, anicca-anatta-, asubha-, ādīnava-, pahāna-, virāga-, and nirodha-saññā, DN ii.79; cp. AN iii.79; the tenfold perception asubha-, maraṇa-, āhāre paṭikkūla-, sabbaloke anabhirata-, anicca-, anicce dukkha-, dukkhe anatta-pahāna-, virāga-, nirodha-saññā AN v.105; the one perception āhāre paṭikkūlasaññā, Cpd. 21.

7. See further (unclassified refs.): DN i.180; DN ii.277 (papañca˚) iii.33, 223; SN ii.143; AN ii.17; AN iv.312; Nd i.193, Nd i.207 Ne 27; Vism 111, Vism 437, Vism 461 sq. (in detail); Vb-a 20 (pañca-dvārikā), 34; Vv-a 110; and on term Cpd. 40 42.

-gata perceptible, the world of sense MN i.38. -bhava conscious existence Vism 572; Vb-a 183. -maya arūpin MN i.410 (opp. manomaya = rūpin). -vedayitanirodha cessation of consciousness and sensation MN i.160 MN i.301; MN iii.45; AN i.41; Kv 202; SN ii.212. -viratta free from consciousness, an Arahant, Snp 847. -vimokkha emancipation from consciousness Snp 1071 sq.; Mil 159 = Vin v.116.

fr. saṃ + jñā

Saññāṇa

(nt.) 1. perception, knowledge Vv-a 110.

2. token, mark Ja iv.301; DN-a i.46; Vism 244.

3. monument Mvu 19, Mvu 35.

Vedic sañjñāna

Saññāta

skilled MN i.396.

pp. of sañjānāti

Saññāpana

(nt.) convincing Ja v.462.

fr. saññāpeti

Saññāpeti

1. to make known, to teach Ja i.344; Mil 45.

2. to remonstrate with, gain over convince DN i.236; MN i.397; AN i.75; SN iv.313; Vin i.10 Vin ii.197; Mil 316.

3. to appease, conciliate Ja i.479; Pv-a 16. Also saññapeti Ja i.26, etc ■ inf. saññattuṃ Snp 597 ■ pp. saññatta ■ At Ja i.408 read saññāpāpetvā (instead of saññaṃ pāpetvā), or simply saññāpetvā like the parallel text at Ud 17.

Caus. of sañjānāti

Saññāvant

(adj.) having perception AN ii.215 = Dhs 1003.

fr. saññā

Saññita

so-called, named, so-to-speak Mvu 7, Mvu 45; Pv-a 135; Sdhp 72, Sdhp 461. See also aya under niraya.

= saññāta; pp. of sañjānāti

Saññin

(adj.) (f. saññinī) conscious, being aware of (-˚), perceiving, having perception DN i.31, DN i.180; DN iii.49 DN iii.111, DN iii.140, DN iii.260; SN i.62; AN ii.34, AN ii.48, AN ii.50; AN iii.35; AN iv.427; Dhp 253; Nd i.97, Nd i.138 ■ ālokasaññin having a clear perception DN i.71; AN ii.211; AN v.207; Sum i.211; nānatta conscious of diversity AN iv.39 sq.; paṭhavīsaññin conscious of the earth (kasiṇa), in samādhi AN v.8 sq. paṭhavisaññiniyo (fem. plur.), having a worldly mind DN ii.139; asubhasaññin perceiving the corruption of the world Iti 93; vihiṃsasaññin conscious of the trouble Vin i.7; nevasaññī-nâsaññin neither conscious nor unconscious DN iii.111; AN ii.34; Nd i.97, Nd i.138; Iti 90; DN-a i.119. Cp. vi˚ ■ In composition saññi˚; e.g. ˚gabbha animate production DN i.54; DN-a i.163.

fr. saññā

Saññīvāda

name of a school maintaining conscious existence after death DN i.31; DN-a i.119; Mhbv 110.

saññin + vāda

Saṭa

a fall, a heap of things fallen; only in cpd. paṇṇa˚; a heap of fallen leaves MN i.21 (= paṇṇa-kacavara MN-a i.120); Ja ii.271.

most likely = Sk. śada (fall), fr. śad to fall; Kern Toev. s. v. equals it to Sk. sūta (or sṛta) of sṛ; (or su ) to run (to impel), as in ussaṭa and visaṭa. The Dhtm (789) gives a root saṭ; in meaning of “visaraṇa,” i.e. profusion, diffusion (cp. visaṭa)

Saṭṭha

dismissed; in cpd. -˚esana one who has abandoned all longing or research DN iii.269 (cp Dial. iii.247 “has utterly given up quests”); AN ii.41 (so read for saṭh˚; ) ■ saṭṭha at SN iii.84 is to be read seṭṭha, and at SN iv.298 saṭha.

pp. of sajati1

Saṭṭhi

(num. ord.) sixty DN i.45; DN ii.261; Snp 538; Dhp-a iii.412 (ekūna˚). It is found mostly in the same application as cha (group-number) e.g. at Ja i.64 (˚turiya-sahassāni); Vv-a 92 (id.); Ja i.87 (˚yojana); vi.512 (˚sahassa); Dhp-a i.8, Dhp-a i.17, Dhp-a i.26, Dhp-a i.131 (˚sakaṭa). -˚hāyana 60 years old (of elephant) MN i.229; Ja ii.343.

cp. Sk. ṣaṣṭi: see cha

Saṭṭhuṃ

at Ja vi.185 (taṃ asakkhi saṭṭhuṃ) is inf. of sajati1 (sṛj = Sk. sraṣṭuṃ) to dismiss, let loose. The form has caused trouble, since the Com. explains it with gaṇhituṃ “to take.” This has induced Kern (Toev. s. v. to see in it a very old (even pre-Vedic!) form with *sāḍhuṃ as original. Evidently he derives it fr. sah (Epic Sk. soḍhuṃ!), as he trsls it as “to master, overpower ”

Saṭha

(adj.) crafty, treacherous, fraudulent DN ii.258; DN iii.246; MN i.32, MN i.153; SN iv.299; AN ii.41; AN iii.35 AN v.157; Dhp 252; Vin ii.89; Nd i.395; Mil 250; Dāvs ii.88; Dhp-a iii.375; Dhtp 100 (= keṭave) ■ f. saṭhī Pv ii.34. See also kerāṭika, samaya˚, sāṭheyya.

cp. Sk. śaṭha

Saṭhatā

(f.) craft, wickedness Pp 19.

abstr. fr. saṭha

Saṭhila

(adj.) loose, inattentive Dhp 312.

Sk. śithila, which also appears as sithila, e.g. Thag 277

Saṭhesana

see saṭṭha.

Saṇa

(nt.) a kind of hemp DN ii.350 (v.l.); SN i.115 (do.); cp. sāṇa1 & sāṇī.

-dhovika [perhaps (Kern’s suggestion) sāṇa˚ (v.l.) visāṇa˚?] name of a particular kind of gambol of elephants in water MN i.229, MN i.375. Bdhgh at DN-a i.84 uses the obscure term sāṇa-dhovana-kīḷā to denote a trick of Caṇḍālas. But see sandhovika.

Vedic śaṇa; Gr. κάνναβις = Lat. cannabis; Ags haenep = E. hemp; Ger. hanf.

Saṇati

to sound, to make a noise Snp 721 (T. sanati) = Mil 414; sanate SN i.7 = SN i.203; Ja vi.507; ppr. saṇanto Snp 720 (T. n).

svan; Idg. *sṷenō = Lat. sono, Ags. swin music, swinsian to sing; Ohg. swan = swan

Saṇiṃ

(adv.) softly, gradually Snp 350; Mvu 25, Mvu 84.

cp. Sk. śanaiḥ

Saṇikaṃ

(adv.) slowly, gently, gradually DN ii.333; MN i.120; SN i.82, SN i.203; Ja i.9, Ja i.292; Ja ii.103; Mil 117; DN-a i.197; Dhp-a i.60, Dhp-a i.389; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 178.

fr. last

Saṇṭha

a reed (used for bow-strings) MN i.429. Santhapeti & thapeti;

Saṇṭhapeti & ˚ṭhāpeti

1. to settle, to establish AN ii.94 (cittaṃ); SN iv.263; Ja i.225; Pv-a 196–⁠2. to call to order DN i.179 (˚āp˚).

3. to adjust, fold up Ja i.304.

Caus. of santiṭṭhati

Saṇṭhahana

(nt.) recreation Vism 420 sq.

fr. santiṭṭhati

Saṇṭhāti

see santiṭṭhati.

Saṇṭhāna

(nt.) 1. configuration, position; composition, nature, shape, form Vin ii.76; MN i.120 (spelt ˚nth˚); AN i.50; AN iv.190 (C. osakkana); Mil 270 Mil 316, Mil 405; Ja i.71, Ja i.291, Ja i.368; Ja ii.108; Vism 184, Vism 225, Vism 243; Dhs-a 321; DN-a i.88 (nth); Snp-a 464 (= linga). su˚; well formed Snp 28 ■ adj. (-˚) having the appearance of megha-vaṇṇa˚; Pv-a 251; chavi˚; appearance of the skin Ja i.489; vaṇṇa˚; outward semblance Ne 27; Ja i.271 sarīra˚; the (material) body Vism 193.

2. fuel Ja ii.330 = Ja iv.471.

3. (usually spelt ˚nth˚) a resting place meeting place, public place (market) (cp. Sk. sansthāna in this meaning). At SN i.201 in phrase nadī-tīresu saṇṭhāne sabhāsu rathiyāsu (i.e. at all public places) SN i.201 reads saṇṭhāne (v.l. santhāne); cp. K.S. i.256 from C.: “a resting place (vissamana-ṭṭhāne) near the city gate, when market-wares had been brought down, trsln “resting by the gates.” This stanza is quoted at Snp-a 20, where the ed. prefers reading panthāne as correct reading (v.l. saṇṭhāne). At MN i.481 (˚nth˚) SN ii.28 (2 fr. b.), it seems to be used in the sense of “end stopping, cessation” = AN iv.190 (the editions of S and A have saṇṭhāna). At Ja vi.113 it is translated by “market place,” the comp. saṇṭhāna-gata being explained by the Comm. by saṇṭhāna-mariyādaṃ gatā, but at Ja vi.360 saṇṭhāna-gata is by the English translator translated “a wealthy man” (vinicchaye ṭhito, Com.), which however, ought to be “in the court house” (cp. vinicchaya-ṭṭhāna), i.e. publicly. In both places there is also v.l. santhāna-˚.

fr. saṃ + sthā

Saṇṭhita

1. established in (-˚), settled, composed Snp 330 (santi-soracca-samādhi˚); Sdhp 458 su˚; firmly or well established Snp 755; Mil 383; in a good position, well situated Dhs-a 65.

2. being composed (as), being of the nature of (-˚), ullumpanasabhāva˚; of a helping disposition DN-a i.177; Pv-a 35.

pp. of santiṭṭhati

Saṇṭhiti

(f.) 1. stability, firmness SN v.228; Dhs 11; Vism 206; Dhs-a 143; Sdhp 460.

2. fixing settling Mil 144.

fr. santiṭṭhati

Saṇḍa

a heap, cluster, multitude; a grove (vana˚ DN i.87; SN iii.108; Vin i.23; Ja i.134 (vana˚); satta˚ teeming with beings Iti 21Jambu˚; Name of Jambudīpa Snp 352 = Thag 822 (v.l. ˚maṇḍa, which Kern considers to be the correct reading; see Toev. ii.67) ■ saṇḍa˚cārin swarming DN i.166 = MN i.77 = AN ii.206.

dial.; Dhtm 157: gumb’ attha-m-īraṇe; cp. Sk. ṣaṇḍa

Saṇḍāsa

(long) pincers, tweezers AN i.210; Ja i.223; Ja iii.138; used to pull out hair MN ii.75; Vin ii.134. Sannika (sanika)

saṃ + ḍaṃsa, fr. ḍasati

Saṇṇikā (saṇikā)

an elephant-driver’s hook Ja i.445 (so read for paṇṇ˚; ).

cp. saṇi = Sk. sṛṇi

Saṇha

(adj.) 1. smooth, soft Vin i.202; Vin ii.151; Vv 5018 (= mudu Vv-a 213); Vism 260 = Kp-a 59 saṇhena softly Thag 460.

2. gentle, mild DN ii.259; Snp 853; Ja i.202, Ja i.376; Nd i.234; Pv-a 56, Pv-a 215. Of speech (opp. pharusa harsh) MN i.126; AN iii.196; Dhs 1343. 3. delicate, exquisite Thig 258, Thig 262, Thig 264, Thig 268. Cp pari˚.

-karaṇī “a wooden instrument for smoothing the ground, or a sort of trowel,” Abhp 1007; Ja iv.250 (loc ˚iyaṃ piṃsito); iv.4 (˚ī viya tilāni piṃsamānā); v.271 vi.114 (asani viya viravanto ˚iyaṃ viya piṃsanto); cp Kp-a 59; thus it seems to mean also a sort of instrument for oil-pressing, or a mortar.

cp. Sk. ślakṣṇa

Saṇhaka

, at Ja iii.394 (of hair growing white “saṇhakasadisā”) according to Kern, Toev. ii.69 (coarse) hempen cloth (= sāṇavāka ), as indicated by v.l. sāṇalāka. Thus a der. fr. saṇa = sāṇa. Kern compares P. tuṇhīra tūṇīra; Sk. śaṇa = śāṇaka. According to Andersen Pāli Glossary “betelnut” (= saṇha).

Saṇheti

to brush down, smooth (kese): only as cpd. ; at Vin ii.107; Ja iv.219.

Caus. fr. saṇha

Sata1

(num. card.) a hundred, used as nt (collect.), either-˚ or as apposition, viz. gāma-sataṃ a hundred (ship of) villages Dhp-a i.180; jaṭila-satāni 100 ascetics Vin i.24; jāti˚ DN i.13; or gāthā sataṃ 100 stanzas Dhp 102 ■ Often in sense of “many” or “innumerable,” e.g. ˚kaku, ˚raṃsi, etc.; cp. ˚satāni bahūni Ja iv.310, Ja iv.311.

-kaku having a hundred corners, epithet of a cloud AN iii.34 = SN i.100 (v.l. sattakatu) see J.P.T.S. 1891–⁠93 p. 5. -patta the Indian crane (or woodpecker?) Ja ii.153 Ja ii.388; Mil 404. -padī a centipede AN ii.73; AN iii.101, AN iii.306 AN iv.320; AN v.290; Vin ii.110, Vin ii.148; Mil 272. -pala (Thag 97) see pala. -pāka (-tela) oil mixture, worth 100 pieces Ja iv.281; Dhp-a ii.48; Dhp-a iii.311; see also pāka. -puñña 100, i.e. innumerable merits Vism 211. -pupphā Anethum sowa, a sort of dill or fennel Ja vi.537. -porisa of the height of a hundred men, extremely high, attribute of a hell Vv 52, Vv 12 sq.; name of a hell Ja v.269. -mūlī Asparagus racemosus Abhp 585. -raṃsi “having 100 rays,” the sun Sdhp 590; Ja i.44. -rasabhojana food of 100 flavours Dhp-a iii.96 (v.l. all pass, satta˚) -vaṅka a kind of fish Abhp 672. -vallikā an under-garment arranged like a row of jewelry Vin ii.137. -sahassa one hundred thousand Ja ii.20; Mil 88; Mil 136; Dhp-a ii.86 -sahassima id. SN ii.133.

Vedic śataṃ; cp. Av. satəm, Gr. ἑ κατόν, Lat. centum; Goth. hund = hundred; Idg. *kmtóm fr. dkm̊tóm (= decem), thus ultimately the same as daśa, i.e. decad (of tens)

Sata2

remembering, mindful, conscious DN i.37; DN ii.94 DN iii.49, DN iii.107, DN iii.222, DN iii.269; MN i.520 (su-ssata & dus-sata) SN iv.211; AN iii.169 (+ sampajāna), 325; iv.311; Snp 741; Dhs 163; DN-a i.211satokārin cultivator of sati Pts i.175.

pp. of sarati, of smṛ; cp. BSk. smṛta Avs i.228; Avs ii.197

Sataka

(nt.) a hundred, collection of 100; Ja i.74.

cp. BSk. śataka

Satakkhattuṃ

(adv.) a hundred times.

cp. dvi-kkhattuṃ, ti-kkhattuṃ etc.

Satata

(adj.) continual, chronic. Only in nt. satataṃ (adv.) continually AN iv.14; Iti 116; Snp 507; Mil 70; Pv ii.811 (= nirantaraṃ Pv-a 110); iii.710 (= sabbakālaṃ Pv-a 207); Pv-a 177; and as ˚-in ˚vihāra a chronic state of life, i.e. a behaviour remaining even & the same AN ii.198 = DN iii.250, DN iii.281. Cp. sātacca.

with satrā “completely” & sadā “always” to sa˚ “one”: see saṃ˚; lit. “in one (continuous stretch”

Satadhā

(adv.) in 100 ways, into 100 pieces DN ii.341.

sata + dhā, cp. ekadhā, dvidhā etc.

Sati

(f.) memory, recognition, consciousness, DN i.180; DN ii.292; Mil 77–⁠80 intentness of mind, wakefulness of mind, mindfulness alertness, lucidity of mind, self-possession, conscience self-consciousness DN i.19; DN iii.31, DN iii.49, DN iii.213, DN iii.230, DN iii.270 sq. AN i.95; Dhs 14; Nd i.7; Tikp 61; Vb-a 91; Dhs-a 121; Mil 37; upaṭṭhitā sati presence of mind DN iii.252, DN iii.282 DN iii.287; SN ii.231; AN ii.6, AN ii.218; AN iii.199; AN iv.232; Iti 120 parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhāpetuṃ to surround oneself with watchfulness of mind MN iii.89; Vin i.24, satiṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetuṃ to preserve self-possession Ja i.112 Ja iv.215; kāyagatā sati intentness of mind on the body, realization of the impermanency of all things MN iii.89; AN i.43; SN i.188; Mil 248; Mil 336; muṭṭhasati forgetful, careless DN iii.252, DN iii.282; maraṇasati mindfulness as to death AN iv.317 sq.; Ja iv.216; Snp-a 54; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 66. asati not thinking of, forgetfulness Dhs-a 241; instr. asatiyā through forgetfulness, without thinking of it, not intentionally Vin ii.2892. sati (sammā˚) is one of the constituents of the 8-fold Ariyan Path (e g. AN iii.141 sq.; Vb-a 120): see magga 2.

-ādhipateyya (sat˚) dominant mindfulness AN ii.243 sq.; Iti 40. -indriya the sense, faculty, of mindfulness AN ii.149; Dhs 14. -uppāda arising, production of recollection Ja i.98; AN ii.185; MN i.124. -ullapakāyika, a class of devas SN i.16 sq. -paṭṭhāna [BSk. smṛty’upasthāna Divy 126, Divy 182, Divy 208] intent contemplation and mindfulness earnest thought, application of mindfulness there are four satipaṭṭhānas, referring to the body, the sensations, the mind, and phenomena respectively DN ii.83, DN ii.290 sq.; DN iii.101 sq., 127, 221; MN i.56, MN i.339 MN ii.11 etc.; AN ii.218; AN iii.12; AN iv.125 sq., 457 sq.; v.175; SN iii.96, SN iii.153; SN v.9, SN v.166; Dhs 358; Kv 155 (cp. Kvu trsln 104 sq.); Nd i.14, Nd i.45, Nd i.325, Nd i.340; Vism 3; Vb-a 57 Vb-a 214 sq., 417 ■ See on term e.g. Cpd. 179; and in greater detail Dial. ii.322 sq. -vinaya disciplinary proceeding under appeal to the accused monk’s own conscience Vin i.325; Vin ii.79 etc.; MN ii.247; AN i.99. -vepullappatta having attained a clear conscience Vin ii.79 -saṃvara restraint in mindfulness Vism 7; Dhs-a 351; Snp-a 8. -sampajañña mindfulness and self-possession DN i.70; AN ii.210; DN-a i.183 sq. -sambojjhaṅga (e.g. SN v.90) see (sam)bojjhanga. -sammosa loss of mindfulness or memory, lack of concentration or attention DN i.19; Vin ii.114; DN-a i.113; Pp 32; Vism 63; Mil 266.

Vedic smṛti: see etym. under sarati2

Satika

(adj.) (-˚) consisting of a hundred, belonging to a hundred; yojanasatika extending one hundred yojanas Vin ii.238; vīsaṃvassasatika of hundred and twenty years’ standing Vin ii.303.

fr. sata1

Satitā

(f.) mindfulness, memory Dhs-a 405 (-˚).

abstr. formation fr. sati

Satima

(adj.) the hundredth SN ii.133; Ja i.167 (pañca˚).

superl. formn fr. sata1

Satimant

(adj.) mindful, thoughtful, contemplative, pensive; nom. sg. satimā DN i.37; SN i.126; Snp 174; AN ii.35; Dhs 163; Dhp-a iv.117; Pv iv.344; satīmā (in verse) Snp 45; nt. satīmaṃ Snp 211; gen. satimato SN i.208; satīmato SN i.81; Dhp 24; nom. pl. satīmanto DN ii.120; Dhp 91; Dhp-a ii.170; gen. satīmataṃ Dhp 181; Iti 35; satimantānaṃ AN i.24 ■ See also DN iii.77, DN iii.141 DN iii.221 sq.; AN iv.4, AN iv.38, AN iv.300 sq., 457 sq.; Nd i.506; Nd ii.629.

fr. sati

Satī

(f.) 1. being Ja iii.251.

2. a good or chaste woman Abhp 237; asatī an unchaste woman Mil 122 = Ja iii.350; Ja v.418; Ja vi.310.

fr. sant, ppr. of as

Satekiccha

(adj.) curable, pardonable Mil 192, Mil 221; Vism 425. See tekiccha.

sa3 + tekiccha

Sateratā

(f.) lightning Ja v.14, Ja v.203. Also as sateritā Vv 333; 644; Vv-a 161 (= vijjulatā), 277. As saderitā at Thag 260.

cp. Sk. śatahradā, śata + hrada

Satta1

hanging, clinging or attached to Vin i.185; DN ii.246; Nd i.23, Nd i.24; Dhp 342; Ja i.376 Cp. āsatta1 & byāsatta;.

pp. of sañj: sajjati

Satta2

1. (m.) a living being, creature, a sentient & rational beiṅg, a person; DN i.17, DN i.34, DN i.53, DN i.82 DN ii.68; AN i.35 sq., 55 sq.; SN i.135; SN v.41; Vin i.5; Mil 273 Vism 310 (defn: “rūp’ādisu khandhesu chandarāgena sattā visattā ti sattā,” thus = satta1); Ne 161; DN-a i.51, DN-a i.161; Vb-a 144naraka˚; a being in purgatory (cp. niraya˚) Vism 500.

2. (nt.) soul (= jīvita or viññāṇa) Pv i.81 (gata˚ = vigata-jīvita Pv-a 40). 3. (nt.) substance Vin i.287. nissatta non-substantial phenomenal Dhs-a 38.

-āvāsa abode of sentient beings (see nava1 2) DN iii.263 DN iii.268; AN v.53; Vism 552; Vb-a 168. -ussada (see ussada 4) teeming with life, full of people DN i.87, DN i.111 DN i.131. -loka the world of living creatures Snp-a 263, Snp-a 442 Vism 205. See also saṅkhāra-loka ■ vaṇijjā slave trade DN-a i.235 = AN iii.208 (C.: manussa-vikkaya).

cp, Vedic sattva living being, satvan “strong man, warrior,” fr. sant

Satta3

cursed, sworn Ja iii.460; Ja v.445.

pp. of sapati to curse; Sk. śapta

Satta4

(num.) number seven. It is a collective and concluding (serial) number its application has spread from the week of 7 days (or nights), and is based on astronomical conception (Babylon!), this science being regarded as mystic, it invests the number with a peculiar magic nimbus From time-expressions it was transferred to space, esp when originally connected with time (like satta-bhūmaka the 7-storied palace; the Vimānas with 700 towers: see vimāna 2 & 6; or the 7 great lakes: see sara3; ˚yojana 7 miles, cp. the 7 league-boots!). Extremely frequent in folklore and fairy tales (cp. 7 years of famine in Egypt, 7 days’ festivals, dragon with 7 heads, 7 ravens 7 dwarfs, 7 little goats, 7 years enchantment, etc. etc.). For time expressions see in cpds.: ˚āha, ˚māsa, ˚ratta ˚vassa. Cp. Snp 446 (vassāni); Ja ii.91 (kāyā, thick masses); DN-a i.25 (of the Buddh. Scriptures: sattahi māsehi sangītaṃ); Dhp-a ii.34 (dhanāni), 101 (mangalā) the collective expression 7 years, 7 months, 7 days at Ja v.48; the 7X70 ñāṇavatthūni SN ii.59; and the curious enumeration of heptads at DN i.54Cases: instr sattahi DN i.34; gen. sattannaṃ DN i.56; loc. sattasu DN ii.303 = MN i.61.

-aṅga a couch with 7 members (i.e. four legs, head support, foot support, side) Vin ii.149. -aṭṭha seven or eight Ja ii.101. -āgārika a “seven-houser,” one who turns back from his round, as soon as he has received alms at 7 houses DN i.166. -ālopika a “seven-mouthful, one who does not eat more than 7 bits DN i.166. -āha (nt.) seven days, a week of 7 days [cp. BSk. saptaka Divy 99] DN ii.248; Vin i.1, Vin i.139; Ja i.78; Ja ii.85; Ja iv.360 Ja v.472; Ja vi.37; Dhp-a i.109; Vv-a 63. satta˚ 7 weeks Dhp-a i.86; cp. satta-satta-divasā Ja v.443. -ussada (see ussada 2) having 7 prominences or protuberances (on the body), a sign of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.151 (i.e. on both hands, on both feet, on both shoulders, on the back). -guṇa sevenfold Mvu 25, Mvu 36. -jaṭa with seven plaits (of hair) Ja v.91 (of a hunter). -tanti having 7 strings, a lute Vv-a 139. -tāla (-matta) (as big as 7 palm trees Dhp-a ii.62, Dhp-a ii.100. -tiṃsa 37 (see bodhipakkhiya-dhammā). -dina a week Mvu 11, Mvu 23. -pakaraṇika mastering the 7 books of the Abhidhamma Ja i.312; Dhp-a iii.223. -patiṭṭha sevenfold firm DN ii.174; Mil 282. -padaṃ for 7 steps Ja vi.351 (Kern, Toev. s. v. “unfailing”). -bhūmaka (pāsāda) (a palace) with 7 stories Mvu 37, Mvu 11; Ja i.58; Ja iv.378; Dhp-a i.180, Dhp-a i.239 Dhp-a iv.209. -māsaṃ (for) seven months Pv-a 20. -yojanika 7 miles in extent Ja v.484. -ratana the 7 royal treasures DN i.88; Iti 15; Ja v.484. -ratta a week Ja vi.230 (dve˚ a fortnight), 304; Snp 570. -vassika 7 years old Mil 9 Mil 310; Dhp-a ii.87, Dhp-a ii.89 (sāmaṇera), 139; Pv-a 53 (Sankicca arahattaṃ patvā); Dhp-a iii.98 (kumāro arahattaṃ patto) Ja v.249. On the age of seven as that of child arahants see Mrs. Rh. D. in Brethren introd. xxx. -vīsati twenty seven Dhp-a i.4.

cp. Vedic sapta, Gr. ἑπτά; Av. hapta; Lat. septem, Goth. sibun = E. seven etc.

Sattakkhattuṃ

(adv.) seven times Vin i.3; Iti 18; sattakkhattuparamaṃ seven times at the utmost; ˚parama one who will not be reborn more than seven times SN ii.134 sq.; AN i.233, AN i.235; AN iv.381 Kv 104; Pp 15 sq.; Ne 189; Kp-a 187; Ja i.239; Dhp-a iii.61, Dhp-a iii.63.

cp. tikkhattuṃ etc.

Sattati

seventy DN ii.256; Ap 118, 126 & passim. As sattari at SN ii.59; Ap 248 & passim.;

cp. Sk. saptati

Sattatta

(nt.) state of having existence DN i.29.

abstr. fr. satta2

Sattadhā

(adv.) in seven pieces DN i.94; DN ii.235; Snp 783; Ja v.33, Ja v.493; Dhp-a i.17, Dhp-a i.41. Cp phalati. Sattapanni-rukkha

fr. satta4, cp. dvidhā

Sattapaṇṇi-rukkha

Name of a tree Mvu 30, Mvu 47; cp. sattapaṇṇi-guhā Name of a cave Kp-a 95.

Sattama1

(adj.) best, excellent Snp 356; Ja i.233.

superl. fr. sant

Sattama2

(num. ord.) the seventh DN i.89; Snp 103 ■ f. ˚mī Snp 437. Often in loc. ˚divase on the 7th day Snp 983; Ja i.395; Mil 15; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 74. -˚bhavika one who has reached the 7th existence (or rebirth Kv 475 (cp. trsln 2714).

fr. satta4

Sattarasa

(num. card.) seventeen Vin i.77; Vin iv.112 (˚vaggiyā bhikkhū, group of 17).

satta4 + rasa2 = dasa

Sattari

= sattati, at SN ii.59 sq.

Sattali

(f.) [cp. Sk. saptalā, name of var. plants, e.g. jasmine, or many-flowered nykkanthes, Halāy. 2, 52 the plantain, and its flower Ja iv.440 (= kadali- puppha C.; so read for kandala˚); and perhaps at Thig 260 for pattali (q.v.), which is expld as kadali (-makula) at Thag-a 211.

Sattava = satta2

Ja v.351. Cp. Lal 520.

a diaeretic sattva

Satti1

(f.) ability, power Dhtp 508 Usually in phrase yathā satti as much as one can do according to one’s ability Cp i.106; Dhp-a i.399; or yathā sattiṃ DN i.102, or y. sattiyā Dhp-a i.92.

fr. śak, cp. Vedic śakti

Satti2

(f.) 1. knife, dagger, sword AN iv.130; Ja ii.153; Vism 313 (dīgha-daṇḍa˚ with a long handle); Dhp-a i.189; Dhp-a ii.134 (tikhiṇa˚ a sharp knife). mukha˚; piercing words Ja i.341.

2. a spear, javelin SN i.13; AN ii.117; Ja i.150.

-pañjara lattice work of spears DN ii.164. -laṅghana javelin dance Ja i.430. -simbali-vana the forest of swords (in purgatory) Ja v.453. -sūla a sword stake often in simile ˚ûpamā kāmā SN i.128; AN iii.97; Vism 341 Also Name of a purgatory Ja v.143 sq.

cp. Vedic śakti, orig. identical with satti1

Sattika

see tala˚.

Sattu1

an enemy Ja v.94 (acc. pl. sattavo); Vism 234 (˚nimmathana).

Vedic śatru

Sattu2

barley-meal, flour Vin ii.116 (satthu); Nd i.372; Ja iii.343 sq.; Pv iii.13; Dhs 646.

-āpaṇa baker’s shop Ja vi.365. -pasibbaka flour sack ˚bhasta id. Ja iii.346.

cp. Sk. śaktu

Sattuka

an enemy Ja iii.154; Mvu 32, Mvu 18.

fr. sattu1

Sattha1

(nt.) a weapon, sword, knife; coll. “arms” DN i.4, DN i.56; Snp 309, Snp 819 (expld as 3: kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚, referring to AN iv.42 at Nd i.151); Ja i.72, Ja i.504; Pv iii.102; Snp-a 458 (˚mukhena); Pv-a 253. Often in combn daṇḍa + sattha (cp daṇḍa 4), coll. for “arms,” Vin i.349; DN i.63; AN iv.249 Nd ii.576satthaṃ āharati to stab oneself SN i.121 SN iii.123; SN iv.57 sq.

-kamma application of the knife, incision, operation Vin i.205; Snp-a 100. -kāraka an assassin Vin iii.73 -vaṇijjā trade in arms AN iii.208. -hāraka an assassin Vin iii.73; SN iv.62.

cp. Vedic śastra, fr. śas to cut

Sattha2

(nt.) a science, art, lore Mil 3; Snp-a 327, Snp-a 447vāda˚; science of right belief Snp-a 540; sadda˚; grammar Snp-a 266; supina dream-telling Snp-a 564.

cp. Vedic śāstra, fr. śās to teach

Sattha3

a caravan DN ii.130, DN ii.339; Vin i.152, Vin i.292; Nd i.446; Dhp 123 (appa˚ with a small c.) Mil 351.

-gamanīya (magga) a caravan road Vin iv.63. -vāsa encampment DN ii.340, DN ii.344. -vāsika & ˚vāsin; caravan people Ja i.333. -vāha a caravan leader, a merchant DN ii.342; Vv 847 (cp. Vv-a 337); leader of a band teacher; used as Ep. of the Buddha SN i.192; Iti 80, Iti 108; Vin i.6. In exegesis of term Satthā at Nd i.446 = Nd ii.630 = Vism 208.

sa3 + attha; Sk. sārtha

Sattha4

told, taught Ja ii.298 (v.l. siṭṭha).

pp. of sāsati; śās

Sattha5

(adj.) able, competent Ja iii.173 (= samattha C.).

wrong for satta = śakta

Sattha6

breathed: see vissattha.

cp. Sk. śvasta, śvas

Satthaka1

(nt.) a knife, scissors Vin ii.115 (daṇḍa˚, with a handle); Ja v.254 (as one of the 8 parikkhāras); Mil 282. aya˚; at Ja v.338 read ˚paṭṭaka.

-nisādana [cp. Sk. niśātana] knife-sharpening Dhp-a i.308, cp. Mil 282 ˚nisāna [ = Sk. niśāna]. -vāta a cutting pain AN i.101 = AN i.307; Ja iii.445.

fr. sattha1

Satthaka2

(adj.) belonging to a caravan, caravan people, merchant Pv-a 274.

fr. sattha3

Satthar

teacher, master ■ nom. satthā DN i.49; Snp 179; acc. satthāraṃ DN i.163; Snp 153, Snp 343; instr. satthārā DN i.163; instr. satthunā Mvu 32, Mvu 19; gen. satthu DN i.110; Iti 79; Vin i.12 gen. satthuno DN ii.128; Snp 547, Snp 573, loc. satthari Dhs 1004; nom. and acc. pl. satthāro DN i.230; AN i.277; Mil 4; gen. pl. satthārānaṃ Ja i.509 ■ See e.g. DN i.230; AN i.277; Vin i.8; Thig 387 ■ The 6 teachers (as in detail at DN i.52–⁠59 & var. places) are Pūraṇa Kassapa, Makkhali Gosāla, Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta, Ajita-Kesakambalī.

5 teachers at Vin ii.186; AN iii.123.

3 at DN i.230; AN i.277. The Master par excellence is the Buddha DN i.110 DN ii.128; DN iii.119 sq.; AN iii.248; AN iv.120, AN iv.460; Snp 153, Snp 545 Snp 955 (see exegesis in detail at Nd i.446 = Nd ii.630), 1148 Vism 389, Vism 401, Vism 604gaṇa-satthar leader of a company Ja ii.41, Ja ii.72; satthāra-dassana sight of the Master Snp-a 49; satthu-d-anvaya successor of the M. Snp 556.

Venic śāstṛ, n. ag. fr. śās

Satthi1

(nt. & f.) the thigh Vin ii.161; Thag 151; Vv 8117; Ja ii.408; Ja iii.83; Ja vi.528; antarā˚ between the thighs AN ii.245.

cp. Sk. sakthi

Satthika

(adj.) belonging to a caravan DN ii.344.

fr. sattha3

Satthu

see sattu2; satthu˚; see satthar.

Satthuka

“having a teacher,” in atīta˚; whose teacher is dead DN ii.154.

belonging to the whole cpd.

Satthuna

a friend Ja i.365.

?

Satthuvaṇṇa

gold (lit. the colour of the Master) Vin iii.238, Vin iii.240.

satthar˚ + vaṇṇa

Sathera

(adj.) including the Theras AN ii.169

sa3 + thera

Sadattha

the highest good, ideal DN ii.141; MN i.4; AN v.207 sq.; Dhp 166; Mvu 3, Mvu 24. It may be taken as sa4 + attha (with euphonic -d- ), i.e. one’s own good, as it is expld by Bdhgh at Dhp-a iii.160 (“sake atthe”), & adopted in trsl;n at Dial. ii.154.

sat (= sant) + attha

Sadatthuta

(adj.) always praised Ja iv.101 (= nicca-pasattha C.).

sadā + thuta

Sadara

(adj.) fearful, unhappy AN ii.172; MN i.280, MN i.465 = DN iii.57 (reads dd ).

sa3 + dara

Sadasa

a squatting mat with a fringe Vin iv.171.

sa + dasā

Sadassa

a horse of good breed AN i.289.

sat(= sant) + assa

Sadā

(adv.) always Snp 1041, Snp 1087, Snp 1119; Nd ii.631 (where long stereotype definition); Dhp 79; Pv ii.811 (= sabbakālaṃ yāvajīvaṃ Pv-a 110); ii.937 (= sabbakālaṃ divase divase sāyañ ca pāto ca Pv-a 127) iv.130.

-matta “always revelling,” Name of a palace Ja i.363 sq (cp. Divy 603); a class of devas DN ii.260.

fr. saṃ˚

Sadisa

(adj.) similar, like, equal DN ii.261; SN iii.48 sq.; AN i.125 = Pp 35; Vin i.8; Ja i.191; Dhs 116; Vism 543 = Vb-a 148. Cp. sādisa.

sa2 + disa = dṛśa

Saderita

see saterita.

Sadevaka

(adj.) together with the devas, with the deva world DN i.62; DN iii.76, DN iii.135; Snp 86; Vin i.8 Vin i.11; Dhp 44; DN-a i.174. At Ja i.14 sadevake (loc.) is used in the sense of “in the world of men & gods.”

sa3 + deva + ka

Sadevika

(adj.) together with his queen Mvu 33, Mvu 70.

sa3 + devī + ka

Sadda

1. sound, noise DN i.79, DN i.152; iii. 102 sq., 146, 234 244 sq., 269, 281; MN iii.56, MN iii.267; AN iii.30 sq.; AN iv.91, AN iv.248; Ja i.3 (ten sounds); Snp 71; Vism 408 (var. kinds); Dhs 621 (udaka˚); Dhp-a ii.7 (udrīyana˚); defd at Vism 446 (“sota-paṭihanana-lakkhaṇa,” etc.) & at Vb-a 45 (“sappatī ti saddo, udāhariyatī ti attho”).

2. voice Ja ii.108.

3. word Vin i.11; Iti 114; Dhp-a i.15 (itthi˚) Vb-a 387 (in nirutti); Snp-a 261, Snp-a 318, Snp-a 335.

-kovida a grammarian or phonetician Snp-a 321 -dhātu element of sound Dhs 707. -naya science of grammar, etymology Kp-a 107. -bheda word analysis Vism 519 sq. -vidū a grammarian Snp-a 169. -vedhin shooting by sound Mvu 23, Mvu 85. -sattha science of words, grammar Snp-a 266. -siddhi analysis or correct formation of a word, grammatical explanation Snp-a 304 Snp-a 551.

cp. late Vedic śabda; BSk. śabda as nt. at Avs i.3

Saddana

(nt.) making a noise Dhtm 401.

fr. śabd: see saddāyati

Saddala

(adj.) grassy Thag 211; Ja i.87; vi. 518; Mil 286; Pv ii.1210 (= taruṇa-tiṇa Pv-a 158).

cp. Sk. śādvala

Saddahati

to believe, to have faith DN ii.115 DN ii.244; SN iii.225; Pv ii.83; Ja v.480; Dhp-a ii.27. ppr saddahanto DN-a i.81; Pv-a 148 (a˚), 151 (a˚), 285;; saddahāna SN i.20, SN i.214; Snp 186; Iti 112. Pot. saddheyya Ja ii.446 (= saddaheyya C.); 2nd pl. saddahetha Ja iii.192 Ja iii.3rd pl. saddheyyuṃ SN ii.255. At Ja vi.575 (Pot.) saddahe seems to be used as an exclamation in the sense of “I wonder” (cp. maññe) ■ saddahase at Pv iv.81 is to be read saddāyase (see saddāyati) ■ grd. saddhātabba Ja ii.37; Ja v.480; Pv-a 217; saddahātabba DN ii.346 saddahitabba Mil 310; saddheyya Vin iii.188; and saddhāyitabba (Caus.!) Pv-a 109. A Caus. aor. 2 sg is (mā)… saddahesi Ja vi.136140-ger. saddhāya Ja v.176 (= saddahitvā C.); inf. saddhātuṃ Ja v.445. pp. (Caus.) saddhāyita ■ Caus. II. saddahāpeti to make believe, to convince; Pot. ˚dahāpeyya Ja vi.575; Pv iv.125; fut. ˚dahāpessati Ja i.294.

Vedic śrad-dhā, only in impers. forms grd. śrad-dadhāna; pp. śrad-dhita; inf. śrad-dhā; cp. Av ƶraƶ-dā id.; Lat. cred-(d)o (cp. “creed”); Oir. cretim to believe. Fr. Idg. *kred (= cord˚ heart) + *dhe, lit. to put one’s heart on

Saddahanā

(f.) believing, trusting, having faith Nd ii.632; Dhs 12, Dhs 25; Ne 15, Ne 19; Dhp-a i.76.

fr. sad + dhā

Saddāyati

cp. Epic Sk. śabdayati & śabdāyati] 1. to make a sound Mil 258; Pv iv.81 (saddāyase read for saddahase); iv.161 (id.) Ud 61 (˚āyamāna noisy).

2. to call, summon (with acc.) Ja iii.288.

Denom. fr. sadda; i.e. śabd

Saddita

sounded, called Sdhp 100.

pp. of śabd; cp. saddāyati

Saddūla

a leopard Mil 23.

cp. Sk. śārdūla

Saddha1

(adj.) 1. believing faithful DN i.171; SN i.43; SN ii.159 sq.; AN i.150; AN ii.164 AN ii.227 sq.; AN iii.3 sq., 34, 182; iv.38, 145, 314 sq.; v.10 sq. 124 sq.; Snp 188, Snp 371; Dh. 8; Pv i.104; iv.186; Dhp-a ii.82as(s)addha unbelieving Pv-a 42, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 243 passim (see a˚).

2. credulous Snp 853; Dhp 97.

orig. adj. of saddha2, but felt to be adj. of saddhā; cp. BSk. śrāddha Avs i.83, Avs i.383

Saddha2

;a funeral rite in honour of departed relatives connected with meals and gifts to the brahmins DN i.97; AN i.166; AN v.269, AN v.273; DN-a i.267; saddhaṃ pamuñcati to give up offerings, to abandon Brahmanism Vin i.7; DN ii.39; Snp 1146. The word is n. according to Abhp and AN v.269–⁠273; loc. ˚e, DN i.97; Ja ii.360; kaṃ saddhaṃ (acc. in a gāthā), seems to be f.; Com. ib. 360 has saddhā-bhattaṃ, a funeral repast (v.l. saddha-˚) Thus it seems to be confused with saddhā.

cp. Epic Sk. & Sūtra literature śrāddha, fr. śrad-dhā

Saddhamma

the true dhamma, the best religion, good practice, the “doctrine of the good” (so Geiger, Pali Dhamma pp. 53, 54, q.v. for detailed discussion of the term) MN i.46; SN v.172 sq.; AN i.69; AN iii.7 sq., 174 sq. 435 sq.; v.169, 317; Snp 1020; Dhp 38; Ja v.483; Dhp-a iv.95. Seven saddhammas: MN i.354, MN i.356; DN iii.252 DN iii.282; AN iv.108 sq ■ Opp. a-saddhamma (q.v.); fourAN ii.47; eight: Vin ii.202.

-garu paying homage to the true religion SN i.140 -savana hearing the (preaching of the) true dhamma DN iii.227, DN iii.274; AN i.279; AN ii.245; AN iv.25 sq., 221; v.115 sq.

sad(= sant) + dhamma, cp. BSk. saddharma, e.g. Jtm 224

Saddhā

(f.) faith (on term cp. Geiger, Saṃyutta trsln ii.452) DN i.63; DN iii.164 sq. SN i.172 = Snp 76; SN v.196; Dhp 144; AN i.150, AN i.210; AN iii.4 sq. 352; iv.23; v.96; Dhs 12; Mil 34 sq.; Tikp 61, 166 277, 282 ■ instr. saddhāya (used as adv.) in faith, by faith in (acc. or gen.) Vin ii.289 (āyasmantānaṃ) Ja v.176 (pabbajita); Pv-a 49 (kammaphalaṃ s.); or shortened to saddhā (-pabbajita) MN i.123; AN i.24; Ja i.130. The same phrase as saddhāya pabbajita at SN i.120 is expld as “saddahitvā” by Bdhgh (see K.S. i.321), thus taking it as ger.

-ānusārin walking according to faith MN i.479; AN i.74 Pp 15; Ne 112, Ne 189. -indriya (saddh˚) the faculty i.e. the moral sense, of faith DN iii.239, DN iii.278; AN ii.149; SN v.193, SN v.377; Dhs 12, Dhs 62, Dhs 75; Ne 19. -cariyā living in faith Vism 101. -deyya a gift in faith DN i.5; Vin i.298; Vin iv.30; DN-a i.81. -vimutta emancipated through faith MN i.478; AN i.74, AN i.118 sq.; Pp 15; Ne 190 -vimutti emancipation through faith Pp 15.

cp. Vedic śraddhā: see saddahati

Saddhātar

a believer Sdhp 39.

n. ag. fr. saddahati, i.e. sad + dhātar

Saddhāyika

(adj.) trustworthy DN ii.320; AN iv.109 (so read for ˚sika); Thig 43 Thig 69.

fr. saddhāya, ger. of saddahati

Saddhāyita

one who is trusted; nt. that which is believed, faith Pv ii.85 May be misspelling for saddhāyika.

pp. of saddahati; BSk. śraddhayita

Saddhiṃ

(& saddhi˚) (adv.) together; as prep. (following the noun): in company with (instr.) DN i.31; Vin i.32 Vin iii.188 (expld as “ekato”); Ja i.189; Ja ii.273; DN-a i.35; Mil 23; also with loc. DN-a i.15; or gen. Vin ii.154; Ja i.420. As adv. saddhiṃ agamāsi Ja i.154, cp. saddhiṃkīḷita Ja ii.20.

-cara companion Snp 45, Snp 46 (= ekato cara Nd ii.633) Dhp 328. -vihārika (saddhi˚) co-resident, fellow-bhikkhu pupil Vin i.45 sq.; AN iii.70; Ja i.182, Ja i.224; Vism 94; Dhp-a ii.19. -vihārin id. AN ii.239; AN iii.69; Ja i.1; f ˚vihārinī Vin iv.291.

in form = Vedic sadhrīṃ “towards one aim,” but in meaning = Vedic sadhryak (opp. viṣvak, cp. P. visuṃ) “together.” Cp. also Vedic saṃyak = P. sammā. The BSk. is sārdhaṃ, e.g. s vihārin Avs ii.139

Saddhiya

(nt.) only in neg. ; (q.v.).

abstr. fr. *śraddhya

Sadhana

(adj). wealthy, rich DN i.73; Ja i.334.

sa3 + dhana

Sadhamma

one’s own religion or faith MN i.523; Snp 1020; Bv ii.6 = Ja i.3.

sa4 + dhamma

Sadhammika

co-religionist DN ii.273.

sa2 + dhamma + ika

San1

a dog; nom. sg DN i.166 = MN i.77; SN i.176; SN iii.150; Kv 336. For other forms of the same base see suvāṇa.

cp. Vedic śvā, gen. śunaḥ; Av. spā, Gr. κύων; Lat. canis, Oir. cū, Goth. hunds = hound

San2

(= saṃ) acc. of sa4.

Sanacca

(nt.) dancing (-party) Vin ii.267.

sa3 + nacca

Sanati

see saṇati.

Sanantana

(adj.) primeval, of old; for ever eternal DN ii.240, DN ii.244; SN i.189 (cp. K.S. i.321: porāṇaka santānaṃ vā paṇḍitānaṃ dhamma); Dhp-a i.51.

for sanātana (cp. purātana); Idg. *seno = Gr. ε ̔́νος old; Sk. sanaḥ in old times; Av. hana old, Lat. seneo, senex (“senile”), senatus; Goth sineigs old; Oir. sen old

Sanābhika

(adj.) having a nave (of a wheel) DN ii.17, DN ii.172; AN ii.37; at both places combd with sa-nemika “with a felly” (i.e. complete).

sa3 + nābhi + ka

Sanāmika

(adj.) having a name, called Bv ii.194 = Ja i.28.

sa3 + nāma + ika

Sanidassana

(adj.) visible DN iii.217; Dhs 1087.

sa3 + nidassana

Sant

1. being, existing DN i.61, DN i.152; AN i.176; Iti 62 sq.; Snp 98, Snp 124.

2. good, true SN i.17; Dhp 151. Cases: nom. sg. m. santo Snp 98; Mil 32; Nd ii.635 (= samāna); f. satī (q.v.); nt. santaṃ AN v.8; Pv-a 192 acc. santaṃ DN ii.65; & sataṃ Ja iv.435 (opp. asaṃ); instr satā DN ii.55; loc. sati DN ii.32; AN i.176; AN iii.338; Snp 81; Dhp 146; Iti 85; & sante DN i.61; abl. santato Ne 88; Dhs-a 206 sq ■ pl. nom. santo MN i.24; SN i.71; Snp 450; Iti 62; Dhp 151; nt. santāni DN i.152; acc. sante Snp 94 Snp 665; gen. sataṃ MN i.24; SN i.17; Snp 227; instr. sabbhi DN ii.246; SN i.17, SN i.56; Mil 221 = Ja v.49; Dhp 151; loc santesu ■ Compar. santatara Iti 62; superl. sattama (q.v.).

ppr. of atthi

Santa1

calmed, tranquil, peaceful, pure DN i.12; Vin i.4; SN i.5; AN ii.18; Snp 746; Pv iv.134 (= upasanta-kilesa Pv-a 230); Mil 232, Mil 409; Vism 155 (˚anga; opp. oḷārik’anga); Dhp-a ii.13; Dhp-a iii.83 ■ nt peace, bliss, nibbāna SN iv.370.

-indriya one whose senses are tranquil AN ii.38; Snp 144; Vin i.195; Ja i.506; -kāya of calmed body Dhp 378; Dhp-a iv.114. -dhamma peaceful condition, quietude Ja i.506; -bhāva id. Mil 265. -mānasa of tranquil mind Vin i.195; Ja i.506. -vāsa peaceful state Dhp-a iv.114 -vutti living a peaceful life Iti 30, Iti 121.

pp. of sammati1

Santa2

tired, wearied, exhausted Dhp 60; Ja i.498; Pv ii.936 (= parissama-patta Pv-a 127).

pp. of sammati2

Santaka1

(adj.) 1. belonging to Ja i.122; nt. property Ja i.91, Ja i.494; Dhp-a i.346.

2. due to (gen.) Ja iii.408; Ja iv.37.

3. (being in the power of Ja iv.260 (bhaya˚).

fr. sant; cp. BSk. santaka Divy 280 etc.

Santaka2

(adj.) limited (opp. anantika) SN v.272.

sa3 + antaka

Santacā

(f.) bark Ja v.202 (sattacaṃ?).

?

Santajjeti

to frighten, scold, menace Ja i.479; Ja v.94; Thag-a 65; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 195.

saṃ + tajjeti

Santataṃ

(adv.) [ satataṃ, or fr. saṃ + tan ] continually, only in cpds.: ˚kārin consistent AN ii.187; ˚vutti of consistent behaviour AN ii.187; MN i.339; ˚sīla steady in character MN i.339.

Santatara

see sant.

Santati

(f.) 1. continuity, duration, subsistence Dhs 643; Ne 79; Mil 72, Mil 185 Vb-a 8, Vb-a 170, Vb-a 173; Vv-a 25; Vism 431, Vism 449. citta˚ continuity of consciousness Kv 458; cp. Cpd. 6, 1531 252 sq.; dhamma˚; continuity of states Mil 40; rūpa˚ of form Vb-a 21; saṅkhāra˚; causal connection of material things Thag 716.

2. lineage Mil 160.

fr. saṃ + tan, lit. stretch

Santatta1

heated, glowing DN ii.335; MN i.453; SN i.169 (divasa˚); Ja iv.118; Mil 325; Pv-a 38 (soka˚).

pp. of santappati

Santatta2

frightened, disturbed Ja iii.77 (= santrasta C.).

pp. of santasati

Santaneti

(& ˚tāneti) to continue AN iii.96 sq.; SN iv.104; Pp 66 sq.; Snp-a 5 (see santāyati).

Caus. of saṃ + tan

Santappati

to be heated or chafed; fig. to grieve, sorrow MN i.188; Ja iii.153 ■ pp. santatta1 Caus. ˚tāpeti to burn, scorch, torment MN i.128; SN iv.56 sq ■ pp. santāpita.

saṃ + tappati1

Santappita

satisfied, pleased Ja ii.44; Pv ii.811 (= pīṇita Pv-a 110).

pp. of santappeti

Santappeti

to satisfy, please DN i.109; Vin i.18; Ja i.50, Ja i.272 ■ pp. santappita.

Caus. of saṃ + tappati2

Santara

(adj.) inside; in compn ˚uttara inner & outer Vin iii.214; Vin iv.281; ˚uttarena with an inner & outer garment Vin i.298; Thag-a 171 ˚bāhira within & without DN i.74; Dhp 315; Ja i.125; DN-a i.218; Dhp-a iii.488.

sa3 + antara, cp. E. with-in

Santarati

to be in haste, to be agitated; ppr. ˚amāna (˚rūpa) Ja iii.156, Ja iii.172; Ja vi.12, Ja vi.451.

saṃ + tarati2

Santavant

(adj.) tranquil Dhp 378.

fr. santa1

Santasati

to be frightened or terrified, to fear, to be disturbed Mil 92. ppr. santasaṃ Ja vi.306 (a˚) & santasanto Ja iv.101 (a˚); Pot. santase Ja iii.147 Ja v.378; ger. santasitvā Ja ii.398 ■ pp. santasita santatta;.

saṃ + tasati2

Santasita

frightened Mil 92; Pv-a 260 (= suṭṭhu tasita).

pp. of santasati

Santāna

(nt.) 1. spreading, ramification, tendril (valli˚) Kp-a 48.

2. one of the 5 celestial trees Ja vi.239 (˚maya made of its flowers).

3. (also m, continuity, succession; lineage SN iii.143; DN-a i.46; Dhs-a 63, Dhs-a 217, Dhs-a 297; Vism 555; Vb-a 164. Cp. citta˚ continuity of consciousness Cpd. 1677.

fr. saṃ + tan

Santānaka

1. (nt.) = santāna 1; Vv-a 94, Vv-a 162 (˚valli a sort of long creeper). mūla˚; a spreading root SN iii.155; Ja i.277.

2. = santāna 2; Vv-a 12. 3. (nt.) a cobweb Vin i.48.

4. offspring SN i.8.

santanā + ka

Santāpa

(adj.-n.) burning; heat, fire; fig. torment, torture Snp 1123 (cp. Nd ii.636); Ja i.502; Mil 97, Mil 324; Vb-a 70 (various), 245 (aggi˚, suriya˚); Sdhp 9, Sdhp 572.

fr. saṃ + tap

Santāpita

heated, aglow Thig 504.

pp. of santāpeti

Santāpeti

see santappati.

Santāyati

to preserve (connect?) Vism 688 (better ˚dhāyati) = Snp-a 5 (reads ˚tāneti).

saṃ + tāyati

Santāraṇa

(nt.) & ˚ī (f.) conveying to the other shore SN iv.174; MN i.134 ■ f. santāraṇī Ap 234 (scil. nāvā).

fr. saṃ + tāreti1

Santāsa

trembling, fear, shock AN ii.33; SN iii.85; Ja i.274; Mil 146, Mil 207; Pv-a 22.

saṃ + tāsa

Santāsaniya

(adj.) making frightened, inspiring terror Mil 387.

fr. saṃ + tāsana

Santāsin

(adj.) trembling, frightened Dhp 351.

fr. santāsa

Santi

(f.) tranquillity, peace Snp 204; DN ii.157; AN ii.24; Dhp 202.

-kamma act of appeasing (the gods), pacification DN i.12; DN-a i.97. -pada “the place of tranquillity” tranquil state, i.e. Nibbāna AN ii.18; Vv-a 219. -vāda an advocate of mental calm Snp 845 (˚vada in verse) Nd i.203.

fr. śam, cp. Sk. ˚śānti

Santika

(nt.) vicinity, presence; santikaṃ into the presence of, towards Ja i.91, Ja i.185; santikā from the presence of, from Ja i.43, Ja i.83, Ja i.189; santike in the presence of, before, with DN i.79, DN i.144; Dhp 32 = Mil 408; Snp 379; Vin i.12; SN i.33; Ja v.467; with acc. SN iv.74; with abl. Mvu 205; nibbānasantike Dhp 372; instr. santikena = by, along with Ja ii.301 (if not a mistake instead of santikaṃ or santike?).

-āvacara keeping or being near DN i.206; DN ii.139; Ja i.67.

sa2 + antika

Santikā

(f.) a kind of game, “spellicans” (Rh. D.); (Kern: knibbelspel) DN i.6; Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; DN-a i.85.

unclear in origin & meaning

Santiṭṭhati

1. to stand, stand still, remain, continue AN iv.101 (udakaṃ = stands still), 282, 302 sq. Pp 31; Ja i.26.

2. to be established, to be put into order Vin ii.11.

3. to stick to, to be fixed or settled to be composed DN ii.206; DN iii.239 (citta); SN v.321; Vin i.9, Vin i.15; Iti 43.

4. to restrain oneself Ja i.438. 5. to wait for (acc.) Dhp-a i.50Forms: pres. santiṭṭhati DN ii.206; SN iii.133; saṇṭhahati Ja vi.160; & saṇṭhāti Pp 31; Ja iv.469. ppr. saṇṭhahanto Vin i.9; Pot saṇṭhaheyya Vin ii.11; SN v.321. aor. saṇṭhāsi Vin i.15 saṇṭhahiṃsu (3rd pl.) SN ii.224. Inf. saṇṭhātuṃ Ja i.438; Dhp-a i.50 ■ pp. saṇṭhita -Caus. II. saṇṭhapeti (˚ṭhāpeti);.

saṃ + tiṭṭhati

Santīraṇa

(nt.) investigation, decision; as t.t. denoting a stage in the act of sense-cognition judging an impression (see Cpd. 28, 40, 238) DN-a i.194; Dhs-a 264, Dhs-a 269, Dhs-a 272; Vism 459. As ˚ā (f.) at Ne 82, Ne 191. -˚kicca function of judging Tikp 33 Vism 21, Vism 454.

saṃ + tīraṇa

Santuṭṭha

pleased, happy DN i.60, DN i.71; MN ii.6; AN ii.209; AN iv.232 sq.; AN v.25, AN v.67, AN v.130, AN v.154. mahā˚ the greatly contented one, the Arahant Dhs-a 407.

pp. of santussati

Santuṭṭhi

(f.) satisfaction, contentment DN i.71; MN i.13; Snp 265; Dhp 204; AN ii.27, AN ii.31; AN iii.219 sq. 432 (a˚); Dhp-a iv.111.

saṃ + tuṭṭhi

Santuṭṭhitā

(f.) state of contentment DN iii.115; AN i.12; Pp 25; Vism 53; Dhs 1367 (a˚).

abstr. formation fr. last

Santuleyya

(adj.) commeasurable; neg. ; Ja vi.283.

metric for ˚tulya, grd. of saṃ + tuleti

Santus(s)ita

contented, pleased, happy SN iii.45 (˚tussit’ attā); Snp 1040; Dhp 362 (= suṭṭhu tusita Dhp-a iv.90); Mhbv 31 (ss).

pp. of santussati

Santussaka

(adj.) content Snp 144.

fr. santussati

Santussati

to be contented, or pleased, or happy; ppr. ˚amāna Snp 42 ■ pp. santuṭṭha & ˚tusita;.

saṃ + tussati

Santosa

contentment DN-a i.204.

fr. saṃ + tuṣ

Santhata

1. spread, strewn with (-˚), covered DN ii.160; Vin iii.32; Snp 401, Snp 668dhamani˚gatta having the body strewn with veins, emaciated Vin iii.146 = Ja ii.283; Ja i.346, Ja i.350 & passim (see dhamani). Kern,; Toev. s. v. considers santata the right spelling.

2. (nt.) a rug or mat Vin iii.224; Vv 635 (= tiṇa-santharaka Vv-a 262).

pp. of santharati

Santhatika

(adj.) sleeping on a rug Mil 342, Mil 359.

fr. santhata 2

Santhana

(nt.) 1. appeasing Dhp 275.

2. satisfaction Vv 186.

fr. śam, cp. Sk. śāntvana

Santhamati

at Ja i.122 is to be read saṇdhamati “to blow.”

Santhambhati

to restrain oneself, to keep firm Snp 701 (imper. med. 2nd sg. ˚thambhassu) Pp 65; Ja i.255; Ja iii.95 ■ Caus. ˚thambheti to make stiff or rigid, to numb Ja i.10.

saṃ + thambhati

Santhambhanā

(f.) & ˚thambhitatta (nt.) stiffening, stiffness, rigidity Dhs 636; Dhs-a 324; Ja i.10 (a-santhambhana-bhāva).

abstr. fr. santhambhati

Santhara

a couch or mat Vin ii.162; AN i.277; Ap 97 (tiṇa˚).

fr. saṃ + str

Santharaka

= santhara; only as tiṇa˚; made of grass Vin i.24; MN i.501; Ja i.360; Vv-a 262.

Santharaṇaka

(adj.) spreading, strewing; ˚vāta a wind which strews things about Snp-a 67.

fr. santharati

Santharati

to spread, strew DN ii.84 ■ pp. santhata ■ Caus. santhāreti Mvu 29, Mvu 12 ■ Caus. II santharāpeti to cause to be spread Vin iv.39; Mvu 29, Mvu 9.

saṃ + tharati

Santhariṃ

(adv.) by way of spreading; in sabba˚; so that all is spread, prepared DN ii.84; cp. Vin i.227, Vin i.384.

fr. santhara

Santhava

acquaintance, intimacy SN i.17; Snp 37, Snp 168, Snp 207, Snp 245; Ja i.158; Ja ii.27, Ja ii.42 Ja ii.180; Dhs 1059; Dhs-a 364; Dhp-a i.235. nom. pl santhavāni Snp 844 = SN iii.9; Ja iv.98. -˚jāta having become acquainted, an acquaintance Nd i.198a˚vissāsin intimate without being acquainted AN iii.136.

fr. saṃ + stu, cp. santhuta

Santhavana

(nt.) acquaintance Dhs-a 364.

fr. saṃ + thavati

Santhāgāra

a council hall, a mote hall DN i.91; DN ii.147; AN ii.207; MN i.228, MN i.353, MN i.457; MN iii.207; DN-a i.256; Ja iv.72, Ja iv.147; Vin i.233; Vv-a 298; Dhp-a i.347. Cp. saṇṭhāna 3.

Sk. sansthāgāra

Santhāna

see saṇṭhāna.

Santhāra

spreading, covering, floor(ing) SN i.170; Vin ii.120 (3 kinds of floors: iṭṭhakā˚, silā˚ dāru˚, i.e. of tiles, flags, wood); AN i.136 (paṇṇa˚); Ja vi.24 (id.); Ja i.92; Pts i.176.

2. (cp. paṭi˚) friendly welcome AN i.93 (āmisa˚ & dhamma˚).;

saṃ + thāra

Santhāraka

a spread, cover, mat Vin ii.113 (tiṇa˚), 116.

santhāra + ka cp. BSk. sanstāraka Mvu iii.272

Santhuta

(adj.) acquainted, familiar Ja i.365; Ja iii.63 (cira˚); v.448 (so read for santhata); Sdhp 31 Neg. ; Ja iii.63, Ja iii.221; Ja vi.310. Cp. santhava.

saṃ + thuta

Santhutika

(adj.) acquainted Vism 78.

fr. santhuta

Sanda1

1. (adj.) thick, dense; in -˚cchāya giving dense shade SN iv.194; Ja i.57, Ja i.249; DN-a i.209. (2) (thick) wood, forest; in -˚vihāra dwelling in the wood, life as a hermit Thag 688.

cp. Sk. sāndra

Sandati

to flow DN ii.128, DN ii.129 (aor. sandittha); Ja i.18; Ja vi.534 (v.l. sikandati siyandati?); Pv ii.104 (= pavatteti Pv-a 143) ■ Caus sandāpeti to cause to flow Mil 122 ■ pp. sanna. Cp. vissandati & vissandaka;.

syand; Dhtp 149: passavane

Sandana1

(nt.) trappings DN ii.188 (read sandāna?).

Sandana2

a chariot Mvu 21, Mvu 25; Dpvs 14, 56; Vv 642; Ja iv.103; Ja v.264; Ja vi.22.

cp. Vedic syandana

Sandamānikā

(f.) a chariot Vin iii.49; Vin iv.339; DN-a i.82; Kp-a 50; Vism 255.

fr. syand

Sandambhita

is Kern’s proposed reading for santhambhita at Ja vi.207.

fr. Sk. sandarbhati

Sandassaka

instructing MN i.145; AN ii.97; AN iv.296; SN v.162; Iti 107; Mil 373.

fr. sandassati, Caus. of sandissati

Sandassana

showing Ja i.67.

Sandahati

to put together, to connect, to fit, to arrange Ja iv.336; Mvu vii.18; ppr. med sandahamāna Dhs-a 113; ger. sandahitvā Ja iv.336 & sandhāya lit. after putting on Ja iv.258 (the arrow on to the bow); fig. with reference to, concerning MN i.503; Ja i.203, Ja i.274; Ja ii.177; Pv-a 87, Pv-a 89, Pv-a 110; towards Ja i.491; Ja iii.295. pp. sandhīyate [& sandhiyyate]; to be put together, to be self-contained Pp 32; to be connected Snp-a 376, Snp-a 572; to reflect upon, to resent Snp 366; to be reconciled Ja ii.114 ■ pp. saṃhita.

saṃ + dahati1

Sandahana

(nt.) applying, placing (an arrow) on the string Mil 352.

fr. saṃ + dhā

Sandāna

(nt.), a cord, tether, fetter DN ii.274; Thag 290; Dhp 398; Snp 622; Ja ii.32; Ud 77 (text sandhāna); Dhp-a iv.161.

saṃ + dāna, fr. to bind: see dāma

Sandāleti

to break; ger. sandālayitvāna Snp 62.

saṃ + dāleti

Sandiṭṭha

seen together, a friend Ja i.106, Ja i.442; Vin iii.42; yathāsandiṭṭhaṃ, where one’s friends live DN ii.98; SN v.152.

pp. of sandissati

Sandiṭṭhi

(f.) the visible world, worldly gain DN iii.45, DN iii.247; MN i.43; Snp 891; Vin ii.89; Nd i.288, Nd i.300 ˚parāmāsin infected with worldliness MN i.97.

fr. saṃ + dṛś

Sandiṭṭhika

visible; belonging to, of advantage to, this life, actual DN i.51 DN ii.93, DN ii.217; DN iii.5; MN i.85, MN i.474; AN i.156 sq.; AN ii.56, AN ii.198; SN i.9, SN i.117, SN iv.41, SN iv.339; Snp 567, Snp 1137; Vism 215 sq ■ As sandiṭṭhiyā (f.) at Ja vi.213

cp. BSk. sandṛṣṭika Divy 426

Sandita

bound, tied, Thag 290 (diṭṭhi-sandāna˚).

fr. saṃ + : see sandāna

Sandiddha

smeared, indistinct, husky Vin ii.202; DN-a i.282.

saṃ + diddha

Sandiyyati

& sandīyati to be vexed, to resent SN ii.200 sq.; Ja vi.570 (spelt wrongly sandhīyati C. expls as “manku hoti”).

saṃ + diyyati(= dīyati) = Sk. dīyate of dyati, i.e. 2 to cut: see dātta

Sandissati

to be seen together with, to be engaged in, or to tally, agree with, to live conformably to (loc., e.g. dhamme) DN i.102; DN ii.75; SN v.177; Snp 50; DN ii.127; Ne 23; ppr. a-saṃdissamāna invisible Dāvs iv.30; Caus. saṃdasseti to teach, instruct DN i.126; DN ii.95; Vin i.18; to compare, verify, DN ii.124; ppr. sandassiyamāna DN ii.124; Ja vi.217 (sunakhesu sandissanti, i.e. they are of no more value).

saṃ + dissati

Sandīpeti

to kindle Ja v.32.

saṃ + dīpeti

Sandesa

news, message Mvu 18, Mvu 13.

Sk. sandeśa

Sandeha

1. accumulation; the human body Dhp 148.

2. doubt Mil 295.

saṃ + deha

Sandosa

pollution, defilement MN i.17; AN iii.106, AN iii.358; AN v.292; Snp 327.

saṃ + dosa

Sandhana

(nt.) property, belongings MN ii.180.

saṃ + dhana

Sandhanta

blown, smelted (of gold) AN i.253.

pp. of sandhamati

Sandhamati

to blow, to fan Ja i.122. - pp. sandhanta.

saṃ + dhamati

Sandhātar

one who puts together, a conciliator DN i.4; DN iii.171; MN i.345; AN ii.209; Pp 57.

saṃ + dhātar

Sandhāna

(nt.) 1. uniting, conciliation, friendship DN-a i.74; Dhs-a 113.

2. bond, fetter Ud 77 (read sandāna? ).

fr. saṃ + dhā

Sandhāpana

(nt.) combination Vv-a 349.

fr. sandhāpeti, Caus. of sandahati

Sandhāya

see sandahati.

Sandhāraka

(adj.) checking, restraining Vism 205.

fr. sandhāreti

Sandhārana

(nt.) checking Mil 352.

fr. sandhāreti

Sandhāreti

1. to hold, bear, carry Ja iii.184.

2. to hold up, support Ja iv.167.

3. to curb restrain, check Vin ii.212; Ja ii.26, Ja ii.59dussandhāriya difficult to keep back Ja iii.340.

saṃ + dhāreti

Sandhāvati

to run through, to transmigrate DN i.14; AN ii.1; SN iii.149; Ja i.503; aor. sandhāvissaṃ Dhp 153 = Ja i.76 (= apar’ âparaṃ anuvicariṃ Dhp-a iii.128).

saṃ + dhāvati

Sandhi

(m. & f.) 1. union, junction Mil 330 (of 2 roads); Bdhgh on SN ii.270 (between 2 houses). 2. breach, break, hole, chasm DN ii.83 = AN v.195; Thag 786; Ja v.459. āloka˚; a window Vin ii.172; sandhiṃ chindati to make a break, to break into a house DN i.52; DN-a i.159.

3. joint, piece, link Ja ii.88; Vism 277 (the 5, of kammaṭṭhāna); Mvu 33, Mvu 11; Mvu 34, Mvu 47; applied to the joints of the body Vism 185 (the 14 mahā˚); Dhs-a 324.

4. connection, combination Vb-a 191 (hetuphala˚ & phalahetu˚ etc.).

5. euphonic junction euphony, “sandhi” Snp-a 76. See pada˚.

6. agreement Mvu 9, Mvu 16.

-cheda (1) housebreaking Ja i.187 sq.; Ja ii.388 ■ (2) one who has brought rebirths (= paṭisandhi) to an end Dhp 97; Dhp-a ii.187; Dhp-a iii.257. -chedaka one who can cut a break, an underminer Ja vi.458. -bheda(ka) causing discord Ja iii.151. -mukha opening of a break (made by burglars) into a house Thag 786; Pv-a 4. -samala (-sankaṭīva) refuse heap of a house-sewer (cp. K.S. ii.181 203) DN ii.160; MN i.334 = SN ii.270.

fr. saṃ + ; dhā

Sandhika

(adj.) (-˚), in pañca˚; having 5 links or pieces Vism 277.

Sandhīyati

see sandahati.

Sandhunāti

to shake DN ii.336.

saṃ + dhunāti

Sandhūpeti

to fumigate SN iii.89; Pts ii.167. As sandhūpāyati to cause thick smoke or steam thickly, at Vin i.225; Snp p.15 (= samantā dhūpāyati Snp-a 154).

saṃ + dhūpeti

Sandhovati

to clean AN i.253.

saṃ + dhovati

Sandhovika

washing; kaṇṇa-sandhovikā khiḍḍā ear-washing sport or gambol (of elephants, with piṭṭhi˚; etc.) AN v.202. So probably for saṇadhovika at MN i.229, MN i.375. Cp. sāṇadhovana (?).

fr. sandhovati

Sanna1

sunk Dhp 327.

pp. of sīdati

Sanna2

flown Ja vi.203 (dadhi˚).

pp. of sandati

Sannakaddu

the tree Buchanania latifolia Abḥp 556.

lexicogr. Sk. sannakadru

Sannata

1. bent down, low Ja vi.58 (opp. unnata).

2. bent, prepared Ja v.215 (C. suphassita).

pp. of saṃ + nam, cp. sannāmeti

Sannaddha

1. fastened, bound, DN ii.350 (susannaddha); Mil 339.

2. put on, clothed (with Pv iv.136 (˚dussa).

3. armed, accoutred SN ii.284; Ja i.179; Dhp 387; Dhp-a iv.144; Pv-a 154 (˚dhanu-kalāpa).

pp. of sannayhati

Sannayhati

to tie, bind, fasten, to arm oneself Ja i.129; to array, arm DN ii.175; Vin i.342; to arrange, fit DN i.96; Ja i.273; aor. sannayhi DN i.96; inf sannayhituṃ Ja i.179; ger. sannayhitvā DN ii.175; Ja ii.77; & sannahitvā Ja i.273.

saṃ + nayhati

Sannāmeti

to bend MN i.365, MN i.439, MN i.450, MN i.507 = SN iv.188 (kāyaṃ sannāmeyya-i.e. to writhe) Cp. Cpd. 162 n. 5 (“strengthen”?).

Caus. of saṃ + nam

Sannāha

1. dressing, fastening together Pv-a 231.

2. armour, mail SN v.6; Ja ii.443; Th. 1, 543; Ja i.179.

fr. sannay ati

Sannikāsa

(adj.) resembling, looking like Ja iii.522; Ja v.87 = Ja vi.306; Ja v.169 (C. dassana); vi.240, 279.

saṃ + nikāsa

Sannikkhepana

(nt.) elimination Vb-a 355.

saṃ + nikkhepana

Sanniggaṇhāti

to restrain SN i.238.

saṃ + niggaṇhāti

Sannighāta

concussion, knocking against each other Dhs 621.

saṃ + nighāta

Sannicaya

accumulation, hoarding AN i.94; AN ii.23; Dhp 92; Vin ii.95; Vin iv.243; Dhp-a ii.171; AN iv.108 Kp-a 62 (lohita).

saṃ + nicaya

Sannicita

accumulated, hoarded Mil 120.

saṃ + nicita

Sanniṭṭhāna

(nt.) 1. conclusion, consummation, Ja ii.166.

2. resolve Ja i.19; Ja i.69; Ja i.187; Ja iv.167; Vin i.255 sq.

3. ascertainment, definite conclusion conviction, Ja vi.324; Vism 43.

saṃ + niṭṭhāna

Sannitāḷeti

to strike Ja v.71.

saṃ + nitāḷeti

Sannitodaka

(nt.) “pricking,” instigating, jeering DN i.189; AN i.187; SN ii.282.

fr. saṃ + ni + tud

Sannidhāna

(nt.) [saṃ + nidhāna) lit. “putting down together,” proximity Dāvs v.39.

Sannidhi

putting together, storing up DN i.6; Snp 306, Snp 924; Nd i.372; -kāra storing DN i.6; -kāraka storing up, store MN i.523; Vin i.209; Vin iv.87; DN iii.235; AN iii.109; AN iv.370. -kata stored up Vin ii.270; put by postponed Vin i.254.

saṃ + nidhi

Sannipatati

to assemble, come together Ja i.167; pp. ˚ita. Caus. sannipāteti to bring together convoke DN ii.76; Mil 6; Caus. II. sannipātāpeti to cause to be convoked or called together Ja i.58, Ja i.153, Ja i.271 Ja iii.376; Vin i.44; Vin iii.71.

saṃ + nipatati

Sannipatita

come together DN i.2; DN ii.76.

pp. of ˚nipatati

Sannipāta

1. union, coincidence SN iv.68 sq.; Mil 60, Mil 123 sq.; Ne 28.

2. assemblage assembly, congregation DN ii.5; Mil 7.

3. union of the humours of the body Mil 303.

4. collocation Dhp 352.

fr. sannipatati

Sannipātika

(adj.) resulting from the union of the humours of the body AN ii.87; AN v.110; SN iv.230; Mil 135, Mil 137, Mil 302, Mil 304.

fr. last

Sannibha

(adj.) resembling DN ii.17; Snp 551; Ja i.319.

saṃ + nibha

Sanniyojeti

to appoint, command Mvu 5, Mvu 34.

saṃ + niyojeti

Sanniyyātana

(nt.) handing over, resignation DN-a i.232.

saṃ + niyyātana

Sannirata

(adj.) being (quite) happy together Ja v.405. Sannirumbhati (rundhati)

saṃ + nirata

Sannirumbhati (˚rundhati)

to restrain, block, impede; ger. sannirumhitvā Ja i.109, Ja i.164 Ja ii.6; Vv-a 217. sannirumbhitvā Ja i.62; Ja ii.341. sannirujjhitvā Vism 143; Pot. sannirundheyya MN i.115. pp. sanniruddha Vism 278.

saṃ + nirumbhati

Sannirumhana

(nt.) restraining, checking, suppression Ja i.163; DN-a i.193; as ˚bhana at Vb-a 355.

fr. last

Sannivaṭṭa

returning, return Vin i.139 sq.

= saṃ + nivatta

Sannivasati

to live together, to associate AN i.78; pp. sannivuttha.

saṃ + nivasati

Sannivāreti

to restrain, check; to keep together MN i.115; Thig 366.

saṃ + nivāreti

Sannivāsa

association, living with; community AN i.78; AN ii.57; DN iii.271; Dhp 206; Ja iv.403 loka-sannivāsa the society of men, all the world Ja i.366 Ja ii.205.

saṃ + nivāsa

Sannivuttha

living together (with), associating AN iv.303 sq.

pp. of sannivasati

Sannivesa

preparation, encampment, settlement Thag-a 257.

saṃ + nivesa

Sannivesana

(nt.) position, settlement; pāṭiekka-˚ private, separate Ja i.92.

saṃ + nivesana

Sannisajjā

(f.) meeting-place Vin i.188; Vin ii.174 = Vin iii.66; sannisajja-ṭṭhāna (n.) the same Vin iii.287.

saṃ + nissajjā

Sannisinna

1. sitting down together DN i.2; DN ii.109; Vin ii.296; Ja i.120.

2. (having become settled, established Vin ii.278 (˚gabbhā pregnant).

pp. of sannisīdati

Sannisīdati

1. (lit.) to sink down, to settle Mil 35.

2. (fig.) to subside, to become quiet MN i.121; SN iv.196; AN ii.157 ■ Caus. sannisādeti to make quiet to calm MN i.116; AN ii.94 ■ Caus. II. sannisīdāpeti to cause to halt Ja iv.258 ■ pp. sannisinna.

saṃ + nisīdati

Sannissayatā

(f.) dependency, connection Ne 80.

saṃ + nissayatā

Sannissita

based on, connected with, attached to Vism 43, Vism 118, Vism 120, Vism 554 (viññāṇa is “hadaya-vatthu˚”; cp. Vb-a 163).

saṃ + nissita, cp. BSk. sanniśrita

Sannihita

1. put down, placed Mil 326.

2. stored up Thig 409; Thag-a 267.

saṃ + nihita; cp. sannidhi

Sannīta

mixed, put together, kneaded Mvu 29, Mvu 11 & 12.;

pp. fr. sanneti

Sanneti

to mix, knead DN i.74 (Pot. sanneyya); iii.29; Vin i.47 (grd. ˚netabba); MN i.276; SN ii.58 sq.; Ja vi.432 ■ pp. sannīta.

fr. saṃ + neti

Sapajāpatika

(adj.) 1. with Pajāpati. The passage under pajāpati 1. was distorted through copyist’s default. It should read: “only in one formula, with Inda Brahmā, viz. devā sa-indakā sa-brahmakā sa-pajāpatikā DN ii.274 (without sa-brahmakā); SN iii.90; AN v.325. Otherwise sapajāpatika in sense of foll Also at Vb-a 497 with Brahmā.”

2. with one’s wife Vin i.23; Vin iv.62; Ja i.345.

Sapati

to swear, curse SN i.225; Ja v.104, Ja v.397; Mvu 25, Mvu 113; Vv-a 336 ■ pp satta3.

śap, cp. Dhtp 184 “akkose”

Sapatikā

(adj.) having a husband, a woman whose husband is alive Ja vi.158; Pv-a 86.

Sapatī

(f.) having the same husband; a rival wife, a cowife Pv i.66; ii.32.

Sapatta

hostile, rival Thig 347; Thag-a 242; sapattarājā a rival king Ja i.358; Ja ii.94; Ja iii.416; asapatta without enmity Snp 150; sapatta (m.) a rival, foe, Iti 83; AN iv.94 sq.; Ja i.297.

Sk. sapatna

Sapattaka

(adj.) hostile, full of enmity DN i.227.

fr. last

Sapattabhāra

with the weight of the wings, carrying one’s wings with oneself DN i.71; MN i.180 MN i.268; AN ii.210; Pug. 58.

sa3 + patta1 + bhāra

Sapattika

(nt.) the state of a co-wife Thig 216; Thag-a 178 ■ Kern, Toev. s.v. proposes reading sā˚.

Sapattī

(f.) a co-wife DN ii.330; Ja i.398; Ja iv.316, Ja iv.491; Thig 224; Dhp-a i.47. asapattī without any co-wife SN iv.249.

Sk. sapatnī

Sapatha

an oath Vin i.347; Ja i.180, Ja i.267; Ja iii.138; Snp-a 418.

fr. śap

Sapadānaṃ

(adv.) [fr. phrase sa-padānaṃ-cārikā; i.e. sa2 + gen. pl. of pada (cp. gimhāna). Weber (Ind Str. iii.398) suggests sapadā + naṃ, sapadā being an instr. by-form of sapadā, and naṃ an enclitic. Trenckner (Miln. p. 428) says sapadi + ayana. Kern (Toev. ii.73 agrees on the whole, but expls padānaṃ as pad’āyanaṃ “with the same steps,” i.e. without interruption, constant successive (cp. Lat stante pede & Sk. adv.; sapadi at once). (1) lit. (perhaps a later use) of a bird at Ja v.358 (s. sāliṃ khādanto, without a stop); of a lion at Mil 400 (sapadāna-bhakkha). (2) appld in phrase sapadānaṃ carati to go on uninterrupted alms-begging Vin iv.191; SN iii.238; Snp 413; Ja i.66; Pv iv.344; Vv-a 121; and in phrases sapadāna-cārikā Ja i.89; ˚cārika (adj.) Vin iii.15; ˚cārin MN i.30; MN ii.7; Snp 65; Nd ii.646 Also as adj. sapadāna (piṇḍapāta) Vin ii.214.

Sapadi

(adv.) instantly, at once Dāvs i.62.

sa2 + adv. formn fr. pada

Sapariggaha

(adj.) 1. provided with possessions DN i.247; Snp 393.

2. having a wife married Ja vi.369.

sa3 + pariggaha

Saparidaṇḍā

(f.) a cert. class of women, the use of whom renders a person liable to punishment Vin iii.139; AN v.264; MN i.286.

Sapallava

(adj.) with the sprouts Vv-a 173.

sa3 + pallava

Sapāka

“dog-cooker,” an outcast or Caṇḍāla Ja iv.380. Cp. sopāka.

san + pāka; cp. Sk. śvapāka

Sappa

a snake MN i.130; AN iii.97, AN iii.260 sq.; Snp 768; Ja i.46, Ja i.259, Ja i.310, Ja i.372; Ja v.447 (kaṇha˚); Nd i.7; DN-a i.197; Snp-a 13. Often in similes, e.g. Vism 161, Vism 587; Kp-a 144; Snp-a 226, Snp-a 333. -˚potaka a young snake Vism 500; -˚phaṇa the hood of a snake Kp-a 50 ■ Cp. sappin.

cp. Sk. sarpa, fr. sṛp; “serpent”

Sappaccaya

(adj.) correlated, having a cause, conditioned DN i.180; AN i.82; Dhs 1083.

sa3 + paccaya

Sappañña

(adj.) wise MN i.225; Snp 591; often as sapañña Iti 36; Snp 90; Ja ii.65.

sa3 + pañña

Sappaṭigha

(adj.) producing reaction, reacting DN iii.217; Dhs 597, Dhs 617, Dhs 648, Dhs 1089; Dhs-a 317; Vism 451.

sa3 + paṭigha

Sappaṭipuggala

having an equal, comparable, a friend MN i.27.

sa3 + paṭipuggala

Sappaṭibhāga

(adj.) 1. resembling, like DN ii.215; Ja i.303; Pp 30 sq.; Mil 37.

2. having as (equal) counterparts, evenly mixed with MN i.320 (kaṇhasukka˚); Mil 379 (id.).

sa3 + paṭibhāga

Sappaṭissa

(adj.) reverential, deferential Iti 10; Vin i.45; Vv 8441 (cp. Vv-a 347). See also gārava.

sa + paṭissā, cp. BSk. sapratīśa Divy 333, Divy 484

Sappaṭissava

(adj.) deferential, respectful Dhs-a 125, Dhs-a 127 = Ja i.129, Ja i.131; -tā deference, reverence Dhs 1327 = Pp 24.

sa + paṭissava

Sappati

to creep, crawl: see saṃ˚.

sṛp, cp. Vedic sarpati, Gr. ε ̔́ρπω, Lat. serpo; Dhtp 194 “gamana”

Sappadesa

(adj.) in all places, all round MN i.153.

sa3 + padesa

Sappana

(nt.) gliding on Dhs-a 133.

fr. sappati

Sappāṭihāriya

(adj.) accompanied by wonders DN i.198; SN v.261; Ud 63.

sa3 + pāṭihāriya

Sappāṭihīrakata

(adj.) made with wonders, substantiated by wonders, substantiated, well founded DN i.198; DN iii.121 (“has been made a thing of saving grace” Dial. iii.115, q.v.).

sa3 + pāṭihīra + kata

Sappāṇaka

(adj.) containing animate beings Vin iii.125; Ja i.198.

sa3 + pāṇa + ka

Sappāya

(adj.) likely, beneficial fit, suitable AN i.120; SN iii.268; SN iv.23 sq., 133 sq. (Nibbāna˚ paṭipadā); Ja i.182, Ja i.195; Ja ii.436 (kiṃci sappāyaṃ something that did him good, a remedy); Vin i.292 Vin i.302; Mil 215 (sappāyakiriyā, giving a drug). nt something beneficial, benefit, help Vism 34, Vism 87 (˚sevin) Vb-a 265 (various), 271 (˚kathā) ■ Ten sappāyas 10 asappāyas at Dhs-a 168 ■; sappāyāsappāyaṃ what is suitable, and what not Ja i.215, Ja i.471; used as the last part of a compound, meaning what is suitable with reference to: senāsanasappāya (nt.) suitable lodgings Ja i.215.

saṃ + pā (= pra + ā) + i, cp. pāya. The corresponding BSk. form is sāmpreya (= saṃ + pra + i with guṇa), e.g. Avs i.255; Avs iii.110

Sappāyatā

(f.) agreeableness, suitability, convenience Vism 79, Vism 121 (a˚), 127.

abstr. fr. sappāya

Sappi

(nt.) clarified butter, ghee DN i.9, DN i.141, DN i.201; AN i.278; AN ii.95, AN ii.207 (˚tela); iii.219; iv.103; Snp 295 (˚tela). Dhs 646; Ja i.184; Ja ii.43; Ja iv.223 (˚tela) Vin i.58, etc. -˚maṇḍa [cp. BSk. sarpimaṇḍa Divy 3 etc.] the scum, froth, cream of clarified butter, the best of ghee DN i.201; AN ii.95; Vv-a 172; Pp 70; its tayo guṇā Mil 322.

Vedic sarpis

Sappin

(adj.-n.) crawling, creeping; moving along: see pīṭha˚ ■ (f.) sappinī a female snake Ja vi.339 (where the differences between a male and a female snake are discussed).

fr. sappati

Sappītika

(adj.) accompanied by the feeling of joy, joyful AN i.81; Ja i.10; Vism 86 (opp nippītika).

sa3 + pīti + ka

Sappurisa

a good, worthy man MN iii.21, MN iii.37; DN iii.252 (the 7 s˚-dhammā), 274, 276, 283; AN ii.217 sq., 239; Dhs 259 = Dhs 1003; Vin i.56; Dhp 54; Pv ii.98; ii.945; iv.187; Ja i.202; equal to ariya MN i.8; SN iii.4; asappurisa = anariya Snp-a 479. sappurisatara a better man SN v.20.

sat (= sant) + purisa

Saphala

(adj.) bearing fruit, having its reward Dhp 52.

sa3 + phala

Saphalaka

(adj.) together with his shield Mvu 25, Mvu 63.

sa3 + phalaka

Sabala

spotted, variegated Snp 675; Vism 51; Vv-a 253; name of one of the dogs in the Lokantara hell Ja vi.106, Ja vi.247 (Sabálo ca Sāmo ca). asabala, unspotted DN ii.80.

-kārin acting inconsistently AN ii.187.

Vedic śabala (e.g. A. V. 8, 1, 9) = κέρβερος, Weber, Ind. Stud. ii.297

Sabba

(adj.) whole, entire all, every DN i.4; SN iv.15; Vin i.5; Iti 3; Nd ii.s. v., nom pl. sabbe Snp 66; gen. pl. sabbesaṃ Snp 1030 ■ nt sabbaṃ the (whole) world of sense-experience SN iv.15 cp. MN i.3 ■ At Vism 310sabbe ” is defined as “anavasesa-pariyādānaṃ.” In compn with superlative expressions sabba˚; has the meaning of “(best) of all, quite, very, nothing but, all round; entirely: ˚bāla the greatest fool DN i.59; ˚paṭhama the very first, right in front Pv-a 56; ˚sovaṇṇa nothing but gold Pv i.21ii.911; ˚kaniṭṭha the very youngest Pv-a iii; ˚atthaka in every way useful; ˚saṅgāhika thoroughly comprehensive Snp-a 304 ■ In connection with numerals sabba˚ has the distributive sense of “of each,” i.e. so & so many things of each kind, like; ˚catukka (with four of each said of a gift or sacrifice) Ja iii.44; Dhp-a iii.3; ˚aṭṭhaka (dāna) (a gift consisting of 8 X 8 things) Mil 291. See detail under aṭṭha B 1. a ■ ˚soḷasaka (of 16 each Dhp-a iii.3; ˚sata (of 100 each) Dhp-a ii.6Cases adverbially: instr. sabbena sabbaṃ altogether all, i.e. with everything [cp. BSk. sarvena sarvaṃ Divy 39, Divy 144 Divy 270; Divy 502] DN ii.57; Pv-a 130; Pv-a 131 ■ abl. sabbato “all round,” in every respect Pv i.111; Ja vi.76; & sabbaso altogether, throughout DN i.34; Snp 288; Dhp 265; Pv-a 119; Nd i.421; Dhp-a iv.100Derivations: 1. sabbattha everywhere, under all circumstances SN i.134; Dhp 83; Snp 269; Nd 133; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 18, Pv-a 107; Vb-a 372 sq. ˚kaṃ everywhere Ja i.15, Ja i.176, Ja i.172; Dāṭh v.57.

2. sabbathā in every way; sabbathā sabbaṃ completely DN ii.57; SN iv.167.

3. sabbadā always Snp 174, Snp 197 Snp 536; Dhp 202; Pv i.91 (= sabbakālaṃ C.); i.1014 (id.) sabbadā-cana always Iti 36.

4. sabbadhi (fr. Sk *sarvadha = vic̦vadha, Weber, Ind. Str. iii.392) everywhere in every respect DN i.251; DN ii.186; Snp 176; Dhp 90 also sabbadhī Snp 952, Snp 1034; Vin i.38; Vb-a 377 Vism 308 (= sabbattha); Nd i.441, Nd i.443.

-atthaka concerned with everything, a do-all Ja ii.30 Ja ii.74; Dhp-a ii.151 (mahāmatta) ■ profitable to all Mil 373 (T. ṭṭh). of kammaṭṭhāna Snp-a ii.54; Vism 97 -atthika always useful Mil 153. -ābhibhū conquering all Snp 211; Vin i.8. -otuka corresponding to all the seasons DN ii.179; Pv iv.122; Sdhp 248. -kammika (amacca) (a minister) doing all work Vism 130. -kālaṃ always: see sadā ■ ghasa all-devouring Ja i.288 ■ ji all-conquering SN iv.83. -(ñ)jaha abandoning everything SN ii.284; Snp 211; Dhp 353 = Vin i.8. -ññu omniscient MN i.482; MN ii.31, MN ii.126; AN i.220; Mil 74; Vb-a 50; Snp-a 229, Snp-a 424, Snp-a 585; Ja i.214; Ja i.335; ˚tā (f.) omniscience Pp 14 Pp 70; Ja i.2, Ja i.14; Ne 61, Ne 103; also written sabbaññūtā sabbaññutā-ñāṇa (nt.) omniscience Ne 103; DN-a i.99 Vb-a 197. Also written sabbaññū˚; thus Ja i.75 -dassāvin one who sees (i.e. knows) everything MN i.92 -byohāra business, intercourse Ud 65; see saṃvohāra -bhumma universal monarch Ja vi.45. -vidū all wise Snp 177, Snp 211; Vin i.8; Dhp 353. -saṃharaka a kind of perfume “eau de mille fleurs” Ja vi.336. -sādhāraṇa common to all Ja i.301 sq.

Vedic sarva = Av. haurva (complete); Gr. ο ̔́λος (“holo-caust”) whole; Lat. solidus & soldus “solid,” perhaps also Lat. salvus safe

Sabbatthatā

the state of being everywhere; sabbatthatāya on the whole DN i.251; DN ii.187; MN i.38; SN iv.296; AN iii.225 AN v.299, AN v.344. Expld at Vism 308 (with tt).

Sabbassa

(nt.) the whole of one’s property Ja iii.105; Ja v.100 (read: sabbasaṃ vā pan’assa haranti) ˚-haraṇa (nt.) confiscation of one’s property Ja iii.105 Ja v.246 (v.l.); sabbassaharaṇadaṇḍa (m.) the same Ja iv.204 (so read instead of sabbappaharaṇa). At some passages sabba (nt.) “all,” seems to be used in the same sense, esp. gen. sabbassa-e.g. Ja iii.50; Ja iv.19 Ja v.324.

sarvasva

Sabbāvant

(adj.) all, entire DN i.73, DN i.251; DN iii.224; AN iii.27; AN v.299 sq., 344 sq.

cp. BSk. sarvāvant Divy 294, Divy 298, Divy 352

Sabbha

see a˚.

Sabbhin

see a˚.

Sabrahmaka

(adj.) including the Brahma world DN i.62; DN iii.76, DN iii.135; AN i.260; AN ii.70; SN v.423; Vin i.11; DN-a i.174.

sa3 + brahma + ka

Sabrahmacarin

(adj.-n.) a fellow student DN ii.77; DN iii.241 sq., 245; MN i.101; AN ii.97; Snp 973; Vb-a 281.

sa3 + brahmacārin

Sabhaggata

(adj.) gone to the hall of assembly AN i.128; Snp 397; Pp 29.

sabhā + gata

Sabhā

(f.) 1. a hall, assemblyroom DN ii.274; AN i.143; SN i.176; Ja i.119; Ja i.157, Ja i.204. 2. a public rest-house, hostelry Ja i.302. dhamma˚ chapel Ja vi.333.

-gata = sabhaggata SN v.394; MN i.286.

Vedic sabhā, cp. K.Z. iv.370

Sabhāga

(adj.) common, being of the same division Vin ii.75; like, equal, similar Mil 79; s. āpatti a common offence, shared by all Vin i.126 sq.; vīthisabhāgena in street company, the whole street in common Ja ii.45; opp. visabhāga unusual Ja i.303; different Vism 516; Mil 79.

-ṭṭhāna a common room, a suitable or convenient place Ja i.426; Ja iii.49; Ja v.235. -vuttin living in mutual courtesy, properly, suitably Vin i.45; Ja i.219 a-sabhāgavuttin Ja i.218; sabhāgavuttika Vin ii.162; AN iii.14 sq.; a-sabhāgavuttika ibid.

sa2 + bhāga

Sabhājana

honouring, salutation Mil 2.

Dhtp 553: pīti-dassanesu

Sabhāya

(nt.) = sabhā Vin iii.200.

Sabhāva

1. state (of mind), nature, condition Mil 90, Mil 212, Mil 360; Pv-a 39 (ummattaka˚), 98 (santa˚), 219.

2. character, disposition, behaviour Pv-a 13, Pv-a 35 (ullumpana˚), 220 (lokiya˚).

3. truth reality, sincerity Mil 164; Ja v.459; Ja v.198 (opp. musāvāda); Ja vi.469; sabhāvaṃ sincerely, devotedly Ja vi.486.

-dhamma principle of nature Ja i.214; -dhammatta ˚dhamma Vism 238. -bhūta true Ja iii.20.

sa4 + bhāva

Sabhoga1

(adj.) wealthy DN i.73.

sa3 + bhoga

Sabhoga2

property, possession Mil 139.

sa4 + bhoga

Sabhojana

(adj.-n..) sharing food (?) Vin iv.95; Snp 102.

sa3 + bhojana

Sama1

calmness, tranquillity, mental quiet Snp 896. samaṃ carati to become calm quiescent Ja iv.172. Cp. ˚cariyā & ˚cārin;.

fr. śam: see sammati1

Sama2

fatigue Ja vi.565.

fr. śram: see sammati2

Sama3

(adj.) 1. even, level Ja i.315; Ja iii.172; Mvu 23, Mvu 51. samaṃ karoti to level Dhp 178; Snp-a 66. Opp. visama.

2. like equal, the same DN i.123, DN i.174; SN i.12; Snp 90, Snp 226, Snp 799 Snp 842; Iti 17, Iti 64; Dhp 306; Mil 4. The compared noun is put in the instr.; or precedes as first part of cpd. 3. impartial, upright, of even mind, just AN i.74, AN i.293 sq. Snp 215, Snp 468, Snp 952.

4. sama˚; foll. by numerals, means “altogether,”. e.g. ˚tiṃsa thirty altogether Bv 18, Bv 18

5. Cases as adv.: instr. samena with justice, impartially (= dhammena K.S. i.321) Dhp 257; Ja i.180; acc. samaṃ equally DN ii.166; together with, at, DN ii.288; Mvu 11 Mvu 12.

-cāga equally liberal AN ii.62. -jana an ordinary man common people MN iii.154 = Vin i.349. -jātika of the same caste Ja i.68. -jīvitā regular life, living economically AN iv.281 sq. -tala level, even Ja i.7; Pv iv.121 (of a pond). -dhāraṇa equal support or sustenance Snp-a 95. -dhura carrying an equal burden, equal Ja i.191; asamadhura incomparable Snp 694 sq.; Ja i.193 But sama-dhura-ggahaṇa “complete imperiousness Vb-a 492 (see yugaggāha). -vāhita evenly borne along (of equanimity) Dhs-a 133. -vibhatta in equal shares Ja i.266. -sama exactly the same DN i.123; DN ii.136 Pp 64; Mil 410; DN-a i.290. -sīsin a kind of puggala lit. “equal-headed,” i.e. one who simultaneously attains an end of craving and of life (cp. PugA 186. The expln in J.P.T.S. 1891, 5 is wrong) Pp 13; Ne 190. -sūpaka with equal curry (when the curry is in quantity of onefourth of the rice) Vin iv.190.

Vedic sama, fr. sa2; see etym. under saṃ˚

Samaka

(adj.) equal, like, same Mil 122, Mil 410; of the same height (of a seat) Vin ii.169 samakaṃ (adv.) equally Mil 82.

cp. BSk. samaka Divy 585

Samakkhāta

counted, known Sdhp 70, Sdhp 458.

saṃ + akkhāta

Samagga

(adj.) being in unity, harmonious MN ii.239; DN iii.172; AN ii.240; AN v.74 sq.; plur. = all unitedly, in common Vin i.105; Ja vi.2731. AN i.70 = AN i.243; Snp 281, Snp 283; Dhp 194; Thig 161; Thag-a 143; Ja i.198 Ja i.209; samaggakaraṇa making for peace DN i.4 = AN ii.209 = Pp 57; DN-a i.74; samagganandin, samaggarata, and samaggārāma, rejoicing in peace, delighting in peace impassioned for peace DN i.4 = AN ii.209 = Pp 57; DN-a i.74; samaggavāsa dwelling in concord Ja i.362; Ja ii.27- samaggi-karoti to harmonize, to conciliate DN iii.161-Cp. sāmaggī etc.

saṃ + agga

Samaggatta

(nt.) agreement, consent Vin i.316.

abstr. fr. samagga

Samaṅgitā

(f.) the fact of being endowed or connected with (-˚) Ja iii.95 (paraloka˚); Vb-a 438 (fivefold: āyūhana˚ etc.).

abstr. fr. foll.

Samaṅgin

(adj.) endowed with, possessing Pp 13, Pp 14; Ja i.303; Mil 342; Vb-a 438samaṅgibhūta possessed of, provided with DN i.36; AN ii.125; Snp 321; Vin i.15; DN-a i.121; samaṅgi-karoti to provide with Ja vi.266, Ja vi.289, Ja vi.290 (cp. vi.323: akarī samangiṃ).

saṃ + angin

Samacariyā

(f.) living in spiritual calm, quietism AN i.55; SN i.96, SN i.101 sq.; Iti 16, Iti 52; Dhp 388; Mil 19; Ja vi.128; Dhp-a iv.145.

sama1 + cariyā

Samacāga

equally liberal AN ii.62.

sama3 + cāga

Samacārin

(śama-) living in peace MN i.289.

Samacitta

possessed of equanimity AN i.65; AN iv.215; Snp-a 174 (˚paṭipadā-sutta).

Samacchati

to sit down together Ja ii.67 (samacchare); iv.356; vi.104, 127.

saṃ + acchati

Samacchidagatta

(adj.) with mangled limbs Snp 673.

sam + ā + chida + gatta

Samajja

(nt.) a festive gathering, fair a show, theatrical display. Originally a mountain cult as it was esp. held on the mountains near Rājagaha. Ja ii.13; Ja iii.541; Ja vi.277, Ja vi.559; SN v.170; DN-a i.84; Dhp-a iv.59; Dhs-a 255 ■ On character and history of the festival see Hardy, Album Kern pp. 61–⁠66 ■ gir-aggasamajjaṃ mountain fair Vin ii.107, Vin ii.150; Vin iv.85, Vin iv.267, Vin iv.360; Dhp-a i.89, Dhp-a i.113. samajjaṃ karoti or kāreti to hold high revel Ja vi.383.

-ābhicaraṇa visiting fairs DN iii.183. -ṭṭhāna the place of the festival, the arena, Vin ii.150; Ja i.394; -dāna giving festivals Mil 278; -majjhe on the arena SN iv.306 sq.; Ja iii.541; -maṇḍala the circle of the assembly Ja i.283 sq.

cp. Epic Sk. samāja (fr. saṃ + aj ) congregation, gathering, company

Samajjhagaṃ

(B ˚-guṃ) aor. from sam-adhi-gā. (See samadhigacchati. )

Samañcati

to bend together Vin iv.171, Vin iv.363.

sam + añc

Samañcara

pacified, calm SN i.236.

sama1 + cara

Samañcinteti

to think SN i.124; see sañcinteti.

Samaññā

(f.) designation, name DN i.202; DN ii.20; MN iii.68; SN ii.191; Snp 611, Snp 648; Ja ii.65; Dhs § 1306; loka˚ a common appellation, a popular expression DN i.202.

saṃ + aññā

Samaññāta

designated, known, notorious SN i.65; Snp 118, Snp 820; Nd i.153; Vin ii.203.

saṃ + aññāta

Samaṇa

a wanderer, recluse, religieux AN i.67; DN iii.16 DN iii.95 sq., 130 sq.; SN i.45; Dhp 184; of a non-Buddhist (tāpasa) Ja iii.390; an edifying etymology of the word Dhp-a iii.84: “samita-pāpattā s.,” cp. Dhp 265 “samitattā pāpānaṃ ʻsamaṇoʼ ti pavuccati”; four grades mentioned DN ii.151; MN i.63; compare Snp 84 sq.; the state of a Samaṇa is attended by eight sukhas Ja i.7; the Buddha is often mentioned and addressed by nonBuddhists as Samaṇa: thus DN i.4, DN i.87; Snp p.91, Snp p.99; Vin i.8 Vin i.350; Samaṇas often opposed to Brāhmaṇas thus, DN i.13; Iti 58, Iti 60; Sn, p. 90; Vin i.12; Vin ii.110 samaṇabrāhmaṇā, Samaṇas and Brāhmaṇas quite generally: “leaders in religious life” (cp. Dial. ii.165; DN i.5; DN ii.150; AN i.110,

173 sq.; Iti 64; Snp 189; Vin ii.295 samaṇadhammaṃ the duties of a samaṇa AN iii.371; Ja i.106, Ja i.107, Ja i.138; pure-samaṇa a junior who walks before a Bhikkhu Vin ii.32; pacchāsamaṇa one who walks behind Vin i.186; Vin ii.32; AN iii.137samaṇī a female recluse SN i.133; Thag-a 18; Ja v.424, Ja v.427; Vin iv.235assamaṇa not a true samaṇa Vin i.96.

-uddesa a novice, a sāmaṇera DN i.151; MN iii.128; SN v.161; Vin iv.139; AN ii.78; AN iii.343. Cp. BSk. śramaṇoddeśa Divy 160. -kuttaka (m.) who wears the dress of a Samaṇa Vin iii.68 sq. (= samaṇa-vesa-dhārako Bdhgh ib. p. 271).

BSk. śramaṇa, fr. śram, but mixed in meaning with śam

Samaṇaka

a contemptible (little) ascetic, “some sort of samaṇa” DN i.90; MN ii.47, MN ii.210; Snp p.21; Mil 222; DN-a i.254. At AN ii.48 samaṇaka is a slip for sasanaka. Cp. muṇḍaka in form & meaning.;

samaṇa + ka

Samaṇḍalīkata

hemmed Vin i.255 (kaṭhina).

sa + maṇḍala + kata

Samatā

equality, evenness, normal state Vin i.183; AN iii.375 sq.; Mil 351.

fr. sama3

Samatikkama

(adj.) passing beyond, overcoming DN i.34; DN ii.290; MN i.41, MN i.455; Vin i.3; Ja v.454; Vism 111.

saṃ + atikamma

Samatikkamati

to cross over, to transcend DN i.35; to elapse Mvu 13, Mvu 5; ger. samatikkamma DN i.35; M 41; pp. samatikkanta crossed over, or escaped from SN iii.80; Dhp 195.

saṃ + atikkamati

Samatiggaṇhāti

to stretch over, rise above, to reach beyond Ja iv.411 (ger. samatiggayha).

saṃ + ati + gṛh

Samatittha

(adj.) with even banks (of a pond) Ja v.407.

sama3 + tittha

Samatitthika

(adj.) even or level with the border or bank, i.e. quite full, brimful DN i.244 DN ii.89; MN i.435; MN ii.7 = Mil 213; SN ii.134; SN v.170; Ja i.400; Ja i.235, Ja i.393; Mil 121; Vism 170 (pattaṃ ˚tittikaṃ pūretvā; v.l. ˚titthikaṃ); AN iii.403; Vin i.230; Vin iv.190 often written ˚tittika and ˚tittiya. [The form is probably connected with samaicchia-i.e. samaitthia (*samatisthita) in the Deśināmamālā viii.20 (Konow) Compare, however, Rhys Davids’ Buddhist Suttas, p. 1781; ˚-aṃ buñjāmi Mil 213; “I eat (only just) to the full” (opp. to bhiyyo bhuñjāmi) suggests the etymology: sama-titti + ka. Kern, Toev. s. v. as above.]

sama3 + tittha + ika

Samatimaññti

to despise (aor.) samatimaññi Thig 72.

saṃ + atimaññti

Samativattati

to transcend, overcome Snp 768, cp. Nd i.10.

saṃ + ativattati

Samativijjhati

to penetrate Dhp 13 = Thag 133.

saṃ + ativijjhati

Samatta1

(nt.) equality AN iii.359; Mvu 3, Mvu 7; equanimity, justice AN i.75.

abstr. fr. sama3

Samatta2

1. accomplished, brought to an end AN ii.193; Snp 781 = paripuṇṇa Nd i.65.

2. [cp. Sk. samasta, pp. of saṃ + as to throw cp. BSk. samasta, e.g. Jtm xxxi.90].complete, entire perfect Mil 349; Snp 881; Snp 1000; Nd i.289, Nd i.298. samattaṃ completely SN v.175; accomplished, full Snp 889.

cp. Sk. samāpta, pp. of saṃ + āp

Samattha

(adj.) able, strong Ja i.179; Ja i.187; Snp-a 143.

cp. Sk. samartha, saṃ + artha

Samatthita

(adj.) unravelling Mil 1.

cp. Sk. samarthita, saṃ + pp. of arthayati

Samatthiya

(adj.) able Sdhp 619.

fr. samattha

Samatha

1. calm, quietude of heart MN i.33; AN i.61, AN i.95; AN ii.140; AN iii.86 sq. (ceto˚) 116 sq., 449; iv.360; v.99; DN iii.54, DN iii.213, DN iii.273; Dhp-a ii.177; SN iv.362; Dhs 11, Dhs 15, Dhs 54; cessation of the Sankhāras SN i.136; SN iii.133; AN i.133; Snp 732; Vin i.5. 2. settlement of legal questions (adhikaraṇa) Vin ii.93 Vin iv.207; cp. Dhs-a 144; s. paṭivijjhati Pts i.180.

-yānika who makes quietude his vehicle, devoted to quietude, a kind of Arahant; cp. Geiger, Saṃyutta trsln ii.172. -vipassanā introspection (“auto-hypnosis” Cpd. 202) for promoting calm [cp. śamatha-vipaśyanā Divy 95] SN v.52; AN ii.157; Dhp-a iv.140; also separately “calm & intuition,” e.g. MN i.494.

fr. śam, cp. BSk. śamatha

Samadhigacchati

to attain Thag 4; aor. samajjhagā Iti 83; Iti 3rd pl. samajjhagaṃ SN i.103.

saṃ + adhigacchati

Samadhigaṇhāti

1. to reach, to get, obtain; ger. samadhiggayha MN i.506; MN ii.25; SN i.86; Iti 16.

2. to exceed, surpass, to overcome, to master Ja vi.261 (pañhaṃ samadhiggahetvā). Often confounded with samatigaṇhāti.

saṃ + adhigaṇhāti

Samadhosi

variant reading SN iii.120 sq.; SN iv.46; the form is aor. of saṃdhū. See sañcopati.

Samana

(nt.) suppression Mvu 4, Mvu 35.

fr. śam

Samanaka

(adj.) endowed with mind AN ii.48 (text, samaṇaka); SN i.62.

sa3 + mana + ka

Samanantara

(adj.) immediate; usually in abl. (as adv.); samanantarā immediately, after, just after DN ii.156; Vin i.56; rattibhāga-samanantare at midnight Ja i.101.

-paccaya the relation of immediate contiguity Tikp 3, 61 sq.; Dukp 26; Vism 534.

saṃ + anantara

Samanukkamati

to walk along together Ja iii.373.

saṃ + anukkamati

Samanugāhati

to ask for reasons, to question closely DN i.26; MN i.130; AN v.156 sq.; ppr. med samanuggāhiyamāna being pressed MN i.130; AN v.156; Vin iii.91.

saṃ + anugāhati

Samanujānāti

to approve; samanujānissanti (fut. 3 pl.) MN i.398; SN iv.225; pp. samanuññāta approved, allowed Mvu 8, Mvu 11; aor. 1 sg. samanuññāsin Ja iv.117 (= samanuñño āsiṃ Com. ib. 11715).

saṃ + anujānāti

Samanuñña

(adj.) approving DN iii.271; AN ii.253; AN iii.359; AN v.305; SN i.1, SN i.153; SN iv.187; Ja iv.117.

= next

Samanuññā

(f.) approval SN i.1; MN i.359.

fr. samanujānāti

Samanupassati

to see, perceive, regard DN i.69, DN i.73; DN ii.198; MN i.435 sq.; MN ii.205; Pot. Vin ii.89 ppr. ˚passanto Ja i.140; ppr. med. ˚passamāno DN ii.66; inf ˚passituṃ Vin i.14; rūpaṃ attato samanupassati to regard form as self SN iii.42.

saṃ + anupassati

Samanupassanā

(f.) considering SN iii.44; Ne 27.

fr. last

Samanubandhati

to pursue Mvu 10, Mvu 5.

saṃ + anubandhati

Samanubhāsati

to converse or study together DN i.26, DN i.163; MN i.130; AN i.138; AN v.156 sq.; Vin iii.173 sq.; Vin iv.236 sq.; DN-a i.117.

saṃ + anubhāsati

Samanubhāsanā

(f.) conversation, repeating together Vin iii.174 sq.; Vin iv.236 sq.

fr. last

Samanumaññati

to approve; fut. 3 pl. ˚maññissanti MN i.398; SN iv.225; aor. 3 pl. ˚maññiṃsu Ja iv.134.

saṃ + anumaññati

Samanumodati

to rejoice at, to approve MN i.398; SN iv.225; Mil 89.

saṃ + anumodati

Samanuyuñjati

to cross-question DN i.26, DN i.163; MN i.130; AN i.138; AN v.156; DN-a i.117.

saṃ + anuyuñjati

Samanussarati

(saṃ + anussarati] to recollect, call to mind SN iv.196; Vin ii.183.

Samanta

(adj.) all, entire Snp 672; Mil 3. occurs usually in oblique cases used adverbially, e.g. acc. samantaṃ completely Snp 442; abl. samantā (DN i.222; Ja ii.106; Vin i.32) & samantato (MN i.168 = Vin i.5; Mvu 1, Mvu 29; Vism 185; and in definitions of prefix pari˚; DN-a i.217; Vv-a 236; Pv-a 32) instr. samantena (Thig 487) on all sides, everywhere anywhere; also used as prepositions; thus, samantā Vesāliṃ, everywhere in Vesāli DN ii.98; samantato nagarassa all round the city Mvu 34, Mvu 39; samāsamantato everywhere DN-a i.61.

-cakkhu all-seeing, an epithet of the Buddha MN i.168; Vin i.5; Snp 345, etc.; Mil 111; Nd i.360. -pāsādika all-pleasing, quite serene AN i.24; ˚kā Buddhaghosa’s commentary on the Vinaya Piṭaka DN-a i.84 -bhaddakatta complete auspiciousness, perfect loveliness Snp-a 444; Vb-a 132. -rahita entirely gone Ja i.29 -veda one whose knowledge (of the Veda) is complete Ja vi.213.

saṃ + anta “of complete ends”

Samandhakāra

the dark of night Vin iv.54; Dhp-a ii.94; SN iii.60.

saṃ + andhakāra

Samannāgata

(adj.) followed by, possessed of, endowed with (instr.) DN i.50; DN i.88; Vin i.54 Snp p.78, Snp p.102, Snp p.104. Snp-a 177 (in expln of ending “-in”) 216 (of “-mant”); Pv-a 46, Pv-a 73 ■ nt. abstr. ˚annāgatatta Pv-a 49.

saṃ + anvāgata

Samannāneti

to lead, conduct properly, control, pres. sam-anv-āneti MN iii.188; ppr. ˚annānayamāna MN i.477.

samanvā +

Samannāhata

struck (together), played upon DN ii.171.

saṃ + anvāhata

Samannāharati

1. to concentrate the mind on, to consider reflect DN ii.204; MN i.445; AN iii.162 sq., 402 sq.; SN i.114–⁠2. to pay respect to, to honour MN ii.169; Vin i.180.

saṃ + anu + āharati; cp. BSk. samanvāharati

Samannāhāra

concentration, bringing together MN i.190 sq.; DN-a i.123; Mil 189.

saṃ + anu + āhāra

Samannesati

to seek, to look for, to examine DN i.105; SN iii.124; SN iv.197; Mil 37; DN-a i.274 pres. also samanvesati SN i.122.

saṃ + anvesati

Samannesanā

(f.) search, examination MN i.317.

fr. last

Samapekkhaṇa

(nt.) considering; a˚ SN iii.261.

Samapekkhati

to consider, ger. ekkhiya Sdhp 536; cp. samavekkh˚.

saṃ + apekkhati

Samappita

1. made over, consigned Dhp 315; Snp 333; Thig 451.

2. endowed with (-˚) affected with, possessed of Ja v.102 (kaṇṭakena); Pv iv.16 (= allīna Pv-a 265); Pv-a 162 (soka-salla˚-hadaya) Vism 303 (sallena) ■ yasabhoga˚; possessed of fame wealth Dhp 303; dukkhena afflicted with pain Vv 523 pañcehi kāmaguṇehi s. endowed with the 5 pleasures of the senses DN i.36, DN i.60; Vin i.15; DN-a i.121.

pp. of samappeti

Samappeti

to hand over, consign, commit, deposit, give Mvu 7, Mvu 72; Mvu 19, Mvu 30; Mvu 21, Mvu 21; Mvu 34, Mvu 21; Dāvs ii.64 ■ pp. samappita.

saṃ + appeti

Samabbhāhata

struck, beaten (thoroughly) Vism 153; DN-a i.140.

saṃ + abbhāhata

Samabhijānāti

to recollect, to know Ja vi.126.

saṃ + abhijānati

Samabhisāta

joyful Thig 461.

Samabhisiñcati

to inaugurate as a king Mvu 4, Mvu 6; v.14.

saṃ + abhisiñcati

Samaya

congregation; time, condition, etc ■ At Dhs-a 57 sq we find a detailed expln of the word samaya (s-sadda) with meanings given as follows: (1) samavāya (“harmony in antecedents” trsln), (2) khaṇa (opportunity) (3) kāla (season), (4) samūha (crowd, assembly), (5) hetu (condition), (6) diṭṭhi (opinion). (7) paṭilābha (acquisition), (8) pahāna (elimination), (9) paṭivedha (penetration) Bdhgh illustrates each one with fitting examples cp. Dhs-a 61 ■ We may group as follows: 1. coming together, gathering; a crowd, multitude DN i.178 (˚pavādaka debating hall); ii.254 sq.; Mil 257; Ja i.373; Pv-a 86 (= samāgama). samayā in a crowd Pv iii.34 (so read for samayyā; Pv-a 189 “sangamma”). 2. consorting with, intercourse Mil 163; Dhp-a i.90 sabba˚; consorting with everybody Ja iv.317.

3. time point of time, season DN i.1; Snp 291, Snp 1015; Vin i.15; Vb-a 157 (maraṇa˚); Vism 473 (def.) ■ samayā samayaṃ upādāya from time to time Iti 75. Cases adverbially ekaṃ samayaṃ at one time DN i.47, DN i.87, DN i.111; tena samayena at that time DN i.179; Dhp-a i.90. aparena s. in course of time, later Pv-a 31, Pv-a 68; yasmiṃ samaye at which time DN i.199; Dhs-a 61. ekasmiṃ samaye some time, once Ja i.306. paccūsa˚; at daybreak Pv-a 38; aḍḍharatti˚; at midnight Pv-a 155; cp. ratta˚.

4. proper time, due season, opportunity, occasion Snp 388; Vin iv.77; Bv ii.181; Mvu 22, Mvu 59; Vb-a 283 sq.; aññatra samayā except at due season Vin iii.212; Vin iv.77; samaye at the right time Ja i.27asamaya inopportune, unseasonable DN iii.263, DN iii.287.

5. coincidence, circumstance MN i.438 akkhara˚; spelling Dhp-a i.181.

6. condition, state extent, sphere (cp. defn of Bdhgh, above 9); taken dogmatically as “ diṭṭhi, ” doctrine, view (equal to above defn 6) Iti 14 (imamhi samaye); Dhp-a i.90 (jānana˚) Dāvs vi.4 (˚antara var. views). bāhira˚; state of an outsider, doctrine of outsiders, i.e. brahmanic Dhp-a iii.392, cp. brāhmaṇānaṃ samaye DN-a i.291; ariyānaṃ samaye Mil 229.

7. end, conclusion, annihilation Snp 876; ˚vimutta finally emancipated AN iii.173; AN v.336 (a˚); Pp 11; cp. Dhs-a 57 ■ Pp. abhi˚.

-vasaṭha at AN ii.41 is to be read as samavasaṭṭha, i.e. thoroughly given up. Thus Kern, Toev. The same passage occurs at DN iii.269 as samavaya-saṭhesana (see under saṭha ).

cp. Sk. samaya, fr. saṃ + i. See also samiti

Samara

battle Dāvs iv.1

sa + mara

Samala

(adj.) impure, contaminated Vin i.5; samalā (f.) dustbin SN ii.270 (= gāmato gūthanikkhamana-magga, i.e. sewer K.S. ii.203); see sandhi˚.

BSk. samala

Samalaṅkaroti

to decorate, adorn Mvu 7, Mvu 56; ˚kata pp. Dāvs v.36: ˚karitvā Ja vi.577.

saṃ + alankaroti

Samavaṭṭhita

ready Snp 345 (˚-ā savanāya sotā).

Samavattakkhandha

(adj.) having the shoulders round, one of the lakkhaṇas of a Buddha DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.164; Dial. ii.15: “his bust is equally rounded.”

sama + vatta + kh., but BSk. sasaṃvṛtta˚

Samavattasaṃvāsa

living together with the same duties, on terms of equality Ja i.236.

sama + vatta1 + saṃvāsa

Samavadhāna

(nt.) concurrence, co-existence Ne 79.

Samavaya

annihilation, termination (?) see samaya (cpd.) & saṭha.

Samavasarati

of a goad or spur Thig 210. See samosarati.

Samavāpaka

(nt.) a storeroom MN i.451.

sama + vāpaka, cp. vapati1

Samavāya

(m.) coming together, combination SN iv.68; Mil 376; Dhs-a 57, Dhs-a 196; Pv-a 104; Vv-a 20, Vv-a 55. samavāyena in common Vv-a 336; khaṇa-s˚ a momentary meeting Ja i.381.

Samavekkhati

to consider, examine MN i.225; AN ii.32; Iti 30.

saṃ + avekkhati

Samavekkhitar

one who considers Iti 120.

fr. last

Samavepākin

(adj.) promoting a good digestion DN ii.177; DN iii.166; MN ii.67; AN iii.65 sq., 103, 153; v.15.

sama + vepākin, cp. vepakka

Samavossajjati

to transfer, entrust DN ii.231.

read saṃvossajjati !

Samavhaya

a name Dāvs v.67.

saṃ + ahvaya

Samasāyisun

(aor.) Ja iii.201 (text, samāsāsisuṃ, cp. J.P.T.S. 1885, 60; read taṃ asāyisuṃ).

Samassattha

refreshed, relieved Ja iii.189.

saṃ + assattha2

Samassasati

to be refreshed Ja i.176; Caus. samassāseti to relieve, refresh Ja i.175.

saṃ + assasati

Samassāsa

refreshing, relief Dhs-a 150 (expln of passaddhi).

saṃ + assāsa

Samassita

leaning towards Thag 525.

saṃ + assita

Samā

(f.) 1. a year Dhp 106; Mvu 7, Mvu 78. - 2. in agginisamā a pyre Snp 668, Snp 670.

Vedic samā

Samākaḍḍhati

to pull along; to entice; ger. ˚iya Mvu 37, Mvu 145.

saṃ + ākaḍḍhati

Samākiṇṇa

covered, filled SN i.6; Mil 342.

saṃ + ākiṇṇa

Samākula

(adj.) 1. filled, crowded B ii.4 = Ja i.3; Mil 331, Mil 342.

2. crowded together Vin ii.117

3. confused, jumbled together Ja v.302.

saṃ + ākula

Samāgacchati

to meet together, to assemble Bv ii.171; Snp 222; to associate with, to enter with, to meet, DN ii.354; Snp 834; Ja ii.82; to go to see Vin i.308; to arrive, come Snp 698; aor. 1 sg. ˚gañchiṃ DN ii.354; DN ii.3rd ˚gañchi Dhp 210; Ja ii.62; aor. 2 sg. ˚gamā Snp 834; ger. ˚gamma B ii.171 = Ja i.26; ger. ˚gantvā Vin i.308; pp. samāgata.

saṃ + āgacchati

Samāgata

met, assembled Dhp 337; Snp 222.

pp. of samāgacchati

Samāgama

meeting, meeting with, intercourse AN ii.51; AN iii.31; Mil 204; cohabitation DN ii.268 meeting, assembly Ja ii.107; Mil 349; Dhp-a iii.443 (three: yamaka-pāṭihāriya˚; dev’orohaṇa˚; Gangārohaṇa˚).

saṃ + āgama

Samācarati

to behave, act, practise MN ii.113.

saṃ + ācarati

Samācāra

conduct, behaviour DN ii.279; DN iii.106, DN iii.217; MN ii.113; AN ii.200, AN ii.239; AN iv.82; Snp 279; Vin ii.248; Vin iii.184.

saṃ + ācāra

Samātapa

ardour, zeal AN iii.346.

saṃ + ātapa

Samādapaka

instructing, arousing MN i.145; AN ii.97; AN iv.296, AN iv.328 AN v.155; SN v.162; Mil 373; Iti 107; Dhp-a ii.129.

fr. samādapeti; cp. BSk. samādāpaka Divy 142

Samādapana

(nt.) instructing, instigating MN iii.132.

Samādapetar

adviser, instigator MN i.16.

Samādapeti

to cause to take, to incite, rouse Pp 39, Pp 55; Vin i.250; Vin iii.73; DN-a i.293, DN-a i.300; aor. ˚dapesi DN ii.42, DN ii.95 DN ii.206; Mil 195; Snp 695; ger. ˚dapetvā DN i.126; Vin i.18 ger. samādetvā (sic) Mvu 37, Mvu 201; ppr. pass. ˚dapiyamāna DN ii.42.

saṃ + ādapeti, cp. BSk. samādāpayati Divy 51

Samādahati

to put together SN i.169. jotiṃ s. to kindle a fire Vin iv.115; cittaṃ s. to compose the mind, concentrate MN i.116; pres. samādheti Thig 50; pr. part. samādahaṃ SN v.312; ppr. med. samādahāna SN i.169; aor 3rd pl. samādahaṃsu DN ii.254. Pass samādhiyati to be stayed, composed DN i.73; MN i.37; Mil 289; Caus. II. samādahāpeti Vin iv.115 ■ pp samāhita.

saṃ + ādahati1

Samādāna

1. taking, bringing; asamādānacāra (m.) going for alms without taking with one (the usual set of three robes) Vin i.254.

2. taking upon oneself, undertaking acquiring MN i.305 sq.; AN i.229 sq.; AN ii.52; Ja i.157, Ja i.219; Vin iv.319; Kp-a 16, Kp-a 142. kammasamādāna acquiring for oneself of Karma DN i.82; AN iii.417; AN v.33; SN v.266 SN v.304; Iti 58 sq., 99 sq.; Vb-a 443 sq.

3. resolution vow Vin ii.268; Ja i.233; Mil 352.

Samādinna

taken up, undertaken AN ii.193.

pp. of samādiyati

Samādiyati

to take with oneself, to take upon oneself, to undertake DN i.146; imper. samādiya Bv ii.118 = Ja i.20; aor. samādiyi SN i.232; Ja i.219; ger samādiyitvā SN i.232; & samādāya having taken up, i.e. with DN i.71; Pp 58; DN-a i.207; Mvu 1, Mvu 47; having taken upon himself, conforming to DN i.163; DN ii.74; Dhp 266; Snp 792, Snp 898, Snp 962; samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu he adopts and trains himself in the precepts DN i.63; SN v.187; Iti 118; Snp 962 (cp. Nd i.478) ■ pp samādinna.

saṃ + ādiyati1

Samādisati

to indicate, to command DN i.211; Mvu 38, Mvu 59.

saṃ + ādisati

Samādhāna

(nt.) putting together, fixing; concentration Vism 84 (= sammā ādhānaṃ ṭhapanaṃ) in defn of samādhi as “samādhān’ aṭṭhena.”

saṃ + ā + dhā

Samādhi

1. concentration; a concentrated, self-collected, intent state of mind and meditation which, concomitant with right living, is a necessary condition to the attainment of higher wisdom and emancipation. In the Subha-suttanta of the Dīgha (DN i.209 sq.) samādhi-khandha (“section on concentration”) is the title otherwise given to the cittasampadā, which, in the ascending order of merit accruing from the life of a samaṇa (see Sāmaññaphala-suttanta, and cp. Dial. i.57 sq.) stands between the sīla-sampadā and the paññā-sampadā. In the Ambaṭṭha-sutta the corresponding terms are sīla, caraṇa, vijjā (D. i.100) Thus samādhi would comprise (a) the guarding of the senses (indriyesu gutta-dvāratā), (b) self-possession (sati-sampajañña), (c) contentment (santuṭṭhi), (d emancipation from the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) (e) the 4 jhānas. In the same way we find samādhi grouped as one of the sampadās at AN iii.12 (sīla˚ samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚), and as samādhi-khandha (with sīla˚ & paññā˚) at DN iii.229 (+ vimutti˚); AN i.125 AN ii.20; AN iii.15; AN v.326; Nd i.21; Nd ii.p. 277 (s. v. sīla) It is defined as cittassa ekaggatā MN i.301; Dhs 15; Dhs-a 118; cp. Cpd. 89 n. 4; identified with avikkhepa Dhs 57, and with samatha Dhs 54sammā˚; is one the constituents of the eightfold ariya-magga, e.g. DN iii.277 Vb-a 120 sq ■ See further DN ii.123 (ariya); Vin i.97 Vin i.104; SN i.28; Nd i.365; Mil 337; Vism 84 sq. (with definition), 289 (+ vipassanā), 380 (˚vipphārā iddhi) Vb-a 91; Dhp-a i.427; and on term in general Heiler Buddhistische Versenkung 104 sq.

2. Description characterization of; samādhi: Its four nimittas or signs are the four satipaṭṭhānas MN i.301; six conditions and six hindrances AN iii.427; other hindrances MN iii.158. The second jhāna is born from samādhi DN ii.186; it is a condition for attaining kusalā dhammā AN i.115; Mil 38; conducive to insight AN iii.19, AN iii.24 sq., 200; SN iv.80; to seeing heavenly sights etc. DN i.173; to removing mountains etc. AN iii.311; removes the delusions of self AN i.132 sq.; leads to Arahantship AN ii.45 the ānantarika s. Snp 226; cetosamādhi (rapture of mind) DN i.13; AN ii.54; AN iii.51; SN iv.297; citta˚; id. Ne 16. dhammasamādhi almost identical with samatha SN iv.350 sq ■ Two grades of samādhi distinguished viz. upacāra -s. (preparatory concentration) and appanā -s (attainment concentration) DN-a i.217; Vism 126; Cpd. 54, 56 sq.; only the latter results in jhāna; to these a 3rd (preliminary) grade is added as khaṇika˚; (momentary at Vism 144 ■ Three kinds of s. are distinguished suññata or empty, appaṇihita or aimless, and animitta or signless AN i.299; SN iv.360; cp. iv.296; Vin iii.93; Mil 337; cp. 333 sq.; Dhs-a 179 sq., 222 sq., 290 sq. see Yogāvacara’s Manual p. xxvii; samādhi (tayo samādhī) is savitakka savicāra, avitakka vicāramatta or avitakka avicāra DN iii.219; Kv 570; cp. 413; Mil 337; Dhs-a 179 sq.; it is fourfold chanda-, viriya-, citta-, and vīmaṃsā-samādhi DN ii.213; SN v.268 ■ Another fourfold division is that into hāna-bhāgiya, ṭhiti˚, visesa˚ nibbedha˚ DN iii.277 (as “dhammā duppaṭivijjhā”).

-indriya the faculty of concentration AN ii.149; Dhs 15 -khandha the section on s. see above 1. -ja produced by concentration DN i.74; DN iii.13; Vism 158. -parikkhāra requisite to the attainment of samādhi: either 4 (the sammappadhānas) MN i.301; or 7: DN ii.216; DN iii.252; AN iv.40. -bala the power of concentration AN i.94 AN ii.252; DN iii.213, DN iii.253; Dhs 28. -bhāvanā cultivation attainment of samādhi MN i.301; AN ii.44 sq. (four different kinds mentioned); iii.25 sq.; DN iii.222; Vism 371 -saṃvattanika conducive to concentration AN ii.57; SN iv.272 sq.; DN iii.245; Dhs 1344. -sambojjhaṅga the s. constituent of enlightment DN iii.106, DN iii.226, DN iii.252 Vism 134 = Vb-a 283 (with the eleven means of cultivating it).

fr. saṃ + ā + dhā

Samādhika

(adj.) excessive, abundant DN ii.151; Ja ii.383; Ja iv.31.

sama + adhika

Samādhiyati

is Passive of samādahati.

Samāna1

(adj.) similar, equal, even, same Snp 18, Snp 309; Ja ii.108. Cp. sāmañña1.

Vedic samāna, fr. sama3

Samāna2

1. being, existing DN i.18, DN i.60; Ja i.218; Pv-a 129 (= santo), 167 (id.).

2. a kind of god DN ii.260.

-āsanika entitled to a seat of the same height Vin ii.169. -gatika identical Tikp 35. -bhāva equanimity Snp 702. -vassika having spent the rainy season together Vin i.168 sq. -saṃvāsa living together with equals Dhp 302 (a˚), cp. Dhp-a iii.462. -saṃvāsaka belonging to the same communion Vin i.321. -sīmā the same boundary parish Vin i.321; ˚ma belonging to the same parish Vin ii.300.

ppr. fr. as to be

Samānatta

(adj.) equanimous, of even mind AN iv.364.

samāna + attan

Samānattatā

(f.) equanimity, impartiality AN ii.32 = AN ii.248; AN iv.219, AN iv.364; DN iii.152, DN iii.190 sq., 232.

abstr. fr. last

Samāniyā

(all) equally, in common Snp 24.

instr. fem. of samāna, used adverbially, Vedic samānyā

Samānīta

brought home, settled Mil 349.

pp. of samāneti

Samāneti

1. to bring together Ja i.68.

2. to bring, produce Ja i.433.

3. to put together, cp. Ja i.120 Ja i.148.

4. to collect, enumerate Ja i.429.

5. to calculate (the time) Ja i.120, Ja i.148; aor. samānayi DN-a i.275 pp. samānīta.

saṃ + āneti

Samāpajjati

1. to come into, enter upon, attain DN i.215 (samādhiṃ samāpajji); Vin iii.241 (Pot. ˚pajjeyya); samāpattiṃ Ja i.77; arahattamaggaṃ AN ii.42 sq.; Vin i.32; saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ to attain the trance of cessation SN iv.293; kayavikkayaṃ to engage in buying and selling Vin iii.241; sākacchaṃ to engage in conversation DN ii.109; tejodhātuṃ to convert one’s body into fire Vin i.25; Vin ii.76.

2. to become SN iii.86 (aor. 3rd pl. samāpaduṃ) ■ pp. samāpajjita samāpanna;.

saṃ + āpajjati

Samāpajjana

(nt.) entering upon, passing through (?) Mil 176.

fr. last

Samāpajjita

attained, reached, got into DN ii.109 (parisā ˚pubbā).

pp. of ˚āpajjati

Samāpaṭipatti

misprint for sammā˚ AN i.69.

Samāpatti

(f.) attainment AN iii.5; SN ii.150 sq.; SN iv.293 (saññā-vedayita-nirodha˚); Dhs 30 Dhs 101; a stage of meditation AN i.94; Dhs 1331; Ja i.343 Ja i.473; Pv-a 61 (mahā-karuṇā˚); Nd i.100, Nd i.106, Nd i.139, Nd i.143 the Buddha acquired anekakoṭisata-sahassā s. Ja i.77. The eight attainments comprise the four Jhānas, the realm of the infinity of space, realm of the infinity of consciousness, realm of nothingness, realm of neither consciousness nor unconsciousness Pts i.8, Pts i.20 sq. Nd i.108, Nd i.328; Bv 192 = Ja i.28, Ja i.54; necessary for becoming a Buddha Ja i.14; acquired by the Buddha Ja i.66 the nine attainments, the preceding and the trance of cessation of perception and sensation SN ii.216, SN ii.222 described MN i.159 sq. etc.; otherwise called anupubbavihārā DN ii.156; AN iv.410, AN iv.448 & passim [cp. Divy 95 etc.] ■ In collocation with jhāna, vimokkha, and samādhi Vin i.97; AN iii.417 sq.; cp. Cpd. 59, 133 n. 3 -˚bhāvanā realizing the attainments Ja i.67; ˚kusalatā success in attainment DN iii.212; Dhs 1331 sq.

fr. saṃ + ā + pad

Samāpattila

one who has acquired Ja i.406.

fr. last

Samāpattesiya

(adj.) longing for attainment Kv 502 sq.

samāpatti + esiya, adj. to esikā

Samāpanna

having attained, got to, entered, reached SN iv.293 (saññā-nirodhaṃ); AN ii.42 (arahatta-maggaṃ entered the Path); Dhp 264 (icchālobha˚ given to desire); Kv 572 (in special sense attaining the samāpattis).

pp. of samāpajjati

Samāpannaka

(adj.) possessed of the samāpattis DN-a i.119.

last + ka

Samāpeti

to complete, conclude Mvu 5, Mvu 280; Mvu 30, Mvu 55; DN-a i.307 (desanaṃ) ■ pp. samatta2.

saṃ + āpeti

Samāyāti

to come together, to be united Ja iii.38.

saṃ + āyāti

Samāyuta

combined, united Mil 274.

saṃ + āyuta

Samāyoga

combination, conjunction DN-a i.95; Sdhp 45, Sdhp 469.

saṃ + āyoga

Samāraka

(adj.) including Māra Vin i.11 = SN v.423; DN i.250; DN iii.76, DN iii.135 & passim.;

sa3 + māra + ka

Samāraddha

undertaken SN iv.197; Dhp 293; Ja ii.61.

pp. of samārabhati

Samārambha

1. undertaking, effort, endeavour, activity AN ii.197 sq. (kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚) Vin iv.67.

2. injuring, killing, slaughter Snp 311; DN i.5; DN-a i.77; AN ii.197; SN v.470; Pp 58; Dhs-a 146- appasamārambha (written ˚rabbha) connected with little (or no) injury (to life) DN i.143. Cp. ārabhati1.

saṃ + ārambha

Samārabhati

to begin, undertake MN i.227; Mvu 5, Mvu 79 ■ pp. samāraddha.

saṃ + ārabhati2

Samāruhati

to climb up, to ascend, enter; pres. samārohati Ja vi.209 (cp. samorohatī p. 206, read samārohatī); aor. samārūhi Mvu 14, Mvu 38 ■ pp. samārūḷha ■ Caus. samāropeti to raise, cause to enter Mil 85; to put down, enter Ne 4, Ne 206.

saṃ + āruhati

Samārūḷha

ascended, entered MN i.74.

pp. of samāruhati

Samāropana

one of the Hāras Ne 1, Ne 2, Ne 4, Ne 108, Ne 205 sq., 256 sq.

fr. samāropeti

Samālapati

to speak to, address Ja i.478. At Ja i.51 it seems to mean “to recover the power of speech.” Samavaya = samavaya

saṃ + ālapati

Samāvaya = samavāya

, closely united Ja vi.475 (in verse).

Samāsa

1. compound, combination Vism 82; Snp-a 303; Kp-a 228. Cp. vyāsa.

2. an abridgment Mvu 37, Mvu 244.

fr. saṃ + ās

Samāsati

to sit together, associate; Pot. 3 sg. samāsetha SN i.17, SN i.56 sq.; Ja ii.112; Ja v.483, Ja v.494; Thag 4.

saṃ + āsati

Samāsana

(nt.) sitting together with, company Snp 977.

saṃ + āsana

Samāsama

“exactly the same” at Ud 85 (= DN ii.135) read sama˚.

Samāsādeti

to obtain, get; ger. samāsajja Ja iii.218.

saṃ + āsādeti

Samāhata

hit, struck Snp 153 (ayosanku˚); Mil 181, Mil 254, Mil 304. Sankusamāhata name of a purgatory MN i.337.

saṃ + āhata

Samāhita

1. put down, fitted Ja iv.337;

2. collected (of mind), settled, composed, firm, attentive DN i.13; SN i.169; AN ii.6 (˚indriya); iii.312, 343 sq.v.3, 93 sq., 329 sq.; Snp 212, Snp 225, Snp 972 etc.; Dhp 362; Iti 119; Pp 35; Vin iii.4; Mil 300; Vism 410; Nd i.501

3. having attained SN i.48 (cp. K.S. i.321 & Mil 352).;

pp. of samādahati

Samijjhati

to succeed, prosper, take effect DN i.71; Snp 766 (cp. Nd i.2 = labhati etc.); Bv ii.59; Ja i.14, Ja i.267; Pot. samijjheyyuṃ DN i.71; aor. samijjhi Ja i.68; Fut. samijjhissati Ja i.15 ■ pp. samiddha. Caus. II. ˚ijjhāpeti to endow or invest with (acc.) Ja vi.484.

saṃ + ijjhati

Samijjhana

(nt.) fulfilment, success Dhp-a i.112.

fr. samijjhati

Samijjhiṭṭha

ordered, requested Ja vi.12 (= āṇatta C.).

saṃ + ajjhiṭṭha

Samiñjati

1. to double up MN i.326.

2. (intrs.) to be moved or shaken Dhp 81 (= calati kampati Dhp-a ii.149). See also sammiñjati.

saṃ + iñjati of ṛñj or ṛj to stretch

Samiñjana

(nt.) doubling up, bending back (orig. stretching!) Vism 500 (opp. pasāraṇa). See also sammiñjana.

fr. samiñjati

Samita1

gathered, assembled Vv 6410; Vv-a 277 ■ nt. as adv. samitaṃ continuously MN i.93; AN iv.13; Iti 116; Mil 70, Mil 116.

saṃ + ita, pp. of sameti

Samita2

equal (in measure), like SN i.6.

sa + mita, of

Samita3

quiet, appeased Dhp-a iii.84.

pp. of sammati1

Samita4

arranged, put in order Ja v.201 (= saṃvidahita C.).

pp. of saṃ + śam to labour

Samitatta

(nt.) state of being quieted Dhp 265.

fr. samita3

Samitāvin

one who has quieted himself, calm, Snp 449, Snp 520; SN i.62, SN i.188; AN ii.49, AN ii.50. Cp BSk. śamitāvin & samitāvin.;

samita3 + āvin, cp. vijitāvin

Samiti

(f.) assembly DN ii.256; Dhp 321; Ja iv.351; Pv ii.313 (= sannipāta Pv-a 86); Dhp-a iv.13.

fr. saṃ + i

Samiddha

1. succeeded, successful Vin i.37; Bv ii.4 = Ja i.3; Mil 331.

2. rich, magnificent Ja vi.393; Ja iii.14; samiddhena (adv.) successfully Ja vi.314.

pp. of samijjhati

Samiddhi

(f.) success, prosperity Dhp 84; SN i.200.

fr. samijjhati

Samiddhika

(adj.) rich in, abounding in Sdhp 421.

samiddhi + ka

Samiddhin

(adj.) richly endowed with Thag-a 18 (Ap v.23); fem ■ inī Ja v.90.

fr. samiddhi

Samidhā

(f.) fuel, firewood Snp-a 174.

fr. saṃ + idh; see indhana

Samihita

collected, composed Vin i.245 = DN i.104 = DN i.238; AN iii.224 = AN iii.229 = DN-a i.273; DN i.241, DN i.272.

= saṃhita

Samīcī

D ii.94: see sāmīcī.

Samītar

one who meets, assembles; pl. samītāro Ja v.324.

= sametar

Samīpa

(adj.) near, close (to) Snp-a 43 (bhumma-vacana), 174, 437; Kp-a 111; Pv-a 47 (dvāra˚ magga) (nt.) proximity DN i.118. Cases adverbially: acc. ˚aṃ near to Pv-a 107; loc. ˚-e near (with gen.) Snp-a 23, Snp-a 256; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 17, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 120.

-ga approaching Mvu 4, Mvu 27; Mvu 25, Mvu 74. -cara being near Dhs-a 193. -cārin being near DN i.206; DN ii.139 -ṭṭha standing near Mvu 37, Mvu 164.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. samīpa

Samīpaka

(adj.) being near Mvu 33, Mvu 52.

samīpa + ka

Samīra

air, wind Dāvs iv.40.

fr. saṃ + īr

Samīrati

to be moved Vin i.185; Dhp 81; Dhp-a ii.149 ■ pp. samīrita Ja i.393.

saṃ + īrati

Samīrita

stirred, moved Ja i.393.

saṃ + īrita

Samīhati

to move, stir; to be active; to long for, strive after Snp 1064 (cp. Nd ii.651); Vv 51; Vv-a 35; Ja v.388 ■ pp. samīhita.

saṃ + īhati

Samīhita

(nt.) endeavour, striving after, pursuit Ja v.388.

pp. of samīhati

Samukkaṃsati

to extol, to praise Snp 132, Snp 438; MN i.498 ■ pp. samukkaṭṭha.

saṃ + ukkaṃsati

Samukkaṭṭha

exalted AN iv.293; Thag 632.

saṃ + ukkaṭṭha

Samukkācanā

= ukkācanā Vb 352; Vism 23.

Samukkheṭita

despised, rejected Vin iii.95; Vin iv.27.

saṃ + ukkheṭita

Samugga

a box, basket Ja i.265, Ja i.372, Ja i.383; Mil 153, Mil 247; Sdhp 360 (read samuggābhaṃ) Samugga-jātaka the 436th Jātaka Ja iii.527 sq. (called Karaṇḍaka-Jātaka ibid.; v.455).

Class. Sk. samudga

Samuggaṇhāti

to seize, grasp, embrace; ger. samuggahāya Snp 797; Nd i.105 ■ pp. samuggahīta.

saṃ + uggaṇhati

Samuggata

arisen Vv-a 280; Ja iv.403 (text samuggagata).

saṃ + uggata

Samuggama

rise, origin Vb-a 21 (twofold, of the khandhas).

saṃ + uggama

Samuggahīta

seized, taken up Snp 352, Snp 785, Snp 801, Snp 837, Snp 907; Nd i.76, Nd i.100, Nd i.193.

pp. of samuggaṇhāti

Samuggirati

to throw out, eject Vv-a 199; to cry aloud Dāvs v.29.

saṃ + uggirati

Samugghāta

uprooting, abolishing, removal DN i.135; MN i.136; AN ii.34; AN iii.407; AN v.198; SN ii.263; SN iii.131; SN iv.31; Vin i.107, Vin i.110; Ja iii.397.

saṃ + ugghāta; BSk. samudghāṭa Lal 36, Lal 571

Samugghātaka

(adj.) removing Mil 278.

fr. last

Samugghātita

abolished, completely removed; nt. abstr. ˚tta Mil 101.

pp. of samugghāteti, see samūhanati

Samucita

suitable Vin iv.147 (must mean something else here, perhaps “hurt,” or “frightened”) Dāvs v.55.

saṃ + ucita, pp. of uc to be pleased

Samuccaya

collection, accumulation Ja ii.235 (the signification of the particle vā); Snp-a 266 (id.) ■ samuccaya-kkhandhaka the third section of Cullavagga Vin ii.38–⁠72.

saṃ + uccaya

Samucchaka

see samuñchaka.

Samucchati

to be consolidated, to arise samucchissatha (Conditional) DN ii.63.

derivation and meaning uncertain; Windisch, Buddha’s Geburt, p. 39, n. 1 derives it fr. saṃ + mucchati Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 157

Samucchita

infatuated SN i.187; SN iv.71; Thag 1219. It is better to read pamucchita at all passages.

saṃ + mucchita

Samucchindati

to extirpate, abolish, spoil, give up DN i.34; DN ii.74; MN i.101 sq., 360; Ja iv.63. pp. samucchinna.

saṃ + ucchindati

Samucchinna

cut off, extirpated DN i.34.

saṃ + ucchinna

Samuccheda

cutting off, abolishing, giving up MN i.360; Kp-a 142; sammā s. Pts i.101; ˚pahāna relinquishing by extirpation Vism 5; Snp-a 9; ˚maraṇa dying by extirpation (of saṃsāra) Vism 229; ˚visuddhi Pts ii.3; ˚suññaṃ Pts ii.180.

saṃ + uccheda

Samujjala

(adj.) resplendent Ja i.89, Ja i.92 (pañcavaṇṇa-vattha˚). raṃsi-jāla˚ resplendent with the blaze of rays Vv-a 12, Vv-a 14, Vv-a 166.

saṃ + ujjala

Samujju

(adj.) straightforward, perfect Snp 352; SN iv.196 (text saṃmuju).

saṃ + uju

Samuñchaka

(adj.) only as nt. adv. ˚ṃ gleaning, (living) by gleaning SN i.19; Ja iv.466 (˚ṃ carati).

saṃ + uncha + ka

Samuṭṭhahati

to rise up, to originate; pres. samuṭṭhāti Vin v.1; aor. samuṭṭhahi Mvu 28 Mvu 16 ■ pp. samuṭṭhita ■ Caus. samuṭṭhāpeti to raise to originate, set on foot Ja i.144, Ja i.191, Ja i.318.

saṃ + uṭṭhahati

Samuṭṭhāna

(nt.) rising, origination, cause; as adj. (-˚) arising from AN ii.87; Dhs 766 sq., 981, 1175; Mil 134, Mil 302, Mil 304; Ja i.207; Ja iv.171; Kp-a 23, Kp-a 31, Kp-a 123 Vism 366.

saṃ + uṭṭhāna

Samuṭṭhānika

(adj.) originating Dhs-a 263.

fr. last

Samuṭṭhāpaka

(f. ˚ikā) occasioning, causing Dhs-a 344; Vv-a 72.

fr. samuṭṭhāpeti

Samuṭṭhita

arisen, originated, happened, occurred Ja ii.196; Dhs 1035.

pp. of samuṭṭhahati

Samuttarati

to pass over Mil 372.

saṃ + uttarati

Samuttejaka

(adj.) instigating, inciting, gladdening MN i.146; AN ii.97; AN iv.296, AN iv.328; AN v.155; SN v.162; Iti 107.

fr. samuttejeti

Samuttejeti

to excite, gladden, to fill with enthusiasm Vin i.18; DN i.126. Cp. BSk. samuttejayati e.g. Divy 80.

saṃ + ud + tij

Samudaya

1. rise, origin DN i.17; DN ii.33, DN ii.308; DN iii.227; AN i.263 (kamma˚); Vin i.10; Snp p.135; Iti 16 (samuddaya metri causa) etc. dukkha˚; the origin of ill, the second ariya-sacca, e.g. DN iii.136; AN i.177 Vism 495 (where samudaya is expld in its parts as sam u + aya); Vb-a 124.

2. bursting forth, effulgence (pabhā˚) Ja i.83.

3. produce, revenue DN i.227.

saṃ + udaya

Samudāgacchati

to result, rise; to be got, to be at hand DN i.116; MN i.104 ■ pp. samudāgata.

saṃ + udāgacchati

Samudāgata

arisen, resulted; received SN ii.24; Snp 648 (= āgata C.).

pp. of last

Samudāgama

beginning Ja i.2.

saṃ + ud + āgama

Samudācarati

1. to be current, to be in use MN i.40 (= kāya-vacī-dvāraṃ sampatta s. MA 182)

2. to occur to, to befall, beset, assail MN i.109, MN i.112 MN i.453; SN ii.273; Iti 31; Vism 343.

3. to behave towards to converse with (instr.), to address Vin i.9; DN ii.154 DN ii.192; AN iii.124, AN iii.131; AN iv.415, AN iv.440; AN v.103; Ja i.192.

4. to practise Ja ii.33 (aor. ˚ācariṃsu).

5. to claim, to boast of Vin iii.91 ■ pp. samudāciṇṇa.

saṃ + ud + ācarati

Samudācaritatta

(nt.) practice Mil 59.

abstr. fr. samudācarita, pp. of samudācarati

Samudācāra

behaviour, practice, habit, familiarity Ja iv.22; Snp-a 6; Dhs-a 392; Pv-a 279.

saṃ + ud + ācāra

Samudāciṇṇa

practised, indulged in Ja ii.33; Tikp 320.

pp. of samudācarati

Samudānaya

(adj.) to be procured or attained Ja iii.313 (su˚).

grd. of samudāneti

Samudānīta

collected, procured Ja iv.177.

pp. of samudāneti, cp. BSk. samudānīta Mvu i.231

Samudāneti

to collect, procure, attain get MN i.104; Snp 295 ■ pp. ˚ānīta.

saṃ + ud + āneti; cp. BSk. samudānayati Divy 26, Divy 50, Divy 490; Avs i.199

Samudāya

multitude, quantity Vv-a 175; the whole Vv-a 276.

fr. saṃ + ud + ā + i

Samudāvaṭa

restrained Dhs-a 75.

saṃ + ud + āvaṭa? Better read as saṃ + udāvatta

Samudāhāra

talk, conversation Mil 344; piya˚; AN v.24, AN v.27, AN v.90 AN v.201, AN v.339; Thag-a 226.

saṃ + udāhāra, cp. BSk. samudāhāra Divy 143

Samudikkhati

to behold Thag-a 147 (Ap. v.52).

saṃ + udikkhati

Samudita

1. arisen Dāvs v.4.

2. excited SN i.136.

3. united Vv-a 321.

saṃ + udita1

Samudīraṇa

(nt.) moving MN i.119; DN i.76; Vism 365; Dhs-a 307.

saṃ + udīraṇa in meaning udīreti 1

Samudīrita

uttered Ja vi.17.

saṃ + udīrita

Samudeti

to arise; pres. samudayati (v.l. samudīyati) SN ii.78; samudeti AN iii.338; pp. samudita.

saṃ + udeti

Samudda

a (large) quantity of water, e.g. the Ganges; the sea the ocean DN i.222; MN i.493; AN i.243; AN ii.48 sq. AN iii.240; DN iii.196, DN iii.198; SN i.6, SN i.32, SN i.67; Ja i.230; Ja iv.167 Ja iv.172; Dhp 127; Nd i.353; Snp-a 30; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 104, Pv-a 133 Pv-a 271; explained by adding sāgara, SN ii.32; four oceans SN ii.180, SN ii.187; Thag-a 111. Often characterized as mahā the great ocean, e.g. Vin ii.237; AN i.227; AN ii.55 AN iii.52; AN iv.101; Snp-a 371; Dhp-a iii.44. Eight qualities AN iv.198, AN iv.206; popular etymology Mil 85 sq. (viz “yattakaṃ udakaṃ tattakaṃ loṇaṃ,” and vice versa) the eye etc. (the senses), an ocean which engulfs all beings SN iv.157 (samudda = mahā udakarāsi) ■ Cp sāmuddika.

-akkhāyikā (f.) tales about the origin of the sea cosmogony Vin i.188; MN i.513 sq.; DN i.8; DN-a i.91 -ṭṭhaka situated in the ocean Ja vi.158. -vīci a wave of the ocean Vism 63.

cp. Vedic samudra, fr. saṃ + udra, water

Samuddaya

metri causa instead of samudaya Iti 16, Iti 52.

Samuddhaṭa

pulled out, eradicated Mvu 59, Mvu 15; Ja vi.309; Sdhp 143.

saṃ + uddhaṭa

Samuddharana

(nt.) pulling out, salvation Mil 232.

saṃ + uddharaṇa

Samuddharati

to take out or away; to lift up, carry away, save from; aor. samuddhari Ja vi.271 samuddhāsi (aor. thus read instead of samuṭṭhāsi Ja v.70.

saṃ + uddharati

Samunna

moistened, wet, immersed SN iv.158; cp. the similar passage AN ii.211 with ref. to taṇhā as a snare (pariyonaddha).

saṃ + unna

Samunnameti

to raise, elevate, Thag 29.

saṃ + unnameti

Samupagacchati

to approach Mil 209.

saṃ + upagacchati

Samupajaneti

to produce; ˚janiyamāna (ppr. pass.) Ne 195.

saṃ + upa + janeti

Samupaṭṭhahati

to serve, help; pres. samupaṭṭhāti Sdhp 283; aor. samupaṭṭhahi Mvu 33 Mvu 95.

saṃ + upaṭṭhahati

Samupabbūḷha

set up; heaped, massed, in full swing (of a battle), crowded MN i.253; DN ii.285; SN i.98; Mil 292; Ja i.89.

saṃ + upa + viyūḷha

Samupama

resembling Mvu 37, Mvu 68; also samūpama Ja i.146; Ja v.155; Ja vi.534.

saṃ + upama

Samuparūḷha

ascended Dāvs iv.42.

saṃ + uparūḷha

Samupasobhita

adorned Mil 2.

saṃ + upasobhita

Samupāgacchati

to come to; aor. samupāgami Mvu 36, Mvu 91; pp. samupāgata.

saṃ + upāgacchati

Samupāgata

come to, arrived at Mvu 37, Mvu 115; Mvu 38, Mvu 12; Ja vi.282; Sdhp 324.

saṃ + upāgata

Samupādika

being on a level with the water Mil 237 (Trenckner conjectures samupodika). The better reading, however, is samupp˚, sama = peace, quiet, thus “producing quiet,” calm.

Samupeta

endowed with, Mil 352.

saṃ + upeta

Samuppajjati

to arise, to be produced SN iv.218; pp. samuppanna.

saṃ + uppajjati

Samuppatti

(f.) origin, arising SN iv.218.

Samuppanna

arisen, produced, come about Snp 168, Snp 599; Dhs 1035.

saṃ + uppanna

Samuppāda

origin, arising, genesis, coming to be, production Vin ii.96; SN iii.16 sq.; Iti 17; AN iii.406 (dhamma˚); Ja vi.223 (anilūpana-samuppāda, v. read ˚-samuppāta, “swift as the wind”); Vism 521 (sammā & saha uppajjati = samuppāda). Cp. paṭicca˚.;

saṃ + uppāda

Samuppilava

(adj.) jumping or bubbling up Snp 670 (˚āso nom. pl.).

fr. saṃ + uppilavati

Samupphosita

sprinkled Ja vi.481.

saṃ + ud + phosita

Samubbahati

to carry Dāvs iii.3; Dāvs v.35; ppr. samubbahanto Ja vi.21 (making display of).

saṃ + ubbahati2

Samubbhūta

borne from, produced from Dāvs ii.25.

saṃ + ud + bhūta

Samuyyuta

energetic, devoted Vv 6333; Vv-a 269.

saṃ + uyyuta

Samullapati

to talk, converse Vin iii.187; Pv-a 237; ppr. samullapanto Ja iii.49.

saṃ + ullapati

Samullapana

(nt.) talking (with), conversation Snp-a 71.

saṃ + ullapana

Samullāpa

conversation, talk Mil 351.

= last

Samussaya

1. accumulation, complex AN ii.42; Iti 48; Iti 34; bhassasamuccaya, grandiloquence Snp 245–⁠2. complex form, the body DN ii.157 = SN i.148; Vv3512 (= sarīra Vv-a 164); Dhp 351; Thag 202 (“confluence, i.e. of the 5 factors, trsln); Thig 22, Thig 270; Dhp-a iv.70 Thag-a 98, Thag-a 212; rūpasamussaya the same Thig 102 cp. samuccaya.

saṃ + ud + śri, cp. BSk. samucchraya “body,” Divy 70 = Avs i.162

Samussāpita

lifted, raised Ja iii.408.

saṃ + ussāpita

Samussāhita

instigated Vv-a 105.

saṃ + ussāhita

Samussita

1. elevated, erected Ja iii.497. - 2. arrogant, proud, haughty Dhp 147 (interpreted at Dhp-a iii.109 as “compounded,” i.e. the body made up of 300 bones); AN i.199; Snp-a 288 (˚ṃ bhassaṃ high and mighty talk).

saṃ + ussita

Samusseti

to raise, lift up, Pot. samusseyya AN i.199 (here = to be grandiloquent) ■ pp. samussita.

saṃ + ud + śri

Samūpasanta

is v.l. for su-vūpasanta (?) “calmed,” at Kp-a 21.

saṃ + upasanta

Samūlaka

(adj.) including the root Thig 385; Thag-a 256.

sa3 + mūla + ka

Samūha

multitude, mass, aggregation Ne 195; Pv-a 49, Pv-a 127, Pv-a 157 (= gaṇa), 200 (id.).

fr. saṃ + vah, uh

Samūhata

taken out, removed DN i.136; SN iii.131; Thag 604; Dhp 250; Snp 14, Snp 360; Iti 83; Ja iv.345 (Kern, wrongly, “combined”).

pp. of samūhanati

Samūhatatta

(nt.) abolition MN iii.151.

abstr. fr. samūhata

Samūhanati

to remove, to abolish Vin i.110; DN i.135 sq. (˚hanissati); ii.91 = SN v.432; MN i.47 MN ii.193; SN v.76; Ja i.374 = Snp 360; Snp 14, Snp 369, Snp 1076 sikkhāpadaṃ Vin iii.23; DN ii.154; uposathāgāraṃ to discontinue using a Vihāra as an Uposathāgāra Vin i.107; sīmaṃ to remove the boundary Vin i.110. Pres also samūhanti SN iii.156; Pot. samūhaneyya Vin i.110 imper. samūhantu DN ii.154; & ˚ūhanatu Mil 143; ger samūhanitvā MN i.47; Vin i.107; a˚ MN iii.285; inf. samugghātuṃ Mvu 37, Mvu 32; grd. samūhantabba Vin i.107-Caus. II. samugghātāpeti to cause to be removed, i.e. to put to death Mil 193; samūhanāpeti Mil 142. pp. samūhata & (Caus.); samugghātita.

saṃ + ūhanati2

Samūheti

to gather, collect Mvu 37, Mvu 245.

Caus. of saṃ + uh = vah

Samekkhati

to consider, to seek, look for; Pot. samekkhe Ja iv.5; ppr. samekkhamāna Thag 547 & samekkhaṃ Ja ii.65; ger. samekkhiya Mvu 37, Mvu 237.

saṃ + ikkhati

Sameta

associating with Mil 396; connected with, provided with Mvu 19, Mvu 69; combined, constituted Snp 873, Snp 874.

pp. of sameti

Sameti

1. to come together, to meet, to assemble Bv ii.199 = Ja i.29.

2. to associate with, to go to DN ii.273; Ja iv.93.

3. to correspond to, to agree DN i.162, DN i.247; Ja i.358; Ja iii.278.

4. to know, consider SN i.186; Nd i.284.

5. to fit in Ja vi.334 ■ imper sametu Ja iv.9320; fut. samessati SN iv.379; Iti 70; aor samiṃsu Bv ii.199; SN ii.158 = Iti 70; & samesuṃ Ja ii.3016 ger. samecca (1) (coming) together with DN ii.273; Ja vi.211, Ja vi.318 ■ (2) having acquired or learnt, knowing SN i.186; Snp 361, Snp 793; AN ii.6 ■ pp. samita & sameta; [ = saṃ + ā + ita].

saṃ + eti

Sametikā

Sii.285; read samāhitā.

Samerita

moved, set in motion; filled with (-˚), pervaded by Snp 937; Nd i.410; Ja vi.529; Vism 172.

saṃ + erita

Samokiṇṇa

besprinkled, covered (with) Ja i.233.

pp. of samokirati

Samokirati

to sprinkle Bv ii.178 = Ja i.27. - pp. samokiṇṇa.

saṃ + okirati

Samocita

gathered, arranged Ja v.156 (= surocita C.).

saṃ + ocita

Samotata

strewn all over, spread Vv 816 (vv.ll. samogata and samohata); Ja i.183; Ap 191.

saṃ + otata

Samotarati

to descend Mvu 10, Mvu 57.

saṃ + otarati

Samodakaṃ

(adv.) at the water’s edge Vin i.6 = MN i.169 = DN ii.38.

saṃ + odakaṃ

Samodahati

to put together, supply, apply SN i.7; SN iv.178 sq.; to fix Ne 165, Ne 178; ppr. samodahaṃ SN i.7 = SN iv.179; ger. samodahitvā SN iv.178; & samodhāya Vism 105; Sdhp 588 ■ pp. samohita.

saṃ + odahati

Samodita

united Vv-a 186 (so read for samm˚), 320; cp. samudita.

Samodhāna

(nt.) collocation, combination Bv ii.59 = Ja i.14; SN iv.215 = SN v.212; application (of a story) Ja ii.381. samodhānaṃ gacchati to come together, to combine, to be contained in Vin i.62; MN i.184 = SN i.86; SN v.43, SN v.231 = AN v.21 (Com. odhānapakkhepaṃ) AN iii.364; Snp-a 2; Vism 7; Vb-a 107 samodhānagata wrapped together Mil 362; samodhānaparivāsa a combined, inclusive probation Vin ii.48 sq.

saṃ + odhāna, cp. odahana

Samodhānatā

(f.) combination, application, pursuance, in vutti˚; Ja iii.541 (so read for vatti˚).

abstr. fr. samodhāna

Samodhāneti

to combine, put together, connect Ja i.9, Ja i.14; DN-a i.18; Snp-a 167, Snp-a 193, Snp-a 400 especially jātakaṃ s. to apply a Jātaka to the incident Ja i.106, Ja i.171; Ja ii.381 & passim.;

Denom. fr. samodhāna

Samorodha

barricading, torpor Dhs 1157; Dhs-a 379.

saṃ + orodha

Samorohati

to descend; ger. samoruyha Mvu 10, Mvu 35.

saṃ + orohati

Samosaraṇa

(nt.) coming together, meeting, union, junction DN i.237; DN ii.61; SN iii.156; SN v.42 sq., 91; AN iii.364; Mil 38.

saṃ + osaraṇa

Samosarati

1. to flow down together Mil 349.

2. to come together, gather Ja i.178 (see on this Kern, Toev. ii.60).

saṃ + osarati

Samoha

infatuated Pp 61.

Samohita

1. put together, joined Ja vi.261 (su˚).

2. connected with, covered with Nd i.149 (for pareta); Mil 346 (raja-panka˚).

pp. of samodahati

Sampakampati

to tremble, to be shaken Vin i.12; DN ii.12, DN ii.108; MN i.227; MN iii.120 ■ Caus. sampakampeti to shake DN ii.108.

saṃ + pakampati

Sampakopa

indignation Dhs 1060.

saṃ + pakopa

Sampakkhandati

to aspire to, to enter into Mil 35.

saṃ + pakkhandati, cp. BSk. sampraskandati Mvu ii.157

Sampakkhandana

(nt.) aspiration Mil 34 sq.

saṃ + pakkhandana

Sampaggaṇhāti

1. to exert, strain Dhs-a 372.

2. to show a liking for, to favour, befriend Ja vi.294 ■ pp. sampaggahīta.

saṃ + pagganhāti

Sampaggaha

support, patronage Mvu 4, Mvu 44.

saṃ + paggaha

Sampaggahīta

uplifted Mil 309.

saṃ + paggahīta

Sampaggāha

assumption, arrogance Dhs 1116.

Sampaghosa

sound, noise Mhbv 45.

Sampacura

(adj.) abundant, very many AN ii.59, AN ii.61; SN i.110.

saṃ + pacura

Sampajañña

(nt.) attention, consideration, discrimination, comprehension, circumspection AN i.13 sq.; AN ii.93; AN iii.307; AN iv.320; AN v.98 sq. SN iii.169; DN iii.213 (sati + samp. opp. to muṭṭha-sacca asampajañña ), 273. Description of it in detail at DN-a i.183 sq. = Vb-a 347 sq., where given as fourfold, viz sātthaka˚, sappāya˚, gocara˚, asammoha˚, with examples Often combined with sati, with which almost synonymous, e.g. at DN i.63; AN i.43; AN ii.44 sq.; AN v.115, AN v.118.

fr. sampajāna, i.e. *sampajānya

Sampajāna

(adj.) thoughtful, mindful attentive, deliberate, almost syn. with sata, mindful DN i.37; DN ii.94 sq.; Snp 413, Snp 931; Iti 10, Iti 42; Pp 25; DN iii.49, DN iii.58, DN iii.221, DN iii.224 sq.; AN iv.47 sq., 300 sq., 457 sq. Nd i.395; Nd ii.141. sampajānakārin acting with consideration or full attention DN i.70; DN ii.95, DN ii.292; AN ii.210 AN v.206; Vb-a 347 sq.; DN-a i.184 sq.; sampājanamusāvāda deliberate lie Vin iv.2; Iti 18; DN iii.45; AN i.128 AN iv.370; AN v.265; Ja i.23.

saṃ + pajāna, cp. pajānāti; BSk. samprajāna, Mvu i.206; Mvu ii.360

Sampajānāti

to know SN v.154; Snp 1055; Nd ii.655.

saṃ + pajānāti

Sampajjati

1. to come to, to fall to; to succeed, prosper Ja i.7; Ja ii.105.

2. to turn out, to happen, become DN i.91, DN i.101, DN i.193, DN i.239; Pv-a 192. aor sampādi DN ii.266, DN ii.269 ■ pp. sampanna ■ Caus sampādeti.

saṃ + pajjati

Sampajjalita

(adj.) in flames, ablaze AN iv.131; Vin i.25; DN i.95; DN ii.335; Ja i.232; Mil 84.

saṃ + pajjalita

Sampaṭike

(adv.) now Ja iv.432 (= sampati, idāni C.).

loc. fr. saṃ + paṭi + ka

Sampaṭiggaha

summing up, agreement Kp-a 100.

saṃ + paṭiggaha

Sampaṭicchati

to receive, accept Ja i.69; Ja iii.351; Mvu 6, Mvu 34; ovādaṃ s. to comply with an admonition Ja iii.52; sādhū ti s. to say “well” and agree Ja ii.31; Mil 8. Caus. II. sampaṭicchāpeti Ja vi.336.

saṃ + paṭicchati

Sampaṭicchana

(nt.) acceptance, agreement Dhs-a 332; Snp-a 176 (“sādhu”); Vism 21; Sdhp 59, Sdhp 62.

fr. last

Sampaṭinipajjā

(f.) squatting down, lying down Thag-a 111.

saṃ + paṭi + nipajjā

Sampaṭivijjhati

to penetrate; Pass. sampaṭivijjhiyati Ne 220.

saṃ + paṭivijjhati

Sampaṭivedha

penetration Ne 27, Ne 41, Ne 42, Ne 220.

saṃ + paṭivedha

Sampaṭisaṅkhā

deliberately SN ii.111; contracted from ger. ˚-saṃkhāya.

Sampatati

to jump about, to fly along or about Ja vi.528 (dumā dumaṃ); imper, sampatantu ib. vi.448 (itarītaraṃ); ppr. sampatanto flying to Ja iii.491. pp. sampatita.

saṃ + patati

Sampati

now Mil 87; sampatijāta, just born DN ii.15 = MN iii.123. Cp. sampaṭike.

saṃ + paṭi; cp. Sk. samprati

Sampatita

jumping about Ja vi.507.

pp. of sampatati

Sampatta

reached, arrived, come to, present Ja iv.142; Mil 9, Mil 66; Pv-a 12; Kp-a 142; Snp-a 295; Sdhp 56.

pp. of sampāpuṇāti

Sampattakajāta

merged in, given to Ud 75.

read sammattaka (?)

Sampatti

(f.) 1. success, attainment; happiness, bliss, fortune (opp. vipatti ) AN iv.26, AN iv.160; Vism 58 Vism 232; Ja iv.3 (dibba˚); DN-a i.126; three attainments Ja i.105; Mil 96; Dhp-a iii.183 (manussa˚, devaloka˚ nibbāna˚); Ne 126 (sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚; cp sampadā); four Vb-a 439 sq. (gati˚, upadhi˚, kāla˚ payoga˚); six Ja i.105; nine Mil 341.

2. excellency magnificence Snp-a 397; rūpasampatti beauty Ja iii.187 Ja iv.333.

3. honour Mvu 22, Mvu 48.

4. prosperity splendour Ja iv.455; Mvu 38, Mvu 92; s. bhavaloko Pts i.122 Cp. samāpatti & sampadā.;

saṃ + patti2

Sampatthanā

(f.) entreating, imploring Dhs 1059.

saṃ + patthanā

Sampadā

(f.) 1. attainment, success accomplishment; happiness, good fortune; blessing bliss AN i.38; Pv ii.947 (= sampatti Pv-a 132) ■ Sampadā in its pregnant meaning is applied to the accomplishments of the individual in the course of his religious development. Thus it is used with sīla, citta, & paññā at DN i.171 sq. and many other passages in an almost encyclopedic sense. Here with sīla˚; the whole of the sīlakkhandha (DN i.63 sq.) is understood; citta˚; means the cultivation of the heart & attainments of the mind relating to composure, concentration and religious meditation, otherwise called samādhikkhandha. It includes those stages of meditation which are enum;d under samādhi. With paññā˚; are meant the attainments of higher wisdom and spiritual emancipation connected with supernormal faculties, culminating in Arahantship and extinction of all causes of rebirth otherwise called vijjā (see the 8 items of this under vijjā b.). The same ground as by this 3 fold division is covered by the enumeration of 5 sampadās as sīla˚ samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚, vimutti-ñāṇadassana˚; MN i.145; Pp 54; cp. SN i.139; AN iii.12.

The term sampadā is not restricted to a definite set of accomplishments. It is applied to various such sets besides the one mentioned above. Thus we find a set of 3 sampadās called sīla˚, citta˚ & diṭṭhi˚; at AN i.269, where under sīla the Nos. 1–⁠7 of the 10 sīlas are understood (see sīla 2 a), under citta Nos. 8 & 9, under; diṭṭhi No. 10. sīla & diṭṭhi˚; also at DN iii.213 ■ A set of 8 sampadās is given at AN iv.322 with uṭṭhāna˚, ārakkha˚, kalyāṇamittatā sammājīvitā, saddhā˚, sīla˚, cāga˚, paññā˚; of which the first 4 are expld in detail at AN iv.281 = AN iv.322 as bringing wordly happiness, viz. alertness, wariness, association with good friends, right livelihood; and the last 4 as leading to future bliss (viz. faith in the Buddha, keeping the 5 sīlas, liberality, higher wisdom) at AN iv.284 = AN iv.324 Another set of 5 frequently mentioned is: ñāti˚, bhoga˚ ārogya˚, sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚; (or the blessings, i.e. good fortune of having relatives, possessions, health, good conduct right views) representing the “summa bona” of popular choice, to which is opposed deficiency (vyasana, reverse of the same items. Thus e.g. at AN iii.147; DN iii.235. Three sampadās: kammanta˚, ājīva˚, diṭṭhi,˚; i.e. the 7 sīlas, right living (sammā-ājīva), right views AN i.271-Another three as saddhā˚, sīla˚, paññā˚; at AN i.287. Bdhgh at Dhp-a iii.93, Dhp-a iii.94 speaks of four sampadās, viz vatthu˚, paccaya˚, cetanā˚; guṇâtireka˚; of the blessings of a foundation (for merit), ofmeans (for salvation), of good intentions, of virtue (& merit). -A (later) set of; seven sampadās is given at Ja iv.96 with āgama˚, adhigama˚ pubbahetu˚, attattha-paripucchā˚, titthavāsa˚ yoniso-manasikāra˚, buddh’ûpanissaya˚ ■ Cp. the following: atta˚; SN v.30 sq.; ākappa˚; AN i.38; ājīva˚ AN i.271; DN-a i.235; kamma˚; AN iv.238 sq.; dassana˚ Snp 231; nibbāna˚; Vism 58; bhoga˚; (+ parivāra˚) Dhp-a i.78; yāga˚; Thag-a 40 (Ap. v.7); vijjācaraṇa˚; DN i.99.

2. execution, performance; result, consequence; thus yañña˚; successful performance of a sacrifice DN i.128; Snp 505, Snp 509; piṭaka-sampadāya “on the authority of the Piṭaka tradition,” according to the P.; in exegesis of iti-kira (hearsay) AN i.189 = AN ii.191 = Nd ii.151; and of itihītiha MN i.520 = MN ii.169.

fr. saṃ + pad, cp. BSk. sampadā Divy 401 (devamanuṣya˚), also sampatti

Sampadāti

to hand on, give over Ja iv.204 (aor. ˚padāsi).

saṃ + padāti

Sampadāna

(nt.) the dative relation Ja v.214 (upayogatthe), 237 (karaṇatthe); Snp-a 499 (˚vacana).

saṃ + padāna

Sampadāleti

to tear, to cut MN i.450; AN ii.33 = SN iii.85; SN iii.155; Mvu 23, Mvu 10 ■ Act. intrs sampadālati to burst Ja vi.559 (= phalati, C.).

saṃ + padāleti

Sampaditta

kindled Sdhp 33.

saṃ + paditta

Sampaduṭṭha

corrupted, wicked Ja vi.317 (a˚); Sdhp 70.

saṃ + paduṭṭha

Sampadussati

to be corrupted, to trespass Vin iv.260; Ja ii.193; pp. sampaduṭṭha.

saṃ + padussati

Sampadosa

wickedness Dhs 1060; a-sampadosa innocence Ja vi.317 = Ja vi.321.

saṃ + padosa1

Sampaddavati

to run away; aor. sampaddavi Ja vi.53 ■ pp. sampadduta.

saṃ + pa + dru

Sampadduta

run away Ja vi.53.

pp. of sampaddavati

Sampadhūpeti

(˚dhūpāyati, ˚dhūpāti) to send forth (thick) smoke, to fill with smoke or incense to pervade, permeate SN i.169; Vin i.225; Snp p.15; Mil 333. Cp. sandhūpāyati.

saṃ + padhūpāti

Sampanna

1. successful, complete, perfect Vin ii.256; sampannaveyyākaraṇa a full explanation Snp 352.

2. endowed with, possessed of abounding in Vin i.17; Snp 152, Snp 727 (ceto-vimutti˚) Ja i.421; vijjācaraṇasampanna full of wisdom and goodness DN i.49; Snp 164; often used as first part of a compound e.g. sampannavijjācaraṇa Dhp 144; Dhp-a iii.86 sampannasīla virtuous Iti 118; Dhp 57; sampannodaka abounding in water Ja iv.125.

3. sweet, well cooked Vin ii.196; Mil 395.

pp. of sampajjati

Sampaphulla

(adj.) blooming, blossoming Sdhp 245.

saṃ + pa + phulla

Sampabhāsa

frivolous talk SN v.355.

saṃ + pa + bhāṣ

Sampabhāsati

to shine Mil 338.

saṃ + pa + bhās

Sampamathita

altogether crushed or overwhelmed Ja vi.189.

saṃ + pamathita

Sampamaddati

to crush out Mil 403.

saṃ + pamaddati

Sampamūḷha

(adj.) confounded Snp 762.

saṃ + pamūḷha

Sampamodati

to rejoice Vv 368 ■ pp. sampamodita.

saṃ + pamodati

Sampamodita

delighted, rejoicing Sdhp 301.

saṃ + pamodita

Sampayāta

gone forth, proceeded Dhp 237.

saṃ + payāta

Sampayāti

to proceed, to go on; inf. sampayātave Snp 834; pp. sampayāta.

saṃ + payāti

Sampayutta

associated with, connected Dhs 1; Kv 337; Dhs-a 42. -˚paccaya the relation of association (opp. vippayutta˚) Vism 539; Vb-a 206 Tikp 6, 20, 53, 65, 152 sq.; Dukp 1 sq.

saṃ + payutta

Sampayoga

union, association Vin i.10; SN v.421; DN-a i.96, DN-a i.260.

saṃ + payoga

Sampayojeti

1. to associate (with) Vin ii.262; MN ii.5.

2. to quarrel Vin ii.5; SN i.239 ■ pp sampayutta.

saṃ + payojeti

Samparāya

future state, the next world Vin ii.162; AN iii.154; AN iv.284 sq.; DN ii.240; SN i.108; Snp 141, Snp 864, Ja i.219; Ja iii.195; Mil 357; Dhp-a ii.50.

fr. saṃ + parā + i

Samparāyika

(adj.) belonging to the next world Vin i.179; Vin iii.21; DN ii.240; DN iii.130; AN iii.49, AN iii.364 AN iv.285; MN i.87; Iti 17, Iti 39; Ja ii.74.

fr. last

Samparikaḍḍhati

to pull about, drag along MN i.228.

saṃ + parikaḍḍhati

Samparikantati

to cut all round MN iii.275. (Trenckner reads sampakantati.)

saṃ + parikantati

Samparikiṇṇa

surrounded by Vin iii.86; Mil 155.

saṃ + parikiṇṇa

Samparitāpeti

to make warm, heat, scourge MN i.128, MN i.244 = SN iv.57.

saṃ + paritāpeti

Samparibhinna

(adj.) broken up Ja vi.113 (˚gatta).

saṃ + paribhinna

Samparivajjeti

to avoid, shun Sdhp 52, Sdhp 208.

saṃ + parivajjeti

Samparivatta

(adj.) rolling about Dhp 325.

saṃ + parivatta

Samparivattaka

(adj.) rolling about grovelling Ja ii.142 (turning somersaults); Dhp-a ii.5, Dhp-a ii.12; Mil 253, Mil 357; samparivattakaṃ (adv.) in a rolling about manner MN ii.138; samparivattakaṃ-samparivattakaṃ continually turning (it) Vin i.50.

saṃ + parivattaka

Samparivattati

to turn, to roll about; ppr. samparivattamāna Ja i.140; pp. samparivatta. Caus. samparivatteti [cp. BSk. ˚parivartayati to wring one’s hands Divy 263] to turn over in one’s mind, to ponder over SN v.89.

saṃ + parivattati

Samparivāreti

to surround, wait upon, attend on Ja i.61; aor. 3rd pl. samparivāresuṃ Ja i.164 ger. samparivārayitvā Ja i.61; ˚etvā (do.) Ja vi.43, Ja vi.108 Cp. sampavāreti.

saṃ + parivāreti

Samparivāsita

see parivāsita.

Sampareta

(adj.) surrounded, beset with Ja ii.317; Ja iii.360 = SN i.143.

saṃ + pareta

Sampalibodha

hindrance, obstruction Ne 79.

saṃ + palibodha

Sampalibhagga

broken up SN i.123.

pp. of next

Sampalibhañjati

to break, to crack MN i.234; SN i.123; pp. sampalibhagga.

saṃ + pari + bhañj

Sampalimaṭṭha

touched, handled, blotted out, destroyed SN iv.168 sq. = Ja iii.532 = Vism 36.

saṃ + palimaṭṭha

Sampaliveṭhita

(adj.) wrapped up, enveloped MN i.281.

saṃ + paliveṭhita

Sampaliveṭheti

to wrap up, envelop; ˚eyya Aiv.131 (kāyaṃ).

saṃ + paliveṭheti

Sampavaṅka

(adj.) intimate, friend DN ii.78; SN i.83, SN i.87; Pp 36.

perhaps saṃ + pari + anka2, contracted to *payyanka → *pavanka

Sampavaṅkatā

(f.) connection, friendliness, intimacy SN i.87; AN iii.422 (pāpa˚ & kalyāṇa˚); iv.283 sq.; v.24, 199; Dhs 1326; Pp 20, Pp 24; Dhs-a 394. Cp anu˚ Vin ii.88.

fr. last

Sampavaṇṇita

(adj.) described, praised Ja vi.398.

saṃ + pa + vaṇṇita

Sampavattar

an instigator AN iii.133.

saṃ + pavattar

Sampavatteti

to produce, set going AN iii.222 (saṃvāsaṃ); Mvu 23, Mvu 75.

saṃ + pavatteti

Sampavāti

to blow, to be fragrant MN i.212; Ja vi.534; Vv-a 343 (= Vv 8432).

saṃ + pavāti

Sampavāyati

to make fragrant, Vv 816, 8432; Vv-a 344.

saṃ + pavāyati

Sampavāyana

(nt.) making fragrant Vv-a 344.

fr. last

Sampavāreti

to cause to accept, to offer, to regale, serve with; ger. sampavāretvā Vin i.18; Vin ii.128; DN i.109; aor. sampavāresi DN ii.97.

saṃ + pavāreti; cp. BSk. saṃpravārayati Divy 285, Divy 310, etc.; Avs i.90; Mvu iii.142

Sampavedhati

to be shaken violently, to be highly affected Vin i.12; DN ii.12, DN ii.108; MN i.227 Thig 231; Ja i.25; SN iv.71 ■ Caus. sampavedheti to shake violently DN ii.108; MN i.253; Nd i.316, Nd i.371 (pp. ˚pavedhita).

saṃ + pavedhati

Sampavedhin

to be shaken Snp 28; Mil 386.

Sampasāda

serenity, pleasure DN ii.211, DN ii.222; AN ii.199; MN ii.262.

saṃ + pasāda

Sampasādana

(nt.) tranquillizing DN i.37; Dhs 161; Mil 34; Vism 156; Dhs-a 170 (in the description of the second Jhāna); happiness, joy Bv i.35.

saṃ + pasādana

Sampasādaniya

(adj.) leading to serenity, inspiring faith DN iii.99 sq. (the S. Suttanta), 116.

saṃ + pasādaniya

Sampasāreti

to stretch out, to distract Vism 365 ■ Pass. sampasāriyati AN iv.47; Mil 297; Dhs-a 376.

saṃ + pasāreti

Sampasīdati

to be tranquillized, reassured DN i.106; MN i.101; DN-a i.275.

saṃ + pasīdati

Sampasīdana

(nt.) becoming tranquillized Ne 28.

fr. last

Sampassati

to see, behold; to look to, to consider; ppr sampassanto Vin i.42; DN ii.285; sampassaṃ Dhp 290.

saṃ + passati

Sampahaṃsaka

(adj.) gladdening MN i.146; AN ii.97; AN iv.296, AN iv.328; AN v.155; Iti 107; Mil 373.

fr. next

Sampahaṃsati

to be glad; pp. sampahaṭṭha ■ Caus. sampahaṃseti to gladden, delight Vin i.18; DN i.126.

saṃ + pahaṃsati2

Sampahaṃsana

(nt.) being glad, pleasure; approval Pts i.167; Vism 148 (˚ā); Kp-a 100 (“evaṃ”); Snp-a 176 (“sādhu”); Sdhp 568.

fr. sampahaṃsati

Sampahaṭṭha1

(adj.) beaten, struck (of metal), refined, wrought SN i.65 (sakusala˚; Bdhgh ukkāmukhe pacitvā s.; K.S. i.321); Snp 686 (sukusala˚ Snp-a 486: “kusalena suvaṇṇakārena sanghaṭṭitaṃ sanghaṭṭentena tāpitaṃ”).

saṃ + pahaṭṭha1

Sampahaṭṭha2

gladdened, joyful Sdhp 301.

saṃ + pahaṭṭha2

Sampahāra

clashing, beating together, impact, striking; battle, strife DN ii.166; Pp 66 sq.; DN-a i.150; Mil 161 (ūmi-vega˚), 179 (of two rocks), 224.

saṃ + pahāra

Sampāka

1. what is cooked, a cooked preparation, concoction Vin ii.259 (maṃsa˚ etc.); Vv 435 (kola˚); Vv-a 186.

2. ripeness, development Ja vi.236.

saṃ + pāka

Sampāta

falling together, concurrence, collision Iti 68; kukkuṭasampāta neighbouring, closely adjoining (yasmā gāmā nikkhamitvā kukkuṭo padasā va aññaṃ gāmaṃ gacchati, ayaṃ kukkuṭasampāto ti vuccati) Vin iv.63, Vin iv.358; kukkuṭasampātaka lying close together (lit. like a flock of poultry) AN i.159. Cp. the similar sannipāta.

saṃ + pāta

Sampādaka

one who obtains Mil 349.

fr. sampādeti

Sampādana

(nt.) effecting, accomplishment Ne 44; preparing, obtaining Ja i.80.

fr. sampādeti

Sampādeti

1. to procure, obtain Vin i.217; Vin ii.214; ekavacanaṃ s. to be able to utter a single word Ja ii.164; kathaṃ s. to be able to talk Ja ii.165 dohaḷe s. to satisfy the longing Mvu 22, Mvu 51.

2. to strive, to try to accomplish one’s aim DN ii.120; SN ii.29

Caus. of sampajjati

Sampāpaka

(adj.) causing to obtain, leading to, bringing Ja iii.348; Ja vi.235.

fr. sampāpeti

Sampāpana

(nt.) reaching, getting to Mil 355, Mil 356 (tīra˚).

fr. sampāpuṇāti

Sampāpuṇāti

to reach, attain; to come to, meet with; aor. sampāpuṇi Ja i.67; Ja ii.20; pp. sampatta -Caus. sampāpeti to bring, to make attain Vism 303.

saṃ + pāpuṇāti

Sampāyati

to be able to explain (DN-a i.117: sampādetvā kathetuṃ sakkuṇoti), to agree, to come to terms, succeed DN i.26; DN ii.284; MN i.85, MN i.96, MN i.472; MN ii.157; AN v.50; SN iv.15 SN iv.67; SN v.109; Vin ii.249 (cp. p. 364); aor. sampāyāsi MN i.239. Cp. sampayāti.

dern not clear; Kern, Toev. i.62 = sampādayati; but more likely = sampāyāti, i.e. sam + pa + ā + .

Sampāruta

(quite) covered MN i.281.

saṃ + pāruta

Sampāleti

to protect Ja iv.127.

saṃ + pāleti

Sampiṇḍana

(nt.) combining, connection, addition Vism 159 (of “ca”); Kp-a 228 (id.); Dhs-a 171.

fr. saṃ + piṇḍ˚

Sampiṇḍita

brought together, restored Ja i.230; compact, firm Ja v.89.

pp. of sampiṇḍeti

Sampiṇḍeti

to knead or ball together, combine, unite Vism 159; Kp-a 125, Kp-a 221, Kp-a 230; Dhs-a 177; pp sampiṇḍita.

saṃ + piṇḍeti

Sampiya

(adj.) friendly; sampiyena by mutual consent, in mutual love Snp 123, Snp 290.

saṃ + piya

Sampiyāyati

to receive with joy, to treat kindly, address with love Ja iii.482; ppr. sampiyāyanto Ja i.135; sampiyāyamāna (do.) fondling, being fond of DN ii.223; Ja i.191, Ja i.297, Ja i.361; Ja ii.85; Dhp-a ii.65. aor. 3rd pl. sampiyāyiṃsu Ja vi.127.

saṃ + piyāyati

Sampiyāyanā

(f.) intimate relation, great fondness Ja iii.492.

saṃ + piyāyanā

Sampīṇeti

to satisfy, gladden, please; aor. 2nd sg. sampesi Ja iii.253; ger. sampīṇayitvā Dāvs iv.11.

saṃ + pīṇeti

Sampīḷa

(nt.) trouble, pain; asampīḷaṃ free from trouble Mil 351.

saṃ + pīḷa, cp. pīḷā

Sampīḷita

troubled; as nt., worry, trouble Mil 368.

pp. of sampīḷeti

Sampīḷeti

to press, to pinch, to worry Vin iii.126; pp. sampīḷita.

saṃ + pīḷeti

Sampucchati

to ask DN i.116; ger. sampuccha having made an appointment with SN i.176.

saṃ + pucchati

Sampuṭa

the hollow of the hand (in posture of veneration), in pāṇi˚; Mvu 37, Mvu 192 i.e. Cūḷavaṃsa (ed. Geiger) p. 15.

cp. saṃ + puṭa (lexicogr. Sk. sampuṭa “round box”) & BSk. sampuṭa in meaning “añjali” at Divy 380, in phrase kṛta-kara-sampuṭah

Sampuṭita

shrunk, shrivelled MN i.80.

saṃ + puṭita = phuṭita, cp. BSk. sampuṭaka Mvu ii.127

Sampuṇṇa

(sampūrṇa) filled, full Snp 279; Bv ii.119 = Ja i.20; Mvu 22, Mvu 60.

Sampupphita

in full bloom Pv iv.12 (= niccaṃ pupphita Pv-a 275).

saṃ + pupphita

Sampurekkharoti

to honour MN ii.169.

saṃ + purakkharoti

Sampūjeti

to venerate Mvu 30, Mvu 100.

saṃ + pūjeti

Sampūreti

Pass. pūriyati˚; to be filled, ended; aor. sampūri (māso, “it was a full month since…” Ja iv.458.

saṃ + pūreti

Sampha

(adj.-n.) frivolous; nt. frivolity, foolishness only in connection with expressions of talking, as samphaṃ bhāsati to speak frivolously AN ii.23; Snp 158; samphaṃ giraṃ bh. Ja vi.295; samphaṃ palapati Tikp 167 sq. Also in cpds. ˚palāpa frivolous talk DN i.4; DN iii.69, DN iii.82 DN iii.175, DN iii.269; AN i.269 sq., 298; ii.60, 84, 209; iii.254, 433 iv. 248; v.251 sq., 261 sq.; Tikp 168, 281; DN-a i.76 ˚palāpin talking frivolously DN i.138; DN iii.82; AN i.298 Pp 39, Pp 58.

not clear, if & how connected with Sk. śaśpa, grass. The BSk. has sambhinna-pralāpa for sampha-ppalāpa

Samphala

(adj.) abounding in fruits SN i.70; SN i.90 = Iti 45.

saṃ + phala

Samphassa

contact, reaction Vin i.3; AN ii.117; DN ii.62; MN i.85; Ja i.502; kāya-s. the touch of the skin DN ii.75; cakkhu-, sota-, ghāna-, jivhā-, kāya-and mano-s. DN ii.58, DN ii.308; SN iv.68 sq.; Vb-a 19.

saṃ + phassa

Samphuṭṭha

touched SN iv.97; Av.103; Iti 68.

pp. of samphassati

Samphulla

(adj.) full-blown Ja vi.188.

saṃ + phulla

Samphusati

to touch, to come in contact with; ppr. samphussaṃ Iti 68; ppr. med. samphusamāna Snp 671; Nd ii.199 (reads samphassamāna, where id. p at MN i.85 has rissamāna ); aor. samphusi DN ii.128; inf samphusituṃ Snp 835; DN ii.355; pp. samphuṭṭha.

saṃ + phusati

Samphusanā

(f.) touch, contact Thig 367; Dhs 2, Dhs 71.

saṃ + phusanā

Samphusitatta

(nt.) the state of having been brought into touch with Dhs 2, Dhs 71.

abstr. fr. samphusita

Sambaddha

bound together Sdhp 81.

saṃ + baddha

Sambandha

connection, tie DN ii.296 = MN i.58; Snp-a 108, Snp-a 166, Snp-a 249, Snp-a 273, Snp-a 343, Snp-a 516. ˚-kula related family Ja iii.362; a-sambandha (adj.) incompatible (C. on asaññuta Ja iii.266).

saṃ + bandha

Sambandhati

to bind together, to unite Vin ii.116; pass. sambajjhati is united, attached to Ja iii.7; ger. sambandhitvā Vin i.274; Vin ii.116 ■ pp sambaddha.

saṃ + bandhati

Sambandhana

(nt.) binding together, connection Ja i.328.

saṃ + bandhana

Sambarimāyā

(f.) the art of Sambari, jugglery SN i.239 (trsln “Sambara’s magic art”). Sambara is a king of the Asuras.

sambarī + māyā

Sambala

(nt.) provision SN ii.98; Ja v.71, Ja v.240; Ja vi.531.

cp. *Sk. śambala

Sambahula

(adj.) many Vin i.32; DN i.2; Ja i.126, Ja i.329; Snp 19; sambahulaṃ karoti to take a plurality vote Ja ii.45.

saṃ + bahula

Sambahulatā

(f.) a plurality vote Ja ii.45.

fr. sambahula

Sambahulika

(adj.) in ˚ṃ karoti = sambahulaṃ karoti Ja ii.197.

Sambādha

1. crowding, pressure, inconvenience from crowding, obstruction Vism 119 janasambādharahita free from crowding Mil 409 kiṭṭhasambādha crowding of corn, the time when the corn is growing thick MN i.115; Ja i.143, Ja i.388 ■ yassa sambādho bhavissati he who finds it too crowded Vin iv.43; asambādha unobstructed Snp 150; atisambādhatā (q.v.) the state of being too narrow Ja i.7; puttadārasambādhasayana a bed encumbered with child and wife Mil 243; cp. SN i.78; (in fig. sense) difficulty trouble SN i.7, SN i.48; Ja iv.488; sambādhapaṭipanna of the eclipsed moon SN i.50. As adjective “crowded, dense sambādho gharavāso life in the family is confined, i.e. a narrow life, full of hindrances DN i.63, DN i.250; SN ii.219 SN v.350; DN-a i.180; s. magga a crowded path Ja i.104 nijana˚ vana Vism 342; s. vyūha SN v.369atisambādha too confined Dhp-a i.310 (cakkavāḷa) ■ compar. sambādhatara SN v.350; asambādhaṃ comfortably Ja i.80. 2. pudendum masculinum Vin i.216; Vin ii.134; pudendum muliebre Vin iv.259; Snp 609; sambādhaṭṭhāna (nt. pudendum muliebre Ja i.61; Ja iv.260.

cp. Sk. sambādha

Sambādheti

to be crowded DN ii.269 (read ˚bādhāyanti).

saṃ + bādheti

Sambāhati

1. to rub shampoo Ja i.293; Ja ii.16; Ja iv.431; Ja v.126; also sambāheti Mil 241; Caus. sambāhāpeti to cause to shampoo Vin iv.342; ppr. sambāhanta Ja vi.77; aor. sambāhi Ja i.293 Cp. pari˚.

saṃ + bāhati; Kern, Toev. s. v. disputes relation to vah, but connects it with bāh “press”

Sambāhana

(nt.) rubbing, shampooing DN i.7 (as a kind of exercise for wrestlers DN-a i.88); AN i.62; AN iv.54; Mil 241; Ja i.286.

fr. last

Sambuka

a shell DN i.84 = AN i.9; AN iii.395 (sippi˚); Ja ii.100.

cp. Sk. śambuka

Sambujjhati

to understand, achieve, know Dhs-a 218; inf. sambuddhuṃ Snp 765 (v.l. sambuddhaṃ); Caus. sambodheti to teach, instruct Ja i.142 Cp. sammā˚.

saṃ + bujjhati

Sambuddha

1. well understood Snp 765 (various reading, sambuddhuṃ = to know); Ja v.77 (sam & a˚, taken by C. as ppr. “jānanto” & “ajānanto”) susambuddha easily understood Snp 764.

2. one who has thoroughly understood, being enlightened, a Buddha Snp 178 etc., 559; AN ii.4; Dhp 181; SN i.4; Iti 35 etc.

saṃ + buddha

Sambuddhi

(f.) complete understanding; adj. ˚vant wise Ja iii.361 (= buddhisampanna).

saṃ + buddhi

Sambojjhaṅga

constituent of Sambodhi (enlightenment), of which there are seven: sati, selfpossession; dhammavicaya, investigation of doctrine viriya, energy; pīti, joy; passaddhi, tranquillity samādhi, concentration; upekhā, equanimity DN ii.79 DN ii.303 sq.; DN iii.106, DN iii.226; MN i.61 sq.; AN iv.23; SN v.110 sq. Nd ii.s. v. Mil 340; Vb-a 135, Vb-a 310. The characteristics of the several constitutents together with var. means of cultivation are given at Vism 132 sq. = Vb-a 275 sq.

saṃ + bojjhanga

Sambodha

enlightenment, highest wisdom, awakening; the insight belonging to the three higher stages of the Path, Vin i.10; DN iii.130 sq., 136 sq. SN ii.223; SN v.214; MN i.16, MN i.241; AN i.258; AN ii.200, AN ii.240 sq. 325 sq.; v.238 sq.; Iti 27; pubbe sambodhā, before attaining insight MN i.17, MN i.163; MN ii.211; MN iii.157; SN ii.5 SN ii.10; SN iv.6, SN iv.8, SN iv.97, SN iv.233; SN v.281; AN i.258; AN iii.82, AN iii.240. abhabba sambodhāya, incapable of insight MN i.200, MN i.241 = AN ii.200. (Cp. Dial. i.190–⁠192.)

-gāmin leading to enlightenment DN iii.264; Snp p.140 -pakkhika belonging to enlightenment AN iv.357. -sukha the bliss of enlightenment AN iv.341 sq.

saṃ + bodha

Sambodhana

(nt.) the vocative case Vv-a 12, Vv-a 18.

saṃ + bodhana

Sambodhi

(f.) the same as sambodha, the highest enlightenment DN i.156; DN ii.155; Dhp 89 = SN v.29; Snp 478; SN i.68, SN i.181; AN ii.14; Iti 28, Iti 42, Iti 117; Snp-a 73 See also sammā˚.

-agga [˚yagga] the summit of enlightenment Snp 693 -gāmin leading to enlightenment SN v.234; -patta having attained enlightenment, an Arahant Snp 503, Snp 696 -parāyana that which has enlightenment as its aim proceeding towards enlightenment, frequently of the Sotāpanna DN i.156 (discussed in Dialogues i.190 sq.) iii.131 sq.; AN i.232; AN ii.80, AN ii.238; AN iii.211; AN iv.12, AN iv.405; SN v.343, SN v.346; DN-a i.313. -sukha the bliss of enlightenment Kv 209.

saṃ + bodhi1

Sambodhiyaṅga

the same as sambojjhanga AN v.253 sq.; SN v.24; cp. spelling sambodhi-anga at Dhp 89; Dhp-a ii.162.

Sambodheti

see sambujjhati.

Sambhagga

broken SN i.123; MN i.237. Cp. sampali˚.

saṃ + bhagga

Sambhajati

to consort with, love, to be attached, devoted Ja iii.495; ppr. sambhajanto Ja iii.108 Pot. sambhajeyya ibid. (C. samāgaccheyya) ■ pp sambhatta.

saṃ + bhajati

Sambhajanā

(f.) consorting with Dhs 1326; Pp 20.

saṃ + bhajanā

Sambhañjati

to split, break Ja v.32; Caus. sambhañjeti to break MN i.237; SN i.123; pass. aor. samabhajjisaṃ Ja v.70 ■ pp. sambhagga ■ Cp. sampali˚.

saṃ + bhañjati

Sambhata

brought together, stored up; (nt.) store, provisions MN i.116; DN iii.190; AN iii.38 = AN iv.266; SN i.35; SN ii.185 = Iti 17; Ja i.338; Thag-a 11.

saṃ + bhata

Sambhati

to subside, to be calmed; only in prep combn paṭippassambhati (q.v.).

śrambh, given as sambh at Dhtp 214 in meaning “vissāsa”

Sambhatta

devoted, a friend Ja i.106, Ja i.221; Nd i.226 = Vism 25 ■ yathāsambhattaṃ according to where each one’s companions live DN ii.98; SN v.152.

pp. of sambhajati

Sambhatti

(f.) joining, consorting with Dhs 1326; Pp 20.

saṃ + bhatti

Sambhama

confusion, excitement; ˚-patta overwhelmed with excitement Ja iv.433.

saṃ + bhama, fr. bhram

Sambhamati

to revolve Dhs-a 307.

saṃ + bhamati

Sambhava

1. origin, birth, production DN ii.107; SN iii.86; AN ii.10, AN ii.18; Snp 724, Snp 741 etc.; Dhp 161; Ja i.168; mātāpettikas˚ born from father and mother DN i.34; Dhs-a 306; natthi sambhavaṃ has not arisen Snp 235.

2. semen virile Ja v.152; Ja vi.160; Mil 124.

-esin seeking birth MN i.48; SN ii.11; Snp 147. Sambhavati, sambhunati & sambhoti;

saṃ + bhava

Sambhavati, sambhuṇāti & sambhoti

1. to be produced, to arise DN i.45, DN i.76; SN i.135; SN iv.67; Snp 734 Dāvs v.6; Mil 210.

2. to be adequate, competent DN ii.287; na s. is of no use or avail Mil 152.

3. to be present, to witness Ja i.56.

4. to be together with Ja ii.205 (C. on sambhaj-˚) ■ Pres. ˚-bhuṇati or ˚-bhuṇāti (like abhi-sam-bhuṇā̆ti) in the sense of “to reach” or “to be able to,” capable of Vin i.256 (˚-bhuṇāti); Snp 396 (part. a-sambhuṇanto = asakkonto, C.); also sambhoti Snp 734, DN ii.287; fut. sambhossāma Mvu 5, Mvu 100 ■ aor sambhavi DN i.96; DN i.3rd pl. samabhavuṃ Dāvs v.6; ger sambhuyya having come together with Vv-a 232 ■ pp sambhūta ■ Caus. sambhāveti (q.v.).

saṃ + bhavati

Sambhavana

(nt.) coming into existence Ne 28.

fr. sambhavati

Sambhāra

“what is carried together,” viz. 1. accumulation, product, preparation; sambhāraseda bringing on sweating by artificial means Vin i.205.

2 materials, requisite ingredients (of food) Mil 258; Ja i.481; Ja v.13, Ja v.506; Ja i.9; Ja ii.18; Ja iv.492; dabba˚ an effective requisite Dhp-a i.321; Dhp-a ii.114; bodhis˚ the necessary conditions for obtaining enlightening Ja i.1; vimokkhas˚ Thag-a 214.

3. constituent part, element SN iv.197; Dhs-a 306.

4. bringing together, collocation SN i.135; Mil 28.

fr. saṃ + bhṛ;

Sambhāvana

(nt.) supposition, assumption, the meaning of the particle sace Vin i.37219; cp Ja ii.29; Dhp-a ii.77.

fr. sambhāveti

Sambhāvanā

(f.) honour, reverence, intention, confidence Mvu 29, Mvu 55; Dhs-a 163 (= okappanā); Sdhp 224.

fr. sambhāveti

Sambhāvita

honoured, esteemed MN i.110, MN i.145; Thag-a 200; Ja iii.269 (= bhaddaka); Vb-a 109.

pp. of sambhāveti

Sambhāveti

1. to undertake, achieve, to be intent on (acc.) Vin i.253; Dhs-a 163.

2. to reach, catch up to (acc.) Vin i.277 Vin ii.300.

3. to produce, effect Mil 49.

4. to consider Ja iii.220.

5. to honour, esteem; grd. ˚bhāvanīya to be honoured or respected, honourable Vv-a 152 MA 156 ■ pp. sambhāvita.

Caus. of sambhavati. The Dhtp (512) gives a special root sambhu in meaning “pāpuṇana”

Sambhāsā

(f.) conversation, talk; sukha-˚; Ja vi.296 (v.l.); mudu-˚; Ja ii.326 = Ja iv.471 = Ja v.451.

saṃ + bhāsā

Sambhindati

to mix Vin i.111 (sīmāya sīmaṃ s. to mix a new boundary with an old one, i.e. to run on a boundary unduly); DN-a i.134 (udakena). pp. sambhinna ■ Cp. sambhejja.

saṃ + bhindati

Sambhinna

1. mixed, mixed up Vin i.210; Vin ii.67, Vin ii.68 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.431); Ja i.55; Snp 9 Snp 319 (˚mariyāda-bhāva confusing the dividing lines indistinctness), 325 (id.). Said of a woman (i.e. of indistinct sexuality) Vin ii.271 = Vin iii.129.

2. broken up (?), exhausted Ja i.503 (˚sarīra) ■ asambhinna: 1. unmixed unadulterated Vism 41 (˚khīra-pāyāsa); Ja v.257 (˚khattiyavaṃsa); Dhp-a ii.85 (id.).

2. (of the voice unmixed, i.e. distinct, clear Mil 360.

3. name of a kind of ointment Vin iv.117.

pp. of sambhindati

Sambhīta

(adj.) terrified Mil 339; a-sambhīta, fearless Mil 105; Ja iv.92; Ja v.34; Ja vi.302.

saṃ + bhīta

Sambhuñjati

1. to eat together with Vin iv.137.

2. to associate with SN i.162.

saṃ + bhuñjati

Sambhuṇāti

see sambhavati.

Sambhūta

arisen from, produced Snp 272 (atta˚ self-; cp. Snp-a 304; attabhāva-pariyāye attani s.); SN i.134.

pp. of sambhavati

Sambhejja

belonging to the confluence of rivers (said of the water of the ocean), united SN ii.135; SN v.461 (various reading sambhojja).

grd. of sambhindati

Sambheda

mixing up, confusion, contamination DN iii.72; AN i.51 = Iti 36; DN-a i.260 (jāti˚ mixing of caste); Vism 123 (of colours).

saṃ + bheda

Sambhoga

eating, living together with Vin i.97; Vin ii.21; Vin iv.137; AN i.92; Snp-a 71; Ja iv.127; Sdhp 435.

saṃ + bhoga

Sambhoti

see sambhavati.

Samma1

a term of familiar address DN i.49, DN i.225; DN-a i.151; Vin ii.161; Ja i.59; Pv-a 204; plur. sammā Vin ii.161.

as to etym. Andersen, P. Reader ii.263 quite plausibly connects it with Vedic śam (indecl.) “hail, which is often used in a vocative sense, esp. in combn śam ca yos ca “hail & blessing!”, but also suggests relation to sammā. Other suggestions see Andersen s. v.

Samma2

see sammā.

samyak

Samma3

a cymbal Mil 60; Dhs 621; Ja i.3; Dhs-a 319. - Otherwise as ˚tāḷa a kind of cymbal Thag 893, Thag 911; Vv 353; Vv-a 161; Ja vi.60; Ja vi.277 (-l-).

Sammakkhana

(nt.) smearing Vism 346.

saṃ + makkhana

Sammakkhita

smeared Ja v.16; abstr. ˚tta (nt.) Vism 346.

saṃ + makkhita

Sammakkheti

to smear Vism 346.

saṃ + makkheti

Sammaggata

see under sammā˚.

Sammajjati

1. to sweep Vin i.46; Vin ii.209; Ja ii.25; Dhp-a i.58; Dhp-a ii.184; Dhp-a iii.168.

2. to rub, polish Ja i.338 ■ pp. sammaṭṭha ■ Caus. II. sammajjāpeti Vin i.240.

saṃ + majjati2

Sammajjana

(adj.-n..) sweeping Ja i.67; Snp-a 66 (˚ka); Vv-a 319 (T. sammajja).

fr. last

Sammajjanī

(f.) a broom Vin ii.129; AN iv.170; Vism 105; Dhp-a iii.7; cp. sammujjanī.

fr. last

Sammaññati

see sammannati.

Sammaṭṭha

swept, cleaned, polished, smooth Vin iii.119 (su˚); Ja i.10; Ja iii.395 (smooth) Spelt ˚maṭṭa at Mil 15.

pp. of sammajjati

Sammata

1. considered as MN i.39; SN ii.15; SN iv.127; DN iii.89 (dhamma˚); Vin iv.161, Vin iv.295–⁠2. honoured, revered MN ii.213; Ja i.49; Ja v.79; sādhusammata considered, revered, as good DN i.47; SN iv.398

3. authorized, selected, agreed upon DN iii.93 (mahājana˚) Vin i.111; Vin iii.150.

pp. of sammannati

Sammati1 [śam

Dhtp 436 = upasama] 1. to be appeased, calmed; to cease Dhp 5; Pot 3rd pl. sammeyyuṃ SN i.24–⁠2. to rest, to dwell DN i.92; SN i.226; Ja v.396; DN-a i.262 (= vasati); pp. santa ■ Caus. sāmeti to appease suppress, stop, AN ii.24; Iti 82, Iti 83, Iti 117, Iti 183; Dhp 265.

Sammati3 [śam

to labour; pres. śamyati; pp. Vedic śamita] to work; to be satisfactory Vin ii.119 (parissāvanaṃ na s.), 278 (navakammaṃ etc. na s.).

Sammati2 [śram

Vedic śrāmyati Dhtp 220 = parissama, 436 = kheda] to be weary or fatigued.

Sammatta1

intoxicated, maddened, delighted DN ii.266; Dhp 287; Ja iii.188; doting on Ja v.443; rogasammatta tormented by illness Ja v.90 (= ˚pīḷita C.; v.l. ˚patta, as under matta2).

saṃ + matta2

Sammatta2

(nt.) correctness, righteousness AN i.121; AN iii.441; Pp 13; Dhs 1029; Ne 44; Ne 96, Ne 112; Kv 609; Dhs-a 45; KvA 141; ˚kārin, attained to proficiency in Mil 191; sammatta-kāritā ibid.-The 8 sammattā are the 8 angas of the ariya-magga (see magga 2 a) DN iii.255; the 10 are the above with the addition of sammā-ñāṇa and ˚vimutti AN v.240.

abstr. fr. sammā

Sammad˚

see sammā.

Sammada

drowsiness after a meal DN ii.195; AN i.3; AN v.83; Ja ii.63; bhatta-˚ SN i.7; Ja vi.57.

saṃ + mada

Sammaddati

to trample down Vin i.137; Vin i.286 (cīvaraṃ, to soak, steep); ppr. sammaddanto Vin i.137 (to crush).

saṃ + maddati

Sammanteti

to consult together DN i.142; Ja i.269, Ja i.399; DN-a i.135.

saṃ + manteti

Sammannati

1. to assent, to consent to Mvu 3, Mvu 10; DN-a i.11.

2. to agree to, to authorize select Vin iii.150, Vin iii.158, Vin iii.238; Vin iv.50; Mvu 3, Mvu 9; sīmaṃ s to determine, to fix the boundary Vin i.106 sq.

3. to esteem, honour; inf. sammannituṃ Vin iv.50. sammannesi DN i.105 is misprint for samannesi ■ ppr. sammata.

saṃ + man, fr. Vedic manute, manvate, for the usual manyate: see maññati

Sammasati

to touch, seize, grasp, know thoroughly, master SN ii.107; Dhp 374; Mil 325; to think, meditate on (acc.) Ja vi.379; ppr. sammasaṃ ii.107 & sammasanto Mil 379; Ja i.74, Ja i.75; fem. sammasantī Thag-a 62; sammasamāna Mil 219, Mil 325, Mil 398; pp sammasita.

saṃ + masati

Sammasana

grasping, mastering Mil 178; Vism 287, Vism 629 sq.; cp. Cpd. 65, 210.

(nt.) fr. last

Sammasita

grasped, understood, mastered Ja i.78.

pp. of sammasati

Sammasitar

one who grasps, sees clearly Snp 69.

Sammā1

a pin of the yoke Abhp 449; a kind of sacrificial instrument Snp-a 321 (sammaṃ ettha pāsantī ti sammāpāso; and sātrā-yāgass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ). Cp. Weber Indische Streifen i.36, and sammāpāsa below.

cp. Sk. śamyā

Sammā2

(indecl.) thoroughly properly, rightly; in the right way, as it ought to be best, perfectly (opp. micchā) DN i.12; Vin i.12; Snp 359 Snp 947; Dhp 89, Dhp 373. Usually as ˚-, like sammā-dhārā even or proper showers (i.e. at the right time) Pv ii.970 especially in connection with constituents of the eightfold Aryan Path, where it is contrasted with micchā see magga 2 a. (e.g. Vb-a 114 sq., 121, 320 sq.). The form sammā is reduced to samma˚; before short vowels (with the insertion of a sandhi -d-, cp. puna-deva), like samma-d-eva properly, in harmony or completeness DN i.110; Vin i.9: Pv-a 139, Pv-a 157; samma-daññā & ˚akkhāta; (see below); and before double consonants arisen from assimilation, like sammag-gata (= samyak + gata). The cpds. we shall divide into two groups, viz. (A) cpds. with samma˚; (B) with sammā˚.

A. -akkhāta well preached Dhp 86. -aññā perfect knowledge Vin i.183; SN i.4; SN iv.128; Dhp 57 (˚vimutta cp. Dhp-a i.434); Iti 38, Iti 79, Iti 93, Iti 95, Iti 108. -attha a proper or good thing or cause Ja vi.16. -ddasa having right views AN ii.18; SN iv.205, SN iv.207; Snp 733; Iti 47, Iti 61, Iti 81 Kv 339. -ggata [cp. BSk. samyaggata Divy 399] who has wandered rightly, perfect MN i.66; who has attained the highest point, an Arahant DN i.55; SN i.76; AN i.269; AN iv.226; AN v.265; Ja iii.305; Iti 87; Ap 218 Also sammāgata Vin ii.20317. -ppajāna having right knowledge Dhp 20; Iti 115. -ppaññā right knowledge true wisdom Vin i.14; Dhp 57, Dhp 190; Snp 143; Iti 17; Mil 39. -ppadhāna [cp. BSk. samyakprahāna Divy 208 right exertion Vin i.22; Dhs 358; Dpvs 18, 5; they are four DN ii.120; MN iii.296; explained MN ii.11 (anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāya; uppannānaṃ pahānāya; anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya; uppannānaṃ ṭhitiyā). B. -ājīva right living, right means of livelihood, right occupation Vin i.10; SN v.421, etc.; formula DN ii.312 (adj.) living in the right way MN i.42; AN ii.89. -kammanta right conduct, right behaviour Vin i.10; SN v.421 etc.; definition DN ii.312; Dhs 300; adj. behaving in the right way MN i.42; AN ii.89. -ñāṇa right knowledge enlightenment, results from right concentration DN ii.217; AN i.292; adj. MN i.42. -ñāṇin possessing the right insight AN ii.89, AN ii.222. -dassana right views Vism 605 -diṭṭhi right views, right belief, the first stage of the noble eightfold path, consists in the knowledge of the four truths DN ii.311; its essence is knowledge Dhs 20, Dhs 297, Dhs 317; cp. Vism 509; comprises the knowledge of the absence of all permanent Being and the reality of universal conditioned Becoming SN ii.17 SN iii.135; and of the impermanence of the 5 Khandhas SN iii.51 = SN iv.142; and of Sīla, of causation and of the destruction of the Āsavas MN i.46

55; how obtained MN i.294; two degrees of MN iii.72; supremely important AN i.30

2 292 sq.; (adj.) Mil i.47. -diṭṭhika having the right belief DN i.139; AN ii.89; AN ii.220 sq.; AN iii.115, AN iii.138 AN iv.290; AN v.124 sq.; SN iv.322. -dvayatānupassin duly considering both-i.e. misery with its origin, the destruction of misery with the path, respectively Snp p.140. -dhārā a heavy shower SN v.379. -paṭipatti right mental disposition AN i.69; Ne 27; Mil 97 sammāpaṭipadā Pp 49 sq.; Dhp-a iv.127; sammāpaṭipanna rightly disposed, having the right view DN i.8, DN i.55; Pp 49 sq. -passaṃ viewing the matter in the right way SN iii.51; SN iv.142. -pāsa [Sk. śamyāprāsa but BSk. śamyaprāśa Divy 634] a kind of sacrifice Snp 303; AN ii.42; AN iv.151; SN i.76; Iti 21; Ja iv.302; Snp-a 321 Cp. sammā1. -manasikāra right, careful, thought DN i.13; DN-a i.104. -vattanā strict, proper, conduct Vin i.46, Vin i.50; Vin ii.5. -vācā right speech Vin i.10; DN-a i.314; definition DN ii.312; Dhs 299; (adj.) speaking properly MN i.42; AN ii.89. -vāyāma right effort Vin i.10; Dhs 13, Dhs 22, Dhs 302; definition DN ii.312; adj. MN i.42; AN ii.89 -vimutta right emancipation AN i.292; ˚vimutti the same DN ii.217; AN ii.196, AN ii.222; (adj.) MN i.42; AN ii.89 -saṅkappa right resolve, right intention Dhp 12; Vin i.10; Dhs 21, Dhs 298; definition DN ii.312; (adj.) MN i.42; AN ii.89 -sati right memory, right mindfulness, self-possession Vin i.10; Dhs 23, Dhs 303; definition DN ii.313; (adj.) MN i.42; AN ii.89. -samādhi right concentration, the last stage of the noble eightfold path Vin i.10; Dhs 24, Dhs 304 definition DN ii.313; adj. MN i.12; AN ii.89. -sampassaṃ having the right view SN iv.142. -sambuddha perfectly enlightened, a universal Buddha Vin i.5; DN i.49; Dhp 187; Ja i.44; Dhp-a i.445; Dhp-a iii.241; Vb-a 436, etc. -sambodhi perfect enlightenment, supreme Buddhaship Vin i.11; DN ii.83; SN i.68, etc.

Vedic samyac (= samyak) & samīś “connected, in one”; see under saṃ˚

Sammāna

(nt.) [fr. saṃ + man ] honour Ja i.182; Ja vi.390; Sdhp 355.

Sammānanā

(f.) honouring, veneration DN iii.190; Mil 162, Mil 375, Mil 386.

saṃ + mānanā

Sammiñjati

(& ˚eti) to bend back, to double up (opp pasārati or sampasāreti) Vin i.5; MN i.57, MN i.168; DN i.70; Ja i.321; Vism 365 (v.l. samiñjeti); DN-a i.196 ■ pp sammiñjita.

saṃ + iñjati, see also samiñjati; cp. BSk. sammiñjayati Divy 473. See also Leumann Album Kern, p. 393

Sammiñjana

(nt.) bending DN-a i.196 (opp. pasāraṇa); Vb-a 358.

fr. sammiñjati

Sammiñjita

bent back MN i.326 (spelt samiñjita); AN ii.104, AN ii.106 sq., 210.

pp. of sammiñjati

Sammita

measured, i.e. just so much, no more or less; ˚-bhānin Thag 209.

saṃ + mita

Sammilāta

withered, shrunk MN i.80.

saṃ + milāta

Sammillabhāsinī

(f.) speaking with smiles Ja iv.24; name of a girl in Benares Ja iii.93 sq.

saṃ + milla = mihita, + bhāsin

Sammissatā

(f.) the state of being mixed, confusion Dhs-a 311.

fr. saṃ + missa

Sammukha

(adj.) face to face with, in presence; sammukhaciṇṇa a deed done in a person’s presence Ja iii.27; sammukhā (abl.) 1. face to face before, from before DN ii.155; Snp p.79; Ja i.115; Ja iii.89 (opp. parokkhā); with acc. Bv ii.73 = Ja i.17; with gen DN i.222; DN ii.220; MN i.146.

2. in a full assembly of qualified persons Vin ii.3; loc. sammukhe DN ii.206; Ja v.461. In composition sammukha˚, sammukhā˚ sammukhī˚; (before bhū): ˚bhāva (˚a˚) presence, confrontation Mil 126; (˚ī˚) being face to face with coming into one’s presence DN i.103; MN i.438; AN i.150 ˚bhūta (˚ī˚) being face to face with, confronted DN ii.155; SN iv.94; Vin ii.73; AN iii.404 sq.; AN v.226; one who has realized the saṃyojanas Kv 483; ˚vinaya (˚ā˚) proceeding in presence, requiring the presence of a chapter of priests and of the party accused Vin ii.74, Vin ii.93 sq.; Vin iv.207; AN i.99; Dhs-a 144. See also yebhuyyasikā.

saṃ + mukha

Sammukhatā

(f.) presence, confrontation Vin ii.93 (sangha˚).

abstr. fr. sammukha

Sammucchita

see samucchita.

Sammujjanī

(f.) a broom Ja i.161; sammuñjanī the same Mil 2.

= sammajjanī

Sammuṭṭha

confused MN i.21; SN iv.125; SN v.331; one who has forgotten Vin iv.45 (= na ssarati) iii.16513; ˚ssati id. AN i.280.

saṃ + muṭṭha

Sammuti

(f.) 1. consent, permission Vin iii.199.

2. choice, selection, delegation Vin iii.159. 3. fixing, determination (of boundary) Vin i.106. 4. common consent, general opinion, convention, that which is generally accepted; as ˚-conventional, e.g. ˚sacca conventional truth (as opposed to paramattha˚ the absolute truth) Mil 160; ˚ñāṇa common knowledge DN iii.226; ˚deva what is called a deva Ja i.132; DN-a i.174 see under deva; ˚maraṇa what is commonly called “death” Vism 229sammuccā (instr.) by convention or common consent Snp 648 (v.l. sammacca = ger. of sammannati).

5. opinion, doctrine Snp 897 (= dvāsaṭṭhī diṭṭhigatāni Nd i.308), 904, 911.

6. definition declaration, statement Vin i.123 (ummattaka˚); AN iv.347 (vādaka˚); Vb-a 164 (bhuñjaka˚).

7. a popular expression, a mere name or word Mil 28. 8. tradition, lore; combd with suti at Mil 3.

fr. saṃ + man

Sammudita

delighted, delighting in Vin i.4; MN i.503; SN iv.390.

pp. of sammodati

Sammuyhati

to be bewildered, infatuated, muddle-headed Ja iv.385; Mil 42 ■ pp. sammūḷha DN ii.85; MN i.250; AN i.165; Snp 583; Caus. sammoheti to befool Mil 224.

saṃ + muyhati

Sammuyhana

(nt.) bewilderment DN-a i.193

saṃ + muyhana

Sammusā

M ii.202, read sammuccā (from sammuti).

Sammussanatā

(f.) forgetfulness Dhs 14 Dhs 1349; Pp 21.

fr. saṃ + mussati

Sammūḷha

infatuated, bewildered DN ii.85; MN i.250; AN i.165; Snp 583; Ja v.294; Tikp 366.

saṃ + mūḷha

Sammegha

rainy or cloudy weather Ja vi.51, Ja vi.52.

saṃ + megha

Sammoda

odour, fragrance; ekagandha˚, filled with fragrance Ja vi.9.

fr. saṃ + mud

Sammodaka

(adj.) polite DN i.116; DN-a i.287; a-sammodaka (f. ˚-ikā) Vin i.34116.

fr. sammodati

Sammodati

1. to rejoice, delight; pp. sammudita (q.v.).

2. to agree with, to exchange friendly greeting with; aor. sammodi Vin i.2; DN i.52; Snp 419; Ja vi.224; ppr. sammodamāna in agreement, on friendly terms Ja i.209; Ja ii.6; ger. sammoditvā Ja ii.107; grd sammodanīya [cp. BSk. sammodanī saṃrañjanī kathā Divy 70, Divy 156 & passim] pleasant, friendly A; v.193; cp Snp 419; Vin i.2; DN i.52sammodita at Vv-a 186 read samodita.

saṃ + modati

Sammodana

(nt.) satisfaction, compliment; ˚ṃ karoti to exchange politeness, to welcome Vv-a 141, Vv-a 259.

saṃ + modana

Sammosa

bewilderment, confusion DN i.19; AN i.58; AN ii.147; SN ii.224; SN iv.190; Vin ii.114; Mil 266, Mil 289; Vism 63 (sati˚ lapse of memory).

for *sam-mṛṣa, of mṛṣ: see mussati. sammosa after moha & musā → mosa

Sammoha

bewilderment, infatuation, delusion MN i.86, MN i.136; Vin i.183; Nd i.193; AN ii.174; AN iii.54 sq., 416; SN i.24; SN iv.206; Dhs 390.

saṃ + moha

Sammoheti

see sammuyhati.

Saya = saka

(?) one’s own Ja vi.414 (= saka-raṭṭha C.).

Sayaṃ

(adv.) self, by oneself Vin i.8; DN i.12; DN-a i.175; Snp 57, Snp 320, etc.; p. 57, 100, etc. Mvu 7, Mvu 63 (for f.). Also with ref. to several people e.g. Dhp-a i.13.

-kata made by itself, spontaneous DN iii.137 (loka) SN ii.19 sq. (dukkha); Ud 69 sq. -jāta born from oneself sprung up spontaneously Ja i.325; Ja ii.129. -pabha radiating light from oneself, a kind of devas DN i.17 DN iii.28 sq., 84 sq.; Snp 404; DN-a i.110 -bhū self-dependent, an epithet of a Buddha Bv xiv.1 = Ja i.39; Mil 214, Mil 227, Mil 236; Vism 234; Snp-a 106 (f. abstr sayambhutā), 135. -vara self-choice Ja v.426. -vasin self-controlled, independent Bv ii.20 = Ja i.5; Dāvs i.22.

see etym. under sa4

Sayatatta

at SN i.14 read saṃyatatta.

Sayati1 [śī]

to lie down: see seti. Caus. II. sayāpeti ibid.

Sayati2 [śri

which is given in meaning sevā at Dhtp 289] to lean on; to be supported etc.: only in pp. sita, and in prep. cpd. nissayati.

Sayathā

(adv.) [cp. Sk. sayathā or tadyathā; see sa2. The usual P. form is seyyathā] like, as Thag 412.

Sayana

(nt.) 1. lying down, sleeping Vism 26; Pv-a 80 (mañca˚).

2. bed, couch Vin i.57, Vin i.72; Vin ii.123; DN i.5, DN i.7; AN i.132; Ja ii.88; Ja v.110 (˚ṃ attharāpeti to spread out a bed); Mil 243, Mil 348; Nd i.372 (˚sannidhi); Pv i.117 (kis˚ = kiṃ˚); Pv-a 78 ■ sayanakalaha a quarrel in the bedroom, a curtain-lecture Ja iii.20; sayanāsana bed seat Iti 112; Dhp 185, etc.: see senāsana.

fr. śī

Sayanighara

(nt.) a sleeping-room Vin i.140 sq.; Vin iv.160; Ja i.433; Ja iii.275, Ja iii.276.

Sayāna

is ppr. of sayati lying down (e.g. AN ii.13 sq.): see seti.

Sayāpita

made to lie down Vb-a 11.

pp. of sayāpeti

Sayita

lying down Ja i.338; Ja v.438. sukha˚; lying in a good position, sleeping well, well-embedded (of seeds) AN iii.404 = DN ii.354; Mil 255. sukha-sayitabhāva “having had a good sleep,” being well Ja v.127.

pp. of seti

Sayha

see sahati.

Sara1

1. the reed Saccharum sara Mil 342.

2. an arrow (orig. made of that reed) DN i.9; Dhp 304; Mil 396; Dhp-a 216 (visa-pīta).

-tuṇḍa a beak as sharp as an arrow Dhp-a iii.32 -daṇḍaka shaft of an arrow Dhp-a ii.141. -bhaṅga arrow-breaking Vism 411 (in comp.).

cp. Vedic śara

Sara2

(adj.-n.) [fr. sarati1 1. going, moving, following Snp 3, Snp 901–⁠2. fluid, flow Ja i.359 (pūti˚).

Sara2

(m ■ nt.) a lake Ja i.221; Ja ii.10; Ja vi.518 (Mucalinda); there are seven great lakes (mahā-sarā viz. Anotatta, Sīhapapāta, Rathakāra, Kaṇṇamuṇḍa Kuṇāla, Chaddanta, Mandākini) AN iv.101; DN i.54; Ja ii.92; DN-a i.164, DN-a i.283; aṇṇava˚; the ocean DN ii.89 cp. AN ii.55; loc. sare Ja ii.80; sarasmiṃ Snp 1092; sarasi Mvu 10, Mvu 7; jātassara a natural lake Ja i.472 sq.

Vedic saras

Sara4

(adj.) remembering MN i.453; AN ii.21; DN-a i.106. ˚saṅkappa mindfulness and aspiration MN i.453; MN iii.132; SN iv.76, SN iv.137, SN iv.190; Ne 16.

fr. sarati2

Sara5

sound, voice, intonation, accent Vin ii.108; DN ii.24 sq. AN i.227; Pv ii.124 (of birds’ singing = abhiruda C.) Ja ii.109; Snp 610 (+ vaṇṇa, which is doubtful here whether “complexion” or “speech,” preferably the former); Dhs-a 17; eight qualities DN ii.211, DN ii.227; gītāssara song Vin ii.108; bindussara a sweet voice Snp 350 adj. Ja ii.439; sīhassara with a voice like a lion’s Ja v.296 Ja v.311 (said of a prince). Cp. vissara ■ In combn with vaṇṇa (vowel) at AN iv.307; Mil 340.

-kutti [ = kḷpti; can we compare BSk. svaragupti “depth of voice” Divy 222?] intonation, resonance timbre, melodiousness of voice Vin ii.108 = AN iii.251; Ja vi.293 (Kern, “enamoured behaviour” [?]); Dhs-a 16. Cp. Vin. Texts iii.72. -bhañña intoning, a particular mode of reciting Vin i.196; Vin ii.108, Vin ii.316; Ja ii.109; Dhp-a i.154. -bhāṇa = ˚bhañña Dhp-a ii.95 (v.l. ˚bhañña). -bhāṇaka an intoner, one who intones or recites the sacred texts in the Sarabhañña manner Vin ii.300. -sara an imitative word; sarasaraṃ karoti to make the noise sarasara MN i.128.

Vedic svara, svar, cp. Lat. su-surrus, Ger. surren

Saraṃsā

(f.) the sun (lit. having rays) Mvu 18, Mvu 68.

fr. sa3 + raṃsi

Saraka

a vessel, a drinking vessel Ja i.157, Ja i.266; Ja iv.384; DN-a i.134, DN-a i.136; Mvu 32, Mvu 32; Dhp-a ii.85; Dhp-a iii.7.

Saraja

(adj.) dusty Vin i.48; AN ii.54.

sa + rajo

Saraṇa1

(nt.) shelter, house Snp 591; refuge, protection DN iii.187; Snp 503; Ja ii.28; DN-a i.229; especially the three refuges-the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Brotherhood-A i.56; DN i.145; Ja i.28; usually combined with verbs like upeti Vv 532; Snp 31; gacchati DN i.116; AN iii.242; Vin i.4; Dhp 190; Snp p.15, Snp p.25; Iti 63; or yāti Snp 179; Dhp 188; asaraṇa, asaraṇībhūta without help and refuge Mil 148. See leṇa 2.

-āgamana = ˚gamana DN i.146; Snp-a 42, Snp-a 157. -gamana (nt.) taking refuge in the three Saraṇas Vin iii.24; SN iv.270.

cp. Vedic śaraṇa protection, shelter, house, śarman id.; śālā hall; to Idj. *kel to hide, as in Lat celo, Gr. καλύπτω to conceal, Oir. celim, Ohg. Ags. helan Goth. huljan to envelop; Ohg. hella = E. hell; also E. hall, and others

Saraṇa2

(adj.) concomitant with war Dhs 1294; Dhs-a 50.

sa + raṇa

Saraṇa3

(nt.) remembrance; -tā (f.) remembering Dhs 14, Dhs 23; Pp 21, Pp 25.

fr. smṛ; i.e. sarati2

Saraṇīya

(nt.) something to be remembered AN i.106.

grd. formation fr. saraṇa2

Sarati1 [sṛ

given by Dhtp 248 as “gati”] to go, flow, run, move along Ja iii.95 (= parihāyati nassati C.); Pot. sare Ja iv.284 ■ aor. asarā Ja vi.199 ■ pp. sarita1 ■ Caus sāreti (1) to make go AN i.141; AN iii.28 = MN i.124 = SN iv.176; Ja iv.99; Mil 378; Vism 207 ■ (2) to rub, to mix Vin ii.116. Also sarāpeti. A Desid. formn is siṃsare (3rd pl. med.) at Vv 647 (= Sk. sisīrṣati), cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 184.

Sarati2 [smṛ

cp. smṛti = sati; Dhtp 248 “cintā”; Lat memor, memoria = memory; Gr. μέριμνα care, μάρτυ witness, martyr; Goth. maúrnan = E. mourn to care etc.] to remember DN ii.234; Vin i.28; Vin ii.79; Ja ii.29. A diaeretic form is sumarati Dhp 324; ger. sumariya Mvu 4, Mvu 65.

1st pl. saremhase Thig 383; med. sare Ja vi.227 imper. sara Thag 445; & sarāhi Mil 79; Mil 3rd sg. saratu Vin i.273 ■ ppr. saraṃ Mvu 3, Mvu 6; & saramāna Vin i.103-aor. sari Ja i.330; fut. sarissati Ja vi.496 ■ ger saritvā Ja i.214 ■ pp. sata2 & sarita;2 ■ Caus. sāreti to remind Vin ii.3 sq., 276; iii.221; sārayamāna, reminding Ja i.50; ppr. pass. sāriyamāna Vin iii.221; w. acc DN ii.234; w. gen. Dhp 324; Ja vi.496; with foll. fut. II (in ˚tā) Vin ii.125, Vin ii.4; Vin iii.44, Vin iii.9, etc ■ Caus. II. sarāpeti Vin iii.44; Mil 37 (with double acc.), 79.

Sarati3 [śṛ

Dhtp 248: hiṃsā] to crush: see seyyati. Caus. sāreti Vin ii.116 (madhu-sitthakena, to pound up, or mix with beeswax). Cp. saritaka.

Sarada

autumn the season following on the rains Snp 687; Vv 352. ˚-samaya the autumn season DN ii.183; MN i.115; AN iv.102 AN v.22; Iti 20; SN i.65; SN iii.141, SN iii.155; SN v.44; Vv-a 134, Vv-a 161.

Vedic śarad (f.) traces of the cons. decl. only in acc. pl. sarado sataṃ “100 autumns” Ja ii.16

Sarabha

(rohiccasarabhā migā = rohitā sarabhamigā, C. ibid. 538) Sarabhamigajātaka the 483rd Jātaka Ja i.193, Ja i.406 (text Sarabhanga); iv.263 sq.

-pallaṅka “antelope-couch,” a high seat, from which the Bodhisat preaches Ja iii.342 (cp. vara-pallanka Ja iii.364). -pādaka having legs like those of a gazelle Ja i.267.

Vedic śarabha a sort of deer Ja iv.267; Ja vi.537

Sarabhasaṃ

(adv.) eagerly, quickly Dāvs iv.22, Dāvs iv.34 sq., 43.

sa2 + rabhasaṃ

Sarabhū

(f.) a lizard Vin ii.110; AN ii.73; Ja ii.135, Ja ii.147; Snp-a 439.

cp. Sk. saraṭa

Sarala

the tree Pinus longifolia Ja v.420 (thus read with B instead of salaḷa ).

?

Saravant

(adj.) 1. having or making a sound, well-sounding Vin i.182; AN iii.375.

2. with a noise Mvu 25, Mvu 38.

sara5 + vant

Sarasa

(adj.) with its essential properties (see rasa) Nd i.43; sarasabhāva a method of exposition Dhs-a 71.

sa3 + rasa

Sarasī

(f.) a large pond Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269; Ja v.46.

Vedic sarasī

Sarāga

(adj.) connected with lust, passionate DN i.79; DN ii.299; MN i.59; Vism 410.

sa3 + rāga

Sarājaka

(adj.) including the king Ja i.126; fem ■ ikā Vin ii.188; SN i.162; Ja ii.113, Ja ii.114 (sarājika at Ja iii.453); with the king’s participation Tikp 26 (sassāmika-sarājaka geha).

sa3 + rāja + ka

Sarājita

denomination of a purgatory and its inhabitants SN iv.309 sq. Various readings Parājita and Sarañjita.

Sarāpana

(nt.) causing somebody to remember Mil 79.

fr. sarāpeti Caus. of sarati2

Sarāva

a cup, saucer AN i.161; Ja i.8; MN iii.235 for patta); Mil 282; DN-a i.298; Pv-a 244, Pv-a 251.

Sk. śarāva

Sarāvaka

= sarāva Vin i.203; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.153, Vin ii.222.

Sari

according to Payogasiddhi = sarisa (sadisa) cp. sarīvaṇṇa Ja ii.439 (= samāna-vaṇṇa, C.).

Sarikkha

(adj.) like, resembling SN i.66; Ja i.443; Ja iii.262.

cp. Sk. sadṛkṣa, fr. sadṛś = P. sadisa

Sarikkhaka

(adj.) in accordance with, like Ja iv.215; Pv-a 206, Pv-a 284. See also kamma˚.

= sarikkha

Sarikkhatā

(f.) resemblance, likeness Ja iii.241 (taṃ˚ being like that); Vv-a 6 (cp. kamma˚).

fr. sarikkha

Sarikkhatta

(nt.) likeness Dhs-a 63; as sarikkhakatta (kamma˚) at Dhs-a 347.

fr. sarikkha

Sarita1

gone, set into motion Dhp 341 (= anusaṭa, payāta Dhp-a iv.49).

pp. of sarati1

Sarita2

remembered Vin ii.85.

pp. of sarati2

Saritaka

(nt.) powdered stone (pāsāna-cuṇṇa) Vin ii.116; saritasipāṭika powder mixed with gum Vin ii.116.

Saritar

one who remembers DN iii.268, DN iii.286; AN ii.35; SN v.197, SN v.225.

n. ag. fr. sarati2

Saritā

(f.) a river Dhs 1059; saritaṃ acc. Snp 3; gen. pl. Ja ii.442; nom. pl. saritā Mil 125.

cp. Vedic sarit, fr. sarati1

Sarisa

(adj.) like, resembling Ja v.159.

= sadisa

Sarisapa

various reading of siriṃsapa MN i.10 etc.

Sarīra

(nt.) 1. the (physical) body DN i.157; MN i.157; SN iv.286; AN i.50; AN ii.41; AN iii.57 sq., 323 sq. iv.190. Snp 478, Snp 584; Dhp 151; Nd i.181; Ja i.394 (six blemishes); ii.31; antimasarīra one who wears his last body, an Anāgāmin Snp 624; SN i.210; Dhp 400.

2. a dead body, a corpse DN ii.141, DN ii.164; MN iii.91.

3. the bones DN ii.164.

4. relics Vv 63, Vv 32; Vv-a 269.

-aṭṭhaka the bony framework of the body Dhs-a 338 -ābhā radiation of light proceeding from the body, lustre Snp-a 16 (˚ṃ muñcati to send forth), 41 (id.), 140 (id.) -kicca (1) funeral ceremonies, obsequies Ja i.180; Ja ii.5; Vv-a 76, Vv-a 257; Pv-a 74, Pv-a 76, Pv-a 162 ■ (2) “bodily function, satisfying the body’s wants Ja ii.77; Ja iv.37. -davya (= dabba1) fitness of body, good body, beauty Ja ii.137 -dhātu a body relic (of the Buddha) Mvu 13, Mvu 167; Vv-a 165, Vv-a 269. -pabhā lustre of the body Dhp-a i.106 -parikamma attending the body Snp-a 52. -maṃsa the flesh of the body Ja iii.53. -vaṇṇa the (outward) appearance of the body Vism 193. -valañja discharge from the body, faeces Dhp-a ii.55; Dhp-a iv.46 (˚ṭhāna). See valañja -saṅghāta perfection of body Vism 194. -saṇṭhāna constitution of the body, bodily form Vism 193.

Vedic śarīra

Sarīravant

(adj.) having a body SN ii.279.

sarīra + vant

Sarīvaṇṇa

resembling Ja ii.439 (v.l. sarīra˚). Cp. sari.

Sarūpa

(adj.) 1. of the same form AN i.162; Pp 56.

2. [sa3 + rūpa] having a body AN i.83.

sa2 + rūpa

Saroja

(nt.) “lake-born,” a lotus Dāvs iii.13.

Sk. saroja, saras + ja

Sarojayoni

a Brahmā, an archangel Dāvs i.34.

fr. last

Saroruha

(nt.) a lotus Dāvs iii.83.

saras + ruha

Salakkhaṇa1

(adj.) together with the characteristics Snp 1018.

sa3 + lakkhaṇa

Salakkhaṇa2

(nt.) own characteristic, that which is consistent with one’s own nature Mil 205 Ne 20. Opp. vilakkhaṇa.

sa1 + lakkhaṇa

Salana

(nt.) moving, shaking Vv-a 169; Dhs-a 62 (in defn of kusala as “kucchitānaṃ salan’ādīhi atthehi kusalaṃ”).

fr. śal

Salabha

a moth Ja v.401; Ud 72 (C.); Vb-a 146.

cp. Sk. śalabha

Salayati

to shake Dhs-a 39.

Caus. of śal to leap

Salaḷa

a kind of sweet-scented tree Ja v.420; Bv ii.51 = Ja i.13; Vv 355; Vv-a 162; Mil 338; MN ii.184.

Salākā

(f.) 1. an arrow, a dart AN iv.107 (T. has it as nt.).

2. a small stick, peg, thin bar SN iv.168; Dāvs iv.51.

3. blade of a grass MN i.79; Ja i.439.

4. ribs of a parasol Vin iv.338; Snp-a 487; Mil 226.

5. a pencil, small stick (used in painting the eyes with collyrium) Vin i.204; Ja iii.419 (añjana˚). 6. a kind of needle Vin ii.116.

7. a kind of surgical instrument, a stick of caustic Mil 112, Mil 149.

8. a gong stick (of bronze, loha˚) Ja ii.342; Vism 283.

9 membrum virile Ja ii.359.

10. a ticket consisting of slips of wood used in voting and distributing food, vote lot Vin ii.99, Vin ii.176, Vin ii.306; Ja i.123; Pv-a 272 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚) salākaṃ gaṇhāti to take tickets (in order to vote or to be counted) Vin i.117; Vin ii.199; paṭhaman salākaṃ gaṇhanto taking the first vote, first rate AN i.24; salākaṃ gāheti to issue tickets, to take a vote Vin ii.205; salākaṃ dadāti to issue tickets Ja i.123; salākaṃ vāreti to throw lots Ja i.239 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚).

-agga room for distributing food by tickets Ja i.123 Mvu 15, Mvu 205. -odhāniya a case for the ointment-stick Vin i.204. -gāha taking of votes, voting Vin ii.85, Vin ii.98 sq. (3 kinds). -gāhāpaka ticket-issuer, taker of voting tickets Vin ii.84. -bhatta food to be distributed by tickets Vin i.58, Vin i.96; Vin ii.175; Ja i.123; Dhp-a i.53 (eight kinds). -vātapāna a window made with slips of wood Vin ii.148. -vutta “subsisting on blades of grass” (or “by means of food tickets”?) Vin iii.6, Vin iii.67; Vin iv.23; AN i.160; SN iv.323. Cp. BSk. śalākāvṛtti Divy 131. -hattha brush-hand, a kind of play, where the hand is dipped in lac or dye and used as a brush (?) DN i.65; DN-a i.85.

cp. Vedic śalākā

Salāṭuka

(adj.) fresh, unripe SN i.150 = Snp p.125; Mil 334; Vv-a 288.

cp. *Sk. śalāṭu

Salābha

one’s own advantage Dhp 365.

sa4 + lābha

Salila

(nt.) water Snp 62, Snp 319, Snp 672; Ja i.8; Ja v.169; Vv-a 41; Pv-a 157; Nd ii.665 (“vuccati udakaṃ”); Mil 132 (written saliḷa); Sdhp 168. It is also adj. salilaṃ āpo flowing water Ja vi.534; cp. Mil 114: na tā nadiyo dhuva-salilā.

-dhārā shower of water Mil 117. -vuṭṭhi id. Vism 234.

cp. Sk. salila, to sarati1

Salla

(nt.) an arrow, dart MN i.429 (˚ṃ āharati to remove the a); ii.216; SN iv.206; Ja i.180 Ja v.49; Snp 331, Snp 767; Mil 112; Vism 503 (visa˚ sting of poison; cp. Vb-a 104 sallaṃ viya vitujjati); often metaphorically of the piercing sting of craving, evil sorrow etc., e.g. antodosa˚; Mil 323; taṇhā˚; SN i.40, SN i.192 bhava˚; Dhp 351; rāga˚; Dhp-a iii.404; Pv-a 230; soka˚ Snp 985; Pv i.86; Kp-a 153. Cp. also DN ii.283; Snp 51 Snp 334, Snp 938; Ja i.155; Ja iii.157; Dhp-a iv.70. At Nd i.59 seven such stings are given with rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚ māna˚, diṭṭhi˚, soka˚, kathankathā˚ ■ abhūḷha˚; one whose sting of craving or attachment is pulled out DN ii.283; Snp 593; Ja iii.390; Pv i.87 etc. (see abbūḷha). Cp. vi˚.

-katta [*kartṛ cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 90, 4] “one who works on the (poisoned) arrow,” i.e. a surgeon MN i.429 MN ii.216; Snp 562; Iti 101; Mil 110, Mil 169; Vism 136 (in simile); Kp-a 21 (id.). The Buddha is the best surgeon Snp 560; Mil 215. -kattiya surgery DN i.12 (T. ˚ka) DN-a i.98. -bandhana at Thig 347 take as salla bandhana “arrow & prison bond” (Thag-a 242 different) -viddha pierced by an arrow Thag 967; Snp 331; cp ruppati. -santhana removal of the sting Dhp 275 (= nimmathana abbāhana Dhp-a iii.404).

Vedic śalya, cp. śalākā

Sallaka

a porcupine Ja v.489.

cp. *Sk. śalala & śallaka

Sallakī

(f.) the tree Boswellia thurifera (incense tree) Ja iv.92; pl. ˚-iyo Ja vi.535; bahukuṭaja-sallakika Thag 115 (= indasālarukkha [?]).

cp. Class. Sk. śallakī

Sallakkhaṇā

(f.) discernment, testing Dhs 16, Dhs 292, Dhs 555; Pp 25; Vism 278; Vb-a 254; Dhs-a 147; asallakkaṇa non-discernment SN iii.261.

fr. sallakkheti

Sallakkhita

realized, thought Dhp-a i.89.

pp. of sallakkheti

Sallakkheti

to observe, consider Vin i.48, Vin i.271; Ja i.123; Ja ii.8; Vism 150; to examine Ja v.13; to bear in mind Dhs-a 110; Ja vi.566; to understand realize, conclude, think over Ja iv.146; Vv-a 185; Vb-a 53; asallakkhetvā without deliberation Vin ii.215 inadvertently Ja i.209 ■ Caus. II. sallakkhāpeti to cause to be noted Mvu 9, Mvu 24; Dhs-a 121; to persuade, bring to reason Ja vi.393.

saṃ + lakkheti

Sallapati

to talk (with) DN i.90; DN ii.109; Mil 4; sallapeti the same Vin iv.14.

saṃ + lapati

Sallalīkata

pierced, perforated Ja i.180. Trenckner suggests that this form may have arisen from *sallakīkata (from sallaka, porcupine).

Sallahuka

(adj.) light Ja i.277; Ja ii.26; Vism 65; Dhp-a iv.17; sallahukena nakkhattena on lucky nights Ja ii.278; sallahukavuttin whose wants are easily met, frugal Snp 144; DN-a i.207.

saṃ + lahuka

Sallāpa

conversation DN i.89; AN ii.182; Ja i.112, Ja i.189; Mil 94. Often in cpd. kathā & allāpa˚.;

saṃ + lāpa

Sallitta

smeared (with) Thag 1175 (mīḷha˚).

saṃ + litta

Sallīna

sluggish, cowering DN ii.255; asallīna active, upright, unshaken DN ii.157; SN i.159; SN iv.125 Cp v.68. paṭi˚.

saṃ + līna

Sallīyanā

(f.) stolidity Dhs 1156, Dhs 1236.

Sallekha

austere penance, the higher life MN i.13, MN i.40; Vin i.305; Pts i.102, Pts i.103; Pp 69 sq.; DN-a i.82; Vism 69; Mil 360, Mil 380; adj. Vin i.45; sallekhitācāra practising austere penance Mil 230, Mil 244, Mil 348 sq. ˚vutti Vin ii.197; Vism 65 (˚vuttitā). Cp. abhi˚.

fr. saṃ + likh

Sallekhatā

(f.) = sallekha DN iii.115; Vism 53.

Saḷāyatana

(nt.) the six organs of sense and the six objects-viz., eye ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind; forms, sounds, odouis tastes, tangible things, ideas; occupying the fourth place in the Paṭiccasamuppāda DN ii.32; MN i.52; AN i.176; SN ii.3; Vin i.1; Vism 529, Vism 562 sq., 671; Vb-a 174 Vb-a 176 sq., 319.

ṣaḍ˚ for which ordinarily chal˚: see cha

Sava

(adj.) dripping, flowing with (-˚) Pv ii.911 (madhu˚, with honey).

fr. sru, savati

Savaka

see ˚saṃ.

Savaṅka

a sort of fish Ja v.405. Cp. satavanka & saccavanka.;

Savacanīya

(the subject of a) conversation Vin ii.5, Vin ii.22, Vin ii.276.

sa3 + vacanīya

Savati

to flow Snp 197, Snp 1034; Ja vi.278; Dhp 370 ■ ppr. fr. savantī Thag-a 109.

sru; cp. Sk. srotas stream; Gr. ῥεϋμα, ῥέω to flow; Ags. strēam = stream; Oir. sruth

Savana1

(nt.) 1. the ear Snp 1120; Mil 258.

2. hearing DN i.153, DN i.179; AN i.121; SN i.24; Vin i.26; Snp 265, Snp 345; Dhp 182; Ja i.160, Ja i.250; Mil 257 Nd i.188. sussavanaṃ sāvesi she made me hear a good hearing, she taught me a good thing Ja i.61; savanaṭṭhāne within hearing Ja iv.378. dhamma˚; hearing the preaching of the Dhamma Vin i.101 etc.

fr. śru: see suṇāti

Savana2

(nt.) flowing Dhp 339; Ja iv.288; Ja v.257; savana-gandha of the body, having a tainted odour Thig 466.

fr. savati

Savanīya

(adj.) pleasant to hear DN ii.211; Ja i.96 (-ṇ-); Ja vi.120 = Ja vi.122 (savaneyya).

grd. of suṇāti

Savantī

(f.) a river Vin ii.238; Bv ii.86 = Ja i.18; Ja vi.485; Mil 319.

cp. Vedic sravat, orig. ppr. of sru, sravati

Savara

an aboriginal tribe, a savage Vin i.168; Mil 191.

Epic Sk. śabara, cp. śabala = P. sabala

Savasa

one’s own will Dhs-a 61 (˚vattitā; cp. Expos. 81).

sa4 + vasa

Savighāta

(adj.) bringing vexation Thig 352; Thag-a 242.

sa3 + vighāta

Savicāra

accompanied by investigation DN i.37 etc., in the description of the first Jhāna. See vicāra.

Savijjuka

(adj.) accompanied by lightning DN ii.262.

sa3 + vijju + ka

Saviññāṇa

possessed of consciousness, conscious, animate AN i.83; -ka the same AN i.132; Dhp-a i.6 ■ See viññāṇaka.

Savitakka

accompanied by reasoning DN i.37 etc., in the formula of the first Jhāna. See vitakka.

Savidha

(adj.) near; (nt.) neighbourhood Dāvs iv.32; Dāvs v.9.

Sk. savidha

Savibhattika

(adj.) (able) to be classified Dhs-a 134. Savupadana = sa-upadana

sa3 + vibhatti + ka

Savupādāna = sa-upādāna

(A ii.163): see upādāna.

Savera

(adj.) angry DN i.247.

sa3 + vera

Savyañjana

(adj.) with the letters Vin i.21; DN i.62; DN-a i.176; Sn. p. 103; Vism 214.

sa3 + vyañjana

Savhaya

(adj.) called, named Dpvs 4, 7; Ap 109.

sa3 + avhaya

Sasa

a hare, rabbit Dhp 342; Ja iv.85; of the hare in the moon Ja iv.84 sq. sasôlūkā (= sasā ca ulūkā ca) Ja vi.564.

-lakkhaṇa the sign of a hare Ja i.172; Ja iii.55. -lañjana id. Vv-a 314 (˚vant = sasin, the moon). -visāṇa a hare’s horn (an impossibility) Ja iii.477.

Vedic śaśa, with Ohg. haso = E. hare to Lat. canus grey, greyish-brown; cp. Ags. hasu

Sasaka

= sasa Ja ii.26; Ja iv.85; Cp i.101.

Sasakkaṃ

as much as one can MN i.415, MN i.514 sq.

sa + sakkaṃ

Sasati1 [śas

. cp. Dhtp 301: gati-hiṃsā-pāṇanesu] to slay, slaughter; sassamāna ppr. pass. Ja v.24 (C. = hiṃsamāna) inf. sasituṃ Ja vi.291 (read sāsituṃ from sāsati?). pp sattha.

Sasati2 [śvas]

to breathe (cp. Dhtp 301: pāṇana): see vissasati.

Sasattha

with swords Ja iv.222; Dhs-a 62.

sa3 + sattha

Sasambhama

(adj.) with great confusion Mvu 5, Mvu 139.

sa + sambhama

Sasambhāra

(adj.) with the ingredients or constituents Vism 20, Vism 352, Vism 353.

sa3 + sambhāra

Sasin

the moon Dāvs iv.29; Ja iii.141; Ja v.33; Vv 811 (= canda Vv-a 314), 823.

Sk. śaśin, fr. śaśa

Sasīsa

(adj.) together with the head; sasīsaṃ up to the head DN i.76, DN i.246; Ja i.298; sasīsaka head and all DN ii.324; Sn, p. 80.

sa3 + sīsa

Sasura

father-in-law Vin iii.137; MN i.168; AN ii.78; Vv-a 69, Vv-a 121; Thig 407 (sassura); Ja i.337 sassu-sasurā mother-and father-in-law Ja ii.347; Ja iii.182 Ja iv.38; Ja vi.510; the form sassura Thig 407 has probably arisen through analogy with sassu ■ f. sasurī Vv-a 69.

Vedic śvaśura, f. śvaśrū (see P. sassū), Idg. *sṷekuros, *sṷekrū; cp. Gr. ἑκυρός & ἑκυρά; Lat. socer socrus; Goth. swaihra & swaíhrō, Ags. swēor & sweger Ohg. swehur & swigar

Sasenaka

(adj.) accompanied by an army Mvu 19, Mvu 27.

sa3 + sena + ka

Sassa

(nt.) corn, crop MN i.116; Ja i.86, Ja i.143, Ja i.152; Ja ii.135; Mil 2; Dhp-a i.97; Snp-a 48; sassasamaya crop time Ja i.143; susassa abounding in corn Vin i.238; pl. m. sassā Ja i.340. ˚-kamma agriculture Ja vi.101; ˚-kāla harvest time Vin iv.264; ˚-ṭṭhāna ˚-khetta Ja vi.297; dussassa (having) bad crops Vin i.238; AN i.160; Kp-a 218 (= dubbhikkhā).

-uddharaṇa lifting the corn Mil 307. -ghāta destroying property SN ii.218 sq.

cp. Vedic sasya

Sassata

(adj.) eternal, perpetual DN i.13; DN iii.31 sq., 137 sq.; MN i.8, MN i.426; AN i.41; Dhp 255; Dhs 1099; Ja i.468; Mil 413; DN-a i.112; dhuvasassata sure and certain Bv ii.111 sq. = Ja i.19; sassatiyā for ever, Snp 1075 a-sassata Ja v.176; Ja vi.315; sassatāyaṃ adv. (dat.) for ever (?) Ja i.468; Ja v.172; Fausböll takes it = sassatā ayam (following the C.), and writes sassat’āyaṃ.

-diṭṭhi eternalism, the doctrine that soul and world are eternal Dhs 1315; SN ii.20; SN iii.98; Ne 40, Ne 127 -mūla eternalist Dpvs 6, 25. -vāda an eternalist eternalism DN i.13; DN iii.108; SN ii.20; SN iii.99, SN iii.182; SN iv.400 Pp 38; DN-a i.104 sq.; Pts i.155; Vb-a 509. -vādin eternalist Ne 111; Mhbv 110.

Vedic śaśvat

Sassatika

eternalist DN i.17; Mhbv 110 (ekacca˚ partial eternalist); Vin iii.312; ˚-ika Ja v.18, Ja v.19.

fr. sassata

Sassatisamaṃ

(adv.) for ever and ever DN i.14; MN i.8; SN iii.143; also sassatī samā Ja iii.255; Vv 6314 (explained by sassatīhi samāna, like the eternal things-viz., earth, sun, moon, etc., Vv-a 265); Ja iii.256; DN-a i.105.

cp. Sk. śaśvatīḥ samāḥ

Sassamāṇabrāhmaṇa

(fem ■ ī) together, with samaṇas and brahmins Vin i.11; DN i.62; DN iii.76, DN iii.135; SN v.423; Snp p.100; DN-a i.174.

Sassara

imitative of the sound sarasara; chinnasassara giving out a broken or irregular sound of sarasara MN i.128; see J.P.T.S., 1889, p. 209.

Sassāmika

(adj.) 1. having a master, belonging to somebody DN ii.176.

2. having a husband married Ja i.177, Ja i.397; Ja iv.190.

sa + sāmin + ka

Sassirīka

(adj.) glorious, resplendent Ja i.95; Ja ii.1; Ja iv.189; Ja vi.270.

sa3 + sirī + ka

Sassū

and Sassu (f.) mother-in-law Vin iii.137; AN ii.78; Thig 407; Snp 125; Ja i.337; Ja iii.425 sq.; Ja v.286 (gen. sassuyā); Dhp-a i.307; Vv-a 110 Vv-a 121; Pv-a 89. sassu-sasure, see sasura; sassudeva worshipping one’s mother-in-law as a god SN i.86; Ja iv.322.

Vedic śvaśrū: see sasura

Saha1

(indecl.) prep. & prefix, meaning: in conjunction with, together, accompanied by; immediately after (with instr.) Vin i.38; Snp 49, Snp 928 Thig 414 = Thig 425; sahā Snp 231.

-anukkama = sahānukkama with the bridle Dhp 398; Dhp-a iv.161. -āmacca together with the ministers Mvu 5, Mvu 182. -āvudha together with one’s weapons Ja iv.416. -indaka together with Indra DN ii.208, DN ii.221; Vv 301. -ūdaka together with water Ja v.407. -oḍha together with the stolen goods; coraṃ ˚-aṃ gahetvā Vism 180; Mvu 23, Mvu 11 (thena); 35, 11. See oḍḍha-odaka containing water Mvu 4, Mvu 13. -orodha with his harem Mvu 5, Mvu 182; -kathin conversing with (instr. MN i.489. -kāra a sort of fragrant mango Kp-a 53 -gata accompanying, connected with, concomitant Vin i.10; DN ii.186; SN v.421; Kv 337; Dhs-a 157 -ggaṇa together with his companions Dpvs 14, 58 -cetiya containing a Cetiya Mvu 33, Mvu 10. -ja born at the same time Vv 8115. -jāta 1. born at the same time, of equal age Ja i.54; Ja vi.512.

2. arisen at the same time coinciding with (instr.) Kv 337, 620; Vb-a 127. 3. (in ˚paccaya ) the relation of co-nascence, coincidence Dukp 17 sq., 52 sq., 113 sq., 129 sq., 145 sq., 225 sq. 334 sq. and passim; Tikp 36 sq., 62 sq., 107 sq., 243 sq. Vism 535. -jīvin (fem ■ ī) living together with Vin iv.291, Vin iv.325 sq. -dhammika having the same Dhamma co-religionist MN i.64; Nd i.485 (opp. para˚); regarding the Dhamma DN i.94, DN i.161; MN i.368; Vin i.134; Ne 52; DN-a i.263 (= sahetuka, sakāraṇa); that which is in accordance with the dhamma Dhs 1327; MN i.482 ˚ṃ adv. in accordance with the dhamma Vin i.60, Vin i.69 Vin iii.178; Vin iv.141. -dhammiya co-religionist Ne 169 -dhenuka accompanied by a cow Mvu 21, Mvu 18. -nandin rejoicing with Iti 73. -paṃsukīḷita a companion in play a playfellow AN ii.186: Ja i.364; Ja iv.77; Pv-a 30. -pesuṇa together with slander Snp 862 f.; Nd i.257. -bhāvin being at one’s service Ja iii.181 (amacca). -bhū arising together with Dhs 1197; Ne 16; a class of devas DN ii.260 -macchara with envy Snp 862. -yoga = karaṇa-vacana Snp-a 44. -vatthu living together with Thig 414 Thig 425; Thag-a 269. -vāsa living together, associating Vin ii.34; Iti 68. -vāsin living together Ja v.352. -saṅgha together with the Order Mvu 1, Mvu 71. -seyyā sharing the same couch, living together Vin iv.16; Kp-a 190 -sevaka together with the servants Mvu 36, Mvu 43. -sokin sorrowful (?) SN iv.180.

fr. sa3; cp. Vedic saha

Saha2

(adj.) submitting to, enduring MN i.33; Thag 659; Ja vi.379; sabbasaha Ja v.425, Ja v.431dussaha hard to endure Sdhp 95, Sdhp 118, Sdhp 196

fr. sah

Sahati

1. to conquer, defeat, overcome MN i.33; SN iv.157; Snp 942; Dhp 335; Iti 84; Ja i.74; Ja ii.386 (avamānaṃ); iii.423 (id.).

2. to bear, endure Snp 20 Pp 68.

3. to be able DN ii.342 (sayhāmi); Pot. sahe Snp 942; Pot. saheyya MN i.33; saha (imper. excuse forgive, beg your pardon!) Ja iii.109; grd. sayha that which can be endured, able to be done Snp 253; Dāvs ii.29; a-sayha Mil 1148.

sah to prevail

Sahattha

one’s own hand Ja i.68; usually sahatthā (abl.) with one’s own hand Vin i.18; AN i.274; DN i.109; Snp p.107; Ja i.286; Pv ii.98; ii.954; Mil 15 instr. sahatthena id. Pv-a 110, Pv-a 124, Pv-a 135; Ja iii.267 Ja vi.305. Cp. sāhatthika.

sa4 + hattha

Sahatthin

(adj.) together with the elephant Mvu 25, Mvu 70.

sa3 + hatthin

Sahavya

(nt.) companionship Vv 477 (= sahabhāva Vv-a 202). -˚ūpaga coming into union with DN i.245.

fr. sahāya, cp. Sk. sāhāyya

Sahavyatā

(f.) companionship DN i.18, DN i.235; DN ii.206; MN ii.195; MN iii.99; SN iv.306; AN iii.192.

abstr. fr. sahavya

Sahasā

(adv.) forcibly, hastily, suddenly Snp 123; Dhp-a iii.381; Pv-a 40, Pv-a 279 inconsiderately Ja i.173; Ja iii.441. -˚kāra violence DN i.5; DN iii.176; AN ii.209; Pp 58; Ja iv.11; DN-a i.80.

instr. of sahas (Vedic), force

Sahassa

a thousand, used as a singular with a noun in the plural, sahassaṃ vācā Dhp 100; satasahassaṃ vassāni Ja i.29; also in the plural after other numerals cattāri satasahassāni chaḷabhiññā Bv ii.204 = Ja i.29; also with the thing counted in the genitive, accharānaṃ sahassaṃ Mvu 17, Mvu 13; AN i.227; or ˚-, as sahassa-yakkha-parivāra Snp-a 209. In combination with other numerals, sahassa is sometimes inflected like an adjective, saṭṭhisahassā amaccā sixty thousand ministers Ja vi.484; satasahassiyo gāvo 100,000 cows Snp 308; the thing counted then precedes in a compound jāti-sahassaṃ 1,000 births DN i.13; Iti 99 ghaṭa-sahassam pi udakaṃ Mil 189; sindhava-sahasso ratho Ja vi.103; sahassaṃ sahassena a thousand times a thousand Dhp 103; sahassass’ eva in thousands DN ii.87- sahassaṃ (nt.) 1,000 gold pieces Dhp 106; Ja vi.484; Mil 10; satasahassaṃ a hundred thousand Ja i.28 sahassa (adj.) (fem. ī) worth a thousand Ja v.484, Ja v.485 Thag-a 72 (Ap v.45, read sahassayo for ˚aso); epithet of Brahmā, the B. of a thousand world systems MN iii.101 Cp. dasa-sahassī.

-akkha thousand-eyed, the god Sakka SN i.229; Ja vi.203; sahassacakkhu the same Ja v.394, Ja v.407. -aggha worth a thousand Mil 284. -āra having 1,000 spokes DN ii.172. -ṭṭhavikā a purse with 1,000 pieces (of money Vism 383; Ja i.506; Dhp-a ii.37; Vv-a 33 ■ netta thousand-eyed, the god Sakka SN i.226; Snp 346; Ja iii.426; Ja iv.313 Ja v.408; Ja vi.174; Vv 3010; Dhp-a i.17. -bāhu having a thousand arms, said of Ajjuna Ja v.119, Ja v.135, Ja v.145 (˚-rājā) 267, 273; vi.201. -bhaṇḍikā a heap of 1,000 pieces Ja ii.424; Ja iii.60; Ja iv.2. -raṃsi the sun Ja i.183.

Sk. sahasra, see etym. under saṃ˚

Sahassadhā

(adv.) in a thousand ways AN i.227; Thag 909.

cp. satadhā etc.

Sahassika

(adj.) thousandfold Ja i.17; Ja iv.175 (so for ˚iyo). Sahassi-lokadhatu

fr. sahassa

Sahassī-lokadhātu

(f.) a thousandfold world, a world system DN i.46; AN i.228; DN-a i.130; dasasahassī-lokadhātu ten world systems Ja i.51, Ja i.63; cp. dasasahassī and lokadhātu.

Sahājanetta

at Snp 1096 is of doubtful meaning (“all-seeing”?), it is expld as “spontaneously arisen omniscience” at Nd ii.669 (where spelling is sahajānetta ); lit. “coinciding eye”; Snp-a 598 expls as “sahajāta-sabbaññuta-ñāṇa-cakkhu.”

sahāja + netta

Sahāya

companion, friend DN ii.78; MN i.86; SN iv.288; Pp 36; Snp 35, Snp 45 sq.; Ja ii.29; ˚-kicca assistance (?) Ja v.339; ˚-matta companion Ja iv.76; ˚-sampadā the good luck of having companions Snp 47; adiṭṭha-˚; a friend who has not yet been seen personally Ja i.377; Ja iii.364; bahu-˚; having many friends Vin ii.158; nāhaṃ ettha sahāyo bhavis-sāmi I am not a party to that Ja iii.46; asahāya Mil 225.

cp. Epic Sk. sahāya, fr. saha + i

Sahāyaka

(adj.) f. ˚yikā companion, ally, friend Vin i.18; DN ii.155; AN ii.79, AN ii.186; Ja i.165; Ja ii.29; Ja v.159 Ja vi.256 (gihī sahāyakā, read gihisahāyakā [?]).

fr. last

Sahāyatā

(f.) companionship Dhp 61; sahāyatta (nt.) the same Mvu 30, Mvu 21.

abstr. fr. sahāya

Sahita

1. accompanied with Mvu 7, Mvu 27.

2. united, keeping together DN i.4; Ja iv.347; Pp 57.

3. consistent, sensible, to the point DN i.8; AN ii.138; AN iv.196; SN iii.12; Dhp 19 (at Dhp-a i.157 expld as a name for the Tipiṭaka, thus equalling Sk. saṃhita); Pp 42.

4. close together, thick Thig 254 ■ araṇisahita (nt.) firewood and appurtenances Vin ii.217; DN ii.340 sq.; Ja i.212; Dhp-a ii.246 ■ sahitaṃvata (adj.) having a consistent or perpetual vow i.e. living the holy life Ja v.320 (= sīlācāra-sampanna C.); vi.525 (T. sahitabbata; C. expls as samādinna-vata gahita-tāpasa-vesa). Kern, Toev. ii.51 takes it as a corrupted Sk. śaṃsita-vrata.

pp. of saṃ + dhā, cp. Sk. sahita = saṃhita

Sahitar

one who endures Snp 42.

n. ag. fr. sahati

Sahirañña

(adj.) possessing gold Snp 102.

sa + hirañña

Sahetu

(adj.) having a cause, together with the cause Vin i.2; DN i.180; DN-a i.263. See hetu.

sa + hetu

Sahetuka

having a cause, accompanied by a cause (especially of good or bad karma) AN i.82; Dhs 1073.

Sahoḍha

see under saha1. Sā see under San1.

Sāka

(nt.) 1. vegetable, potherb DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.156; AN i.241, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55; Vism 70; Vv 3333; Ja iii.225; Ja iv.445; Ja v.103.

2. (m.) name of a tree (Tectona grandis) DN i.92; DN-a i.259; Vism 250 ˚-vatthu ground for cultivation of vegetables Ja iv.446 sāka-paṇṇavaṇṇa “like the colour of vegetable leaf (said of teeth) Ja v.206 (cp. 203).

Epic Sk. śāka

Sākacchā

(f.) conversation, talking over, discussing DN i.103; DN ii.109; MN i.72; SN i.79; AN ii.140, AN ii.187 sq. AN iii.81; Snp 266; Mil 19, Mil 24; Dhp-a i.90 (˚aṃ karoti) Ja vi.414.

Sākaccheti

to converse with, talk over with, discuss DN ii.237 (+ sallapati); ppr. sākacchanto Vin i.169; fut. sākacchissanti Vin ii.75; Vin iii.159 grd. sākacchātabba Vin v.123, Vin v.196; ppr. med. sākacchā yamāna AN ii.189.

Denom. fr. sākacchā

Sākaṭika

a carter SN i.57; Thig 443 (Thag-a 271 = senaka); Ja iii.104; Mil 66, Mil 164.

fr. sakaṭa1

Sākalya

(nt.) totality; Kp-a 187 (opp. vekalya); sākalya AN i.94 is misprint for sākhalya.

fr. sakala

Sākāra

(adj.) with its characteristics DN i.13; DN iii.111; MN i.35; Pp 60; Vism 423 (+ sa-uddesa).

sa3 + ākāra

Sākuṇika

a fowler SN ii.256; AN iii.303; Pp 56; Ja i.208. Combd with miga-bandhaka & macchaghātaka at Snp-a 289; with māgavika & maccha-ghātaka at Pp 56.;

fr. sakuṇa

Sākuntika

a fowler, bird-catcher AN ii.207; Thig 299; Thag-a 227; DN-a i.162.

fr. sakunta

Sākkharappabheda

together with the distinction of letters, with the phonology DN i.88; AN i.163; Sn, p. 101; Mil 10; DN-a i.247 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca).

sa3 + akkhara + pabheda

Sākhapurāṇasanthuta

one with whom one has formerly been friendly Ja v.448. Sakhalya & Sakhalla;

fr. sakhi + purāṇa˚

Sākhalya & Sakhalla

(nt.) friendship MN i.446 (= tameness); AN i.94; DN iii.213; Dhs 1343; DN-a i.287; Dhs-a 396; Ja iv.57, Ja iv.58 (= maṭṭhavacana “smooth words”).

abstr. from sakhila

Sākhavant

(adj.) having branches Ja iii.493.

sākhā + vant

Sākhā

a branch Vin i.28; MN i.135; AN i.152; AN ii.165 AN ii.200 sq.; AN iii.19, AN iii.43 sq., 200; iv.99, 336; v.314 sq.; Snp 791; Ja v.393; Ja ii.44; a spur of a hill AN i.243; AN ii.140; Mil 36; also sākha (nt.) Mvu 1, Mvu 55; Ja i.52; Ja iv.350; Ja i.164 (? yāva aggasākhā) ■ the rib of a parasol Snp 688. adj. sīla-sākha-pasākha whose branches and boughs are like the virtues Ja vi.324. In cpds. sākha˚ & sākhā˚;.

-nagaraka “little town in the branches,” i.e. a suburb, a small town DN ii.146; Ja i.391. -patta-palāsa branches and foliage AN iii.44; -patta-phal’upeta with branches, leaves & fruit AN iii.43. -palāsa id. MN i.488; AN ii.200. -bhaṅga faggots Ja i.158; Ja iii.407; Dhp-a ii.204 Dhp-a iii.375. -miga a monkey Ja ii.73; -ssita living upon branches (i.e. monkey) Ja v.233.

Vedic śākhā, cp. also śanku stick, & Goth. hōha plough

Sāgataṃ

(indecl.) “greeting of welcome,” hail! DN i.179 = MN i.481 (sāgataṃ bhante Bhagavato); DN ii.173; MN i.514 (˚aṃ bhoto Ānandassa) DN-a i.287; Dhp-a iii.293.

su + āgata, orij. nt. = wel-come

Sāgara

the ocean DN i.89; AN ii.56, AN ii.140; AN iii.52; AN v.116 sq.; Vin i.246; Snp 568; Pv-a 29; sāgara ūmi a wave of the ocean, a flood Ja iv.165; ˚-vāri the ocean Ja iv.165; sāgaranta or sāgarapariyanta bounded or surrounded by the ocean (said of the earth) Ja vi.203 ˚-kuṇḍala the same Ja iii.32; Ja vi.278.

cp. Epic Sk. sāgara

Sāgāra

(adj.) living in a house, Iti 111; sleeping under the same roof Vin ii.279.

sa3 + agāra

Sāṅgaṇa

(adj.) full of lust, impure MN i.24 (var. read sangaṇa; this is also the reading at Snp 279 see above).

sa + angaṇa

Sācakka

(nt.) name of a science (“the interpretation of omens to be drawn from dogs”) Mil 178.

sā = śvan, dog; + cakka; cp. sopāka & suva

Sācariyaka

(adj.) together with one’s teacher DN i.102.

sa3 + ācariya + ka

Sāciyoga

crooked ways, insincerity DN i.5; DN iii.176; MN i.180; AN ii.209; AN v.206 Pp 58; DN-a i.80.

sāci + yoga; cp. Sk. sāci crooked

Sājīva

(nt.) rule of life, precept governing the monastic life of the Buddhist bhikkhus Vin iii.2416; adj. ˚-samāpanna ibid.; adj. ˚-kara one who supports Ja iv.42 (= sa-ājīvakara, C.).

Sāṭa

a garment, cloth Thig 245; sāṭi (f.) the same SN i.115; Dhp 394; Ja i.230 (udaka˚ bathing mantle) 481.

cp. Sk. śāṭa

Sāṭaka

an outer garment, cloak; cloth Thag-a 246; Ja i.89, Ja i.138, Ja i.195, Ja i.373, Ja i.426; Vism 54 (sāṇa˚), 275 (alla˚); Dhp-a i.393 (thūla˚). Cp. antara˚, alaṃ˚.

-lakkhaṇa prognostication drawn from pieces of cloth Ja i.371.

sāṭa + ka

Sāṭikā

(f.) = sāṭaka Vin i.292 sq.; Vin ii.31; Vin ii.272, Vin ii.279 (udaka˚ bathing mantle) Ja i.330; Vism 339 (in simile); Mil 240 (cp. MN iii.253). sāṭiya the same Vin ii.177 (˚gāhāpaka receiver of undergarments).

Sāṭetar

one who dispels, drives away MN i.220; AN v.347 sq., 351, 359.

n. ag. fr. sāṭeti

Sāṭeti

to cut open, to destroy; fig. to torment: Kern’s proposed reading (see Toev. s. v sāveti) for sāveti at Ja iii.198 (amba-pakkāni); iv.402 (attānaṃ sāṭetvā dāsakammaṃ karissāni); vi.486 (kāyaṃ s.). He compares Mvu iii.385: śāṭeti gātrāni. Cp. visāṭita & visāta;.

śat to cut, destroy

Sāṭheyya

(nt.) craft, treachery MN i.15, MN i.36, MN i.281, MN i.340; AN i.95, AN i.100; Nd i.395; Pp 19, Pp 23; Mil 289. Cp paṭi˚.

abstr. fr. saṭha = *śāṭhya

Sāṇa1

(nt.) hemp DN ii.350; Mil 267; a coarse hempen cloth Vin i.58; DN i.166; DN iii.41; MN i.78; AN i.240; SN ii.202 SN ii.221; Pp 55; Vism 54 (˚sāṭaka) ■ sāṇavāka the same Thig 252; Ja iii.394 (var. read).

cp. Sk. śāṇa hempen, fr. śaṇa = P. saṇa; cp. bhanga1

Sāṇa2

having a debt, indebted, fig. subjected to the kilesas, imperfect MN iii.127 = SN ii.221 (= sakilesa sa-iṇa K.S. ii.203); Thag-a 8; cp. anaṇa under aṇa.

sa + iṇa

Sāṇadhovana

(nt.) a kind of play DN-a i.84 = saṇadhovikā.

Sāṇikā

(f.) a curtain Ja iii.462.

fr. sāṇī

Sāṇī

(f.) hemp-cloth DN ii.350; Vin iii.17; a screen, curtain, tent Ja i.58, Ja i.148 sq., 178, 419; Dhp-a i.194; Dhp-a ii.49. ˚-pākāra a screen-wall Vin iv.269, Vin iv.279; Ja ii.88; Dhp-a ii.68, Dhp-a ii.71, Dhp-a ii.186; Vv-a 173; Pv-a 283 Mvu 7, Mvu 27; sāṇipasibbaka a sack or bag of hempcloth Vin iii.1710paṭṭa-sāṇī a screen of fine cloth Ja i.395.

fr. saṇa

Sāta

(adj.) pleasant, agreeable Iti 114; Ne 27. Often combd with piya, e.g. Iti 114; Vb 103; DN-a i.311 ■ Opp. kaṭuka ■ sāta (nt.) pleasure, joy MN i.508; AN i.81 sq.; SN ii.220; Ja i.410; Dhp 341 (˚sita sāta-nissita Dhp-a iv.49); Snp 867 sq.; Nd i.30 (three, of bhava); Pv ii.113; iv.54 (+ sukha); Dhs 3. asāta disagreeable unpleasant Dhs 1343; Ja i.410; Ja i.288; Ja ii.105; Snp 867 sq.; sātabhakkha Pp 55, read haṭabhakkha.

-odaka with pleasant water DN ii.129; MN i.76; Vin iii.108. -kumbha gold Vv-a 13. See also v.l. under hāṭaka ■ putta a noble son Ja vi.238 (= amacca-putta C.).

cp. *Sk. śāta

Sātaka

name of a kind of bird Ja vi.539 (koṭṭhapokkhara-˚, cp. 540); Snp-a 359 (id.).

Sātacca

(nt.) perseverance MN i.101; SN ii.132; AN iii.249 sq.; AN iv.460 sq.; AN v.17 sq.; Thag 585; Vism 4 Vb-a 346. ˚-kārin persevering SN iii.268, SN iii.271, SN iii.277 sq. Dhp 293; ˚-kiriyatā persevering performance Dhs 1367.

fr. satata

Sātataṃ

(adv.) continually SN i.17 = SN i.57.

fr. satata

Sātatā

(f.) happiness SN i.17.

abstr. fr. sāta

Sātatika

(adj.) persevering Dhp 23; SN ii.232; Iti 74; Dhp-a i.230.

fr. last

Sātatta

(nt.) tastiness, sweetness AN i.32.

abstr. fr. sāta

Sātava

(nt.) sweet result (of good words) kalyāṇakamma, Com.) Ja vi.235, Ja vi.237. Is it misspelling for sādhava (fr sādhu)?

Sātiya

(adj.) pleasant Snp 853.

fr. sāta

Sātireka

(adj.) having something in excess DN ii.93.

sa + atireka, cp. BSk. sātirikta Divy 27

Sātisāra

(adj.) trespassing Vin i.55.

sa + atisāra

Sāttha

with the meaning, in spirit DN i.62; DN ii.48; Iti 79, Iti 111; Snp p.100; Vin i.21; DN-a i.176; Vism 214.

sa3 + attha

Sātthaka

(adj.) (fem ■ ikā) useful Pv-a 12. Satra-yaga

sa + atthaka

Sātrā-yāga

identical with sammāpāsa (Snp 303) Snp-a 322 (? conjecture yātrā˚).

Sāthalika

(adj.) lethargic, lax MN i.14, MN i.200 sq.; MN iii.6; AN i.71; AN ii.148; AN iii.108, AN iii.179 sq.

śrath, cp. saṭhila & sithila

Sādana

(nt.) place, house Ja iv.405; Yama-sādanaṃ sampatto come to Yama’s abode: dead Ja iv.405; Ja v.267, Ja v.304; Ja vi.457, Ja vi.505 (do., the MSS. always read ˚-sādhana).

cp. Vedic sādana, fr. sad

Sādara

(adj.) reverential Mvu 5, Mvu 246; Mvu 15, Mvu 2; Mvu 28, Mvu 25; Mvu 33, Mvu 82; sādariya (nt.) and sādariyatā (f.) showing regard and consideration Pp 24; cp. Dhs 1327.

sa + ādara

Sādāna

(adj.) attached to the world, passionate Dhp 406 = Snp 630; Dhp-a iv.180.

sa + ādāna

Sāditar

one who accepts, appropriates MN iii.126.

n. ag. fr. sādiyati

Sādiyati

lit. to enjoy for oneself, to agree to, permit, let take place DN i.166; Vin ii.294; AN iv.54, AN iv.347; SN i.78; SN iv.226 sq.; Pp 55; Mil 95 sq. aor. sādiyi Vin iii.38 sq.; fut. sādiyissati Ja vi.158.

cp. BSk. svādīyati: Mvu ii.145; Med ■ Pass fr. *sādeti, Caus. of svad

Sādiyanā

(f.) appropriating, accepting Mil 95.

fr. sādiyati

Sādisa

(fem. -sī ) like, similar DN ii.239; Snp 595; Thig 252 (sa˚ for sā˚); Ap 239; Ja iv.97; Mil 217 (with instr.).

fr. sadisa

Sādu

(adj.) sweet, nice, pleasant Vin ii.196; MN i.114; Thig 273; Snp 102; Ja iv.168; Ja v.5; Dhs 629; asādu (ka) Ja iii.145; Ja iv.509 (text, asādhuka com. on kaṭuka); sādu-karoti makes sweet Ja iii.319; Pot a-sādu-kiyirā makes bitter, ibid. 319; sādu sweet things Vin ii.196; sādu-phala see sādhuphala; for ˚kamyatā see the latter.

Vedic svādu, f. svādvī; fr. svad, cp. Gr. ἡδύς, Lat. suavis, Goth. sūts = E. sweet; also Sk. sūda cook Gr. η ̔́δομαι to enjoy, ήδονή pleasure

Sādutā

(f.) sweetness Dāvs i.40.

fr. sādu

Sādeti1

to cause to sink, to throw down Dhp-a i.75 (+ vināseti; v.l. pāteti).

Caus. of sad: see sīdati

Sādeti2

to enjoy: see ucchādeti (where better referred to avad ) and chādeti2.

Caus. of svad; given as root in meaning “assādane” at Dhtp 147

Sādhaka

(adj.) accomplishing, effecting Ja i.86; Snp-a 394, Snp-a 415; Sdhp 161; iṇa˚; debt-collector Mil 365 bali˚ tax-collector Ja iv.366; Ja v.103, Ja v.105, Ja v.106.

fr. sādh

Sādhakatā

(f.) effectiveness, efficiency Sdhp 329.

abstr. fr. sādhaka

Sādhana

(adj.-n..) 1. enforcing, proving Ja i.307; DN-a i.105.

2. settling, clearing (a debt) Ja ii.341 (uddhāra˚). In this meaning mixed with sodheti; it is impossible to decide which of the two is to be preferred See iṇa & uddhāra;.

3. yielding, effecting, producing resulting in (-˚) AN iii.156 (laṇḍa˚ dung-producing) DN-a i.273; Vv-a 194; Pv-a 278 (hita˚).

4. materials instrument Vv-a 349; Pv-a 199.

fr. sādh

Sādhāraṇa

(adj.) general, common, joint Vin ii.258; Vin iii.35; Thig 505; Ja i.202, Ja i.302; Ja iv.7 (pañca˚-bhāva 5 fold connection); Ne 49 sq.; Pv-a 122, Pv-a 194, Pv-a 265. a˚ Ja i.78; DN-a i.71.

Sādhika

(adj.) having something beyond DN ii.93; Vv 535 (˚vīsati) ˚-porisa exceeding a man’s height MN i.74, MN i.365; AN iii.403.

sa + adhika; cp. BSk. sādhika Divy 44

Sādhiya

(adj.) that which can be accomplished Sdhp 258 etc.

fr. sādh

Sādhu

(adj.) 1. good, virtuous, pious Snp 376, Snp 393; Ja i.1; Mvu 37, Mvu 119; Pv-a 116, Pv-a 132 asādhu bad, wicked Dhp 163, Dhp 223; Dhp-a iii.313.

2 good, profitable, proficient, meritorious Dhp 35, Dhp 206 (= sundara, bhaddaka Dhp-a iii.271); DN i.88; Pv ii.97 nt. adv. well, thoroughly Dhp 67; Ja i.1; Mvu 36, Mvu 97 Mvu 37, Mvu 73. Very frequent as interjection, denoting (a request (adhortative, with imper.: sādhu gaccha please go! Mil 18; gacchatha Vv-a 305), to be translated with “come on, welcome, please,” or similar adverbs. Thus e.g. at Pv iv.140 (= āyācane Pv-a 232); Ja i.92; Pv-a 6 Pv-a 35, Pv-a 272; Vv-a 69;-(b) assent & approval; in replies to a question “alright, yes” or similarly; usually with the verbs (in ger.) paṭisuṇitvā, vatvā, sampaṭicchitvā etc Thus e.g. at Ja v.297; Vin i.56; Mil 7; Dhp-a iii.13; Vv-a 149; DN-a i.171; Snp-a 176 (= sampahaṃsane); Pv-a 55, Pv-a 78 and passim.

-kamyatā desire for proficiency Vb-a 477. -kāra saying “well,” approval, cheering, applause Ja i.223; Mil 13, Mil 16, Mil 18; Vv-a 132; Dhp-a i.390; Dhp-a iii.385. -kīḷana a festive play, a sacred festivity Mvu 3, Mvu 11; sādhukīḷita the same Mvu 20, Mvu 36; ˚-divasa Vin iii.285; sādhu-kīḷā Ja iii.434; Ja v.127; sādhu-kīḷikā Ja iii.433. -jīvin leading a virtuous life Iti 71. -phala having wholesome fruits Ja i.272 (read sādu˚). -rūpa good, respectable Dhp 262 -sammata highly honoured DN i.48; SN iv.398; Snp p.90 sq.; Mil 4, Mil 21; DN-a i.143. -sīliya good character Ja ii.137.

Vedic sādhu, fr. sādh

Sādhukaṃ

(adv.) well, thoroughly Vin i.46; Vin ii.208; DN i.62 ■ instr. sādhukena (as adv.) willingly (opp. with force) Pv ii.92.

fr. sādhu

Sādheti

1. to accomplish, further, effect Ja ii.236 (Pot. sādhayemase).

2. to make prosperous Pv-a 113, Pv-a 125

3. to arrange, prepare Mvu 7, Mvu 24.

4. to perform execute Ja i.38 (ārāmika-kiccaṃ); DN-a i.194; Mvu 36, Mvu 62 Vism 344 (see udukkhala).

5. to make clear, bring to a (logical) conclusion, to prove Ja ii.306; Snp-a 192 (atthaṃ), 459; Tikp 58; Pv-a 30 (here as much as “is any good”).

6. to collect or clear a debt, to recover (money). In this sense sādheti is mixed up with sodheti, which is regularly found as v.l., is it almost better to substitute sodheti at all passages for sādheti (cp. iṇa, uddhāra), e.g. Ja i.230; Ja ii.341, Ja ii.423; Ja iii.106 Ja iv.45; Dhp-a iii.12 ■ Cp. abhi˚.

Caus. of sādh to succeed. Dhtp 421 = saṃsiddhiyan

Sānu

(m. and nt.) ridge Vv 3210; Ja iii.172. The commentary on the former passage (Vv-a 136) translates vana wood, that on the latter paṃsupabbata sānupabbata a forest-hill Ja iv.277; Ja vi.415, Ja vi.540; pabbatasānu-˚ Ja iii.175; girisānu-˚ Ja iii.301; Ja iv.195.

Vedic sānu

Sānucara

(adj.) together with followers Dhp 294; Ja vi.172.

sa3 + anucara

Sānuvajja

(adj.) blameable AN ii.3.

sa + anuvajja

Sānuseti

to fill (the mind) completely AN ii.10.

sa (= saṃ) + anuseti

Sāpa

a curse Vv-a 336; Dhp-a i.41.

fr. sap, cp. Sk. śāpa

Sāpateyya

(nt.) property, wealth DN i.142 DN ii.180; DN iii.190; Vin i.72, Vin i.274; Vin iii.66; Ja i.439, Ja i.466 Thig 340; Thag-a 240; Ja v.117 (sāpateya, var. read sāpatiyya); Dhp-a i.67.

sā (= guṇa of sva) + pateyya (abstr. fr. pati lord), cp. ādhi-pateyya

Sāpattika

(adj.) one who has committed a sin (see āpatti) Vin i.125; Vin ii.240; Nd i.102.

sa3 + āpatti + ka

Sāpada

(nt.) a beast of prey Ja ii.126; Ja vi.79.

cp. Sk. śvāpada

Sāpadesa

(adj.) with reasons DN i.4; AN ii.22; MN i.180; MN iii.34, MN iii.49; Pp 58; DN-a i.76. Opp. anapadesa MN i.287.

sa + apadesa

Sāpānadoṇī

M ii.183 = 152 (C. = sunakhānaṃ pivanadoṇi a dog’s trough).

Sāpekha

longing for DN ii.77; DN iii.43.

sa + apekhā

Sāma1

); DN i.193; MN i.246 (different from kāḷa); Ja vi.187 (˚aṃ mukhaṃ dark, i.e. on account of bad spirits); Vism 422 (opp. to odāta in colour of skin).

2. yellow, of a golden colour, beautiful Ja ii.44 Ja ii.45 (migī); v.215 (suvaṇṇa-sāmā), 366 (suvaṇṇa-vaṇṇa)-f. sāmā, q.v ■ See sabala.

cp. Vedic śyāma black & śyāva brown; Av. syāva; Ags. hāēven blue (= E. heaven); Gr. σκοιός, σκιά (shadow) = Sk. chāyā; Goth. skeinan = shine, etc. 1. black, dark (something like deep brown) Vin iv.120 (kāḷasāma dark blue [?

Sāma2

(nt.) song, sacred song, devotion, worship, propitiation DN ii.288.

perhaps = Vedic sāman

Sāmaṃ

self, of oneself Vin i.16, Vin i.33, Vin i.211 (s. pāka) iv.121; DN i.165; MN i.383; MN ii.211; MN iii.253 (sāmaṃ kantaṃ sāmaṃ vāyitaṃ dussayugaṃ); SN ii.40; SN iv.230 sq.v.390; Snp 270 (asāma-pāka not cooking for oneself), 889; Ja i.150; sāmaññeva, i.e. sāmaṃ yeva Snp p.101.

on etymology, see Andersen Pāli Gloss., p. 268 (contracted from sayamaṃ, Trenckner), cp. Michelson Indog. Forsch., vol. xxiii, p. 235, n. 3 (= avest., hāmō slav., samz)

Sāmaggiya

(nt.) completeness, concord Snp 810; sāmaggiya-rasa Ja iii.21 (“the sweets of concord”); adj. asāmaggiya, unpleasant Ja vi.517 (C. on asammodiya).

fr. samagga

Sāmaggī

(f.) completeness, a quorum Vin i.105, Vin i.106; meeting, communion Vin i.132 sq. Vin ii.243; unanimity, concord Vin i.97, Vin i.136, Vin i.357; Vin ii.204; DN iii.245 sq.; AN iii.289; Nd i.131; Ja i.328; Iti 12.

abstr. fr. samagga

Sāmacca

(adj.) together with the ministers DN i.110.

sa2 + amacca

Sāmañña1

(nt.) generality; equality, conformity; unity, company Mil 163; Snp-a 449 (jāti identity of descent), 449 (generality, contrasted to visesa detail), 548 (id.); Vv-a 233 (diṭṭhi˚, sīla˚, equality) ˚-gata united DN ii.80; ˚-nāma a name given by general assent Dhs-a 390.

abstr. fr. samāna

Sāmañña2

(nt.) Samaṇaship DN i.51 sq.; DN iii.72, DN iii.245; MN i.281 sq.; SN v.25; AN ii.27 = Iti 103; Dhp 19 sq., 311; DN-a i.158; Vism 132; adj., in accordance with true Samaṇaship, striving to be a samaṇa Mil 18 Samaṇaship AN i.142 sq.; Pv ii.718 (expld at Pv-a 104 as “honouring the samaṇas”).

-attha the aim of Samaṇaship DN i.230; AN iv.366; MN i.271; SN ii.15; SN iii.93; Ja i.482; -phala advantage resulting from Samaṇaship, fruit of the life of the recluse DN i.51 sq.; Vism 215, Vism 512; Vv-a 71; Vb-a 317 more especially the fruition of the four stages of the Path, sotāpatti-, sakadāgāmi-, anāgāmi-, and arahattaphala SN v.25; DN iii.227, DN iii.277; Dhs 1016; Dhs-a 423; Mil 344, Mil 358; DN-a i.158; three samaññaphalas Kv 112.

abstr. fr. samaṇa

Sāmaññatā1

= sāmañña 1 (identity, congruity etc.) Ja vi.371 (vaṇṇa˚); Vism 234 (maraṇa˚).

Sāmaññatā2

= sāmañña 2 DN iii.145, DN iii.169; Dhp 332; Dhp-a iii.484; Dhp-a iv.33.

Sāmaṇaka

(adj.) worthy of or needful for a Samaṇa Mvu 4, Mvu 26; Mvu 30, Mvu 37; assāmaṇaka unworthy of a Samaṇa Vin i.45.

fr. samaṇa

Sāmaṇera

fem. ˚-rī a novice Vin i.62 sq.; Vin iv.121; SN ii.261; Mil 2 Vb-a 383; are not present at the recital of the Pātimokkha Vin i.135; ˚pabbajjā ordination of a novice Vin i.82. ˚pēsaka superintendent of Sāmaṇeras Vin ii.177; AN iii.275 ■ f., also -˚ā AN iii.276; as -˚ī at Vin i.141.

fr. samaṇa; cp. BSk. śrāmaṇeraka Divy 342

Sāmattha

(adj.) able Ja ii.29.

= samattha

Sāmatthiya

(nt.) ability Mvu 37, Mvu 243

abstr. fr. samattha

Sāmanta

(adj.) neighbouring, bordering DN i.101; Vin i.46 (āpatti˚ bordering on a transgression) Ja ii.21; Ja iv.124; connected with MN i.95; ˚jappā (or ˚jappana ) roundabout talk Vb 353; Vism 28; Nd i.226 Vb-a 484. abl. sāmantā in the neighbourhood of Vin iii.36; DN ii.339; loc. sāmante the same Ja iv.152 (Kapila-vatthu-˚).

fr. samanta

Sāmayika

(adj.) temporary Snp 54; Mil 302 (so read); see sāmāyika.

fr. samaya

Sāmalatā

(f.) the creeper Ichnocarpus Ja i.60.

sāma1 + latā; Sk. śyāmalatā

Sāmā

(f) a medicinal plant Ja iv.92 (bhisasāmā, C. bhisāni ca sāmākā ca); the Priyangu creeper Ja i.500; Ja v.405.

Sk. śyāmā Halāyudha 2, 38; see sāma1, sāmalatā, and sāmāka

Sāmāka

a kind of millet (Panicum frumentaceum) DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.156, MN i.343; AN i.295 AN ii.206; Snp 239; Pp 55; Ja iii.144, Ja iii.371; Ne 141; Dhp-a v.81.

cp. Vedic śyāmāka

Sāmājika

a member of an assembly Dāvs iii.27.

fr. Sk. samāja: see samajja

Sāmādhika

(adj.) consisting in concentration SN i.120.

fr. samādhi

Sāmāmigī

(f.) a black hind Ja ii.44.

Sāmāyika

(adj.) 1. on a friendly footing, in agreement MN iii.110; Mil 22.

2. occurring in due season, timely Mil 302 sq., 305.

3. temporary AN iii.349 sq.; cp. sāmayika.

fr. samaya

Sāmi

Ja v.489, read sāvi.

Sāmika

1. owner MN i.27; Ja i.194; Vism 63. - 2. husband Vin iii.137; Ja i.307; Ja ii.128; AN ii.58 sq. Pv ii.37.

fr. sāmin

Sāmin

1. owner, ruler, lord, master Vin i.303, Vin i.307; Snp 83; Mvu 37, Mvu 241; Ja v.253 (˚paribhoga, q.v.); Pv iv.66; Vism 63; DN-a i.261; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 65. voc. sāmi “Sir” Ja vi.300; Dhp-a i.20 f. sāminī Ja v.297; Vv-a 225. See also suvāmin ■ assāmin not ruling Mil 253; Pv iv.66.

2. husband Pv-a 31 (sāmi, voc. = “my lord”), 82 ■ f. sāminī wife Mvu 5, Mvu 43; Pv-a 82, Pv-a 276.

-vacana (sāmi˚) the genitive case Ja i.185; Ja iii.98 (upayog’atthe); v.42 (karaṇ’atthe), 444; Vv-a 304; Snp-a 210 (for upayoga), 310 (id.).

cp. Sk. svāmin, fr. sva = sa4

Sāmiya

husband Ja i.352; see sāmika.

Sāmisa

(adj.) 1. holding food Vin ii.214 = Vin iv.198.

2. fleshly, carnal DN ii.298 = MN i.59; AN i.81; Pts ii.41. Opp. to nirāmisa spiritual (e.g. Pts i.59). Samici & samici;

sa + āmisa

Sāmīcī & sāmīci˚

(f.) right, proper course Vin iii.246; DN ii.104; AN ii.56, AN ii.65; SN v.261, SN v.343; Mil 8; Dhp-a i.57.

-kamma proper act, homage Vin ii.22, Vin ii.162, Vin ii.255; AN i.123; AN ii.180; DN iii.83; Ja i.218, Ja i.219; Mil 8. -paṭipadā right course of life MN i.281; AN ii.65. -paṭipanna correct in life DN ii.104; SN i.220; AN ii.56; AN iv.310.

fr. sammā2 = Vedic samyac, of which pl. nom. f. samīcīḥ freq. in R. V.

Sāmukkaṃsika

(adj.) exalting, praising (i.e. the 4 truths), as much as “standard. Kern, Toev. ii.64, takes it to mean “condensed, given in brief.” Usually in phrase ˚ikā dhammadesanā (thus as f. of ˚aka !) e.g. Vin i.16, Vin i.18; Vin ii.156; DN i.110; MN i.380; AN iv.186; AN v.194; DN-a i.277 (expld); Thag-a 137; Pv-a 38 Pv-a 195; Vv-a 50. Only once with ñāṇa at Dhs-a 9.

fr. samukkaṃsati, cp. ukkaṃsaka. The BSk. is sāmutkarṣikī dharmadeśanā Divy 617

Sāmudda

(nt.) sea salt Vin i.202; Abhp 461.

fr. samudda

Sāmuddika

(adj.) seafaring DN i.222; SN iii.155; AN iii.368 (vāṇijā); iv.127 (nāvā); Vism 63; Dhs-a 320 At Ja vi.581 s ■ mahāsankha denotes a kind of trumpet.

fr. samudda

Sāmeti

see sammati1.

Sāya

evening, only adverbially sāyaṃ, at night Vin iii.147; Ja ii.83; Dhp-a i.234; usually opposed to pāto (pātaṃ) in the morning early e.g. sāya-pātaṃ DN ii.188; Mil 419; Ja i.432, Ja i.460 Ja v.462; sāyaṃ-pātaṃ Vin ii.185; Dhp-a ii.66; sāyañ ca pāto ca Pv i.63; ii.937; Pv-a 127; sāya-tatiyaka for the third time in the evening DN i.167; AN ii.206; AN v.263, AN v.266 AN v.268; MN i.343; sāyamāsa supper Ja i.297; Ja v.461; Dhp-a i.204. sāyaṃ as quâsi-nominative: sāyaṃ ahosi Ja vi.505 atisāyaṃ too late Thag 231; Ja ii.362; Ja v.94; sāyataraṃ later in the evening (compar.) Ja vi.366.

cp. Sk. sāyaṃ, on which Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 380, remarks: “this word seems to be the gerund of , and to have signified originally ʻhaving finished.ʼ A masc sāya does not exist.” Cp. Vedic ˚sāya

Sāyaṇha

evening DN ii.9; Ja i.144; -˚samayaṃ at evening time DN ii.205; MN i.147; Vin i.21; sāyaṇhasamaye Ja i.148, Ja i.279; Pv-a 33, Pv-a 43 Pv-a 100; ˚-kāle the same Ja iv.120; sāyaṇhe (loc.) Ja i.144 Ja i.237; atisāyaṇha late evening Ja vi.540.

sāyaṃ + aṇha, cp. Sk. sāyāhna

Sāyati

to taste, eat; pres. sāyati Vin ii.121; ppr. sāyanto DN iii.85; grd sāyanīya savoury Vin i.44; SN i.162; ger. sāyitvā SN iv.176; AN iii.163. Cp. saṃsāyati.

svad, Sk. svādate, cp. sādiyati

Sāyana1

(nt.) tasting, taste Dhtp 229.

fr. sāyati

Sāyana2

the Nāga tree (cp. nāga 3) Ja vi.535 (vāraṇā sā yanā = nāgarukkhā, C., ibid. 535, var. read. vāyana) Kern, Toev. ii.77 conjectures sāsanā “with Asana’s Terminalia’s.”

Sāyika

(adj.) lying, sleeping, resting in (-˚) Dhp 141; MN i.328 (vatthu˚); Thag 501 = Mil 367.

fr. śī

Sāyita

(having) tasted, tasting DN i.70; DN ii.95, DN ii.292; MN i.188, MN i.461; Mil 378; Vism 258 (khāyita + ).

pp. of sāyati, cp. sāditar

Sāyin

(adj.) lying Dhp 325.

fr. śī

Sāra

1. essential, most excellent, strong AN ii.110; Vin iv.214; Ja iii.368; Pp 53.

2. (m.) the innermost, hardest part of anything, the heart or pith of a tree (see also pheggu) MN i.111; Ja i.331; Mil 413; most excellent kind of wood Vin ii.110; DN ii.182 DN ii.187; sattasārā the elect, the salt of the earth MN iii.69. 3. substance, essence, choicest part (generally at the end of comp.) Vin i.184; AN ii.141; SN iii.83, SN iii.140; Snp 5 Snp 330, Snp 364; Dhp 11 sq.; Pv-a 132, Pv-a 211 (candana˚). sāre patiṭṭhito established, based, on what is essential MN i.31; AN ii.183.

4. value Mil 10; appasāra of small value DN ii.346asāra worthless Snp 937; nissāra the same Ja ii.163 (pithless); mahāsāra of high value Ja i.384 Ja i.463.

-ādāyin acquiring what is essential SN iv.250. -gandha the odour of the heart of a tree Dhs 625. -gabbha a treasury Ja iii.408; Ja v.331. -gavesin searching for hard wood MN i.111, MN i.233; sārapariyesana the same ibid -dāru strong, durable wood Ja ii.68. -bhaṇḍa(ka) a bundle of one’s best things Ja ii.225. -bhūmi good soil Ja ii.188. -mañjūsā a box made of choice wood Ja iv.335 -maya being of hard or solid wood Ja iii.318 (C. sārarukkhamaya “of sāra wood” trsln). -suvaṇṇa sterling gold Snp-a 448 (in expln of name Bimbisāra). -sūci a needle made of hard wood Ja i.9.

Vedic sāra nt.

Sāraka1

(-˚) (adj.) having as most essential Mil 133; a-sāraka rotten (said of wood) Ja ii.163.

fr. sāra

Sāraka2

a messenger.

fr. sarati1

Sāraka3

in the comp. kaṭa-sāraka a mat Ja iv.248 (v.l.); iv.474; v.97 (cp. osāraka). Sarakkhati = samrakkhati

Sārakkhati = saṃrakkhati

Thag 729.

Sārakkhā

(f.) “standing under protection” (?), a category of married women Vin iii.139 (cp MN i.287).

fr. sa3 + rakkha

Sārajja

(nt.) timidity AN iii.127, AN iii.203; AN iv.359, AN iv.364; Mil 24, Mil 72, Mil 196 (parisa˚, cp Nd ii.470); Ja i.334; Ja ii.66; nissārajja undaunted Ja i.274.

abstr. fr. sārada = *sāradya

Sārajjati

to be pleased with, to be attached to AN i.260; SN ii.172; SN iii.69 sq.; SN iv.10 sq.

saṃ + raj, cp. BSk. sārajyati, Sk. saṃrajyate, cp. sārāga

Sārajjanā

(f.) infatuation, feeling infatuated Dhs 389; Ja v.446.

fr. sārajjati

Sārajjāyati

to be embarrassed, perplexed, ashamed SN iii.92; AN iv.359.

Denom. of sārajja

Sārajjitatta

(nt.) infatuation, the state of being infatuated Dhs 389.

= sārajjanā

Sāraṇā

(f.) reminding, remonstrating with Vin v.158, Vin v.164.

fr. sāreti2

Sāratta

impassioned, enamoured, passionately devoted Vin iii.118; MN ii.160 MN ii.223; SN i.74, SN i.77; Dhp 345; Ja i.288; Ja ii.140; Mvu 10, Mvu 34 (˚mānaso). asāratta unattached Snp 704.

= saṃratta, pp. of sārajjati

Sārathi

charioteer, coachman DN ii.178, DN ii.254; SN i.33; SN v.6; AN ii.112; AN iv.190 sq.; Snp 83; Ja i.59, Ja i.180; Pv iv.33. assadammasārathi a coachman by whom horses are driven, a trainer of horses MN i.124; SN iv.176; purisadammasārathi a coachman of the driving animal called man, a man-trainer Vin i.35; DN i.49; Snp p.103; Iti 79 ■ In similes: Vism 466 Kp-a 21.

fr. sa-ratha; Vedic sārathi

Sārada

(adj.) autumnal, of the latest harvest, this year’s, fresh AN iii.404 = DN iii.354 (bījāni fresh seeds); AN i.135, AN i.181 (badara-paṇḍu) SN iii.54; SN v.380; Mil 255; Dhp 149 (but at this passage expld as “scattered by the autumn winds” Dhp-a iii.112)- asārada stale, old DN ii.353; SN v.379. Fig. sārada unripe not experienced, immature (see sārajja shyness) opp. visārada (der. vesārajja) experienced, wise, selfconfident; vīta-sārada id. (e.g. AN ii.24; Iti 123) ■ Note: At K.S. iii.46 (= SN iii.54) s. is wrongly taken as sāra + da i.e. “giving sāra”; but seeds do not give sāra: they contain sāra (cp. sāravant). The C expln as sār-ādāyin is nearer the truth, but of course not literal; ˚da is not ā + ˚da, Moreover, the fig. meaning cannot be reconciled with this expln.

Vedic śārada, fr. śarad autumn (of Babyl. origin? cp. Assyr. šabātu corn month)

Sāradika

(adj.) autumnal Vin i.199; Vin ii.41; Dhp 285 = Ja i.183; Vv 6417; Dhp-a iii.428.

fr. sārada

Sāraddha

violent, angry AN i.148, AN i.282; SN iv.125; MN i.21; Vism 134 (opp. passaddha-kāya), 282 (˚kāya); Vb-a 283 (id.).

= saṃraddha

Sārana

going Dhs-a 133.

fr. sarati1

Sārameya

a dog (lit. “son of Saramā”) Mhbv 111.

Vedic sārameya

Sārambha1

1. impetuosity, anger AN i.100, AN i.299; AN ii.193; MN i.16; Dhp 133; Ja iv.26; Mil 289 (sasaṃrambha).

2. quarrel Snp 483; Ja ii.223; Ja v.141. 3. pride Thag 759; Vv-a 139.

-kathā angry or haughty talk, imperiousness Dhp 133; MN i.16; Dhp-a iii.57.

= saṃrambha

Sārambha2

involving killing or danger to living creatures Vin iii.149; AN ii.42 sq. Cp. samārambha.

sa + ārambha

Sārambhin

(adj.) impetuous Ja iii.259.

fr. sārambha

Sāravant

(adj.) valuable, having kernel or pith (said of grain or trees) AN iv.170 (synom. daḷha, opp palāpa); SN v.163; MN i.111 = MN i.233.

fr. sāra

Sārasa

a water bird, Ardea sibirica Vv-a 57, Vv-a 163; at both pass. = koñca.

cp. Epic Sk. sārasa

Sārāga

affection, infatuation Vin ii.258; MN i.17, MN i.498; AN i.264; SN iii.69 sq., 93; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1230; cp. saṃrāga ■ Neg. ; Dhs 32, Dhs 312, Dhs 315.

= saṃrāga, fr. saṃ + raj

Sārāgin

(adj.) attached to MN i.239 (sukha-˚); sukha-sārāgita ibid. impassioned.

fr. last

Sārāṇīya

(adj.) courteous polite, friendly (making happy, pleasing, gladdening?) only in combn with kathā, dhamma, or dhammakathā e.g. s. kathā polite speech, either in phrase sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sārāṇīyaṃ vītisāreti to exchange greetings of friendliness & courtesy DN i.52; MN i.16 (expldinter alia as “anussariyamānasukhato s.” at MA 110) AN i.55, AN i.281; AN ii.42; cp. BSk. sammodanīṃ saṃrañjanīṃ vividhāṃ k. vyatisārya Avs i.229sārāṇīyaṃ kathaṃ katheti Dhp-a i.107; Dhp-a iv.87; sārāṇīyā dhammā states of conciliation, fraternal living (Dial. iii.231) DN iii.245; MN i.322; MN ii.250; AN iii.288; AN v.89; Dhs-a 294; Ja v.382 cp. BSk. saṃrañjanīyan dharmaṃ samādāya Divy 404- sārāṇīyaṃ dhammakathaṃ suṇāti Dhp-a iv.168.

the question of derivation is still unsettled. According to Trenckner (Notes 75) fr. saraṇa (i.e. saraṇa1 or sarana2?) with double vṛddhi. Kern (Toev. ii.74) considers the (B) Sk. saṃrañjanīya as the original and derives it fr. saṃ + raj to rejoice, to gladden: see rañjati. The BSk. is divided: Mvu iii.47, Mvu iii.60, Mvu iii.206 etc. has sārāyaṇiya, whereas Avs i.229 & Divy 404 read; saṃrañjanī and saṃrañjanīya (see below) ■ The C. at Ja iv.99 derives it fr. saraṇa3 in explaining sārāṇīyā kathā as “sāritabba-yuttakā kathā”

Sāri

chessman DN-a i.85.

cp. *Sk. śāri

Sārin

(adj.) wandering, going after, following, conforming to (loc.) Ja v.15; aniketasārin wandering about houseless Snp 844, Snp 970; anokasārin wandering homeless Dhp 404; Snp 628; diṭṭhisārin a partisan of certain views Snp 911; vaggasārin conforming to a party a partisan Snp 371, Snp 800, Snp 912.

fr. sāreti

Sārīrika

(adj.) connected with the body, bodily MN i.10; AN i.168 sq.; AN ii.153; (nt.) bodily relics Mil 341 ˚ṃ cetiyaṃ one of the 3 kinds: paribhogika, s., uddesika Ja iv.228.

fr. sarīra

Sāruppa

(nt.) equal state; as adj. fit, suitable, proper Vin i.39, Vin i.287; DN ii.277; SN iv.21 sq.; Ja i.65, Ja i.362; Dhs-a 294; Snp 368 p. 79, 97, 104; Ja iv.404. (a˚) (nt.) Vism 24; Pv-a 269 paribbājaka-s˚, as befits a Wanderer Ja v.228.

abstr. fr. sarūpa, BSk. sārūpya & sāropya

Sāreti

is Caus. of sarati1 as well as sarati2. Cp. vīti˚.

Sāropin

(adj.) healing, curative MN ii.257 (vaṇa-˚).

saṃ + ropin, cp. ropeti1 & rūhati;1

Sāla

a Sal tree (Shorea robusta) MN i.488; DN ii.134; AN i.202; AN iii.49, AN iii.214; Dhp 162.

-māḷaka an enclosure of Sal trees Ja i.316. -rukkha Sal tree Vv-a 176. -laṭṭhi Sal sprout AN ii.200. -vana Sal grove DN ii.134; MN i.124; SN i.157; Vv 392.

cp. Sk. śāla & sāla

Sālaka

a brother-in-law Ja ii.268.

Sk. syāla + ka

Sālakakimi

a kind of worm Mil 312.

Sālaya

(adj.) having intentions (on), being attached (to = loc.) Ja iii.332.

sa3 + ālaya

Sālā

(f.) a large (covered & enclosed) hall large room, house; shed, stable etc., as seen fr. foll examples: aggi˚; a hall with a fire Vin i.25, Vin i.49 = Vin ii.210 āsana˚; hall with seats Dhp-a ii.65; udapāna˚; a shed over the well Vin i.139; Vin ii.122; upaṭṭhāna˚ a service hall Vin i.49, Vin i.139; Vin ii.153, Vin ii.208, Vin ii.210; SN ii.280; SN v.321; Ja i.160 kaṭhina˚; a hall for the kaṭhina Vin ii.117. kīḷa˚; playhouse Ja vi.332; kutūhala˚; a common room DN i.179; SN iv.398. kumbhakāra˚; potter’s hall Dhp-a i.39; gilāna˚ sick room, hospital SN iv.210; Vism 259; jantāghāra˚ (large) bath room Vin i.140; Vin ii.122; dāna˚; a hall for donations Ja i.262; dvāra˚; hall with doors MN i.382 MN ii.66; pāniya˚; a water-room Vin ii.153; bhatta˚; refectory Vism 72; yañña˚; hall of sacrifice PugA 233; rajana˚ dyeing workshop Vism 65; ratha˚; car shed Dhp-a iii.121; hatthi˚; an elephant stable Vin i.277, Vin i.345 Vin ii.194; Ja i.187.

cv. Vedic śālā, cp. Gr. καλία hut, Lat. cella cell, Ohg. halla, E. hall

Sālākiya

(nt.) ophthalmology DN i.12, DN i.69; DN-a i.98.

cp. Sk. śālākya in Suśruta

Sāli

rice DN i.105, DN i.230; DN ii.293; Vin iv.264; MN i.57; AN i.32, AN i.145; AN iii.49; AN iv.108 (+ yavaka), 231; SN v.10, SN v.48; Ja i.66, Ja i.178; Ja iv.276; Ja v.37; Ja vi.531; Mil 251; Snp 240 sq.; Vism 418; pl. ˚-iyo Ja i.325; gen. pl. ˚-inaṃ Ja vi.510lohitaka˚; red rice Mil 252.

-khetta a rice-field AN i.241; AN iv.278; Vin ii.256; Dhp-a i.97; Dhp-a iii.6. -gabbha ripening (young) rice Dhp-a i.97. -bīja rice seed AN i.32; AN v.213. -bhatta a meal of rice Vism 191. -bhojana rice food Ja i.178.

cp. Sk. śāli

Sālika

(adj.) belonging to rice Dhp-a iii.33.

fr. sāli

Sālikā

(f.) a kind of bird SN i.190 = Thag 1232; Ja v.110. See sāliya & sāḷikā.

cp. Epic Sk. sārikā crow, usually combd with śuka parrot

Sālittaka

(nt.) a sling, catapult (?); slinging stones, throwing potsherds etc. Pv iv.167 Pv-a 285; Ja i.418, Ja i.420; Dhp-a ii.69.

fr. Sk. saṃlepa?

Sālin

excellent Dāvs i.9.

Sāliya

or sāliyā the maina bird (= sālikā) Ja iii.203; sāliyachāpa (a young bird of that kind), and sāliyacchāpa (i.e. sāliyā which is probably the right form) Ja iii.202. madhu-sāliyā Ja v.8 (= suvaṇṇa-sālika-sakunā C. p. 911) Ja vi.199 (suva-sāliya-˚), 425 (Sāliya-vacana the story of the maina bird, var. read. suva-khaṇḍa; a section of the 546th Jātaka, but sāḷiyā, sālikā, sāliyā is not a paṛrot.

Sālīna

(adj.) fine (rice) Mil 16 (˚ṃ odanaṃ; cp. śālīnaṃ odanaṃ Divy 559).

fr. sāli

Sāluka

(& ˚ūka) (nt.) the edible root of the water-lily Vin i.246; Ja vi.563; Vv-a 142 (˚muṭṭhi).

cp. Sk. śālūka

Sālūra

a dog Ja iv.438 (˚-saṃgha = sunakhagaṇa, C.; spelling ḷ).

but cp. Sk. śālūra a frog

Sāloka

sight, view, sāloke tiṭṭhati to expose oneself to view in an open door Vin ii.267.

sa2 + āloka

Sālohita

a kinsman, a blood relation, usually together with ñāti Vin i.4; DN ii.26, DN ii.345; AN i.139 AN i.222; AN ii.115; Snp p.91; Pv-a 28; Vb-a 108.

fr. sa2 + lohita

Sāḷava

a certain dish, perhaps a kind of salad, given as “lambila,” i.e. bitter or astringent at Dhs-a 320 (made of badara or kapiṭṭha ); cp Vin iv.259.

cp. Sk. ṣāḍava, which is given in diff. meaning, viz. “comfits with fruits”

Sāḷika

a bird; f. ˚ā the Maina bird Ja i.429; Ja vi.421. Spelt sāḷiyā at Ja vi.425. See sālikā & sāliya;.

Sāva

juice Vv-a 186.

fr. sru

Sāvaka

a hearer, disciple (never an Arahant) DN i.164; DN ii.104; DN iii.47, DN iii.52, DN iii.120 sq., 133; AN i.88; MN i.234; SN ii.26; Iti 75 sq., 79; Ja i.229; Vism 214, Vism 411 ■ fem sāvikā DN ii.105; DN iii.123; Thig 335; SN iv.379; AN i.25 AN i.88. (Cp. ariya-˚, agga-˚, mahā ).

-saṅgha the congregation of the eight Aryas MN ii.120; SN i.220 (cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā) ii.79 sq.; Iti 88.

fr. śru

Sāvakatta

(nt.) the state of a disciple MN i.379 sq.

abstr. fr. last

Sāvajja

(adj.) blameable, faulty DN i.163; DN ii.215; MN i.119; SN v.66, SN v.104 sq.; Snp 534; Pp 30, Pp 41 (nt.) what is censurable, sin Ja i.130; Mil 392; Vb-a 382 (mahā˚ or appa˚, with ref. to var. crimes).

sa + avajja

Sāvajjatā

(f.) guilt Mil 293.

fr. last

Sāvaṭa

(nt.) name of a certain throw in playing at dice Ja vi.281 (v.l. sāvaṭṭa).

Sāvaṭṭa

(adj.) containing whirlpools Iti 114.

sa3 + āvaṭṭa

Sāvana

(nt.) shouting out, announcement, sound, word Ja ii.352; Sdhp 67.

fr. sāveti

Sāvasesa

(adj.) with a remainder, incomplete, of an offence which can be done away Vin i.354 Vin ii.88; Vin v.153; AN i.88 ■ Of a text (pāṭha) Kp-a 238; Snp-a 96.

sa3 + avasesa

Sāvi

a porcupine Ja v.489 (MSS. sāmi and sāsi, cp. Manu v.18).

Sk. śvāvidh, see Lüder’s Z.D.M.G. 61, 643

Sāvittī

(f.) the Vedic verse Sāvitrī Snp 457, Snp 568 = Vin i.246 (Sāvitthī); Ja iv.184.

Sāvetar

one who makes others hear, who tells DN i.56; AN iv.196.

n. ag. fr. sāveti

Sāveti

is Caus. of suṇāti.

Sāsa

asthma AN v.110; Ja vi.295.

Sk. śvāsa, fr. śvas

Sāsaṅka

(adj.) dangerous, fearful, suspicious SN iv.175 (opp. khema); Thig 343; Thag-a 241 Vism 107; Ja i.154; Pv-a 13; Mil 351.

fr. sa3 + āsankā

Sāsati

to instruct, teach, command; tell Ja vi.472 (dūtāni, = pesesi C.); inf săsituṃ Ja vi.291 (= anusāsituṃ C.).

śās, Dhtp 300 = anusiṭṭhi

Sāsana

(nt.) order, message, teaching Ja i.60, Ja i.328; Ja ii.21; Pv iv.354 (Buddhānaṃ); Kp-a 11 sq. the doctrine of the Buddha Vin i.12; DN i.110; DN ii.206; AN i.294; Dhp 381; Snp 482 etc.; Ja i.116. sāsanaṃ āroceti to give a message (dūtassa to the messenger) Vin iii.76.

-antaradhāna the disappearance or decline of the teaching of the Buddha. Said of the doctrine of Kassapa Bhagavā Snp-a 156 (cp. sāsane parihāyamāne Snp-a 223), and with ref. to the Pāli Tipiṭaka Vb-a 432 sq., where 3 periods of the development of the Buddhist doctrine are discussed, viz. sāsana-ṭhita-kāla ˚osakkana-kāla, ˚antaradhāna. -kara complying with one’s order and teaching MN i.129; -kāraka the same Snp 445; -kārin the same AN ii.26; susāsanaṃ dussānaṃ Ja i.239 (English transl.: “true and false doctrine, “good and bad news”). -hara (+ ˚jotaka) taking up (& explaining) an order Snp-a 164.;

cp. Vedic śāsana

Sāsapa

a mustard seed SN ii.137; SN v.464; AN v.170; Ja vi.174 (comp. with mt. Meru); Snp 625, Snp 631 p. 122; Dhp 401; DN-a i.93; Dhp-a i.107; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iv.166 Vism 306 (ār’agge), 633; Pv-a 198 (˚tela). -˚kuṭṭa mustard powder Vin i.205; Vin ii.151.

cp. Sk. sarṣapa

Sāsava

(adj.) connected with the āsavas DN iii.112; AN i.81; Dhs 990, Dhs 1103; Ne 80.

sa3 = āsava

Sāha

six days (cp. chāha) Ja vi.80 (= chadivasa, C.).

Sāhatthika

(adj.) with one’s own hand Ja i.168; Dhs-a 97; Snp-a 493; Kp-a 29.

fr. sahattha

Sāhaṃ

contraction of so ahaṃ.

Sāhasa

violent, hasty Snp 329; (nt.) violence, arbitrary action, acts of violence Snp 943; Ja vi.284; Mvu 6, Mvu 39; sāhasena arbitrarily AN v.177 opp. ; ibid.; Dhp 257; Ja vi.280. sāhasaṃ id. Ja vi.358 (= sāhasena sāhasikaṃ kammaṃ katvā ibid. 359); adv asāhasaṃ = asāhasena Ja iii.319 (C. sāhasiyataṇhāya ibid. 320, if we do not have to read sāhasiyā taṇhāya from sāhasī).

-kiriyā violence Ja iii.321.

fr. sahas power

Sāhasika

(adj.) brutal, violent, savage Ja i.187, Ja i.504; Ja ii.11; Pv-a 209; Dhp-a i.17.

fr. sāhasa

Sāhasiyakamma

(nt.) a brutal act Ja i.412, Ja i.438.

Sāhāra

(adj.) with its food SN iii.54 (viññāṇa s.); DN ii.96 (Vesālī s.; trsln “with its subject territory”).

sa + āhāra

Sāhin

(-˚) (adj.) enduring Iti 32. See asayha˚.

fr. sah

Sāhu

(adj.) good, well Vin i.45; SN i.8; Pp 71 sq.; Thag 43; Vv-a 284.

= sādhu

Sāhuḷacīvara

(nt.) a coarse cloth MN i.509 (cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.52; Karpūramañjarī p. 19; J.P.T.S. 1891, 5 and Prākrit sāhulī, Z.D.M.G., xxviii., p. 415).

Sāhuneyyaka

see āhuneyya.

Sāhunna

a strip of ragged cloth Pv iii.16; Pv-a 173; J.P.T.S. 1891, 5; var. read. sāhunda.

= sāhuḷa

Si

(-˚) part. of interrogation; e.g. kaṃ-si Dhp-a i.91.

= svid, for which ordinarily ˚su

Siṃsaka

(nt.) name of a water plant Ja vi.536 (C. not correct).

Sk. śīrṣaka?

Siṃsati1 [śaṃs]

to hope for Dhtp 296 (def. as “icchā”); only in cpd. ā˚; (q.v.).

Siṃsati2

is Desiderative of sarati1 ■ Siṃsati “to neigh” at Ja v.304 is to be read hiṃsati (for hesati, q.v.).

Siṃsapā

(f.) the tree Dalbergia sisu (a strong & large tree) S; v.437; Siṃsapā-groves (s ■ vanā are mentioned near Āḷavi AN i.136; near Setavyā DN ii.316 sq.; Dhp-a i.71; Vv-a 297; and near Kosambi SN v.437.

cp. Vedic śiṃśapā

Sikatā

(f.) sand, gravel; suvaṇṇa˚ gold dust AN i.253. Sikayasa-maya

cp. Sk. sikatā

Sikāyasa-maya

(adj.) [made of tempered steel (said of swords) Ja vi.449 (cp. Note of the trsln p. 546).

Sikkā

(f.) string, string of a balance Vin ii.110; Vin ii.131, Ja i.9; Ja ii.399; Ja iii.13 (text sikkhā); vi.242; Vv-a 244 (muttā˚ string of pearls); Kv 336 sq.

cp. Sk. śikyā

Sikkhati

1. to learn, to train oneself (= ghaṭati vāyamati Vism 274) usually combined with the locative, thus sikkhā-padesu s. to train oneself in the Sikkhāpadas DN i.63, DN i.250; Vin i.84; Iti 96, Iti 118; also with the dative, indicating the purpose; thus vinayāya s. to train oneself to give up Snp 974; the thing acquired by training is also put in the accusative; thus nibbānaṃ s. to learn, to train oneself towards Nibbāna Snp 940, Snp 1061; Mil 10; Pot sikkheyyāsi Mil 10; sikkheyyāma DN ii.245; sikkhema Snp 898; sikkhe Snp 974; sikkheyya Snp 930. Fut. sikkhissāmi Vin iv.141; sikkhissāmase Snp 814; ppr. sikkhanto Snp 657; ppr. med. sikkhamāna training oneself Vin iv.141; DN ii.241; Iti 104, Iti 121; sikkhamānā (f.) a young woman undergoing a probationary course of training in order to become a nun Vin i.135, Vin i.139, Vin i.145 Vin i.147, Vin i.167; Vin iv.121; AN iii.276; SN ii.261; grd. sikkhitabba Vin i.83; Ja vi.296; MN i.123; DN ii.138; Mil 10;; sikkha that ought to be learnt Mil 10; inf. sikkhituṃ Vin i.84, Vin i.270; ger. sikkhitvā Mil 219.

2. to want to overcome, to try, tempt DN ii.245 ■ pp. sikkhita. Caus. II. sikkhāpeti to teach, to train Ja i.162, Ja i.187, Ja i.257; DN-a i.261; Mil 32; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 4.

Vedic śikṣati; Desid. to śak: see sakkoti ■ The Dhtp (12) gives “vijj’ opādāna” as meaning

Sikkhana

(nt.) training, study Ja i.58.

fr. śikṣ

Sikkhā

(f.) 1. study, training, discipline Vin iii.23; DN i.181; AN i.238; SN ii.50, SN ii.131; SN v.378; Dhs 1004; Vb-a 344 (various) ■ sikkhaṃ paccakkhātaka one who has abandoned the precepts Vin i.135, Vin i.167 Vin ii.244 sq. (cp. sikkhā-paccakkhāna Vin ii.279, and sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya Vin iii.24; SN iv.190; sikkhā apaccakkhātā, ibid.); tisso sikkhā SN iii.83; Pts i.46 sq. Mil 133, Mil 237; Nd i.39; explained as adhisīla-, adhicitta-and adhipaññā-sikkhā AN i.234 sq.; Ne 126; with the synonyms saṃvara, samādhi & paññā at Vism 274.; 2. (as one of the 6 Vedāngas) phonology or phonetics combd with nirutti (interpretation, etymology) DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 447.

-ānisaṃsa whose virtue is training, praise of discipline AN ii.243; Iti 40 -ānusantatavutti whose behaviour is thoroughly in accordance with the discipline Ne 112 -kāma anxious for training Vin i.44; DN ii.101; SN v.154 SN v.163; AN i.24, AN i.238; ˚-tā anxiety for training Ja i.161 -samādāna taking the precepts upon oneself Vin i.146; Mil 162; AN i.238 sq.; AN iv.15; AN v.165. -sājīva system of training Vin iii.23 sq.; Pp 57.

Vedic śikṣā

Sikkhāpada

(nt.) set of precepts, “preceptorial,” code of training; instruction, precept, rule

1. in general: DN i.63, DN i.146, DN i.250; MN i.33; AN i.63, AN i.235 sq. AN ii.14, AN ii.250 sq.; AN iii.113, AN iii.262; AN iv.152, 290 sq.; SN ii.224 SN v.187; Vin i.102; Vin ii.95, Vin ii.258; Vin iii.177; Vin iv.141 (sahadhammika), 143 (khudd’ ânukhuddakāni); Iti 96, Iti 118 Vb-a 69 (bhesajja˚); Dhp-a iii.16.

2. in special: the 5 (or 10) rules of morality, or the precepts to be adopted in particular by one who is entering the Buddhist community either as a layman or an initiate. There seem to have been only 5 rules at first, which are the same as the first 5 sīlas (see sīla 2 b): SN ii.167; Vb 285 (expld in detail at Vb-a 381 sq.); Dhp-a i.32 and passim To these were added another 5, so as to make the whole list (the dasasikkhāpadaṃ or ˚padāni) one of 10 (which are not the 10 sīlas!). These are (6) vikāla-bhojanā (-veramaṇī) not eating at the wrong hour; (7) nacca-gītavādita-visūka-dassanā˚; to avoid worldly amusements (8) mālā-gandha-vilepana-dhāraṇa-maṇḍana-vibhūsanaṭṭhānā˚; to use neither unguents nor ornaments; (9 uccā-sayana-mahā-sayanā˚; not to sleep on a high, big bed; (10) jātarūpa rajata-paṭiggahaṇā˚; not to accept any gold or silver: Vin i.83 = Kp ii.; AN i.211, and frequently- dasa-sikkhāpadikā (f.) conforming to the 10 obligations (of a nun) Vin iv.343 (= sāmaṇerī). There is nowhere any mention of the 8 sikkhāpadas as such, but they are called aṭṭhaṅgika uposatha (see sīla 2b) e.g. Mvu 37, Mvu 202diyaḍḍha-sikkhāpada-sata the 150 precepts, i.e. the Pāṭimokkha AN i.230, AN i.234; Mil 243.

sikkhā + pada, the latter in sense of pada 3. Cp. BSk. śikṣāpada

Sikkhāpaka

(adj.) teaching Pv-a 252; Mil 164.

fr. sikkhāpeti

Sikkhāpana

(nt.) teaching Mil 163.

fr. sikkhāpeti

Sikkhāpanaka

teaching Ja i.432.

Sikkhita

trained, taught Vin iv.343 (˚sikkha, adj., trained in… ; chasu dhammesu) Mil 40; Pv-a 263 (˚sippa).

pp. of sikkhati

Sikhaṇḍin

(adj.-n.) 1. tufted, crested (as birds); Ja v.406; Ja vi.539; Thag 1103 (mayūra); with tonsured hair (as ascetics) Ja iii.311.

2. a peacock Ja v.406; Vv-a 163.

Sk. śikhaṇḍin

Sikhara

the top, summit of a mountain Ja vi.519; Mil 2; a peak Dhp-a iii.364 (˚thūpiyo or ˚thūpikāyo peaked domes); the point or edge of a sword MN i.243; SN iv.56; crest, tuft Ja ii.99; (this is a very difficult reading; it is explained by the C. by sundara (elegant); Trenckner suggests singāra, cp. ii.98) a bud Thig 382.

cp. Sk. śikhara

Sikhariṇī

(f.) a kind of woman (with certain defects of the pudendum) Vin ii.271; Vin iii.129 (text, ˚aṇī).

fr. last

Sikhā

(f.) point, edge MN i.104; crest, topknot DN-a i.89; Ja v.406; of a flame Dhp 308; Dhs-a 124 of fire (aggi˚) Snp 703; Ja v.213; (dhūma˚) Ja vi.206; of a ray of light Ja i.88; in the corn trade, the pyramid of corn at the top of the measuring vessel DN-a i.79; ˚-bandha top-knot DN i.7; vātasikhā (tikkhā a raging blast) Ja iii.484; susikha (adj.) with a beautiful crest Thag 211 (mora), 1136.

Vedic śikhā

Sikkhitaṛ

a master, adept; proficient, professional Ja vi.449, Ja vi.450.

n. ag. fr. sikkhati

Sikhin

(adj.) crested, tufted Thag 22 (mora); Ja ii.363 (f. ˚inī). Also name of (a) the fire Ja i.215, Ja i.288 (b) the peacock Snp 221, Snp 687.

fr. sikhā

Sigāla

(śṛ˚) a jackal DN ii.295; DN iii.24 sq.; AN i.187; SN ii.230, SN ii.271 SN iv.177 sq. (text singāla); iv.199; Ja i.502; Ja iii.532 (Pūtimaṃsa by name) ■ sigālī (f.) a female jackal Ja i.336 Ja ii.108; Ja iii.333 (called Māyāvī); Mil 365 ■ See also siṅgāla.

cp. Vedic sṛgāla; as loan-word in English = jackal

Sigālika

(adj.) belonging to a jackal Ja ii.108; Ja iii.113 (˚aṃ nādaṃ, cp. segalikaṃ AN i.187, where the Copenhagen MS. has sigālakaṃ corrected to segālakaṃ)-(nt.) a jackal’s roar (sigālakaṃ nadati) DN iii.25. Cp segālaka.

fr. sigāla

Siggu

(nt.) name of a tree (Hyperanthera moringa) Ja iii.161; Ja v.406.

cp. Vedic śigru, Name of a tribe; as a tree in Suśruta

Siṅga1

(nt.) a horn Ja i.57, Ja i.149, Ja i.194; Ja iv.173 (of a cow); Vism 106; VvhA 476.

-dhanu horn-bow Dhp-a i.216. -dhamaka blowing a horn Mil 31.

Vedic śṛnga, cp. Gr. κάρνον, κραγγών; Lat. cornu = E. horn

Siṅga2

the young of an animal, calf Ja v.92; cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.31.

Siṅgāra

erotic sentiment; siṅgāratā (f.) fondness of decorations Ja i.184; an elegant dress, finery Mil 2; (adj.) elegant, graceful (thus read) Ja ii.99 singāra-bhāva being elegant or graceful (said of a horse) Ja ii.98.

cp. Sk. śṛngāra

Siṅgāla

variant reading instead of sigāla SN ii.231 etc.; Vism 196; Pv iii.52.

Siṅgika

(adj.) having horns Ja vi.354 (āvelita-˚ having twisted horns).

fr. singa1

Siṅgin

(adj.) having a horn Vin ii.300; Ja iv.173 (= cow); clever, sharp-witted, false Thag 959; AN ii.26; Iti 112; cp. J.P.T.S. 1885, 53.

Vedic śṛngin

Siṅgila

a kind of horned bird Ja iii.73; Dhp-a iii.22 (v.l. singala).

Siṅgivera

(nt.) ginger Vin i.201; Vin iv.35; Ja i.244; Ja iii.225 (alla-˚); Mil 63; Mvu 28, Mvu 21; Dhs-a 320; DN-a i.81. Singi & singi;

Sk. śṛnga + Tamil vera “root,” as E. loan word = ginger

Siṅgī & siṅgi

(f.) 1. gold Vin i.38; SN ii.234; Ja i.84.

2. “ginger” in sense of “dainties, sweets Ja iv.352 (= singiver’ ādika uttaribhanga C.; cp. Tamil iñji ginger).

-nada gold Vv 6428; Vv-a 284. -loṇa (-kappa) license as to ginger & salt Vin ii.300, Vin ii.306. -vaṇṇa gold-coloured DN ii.133. -suvaṇṇa gold Vv-a 167.

cp. Sk. śṛngī

Siṅgu

(f.) (?) a kind of fish Ja v.406; plur. singū Ja vi.537. According to Abhp. singū is m. and Payogasiddhi gives it as nt.

Siṅghati

to sniff, to get scent of SN i.204 = Ja iii.308; DN-a i.38. Cp. upa˚.

siṅgh, given as “ghāyana” at Dhtp 34

Siṅghāṭaka

(m. and n.) 1. a square, a place where four roads meet Vin i.237, Vin i.287 Vin i.344; Vin iv.271; DN i.83; AN ii.241; AN iv.187, AN iv.376; SN i.212 SN ii.128; SN iv.194; Mil 62, Mil 330, Mil 365; Dhp-a i.317. aya-s˚ perhaps an iron ring (in the shape of a square or triangle MN i.393; Ja v.45.

2. a water plant (Trapa bispinosa? Ja vi.530, Ja vi.563.

cp. Sk. śṛngāṭaka; fr. śṛnga

Siṅghāṇikā

(f.) mucus of the nose, snot DN ii.293; MN i.187; Snp 196–⁠198 = Ja i.148 (all MSS. of both books-n-instead of-ṇ-); Mil 154, Mil 382; Pv ii.23 Vism 264 & 362 (in detail); Dhp-a i.50; Vb-a 68, Vb-a 247.

Sk. singhāṇaka

Sijjati

to boil (intr.), to sweat; ppr. sijjamāna boiling Ja i.503; Caus. sedeti (q.v.). The Dhtp 162 gives “ pāka ” as meaning of sid ■ pp. sinna (wet) & siddha1 (cooked).

svid, Epic Sk. svidyate

Sijjhati

to succeed, to be accomplished, to avail suit Snp-a 310; Pv-a 58, Pv-a 113, Pv-a 254 (inf. sijjhituṃ) ■ pp siddha.

sidh; Epic Sk. sidhyate. The Dhtp gives 2 roots sidh, viz. one as “gamana” (170), the other as “saṃsidhi” (419)

Siñcaka

watering, one who waters Vv 797 (amba˚).

fr. siñcati

Siñcati

1. to sprinkle Ja iii.144; Ja v.26; Mvu 37, Mvu 203; Snp-a 66.

2. to bale out a ship Snp 771; Dhp 369. inf. siñcituṃ Ja vi.583 pass. siccati Thag 50 (all MSS. siñcati); imper. siñca Dhp 369; ppr. med. siñcamāna Mvu 37, Mvu 203; ger. sitvā Snp 771 = Ne 6; pp. sitta ■ Caus. seceti to cause to sprinkle Mvu 34, Mvu 45; Caus. II. siñcāpeti Ja ii.20, Ja ii.104. Cp. pari˚.

sic, cp. Av. hinčaiti to pour; Lat. siat “urinate,” Ags. sēon; Ohg. sīhan, Ger. ver-siegen; Gr. ἰκμάς wet Goth saiws = E. sea ■ Dhtp 377: kkharaṇe

Siñcanaka

(adj.) sprinkling (water) Snp-a 66 (vāta).

fr. siñcati

Siṭṭha

see vi˚.

pp. of śiṣ; Sk. śiṣṭha

Siṇāti

see seyyati.

Sita1

(adj.) sharp Dāvs i.32.

pp. of śā; Sk. śita

Sita2

1. (lit.) stuck in or to: hadaya˚ salla Snp 938; Nd i.412.

2. (fig.) reclining, resting, depending on, attached, clinging to DN i.45, DN i.76; DN ii.255; MN i.364 Cp. 100; Ja v.453; Snp 229, Snp 333, Snp 791, Snp 944, Snp 1044. See also asita2.

pp. of sayati2

Sita3

bound; sātu-˚ Dhp 341 (bound to pleasure); taṇhā-˚ Mil 248. Perhaps as sita2.

pp. of sinoti

Sita4

(adj.) white Dāvs iii.4.

Sk. sita

Sita5

(nt.) a smile Vin iii.105; Vin iv.159; SN i.24; SN ii.254; MN ii.45; Thag 630; Ap 21 (pātukari), 22 (˚kamma Dhp-a ii.64 (˚ṃ pātvakāsi); iii.479; Vv-a 68. -˚kāra smiling Ja i.351 (as ˚ākāra).

pp. of smi, cp. vimhāpeti. The other P. form is mihita

Sitta

sprinkled Dhp 369; Ja iii.144; Vism 109

pp. of siñcati

Sittha

(nt.) a lump of boiled rice Vin ii.165, Vin ii.214; Ja i.189, Ja i.235; Ja v.387; Ja vi.358 (odana˚), 365 (yāgu˚); Pv-a 99; sitthatelaka oil of beeswax Vin ii.107, Vin ii.151.

-āvakārakaṃ (adv.) scattering the lumps of boiled rice Vin iv.196.

cp. *Sk. siktha

Sitthaka

(nt.) beeswax Vin ii.116 (madhu˚).

cp. Sk. sikthaka

Sithila

(adj.) loose, lax, bending, yielding SN i.49, SN i.77 = Dhp 346 = Ja ii.140; Ja i.179; Ja ii.249; Mil 144; Dhp-a iv.52, Dhp-a iv.56; Pv-a 13. In compn with bhū as sithilī˚; e.g. ˚bhāva lax state Vism 502 = Vb-a 100; ˚bhūta hanging loose Pv-a 47 (so read for sithila˚) -˚hanu a kind of bird MN i.429 ■ Cp. saṭhila.

Vedic śithira, later śithila

Siddha1

boiled, cooked Ja ii.435 (= pakka); v.201 (˚bhojana); Mil 272; Snp-a 27 (˚bhatta = pakk’odana of Snp 18).

a specific Pali formation fr. sijjati (svid ) in meaning “to cook,” in analogy to siddha2

Siddha2

ended, accomplished Mvu 23, Mvu 45, Mvu 78; successful Mil 247 ■ (m.) a kind of semi-divine beings possessed of supernatural faculties, a magician Mil 120, Mil 267 [cp. Sk. siddha Halāyudha 1, 87; Yogasūtra 3, 33; Aufrecht remarks: “This is a post-vedic mythological fiction formed on the analogy of sādhya”].

-attha one who has completed his task Mil 214.

pp. of sijjhati

Siddhatthaka

white mustard Thag-a 181 (Ap. v.24); Ja iii.225; Ja vi.537; Dhp-a ii.273 (in Kisāgotamī story).

Sk. siddhārthaka

Siddhi

(f.) accomplishment, success, prosperity Mvu 29, Mvu 70; Sdhp 14, Sdhp 17, Sdhp 325, Sdhp 469; Pv-a 63 (attha˚ advantage); padasiddhi substantiation of the meaning of the word DN-a i.66; cp. sadda˚.

fr. sidh, Vedic siddhi

Siddhika

(adj.) (-˚) connected with success; nāmasiddhika who thinks luck goes by names Ja i.401 appasiddhika unprofitable, fatal, etc. Ja iv.4, Ja iv.5 (sāgara) vi.34 (samudda).

fr. siddhi

Sināta

bathed, bathing MN i.39; SN i.169 = SN i.183; Ja v.330.

pp. of sināti

Sināti1

(to bind): see sinoti.

Sināti2

to bathe; imper. sināhi MN i.39; inf. sināyituṃ MN i.39; aor. sināyi Ap 204 ■ pp. sināta.

Vedic snāti, snā. For detail see nahāyati. The Dhtp 426 gives root sinā in meaning “soceyya,” i.e. cleaning

Sināna

(nt.) bathing MN i.39; SN i.38, SN i.43; SN iv.118; Nd ii.39; Vism 17; Vb-a 337.

fr. snā

Sinānī

(f.) bath-powder (?) MN ii.46, MN ii.151, MN ii.182.

Siniddha

1. wet, moist Vism 171.

2. oily, greasy, fatty Ja i.463, Ja i.481; Snp-a 100 (˚āhāra fattening food).

3. smooth, glossy Ja i.89; Ja iv.350 (of leaves); Mil 133.

4. resplendent charming Thag-a 139.

5. pliable Vin i.279 (kāya, a body with good movement of bowels).

6. affectionate attached, fond, loving Ja i.10; Mil 229, Mil 361; Vb-a 282 (˚puggala-sevanatā).

pp. of siniyhati; cp. Epic Sk. snigdha

Siniyhati

(to be moist or sticky, fig.) to feel love, to be attached Vism 317 = Dhs-a 192 (in defn of mettā ). Caus. sineheti (sneheti, snehayati) to lubricate, make oily or tender (through purgatives etc.) Vin i.279 (kāyaṃ); Mil 172; DN-a i.217 (temeti + ); to make pliable, to soften Mil 139 (mānasaṃ) ■ pp. siniddha.

Vedic snihyate, snih; cp. Av. snāēƶaiti it snows = Lat. ninguit, Gr. νείγει; Oir. snigid it rains; Lat. nix snow = Gr. νίγα = Goth, snaiws, Ohg. sneo = snow; Oir snige rain; etc ■ The Dhtp 463 gives the 2 forms sinih & snih; in meaning pīṇana. Cp. sineha

Sineha & sneha

Both forms occur without distinction; sneha more frequently (as archaic) in poetry. - A. sineha: 1. viscous liquid, unctuous moisture, sap SN i.134; AN i.223 sq.; Ja i.108; Dhs 652 (= sinehana Dhs-a 335); Vism 262 (thīna˚ = meda; vilīna˚ = vasā)

2. fat Ja ii.44 (bahu˚); Vb-a 67.

3. affection, love desire, lust Ja i.190; Ja ii.27; Pv-a 82 ■ B. sneha: 1. (oily liquid) DN i.74; Pv iii.52 (anguṭṭha˚, something like milk expld as khīra Pv-a 198).

2. (affection) AN ii.10; SN iv.188 (kāma˚); Snp 36, Snp 209, Snp 943 (= chanda, pema rāga, Nd i.426); Ja iv.11.

-anvaya following an affection Snp 36. -gata anything moist or oily AN iii.394 sq.; Dhs-a 335. -ja sprung from affection Snp 272; SN i.207. -bindu a drop of oil Vism 263. -virecana an oily purgative Ja iii.48.

fr. snih

Sinehaka

a friend Mvu 36, Mvu 44.

Sinehana

(nt.) oiling, softening Mil 229; Dhs-a 335. - Cp. senehika.

Sinehaniya

(adj.) softening, oily; ˚āni bhesajjāni softening medicines Mil 172 (opp lekhaniyāni).

grd. formation fr. sinehana

Sinehita

lustful, covetous Dhp 341; Dhp-a iv.49.

pp. of sineheti

Sinoti

to bind Dhs-a 219 (sinoti bandhatī ti setu). pp. sita3.

or si; Vedic syati & sināti; the Dhtp 505 gives si in meaning “bandhana”

Sindī

(f.) Name of a tree Vism 183, where Kp-a 49 in id. passage reads khajjūrikā. See also Abhp 603 Deśīn viii.29.

etym.?

Sinduvāra

the tree Vitex negundo DN-a i.252; Dhs-a 14, Dhs-a 317; also spelt sindhavāra Vv-a 177 sinduvārikā Ja vi.269; sindhuvāritā (i.e. sinduvārikā? Ja vi.550 = Ja vi.553; sinduvārita Ja iv.440, Ja iv.442 (v.l. ˚vārakā).

Sk. sinduvāra

Sindhava

belonging to the Sindh, a Sindh horse Ja i.175; Ja ii.96; Ja iii.278; Ja v.259; Dhp-a iv.4 (= Sindhava-raṭṭhe jatā assā); (nt.) rock salt Vin i.202 Sindhavaraṭṭha the Sindh country Thag-a 270; Ja v.260.

Sk. saindhava

Sindhavāra

see sinduvāra.

Sinna

1. wet with perspiration Vin i.46, Vin i.51; Vin ii.223.

2. boiled (cp. siddha1) esp in the comp. udaka-sinna-paṇṇa; it occurs in a series of passages Ja iii.142, Ja iii.144; Ja iv.236, Ja iv.238, where Fausböll reads sitta, although the var. readings give also sinna The English translation, p. 149, says “sprinkled with water,” but the text, 238, speaks of leaves which are “sodden” (sedetvā).

pp. of sijjati; Vedic svinna

Sipāṭikā

(f.) 1. pericarp MN i.306; Vv 8433; Vv-a 344; hingu˚ a s. yielding gum Vin i.201. Also written sipātikā; thus ādiṇṇasipātikā with burst pod or fruit skin SN iv.193.

2. a small case receptacle; khura˚ a razor case Vin ii.134. On s. at Pv iii.229 the C. has ekapaṭalā upānahā Pv-a 186.

cp. Sk. sṛpāṭikā, beak, BR.

Sippa

(nt.) art, branch of knowledge, craft Snp 261; AN iii.225; AN iv.281 sq., 322; DN iii.156, DN iii.189; Ja i.239, Ja i.478; Mil 315; excludes the Vedas Mil 10 sabbasippāni Ja i.356, Ja i.463; Ja ii.53; eight various kinds enumerated MN i.85; twelve crafts Ud 31, cp. dvādasavidha s. Ja i.58; eighteen sippas mentioned Ja ii.243 some sippas are hīna, others ukkaṭṭha Vin iv.6 sq. Vb-a 410. asippa untaught, unqualified Ja iv.177 Ja vi.228 = asippin Mil 250 ■ sippaṃ uggaṇhāti to learn a craft Vv-a 138.

-āyatana object or branch of study, art DN i.51; Mil 78; Vb-a 490 (pāpaka). -uggahaṇa taking up, i.e. learning, a craft Ja iv.7; Pv-a 3. -ṭṭhāna a craft MN i.85 cp. BSk. śilpasthāna Divy 58, Divy 100, Divy 212. -phala result of one’s craft DN i.51. -mada conceit regarding one’s accomplishment Vb-a 468.

cp. Sk. śilpa

Sippaka

= sippa Ja i.420.

Sippavant

one who masters a craft Ja vi.296.

fr. sippa

Sippika

an artisan Snp 613, Snp 651; Mil 78; Vism 336. Also sippiya Ja vi.396, Ja vi.397.

fr. sippa

Sippikā1

(f.) a pearl oyster Ja i.426; Ja ii.100 (sippikasambukaṃ); Vism 362 (in comp.) = Vb-a 68.

fr. sippī

Sippikā2

at Thag 49 is difficult to understand. It must mean a kind of bird (˚abhiruta), and may be (so Kern) a misread pippikā (cp. Sk. pippaka & pippīka). See also; Brethren p. 533.

Sippī

(f.) a pearl oyster Ja ii.100; sippipuṭa oyster shell Ja v.197, Ja v.206. sippi-sambuka oysters and shells DN i.84; MN i.279; AN i.9; AN iii.395.

cp. Prākrit sippī

Sibala

Name of a tree Ja vi.535.

Sibba

(nt.) a suture of the skull; plur. ˚-āni Ja vi.339; sibbinī (f.) the same Vin i.274.

fr. sīv

Sibbati

to sew Ja iv.25; Vv-a 251. Pres. also sibbeti Vin ii.116 Vin iv.61, Vin iv.280; ger. sibbetvā Ja i.316; grd. sibbitabba Ja i.9 aor. sibbi Ja iv.25; & sibbesi Vin ii.289; inf. sibbetuṃ Vin i.203 ■ pp. sibbita ■ Caus. II. sibbāpeti Ja ii.197; Vin iv.61.

sīv, Vedic sīvyati. The root is sometimes given as siv, e.g. Dhtp 390, with defn “tantu-santāna”

Sibbana

(nt.) sewing Snp 304 = Ja iv.395; Ja i.220; Ja vi.218. sibbanī (f.) “seamstress” = greed, lust Dhs 1059; AN iii.399; Dhs-a 363; Snp 1040 (see lobha). -˚magga suture Vism 260; Kp-a 60 (id.).

fr. sīv

Sibbāpana

(nt.) causing to be sewn Vin iv.280.

fr. sibbāpeti

Sibbita

sewn Vin iv.279 (dus˚); Ja iv.20 (su˚); Vb-a 252 (˚rajjukā). Cp. vi˚ & pari˚;.

pp. of sibbati

Sibbitar

one who sews MN iii.126.

n. ag. fr. sīv

Sibbinī

Dhs 1059, read sibbanī. Cp. sibba.

Simbali

(f.) the silk-cotton tree Bombax heptaphyllum Ja i.203; Ja iii.397; Vism 206; Dhp-a i.279. ˚-vana a forest of simbali trees Ja i.202; Ja ii.162 (s. ˚-pālibhaddaka-vana); iv.277. sattisimbalivana the sword forest, in purgatory Ja v.453.

cp. Vedic śimbala flower of the B., cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 109

Siyyati

see seyyati.

Sira

(nt. and m.) head, nom. siraṃ Thig 255, acc. siraṃ AN i.141; siro Snp 768; sirasaṃ Ja v.434; instr. sirasā Vin i.4; DN i.126; Snp 1027; loc. sirasmiṃ MN i.32; sire DN-a i.97; in compounds siro-A i.138 ■ sirasā paṭiggaṇhāti to accept with reverence Ja i.65; pādesu sirasā nipatati to bow one’s head to another’s feet, to salute respectfully Vin i.4, Vin i.34; Snp p.15, p. 101. siraṃ muñcati to loosen the hair Ja v.434; cp. i.47; mutta˚; with loose hair Kp-a 120 = Vism 415; adho-siraṃ with bowed head, head down AN i.141; AN iv.133; Ja vi.298; cp. avaṃ˚; dvedhā˚ with broken head Ja v.206; muṇḍa˚; a shaven head Dhp-a ii.125.

cp. Vedic śiras, śīan; Av. sarō, Gr. καράρα head, κέρας horn, κρανίον; Lat. cerebrum; Ohg hirni brain

Sirā

(f.) a bloodvessel, vein Mvu 37, Mvu 136; nerve, tendon, gut Ja v.344, Ja v.364; ˚-jāla the network of veins Ja v.69; Pv-a 68.

Sk. sirā

Siriṃsapa

a (long) creeping animal, serpent, a reptile Vin i.3; Vin ii.110; DN ii.57; MN i.10; SN i.154; AN ii.73 AN ii.117, AN ii.143; AN v.15; Snp 52, Snp 964; Ja i.93; Pv iii.52; Nd i.484 Vb-a 6. -tta (nt.) the state of being a creeping thing DN ii.57.

Sk. sarīsṛpa

Sirimant

(adj.) glorious DN ii.240. Siri (siri)

siri + mant

Sirī (siri)

(f.) 1. splendour, beauty Snp 686 (instr. siriyā); Ja vi.318 (siriṃ dhāreti).

2. luck, glory majesty, prosperity SN i.44 (nom. siri); Ja ii.410 (siriṃ) 466; DN-a i.148; Vv-a 323 (instr. buddha-siriyā). rajjasirī-dāyikā devatā the goddess which gives prosperity to the kingdom Dhp-a ii.17; sirī + lakkhī splendour & luck Ja iii.443.

3. the goddess of luck DN i.11 (see Rh. D Buddhist India 216

222); DN-a i.97; Ja v.112; Mil 191 (˚devatā).

4. the royal bed-chamber (= sirigabbha Ja vi.383assirī unfortunate Ne 62 = Ud 79 (reads sassar’iva). sassirīka (q.v.) resplendent Snp-a 91 sassirika Ja v.177 (puṇṇa-canda˚); opp. nissirīka (a without splendour Ja vi.225, Ja vi.456; (b) unlucky Vv-a 212 (for alakkhika) ■ The composition form is siri˚.

-gabbha bedroom Ja i.228, Ja i.266; iii. 125; v.214. -corabrāhmaṇa “a brahmin who stole good luck” Ja ii.409 (cp. sirilakkhaṇa-˚). -devatā goddess(es) of luck Mil 191 (+ kalidevatā). -dhara glorious Mvu 5, Mvu 13. -nigguṇḍi a kind of tree Ja vi.535. -vilāsa pomp and splendour Ja iv.232. -vivāda a bedchamber quarrel Ja iii.20 (sayanakalaho ti pi vadanti yeva, C.). -sayana a state couch, royal bed Ja i.398; Ja iii.264; Ja vi.10; Dhp-a ii.86; Pv-a 280.

Vedic śrī

Sirīsa

(nt.) the tree Acacia sirissa DN ii.4; SN iv.193; Vv 8432; Vv-a 331, Vv-a 344; ˚-puppha a kind of gem Mil 118. Cp. serīsaka.

cp. Class. Sk. śirṣa

Siroruha

the hair of the head Mvu 1, Mvu 34; Sdhp 286.

Sk. śiras + ruha

Silā

(f.) a stone, rock Vin i.28; SN iv.312 sq.; Vin 445; DN-a i.154; Ja v.68; Vism 230 (in comparison) Vb-a 64 (var. kinds); a precious stone, quartz Vin ii.238; Mil 267, Mil 380; Vv 8415 (= phalika˚ Vv-a 339) pada-silā a flag-stone Vin ii.121, Vin ii.154. Cp. sela.

-uccaya a mountain AN iii.346; Thag 692; Ja i.29 Ja vi.272, Ja vi.278; Dāvs v.63. -guḷa a ball of stone, a round stone MN iii.94. -tthambha (sila˚) stone pillar Mvu 15 Mvu 173. -paṭimā stone image Ja iv.95. -paṭṭa a slab of stone, a stone bench Ja i.59; Ja vi.37 (mangala˚); Snp-a 80 Snp-a 117. -pākāra stone wall Vin ii.153. -maya made of stone Ja vi.269, Ja vi.270; Mvu 33, Mvu 22; Mvu 36, Mvu 104. -yūpa a stone column SN v.445; AN iv.404; Mvu 28, Mvu 2. -santhāra stone floor Vin ii.120.

cp. Sk. śilā

Silāghati

to extol, only in Dhtp 30 as root silāgh, with defn “katthana,” i.e. boasting.

Epic Sk. ślāgh

Silābhu

(nt.) a whip snake Ja vi.194 (= nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇasappa).

Siliṭṭha

adhering, connected AN i.103; DN-a i.91; Ja iii.154; Dhs-a 15; Sdhp 489 (a˚).

cp. Sk. śliṣṭa, pp. of śliṣ to clasp, to which śleṣman slime = P. silesuma & semha. The Dhtp (443) expl;s silis by “ālingana”

Siliṭṭhatā

(f.) adherence, adhesion, junction Nd ii.137 (byañjana˚, of “iti”).

abstr. fr. siliṭṭha

Silutta

a rat snake Ja vi.194 (= gharasappa).

Silesa

junction, embrace; a rhetoric figure, riddle, puzzle, pun Ja v.445 (silesūpamā said of women = purisānaṃ cittabandhanena silesasadisā, ibid. 447).

fr. śliṣ

Silesuma

(nt.) phlegm Pv ii.23 (= semha Pv-a 80).

Sk. śleṣman, fr. śliṣ. This the diaeretic form for the usual contracted form semha

Siloka

fame DN ii.223, DN ii.255; MN i.192; SN ii.226 (lābha-sakkāra˚); AN ii.26 AN ii.143; Snp 438; Vin i.183; Ja iv.223 (= kitti-vaṇṇa); Mil 325; Snp-a 86 (˚bhaṇana, i.e. recitation); pāpasiloka having a bad reputation Vin iv.239; asiloka blame AN iv.364 (˚bhaya); Ja vi.491.

2. a verse Mil 71; Ja v.387.

Vedic śloka Dhtp 8: silok = sanghāta

Silokavant

(adj.) famous MN i.200.

siloka + vant

Siva

(adj.-n.) auspicious, happy, fortunate, blest SN i.181; Ja i.5; Ja ii.126; Mil 248; Pv iv.33; Vv 187

2. a worshipper of the god Siva Mil 191; the same as Sivi Ja iii.468.

3. nt. happiness, bliss Snp 115, Snp 478; SN iv.370.

-vijjā knowledge of auspicious charms DN i.9; DN-a i.93 (alternatively explained as knowledge of the cries of jackals); cp. Divy 630 śivāvidyā.

Vedic śiva

Sivā

(f.) a jackal DN-a i.93.

Sk. śivā

Sivāṭikā

various reading instead of sipāṭikā, which see.

Sivikā

(f.) a palanquin, litter Bv 17, Bv 16 (text savakā); Pv i.111; Vin i.192; ˚-gabbha a room in shape like a palanquin, an alcove Vin ii.152; mañca-˚ Ja v.136, Ja v.262 (a throne palanquin?). suvaṇṇa˚; a golden litter Ja i.52, Ja i.89; Dhp-a i.89; Vism 316.

Epic Sk. śibikā

Siveyyaka

(adj.) hailing from the Sivi country, a kind of cloth (very valuable) Vin i.278, Vin i.280; Ja iv.401; DN-a i.133. The two latter passages read sīveyyaka.

Sisira

(adj.) cool, cold Dāvs v.33; Vv-a 132. (m.) cold, cold season Vin ii.47 = Ja i.93.

Sk. śiśira

Sissa

a pupil; Snp 997, Snp 1028; Dhs-a 32 (˚ânusissā).

cp. Sk. śiṣya, grd. of śiṣ or śās to instruct: see sāsati etc.

Sissati

to be left, to remain Vv-a 344. Cp. visissati ■ Caus. seseti to leave (over) DN ii.344 (aor. sesesi); Ja i.399; Ja v.107; Dhp-a i.398 (asesetvā without a remainder) ■ pp. siṭṭha: see visiṭṭha.

Pass. of śiṣ to leave; Dhtp 630: visesana

Sīgha

(adj.) quick, rapid, swift MN i.120; AN i.45; Dhp 29; Pp 42; ˚-gāmin walking quickly Snp 381; sīghasota swiftly running DN ii.132; AN ii.199; Snp 319; ˚-vāhana swift (as horses) Ja vi.22; cp. adv sīghataraṃ Mil 82; sīghaṃ (adv.) quickly Mil 147; Vv-a 6; Vb-a 256; usually redupl. sīgha-sīghaṃ very quickly Ja i.103; Pv-a 4.

cp. Epic Sk. śīghra

Sīta

(adj.) cold, cool DN i.74, DN i.148; DN ii.129; AN ii.117, AN ii.143; Snp 467, Snp 1014; Vin i.31, Vin i.288. (nt.) cold Vin i.3; Ja i.165; Mvu 1, Mvu 28; Snp 52, Snp 966. In compn with kṛ & bhū the form is sīti˚; e.g. sīti-kata made cool Vin ii.122; sīti-bhavati to become cooled tranquillized SN ii.83; SN iii.126; SN iv.213; SN v.319; Snp 1073 (sīti-siyā, Pot. of bhavati); Iti 38; ˚-bhūta, tranquillized Vin i.8; Vin ii.156; SN i.141, SN i.178; Snp 542, Snp 642; AN i.138 AN v.65; DN iii.233; Vv 5324; Pv i.87; iv.132. sīti-bhāva coolness, dispassionateness, calm AN iii.435; Thig 360; Pts ii.43; Vism 248; Vb-a 230; Pv-a 230; Thag-a 244. At Ja ii.163 & v.70 read sīna (“fallen”) for sīta.

-āluka susceptible of cold Vin i.288 (synon. sītabhīruka). -uṇha cold and heat Ja i.10. -odaka with cool water (pokkharaṇī) MN i.76; Pv ii.104; sītodika (˚iya the same Ja iv.438. -bhīruka being a chilly fellow Vin i.28816 (cp. sītāluka).

Vedic śīta

Sīta

(nt.) sail Ja iv.21. So also in BSk.: Jtm 94. Sitaka = sita

Sītaka = sīta

S iv.289 (vāta).

Sītala

(adj.) cold, cool Ja ii.128; DN-a i.1; Mil 246; tranquil Ja i.3; (nt.) coolness Mil 76, Mil 323; Vv-a 44, Vv-a 68, Vv-a 100; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 244. sītalībhāva becoming cool Sdhp 33.

cp. Vedic śītala

Sītā

(f.) a furrow Vin i.240 (satta sītāyo); gambhīrasīta with deep mould (khetta) AN iv.237, AN iv.238 (text, ˚-sita).

-āloḷī mud from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206.

Sīti˚

see sīta. The word sītisiyāvimokkha Pts ii.43, must be artificial, arisen from the pāda, sīti-siyā vimutto Snp 1073 (on which see expln at Nd ii.678).

Sīdati

to subside, sink; to yield, give way SN i.53; Snp 939 (= saṃsīdati osīdati Nd ii.420); Iti 71; Mvu 35, Mvu 35 Mvu 3rd pl. sīdare Ja ii.393; Pot. sīde Iti 71; fut. sīdissati: see ni˚ ■ pp. sanna ■ Caus. sādeti (q.v.); Caus. II sīdāpeti to cause to sink Sdhp 43 ■ Cp. ni˚, vi˚.

sad, Idg. *si-ƶd-ō, redupl. formation like tiṣṭhati; cp. Lat. sīdo, Gr. ι ̔́ζω; Av. hidaiti ■ The Dhtp (50 gives the 3 meanings of “visaraṇa-gaty-avasādanesu”.

Sīdana

(nt.) sinking Mvu 30, Mvu 54.

fr. sīdati

Sīna1

fallen off, destroyed Mil 117 (˚patta leafless); Ja ii.163 (˚patta, so read for sīta˚). See also saṃsīna.

pp. of śṛ; to crush; Sk. śīrṇa

Sīna2

congealed; cold, frosty MN i.79.

pp. of sīyati; Sk. śīna

Sīpada

(nt.) the Beri disease (elephantiasis) morbid enlargement of the legs; hence sīpadin and sīpadika suffering from that disease Vin i.91, Vin i.322.

Sk. slīpada

Sīmantinī

(f.) a woman Ja iv.310; Ja vi.142.

Sīmā

(f.) boundary, limit, parish Vin i.106 sq., 309, 340; Nd i.99 (four); Dhp-a iv.115 (mālaka˚); antosīmaṃ within the boundary Vin i.132, Vin i.167; ekasīmāya within one boundary, in the same parish Ja i.425; nissīmaṃ outside the boundary Vin i.122, Vin i.132; bahisīmagata gone outside the boundary Vin i.255. bhinnasīma transgressing the bounds (of decency) Mil 122 ■ In compn sīma˚ & sīmā˚;.

-anta a boundary Mvu 25, Mvu 87; sin Snp 484; Ja iv.311 -antarikā the interval between the boundaries Ja i.265 Vism 74. -ātiga transgressing the limits of sin, conquering sin Snp 795; Nd i.99. -kata bounded, restricted Nd ii.p. 153 (cp. pariyanta). -ṭṭha dwelling within the boundary Vin i.255. -samugghāta removal, abolishing of a boundary Mvu 37, Mvu 33. -sambheda mixing up of the boundary lines Vism 193, Vism 307, Vism 315.

cp. Sk. sīmā

Sīyati

to congeal or freeze: see visīyati & visīveti; ■ pp. sīna2.

for Sk. śyāyati

Sīra

plough Thag-a 270 (= nangala).

Vedic sīra

Sīla

(nt.) 1. nature, character, habit behaviour; usually as-˚ in adj. function “being of such a nature,” like, having the character of…, e.g. adāna˚; of stingy character, illiberal Snp 244; Pv-a 68 (+ maccharin); kiṃ˚; of what behaviour? Pv ii.913 keḷi˚; tricky Pv-a 241; damana˚; one who conquers Pv-a 251; parisuddha˚; of excellent character AN iii.124 pāpa˚; wicked Snp 246; bhaṇana˚; wont to speak Dhp-a iv.93; vāda˚; quarrelsome Snp 381 sq ■ dussīla (of) bad character DN iii.235; Dhs 1327; Pp 20, Pp 53; Pv ii.82 (noun); ii.969 (adj.); Dhp-a ii.252; Dhp-a iv.3; Sdhp 338; Mil 257; opp. susīla SN i.141.

2. moral practice, good character, Buddhist ethics, code of morality. (a) The dasa-sīla or 10 items of good character (not “commandments”) are (1) pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, i.e. abstinence from taking life; (2) adinn’ādānā (from) taking what is not given to one; (3) abrahmacariyā adultery (oṭherwise called kāmesu micchā-cārā ); (4) musāvādā telling lies; (5) pisuna-vācāya slander; (6) pharusa-vācāya harsh or impolite speech; (7) samphappalāpā frivolous and senseless talk; (8) abhijjhāya covetousness (9) byāpādā malevolence; (10) micchādiṭṭhiyā heretic views ■ Of these 10 we sometimes find only the first 7 designated as “sīla” per se, or good character generally See e.g. AN i.269 (where called sīla-sampadā); ii.83 sq (not called “sīla”), & sampadā(b) The pañca-sīla or 5 items of good behaviour are Nos. 1

4 of dasa-sīla and (5) abstaining from any state of indolence arising from (the use of) intoxicants, viz. surā-meraya-majjapamāda-ṭṭhānā veramaṇī. These five also from the first half of the 10 sikkha-padāni. They are a sort of preliminary condition to any higher development after conforming to the teaching of the Buddha (saraṇaṃgamana) and as such often mentioned when a new follower is “officially” installed, e.g. Bv ii.190: saraṇâgamane kañci nivesesi Tathāgato kañci pañcasu sīlesu sīle dasavidhe paraṃ. From Pv iv.176 sq. (as also fr. Kp ii. as following upon Kp i.) it is evident that the sikkhāpadāni are meant in this connection (either 5 or 10), and not the sīlaṃ, cp. also Pv iv.350 sq., although at the above passage of Bv and at Ja i.28 as well as at Mvu 18, Mvu 10 the expression dasa-sīla is used: evidently a later development of the term as regards dasa-sīla (cp. Mvu trsln 122, n. 3), which through the identity of the 5 sīlas & sikkhāpadas was transferred to the 10 sikkhāpadas. These 5 are often simply called; pañca dhammā, e.g. at AN iii.203 sq., 208 sq. Without a special title they are mentioned in connection with the “saraṇaṃ gata” formula e.g. at AN iv.266. Similarly the 10 sīlas (as above a) are only called dhammā at AN ii.253 sq.; AN v.260; nor are they designated as sīla at AN ii.221 ■ pañcasu sīlesu samādapeti to instruct in the 5 sīlas (alias sikkhāpadāni) Vin ii.162(c) The only standard enumerations of the 5 or 10 sīlas are found at two places in the Saṃyutta and correspond with those given in the Niddesa. See on the 10 (as given under a) SN iv.342 & Nd;2 s. v. sīla; on the 5 (also as under b SN ii.68 & Nd;2 s. v. The so-called 10 sīlas (Childers) as found at Kp ii. (under the name of dasa-sikkhāpada are of late origin & served as memorial verses for the use of novices. Strictly speaking they should not be called; dasa-sīla ■ The eightfold sīla or the eight pledges which are recommended to the Buddhist layman (cp Mil 333 mentioned below) are the sikkhāpadas Nos 1

8 (see sikkhāpada), which in the Canon however do not occur under the name of sīla nor sikkhāpada, but as aṭṭhaṅga-samannāgata uposatha (or aṭṭhaṅgika u. “the fast-day with its 8 constituents.” They are discussed in detail at AN iv.248 sq., with a poetical setting of the eight at AN iv.254 = Snp 400, Snp 401-(d) Three special tracts on morality are found in the Canon. The Cullasīla (DN i.3 sq.) consists first of the items (dasa) sīla 1-7 then follow specific injunctions as to practices of daily living & special conduct, of which the first 5 (omitting the introductory item of bījagāma-bhūtagāma-samārambha) form the second 5 sikkhāpadāni. Upon the; Culla˚; follows the Majjhima˚; (DN i.5 sq.) & then the; Mahāsīla DN i.9 sq. The whole of these 3 sīlas is called sīlakkhandha and is (in the Sāmaññaphala sutta e.g. ) grouped with samādhi- and paññākkhandha: DN i.206 sq.; at AN v.205, AN v.206 sīla-kkhandha refers to the Culla-sīla only The three (s., samādhi & paññā) are often mentioned together, e.g. DN ii.81, DN ii.84; Iti 51; DN-a i.57 ■ The characteristic of a kalyāṇa-mitta is endowment with saddhā, sīla, cāga, paññā AN iv.282. These four are counted as constituents of future bliss AN iv.282, and form the 4 sampadās ibid. 322. In another connection at MN iii.99; Vism 19. They are, with suta (foll. after sīla) characteristic of the merit of the devatās AN i.210 sq (under devat’ânussati) ■ At Mil 333 sīla is classed as: saraṇa˚, pañca˚, aṭṭhanga˚, dasanga˚, pātimokkhasaṃvara˚ all of which expressions refer to the sikkhāpadas and not to the sīlas ■ At Mil 336 sq. sīla functions as one of the 7 ratanas (the 5 as given under sampadā up to vimuttiñāṇadassana; plus paṭisambhidā and bojjhanga) ■ cattāro sīlakkhandhā “4 sections of morality” Mil 243; Vism 15 & Dhs-a 168 (here as pātimokkha-saṃvara, indriya-saṃvara, ājīvapārisuddhi, paccaya-sannissita. The same with ref to catubbidha sīla at Ja iii.195). See also under cpds. At Pts i.46 sq. we find the fivefold grouping as (1 pāṇâtipatassa pahānaṃ, (2) veramaṇī, (3) cetanā (4) saṃvara, (5) avītikkama, which is commented on at Vism 49 ■ A fourfold sīla (referring to the sikkhāpada is given at Vism 15 as bhikkhu˚, bhikkhunī˚, anupasampanna˚ gahaṭṭha˚ ■ On sīla and adhisīla see e.g. AN i.229 sq.; Vb-a 413 sq ■ The division of sīla at Ja iii.195 is a distinction of a simple sīla as “saṃvara, of twofold sīla as “ caritta-vāritta, ” threefold as “ kāyika, vācasika, mānasika, ” and fourfold as above under cattāro sīlakkhandhā ■ See further generally: Pts i.42 sq.; Vism 3 sq.; Tikp 154, 165 sq., 269, 277; Nd i.14, Nd i.188 (expld as “pātimokkha-saṃvara”); Nd ii.p. 277 Vb-a 143.

-aṅga constituent of morality (applied to the pañcasikkhāpadaṃ) Vb-a 381. -ācāra practice of morality Ja i.187; Ja ii.3. -kathā exposition of the duties of morality Vin i.15; AN i.125; Ja i.188. -kkhandha all that belongs to moral practices, body of morality as forming the first constituent of the 5 khandhas or groups (+ samādhi˚ paññā˚, vimutti˚, ñāṇadassana-kkhandha), which make up the 5 sampadās or whole range of religious development; see e.g. Nd i.21, Nd i.39; Nd ii.p. 277 ■ Vin. 162 sq. iii.164; AN i.124, AN i.291; AN ii.20; SN i.99 sq.; Iti 51, Iti 107 Ne 90 sq., 128; Mil 243; Dhp-a iii.417. -gandha the fragrance of good works Dhp 55; Vism 58. -caraṇa moral life Ja iv.328, Ja iv.332. -tittha having good behaviour as its banks SN i.169, SN i.183 (trsln Mrs. Rh. D. “with virtue’s strand for bathing”). -bbata [ = vata2] good works and ceremonial observances Dhp 271; AN i.225; SN iv.118; Ud 71; Snp 231, etc.; sīlavata the same Snp 212 Snp 782, Snp 790, Snp 797, Snp 803, Snp 899; Iti 79 sq.; ˚-parāmāsa the contagion of mere rule and ritual, the infatuation of good works, the delusion that they suffice Vin i.184; MN i.433; Dhs 1005; AN iii.377; AN iv.144 sq.; Nd i.98; Dukp 245 282 sq.; Dhs-a 348; see also expln at Cpd. 171, n. 4. sīlabbatupādāna grasping after works and rites DN ii.58; Dhs 1005, Dhs 1216; Vism 569; Vb-a 181 sq ■ The old form sīlavata still preserves the original good sense, as much as “observing the rules of good conduct,” “being of virtuous behaviour.” Thus at Thag 12; Snp 212, Snp 782 (expld in detail at Nd i.66), 790, 797, 803; Iti 79; Ja vi.491 (ariya˚). -bheda a breach of morality Ja i.296 -mattaka a matter of mere morality DN i.3; DN-a i.55 -maya consisting in morality Iti 51; Vv-a 10 (see maya defn 6). -vatta morality, virtue SN i.143; cp. Ja iii.360 -vipatti moral transgression Vin i.171 sq.; DN ii.85; AN i.95; AN i.268 sq.; AN iii.252; Pp 21; Vism 54, Vism 57. -vipanna trespassing DN ii.85; Pp 21; Vin i.227. -vīmaṃsaka testing one’s reputation Ja i.369; Ja ii.429; Ja iii.100, Ja iii.193 -saṃvara self-restraint in conduct DN i.69; Dhs 1342; DN-a i.182. -saṃvuta living under moral self-restraint Dhp 281. -sampatti accomplishment or attainment by moral living Vism 57. -sampadā practice of morality Vin i.227; DN ii.86; MN i.194, MN i.201 sq.; AN i.95, AN i.269 sq. AN ii.66; Pug. 25, 54. -sampanna practising morality virtuous Vin i.228; DN i.63; DN ii.86; MN i.354; Thig 196 Thag-a 168; DN-a i.182.

cp. Sk. śīla. It is interesting to note that the Dhtp puts down a root sīl in meaning of samādhi (No 268) and upadhāraṇa (615)

Sīlatā

(f.) (-˚) character(istic), nature, capacity Dhp-a iii.272.

abstr. fr. sīla

Sīlavant

(adj.) virtuous, observing the moral precepts DN iii.77, DN iii.259 sq., 285; AN i.150; AN ii.58, AN ii.76 AN iii.206 sq., 262 sq.; iv.290 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 71 sq. Vism 58; DN-a i.286; Tikp 279 ■ nom. sg. sīlavā DN i.114; SN i.166; Iti 63; Pp 26, Pp 53; Ja i.187; acc ■ vantaṃ Vin iii.133; Snp 624; instr ■ vatā SN iii.167; gen ■ vato SN iv.303; nom. pl ■ vanto Pp 13; Dhs 1328; Ne 191 acc. pl ■ vante Ja i.187; instr ■ vantehi DN ii.80; gen. pl-vantānaṃ MN i.334; gen. pl ■ vataṃ Dhp 56; Ja i.144; f -vatī DN ii.12; Thig 449. compar. -vantatara Ja ii.3.

sīla + vant

Sīlika

(adj.) (-˚) = sīlin Ja vi.64.

fr. sīla

Sīlin

(adj.) having a disposition or character; ariyasīlin having the virtue of an Ārya DN i.115; DN-a i.286; niddāsīlin drowsy, Snp 96; vuddhasīlin increased in virtue DN i.114; sabhāsīlin fond of society Snp 96.

fr. sīla

Sīliya

(nt.) conduct, behaviour, character; said of bad behaviour, e.g. Ja iii.74 = Ja iv.71; emphasized as dussīlya, e.g. SN v.384; AN i.105; AN v.145 sq.; opp. sādhu-sīliya Ja ii.137 (= sundara-sīla-bhāva C.).

abstr. fr. sīla, Sk. śīlya for śailya

Sīvathikā

(f.) a cemetery, place where dead bodies are thrown to rot away Vin iii.36; DN ii.295 sq.; AN iii.268 AN iii.323; Ja i.146; Pv iii.52 (= susāna Pv-a 198); Vism 181 Vism 240; Pv-a 195. Sivana & siveti;

etym. doubtful; perhaps = *Sk. śivālaya; Kern derives it as śīvan “lying” + atthi “bone, problematic

Sīvana & sīveti

: see vi˚.

Sīsa1

(nt.) lead DN ii.351; SN v.92; Mil 331; Vb-a 63 (= kāḷa-tipu); a leaden coin Ja i.7; ˚-kāra a worker in lead Mil 331; ˚-maya leaden Vin i.190.

cp. Sk. sīsa

Sīsa2

(nt.) 1. the head (of the body) Vin i.8; AN i.207; Snp 199, Snp 208, p. 80; Ja i.74 Ja ii.103; sīsaṃ nahāta, one who has performed an ablution of the head DN ii.172; Pv-a 82; āditta-sīsa, one whose turban has caught fire SN i.108; SN iii.143; SN v.440; AN ii.93 sīsato towards the head Mvu 25, Mvu 93; adho-sīsa, head first Ja i.233.

2. highest part, top, front: bhūmi˚; hill place of vantage Dpvs 15, 26; Ja ii.406; caṅkamana˚ head of the cloister Vism 121; saṅgāma˚; front of the battle Pp 69; Ja i.387; megha˚; head of the cloud Ja i.103. In this sense also opposed to pāda (foot), e.g. sopāṇa˚; head (& foot) of the stairs Dhp-a i.115. Contrasted with sama (plain) Pts i.101 sq.

3. chief point Pts i.102.

4. panicle, ear (of rice or crops) AN iv.169; DN-a i.118.

5. head, heading (as subdivision of a subject), as “chanda-sīsa citta-sīsa” grouped under chanda & citta Vism 376. Usually instr; ˚sīsena “under the heading (or category) of,” e.g. citta˚; Vism 3; paribhoga˚; Ja ii.24; saññā˚; Dhs-a 200; kammaṭṭhāna˚; Dhp-a iii.159.

-ānulokin looking ahead, looking attentively after something MN i.147. -ābādha disease of the head Vin i.270 sq.; Ja vi.331. -ābhitāpa heat in the head, headache Vin i.204. -kaṭāha a skull DN ii.297 = MN i.58 Vism 260 = Kp-a 60; Kp-a 49. -kalanda Mil 292 [Signification unknown; cp. kalanda a squirrel and kalandaka Ja vi.227; a blanket [cushion?] or kerchief. -cchavi the skin of the head Vin i.277. -cola a headcloth turban Mvu 35, Mvu 53. -cchejja resulting in decapitation AN ii.241. -ccheda decapitation, death Ja i.167; Mil 358. -ppacālakaṃ swaying the head about Vin iv.188. -paramparāya with heads close together Dhp-a i.49. -virecana purging to relieve the head DN i.12; DN-a i.98. -veṭha head wrap SN iv.56. -veṭhana headcloth turban MN ii.193; sīsaveṭha id. MN i.244 = SN iv.56 -vedanā headache MN i.243; MN ii.193.

Vedic śīrṣa: see under sira

Sīsaka

(nt.) head, as adj ■ ˚ heading, with the head towards; uttarasīsaka head northwards DN ii.137 pācīna˚ (of Māyā’s couch: eastward) Ja i.50. heṭṭhāsīsaka head downwards Ja iii.13; dhammasīsaka worshipping righteousness beyond everything Mil 47, Mil 117.

= sīsa

Sīha

1. a lion DN ii.255; SN i.16; AN ii.33, AN ii.245; AN iii.121; Snp 72; Ja i.165; Mil 400; Nd ii.679 (= migarājā) Vb-a 256, Vb-a 398 (with pop. etym. “sahanato ca hananato ca sīho ti vuccati”); Ja v.425 (women like the lion) Kp-a 140; often used as an epithet of the Buddha AN ii.24; AN iii.122; SN i.28; Iti 123; fem. sīhī lioness Ja ii.27 Ja iii.149, and sīhinī Mil 67.

-āsana a throne Mvu 5, Mvu 62; Mvu 25, Mvu 98. -kuṇḍala “lion’s ear-ring,” a very precious ear-ring Ja v.348; Snp-a 138 also as ˚mukha-kuṇḍala at Ja v.438. -camma lion’s hide AN iv.393. -tela “lion-oil,” a precious oil Kp-a 198 -nāda a lion’s roar, the Buddha’s preaching, a song of ecstasy, a shout of exultation “halleluiah” AN ii.33; MN i.71; DN i.161, DN i.175; SN ii.27, SN ii.55; Ja 119; Mil 22; Dhp-a ii.43, Dhp-a ii.178; Vb-a 398; (= seṭṭha-nāda abhīta-nāda); Snp-a 163, Snp-a 203. -nādika one who utters a lion’s roar, a song of ecstasy AN i.23. -pañjara a window Ja i.304; Ja ii.31; Dhp-a i.191. -papātaka “lion’s cliff,” Name of one of the great lakes in the Himavā Snp-a 407 and passim. -piṭṭhe on top of the lion Ja ii.244. -potaka a young lion Ja iii.149. -mukha “lion’s mouth,” an ornament at the side of the nave of the king’s chariot Kp-a 172. See also ˚kuṇḍala. -ratha a chariot drawn by lions Mil 121. -vikkīḷita the lion’s play, the attitude of the Buddhas and Arahants Ne 2, Ne 4, Ne 7, Ne 124. -seyyā lying like a lion, on the right side DN ii.134; AN i.114; AN ii.40 AN ii.244; Ja i.119, Ja i.330; Vb-a 345; Dhp-a i.357. -ssara having a voice like a lion Ja v.284, Ja v.296 etc. (said of a prince). -hanu having a jaw like a lion, of a Buddha DN iii.144, DN iii.175; Bv xiii.1 = Ja i.38.

Vedic siṃha

Sīhaḷa

Ceylon; (adj.) Singhalese Mvu 7, Mvu 44 sq.; 37, 62; 37, 175; Dhvs 9, 1; Kp-a 47, Kp-a 50, Kp-a 78; Snp-a 30, Snp-a 53 sq. 397. -˚kuddāla a Singhalese hoe Vism 255; Vb-a 238 -˚dīpa Ceylon Ja vi.30; Dhs-a 103; DN-a i.1; Kp-a 132 -˚bhāsā Singhalese (language) DN-a i.1; Tikp 259. See Dict. of Names.

Sīhaḷaka

(adj.) Singhalese Snp-a 397.

fr. last

Su1

(indecl.) a part. of exclamation “shoo!”; usually repeated su su Ja ii.250; Ja vi.165 (of the hissing of a snake); Thag-a 110 (scaring somebody away), 305 (sound of puffing). Sometimes as sū sū, e.g. Tikp 280 (of a snake), cp. sūkara ■ Denom susumāyati (q.v.).

onomat.

Su-2

(indecl.) a particle, combd with adj., nouns, and certain verb forms, to express the notion of “well, happily, thorough” (cp. E. well-bred wel-come, wel-fare); opp. du˚. It often acts as simple intensive prefix (cp. saṃ˚) in the sense of “very,” and is thus also combd with concepts which in themselves denote a deficiency or bad quality (cp. su-pāpika “very wicked”) and the prefix du˚; (e.g. su-duj-jaya, su-duddasa, su-dub-bala) ■ Our usual practice is to register words with su˚; under the simple word, whenever the character of the composition is evident at first sight (cp du˚; ). For convenience of the student however we give in the foll. a few compns as illustrating the use of su˚.

-kaṭa well done, good, virtuous DN i.55; Mil 5; sukata the same DN i.27; (nt.) a good deed, virtue Dhp 314; AN iii.245. -kara feasible, easy DN i.250; Dhp 163; Snp p.123; na sukaro so Bhagavā amhehi upasaṃkamituṃ SN i.9. -kiccha great trouble, pain Ja iv.451. -kittika well expounded Snp 1057. -kumāra delicate, lovely Mvu 59, Mvu 29; see sukhumāla. -kumālatta loveliness DN-a i.282. -kusala very skilful Ja i.220; -khara very hard (-hearted) Ja vi.508. (= suṭṭhu khara C.). -khetta a good field DN ii.353; AN i.135; SN i.21. -gajjin shrieking beautifully (of peacocks) Thag 211. -gandha fragrant Ja ii.20; pleasant odour Dhs 625. -gandhi = sugandha Ja 100. -gandhika fragrant Mvu 7, Mvu 27; Ja i.266. -gahana a good grip, tight seizing Ja i.223. -gahita and suggahīta, grasped tightly, attentive AN ii.148, AN ii.169; AN iii.179; Ja i.163, Ja i.222. -ggava virtuous Ja iv.53 (probably misspelling for suggata) ■ ghara having a nice house Ja vi.418, Ja vi.420. -carita well conducted, right, good Dhp 168 sq. (nt.) good conduct, virtue, merit AN i.49 sq. 57, 102; DN iii.52, DN iii.96, DN iii.152 sq., 169; Dhp 231; Iti 55 Iti 59 sq.; Pts i.115; Vism 199. -citta much variegated Dhp 151; Dhp-a iii.122. -cchanna well covered Dhp 14 -cchavi having a lovely skin, pleasant to the skin DN iii.159; Ja v.215; Ja vi.269. -jana a good man Mvu 1, Mvu 85 -jāta well born, of noble birth DN i.93; Snp 548 sq. -jāti of noble family Mvu 24, Mvu 50. -jīva easy to live Dhp 244 -tanu having a slender waist Vv 6412 (= sundara-sarīra Vv-a 280). -danta well subdued, tamed DN ii.254; Dhp 94; AN iv.376. -dassa easily seen Dhp 252; (m.) a kind of gods, found in the fourteenth rūpa-brahmaloka DN ii.52; Pp 17; Kv 207. -diṭṭha well seen Snp 178 p. 143. -divasa a lucky day Ja iv.209. -dujjaya difficult to win Mvu 26, Mvu 3. -duttara very difficult to escape from AN v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Dhp 86; Snp 358. -dukkara very difficult to do Ja v.31. -duccaja very hard to give up Ja vi.473. -duddasa very difficult to see Vin i.5 Thag 1098; Dhp 36; Dhp-a i.300; used as an epithet of Nibbāna SN iv.369. -duppadhaṃsiya very difficult to overwhelm DN iii.176. -dubbala very weak Snp 4 -dullabha very difficult to obtain Snp 138; Vv 4419 Vism 2; Vv-a 20. -desika a good guide Mil 354; Dhs-a 123; Vism 465. -desita well preached Dhp 44; Snp 88, Snp 230. -ddiṭṭha [ = su + uddiṭṭha] well set out Vin i.129; Ja iv.192. -ddhanta well blown MN iii.243; Dhs-a 326; = saṃdhanta AN i.253; Vin ii.59. -dhammatā good nature, good character, goodness, virtue Ja ii.159; Ja v.357; Ja vi.527. -dhota well washed, thoroughly clean Ja i.331. -nandī (scil. vedanā) pleasing, pleasurable SN i.53. -naya easily deducted, clearly understood AN iii.179 = sunnaya AN ii.148; iii. 179 (v.l.). -nahāta well bathed, well groomed DN i.104; as sunhāta at SN i.79 -nimmadaya easily overcome D 243 and sq. -nisita well whetted or sharpened Ja iv.118; as ˚nissita at Ja vi.248. -nisit-agga with a very sharp point Vv-a 227 -nīta well understood AN i.59. -pakka thoroughly ripe Mvu 15, Mvu 38. -paṇṇasālā a beautiful hut Ja i.7. -patittha having beautiful banks DN ii.129; Ud 83 = sūpatittha MN i.76. See also under sūpatittha ■ parikammakata well prepared, well polished DN i.76; AN ii.201; DN-a i.221 -pariccaja easy to give away Ja iii.68. -parimaṇḍala well rounded, complete Mvu 37, Mvu 225. -parihīna thoroughly bereft, quite done for Iti 35. -pāpa-kammin very wicked Ja v.143. -pāpa-dhamma very wicked Vv 521. -pāpika very sinful, wicked AN ii.203. -pāyita well saturated, i.e. hardened (of a sword) Ja iv.118 Cp. suthita ■ pāsiya easily threaded (of a needle Ja iii.282. -picchita well polished, shiny, slippery Ja v.197 (cp. Sk. picchala?). Dutoit “fest gepresst (pīḷ ?), so also Kern, Toev. ii.85. C. expls as suphassita-pipi good to drink Ja vi.526. -pīta see suthita ■ pubbaṇha a good morning AN i.294. -posatā good nature Vin i.45. -ppaṭikāra easy requital AN i.123. -ppaṭipanna well conducted AN ii.56; Pp 48 ■ tā, good conduct Ne 50. -ppaṭippatāḷita well played on DN ii.171; AN iv.263. -ppaṭividdha thoroughly understood AN ii.185 -ppatiṭṭhita firmly established Iti 77; Snp 444. -ppatīta well pleased Mvu 24, Mvu 64. -ppadhaṃsiya easily assaulted or overwhelmed DN iii.176; SN ii.264. Cp. ˚duppadhaṃsiya. -ppadhota thoroughly cleansed DN ii.324. -ppabhāta a good daybreak Snp 178. -ppameyya easily fathomed DN i.266; Pp 35. -ppavādita (music) well played Vv 39. -ppavāyita well woven, evenly woven Vin iii.259. -ppavedita well preached Iti 78; Thig 341; Thag-a 240. -ppasanna thoroughly full of faith Mvu 34, Mvu 74. -ppahāra a good blow Ja iii.83. -phassita agreeable to touch, very soft Ja i.220; Ja v.197 (C. for supicchita); smooth Vv-a 275. -bahu very much, very many Mvu 20, Mvu 9; Mvu 30, Mvu 18; Mvu 34, Mvu 15; Mvu 37, Mvu 48. -bāḷhika see bāḷhika ■ bbata virtuous, devout DN i.52; SN i.236; Snp 220; Dhp 95; Ja vi.493; Dhp-a ii.177; Dhp-a iii.99; Pv-a 226; Vv-a 151. -bbināya easy to understand Nd 326 -bbuṭṭhi abundant rainfall Mvu 15, Mvu 97; Dhp-a i.52 -kā the same DN i.11. -brahā very big Ja iv.111. -bhara easily supported, frugal; -tā frugality Vin i.45; Vin ii.2; MN i.13. -bhikkha having plenty of food (nt.) plenty DN i.11. -˚vāca called plenty, renowned for great liberality Iti 66. -bhūmi good soil MN i.124. -majja well polished Ja iii.282. -majjhantika a good noon AN i.294. -mati wise Mvu 15, Mvu 214. -matikata well harrowed AN i.239. -mada very joyful Ja v.328. -mana glad, happy DN i.3; DN iii.269; AN ii.198; Snp 222, Snp 1028; Dhp 68; Vism 174. kind, friendly Ja iv.217 (opp. disa) -manohara very charming Mvu 26, Mvu 17. -manta well-advised, careful Mil 318. -mānasa joyful Vin i.25 Mvu 1, Mvu 76. -māpita well built Ja i.7. -mutta happily released DN ii.162. -medha wise Vin i.5; MN i.142; AN ii.49 and sq.; Dhp 208; Snp 117, Snp 211 etc.; Iti 33; Nd i.453. -medhasa wise DN ii.267; AN ii.70; Dhp 29. -yiṭṭha well sacrificed AN ii.44. -yutta well suited, suitable Ja i.296. -ratta very red Ja i.119; Dhp-a i.249. -rabhi fragrant SN iv.71; Vv 8432; Ja i.119; AN iii.238; Vv 4412 538, 716; Pv ii.123; Vism 195 (˚vilepana); Vv-a 237; Pv-a 77; Davs iv.40; Mil 358. -˚karaṇḍaka fragrance box, a fragrant box Thig 253; Thag-a 209. -ruci resplendent Snp 548. -ruddha very fierce Ja v.425, Ja v.431 (read ˚rudda) ■ rūpin handsome Mvu 22, Mvu 20. -rosita nicely anointed Ja v.173. -laddha well taken; (nt.) a good gain, bliss Vin i.17; Iti 77. -labha easy to be obtained Iti 102; Ja i.66; Ja vi.125; Pv-a 87. -vaca of nice speech, compliant MN i.43, MN i.126; Snp 143; AN iii.78; Ja i.224 Often with padakkhiṇaggāhin (q.v.). See also subbaca & abstr. der.; sovacassa ■ vatthi [i.e. su + asti] hail well-being Cp. 100 = Ja iv.31; cp. sotthi ■ vammita well harnessed Ja i.179. -vavatthāpita well known, ascertained Ja i.279; Mil 10. -vānaya [i.e. su-v-ānaya easily brought, easy to catch Ja i.80, Ja i.124, Ja i.238. -viggaha of a fine figure, handsome Mvu 19, Mvu 28. -vijāna easily known Snp 92; Ja iv.217. -viññāpaya easy to instruct Vin i.6. -vidūravidūra very far off AN ii.50 -vibhatta well divided and arranged Snp 305. -vilitta well perfumed DN i.104. -vimhita very dismayed Ja vi.270. -visada very clean or clear Snp-a 195. -visama very uneven, dangerous Th ii.352; Thag-a 242. -vihīna thoroughly bereft Ja i.144. -vuṭṭhikā abundance of rain Ja ii.80; Snp-a 27; DN-a i.95; see subbuṭṭhikā-vositaṃ happily ended Ja iv.314. -saṅkhata well prepared AN ii.63. -saññā (f.) having a good understanding Ja v.304; Ja vi.49, Ja vi.52, Ja vi.503 (for ˚soññā? C. sussoṇiya, i.e. having beautiful hips); Ap 307 (id.). -saññata thoroughly restrained Ja i.188. -saṇṭhāna having a good consistence, well made Snp 28. -sattha well trained Ja iii.4. -sandhi having a lovely opening Ja v.204 -samāgata thoroughly applied to AN iv.271 (aṭṭhanga˚ i.e. uposatha). -samāraddha thoroughly undertaken DN ii.103; SN ii.264 sq.; Dhp 293; Dhp-a iii.452. -samāhita well grounded, steadfast DN ii.120; Dhp 10; Dhp-a iv.114; Iti 113; -atta of steadfast mind SN i.4, SN i.29 -samucchinna thoroughly eradicated MN i.102. -samuṭṭhāpaya easily raised SN v.113. -samudānaya easy to accomplish Ja iii.313. -sambuddha easy to understand Vin i.5; Snp 764; SN i.136. -sāyaṇha a good, blissful evening AN i.294. -sikkhita well learnt, thoroughly acquired Snp 261; easily trained, docile Ja i.444; Ja ii.43 -sikkhāpita well taught, trained Ja i.444. -sippika a skilful workman Mvu 34, Mvu 72. -sīla moral, virtuous SN i.141. -sukka very white, resplendent DN ii.18 DN iii.144; Snp 548. -seyya lying on soft beds SN ii.268 -ssata well remembered MN i.520. -ssara melodious Vv 364; Snp-a 355. -ssavana good news Ja i.61. -ssoṇi having beautiful hips Ja iv.19; Ja v.7, Ja v.294; cp. sussoṇiya Ja vi.503, & see; ˚saññā ■ hajja friend SN iv.59; Dhp 219; Snp 37; Ja i.274; AN iv.96; Dhp-a iii.293. -hada friendly good- hearted a friend DN iii.187 (= sundara-hadaya C. Ja iv.76; Ja vi.382; suhadā a woman with child Ja v.330 -hanna modesty Ja i.421. See hanna ■ huṭṭhita [su uṭṭhita] well risen Snp 178. -huta well offered, burnt as a sacrifical offering AN ii.44.

Vedic su˚, cp. Gr. εὐ-

Su3

(indecl.) (-˚) a particle of interrogation, often added to interrogative pronouns; thus kaṃ su SN i.45; kena ssu SN i.39; kissa ssu SN i.39, SN i.161 (so read for kissassa); ko su Snp 173, Snp 181; kiṃ su Snp 1108; kathaṃ su Snp 183, Snp 185 Snp 1077; it is often also used as a pleonastic particle in narration; thus tadā su then DN ii.212; hatthe su sati when the hand is there SN iv.171. It often takes the forms ssu and assu; thus tyassu = te assu DN ii.287 yassāhaṃ = ye assu ahaṃ DN ii.284 n. 5; api ssu Vin i.5 Vin ii.7, Vin ii.76; tad-assu = tadā su then Ja i.196; tay’assu three Snp 231; āditt’assu kindled DN ii.264; nāssu not Snp 291 Snp 295, Snp 297, Snp 309; sv-assu = so su Ja i.196. Euphonic ṃ is sometimes added yehi-ṃ-su Ja vi.564 n. 3; kacciṃ-su Snp 1045, Snp 1079.

*ssu, fr. Vedic svid, interrog. part., of which other forms are si and sudaṃ. It also stands for Vedic sma, deictic part. of emphasis, for which also sa & assa;

Suṃsumāra

a crocodile SN iv.198; Thig 241; Thag-a 204; Ja ii.158 sq.; Vism 446; Snp-a 207 (˚kucchi); Dhp-a iii.194˚rī (f.) a female crocodile Ja ii.159; suṃsumārinī (f.) Mil 67; suṃsumārapatitena vandeti to fall down in salutation DN-a i.291.

cp. Sk. śiśumāra, lit. child-killing

Suka

a parrot Ja i.458; Ja ii.132; instead of suka read sūka SN v.10. See suva.

Vedic śuka, fr. śuc

Sukka1

planet, star Ud. 9 = Ne 150; (nt.) semen, sukkavisaṭṭhi emission of semen Vin ii.38; Vin iii.112; Vin iv.30; Kv 163.

Vedic śukra; fr. śuc

Sukka2

(adj.) white, bright; bright, pure, good SN ii.240; SN v.66, SN v.104; Dhp 87; Dhs 1303; Iti 36; Ja i.129; Mil 200; sukkadhamma Ja i.129; kaṇhāsukkaṃ evil and good Snp 526; Sukkā a class of gods DN ii.260.

-aṃsa bright lot, fortune Dhp 72; Dhp-a ii.73. -chavi having a white skin Ja iv.184; Ja vi.508; at both pass. said of the sons of widows. -pakkha [cp. BSk. śukla-pakṣa Divy 38] the bright fortnight of a month AN ii.19; Mil 388; Ja iv.26 (opp. kāḷa-pakkha); the bright half, the good opportunity Thig 358; Thag-a 2.

Vedic śukla

Sukkha

(adj.) dry, dried up DN ii.347; Ja i.228, Ja i.326; Ja iii.435; Ja v.106; Mil 261, Mil 407. Cp pari˚, vi˚.

-kaddama dried mud Mvu 17, Mvu 35. -kantāra desert Ja v.70. -vipassaka “dry-visioned” Cpd. 55, 75; with diff. expln Geiger, Saṃyutta tsrln ii.172 n. 1.

Vedic śuṣka, fr. śuṣ

Sukkhati

to be dried up Mil 152; Ja v.472; ppr. sukkhanto getting dry Ja i.498; ppr. med sukkhamāna wasting away Ja i.104; Caus. II. sukkhāpeti SN i.8; Vin iv.86; Ja i.201, Ja i.380; Ja ii.56; DN-a i.262 see also pubbāpeti ■ pp. sukkhita.

fr. śuṣka dry; śuṣ

Sukkhana

(nt.) drying up Ja iii.390 (assu-˚).

fr. sukkha

Sukkhāpana

(nt.) drying, making dry Ja vi.420.

fr. sukkhāpeti

Sukkhita

dried up, emaciated Mil 303. Cp. pari˚.

pp. of sukkhati

Sukha

(adj.-n.) agreeable, pleasant, blest Vin i.3; Dhp 118, Dhp 194, Dhp 331; Snp 383; paṭipadā, pleasant path, easy progress AN ii.149 sq.; Dhs 178; kaṇṇa-s. pleasant to the ear DN i.4; happy, pleased DN ii.233 ■ nt. sukhaṃ wellbeing happiness, ease; ideal, success Vin i.294; DN i.73 sq.; MN i.37; SN i.5; AN iii.355 (deva-manussānaṃ) Iti 47; Dhp 2; Snp 67; Dhs 10; Dhs-a 117; Pv-a 207 (lokiya worldly happiness) ■ kāyika sukkha bodily welfare Tikp 283; cp. Cpd. 1121; sāmisaṃ s. material happiness AN i.81; AN iii.412; Vb-a 268. On relation to pīti (joy see Vism 145 (sankhāra-kkhandha-sangahitā pīti vedanā-kkhandha-sangahitaṃ sukhaṃ) and Cpd. 56 243 ■ Defined further at Vism 145 & 461 (iṭṭha-phoṭṭhabb-ânubhavana-lakkhaṇaṃ; i.e. of the kind of experiencing pleasant contacts) ■ Two kinds, viz kāyika & cetasika; at Pts i.188; several other pairs at AN i.80; three (praise, wealth, heaven) Iti 67; another three (manussa˚, dibba˚, nibbāna˚) Dhp-a iii.51; four (possessing, making good use of possessions, having no debts, living a blameless life) AN ii.69 ■ gātha -bandhana-sukh’atthaṃ for the beauty of the verse Ja ii.224-Opp. asukha DN iii.222, DN iii.246; Snp 738; or dukkha, with which often combd (e.g. Snp 67, Snp 873, with spelling dukha at both pass.) ■ Cases: instr. sukhena with comfort happily, through happiness Thag 220; Dhs-a 406; acc sukhaṃ comfortably, in happiness; yathā s. according to liking Pv-a 133; sukhaṃ seti to rest in ease, to lie well SN i.41; AN i.136; Dhp 19, Dhp 201; Ja i.141. Cp. sukhasayita-s. edhati to thrive, prosper SN i.217; Dhp 193; Snp 298; cp. sukham-edha Vin iii.137 (with Kern’s remarks Toev. ii.83). s. viharati to live happily AN i.96; AN iii.3; Dhp 379 ■ Der. sokhya.

-atthin fem ■ nī longing for happiness Mvu 6, Mvu 4 -āvaha bringing happiness, conducive to ease SN i.2 sq. 55; Dhp 35; Ja ii.42. -indriya the faculty of ease SN v.209 sq.; Dhs 452; Iti 15, Iti 52. -udraya (sometimes spelt ˚undriya ) having a happy result AN i.97; Pts i.80; Pv iv.178 (= sukha-vipāka Pv-a 243); Vv 318. -ūpaharaṇa happy offering, luxury Ja i.231. -edhita read as sukhe ṭhita (i.e. being happy) at Vin iii.13 & S; v.351 (v.l. sukhe ṭhita); also at Dhp-a i.165; cp. Ja vi.219. -esin looking for pleasure Dhp 341. -kāma longing for happiness MN i.341; SN iv.172, SN iv.188. -da giving pleasure Snp 297 -dhamma a good state MN i.447. -nisinna comfortably seated Ja iv.125. -paṭisaṃvedin experiencing happiness Pp 61. -ppatta come to well-being, happy Ja iii.112 -pharaṇatā diffusion of well-being, ease Ne 89 (among the constituents of samādhi). -bhāgiya participating in happiness Ne 120 sq., 125 sq., 239 (the four s. dhammā are indriyasaṃvara, tapasaṃkhāta puññadhamma, bojjhangabhāvanā and sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggasankhāta nibbāna). -bhūmi a soil of ease, source of ease Dhs 984; Dhs-a 346. -yānaka an easy-going cart Dhp-a 325 -vinicchaya discernment of happiness MN iii.230 sq -vipāka resulting in happiness, ease DN i.51; AN i.98; DN-a i.158. -vihāra dwelling at ease SN v.326. -vihārin dwelling at ease, well at ease DN i.75; Dhs 163; Ja i.140 -saṃvāsa pleasant to associate with Dhp 207. -saññin conceiving happiness, considering as happiness AN ii.52 -samuddaya origin of bliss Iti 16, Iti 52. -samphassa pleasant to touch Dhs 648. -sammata deemed a pleasure Snp 760. -sayita well embedded (in soil), of seeds AN iii.404 = DN ii.354.

Vedic sukha; in R. V. only of ratha; later generally

Sukhallikānuyoga

luxurious living Vin i.1012 (kāma-˚). See under kāma˚.

same in BSk.

Sukhāyati

to be pleased Ja ii.31 (asukhāyamāna being displeased with).

Denom. fr. sukha

Sukhita

happy, blest, glad SN i.52; SN iii.11 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); iv.180; Snp 1029; Pv ii.811; healthy Mvu 37, Mvu 128; ˚-atta [ātman happy, easy Snp 145.

pp. of sukheti

Sukhin

(adj.) happy, at ease DN i.31, DN i.73, DN i.108; AN ii.185; SN i.20, SN i.170; SN iii.83; Dhp 177; Snp 145; being well, unhurt Ja iii.541; fem. -nī DN ii.13; MN ii.126.

fr. sukha

Sukhuma

(adj.) subtle, minute Vin i.14; DN i.182; SN iv.202; AN ii.171; Dhs 676; Thig 266; Dhp 125 = Snp 662; Vism 274, Vism 488 (˚rūpā). fine, exquisite DN ii.17, DN ii.188; Mil 313; susukhuma, very subtle Thag 71 = Thag 210 (˚-nipuṇattha-dassin); cp. sokhumma; khoma-˚, kappāsa-˚, kambala-˚ (n.?) the finest sorts of linen, cotton stuff, woolwork (resp.) Mil 105 ■ Der sokhumma.

-acchika fine-meshed DN i.45; DN-a i.127; Ap 21 (jāla) -diṭṭhi subtle view Iti 75. -dhāra with fine edge Mil 105.

Epic Sk. sūkṣma

Sukhumaka

= sukhuma Pts i.185.

Sukhumatta

(nt.) fineness, delicacy DN ii.17 sq.

abstr. fr. sukhuma

Sukhumāla

(adj.) tender, delicate, refined, delicately nurtured AN i.145; AN ii.86 sq.; AN iii.130; Vin i.15, Vin i.179; Vin ii.180; beautifully young, graceful Ja i.397; Snp 298; samaṇa-˚ a soft, graceful Samaṇa AN ii.87; fem. sukhumālinī Thig 217; Mil 68, & sukhumālī Ja vi.514.

cp. Sk. su-kumāra

Sukhumālatā

(f.) delicate constitution Ja v.295; Dhp-a iii.283 (ati˚).

abstr. fr. sukhumāla

Sukheti

to make happy DN i.51; SN iv.331; DN-a i.157; also sukhayati Dhs-a 117; Caus. II. sukhāpeti DN ii.202; Mil 79 ■ pp. sukhita.

Caus. fr. sukha

Sugata

faring well, happy, having a happy life after death (gati): see under gata; cp. Vism 424 (s. sugati-gata). Freq. Ep. of the Buddha (see Dict. of Names).

-aṅgula a Buddha-inch, an inch according to the standard accepted by Buddhists Vin iv.168. -ālaya imitation of the Buddha Ja i.490, Ja i.491; Ja ii.38, Ja ii.148, Ja ii.162 Ja iii.112. -ovāda a discourse of the Blessed one Ja i.119 Ja i.349; Ja ii.9, Ja ii.13, Ja ii.46; Ja iii.368. -vidatthi a Buddha-span, a span of the accepted length Vin iii.149; Vin iv.173. -vinaya the discipline of the Buddha AN ii.147.

su + gata

Sugati

(f.) happiness, bliss, a happy fate (see detail under gati ) Vin ii.162, Vin ii.195; DN i.143; DN ii.141 Pp 60; Iti 24, Iti 77, Iti 112; AN iii.5, AN iii.205; AN v.268; Vism 427 (where defd as “sundarā gati” & distinguished fr; sagga as including “manussagati,” whereas sagga is “devagati”); Vb-a 158; Dhp-a i.153suggati (in verses), Dhp 18; DN ii.202 (printed as prose); Ja iv.436 (= sagga C.); vi.224. Kern, Toev. ii.83 expld suggati as svargati, analogous to svar-ga (= sagga); doubtful Cp. duggati.

su + gati

Sugatin

(adj.) righteous Dhp 126; Ja i.219 = Vin ii.162 (suggatī).

fr. sugati

Suṅka

(m. and nt.) 1. toll, tax, customs Vin iii.52; Vin iv.131; AN i.54 sq.; Dhp-a ii.2; Ja iv.132; Ja vi.347; Pv-a iii.

2. gain, profit Thig 25 Thag-a 32.

3. purchase-price of a wife Thig 420; Ja vi.266; Mil 47 sq ■ odhisunka stake Ja vi.279 ˚-gahana Ja v.254; a-suṃkâraha Ja v.254.

-ghāta customs’ frontier Vin iii.47, Vin iii.52. -ṭṭhāna taxing place, customs’ house Vin iii.62; Mil 359 -sāyika (?) customs’ officer Mil 365 (read perhaps ˚sādhaka or ˚sālika?).

cp. Vedic śulka, nt.

Suṅkika

a receiver of customs Ja v.254.

sunka + ika

Suṅkiya

(nt.) price paid for a wife Ja vi.266.

abstr. fr. sunka

Suci

(adj.) pure, clean, white DN i.4; AN i.293; Snp 226, Snp 410 ■ opp. asuci impure AN iii.226; AN v.109 AN v.266 ■ (nt.) purity, pure things Ja i.22; goodness, merit Dp 245; a tree used for making foot-boards Vv-a 8.

-kamma whose actions are pure Dhp 24. -gandha having a sweet perfume Dhp 58; Dhp-a i.445. -gavesin longing for purity SN i.205; Dhp-a iii.354. -ghaṭika read sūcighaṭikā at Vin ii.237. -ghara Vin ii.301 sq.; see sūcighara. -jātika of clean descent Ja ii.11. -bhojana pure food Snp 128. -mhita having a pleasant, serene smile Vv 1810; 5025; 6412; Vv-a 96, Vv-a 280 (also explained as a name); Ja iv.107. -vasana wearing clean, bright clothes Snp 679.

Vedic śuci

Sucimant

(adj.) pure, an epithet of the Buddha AN iv.340.

suci + mant

Sujā

(f.) a sacrificial ladle DN i.120, DN i.138; SN i.169; DN-a i.289, DN-a i.299.

Vedic sruc, f.

Sujjhati

to become clean or pure MN i.39; SN i.34, SN i.166; Nd i.85; Vism 3; cp. pari˚ ■ pp. suddha -Caus. sodheti (q.v.).

śudh which the Dhtp (417) defines as “soceyye,” i.e. from cleansing

Sujjhana

(nt.) purification Vism 44.

fr. sujjhati

Suñña

(adj.) 1. empty, uninhabited DN i.17; DN ii.202; SN i.180; SN iv.173; DN-a i.110; Mil 5.

2. empty, devoid of reality, unsubstantial, phenomenal MN i.435; SN iii.167; SN iv.54, SN iv.296; Snp 1119; Nd i.439 (loka).

3. empty, void, useless MN i.483; SN iv.54, SN iv.297; Dāvs v.17; Mil 96; Vism 594 sq. (of nāmarūpa, in simile with suñña dāruyanta) suññasuñña empty of permanent substance Pts ii.178 asuñña not empty Mil 130 ■ nt. suññaṃ emptiness annihilation, Nibbāna Vism 513 (three nirodha-suññāni); abl. ˚to from the point of view of the “Empty Nd ii.680 (long exegesis of suññato at Snp 1119); Vism 512 Vb-a 89, Vb-a 261; Kp-a 74.

-āgāra an empty place, an uninhabited spot, solitude Vin i.97, Vin i.228; Vin ii.158, Vin ii.183; Vin iii.70, Vin iii.91 sq.; DN i.175; DN ii.86 DN ii.291, MN i.33; SN iv.133, SN iv.359 sq.; AN iii.353; AN iv.139, AN iv.392 AN iv.437; AN v.109, AN v.207, AN v.323 sq.; Iti 39; Ja iii.191; Mil 344 Vism 270; Nd ii.94. -gāma an empty (deserted) village (in similes) Vism 484; Vb-a 48; Dhs 597; Dhs-a 309 ˚tthāna Vism 353; Vb-a 57.

cp. Sk. śūnya, fr. Vedic śūna, nt., void

Suññata

(adj.) void, empty, devoid of lusts, evil dispositions, and karma, but especially of soul, ego Thig 46; Thag-a 50; Dhs 344; Mvu 37, Mvu 7; nibbāna Dhs-a 221; phassa SN iv.295; vimokkha Dhp 92; Dhp-a ii.172; Mil 413 vimokkha samādhi, and samāpatti Vin iii.92 sq. Vin iv.25 sq.; samādhi (contemplation of emptiness, see Cpd. 216) DN iii.219 (one of. three samādhis); SN iv.360 SN iv.363; Mil 337; anupassanā Pts ii.43 sq.

i.e. the abl. suññato used as adj. nom.

Suññatā

(f.) emptiness, “void,” unsubstantiality, phenomenality; freedom from lust, ill-will and dullness, Nibbāna MN iii.111; Kv 232; Dhs-a 221; Ne 118 sq., 123 sq., 126; Mil 16; Vism 333 (n’atthi; suñña; vivitta; i, e. abhāva, suññatā, vivitt’ ākāra), 578 (12 fold, relating to the Paṭiccasamuppāda) 653 sq.; Vb-a 262 (atta˚, attaniya˚, niccabhāva˚).

-pakāsana the gospel of emptiness DN-a i.99, DN-a i.123; -paṭisaṃyutta relating to the Void, connected with Nibbāna AN i.72 = AN iii.107 = SN ii.267; DN-a i.100 sq.; Mil 16 -vihāra dwelling in the concept of emptiness Vin ii.304; MN iii.104, MN iii.294. See on term e.g. Cpd. 69; Kvu trsln 142, n. 4.

abstr. fr. suñña

Suññatta

(nt.) emptiness, the state of being devoid Dhs-a 221.

abstr. fr. suñña

Suṭṭhu

(indecl.) well; the usual C. expln of the prefix su2 Pv-a 19, Pv-a 51, Pv-a 52, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 77, Pv-a 103 etc. s. tāta well, father Ja i.170; s. kataṃ you have done well Ja i.287; DN-a i.297; suṭṭhutaraṃ still more Ja i.229; Snp-a 418.

cp. Sk. suṣṭhu, fr. su˚

Suṭṭhutā

(f.) excellence AN i.98 sq.; Ne 50.

abstr. fr. suṭṭhu

Suṇa

“dog,” preferable spelling for suna, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 931.

Suṇāti

(suṇoti) to hear. Pres. suṇāti DN i.62, DN i.152; SN v.265; Snp 696; Iti 98; Mil 5suṇoti Ja iv.443; Pot. suṇeyya Vin i.7; DN i.79; suṇe Ja iv.240; Imper. suṇa SN iii.121; sunāhi Snp p.21; suṇohi DN i.62; Snp 997; Snp 3rd sg. suṇātu Vin i.56; Vin i.1st pl. suṇāma Snp 354; suṇoma Snp 350, Snp 988, Snp 1110; Pv iv.131.

2nd pl. suṇātha DN i.131; DN ii.76; Iti 41; Snp 385; Pv-a 13. suṇotha Snp 997; Mil 1.

3rd pl suṇantu Vin i.5 ■ ppr. sunanto Snp 1023; DN-a i.261 savaṃ Ja iii.244 ■ inf. sotuṃ DN ii.2; Snp 384; suṇitum Mil 91 ■ Fut. sossati DN ii.131, DN ii.265; Ja ii.107; Ja ii.63 Ap 156; Vv-a 187; Vv-a 1st sg. sussaṃ Snp 694.

2nd sg. sossi Ja vi.423 ■ aor. 1st sg. assuṃ Ja iii.572.

2nd sg. assu Ja iii.541.

3rd sg. suṇi Ja iv.336; assosi DN i.87, DN i.152 Snp p.103; Snp p.1st pl. assumha Ja ii.79.

2nd pl. assuttha SN i.157; SN ii.230. 3rd pl. assosuṃ Vin i.18; DN i.111. ger. sutvā Vin i.12; DN i.4; Snp 30. sutvāna Vin i.19; DN ii.30; Snp 202. suṇitvā Ja v.96; Mvu 23, Mvu 80. suṇiya Mvu 23, Mvu 101 ■ Pass. sūyati MN i.30; Ja i.72, Ja i.86; Mil 152. suyyati Ja iv.141; Ja iv.160; Ja v.459. 3rd pl. sūyare Ja vi.528 ■ Grd. savanīya what should be heard, agreeable to the ear DN ii.211. sotabba DN i.175; DN ii.346. pp. suta: see separately ■ Caus. sāveti to cause to hear to tell, declare, announce Ja i.344; Mvu 5, Mvu 238; Pv-a 200; Vv-a 66. nāmaṃ s. to shout out one’s name Vin i.36; DN-a i.262; maṃ dāsī ti sāvaya announce me to be your slave Ja iii.437; cp. Ja iv.402 (but see on this passage and on Ja iii.198; Ja vi.486 Kern’s proposed reading sāṭeti ); to cause to be heard, to play DN ii.265. Caus also suṇāpeti Dhp-a i.206 ■ Desiderative sussūsati (often written sussūyati) DN i.230; MN iii.133 (text sussūsanti), AN iv.393 (do.) ■ ppr. sussusaṃ Snp 189 (var read., text sussussā); sussūsamāna Snp 383; aor. sussūsiṃsu Vin i.10; fut. sussūsissanti Vin i.150; SN ii.267 (text sussu-).

śru, Vedic śṛṇoti; cp. Gr. κλέω to praise; Lat. clueo to be called; Oir. clunim to hear; Goth hliup attention, hliuma hearing, and many others

Suṇisā

(f.) a daughter-in-law Vin i.240; Vin iii.136; DN ii.148; MN i.186, MN i.253; Ja vi.498; Vv 135 (= puttassa bhariyā Vv-a 61); Dhp-a i.355; Dhp-a iv.8; Pv ii.46 (pl. suṇisāyo so read for sūtisāye) ■ suṇhā the same Vin ii.10; AN iv.91; Thig 406; Ja ii.347; Ja vi.506; Pv iv.3.43

Vedic snuṣā; cp. Gr. νυός; Ohg. snur; Ags. snoru; Lat. nurus

Suta1

1. heard; in special sense “received through inspiration or revelation” learned; taught A 97 sq.; DN iii.164 sq., 241 sq.; freq in phrase “iti me sutaṃ” thus have I heard, I have received this on (religious) authority, e.g. Iti 22 sq. (nt.) sacred lore, inspired tradition, revelation; learning religious knowledge MN iii.99; AN i.210 sq.; AN ii.6 sq. SN iv.250; Ja ii.42; Ja v.450, Ja v.485; Mil 248appa-ssuta one who has little learning AN ii.6 sq., 218; iii.181 v.40, 152; bahu-ssuta one who has much learning famous for inspired knowledge AN ii.6 sq.; AN iii.113 sq. 182 sq., 261 sq.; SN ii.159. See bahu. asuta not heard Vin i.238; Pv iv.161; Ja iii.233; also as assuta Ja i.390 (˚pubba never heard before); iii.233 ■ na suta pubbaṃ a thing never heard of before Ja iii.285. dussuta MN i.228; sussuta MN iii.104.

2. renowned Ja ii.442.

-ādhāra holding (i.e. keeping in mind, preserving) the sacred learning Ja iii.193; Ja vi.287. -kavi a Vedic poet a poet of sacred songs AN ii.230. -dhana the treasure of revelation DN iii.163, DN iii.251; AN iii.53; AN iv.4 sq.; Vv-a 113 -dhara remembering what has been heard (or taught in the Scriptures) AN ii.23 (+ ˚sannicaya); iii.152, 261 sq -maya consisting in learning (or resting on sacred tradition), one of the 3 kinds of knowledge (paññā) viz. cintā-mayā, s ■ m., bhāvanā-mayā paññā DN iii.219 Vb 324 (expld at Vism 439); as ˚mayī at Pts i.4, Pts i.22 sq. Ne 8, Ne 50, Ne 60. -ssava far-renowned (Ep. of the Buddha Snp 353.

pp. of suṇāti; cp. Vedic śruta

Suta2

son Mvu 1, Mvu 47; fem. sutā daughter, Thig 384.

Sk. suta, pp. of (or su ) to generate

Sutatta

(nt.) the fact of having heard or learnt Snp-a 166.

abstr. fr. suta1

Sutappaya

(adj.) easily contented AN i.87; Pp 26 (opp. dut˚).

su + grd. of tappati2

Sutavant

(adj.) one who is learned in religious knowledge Vin i.14; AN ii.178; AN iii.55; AN iv.68, AN iv.157; SN iii.57; Tikp 279; Snp 70 (= āgama-sampanna Snp-a 124) 90, 371; sutavanta-nimmita founded by learned, pious men Mil 1; assutavant, unlearned MN i.1 (˚vā puthujjano laymen); Dhs 1003; AN iii.54; AN iv.157.

suta1 + vant

Suti

(f.) 1. hearing, tradition, inspiration, knowledge of the Vedas Snp 839, Snp 1078; Mil 3 (+ sammuti); Mvu 1, Mvu 3. 2. rumour; sutivasena by hearsay, as a story, through tradition Ja iii.285, Ja iii.476; Ja vi.100.

3. a sound, tone Vv-a 139 (dvāvīsati suti-bhedā 22 kinds of sound).

cp. śruti revelation as opp. to smṛti tradition

Sutitikkha

(adj.) easy to endure Ja 524.

fr. su + titikkhā

Sutta1

asleep Vin iii.117; Vin v.205; DN i.70; DN ii.130; Dhp 47; Iti 41; Ja v.328 ■ (nt.) sleep DN ii.95; MN i.448; SN iv.169. In phrase ˚-pabuddha “awakened from sleep” referring to the awakening (entrance) in the deva-world, e.g. Vism 314 (brahmalokaṃ uppajjati) Dhp-a i.28 (kanaka-vimāne nibbatti); iii.7 (id.); cp SN i.143.

pp. of supati

Sutta2

(nt.) 1. a thread, string DN i.76; DN ii.13; Vin ii.150; Pv ii.111 (= kappāsiyā sutta Pv-a 146); Ja i.52 ■ fig. for taṇhā at Dhs 1059; Dhs-a 364kāḷa˚; a carpenter’s measuring line Ja ii.405; Mil 413; dīgha˚; with long thread Ja v.389; makkaṭa˚ spider’s thread Vism 136; yantā˚; string of a machine Vb-a 241 ■ Mentioned with kappāsa as barter for cīvara at Vin iii.216.

2. the (discursive, narrational part of the Buddhist Scriptures containing the suttas or dialogues, later called Sutta-piṭaka (cp. Suttanta) As such complementary to the Vinaya. The fanciful expln of the word at Dhs-a 19 is: “atthānaṃ sūcanto suvuttato savanato ‘tha sūdanato suttāṇā-sutta-sabhāgato ca suttaṃ Suttan ti akkhātaṃ.”-D ii.124; Vin ii.97; Vb-a 130 (+ vinaya); Snp-a 159, Snp-a 310 (compared with Vinaya & Abhidhamma).

3. one of the divisions of the Scriptures (see; navanga ) AN ii.103, AN ii.178; AN iii.177 AN iii.361 sq.; Mil 263.

4. a rule, a clause (of the Pātimokkha) Vin i.65, Vin i.68; Vin ii.68, Vin ii.95; Vin iii.327.

5. a chapter division, dialogue (of a Buddh. text), text, discourse (see also suttanta ) SN iii.221 (pl. suttā), 253; v.46; Ne 118; Dhs-a 28. suttaso chapter by chapter AN v.72, AN v.81 suttato according to the suttas Vism 562 = Vb-a 173

6. an ancient verse, quotation Ja i.288, Ja i.307, Ja i.314. 7. book of rules, lore, text book Ja i.194 (go˚ lore of cows); ii.46 (hatthi˚ elephant trainer’s handbook).

-anta 1. a chapter of the Scriptures, a text, a discourse a sutta, dialogue Vin i.140 sq., 169; ii.75 iii.159; iv.344; AN i.60, AN i.69, AN i.72; AN ii.147; SN ii.267 = AN iii.107 (suttantā kavi-katā kāveyyā citt’akkharā cittavyañjanā bāhirakā sāvaka-bhāsitā); Vism 246 sq. (three suttantas helpful for kāyagatā sati).

2. the Suttantapiṭaka, opp. to the Vinaya Vism 272 (˚aṭṭhakathā opp to Vinay’aṭṭhakathā). As ˚piṭaka e.g. at Kp-a 12 Vb-a 431. See Proper Names. -kantikā (scil. itthi a woman spinner Pv-a 75; as ˚kantī at Ja ii.79. -kāra a cotton-spinner Mil 331. -guḷa a ball of string DN i.54; MN iii.95; Pv iv.329; Pv-a 145. -jāla a web of thread, a spider’s web Nd ii.260. -bhikkhā begging for thread Pv-a 145. -maya made of threads, i.e. a net Snp-a 115 Snp-a 263. -rajjuka a string of threads Vism 253; Vb-a 236 -lūkha roughly sewn together Vin i.287, Vin i.297. -vāda a division of the Sabbatthavādins Dpvs 5, 48; Mvu 5, Mvu 6 Mhbv 97. -vibhaṅga classification of rules Vin ii.97 Also title of a portion of the Vinaya Piṭaka.

Vedic sūtra, fr. sīv to sew

Suttaka

(nt.) a string Vin ii.271; Pv-a 145; a string of jewels or beads Vin ii.106; Vin iii.48; Dhs-a 321 a term for lust Dhs-a 364.

fr. sutta

Suttantika

versed in the Suttantas. A suttantika bhikkhu is one who knows the Suttas (contrasted with vinayadhara who knows the rules of the Vinaya) Vin ii.75 Cp. dhamma C 1 & piṭaka ■ Vin i.169; Vin ii.75, Vin ii.161 Vin iii.159; Ja i.218; Mil 341; Vism 41, Vism 72, Vism 93; Kp-a 151 -duka the Suttanta pairs, the pairs of terms occurring in the Suttantas Dhs 1296 sq.; -vatthūni the physical bases of spiritual exercise in the Suttantas Pts i.186.

Sutti1

(f.) in kuruvindakasutti a powder for rubbing the body Vin ii.107; see sotti.

cp. Sk. śukti, given as pearl-shell (Suśruta), and as a perfume

Sutti2

(f.) a good saying Sdhp 340, Sdhp 617.

Sk. sūkti

Suthita

(?) beaten out, Mil 415 (with vv.ll. suthiketa, suphita & supita). Should we read su-poṭhita? Kern; Toev. ii.85 proposes su-pīta “well saturated” (with which cp. supāyita Ja iv.118, said of a sword).

Sudaṃ

(indecl.) a deictic (seemingly pleonastic) particle in combn with demonstr. pronouns and adverbs; untranslatable, unless by “even, just,” e.g. tapassī sudaṃ homi, lūkha ssudaṃ [sic] homi etc. MN i.77 = Ja i.390; cp. itthaṃ sudaṃ thus Snp p.59; tatra sudaṃ there Vin i.4, Vin i.34; Vin iv.108; DN i.87 DN ii.91; Iti 15; api ssudaṃ DN ii.264; SN i.119; api sudaṃ SN i.113; sā ssudam SN ii.255.

= Vedic svid, influenced by sma: see su3

Sudda

(see detail under vaṇṇa 6) a Sūdra Vin ii.239; DN i.104; DN iii.81, DN iii.95 sq. (origin); MN i.384; AN i.162; AN ii.194; SN i.102; Pp 60; Snp 314; fem. suddī DN i.241; AN iii.226, AN iii.229; Vin iii.133.

cp. Vedic śūdra

Suddha

1. clean, pure, Vin i.16; Vin ii.152; DN i.110; Snp 476.

2. purified, pure of heart MN i.39; Dhp 125, Dhp 412; Snp 90

3. simple, mere, unmixed, nothing but SN i.135; Dhs-a 72; Ja ii.252 (˚daṇḍaka just the stick).

-antaparivāsa a probation of complete purification Vin ii.59 sq. -ājīva clean livelihood Vb-a 116; Dhp-a iv.111. -ājīvin living a pure life Dp 366. -ānupassin considering what is pure Snp 788; Nd i.85. -āvāsa pure abode, name of a heaven and of the devas inhabiting it DN ii.50; Vism 392. Five are enumd at DN iii.237 viz. Avihā, Atappā, Sudassā, Sudassī, Akaniṭṭhā; cp MN iii.103. -āvāsakāyika belonging to the pure abode epithet of the Suddhāvāsa devas Vin ii.302; DN ii.253; SN i.26. -pīti whose joy is pure Mvu 29, Mvu 49. -buddhi of pure intellect Ja i.1. -vaṃsatā purity of lineage Mvu 59, Mvu 25. -vasana wearing pure clothes Thig 338 Thag-a 239. -vālukā white sand Mvu 19, Mvu 37. -saṅkhārapuñja a mere heap of sankhāras SN i.135.

pp. of sujjhati

Suddhaka

(nt.) a trifle, a minor offence, less than a Sanghādisesa Vin ii.67.

suddha + ka

Suddhatā

(f.) purity Snp 435.

abstr. fr. suddha

Suddhatta

(nt.) purity DN ii.14; Vism 44.

abstr. fr. suddha

Suddhi

(f.) purity, purification, genuineness, sterling quality DN i.54; MN i.80; MN ii.132, MN ii.147; SN i.166, SN i.169 SN i.182; SN iv.372; Thig 293; Dhp-a iii.158 (v.l. visuddhi) Vv-a 60 (payoga˚); Vism 43 (fourfold: desanā˚, saṃvara˚ pariyeṭṭhi˚, paccavekkhaṇa˚); Dhs 1005; Snp 478 suddhiṃvada stating purity, Snp 910; Nd i.326; suddhināya leading to purity Snp 910. Cp. pari˚, vi˚.

-magga the path of purification (cp. visuddhi˚) SN i.103.

fr. śudh

Suddhika

(adj.) 1. connected with purification Dhs 519–⁠522; udaka-s. pure by use of water SN i.182; Vin i.196; udakasuddhikā (f.) cleaning by water Vin iv.262; susāna-s. fastidious in the matter of cemeteries Ja ii.54.

2. pure, simple; orthodox, schematized justified Nd i.89 (vatta˚); Vism 63 (ekato & ubhato), 64 (id.); Dhs-a 185 (jhāna).

suddhi + ka

Sudhā

(f.) 1. the food of the gods, ambrosia Ja v.396; Vism 258 = Kp-a 56 (sakkhara˚).

2. lime plaster, whitewash, cement Vin ii.154; ˚-kamma whitewashing coating of cement Ja vi.432; Mvu 38, Mvu 74.

cp. Sk. sudhā

Suna1

swollen Vin ii.253; AN iv.275, AN iv.470.

Sk. śūna, pp. of śū to swell

Suna2

a dog, also written suṇa Ja vi.353, Ja vi.357 (cp. sunakha).

Sk. śuna; see suvāṇa

Sunakha

a dog AN i.48; AN ii.122; Thig 509; Ja i.175, Ja i.189; Ja ii.128, Ja ii.246; Pv-a 151, Pv-a 206rukkha˚ some sort of animal Ja vi.538. fem. sunakhī a bitch Ja iv.400 ■ Names of some dogs in the Jātakas are Kaṇha (or Mahā˚) Ja iv.183; Caturakkha iii.535; Jambuka Pingiya ibid.; Bhattabhuñjana ii.246. Cp. suvāṇa.

cp. Sk. śunaka; the BSk. form is also sunakha, e.g. Mvu iii.361, Mvu iii.369

Sunaggavellita

beautifully curled at the ends (of hair) Ja vi.86.

su + agga + vellita; perhaps originally suv-agga˚

Sundara

(adj.) beautiful, good, nice, well Ja ii.11, Ja ii.98; Snp-a 410, Snp-a 493 (cp. parovara) It is very frequent as Commentary word, e.g. for prefix su˚; Pv-a 57, Pv-a 77; Vv-a 111; for subha Pv-a 14, Pv-a 44; for sādhu ṢnA 176; for sobhana Pv-a 49; for seyyo Pv-a 130.

cp. Epic & Class. Sk. sundara

Supaṇṇa

“Fairwing” a kind of fairy bird, a mythical creature (cp. garuḷa), imagined as winged, considered as foe to the nāgas DN ii.259; SN i.148; Ja i.202; Ja ii.13, Ja ii.107; Ja iii.91, Ja iii.187, Ja iii.188; Ja vi.256, Ja vi.257 Vism 155 (˚rājā), 400; Nd i.92, Nd i.448; Dhp-a i.280; Pv-a 272; DN-a i.51; Mvu 14, Mvu 40; Mvu 19, Mvu 20. Four kinds SN iii.246.

Vedic suparṇa

Supati

(suppati, soppati ) to sleep; supati Snp 110; Ja ii.61 (sukhaṃ supati he sleeps well); v.215; Pv ii.938; suppati SN i.107; soppati SN i.107, SN i.110; Pot. supe SN i.111; ppr supanto Vin i.15; ppr. med. suppamāna Ja iii.404; aor supi Mil 894; Vin ii.78; Pv-a 195 (sukhaṃ); inf. sottuṃ SN i.111; pp. supita; also sutta1 & sotta;.

svap; Vedic svapiti & svapati; svapna sleep or dream (see supina), with which cp. Gr. υ ̔́πνος sleep = Av. xvafna, Lat. somnus, Ags. swefn. Dhtp 481 “saye”

Supāṇa

a dog DN ii.295 = MN i.58, MN i.88; Snp 201; Mil 147. Spelt supāna at Ja iv.400.

= suvāṇa

Supāyika

J iv.118 (read: supāyita ). See under su˚.

Supita

sleeping; (nt.) sleep SN i.198 (ko attho supitena) = Snp 331; Snp-a 338; Pv ii.61 (so read for supina?).

pp. of supati

Supina

(m. & nt.) a dream, vision DN i.9, DN i.54; SN i.198; SN iv.117 (supine in a dream; v.l. supinena); Snp 360, Snp 807, Snp 927 Nd i.126; Ja i.334 sq., 374; v.42; DN-a i.92, DN-a i.164; Vv 4414 Vb-a 407 (by 4 reasons), 408 (who has dreams); Dhp-a i.215. The five dreams of the Buddha AN iii.240; Ja i.69 dussupina an unpleasant dream Ja i.335; Pv-a 105 (of Ajātasattu); maṅgala˚; a lucky dream Ja vi.330; mahā˚ṃ passati to have (lit. see) a great vision Ja i.336 sq (the 16 great visions); ˚ṃ ādisati to tell a dream Nd i.381- Supina at Pv ii.61 read supita.

-anta [anta pleonastic, cp. Thag-a 258 “supinam eva supinantaṃ”] a dream; abl. ˚ante in a dream Thig 394; Ja v.328 (spelt suppante; C. sopp˚; expld as “supinena”) instr. ˚antena id. Vin ii.125; Vin iii.112; Ja v.40; Ja vi.131 Thag-a 258; Kp-a 175; Snp-a 80. -pāṭhaka a dream-teller astrologer Nd i.381. -sattha science of dream-telling oneiromantics Snp-a 564.

Vedic svapna; the contracted P. form is soppa

Supinaka

a dream Vin ii.25; DN ii.333; MN i.365; Ja v.354; DN-a i.92.

supina + ka

Supīta

read Mil 415 for suthita (Kern’s suggestion). See under su˚.

Supoṭhita

well beaten; perhaps at Mil 415 for suthita (said of iron); (nt.) a good thrashing Dhp-a i.48.

su + poṭhita

Suppa

a winnowing basket Ud 68; Ja i.502; Ja ii.428; Vism 109 (+ sarāva), 123; Mil 282; Dhp-a i.174 (kattara˚); ii.131; Mvu 30, Mvu 9. ˚-ka a toy basket, little sieve Dhs-a 321 (+ musalaka).

cp. Vedic śūrpa

Suppatā

(f.) in mugga-s. pea-soup talk, sugared words Mil 370. See under mugga.

fr. sūpa

Suppanta

see under soppa.

Suplavattha

at Ja v.408 is doubtful in spelling & meaning. Perhaps to be read; “suplavantaṃ” gliding along beautifully; C. expld as “sukhena plavan’atthaṃ.”

Subbaca

(adj.) compliant, meek AN iii.180. See also suvaca (under su˚). Der. sovacassa.

su + vaca

Subbhū

(adj.) having beautiful eyebrows Ja iv.18 (= subhamukhā C.).

su + bhū, Sk. bhrū, see bhūkuṭi

Subha

(adj.) shining, bright, beautiful DN i.76 = DN ii.13 = MN iii.102; Dhs 250; DN-a i.221; auspicious, lucky, pleasant Snp 341; Iti 80 good Snp 824, Snp 910; subhato maññati to consider as a good thing Snp 199; Ja i.146; cp. SN iv.111; (nt.) welfare good, pleasantness, cleanliness, beauty, pleasure ■ vasena for pleasure’s sake Ja i.303, Ja i.304; asubha anything repulsive disgusting or unpleasant SN i.188; SN v.320; subhâsubha pleasant and unpleasant Mil 136; Ja iii.243 (niraya = subhānaṃ asubhaṃ unpleasant for the good C.); cp. below subhāsubha.

-aṅgana with beautiful courts Ja vi.272. -āsubha good and bad, pleasant & unpleasant Dhp 409 = Snp 633.; -kiṇṇa the lustrous devas, a class of devas DN ii.69; MN i.2. 329 390; iii.102; AN i.122; Ja iii.358; Kv 207; also written ˚kiṇha AN ii.231, AN ii.233; AN iv.40, AN iv.401; Vism 414, Vism 420 sq. Vb-a 520; Kp-a 86. -gati going to bliss, to heaven Mvu 25, Mvu 115. -ṭṭhāyin existing or remaining, continuing in glory DN i.17; DN-a i.110; AN v.60. -dhātu the element of splendour SN ii.150. -nimitta auspicious sign auspiciousness as an object of one’s thought MN i.26; AN i.3, AN i.87, AN i.200; SN v.64, SN v.103; Vism 20. -saññā perception or notion of what is pleasant or beautiful Ne 27 Opp. asubhasaññā concept of repulsiveness AN i.42 AN ii.17; AN iii.79; AN iv.46; AN v.106. See asubha ■ saññin considering as beautiful AN ii.52.

Vedic śubhas fr. subh; cp. sobhati

Subhaga

(adj.) lucky; ˚karaṇa making happy or beloved (by charms) DN i.11; DN-a i.96 ■ Der. sobhagga

su + bhaga

Sumanā

the great-flowered jasmine Ja i.62; Ja iv.455; Dhp-a iv.12. In composition sumana˚.

-dāma a wreath of jasmine Ja iv.455. -paṭṭa cloth with jasmine pattern Ja i.62. -puppha j. flower Mil 291; Vv-a 147. -makula a j. bud Dhp-a iii.371. -mālā garland of j. Vv-a 142.

Sumarati

see sarati2.

Sumbhati

(& sumhati) to push, throw over, strike Ja iii.185 (sumh˚); vi.549. pp. sumbhita ■ Cp. ā˚, pari˚.

; sumbh (?), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 60, 128. The Dhtm (306 & 548) only says “saṃsumbhane.” The BSk. form is subhati Mvu i.14

Sumbhita

knocked over, fallen (over) Pv-a 174.

pp. of sumbhati

Suyyati

is Passive of suṇāti.

Sura

god Snp 681 (= deva Snp-a 484); name of a Bodhisatta Ja v.12, Ja v.13 surakaññā a goddess, a heavenly maid Ja v.407 (= devadhītā, C.); surinda the king of gods Mhbv 28. Opp asura.

cp. Epic Sk. sura probably after asura

Surata

(adj.) (in good sense:) well-loving, devoted: see soracca; (in bad sense:) sexual intercourse thus wrongly for soracca at Ja iii.442 C., with expln as “dussīlya.” Cp. sūrata.

su + rata

Surā

(f.) spirituous (intoxicating) liquor (“drink”) Vin ii.295; Vin ii.301; Vin iv.110; DN i.146; AN i.212 AN i.295; Iti 63; Ja i.199, Ja i.252 (tikhiṇaṃ suraṃ yojetvā mixing a sharp drink); Dhp-a ii.9; Dhp 247; as nt. at Ja vi.23 (v.l. surā as gloss) ■ Five kinds of surā are mentioned viz. piṭṭha˚, pūva˚, odana˚ (odaniya˚), kiṇṇapakkhitta˚ sambhāra-saṃyutta˚ Vv-a 73; Vb-a 381.

-ādhiṭṭhaka addicted to drink Ja v.427. -geha a drinking house Ja i.302. -ghaṭa a pitcher of liquor Ja iii.477. -ghara = ˚geha Ja v.367. -chaṇa a drinking festival Ja i.489; Dhp-a iii.100. -dhutta a drunkard Snp 106; Ja i.268; Ja iii.260. -nakkhatta a drinking festival Ja 362; Snp-a 185. -pāna drinking strong liquor Ja i.50 Ja iv.23; Vb-a 383. -pāyikā a woman drinking liquor Ja v.11. -pipāsita thirsty after strong drink SN ii.110 -pīta one who has drunk liquor Ja i.426. -mada tipsiness intoxication AN iv.213; Ja i.352, Ja i.362. -meraya (-pāna (drinking) rum & spirits AN i.261; AN ii.53. See also (pañca-sikkhāpada. -vitthaka bowl for drinking spirits Ja v.427; Dhp-a iii.66. -soṇḍa a drunkard Dhp-a iii.129. -soṇḍaka id. Ja v.433.

Vedic surā

Suriya

1. the sun Vin i.2; DN ii.319; Snp 687; AN i.227; SN v.29 sq. Ja ii.73; Vism 231 (in simile), 416 (the seventh sun), 417 (myth of pop. etym.), 690 (in sim.); Mil 299; Kp-a 21 (bāla˚, in simile); Pv-a 137, Pv-a 211; Vb-a 519; size of the sun Dhs-a 318; suriyaṃ uṭṭhāpeti to go on till sunrise Ja i.318.

2. the sun as a god DN ii.259; SN i.51; Ja iv.63 etc.; vi.89, 90, 201, 247, 263, etc.

-atthaṅgamana sunset Vv-a 295. -uggamana sunrise Mvu 23, Mvu 22; Ja i.107. -kanta the sun-gem, a kind of gem Mil 118. -ggāha eclipse of the sun DN i.10; Ja i.374. -maṇḍala the orb of the sun AN i.283; Dhs 617 -rasmi a sunbeam Ja i.502. -vattika a sun-worshipper Nd i.89.

Vedic sūrya cp. suvar light, heaven; Idg. *sāṷel, as in Gr. η ̔́λιος, Lat. sōl., Goth. sauil sun; Oir. sūil “eye” cp. also Gr. σέλας splendour, σελήνη moon, & many others, for which see Walde,; Lat. Wtb. s. v. sōl

Suru

(indecl.) a hissing sound (“suru”); surusuru-kārakaṃ (adv.) after the manner of making hissing sounds (when eating) Vin ii.214; Vin iv.197.

onamat.

Suruṅga

a subterranean passage Mvu 7, Mvu 15.

a corruption of σϋριγς

Sulasī

(f.) a medicinal plant Vin i.201; cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.40.

cp. Sk. surasī, “basilienkraut” BR; fr. surasa

Sulopī

(f.) a kind of small deer Ja vi.437, Ja vi.438.

Suva

a parrot Ja i.324; Ja iv.277 sq.; Ja vi.421; Ja vi.431 sq. (the two: Pupphaka & Sattigumba); Dhp-a i.284 (˚rājā). fem. suvī Ja vi.421.

cp. Sk. śuka

Suvaṇṇa

of good colour, good, favoured, beautiful DN i.82; Dhs 223; Iti 99; AN iv.255; Pp 60; Ja i.226; suvaṇṇa (nt.) gold SN iv.325 sq.; Snp 48, Snp 686 Nd ii.687 (= jātarūpa); Kp-a 240; Vv-a 104; often together with hirañña Vin iii.16, Vin iii.48; DN ii.179; ˚-āni pl precious things Ja i.206 ■ Cp. soṇṇa.

-iṭṭhakā gilt tiles Dhp-a iii.29, Dhp-a iii.61; Vv-a 157. -kāra goldsmith DN i.78; MN ii.18; MN iii.243; AN i.253 sq.; Ja i.182 Ja v.438 sq.; Nd i.478; Vism 376 (in sim.); Dhp-a iii.340; Snp-a 15; Vb-a 222 (in sim.). -gabbha a safe (-room for gold Dhp-a iv.105. -guhā “golden cave,” Name of a cave Snp-a 66. -toraṇa gilt spire Vb-a 112. -paṭṭa a golden (writing) slab Ja iv.7; Snp-a 228, Snp-a 578; Dhp-a iv.89. -paṇaka a golden diadem Mil 210. -pabbata Name of a mountain Snp-a 358. -passa id. Snp-a 66. -pādukā golden slippers Vin i.15. -maya made of gold Ja i.146 -mālā golden garland Dhp-a i.388. -meṇḍaka a golden ram Dhp-a iii.364; Dhp-a iv.217; -bhiṅkāra a g. vase Mhbv 154 -bhūmi “gold-land,” Name of Cambodia Nd i.155. -rājahaṃsa golden-coloured royal mallard Ja i.342. -vaṇṇa gold-coloured (of the body of the Yathāgata) DN iii.143 DN iii.159; Ja ii.104; Ja iv.333; Dhp-a iii.113. -vīthi golden street (in Indra’s town) Ja v.386. -sivikā a g. litter Dhp-a iii.164 -haṃsa golden swan Ja i.207; Ja ii.353; Snp-a 277, Snp-a 349.

Sk. suvarṇa

Suvaṇṇatā

(f.) beauty of colour or complexion Pp 34.

abstr. fr. suvaṇṇa

Suvāṇa

(& suvāna) a dog MN iii.91 (= supāṇa MN i.58); Ja vi.247 (the 2 dogs of hell: Sabala & Sāma); Vism 259 (= supāṇa Kp-a 58). As suvā˚; at Sdhp 379, Sdhp 408 ■ See also the var. forms san, suṇa suna, sunakha, supāṇa, soṇa.

-doṇi a dog’s (feeding) trough Vism 344, Vism 358; Vb-a 62. -piṇḍa a dog biscuit Vism 344. -vamathu dog’s vomit Vism 344 (= suvā-vanta Sdhp 379).

cp. Sk. śvan, also śvāna (f. śvānī): fr. Vedic acc. śuvānaṃ, of śvan. For etym. cp. Gr. κύων, Av. spā, Lat. canis, Oir. cū, Goth. hunds

Suvanaya

easy to bring SN i.124 = Ja i.80.

su-v-ānaya

Suvāmin

a master Snp 666.

metric for sāmin

Suve

see sve.

Susāna

(nt.) a cemetery Vin i.15, Vin i.50; Vin ii.146; DN i.71; AN i.241; AN ii.210; Pp 59; Ja i.175; Nd i.466; Nd ii.342; Vism 76, Vism 180; Pv-a 80, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 163, Pv-a 195 sq āmaka-s. a place where the corpses are left to rot Ja i.61, Ja i.372; Ja vi.10; Dhp-a i.176. Cp. sosānika.

-aggi a cemetery fire Vism 54. -gopaka the cemetery keeper Dhp-a i.69. -vaḍḍhana augmenting the cemetery fit to be thrown into the cemetery Thig 380. Cp kaṭasi˚.

cp. Vedic śmaśāna

Susānaka

(adj.) employed in a cemetery Mvu 10, Mvu 91.

fr. last

Susira

(adj.-n..) perforated, full of holes, hollow Ja i.146; Snp 199; Ja i.172, Ja i.442; DN-a i.261; Mil 112; Vism 194 = Dhs-a 199; Kp-a 172; asusira Dhp-a ii.148 (Bdhgh for eka-ghaṇa). (nt.) a hole; Pv-a 62.

Sk. śuṣira

Susu1

a boy, youngster, lad Vin iii.147 = Ja ii.284; Vv 6414 (= dahara C.); Snp 420; DN i.115; MN i.82; AN ii.22; Ja ii.57; ājānīya-susūpama MN i.445 read ājānīy-ass-ūpama (cp. Thag 72) ■ In phrase susukāḷa the susu is a double su˚, in meaning “very, very black” (see under kāḷa-kesa), e.g. DN i.115 = MN i.82; AN ii.22 = AN iii.66 = Ja ii.57; expld as suṭṭhu-kāḷa DN-a i.284- susunāga a young elephant DN ii.254.

cp. Sk. śiśu

Susu2

the sound susu, hissing Ja iii.347 (cp. su and sū); Thag-a 189.

Susu3

the name of a sort of water animal (alligator or seacow?) Ja vi.537 (plur. susū) = v.255 (kumbhīlā makasā susū).

Susukā

(f.) an alligator Vin i.200; AN ii.123 (where id. p. at Nd ii.470 has suṃsumāra); MN i.459; Mil 196.

Sussati

to be dried, to wither Snp 434; Ja i.503; Ja ii.424; Ja vi.5 (being thirsty); ppr. med. sussamāna Ja i.498; Snp 434; fut sussissati Ja i.48; ger. sussitvā Ja ii.5, Ja ii.339; Pv-a 152. Cp vissussati & sukkhati ■ Caus.; soseti (q.v.).

Vedic śuṣyati; śuṣ (= sosana Dhtp 457)

Sussūsa

(adj.) wishing to hear or learn, obedient SN i.6; Ja iv.134.

Sussūsati

to wish to hear, to listen, attend DN i.230; AN i.72; AN iv.393; aor. sussūsimsu Vin i.10; ppr. med. sussūsamāna Snp 383.

Desid. fr. suṇāti; Sk. śuśrūṣati

Sussūsā

(f.) wish to hear, obedience, attendance DN iii.189; AN v.136; Thag 588; Snp 186; Ja iii.526; Mil 115.

Class. Sk. śuśrūṣā

Sussūsin

(adj.) obedient, trusting Ja iii.525.

cp. Epic Sk. śuśrūṣin

Suhatā

(f.) happiness Ja iii.158.

sukha + tā

Suhita

(adj.) satiated MN i.30; Ja i.266, Ja i.361; Ja v.384; Mil 249.

su + hita

(indecl.) an onomat. part. “shoo,” applied to hissing sounds: see su1. Also doubled: sū sū Dhp-a i.171 Dhp-a iii.352. Cp. sūkara & sūsūyati.;

Sūka

the awn of barley etc. SN v.10, SN v.48; AN i.8.

cp. Sk. śūka

Sūkara

a hog, pig Vin i.200; DN i.5; AN ii.42 (kukkuṭa + ), 209; Iti 36; Ja i.197 (Muṇika); ii.419 (Sālūka); iii.287 (Cullatuṇḍila Mahā-tuṇḍila); Mil 118, Mil 267; Vb-a 11 (vara-sayane sayāpita) ■ f. sūkarī Ja ii.406 (read vañjha˚).

-antaka a kind of girdle Vin ii.136. -maṃsa pork AN iii.49 (sampanna-kolaka). -maddava is with Franke (Dīgha trsln 222 sq.) to be interpreted as “soft (tender boar’s flesh.” So also Oldenberg (Reden des B. 1922 100) & Fleet (;J.R.A.S. 1906, 656 & 881). Scarcely with Rh. D. (;Dial. ii.137, with note) as “quantity of truffles DN ii.127; Ud 81 sq.; Mil 175. -potaka the young of a pig Ja v.19. -sāli a kind of wild rice Ja vi.531 (v.l. sukasāli).

Sk. sūkara, perhaps as sū + kara; cp. Av. hū pig, Gr. ̔ϋς; Lat. sūs; Ags. sū = E. sow

Sūkarika

a pig-killer, pork-butcher SN ii.257; AN ii.207; AN iii.303; Pp 56; Thig 242; Ja vi.111; Thag-a 204.

fr. sūkara; BSk. saukarika Divy 505

Sūcaka

an informer, slanderer SN ii.257 (= pesuñña-kāraka C.); Snp 246. Cp. saṃ˚.

fr. sūc to point out

Sūcana

(nt.) indicating, exhibiting Dhtp 592 (for gandh ).

Sūci

(f.) a needle Vin ii.115, Vin ii.117, Vin ii.177; SN ii.215 sq., 257; Ja i.111, Ja i.248 Vism 284 (in simile); a hairpin Thig 254; Ja i.9; a small door-bolt, a pin to secure the bolt MN i.126; Thig 116; Ja i.360; Ja v.294 (so for suci); Thag-a 117; cross-bar of a rail, railing [cp. BSk. sūcī Divy 221] DN ii.179.

-kāra a needle-maker SN ii.216. -ghaṭikā a small bolt to a door Vin ii.237; Ud 52; AN iv.206; Ja i.346 Ja vi.444; Vism 394. -ghara a needle case Vin ii.301 sq. Vin iv.123, Vin iv.167; SN ii.231; Ja i.170. -nāḷikā a needle-case made of bamboo Vin ii.116. -mukha “needle-mouthed, a mosquito Abhp 646; a sort of intestinal worm; ˚ā pāṇā (in the Gūthaniraya purgatory) MN iii.185. -loma needle-haired, having hair like needles SN ii.257; name of a Yakkha at Gayā SN i.207; Snp p.48; Snp-a 551; Vism 208. -vatta needle-faced, having a mouth like a needle Pgdp 55. -vāṇijaka a needle-seller SN ii.215.

cp. Sk. sūci; doubtful whether to sīv

Sūcikā

(f.) 1. a needle; (fig.) hunger Pv ii.83; Pv-a 107.

2. a small bolt to a door Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148. sūcik’aṭṭha whose bones are like needles (?) Pv iii.23 Pv-a 180 (sūcigātā ti vā pāṭho. Vijjhanatthena sūcikā ti laddhanāmāya khuppipāsāya ajjhāpīḷitā. Sūcikaṇṭhā ti keci paṭhanti. Sūcichiddasadisā mukhadvārā ti attho).

fr. sūci

Sūju

(adj.) upright Snp 143 = Kp ix.1 (= suṭṭhu uju Kp-a 236).

su + uju

Sūṇā

(f.) a slaughter-house Ja vi.62; see sūnā.

Sūta

a charioteer Ja iv.408; a bard, panegyrist Ja i.60; Ja v.258.

Sk. sūta

Sūtighara

(nt.) a lying-in-chamber Ja iv.188; Ja vi.485; Vism 259 (Kp-a pasūti˚); Vb-a 33, Vb-a 242.

sūti + ghara

Sūda

a cook DN i.51; SN v.149 sq.; Ja v.292; DN-a i.157; Vism 150 (in simile); Pv ii.937, 950. Sudaka = suda

Sk. sūda; for etym. see sādu

Sūdaka = sūda

(cook) Ja v.507.

Sūna

swollen Mil 35719; Ja vi.555; often wrongly spelt suna (q.v.) Vin ii.253 = AN iv.275 (cp. Leumann Gött. Anz., 1899, p. 595); Dhs-a 197 (suna-bhāva).

Sk. śūna

Sūnā

(f.) a slaughter-house Vin i.202; Vin ii.267; asisūnā the same Vin ii.26; MN i.130, MN i.143; also sūna Ja vi.111; and sūṇā Ja v.303; sūnāpaṇa Ja vi.111; sūnaghara Vin iii.59; sūna-nissita Vin iii.151; sūnakāraghara Vb-a 252.

Sk. sūnā

Sūnu

a son, child Mvu 38, Mvu 87.

Vedic sūnu, fr. , cp. sūti

Sūpa

broth, soup, curry Vin ii.77, Vin ii.214 sq. Vin iv.192; DN i.105; SN v.129 sq. (their var. flavours) AN iii.49 (aneka˚); Ja ii.66; Vism 343. samasūpaka with equal curry Vin iv.192. Also nt. Vin i.23921 (-āni) and f. sūpi Ja iv.352 (bidalasūpiyo); sūpavyañjanaka a vessel for curry and sauce Vin i.240.

-vyañjana curry Ja i.197.

Vedic sūpa, cp. Ags. sūpan = Ger. saufen; Ohg. sūf = soup

Sūpatittha

(adj.) with beautiful banks. Usually spelt su˚; as if su + patittha (see patittha), e.g. Vin iii.108; Ja vi.518, Ja vi.555 (= sobhana˚); DN ii.129; Ud 83; Pv ii.120 (= sundara-tittha Pv-a 77). But sū˚; at MN i.76, MN i.283 Ap 333.

su + upatittha, the latter = tittha, cp. upavana: vana

Sūpadhārita

= su + upadhārita well-known Mil 10.

Sūpika

a cook DN-a i.157; Ja vi.62 (v.l.), 277.

sūpa + ika

Sūpin

(adj.) having curry, together with curry Ja iii.328.

fr. sūpa

Sūpeyya

(nt.) 1. belonging to soup, broth, soup MN i.448; SN iii.146.

2. curry DN ii.198 Nd ii.314; Dhp-a iv.209.

-paṇṇa curry leaf, curry stuff Vism 250 = Vb-a 233; Ja i.98, Ja i.99; -sāka a potherb for making curry Ja iv.445.

fr. sūpa = Sk. sūpya

Sūyati

is passive of suṇāti.

Sūra1

valiant, courageous SN i.21; Ja i.262, Ja i.320; Ja ii.119; (m.) a hero, a valiant man DN i.51 DN i.89; DN iii.59, DN iii.142, DN iii.145 sq; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; Snp 831; DA 157 250; (nt.) valour SN v.227, read sūriya.

-kathā a tale about heroes DN i.8; DN-a i.90. -kāka the valiant crow Dhp-a iii.352. -bhāva strength, valour Ja i.130; Vism 417 (in def. of suriya).

Vedic śūra, fr. śū

Sūra2

the sun Thag-a 150 (Ap v.90); Ja v.56.

Vedic sūra

Sūrata

soft, mild Ja vi.286; Mhbv 75; kindly disposed SN iv.305. Cp. surata & sorata;.

= surata

Sūrin

(adj.) wise Mvu 26, Mvu 23.

fr. sūra1

Sūriya

(nt.) valour SN v.227 (text, sūra); Ja i.282; Mil 4.

abstr. fr. sūra1

Sūla

(m. and nt.) 1. a sharp-pointed instrument, a stake Thig 488; SN v.411; Pv iv.16; Vism 489 (in compar.), 646 (khadira˚, ayo˚, suvaṇṇa˚); Thag-a 288; Ja i.143, Ja i.326; sūle uttāseti to impale AN i.48; Ja i.326 Ja ii.443; Ja iv.29; appeti the same Ja iii.34; Ja vi.17, or āropeti Pv-a 220. ayasūla an iron stake Ja iv.29; Snp 667; cp. asi˚ & satti˚;.

2. a spit Ja i.211; roasted on a spit, roasted meat Ja iii.220; maṃsa˚; the same, or perhaps a spit with roasted meat Ja iii.52, Ja iii.220.

3. an acute, sharp pain Dhs-a 397; sūlā (f.) the same AN v.1105 Cp. defn of sūl as “rujā” at Dhtp 272.

-āropana impaling, execution Mil 197, Mil 290. -koṭi the point of the stake Dhp-a ii.240.

cp. Vedic śūla

Sūḷāra

(adj.) magnificent Mvu 28, Mvu 1.

su + uḷāra

Sūsūyati

to make a hissing sound “sū sū” (of a snake) Dhp-a ii.257 (v.l. susumāyati).

Denom. fr. sū

Se

(pron.) = taṃ: see under sa2.

Seka

sprinkling Ja i.93 (suvaṇṇa-rasa-s.piñjara).

fr. sic, see siñcati

Sekata

(nt.) a sandbank Dāvs i.32.

Sk. saikata

Sekadhārī

(f.) (?) Ja vi.536 (nīlapupphi-˚, C. nīlapupphīti ādikā pupphavalliyo).

Sekha

(& sekkha) belonging to training, in want of training, imperfect Vin i.17, Vin i.248; Vin iii.24; Dhs 1016; one who has still to learn, denotes one who has not yet attained Arahantship DN ii.143; MN i.4, MN i.144; AN i.63; Pp 14; Iti 9 sq., 53, 71; Snp 970 Snp 1038 = SN ii.47; definition AN i.231; SN v.14, SN v.145, SN v.175 SN v.229 sq., 298, 327; Nd i.493 (sikkhatī ti sekkho, etc. = Nd ii.689; Vb-a 328. s. pāṭipadā the path of the student MN i.354; MN iii.76, MN iii.300; s. sīla the moral practice of the student AN i.219 sq.; AN ii.6, AN ii.86 sq.; asekha not to be trained, adept, perfect Vin i.62 sq.; Vin iii.24 Pp 14 (= arahant). See asekha.

-bala the strength of the disciple, of five kinds AN ii.150 -sammata esteemed to be under discipline, educated Vin iv.179.

cp. Sk. śaikṣa; fr. siks, sikkhati

Sekhavant

(?) quick Ja vi.199 (v.l. sīghavant).

Sekhiya

connected with training; s. dhamma rule of good breeding Vin iv.185 sq.

fr. sekha

Segālaka

(nt.) a jackal’s cry AN i.187 sq. (˚ṃ nadati); cp. sigālika.

fr. sigāla

Secanaka

sprinkling Ja vi.69; neg. asecanaka (q.v.).

fr. seceti

Seceti

see siñcati.

Secchā

= sa-icchā, Sdhp 249.

Seṭṭha

best, excellent DN i.18, DN i.99; SN iii.13; Snp 47, Snp 181, Snp 822, Snp 907; Dhp 1, Dhp 26; Ja i.443; Nd i.84 = Nd ii.502 (with syn.) Ja i.88; cp. seṭṭhatara Ja v.148.

-kamma excellent, pious deeds Mvu 59, Mvu 9. -sammata considered the best Ja iii.111.

Seṭṭhi

foreman of a guild, treasurer, banker, “City man”, wealthy merchant Vin i.15 sq. 271 sq.; ii.110 sq., 157; SN i.89; Ja i.122; Ja ii.367 etc. Rājagaha˚ the merchant of Rājagaha Vin ii.154; Ja iv.37; Bārāṇasi˚ the merchant of Benares Ja i.242 Ja i.269; jana-pada-seṭṭhi a commercial man of the country Ja iv.37; seṭṭhi gahapati Vin i.273; SN i.92; there were families of seṭṭhis Vin i.18; Ja iv.62; ˚-ṭṭhāna the position of a seṭṭhi Ja ii.122, Ja ii.231; hereditary Ja i.231 Ja i.243; Ja ii.64; Ja iii.475; Ja iv.62 etc.; seṭṭhānuseṭṭhī treasurers and under-treasurers Vin i.18; see Vinaya Texts i.102.

fr. seṭṭha, Sk. śreṣṭhin

Seṭṭhitta

(nt.) the office of treasurer or (wholesale) merchant SN i.92.

abstr. fr. seṭṭhi

Seṇi

(f.) 1. a guild Vin iv.226; Ja i.267, Ja i.314; Ja iv.43; Dāvs ii.124; their number was eighteen Ja vi.22, Ja vi.427; Vb-a 466. ˚-pamukha the head of a guild Ja ii.12 (text seni-)

2. a division of an army Ja vi.583; ratha-˚ Ja vi.81, Ja vi.49 seṇimokkha the chief of an army Ja vi.371 (cp. senā and seniya).

Class. Sk. śreṇi in meaning “guild”; Vedic = row

Seta

(adj.) white DN ii.297 = MN i.58; Snp 689; AN iii.241; Vb-a 63 (opp kāḷa); Ja i.175; Pv-a 157, Pv-a 215. name of a mountain in the Himālayas SN i.67 = Mil 242; an elephant of King Pasenadi AN iii.345.

-aṅga white bodied Mvu 10, Mvu 54. -aṭṭhika lit. (having white bones, (suffering from) famine [cp. BSk. śvetāsthi Divy 131] Vin iii.6; Vin iv.23; SN iv.323; AN i.160; AN iv.279. f. mildew Vin ii.256; Ja v.401. -odaka clear (transparent water Pv ii.120. -kambala white blanket Ja iv.353 -kamma whitewashing Ja vi.432. -kuṭṭha white leprosy Ja v.69; Ja vi.196. -geru Name of a plant Ja vi.535. -cchatta a white parasol, an emblem of royalty DN ii.19; AN i.145; Ja i.177, Ja i.267; Pv-a 74; Dhp-a i.167; Dhp-a iii.120. -pacchāda with white covering SN iv.292 = Ud 76 = Dhs-a 397 -puppha “white-flowered,” Name of a tree (Vitex trifolia? Ja v.422 (= piyaka). -vārī (& ˚vārisa); names of plants or trees Ja vi.535, Ja vi.536.

Vedic śveta & śvitra; cp. Av. spaēta white; Lith. szaitýti to make light; Ohg. hwīz = E. white

Setaka

(adj.) white, transparent DN ii.129; MN i.76, MN i.167, MN i.283.

seta + ka

Setaccha

a tree Ja vi.535; setacchakūṭa adj. Ja vi.539 (sakuṇa).

Setapaṇṇi

(f. ) a tree Ja vi.335.

?

Seti & sayati

to lie down, to sleep; (applied) to be in a condition, to dwell, behave etc ■ Pres. seti SN i.41, SN i.47, SN i.198 (kiṃ sesi why do you lie asleep? Cp. Pv ii.61); Ja i.141; Dhp 79 Dhp 168; Snp 200; Vv-a 42; sayati Vin i.57; Ja ii.53; DN-a i.261. Pot. sayeyya Pv ii.3,9 & saye Iti 120. ppr sayaṃ Iti 82, Iti 117; Snp 193; sayāna (med.) DN i.90; DN ii.292; MN i.57; Iti 117; Snp 1145; & semāna DN ii.24; MN i.88; SN i.121; Ja i.180; also sayamāna Thag 95 ■ Fut sessati SN i.83; Snp 970; Dhp-a i.320 ■ Aor. sesi Ja v.70 settha Snp 970; sayi Ja vi.197, asayittha Ja i.335 ■ Inf sayituṃ Pv-a 157; ger. sayitvā Ja ii.77 ■ pp. sayita (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. sayāpeti to make lie down, to bed on a couch etc. Ja i.245; Ja v.461; Mvu 31, Mvu 35; Pv-a 104-pp. sayāpita ■ sukhaṃ seti to be at ease or happy SN i.212; Ja v.242 (raṭṭhaṃ i.e. is prosperous); opp dukkhaṃ s. to be miserable AN i.137.

śī, Vedic śete & śayate; cp. Av. saēte = Gr. κεϊται to lie, ὠ κεανός (“ocean”) = Sk. ā-śayānah, κοιμάω to put to sleep; Ags. hāēman to marry; also Lat cīvis = citizen. The Dhtp simply defines as saya (374).

Setu

a causeway bridge Vin i.230 = DN ii.89, Ja i.199; Vism 412 (simile) Dhp-a i.83; Snp-a 357; Pv-a 102, Pv-a 151, Pv-a 215. uttāra˚- a bridge for crossing over MN i.134; SN iv.174; Mil 194 naḷa-˚; a bamboo bridge Thag 7.

-kāraka a bridge-maker, one who paves the way SN i.33; Kv 345. -ghāta pulling down of the bridge (leading to something) Vin i.59; Vin iii.6; AN i.220, AN i.261 AN ii.145 sq.; Dhs 299; Dhs-a 219; DN-a i.305; Nd ii.462; Dhp-a iv.36.

Vedic setu, to si or (see sinoti); cp. Av. haētu dam; Lat. saeta; Ags. sāda rope; etc.

Seda

sweat DN ii.293; AN ii.67 sq. Iti 76; Snp 196; Ja i.118, Ja i.138, Ja i.146, Ja i.243; in detaiḷ (physiologically) at Vism 262, Vism 360; Vb-a 66, Vb-a 245 sweating for medicinal purposes, mahā˚ a great steambath; sambhāra˚ bringing about sweating by the use of herbs, etc.; seda-kamma sweating Vin i.205 ■ pl sedā drops of perspiration Dhp-a i.253.

-āvakkhitta earned in the sweat of the brow AN ii.67 sq., AN iii.45, AN iii.76; AN iv.95, AN iv.282. -gata sweat-covered, sweating Vv-a 305. -mala the stain of sweat Ja iii.290; Vb-a 276 -yūsa sweat Vism 195.

Vedic sveda, fr. svid, cp. Av. xvaēda, Gr. ἰδρώς, Lat. sudor, Ags. svāt = E. sweat

Sedaka

(adj.) sweating, transpiring DN ii.265.

fr. seda

Sedita

moistened Ja i.52 (su˚). Cp. pari˚.

pp. of sedeti

Sedeti

to cause to transpire, to heat, to steam Ja iv.238; Ja v.271; Kp-a 52, Kp-a 67; Vin iii.82 (aor sedesi); ger. sedetvā Ja i.324; Ja ii.74; pp. sedita. Caus II sedāpeti Ja iii.122.

Caus. of sijjati

Sena1

lying, sleeping; couch, bed Ja v.96 (= sayana).

= sayana

Sena2

a hawk Ja i.273; Ja ii.51, Ja ii.60; Dhp-a ii.267.

Sk. śyena

Senaka1

a carter Thag-a 271 (= sākaṭika of Thig 443).

Senaka2

= sena2 Ja iv.58, Ja iv.291; Ja vi.246.

Senā

an army Vin i.241; Vin iv.104 sq. (where described as consisting of hatthī assā, rathā, pattī), 160; SN i.112; AN iii.397; AN v.82; Ja ii.94; Mil 4; Nd i.95 (Māra˚), 174 (id.).

-gutta [sena˚] a high official, a minister of war, only in cpd. mahā-˚; Ja vi.2, Ja vi.54; mahāsenaguttaṭṭhāna the position of a generalissimo Ja v.115. -nāyaka a general Vin i.73. -pacca the position as general Mvu 38, Mvu 81 -pati a general Vin i.233 sq.; Snp 556; AN iii.38; AN iv.79; Ja i.133; Ja iv.43; dhamma-˚; a general of the Dhamma Mil 343; Dhp-a iii.305. -patika a general AN iii.76, AN iii.78, AN iii.300 -byūha massing of troops, grouping & fitting up an army Vin iv.107; DN i.6; Pts ii.213; DN-a i.85 (-vyūha).

Vedic senā2 perhaps fr. si to bind

Senānī

a general; only in cpd. ˚-kuṭilatā strategy (lit. crookedness of a general) Dhs-a 151.

Senāsana

(nt.) sleeping and sitting, bed & chair, dwelling, lodging Vin i.196, Vin i.294, Vin i.356; Vin ii.146 Vin ii.150 (˚parikkhāra-dussa); iii.88 etc.; DN ii.77; AN i.60; Iti 103, Iti 109; DN-a i.208; Ja i.217; Vb-a 365 (= seti c’eva āsati ca etthā ti senāsanaṃ). See also panta.

-gāha allotment of lodging-places Vin ii.167. -gāhāpaka house-steward Vin ii.167. -cārikā a wandering from lodging to lodging Vin i.182, Vin i.203; Vin iii.21; Ja 126 -paññāpaka regulator of lodging-places Vin ii.75, Vin ii.176 Vin iii.158 sq.; Vin iv.38. -paṭibāhana keeping out of the lodging Ja i.217. -paviveka secluson in respect of lodging AN i.240 sq. -vatta rule of conduct in respect of dwelling Vin ii.220.

sayana + āsana

Seniya

belonging to an army, soldier Ja i.314.

fr. senā

Senesika

at Vin i.200 is to be read senehika (fr. sineha), i.e. greasy.

Sepaṇṇī

(f.) name of a tree, Gmelina arborea Ja i.173, Ja i.174; Dhp-a i.145.

Sk. śrīparṇī, lit. having lucky leaves

Semānaka

lying Thag 14; Dhp-a i.16.

semāna + ka; ppr. of seti

Semha

(nt.) phlegm Vin ii.137; DN ii.14, DN ii.293; AN ii.87; AN iii.101; AN iv.320; Snp 198, Snp 434; Mil 112, Mil 303 Physiologically in detail at Vism 359; Vb-a 65, Vb-a 244.

= silesuma

Semhāra

some sort of animal (monkey?) (explained by makkaṭa) MN i.429.

Semhika

(adj.) a man of phlegmatic humour Mil 298.

fr. semha

Seyya

(adj.) better, excellent; nom. masc. seyyo SN iii.48 sq.; Snp 918; Dhp 308; Dhs 1116; Ja i.180; nom. fem. seyyasi Ja v.393; nom. neut. seyyo often used as a noun, meaning good, happiness, wellbeing Vin i.33; DN i.184; DN ii.330; Snp 427, Snp 440; Dhp 76 Dhp 100; Ja ii.44; Ja vi.4 (maraṇaṃ eva seyyo, with abl. of compar. rajjato); Pv ii.943 (dhanaṃ); iv.16 (jīvitaṃ) nom. fem. seyyā Ja v.94; nom. acc. neutr. seyyaṃ Ja ii.402 Ja iii.237; abl. as adv. seyyaso “still better” Dhp 43; Ja ii.402; Ja iv.241. Superl. seṭṭha.

Sk. śreyas, compar. formn

Seyyaka

(adj.) lying MN i.433, see uttānaseyyaka and gabbhaseyyaka.

fr. seyyā

Seyyati

to crush Ja i.174. See also sarati3 & vi˚; ■ pp. siṇṇa: see vi˚.

śṛ; Vedic śṛṇāti & śīryate

Seyyathā

(adv.) as, just as, s. pi Vin i.5; DN i.45; Iti 90, Iti 113; Ja i.339; seyyathīdaṃ as follows “i.e.” or “viz.” Vin i.10; DN i.89; DN ii.91; SN v.421; Iti 99.

= taṃ yathā, with Māgadhī se˚ for ta˚; cp. sayathā & taṃyathā

Seyyā

(f.) a bed, couch MN i.502; AN i.296; Vin ii.167 (˚aggena by the surplus in beds); Snp 29, Snp 152 Snp 535; Dhp 305, Dhp 309; Pv ii.311; iv.12; Ja vi.197 (gilāna sick-bed). Four kinds AN ii.244; Vb-a 345. seyyaṃ kappeti to lie down Vin iv.15, Vin iv.18 sq ■ Combd with āvasatha, e.g. at AN ii.85, AN ii.203; AN iii.385; AN iv.60; AN v.271 sq-As-˚ used in adj. sense of “lying down, resting, viz. ussūra˚; sleeping beyond sunrise DN iii.184 = Dhp-a ii.227; divā˚; noon-day rest DN i.112, DN i.167; sīha˚; like a lion DN ii.134; AN iv.87; dukkha˚; sleeping uncomfortably Dhp-a iv.8.

Sk. śayyā; fr. śī

Seritā

(f.) independence, freedom Snp 39 sq.

fr. serin

Serin

(adj.) self-willed, independent, according to one’s liking MN i.506; Thag 1144; Pv iv.187 Ja i.5.

cp. Sk. svairin

Serivihāra

(adj.) lodging at one’s own choice MN i.469 sq.; Vism 66 (˚sukhaṃ).

serin + vihāra

Serīsaka

(adj.) made of Sirīsa wood, name of a hall DN ii.356 sq.; Vv 8453; Vv-a 331, Vv-a 351.

fr. sirīsa

Serīsamaha

a festival in honour of the Serīsaka Vimāna Vv 8437, 53

Sereyyaka

name of a tree (Barleria cristata) Ja iii.253.

Sela

rocky Dhp 8; (m.) rock, stone, crystal SN i.127; DN ii.39; AN iii.346; Dhp 81; Ja ii.14; Vin i.4 sq.; Vin iii.147; Ja ii.284.

-guḷa a rocky ball Ja i.147. -maya made of rock (crystal?), of the bowl of the Buddha Snp-a 139, Snp-a 159.

fr. silā

Selaka

“rocky,” a kind of copper (cp. pisāca) Vb-a 63.

sela + ka

Seḷita

(selita) shouting, noise, row Ja ii.218. To this belongs the doubtful der. selissaka (nt.) noise row, mad pranks at SN iv.117 (v.l. seleyyaka).

pp. of seḷeti

Seḷeti

to make a noise, shout, cry exultantly Snp 682; Ja v.67; Bv i.36. pp. seḷita ■ Other, diff. explns of the word see in J.P.T.S. 1885, p. 54.

according to Kern, Toev. ii.78 for sveḷayati, cp. Oir. fét whistle, music etc. Idg. *sveiƶd

Sevaka

serving, following; a servant, dependent Ja ii.12, Ja ii.125, Ja ii.420; Snp-a 453. See vipakkha˚.

Sevati

1. to serve, associate with, resort to Vin ii.203; AN i.124 sq.; Snp 57, Snp 75; Pp 33; Iti 107; Ja iii.525; Snp-a 169.

2. to practice, embrace, make use of Vin i.10 = SN v.421; DN iii.157; SN i.12; MN iii.45; Dhp 167, Dhp 293 Dhp 310; Snp 72, Snp 391, Snp 927; Nd i.383, Nd i.481; Ja i.152, Ja i.361; aor asevissaṃ Ja iv.178 ■ pp. sevita: see ā˚, vi˚.

sev

Sevanatā

(-˚) (f.) = sevanā Vb-a 282 sq.

abstr, fr. sevati

Sevanā

(f.) following, associating with Snp 259; Dhs 1326; Pp 20; Dhtp 285 (as nt.); cohabiting Vin iii.29.

fr. sevati

Sevā

(f.) service, resorting to SN i.110; Thag-a 179.

fr. sev

Sevāla

the plant Blyxa octandra moss, AN iii.187, AN iii.232, AN iii.235; Ja ii.150 = Dhp-a i.144; Ja iii.520; Ja iv.71; Ja v.462; Mil 35; Dhp-a iii.199 Tikp 12 (in sim.). (m. and nt.) Ja v.37; -mālaka (or -mālika ) who makes garlands of Blyxa octandra AN v.263; SN iv.312 ■ Often combd with another waterplant paṇaka (see under paṇṇaka), e.g. AN iii.187 Vism 261 (simile); Vb-a 244 (id.); Kp-a 61 (cp. Schubring, Kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.).

cp. Epic Sk. śaivala & saivāla

Sevin

(adj.) serving, practising Snp 749; Iti 54. See vipakkha˚.

fr. sev

Seveti

to cause to fall, to throw down Ja iii.198 (doubtful; C-expls as pāteti & gives saveti as gloss; v.l. also sādeti).

= sāveti, Caus. of; sru to make glide

Sesa

remaining, left DN ii.48; Snp 217, Snp 354; Ja ii.128; (nt.) remainder Pv-a 14, Pv-a 70; ˚-ka the same Mvu 10, Mvu 36 Mvu 22, Mvu 42; Mvu 25, Mvu 19.

fr. śiṣ

Seseti

: see sissati.

Sessan, sessati

see seti.

Sehi

is instr. pl. of sa4 (his own): Dhp 136; Dhp-a iii.64.

Soka

the flame of fire, later in sense of “burning grief” grief, sorrow, mourning; defd as “socanā socitattaṃ anto-soko… cetaso parijjhāyanā domanassaṃ” at Pts i.38 = Nd i.128 = Nd ii.694; shorter as “ñāti-vyasan’ ādīhi phuṭṭhassa citta-santāpo” at Vism 503 = Vb-a Cp. the foll.: Vin i.6; DN i.6; DN ii.305, DN ii.103; SN i.110, SN i.123 SN i.137; AN i.51, AN i.144; AN ii.21; AN v.141; Snp 584, Snp 586; Ja i.189; Snp-a 155; Dhp-a ii.166; Kp-a 153 (abbūḷha˚); Pv i.43 (= citta-santāpa Pv-a 18); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 61asoka without grief: see viraja. See also dukkha B iii.1 b.

-aggi the fire of sorrow Pv-a 41. pl. -divasā the days of mourning (at the king’s court after the death of the queen) Snp-a 89. -parideva sorrow and lamenting AN iii.32, AN iii.326 sq.; AN v.216 sq.; Vism 503; Nd i.128. -pariddava id. Vv 8430. -pareta overcome with grief Pv i.86 -vinaya dispelling of grief Pv-a 39. -vinodana id. Pv-a 61. -salla the dart or sting of sorrow AN iii.54, AN iii.58 Nd i.59, Nd i.414; Pv i.86; Pv-a 93, Pv-a 162.

fr. śuc, to gleam (which to the Dhtp however is known only in meaning “soka”: Dhtp 39); cp. Vedic śoka.

Sokajjhāyikā

(f.) a woman who plays the fool, a comedian Vin iv.285; Ja vi.580 (where C. expls as “grief-dispellers”).

soka + ajjhāyaka; this soka perhaps *sūka, as in visūka?

Sokavant

(adj.) sorrowful Mvu 19, Mvu 15.

soka + vant

Sokika

(adj.) sorrowful; a-˚ free from sorrow Thag-a 229.

soka + ika

Sokin

(adj.) (fem. ˚nī) sorrowful Dhp 28.

fr. soka

Sokhya

(nt.) happiness Snp 61; Ja v.205.

abstr. der. fr. sukha

Sokhumma

(nt.) fineness, minuteness AN ii.17; Thag 437. At AN ii.18 with double suffix ˚tā.

abstr. fr. sukhuma

Sogandhika

(nt.) the white water-lily (Nymphaea lotus) Ja v.419; Ja vi.518 Ja vi.537 (seta-sogandhiyehi) ■ As m. designation of a purgatory AN v.173; SN i.152; Snp p.126.

Sk. saugandhika; fr. sugandha

Socati

1. to mourn, grieve Snp 34; Dhp 15; Ja i.168; Pv i.87 (+ rodati); i.1015; i.122; Mil 11; pres 3rd pl. socare Snp 445; Dhp 225; ppr. socamāna Ja ii.75; ppr. asocaṃ not grieving SN i.116; mā soci do not sorrow DN ii.144; Ja vi.190; plur. mā socayittha do not grieve DN ii.158 Caus. socayati to cause to grieve DN i.52; SN i.116 Thag 743 (ger. ˚ayitvā); Mil 226; soceti Ja ii.8 ■ pp socita ■ Caus. II. socāpayati the same SN i.116.

Vedic śocati, śuc, said of the gleaming of a fire

Socana

(nt.) sorrow, mourning Pv-a 18, Pv-a 62; -nā (f.) the same DN ii.306; SN i.108 = Snp 34; Nd ii.694.

fr. śuc

Socita

(nt.) grief Thig 462.

fr. socati

Socitatta

(nt.) sorrowfulness DN ii.306; Pts i.38 = Nd ii.694.

Socin

grieving AN iv.294 (socī ca = socicca).

fr. socati

Sociya

deplorable Sdhp 262.

= Sk. śocya

Soceyya

(nt.) purity SN i.78; AN i.94; AN ii.188; AN v.263; Vism 8; Ja i.214; Mil 115, Mil 207 is threefold AN i.271; Iti 55; DN iii.219; further subdivided AN v.264, AN v.266 sq. In meaning of “cleaning, washing given in the Dhtp as def. of roots for washing, bathing etc. (khal, nahā, sinā, sudh).

abstr. fr. śuc, *śaucya

Sojacca

(nt.) nobility, high birth Ja ii.137.

abstr. fr. sujāta

Soṇa1

a dog Ja i.146; Ja vi.107 (= sunakha); Snp 675; Vism 191; Dhp-a iii.255 (+ sigāla); soṇi (f.) a bitch Mvu 7, Mvu 8 = sona Iti 36.

see suvāṇa

Soṇa2

a kind of tree; the Bodhi trees of the Buddhas Paduma and Nārada Bv ix.22; Bv x.24; Ja i.36, Ja i.37.

cp. śyonāka

Soṇita

(nt.) blood Thig 467; DN-a i.120; Vism 259.

Sk. śoṇita, fr. śoṇa red

Soṇī

(f.) 1. the buttock Snp 609; Ja v.155, Ja v.216, Ja v.302.

2. a bitch, see soṇa1.

cp. Sk. śroṇī

Soṇḍa

addicted to drink, intoxicated, a drunkard DN ii.172; Ja v.436, Ja v.499; Mil 345; Vism 316 a-soṇḍa AN iii.38; AN iv.266; Ja v.166; (fem ■ ī) itthisoṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Snp 112 (? better “one who is addicted to women”; Snp-a 172 expls to that effect, cp. Ja ii.431 itthi-surā-maṃsa-soṇḍa); yuddhasoṇḍa Ja i.204; dāsi-soṇḍa a libertine Ja v.436 (+ surā˚) dhamma-soṇḍatā affectionate attachment to the law Ja v.482.

cp. Sk. śauṇḍa

Soṇḍaka

in cpd. surā˚; a drunkard Ja v.433; Ja vi.30.

soṇḍa + ka

Soṇḍā

(f.) an elephant’s trunk Vin ii.201; = SN ii.269; MN i.415; AN iv.87 (uccā˚ fig. of a bhikkhu] Ja i.50, Ja i.187; Ja iv.91; Ja v.37; Dhp-a i.58; Mil 368; soṇḍa (m. the same SN i.104.

Sk. śuṇḍā

Soṇḍika

1. a distiller and seller of spirituous liquors; MN i.228 = MN i.374.

2. a drunkard Mil 93.

fr. soṇḍa

Soṇḍikā

(f.) 1. tendril of a creeper SN i.106; Mil 374. - 2. peppered meat SN ii.98 (cp. Sanskrit śauṇḍī long pepper).

3. in udaka˚; Kp-a 65 (= sondī1) a tank.

Soṇḍī1

(f.) a natural tank in a rock Ja i.462; Dhp-a ii.56 (soṇḍi); udaka-˚; Ja iv.333; Vism 119; Kp-a 65 (soṇḍikā).

Soṇḍī2

(f.) the neck of a tortoise SN iv.177 (soṇḍi-pañcamāni angāni); Mil 371; the hood of a snake Ja vi.166 (nāgā soṇḍi-katā).

Soṇṇa

(nt.) gold; (adj.) golden Mvu 5, Mvu 87; Vv 54, 367.

-ālaṅkāra with golden ornaments Ja ii.48. -dhaja with golden flags Ja ii.48. -bhiṅkāra a golden vase Sdhp 513. -maya golden, made of gold Ja vi.203 -vālukā gold dust Ja vi.278.

the contracted form of suvaṇṇa, cp. sovaṇṇa

Sota1

(nt.) ear, the organ of hearing Vin i.9, Vin i.34; DN i.21; Snp 345 (nom pl. sotā); Vism 444 (defined); Dhs 601; Dhs-a 310-dibba-sota the divine ear (cp. dibba-cakkhu) DN i.79 DN i.154; DN iii.38, DN iii.281; dhamma˚ the ear of the Dhamma AN iii.285 sq., 350; v.140; SN ii.43; sotaṃ odahati to listen (carefully) DN i.230; ohita -s. with open ears AN iv.115 AN v.154; Ja i.129.

-añjana a kind of ointment made with antimony Vin i.203. -ānugata following on hearing, acquired by hearing AN ii.185. -āyatana the sense of hearing Dhs 601 sq.; DN ii.243, DN ii.280, DN ii.290. -āvadhāna giving ear attention MN ii.175. -indriya the faculty of hearing Dhs 604; DN iii.239. -dvāra “door of the ear,” auditory sensation Vb-a 41. -dhātu the ear element, the ear Vin ii.299; DN i.79; SN ii.121; AN i.255 (dibba˚); iii.17 (id.); v.199; Vb 334; Vism 407 (defd); Dhs 601, Dhs 604; Mil 6. -viññāṇa auditory cognition, perception through the ear Dhs 443. -viññeyya cognizable by hearing DN ii.281; Dhs 467; Kp-a 101.

Vedic śrotas & śrotra; fr. śru: see suṇāti

Sota2

(m. & nt.) 1. stream, flood, torrent Snp 433; Iti 144; Ja i.323; sīgha-s having a quick current DN ii.132; Snp 319; metaphorically the stream of cravings Snp 715 (chinna˚; cp. Mvu iii.88 chinna-srota), 1034; SN iv.292; MN i.226 (sotaṃ chetvā); Iti 114; denotes noble eightfold path SN v.347 bhava -s. torrent of rebirth SN i.15; SN iv.128; viññāṇa-s flux of mind, DN iii.105; nom. sing. soto SN iv.291 sq.v.347; nom. plur. sotā Snp 1034; acc. plur. sotāni Snp 433; plur. sotāyo (f. [?], or wrong reading instead of sotāso, sotāse [?]) Ja iv.287, Ja iv.288.

2. passage, aperture (of body, as eyes, ears, etc.), in kaṇṇa˚; orifice of the ear, and nāsa˚; nostril, e.g. DN i.106; Snp p.108; Ja i.163, Ja i.164 (heṭṭhā-nāsika-s.); Vism 400 (dakkhiṇa˚ vāma-kaṇṇa-s.).;

-āpatti entering upon the stream, i.e. the noble eightfold path (SN v.347), conversion Vin ii.93 etc. By it the first three Saṃyojanas are broken SN v.357, SN v.376 It has four phases (angas): faith in the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Order, and, further, the noble Sīlas SN ii.68 sq.; SN v.362 sq.; AN iii.12; AN iv.405; DN iii.227 (in detail). Another set of four angas consists of sappurisa-saṃsevā, saddhammasavana, yonisomanasikāra, and dhammânudhammapaṭipatti SN v.347, SN v.404. -phala the effect of having entered upon the stream, the fruit of conversion Vin i.293; Vin ii.183; MN i.325; AN i.44; AN iii.441 AN iv.292 sq., 372 sq.; DN i.229; DN iii.227; SN iii.168, SN iii.225 SN v.410 sq.; Pp 13; Dhp-a iii.192; Dhp-a iv.5; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 38 Pv-a 66, Pv-a 142. -magga the way to conversion, the lower stage of conversion DN-a i.237; Ja i.97; Vb-a 307; see magga -āpanna one who has entered the stream, a convert Vin ii.161, Vin ii.240; Vin iii.10; DN i.156; DN iii.107 sq., 132, 227; AN ii.89; SN ii.68; SN iii.203 sq., 225 sq.; v.193 sq. DN-a i.313; Vism 6, Vism 709; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 153. The converted is endowed with āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, and ādhipateyya SN v.390; he is called wealthy and glorious SN v.402; conversion excludes rebirth in purgatory, among animals and petas, as well as in other places of misery; he is a-vinipāta-dhamma: DN i.156; DN ii.200; SN v.193 sq., 343; AN i.232; AN ii.238; AN iii.331 sq.; AN iv.405 sq., AN v.182; MN iii.81 or khīṇa-niraya: AN iii.211; AN iv.405 sq. (+ khīṇa-tiracchānayoni etc.). The converted man is sure to attain the sambodhi (niyato sambodhipārāyano DN i.156, discussed in Dial. i.190

192).

Vedic srotas, nt., fr.; sru; see savati

Sotatta

scorched Ja i.390 = MN i.79, read so tatto (cp. MN i.536). See sosīta.

Sotar

a hearer DN i.56; AN ii.116; AN iii.161 sq ■ sotā used as a feminine noun Thag-a 200 (Ap v.3).

n. ag. fr. suṇāti

Sotavant

having ears, nom. pl. sotavanto SN i.138; Vin i.7; DN ii.39.

sota1 + vant

Sotukāma

wish or wishing to hear AN i.150; AN iv.115; Vism 444; f. abstr. ˚kamyatā desire to listen AN v.145 sq., Snp-a 135.

sotuṃ (= inf. of suṇāti) + kāma

Sotta

asleep SN i.170.

pp. of supati, for sutta

Sotti

(f.) a shell (?) filled with chunam and lac, used for scratching the back, a back-scratcher acting as a sponge MN ii.46; AN i.208; see sutti e.g. Vin ii.107.

Sk. śukti

Sottiya

well versed in sacred learning, a learned man MN i.280; Snp 533 sq. See sotthiya.

= *śrotriya

Sottun

see supati.

Sotthāna

(nt.) blessing, well-fare Snp 258; AN iv.271, AN iv.285; Ja v.29 (where the metre requires sotthayanaṃ, as at iv.75); vi.139.

cp. Sk. svastyayana

Sotthi

(f.) well-being, safety, bless ing AN iii.38 = AN iv.266 (“brings future happiness”) Ja i.335; s. hotu hail! DN i.96; sotthiṃ in safety, safely Dhp 219 (= anupaddavena Dhp-a iii.293); Pv iv.64 (= nirupaddava Pv-a 262); Snp 269; sotthinā safely prosperously DN i.72, DN i.96; DN ii.346; MN i.135; Ja ii.87; Ja iii.201 suvatthi the same Ja iv.32. See sotthika & sovatthika;.

-kamma a blessing Ja i.343. -kāra an utterer of blessings, a herald Ja vi.43. -gata safe wandering, prosperous journey Mvu 8, Mvu 10; sotthigamana the same Ja i.272. -bhāva well-being, prosperity, safety Ja i.209 Ja iii.44; Dhp-a ii.58; Pv-a 250. -vācaka utterer of blessings a herald Mil 359. -sālā a hospital Mvu 10, Mvu 101.

Sk. svasti = su + asti

Sotthika

(& ˚iya) (adj.) happy, auspicious, blessed, safe Vv-a 95; Dhp-a ii.227 (˚iya; in phrase dīgha˚ one who is happy for long [?]).

fr. sotthi

Sotthiya1 = sottiya

a learned man, a brahmin Dhp 295; Thag-a 200 (Ap v.6); Ja iv.301, Ja iv.303; Ja v.466.

Sotthiya2

(nt.) a childbirth rag Vism 63.

der.?

Sotthivant

(adj.) lucky, happy, safe Vv 8452.

sotthi + vant

Sodaka

(adj.) containing water Mvu 30, Mvu 38; Mvu 37, Mvu 200.

sa + udaka

Sodariya

(adj.) having a common origin (in the same mother’s womb), born of the same mother a brother Ja i.308; Ja iv.434; Pv-a 94 (bhātā).

sa + udariya

Sodhaka

one who cleanses Mvu 10, Mvu 90; Pv-a 7.

fr. sodheti

Sodhana

(nt.) cleansing Vism 276 (as f. ˚nā); examining Ja i.292; payment (see uddhāra ) Ja i.321.

fr. sodheti

Sodheti

to make clean, to purify Vin i.47; MN i.39; Dhp 141; DN-a i.261, DN-a i.135; to examine, search Ja i.200, Ja i.291; Ja ii.123; Ja iii.528; to search for, to seek Ja ii.135; to clean away, to remove Ja iv.404; to correct Ja ii.48; to clear a debt: in this meaning mixed with sādheti (q.v.) in phrases iṇaṃ s. and uddhāraṃ s.; we read iṇaṃ sodheti at Pv-a 276; uddhāraṃ sodheti at Ja iv.45; otherwise sādheti ■ Caus. II. sodhāpeti to cause to clean, to clean Vin iii.208, Vin iii.248 = Vin i.206; Ja i.305 Ja ii.19; Pass. sodhīyati to be cleansed, to be adorned Bv ii.40 sq. = Ja i.12.

Caus. of sujjhati

Sona

dog Iti 36; see soṇa.

Sopadhīka

= sa + upadhika.

Sopavāhana

= sa + upavāhana.

Sopāka

a man of a very low caste, an outcast Snp 137. See also sapāka.

= sapāka; śva + pāka

Sopāna

(m. and nt.) stairs, staircase Vin ii.117, Vin ii.152; DN ii.178; Ja i.330, Ja i.348; Ja iv.265; Vism 10; Vv-a 188; Pv-a 156, Pv-a 275; Vv 785; dhura-sopāna the highest step of a staircase (? Ja i.330.

-kaliṅgara flight of steps Vin ii.128 (v.l. sopāṇakaḷevara as at MN ii.92). -panti a flight or row of steps, a ladder Vism 392 (three). -pāda the foot of the steps (opp. ˚sīsa ) Dhp-a i.115. -phalaka a step of a staircase Ja i.330.

cp. Sk. sopāna; Aufrecht “sa + upāyana”

Soppa

(nt.) sleep, dream SN i.110; AN i.261 (i.e. laziness). ˚ante in a dream Ja v.329 (C. reading for T suppante).

= supina

Soppati

see supati.

Sobbha

a hole, (deep) pit DN ii.127; MN i.11; AN i.243; AN ii.140; AN iii.389 (see papāta); v.114 sq. Ja vi.166; Thag 229; Snp-a 355, Snp-a 479; a water-pool SN ii.32; Snp 720; Vism 186; as adj. at SN iii.109 (+ papāta), i.e. “deep”; kussobbha a small collection of water SN ii.32 SN ii.118; Snp 720; mahāsobbha the ocean SN ii.32, SN ii.118.

cp. Sk. śvabhra

Sobhagga

(nt.) prosperity, beauty Thig 72; Ja i.51, Ja i.475; Ja ii.158; Ja iv.133. As sobhagyatā at DN-a i.161.

abstr. fr. subhaga

Sobhañjana

the tree Hyperanthica moringa Ja v.405; sobhañjanaka the same Ja iii.161 (= siggurukkha, C.) vi.535.

Sobhaṇa1

(nt.) 1. a kind of edging on a girdle Vin ii.136.

2. beauty, ornament Mil 356.

fr. śubh

Sobhaṇa2

(adj.) 1. adorning, shining, embellishing AN ii.8, AN ii.225; very often spelt sobhana Ja i.257; Thag-a 244; nagara-sobhaṇā (or ˚iṇī ) a courtesan Ja ii.367 Ja iii.435, Ja iii.475; Mil 350; Pv-a 4.

2. good Mil 46 (text ˚na); Cpd. 96; 101; 106.

fr. śubh

Sobhati

1. to shine, to be splendid, look beautiful Ja i.89; Ja ii.93; sobhetha let your light shine (with foll. yaṃ “in that… ”) Vin i.187, Vin i.349 = Vin ii.162; Ja iii.487 = SN i.217; ppr. ˚māna Vism 58. aor. sobhi Ja i.143; Caus. sobheti to make resplendent, adorn, grace AN ii.7; Snp 421; Ja i.43; Mil 1; Vism 79 (ppr. sobhayanto); to make clear DN ii.105.

śubh, Vedic śobhate

Sobhanagaraka

(nt.) a kind of game, fairy scenes DN i.6, DN i.13; DN-a i.84.

Sobhā

(f.) splendour, radiance, beauty Mvu 33, Mvu 30; Ja iv.333; Thag-a 226; Mil 356.

fr. śubh; Sk. śobhā

Sobhiya

a sort of magician or trickster, clown Ja vi.277 (sobhiyā ti nagarasobhanā sampannarūpā purisā; not correct C.).

cp. Sk. śaubhika; BSk. śobhika Mvu iii.113

Somanassa

(nt.) mental ease, happiness, joy DN i.3; DN ii.278; DN iii.270; MN i.85, MN i.313; SN iv.232; AN ii.69; AN iii.207, AN iii.238; Dhp 341; Snp 67; Pp 59 Vb-a 73; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 133; DN-a i.53; it is more than sukha DN ii.214; defined at Vism 461 (iṭṭh’ārammaṇ’ ânubhavana-lakkhaṇaṃ, etc.). A syName of it is veda 1 On term see also Cpd. 277.

-indriya the faculty of pleasure DN iii.224; SN v.209 sq.; Dhs 18.

fr. su + mano; cp. domanassa

Somanassita

(adj.) satisfied, pleased, contented Vv-a 351.

Caus. pp. formation fr. somanassa

Somarukkha

a certain species of tree Ja vi.530.

soma + rukkha

Sombhā

(f.) a puppet, doll Thig 390; explained as sombhakā Thag-a 257.

Somma

(adj.) pleasing, agreeable, gentle Dāvs i.42; DN-a i.247; Dhs-a 127; Vv-a 205; Snp-a 456; Vism 168.

Sk. saumya, fr. soma

Soracca

(nt.) gentleness, restraint, meekness AN ii.68, AN ii.113; AN iii.248; SN i.100, SN i.172, SN i.222; Snp 78, Snp 292; Dhs 1342; Ja iii.442; Ja iv.302; Mil 162; Vv-a 347 Often combd with khanti forbearance (q.v.) ■ soracciya (nt.) the same Ja iii.453.

fr. sorata

Sorata

(adj.) [ = su + rata, with so˚ for sū˚, which latter is customary for su˚ before r (cp. dūr˚ for dur˚). See du1 2 and Geiger, P.Gr. § 11 ■ The (B)Sk. is sūrata gentle, kind, humble, self-restrained MN i.125; SN i.65 SN iv.305 (text, sūrata); AN ii.43; AN iii.349, AN iii.393 sq.; Snp 309 Snp 515, Snp 540; Ja iv.303; Dhp-a i.56.

Soḷasa

(num. card.) sixteen DN i.128; Snp 1006; Ja i.78 (lekhā); ii.87; iii.342 (atappiya-vatthūni); v.175 vi.37; Mil 11 (palibodhā); Dhp-a i.129 (˚salākā); iv.208 (˚karīsa-matta). instr. soḷasahi DN i.31, & soḷasehi DN i.139; gen. soḷasannaṃ Ja iv.124. Very frequent in measures of time & space.; -˚vassa˚; (16 years… Ja i.231, Ja i.285; Ja ii.43; Ja iv.7; Ja vi.10, Ja vi.486; Dhp-a i.25 and passim. The fem. ˚-sī acts as num. ord. “sixteenth, in phrase kalaṃ nagghati soḷasiṃ he is not worth a sixteenth particle of AN iv.252; SN iii.156; SN v.44, SN v.343; Dhp 70; Iti 19.

Sk. ṣoḍaśa

Soḷasakkhattuṃ

sixteen times DN-a i.261; Dhp-a i.353 = Mvu 6, Mvu 37.

Soḷasama

sixteenth Mvu 2, Mvu 29; Vism 292.

Sovaggika

(adj.) connected with heaven Vin i.294; DN i.51; AN ii.54, AN ii.68; AN iii.46, AN iii.51, AN iii.259; AN iv.245; SN i.90; DN-a i.158.

fr. sagga = *svarga; cp. the similar formation dovārika = dvāra

Sovacassa

(nt.) gentleness, suavity DN iii.267; AN ii.148; AN iii.180; Ne 40; Ne 127; ˚-karaṇa making for gentleness MN i.96; AN ii.148 = AN iii.180.

fr. suvaca, in analogy to dovacassa

Sovacassatā

(f.) = sovacassa MN i.126; DN iii.212, DN iii.274; AN i.83; AN iii.310, AN iii.423 sq., 449; iv.29; Snp 266; Dhs 1327 Pp 24. Sovaccasāya & sovacassiya; the same (Dhs 1327 Pp 24).

Sovaṇṇa

(adj.) golden DN ii.210; AN iv.393; Pv-a ii.121; Ja i.226; ˚-maya golden Vin i.39; Vin ii.116; DN ii.170 etc.; Ja ii.112.

fr. suvaṇṇa

Sovaṇṇaya

(adj.) golden Ja i.226.

= sovaṇṇaka

Sovatthika

(adj.) safe MN i.117; Vv 187 (= sotthika Vv-a 95); Ja vi.339 (in the shape of a svastika?); Pv iv.33 (= sotthi-bhāva-vāha Pv-a 250). -ālaṅkāra a kind of auspicious mark Ja vi.488.

either fr. sotthi with diaeresis, or fr. su + atthi + ka = Sk. svastika

Sovīraka

(nt.) sour gruel Vin i.210; SN ii.111; Vv 198; PugA 232.

dialectical?

Sosa

drying up, consumption Vin i.71; Vism 345.

fr. śuṣ

Sosana

(nt.) causing to dry (in surgery) Mil 353.

fr. soseti

Sosānika

(adj.) connected with a cemetery, bier-like Vin ii.149; m., one who lives in or near a cemetery AN iii.220; Pp 69 sq.; Mil 342; Vism 61 sq. Dhp-a i.69.

fr. susāna

Sosārita

(adj.) well reinstated (opp. dosārita) Vin i.322.

su + osārita

Sosika

(adj.) afflicted with pulmonary consumption Vin i.93; Vin iv.8.

fr. sosa

Sosīta

at Ja i.390 means either “thoroughly chilled” or “well wetted.” It is expld as “him’odakena su-sīto suṭṭhu tinto.” Perhaps we have to read so sīta, or sīna (cp. sīna2), or sinna. The corresponding sotatta (expld as “suriya-santāpena su-tatto”) should then be so tatto.

Soseti

to cause to dry or wither Mvu 21, Mvu 28; Vism 120. See vi˚.

Caus. of sussati

Sossati

is Fut. of suṇāti.

Sohada

a friend Mvu 38, Mvu 98. See also suhada.

Sk. sauhṛda, fr. su + hṛd

Sneha

see sineha.

Svākāra

being of good disposition Vin i.6.

su + ākāra

Svākkhāta

well preached Vin i.12, Vin i.187 Vin ii.199; MN i.67; AN i.34; AN ii.56; Snp 567. Opp. durakkhāta Vism 213 (in detail).

su + akkhāta; on the long ā cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 7; BSk. svākhyāta

Svāgata

1. welcome Vin ii.11; Thig 337; Thag-a 236.

2. learnt by heart Vin ii.95, Vin ii.249; AN iv.140 (pātimokkhāni). See sāgata.

su + āgata

Svātana

relating to the morrow; dat. ˚-nāya for the following day Vin i.27; DN i.125; Ja i.11; Dhp-a i.314; Dhp-a iv.12.

cp. Sk. śvastana; Geiger, P.Gr. § 6, 54

Svātivatta

easily overcome Snp 785; Nd i.76.

su + ativatta

Svāssu

= so assu Ja i.196.

Svāhaṃ

= so ahaṃ.

Sve

(adv.) to-morrow Vin ii.77; DN i.108, DN i.205; Ja i.32, Ja i.243; Ja ii.47; Vv-a 230; svedivasa Dhp-a i.103. The diaeretic form is suve, e.g. Pv iv.15; Mvu 29, Mvu 17; and doubled suve suve day after day Dhp 229; Dhp-a iii.329; Ja v.507.

H.

cp. Sk. śvas

H

Ha

an emphatic particle “hey, oh, hallo I say” Vin ii.109; Snp 666; iti ha, thus Vin i.5, Vin i.12; DN i.1; a common beginning to traditional instruction Snp 1053; itihītihaṃ (saying), “thus and thus” Snp 1084; Snp-a 416 (ha-kāra); Pv-a 4 (ha re), 58 (gloss for su ).

freq. in Rigveda, as gha or ha, Idg. *gho, *ghe; cp. Lat. hi-c, Sk. hi

Haṃ

(indecl.) an exclamation “I say, hey, hallo, look here!” Vv 508 (= nipāta Vv-a 212); Ja v.422; Vv-a 77. Sometimes as han ti, e.g. Ja v.203; Dhp-a iii.108. See also handa & hambho;. In combn iti haṃ (= iti) Snp 783; Nd i.71; or with other part. like haṃ dhī Dhp-a i.179, Dhp-a i.216 (here as haṃ di ).

cp. Sk. haṃ

Haṃsa1

bristling: see lomahaṃsa Snp 270 etc.

fr. haṃsati

Haṃsa2

1. a water-bird, swan SN i.148; Snp 221, Snp 350, Snp 1134; Dhp 91, Dhp 175; Dhp-a ii.170; Ja ii.176 sq.; Snp-a 277; Pv ii.123; iii.34. Considered as (suvaṇṇa-) rāja-haṃsa (“golden royal swan”) to be king of the birds: Ja i.207; Ja ii.353; Vism 650 ■ At Snp-a 277 Bdhgh gives various kinds of haṃsa’s, viz. harita˚ tamba˚, khīra˚, kāḷa˚, pāka˚, suvaṇṇa˚ ■ pāka˚; a species of water bird Ja v.356; Ja vi.539; Snp-a 277 ■ f haṃsī Dāvs v.24 (rāja˚).

2. a kind of building Ja i.92.

-potaka a young swan Vism 153 (in simile). -rāja the king of swans Vv 358; Vin iv.259.

cp. Sk. haṃsa = Lat. (h)anser “goose,” Gr. ξήν = Ags. gōs = E. goose, Ger. gans

Haṃsati

to bristle, stand on end (said of the hair) Vin iii.8; MN i.79; Caus. haṃseti to cause to bristle Ja v.154 ■ pp. haṭṭha.

cp. Vedic harṣate Idg. *ĝher to bristle (of hair), as in Lat. horreo (“horrid, horripilation”), ēr hedgehog (“bristler”) = Gr. ξήρ id.; Lat. hirtus, hispidus “rough”; Ags. gorst = gorse; Ger. granne & many others, for which see Walde,; Lat. Wtb. s. v. ēr ■ The Dhtp (309) defines as “tuṭṭhi.” See also ghaṃsati2 pahaṃsati2, pahaṭṭha2, pahaṃsita2

Haṃsana

(adj.-n..) bristling, see lomahaṃsa Snp 270 etc.

fr. hṛṣ

Haṃsi

(indecl.) = hañci if, in case that Ja vi.343.

?

Haṅkhati

see paṭi˚.

Hacca

(adj.) killing, in bhūnahacca killing an embryo AN iv.98; Ja vi.579 = Ja vi.587; Mil 314 (text bhūta-)

fr. han

Hañci

(indecl.) if Kv 1. Hannati & hanchati;

haṃ + ci

Haññati & hañchati

see hanati.

Haṭa1

taken, carried off Vin iv.23; Ja i.498. haṭa-haṭa-kesa with dishevelled hair SN i.115.

pp. of harati

Haṭa2

a kind of water-plant, Pistia stratiotes DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.156; Pp 55 (text sāta-) AN i.241, AN i.295 (v.l. sāta; cp. hāṭaka).

cp. Sk. haṭha & haṭa

Haṭṭha

1. bristling, standing on end MN i.83; Dāvs v.64; lomahaṭṭhajāta (cp. ˚loma) with bristling hairs, excited DN ii.240; Snp p.14.

2. joyful happy Vin i.15; Snp 1017; Ja i.31, Ja i.335; Ja ii.32; often combd with either tuṭṭha (e.g. Ja vi.427; Pv-a 113), or pahaṭṭha (Dhp-a iii.292).

pp. of haṃsati

Haṭha

violence.

only as lexicogr. word; Dhtp 101 = balakkāra

Hata

struck, killed DN ii.131; destroyed, spoilt, injured Vin i.25; Dhs 264; Ja ii.175; reṇuhata struck with dust, covered with dust Vin i.32; hatatta (nt.) the state of being destroyed Dhp 390; hatāvakāsa who has cut off every occasion (for good and evil) Dhp 97; Dhp-a ii.188; hatāvasesaka surviving DN i.135 pakkha˚; a cripple (q.v.); ˚vikkhittaka slain & cut up killed & dismembered Vism 179, Vism 194 ■; hata is also used in sense of med., i.e. one who has destroyed or killed e.g. nāga˚; slayer of a nāga Vin ii.195; ˚antarāya one who removes an obstacle Pv-a 1ahata unsoiled, clean new DN ii.160; Ja i.50; Dāvs ii.39.

pp. of hanti

Hati

(f.) destruction Dāvs iv.17.

fr. han

Hattha

1. hand DN i.124; AN i.47; Snp 610; Ja vi.40 ■ forearm Vin iv.221; of animals SN v.148; Ja i.149; ˚pāda hand and foot MN i.523; AN i.47; Ja ii.117; Pv-a 241; Dhp-a iv.7. sahassa˚; thousand-armed Mvu 30, Mvu 75; pañca˚; having five hands Ja v.425; Ja v.431 (mukhassa ceva catunnaṃ ca caranāṇaṃ vasena etaṃ vuttaṃ); kata˚; a practised hand, practised (of an archer) SN i.62; AN ii.48; Ja iv.211hatthe karoti to bring under one’s hand, to take possession of, to subdue Ja vi.490; hatthaṃ gacchati to come under somebody’s hand, to come under the sway of Ja i.179; hatthaga being in the power of; hatthagata fallen into the hand or possession of, hatthappatta what one can put one’s hand on, i.e. “before his very eyes” Vin i.15. As ˚hattha in hand,-handed; e.g. daṇḍa˚; stick in hand Ja i.59; ritta˚; empty-handed Sdhp 309; vīṇā˚; lute in hand Mvu 30, Mvu 75. Cp. sa˚; with one’s own hand. 2. the hand as measure, a cubit Ja i.34, Ja i.233 (asīti˚, q.v.) Mvu 38, Mvu 52; Vism 92 (nava˚ sāṭaka).

3. a handful a tuft (of hair) Vv-a 197.

-aṅguli finger Pv-a 124 (+ pādanguli toe). -aṭṭhika hand-bone Kp-a 49. -antara a cubit Vism 124. -āpalekhana licking the hands (to clean them after eating-cp. the 52nd Sekhiya Vin iv.198) DN i.166 DN iii.40; MN i.77, MN i.238, MN i.307; AN i.295 (v.l. ˚āva˚); Pp 55 -ābharaṇa bracelet Vin ii.106. -ābhijappana (nt. incantations to make a man throw up his hands DN i.11; DN-a i.97. -ālaṅkāra a (wrist) bracelet wristlet Vv-a 167. -kacchapaka making a hollow hand Ja iii.505. -kamma manual work, craft, workmanship labour Ja i.220; Dhp-a i.98, Dhp-a i.395; Dhp-a iv.64. -gata received come into the possession of Ja i.446; Ja ii.94, Ja ii.105; Vv-a 149; (nt.) possession Ja vi.392. -gahaṇa seizing by the hand Vin iv.220. -cchinna whose hand is cut off MN i.523; Mil 5. -ccheda cutting off the hand Ja i.155 (read sugatiyā va hatthacchedādi). -cchedana = ˚cheda Ja iv.192; Dhp-a iii.482. -tala palm of the hand Vv-a 7 -ttha [cp. Sk. hasta-stha, of sthā ] lit. standing in the hand of somebody, being in somebody’s power (cp hattha-gata); used as abstr. hatthattha (nt.) power captivity, ˚ṃ gacchati & āgacchati; to come into the power of (gen.), to be at the mercy of [cp. hattha-gata & hatthaṃ gacchati] Ja ii.383 (āyanti hatthatthaṃ) iv.420, 459; v.346 (˚ṃ āgata). As pp. hatth-attha-gata in somebody’s power Ja i.244; Ja iii.204; Ja vi.582. An abstr. is further formed fr. hatthattha as hatthatthatā Ja v.349 (˚taṃ gata). The BSk. equivalent is hastatvaṃ Mvu ii.182. -pajjotikā hand-illumination, scorching of the hand (by holding it in a torch), a kind of punishment MN i.87; AN i.47; AN ii.122; Mil 197; Nd i.154. -patāpaka a coal-pan, heating of the hand Vv 3332; Vv-a 147; see mandāmukhi ■ pasāraṇa stretching out one’s hand Vism 569. -pāsa the side of the hand, vicinity Vin iv.221, Vin iv.230. -bandha a bracelet DN i.7; DN-a i.89 -vaṭṭaka hand-cart Vin ii.276. -vikāra motion of the hand Ja iv.491. -sāra hand-wealth, movable property Dhp-a i.240; Ja i.114; DN-a i.216.

fr. hṛ; cp. Vedic hasta

Hatthaka

a handful, a quantity (lit. a little hand) Vv 455 (= kalāpa Vv-a 197).

hattha + ka

Hatthin

an elephant Vin i.218, Vin i.352; Vin ii.194 sq (Nālāgiri) = Ja v.335 (nom. sg. hatthī; gen. hatthissa) DN i.5; AN ii.209; Ja i.358; Ja ii.102; Dhp-a i.59 (correct haṭṭhi!), 80 (acc. pl. hatthī); size of an elephant Mil 312; one of the seven treasures DN i.89; DN ii.174; often mentioned together with horses (˚ass’ādayo), e.g. AN iv.107; MN iii.104; Vism 269; Dhp-a i.392. ekacārika-h., an elephant who wanders alone, a royal elephant Ja iii.175; caṇḍa h. rogue elephant MN i.519; DN-a i.37- hatthinī (f.) a she-elephant Dhp 105. hatthinikā (f. the same Vin i.277; DN i.49; DN-a i.147.

-atthara elephant rug Vin i.192; DN i.7; AN i.181 -ācariya elephant trainer Vin i.345; Ja ii.94, Ja ii.221, Ja ii.411 Ja iv.91; Mil 201. -āroha mounted on an elephant, an elephant-driver DN i.51; SN iv.310. -ālaṅkāra elephant’s trappings Ja ii.46. -kanta = manta el. charm Dhp-a i.163 -kantavīṇā lute enticing an elephant Dhp-a i.163. -kalabha the young of an elephant AN iv.435. -kumbha the frontal globe of an elephant Ja ii.245. -kula elephant species, ten enumd at Vb-a 397. -kkhandha the shoulder or back of an elephant Ja i.313; Mvu vi.24; Pv-a 75. 178. -gopaka an elephant’s groom or keeper Ja i.187. -damaka elephant tamer MN iii.132, MN iii.136; Snp-a 161. -damma an elephant in training MN iii.222 -nakha a sort of turrent projecting over the approach to a gate; ˚ka provided with such turrets, or supported on pillars with capitals of elephant heads Vin ii.169 -pada an elephant’s foot MN i.176, MN i.184; SN v.43; Ja i.94 -pākāra “elephant-wall,” wall of the upper storey with figures of elephants in relief Mvu 33, Mvu 5. See Geiger Mvu trsln 228, n. 2. -ppabhinna a furious elephant Dhp 326; MN i.236. -bandha Ja i.135 = hatthibhaṇḍa -bhaṇḍa an elephant-keeper Vin i.85; Vin ii.194. -magga elephant track Ja ii.102. -maṅgala an elephant festival Ja ii.46. -matta only as big as an elephant Ja i.303 -māraka elephant hunter Dhp-a i.80. -meṇḍa an elephant’s groom Ja iii.431; Ja v.287; Ja vi.498. -yāna an elephant carriage, a riding elephant DN i.49; DN-a i.147; Pv-a 55. -yuddha combat of elephants (as a theatrical show) DN i.6. -rūpaka elephant image or picture, toy elephant (+ assa˚) Dhp-a ii.69. -laṇḍa elephant dung Dhp-a iv.156. -liṅgasakuṇa a vulture with a bill like an elephant’s trunk Dhp-a i.164. -vatta elephant habit Nd i.92. -sālā elephant stable Vin i.277; Vin ii.194; Dhp-a i.393. -sippa the elephant lore, the professional knowledge of elephant-training Ja ii.221 sq. -sutta an elephant-trainer’s manual Ja ii.46 (cp. Mallinātha on Raghuv. vi.27). -soṇḍaka “elephant trunk,” an under-garment arranged with appendages like elephant trunks Vin ii.137.

Vedic hastin, lit. endowed with a hand, i.e. having a trunk

Hadaya

gone to the heart, learnt by heart Mil 10 -gama [˚ngama] heart-stirring, pleasant, agreeable DN i.4; DN iii.173; MN i.345; AN ii.209; AN v.205; Vin iii.77 Nd i.446; Dhs. 1343; DN-a i.75. -pariḷāha heart-glow Mil 318. -phālana bursting of the heart Ja i.282 -maṃsa the flesh of the heart, the heart Ja i.278, Ja i.347 Ja ii.159 etc. (very frequent in the Jātakas); Dhp-a i.5 Dhp-a ii.90. -bheda “heart-break,” a certain trick in cheating with measures DN-a i.79. -vañcana deluding the heart Snp-a 183 (cp. Ja vi.388 hadaya-tthena), -vatthu (1 the substance of the heart Mil 281; Dhs-a 140 (2) “heart-basis,” the heart as basis of mind, sensorium commune Tikp 17, 26, 53 sq., 62, 256; Vism 447; Snp-a 228; Dhs-a 257, Dhs-a 264. See the discussion at Dhs. trsln lxxxvi. and Cpd. 277 sq. -santāpa heart-burn i.e. grief, sorrow Vism 54. -ssita stuck in the heart (of salla, dart) Snp 938; Nd i.411.

Vedic hṛdaya, hṛd = Av. ƶərədā, not the same as Lat. cor(dem), but perhaps = Lat. haru entrails (haruspex). See K.Z. xl.419].the heart.

1. the physical organ DN ii.293; SN i.207 (ettha uro hadayan ti vuttaṃ Dhs-a 140); in detail: Vism 256, Vism 356; Vb-a 60, Vb-a 239. 2. the heart as seat of thought and feeling, esp. of strong emotion (as in Vedas!), which shows itself in the action of the heart SN i.199. Thus defined as “cintā” at Dhtm 535 (as had ), or as “hadayaṃ vuccati cittaṃ, with ster. expln “mano mānasa paṇḍara” etc. Dhs 17 Nd i.412. Cp. Dhs-a 140 (cittaṃ abbhantar’ aṭṭhena hadayan ti vuttaṃ) ■ With citta at Snp p.32 (hadayaṃ te phalessāmi “I shall break your heart”); hadayaṃ phalitaṃ a broken heart Ja i.65; Dhp-a i.173. chinna h id. Ja v.180. hadayassa santi calmness of h. AN v.64 sq. hadayā hadayaṃ aññāya tacchati MN i.32. h. nibbāyi the heart (i.e. anger) cooled down Ja vi.349; h. me avakaḍḍhati my heart is distraught Ja iv.415duhadaya bad-hearted Ja vi.469.

-aṭṭhi a bone of the heart Kp-a 49, Kp-a 50 (so read for pādaṭṭhi, see App. to Pj 1.); Vism 255; Snp-a 116. -gata [˚ngata

Han

(indecl.) see haṃ.

Hanati1

(& hanti) 1. to strike, to thresh SN iv.201; Ja iv.102.

-2. to kill DN i.123; AN iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaṃ); Snp 125; Dhp 405; maggaṃ˚; to slay travellers on the road Ja i.274; Ja iii.220.

-3. to destroy to remove Snp 118; Dhp 72Forms: Pres. 1st sg hanāmi Ja ii.273; Ja ii.2nd sg. hanāsi Ja iii.199; Ja v.460; Ja v.3rd sg. hanti Snp 118; AN iv.97; Dhp-a ii.73 (= vināseti) Dhp 72; hanāti Ja v.461; hanati Ja i.432; Ja i.1st pl. hanāma Ja i.200; Ja i.3rd pl. hananti Snp 669. Imper. hana Ja iii.185 hanassu Ja v.311; hanantu Ja iv.42; Dhp 355; Ja i.368 Pot. hane Snp 394, Snp 400; haneyya DN i.123; Snp 705. ppr a-hanaṃ not killing DN i.116; hananto Ja i.274. fut hanissati Ja iv.102; hañchati Ja iv.102; hañchema Ja ii.418. aor. hani Mvu 25, Mvu 64; Mvu 3rd pl. haniṃsu Snp 295; Ja i.256; ger. hantvā Snp 121; Dhp 294 sq.; hanitvāna Ja iii.185 ■ Pass. haññati DN ii.352; SN iv.175; Snp 312; Ja i.371; Ja iv.102; Dhp-a ii.28. ppr. haññamāna SN iv.201 grd. hantabba DN ii.173. aor. pass. haññiṃsu DN i.141 fut. haññissati DN-a i.134 ■ Caus. hanāpeti to cause to slay, destroy Ja i.262; DN-a i.159; ghātāpeti Vin i.277 ghāteti to cause to slay Dhp 405; Snp 629; a-ghātayaṃ not causing to kill SN i.116; Pot. ghātaye Snp 705; ghātayeyya Snp 394; aor. aghātayi Snp 308; ghātayi Snp 309 pass. ghātīyati Mil 186. See also ghāteti. Cp. upahanati, vihanati; ˚gha, ghāta etc., paligha.

; han or ghan to smite, Idg. *gṷhen, as in Av. jainti to kill; Gr. χείνω to strike, φόνος murder Lat. de-fendo “defend” & of-fendo; Ohg. gundea Ags. gūd “battle.” The Dhtp (363 & 429) gives “hiṃsā” as meaning of han

Hanati2 [*han

for had, probably from pp. hanna. The Dhtm (535) gives had in meaning of “uccāra ussagga” to empty the bowels Pv iv.88 (= vaccaṃ osajjate Pv-a 268) ■ pp. hanna. Cp. ūhanati2 & ohanati;.

Hanana

(nt.) killing, striking, injuring Mvu 3, Mvu 42.

fr. hanati

Hanu

(f.) the jaw DN i.11; Ja i.28 (mahā˚), 498; Snp-a 30 (˚sañcalana) Vb-a 145 (˚sañcopana). ˚-saṃhanana jaw-binding, incantations to bring on dumbness DN i.11; DN-a i.97.

Vedic hanu; cp. Lat. gena jaw, Gr. γένυς chin, Goth. kinnus = Ger. kinn = E. chin, Oir. gin mouth

Hanukā

(f.) the jaw Ja i.498; DN-a i.97; Mil 229; also nt. Vin ii.266; Ja i.461; Ja ii.127; Ja iv.188; -˚aṭṭhika the jaw bone Ja i.265 sq.; Vism 251; Vb-a 58; Kp-a 49; Snp-a 116.

fr. hanu

Hantar

a striker, one who kills DN i.56; AN ii.116 sq.; AN iii.161 sq.; SN i.85; Dhp 389.

n. ag. fr. hanati

Handa

(indecl.) an exhortative-emphatic particle used like Gr. α ̓́γε δή or French allons, voilà: well then, now, come along, alas! It is constructed with 1st pres. & fut., or imper, 2;nd person DN i.106, DN i.142; DN ii.288; Snp 153, Snp 701, Snp 1132; Ja i.88, Ja i.221, Ja i.233 Ja iii.135; DN-a i.237 (= vavasāy’atthe nipāto); Nd ii.697 (= padasandhi); Pv i.103 (= gaṇha Pv-a 49); ii.321 (= upasagg’atthe nipāta Pv-a 88); Dhp-a i.16, Dhp-a i.410 (handa je); Snp-a 200 (vvavasāne), 491 (id.); Vv-a 230 (hand’ âhaṃ gamissāmi).

cp. Sk. hanta, haṃ + ta

Hanna

(nt.) easing oneself, emptying of the bowels; su˚ a good (i.e. modest) performance of bodily evacuation, i.e. modesty Ja i.421.

pp. of hanati2

Hambho

(indecl.) a particle expressing surprise or haughtiness Ja i.184, Ja i.494. See also ambho.

haṃ + bho

Hammiya

(nt.) customarily given as “a long, storied mansion which has an upper chamber placed on the top,” a larger building, pāsāda, (store-house Vin i.58, Vin i.96, Vin i.239; Vin ii.146 (with vihāra, aḍḍhayoga pāsāda, guhā, as the 5 lenāni), 152, 195; Mil 393 Nd i.226 = Vism 25. ˚-gabbha a chamber on the upper storey Vin ii.152.

cp. Vedic harmya house & BSk. harmikā “summer-house” (?) Divy 244

Haya

1. a horse Vv 641; Ja ii.98; Mil 2.

2. speed MN i.446. -˚vāhin drawn by horses Ja vi.125.

cp. Vedic haya, fr. hi to impel. A diff. etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. haedus

Hara

(adj.) (-˚) taking, fetching; vayo˚; bringing age (said of grey hairs) Ja i.138; du˚; SN i.36.

fr. hṛ;

Haraṇa

(nt.) taking, seizing, removing Ja i.117, Ja i.118, Ja i.232; DN-a i.71. kucchi˚; n. filling of the belly Ja i.277 ˚bhatta a meal to take along Dhp-a ii.144.

fr. hṛ;

Haraṇaka

(nt.) goods in transit, movable goods Vin iii.51.

fr. haraṇa

Haraṇī

(f.) 1. a nerve conveying a stimulus (lit. “carrier”); only used with rasa˚; nerve of taste Vin ii.137; usually given as “a hundred thousand” in number, e.g. Ja v.4, Ja v.293, Ja v.458; Dhp-a i.134.

2. in kaṇṇamala˚; an instrument to remove the wax from the ear Vin ii.135. Cp. hāraka.

fr. haraṇa

Harati

1. to carry Ja ii.176; Dhp 124; to take with one DN i.8, DN i.142; opposed to paccāharati Vb-a 349–⁠354; Snp-a 52

58.

2. to bring Ja i.208; to offer Ja i.238; Snp 223.

3. to take, gather (fruits) Mil 263.

4. to fetch, buy Ja i.291 (mama santikā).

5. to carry away to remove DN ii.160, DN ii.166; Ja i.282; Snp 469; Mvu 1, Mvu 26 to do away with, to abolish Ja i.345.

6. to take away by force, to plunder, steal DN i.52; Ja i.187; Ja v.254. 7. to take off, to destroy Ja i.222 (jīvitaṃ), 310 (visaṃ) to kill Ja i.281Forms: aor. ahāsi Snp 469 sq.; Dhp 3; Ja iv.308; cp. upasaṃhāsi SN v.214; pahāsi, pariyudāhāsi ajjhupāhari; ger. haritvā DN ii.160; hātūna Ja iv.280 (= haritvā C.); inf. harituṃ Ja i.187; hātave Thag 186 hātuṃ: see voharati; hattuṃ: see āharati; Fut. hāhiti Ja vi.500 (= harissati). -Pass. harīyati MN i.33; hīrati Ja v.254; pret. ahīratha Ja v.253; grd. haritabba Ja i.187 Ja i.281 ■ pp. haṭa ■ Caus. hāreti to cause to take Snp 395; to cause to be removed, to remove Ja i.345; Ja ii.176 Ja iii.431 (somebody out of office); hāretabba that which should be taken out of the way Ja i.298; Caus. II. harāpeti to cause to be brought, to offer Vin i.245; Ja ii.38 to cause to be taken (as a fine) Mil 193.

Idg. *ĝher; in meaning “take” cp. Gr. ξείρ hand; in meaning “comprise” cp. Lat. cohors. Gr. ξόρτος; Ags. geard = yard ■ The Dhtm expls har laconically by “haraṇa”

Harāyati

1. to be ashamed Vin i.88; Vin ii.292; DN i.213; MN i.120; SN iv.62; Iti 43; Pv i.102 ppr. harāyanto Nd i.466, & harāyamāna Ja iv.171; Nd ii.566. Often combd with aṭṭiyati (q.v.). See also hiriyati.

2. [in this meaning = Vedic hṛ; to be angry Pres. hṛṇīte] to be depressed or vexed, to be cross, to worry (cp. hiriyati) Ja v.366 (ppr. hariyyamāna); Thag 1173 (mā hari “don’t worry”).

Denom. fr. hiri (= hrī), cp. Vedic hrī to be ashamed, Pres. jihreti ■ The Dhtp (438) gives roots hiri & hara; in meaning “lajjā”

Hari

(adj.) green, tawny Dhs 617; Dhs-a 317 ˚-ssavaṇṇa gold-coloured Ja ii.33 (= hari-samāna-vaṇṇa suvaṇṇa˚ C.).

-candana yellow sandal Vv 831; Dhp-a i.28; -tāla yellow orpiment Thig 393; Dhp-a iii.29; Dhp-a iv.113; -ttaca gold-coloured Thig 333; Thag-a 235; -pada gold foot yellow leg, a deer Ja iii.184.

Idg. *ĝhel, as in Lat. helvus yellow, holus cabbage; Sk. harita, hariṇa pale (yellow or green), hiri (yellow); Av. ƶairi; Gr. ξλόος green, ξλόη “greens” Ags. geolo = E. yellow. Also the words for “gold” hāṭaka & hiraṇya

Hariṇa

a deer Ja ii.26.

fr. hari

Harita

(adj.) 1. green, pale(-green), yellowish. It is expld by Dhpāla as nīla (e.g. Vv-a 197; Pv-a 158), and its connotation is not fixed ■ Vin i.137; DN i.148; SN i.5; Ja i.86, Ja i.87; Ja ii.26, Ja ii.110; Pv ii.1210 (bank of a pond); Vv 457 (˚patta, with green leaves, of a lotus) Ja ii.110 (of wheat); Snp-a 277 (˚haṃsa yellow, i.e. golden swan).

2. green, fresh Vin iii.16; AN v.234 (kusa) nt. (collectively) vegetables, greens Vin 266 (here applied to a field of fresh (i.e. green) wheat or cereal in general, as indicated by expln “haritaṃ nāma pubbaṇṇaṃ aparaṇṇaṃ” etc.); cp. haritapaṇṇa vegetables Snp-a 283.

3. haritā (f.) gold Thag 164 = Ja ii.334 (˚maya made of gold; but expld as “harita-maṇi-parikkhata” by C.).

4. Two cpds., rather odd in form, are haritāmātar “son of a green frog” Ja ii.238 (in verse) and haritupattā (bhūmi) “covered with green” MN i.343; Ja i.50, Ja i.399.

see hari for etym.

Haritaka

(nt.) a pot-herb DN ii.342.

harita + ka

Haritatta

(nt.) greenness Vin i.96.

abstr. fr. harita

Harītaka

yellow myrobalan (Terminalia citrina or chebula) Vin i.201, Vin i.206; Ja i.80; Ja iv.363; Mil 11; Dhs-a 320 (T. harīṭaka); Vv-a 5 (ṭ) ˚-kī (f.) the myrobalan tree Vin i.30; MN iii.127. pūtiharīṭakī Vism 40; ˚paṇṇika all kinds of greens Vin ii.267.

cp. Epic Sk. harītaka

Hareṇukā

(f.) a pea MN i.245; Ja v.405 (= aparaṇṇajā ti 406); vi.537; hareṇuka-yūsa pea-soup MN i.245 (one of the 4 kinds of soup).

cp. Sk. hareṇukā

Halaṃ

= hi alaṃ (q.v.); “halaṃ dāni pakāsituṃ” why should I preach? Vin i.5 = DN ii.36 = MN i.168 = SN i.136.

Halāhala1

a kind of deadly poison, usually as ˚visa Ja i.271, Ja i.273, Ja i.380; Ja iii.103 Ja v.465; Mil 256; Vism 57; Thag-a 287.

onomat.; cp. Sk. halāhala

Halāhala2

(nt.) uproar, tumult Ja i.47 sq.; Mil 122. Cp. kolāhala. Halidda & Haliddi

onomat.

Haliddā & Haliddī

(f.) turmeric. - 1. haliddā: Vin i.201; Ja v.89.

2. haliddī (haliddi˚ MN i.127; AN iii.230, AN iii.233; SN ii.101; Kp-a 64; ˚rāga like the colour of turmeric, or like the t. dye, i.e. not fast quickly changing & fading Ja iii.148 (of citta), cp. Ja iii.524 sq.

cp. Sk. haridrā

Hava

calling, challenge Dāvs ii.14.

cp. Vedc hava; or hvā to call

Have

(indecl.) indeed, certainly Vin i.2; DN ii.168; SN i.169; Snp 120, Snp 181, Snp 323, Snp 462; Dhp 104, Dhp 151, Dhp 177, Dhp 382; Ja i.31, Ja i.365; Dhp-a ii.228.

ha + ve

Havya

(nt.) an oblation, offering SN i.169; Snp 463 sq.; 490.

Vedic havya; fr. to sacrifice

Hasati & Hassati

1. to laugh, to be merry; pres hasati Bv i.28; Mvu 35, Mvu 59; hassati Snp 328, Snp 829; ppr hasamāna is preferable v.l. at Ja iv.281 for bhāsamāna aor. hasi Ja ii.103; Dhp-a ii.17 ■ Caus. hāseti [i.e. both fr. has & hṛṣ ] to cause to laugh; to please, to gladden Mvu 32, Mvu 46; Ja vi.217, Ja vi.304; Dhp-a ii.85; aor. hāsesi Vin iii.84; ppr. hāsayamana making merry Ja i.163, Ja i.209 Ja i.210; ger. hāsayitvāna Mil 1 ■ Caus. II. hāsāpeti Snp-a 401; Ja vi.311. Cp. pari˚, pa˚.

2. to neigh (of horses) Ja i.62; Ja vi.581 (strange aor. hasissiṃsu, expld as hasiṃsu by C.) ■ pp. hasita (& haṭṭha).;

owing to similarity of meaning the two roots has to laugh (Sk. hasati, pp. hasita) & hṛṣ to be excited (Sk. hṛṣyati, pp. hṛṣita & hṛṣṭa) have become mixed in Pāli (see also hāsa) ■ The usual (differentiated) correspondent of Sk. hṛṣyati is; haṃsati. The Dhtp (309) gives haṃsa (= harṣa) with tuṭṭhi, and (310 hasa with hasana

Hasana

(nt.) laughter Dhtp 31.

fr. hasati

Hasamānaka

(adj.) laughing, merry Mvu 35, Mvu 55; (nt.) as adv. ˚ṃ jokingly, for fun Vin i.185.

ppr. of hasati + ka

Hasita

laughing, merry; (nt.) laughter, mirth AN i.261; Pv iii.35 (= hasitavant hasita-mukhin C.); Mil 297 Bv i.28; Ja i.62 (? read hesita); iii.223; Vism 20.

-uppāda “genesis of mirth,” aesthetic faculty Tikp 276; see Cpd. 20 sq.

pp. of hasati, representing both Sk. hasita & hṛṣita

Hasula

(adj.) is rather doubtful (“of charming speech”? or “smiling”?). It occurs in (corrupted verse at Ja vi.503 = Ap 40 (& 307), which is to be read as “aḷāra-bhamukhā (or ˚pamhā) hasulā sussoññā tanu-majjhimā.” See Kern’s remarks at Toev. s. v hasula.

fr. has

Hassa

(adj.-n..) ridiculous Snp 328; (nt.) 1. laughter, mirth DN i.19; Snp 926; DN-a i.72; Pv-a 226; Dhp-a iii.258; Mil 266.

2. a joke, jest hassā pi, even in fun MN i.415; hassena pi the same Ja v.481; Mil 220; ˚vasena in jest Ja i.439.

fr. has, cp. Sk. hāsya

(indecl.) an exclamation of grief, alas! Thag-a 154 (Ap v.154); Vv-a 323, Vv-a 324.

Hāṭaka

(nt.) gold AN i.215; AN iv.255, AN iv.258, AN iv.262 (where T reads haṭaka, with sātaka as v.l. at all passages); Thig 382; Ja v.90.

cp. Sk. hāṭaka, connected with hari; cp. Goth. gulp = E. gold

Hātabba

at Ne 7, Ne 32 may be interpreted as grd. of to go (pres. jihīte). The C. expls it as “gametabba netabba” (i.e. to be understood). Doubtful.

Hātūna

see harati.

Hāna

(nt.) relinquishing, giving up, falling off; decrease, diminution, degradation AN ii.167 AN iii.349 sq. (opp. visesa), 427; Vism 11.

-gāmin going into disgrace or insignificance AN iii.349 sq. -bhāgiya conducive to relinquishing (of perversity and ignorance) DN iii.272 sq.; AN ii.167; Ne 77; Vism 85.

fr. , cp. Sk. hāna

Hāni

(f.) 1. decrease, loss AN ii.434; AN v.123 sq.; SN i.111; SN ii.206, SN ii.242; Ja i.338, Ja i.346.

2. falling off, waste Mvu 33, Mvu 103. Cp. saṃ˚, pari˚.

cp. Sk. hāni

Hāpana

at Ja v.433 is with Kern. Toev. i.132 (giving the passage without ref.) to be read as hāpaka “neglectful.

i.e. fr. hāpeti1

Hāpita

cultivated, attended, worshipped Ja iv.221; Ja v.158 (aggihuttaṃ ahāpitaṃ; C. wrongly hāpita); v.201 = vi.565. On all passages & their relation to Com. & BSk. see Kern,; Toev. i.132, 133.

pp. of hāpeti2

Hāpeti1

1. to neglect, omit AN iii.44 (ahāpayaṃ); iv.25; Dhp 166; Ja ii.437; Ja iv.182; ahāpetvā without omitting anything, i.e. fully AN ii.77; Ja iv.132; DN-a i.99. atthaṃ hāpeti to lose one’s advantage, to fail Snp 37; Ja i.251. 2. to postpone, delay (the performance of… ) Ja iii.448 Vism 129.

3. to cause to reduce, to beat down Ja i.124; Ja ii.31.

4. to be lost Snp 90 (? read hāyati ).

Caus. of to leave: see jahati; to which add fut. 2nd sg. hāhasi Ja iii.172; and aor. jahi Ja iv.314 Ja v.469

Hāpeti2

to sacrifice to worship, keep up, cultivate Ja v.195 (aggiṃ; = juhati C.). See Kern, Toev. i.133 ■ pp. hāpita.

in form = Sk. (Sūtras) hāvayati, Caus. of juhoti (see juhati), but in meaning = juhoti

Hāyati

is Pass. of jahati, in sense of “to be left behind,” as well as “to diminish, dwindle or waste away, disappear,” e.g. Nd i.147 (+ pari˚, antaradhāyati); Mil 297 (+ khīyati); ppr. hāyamāna Nd ii.543 Cp. hāyana.

Hāyana1

(nt.) diminution, decay, decrease DN i.54; DN-a i.165. Opposed to vaḍḍhana (increase) at MN i.518.

fr.

Hāyana2

(nt.) year; in saṭṭhi˚; 60 years old (of an elephant) MN i.229; Ja ii.343; Ja vi.448, Ja vi.581.

Vedic hāyana

Hāyin

(adj.) abandoning, leaving behind Snp 755 = Iti 62 (maccu˚).

fr.

Hāra

1. that which may be taken; grasping, taking; grasp, handful, booty. In cpd. ˚hārin taking all that can be taken, rapacious, ravaging Ja vi.581 (of an army; Kern, Toev. i.133 wrong in trsln “magnificent or something like it”). Of a river: tearing, rapid AN iii.64; AN iv.137; Vism 231.

2. category; name of the first sections of the Netti Pakaraṇa Ne 1 sq., 195.

fr. harati

Hāraka

(adj.) carrying, taking, getting; removing (f. hārikā) MN i.385; Ja i.134, Ja i.479; Pv ii.91 (dhana˚) Snp-a 259 (maṃsa˚) ■ mala˚; an instrument for removing ear-wax Ap 303; cp. haraṇī. sattha˚; a dagger carrier assassin Vin iii.73; SN iv.62. See also vallī.

fr. hāra

Hāri

(adj.) attractive, charming SN iv.316; Ja i.204 (˚sadda).

fr. hṛ; cp. Sk. hāri

Hārika

(adj.) carrying DN ii.348.

fr. hāra

Hārin

(adj.) 1. taking, carrying (f. hārinī ) Ja i.133; Pv ii.310 (nom. pl. f. hārī); Pv-a 113.

2 robbing Ja i.204 ■ Cp. hāra˚.

fr. hāra

Hāriya

(adj.) carrying Vv 509; Thag-a 200; Vv-a 212.

fr. hāra

Hālidda

(adj.) dyed with turmeric; ; undyed, i.e. not changing colour Ja iii.88; cp. iii.148.

fr. haliddā

Hāsa

laughter; mirth, joy Dhp 146; DN-a i.228 = Snp-a 155 (“āmeṇḍita”); Ja i.33 Ja ii.82; Ja v.112; Mil 390. See also ahāsa.

-kara giving pleasure, causing joy Mil 252. -kkhaya ceasing of laughter Dhtp 439 (in defn of gilāna, illness) -dhamma merriment, sporting Vin iv.112.

fr. has, cp. Sk. hāsa & harṣa

Hāsaniya

(adj.) giving joy or pleasure Mil 149.

fr. has or hṛṣ; cp. Sk. harṣanīya

Hāsu˚

(of uncertain origin) occurs with hāsa˚; in combn with ˚pañña and is customarily taken in meaning “of bright knowledge” (i.e. hāsa + paññā), wise, clever The syn. javana-pañña points to a meaning like “quick-witted,” thus implying “quick” also in hāsu. Kern Toev. i.134 puts forth the ingenious expln that hāsu is a “cockneyism” for āsu = Sk. āśu “quick,” which does not otherwise occur in Pāli. Thus his expln remains problematic ■ See e.g. MN iii.25; SN i.63; SN v.376; Ja iv.136; Ja vi.255, Ja vi.329 ■ Abstr. ˚tā wisdom SN v.412; AN i.45.

Hāseti

see hasati.

Hāhasi

is 2nd sg. fut. of jahati (e.g. Ja iii.172); in cpd. also ˚hāhisi: see vijahati.

Hāhiti

is fut. of harati.

Hi

(indecl.) for, because; indeed, surely Vin i.13; DN i.4; Dhp 5; Snp 21; Pv ii.118; ii.710 (= hi saddo avadhāraṇe Pv-a 103); Snp-a 377 (= hi-kāro nipāto padapūraṇa-matto); Pv-a 70, Pv-a 76. In verse Ja iv.495. h’etaṃ = hi etaṃ; no h’etaṃ not so DN i.3. hevaṃ = hi evaṃ.

cp. Sk. hi

Hiṃsati

1. to hurt, injure DN ii.243; SN i.70; Snp 515; Dhp 132; Pv ii.99 (= bādheti C.); iii.42 (= paribādheti C.); Snp-a 460.

2. to kill MN i.39; Dhp 270 ■ Caus. II. hiṃsāpeti Pv-a 123 ■ Cp vi˚.

hiṃs, Vedic hinasti & hiṃsanti

Hiṃsana

(nt.) striking, hurting, killing Mvu 15, Mvu 28.

fr. hiṃs

Hiṃsā

(f.) injury, killing Ja i.445; Dhtp 387. hiṃsa-mano wish to destroy Dhp 390. Opp. .

Vedic hiṃsā

Hiṃsitar

one who hurts DN ii.243; Ja iv.121.

n. ag. fr. hiṃsati

Hikkā

(f.) hiccup Sdhp 279.

cp. Epic Sk. hikkā, fr. hikk to sob; onomat.

Hikkāra

= hikkā, Vb-a 70.

hik + kāra

Hiṅkāra

(indecl.) an exclamation of surprise or wonder Ja vi.529 (C. hin ti kāraṇaṃ).

hiṃ = hi, + kāra, i.e. the syllable “hiṃ”

Hiṅgu

(nt.) the plant asafetida Vin i.201; Vv-a 186.

-cuṇṇa powder of asafetida Dhp-a iv.171. -rāja a sort of bird Ja vi.539.

Sk. hingu

Hiṅgulaka

vermilion; as jāti˚; Ja v.67. 416; Vv-a4, 168. Also as ˚ikā (f.) Vv-a 324.

cp. Sk. hingula, nt.

Hiṅguli

vermilion Mvu 27, Mvu 18.

Sk. hinguli

Hiṇḍati

to roam Dhtp 108 (= āhiṇḍana). See ā˚.

*Sk. hiṇḍ

Hita

(adj.) useful, suitable, beneficial, friendly AN i.58, AN i.155 sq.; AN ii.191; DN iii.211 sq.; Dhp 163-(m.) a friend, benefactor Mvu 3, Mvu 37 ■ (nt.) benefit blessing, good Vin i.4; Snp 233; AN ii.96 sq., 176; Iti 78; Snp-a 500 ■ Opp. ahita AN i.194; MN i.332.

-ānukampin friendly & compassionate DN i.4, DN i.227; Snp 693; Ja i.241, Ja i.244. -ūpacāra beneficial conduct saving goodness Ja i.172. -esin desiring another’s welfare, well-wishing MN ii.238; SN iv.359; SN v.157; ˚tā seeking another’s welfare, solicitude Dhs 1056; Dhs-a 362; Vv-a 260. -kara a benefactor Mvu 4, Mvu 65.

pp. of dahati1

Hinati

to send; only in cpd. pahiṇati.

hi, hinoti

Hintāla

a kind of palm, Phoenix paludosa Vin i.190; Dhp-a iii.451.

hiṃ + tāla

Hindagu

man, only found in the Niddesa in stock defn of jantu or nara; both spellings (with & without h) occur; see Nd i.3 = Nd ii.249.

probably for indagu, inda + gu (= ˚ga), i.e. sprung from Indra. The h perhaps fr. hindu. The spelling ; is a corrupt one

Hima

(adj.-n.) cold frosty Dhs-a 317 ■ (nt.) ice, snow Ja iii.55.

-pāta-samaya the season of snow-fall Vin i.31, Vin i.288; MN i.79; Ja i.390; Mil 396. -vāta a snow or ice wind Ja i.390.

cp. Vedic hima; Gr. ξεϊμα & ξειμών winter, ξιών snow; Av. ƶaya winter; Lat. hiems etc.

Himavant

(adj.) snowy Ja v.63 (= himayutta C.). (m.) Himavā the Himālaya: see Dict. of Names.

hima + vant

Hiyyo

(adv.) yesterday Vin i.28; Vin ii.77; Ja i.70, Ja i.237; Ja v.461 Ja vi.352, Ja vi.386; Mil 9. In sequence ajja hiyyo pare it seems to mean “to-morrow”; thus at Vin iv.63, Vin iv.69; Ja iv.481 (= sve C.). See para 2. c.

Vedic hyaḥ, Gr. ξχές, Lat. heri; Goth. gistradagis “to-morrow,” E. yester-day, Ger. gestern etc.

Hirañña

(nt.) gold Vin i.245, Vin i.276; Vin ii.159; AN iv.393; Snp 285, Snp 307, Snp 769; Nd ii.11; gold-piece SN i.89; Ja i.92. Often together with suvaṇṇa Vin i.150; DN ii.179; h˚-suvaṇṇaṃ gold & money MN iii.175; Ja i.341 ˚olokana (-kamma) valuation of gold Ja ii.272. Hiri & hiri

Vedic hiraṇya; see etym. under hari & cp. Av. ƶaranya gold

Hiri & hirī

(f.) sense of shame, bashfulness, shyness SN i.33; DN iii.212; AN i.51, AN i.95; AN iii.4 sq., 331, 352 iv.11, 29; Snp 77, Snp 253, Snp 719; Pp 71; Pv iv.73; Ja i.129 Ja i.207; Ne 50, Ne 82; Vism 8. Expld Pp 23 sq.; is one of the cāga-dhana’s: see cāga (cp. Jtm 311) ■ Often contrasted to & combined with; ottappa (cp. below) fear of sin: AN i.51; DN iii.284; SN ii.206; Iti 36; Ne 39; their difference is expld at Vism 464 (“kāya-duccarit’ ādīhi hiriyatī ti hiri; lajjāy’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; tehi yeva ottappatī ti ottappaṃ; pāpato ubbegass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ”); Ja i.129 sq.; Dhs-a 124.

-ottappa shame & fear of sin MN i.271; SN ii.220; Iti 34; AN ii.78; Ja i.127, Ja i.206; Tikp 61; Vism 221; Dhp-a iii.73 Frequently spelt otappa, e.g. Ja i.129; Iti 36. -kopīna a loin cloth MN i.10; Vism 31, Vism 195. -nisedha restrained by conscience SN i.7, SN i.168 = Snp 462; Dhp 143; Dhp-a iii.86 -bala the power of conscientiousness AN ii.150; Dhs 30 Dhs 101. -mana modest in heart, conscientious DN ii.78; MN i.43; SN ii.159.

cp. Vedic hrī

Hirika

(& hirīka) (adj.) having shame, only as-˚ in neg. ahirika shameless, unscrupulous AN i.51, AN i.85 AN ii.219; Pp 19; Iti 27 (˚īka); Ja i.258 (chinna˚ id.); nt ˚ṃ unscrupulousness Pp 19.

fr. hiri

Hirimant

(& hirīmant) (adj.) bashful, modest, shy DN iii.252, DN iii.282; SN ii.207 sq.; SN iv.243 sq.; AN ii.218 AN ii.227; AN iii.2 sq., 7 sq., 112; iv.2 sq., 38, 109; v.124, 148; Iti 97; Pp 23.

fr. hiri

Hiriya

(m. & nt.) shame, conscientiousness Vv-a 194.; Hiriyati (hiriyati)

fr. hiri

Hiriyati (hirīyati)

to blush, to be shy; to feel conscientious scruple, to be ashamed Pp 20, Pp 24; Mil 171; Vism 464 (hirīyati); Dhs-a 149.

see harāyati

Hirivera

(nt.) a kind of Andropogon (sort of perfume) Ja vi.537; DN-a i.81.

cp. Sk. hrīvera

Hilādati

to refresh oneself, to be glad Dhtp 152 (= sukha), 591 (id.).

hlād

Hīna

1. inferior, low; poor, miserable; vile, base, abject, contemptible, despicable Vin i.10; DN i.82 DN i.98; SN ii.154 (hīnaṃ dhātuṃ paṭicca uppajjati hīnā saññā); iii.47; iv.88, 309 (citta h. duggata); DN iii.106 DN iii.111 sq., 215 (dhātu); AN ii.154; AN iii.349 sq.; AN v.59 sq. Snp 799, Snp 903 sq.; Nd i.48, Nd i.103, Nd i.107, Nd i.146; Ja ii.6; Pv iv.127 (opp. paṇīta); Vv 2413 (= lāmaka Vv-a 116); Dhs 1025; Dhs-a 45; Mil 288; Vism 13; Dhp-a iii.163 ■ Often opposed to ukkaṭṭha (exalted, decent, noble), e.g. Vin iv.6; Ja i.20, Ja i.22; Ja iii.218; Vb-a 410; or in graduated sequence hīna (→ majjhima) → paṇīta (i.e. low, medium excellent), e.g. Vism 11, Vism 85 sq., 424, 473. See majjhima.

2. deprived of, wanting, lacking Snp 725; Iti 106 (ceto-vimutti˚); Pp 35hīnāya āvattati to turn to the lower, to give up orders, return to secular life Vin i.17; SN ii.231; SN iv.191; Ud 21; AN iii.393 sq. MN i.460; Snp p.92; Pp 66; hīnāya vattati id. Ja i.276 hīnāy’āvatta one who returns to the world MN i.460, MN i.462; SN ii.50; SN iv.103; Nd i.147.

-ādhimutta having low inclinations Ja iii.87; Pp 26 ˚ika id. SN ii.157; Iti 70. -kāya inferior assembly Vv-a 298 (here meaning Yamaloka); Pv-a 5. -jacca low-born, low-caste Ja ii.5; Ja iii.452; Ja v.19, Ja v.257. -vāda one whose doctrine is defective Snp 827; Nd i.167. -viriya lacking in energy Iti 116; Dhp-a i.75; Dhp-a ii.260.

pp. of jahati

Hīyati

is Pass. of jahati.

Hīra

1. a necklace (?) Vv-a 176.

2. a small piece, splinter Ja iv.30 (sakalika˚); hīrahīraṃ karoti to cut to pieces, to chop up Ja i.9; Dhp-a i.224 (+ khaṇḍâkhaṇḍaṃ).

cp. late Sk. hīra

Hīraka

a splinter; tāla˚ “palm-splinter,” a name for a class of worms Vism 258.

hīra + ka, cp. lexic. Sk. hīraka “diamond”

Hīrati

is Pass. of harati.

Hīḷana

(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) scorn(ing), disdain, contempt Mil 357; DN-a i.276 (of part. “re”: hīlana-vasena āmantanaṃ); as ˚ā at Vb 353 (+ ohīḷanā); Vb-a 486.

fr. hīḍ

Hīḷita

despised, looked down upon, scorned Vin iv.6; Mil 227, Mil 251; Vism 424 (+ ohīḷita oññāta etc.); DN-a i.256.

pp. of hīḷeti

Hīḷeti

1. to be vexed, to grieve SN i.308; to vex, grieve Vv 8446. 2. to scorn, disdain, to feel contempt for, despise DN ii.275; Snp 713 (appaṃ dānaṃ na hīḷeyya); Ja ii.258; DN-a i.256 (= vambheti); Dhp-a iv.97; Mil 169 (+ garahati) ■ pp. hīḷita.

Vedic hīḍ or hel to be hostile; cp. Av. ƶēaša awful; Goth. us-geisnan to be terrified. Connected also with hiṃsati ■ The Dhtp (637) defines by “nindā”

Huṃ

(indecl.) the sound “huṃ” an utterance of discontent or refusal Dhp-a iii.108 = Vv-a 77; Vism 96. Cp. haṃ huṅkāra growling, grumbling Vism 105. huṅkaroti to grumble Dhp-a i.173. huṅkaraṇa = ˚kāra Dhp-a i.173 sq See also huhuṅka.

Hukku

the sound uttered by a jackal Ja iii.113.

Huta

sacrificed, worshipped, offered Vin i.36 = Ja i.83; DN i.55; Ja i.83 (nt. “oblation”); Vv 3426 (su˚, + sudinna, suyiṭṭha); Pp 21; Dhs 1215; DN-a i.165; Dhp-a ii.234.

-āsana [cp. Sk. hutāśana] the fire, lit. “oblation-eater” Dāvs ii.43; Vism 171 (= aggi).

pp. of juhati

Hutta

(nt.) sacrifice: see aggi˚.

cp. Vedic hotra

Hunitabba

is grd. of juhati “to be sacrificed,” or “venerable” Vism 219 (= āhuneyya).

Hupeyya

“it may be” Vin i.8; = huveyya MN i.171. See bhavati.

Huraṃ

(adv.) there, in the other world, in another existence. As prep. with acc. “on the other side of,” i.e. before Snp 1084; Nd i.109; usually in connection idha vā huraṃ vā in this world or the other SN i.12; Dhp 20; Snp 224 = Ja i.96; hurāhuraṃ from existence to existence Dhp 334; Thag 399; Vism 107; Dhp-a iv.43-The expln by Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 105 may be discarded as improbable.

of uncertain origin

Huhuṅka

(adj.) saying “huṃ, huṃ,” i.e. grumbly, rough; ˚jātika one who has a grumbly nature, said of the brahmins Vin i.2; Ud 3 (“proud of his caste Seidenstūcker). nihuhuṅka (= nis + h.) not grumbly (or proud), gentle Vin i.3; Ud 3. Thus also Kern Toev. i.137; differently Hardy in J.P.T.S. 1901, 42 (“uttering & putting confidence into the word huṃ” Bdhgh (Vin i.362) says: “diṭṭha-mangaliko mānavasena kodhavasena ca huhun ti karonto vicarati.”

fr. huṃ

Hūti

(f.) calling, challenging SN i.208.

fr. hū, hvā “to call,” cp. avhayati

He

(indecl.) a vocative (exclam.) particle “eh,” “here,” hey MN i.125, MN i.126 (+ je); Dhp-a i.176 (double).

Heṭṭhato

(adv.) below, from below Pts i.84; Dhs 1282, Dhs 1284, Mvu 5, Mvu 64.

fr. heṭṭhā

Heṭṭhā

(indecl.) down, below, underneath Vin i.15; DN i.198; Iti 114; Ja i.71; Vv-a 78; Pv-a 113. As prep. with gen (abl.) or cpd. “under” Ja i.176; Ja ii.103; lower in the manuscript, i.e. before, above Ja i.137, Ja i.206, Ja i.350; Vv-a 203; lower, farther on Ja i.235.

-āsana a lower seat Ja i.176. -nāsika-(sota) the lower nostril Ja i.164. -bhāga lower part Ja i.209, Ja i.484. -mañce underneath the bed Ja i.197 (˚mañcato from under the bed); ii.275, 419; iv.365. -vāta the wind below, a wind blowing underneath Ja i.481. -sīsaka head downwards Ja iii.13.

cp. Vedic adhastāt = adhaḥ + abl. suff. ˚tāt

Heṭṭhima

(adj.) lower, lowest Vin iv.168; Dhs 1016; Tikp 41; Pv-a 281; Sdhp 238, Sdhp 240, Sdhp 256. ˚tala the lowest level Ja i.202.

compar ■ superl. formation fr. heṭṭhā

Heṭhaka

(adj.-n.) one who harasses, a robber Ja iv.495, Ja iv.498. Cp. vi˚.

fr. heṭheti

Heṭhanā

(f.) harassing DN ii.243; Vb-a 75.

fr. heṭheti

Heṭheti

to harass, worry, injure Ja iv.446, Ja iv.471; Pv iii.52 (= bādheti Pv-a 198) ppr. a-heṭhayaṃ Dhp 49; SN i.21. med. a-heṭhayāna SN i.7; SN iv.179; ger. heṭhayitvāna Ja iii.480 ■ pp. heṭhayita Ja iv.447.

Vedic heḍ = hel or hīḍ (see hīḷeti)

Hetaṃ

= hi etaṃ.

Hetu

1. cause, reason, condition SN i.134; AN iii.440 sq.; Dhs 595, Dhs 1053; Vism 450 Tikp 11, 233, 239. In the older use paccaya and hetu are almost identical as synonyms, e.g. n’atthi hetu n’atthi paccayo DN i.53; aṭṭha hetū aṭṭha paccayā DN iii.284 sq.; cp. SN iii.69 sq.; DN ii.107; MN i.407; AN i.55 sq., 66, 200; iv.151 sq.; but later they were differentiated (see Mrs. Rh. D., Tikp introd. p. xi. sq.). The diff. between the two is expld e.g. at Ne 78 sq.; Dhs-a 303 ■ There are a number of other terms, with which hetu is often combd, apparently without distinction in meaning, e.g. hetu paccaya kāraṇa Nd ii.617 (s. v. sankhā); mūla h. nidāna sambhava pabhava samuṭṭhāna āhāra ārammaṇa paccaya samudaya frequent in the Niddesa (see Nd ii.p. 231, s. v. mūla). In the Abhidhamma we find hetu as “moral condition referring to the 6 mūlas or bases of good & bad kamma viz.; lobha, dosa, moha and their opposites: Dhs 1053 sq. Kv 532 sq ■ Four kinds of hetu are distinguished at Dhs-a 303 = Vb-a 402, viz. hetu˚, paccaya˚, uttama˚ sādhāraṇa˚. Another 4 at Tikp 27, viz. kusala˚ akusala˚, vipāka˚, kiriya˚, and 9 at Tikp 252, viz kusala˚, akusala˚, avyākata˚, in 3X3 constellations (cp Dhs-a 303) ■ On term in detail see Cpd. 279 sq.; Dhs trsln §§ 1053, 1075 ■ abl. hetuso from or by way of (its) cause SN v.304; AN iii.417 ■ acc. hetu (-˚) (elliptically as adv.) on account of, for the sake of (with gen.) e.g. dāsa-kammakara-porisassa hetu MN ii.187; kissa hetu why? AN iii.303; AN iv.393; Snp 1131; Pv ii.81 (= kiṃ nimittaṃ Pv-a 106); pubbe kata˚; by reason (or in consequence) of what was formerly done AN i.173 sq.; dhana˚ for the sake of gain Snp 122.

2. suitability for the attainment of Arahantship, one of the 8 conditions precedent to becoming a Buddha Bv ii.59 = Ja i.14, Ja i.44. 3. logic Mil 3.

-paccaya the moral causal relation, the first of the 24 Paccayas in the Paṭṭhāna Tikp 1 sq., 23 sq., 60 sq., 287 320; Dukp 8, 41 sq.; Vism 532; Vb-a 174. -pabhava arising from a cause, conditioned Vin i.40; Dhp-a i.92 -vāda the theory of cause, as adj. “proclaimer of a cause,” name of a sect MN i.409; opp. ahetu-vāda “denier of a cause” (also a sect) MN i.408; ahetu-vādin id. Ja v.228 Ja v.241 (= Jtm 149).

Vedic hetu, fr. hi to impel

Hetuka

(adj.) (-˚) connected with a cause, causing or caused, conditioned by, consisting in Mvu 1, Mvu 45 (maṇi-pallanka˚); Dhs 1009 (pahātabba˚); Vb-a 17 (du˚, ti˚). usually as sa˚; and ; (with & without a moral condition) AN i.82; Vism 454 sq.; Dukp 24 sq sa˚; Dhs 1073 (trsln “having root-conditions as concomitants”); Kv 533 (“accompanied by moral conditions”); ; SN iii.210 (˚vāda, as a “diṭṭhi”); Vism 450.

fr. hetu

Hetutta

(nt.) reason, consequence; abl. in consequence of (-˚) Vism 424 (diṭṭhivisuddhi˚).

abstr. formation fr. hetu

Hetuye

see bhavati.

Hema

(nt.) gold DN ii.187; Ja vi.574.

-jāla golden netting (as cover of chariots etc.) AN iv.393; Vv 351, 362 (˚ka). -vaṇṇa golden-coloured DN ii.134 Thig 333; Thag-a 235; Dhs-a 317.

cp. Epic Sk. heman

Hemanta

winter AN iv.138; Ja i.86; Mil 274.

hema(= hima) + anta

Hemantika

(adj.) destined for the winter, wintry, icy cold Vin i.15, Vin i.31 (rattiyo), 288; MN i.79; SN v.51; AN iv.127; Vism 73.

fr. hemanta

Hemavataka

(adj.) belonging to, living in the Himālaya Ja i.506; Ja iv.374, Ja iv.437; ˚vatika id. Dpvs v.54. Herannika (& aka);

fr. himavant

Heraññika (& ˚aka)

goldsmith (? for which suvaṇṇakāra!), banker, money-changer Vism 515 = Vb-a 91; Ja i.369; Ja iii.193; DN-a i.315; Mil 331 (goldsmith?).

-phalaka the bench (i.e. table, counter) of a money changer or banker Vism 437 = Vb-a 115; Ja ii.429 Ja iii.193 sq.

fr. hirañña, cp. BSk. hairaṇyika Divy 501; Mvu iii.443

Hevaṃ

see hi.

Hesati

to neigh Ja i.51, Ja i.62 (here hasati ); v.304 (T. siṃsati for hiṃsati; C. expls hiṃsati as “hessati,” cp. abhihiṃsanā for ˚hesanā). pp. hesita.

both heṣ (Vedic) & hreṣ (Epic Sk.); in Pāli confused with hṛṣ (hasati): see hasati2

Hesā

(f.) neighing, neigh Dāvs v.56.

fr. hesati

Hesita

(nt.) neighing Ja i.62 (here as hasita ); Mvu 23, Mvu 72.

pp. of hesati

Hessati

is: 1. Fut. of bhavati, e.g. Ja iii.279.

2. Fut. of jahati, e.g. Ja iv.415; Ja vi.441.

Hehiti

is Fut. 3rd sg. of bhavati, e.g. Bv ii.10 = Ja i.4 (v. 20).

Hoti, hotabba

etc. see bhavati.

Hotta

(nt.) (function of) offering; aggi˚; the sacrificial fire Snp-a 436 (v.l. BB ˚hutta).

Vedic hotra

Homa

(m. & nt.) oblation DN i.9; DN-a i.93 (lohita˚).

fr.; hu, juhati

Horāpāṭhaka

an astrologer Mvu 35, Mvu 71.

late Sk. horā “hour” (in astrol. literature, fr. Gr. ω ̔́ρα: cp. Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Lit. iii.569 sq.) + pāṭhaka, i.e. expert